GREEK- ENGLISH LEXICON
OF THE
NEW TESTAMENT
άρ^ ίταιδεύσεω? rj των ονοα,άτων «πίσκεψις.
Epictetus, Diss. L 17, 12.
maius quiddam atque divinius est sermo humanus quam quod totum mutis
litterarum figuris comprehendi queat.
Hermann, Opuscc. iii. 253.
TA ΡΗΜΑΤΑ A ΕΓΩ ΛΕΛΑΛΗΚΑ YMIN ΠΝΕΥΜΑ ΕΣΤΙΝ ΚΑΙ ISM ΕΖΤΙΝ
GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON
OF THE
NEW TESTAMENT
BEING
®rimm'0 tDilke'e Clauis Νουί @:e0tamenti
TRANSLATED REVISED AND ENLARGED
BY
JOSEPH HENRY /^HAYER, D.D.
HON. LITT.D. DUBLIN
BDSSET PBOFESSOB OF NEW TESTAMENT CRITICISM AND INTERPBETATION IH
THE DIVINITT SCHOOL OF HASVASD ΠΝΙΤΕΒβΙΤΤ
CORRECTED EDITION
NEW λ'ΟΕΚ • CINX'INNATI • CHICAGO
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
Copyright, 1886, by Harper & Βεοιήεηβ.
All rights reserved.
Copyright, 1889, by Harprr & ΒβοϊΗΕΕΛ
All rights reserved.
Ί0)
PREFACE.
'~pV3WAEDS the close of the year 1862, the "Amoldische Buchhandlung" in Leipzig
JL published the First Part of a Greek-Latin Lexicon of the New Testament, prepared,
upon the basis of the " Clavis Novi Testamenti Philologica " of C. G. Wilke (second edition,
2 vols. 1851), by Professor C. L. Wilibaid Geimji of Jena. In his Prospectus Professor
Grimm announced it as his purpose not only (in accordance with the improvements in classical
lexicography embodied in the Paris edition of Stephen's Thesaurus and in the fifth edition of
Passow's Dictionary edited by Rost and his coadjutors) to exhibit the historical growth of a
word's significations and accordingly in selecting his vouchers for New Testament usage to
show at what time and in what class of writers a given word became current, but also duly
to notice the usage of the Septuagint and of the Old Testament Apocrypha, and especially to
produce a Lexicon which should correspond to the present condition of textual criticism, of
exegesis, and of biblical theology. He devoted more than seven years to his task. The
successive Parts of his work received, as they appeared, the outspoken commendation of
scholars diverging as widely in their views as Hupfeld and Hengstenberg ; and since its
completion in 1868 it has been generally acknowledged to be by far the best Lexicon of the
New Testament extant.
An arrangement was early made with Professor Grimm and his publisher to reproduce
the book in English, and an announcement of the same was given in the Bibliotheca Sacra for
October 1864 (p. 886). The work of translating was promptly begun ; but it was protracted by
engrossing professional duties, and in particular by the necessity — as it seemed — of preparing
the authorized translation of Liinemann's edition of Winer's New Testament Grammar, which
was followed by a translation of the New Testament Grammar of Alexander Buttmann.
Meantime a new edition of Professor Grimm's work was called for. To the typogi-aphical
accuracy of this edition liberal contributions were made from this side the water. It appeared
in its completed form in 1879. " Admirable ", " unequalled ", " invaluable ", are some of the
epithets it elicited from eminent judges in England; while as representing the estimate of
the book by competent critics in (Jermany a few sentences may be quoted from Professor
Schurer's review of it in the Theologische Literatnrzeitung for January 5, 1878 : " The use oi
Professor Grimm's book for years has convinced me that it is not only unquestionably the
best among existing New Testament Lexicons, but that, apart from all comparisons, it is a work
ντ PREFACE.
of the highest intrinsic merit, and one which is admirably adapted to initiate a learner into an
acquaintance with the language of the New Testament. It ought to be regarded by every
student as one of the first and most necessary requisites for the study of the New Testament,
and consequently for the study of Theology in general."
Both Professor Grimm and his publisher courteously gave me permission to make such
changes in his work as might in my judgment the better ada^jt it to the needs of English-
speaking students. But the emphatic commendation it called out from all quarters, in a
strain similar to the specimens just given, determined me to dismiss the thought of issuing
a new book prepared on my predecessor's as a basis, and — alike in justice to him and for
the satisfaction of students — to reproduce his second edition in its integrity (with only the
silent correction of obvious oversights), and to introduce my additions in such a form as should
render them distinguishable at once from Professor Grimm's work. (See [] in the list of
"Explanations and Abbreviations" given below.) This decision has occasionally imposed on
me some reserve and entailed some embarrassments. But notwithstanding all minor draw-
backs the procedure will, I am sure, commend itself in the end, not only on the score of
justice to the independent claims and responsibility of both authors, but also on account of
the increased assurance (or, at least, the broader outlook) thus afforded the student respect-
ing debatable matters, — whether of philology, of criticism, or of interpretation.
Som.e of the leading objects with the editor in his work of revision were stated in
connection with a few specimen pages privately printed and circulated in 1881, and may here
be repeated in substance as follows: to verify all references (biblical, classical, and — so far
as practicable — modern) ; to note more generally the extra-biblical usage of words ; to give
the derivation of words in cases where it is agreed upon by the best etymologists and is of
interest to the general student ; to render complete the enumeration of (rej)resentative) verbal
forms actually found in the New Testament (and exclude all others) ; to append to every verb
a list of those of its compounds which occur in the Greek Testament ; to supply the New
Testament passages accidentally omitted in words marked at the end with an asterisk ; to note
more fully the variations in the Greek text of current editions ; to introduce brief discussions
of New Testament synonyms ; to give the more noteworthy renderings not only of the
" Authorized Version " but also of the Revised New Testament ; to multiply cross references ;
references to grammatical works, both sacred (Winer, Buttmann, Green, etc.) and classical
(Kiihner, Kriiger, Jelf, Donaldson, Goodwin, etc.) ; also to the best English and American
Commentaries (Lightfoot, Ellicott, Westcott, Alford, Morison, Beet, Hackett, Alexander, The
Speaker's Commentary, The New Testament Commentary, etc.), as well as to the latest
exegetical works that have appeared on the Continent (Weiss, Heinrici, Keil, Godet, Oltramare,
etc.) ; and to the recent Bible Dictionaries and Cyclopsedias (Smith, Alexander's Kitto,
McClintock and Strong, the completed Riehm, the new Herzog, etc.), besides the various
Lives of Christ and of the Apostle Paul.
Respecting a few of these specifications an additional remark or two may be in place :
One of the most prominent and persistent embarrassments encountered by the New
Testament lexicographer is occasioned by the diversity of readings in the current editions of
the Greek text. A slight change in the form or even in the punctuation of a passage may
PREFACE. νπ
entail a change in its construction, and consequently in its classification in the Lexicon. In
the absence of an acknowledged consensus of scholars in favor of any one of the extant
printed texts to the exclusion of its rivals, it is incumbent on any Lexicon which aspires after
general currency to reckon alike with them all. Professor Grimm originally took account of
the text of the ' Receptus ', together with that of Griesbach, of Lachmann, and of Tischendorf.
In his secou>I edition, he made occasional reference also to the readings of Tregelles. In the
present work not only have the textual statements of Grimm's second edition undergone
thorough revision (see, for example, " Griesbach " in the list of " Explanations and Abbrevia-
tions "), but the readings (whether in the text or the margin) of the editions of Tregelles and
of Westcott and Hort have also been carefully noted.
Again : the frequent reference, in the discussion of synonymous terms, to the distinctions
holding in classic usage (as they axe laid down by Schmidt in his voluminous work) must not
be regarded as designed to modify the definitions given in the several articles. On the
contrary, the exposition of classic usage is often intended merely to serve as a standard of
comparison by which the direction and degree of a word's change in meaning can be measured.
When so employed, the information given will often start suggestions alike interesting and
instructive.
On points of etymology the statements of Professor Grimm have been allowed to stand,
although, in form at least, they often fail to accord with modern philological methods. But
they have been supplemented by references to the works of Curtius and Pick, or even more
frequently, perhaps, to the Etymological Dictionary of Vanicek, as the most compendious
digest of the views of specialists. The meaning of radical words and of the component parts
of compounds is added, except when it is indubitably suggested by the derivative, or when
such words may be found in their proper place in the Lexicon.
The nature and use of the New Testament writings require that the lexicographer should
not be hampered by a too rigid adherence to the rules of scientific lexicography. A student
often wants to know not so much the inherent meaning of a word as the particular sense it
bears in a given context or discussion : — or, to state the same truth from another point of
view, the lexicographer often cannot assign a particular New Testament reference to one or
another of the acknowledged significations of a word without indicating his exposition of the
passage in which the reference occurs. In such a case he is compelled to assume, at least to
some extent, the functions of the exegete, although he can and should refrain from rehearsing
the general arguments which support the interpretation adopted, as well as from arraying the
objections to opposing interpretations.
Professor Grimm, in his Preface, with reason calls attention to the labor he has expended
upon the explanation of doctrinal terms, while yet guarding himself against encroaching upon
the province of the dogmatic theologian. In this particular the editor has endeavored to enter
into his labors. Any one wlio consults such articles as αΙών, αιώνιο?, βασιλύα τοΐ θΐοΰ etc.,
Succuo; and its cognates, Βόξα, έλπί?. ζ^η, θάνατος, θΐός, κόσμος, κιριος, ττίστις, m-cv^io, σαρξ, σοφία, σω^ω
and its cognates, ν16<; τον άνθρ^τσυ, υίο? του θεον. Χριστός, and the like, will find, it is believed, all
the materials needed for a complete exposition of the biblical contents of those terms. On the
comparatively few points respecting which doctrinal opinions still differ, references have been
yni PEEFACE.
added to representative discussions on both sides, or to authors whose views may be regarded
as supplemeating or correcting those of Professor Grimm.
Convenience often prescribes that the archaeological or historical facts requisite to the
understanding of a passage be given the student on the spot, even though he be referred for
fuller information to the works specially devoted to such topics. In this particular, too, the
editor has been guided by the example of his predecessor ; yet with the constant exercise of
self-restraint lest the book be encumbered with unnecessary material, and be robbed of that
succinctness which is one of the distinctive excellences of the original.
In making his supplementary references and remarks the editor has been governed at
different times by different considerations, corresponding to the different classes for whose
use the Lexicon is designed. Primarily, indeed, it is intended to satisfy the needs and to
guide the researches of the average student; although the specialist will often find it
serviceable, and on the other hand the beginner will find that he has not been forgotten.
Accordingly, a caveat must be entered against the hasty inference that the mention of a
different interpretation from that given by Professor Grimm always and of necessity implies
dissent from him. It may be intended merely to inform the student that the meaning of the
passage is still in debate. And the particular works selected for reference have been chosen —
now because they seem best suited to supplement the statements or references of the origi-
nal ; now because they furnish the most copious references to other discussions of the same
topic ; now because they are familiar works or those to which a student can readily get access ;
now, again, because unfamiliar and likely otherwise to escape him altogether.
It is in deference, also, to the wants of the ordinary student that the references to
grammatical works — particularly Winer and Buttmann — have been greatly multiplied. The
expert can easily train his eye to run over them ; and yet even for him they may have their
use, not only as giving him the opinion of eminent philologists on a passage in question, but
also as continually recalling his attention to those philological considerations on which the
decision of exegetical questions must mainly rest.
Moreover, in the case of a literature so limited in compass as the New Testament, it
seems undesirable that even a beginner should be subjected to the inconvenience, expense, and
especially the loss of facility, incident to a change of text-books. He will accordingly find
that not only have his wants been heeded in the body of the Lexicon, but that at the close of
the Appendix a list of verbal forms has been added especially for his benefit. The other
portions of the Appendix will furnish students interested in the history of the New Testament
vocabulary, or investigating questions — whether of criticism, authorship, or biblical theology
— which involve its word-lists, with fuller and more trustworthy collections than can be found
elsewhere.
Should I attempt, in conclusion, to record the names of all those who during the many
years in which this work has been preparing have encouraged or assisted me by word or pen,
by counsel or book, the list would be a long one. Express acknowledgments, however, must Oe
made to George B. Jeavett, D.D., of Salem and to Professor W. W. Eato.v now of Atiddlebury
College, Vermont. The former has verified and re-veritied all the biblical and classical
PREFACE. IX
references, besides noting in the main the various readings of the critical texts, and rendering
valuable aid in conectiug many of the proofs ; the latter has gathered the passages omitted
from words marked with a final asterisk, completed and corrected the enumeration of verbal
forms, catalogued the compound verbs, had an eye to matters of etymology and accentuation,
and in many other particulars given the work the benefit of his conscientious and scholarly
labor. To these names one other would be added were it longer written on earth. Had the
lamented Dr. Abbot been spared to make good his generous offer to read the final proofs, every
user of the book would doubtless have had occasion to thank him. He did, however, go
through the manuscript and add with his own hand the variant verse-notation, id accordance
with the results of investigation subsequently given to the learned world in his Excursus on
the subject published in the First Part of the Prolegomena to Tischendorf's Editio Oetava
Critica Major.
To Dr. C-iSPAR Rexe Geegort of Leipzig (now Professor-elect at Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, Baltimore) my thanks are due for the privilege of using the sheets of the Prolegomena
;ust named in advance of their publication ; and to the Delegates of the Clarendon Press,
Oxford, for a similar courtesy in the case of the Seventh Edition of Liddell and Scott's
Lexicon.
No one can have a keener sense than the editor has of the shortcomings of the present
volume. But he is convinced that whatever supersedes it must be the joint product of several
laborers, having at their command larger resources than he has enjoyed, and ampler leisure
than falls to the lot of the average teacher. Meantime, may the present work so approve itself
to students of the Sacred Volume as to enlist their co-operation with him in ridding it of every
remaining blemish
— 'va 6 Xoyog toC κυρίον τρε)(β καΧ ζοξάζηταΐΜ
J. a THAYER.
Cambridge, Massachusetts.
Dec. 25, 1SS5.
In issuing this " Corrected Edition " opportunity has been taken not only to revise the
supplementary pages (725 sq.), but to add in the body of the work (as circumstances per-
mitted) an occasional reference to special monographs on Biblical topics which have been
published during the last three years, as well as to the Fourth Volume of Schmidt's S3-non3'mik
(18S6), and also to works \vliich (like Meisterhans) have appeared in an improved edition.
The Third edition (1888) of Grimm, however, has yielded little new material; and Dr. Hatch's
" Essays in Biblical Greek " comes to hand too late to permit references to its valuable dis-
cussions of words to be inserted.
To the correspondents, both in England and this country, who have called my attention to
errata, I beg to express my thanks ; and I would earnestly ask all who use the book to send
me similar favors in time to come : — UTcAts oiScv οϋδο-ός μίτρον.
April 10, 1889.
LIST OF ANCIENT AUTHORS
QUOTED OR REFERRED TO IN THE LEXICON.
N. B. In the preparation of this list, free use has been made of the lists in the Lexicons of Llddell and Scott and of Sophocles, also
ef Freuini's Triennlam Philologicam (1S74) vols i. and ii., of Smith's Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography, of Smith and Wace'»
IMctionary of Christian Biography, of Engelmann's Bibliotheca Scriptoram Classicorum (8th ed. 1880), and of other current works of
reference. An asterisk (•) before a date denotes birth, an obelisk it) death.
B.O A.D.
Achilles Tatius 500 ?
Acts of Paul and Thecla, of Pilate, of
Thomas, of Peter and Paul, of Barna-
bas, etc., at the earliest from ... 2d cent, on
Aelian . c. 180
Aeschixes 345
Aeschylus *525, t456
Aesop 1 570
Aetius . . c. 500
Agatharchides 117»
Alcaeus Mttilenaeus 610
Alciphron• 200?
Alcmas 610
Alexander Aphrodisiensis . . . 200
Alexis 350
Ambrose, Bp. of Milan 374
Ammianus Marcellinus .... t c. 400
Ammonius, the grammarian .... 390
Asacreon 5.30
Anaxandrides 350
axaximander 580
asdocides ... 405
Ajjtiphaxes 380
AxTiPHON ... 412
Antokinus, M. Aurelius .... tl80
Apollodorcs of Athena 140
Apollonius Dtscolus 140
Apollonius Rbodics 200
Appian 150
Appcleics 160
Aqcila (translator of the O. T.) . . {^ Si^f"
Aratus 270
Abchilochus 700
Archimedes, the mathematician . . 2.50
Archytas c. 400
< Bat the current Fables are not his; on the History of Greek
Fable, Bee Rutherford, Babrius. Introd. ch. ii.
' Only a few fragments of the odes ascribed to him are genain«.
B.C.
Aretaeus
Aristaexetus
Aristeas' 270
Aristides, p. Aelics
Aristophanes '444, t380
Aristophaxes, the grammarian . . . 200
Aristotle '384, T322
Arriax (pupil and friend of Epictetus)
Artemidorcs Daldianus (oneiro-
eritica)
Athaxasius
Athexaeus, the grammarian . . .
Athexagoras of Athens
AiGUSTixE, Bp. of Hippo
Alsonics, Decimcs Magxcs . . .
Babrics (see Rutherford, Babrius, Intr.
ch. i.) (some say 50 ■? )
Barxabas, Epistle written ....
Bartich, Apocryphal Book of ... .
Basilica, the -
Basil the Great, Bp. of Csesarea .
Basil of Seleucia
Bel and the Drai/on 2d cent. ?
Biox 200
Caesar, Gaids JcLiDS . . tMarchlS, 44
Callimachus 260
Canons and Constitutions, Apostolic . .
Capitolixus, Julius (one of the "Hist.
August, scriptures sex ") ....
Cebes 399
Cedrexus
A.D.
80?
450?
160
•c. 100
160
1373
228
177?
t430
tc. 390
C.225
c. 100?
C 75?
C.900
t379
450
3dud 4tb ΐ
c. 310
1050
' But his letter is spurious; see Body, De BibL text. orig. L 1.;
A Kurz, Arist. ep. etc (Bern 1S72).
- The law-book of the Byzantine Empire, founded upon the work
of Justinian and consisting of sixty books. It was begun under
the emperor Ba.«il of Macedonia (t886), completed under his son
Leo. and revised in 945 under Constantise Porpbyrogenitue: (ed.
Heimbach, 6 vols. 1833-70).
ANCIENT Authors.
XII
Ancient Authobs.
B.O.
Celsus, a. Cornelius, the medical
wT-iter
Chares 320
Charitos
CiiiiYsiPPns of Tyana (iu Atheuaeus)
CiiRVSosTOM, Dio, the orator, see Dio Chrys.
Chrysostom, John, Bp. of Coiistau-
tinople
Cicero tDec. 7,43
Clemens Alexandrinus
Clkmens KoMAJiOS, Epistle written .
Clkomedes
Columella
Constantinds Poephtrogenitus,
emperor from
Coiistituliones apostolicae
CratinuS t423
Critias 411
Ctesias 401
CURTICS
Cyprian
Cyril of Alexandria
Cyril o£ Jerusalem
Democritus 430
Demosthenes *385, t322
Dexippus, the historian
DiDYMUs of Alexandria
Dio Cassios
Dio Chrysostom
DiocLES 470
DlODORUS SiCuLUS 40
Diogenes Laurtius
DioGNETDS, Epistle to
DioNYsics Pseudo-Areopagita . .
DiONYSiuS of Halicarnassus .... 30
DiONY'Sins Periegetes
DiOSCORIDES
DiPHiLcs 300
Ecclesiaslicus (Wisdom of Jesus the
Son of Sirach; Grk. trans.) . . .c. 132?
EsNIDS tl69
Enoch, Book of 2d cent, on
Ephrem Syrds . .
Epicharmus 480
Epictetus
Epicurds *342, t270
Epimenides 600
Epiphanius, Bp. of Salamis ....
Eratosthenes t c. 196
Esdrns, First Boot o/( Vulgate Third) 1st cent.?
Esdras, Secoud Boot o/"( Vulgate Fourth)
Esther, Additions to 2d cent. ?
Eti/mologicum Maijnum
EuDCLuS 350
Euclid 300
EupOLis 429
Euripides '480, t406
EusEBius, Bp. of Caesarea* ....
Eustathius of Constantinople, gram
marian
20
450?
1
t407
200
93-97
100?
50
911-959
3d and 4tb ooaL
50
t257
t444
t386
C.270
C.395
200
100
C.200
2d or 3d cent
500?
300?
100?
C.375
100
T403
Istcent ?
1000?
to. 340
1160
430
510
390
500
432
250
' CaUe>< Pamphlll (as friend of the mart;r PampMlos).
EuTHYMios ZiGABENDS 0Γ Zigadenus
(Zygadenus)
Florus, Julius
Galen
Gellius, Aulus (author of Noctes
Atticae)
Genesius
Ueopunica (20 bks. on agriculture com-
piled by Cassianus Bassus) ....
Geujianus of Constantinople, the
younger
Gorgias of Leontini
Gregory of Naziauzus
Gregory' of Nyssa
Harpocration (lexicon to the Ten
Attic ( )rators)
Hecataeus
Hegesippus (quoted in Eusebius) . .
liELioDORUs, Bp. of Tricca iu Tliessaly
Heraclides Ponticds (but the Alleg.
Homer, are spurious)
IIeraclitus
IIermas
IIermippds
Hermogenes
Hero Alexandrinus
Herodian, the grammarian ....
Herodian, the historian
Herodotus '484, t408
Hesiod 850?
Hesychids of Alexandria, the lexicog-
rapher
HiEROCLES
IIiERONY'sius, see Jerome.
HlMERIUS
Hippocrates 430
Hippolytus
HiPPONAX 540
Hirtius (the coutinuator of Caesar's
Commentaries) t43
Homer 900?
Horapollo, grammarian
Horace t8
Hyperides t322
Ignatius
Irenaeus, Bp. of Lyons
IsAEus 370
Isidorus Hispalensib, Bp. of Seville
Isocrates '436, t338
Jamrliciius
Jfmninh, Ep. o/"(6th ch. of Baruch)
Jerome (Soplironius (?) Eusebius Hie-
ronymus)
Joannes Damascenus
Joannes Moschus ,
josephus
Judith 175-100
Julian, Roman emperor from . . .
Justinian, Roman emperor from . .
Justin, the historian
Justin Martyr
Juvenal
1100
C.125
nsi, to. ta
150
950
c925
c. 1230
t390
t395
S501
Cl75
390?
140 f
170
160
t240
6001
450
360
225
400 f
Clio
178
t636
300
1st cent t
t420
730
t620
75
361-363
527-566
150?
150
lOO
Ancient Authors.
XIII
Ancient Acthobs.
B.C. Α.Ώ.
Lactantids 310
Lampridi us, the historian . . . . 310
Leo ' Philosophus ', emperor .... 886
LiBANius, the rhetoriciau 350
LiVT •53 tl7
LONGINUS u50
LoNGus 400?
LucAN, the epic poet t65
LuciAN of Samosata, the satirist . . ICO ί
LuciLius, the Komau satirist . . . tl03
LcCRETius, tlie Koman poet .... t55
Lycophron C. 270
Lycurg us of Athens, the orator . . t329
Lynceds 300
Lysias, the Atlienian orator, opened
his school 410
Lysippus 434
Macarius C.350
Maccabees, First Book of ... , 105-63 ?
Maccabees, Second Book of c. 75?
Maccabees, Third Book of C. 40 ?
Maccabees, Fourth Book of ... , 1st. cent ?
Machon 280
Macrobius 420
Malalas, John, the annalist . . . 600 ?
Manasses, Prayer of 1st cent. ?
Manetho, the Egyptian priest . . . 300
Marcion 140
Maximus Ttkius 150
Mela, Pojiponius, the Roman geog-
rapher 45
Meleager, the founder of the epi-
gram, anthologies 60
Melito, Bp. of Sartlis c. 175
Menander, the poet 325
Menander, the Byzantine historian . 583
MiMNEKMUs, the poet c. 600
Moeris, the "Atticist" and lexicog-
rapher 2d cent.
MOSCHION 110?
Moscuus 200
MusoNiuS RuFuS 66
Nemesius 400?
Nepos *90, t24
NiCANDER 160?
Nicephorus, patriarch of Constanti-
nople t828
NicEPiiORDS Bryennius, the histo-
rian tll37
Nicephorus Gregoras, Byzantine his-
torian tl359
NicETAS AcoMiNATCs (also Choniates),
Byzantine historian 1200
Nicodemus, Gospel of, see Acts of Pilate
NicoLAUs Damascenus 14
NiCO.MACHUS Gerasends 50
NiLus, the pupil and friend of John
Chrysostom 420
NoNNus of Panopolis in Upper Egypt,
the poet 500 ?
Numenius of Apameia, the philoso-
pher (as quoted by Origen) .... c. 150
B.C A.D.
Ndmenius (as quoted by Athen.) . . c. 350
Ocellus Lucanus 400?
Oecumenius, Bp. of Tricca .... 950?
Olympiodorus, the Neo-Platonic phi-
losopher 525
Oppian of Auazarbus in Cilicia (anth.
of the oAieuTi/ca) 180?
Oppian of A])ameia in Syria (anth. of
the /cyyTj-yeTi/ca) 210?
ORIGEff tc. 254
Orosius Paulus 415
Orphica, the ?
Ovid tl7
Palaephatus ?
Papias, Bp. of Hierapolis, first half of 2d cent.
Pausanias 160
Petrus Alexandrinus t311
Piialaris, spurious e[)istles of . . . ?
PiiAvoRiNus, Varinus'
Philemon, Comicus 330
Philo 39
Philodemus 50
Philostratus . . 237
PlIOCYLIDES 540
Pseddo-Phocylides (in the Sibyl.
Orac, q. V.) 1st cent. Ϊ
Photius (Patriarch of Constantinople) 850
Phrynichus, the grammarian . . . 180
Phtlarchos 210
Pindar . . *521 (4 yrs .after Aeschylus), t444
Plato, Comicos, contemporary of Ari-
stophanes 427
Plato, the philosopher *427, t347
Plautus tl84
Pliny the elder, the naturalist . . . t79
Pliny the j'ouuger, the nephew and
adopted sou of the preceding ... tll3
Plotinus, the philosopher .... t270
Plutarch tl20
Pollux, author of the ονομαστίκόν . . 180
Polyaenus, author of the στρατηγή-
ματα 163
PoLYBiuS tl22
POLYCARP tl5S,Feb.23
Porphyry, pupil of Plotinus .... 270
PosiDippus 280
P0SIDONIU.S, philosopher (teacher of
Cicero and Ponipey) 78
Proclus, philosopher 450
Propertius *48, tl6
Prolevangellum Jacobi 2d cent.
Psalter of Solomon 63-48?
PsELLUs the younger, philosopher . . 1050
ProLEiMT, the geographer 160
Pythagoras 531
Quintilian, rhetorician, teacher of
Pliny the younger t95
Quintus Smyrnaeus 380?
' The I.atln name of the Italian Guartao Favorino, who died
A. D. 1537, and was tlie author of a Greek Lexioon compiled mainly
from SuYdas, Hesychius, Harpocration, Eustathius, and Phrymt
ctius. 1st ed. Rome, 1523, and often elsewhere since.
Ancient Autuoks.
XIV
Ancient Autuors.
B.C. A.D.
Sallust #86, t35
Sapientia (Sal.), see Wisdom of Solomon.
Sappho 610
Seneca, L. Annaeus, the philosopher
(son of the rhetoriciau) t65
Septuagint, Greek translation of O.T. c. 280-150
Sextus Empiricus 225?
Sihijiline Onicles, of various dates, rang-
ing perhaps from 170 lolhtttbonl.
SiLius Italiccs, poet tlOl
SiiMONiDES of Amorgos, " lambo-
graphus" 693
SiMoxiDES of Ceos (author of the epi-
taph on the Spartans that fell at
Thermopylae) . 525
SiMPLicius, the commentator on Aris-
totle and Epictetus 500
Sirachj see Ecc/esiasticus.
Socrates ' Scholasticus ', of Constan-
tinople, historian 439
Socrates (in Stobaeus)
SoLiNUS, surnamed Polyhistor . . SOOt
Solomon, Psalms of, see Psalter etc.
Solomon, Wisdom of, see Wisdom etc.
Solon, the lawgiver and poet .... 594
Song of the Three Children .... 2d cent. ?
Sophocles '496, t406
SopiiRONins of Damascus 638
SOTADES 1
SozOMEN, historian 450
Statius, the Koraau poet t96
Stobaeus, i. e. John of Stobi in Mace-
donia (compiler of Anthol.) , . . 500 ?
Strabo, the geographer *66 124
Straton, epigrammatist 150?
Strattis, comic poet 407
Sdetonius, the historian, friend of
Pliny the younger tl60
SuYdas, the lexicographer 1100?
Susanna 1st cent. ?
Symmachus (translator of the O. T.
into Greek) 200?
Synesius, pagan philosopher and
bishop of Ptolemais 410
Tacitus tc. 117
Tatian c. 160
Teaching of tht Twelve Apostles ... 2d cent. ?
Terence tl59
Βία
A.D.
Tertdllian
t220?
Testaments of the Twelve Patriarch» , .
C. 125?
Theages
1
280
Themistius
355
Theodoret
420
Theodorus Metochita
1300
Theodotion (translator of 0. T. into
Greek) before
160
540
Theophilus, Bp. of Antioch ....
180
TiiKOPHRASTUS, pupil and successor of
Aristotle
322
Theopiivlact, Abp. of Bulgaria . .
1078
Theophylact Simocatta ....
610
Thomas Magister, lexicographer and
grammarian .
1310
Thucydides
423
tl8
260
Timaeds, tlif historian of Sicily . .
TiMAEDs the Sophist, author of Lexicon
to Plato
250?
Timaeds of Locri, Pythagorean phi-
losopher
375»
TiMON, the " Sillographus " or satirist .
C.279
350
200?
Tobit c
Trypiiiodorus, a versifier ....
400?
Tzetzes, Byzantine grammarian and
1150
Valerius Maximus
30
Varro, " vir Romanorum eruditissi-
mus" (QuintU.)
t26
Vegetius, on the art of war ....
420?
Vergil
tl9
ViTRirvius, the only Roman writer on
architecture
30
VopiscDS, historian (cf. Capitolinus) .
C.S10
Wisdom of Solomon {abhi. Sap.) . . c.
100 9
Xenophanes, founder of the Eleatic
540
Xenophon (Anabasis)
401
Xenophon of Ephesus, romancer . .
400?
Zeno of Citiura
290
Zenodotus, first librarian at Alexan-
280
ZoNARAS, the chronicler
Ills
ZosiMUS, Roman historian ....
420
LIST OF BOOKS
REFERRED TO MERELY BY THEIR AUTHOR'S NAME OR BY SOME EXTREME
ABRIDGMENT OF THE TITLE.
Albert! = Joannes Alberti, Observationes Philologicae in
sacros Novi Foederis Libros. Lugd. Bat., 1725.
Aristotle: when pages are cited, the reference is to the
edition of the Berlin Academy (edited by Bekker and
Brandis ; index by Bonitz) 5 vols. 4to, 183I-I870. Of the
Rhetoric, Sandys's edition of Cope (3 vols., Cambridge,
1877) has been used.
Buumlein = W. Baumlein, Untersuchungen iiber griechi-
sche Partikeln. Stuttgart, 1861.
B.D. = Dr. AVilliam Smith's Dictionary of the Bible, 3 vols.
London, 1860-64. The American. edition (4vols., N. Y.
1868-1870), revised and edited by Professors Hackett and
Abbot, has been tlie edition used, and is occjisionally
referred to by the abbreviation " Am. ed."
BB.DD. = Bible Dictionaries: — comprising especially the
work just named, and tlie third edition of Kitto's Cyclo-
paedia of Biblical Literature, edited by Dr. W. L. Alex-
ander: 3 vols., Edinburgh, 1870.
Bnhdy. = G. Bernhai<l•/, Wissenschaftliche Syntax der
Griechischen Sprache. Berlin, 1829.
B. = Alexander Bultmann, Grammar of the New Testament
Greek. (Authorized Translation ivith numerous Addi-
tions and Corrections by the Author: Andover, 1873.)
Unless otherwise indicated, the reference is to the page
of the translation, with the corresponding i)age of the
German original added in a parenthesis.
Bum. Ausf. Spr. or Sprchl. = Philipp BuUmann, AnsfUhr-
licne Griechische Sprachlehre. (2d ed., 1st vol. 1830, 2d
vol. 1839.)
Bttm. Gram. = Philipp Buttmann's Griechische Gram-
matik. The edition used (tliough not the latest) is the
twenty-first (edited by Alexander Buttmann: Berlin,
1863). Its sections agree with those of the eighteenth
edition, translated by Dr. Robinson and published by
Harper & Brothers, 1 8.5 1 . When the ρ a g β is given, the
translation is referred to.
Bttm. Lexil. = Philipp Buttmann's Lexilogus u. 8. w. (1st
vol. 2d ed. and 2d vol. Berlin, 1825.) The work was
translated and edited by J. R. Fishlake, and issued in one
volume by John Murray, London, 1836.
"Bible Educator" = a collection (with the preceding name)
of miscellaneous papers on biblical topics by various
writers under the editorship of Rev. Professor E. H.
Plumptre, and published in 4 vols, (without date) by
Cassell, Petter, and Galpin.
Chandler = Henry W. Chandler, A Practical Introduction to
Greek Accentuation. Second edition, revised : Oxford,
1881.
Cremer = Sermonn Cremer, Biblisch-theologisches Worter-
buch der Neutestamentlichen Gracitat. ' Third greatly
enkrged and improved Edition': Gotha, 1883. Of the
'Fourth enlarged and improved Edition' nine parts
(comprising nearly two thirds of the work) have come to
hand, and are occasionally referred to. A translation
of the second German edition was published in 1878
by the Messrs. Clark.
Curtius = Georg Curlius, GrundzUge der Griechischen Ety-
mologic. Fifth edition, with the co-operation of Ernst
Windisch : Leipzig, 1879.
Diet, of Antiq. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiqui-
ties. Edited by Dr. William Smith. Second edition:
Boston and London, 1869, also 1873.
Diet, of Biog. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography
and Mythology. Edited by Dr. William Smith. 3 vols.
Boston and London, 1849.
Diet, of Chris. Antiq. = A Dictionary of Christian Antiqui-
ties, being a Continuation of the Dictionary of the Bible.
Edited by Dr. William Smith and Professor Samuel
Cheetham. 2 vols. 1875-1880.
Diet, of Chris. Biog. = A Dictionary of Christian Biogra-
phy, Literature, Sects and Doctrines ; etc. Edited by
Dr. William Smith and Professor Henry Wace : vol.
i. 1877; vol. ii. 1880; vol. iii. 1882; (not yet complete).
Diet, of Geogr. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Geogra-
phy. Edited by Dr. \Viili.ara Smith. 2 vols. 1854-1857.
Edersheim = Alfred Edersheim, The Life and Times of
Jesus the Messiah. 2 vols. Second edition, stereoti-ped.
London and New York. 1884.
Eisner = J. Eisner, Observationes sacrae in Novi Foederis
libros etc. 2 vols., Traj. ad Rhen. 1720, 1728.
Etym. Magn.=the Etymologicum Magnum (see List of
Ancient Authors, etc.) Gaisford's edition (1 vol. folio,
Oxford, 1848) has been used.
Fick = Awtust Pick, Vergleichendes Worterbnch der In•
dogermanischen Sprachen. Third edition. 4 vols. Got
tingen, 1874-1876.
List or Books.
XVI
List of Books.
Guttling = Carl Goetllimj, Allj:enieine Lehre TOm Accent
der griecliischen Spnulie. Jena, 1835.
Goodwin ^ W. W. (ioodirin, Syntax of the Moods and
Tenses of the Grcc-k Verb. 4th edition revised. Boston
and Cambridge, 1S71.
Graecus Venetus^the Greek version of the Pentateuch,
Prov., Kutli, Canticles, Kcd., Lam., Dan., according to a
unique JIS. in the I.ibrarvof St. Mark's, Venice; edited
by ϋ. V. Gebhanlt Lips. 1875, 8vo pp. 592.
Green =Tlionnis Sheldon (Sreen, A Treatise on the Grammar
of the Xew Testament etc etc. A new Edition. Lon-
don, Samuel liagster and Sons, 1862.
Also, by the same autlior "Critical Notes on the New
Testament, supplementary to his Treatise on the Gram-
mar of the New Testament Dialect." London, Samuel
Bagster and Sons, 1867.
Hamburger=y. llambuirjer, Real-Encyclopadie fur Bibel nnd
Talmud. Strelitz. First Part 1870; Second Part 1883.
Herm. ad Vig., see Vig. ed. Uerm.
Herzog = Heal-Encyklopudie fUr Protestantische Theologie
vrnd Kirche. Edited by Herzog. 21 vols, with index,
1854-1868.
Herzog 2 or ed. 2 = a second edition of the above (edited by
Herzog t, Plitt t, and Hanck), begun in 1877 and not yet
complete.
Hesych. = Hesychius (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.)
The edition used is that of M. Schmidt (5 vols. Jena,
1858-1868)
Jelf = \V. E. Jelf, A Grammar of the Greek Language.
Third edition. Oxford and London, 2 vols. 1861. (Sub-
sequent editions have been issued, but without, it is
believed, material alteration.)
Kautzsch = E. Kautzsch, Grammatik des Biblisch-Arama-
ischen. Leipzig, 1884.
Keim = Theoilor Kiim, Geschichte Jesu von Nazara n. s. w.
3 vols. Zurich, 1867-1872.
Klotz ad Devar. = Matthaeus Devarius, Liber de Graecae
Linguae Particulis, ed. R. lilotz, Lips., vol. i. 1835, vol.
ii. sect. 1, 1840, vol. ii. sect. 2, 1842.
Krebs, Observv. = J. T. Krebsii Observationes in Nov. Test,
e Flavio Josepho Lips. 1755.
Kriiger = A'. IF. Krwjer, Griechische Sprachlehre fur Schn-
len. Fourth improved and enlarged edition, 1861 sq.
Kypie, Observv. = G. D. K'/pke, Observationes sacrae in
Novi Foederis libros ex auctoribus potissimum Graeciset
anticjuilatibus. 2 vols. Wratisl. 1755.
L. and S. = Liddell and Scott, Greek-English Lexicon etc.
Seventh edition, 1883.
Lob. ad Pliryn., see Phryn. ed. Lob.
Loesner = C F. Loesneri Observationes ad Novum Test, e
PhOone Alexandrino. Lips. 1777.
Lghtft. = Dr. .John Lightfoot, the learned Hebraist of the
17th century.
Bp. Lghtft. = J. B. Lightfoot, D D., Bishop of Durham ; tue
8th edition of his commentary on the Epistle to the Gala
tians is the one referred to, the 7th edition of his com-
mentary on Pliilippians, the 7th edition of his commen-
tary on Colossians and Philemon.
Lipsius = K. //. ^1. Li/ixins, Grammatische I'ntersuchungen
iiber die Biblische Grucitat (edited by Prof. R. A. Lip-
sius, the author's son). Leipzig, 1863.
Matthiae = August Maithia, Ausf iihrlich Griechische Giam-
matik. Third edition. 3 Pts., Leipz. 1835.
McC. and S = McCIintock and Strong's Cyclopaidia of
Biblical, Theological, and Ecclesiastical Liter.atnre. 10
vols. 1867-1881 ; with Supplement, vol, i. (1885), vol. ii.
with Addenda (1887). New York : Harper and Brothers.
Meistcrliiin.s = /v. Mr'islnhnns, Gr.animatik der Attischen
Lischriften. Berlin, 1SS5. (2d edition, 1888 )
Mullach=/•'. W. A. Mullach, Grammatik der Griechischen
Vulgarsprache u. s. w. Berlin, 1856.
Rlunthe = C. F. Munthe, ( )bservationes philolog. in sacros
Nov. Test, libros ex Diod. Sic. collectae etc. (Hafn. et
Lips. 1755.)
Palairet = E. Palalret, Observationes philol.-crit. in sacros
Novi Foederis libros etc. Lugd. Bat. 1752.
Pape = W Pape, Griechisch-Deutsches Handworterbuch.
Second edition. 2 vols. Brunsv.ick, 1866. A continuation
of the preceding work is the " AVorterbuch der Griechi-
schen Eigennamen." Third edition, edited by G. E. Ben-
seler. 186.3-1870.
Passow ^ Franz Passow's Handworterbuch der Griechischen
Sprache as re-edited by Rost, Palm, and others. Leipz.
1841-1857.
Phryn. ed. Lob. = Phrynichi Eclogae Nominum et Verbo-
rum Atticorum etc. as edited by C. A. Lobeck. Leipzig,
1820. (Cf. Rutherford.)
Poll. = Pollux (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) The
edition used is that published at Amsterdam, 1 vol. folio,
1706. (The most serviceable is that of William Dindorf,
5 vols. 8vo, Leipzig, 1824.)
Pss. of Sol. = Psalter of Solomon ; see List of Ancient
Authors, etc.
Raphel = G. Raphelii annotationes in Sacram Scripturam
... ex Xen., Polyb., Arrian., et Herodoto collectae. 2
vols. Lugd. Bat. 1747.
Ridde/l, Platonic Idioms = A Digest of Idioms given as an
Appendix to " The Apology of Plato " as edited by the
Rev. James RiddeU, M. Α.; Oxford, 1867.
Eiehm (or Riehm, HVVB.) = Handworterbuch des Biblischen
Altertums u. s. w. edited by Professor Edward C. A.
Riehm in nineteen parts (2 vols.) 1875-1884.
Rutherford, New Phryn. = The New Phrynichus, being a
revi.sed text of the Ecloga of the Grammarian Phryni-
chus, etc., by W. Gunion Rutherford. London, 1881.
Schaff- Herzog ^ A Religious Encyclopaedia etc. by Philip
Schaff and associates. 3 vols. 1882-1884. Funk and
Wagualls, New York. Revised edition, 18S7.
Schenkel (or Schenkel, BL.) = Bibel-Lexikon u. s. Λν. edited
by Professor D.aniel Schenkel. 5 vols. Leipz. 1869-1875.
Schmidt^./. //. Helnrich Schmidt, Synonymik der Griechi-
schen Sprache. 4 vols. Leipz. 1876, 1878, 1879, 1886.
Schottgen = Christian! Schoettgenii Horae Hebraicae et Tal-
mudicae etc. 2 vols. Dresden and Leipzig, 1733, 1742.
Schiirer^/?w»7 Schiirer, Lehrbuch der Neutestamentlichen
Zeitgeschichte. Leipzig, 1 874. The " Second Part " of a
new and reused edition has already appeared under the
title of Geschichte des Jiidischen Volkes im Zeitalter
Jesu Christi, and to this new edition (for the portion of
the original work which it covers) the references have
been made, although for convenience the title of the
first edition has been retained. An English translation
is appearing at Edinburgh (T. and T. Clark).
Scrivener, F. H. A. : — A Plain Introduction to the Criticism
of the New Testament etc. Third Edition. Cambridge
and London, 1883.
UST OF iiOOKS.
XVII
List of Books.
Bezae Codex Cantabrigiensis etc. Cambridge and
London, 1 864.
Δ Fnll Collation of the Codex Sinaiticns with the
Received Text of the New Testament etc Second
Edition, Revised. Cambridge and London, 1867.
Six Lectures on the Text of the New Testament etc.
Cambridge and London, 1875.
Sept. = the translation of the Old Testament into Greek
known as the Septuagint. Unless otherwise stated, the
sixth edition of Tischendorf's text (edited by Xestle) is
referred to ; 2 vols, (with supplement), Leipzig, 1880. The
double verse-notation occasionally given in the Apocry-
phal books has reference to the edition of the Apocrypha
and select Pseudepigrapha by O. F. Fritzsche ; Leipzig,
1871. Readings peculiar to the Complutensian, Aldine,
Vatican, or Alexandrian form of the text are marked
respectively by an appended Comp., Aid., Vat., Alex.
For the first two the testimony of the edition of Lam-
bert Bos, Franck. 1709, has been relied on.
The abbreviations Aq., Svmm., Theod. or Theodot.,
appended to a reference to the 0. T. denote respectively
the Greek versions ascribed to Aquila, Sj-mmachus, and
Theodotion ; see List of Ancient Authors, etc
" Lag." designates the text as edited by Paul Lagarde,
of which the first half appeared at Gottingen in 1883.
Soph. = E. A. Sophocles, Greek Lexicon of the Roman and
Byzantine Periods (from B.C. 146 to a.d. 1100.) Bos-
ton : Little, Brown &, Co. 1870. The forerunner (once
or twice referred to) of the above work bears the title
" A Glossary of Later and Byzantine Greek. Forming
Tol. vii. (new series) of the Memoirs of the American
Academy." Cambridge, 1860.
Steph. Thes. ^ the " Thesaurus Graecae Linguae " of Henry
Stephen as edited by Hase and the Dindorfs. 8 vois.
Paris, 1831-1865. Occasionally the London (Valpy's)
edition (1816-1826) of the same work has been referred
to.
Said. = Snidas (see List of Ancient Authors, etc) (Jaisford's
edition (2 vols, folio, Oxford, it<34) has been followed.
' Teaching ' = The Teachini; of the Twelve Ap<«tles (Δί-
$αχή riar δώδανα ίαη»ηύλΜΐ ) The edition ut Uarnack
(in Gebhardt and Hamack's Texte nnd TTntersuchungen
α s. w. Second vol., Pts. i. and ii., Leipzig 1884) has
been followed, together with his division of the chapters
into verses.
Thiersch = Friedrich Thiersch, Griechische Grammatik a. s. w.
Third edition. Leipzig, 1826.
Trench = Abp. R. C. Trench's Synonyms of the New Testa-
ment. Ninth edition, improved. London, 1880.
Vanicek = ^/«s Fanioafc, Griechisch-Lateinisches Etymolo-
gisches Worterbnch. 2 vols. Leipz. 1877.
By the same author is " Fremdworter im Griechischen
und Lateinischen." Leipzig, 1878.
Veitch= William Veitch, Greek Verbs irregular and de-
fective, etc. New Edition. Oxford, 1879.
Vig. ed. Berm. ^ Vigeri de praecipnis Graecae dictionis
Idiotismis. Edited by G. Hermann. Fourth edition.
Leipzig, 1834. A meagre abridgment and translation by
Rev. John Seager was published at London m 1828.
Vulg. = the translation into Latin known as the Vulgate.
Professor Tischendorf's edition (Leipzig, 1864) has been
followed.
Wetst. or Wetstein =: J. J. 'Wetstein's Novmn Testamen-
tnm Graecnm etc 2 vols, folio. Amsterdam, 1751,1752.
W. = G. B. Winer, Grammar of the Idiom of the New Testa,
ment etc Revised and Authorized Translation of the
seventh (German) edition of the original, edited by Liine.
mann ; Andover, 1883. Unless othenvise indicated, it ia
referred to by pages, the corresponding page of the orig^
inal being added in a parenthesis. When Dr. Monlton's
translation of the sixth German edition is referred to,
that fact is stated.
Win. KWB. = G. B. Winer, Biblisches Realworterbnch
n. 8. w. Third edition. 2 toIs., Leipzig and New York,
1849.
Wm. Ite verb. Comp. etc = G. B. Winer, De verbomm
com praepositionibus compositomm in Novo Testamento
usn. Five academic programs ; Leipzig, 1843.
Other titles, it κ believed, are =0 fully given as to be eaeOj
venlutbte.
EXPLANATIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS.
As respects Punctuation — it should be noticed, that
since only those verbal forms (or their representatives) are
given in the Lexicon which actually occur in the Greek
Testament, it becomes necessary to distinguish between a
form of the Present Tense wliich is in use, and one which
is given merely to secure for a verb its place in the alphabet.
This is done by putting a semi-colon after a Present which
actually occurs, and a colon after a Present which is a
mere alphabetic locum tenens.
Further : a punctuation-mark inserted before a classic
voucher or a reference to the Old Testament (whether such
voucher or reference be included in a parenthesis or not)
indicates that said voucher or reference applies to other
])assages, definitions, etc., besides the one which it imme-
diately follows. The same principle governs the insertion
or the omission of a comma after such abbreviations as
"absol.", " pass.", etc.
A hyphen has been placed between the component parts
of Greek compounds only in case each separate part is in
actual use ; otherwise the hyphen is omitted.
[ ) Brackets have been used to mark additions by the Amer-
ican editor. To avoid, however, a complexity which
might prove to the reader confusing, tliey have been
occasionally dispensed ivith when tlie editorial additions
serve only to complete a statement already made in part
by Professor Grimm (as, in enumerating the forms of
verbs, the readings of the critical editors, the verbs com-
pounded with σύν which observe assimilation, etc. etc.) ;
but in no instance have they been intentionally omitted
where the omission might seem to attribute to Professor
Grimm an opinion for which he is not responsilde.
♦* An asterisk at the close of an article indicates that all the
instances of the ivord's occurrence in the New Testament
are noticed in the article. < )f the 6594 Λvords composing
the vocabulary of the New Testament 6300 are marked
with an asterisk. To this extent, therefore, the present
work may serve as a concordance as well as a lexicon
A superior » or "> or " etc. appended to a verse-numeral
designates the first, second, third, etc., occurrence of a given
word or construction in that verse. The same letters ap-
pended to a page-numeral designate respectively the first,
second, third, columns of that page. A small a. b. c. etc.
after a pnge-numeral designates the subdivision of the page.
The various forms of the Greek Text referred to are
represented by the following abbreviations :
R or Rec. = what is commonly known as theTextus Recep-
tns. Dr. F. H. A. Scrivener's last edition (Cambridge
and London 1877) has been taken as the standard. > To
designate a particular form of this " Protean text " an
abbreviation has been appended in superior type ; as, *
for Elzevir, " for Stephen, '" for Beza, "" fur Erasmus.
G or Grsb. = the Greek text of Griesliach as given in his
manual edition, 2 vols., Leipzig, 1805. Oiving to a dis-
regard of the signs by which Griesliach indicated his
judgment respecting the various degrees of probability
belonging to different readings, he is cited not infre-
quently, even m critical \vorks, as supporting readings
which he expressly questioned, but was not quite ready
to expel from the text.
L or Lchm. = Lachraann's Greek text as given in his larger
edition, 2 vols., Berlin, 1842 and 1850. When the text
of his smaller or stereotyped edition (Berlin, 18.31.) is re-
ferred to, the abbreviation " min." or " ster." is added to
his initial.
Τ or Tdf. = the text of Tischendorf's "Editio Octava
Critica Major" (Leipzig, 1869-1872).
Tr or Treg. = " Tlie Greek ΝοΛν Testament " etc. by S. P.
Tregelles (London, 1857-1879).
WIl = "The New Testament in the Original Greek. The
Text Revised by Brooke Foss Westcott Ό.Ό. and Fen-
ton John Anthony Ilort D.D. Cambridge and London,
Macmillan and Co. 1881."
KG = " Novum Testamentum ad Fidem Codicis Vatican! "
as edited by I'rofessors Kueuen and Cobet (Leyden,
1860).
Tlie textual variations noticed are of course mainly those
which affect the individual word or construction under dis-
cussion. AVhere an extended passage or entire section is
textually debatable (as, for example, Mk. xvi. 9-20 ; .In. v.
3 fin-4; vii. 53 fin. — viii. 11), that fact is assumed to be
known, or at least it is not stated under every word contained
in the passage.
As respects the numbering or the verses — the edition
of Robert Stephen, in 2 vols. 16°, Geneva 1551, has been
> Respecting the edition issued by the Bible Society, wMch wae
followefl by Professor Grimm, see Carl Bertheaa to the llieojo-
gisclie Literatnrzeltung for 1877, No. 5, pp. 103-106.
Explanations and
XIX
ABBBEVIAUOmt
followed as the standard (as it is in the critical editions of
Tregelles, Westcott and Hort, etc. ). Variations from this
standard are indicated by subjoining the variant verse-nu-
meral within marks of parenthesis. The similar addition
in the case of references to the Old Testament indicates the
variation between the Hebrew notation and the Greek.
In quotations from the English Bible —
A. V. = the current or so-called " Authorized Version " ;
R. v. = the Revised New Testament of 1881. But when a
rendering is ascribed to the former version it may be
assumed to be retained also in the latter, unless the con-
trary be expressly stated. A translation preceded by
K. V. is found in the Revision only.
A. S. = Anglo-Saxon.
Abp. = Archbishop.
absoL = absolutely.
ace. or accns. = accusative.
ace to = according to.
ad L or ad loc. = at or on the passage.
al. = others or elsewhere.
al. al. = others other^vise.
Aid. ^ the Aldiue text of the Septuagint (see Sept. in List
of Books).
Alex. = the Alexandrian text of the Septuagint (see Sept.
in List of Books),
ap. = (quoted) in
App. = Appendix.
appos. = apposition.
Aq. = Aquila (see Sept. in List of Books).
art. = article,
augra. = augment,
auth. or author. = author or authorities.
B. or Bttm. see List of Books.
B. D. or BB. DD. see List of Books.
betw. = between.
Bibl. = Biblical.
Bp. = Bishop.
br. = brackets or enclose in brackets.
c. before a date = about.
Cantabr. = Cambridge.
cf. = compare.
ch. = chapter.
el. ^ clause.
cod., codd. = manuscript, manuscripts.
Com., Comm.= commentary, commentaries.
comp. = compound, compounded, etc.
compar. = comparative.
Comp. or Compl =the Complutensian text of the Septnar
gint (see Sept. in List of Books),
coutr. = contracted, contract,
dim. or dimin. = diminutive,
dir. disc. =^ direct discourse,
e. g. = for example,
esp. = especially.
ex., exx. = example, examples.
exc. = except.
excrpt. = an excerpt or e.xtract.
fiu. or ad fin. ^ at or near the end.
G or Grsb. = Griesbach's Greek text (see above).
Graec. Ven. = Graecns Venetns (see List of Books).
i. e. = that is.
ib. or ibid. = in the same place.
indir. disc. = indirect discourse.
init. or ad init. ^at or near the beginning.
in 1. or in loc. ^ in or on the passage.
i. q. = the same as, or equivalent to.
KC = Kuenen and Cobet's edition of the Vatican text (see
above).
L or Lchm. = Lachmann's Greek text (see above).
L. and S. = Liddell and Scott (see List of Books).
1. or lib. = book.
1. c, U. CO. =passage cited, passages cited.
Lag. = Lagarde's edition of the Septuagint (see Sept. in
List of Books),
mrg. = the marginal reading (of a critical edition of the
Greek Testament).
0pp. = Works,
opp. to = opposed to.
paral.^the parallel acconnts (in the Synoptic Gospels).
Pt. or pt. = part.
q. v. = which see.
R or Rec. = the common Greek text (see above).
r. = root.
rel. or relat. = relative.
sc. = namely, to wit.
Skr. = Sanskrit,
sq., sqq. = following.
Steph.^ Stephanus's Thesaurus (see List of Books).
Stud. u. Krit. ^the Studien und Kritiken, a leading Get-
man Theological Quarterly,
s. V. ^under the word.
Symm. = Syramachus, translator of the Old Testament into
Greek (see Sept. in the List of Books).
Τ or Tdf. = Tischendorf's Greek text (see above).
Theod. or Theodot. = Theodotion (see Sept. in the List of
Books).
Tr or Treg. = Tregelles's Greek text (see above),
u. i. = as below.
n. s. =as above.
V. = see.
var. = vari.int or variants (various readings).
Vat. = the Vatican Greek text (see above, and Sept. in the
List of Books).
Vulg. = the Vulgate (see List of Books).
w.= with (especiiilly before abbreviated names of cases),
writ. ^ w^ter, writers, writings.
WH = Westcott and Hort's Greek text (see above).
Other abbreviations will, it is hoped, explain themselve».
NEW TESTAMENT LEXICON.
A a, αΧφα
A, a, έίλψα, TO, the first letter of the Greek alphabet,
opening the series which the letter ω closes. Hence the
expression (ya (Ιμι το A [L Τ Tr WH ίιΚφα] κα\ τό Ω
[Ώ L WH], Rev. i. 8, 11 Rec, wliich is explained by the
appended words ή αρχή και τ6 rtKos, xxi. 6, and by the
further addition 6 πρώτος κα\ 6 (σχατα, χχϋ. 13. On
the meaning of the phrase cf. Rev. xi. 17; Is. xli. 4;
xliv. 6; xlviii. 12; [esp. B. D. Am. ed. p. 73]. A,
when prefixed to words as an inseparable syllable, is
1. privative (^στ(ρητίκόν'), like the Lat. in-, the Eng.
tm-, giving a negative sense to the word to which it is
prefixed, as άβαρης ; or signifj-ing what is contrary to it,
as ίίτιμος, άτιμόω ; before vowels generally άν-, as άναίτίο:.
2. copulative (άθμοιστικόν), akin to the particle άμα
[cf. Curtius § 598], indicating community and fellow-
ship, as in ά&€λφύς, άκόλονθοί. Hence it is 3. in-
tensive (ενιτατικόι/), strengthening the force of terms,
like the Lat. con in composition ; as άτινίζω fr. άτονης
[yet cf. W. 100 (95)]. This use, however, is doubted or
denied now by many [e. g. Lob. Path. Element, i. 34
s<[.]. Cf. Kuhner i. 741, §339 Anm. 5; [Jelf §342 5];
Dllm. Gram. § 120 Anm. 11; [Donaldson, Gram. p. 334;
New Crat. §§ 185, 213 ; L. and S. s. v.].•
'Ααρών, indecl. prop, name (ό Ααρών, -ώκοΓ in Joseph.),
-ο -ν
prj** (fr. the unused Hebr. radical "'Di?, — 8^τ.]ι.Αβι|
libidinosus, lascivus, — [enlir/hlened, Fiirst; ace. to Die-
trich wealth)/, or fluent, like "'piS], ace. to Philo, de
ebriet. § 32, fr. "(Π mountain and equiv. to opeivoi), Aaron,
the brother of lloses, the first high-priest of the Israel-
ites and the head of the whole sacerdotal order : Lk. i. 5 ;
Acts vii. 40; Ileb. v. 4; vii. 11; ix. 4.*
ΆβαδΒων, indecl., ΐΙΊΠΧ, 1. ruin, destruction, (fr.
^^X to perish). Job xxxi. 12. 2. the place o/ destruc-
tion i. q. Orcus, joined with S'XiV, Job .xxvi. 6 ; Prov.
XV. 11. 3. as a proper name it is given to the an-
gel-prince of the infernal regions, the minister of death
and author of havoc on earth, and is rendered in Greek
by Άπολλυ'ωΐ' Destroyer, Rev. vx. 11.*
Αβιάθαρ
όβαρη?, -tr, (βάροί weight), without weight, light; trop.
not burdensome: άβαρη ίμίν ΐμαντον ('τήρησα I have
avoided burdening you with expense on my account,
2 Co. xi. 9 ; see 1 Th. ii. 9, cf. 6. (Fr. Aristot. down.)•
Άββά [WH -βά], Hebr. 2V. father, in the Chald. em-
phatic state, X3X i. e. 6 πατήρ, a customary title of Grod in
prayer. WTienever it occurs in the N. f . (ilk. xiv. 36;
Ro. viii. 15 ; Gal. iv. 6) it has the Greek interpretation
subjoined to it; this is apparently to be explained by
the fact that the Chaldee K2S, through frequent use in
prayer, gradually acquired the nature of a most sacred
proper name, to which the Greek-speaking Jews added
the appellative from their own tongue.*
Άβίλ [WH "Αβ. (see their Intr. § 408)], indecl. prop,
name (in Joseph, [e. g. antt. 1, 2, 1] 'A^eXor, -ov), San
(breath, vanity), Abel, the second son born to Adam
(Gen. iv. 2 sqq.), so called from liis short life and sudden
death [cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 5], (Job vii. 16; Ps. xxxLx.
6) : Mt. .xxiii. 35 ; Lk. xi. 51 ; Heb. xi. 4 ; xii. 24.•
Άβιοί, indecl. prop, name (Joseph, antt. 7, 10, 3 ; 8,
10, 1 ό Άβιας [Λν. § 6, 1 m.], -α), Π^ίΚ and ίΠ;2Ν (my
father is Jehovah) , Abia [or Abijah, cf. B. D. s. v.],
1. a king of Judah, son of Rehoboam : Mt. i. 7 (1 K. xiv.
31; XV. 1). 2. a priest, the head of a sacerdotal
family, from whom, when David divided the priests into
twenty-four classes (1 Chr. xxiv. 10), the class Abia,
the eighth in order, took its name : Lk. i. 5.•
Άβιαβαρ, indecl. prop, name (though in Joseph, antt.
6, 14, 6 Άβιάθαροί, -ov), 1Π'3Ν (father of abundance),
Ahiathar, a certain Hebrew high-priest: Mk. ii. 26, —
where he is by mistake confounded with Aliimelech his
father (1 S. .xxi. 1 sqq.) ; [yet cf. 1 S. xxii. 20 with 1
Clir. xviii. 16; xxiv. 6, 31 ; also 2 S. xv. 24-29; 1 K.iL
26, 27 with 2 S. viii. 17; 1 Chr. xxiv. 6, 31. It would
seem that double names were esp. common in the case
of priests (cf. 1 Mace. ii. 1-5; Joseph, vit. §§ 1, 2)
and that father and son often bore the same name (c£
Lk. i. 5, 59; Joseph. 1. c. and antt- 20, 9, 1). See λΐ»
Clellan ad loc. and B. D. Am. ed. p. 7].•
Άβιληΐ'η
ά'^αθό'ί
Άβιληνη [WH "Aj3f ιλ. (see S. ν. « » )], -ψ, η, (sc. χώρα,
the district belonging to the city Abila), Abilene, the
name of a region lying between Lebanon and Hermon
towards Phoenicia, 1 Η mik's distant from Damascus and
37 [ace. to the Itin. Anton. 38] from Heliopolis ; Lk. iii.
1. Cf. Xvaavias [and 15. D. s. v.].*
Άβιον8, ό, indecl. prop, name, HiT^X (father of the
Jews [al. of glory]), Abiud, son of Zorobabel or Zeriib-
babel: Mt. i. 13.•
•Αβραάμ [Rcc" '^βp. ; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 106] (Joseph.
Άβραμο!, -ου), ΟΠΊΟΚ (father of a multitude, cf. Gen.
xvii. 5), Abraham, the renowned founder of the Jewish
nation : Mt. i. 1 f.i\.•, xxii. 32; Lk. xLx. 9; Jn. viii. 33;
Acts iii. 25 ; Heb. vii. 1 sqq., and elsewhere. He is ex-
tolled by the apostle Paul as a pattern of faith, Ro. iv. 1
sqq. 1 7 sqq. ; Gal. iii. 6 (cf. Heb. xi. 8), on which account
all beUevers in Clirist have a claim to the title sons or
posterity of Abraham, Gal. iii. 7, 29; cf. Ro. iv. 11.
όίβνσ-σοΐι in classic Greek an adj., -ot, -oi', (fr. ό βυσσόί
i. q. βυθός), bottomless (so perhajjs in Sap. x. 19), un-
bounded (ττλοΰτοί Άβυσσος, Aesclivl. Sept. (931) 950).
In the Scriptures ή άβυσσος (Sept. for ΠΪΠΓΙ) sc. χώρα, the
pit, the immeasurable depth, the abyss. Hence of 'the
deep ' sea : Gen. i. 2 ; vii. 11; Deut. viii. 7 ; Sir. i. 3 ;
xvi. 18, etc. ; of Orcus (a very deep gulf or chasm in the
lowest parts of the earth : Ps. l.\x. (Ix.xi.) 21 f κ των άβνσ-
σων της γης, Eur. Phoen. 1632 (1605) ταρτάρου αβυσσα
χάσματα, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 5 άβύσσων ανεξιχνίαστα
κλίματα, ibia. 59, 3 ό επιβλέπων ev ταίς άβΰσσοις, of God ;
[Act. Thom. 32 ό την άβυσσον τον ταρτάρον οικών, of the
dragon]), both as the common receptacle of the dead,
Ro. X. 7, and especially as the abode of demons, Lk. viii.
31; Rev. ix. 1 sq. 11; xi. 7 ; xvii.8;xx. 1,3. Among prof,
autli. used as a siibst. only 1)y Diog. Laert. 4, (5.) 27 κατήλ-
θες fis μέλαιναν Πλουτέως αβυσσον. Cf. Knapp, Soripta
var. Arg. p. 554 sq. ; [./. G. Miiller, Philo's Lehre von der
Weltschopfung, p. 173 sq.; B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Deep].*
"Αγαβο5[οη the breathing see WH. Intr. § 408], -ov, ό,
the name of a Christian prophet, Arjabus : Acts xi. 28 ;
xxi. 10. (Perhaps from 2:i\ to love [cf. B. D. s. v.].)*
ά-γαθοερΎΕω, -ω ; (fr. the unused ΕΡΓΩ — equiv. to
?ρδω, εργάζομαι — and αγαθόν) ', to be αγαθοεργοί, beneji-
cent (towards the poor, the needy) : 1 Tim. vi. 18 [A. V.
do good'\. Cf. άγαθουργέω. Found besides only in eccl.
writ., but in the sense to do reell, act rightly.*
άΎαθο-ποΐί'ω, -ω ; 1 aor. inf. άγαθοποιήσαι ; (fr. άγαθο-
iroios) ; 1. lo do good, do something which profls
others : Mk. iii. 4 [Tdf. αγαθόν ποιησαι ; Lk. vi. 9] ; to
show one's self beneficent. Acts xiv. 17 Rec. ; τινά, to do
tome one a favor, ,o benefit, Lk. vi. 33, 35, (equiv. to
a'P'H, Zeph. i. 12; Num. x. 32; Tob. xii. 13, etc.). 2.
to do well, do right: 1 Pet. ii. 15, 20 (opp. to άμαρτάνω);
iii. 6, 17 ; 3 Jn. 11. (Not found in secular authors, ex-
cept in a few of the later in an astrological sense, lo
/urnish a good omen.)'
β,γαθοποιΐα [WH -jrotia (see I, c)], -as, ή, a course of
right action, well-doing: iv άγαθοπούα, 1 Pet. iv. 19 i. q.
ύγαθοποιουντε! acting uprightly [cf. xii. Patr. Jos. § 18];
if we read here with L Tr mrg. iv άγαθοποιιαις we must
understand it of single acts of rectitude [cf. W. § 27, 3;
B. § 123, 2]. (In eccl. writ, άγαθοπ. denotes benefi-
cence.)*
άγαθοποιός, όν, acting rightly, doing well: 1 Pet. ii. 14.
[Sir. xlii. 14; Plut. de Is.'et Osir. § 42.]*
άγαθ09, -ή, -όν, (akin to άγομαι to \vonder at, think
highly of, αγαστός admirable, as explained by I'lato,
Crat. p. 412 c. [al. al.; cf. Donaldson, New Crat. § 323]),
in general denotes " perfectus, . . . qui habet in se ac
facit omnia quae habere et facere debet pro notione
norainis, officio ac lege" (Irmisch ad Hdian. 1, 4, p.
134), excelling in any respect, distinguished, good. It
can be predicated of persons, things, conditions, quali-
ties and affections of the soul, deeds, times and sea^
sons. To this general signif. can be traced back all
those senses which the word gathers fr. the connec-
tion in which it stands; 1. of a good constitution or
nature: γη, Lk. viii. 8; hiv&pov, Mt. vii. 18, in sense
equiv. to 'fertile soil,' 'a fruitful tree,' (Xen. oec. 16, 7
γη άγαθη, . . . γη κακή, an. 2, 4, 22 χώρας πολλοί κ. αγαθής
οΰσης). In Lk. viii. 15 άγαθη καρδία corresponds to the
fig. expression " good ground ", and denotes a soul in-
clined to goodness, and accordingly eager to learn sav-
ing truth and ready to bear the fruits (καρπούς αγαθούς,
Jas. iii. 17) of a Christian life. 2. usifid, xaliiUn-y:
δόσις αγαθή (joined to δώρημα τελειον) a gift which is
truly a gift, salutary, Jas. i. 1 7 ; δόματα αγαθά, Mt. vii.
1 1 ; εντολή άγ. a commandment profitable to those who
keep it, Ro. vii. 12, ace. to a Grk. scholium equiv. to eZr
τά συμφέρον είσηγουμένη, hence the question in Vs. 1 3 : το
ουν αγαθόν εμο\ γέγονε θάνατος ; άγ. μερίς the 'good
part,' whicli insures salvation to liim ivho chooses it,
Lk. x. 42 ; έργον άγ. (differently in Ro. ii. 7, etc.) the
saving work of God, i. e. substantially, the Christian
life, due to divine efficiency, Phil. i. 6 [cf. the Conim.
ad loc] ; fir αγαθόν for good, to advantage, Ro. viii. 28
(Sir. Λ^ίΐ. 13; πάντα τοις εύσεβέσι εΙς αγαθά, . . . τόϊς άμαρ-
τωλοίς εις κακά. Sir. xxxix. 27 ; το κακόν . • • γίγνεται εις
αγαθόν, Theogui» 162) ; good for, suited to something :
προς οίκοδομήν, Eph. iv. 29 [cf. W. 363 (340)] (Xen.
mem. 4, 6, 10). 3. of the feeling awakened by what is
good, plea.<:ant, agreeable, Joyful, happy : ήμέραιάγ- 1 Pet.
iii. 10 (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; Sir. xiv. 14; 1 IMacc.
x. 55); ελπίς, 2 Th. ii. 16 (μακάρια eXmV.Tit. ii. 13);
σννείδησις, a ])caccful conscience, i. q. consciousness of
rectitude. Acts xxiii. 1 ; 1 Tim. i. 5, 19; 1 Pet. iii. 13;
reconciled to God, vs. 21 . 4. excellent, distinguished :
so t\ αγαθόν, Jn. 1. 46 (47). 5. upright, honorable:
Mt. xii. 34 ; xix. 16 ; Lk. vi. 45 ; Acts xi. 24 ; 1 Pet. iii.
11 , etc. ; πονηροί κ. αγαθοί, Mt. ν, 45 ; xxii. 10 ; άγαθ. και
δίκαιος, Lk. x.xiii. 50 ; καρδία αγαθή κ. κάΚή, Lk. viii. 15
(see καλός, b.); fulfilUng the duty or service demanded,
δοϋλε άγαθί κ. ττίστ/, Mt. χχν. 21, 23 ; upright, free
from guile, particularly from a desire to corrupt the
people, Jn. vii. 12; pre-eminently of God, as consum-
mately and essentially good, Mt. xix. 17 (Mk. x. 18;
Lk. xviii. 19) ; άγ. θησαυρός in Mt. xii. 35; Lk. vL 4δ
ayadovp'yew
'ά
αγατταω
denotes the soul considered as the repository of pure
thoughts which are brought forth in speech; πίστα άγ.
the fidelity due from a servant to his master, Tit. ii. 10
[WH mrg. om.] ; on άγαθ- epyov, άγ. tpya, see fpyov.
In a narrower sense, benevolent, l.iinJ, r/enerous : Mt.
XX. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 18; μν€ία, 1 Th. iii. 6 (cf. 2 Mace. vii.
20) ; beneficent (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 4; αία, Jer. xxxiii. 11 ;
Ps. xxxiv. 9 ; Cic. nat. deor. 2, 25, 64 " optunus i. e.
beneficentissimus"), Ro. v. 7, where the meaning is,
Hardly for an innocent man does one encounter death ;
for if he even dares hazard his life for another, he does
so for a benefactor (one from whom he has received
favors); cf. W. 117 (111); [Gifford in the Speaker's
Com. p. 123]. The neuter used substantively de-
notes 1. a good thing, convenience, advantage, and
in partic. a. in the plur., external goods, riches : Lk. i.
53; xii. 18 sq. (Sir. xiv. 4 ; Sap. vii. 11) ; τα αγαθά σου
comforts and deliglits which thy wealth procured for
thee in abundance, Lk. xvi. 25 (opp. to κακά, as in Sir.
xi. 14) ; outward and inward good things. Gal. vi. 6, cf.
Wieseler ad loc. b. the benefits of the Messianic king-
dom : Ro. X. 15 ; τα μέλλοντα άγ. Heb. ix. 11 ; χ. 1. 2.
what is upright, honorable, and acceptable to God: Ro.
xii. 2 ; €ργάζ(σθαι το άγ. Ro. ii. 10 ; Eph. iv. 28 ; πράσσίΐν,
Ro. ix. 11; [2 Co. v. 10]; διώκ€ΐν, 1 Tli. v. IS; μι /ici-
σθαι^ 3 Jn. 11 ; κολλάσθαί τω άγ. Ro. xii. 9; tl μ€ έρωτας
ιτ(ρ\ τοϋ άγαθοΰ, JMt. xix. 1 7 G L Τ Tr WH, where the
word expresses the general idea of right. Spec, what
is salutary, suited to the course of human affairs : in the
phrase huiKovos els to άγ. Ro. xiii. 4 ; of rendering ser-
vice, Gal. vi. 10; Ro. xii. 21 ; τ6 άγ. σου the favor thou
conferrest, Philem. 14.
[" It is to be regarded as a peculiarity in the usage of the
Sept. that 31Π good is predominantly [?] rendered by κολιίϊ.
. . . The translator of Gen. uses ά7οβ<ί5 only in tlie neut.,
good, goods, and this has been to a degree the model for tlie
other translators. ... In the Greek O. T., where ol δίκαιοι is
the technical designation of the pious, oi αγαθοί or 6 ayaSis
does not occur in so general a sense. The at/rip ayados is
peculiar only to the Prov. (xiii. 22, 24; xv. 3) ; cf. besides
the solitary instance in 1 Ivings ii. 32. Thus even in the usage
of the 0. T. we are reminded of Christ's \vords, Mk. x. 18,
ouSels ά7α9ίΐ! d μ^ι efs 6 Beos. In the 0. T. the term ' right-
eous ' makes reference rather to a covenant and to one's rela-
tion to a positive standard ; ayaBas would express tlie abso-
lute idea of moral goodness " {yCi-zscliwit:, Profangraec. u.
bibl. Sprachgeist, Leipz. 1859, p. 60). Cf. Tittm. p. 19. On
the comparison of ayaSos see B. 27 (24)]
άγαθουρ-γ€'ω, -ώ ; Acts xiv. 1 7 L Τ Tr WII for R άγαθο•
■ποιώ. The contracted form is the rarer [cf. WII. App.
p. 145], see άγαθο(ργ€ω; but of. KaKovpyos, 'κρονργίω.*
ογαθωσ-ίνη, -ης. ή, [on its formation see W. 95 (90);
TI7/. App. p. 152], found only in bibl. and eccl. writ.,
uprightness of heart and life, [A. Y. goodness"] : 2 Th. i.
11; Gal. v. 22 (unless here it denote kindne-^s, benefi-
cence) ; Ro. XV. 14 ; Eph. v. 9. [Cf. Trench § bdii. ;
Ellic. and Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. c] •
άγαλλιάομαι, see άγαΧΚιάω.
d-yoWCcuris, -fojs, ή, (άγαλλιάω), not used by prof. writ.
but often by the Sept. ; exultation, extreme joy : Lk. i.
14, 44; Acts ii. 46; Jude 24. Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv.
(xiv.) 8) oil of gladness with which persons were
anointed at feasts (Ps. xxiii. 5), and which the writer,
alluding to the inaugural ceremony of anointing, uses
as an emblem of the divine power and majesty to which
the Son of God has been e.xalted.*
ά-γαλλιάω, -ώ, and -άομαι. (but the act. is not used
exe. in Lk. i. 47 [ήγαλλίασα], in Rev. xix. 7 [dyaX-
\ώμ€ΐ'} L Τ Tr WH [and in 1 Pet. i. 8 WH Tr mrg.
(uyoXXiUTe), cf. 117/. App. p. 169]); 1 aor. ηγαλλιασά•
μην, and (with a mid. signif.) ήγαλ'>^ιάθην (Jn. v. 35;
Rec. ηγαλλιάσθην) ; a word of Hellenistic coinage (fr.
άγάΧΚομαι to rejoice, glory [yet cf. B. 51 (45)]), often in
Sept. (for h'i. l'S;\ |:i, bic). to exult, rejoice exceed-
ingly: Mt. V. 12; Lk. X. 21; Acts ii. 26; xvi. 34; 1 Pet.
i. 8 ; iv. 13 ; ίν nvi, 1 Pet. i. 6, dat. of the thing in
which the joy originates [cf. W. § 33 a.; B. 185 (160)] ;
but Jn. V. 35 means, ' to rejoice while his light shone '
[i. e. «n (the midst of) etc.]. tVi Ttvi, Lk. i. 47; foU. by
ίνα, Jn. viii. 56 that he should see, rejoiced because it
had been promised him that he should see. This divine
promise was fulfilled to him at length in paradise ; cf.
W. 339 (318) ; B. 239 (206). On this word see Gelpke
in the .Stud. u. Krit. for 1849, p. 645 sq.»
ά-γαμ.ο5, -ov, (-yci/xor), unmarried: 1 Co. vii. 8, 32;
used even of women, 1 Co. vii. 11, 34 (Eur. Hel. 690 [and
elsewhere]), where the Grks. commonly said avavSpos.*
άγανακτ€'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ηγανάκτησα ; (as jrXfocf κτί ω comes
fr. πλοΐνίκτης, and this fr. πλϊον and (χω, so through a
conjectural άγανάκτης fr. άγαν and άχομαι to feel pain,
grieve, [al. al.]) ; to be indignant, moved with indigna-
tion: Mt. xxi. 15; xxvi. 8; Mk. x. 14 ; xiv. 4; nepinvot
[cf. W. § 33 a.], Mt. .XX. 24 ; Mk. x. 41 ; foil, by ότι, Lk.
xiii. 14. (From Hdt. down.) •
άγανάκτη(Γΐ5, -ίω5, η, indignation : 2 Co. vii. 11. [(From
Phit. on.)]*
αγαπάω, -ώ ; [impf. ψ/άπων] ; fut. αγαττήιτω ; 1 aor. fjya•
πησα; pf. act. [1 pers. plur. ηγαιπικαμ(ν 1 Jn. iv. 10 AVH
txt.], ptcp. ηγαπηκώί (2 Tim. iv. 8) ; Pass., [pres. άγα-
πωμαι] ; pf. ptcp. ηγαττημίνοί ', 1 fut. άγαπηθήσομαι; (akin
to άγαμοι [Fick, Pt. iv. 12; see αγαθά:, init.]); to love,
to be full of good-will and exliibit the same : Lk. vii. 47 ;
1 Jn. iv. 7 sq. ; with ace. of the ρ e r s ο n, /o hare a pre-
ference for, wish well to, regard the welfare of: Mt. v. 43
sqq.; xix. 19; Lk. vii. 5; Jn. xi. 5; Ro. xiii. 8; 2 Co. xi.
11; xii. 15; Gal. v. 14; Eph. v. 25, 28; 1 Pet. i. 22, and
elsewhere ; often in 1 Ep. of Jn. of the love of Chris-
tians towards one another ; of the benevolence which
God, in providing salvation for men, has exliibited by
sending his Son to them and giving him up to death,
Jn. iii. 16; Ro. viii. 37; 2 Th. ii. 16; 1 .Jn. iv. 11, 19;
[noteworthy is Jude 1 L Τ Tr WH tois iv θιω πατρϊ
ηγατϊημίνοκ ; see iv, \. 4, and cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii.
12] ; of the love which led Christ, in procuring human
salvation, to undergo sufferings and death, Gal. ii. 20 ;
Eph. V. 2 ; of the love with which God regards Christ,
Jn. iii. 35 ; [v. 20 L mrg.] ; x. 1 7 ; xv. 9 ; Eph. i. 6.
TNTien used of love to a master, God or Christ, the word
α'^αττη
aycLTTTjTOt;
involves the idea of affectionate reverence, prompt obe-
dience, iji-ateful ri.'cognition of benefits received: Mt. vi.
24; x.\ii.37; lio.viii.28; 1 Co. ii. 9; viii.3; Jas.i.l2;
1 Pet. i. 8; 1 Jn. iv. 10, 20, and elsewliere. With an
ace. of the thing αγαπάω denotes to take pleasure in the
thing, prize it abure other things, be unwilling to abandon it
or do without it : ίικαιοσΰιην, Ileb. i. 9 (i. e. steadfastly
to cleave to) ; την £όξαν, Jn. xii. 43 ; τη^ πρωτοκαθιδρίαν,
Lk. xi. 43 ; το σκότο! and το φώί, Jn. iii. 1 9 ; το» κόσμον.
1 Jn. ii. 15 ; τον νΰν αΙωνα, 2 Tim. iv. 10, — both which
last phrases signify to set the heart on earthly advan-
tages and joys; την ^Ι^υχην αΰτων, Rev. xii. 11; ζωήν,
1 Pet. iii. 10 (to derive pleasure from life, render it
agreeable to himself) ; to welcome with desire, long for :
την (πίφάνίίαν αίτοϋ, 2 Tim. iv. 8 (Sap. i. 1 ; vi. 13; Sir.
iv. 12, etc.; so of a person: ήγαπήθη. Sap. iv. 10, ef.
Grimm ad loc). Concerning the uniijue proof of love
which Jesus gave the apostles by washing their feet, it
is said ^yaTnjCTfv airois, Jn. xiii. 1, cf. Liicke or Meyer
ad loc. [but al. take ήγάπ. here more comprehensively,
see AVeiss's Mey., Godet, AVestcott, Keil]. The combi-
nation άγάπην αγαπάν τίνα occurs, when a relative inter-
venes, in Jn. xvii. 26 ; Eph. ii. 4, (2 S. xiii. 15 where
TO μΐσοί b (μίσησαν αυτήν is contrasted ; cf. Gen. xlix. 25
ίνΚόγησί σ( (ϋλογίαν ; Ps. .Sal. xvii. 35 [in cod. Pseude-
pig. Vet. Test. ed. Fabric, i. p. 966 ; Libri Apocr. etc.,
ed. Fritzsche, p. 588] 8όξαν ήν (8όξασ€ν αυτήν) ; cf. W.
§ 82, 2; [Β. 148 sq. (129)]; Grimm on 1 Mace. ii. 54.
On the difference betw. άγαηάω and φιΚίω, see φιΚίω.
Cf. άγάττη, 1 fin.
άγάττη, -i/f, ή, a purely bibl. and eccl. word (for Wyt-
tenbach, following Reiske's conjecture, long ago re-
stored άγαπήσων in place of αγάπης, l>v in Plut. sympos.
quaestt. 7, 6, 3 [vol. viii. p. 835 ed. Reiske]). Prof,
auth. fr. [.\ristot.], Plut. on used άγάπησκ. " The Sept.
use άγάπτ; for Π^ΠΧ, Cant. ii. 4, 5, 7; iii. 5, 10; v. 8;
vii. 6; viii. 4, 6, 7; [" It is noticeable that the word first
makes its ajjpearance as a current term in the Song
of Sol.; — certainly no undesigned evidence respect-
ing the idea which the Alex, translators bad of the
love in this Song" (^Zezschwitz, Profangraec. u. bibl.
Sprachgeist, p. 63)] ; Jer. ii. 2; Eccl. ix. 1, 6 ; [2 S. ,\iii.
15]. It occurs besides in Sap. iii. 9; vi. 19. In Philo
and Joseph. I do not remember to have met with it.
Nor is it found in the N. T. in Acts, Mk., or Jas. ; it
occurs only once in Mt. and Lk., twice in Heb. and
Rev., but frequently in the writings of Paul, John, Peter,
Jude" {Bretschn. Lex. s. v.) ; [Philo, deus immut. § 14].
In signification it follows the verb αγαπάω; conse-
quently it denotes 1. affection, good-will, love, bene-
volence: Jn. XV. 13; Ro. xiii. 10; 1 Jn. iv. 18. Of the
love of men to men ; esp. of that love of Christi.ins
towards Christians which is enjoined and prompted by
their religion, whether the love be viewed as in the
soul or as expressed : Mt. xxiv. 12; 1 Co. xiii. 1-4, 8 ;
xiv. 1 ; 2 Co. ii. 4 ; Gal. v. 6 ; Philem. 5, 7 ; 1 Tim. i.
δ; Heb. vi. 10; x. 24 ; Jn. xiii. 35 ; 1 Jn. iv. 7 ; Rev.
iL 4, 19, etc. Of the love of men towards God ή αγάπη
τον βίοϋ (obj. gen. [W. 185 (175)]), Lk. xi. 42; Jn. v.
42; 1 Jn. ii. 15 (jov πατρόί) ; iii. 17; iv. 12; v. 3. Of
the love of God towards men : Ro. v. 8 ; viii. 39 ; 2 Co.
xiii.l3(14). Of the love of God towards Christ : Jn. xv.
10 ; xvii. 26. Of the love of Christ towards men :
Jn. XV. 9 sq. ; 2 Co. v. 14; Ro. viii. 35; Eph. iii. 19.
In construction : ay. t'lt τίνα, 2 Co. ii. 8 [?] ; Eph. i.
15 [L WII om. Tr mrg. br. την άγάπην] ; τ!} (ξ υμών iv
ήμ'ιν i. e. love going forth from your soul and taking up
its abode as it were in ours, i. q. your love to us, 2 Co.
viii. 7 [W. 193 (181 sq.) ; B. 329 (283)]; μ^& ίμών
i. e. is present with (embraces) you, 1 Co. xvi. 24 ; μfff
ημών i. e. seen among us, 1 Jn. iv. 1 7. Phrases : ίχαν
άγάπην fU τίνα, 2 Co. ii. 4 ; Col. i. 4 [L Τ Tr, but WII
br.] ; 1 Pet. iv. 8 ; άγάπην dtbovai to give a proof of
love, 1 Jn. iii. 1 ; αγαπάν άγάπην τινά, Jn. xvii. 26 ;
Eph. ii. 4 (v. in αγαπάω, sub fin.) ; άγ• τοΟ πνεύματος i. e.
enkindled by the Holy Spirit, Ro. xv. 30; 6 vlus τη!
άγάιτηί the Son who is the object of love, i. q. αγαπητοί.
Col. i. 13 (W. 237 (222); [B. 162 (141)]) ; ό ueos τής
ay. the author of love, 2 Co. xiii. 11 ; κόπος της άγ.
troublesome service, toil, undertaken from love, 1 Th.
i. 3 ; άγ της άληθΰας love which embraces the truth,
2 Th. ii. 10 ; ό θιος άγά-πη (στΊν God is wholly love, his
nature is summed up in love, 1 Jn. iv. 8, 1 6 ; φίλημα
άγάττης a kiss as a sign among Christians of mutual aftec-
tion, 1 Pet. v. 14 ; &ιά την άγ- that love may have oppor-
tunity of influencing thee (' in order to give scope to the
power of love' De W., Wies.), Philem. 9, cf. 14; €i>
άγάττη lovingly, in an affectionate spirit, 1 Co. iv. 21 ;
on love as a basis [al. in love as the sphere or element],
Eph. iv. 15 (where tv άγ. is to be connected not with
oXifdrvovrtt but with αϋξήσωμ(ν), vs. 16 ; ΐξ αγάπης influ-
enced by love, Phil. i. 17 (16) ; κατά άγάπην in a manner
befitting love, Ro. xiv. 15. Love is mentioned together
with faith and hope in 1 Co. xiii. 13; 1 Th. i. 3;
V. 8 ; Col. i. 4 sq. ; Heb. x. 22-24. On the words
αγάπη, αγαπάν, cf. Gclpke in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1849,
p. 646 sq. ; on the idea and nature of, Christian love
see Kostlin, Lehrbgr. des Ev. Joh. etc. p. 248 sqq.,
832 sqq.; RUckert, Theologie, ii. 452 sqq.; Lipsius,
Paulin. Rechtfertigungsl. p. 188 sqq. ; IReuss, Thdol.
Chrdt. livr. vii. chap. 13]. 2. Plur. άγάπαι, -ων,
agapae, love-feasts, feasts expressing and fostering mu-
tual love which used to be held by Christians before the
celebration of the Lord's supper, and at which the
poorer Christians mingled with the wealthier and par-
took in common with the rest of food provided at the
expense of the wealthy: Jude 12 (and in 2 Pet. ii. 13
L Tr txt. WII mrg.), ef. 1 Co. xi. 17 sqq. ; Acts ii. 42,
46 ; XX. 7 ; Tertull. Apol. c. 39, and ad Martyr, c. 3 ;
Cypr. ad Quirin. 3, 3 ; Dreschcr, De vet. christ. Agapis.
Giess. 1824; Mangold in Schenkel i. 53 sq.; [B. D. s. v.
Love-Feasts; Diet, of Clu-ist. Antiq. s. v. Agapae; more
fully in SIcC. and S. s. v. Agape].
άγαττητόϊ, ij, -όν, {αγαπάω), beloved, esteemed, dear,
favorite ; (opp. to ΐχθρός, Ro. xi. 28) ; 6 vior μου (τον
Θεοί) ύ αγαπητός, of Jesus, the Messiah, Mt. iii. 17
'Ayap
ar/ye\o^
There WH mrg. take ό άγ. absol., connecting it with
what follows] ; xii. 18 ; xvii. 5 ; Mk. i. U ; ix. 7 ; Lk.
iii. 22 ; ix. 35 (where L mrg. Τ Tr WH ό t jcXtXt-y/je'i/os) ;
2 Pet. i. 17, cf. Mk. xii. 6; Lk. xx. 13 ; [cf. Ascensio
Isa. (ed. Dillmann) vii. 23 sq.; viii. 18, 25, etc.]. αγα-
πητοί θ€οΟ [W. 194 (182 sq.) ; B. 190 (165)] is apjilied
to Christians as being reconciled to God and judged by
him to be worthy of eternal life : Ro. i. 7, cf. xi. 28 ;
1 Th. i. 4; Col. iii. 12, (Sept., Ps. lix. (Ix.) 7; cvii.
(cviii.) 7 ; cxxvi. (cxxvii.) 2, αγαπητοί σου and αύτοϋ, of
pious Israehtes). But Christians, bound together by
mutual love, are αγαπητοί also to one another (Philem.
16 ; 1 Tim. vi. 2) ; hence they are dignified \vith this
epithet very often in tender address, both indirect (Ro.
xvi. 5, 8; Col. iv. 14; Eph. vi. 21, etc.) and direct
(Ro. xii. 19 ; 1 Co. iv. 14 ; [Philem. 2 Rec] ; Heb. vi.
9 ; Jas. i. 16 ; 1 Pet. ii. 11 ; 2 Pet. iii. 1 ; [1 Jn. ii. 7
G L Τ Tr WH], etc.). Generally foil, by the gen. ; once
by the dat. άγαπ. ήμ'ιν, 1 Th. ii. 8 [yet cf. W. § 31, 2 ;
B. 190 (165)]. άγαπητο! iv κνρίω beloved in the fel-
lowship of Christ, equiv. to dear fellow-Christian, Ro.
xvi. 8. [Not used in the Fourth Gospel or the Rev. In
class. Grk. fr. Hom. II. 6, 401 on ; cf. Cope on Aristot.
rhet. 1, 7, 41.]
"Αγαρ [WH 'Ay. (see their Intr. § 408)], ή, indecl.,
(in Joseph. Άγάρα, -η:), "'■JH (flight), lUujar, a bond-
maid of Abraham, and by him the mother of Ishmael
(Gen. xvi.) : Gal. iv. 24, [25 L txt. Τ om. Tr br.].
Since the Arabians according to Paul (who had for-
merly dwelt among them. Gal. i. 17) called the rocky
Mt. Sinai by a name similar in sound to "'JH ( «rv ^
i. e. rock), the apostle in the passage referred to em-
ploys the name Hagar aUegorically to denote the servOe
sense of fear Λvith which the Mosaic economy imbued
its subjects. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed. pp. 978, 2366 note";
Bp. Lghtft.'s remarks appended to his Com. on Gal.
1-c-]*
άγγαρεΰω ; fut. άγγαρήσω ; 1 aor. ηγγάριυσα ; Ιο em-
p!o>/ a courier, despatch a mounted messenger. A word
of Persian origin [used by Menander, Sicyon. 4], but
adopted also into Lat. (Vulg. anr/ariare). Άγγαροι were
public couriers (tabellarii), stationed by apjiointment
of the king of Persia at fixed localities, with horses
ready for use, in order to transmit royal messages from
one to another and so convey them the more speedily to
their destination. See Hdt. 8, 98 [and Rawlinson's
note]; Xen. Cyr. 8, 6, 17 (9); cf. Gesenius, Thesaur.
s. V. n'l^lX; [B. D. s. v. Angareuo; Vanitek, Fremd-
worter s. v. ayyapos]. These couriers had authority to
press into their service, in case of need, horses, vessels,
even men they met, [cf. Joseph, antt. 13, 2, 3]. Hence
ayyapevfiv τινά denotes to compel one to go a journey,
to bear a burden, or to perform any other service :
Mt• V. 41 (οσηρ σ€ άγγαρ€νσ(ΐ μίλιον Ζν i. e. whoever
shall compel thee to go one mile) ; xxvii. 32 {τιγγάρ^νσαν
Ίνα άρη ι. e. they forced him to carry), so Mk. xv. 21.*
άγγίΐον, -ου, τό, (i. q. το ayyos), a resse!, receptacle :
Mt. xiii. 48 [R G L] ; xxv. 4. (From Hdt. down.) *
ayyeXCa, -as, ή, (άγγίλοί), a message, announcement,
thing announced ; precept declared, 1 Jn. i. 5 (where
Rec. has tVayytXia) [cf. Is. .xxviii. 9]; iii. 11. [From
Hom. down.]*
άγγί'λλω ; [1 aor. ηγγιίλα, Jn. iv. 51 Τ (for άπήγγ.
R G L Tr br.)] ; («yyfXos) ; to announce : άγγΐλλουσα,
Jn. XX. 18 L Τ Tr AVH, for R G άπαγγίλλ. [From Hom.
down. CoMP. ; av-, απ-, θι-, ί'ξ-, fir-, προ-ϊττ-, κατ-,
προ-κατ-, παρ-αγγίλλω.] *
άγ7€λθ5ι -ου, ό, 1. α messenger, enroy, one who is
sent: Mt. xi. 10; Lk. vii. 24, 27; ix. 52; Mk. i. 2;
Jas. ii. 25. [Fr. Hom. down.] 2. In the Scriptures,
both of the Old Test, and of the New, one of that host
of heavenly spirits that, according alike to Jewish
and Christian opinion, wait upon the monarch of the
universe, and are sent by him to earth, now to e.xecute
his purposes (Mt. iv. C, 11 ; xxviii. 2 ; Mk. i. 13 ; Lk.
xvi. 22; xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts
vii. 35; xii. 23; Gal. iii. 19, cf. Heb. i. 14), now to
make them known to men (Lk. i. 11, 26, ii. 9 sqq. ;
Acts X. 3 ; xxvii. 23 ; Mt. i. 20 ; ii. 13 ; xxviii. 5 ; Jn.
XX. 12 sq.) ; hence the frequent expressions SyyfXos
(^angel, messenger of God, 'JxSp) and άγγελοι κυρίου or
nyy. ToC θ(οΰ. They are subject not only to God but
also to Christ (Heb. i. 4 sqq. ; 1 Pet. iii. 22, cf. Eph. i.
21 ; Gal. iv. 14), who is described as hereafter to return
to judgment surrounded by a multitude of them as ser-
vants and attendants: Mt. .xiii. 41, 49; xvi. 27; xxiv.
Ά\ ; XXV. 31 ; 2 Th. i. 7, cf. Jude 14. Single angels
have the charge of separate elements; as fire, Rev. xiv.
18; waters, Rev. xvi. 5, cf. vii. 1 sq. ; Jn. v. 4 [R L].
Respecting the ayyeXor της άβΰσσον. Rev. ix. 11, see
Άβαδδώΐ', 3. Guardian angels of individuals are men-
tioned in Mt. xviii. 10; Acts xii. 15. ' The angels of the
churches' in Rev. i. 20; ii. 1, 8, 12, 18; iii. 1, 7, 14 are not
their presbyters or bishops, but heavenly spirits λυΙιο exer-
cise such a superintendence and guardianship over them
that whatever in their assemblies is worthy of praise or
of censure is counted to the praise or the blame of their
angels also, as though the latter infused their spirit into
the assemblies; cf. De Wette, Dusterdieck, [Alford,] on
Rev. i. 20, and Lucke, Einl. in d. Offenb. d. Johan. ii.
p. 429 sq. ed. 2; [Bp. Lghtft. on Philip, p. 199 sq.].
δίά Tovs ayyf'Xoui that she may show reverence for the
angels, invisibly present in the religious assemblies of
Christians, and not displease them, 1 Co. xi. 10. ωφθη
ayyeXois in 1 Tim. iii. 16 is probably to be explained
neither of angels to whom Christ exhibited himself in
heaven, nor of demons triumphed over by him in the
nether world, but of the apostles, his messengers, to
whom he appeared after his resurrection. This appel-
lation, which is certainly extraordinary, is easily un-
derstood from the nature of the hymn from which the
passage (φαν^ρώθη . . . eV ^όξη seems to have been taken ;
cf. W. 639 sq. (594), [for other interpretations see Ellic.
ad loc.]. In Jn. i. 51 (52) angels are employed, by a beau-
tiful image borrowed from Gen. xxviii. 12, to represent
the divine power that will aid Jesus in the discharge
ί/γγον
aycot
of his Messianic ollife, and the signal proofs to appear
in his history of a divine sui)erintendence. Certain of
the angels have i)rovcd faithless to the trust committed
to them by God, and have given themselves up to sin,
Jude 6 ; 2 Pet. ii. 4 (Enoch c. vi. etc., cf. Gen. vi. 2), and
now obey the devil, Mt. xxv. 41 ; Rev. xii. 7, cf. 1 Co.
vi. 3 [yet on this last passage cf. Meyer; he and others
maintain that Λγγ. without an epithet or hmitation never
in the N. Ϊ. signilies other than good angels]. Hence
SyyeXos Σατάι» is trop. used in 2 Co. xii. 7 to denote
a grievous bodily malady sent by Satan. See δαίμων;
[ioy)/i. Lex. s. v. ayyeXos; and for the literature on the
whole subject B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Angels, — and to the
reff. there given add G. L. Halm, Theol. des N. T., i.
pp. 260-384; DeHlz.ich in Riehm s. v. Engel; Kiibcl
in Herzog ed. 2, ibid.].
«ίγγοϊ, -foi, TO, (plur. άγγη), ΐ. q. άγγιων q. v. : Mt.
xiii. 48 Τ Tr AVH. (From Hom. down ; [cf. Rutherforr!,
New Phryn. p. 23].) *
&^f, (properly impv. of άγω), come ! come now ! used_,
as it often is in the classics (W. 616 (481)), even when
more than one is addressed: Jas. iv. 13; v. 1.*
άγί'λη, -ijf, ή, (πγω to drive), a herd: Mt. viii. 30 sqq.;
Mk. V. II, 13 ; Lk. viii. 32 scp (From Hom. doivn.) *
άγίνίαλόγητοϊι -ου, ό, (yei/f αλογ/ω), of ichose descent
there is no accuuiit (in the O. T.), [R. V. loithout gene-
alogii~\ : Heb. vii. 3 (vs. 6 μη y(vtάKoyoΰμtvos)• No-
where found in prof, auth.*
άγίνήϊι -ίΟΓ (-oCt), ό, η, (yevos), opp. to ciyo/^y, of no
family, a man of base birth, a man of no name or repu-
tation ; often used by prof, writ., also in the secondary
sense iynohte, cmrardli/, mean, base. In the N. T. only
in 1 Co. i. 28, τα ayevrj τον κόσμου i. e. those who among
men are held of no account; on the use of a neut. adj.
in ref. to persons, see W. 178 (167) ; [B. 122 (107)].*
αγιάζω; 1 aor, ήγίασα; Pass., [pres. αγιάζομαι] ; \){. ήγί-
ασμαι; 1 aor. ή-^ιάσθην; a word for which the Greeks use
dyiffii/, but very freq. in bibl. (as equiv. to tyip, V"\DT()
and eccl. writ. ; to make ayiov, render or declare sacred
or holy, consecrate. Hence it denotes 1. to render
or ack'nowledr/e to be venerable, to hallow : το όνομα τον
6eoC, Mt. vi. 9 (so of God, Is. xxLx. 23 ; Ezek. xx. 41 ;
xxxviii. 23; Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 4); [Lk. xi. 2]; τον
XptoTiiv, 1 Pet. iii. 15 (R G deav). Since the stamp
of sacredness passes over from the holiness of God to
■whatever has any connection with God, ά-γιάζ^ιν de-
notes 2. to separate from things profane and dedicate to
God, to consecrate and so render inviolable ; a. things
(πάν ■πρωτότοκου, τα αρσενικά, Deut. χν. 1 9 ; ημίραν, Ex.
XX. 8 ; οίκον, 2 Chr. vii. 16, etc.) : τον χρυσόν, Mt. xxiii.
17; τόδώρον, vs. 19; σ /tfOof, 2 Tim. ii. 21. b. persons.
So Christ is said by undergoing death to consecrate
himself to God, whose will he in that way fulfils, Jn.
xvii. 19 ; God is said πγιάσηι Christ, i. e. to have selected
him for his service (cf. αφόριζαν, Gal. i. 15) by having
committed to him the oflice of Messiah, Jn. x. 36, cf.
Jer. i. 5 ; Sir. xxxvi. 1 2 [c^ αυτών ijyiaae, και nput αίτον
ηγγισιν, of his selection of men for the priesthood] ; xlv.
4 ; xlix. 7. Since only what is pure and without
blemish can be devoted and offered to God (Lev. xxii.
20; Deut. xv. 21; xvii. 1), αγιάζω signifies 3. to
purify, (άπ6 των ακαθαρσιών is added in Lev. xvi. 19;
2 S. xi. 4) ; and a. to cleanse externatli/ (wpot την rrjs
σαρκοί καθαρότητα), to jmrifij leviticalli/ : Heb. ix. 13;
1 Tim. iv. 5. b. to purify bi/ expiation, free from the
guilt of sin: 1 Co. vi. 11 ; Eph. v. 26; Heb. x. 10, 14, 29;
.xiii. 12; ii. 11 (equiv. to 133, Ex. xxL\. 33, 36); cf.
Pjleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 340 sqq., [Eng. trans, ii. 68
sq.]. c. to purify internally by reformation of soul: Jn.
xvii. 17, 19 (through knowledge of the truth, cf. Jn. viii.
32) ; 1 Th. V. 23 ; 1 Co. i. 2 ((V Χριστώ 'ΐΓ^σοΟ in the
fellowship of Christ, the Holy One); Ro. xv. 16 {iv
πνιΰματι άγίω imbued with the Hoi}' Spirit, the di\ine
source of holiness) ; Jude 1 (L Τ Tr WH ηγαπημίνοί!
[q. v.]) ; Rev. xxii. II. In general. Christians are
called ήγιασμίνοι [cf. Deut. xxxiii. 3], as those who,
freed from the impurity of wickedness, have been
brought near to God by their faith and sanctity. Acts
XX. 32; xxvi. 18. In 1 Co. vii. 14 άγίάζισθαιϊ^ used in
a peculiar sense of those who, although not Christians
themselves, are yet, by marriage with a Christian, with-
drawn from the contamination of heathen impiety and
brought under the saving influence of the Holy Spirit dis-
playing itself among Christians ; cf. Neander ad loc*
ά-γιασ-μύ;, -οΰ, 6, a word used only by bibl. and eccl.
writ, (for in Diod. 4, 39; Dion. Hal. 1, 21, άγισμόί is
the more correct reading), signifying 1. consecration,
purification, το άγιαζαν. 2. the effect of consecration :
sanctification of heart and life, 1 Co. i. 30 (Christ is he to
whom we are indebted for sanctification) ; 1 Th. iv. 7 ;
Eo. vi. 19, 22; 1 Tim. ii. 15; Heb. xii. 14; αγιασμός
πτίΐ'/ιστοΓ sanctification wrought by the Holy Spirit, 2 Th.
ii. 13; 1 Pet. i. 2. It is opposed to lust in 1 Th. iv. 3 sq.
(It is used in a ritual sense, Judg. xvii. 3 [Alex.] ; Ezek.
xlv. 4; [Am. ii. 11] ; Sir. vii. 31, etc.) [On its use in
the N. T. cf. ElUc. on 1 Th. iv. 3 ; iii. 13.]•
ίγιοϊι -α, -ov, (fr. το ayor religious awe, reverence ;
άζω, άζομαι, to venerate, revere, esp. the gods, parents,
[Curtius § 118]), rare in prof, auth.; very frequent in
the sacred writ. ; in the Sept. for u;np; 1. properly
reverend, worthy of veneration ; το όνομα τοΰ β(οΰ, Lk. i.
49; God, on account of his incomparable majesty, Rev.
iv. 8 (Is. vi. 3, etc.), i. q. ίΊ/δοξοΓ. Hence used a. of
things which on account of some connection with God
possess a certain distinction and claim to reverence, as
places sacred to God which are not to be profaned,
Acts vii. 33 ; τόπο? ayiot the temple, Sit. xxiv. 15 (on
which pass, see βδίλνγμα, c.) ; Acts vi. 1 3 ; xxi. 28 ; the
holy land or Palestine, 2 Mace. i. 29 ; ii. 18 ; τ6 άγιον and
τα ΰγια [W. 177 (167)] the temple, Heb. ix. 1, 24 (cf.
Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 477 sq.) ; spec, that part of
the temple or tabernacle which is called ' the holy
place' (i^^pO, Ezek. xxxvii. 28; xlv. 18), Heb. ix. 2
[here Rec" reads άγια'] ; άγια άγιων [W. 246 (231), cf. Ex.
xxix. 37; xxx. 10, etc.] the most hallowed portion of
the temple, ' the holy of holies,' (Ex. xxvi. 33 [cf. Joseph.
ajioi
άτ/νιζα:
antt. 3, 6, 4]), Heb. ix. 3, in ref. to which the simple
ra ayia is also used : Heb. ix. 8, 2S ; x. 19 ; xiii. 11 ;
fig. of heaven, Heb. viii. 2; ix. 8, 12 ; x. 19 ; ayia ττόλίί
Jerusalem, on account of the temple there, Mt. iv. 5 ;
xxvii. 03; Rev. xi. 2; xxi. 2; xxii. 19, (Is. xlviii. 2;
Neh. xi. 1, 18 [Compl.], etc.) ; το opor τό ayiop, because
Christ's transfiguration occurred there, 2 Pet. i. 18;
ή (5fov) άγια δίαβήκη i. 6. which is the more sacred be-
cause made by God himself, Lk. i. 72 ; τό αγιον, that
worshipful offspring of divine power, Lk. i. 35 ; the
blessing of the gospel, Mt. vii. 6 ; άγιωτάτη jrioTtt, faith
(quaecredituri.e.the object of faith) which came from
God and is therefore to be heeded most sacredly, Jude
20 ; in the same sense ayia ίντολή, 2 Pet. ii. 21 ; κΚησί!
ayia, because it is the invitation of God and claims us
as his, 2 Tim. i. 9 ; aytai γραφαί (τα βιβλία τα ayia,
1 Mace. χϋ. 9), which came from God and contain his
words, Ro. i. 2. b. of persons whose services God
employs ; as for example, apostles, Eph. iii. 5 ; angels,
1 Th.'iii. 13 ; Mt. xxv. 31 [Rec] ; Rev. xiv. 10 ; Jude
14 ; prophets, Acts iii. 21 ; Lk. i. 70, (Sap. xi. 1); (oi)
jytoi (toC) fleoO άνθρωποι, 2 Pet. i. 21 [R G L Tr txt.] ;
worthies of the O. T. accepted by God for their piety,
'Mt. xxvii. 52 ; 1 Pet. iii. 5. 2. set apart for God,
to be, as it were, exclusively his; foil, by a gen. or
dat. : τω κνρίω, Lk. ii. 23 ; τοϋ βιοΰ (i. q. (kK(kt6s τοϋ
ieoC) of Christ, Mk. i. 24 ; Lk. iv. 34, and ace. to the true
reading in Jn. vi. 69, cf. x. 36 ; he is called also 6 Syios
παίϊ ToO β(οϋ, Acts iv. 30, and simply ό Syios, 1 Jn. ii.
20. Just as the Israelites claimed for themselves the
title o! ayiot, because God selected them from the other
nations to lead a life acceptable to him and rejoice in
his favor and protection (Dan. vii. 18, 22; 2 Esdr.
viii. 28), so this appellation is very often in the N. T.
transferred to Christians, as those whom God has se-
lected e'/c τοΰ κόσμου (Jn. xvii. 14, 16), that under the
influence of the Holy Spirit they may be rendered,
through holiness, partakers of salvation in the kingdom
of God : 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Ex. xLx. 6), cf. vs. 5 ; Acts ix. 13,
32, 41; xxvi. 10; Ro. i. 7; viii. 27; xii. 13; xvi. 15;
1 Co. vi. 1, 2 ; Phil. iv. 21 sq. ; Col. i. 12 ; Heb. vi. 10 ;
Jude 3 ; Rev. v. 8, etc. ; [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Saints].
3. of sacrifices and offerings ; prepared for God with
solemn rite, pure, clean, (opp. to ακάθαρτος) : 1 Co. vii.
14, (cf. Eph. V. 3) ; connected with άμωμος, Eph. i. 4 ;
V. 27 ; Col. i. 22 ; απαρχή, Ro. xi. 16 ; θυσία, Ro. xii. 1.
Hence 4. in a moral sense, pure, sinless, uprif/hl,
holy : 1 Pet. i. 16 (Lev. xix. 2 ; xi. 44) ; 1 Co. vii. 34 ;
SUatos K. ayws, of John the Baptist, Mk. vi. 20 ; ayios κ.
δίκαιοι, of Christ, Acts iii. 14; distinctively of him. Rev.
iii. 7; vi. 10; of God pre-eminently, 1 Pet. i. 15; Jn.
xvii. 11 ; Sytai άναστροφαί, 2 Pet. iii. 11 : νόμο! and
ί'ντολι), i. e. containing nothing exceptionable, Ro. vii.
1 2 ; φίΚημα, such a kiss as is a sign of the purest love,
1 Th. V. 26 ; 1 Co. xvi. 20 ; 2 Co. xiii. 12 ; Ro. xvi. 16.
On the phrase rb oytov πν^ϋμα and τό τηκΐμα τό ayiov,
see πτίίμα, 4 a. Cf. Diestel, Die Heiligkeit Gottes,
in Jahrbb. f. deutsch. Theol. iv. p. 1 sqq. ; [Baudissin,
Stud. z. Semitisch. Religionsgesch. Heft ii. p. 3 sqq.;
Delitzsch in Herzog ed. 2, v. 714 sqq. ; esp.] Cremer,
Worterbueh, 4te Aufl. p. 32 sqq. [trans, of 2d ed. p. 34
sqq. ; Oehler in Herzog xix. C 1 8 sqq. ; Zezschwitz, Pro•
fangracitiit u. s. w. p. 15 sqq.; Trench § Ixxxviii. : Camp-
bell, Dissertations, diss, vi., pt. iv. ; esp. Schmidt ch. 181].
άγιότηβ, -;;τογ, ή, sanctity, in a moral sense ; holiness :
2 Co. i. 12 L Ϊ Tr WH ; Heb. xu. 10. (Besides only
in 2 Mace. xv. 2; [cf. W. 25, and on words of thif
termination Lob. ad Phryn. p. 350].) •
άγιωστίνη [on the ω see reff. in άyaθωσϋvη, init.], -ης, ή,
a word unknown to prof. auth. [B. 73 ( G4)] ; 1. (God's
incomparable) majesty, (joined to μ€γα\οπρ(π(ΐα, Ps. xcv.
(xcvi.) 6, cf. cxliv. (cxlv.) 5) : πικϋμα άγιωσνι/ης a spirit
to which belongs άγιωσΰνη, not equii•. to πνινμα Sytov,
but the divine [?] spiritual nature in Christ as contrasted
with his σαρξ, Ro. i. 4 ; cf. RUckert ad loc, and Zeller
in his Theol. Jahrbb. for 1842, p. 486 sqq.; [yet cf.
Mey. ad loc. ; Gifford (in the Sjicaker's Com.). Most
commentators (cf. e. g. Ellic. on Thess. as below) regard
the word as uniformly and only signifying holiness'].
2. moral purity : 1 Th. iii. 13; 2 Co. vii. 1.*
αγκάλη, -ης, ή, {ayKrj, dyKas [fr. r. ak to bend, curve,
cf. Lat. uncus, anrjuhis, Kn^.anyle, etc.; cf. Curtius § 1;
Vanicek p. 2 sq.]), the curve or inner angle of the arm :
δίξασθαι fir τάς α'γκόλαί, Lk. ii. 28. The Greeks also
said ayKas λαβ(ΐν, iv ayKoKaii π^ριφίρ^ιν, etc., see ivay
καλίζομαι. [(From Aeschyl. and Hdt. down.)] •
άγκιστρον, -ου, τό, (fr. an unused άγκίζω to angle [see
the preceding word]), afsh-hook : Mt. xvii. 27.*
όίγκυρα, -af, ή, [see άyκaKη], an anchor — [ancient an-
chors resembled modern in form : were of iron, pro\'ided
with a stock, and with two teeth-like extremities often
but by no means always without flukes ; see Roschach in
Daremberg and Saglio's Diet, des Antiq. (1873) p. 267;
Guhl and Koner p. 258] : piirretv to cast (Lat. jacere).
Acts xxvii. 29 ; eKTeiveiv, vs. 30 ; ntpiaipelv, vs. 40. Fig-
uratively, any stay or safeguard : as hope, Heb. vi. 19;
Eur. llec. 78 (80) ; Heliod. vii. p. 352 (350).*
αγναψος, -ου, ό, ή, (γνάτττω to dress or full cloth, cf.
άρραφοί), unmilled, unfulled, undressed : Mt. ix. 16; Mk.
ii. 21. [Cf. Moeris.s. V. άκνατΓτοΓ»; Thorn. ^lag. p. 12, 14.]*
ayveCa [WH ayvta (see I, t)], -as, ή, (άyveiω), purity,
sinlessness of life : 1 Tim. iv. 12; v. 2. (Of a Nazirite,
Num. vi. 2, 21.) [From Soph. O. T. 864 down.] *
a^vC^u ; 1 aor. ίίγνισα; pf. ptcp. act. ήγνικώ;'• pass.
rjyvισμίvos\ 1 aor. pass, ήγνι'σ^ν [W. 252 (237)] ; (ayi/or);
to purify ; 1. ceremonially : ίμαυτόν, Jo. xi. 55 (to
cleanse themselves from levitical pollution by means
of prayers, abstinence, washings, sacrifices) ; the pass,
has a reflexive force, to take upon one's self a purifica-
tion. Acts xxi. 24, 26; xxiv. 18 (■''ΤΠ, Num. vi. 3), and
is used of Nazirites or those who had taken upon them-
selves a temporary or a life-long vow to abstain from wine
and all kinds of intoxicating drink, from every defilement
and from shaving the head [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Nazarite].
2. morally : τΟγ Kapbiat, Jas. iv. 8 ; ras ψνχαΓ, 1 Pet. i.
22; ί'αυτόΐ', 1 Jn. iii. 3. (Soph., Eur., Pint., al.)•
α')νί,σμο<;
8
aypavXeoj
άγνκτμόΐ, -οΰ, ύ, purification, lustration, [Dion. Hal. 3,
22, i. p. iu'J, 13 ; Plut. de defect, orac. 15] : Acts .\xi. 26
(equiv. to i;j, Num. vi. 5), Naziritic ; see άγνϊζω, 1.*
άγνο(ω (ΓΝΟ [cf. yιvώσκωJ), -ω, [impv. άγνυιίτω 1 Co.
xiv. 38 Κ G Tr t.\t. Wll mrg.] ; iuipf. ηγνόουν ; 1 aor.
ηγρύησα ; [Pass., pres. άγνοοϊιμαι, ptcp. ά-γνουνμίνος ; fr.
Iloin. down]; a. to he ignorant, not to know, absol.,
1 Tim. i. 13; τινά, τι, Acts xiii. 27 ; xvii. 23 ; Ko. x. 3 ;
tv Tivi (as in [Test. Jos. § 14] Fabricii Pseudepigr. ii.
p. 717 [but the reading f^yvonw iir'i πάσι τοΰτοΐΓ is now
given here ; see Test. xii. Patr. ad fid. cod. Cant, etc., ed.
isinker, Cambr. 1869]), 2 Pet. ii. 12, unless one prefer to
resoh e the expression thus : eV rouVoir, a άγνοοΟσι βλασ-
φημοίντα, W. 629 (584), [cf. Β. 2«7 (246)] ; foil, by ΐ,τί,
Ko. ii. 4 ; vi. 3 ; vii. I ; 1 Co. xiv. 38 (where the antece-
dent clause on κτλ. is to be supplied again) ; oi θίλω
ίμίΐ! aymdv, a phrase often used by Paul, [an emphatic]
scitote: foil, by an ace. of the obj., Ro. .\i. 25; ύπιμ tivos,
oTt, 2 Co. i. 8 ; nepi twos, 1 Co. xii. 1 ; 1 Th. iv. 1 3 ; foil,
by ότι, Uo. i. 13; 1 Co. x. 1; in the pass, άγνούται 'he
is not known' i. e. ace. to the conte.\t 'he is disregarded,'
1 Co. xiv. 38 L Τ Tr mrg. WH txt. ; άγνοοϋμ(νοι (opp.
to ϊπιγινωσκόμ(νοι) men unknown, obscure, 2 Co. vi. 9;
άγΐΌονμ^νός τινι unknown to one, Gal. i. 22 ; ονκ ayvouv
to know very well, τι, 2 Co. ii. 11 (Sap. xii. 10). b. not
to understand : τί, Mk. L\. 32 ; Lk. ix. 45. c. to err, sin
throufjh mistake, spoken mildly of those who are not
high-handed or wilful transgressors (Sir. v. 15; 2 Mace,
xi. 31) : Ileb. v. 2, on which see Dehtzsch.*
άγνόημα, -ror, τό, a sin, (strictly, that committed through
ignorance or thoughtlessness [A. V. error~\) : Heb. Lx. 7
(1 Mace. xiii. 39; Tob. iii. 3; Sir. x.xiii. 2) ; cf. άγΐΌί'ω, c.
[and Trench § Ixvi.].*
άγνοια, -af, ή, [fr. Aeschyl. down], want of knowledge,
ignorance, esp. of divilie things; Acts xvii. 30; 1 Pet.
i. 14 ; such as is inexcusable, Eph. iv. 18 (Sap. xiv.
22); of moral blindness. Acts iii. 17. [Cf. ayj/of'm.]•
ayvos, -ij, -όν, {άζομαι, see ayiof) ; 1. exciting rever•
ence, venerable, sacred : Trip και ή σποδοί, 2 Mace. xiii.
8; Eur. El. 812. 2. pure (Eur. Or. 1604 ayms yap
ci/ii \ΰρας, αλλ* ου τάς φρξνας, Hipp. 316 sq. ayvus . . .
)^€'ipas αίματος φ^ρας, X^ip^s pi^ ayvai^ Φρ^'^ ^ ^X^t
μίασμα) ; a. pure J'ruin carnality, chaste, modest : Tit.
ii. ό ; παρθΐνος an unsullied virgin, 2 Co. xi. 2 (4 Mace,
xviii. 7). b. pure from every fault, immaculate : 2 Co.
vii. 1 1 ; Phil. iv. 8 ; 1 Tim. v. 22; 1 Pet. iii. 2; 1 Jn. iu.
3 (of God [yet cf. eKUvos 1 b.]) ; Jas. iii. 1 7. (From Horn,
down.) [Cf. re£f. s. v. ayior, fin. ; Westc. on 1 Jn. iii. 3.] *
άγνότηϊ, -ψοί, η, [ayvor], purity, uprightness of life :
2 Co. vi. 6 ; in 2 Co. xi. 3 some critical authorities
add κα\ της ayvOTqros after άπΧότητος (so L Tr txt., but
Tr mrg. WH br.), others read της αγνότητας καϊ before
άπ\ότ. Found once in prof, auth., see Boeckh, Corp.
Inscrr. i.p.583 no. 1133 1. 15: ^ικαιοαννης evexev και αγνό-
τητας*
άγνώϊ, adv., purely, with sincerity: Phil. i. 16 (17).*
ά-γνωσ-ία, -at, η, (γνώσΐϊ), want of knowledge, igno-
rance : 1 Pet. ii. 15 ; 1 Co. xv. 34, (Sap. xiii. 1).*
όί-γνωστοϊ, -ov, [fr. Horn, down], unknown : Acts xvii.
23 [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Altar].*
αγορά, -ας, ή, (αγίίρω, pf. ηγαρα, to collect), [fr. Horn,
down] ; 1. any collection of men, congregation, as-
sembly. 2. place where assemblies are held; in the
N. T. the forum or public place, — where trials are held,
Acts xvi. 19; and the citizens resort. Acts xvii. 17; and
commodities are exposed for sale, Mk. vii. 4 (άπ αγοράς
sc. ίΚθόντ^ς on returning from the market if they hare
not icashed themselves they eat not ; AV. § 66, 2 d. note) ;
accordingly, the most frequented part of a city or vil-
lage: Mt. xi. 16, (Lk. vii. 32) ; Mk. vi. 56 ; Mt. xx. 3;
xxiii. 7 ; Mk. xii. 38 ; [Lk. xi. 43] ; xx. 46. [See B. D.
Am. ed. s. v. Market.] •
αγοράζω ; [impf. ήγόραζον ; fut. αγοράσω] ; 1 aor. ηγό-
ρασα\ Pass., pf, ptcj). ηγορασμίνος; 1 ior. ηγοράσθην*,
{αγορά); 1. to frcfjuent the markcl-pkice. 2. to buy
(properly, in the market-place), [Arstph., Xen., al.] ;
used a. hterally: absol., Mt. x.xi. 12; Mk. xi. 15;
Lk. xix. 45 [not G Τ Tr WH] ; τι, Mt. xUi. 44, 46 ;
xiv. 15 and parallel pass., Jn. iv. 8 ; vi. 5 ; with παρά
and gen. of the pers. fr. whom. Rev. iii. 18, [Sept.,
Polyb.] ; ck and gen. of price, Mt. .xxvii. 7 ; simple gen.
of price, Mk. vi. 37. b. figuratively: Christ is said
to have purchased his disciples i. e. made them, as it
were, his private property, 1 Co. vi. 20 [this is commonly
understood of God; but cf. Jn. xvii. 9, 10]; 1 Co. vii.
23 (with gen. of price added ; see τιμή, 1) ; 2 Pet. ii. 1.
He is also said to have bought them for God eV τώ
αίματι ανταν, by shedding his blood. Rev. v. 9 ; they,
too, are spoken of as purchased άπο της γης, Rev. xiv. 3,
and άπο των ανθρώπων, vs. 4, so that they are withdrawn
from the earth (and its miseries) and from (wicked)
men. But αγοράζω does not mean redeem (ϊξαγοράζω),
— as is commonly said. [Comp. : ΐξ-αγοράζω^
αγοραίο; (rarely -ala), -a'lov, (αγορά), rtlating to the
market-place ; 1. fretjuenling the market-place, (either
transacting business, as the «:άπ>;λοι, or) sauntering idly,
(Lat. subrostranus, subbasilicanus. Germ. Pflastertreter,
our loafer) : Acts xvii. 5, (Plat. Prot. 347 c. αγοραίοι και
ψαΟλοι, Arstph. ran. 1015, al.). 2. of affairs usually
transacted in the market-place : άγορα'ιοι (sc. ήμίραι [W.
590 (549)] or σΰχοδοι [Mey. et al.]) άγονται, judicial
days or assemblies, [A. Y. mrg. court-days'], Acts xix.
38 (ras αγοραίου? ποιύσθαι, Strabo 13, p. 932), but many
think we ought to read αγοραίοι here, so G L cf. W.
53 (52); but see [Alf. and Tdf. ad loc; Lipsius, Gram.
Untersuch. p. 26 ;] Meyer on Acts xvii. 5 ; Gottling
p. 297 ; [Chandler ed. 1 p. 269].*
άγρα, -ar, ij. [άγω] ; 1. a catching, hunting: Lk. v. 4.
2. the tiling caught: ij άγρα των ΐ,γίύωΐ' 'the catch or haul
of fish ' i. e. the fishes taken [A. V. draught], Lk. v. 9.*
άγράμματο5, -OK, [γράμμα], illiterate, without learning:
Acts iv. 13 (i. e. unversed in the learning of the Jewish
schools ; cf. Jn. vii. 15 γράμματα μη μ(μαθηκώς).*
άγρ-αυλί'ω, -ώ ; to be an άγραυλας (αγρός, αίλή), i. e,
to live in the f elds, be under the open sky, even by night;
Lk. ii. 8, (Strabo p. 301 a. ; Plut. Num. 4).•
uypeva
9
ay CO
aypda : 1 aor. ijypfvca ; (άγρα) ; In catch (properly,
wild animals, fishes) : fig., Jlk. xii. 13 Ίνα αΐτον ά-γρήσωσι
λόγω in order to entrap him by some inconsiderate re-
mark eUcited from him in conversation, cf. Lk. xx. 20.
(In Anthol. it often denotes to ensnare in the toils of
love, captivate; cf. πα^ίδηίω, Mt. xxii. 15; σαγηνινω,
Lcian. Tim. 25.) *
άγρι-ίλαιοϊ, -ov, (Sypios and ?λαιθΓ or tXaia, like άγριάμ-
ττίλοί) ; 1. ofov belonging to the oleaster, or wild olive,
(σκυτάλην άγριίλαιον, Anthol. 9, 237, 4; [cf. Lvb. Para-
lip, p. 376]); spoken of a scion, Ro. xi. 17. 2. As
subst. ή aypteXaios the oleaster, the wild olive, (opp. to
καλλι^λαιοΓ [cf. Aristot. plant. 1, 6]), also called by the
Greeks κότινοί, Ro. xi. 24 ; cf. Fritzscheon Rom. vol. ii.
495 sqq. [See B. D. s. v. Olive , and Tristram, Nat.
Hist, of the Bible, s. v. Olive. The latter says, p. 377,
• ' the wild olive must not be confounded with the Oleaster
or Oil-tree '.]*
άγριοϊ, -a, -ou, (dypos), [fr. Ilom. down] ; 1. living
or growing in the fields or the woods, used of animals in
a state of nature, and of plants which grow without
cidture : μίλι Sypiov wild honey, either that which is
deposited by bees in hollow trees, clefts of rocks, on the
bare ground (1 S. xiv. 25 [cf. vs. 26]), etc., or more cor-
rectly that which distQs from certain trees, and is gath-
ered when it has become hard, (Diod. Sic. 19, 94 fin.
speaking of the Nabathaean Arabians says φϋίται παρ'
αντοίς μελξ. πολύ το καΚονμξνον ayptov* ω χρώνταί ποτώ
μ(& Zbaros; cf. Suid. and esp. Suicer s. v. άκρίς) : Mt. iii.
4; Mk. i. 6. 2. fierce, untamed: κύματα Θα\άσ<τη5,
Jude 13 (Sap. xiv. 1).*
Άγρίτηταϊ, -α (respecting this gen. see W. § 8, 1 p. 60
(59) ; B. 20 (18)), 0, see Ήρώδι?ί, (3 and) 4.
άγρύς, -οϊι, δ, [fr. άγω ; prop, a drove or driving-place,
then, pasturage; cf. Lat. ager. Germ. Aci-er, Eng. acre;
Fick, Pt. i. p. 8] ; a. α fi'eld, the country : jNIt. vi. 28 :
xxiv. 18, Lk.xv. 15 ; [Mk. xi. 8 TTr WII], etc. b.
i. q. χωρίον, apiece of land, bit of tillage : Acts iv. 37 ; ^Ik.
X. 29 ; Mt. xiii. 24, 27, etc. c. οι aypoi the farms,
country-seats, neighboring hamlets : Mk. v. 14 (opp. to
jToXif) ; vi. 36 ; Lk. ix. 12. [(From Horn, on.)]
άΎρυπνεω, -ω; (aypvnvos equiv. to αϋπΐΌ?) ; to be sleep-
less, keep awake, watch, (i. q. γρηγορίω [see below]) ;
£fr. Theognis down] ; trop. to be circumspect, attentive,
ready : Mk. .xiii. 33 ; Lk. xxi. 36 ; eis τι, to be intent
upon a thing, Eph. vi. 18 ; imlp twos, to exercise con-
stant vigilance over something (an image drawn from
shepherds), Heb. xiii. 17. [Syx. aypvnve'iv, γρηγο-
pflv, νήφ€ΐν: " aypvnvf'iv may bo taken to express sim-
j)ly . . . absence of sleep, and, pointedly, the absence of
it when due to nature, and thence a w..keful frame of
mind as opposed to listlessness ; while γρτ,γοριΐν (the
offspring of typ^yopa) represents a waking state as
the effect of some arousing effort . . . i. e. a more stir-
ring image than the former. The group of synonyms
is completed by νηφ(ΐν, Avhich signifies .. state untouched
by any slumberous or beclouding influences, and thence,
one that is guarded against advances of drowsiness or
bewilderment. Thus it becomes a term for warines»
(cf. vacpe κα'ι μϊμνασ άπιστιϊν) against spiritual dangers
and beguilements, 1 Pet. v. 8, etc." Green, Crit. Notes
on the N. T. (note on Mk. xiii. 33 sq.).]*
αγρυπνία, -at, ή, sleeplessness, watching : 2 Co. vi. 5 ;
xi. 27. [From Ildt. down.]•
άγω ; impf. ηγον ; fut. όξω ; 2 aor. ήγαγον, inf. ayaye'iv,
(more rarely 1 aor. ηξα, in ί'πάγω 2 Pet. ii. 5) ; Pass.,
pres. άγομαι; impf. ηγύμην; 1 aor. ήχθηρ ; 1 fut. άχθή-
σομαι ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; to drive, lead. 1. properly
[A. V. ordinarily, to bring~\ ; a. to lead by laying
hold of, and in this way to bring to the point of desti-
nation: of an animal, Mt. xxi. 7 ; Lk. xix. 35 ; Mk. xi.
7 (T Tr WH φ(ρονσιν) ; [Lk. xix. 30] ; τινά foil, by els
with ace. of place, Lk. iv. 9 [al. refer this to 2 c] ; x.
34 ; (Jjyayov κ- flaTjyayov fls, Lk. xxii. 54) ; Jn. ΧΛ'ϋϊ. 28 ;
Acts vi. 12; ix. 2; xvii. 5 [R G] ; xxi. 34 ; xxii. 5, 24
Rec. ; .xxiii. 10, 31 ; tVi with ace., Acts xvii. 19; cws,
Lk. iv. 29; npos τίνα, to persons, Lk. [iv. 40]; xviii.
40 ; Acts Lx. 27 ; Jn. viii. 3 [Rec.]. b. to lead by accom-
panying to (into) any place: eij, Acts xi. 26 (25) ; ΐωί.
Acts χΛ-ϋ. 15 ; wpos τίνα, to persons, Jn. i. 42 (43) ; ix.
13 ; Acts xxiii. 18; foil, by dat. of pers. to whom. Acts
xxi. 16 on which see W. 214 (201) at length, [cf. B.
284 (244)], (1 Mace. vii. 2 aydv αυτού: αΙτώ). C. to
lead with one^s self, attach to one's self as an attendant :
τινά. 2 Tira. iv. 11 ; 1 Th. iv. 14. (.loscph. antt. 10, 9. 6
anrjpfv fit την Αίγυπτοί" ίϊγωΐ' και 'If peplav). Some refer
Acts .xxi. 10 to this head, resolving it ayorrer Ννάσωνα
παρ' ω ξfvίσβωμfv, but incorrectly, see W. [and B.] as
above. d. to conduct, bring: τινά, [Lk. xix. 27]; Jn.
vii. 45; [xLx. 4, 13]; Acts v. 21, 26, [27]; xix. 37; x.x.
12; XXV. 6, 23; πώλοι/, Mk. xi. 2 (where Τ Tr λΥΙΙ
φ(ρ(τ() ; [Lk. .xi.x. 30, see a. above] ; τιά tim or τί rii/t,
Mt. xxi. 2 ; Acts xiii. 23 G L Τ Tr WH. e. to lead
o'cay. to a court of justice, magistrate, etc. : simply,
Mk. xiii. 11 ; [Acts xxv. 17] ; eVi with ace, Mt. x. 18;
Lk. xxi. 12 (T Tr WH arraynpfvovs) ; [Lk. xxiii. 1];
Acts [ix. 21]; xviii. 12; (often in Attic); [προς w-ith
ace. Jn. xviii. 13 L Τ Tr WII] ; to punishment : simply
(2 Jlacc. vi. 29; vii. 18, etc.), Jn. xLx. 16 Grsb. (R και
απήγαγαν, ivhich L Τ Tr AVH have expunged) ; with
telic inf., Lk. xxiii. 32; [foil, by Ίνα. Mk. xv. 20 Lchm.] ;
fVi σφαγην, Acts viii. 32, (en'i βανάτω, Xen. mem. 4, 4,
3 ; an. 1, 6, 10). 2. tropically ; a. to lead, guide,
direct: Jn. x. 16; els μίτάΐΌΐαν. Ro. ii. 4. b. to lead
through, conduct, to something, become the author of
good or of evil to some one : eir 8όξαν, Heb. ii. 10. (fls
[al. fVi] καλοκάγαθίαν, Xen. mem. 1, 6, 14 ; fls 8ov\fiav,
Dem. p. 213, 28). c. to more, impel, of forces and
influences affecting the mind : Lk. iv. 1 (\vhere read e»
Tji (ρήμω [with L t.\t. Τ Tr AVH]) ; πvfϋμaτι θίον άγ(σθαι,
Ro. viii. 14; Gal. v. 18; ΐπιθνμίαιί, 2 Tim. iii. 6; sim-
ply, urged on by blind impulse, 1 Co. xii. 2 — unless in»-
pelled by Satan's influence be preferable, cf. 1 Co. x. 20 ;
Eph. ii. 2; [B. 383 (328) sq.]. 3. to pass a day,
keep or celebrate a feast, etc : τρίτην ήμίραν Syei sc. S
Ισραήλ, Lk. x.xiv. 21 [others (see Meyer) supply airos
ayωyη
10
αδελφός
or ό Ίησον!•, still others take όγ« as impers., one passen,
^ uli;. terliii (lie.i est ; fee B. 134 (118)] ; yfvfalwv ά-γομί-
■κΰν, Mt. xiv. 6 R G ; αγοραίοι (q. v. 2), Acts xix. 38 ; often
in the O. T. Apocr. (cf. IVahl, Clavis Apocr. s. v. άγω,
3), in ridt. and Attic writ. 4. intrans. to go, depart,
(W. § 38, 1, p. 251 (236) ; [B. 144 (126)]) : Άγαμων let
us go, Mt. xxvi. 46 ; Mk. xiv. 42 ; Jn. xiv. 31 ; irpos
riva, Jn. xi. 15; cir with aec. of i)lace, Mk. i. 38; Jn.
xi. 7, (Epict. diss. 3, 22, 55 αγαψβν fVi tuv άνθυπατον) ;
[foil. Ijy ifo, Jn. xi. 16. Co.Ml". : av-. f'n-av-, tm-, σνν-αη-,
hi-, iiV-, παρ-Είσ-, f ^-, eV-. κατ-, μ(Ί-, παρ-, irtpi-, προ-, προσ-,
συν-, (πι-αυν-, νπ-ά-γω. Syn. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.] *
αγωγή, -ης, ή. (fr. άγω, like βδωδή fi'. ?δω) ; 1. prop-
erly, η leading. 2. liguratively, a. trans, a cunduct-
iny, training, education, discipline. b. intrans. the life
led, wag or course of life (a use which arose from the
fuller expression άγωγη τον βίου, in Polyb. 4, 74, 1. 4 ; cf.
Germ. Lehensftilirung) : 2 Tim. iii. 10 [R. λ", conduct'],
(Estli. ii. 20 ; 2 Mace. iv. 16 ; ή e'• Χριστώ αγώγι). Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 6; άγνι) αγωγή, ibid. 48, I). Often in
prof. auth. in all these senses.*
άγων, -ωνοί, ό. (άγω) ; 1. a place nfass-emhli/ (ITnm.
II. 7, 298 ; 18, 376) ; spec, the place in which the Greeks
assembled to celebrate solemn games (as the Pytliian,
the OljTnpian) ; hence 2. α contest, of atliletes, run-
ners, charioteers. In a fig. sense, a. in the phrase
(used by the Greeks, see τρίχω, b.) τρίχιιν τον αγώνα,
Ileb. χϋ. 1, that is to say 'Amid all hindrances let us
exert ourselves to the utmost to attain to the goal of
perfection set before the followers of Christ ' ; any
struggle with dangers, annoyances, obstacles, standing
in the way of faith, holiness, and a desire to spread the
gospel: 1 Th. ii. 2 ; Phil. i. SO ; 1 Tim. vi. 12 ; 2 Tim.
iv. 7. b. intense solicitude, anxiety : irepi τίνος. Col.
ii. 1 [cf. Eur. Ph. 1350; Polyb. 4, 56,4]. On the ethical
use of figures borrowed from the Greek Games cf.
Grimm on Sap. iv. 1 ; [Howson, ]Meta]ihors of St. Paul,
Essay iv. ; Congb. and Hows. Life and Epp. of St.
PauC ch. XX. ; Mc. and S. iii. 733' sq. ; BB.DD. s. v.
Games].•
άγων(α, -as, ή; 1. i. q. άγων, which see. 2. It is
often used, from Dem. (on the Crown p. 236, 19 ην ό
■ φίλιππα iv φόβω και π6\\η αγωνία) down, of severe
mental struggles and emotions, agony, anguish : Lk.
xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; (2 Mace. iii. 14,
16 ; XV. 19 ; .Joseph, antt. 11, 8, 4 ό άρχκριίς ην tV αγωνία
κα! 8ί>ι)• [Cf. Field, Otium Xorv. iii. on Lk. I.e.]'
αγωνίζομαι; impf. ^γο)ΐΊ^ι!μτ;>'; pi. ήγώνισμαι; a depon.
mid. verb [cf. W\ 260 (244)] ; (άγων) ; 1. to enter a
contest ; contend in the gymnastic games : 1 Co. ix. 25.
2. univ. to contend with adversaries, fghl : foil, by Ίνα
μή, Jn. xviii. 36. 3. fig. to contend, struggle, with
difficulties and dangers antagonistic to the gospel: Col.
i. 29 ; 1 Tim. iv. 10 (L Τ Tr txt. WH txt. ; for Rec.
ονιι8ιζόμ(θα) ; αγωνίζομαι αγώνα (often used by the
Greeks also, es]). the Attic), 1 Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. iv.
7. 4. to endeavor with strenuous zeal, strive, to obtain
something ; foil, by an inf., Lk. xiii. 24 ; vntp T-ivot iv rait
προσιυχαίς. 'να. Col. iv. 12. [CoMP. : an-, <π-, κατ-,
σνν-αγωνίζομαι.] *
Ά8άμι, indecl. prop, name (but in Joseph. Άδα /iot, -ου),
DIK (i. e. ace. to Philo, de leg. allcg. i. 29, Opp. i. p. 62
ed. Mang., γή'ίνοί ; ace. to Euseb. Prep. Ev. vii. 8 γηγινής ;
ace. to Josepli. antt. 1, 1, 2 πυρρός, with which Gcscnius
agrees, see his Thesaur. i. p. 25) ; 1. Adam, the first
man and the jiarent of the whole human race : Lk. iii. 38 ;
Ro. V. 14 ; 1 Co. XV. 22, 45 ; 1 Tim. ii. 13 sq. ; Jude 14.
In accordance with the Rabbinic distinction between the
former Adam (;Τώ'Χ''Π DIN), the first man, the author
of 'all our Avoe,' and the latter Adam (;ΐ"'ΠΙ<Π D"1X),
the Messiah, the redeemer, in 1 Co. xv. 45 Jesus Christ
is called ό (σχατος Ά&άμ (see ίσχατος, 1) and contrasted
with ό πρώτος άνθρωπος', Ro. V. 14 ό μίΚΚων sc. Άδά /i.
[2. one of the ancestors of Jesus : Lk. iii. 33 AVH nirg.
(cf. Άδ/ΐίί.Ί').]•
άεάπανοΐ, -ov. (δαπάνη), without expense, rerjuiring no
outlog : 1 Co. i.\. 18 (Jva ahanavov Βτισω το (ναγγίΧιον
' that I may make Christian instruction gratuitous').*
'A88C or Άδδ€ί Τ Tr WII [see WII. App. p. 155, and
s. v.et,i],o, the indecl. i)rop. name of one of the ances-
tors of Christ : Lk. iii. 28.*
ά8€λψή, -ης, ή, (see άδΛφόί), [fr. Aeschyl. down], sis-
ter; 1. Ά full, own sister (i.e. by birth) : ΛΙΐ. xix.
29; Lk. X. 39 sq. ; Jn. xi. 1, 3, 5; xix. 25; Ro. xvi. 15,
etc. ; respecting the sisters of Christ, mentioned in Mt.
xiii. 56; Mk. vi. 3, see άδίλφόί, 1. 2. one connected
lig the tie of the Christian religion: 1 Co. vii. 15; i.x. 5;
Philem. 2 LTTr Wll ; Jas. ii. 15 ; with a subj. gen., a
Christian woman especiall)• dear to one, Ko. xvi. 1.
ά8€λψός, -ov, 6, (fr. α copulative and δ(\φνς, from the
same tcomh ; cf. άγάστωρ), [fr. Ilom. down] ; 1. α
brother (whether born of the same two parents, or only
of the same father or the same mother) : Mt. i. 2 ; iv. 1 8,
and often. That '■the brethren of Jesus,' Mt. xii. 4G, 47
[but WII only in mrg.] ; xiii. 55 sq. ; Mk. vi. 3 (in the
last two passages also sisters); Lk. viii. 19 sq. ; Jn. ii.
12; vii. 3; Acts i. 14; Gal. i. 19; 1 Co. ix. 5, are
neither sons of Joseph by a wife married before Mary
(which is the account in the Apocryphal Gospels [ef.
Thilo, Cod. Ajiocr. N. T. i. 362 sq.])', nor cousins, the
chOdren of Alphaeus or Cleophas [i. e. Clopas] and Jlary
a sister of the mother of Jesus (the current opinion
among the doctors of the church since Jerome and Au-
gustine [cf. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal., diss, ii.]), accord-
ing to that use of language by which άδ^λφόί like the
Hebr. ΠΝ denotes any blood-relation or kinsman (Gen.
xiv. 16;'l S. XX. 29; 2 K. x. 13; 1 Chr. .xxiii. 22,
etc.), but own brothers, born after Jesus, is clear prin-
cipally from Mt. i. 25 [only in R G] ; Lk. ii. 7 — ivhcre,
had INIary borne no other children after Jesus, instead
of vtov πρωτότοκον, the expression viov μονογ(νη would
have been used, as well as from Acts i. 14, cf. Jn. vii. 5,
where the Lord's brethren are distinguished from the
apostles. See further on this point under ΊάκωβοΓ, 3.
[Cf. B. D. s. V. Brother ; A ndrews. Life of our Lord,
pp. 104-116; Bib. Sacr. for 1864, pp. 855-869; for 1869
αδελφότης
11
uBi
pp. 745-758; Laurent, Ν. Τ. Studien pp. 153-193; Mc-
Clellan, note on Mt. xiii. 55.] 2. according to a
Hebr. use of ΠΚ (Ex. ii. 11 ; iv. 18, etc.), hardly to be
met with in prof, auth., having the same national ances-
tor, helongivfj to the same penpie, countryman ; so the
Jews (as the σπέρμα Άβμαάμ. υ'ιοϊ Ισραήλ, cf. Acts xiii.
26; [in Deut. xv. 3 opp. to ό άΧλότριοί, cf. xvii. 15;
XV. 12; Philo de septen. § 9 init.]) are called ά8(λφοί:
Mt. V. 47; Acts iii. 22 (Deut. xviii. 15); vii. 23; xxii.
5 ; xxviii. 15, 21 ; Ro. ix. 3 ; in address, Acts ii. 29 ;
iii. 1 7 ; xxiii. 1 ; Heb. vii. 5. 3. just as in Lev. xix.
1 7 the word nS is used interchangeably with ;η (but,
as vss. 16, 18 show, in speaking of Israelites), so in the
sayings of Christ, Mt. v. 22, 24 ; vii. 3 sqij., άθίλφόί is
used for ό πλησίον to denote (as appears from Lk. x.
29 sqq.) any fellow-man, — as having one and the same
father with others, viz. God (Heb. ii. 11), and as de-
scended from the same first ancestor (Acts xvii. 26) ;
cf. Epict. diss. 1, 13, 3. 4. a fellow-believer, united to
another by the bond of affection ; so most frequently of
Christians, constituting as it were but a single famil}' :
Mt. xxiii. 8 ; Jn. xxi. 23 ; Acts vi. 3 [Lchm. om.] ; ix.
30; xi. 1; Gal. i. 2 ; 1 Co. v. 11 ; Phil. i. 14, etc.; in
courteous address, Ro. i. 13 ; vii. 1 ; 1 Co. i. 10 ; 1 Jn.
ii. 7 Rec, and often elsewhere ; yet in the phraseology
of John it has reference to the new life unto which men
are begotten again by the efficiency of a common father,
even God: 1 Jn. ii. 9 sqq.; iii. 10, 14, etc., cf. v. 1.
5. «ii associate in employment or ojfice : 1 Co. i. 1 ;
2Co.i.l;ii.l3(12); Eph.vi.21; Col.i. 1. 6. brethren
of Christ is used of, a. his brothers by blood ; see 1
above, b. all men : Mt. xxv. 40 [Lchm. br.] ; Heb. ii.
11 sq. [al. refer these exx. to d.] c. apostles: Mt.
xxviii. 10: Jn. xx. 17. d. Christians, as those who are
destined to be exalted to the same heavenly δόξα (q. v.
ΠΙ. 4 b.) which he enjoys: Ro. viii. 29.
άδ€λφότη5, -ητος, ή, brotherhood ; the abstract for the
concrete, a band of brothers i. e. of Christians, Chris-
tian brethren : 1 Pet. ii. 17 ; v. 9. (1 Mace. xii. 10, 17,
the connection of allied nations ; 4 Mace. ix. 23 ; x. 3,
the connection of brothers; Dio Chrys. ii. 137 [ed.
Reiske] ; often in eccl. writ.) *
α-8ηλα$) -ov, (SrjXos), not manifest : Lk. xi. 44 ; indis-
tinct, uncertain, obscure : φωνή, 1 Co. xiv. 8. (In Grk.
auth. fr. Hes. down.) [Cf. δήλοΓ,βη. ; Schmidt ch. 130.]*
ahr\Kon\i, -ητος, ή, uncertainty : 1 Tim. vi. 17 πλούτου
άδηλότητι equiv. to πλοΰτω άδήλω, cf. W. § 34, 3 a.
[Pulyb., Dion. Hal., Philo.]*
αδήλως, adv., uncertainly : 1 Co. ix. 26 οίτω τρίχω,
<at ovK άδήλωί i.e. not uncertain whither; cf. Mey.
ad loc. [(Thuc, al.)]•
άεημον€ω, -ώ ; (fr. the unused άδήμων, and this fr. α
priv. and δήμος; accordingly uncomfortable, as not at
home, cf. Germ, unheimiack, unheimlich; cf. Bttm. Lexil.
ii. 136 [Fishlake's trans, p. 29 sq. But Lob. (Pathol.
Proleg. p. 238, cf. p. 160) et al. connect it -vi'ith άδήμων,
άδήσαι; see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ii. 26]); to be troubltd,
distressed: Mt. xxvi. 37; Mk. xiv. 33; Phil. ii. 26.
(Xen. Hell. 4, 4, 3 άδημονήσαι rat ψυχάς, and often in
prof, auth.) *
"Αιδηβ, αδηί, -ov, 6, (for the older Άΐδης, which Horn.
uses, and this fr. a priv. and ISeTv, not to be seen, [cf. Lob.
Path. Element, ii. 6 sq.]) ; in the classics 1. a prop,
name. Hades, Pluto, the god of the lower regions ; so in
Hom. always. 2. an appellative, Orcus, the nether world,
the realm of the dead [cf. Theocr. idyll. 2, 159 schol. τήυ τοΰ
αδον κρούίΐ ττύλην τοϋτ' ΐστιν άποθανιΊται^. In the Sept.
the Hebr. ι'ΐκψ is almost always rendered by this word
(once by θάνατος, 2 S. .xxii. 6) ; it denotes, therefore, in
bibl. Grk. Orcus, the infernal regions, a dark (Job x.
21) and dismal place (but cf. yUvva and τταράδασος) in
the very depths of the earth (Job xi. 8 ; Is. Ivii. 9 ;
Am. Lx. 2, etc. ; see άβυσσος), the common receptacle
of disembodied spirits : Lk. xvi. 23 ; ds 58ου sc. δόμον.
Acts ii. 27, 31, ace. to a very common ellipsis, cf. W.
592 (550) [B. 171 (149)] ; (but L Τ Tr WII in vs. 27
and Τ WII in both verses read ds αδην ; so Sejjt. Ps. xv.
(xvi.) 10); πιίλαι αδου, Mt. xvi. 18 {πυλωροί αδου. Job
xxxviii. 17; see ττνλη) ; κλ^Ίς τοϋ αδου. Rev. i. 18;
Hades as a power is personified, 1 Co. xv. 55 (where L
Τ Tr WH read eamre for R G ξδη [cf. Acts ii. 24 Tr
™rg.]); Rev. vi. 8; xx. 13 sq. Metaph. ίως αδου [κατα-
βαίνίΐν or] καταβίβάζ^αθαι to [go or] be tlirust down
into the depth of misery and disgrace : Mt. xi. 23 [here
L Tr WII καταβαΐνιιν^ ; Lk. X. 15 [here Tr mrg. WH txt.
καταβαΙν(ΐν~\. [See esp. Boettcher, De Inferis, s. ν.'Άιδ7;ϊ
in Grk. index. On the existence and locality of Hades
cf. Greswell on the Parables, App. ch. x. vol. v. pt. ii.
pp. 261-406; on the doctrinal significance of the word
see the BB.DD. and E. R. Craven in Lange on Rev.
pp. 364-377.]•
ά-8ια-κριτθ5, -01/, (διακρίνω to distinguish); 1. undis-
tinguished and undistinguishable: φωνή, Polyb. 15, 12, 9;
λόγοΓ, Lcian. Jup. Trag. 25 ; for ΐΠ3, Gen. i. 2 Symm.
2. without dubiousness, ambiguity, or uncertainty (see
διακρίνω. Pass, and IMid. 3 [al. without variance, cf. δια-
κρίνω, 2]) : ή άνωθ(ν σοφία, Jas. iii. 1 7 (Ignat. ad Eph.
3, 2 Ίησοΰι Χριστός το αδιάκριτον ημών ζην [yet al. take
the word liei-e i. q. inseparable, ef. Zahn in Patr. Apost.
Opp., ed. (jebh.. Ham. and Zahn, fasc. ii. p. 7 ; see also
in general Zahn, Ignatius, p. 429 note^ ; Bp. Lghtft. on
Ignat. 1. c. ; Soph. Lex.s. v. Used from Hippocr. down.]).*
άειάλειπτοΐ, -ov, (διαλείπω to intermit, leave off), uninter-
millcd, unceasing : Ro. i.\. 2 ; 2 Tim. i. 3. [Tim. Locr. 98 e.]•
άδιαλίίτΓτωϊ, adv., without intermission, incessantly, us-
sldnnnsly : Ro. i. 9 ; 1 Th. i. 2 (3) ; ii. 1 3 ; v. 1 7. [Polyb.,
Diod., Strabo ; 1 Mace. xii. 11.]*
ά-8ια•ψθορ1α, -ef, ij, (fr. αδιάφθορος incorrupt, incor-
ruptible; and this from άδιαφθ^ίρω), incorruptibility,
soundness, integrity : of mind, ev τή διδασκαλία. Tit. ii.
7 (L Τ Tr WH άφθορίαν). Not found in the classics.*
aStKc'u, -ώ ; [fut. άδικήσω~\ ; 1 aor. ήδίκησα ; Pass.,
[pres. άδικοΟ/ιαι] ; 1 aor. ήδικήθην; literally to be άδικοι.
1. absolutely ; a. to act unjustly or wickedly, to sin :
Rev. xxii. 11 ; Col. iii. 25. b. to be a criminal, to have
violated the laws in some way; Acts xxv. 11, (often so
άΒίκ7)μα
12
aSvvaro^
in Grk. writ. [cf. W. § 40, 2 c.]). c. lo do tvroiir/ : 1 Co.
vi. 8 ; 2 Co. vii. 12. d. to do hurt: Rev. ix. 19. 2.
transitively ; a. τί, ίο rfo .some wrong, sin in iiome re-
spect : Col. iii. 2S (o η&ίκησι ' the wrong Avhich lie hath
done '). b. τινά, to wrong some one, act wickeilly
towards him: Acts vii. 26 sq. (by blows); Mt. xx. 13
(by fraud) ; 2 Co. vii. 2 ; pass, άδικίϊσίαι to be
wronged, 2 Co. vii. 12; Acts vii. 24; mid. αδικούμαι
to suffer one's self to be wronged, take wrong [\V.
§ 38, 3; cf. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, § 87 sq.] : 1 Co.
vi. 7; Tiva oihiv [B. § 131, 10; AV. 227 (213)], Acts
ΧΧΛ•. 10; Gal. iv. 12; τινά τι, Philem. 18; \α&ικοϋμ(νοι
μισθον aSiKtas (R. V. siijl'irini/ wrong as the hire of
wrong-doing), 2 Pet. ii. 13 WII Tr mrg.]. c. τινά,
to hurt, damage, harm (in this sense by Greeks of every
period): Lk. x. 19; Rev. vi. 6; vii. 2 sq. ; ix. 4, 10;
xi. 5 ; pass, oi μη άΒικηθη ΐκ τοϋ θανάτου sliall suffer
no violence from dealli, Rev. ii. 11.'
ά&(κη)ΐα, -rof, τό, (άδικΕω), [fr. Hdt. on], a mlsdeeil [τά
ahiKQV . . . όταν ηραχ^θϊ], αδίκημα itrriv, Aristot. £th. Nic.
5, 7]: Acts xviii. 14 ; xxiv. 20 ; Rev. xviii. 5.*
aSiKfa, -as, ή, (aSiKos), [fr. Hdt. down] ; 1. injustice,
of a judge : Lk. xviii. 6 ; Ro. ix. 14. 2. unrighteous-
ness of heart and life; a. iiniv. : Mt. xxiii. 25 Grsb. ;
Acts viii. 23 (see σύνδισμο!) : Ro. i. 18, 29; ii. 8 ; vi.
13; 2 Tim. ii. 19; o])]!. to ή άληθιια, 1 Co. xiii. 6; 2 Th.
ii. 12; opp. to η δικαιοσύνη. Ro. iii. 5; Heb. i. 9 Tdf. ;
owing to the context, the guilt of unrighteousness, 1 Jn.
i. 9 ; απάτη της αδικία: deceit which unrighteousness
uses, 2 Th. ii. 10; μισθοί αδικίας reward (i. e. penalty)
due to unrighteousness, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [see άδικίω, 2 b.
£in.]. b. spec, unrighteousness by which others are
deceived: Jn. vii. 18 (opp. to αληθής); μαμωνάς της
αδικίας deceitful riches, Lk. .xvi. 9 (cf. απάτη του πΧούτου,
!Mt. xiii. 22; others think 'riches wrongly acijuired ' ;
[others, riches apt to be used unrighteously;cf.vs. 8 and
Mey. ad loc.]) ; κόσμος της αδικίας, a phrase having ref-
erence to sins of the tongue, Jas. iii. 6 (cf. κόσμος, 8) ;
treachery, Lk. xvi. 8 (οικονόμος της αδικίας, [al. take it
generally, ' acting unrighteously ']). 3. a deed violat-
ing law and justice, art of unrighteousness : πάσα αδικία
αμαρτία ίστί, 1 Jn. V. 17; ipyarai της αδικίας, Lk. xiii. 27 ;
αϊ άδικίαι iniquities, misdeeds, Ileb. viii. 12 (fr. Sept.
Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34 ; cf. Dan. iv. 20 (24)) ; μισθός
αδικίας reward obtained by wrong-doing. Acts i. 18 ;
2 Pet. ii. 15 ; spec, the wrong of depriving another
of Λvllat is his, 2 Co. xii. 13 (where a favor is ironically
called αδικία).*
ciSiKos, -ov, (δίκη), [fr. lies, down] ; descriptive of one
who violates or has violated j'uslice; 1. unj'ust, (of
God as judge) : Ro. iii. 5; Ileb. vi. 10. 2. of one
who breaks God's laws, unrighteous, sinful, (see αδικία,
2) : [1 Co. vi. 9]; opp. to δίκαιος, Mt. v. 45; Acts xxiv.
15; 1 Pet. iii. 18 ; opp. to (ίσφης, 2 Pet. ii. 9 ; in this
sense ace. to Jewish speech the Gentiles are called
άδικοι, 1 Co. vi. 1 (see αμαρτωλός, b. β.). 3. spec, of
one who deals fraudulently with others, Lk. xviii. 11 ;
ivho is false to a trust, Lk. xvi. 10 (opp. to mcrros) ;
deceitful, μαμωνάς, ibid. vs. 11 (for other interpretations
see αδικία, 2 b.).*
ά5ίκω5, adv., iinjusthj, undeservedly, without fault : πά•
σχιιν, 1 I'et. ii. 19 [A. V. ivrongj'ully. (Fr. Ildt. on.)] *
ΆSμeCv, 0, Admin, the indeel. prop, name of one of
the ancestors of Jesus : Lk. iii. 33, where Tdf. reads
τοϋ Ά8μ€\ν ToC Άρνιί for Rec. toC Άράμ (q. v.), [and A\' 1 1
txt. substitute the same reading for τοΰ Άμιναδάβ τοϋ
Άράμ of R G, but in their mrg. Αδάμ (q. v. 2) for 'Αδμ(ίν ;
on the spelling of the Λvord see their App. p. 155].*
ά-8έκιμο;, -ov, (δόκιμος), [fr. Eur. down], not standinr/
the test, not approved ; properly of metals and coin,
άργύριον. Is. i. 22 ; Prov. xxv. 4 ; νόμισμα. Plat. legg.
V. p. 742 a., al. ; hence, which does not jtrove itself to
be such as it ought : yrj, of sterile soil, Ileb. vi. 8 ; in a
moral sense [A. Λ'', reprobalel, 1 Co. ix. 27; 2 Co. xiii.
5-7 ; νους, Ro. i. 28 ; π(ρ\ την πίστιν, 2 Tim. iii. 8 ;
hence, wift for something : προς πάν epyov αγαθόν άδ.
Tit. i. 16.•
o-SoXos, -ov, (δόλοί), [fr. Pind. down], guileless; of
things, unadulterated, pure : of milk, 1 Pet. ii. 2. [Cf.
Trench § hi.]*
Άεραμνττηνό?, -ή. -όν. adj., of Adramijtiium (Άδραμΰτ-
Tiov. Αδμαμνττίίον, Άδραμμντ€ίον [also *Ατραμυτ.. etc., cf.
I'opjKi, Thuc. pt. i. vol. ii. γ. 441 sq. ; Wetst. on Acts,
as below ; AVIi ' λδραμυντηνός. cf. their Intr. § 408 and
App. p. 160]), a sea-])ort of Mysia : Acts xxvii. 2, [mod-
ern Kdremit, Ytlramil, Adramiti, etc.; cf. Mc. and S.
s. V. Adramyttium].*
'ASpCas [WH Άδ/).], -ov, 6, Adrias, the Adriatic Sea
i. e., in a ivide sen.se, the sea between Greece and Italy :
Acts .χ,χνϋ. 27, [cf. B. D. s. V. Adria; Diet, of Grk. &
Rom. Geog. s. v. Adriaticum Mare].*
όδρότηϊ [Rec;' άδρ.]. -ητος. η. or better (cf. Bttm. Ausf.
Spr. ii. 4 1 7) άδροτης, -ητος. [on the accent cf. Eheling,
Lex. Hum. s. v.; Chandler §§ 634, 635], (fr. αδρός
tliick, stout, full-grown, strong, rich [2 K. x. 6, 11, etc.]),
in Grk. writ, it follows the signif. of the adj. αδρός; once
in the N. T. : 2 Co. viii. 20, bountiful collection, great
liberality, [R. Λ^ bounty'], (άδροσννη, of an abundant
harA'est, lies. epy. 471.)*
ά&υνατ€ω, -ώ : fut. άδννατησω ; (αδύνατος) ; a. not to
have strength, to be weak ; always so of persons in classic
Grk. b. a thing abwaTfl, cannot be done, is impos-
sible ; so only in the Sept. and N. T. : οΰκ άδυνατήσιι
παρά τω θ^ώ [τον θίοΐι L mrg. Τ Tr λΥ II] πάν ρήμα,
Lk. i. 37 (Sept. Gen. xviii. 14) [al. retain the act. sense
here : from God no word shall be without power, see
παρά, I. b. cf. Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc] ;
οϋδϊν άδυνατησιι ίμ'ιν, Mt. χνϋ. 20, (Job xiii. 2).*
ά-Βϋνατοϊ,-οι/. (δΰναμαι), [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. ivithout
strength, impotent : το'ις ποσί. Acts xiv. 8 ; fig. of Chris-
tians whose faith is not yet quite firm, Ro. -xv. 1 (opp.
to δυνατός). 2. impossible (in contrast with δυνατόν) :
παρά Ttvi, for (with) any one, Mt. xix. 26 ; Mk. x. 27 ; Lk•
ΧΛ'ϋΙ. 27; TO άδύν. τον νόμου 'what the law could not do'
(this God effected by, etc. ; [al. take το άδύν. here as nom.
absol., cf. B. 381 (326) ; W. 574 (534) ; Meyer or Gif-
άδα
13
We
ford ad loc.]), Ro. viii. 3 ; foil. b_v ace. with inf., Heb.
vi. 4, 18 ; X. 4 ; by inf., Heb. xi. G.*
qtSiD (άίΐ'δω) ; common in Grk. of every period ; in
Sept. for "'lu' ; to sin;/, chant-, 1. intrans. : rtci, to the
praise of any one (Judith xvi. 1 (2)), Epii. v. 19 ; Col.
iii. 16, (in both passages of the lyrical emotion of a
devout and grateful soul). 2. trans. : ωδην, Rev. v.
9 ; xiv. 3 ; xv. 3.*
«£, [see αΐώνΐ, adv., [fr. Horn, down], alwai/s ; 1. per-
petually, incessantly: Acts vii. 51 ; 2 Co. iv. 11 ; vi. 10;
Tit. i. 12 ; Heb. iii. 10. 2. invariably, at any and every
lime when according to the circumstances sometliing is
or ought to be done again : Mk. xv. 8 [T WH om.] (at
every feast) ; 1 Pet. ui. 15 ; 2 Pet. i. 12.*
otTOs, -oC, 0, (like Lat. avis, fr. άημι on account of its
wind-like flight [of. Curtius § 596]), [fr. Horn, down], in
Sept. for inj, an eagle : Rev. iv. 7 ; viii. 13 ( Rec. ayyiXov) ;
xii. 14. In Mt. xxiv. 28 ; Lk. .wii. 37 (as in Job xx.xix.
30; Prov. xxx. 17) it is better, since eagles are said
seldom or never to go in quest of carrion, to understand
with many interpreters either the vultur percnopterus,
which resembles an eagle (Plin. h. n. 10, 3 "quarti
generis — viz. aquilarum — est percnopterus "), or the
vultur barbatus. Cf. Win. R'WB. s. v. Adler ; [^Tristram,
Nat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 172 sqq.]. The meaning of
the proverb [cf. exx. in Wetst. on Mt. 1. c] quoted in
both passages is, ' where there are sinners (cf. πτώμα),
there judgments from heaven will not be wanting '.*
άζυμ,ο;, -Of, (ζύμη), Ilebr. Πϊ"?, unfermented, free from
leaven ; properly : ΰρτοι, Ex. xxix. 2 ; Joseph, antt.
3,6,6; hence the neut. plur. τα αζυμα, ηΐχ•3, unleavened
loaves ; ή Ιορτη των άζύμων, Π1ϊ'3ΓΙ jn, the (paschal)
festival at which for seven days the Israelites were
accustomed to eat unleavened bread in commemoration
of their exit from Egypt (Ex. xxiii. 15 ; Lev. xxiii. 6),
Lk. xxii. 1 ; ή πρώτη (sc. ημίρα) των αζ. Mt. .\.\vi. 17;
Mk. xiv. 12 ; Lk. .xxii. 7 ; at ήμίραι των άζ. Acts .\ϋ. 3 ;
XX. 6 ; the paschal festival itself is called τ-ά αζυμα, Mk.
xiv. l,[cf. 1 Esdr.i. 10, 19; AV.176(166); B. 23 (21)].
FioTiratively : Christians, if such as they ought to be,
are called afufxoi i. e. devoid of the leaven of iniquity,
free from faults, 1 Co. v. 7; and are admonished
ίορτάζ^ιν if άζύμοίί (TKiKpivelas, to keep festival with the
unleavened bread of sincerity and truth, vs. 8. (The
word occurs twice in prof, auth., viz. Athen. 3, 74
{'ipTov) αζυμον. Plat. Tim. p. 74 d. άζυμοτ <τάρξ flesh not
yet quite formed, [add Galen de alira. fac. 1, 2].) *
Άζώρ, Azor, the indecl. prop, name of one of the
ancestors of Christ : Mt. i. 1 3 sq.*
Άξιβτοϊ, -ου, ή, nntys, Azolus, Ashdod, one of the five
chief cities of the Philistines, lying between Ashkelon
and Jamnia [i. e. Jabneel] and near the Mediterranean :
Acts viii. 40 ; at present a petty village, £.<rfurf. A suc-
cinct history of the city is given by Gesenius, Thesaur.
iii. p. 1366; Rnumer, Palastina, p. 174; [Alex.'s Kitto
or Mc. and S. s. v. Ashdod].*
άη81α, -as, 17, (fr. aijSijs, and this fr. α priv. and 7805
pleasure, delight), [fr. Lysip. down] ; 1. unpleasant-
ness, annoyance. 2. dislike, hatred: iv άη&ΐα, cod.
Cantabr. in Lk. xxiii. 12 for Rec. cv ϊχθρα.'
άήρ, άίρος, 6, (άημι. άω, [of. άν(μο!, init.]), the air (par-
ticularlv the lower and denser, as distinguished from the
higher and rarer ό αίθήρ, cf. Hom. II. 14, 288), the at-
mospheric region : Acts xxii. 23 ; 1 Th. iv. 1 7 ; Rev. i.T.
2 ; xvi. 1 7 ; ό άρχωι> τηΐ εξουσία: τοΰ aepos in Eph. ii. 2
signifies ' the ruler of the powers (spirits, see ίξονσία
4 c. ββ.) in the air," i. e. the devil, the prince of the de-
mons that according to Jewish opinion fiU the realm of
air (cf. Mey. ad loc. ; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Air ; Stuart
in Bib. Sacr. for 1843, p. 139 sq.]). Sometimes indeed,
άηρ denotes a hazy, obscure atmosphere (Hom. Π. 17,
644; 3,381; 5, 356, etc. ; Polyb. 18, 3, 7), but is nowhere
quite equiv. to σκότοί, — the sense which many injudi-
ciously assign it in Eph. I. c. άίρα 8epciv (cf. verberat
ictibus auras, Verg. Aen. 5, 377, of pugilists who miss
their aim) i. e. to contend in vain, 1 Co. ix. 26 ; «r
iepa λαλΰν (verba ventis profundere, Lucr. 4, 929 (932))
' to speak into the air ' i. e. without effect, used of
those who speak what is not understood by the hearers,
1 Co. xiv. 9.*
άθαναο-ία, -as. 17. (αθάνατος), immortality : 1 Co. xv.
53 sq. ; 1 Tim. vi. 16 where God is described as ό μόνος
ΐχων άθανασίαν. because he possesses it essentially — ' ίκ
της οίκΐίας οίσίας, ονκ (κ θίΚηματος αΚ\ον, καθαπΐρ οί λοιποί
πάντες αθάνατοι ' Justin, quaest. et resp. ad orthod. 61
p. 84 ed. Otto. (In Grk. writ. fr. Plato down.) *
α-θίμιτοϊ, -Dv, a later form for the ancient and prefer-
able άθίμίστος, (θεμιτός, θιμίστός, θ(μίζω. θίμις law,
right), contrary to late and justice, prohibited by laiv,
illicit, criminal : 1 Pet. iv. 3 [here A. V. abominable'] ;
άθ^μιτόν (στί τινι with inf., Acts x. 28.*
OL-Oeos, -OK, (θΐός). [fr. Pind. down], u-ithout God, knotc-
inq and worshipping no God, in which sense Ael. v. h.
2, 31 declares ότι μηδ(\ς των βαρβάρων 3θ(ος; in classic
auth. feneraUv slighting the gods, impious, repudiating
the gods recognized by the state, in which sense certain
Greek philosophers, the Jews (Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 14, 4),
and subsequently Christians were called oieoi by the
heathen (Justin, apol. 1, 13, etc.). In Eph. ii. 12 of
one who neither knows nor worsliips the true God;
so of the heathen (cf. 1 Th. iv. 5 ; Gal. iv. 8) ; Clem.
Alex, protr. ii. 23 p. 19 Pott. άθ(ονς . . . o2 τον όντως όντα
θ(6ν ηγνηήκασι, Philo, leg. ad Gai. § 25 αιγυπτιακή πθ(ότης,
Hos. iv. 15 Symm. o'/cos άθιιας a house in which idols are
worshipped, Ignat. ad Trail. 10 άθίοι τουτίστιν άπιστοι
(of the Docetae) ; [al. understand Eph. 1. c. passively
deserted of God, Vulg. sine Deo ; on the various mean-
ings of the word see Mey. (or EUic.)].*
ά-θ«τμοΐ, -ox, (θfσμός), lawless, [A. V. wicked] ; of one
who breaks through the restraints of law and gratifies
liis lusts: 2 Pet. ii. 7; iii. 17. [Sept., Diod., Philo,
Joseph., Plut.]*
άθ(Τ€'ω, -<ΰ ; fut. άθιτήσω ; 1 aor. ηθίτησα : a word met
with first (yet very often) in Sept. and Polyb. ; a.
properly, to render αθιτον ; do away with θιτόν τι i. e.
something laid doicn, prescribed, established : διαθηκην, Gal.
άθίτησι<;
14
Λίβιυψ
iii. 15, (1 Mace. xi. 30 ; 2 Mace. xiii. 25, etc.) ; ace. to
tlie context, ' to act towards anything as though it ivere
annulled ' ; hence to deprive a law of force hy opinions
or acts opposed to it, to trantigrc^s it, Mk. vii. 9 ; Ileb.
X. 28, (Ezek. .xxii. 26) ; η'ιστιν, to break one's promise
or engagement, 1 Tim. v. 12; (Tolyb. 8, 2, 5; 11, 2!), 3,
al.; Diod. excerpt, [i. e. de virt. et vit.] p. 5()2, 07).
Ilence b. to thwart llie e/ficnr;/ υ/ (iiiijthing, iiulli/i/,
muke void, fruKlrale : την βουΚην τοί θ(οϋ, Lk. vii. 30
(they ren(U'red inelficaciuus tlie saving purpose of God) ;
την avvfaiv to render prudent plans of no effect, 1 Co.
i. 19 (Is. xxix. 14 [where κρύψω, yet cf. Bos's note]).
c. to reject, refuse, slight : την χάριν τοΟ Beoi, Gal. ii. 21
Pal. refer this to b.] ; of persons : Alk. vi. 26 (by break-
'iug the promise given her); Lk. x. 16; Jn. .xii. 48;
1 Th. iv. 8 ; Jude 8 (for wliicli καταφρονιΐν is u.sed in
the parallel pass. 2 Pet. ii. 10). [For exx. of the use
of tliis woril see Soph. Lex. s. v.]*
άθίτηΐΓκ, -(ως, ή, {άθίτίω, q. v. ; like νονθίτησίί fr.
νονθΐτίΐν), abolition : Ileb. vii. 18 ; ix. 26 ; (found occa-
sionally in later authors, as Cicero ad Att. 6, 9 ; Diog.
Laert. 3, 39, CC ; in the grammarians rejection \ more
frequently in eccl. writ.).*
•Αθήναι, -£>v, al, (on the plur. cf. W. 176 (166)),
.■l//itii.v, the most celebrated city of Greece: Acts xvii.
15 sq. ; xviii. 1 ; 1 Th. iii. 1.*
'Αθηναίο;, -aia, -a'tov, Athenian: Acts xvii. 21 sip*
άίλίω, -ώ ; [1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. άθλήση'Ι ;
(άθλος a contest) ; to engage in a contest, contend in
pulAic games (e. g. Olympian, Pythian, Isthmian), with
the poniard [?], gauntlet, quoit, in wrestling, running,
or any other way : 2 Tim. ii. 5 ; (often in classic auth.
who also use the form άθλ(ύω). [Comp. : συν-αθλίω.] '
άθλησίΒ, -(ως, ή, contest, conihat, (freq. fr. Polyb. down) ;
fi^. άί^λι^σΐΓ παθημάτων a struggle with sufferings, trials,
Ileb X. 32; [of martyrdom, Ign. mart. 4 ; Clem. mart. 2.5].*
όθροΟζω : pf. pass. ptcp. ηθροισμίνος ; (f r. αθρόος i. q.
θρόος [a noisy crowd, noise], with η copulative [see A,
a, 2]) ; to collect together, assemble; pass, to be asse7nbled,
to convene : Lk. xxiv. 33 L Τ Tr WII. ([.Soph.,] Xen.,
Plat., Polyb., Plut., al. ; O. T. Apocr. ; sometimes in
Sept. for i'3p.) [CoMP. : «π-, συν-αθροίζω.Ί '
άθυμιω, -ώ ; common among the (ireeks fr. [Aeschyl.,]
TIhic. down; to be άθυμος (θυμός spirit, courage), to be
disheartened, dispirited, broken in spirit: Col. iii. 21.
(SLqit. 1 S. i. 6 sq., etc. ; Judith vii. 22 ; 1 Mace. iv.
27.)•
άθωο$ [R G Tr], more correctly αθώος (L WH and Τ
[but not in his Sept. There is want of agreement among
both the ancient gramm. and modern scholars ; cf. Steph.
Thes. i. col. 875 c. ; Lob. Path. Element, i. 440 sq. (cf.
ii. 377) ; see I, «]), -ov, (θωή [i. e. θα:'ίη, cf. Etym. Mag.
p. 26, 24] punishment), [fr. Plat, down], unpunished,
innocent: αΤμα άθώον, Mt. xxvii. 4 [Tr mrg. WH txt.
δίκαιον'], (Deut. xxvii. 25 ; 1 S. xix. 5, etc. ; 1 Mace. i.
37; 2 Mace. i. 8) ; από τίνος, after the Hebr. Ρ "i??
([Num. xxxii. 22 ; cf. Gen. xxiv. 41 ; 2 S. iii. 28 ; W. 197
(185); B. 158 (138)]), ' innocent (and therefore far)
from,' innocent of, Matt, xxvii. 24 (the guilt of the mur-
der of this innocent man cannot be laid upon me) ; άπο
της αμαρτίας, Clem. Kom. 1 Cor. 59, 2 [cf. Num. v. 31].
The Greeks say άθώός τίνος [both in the sense of free
from and unpunished for].'
αϊγιιοϊ [WH -yior ; see their App. p. 154, and I, i],
-fia, -fiov, (,αίξ, gen. ^ur goat, male or female), of it goat,
(cf. καμηλίΐυς, ιππίίος, Cfios, προβάτίίος, etc.) : Heb. xi.
37. [From Horn, down.]*
al-yiaXds, -οΰ, ό, the shore of the sea, beach, [fr. Hom.
down] : Mt. xiii. 2, 48 ; Jn. xxi. 4 ; Acts xxi. 5 ; xxvii.
39, 40. (Many derive the word from άγννμι and aXr, as
though equiv. to ακτή, the place where the sea breaks ;
others fr. aιγfς billows and αΚς [Curtius § 140 ; Vanicek p.
83] ; others fr. αΐσσω and αλί [Schcnkl, L. and S., s. v.],
the [ilace where the sea rushes forth, bounds forward.)*
ΑΙγύτΓτιοϊ, -a, -ov, a gentile adjective, Egyptian : Acts
vii. 22, 24, 28 ; xxi. 38 ; Ileb. xi. 29.*
ΑϊγυίΓΓΟϊ, -ου, ή, [always without the art., B. 87 (70) ;
W. § 18, 5 a.], the ])roper name of a well-known coun-
try, Egupt : Mt. ii. 13 sq. ; Acts ii. 10 ; Heb. iii. 16, etc. ;
more fully yrj Αΐγνπτος, Acts vii. 36 [not L WH Tr txt.],
40 ; xiii. 17 ; Heb. viii. 9 ; Jude 5, (Ex. v. 12 ; vi. 26,
etc. ; 1 Mace. i. 19 ; Bar. i. 19 sq., etc.) ; ή γη Αίγυπτος,
Acts vii. 11 ; iv Αΐγνπτου sc. yfj, Heb. xi. 26 Lclim.,
but cf. Bleek ad loc. ; B. 171 (149); [W. 384 (359)].
In Rev. xi. 8 Ai'y. is figuratively used for Jerusalem i. e.
for the Jewish nation viewed as persecuting Christ and
his followers, and so to be Ukencd to the Egyptians in
their ancient hostility to the true God and their endeav-
ors to crush his peoi)le.
dtSios, -ov, (for aciSios fr. oft), eternal, everlasting :
(.Sap. vii. 26) Ro. i. 20 ; Jude 6. (Hom. hj-mn. 29, 3 ;
lies. scut. 310, and fr. Thuc. down in prose; [freq. in
Philo, e. g. de profug. § 18 (ζωΐ) oiStos•), § 31 ; de oj)if.
mund. § 2, § 61 ; de cherub. § 1, § 2, § 3 ; de post.
Cain. § 11 fin. Syx. sec αΐώνιοί].) *
alSus, (-όος) -οΰς. ή ; f r. Ilom. down ; a sense of shame,
modi'stg : 1 Tim. ii. 9 ; reverence, Ileb. .xii. 28 (XoTpeueiv
θ(ώ μ(τά αϊδοΟί και (ΐ^αβ(ίας, but L Τ Tr WH (ΰλαβιίας
κα'ι d(ovs). [Sys. αι8ως, αισχύνη : Ammonius distin-
guishes the words as follows, αΙδως και αισχύνη διαφέρει,
ΟΤΙ ή μίν αιδώς ΐστιν (ντροπή προς ΐκαστον, ως σ^βομίνως
τις (χ(ΐ ' αισχύνη δ εφ οίς (καστος άμαρτων αισχυνΐται. ώς
μη δίον τι πράζας- και αιδί'ιται μξν τις τον πατέρα • αισχύν€-
ται hk (ις μιθύσκίται, etc., etc. ; accordingly αϊδ• is ]iromi-
nciitly objective in its reference, having regard to
others ; while αίσχ. is subjective, making reference to
one's self and one's actions. Cf. Schmidt ch. 140. It is
often said that ' αίδ. precedes and prevents the shame-
ful act, αΙσχ- reflects upon its consequences in the shame
it brings with it' (Cope, Aristot. rhet. 5, 6, 1). οϊδ.
is the nobler word, αΙσχ. the stronger; while " αίδ. would
always restrain a good man from an unworthy act, αΙσχ.
would sometimes restrain a bad one." Trench §§ xix.
XX.] •
Αίθίοψ, -οποΓ. ό. (αϊθω to burn, and ωψ [ό'ψ•] the face ;
swarthy), Ethiopian (Hebr. "^13): .Vcls viii. 27, here
ί-ιμα
15
αίμορροεω
the reference is to upper Ethiopia, called Habesh or
Abyssiaia, a country of Africa adjoining Egypt and
including the island Meroe ; [see Dillmann in Schenkel
i. 285 sqq. ; Alex.'s Kitto or Me. and S. s. v. Ethiopia.
Cf. Bib. Sacr. for 1866, p. 515].•
αίμα, -ΤΟΓ. TO, blood, whether of men or of animals ;
1. a. simply and generally : Jn. .xL\. 34 ; Rev. viii. 7
sq. ; xi. 6 ; xvi. 3 sq. 6 '' (on which passages cf. E.\. vii.
20 sqq.) ; xix. 13 ; piais αΐματο!, Jlk. v. 25, [^{πηγη αίμ.
29)] ; Lk. viii. 43 sq. ; θρόμβοι, αϊματο!, Lk. xxii. 44
[L br. WH reject the pass.]. So also in passages where
the eating of blood (and of bloody flesh) is forbidden,
Acts XV. 20, 29 ; xxi. 25 ; cf. Lev. iii. 17 ; vii. 16 (26) ;
xvii. 10 ; see Knobel on Lev. vii. 26 sq. ; [Kalisch on
Lev., Preliminary Essay § 1] ; Ruckert, Abendmahl, p.
94. b. As it was anciently believed that the blood is
the seat of the Ufe (Lev. xvii. 11 ; [cf. Delitzsch, Bibl.
Psychol, pp. 238-247 (Eng. trans, p. 281 sqq.)]), the
phrase σαρξ κ. αίμα (ΠΊΙ ""i^?, a common phrase in Rab-
binical writers), or in inverse order αίμα κ- σαρξ, denotes
man's hving body compounded of flesh and blood, 1 Co.
XV. 50 ; Heb. ii. 14, and so hints at the contrast between
man and God (or even the more exalted creatures, Eph.
vi. 12) as to suggest his feebleness, Eph. vi. 12 (Sir. xiv.
18), which is conspicuous as respects the knowledge of
divine things. Gal. i. 16 ; Mt. ΧΛ -i. 17. c. Since the
first germs of animal life are thought to be in the blood
(Sap. vii. 2; Eustath. ad Ή. 6, 211 (ii. 104, 2) to δε αίματοί
αυτί τοΰ σπίρματόί φασιν οί σοφοί, ώί τον σπίρματο! ϋλην
το αίμα e;(oiTos•), the word serves to denote generation
and origin (in the classics also) : Jn. i. 13 (on the plur.
cf. W. 177 (166)); Acts xvii. 26 [R G]. d. It is
used of those thinirs which by their redness resemble
blood : al σταφυ}ίηζ the juice of the grape [' the blood
of grapes,' Gen. xlix. 11 ; Deut. xxxii. 14], Sir. x.xxLx.
26; 1. 15; 1 Mace. vi. 34, etc.; Achill. Tat. ii. 2; ref-
erence to this is made in Rev. xiv. 18-20. els αίμα,
of the moon, Acts ii. 20 (Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4)), i. q. is αϊμα.
Rev. vi. 12. 2. hloo'l shed or to be shed bij violence
(very often also in the classics) ; a. : Lk. xiii. 1 (the
meaning is, whom Pilate had ordered to be massacred
while they were sacrificing, so that their blood minsled
with the blood [yet cf. W. 623 (579)] of the victims) ;
at άθωον [or SUaiov Tr mrg. WH txt.] the blood of an
innocent [or righteous] man viz. to be shed, Mt. xxvii.
4 ; (κχ(1ν and (κχΰν^ιν αίμα (DT '^3U', Gen. hi. 6 ; Is. lix.
7, etc.) to shed blood, slat/, Mt. xxiii. 35 ; Lk. xi. 50 ;
Acts xxii. 20; Ro. iii. 15; Rev. xvi. 6• [here Tdf.
αίματα^ ; hence αϊμα is used for the bloody death itself :
Mt. xxiii. 30, 35; xxvii. 24; Lk. xi. 51; Acts [ii. 19,
yet cf. 1 d. above ;] xx. 26 ; Rev. xvii. 6 ; μίχρίί αίμα-
τοί unto blond i. e. so as to undergo a bloody death,
Heb. xii. 4, (τόκ αίτιον Trjs . . . μίχρί! αίματος στάσεως,
Heliod. 7, 8) ; τιμή αίματος ' price of blood ' i. e. price
received for murder, Mt. .xxvii. 6 ; d-ypos αίματος field
bought with the price of blood. Mt. xxvii. 8, i. q. χωρίον
αίματος. Acts i. 19 — unless in this latter passaare we
prefer the explanation, which agrees better with the
context, 'the field dyed with the blood of Judas';
the guilt and punishment of bloodshed, in the following
Hebraistic expressions: (v αίτί} αίματα (Rec. αίμα [so L
Tr WH]) (νρίθη i. e. it was discovered that she was
guilty of murders. Rev. xviii. 24 (cf. ηόΚις αιμάτων,
Ezek. XXIV. 6) ; το αϊμα αυτοΰ 4φ' ημάς (sc. (\θ(Τω) let
the penalty of the bloodshed fall on us, Mt. xxvii. 25 ;
TO αίμα νμών ίτη την κίφαλην ίμων (sc. ί\ΘΙτω) let the
guilt of your destruction be reckoned to your own ac-
count, Acts xviii. 6 (cf. 2 S. i. 16 ; Josh. ii. 19, etc.) ;
(Ttayiiv TO αιμά τίνος ίπί τίνα to cause the punishment of
a murder to be visited on any one. Acts v. 28 ; ίκζητί'ιν
TO αιμά τίνος από τίνος ('2 TO '2 D'l ίϊΡ3, 2 S. iv. 11 ;
Ezek. iii. 18, 20; .xxxiii. 8), to exact of any one the
penalty for another's death, Lk. xi. 50 ; the same idea
is expressed by ίκ8ικ(ίν το αϊμά τίνος, Rev. vi. 10 ; xix.
2. b. It is used specially of the blood of sacrificial
victims having a purifying or expiating power (Lev.
xvii. 11): Heb. Lx. 7, 12 sq. 18-22, 25; x. 4 ; xi. 28;
xiii. 11. c. Frequent mention is made in the N. T.
of the blood of Christ (αϊμα τοΰ Χριστού, 1 Co. χ. 16 ;
τοΰ κυρίου, xi. 27; τοΐι όρνιου. Rev. νϋ. 14; χϋ. 11, cf.
xix. 13) shed on the cross (al. τοΰ σταυροί. Col. i. 20) for
the salvation of many, Mt. .xxvi. 28 : Mk. xiv. 24. cf.
Lk. xxii. 20; the pledge of redemption, Eph. i. 7 {άττσ-
λντρωσίΓ δια τοΰ αι αυτοΰ ; so too in Col. i. 14 Rec.) ;
1 Pet. i. 19 (see αγοράζω, 2 b.); having expiatory efli-
cacy, Ro. iii. 25 ; Heb. ix. 12 ; by which beUevers are
purified and are cleansed from the guilt of sin, Heb. ix.
14; xii. 24; [xiii. 12]; 1 Jn. i. 7 (cf. 1 Jn. v. 6, 8) : Rev.
i. 5 ; vii. 14 ; 1 Pet. i. 2 ; are rendered acceptable to
God, Ro. V. 9, and find access into the heavenlv sanc-
tuary, Heb. X. 19: by which the Gentiles are brought
to God and the blessings of his kingdom, Eph. ii. 13,
and in general all rational beings on earth and in
heaven are reconciled to God, Col. i. 20; with which
Christ purchased for himself the church, Acts xx. 28,
and gathered it for God, Rev. v. 9. Moreover, since
Christ's dying blood served to establish new reUsrious
institutions and a new relationship between men and
God, it is hkened also to a federative or covenant sacri-
fice : TO αϊμα της διαθήκης the blood by the shedding of
which the covenant should be ratified, Mt. xxvi. 28 ;
Mk. xiv. 24, or has been ratified, Heb. x. 29 ; xiii. 20
(cf. hi. 20) ; add, 1 Co. xi. 25 ; Lk. xxii. 20 [ΛΥΗ reject
this pass.] (in both which the meaning is, ' this cup con-
taining wine, an emblem bf blood, is rendered bv the
shedding of my blood an emblem of the new covenant '),
1 Co. xi. 27 ; (cf. Cic. pro Sestio 10, 24 foedus san-
guine meo ictum sanciri, Liv. 23, 8 sanguine Hannibalis
sanciam Romanum foedus). mvfiv τό αϊμα αυτοΰ (i. e.
of Christ), to appropriate the saving results of Christ's
death, Jn. vi. 53 sq. 56. [ Wcslcolt, Epp. of Jn. p. 34 sq.]•
αίμ.ατ€κχυσ(α, -ay, ή, (αϊμα and tκχίvω), shedding of
blood : Heb. Lx. 22. Several times also in eicl. writ.*
αίμορρο<ω, -ω ; to be α'ιμόρροος (αίμα and ρ/ω), lo sufft'
from a flow of blood: -Mt. ix. 20. (Sept. Lev. xv. SS,
where it means menstruous, and in medical writ.^ *
Aivea^
]6
ιρω
ACvc'as, -ov, 6, Ae'neas, the prop, ικιιηυ of the parar
lytic cured by Peter : Acts ix. 83 sq.•
alvciris, -<a>r, ή, (aiwa), praise: θυσία alvcaews (Π3Ι
rrjinn, Lev. vii. 13), Ileb. xiii. 15 a tkunk-offerinii,
[A. V. ' sacrifice of praise '], presented to God for some
benefit received ; see θυσία, b. (αΧικαις often occurs in
Sept., but not in prof, auth.) '
otvi'ii), -ώ; (found in prof. auth. of every age [" only
twice in good Attic prose " (where ίπαιν. παραιν. etc.
take its place), Veitch], but csp. freq. in Sept. and the
Apocr. of the O. T.; from aivos); to praise, extol: τον
β(όν, Lk. ii. 13, 20; xix. 37; x.\iv. 53 [AVH om. Tr txt.
br.]; Acts ii. 47; iii. 8 sq.; Ro. xv. 11; with dat. of
person, τώ θ(ώ, to sing praises in honor of God, Rev.
xix. 5 l't Tr WH, as Sept. in 2 Chr. vii. 3 (for
h ΠΤΠ), 1 Chr. xvi. 36; xxiii. 5; Jer. xx. 13 etc. (for
4 S^Vl) ; [W. § 31, 1 £.; B. 176 (153). Comp. eV-, παρ-
αινί'ω.].*
αίνιγμα, -ros, τό, (common fr. [Pind. frag. 165 (190),]
Aeschvl. down ; fr. αΐνίσσομαι or αΐνίττομαί τι to express
something obscurely, [fr. αΓίΌί, q. V.]); 1. an obscure
saying, an enigma, Hebr. Π"1'Π (Judg. xiv. 13, Sept.
ιτρόβλημα). 2. an obscure thing: 1 Co. xiii. 12, where
ff αιιήγματί is not equiv. to αινιγματικών i. e. άμαυρώς
obscurely, but denotes the object in the discerning of
which w6 are engaged, as βλίπιιν ίν τινι, Mt. vi. 4 ; cf.
De Wette ad loc. ; the apostle has in mind Num. xii.
8 Sept. : tv tibei και ου hi αινιγμάτων. [ΑΙ. take iv lo-
cally, of the sphere in which we are looking ; al. refer
the pass, to 1. and take (v instrumentally.] *
alvos, -ου, ό, (often used by the Grk. poets) ; 1. a
saying, proverb. 2. praise, laudatory discourse : Mt.
xxi. 16 (Ps. viii. 3) ; Lk. xviii. 43.*
Αίνων, ή, (either a strengthened form of ["j* and equiv.
to •γ},\ or a Chaldaic plur. i. q. Jir;" sjmngs ; [al. al.]),
AdiDii, indecl. prop, name, either of a place, or of a
fountain, not far from Salim : Jn. iii. 23, [thought to ba
Wady Far 'ah, running from Mt. Ebal to the Jordan ; see
Conderin "Pal. Explor. Fund"for July 1874,p.l91 sq.;
Tent Work in Palestine, i. 91 sq. ; esp. aVei-ens in Journ.of
Exeget.Soc, Dec. 18S3, pp. 128-141. Cf. B.D. Ara.ed.].*
atpco-ts, -€(»s, ή ; 1. (fr. αίμ^ω), act of talcing, cap-
ture : τήί πόλίωί, the storming of a city ; in prof. auth.
2. (fr. α'φίομαι), choosing, choice, very often in prof.
writ. : Sept. Lev. xxii. 18 ; 1 Mace. viii. 30. 3. that
which is chosen, a chosen course of thought and action ;
hence one's chosen opinion, tenet ; ace. to the context,
an opinion varying from the true exposition of the
Christian faith (^heresy) : 2 Pet. ii. 1 (cf. De Wette ad
loc.), and in eccl. writ. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]. 4. a
body of men separating themselves from others and
following their own tenets [n sect or party"] : as the Sad-
ducees. Acts v. 1 7 ; the Pharisees, Acts xv. 5 ; xxvi. 5 ;
the Christians, Acts xxiv. 5, 14 (in both instances with
a suggestion of reproach) ; xxviii. 22, (in Diog. LaSrt.
1 (13,) 18 sq., al., used of the schools of philosophy).
5. dissensions arising from diversity of opinions and
urns : Gal. v. 20 ; 1 Co. xi. 19. [Cf. Mey. II. cc. ; B.D.
I Am. ed. s. v. Sects ; Burton, Bampt. Lect. for 1829 ;
Campbell, Diss, on the Gospels, diss. ix. pt. iv.] *
οΙρ€τ£5ω : 1 aor. ^ρίτισα [Treg. ήρ., see I, t] ; (fr. alpe-
TOs, see α'ιρίω) ; to choose : Mt. xii. 18. (Often in Sept. in
O. T. Apocr. and in eccl. writ. ; the mid. is found in
Ctes. Pers. § 9 [cf. Hdt. ed. Schweig. vi. 2, p. 354]. Cf.
Slur:, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 144.) '
alpETiKOs, -η, -όν, [see αίρίω] ; 1. filed or able to
take or choose a thing ; rare in prof. auth. 2. schis-
matic, facliotis, a follower of false doctrine : Tit. iii. 10.•
alpc'u, -ώ : [thought by some to be akin to άγρα, άγρίω,
χιίρ, Eng. grip, etc.; cf. Bitm. Lexil. i. 131 — but see
Curtius § 117]; to take. In the N. T. in the mid.
only : fut. α'φησομαι ; 2 aor. (Ί\6μην, but G L Τ Tr WH
ύλάμην, 2 Th. ii. 13, cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH.
App. p. 1G5;] W. § 13, 1 a.; B. 40(35), see άπίρχομαι
init. ; [ptcp. cKopevoi, Ileb. xi. 25] ; to take for one's self to
choose, pmfcr : Phil. i. 22; 2 Th. ii. 13; μ3λλον foil,
by inf. with ή (common in Attic), Heb. xi. 25. [Comp. :
av-, αφ-, di-i ίξ-, καθ-, vepi-, προ-αιρίω.] *
οϊρω (contr. fr. poet, ά(ίρω) ; fut. άρω; 1 aor. ηρα,
inf. 3pa«, impv. Spov ; pf. ηρκα (Col. ii. 14) ; Pass.,
[pres. αίρομαι]; pf. ημμαι (Jn. xx. 1); 1 aor. ήρθην;
(on the rejection of iota subscr. in these tenses see
Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. pp. 413, 439;['W. 47 (46)]); 1 fut.
άρθήσομαι ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; in the Sejit. generally i. q.
Niyj ; lo lift up, 7-aise. 1. to raise up ; a. to raise
from the ground, lake up : stones, Jn. viii. 59 ; serpents,
Mk. xvi. 18 ; a dead body, Acts xx. 9. b. to raise up-
icards, elevate, lifi up : the hand. Rev. x. 5 ; the eyes,
Jn. xi. 41 ; the voice, i. e. speak in a loud tone, cry
out, Lk. xvii. 13; Acts iv. 24, (also in prof, writ.);
την ψυχήν, to raise the mind, i. q. excite, affect strongly
(with a sense of fear, hope, joy, grief, etc.); in Jn. x.
24 to hold the mind in suspense between doubt and
hope, cf. Liicke [or Jlcyer] ad loc. c. to draw np :
a fish, Mt. xvii. 27 {άνασττάν, Ilab. i. 15); σκάφην. Acts
xxvii. 1 7 ; anchons from the bottom of the sea, Acts xxvii.
13, where supply ras άγκυρα!; cf. Kuinocl ad loc; [AV.
594 (552) ; B. 146 (127)]. 2. to take upon one's selj
and carry what has been raised, to bear : τινά «πί χάρων,
Mt. iv. 6 ; Lk. iv. 11, (Ps. xc. (xci.) 12) ; a sick man,
Mk. ii. 3 ; ζυγόν, Mt. xi. 29 (Lam. iii. 27) ; a bed, Mt.
ix. 6; Mk. ii. 9, Π sq. ; Lk. v. 24 sq. ; Jn. v. 8-12:
τον σταυροί', Mt. [χ. 38 Lchm. mrg.]; xvi. 24; xxvii. 32;
Lk. ix. 23 ; Mk. viii. 34 ; x. 21 [in R Lbr.] ; xv. 21 ; [λίθον,'}
Rev. xviii. 21 ; to carry with one, [A. V. take] : Mk. vi. 8•
Lk. ix. 3 ; xxii. 36. Both of these ideas are expressed
in class. Grk. by the mid. α'ρίσθαι. 3. to bear away
what has been raised, carry off; a. to move from its
place : Mt. xxi. 21 ; Mk. xi. 23, (μρθητι be thou taken up,
removed [B. 52 (45)], sc. from thy place); Alt. xxii.
13 [Rec.]; Jn. ii. 16; xi. 39, 41; x.x. 1. b. to take
off or away what is attached to anything: Jn. xix. 31,
38 sq. ; to tear away, Mt. ix. 16 ; Mk. ii. 21 ; to rend
away, cut off, Jn. xv. 2. c. to remove : 1 Co. v. 2
(cast out from the church, where άρθ{ι should be read
for Rec. (ξαρθή) ; tropically : faults, Eph. iv. 31 ; fijr
αΙσθάνομαι
11
άμαρτίαν, Jn. i. 29, [36 Lchra. in br.], to remove the guilt
and punishment of sin by expiation, or to cause that sin
be neither imputed nor punished {alpftv αμάρτημα., 1 S.
XV. 25 ; ανόμημα, 1 S. xxv. 28, i. e. to grant pardon for
an offence) ; but in 1 Jn. iii. 5 τας αμαρτία^ ημών alptiv
is to cause our sins to cease, i. e. that we no longer sin,
while we enter into fellowship \vith Christ, who is free
from sin, and abide in that fellowship, cf. vs. 6. d. to
carry off, carry away with one: Mt. xiv. 12, 20 ; xv. 37;
XX. 14; xxiv. 17 sq. ; Mk. vi. 29,43; viii. 8, 19 sq. ;
xiii. 15 sq. ; Lk. ix. 17; xvii. 31 ; Jn. xx. 2, 13, 15;
Acts XX. 9. e. to appropriate what is taken : Lk.
xix. 21- sq.; Mk. xv. 24. f. to lake away from another
what is his or what is committed to him, to take hy force :
Lk. vi. 30 ; xi. 52 ; τϊ από with gen. of pers., Mt. xiii.
12; xxi. 43; xxv. 28; Lk. viii. 12, 18; xix. 24, 26;
[Mt. XXV. 29]; Mk. iv. (15), 25; Jn. x. 18; xvi. 22;
perhaps also with the mere gen. of the pers. from whom
anj-thing is taken, Lk. vi. 29 ; xi. 22 ; Jn. xi. 48, unless
one prefer to regard these as possessive gen. g. to take
and apply to any use: Acts xxi. 11; 1 Co. vi. 15. h. to
fake from among the liviny, either by a natural death,
Jn. .xvii. 15 (ex τοΐι κόσμου take away from intercourse
with the world), or by violence. 'Sit. x.xiv. 39 ; Lk.
xxiii. 18; Jn. xix. 15; Acts xxi. 36; with the addition
of από TTJs γη!, Acts x.xii. 22 ; a'perai από τ^γ yrjs ή ζωη
αύτοΟ, of a bloody death inflicted upon one. Acts viii. 33
(Is. liii. 8). i. of things; to take out of the way, de-
stroy : χ(ΐρ6γραφον. Col. ii. 14 ; cause to cease : την
κρίσιν, Acts viii. 33 (Is. liii. 8). [Comp. : air-, (ξ-, eV-,
μ€τ-, σνν-, ύπερ-αίρω.] *
αίσ-θάνομαι : 2 aor. ήσθόμην ; [fr. Aeschyl. down] ;
depon. mid. to perceive ; 1. by the bodily senses ;
2. with the min<l : to understand : Lk. ix. 45.'
ο£ο•βη(Γΐ5, -cws, ή, (αισθάνομαι), [fr. Eurip. down], per-
ception, not only by the senses but also by the intellect ;
cognition, discernment; (in the Sept., Prov. i. 22; ii. 10,
etc., i. q. nifl): Phil. i. 9, of moral discernment, the
understanding of ethical matters, as is plain from what
is added in vs. 10.*
αίσθητήριον, -ov, τό, an organ of perception, external
sense, [Hippoc] ; Plat. Ax. 366 a. ; Aristot. polit. 4, 3,
9, a\.; faculty of the mind for perceiving, understanding,
judging, Heb. v. 14, (Jer. iv. 19 αίσθητ. της καρδίας,
4 Mace. ii. 22 [com. text] τα ίνίον αισθητήρια).'
α1(ΓχροκΕρ8ή$, -e's, (αΙσχρός and κίρΒος; cf. αισχρσπαθής
in Philo [de mere, meretr. § 4]), eager for bane gain,
[greedy of filthy lucre^ : 1 Tim. iii. 3 Rec, 8 ; Tit. i. 7.
(Hdt. 1, 187; Xen., Plat., al.; [cf. turpilucricupidus.
Plant. Trin. 1, 2, 63].)*
aUrxpoKtpSus, z,d.y.,from eagerness for base gain, [ybr
filthy lucre']: 1 Pet. v. 2, cf. Tit. i. 11. Xot found
elsewhere.*
αΙ<Γχρολογ{α, .<ij, ή, (fr. αισχρόΧόγος, and this f r. αισχρός
and λl•yω),foul speaking (TertuU. turpiloquium), low and
obscene speech, [R. V. shameful speaking'] : Col. iii. 8.
(Xen., Aristot., Polyb.) [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ; Trench
§ xxxiv.]•
aUrxpoi,-a,-ov, (fr. αίσχος baseness, disgrace), base, dis-
honorable: 1 Co. xi. 6; .xiv. 35; Eph. v. 12; Tit. i. 11.•
αίσχρότηβ, -ητος, ή, baseness, dishonor : Eph. v. 4
[A. Y.filthiness]. (Plat. Gorg. 525 a.)*
αΙ<Γχίνη, -7)Γ, ή, (αίσχος [cf. αισχρός]) ; 1. subjec-
tively, ί /ie confusion of one who is ashamed of anything,
sense of shame : per αίσχΰνης suffused with shame, Lk.
XIV. 9 ; τα κρντττά της αισχύνης those tilings which
shame conceals, opp. to φανίρωσις της άληθ(ίας, 2 Co. iv.
2 (evil arts of which one ought to be ashamed). 2. ob-
jectively, ignominy : visited on one by the wicked, Heb.
xii. 2 : which ought to arise from guilt, Phil. iii. 1 9
(opp. to δόξα). 3. a thing to be ashamed of: ή αισχύνη
της γνμνότητυς (gen. of appos.) nakedness to be ashamed
of. Rev. iii. 18, cf. .xvi. 15 ; plur. [cf. W. 176 (166)] ai
αίσχνναι basenesses, disgraces, shameful deeds, Jude 13.
[(Aeschyl., Hdt., al.) Syx see αιδώς, fin.] *
αΐίτχίνω : (αίσχος [cf. αισχρός]) ; 1. Ιο disfigure :
ιτρόσΐΰπον, Horn. Β. 18, 24, and many others. 2. to
dishonor: Sept. Prov. xxLx. 15. 3. to suffu.se with
shame, make ashamed: Sir. xiii. 7. In the X. T. only
pass., αίσ-;ΐ^ίΐ'θμαι : fut. αισχννθήσομαι; I aor. ήσχύνθην; to
be suffused with shame, be made ashamed, be ashamed :
2 Co. x. 8 ; Phil. i. 20 ; 1 Pet. iv. 16 ; ^ij αισχυνθώμιν
air αχιτοΰ that wc may not in shame shrink from him,
1 Jn. 11. 28 (Sir. xxi. 22 αισχννθήσ€ται από προσώπου
[Is. i. 29; Jer. xii. 13 ; cf. B. § 147, 2]); foU. by inf.
(on which see W. 346 (325)), Lk. xvi. 3. [Co.Mp" : «jr-
(-/lot), κατ-αισχΰνω.^ '
α(τ(ω, -ώ ; fut. αιτήσω : 1 aor. τιτησα : pf. ζτηκα \ Mid.,
pres. αιτούμαι ; impf. ^τονμην : fut. αιτήσομαι ; 1 aor.
ήτησάμην ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to ask ; mid. to ask for
one's .lelf request for one's self; absol. : Jas. i. 6 ; Mt.
vii. 7 ; mid., Jas. iv. 3 ; Jn. xvi. 26 : Mk. xv. 8 ; aiTc'i-
σθαί τι, Jn. xv. 7 ; Mt. xiv. 7 ; Mk. vi. 24 ; x. 38 ; xi. 24 ;
XV. 43 ; 1 Jn. v. 14 sq. ; Lk. xxiii. 52 ; Acts xxv. 3, 15,
etc. ; aiTciv with ace. of the pers. to whom the request
is made : Mt. v. 42 ; vi. 8 ; Lk. vi. 30 ; αιτίϊσθαι with
ace. of the pers. asked for — whether to be released,
Mt. xxvii. 20 ; Mk. xv. 6 [here Τ WH Tr mrg. παραιτ.
q. v.] ; Lk. xxiii. 25 ; or bestowed as a gift, Acts .xiii.
21 : aiT(iv Ti ιΊπό Tiraf, Mt. xx. 20 L Tr txt. WH txt. ;
[Lk. xii. 20 Tr WH]; 1 Jn. v. 15 L Τ Tr M"H ; (so
αιτ^Ίσβαι in Plut. Galb. 20) [cf. B. 149 (130)] : τι παρά
τίνος. Acts ui. 2; Mt. .xx. 20 R G Τ Tr mrg. WH mrg.;
Jas. i. 5 ; 1 Jn. v. 15 R G ; foil, by the inf., Jn. iv. 9 ;
mid.. Acts i.x. 2 ; [αίτοχ η iv τ. ονόματι Χρίστου, Jn. xiv.
13; xvi. 24 (see όνομα, 2 e.) ; τι e'v ttj προσινχη, Mt.
xxi. 22] ; aiTfiv τινά τι, Mt. vii. 9 ; Lk. xi. 11 ; Mk. vi.
22 : Jn. [xiv. 14 Τ but L WH Tr mrg. br.] ; x>i. 23 ;
wre'p τίνος foil, by icu. Col. i. 9 [cf. B. 237 (204)] ; αιτΛ-
σθαι with the ace. and inf., Lk. .xxiii. 23 ; Acts iii. 14 ;
with inf. only. Acts vii. 46 (ητήσατο tlpdv he asked that
he A/m.se//" might find ; others wrongly translate τίτήσατο
desired) ; Eph. iii. 13. With the idea of demanding
prominent : aiTctv τι, Lk. i. 63 ; 1 Co. i. 22 ; τι»ά τι, Lk.
xu. 48 ; 1 Pet. iii. 15.
[The constructions of this word in the GreA Bible, the
αίτημα
18
Apost. Fathers, etc., are exliiliited iu detail by Prof. Ezra
Abbot in the No. Am. Rev. for Jaii. 1872, p. 182 sq. He
there .sliow.s also {in opposition to Trench, § xl., and otiiers)
that it is nut " the constant word for the seeking of the infe-
rior from the superior," and so diffcriufr froai f ρωτάω, which
has been assumed to imply 'a certain eijualitv or faniiliaritv
between the parties '; that tlie distinction lietweeu the woriis
does not turn upon the relative dignity of the person asking
and tlie person asked ; but that αίτ/ω signifies to ask for
sometliing to be given not done, giving prominence to the
thing asked for rather than tlie person, and iience is rarely
used in cxliortation. Ερωτάω, on the other hand, is to re-
quest a person to do (rarely to give) something ; referring
more directly to the person, it is naturally used in exhorta-
tion, etc. The views of Trench are also rejected by Cremer,
4te AuH. s. V. The latter distinguislies α1τ4ω from similar
words as follows: " αιτί'α? denotes the request of the will,
ίπιβυμίω that of the sensibilities, ίίομαι the asking of
need, while ερωτάω marks the form of the request, as does
(ΰχισθαι also, which in classic Greek is the proper expres-
sion for a request directed to the gods and embodying itself
in prayer." 'Ερωτάω, αΐτίω and ζίομαι are also compared
briefly by Green, Critical Notes, etc. (on Jn. xiv. 13, 16).
who concludes of ίρωτάω *' it cannot serve to indicate directly
any peculiar position, absolute or relative, of the agent.
The use of the word may, therefore, be viewed as having
relation to the manner and cast of the request, namely, when
carrying a certain freedom of aim and bearing; a thing
inseparable from the act of direct interrogation " ; cf. further
Schmidt ch. 7. Cojii'. : απ-, 4ξ•, iir-, τταρ(-μαι), ττροσ-αιτί'ω.]
οϊτημα, -tos, to, (αΐτίω), [fr. Plato down], what ii or
has been asked for: Lk. xxiii. 24; jjlur. [A. V. reque.itsl,
Phil. iv. 6 [cf. EUic. ad loc] ; things asked for, 1 Jn. v.
15. [See the preceding word, and Trench § li.] *
α(τ(α, -as, ή ; 1. canse, reason : Acts x. 21 ; xxii.
24 ; xxviii. 20 ; κατά πάσαν αιτίαν for every cause, Mt.
xix. 3 ; bi ην αΙτίαν for tr/iich cause, wherefore, Lk. viii.
47 ; 2 Tim. i. 6, 12 ; Tit. i. 13 ; Ileb. ii. 11 ; cf. Grimm
on 2 Mace. iv. 28. 2. cause for which one is worthy
of punishment ; crime of which one is accused : Mt.
xxvu. 37 ; Mk. χ v. 26 ; Jn. xviii. 38 ; xix. 4, [6 ; Acts
xxiii. 28]; αίτια θανάτου [Α. V. cause ofdealh~\ crime
deserving the punishment of death, Acts xiii. 28; xxviii.
18. 3. charije of crime, accusation: Acts xxv. 18, 27.
(All these signif. in prof. writ, also ; [but L. and S. now
make signif. 3 the primary].) In Mt. xix. 10 tlie words
€t ουτίύς (στιν η αίτια του ανθρώπου μΐτά της •γυναίκόί find a
simple explanation in a Latinism (causa i. q. res : si ita res
se hahct, etc.) if Ike case of the man icith his wife is so*
αΐτίαμα, -tos, to, see αΐτίωμα.
[αΐτιάομαι, -ώμαι: Ιο accuse, hrintj a charge against;
τιτιασάμ(θα is a various reading in Ro. iii. 9 for the
προϊ]τιασάμίθα of the printed texts. (Prov. xix. 3 ; Sir.
xxix. 5 ; freq. in prof, writ.) Syn. see κατηγοράω.'}
atrios, -a. -uv, that in which the cause of anything
resides, causative, causing. Hence 1. ό αίτιοΓ the
author : σωτηρία!, Heb. v. 9 (tlie same phrase is freq.
in prof. writ. ; cf. the opp. al τής άπωΧ^ία! in Bel and
the Dragon vs. 41 ; των κακών, 2 Mace. xiii. 4 ; Lcian.
Tim. 36 ed. Lips. ; των αγαθών, Isncr. ad Phil. 49 p.
106 a.; cf.^leek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 94 sq.). 2. το
αίτιοι» i. q. η αιτία; a. cause: Acts xix. 40 [cf. B.
400 (342) n.]. b. crime, offence : Lk. xxiii. 4, 14, 22.
(aiTios culprit.) [See αίτια, 3.]*
αΐτίωμα, -toc, to, (αιτιάομαι) ; in Acts xxv. 7 the read-
ing of the best codd. ado|)ted by G L Τ Tr WH for Rec.
αιτίαμα: accusation, charge of guill. (A form not found
in other writ. ; [yet Mcy. notes αίτίωσίΓ for αίτίασίί,
Eustath. p. 1422, 21 ; see B. 73 ; 117/. App. p. 166].)•
αΙφνίδιΟΐ, -ov, (α'ίφνηί, άψανη!, άφνω q. v.), unexpected,
sudden, unforeseen : Lk. xxi. 34 [here WH (φνίί., see
their Intr. § 404 and App. p. 151] ; 1 Th. v. 3. (Sap.
xvii. 14; 2 Mace. xiv. 17; 3 Mace. iii. 24; Aeschyl.,
Time. 2, 61 to αιφνί&ιον κα\ (ΐπροσ8όκητον, Polyb., Joseph.,
Plut., I)i(m. Hal., ah)•
αίχμ-αλωσία, -as, ή, (αιχμάλωτο!, q. v.), captivity: Rev.
xiii. 10; abstr. for concr. i. q. αιχμάλωτοι (cf. άδ('\φάτη!
above), Eph. iv. 8 (fr. Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19, [cf. 15. 14.S
(129) ; W. 225 (211)]) ; also « th αΙχμαΧωσίαν συνάγιι
(ace. to the common but doubtless corriqjt text), Rev.
.xiii. 10 (as in Num. xxxi. 12, etc.). [Polyb., Diod.,
Joseph., Plut, al.]•
αίχμαλωτίνω ; 1 aor. ΐ);(μαλώτβΐ)σ•α ; a later word (cf .
Loh. ad Phryn. p. 442; [\V. 92 (88)]) ; to male captive,
lake captive : 2 Tim. iii. 6 Rec. ; freq. in the Sept. and
O. T. Apocr. ί to lead captive : Eph. iv. 8 (Ezek. .\ii. 3 ;
[1 Esdr. vi. 15]).•
αΙχμαλωτίζω ; 1 fut. pass. αΙχμαΧωτισθησομαι ; a.
Cijuiv. to αίχμάλωτον ποιώ, which the earlier Gi'ccks use.
b. to lead away captive : foU. by ίί^ with ace. of place,
Lk. xxi. 24, (1 Mace. x. 33; Tob. i. 10). c. fig. to sub-
Jugate, bring under control : 2 Co. x. 5 (on which passage
see νόημα, 2) ; τινά τινι, Ro. vii. 23 [yet Τ Tr Ν etc. in-
sert (V before the dat.]; to take captive one's mind, capti-
vate : ywaiKUpia, 2 Tim. iii. 6 [not Rec], ( Jiulith xvi. 9
TO KiiKKo! αντη! ί}χμαΧώτισ€ yj /υχην αντυϋ). The word
is used also in the Sept., Diod., Joseph., Plut., Arr.,
Heliod.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W. 91 (87); EUic.
on 2 Tim. I. c.].*
αίχμι-όλωτο?, -ov, (f Γ. αιχμή a spear and άλωτο!, verbal
adj. fr. άλώναι. prop, taken by the spear), [fr. Acscliyl.
down], captive: Lk. iv. 18 (19).*
αΙών, -ώΐΌΓ, ό, (as if altv — poet, fordfi — ών, .«ο teaches
Aristot. lit• caelo 1, 11, 9, vol. i. p. 279», 27; [so Proohis
lib. iv. in Plat. Timaeo p. 241 ; et al.] ; but more prob-
able is the conjecture [cf. Etym. Magn. 41, 11] that
αΙών is so connected with άημι to breathe, blow, as to
denote properly that which causes life, vital force; cf.
Harless on Eph. ii. 2). [But αΙών (^αί^ώκ) is now gen-
erally connected with alei. aft, Skr. eras (aivas), Lat.
aenim, Goth, aivs. Germ, eicig, Eng. aye, ever; cf. Curtius
§ 585; Pick, Pt. i. p. 27; Vanicek p. 79; Benfey, Wur-
zellex. i. ]). 7 sq. ; Schleicher, Compend. ed. 2, p. 400 ;
Poll, Etym. Forsch., ed. 2, ii. 2, p. 442; Ebeling, Lex.
Hom. s. v.; L. and S. s. v. aci; Cremer, edd. 2, 3,4 (al-
tliough in ed. 1 he agreed with Prof. Grimm) ; Pott and
Pick, however, connect it with Skr. ayus rather than
evas, although both these forms are derived from i to
go (see Pott, Schleicher, Fick, VaniCek, u. s.).] la
19
Greek authors 1. age (Lat. nevum, wliich is αΙών
with the Aeohc difjamma), a human lifetime (in Horn.,
Ildt., Find., Tragic poets), life itself (Horn. II. 5, 685
μ( κα\λίιτοι αιών etc.). 2. an unbroken age, perpetuity
of lime, eternity, (Plat. Tim. p. 37 d. 38 a.; Tim. Locr.
p. 97 d. [([uoted belcw] ; Plut., al.). With this signifi-
cation the Hebrew and Rabbinic idea of the word □'7l>'
(of Λvhieh in the Sf pt. αΙών is tlie equiv.) combines in
the bibl. and eecl. \YTit. Hence in the X. T. used
1. a. Univ.: in the phrases fifxoi/ αιώνα, D^li'*? (Gen.
vi. 3), for ever, Jn. vi. 51, 58 ; xiv. 16 ; Heb. v. 6 ; vi.
20, etc. ; and strengthened fir τον αΙώνα τον αΐώνο!, Heb.
i. 8 [fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 7 Alex., cf. W. § 36, 2] (Tob.
vi. 18; Ps. Ixxxii. (ixxxiii.) 18, etc.); els αιώνα, Jude
13; fls ημίραν aimvos unto the day which is eternity
(gen. of appos.), 2 Pet. iii. 18 [cf. Sir. xviii. 10 (9)] ;
ivith a negation: yierer, Jn. iv. 14 [Lchm. in br.] ; viii.
51; X. 28; xi. 26; xiii. 8; 1 Co. viii. 13; or not for
ever, not always, Jn. viii. 35 ; eir rois αΙώνα! unto the
ages, i. e. as long as time shall be (the plur. denotes the
individual ages whose sum is eternity) : [Lk. i. 33] ;
Ro. i. 25 ; ix. 5 ; xi. 36 ; [xvi. 27 R G Tr WH] ; 2 Co.
xi. 31 ; Heb. .xiii. 8 ; els navras τ. awvas, Jude 25 ; els
Tovs oMvas τών αιώνων (in which expression the endless
future is divided up into various periods, the shorter of
which are comprehended in the longer [cf. W. § 36, 2 ;
among the various phrases to express duration com-
posed of this word with prep, or adjuncts, (which to the
number of more than fifteen are to be found in the
Sept., of. Vaughan on Ro. i. 25), this combination of
the double plural seems to be peculiar to the N. T.]) :
[Ro. xvi. 27 L T] ; Gal. i. 5 : [Phil. iv. 20] ; 1 Tim. i.
17; [2 Tim. iv. 18; 1 Pet. iv. 11]; Rev. i. 6, 18; iv.
9 sq. ; V. 13; vii. 12 ; x. 6 ; xi. 15; xv. 7 ; xix. 3 ; xx.
10; xxii. 5 ; els αΐώναζ αιώνων, Rev. xiv. 11 ; 6 αιών τών
αιώνων the (whole) age embracing the (shorter) ages.
E[>h. iii. 21 (cf. iley. [or Ellic] ad loc.) ; από τών αΙώνων
from the ages down, from eternity. Col. i. 26 ; Eph. iii.
9 ; rrpo τών αιώνων before time ivas, before the founda-
tion of the world, 1 Co. ii. 7 ; npodeais τών αιώνων
eternal purpose, Eph. iii. Π. b. in hyperboUc and
popular usage : ojro τοΟ αΐώνο! (oSiiO, Gen. vi. 4, cf.
Deut. x.xxii. 7) from the most ancient time down, (within
the memory of man), from of old, Lk. i. 70; Acts iii. 21 ;
XV. 18, (Tob. IV. 12 01 narepes ημών οπό τον a^ώvos :
Longin. 34 tovs απ αιώνος ρτ)τορας) ; also €κ τοΰ αιώνος,
Jn. ix. 32, (1 Esdr. ii. Ιί), 22 (2:3) : Diod. iv. 83 of the
temple of Venus την ΐξ αΐώνης αρχήν λαβόν, 17, 1 τους
ίξ α'ώνο! /3ασίλ«Γ, [excerpt, de legal, xl.] p. 632 την ϊξ
αΙώνος napaSeSopevqv eXfvBepiav). 2. by meton. of the
container for the contained, o'l alώves denotes the worlds,
the universe, i. e. the aggregate of things contained in
time,[on the plur. cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24 (21)]: Heb.
i. 2; .xi. 3; and (?) 1 Tim. i. 17; [Rev. xv. 3 AVH
txt.; cf. Ps. cxUv. (cxlv.) 13; Tob. xiii. 6, 10; Sir.
.x.xxvi. 22; Philo de plant. Xoe § 12 bis; de numdo
§ 7; Joseph, antt. 1, 18, 7; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 61, 2;
35, 3 (πατήρ τ. α.); 55, 6 (θ(6ς τ. α.); Constt. Αρ. 7, 34 :
see Abbot in Journ Soc. Bibl. Lit. eic. i. p. 106 n.]. So
αιών in Sap. xiii. 9 ; xiv. 6 ; xviii. 4 ; the same use oc-
curs in the Talmud, Chaldee, Syriac, Arabic ; cf . Bleek,
Hebraerbr. ii. 1, p. 36 sqq. ; Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p.
1036; [cf. the use of o! alώves in the Fathers i. q. the
world of mankind, e. g. Ignat. ad Eph. 19, 2]. 3. As
the Jews distinguished ΠΙΠ D'7i>n the time before the
Messiah, and S3ri Ο'ΐύ'Π the time after the advent of the
Messiah (cf. Riehm, Lehrb. d. Hebraerbr. p. 204 sqq. ;
[Schiirer § 29, 9]), so most of the X. T. writers distin-
guish ό αΙών ovTos /his or/e (also simply ό αιών, Mt. xiii. 22 ;
Mk. iv. 19 G L Τ Tr WH : ό eworiis αιών. Gal. i. 4 ; ό
vvv αΙών, 1 Tim. vi. 1 7 ; [2 Tim. iv. 10] ; Tit. ii. 12), the
time before the appointed return or truly Messianic ad-
vent of Christ (i. e. the παρονσία, q. v.), the period of insta-
bility, weakness, impiety, wickedness, calamity, misery,
— and αιών μίΧΚων the future age (also ό αιών t'lcfivoi, Lk.
.XX. 35 ; ό αιών 6 epxopevos, Lk. xviii. 30 ; Mk. x. 30 ;
o£ awvfs oi (πιρχόμίνοι. E]ih. ii. 7), i. e. the age after
the return of Christ in majesty, the period of the con-
summate estabUshment of the divine kingdom and all
its blessings : Mt. xii. 32 ; Eph. i. 21 ; cf. Fritzsche on
Rom. vol. iii. 22 sq. Hence the things of ' this age '
are mentioned in the X. T. with censure : 6 αΙών oCros,
by meton. men controlled by the thoughts and pursuits
of this present time, Ro. xii. 2, the same who are called
viol τοΰ αι. τοντου in Lk. xvi. 8 ; xx. 34 ; κατά τον αιώνα
τοΰ κόσμου τοντου conformably to the age to which this
(wicked) world belongs, Eph. ii. 2 [cf. Trench § lis.
sub fin.]; αγαπάν τόν vvv αιώνα, 2 Tim. iv. 10 (see
αγαπάω) ; apxovTes τοϋ al. τούτον, 1 Co. ii. 6 (see άρχων) ;
ό θίός τοΰ al. τοΰτου the devil, who rules the thoughts
and deeds of the men of this age, 2 Co. iv. 4 ; al μίριμναι
τοϋ αιώνος the anxieties for the things of this age, Mk.
iv. 1 9 ; πλοι^σιοΓ cV τω vvv αΐώνι rich in worldly wealth,
1 Tim. vi. 1 7 ; σοφία τοΟ αι. τοντ. such wisdom as be-
longs to this age, — full of error, arrogant, hostile to
the gospel, 1 Co. ii. 6 ; συζητητής τοΰ al. τοντ. disputer,
sophist, such as we now find him, 1 Co. i. 20 ; avvreXeta
τον αι. τοντ. the end, or rather consummation, of the age
preceding Christ's return, with which will be connected
the resurrection of the dead, the last judgment, the de-
molition of this world and its restoration to a more ex-
cellent condition [cf. 4 Esdr. vii. 43], Mt. xiii. 39 sq. 49;
xxiv. 3 ; xxviii. 20 ; it is called σνντΐΚίΐα τών αιώνων in
Heb. ix. 26 [so Test. xii. Patr., test. Levi 1 0, test. Benj. 1 1
(cf. Vorstman p. 133)] ; τα Τ(\η τών αιώνων the ends (last
part) of the aires before the return of Christ, 1 Co. x. 11 ;
δυνάμιις toC μιλλοι^οϊ αίώι-οΓ powers which present them-
selves from the future or divine order of things, i.e. the
Holv S]iirit, Heb. vi. 5 ; τοϋ αΙώνος cKeivov Tvxelvto partake
of the blessings of the future age, Lk. xx. 35. Among
the X. T. writers James does not use the word αιών.
[On the word in its relation to κόσμο! see Trench § lix.
Its biblical sense and its relation to D7i> are discussed by
Stuart, Exeget. Ess-ays on Words relating to Fnt. Punish-
ment, Andover, 1#30 (and Preslnt. Pabl. Committee, Phil.) ;
Tayler Lewis in Lange's Com. on Eccl. pp. 44-51 ; J. W,
Hanson, Aion-Aionios, (pp. 174), Chicago, 1880. See esp.
20
αιωνιο<ί
Ε. Abbot, Literature of the Doctrine of a Future Life, etc.,
(New York, 1867), Index of subjects s. v. For its meanings
in eccl. writ, see Suicer, Thesaur. Eccles. i. col. 140 sqq., cf.
ii. col. 1609; IJtiet, Origeuiana (Λρρ. to vol. iv. of De la
Hue's Origcn) lib. ii. c. ii. quacst. 11, § 26. Its use in Horn.,
Hes., Find., Aesch.vl., Soph., Eur., Aristot., Plato, Tim.
Locr., is exhibited in detail by E. S. Goodwin in the Christ.
Exam, for March and May.'lS.'Jl, March and May, 18.32.
" On αιών as the complete period, either of each particular life
or of all existence, see Arist. cael. 1, 9, 15; on αΙών and
xpovos, cf. Fhilo [quis ror. div. her. § .34] i. 496, 18 sq. ; [de
null. nom. §47] i. 619, lO.sq." L. and S. ed. 6 ; see also Pliilo
dc allcg. leg. iii. 8 ; quod deu-s ininmt. § 6 fin. ; de prof. §11;
de pracm. et poen. § l.i; and (do mund. o]iif. § 7) esp. ./. G.
Mailer, Philu's Lehre v. d. Weltscluipfung, p. 168 (Berl. 1864).
Schmidt (ch. 44) gives the distinction, for substance, as fol-
lows : both words denote the abstract idea of time and with
special reference to its extent or duration ; xpovos is the
general designation for time, Λvhich can be divided up into
portions, each of which is in its turn a xpivos ; on the other
liand, αιών. which in the concrete and siuijile language of
Homer (I'indar and the Tragedians) denotes the allotted
lifetime, even the life, of the intiividual (II. 4, 478 μινυνθά^ιο^
Si oi αΙων etc.), in Attic prose differs from xpovos by denote
ing time unlimited and boundless, which is not conceived of
as divisible into alCives (contrast here biblical usage and see
below), but ratlier into χρόνοι. In pliilo.sophical speech it is
Avithout beginning also. Cf. Tim. Locr. 97 c. d. χρόνω hi το
μίρΐα τόσδ€ τάϊ πρριόδωί KtyovTi, &s 4κ6σμτ}σζν δ dehs συν
κόσμω • ου yap ^ν ττρί) κόσμω άστρα ■ Sitiirep οϋδ' eviavrhs οΰδ'
ωραν TrepioSoi αΐί μΐτρίΐται ό yevvarhs χρ6νο$ οΰτοί. cIk&iv
5e ^στί τώ ά^ίί'ϊ'άτω χρόνω.ί>ν αιώνα πoτayopeΰoμes ' ώϊ
yap ποτ* ai'Stov πapάS€ιyμa, τίιν ιδανικών κόσμον, δδε & upavhs
iyivvadT}. o'UTOis ws irpbi ^τapάδetyμa. τόν αιώνα, bSe ό χρ6νο$
συν κόσμφ eSaμtoυpyr|β■η — after Plato, Timaeus p. 37 d.
(wliere see Stallbaum's note and reff.) ; Isocr. 8, 34 του$ Sh
/i€T* ΐύσ^βΐίαί κ. δικαιοσύνης ζώντας {όρώ) iv Te to7s τταροΰσι
χρόνο IS άσφαλώϊ διάyovτas και ττΐρΐ τοΰ σύμπαντος αιώνος
7]δΊους τας 4\πίδας έχοντας. ΊΊιο adj. άχρονος independent
of time, above and l>eyond all time, is synon. «ith αιώνιος ;
where time (with its subdivisions and limitations) ends eter-
nity begins: Nonnus, metaiili. evang. Johan. i. 1, άχρονος ήν,
ακίχ-ητος, iv αρρ-ητψ λιίγοΓ αρχτι. Thorougldy Platonic in
cast are the dctinitions of (iregory of Nazianzus (orat.
xxxviii. 8) αϊων yap otJTe χρόνος οΰη χρόνου τι μίρος ' ούδΐ
yap μΐτρητόν. αλλ* οπΐρ ημϊν ό χρόνος ηλίου ψορα. μετρούμενος,
τούτο τοΓϊ αίδ'ιοις αιών, τί) συμπαρεκτεινόμενον τοΊς οϋσιν οϊόν
τι xpovmbv κίνημα κα\ διάστημα (Suicer u. s.). So Clem.
Alex. .Strom, i. 13, p. ".'56 a. ed. Migne, Ό y' olv αιών τοΰ
χρόνου τί> μ(\λον καΐ τδ ^νεστώς. αύτάρ δί; ifoi τδ παρίρχ-ηκί/ς
άκαριαίως συνίστησι. Instances from extra-liiblical writ, of
the use of αιών in tlie plural are: Thv απ' αιώνων μύθον,
Anthol. vol. iii. pt. ii. p. 5.5 ed. Jacobs; eis αιώνα?, ibid. vol.
iv. epigr. 492 ; ix περιτροπής αιώνων, Joseph, b. j. 3, 8, 5 ; εις
αιώνας διαμένει, Sext. Empir. adv. Phys. i. 62. The dis-
cussions whicli have been raised respecting the \vord may
give interest to additional reff. to its use liy Philo and Jo-
sephus. Philo : i πάς (απαί, σόμπας) or πας (etc.) i αιών:
de alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de dierul). § 1 (a noteworthy passage,
cf. de congressu erud. § 1 1 and reff. s. v. βό>/ατοι) ; de sacrif.
Ab. et Caini §11; quod det. pot. § 48 ; quod dens immut.
§ 1, § 24 ; de plantat. § 27 ; de solirietate § 13 ; de migr. Abr.
§2; deprof.§9; de mut. nom. § 34 ; de somn. ii. § 15, § 31,
§ 38 ; de legat. ad Gaium § 38 ; (δ) μακρδς al : de sacrif. Ab.
et Caini § 21 ; de ebrietate § 47 ; de prof. § 20 ; οι. μ-Ιικιστος :
de sobrietate § 5 ; de prof. § 21 ; δ άπειρος al. : de legat. a4
Gaium § 11 ; δ έμπροσθεν at.: de praem et. poen. § 6 ; oL
ποΚύς : de Alirali. § 46 ; τις at. : de mere, meretr. § 1 ; δι' οί. :
de cherub. § 26 ; de plantat. § 27 ; eij τίιν al. : de gigant. § 5;
iv {τψ} αι.: de raut. nom. § 2 (bis) (note the restriction)!
(juod deus immut. § 6 ; ίξ οί. : de sonui. i. § 3 ; ίπ' al. : de
plantat. § 12 (bis) ; de muudo § 7 ; πρ)) al. : de nmt. nom.
§ 2 ; πρίις οί. : de mut. nom. § 11 ; (δ) οί. : de prof. § 18 ; de
alleg. leg. iii. § 70 ; de clierub. § 22 ; de migr. Al)r. § 22 ; de
.somn. i. § 18, § 22; de Josepho § 5 ; de vita Moys. ii. § 3;
de decalogo § 14; de victimis § 3; frag, in Mang. ii. 660
(Kichter vi. p. 219) ; de plantat. § 12 (bis) ; de mundo § 7.
Jose ρ bus: (δ) πάς αΙών : antt. 1, 18, 7 ; 3, 8, ΙΟ; c. A]). 2,
11,3; 2, 22, 1 ; μακρ}ις al. : antt. 2, 7, 3 ; πο\υς οί. : c. Αρ. 2,
31, 1; τοσούτος al.: c. Αρ. 1, 8, 4; πλήθος αιώνος: antt
prooem. § 3 ; όιτ'οί. : b. j. prooem. § 4; 5i' αι. : antt. 1,18,8;
4, 6,4; b. j. 6, 2, 1 ; εΙς {Thv) αι.: antt. 4, 8, 18; 5, 1, 27; 7,
9, 5; 7, 14, 5; i^ αι.: b. j, 5, 10, 5; (δ) οί. : antt. 19, 2, 2;
b. j. 1, 21, 10 ; plur. (see above) 3, 8, 5. See αΙώνιος.]
αΙώνιος, -ov, and (in 2 Th. ii. 16; Ileb. ix. 12; Num.
XXV. 13; riat. Tim. p. 38 b. [see below]; Diod. i. 1;
[cf. 117/. A]ip. p. 157; W. 69 (67); B. 26 (23)]) -or,
-a, -ον,(αΐών)•, 1. wUhout hcijinnhtrj nr end, lltat which
ahriii/s lias been and always trill be : θεοί, Ro. xvi. 2G, (i
μόνο! αιώνιοι, 2 Mace. i. 25) ; πνενμα, Heb. ix. 14. 2.
U'ilhimt heijinning : χρόνοκ αιωνίου, Κο. xvi. 25 ; ττρΑ χρό-
νων αιωνίων, β Tim. i. 9 ; Tit. i. 2 ; ciayye\iov a gos])ei
whose subject-matter is eternal, i. e. tlie saving ])urpose
of God adopted from eternity, Rev. xiv. G. 3. wilh-
oul end, never In cease, ecerlaslinr/: 2 Co. iv. 18 (o|)p. to
πρόσκαιρο!) ; αϊώνιον αυτόν, joined to thee forever as a
sharer of the same eternal life, I'hilem. 15 ; βάρος δόξη!,
2 Co. iv. 17; βασι'Κεία, 2 Pet. i. 1 1 ; 8όξα, 2 Tim. ii. 10;
1 Pet. V. 1 ; ζωη (see ζωή, 2 b.) ; κληρονομιά, Ileb. ix.
15; λϋτ-ρωσίΓ, Heb. L\. 12; παράκλησίί, 2 Th. ii. 16;
σκηναί, abodes to be occupied forever, Lk. xvi. 9 (tlie
liabifations of the blessed in heaven are referred to, cf.
.In. xiv. 2, [also, dabo eis tabernaeula aeterna, quae
praeparaveram illis, 4 Esdr. (Fritzsrlie 5 Esdr.) ii. 11];
similarly Ilades is called αιώνιος τόπ -or, Tob. iii. 6, cf.
Eccl. xii. 5); σωτηρία, Ileb. V. 9; [so ilk. xvi. AVII, in
the (rejected) 'Shorter Conclusion']. Ojiposite ideas
are : κόΧαπις, Mt. xxv. 46 ; κρίμα, Ileb. vi. 2 ; κρίσκ,
Mk. iii. 29 (Rec. [but L Τ WII Tr txt. αμαρτήματος;
in Acta Thom. § 47, p. 227 Tdf., εσται σοι τούτο eif ίίφεσιν
αμαρτιών και Χντρον αιωνίων παραπτωμάτων, it has been
[ilausibly conjectured we should read λυΓμοι/ αΙώνιον (cf.
Ileb. ix. 12)]); όλεθρος [Lehm. txt. ολέθριος], 2 'J'h. i.
9, (4 Mace. x. 15); πύρ, Mt. xxv. 41, (4 Mace. xii. 12
αιωνίω πνρ\ κ. βασάνοις, αι εις όλον τον αιώνα ουκ άνησουσί
σε). ■
JOf the examples of αιώνιος from Philo (with whom it is
less common than ϊάδιος, q. v., of which there are .some fifty
instances) the following are noteworthy: de mut. nom. § 2;
de caritate § 17; κόΚασις αι. frag, in Mang. ii. 667 fin.
(Richter vi. 229 mid.) ; cf. de praem. et poen. § 12. Other
exx. are de alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de poster. Caini § 35; quod
deus imnuit. § 30 ; quis rer. div. her. § 58 ; de congressu
quaer. erud. § 19 ; de prof. § 38 ; de somn. ii. § 43 ; de Jose-
pho § 24 ; quod omn. prob. hb, § 4, § 18 ; de elirietate § 32;
de Abrah. § 10; ζωίι al. : de prof. § 15 ; θε>ις (δ) αι. : de plan
ακαθαρσία
21
ακαταστασία
tat. § 2, § 18 (bis), § 20 (bis) ; de mnndo § 2. From Jose-
phus: autt. 7, 14, 5; 12, 7, 3 ; 15, 10, 5; b. j. 1,33,2; 6, 2,
1 ; "cAeos o/. : antt. 4, 6, 5 ; b. j. 3, 8, 5 ; μνί\μΎ\ al. : antt. 1 ,
13, 4; 6, 14, 4; 10, 11,7; 15, 11,1; οίκον μ^ν αϊύνιον ex€is
(of God), antt. 8, 4, 2 ; ^ψυΚάχθη ό Ίωιίννη$ ^^σμο'ΐί alwvioLS,
b. j. 6, 9, 4.
Syn. its 10 s, alwytos: cdS. covers the complete philo-
sophic idea — without beginning and without end ; also dlhcr
without beginning or without end ; as respects the past, it
is applied to what has existed lijne out of mind, alwvtos (fr.
Plato on) gives prominence to the immeasuraldeness of eter-
nity (while such words as ffuj/ex^s continuous, unintermitted,
διοτ6λήί i>erpetual, lasting to the end, are not so applicable
to an aijstract term, like αιών) ; alavios accordingly is esp.
adapted to supersensuous things, see the N. T. Cf. Tim.
Locr. 96 c. θΐίν Se rhv μΐν αΐώνιον voos δρτ) μονοί etc. ; Plat.
Tim. 37 d. (and Stallbaum ad loc); 38 b. c. ; legg. x. p.
904 a. ανωΚΐθρον δέ hv "γΐνόμ^νον, άλλ' οίικ αΐώνιον. Cf. also
Plato's Siaidvios (Tim. 38 b. ; 39 e.). Schmidt ch. 45.]
ακαθαρσία, -as, ij, (ακάθαρτοι), [fr. Hippoor. down],
uncliaiuiess; a. physical: Mt. .xxiii. 27. b. in a
moral sense, the impurity of lustful, luxurious, profli-
gate living: Ro. i. 24; vi. 19; 2 Co. xii. 21; Gal. v.
1 9 ; Eph. iv. 19; v. 3 ; Col. iii. 5 ; 1 Th. iv. 7 ; used
of impure motives in 1 Th. ii. 3. (Dem. p. 553, 12.)
Cf. Tittmann i. p. 150 Sep*
ακάθαρτη?, -ητοί, ή. iwpiirily: Rev. xvii. 4; — not found
elsewhere, and the true reading here is τα ακάθαρτα Trjs'
ακάθαρτοι, -ov, (καβαίρω), [fr. Soph, down], in the Sept.
i. q. S'?t3, not c/eaiiseil, unclean\ a. in a ceremonial
sense, that which must be abstained from according to
the levitical law, lest impurity be contracted : Acts x.
14; xi. 8 (of food); Acts x. 28 ; 1 Co. vii. 14 (of
men); 2 Co. vi. 17 (fr. Is. Hi. 11, of things pertain-
ing to idolatry) ; Rev. xviii. 2 (of birds). b. in a
moral sense, unclemi in tliour/lit ami life (freq. in Plat.) :
Eph. V. 5 ; τα ακάθαρτα τψ πορνιίας. Rev. xvii. 4 (ace.
to the true reading); πνιύματα, demons, bad angels, [in
twenty-three pass, of the Gospels, Acts, Rev.] : Mt. x.
1; xii. 43; Mk. i. 23, 26; iii. 11, etc.; Lk. iv. 33, 36; vi.
18, etc.; Acts v. 16; Yiii. 7; Rev. xvi. 13; xviii. 2,
(πνεύματα πονηρά in Mt. xii. 45; Lk. vii. 21 ; viii. 2;
xi. 26 ; Acts xix. 12 sq. 15 sq.).
aKaipeOp.ai, -οϋμαι : [iuqif. ηκαιρούμην^ ; (άκαιρο! inoji-
portune) ; to lack opportunily, (opp. to (ίικαιρίω ) : Pldl.
iv. 10. (Phot., Suid., Zunar. ; άκαιρων, Diod. excerp.
Vat. ed. Mai p. 30 [frag. 1. x. § 7, ed. Dind.].)*
άκαίρωΐ, (/caipos), adv., unseasonabti/, [A. V. out of
sea.swi], (opp. to ti/taipus) : 2 Tim. iv. 2 (whether sea-
sonable for men or not). (Sir. xxxv. 4 ; [Aeschyl. Ag.
808]; Plat, de rep. x. p. 606 b. ; Tim. 33 a.; 86 c. ;
Xen. Eph. 5, 7 ; Joseph, antt. 6, 7, 2, al.) *
οί-κακο;, -ov, (kokOs) ; a. icilhout (juile or fraud,
harmlens; free from f/uilt: Heb. vii. 26; [cf. Clement,
frag. 8 ed. Jacobson, (Bp. Lfihlft. S. Clement of Rome
etc. p. 219) : άκακος 6 Ώατηρ ττνΐνμα ΐ^ωκΐν ακακον\
b. fearing no evil from others, dislrustiiij/ no one, [cf.
Eng. (/uiVete.?] : Ro. xvi. 18. ([Aeschyl.,] Plat., Dem.,
Polyb., al. ; Sept.) [Cf. Trench § Ivi. ; Tittmann i. p.
27 sq.]*
άκανθα, -ης, ή, (άκή a point [but see in άκμη]) ; a. α
thorn, bratnhle-bush, brier : Mt. vii. 16 ; Lk. vi. 44 ; Heb.
vi. 8 ; els Tar άκανθας i. e. among the seeds of thorns, Mt.
xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 7 [L mrg. inC], 18 [Tdf. eVt]; Lk. viii.
14 (vs. 7 (V μϊσω των ακανθών) ; fVt ras άκ• i. e. upon
ground in which seeds of thorns were lying hidden,
Mt. xiii. 7. b. a thornij plant : στίφανον (ξ ακάνθων,
Mt. χχνϋ. 29; Jn. xix. 2,- — for bare thorns might have
caused delirium or even death ; what species of plant is
referred to, is not clear. Some boldly read ακάνθων,
from άκανθος, acanthus, bear' s-foot\ but the meaning of
άκανθα is somewhat comprehensive even in prof. writ. ;
cf. the class. Grk. Lexx. s. v. [On the "Crown of
thorns" see BB.DD. s. v., and for reff. Mc. and S.] *
άκάνθινο?, -or, (άκανθα; cf. άμαράντινος), thorny, ii'oren
out of the twigs of a thorny j>lanl : Mk. xv. 17 ; Jn. .\ix.
5. .(Is. xxxiv. 13.) Cf. the preceding word.*
o-Kapiros, -ov, (καρπός), [fr. Aeschyl. down], without
fruit, barren ; 1. prop. : hivhpa, Jude 1 2. 2. metaph.
not yielding what it ought to yield, [A. V. iinfruitfuQ :
Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19; destitute of good deeds, Tit.
iii. 14; 2 Pet. i. 8; contributing notliing to tlie instruc-
tion, improvement, comfort, of others, 1 Co. xiv. 14;
by litotes pernicious, Eph. v. 11, (Sap. xv. 4 ; cf. Grimm
oil Sap. i. 11).*
ό-κατά-γνωσ•τθ5, -ov, (καταγινώσκω), that cannot he con-
demned, not to be censured: Tit. ii. 8. (2 Mace. iv. 47,
and several times in eccl. Λvrit.) *
<ϊ-κατα-κάλυΐΓΤ09, -ov, (κατακαλϋπτω), not covered, un-
veiled: 1 Co. xi. 5, 13. (Polyb. 15, 27, 2; [Sept., Philo].) *
(ΐ-κατ<1-κριτο5, -oi», (κατακρίνω), uncondemned; punished
witliont being tried: Acts xvi. 37; xxii. 25. (Xot
found in [jrof. writ.) *
οϊ-κατά-λυτοβ, -ov, (καταλύω), indissoluble; not subject to
destruction, [A. V. endless~\ : ζωή, Heb. vii. 16. (4 Mace.
X. 11 ; Dion. Ilal. 10, 31.)*
άκατάτΓαο -Tos, -ov, — found only in 2 Pet. ii. 14 in codd.
A and B, from wliich L λ\\\ Tr mrg. have adopted
it instead of the Rec. άκαταπανστηνς, q. v. It may be
derived fr. πατίομαι, pf . πίπασμαι, to taste, eat ; whence
άκατάπαστος insatiable. In prof. writ, κατάπαστοί [Λvllich
Bttm. conjectures may have been the original reading]
signifies be.-<prmkled , soiled, from καταπάσσω to besprin-
kle. For a fuller discussion of this various reading see
B. 65 (57), [and T17/. App. p. 170].*
άκατάτταυσ-τοβ, -ov, (καταπάνω), unable to stop, unceas-
ing; passively, !!of quieted, that cannot be quieted; Avith
gen. of thing (on which cf. W. § 30, 4), 2 Pet. ii. 14
[R G Τ Tr txt.] (eyes not quieted with sin, sc. ivhicli
they commit with adulterous look). (Polyb., Diod.,
Joseph., Plut.)*
άκατασ-τασ-ίο, -ας, ή, (άκατάοΎατος), instability, a state
of disorder, disturbance, confusion : 1 Co. xiv. 33 ; Jas.
iii. 16 ; (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 14, 1 ; [Prov. xxvi. 28 ; Tob.
iv. 13]); plur. disturbances, disorders: of dissensions,
2 Co. xii. 20 ; of seditions, 2 Co. vi. 5 (cf. Mey. ad loc.) ;
of the tumults or commotions of war, Lk. x.\i. 9. (Polyb.,
Dion. Hal.) * •
ακαταστατο•ί
οο
ά-κατά-<Γτατο5, -ον, (καθίστημί), unstable, inconslani,
rexllcss: .J;is. i. Η, anil L Τ Tr Wll in iii. 8 also, but less
fitly; [cf. lU'iiiiae I'a^t. 1. ii. mand. 2, 3 ττονημϋν ττ^Ομύ
fcrrtv ή κατάλα}\ιά, Kul άκατάστατον δαιμόνιοι'. μφ(Τ!υτ(
(ΙρηνίΖον, αΚ\ά etc.]. ([Ilippocr. et al.] Folyb. 7, 4, 6,
al. [Sept. Is. liv. 11].)*
ά-κοτάσχίτο5, -οκ, (κατίχω to restrain, control), thai
cannot be restrained: Jas. iii. 8 R G. (Job .\.\xi. 11;
3 Mace. vi. 1 7 ; Diod. 1 7, 38 άκατ. δάκρυα, al.)*
Άκελβαμά, or Άκ(\8αμάχ (Lclim.). [or Ά«λδ. WH
(see tlieir Intr. § 4U«)], or Άχ(\δαμάχ (Τ Tr), fr. Chald.
Npl Spn (fioUl of blood). Ake/i/ama : Acts i. 19; see
αίμα. 2 a. [Β. D. s. v. ; esp. Kaulzsch, Gram. pp. 8, 1 73].•
oxcpaios, -Of, (κ(ράνννμι) ; a. tinmixeil. pure, as
wine, metals. b. of the mind, without admixture of
evil, free from r/uile, innocent, simple: Mt. x. 16; Ro.
xvi. 19; Phil. ii. 15; (and freq. in prof. writ.). [Cf.
Ellic. on Phil. 1. c. ; Trench § Ivi. ; Tittmann i. 27 sq.] *
άχλινήϊ, -Cf , (κλίνω), not inclininf/, frm, unmoved: Heb.
X. 23. (Freq. in prof, writ.) *
ακμάζω : 1 aor. ήκμασα ; (άκμη) ; to flourish, come to
mnlurit)/: Rev. xiv. 18. (Very freq. in jirof. writ.)*
ακμή, -ης, ή. (cf. άκή [on tlie accent cf. Chandler § 116;
but the word is ' a mere ti^ment of the grammarians,'
Pape (yet cf. L. and S.) s. v.], αΙχμή. Lat. acies, acuo) ;
among the Greeks a. prop, η point, to prick with (cf.
[the classic] αΙχμη). b. extremity, climax, acme, hii/hest
degree. c. the present point of time. Hence accus.
[W. 230 (216), 464 (432 sq.) ; B. 153 (134)] άκμήνντίύί
adverbial force, i. (j. ίτι, even now, even yet: Mt. χ v. 16.
(Tlieocr. id. 4, 60 ; Polyb. 4, 36, 8 ; Strat. epigr. 3 p.
101 ed. Lips. ; Strabo 1. i. [c. 3 prol.] p. 56; Plut. de
glor. Atlien. 2, 85, al.) Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 1 23.•
ακοή, -ης, ή, (fr. an assumed pf. form ήκοα, cf. αγορά
above [but cf. Epic ακουι) ; Curtius p. 55.^]); 1. hear-
! Η 7, by which one perceives sounds; sense of hearing:
1 Co. xii. 1 7 ; 2 Pet. ii. 8. Hebraistically, άκοί} aKoveiv
by hearing to hear i. e. to perceive by hearing, Mt. xiii.
14 ; Acts xxviii. 26, (Is. vi. 9) ; cf. W. § 44, 8 Rem. 3
p. 339; § 54, 3 p. 466; [B. 183 sq. (159)]. 2. the
organ of hearing, the ear: Mk. vii. 35; Lk. vii. 1 ; 2 Tim.
iv. 3, 4; Acts xvii. 20; Heb. v. 11. 3. thing heard;
a. instruction, namely oral; spec, the preaching of the
gospel, [A. Λ'. txt. report^ : Jn. xii. 38 ; Ro. x. 16 sq. (rt't
(ττιστίΓοί TTy άκοη ημών; fr. Is. liii. 1, Hebr. Π^ΜΟί^, which
in 2 .S. iv. 4, etc., is rendered ayyeXia); aicoij -niaTfws
preaching on the necessity of faith, (Germ. Glaubens-
predigt), Gal. iii. 2, 5 ; Xoyot ακοής i. q. λ. άκονσθής [cf.
W. 531 (494 sq.)] : 1 Th. ii. 13 ; Heb. iv. 2. b. hear-
say, report, rumor; τινός, concerning any one: Mt. iv.
24 ; .xiv. 1 ; xxiv. 6 ; Mk. i. 28 ; xiii. 7. (Freq. in Grk.
writ.)*
άκολονθεω, -ώ; fut. ακολουθήσω; impf. ηκο\ούβουν :
1 aor. ηκο\οίθησα; pf. ηκολούθηκα (Mk. χ. 28 L Τ Tr
WII ) ; (fr. ακόλουθος, and this fr. a copulative and Κίλ(ν-
θος road, prop, walking the same road) ; 1. to follow
one who precedes, yoin him as his attendant, accompany
him.: Mt-iv. 25; viii. 19 ; ix. 19 ; xxvii. 55; Mk. iii. 7;
v. 24, [37 Lchm.] ; xiv. 51 [R G] ; Lk. xxii. 39, 54 ; xxiiL
27; Jn. i. 37 sq. 43 (44); vi. 2; xviii. 15; xx. 6, etc.;
Acts xii. 8 ; xiii. 43; xxi. 36 ; 1 Co. x. 4 ; distinguished
fr. TTpoayeiv in Mt. xxi. 9 ; Mk. xi. 9 ; tru|). τα ίργα
αυτών ίΊκο\ουθ(Ί per αντών, their good deeds «ill accom-
j)any tlum to the presence of God the judge to be
rewarded by him. Rev. xiv. 13; on the other hand.
ηκολούθησαν αυτής al άμαρτίαι αχριτοΰ ουρανού. Rev. ,\\iii.
5, but here for ηκολούθησαν G L Τ Tr WH have re-
stored (κολλήθησαν; [σημι'ια το'ις πιστίύσασιν άκολουθίισα
ταΰτα, Mk. xvi. 1 7 Tr WH txt. (where al. παρακυλ. (j. v.)].
to follow one in time, succeeil one : Rev. .\iv. 8 sq.
(Hdian. 1, 14, 12 (6) τα yoiv άκολουθίισαντα, al.) Since
among the ancients disciples were accustomed to accom-
pany their masters on tlieir walks and journeys — [al.
derive the usage that follows from the fgurative sense
of the word directly ; cf. e. g. 2 Mace. viii. 36 το
άκολουθί'ιν τοΊς νόμοις ; Μ. Antonin. 1. vii. § 31 άκολού-
θησον θίά, and Gataker ad loc], άκολουθίω denotes 2.
to join one as a disciple, become or be his disciple; side
with his party, [A. V. follow him]: Mt. iv. 20, 22; ix. 9;
xix. 27 sq.; Mk. i. 18; viii. 34; Lk. v. 11, 27, etc.;
Jn. viii. 12 (where Jesus likens himself to a torch which
the disciple follows) ; ονκ ακολουθίΐ ήμ'ιν he is not of
our band of thy disciples, Mk. ix. 38. to cleave stead-
fastly to one, conform wholly to his example, in living and if
need be in dying also : Mt. x. 38 ; xvi. 24 ; Jn. xii. 26 ;
xxi. 22. This verb is not found in the Epp. exc. in
1 Co. X. 4. As in the classics, it is joined mostly with
a dat. of the obj.; sometimes with μ(τά τίνος, Lk. i.\. 49 ;
Rev. vi. 8 [Treg. mrg. dat.] ; xiv. 13 ; (so also in Grk.
writ. ; cf. Lob. ad Plirv'n. p. 353 sq. ; [^Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 458 sq.]) ; οπίσω τινός, Mt. χ. 38 ; Mk.
viii. 34 (where R L AVII Tr mrg. (λθ(1ν), Hebr. '^'^n
'jSil ηΠΝ, cf. 1 K. xix. 21 ; .see W. 2:i4 (219) ; [B. 172
(150), cf. ακολ. κατόπιν Tiraf, Arstph. Plut. 13. CoMP. :
f'^, {π-, κατ-, παρ-, συν- ακολουθία].
ακούω [on the use of the pres. in a pf. sense cf. W.
274 sq. (258); B. 203 (176)]; impf. ^κουοι- : fut. (in
best Grk. usage) άκοΰσομαι, Jn. v. 25 R G L, 28 R G L ;
Acts iii. 22; vii. 37 R G ; xvii. 32; [xxi. 22]; x.w.
22; xxviii. 28; [Ro. x. 14 Tdf.], and (a later form)
άκοι;σω. Mt. xii. 19 ; xiii. 14, (both fr. the Sept.) ; [Jn. x.
16 ; xvi. 13 Tr WH mrg.; Acts xxviii. 26] ; Ro. x. 14
[R G] ; and Τ Tr WH in Jn. v. 25, 28, (cf. W. S2 ( 79) ; B.
53 (46)[Λ'eitchs. V.]); [I aor. ι^κουση, Jn.iii. 32, etc.]; pf.
άκήκοα; Pass., [pres. ήκονομαι; \1\-Λ.άκουσθήσομαι]; 1 aor.
ήκυΰσθην;\{τ.\\ονίΐ.Λονιτ\]; tohear. I. absol. 1. to be
I ndnicd with the faculty of hearing (not deaf) : ]\Ik. vii.
37 : Lk. vii. 22 ; Mt. xi. 5. 2. to attend to (use the facul-
ty of hearing), consider what is or has been said. So in
exhortations : oKoiJfTf, Mk. iv. 3 ; οκουσατί, Jas. ii. 5 ;
ό ίνων Ζιτα άκούΐΐν ακουστώ, Alt. xi. 15 ; xili. 9, [in both
Τ WH om. Tr br. dKowii/] ; Mk. iv. 23 ; Lk. xiv. 35 (34) ;
ό ΐχων ους άκουσάτω, Kev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29 ; iii. 6, 13, 22,
etc. 3. trop. to understand, perceive the sense of
what is said: Mt. xiii. 15 sq. ; Mk. viii. 18; 1 Co. xiv.
2. Π. with an object [B. § 132, 1 7 ; W. 199 (187 sq.)];
23
ακριβής
JL. άκονω τι, Ιο hear something ; a. to perceive by the
ear what is announced in one's presence, (to hear im-
mediately): την φωνήν, Mt. xii. 19 ; Jn. iii. 8 ; Kev.
iv. 1 ; v. 11 ; xrui. 4 ; Acts xxii. 9, etc. ; τον άσιτασμίν,
Lk. i. 41 (cf. 44); Ταλιλαίαν, the name 'Galilee,' Lk.
xxiii. 6 [T WH cm. Tr mrg. br. Γαλ.; cf. B. 166 (145)];
άνάστασιν vtKpav, the phrase ' άνάστ. ν€κρών,' Acts xvii.
32 ; τον λόγοκ, Mk. v. 36 [R G L] (on this pass, see παρα-
κηύω, 2) ; ilt. xix. 22 ; Jn. v. 24, etc. ; Toit Xoyovs,
Acts ii. 22 ; V. 24 ; Mt. vii. 24 ; ρήματα, 2 Co. xii. 4 ;
τί λίγουσιν, Mt. x.\i. 16 ; pass., Mt. ii. 18 ; Rev. xviii.
22 sq. ; τΐ ίκ nvos, 2 Co. xii. 6 [R G] ; foil, by ό« [Β.
300 (257 sq.)], Acts xxii. 2 ; Mk. xvi. 11 ; Jn. iv. 42 ;
xiv. 28. b. to yet by hearing, learn (from the mouth
of the teacher or narrator) : Acts xv. 17 ; Mt. x. 27 (ό
eff TO ojf aKoieTe, what is taught you in secret) ; Ro. xv.
21 ; Eph. i. 13 ; Col. i. 6 ; Jn. xiv. 24 ; 1 Jn. ii. 7, 24 ;
iii. 1 1 ; Χριστοί' i. e. to become acquainted with Christ
from apostolic teaching, Eph. iv. 21 (cf. μαθύν τονΧριστόν,
vs. 20 [Β. 166 (144) note; AV. 199 (187) note]) ; pass.,
Lk. xii. 3 ; Heb. ii. 1 ; τί with gen. of pers. fr. whom
one hears, Acts i. 4 ; •τί παρά tivos, Jn. viii. 26, 40 ; xv.
15 ; Acts x. 22 ; xxviii. 22 ; 2 Tim. ii. 2, (Thue. 6, 93 ;
Xen. an. 1, 2, 5 [here Dind. om. napa] ; Plat. rep. vi.
p. 506 d., al.; [B. 166 (145); AV. 199 (188)]); [παρά
Ttvos, without an obj. expressed, Jn. i. 40 (41)] ; ίκ
Tivos, Jn. xii. 34 (ex τοΰ νόμου, from attendance on its
public reading) ; άπό with gen. of pers., 1 Jn. i. 5 ; with
πίρί τίνος added. Acts ix. 13 ; foil, by on, Mt. v. 21,
27,33,38,43. c. ακούω τι. a thing comes to one's ears, to
find out (Jjy hearsay), learn, {hear [(o/")] mediately) :
with ace. of thing, τα epya, Mt. xi. 2 ; οσα inoiei, Mk.
iii. 8 [Treg. txt. ποίίΐ] ; ποΧίμονί, Lk. xxi. 9 ; Mt. xxiv.
6 ; Ilk. xiii. 7 ; to learn, absol. viz. what has just been
mentioned : Mt. ii. 3 ; xxii. 7 [R L] ; Mk. ii. 17; iii.
21 ; Gal. i. 13 ; Eph. i. 15 ; Col. i. 4 ; Philem. 5, etc.
foil, by oTt, Mt. ii. 22; iv. 12; xx. 30; Mk. vi. 55;
X. 47; Jn. iv. 47; ix. 35; xi. 6; xii. 12; Gal. i. 23;
Trepi Tivos, Mk. vii. 25 ; τι πfpi τίνος, Lk. Lx. 9 ; xvi. 2 ;
xxiii. 8 [R G L] ; foil, by an ace. with ptcp. [B. 303
(260)] : Lk. iv. 23 ; Acts vii. 12 ; 2 Th. iii. 11 ; 3 Jn.
4 ; foil, by ace. with inf. in two instances [cf. B. 1. c] :
Jn. xii. 18 ; 1 Co. xi. 18. pass. : Acts xi. 22 {ήκούσθη
ό Xo'yot eir τα ίτα της ίκκΧησΙας was brought to the ears) ;
1 Co. \. 1 {άκονίται πορνεία ev νμΐν) ; Mt. xxviii. 14
{fav άκουσθη τοντο ίπϊ [L Tr λ\ Η mrg. υίτό] τον ήγςμο-
νος) ; Mk. ii. 1 ; Jn. ix. 32 ήκούσθη ότι. d. to give ear
to teaching or teacher ; Tois λόγους, Mt. x. 14 ; to follow
with attentive hearing, τόκ Auyoi/, Jn. viii. 43 ; τα ρήματα
τοΰ θ{οϋ, 47. e. to comprehend, understand, (like Lat.
audio) : Mk. iv. 33 ; Gal. iv. 21 [(Lehm. mrg. άναγινώ-
a-KcTe) yet cf. Mey. ad loc] ; (Gen. xi. 7). 2. ajcoufti' is
not joined with the g e η i t i ν e of the obj. unless one hear
the person or thing with his own ears [B. 166 (144)] ;
a. with gen. of a person; simply; a. to perceive any
one's voice : ου i. e. of Christ, whose voice is heard in
the instruction of his messengers (Lk. x. 16), Ro. x. 14,
[W. 190 (187) note-'J. β. to give ear to one, listen.
hearken, (Germ, ihm zuhoren, ihn anhoren) : Mt. ii. 9;
Mk. vii. 14 ; xii. 37 ; Lk. ii. 46 ; x. 16 ; xv. 1 ; xL\. 48 ;
xxi. 38 ; Acts xvii. 32 ; xxiv. 24 (in both these pass.
τινός π(ρί τίνος); xxv. 22; Jn. vi. 60. γ. to yield to, hear
and obey, hear to one, (Germ, aufeinen horen) : Mt. xvii.
5, (Mk. Lx. 7 ; Lk. ix. 35) ; Jn. iii. 29 ; x. 8 ; Acts iii.
22 sq. ; iv. 19 ; vii. 37 [R G] ; 1 Jn. iv. 5 sq. Hence
8. its use by John in the sense to listen to, have regard
to, of God answering the prayers of men : Jn. Lx. 31 ; xi.
41 ; 1 Jn. v. 14 sq. (the Sept. render y^i^ by (Ισακοΰω).
t. with gen. of pers. and ptcp. [B. 301 (259)] : Mk. xiv.
58 ; Lk. xviii. 36 ; Jn. i. 37 ; vii. 32 ; Acts ii. 6, 11 ;
Rev. xvi. 5 ; ήκουσα τον θυσιαστηρίου Χίγοντος, Rev. xvi.
7 G L Τ [Tr WH cod. Sin.], a poetic personification ;
cf. De Wette ad loc, W. § 30, 11. b. with gen. of a
thing: της βλασφημίας, Mk. xiv. 64 (Lchm. την βλα-
σφημίαν, as in Mt. xxvL 65; the ace. merely denotes the
object ; T^f βλασφ. is equiv. in sense to αίτοΟ βλασφημοΰν-
τος, [cf. Β. 166 (145)]) ; των λόγων, Lk. vi. 47, (Mt. vii.
24 τονς Χόγονς) ; Jn. vii. 40 (L Ϊ Tr WH cod. Sin., but
R G τον λόγον, [cf . Β. u. s.]) ; συμφωνίας κ. χορών, Lk. xv.
25 ; τοΰ στίναγμοϋ. Acts vii. 34 ; της απολογίας. Acts
xxii. 1 . The f i-equent phrase άκούίΐν τής φωνής (i. q. ),"0ψ
h\p3, Ex. xviii. 19) means a. to perceive the distinct
irords of a voice : Jn. v. 25, 28 ; Acts Lx. 7 ; xi. 7 ; xxii.
7 ; Heb. iii. 7, 15 ; iv. 7 ; Rev. xiv. 13 ; xxi. 3. β. to
yield obedience to the voice : Jn. v. 25 (oi άκονσαντ(ς sc.
τής φωνής) : x. 16, 27; xviii. 37; Rev. iii. 20. In Jn.
xiL 47 ; xviii. 37 ; Lk. vi. 47 : Acts xxiL 1, it is better
to consider the pron. μοϋ wliich precedes as a possess,
gen. rather than, with B. 167 (145 sq.), to assume a
double gen. of the object, one of the pers. and one of
the thing. The Johannean phrase άκού^ιν πάρα τοΰ
θ(θϋ, or τί πάρα θ(θϋ, signifies a. to perceive in the soul
the inward communication of God: Jn. vi. 45. b. to be
taught by God's inward communication : Jn. viii. 26, 40,
(so, too, the simple άκοϋ(ΐν in v. 30) ; to be taught by the
devil, ace. to the reading of L Τ Tr ΛΥΗ, ήκούσατι
πάρα τον πατρός, in Jn. viii. 38. For the rest cf. B. 1 65
(144) sqq. ; 301 (258) sqq. [CoMP. : δι-, (ϊσ-, in-, παρ-,
προ-, ύπ-ακονω.^
άκρασ^α, -ας, ή. (ακρατής), want of self-control, inconti-
nence, intemperance : Mt. xxiii. 25 (Grsb. αδικία) ; 1 Co.
vii. 5. Cf. Lot), ad Phryn. p. 524 sq. [(Aristot. on.)] *
ακρατής, -«'s, gen. -ίος, -ονς, (κράτος), without self-con-
trol, intemperate : 2 Tim. iii. 3. (Freq. in prof. writ. fr.
Plato and Xen. down.) *
άκρατος. -ov, (κ(ράννυμι), unmixed, pure : Rev. xiv. 10
(of wine undiluted with water, as freq. in prof. writ,
and Jer. xxxii. 1 (xxv. 15)).*
άχρ(β<ια, -ft'af, ή, (ακριβής), exactness, exactest care :
Acts x.xii. 3 (κατά ακρίβ(ΐαν τον νόμου in accordance
with the strictness of the Mosaic law, [cf. Isoc. areop.
p. 147 e.]). [From Thuc. down.] *
ακριβής, -e'f, gen. -oCs, exact, careful. The neut, compar.
is used adverbially in Acts xviii. 26; xxiii. 15, 20; xxiv.
22 ; ή ακριβέστατη αίρισις the straitest sect i. e. the most
precise and rigorous in interpreting the Mosaic law, and
ακριβόω
24
αΚάβαστρον
in observing e\en the more minute precepts of the law
anJ of tr:ulition, Acts x.wi. 5. [From Ildt. down.]*
άκριβίω, -ώ : 1 aor. ήκρίβωσα ; (uKpt/Sijs) ; 1. in prof,
writ. Ill Lnow accurately, to do cxaclbj. 2. to investi-
gate diligentbj : Mt. ii. 7, 16, (ακριβώς ίξ(τάζ(ΐν, vs. 8);
Aristot. gen. anim. 5, 1 ; Philo, ni. opif. § 25 μ€τά πάσης
(ξ(τάσ(ως άκριβηνντις- [ΑΙ. to learn exactly, ascertain ;
cf. Fritz, or Mey. on Mt. u. s.] *
ακριβώς, adv., exactly, accurately, diligently : Mt. ii. 8 ;
Lk. i. 3 ; Acts .wiii. 2.5 ; 1 Th. v. 2 : ακριβώς πιριπατί'ιν
to live carefully, circumspectly, deviating in no respect
from the law of duty, Eph. v. 15. [Fr. Aeschyl. down.] *
άκρίΐ, -I'Sos, ή, [fr. Horn, down], a loctint, particu-
larly that species which especially infests oriental coun-
tries, stripping fields and trees. Numberless swarms of
them almost every spring are carried by the wind from
Arabia into Palestine, and having devastated that coun-
try migrate to regions farther north, until they perish
by falling into the sea. The Orientals are accustomed
to feed upon locusts, either raw or roasted and seasoned
with salt [or prepared in other ways], and the Israelites
also (ace. to Lev. xi. 22) were permitted to eat them ;
(cf. Win. RWB. s. V. Heuschrecken ; Farrer in Schen-
kel ill. p. 78 sq. ; [BB.DD. s. v. ; Tristram, Nat. Hist, of
the Bible, p. 313 sqq.]) : Mt. iii. 4 ; Mk. i. 6. A marvel-
lous and infernal kind of locusts is described in Rev. L\.
3, 7, cf. 2, 5 sq. 8-12 ; see DUsterdieck ad loc.*
άκροατήριον, -ου, τό, (άκροάημαι to be a hearer), place
of assemblage for hearing, nmlitorium ; like this Lat.
>vord in Roman Law, άκροατ. in Acts xxv. 23 denotes a
place set apart for hearing anil deciding cases, [yet cf.
Mey. ad loc.]. (Several times in Plut. and other later
writers.) *
ακροατής, -oC, ό, (άκροάομαι, [see the preceding word]),
α hearer: τηϋ νόμου, Ro. ii. 13; τον λό^ου , Jas. i. 22 sq.
25. (Thuc, Isocr., Plat., Dem., Plut.) •
άκροβνσ-τία, -ας, ή, (a word unknown to the Greeks,
who used η άκροηοσθία and το (ΐκροπόσθιον, fr. πόσθη i. e.
membrum virile. Accordingly it is likely that την ττήπθην
of the Greeks was pronounced την βίστην by the Alex-
andrians, and άκροβυαττία said instead of άκροηοσθία —
i. e. TO άκρον της πάσθης; cf. the acute remarks of
Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. i. 136, together with the
opinion which AViner prefers 99 (94), [and Cremer, 3te
Aufl. s. V.]), in the Sept. the equiv. of nS'i;? the prepuce,
the skin covering the glans penis ; a. prop. : Acts xi.
3 ; Ro. ii. 25, 26 " ; 1 Co. vii. 19 ; Gal. v. 6 ; vi. 15 ; Col.
iii. 11; (Judith xiv. 10; 1 Mace. i. 15); iv άκροβυστία
ων having the foreskin ( TertuU. praeputiiilus), imcir-
cumci.sed i.e. Gentile, Ro. iv. 10; e'l/ άκρ. sc. ων, 1 Co.
vii. 18; equiv. to the same is Si άκροβυστίας, Ro. iv. 11 ;
ή fv Tji άκροβ. πίστις the faith wliich one has while he is
uncircumcised, Ro. iv. 1 1 sq. b. by meton. of the abstr.
for the concr., having the foreskin is equiv. to α (Jentile :
Ro. ii. 26 ' ; iii. 30 ; iv. 9 ; Eph. ii. 1 1 ; ή tx φύσ€ως άκροβ.
one uncircumcised by birth oraGentile, opp. to a Jew who
ehowshimselfaGentile in character, Ro.ii. 27; fiayyi•
λιον της άκροβ. gospel to be preached to the (ientiles. Gal.
ii. 7. c. in a transferred sense : ή οχροβ. της σαρκός
(opp. to the π(ριτομή άχ€ΐροποίητος or regeneration, Col.
ii. 11), the condition in which the corrupt desires rooted
in the σαρξ were not yet extinct. Col. ii. 13 (the expression
is derived from the circumstance that the foreskin was
the sign of impurity and aUenation from God, [cf. B. D.
s. V. Circumcision]).*
άκρο-γωνιαΐος, -aia, -alov, a word wholly bibl. and eccl.,
[W. 99 (94); 236 (221)], {άκρος extreme, and yωvίa
corner, angL•), placed at the extreme corner; ^ίθος cor-
ner-stone; used of Christ, 1 Pet. ii. 6; Eph. ii. 20; Sept.
Is. xxviii. 16 for Π33 J5S. For as the corner-stone
holds together two walls, ,so Christ joins together as
Christians, into one body dedicated to God, those who
were formerly Jews and Gentiles, Eph. ii. 20 [yet cf.
Mey. ad loe.] compared with vss. 14, 16-19, 21 sq.
And as a corner-stone contributes to sustain the edifice,
but nevertheless some fall in going around the corner
carelessly ; so some are built up by the aid of Christ,
while others stumbling at Christ perish, 1 Pet. ii. 6-8 ;
see γωνία, a."
άκροθίνιον, -ου, τό. (fr. άκρος extreme, and θίς, gen.
θινός, a heap ; extremity, topmost part of a heap), gener-
ally in plur. τα άκροθίνια the first-fruits, whether of crops
or of .ipoils (among the Greeks customarily selected from
the topmost part of the heaps and offered to the gods,
Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 35) ; in the Bible only once : Heb. vii.
4, of booty. (Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt., Thuc, Plut., al.)*
cucpos, -a, -OK, (άκή point [see άκμΙ)]), [fr. Horn, down],
highest, extreme ; to άκρον the topmost point, the extremity
[cf. B. 94 (82)]: Lk. xvi. 24; Ileb. xi. 21 [see προσ-
κυνΐω, a. fin.] ; άκρα. άκρον γης, οίρανον, the farthest
bounds, uttermost parts, end, of the earth, of heaven :
Mt. xxiv. 31 ; Mk. xiii. 27 ; cf. Deut. iv. 32; xxviii. 64 ;
Is. xiii. 5; Jer. xii. 12.*
Άκνλας, -ου, [but no gen. seems to be extant, see B. 20
(18)], 0, Aquilii, a Jew of Pontus, a tent-maker, convert
to Christ, companion and ally of Paul in propagating
the Christian religion: Acts xviii. 2, 18, 26; Ro. xvi.
3 ; 1 Co. xvi. 19 ; 2 Tim. iv. 19 ; [see B. D.].*
όκυρο'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ηκΰρωσα : (άκυρος without author-
ity, not binding, void ; fr. κϋρος force, authority), to
render void, deprive offeree and authority, (opp. to κυρόω
to confirm, make valid) : {'ιτολήν, Mt. xv. 6 [R G ;
νόμον, ibid. Τ AVH mrg.] ; λόγοκ [ibid. L Tr WH txt.] ;
Mk. vii. 13, (cf. άθ(Τ(ω) ; 8ιαθήκην, Gal. iii. 17. ([1 Esdr.
vi. 31] ; Diod., Dion. Hal., Plut.)•
άκωλΰτως, adv., (κωλύω), without hindrance : Acts
xxviii. 31. [Plato, Epict., Hdian.] *
άκων, άκουσα, ακον, (contr. fr. άίκων. a priv. and ΐκων
willing), not of one's oicn tcitl, unwilling: 1 Co. L\. 17.
(Very freq. among the Greeks.) *
[όλο, to', read by Tdf. in Mt. v. 13 ; Mk. ix. 50 ; Lk.
xiv. 34 ; see uXas.]
άλάβαα-τρον, -ου, τό, (in the plur. in Theocr. 15, 114;
Anth. Pal. 9, 153 ; in other prof. writ, ό and η αΚάβα-
στρος; [the older and more correct spelling drops the
p, cf. Sleph. Thesaur. s. v. 1385 d. ; L. and S. s. v. άλά-
αλαζονεία
25
αΚεκτοροφωνία
βαστροί]), α box made of alabaster, in which undents are
preserved, (PUn. h. n. 13, 2 (3), [al. 13, 19,] " unguenta
optima servantur in alabastris ") ; with the addition of
μΰρον (as in Lcian. dial. mer. 14, 2 ; [Hdt. 3, 20]) : Lk.
vii. 37 ; Mt. xxvi. 7 ; Mk. xiv. 3 (where L Τ adopt τον
ά\άβ., Tr WH [Mey.] την άλ. ; Mt. and Lk. do not add
the article, so that it is not clear in what gender they
use the word, [cf. Tdf.'s crit. note ad loc.]). Cf. Win.
RWB. [or B. D.] s. v. Alabaster.»
dXaioveta, and άΚαζονία (which spelUng, not uncommon
in later Grk., Τ WII adopt [see I, t]), -as, ή, (fr. άλαζο-
νιύημαι i. e. to act the άλαζών, q. v.) ; a. in prof. Avrit.
[fr. Arstph. down] generally empty, braggart talk, some-
times also empty display in act, swagger. For illustration
see Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 12; mem. 1, 7 ; Aristot. eth. Nic.
4, 13, p. 1127 ed. Bekk. ; [also Trench § xxLx.]. b.
an insolent and empty assurance, tcliich trusts in its own
power and resources and shamefully despises and violates
divine laivs and human rights : 2 Mace. ix. 8 ; Sap. v. 8.
c. an impious and empty presumption which trusts in the
stability of earthly things, [R. V. vaunting'] : Jas. iv. 16
(where the plur. has reference to the various occasions
on which tliis presumption shows itself; [cf. W. § 27, 3;
B. 77 (67)]); ToO βίου, display in one's style of living,
[R. V. vainglory], 1 Jn. ii. 16.*
άλαλων, -όνος, ό, ή, (αλη wandering), [fr. Arstph. on],
an empty pretender, a boaster : Ro. i. 30 ; 2 Tim. iii. 2.
[Trench §xxix.; Tittmanni. p. 73sq. ; Schmidt ch. 172,2.]*
αλαλάζω; [fr. Find, down]; a. prop, to repeat fre-
quently the cry αΚαΚά, as soldiers used to do on entering
battle. b. univ. to utter a joyful shout : Ps. xlvi.
(xlvii.) 2 ; Ixv. (Ixvi.) 2 ; and in prof. writ. c. to
wail, lament: Mk. v. 38, (VVn Jer. iv. 8; xxxii. 20 (xxv.
34)) ; cf. ολολύζω, Lat. ululare. [Syn. see κλαίω fin.] d.
to ring loudly, to clang : 1 Co. xiii. 1 , [cf . iv κνμβάλοι:
όλαλιιγμοΟ, Ps. cl. 5].*
ά-λάλητο$, -OK, {λαλητός fr. λαλίω; [cf. W. 23]), not to
be uttered, not to be expressed in words: στεναγμοί mute
sighs, the expression of which is suppressed by grief,
Ro. viii. 26, [al. 'wliich (from their nature) cannot be
uttered'; cf. Mey. ad loc; AV. 97 (92)]. (Anth. Pal. 5,
4 συνίστορα άλαλητων i. e. of love-secrets.) *
α-λαλο;, -ox, (λάλοί talking, talkative), [fr. Aeschyl.
on], speechless, dumb, wanting the faculty of speech : Mk.
vii. 37; πνεύμα, Mk. ix. 17, 2S, because the defects of
demoniacs vrere thought to proceed from the nature and
peculiarities of the demons by which they were pos-
sessed. (Sept. Fs. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 14; xxx. (xxxi.)
19; <ΐλ(άλου και κακού πνήματο! πληρηι. Pint, de orac.
def. 51 p. 438 b.)•
όίλαβ, -aros, to, (a later form, found in Se])!. and N. T.
[Aristot. de mirab. ausc. § 138 ; Plut. qu. conv. iv. 4, 3, 3],
cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 220 ; dat. αλάτι Col. iv. 6), and
a\s, άλας, ό, (the classic form [fr. Horn, down] ; Sir.
xxii. 15 (13) ; xUii. 19 ; Sap. x. 7 ; 1 Mace. x. 29, etc. ;
Mk. ix. 49 άλί dat. [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br.],
and in vs. 50 L Τ Tr WII αλα ace. [yet without the
art.] with nom. τό άλαί), finally, nom. and ace. Ska Tdf.
in Mk. ix. 50 [also Mt. v. 13; Lk. xiv. 34 (where see
liis note)] (similar to γάλα, gen. γάλατοί, a form noted
by certain grammarians, see [ ]VH. App. p. 158 ;]
KUhner i. 353 sq. ; but see what Fritzsche, Com. on Sir.
(xxxix. 26) p. 226 sq., says in opposition) ; salt ; 1.
Salt with which food is seasoned and sacrifices are
sprinkled: Mk. ix. 49RG; cf. άλί^ω. 2. aXas της γης,
those kinds of saUne matter used to fertilize arable
land, Mt. v. 13*; here salt as a condiment cannot be
understood, since this renders land sterile (Deut. xxix.
23; Zeph. ii. 9; Judg. ix. 45); cf. Grohmann in Kiiuf-
fer's Bibl. Studien, 1844, p. 82 sqq. The meaning is,
' It is your prerogative to impart to mankind (likened
to arable land) the influences required for a life of devo-
tion to God.' In the statement immediately following,
iav St okas κτλ., the comparison seems to be drawn from
salt as a condiment, so that two figures are blended;
[but it is better to adopt this latter meaning throughout
the pass., and take -γη to denote the mass of mankind,
see s. V. 4 b. and cf. Tholuck et al. ad loc.]. In Mk.
Lx. 50 * and Lk. xiv. 34 salt is a symbol of that health
and vigor of soul which is essential to Christian virtue;
[cf. Mey. on the former pass.]. 3. Salt is a symbol
of lasting concord, Mk. ix. 50 •, because it protects food
from putrefaction and preserves it unchanged. Ac-
cordingly, in the solemn ratification of compacts, the
Orientals were, and are to this day, accustomed to par-
take of salt together. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Salz ;
[BB.DD. s. V. Salt] ; Knobel on Leviticus p. 370. 4.
Wisdom and grace exhibited in speech : Col. iv. 6 [where
see Bp. Lghtft.].*
"Αλασ-σ-α : Acts xxvii. 8 ; cf. ί\.ασαΙα.
[άλί€ύ5, ό, Τ WH uniformly for oKuis, see Tdf.'s note
on Mk. i. 16 and N. T. ed. 7, Proleg. p. 1.; esp. ed. 8,
Prolcg. p. 82 sq. ; WH. App. p. 151.]
αλ(ίφω : impf. ηλαφον; 1 aor. ήλ(ΐ\Ι/α: 1 aor. mid.
impv. αλίίψαί; [allied vf'ith λίπ-ος grease; cf. Curtius
§ 340; Vaniick p. 811 ; Feile p. 407; fr. Hom. down];
to anoint : τινά or τι, Mk. xvi. 1 ; Jn. xii. 3 ; τινά or τί
Tivi [W. 227 (213)], as Ααίω, Lk. vii. 46 ■; Mk. vi. 13;
Jas. V. 14; μϋρω, Jn. xi. 2; Lk. vii. 38, 46"; Mid.:
]\It. vi. 1 7 (lit. ' anoint for thyself thy head,' ui\ge tibi
caput tuum; cf. W. 257 (242); B. 192 (166 sq.)). Cf.
Win. RWB. s. V. Salbe; [B.D. or McC. and S. s. v.
Anoint, etc. Syn. : " αλείφειν is the mundane and profane,
Xpietv the sacred and religious, Λvord." Trench § x.xxviii.
COMP. : (γλείφω].*
όλίκτοροφωνία, -as, η, (άλίκτωρ and φωνή [W. 25]),
the crowing if a cock; cock-crowing: Aesop, fab. 79 [44].
Used of the third watch of the night : BIk. xiii. 35 ; in
tliis passage the watches arc enumerated into which the
Jews, follpwing the Roman method, divided the night ;
[cf. Win. RWB. s. V. Nachtwachen; B. D. s. v. Watches
of Night ; Ale.x.'s Kitto s. v. Cock-crowing ; Wetst. on
Mt. xiv. 25 ; Wieseler, Chron. Syn. j). 406 note]. (For
writ, who use this word see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 229, [and
add (fr. Soph. Lex. s. v.) Strab. 7, frag. 35 p. 83, 24 ;
Orig. i. 825 b. ; Constt. Ap. 5, 18 ; 5, 19 ; 8, 34].) *
αλέκτωρ
26
αΚηθβ
αλέκτωρ, -οροί, ό, α cod; (Lat. rjallu.•! (jallinnceu.•!) : Mt.
xxvi. 34, 74 S(|. ; Mk. xiv. 30, 6S [Lchiii. br.], 72 : I.k. xxii.
34, 60sq. ; Jn. xiii. 38; xviii. 27. Ci. Loh. ad I'liryn. p.
229; [RutherfonI, Xew Pliryn. p. 307; W. 23 ; see also
BB.DD. s. V. ; Trhimm, Nat. Hist, of tlie Bible, i). 221 sq. ;
esp. Egti, Zeitsclir. f. wiss. Theol., 187i) |). 5I7siiii.].•
'AXcgavSpcvs, -«'ωί, ό, an Alexandrinn, a native or a resi-
dent of -Vle.xaiidria (a celebrated city of Egypt) : Acts
vi. fl: -wiii. 24. [(Plut. Pomp. 49, 6; al.)]*
'AXegavSpivos [cf. Tdf.'s note on Acts xxvii. 6 ; G LTr
Cubet, al. -ίρϊΐΌΓ ; Chandler §397 note], -ή, -όν, Alexan-
drian : Acts xxvu. 6; xxviii. 11. [(Polyb. 34, 8, 7.)]*
'Αλί'ξανερο5 [i. e. defender of men], -ou, ό, Alcxamler;
.'1. a son of that Simon of Cyrene who carried the cross
of Jesus: Mk. xv. 21. 2. a certain man of the kin-
dred of the hig;li priest: Acts iv. 6. 3. a certain
Jew : Acts xix. 33. 4. a certain coppersmith, an op-
ponent of the apostle Paul : 1 Tim. i. 20 ; 2 Tim. iv.
14; [al. doubt whether both these passages relate to the
same man ; cf. e. g. EUic. on the former].*
oXcvpov, -ov. TO, (ά\(ίω to grind), wlitaten flour, meal:
Mt. xiii. o.'i ; Lk. .xiii. 21. Ilesych. aKtvpa κυρίως τα τοϋ
σίτου, αλφίτα fie των κριθών. (Ildl., Xen., Plat., Jo-
seph., al.)•
αλήθεια, -as, ij, {αΚηθής), [iv. Horn, down], veritij, truth.
1. objectively; 1. un'iv. irliat >.■< true in nni/ matter
under consideration (opp. to what is feigned, fictitious,
false) : Jas. iii. 14; άληθ^ιαν Xcyetv, epciv, Jn. viii. 45 scp ;
xvi. 7 ; Ro. ix. 1•; 1 Co. xii. 6 ; 1 Tim. ii. 7 ; clwfv αυτω
πάσαν την ά\ήθ(ίαν, everything as it really was, Mk. v.
33, (so in classics) ; μαρτυρύν ttj αλήθεια to testify ac-
cording to the true state of the case, Jn. v. 33 ; in a
broader sense, λαλίίΐ' αλί]θ(ΐαν to speak always according
to truth. Eph. iv. 2.5 ; [αΚηθ(ίαί ρ!)ματα άποφθίγγομαι, as
opp. to the vagaries of madness, Acts xxvi. 2.5] ; aXiJitta
tye'vcTo, was shown to be true by the event, 2 Co. vii. 14.
ev άληθ(ία in truth, truly, as the case is, according to
fact: Mt. xxii. 16; Jn. iv. 23 sq. (as accords with the
divine nature) ; 2 Co. vii. 14 ; Col. i. 6 ; ΐπ άληθίία!
a. trull/, in truth, according to truth; Mk. xii. 32; Lk.
iv. 25, (Job ix. 2 Sept.; Philo, vit. Moys.i. § 1). b. of
a truth, in realili/, in fact, certainli/: Mk. xii. 14; Lk.
XX. 21; [xxii. 59]; Acts iv. 27; x. 34, (Clem. Rom.
iCor. 23,5and47, 3); [cf. W. § 51, 2 f. ; B. 336 (289)] ;
κατ άλήθ^ιαν in accordance with fact, i. e. (ace. to the
context) justly, without partiaUty: Ro. ii. 2; eire προ-
φάσα, (iTf άΧηθ^ία, Phil. i. 18; c'v fpya> <■ άΚηθύα,
1 Jn. iii. 18 [Rec. om. «V; so Eph. iv. 21 AVII mrg.].
2. In reference to religion, the word denotes witat is
true in things appertaining to God and the duties of man,
(' moral and religious truth ') ; and that a. with the
greatest latitude, in the sceptical question τΐ ia-nv άλψ
Ofia, Jn. .xviii. 38 ; b. the true notions of ftod which
are open to human reason without his supernatural in-
tervention ; Ro. i. 18; al.so ij άλήβαα dtoi the truth of
which God is the author, Ro. i. 25, cf. 19, (ij αΚήθ^ια τοϋ
Χρίστου, Evang. Nicod. c. 5, 2 ; accordingly it is not, as
many interpret the phrase, the true nature of God [yet
see Mey. ad loc.]) ; truth, the embodiment of which tlie
Jews sought in the Mosaic law, Ho. ii. 20. c. Ihi: truth,
as taught in the Christian religion, respecting God and
the execution of his purposes through Christ, and respect-
ing the duties of man, opposed alike to the superstitions
of the Gentiles and the inventions of the Jews, and
to the corrupt opinions and precepts of false teachers
even among Christians : ή άλήθιια toC eiayy. the truth
which is the gospel or which the gospel presents. Gal. ii.
5, 14, [cf. W. § 34, 3 a.]; and absol. η αλήθ(ΐ(ΐ and
ά\ήθ(ία: Jn. i. 14, 17; viii. 32, 40; [xvi. 13] ; xvii. 19;
1 Jn. i. 8 ; ii. 4, 21 ; 2 Jn. 1-3; Gal. iii. 1 (Rec.) ; v. 7;
2 Co. iv. 2; xiii. 8; Eph. iv. 24; 2 Th. ii. 10, 12; 1
Tim. ii. 7 (eV πίστίΐ κ. άΚηθ(ία in faith and truth, of
which I became a partaker through faith) ; iii. 15 ; iv.
3 ; vi. 5 ; 2 Tim. ii. 18 : iii. 8 ; iv. 4 ; Tit. i. 14 ; 2 Pet.
i. 12 ; [3 Jn. 8, 12] ; ό λόγο? τηι άΧηθιία!, Col. i. 5 ; Eph.
i. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 15; λόγοί άΧηθ^ίαι, 2 Co. vi. 7; Jas. i.
18; όδοΓ τ^Γ άλ. 2 Pet. ii. 2; πίστα ά\ηθ(ία5, 2 Th. ii.
13 [AV. 186 (175)]; Ιπακοη της ά\. 1 Pet. i. 22 ; ίπι>ω-
σίΓ τη! α\. Heb. χ. 26 ; 1 Tim. ii. 4 ; 2 Tim. ii. 25 ; iii.
7; [Tit. i. 1] ; πνιΰμα της άλ. the Spirit (of God) whidi
is truth (1 Jn. v. 6) and imbues men with the knowledge
of the truth. Jn. xiv. 17 ; [xvi. 13] ; xv. 2G ; 1 Jn. iv. 6 ;
e'yi (ΐμι ή άλήθαα I am he in whom the truth is summed
up and impersonated, Jn. xiv. 6 ; ή άλήθιιά σου [Rec]
(i. e. Seoi) the truth which is in thee and proceeds from
thee, Jn. .xvii. 1 7 ; [ίστιν άΚηθ€ία Χρίστου ev (μοί i. e.
controls, actuates, me, 2 Co. xi. 10] ; dvai cV της άληθίίας
to be eager to know the truth, Jn. xviii. 37 (see «,Π. 7,
and fi/ii,V. 3 d.) ; to proceed from the truth, 1 Jn. ii. 21 ;
to be prompted and controlled by the truth, 1 Jn.iii. 19;
μαρτνρ(ΐν Tjj άληθ. to give testimony in favor of the
truth in order to establish its authority among men, Jn.
xviii. 37 ; άληΰ^ιαν iroietv to exemplify truth in the life,
to express the form of truth in one's habits of thought
and modes of living, Jn. iii. 21 ; 1 Jn. i. 6, (Tob. xiii. 6 ;
iv. 6 ; cf. Neh. ix. 33 ; odov άληθ(ίας αΊρ(τίζ(σθαι, Ps.
cxviii. (cxix.) 30) ; so also irtpmaTciv iv τη άλ. 2 Jn. 4 ;
3 Jn. 3 sq. ; anfiBdv τη άλ. is just the opposite, Ro. ii. 8;
so also πλανηθηναι άπο της άλ. Jas. v. 19. II. sub-
jectively; truth as a personal excellence; that candor
of mind which is free from ajfectation, pretence, simula-
tion, falsehood, deceit : Jn. viii. 44 ; sincerity of mind
and integrity of character, or a mode of life in harmony
with divine truth : 1 Co. v. 8 ; xiii. 6 (opp. to αδικία) ;
Eph. iv. 21 [see L 1 b. above] ; v. 9 ; [vi. 14] ; σοϋ ή
άληθ(ΐα the truth as it is discerned in thee, thy habit of
thinking and acting in congruity with truth, 3 Jn. 3 ;
ή άλί]θ(ΐα τοϋ Oeoi which belongs to God, i. e. his holi-
ness [but cf. π(ρισσ(ΰω, 1 b. fin.], Ro. iii. 7 ; spec, ve-
racily (of God in keeping his promises), Ro. xv. 8 ; iv
άληθ^ία sincerely and truthfully, 2 Jn. 1 : 3 Jn. 1. The
word is not found in Rev. ([nor in 1 Thess., Philem.,
Jude]). Cf. iroZc/na«n, "Bibelstudien",(Lpz. 1859) Ite
Abth. p. 8 sciip ; [ ]Vendl in Stud. u. Krit., 1883,p. 51 1 sqq.]•
αληθεύω ; in prof. writ. ([ Aeschyl.], Xen., Plat., Aristot.,
al.) to speak the truth ; a. to teach the truth : τινί
α\ηθη<;
27
aWa
Gal. iv. 16. b. to profess the truth (true doctrine) :
Epb. Iv. IS. [R. Λ'. mrg. in botli ])ass. lo deal lntli/.'\ •
αληθής, -ίς. (α priv. and \ηθω, Χαθί'ϊν [\ανθάι/ω~\^ το
\ηθο!, — cf. άμαθης; lit. tiot liklden, uncunceulcil), [fr.
Horn, down] ; 1. true : Jn. iv. 18 ; x. 41 ; xix. 35 ;
1 Jn. ii. 8, 27; Acts xii. 9 (an actual occurrence, opp.
to όραμα) ; Phil. iv. 8 ; μαρτυρία, Jn. v. 31 sq. ; viii.
13 sq. 17; xxi. 24 ; 3 Jn. 12; Tit. i. 13; κρίσα, just,
Jn. viii. 16 (L Τ Tr Wll αληθινή) ; παροιμία, 2 Pet. ii.
22; χάρΐ!, grace which can be trusted, 1 Pet. v. 12.
2. loL'iiif/ the truth, speaking the truth, truthful: Mt. xxii.
16; Mk. xii. 14; Jn. vii. 18; 2 Co. vi. 8 (opp. to
πλάΐΌί) ; of God, Jn. iii. 33 ; viii. 26 ; Ro. iii. 4 (opp. to
ψ(ύστης). 3. i. q. αληθινό!, 1 : Jn. vi. 55 (L Τ Tr
AVII ; for Rec. αληθώς), as in .Sap. xii. 27, where αληθής
θ(ός is contrasted with ους ϊδύκουν θ(ούς. Cf. Ruckert,
Abendmahl, p. 266 sq. [On the distinction betw. this
word and tlie ne.\t, see Trench § viii. ; Schmidt ch. 178, 6.]*
αληθινός, -ή, -όν, (freq. in prof. writ. fr. Plato down ;
[twenty-three times in Jn.'s writ. ; only five (ace. to
Lchm. sLx) times in the rest of the N. T.]) ; 1. " that
which has not only the name and semblance, but the real
nature corresponding to the name" (Tittmann p. 155;
[" particularly applied to express that which is all that it
pretends to be, for instance, pure gold as opp. to adul-
terated metal " Donaldson, New Crat. § 258 ; see, at
length, Trench § viii.]), in every respect corresponding to
the idea signijied by the name, real and true, genuine;
a. opp. to what is fictitious, counterfeit, imaginary,
simulated, pretended : θ(άς (nox 'Π Sx, 2 Chr. xv. 3),
1 Th. i. 9 ; Heb. ix. 14 Lchm. ; Jn. .xvii. 3 ; 1 Jn. v. 20.
{αληθινοΧ φίλοι. Dem. Phil. 3, p. 113, 27.) b. it con-
trasts realities with their semblances : σκηνή, Heb. viii.
2; the sanctuary, Heb. ix. 24. (6 Γπποί contrasted
with 6 iv TJi (ΐκόνι, Ael. v. h. 2, 3.) c. opp. to what is
imperfect, defective, frail, uncertain : Jn. iv. 23, 37; vii.
28 ; used without adjunct of Jesus as the true Messiah,
Rev. iii. 7; φως, Jn. i. 9; 1 Jn. ii. 8; κρίσις, Jn. viii. 16
(LTTrWII; Is. lix. 4); «piVfir, Rev. xvi. 7; xLx. 2;
άρτος, as nourishing the soul unto life everlasting, Jn.
vi. 32; άμπελος, Jn. xv. 1 ; μαρτυρία, Jn. xix. 35; μάρτυς,
Rev. iii. 14; δισπότης. Rev. vi. 10; οδοί, Rev. xv. 3;
coupled with πιστός. Rev. iii. 14; xix. 11 ; substantively,
TO άληθινόν the genuine, real good, opp. to external
riches, Lk. xvi. 11, ([oir μ(ν γαρ αληθινός πλοντος iv
οίρανώ, Philo de pracm. et poon. § 17, p. 425 6d.
Mang. ; cf. AVetst. on Lk. 1. c] ; άθληταϊ, Polyb. 1, 6, 6).
2. i. i|. αληθής, true, verarious, sincere, (often so in -Sept.) :
KapSia. Heb. x. 22 ίμ(τ ά'>'ηθύας 'ν καρδία άληθιν!). Is.
xxxviii. 3); λο'γοι. Rev. [xix. 9]; xxi. 5; xxii. 6, ( Plut.
apoph. p. 184 e.). [Cf. Cremer 4te .A.ufl. s. v. άλήθίΐα.} *
άλήθω ; (a com. Grk. form for the Attic άλ^'ω, cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 151); to grind: Mt. xxiv. 41 ; Lk. xvii.
35. It was the custom to send women and female slaves
to the mill-houses [?] to turn the hand-mills (Ex. xi. 5),
who were called by the Greeks γυναίκας άλιτρίδ^ς (Horn.
0(1. 20, 105) ; [cf.' B. D. s. v. Mill].•
αληθώς, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], truly, of a truth, in
reality ; most certainly : Jn. i. 47 (48) ; iv. 42 ; vi. 14, 55
Rec; vii. 26, 40; viii. 31; xvii. 8; Mt. xiv. 33; xxvi.
73 ; [Mk. xiv. 70 ; Mt.] xxvii. 54 ; [Mk. xv. 39] ; Lk.
ix. 27; xii. 44; xxi. 3; Acts xii. 11 ; 1 Th. ii. 13; 1 Jn.
ii. 5.»
άλκνς, -c'ojf, 0, {αΚς, αλός, the sea), [fr. Horn, down] ;
a Jisherman, Jisher: Mt. iv. 18 sq. ; Mk. i. 16 sq.; Lk.
V. 2, — in all which pass. Τ and WH hai e άλ(ύς It. the
form αλ(€ϋς, q. v.*
<ίλΐ€ύω; ((ΐλΐΐΐς); to fish: Jn. xxi. 3. [Philo, Plut.]*
άλίζω : (αλς. αλός, salt) ; to salt, season with salt, sprin-
kle with sail ; only the fut. pass, is found in the N. T. :
iv τίνι άλισθήσ(ται ; by what means can its saltness be
restored? Mt. v. 13 ; θυσία αλ\ άλισθήσίται, the sacrifice
is sprinkled with salt and thus rendered acceptable to
God, Mk. ix. 49 [R G L Tr txt. br.], (Lev. ii. 13 ; Ezek.
xliii. 24 ; Joseph, antt. 3, 9, 1 ; cf. Knobel on Lev.
p. 369 sq. ; Win. RWB. s. v. Salz ; [BB.DD. s. v. Salt]) ;
πάς π-υρι αλισθήσιται, every true Christian is rendered
ripe for a liuly and happy association with God in his
kingdom by fire, i. e. by the pain of afllictions and
trials, which if endured with constancy tend to purge
and strengthen the soul, Mk. ix. 49. But this ex-
tremely difficult passage is explained differently by
others ; [cf. Meyer, who also briefly reviews the history
of its exposition]. (Used by the Sept., Aristot., [cf.
Soph. Lex.]; Ignat. ad Magnes. 10 [shorter form] άλί-
σθητί iv Χριστώ, iva μη διαφθαρη τις iv υμιν.) [CoMP. I
συν-αλίζω, — but see the ivord.] *
άλία-γημα, -rot, to. (άλισ-γίω to pollute, which occurs
Sir. xl. 29 ; Dan. i. 8; Mai. i. 7, 12; akin to άλίνω άλινιω
to besmear [Lat. linere, cf. Lob. Pathol. Element, p. 21 ;
Rhemat. p. 123; Steph., Hesych., Sturz, De Dial. Alex,
p. 145]), pollution, contamination : Acts xv. 20 (του
άπϊχίσθαι κτλ. to beware of pollution from the use
of meats left from the heathen sacrifices, cf. vs. 29).
Neither άλισγΐω nor άλίσγημα occurs in Grk. writ.*
αλλά, an aihersative particle, derived from πλλα,
neut. of the adj. αλλοί, which was originally pronounced
άλλόί (cf. Klotz ad DCvar. ii. p. 1 sq.), hence properly,
other things sc. than those just mentioned. It difl^ers
from fie, as the Lat. at and sed from autem, [cf. W. 441
sq. (41 1 )]. I. But. So related to the preceding words
that it serves to introduce 1. an opposition to con-
cessions ; nerertheless, notwithstanding : Mt. xxiv. 6 ;
]\Ik. xiii. 20 ; xiv. 28 ; Jn. xvi. 7, 20 ; Acts iv. 1 7 ; vii.
48; Ro. V. 14 sq. ; x. 16; 1 Co. iv. 4 ; 2 Co. vii. 6;
Phil. ii. 27 (αλλ' ό θ(ός etc.), etc. 2. an objection :
Jn. vii. 27; Ro. x. 18 sq. ; 1 Co. .xv. 35; Jas. ii. 18.
3. an exception : Lk. xxii. 53 ; Ro. iv. 2 ; 1 Co. viii. 7 ;
X. 23. 4. a restriction : Jn. xi. 42 ; Gal. iv. 8 ; Mk.
xiv. 36. 5. an ascensive transition or gradation,
nay rather, yea moreover : Jn. xvi. 2 ; 2 Co. i. 9 ; esp.
with και added, Lk. xii. 7; xvi. 21 ; xxiv. 22. αλλ' oiSi,
but . . . not even (Germ, /a nicht einmal) : Lk. xxiii. I.'»;
Acts xix. 2; 1 Co. iii. 2 [Rec. cure]; cf. Fritzsche o>
Mk. p. 157. 6. or forms a transition to the cardina»
matter, especially before imperatives : Mt. Lx. 18; Alk,
«λλα
28
α\\ομαι
i.\. 22; xvi. 7; Lk. vii. 7; Jn. viii. 26; xvi. 4; Acts L\.
6 [not Rec.]; x• 20; xxvi. 16. 7. it is put ellipti-
cally : αλλ* (ιό, i. e. αλλίΐ τοντο yiynvev. tun. ΛΙΙί. xiv. 49 ;
Jn. xiii. 18; xv. 25; 1 .In. ii. 19. 8. after a condi-
tional or concessive protasis it si'j;nilies, at the begin-
ning of the apodosis, i/el [c£. W. 442 (411)]: after κάί
«, 2 Co. xiu. 4 [U G] ; Mk. xiv. 29 R G L, (2 Mace,
viii. 15); after d καΐ, Mk. xiv. 29 [T Tr WH]; 2 Co.
iv. 16 ; V. 16 ; xi. 6 ; Col. ii. 5, (2 Mace. vi. 26) ; after
el, 1 Co. ix. 2; Ko. vi. 5, (1 Mace. ii. 20); after ΐάν,
1 Co. iv. 15; after emep, 1 Co. viii. 6 [L Tr mrg. AVII br.
αλλ']; cf. ΚΙυίζ ad Devar. ii. p. 93 sq. ; Kulmer ii.
p. f*27, § 535 Anm. 6. 9. after a preceding μίν. Mk.
VI. 13 [T oin. Tr br. /itV] ; Acts iv. 16; Ro. xiv. 20;
1 Co. xiv. 1 7. 10. it is joined to other particles ;
άλλα γ€ [Grsb. άλλάye] (twice in the N. T.) : yet at leaM,
1 Co. ix. 2; yet surely (aher freUich), Lk. ,xxiv. 21 [L Τ
Tr WH add και yea and etc.], cf. Bornemann ad loc.
In the more elegant Greek writers these particles are
not combined Avitliout the interposition of the most
emphatic word between them ; cf. Bornemann 1. c. ;
Klolz ad Devar. ii. pp. 15 scj. 24 sq. ; ΛχΙ, Lex. Plat. i. p.
101 ; [W. 444 (413)]. αλλ' ^ (ari.-ing from the blending
of the two statements olhiv «λλο ^and ol&iv άλλο, άλλα)
save only, except : 1 Co. iii. 5 (where άλλ' ^ omitted
by G L Τ Tr WII is spurious); Lk. xii. 51, (Sir.
xxxvii. 12; xliv. 10); and after άλλα itself, 2 Co. i. 13
[here Lchm. br. άλλ' before ij] ; cf. Klotz u. s. ii. 31 sqq. ;
Kuhner ii. p. .S24 sq. § 535, 6; W. 442 (412); [B. 374
(320)]. άλλ' οί lint )i/>i, yet not: Heb. iii. 16 (if punctu-
ated τταιΚπίκρανην : ηλλ' οΰ) for 'but Λνΐιν do I ask? did
not all,' etc.; cf. Hluek ad loc. [W. 442 (411)]. άλλ'
ουχί will he not rather ? Lk. -xvii. 8. H. preceded b_v
a negation : but (Lat. sed. Germ, sondern) ; 1. ουκ
{μη) . . . άλλα: Mt. xix. 11 ; Mk. v. 39; Jn. vii. 16;
1 Co. i. 17; vii. 10, 19 [oiSiV] ; 2 Co. vii. 9; 1 Tun. v.
23 [μηκϊτι], etc. By a rhetorical construction ουκ
. . . άλλα sometimes is logically equiv. to not so much
. . . as: Mk. ix. 37 (ουκ ίμί iexfTai. άλλα rbv άττοστίί-
λαντά /If) ; Mt. X. 20 ; Jn. xii. 44*: Acts v. 4 ; 1 Co. xv.
10 : 1 Th. iv. 8 ; by this form of speech the emphasis is
laid on the second member ; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. [).
773 sqq. ; W. § 55, 8 b. ; [B. 356 (306)]. oi μόνον . . .
άλλα και not only . . . but also: Jn. v. 18; xi. 52 [άλλ*
ίνα και, etc.] ; Ro. i. 32, and very often. When «αϊ is
omitted (as in the Lat. non solum . . . sed), the grada-
tion is strengthened : Acts xix. 26 [Lchm. adds και] ;
1 Jn. V. 6; άλλα ττολλω μάλλον, Phil. ii. 12: cf. Fritzsche
1. c. p. 786 sq.j. ; W. 498 (464); [B. 369 sq. (317)].
2. The negation to which άλλα pertains is suppressed,
but can easily be su|)plicd upon reflection [W. 442
(412)]: Mt. xi. 7-9; Lk. vii. 24-26, (in c.ich pa.ssage,
before άλλα supply 'you will say you did not go out into
the wilderness for this purpose') ; Acts xix. 2 (we have
not received the Holy Spirit, but . . .) ; Gal. ii. 3 (they
said not one word in opposition to me, but . . .) ; 2 Co.
vii. 1 1 (where before άλλα. repeated sLx times by ana-
phora, supjily ου μόνον with the accus. of the preceding
word). It is used in answers to questions having the
force of a negation [W. 442 (412)]: Jn. vii. 49; Acts
XV. 1 1 ; 1 Co. x. 20. άλλα ίνα [or άλλ' ίνα, cf. AV. 40 ;
Β. 10] elliptical after a negation [W. 316 sq. (297);
620 (576) ; Fritzsche on Mt. p. 840 sq.] : Jn. i. 8 (sup-
ply άλλα ηλθοι, ίνα) ; i.x. 3 (άλλα τυφλοί iytvfro [or eytv-
νηθη], Ίνα) \ Mk. iv. 22 (άλλα τοίοΟτο iyivero, ίνα). [" The
best ilss. seem to elide the final α before nouns, but
not before verbs" Scrivener, Plain Introduction, etc.,
p. 14; but see Dr. Gregory's full exhibition of the facts
in Ί\Ι/. Proleg. p. 93 sq., from which it appears that
" elision is commonly or almost always omitted before a,
almost always before υ, often before t and i;, rarely
before ο and ω, ne\ er before ι ; and it should be noticed
that this coincides with the fact that the familiar words
fv, tva, ότι, ού, ώί, prefer the form άλλ' " ; see also WH.
App. p. 146. Cf. W. § 5, 1 a. ; B. p. 10.]
άλλά<Γσω : fut. αλλάξω ; 1 aor. ηλλαξα ; 2 fut. pass.
άΚλαγήσομαι ; (άλλοί) ; [fr. Aeschyl. down] ; to change :
to cause one thing to cease and another to take its
place, τα ίθη, Acts vi. 14 ; την φωνήν to vary the voice,
i. e. to speak in a different manner according to the
different conditions of minds, to adapt the matter and
form of discourse to mental moods, to treat them now
severely, now gently, Gal. iv. 20 [but see Meyer ad
loc.]. to exchange one thing for another: r\ ev τιι /t,
Eo. i. 23 (3 τηπ Ps. cv. (evi.) 20 ; the Greeks say άλ-
\άσσ€ΐν τι τιι/ο£ [cf. W. 206 (194), 388 (363) ; Vaughan
on Rom. I.e.]). to transform: 1 Co. xv. 51 sq. ; Heb. i.
12. [CoMP. : άτΓ-, St-, (coT^, άττο-κατ^, /i€T-, ΐΓϋΐ'^ιλλάσσω.] *
όλλαχόθ£ν, adv., from another place : Jn. x. 1 (i. q.
άλλοίίκ [which the grammarians [irefer, Thom. Mag.
ed. Ritsohl p. 10, 13; Moeris ed. Piers, p• 11] ; cf.
€καστηχόθ€ν, ιτανταχόθζν). [(Antiph., al.)]•
άλλαχον, ad\., i. q. άλλοΛ, elsewhere, in another place :
Mk. i. 38 (T Tr txt. WH Tr mrg. br.). Cf. Borne-
mann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843, p. 127 sq. [Soph.,
Xen., al. ; see Thom. M. and Moer. as in the preced.
word.] *
άλληγορί'ω, -Si : [pres. pass. ptcp. άΚληγοροΰμίνο!] ; i. e.
άλλο μϊν άyopfiω. άλλο fie vota, " aliud verbis, aliud
sensu ostendo " (Quint, instt. 8, 6, 44), to speak alle-
gorically or in a figure : Gal. iv. 24. (Pliilo, Joseph.,
Plut.. and cram. writ. : [cf. Mey. on Gal. 1. c.].) *
όλληλονϊα, [WH. Άλλ. and ά: see Intr. § 408], Hebr.
T\—\bhr}, prai.'ie ye the Lord, Hallelujah : Rev. xix. 1, 3 sq.
6. [Sept. Pss. passim ; Tob. xiii. 18 ; 3 Itlacc. vii. 13.] •
αλλήλων, gen. plur. [no nom. being possible]; dat.
-oif, -ait, -Oit; ace. -ous, -ar, -a, one another ; reciprocally,
mutually: Mt. xxiv. 10; Jn. xiii. 35; Acts xxviii. 25;
Ro. i. 12; Jas. v. 16; Rev. vi. 4, and often. [Fr. Horn.
down.]
άλλογ£νή5, -if, (άλλοί and yeVot), sprung from another
race, a foreigner, alien : Lk. xvii. 18. (In Sept. [Gen.
xrii. 27 ; Ex. xii. 43, etc.], but nowhere in prof, writ.)*
άλλομαι; impf . ήλλόμι;κ ; a.or. ήΧάμην and ήλόμην (Bitm.
Auff. Spr. ii. p. 108; [W. 82 (79); B. 54 (47)]); to
leap (Lat. salio) : Acts iii. 8; xiv. 10 (Rec. ^λλίτο ;
άλλο?
29
αΚώττηξ
G L Τ Tr WH ijAoTo) ; to spring up, gush up, of water,
Jn. iv. 14, (as in Lat. satire, Verg. eel. 5, 47; Suet.
Octav. 82). [Co.MP. : ff , ίφ-άλλομαι.] *
άλλοΐ, -ι;, -ο, [ef. Lat. alius. Germ, alles, Eng. else ; fr.
Horn, down], another, other; a. absol. : Mt. xxvii.
42; XX. 3; Mk. τι. 15; Acts xix. 32; xxi. 34 (άλλοι
μίν ίΤλλο), and often. b. as an adj. : Mt. ii. 12; iv.
21 ; Jn. .xiv. 16 ; 1 Co. x. 29 (άλλι; (τυν(ί&ησΐί i. e. ή συν.
άλλον τινός). c. with the art. : ό «λλο£ the other (of
two), Mt. V. 39; xii. 13, etc. [cf. B. 32 (28), 122 (107)];
oi άλλο( all others, the remainder, the rest : Jn. xxi. 8 ;
1 Co. xiv. 29.
[Sr>'. άλλοί, €T€po j: δλ. as compared with eV. denotes
numerical in distinction from qualitative diSereuce ; i\. adds
(' one besides '), €τ. distinguishes (' one of two ') ; every er.
is an i\., but not every δλ. is a er. ; &\. generally ' denotes
simply distinction of iudivi duals, eVepoi involves the sec-
ondary idea of difference of k i η d ' ; e. g. 2 Co. xi. 4 ; Gal. i.
6, 7. See Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. on the latter pass. ; Trench
§ xcv. ; Silimidt ch. 198.]
άλλοτριο-€ΐΓί(Γκο'πΌ5 (L Τ Tr WH άλ\οτρΐ€π.), -ου, ό,
(αλλότριο: and eViVicorrof ), one who takes the superrision
of affairs pertaining to others and in no wise to himself, [a
meddler in other men's matters 2 '■ 1 Pet. iv. 1.5 (the writer
seems to refer to those who, with holy but intemperate
zeal, meddle with the affairs of the Gentiles — whether
public or private, civil or sacred — in order to make them
conform to the Christian standard). [Hilgenfeld (cf.
Einl. ins 2i. T. p. 630) would make it equiv. to the Lat.
delator.'\ The word is found again only in Dion. Areop.
ep. 8 p. 783 (of one who intrudes into another's oflice),
and [Germ, of Const, ep. 2 ad Cypr. c. 9, in] Coteter.
Eccl. Gniec. Mon. ii. 481 b. ; [cf. "w. 25, 99 (94)].•
αλλότριος, -α, -ov ; 1. belonging to another (opp. to
iSior), not one's own : Heb. ix. 25 ; Ro. xiv. 4 ; xv. 20 ;
2 Co. X. IS sq. ; 1 Tim. v. 22; Jn. x. 5. in neut., Lk.
xvi. 12 (opp. to TO v^irepov). 2. foreign, strange:
■γη, Acts vii. 6 ; Heb. xi. 9 ; not of one's own family,
alien, Mt. xvii. 25 sq. ; an enemy, Heb. xi. 34, (Hom. Ή.
5, 214: Xen. an. 3, 5, 5).*
άλλόψνλοΐ, -oi>, (άλλο5, and φϋλον race), foreign, (in
prof. auth. fr. [Aeschyl.,] Thuc. down) ; when used in
Hellenistic Grk. in opp. to a Jew, it signifies a Gen-
tile, [A. V. one of another na/io;i] : Acts x. 28. (Philo,
Joseph.)*
άλλωΐ, adv., (άλλοϊ), [fr. Hom. down], otherwise :
1 Tim. V. 25 (τα πλλωί ίχοντα, which are of a different
sort i. e. which are not καλά epya, [al. which are not
ΐΓρο'δί;λα]).*
άλοάω, -ώ ; (connected with η άλως or η άλωη, the
floor on which grain is trodden or threshed out) ; to
thresh, (Ammon. το tVt τ^ αλω ττατΐ'ιν και τρίβΐΐν τας
στάχνας) : 1 Co. ix. [9], 10; 1 Tim. v. 18 (Deut. xxv.
4). In prof. auth. fr. Arstph., Plato down.*
ό-λογο5, -Of , (λόγοί reason) ; 1. destitute of reason,
brute: ζωα, brute animals, Jude 10; 2 Pet. ii. 12, (Sap.
xi. 16; Xen. Hier. 7, 3, al.). 2. contrary to reason,
absurd: Acts xxv. 27, (Xen. Ages. 11, 1 ; Thuc. 6, 85;
often in Plat., Isocr., al.).*
αλόη [on the accent see Chandler § 149], -ijr. ή, (com-
monly ξνλάλύη, άγάλλυχον). Pint., the aloe, aloes : Jn.
xi.x. 39. The name of an aromatic tree which grows in
eastern India and Cochin China, and whose soft and
bitter wood the Orientals used in fumigation and in
embalming the dead (as, ace. to Hdt., the Egyptians
did), Hebr. D"'7n!< and niSpx [see Muhlau and Volck
s. vv.], Num. xxiv. 6 ; Ps. xiv. 9 ; Prov. vii. 1 7 ; Cant,
iv. 14. Arah. Alluwe; Linn.: Excoecaria Agallochum.
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Aloe [Low § 235 ; BB.DD].•
αλί, αΚός, 6, see άλα;.
άλυκό$, -η, -όν, salt (i. q. αΚμνρός) : Jas. iii. 12.
([Hippocr., Arstph..] Plat. Tim. p. 65 e. ; Aristot.,
Theophr., al.) *
ciX\)iros, -Of, (\νπη), free from pain OT grief : Phil. ii. 28.
(Very often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph, and Plat, down.)*
όίλυσ -is, or as it is com. written αΚνσις [see WH. App.
p. 144], -ear, ή, (fr. α priv. and λύω, because a chain is
άΚντος i. e. not to be loosed [al. fr. r. val, and allied w.
(ΐλίω to restrain, άλί^ω to collect, crowd ; Curtius § 660;
A'anicek p. 898]), a chain, bond, by which the body, or
any part of it (the hands, feet), is bound : Mk. v. 3 ; Acts
x.\i. 33 ; xxviii. 20 ; Rev. xx. I ; tV aXvad in chains, a
prisoner, Eph. vi. 2U : οϋκ ΐτταισχϋνθη την αλ. μου he was
not ashamed of my bonds i. e. did not desert me be-
cause I was a prisoner, 2 Tim. i. 16. spec, used of a
manacle or hand-cuff, the chain by which the hands are
bound together [yet cf. Mey. on Jlk. u. i. ; per contra
esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 8] : Mk. v. 4; [Lk. viii. 29];
Acts xii. 6 sq. (From Hdt. doΛvn.)*
ά-λυσ"ΐτ€λή5, -ίς, (λυσιτΐλης. see λυσίτβλί'ω), unprojit-
able, (Xen. vectig. 4, 6); by litotes, hurtful, pernicious:
Heb. xiii. 1 7. (From [Hippocr.,] Xen. down.)*
άλφα, to', indecl. : Rev. i. 8; xxi. 6 ; xxii. 13. See A.
'Αλφαίοβ [WH Άλφ., see their Intr. § 408], -αίου, ό,
('3^Π, cf. -jn 'Ayyaios, Hag. i. 1), Alphceus or Alpheus;
1. the father of Levi the publican: Mk. ii. 14, see Aevt,
4. 2. the father of James the less, so called, one of
the twelve apostles: Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 15;
Acts i. 13. He seems to be the same person who in Jn.
xix. 25 (cf. Mt. xxvii. 56; Mk. xv. 40) is called Κλωτ,άς
after a different pronunciation of the Hebr. "STl ace.
to which Π was changed into κ, as Π03 φασίκ, 2 Chr.
XXX. 1. Cf. 'Ιάκωβος. 2 ; [Β. D. Am. ed. s. v. Alphaeus ;
also Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal. pp. 256, 267 (Am. ed. pp.
92, 103) ; Wetzel in Stud. u. Krit. for 18s3, p. 62υ sq.].*
αλων, -ωνος, ή, (in Sept. also ό, cf. Ruth iii. 2 ; Job
.x.vxix. 12), i. q. ή άλως. gen. άλω, ο ground-plot or thresh-
in g-foor, i. e. a place in the field itself, made hard after
the harvest by a roller, where the grain was threshed
out: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17. In both these pass., by
meton. of the container for the thing contained, αλων is
the heap of grain, the flooring, already indeed threshed
out, but still mixed with chaff and straw, like Hebr.
p:, Ruth iii. 2; Job xxxix. 12 (Sept. in each place
άλωνα) ; [al. adhere to the primary meaning. Used by
Aristot. de vent. 3, Opp. ii. 973•, 14].*
««λώττηξ, -ΐκοΓ, ή, a fox : Mt. viii. 20 ; Lk. ix. 58.
α\ωσι<:
30
αμαρτία
Metaph. a sly and crafty man : Lk. xiii. 32 ; (in the
same sense often in the Grk. writ., as Solon in Plut. Sol.
30, 2; I'ind. Pyth. 2, 141 ; I'lut. SuUa 28, 5).'
άΚωσιι, tms, ή, (άλοω, άλίσκο/ιαι to be caught), a catch-
ing, cd/jlure: 2 Pet. ii. 12 fir άλωσιν lo be tuken, [some
would here take the word actively: lo lake']. (Fr.
Pind. and Ildt. down.) *
ofia [Skr. sa, sania ; Eng. same ; Lat. simul ; Germ.
sammt, etc.; Curtius § 449; VaniCek p. 972. Fr. Horn,
down] ; 1. adv., at the same lime, at once, together :
Acts xxiv. 26; xxvii. 40; Col. iv. 3; 1 Tim. v. 13;
Philem. 22; all to a man, every one, Ro. iii. 12. 2.
prep. [W. 470 (439)], together with, with dat. : Mt. xiii.
23. άμα πρωί ear/ 1/ in the morning: Mt. xx. 1, (in Grk.
writ, άμα τω ήλίω, αμα ττ/ ημίρα). In 1 Th. iv. 17 and
V. 10, vvhci-e άμα is full, by σύν, άμα is an adv. (<(/ the
same time) and must be joined to the verb.•
[Syx. &.μα, όμοϋ: the distinction given by Ammouius
(de dift. voc. s. v.) et al., tliat o^ia is temporal, o/ioC local,
seems to hold in tlie main ; vet see Ro. iii. 12, ami cf. Ilesvch.
S.V.]
άμαθήβι -ί'ί, gen. -οϋ:, (μανθάνω, whence ϊμαθον, το μΰθοί,
cl. αληθή•;), unlearned, ignorant: 2Pet. iii. 16. (In Grk.
writ. fr. Hdt. down.)*
ofiapdvTivosi -ov, (fr. αμάραντο!, as ρόδινο! made of
roses, fr. poSov a rose; cf. άκάνθινο!), composed of ama-
ranth (a flower, so called because it never withers or
fades, and when plucked oft' revives if moistened with
water ; hence it is a symbol of perpetuity and immor-
tality, [see Paradise Lost iii. 353 sqq.] ; Plin. h. n. 21
(15), 23 [al. 47]) : στΐφανο!, 1 Pet. v. 4. (Found besides
only in Philostr. her. 11», p. 741 ; [and (conjecturally) in
Boeckh, Corp. Inscrr. 155, 39, c. B. C. 340].) •
αμάραντοι) -ov, (fr. μαραίνω; cf. αμίαντο!• άφαντο!, etc.),
not fading away, unfading, perennial ; Vulg. immarcesci-
bilis; (hence the name of the flower, [Diosc. 4, 57, al.] ;
see άμαράντινο!) : 1 Pet. i. 4. Found elsewhere only in
Sap. vi. 13; [ζωή άμαρ. Sibyll. ><, 411; Boeckh, Corp.
InsciT. ii. p. 1124, no. 2942 c, 4; Lcian. Dom. c. 9].*
άμ.αρτάνω ; fut. αμαρτήσω (Mt. xviii. 21; Ro. vi. 15;
in the latter pass. LTTrWII give ήμαρτήσωμ^ν for
R(i αμαρτήσομ(ν), in class. Grk. άμαρτήσομαι', 1 aor.
(later) ήμάμτησα, Mt. xviii. 15; Ro. v. 14, l(i (cf. W.
82 (79); B. 54 (47)); 2 aor. ημαρτον; pf. ήμάρτηκα;
(ace. to a conjecture of Bttm., Lexil. i. p. 137, fr. α priv.
and μιίρω. μύρομαι, μίρο!, prop, to be without a share in,
sc. the mark) ; prop, to 7niss the mark, (Horn. 11. 8, 311,
etc.; with gen. of the thing missed, Horn. Γ1. 10, 372;
4, 491 ; ToC σκοπού. Plat. Hipp. min. p. 375 a. ; τη! όδοΰ,
Arstph. Plut. 9(;i, al.) ; then to err, be mistaken; lastly
to miss OT wander from the palli of uprightness and honor,
lo do or go wrong. [" Even the Sept., although the Ilebr.
Kipn also means primarily to miss, endeavor to reserve
άμαρτ. exclusively for the idea of sin ; and where the
llebr. signifies to miss one's aim in the literal sense,
they avail themselves of expressive compounds, in par-
ticular ΐξαμαρτάναν, Judg. XX. 16." Zezschwitz, Profan-
graec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 63 sq.] In the X. T.
to wander from the law of God, violate God's law, sin ;
a. absol. : Mt. xxvii. 4; .In. v. 14; viii. 11; L\. 2 sq. ;
1 Jn. i. 10; ii. 1 ; iii. 6, 8 sq. ; v. is ; Ro. ii. 12 ; iii. 23 ;
V. 12, 14, 16; vi. 15; 1 Co. vii. 28, 36; xv. 34; Eph.
iv. 26 ; 1 Tkn. v. 20 ; Tit. iii. 1 1 ; Ileb. iii. 17; x. 26
(ίκανσίω!) ; [2 Pet. ii. 4] ; of the violation of civil laws,
which Christians regard as also the transgression of di\ ine
law, 1 Pet. ii. 20. b. άμαρτάν(ΐ.ν άμορτίαν to commit
(lit. sin) a sin, 1 Jn. v. 16, (μ(γαλην άμαμτίαν, Ex. xxxii.
30 si[. Ilebr. ΠΝϋΠ «"Π ; αίσχράν άμ. Soph. Phil. 1249;
μfyάλa αμαρτήματα άμαρτύνίΐν, Plat. Pliaedop.113 e.) ; cf.
αγαπάω, sub liu. άμαρτάναν fl's Tiva [B. 173(1 50) ; W. 233
(219)]: Mt. xviii. 15 (LTWllom.Tr mrg.br. ei'j σί),
21 ; Lk. XV. 18, 21 ; xvii. 3 Rec, 4 ; 1 Co. viii. 12 ; τ1 dt
Καίσαρα, Acts x.xv. 8 ; els τό 'iSiov σώμα, 1 Co. vi. 18, (cis
airov! tc και fis άλλου!, Plat. rep. 3, p. 396 a. ; fis το
θίΐον, Plat. Phacdr. p. 242 c.; f'n θιου!, Xen. Hell. 1, 7,
19, etc. ; [cf. άμ. κυρίω β(ω. Bar. i. 13 ; ii. 5]) ; Hcbraisti-
cally, ϊνώπιόν ("JD'?) τινο! [Β. § 146, 1] in the presence of,
before any one, the one Λvronged by the sinful act being,
as it were, present and looking on : Lk. χ v. 18, 21, (1 S.
vii. 6 ; Tob. iii. 3, etc. ; [cf. ίναντι κνρίον. Bar. i. 1 7]).
[For reff. fee αμαρτία. CoMP. : ηρο-αμαρτάνω.^'
αμάρτημα, -ros , τό, (fr. άμαρτϊω i. t\. άμαρτάνω, cf. αδί-
κημα, αλίσγημα), a sin, evil deed, [" Diflerunt ή αμαρτία et
τό αμάρτημα ut Latinorum peccat u s et peccat u m. Nam
TO αμάρτημα et pecoatum proprie malum facinus indi-
cant ; contra ή αμαρτία et peccatus primum jjeccationcm,
TO peccare, deinde peccatum, rem consequentcm, valent."
Fritzsche ; see αμαρτία, fin. ; cf. also Trench § Ixvi.] : Mk.
iii. 28, and (LTTrtxt.WH) 29; iv. 12 (where (iTTr
txt. WH om. L Tr mrg. br. τα άμαρτ.) ; Ro. iii. 25 ; 1 Co.
vi. 18; 2 Pet. i. 9 (R[LWH txt. Tr mrg.] αμαρτιών).
In prof. auth. fr. Soph, and Thuc. down ; [of bodily de-
fects, Plato, Gorg. 479 a.; άμ μνημονικόν, Cic. ad Att.
13, 21 ; άμ. γραφικήν, Polyb. 34, 3, 1 1 : όταν μϊν παραλάγω!
ή βλάβη •yf'i'rjTui, ατύχημα• όταν δι μη παραλάγω!, avfv δι
κακία!, άμιίρτημα • ϋταν δι ίίδώί μϊν μή ττμοβουλ(νσα! δι,
αδίκημα, Aristot. eth. Xic. 5, 10 [i. 1135'', 16 M|.].*
αμαρτία, -as, ή, (fr. 2 aor. άμαρτ€Ϊν, as ΰττοτνχία fr.
άποτνχί'ιν), a failing to hit the mark (see άμαρτάνω). In
Grk. writ. (fr. Aeschyl. and Thuc. down). 1st, an error
of the understanding (cf. Ackermann, Das Christl. im
Plato, p. 59 Anm. 3 [Eng. trans. (S. R. Asbury, 1861)
p. 57 n. 99]). 2d, a bad action, evU deed. In the N. T.
always in an ethical sense, and 1. ccpiiv. to τύ άμαρ-
raveiv a sinning, whether it occurs by omission or com-
mission, in thought and feeling or in speech and aclior
(cf. Cic. de fin. 3, 9): Ro. v. 12 sq. 20; ίφ' άμαρτίαν
flvai held down in sin, Ro. iii. 9 ; (■ιημίν(ΐν τ!/ αμαρτία, Ilo.
vi. 1 ; άπηθνήσκ(ΐν ττ) άμ. and ζην iv αίτϊ], Ro. λ i. 2 ; την άμ.
•γινώσκίΐν, Ro. vii. 7; 2 Co. v. 21 ; ν(κρο! τί; άμ. Ro. νί.
1 1 ; irep'i αμαρτία! to break the power of sin, Ro. viii. 3 [cf.
]\Iev.] ; σώμα τη! άμ. the body as the instrument of sin,
Ro. vi. 6 : απάτη τη! άμ. the craft by which sin is accus-
tomed to deceive, Heb. iii. 13; Άνθρωπο! τη! άμ. [άνομίαι
TTrtxt. WH txt.] the man so possessed by sin that he
seems unable to e.xist without it, the man utterly given up
(Ιμαρι
31
αμεμτΓΤο•;
tu sin, 2 Th. ii. 3 [W. § 34, 3 Note 2]. In this sense ή
αμαρτία (i. (J. to άμαρτάνιιν) as a power exercising domin-
ion over men {sin as a principle and poiver) is rhetorically
represented as an imperial personage ia the phrases ή
άμ. βασΐΚίνΐί, Kvpifvet, κατΐργάζ€ται, Ro. v. 21; \i. 12,
14; vii. 17, 20; dov\€V€iv ttj άμ, Ko. vi. 6; 8ov\os της
άμ. Jn. viii. :!4 [WH br. (j om. τψ άμ-Ί ; Ko. vi. 1 7 ; νάμυ:
της άμ. the dictate of fin or an im]iulse ])roceeding from
it, Ro. vii. 23 ; viii. 2 ; δύναμα της άμ. 1 Co. xv. 56 ; (the
prosopopoeia occurs in Gen. iv. 7 and, ace. to the read-
ing αμαρτία, in Sir. xxvii. 10). Thus αμαρτία in sense,
but not in s i g η i fi c a t i ο n, is the source whence the
several evil acts proceed ; but it never denotes vitiostiy.
2. that which is done wrong, committed or resultant sin,
an offence, a violation of the dicine law in thought or in
act (ή αμαρτία (στιν ή ανομία, 1 Jn. iii. 4) ; a. generally:
Jas. i. 1.5 ; Jn. viii. 4G (where άμαρτ. must be taken to
mean neither etrur, nor craft by which Jesus is corrupt-
ing the people, but sin viewed generally, as is well
shown by Liieke ad loc. and UUmann in the Stud. u.
Krit. for 1842, p. 667 sqq. [cf. his Siindlosigkeit Jesu
p. 66 sqq. (Eng. trans, of 7th ed. p. 71 sq.)] ; the
thought is, ' If any one convicts me of sin, then you may
lawfully question the truth and di\ inity of my doctrine,
for sin hinders the perception of truth ') ; χωρ\ς αμαρτίας
so that he did not commit sin, Heb. iv. lo ; Troifii/ άμαρ-
τίαν and την άμ. Jn. viii. 34 ; 1 Jn. iii. 8 ; 2 Co. xi. 7 ;
1 Pet. ii. 22 ; ίχαν άμαρτίαν to have sin as though it were
one's odious private property, or to have done something
needing expiation, i. q. to have committed sin, .In. ix.
41 ; XV. 22, 24 ; xLx. 11 ; 1 Jn. i. 8, (so αίμα ?χ(ΐν, of one
who has committed murder, Eur. Or. ol4); very often
in the plur. άμαρτίαι [in the Synopt. Gospels the sing,
occurs but once: Mt. xii. 31]: 1 Th. ii. 16; [Jas. v. 16
LTTrWII]; Rev. xviii. 4 sq., etc.; ττληθος αμαρτιών,
Jas. v. 20; 1 Pet. iv. 8; ποκϊν αμαρτίας, Jas. v. 15; also
in the expressions άφ(σις αμαρτιών, άφιίναι τας άμ., etc.
(see άφίημι, 1 d.), in which the word does not of itself
denote the guilt οτ penalty of sins, but the sins are con-
ceived of as removed so to speak from God's sight,
regarded by him as not having been done, and there-
fore are not punished, iv άμαρτ. συ ϊγιννήθης όλο? thou
wast covered all over with sins when thou wast born,
i. e. didst sin abundantly before thou wast born, Jn. L\.
34 ; cV ταις άμ. άποθνησκ€ΐν to die loaded with evil deeds,
therefore uureformed, Jn. viii. 24 ; en cV άμαρτίαις tivai
still to have one's sins, sc. unexpiated, 1 Co. xv. 17.
b. some particular evil deed: την άμ. ταντην. Acts vii. 60 ;
πάσα αμαρτία, Mt. xii. 31 ; αμαρτία πράς θάνατον, 1 Jn. V. 16
(an offence of such gravity that a Christian lapses from
the state of ζωή received from Christ into the state of
θάνατος (cf. θάνατος, 2) in which he was before he be-
came united to Christ by faith ; cf . LUcke, DeWette, [esp.
Westcott, ad 1.]). 3. collectively, the com/Hex or
aggregate of sins committed either hg a single person or hg
many : aipeiv την άμ. τυϋ κόσμου, Jn. i. 29 (see α'ψω, 3
c.) ; άπυθνί)σκ(ΐν i:• Trj άμ. Jn. viii. 21 (see 2 a. sub fin.) ;
jTip'i αμαρτίας, sc. θυσίας [W. 5S3 (542) ; B. 393 (336)],
expiatory sacrifices, Ileb. x. 6 (ace. to the usage of the
Sept., who sometimes so translate the Hebr. ΠΝϋΠ and
ηΚΒΠ, e. g. Lev. v. 1 1 ; vii. 27 (37) ; Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7) ;
χωρϊς αμαρτίας having no fellowshij) with the sin wliich
he is about [?] to expiate, Heb. ix. 28. 4. abstract for
the concrete, i. q. αμαρτωλός : Ro. vii. 7 (ό νόμος αμαρτία,
opp. to ό νόμος nytoi, vs. 12) ; 2 Co. V. 21 (τον . . . άμαρτίαν
ΐποίησιν he treated him, who knew not sin, as a sinner).
Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. 289 sqq. ; [see αμάρτημα ;
Trench § Ixvi.].
αμάρτυρο;, -ov, (μάρτυς), without witness or testimony,
unattested : Acts xiv. 1 7. (Thuc, Dem., Joseph., Plut.,
Lcian., Hdian.) *
οψ:αρτωλέ9ι -όν, (fr. the form άμάρτω, as φ(ίδω\ος from
φ(ίδομαι), devoted to sin, a (masc. or fern.) sinntr. In
the N. T. distinctions are so drawn that one is called
αμαρτωλοί who is a. not free from sin. In this sense
all men are sinners ; as, Mt. ix. 13 ; Mk. ii. 1 7 ; Lk. v. 8,
32; xiii. 2; xviii. 13; Ro. iii. 7; v. [8], 19; iTim. i. 15;
Heb. vii. 26. b. pre-eminently sinful, especially wicked;
a. univ. ; 1 Tim. i. 9 ; Jude 15 ; Mk. viii. 38 ; Lk. vi. 32-
34 ; vii. 37, 39 ; xv. 7, 10 ; Jn. ix. 16, 24 sq. 31 ; Gal. ii.
1 7 ; Heb. xii. 3 ; Jas. iv. 8 ; v. 20 ; 1 Pet. iv. 18 ; αμαρτία
itself is called αμαρτωλός, Ro. vii. 13. β. spec, of men
stained with certain definite vices or crimes, e. g.
the tax-gatherers : Lk. xv. 2 ; .xviii. 13 ; xL\. 7 ; hence the
combination τιλώναι και αμαρτωλοί, Mt. ix. 10 sq. ; xi. 19 ;
Mk. ii. 15 sq. ; Lk. v. 30; vii. 34; xv. 1. heathen,
called by the Jews .sinners κατ ΐξοχήν (1 Mace. i. 34;
ii. 48, 62 ; Tob. xiii. 6) : Mt. .xxvi. 45 [?] ; Mk. xiv. 41 ;
Lk. x-xiv. 7 ; Gal. ii. 15. (The word is found often in
Sept., as the equiv. of ΝΠΠ and Ι'ψ^^, and in the O. T.
Ajiocr. ; very seldom in Grk. writ., as Aristot. eth. Nic.
2, 9 p. llOi)', 33 ; Plut. de audiend. poet. 7, p. 25 c.)*
άμαχο9, -αν, {μάχη), in (irk. writ. [fr. Pind. down]
commonly 7iot to be withstood, invincible; more rarely
abstaining from fighting, (Xen. Cyr. 4, 1, 16; HeU. 4. 4,
9) ; in the N. T. twice metaph. not contentious : 1 Tim.
iii. 3 ; Tit. iii. 2.*
άμάω, -ώ : 1 aor. ημησα ; (fr. άμα together ; hence to
gather together, cf. (ierm. sanimeln ; [al. regard the init.
α as euphonic and the word as allied to Lat. meto, Eng.
7now, thus making the sense of cutting primary, and that
of gathering in secondary; cf. \^anicek p. 6 73]) ; freq. in
the Grk. poets, to reap, 7now down : τάς χώρας, Jas. v. 4.*
άμ-ίθυσ-τοϊ, -ου, ή, amethyst, a precious stone of a violet
and purple color (Ex. xxviii. 19 ; ace. to Phavorinus so
called δια το andpytiv τής μίθης [so Plut. quaest. conviv.
iii. 1, 3, 6]) : Rev. xxi. 20. [Cf. B. D. s. v.] *
αμ€λ€ω, -ω ; fut. α/ΐίλήσω ; 1 a.or. ημίλησαΧ {ίτ. άμΐλης,
and tliis fr. a priv. and μίλω to care for) ; very com. in
prof. auth. ; to be careless of, to neglect : τινός, Heb. ii. 3 ;
viii. 9; 1 Tim. iv. 14; foil, by inf., 2 Pet. i. 12 R G;
without a case, άμ(\ήσαντ(ς (not caring for what had just
been said [A. V. tin g made light of it^), Mt. xxii. 5.*
ά-μ€μ•ιιτο5, -ov. {μέμφομαι to blame), blameless, deserv-
ing no censure (Tertull. irreprehensibilis), free from fault
or defect : Lk. i. 6 ; Phil. ii. 15 ; iii. 6 ; 1 Th. iii. 13 [WH
a^,eu.^πτω<;
32
Μ^αττλίαϊ
mrj;. άμίμπτω^] ; Ilcb. viii. 7 (in which nothing is lack-
ing) ; in Se|)t. i. (j. DP, Job i. 1, 8 etc. Com. in Grk.
writ. [Cf. Trench § ciii.] *
ά-μ(μπτω$, adv., hlamekssly, so that there is no cause for
censure: 1 Th. ii. 10; [iii. 13 WII mrg.] ; v. 23. [Fr.
Ae.schyl. do\vn. Cf. Trench § ciii.] *
ά|κ'ριμνοΐ, -ov, (μέριμνα), free from anxiety, free from
care : Mt. xxviii. 14 ; 1 Co. vii. 32 (free from earthly
cares). (Sap. vi. 16 ; vii. 23 ; Hdian. 2, 4, 3 ; 3, 7, 11 ;
Anth. 0, :l.')!), ."i ; [in pass, sense, Soph. Ajax 1206].)•
ά-μιίτόθ£το$, -ov, (μ(τατίθημι), not transposed, not to be
transferred ; fixed, unalterable : Ileb. vi. 18 ; το Ιιμ(τάθ€-
τον as subst., immutahility, Ileb. vi. 17. (3 Mace. v. 1 ;
Polyb., Diod., Pint.) *
ά-μίτα-κ£νητο5, -ov, {μ(τακινίω), not to he moved from its
place, unmoved ; metaph. finnly persistent, [A. V. unmov-
ai/e] : 1 Co. xv. 58. (Plat. ep. 7, p. 343 a. ; Dion. Hal.
8, 74 ; [Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 16, 9 ; 2, 32, 3 | 2, 35, 4].) •
ά-μιταμ^λητος, -ov, (μ(ταμ(\ομαί, μfτaμ£\fl), not re-
pented of, unregretted : Ro. xi. 29 ; σωτηρία, by litotes,
salvation affording supreme joy, 2 Co. vii. 10 [al. con-
nect it with μ(τάι/οιαν]. (Plat., I'ol} b., Plut.) *
άμ.€τανόητο;, -ov. {μ(τανο(ω, q. v.), admitting no change
of mind (amendment), unrepentant, impenitent : Ro. ii. 5.
(In Lcian. Abdic. 11 [passively], i. q. άμ^ταμίΚητα, q. v. ;
[Philo de praem. et poen. § 3].)*
άμετρος, -ov, (μίτρον a measure), irithout measure, im-
mense : 2 Co. X. 13, 15 S(j. (tir τα aperpa καυχάσθαι to
boast to an immense extent, i. e. beyond measure, ex-
cessively). (Plat., Xen., Anthol. iv. p. 170, and ii. 206,
ed. Jacobs.)*
αμήν, Ilebr. |9l< ; 1. verbal adj. (fr. ρκ to prop;
Nii)h. to be nrm), firm, mehiph. faithful : 6 αμήν. Rev.
iii. 14 (where is added ό μάρτυς ό πιστός κ. αληθινός). 2.
it came to be used as an adverb by ivhich something is
asserted or confirmed : a. at the beginning of a dis-
course, surely, of a truth, truly ; so fret), in the discourses
of Christ in Mt. Mk. and Lk. : αμήν λίγω ύμ'ιν ' I sol-
emnly declare unto you,' e. g. Mt. v. 18; Mk. iii. 28;
Lk. iv. 24. The repetition of the word (αμήν αμήν), em-
ployed by John alone in his Gospel (twenty-five times), has
the force of a superlative, most assuredly: Jn. i. 51 (52) ;
iii. 3. b. at the close of a sentence ; so it is, so be it,
may it be fulfilled (yivoiro, Sept. Num. v. 22 ; Deut. xxvii.
15, etc.): Ro. i. 25 ; ix. 5 ; Gal i. 5 ; Eph. iii. 21 ; Phil. iv.
20 ; 1 Tim. i. 1 7 ; Ileb. xiii. 21 ; 1 Pet. iv. 11 ; Rev. i. 6,
and often ; cf. Jer. xi. 5 ; xxxv. (xxviii.) 6 ; 1 K. i. 30.
It was a custom, which passed over from the synagogues
into the Christian assemblies, that when he who had
lead or discoursed had offered up a solemn prayer to
God, the others in attendance responded Ajnen, and
thus made the substance of what was uttered their own :
1 Co. xiv. 16 {to αμήν, the well-known response Amen),
cf. Num. v. 22 ; Deut. xxvii. 15 sqq. ; Neh. v. 13 ; viii. 6.
2 Co. i. 20 al eVayytXiat ... το ναι', και . . . τό αμήν, i. e.
had shown themselves most sure. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Amen.]
άμήτωρ, -opor, ό, ή, (μήτηρ), without a mother, mother-
less; in Grk. writ. 1. bom without a another, e. g.
Minerva, Eur. Phocn. 666 sq., al. ; God himself, inasmuch
as he is without origin, Lact. instt. 4, 13, 2. 2. bereft
of a mother, Ildt. 4, 154, al. 3. born of a base or un-
known mother, Eur. Ion 109 cf. 837. 4. unmotherly,
unworthy of the name of mother : μήτηρ άμήτωρ, Soj)h.
El. 1 154. Cf. Bleek on Ileb. vol. ii. 2, p. 305 sqq. 5.
in a signif. unused by the Greeks, ' whose mother is not
recorded in the genealogy ' : of Melchizedek, Ileb. vii. 3 ;
(of Sarah by Philo in de temul. § 14, and rer. div. liaer.
§12; [cf. Bleek u. s.]) ; cf. the classic άνολυμπιάς.*
ά-μίαντο$, -ov, (μιαίνω), not defiled, unsoiled ; free from
that by which the nature of a thing is deformed and de-
based, or its force and vigor impaired : κοίτη ])ure, free
from adultery, Ileb. xiii. 4; κληρονομιά (without defect),
1 Pet. i. 4 ; θρησκιία, Jas. i. 27 ; pure from sin, Ileb. vii.
26. (Also in the Grk. writ. ; in an ethical sense, Plat,
legg. 6, p. 777 e.; Plut. Pericl. c. 39 βίος καθαρός κα\
αμίαντος.)*
Άμιναδάβ, ό, 37ΓΘ;ί (servant of the prince, [al. my
people are noble; but cf. B. D. s. v.]), [A. V. Aminadab],
the prop, name of one of the ancestors of Christ (1 Chr.
ii. 10 [A. Λ'. Amminadab]) : Mt. i. 4; Lk. iii. 33 [not
λΥΐΙ. See Β. D. s. V.].*
άμμο;, -ου, ή, .vrnd; ace. to a Ilebr. comparison tip. της
θαλάσσης and αμ. πάρα τό p^flXos της θαλ. are used for
an innumerable multitude, Ro. ix. 27; Ileb. xi. 12;
Rev. XX. 8, equiv. to xii. 18 (xiii. 1). Aoc. to the con-
text sandy ground, Mt. vii. 26. (Xen., Plat., Theophr.
often, Plut., Sept. often.) *
αμνό;, -oO, ό, [fr. Soph, and Arstph. down], a lamb :
Acts viii. 32 ; 1 Pet. i. 19 ; roC θ^οϋ, consecrated to God,
Jn. i. 29, 36. In these passages Christ is Ukened to a
sacrificial lamb on account of his death, innocently and
patiently endured, to expiate sin. See άρνίον.*
αμοιβή, -ης, ή, (fr. άμΰβω, as αλοιφή fr. αλείφω, στοιβή
fr. στ(ίβω), a very com. word with the Greeks, requital,
recompense, in a good and a bad sense (fr. the signif. of
the mid. άμ(ίβομαι to requite, return like for Hke) : in a
good sense, 1 Tim. v. 4.*
^ircXos, -ου, ή, [fr. Ilom. down], α vine: Mt. xxvi. 29;
Mk. xiv. 25 ; Lk. xxii. 18 ; Jas. iii. 12. In Jn. xv. 1, 4 sq.
Christ calls himself a vine, because, as the vine imparts
to its branches sap and productiveness, so Christ infuses
into his followers his own divine strength and life. άμπ.
της γης in Rev. xiv. 18 [RecT* om. της άμπ.'], 19, signifies
the enemies of Christ, who, ripe for destruction, are
likened to clusters of grapes, to be cut off, thrown into
the wine-press, and trodden there.*
άμίΓΕλονργός, -οϋ, ό, ή, (fr. άμπιλος and ΕΡΓί2), a vine-
dresser : Lk. xiii. 7. (Arstph., Plut., Geopon., al. ; Sept.
for D")3.)*
όμπελών, -ωνης. ό, a vineyard : Mt. xx. 1 sqq. ; xxi. 28,
[33], 39 sqq.; Mk. xii. 1 sqq.; Lk. [xiii. 6]; xx. 9 sqq.;
1 Co. ix. 7. (Sept. ; Diod. 4, 6 ; Plut. pro nobilit. c. 3.)•
Άμιτλίαϊ [Τ '\μπλίατος, Tr WII L mrg. Άμπλιατος;
hence accent Άμπλιά? ; cf. Lob. Pathol. Proleg. p. 505 ;
Chandler § 32], -ου, 6, Amplias (a contraction from the
Lat. Ampliatus, which form appears in some authorities,
^ ΑμτΓ\ίατο<;
33
cf. W. 102 (97)), a certain Christian at Rome: Ro. xvi.
8. [See Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 1 74 ; cf. T/ie AthencEum
for March 4, 1882, p. 28Γ» sq.] *
Άμιτλίοτοβ (Tdf.) or more correctly Ά/ιπλιάτοί (L
mrg. Tr WH) i. q. Άμπλΐας, q. v.
άμννω: 1 aor. mid. ήμυνάμην; [allied w. Lat. munio,
mocn'id, etc., Vanicek p. 731; Curtius § 451]; in Grk.
writ. [fr. Horn, down] to tvard off, keep off any thing
from any one, τι nui, ace. of the thing and dat. of pers. ;
hence, with a simple dat. of the pers., to aid, assitit any
one (Time. 1, 50; 3, 67, al.). Jlid. αμύνομαι, with ace.
of pers., to keep off, ward off, any one from one's self; to
defend one's selfar/ainst any one (so also 2 Macc.x. 17 ;
Sap. xi. 3 ; Sept. Josh. x. 13) ; to take vengeance on any
one (Xen. an. 2, 3,' 23; Joseph, antt. 9, 1, 2) : Acts vii.
24, where in thought supply τόν aSiKoivra [cf. B. 194
(168) note; W. 258 (242)].*
άμψιάζω ; [fr. άμφί, lit. to put around] ; to put on,
clothe : in Lk. xii. 28 L Wll άμφιάζιι for Rec. άμφιίΐ'ΐ'υσι.
(A later Grk. word; Sept. [2 K. xvii. 9 Alex.]; Joh
xxix. 14; [xxxi. 19]; xl. 5 ; Ps. Ixxii. 6 Syram. ; several
times in Themist. ; cf. Btttn. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 1 1 2 ; [Veitch
s. V. ; B. 49 (42 sq.) ; Steph. s. v. col. 201 c. quotes from
Cram. Anecdot. Ox. vol. ii. p. 338, 31 το μίν άμφύζω ίστ\
Koivws, το δι άμφιάζω Αωρίκον, ωσπιρ το ίποπιίζω κα\
ίϊΓοπίίί^ω].) Cf. άμφίίζω.*
άμψι-βάλλω ; to throw around, i. q. πfptβά\\ω, of a gar-
ment (Hom. Od. 14, 342) ; to cast to and fro now to one
side now to the other : a net, Mk. i. 16 G L Τ Tr WH [ace.
to TTrWH used absol. ; cf. oi αμφίβολη!. Is. xLx. 8].
(Ilab. i. 17.)*
αμφίβληστρον, -ου, τό, (αμφιβάλλω), in Grk. writ, any-
thiiiij thrown around one to impede his motion, as chains,
a garment; spec, α net for fishing, \casting-nef]•. Mk. i.
IG RGL; Mt. iv. 18. (Sept.; Hes. scut. 215 ; Hdt. 1,
141 ; Athen. 10, 72, p. 450.) [Syx. see δικτύου, and cf.
Trench § Ixiv. ; B. D. s. v. net.] *
άμφκ'ζω, i. q. άμφιϊννυμί \ in Lk. xii. 28 άμφιίζ(ΐ Τ Tr.
Cf. άμφίάζω.
άμφι-ίννυ\ιι; pf. pass, ημφίισμαι; (ίνννμι) ; [fr. Ilom.
down] ; to put on, to clothe : Lk. xii. 28 (R G ; cf. άμφύζω) ;
Mt.vi.30; ίκτιι/ι[Β. 191 (166)], Lk. vii. 25; Mt. xi. 8.*
■Α|χφί•7Γθλΐ5, -ίωϊ, ή, Amphipolis, the metropolis of
Macedonia Prima [cf. B. D. s. v. Macedonia] ; so called,
because the Stryraon flowed around it [Thuc. 4, 102];
formerly called 'Ewea οδοί (Thuc. 1,100): Acts xvii. 1
[see B. D.].*
αμφο8ον, -ου, τό, (άμφί, όδύς), prop, a road round any-
thing, a street, [Ilesych. αμφοδα• al ρΰμαι. ayviai. δίοδοι
(al. δΐί'^οδοι δίορυγμαί, al. i; πλατίία) ; Lex. in liekk. An-
ecdota i. p. 20.'), Ιί'λμφοδον ή ωσπιρ (κ τ(τραγώνου
διιτγίγραμμίνη όδόί. For e.xx. see Soph. Lex. ; AVetst. on
Mk. 1. c. ; cod. D in Acts xix. 28 (where see Tdf.'s
note)] : Mk. xi. 4. (Jer. xvii. 27; xxx. 16 (xlix. 27), and
in Grk. writ.) *
(ψφότοροι, -αϊ, -α, [fr. Hom. down], both of two, both the
one and the other: Mt. ix. 17, etc. ; τα άμφότ(ρα. Acts
xxiii. 8 : £ph. ii. 14.
ά-μώμτγτοί, -ox, (μωμάομαι), that cannot be censureci,
blameless: Phil. ii. Ι.ϋ Rti (cf. τίκνα μωμητά, Deut.
xxxii. 5); 2 Pet. iii. 14. (Horn. II. 12, 109; [Uesiod,
Find., al. ;] Plut. frat. amor. 18; often in Anthol.)*
οίμωμον, -ου, TO, amomum, a fragrant plant of India,
having the foliage of the white vine [al. ampeloleuce]
and seed, in clusters like grapes, from which ointment
was made (Plin. h. n. 12, 13 [28]): Rev. xviii. 13 GL
Τ Tr WII. [See B. D. Am. ed. s. v.] *
ά-μιωμο5, -ov, (μωμοι), without blemish, free from faulti-
ness, as a victim without spot or blemish : 1 Pet. i. 1 9
(Lev. xxii. 21); Ileb. ix. 14; in both places allusion is
made to the sinless life of Clirist. Ethically, without
blemish, faultiest!, unblamable: Eph. i. 4 ; v. 27; Col. i.
22; Phil. ii. 15 LTTrAVII; Jude 24; Rev. xiv. 5.
(Often in Sept.; [Ilesiod, Simon., Iambi.], Hdt. 2, 177;
Aeschyl. Pers. 185; Theocr. 18, 25.) [Syn. see Trench
§ ciii. ; Tittmann i. 29 sq.] *
Άμ,ών, ό, indecl., Anion, ([ΙΏΝ artificer [but cf. B. D.]),
king of Judah, son of Manasseh, and father of Josiah :
Mt. i. 10, [L Τ Tr WII -μώς. Cf. B. D.].*
Άμώϊ, ό, Amos, (]'ns strong), indecl. prop, name of one
of Christ's ancestors : [Alt. i. 1 L Τ Tr \\l\] ; Lk. iii. 25.*
civ, a particle indicating that something can or coidd
occur on certain conditions, or by the combination of
certain fortuitous causes. In Lat. it has no equivalent ;
nor do the Eng. haply, perchance. Germ, ivohl (wol),
etwa, exactly and everywhere correspond to it. The
use of this particle in the N. T., illustrated by copious
ex.x. fn Grk. writ., is shown by W. § 42; [cf. B. 216
(186) sqq. Its use in classic Grk. is fully exliibited (by
Prof. Goodwin) in L. and S. s. v.].
It is joined I. in the apodoses of hypothetical sen-
tences 1. with the Impf., where the Lat. uses the
impf. subjunctive, e. g. Lk. vii. 39 ((-γίνωσκ^ν Sv, sciret,
he would know) ; Lk. xvii. 6 (e'Xe'-yeTe an ye would say) ; Jit.
xxiii. 30 (non essemus, we should not have been) ; Jn.
v. 46 ; viii. 42 ; ix. 41 ; xv. 19 ; xviii. 36 ; 1 Co. xi. 31 ;
Gal. i. 10 ; iii. 21 [but WII mrg. br.] ; Hcb. iv. 8 ; viii. 4,
7. 2. with the indie. Aor. (where the Lat. uses the
plpf. subj. like the fut. ])f. subj., / would have done ii),
to express what would have been, if this or that either
were (el with the impf. in the protasis preceding), or
had been (el with the aor. or plpf. preceding) : Mt. xi.
21 and Lk. x. 13 (Sv μ(τ(νόησαν they would have re-
pented) ; Mt. xi. 23 ; xii. 7 (ye would not have con-
demned) ; Mt. xxiv. 43 (he would have watched), 22 and
Mk. xiii. 20 (no one would have been saved, i. e. all even now
would have to be regarded as those who had perished ;
cf. W. 304 (286)) ; Jn. iv. 10 (thou would.it have asked);
xiv. 2 (fiiTov &v I would have said so) ; 28 (ye would have
rejoiced) ; Ro. ix. 29 (ice should have become) ; 1 Co. ii.
8; Gal. iv. 15 (RG); Acts xviii. 14. Sometimes tlie
condition is not expressly stated, but is easily gathered
from what is said : Lk. xix. 23 and Mt. xxv. 27 (/ should
have received it back with interest, sc. if thou hadst given
it to the bankers). 3. with the Plupf. : Jn. xi. 21
[R Tr mrg.] (ονκ &v (Τ(θνήκίΐ [L Τ Tr txt. WII άπ(θαΡ€ν}
34
ava
tcould not have died, for which, in 32, the aor. οίκ fiv
aniaave) ; Jn. xiv. 7 [not Tilf.] (fi with the plpf. pi-oc-od-
ing) ; 1 Jn. ii. 19 (>l(ei/ troutii liare remaiiicil icitli us).
Sometimes (as in Grk. writ., esp. the later) άκ is omitted,
in order to intimate that the thing %vanted but little
(impf.) or had Λvanted but little (plpf. or aor.) of being
done, which yet was not done because the condition was
not fulfilled (cf. Alex. Bllm. in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1858,
p. 489 sqq. ; [X. T. Gram. p. 225 (194)]; Fritzsche on
Rom. vol. ii. 33 ; W. § 42, 2 p. 305 (286)), e. g. Jn. viii. 39
(where the ίίν is spurious) ; xv. 22, 24; xL\. 11; Acts
xxvi. 32; Ro. vii. 7; Gal. iv. 15 (av before ΐ^ώκατι
has been correctly expunged by LTTrAVlI). II.
Joined to relative pronouns, relative adverbs, and ad-
verbs of time and quality, it has the same force as the
Lat. cumque or cunque, -ever, -soever, (Germ, irgenil,
etwa). 1. foil, by a past tense of the Indicative, when
some matter of fact, something certain, is spoken of ;
where, " when the thing itself which is said to have
been done is certain, the notion of uncertainty involved
in t'l/ belongs rather to the relative, whether pronoun or
particle " {Klolz ad Dev. p. 145) [cf. W. § 42, 3 a.] ; Saot
Sv a.< manij as : Mk. vi. 56 (όσοι tiv ^πτοντο [η^αντο L•
txt. Τ Trtxt. WII] avToi as main/ as Imii-Iied liiiii [cf. 15.
216 (187)]) ; Mk. xi. 24 (όσα άρ ■ιτροσ(υ)^όμ(νοι αΙτείσθ(
[Grsb. om. «μ], but L txt. Τ Tr \VH have rightly restored
όσα προσ(ύχ(σθ( κ- αΙτ(ΐσθ(). καθότι άν in so far or so often
as, accordiiii/ as, ((ierm.yc naclidem i/ernde') : Acts ii. 45;
iv. 35. i)! Sv: 1 Co. xii. 2 (in whatever manner ye were
led[ef.B.§139, 13; 383(329)sq.]). 2. foll.byaSuI>
junctive, a. the Present, concerning that which
may have been done, or is usually or constantly done
(where the Germ, uses mo(jen); ήνίκα Άν ichrnsoever, as
οβεη as : 2 Co. iii. 15 L Τ Tr WII ; or tiv ichoever, he he
who he ma;/ : Mt. xvi. 25 (L Τ Tr WII ίάν) ; [Mk. viii. 35
(where TTrAVII fut. indie.; see WH. App. p. 172)] ;
Lk. X. 5 (L Τ Tr WH aor.), 8 ; Gal. v. 1 7 (T Tr λΥΗ ϊάν,
L br. eav) ; 1 Jn. ii. 5 ; iii. 1 7 ; Ro. ix. 15 (Ex. xxxiii. 19);
xvi. 2; 1 Co. xi. 27, etc. όστκάΐ': 1 Co. xvi. 2 [TrWII
fall ; WH mrg. aor.] ; Col. iii. 1 7 ( L txt. Tr WII fav). όσοι
5v: Mt. vii. 12 (TWII t'd./) ; xxii. 9 (LTTrAVH ^άν).
όπου άν whithersoever : Lk. ix. 57 (L Tr iav) ; Rev. xiv. 4
(LTr [T ed. 7 not 8, WH] have adopted inayti. defended
also by B. 228 (196)); Jas. iii. 4 (RG LTr mrg. in
br.). όσάκΐ5 άν how οβεη soever : 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. (where
LTTrWH ϊάν). ώί άν in u'fiat wa;/ soever: 1 Th. ii. 7
([cf. EUic. ad loc. ; B. 232 (200)], LTTrWH i'ai/). b.
the A ο r i s t, where the Lat. uses the fut. pf . ; os άν. Mt.
V. 21, 22 ((ϊπ,ι; whoever, if ever any one shall have said) ;
31 sq. [in vs. 32 L Τ Tr WII read πάί ό άπ-ολύωι/] ; χ.
1 1 ; xxvi. 48 (Tdf . eav) ; Mk. iii. 29. 35 ; ix. 4 1 , etc. δστίΓ
άν: Mt. X. 33 [L Tr WH txt. om. άν']; xii. 50; Jn. ,\iv.
13 [Trmrg. WH pres.]; Acts iii. 23 (Tdf. eav), etc. όσοι
άν: Mt. xxi. 22 (Treg. uiv) ; xxiii. 3 (T WH iav); Mk.iii.
28 (Tr WH iav) ; Lk. ix. 5 (L Τ Tr WH pres.) ; Jn. xi.
22; Acts ii. 39 (Lchm. oCf ) ; iii. 22. όπου αν: Mk.
xiv. 9 (T WH foi') ; ix. 18 (L Τ Tr WH iav). άχρα oS
&> until (donee) : 1 Co. xv. 25 Rec. ; Rev. ii. 25. ίωί 5v
until (usque dum) : Mt. ii. 13 ; x. 11 ; xxii. 44 ; Mk. vi.
10 ; Lk. xxi. 32 ; 1 Co. iv. 5, etc. iji/iita άν, of fut. time,
not until tlun, u-hen ... or then at Itnt/lh, when . . . : 2 Co.
iii. 16 (T WH txt.iav) [cf. Kuhner ii. 951 ; Jelf ii. 565].
ώί άν as soon as [B. 232 (200)] : 1 Co. xi. 34 ; Phil. ii.
23. αφ' ου άν iytpef/, Lk. xiii. 25 (from the time, what-
ever the time is, when he shall have risen up). But ia»
(q. V.) is also joined to the pronouns and adverbs men-
tioned, instead of άν ; and in many i)laces the Mss. and
edd. fluctuate between άν and iav, (exx. of which have
already been adduced); [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; 117/.
App. p. 1 73 " predominantly άν is found after conso-
nants, and iav after vowels "]. Finally, to this head
must be referred όταν (i. q. Srf άν) ivith the indie, and
much oftener with the subj. (see όταν), and όπως άν, al-
though this last came to be used as a final conjunction
in the sense, that, if it be po-tsihle : Lk. ii. 35 ; Acts iii.
20 (19) ; XV. 17; Ro. iii. 4 ; see onmt, U. 1 b. [Cf. AV. 309
(290 sq.) ; B. 234 (201).] ΙΠ. άν is joined to the
Optat. [W. 303 (284); B. 217(188)]; when a certain
condition is laid down, as in wishes, / n'ould that etc. :
Acts xxvi. 29 ((Ιξα'ιμην [Tdf. (Ιξάμην~\ άν I could prat), sc.
(lid it depend on me) ; in direct iiiieslions [W. 1. c. ; B.
2.14 (219)] : Acts viii. 31 (ηως άν δυναίμην; i. β. on what
condition, by what possibility, could I? cf. Xen. oec. 11,
5); Acts xvii. 18 (τι άν θ(\οι . . . \eyeiv what would he
say ? it being assumed that he Avishes to utter some defi-
nite notion or other) ; Acts ii. 12RG; in dependent
sentences and indirect questions in which the nar-
rator introduces another's thought [W. § 42,4; B. 1. c.];
Lk. i. 62 ; vi. 11 ; ix. 46 ; [xv. 26 L br. Tr WII ; cf. xviii.
36 Lbr. Trbr. Wllmrg.]; Acts v. 24; x. 17; xvii. 20
R G. IV. άν is found without a mood in 1 Co. vii. 5
(fi μή τι άν [WH br. άν], except perhaps, sc. ycvoiTo, [but
cf. Bttm. as below]), ώί άν, adverbially, tanquam (so
already the Vulg.), as if; 2 Co. x. 9 (like οισττίρ άν in (Jrk.
writ. ;'cf. Kiihner ii. 210 [§ 398 Anm. 4; Jelf § 430] ; B.
219 (189) ; [L. and S. s. v. D. lU.]).
civ. contr. from iav, if; foil, by the subjunc. : Jn. x.x.
23 [Lchm. iav. Also by the (pres.) indie, in 1 Jn. v. 15
Lchm.; see B. 223 (192); W. 295 (277)]. Further,
L Τ Tr WII have received άν in Jn. xiii. 20 ; xvi. 23 ;
[so ΛΥΗ Jn. xii. 32 ; cf. W. 291 (274) ; B. 72 (63)].*
άνά, prep., prop, upwards, up, (cf. the adv. άνω, opp. to
κατά and κάτω), denoting motion from a lower place to a
higher [cf. W. 398 (372) n.]; rare in the N. T. and only
with the accus. 1. in the e.xpressions άνά μισόν (or
jointly άνάμίσον [so R" Tr in Rev. vii. 17]) into the jnidst,
in the midst, amidst, among, between, — with gen. of place,
Mt. xiii. 25 ; Mk. vii. 31 ; Rev. vii. 17 [on this pass, see
μίσος, 2 sub fin.] ; of pers., 1 Co. vi. 5, with which cf.
Sir. XXV. 18(1 7) nva μίσον τον (Fritz, των) πΧησίον αυτοϋ;
cf. W. § 27, 1 fin. [Β. 332 (285)], (Sir. xxvii. 2 ; 1 Mace. vii.
28 ; xiii. 40, etc. ; in Sept. for γη2, Ex. xxvi. 28 ; Josh,
xvi. 9 ; xLx. I ; Diod. 2, 4 άνά μίσον των χ(ΐ\(ων [see μέσο;,
2]) ; άνά μΐρο!, (\\ήζ. per parte.i), in turn, one after an-
other, in succession : 1 Co. xiv. 27 [where Reci'writes άνα-
,«pos], (Polyb. 4, 20, 10 ανα μίρος άδ(ΐν). 2. joined to
αναβαθμό';
35
ava'yaiov
numerals, it has a distributive force [W. 398 (372); B.
331 sq. ("285)] : Jn. u. 6 {ava μιτρητα! δύο η rpeif two or
three metretae apiece) ; Mt. xx. 9 sq. (fXatiov ανά δηνάριον
they received each a denarius) ; Lk. ix. 3 [Tr br. W'll om.
am; ix. 14]; x. 1 (ανά δύο [λΥΙΙ ανά δίο [δύο]] two by
two) ; Mk. vi. 40 (L Ϊ Tr WH κατά) ; [Rev. iv. 8] ; and
very often in Grk. writ.; cf. W. 39S (372). It is used
adverbially in Rev. x.xi. 21 (ora ds ΐκαστοί, like ανά ησ-
σαρις, I'lut. Aem. 32 ; cf. W. 249 (234) ; [B. 30 (2G)]).
3. Prefixed to verbs ανά signifies, a. u/nranls, uji, up
to, (Lat. ad. Germ, auf), as in ανάκρουαν, ανάβαιναν,
άναβάλλαν, άνακράζαν, etc. b. it corresponds to the
Lat. ad (Germ, an), to [indicating the goal], as mavay-
γί'λλίίν [al. would refer this to d.], άνάπταν. c. it de-
notes repetition, renewal, i. q. denuo, anew, over again, as
in avayfvvav- d. it corresponds to the Lat. re, retro, back,
backn-urd.t, as in άνακάμττταν, άναχωράν, etc. Cf. AV in.
De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 3 sq.*
άνα-βαθμόΐ, -οΰ, ό, (βαθμός, and this fr. βαίνω) ; 1.
an ascent. 2. a means of going up, ajlight of steps,
a stair : Acts xxi. 35, 40. Exx. fr. Grk. writ, in Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 324 sq.*
άνα-βαΐνω ; [impf . ανάβαιναν Acts iii. 1 ; fut. άναβήσομαι
Ro. X. 6, after Deut. xxx. 12]; pf. άναβίβηκα; 2 aor.
άνίβην, ptcp. αναβάς, impv. άναβα Rev. iv. 1 (άνάβηθι
Lchm.). plur. nva.iare (for RG άνά,ίητί) Rev. xi. 12 L
TTr[WII; cf. TKi/. App.p. 168']; W.§14, Ih.; [B. 54
(47) ; fr. Horn, down]; Sept. for TY)]J,', au to gu up,
move to a higher place, ascend : a tree (fVi), Lk. xix.
4 ; upon the roof of a house (fVi). Lk. v. 19 ; into a ship
{(Is), ]\Ik. vi. 51; [JUt. xv. 39 GTrt.xt. ; Acts xxi. 6
Tdf.] ; (Is TO Spot, Mt. V. 1 ; Lk. ix. 28 ; Jlk. iii. 13 ; ds το
υπ^ρώον. Acts i. 13 ; ds τον ουρανόν, Ro. χ. 6 ; Rev, xi. 12 ;
(Is Tovoiip. is omitted, but to be supplied, in Jn. i. 51 (52) ;
vi. 62, and in the phrase άναβ. πρία τον πατ(ρα, Jn. xx. 1 7.
(It is commonly maintained that those persons are fig.
said άναβ(βηκίναί (Is τόν ουρανόν, who have penetrated the
heavenly mysteries; Jn. iii. 13, cf. Deut. xxx. 12; Prov.
xxiv. 27 (xxx. 4) ; Bar. iii. 29. But in these latter pass,
also the expression is to be understood Uterally. And as
respects Jn. iii. 13, it must be remembered that Christ
brought his knowledge of the divine counsels λτΙιΙι him
from heaven, inasmuch as he had dwelt there prior to
his incarnation. Jsow the natural language was oiSeis
ην iv τω ονρανώ ; but the expression άναβ(βηκ€ν is used
because none but Christ could get there except by a s-
c e η d i η g. Accordingly d μή refers merely to the idea,
involved in aj'a(iie'/3?)Kri', of a past residence inheaven.
Cf . Meyer [or Westcott] ad loc.) L sed of travelling to a
higher place : ds 'UpoaoX. Mt. xx. 17 sq. ; Mk. x. 32 sq.,
etc.; eis TO I'epoi', Jn. vii. 14; Lk.xviii. 10. Often the place
to or into which the ascent is made is not mentioned, but
is easily understood from the context : Acts viii. 31 (into
the chariot) ; Mk. xv. 8 (to the palace of the governor,
ace. to the reading άναβάχ restored by L Τ Tr txt. WH
for R G αναβοήσας), etc. ; or the place alone is men-
tioned from which (από, ΐκ) the ascent is made . ]\it. iiL
lli ; Acts viii• 39; Rev. xi. 7. b. in a wider sense
of things rising up, to rise, mount, be borne up, spring
up: of a fish swimming up, Mt. xvii. 27 ; of smoke rising
up. Rev. viii. 4 ; ix. 2 ; of plants springing up from the
ground, Mt. xiii. 7; Mk. iv. 7, 32, (as in Grk. writ.;
Theophr. hist, plant. 8, 3, and Hebr. nS>•) ; of things
which come up in one's mind (Lat. suboriri) : άναβαίν. (πι
την καρδ. or ev ττ) καρδία, Lk. xxiv. 38 ; 1 Co. ii. 9 ; Acts
vii. 23 {άνίβη fVl τήν κ. it came into his mind i. e. he re-
solved, foil, by inf.), after the Hebr. ^VSk ri'7J,;, Jer. iii.
16, etc. [B. 135 (118)]. Of messages, prayers, deeds,
brought up or reported to one in a higher place : Acts
X. 4 ; xxi. 31 (tidings came up to the tribune of the
cohort, who dwelt in the tower Antonia). [Comp. : προσ-,
σνν-αναβαίνω.Ί
άνα-βάλλω : 2 aor. mid. άνίβάλόμην ; 1. ίο throw or
toss up. 2. to put back or ojf, delay, postpone, (very
often in Grk. writ.) ; in this sense also in mid. (prop, to
defer for one's self) : τινά, to hold back, delay ; in a
forensic sense to put off any one (Lat. ampliare, Cic.
Verr. act. 2, 1, 9 § 26) i. e. to defer hearing and decid-
ing {adjourn) any one's case : Acts xxiv. 22 ; cf. Kypke
[or AVetst.] ad loc*
άνα-βίβάζω ; 1 aor. άν(βίβασα ; to cause to go up or as-
cend, to draw up, (often in Sept. and Grk. writ.) : Mt.
xiii. 48, (Xen. Hell. 1, 1, 2 jrpos tjjv γην άν(βίβαζ( τάί
(αντον Tptrjp^Ls).*
άνα-βλ(πω ; 1 aor. αν(β\(^α ; [fr. Hdt. down] ; 1.
to look up : Mk. viii. 24, [25 R G L] ; xvi. 4 ; Lk. ,xix. 5 ;
xxi. 1 ; Acts xxii. 13 ; Λ τίνα, ibid. ; ds τον oipavov, Mt.
xiv. 19; Mk. vi. 41; vii. 34, (Plat. Axioch. p. 370b.;
Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 9). 2. to recover (lost) sight : Mt. xi.
5; XX. 34; Lk. xviii. 41 sqq., etc. ([Hdt. 2, 111 ;] Plat.
Phaedms p. 243 b. παραχρήμα άνϊβ\η\τ(, Arstph. Plut.
126) ; used somewhat loosely also of the man blind from
birth who was cured by Christ, Jn. ix. 1 1 ( 1 2) (cf. Mever
ad loc), 17 sq. (Pans. 4. 12, 7 (10) συνίβη τόν Όφωνία
. . .τον (Κ y(V€Tr}s τνφλον άναβ\(ψαί). Cf. Il'in. De verb,
comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 7 sq.
άνά-βλ(ψι$. -ίωί, ή, recovery of sight: Lk. iv. 18 (19),
(Sept. Is. Ixi. 1). [Aristot.]•
άνα-βοάω, -ω : 1 aor. άν(βόησα ; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down] ; to raise a cry, to cry nut anything, say it shout-
ing : Lk. ix. 38 (L Τ Tr WH ^βόησ() ; Mk. xv! 8 (where
read άναβα!, see αναβαίνω, a. sub fin.) ; with the addition
of φων^ μ(γάλη. ^It. xxvii. 46 [TrWII L mrg. (βόησίΐ,
(as Gen. xxvii. 38 ; Is. xxxvi. 13, etc.). Cf. Win. De
verb. comp. Pt. iiL p. 6 sq. ; [and see βοάω, fin.].*
άνα-βολή, -ής. ή, (αναβάλλω, q. v.), often in Grk. writ.,
a putting off, delay: ποιιίσθαι αναβοΧήν to interpose (Ut.
make) delay. Acts ,\xv. 1 7, (as in Thuc. 2, 42 ; Dion. Hal.
11, 33 ; Plut. CamiU. c. 35).*
άναΎαιον, -ου, τό, (fr. ανά and ytxia i. e. y^), prop, any-
thing above the ground; hence a room in the upper part
ofahouse: Mk. xiv. 15; Lk. xxii. 12,(in GL Τ Tr AVH).
Also written av^yaiov (which Tdf. formerly adopted ;
cf. Xen. an. 5, 4, 29 [where Dind. άνακ(ίων'\), άνώγίον
(Rec), άνώγίων; on this variety in writing cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 297 sq. ; [Rutherford, Xew Phryn. p. 358] ;
άναγ^ΐ\\ω
36
άναΒίίκνυμι
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 611 sq.; B. 13 (12); [WH. App.
p. 151].•
άν-αγγίλλω ; imjif . άνήγγ(\\ον ; [fut. άναγγιΧω] : 1 aor.
ainiyy(i\a; 2 aor. pass, άνηγγίλην, Ko. .\v. 21 ; 1 Pet. i. 12
(several times in Sept.; 1 Mace. ii. 31 ; W. 82 (78);
[Veitch s. V. oyyf'XXo)]) ; lo announce, male known, [cf.
ανά, 3 b.] : τί, Acts xix. 18 ; foil, by ότι, Jn. y. 1.0 [L mrg.
WH txt. Τ (Ιπίν] ; όσα κτλ. Acts kiv. 27 ; [Mk. v. 19 R
GLmrg.]; [absol. with tls, Mk. v. 14 Rec] ; equiv. to
diiclose : τί nvt, Jn. iv. 25; xvi. 13-15; used of the for-
mal proclamation of the Christian religion : Acts x.\.
20 ; 1 Pet. i. 12 ; 1 Jn. i. 5 ; jrepi twos, Ro. xv. 21 (Is. lii.
15) ; lo report, bring back tidings, rehearse, used as in
Grk. writers (Aeschyl. Prom. 664 (661); Xen. an. 1, 3,
21 ; Polyb. 25, 2, 7) of messengers reporting what they
have seen or heard, [cf. ανά u. s.] : τί, Acts xvi. 38
(where L Τ Tr AVII άπήγγ.) ; 2 Co. vii. 7.
άνα-Ύΐννάα, -ώ : 1 aor. άνιγΐννησα ; pf. pass, avayfytv-
νημαι \ tf) produce again, beget again, beget anew ; metaph. :
τινά, thoroughly to change the mind of one, so that he
lives a new life and one conformed to the will of God,
1 Pet. i. 3 ; passively ΐκ tivos, ibid. i. 23. (In the same
sense in eccl. writ. [cf. Soj)h. Lex. s. v.]. Among prof,
auth. used by Joseph, antt. 4, 2. 1 των ex τον στασίαζαν
αντοίς άναγαη/ωμίνων [yet Bekker άι/ -γίνομ^νων^ δεινών
which originated.)'
άνα-γινώσκω ; [impf. άν^/ίνωσκΐν Acts λ'ίϋ. 28] ; 2 aor,
άνίγνων, [inf. άναγνωναι Lk. iv. 16], ptcp. dvayvovs; Pass.,
[pres. αναγιΐ'ώσκομαι] ; 1 aor. άνίγνώσθην ; in prof. auth.
1. to distinguish between, to recognize, to know accurately,
to acknowledge ; hence 2. lo read, (in this signif.
["first in Find. O. 10 (11). 1"] fr. [Arstph.,] Time,
down) : τϊ, Mt. .xxii. 31 ; ]Mk. xii. 10 ; Lk. vi. 3 ; Jn. xix.
20; Acts viii. 30, 32; 2 Co. i. 13; [Gal. iv. 21 Lchm.
mrg.] ; Rev. i. 3 ; v. 4 Rec. ; rtra, one's book. Acts viii.
28, 30; e'v with dat. of the book, Mt. xii. 5 ; xxi. 42; ilk.
xii. 26 ; with ellipsis of tv τω νόμω. Lk. χ. 26 ; foil, by ότι
[objective], Mt. xix. 4 ; [foil, by ότι recitative, Mt. x.xi.
16]; τί (-ποίησα, Mt. xii. 3; Mk. ii. 25. The obj. not
mentioned, but to be understood from what precedes :
Mt. xxiv. 15 ; Mk. xiii. 14 ; Acts xv. 31 ; xxiii. 34 ; Eph.
iii. 4 ; pass. 2 Co. iii. 2. lo read to others, read aloud :
2 Co. iii. 15; Acts xv. 21, (in both places Μωϋσ^Γ i. q.
the books of Moses) ; [Lk. iv. 16 ; Acts xiii. 27] ; 1 Th.
V. 27; Col. iv. 16.•
αναγκάζω ; [impf. ηνά•γκαζον^ ; 1 aor. ηνάγκασα ; 1 aor.
pass, ηναγκάσθην: (fr. ανάγκη); [fr. Soph, down]; to
necessitate, compel, drive to, constrain, whether by force,
threats, etc., or by persuasion, entreaties, etc., or by
other means : τινά, 2 Co. xii. 1 1 (by your behavior
towards me); ηνά foil, by inf.. Acts xxvi. 11; xxviii.
19; Gal. ii. 3, 14 (by your example); vi. 12; Mt. xiv.
22; Mk. vi. 45; Lk.'xiv. 23.•
αναγκαίος, -ala, -alov, (^ανάγκη), [fr. Hom. down (in vari-
ous senses)], necessary ; a. what one cannot do with-
out, indispensable : 1 Co. xii. 22 (τα μί\η) ; Tit. iii. 14
(χράαι). b. connected by the bonds of nature or of
friendship: Acts x. 24 (αναγκαίοι [A. V. near^ φίλοι).
c. what ought according to the law of duly lo be done,
what is reijuired by the condition of things: Phil. i. 24.
άναγκαΐόν «Vti foil, by ace. with inf.. Acts xiii. 46 ; Heb.
viii. 3. άνα-γκα'ιον ήγάσθαι to deem necessary, foil, by
inf., Phil. ii. 2.j; 2 Co. L\. 5.•
άναγκα<Γτως, adv., by force or conslrairit ; opp. to «ου-
σίωί, 1 Pet. v. 2. (Plat. Ax. p. 36G a.)•
ανάγκη, -ης, ή ; 1. necessity, imposed either by the
external condition of things, or by the law of duty, re-
gard to one's advantage, custom, argument : κατ ανάγκην
perforce (opp. to κατά ίκούσιον), Pliilem. 14 ; ΐξ ανάγκης
of necessity, compelled, 2 Co. ix. 7; lleb. vii. 12 (ntcrs-
sarily) ; ΐχω ανάγκην I have (am compelled by) neces-
sity, (also in Grk. writ.) : 1 Co. vii. 37 ; lleb. vii. 27 ; foil,
by inf., Lk. xiv. 18; xxiii. 17 R L br. ; Jude 3; dv. /loi
ijsiKfiTai necessity is laid upon me, 1 Co. ίχ. 16; ανάγκη
(i. q. άναγκαΐόν ίστι) foU. by inf. : Mt. xviii. 7 ; Ro. xiii.
5 ; lleb. ix. 16, 23, (so Grk. writ.). 2. in a sense rare
in the classics (Diod. 4, 43), but very common in Hellen-
istic writ, (also in Joseph, b. j. 5, 13, 7, etc. ; see W. 30),
calamity, distress, straits : Lk. xxi. 23 ; 1 Co. vii. 26 ; 1 Th.
iii. 7 ; plur. iv άνάγκαις, 2 Co. vi. 4 ; xii. 10.•
άνα-γνωρίζω : 1 aor. pass, avfyvmpiaftjv; lo recognize:
Acts vii. 13 [Trtxt. ΛΥΠ txt. (γνωρίσθη~\ was recognized
by his brethren, cf. Gen. xiv. 1. (Plat, politic, p. 258 a.
αναγνώριζαν τους συγγ^νάς•)*
άνά-γνω(Γΐ5ι -(ως, ή, (άναγινώσκω, q. τ.) ; a. α know-
ing again, owning. b. reading, [fr. Plato on] : Acts
xiii. 15 I 2 Co. iii. 14 ; 1 Tim. iv. 13. (Neh. viii. 8 i. q.
x-ip•:.)•
αν-άγω : 2 aor. άνηγαγον, inf. avaya-yt tv, [ptcp. ai^aya-
γών] ; Pass., [pres. ανάγομαι] ; 1 aor. [cf. sub fin.] άνή-
χθην; [fr. Horn, doivn] ; lo lead up, lo lead or bring into
a higher place; foil, by eh with ace. of the place: Lk.
ii. 22; iv. 5 [T Tr WH om. L br. the cl.] ; xxii. 66 [T
TrWH άπήγαγονί; Acts Lx. 39; xvi. 34; Mt. iv. 1 {ας
τ. ΐρημον, sc. fr. the low bank of the Jordan), τίνα €κ
ν(κρων fr. the dead in the world below, to the upper
world, Heb. xiii. 20 ; Ro. x. 7 ; τινά τω λαώ to bring one
forth who has been detained in prison (a lower place),
and set him before the people to be tried, Acts xii. 4 ;
θυσίαν τω α&ωΧω to ofifer sacrifice to the idol, because
the victim is lifted up on the altar. Acts vii. 41. Navi-
gators are κατ (ζοχην said άνάγ^σθαι (pass, [or mid.])
when they launch out, set sail, put to sea, (so dvayajy^
in Justin. Mart. dial. c. Tr. c. 142 [and in the classics]) :
Lk. viii. 22 ; Acts xiii. 13; xvi. 11; xviii. 21 ; xx. 3, 13;
xxi. [1], 2; xxvii. 2, 4, 12, 21 ; xxviii. 10 sq. (Polyb.
1, 21, 4; 23, 3, etc.) [CoMP. : ίττ-ανάγω.] •
άνα-8(ίκνυμ.ι : 1 aor. άνίδ(ΐξα. [impv. ανά8(ΐ^ον; fr. Soph,
down] ; to lift up anything on high and exhibit it for all
to behold (Germ, aufzeigen) ; hence to show accurately,
clearly, to disclose what was hidden, (2 Mace. ii. 8 cf.
6) : Acts i. 24 (show which of these two thou hast
chosen). Hence αναδ. τινά Ιο proclaim any one as elected
to an office, to announce as appointed (king, general,
etc., messenger) : Lk. x. 1, (2 Mace. ix. 14, 23, 25 ; x.
11; xiv. 12, 26; 1 Esdr. i. 35; viii. 23; Polyb. 4, 48,
άνά8€ΐξΐζ
37
αναθΐματίζα
3; 51, 3; Diod. i. 66; 13, 98; Plut. Caes. 37, etc.;
Hdian. 2, 12, 5 (3), al.)• Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt.
iii. p. 12 jq.*
άνά-ε<ιξι$, -ΐωί, ή, {άνα5(ίκημι, q. v.), α fowling out,
public showing forth ; τών χρόνων, Sir. xliii. G. a pro-
claiming, announcing, inaugurating, of such as are elected
to office (Plut. Mar. 8 νπάτων avabfi^it [cf. Polyb. 15, 26,
7]) : Lk. i. 80 (until the day when he was announced
[A. V. of his shewingl to the people as the forerunner
of the Messiah ; this announcement he himself made at
the command of God, Lk. iii. 2 sqq.).*
άνα-δ<χομαι : 1 aor. άv(Sfξάμηv ; fr. Horn, down ; to
take up, take upon one's t^e/f, undertake, assume; hence
to receive, entertain any one hospitably : Acts xxviii. 7 ;
to entertain in one's mind : τάί eVoyyeXias, i. e. to em-
brace them with faith, Heb. xi. 1 7.*
dva-S(S<iip.i : 2 aor. ptcp. avabovs ; 1. to give forth,
send up, so of the earth producing plants, of plants
yielding fruit, etc. ; in prof. auth. 2. ace. to the sec-
ond sense which ανά has in composition [see άνά, 3 b.J,
to deliver up, hand over : ίπιστοΧήν, Acts xxiii. 33, (the
same phrase in Polyb. [29, 10, 7] and Plut.).'
άνα-ζάω, -ω : 1 aor. άνίζησα ; a word found only in the
Χ. Ϊ. and eccl. writ. ; to live again, recover life ; a.
prop., in Rec. of Ro. xiv. 9 ; Rev. xx. 5. b. trop.
one is said άναζήν who has been νεκρός in a trop. sense ;
a. to be restored to a correct life : of one who returns to
a better moral state, Lk. χλ-. 24 [WH mrg. fζησev'] ([A. V.
is alive again'\, cf. Mey. ad loc), 32 (T Tr WH ίζησι).
β. to revive, regain strength and vigor : Ro. vii. 9 ; sin is
alive, indeed, and vigorous among men ever since the
fall of Adam ; yet it is destitute of power (ν^κρά ίστί)
in innocent children ignorant of the law ; but when they
come to a knowledge of the law, sin recovers its power
in them also. Others less aptly explain άνίζησα here
began to live, sprang into life, (CJerm. lehte a uf).'
άνα-ζητ€ω, -ώ ; [impf. dff f^rouv] ; 1 2^0Y. αναζήτησα', *to
run through with tbe eyes any series or succession of
men or things, and so to seek out, search through, make
diligent search, Germ, daran hinsuchen, aufsuchen' (_ Win.
De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 14) : tjvo, Lk. ii. 44, (and
45 L txt. Τ Tr WH) ; Acts xi. 25. (See esx. fr. Grk.
writ. [fr. Plato on] in Win. 1. c.) *
άνα-ζώνννμι: to gird up; mid. to gird up one's self or
for one's self: άναζωσάμίνοι τάί οσφύαι, 1 Pet. i. 13, i. e.
prepared, — a metaphor derived from the practice of the
Orientals, who in order to be unimpeded in their move-
ments were accustomed, when about to start on a jour-
ney or engage in any work, to bind their long and flow-
ing garments closely around their bodies and fasten them
with a leathern girdle ; cf. π€ριζώνημι. (Sept. Judg.
xviii. 16 ; Prov. xxix. 35 (xxxi. 17) ; Dio Chrys. or. 72,
2, ed. Emp. p. 729; Didym. ap. Athen. 4, (17) p. 139
d., al.)•
άνα-ζ<ι)ΐΓνρ<ω, -ω ; (ro ζά/ιτνρον i. e. a. the remains of
a fire, embers; h. that by which the fire is kindled
anew or lighted up, a pair of bellows) ; to kindle anew,
rekindle, resuscitate, [yet on the force of ava- cf. Ellic.
on 2 Tim. as below] ; generally trop., to kindle up, in-
fame, one's mind, strength, zeal, (Xen. de re equest. 10,
16 of a horse roused to his utmost; Hell. 5, 4, 46 ; An-
tonin. 7, 2 φαντασίας; Plut. Pericl. 1,4; Pomp. 41, 2;
49, 5 ; Plat. Charm, p. 156 d. ; etc.) : to χάρισμα, 2 Tim.
i. 6, i. e. TO πν(ϋμα, vs. 7. Intrans. to he enkindled, to
gain strength : Gen. xlv. 27 ; 1 Mace. xiii. 7, and in prof,
auth. ; άναζύίΤΓνρησάτω ή ττίστις, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 27, 3
[see Gebh. and Harn. ad loc.].*
άνα-βάλλω : 2 aor. άνίβάλον ; (Ps. xxvii. (xxviii.) 7 ;
Sap. iv. 4 ; very rare in Grk. writ, and only in the poets,
cf. Bttm. Ausf.'Spr. ii. p. 195 ; [Veitch s. v. θάΚλω ; W.
87 (83) ; B. 59 (52)]) ; to shoot up, sprout again, grow
green again, flourish again, (Horn. H. 1, 236; Ael. v. h.
5, 4) ; trop. of those whose condition and affairs are
becoming more prosperous : Phil. iv. 10 άνιθάλιτί το
vnep ϊμον φρονίΐν ye have revived so as to take thought for
me [the inf. being the Grk. accus., or accus. of specifica-
tion, Λν. 317 (298) ; cf. Ellic. ad loc.]. Others, ace. to
a trans, use of the verb found only in the Sept. (Ezek.
xvii. 24 ; Sir. i. 18, etc.), render ye have revived (allowed
to revive) your thought for me [the inf. being taken as an
object-acc, W. 323 (303) ; B. 263 (226) ; cf. Bp. Lghtft.
ad loc] ; against whom see Meyer ad loc.*
άνά-θ^μα, -ros, to, (i. q. το άνατΐθΐΐμίνον) ) 1. prop.
a tiling set up or laid by in order to be kept ; spec, a
votive offering, which after being consecrated to a god
was hung upon the walls or columns of his temple, or put
in some other conspicuous place : 2 Mace. ii. 13, (Plut.
Pelop. c. 25) ; Lk. xxi. 5 in L T, for άναθήμαοί R G Tr
WH ; for the two forms are sometimes confounded in the
codd. ; Moeris, ανάθημα αττικών, ανάθεμα (λληνικώς. Cf.
ΐπίβημα, (ττίθιμα, etc., in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 249 [cf. 445;
Paral. 417; see also ii/JSiits, Gram. L^^nters. p. 41]. 2.
ανάθεμα in the Sept. is generally the translation of the
Heb. Din, a thing devoted to God without hope of being
redeemed, and, if an animal, to be slain [Lev. xxvii. 28,
29] ; therefore a person or thing doomed to destruction,
Josh. vi. 17; vii. 12, etc. [AV. 32]; a thing abominable
and detestable, an accursed thing, Deut. vii. 26. Hence
in the X. T. ανάθεμα denotes a. a curse : άναθίματι άνα-
θιματίζίίν. Acts xxiii. 14 [ΛΥ. 466 (434) ; Β. 184 (159)].
b. a man accursed, devoted to the direst woes (i. q. «m-
κατάρατος) : άνάθίμα ΐστω. Gal. i. 8 sq. ; 1 Co. xvi. 22 ;
άναβ(μα XeyfiK τινά to execrate one, 1 Co. xii. 3 (R G,
but L Τ Tr WH have restored ανάθιμα Ίησοϋς, se. ίοτω) ;
άνάθιμα eivat άπο τοϋ Χριστοί), Ro. Lx. 3 (pregnantly i. q.
doomed and so separated yrom Christ). Cf. the full re-
marks on this word in Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 247
sqq. ; Wieseler on Gal. p. 39 sqq. ; [a trans, of the latter
by Prof. Riddle in Schaff's Lange on Rom. p. 302 Sijq. ;
see also Trench § v. ; Bp. Lightfoot on Gal. 1. c. ; EUi-
cott ibid. ; Tholuck on Rom. 1. c. ; BB.DD. s. w. Anath-
ema, Excommunication].*
όνο-β€μ.ατίίω ; 1 aor. avfufpariaa ; (άI'άθfμa. q. v.) ; a
purelv bibl. and eccl. word, to declare anathema or ac-
cursed ; in the Sept. i. q. Π"")ΠΠ to devote to de.^truction,
(Josh. vi. 21, etc. ; 1 Mace. v. 5) ; ίαυτόν to declare one's
άναθαωρίω
38
al•aκtφίl\awω
self liable to the severest divine penalties, Acts xxiii.
12, 21; άναθίματι άναβ€μ.ατίζ(ΐν (l)eut. xiii. 15; XX. 17,
[AV. § 54, ;i; B. Ib4 CI5y)J) iavrw foil, by inf., to bind
one's self under a curse to do sonielliiu^. Acts xxiii. 14.
absol., to asseverate with direful iin])recatious: Jlk. xiv.
71. [COMP. : κατ-αναθ(ματίζω.] '
όνα-θ€ο)ρί<ι), -ώ ; ])ro|(. ' to survey a series of tilings from
the lowest to the highest, Germ, damn hinselien, idnijit
durchsehen', [_lo look along up or throutjli], ( Win. De verb,
comp. Pt. iii. p. 3) ; hence to look at allentioelij, to observe
accurately, consider well : τΐ. Acts -xvii. 23 •, Ileb. xiii. 7.
(Diod. Sic. 12, 15 ίξ ίπιπο'Κψ μϊν θ(ωροϋμ(Ρ0! • • • άναθίω-
ρονμ€ΐ>οί dc και μ(τ' άκμιβίίιις (ξ(ταζόμ(ΐ/ος ; 14, 10!); 2,
5; Lcian. vit. auct. 2; necyom. 15; Plut. Aem. P. 1
[uncertain]; Cat. min. 14; [adv. Colot. 21, 2].)*
άνά-βημα, -TOf, τύ, {άρατίθημι,), a r/ift consecrated anil
laid up ill a temple, a volire oj/ering (see άνάθιμα, 1) : Lk.
xxi. 5 [RGTrWII]. (3 Mace. iii. 17; cf. Grimm on
2 Mace. iii. 2 ; κοσμ(Ίν άναθημασι occurs also in 2 Mace,
ix. 16; Plato, Alcib. ii. § 12, p. 148 e. άναθήμασΐ re «-
κοσμηκαμ€ν τα Upa αντων, Hdt. 1, 183 το μΐυ drj Upbv
οΰτω Κ(κόσμητίΐι • cart δί κα\ ιδία αναθήματα πολλά.)*
dvaCScia (Τ \\ΊΙ άναιδία; see Ι, ι), -as, η, {avai&rji, and
this fr. ή αιδώς a sense of shame) ; fr. Horn, down ;
skaynelessness, impudence : Lk. xi. 8 (of an importunate
man, persisting in his entreaties; [A. V. imporlunitij]).''
dv-aCpco-Ls, -6ωί, ή, (fr. άναιρίω, 2, q. v.), a destroying,
killing, murder, ' taking off ' : Acts viii. 1 ; xxii. 20 llec.
(Sept. only in Num. xi. 15; Judg. xv. 17; Jud. xv. 4 ;
2 Mace. V. 13. Xen. Hell. 6, 3, 5 ; Ildian. 2, 13, 1.)*
av-aipe'w, -ώ; fut. άι/(λώ, 2 Th. ii. 8 (L Τ Tr WH txt. cf.
Jud. vii. 13 ; Dion. Hal. 11,18; Diod. Sic. 2, 25 ; cf. W.
82 (78); [B. 53 (47); A'eitch s. v. α'ψίω, " perh. late
ίλώ"]), for the usual άναιρησω; 2 aor. avf'iKoV, 2 aor. mid.
άνιιΚόμην (but άνίΐΚατο -Vets vii. 21, aveWav Acts X. 39,
oi/iiXure Acts ii. 23, in G L Τ Tr W'll, after the Alex,
form, cf. W. 73 (71) sq. ; B. 30 (.M) sq. [see αΊρίω']);
Pass., pres. άι/αιμοίμα»; \ Άον. ανιιρίθην ; 1. to lake up,
to lifi up (from the ground) ; mid. lo take up for myself
as mine, to oim, (an exposed infant) : Acts vii. 21 ; (so
άναιρύσθαι. Arstph. nub. 531; Epict. diss. 1, 23, 7;
[Plut. Anton. 36, 3; fortiuia Rom. 8; fratern. am. 18,
etc.]). 2. to take airay, abolish ; a. ordinances, es-
tablished customs, (to abrogate) : Heb. .\. 9 : b. a man,
to put out of the tvay, slay, kill, (often so in Sept. and
Grk. writ. fr. [Ildt. 4, 66] Thuc. down) : Mt. ii. 16 ; Lk.
x.xii. 2 ; xxiii. 32 ; Acts ii. 23 ; v. 33, 36 ; vii. 28 ; ix. 23
sq. 29 ; x. 30 ; xii. 2; xiii. 28; xxii. 20; xxiii. 15, 21, 27;
XXV. 3 ; xxvi. 10 ; 2 Th. ii. 8 L Τ Tr WH txt. ; ίαντόν, to
kill one's self. Acts xvi. 27.•
av-aiTioSi -ov, (αίτια) guiltless, innocent: Mt. xii. 5, 7.
(Often in Grk. Λvrit.; Deut. xxi. 8 sq. i. q. 'pj; Sus. 62.)*
άνα-καθ-ίζω : 1 aor. avf κάθισα ; to raise one's self and
sit upright: lo sit up, sit erect: Lk. vii. 15 [Lchm. mrg.
WHmrg. ίκάθισίν}; Acts ix. 40. (Xen. cyn. 5, 7, 19;
Plut. Alex. c. 14 ; and often in medical writ. ; with
(αυτόν, Plut. Philop. c. 20 ; mid. in sume sense, Plat.
Phaedoc.3 p. COb.)'
άνα-καιν(ζω ; (καίχόί) ; to renew, renovate, (cf. Germ.
auffrischen) : τίνα fir μ(τάνοιαν so to renew that he shall
repent, Heb. vi. 6. (Isocr. Areop. 3 ; Philo, leg. ad Gaiura
§ 11 ; Jo.se])h. antt. 9, 8, 2; Plut. Marcell. c. 6 ; Lcian.
Philop. c. 12; Sept. Ps. cii. (eiii.) 5; ciii. (civ.) 30, etc.;
eecl. ivrit.) Cf. 117». De verb. com]). Pt. iii. p. 10.*
άνα-καινόω, -ώ : [pres. pass, άνακαινοΐμαι^ ; a word
peculiar to the apostle Paul ; prop, ta cause to grow up
(ανά) neip, to make new ; pass., new strength and vigor
is given to me, 2 Co. iv. 16 ; to be changed into a new
kind of life, o])posed to the former corrupt state. Col.
iii. 10. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 10 [or Jley.
on Cul. I.e.; Test. ,\ii. Patr., test. Levi 16, 17 ανακαινο-
ττούω. Cf. Kosllin in Herzog ed. 2, i. 477 sq.]•
άνα-καίνωσ-ις, -ίωτ, η, a renewal, renovation, comjilete
change for the better, (cf. άνακαινόω) : τοί νοόί. object, gen.,
Ro. xii. 2; ■πνιίματοί άγιου, efteeted by the Holy .Sjiirit,
Tit. iii. 5. (Ktym. Magn., Suid. ; [Ilerm. vis. 3, 8, 9 ;
other eccl. writ.] ; the simple καίνωσΐ! is found only in
Joseph, antt. 18, 6, 10.) [Cf. Trench § xviii.] *
άνα-καλνπτω : [Pass^ pres. ptcp. άνακα\υπτύμ(νος ; pf.
]Λι•\ι. άνακίκαλυμμίνος^; to unveil, to uncover (by
drawing back the veil), (i. q. TV)}, Job xii. 22 ; Ps. xvii.
(xviii.) 16) : κάΧυμμα . . . μη άνακα\υπτόμ€νορ the red . , .
not being lifted (lit. unveiled) [so WH punctuate, see
W. 534 (497); but L Τ Alf. etc. take the ptcp. as a
neut. ace. absol. referring to the clause that follows with
oTi : it not being revealed that, etc. ; (for άνακαλ. in this
sense see Polyb. 4, 85, 6 ; Tob. xii. 7, 11) ; see Meyer ad
loc], is used allegor. of a hindrance to the understand-
ing, 2 Co. iii. 14, (άνακαλΰπτΐΐν συγκάί^νμμα, Deut. .\,\ii.
30 Alex.) ; άνακίκαλυμμίνω προσώπω with unveiled face,
2 Co. iii. 18, is also used allegor. of a mind not blinded,
but disposed to perceive the glorious majesty of Christ.
(The word is used by Eur., Xen., [Aristot. de sens. 5,
vol. i. p. 444', 25], Polyb., Plut.)•
άνα-κάμπτω : fut. ανακάμψω; 1 aor. άνίκαμψα; to bend
back, turn back. In the N. T. (as often in prof. auth. ;
in Sept. i. q. 3'!!') intrans. to return: Mt. ii. 12; Lk.
X. 6 (where the meaning is, 'your salutation shall leturn
to you, as if not spoken ') ; Acts xviii. 21 ; Heb. xi. 15.*
άνά-κίΐμαι ; [imj)f. 3 pers. sing, ai/t'icfn-o] ; depon. mid.
to be laid up, lidil: Mk. v. 40 R Lbr. [cf. Eng. to lay ouQ-
In later iJrk. to lie at table (on the lectus tricliniaris [cf.
B.D. s. V. Meals] ; the earlier Greeks used κ(ΐσθαι, κατα-
κίίσθαι. of. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 216 sq. ; Fritzsehe [or
Wetst.] on Mt. ix. 10) : Mt. Lx. 10; xxii. 10 sq. ; xxvi.
7,20; Mk. [vi. 26TTrWH]; xiv. 18; xvi. 14; Lk. vii.
37 (LTTrWH κατάκ(ΐται) ; .xxii. 27; Jn. xii. 2 (Rec.
αυνανακ(ΐμ.) ; xiii. 23, 28. Generally, to eat together, to
dine: Jn. vi. 11. [Cf. άναττίπτω, fin. CoMP. : συν-ανά-
κξΐμαι.~\ *
άνα-κ€ψαλαιόω, -ώ : [pres. pass. άνακ(φα\αιοϋμαι ; 1 aor.
mid. inf. άνακ(φα\αιώσασθαι\ ', (fr. κίφαΧαιόω, q. v., and
this fr. κ(ψά\αιον, q. v.) ; to sum up (again), to repeat
summarily and so to condense into a summary (as, the
substance of a speech ; Quintil. 6. 1 ' rerum repetitio et
congregatio, quae graece άνακιφάΚαίωσΐ! dicitur ', [fpyox
άνακΚίνω
39
άνύ\υσί<ί
ρητορικής . . . άvaκfφa\aιώσaσθaι irpos άνάμνησιν, Aristot.
frag. 123, vol. v. p. 14!i;i', .'i.'S]) ; so in Ko. .\iii. '■>■ In
Eph. i. 10 God is said άνακίφαλαιώσασθαι τα πάντα iv τώ
Χριστώ, to bring together again for himself (note the
mid.) all things and beings (hitherto disunited by sin)
into one combined state of fellowsliip in Christ, the uni-
versal bond, [cf. Mey. or Ellic. on Eph. 1. c] ; (Protev.
Jac. 13 CIS 6/je άν(κ(φάΚαιώθη ή ιστορία Αδάμ, where cf.
Thilo).*
άνα-κλίνω : {ut. άνακλινω; 1 aor. άνίκλινα; Pass., 1 aor.
άνίκλίθψ; fut. άρακλιθήσομαι; [fr. Hom. down]; to lean
against, lean upon ; a. to lay down : τινά, Lk. ii. 7 («V
(t^) φάτντ)). b. to make or bid to recline : Mk. vi. .39
(fweTO^ev αϋτοΪΓ, sc. the disciples, άνακλϊναι [-κλιθηναι L
Wir txt.] πάντας l e. the people) ; Lk. ix 15 (T Tr WH
κατίκλιναν); xii. 37. Pass, to lie back, recline, lie down:
Alt. xiv. 1 9 ; of those reclining at table and at feasts,
Lk. vii. 36 (RG); xiii. 29; Mt. viii. II, — in the last
two pass, used fig. of participation in future blessedness
in the Messiah's kingdom.*
άνο-κόΐΓτω : 1 aor. άνίκοψα ; to beat bad; checl; (as the
course of a ship, Theophr. char. 24 (25), 1 [var.]) ;
τινά foil, by an inf. [A. V. hinder^. Gal. v. 7 Rec, where
the preceding (τρίχ(τ( shows that Paul was thinking of
an obstructed road ; cf. ί'γκόπτω.*
άνα-κράζω : 1 aor. [" rare and late," Λ'eitch s. v. κράζω ;
Β. ijl (.J3)] άν(κραξα; 2 aor. άνίκραγον (Lk. xxiii. 1« Τ
Trtxt. Wll) ; to raise a cry from the depth of the throat,
to crij out : Mk. i. 23 ; vi. 49 ; Lk. iv. 33 ; viii. 28 ; x.xiii.
18. Exx. fr. prof. auth. in Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt.
iii. p. 6 sq.*
άνα-κρίνω ; 1 aor. avt κρίνα ; Pass., [pres. ανακρίνομαι] ;
1 aor. άν€κρίθην ; (freq. in Grk. writ., esp. Attic) ; prop.
by looking throu(fh a series (ανά) of objects or particulars
to distinguish (κρίνω) or search afier. Hence a. to
investigate, examine, inquire into, scrutinize, sift, ques-
tion: Acts xvii. 11 (τάί γραφάς) ; 1 Co. χ. 2.J, 27 (not
anxiously questioning, sc. whether the meat set before
you be the residue from heathen sacrifices). Spec, in a
forensic sense (often also in Grk. writ.) of a judge, to
hold an investigation ; to interrogate, examine, the ac-
cused or the rvitnesses; absol.: Lk. xxiii. 14; Acts xxiv.
8. Tti /ά, Acts xii. 1 9 ; xxviii. 18; pass.. Acts iv. 9. Paul
has in mind this judicial use (as his preceding term
άποΚογία shows) when in 1 Co. ix. 3 he speaks of τοίί
(μι άνακρίνουσι. investigating me, whetlier I am a true
apostle. b. umv. to Judge of, estimate, determine (the
excellence or defects of any person or thing) : τι, 1 Co.
ii. 15 ; τικά, 1 Co. iv. 3 sq. ; pass., 1 Co. ii. [14], 15 ; xiv.
24. [Cf. Lghtfi. Fresh Revision, etc. iv. § 3 (p. 67 sq.
Am. ed.).]*
άνά-κριΐΓίς, -(ως, ή. an examination ; as a law-term
among the Greeks, the preliminary investigation held
for the purpose of gathering evidence for the informa-
tion of the judges (Meier and Schomann, Att. Process,
pp. 2", [622; cf. Diet, of Antiq. s. v.]); this seems to
be the sense of the word in Acts xxv. 26.•
ovorKvXC» : 1. to roll up. 2. to roll back : draice-
κύλισται ό λίθοι, Mk. xvi. 4 Τ Tr WH. (Alexis in Athen.
vi. p. 237 c. ; Lcian. de luctu 8 ; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.)*
ανα-κύιιτω : 1 aor. άνίκνψα ; to raise or lift one's self
up; a. one's body: Lk. xiii. 11; Jn. viii. 7, 10; (Xen.
de re equ. 7, 10, al. ; Sept. Job x. 15). b. one's soul;
to be elated, exalted: Lk. xxi. 28 ; (Xen. oec. 11, 5;
Joseph, b. j. 6, 8, 5, al.).*
άνα-λαμβάνω ; 2 aor. άνίλαβον ; 1 aor. pass. άνιΚήφθην
(άνίλήμφΰην LTTrWII; cf. W. p. 48 [B. 62 (54);
Λ'eitcll ( s. v. λαμβάνω) ; see λαμβάνω, and s. v. M, μ}) ; [fr.
Ildt. down] ; 1. to take up, raise : ds τον οΰρανόν, Mk.
xvi. 19; Acts i. 11 ; x. 16, (Sept. 2 K. ii. II) ; without
case, Actsi. 2, 22; 1 Tim. iii. 16 [cf. W. 413 (385)],
(Sir. xlviii. 9). 2. to take up (a thing in order to
carry or use it) : Acts vii. 43 ; Eph. vi. 13, 16. to take
to one's self: τινά, in order to conduct him. Acts xxiii.
31 ; or as a companion, 2 Tim. iv. 11 ; or in Acts xx. 13
sq. to take up sc. into the ship.*
άνά^ληψίϊ (άνάλημψις L Τ Tr WH ; see M, μ), -(ωϊ, η,
(αναλαμβάνω), [fr. Ilippocr. down], a taking up: Lk. ix.
51 (sc. €15 τον ονρανόν of the ascension of Jesus into
heaven ; [cf. Test. xii. Patr. test. Levi § 18 ; Suicer,
Thesaur. Eccles. s. v. ; and Meyer on Lk. 1. c.]).*
άν-αλί<Γκω : fr. the pres. άναλόω [3 pers. sing, άναλοι,
2 Th. ii. 8 WH mrg.] come the fut. αναλώσω ; I aor.
άνήλωσα and ανάλωσα [see Λ\■itch] ; I aor. pass, άνηλώ-
θην; (the sinqile verb is found only in the pass, άλίσκυμαι
to be taken ; but a in άλίσκομαι is short, in άνάΚίσκω
long; cf. Btlm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 113; [Veitch s. vv. ; "the
diff. quantity, the act. form, the trans, sense of the pf.,
and above aU the difference of sense, indicate a diff.
origin for the two verbs." L. and S.]) ; [fr. Pind.
down] ; 1. to expend ; to consume, e. g. χρήματα (to
spend money ; very often in Xen.). 2. to consume,
use up, destroy : Lk. ix. 54 ; Gal. v. 15 ; 2 Th. ii. 8 R G
WH mrg. (Sept. Jer. xxvii. (1.) 7 ; Prov. xxiii. 28 ; Gen.
xii. 30, etc.) [CoMP. : κατ-, προσ-αναλίσκω.^*
άναλο-γία, -as. ή. (ανάλογος conformable, [iroportional),
proportion : κατά την άναλο-γίαν rrji ττίστ^ως, i. q. κατά το
μίτρον πίστεως received from God, Ro. xii. 6, cf. 3.
(Plat., Dem., Aristot., Theophr., al.)*
dva-XoYC^o^ai : 1 aor. άν€λογισάμην ; dep. mid. to think
over, ponder, consider: commonly with ace. of the thing,
but in Heb. xii. 3 with ace. of the pers. ' to consider by
weighing, comparing,' etc. (3 Mace. vii. 7. Often in
Grk. writ. fr. Plat, and Xen. down.) *
αναλος, -ov, (αλς salt), saltless, unsalted, (άρτοι άναλοι,
Aristot. probl. 21, 5, 1 : SpTot avaXos. Plut. symp. v.
quaest. 10 § I) : SXas άναλον salt destitute of pungency,
Mk. Lx. 50.•
[αναλύω, see αναλίσκω.]
άνά-λυ(Γΐΐ, -(ως. ή, (αναλύω, q. v.): 1. an unloosing
(as of things woven), a dissolvltig (into separate parts).
2. departure, (a metaphor drawn from loosing from
moorings preparatory to setting sail. cf. Hom. Od. \5,
548 ; [or, ace. to others, fr. breaking up an encampment;
cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. i. 23]), (ierm. .4 ufbruch : 2 Tim.
iv. 6 (departure from Ufe ; Philo in Flacc. § 21 [p. 544
ίναΚυω
40
(ίνατταυω
ed- Mang.] ή ίκ τοΟ βίου τίλίντοία avά\υσ^s^, [Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 44, 5 tyKitpnov κ• TfKdav ίσχον την avaXvaif; Euseb.
h. e. 3, 32, 1 μαμτνρίω τον βίον άναλϋσαι, tf. 3, 34]. Cf.
draXi/ais άπο συνονσίαί, Joseph, antt. 19, 4, 1).*
άνα-λΰω : fut. αναλύσω ; 1 aor. avf\v<ra ; 1. fo un-
loose, undo again, (as, woven threads). 2. to depart,
Germ, aufbrechen, break up (see άνάλυσίΓ, 2), so very
often in Grk. writ. ; to depart from life : Phil. i. 23,
(Lcian. Philops. c. 14 όκτωκαιδίκα^τΐ]! i>v avtXvfv; add
Ael. V. h. 4, 23 ; [avfXvafv ό (ττίσκοττος Ώλάτων iv κνρίω.
Acta et mart. Matth. § 31]). to return, ex των γάμων,
Lk. xii. 36 [B. 145 (127); for exx.] cf. Kuinoel [and
Wetstein] ad loc. ; (irimm on 2 Mace. viii. 25.*
άνομάρτητο5, -ov, (fr. av priv. and the form άμαρτίω),
sinless, both one who has not sinned, and one tcho cannot
sin. In the former sense in Jn. viii. 7; Deut. xxLx. 19;
2 Mace. viii. 4; xii. 42; [Test. xii. Patr. test. Benj.
§ 3]. On the use of this word fr. Hdt. down, cf. Ult-
mann, Siindlosigkeit Jesu, p. 91 sq. [(abridged in) Eng.
trans, p. 99 ; Cremer s. v.].*
άνο-μί'νω ; [fr. Horn, down] ; τινά, to wait for one
((ierm. erharren, or rather heranharren [i. e. to await
one whose coming is known or foreseen]), with tiie
added notion of patience and trust: 1 Th. i. 10 [cf. El-
licott ad loc.]. Good Greek ; cf. Win. De verb. comp.
etc. Pt. iii. p. 15 sq.*
[άνα-μκ'ρα$, i. e. ava μίρος, see ανά, 1.]
[ονά-μίσ-ον, i. e. ava μίσον, see ανά, 1.]
ανα-μ.ι.μνή<Γκω ; fut. άναμνήσω (fr. the form μνάω) ; Pass.,
[pres. άναμιμνήσκομαι^ ; 1 aor. άνΐμνησθην ; [fr. Horn,
down] ; to call to remembrance, to remind : τινά Tt one of
a thing [W. § 32, 4 a.], 1 Co. iv. 17; to admonish, τινά
foU. by inf., 2 Tim. i. 6. Pass, to recall to one's own mind,
to remember; absol. : Mk. xi. 21. with gen. of the thing,
Mk. xiv. 72 Rec. τί, Mk. xiv. 72 L Τ Tr WH ; context-
ually, to (remember and) weigh well, consider: 2 Co. vii.
15;"Heb. x. 32; cf. W. § 30, 10 c; [B. § 132, 14];
Matth. ii. p. 820 sq. [Comp. : ΐπ-αναμιμνησκω. Syji.
see άνάμνησί! fin.]*
ΰ'άμνη(Γΐ$, -ίωί, η, (άναμιμνήσκω), a remembering, recol-
lection : (ΐς τ. ^μην άνάμνησιν to call me (affectionately)
to remembrance, Lk. xxii. 19 [WH reject the pass.] ; 1 Co.
xi. 24 sq. €v avTals (sc. θνσίαις) άνάμνησις αμαρτιών in
offering sacrifices there is a remembrance of sins, i. e.
the memory of sins committed is revived by the sacri-
fices, Heb. X. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. Plat, down.*
[Stn. ανάμν-ησί!, υπόμνησί! : The tlistinction between these
words a.s stated by Ammonius et al. — viz. that ανάμν. denotes
an unassisted recalling, ΐπτόμν. a remembrance prompted by
auotber, — seems to be not wholly without warrant ; note
the force of υπό (cf. our ' surj-^est '). But even in class. Grk.
the ivords are easily interchanpeable. Schmidt ch. 14;
Trench § cvii. 6, cf. p. 61 note; Ellic. or Holtzm. on 2 Tim.
i.5.]
άνα-ν^όω, -ω : ίο reneic, (often in Grk. writ.) ; Pass. [W.
§ 39, 3 N. 3 ; for the mid. has an act. or reciprocal
force, cf. 1 Mace. xii. 1 and Grimm ad loc] άνανιοϋσθαι
τώ ττνΐύματι to be renewed in mind, i. e. to be spiritually
transformed, to take on a new mind [see vois, 1 b. fin. ;
nvfif-a, fin.], Eph. iv. 23. Cf. Tittm»nn i. p. 60 ; [Trench
§§ Ix. xviii.], and άνακαινόω above."
άνα-νήψω : [' in good auth. apparently confined to the
pres.'; 1 aor. ανίνηψα^; to return to soberness (f'/c μίθη!,
which is added by Grk. writ.) ; metaph. : 2 Tim. ii. 26
(K της τοϋ διαβόλου παγίδοί [W. § 66, 2 d.] to be set free
from the snare of the devil and to return to a sound mind
[' one's sober senses ']. (Philo, legg. alleg. ii. § 1 6 Avar
vήφfι, τοϋτ ϊστι μ(τανού; add Joseph, antt. C, 11. 10;
Ceb. tab. 9; Antonin. 6, 31; Charit. 5, 1.) [See άγρυ-
τινίω, fin.] *
'Avavias [WH. Άναν., see their Intr. § 408], -a [but on
the gen. cf. B. 20 (18)], ό, Ananias (Π -Jjn, fr. [jn to be
gracious, and ΓΤ Jehovah, [cf. Mey. on Acts v. 1]):
1. a certain Christian [at Jerusalem], the husband of
Sapphira: Acts v. 1-6. 2. a Christian of Damascus:
Acts ix. 10-18 ; xxii. 12sqq. 3. a son of Nedebaeus,
and high priest of the Jews c. A. D. 47-59. In the year
66 he was slain by the Sicarii : Acts xxiii. 2 sq. ; xxiv.
1 sq. ; Joseph, antt. 20, 5,2; 6, 2 ; 9,2-4; b. j. 2, 1 7, 6 ;
9. [Cf. B. D. s. v.] •
άν-οντ£-ρρητθ5 [AVH άναντίρητο!', see P, p], -ov, (a priv.,
άντϊ, and ρητΟ! fr. ΡΕΩ to say), not contradicted and not
to be contradicted ; undeniable, [noi to be gainsaid'^ ; in the
latter sense. Acts xix. 36. (Occasionally in Grk. writ,
fr. Polyb. down.)*
αναντιρρήτως [WH άναντιρητως, see their App. p. 163,
and P, p], adv., without contradiction : Acts x. 29 (I came
without gainsaying). Polyb. 23, 8, 11, [al.].*
άν-άξιο;, -ov, (a priv. and άξιος), [fr. Soph, down], un-
worth// (τινός) : unfl for a thing, 1 Co. vi. 2.*
άι^«ξlω$, adv., [fr. Soph, down], in an unworthy man-
ner : 1 Co. xi. 27, and 29 Rec. [Cf. W. 463 (431).] *
afa.^avai$, -ίωί, η, (αναπαύω), [fr. Mimnerm., Pind.
down] ; X. intermission, cessation, of any motion, busi-
ness, labor : άνάπαυσιν οΰκ ίχουσι λίγοντίς [Rec. λίγοντα}
equiv. to ουκ αναπαύονται λίγυντίς they incessantly say.
Rev. iv. 8. 2. rest, recreation : Mt. xii. 43 ; Lk. xi.
24; Rev. xiv. 11, (and often in Grk. writ.); blessed
tranquillity of soul, Mt. xi. 29, (Sir. vi. [27] 28 ; Ii. 27 ;
Sap. iv. 7). [The word denotes a temporary rest, a
respite, e. g. of soldiers ; cf. Schmidt ch. 25 ; Bp. Lghtft.
on Philem. 7 ; Trench § xh.] *
άνα-ιι-ανω : fut. αναπαύσω : 1 aor. άνίπαυσα ; pf. pass.
άναπ('πανμαι ; Mid., [pres. αναπαύομαι^ ; fut. άναπαύσομαι
(Rev. vi. 11 [Lchm. ed. min., Tdf. edd. 2, 7, WH ; but
G L Τ Tr with R -σωνται]), and in the colloquial sjieech
of inferior Grk. άναπαήσομαι (Rev. xiv. 13 LTTrWH,
cf. Bttm. (57) esp. Eng. trans, p. 64 sq. ; Kuhner i. 886 ;
[Tilf. Proleg. p. 123; ΤΓ//. App. p. 170]; see also in
ΐπαναπαύω); 1 aor. άν^παυσάμην ; (a common verb fr.
Hom. down) : to cause or permit one to cease from any
movement or labor in order to recover and collect his
strength (note the prefix άνά and distinguish fr. κατα-
τταύω, [see άνάπαυσις, fin.]), to gi>:e rest, refresh; mid. to
(jive one's self rest, lake rest. So in mid. absol. of rest after
travelling, IHk. vi. 31 ; and for taking sleep, Mt. xxvi.
45 ; Mk. xij. 41 ; of the sweet repose one enjoys after
avaTreiVo)
ίθα
41
ανάσταση
toil, Lk. χϋ. 19 ; to keep quiet, of cahn and patient expec-
tation, Rev. vi. 11; of the blessed rest of the dead,
Rev. xiv. 13 (tK των κόπων exempt from toils [cf. B. 158
(138)]; Plat.Critiasin. ίκμακράίόδοΟ). By a Hebraism
("7^' nij, Isa. xi. 2) TO πνίϋμα (φ' νμάί αναπαύεται rests
upon jou, to actuate you, 1 Pet. iv. 14. Act. to refresh,
the soul of any one : τινά, Mt. xi. 28 ; to πνεϋμά Ttvos,
1 Co. xvi. 18; τα σπλάγχνα τινός. Pliilem. 20. In pass.,
Philem. 7; 2 Co. vii. 13 (άπο πάντων υμών from your
sight, attentions, intercourse). [CoMP. : ε'π-, <ni>/- (-/xai)•]*
άνα-^Μω; to stir up by persuasion (cf. Germ, aufreizen),
to solicit, incite : τινά τι ποιησαι, Acts xviii. 13. So also
in Hdt., Thuc, Plat., Xen., al.»
άνάτΓίΐροϊ, a false spelling (arising from itacism, [cf.
Phrvn. in Bekker, Anecd. i. p. 9, 22 : δια toC η την
τρίτην, oil δίά της et διφθόγγου ως οι αμαθ€ίς~\ ) in some
Mss. in Lk. xiv. 13. 21 (and adopted by L Tr WH ; [see
WH. Ap]). p. 151]) for ανάπηρος, q. v.
άνα-η-ίμιτω : 1 aor. ανέπεμψα ; [fr. Pind. and Aeschyl.
down] ; 1. to send up ; i. e. a. to a higher place ;
b. to a person higher in office, authority, power, (Pint.
Marius c. 1 7 ; [Philo de creat. princip. § 8 ; Joseph, b. j.
2, 20, 5]) : τινά προς τίνα, Lk. xxiii. 7, 15 ; Acts xxv. 21
LTTrWIL 2. to send back; τινά, Philem. 12(11);
τινά Tiin, Lk. xxiii. 11.•
άνα-ιτηΒάω : [1 aor. ptcp. άΐΌττηδήσαί] ; (Horn. Π. H,
379 ; often in Plat., Xen., Dem.) ; to leap up, spring up,
start up : άναπηδησας, ilk. x. 50 L Τ Tr WH ; cf. Fritzsche
ad loc. (1 S. XX. 34 ; Prov. xviii. 4 [Aid. etc.] ; Tob.
ii. 4 ; vi. 3 ; vii. 6.)•
άνά-πηροΐ, -ov. (prop. 7π)ρ09 fr. the lowest part to the
highest — ανά ; hence Suid. 6 xaff νπερβο\ην πιπηρωμίνος,
[cf. Lob. Path. Elementa i. 195]), disabled in the limbs,
maimed, crippled; injured in, or bereft of, some member
of the body : Lk. xiv. 13, 21 ανάπηρους, χωΧονς, τνφΧονς.
In both these pass. L Tr WH have adopted with certain
Mss. the spelling άναπίίρους — manifestly false, as aris-
ing from itacism. (Plat. Critop. 53 a. ;(ωλο( και τυφ\ο\
καϊ άλλοι ανάπηροι : Aristot. h. a. 7, 6 [vol. i. p. 585',
29 γίνονται ςξ ανάπηρων άνάττηροι ; Lys. ap. Suid. ptva κα\
Ζ>τα ανάπηρος '. 2 Mace. \\ϊ\. 24 τοΐ? μίλεσιν ανάπηρους.')*
άνο-^ίτΓτω: 2 aor. άνίπεσον, 3 pers. plur. άνϊπισον Mk.
vi. 40 (TTrWH άνέπεσαν): Jn. vi. 10 (LTTrAVH
άνίπεσαν). inf. άναπεσύν. impv. άνάπισι Lk. xiv. 10 (Rec.
άνάπεσον fr. 1 aor. άνεπεσα, [(Grsb. άνάπεσαι i. e. 1 aor.
mid. impv.)]) ; Lk. xvii. 7 [RG άνάπεσαι, cf. WH. App.
p. 164; T'i//". Proleg. p. 123; see πίπτωΐ, \>tcp. άναπεσών ;
cf. W. § 13, 1 p. 73 (71) ; [B. 39 (34) sq., 67 (59) ; fr.
Eur. down] ; to lie back; lie down : absol., Mk. vi. 40 ;
Jn. vi. 10, (sc. on the ground) ; eVl τηνγην, Mt. xv. 35 ; (Vt
της γης, Mk. viii. 6. In later Grk. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 216 ; [W. 23 (22)]) for άνακλίνομαι to recline at table :
Lk. xi. 37 ; xiv. 10 ; .xvii. 7 ; xxii. 14 ; Jn. xiii. 12 ; x.xi.
20 [al. refer this to the following signif.]. to lean back;
Jn. xiii. 25 L Tr WH. [It denotes an ac t rather than a
state, and in the last pass, differs from άνάκειμαι, vs. 23,
by indicating a change of position.]'
άνα-πληρόω, -ω; fut. αναπληρώσω; 1 aor. αναπλήρωσα;
[pres. pass, άναπληροϋμαι] ; (άι/ά to, up to, e. g. to fill a
vessel up to the brim ; up to the appointed measure or
standard, Germ, anfiillen); [fr. Eurip. down]; 1.
to fill up, make full, e. g. a ditch (Strabo 5, 6 p. 223) ;
hence trop. αμαρτίας, 1 Th. ii. 16 (to add what is stiU
wanting to complete the number of their sins ; on the
meaning, cf. Gen. xv. 16 ; Dan. viii. 23 ; Lx. 24 ; Mt. xxiii.
32; 2 Mace. vi. 14). άναπληροϋται ή προφητεία the
prophecy is fully satisfied, the event completelv corre-
sponds to it, Mt. xiii. 14. roc νόμον to fulfil i. e. observe
the law perfectly, Gal. vi. ?, (Barn. ep. 21 ά^πλ. πάσα»
έντολήν) ; τον τέητον τινός to fill the place of any one,
1 Co. xiv. 1 6 (after the rabbin. Dipo N^p to hold the
position of any one, [yet cf. Aley. ad loc.]). 2. to
supply : το υστέρημα, Phil. ii. 30, (Col. i. 24) ; 1 Co. xvi. 1 7
(they by their presence supplied your place in your ab-
sence) ; cf. Plat. symp. p. 188 e. άλλ' εΙ τι εξέλιπαν, σον
έργον (sc. εστίν) άναπληρώσαι. Cf. Win. De verb,
comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 11 sq. ; [EUic. on Phil. 1. c, or Mey.
on Gal. 1. c. CoMP. : άντ-, προσ-αναπληρόωΐ."
άναπολό^το5ι -ov, icithout defence or excuse, Ro. i. 20 ;
also that cannot be defended, inexcusable, Ro. ii. 1.
(Polyb., Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 46 ; Plut. Brut. 46, al.) *
«ια^τΓΓύσσω : 1 aor. ανέπτυξα; (ανά — cf. the Germ, auf
i. q. auseinander, see αναλύω — and πτύσσω to fold up,
roU together) ; to unroll, [i. e. open for reading] : το
βιβλίον (as in Hdt. 1, 48 and 125), Lk. iv. 17 [RGT],
(2 K. xix. 14). The books of the Hebrews were rolls
(jIlSj•?) fastened to [one or] two smooth rods and fur-
nished with handles, so that they could be rolled up and
unrolled; [cf. B. D. s. v. Writing].*
άν-άΐΓτω ; 1 aor. άνήψα ; 1 aor. pass, άνήφθην ; to tight
up, kindle : Lk. xii. 49 ; Acts .vxviii. 2 [R G] ; Jas. iii. 5.
[From Hdt. down.] •
αν-αρίθμητθ5, -ov, (a priv. and άριθμέω), innumerable :
Heb. xi. 12. [From Pind. down.]*
άνα-σ^ί» ; 1 aor. άνέσεισα ; to shake up ; trop. to stir
up, excite, rouse : τον οχλον, Mk. xv. 1 1 ; τον λαόν, Lk.
xxiii. 5. (So in Diod. 13, 91 ; 14, 10; Dion. Hal. antt.
8, 81.)*
άνα-ο-κευάζω ; (σκευάζω, fr. σκεύος a vessel, utensil) ;
1. to pack up baggage (Lat. vasa colligere) in order to
carry it away to another place: Xen. an. 5, 10, (6, 2) 8.
Mid. to move one's furniture (when setting out for some
other place, Xen. C_\t. 8, 5, 4 όταν 8ε άνασκευάζωνται,
σνντίθησι μεν έκαστος τα σκεύη) ; hence 2. of an
enemy dismantling, plundering, a place (Thuc. 4, 116);
to overthrow, ravage, destroy, towns, lands, etc. ; trop.
ψνχάς, to turn away violently from a right state, to un-
settle, subvert : Acts xv. 24.*
άνα-σπάω, -ώ : ανασπάσω; 1 aor. pass. ά«στΓα'σΛ;ΐ'; to
druirup: Lk. xiv. 5 ; Acts xi. 10. [From Horn, down.]*
ova-o-rouriSi -εως, η, (ανίστημι), [fr. Aeschyl. down] ;
1. a raiding up, rising, (e. g. fr. a seat) : Lk. ii. 34 (opp.
to πτώσΐΓ; the meaning is 'It lies [or 'is set' A. Λ".]
like a stone, which some will lay hold of in order to
cUmb; but others will strike against it and fall'). 2.
a rising from the dead (eccl. Lat. resurrectio), [AeschyL
αναστατοω
42
άνατίθημι
Eum. C48]; a. that of Christ : Acts i. 22; ii.31; iv.
33 ; Ro. vi. 5 ; Phil. iu. 10 ; 1 Pet. iii. 21 ; Λvith the addi-
tion of vcKpaiv, Ro. i. 4 (a generic phrase : Ihe remrrection-
uf-lhc-iUiiil, althoiij;h it has come to pass as yet only in
the case of Christ alone; cf. Acts xvii. 32; W. § 30, 2 a.
fin.); cK νικρών. 1 Pet. i. 3. b. that of all men at the
end of till• jirescnt age. This is called simply άνάστασι:
or ή άνάστασίί. Mt. xxii. 23, [28], 30; Mk. xii. 18, 23;
I.k. XX. 27, 33, 3G ; Jn. xi. 24; Acts xvii. 18; xxiii. 8; 2
Tim. ii. 18 ; by melon, i. q. the author of resurrection, Jn.
xi. 25; with the addition of ή ck νικρων, Lk. xx. 3.") ; Acts
iv. 2 ; or simply of τώχ νεκρών [on the distinction which
some (e. g. Van Hengel on Ro. i. 4 ; Van Ilengel and Bp.
Lghlft. on Phil. iii. 1 1 ; Cremer s. v.) would make between
tircse phrases, see W. 123 (117); B. 89 (78)], Mt. xxii.
31; Acts xvii. 32; xxiii. 6 ; xxiv. 15 [Rec], 21 ; xxvi.
23 ; 1 Co. XV. 12 S(i. 21, 42 ; Ileb. vi. 2. άνάστ. ζωη! res-
urrection to life (of. fit ζωψ, 2 Mace. vii. 14 [cf. Dan. xii.
2]), and av. TJjs κρίσεως resurrection to judgment, Jn. v.
29, (on the genitives cf. W. 188 (177)) ; the former is ή
άνάστ. των δικαίων, Lk. xiv. 14 ; κρί'ιττων άνάστασις, Ileb.
xi. 35 (so called in comparison witli a continuance of life
on earth, which is spoken of as an ανύσταπί! by a kind of
license; [cf. AV. 460 (429)]). 17 άνάστ. ή πρώτη in Rev.
XX. 5 sip will be tliat of true Christians, and at the end
of a thousand years will be followed by a second resur-
rection, that of all the rest of mankind, Rev. xx. 12 sqq.
On the ipiestion whether and in what sense Paul also
believed in two resurrections, separated from each other
by a definite space of time, cf. Grimm in the Zeitschr.
fur wissenschaftl. Theol., 1873, p. 388 sq. c. the res-
urrection of certain in ancient Jewish story who were
restored to life before burial : Heb. xi. 35.*
άναστατόω, -ώ ; 1 aor. άνιστάτωσα ; a verb found no-
where in prof, auth., but [in Dan. vii. 23 Sept. ; Deut.
xxix. 27 Graec. A'enet.] several times in the O. T. frag-
ments of Aijuila [e. g. Ps. x. 1] and Symmachus [e. g.
Ps. Iviii. 11 ; Is. xxii. 3], and in Eustatliius, (fr. ανάστατος,
driven from one's abode, outcast, or roused up from
one's situation ; accordingly equiv. to άνάστατον ποιώ),
to slir up, excite, unsettle ; foil, by an ace. a. to excite
tumults and seditions in the State : Acts xvii. 6 ; xxi.
38. b. to upset, unsettle, minds by disseminating
religious error: Gal. v. 12.*
ώα-<ΐΓταυρ<ίω, -c5 ; to raiae up upon a crons, crucify, (ανά
as in άνασκολοπίζω) : Heb. vi. 6, (very often in Grk.
writ. fr. Ildt. down). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt.
iii. p. 9 sq. ; [Winer admits that in Heb. 1. c. the meaning
to crucify ai/ain, or a/rexli, may also be assigned to this
Terb legitimately, and that the absence of a precedent
in prof. writ, for such a sense is, from the nature of the
case, not surprising].*
)ΐνα-<ΓΤ(νάζω : 1 3.or. άΐ'ΐστίναξα; to draiD siffh.'! up from
the bottom of the breast, to sigh deeply: Mk. viii. 12.
(Lam. i. 4; Sir. xxv. 18 (17); 2 5Iacc. vi. 30, and in
Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. choeph. 33."..] Hdt. 1, 86 down.)*
άνα-στρίφω ; fut. άΐΌσ7-ρ{'ψ•ίι); [1 aor. άκίστρίΐ/Ό; Pass.,
pres. άναστρίφομαι^ ; 2 aor. άνιστράφην ; 1. to turn
upside down, overturn : τάί τραπίζας, Jn. ii. 15, (δι'φρουί,
Horn. E. 23, 436). 2. to turn back; intrans. [W.
251 (236)] to return, like the Lat. reverto i. q. reverter,
(as in Grk. writ. ; in Sept. i. q. 2W) : Acts v. 22 ; xv.
16 (here ακαστρίψω και has not like the Hebr. 3'i? the
force of an advcM-bj <ii/(iin, but God in the ^lessiah's
advent returns to his people, whom he is conceived of
as having previously abandoned ; cf. W. 469 (437)).
3. to turn hither and thither; pass, reflexively, to turn
one's self about, sojourn, dwell, iv in a place ; a. liter-
ally : Mt. xvii. 22, where L Τ WH Tr txt. συστριφομίνων,
cf. Keim ii. p. 581 [Eng. trans, iv. p. 303]. (Josh. v. 5 ;
Ezek. xix. 6, and in Grk. writ.) b. Uke the Hebr.
■^Sn to walk, of the manner of life and moral character,
to conduct one's self, behave one's self live: 2 Co. i. 12
{ev τω κόσμω) \ 1 Tim. iii. 15 {iv οΧκω θ€θν) ; Eph. ii. 3
(ivols among whom); 2 Pet. ii. IS (iv πΧάντ]). simply
to conduct or behave one's si//'. ' wall- ', (Germ, wandeln) :
1 Pet. i. 17 ; Heb. x. 33 ; (καλώς) xiii. 18. [Cf. its use
e. g. in Xen. an. 2, 5, 14 ; Polyb. 1, 9, 7 ; 74, 13 ; 86, 5
etc., (see ανάστροφη, fin.) ; Prov. xx. 7 Sept. ; Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 21, 8; etc.]*
όνα-<Γτροφή, -ης, ή, (fr. the pass, άναστρίφομαι, see the
preceding word), prop. ' walk;' i. e. manner of life, be-
havior, conduct, (Germ. Lebenswandel) : Gal. i. 13; Eph.
iv. 22; 1 Tim. iv. 12; Jas. iii. 13; 1 Pet. i. 15, 18; ii. 12;
iii. 1 sq. 16 ; 2 Pet. ii. 7 ; plur. Sytai ανάστροφοι the ways
in which holy living shows itself, 2 Pet. iii. 11. Hence
life in so far as it is comprised in conduct, Heb. xiii. 7.
(This word, in the senses given, is found in Grk. writ.
fr. Polyb. 4, 82, 1 down ; in the Scriptures first in Tob.
iv. 14; 2 Mace. v. 8; add Epiet. diss. 1, 9, 5; 4, 7, 5,
[and (fr. Soph. hex. s. v.) Agatharchides 134, 12; 153,
8; Aristeas 16].)*
άνα-τάσ•<Γθ(ΐαι ; [1 aor. mid. inf. ανατάξασθαι] ; (mid.
of ανατάσσω), to put together in order, arrange, compose :
διή-γησιν. Lk. i. 1 (so to construct [R. V. draw ιφ] a nar-
rative that the sequence of events may be evident.
Found besides only in Plut. de soUert. anim. c. 12, where
it denotes to go regularly through a thing again, re-
hearse it ; [in Eecl. ii. 20 Aid., and in eccl. writ. e. g.
ten. 3, 21, 2 sub fin.]).*
άνα-τίλλω; 1 aor. avf τίΐλα ; γ>{. άνατίτάΚκα; a. trans.
to cause to rise : roi- riXiov. Mt. v. 45, (of the earth bring-
ing forth plants. Gen. iii. 18; of a river producing
something, Hom. R. 5, 777). b. intrans. to rise, arise :
light, Mt. iv. 16, (Is. Iviii. 10) ; the sun, Mt. xiii. 6 ; Mk.
iv. 6 ; xvi. 2 ; Jas. i. 11 ; the clouds, Lk. .xii. 54 ; φωσφό-
ρος, 2 Pet. i. 19. trop. to rise from, be descended from,
Heb. vii. 14. The earlier Greeks commonly used ava-
TeWfiv of the sun and moon, and eVn-cXXfiv of the stars;
but Aelian., Pans., Stob. and other later writ, neglect
this distinction ; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 124 sq. [CoMP. :
(ζ-ανατζ\'Κω.~\ *
άνα^ίθημ.1 : 2 aor. mid. αν^θίμην : [in various senses fr.
Hom. down] ; in the mid. voice to set forth a thing
drawn forth, as it were, from some corner {ανά), to set
forth [in words], declare, [R. V. lay before'\ : τινί τι, Acts
άνατοΧή
43
ΑνΒρόνικος
XXV. 14 ; Gal. ϋ. 2, (2 Maec. iii. 9 ; [Mic. νϋ. 5] ; Artem.
oneir. 2, 64 τιιίι το Svap; Diog. Laert. 2, 17, 16 p. 191
ed. Heubn. I Plut. amat. narr. p. 772 d.) Cf. Fritzschio-
rum Opuscc. p. 1C9 ; \_Holslcn, Zum Evang. des Paulus
u. d. Petrus p. 256 sq. Comp. : προσ-ανατίβημι.^ *
ανατολή, -ης, ή, (fr. ανατέλλω, q. v.), as iu Grk. writ. ;
1. a rising (of the sun and stars) ; light rising e| C^ous,
Lk. i. 78. 2. t?ie east (the quarter of the sun's ris-
ing) : Mt. ii. 2, 9 ; Rev. xxi. 13 (Grsb. άρατοΚών) ; Ildian.
2, 8, 18 (10) ; 3, 5, 1 ; Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 14, 3, [6 ; 1, 26,
6 ; Mk. xvi. AVH (rejected) ' Shorter Conclusion '] ; Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 6; Ignat. ad Ro. 2, 2; Melito ap. Euseb.
h. e. 4, 26, 14 ; with ήλΙου added, Rev. vii. 2 [R G Τ Tr
Wli t.xt.] ; Plur. eastern regions, the east, [W. 1 76 (166)] :
Mt. ii. 1 ; viii. 11 ; xxiv. 27 ; Lk. xiii. 29, (Sept., Hdt.,
Plat., Polyb., Plut., al. ; Philo in Flacc. § 7) ; with the
addition of ήλίον, Rev. xvi. 12 \_-λης Τ Tr txt. WH txt. ;
vii. ■> L Wll mi-g.].*
ava-Tpe'iru ; [1 aor. άνετρ«(/α\ ; to overthrow, overturn, dt
stray: [τάς τραττίζας, Jn. ii. 15 WH txt.] ; ethically, to sub
tert: οίκους families, Tit. i. 11. tIjv τίνων πίστιν, 2 Tim.
ii. 18. (Common in Grk. writ., and in the same sense.)*
αναθρέφω : 2 aor. pass, άνιτράφην ; pf. pass. ptcp. ava-
Tfepappevos; 1 aor. mid. ai'f^^f\|/u/ii)>'; to nurse up, nour-
ish up, (Germ, aufnaliren, aufjiUtern) ; prop, of young
children and animals nourished to promote their growth
(Xen. mem. 4, 3, 10, etc. ; Sap. vii. 4) ; to briny up : Lk.
iv. 16 Τ λΥΗ mrg. ; Acts vii. 20 sq. ; with the predomi-
nant idea of forming the mind. Acts xxii. 3, (4 Mace.
X. 2, and often in Grk. writ.). Cf. Win. De verb. comp.
etc. Pt. iii. p. 4.*
άνα-ψαίνω : 1 aor. ανίφανα, Doric for the more com.
άνίφηνα, (Acts xxi. 3 U Τ WII [with Erasm., Steph.,
Mill] ; cf. Passow p. 2199 ; [A'citch, and L. and S., s. v.
φαίνω; ΛΥ. 89 (85); Β. 41 (35)]; see ϊπιφαίνω) ; Pass.,
[pres. αναφαίνομαι^ ; 2 aor. άνιφάνην ; [fr. Hom. down] ;
to hriitf/ to liylil, liold up to rieu; show. Pass, to appear,
he mu'le apparent: Lk. xix. 11. An unusual phrase is
άναφανΐντις την Κύιτρον having sighted Cyprus, for άναφα-
νιίσηί ήμίν τη! Κύπρου, Acts .xxi. 3 ; cf. Β. 190 (164) ; W.
§ 39, 1 a. p. 260 (244) ; here R" Τ WH [see above] read
άναφάναντα την Κ. after we had rendered Cyprus visible
(to us) ; [K. V. hnil come in sight of Cyprus-I*
άνα-φε'ρω ; fut. άνοίσω (Lev. xiv. 20 ; Num. xiv. 33,
etc.) ; 1 aor. άvήvfγκa ; 2 aor. ά}^ήν(γκον : [see refP. s. v.
φίρω; impi. pass. ην(φ(ρόμην; fr. Horn, down]; 1. to
carry or bring up, to lead up ; men to a higher place :
Mt. xvii. 1 ; Mk. L\. 2 ; pass., Lk. xxiv. 51 [Tdf. om. ΛΥΗ
reject the cl.]. άναφίριιν Tas αμαρτίας ίπι το ξύΧον, 1 Pet.
ii. 24 (to bear sins up on the cross, sc. in order to expi-
ate them by suffering death, [cf. W. 428 sq. (399)]). 2.
to put upon the altar, to bring to the altar, to offer, (Sept.
for 7\hj;T\ of presentation as a priestly act, cf. Kurtz
on Hebr. p. 154 sq.), θυσίας, θυσίαυ. etc., (Isa. Ivii. 6,
etc.): Heb. vii. 27; xiii. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 5; with eVi το
θυσιαστηριον added, Jas. ii. 21, (Gen. viii. 20 ; Lev. xiv.
20; [Bar. i. 10; 1 Alacc. iv. 53]) ; [«'αυτ^, Heb. vii. 27,
Τ Tr mrg. WH mrg. 7rpoff£«'yicar]. Cf. Kurtz u. s. 3.
to lift up on one's self, to take upon one's self, i. e. to place
on one's self anything as a load to be upborne, to sus-
tain: Tas αμαρτίας i. e. by meton. their punishment, Heb.
ix. 28 (Is. liii. 12; την πορν^ίαν, Sum. xiv. 33); cf. Win.
De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 5 sq.*
άνα-ψωνΕω, -ώ : 1 aor. άν(φώνησα ; to cry out with a loud
voice, call aloud, exclaim: Lk. i. 42. (1 Chr. xv. 28 ; .xvi.
4; [Aristot. de mund. C, vol. i. p. 400", 18]; Polyb.,
often in Plut.)*
όνά-χυσΐ5ι -(ως, ή. (άναχίω [to pour forth]), rare in Grk.
writ. [Strabo, Philo, Plut. ; άν. ψυχής, in a good sense,
Philo de decal. § 10 mid.]; an overflowing, a pouring
out : metapb., 1 Pet. iv. 4 ασωτίας άνάχνσις the excess
(flood) of riot in which a dissolute life pours itself
forth.•
όνα-χωρ<'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. άνιχώρησα ; (freq. in Grk. writ.) ;
1. to go back; return : Mt. ii. 1 2 S(j. [al. refer this to next
head]. 2. to withdraw; a. univ., so as to leave room :
Mt. ix. 24. b. of those who through fear seek some
other place, or shun sight : Mt.ii. 14,22; iv.l2; .xii. 15;
xiv. 13; XV. 21 ; xxvii. 5; Mk. iii. 7; Jn. vi. 15 [Tdf.
^fvyet] ; Acts xxiii. 19 (κατ ιδίαν) ; xxvi. 31.*
άι>ά-ψυξι$, -(ως. ή. (άναψΰχω, q. v.), a cooling, refresh-
ing : Acts iii. 20 (19), of the Messianic blessedness to be
ushered in by the return of Christ from heaven ; Vulg.
refrigerium. (Ex. viii. 15; Philo de Abr. § 29 ; Strabo
10, p. 459 ; and in ecd. writ.)*
άνα-ψνχω : 1 aor. άνίψυξα ; to cool again, to cool off,
recover from the effects of heat, (Hom. Od. 4, 568; Ώ. S,
795 ; Plut. Aem. P. 25, etc.) ; trop. to refresh : τινά, one's
spirit, by fellowship, consolation, kindnesses, 2 Tim. i.
16. (intrans. to recover breath, take the air, cool off, re-
vive, refresh one's self, in Sept. [Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 14;
2 S. xvi. 14 ; Ex. xxiii. 12: 1 S. xvi. 23 ; etc., in] 2 Mace,
iv. 46 ; xiii. 11 ; and in the later Grk. writ.)*
ανδραίΓοδιστής, -ov. ό, (fr. άv^pa^τoδίζω, and this fr. το
άν8ράπο8ον — fr. άνήρ and πους — a slave, a man taken in
war and sold into slavery), α slave-dealer, kidnapper,
man-stealer, i. e. as well one who unjustly reduces free
men to slavery, as one who steals the slaves of others
and sells them : 1 Tim. i. 10. (Arstph., Xen., Plat.,
Dem., Isocr., Lys., Polyb.)*
'AvSpi'as, -ου, 6, Andrew, (a Grk. name [meaning
manly; for its occurrence, see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v. ;
B. D. s. v. Andrew, init.]), a native of Bethsaida in
Galilee, brother of Simon Peter, a disciple of John the
Baptist, afterwards an apostle of Christ : Jn. i. 40, 44
(41, 45) ; vi. 8 ; xii. 22 ; Mt. iv. 18 ; x. 2 ; 5Ik. i. 16, 29 ;
iii. 18 ; xiii. 3 ; Lk. vi. 14 ; Acts i. 13.•
dvSpC^u : {ανήρ) ; to make a man of or make brave,
(Xen. oec. 5, 4). Mid. pres. ανδρίζομαι; to show one's
self a man, be brave: 1 Co. xvi. 13 [A. V. quit you like
me;i]. (Often in Sept.; Sir. xxxiv. 25; 1 Mace. ii. 64;
Xen.. Plat.. App.. Plut., al.)*
'AvSpoviKos, -ου. ό, Androni'cw<, (a Grk. name, [lit. man
of victory ; for its occurrence see Pape, Eigennamen,
s. V.]), a Jewish Christian and a kinsman of Paul : Ro
xvi. 7,*
άνΒροφονο'ί
44
ανίχω
άνδρο-ψόνος, -ου, ό, α iiuinslaijer : 1 Tim. i. 9. (2 Mace,
ix. 28 ; Horn., Tlat., Dem., al.) [Cf. φονιν:.] '
αν-ίγκλητοϊ, -on, (α priv. and ϊγκαΚίω, q. v.), thai can-
not be culled to account, unre/trocaUe, unaccused, blame-
less : 1 Co. i. 8 ; Col. i. 22 ; 1 Tim. iii. 10 ; Tit. i. « sq. (3
Maec. V. 31; Xen., Plat, Dem., Aristot., al.) [Cf.
Trt-MU'li § ciii.] *
άν-ίκ5ιήγητο8, -ov, (a ])riv. and (κ8ιη-γ€θμαι, q. v.), un-
spi-akahle, indescrilialile : 2 Co. ix. 15 δωμίά, to describe
and commemorate which words fail. (Only in eccl. writ.
[Clem. Rom. iCor. 20, 5 ; 49,4 ; Athenag., Theoph., al.].)*
άν-ίκ-λάλητοϊ, -ov, (a Jjriv. and (κλιιλ(ω), unspeakable :
1 Pet. i. 8 (to which words are inadequate). ([Diosc.
medieam. p. 93 ed. Kuhn] ; Ileliod. ti, 15 p. 252 (296);
and in eccl. writ.)*
avcKVeiiTTOs, -ov, (a priv. and ίκλιίηω to fail), unfailinf/:
Lk. xii. 33. ([llyperid. p. 58* ed. Teiibner] ; Diod. 4,
84 ; 1, 36, cf. 3, 16 ; Pint, de orac. defect, p. 438 d., and
in eccl. writ.)*
«iv-cKTOs, -Of, and in later Grk. also -as, -ή, -όν [cf. W.
68 (67); B. 25 (22)], {άνίχομαι to bear, endure); fr.
Horn, down ; bearable, tolerable : avfKToTcpov ίσται the
lot will be more tolerable, Mt. x. 15 ; xi. 22, 24 ; Mk.
vi. 11 RLbr. ; Lk. x. 12, 14. (In Grk. writ. fr. Horn.
down.)'
άν-ΐλ^ήμων, -ov, gen. -ovos, (a priv. and ί\(ήμων), without
mercij, merciless : Ko. i. 31. ([Aristot. rhet. Alex. 37
p. 1442% 13]; Prov. v. 9, etc. ; Sir. xiii. 12, etc.; Sap. xii.
5; xix. 1.)*
av-4\ios, -ov, without mercij, merciless: Jas. ii. 13 LT
Tr WH, unusual form for aw'Xftuc R G. The Greeks
said avqkefjs and aveXtfis, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 710 sq. ;
W. 100 (95).•
αν€μ(ζω: (άνεμος); to arjilate οτ drive by the wind; pres.
pass. ptcp. άνίμιζόμινος, Jas. i. 6. Besides only in schol.
on Ilom. Od. 12, 336 ΐνθα ην σκίπη προ: το μη άνιμίζ(σθαι,
[Hesych. S. ν. άΐΌλ/ζι/Ιαί • άνιμίσαι; .loaunes Moscluis
(in Patr. Graec. l.\xxvii. p. 3044 a. ) άν(μίζοντο! τοΟ πλοίου
reli/iconte ηαί•«]. The Greeks said ά^^μόω. Cf. κλυδω-
νίζομαι*
avE^os, -ou, 0, (άω, άημι to breathe, blow, [but etymolo-
gists connect άω with Skr. ra, Grk. αήρ, Lat. ventus,
Eng. winil, and άνιμοί vi\U\ Skr. on to breathe, etc. ; cf.
Curtius §§ 419, 5S7 ; Vanicek p. 28]), [fr. Horn, down],
wind, a violent agitation and stream of air, [cf. (Trench
§ Ixxiii.) πν(ϋμα, 1 fin.] : Mt. xi. 7 ; xiv. 24 ; Jas. iii. 4,
etc. ; of a very strong and tenqiestuous wind : Mt. vii.
25 ; Mk. iv. 39 ; Lk. viii. 24, etc. oi τίσσαρ^! άν(μοι. the
four principal or cardinal winds (Jer. xxv. 15 (xlix. 36)),
τη! γη!. Rev. vii. 1 ; hence the four quarters of the
heavens (whence the cardinal winds blow) : Mt. xxiv.
31; Mk. xiii. 27; (Ezek. xxxvii. 9; 1 Chr. ix. 24).
Metaph. awfiot τής διδασκαλιαί, variabiUty and empti-
ness [?] of teaching, Eph. iv. 14.
ov-cvScKTOS, -ov, (a priv. and ev&eicros, and this fr. fVSe-
χομαι, q. v.), that cannot be admitted, inndmissdjle, unal-
lowable, improper : avivbtierov t στί τοϋ μη ίΧθΰν it cannot
be but that they will come, Lk. xvii. 1 [W. 328 (308) ;
B. 2G9 (231)]. (Artem. oneir. 2, 70 6 αριθμός npos τον
μίλλοντα χρόνον avcvSfKTot, [Uiog. Laert. 7, 50], and sev-
eral times in eccl. and Byzant. writ.)*
ονίξίρίννητοί,Τ Tr WH -ραίνητο! [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p.
81 ; B. 58 (50) ; Sturz, De dial, ilaced. ct Alex. p. 11 7 ;
see ίραυνάω^, -ov, (a priv. and ί^ιριννάω), that cannot be
searrheil out : Ro. xi. 33. (Symm. Prov. .xxv. 3 ; Jer.
xvii. 9. Dio Cass. 69, 14.)*
άνίξί-κακο!, -ην, (fr. the fut. of ανίχομαι, and κακοί'; cf.
classic άλΐ^ίκακος, άμνησικακος), Jialit^nl oj' ills and wroni/s,
forbeurin;/: 2 Tim. ii. 24. (Lcian. jud. voc. 9; [Justin
M. apol. 1, 16 init.; Pollux 5, 138].)*
όν€|ιχνίαστοί, -ov, (a priv. and (ξιχνιάζω to trace out),
that cannot be traced out, that cannot be comprehended,
[A. V. unsearchabW] : Ro. xi. 33 ; Eph. iii. 8. (Job v.
9; ix. 10; [xxxiv. 24] ; Or. Manass. 6 [see Sept. cd.
Tdf., Proleg. § xxix.] ; several times in eccl. writ.)*
άν-€ΐΓ-αί<Γχυντθ5, -ov, (a priv. and £παισ;^ύ>'ω), (Vulg.
incunfusibilis), liacintj no cause to be ashamed : 2 Tim. ii.
15. ([Joseph, antt. 18, 7, 1] ; unused in Grk. ivrit. [W.
236 (221)].)•
άν-ίττί-ληΐΓτοβ [L Τ TrAVH -Χημπτο!', see M, fi], -ov, (a
priv. and ίπιλαμβάνω), prop, not apprehended, that cannot
be laid hold of; hence that cannot be reprehended, not open
to censure, irreproachable, [Tittmann i. p. 31 ; Trench
§ ciii.] : 1 Tim. iii. 2 ; v. 7 ; vi. 14. (Freq. in Grk. writ.
fr. [Eur. and] Thuc. down.)*
άν-ε'ρχομαι : 2 aor. άνηλβον; [fr. Horn, down] ; to f/o
up : Jn. vi. 3 ; t(j a hii/her place ; to Jerusalem, Gal. i. 1 7
[LTrmrg. άπήλθον], 18; (1 Κ. -xiii. 12). [CoMP. :
(π-ανίρχομαι.^ *
αν-«σΐ5ι -ίωί, ή, (άνίημι to let loose, slacken, anything
tense, e. g. a bow), a loosening, relaxing ; spoken of a
more tolerable condition in captivity : fxfiv άνισιν to be
held in less rigorous confinement [R. \ . hare indulgence^.
Acts xxiv. 23, (Joseph, antt. 18, 6, 10 φυ\υκή μίν yap και
τήρηπίί ην, μ(τα μίντοι άνίσίω! της fls διαίταχ). relief,
rest, from persecutions, 2 Th. i. 7 ; from the troubles of
poverty, 2 Co. viii. 1 3 ; relief from anxiety, quiet, 2 Co.
ii. 13 (12) ; vii. 5. (Sept. ; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. [Hdt.
5, 28] down.) [Stn . see άνάπαυσις, fin.] *
άν-(τίΛ,ω ; pres. pass, άνιτάζομαι ; (ϊτάζω to examine,
test); to investigate, examine; τινά, to examine judicially :
Acts xxii. 24, 29. (Judg. vi. 29 cod. Alex. ; Sus. [i. e.
Dan. (Theod.) init.] 14; [Anaph. Pilati A 6 p. 417 ed.
Tdf.]. Not found in prof, auth.)*
oviu, prep, with gen., without : 1 Pet. iii. 1 ; iv. 9.
with gen. of the pers. without one's will or intervention,
(often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down) : Mt. x. 29.
[Compared with χωρίς, see Tittm. i. p. 93 sq. ; EUic. on
Eph. ii. 12 ; Green, Crit. Notes, etc. (on Ro. iii. 28).]*
άν-<ΰ-βίτθ5, -ov, not convenient, not commodious, not Jit:
Acts xxvii. 12. (Unused by Grk. writ.; [Moschion 53].)'
άν-<νρί<Γκω : 2 aor. avevpov, 3 pers. plur. avfvpav, Lk.
ii. 16 (TTrAVH; see ιίρίσκω) ; to find out by search:
τινά, Lk. ii. 16; Acts xxi. 4. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.
down.) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 13 sq.*
άν-ί'χο) : in the N. T. only in the mid. άνίχομαι ; fut.
o.pe\jno<t
45
άρθραξ
άν€ξημαι(\ν. «:! ΓΠΐι : impf. ην€ΐχόμην 2 Co. xi. [1 Rec".''],
4 [Ilec] (G Τ Tr WII mrg. άιχιχ^μην [cf. Moeris ed.
Piers, p. 176; (but LWHtxt. in vs. 4 άν/χ.) ; cf. ΙΓ//.
App. p. 162; W. 72 (70) ; B. 35 (31)]) ; 2 aor. ήνισχό-
μΐ)ΐ/ Acts xviii. 14 (LTTrWII άνισχόμην, re£F. u. s.) ;
to hold up, (e. g. κεφαλήν, xf'ipas, Horn, et al.) ; hence in
mid. to hold one's self erect and firm (against any pers.
or thing), to sustain, to bear (with equanimity), to bear
with, endure, with a gen. of the pers. (in Grk. writ, the
accus. is more com., both of the pers. and of the tiling),
of his opinions, actions, etc. : Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19;
Lk.ix.41; 2Co.xi.l9; Epli.iv.2: Col.iii.13. foil, by
gen. of the thing: 2 Th. i. 4 [WH mrg. ΐι/ίχ-^ (nls by
attraction for q>v, unless άς be preferred [B. 161 (140);
cf. W. 202 (190)]). foil, by μικρόν τι with gen. of both
pers. and thing, 2 Co. xi. 1 (ace. to the reading μου
μικρόν τι άφροσίνη! [R•»"»" L TTr WH] ; cf. Meyer
ad loc). without acase, 1 Co. iv. 12 (weeni/ure). foil,
by ft Ttr, 2 Co. xi. 20. Owing to the context, to bear
with i. e. to listen : with gen. of the pers.. Acts xviii. 14 ;
of the thing, 2 Tim. iv. 3 ; Heb. .\iu. 22. [CoMP. : προσ-
αν£χω.^ *
άνεψιέδ, -οϋ, ό, [for ά-νιπτ-ιο! con-nepot-ius, cf. Lat. ne-
pos. Germ, niclile, Eng. nephew, niece; Curtius § 342], a
cousin : Col. iv. 10. (Num. xxxvi. 1 1 ; Tob. vii. 2.) [Cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 306 ; but esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c;
also B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Sister's Son.] *
άνηθον, -ου, τό, dill, anise [(?) ; cf. BB.DD. s. v. ; Tris-
tram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 419 sq.] : A[t. xxiii. 23.
(Arstph. nub. 982 ; [Aristot., al.] ; often in Theophr.
hist, pi.) •
άν^κω; [impf. άνηκαν] ; in Grk. writ, to have come up
to, arrived at, to reach to, pertain to, foil, generally by
fir T« ; hence in later ΛνΓΪϋ. av^Kti τι τινι somelhinrj apper-
tains to one, is due to him sc. to be rendered or performed
by others (1 Mace. x. 42 ; xi. 35 ; 2 Mace. xiv. 8), and
then ethically τό ανήκον η -hat is due, dutt/, [R. V. befitting'],
Philem. 8 ; τα ουκ ανήκοντα ujihecominrj, discreditable,
Eph. V. 4 (L Τ Tr WH & ουκ άνηκιν, W.'48G (452) ; [Β.
350 (301)]); impers. ώς άνήκ( as was fitlinrj, sc. ever
since ye were converted to Christ, Col. iii. 18, [W. 270
(254); cf. B. 217 (187) and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].*
άν-τ|μ<ρο$, -ov (a priv. and rjpfpus), not tame, savage,
fierce : 2 Tim. iii. 3. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Anacr. 1, 7]
Aeschyl. down.)*
άνήρ, avSpus, 6, a man, Lat. (•/;•. The meanings of this
word in the N. T. differ in no respect fr. classic usage ;
for it is employed 1. with a reference to s e x, and
so to distinguish a man from a woman ; either a. as a
male: Actsviii. 12; xvii. 12; iTim. ii. 12; or b. as a
husband: Mt. i. 16; Mk. x. 2 ; .In. iv. 16 sqq. : Ro. vii. 2
sqq.; 1 Co. vii. 2 sqq.; Gal. iv. 27 ; 1 Tim. iii. 2, 12; Tit.
i. 6, etc.; a betrothed or future husband : Mt.i. 19; Rev.
xxi. 2, etc. 2. with a reference to age, and to dis-
tinguish an adult man from a boy : Mt. xiv. 21 ; χ v. 38
(where SvSpts, γυναίκα and παιδία are discriminated) ;
with the added notion also of intelligence and virtue :
1 Co. xiii. 11 (opp. to vijnios) ; Eph. iv. 13 : .las. iii. 2, (in
the last two pass. TiXfior άνήρ). 3. univ. ani/ male
person, a man ; so where tIs might have been used :
Lk. viii. 41; L\. 38 ; Acts vi. 11; x. 5, etc. where άνήρ
and Ttf are united: Lk. viii. 27; Acts v. 1 ; x. 1. or
άνήρ and oy he u-ho, etc.: Ro. iv. 8; .las. i. 12. where
mention is made of something visually done by men, not
by women : Lk. xxii. 63 ; Acts v. 36. where angels or
other heavenly beings are said to have borne the forms
of men : Lk. ix. 30 ; xxiv. 4 ; Acts x. 30. where it is so
connected with an adjective as to give the adj. the force
of a substantive: άνήρ αμαρτωλός a sinner, Lk. v. 8;
λβττμυΐ avSpfi, Lk. .xvii. 12: or is joined to appellatives:
άνήρ φονΐΰί. Acts iii. 14 ; av. προφήτης, Lk. .\.\iv. 19,
(X gp C-X, Judg. vi. 8 ; [cf. W. 30 ; § 59, 1 ; B. 82 (72) ;
other reff. s. \. άνθρωπος, 4 a. fin.]) ; or to gentile names:
άν&ρ(ς Νί«υίται, Mt. xii. 41 ; άνήρ Ίουδαίοί, Acts x.xii. 3;
av. Αίθίοψ, Acts viii. 27 ; 3v8. Κύπριοι, Acts xi. 20 ; esp.
in addresses of honor and respect [W. § 65, 5 d. ; B.
82 (72)], Actsi.ll ; ii. 14; xiii. 16; xvii. 22, etc. ; even
ivSpfs ά5(\φοί, Acts i. 16 ; [ii. 29, 37 ; vii. 2] ; xiii. [15],
26, etc. 4. when persons of either sex are included,
but named after the more important : Mt. xiv. 35; Acts
iv. 4 ; [Meyer seems inclined (see his com. on Acts
1. c.) to dispute even these examples ; but al. would refer
several other instances (esp. Lk. xi. 31 ; Jas. i. 20) to
the same head].
άνβ-ίστημι : pf. άνθίστηκα ; 2 aor. αντίστην, [impv. άι^
TiVn/Tf], inf. άντιστηναι: Mid., pres. ανθίσταμαι; impf.
άνθιστάμην: (άιπ-ί and ϊστημι); to set against; as in Grk.
writ., in the mid., and in the pf. plpf. [having pres. and
impf. force, W. 274 (257)] and 2 aor. act., to set one's
self against, to withstand, resist, oppose : pf. act., Ro. ix.
19; xiii. 2; 2 Tim. iv. 15 [RG]. 2 aor. act., Mt. v. 39;
Lk..xxi. 15; Acts vi. 10; Gal. ii. Π ; Eph. vi. 13; 2 Tim.
iii. 8 ; [iv. 15 L Τ Tr WH]. impv., Jas. iv. 7 ; 1 Pet. v.
9. ΛΜ. : pres., 2 Tim. iii. 8. impf., Acts xiii. 8.*
άνθ-ομολογ€Όμαι, -οΰμαι : [impf. άνθώμοΧογούμην] ; (αντί
and όμο'Χογίομαι) ; in Grk. writ. (fr. Dem. down) 1.
to reply by professing or by confessing. 2. to agree
mutually (in turn), to 7nal:e a compact. 3. to acknowl-
edge in the presence of (αντί before, over against; cf.
ίζομοΚογΐίσθαι tvavTi κυρίου, 2 Chr. vii. 6) any one, (see
Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 19 sq.) : τας αμαρτίας
to confess sins, Joseph, antt. 8, 10, 3 [Bekk. reads άνομο-
Xoyou/ievout] ; cf. 1 Esdr. viii. 88 (90). τιι/ί, to declare
something in honor of one, to celebrate his praises, give
Moni.<tohim, Lk. ii. 38: (fornnin in Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxix.)
13; 3 Mace. vi. 33; [Dan. iv. 31 (.34) Sept.; Test. xii.
Patr. test. Jud. § 1]).*
άνθοΐ, -iof, TO, [fr. Hom. down] ; a flower : Jas. i. 10
sq. ; 1 Pet. i. 24.•
ω^ρακιά [on accent cf. Etvm. Magn. 801, 21 ; Chand-
ler § 95], -as, ή, a heap of burning coals: Jn. xviii. 18;
xxi. 9. (Sir. xi. 32; 4 Mace. ix. 20; Hom. II. 9, 213,
etc.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Coal.] •
άνβρα|, -a<ror, ό, coal, (also, fr. Thuc. and Arstph. down,
alive coal), άνθρ. πυρός a coal of fire i. e. a burning or
live coal : Ro. xii. 20 άνθρ. ιτυρος aaptitiv ίπ\ την κ<φαΚήν
άνθρωττάρβσκο'ς
46
νθρωτΓΟ^
τιχοί, a proverbial exjiression, fr. Prov. xxv. 22, signify-
ing; to call up, by the favors you confer on your enemy,
the memory in him of the wrong he has done you (which
shall pain him as if live coals were heaped on his head),
that he may the more readily repent. The Arabians
call things that cause very acute mental pain liurniny
conU nf llip. heart and fire in the Virer; cf. Oexen'ius in
RoscnmUllor's Bibl.-excg. Repert. i. p. 140 sq. [or in his
ihesaurus i. 280 ; cf. also BI5.D1). s. v. Coal]. *
ανθρωίΓ-άρ^σκοΐ, -ov, ((ίνθ/ιωπο! and ιψισκος agreeable,
plfasiiiii, insinuating; cf. ΐνάρΐσκος, 6νσάρ€σκυί, αντά-
μ(σκο! in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 1)21); only in bibl. and
li eccl. writ. [W. 25] : studying to please men, courting the
favor of men : Eph. vi. 6 ; Col. iii. 22. (Ps. lii. (liii.) 6 ;
[Ps. Sal. iv. 8, 10].)•
άνθρώττινος, -Ίνη^ -Lvov, {άνθρωπος), [fr. Hdt. down],
hnmiiii; applied to things belonging to men: γ^ι'φ^ς.
Acts xvii. 25 LTTrWll; φύσκ, Jas. iii. 7; or insti-
tuted by men : κτίσΐί, fq. v. 3], 1 Pet. ii. 13 ; adjusted to
the strength of man : πειρασμός [Κ. V. a temptation sucli
as man can iear], 1 Co. x. 13 (cf. Neander [and Heinrici]
ad loc. ; Pollux 3, 27, 131 6 ουκ αν rtp νπομίν^ι^ν, ο ονκ αν
τις (veyKTf . . . το Be ϊναντίον, κονφόν, €νφορον, οϊστόν, αν-
θρώπινου, avfKTOv). ϋρρ. to divine things, with the im-
plied idea of defect or weakness: 1 Co. ii. 4 Rec. ; 13
(σοφία, originating with man); iv. 3 {ανθρωπινή ήμίρα
the judicial day of men, i. e. human judgment), άνθρώ-
πινον Xeyw, Ro. vi. 19 (I say what is human, speak as
is iLsual among men, who do not always suitably weigh
the force of their words; by this expression the apos-
tle apologizes for the use of tbe phrase &ου\ωθηναι τη
8ικαίησνν;ι).*
άνθρωτΓοκτόνοϊ, -ov, (κτΕίνω to kill), α mnnslayer, mur-
derer : .In. viii. 44. conte.xtually, to be deemed equal to
a murderer, iJn. iii. 15. (Eur. Iph. T. (382) 389.) [Cf.
Tri^ni-h § Ixxxiii. and φον^νς.'\*
άνθρωπο;, -ου, ή, [peril, fr. άνήρ .md ώψ, i. e. man's face;
Curtius§422; A^nnicck p. 9. Fnmi Horn, down] ; man.
It is used 1. univ., with rcf. to the genus or nature,
without distinction of sex, a human being, wlielher male
or female: Jn. xvi. 21. And in this sense a. with the
article, generically, so as to include all human individ-
uals : Mt. iv. 4 (eV αρτω ζησιται ό άνθρωπος) ; Mt. xii. 35
(ό ά-γαθος ανθ. every good person) ; Mt. xv. 11, 18 ; Mk.
ii. 27; vii. 15, 18, 20; Lk. iv. 4 ; Jn. ii. 25 [W. § IS, 8] ;
vii. 51 ; Ro. vii. 1, etc. b. so that a man is distinguL^hed
from beings of a different race or order; a. from ani-
mals, plants, etc. : Lk. v. 10 ; Mt. iv. 19 ; xii. 12 ; 2 Pet.
ii. 16; Rev. ix. 4, 7, 10, 15, 18; xi. 13, etc. β. from
God, from Christ as divine, and from angels: Mt. x. 32;
xix. 6 ; Mk. x. 9; Lk. ii. 15 [T WH om., L Trbr.] (opp.
to angels) ; Jn. x. 33 ; Acts x. 26 ; xiv. 1 1 ; 1 Th. ii. 1 3 ;
Gal. i. 10, 12; 1 Co. iii. 21; vii. 23; Phil.ii. 7,7 (8); iTim.
ii. 5 ; Heb. viii. 2 ; xiii. 6 ; 1 Pet. ii. 4. etc. c. with
the added notion of weakness, by which man is led
into mistake or prompted to sin : ουκ άνθρωποι (R Ο
σαρκικοί) eoTf ; 1 Co. iii. 4 ; σοφία ανθρώπων, 1 Co. ii. 5 ;
ανθρώπων ^πιθυμίαι, 1 Pet. iv. 2 ; κατά ανθρωττυν πίριπατΰτΐ
ye conduct yourselves as men, 1 Co. iii. 3 ; XoXfii/ or
Xeyeti' κατά ανθρωπον, to speak according to human modes
of tliinking, 1 Co. ix. 8 ; Ro. iii. 5 ; κατά ανθρωπον λ('γω,
I speak a.? a man to whom analogies from human affairs
present themselves, while I illustrate divine things by an
example drawn from ordinary human life, Gal. iii. 15;
κατά ίίνθρ. θηριομαχύν, as nuin is wont to light, urged on by
the desii'e of gain, honor and other earthly advantages,
1 Co. x\". 32 ; ovK 'ίστι κατά άνθρ. is not accommodated
to the opinions and desires of men. Gal. i. 11 ; [for exx.
of κατά άνθ. in prof. auth. see Wetstein on Rom. u. s.] ;
with the accessory notion of malignity: προσ(χ(τ(
άπ6 των ανθρώπων, Mt. Χ. 1 7 ; tis χΰρας ανθρώπων, RIt.
xvii. 22; Lk. ix. 44. d. with the adjunct notion of
contempt, (as sometimes in Grk. writ.) : Jn. v. 12; the
address ί ανθρωπι, or ανθρωπ(, is one either of contempt
and disdainful [lity, Ro. ix. 20 (Plat. (lorg. p. 452 b. σίι
δι . . . τις «Γ, & ανθρωπ(), or of gentle rel)uke, Lk. .xxii.
58, 60. The word serves to suggest commiseration : iie
[T Tr WIl ίδού] ό ίίνθρ. behold the man in question, mal-
treated, defenceless, Jn. xix. 5. e. with a reference
to the twofold nature of man, ό ΐσω and ό (ξω άνθρωπος,
soul and body: Ro. vii. 22; Eph. iii. 16; 2 Co. iv. 16,
(Plat. rep. 9, 589 a. ό «Wof άνθρωπος ; Plotin. Enn. 5, 1 ,
10 ίϊσω άνθρ. ; cf. Fritzsehe on Rom. vol. ii. 61 sq; [Mcy.
on Ro. 1. c. ; Ellic. on Eph. 1. e.]) ; ό κρυπτός της καρδίας
άνθρ. 1 Pet. iii. 4. f. with a reference to the twofijld
moral condition of man, ό παλαιός (the corrujit) and ό
καινός (ό ν€ος) άνθρ. (the truly Christian man, conformed
to tbe nature of God) : Ro. vi. 6 ; Eph. ii. 15 ; iv. 22, 24 ;
Col. iii. 9 sq. g. with a reference to the se.x, (contexts
ually) a male : Jn. vii. 22 sq. 2. indefinitely, without
the article, άνθρωπος, a. soTne one, a (certain) man,
when who he is either is not known or is not import-
ant : i. q. τις, Mt. xvii. 14 ; xxi. 28 ; xxii. 1 1 ; Mk. xii. 1 ;
xiv. 13 ; Lk. V. 18 ; xiii. 19, etc. with the addition of tis,
Mt. xviii. 12; Lk. x. 30; xiv. 2, 16; xv. 11 ; xvi. 1, 19;
Jn. V. 5. in address, where the speaker either cannot
or will not give the name, Lk. v. 20 ; or where the writer
addresses any and every reader, Ro. ii. 1,3. b. where
what is said holds of every man, so that άνθρ. is equiv.
to the Germ, indef. man, one : Ro. iii. 28 ; 1 Co. iv. 1 ;
vii. 1 ; xi. 28 ; Gal. ii. 16. So also where opp. to domes-
tics, Mt. X. 36; to a wife, Mt. xix. 10; to a father, Mt.
X. 35 ; to the master of a household, Lk. xii. 36 sq., — in
which passages many, confounding sense and signifi-
cation, incorrectly say that the word άνθρ. aigmfiL'S father
of ο family, husband, son, servant. 3. in the plur. oi
άνθρ. is sometimes (the) people, Germ, ilie Leute : Mt.
V. 13, 16; vi. 5, 18; viii. 27; xvi. 13; Lk. xi. 44; Mk.
viii. 24, 27 ; Jn. iv. 28 ; οΰδύς ανθρώπων (nemo homi-
ntim) no one, Mk. xi. 2 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1 6. 4. It is joined
a. to another substantive, — a quasi-predicate of office,
or employment, or characteristic, — the idea of the pred-
icate predominating [W. § 59, 1] : άνθρωπος ϊμπορος a
merchant (-man). Mt. xiii. 45 [WII txt. om. άνθρ ] ; οΐκο-
δfσπότης. Mt. xiii. 52 : xx. 1 ; xxi. 33 ; βασιλεύς. Mt.
xviii. 23; .xxii. 2; φάγος, Mt. xi. 19. (So in Ilebr.
άνθυττατεύω
47
"Αννας
D'lD Π'Κ a eunuch, Jer. xxxviii. 7 sq., |Π3 !ϊ"Χ a priest,
Lev. xxi. 9 ; also in Grk. writ. : άνθ- όίίτη^, Horn. II. 16,
263, al. ; cf. Matthiae § 430, 6 ; [Kriiger § 57, 1, 1] ; but
in Attic this combination generally has a contemptuous
force ; cf. Bnhdy. p. 48 ; in Lat. homo gladiator, Cic.
epp. ad diversos 12, 22, 1). b. to a gentile noun: ανθ.
ΚυρψαΧυς, Mt. xxvii. 32 ; 'lovbaios. Acts xxi. 39 ; 'Ρω-
μαίος. Acts xvi. 37 ; xxii. 25, (ace. to the context, a Ro-
man citizen). 5. ό άνθρ-, with the article, the partic-
ular man under consideration, who lie is being plain
from the context: Mt. xii. 13; xxvi. 72 ; ]Mk. iii. 5 ; Lk.
xxiii. 6 ; .In. iv. 50. oiros ό ανθ-, Lk. xiv. 30 ; Jn. ix. IG,
24 [LTrmrg. WH]; xi. 47; i &νθ. oItos, Mk. xiv.
71; Lk. xxiii. 4, 14, 47; Jn. ix. 24 [RGTTrtxt.];
xviii. 17; Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26 ; xxvi. 31, 32. 6 άνθ.
(Kflvns, Mt. xii. 45 ; xxvi. 24 ; jMk. xiv. 21. 6. Phrases:
ό άνθ. τη! αμαρτία! (or with Τ Tr t.xt.AV'H txt. τ. ανομίας),
2 Th. ii. 3, see αμαρτία, 1 p. 30 sq. ανθ. τον θ(οϋ a man
devoted to the service of God, God's minister : 1 Tim.
vi. 11 ; 2 Tim. iii. 17, (of the evangelists, the associates
of the apostles) ; 2 Pet. i. 21 (of prophets, like □"π^ίί ty'K
often in the O. T. ; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. i. p. 85). For
ή νιος τον άνθρωπον anfl νίοι των άνθρ., see under νΙός.
άνθ-υτΓατ£ύω ; {αντί for i. e. in lieu or stead of any one,
and ΰπατίύω to be νπατος, to be supreme, to be consul) ;
to be proconsul: Acts xviii. 12 [R6; cf. B. 169 (147)].
(Plut. comp. Dem. c. Cic. c. 3 ; Hdian. 7, 5, 2.) *
άνθ-ύττατοϊ, -ου. ό, [see the preceding word], proconsul :
Acts xiii. 7, 8,12; xviii. 1 2 L Τ Tr WH ; xLx. 38. The
emperor Augustus divided the Roman provinces into
senatorial and imperial. The former were presided
over by proconsuls ; the latter were administered by
legates of the emperor, sometimes called also proprae-
tors. (Polyb., Dion. H., Lcian., Plut., and often in Dio
Cass.) [B. D. s. V. Proconsul ; Alex.'s Kitto s. v. Prov-
ince; esp. Bp. Lghtft. in The Contemp. Rev. for 1878,
p. 289 sq.] •
άν-(ημ.ι, [ptcp. plur. άνΰνταΐ ; 2 aor. subj. άνω, ptcp.
plur. avc'i/Tf s ; J aor. pass, ai/tfli/i/ ; to send hncl•; toreta.r;
contextually, to loosen : τι. Acts xvi. 26, {τονς Β^σμούς,
Plut. Alex. M. 73) ; xxvii. 40. trop. τψ> ππίΐλήΐ', to i/ire
up, omit, calm [?], Ejjh. vi. 9 ; (την ίχθραν, Thuc. 3, 10 ;
την οργην, Plut. Alex. Μ. 70). to leave, not to uphold, to
let sink : Ileb. xiii. 5, (Deut. xxxi. 6).*
dv-tXcus, -ων, gen. -ω, (ϊλιως, Attic for iXaos), without
mere;/, merciless: Jas. ii. 13 [R G]. Found nowhere
else [exc. Hdian. epim. 257]. Cf. άνίΚιος.*
aviiTTOS, -ov, (νίπτω to wash), unwashed : Mt. xv. 20 ;
Mk. vii. 2, and R L mrg. in 5. (Horn. II. 6, 266, etc.)*
άν-6θΓτημι : fut. άιιαστί]σω ; 1 aor. άνίστησα ; 2 aor. av-
Ιστην, impv. άνάστηθι and (Acts xii. 7 ; Eph. v. 14 and
L WH txt. in Acts ix. 1 1 ) ανάστα (AV. § 14, 1 h. ; [B. 47
(40)]); Mid., pres. άνίσταμαι; fut. άναστησομαι ; [fr.
Horn, down]; I. Transitively, in the pres. 1
aor. and fut. act., to cause to rise, raise tip, (Π'ρΠ) ;
a. prop, of one lying down : Acts ix. 41. b. to raise up
from death : Jn. vi. 39 sq. 44, 54 ; Acts ii. 32; xiii. 34,
(so in Grk. writ.). c. to raise up, cause to be born :
σπίρμα offspring (Gen. xxxviii. 8), Mt. xxii. 24, [cf. W.
33 (32)] ; τον Χριστόν, Acts ii. 30 Rec. to cause to ap-
pear, hrimj forward, τινά τινι one for any one's succor:
προφήτην, Acts iii. 22 ; vii. 37 ; το/ τταίδα αντοΰ, Acts iii.
26. II. Intransitively, in the pf. plpf. and 2
aor. act., and in the mid. ; 1. to rise, stand up ; used
a. of persons lying down (on a couch or bed) : Mk. i.
35 ; V. 42 ; Lk. viii. 55 ; xi. 7 ; Acts ix. 34, 40. of per-
sons lying on the ground: Mk. ix. 27; Lk. xvii. 19;
xxii. 46; Acts ix. 6. b. of persons seated: Lk. iv. 16
(άνίστη άναγνώναι) ; Mt. xxvi. 62; Mk. xiv. 60 ; Acts
xxiii. 9. c. of those who leave a place to go elsewhere .
Mt. ix. 9 ; Mk. ii. 14 ; [x. 50 R G] ; Lk. iv. 38 ; xxiu. 1 ;
Acts ix. 39. Hence of those who prepare themselves
for a journey, (Germ, sich aufmachen) : Mk. vii. 24 ; x.
1 ; Lk. i. 39; xv. 18, 20; Acts x. 20; xxu. 10. In the
same way the Hebr. Dip (esp. Dp'j) is put before verbs
of going, departing, etc., according to the well
known oriental custom to omit nothing contributing to
the full pictorial delineation of an action or event; hence
formerly DP'l and άναστάς were sometimes incorrectlv
said to be redundant ; cf. W. 608 (565). άναστηναι από
to rise up from something, i. e. from what one has been
doing while either sitting or prostrate on the ground :
Lk. xxii. 45. d. of the dead ; 2 aor., with ix ν^κρώρ
added : Mt. xvii. 9 R G WH mrg. ; Mk. ix. 9 sq. ; xii. 25 ;
Lk. xvi. 31 ; xxiv. 46 ; Jn. xx. 9 ; Eph. v. 14 (here fig.) ;
with (K ν(κρων omitted : Mk. viii. 31 ; xvi. 9 ; Lk. Lx. 8,
1 9, [22 L Τ Tr mrg. WH mrg.] ; xxiv. 7 ; Ro. xiv. 9 Rec. ;
so (without ix vfKp.) in the fut. mid. also: jNIt. xii. 41 ;
[xvii. 23 L WH mrg.] ; xx. 1 9 [R G L Tr mrg. AVH mrg.] ;
Mk. X. 34; Lk. xi.32; xviii. 33; Jn. xi. 23sq.; 1 ThTiv.
16. 2. to arise, appear, stand forth; of kings, proph-
ets, priests, leaders of insurgents : Acts v. 36 sq. ; vii.
18. mid., Ro. XV. 12; Heb. vii. 11, 15. of those about
to enter into conversation or dispute with any one, Lk.
x. 25 ; Acts vi. 9 ; or to undertake some business, Acts
v. 6 ; or to attempt sometliing against others, Acts v. 17.
Hence άναστηναι cVi τίνα to rise up against ant/ one : Mk.
iii. 26, (Si* Dip). [Syx. see (γιίρω, fin. CoMP. : ctt-,
€^ανίστημι.^
"Αννα [WH "Αννα, see their Intr. § 408], -as [on this
gen. cf. B. 17 (15) ; Ph. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 138], η,
Anna, (ΠϊΠ grace), the prop, name of a woman (so in
1 S i. 2 sqq. ; ii. 1 Alex. ; Tob. i. 9, 20, etc.), a prophetess,
in other respects unknown : Lk. ii. 36.*
"Awas [WIl "Αννας, see their Intr. § 408], -a (on this
gen. cf. AV. § 8, 1 p. 60 (59)), ό, (in Joseph. 'Araw-r; fr.
Hebr. Jjn to be gracious), a high-priest of the Jews,
elevated to the pontificate by Quirinius the governor of
S^Tia c. A. P. 6 or 7 ; but afterwards, A. D. 15, deposed
by A'alerius Gratus, the procurator of Judasa, who put in
his place, first Ismael, son of Phabi, and shortly after
Eleazar, son of Annas. From the latter, the office
passed to Simon; from Simon c. A. D. 18 to Caiapha.s,
(.loseph. antt. 18, 2. 1 sq.): but Annas, even after he
had been put out of office, continued to have great iiitlu-
ence : Jn. .xviii. 13, 24. This explains the mistake [but
ανόητος
48
ανομω•;
see reff. below (esp. to Schiirer), and cf. άρχκρήι, 2J by
which Luke, in his Gospel iii. 2 (ace. to the true read-
in<; άρχκρίωί) and in Acts iv. 6, attributes to liim the
ρ intiticate long after he had beer, removed from office.
L'f. Win. RVVB. s. v. Annas ; Keim in Schenkel i. p.
I. So sq. ; Schiirer in the Zeit.iclir. fiir wissensch. Theol.
for 1876, p. 580 sq. [also in his Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 23
iv. ; and BB.DI). s. v.].*
a-vOTfTot, -ov, (κοττοΓ fr. νοίω) ; 1. nol understood,
unintelligibU ; 2. generally active, not understanding,
unwise, foolish: Ro. i. 14 (ojjp. to σοφοί) ; Lk. xxiv. 25;
Gal. iii. 1, 3; Tit. iii. 3. ΐπιθυμίαι άιιάητοι, 1 Tim. vi. 9.
(Prov. xvii. 28 ; Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 13 ; and often in Attic
writ. ; [cf. Trench § Ixxv. ; EUic. on Gal. iii. 1 ; Schmidt
eh. 147 § 20].)•
άνοια, -at, ή, (avovt [i. e. άνοοί without understand-
ing]), want of understanding, /olli/ : 2 Tim. iii. '■>. mad-
ness expressing itself in rage, Lk. vi. 11, [δύο δ' άνοια;
γίνη, το μΐν μανίαν, το 5c άμαθίαν, Plato, Tim. p. 8ΰ b. ].
([ITieogn. 453] ; Hdt. β, 69 ; Attic writ. fr. Thuc. down.)*
άν-οίγω ; {ανά, οίγω i. e. olyvvpi) \ fut. ανοίξω ; 1 aor.
ήνοιξα and (Jn. ix. 14 and as a var. elsewh. also) άνίωξα
(an earlier form) [and ηνίωξα W'H in Jn. ix. 17, 32 (cf.
Gen. viii. 6), so Tr (when (corrected), but without iota
subscr. ; .«ee I, t] ; 2 pf. aviwya {to be or stand open ; cf.
Btlm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 250 s(|. ; lliul/ier/ord, New Phryn.
p. 247; Veitch s. v.] ; the Attic writ, give this force
mostly to the pf. pas?.); Pas.«., [pres. ανοίγομαι ΛΠ. vii.
8 LTrtxt. Wllmrg. : Lk. xi. 10 Tr mrg. WH mrg.] ; pf.
ptcp. άν^ωγμ^νος and ηνίω-γμίνοί, (ηνοιγμΐνοΐ Acts ix. 8
rdf.) ; 1 aor. άν^ωχθη". ην€ωχθην. aiiil ηι*οίχθην. inf. avf-
ωχθήναι (with double augiii. Lk. iii. 21 ) ; 2 aor. ηνοίγην
(tlie usual later form); 1 fut. άνοιχθί]σομαι ( Lk. xi. 9
Tdf., 10 LT); 2 fut. άνοιγήσομαι: (on these forms, in
the use of wliich botli codd. and edd. differ much, cf.
['/■<//. Proleg. p. 121 s(|.]: 117/. App. pp. 161, 170; Ultin.
Gram. p. 280 [21st Germ, ed.] ; Bllm. N. T. Gr. 63 (55) ;
AV. 72 (70) and 83 (79); [Veitch s. v.]); to open: a
door, a gate. Acts V. 19; xii. 10, 14; xvi. 26sq. ; Rev.
iv. 1 ; very often in Grk. writ. Metaph., to give en-
trance into the soul. Rev. iii. 20 ; to furnish opportunity
to do something. Acts xiv. 27 ; Col. iv. 3 ; pass., of an
opportunity offered. I Co. xvi. 9; 2 Co. ii. 12; Rev. iii.
8 ; cf. θύρα. simply avoiydv τινί to open (the door [B.
145 (127)]) to one ; prop. : Lk. xii. 36 ; Acts v. 23 ; .xii.
16 ; Jn. X. 3 ; in a proverbial saying, to grant something
asked for, Mt. \ ii. 7 scj. ; Lk. xi. 9 sq. ; parabolically, to
give access to the blessings of God's kingdom, Mt. xxv.
1 1 ; Lk. xiii. 25 ; Rev. iii. 7. rois θησανρονί, Mt. ii. 1 1 ,
(Sir. xliii. 14 ; Eur. Ion 923); τα μνημι'ια, Mt. xxvii. 52;
τάφο{, Ro. iii. 13 ; τα φρίαρ. Rev. ix. 2. heaven is said to
be opened and something to descend f r. it, Mt. iii. 1 6 ; Lk.
iii. 21 ; Jn. i. 51 (52) : Acts x. 11 ; or something is said
to be seen there. Acts vii. 56 RG; Rev. xi. 19 (ό vaos
. . . όΐντω οΰρανω) ; [xv. 5] ; xix. II. άνοίγ. τό στόμα : of
a fish's mouth, Mt. xvii. 27; Hebraistically, of those who
t)egin to speak [W. 33 (32), 608 (565)], Mt. v. 2 ; Acts
viii. 32, 35 ; x. 34 ; xviii. 14 ; foil, by tls βλασφημίαν [-plat |
LTTrWH], Rev. xiii. 6; ev ιταραβολα'ιι, i.e. to make
use of (A. V. in), Mt. xiii. 35, (Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 2;
tv ineat Leian. Philops. § 33) ; Trpot τίνα, 2 Co. vi. 1 1 (το
στόμα ημών uviiaye npot νμάί our mouth is open towards
you, i. e. we sjieak freely to you, we keep nothing back) ;
the mouth of one is said to be opened who recovers the
power of speech, Lk. i. 64 ; of the earth yawning, Rev.
xii. 16. av. uKoat Tirot i. e. to restore the faculty of hear-
ing, Mk. vii. 35 (L Τ Tr WH). av. τοί -s οφθάΚμοίί [W.
33 (32)], to part the eyelids so as to see, Acts ix. 8, 40 ;
Tiwjt, to restore one's sight, Mt. ix. 30; xx. 33; Jn. ix.
10, 14, 17, 21, 26, 30, 32; x. 21 ; .xi. 37; metaph.. Ads
xxvi. 18 (to open the eyes of one's mind), avoiya την
a0payiea, to unseal. Rev. V. 9 ; vi. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 12 ; viii. 1 ;
av. TO tSijiXiov. (ii^ihapibiov, to unroll, Lk. iv. 1 7 L Tr WJI i
Rev. v. 2-5; x. 2, 8; xx. 12. [( omk : hi-avoiya.\'
άνκ>ικο-δομ(Ίι>, -ώ : fut. ανοικοδομήσω ; to liuild αηαΐη,
( Vulg. reoii/i/i'co): Acts xv. 16. ([Thuc. 1, 89, 3]; Diod.
11, 39; Plut. Them. 19; Cam. 31; Ildian. 8, 2, 12 (5
ed. Bekk.].)•
άνοφΐ, -(ωt ή, {ανοίγω, q. v.), an opening : iv ανοίξίΐ
ToC στάματόί μου as often as I open my mouth to sjieak,
Eph. vi. 19. (Thuc. 4, 68, 4; των πυλών, id. 4, 07, 3;
χηλών, Plut. mor. [symp. 1. ix. quaest. 2, 3] p. 738 c.)*
ανομία, -ar, ή, (ovo/ioc); 1. prop, the condition oj
one u;itlioul loir, — either because ignorant "^f it, or because
violating it. 2. contempt and violation of law, iniquit;/,
wickedness: Mt. xxiii. 28; xxiv. 12; 2 Th. ii. 3 (TTrtxt.
WH txt. ; cf. αμαρτία, 1 p. 30 sq.), 7 ; Tit. ii. 14 ; 1 Jn. iii.
4. opp. to ή ίικαιοσννη, 2 Co. vi. 14 ; Ilcb. i. 9 [not Tdf.],
(Xen. mem. 1, 2. 24 ανομία μάλλον ή δικαιοσύνη χρύιμ(νοι) ;
and to ή δικαιοσύνη and ό άyιnσμόt, Κο. vi. 19 {τή ανομία
fir την άνομίαν III iiilijuiti/ — per.-^onified — in order to worh
Inii/ulri/) ; noif'iv την άνομίαν to do iniquity, act wickedly,
Mt. xiii. 41 ; 1 Jn. iii. 4; in the same sense, ίργάζισβαι
την αν. Mt. vii. 23 ; plur. at ανομίαι manifestations of dis-
regard for law, ini(iuities, evil deeds: Ro. iv. 7 (Ps. xxxi.
(.\xxii.) 1); Heb. viii. 12 [RGL]; .x. 17. (In Grk.
writ. fr. [Hdt. 1, 96] Thuc. down; often in Sept.) [Syn.
cf. Trench § Ixvi. ; Tittm. i. 48 ; EUic. on Tit. ii. 14.] •
ά-νομοΐ, -ov, (νόμοι) ; 1. destitute of (the Mosaic)
law : used of Gentiles, 1 Co. ix. 21, (without any sugges-
tion of ' iniquity ' ; just as in Add. to Esth. iv. 42, where
άνομοι άπιρίτμητοι and άλΧότριοι are used together). 2.
departing from the law, a violator of the law, lawless,
wicked; (Vulg. iniquus ; [also injustusi) : Mk. xv. 28 [R
LTrbr.]; Lk. xxii. 37; Acts ii. 23, (so in Grk. writ.);
opp. to 6 di'icotor, 1 Tim. i. 9 ; ό άvoμot (κατ ίξοχήν), he in
whom all iniquity has as it were fixed its abo<Jc, 2 Th.
ii. 8; όν. fpyov an unlawful deed, 2 Pet. ii. 8 ; free f mm
law, not subject to law, [Vulg. sine lege^ : μη i>v άνομο;
θ(ού [Β. 169 (147)] (Rec. Λω), 1 Co. Lx. 21. (Very
often in Sept.) [Syn. see ανομία, fin.] *
<!νόμωΐ, adv., tcithout the law (see άνομο;, 1), without a
knowledge of the law: av. άμαρτάνιιν to sin in ignorance
of the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 12; αποΚ\υσθαι to perish, but
not by sentence of the Mosaic law, ibid, (άνόμω; ζην to
live ignorant of law and discipline, Isoc. panegyr. c. 1
ορθό
49
§ 39 ; άνήμω! άπόλλυσθαι to be slain contrary to law, as
in wars, sedition?, etc., ibid. c. 44 § 168. In Grk. writ,
f^enerally unju.ilhj, wirkeilli/, as 2 ilacc. viii. 17.)*
άν-ορθόω, -ώ : flit, αϊ/ορ^ώσω ; 1 ΆοΓ. άνώρθωσα'^ 1 aor.
pass, άνωμθώβην ( Lk. xiii. 13 ; without tlie aii^. άνορθώθην
LTTr; cf. [117/. A])]), p. 161]; B. 34 (30); [\V. 73]
(70)) ; 1. ίο set up, make erect: a crooked person, Lk.
xiii. 13 {she u-as made straight, stood erect); drooping
hands and relaxed knees (to raise them up by restoring
their strength), Heb. xii. 12. 2. to rear ar/ain, build
(iiicir: σκηνην. Acts χ v. 16 (Hdt. 1, 19 τον νηον . . . τ6ν
(νίπρησαν; 8,140; Xen. Hell. 4, 8, 12, etc. ; in various
senM-'s in Sept.).*
άν-όα-ιοΐ, -ov, (a priv. and οσίοΓ, (j. v.), unholi/, impious,
tricked : 1 Tim. i. 9 ; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (In Grk. writ, from
[Acsohyl. and] Hdt. down.)*
ύ/οχή, -ης, η, (compare άνΐχομαί τίνος, s. v. άν€χω p. 45),
tdleration, forbearance ; in this sense only in Ko. ii. 4 ;
iii. 26 (25). (In Grk. writ, aholding back, delaying,
fr. άνίχω to hold back, hinder.) [Cf. Trench § liii.] *
άντ-α-γωνίζομαι ; to struggle, fight ; προς τι, against a
tiling, Heb. xii. 4 [cf. W. § 52, 4, 3]. (Xen., Plat., Dera.,
ft.•.)*
άντ-άλλα-γμα, -τος, τό, (αντί in place of, in turn, and
άλλα-γμα see άλλάσσω), that which is given in place of
another thing by icaij of exchange ; what is given either in
order to keep or to acquire anything : Mt. xvi. 26 ; Mk.
viii. 37, where the sense is, 'nothing equals in value the
soul's salvation.' Christ transfers a proverbial expres-
sion respecting the su])reme value of the natural life
(Horn. II. 9, 401 ol yap ipo\ ψυχής άντάξιον) to the life
eternal. (Ruthiv. 7; Jer. xv. 13; Sir. vi. 15, etc. ; Eur.
Or. 1157; Joseph, b. j. 1, 18, 3.)*
άντ-ανα-ιτληρόω, -ω ; {αντί and άναπΧηρύω, q. v.) ; to fill
up in turn : Col. i. 24 (the meaning is, 'what is wanting
of the afflictions of Christ to be borne by me, that I
supply in order to repay the benefits which Christ con-
ferred on me by filling up the measure of the afflictions
laid upon him'); [Mey., Ellic, etc., exjilain the word
(with Wetst.) by 'άντΊ υστερήματος succedit άναττΚήρωμα' \
but see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc, who also quotes the pas-
gages where the word occurs]. (Dem. p. 182, 22; Dio
Cass. 44, 48 ; ApoUon. Dy.sc. de constr. orat. i. pp. 14,
1 [cf. Bttni. ad loc.]; 114, 8; 258, 3; 337, 4.)•
avT-awo-SCSu|u : fut. άιταποδώσω ; 2 aor. inf. άι/τατΓοδοΟ-
vai; 1 fut. pass, άvτa^rohoθr]σoμaι^. (αντί for something
received, in return, άποίίδωμι to give back) ; to repay,
reijuite; a. in a good sense : Lk. xiv. 14; Ro. xi. 35;
(νχαριστίαν Ttvi, 1 Th. iii. 9. b. in a bad sense, of
penalty and vengeance ; absol. : Ro. xii. 1 9 ; Heb. x.
30, (Deut. xxxii. 35) ; ίλίψ.ι/ τινί, 2 Th. i. 6. (Very
often in the Sept. and Apocr., in both senses ; in Grk.
writ. fr. [Hdt.] Thuc. down.)*
όι^-Λττό-δομια, -τος, τό, (sec αντανοδίδωμι), the thing paid
back; requital ; a. in a good sense : Lk. xiv. 1 2. b.
in a bad sense : Ro. .xi. 9. (In Sept. i. q. Swj, Judg. ix.
16 [.\lex.], etc. ; the Greeks say άνταπόδοσις [cf. W. 25].)*
άντ-α7ΓΟ-$ο<Γΐ5, -ίωΓ, η, recompense : Col. iii. 24. (In
Sept. i. q. SnJ, Is. lix. 18, etc. ; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc.
down.)*
άντ-απο-κρ(νομαι ; 1 aor. pass, άνταιίίκρί&ην [see άττο-
κρίνω, ii.] ; to contradict in reply, to ansicer by contradict-
ing, reply against : tiki ττρός τ», Lk. xiv. 6 ; (Sept. Judg.
v. 29 [Alex.] ; Job xvi. 8; xxxii. 12; Aesop, fab. 172
ed. de Furia, [p. 353 ed. Coray]). Hence i. q. to alter-
cate, dispute : with dat. of pers. Ro. ix. 20. (In a mathe-
matical sense, to correspond to each other or be parallel,
in Xicomach. arithm. 1,8, 11 p. 77 a. [p. 17 ed. Hoche].)
Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 1 7.*
άντ-ΐΙτΓον, a 2 aor. used instead of the verb avTiKiyav,
to s/ieak against, gainsay; [fr. Aeschyl. down] : Lk. \xi.
15; Acts iv. 14. Cf. (Ιττον.'
όια•-('χω : Mid., [])res. ΰντίχομαι]; fut. άνΰίξομαι; Ιο
hold before or against, hold back; icithstand, endure; in
the N. T. only in Mid. to keep one's self directly opposite
to any one, hold to him firmly, cleave to, paying heed to
him : τινός, Mt. vi. 24 ; Lk. xvi. 13 ; των άσθινίν, to aid
them, care for them, 1 Th. v. 14 ; τοϋ λόγου, to hold to,
hold it fast. Tit. i. 9. (Deut. xxxii. 41 ; Is. Ivi. 4, 6 : Prov.
iii. 18, etc., and often in Grk. writ.) Cf. Kiihner
§ 520 b. [2te Aull. § 41 6, 2 ; cf. Jelf § 536] ; W. 202 (190) ;
[B. 161 (140)].*
ovtC [before ων, avff ; elsewhere neglecting elision] a
preposition foil, by the gen. (answering to the Lat. ante
and the Germ, prefixes ant-, ent-), in the use of which
the N. T. writ, coincide with the Greek (ΛΥ. 364 (341)) ;
1. prop, it seems to have signified over against, opposite
to, before, in a local sense (Bttm. Gram. p. 412 ; [cf. Cur-
tius § 204]). Hence 2. indicating exchange, suc-
cession, /or, i'/i.</(ii</ o/", /)i/)/«ce oy (something), a. univ.
instead of: avr'i Ιχθύος όφιν, Lk. .xi. 1 1 ; άντ) περιβοΧαίου
to serve as a covering, 1 Co. xi. 15 ; άι/τϊ τοϋ λί'γ«ΐ', Jas.
iv. 15, (άντΊ ToO with inf. often in Grk. writ. [W. 329
(309) ; B. 263 (226)]). b. of that /or which any thing
is given, received, endured : Mt. v. 38 ; xvii. 27 (to
release me and thyself from obligation) ; Heb. xii. 2 (to
obtain the joy ; cf. Bleek, Liinemann, or Delitzsch ad
loc); of the price of sale (or purchase): Heb. xii. 16;
λύτροί' άντϊ πολλών, Mt. xx. 28 ; Mk. x. 45. Then c.
of recompense ; κακόν ami κακόν άηοδώόναι, Ro. xii. 1 7 ;
1 Th. V. IS; 1 Pet. iii. 9, (Sap. xi. 16 (15)). avff ων
equ'w. to άντϊ τούτων, ότι for that, because : Lk. i. 20; xix.
44 ; Acts xii. 23 ; 2 Th. ii. 10, (also in prof. auth. [exx.
in AVetst. on Luke i. 20] ; cf. Herm. ad Mg. p. 710; [AV.
364 (342), cf. 162 (153); B. 105 (92)]; Hebr. ^tlX ΡΠΙΛ,
Deut. xxi. 14 ; 2 K. xxii. 17). d. of the cause : άνθ' ων
wherefore, Lk. xii. 3; άντι τι,ΰτου for this caitse, Eph. λ.
31. e. of succession to the place of another: Άρχ-
βασι\ίί(ΐ αιτϊΉρώδου in place of Herod, Mt. ii. 22, (1 K.
xi. 44 ; Hdt. 1, 108; Xen. an. 1, 1, 4). χάριν άντ\ χάρι-
τος grace in the place of grace, grace succeeding grace
perpetually, i. e. the richest abundance of grace, Jn. i.
16, (Theogn. vs. 344 άντ ανιών ανίας [yet cf. the context
vs. 342 (vss. 780 and 778 ed. AVelcker) ; more appro-
priate are the reff. to Philo, i. 254 ed. Mang. (de jX)Ster.
Caini § 43, vol. ii. 39 ed. Richter), and Chrys. de sacer-
άυτιβάΧΚω
50
"Αντώχ^ΐΐα
(lot. 1. w. c. 13 § 622]). 3. As a prefix, it denotes
a. opposite, over ae/ainst : ΰντιπίμαν. άντίπαμ(ι)\(σθαι. b.
the mutual eliicienoy of two: άντιβύλλίΐ.ΐ', ΰντικαΧύν,
άιη-ιλοώομ(Ιν. C. reciuital : αντιμισθία, άνταπα^ίδωμι. ά.
hostile opposition : άιττίχριστο!- e. ollicial substitution,
instead of: ανθύπατο!-'
άντι-βάλλω; Ιο throw in turn, (prop. Thuc. 7, 25 ; Plut.
Nic. 25 ) : Xoyovs npos άΧλήλου! to e.xchange >Tords with
one another, Lk. .\.\iv. 17, [of. 2 Mace. xi. 13].•
οντι-δια-τΙβημ.ι : [pres. mid. άντι8ιατίθ(μαι] ; in mid. to
place one's self in opposition, to oppose: of heretics, 2 Tim.
ii. 25, of. De Wette [or lloltzm.] ad loc. ; (several times
in eccl. writ. ; in the act. to dispose in turn, to take in hand
in turn : τινά, Diod. e.xc. p. 602 [vol. v. p. 105, 24 ed.
Dind. ; absol. to retaliate, Pliilo de spec. legg. § 15; de
concupisc. § 4]).*
ovtCSikosi -01', (5ίκη) ; as subst. 6 αντίδικο! a. an op-
ponent in a suit at law : Mt. v. 25 ; Lk. .\ii. 58 ; xviii. 3,
(Xen., Plat., often in the Attic orators). b. univ. an
adversary, enemij, (Aeschyl. Ag. 41 ; Sir. xxxiii. 9; 1 S.
ii. 10 ; Is. .\li. 11, etc.) : 1 Pet. v. 8 (unless we prefer to
regard the devil as here called αντίδικος because he ac-
cuses men before God).*
άντ1-β€σΐ5, [{τίθημι), fr. Plato down], -ίω?, η ; a. nj)-
posillon. b. that irhirh is opposed: 1 Tim. vi. 20 (dp-
TiitVeif τη! ψίυδων. -γνώσ- the inventions of false knowl-
edge, either mutually oppugnant, or opposed to true
Christian doctrine).*
όντι.-καβ-ί(Γτημ.ι : 2 aor. άντικατίστην ] [fr. Hdt. down] ;
in the trans, tenses 1. to put in place of anotlicr.
2. to place in opposition, (to dispose troops, set an army
in line of battle) ; in the intrans. tenses, to stand against,
resist: lleb. xii. 4, (Thuc. 1, 02. 71).*
άντι-κοιλί'ω, -ω : 1 aor. άντικαΚ^σα ; to invite in turn :
τινά, Lk. xiv. 12. [Xen. conviv. 1, 15.]"
άντ£-κ£ΐμιαι ; 1. to be set over against, lie opposite to,
in a local sense, ([Ilippocr. de aere p. 282 Foes. (191
Chart.) ; Strab. 7, 7, 5] ; Hdian. 6, 2, 4 (2 Bekk.) ; 3, 15,
17 (8 Bekk.) ; [cf. Aristot. decaelo 1, 8 p. 277', 23]). 2.
to oppose, he adverse to, withstand : tiki, Lk. .xiii. 1 7 ; .xxi.
15; Gal. V. 17; iTim. i. 10. simply (6) αντικείμενο!, an
adversary, [Tittmann ii. il] : 1 Co. xvi. 9 ; Phil. i. L'« ; 2 Th.
ii. 4 ; 1 Tim. v. 14. (Dio Cass. 39, 8. Ex. xxiii. 22; 2
Mace. X. 26, etc. ; [see Soph. Lex. s. v.].) *
dvTiKpu (L Τ WII αντίκρυ! [Chandler § 881 ; Treg.
αντικρύ!. Cf. Loh. Path. Klementa ii. 283] ; ad Phryn. p.
444; {Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 500 sq.] ; Bttm. Ausf.
Spr ii. 366), adv. of place, over aijainst, opposite: with
gen., Acts xx. 15. (Often in Grk. writ. ; Philo de vict.
off. § 3 ; de vit. Moys. iii. § 7 ; in Place. § 10.) •
άντι-λαμβάνω : Mid., [pres. άνηλαμβάνομαιΊ; 2 aor.
άντίλαβόμην; to take in turn or in return, to receive one
thin η for another given, to receive instead of; in mid.,
freq. in Attic prose writ., 1. to lai/ hold of, holdfast
to, anything : titoe. 2. to take a person or thing in
order as it were to he held, to take to, emhrace ; with a
gen. of the pers., to help, succor : Lk. i. 54 ; Acts xx. 35,
(Diod. 11,13; Dio Cass. 40, 27 ; 46, 45 ; often in Sept.).
with a gen. of the thing, to he a partaker, partake of.
της eifpyeaiai of the benefit of the services rendered by
the slaves, 1 Tim. vi. 2 ; cf. De Wette ad loc. (μη:( ΐσθί-
ων ττΚΐΐόνίύν ηδονών άντιληψεται, Porphyr. de abstin. 1,
46 ; [cf. Eu.seb. h. e. 4, 15, 37 and exx. in Field, Otiiim
Norv. pars. iii. ad 1. c.]) [COMP. : σνν-αντι-\αμβάνομαι.^ '
αντι-λί'γω ; [inipf. άπΆί^οκ] ; to speak against, gainsay,
contradict; absol.: Acts xiii. 45 [L Tr WII om.]; xxviii.
19; Tit. i. 9. τικί. Acts xiii. 45. foil, by μή and ace. with
inf.: Lk. xx. 27 [Lmrg. TrWII Xf'yoiTii], (as in Grk.
writ. ; see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v. ; [λΥ'. § 65, 2 β. ;
Β. 355 (305)]). to oppose one's self to one, decline to obey
him, declare one's self against him, refuse to have anything
to do with him, [cf. W. 23 (22)] : τινί, .In. xix. 12, (Lcian.
dial, inferor. 30, 3) ; absol., Ro. x. 21 [cf. Meyer] ; 'J"it.
ii. 9, (Achill. Tat. 5, 27). Pass. avriKtyopai I am dis-
puted, a.isent or compliance is refused vie, (W. § 39, ]):
Lk. ii. 34 ; Acts xxviii. 22.*
όντί-ληψιβ [L Τ TrWII -Χημψις; see M, μ], -e<as, ή, (άιτι-
Χαμβάνομαι), in prof. auth. mutual acceptance (Thuc. I,
120), (i laying hold of, apprehension, perception, objection
of a disputant, etc. In bibl. speech aid, help, (Ps. xxi.
20 [cf. vs. 1] ; 1 Esdr. viii. 27 ; Sir. xi. 12 ; Ii. 7 ; 2 Mace.
XV. 7, etc.) ; plur., 1 Co. xii. 28, the ministrations of
the deacons, who have care of the poor and the sick.*
άντιλογία, -as, ψ {avTiKoyo!, and this fr. avτϊK(yω), [fr.
Ildt. down] ; 1. gainsaying, contradiction: Ileb. vii. 7;
with the added notion of strife, Ileb. vi. 16, (Ex. xviii.
1 6 ; Deut. xix. 1 7, etc.). 2. opposition in act, [this sense
is disputed by some, e. g. Liin. on Ileb. as below, INIey.
on Ro. X. 21 (see avriKtya); contra cf. Fritzsche on Ro.
I.e.]: Ileb. xii. 3; rebellion, Jude 11, (Prov. xvii. 11).*
άντι-λοιΒορίω -ώ : [iinpf. άντ(λοι8όρουν} ; to revile in turn,
to retort railing: 1 Pet. ii. 23. (Lcian. conviv. 40 ; Plut.
Anton. 42 ; [de inimic. util. § 5].)*
QVTC -λυτρον, -01), TO, irhat is given in exchange for another
as the price of his redeviplion, ransom : 1 Tim. ii. 6. (An
uncert. translator in Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 9 ; Orph. lith. 587 ;
[cf. W. 25].)*
άντι-μ€τρ€'ω, -ω : fut. pass, άντιμετρηθησομαι ; to measure
back, measure in return : Mt. vii. 2 Kec. ; Lk. vi. 38 [L.
mrg. WII mrg. μετρίω], (in a proverbial phrase, i. q. to
repay ; Lcian. amor. c. 19).*
αντιμισθία, -as, ή, (άντίμισθος remunerating) a re-
ward given in compensation, reijiiilal, recompense; a. in
a good sense : 2 Co. vi. 13 {την αντην άντιμισβ'ιαν ττΧατύν-
θητε κα\ νμε'ΐ!, a concise expression for Be ye also en•
lurged i. e. enlarge your hearts, just as I have done (vs.
11), that so ye may recompense me, — for το αυτό, ο ϊστιν
αντιμισθία; cf. W. 530 (493), and § 66, 1 b. ; [Β. 190
(l(i4); 396 (339)]). b. in a bad sense: Ko. i. 27.
(Found besides only in Theoph. Ant. ; Clem. Al. ; [Clem.
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 3. 5 ; 9, 7 ; 11, 6], and other Fathers.)»
Άντιο'χίΐα, -ας, η, Λ ntioch, the name (derived fr. various
monarchs) of several Asiatic cities, two of which are men-
tioned in the N. T. ; 1. The most celebrated of all,
and the capital of Syria, was situated on the river Oron-
tes, founded by Seleucus [I. sometimes (cf. Suidas s. v.
Άl•τιoχ^εύ^
51
άι/τλε'ω
Si'AfDitot. col. 3277 b. ed. Gaisf.) called] Nicanor [else-
where (of. id. col. 2137 b. s. v. Κολασσαίν?) son of Ni-
canor; but commonly Nicator (cf. Apjiian de rebus
Syr. §57; Spanh. de numis. diss. vii. § 3, vol. i. p. 4 1 3)],
and named in honor of his father Antiochus. Many
'Ελλΐ)ίΊσταί, Greek-Jews, lived in it ; and there those
who [)rofessed the name of Christ were first called
Christians : Acts xi. 19 sqq. ; xiii. 1 ; xiv. 26 ; xv. 22 sqq. ;
Gal. ii. 11 ; cf. lieuss in Schenkel i. 141 sq. ; [BB. DD.
s. v. ; Conyh. and Howson, St. Paul, i. 121-126 ; also the
latter in the Diet, of Geogr. s. v. ; Kenan, Les Apotres,
ch. xii.]. 2. A city of Phrygia, but called in Acts
xiii. 14 Antioch of Pkidia [or ace. to the crit. texts the
Pisidian Anlioch (see Πίσι'διοί)] because it was on the
confines of Pisidia, (more exactly ή npos Πισώία, Strabo
12, p. 577, 8) : Acts xiv. 19, 21 ; 2 Tim. iii. 11. This
was founded also by Seleucus Nicator, [cf. BB. DD. s. v. ;
Coritjh. and Howson, St. Paul, i. 168 sqq.].*
Άντιοχίνί, -ί'ωΕ, ό, ati Antiocldan, a native of Antioch :
Acts vi. 5.*
αντι-ΐΓαρ-€ρχομ.αι : 2 aor. άντιπαρηΚθον ; to pass by op-
posite to, [A. V. to pass by on the other side'] : Lk. x. 31 sq.
(where the meaning is, 'he passed by on the side oppo-
site to the wounded man, showing no compassion for
him'). (Anthol. Pal. 12, 8; to come to one's assistance
ar/ainsl a thing. Sap. xvi. 10. Found besides in eccl. and
Byzanf. writ.) *
'Αντίιι -as [Tdf. '.^I'TfiVaf, see s. v.fi, ί],-α (cf. W. § 8, 1 ;
[B. 20 (18)]), 6, Antipas (contr. fr. 'Αντίπατρο! W. 103
(97)), a Christian of Pergamum who suffered martyrdom,
otherwise unknown: Rev. ii. 13. On the absurd inter-
pretations of this name, cf. DUsterd. [Alf., Lee, al.] ad
loo. Fr. Gorres in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for
1878, p. 257 sqq., endeavors to discredit the opinion
that he was martyred, but by insufficient arguments.*
'AvTiiraTpis, -I'Sor, ij, A ntipntris, a city situated between
Jiil>pa and Ciesarea, in a very fertile region, not far
from the coast ; formerly called Χαβαρζαβά [al. Καφαρσα-
βά (or -σάβα)] (Joseph, antt. 13, l.'i, 1), and afterwards
rebuilt by Herod the Great and named Antipatris in
lionor of his father Antipater (Joseph, b.j. 1,21, 9): Acts
xxiii. 31. Cf. Robinson, Researches etc. iii. 45 sq. ; Later
Researches, iii. 138 sq., [also Bib. Sacr. for 1843 pp. 478-
498; and for 1853 p. 528 sq.].*
άντι-ΐΓί'ραν, or (ace. to the later forms fr. Polyb. down)
άντίπιρα [Τ WIl], avrnrepa [L Tr ; cf. B. 321; Lob.
Path. Elem. ii. 206; Chandler § 867], adv. of place, oi-er
(if/ainst, on the opposite shore, on the other side, with a gen. :
Lk. viii. 26.•
άντι^π-ΙτΓτω ; a. to fall upon, run against, [fr. Aristot.
down] ; b. to be adverse, oppose, strive against : τινί.
Acts vii. 51. (Ex. x.wi. 5 ; xxxvi. 12 ed. Compl. ; Num.
xxvii. 14 ; often in Polyb., Plut.)*
ώρΓΐ-<Γτρατίνομ.οι ; 1. to make a military expedition,
or take the feld, against any one : Xen. Cyr. 8, 8, 26.
2. to oppose, war against : rtw, Ro. vii. 23. (Aristaenet.
2, 1, 13.)•
άντίΓ^ιύτσω or -ττω : [pros. mid. αντιτάσσομαι] : to range
in battle against; mid. to oppose one's self, resist : tiki,
Ro. xiii. 2 ; Jas. iv. 6 ; v. 6 ; 1 Pet. v. 5 ; cf. Prov. iii. 34.
absol.. Acts xviii. 6. (Used by Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl.
down.) *
«ivTC-Tviros, -ov, (τύπτω), in Grk. writ. 1. prop. a.
actively, repelling a blow, striking back, echoing, reflecting
light ; resisting, rough, hard. b. passively, struck back,
repelled. 2. metaph. rough, harsh, obstinate, hostile.
In the N. T. language αντίτυπου as a subst. means 1.
(1 thi7ig formed after some pattern (τΰποΓ [q. v. 4 a.]),
(Germ. Abbild) : lleb. Lx. 24 [R. V. like in pattern].
2. a thing resembling another, its counterpart; something
in the Messianic times which answers to the type (see
Tvnos, 4 y.) prefiguring it in the 0. T. (Germ. Gegenbild,
Eng. antitype), as baptism corresponds to the deluge :
1 Pet. iii. 21 [R. V. txt. after a true likeness].*
ovrt-xpicTTos, -ου, ό, (αντί against and Χριστοί, like
άντίθίο! opposing God, in Philo de somn. 1. ii. § 27, etc.,
Justin, quaest. et resp. p. 463 c. and other Fathers ; [see
Soph. Lex. s. v., cf. Trench § xxx.]), tlie adversary of the
Messiah, a most pestilent being, to appear just before the
Messiah's advent, concerning whom the Jews liad con-
ceived diverse opinions, derived partly fr. Dan. xi. 36
sqq. ; vii. 25 ; viii. 25, partly fr. Ezek. x.xxviii. xxxLx.
Cf. Eisenmenger, Entdecktes Judenthum, ii. 704 sqq. ;
Gesenius in Ersch and Gruber's Encycl. iv. 292 sqq.
s. V. Antichrist ; Bohmer, Die Lehre v. Antichrist nach
Schneckenburger, in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. vol.
iv. p. 405 sqq. The name ό αντίχριστος was formed
perhaps by John, the only writer in the N. T. who uses
it, [five times] ; he employs it of the corrupt power and
influence hostile to Christian interests, especially that
which is at work in false teachers who have come from the
bosom of the church and are engaged in disseminating
error: 1 Jn. ii. 18 (where the meaning is, 'what ye have
heard concerning Antichrist, as about to make his ap-
pearance just before the return of Christ, is now fulfiUtMl
in the manv false teachers, most worthy to be called
antichrists,' [on the om. of the art. cf. B. 89 (78)]) ; 1 Jn.
iv. 3 ; and of the false teachers themselves, 1 Jn. ii. 22 ; 2
Jn. 7. In Paul and the Rev. the idea but not the η a m e
of Antichrist is found ; yet the conception differs from
that of John. For Paul teaches that Antichrist will be an
individual man [cf . B. D. as below], of the very worst
character (τον ανθρ. της άμαρτίαί; see αμαρτία, 1), in-
stigated by the devil to try to palm himself off as God :
2 Th. ii. 3-10. The author of the Apocalypse discovers
the power of Antichrist in the sway of imperial Rome,
and his person in the Emperor Nero, soon to return
from the dead : Rev. xiii. and xvii. (Often in eccl.
writ.) [See B. D. s.v. (Am. ed. for additional reff.), also
B. D. 8. V. Thess. 2d Ep. to the ; Kdhler in Herzog ed.
2, i. 446 sq.; Westcott, Epp. of St. John, pp. 68, 89. j*
ώτλίω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ήντ'λησα ; pt. ήντληκα ; (fr. ό SvrXot,
or TO "ivrXov, bilge-Λvater, [or rather, the place in the hold
where it settles, Eustath. com. in Ilom. 1728, 58 6 τόποι
ΐνθα ΰδωρ συρρ((ΐ, τά Te άνωθεν κα\ ίκ των αρμονίων]) ; a.
prop, to draw out a ship's bilge-water, to bale or punw
αντΧτημ,α
52
αξιο<;
Dili. b. univ. to draw water : Jn. ii. S ; iv. 15 ; ΰδωρ,
.In. ii. 9; iv. 7. (Gen. xxiv. 13, 20; Ex. ii. 16, 19 ; Is.
xU. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. lldt. tlown.) *
Αντλημα, -Tor, to ; a. prop, irltat is drawn, (Dioscor. 4,
64). b. Me at•/ w/V)-<iH'//ii/ water, (Pint. mor. [dc solert.
an. 21, 1] p. 974 e. [but this example belongs rather under
c.]). c. α lli!ng to draw with [cf. W. 93 (89)], bucket
untl rope let down into a well: .Jn. iv. 11.*
άντοφθαλμ^'ω, -ώ ; {άντι'>φθα\μος looking in the eye) ;
1. prop. Id look nrjdinst or straii/lit at. 2. metaph. to
Ixar 11/) at/ainul, withstand : τώ άνίμω, of a ship, [cf. our
'look the wind in the eye,' ' face ' (U. V.) tlie wind] : Acts
xxvii. 1.^. (Sap. xii. 14; often in Polyb. ; in eccl. writ.)*
&wSpo$, -oi/, (a priv. and ΰδωρ), ivithout water: πηγαί,
2 Pet. ii. 1 7 ; τόττοι, desert places, Alt. xii. 43 ; Lk. xi. 24,
(ή SvvSpos the desert, Is. xliii. 1 9 ; Ildt. 3, 4, etc. ; in Sept.
often γη anSpot), [desert places were believed to be the
haunts of demons; see Is. xiii. 21 ; xxxiv. 14 (in Sept.),
and Gesen. or Alex, on the former pass. ; cf. further.
Bar. iv. 35 ; Tob. viii. 3 ; 4 Mace, xviii. 8 ; (Enoch x. 4) ;
Rev. xviii. 2 ; cf. d. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. morgenl. Ge.sell.
xxi. 609] ; «φίλαι, waterless clouds (Verg. georg. 3, 197
s(i. arida nuhUa), which promise rain but yield none,
.lude 12. (In Grk. writ. fr. lldt. down.)*
QV-uiroKpiTos, -ow, (a priv. and υποκρίνομαι), unfeigned,
niidisr/uised : Ro. xii. 9 ; 2 Co. vi. 6 ; 1 Tim. i. 5 ; 2 Tim.
i. 5; 1 Pet. i. 22 ; Jas. iii. 17. (Sap. v. 19 ; xviii. 16. Not
found in prof, auth., except the adv. αννποκρίτωί in
Antonin. 8, 5.)*
άίππΓο'τακτοϊ, -ov, (a priv. and υποτάσσω) ; 1. [pas-
sively] not made subject, unsulijected : Ileb. ii. 8, [Artem.
oneir. 2, 30]. 2. [actively] that cannot be subjected
to control, disobedient, unruli/, refractory : 1 Tim. i. 9 ; Tit.
i. 6, 10, ([Epict. 2, 10, 1 ; 4, 1, 161 ; Philo, quis rer. div.
her. § 1]; ίιήγησί! άνυπ. a narrative which the reader
cannot classify, i. e. confused, Polyb. 3, 36, 4 ; 3, 3§, 4 ; 5,
21,4).•
ίνω, adv., [fr. Horn, down]; a. above, in a higher
place, (opp. to κάτω) : Acts ii. 19; ivith the article, ό, ή,
το ανω : Gal. iv. 26 (ή άνω '{(ρουσαλήμ the upper i. e. the
heavenly .Jerusalem) ; Phil. iii. 14 (ij άνω κλησκ the call-
ing made in heaven, equiv. to ίπουράνιοί, Ileb. iii. 1);
the neut. plur. τα άνω as subst., hea\enly things, Col. iii.
1 sq. ; e<c των άνω from heaven, .Jn. viii. 23. «at άνω, Jn.
ii. 7 (up to the brim), b. upwards, up, on high : .Jn. xi.
41 (αίρω) ; Ileb. xii. 15 (άι/ω φΰιι)'
όνοτγαιον and auuiyeov, see under avayatov.
έΐνωθίν, {άνω), adv. ; a. from abore, from a higher place:
άπο άνωθ(ν (W. § .JO, 7 N. 1), Mt. xxvii. 51 [Tdf. ora.
από] ; Mk. xv. 3.^ ; ΐκ τών άνωθ(ν from the upper part,
from the top, .Jn. xL\. 23. Often (also in Grk. writ.)
used of things which come from heaven, or from God as
dwelling in heaven : .In. iii. 31 ; xix. 11 ; ,Ias. i. 17 ; iii.
15,17. \>. from the first: Lk. i. 3; then, from the begin-
ning on, from the very first : Acts xxvi. 5. Hence c.
anew, over again, indicating repetition, (a use some-
what rare, but wrongly denied by many [Mey. among
them ; cf. his comm. on .In. and Gal. as below]) : Jn. iii. 3,
7 άν. γίννηθηναι, where others explain it from above, i. e.
from heaven. But, ace. to this exjilanation, Nicodemus
ought to have wondered how it was possible for any one
to be born from heaven; but this he did not say; [cf.
Westcott, Com. on Jn. p. 63]. Of the repetition of phys-
ical birth, we read in Artem. oneir. 1, 13 (14) p. 18
[i. p. 26 ed. lleiff] (άι/δρΐ) ίτι τώ c;(oit» ΐγκυον γυναίκα
σήμαινα iraiba αντω γ(ννησ€σθαι ομοιον κατά πάντα, οΰτω
γΰμ άνωθεν αυτός do^fif γΐννάσθαι ; cf. .Joseph, antt. 1, 18,
3 φιλίαν άνωθιν ποκ'ισθαι, where a little before stands
προτί'ρα φίλια; add, Martyr. Polyc. 1, 1 ; [also .Socrates
in Stub. Hor. cxxiv. 41, iv. 135 ed. Meinekc {iii. 438 ed.
Gaisf.) ; Ilarpocration, Lex. s. vv. άναίικάσασθαι, άναθί-
σθαι, άναποΒιζύμινα, άνασϋνταξί! ; Canon, apost. 4(ϊ (al. 39,
Coteler. patr. apost. opp. i. 444) ; Pseudo-Basil, de bapt.
1, 2, 7 (iii. 1537) ; Origen in Joann. t. xx. c. 12 (opp. iv.
322 c. De la Rue). See Abbot, Authorship of the Fijurlli
Gospel, etc. (Boston 1S80) p. 34 sq.]. πάλιν άνωθιν (on
this combination of synonymous words cf. Kiihncr § .Ί34,
1 ; [Jelf § 777, 1]; Grimm on Sap. xi.x. 5 (6)) : (ial. iv. 9
(again, since ye were in bondage once before).*
<ΐνωτ(ρι.κ6$. -η, -Of, {άνώτ(μοί), u/ipcr: τα άνωτιρικα μίρη,
Acts xi.x. 1 (i. e. the part of Asia Minor more remote
from the Mediterranean, farther east). (The word is
used by [Hippocr. and] Galen.)*
ovUTcpos. -tpa, -epnv, (compar. tr. άνω, cf. κατώτερος,
see W. §11, 2 c.; [B. 28 (24 sip)]), higher. The
neut. άκώτίρον as adv., /i/(//ier; a. oimotion, to a higher
place, {up higher) : Lk. xiv. 10. b. of rest, in <i higher
place, above i. e. in the immediately preceding part of
the passage quoted, Ileb. x. 8. Similarly Polyb. 3, 1, 1
τρίπ; άνώτίρον βΐβλω. (In Lev. xi. 21, with gen.)*
ιΰ.-<ιΐφ€λή;, -if, (a priv. and όφ('Κο!) ; fr. Aeschyl. doivn ;
unprofitable, useless : Tit. iii. 9. Neut. as subst. in Ileb.
vii. 18 (ίιά TO αϋτψ άνωφιλίΐ on account of its unprofita-
bleness).*
α|1ιπι, -η!, ή, ([perh. fr.] άγνυμι, fut. άξω, to break), an
axe: Lk. iii. 9 ; Mt. iii. 10. (As old as Horn, and lldt.)*
£ξιθΐ, -α, -ov, (fr. άγω, άξω ; therefore prop, drawing
down the scale ; hence) a. weighing, having weitjht ,
with a gen. having the weight of (weighing as much as)
another thing, of like value, worth as much : j3oot άξιος,
Hom. n. 23, 885; with gen. of price [W. 206 (194)].
as άξ. δί'κα μνών, common in Attic writ. ; πάν τίμιον ουκ
άξιον αντής {σοφίας) (στι, Prov. iii. 15; viii. 11; ουκ
?στι σταθμό: πάς c'l^ior ΐγκρατοΰς ^Ι/υχης, Sir. x.\vi. 15 ;
οΰκ άξια προς τ. ίόξαν are of no weiglit in compaiison
with the glory, i. e. are not to be put on an equality
with the glory, Ro. viii. 18; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. and
W. 405(378); [B. 340 (292)]. b. befitting, congru-
ous, corresponding, τινός, to η thing: της μετανοίας, Mt.
iii. 8 ; Lk. iii. 8 ; Acts xxvi. 20 ; άξια hv (πράξαμ(ν, Lk.
xxiii. 41. άξιον ίστι it is befitting : a. it i.< meet, 2 Th.
i. 3 (4 Mace. xvii. 8) ; β. it is worth the while, foil, by
ToO with ace. and inf., 1 Co. xvi. 4 ; — (in both senses very
com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. and Hdt. down, and often
witli ϊστί omitted). c. of one ivho has merited any-
thing, n-orthij, — both in a good reference and a bad :
ϊξίΟϋ
53
ατταΚΚασσω
α. in a good sense ; with a gen. of the thing: Mt. x.
10; Lk. vii. 4; [x. 7]; Actsxiii. 46; iTim. i. 15; iv. 9;
V. 18; vi. 1. foil, by the aor. inf. : Lk. xv. 19, 21 ; Acts
xiii. 25 ; Rev. iv. 11 ; v. 2, 4, 9, 12 ; foil, by Xva : Jn. i. 27
(uHi λύσω, a construction somewhat rare ; cf. Dem. pro
cor. p. 279, 9 a^iovv, Iva βηηθήση [(dubious) ; see s. v. Ira,
II. 2 init. and c.]) ; foil, by os with a finite verb (like Lat.
digmi.^, qui) : Lk. vii. 4 [B. 229 (198)]. It stands alone,
but so that the context makes it plain of what one is
said to be worthy : Mt. x. 1 1 (to lodge with) ; Mt. x. 1 3
(sc. τη: (ΐμήυηι;) ; Mt. -x-xii. 8 (sc. of the favor of an invi-
tation) ; Rev. iii. 4 (sc. to walk with me, clothed in
white), with a gen. of the person, — worthy of one's
fellowship, and of the blessings connected with it : Mt.
X. 37 sq. ; Heb. xi. 38, (τοΟ ieoC, .Sap. iii. 5 ; Ignat. ad
Eph. 2). β. in a bad sense: with a gen. of the thing:
■B\qyiov, Lk. xii. 48 ; θανάτου, Lk. .xxiii. 15 ; Acts [.xxiii.
29]; .X.XV. 11, [25]; .xxvi. 31; Ro. i. 32 ; absol. : Rev.
xvi. 6 (sc. to drink blood).*
ά|ιόω, -ώ : impf. ηξίουν ; 1 aor. ηξίωσα ; Pass., pf. rj^toy-
μαι; 1 fut. άζιωθησομαι; (αζιος) j as in Grk. writ. a.
to think meet, βΙ, rii/ht : foil, by an inf., Acts xv. 38 ;
xxviii. 22. b. to ji'i/fje wortki/, ileem ileservinr/ : τινά
with an inf. of the object, Lk. vii. 7 ; τινά tivos, 2 Th. i.
11 ; pass, with gen. of the thing, 1 Tim. v. 17; Ileb. iii.
3;x. 29. [COMP. : κατ-α^ίοω.]*
ά|ίως, adv., suitaUi/; icort/ii/i/, in a manner worth;/ of:
with the gen., Ro. xvi. 2 ; Phil. i. 27 ; Col. i. 10 ; 1 Th.
ii. 12; Eph. iv. 1 ; 3 Jn. 6. [From Soph, down.] *
ά-όρατοΐ, -ov, (όράω), either, not seen i. e. unseen, or
that cannot be seen i. e. invisible. In the latter sense
of God in Col. i. 15 ; 1 Tim. i. 1 7 ; ileb. xi. 27 ; τα αόρατα
αντοϋ his (God's) invisible nature [perfections], Ro. i.
20; τά ορατά κα\ τα αόρατα. Col. i. 16. (Gen. i. 2; Is.
xlv. 3 ; 2 Mace. ix. 5 ; Xcn., Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.)•
αΐΓ-αγγ€λλω; impf. aTrijyyeXXoi/ ; fut. απσγ^ίλώ; 1 aor.
an-i^yyeiAa ; 2 aor. pass. ά7Γτ;γγίλϊ;ν (Lk. viii. 20); [fr.
Hom. down] ; 1. άπό τίνος to bring tidings (from a
person or thing), bring word, report: Jn. iv. 51 [RGL
Tr br.] ; Acts iv. 23 ; v. 22 ; [xv. 27]; with dat. of the pers.,
Mt. ii. 8; xiv. 12; .x.xviii. 8, [8 (9) Rec], 10; Mk. xvi.
[10], 13; Acts V. 25; xi. 13; [x.xiii. 16, 19]; TtwTt, [Mt.
xi. 4 ; xxviii. 11 (here Tdf. άναγγ.)]; Jlk. [v, 19 (L mrg.
R G άναγγ.)] ; vi. 30 ; Lk. [vii. 22 ; ix. 36] ; xiv. 21 ; xxiv.
9; Actsxi. 13; [xii. 17; xvi. 38 L Τ Tr WH ; x.xiii. 17];
Tiw foil, by Sti, Lk. xviii. 37 ; [Jn. .xx. 18 R G; foil, by
Trie, Lk. viii. 36] ; τϊ ττρός τίνα, Acts xvi. 36 ; τίκΐ jrfpi
τιΐΌί, Lk. vii. 18; .xiii. 1 ; τι Ttepl τινοί. Acts xxviii. 21 ;
[foil, by \ϊγων and direct disc. Acts xxii. 26] ; foil, by
ace. with inf., Acts xii. 14; or with ace. of place, to
carry tidings to a place, Mk. v. 14 (Rec. άνήγγ.); Lk.
viii. 34 ; with addition of an ace. of the thing announced,
Mt. viii. 33, (Xen. an. 6, 2 (4), 25 ; Joseph, antt. 5, 11,
3; fit τους ανθρώπους. Am. iv. 13 Sept.). 2. to pro-
claim (άπό, because ivhat one announces he openly lays,
as it were, off from himself, cf. Germ. abkUndigen), to
make known openly, declare : univ., jrfpi tiios, 1 Th. i. 9 ;
"^τικί π(μι τ. Jn. xvi. 25 LT TrWII]; by teaching, r(, 1 Jn.
i. 2 sq. ; by teaching and commanding, τινί τι, Mt. λ iii.
33; Ttvi, with inf., Acts xxvi. 20; [xvii. 30 TWIITr
mrg.]; by avowing and praising, Lk. viii. 47; τινί τι,
Heb. ii. 12 (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 23 [yet Sept. διτγήσο/ιαι]) ;
[Mt. xii. 18] ; foil, by ότι, 1 Co. xiv. 25.•
άτΓ-ά•γχω [cf. Lat. anguslus, anxius, Eng. anguish, etc. ;
Curtius § 166]: 1 aor. mid. dffijy^ii/iiji/ : to throttle, stran-
gle, in order to put out of the way {άπό away, cf. άπο-
KTfivu to kill off), Hom. Od. 19, 230 ; mid. to hang one's
sejf, to end one's life by hanging: Mt. xxvii. 5. (2 S. .xvii.
23 ; Tob. iii. 10; in Attic from Aeschyl. down.)*
όΐΓβγω ; [impf. άπήγον (Lk. X-xiii. 26 Tr mrg. ΛΥΉ
mrg.)]; 2 aor. ajr^ayoi/; Pass., [pres. άπάγοριι] ; 1 aor.
άπήχθην; [fr. Hom. down]; to lead away: Lk. xiii. 15
(sc. άπό T^f φάτνης); Acts xxiii. 10 (Lchm. [ed. miu.]);
17 (ic. hence); x.xiv. 7 [R G] (away, (κτών χιφών ημών);
1 Co. .xii. 2 (led astray προς τά (ΐδωλα). Used esp. of
those led off to tri;il, prison, punishment : Mt. xxvi. 57 ;
xxvii. 2, 31 ; Mk. xiv. 44, 53 ; xv. 16 ; Lk. x.xi. 12 (T Tr
WH) ; [xxii. 66 Τ Tr WH] ; xxiii. 26 ; Jn. xviii. 13 R G
[vyayoi' L Τ Tr AVH] : xix. 16 Rec; Acts xii. 19; (so
also in Grk. Λτrit.). Used of a way leading to a certain
end : Mt. \i\. 13, 14 (fit την άπώΧ^ιαν. tis την ζωην).
[CoMP. : σνν-ατίήγω.] '
a-irotSeuTos, -ov, (ixaihtias), without instruction and dis-
cipline, unedncaled, ignorant, rude, [W. 96 (92)] : ζήτη-
σες, stupid questions, 2 Tim. ii. 23. (In classics fr.
[Eurip.,] Xen. down ; Sept. ; Joseph.)*
άΐΓ-α(ρω: 1 aor. pass, άπηρθην: to lift off, take or carry
aicay; pass., άπό τιιόγ to be taken away from any one:
Mt. Lx. 1 5 ; Mk. ii. 20 ; Lk. v. 35. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.
down.) •
άπ-αιτ€ω, -ώ : to ask'hack, demand back, exact something
due (.Sir. xx. 15 (14) σημΐρον Savftfl κα\ aCpLov απαίτησα) :
Lk. vi. 30 ; την ψυχην σου άπαιτοϊσιΐ' [Tr Α\ II αΐτοΰσιν^
thy soul, intrusted to thee by God for a time, is demanded
back, Lk. .xii. 20, (Sap. xv. 8 το της \(τυχης άπαιτηθί'ις
χρίος). (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)*
απ-οΧψα, -ώ : [pf. ptcp. άτπίΚγηκώς'] ; to cease to feel
pain or grief; a. to bear troubles tcith greater equa-
nimity, cease to feel pain at: Thuc. 2, 61 etc. b. to
became callous, insensible to pain, apathetic : so those who
have become insensible to truth and honor and shame
are called άπηΧγηκότις [A. Λ^. past feeling'] in Eph. iv.
19. (Polyb. 1, 35, 5 άιτη\γηκυίας ^υχάς dispirited and
useless for war, [cf. Polyb. 16, 12, 7].)*
άιτ-αλλάο-σω : 1 aor. άπή\\αξα : Pass., [pres. απαλλάσ-
σομαι] ; pf. inf. άτΓη\^άχθαι ; (άλλάσσω to change ; άπό,
sc. Tii /όί) ; com. in Grk. writ. ; to remove, release ; pass.
to be removed, to depart : άπ' αυτών τάς νόσους, Acts -xLx.
12 (Plat. Eryx. 401 c. ίΐ αί νόσοι άπαλλαγίίι^σαΐ' « τών
σωμάτων) : in a transferred and esp. in a legal sense,
άπό with gen. of pers., to be set free, the opponent being
appeased and withdrawing the suit, to be quit of one :
Lk. xii. 58, (so with a simple gen. of pers. Xen. mem. 2,
9, 6). Hence univ. to set free, deliver: τινά, Heb. ii. 15;
(in prof. auth. the gen. of the thing freed fr. is often
added ; cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 1, p. 339 sq.).•
άτταΧΚοτρίόω
54
οττα?
οπΓ^ιλλοτριόω, -ώ : pf. pass. ptcp. άτνηΧΚοτριωμίνοί : to
alienate, estrant/e ; pass, to be rendeml άΧΚότριος, In he
thut out from one's fellowship and intimacy: rtvos, Eph.
ii. 12; iv. 18; sc. τοί θ€οΰ, Col. i. 21, (equiv. to "^'i, used
of those who have estranged themselves fr. God, Ps.
Ivii. (Ivui.) 4: Is. i. 4 [Aid. etc.]; Ezek. xiv. 5, 7; [Test,
xii. Patr. test. Benj. § 10] ; των πατρίων Βογμάτων, 3 Maec.
i. 3; anaXXoTptoiv τίνα τοΰ καλώ! (χοντος, Clem. Kom. 1
Cor. 14,2). (In Grk. writ. fr. [Hippoer.,] Plato down.)*
diroXos, -17, -όν, lender : of the branch of a tree, when full
of sap, Mt. x.nIv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28. [From Horn, down.]*
άΐΓ-οντάω, -ώ : fut. απαντήσω (Mk. xiv. 13 ; but in better
Grk. άηαντήσομαι, cf. W. 83 (79) ; [B. 53 (46)]); 1 aor.
απήντησα: to go to meet: in past tenses, to meet : τινί, Mt.
xxviii. 9 [T Tr WH wr-] ; Mk. v. 2 R G ; xiv. 1 3 ; Lk. .xvu.
1 2 [L WH om. Tr br. dat. ; Τ WH mrg. read ύπ -J ; Jn. iv.
51 R G ; Acts xvi. 16 [R G L]. In a military sense of a
hostile meeting: Lk. xiv. 31 R G, as in 1 S. xxii. 17; 2
S. i. 15; 1 Mace. xi. 15, 68 and often in Grk. writ.*
άπάντησΊβ) -ear, 17, {απαντάω), a meeting ; (Ις άπάντησίν
Ttvof or Tivi to meet one : Mt. xxv. 1 R G ; vs. 6 ; Acts
xxviii. 15 ; 1 Th. iv. 17. (Polyb. 5, 26, 8 ; Diod. 18, 59 ;
very often in Sept. equiv. to nXTpS [cf. AV. 30].) *
όίΓοΙ, adv., once, one /iHiP, [fr. Horn, down] ; a. univ. :
2 Co. xi. 25 ; Heb. ix. 26 sq. ; 1 Pet. iii. 20 Rec. : ?τι
άπαξ, Ileb. xii. 26 sq. ; άπαξ τοϋ eviavToi, Heb. ix. 7, [Hdt.
2, 59, etc.]. b. like Lat. semel, used of what is so done
as to be of perpetual validity and never need repetition,
once for all : Heb. vi. 4 ; x. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 18 ; Jude vss. 3,
5. c. κα\ άπαξ και Sir indicates a definite number [the
double (cat emphasizing the repetition, both once and
again i. e.] tirice : 1 Th. ii. 18 ; Pliil. iv. 16 ; on the other
hand, άπαξ και his means [once and again i. e.] several
times, repeatedly : Neh. xiii. 20 ; 1 Mace. iii. 30. Cf.
Schott on 1 Th. ii. IS, p. 86 ; [Meyer on Phil. 1. c.].*
<ίπαρά-βατο$, -οι-, (παραβαίνω), fr. the phrase παραβαί-
yeiv νόμον to transgress i. e. to violate, signifying either
unviotated, or not to be violated, inviolable : 'κρωσΰνη un-
changeable and therefore not liable to pass to a successor,
Heb. Λαί. 24 ; cf. Bleek and DeUtzsch ad loc. (A later
word. cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 313 ; in Joseph., Plut., al.)*
o-irapa-o-KcvcuTTOS, -oi', (παρασκ(υάζω), unprepared : 2 Co.
i.\. 4. (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 15; an. 1, 1, 6 [var.]; 2,3, 21 ;
Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 41 ; Hdian. 3, 9, 19 [(11) ed. Bekk.] ;
adv. άπαρασκηάστως, [Aristot. rhet. Alex. 9 p. 1430* 3] ;
Clem. hom. 32, 15.)•
άπ-<ιρν(Όμαι, -ονμαι : depon. verb ; fut. άπαρνήσομαι ; 1
aor. άττηρνησάμην ; 1 fut. pass, άπαρνηθήσομαι with a pass.
signif. (Lk. xii. 9, as in Soph. Phil. 527, [cf. B. 53 (46)]) ;
lo deny {a b nego) : τικά, to affirm that one has no acquaint-
ance or connection with him ; of Peter denying Christ :
Mt. xxvi. 34 sq. 75 ; Mk. xiv. 30 sq. 72 ; [Lk. xxii. 61] ;
Jn. xiii. 38 R G L mrg. ; more fully άπ. μή cidtvai Ίησοϋν,
Lk. xxii. 34 (L Tr WH om. μή, concerning which cf.
Kuhner ii. p. 761 ; [.Telf § 749, 1 ; AV. § 65, 2 β. ; Β. 355
(305)]). ίαυτόν to forget one's self, lose si'jht of one's
self and one's own interests : Mt. xvi. 24 ; Mk. viii. 34 ;
Lk. ix. 23 R ΑΑΉ mrg.•
άιτάρτι [so Tdf. in Jn., Τ and Tr in Rev.], or rather άττ'
άρτι (cf. AV. § 5, 2 p. 45, and 422 (393) ; [B. 320 (275),
Lipsius p. 127]; see άρτι), adv., yVom nou; henceforth :
Mt. x.xiii. 39 ; .xxvi. 29, 64 (in Lk. xxii. 69 άπο τοΟ νΰν);
Jn. i. 51 (52) Rec. ; xiii. 19 ; xiv. 7 ; Rev. xiv. 13 (where
connect άπ' άρτι ν,ίύι μακάριοι). In the ( irk. of the O. T. it
is not found (for the Sept. render ^ΛΡι),''^ by από τοϋ viv),
and scarcely [yet L. and S. cite Arstph. PI. 388 ; Plat.
Com. Σοφ. 10] in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ.
For the similar term wliich the classic writ, employ is
to be written as one word, and oxytone (viz. άπαρτί),
and has a different signif. (viz. completely, exactly) ; cf.
Knapp, Scripta var. Arg. i. p. 296 ; Lob. ad Phryn. p.
20 sq.•
άπαρτισ-μές, -οΰ, ό, {απαρτίζω to finish, complete), com-
pletion : Lk. xiv. 28. Found besides only in Dion. Hal.
de comp. verb. c. 24 ; [ApoUon. Dysc. de adv. p. 532, 7,
al. ; cf. W. p. 24].*
άΐΓ-ορχή, -ήί, ή, (fr. άπάρχομαι : a. to offer firstlings
or first-fruits ; b. to take away the first-fruits ; cf. από in
άποδ(κατόω), in Sept. generally equiv. to Π'Ε'ΚΤ ; the frsl-
fruits of the productions of the earth (both those in a
natural state and those prepared for use by hand), which
were offered to God; cf. Win. R AV B. s. v. Erstlinge,
[BB.DD. s. V. First-fruits] : 17 απαρχή sc. τοϋ φυράματα!,
the first portion of the dough, from which sacred loaves
were to be prei>ared (Num. xv. 19-21), Ro. xi. 16.
Hence, in a transferred use, employed a. of persons
consecrated to God, leading the rest in time: απ. τη!
Άχαια! the first person in Achaia to enroll himself as a
Christian, 1 Co. xvi. 15; with eit Χριστόν added, Ro.
xvi. 5 ; with a reference to the moral creation effected
by Christianity all the Christians of that age are called
απαρχή τ is (a kind of first-fruits) τών toD Beov κτισμάτων,
Jas. i. 18 (see Huther ad loc), [noteworthy is eiXaro νμα! ό
deos άπαρχήν etc. as first-fruits^ 2 Th. ii. 13 L Tr mrg.
AVII mrg.; Christ is calleil άπ- τών κ^κοιμημίνων as the
first one recalled to life of them that have fallen asleep,
1 Co. XV. 20, 23 (here the phrase seems also to signify
that by his case the future resurrection of Christians is
guaranteed ; because the first-fruits forerun and are, as
it were, a pledge and promise of the rest of the har-
vest), b. of persons superior in e χ c e 1 1 e η c e to others
of the same class : so in Rev. xiv. 4 of a certain
class of Christians sacred and dear to God and Christ
beyond all others, (Schol. ad Eur. Or. 96 άπηρχή ίΚί-
yfTO οΰ μόνον το πρώτον τή τάξΐΐ. αλλά κα\ το πρώτον rfj
τιμή). C. οί €χοντΐ5 την άπ. τοϋ ττνΐνματος who have the
first-fruits (of future blessings) in the Spirit (τοΟ πν.
is gen. of apposition), Ro. viii. 23 ; cf. what AViner § 59,
8 a. says in opposition to those [e. g. Meyer, but see
AA^eiss in ed. 6] who take τοΟ ητ. asa partitive gen.,
so that oi €χ. τ. άπ. τοϋ πν. are distinguished from the
great multitude who will receive the Spirit subsequently.
(In Grk. writ. fr. [Soph..] Hdt. down.) *
ot-iras. -ασα. -αν, (fr. άμα [or rather ά (Skr. .ia ; cf. α
copulative), see Curtius § 598 ; Vaniiek p. 972] and nis ;
stronger than the simple Trot), [fr. Hom. down] ; r/uite
αναστται^ομαί
55
ατΓΐΐραστος
all, the whole, all together, all ; it is either placed before
a subst. having the art., as Lk. iii. 21 ; viii. 37 ; xix. 37 ;
or placed after, as Mk. xvi. 15 («s τόι» κόσμον άπαντα into
all parts of the world) ; Lk. iv. (i (this dominion ichole-ly
i. e. all parts of this dominion which you see) ; xix. 48.
used absolutely, — in the maso., as Mt. xxiv. 39; Lk. iii.
16 [T WH Tr" mrg. πάσιν] ; [iv. 40 WH txt. Tr mrg.] ; v.
26 ; L\. 15 [WH mrg. πάντας^ ; ilk. xi. 32 [Lchm. πάντί?] ;
Jas. iii. 2; — in the neut., as Mt. xxviii. 11; Lk. v. 28
[R G] ; Acts ii. 44 ; iv. 32 [L ΛλΉ Tr mrg. πάντα] ; χ. 8 ;
xi. 10 ; Eph. vi. 13 ; once in John viz. iv. 25 Τ Tr WII ;
[SffoiTef oJtoi, Acts ii. 7 L Τ ; άπαντ€! ύμfΐs, Gal. iii. 28 Τ
Tr; cf. πάί, Π. 1 fin. Rarely used by Paul; most fre-
quently by Luke. On its occurrence, cf. Alford, Grk.
Test. vol. ii. Proleg. p. 81 ; Ellicott on 1 Tim. i. 16].
ά•ΐΓ-ασιτάζο|ΐαι : 1 aor. άπησπασάμην ; to salute on leav-
ing, hid farfirell, take leave of: τινά. Acts xxi. 6 L Τ Tr
λΥΙΙ. (Ilimer. eclog. ex Phot. IL p. 194.)•
απατάω,- ώ ; 1 aor. pass, ήπατήθην; (απάτη); fr. Horn,
down ; to cheat, deceive, beguile : τήν KapSiav αυτοΰ [RT Tr
\VH mrg., αίτ. G, eavr. L AVH txt.], Jas. 5. 26 ; τινά τινι, one
with a thing, Eph. v. 6 ; pass. 1 Tim. li. 14 (where L Τ Tr
WH (ξαπατηθ€Ίσα).οί. fien. iii. 13. [CoMP. . ί'έ-απ-ατάω.]•
άττάτη. -ης, ή. [fr. Horn, down], deceit, deceitfulnesn :
Col. ii. 8 ; τον πλούτου, Mt. xiii. 22 ; Mk. iv. Ill ; τητ aStxt'o;,
2 Th. ii. 10; της αμαρτίας, ileb. iii. 13; ai ΐπίθνμίαι της
απάτης the lusts excited by deceit, i. e. by deceitful influ-
ences seducing to sin, Ejih. iv. 22, (others, 'deceitful
lusts ' ; but cf. Mey. ad loc.). Plur. άπάται : 2 Pet. ii. 13
(where L Tr txt. WH mrg. iv άγάπαις), by a paragram
(or verbal play) applied to the agapae or love-feasts (cf.
αγάπη, 2), because these were transformed by base men
into seductive revels.*
άπάτωρ, -ορός, ό, ή, (πατήρ), a word which has almost
the same variety of senses as άμήτωρ, q. v. ; [fr. Soph.
down] ; [icithout father i. e.] whose father is not recorded
in the genealogies : Heb. vii. 3.*
άΐΓ-αίγασ-μο, -ror, to, (fr. απανγάζω to emit brightness,
and this fr. avyj) brightness ; cf. άποσκίασμα, άπ^Ικασμα,
απίΐκόνισμα, άπήχημα), reflected brightness : Christ is
called in Heb. i. 3 άπανγ. της δόξης τοΰ θ(οϋ, inasmuch
as he perfectly reflects the majesty of God ; so that the
same thing is declared here of Christ metaphysically,
which he says of himself in an ethical sense in Jn. xii.
45 (xiv. 9) : ό θιωρων ΐμί θ(ωρ(ϊ τοι» πίμψαντά μ€. (Sap.
TU. 26 ; Philo, mund. opif, § 51 ; plant. Xoe § 1 2 ; de con-
cup, § 11; and often in eccl. writ.; see more fully in
Grimm on Sap. 1. c, p. 161 sq.) [Some interpreters still
adhere to the signif. effulgence or radiance (as distin-
guished from refulgence or reflection), see Kurtz ad
loc. ; Soph. Lex. s. v, ; Cremer s, v.] *
dir-{tSov, (από and «Γδον. 2 aor. of obsol. ίϊδω), serves as
2 aor. of αφοράω, (cf. Germ. a^.^eAen) ; 1. to look
aiL-ay from one thing and at another. 2. to look at
from somewhere, either from a distance or from a certain
present condition of things; to perceive : ur ά» απι'δω (L
Τ Tr ΛΥΗ άφίδω [see άψ^δοκ]) τα Trepi f^ie as soon as I
shall have seen what issue my affairs will have [A. V.
fiow it will go with me], Phil. ii. 23. (In Sept., Jon. iv.
5, etc.)•
anlSua [WH -θία, exc. in Heb. as below (see I, i)],-ar,
ή, (άπ(ίβής), disobedience, (Jerome, inobedientia), obsti-
nacy, and in the X. T. particularly obstinate opposition to
the divine will : Ro. xi. 30, 32 ; Heb. iv. 6,11; «iol τ. απά-
θειας, those who are animated by this obstinacy (see
ν'ιός, 2), used of the Gentiles: Eph. ii, 2 ; v, 6 ; Col. iii.
6 [R G L br.]. (Xen. mem. 3,5,5; Plut., al.) *
iamiia, -a ; impf. ηπεΐθουν; 1 aor. ήπιίθησα ; to be άπιιθής
(q. V.) ; not to allow one's self to be persuaded ; not to com-
ply with ; a. to refu.^e or withhold belief (in Christ, in
the gospel ; opp. to πιστ(ΰω) : τω υΐώ, Jn. iii. 36 ; τω
λόγω, 1 Pet. ii, 8; iii. 1 ; absol. of those who reject the
gospel, [R. V. to be disobedient ; cf. b.] : Acts xiv. 2 ;
xvii. 5 [Rec] ; xLx, 9 ; Ro. xv, 31 ; 1 Pet. ii. 7 (T Tr WH
άπιστονσιν). b. to refuse belief and obedience : with dat.
of thing or of pers., Ro. ii. 8 (τρ αΚηθιΊα) ; xi. 30 sq. (τώ
β(ω) ; 1 Pet. iv. 1 7 ; absol, Ro. x. 21 (Is. L\v. 2) ; Heb. iii'.
18 ; xi. 31 ; 1 Pet. iii. 20. (In Sept. com. equiv. to ΓΤίρ,
lie ; In Grk. writ, often fr. Aeschyl. Ag. 1049 down ; in
Horn, et al. άπιθ^Ίν.) *
άΐΓ^ιθή;. -«, gen. -oCi, (π(ίβομαι), impersuasible, uncom-
pliant, contumacious, [A. Λ'. disobedient'] : absol., Lk. i.
17 ; Tit, i. 16 ; iii. 3 ; τινί, 2 Tim. iii. 2 ; Ro. i. 30 ; Acts
xxvi. 19. (Deut. xxi. 18; Xum. xx. 10; Is. xx:x. 9;
Zech. vii, 1 2 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down ; [in Theogn,
1235 actively not persuasive].)*
άπ«λ(ω, -ά> : impf. ήπιιΚονν ; 1 aor. mid. ηπιιλησάμην ;
to threaten, menace ; 1 Pet. ii. 23 ; in mid., ace. to later
Grk, usage ([App, bell. civ. 3, 29] ; Polyaen. 7, 35, 2),
actively [B. 54 (47)] : Acts iv. 1 7 (άττ^λ, [L Τ Tr ΛΥΗ
cm,] άπ(ΐ\(Ίσθαι, with dat, of pers, foil, by μή with inf,,
with sternest threats to forbid one to etc, W, § 54, 3 ;
[B. 183 (159)]). (From Horn, down.) [CoMP. : προσ-
απf ιλ€ω-] *
άΐΓίΐλή, -ης, ή, α threatening, threat : Acts iv, 17 R G (cf.
άπίΐΧίω), 29 ; Lx. 1 ; Eph. vi. 9. (From Horn, down.) *
απ -ciiu ; («fii to be) ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to be away, be
absent : 1 Co. v. 3 ; 2 Co. x. 1, 11 ; xiii. 2, 10 ; Col. ii. 5 ;
Phil, i, 27 ; [in all cases exc. Col, 1. c. opp, to πάραμι].*
άΐΓ-ίίμι : impf. 3 pers, plur, άττ^ισαν ; (ιΊμι to go) ; [fr.
Hom, down] : to go away, depart : Acts xvii, 10,*
oiT-iiirov : (ίΓττοί', 2 aor. fr. obsol. ίπω) ; 1. to speak
out, set forth, declare, (Ilom. II. 7, 416 άγγ(\ίην ancenrfv,
9, 309 τον μΰθον άποίΐπ(Ίν). 2. to forbid : 1 Κ. xi, 2,
and in Attic writ, 3, to give up, renounce : with ace.
of the thing. Job x. 3 (for CN3), and often in Grk. writ,
fr, Hom, down. In the same sense 1 aor, mid. άπ(ΐπάμην,
2 Co. iv. 2 [see WH. App. p. 164], (cf. αισχύνη, 1) ; so
too in Hdt. 1, 59 ; 5, 56 ; 7, 14, [etc.], and the later writ,
fr. I'nlyb, down,*
QTetpcuTTos. -ov, (π(ΐράζω), as well untempted as un-
templable : άπιΐραστος κακών that cannot be tempted by
evil, not liable to temptation to sin. Jas. i. 13; cf. the
full remarks on this pass, in W. § 30, 4 [cf. § IC, 3 a. : B.
170(148)]. (Joseph, b. j. 5, 9, 3 : 7, 8, 1, and eccl. writ
The Greeks said άπίίρατοΐ, fr. πίΐράω.) '
ατΓΕ/,οο?
56
ατΓΐρ-χομαί
aircipos, -nv, (πύρα trial, experience), inexperienced in.
without fxperience of, with ^en. of the thin"; (as in Grk.
writ.) • lleb. V. IS. [(Pind. and Ildt. down.)] *
άΐΓ-«κ-είχομ.οι ; [iiiipf. άη(ζ(^(χόμην^, assiduuusli/ and
palienllijto wait for, [if. Kng. wait it out]: absol., I Pet.
iii. 20 (Kec. «δί'χομαι ) ; W, lio. viii. VJ, 23, 20; 1 Co. i.
7 ; Gal V. 5 (on this pa.-s. of. (Knis sub uu.) ; witli the
ace. of a pers., Christ in liis return from lieaven : Phil,
iii. 20; lleb. L\. 28. Cf. C. F. Λ. Fritzsche in Frilz-
schiorum Opuscc. p. 15.^ sq. ; Win. De verb. comj). etc. Pt.
iv. p. 14 ; [Ellic. on Gal. 1. c.]. (Scarcely found out of
the X. T. ; lleliod. .Veth. 2, Sb ; 7, 23.)'
άΐΓ-<κ-ενομαι : 1 aor. αττ(κ&υσάμψ ; 1. ichoUy to put
ojf'j'roin one's: self (ιϊπό (leiiotinj: separation fr. what is
put off) : Toi/ παλαιοί' ύνθρωπον, Col. iii. 9. 2. icIioUy
to strip οβ' for one's self (lor one's Oivn advantage), de-
spoil, di.iarm: τικά, Col. ii. la. Cf. Win. De verb. comp.
etc. Pt. iv. p. 14 sq., [esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. ii. 1.")]. (Jo-
seph, antt. 6, 14, 2 mrtKSiis [but ed. Bekk. /ΐΓΓ«δϋί] την
βασιλικην ί'σθητα.) '
όΐΓ-ί'κ-δυσΐ5, -f<ot, ή, (άπίκδύομαί, q. v.), a putting off,
l(ii/inr/ aside : Col. ii. 11. (Not found in Grk. writ.) *
άΐΓ-(λα\ίνω : 1 aor. άπήλασα ; to drive away, drive off':
Acts xviii. 16. (Com. in Grk. writ.)*
άιτ-ίλίγμόϊ, -oO, o, (i■nf\ίyχω to con\ ict, e.xpose, refute ;
Afy/iut conviction, refutation, in Sept. for eXfy^is),
vensure, repudiation of a thing shown to be worthless :
ίΚθι'ιν fit <Ϊ7Γ€λίγ/ιόΐ' to be proved to be worthless, to be
disesteemed, come into contempt [R. V. disrepute'^, Acts
xix. 27. (Xot used by prof, auth.)*
oir-iXcuetpos, -ου, ό, η, a manumitted slave, a freedman,
(άπο, cf. Germ, los, [^»el free from bondage]) : τοΰ κυρίου,
presented with (spiritual) freedom by the Lord, 1 Co.
vii. 2-.'. (In Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat, down.)*
Άικλληβ [better -λλ^Γ (so all edd.) ; see Chandler
§§ 59, 60], -oC, 0, Apelles, the prop, name of a certain
Christian: Ro. xvi. 10. [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. on PhiUp. p.
174.]*
άπ^ΊτΙζω (Lchm. άφιλπϊζω, [cf. gram. reff. s. v. άφ(1-
δοκ]); Ιο despair [W. 24]: μη8(ΐ> άπf\πίζovτ(s nothing
despairing sc. of the hoped-for recompense from God the
requiter, Lk. vi. 35, [T WIl mrg. μηδίνα άπ(λπ. ; if this
reading is to be tolerated it may be rendered despairing
of no one, or even causing no one to despair (cf. the
Jerus. Syriae). Tdf. himself seems half inclined to take
μηίίνα as neut. plur., a form thought to be not wholly un-
precedented ; cf. .Steph. Thesaur. v. col. 962]. (Is. xxix.
19 ; 2 Mace. ix. 18 ; Sir. xxii. 21 ; [x.wii. 21 ; Judith ix.
11]; often in Polyb. and Diod. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].)*
ώτ-ΐναντι, adv., with gen. [B. 319 (273)]; 1. over
against, o/iposite: τοΰ τάφηυ, Mt. xxvii. 61 ; [τοΰ γαζοφυ-
λακίου, Mk. xii. 41 Tr txt. WH mrg.]. 2. i;i sight of,
before : Mt. xxi. 2 R G ; xxvii. 24 (here L Tr WH txt.
κατίναντι) ; Acts iii. 16; Ro. iii. 18 (Ps. .xxxv. (xxxvi.)
2). 3. in opposition to, against : τών δογμάτων Kai-
βαροί. Acts xvii. 7. (Common in Sept. and Apocr. ;
Polyb. 1, 86, 3.)*
(im'pavTOf , -ok, (ntpaiva to go through, finish ; cf. άμά-
pavTos), that cannot be passed through, boundless, endless %
■ytvtaXoyim, protracted interminably, 1 Tim. i. 4. (Job
xxxvi. -.iu : 3 Mace. ii. 9; in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down.) *
άΐΓ<ρκητά<Γτω$, adv., {πιρισπάω, q. v.), without distrac-
tion, without solicitude : 1 Co. vii. 35. (The adjective
occurs in Sap. xvi. 11 ; Sir. xli. 1 ; often in Polyb. [the
adv. in 2, 20, 10; 4, 18, 6; 12, 28, 4 ; cf. W. 463 (431)]
and Plut.) *
ά-τΓ€ρί-τμητο5, -of, (π(ριτίμνω), uncircumcised ; metajjh.
άπ(ρίτμψοι ττ) καρδία (Jer. i.\. 26 ; £zek. xliv. 7) καϊ τ.
ωσί (Jer. vi. 10) whose heart and ears are covered, i. e.
whose soul and senses are closed to divine admonitious,
obdurate, Acts vii. 51. (Often in Sept. for S"i>' ; 1 Mace,
i. 48; ii. 46; [Philo de migr. Abr. §39];'Plut. am.
prol. 3.) •
άΐΓ-(ρχομαι; fut. άτ!(\(νσομαι (Mt. xxv. 46; Ro. XV.
28; W. 8G (82)); 2 acr. άπηλθον (άπηΧθα in Rev. x. 9
[where R G Tr Sov}, ά-πηλθαν L Τ Tr WH in Wt. xxii.
22; Rev. xxi. 1, 4 [(but here WH txt. only), etc., and
WH in Lk. xxiv. 24]; cf. W. § 13, 1 ; Mullach p. 17 sq.
[226] ; B. 39 (34) ; [Soph. Lex. p. 38 ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 1 23 ;
WH. App. p. 164 sq. ; Kuenen and Cobel, N. T. p. Ixiv. ;
Scrivener, Introd. p. 562; Collation, etc., p. liv. sq.]);
pf. άτΓίλι/λυία ( Jas. i. 24) ; plpf. ά■πfXη\ΰθflv (Jn. iv. 8) ;
[fr. Hom. down]; to go away (fr. a i)lace), to depart;
1. properly, a. absol. : Mt. xiii. 2.3 ; xix. 22 ; Mk. v.
20 ; Lk. viii. 39 ; xvii. 23 ; Jn. xvi. 7, etc. Ptcp. άπλθκίιψ
with indie, or subj. of other verbs in past time to go
(away) απί/ etc.: Mt. xiii. 28, 46 ; xviii. 30; xxv. 18, 25;
xxvi. 36 ; xxvii. 5 ; Mk. vi. 27 (28), 37 ; Lk. v. 14. b. with
specification of the place into which, or of the per-
son to whom or from whom one departs: ds >vith
ace. of place, Mt. v. 30 L Τ Tr WH; xiv. 15; xvi. 21;
xxii. 5 ; Mk. vi. 36 ; ix. 43 ; Jn. iv. 8 ; Ro. xv. 28, etc. ;
fit όδίιν (θνων, Mt. X. 5 ; fit το πίραν, Mt. viii. 18 ; Mk.
viii. 13; [δι' ΰμύν fit Μα«δ. 2 Co. i. 16 Lchm. txt.]; ϊπί
■κ\ύ\ ace. of place, Lk. [xxiii. 33 R G T] ; xxiv. 24 ; (Vi
with ace. of the business which one goes to attend to :
('πί (the true reading for R G (it) την (μπορίαν αϋτοϋ, Mt.
xxii. 5; («ί, Mt. ii. 22; ίξω with gen.. Acts iv. 15; προς
Tiva, Mt. xiv. 25 [Rec] ; Rev. x. 9 ; άπό Tirat, Lk. i. 38 ;
viii. 37. Hebraistically (cf. '"^ΠΚ ^'^Π) άπίρχ. οπίσω
Tivot Ιο go away in order to follow any one, go after him
figuratively, i. e. to follow his party, follow him a? a leader:
Mk. i. 20 ; Jn. xii. 1 9 ; in the same sense ατζίρχ. ■npos τίνα,
Jn. vi. 68; Xen. an. 1, 9, 16 (29); used also of those
who seek any one for vile purposes, Jude 7. Lexicog-
raphers (following Suidas, ' άπίΚθτ) ■ άντΊ τοΰ (ττανίλθη')
incorrectly ascribe to άπίρχισθαι also the idea of return-
ing, going linrk, — misled by the fact that a going away
is often at the same time a going hack. But where this
is the case, it is made evident either by the connection,
as in Lk. vii. 24, or by some adjunct, as fit τον ooto»
αντοϋ. Mt. ix. 7; Mk. vii. 30, (οίκαδ(, Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 6);
πpόt ίαυτόν [Trej. πρ. αυτόν] home, Lk. xxiv. 12 [R G,
but L Tr br. Τ WH reject the vs.] ; Jn. xx. 10 [here Τ
Tr irpos αυτούς, WH jr. αΰτ. (see αύτοΰ)] ; fit τα σττίσω,
Jn. vi. 66 (to return home) ; xviii. 6 (to draw back, re•
ητΓΐ'χω
57
treat). 2. trop. : of departing evils and sufferings,
.\rk. i. 42; Lie. τ. 13 (^ Xiitpa άπήλβιν άπ αντοϋ) ; Rev.
is.. 12 ; xi. 14 ; of good things taken away from one, Rev.
xviii. 14 [R G] ; of an evanescent state of things, Rev.
x.\i. 1 (Rec. παρήλθί), 4 ; of a report going forth or
spread els, Mt. iv. 24 [Treg. mrg. (ξήλθ(ΐ/].
άΐΓ-ί'χω; [impf. mrfixov Mt. xiv. 24 Tr txt. AVH txt. ;
pres. mid. άπϊχομαι^ ; 1. trans, a. to hold hack,
keep off,preccn', (Horn. Ή. 1, 97 [Zenod.] ; 6, 96; Plat.
Crat. c. 23 p. 407 b.). b. to have wholly or in full, to
have receiceil (what one had a right to expect or de-
mand; of. anohihovoi, άποΧαμβάνιιν, [ ΙΙ7;ί. De verb. comp.
etc. Pt. iv. p. 8 ; Gram. 275 (258) ; B.203(17U); aec. to
Bp. Lghtft. (on Phil. iv. 18) άπό denotes correspon-
dence, i. e. of the contents to the capacity, of the pos-
session to the desire, etc.]): τινά, Philem. 15; μισθόν,
Mt. vi. 2, 5, 16; ■παράκΚησιν, Lk. ^i. 24 ; πάντα, Pliil. iv.
18; (often so in Grk. writ. [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil.
1. c.]). Hence c. άπίχ^ι. impers., it is enough, suffi-
cient: Mk. xiv. 41, where the explanation is 'ye have
slept now long enough'; so that Christ takes away the
permission, just given to his disciples, of sleeping longer;
cf. Meyer ad loc. ; (in the same sense in (Pseudo-)
-Vnacr. in Odar. (15) 28,33; Cyril Alex, on Hag. ii.
9 [but the true reading here seems to be άπιχω, see P. E.
Pusey's ed. Oxon. 1868]). 2. intraus. to be aicay,
absent, distant, [B. 144 (126)]: absol., Lk. xv. 20; άπό,
Lk. τϋ. 6; xxiv- 13; Mt. [xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.] ; xv.
8; Mk. vii. 6, (Ts.xxLx. 13). 3. Mid. to hold one's self
off, abstain : άπό τιιόγ, from any thing. Acts xv. 20
[R G] ; 1 Th. iv. 3 ; v. 22, (.lob i.'l ; ii. 3 ; Ezek. viii. 6) ;
Tivos, Acts .XV. 29; 1 Tim. iv. 3 ; 1 Pet. ii. 11. (.So in
Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.t *
άιη<ΓΤ£ω, -ώ; [impf. ϊ^;Γίστουΐ'] ; 1 aor. ηπίστησα; {ani-
CTOs) ; 1. to helraif a trust, he unfaithful : 2 Tim. ii. 13
(opp. to ίτιστοί μίν€ΐ) ; Ro. iii. 3 ; [al. deny this sense in
the X. T. ; cf. Morison or Mey. on Rom. 1. c. ; Ellic. on
2 Tim. I. c.]. 2. to havn nu belief, disbelieve : in the
news of Christ's resurrection, Mk. xvi. 1 1 ; Lk. x.\iv.
41 ; with dat. of pers., Lk. xxiv. 11 ; in the tidings con-
cerning Jesus the Messiah, Mk. xvi. 16 (op]), to ni-
στ(ύω), [so 1 Pet. ii. 7 Τ Tr WH] ; Acts xxviii. 24. (In
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.)*
oirwrrto, -or, ή, (fr. άπιστα), tcani of failh and trust;
1. unfaithfulness, faithlessness, (of persons betraWng a
trust) : Ro. iii. 3 [cf. reff. s. v. άπιστ^ω, 1 ]. 2. iranI of
faith, unbelief: shown in withholding belief in the divine
power, Mk. xvi. 14, or in the power and promises of
God, Ro. iv. 20; Heb. iii. 19; in the divine mission of
Jesus, Mt. xiii. 58; Mk. vi. 6 ; by opposition to the gos-
pel, 1 Tim. i. 13; with the added notion of obstinacy,
Ro. xi. 20, 23 ; Heb. iii. 1 2. contextually, iceakness of
failh : Mt. xvii. 20 (where L Τ Tr WH ολιγοπιστίαν) ;
Mk. ix. 24. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hes. and Hdt. down.)*
ά-ιηο-ΓθΓι -ο», (πιστοί), [fr. Hom. down], without faith
OT trust; 1. unfaithful, faithless, (not to be trusted,
perfidious) : Lk. xii. 46 ; Rev. xxi. 8. 2. incredible,
of things : Acts xxvi. 8 ; (Xen. Hiero 1,9; symp. 4,
49 ; Cyr. 3, I, 26 ; Plat. Phaedr. 245 c. ; Joseph, antt. 6,
10, 2, etc.). 3. unbelieving, incredulous: of Thomas
disbelieving the news of the resurrection of Jesus, Jn.
XX. 27; of those who refuse belief in the gospel, 1 Co.
vi. C; vii. 12-15; x. 27 ; xiv. 22 sij<[. ; [iTim. v. 8];
with the added idea of impiety and wickedness, 2 Co.
iv. 4 ; vi. 14 sq. of those among the Christians them-
selves who reject the true faith, Tit. i. 15. without
trust (in God), Mt. xvii. 1 7 ; Mk. ix. 19 ; Lk. ix. 41.*
όπλότη?, -ητος, ή, singleness, simplicit'j, sincerity, men-
tal honcstij; the virtue of one who is free from pretence
and dissimulation, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. Cvr. I, 4,
3 ; HeU. 6, 1, 18, down) : iv άπ'Χότητι ( L Τ Tr WH ayii-
τητί) και fWiKpweici Bfuv i. e. infused by God through the
Spirit fW. g 3>;, 3 b.], 2 Co. i. 12; ev άπλ. τηί καρδίαι
(334 -^ψ', 1 Chr.xxix. 17), Col. ui. 22; Eph. vi. 5, (Sap.
i. 1) ; (if Χριστόν, sincerity of mind towards Christ, i. e.
single-hearted faith in Christ, as opp. to false wi.-^dom
in matters pertaining to Christianity, 2 Co. xi. 3 ; c»
άπλόπρ-» in simplicity, i. e. without self-seeking, Ro. xii.
8. openness of heart manifesting itself by benefactions,
liberality, [Joseph, antt. 7, 13, 4; but in opposition see
FritzscheonRom. vol. iii. 62 .«(j.] : 2 Co. viii. 2; ix. 11,
13 (t^s κοινωνία!, manifested by fellowship). Cf. Kling
s. v. ' Einfalt ' in Herzog iii. p. 723 sq.*
άπλοίϊ, -ή, -oiv, (contr. fr. -o'or. -όι;, -όον), [fr. AeschyL
down], simple, single, (in which there is nothing compli-
cated or confused; without folds, [cf. Trench § Ivi.]);
whole; of the eye, ^oof/, fulfilling its office, .«oun//: Mt.
vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34, — [al. contend that the moral sense
of the word is the only sense lexically Avarranted ; cf.
Test. xii. Patr. test. Isacli. § 3 oi κατιΚάλησά τίνος, etc.
7iop€vop€vos (V άττΧοτητι οφθαλμών, ibid. § 4 ττάντα 6pa
ev ά-π\ότητι, μη €πι8€χόμ€νυς υφθαλμοίς ηονηρίας οπό της
πλάνης ταϋ κόσμου ; yet cf. Fritzsche on Ro. xii. 8].*
απλώς, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], simply, openly, frank-
ly, sincerely : Jas. i. 5 (led solely by his desire to bless).*
«TO, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive,
(Lat. a, ab, abs. Germ. von. ah, weg, [cf. Eng. of, o//]),
from, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On
its use in the N. T., in wliich the influence of the Hebr.
]P is traceable, cf. W. 364 sq. (342), 369 (346) sqq. ; B.
321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words
beginning with a vowel see Tdf Proleg. p. 94 ; cf. W.
§ 5, 1 a. ; B. p. 10 sq. ; WH. App. p. 146.] In order
to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples,
but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by
this preposition, άπό, then, is used
I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation,
after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, feeing,
removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αίρω, απέρχομαι,
άττοηνάσσω, αποχωρ(ω, άφίστημι, φΐίτγω, etc.) : άπίσπά-
σθη άπ* αυτών, Lk. xxii. 41 ; βάλ€ άπό σον. ^It. ν. 29 sq. ;
ίΚ(3άλω το κάι^φος άπο [L Τ Tr λλ Η f'lc] τον όφθαλμον, ^It.
vii. 4 : αφ' [L WH Tr txt. παρ' (q. v. I. a.)] ης (κβ(β\ηκα
Saipovia,yik. xvi. $; καθ(ΐ\( άπο θρόνων, Lk. 1.52. 2. of
the separation of a part from the whole; whereof
a whole some part is taken : άπό Toij ιματίου, Mt. ix. 16 ;
58
από μ(\ισσίου κηρίου, Lk. xxiv. 42 [R G, but Tr br. the
clause] ; πττύ τών υψαρίων^ Jn. xxi. 10 ; τα αττό του πλοίου
fragments of the ship, Acts xxvii. 44 ; ('νοσφίσατα άπο
Tfjt τιμηί. Acts V. 2 ; (κχιω άπο τοΟ πΐ'ίνματοί, Acts ii.
17; ΐκ\(ξάμ(νος αττ* αΰτώι/, Lk. vi. 13; τίνα άπο των δυο,
Wt. xxvii. L'l ; όχ ΐτιμήσαντο άττύ υίώκ Ισραήλ, sc. τι«γ [Κ.
V. whom certain of the children of Israel tiul jirice (cf.
τΪΓ, 2 c.) ; but al. refer this to Π. 2 d. aa. fin. q. v.], ilt.
xxvii. 9, {ίξηΚθον άπο των 'κρϊων, sc. Tivts, 1 Mace. vii.
33) ; after verbs of eating and drinkimj (usually joined
in Grk. to the simple gen. of the thing [cf. B. 1S9 (139) ;
W. 198 (186) sq.]) : Mt. xv. 27; Mk. vii. 28 ; πίνιιν άπύ,
Lk. xxii. 18 (elsewhere in the N. T. «). 3. of any
kind of separation of one thing from another by which
the union or f e 1 1 ο w s h i [) of the two is destroyed;
a. after verbs of avertinij, loosenin/j, lihernlinf/, ransoin-
inq, preserving : see αγοράζω, απαλλάσσω, αποστρί'φω,
ί\ίνθ(ρόω. θΐραπίυω, καθαρίζω^ λούω, Χντρόω^ Χνω, ρνομαι^
σώζω, φυλάσσω, etc. b. after verbs of desisliiii/, tilislain-
ing, a raiding, etc. : see άπ€χω, παύω, καταπάνω, βλέπω,
προσέχω, φυλάσσομαι, etc. C. after verbs of concealing
and hindering: see κρύτττω, κωλύω, παρακαλύτττω. d.
Concise constructions, [cf. esp. B. 322 (277)]: ανάθεμα
άπο ToC Χριστοί, Ro. ix. 3 (see ανάθεμα sub fin.) ; λούειν
άπο τών πληγών to wash away the blood from the stripes,
Acts xvi. 33 ; μετανοείν άπο TTJt κακίαί by repentance to
turn away from wickedness, Acts viii. 22; άποθνήσκειν
άπό nvot by death to be freed from a tiling, Col. ii. 20 ;
φθείρεσθαι άπο της άπλότητο! to be corrupted and thus
led away from singleness of heart, 2 Co. xi. 3 ; ίϊσακου-
σθε'ΐ! άπο τ. ευλάβειας heard and accordingly delivered
from his fear, lleb. v. 7 (al. heard for i. e. on account of
Ai's godly /ear [cf. II. 2 b. below]). 4. of a state of
separation, i. e. of distance; and a. of distance of
Place, — of the local terminus from which: Mt. xxiii.
34; xxiv. 31, etc.; after μακράν, Mt. viii. 30; Mk. xii.
34 ; Jn. xxi. 8 ; after άπέχειν, see απέχω 2 ; απο άνωθεν
εως κάτω, Mk. xv. 38 ; άπο μακρόθεν, Mt. xxvii. 55, etc.
[cf. Β. 70 (G2) ; W. § B5, 2]. Ace. to later Grk. usage
it is put before nouns indicating local distance : Jn. xi.
1 8 (ην έγγνς ώί άπο σταδίων δεκαπέντε about fifteen fur-
longs off) ; Jn. xxi. 8 ; Rev. xiv. 20, ( Diod. i. 51 επάνω της
πόλεως άπο δέκα σχοίνων λίμνην ώρυζε, [also 1,97; 4, 56 ;
l(i, 46; 17,112; is, 40; I'.t, 25, etc.; cf. Soph. Lex.
s. V. 5] ; Jose))h. b. j. 1, 3, 5 τοντο αφ' εξακοσίων σταδίων
εντεύθεν «στιν. Plat. Aem. Paul. c. 18, 5 ώστε τους πρώ-
τους νεκρούς άπο δνοΊν σταδίων καταπεσεΐν. vit. Oth. c. 11,
1 κατεστρατοπέδευσεν άπο πεντήκοντα σταδίων, vit. Philop.
c. 4, 3 ην yap άγρίις αύτω άπο σταδίων ε'ίκοσι της πόλεως) ;
cf. W. 557 (518) sq. ; [Β. 153 (133)]. b. of distance
of Time, — of the temporal terminus from which, (Lat.
Inde a) : άπό της ώρας εκείνης, Mt. ix. 22 ; xvii. 18 ; Jn.
xix. 27 ; άπ' εκ- της ημέρας, Mt. xxii. 46 ; Jn. xi. 53 ; [άπό
πρώτης ημέρας.'] Actsxx. 18; Phil. i. 5 [LTTr^VHT^r πρ.
ημ-Ί ; άφ' ημερών αρχαίων. Acts χν. 7 ; άπ' ετών, Lk. viii.
43 ; Ro. XV. 23 ; άπ* αιώνος and άπό τ. αιώνων. Lk. i. 70,
etc. ; άπ* άρχης, Mt. xix. 4, 8, etc. ; άπό καταβολής κόσμου,
Mt. xiii. 35 [L Τ Tr WH om. κοσμ-Ί, etc. ; άπό κτίσεως
κόσμου, Ro. i. 20; άπό βρέφους from a child, 2 Tim. iii.
15 ; άπο της παρθενίας, Lk. ii. 36 ; άφ* ης (sc. ημέρας) since,
Lk. vii. 45 ; Acts xxiv. 11; 2Pet. iii. 4; άφ' ης ημέρας,
Col. i. 6, 9 ; άφ* ου equiv. to άπό τούτου ότε [cf. Β. 82
(71); 105 (92)], Lk. xiii. 25; xxiv. 21; Rev. xvi. 18,
(Ildt. 2, 44 ; and in Attic) ; άφ' ου after τρία ετη, Lk. xiii.
7 TTrWII; άπότοΟ νΰν from the present, henceforth, Lk. i.
48; V. 10; xii. 52; x.vii. 69; Acts xviii. 6; 2 Co. v. 16;
άπό TOTf, Mt. iv. 1 7 ; xvi. 21 ; xxvi. 16 ; Lk. xvi. 16 ; άπό
πέρυσι since last year, a year ago, 2 Co. viii. 10; L\. 2;
άπό πρωί. Acts xxviii. 23 ; cf. ΛΥ. 422 (393) ; [Β. 320
(275)] ; Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 47, 461. c. of distance of
Order or Rank, — of the terminus from which in any
succession of things or persons : άπό διετούς (sc. παιδός)
Kill κατωτέρω, Mt. ii. 16, (τοϋί Αευΐτας άπο ίΐκοσαίτοΟί
κα\ επάνω. Num. i. 20 ; 2 Esdr. iii. 8) ; άπό Αβραάμ εως
Δανείδ, ^It. i, 17; έβδομος άπο Αδάμ. J udi^ 14; άπό μικρού
έως μεγάλου. Acts viii. 10; Ileb. viii. 11 ; άρχεσθαι άπό
τίνος. .Mt. XX. 8 ; Lk. xxiii. 5 ; xxiv. 27 ; Jn. viii. 9 ; Acts
viii. 35; x. 37.
II. of Origin; whether of local origin, the place
whence ; or of causal origin, the cause from which. 1.
of the Place whence anything is, comes, befalls, is
taken ; a. after verbs of coming ; see έρχομαι, ηκω, etc. :
άπό [L Tr λνΐΐ άπ'] αγοράς sc. ελθόντες. Jlk. vii. 4 ; άγγελος
άπ' (τοϋ) oipavoi, Lk. xxii. 43 [Lbr. WH reject the pass.];
τον άπ' ουρανών sc. λαλοΟντα, Ileb. xii. 25, etc. ; of the
countrv, province, town, village, from which any one has
originated or proceeded [cf. W. 364 (342); B. 324
(279)]: Mt. ii. 1 ; iv. 25; Jn. i. 44 (45) ; xi. 1 ; μία άπό
όρους Σινά, Gal. iv. 24. Hence ό or οί άπό τίνος a native of,
a man of, some place : ό άπό ΐ^αζαρέθ the Nazarene, Mt.
xxi. 11:0 άπό Άριμαθαίας. Mk. xv. 43 ; Jn. xix. 38 [here
G LTrWII om. ό] ; οί άπό Ίόππης, Acts χ. 23; οί άπό
ΊταλιαΓ the Italians, Heb. .xiii. 24 [cf. W. § 66, 6]. A
great number of exx. fr. prof. writ, are given by Wieseler,
Untersuoh. iib. d. Ilcbriierbr. 2te Ilalfte, p. 14 sq. b.
of the party or society from which one has proceeded,
i. e. a member of the sect or society, a disciple or votary
of it: οί άπό της εκκλησίας. Acts xii. 1 ; οί άπό της α'ιρέ-
σεως τών Φαρισαίων. Acts XV. 5, (as in Grk. writ. : οί άπό
της Στοάς, οί άπό της Ακαδημίας, etc). C. of the material
from which a thing is made : άπό τριχών καμήλου, Mt.
iii. 4 [W. 370 (.•!47) ; Β. 324 (279)]. d. trop. of that
friim or hi/ which a thing is known : άπό τών καρπών
έπιγινώσκειν. Mt. vii. 16, 20 [here Lchm. εκ τ. κ. etc.]
(Lys. in Andoc. § 0; Aescbin. adv. Tim. p. 69 ed.
Reiske) ; μανθάνειν άπό τίνος to learn from the example
of any one, Mt. xi. 29 ; xxiv. 32 ; Mk. xiii. 28 ; but in
Gal. iii. 2 ; Col. i. 7 ; Heb. v. 8, μανθ. άπό τίνος means
to learn from one's teaching or training [cf. B. 324
(279) c. ; W. 372 (348)]. e. after verbs of seeking, in-
quiring, demanding: άπαιτε'ιν, Lk. xii. 20 [Tr WU αϊτ.];
friTiiv, 1 Th. ii. 6 (alternating there with έκ [cf. W. § 50,
2] ) ; έκζητε'ιν, Lk. xi. 50 sq. ; see αίτί'ω. 2. of c a u s a 1
origin, or the C a u s e ; and a. of the material cause,
so called, or of th-at which supplies the material for the
maintenance of the action expressed by the verb: so
59
άτΓοβαίνω
'ν€μΙζ(σθαι, χορτάζίσθαι, πλουτίΐΐ', Βιακονΰν από Ttt^'^s , — see
those verbs, b. of the cause on account oi which
anything is or is done, where commonly it can be ren-
dered for (La,t. prae, Germ, vor) : υίκ ήΒίνατο άπο τοΰ
οχλον, Lk. xix. 3 ; ούκίτι ίσχυσαν άπο τοΰ πλήθους, Jn.
xxi. C, (Judith ii. iO) ; άπό τ. δόξη! toC φωτόί, Acts xxii.
1 1 ; [here many would bring in ileb. v. 7 (ΛΥ. 371 (348) ;
Β. 322 (27G)), see I. 3 d. above], c. of the mo ving or
impelling cause (Lat. ex, prae; Germ, aus, vor), for,
out of: άπό της χαράς αϋτοϋ inrayti, Mt. xiii. 44 ; άπο τοΰ
φόβου for fear, Mt. xiv. 26 ; xxviii. 4 ; Lk. xxi. 26.
Ilebraistically : φοβ(Ίσβαι άπό nvos (jrp Κ")•), Mt. x. 28 ;
Lk. xii. 4 ; φ(ϋγ(ΐν άπό rims { ρ CU ), to flee for fear of
one, Jn. x. ό ; Mk. xiv. .j2 (R G, but L Tr mrg. br. άπ'
αυτών) ; Rev. ix. 6 ; cf. φ(ίγα and \V. 223 (209 sq.). d.
of the e f f i c i e η t cause, viz. of things from the force of
which anything proceeds, and of persons from whose
will, power, authority, command, favor, order, influence,
direction, anything is to be sought; aa. in general: άπο
τοί ϋπρου by force of the sleep, Acts xx. 9 ; άπο σοϋ
σημάον. Mt. xii. 3S ; άπο δόξης fls Βόξαν, 2 Co. iii. 18
(from the glory which we beliold for ourselves [cf. W.
254 (238)] in a mirror, goes out a glory in which we
share, cf. Meyer ad loc. ) ; άπό κυρίου πνιύματοί by the
Spirit of the Lord [yet cf. B. 343 (295)], ibid. ; όλιθρον
άπό προσώπου τοΟ κυρίου destruction proceeding from the
(incensed, wrathful) countenance of the Lord, 2 Th.
i. 9 (on this passage, to be explained after Jer. iv. 26
Sept., cf. Ewald) ; on the other hand, άνάψυξις άπό προ-
σώπου τ. κ. Acts iii. 20 (19) ; άπ^κτάνθησαν άπό (Rec. ίπό)
τών πλί/γώι/, Rev. ix. 18. άφ' έαυτοϋ. άφ' βαυτών, άπ €μαυ-
τοϋ, an expression esp. com. in John, of himself {mt/self
etc.), from his own disposition or judgment, as distin-
guished from another's instruction, [cf. AV. 372 (348)] :
Lk. xii. 57 ; xxi. 30 ; Jn. v. 19, 30 ; xi. 51 ; xiv. 10 ; xvi.
1 3 ; xviii. 34 [L Tr WII άπό σ<αυτ.] ; 2 Co. iii. 5 ; x. 7 [T
Tr WII (φ' i. (see eVi' A. I. 1 c'.)] ; of one's oicn will and
motion, as opp. to the command and authority of another:
Jn. vii. 17 sq. 28; viii. 42 ; x. 18, (Num. xvi. 28) ; by one's
own power : Jn. xv. 4 ; by one's power and on one's own
judyment : Jn. viii. 28 ; exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in
Kjipke, Observ. i. p. 391. [Cf. (ϋχψ ΐχοντα άφ' (al. ϊφ' see
ί'πί Α. L 1 f.) (αυτών, Acts xxi. 23 WII txt.] after verbs
oflearniny, knowiny, receiriny, άπό is used of him to whom
we are indebted for what we know, receive, possess, [cf . W.
370 (347) n., also De verb. comp. etc. Ft. ii. p.7 sq. ; B. 324
(279) ; Mey. on 1 Co. xi. 23 ; per contra Bp. Lghtft.
on Gal. i. 12] : άκοΰ^ιν. Acts ix. 13 ; 1 Jn. i. 5; -γινώσκιιν,
Mk. XV. 45 ; Χαμβάναν, Mt. xvii. 25 sq. ; 1 Jn. ii. 27 ; iii.
22 L Τ Tr WII ; ϊχαν, 1 Jn. iv. 21 ; 2 Co. ii. 3, etc. ;
παραλάμβαναν, 1 Co. xi. 23 : δίχισθαι, Acts xxviii. 21 ;
respecting μανθάν(ΐν see above, II. 1 d. ; λατρει'ω τω θ(ω
άπό προγόνων after the manner of the λατρεία received
from my forefathers [cf. W. 372 (349) ; B. 322 (277)]. 2
Tim. i. 3. yiVcrai /lot, 1 Co. i. 30 ; iv. 5 ; χάρις άπό θ(οϋ
or τοΰ θ(ον. from God, the author, bestower, Ro. i. 7 ; 1
Co. i. 3 ; Gal. i. 3, and often ; κα\ τοΰτο άπό θιοϋ, Phil. i. 28.
άπόστολοΓ άπό etc., constituted an apostls by authority
and commission, etc. [cf. W. 418 (390)], Gal. i. 1. after
πάσχ(ΐν, Mt. xvi. 21 ; [akin to this, ace. to many, is Mt.
xxvii. 9 ov ζτιμησαντο άπό τών υιών ΊσραηΧ, R. V. mrg.
whom they priced on the part of the sons of Israel ; but see
in I. 2 above], bb. When άπό is used after passives
(which is rare in the better Grk. auth., cf. Bnhdy. p. 222
sqq. ; [B. 325 (280) ; W. 371 (347 sq.)]), the connection
between the cause and the effect is conceived of as looser
and more temote than that indicated by υπό, and may
often be expressed by on the part of (Germ, ron Seiten),
[A. V. generally o/"] : άπό τοΰ θ(οΰ άποδ€δ(ΐγμ(νον ap-
proved (by miracles) according to God's wiU and ap-
pointment. Acts ii. 22 ; άπό β(οϋ παράζομαι the cause of
my temptation is to be sought in God, Jas. i. 1 3 ; άπ€-
στ(ρημ€νος [Τ Tr WII άφι/στίρ.] άφ' ύμώΐ' by your fraud,
flas. V. 4 : άποδοκιμάζ^σΟαί, Lk. xvii. 25 ; [^ΐδικαίώθη η σοφία
άπό τών τέκνων, Lk. vii. 35 ace. to some ; see δικαιόω, 2] ;
τόποί' ήτοιμασμίνον άπό τοΰ ieoC by the will and direction
of God, Rev. xii. G ; όχλούμινοι άπό ( Rec. υπό, [see όχλίω^)
πνευμάτων άκαθάρτ. Lk. vi. 1 8 (whose annoyance by dis-
eases [(?) cf. vs. 1 7] proceeded from unclean sjiirits
[A. V. vexed (troubled) with etc.]) ; άπό τ. σαρκός ί'σπιλω-
μίνον by touching the flesh, Jude 23 : [add Lk. i. 26 Τ Tr
WII απεστάλη 6 αγγΐλος άπό (R G Ι..νπό) τοΰ ^eoO], As
in prof. auth. so also in the X. T. the Mss. sometimes
vary between άπό and ύπό : e. g. in Mk. viii. 31 ; [Lk. viii.
43] ; Acts iv. 36 ; [x. 17, 33 ; xv. 4] ; Ro. .xiii. 1 ; [xv.
24]; Rev Lx. 18 ; see W. 370 (347) sq. ; B. 325 (280)
sq. ; [cf. X'incent and Dickson, Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App.
§41]•
in. Phrases having a quasi-adverbial force, and in-
dicating the manner or degree in which anything is
done or occurs, are the following : άπο τ. καρδιών ίμώ»
from your hearts, i. e. willingly and sincerely, Mt. .xviii.
35 ; άπό μίρους in part, 2 Co. i. 14 ; ii. 5 ; Ro. xi. 25 ; xv.
24 ; άπό μιας sc. either φωνής with one voice, or γνώμης or
ψυχής with one consent, one mind, Lk. xiv. 18 (cf. Kuinoel
ad loc; [W. 423 (394) ; 591 (549 sq.) ; yet see Lob. Par-
alip. p. 363]).
IV. The extraordinary construction άπό ό ων (for Rec.
άπό ToC ό) κα\ ό ην κα\ ό (ρχόμ(νος. Rev. i. 4, finds its ex-
planation in the fact that the writer seems to have used
the words ό ών κτλ. as an indeclinable noun, for the
purpose of indicating the meaning of the proper name
Π1Π• ; cf. AY. § 10, 2 lin. : [B. 50 (43)].
V. Li composition άπό indicates separation, liberation,
cessation, departure, as in αποβάλλω, άποκότττω. άποκνλίω,
άπόλΰω, άπολΰτρωσις, άπαλγϊω, άπίρχομαι ; finishing and
completion, as in απαρτίζω, άποτίλί'ω ; refers to the pat-
tern from wldch a copy is taken, as in άπογράφ€ΐν, άφομοι-
οϋν, etc. ; or to liim from whom the action proceeds, as
in άποδίίκνυμι. άποτολ/ιάω, etc.
άτΓΟ-βαίνω : fut. άποβήσομαι; 2 aor. άπΐβην; 1. to
come down from : a ship (so even in Horn.), άπό. Lk. v. 2
[Tr mrg. br. άπ* αυτών^ ; €ts την γήν, Jn. xxi. 9. 2.
trop. to turn out, 'eventuate,' (so fr. Hdt. down) : άποβψ
σίται Ιμ'ιν fit μαρ/τνριον it will issue, turn out, Lk. xxi. 13; tls
σωτηρίαν, Phil. i. 1 9. (Job xiii. 16 ; Artem. oneir. 3, 66.) •
άτΓοβά\\ω
60
άτΓοΒίΒωμι
άίΓο-βάλλω : 2 aor. άπίβάΧον ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to throw
off, cast away : a garment, Mk. x. 50. trop. confidence,
Heb. X. 35.•
όίΓΟ-βλίττω : [impf. άπ(β\(πον] ; Ιο turn lite eyes away
from other Ihiiiys ami fix them on someone thing ; to look
at attentively : (it τι (often in (Irk. writ.) ; trop. lo look
with steadfast mental gaze : dt τ. μισθαποδοσίαν, Heb. xi.
26 [W. § 66, 2 d.].•
άιτΑ-βλητοί, -OK, thrown away, to be thrown away, re-
jected, despised, abominated : as unclean, 1 Tim. iv. 4,
(in Hos. ix. 3 Symm. etiuiv. to S?u unclean ; Horn. II. 2,
361 ; 3, r,r>; Lcian., riut.).*
άπο-βολή, -ης, ή, (I thniiving away; 1. rejection, re-
pudiation, (άπο^α'λλίσίαι In throw away J'rom orii's self,
cast iff, repudiate) : Ro. xi. 15 (opp. to πρόσΧημψΐ! αϊτών,
objec. gen.). 2. a losing, loss, (fr. άττο/ϋύλλω in the
sense of lose) : Acts xxvii. 22 anofSuX!) ψυχή! oiSf/ii'a
ΐσται (ξ νμων no one of you shall lose his life [W. § U7,
1 e.]. (Plat., Pint., al.)•
άίΓο-γίνομαι : [2 aor. άπ(γ(νήμην^ ; 1. to be removed
from, depart. 2. lo die, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.
down); hence trop. άπογ. τιχι to die lo any thing: raU
άμαρτίαΐ! άπογ(νόμ(νοι i. e. become utterly alienated from
our sins, 1 Pet. ii. 24 [W. §52,4, 1 d.; B. 178 (15.:.)].•
άτΓΟ-γραφή, -η!, ή. (απογράφω) ; a. a writing off, trans-
cript (from some jjattern). b. an enrolment (or regi.s-
tration) in the public records of persons together with their
property and income, as the basis of an άποτίμησίί (census
or valuation), i. e. that it might appear how much tax
should be levied upon each one: Lk. ii. 2; Acts v. 37;
on the occurrence spoken of in both pass. cf. Schiirer,
Ntl. Zeitgesch. § 17, ι>ρ. 251, 262-286, and books there
mentioned ; [McClcllan i. 392-399 ; B. D. s. v. Taxing].•
ότΓΟ-γράφω : Mid., [pres. inf. απογράφίσθαι^ ; 1 aor.
inf. άπογράψασθαι ; [pf. pass. ptcp. άπογίγραμμίνο! ; fr.
Ildt. down] ; a. lo write off', copy (from some pattern).
b. lo enter in a register or records; spec, to enter in the
public records the names of meri,their properly and income,
lo enroll,((:i■άπoyρaφή,h.); mid.lohave one's self registered,
lo enroll one's self [ \V.§ 38, 3] : Lk. ii. 1, 3, 5 ; pass, ol ev
oipapo'is άπογιγραμμίνοι those whose names are inscribed
in the heavenly register, Ileb. xii. 23 (the reference is
to the dead already received into the heavenly city, the
figure being drawn fioin civil communities on earth,
whose citizens are enrolled in a register).*
άπο-ε£(κννμι ; 1 aor. άπίδίΐξα ; pf. pass. ptcp. a)ro6f δίΐ -y-
/liVos; (freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Find. Nem. 6, 80 down);
1. prop, lo point away froin one's self, to point out, show
forth; to expose lo view, exhibit, (Ildt. 3, 122 and often) :
1 Co. iv. 9. Hence 2. to declare : τικά, lo shoic, prove
what Kind of a person any one is. Acts ii. 22 (where cod.
i) gives the gloss 18(Βοκιμ^ασμίνον) ; 2 Th. ii. 4 [Lchm. mrg.
anoSfiyviovra^. to prove by arguments, demonstrate : Acts
xxv. 7. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 16 sq.*
άιτό-8«ξΐΐ, -ίω5, ή, (άποδίίκηι/ιι, q. v.), [fr. Hdt. down] ;
a. a making manifest, showing forth, b. a demonstration,
prooj': άπόδ»^ΐί πνήματος και ίυνάμούΐ a proof by the
Spirit and power of God, operating in me, and stirring in
the minds of my hearers the most holy emotions and
thus ])ersuading them, 1 Co. ii. 4 (conte.xtually opposed
to |)roof by rhetorical arts and philosophic arguments,
— the sense in which the (ireek philosophers use tlie
word ; [see Ilelnrici, Corinthierbr. i. p. 103 s([.]).•
άΐΓο-8ίκοτ€«ω, Lk. xviii. 12, for άπο8<κατόω (j. v. ; [cf.
117/. App. p. 171].
ότΓΟ-δίκατόω, -ώ, inf. pres. άπ-οδίκατοίκ, Heb. vii. 5 Τ
Tr WH (cf. DeUtzsch ad loc. ; B. 44 (38) ; [Tdf.'s note
ad loc. ; WH. Intr. § 410]) ; (δ(κατοω q. v.) ; a bibl. anil
eccl. word ; Sept. for "ib^'; lo tithe i. e. 1. with ace. of
the thing, to give, pay, a tenth of any thing : Mt. xxiii. 23 ;
Lk. xi. 42 ; .xviii. 12 where Τ WH, after codd. K* 1! only,
have adopted αττοδίκατΕύω, for which the simple δίκατ(ΐ'ω
is more common in (irk. writ.; (Gen. xxviii. 22; Dcut.
xiv. 21 (22)). 2. Ttva, to exact, receive, a tenth from any
one : Heb. vii. 5 ; (1 S. viii. 15, 1 7). [B. D. s. v. Tithe.] '
άΐΓΟ-δίκτο5 [so L τ WH accent (and Rec. in 1 Tim. ii.
3); al.ilTroSiKTUs, cf. Zot. Parahp. p. 498; Gottling p. 313
sq. ; Chandler § 529 sq.], -ov, (see άποδίχομαι), a later
word, accepted, acceptable, agreeable : 1 liiu. ii. 3 ; v. 4.*
άπο-8<χομ.αι ; depon. mid. ; impf. aπfSfχ6μηv ; 1 aor. άπ€-
8(ξάμην; 1 aor. pass. άπ(8(χθην; common in (irk. writ.,
esp. the Attic, fr. Ilom. down ; in the N. T. used only by
Luke; to accept what is offered from without (από, cf. Lat.
excipio), to accept from, receive: τινά, sim])ly, to give
one access to one's self, Lk. ix. 11 L Τ Tr WH ; Acts
xxviii. 30 ; with emphasis [cf . Tob. vii. 1 7 and Fritzsclie
ad loc.], to receive with joy, Lk. viii 40 ; to receive to
hosi)itality. Acts xxi. 17 L Τ Tr AVH ; to grant one ac-
cess to one's self in the capacity in which he wishes to be
regarded, e. g. as the messenger of others. Acts xv. 4 (L
Τ Tr WH παρ(8ίχδησαν) ; as a Christian, Acts xviii. 27 ;
metaph. τι, lo receive into the mind with assent : to aj/•
jirove. Acts x,xiv. 3; lo believe, τον λόγον, Acts ii. 41 ; (so
in (irk. ΛνηΙ. esp. Plato; cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. i. p. 232).•
άπο&ημ(ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. άπ(&ήμησα ; (απόδημος, q. v.) ; to
go away to foreign parts, go abroad : Mt. xxi. 33 ; xxv. 14
sq. ; Mk. xii. 1 ; Lk. xv. 13 (els χώραν) ; xx. 9. (In Grk.
writ. fr. Hdt. down.) *
όΐΓΟ-δημο5, -ov. (fr. από and δημο! the people), away
from one's peojile, gone abroad: Mk. xiii. 34 [R. V. so-
journing in another country"]• [From Find, down.]'
ά'πΌ-SC8(ι>μι, pres. ptcp. neut. άποδιδοΟν (fr. the form
-διδόω. Rev. xxii. 2, where Τ Tr AVH mrg. -δώοίς [see
WH. App. p. 167]) ; impf. 3 pars. plur. άπ-ίδι'δουΐ' (for the
more com. άπίδίδοσαν, Acts iv. 33 ; cf. W. §14,1 c.) ; fut.
αποδώσω ; 1 aor. άπίδωκα ; 2 aor. άπίδων, impv. άπόδυν.
subj. 3 pers. sing, άπ-οδώ and in 1 Thess. v. 15 Tdf. άποδοί
(see δίδω^ιι), opt. 3 pers. sing, άποδώι; [or rather, -δώη ; for
-δώι? is a subjunctive form] (2 Tim. iv. 14, for άσοδοι'ι;,
cf. W. § 14, 1 g. ; B. 46 (40) ; yet L Τ Tr WH άποδώσ(ί) ;
Pass., 1 aor. inf. άποδοΑήκαι ; Mid., 2 aor. άπιδόμην, 3 pers.
sin", άττίδοτο (Heb. xii. 16, where L WH άπίδιτο ; cf. B.
47 (41) ; Delitzsch on Hebr. p. 632 note; [WH. App. p.
167]); a common verb in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, and
the N. T. does not deviate at aU from their use of it ;
prop, lo put away by giving, to give up, give over, (Germ
οΒιορίζω
61
άτΓοθνησκω
abgeben, [cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 12 sq.
who regards από as denoting to give /rom some reserved
store, or to give over something which might have been
retained, or to lay off some burden of debt or duty ; cf.
Cope on Aristot. rhet. 1,1,7]); 1. ?o delicer, rehnquish
what is one's own : to σώμα τοΰ Ίησοϋ, Mt. .x.wii. 58 ; hence
in mid. lo gice away for one'a own jn'ofit what ώ one's own,
i. e. lo sell [\V. 253 (238)] : τ<', Acts v. 8 ; Heb. xii. 16 ;
Ttra, Acts vii. 9, (often in this sense in Grk. writ., esp.
the Attic, fr. Hdt. 1, 70 down; in Sept. for ijp, Gen.
XXV. 33 etc. ; Bar. vi. [i. e. Ep. Jer.] 27 {2i)). 2. to
pay off, discharge, what is due, (because a debt, like a
burden, is thrown ojf, από, by being paid) : a debt (Germ.
ablragen), Alt. v. 26 ; xviii. 25-30, 34 ; Lk. vii. 42 ; x. 35 ;
xii. 5!) ; wages, Mt. xx. 8 ; tribute and other dues to the
government, Mt. xxii. 21 ; Mk. xii. 17 ; Lk. xx. 25 ; Ro.
xiii. 7 ; produce due, Mt. xxi. 41 ; Ileb. xii. 1 1 ; Rev. xxii.
2 ; opKovs tilings promised under oath, Mt. v. 33, cf.
Num. x.KX. 3, {(ΰχήν a vow, Deut. xxiii. 21, etc.); con-
jugal duty, 1 Co. vii. 3 ; αμοιβάς grateful requitals, 1 Tim.
v. 4 ; λόγοι» lo render account : Mt. xii. 36 ; Lk. xvi. 2 ;
Acts xix. 40 ; Ro. xiv. 12 L txt. Tr txt. ; Heb. xiii. 1 7 ;
1 Pet. iv. 5 ; μαρτϋριον to give testimony (as sometliing
officially due). Acts iv. 33. Ilence 3. lo gice bad; re-
store: Lk. iv. 20; [vii. 15 Lchm. mrg.] ; ix. 42; xLx. 8.
4. to requite, recompense, in a good or a bad sense : Mt.
vi. 4, 6, 18 ; xvi. 27 ; Ro. ii. ; 2 Tim. iv. [8], 14 ; Rev.
xviii. 6 ; xxii. 12 ; κακόν αντί κακοϋ, Ro. xii. 1 7 ; 1 Th. v.
15; 1 Pet. iii. 9. [CoMP. : άντ-αποδιδωμι.] *
οίΓο-δι-ορΙζω ; {Βιορΐζω, and this fr. upos a limit) ; by
drawing boundaries to disjoin, part, separate from anoth-
er : Jude 19 (oi άπο^ιορίζοντα «αυτοί r those who by
their wickedness separate themselves from the living
fellowship of Christians ; if iavr. be dropped, with Rec?
G L Τ Tr WH, the rendering is making divisions or sep-
arnli(iNs). (Aristot. pol. 4, 4, 13 [p. 12110', 25].)*
άττο-δοκιμάζω : (see δοκιμάζω); I aor. άττί δοκίμασα ; Pass.,
1 30Τ.ά/ι(δοκίμάσθην; pi. ptcp.aπoδf8oκίμaσμ(tιos^, to dis-
approve, reject, repudiate : Mt. xxi. 42 ; Mk. viii. 31 ; xii.
10 ; Lk. ix. 22 ; xvii. 25 ; xx. 1 7 ; 1 Pet. ii. 4, 7 ; Heb. xii.
1 7. (Equiv. to DSO in Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 22 ; Jer. viii. 9,
etc.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 6, 130 down.)*
άΐΓθ-8οχή, -ης, ή, (αποδέχομαι, q. v.), reception, admis-
sion, acceptance, approbation, [A. V. acceptation'] : 1 Tim.
i. 15 ; iv. 9. (Polyb. 2, 56, 1 ; 6, 2, 13, etc. ; ό Xo'yot άττο-
δοχη! Tvyxavei id. 1, 5, 5 ; Diod. 4, 84 ; Joseph, antt. 6, 14,
4 ; al. [cf. Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 124].) *
άιτό-β«Γΐ$, -ΐωί, ή, [αποτίθημι], a putting offoT away: 2
Pet. i. 14 ; 1 Pet. iii. 21. [In various senses fr. Hippoc.
and Plato down.] *
άίΓΟ-βήκη, -η!, η, {άποτίΰημι), a place in which any thing
is laid by or up ; a storehouse, granary, [A. V. garner,
bam]: Mt. iii. 12; vi. 26; xiii. 30; Lk. iii. 17; .xii. 18,
24. (Jer. xxvii. (1.) 26; Thuc. 6, 97.)*
άη-ο-θησ-αυρίζω ; to put away, lay by in store, lo treasure
away, [seponendo thesaurum coUigere, Tl'/n. De verb,
comp. etc Pt. iv. p. 10]; to store up abundance for future
use : 1 Tim. vi. 19. [Sir. iii. 4 ; Diod., Joseph., Epict., al.] *
άτΓΟ-βλΙβω ; to press on all sides, squeeze, press hard : Lk.
viii. 45. (Num. xxii. 25 ; used also of pressing out grapes
and olives, Diod. 3, 62; Joseph, antt. 2, 5, 2; [al.].) *
άπο-βνήο'κω, impf. ηπίθνησκον (Lk. viii. 42) ; 2 aor.
απ ( θανόν ; tut. άποθανοΐμαι, Ro. v. 7; Jn. viii. 21, 24,
(see θνησκω) ; found in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; lo die
(από, so as to be no more; [cf. Lat. emorior; Eng. die
oJJ or out, pass away] ; Germ, absterben, versterben);
I. used properly 1. of the η at u ral death of men:
Mt. ix. 24 ; xxii. 24 ; Lk. xvi. 22; Jn. ίν.4Γ ; Ro. vii. 2,
and very often ; αποθνήσκοντα άνθρωποι subject to death,
mortal, Heb. vii. 8 [13.206 (lis)]. 2. of the violent
death — both of animals, Mt. viii. 32, and of men, Mt.
.xxvi. 35 ; Acts xxi. 13 etc. ; 1 Pet iii. 18 L Τ Tr \\H txt. ;
(V φάνω μαχαίρας, Ileb. xi. 37; of the punishment of
death, Ileb. x. 28 ; often of the violent death which
Christ suffered, as Jn. xii. 33; Ro. v. 6, etc. 3.
Phrases : άποθνήσκ. ΐκ τίνος to peri.'h by means of some-
thing, [cf. Eng. to die of]. Rev. viii. II; ev TJi αμαρτία,
iv ταΊς άμαρτΐαις, fixed in sin, hence to die unreformed,
Jn. viii. 21, 24 ; eV τώ 'Αδά;:ι by connection with Adam,
1 Co. XV. 22 ; cv κυρίω in fellowshi]) with, and trusting in,
the Lord, Rev. xiv. 1 3 ; άποθνί^σκ- τι to die a certain
death, Ro. vi. 10, (θάνατον μακρόν. Charit. p. 12ed. D'Or-
ville [I. i. c. 8 p. 1 7, 6 ed. Beck ; cf. W. 227 (213) ; B. 149
(130)]); τρ αμαρτία, used of Christ, 'that he might
not have to busy liimself more with the sin of men,' Ro.
vi. 10 ; ίαυτω to become one's own master, independent,
by dying, Ro. xiv. 7 [cf. Meyer] ; τώ κνρίω to become
subject to the Lord's will by dying, Ro. xiv. 8 [cf. Mey.] ;
διύ Tiva i. e. to save one, 1 Co. viii. 1 1 ; on the phrases άπο-
θνήσκ. πfpί and ΰπί'ρ τίνος, see jrfpi I. c. δ. and ίπίρ I.
2 and 3. Oratorically, althougli the proper signification
of the verb is retained, καθ' ήμίραν αποθνήσκω I meet
death daily, live daily in danger of death, 1 Co. xv. 31,
cf. 2 Co. vi. 9. 4. of trees which dry up, Jude 12 ; of
seeds, which while being resolvea into their elements in
the ground .seem to perish by 7-olling,Jn. xii. 24 ; 1 Co. xv.
36. n. tropically, in various senses ; 1. of e t e r η a 1
death, as it is called, i. e. to be subject to eternal misery,
and that, too, already beginning on earth: Ro. viii. 13;
Jn. vi. 50; xi. 26. 2. of moral death, in various
senses ; a. to be deprived of real life, i. e. esp. of the
power of doing right, of confidence in God and the hope
of future blessedness, Ro. vii. 10; of the spiritual torpor
of those who have fallen from the fellowship of Christ,
the fountain of true life, Rev. iii. 2, b. with dat. of the
thing [cf. W. 210 (197); 428 (398); B. 178 (155)], to
become wholly alienated from a thing, and freed from
all connection with it : τώ νόμω, Gal. ii. 19, which must
also be suppUed with αποθανόντες (for so we must read
for Rec"!^ αποθανόντος) in Ro. vii. 6 [cf. W. 159 (150)] ;
Tj αμαρτία, Ro. vi. 2 (in another sense in vs. 10; see I.
3 above) ; από των στοιχείων τοΰ κόσμου so that your re-
lation to etc. has passed away, Col. ii. 20, (απο των παθών,
PorphjT. de abst. animal. 1,41 [cf. B. 322 (277) ; W. 370
(347)]) ; true Christians are said simply άποθανείν, as hav-
ing put off all sensibility to worldly things that draw them
άτΓοκαθίστημι
62
άτΓοκαραΒοκία
away from God, Col. iii. 3 ; since they owe this habit of
mind to the death of Christ, they are said also άποθαικϊν
σύκ Χριστώ, Κο. vi. 8 ; Col. ii. 20. [CoMP. : σνν-απο-
άττο-καβ-Ισ-τημι. αποκαθιστάω (Mk. be. 12 αποκαθιστά
ΙΚ;), and άπυκαθιστάνω (Mk. i.\. 12 L Τ Tr [but W II
άποκατιστάνω, see their App. p. ICS]; Acts i. li ; cf. W.
78 (7.")); [B. 44 sq. (39)]); fut. αποκαταστήσω; 2 aor.
άπ(κατ(στην (with double augm., [cf. E.\. iv. 7 ; Jer. .\xiii.
8], Mk. viii. 2.j Τ Tr WH) ; 1 aor. pass. άπηκατ(στάθην
or, ace. to the better reading, with double augm. άηίκατί-
στάθην, Mt. xii. 13 ; Mk. iii. ο ; Lk. vi. 10 (Ignat. ad Smyrn.
1 1 ; ,f.[ WIl. App. p. 162]; W. 72 (69 sq.) ; [B. 35 (31)];
;\lullach p. 22) ; as in Grk. writ, to restore to its former state ;
2 aor. act. to be in its former state : used of parts of the
body restored to health, Mt. xii. 13 ; Mk. iii. 5 ; Lk. vi.
10 ; of a man cured of blindness, Mk. viii. 25 ; of the
restoration of dominion, Acts i. 6 (1 Mace. xv. 3) ; of
the restoration of a disturbed order of affairs, Mt. xvii.
11 ; Mk. ix. 12 ; of a man at a distance from his friends
and to be restored to them, Ilcb. xiii. 19.'
άΐΓθ-καλνιιιτω:ίηΙ.<ζ7Γθκαλΰ\|'ω; 1 aor. άπ€ κάλυψα; [Pass.,
pres. αποκαλύπτομαι]; 1 aor. άπικα\νφθην; 1 fut. άπο-
καλυφθί^σομαι; in (irk. writ. fr. [Ildt. and] Plat, down ; in
Sept. equiv. to Τλ'ΐ} ; 1. prop, to uncover, lay open what
has been veiled or covered up ; to disclose, inake hare : Ex.
XX. 26; Lev. xviii. 11 sqq. ; Num. v. 18; Sus. 32; τα
στήθη, Plat. Prot. p. 352 a. ; ttjk κ(φαλήν, Plut. Crass. 6.
2. metaph. to make known, make manifest, disclose,
what before was unknown ; a. pass, of any method
whatever by which something before unknown becomes
evident : Mt. x. 26 ; Lk. xii. 2. b. pass, of matters which
come to light from thingsdone: Lk. ii. 35 [some
make the verb mid. here] ; Jn. xii. 38 (L«. liii. 1) ; Ro. i.
18; from the gospel: Ro. i. 17. c. άποκαλΰπτίΐι/ τί
Tii'i is used of God revealing to men things unknown
[Dan. ii. 19 Theod., 22, 28 ; Ps. xcvii. (xcviii.) 2 ; 1 S. ii.
27, cf. iii. 21], especially those relating to salvation; —
whether by deeds, Mt. .\i. 25 ; xvi. 1 7 ; Lk. x. 21 (by in-
timacy with Christ, by his words and acts) ; — or by the
Holy Spirit, 1 Co. ii. 10; xiv. 30 ; Eph. iii. 5 ; Phil. iii. 15 ;
1 Pet. i. 12 ; τον υίόΐ' αϋτοΰ iv ίμοί who, what, how great
his Son is, in my soul, Gal. i. 16. Of Christ teaching men:
Mt. xi. 27; Lk. x. 22. d. pass, of tilings, previously
non-existent, coming into being and to view : as, ή δό|α,
Ro. viii. 18 (els ημάς to be conferred on us); 1 Pet. v.
1 ; ή σωτημία, 1 Pet. i. 5 ; ή πι'στίΕ, Gal. iii. 23 ; the day
of judgment, 1 Co. iii. 13. e. pass, of persons, previ-
ously concealed, making their appearance in public : of
Christ, who will return from heaven where he is now
hidden (Col. iii. 3) to the earth, Lk. xvii. 30 ; of Anti-
christ, 2 Th. ii. 3, 6, 8.•
[On this word (and the foil.) cf. Westcott, Introd. to the
Study of the Gospels, p. 9 sq. (Am. ed. .34 sq.) ; Liicke, Einl.
in d. Offenb. d. Johan. 2d ed. p. 18 sqq. ; esp. F. G. β. ran
Bell, Disput. theolog. de vocabulis ipavepovv et αττοκαλύπτ^ιν in
N. T., Lugd. Bat., 1 849. ipavfpou is thought to describe an ex-
ternal manifestation, to the senses and hence open to all, but
single or isolated ; αποκαλιηττω an internal disclosure, to the
believer, and abiding. The άιτοκιίλκψυ or unveiling precedes
and produces tlie tpavepwais or matuf sttitiuu ; the former looks
toward the object revealed, the latter toward the persons to
wliom the revelation is made. Cithers, however, seem to
question the possibility of discrimination ; see e. g. Fritz-
schc ou Horn. vol. ii. 149. Cf. 1 Co. iii. 13. j
άτΓΟ-κάλυψΐ!, -fwt, r), (ΰποκαλνπτω, q. v.), a» uncovcrinij;
1. prop, a laijimj hiirc, mukinij naked (1 S. xx. 30).
2. tropically, in Λ'. Ϊ. and eccl. language [see end], a.
a disclosure of truth, instruction, concerning divine
things before unknown — esp. those relating to the
Christian salvation — given to the soul by God himself,
or by the ascended Christ, esp. tlirough the operation of
the Holy Spirit (1 Co. ii. 10), and so to be distinguished
from other methods of instruction ; hence, κατά ΰποκά-
λυψ-ιν γνωρίζίσθαι, Ej)h. iii. 3. ττυίϋμα απυκαλι'ψίωϊ, a
spirit received from God di.-closing what and how great
are the benefits of salvation, Eph. i. 1 7, cf. 18. with gen.
of the obj., ToC μυστηρίου, Ro. xvi. 25. with gen. of the
subj., κυρίου, Ίησοϋ Χριστού, 2 Co. xii. 1 (revelations by
ecstasies and visions, [so 7]) ; Gal. i. 12 ; Rev. i. 1 (rev-
elation of future things relating to the consummation of
the divine kingdom) ; κατ οποχάλ υψιι», Gal. ii. 2 ; XaXciv
<V άποκ. to speak on tlie ground of [al. in the form of]
a revelation, agreeably to a revelation received, 1 Co.
xiv. 6 ; eqinv. to άποκ(κα\υμμίνον. in the phrase άποκά-
Χυψιν (χ(ΐν, 1 Co. .\i\'. 26. b. eiptiv. to το αποκαλιί-
πτ(σθαι as used of events by which things or states or
persons hitherto withdrawn from view are made visible
to all, manifestation, appearance, cf. αποκαλύπτω, 2, d.
and e. : φώ? fi'r άποκαΚ. (θνων a light to ajipear to the
Gentiles [al. render ' a light for a revelation (of divine
truth) to the Gentiles,' and so refer the use to a. above],
Lk. ii. 32 ; αποκ. δικαιοκρισι'αί β(οΰ, Ro. ii. 5 ; των υ'ιων
τον θ(οϋ, the event in which it Λνϋΐ appear who and what
the sons of God are, by the glory received from God at
the last day, Ro. viii. 19; της &όξηί τοϋ Χρίστου, of the
glory clothed with ivhich he will return from heaven, 1
Pet. iv. 13; of this return itself the phra.se is used ojro-
κάλιιψίΓ τοΰ κυρίου *I. Χρίστου : 2 Th. i. 7 ; 1 Co. i. 7 ; 1 1 et.
i. 7, 13. (Among Grk. writ. Plut. uses the word once,
Cat. maj. c. 20, of the denudation of the body, [aLo in
Paul. Aemil. 14 ά. υδάτων; in Quomodo adul. ab amic. 32
ά. apapTi'as; cf. Sir. xi. 27; xxii. 22 etc. See Trench
§ xciv. and reif. s. v. άποκάΚίπτω, fin.]) *
άπο-καραδοκία, -a?, ^.(fr- απoκuραδoκfιI', and this fr. από,
κάρα the head, and δοκίίν in the Ion. dial, to watch;
hence κ«pQδoιtfίv [Hdt. 7. 163, 168; Xen. mem. 3, 5, 6;
Eur., al.] to watch with head erect or outstretched, to
direct attention to anj-thing, to wait for in suspense;
αποκαρα$οκ(-ιν (Polyb. 16, 2, 8; 18, 31, 4; 22, 19, 3;
[Plut. parall. p. 310, 43, vol. vii. p. 235 ed. Reiske] ;
Joseph, b. ]. 3, 7, 26, and in Ps. .xxxvi. (xx.wii.) 7 Aq. for
SSinrin), anxiously [?] to look forth from one's post.
But the prefix από refers also to time (like the Germ.
ab in abirarlen, [cf. Eng. wait it out]), so that it signifies
constancy in expecting ; hence the noun, found in Paul
alone and but twice, denotes), anj:iousY]anr/ persistent
expectation : Ro. viii. 19 ; Phil. i. 20. This word is very
α77θκατα\\ασσω
63
ατΓοκρντΓτω
fully discussed by C. F. Α. Fritzsche in Fritzscliiorum
Opuscc. p. 150 sqq. ; [cf. Ellic. and Lghtft. on Phil. 1. c.].*
όίΓΟ-κοτ-αλλάσσω or -ττω : 1 aor. άποκατήλλαξα ; 2 aor.
pass. άποκατη\λάγητ( (Col. i. 22 (21 ) L Tr uirg. WH mrg.);
to reconcile completely {από), [al. to reconcile back again,
bring back to a former state of harmony ; Ellic. on Eph.
ii. 16 ; Bp. Lghtft. or Bleek on Col. i. 20 ; Win. De verb,
comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 7 sq. ; yet see Mey. on Eph. 1. c. ;
Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 2 7 8 ; (see aira V-)], (ef. κατάλ-
λάσσω) : Col. i. 22 (21) [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc] ; τινά
Tivi, Eph. ii. 1 6 ; concisely, πάντα clt αυτόν [better αυτόν
with edd. ; cf. B. p. Ill (97) and s. v. αυτού], to draw to
himself by reconciliation, or so to reconcile that they
should be'devoted to himself, Col. i. 20 [W. 212 (200)
but cf. § 49, a. c. δ.]. (Found neither in prof. auth. nor
in the Grk. O. T.)•
όίΓΟ-κατό-στασ-ΐϊ. -(ω!, ή, (άποκαθίστημι, q. v.), restora-
tion : των πάντων, the restoration not only of the true
theocracy but also of that more perfect state of (even
physical) things which existed before the fall. Acts iii.
21 ; cf. Meyer ad loc. (Often in Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.)*
[άτΓΟ-κατ-ΜΓτάνω, see άποκαθίστημι.^
άπό-κειμαι ; to be laid aicai/, laid by, reserved, (από as in
αποθησαυρίζω [q. v.], αποθήκη) ; a. prop. : Lk. xix. 20.
b. metaph., with dat. of pers., reserved for one, aivaitiny
him : Col. i. δ (eXnis hoped-for blessedness) ; 2 Tim. iv.
8 (στίφανος) ; Heb. ix. 27 (άποθαν^Ιν, as in 4 Mace. viii.
10). (In both senses in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down.)*
αποκεφαλίζω: 1 aor. ύττίκβφαλισα; (κfφa\ή)^, to cut off
the head, behead, decapitate : Mt. xiv. 10 ; Mk. vi. 16, 27
(28) ; Lk. Lx. 9. A later Grk. word : [Sept. Ps. fin.] ;
Epict. diss. 1, 1, 19; 24; 29; Artem. oneir. 1,35; cf.
Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N". T. p. 690 sqq. ; Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 341.•
όίΓΟ-κλείω : 1 aor. άπ£κ\(ΐσα ; to shut up : την θνραν, Lk.
xiii. 25. (Gen. XLX. 10; 2 S. xiii. 17sq. ; often in Hdt. ;
in Attic prose writ. fr. Thuc. down.) *
οίΓΟ-κόίΓΓω : 1 aor. άπίκοψα ; fut. mid. άποκόψομαι ; to
cut off, amputate : Mk. ix. 43, [45]; Jn. xviii. 10, 26;
Acts xxvii. 32 ; όφίΚον και άποκόψονται I would that they
(who urge the necessity of circumcision would not only
circumcise themselves, but) would even mutilate them-
selves (or cut ofiE their privy parts), Gal. v. 12. άποκό-
πτ(σθαι occurs in this sense in Deut. xxiii. 1 ; [Philo de
alleg. leg. iii. 3 ; de vict. off. § 13 ; cf. de spec. legg.i.§7] ;
Epict. diss. 2, 20, 19 ; Lcian. Eun. 8 ; [Dion Cass. 79, 11 ;
Diod. Sic. 3, 31], and other pass, quoted by Wetst. ad
loc. [and Soph. Lex. s. v.]. Others incorrectly : I would
that they would cut themselves off from the society of
Christians, quit it altogether ; [cf. Mey. and Bp. Lghtft.
ad loc.].*
ά-ττό-κριμα, -Γ09, τό, {αποκρίνομαι, q. v. in άποκρινω), an
answer: 2 Co. i. 9, where the meaning is, 'On asking
myself whether I should come out safe from mortal peril,
I answered, "I must die."' (Joseph, antt. 14, 10, 6 of
an answer (rescript) of the Roman senate; [similarly in
Polyb. exept. Vat. 12, 26', 1].)•
diro-KpCvu : [Pass., 1 aor. άπικρίθην ; 1 fut. άποκριθήσο-
μαιΊ ; i. to pari, separate ; Pass, to be parted, separated,
{ 1 aor. άπίκρίθην was separated, Horn. H. v. 12; Thuc.
2, 49 ; [4, 72] ; Theoph. de caus. plant. 6, 14, 10 ; [other
exx. in Veitch s. v.]). ii. to give sentence against one, de-
cide that he has lost ; hence Mid., [pres. αποκρίνομαι ; 1 aor.
3 pers. sing. άπίκρίνατοΊ; {to give forth a decision from
myself [W. 253 (238)]), to give answer, to reply ; so from
Thuc. down (and even in Hdt. 5, 49 [Gaisf.] ; 8, 101
[Gaisf., Bekk.], who generally uses ύπ ο κρίνομαι). But.
the earUer and more elegant Grk. writ, do not give this
sense to the pass, tenses άπικρίθην. άποκριθήσομαι. " The
example adduced from Plat. Alcib. Secund. p. 149 b. [cf.
Stallb. p. 388] is justly discredited by Sturz, De dial. Alex.
p. 148, since it is without parallel, the author of the dia-
logue is uncertain, and, moreover, the common form is
sometimes introduced by copyists." Lobeck ad Phryn. p.
108; [cf. Rutherford, )sev! Phryn. p. 186 sq. ; A'eitch
s. V. ; W. 23 (22)]. But from Polyb. down άποκριθηΐ'οι
and άποκρίυασθαι are used indiscriminately, and in the
Bible the pass, forms are by far the more common. In the
N. T. the aor. middle άπ^κρϊνατο is found only in Mt.
xxvii. 12; Mk. xiv. 61 ; Lk. iii. 16; xxiii. 9; Jn. v. 17,
19 ; xii. 23 [R G L Tr mrg.] ; Acts iii. 12 ; in the great
majority of places άπικρίθη is used ; cf. W. § 39, 2 ; [B.
51 (44)]. 1. to give an answer to a question proposed,
to answer ; a. simply : Ka\S>s, Mk. xii. 28 ; νουν^χώς, 34 ;
όρβω!. Lk. X. 28 ; προς τι, Mt. xxvii. 14. b. with ace. :
λόγοι/, Mt. xxii. 46 ; ουδίν, Mt. xxvii. 12 ; Mk. xiv. 61 ; xv.
4 sq. c. with dat. etc. : cv'i (κάστω. Col. iv. 6 ; together
with the words which the answerer uses, Jn. v. 7, 1 1 ; vi.
7, 68, etc. ; the dat. omitted : Jn. vii. 46 ; viii. 19, 49, etc.
προς Tiva, Acts xxv. 16. joined with φάναι. or \eyfiv. or
ciVeii/, in the form of a ptcp., as άποκριθιΊς fifff or ίφη
or \eyei : Mt. iv. 4 ; viii. 8 ; xv. 13 ; Lk. ix. 19 ; xiii. 2 ;
Mk. X. 3, etc.; or άπικρίθη \(ywv: Mt. xxv. 9, 37, 44;
Lk. iv. 4 [R G L] ; viii. 50 [R G Tr mrg. br.] ; Jn. i. 26 ;
X. 33 [Rec] ; xii. 23. But John far more frequently says
άπίκρίθη και (ΐπ€ : Jn. i. 48 (49) ; ii. 19 ; iv. 13 ; vii. 16, 20
[R G], 52, etc. d. foil, by the inf. : Lk. xx. 7 ; foil, by
the ace. with inf. : Acts xxv. 4 ; foil, by ότι : Acts xxv. 16.
2. In imitation of the Hebr. Π:;• {Gesenius, Thesaur.
ii. p. 1047) ίο begin to speak, but always where something
has preceded (either said or done) to which the remarks
refer [W. 19] : Mt. xi. 25 ; .xii. 38 ; xv. 15 ; xvii. 4 ; xxii.
1 ; xxviii. 5 ; :\Ik. Lx. 5, [6 Τ Tr WH] ; x. 24: xi. 14 ; xii.
35 ; Lk. xiv. 3 ; Jn. ii. 18 ; v. 1 7 ; Acts iii. 12 ; Rev. vii.
13. (Sept. [Deut. xxvi. 5]; Is. xiv. 10; Zech. i. 10;
iii. 4, etc.: 1 Mace. ii. 17; viii. 19; 2 Mace. xv. 14.)
[Comp. : άντ-αποκρίνομαι.^
άΐΓΟ-κρισ•ΐ5. -(ως. ή. (αποκρίνομαι, see άποκρίνω), α reply-
ing, an answer: Lk. ii. 47; xx. 26; Jn. i. 22; xix. 9.
(From [Theognis, 1167 ed. Bekk., 345 ed. Welck., and]
Hdt. down.) *
άτΓο-κρϋίΓΓϋ) : 1 aor. άπίκρνψα ; pf. pass. ptcp. άποκ(κρυμ-
μίνος ; a. Ιο hide : τι, Mt. .\xv. 18 (L Τ Tr ΛΥΠ «ρυψ -f).
b. Pass, in the sense of concealing, keeping secret : σοφία,
1 Co. ii. 7 ; μυστήριον. Col. i. 26 (opp. to φανιροναθαι) ;
with the addition of tV τω θ(ω, Eph. iii. 9 ; τϊ από rivot,
άτΓοκρυφο^
64
ατΓοΧΧχ,μΛ
Lk. χ. 21 ; Mt. xi. 25 (L Τ Tr Wll (κρυψαι), in imitation
of the Ilebr. |?3, Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 10 ; cxviii. (cxix.)
19; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 17; cf. κρίΛττω, [Β. 149 (130);
189 (168);\V. 227 (213)]. (In Crk. writ. fr. Iloni.
down.) *
άπόκρυψοςι-ον, (αποκρύπτω), /( iihlrii, secreted : Mk. iv. 22 ;
l.k. viii. 17. slond «/< : Col. ii. 3. (Dan. xi. 43 [Tlieod.];
Is. xlv. 3 ; 1 Miicc. i. 23 : Xen., Eur. ; (il. Up, Lgblft. on
the word, Col. 1. c•.. jnill Igu. i. 351 sq] )*
άΐΓο-κτ«(νω, and Aeol. -κτίννω (Mt. x. 28LTTr; Mk
xii. .5 G L Τ Tr ; Lk. xii. 4 1> Τ Tr ; 2 Co. iii. 6 Τ Tr ;
cf. Fritzsclie on Mk. p. 507 sq. ; [7V//: Proleg. p. 79] ; W.
83 (79); [B. 01 (54)]),a7j-0KTeVa)(Grsh.inMt. X. 28; Lk.
xii. 4), άποκταίνω (Lchni. in 2 Co. iii. (I ; Rev. xiii. 10),
άηοκτ(ΐ/ιιυντ€ς (Mk. xii. 5 Wll) ; fiit. anoKrevi); 1 aor.
antKTetva; I'ass., pros. inf. αττο<τίνν(σθΜ (l{ev. vi. 11
G LTTr UTI) ; 1 aor. άττίκτάνθην (Jiilin. Aiisf. Sj)r. ii.
227 ; W. L c. ; [B. 41 (3."i s(|.)] ) ; [fr. Horn, down] ; 1.
prop, to kill in any way wliatever, (από i. e. so as to put
out of the way; cf. [Eng. to kill o//], Germ, absclilacli-
ten) : Mt. xvi. 21 ; xxii. C ; Mk. vi. 19 ; ix. 31 ; Jn. v. 18 ;
viii. 22 ; Acts iii. 15 ; Rev. ii. 13, and very often ; [αηοκτ.
Ινβανάτω, Rev. ii. 23; vi. 8, cf. B. 184 (loll)! ^\'• 33!)
(319)]. lo (li-^lroi/ i;vllow to perisli) : Mk. iii. 4 [yet al.
take it here absol., In kill']. 2. metaph. to extinr/iiiuli,
ahrtlish : τηνϊχθμαν, Eph. ii. 16 ; lo iiijlici moral dedlli, Ro.
vii. 11 (see αποθνήσκω, IL 2) ; lodeprirc of sjiiriltiol life
(iii'l jirorure cterniil tiiiscri/, 2 Co. iii. U [Lchm. αποκταΐΜΐ ;
see above].
diro-KD€(o, -ώ, or άποκνω, (hence 3 pors. sing. pres. either
anoKvt'i [so AVII] or άττοκι/ίΐ, Ja.«. i. 15 ; cf. W. 88 (84) ;
B. 02 (54)) ; 1 aor. απίκνησα; (κίω. or κυ/ω, to be preg-
nant; cf. ΐγκυης) ; lo brinij forlli from the womb, give
birth to: ηχά, Jas. i. 15; lo produce, ibid. 18. (4 Mace.
XV. 17; Dion. Hal. 1, 70; Phit., Lcian., Ael. v. h. 5, 4 ;
Hdian. 1, .5, 13 [5 od. Bekk.]; 1,4,2 [1 cd. Bekk.].)•
άίΓο-κυλίω: fut. άποκυΚ'ισω: 1 aor. άπ(κν\ισα; pf. pass.
[3 pers. sing. <ίπο«κύλιστίΐι Mk. xvi. 4 R (ί L but Τ Tr
WII araitf/c.], ptcp. offo/cfKuXicr^e'iOs; to roll off'oTaway:
Mt. xxviii. 2 ; Mk. xvi. 3 ; Lk. xxiv. 2. (Gen. xxix. 3, 8,
10; Judith xiii. 9; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 37; 5, 11, 3;
Lcian. rhet. pracc. 3.) But see άνακυλι'ω.'
άπο-λαμβάνω ; fut. άπολήψομαι (Col. iii. 'J-l ; L Τ Tr
WII άπο\ήμψ(σθ( ; see λαμβάνω) ; J aor. άπίλαβον ; 2 aor.
mid. άπf\a:iύμηv■, fr. Ildt. down; 1. lo n-ceiri' (from
another, από [cf. Mey. on Gal. iv. 5 ; Ellic. ibid, and Win.
De verb. comp. etc. as below]) irhat is due or promined
(cf . αποδιδωμι, 2 ) : τ. υΐοθίσίαν the adoption promised to
believers. Gal. iv. 5 ; τά αγαθά σου thy good tilings, " which
thou couldst expect and as it were demand, which seemed
due to thee " ( Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 1 3),
Lk. xvi. 25. Hence 2. lo lake atjain or hack, to recover:
Lk. vi. 34 [T Tr txt. WII λαβΛν] ; xv. 27 ; and to receive
by way ofrelrdiulinn : Lk. xviii. 30 (L txt. Tr mrg. WH
t.xt. λάβτι); xxiii. 41 ; Ro. i. 27; 2 Jn. 3; Col. iii. 24.
3. to take from otherf^, take apart or aside; Mid. τίνά, to
take a person with one aside out of the view of others :
with the addition of άπ-ο τοΰ όχλου κατ Iblav in Mk. vii.
83, (Joseph, b. j. 2, 7, 2 ; and in the Act., 2 Mace. vi. 91 ;
Ύστά(Γπ€α απολαβών μουΐΌΐ/, Ildt. 1, 209; Arstph. ran.
78 ; ιδία €fa των τριών άπολαβύιν, A pp. b. civ. 5, 40).
4. to receive any one hospitably ; 3 Jn. 8, where L Τ Tr
WII have restored ύπολαμβάν^ιν.'
άπόλανσις, -ίωΓ, ή, (fr. απολαύω to enjoy), etifoyment
(Lat. fniclus): 1 Tim. vi. 17 (tit άπόληυσιι» to enjoy);
Ilcb. xi. 25 (αμαρτίας άπόλ. pleasure born of sin). (In
Grk. writ. fr. [Eur. nnd] Thuc. down.)*
άίΓΟ-λίίττω: [inipf. απίλαπον, W II txt. in 2 Tim. iv. 13,
20 ; Tit. i. 5] ; 2 aor. άπίλιπον ; [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. to
leave, leave behind: one in some ])lace, Tit. i. 5 L Τ Tr
WII ; 2 Tim. iv. 13, 20. Pass. άπίΐλ(Ιπ(ται il remains, is
reserved: Heb. iv. 9 ; x. 26 ; foil, by ace. and inf., lleb.
iv, G. 2. lo desert, forsake : a place, Jude 6.*
άΐΓο-λ6£χω: [inipf. άπίλίίχον]; In lick <ι/Γ, lirk up : iik,
xvi. 21 RG; cf. ("πιλ^,^^ω. ([Apollon. Rhod. 4, 478];
Allien, vi. c. 13 p. •jr>0 a.)*
άΐΓ-<5λλυμι and άπολλΰω ( [άπολλΰΕΐ Jn. xii. 25 Τ TrWH],
impv. ανόλλυί Ro. xiv. 15, [cf. B. 45 (39) ; WII. App. p.
1118 sq.]) ; fut. άπολίσω and (1 Co. i. 19 άπολώ fr. a pass,
in the O. T., where often) άπολώ (cf. AV. S3 (80) ; [B.
64 (56)]) ; 1 aor. άπώλίσα ; to destroy, ^lid., pres. άπόλ-
λυμαι; [inipf. 3 ]iers. jihir. άίΓώλλυι/το 1 Co. -x. 9 Τ Tr
AVH] : fut-. (ίτΓολοΟμαι ; 2 aor. απωλομην; (2 pf. act. ])tcp.
άπηλωλώς) ; [fr. Iloni. down]; to perish. 1. to destroy
i. e. lo j)ul nut of the way entirely, abolish, put an end to,
ruin : Mk. i. 24 ; Lk. iv. 34 ; xvii. 27, 29 ; Jude 5 ; τήν
σοφίαν render useless, cause its emptiness to be perceived,
1 Co. i. 19 (fr.Sept. of Is. xxix. 14) ; to kill: Mt. ii. 13;
xii. 14 ; Mk. ix. 22 ; xi. 18 ; Jn. x. 10, etc. ; contextually,
to declare that one must be put to death : Mt. xxvii. 20;
metaph. lo devote or give over lo eternal misery : Mt. x.
28; Jas. iv. 12; contextually, by one's conduct to cause
another to lose eternul salvation : Ro. xiv. 15. Mid. to
perish, to he lost, ruined, destroyed; a. of persons; o.
properly : Mt. viii. 25 ; Lk. xiii. 3, 5, 33 ; Jn. xi. 50 ; 2
Pet. iii. 6; Jude 11, etc.; άπόλλυμπι λιμω, l.k. xv. 1 7 ; (V
μαχαίρα, Mt. xxvi. 52 ; καταβαλλόμΐνοί, αλλ* ονκ αϊτολλίΛ
/icKot, 2 Co. iv. 9. β. tropically, to incur the loss of true
or eternal life; to be delivered up to eternal misery: .In.
iii. 15 [R Lbr.], 16 ; x. 28; xvii. 12, (it must be borne in
mind, that ace. to John's conception eternal life begins
on earth, just as soon as one becomes united to Christ by
faith); Ro. ii. 12; 1 Co. viii. 11; χ v. 18; 2 Pet. iii. 9.
Ilencc o! σωζόμ(νοι they to whom it belongs to partake of
salvation, and oi άπολλΰμινοι those to whom it belongs to
perish or to be consigned to eternal misery, are con-
trasted by Paul : 1 Co. i. 18 ; 2 Co. ii. 15 ; iv. 3 ; 2 Th. ii.
10, (on these pres. ptcps. cf. W. 342 (321); B. 206
(178)). b. of things; to be blotted out, lo vanish away:
ή (ίττρίπαα, Jas. i. 1 1 ; the heavens, Heb. i. 1 1 (fr. Ps. ci.
(cii.) 27) ; lo perish, — of things which on being thrown
away are decomposed, as μίλο! τοΰ σώματος. Mt. v. 29
sq. ; remnants of bread, Jn. vi. 12; — or which perish in
some other way, as βρώσΐί, Jn. vi. 27 ; χρυσίον, 1 Pet. i. 7 ;
— or which are ruined so that they can no longer subserve
the use for which they were desi°;ned, as o! ασκοί: Mt.
^ ΑτΓοΧΧύων
β5
ατΓολυω
ix. 1 7 ; Mk. ii. 22 ; Lk. v. 37. 2. to (/e.itroi/ i. e. to lose ;
a. prop. : Alt. x. 42 ; Mk. ix. 41 {τον μισθον αντον) ; Lk.
XV. 4, 8, 9; ix. 25; xvii. 33; Jn. -vii. 2.>; 2 Jn. K, etc.
b. nietaph. Christ is said (o lose am/ one of his followers
(wliom the Father has drawn to disciplesliip) if such a
one becomes wicked and fails of salvation : Jn. vi. 3'J, cf.
xviii. 9. Mid. to be lost : θρίξ ix τηι κίφαλη!, Lk. .\.\i.
18; Θ. άπο τη! κίφάΚηί, Acts .\xvii. 34 (Rec. ntae'iTm) ;
τα λυμπμα αττωλ^το «ττό σου. Rev. .wiii. 14 (Kcc. άπηλθf).
Used of slieep, straying from the Hock : prop. Lk. xv. 4
(to άττολωλοΓ, in Mt. xviii. 12 το πλανώμ(νυν). Aletaph.
in accordance with the O. T. comparison of the people
of Israel to a tlock (.ler. xxvii. (1.) G ; Ezek. .xxxiv. 4,
16), the Jews, neglected by their religious teachers, left
to themselves and thereby in danger of losing eternal sal-
vation, wandering about as it were without guidance, are
called τα πρόβατα τα άπολωλότα του οίκου ^Ισραήλ : Alt. .\.
6; ,χν. 24, (Is. Ιίϋ. 0; 1 I'et. ϋ. 2.j); and Christ, reclaim-
ing them from wickedness, is likened to a shepherd and
is said ζητιΊν και σώζιιν το οπολωλόί : Lk. .\ix. 10; Alt.
xviii. 11 Rec. [CoMP. : συν-απόλλυμι.]
ΆίΓολλύων, -uiTor, ό, (ptep. fr. άπυΧΧϋω), ΛροΙΙι/οη (a
prop, name, formed by the author of the Apocalypse),
i. e. Destroyer : Rev. ix. 1 1 ; cf. 'Λ^άδδωΐ', [and B. D.
8. v.].*
'Απολλωνία, -at, ή, ΛροΙΙοηία, a maritime city of Mace-
donia, aliout a day's journey [ace. to the Antonine Itiner-
ary 32 Roman miles] from Amphipolis, through which
Paul passed on his way to Thessalonica [311 miles fur-
ther] : Acts xvii. 1. [See B. D. s. v.]*
ΆίΓολλώϊ [ace. to some, contr. fr. ΆπολλώνιοΓ, W. 102
(97) ; ace. to others, the ο is lengthened, cf. Fick; (iriech.
Personennamen, p. xxi.], gen. -ώ (cf. B. 20 (18) sq. ; [W.
62 (61)]), accus. -ώ (Acts xi.x. 1) and -ώι; (1 Co. iv. 6 Τ
Tr WH; Tit. iii. 13 Τ WII; cf. [IF//. App. p. 157];
Kiihner i. p. 315), 6, Apollos, an Alexandrian Jew who
became a Christian and a teacher of Christianity,
attached to the apostle Paul : Acts xviii. 24 ; xix. 1 ; 1
Co. i. 12; iii. 4 s<iq. 22; iv. 6; xvi. 12; Tit. iii. 13.*
άίΓολογί'ομαι, -οϋμηι; impf. d7reXoyou/Ji;i' (.\cts xxvi. 1);
1 aor. άπ(λογησάμην; 1 aor. pass. inf. άπολογηθηναι, in a
reflex, sense (Lk. xxi. 14) ; a depon. mid. verb (fr. Xoyos),
prop, to speak so as to absolve (από) one's self, talk one's
self offol a charge etc. ; 1. to defend one's self, make
one's defence : absoL, Lk. xxi. 14 ; Acts xxvi. 1 ; foil, by
oTi, Acts X.XV. 8 ; τί, to bring forward something in de-
fence of one's self, Lk. xii. 1 1 ; Acts xxvi. 24, (often so
in Grk. Avrit. also) ; τά π(ρ\ ΐμαυτοΰ άπ. either / hririr/ for-
ward what contributes to mi/ defence [?], or I plead >»;/ own
cause [R. V. make ?ni/ defencel, Acts xxiv. 10; πfpίw)th
gen. of the thing and «πί with gen. of pcrs., concernlnf/ a
thing before one's tribunal. Acts xxvi. 2 ; with dat. of
the person whom by my defence I strive to convince that
I am innocent or upright, to defend or justi/'i/ mi/self in
one's eyes [A. V. untol. Acts xix. 33 ; 2 Co. xii. 19, (Plat.
Prot. p. 359 a. ; often in Lcian., Pint. ; [cf. B. 172(149)]).
2. to defend a person οτ a thing (.so not infreq. in
prof, auth.) : Ro. ii. 15 (where ace. to the context the
deeds of men must be understood as defended) ; τά πιρί
ίμοϋ. Acts .\.\vi. 2 (but see under 1).*
άπολοΎία, -ar, ή, (see aπo\oy(oμaι), rerbal defence, speec/i
in defence: Acts xxv. 16; 2 Co. vii. 11; Phil. i. 7, 1 7
(16); 2 Tim. iv. 16 ; ivith a dat. of the pers. whois tohear
the defence, to whom one labors to excuse or to make
good his cause: 1 Co. L\. 3 ; 1 Pet. iii. 15 ; in the same
sense ή άπυλ. ή πρΟ! τίνα, Acts x.xii. 1, (Xen. mem. 4, 8, 5).*
άίΓΟ-λούω : Ιυ icas/i of or airay; in the N. T. twice in
1 aor. mid. figuratively [cf. Philo de mut. noni. § 6, i. p.
58.5 ed. Mang.] : άπ(\ονσασθ(, 1 Co. vi. 11 ; βάπτισαι κα'ί
άπύλουσαι τίΐ! άμαμτία! σου. Acts χχϋ. 16. For the sin-
ner is luiclean, polhited as it were by the filth of his sins.
Whoever obtains remis.«ion of sins has his sins put, so to
speak, out of God's sight, — is cleansed from them in
the sight of God. Remission is [represented as] ob-
tained by undergoing baptism; hence those who have
gone down into the baptismal bath [lacacrum, cf. Tit.
iii. 5 ; Eph. v. 20] arc said άπο'λούσασθαι to have washed
theniselces, or ras αμαμτ. άηολονσοσβαι to have washed
away their sins, i. e. to have been cleansed from their
sins.*
άπο-λύτρωσ•ΐ5, -^ω?, η, (fr. (ϊττολυτρόω signifying a. to
redeem one by paying the price, cf. Χύτρον: Plut. Pomp.
24 ; Sept. Ex. xxi. 8 ; Zeph. iii. 1 ; b. to let one go
free on receiving the price: Plat. legg. 11 p. 919 a.;
Polyb. 22, 21, 8; [cf.] Diod. 13, 24), a releasing effected
by payment of ransom ; redemption, deliverance, liberation
procured by the payment of a ransom; 1. prop. : πόλίωκ
αΙχμαΚώτων, Plut. Pomp. 24 (the only pass, in prof. writ,
where the word has as yet been noted ; [add, Joseph,
antt. 12, 2, 3 ; Diod. frag. 1. xxxvii. 5, 3 p. 149, 6 Dind. ;
Philo, «juod omn. prob. lib. § 17]). 2. everywhere in
the N. T. metaph., viz. deliverance effected through the
death of Christ from the retributive wrath of a holy God
and the merited penalty of sin : Ro. iii. 24 ; Eph. i. 7 ;
Col. i. 14, (cf. (ξαγοράζω. αγοράζω, λυτρόω, etc. [and
Trench § Ixxvii.] ) ; άποΧύτρ. των παραβάσιων deUverance
from the penalty of transgressions, effected through
their expiation, Ileb. ix. 15, (cf. Delitzsch ad loc. anri
Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. p. 178) ; ημίρα άπιΧυτρώσ(ωί,
the last day, when consummate liberation is experienced
from the sin still lingering even in the regenerate, and
from all the ills and troubles of this life, Eph. iv. 30 ; in
the same sense the word is apparently to be taken in 1
Co. i. 30 (where Christ himself is said to be redemption,
i. e. the author of redemption, the one without whom we
couM have none), and is to be taken in the phrase άπο-
\ντρ. τηί π(ριποιησ(ως. Eph. i. 14, the redemption Avhicli
will come to his possession, or to the men who are God's
own through Christ, (cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; του σώματο!.
deliverance of the body from frailty and mortality, Ro.
viii. 23 [W. 187 (176)]; deliverance from the hatred
and persecutions of enemies by the return of Christ
from heaven, Lk. xxi. 28, cf. xviii. 7 sq. ; deliverance or
release from torture, Heb. xi. 35.*
άίΓο-λύω ; [impf. ππίλυοι/] ; fut. απολύσω ; I aor. απί-
λι/σιι ; Pass., pf. απο\ί\υμαι\ \ Άοτ. άπ(\ϋθην\ [fut. άπο-
ατΓομασσω
66
UTTOppiTTTU)
λι/Οΐ)σομαι] ; impf. mid. άπ(\νόμην (Acts xxviii. 25) ; used
in tlif X. T. only in llii• liistorical books and in Hub.
xiii. 23; lo loose from, sever bi/ loosenint/, ιιιχίυ, [see από,
v.] ; 1. lo set free : τινά Ttvos (so in Grk. writ, even
fr. Horn, down), to liberate one from a tiling (as from a
bond), Lk. xiii. 12 (άποΚίλυσαι [tliou hast been loosed
i. e.] be thou free from [cf. W. § 40, 4] t^s άσθιιχίαί [L Τ
άτΓο τ. άσ^.]). 2. to let go, dismiss, (to detain no longer) ;
τινά, a. a suppliant to whom liberty to depart is given
by• a decisive answer : Mt. xv. 23 ; Lk. ii. 29 (' me whom
thou hadst determined to kee]) on earth until I had seen
the salvation prepared for Israel, cf. vs. 26, thou art now
dismissing with uiy wish accomplished, and this dismis-
sion is at the same time dismission also from life ' — in ref-
erence to Λvhich άπολϋί»' is used in Num. xx. 29 ; Tob.
iii. 6 ; [cf. Gen. xv. 2 ; 2 Mace. vii. 9 ; Plut. consol. ad
ApoU. § 13 cf. 11 fin.]) ; [Acts xxiii. 22]. b. to bid de-
part, send away : Mt. xiv. 15, 22 sq. ; xv. 32, 39 ; Mk. vl.
36,45; viii. 3,9; Lk. viii. 38 ; ix. 1 2 ; xiv. 4 ; Acts xiii. 3 ;
xix. 41 {την (κκΚησίαν) ; pass. Acts xv. 30, 33. 3. lo
let fjn free, lo release ; a. a captive, i. e. to loose his bonds
and bid him depart, to give him Uberty to depart : Lk.
xxii. 68 [R G L Tr in br.] ; xxiii. 22 ; Jn. xix. 10 ; Acts
xvi. 35 sip ; xxvi. 32 {απολ(\ΰσθαί eSivaro [might have
been set at liberty, cf. B. 21 7 (187), § 139, 27 c. ; W. 305
(286 ) i. e.] mif/ht be free ; pf. as in Lk. xiii. 1 2 [see 1 above,
and W. 334 (313)]) ; Acts xxviii. 18 ; Heb. xiii. 23 ; άηολ.
τινά τινι Ιο release one Ιο one, grant him liis liberty : Mt.
xxvii. 15, 17,21,26; Mk. xv. 6, 9, 11,15; Lk. xxiii. [16],
1 7 [K L in br.], 18, 20, 25 ; [Jn. xviii. 39]. b. to acquit
one accused of a crime and set him at liberty : Jn. xix.
12 ; Acts iii. 13. c. indulgently to grant a prisoner leave
todepart: Actsiv. 21, 23; V. 40; xvii. 9. d. to release a
debtor, i. e. not to press one's claim against him, to remit
his debt: Mt. xviii. 27 ; metaph. to pardon another his
offences against me : Lk. vi. 37, (t^s αμαρτία: άπολΰ(σθαί,
2 Mace. xii. 45). 4. used of divorce, as άπολϋωτην
■γννα'ικα to dismiss from the house, to repudiate : Mt. i.
19; v. 31sq. ; xix. 3, 7-9; Mk. x. 2, 4, 11; Lk. .xvi. 18;
[1 Esdr. ix. 36] ; and improperly a wife deserting her
husband is said τον άν&ρα άττολΰίΐν in Mk. .\. 12 [cf. Diod.
12, 18] (unless, as is more probable, Mark, contrary to
historic accuracy [yet cf. Joseph, antt. 15, 7, 10], makes
Jesus speak in accordance with Greek and Roman usage,
ace. to which wives also repudiated their husbands [reff.
in l^Iey. ad 1.]) ; (cf. η'^ψ, Jer. iii. 8 ; Deut. xxi. 14 ; xxii.
19, 29). 5. Mid. απολύομαι, prop, to send one's self
away; to depart [W. 253 (238)]: Acts xxviii. 25 (re-
turned home; Ex. xxxiii. 11).*
άίΓΟ-μάσσ-ω : (μάσσω to touch with the hands, handle,
work with the hands, knead), to wipe off; Mid. άπομάσ-
σομαι Ιο wipe one's self off, to ivipe off for one's self: τόχ
(ίοι/ιορτοι» ΰμ'ιν, Lk. χ. 11. (In Grk. writ. fr. Arstph.
down.) *
άίΓο-νί'μ» ; (vtμω to dispense a portion, to distribute), to
assign, portion out, (από as in άπο8ί8ωμι [q. v., cf. aro.V.]) :
Ttvi Ti viz. τιμήν, showing honor, 1 Pet. iii. 7, (so Hdian.
1, 8, 1 ; την τι/ιήκ και την (ίχαριστίαν, Joseph, antt. 1, 7,
1 ; τω ίπκτκόπω πάσαν ϊντροττήν, Ignat. ad Magnes. 3 ;
first found in [.Simon. 9 7 in Anthol. Pal. 7, 253, 2 (vol. i.
p. 64 ed. Jacobs)] : Pind. Isthm. 2, 68 ; often in Plat.,
Aristot., Plut., al.).*
άτι-ο-νίτΓτω : lo u'ash off; 1 aor. mid. άπινι^άμην ; in
mid. to wash one's self off, to wash off for one's self: Tas
Xf'ipas, Mt. xxviL 24, cf. Deut. xxi. 6 sq. (The earlier
Greeks say άπονίζω — but with fut. άπονίψω, 1 aor. ane-
«ψ-α; the later, as Theophr. char. 25 [30 (17)]; Plut.
Phoc. 18; Athen. iv. c. 31 p. 149 c, άπονίπτω, although
this is found [but in the mid.] even in Horn. Od. 18,
1711.)•
άίΓο-ιτΟίΓΓω : 2 aor. άπtπfσυv; [(cf. πίπτω); fr. Iloin.
down] ; to fall off, slip down from : Acts ix. 18 [W. § 52,
4, 1 a.].•
άπο-Ίτ\αν&ω, -ω ; 1 aor. pass, ^^πf πλανήίΐ)» ; to cause to
go astral/, trop. to lead away from the truth lo error : τικά,
Mk. xiii. 22 ; pass, to go astray, stray away from : άπο τή{
πίστfωs, 1 Tim. vi. 10. ( [Ilippocr.] ; Plat. A.x. p. 369 d. ;
Polyb. 3, 57, 4 ; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) •
άΐΓ0-π•λ('ω ; 1 aor. άπeπ\evσa ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to sail
airuy, dejxirl by ship, set sail : Acts xiii. 4 ; .xiv. 26 ; xx.
15 ; xxvii. 1.*
άίΓΟ-ΊτλΟνω : [1 aor. άπίπλυνα (?)] ; to trash off: Lk. v. 2
(where L Tr WH t.\t. ίπλυνον, Τ WH mrg. -av, for R G
άπ€π\νναν [possibly an impf. form, ef. B. 40 (35);
Soph. Glossary, etc. p. 90]). (Horn. Od. 6, 95 ; Plat.,
Plut., and subseq. writ. ; Sept. 2 S. xix. 24, [cf. Jer. ii. 22 ;
iv. 14; Ezek. xvi. 9 var.].) *
ά'ΐΓθ--ΐΓν£γω : 1 aor. άπ^πνιζα ; 2 aor. pass, άπ^πνίγην ;
(από as in άποκτ^ίνω q. v. [cf. to choke off^); lo choke:
Mt. xiii. 7 (T WH mrg. ίπι^Ιακ) : Lk. viii. 7 (of seed over-
laid by thorns and killed by them) ; to suffocate with
water, to drown, Lk. viii. 33 (as in Dem. 32, 6 [i. e. p.
883, 28 etc.; schol. ad Eur. Or. 812]).*
duopc'u, -ώ : impf. 3 pers. sing. ηπόρ(ΐ (^Ik. vi. 20 Τ WH
Tr mrg.) ; [pres. mid. άποροΰμαι] ; lo be αποροί (fr. α priv.
and πόρο! a transit, ford, way, revenue, resource), i. e.
lo be without resources, lo be in straits, lo be lef tcanling,
lo be embarrassed, lo be in doubl, not to k-now which way
to turn ; [impf. in Mk. vi. 20 (see above) ποΧλίι ήπόριι he
was in jierplexity about many things or much pirjilexed
(cf. Thuc. 5, 40, :i ; Xen. HeU. 6, 1. 4 ; Hdt. 3. 4 ; 4, 1 79 ;
Aristot. tneteorolog. 1, 1) ; elsewhere] Mid. to he at a loss
with one's self, be in doubl; not to know how lo deride οτ
what to do, to he perplexed : absol. 2 Co. iv. 8 ; πίρί tivos,
Lk. xxiv. 4 L Τ Tr WH ; πfp\ tIvos rts Xf'yf i, Jn. xiii. 22 ;
άποροΰμαι iv ΰμίν I am perplexed about you, I know not
how to deal with you, in what style to address you, Gal.
iv. 20 ; άπορούμίνο! fya> fi's [T Tr AVH om. ci'f] την πιρΊ
τούτον [των L Τ Tr WH] fiyTrjaifl being perplexed liow
to decide in reference to the inquiry concerning him [or
these things']. Acts xxv. 20. (Often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt.
down ; often also in Sept.) [Comp. : hi-, φαπηρ^ω.] *
απορία, -at, ή, (άπορίω, q. v.), the stale of one who is
άπορος, perplexity : Lk. xxi. 25. (Often in Grk. writ, fr
[Pind. and] Hdt. down; Sept.)*
άττο-ρρΙτΓτβ : 1 aor. άπίρριψα [Τ WH write wifh one μ;
άττορφαι'ίζω
67
ατΓοστελΛω
see Ρ, ρ]; [fr. Horn, down] ; to throw away, cast flown ; re-
flexively, to cast one's self down : Actsxxvii. 43 [K.Y. cast
themselves overboard^. (So in Lcian. ver. hist. 1, 30 var. ;
[Chariton 3, 5, see D'OrviUe ad lot-.] ; cf. W. 251 (23(J) ;
[B. 140(127)].)*
air-op4>avC^u : [1 aor. pass. ptcp. άτΓορφανισΰίΪ!^ ; (fr.
ορφανός bereft, and από sc. tikos), to bereace of a parent or
parents, (so Aeschyl. choeph. 247 (249)) ; hence metaph.
άπορφανισθίντα αφ' υμών liereft of vour intercourse and
society, 1 Th. ii. 1 7 [here Rec"•!^ (by mistake) άποφανι-
crfleVrff].*
άίΓΟ-ΐΓΚίυάζω : 1 aor. \\\\Λ. άπ^σκ^νασάμην, {σκΐνάζω to
prepare, provide, fr. σκ£ Oof a utensil), to carry ojf goods
and chattels ; to pack tip and carry off; mid. to carry off'
one's personal property or provide for its carrying away,
(Polyb. 4, «1, 11 ; Diod. 13, 91 ; Dion. Hal. 9, 23, etc.) :
άποσκ.(νασάμ(νοι having collected and removed our bag-
gage, Acts xxi. 1 5 ; but L Τ Tr WH read ίπισκευασάμι-
voi (<[■ V.).*
άΐΓθ-(Γκίασμιο, -roc, τό, (σκιάζω, fr. σκιά), a shade cast by
one object upon another, a shadow : τροπής άττοσκίασμα
shadow caused by revolution, Jas. i. 1 7. Cf. Ιιπανγασμα*
άίΓΟ-σ-ιτάω, -ώ ; 1 aor. άπίσπασα ; 1 aor. pass, άπίσπάσθην ;
to draw off', tear away : τ. μάχαψαν to draw one's sword, Mt.
xxvi. 51 ((κσπαν T. μάχ. {or ρομφαίαν), 1 S. -xvii. 51 [AJex.
etc.]; σπάχ, 1 Chr. .\i. 11 ; Mk. xiv. 47); άποσπάν τους
μαθητίις οπίσω ίαυτών to draw away the disciples to their
own party, Acts xx. 30, (very similarly, Ael. v. h. 13, 32).
Pass, reflexively : αποσπασθίντ^ς απ αΐτων having torn
ourselves from the embrace of our friends. Acts x.xi. 1 ;
άπ^σπάσθη απ' αυτών he parted, tore himself, from them
about a stone's cast, Lk. .xxii. 41 ; cf. Meyer ad loc. (In
prof. auth. fr. [Find, and] Hdt. down.) *
άτΓοσταο-ία. -ας, ή. (άφίσταμαι), a falling away, defection,
apostasy ; in the Bible sc. from the true religion : Acts
xxi. 21 ; 2 Th. ii. 3 ; ([Josh. xxii. 22 ; 2 Chr. xxLx. 19 ;
xxxiii. 19] ; Jer. ii. 19 ; xxxvi. (xxix.) 32 Compl. ; 1 Mace.
ii. 15). The earlier Greeks say άπόστασις; see Lob. ad
Phryn. p. .528 ; [W. 24].*
άτΓοστάσ-νον, -ου, τό, very seldom in native Grk. writ.,
defection, of a freedman from his patron, Dem. 35, 48
[940, 16]; in the Bible 1. dirorce, repudiation: Mt.
xix. 7 ; Mk. x. 4 (βιβλίον άποστασίου, equiv. to "\3D
Jin""13 book or bill of divorce, Deut. xxiv. 1,3; [Is. 1. 1 ;
Jer. iii. 8]). 2. a bill of divorce: Mt. v. 31. Grotius
ad loc. and Lightfoot, Horae Hebr. ad loc, give a copy
of one.*
άΐΓΐ«ΓΤ€γάζω : 1 aor. άπ€στ(γασα ; (στ€γάζω, fr. στί-γη) ;
to uncovir, take off the roof: Mk. ii. 4 (Jesus, ivitb his
hearers, was in the ύπ(ρωον q. v., and it was the roof of
this which those who were bringing the sick man to Jesus
are said to have ' dug out ' ; [cf. B. D. s. v. House, p.
1104]). (Strabo 4, 4, 6, p. 303 ; 8, 3, 30, p. .542.) *
άπο-<ΓΤ(λλω; fut. αττοστ^λώ ; 1 aor. άττίστ? ίλα : pf. άπί-
σταλκα, [3 pers. plur. άπίσταΧκαν Acts xvi. 'M'> I, Τ Tr Λ\ II
(see -γίνομαι init.) ; Pass., pres. άποστί\\ομαι] ; pf . άπiστa\-
μαι ; 2 aor. απ^σταΚην ; [fr. Sojili. down] ; prop, to send
off, send away ; 1. to order (one) to go to a place ap-
pointed; a. either persons sent with commissions,
or t h i η g s intended for some one. So, very frequently,
Jesus teaches that God sent him, as Mt. x. 40; Mk. ix.
37 ; Lk. X. IG ; Jn. v. 36, etc. he, too, is said to have sent
his apostles, i. e. to have appointc<i them : Mk. vi. 7 ; Mt.
X. 16 ; Lk. xxii. 35 ; Jn. xx. 21, etc. messengers are sent :
Lk. vii. 3 ; ix. 52 ; x. 1 ; servants, Mk. vi. 27 ; xii. 2 ; Mt.
xxi. 36; xxii. 3; an embassy, Lk. xiv. 32; xix. 14; an-
gels, Mk. xiii. 27; Alt. xxiv. 31, etc. Things are said
to be sent, which are ordered to be led away or con-
veyed to any one, as Mt. xxi. 3 ; Mk. xi. 3 ; το δμίπανον
i. e. reapers, Mk. iv. 29 [al. take άποστίΚλω here of
the " putting forth " of the sickle, i. e. of the act of reai>
ing ; cf. Joel (iii. 18) iv. 13 ; Rev. xiv. 15 (s. ν.πίμπω. b.)] ;
τον λόγον. Acts X. 36 ; xiii. 26 (L Τ Tr WH (ξαπ(στά\η) ;
την ΐπαγγΐΚίαν (equiv. to τό ίΤτηγγ^'Κμΐνον, i. e. the prom-
ised Holy Spirit) ί'φ' υμάς, Lk. xxiv. 49 [T Tr WII c|a-
ποστί'λλω] ; τ\ διό χ^φός τίνος, after the Hebr. Ύ3, Acts
xi. 30. b. The Place of the sending is specified :<ΐποοτ.
€Ϊϊ Τίνα τάτΓον, Mt. xx. 2 ; Lk. i. 26 ; Acts vii. 34 ; x. 8 ;
xix. 22 ; 2 Tim. iv. 12 ; Rev. v. 6, etc. God sent Jesus eis
τον κόσμον: Jn. iii. 17; x. 36; xvii. 18; 1 Jn. iv. 9. «j
\_unto ie.] among : Mt. xv. 24 ; Lk. xi. 49 ; Acts [xxii. 21
AVH mrg.] ; xxvi. 1 7 ; \tv (by a pregnant or a Lat. con-
struction) cf. W. ? 50, 4 ; B. 329 (283) : Mt. x. 16 ; Lk.
X. 3 ; yet see 1 a. above] ; οπίσω τινός, Lk. .xix. 14 ; ΐμπρο-
σθίν τίνος, Jn. iii. 28 ; and προ προσώπου τινός, after
the Hebr. "'JsS, before (to precede) one: Mt. xi. 10;
Mk. i. 2 ; Lk. vii. 27 ; x. 1. προς τίνα, to one : Mt. xxi.
34, 37; Mk. xii. 2 sq. ; Lk. vii. 3, 20; Jn. v. 33; Acts
viii. 14; 2 Co. xii. 17, etc. W h e η c e, or by or from
whom, one is sent: ΰπο toC βιοϋ, Lk. i. 26 (T Tr
WII από) ; πάρα β(οΰ, Jn. i. 6 (Sir. xv. 9) ; από with gen.
of pers., from the house of any one : Acts .x. 1 7 [T WH
Tr mrg. υπό'], 21 Rec. ; ex with gen. of place : Jn. i. 19.
c. The Object of the mission is indicated by an infin.
following: Iilk. iii. 14 ; Mt. xxii. 3 ; Lk. i. 19 ; iv. 18 (Is.
Lxi. 1, [on the pf. cf. AV. 272 (255) ; B. 197 (171)]) ; Lk.
ix. 2 ; Jn. iv. 38 ; 1 Co. i. 1 7 ; Rev. xxii. 6. [foil, by eh for.
eif διακονίαν, Ileb. i. 14. foU. by ίνα : Mk. xii. 2, 13 ; Lk.
.XX. 10, 20 ; Jn. i. 19 ; iii. 17 ; vii. 32; 1 Jn. iv. 9. [foil, by
όπως: Acts ix. 17.] foil, by an ace. with inf. : Acts v. 21.
foil, by τινά with a pred. ace. : Acts iii. 26 (fiXoyoivTa
υμάς to confer God's blessing on you [cf. B. 203 (176)
sqq.]) ; Acts vii. 35 (άρχοντα, to be a ruler) ; 1 Jn. iv. 10.
d. άποστίλλιιν by itself, without an ace. [cf. W. 594
(552) ; B. 146 (128)] : as άττοστίλλ^χ προς τίνα, Jn. v.
33 ; with the addition of the ptcp. "Κΐγων, Χίγουσα, λε-
yovTfs, to say through a messenger: Mt. xxvii. 19; Mk. iii.
31 [here φωvoϋvτfς αυτόν R G, κάΚοϋντ(ς air. L Τ Tr
WH] ; Jn. xi. 3 ; Acts xiii. 15 ; [xxi. 25 nep\ τών πιπιστ^ν-
κότων ΐθνών ημ^ΐς ancOTfiXapfv (L Tr txt. Λ\ Η txt.) κρί-
ναντις etc. we sent imrd, giving Judgment, etc.]. ^ten
one accomplished anything thniM<rh a messenger, it is ex-
pressed thus : άποστ(ί\ας or πίμψας he did so and so : as,
(Ϊ7Γοστ€ΐλαΓ ά«ΐλΓ, Mt. ii. 16; Mk. vi. 17; Acts vii. 14;
Rev. i. 1 ; (so also the Greeks, as Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 6 πίμ-^ας
ηρώτα, Plut. de liber, educ. c. 14 πίμψας avtiKt τον θιό-
ατΓοστερβω
68
airoffwa-yw^ot
cptrov; and Sept. 2 K. vi. 13 aifo(rr(i\as λ^</τομα> αΐτόν).
2. to send away i. e. to dismiss ; a. (o «//««• one to ile-
part : τίνα e'v άφίσίΐ, that he may be in a state of liberty,
Lk. iv. 18 (I'J), (Is. Iviii. 6). b. tn order one to depart,
send off: Mk. viii. 26 ; rira κινάν. Mk. xii. .S. c. to drive
nw-rtii : Mk. V. 10. [Co.Ml•. ; ΐξ-, σνν-αηηστίΧΚω. Syn. see
πίμπω, fin.]
απ-ο-<ΓΤΕρ<'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. άπισηρησα ; [Pass., pres. απο-
στ(μονμαι] ; pf. ptcp. άπιστίρημίνα ; '" defraud, roll, de-
spoil : absol., Mli. .\. 19; 1 Co. vi. 8; άλλίίλουΓ to with-
hold themselves from one another, of those who mutually
deny themselves cohabitation, 1 Co. vii. 5. Mid. to allimi
one's self to be defrauded [W. § 38, 3] : 1 Co. vi. 7 ; τινά
Tt» Γ (as in Grk. writ.), to deprive one of a lltinr/; pass.
άπίοτίρημίνοι rijs ά\ηθ(ίαί, 1 Tim. vi. 5 [ W. 1 9G ( 1 85 ) ; B.
158 (138)]; τι to defraud of a tliinrj, to withdraw or keep
back a thinj by frau<l : pass, μισθία άπ(στ(ρημίνος, -las.
V. 4 (Τ Tr WII αφνστ(ρημ(νος, sec άφυστ^ρίω; [cf. also
από, II. 2 d. bb. p. 59"]), (Deut. .\xiv. 14 [(^16) Ale.K.] ;
Mai. iii. 5).•
ότΓΟ-στολή. -rjs, η. (άποστίΚλω) ; 1. a sending awai/ :
Ti/ioXeoi/rof (Is Σικ(λίαν, Pint. Timol. 1, etc.; of the
sending off of a lleet, Thuc. 8, 9 : also of consuls with an
army, i. e. of an expedition, Polyb. 26, 7, 1. 2. a send-
ing away i. e. dismission, release : Sept. Eccl. viii. 8.
3. a thing sent, esp of gifts : 1 K. ix. 16 [Alex.] ; 1 Mace,
ii. 18 etc. cf. Grimm ad loc. 4. in the N. T. the oj/ire
and dignity of the apostles of Christ, (Vulg. opostolalus),
apostolate, apostleship : Acts i. 25; Ro. i. 5; 1 Co. ix. i ;
Gal. ii. 8.•
άιτόστολοϊ, -ου, ό; 1. α delegate, messenger, one sent
forth with orders, (Hdt. I, 21 ; 5, 38; for Γ\\^ψ in 1 K. xiv.
6 [.\lex.] ; rabbin. Π'^Ιί) : Jn. xiii. 16 (where ό άπόστ. and
ό τΓί'μψαΓ αυτόν are contrasted) ; foil, by a gen., as των εκ-
κλησιών, 2 Co. viii. 23 ; Phil. ii. 25 ; άπόστ. τήί όμοΧογία!
ήμων the apostle whom we confess, of Christ, (iod's chief
messenger, who has brought the κΧησιι (πουράνια, as
compared with Moses, whom the Jews confess, Heb. iii.
1. 2. Specially applied to the twelve disciples whom
Christ selected, out of the multitude of his adherents, to
be his constant companions and the heralds to proclaim to
men the kingdom of God : Mt. x. 1—4 ; Lk. vi. 1 3 ; Acts i.
26 ; Rev. xxi. 14, and often, but nowhere in the Gosjiel
and Epistles of John ; [" the word αποστόλου occurs 79
times in the N. T., and of these 68 instances are in .St.
Luke and St. Paul." Bp. Lghtft.]. With these apostles
Paul claimed eijuality, because through a heavenly inter-
vention he had been appointed by the ascended Christ
himself to preach the gospel among the Gentiles, and
owed his knowledge of the way of salvation not to man's
instruction but to direct revelation from Christ himself,
and moreover had evinced his apostolic (lualifications by
many signal proofs : Gal. i. 1, 11 sq. ; ii. 8 ; 1 Co. i. 1 7 ;
ix. 1 sq. ; xv. 8-10 ; 2 Co. iii. 2 Siit]. ; xii. 1 2 ; I Tim. ii. 7 ;
2 Tim. i. 11, cf. Acts xxvi. 12-20. According to Paul,
apostles surpassed as well the various other orders of
Christian teachers (cf. &ώάσκάλο!, (ναγγιΧιστης, προ-
φητηί), as also the rest of those on whom the special
gifts (cf. χάρισμα) of the Holy Spirit had been bestowed,
by receiving a richer and more copious conferment of
the Spirit : 1 Co. xii. 28 sq. ; Eph. iv. 11. Certain false
teachers are rated sharply for arrogating to themselves
the name and authority of apostles of Christ : 2 Co. xi.
5,13; Rev. ii. 2. 3. In a broader sense the name is
transferred to other eminent Christian teachers ; as
Barnabas, Acts .xiv. 14, and perhaps also Timothy and
Silvanus, 1 Th. ii. 7 (6), cf. too Ro. xvi. 7 (?). But in
Lk. xi. 49 ; Eph. iii. 5 ; Rev. xviii. 20, ' apostles ' is to be
taken in the narrower sense. [On the application of
the term see esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. pp. 92-101; liar•
nack on 'Teaching* etc. 11,3; cf BB.DD. s. v.]
άτΓοστομιατίζω ; {στηματίζω — notextant• — from στόμα) ;
prop, to sjHuli UTTO στύματοί, (cf. αποστηθίζω) ; 1. lo
recite from memory : Themist. or. 20 \>. 238 ed. Hard. ;
to repeat to a pupil (anything) /or him to commit to mem-
ory: Plat. Euthyd. p. 276 c, 277 a.; used of a Sibyl
prophesying, Plut. Thes. 24. 2. lo ply with questions,
catechize, and so to entice lo [off-hand] answers : τινά, Lk.
xi. 53.•
diro-OTpf φω : fut. άποστρί'ψω ; 1 aor. aTtioTpf^a ; 2 aor.
pass, άπιστράφην; [pres. mid. αποστρέφομαι; fr. Iloni.
down] ; 1. lo turn away : τίνα or τ1 άπό τιιόε, 2 Tim. iv.
4 {την άκοην ΰπο τήί άΧηθι'ια!) ; Ιο remove anytliing from
any one, Ro. xi. 26 (Is. Ux. 20) ; άποστρϊφίΐν τίκά simjjly,
to turn him away from allegiance to any one, tempt to
defection, [A. V. perverti, Lk. ,xxiii. 14. 2. lo turn
hack; return, bring back: Mt. xxvi. 52 (put b.ack thy
sword into its sheath) ; Mt. xxvii. 3, of Judas bringing
back the shekels, Avhere Τ Tr WH ίστρ(ψ(, [cf. Test. xii.
Patr. test. Jos. § 1 7]. (In the same sense for 2'ur\, Gen.
xiv. 16; xxviii. 15; xUii. 11 (12), 20(21), etc. ; Bar. i.
8 ; ii. 34, etc.) 3. intrans. to turn one's self away, turn
hack, return : άιτϊι των πονηριών. Acts iii. 26, cf. 19, (άττο
άμαρτίαί. Sir. viii. 5; xvii. 21 [26 Tdf.] ; to return from
a place, Gen. xviii. 33 ; 1 Mace. xi. .54, etc. ; [see Kneucker
on Bar. i. 13] ; Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 12) ; cf. Meyer on Acts
I.e.; [al. (with A. V.) take it actively here: in turning
away every one of you, etc.]. 4. Mid., with 2 aor.
pass., to turn one's self atcay from, with ace. of the obj.
(cf. [Jelf § 548 obs. 1: Krug. § 47, 23, 1] ; B. 192(166));
lo reject, refuse: τινά, Mt. v. 42; Heb. xii. 25; την ά\ή-
θίΐαν,ΎΊΐ. i. 14; in the sense of rfesert/n 7, rtra, 2 Tim. i. 15.*
όΐΓθ-<Γτνγί'ω, -ώ ; to dislike, abhor, have a horror of: Ro.
xii. 9; (Hdt. 2, 47; 6, 129; Soph., Eur., al.). The
word is fully discussed by Fritzsche ad loc. [who takes
the άττο- as expressive of separation (cf. l.at. refor-
midare), al. regard it as intensive; (see άπό,ν.)].•
όίΓοστηΆγοιγοϊ, •ον, (συναγωγή, q. v.), excluded from the
sacred assemblies of the Israelites ; excommunicated, [A. V.
put out of the synagogue]: Jn. ix. 22; xii. 42; xvi. 2.
Whether it denotes also exclusion fr. all intercourse with
Israelites (2 Esdr. x. 8), must apparently be left in
doubt ; cf. Win. [or Riehm] R W B. s. v. Bann ; Wieseler
on Gal. i. 8, p. 45 sqq. [reproduced by Prof. Riddle in
Schaff's Lange's Romans pp. 304-306 ; cf. B. D. s. v.
E.xcommunication]. (Not found in prof, auth.)•
ατΓοτασσω
69
ατΓοχρησκ
«το^άσ-σ-αι : to set apart, to separate ; in the N. T. only
in Mid. αποτάσσομαι ; 1 aor. άπίταξάμην ; 1. prop, to
separate one's self, withdraw one's sel/irom any one, i. e.
lo take leave of, bid farewell to, (Vulg. valefacio [etc.]) :
Tivi, Mk. vi. 40 ; Lk. L\. 61 ; Acts .wiii. 18, 21 [here L Τ
Tr om. the dat.] ; 2 Co. ii. 1.3. (That the early Grk.
writ, never so used the word, but said άσπ<ίζ(σθαί τίνα, is
shown by Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 23 sq. ; [cf. \V. 23 (22) ;
B. 179 (156)].) 2. trop. to renounce, forsake: τινί,
Lk. xiv. 33. (So also Joseph, antt. 11, 6, 8 ; Phil, alleg.
iii. § 48 ; ταΐί τοΰ βίου φροντίσι, Euseb. h. e. 2, 17, 5 ; [τώ
/3ιω, Ignat. ad Philadelpli. 11, 1 ; cf. Herm. mand. 6, 2,
9; Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 6, 4 and 5 Λvhere see Gebh. and
Ilarn. for other e.x.x., also Soph. Lex. s. v.].) •
aircM-tXtu, -ώ ; [1 aor. pass. ptcp. αποτ(λίσίίίί] ; to per-
fect; to briufj quite lo an end : ιάσβί?, (n cf/nt/>/ish, Lk. xiii.
32 (LT Tr \V Η for R G (πιτίΧω) ; η αμαρτία αττοτίλβ-
σθ(Ίσα having come to maturity, Jas. i. 15. (Hdt., Xen.,
Plat., and subseq. writ.) *
άίΓο-τίθημι : 2 aor. mid. ατκθίμην ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to
put off or aside ; in the N. T. only mid. to put off frum
one's self: τα ιμάτια. Acts τϋ. 58 ; [to lay up or awai/, iv tSj
φυλακή (i. e. put), Mt. xiv. 3 L Τ Tr WH (so tts φυ\α-
κήν, Lev. xxiv. 1 2 ; Num. xv. 34 ; 2 Chr. xviii. 26 ; Polyb.
24, 8, 8; Diod. 4, 49, etc.)]; trop. those things are said
to be put off or away which any one gives up, renounces :
as τα (pya τοϋ σκότους, Ro. xiii. 12 ; — Eph. iv. 22 [cf. \V.
347(325); B. 274 (236)], 25; Col. iii. 8; Jas. i. 21 ; 1 Pet.
ii. 1 ; Heb. xii. 1 ; (την όργήν. Plut. Coriol. 1 9 ; τον πλοΰ-
τον, την μαΧακίαν, etc. Luc. dial. mort. 10, 8; τ. (\(υθ(ρίαν
κ. τταρρησίαν, ibid. 9, etc.).*
άίΓο-τινόο-σω ; 1 aor. αποτίναξα ; [1 aor. mid. ptcp. άττο-
τιναξιΊμίνο!, Acts xxviii. 5 Tr mrg.] ; to shake off: Lk. ix.
5; Acts xxviii. 5. (1 S. x. 2; Lam. ii. 7; Eur. Bacch.
253 ; [αποτιναχθτι, Galen 6, 821 ed. Kuhn].) *
ΟΊΓΟ^τίνω and αττο-τ/ω : fut. αποη'σω; (από as in αττοδί-
δωμι [cf. also από, V.]), to pay off, repay: Philcm. 19.
(Often in Sept. for Ώ^ΰ; in prof. auth. fr. Horn, down.) *
άπο-τολμάω, -ω ; prop, to be bold of one's self (από [q. v.
V.]), i. e. to assume boldness, make bold : Ro. x. 20 ; cf.
Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 15. (Occasionally in
Thuc, Plat., Aeschin., Polyb., Diod., Plut.) *
άιτοτομία, -as, ή, (the nature of that which is απότομο!,
cut off, abrupt, precipitous like a cliff, rough ; fr. άπο-
τίμνω), prop, sharpness, (differing fr. απητομή a cutting
off, a segment); severity, roughness, riyor: Ro. xi. 22
(where opp. to χρηστάτης, as in Plut. de lib. educ. c. 18
to TrpaoTijf, in Dion. Ilal. 8, 61 to το tmfiKes, and in Diod.
p. 591 [excpt. Lxxxiii. (frag. 1. 32, 27, 3 Dind.)] to ήμι-
ρότη!).'
άίΓοτόμως, adv., (cf. άποτομία) ; a. abruptly, precipi-
tously, b. trop. shar/jiy, severely, [cf. our curtly'\ : Tit. i.
13; 2 Co. xiii. 10. On the adj. απότομο! cf. Grimm on
Sap. p. 121 [who in illustration of its use in Sap. v. 20,
22: vi. 5, 11; xi. 10: xii. 9; xviii. 15, refers to the
similar metaph. use in Diod. 2, 57; Longin. de sublim.
27 ; and the use of the Lat. abscisus in Λ'al. Max. 2, 7,
14, etc. ; see also Polyb. 1 7, 1 1, 2 : Polyc. ad Phil. 6, 1].*
amy^piira : [fr. Horn, down] ; to turn away; Mid. [pres.
αποτρέπομαι, impv. άποτρίπον] lo turn one's self away
from, to shun, avoid : τινά or τ» (see άποστρίφω sub fin.)
2 Tim. iii. 5. (4 Mace. i. 33 ; Aeschyl. Sept. lOiJO ; Eur.
Iph. Aul. 336; [Aristot. plant. 1, 1 p. 815•', 18; Polyb.
al.].)•
άπ-ονσία, -as, ή, (άπίϊναι), absence : Phil. ii. 1 2. [From
Aeschyl. down.] *
απ&.ψ€'ρω : 1 aor. άπηνίγκα ; 2 aor. inf. απ f vf-yjceti^ ; Pass.,
[pres. inf. άποφίρ(σθαι}; 1 aor. inf. άπ^νίχβήναι; [fr.
Horn, down] ; to carry off,take away : τινά, with the idea
of violence included, Mk. xv. 1 ; fit τόττον τιι/ά. Rev. xvii.
3; xxi. 10; pass. Lk. xvi. 22. to carry or bring airay
(Lat. defero) : τι els with ace. of place, 1 Co. xvi. 3 ; τι
από Tivos ίπί τίνα, ivith pass.. Acts xix. 12 (L Τ Tr WH
for Rcc. (πιφ(ρ(σθαι).*
άίΓο-φίύγω [jjtcp. in 2 Pet. ii. 18 L Τ Tr WH ; W. 342
(321)]; 2 aor. άπ(φυ•/ον; [fr. (Ilom.) batrach. 42, 47
down]; to fee from, escape; with ace, 2 Pet. ii. 18
(where L Τ wrongly put a comma after άποφ. [W. 529
(492)]), 20; with gen., by virtue of the prep. [B. 158
(138) ; W. § 52, 4, 1 c], 2 Pet. i. 4.•
άτΓθ-ψθ€'γγομαι ; 1 aor. άπ(φ6(•γξάμην ; to speak out,
speak ftjrih, jironounce, not a word of every-day speech,
but one " belonging to dignified and elevated discourse,
like the Lat. profari, pronuntiare; properly it has the
force of to utter or declare one's self, give one's opinion,
(einen Ausspruch thun), and is used not only of prophets
(see Kypke on Acts ii. 4, — adding from the Sept. Ezek.
xiii. 9 ; Mic. v. 1 2 ; 1 Chr. xxv. 1), but also of wise men
and philosophers (Diog. Laert. 1,63; 73; 79; whose
pointed sayings the Greeks call άποφθί'γματα, Cic off. 1,
29) " ; [see φθίγγομαι]. Accordingly, " it is used of the
utterances of the Christians, and esp. Peter, on that illus-
trious day of Pentecost after they had been fired by the
Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 4, 14 ; and also of the disclosures
made by Paul to [before] king Agrii)pa concerning the
άποκάλυψις κυρίου that had been given him. Acts xxvi.
25." Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 16.'
άπο-ψορτίζομαι ; (φορτίζω to load; φύρτο! a load), lo
disburden one's self; τι, to lay down a hail, unlade, <//.«-
charge : τον -γόμον, of a ship. Acts xxi. 3 ; cf. Meyer and
De SVette ad loc. ; W. 349 (328) sq. (Elsewhere also
used of sailors lightening ship during a storm in order to
avoid shipwreck : Philo de praem. et poen. § 5 κυβ(ρ-
vητηs, χίΐμώνων (πιγινομίνων, άποφορτίζίται ; Athen. 2, .5,
p. 37 c. S(|. where it occurs twice.) *
όΐΓΛ-χρησ -is, -€ωs, ή, (άποχράομοί to use to the full, to
abuse), abuse, misu.'<e : Col. ii. 22 5 ίστιν πάντα ds φθορά»
τη άποχρήσ(ΐ " all which (i. e. things forbidden) tend to
destruction (bring destruction) by abuse"; Paul says
this from the standpoint of the false teachers, who in
any u.«e of those things whatever saw an " abuse," i. e. a
blameworthy use. In opposition to those who treat the
clause as parenthetical and understand άπόχρησκ to
mean consumption by use (a being used i/yi, as in Plut.
moral, p. 26 7 f. [quaest. Rom. 18]), so that the words do
not give the sentiment of the false teachers but Paul's
αττο-χαρίω
70
άττώλεια
judgment of it, verv similar to that set forth in Mt. xv.
17 ; 1 Co. vi. 13, of. Do Wette ail loc. [But see Meyer,
Ellicott, Lightfoot.] *
οητο-χωρί'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. άτΐίχώρησα; [fr. Thuc. down];
to go ttivai/, depart : ι^—ό τινοί, Mt. vii. 23 ; Lk. ix. 39 ;
Acts xiii. 13; [absol. L•k. xx. 20 Tr mrg.].'
άίΓο-χωρίζω : [ 1 aor. pass. άπ(χωρίσθην} ; to separate,
sever, (ofti'ii in Plato) ; la part uxiiii(/er: pass, ό oipavot
άπ(χωμίσθη, Rev. vi. 14; refiexivdy, to separate one's
self, ilr/tart Jhim : άποχωρισθήναι avrovs απ άΧ\η\ων, Acts
XV. 39.•
όίΓο-ψύχω ; Ιο breathe out life, expire; to faint or swoon
awa,/: Lk. xxi. 26. (So Thuc. 1, 134; Bion 1, 9, al. ;
4 Mai-o. XV. 18.)•
'Airirios, -ou, 0, Appitts, a Roman praenomen ; Άηιτίου
φήρον Appii Forum (Cic. ad Att. 2, 10; Hor. sat. 1,5,
3), [R. V. The Mark-el of Appius], the name of a town
in Italy, situated 43 Roman miles from Rome on the
Appian way, — (this road was paved with square [(?)
polvgonal] stone by the censor Appius Claudius Caecus,
B. c. 312, and led through the porta Capena to Capua,
and thence as far as Brundisium) : Acts .xxviii. 15. [Cf.
BB.DD.]•
ά-^ρόσ -iTos. -ov, (προσύναι to go to), unapproachable, in-
accessible: φως απρΰσιτον, 1 Tim. vi. 16. (Polyb., Diod.,
[Strabo], Philo, l.ciaii.. Pint. ; (peyyoi άπρύσιτον, Tatian
c. 20; δόξα [φώϊ], Chrys. [vi. 66 ed. Montf.] on Is.
vi. 2.)•
airp<i(rKoiros, -ok, (προσκόπτω, q. v. ) ; 1. actively,
having nothing for one to strike against; nnl causing to
slumble ; a. prop. : oSrfs, a smooth road. Sir. xxxv.
(xxxii.) 21. b. mctaph. not leading others into sin by
one's mode pf life: 1 Co. x. 32. 2. passively, a. not
striking against or slumhling; metaph. not led into sin;
blameless: Phil. i. 10 (joined with fiXntpii/cit). b. with-
out offence : συν(ί&ησις, not troubled ami distressed by a
consciousness of sin, .\cts xxiv. 16. (Not found in prof,
auth. [exc. Sext. Emj). 1, 195 (p. 644, 13 Bekk.)].)•
άΐΓρο<Γ<ι>ΐΓολή•πτω5 [-\ημπτω! L Τ Tr WII ; cf. reff. s. v.
M, μ\, a word of Ilcllenistic origin, (a priv. and προσω-
ποΧ'ΐτΓτης, (^. \.), irilhoul respect of persons, i. e. impar-
tially: 1 Pet. i. 17, (Ep. of Barn. 4, 12; [Clem. Rom. 1
Cor. 1,3]). (The adj. άπροσωπόληπτος occurs here and
there in ecd. writ.) *
o-irraiiTTOS, -ov (πται'ω, (|. v.), not stumbling, standing
firm, ercmpt from falling, (prop., of a horse, Xen. de re
eq. 1, 6) ; metaph. : Jude 24. [Cf. W. 97 (92) ; B. 42
(37).]•
dwTu ; 1 aor. Jitcp. n\|/as ; (cf. Lat. apto. Germ, hefen) ;
[fr. Ilom. down] ; 1. prop, lo fasten to, make adhere
to ; hence, spec, to fasten fire to a thing, to kindle, set on
fire, (often so in Attic) : λΰχνον, Lk. viii. 16 ; xi. 33 ; xv.
8, (Arstph. nub. 57; Theophr. char. 20 (18); Joseph,
antt. 4, 3, 4) : πίρ, Lk. xxii. 55 [T Tr txt. AVH π^ρι-
αψάιηων^ ; πυράν. Acts xxviii. 2 Ij Τ Tr WH. 2. Mid.,
[pres. άτΓτομαι] ; impf. ήπτόμην [Mk. vi. 56 RG Tr mrg.] ;
1 aor. ήψάμην ; in Sept. generally for j,'ii^ il'Jn ; prop.
to fasten one's self to, adhere to, cling to, (Horn. H. 8, 67) ;
a. to touch, foil, by the obj. in gen. [W. § 30, 8 c.; B. 167
(146); cf. Donaldson p. 483] : Mt. viii. 3 ; Mk. iii. 10;
vii. 33; viii. 22, etc.; Lk. .wiii. 15; xxii. 51, — very
often in Mt., Mk. and Lk. In Jn. xx. 1 7, μη μου απτού is
to be explained thus : Do not handle me to see whether
I am still clothed with a body ; there is no need of such
an examination, "fornot yet" etc.; ci. Baumg.-Crusiusand
Mejer ad loc. [as given by Ilackett in Bib. Sacr. for
1868, p. 779 sq., or B. D. Am. ed. p. 1813 sq.]. b. γυι-αι-
Kos. of carnal intercourse with a woman, or cohabitation,
1 Co. vii. 1, like the Lat. tangere, Hor. sat. 1, 2, 54 ; Ter.
Heaut. 4, 4, 15, and the Hebr. ^rj:. Gen. xx. 6 ; Prov. vi.
29, (Plat, de legg. viii. 840 a. ; Plut. Alex. Magn. c. 21).
c. with allusion to the levitical precejit ακαθάρτου μη
απτ(σθ(, have no intercourse with the Gentiles, no fel-
lowship in their heathenish practices, 2 Co. vi. 1 7 (fr.
Is. Hi. 11) ; and in the Jewish sense, μη a\jrt] Col. ii. 21
(the things not to be touched appear to be both women
and certain kinds of food, so that celibacy and abstinence
from various kinds of food and drink are recommeniled ;
cf. De Wette ad loc. [but also Meyer and Bp. Lghtft. ;
on the distinction between the stronger term άπτίσθαι
(to handle!) and the more delicate eiyiiv (lo loucht) cf.
the two commentators just named and Trench § xvii. In
classic Grk. also απτισθαι is the stronger term, denoting
often lo lay hold of hold fast, appropriate ; in its carnal
reference differing from Biyyavfiv by suggesting unlaw-
fulness. iiyyai/fiK is used of touching by the hand as a
means of knowledge, handling for a purpose ; ψηΧαφά»
signifies to feel around with Ihe fingers or hands, esp. in
searching for something, often lo grope, fumble, cf. x/^ijXa-
φίvδal^lindman'shuff. Schmidt ch. 10.]). d. to touch i.e.
assail: τινός, any one, 1 Jn. v. 18, (1 Chr. xvi. 22, etc.).
[COMP. : av-, καθ-, πφΐ-άτττω.]
Άττφία, -ας. ή, Apphiii. name of a woman : Philem. 2.
[Apparently a Phrygian name expressive of endearment,
cf. SuidaeLex. ed. Gaisf. col. 534 a. Άπφιί: ά8(λφης κ.
άδίλφοϋ υποκορισμό, etc. cf. Άπφΰς- See fully in Bp.
Lglitft.'s Com. on Col. and Philem. p. 306 sqq.] *
άπ-ωθε'ω, -ώ : Ιο thrust aicay, push away, repel ; in the
N. T. only Mid., pres. άπωθίομαι (-οϋμαι) ; 1 aor. άπωσάμην
(for which the better writ, used άπιωσάμην, cf. W 90 (86) ;
B. 69 (61)) ; to thrust away from one's self, lo drive away
from one's self, i. e. to repudiate, reject, refuse : τινά. Acts
vii. 27, 39; xiii. 46 ; Ro. xi. 1 sq. ; 1 Tim. i. 19. (Jer.
ii. 36 (37) ; iv. 30 ; vi. 19 ; Ps. xciii. (xciv.) 14 and often.
In (irk. writ. fr. Ilom. down.)*
άπώλΜα, -as, ή, (fr. άπόλΧυμι, ({■ v.) ; 1. actively, a
destroying, utter de.itruction : as, of vessels, Ro. ix. 22 ;
ToO μύρου, waste, Mk. xiv. 4 (in Mt. xxvi. 8 without a
gen.), (in Polyb. 6, 59, 5 consumption, opp. to τήρησις) ;
the putting of a man to death. Acts xxv. 16 Rec. ; by
meton. a destructive thing or opinion: in plur. 2
Pet. ii. 2 Rec. ; but the correct reading aaeXyfiais was
long ago adopted here. 2. passively, α per/.v/imi/, rui'n,
destruction ; a. in general : to apyipiav σον συν σοι (ΐη f is
απ. let thy money perish with thee. Acts viii. 20 ; βυθίζιιν
Tiva fi's SXfflpox K. άπωΚιιαν, with the in'-hldsd idci or
apa
71
άραφο^
misery, 1 Tim. vi. 9 ; aipcVfif άπω\€Ίας destructive opin-
ions, 2 Pet. ii. 1 ; enayfiv eavrms άπώ\€ΐαν, ibid. cf. vs. 3.
b. in particular, llie destruction which consists in the loss
of eternal life, eternal misery, perdition, the lot of those
excluded from the kingdom of God : Rev. xvii. 8, 11, cf.
xix. 20 ; Phil. iii. 19 ; 2 Pet. iii. Ifi ; opp. to ή πιριποίησί!
TJjs ijnif(!js, Heb. x. 39 ; to ή ζωη. Ml. vii. 13 ; to σωτηρία,
Phil. i. 28. 6 νΙοΫ της άπωλιίας, a man doomed to eternal
misery (a Hebraism, see vlos, 2) : 2 Th. ii. 3 (of Anti-
christ) ; .In. xvii. 1 2 (of Judas, the traitor) ; ήμ(ρα κρίσ£ωι
κ. άπωλ(ία! των άσφων, 2 Pet. iii. 7. (In prof. auth. fr.
Polyb. u. s. [but see Aristot. probl. 1 7, 3, 2, vol. ii. p. 916",
26 ; 29, 14, 10 ibid. 952', 2G ; Nicom. eth. 4, 1 ibid. 1120",
2, etc.] ; often in the Sept. and O. T. Apocr.)*
άρα, an illative particle (akin, as it seems, to the verbal
root AP£2 to join, to be fitted, [cf. Curtius § 488 ; VaniCek
p. 47]), whose use among native Greeks is illustrated
fully by Kuhner ii. §§■ 509, 545 ; [Jelf §§ 787-789],
and Klotz ad Devar. ii. pp. 160-180, among others; [for
a statement of diverse views see Btiumlein, Griech. Par-
tikeln, p. 1 9 sq.]. It intimates that, " under these cir-
cumstances something either is so or becomes so " (Klotz
1. c. p. 167) : Lat. ir/itur, consequentlij, [differing from
ουν in ' denoting a subjective impression rather than a
positive conclusion.' L. and S. (see 5 below)]. In the
N. T. it is used frequently by Paul, but in the writings
of John and in the so-called Catholic Epistles it does
not occur. On its use in the N. T. cf. W. §§ 53, 8 a. and
61,6. It is found 1. subjoined to another word : Ro.
vii. 21 ; viii. 1 ; Gal. iii. 7 ; ϊπά άρα since, if it were other-
wise, 1 Co. vii. 14 ; [v. 10, cf. B. § 149, 5]. When placed
after pronouns and interrogative particles, it refers to a
preceding assertion or fact, or even to something exist-
ing only in the mind . τις Spa n-ho then ? Mt. .xviii. 1 (i. e.
one certainly will be the greater, who then ?) ; Jit. xix.
25 (i. e. certainly some will be saved ; you say that the
rich will not ; who then ?) ; Mt. xix. 27 ; xxiv. 45 (I bid
you be ready; who then etc.? the question follows from
this command of mine) ; Mk. iv. 41 ; Lk. i. 66 (from all
these things doubtless something follows ; what, then f) ;
Lk. viii. 25 ; xii. 42 ; xxii. 23 (it will be one of us, which
then f) ; Acts xii. 18 (Peter has disappeared ; what, then,
has become of him?), dapa, Mk. xi. 13 (whether, since
the tree had leaves, he might also find some fruit on it) ;
Acts vii. 1 [Rec] (Spa equiv. to ' since the witnesses tes-
tify thus') ; Acts viii. 22 (if, since thy sin is so grievous,
perhaps the thought etc.) ; e'lnep Spa, 1 Co. xv. 15, (NJ-DS,
ei Spa, Gen. xviii. 3). ουκ Spa, Acts xxi. 38 (thou hast
a knowledge of Greek; art thou not then the Egyptian,
as I suspected?); μητι Spa (Lat. nnm iffitur), did I then
etc., 2 Co. i. 17. 2. By a use doubtful in Grk. writ,
(cf. B. 371 (318) ; [W.'sSS (519)]) it is placed at the
beginning of a sentence ; and so, so then, acrordinf/li/,
equiv. to ωστ( with a finite verb : Spa paprvpe'iTf [μάρτυ-
ρας etrrc Τ Tr WHJ, Lk. xi. 48 (Mt. xxiii. 31 ώστ( μαρ-
Tvptne) ; Ro. χ. 17 ; 1 Co. xv. 18 ; 2 Co. v. 14 (15) (in
LT TrWH no conditional protasis preceding) ; 2 Co. vii.
12 ; Gal. iv. 31 (L Τ Tr WH δ.ό) ; Ileb. iv. 9. 3. in an
apodosis, after a protasis with el, in order to brin» out
what follows as a matter of course, (Germ, so ist ja the
obvious inference is) : Lk. xi. 20 ; Mt. xii. 28 ; 2 Co. v.
14 (15) (R (J, a protasis with el preceding); Gal. ii.
21 ; iii. 29; V. 11 ; Heb. xii. 8; joined to another word,
1 Co. XV. 14. 4. with -ye, rendering it more pointed,
upaye [L Tr uniformly Spa ye; so R WH in Acts xvii.
27 ; cf. W. p. 45 ; Lips. Gram. Untersuch. p. 123], surely
then, so then, (Lat. itar/ue eryo) : Mt. vii. 20; xvii. 26;
Acts xi. 18 (L Τ Tr WH om. ye) ; and subjoined to a
word, Acts xvii. 27 [W. 299 (281)]. 5. Spa ουν, a
combination peculiar to Paul, at the beginning of a sen-
tence (W. 445 (414) ; B. 371 (318), ["άρα ad internam
potius caussam speetat, ουκ magis ad externam." Klotz
ad Devar. ii. p. 717; Sp.i is the more logical, ουν the
more formal connective; " άρα is illative, oiv continua-
tive," Win. 1. c. ; cf. also Kiihner § 545, 3]), [R. V.] so
then, (Lat. hinc igitur) : Ro. v. 18 ; vii. 3, 25 ; viii. 12 ; ix.
16, 18 ; xiv. 12 (L Tr om. WH br. ουν) ; 1 9 [L mrg. 2ρα] ;
Gal. vi. 10 ; Eph. ii. 19 ; 1 Th. v. 6 ; 2 Th. ii. 15.*
άρα, an interrogative particle ["implying anxiety
or impatience on the part of the questioner." L. and
S. s. v.], (of the same root as the precedins; Spa. and only
differing from it in that more vocal stress is laid upon
the first syllable, which is therefore circumtlexed) ; 1.
num igitur, i. e. marking an inferential question to which
a negative answer is expected : Lk. xviii. 8 ; with yt
rendering it more pointed, ipa ye [G Τ ipaye'] : Acts viii.
30 ; [Ipa ουν . . . 8ti>Kopev Lchm. ed. min. also maj. mrg.
are we then pursuing etc. Ro. xiv. 19]. 2. ergone i. e.
a question to which an affirmative answer is expected,
in an interrogative apodosis, (Germ, so ist also u-ohl?),
he is then ? Gal. ii. 17 (where others [e. g. Lchm.] write
Spa, so that this example is referred to those mentioned
under Spa, 3, and is rendered Christ is then a minister oj
sin ; but μη yevoiro, which follows, is everywhere by
Paul opposed to a question). Cf. W. 510 (475) sq. [also
B. 247 (213), 371 (318); Herm. ad \\%. p. 820 sqq. ;
Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 180 sqq.; speaking somewhat
loosely, it may be said " Tipa expresses bewilderment as
to a possible conclusion. . . apa hesitates, while Spa con-
cludes." Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. c.].*
άρα, -ας, η, 1. a prayer ; a supplication ; much oftcn-
er 2. an imprecation, curse, malediction, (cf. κατάρα) ;
so in Ro. iii. 14 (cf. Ps. ix. 28 (x. 7)), and often in .Sept.
(In both senses in native Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) '
'Αραβ(α, -ας, ή, [fr. Hdt. down], Arabia, a well-known
peninsula of Asia, lying towards Africa, and bounded by
Egypt, Palestine, Syria, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, the
Gulf of Arabia, the Persian Gulf, the Red Sea [and tlie
Ocean]: Gal. i. 17; iv. 25.•
[άραβών Tdf., see άρραβών.]
[άραγί, see Spa, 4.]
[apUYC, see &pa, 1.]
Άράμ, Aram [or 7?nm]. indecl. prop, name of one of
the male ancestors of Christ : Mt. i. 3 sq. ; Lk. iii. S3
[not Τ WH Tr mrg. ; see Άδμίΐ'ΐ' and 'Apvei].'
άραφοϊ Τ Tr for αρραφος, q. v.
*Αραψ
72
Άρέτας
"Αραψ, -afios, 6, an Arabian: Acts ii. 11.'
άργί'ω, -ω ; (to be apyos, <J. v.) ; to he idle, inactive ; con-
textually, to lint/ti•, <l< lot/ : 2 Pet. ii. 3 o'r το κρίμα ίκπηλπι
οίκ apyt'i, i.e. whose |ninishment has long buen ini|niKl-
ing and will shortly fall. (In (irk. writ. i'r. Soph, down.)
[C'OMP. : (toT-apyio).] •
dp-yos, -ήν, and in later writ. fr. Aristot. hist. anim. 10,
40 [vol. i. p. 6'27•, 15] on and conseiniently also in the
N. T. with the fein. άργη, which among the early Greeks
Epimenides alone is said to have nsed, lit. i. 12; cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 104 sq. ; id. Paralip. p. 455 sqq. ; W. 68
(67), [cf. 24; B. 25 [iS)], (contr. fr. «f^uE which ilom.
uses, fr. a priv. and tpyov without work, without labor,
doing nothing), iniictice, idle; a. frie from hdmr, at
leisure, (apyov ('vm, Ildt. 5, 6) : Mt. x.\. 3, β [Uec.]; 1
Tim. V. 13. b. lazi/, shunni/ir/ tin' Itihor ir/iic/i one otii/lit
to perform, (Horn. II. !', 320 5, τ aepyos άνηρ, ό, τ( πολλά
(Όργώς) : πίστκ, Jas. ii. 20 (L Τ Tr \V11 for R (ί νικμά) ;
yaarepes apyai i. e. idle ijluttoiis, fr. Epimenides, Tit. i. 12
(Xii'et. ann. 7, 4, 135 d. ds upyas yaaripat o;(in)yij(rar) ;
apyos Kill άκαρποί fU τι, 2 I'ct. i. H. c. of things from
which no profit is derived, although they can and ought
to be productive; as of fields, trees, gold and silver, (cf.
Grimm on Sap. xiv. 5 ; [L. and S. s. v. I. 2]) ; unproft-
able, ρήμα apyov, by litotes i. q. pernicious (see άκαρπο;) :
Mt. xii. 36.•
[SlN.apyiis, βροδύι, vuiSpis: apy. i'(//e, involving blame-
worthiness ; βρ. slow (tanly). having a purely temporal ref-
erence and no necessary had sense ; νωθρ. slitf/r/ish, descrip-
tive of constitutional ciualities and suggestive of censure.
Sdimidt ell. 49 ; Trench § civ.)
άργύρίΟϊ -ovs, -ία -a, -(ov -οΐιυ, of silver; in the contracted
form in Acts xix. 24 [but WII br.] ; 2 Tim. ii. 20 ; Rev.
ix. 20. [From Ilom. down.] •
άρ -yvpiov, -ου, τό, (fr. Hpyvpos, q. v.), [fr. Hdt. down] ;
1. xilrer: Acts iii. G ; vii. 16 ; xx. 33 ; 1 Pet. i. 18; [1
Co. iii. 12 Τ Tr WII]. 2. money- simply, Mt. xxv.
18, 27 ; Mk. xiv. 1 1 ; Lk. ix. 3 ; xL\. 15, 23 ; .xxii. 5 ; Acts
viii. 20; plur., Mt. xxviii. [12], 15. 3. Spec, a silver
coin, silver-piece, (Luther, Silberlinij), ip'Cl, σίκλοΓ, shekel
[see B. D. s. v.], i. e. a coin in circulation among the
Jews after the exile, from the time of Simon (c. n. c.
141) down (cf. 1 Mace. xv. 6 stj. [yet see B. D. s. v.
Aloney, and reff. in Schiirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. § 7]) ; ac-
cording to Josephus (antt. 3, 8, 2) equal to the Attic
tetradrachm or the Alexandrian didrachm (cf.
στατήρ [Β. D. s. v. Piece of Silver]) : Mt. xxvi. 15 ; xxvii.
3, 5 sc). 9. In Acts xix. 19, apyvptov μvριάSfs irevre fifij
thousand pieces of silver (Germ. 50,000 in Silber i. q.
Silhertjeld), doubtless <lrachmas [cf. 6ηνάριον\ are meant ;
cf. Meyer [ct al.] ad loc."
άργυροκόπος, -nv, ό, {apyvpoi and κότΓτω to beat, ham-
mer; a silver-beater), α .i/Vcfc.smiVA : Acts xLn. 24. (Judg.
xvii. 4 ; .ler. vi. 29. Pint, de vitand. acre alien, c. 7.) *
άργυροι, -ου. ό, (apyot shining), [fr. Ilom. down], silver :
1 Co. iii. 12 [T Tr WH αργυρίου] (reference is made to
the silver with which the columns of noble buildings
were covered and the rafters adorned) ; by meton.
things made of silver, silver-work, vessels, images of the
gods, etc. : Acts xvii. 29 ; Jae. v. 3 ; Rev. xviii. 1 2. silver
coin : Mt. x. 9.*
'Apcios [Tdi. ''Aptos] ιτάγοϊ, -ov, ό, A reoparjtts (a rocky
height in the city of Athens not far from the Acropolis
toward the west ; itayos a hilI,'Apnot belonging to (Ares)
Mars, Mars' Hill ; so called, because, as the story went,
Mars, having slain Ilalirrhothius, son of Neptune, for the
attempted violation of his daughter Alcippe, was tried
for the murder here before the twelve gods as judges;
Pausan. Attic. 1, 28, 5), the place where the judges con-
vened who, by appointment of Solon, had jurisdiction of
capital offences, (as wilful murder, arson, poi.sonins, ma-
licious wounding, and breach of the established religious
usages). The court itself was called Areopai/us from
the |)lace where it sat, also Arifum jwlicium (Tacit,
ann. 2, .j5), and cnria Mortis (,Juv. sat. 9, 101). To
that hill the ajiostle Paul was led, not to defend himself
before the judges, but that he might set forth his
o])inions on divine subjects to a greater multitude of
people, flocking together there and eager to hear some-
thing new : Acts xvii. 19-22; cf. vs. 32. Cf. J. H. Krause
in Pauly's Real-Encycl. 2te Aufl. i. 2 p. 1497 sijip s. v.
Areopag; [(Jrote, Ili.st. of Greece, index s. v.; Diets, of
Geogr. and Anti<j. ; BB.DD. s. v. Areopagus; and on
Paul's discourse, csp. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Mars' Hill].•
Άρίοπα-γίτης. Tdf. -yfiτηs [sees. v. ci, t], -ou, 6, (fr. the
preceding [cf. LoO. ad Phryn. 697 S(j.]), a member of the
court of Areoparpis, an Areopar/ite : Acts xvii. 34.•
opco-KcCa (T WH -κία [see I. t]), -as. ή, (fr. αρ(σκ(ΰω to
be complaisant ; hence not to be written [with R G L
Tr] άρίσκ(ΐα. [cf. Chandler § 99; W. § 6, 1 g. ; B. 12
(11)]). desire to please: TrfpinaTtlv άξΐω! τοΰ κυρίου (Is
πάσακ αρισκίίαν, to please him in all things, Col. i. 10;
(of the desire to ])lease God, in Philo, o|)if. §50; de
profug. § 17 ; de victim. § 3 sub fin. In native Grk. writ,
commonly in a bad sense: Theophr. char. 3 (5); Polyb.
31, 26, 5 ; Diod. 13, 53 ; al. ; [cf. Bj). Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.]).'
άρ«νκω; impf. ήρ^σκον: fut. apeaa; 1 aor. rjptaa; (APO
[see ήρα init.]) ; [fr. Horn, down]; a. to please : τινί,Μΐ.
xiv. Ii ; Mk. vi. 22 ; Ro. viii. 8 ; xv. 2 ; 1 Th. ii. 15 ; iv. 1 ;
1 Co. vii. 32-34; Gal. i. 10; 2 Tim. ii. 4; tvumio»
Tivoi, after the llebr. •:•>•3, Actsvi. 5, (1 K. iii. 10; Gen.
xxxiv. 18, etc.). b. to strive to please; to accommodate
one's self to the opinions, desires, interests of others: τιι/ί,
1 Co. X. 33 (πάντα πασιν άρίσκω) ; 1 Th. ii. 4. αρισκαρ
ίαυτω, to please one's self and therefore to have an eye
to one's own interests : Ro. xv. 1, 3.*
άρ«ο~ΓΟ$, -ή, -όν, (άρίσκω), pleasinej, ar/reeable : nvl, Jn.
viii. 29; Acts xii. .!; ϊνώπιόρ rtvos, 1 Jn. iii. 22 (cf.
άρίσκω, a.) : άριστον ίστι foil, by ace. with inf. it is fit.
Acts vi. 2 [yet cf. Meyer ad loc.]. (In Grk. writ. fr.
[Soph.] Hdt. down.)•"
■ApiVos [WII '\p., see their Intr. § 408], -a (cf. W.
§ 8, I ; [B. 20 (18)]). ό, AretCLs, (a name common to many
of the kings of Arabia Petraea or Nabathaean Arabia
[cf. B. D. s. V. Nebaioth] ; cf. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch.
§ 1 7 b. p. 233 sq.) ; an Arabian king who made war (a. d.
36) on his son-in-iaw Herod Antipas for having repu•
αρΐτη
73
ΑρμαΎΐΒών
dialed his daughter ; and with such success as complete-
ly to destroy his army (Joseph, antt. 18, 5). In conse-
quence of this, Vitellius, governor of Syria, being ordered
by Tiberius to march an army against Aretas, i)re])ared
for the war. But Tiberius meantime having died
[March 16, A. D. 37], he recalled his troops from the
march, dismissed them to their winter quarters, and
departed to Rome. After his departure Aretas held
sway over the region of Damascus (how acijuired we do
not know), and placed an ethnarcli over the city : 2 Co.
xi. 32. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Wieseler in Ilerzog i.
p. 488 sq. ; Keim in Schenkel i. p. 238 sq. ; ScliUrcr in
Riehm p. 83 sq. ; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Aretas ; Meyer
on Acts, Einl. § 4 (cf. ibid. ed. Wendl)].•
αρ£τή, -ης, ή, [see Spa init.], a word of very wide signi-
fication in Grk. writ. ; any excellence of a person (in
body or mind) or of a thing, an eminent endnwmeri', proj>-
ertif or quality. Used of the human ;nind and in an
ethical sense, it denotes 1. a virluuus course of thought,
feeling and action ; virtue, moral goodness, (Sap. iv. 1 ;
V. 1 3 ; often in 4 Mace, and in Grk. %vrit.) : 2 Pet. i. 5
[al. take it here specifically, viz. moral vigor; cf. ne.\t
head]. 2. ang particular moral excellence, as modesty,
purity; hence (plur. a! aperai. Sap. viii. 7; often in 4
Mace, and in the Grk. pliilosophers) rlr άριτή, Phil. iv.
8. Used of God, it denotes a. his pou-cr : 2 Pet. i. 3.
b. in the plur. his excellences, perfections, ' which shine
forth in our gratuitous calling and in the whole work of
our salvation ' (Jn. Gerhard) : 1 Pet. ii. 9. (In Sept. for
lin splendor, glory, Hab. iii. 3, of God; Zech. vi. 13, of
the Messiah ; in plur. for niSiin praises, of God, Is. xliii.
21 ; xlii. 12; Lxiii. 7.)*
άρήν, ό, nom. not in use ; the other cases are by syncope
αρνόί (for apfvoi), αρνί, άρνα ; plur. apvfi, αρνών, αρνάσι,
άρνας, a sheep, a lamb: Lk. x. 3. (Gen. xxx. 32; Ex.
xxiii. 19, etc. ; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) *
άριθμ£<ι>, -ώ : 1 aor. ηρίθμηιτα ; pf. pass, ηρίθμημαι ;
{αριθμόν) ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to number: Mt. x. 30; Lk.
xii. 7 ; Rev. vii. 9. [CoMP. : κατ-αριθμίω."] '
αριθμός, -oC, ό, [fr. Horn, down], η number; a. a fixed
and definite number: τον αριθμόν nfVTaKia\t\iot, in nu7n-
ber, Jn. vi. 10, (2 Mace. viii. 16 ; 3 Mace. v. 2, and often
in Grk. writ.; W. 230 (21G); [B. 153 (1-34)]); « τοΟ
αριθμόν των 8ώ^ΐκα, Lk. xxii. 3 ; αρ. ανθρώπου, a niunber
whose letters indicate a certain man. Rev. .\iu. 18. b.
an indefinite number, i. q. a multitude : Acts vi. 7 ; xi.
21 ; Rev. XX. 8.
Άριμ-αθοΙο [WH 'Αρ., see their Intr. § 408], -as, ή,
Arimalhcea, Ilebr. Π3Ί (a height), the name of several
cities of Pal'jstine; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p. 1275.
The one mentioned in Mt. xxvii. 57 ; Mk. χ v. 43 ; Lk.
xxiii. SI ; Jn. xix. 38 appears to have been the same as
that which was the birthplace and residence of Samuel,
in Mount Ephraim : 1 S. i. 1, 19, etc. Sept. Άρμαθαΐμ,
and without the art. 'Ραμαθίμ, and ace. to another read-
ing 'Ραμαθαΐμ, 1 Mace. xi. 34 ; 'Ραμαθά in Jose])h. antt.
13, 4, 9. Cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. xi. 34; Keim, Jesus
Ton Naz. iii. 514; [B. D. Am. ed.].*
"AptoTOpxos, -ou, ό, [lit. best-ruling], A rislarchus, a cer-
tain Christian of Thessalonica, a ' fellow-captive ' witli
Paul [cf. B. D. Am. ed. ; Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. on Col. as
below]: Acts xLx. 29; xx. 4; xxvii. 2; Col. iv. 10;
Philem. 24.*
άρΜΓτάω, -ώ : 1 aor. ηρίστησα ; (το άριστον, q. v.) ; a.
to breakfast: Jn. xxi. 12, 15; (Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 1 ; and
often in Attic), b. by later usage to diie : παρά τινι,
Lk. xi. 37 ; (Gen. xUii. 24 ; Ael. v. h. 9. 19).*
apurr(po$, -ά. -6v, lift : Jit. vi. 3 ; Lk. xxiii. 33 ; [Jlk.
X. 37 Τ Tr WH, on the plur. cf. W. § 27, 3] ; 5πλα api-
στίρά i. e. carried in the left hand, defensive weapons, 2
Co. vi. 7. [From Horn, down.] *
Άριστόβουλοϊ, -ov. ό, [lit. best-counselling], Aristobulus,
a certain Christian [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. and Bp. Lghtft.
on Phil. p. 174 s(i.] : Ro. xvi. 10.*
cipurrov, -ov. to, [fr. Ilom. down] ; a. the first food,
taken early in the morning before work, breakfast;
dinner was called Suttvov. But the later Greeks called
breakfast το άκράτισμα, and dinner άριστον i. e. bt'twor
μισημβρινόν, Athen. I, 9, 10 p. 1 1 b. ; and so in the X. T.
Hence b. dinner: Uk. yAv. 12 (ttou'iv άριστον η beWvov,
to whicli others are invited) ; Lk. .\i. 3-< ; Mt. xxii. 4
(ϊτοιμάζ^ιν). [Β. D. s. V. Meals ; Becker's Charicles, sc.
vi. excurs. i. (Eng. trans, p. 312 .sq.).] *
opKiTOs, -η. -όν. (άρκίω), sufficient : Mt. vi. 34 (where
the meaning is, ' Let the present day's trouble suffice for
a man, and let Mm not rashly increase it by anticipating
the cares of days to come ' ; [on the neut. cf. W. § 58, 5 ;
B. 127 (111)]) ; άρκ(τόν τω μαθητί} [A.V. it is enough for
the dUciple i.e.] let him be content etc., foil, by Iva, Mt. x.
25 ; foil, by an inf., 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Chrysipp. ap. Athen.
3, 79 p. 113 b.)•
άρκΕω. ώ : 1 aor. ήρκ(σα ; [Pass., pres. άρκοϋμαι] ; 1 fut.
άρκίσθήσομαι ; to be possessed of unfailing strength ; to be
strong, to suffce, to be enough (as against any danger;
hence to defend, ward off', in Horn. ; [al. make this the
radical meaning, cf. Lat arceo ; Curtius § 7]) : with dat.
of pers., Mt. xxv. 9 ; Jn. vi. 7 ; άρκύ σοι ή χάρις μου my
grace is sufficient for thee, sc. to enable thee to bear the
evil manfully ; there is, therefore, no reason why thou
shouldst ask for its removal, 2 Co. xii. 9 ; impersonally,
άρκή ήμ'ιν 'tis enough for us, we are content, Jn. xiv. 8.
Pass, (as in Grk. writ.) to be satisfied, contented : τινΙ,
with a thing, Lk. iii. 14 ; Heb. xiii. 5 ; 1 Tim. vi. 8 : (2
Mace. v. 15); iniTivi, 3 Jn. 10. [CoMP. : ('π-αρ«'ω.]•
CLpKTos, -ου, ό, ή, or [so G L Τ Tr WH] όρκος, -ου, ό, ή,
a bear : Rev. xiii. 2. [From Horn, down.] *
όίρμα, -ατο9, τό, (fr. ΑΡί2 to join, fit ; a team), a chariot :
Acts viii. 28 sq. 38 ; of war-ohariots (i. e. armed with
scrthes) we read άρματα Ίτπτων πολλών chariots drawn by
many horses, Rev. ix. 9, (Joel ii. 5. In Grk. writ. fr.
Horn, down).*
Άρμαγ€8ών [Grsb. Άρμ., WH*Ap Μαγ(8ών, see their
Intr. § 408 ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 106] or (so Rtc.) Άρμαγίδδώκ,
llar-Magedon or Armageddon, indecl. prop, name of an
imaginary place : Rev. xvi. 16. Many, following Beza
and Glassius, suppose that the name is compounded of
αρμόζω
74
άρττάζω
ΊΠ mountain, and fljp or 'ΛΊ}'^., Sept. Μαγ(3ω, Μαγίίδώ.
Wegiddo was a city of the Manassites, situated in the
great plain of the tribe of Issacliar, and famous for a
double slaughter, first of the Canaanites (.ludg. v. 19),
and again of the Israelites (2 K. xxiii. 29 sq. ; 2 Chr.
XXXV. 22, cf. Zech. xii. 11); so that in the Apocalypse
it woulii signify the place where the kings opposing
Christ were to be destroyed with a slaughter like that
which the Canaanites or the Israelites had experienced
of old. But since those two overthrows are said to have
taken place en'i ΰδατι May. (Judg. 1. c.) and c'v τω
TifHtio May. (2 Chr. 1. c.), it is not easy to perceive
what can be the meaning of the mountain of Megiddo,
wliieh could be none other than Carmel. Hence, for
one, I think the conjecture of L. Capellus [i. e. Louis
Cappel (akin to that of Drusius, see the Coram.)] to be
far more easy and probable, viz. that Άρμαγι^ών is for
'Aρμaμfy(ίώv, compounded of Κ^ΠΠ destruction, and
inj-D . [Wieseler (Zur Gesch. d. N. T. Schrift, p. 188),
Hitzig (in ffi///r>,f. Einl. p. 440 n.), al., revive the deriva-
tion (cf. llUler, Simonis, al.) fr. "3 "^"^city of Megiddo.]*
ά(>μό{», Attic άρμόττω : 1 aor. mid. ήρμοσάμην \ {άρμόί,
([. v.); 1. to join, to fit together; so in Horn, of car-
penters, fastening together beams and j)lanks to build
houses, ships, etc. 2. of marriage : άρμόζην τινι την
BvyoTipa (Ildt. 9, 108) to hetroth a daughter to any one;
j)ass. άρμόζίται γννη avSpi, Sept» Prov. xix. 14 ; mid.
άρμύσασθαι την θυγατ(ρα nvos (Ildt. 5, 32 ; 47; 6, 6ϋ)
to Join to one'.-! self, i. e. to marry, the daughter of any
one ; άρμόσασθαΐ τινί τίνα to betroth, to give one in vtar-
riage to any one : 2 Co. xi. 2, and often in Philo, cf.
Loesner ad loo.; the mid. cannot be said to be used
actively, but refers to liim to whom the care of betroth-
ing has been committed ; [cf. B. 193 (167) ; per contra
Mey. ad loc; AV. 258 (242)].•
όρμ05, -oC, 0, (APQ to join, tit), a joining, a joint : Heb.
iv. 12. (Soph., Xen., al. ; Sir. xxvii. 2.)*
αρνας, see αρην.
'Apvit, o, indocl. prop, name of one of the ancestors of
Jesus : Lk. iii. 33 Τ WII Tr mrg.*
αρν€Όμαι, -οΰμαι ; fut. άρνησομαι ; impf. ηρνονμην ; 1 aor.
ηρνησάμην (rare in Attic, where generally ηρνήβην, cf.
Mattli. i. p. .538 pietter Veitch s. v.]); pf. ήμνημαι: a
depon. verb [(fr. Horn, down)] signifying 1. to deny,
i. e. eindv . . . ουκ [to .lay . . . not, contradict'] : Mk. xiv. 70 ;
Mt. xxvi. 70 ; .In. i. 20 ; xviii. 25, 27 ; Lk. viii. 45 ; Acts
iv. 16; foil, by ότι ού instead of simple ότι, in order to
make the negation more strong and explicit : ΛΙΐ. xxvi.
72 : 1 .In. ii. 22 ; (on the same use in Grk. writ. cf.
Kuhner ii. p. 761 ; [Jelf ii. 450; W. § 65, 2 β.; Β. 355
(305)]). 2. to deny, with an ace. of the pers., in
various senses : a. άρν. Ίηο-οϋν is used of followers of
Jesus who, for fear of death or persecution, deny that
Jesus is their master, and desert his cause, [to di.-town] :
Mt. X. 33 : Lk. xii. 9 ; [Jn. xiii. 38 L txt. Τ Tr WH] ;
2 Tim. ii. 12. (άρν. το όνομα αντοϋ. Rev. iii. 8, means
the same) ; and on the other liand, of Jesus, denying
that one is his follower: Mt. x. 33 ; 2 Tim. ii. 12.
b. upv. God and Christ, is used of those who by cher•
i.shing and disseminating pernicious opinions and immo-
rality are adjudged to have apostatized from God and
Christ : 1 Jn. ii. 22 (cf. iv. 2 ; 2 Jn. 7-11); Jude 4 ; 2 Pet.
ii. 1. c. άρν. iavTov to deny himself, is used in two senses,
a. to disregard his own interests : Lk. ix. 23 [R WII mrg.
άπαρν.] ; cf . άπαρνίομαι. β. to prove false to himself, act
entirely unlike hiuiteLf : 2 Tim. ii. 13. 3. to deny i. e.
alinegate, abjure ; τι. to renounce a thing, forsake it : τη»
άσίβflav κ. τάί ΐπιθυμία!. Tit. ii. 12; liy act to show es-
trangement from a tiling : τήν πίστιν. 1 Tim. v. 8 ; Rev.
ii. 13 ; την Βίναμιν τη! ιίσίβίίαΐ, 2 Tim. iii. 5. 4. not
to accept, to reject, refuse, something offered : τινά. Acts
iii. 14 ; vii. 35 ; with an inf. indicating the thing, Ileb.
xi. 24. [CoMP. : άπ-ηρνίομαι.']
όρν(ον, -ου, TO, (dimin. fr. άρήν, q. v.), [fr. Lys. down],
a liitle land), a himb: Rev. xiii. 11; Jesus calls his fol-
lowers τα άρνία μου in Jn. .\xi. 15 ; το άρνίον is used of
Christ, innocently suffering and dying to expiate the
sins of men. very often in Rev., as v. 6, 8, 12, etc. (Jer.
xi. 1 9 ; xxvii. (1.) 45 ; Ps. cxiii. (cxiv.) 4, 6 ; Joseph, antt.
3, 8, 10.) •
όροτριάω, -ω ; (ήρατρον, q. v.) ; lo plough : Lk. xvii. 7 ;
1 Co. Lx. 10. (Dent, .x.xii. 10; [1 K. xix. 19] ; Mic. iii.
12. In Grk. writ. fr. Theophr. down for the more
ancient άρόω ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 254 sii- [W. 24].) *
άροτρον, -ου, τό, (άρόω to j)lough), a plough : Lk. ix. 62.
(In Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) *
αρπαγή, -ής, ή. (αρπάζω), rapine, pillage; 1. the act
of plundering, rotihery : Ileb. x. 34. 2. plunder, .ψοΙΙ :
Mt. xxiii. 25 ; Lk. xi. 39. (Is. iii. 14 ; Nah. ii. 12. In
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
<ίρπα7|ΐ05, -οΰ, ό, (αρπάζω) ; 1. the act of seizing, rob-
bery, (so Plut. de hb. educ. c. 15 (al. 14, 37), vol. ii. 12 a.
the only instance of its use noted in prof. auth.). 2.
a thing seized or to be seized, booty : άρπαγμον ήγύσθαί τι
to deem anything a prize, — a thing to be seized upon
or to be held fast, retained. Pliil. ii. 6 ; on the meaning
of this i^ass. see μορφή : (ήγ(ίσβαι or ποκΊσθαί τι άρπαγμα,
Euseb. h. e. 8, 12, 2 ; vit. Const. 2, 31 ; [Comni. in Luc
vi., cf. Mai, No.•. Bibl. Patr. iv. p. 165] ; Ileliod. 7, 11
and 20 ; 8, 7 ; [Plut. de Alex. virt. 1, 8 p. 330 d.] ; ut om-
nium bona praedam tuam duceres, Cic. Ύ^ττ. ii. 5, 15, 39 ;
[see Bp. Lghtft. on I'liil. p. 133 sq. (cf. p. U 1; ; \\ etsteiu
ad loc. ; Cremer 4te Aufl. p. 153 sq.]).'
a.frmiX,iD ; fut. άρπάσω [A^eitch s. v. ; cf. Rutherford, New
Phryn. p. 407] ; 1 aor. ηρπασα; Pass., 1 Άοτ.ήρππσθην;
2 aor. ήρηάγην (2 Co. xii. 2, 4 ; Sap. iv. 11 ; cf. W. 83
(80) ; [B. 54 (47) ; WH. Apj). p. 170]) ; 2 fut. άρπαγή-
σομαι; [(Lat. rapio; Curtius § 331); fr. Ilom. down];
to seize, carry off by force: τί, [Mt. xii. 29 not RG, (see
Βιαρπάζω)']; Jn. x. 12; to seize on, claim for one's self
eagerly: την βασϊΚίΙαν τοϋ θ(ον, Mt. xi. 12, (Xen. an. 6,
5, 18, etc.); to snatch out or airay: τί, Mt. xiii. 19; τι eV
Xdpos τινης, Jn. x. 28 sq. ; τίνα tV jrupor, proverbial, to
rescue from the danger of destruction, Jude 23, (Am.
iv. 11 ; Zech. iii. 2) ; rifo, to seize and carry off speedily,
Jn. vi. 15; Acts xxiii. 10; used of divine power tran»•
αριταξ
lb
αρτοί
femn" a person marTellousl)' and swiftly from one place
to another, to snatch or catch away : Acts viii. 39 ; pass.
irpos T. θΐάν. Rev. xii. 5 ; foil, by eat with gen. of place,
2 Co. xii. 2 ; eis τ. ttapahnaov, 2 Co. xii. 4 ; ets atpa, 1
Th. iv. 1 7. [CoMP. : St-, σκιζ-αρπάίω.]'
οριι•α|, -αγοί, ό, adj., rapacium, raceiwus: Mt. vii. 15;
Lk. xviii. 11 ; as subst. a robber, an extortioner: 1 Co. v.
;0 stj. ; vi. 10. (In both uses fr. [Arstph.],Xen. down.)*
άρραβών [Tdf. άραβών : 2 Co. i. 22 (so Lchm.) ; v. 5,
(but not in Eph. i. 14), see his Proleg. p. SO ; II•'//. App.
p. 148 ; cf. W. 48 (47 sq.) ; B. 32 (28 sq.) ; cf. P, p],-£ivas, 6,
(Hebr. jU-)i^ Gen. xxxviii. 17 sq. 20; fr. 3-i>; to
pledge ; a word which seems to have passed from tlie
Ph<Enicians to the Greeks, and thence into Latin), an
earnest, i. e. money which in purchases is given as a
pledge that the full amount will subsequently be paid
[Suid. s. V. άραβών], (cf. [obs. Eng. earkfpenny \ caulion-
monei/l. Germ. Kauftschillhig, Haflpfennig) : 2 Co. i. 22;
V. 5, τον αρραβώνα τον ην€νματος i. e. το πν^νμα ώ? αρρα-
βώνα SC. της κληρονομιάς, as is expressed in full in Eph.
i. 14 [cf. W. § 59, 8 a.; B. 78 (68)] ; for the gift of the
Holy Spirit, comprising as it does the Swapfis toD μίλ-
λοη -os αιώνος (Heb. vi. 5), is both a foretaste and a
pledge of future blessedness ; cf. s. v. απαρχή, e. [B.D.
s. v. Earnest.] (Isae. 8, 23 [p. 210 ed. Reiske] ; Aristot.
pol. 1, 4, 5 [p. 1259% 12] ; al.) *
έίρραφοϊ, Τ Tr WH άραφος (cf. W. 48 ; B. 32 (29) ;
[WH. App. p. 1G3; Tdf. Proleg. p. 80 ; cf. P, p]), -ov,
{ράπτω to sew together), not sewed together, without a
seam : Jn. xix. 23.*
αρρην, see αρσην.
άρ-ρητο5, -ov, ( ρητός, f r. PEQ) ; a. unsaid, unspoken :
Horn. Od. 14, 4Cti, and often in Attic, b. unspea/cabte
(on account of its sacredness), (Hdt. 5, 83, and often in
other writ.): 2 Co. xii. 4, explained by what follows:
ά ovK e^oif άνθρώπω \α\ήσαι*
oppwoTOs, -ov, (ρώννυμι, q. v.), icithout strength, weal';
sick: Mt. xiv. 14; Mk. vi. 5, 13; xvi. 18 ; 1 Co. xi. 30.
([Hippocr.], Xen., Plut.) *
όρσ€νοκοίτη5, -ου, ό, (βρσην a male ; κοίτη a bed), one
who lies with a male as with a female, a sodomite : 1 Co.
vi. 9; 1 Tim. i. 10. (Anthol. 9, 686, 5; eccl. writ.)*
άρσην, -ffos, ό, άρσίν, το, also (acc. to R G in Rev. xii.
5, 13, and in many edd., that of Tdf. included, in Ro. i.
27* ; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 78 ; [W. 22]) Άρρην,
-£ΐ/οί, «5, Sppev, T(5, [fr. Horn, down], male : Mt. xix. 4 ;
Mk. X. 6 ; Lk. ii. 23 ; Ro. i. 27 ; Gal. iii. 2.S ; Rev. xii. 5,
13 (where Lchm. reads apaevav, on which Alex, form
of the acc. cf. W. 48 (47 sq.) ; 66 (64) ; Mullach p. 22 [cf.
p. 162]; B.13(12); [ΪΌ/^Λ. Lex.,Intr.p. 36; Trf/. Proleg.
p. 118; Miillcr's note on Barn. ep. 6, 2 p. 1S8; 117/.
App. p. 157 ; Scrivener, Collation etc. [). liv.]).•
Άρτίμάβ, -ά, ό, (abbreviated fr. Αρτεμίδωρος [i. e. gift
of Artemis], cf. W. 102 (97); [B. 20 (17 sq.) ; Lob.
Pathol. Proleg. p. 505 sq. ; Chandler § 32]), Artemas, a
friend of Paul the apostle : Tit. iii. 12. [Cf. B. D. s. v.]*
"ApTcp.is, -iSor and -tos, ij, Artemis, that is to say,
the so-called Tauric or Persian or Ephesian Ar-
temis, the goadess of many Asiatic peoples, to be dis•
tingidshed from the Artemis of the Greeks, the sister of
Apollo ; cf. Grimm on 2 Jlacc. p. 39 ; [B. D. s. v. Diana].
A very splendid temple was built to her at Ephesus,
which was set on fire by Ilerostratus and reduced to
ashes ; but afterwards, in the time of Alexander the
Great, it was rebuilt in a style of still greater magnifi-
cence: Acts xLx. 24, 2 Γ sq. 34 sq. Cf. Stark in Schenkel
i. p. 604 sq. s. v. Diana ; [ Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus,
Lond. 1877].•
άρτ(μων, -ovos (L Τ Tr Wli -ωνος, cf. W. § 9, 1 d. ; [B.
24 (22)3), ό, tojj-sail [or foresail'i^ of a ship : Acts x.xvii.
40 ; cf. Meyer ad loc. ; [esp. Smith, A'oyage and Shipwr.
of St. Paul, p. 192 sq. ; Graser in the Philologus, 3d
suppl. 1865, p. 201 sqq.].*
όίρτι, adv., acc. to its deriv. (fr. APi2 to draw close to-
gether, to join, Lat. arlo; [cf. Curtius § 4s8]) denoting
time closely connected ; 1. in Attic ^^just now, this
moment, (Germ. gerade,eben'), marking something begun
or finished even now, just before the time in which we
are speaking " (Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 20) : Mt. ix. 18;
1 Th. iii. 6, and perhaps Rev. xii. 10. 2. acc. to later
Grk. usage univ. now, at this lime; opp. to past time:
Jn. ix. 19, 25 ; xiii. 33 ; 1 Co. xvi. 7 ; Gal. i. 9 sq. opp.
to future time : Jn. xiii. 37 ; xvi. 12, 31 ; 2 Th. ii. 7 ; opp.
to fut. time subsequent to the return of Christ : 1 Co.
xiii. 12; 1 Pet. i. 6, 8. of present time most closely lim-
ited, at this very time, this moment : Mt. iii. 15 ; xxvi. 53;
Jn. xiii. 7 ; Gal. iv. 20. άχρι της ΙΊρτί ώρας, 1 Co. iv. 11 ;
(ως άρτι, hitherto ; until now, up to this time : Mt. xi. 12 ;
Jn. ii. 10; v. 17 ; xvi. 24 ; 1 Co. iv. 13 ; viii. 7 ; xv. 6 ; 1 Jn.
ii. 9. απ' άρτι, see άπάρτι above. Cf. Lobeck ad Phryn.
p. 18 sqq. ; \_Rutherford , New Phryn. p. 70 sq.].*
[Stn. ίρτι, iSrj, νυν: Roughly speaking, it may be said
that άρτι Just now, even now, properly marks time closely con-
nected with the present ; later, strictly present time, (see
above, and compare in Eng. "just now" i. e. a moment ago,
and " just now " (emphat.) i. e. at this precise time), νΰν now,
marks a definite point (or period) of time, the (objective)
immediate present, ^δΐ) now [alreaily) with a suggested ref-
erence to some other time or to some expectation, the sub-
jective present (i. e. so regardeil liy the writer), ^δτ) and
ίρτι are associated in 2 Tiiess. ii. 7 ; vvv and fihri iu 1 Ju. iv.
3. SeeKUhner §§498, 499; Saum/fin, I'artikelu, p. ISSsqq.;
Ehic. on 1 Thess. iii. 6 ; 2 Tim. iv. 6]
όρτι-γ€'ννητο5. -ov. itipTi and ■γ(ννάω'), Ju^t born, new-
born : 1 Pet. ii. 2. (Lcian. Alex. 13 ; Long. past. 1,(7)
9 ; 2, (3) 4.)*
oprios, -a, -ov, (AP£2 to fit, [cf. Curtius § 488]) ; 1.
fitted. 2. complete, perfect, [having reference appar-
entlv to ' special aptitude for given uses']; so 2 Tim.
iii. 1 7, [cf. EUicott ad loc. ; Trench § xxii.]. (In Grk
writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
ipTos. -ou, ό, (fr. ΑΡΩ to fit, put together, [cf. Etym
Magn. 150, 36 — but doubtful]), bread; Hebr. DnS;
1. food composed of flour mixed with water and baked;
the Israelites made it in the form of an oblong or round
cake, as thick as one's thumb, and as large as a plate or
platter (cf. Win. R W B. s. v. Backen ; [BB.DD.]) :
αρτνω
76
αρχή
hence it was not cut, but brokfii (see κλάσ-ι; and κ\άω) :
Mt. iv. 3 ; vii. 'j ; xiv. 1 7, lU ; Mk. vi. ;iU [T Tr Wll om.
L br.], 37 sq. ; Lk. iv. 3 ; xxiv. 30 ; Jn. vi. ;j sqq. ; Acts
xx\ii. 35, and often ; άμτοι τη: προθίσιω!• loaves conse-
crated to Jehovah, see πρόθ(σΐ! ; on the biead used at tlie
love-feasts and the sacred supper [W. 3.5J, cf. Mt. xxvi.
26; Mk. xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; Acts ii. 42,4';; xx. 7: 1
Co. X. 16 sq. ; xi. 26-28. 2. As in Grk. writ., and like
the Hebr. uph, food of any kind: Mt.vi. 11 ; Mk. vi. 8 ;
Lk. xi. 3 ; 2 Co. ix. 10 ; ό aprrot των τίκνων the food served
to the children, Mk. vii. 27; άρτοι• φιιγιΊν or ίσθ'κιν Ιο
take food. Ιο erit (onS hb«) [W. 33 (.i-')]: Mk. iii. 20;
Lk. xiv. 1, 15; Alt. xv. 2; αρτην φα'γ€ΐι/ παρά Ttvof to
take food sup])lied by one, 2 Th. iii. 8 ; τον (αυτοϋ ΰρτ.
ίσθί€ΐν to eat the food which one has procured for him-
self by his own labor, 2 Th. iii. 12; μητί άρτον ΐσθίων.
μήτ( olvov πίνων, abstaining from the usual sustenance,
or using it sparingly, Lk. vii. 33; τρώγιιν τΰν άρτον μ€τά
τινο! to be one's table-companion, his faiuiUar friend, Jn.
xiii. 18(Ps. .\h(.\li.) 10). In Jn.vi. 32-35 Jesus calls him-
self τον άρτον τον ^foO, Γ. u. €Κ τοΰ ουρανον, τ. ά. Trfs ^ω^?.
as the divine \uyoi, come from heaven, who containing
in himself the .-iource of heavenly life .supplies celestial
niilriment to souls that they may attain to life eternal.
άρτνω : fut. άρτνσω\ Pass., pf. ήρτυμαι , 1 fut. άρτνθη-
σομαι: (.\PQtotit); Ιο prepare, arruiii/i ■, often so in Horn.
In the comic writers and epigrammatists used of pre-
paring food, to season, make safori/, {[τα όψ•α, Aristot.
eth. Nic. 3, 13 p. 1U8*, 29]; ηρτνμίνο! oiVo,, Theophr.
de odor. § 51 [frag. 4, c. 11]); so Mk. ix. 50: Lk. xiv.
34 ; metaph. ό Xoyos άλατι ηρτνμίνοί. full of wisdom and
grace and lience pleasant and wholesome. Col. iv. 6.*
'Αρψα|ά£, ό, Arphaxad, {TdOS'^V•), son of Shem (Gen.
X. 22, 24 ; xi. 10, 12, [cf. Jos. a'ntti 1, C, 4]) : Lk. iii. 36.•
"ΡΧ-ό'Τϊ^λοϊ• "<"Ί ό, (fr. άρχι, q. v., and ayyeXut), a bibl.
and ecd. word, archangel, i. e. chief of the angels (llebr.
ΛΌ chief, prince, Dan. x. 20 ; xii. 1 ), or one of the princes
and leaders of the angels (D'Jb'Xin 0"1ί7Π, Dan. x. 13) :
1 Th. iv. 16 ; Jude 9. For the Jews after the exile dis-
tinguished several orders of angels, and some (as the
author of the book of Enoch, Lx. 1 sqq. ; cf. Dillmann
ad loc. p. 97 sq.) reckoned four angels (answering to
the four sides of the throne of God) of the highest rank;
but others, and apparently the majority (Tol). xii. 15,
where cf. Fritzsche : Rev. viii. 2), reckoned seven
(after the pattern of the seven Amshaspands. the hi'_di-
est spirits in the religion of Zoroaster). See s. vv. Γα-
tipiTjX and Μιχαήλ.*
άρχαϊοΐ, -αι'α, -αΐον, (fr. αρχή beginning, hence) prop.
tlial /las been from the hei/inning, original, primeval, old,
ancient, used of men, things, times, conditions: Lk. ix.
8,19; Actsxv. 7, 21; xxi. 16; 2 Pet. li. 5 : Rev. xii. 9 ;
XX. 2; 01 όμχαΐοι the ancients, the earlv Israelites: Mt.
v. 21, 27 [Rec], 33 : τα αρχαία the man*s previrms moral
condition : 2 Co. v. 1 7. (In Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and
Hdt. down.)•
|Svv. ipxaios. vaKaiis: in iroA. the simjile idea of
time dominate,'!, while αρχ. (" (τημαίνα και ri αρχηί ίχατθαι,"
and so) often carries with it a euggestion of nature or origi-
nal character. Cf. Schmidt ch. 46; Trench § 1.κνϋ,|
Άρχί'-λοοϊ, -ου, ό, Archelaus, (fr. άρχω and \aos, ruling
the people), a son of Herod the Great by Maltliace. the
.Samaritan. He and his brother Anti|)as were brought
up with a certain private man at Rome (.Joseph, aiitt.
17, 1,3). After tlie death of his father he ruled ten
years as elhnarch over Judxa, Samaria, and Iilinna-a,
(with the exception of the cities Gaza, Gadara, and
Ilijjpo). The Jews and Samaritans having accused him
at Rome of tyranny, he was banished by the emperor
(Augustus) to Vienna of the Allobroges, and died there
(Joseph, antt. 17,9,3; 11,4; 13.2; b. j. 2, 7, 3): Mt.
ii. 2.'. [.Se 15. D. s. v. and cf. Ήρώδΐ)ϊ.] *
αρχή, -ήί. ή. [fr. Horn, down], in Sept. mostly equiv. to
u'N"', n"uN7, Π7ΠΡ; 1. beginning, origin; a. used
absolutely, of the beirinning of all things : tV άρχη, Jn. i.
1 sq. (Gen. i. 1); απ' ορχη!. Mt. xix. 4 (with which cf.
Xen. mem. 1, 4, 5 ό «"^ αρχής ποιων ανθρώπους), 8; Jn.
viii. 44 ; 1 Jn. i. 1 ; ii. 13 s<]. ; iii. 8 ; more fully απ' αρχήί
κτίσ(ως or κήσμυυ. Mt. xxiv. 21 ; Mk. x. 6 ; .xiii. 19 ; 2 Th.
ii. 1 3 ( where L [ Tr mrg. λ\ΊΙ nirg.] άπαρχήν, q. v.) ; 2 Pet.
iii. 4: κατ άρχά . Heb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 20). b. in a
relative sense, of the be'.riiining of the thing spoken of:
(ξ άρχι)!, fr. the time when Jesus gathered disciples, Jn.
vi. 64 ; xvi. 4 ; άπ αρχής. .In. xv. 27 (since I appeared in
public) ; as soon as instructi(m was imparted, 1 Jn. ii.
[ 7], 24 ; iii. 1 1 ; 2 Jn. 5 sq. ; more fully iv άρχί] τοϋ ciay-
•yfXi'oi), Phil. iv. 15 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 2 [see note in
Gebli. and Ilarn.ad loc. and cf.] Polyc. ad Philipp. 11, 3);
from the beginning of the gosjiel history, Lk. i. 2; from
the commencement of life. Acts .\xvi. 4 ; eV άρχη, in the
beginning, when the church was founded. Acts xi. 15.
The aec. αρχήν [cf. AV. 124 (118): lip. Lghtft. on Col. i.
18] and τήν αρχήν in the Grk. writ. (cf. Linnep a<l Plia-
larid. p. 82 Sijq. and p. 94 sqq. ed. Lqis.; Driicknerm De
AVette's Ildbch. on John j). 151) is often used adver-
bially, i. q. ολωΓ altogether, (properly, an ace. of 'direc-
tion toivards": usque ad initium, [cf. \V. 230 (216); B.
153 (134)]), commonly followed by a nesative, but not
always [cf. e.g. Dio Cass. frag. 101 (93 Dind.); xiv. 34
(l)ind. vol. ii. p. 194); Lx. 20; Ixii. 4: see, further,
Lycurg. § 125 ed. Matzner]; hence that extremely dilh-
cult passatre, Jn. viii. 25 τήν . . . ίιμΊν. must in my opinion
be interpreted as follows : / am a/logelher or irhollg (i. e. in
all respects, [)recisely) that which I even speak to i/ou (1
not only am, but also declare to you what I am ; therefore
you have no need to question me), [cf. W. 464 (432) ; B.
253 (218) I άμχήν Χαμϋάνιιν to take beginnincT. to begin,
Heb. ii. 3. with the addition of the gen. of the thing
spoken of: ώΆινων. Mt. xxiv. 8; Mk. xiii. 8 (9) [(here
R (ί plur.) ; τω•' σηικιων, .In. ii. 11] ; ήμ(ρων. Heb. vii. 3 ;
Toi finyyeXfiv. that fron) which the gosj)el history tO(.k
its bciinnrng, Mk. j. 1 ; t^s Ιποστάσίως, the confideni'i•
with which we have ma<lc a bcjinnina, opp. to μ^χρι
τΐ\ονς. Ileb. iii. 14. τά πτοιχι'ια τής αρχής, Heb. v. 12
(της αρχής is added for greater ex])Iicitncss, as m Lat. ru-
dimenta prima, Liv. 1,3; Justin, hist. 7,5; and^rima
apxvyoi
77
ap-^iepevi
elementa, Horat. sat. 1, 1, 26, etc.); ό rijs αρχηί τον
Χριστού Xoyof eijuiv. to ό τοϋ Χρίστου Xoyos ό τη! αρχής,
i. e. the instruction concerning Clirist such as it was at
the very outset [cf. W. 1n8 (177) ; B. 155 (136)], Heb.
vi. 1. 2. the person OT tiling that commences, the βΓ8ΐ per-
son or thing in a series, the leader : Col. i. 18 ; Rev. i. 8 Kec. ;
xxi. 6; xxii. 13; (Ueut. xxi. 17; Job .\1. 14 (19), etc.).
S. thai b'l which anything begins to he, the origin, active
cause (a sense in which the pliilosojilier Anaximander,
8th cent. b. C, is said to have been the first to use the
word ; cf. SimpL on Aristot. phys. £. 9 p. 326 ed. Brandis
and 32 p. 334 ed. Brandis, [cf. TeichmiilLer, Stud, zur
Gesch. d. Begriffe, pp. 48 sqq. 560 sqq.]) : η αρχή rqs
κτίσιω!, of Christ as the divine λόγος, Kev. iii. 14 (cf.
DUsterdieck ad loc. ; Clem. Λ1. protrept. 1, p. 6 ed.
Potter, [p. 30 ed. Sylb.] ό λόγος αρχή θιία των πόντων \
in Evang. Nicod. c. 23 [p. .ΐϋ-ι ed. Tdf., p. 736 ed.
Tliilo] the devil is called ή αρχή τοϋ θανάτου και ρίζα
της αμαρτίας). 4. the eilremitij of a thing : of tlie cor-
ners of a sail. Acts x. 11 ; xi. 5; (Hdt. 4, 60; Diod.
i, 35 ; al.). 5. the first place, principality, rule, magis-
traci/, [cf. Eng. 'authorities'}, (άρχω τιι /or) : Lk. xii. 11 ;
XX. 20 ; Tit. iii. 1 ; office given in charge ((Jen. .\1. 13, 21 ;
2 Mace. iv. 10, etc.), Jude 6. Hence the term is trans-
ferred by Paul to angels and demons holding dominions
entrusted to them in the order of things (see ofyyfXor,
2 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 16; Mey. on Eph. i. 21]):
Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. xv. 24; Eph. i. 21: iii. 10; vi. 12:
Col. i. 16 ; ii. 10, 15. See ϊξουσία, 4 c. ββ. *
άρχηνόϊ, -όν, adj., leading, furnishing the first cause or
occasion : Eur. Hipp. 881 ; Plat. Crat. p. 401 d. ; chiefly
used as subst. ό, 17. αρχηγός, {ι'ρχή and άγω) ; 1. the
chief leader, prince: of Christ, Acts v. 31; (Aeschyl.
Ag. 259; Thuc. 1, 132; Sept. Is. iii. 5 sq.; 2 Chr. xxiii.
14, and often). 2. one that talces the lead in any thing
(1 Mace. X. 47 αρχ. λόγων ιίρηνικων) and thus afjhrds an
example, a predecessor in a matter : τής πίστιως. of Christ,
Heb. xii. 2 (who in the pre-eminence of his faith far sur-
passed the e.\amples of faith commemorated in ch. xi.),
[al. bring this under the next head ; yet cf. Kurtz ad
loc.]. So αρχηγός αμαρτίας, Mic. i. 13: ζήλους, Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 14, 1 : τής στάσίως και διχοστασίας. il>id. 51,
1 ; της αποστασίας, of the devil, Iren. 4, 40, 1 ; τοιαύτης
φιλοσοφίας, of Thales, Aristot. met. 1, 3, 7 [p. 98.3" 20].
Hence 3. the author : τής ζωής. Acts iii. 15 ; τής σωτη-
ρίας, Heb. ii. 10. (Often so in prof. auth. : των ττάντων,
of God, [Plato] Tim. Locr. p. 96 c. ; τοΰ γίνους των αν
θρώπων, of God, Diod. 5, 72 : αρχηγός κα'ι αίτιος, leader and
author, are often joined, as Polyb. 1, 66, 10; Hdian. 2, 6,
22 [14 ed. Bekk.]). Cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii.l,p.301 sq.*
άρχι, (fr. άρχω, άρχος), an inseparable prefix, usually
to names of office or dignity, to designate the one who
is placed over the rest that hold the office (Germ. Oher-,
Erz-, [Eng. arch- {chief-, high-)']'), as αρχάγγελος, άρχι•
ποίμην [q. v.], άρχκρής, αρχίατρος, άρχκυνοίχος, άρχυπ(-
ρΐτης (in Egypt, inscriptions), etc., most of which belong
to Alexand. and Byzant. Grk. Cf. Thiersch, De Pen-
tateuch! versione Alex. p. 77 s(|.
άρχ-κραηκός, -ή, -όν, (άρχι and ίίρατικός, and this fr.
ΐίράομαι [to be a priest]), high-priestly, pontijical : γίνος.
Acts iv. 6, [so Corp. Inscrr. Graec. no. 4363 ; see Schurer
as cited s. v. άρχκρίίς, 2 fin.]. (Joseph, antt. 4, 4, 7 ; 6,
6, 3; 1.5, 3, 1.) •
ofx-upiii, -ίως, 6, chief priest, high-priest. 1. He who
abo\ e aH others was honored with the title of priest, the
chief of the priests, 'ίΠΰΠ [713 (Lev. xxi. 10; Num. x.x.w.
25, [later ϊ^ΝΊΠ [Π3, 2 Κ. xxv. 18 ; 2 Chr. xL\. 11, etc.]) :
Mt. -xxvi. 3, and often in the Gospels, the Acts, and the
Ep. to the Heb. It was lawful for him to perform the
common duties of the priesthood ; but his chief duty
was, once a year on the day of atonement, to enter the
Holy of holies (from which the other priests were ex-
cluded) and offer sacrifice for his own sins and the sins
of the people (Lev. xvi. ; Heb. ix. 7, 25), and to preside
over the Sanlicdrin, or supreme Council, when convened
for judicial deliberations (Mt. .xxvi. 3 ; Acts xxii. ;
xxiii. 2). According to the Mosaic law no one could
aspire to the high-priesthood unless he were of the tribe
of Aaron, and descended moreover from a high-priestly
family ; and he on whom the office was conferred held
it till death. But from the time of Antiochus Epiphanes,
when tlie kings of the Seleucids and afterwards the
Ilerodian princes and the Romans arrogated to them-
selves the power of appointing the high-priests, the office
neither remained vested in the pontifical family nor was
conferred on any one for Ufe ; but it became venal, and
could be transferred from one to another according to
the will of civil or military rulers. Hence it came to
pass, that during the one hundred and seven years inter-
vening between Herod the Great and the destruction of
the holy city, twenty-eight persons held the pontifical
dignity (Joseph, antt. 20, 10; see Άννας). Cf. Win.
II W B. s. V. lloherpriester; Oehhr in Herzog vi. p. 198
sqq.; [BB.DD. s. vv. Highpriest, Priest, etc. The
names of the 28 (27?) above alluded to are given, to-
gether with a brief notice of each, in an art. by Schurer
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1872, pp. 597-607]. 2. The
plur. άρχΐ(ρ(Ίς, which occurs often in the Gospels and
Acts, as Mt. ii. 4 ; xvi. 21 ; xxvi. 3 ; xxvii. 41 ; Mk. viii. 31 ;
xiv. 1 ; XV. 1 ; Lk. .\ix. 47 ; xxii. 52, 66 ; xxiii. 4 ; xxiv. 20 ;
Jn. vii. 32 ; xi. 57 ; xviii. 35 ; Acts iv. 23 ; v. 24 ; ix. 14,
21 ; xxii. 30; xxiii. 14, etc., and in Josephus, comprises,
in addition to the one actually holding the high-priestly
office, both those who had previously discharged it and
although deposed continued to have great power in the
State (Joseph, vita 38 ; b. j. 2, 12, 6 : 4, 3, 7 : 9 : 4, 4, 3;
see'Avwas above), as well as the members of the families
from which high-priests were created, pro\ ided they had
much influence in public affairs (Joseph, b. j. 6, 2, 2).
See on this point the learned discussion by Srhiirer, Die
άρχι^ρΛς im N. T., in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1872, p.
593 sqq. and in his Neutest. Zeitjesch. § 23 iii. p. 407
sqq. [Prof. Schurer, besides reviewing the opinions of
the more recent writers, contends that in ao instance
where indubitable reference ίο um heads of the twenty-
four classet ii luad-i (neither in the Sept. 1 Chr. xxiv
αρχίΤΓΟίμην
78
"■ΡΧ^
3 sq. ; 2 Ckr. xxxvi. 14 ; Ezra χ. 5 ; Neh. xii. 7 ; nor in
Joseph, antt. 7, 14, 7) are they called αρχκρίίί ; that the
nearest approximations to this term are perii)lirases
such as άρχοιττα των Icpewv, Neh. xii. 7, or φυΚαρχοι των
ίίρίων, Esra apocr. (1 Esilr.) viii. 92 (!)4) ; Joseph, antt.
11, 5, 4 ; and that the word apxupds was restricted in its
application to those who actually held, or had held, the
hio-h-priestly office, together with the members of the
few prominent families from which the high-priests still
continued to be selected, cf. Acts iv. 6 ; Joseph, b. ]. 4,
3, C] 3. In the Ep. to the Ileb. Christ is called
' hish-priest,' because by undergoing a bloody death he
offered himself as an expiatory sacrifice to God, and
has entered the heavenly sanctuary where he continually
intercedes on our behalf: ii. 17 ; iii. 1 ; iv. 14 ; v. 10;
vi. 20 ; vii. 2G ; viii. 1 ; ix. 1 1 ; cf. Winzer, De sacerdotis
officio, quod Christo tribuitur in Ep. ad Hebr. (three
Programs), Leips. 182.5 sq. ; Riehm, LehrbegrifE des Ile-
briierbriefes, ii. pp. 431-4S8. In Grk. writ, the word is
used by Ildt. 2, [(37), 142,] 143 and 151 ; Plat. legg. 12
p. 947 a.; Polyb. 23, 1, 2; 32, 22, 5 ; Plut. Xuma c. 9,
al. ; [often in Inscrr.] ; once (viz. Lev. iv. 3) in the
Sept., where Uptis /i/yaf is usual, in the O. T. Apocr. 1
Esdr. v. 40 ; ix. 40, and often in the bks. of Mace.
άρχι-ίΓοίμην, -ffor [so L Τ Tr WII KC (after Mss.), but
Grsb. al. -μήν, -pivoi; cf. Lob. Paralip. ρ 19.5 sq. ; Steph.
Thesaur. s. v. ; Chandler § 5iS0], ό, a bibl. word [Test.
.\ii. Patr. test. Jud. § 8J, chief shepherd : of Clirist the
head of the church, 1 Pet. v. 4 ; see ποψήν, b.*
'Apxiinros [Chandler § 308], -ου, ό, [i. c. master of the
horse], Archippus, a certain Christian at Colossae : Col.
iv. 17; Philem. 2. [Cf. B. D. s. v.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col.
and Philem. p. 308 sq.] *
οφχισ-υνάγωγοϊ, -ου, ό, (σνναγωγή), ruler of a syna/jogue,
η?:;π Ci'Sl : Mk. V. 22, 35 sq. 38 ; Lk. viii. 49 ; xiii. 14 ;
Acts xiii. 15 ; χ viii. 8, 1 7. It was his duty to select the
readers or teachers in the synagogue, to examine the
discourses of the public speakers, and to see that all
things were done with decency and in accordance with
ancestral usage ; [cf. Alex.'s Kitto s. v. Synagogue].
(Not found in prof. writ. ; [yetSchiirer (Theol. Literatur-
Zeit., 1878, p. 5) refers to Corp. Inscrr. Graec. no 2007 f.
(Addenda ii. p. 994), no. 2221• (ii. p. 1031), nos. 9894,
990G; il/omm.sen, Inscrr. Regni Neap. no. 3657; Garrucci,
Cimitero degli antichi Ebrei, p. 67; Lampridius, Vita
Alexandr. Sever, c. 28 ; Vopiscus, Vit. Saturnin. c. 8 ;
Codex Theodos. xvi. 8, 4, 13, 14; also Acta Pilat. in
Tdf.'s Ev. Apocr. ed. 2, pp. 221, 270, 275. 284; Justin,
dial. c. Tryph. c. 137 ; Epiph. haer. 30, 18 ; Euseb. h. e.
7, 10, 4 ; see fully in his Gemeindeverfassung der Juden
in Rom in d. Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargestellt
(Leips. 1879), p. 25 sq.].) *
άρχι.τ€'κτων, -ovos, 6, (τίκτων, q. v.), a master-builder,
architect, the superintendent in the erection of buildings :
1 Co. iii. 10. (Hdt., Xen., Plat, and subseq. writ.; Is.
iii. 3; Sir. xxxviii. 27; 2 Mace. ii. 29.)•
)φχι-τ(λώνηΐ, -ου, ό, α chief of the tax-collectors, chief
publican : Lk. xix. 2. [See reXcii^s.] *
άρχι-^ρίκλινοΐ, -ου, ό, (τρικλιμον [or -vof (sc. οίκοί), a room
with three couches]), //iCsu/ierinienrfenio/"a dining-room,
a τρίϋΧινίάρχηί, table-master : Jn. ii. 8 sq. [cf. B.D. s. v.
Governor]. It differs from " the master of a feast,"
σνμποσιιΊρχψ. toast-master, who was one of the guests se-
lected by lot to prescribe to the rest the mode of drink-
ing ; cf. .Sir. .xxxv. (.xxxii.) 1. But it was the duty of
the άρχιτρίκλινο! to place in order the tables and couches,
arrange the courses, taste the food and wine beforehand,
etc. (Ilehod. 7, 27.) [Some regard the distinction be-
tween the two words as obliterated in later Grk. ; cf.
Soph. Lex. s. v., and Schaff's Lange's Com. on Jn. 1. c] *
άρχομαι, see άρχω.
£ρχω ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; lo be first, 1. to be the first
to do (anything), to begin, — a sense not found in the
Grk. Bible. 2. to be chief, leader, ruler : rti/os [B. 169
(147)], Mk. X. 42 ; Ro. .xv. 12 (fr. Is. xi. 10). See άρχων.
Mid., ])res. άρχομαι : fut. άρξομαι (once [/iiiice], Lk. xiii.
2(i [but not Tr mrg. WII mrg. ; xxiii. 30]) ; 1 aor. ηρξά-
μην, to begin, make a beginning: από Tivot, Acts x. 3 7
[B. 79 (69) ; cf. Matth. § 558] ; 1 Pet. iv. 1 7 ; by bra-
chylogy ap^apevos από Tivot ίως Tivos for, having begun
from some person or thing (and continued or continu-
ing) to some person or thing : Mt. xx. 8 ; Jn. viii. 9 [i. e.
Rec] ; Acts i. 22 ; cf. W. § 66, 1 c. ; [B. 374 (320)] ; άρξά-
μ(νον is used impers. and absol. a beginning being made,
Lk. xxiv. 27 (so in Hdt. 3, 91 ; cf. W. 624 (5H0) ; [B. 374
sq. (321)]) ; carelessly, άρζάμξνος άπο Μωυσίως και άπο
πάντων προφητών &ιηρμήν(υ(ν for, beginning from Clo-
ses he went through all the prophets, Lk. xxiv. 27 ; W.
§ 67, 2 ; [B. 374 (320 sq.)]. S>v ήρξατο ττοκί!- τί κα'ι Μά-
fficfi»», άχρι ηί ήμίρας which he began and continued both
to do and to teach, until etc., Acts i. 1 [W. § 66, 1 c. ; B.
u. s.]. Άρχομαι is connected with an inf. and that so of-
ten, esp. in the historical books, that formerly most inter-
preters thought it constituted a periphra.^is for the finite
form of the verb standing in the inf., as ηρξατο κηρΰσσιιν
for ίκήρυξί. But through the influence principally of
Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 539 sq.), cf. "\V. § 65, 7 d., it is now
conceded that the theory of a periphrasis of this kind was
a rash assumption, and that there is scarcely an example
which cannot be reduced to one of the following classes :
a. the idea of beginning has more or less weight or im-
portance, so that it is brought out by a separate word :
Mt. xi. 7 (the disciples of John having retired, Christ
began to speak concerning John, wliich he did not do
while they were present) ; Lk. iii. 8 (do not even begin
to say; make not even an attempt to excuse yourselves) ;
Lk. XV. 14 (the beginning ot want followed hard upon the
squandering of his goods) ; Lk. xxi. 28 ; 2 Co. iii. 1 ; esp.
when the beginning of an action is contrasted with its
continuance or its repetition, Mk. vi. 7 ; viii. 31 (cf. ix.
31 ; X. 33 sq.) ; or with the end of it, Lk. xiv. 30 (opp.
to tKTeXiaai) ; Jn. xiii. 5 (cf. 12). b. άρχ. denotes some-
thing as begun by some one, others following : Acts xxvii.
35 sq. [λν. § 65, 7 d.]. C. άρχ. indicates that a thing was
but just begun when it was interrupted by something
else : Jit. xii. 1 (they had begun to pluck ears of com,
ίρ^ων
79
aaeXyeia
but they were prevented from continuing by the inter-
ference of the Pharisees) ; Mt. xxvi. 22 (Jesus answered
before all had finished), 74; Mk. ii. 23; iv. 1 (lie had
scarcely begun to teach, when a multitude gathered unto
him) ; Mk. vi. 2 ; x. 41 ; Lk. v. 21 ; xii. 45 sq. ; xiii. 25 ;
Acts xi. 15 (cf. X. 44) ; xviii. 26, and often, d. the ac-
tion itself, instead of its beginning, might indeed have
been mentioned ; but in order that the more attention
may be given to occurrences which seem to the writer
to be of special importance, their initial stage, their be-
ginning, is expressly pointed out : Mk. xiv. H5 ; Lk. xiv.
18 ; Acts ii. 4, etc. e. άρχ. occurs in a sentence which
has grown out of the blending of two statements : Mt. iv.
17; xvi. 21 (fr. άπο rare €κηρνζζ . . . eSet^f, and totc
ήμξατο κηρΰσσ€ΐν . ■ ■ betKvvtiv). The inf. is wanting
when discoverable from the context : αρχόμενοι, sc. to
di.^charge the Messianic office, Lk. iii. 23 [W. 349
(328)]; άρξάμ^νοΐ sc. Xeyetv, Acts xi. 4. [CoMP. : iv-
(-/iui), προ-(ΐι-(-μαι), νπ-, ττρο-ϋπ -άρχω.]
άρχων, -OVTOS, ό, (pres. ptcp. of the verb άρχω), [fr.
Aeschyl. down], a ruh-r, rnmmander, chief, leader : used
of Jesus, άρχων των βασιλίων της yrjs, Rev. i. 5 ; of the
rulers of nations, Mt. xx. 25 ; Acts iv. 26 ; vii. 35 ;
univ. of magistrates, Ro. xiii. 3 ; Acts xxiii. 5 ; espe-
eially judges, Lk. xii. 58; Acts vii. 27, 35 (ivhere note
the antithesis : whom they refused as άρχοντα και δικα-
στήν, him God sent as άρχοντα — leader, ruler — και λυτρω-
την) ; Acts xvi. 19. οί άρχοντας τον αιώνος τούτον, those
who in the present age (see αιών, 3) by nobility of birth,
learning and wisdom, power and authority, wield the
greatest influence, whether among Jews or (ientiles, 1 Co.
ii. 6, 8 ; cf. Neander ad loc. p. 62 S((q. Of the members
of the Jewish Sanhedrin : Lk. xxiii. 13, 35; x.xiv. 20;
Jn. iii. 1 ; vii. 26, 48 ; xii. 42 ; Acts iii. 17; iv. 5, 8 ; xiii.
27; xiv. 5. of the officers presiding over synagogues :
Mt. ix. 18, 23 ; Lk. viii. 41 (άρχων της συναγωγής, cf. Jlk.
V. 22 αρχισυνάγωγος), and perhaps also Lk. xviii. 18 ;
άρχων των ΦαρισαΙων, one who has great influence among
tlie Pliari.«ees, Lk. xiv. 1. of the devil, the prince of
evil spirits: (ό) άρχων των δαιμονίων, Mt. ix. 34 ; xii. 24;
Mk. iii. 22 : Lk. xi. 15 ; ό άρχ. τον κόσμου, the ruler of the
irreligiouB mass of mankind, Jn. xii. 31 ; xiv. 30 ; xvi. 1 1,
(in rabbin, writ. D^1>*n "^t^ ; άρχ, τοΰ αιώνος τοντον,
ί mat. ad Eph. 19, 1 [ad JIagn. 1,3]; άρχων τοϊι καφοϊι τής
ινομίας. Barn. ep. 18, 2) ; της ΐξουσίας τοϋ άίρος, Eph. ii. 2
(see αήρ). [See Horl in Diet, of Chris. Biog., s.v. Archon.]*
αρωμ,α, -το?, τό, (fr. ΑΡΩ to prepare, whence αρτνω to
season ; [al. connect it with r. ar (άρόω) to plough (cf.
(ien. xxvii. 27) ; al. al.]), spice, perfume : Mk. xvi. 1 ; Lk.
xxiii. 56 ; xxiv. 1 ; Jn. xix. 40. (2 K. xx. 13 ; Esth. ii. 12 ;
Cant. iv. 10, 16. [Hippocr.], Xen., Theophr. and subse([.
writ.) *
Ασ-ά, ό, (Chald. NOK to cure), A.in, king of Judah, son
of king Abijah (1 K.' xv. 8 sqq.) : Mt. i. 7 sq. [L Τ Tr
"WH read Άσάφ q. v.] •
βταίνω : in 1 Th. iii. 3, Kuenen and Cobet (in their
N. T. ad fidem cod. Λ"at., Lugd. 1860 [pref. p. xc.]), fol-
iDwing Lchm. [who followed Valckenaer in following J.
J. Reiske (Animad. ad Polyb. p. 68) ; see Valck: Opuscc.
ii. 246-249] in his larger edit., conjectured and received
into their text μηδϊν άσαίνισθαι, which they think to be
equiv. to άχθισθαι. χαλ(πώς φίραν. But there is no ne-
cessity for changing tlie Rec. (see σαίνω, 2 b. β.), nor can
it be shown that άσα'ινω is used by Grk. writ, for άσάω*
ά-σάλίυτοβ, -ov, (σαλίύω), umliaken, unmoved: prop.
Acts xx\ii. 41 ; metajili. βασιΚΰα, not liable to disorder
and overthrow, firm, stable, Ileb. xii. 28. (Eur. Bacch.
391 ; eKcvOepia, Diod. 2, 48 ; (ϋδαιμονία, ibid. 3,47; ήσνχία,
Plat. Ax. 370 d.; Plut., al.)*
Άσάφ, ό, (^DK collector), a man's name, a clerical
error for R G Άσά (ip v.), adopted by L Τ Tr WH in
Mt. i. 7 sq.*
oro-picTTos, -ov, {σβ(νννμι), unrjuenched (Ovid, inexstinc-
tus), unquenchable (Vulg. inexstinguibilis) : ττϋρ, Mt. iii.
12; Lk. iii. 17; Mk. ix. 43, andRGLbr. in45. (Often
in Hom. ; πΰρ άσβ. of the perpetual fire of Vesta, Dion.
Hal. antt. 1, 76 ; [of the fire on the altar, Philo de
ebriet. § 34 (Mang. i. 378) ; de vict. off. § 5 (Mang. iL
254); of the fire of the magi, Strabo 15, (3)15; see
also Plut. symp. 1. vii. probl. 4; Aelian. nat. an. 5, 3; cf.
Heinichen on Euseb. h. e. 6, 41, 15].)•
άσ-( β<ια, -ας, ή, (άσιβής, q. v.), want of reverence towards
God, impiety, ungodliness : Ro. i. 18 ; 2 Tim. ii. 16 ; Tit.
ii. 12; plur. ungodly thoughts and deeds, Ro. xi. 26 (f r.
Is. lix. 20) ; τα epya ασ(β(ίας [Treg. br. άσfβ.'\ works oj
wujndliness, a Hebraism, Jude 15, cf. W. § 34, 3 b. ; [B.
§ 132, 10]; ai (πιθυμίαι τών άσ(β(ΐών their desires to do
ungodly deeds, Jude 18. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Eur.], Plat,
and Xen. down ; in the Sept. it corresponds chiefly to
;>Π3.)•
άο-£β<ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ήσίβησα ; {άσίβής, q. v.) ; from
[Aeschyl.], Xen. and Plato down ; to he ungodhj, act im-
pioushj : 2 Pet. ii. 6 ; άσ(β(Ίν ?ργα άσ^βύαί [Treg. br.
άσφιίαςί, J"de 15, cf. W. 222 (209) ; [B. 149 (130)].
(Equiv. to yU2, Zeph. iii. 11 ; ^'d"}, Dan. ix. 5.) *
άσ-(βή$, -€5, (σίβω to reverence) ; fr. Aeschyl. and
Thuc. down, Sept. for ^•α"ΐ ; destitute of reverential awe
towards God, contemning Gnd, impious: Ro. iv. 5 ; v. 6;
1 Tim. i. 9 (joined here with άμαρτω\άς, as in 1 Pet. iv.
18) ; 2 Pet. ii. 5 ; iii. 7 ; Jude 4, 15.*
oiTtKytia,, -ας, ή, the conduct and character of one who
is άοίλγής (a word which some suppose to be com-
pounded of a priv. and Σίλγη, the name of a city in Pi-
sidia whose citizens excelled in strictness of morals [so
Etym. Magn. 152, 38; per contra cf. Suidas 603 d.] ;
others of α intens. and aaXayfiv to disturb, raise a din ;
others, and now the majority, of a priv. and σ/λγω i. q.
θ(\γω. not affecting pleasantly, exciting disgust), un-
bridled lust, excess, licentiousness, lasciviousness, wanton-
ness, oulrageousness, sliamelessness, insolence : ^Ik. vii.
22 (where it is uncertain what particular vice is spoken
of) ; of gluttony and venery, Jude 4 ; plur., 1 Pet. iv. 3 ;
2 Pet. ii. 2 (for Rec. άπωλύαις), 18; of carnality,
lasciviouxness : 2 Co. xii. 21; Gal. v. 19; Eph.iv. 19; 2
Pet. ii. 7 ; plur. " wanton (acts or) manners, as filthy
words, indecent bodily movements, unchaste handling of
άσημο•;
80
Ά
σιαρχτι<;
males and females, etc." (Fritzsche), Ro. xiii. 13. (In
bibl. (irk. besides only in Sap. .\iv. 26 and 3 Mace. ii. 26.
Among Grk. writ, used by Plat., Isocr. et sqq. ; at length
by Plut. [LucuU. 38] and Lcian. [dial, uieretr. 6] of the
wantonness of women [/,οδ. ad Phryn. p. 184 n.].) Cf.
Tittmann i. p. l.il sq. ; [esp. Trench § xvi.].'
άσημοβ, -ov, (σημχι a mark), unmarked or unstamped
(money) ; uiiknoivn, of no niark, insignificant, ignoble :
Acts .\.\i. 39. (3 Mace. i. 3 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down ;
trop. fr. Eur. down.) *
Άσ-ήρ. ό, an indecl. Ilebr. prop, name, (ΐϋΚ [i. e. hap-
py. Gen. .\.\x. 13]), (in Joseph. 'Affij/jot. -ov, ό), As/ici;
the eighth son of the |)atriarch Jacob : Lk. ii. 36 ; Rev.
vii. ().•
ciir6cvcia, -at, ή, (άσθινίΐί), [fr. Hdt. down], want of
strength, weakness, injirmiltj; a. of Body; «i. its native
weakness and frailty : 1 Co. xv. 43 ; 2 Co. xiii. 4. β. feeble-
ness of health ; sickness : Jn. v. 5 ; xi. 4 ; Lk. xiii. 11,12;
Gal. iv. 13 {άσβίναα τήί σαρκόί) ; Heb. xi. 34 ; in plur. :
Mt. viii. 17; Lk. v. 15; viii. 2 ; Acts xxviii. 9 ; 1 Tim. v.
23. b. of Soul ; want of the strength and capacity re-
quisite o. to understand a thing : Ilo. vi. 19 (where άσ^.
σαρκόί denotes tlie weakness of human nature), β. to do
things great and glorious, as want of human wisdom, of
skill in speaking, in the management of men : 1 Co. ii.
3. γ. to restrain corrupt desires ; procUvity to sin : lleb.
V. 2 ; vii. 28 ; plur. the various kinds of this proclivity,
Heb. iv. 15. S. to bear trials and troubles : Ro. viii. 26
(where read rj άσίίΐ/ίΐ'α for Rec. rais aa6eveiais) ; 2 Co.
xi. 30 ; xii. 9 ; plur. the mental [?J stales in which this
weakness manifests itself : 2 Co. xii. 5, 9 sij.*
urOcvcii), -ώ ; inipf. ησθίνουν; pf. ησθίνηκα (2 Co. .xi. 21
L Τ TrWII ) ; 1 aor. ηαθίυησα : (aa^evj/s) ; [fr. Eur. down] ;
to be weak, fi I hie ; univ. to be without strength, power-
less : Ro. viii. 3 ; rhetorically, of one who purposely ab-
stains from the use of his strength, 2 Co. xiii. 4 ; and
of one who has no occasion to prove his strength, 2 Co.
xiii. 9 ; contextually, to be unable to wield and hold sway
over others, 2 Co. .\i. 21 ; by o.xymoron, όταν ασθίνώ, τύτ(
8υνατός (Ιμι when I am weak in human strenjith, then <un
I strong in strength divine, 2 Co. xii. 10 ; tl's τίνα, to be
weak towards one, 2 Co. xiii. 3 ; with a dat. of the ri-f>pect
added : Triurfi, to be weak in faith, Ro. iv. 19 : πίστα, to
be doubtful about things lawful and unlawful to a Chris-
tian, Ro. xiv. 1 ; simple aaSevdv with the same idea sug-
gested, Ro. xiv. 2, 21 [T Wll om. Tr mrg. br.] ; 1 Co.
viii. 9 Rec., 1 1 stp ; rir άσθ^νΛ, και ουκ άσθ(νω ; who is
weak (in his feelings and conviction about things law-
ful), and I am not filled with a compassionate sense of
the same weakness? 2 Co. -xi. 29. contextually, to be
weak in means, needy, poor; Acts xx. 35 (so [Arstph.
pax 636] ; Eur. in Stob. 145 vol. ii. 168 ed. Gaisf.), cf.
De Wette [more fully Hackett, per contra Meyer] ad
loc. Specially of debility in health : with νόσοκ added,
Lk. iv. 40 ; simply, to be feeble, sick: Lk. vii. 10 [R G Tr
mrg. br.] ; Mt. xxv. 36, 39 L txt. Τ Tr λ\Ή ; Jn. iv. 46 ;
xi. 1-3, 6; Acts ix. 37; Phih ii. 26 sq.; 2 Tim. iv. 20;
Jas. V. 14 ; oi aaetvoimfs, and (urdcvouvrcc, the sick, sick
folks : Mt. x. 8 ; Mk. vi. 56 ; Lk. ix. 2 Rec. ; Jn. v. 3, 7,
13 Tdf. ; vi. 2; Acts .xi.x. 12.*
ι>σ-θ£νη|ΐα, -arof, to, {ΰσθ€νίω), infirmity : Ro. xv. 1
(where used of error arising from weakness of mind).
[In a physical sense in Aristot. hist. an. 11, 7 vol. i. 638',
37 ; gen. an. 1, IS ibid. p. 726' 15.]•
αο-θ(νή$. -i's, (to σθίνος strength), weak, infirm, feeble;
[fr. Pind. down] ; a. univ. : Mt. xxvi. 41 ; Alk. xiv. 38 ;
1 Pet. iii. 7 ; το aadtvis toC θ^οϋ, the act of God in which
weakness seems to appear, viz. that the suffering of the
cross should be borne by the Messiah, 1 Co. i. 25. b. spec.:
contextually, unable to achieve anything great, 1 Co. iv.
10; destitute of power among men, 1 Co. i. 27 [I.chm.
br.] ; weaker and inferior, μίλοί, 1 Co. xii. 22 ; sluggish
in doing right, Ro. v. 6 ; wanting in manliness and dig-
nity, 2 Co. X. 10; used of the religious systems anterior
to Christ, as having no power to promote piety and sal-
vation. Gal. iv. 9; Heb. vii. 18; wanting in decision
about things lawful and unlawful (see άσθίνίω), 1 Co.
viii. 7, 9 L TTr \VH, 10; ix. 22; 1 Th. v. 14. c. of
the body, feeble, sick : Mt. xxv. 39 R G L mrg., 43 scp ;
Lk. ix. 2 LTr br. ; x. 9; Acts iv. 9; v. 15 sq.; 1 Co.
xi. 30.*
Άο•(α, -as, ή, Asia; 1. Asia proper, η Ihiwi κα\ον-
μίνη Ασία ( Ptol. 5, 2), or proconsular A?ia[of ten so called
from tlie 16th cent, down ; but correctly speaking it was
a provincia c ο nsulari'!, although the ruler of it was vested
with ' proconsular power.' The ' Asia ' of the N. T.
must not be confounded with the ' Asia proconsularis '
of the 4tli cent.], embracing Mysia, Lydia, Phrygia and
Caria [cf. Cic. pro Flac. c. 27] : Acts vi. 9 [L om. Tr mrg.
br.] ; xvi. 6 sqq. ; 1 Pet. i. 1 ; Rev. i. 4 ; and, a[)parently. Acts
xix. 26 ; XX. 16 ; 2 Co. i. 8 ; 2 Tim. i. 15, etc. Cf. Win.
R W B. s. V. Asien ; Stark in Schenkel i. p. 261 sq. ; [BB.
DD. s. V. Asia; Conyb. and Iloirxon, St. Paul, ch. viii.;
Wieseler, Cliron. d. apost. Zeit. p. 31 sqq.]. 2. A
part of proconsular Asia, embracing Mysia, Lydia, and
Caria, (Plin. h. n. 5, 27, (28) [al. 5, 100]) : Acts ii. 9.
'Airiavos, -oC, ό, a native of Asia, Asian, Asiatic: Acts
ΧΛ. 4. [(Thuc, al.)]•
Άσ•ιάρχη5, -ou, ό, an Asiarch, President of Asia: Acts
xix. 31. Each of the cities of proconsular Asia, at the
autumnal equinox, assembled its most honorable and
opulent citizens, in order to select one to preside over
the games to be exhibited that year, at his expense, in
honor of the gods and the Roman emperor. Thereupon
each city reported the name of the person selected to a
general assembly held in some leading city, as Ephesus,
Smyrna, Sardis. Tliis general council, called το κοινόν,
selected ten out of the number of candidates, and sent
them to the proconsul ; and the proconsul, apparently,
chose one of these ten to preside over the rest. This
explains how it is that in Acts I.e. several Asiarchs
are spoken of, while Eusebius h. e. 4, 15, 27 mentions
only one; [perhaps also the title outlasted the ser-
vice]. Cf. Meyer on Acts 1. c. ; Win. RAVE. s. v.
Asiarchen ; [BB.DD. s. v. ; but esp. Le Bos et Wadding-
ton, Voyage Archeol. Inscrr. part. v. p. 244 sq.; Kuhn,
ίσίΤία
81
αστήρ
i)ie stadtische u. bflrserl. Verf. des rbm. Reiths, i. 10Θ
sqq. ; Marquarill, Rom. S'aatsverwalt. i. 374 s<iq.: 5/nri-
in Schenkel L 263 ; esp. Bp. Lgklft. Polycarp, p. 987 sqq.].*
ασιτία, -as, ij, (UCTtTotq. v.), abstinence from f nod (wheth-
er voluntary or enforced) : πο\\ή long, Acts xxvii. 21.
(Hdt. 3, 52; Eur. Suppl. lHJ.i: [Aristot.probl. 10,35;
eth. Nic. 10 p. 1180', 9]; Joseph, antt. 12, 7; al.)•
&iT\.T<K,-ov, (σίτο5),/α.<ίίη./7; without having eaten : Acts
xxTii. 3.!. (Horn. Od. 4, 788 ; then fr. Soph, and Thuc.
down.)*
ouTKi'u, -ω ; 1. to form by art, to adorn ; in Homer.
2. to exercise (one's self), tale pains, labor, strive; foil.
by an inf. (as in Xen. mem. 2, 1, ti ; Cyr. 5, 5, 12, etc.) :
Acts xxiv. 16.*
da-KOs, -oi, 0, a leathern bag or bottle,in which water or
wine was kept: Mt. L\. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37 sq.
(Often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; Sept.) [BB.DD.
B. V. Bottle ; Tristram, Xat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 92.] *
άτμ<νΐι>ΐ, adv., (for ησμ,ίνω! ; fr. ηδομαι), icith joy, glad-
ly : Acts ii. 41 [Rec] ; xxi. 1 7. (lu Grk. writ. fr. Horn,
[the adv. fr. Aeschyl.] down.) *
ά-σοψοΐ, -OK, (σοφοί), unwise, foolish: Eph. v. 15.
[From Theogn. down.]*
άσιτάζομαι; [iinpf. ησπαζίιμην]; 1 aor. ησπασάμην; (fr.
σπάω with α intensive [q. v., but cf. A'anicek p. 1103 ;
Curtius, Das \'erbum, i. 324 sq.] ; hence prop, to draw to
one's self [W. § 38, 7 fin.] ; cf. αακα'φω for σκαίρω. άσπαί-
ρω for σπαίρω, άσπαρίζω for στταρί^ω) ; [fr. Hom. down] ;
a. witli an ace. of the pers., to salute one, greet, bid tcet-
come, wish well to, (tlie Israelites, on meeting and at
parting, generally used the formula ^ Dl'7 'ΰ') ; used
of those accosting any one : Mt. x. 12; Jfk. Lx. 15; xv.
18; Lk. i. 40; Acts xxi. 19. of those who visit one to
see him a little while, departing almost immediately af-
terwards : Acts xviii. 22 ; xxi. 7 ; like the Lat. salutare,
our ^pay one's respects to,' of those who show regard for
a distinguished person by visiting him : Acts xxv. 1 3,
(Joseph, antt. 1, 19, 5; 6, 11, 1). of those who greet one
whom they meet in the way : Mt. v. 47 (in the East even
now Christians and Mohammedans do not salute each
other) ; Lk. x. 4 (as a salutation was made not merely by
a slight gesture and a few words, but generally by em-
bracing and kissing, a journey was retarded by saluting
frequently), of those departing and bidding farewell:
Acts XX. 1 ; xxi. 6 [R G]. of the absent, saluting by
letter: Ro. xvi. 3, 5-23; 1 Co. xvi. 19; 2 Co. xiii. 12
(13) ; Phil. iv. 21 sq. ; Col. iv. 10-12, 14 sq. ; 1 Th. v. 26,
etc. (u φίΧήματι: Ro. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 20 ; 2 Co. xiii.
12; 1 Pet. V. 14. b. with an ace. of the thing, to receive
joyfully, welcome: ras fVayyeXi'ar, Heb. xi. 13, (την σνμ-
φοράν, Eur. Ion 587; την (ϋνοιαν, Joseph, antt. 6, 5, 3 ;
Toii Xoyout, ibid. 7, 8, 4 ; so saluto, Verg. Aen. 3, 524).
[CoMP. : aw-a<rrraCopni.']
ΰητασμός, -οϋ, ό, (ασπάζομαι), a salutation, — either
oral : Mt. xxiii. 7 ; Mk. xii. 38 ; Lk. i. 29, 41, 44 ; xi. 43 ;
XX. 46 ; or written : 1 Co. xvi. 21 ; Col. iv. 18 ; 2 Th. iii.
1 7. [From Theogn. down.] *
arnnXos, -on, {(nr'iXos a spot), spotless : άμαόι, 1 Pet. i.
19 ; (ϊπποί, lldian. :j, 6, 16 [7 ed. Bekk.] ; μηΚον, Anthoi.
Pah 6, 252, 3). metaph. free from censure, irreproach-
able, 1 Tim. vi. 14 ; free from vice, unsullied, 2 Pet. iii.
14; από Γοϋ κόσμου, Jas. i. 27 [Β. § 132, 5]. (In eccl.
writ.) •
ooTris, -i'8os, ή, an asp, a small and most venomous ser-
pent, the bite of which is fatal unless the part bitten be
immediately cut away: Ro. iii. 13. (Deut. xxxii. 33,
Is. XXX. 6 [etc. Hdt., Aristot., al.] Ael. nat. an. 2, 24 ; 6,
38 ; Plut. mor. p. 380 f. i. e. de Isid. et Osir. § 74 ; Op-
pian. cyn. 3, 433.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Asp ; Tristram, Xat.
Hist, of the Bible, p. 270 sqq.]*
&nrov8os, -OK, (στΓοκδ^ a libation, which, as a kind of
sacrifice, accompanied the making of treaties and com-
pacts ; cf. Lat. spondere) ; [fr. Thuc. down] ; 1. with-
out a treaty or covenant ; of things not mutually agreed
upon, e. g. abstinence from hostilities, Thuc. 1, 37, etc.
2. thai cannot be persuaded to enter into a covenant, im-
placable, (in this sense fr. Aeschyl. down ; esp. in the
phrase άστιον8ος νοΚ^μας, Dem. pro cor. p. 314, 16;
Polyb. 1, 6.5, 6; [Philo de sacrif. §4]: Cic. ad Att. 9,
10, 5 ; [cf. Trench § Iii.]) : joined with ucrropyos, Ro. i.
31 Kec. ; 2 Tim. iii. 3.*
άτσάριον, -ου. τό, an assarium or assariiLi, the name of
a coin equal to the tenth part of a drachma [see &ηνάριον^,
(dimin. of the Lat. as, Rabbin. "Ό"»), [a penny] : Mt. x.
29 ; Lk. xii. 6. (Dion. Hal., Plut.^ al.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v.
Farthing.] *
ασσον, adv., nearer, (compar. of άγχι near [cf. f'yyir]) :
Acts .xxvii. 13 [here Ree.«*Aσσ. (οΓ'Ασσ. q. v.), Rec!^"''
άσσ., (cf. Tdf. ad loc.) ; but see Meyer]. (Horn., Hdt.,
tragic poets; Joseph, antt. 19, 2, 4.)*
Άσσοϊ [so all edd., perh. better -σσίίί ; Chandler § 31 7,
cf. § 319 ; Pape, Eigennamen s. v.], -ου. ή, Assos, a mari-
time city in Asia Minor, on the .Sgean Sea [Gidf of
Adramrttium], and nine [ace. to Tab. Peuting. (ed.
Fortia d'Urban, Paris 1845, p. 170) 20 to 25] miles [see
Hackett on Acts as below] distant [to the S.] from Troa.«,
a city of Lesser Phrygia : Acts xx. 13 sq. ; [formerly read
also in Acts xxvii. 1 3 after the Vulg. ; cf. ίσσον. See
Papers of the Archa;ol. Inst, of America, Classical
Series i. (1882) esp. pp. 60 sqq.].•
άστατίω, -ώ; (άστατο! unstable, stroUing about; cf.
ακατάστατοι) ; to wander about, to rove without a settled
abode, [A. V. to have no certain dwelling-place'] : 1 Co. iv.
11. (Anthoi. Pal. appendix 39, 4.) *
«TTiios. -OK, (άστυ a city); 1. of the city; of pol-
ished manners (opp. to orypo«ot rustic), genteel, (fr. Xen.
and Plat. down). 2. elegant (of body), comely, fair,
(Judith xi. 23 : Aristaenet. 1. 4, 1 and 19, 8) : of Mosei
(Ex. ii. 2), Heb. xi. 23 ; with τώ θ<ώ added, unto God,
God being judge, i.e. truly fair. Acts vii. 20; cf. W. §31,4
a. p. 212 (199) ; [248 (232)] ; B. 179 (15G) ; (Pliilo, vit.
Moys. i. § 3, says of Moses γιννηθιΧί ό nals tieiis όψικ «Vf-
φην€ν aoTftoTtpa» η κατ Ιδιώτην). [Cf. Trench § cvi.] *
άο-τήρ, -i'pos, ό, [fr. r. star (prob. as strewn over the
sky), cf. αστροκ, Lat. Stella, Germ. Stern, Eng. star; Fick,
Pt. i. 250; Curtius § 205; Yanicek p. 1146; fr. Hom.
αστηριΚΎ0<ί
82
ασωτία
down]; α star: Mt. ii. 7, 9, 10 [ace. -f'pav K* C; see
άρσην fin.] ; xxiv. 29 ; Mk. xiii. 25 ; 1 Co. xv. 41 ; Rev.
vi. 13; viii. 10-12; ix. 1; xii. 1, 4; ό άστηρ αΰτοϋ, the
star betokening his birtli, Mt. ii. 2 (i. e. ' tlie star of the
Messiah,' on which cf. BerthoUlt, Christologia Judaeo-
rum § 14; Anger, Der Stern der Weisen, in Niedner's
Zeitschr. f. d. histor. Theoi. for 1847, fasc. 3 ; [B. D. s. v.
Star of the AVise Men]) ; by the figure of the seven
stars which Clirist holds in his right hand, Rev. 1. 16;
ii. 1 ; iii. 1, are signified tlie angels of the seven churches,
under the direction of Christ, ibid. i. 20 ; see what was
said s. V. ayyeXos, 2. άστηρ 6 npw'ivos the morning star.
Rev. xxii. 16 [Rec. opflpii/ot] ; ii. 2S (δώσω αΰτω top άστί pa
τ. πρωϊνάν I will give to him the morning star, that he
may be irradiated with its splendor and outshine all
others, i. e. I will cause his heavenly glory to excel that
of others), άστίρα πλανάται, wandering stars, Jude 13
(these are not planels, the motion of which is scarcely
noticed by the commonalty, but far more probably comets,
which Jude regards as stars wliich have left the course
prescribed them by God, and wander about at will — cf.
Enoch xviii. 15, and so are a fit symbol of men πλανώιτβί
και TiXavwpfvoi, 2 Tim. iii. 13).*
άτο-τήρικτοϊ, -οι-, (στηρίζω), unstable, unsteadfast : 2 Pet.
ii. 14; iii. 16. (Anthol. Pal. 6, 203, 11.)*
oUTTop-yos, -ov, (στοργή love of kindred), without natural
affection: Ro. i. 31 ; 2 Tim. iii. 3. (Aeschin., Theocr.,
Plut., al.) *
ΰττοχεω, -ώ : 1 aor. ηστόχησα ; (to be άστοχοί, It.
στόχος a mark), In deviate from, miss, (the mark) : with
gen. [W. § 30, 6], to deviate from anything, 1 Tim. i. 6
(Sir. vii. 19 ; viii. 9) ; irfpi τι, 1 Tim. vi. 21 ; 2 Tim. ii.
18. (Polyb., Plut., Lcian., [al.].) *
aa~rpatrf\,-ijs, ή, lightning: Lk. x. 18; xvii. 24; Mt. xxiv.
27; xxviii. 3; plur.. Rev. iv. 5 ; viii. 5; xi. 19; xvi. 18;
of the gleam of a lamp, Lk. xi. 36 [so Aeschyl. frag. (fr.
schol. on Soph.Oed. Col. 1047) 188 Ahrens, 372 Dind.].•
άοτράΐΓτω ; (later form στράπτω, see ασπάζομαι init.
[prob. allied with αστήρ q. v.]) ; to lighten, (Horn. II. 9,
237; 17, 595, and often in Attic): Lk. xvii. 24. of
dazzling objects : ίσθήί (R G (σθήσικ), Lk. xxiv. 4
(and very often in (irk. writ. fr. Soph. Oed. Col. 1067;
Eur. Phoen. Ill, down). [Comp. : (ξ-, ττερι-αστράπτω.] *
cicrrpov, -ου, το, [(see αστήρ init.), fr. Ilom. down] ; 1.
a group of stars, a constellation ; but not infreq. also 2.
i. q. αστήρ a star: Lk. xxi. 25 ; Acts xxvii. 20; Heb. xi.
12 ; the image of a star. Acts vii. 43.•
Ά-σίγ-κριτοί [Τ WH Άσΰκκρ.], -ου, ό, (a priv. and
συγκρίνω to compare ; incomparable) ; Asi/ncriliis, the
name of an unknown Christian at Rome : Ro. xvi. 14.*
ΟΗΓΐμψωνοΐ, -OK, not agneing in sound, dissonant, inhar-
monious, at variance: πρϋς ά\\ή\ου! (Diod. 4, 1), Acts
xxviii. 25. (Sap. xviii. 10; [Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 8, 1];
Plat., Plut., "al.].) *
cvo-vveTos, -ov, unintelligent, without understanding : Mt.
XV. 16 ; Mk. vii. 18; stupid: Ro. i. 21 ; x. 19. In imita-
tion of the Hebr. ^3J, ungodli/ (Sap. i. 5 ; Sir. xv. 7 sq.
[cf. άσυνίτ^Ιν, Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 158]), because a wicked
man has no mind for the things which make for salva^
tion : Ro. i. 31 [al. adhere here to the Grk. usage; cf.
Fritzsehe ad loc.]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down.) [Cf.
σοφός, fin.]*
€ί<Γύν-βίτο5, -ov, 1. uncompounded, simple, (Plat.,
Aristot., al.). 2. (συντίθιμαι to covenant), covenant-
breaking, faithless: Ro. i. 31 (.so in Jer. iii. 8, 11 ; Dem.
de falsa leg. p. 383, 6 ; cf. Pape and Passow s. v. ; άσυν-
θ(Τ(Ιν to be faithless [Ps. Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 15 ; 2 Esdr. x. 2 ;
Neh. i. 8, etc.] ; άσυνΰ(σία transgression, 1 Chr. ix. 1
[Aid., Compl. ; 2 Esdr. ix. 2, 4 ; Jer. iii. 7] ; (ϋσυνθίτιιν
to keep faith ; [cf. Trench § Iii.]).*
<ΰΓ(|>άλ(ΐα, -as, ή, {ασφαλής), [fr. Aeschyl. down] ; a.
frniness, stability: tV ττάση άσφ. most securely, Acts v.
23. trop. certainty, undoubted truth : \όγων (see λόγος,
I. 7), Lk. i. 4, (τοΰ λόγου, the certainty of a proof, Xen.
mem. 4, 6, 15). b. security from enemies anil dangers,
safety : 1 Th. v. 3 (opp. to κίνδυνος, Xen. mem. 3, 12, 7).•
άσ-ψαλής, -es, (σφάλλω to make to totter or fall, to
cheat, [cf. Lat. fallo. Germ, fallen, etc., Eng. fall, fail],
σφάΧλομαι to fall, to reel), [fr. Ilom. down] ; a. firm
(that can be relied on, confided in) : άγκυρα, Ileb. vi. 19
(ivhere L and Tr have received as the form of ace. sing.
ασφαλήν [Tdf. 7 -λήν ; cf. Tdf . ad loc. ; Delitzsch, Com.
ad loc] see ϊΊρσην). trop. certain, true : Acts xxv. 26 ;
TO ασφαλές. Acts xxi. 34 ; xxii. 30. b. suited to confirm :
TIKI, riiil. iii. 1 (so Joseph, antt. 3, 2, 1).*
άο-ψαλίζω : 1 aor. pass. inf. άσφαλισθήναι ; 1 aor. mid.
ήσφαλισάμην ; (ασφαλής) ; esp. freq. fr. Polyb. down ; to
'make firm, to make secure against harm ; pass, to be made
secure: Mt. xxvii. 64 (ό τάφος) [Β. 52 (46)]; mid.
prop, to make secure for one's self or for one's own ad-
vantage, (often in Polyb.): Mt. xxvii. 65 s([. ; to make
fast Tois πόδας (Ις το ξύλον, Acts xvi. 24 [W. § 66, 2 d. i
B. § 147, 8].•
άο-φαλύΐ, adv., [fr. Horn, down], safely (so as to prevent
escape) : Mk. xiv. 44 ; Acts xvi. 23. assuredly : γινώ-
σκ(ΐν. Acts ii. 36 ((Ιδάτίς, Sap. xviii. 6).*
ά(ΓχημΌν(ω, -ώ ; (to be άσχημων, deformed ; την κ(φα-
\ήν άσχημονίΐν, of a bald man, Ael. v. h. 11, 4) ; to act un-
bcromingly ([Eur.], Xen., Plat., al.) : 1 Co. xiii. 5 ; ϊπίτινα,
towards one, i. e. contextually, to prepare disgrace for
her, 1 Co. vii. 36.•
άσχημοσ-ύνη, -r;s, ή, (άσχημων ) ; fr. Plato down ; un-
seemliness, an unseemly deed : Ro. i. 27 ; of the pudenda,
one's nakedness, shame : Rev. xvi. 15, as in Ex. xx. 26 ;
Deut. xxiii. 14, etc. (In Grk. writ. fr. Plat, down.)*
ώτχήμων, -ovos, neut. άσχημον, (σχήμα) ; a. dejnrmed.
b. indecent, unseemly : 1 Co. xii. 23, opp. to ίϋσχήμων.
([Hdt.], Xen., Plat., and subseq. writ.)*
ά(Γωτ(α, -ας, ή, (the character of an πσωτοΓ, i. e. of an
abandoned man, one that cannot be saved, fr. σαόω, σύω
i. <]. σώζω, [ά-σω-το-ς, Curtius § 570] ; hence prop, incor-
rif/ibleness), an abandoned, dissolute, life; profligacy, prod-
igality, [R. V. riof] : Eph. v. 18 ; Tit. i. 6 ; 1 Pet. iv. 4 ;
(Prov. xxviii. 7 ; 2 Mace. vi. 4. Plat. rep. 8, p. 560 e. ;
Aristot. eth. Nic. 4, 1, 5 (3) p. 1120', 3 ; Polyb. 32, 20,
9; 40, 12, 7; cf. Cic. Tusc. 3, 8; Hdian. 2, 5, 2 (1 ed.
ασωτω(ί
83
αυθύΖη'ϊ
Bekk.), and elsewhere). Cf. Tittmann i. p. 152 sq. ;
[Trench § xvi.].*
oe-UTus, adv., (adj. ΰσωτοί, on which see ασωτία), dis-
solulely, profliyately: ζην (Joseph, antt. 12, 4, 8), Lk.
XV. 13 [A. V. riotijua la-iri(i\*
άτακτ€'ω, -ώ : 1 aor. ητήκτησα ; Ιο hi- utuktos, Ιο he disor-
derhj ; a. prop, of soldiers marching out of order or
quitting the ranks : Xen. Cjr. 7, 2, U, etc. Hence b.
to be negleclful of duUj, lo be lawless : Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 22 ;
oec. 5, 15 ; Lys. 141, 18 [i. e. c. Alcib. or. 1 § 18], ah c.
to lead a disorder! i/ life : 2 Th. iii. 7, cf. 11.*
SrroKTOi, -Of, {τάσσω}, disorderhj, out of tlie ranks,
(often so of soldiers) ; irregular, inordinate (άτακτοι
ήδοναί immoderate pleasures, Plat. legg. 2, 6G0 b. ; Plut.
de lib. educ. c. 7), deviating from the prescribed order or
rule : 1 Th. v. 14, cf. 2 Th. iii. G. (In Grk. writ. fr.
[lldt. and] Thuc. down ; often in Plat.) *
ά^τ^κτω?, adv., disorderly : 2 Th. iii. 6 άτάκτωί π^ριπα-
Tciv, ivhicli is explained by the added και μη κατά την
napddoaiv ην παρ€λαβ€ τταρ ημών; of. ibid. 11, where it is
exiilained by μη5ϊν ίμ-γαζόμινοι, άλλα π€ρΐ(ργαζόμ(νοι.
(Often in Plato.) *
ατ£κνο5, -OK, (τΐκνον), without offspring, childless : Lk.
XX. 28-30. (Gen. xv. 2 ; Sir. xvi. 3. In Grk. writ. fr.
Hesiod opp. 600 down.)*
άτίνίζω ; 1 aor. ητίνισα; (fr. άτίνής stretched, intent,
and this fr. τ(ίνω anil α intensive ; [yet cf. ^V. § 1<>, 4 B. a.
fin., and s. v. A, a, 3]) ; tofj: the eyes on, gaze upon : with
dat. of pars., Lk. iv. 20 ; .xxii. 56 ; Acts iii. 1 2 ; x. 4 ; xiv. 9 ;
xxiii. 1 ; foil, by t if with ace. of pers.. Acts iii. 4 ; vi. 15 ;
xiii. 9 ; metaph. to fix one's mind on one as an exam])le,
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 9, 2 ; eis τι. Acts i. 10 ; vii. 55 ; 2 Co.
iii. 7, 13; fir n, lo look into anything. Acts xi. G. (3
Mace. ii. 26. [Aristot.], Polyb. 6, 11, 5 [i. e. 6, 11% 12
Uind.] ; Diod. 3, 39 [Dind. tWr.] ; Joseph, b. j. 5, 12, 3 ;
Lcian. cont. 16, al.) *
arep, prep., fre([. in the poets [fr. Horn, down], rare
in prose writ. fr. Plat. [?] down ; without, apart from :
with gen. [Dion. Hal. 3, 10 ; Plut. Num. 14, Cat. min. 5] ;
in the Bible only in 2 Mace. xii. 15; Lk. xxii. 6 (arep
όχλου in the absence of the multitude ; hence, without
tumult), 35. [' Teaching '3, 10 ; Herm. sim. 5, 4, 5.] •
ατιμάζω ; 1 aor. ητίμασα ; [Pass., pres. ατιμάζομαι] ; 1
aor. inf. άτιμασ^^και ; (fr. im^oj; hence) ίο mo/.f άημοϊ,
to dishonor, insult, treat with contumely, whether in word,
in deed, or in tliought : [Mk. xii. 4 Τ Tr mrg. WH (cf.
άτιμάω and -μόω)] ; Lk. .XX. 1 1 ; Jn. viii. 49 ; Acts v. 41 ;
Ro. ii. 23 ; Jas. ii. 6 [\V. § 40, 5, 2 ; B. 202 (1 75)]. Pass. :
Ro. i. 24, on which cf. W. 326 (305 sq.) ; [and § 39, 3
N. 3]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down; Sept.) *
άττιμάω, -ώ : [1 aor. ητίμησα^; (τιμή); to deprive of
honor, despise, treat with contempt or contumely : τινά, Mk.
xii. 4 L Tr txt. ήτίμησαν (see ατιμάζω and -μόω). (In
Grk. writ, [chiefly Epic] fr. Horn, down.) *
ατιμία, -αί, ή, (άτιμος), dishonor, ignominy, disgrace, [fr.
Horn, down] : 1 Co. xi. 14; opp. to δόξα, 2 Co. vi. 8; 1
Co. XV. 43 (ev ατιμία sc. of, in a state of disgrace, used
of the unseemUness and offensiveness of a dead body) ;
κατ άτιμίαν equiv. to άτιμο»?, with contempt sc. of myself,
2 Co. xi. 21 [R. V. by way of disparagement, cf. κατά, II.
fin.] ; πάθη ατιμία: base lusts, \ile passions, Ro. i. 26, cf.
W. § 34, 3 b. ; [B. § 132, 10]. ei's άτιμίαν for a dishonor-
able use, of vessels, opp. to τιμή : Ro. ix. 21 ; 2 Tim. ii.
20.*
άτιμοί, -ov, (τιμή) ; It. Hom. down ; without honor, un-
honorcd, dishonored : Mt. xiii. 57; Mk. vi. 4; 1 Co. iv.
10 (opp. to (νδοξοί) ; base, of less esteem: 1 Co. ,xii. 23
[here the neut. plur. of the compar., άτιμότ(ρα (Rec."'''
άτιμώτίρα)^*
άτιμόω, -ώ : [pf. pass. ptcp. ήτίμωμίνος^ ; (άτιμος) ; fr.
Acschyl. down ; to dishonor, mark with disgrace : Mk. xii.
4 R G, see άτιμάω [and ατιμάζω^'
άτμίϊ, -I'Sof, ή, i-apor: Jas. iv. 14; καττνοϋ (Joel ii. 30
[al. iii. 3]), Acts ii. 19 [opp. to καπνός in Aristot. meteor.
2, 4 p. 359', 29 sq., to νίφος ibid. 1, 9 p. 346', 32].
(In Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. 4, 75 and] Plat. Tim. p. 86 e.
down.) *
έ^τομοϊ, -ov, (τί'μνω to cut), ihal cannot he cut in two or
dirided, indivisible, [Plat. Soph. 229 d. ; of time, Aristot.
phys. 8, 8 p. 263', 27] : iv άτόμω in a moment, 1 Co.
XV. 52.*
arTOTro%, -ov, (τύπος), out of place; not befitting, unbe-
coming, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down ; verv often in
Plato) ; in later Grk. in an ethical sense, improper,
wicked : Lk. xxiii. 41 (άτοπον τι πράσσαν, as in Job .xxvii.
6; 2 Mace. xiv. 23); Acts .\.\v. 5 LTTrWH; (Sept.
for [IN Job iv. 8; xi. 11, etc. Joseph, antt. 6, 5, 6;
Plut. de aud. poet. c. 3 φαυλά and άτοπα) ; of men : 2 Th.
iii. 2 (άτοποι κα\ πονηροί ; Luth. unartig, more correctly
unrighteous [^(iniquus), A. V. unreasonable, cf. Ellic. ad
loc.]). inconvenient, harmful : Acts xxviii. 6 μηδίν άτοίΓοκ
e?r αυτόν γινόμ(νον, no injury, no harm coming to him,
(Time. 2, 49; Joseph, antt. 11, 5, 2; Hdian. 4, 11, 7 [4,
ed. Bekk.]).•
'Αττάλ€ΐα [-λία Τ WH (see I, i)], -ας, ή, Altalia, a mar-
itime city of Pam])hylia in Asia, very near the borders
of Lycia, built and named by Attains Philadelphus, king
of Pergamum ; now ^1 ntali \_OTAdalia ; cf. Diet, of Geog.] :
Acts xiv. 25.•
αϋ^άζω : 1 aor. inf. αϋγάσαι ; (αυγή) ; 1. in Grk.
writ, transitively, to beam upon, irradiate. 2. in the
Bible intrans. to be bright, to shine forth : 2 Co. iv. 4 [L
mrg. Tr mrg. καταιτ/. see φωτισμός, b.], (Lev. xiii. 24-28,
[etc.]). [Co.MP. : 8i-, κατ-αυγάζω.}'
αΐγή. -ήί, ή, brightness, raditince, (cf. Germ. -■! uge [fi/e],
of which the tragic poets sometimes use αυγή. see Pape
[or L. and S. ; cf. Lat. luminaj), especially of the sun ;
hence ήλιου is often added (Hom. and sqq.), daylight;
hence άχρις [-pi Τ Tr WH] αΰγης even till break of day.
Acts XX. 11 (Polyaen. 4, is p. 386 κατά την πρώτην αϊγήν
της ήμ(ρας). [Syn. see 0e'yyor fin.]*
Αύ'γουστοϊ, -ου, ό, Augustus [cf. Eng. Majesty; see
σιβαστός, 2], the surname of G. Julius Caesar Octavia-
nus, the first Roman emperor: Lk. ii. 1.*
αυθάδη?, -if, (fr. αϊτός and ή5ομαι), self-pleasing, self-
willed, arrogant : Tit. i. 7 ; 2 Pet. ii. 10. (Gen. xlix. 3, 7 1
αυθαίρετοι
84
αυταρκοΛ
Prov. xxi. 24. In Grk. writ. fr. ApFcliyl. and Hdt.
down.) [Trench § xciii.] *
αύθ-α(ρ<τοΐ, -ov, (ir. αυτό; and αίρίομαι), silj-chosen ; in
(irk. writ. esp. of states or conditions, as δαι/λ»'α, Thuc.
6, 40, etc., more rarely of jiersons; voluiiltiri/, of free
rhoice, of m}c*s own accord ^ (as στρατηγός^ Xen. an. 5, 7,
•J!', explained § 28 by or (αυτόν ίληται) : Ί Co. viii. 3, 1 7.•
ανθ£ΐπ<ο>. -ώ ; ( a bibl. and eccl. word ; f r. αίθ(ντη! contr.
fr. αντοίιηηι, and this fr. airos and tirrfa arms [al. ΐντης,
cf. Ilesyeh. συνίντης- avvepyos; cf. Lobeck, Teclmol. p.
121]; hence a. ace. to earlier usage, one who with his
own hand kills either others or himself, b. in later Grk.
writ, one who does a thing himself, the author (τήί npa^tus,
Polyb. 23, 14, 2, etc.); one who acts on his own aullturity,
autocratic, i. q. αυτοκράτωρ an absolute master ; cf. Loheck
ad Phryn. p. 120 [also as above; cf. W. § 2, 1 c.]) ; to
govern one, exercise ilominion over one: Tivor, 1 Tim.
ii. 12.•
ανλ(ω, -5> : 1 aor. ηνΚησα ; [pres. pass. ptcp. τό αί\ού-
μινον] ; (αύλόϊ) ; to ρίαι/ on the flute, to pipe : Mt. .\i. 1 7 ;
Lk. vii. 32 ; l.Co. xiv. 7. (Fr. [Alcm., Hdt.,] Xen. and
Plat, down.) '
αυλή, -ής, ή. (άω to blow ; hence) prop, a place open to
the (nr {^ianvfttpfvoi tOjtos ανλη Xe'yfrat, Athen, 5, 15 p.
189 b.) ; i. among the Greeks in Homer's time an
uncovered space around the house, enclosed ΰι/ a wall, in
which the stables stood (Ilom. Od. 9, 185; 11. 4, 433);
hence among the Orientals that roofless enclosure in the
open country in which flocks were herded at night, a sheep-
fold : Jn. X. I, 16. 2. the uncovered court-yard of the
house, Ilebr. ΊΧΠ, Sept. αυλή, Vulg. atrium. In the O. T.
particularly of the courts of the tabernacle and of the
temple at Jerusalem ; so in the X. T. once : Rev. xi. 2
{τήν αυΚήν την Ζ^ωθ(ν [Rec.^ ίσωθ^ν'] τοΰ ναοΰ). The
dwellings of the higher classes usually had two αϋλαι, one
exterior, between the door and the street, called also
προαυΚιον (i|. v.); the other interior, surrounded by the
buildings of the dwelling itself. The latter is mentioned
Mt. xxvi. 69 (where ΐξω is opp. to the room in which the
judges were sitting) ; Mk. xiv. 66; Lk. .xxii. 55. Cf. Win.
RAVB. s. V. Hiiuser ; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Court ; BB.DD.
8. V. House]. 3. the house itself, a palace : Mt. xxvi.
3, 58 ; Mk. xiv. 54 ; xv. 16 ; Lk. xi. 21 ; Jn. xviii. 15, and
so very often in Grk. writ. fr. Horn. Od. 4, 74 down [cf.
£)ustath. 1483, 39 τω τη<ί αυΚης ονόματι τα δώματα δϊ/λοΐ,
Suid. col. 6.")2 C. αυλή ■ ή τοϋ βασιλίωί οικία. Yet this sense
is denied to the N. T. by Meyer et al. ; see Mey. on Mt.
1. c.].*
οΰλητήϊ, -οΰ, ό, (αύλ/ω), a flute-player : ^It. ix. 23 ; Rev.
xviii. 22. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theogn. and] Hdt. 6, 60
down.) *
αΰλίζομαι : depon. ; impf. ηυλιζόμην ; 1 aor. ηΙΧΙσθην
[ Veitch s. V. ; B. 51 (44) ; W. § 39, 2] ; {αΙ\ή) ; in Sept.
mostly forjl?; 1. prop, to lodge in the court-yard
esp. at night ; of flocks and shepherds. 2. to pa-ss the
night in the open air, bivouac. 3. univ. to pass the
night, lodge: so Mt. xxi. 17; Lk. xxi. 37 {ί'ξ(ρχ6μίνο!
ηνΧίζ^Γο <tr t6 Spot, going out to pass the night he retired
to the mountain; cf. B. § 147, 15). (In Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down.)•
avXos, -οϋ, 6, (άω, αυω), [fr. Hom. down], α pipe : 1 Co.
xiv. 7. [Cf. Stainer, Music of the Bible, ch. v.] •
ανξάνω, and earUer (the only form in Pind. and Soph.
[Veitch s. V. says, ' Hes. Mimnerm. Soj)!!. Tliuc. always
ha\(i αϋξω or αϋξομαι, and Pind. exce])t αϋξάι>οι Fr. 130
(Bergk )'])αϋ|ω (Eph. ii. 21 ; Col. ii. 19); impf. ηϋξανον;
fut. αίξήσω ; 1 aor. ηίξησα; [Pass., pres. αυξάνομαι] ; 1 aor.
ηΰξΐιθην; 1. trans, to cause to grow, to augment: 1
Co. iii. 6 sq. ; 2 Co. ix. 1 0. Pass, to grow, increase, become
greater : Mt. xiii. 32 ; Mk. iv. 8 L Τ 'Jr WH ; 2 Co. x. 1 5 ;
Col. i. 6 [not Kec] ; fir τήν ΐπιγνωσιν τοϋ θ(οΰ unto the
knowledge of (iod, Col. i. 10 (G LTTr WHtj ίπιγκώσί»
τοΰ θίοϋ) : els σωτηρΙαν\ηοί Rec] to the attaining of sal-
vation, 1 Pet. ii. 2. 2. ace. to later usage (fr. Aristot.
an. ])ost. 1, 13 p. 78', 6, etc., down ; but nowhere in Sept.
[cf.B. 54(47); 14.") (127); W. § 38, 1 J) intrans. /» i/roi/•,
increase: of jilant.s, Mt. vi. 28; Mk. iv. 8 Rec; Lk. xii.
27 [not Tdf. ; Trmrg. br. αύ|.] ; Lk. xiii. 19; of infants,
Lk. i. SO ; ii. 40 ; of a nHiltitu<le of i)eople. Acts vii. 1 7.
of inward Christian growth : (it Χριστόν, in reference to
[W. 397 (371) ; yet cf. EUic. ad loc] Christ, Epli. iv.
15; its ναοί', so as to form a temple, Ejih. ii. 21 ; ('νχάριτι,
2 Pet. iii. 18 ; with an ace. of the substance, τήν αϋξησιν.
Col. ii. 19 [cf. W. § 32, 2 ; B. § 131,5, also Bj). L-htft.'s
note ad loc] ; of the external increase of the gospel
it is said ό λόγο£ ηϋξαν( : Acts vi. 7 ; xii. 24; .\ix. 20;
of the growing authority of a teacher and the number of
his adherents (opp. to ίλαττοϋσθαι), -In. iii. 30. [CoMi•. :
συν-, ύτΓίρ-αυ^άι/ω-] *
ανξησίϊ. -(ως. ή. {αϋξω), increase, growth : Eph. iv. 16 ;
τοϋ β(οϋ, effected by God, Col. ii. 19; cf. Meyer ad loc.
([Hdt.], Thuc, Xen., Plat., and subseq. writ.)•
ανξω, see αυξάνω.
ανριον, adv., (fr. αΰρα the morning air, and this fr. αΰα
to breathe, blow; [ace to al. akin to ήώς, Lat. aurora;
Curtius§ 613,cf. Vanicek p. 944] ),io-morrow (Lat. rra.<) :
Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28; Actsxxiii. 15 Rec, 20 ; xxv. 22;
1 Co. XV. 32 (fr. Is. xxii. 13) ; ατ)μ(ρονκα\ αΰριον, Lk. xiii.
32 sq. ; Jas. iv. 13 [Rec.« G ; al. σήμ. ή aCp.]. ή αΰριον sc.
ήμίρα [W. § 64, 5 ; Β. § 1 23, 8] the morrow, Mt. vi. 34 ;
Acts iv. 3 ; tVl τήν αΰριον, on the morrow, i. e. the next
morning, Lk. x. 35 ; Acts iv. 5 ; το [L τά; WII om.] τήι
αΰριον, what the morrow will bring forth, Jas. iv. 14.
[From Hom. down.]•
ανστηρίϊ, -d, -όν (fr. ανω to dry up), harsh (Lat. o»-
s/erus), stringent of taste, αϋστηρον και •γΚνκϋ (και τακρόν),
Plat. legg. 10, 897 a.; olvos, Diog. Laert. 7, 117. of
mind and manners, harsh, rough, rigid, [cf. Tren<'h
§xiv.]: Lk. xix. 21, 22; (Polyb. 4, 20, 7; Diog. Laert.
7, 26, etc 2M.1CC. xiv. 30).•
αϋτάρκίΐα, -as. ή, (aίτάρκηs, q. v.), a perfect condition
of life, in which »« aid or support is needed; equiv. to
τίλίΐότ7)Γ κτήσίωΓ ά-γαθΰιν, Plat. def. p. 412 b. ; often in
Aristot. [defined by liira (pel. 7, 5 init. p. 132(i\ 29) ait
follows : TO πάντα ΰττάρχίΐν κ. &(ΐσθαι ^ijdf i/oc αύτάρκα ; cf .
Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iv. 11] ; hence, a sufficienci/ of the
αυτάρκης
85
αι/τοϊ
necessaries of life : 2 Co. ix. 8 ; subjectively, a mind con-
tented with its lot, contentment : 1 Tim. vi. 6 ; (Diog.
Laert. 10, 130).•
αντάρκτ)$ [on the accent see Chandler § 705], -it, (avrot,
αρκΐω), [It. Aeschyl. down], sufficient fur one's self, strong
enough or possessing enough to need no aid or support ;
independent of external circumstances; often in Grk.
writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. 1, 32 down. Subjectively,
contented with one's lot, with one's means, though the slender-
est: Phil. iv. 11, (so Sir. xl. 18; Polyb. 6, 48, 7; Diog.
Laert. 2, 24 of Socrates, αυτάρκη! και σεμνοί)• [Cf. αυτάρ-
κεια.'] '
αύτο-κατά-κρίΤ05, -ον, (αυτός, κατακρίνω), self-condemned :
Tit. iii. Π : (eccl. writ. [cf. W. § 34, 3]).•
αντάματος, -ov, and -η, -ov, (fr. avros and μίμαα to desire
eagerly, fr. obsol. theme μάω), mooed bj one's own im-
pulse, or acting without the in.<ligation or intervention of
another, (fr. Horn, down) ; often of the earth producing
plants of itself, and of the plants themselves and fruits
growing without culture ; [on its adverbial use cf. W.
§ 54, 2] : Mk. iv. 28 ; (Ildt. 2, 94 ; 8, 138 ; Plat, polit. p.
272 a. ; [Theophr. h. p. 2, 1] ; Diod. 1, 8, etc. Lev. xxv.
5, 11). of gates opening of their οΛνη accord: Acts xii.
10, (so in Horn. Ή. 5, 749; Xen. Hell. «, 4, 7; ApoU.
Rh. 4, 41 ; Plut. TimoL 12; Nonn. Dion. 44, 21 ; [Dion
Cass. 44, 17]).•
οντόιη-ηϊ, -ου, ό, (αυτός, ΟΙΓΤΩ), seeing with one's own
eyes, an eye-witne.-<s, (cf. αυτήκοος one who has himself
heard a thing) : Lk. i. 2. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)*
αύτέΐ, -η, -ό, pron. (" derived from the particle au with
the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself
it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has
either been previously mentioned or, when the whole
discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .^^upplied."
Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219 ; [see Vaniiek p. 268]). It is
used by the bibl. writ, both of the O. T. and of the N. T.
far more frequently than the other pronouns ; and in this
very frefjuent and almost inordinate use of it, they de-
viate greatly from prof. auth. ; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On
classic usage cf. Hermann, Opuscc. i. 308 sqq., of which
dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger
pp. 732-736.]
I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to
distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with
another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. 1.
AVTien used to express Opposition or Distinction,
it is added a. to the subjects implied in the verb, the
personal pronouns ί'γώ, ήμιΊς, σΰ, etc., being omitted : Lk.
v. 37 (αΐτος (κχνθήσ(ται the wine, as opp. to the skins);
Lk. xxii. 71 (αϋτοΧ γαρ ηκοίσαμιν we ourselves, opp. to
witnesses whose testimony could have been taken) ; Jn.
ii. 25 (αΰτοί eyivarrKev. opp. to testimony he might have
called for) ; Jn. iv. 42 (we ourselves, not thou only) ; Jn.
ix. 21 [T Tr WH om.] ; Acts xviii. 15 (όψίσίβ αυτοί):
XX. 34 ; xxii. 19 ; 1 Th. i. 9, etc. ; with a negative added,
' he does not himself do this or that,' i. e. he leaves it to
others : Lk. vi. 42 (αΰτόί, viz. thou, oi β\(πων) ; Lk. xi.
46 (αυτοί, viz. i/e, ου προσψανίτ(), 52 ; Jn. xviii. 28 ; 3
Jn. 1 0, With the addition of «tot to indicate that a tiling
is ascribed to one equally with others: Lk. xiv. 12
(pffTToTf <tai αυτοί Cf άιηικαλίσ'ύσι) ; xvi. 28 ; Acts ii. 22
[G L Τ Tr Wn om. raij : Jn. iv. 45 ; xvu. 19, 21 ; Phil,
ii. 24, etc. In other pass, rat airo'r is added to a subject
expressly mentioned, and is placed after it ; and in trans-
lation may be joined to the predicate and rendered like-
wise : Lk. i. 36 (η σνγγενης σου και αυτή συνειΧηφυΙα νιάν
ιΙ Ί kinswoman herself also, i. e. as well as thou): Mt.
xxvii. 57 (of <tai αυτός ϊμαθητ(υσ( [L Τ Tr WH txt. -τεϋθη]
τω Ίησοΰ) ; Lk. xxiii. -il [K (ί] ; ^Ik. XV. 43 ; Acts viii.
13 (ό Se Σίμων και αυτός (τ:Ίστ(υσ() ; XV. 32; -xxi. 24 ; 1
Jn. ii. 6; Gal. ii. 17; Heb. .^iii. 3. b. it is added to
subjects expressed, whether to pronouns personal or
demonstrative, or to nouns proper or common : .Jn. iii.
28 (αΰτοϊ i^flsye yourselves bear witness, not only have
I alfirmed) ; Acts xx. 30 (ί'ξ ΰμων αυτών from among
your own selves, not only from other quarters) ; Ro. xv.
14 (κα\ αυτός i-ym I of myself also, not only assured by
report, cf. i. 8) ; 1 Co. v. 13 (e'| ύμων αΰτων from your
own society, opp. to them that are without, of whose
character God must be the judge) ; 1 Co. vii. 35 : xi. 13 ;
Ί Th. iv. 9 : aLTot ούτοι, .\cts .\.\iv. 20 : αύτοΰ τούτον
(masc). Acts xxv. 2.j : Ίΐ7σοΟί αυτός Jesus 1ιίηι.•:ί1ί, per-
sonally, opp. to those who baptized by his command,
Jn. iv. 2 : αϊτοΓ Ίησοΰς, opp. to those who believed on
him on account of his miracles, J n. ii. 24 ; Jesus himself,
not others only, Jn. iv. 44 ; air. AavfiS, opp. to the doc-
tors of the law, whose decision did not seem quite to
agree with the words of David, Jlk. ;ii. 36 sq. ; Lk. xx.
42: αυτός ό Σατανάς, opp. to his ministers, 2 Co. xi. 14 ;
αυτός ό $(ός, God himself, not another, Rev. xxi. 3 ; αυτά
τα ίπουράνια, the heavenly tilings themselves [i. e. sanc-
tuary], opp. to its copies, Heb. ix. 23 [see ίπουράνιος, 1 c.].
c. it is used to distinguish one not only from his compan-
ions, disciples, servants, — as Mk. ii. 25 (αΰτόί καΊ οί μ^τ'
αύτοΰ) ; Jn. ii. 1 2 ; iv. 53 ; xviii. 1 , — but also from things
done by him or belonging to him, as Jn. vii. 4 (τ! ποκί <tai
ζητ(ΐ αυτός [L Tr mrg. WH mrg. αντό]) ; 1 Co. iii. 15 (τινός
τό €p-/ov κατακαησ€τηι. αυτός δί σω^ι^σ^ταί) ; Lk. xxiv. 15
(αίτοΓ (ό) Ίησηίς, Je^us himself in person, opp. to their
previous conversation about him), d. self to the exclu-
sion of others, i. e. he etc. atone, bg one's self: Mk. vi. 31
(ύμείς αυτοί ve alone, unattended by any of the people ;
cf. Fritzsclie ad loc.) ; Jn. xiv. 1 1 (διά τα tpya αυτά [WH
mrg. αυτοί] ) ; Ro. vii. 25 (αίτόί ϊγώ I alone, unaided by
the Spirit of Christ; cf. viii. 2) ; 2 Co. xii. 13 (αϋτόί i'yu,
unlike the other preachers of the gospel) ; Rev. xix. 12;
cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 733 iii.; Matth. § 4<'.7, 5; Kiihner
§ 468 Anm. 2: [.Telf § 656, 3]; with the addition of
μόνος (as often in Attic writ.) : Jn. vi. 15. e. self, not
prompted or influenced by another, i. e. of one's self, of
one's oicn accord : Jn. xvi. 27 (so even Hom. II. 1 7, 254 ;
and among Attic writ. esp. Xen.). 2. 'When it gives
Prominence, it answers a. to our emphatic Ae, sAc,
it: Mt. i. 21 (αυτός σώσει HE and no other) ; Mt. v. 4-10
(αυτοί) ; vi. 4 [R G] ; .wii. 5 (αΰτοΟ a<ourrf ) : Lk. vi. 35 ;
xvii. 16 ; xxiv. 21 ; Jn. U. 21 (αϋτοΓ [Τ Tr WH om.] . • .
avTot
86
αι/τος
αυτοί' . . . aUTor) ; Acts χ. 42 [L txt. Tr txt. WII oJros] ;
Gal. iv. 17 {avrois) ; Eph. ii. 10 (αντον) ; Col. i. 17 ; 1 Jn.
ii. 2 ; iv. 5 ; Jas. ii. 6 sq. So in Grk. writ, also fr. Horn,
down ; cf. Ilenn. ad Vig. p. 7;i4 v. It is used with the same
force after relative sentences, where Greek prose uses
ovTOff : Mt. xii. 50 (οστίί αν ποίηση . . . , αυτός μον άδίλφός
(στιν, where in Mk. iii. 35 ουτοί) ; Mt. xxvi. 48 ; Mk. xiv.
44 ; cf. B. 107 (94) sq. Less eniphaticaUy, avras is put
before subjects, serving to recall them again : Mt. iii. 4
(αΰτόί δί Ίωάνιπ]ί now he, whom I spoke of, John) ; Mk.
vi. 17 (αΰτόί yap Ήρώδτ)Γ) ; Ro. viii. 16 (αυτό το πν€ϋμα).
b. it points out some one as chief, leader, master of
the rest (often so in (;rk., as in the well-known phrase of
the Pythagoreans αίτυς ΐφα [cf. \V. § 22, 3, 4 and p. 150
(142)']) : of Christ, Mt. viii. 24 ; Mk. iv. 38; vi. 47; viii.
29 ; Lk. V. 16 sq. ; ix. 51 ; x. 38; of God, l.k. vi. 35 ;
Ileb. xiii. 5; 1 Jn. iv. 19 [not Lchm.]. c. it answers
to our i-eri/,ju.il, exaclhj, (Germ, ehen, gerade) : Ro. Lx. 3
{avTos eya> I myself, the very man who seems to be inimi-
cal to the Israelites) ; 2 Co. x. 1 (I myself, who bore
myself lowly in your presence, as ye said) ; αυτά τα epya.
Jn. V. 36 ; often in Luke cV avrfi rf/ ημίρα or ώρα, αυτώ
τω καιρώ, in that very day, hour, season : Lk. ii. 38 ; x. 21 ;
xii. 12; xiii. 1, 31 ; .xx. 19; xxiii. 12 ; x\iv. 13, 33 ; Acts
xvi. 18. In the writings of Paul αϋτο τοϋτο l/iis very
lliiny: Gal. ii. 10; 2 Co. vii. 11; Phil. i. 6; ds αυτό
τοϋτο for this very purpose, on this very account: Ro. i.x.
1 7 ; xiii. 6 ; 2 Co. v. 5 ; Eph. vi. 22 ; Col. iv. 8 ; and in
the same sense \_for this very thing] the simple accus.
(as in Attic, cf. Matth. § 470, 7 ; Kiihner ii. 267 Anm. 6 ;
W. § 21 N. 2) ToiTo αυτό, 2 Co. ii. 3 [but see Mey. ad
loc], and αϋτο τοϋτο, 2 Pet. i. 5 [Lchm. reads here airoQ.
d. even, Lat. rel, arleo, (in Horn. ; cf. Hrrm. ad A'ig. p.
733 ii.) : και αυτή η κτίσις, Ro. viii. 21 ; ouSe η φνσις αυτή,
1 Co. xi. 14 : καϊ [Tr om. L AVII br. και] αϋτος 6 υίΟ£, 1 Co.
XV. 28 ; «col αϋτη 2άρρα even Sarah herself, although a
feeble old woman, Ileb. xi. 11 [yet WII mrg. reads the
dat. ai/Tji 2άρρα; see καταβολή, 1].
II. αύτόί has the force of a simple personal pronoun
of the third person, answering to our unemphatic he, she,
it; and that 1. as in classic Grk., in the oblique
cases, him, her, it, them, etc.: numberless instances, —
as in the gen. absolute, e. g. αυτού ίΧθόιττος. \ηΧήσαντος,
etc.; or in the ace. with inf., ds το dvai airois αναπολό-
γητου!, Ro. i. 20 ; or after prepositions, (ξ αίτοϋ. tv αϋτώ,
etc. ; or where it indicates the possessor, ό πατήρ αΰτοΰ ;
or a person as the (dir. or indir.) object of an active
verb, as f π•ι8ώσ€ΐ αϋτω, Mt. vii. 9 ; άσπάσασθ( αυτήν, Jit.
X. 12 ; άφ(\5 αϋτον!, Mt. xxvi. 44 ; ην 8ιαν(ύων αύτοΐί, Lk.
1. 22 ; ουκ €ia αΰτα λαλ^ίι^. Lk. iv. 41 ; η σκοτία αυτό ου
κατ(\αβ(, Jn. i. 5. But see αυτού below. 2. Contrary
to Grk. usage, in the X. T. even in the Nominative it
is put for a simple personal pronoun of the third person,
where the Greeks say ούτος or ό δί, or use no pronoun at
all. This has been convincingly shown by B. 107 (93)
sqq. ; and yet some of the examples adduced by him are not
decisive, but either must be or can be referred to the usage
illustrated under I. 1 ; — those in which avras is used of
Christ, apparently to I. 1 b. But, in my opinion, the
question is settled even by the following: αϋτο!, Mt.
xiv. 2 ; Mk. xiv. 15 ; Lk. i. 22 ; xv. 14 ; so too in the Sept
(cf. Thiersch, De Pentat. vers. Alex. p. 98) ; Sir. xlix. 7;
Tob. vi. 11 ; αΰτοΙ, Mk. ii. 8 (ούτως αϋτο\ 8ια\ο•γίζονται in
Grsb.) ; Lk. ix. 36 ; xiv. 1 ; xxii. 23 ; αυτό, Lk. xi. 14
[Tr mrg. WH om., Tr txt. br.]. AVhether αΰτη and αϋταί
also are so used, is doubtful; cf. B. 109 (95). 3.
Sometimes in the oblique cases the pron. is omitted,
being evident from the context : Mk. vi. 5 (ΐπιθύς, sc.
aUToIr); Jn. iii. 34 (δι'δωσ», sc. αιίτω); Jn. x. 29 (δί'δωκί
μοι, sc. αυτούς) ; Acts xiii. 3 (άπίλυπαν, sc. αυτούς) ; Rev.
xviii. 21 (i/3aAfi',sc. αντόν), etc. 4. Not infre<iucntly
αυτός in the ol)lique cases is a d d e d to the verb, although
the case belonging to this very verb has preceded ; Mt.
viii. 1 (καταβάντι te αϋτω f L Tr WII gen. absol.] άπ6 του
όρους ηκοΧούβησαν αντω) ; Mt. iv. 16 ; v. 40 ; viii. 23, 28
[R G] ; ix. 28 ; xxv. 29 (άπΐ, [om. by L Τ Tr WII] toC μη
(χοντος • • . απ' αϋτοϋ) ; xxvi. 71 [RGLbr. Τ]; Mk. v. 2
[R G] ; ix. 28 [R G] ; Jn. .xv. 2 (παν κ\ημα . . . aipei αυτό) ;
Acts vii. 21 [RG]; Jas. iv. 17; Rev. ii. 7; vi. 4 [LTr
mrg. br.] ; cf. W. § 22, 4 a.; B. 142 (125). Doubtless
the writer, while writing the earlier words with the in-
tention of joining them to the leading verb to follow,
marked off these very words as a clause by themselves,
as if they formed a protasis ; and so, when he came to
the leading verb, he construed it just as though it were
to form an apodosis. 5. By a Hebraism αύτο'ί is used
redundantly in relative sentences : ης f\e το θυγάτριον
αϋτης, Mk. vii. 25 ; οΰ τω μωλωπι αύτοϋ, 1 Pet. ii. 24 (R G
Τ, but Tr mrg. br. αΰτοϋ) ; esp. in the Apocalypse : ην
οΰδί'ίς δύναται κλίΓσαι αϋτην. Rev. iii. 8 (ace. to the true
text) ; ο'ς (δόθη αΰτο'ις. Rev. vii. 2 ; add vs. 9; xiii. 12;
xvii. 9 ; far oftener in the Sept. ; rare in Grk. writ. [fr.
Callim. ep. 44] ; cf. Herm. ad \ig. p. 709 ; [B. § 143, 1] ; W.
§ 22, 4 b. Λνίκτο add to the exx. Ildian. 8, 6, 10 [5 Bckk.]
οΓί (πιφοιτωσι αύτοις τας \οιπάς πόλεις πύ\αι άνοίγνυντο.
But to this construction must not be referred Mt. iii. 1 2
ου TO πτύον iv ττ) χιιρ\ α ΐ τ ο Ο, nor 1 Pet. ii. 24 or τάϊ
αμαρτίας ημών αυτός άνηνί•γκ(ν. For in the latter pas-
sage αυτός is in contrast with us, who must otherwise
have paid the penalty of our sins ; and in the former the
sense is, ' he holds his winnowing-shovel in his hand.'
6. A^ery often αυτός is used rather 1 a χ 1 y, where the
subject or the object to which it must be referred is not
expressly indicated, but must be gathered especially
from some preceding name of a province or city, or from
the context : Mt. iv. 23 (π€ριηγ(ν την Γαλιλαίαν διδάσκων iv
τα'ις συναγωγα'ις αυτών, i. e. of the Galila;ans) ; Acts viii. 5
(2αμαρ(ίας (κήρυσσαν αΰτο'ις. i• e. Toif Σαμαρ(ΐταις) : X-\. 2
(αυτούς, i. e. the inhaViitants τών μιρών ίκ(ίνων ) ; 2 Co. ii.
13 (αίτοΊς. i. e. the Christians of Troas); ]Mt. xix. 2 (όχλοι
πολλοί κα\ (β(ράπ€υσ(ν αυτούς, i. e. their sick) ; 1 Pet. iii.
14 (φόβον αυτών, i. e. of tliose who may be able κακώσαι
you, vs. 13); Lk. x.xiii. 51 (τη βουλή αυτών, i. e. of those
with whom he had been a βουλιυτής) ; Heb. viii. 8 (aUToIt
[L Τ WII Tr mrs;. αΰτούί : sec μίμφομαι] i. e. toIs ΐχουσι
την διαθήκην την πρώτην) ; Lk. ii. 22 (το£ καθαρισμού αυτών.
87
άφαιρΐω
of the purification prescribed by the law of Moses to
women in child-bed); Jn. viii. 44 {ψ(ΰστη! iariv και 6
πατήρ αΐττοΰ, i. e. of the liar; cf. Baumg.-Crusius and
Meyer ad loc). By this rather careless use of the pro-
noun it came about that at length αυτοί alone might be
used for άνθρωποι : Mt. viii. 4 ; Mi. i. 44 ; Lk. v. 14, 17
[here Τ WH Tr mrg. αύτόκ] ; cf. W. § 22, 3 ; B. § 127, 8.
7. Sometimes, in relative sentences consisting of several
members, the second member is not joined to the first by
the relative Si, but by a loose connection proceeds with
καΐαίτόί; as, Lk.xvii. 31 ; Acts iii. 13 (όν νμίΊς παρ<δώκατ(
και ηρνήσασθι αυτόν [Ι> Τ λ\ II οπι. Tr br. αϋτόι/]) ; 1 Co.
viii. 6 {ϊξ ηΐ τα πάντα και ήμύς eif αίτόν, for κα\ (Is όν
ήμιΐί) ; 2 Pet. ϋ. 3. This is the usage likewise of Greek
as weU as of Hebrew ; cf. W. 149 (141); [B. 283 (243)];
Bnhdy. p. 304.
m. 6 αϊτός, ή αυτή, το αυτό, with the article, the same ;
1. without a noun : ό αυτός, immutable, Ileb. i. 12 ; .\iii.
8, (Thuc. 2, 61) ; το αϋτό. — ποιι'ιν. Mt. v. 46 [R G Τ
Wll txt., 47 L Τ Tr WH] : Lk. vi. 33 ; Uynv, to profess
the same opinion, 1 Co. i. 10; oKfiSiffii', not in the same
manner but reproached him with tlie same, cast on him
the same reproach, Mt. xxvii. 44, (ui/f iSiff iv τοιαϊττα. Soph.
Oed. Col. 1002). τί αυτά: Acts xv. 27 ; Ro. ii. 1 ; Eph.
vi. 9. fVl TO αυτό [Rec* passim fViroauro] (Hesych.
όμον, eVi τον αϋτόκ τόπον), to the same place, in the same
place : Mt. xxii. 34 ; Acts i. 15 ; ii. 1 ; 1 Co. xi. 20 ; xiv. 23,
(Ps. ii. 2 ; 2 S. ii. 13 ; 3 Mace. iii. 1 ; Sus. 14) ; together :
Lk. xvii. 35 ; Acts iii. 1 [L Τ Tr AVH pin it to ch.
ii. ; 1 Co. vii. 5]; κατά το αυτό, (Vulg. simul), together:
Acts xiv. 1 (for ΊΠ", Ex. xxvi. 24; 1 K. iu. 18; exx. fr.
Grk. writ, are given by Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 69 sqq.).
Like adj. of equality ό αυτός is foil, by the dat. : ii/ κα\
TO alToTji ί^νρημίντι, 1 Co. xi. 5, (Sap. xviii. 11 ; 4 Mace.
viii. 5 ; x". 2, 13, and often in Grk. writ., cf. W. 150 (141)).
2. AVith a noun added : Mt. xxvi. 44 ; Mk. xiv. 39 (τοι»
αύτοί' Xoyof) ; Lk. vi. 38 [R G L mrj.] (τώ αντω μίτρω) ;
Phil. i. 3υ ; 1 Co. i. 10 (eV τώ αίτώ ιό?) ; 1 Co. xii. 4 (το
he αυτό πν(ϋμα), etc. τα αϊτό (with the force of a subst.
the same kind) των παθημάτων, 1 Pet. v. 9. [Cf. τβίτά.]
οϋτον, prop, neuter genitive of the pron. airos. '" thai
place, there, here : Mt. xxvi. 36 ; [Lk. Lx. 27 (R L &8i)] ;
Acts XV. 34 (a spurious vs. [see WH. App. ad loc.]) ; xviii.
19 (LTr mrg. eftei) ; x.xi. 4 (Lchm. αΰτοΐς).*
αΰτοϋ, -ής, -οϋ, of himself , herself, itself, i. q. /αυτοί, q. v.
It is very common in the edd. of the N. T. by the Elzevirs,
Griesbach, Knapp, al. ; but Bengel, Matthaei, Lchm.,
Tdf., Trg. have everywhere substituted αΐτοΰ, αΰτω, etc.
for αίτοΟ, αΰτω, etc. " For I have observed that the
former are used almost constantly [not always then?
Grinwi] not only in uncial codd. of the viii. ix. and x.
cent., but also in many others (and not X. T. codd. alone).
That this is the correct mode of writing is proved also
by numerous examples where the pron. is joined to prep-
ositions ; for these last are often found written not (φ,
αφ, μ(θ, καθ, ανθ, etc., but ίττ, απ, μ(τ, κατ, αιτ." Tdf.
Proleg. ad Χ. Τ., ed. 2 p. x.xvi. [ed. S p. 126]; cf. his
Proleg. ad Sept., ed. 1 p. Ixx. [ed. 4 p. xxxiii. (not in
ed. 6)]. Bleek entertains the same opinion and sets it
forth at length ir "^is note on Heb. i. 3, vol. ii. 1 p.
67 sqq. The questiou ''ard to decide, not only be-
cause the breathings and acvjnts are wanting in the
oldest codd., but also because it often depends upon the
mere preference of the writer or speaker whether he
will speak in his own person, or ace. to the thought of
the person spoken of. Certainly in the large majority
of the passages in the X. T. αντοϋ is correctly restored;
but apparently we ought to write hi αυτοί (Rec. /αυτοί
[so L mrg. Τ WH]). Ro. xiv. 14 [L txt. Tr δι' αΙτ."] ; eU
αυτόν. Col. i. 20 [al. f is αύτ.] ; αυτός π(ρ\ αΰτοϋ [Τ Tr txt.
WHi'auToO], .Tn.ix.21. Cf. W. 151 (143): [B. Ill (97) sq.;
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c, and see esp. Hort in Westcott and
Hort's Grk. Test., App. p. 144 sq. ; these editors have in-
troduced the aspirated form into their text " nearly twen-
ty times" (e. g. Mt. vi. 34; Lk. xii. 17, 21 ; xxiii. 12; xxiv.
12: Jn.ii. 24 ; xiii. 32; xix. 17; xx. 10; Acts .xiv. 17; Ro.
i. 27 ; 2 Co. iii. 5 ; Eph. ii. 15 : Phil. iii. 21 : 1 Jn. v. 10 ;
Rev. viii. 6, etc.). Cf. Rutherford, Xew Phryn. p. 432].
αυτόφωροι, -ov, (αυτός and φώρ a thief, φωρά a theft),
[fr. Soph, down] ; prop, caught in the act of theft ; then
univ. caught in the act of perpetrating any other crime;
very often in the phrases ίπ' αυτοφώρω (as one word
(παυτοφώρω) τινά 'Καμβάνίΐν, J)ass. Χαμβάνίσθαι, καταλαμ-
βάνισθαι, άΧίσκίσθαι, (fr. Hdt. Ο, 72 on), the crime being
specified by a participle : μοιχ(υομίνη, Jn. viii. 4 [R G],
as in Ael. nat. an. 11, IS; Plut. mor. vi. p. 446 ed. Tauchn.
[x. p. 723 ed. Reiske, cf. Xicias 4, 5 ; Eumen. 2, 2] ; Sext.
Empir. adv. Rhet. 65 [p. 151 ed. Fabric.].*
αύτό-χ€ΐρ, -ρος, ό, (αυτός and χ(ίρ, cf. μακρόχ€ΐρ, άδικο•
χ(φ), doing a thing icilh one's own hand: Acts xxvii. 19.
(Often in the tragedians and Attic orators.) *
ανχεω ; (in pres. and impf. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
but rare in prose) ; prop, to lift up the neclc, hence to
boast : μι-γάΚα αίχύ, Jas. iii. 5 L Τ Tr WH for R G pf-
■γά\αυχ(Ί q. v.*
αυχμηρός, -ά, -όν, (σύχμ/ ω to be squalid), squalid, dirty,
(Xen., Plat., sqi].), and since dirty things are destitute of
brightness, dark: 2 Pet. i. 19, Aristot. de color. 3 to
Χαμπρόν ή στίλβοί' . . . η τουναντίον αίχμηρον και άλαμπ^ς.
(Hesych., Suidas, Pollux.) •
άψ-αιρ/ω, -ώ : fut. άφαιρήσω (Rev. xxii. 1 9 Rec. [fr.
Erasmus, apparently on no Ms. authority ; see Tdx.'s
note]), and άφ(\ω (ibid. G L Τ Tr WH ; on this rarer fut.
cf. Blim. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 100) : 2aor. άφίΐΧον; 1 fut. pass.
άφαιρ(θήσομαι : Mid., pres. αφαιρούμαι: 2 aor. άφ(ίλόμην•,
[see αίρί'ύ)] : in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; to take f mm,
take away, remove, carry off: τι. Lk. i. 25 ; to cut οβ', το
ώτίον, Mt. xxvi. 51 ; Mk. xiv. 47 [L Τ Tr WII τοώτάριον] ;
Lk. xxii. SO [to οΰϊ], (την κ(φά\ήν tiios, 1 Mace. vii. 47 ;
for n^3, 1 S. xvii. 51) ; to tak'^ away, τϊ από with gen.
of a thing. Rev. xxii. 19; τι από with gen. of pers. Lk.
X. 42 [T WH om. L Tr br. άπό], (Gen. xxxi. 31 ; Job
xxxvi. 7 ; Prov. iv. 16 [Alex.], etc.) ; mid. (prop, to
take away or bear off ft>r one's self), Lk. xvi. 3, (Lev.
iv. 10 ; Mic. ii. 8 : in Grk. writ, with a simple gen. for
από τίνος) : άφαιρ€ΐν τάς αμαρτίας to take away sins, of
αφανή•;
88
άφι'ημι
victims expiating them, Ilcb. χ. 4, (Jer. xi. 15 ; Sir. xlvii.
11) ; mid. of (iod i>iitting out of his sight, remembering
no more, tlie sins coininitted by men, i. e. granting par-
don for sins (see αμαρτία, 2 a.) : Uo. xi. 2i.'
άψανή;, -€s, (φ ύνω), not maiii/csl, liiddeii : Ileb. iv. 13.
(Often in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Ildt. down.) [C'f.
ίήλοί, and Schmidt cli. 130.]'
αφανίζω ; [Pass., pres. αφανίζομαι] ; 1 aor. ηφανίσθην ;
(αφανής) ; a. to snatch out oj'sl ///(/, to /ntt out of view, to
moke unseen, (Xen. an. 3, 4, 8 ηλιον νιφίλη παρακαλΰψασα
ήφάνισί se. ■nji' πάλιν, Plat. Phil. G6 a. άφανίζυιττα κρύ-
πτομ(ν). b. Ιο cause to vanish airai/, to destroij, consume :
Mt. vi. 19 sq. (often so in Grk. writ, and Sept. [cf. B.
§130, 5]); Pass, to perish: Acts xiii. 41 (Luth. vor
Schrecken veryehen) ; to vanish awui), Jas. iv. 14, (Ildt. 7,
6; 167; Plat, et S(i<i.). c. to deprive of lustre, render
unsi'ilith/; to disfii/ure : το πρόσωπον, Mt. vi. 16.*
άψανισ-μέΐ, -oC, ό, (αφανίζω, q. v.), disappearance ; de-
struction : Ileb. viii. 1 3. (Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Pint.,
Leian., al.; often in Sept., particularly for Π3!? and
no-Da)•
ά-ψαντοΐ, -OK, (fr. φαίνομαι), taken out of sight, made
invisible ■■ άφαντο! tyivfTo απ" αϋτων, he departed from
them suddenly and in a way unseen, he vanished, Lk.
xxiv. 31. (In poets fr. Horn, down ; later in prose writ,
also ; Diod. 4, (i.j ϊμπίσων tit το χάσμα . . ■ άφαντος eytveTO,
Plut. orac. def. c. 1. Sometimes angels, witlidrawing
suddenly from human view, are paidάφαl/eΐs -γίνισθαι:
2 Mace. ill. 34; Acta Thorn. §§27 and 43.)*
ά()κ8ρών, -ώνος, ό, apparently a word of Macedonian
origin, which Suidas calls 'barbarous'; the place into
which the aloine discharijes are voided; a privy, sink;
found only in Mt. xv. 17; Mk. vii. 19. It appears to
be derived not from αφ' ίδρων a podicibus, but from
άφίδροΓ, the same Macedon. word which in Lev. xii. 5;
XV. 1 9 scjq. answers to the I lebr. DTJ son/es menstruorum.
Cf. Fischer's full discussion of the word in his De vitiis
lexx. N. T. p. G98 sqq.»
άψ<ι8[α (άφίίδίΐα Lchm.,see s. V. ii,i),-af, ή, (the dispo-
sition of a man who is άφ(ίδή!, uns])aring), nnspariny
severity : with gen. of the object, toC σώματος. Col. ii. 23
(τών σωμάτων άφ(ΐ8(ΐν, Lys. 2, 25 (Ι!*3, 5) ; Diod. 13, 60;
79 etc. [see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c] ; in Plat, defin. p.
412 d. άφαδία means liberality}.*
άψ-(ΐεον, i. q. άπί'ιδον, q. v. Cf. B. 7 ; ^lullacn p. 22 ;
W. 45 (44) ; [Tilf. Proleg. p. 91 sq., Sept. ed. 4 Proleg.
p. xxxiii. ; Scrivener's ed. of cod. Cantab. Intr. p. xlvii.
(11) ; esp. IF//. App. p. 143 sq., Meisterhans § 20, and
Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ii. 23; Curtius p. 687 sq.].
άφ€λότη$, -i;tos, ή, (fr. άφ(\ήί without rock, smooth,
plain, and this fr. φίλλί i5t rocky land), simplicity, [A.V.
sinyleness'] : καρδίας. Acts ii. 46, (found only here [and in
eccl. writ.]. The Greeks used άφίΧιια).*
αφ-€λιτίζω, i. q. άτκΧπίζω, q. v. ; cf. άφΰδον.
a4>-co-t;, -(ως, ή, (άφίημι) ; 1. release, as from bond-
age, imprisonhient, etc.: Lk. iv. 18 (19), (Is. bci. 1 sq. ;
Polyb. 1, 79, 12, etc.). 2. άφ(σις άμαρηων forgiveness,
pardon, of sins (prop, the letting them go, as if they had
not been committed [see at length Trench § x.\xiii.])i
remission of their penalty: ΛΙΐ. xxvi. 28; Mk. i. 4; Lk.
i. 77; iii. 3; xxiv. 47 ; Acts ii. 38 ; v. 31 ; x. 43; xiii. 38;
.\.\vi. 18; Col. i. 14; των παρατττωμάτων, Eph. i. 7; and
simply άφισις: Mk. iii. 29; Ileb. ix. 22; x. 18, {φόνου,
Plat. Ic'.'g. 9 p. 869 d. ; iyκ\ημάτωv, Diod. 20, 44 [so
Dion. Hal. 1. 8 § 50, see also 7, 33; 7, 46; esp. 7, 64;
αμαρτημάτων, Philo, vit. Moys. iii. 17; al.]).*
αφή, -ης, ή, (άπτω to fasten together, to fit), (Vulg.
junclura [and nexus]), bond,connection,[A. Y. Joint (see
esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below)] : Eph. iv. 16 ; Col. ii.
19. (Plut. Anton, c. 27.)•
άφθαροτία, -at, ή, (άφθαρτος, cf. ακαθαρσία), (Tertull.
and subseq. writ, incorriiplibililas, Vulg. incorruplio [and
incorruptela]), incorruption, perpetuity: τοΰ κόσμου, Philo
de incorr. nuind. §11; it is ascribed to τό βύον in Plut.
Arist. c. 6 ; of the body of man exempt from decay after
the resurrection, 1 Co. xv. 42 (fV άφθ. sc. Sv), 50, 53 sq. ;
of a blessed immortality (Sap. ii. 23; vi. 19; 4 Mace,
xvii. 12), Ko. ii. 7 ; 2 Tim. i. 10. τικά ά-γαπάν i ν αφθαρ-
σία to love one with never diminishing love, Eph. vi.
24 [cf. Moy. ad loc. The word seems to have the mean-
ing purity, sincerity, incorruptness in Tit. ii. 7 Rec."].*
α-φθαρτο;. -ov, (φθ(ίρω), uncorrupled, not liable to cor-
ruption or ill cay, imperishable : of things, 1 Co. ix. 25 ;
1 Pet. i. 4, 23; iii. 4; [_άφθ. κήρυγμα τής αιωνίου σωτηρίας,
Mk. xvi. WII in (rejected) ' Shorter Conclusion ']. im-
mortal : of the risen dead, 1 Co. xv. 52; of God, Ro. i.
23 ; 1 Tim. i. 1 7. (Sap. xii. 1 ; xviii. 4. [Aristot.],
Phit., Leian., al. [Cf. Trench § Ixviii.])*
ά-φθορία, -as, ή, (άφθοριις uncorrupted, fr. φθ(ίρω), un-
corru/ttiiess : Tit. ii. 7 L Τ Tr WII ; see άδιαφθορία*
άφ-(ημ.ι ; pres. 2 pers. sing, άφιις (fr. the form άφίω.
Rev. ii. 20 for Rec. e'af), [3 pers. plur. άφιοϋσιν Rev. xi.
9 Tdf. edd.2, 7,fr. a form άφιίω ; cf. B. 48 (42)] ; impf. 3
pers. sing, ήφκ, with the augm. before the prep., Mk. i.
34; xi. 16, fr. the form άφίω; whence also pres. 1 pers.
plur. άφίομ(ν Lk. xi. 4 L Τ Tr WH for άφίιμιν Rec. and
3 pers. άφίουσιν Rev. xi. 9 L Τ Tr WH ; [see 117/. App.
p. 167]; fut. άφιίσω; 1 aor. άφτ)κα, 2 pers. sing. -«s Rev.
ii. 4 Τ Tr WH [cf. κοπιάω] ; 2 aor. irapv. άφις, άφίΤΓ , sul)j.
3 pers. sing, αφή, 2 pers. plur. άφητι, [inf. άφ(ϊναι (Mt.
xxiii. 23 L Τ Tr WH ; Lk. v. 21 L txt. Τ Tr Wll)],
ptcp. άφίίς, άφίντις; Pass., pres. άφίιμαι, [yet 3 pers.
plur. άφίονται .Τη. xx. 23 WH mrg. etc. ; cf. άφΙω above] ;
pf. 3 pers. plur. άφίωνται (a Doric form [cf. W. § 14, 3 a.;
Β 49 (42) ; Kuhner § 285, 4], Mt. Lx. 2, 5 ; Mk. ii. 5, [9]
— in both these Gospels L [exc. in Mk. mrg.] Τ Tr WH
have restored the pres. 3 pers. plur. αφί^νται ; Lk. v. 20,
23; vii. 47, [48]; Jn. xx. 23 L txt. Τ Tr t.xt. AVHtxt.;
1 Jn. ii. 12) ; 1 aor. άφίθην; fut. άφιθήσομαι ; cf. W. § 14,
3; B. 48 (42) ; [IK//. App. p. 167 ; Veitch s. v. ϊημι];
(fr. από and ΐημι); [fr. Horn, down] ; to send from (άπα)
one's self; 1. to send away ; a. to bid go away or
depart : τους όχλους, Mt. xiii. 36 [al. refer this to 3 be-
low] ; την γυναίκα, of a husband putting away his wife,
1 Co. vii. 11-13, (Hdt. 5, 39; and subst. άφισις, Plut.
Pomp. c. 42, 6). b. to send forth, yield up, emit: τΑ
αφίημι
89
άφομοιοω
τηιήμα, to expire, Mt. xxvii. 50 (την ψνχην, Gen. xxxv.
18; I Idt. 4, 1 90 and often in other Grk. writ, [see πνινμα,
2']),φ<ιΐνην lo utter a cri/ (emitlere t-ocem, Liv. 1, 58), Mk.
XV. 37 (Gen. .xlv. 2 and often in Grk. writ. ; [cf. Heinichen
on Euseb. h. e. 8, 14, 17]). c. lo lei go, lei alone, let be ;
a. lo disregard : Mt. xv. 14. β. lo leave, not lo discuss
noir, a topic, used of teachers, writers, speakers, etc. :
Heb. vi. 1, (Eur. Andr. 392; Theophr. char, praef. § 3;
for other examples fr. Grk. writ, see Bleek on Heb. vol.
ii. 2 p. 144 sq.), [al. take the word in Ileb. 1. c. as expres-
sive of the duty of the readers, rather than the purpose of
the writer; and consequently refer tlie passage to 3 be-
low], γ. lo omit, neglect : Mt. xxiii. 23, [Lk. xi. 42 R G] ;
Mk. vii. 8 ; Ro. i. 27. d. to let go, gice up, a debt, by not
demanding it (opp. to κρατύν, Jn. xx. 23), i. e. lo remit,
forgive : το Savfioi/, Mt. xviii. 27 ; την οφαλήν, Mt. xviii.
32 ; τα οφιί^ηματα, Mt. vi. 1 2 ; τα παραπτώματα, vi. 14 sq. ;
Mk. xi. 25 sq. [T Tr WH om. verse 26] ; tus αμαρτίας, τα
αμαρτήματα, τάί ανομία;, Mt. ix. 2, 5 sq. ; -xii. 31 ; Mk. ii. 5,
7 ; iii. 28 ; I>k. v. 20 sq. 23 ; Ro. iv. 7 (fr. Ps. xxxi. (xxxii.)
1); 1 .In. i. 9 ; Jas. v. 15, (Is. xxii. 14 ; xxxiii. 24, etc.) ;
T. inivotav της καρΒίας, Acts viii. 22, (την αΐτίαν, Hdt. ΰ,
30 ; τα χρία, Ael. v. h. 14. 24) ; absolutely, άφάναι τινί Ιο
forgive one: Mt. .xii. 32; xviii. 21, 35 ; Mk. iv. 12; Lk.
xi. 4 ; xii. 10 ; xvii. 3 sq. ; xxiii. 34 [L br. WH reject the
pass.], e. to give up, keep no longer : την πρώτην άγάττην,
Rev. ii. 4. 2. lo permit, allow, not to hinder ; a. foil, by
a pres. inf. [B. 258 (222)] : Mk. x. 14: Lk. xviii. 16 i^cTf
fp^faOai Ka\ μή κωλν€Τ€ αυτά, Mt. xiii. 30 ; Mk. i. 34 ; Jn.
xi. 44 ; xviii. 8. by the aor. inf. ; Mt. viii. 22 ; xxiii. 13
(14); Mk. V. 37; vii. 12, 27; Lk. viii. 51; ix. 60 ; xii. 39 ;
Rev. xi. 9. b. without an inf. : Mt. iii. 1 5 (ίΊφfς άρτι per-
mit it just now), with ace. of the pers. or tiling permitted :
Mt. iii. 15 ToTf άφίησιν αυτόν, Mk. v. 19 ; xi. 6 ; xiv. 6 ; Lk.
xiii. 8 ; Jn. xii. 7 R G ; xi. 48 ; Acts v. 38 (L Τ Tr WH ;
RG βασατί); Rev. ii. 20 (Rec. fof). c. άφίημι τινί τι, to
give up a thing lo one : Mt. v. 40 (άφα αυτω καΊ τό Ιμάτιον).
d. foil, by Ινα : Mk. xi. 16 ; Jn. xii. 7 L Τ Tr WH, a later
construction, cf. W. § 44, 8 ; B. 238 (205). e. foil, by
the simple hortative subjunc. : Mt. vii. 4 ; Lk. vi. 42
(άφί Γ (κβαΚω) \ Mt. xxvii. 49 : Mk. .xv. 36, (άφfτf Ίδωμιν) ;
Epict. diss. 1, 9, 15 Sφfs ^(ίξωμίν, 3, 12, 15 άφίί ΐδω.
Cf. Β. 209 (181) sq. ; ΛΥ. 285 (268). 3. to leave, go
away from one ; to depart from any one, a. in order to
go to another place : Mt. xxii. 22 ; xxvi. 44 ; Mk. viii. 13
(Mt. xvi. 4 καταλιπώκ); xii. 12; xiii. 34; Jn. iv. 3; xvi.
28. b. to depart from one whom one wishes to qiiit :
Mt. iv. 11 ; so of diseases departing, άφηκίν τίνα 6 Trvprros,
Mt. viii. 15 ; Mk. i. 31 ; Lk. iv. 39 ; Jn. iv. 52. c. to de-
part from one and leave him to himself, so that all mutual
claims are abandoned : τον πατίρα, Mt. iv. 22 ; Jlk. i. 20 ;
Mt. xviii. 12 (Lk. xv. 4 χαταλίίττίΐ). Thus also άφιίναι
τα eavroi to leave possessions, home, etc. : Mt. iv. 20 ;
xix. 27, 29 ; Mk. i. 18 ; x. 28 sq. ; Lk. v. 1 1 ; xviii. 28 sq.
d. to desert one (wrongfully) : Mt. xxvi. 56 ; Jlk. xiv.
^0 ; Jn. X. 12. β. to go away leaving something behind :
Mt. v. 24 ; Jn. iv. 28. f. to leave one by not taking him
as a companion : opp. to παράΧαμβάνίΐν, Mt. xxiv. 40 sq. ;
Lk. xvii. 34 sq. g. to leave on dj-ing, leave behind one :
TfKva, γυναίκα, Mt. xxii. 25 ; Mk. .xii. 20, 22, (Lk. xx. 31
καταλίίπω). h. to leave so that what is left may re-
main, leave remaining: oi μη άφ(θή Zi&€ λίθος fVi λίθορ
[or \ίθω], Mt. .\.\iv. 2; Mk. xiii. 2 ; Lk. xxi. 6. i. άφωνοι
foil, by the ace. of a noun or pron. with an ace. of the
predicate [B. § 144, 18]: Lk. x. 30 (ήμιθανη); Jn. xiv.
18 (Ttva όρφανόν) ; Mt. xxiii. 38 ; Lk. xiii. 35, (but Lchm.
om. ίρημος in both pass., WH txt. om. in Mt., G Τ Tr
WH om. in Luke ; that being omitted, άφι^ναι means to
abandon, to leave destitute of God's help); Acts xi- . ' 7
(άμάρτνρον ίαντάν [L Τ Tr αυτόν (WH αΰτ. q. v.)]).
άψ-ικν(Όμαι, -οϋμαι : 2 aor. άφικύμην ; ( ίκνίομαι to come) ;
very often in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; lo come from
(από) a place (but often the prep, has almost lost its
force) ; to come to, arrive at ; in the N. T. once, tropically :
Ro. xvi. 19 (υμών υπακοή etf πάντας άφΊκΐτο your obedi-
ence has reached the ears of [A. V. is come abroad unlo^
all men ; Sir. xlvii. 16 eis νήσους άφίκ€το το ονομά σον.
Joseph, antt. 19, 1, 16 eh το θίατρον ■ . ■ ύφίκ(το ό λόγος).*
ά-ψιλ-άΎαθος, -ον, (α priv. and φιΧάγαθος), ojiposed Ιο
goodness and good men, [R. V. no lover of good^ ; found
only in 2 Tim. iii. 3.*
ά-ψιλ-άργυρο$, -ov, (a priv. and φιλάργυρος), not loving
money, not avaricious ; only in the N. T., twice viz. 1
Tim. iii. 3 ; Heb. xiii. 5. [Cf. Trench § xxiv.] •
άφ-ιξιβ, -foir, ή, (άφικνίημαι), in Grk. Λvrit. generally
arrival ; more rarely departure, as Hdt. 9, 17; Dem.
1463, 7; [1484, 8] ; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 47; 3 Mace. vii.
18; and so in Acts xx. 29.•
αφ-ίστημς ; 1 aor. άπίστησα; 2 aor. άπίστην: Mid.,
pres. άφίσταμαι, impv. άφίστασο (1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec. ; cf.
W. § 14, 1 e.) ; [impf. άφιστάμηνΐ; fut. άποστήσομαι;
1. transitively, in pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. active, to
make stand off, cause to withdraw, to remove; trop. lo
excite to revolt : Acts v. 37 (άπέστησ^ λαόν . . . οπίσω αντον
drew away after him ; Tica άπα τίνος. Deut. vii. 4, and in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 1, 76 down). 2. intransitively,
in pf., plpf., 2 aor. active, lo stand off, stand aloof, in
various senses [as in Grk. writ.] ace. to the context : από
with gen. of pers. lo go away, depart, from any one, Lk.
xiii. 27 (fr. Ps. vi. 9 ; cf. Jit. vii. 23 ά7Γο;^ωρίίτί άπ' €μοϋ) ;
Acts xii. 10 ; xLx. 9 ; lo desert, withdraw from, one. Acts
XV. 38 ; lo cease to vex one, Lk. iv. 13 ; Acts v. 38 ; xxii.
29 ; 2 Co. xii. 8 ; to fall away, become faithless, άπο β(οϋ,
Heb. iii. 12 ; to shun, flee from, άπο τής άίικίας. 2 Tim.
ii. 19. Mid. /ο withdraw one's self from: absol. lo fall
away, Lk. viii. 13 : \της πίστιως, 1 Tim. iv. 1, cf. W. 427,
428 (398)] ; lo keep one's self away from, absent one's
self from, Lk. ii. 37 (ουκ άφίστατο άπο [Τ Tr ΛΥΗ om.
από] ToC Upov, she was in the temple every day) ; from
any one's society or fellowship. 1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec*
άψνω, adv., (akin to αίφνης, see in αιφνίδιος above), sud-
denly : Acts ii. 2 ; xvi. 26 ; x.xviii. 6. (Sept. ; [Aeschyl.],
Time, and subseq. writ.) *
άφόβ««, adv., (φόβος), without fear, boldly: Lk. i. 74 ;
Phil.i. 14; 1 Co. xvi. 10; Jude 12. [From Xen. down.] '
άφ-ομοιί», -i> : [pf. pass. ptcp. άφωμοιωμϊνος (on augm.
αφοράω
90
αχΚύς
see IF//. Αρρ. p. 161)]; to cause a model to pass off
(από) into an image or shape like it, — to express itself in
it, (cf. άπ€ΐκάζ(ΐΐ', avfiKoviCfiv, άποπ\άσσ<ίν, άπομιμύσθαι);
to copy; to produce a J'ac-siiuik ; τά κάΚίκ'ώη, of painters,
Xen. mem. 3, 10, 2; often in Plato. Pass, to be made
like, rendered similar: so Heb. vii. 3. (Ep. Jer. 4 (5),
62 (G3), 70 (71) ; and in Plato.) •
άφ-οράω, -ω ; to turn the ei/es away from other things
and fix them on something; cf. άποβ\€πω. trop. to turn
one's mind to : e'is rtva, Heb. xii. 2 [W. § 6G, 2 d.], (els
θ(όν, 4 Maeo. xvii. 10 ; for ex.x. fr. Grk. writ. cf. Bleek
on Heb. vol. ii. 2 p. 8fi"2). Further, cf. aTre'iSov."
άψ-ορίζω; impf. άφώρι^οι/ ; Attic (ut. άφοριω Mt. xxv. 32
(T Wll αφορίσω) : xiii. 49, [W. § 13, 1 c. ; B. 37 (32)] ;
1 aor. άφώρισα ; Pass., pf. ptcp. άφωρισμίνος \ 1 aor.
impv. άφορίσθητί ; (ορίζω to make a Spot or boundary) ;
to mark off' from (ajro) others by boundaries, to limit, to
separate : ίαυτόν, from others, Gal. ii. 12; rois μαβητάί,
from those unwilling to obey the gospel. Acts .\ix. 9 ; ex
μ(σον ηνων, Mt. xiii. 49; άπύ nvos, -X.xv. 32. Pass, in a
reflex, sense : 2 Co. vi. 1 7. absol. : in a bad sense,
to exclude as disreputable, Lk. vi. 22 ; in a good sense, τίνα
(Is n, to appoint, set apart, one for some purpose (to do
something), Acts xiii. 2 ; Ro. i. 1 ; τινά foil, by a teUc
inf.. Gal. i. 1.5 [(?) seetheComm. adloc.]. ([Soph.], Eur.,
Plat., Isocr., Dem., Polyb., al. ; very often in Sept. esp. for
ν•13Π, η'^Π, D"in, -\JD, etc.) •
άψ-ορμή, -ης, ή, (από and ορμή q. v.) ; 1. prop, a
place from ichich a movement or attack is made, a base
of operations : Thuc. 1, 90 {τήν ΐΙΐΚοπόννησον ττασιν άνα-
\ωρησίν τ€ και άφορμήν Ίκανην eiviii) ; Polyb. 1,41,6. 2.
metaph. that by ichich endeavor is excited and from ichich
it goes forth ; that which gives occasion and supplies matter
for an undertaking, the incentive ; the resources we avail
ourselves of in attempting or performing anything: Xen.
mem. 3, 12, 4 (τοί? (αιτών παισί καλΧΙους άφορμάί (is τον
βίον καταλίΐτιονσι), and often in Grk. writ. ; λαμβάν€ΐν, to
take occasion, find an incentive, Ro. vii. 8, 11 ; SiSovai, 2
Co. V. 12 ; 1 Tim. v. 14, (3 Maec. iii. 2 ; both phrases often
also in Grk. writ.) ; 2Co.xi.l2; Gal.v.l3. Onthemean-
ings of this word see Viger. ed. //cnn. p. 81 sq. ; Phryn.
ed. Loh. p. 223 sq. ; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 304]. *
αφρίζω ; (αφρός) ; to foam : Mk. ix. 18, 20. (Soph. El.
719; Diod. 3, 10; Athen. 11, 43 p. 472 a.; [al.].)
[C'OMP. : ('π-αφρίζω.]*
άφρόϊ, -ϋΟ, ό, foam: Lk. ix. 39. (Hom. II. 20, 168:
[=Ί;]•) * _
άφρασ-ννη. -ης, ή, (άφρων), foolisJiness, folly, senseless-
ness : 2 Co. xi. 1, 1 7, 21 ; thoughtlessness, recklessness, Mk.
vii. 22. [From Horn, down.]*
άφρων, -ovor, 0, 17, -ov, to, (fr. a priv. and φρήν, cf. ev-
φρων. σώφρων), [fr. Hom. down], prop, without reason
([ίΐδωλα, Xen. mem. 1, 4, 4] ; of beasts, ibid. 1, 4, 14),
senseless, foolUh, stupid ; without reflection or intelligence,
acting rashly : Lk. xi. 40 ; xii. 20 ; Ro. ii. 20 ; 1 Co. xv.
36 ; 2 Co. xi. 16, 19 (opp. to φρόνιμος, as in Prov. xi. 29) ;
2 Co. xii. 6,11; Eph. v. 1 7 (opp. to σννιίντις) ; 1 Pet.
ii. 15. [A strong term; cf. Schmidt ch. 147 § 17.]*
άφ-νττνόω, -ώ : 1 aor. άφύπνωσα ; (ύττνόω to put to sleep,
to sleep) ; a. to awaken from sleep (Antliol. Pal. 9, 517,
5). b. to fall asleep, to fall off to sleep : Lk. viii. 23 ;
for this the ancient Greeks used καθυπνόω; see Lobeck
ad Phryn. p. 224. [Herm. vis. 1,1.]*
<ίφ-«<ΓΤ€ρί'ω, -ω : (a later Grk. word) ; 1. to be be-
hindhand, come too late (από so as to be far from, or to
fail, a person or thing) ; used of persons not present at
the right time : Polyb. 22, 5, 2 ; Posidon. ap. Athen. 4,
37 (i. e. 4 p. 151 e.) ; [al.]; άποάγαβήςήμίρας io ia\\ (to
make use of) a good day, to let the opportunity pass by.
Sir. xiv. 14. 2. transitively, to cause to fait, to wilh-
dra'c, take away from, defraud: τό μάννα σου ούκ άφυστί-
ρησας άπο στόματος αυτών, Nell. ix. 20 (for^'JO to with-
hold) ; pf. pass. [jtcp. άφνστ^ρημίνος (μισθός), Jas. v. 4
Ϊ Tr λ\ΓΙ after SB', [Rec. άπ(στ(ρημίνος, see άποστ(-
ρίω, also s. v. από, Π. 2 d. bb., p. όΟ"•].*
άφωνος, -ov, (φωνή), voiceless, dumb ; without the faculty
of speech ; used of idols, 1 Co. xii. 2 (cf. Ps. cxv. 5 (cxiii.
13) ; Hab. ii. 18) ; of beasts, 2 Pet. ii. 16. 1 Co. xiv. 10
τοσαΰτα "^ίνη φωνών και ovhev αντών [L Τ Tr AVII om.
αύτ.'] άφωνον, i. e. there is no language destitute of the
power of language, [R. Λ'. txt. tio kind (of voice) i's with-
out signification'], (cf. the phrases βίος αβίωτος a life un-
worthy of the name of life, χάρις άχαρις), used of one
that is patiently silent or dumb : αμνός. Acts viii. 32 fr.
Is. liii. 7. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theog.], Pind., Aeschyl.
down.)*
"Αχαξ [WH Άχας], 6, (so Sept. for ΙΠΚ possessing, pos-
sessor; in Joseph. Άχάζης, -ου, ό), Ahaz, king of Judah,
[fr. c. B. c. 741 to c. B. c. 725 ; cf. B. D. s. v. Israel, king-
dom of], (2 K. xvi. 1 s(jq. ; 2 Chr. xxviii. 16 sqq. ; Is. vii. 1
sqq.) : Mt. i. 9.'
ΆχοΙα [WH ΆχαΙα (see I, 1)], -as, ή, Achaia; 1.
in a restricted sense, the maritime region of northern
Peloponnesus. 2. in a broader sense, fr. b. c. 146
on [yet see Diet, of Geog. s. v.], a Roman province em-
bracing all Greece except Thessaly. So in the N. T. :
Acts xviii. 12, 27 ; xix. 21 ; Ro. xv. 26 ; xvi. 5 Rec. ; 1
Co. xvi. 15; 2 Co.i. 1; Lx. 2 ; xi. 10; 1 Th. i. 7 sq. [B. D.
.s. v.] •
Αχαϊκό», -oC, ό, Achaicus, the name of a Christian of
Corinth : 1 Co. xvi. 1 7.•
άχάρισ-ΓΟϊ, -ov, (χαρίζομαι), ungracious ; a. unpleasing
(Hom. Od. 8, 236 ; 20, 392; Xen. oec. 7, 37 ; al.). b.
unthankful (so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 1, 90 down) : Lk.
vi. 35 ; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Sir. xxix. 1 7 ; Sap. xvi. 29.) *
["Axas, Mt. i. 9 WH ; see'Axaf.]
Άχ6£μ, ό, Achim, prop, name of one of the ancestors
of Christ, not mentioned in the O. T. : Mt. i. 14.*
ά-χ£ΐρο-ΐΓοίητο5, -ov, (χιιροποίητος, q. v.), not made with
hands : Mk. .xiv. 58 ; 2 Co. v. 1 ; Col. ii. 1 1 [where cf. Bp.
Lghtft.]. (Found neither in prof. auth. nor in the Sept.
[W. §34. 3].)*
[Άχελδαμόχ : Acts i. 19 Τ Tr for R G Άκ(\8αμά q. v.]
άχλύϊ, -ίος, ή, a mist, dimness, (Lat. caligo), esp. over
the eyes, (a poetic word, often in Hom. ; then in Hesiod,
Aeschyl. ; in prose writ. fr. [Aristot. meteor. 2, 8 p. 367',
axpeiot
91
άψνχ^ο<;
η etc. and] Polyb. 34, 11, 15 on; [of a cataract, Dios-
cor. Cf. Trench § c.]) : Acts xiii. 1 1 . (Joseph, antt. 9,
4, 3 raff των πολίμίωυ ολ/^€ι? άμαυρώσαί τον 6f6v παϋίκάλ€ί
άχλυν αυταΐς (πιβαλόντα. Metaph. of the minil, Clem.
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, li άχ\ύο! γίμιιν.) *
d-Xpcios, -ov, (xpdus useful), useless, good for nouting:
;Mt. .XXV. 30 (SoCXot, cf. Plat. Ale. i. 17 p. 122 b. των
οΐκίτών τον άχρ€ΐότατον) ; by an hyperbole of pious mod-
esty in Lk. -wii. 10 'the servant' calls himself άχρ(Ίον,
because, although he has done all, yet he has done noth-
ing except what he ο u g h t to have done ; accordingly
he possesses no m e r i t, and could only claim to be called
'projilahle,' should he do more than what he is bound to
do; cf. Bengel ad loc. (Often in firk. writ. fr. Horn,
down ; Xen. mem. 1, 2, 54 άχρΰον κα\ άνωφιλί!. Sept.
2 S. vi. 22 equiv. to Ssu low, base.) [Syn. cf. Tittmann
ii. p. 11 sq. ; Ellic. on Philem. 11.]*
άχρ€ΐόω, -ώ : 1 aor. pass, ηχρ^ιωθην : (^άχρΐΐος, q. v.) ; to
make useless, render unserviceable : of character, Ro. iii.
12 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3), where L mrg. Τ Tr WH read
ηχριώθησαν fr. the rarer 3χρ€ος i. q. άχριΊος. (Several
times prop, in Polyb.) *
ί-χρη<ΓΤ05, -ov, {χρηστός, and this fr. χράομαι), uselesn,
unproftable : Philem. 11 (here opp. to ei;(p7)aTor). (In
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. [i. e. Batrach. 70 ; Theogn.] down.)
[Sym. cf. Tittmann ii. 1 1 sq. ; Trench § c. 17; EUic. on
Philem. 11.]*
άχρι and αχριβ (the latter of which in the ϊί. Τ. is
nowhere placed before a consonant, but the former be-
fore both vowels and consonants, although euphony is
so far regarded that we almost constantly find άχρι ης
ήμίρας, ΰχρις ου, cf. Β. 10 (9) ; [W. 42] ; and άχρι ου is
not used except in Acts vii. 18 and Rev. ii. 2.0 by L Τ
Tr WII and Lk. xxi. 24 by Τ Tr WH ; [to these in-
stances must now be added 1 Co. xi. 26 Τ WH ; xv. 25
Τ WH ; Ro. xi. 25 WH (see their App. p. 148) ; on the
usage in secular authors (' where -pt is the only Attic
form, but in later auth. the Epic -pis prevailed ', L. and
5. s. v.) cf. Loheck, Pathol. Elementa, vol. ii. p. 210 sq. ;
Rutherford, New Phrjn. p. 64 ; further, Klolz ad Devar.
vol. ii. 1 p. 230 sq.]); a particle indicating the terminus
ad quem. (On its use in the Grk. writ. cf. Klotz u. s. p.
224 sqq.) It has the force now of a prep, now of a
conj., even to ; until, to the lime that ; (on its derivation
see below). 1. as a Preposition it takes the gen.
[cf. W. § 54, 6], and is used a. of Place: Acts xi. 5 ;
xiii. 6 ; xx. 4 [T Tr mrg. WH om., Tr txt. br.] ; xxviii.
15 ; 2 Co. X. 13 sq. ; Heb. iv. 12 (see μερισμός, 2) ; Rev.
xiv. 20; xviii. 5. b. of Time: άχρι καιροϋ, until a sea-
son that seemed to him opportune, Lk. iv. 13 [but cf.
καιρός, 2 a.] ; until a certain time, for a season. Acts
xiii. 1 1 ; [πχρι (vel μίχρι, q• v. la.) toC θ(ρισμοϋ, Mt. .xiii.
SO WH mrg. cf. ΐως, II. δ] : άχρι ης ήμίρας until the day
that etc. Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. i. 20: xvii. 27; Acts i. 2;
[άχρι (Rec. et al. ίως) της ήμίρας ης, -\cts i. 22 Tdf.] ;
ίχρι ταύτης της ήμίρας and άχρι της ήμΐρας ταύτης. Acts
ii. 29 ; xxiii. 1 ; xxvi. 22 ; άχρι [-ρις R G] ήμιρών wiWe
even to the space of five days, i. e. after [A. V. in] five
days, Acts xx. 6 ; άχρις [-pi Τ Tr \VH] aiyijs, .\cts xx. 1 1 ;
ivoi ToC viv, Ro. viii. 22; Phil. i. 5; άχρι Te'Aout. Heb.
vi. 11 ; Rev. ii. 26 ; see besides. Acts iii. 21 ; [xxii. 22] ;
Ro. i. 13 ; V. 13 ; 1 Co. iv. 11; 2 Co. iii. 14 ; Gal iv. 2 ;
Phil. i. 6 [-pt L Τ WH]. c. of Manner and Degree:
άχρι θανάτου. Acts xxii. 4 (even to delivering unto
death) ; Rev. ii. 1 (to the enduring of death itself) ; Rev.
xii. 11 ; and, in the opinion of many interpreters, Heb.
iv. 12 [see μερισμός, 2]. d. joined to the rel. ου (άχρις
oS for άχρι τούτου, ω) it has the force of aconjunc-
tion, until, to the time that : foil, by the indie, pret., of
tilings that actually occurred and up to the beginning of
which something continued. Acts vii. 18 {άχρις ου
άνοστη βασιλίύς) ; xxvii. 33. foil, by a subj. aor. having
the force of a fut. pf., Lk. xxi. 24 L Τ Tr WH ; Ro. xi.
25 ; 1 Co. xi. 26 [Rec. άχρις ου άν'] ; Gal. iii. 1 9 [not
WH t.xt. (see 2 below)]; iv. 19 [T Tr WH μίχρις^;
Rev. vii. 3 Rec.**^ G ; άχρις ου άν until, whenever it may
be [cf. W. § 42, 5 b.], 1 Co. xv. 25 [Rec] ; Rev. ii. 25.
with indie, pres. as long as : Heb. iii. 13 ; cf. Bleek ad loc.
and B. 231 (199). 2. άχρις whhout ου has the force
of a simple Conjunction, until, to the time that:
foil, by subj. aor., Lk. xxi. 24 R G; Rev. vii. 3 L Τ Tr
WH ; xv. 8 ; [xvii. 1 7 Rec] ; xx. 3, [5 '^ L Τ Tr WH] ;
with indie, fut., Rev. xvii. 17 [L Τ Tr WH] ; [a;(pit άν
foil, by subj. aor.. Gal. iii. 19 WH txt. (see 1 d. above)].
Since άχρι is akin to άκή and άκρος [but cf. Vanicek p.
22; Curtius § 166], and μίχρι to μήκος, μακρός, by the
use of the former particle the reach to which a thing is
said to extend is likened to a height, by the use of
μίχρι, to a length; άχρι, indicating ascent, signifies up
to; μίχρι, indicating e.xtent, is unto, as far as ; cf. Klotz
u. s. p. 225 sq. But this primitive distinction is often
disregarded, and each particle used of the same thing;
cf. άχρι τίλους, Heb. vi. 11; μίχρι reXour, ibid. iii. 6, 14 ;
Xen. sym p. 4, 37 ττ^ρί^στΊ μοι και (σθΊοντι άχρι τοΰ μη
ττΐΐνην άφικίσθαι και ηίνοντι μίχρι τοΰ μη δί^/^μ. Cf. Fritz-
sche on Ro. v. 13, vol. i. p. 308 sqq. ; [Ellic. on 2 Tim.
ii. 9. Άχρι occurs 20 times in the writings of Luke ; else-
where in the four Gospels only in Mt. .xxiv. 38.].*
άχυρον, -ου, τό, a stalk of grain from which the kernel!
have been beaten out j straiv broken up by a threshing
machine, chaff: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17. (In Grk. writ,
fr. Hdt. 4, 72 ; Xen. oec. 18. 1, 2, 6 down ; mostly in plur.
τα άχυρα; in Job xxi. 18 Sept. also of the chaff wont to
be driven away by the wind.) *
ά-ψ£υ8ήΐ, -er, (i/ceC8of), without lie, truthful : Tit. i. 2.
(In Grk. writ. fr. Hes. theog. 233 down.) •
άφινθοΐ. -ου, η, wormwood. Absinthe: Rev. viii. 11; ό
ήψικίοΕ ibid, is given as a prop, name to the star which
fell into the waters and made them bitter.'
άφυχο9, -ov. (ψυχή), without a soul, lifeless : 1 Co. xiv. 7.
(In Grk. writ, from [Archil., Simon, and] Aeschylus
down.) •
92
Β
Βαα\
Βαάλ [so accented also by Pape (Eigenn. s. v.), Kue-
nen and Cobct (Ro. as below) ; but L Τ (yet the name
of the mon tli, 1 K. vi. 5 (38), Βαάλ) Tr \VH etc. Βάαλ ;
so Etym. Magn. 194, 19; Suid. 174G a. etc. Dind. in
Stcph. Thesaur. s. v. Βάαλ or Βαάλ], ό, ή, an indecl. noun
(Ilebr. '7;•3, Chald. "73 contr. fr. ^i'2), lor,/: Ro. xi. 4.
Tills was the name of the supreme heavenly divinity
worshipped by the Sheniitic nations (the Phtcniciaus,
Canaanites, liabylouians, Assyrians), often also by the
Israelites themselves, and represented by the Sun: tj
Βαάλ, Ro. xi. 4. Cf. Win. RWB. [and BB.DD.] s. v.
and J. G. Mailer in Herzog i. p. «37 sqcj. ; Merx in Schen-
kel i. 322 sqq.; Schlollmann in Riehm p. 126 sq. Since
In this form the supreme power of nature generating
all things, and conseipiently a male deity, was wor-
shipped, with which the female deity Astarte Avas as-
sociated, it is hard to explain ivhy the Sept. in some
places say ό Βαί^"» (Num. xxii. 41 ; Judg. ii. 13; 1 K. xvi.
31 ; xi.x. 18, etc.), in others ή Βαύλ (llos. ii. 8 ; 1 S. vii.
4, etc. [yet see Dillmann, as below, p. CI 7]). Among
the various conjectures on this subject the easiest is
this: that the Sept. called the deity ή Βαάλ in derision,
as weak and ini po ten t, just as the Arabs call idols
goddesses and the Rabbins niil'7X ; so Gfsenius in
Rosenmiiller's Repert. i. p. 139 and Tholuck on Ro. I.e.;
[yet cf. Dillmann, as below, p. 602 ; for other opinions
and reff. see Meyer ad loc. ; cf. W. § 27, 6 N. 1. But
Prof. Dillmann shows (in the Monatsbericht d. Akad. zu
Berlin, 16 Juni 1881, p. 601 sqq.), that the Jews (just
as they abstained from pronouncing the word Jehovah)
avoided uttering the abhorred name of Baal (Ex. xxiii.
13). As a substitute in Aramaic they read nii'D, X/m
or Χ"Ι3Π3, and in Greek αίσχϋνη (cf. 1 K. xviii. 19, 25).
This substitute in Grk. was suggested by the use of
the fem. article. Hence we find in the Sept. ή Β. every-
where in the prophetic bks. Jer., Zeph., Hos., etc., while
in the Pentateuch it does not prevail, nor even in Judges,
Sam., Kings, (exc. 1 S. vii. 4 ; 2 K. xxi. 3). It disap-
pears, too, (when the worship of Baal had died out) in
the later versions of Aq., Sym., etc. The apostle's use in
Ro. 1. c. accords with the sacred custom ; cf. the substi-
tution of the Ilebr. ΠΕ/3 in Ish-bosheth, Mephi-bosheth,
etc. 2 S. ii. 8, 10 ; iv. 4 with 1 Chr. viii. 33, 34, also 2 S.
xi. 21 with Judg. vi. 32; etc.]*
Βαβυλών, -ώνοΓ, ή, (Hebr. S33 fr. SSa to confound, ace.
to Gen. xi. 9 ; cf. Aeschyl. Pers. .52 ^αβυλων δ" ή τιοΚύ-
χρυσο! πάμμικτον όχΚον ■πίμττίΐ σνρ8ην. But more cor-
rectly, as it seems, fr. Ss 3X3 the gate i. e. the court or
city of Belus [Assyr. Bab-H the Gate of God; (perh. of
n, the supreme God) ; cf. Schroder, Keilinschr. u. d.
βαθύνω
Alt. Test. 2te Aufl. p. 127 sq. ; Oppert in the Zeitsch. d.
Deutsch. Morg. (xesellschaft, viii. p. S Jo]), Buliijlon,
formerly a very celebrated and large cit;•, the residence
of the Babylonian kings, situated on both banks of the
Euphrates. Cyrus had formerly captured it, but Darius
llystaspis threw down its gales and walls, and Xerxes
destroyed [?J the temple of Belus. At length the city
was reduced almost to a solitude, the popidation hav-
ing been drawn off by the neighboring Seleucia, built
on the Tigris by Seleueus Nicanor. [Cf. Prof. Rawlin-
son in B. D. s. v. and his Herodotus, vol. i. Essays vi.
and viii., vol. ii. Essay iv.J The name is used in tUu
N. T. 1. of the city itself: Acts vii. 43; 1 Pet.
V. 13 (where some have understood Babylon, a small
town in Egypt, to be referred to ; but in opposition cf.
Maijerliaff, Einl. in die petrin. Schriften, p. 121! sqq.;
[cf. 3 fin. below]). 2. of the territory. Babylonia:
Mt. i. 11 sq. 17; [often so in Grk. writ.]. 3. alle-
goricallv, of Rome as the most corrupt seat of idolatry
and the enemy of Christianity : Rev. xiv. 8 [here Rec."''
Βα/ίουλών] ; xvi. 19; xvii. 5; xviii. 2, 10, 21, (in the
opiniim of some 1 Pet. v. 13 also; [cf. 1 fin. above]).*
βαθ('ως, adv., deeply : ορθρην βαθίωι sc. Svtos (cf. Bnhdy.
p. 338), deep in the morning, at early dawn, Lk. xxiv. 1
L Τ Tr WH ; so Meyer ad loc. But βαθίωί here is more
correctly taken as the Attic form of the gen. fr. βαθύς,
q. v.; cf. B. 2G (23); [Loh. Phryn. p. 247].•
βαθμός, -ov, 6, (fr. obsol. βάω i. (j. βαίνω, like σταθμός
[fr. 1-στη-μι]), threshold, uteji ; of a grade of dignit)• and
wholesome influence in the church, [R. V. slandiny'], 1
Tim. iii. 13 [cf. Ellic. ad loc.]. (Used by [Sept. 1 S. v.
5 ; 2 K. XX. 9 ; also Sir. vi. 36] ; Strabo, [Plut.], Leian.,
Appian, Artemid., [al.] ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 324.) *
βάθος, -eot (-ουί), τό, (connected with the obsol. verb
βάζω, βάω [but cf. Curtius § 635; Vanit'ek p. 195]; cf.
βαθύς, βάσσων, and ό βυθός, ό βυσσός ; Germ. Boden),
depth, heifjht, — [ace. as measured down or up] ; 1.
prop. : Mt. xiii. 5 ; Mk. iv. 5 ; Ro. viii. 39 (opp. to ΰψωμα) ;
Eph. iii. 18 (opp. to v^os) ; of ' the deep ' sea (the ' high
seas '), Lk. v. 4. 2. metaph. : ή κατά βάθους πτωχίία
αυτών, deep, extreme, poverty, 2 Co. viii. 2 ; τα βάθη τοΰ
θ(οϋ the deep things of God, things hidden and above
man's scrutiny, esp. the divine counsels, 1 Co. ii. 10 (τοΰ
Σατακά. Rev. ii. 24 Rec. ; καρδίας ανθρώπου, .Tudith viii.
14; Ιταβ.τήςθ(ίας•/νώσ(ως,01βτη. Rom. 1 Cor. 40,1 (cf.
Lfhtft. ad loc.)]) ; inexhaustible abundance, immense
amount, πλούτου, Ro. xi. 33 (so also Soph. Aj. 130 ; βαθίις
πλοΟτοΓ, Ael. v. h. 3, 18; κακών, [Aeschyl. Pers. 465,
712]; Eur. Hel. 303; Sept. Prov. xviii. 3).*
βαβνν» : [impf. ίβάθυνον'] ; (βαΰΰς) ; to make deep : Lk.
βαθύς
93
βάΧΚω
vi. 48, where ίσκαψι και (βάθνν^ is not used for βαθίω^
ίσκαψ(, but ΐβάθννί expresses the continuation of tlie
work, [he dug and deepened i. e. went deep] ; cf . W. § 54,
5. (In Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) *
βαθύ;, -fi I, -ύ, [cf. βάθοί], deep ; prop. : Jn. iv. 11.
metaph. : invos, a deep sleep. Acts xx. 9 (Sir. xxii. 7 ;
often also in Grk. -writ.) ; όρθροι (see βαθίωί), Lk. xxiv.
1 ([Arstpli. vesp. '.iie J ; Plat. Crito 43 a. ; Polyaen. 4, 9,
1 ; cTt βαθιοί όρθρου, Plat. Prot. 310 a. [cf. also Pliilo
de mutat. nom. § 30; de vita Moys. i. § 32]) ; τά /3u5i'a
ToO 2αται/3, Rev. ii. 24 (G L Τ Tr WII ; cf. βάθοί).'
βαίον [al. also βάϊον (or even βαίον, Chandler ed. 1 p.
272) ; on its deriv. (fr. the Egyptian) cf. Step/i. Thesaur.
s. v. /3uis], -oi;, TO, a palm-branch ; with των φοινίκων added
[so Test. xii. Patr. test. Naph. § 5] (after the fashion of
oiKO^fanorrjs rrjs οικίας, νττοπόδίον των ττο^ών, [cf. λ\ . G03
(5G1)]), Jn. xii. 13. (A bibl. and eccles. word : 1 Mace,
xiii. 51 ; Cant. vii. 8 Symm. ; Lev. xxiii. 40 unknown trans.
In tlie Grk. church Palm-Sunday is called ή κυριακη των
βαΐων. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis Le.xx. N. T. p. 18 scjq. ;
\^Slnr:, Dial. Maced. etc. p. 88 sq. ; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v.].)*
Βαλαάμ, ή, indecl., (in Sept. for D>;S3, ace. to Gesenius
[" perhaps "] fr. '73 and Di' non-populus, i. e. foreign ; ace.
to Jo. Simonis equiv. to D>J i''^? a swallowing up of the
people; in Joseph, ό Βάλαμος), Balaam (or Bileam), a
native of Pethor a city of Mesopotamia, endued by .Je-
hovah with prophetic power. He was hired by Balak
(see Βαλάκ) to curse the Israelites ; and influenced by the
love of reward, he wished to gratify Balak ; but he was
compelled by .Jehovah's power to bless them (Niun. xxii.-
xxiv. ; Deut. xxiii. 5 sq. ; Josh. xiii. 22 ; xxiv. 9 ; Mic. vi.
5). Hence the later .Tews saw in him a most abandoned
deceiver: Rev. ii. 14; 2Pet. ii. 15; .Tude 11. Cf. Win.
RWB.[andBB.DD.]8.v.•
Βαλάκ, 0, indecl., (p^S empty [so Gesen. in his Thesaur.,
but in his later works he adopts (with Fiirst et al.) an act.
sense ' one who makes empty,' ' a devastator,' ' spoUer ' ;
see BD. Am. ed. s. v.]), Balak, king of the Moabites
(Num. xxii. 2 sq. and elsewhere) : Rev. ii. 14.*
βαλάντιον and βάΚλάντιον (so L Τ Tr WH ; cf. [Tdf.
Proleg. p. 79] ; Fritzsche on Mk. p. G20 ; W. p. 43 ; Pasxou;
Lex. [also L. and .S.] s. v.), -ov, τά, a money-bar/, purse :
Lk. X. 4 ; xii. 33 ; xxii. 35 sq. (Sept. .Job xiv. 1 7 cf. [Simon.
181]; Arstph. ran. 772; Xen. symp. 4, 2; Plat. Gorg.
p. 508 e. ; Hdian. 5, 4, 4 [3 ed. Bekk.], and other writ.) •
βάλλω; fut. βα\ώ; γιί. βίβληκα; 2 aor. ίβαΧον (3 pers.
plur. ίβά\ον in Lk. xxiii. 34 ; Acts xvi. 23, ίβαλαν. the
Alex, form, in Acts .\vi. 37 L Τ Tr WH ; [Rev. xviii. 19
Lchm., see WH. App. p. 1G5 and] for reff. άηίρχημαι
init.) ; Pass., [pres. βύλλομηι] ; pf. βίβΧημαι ; plpf. f'^i-
βΚήμην; I ΆΟΤ. ίβΧήθην; 1 fut. βληθησομαι ; In ihrow,
either with force, or without force yet with a purpose,
or even carelessly; 1. with force and effort:
βάλ\€ΐν Tiva ραηίσμασι to smite one with slaps, to buffet.
Mk. xiv. 65 Rec. (an imitation of the phrases, τίνα βή\-
Xfii/ \ίθοις, /StXfCTi, To^oif, etc., κακοί?, ψογω, σκώμμασι,
etc., in Grk. writ. ; cf. Passow i. p. 487 ; [L. and S. s. v.
T. 1 and 3] ; for the Rec. ϊβαΧΚον we must read with
Fritzsche and Schott ίβάλον, fr. which arose (XajSor,
adopted by L Τ Ί r W'U ; /iaXeix and \αβ(1ν are often
confounded in codd. : cf. (jrimni on 2 Mace. v. G ; [.Scriv-
ener, Introd. p. 10]) ; βά\λfιv λίθους ΐπί τινι or τίνα, .In.
viii. (7), 59; χουν fjiX rat «φαλάί, Rev. xviii. 19 [WH
mrg. (πίβ.] ; κονιορτ'ον ds τϋν άίρα. Acts x.xii. 23 ; τι eic
την θάλασσαν, Mk. ix. 42 ; Rev. viii. 8 ; xviii. 21 ; tU τό
nip, Mt. iii. 1 ; xviii. 8 ; Lk. iii. 9 ; Mk. ix. 22 ; Jn. xv.
6 ; fi's κλίβανον, Mt. vi. 30 ; Lk. xii. 28 ; (tt yetmav, Mt. v.
[29], 30 [R G] ; Mk. ix. 47 ; els τ. γήν. Rev. viii. 5, 7 ; xii.
4, 9, 13; eisT. ληνόν, Rev. xiv. 19; f is τ. λιμι/ήκ. Rev. xix.
20 ; .XX. 10, 14 sq. ; els r. αβυσσον. Rev. xx. 3 ; absol. and
in the pass, to be violently displaced from .• position
gained. Rev. xii. 10 L Τ Tr WH. an attack of disease
is said βάKλeιv τινά els κλινην, Rev. ii. 22 : Pass, to lie sici
abed, be prostrated hij sickness : βίβλημαι e'rr'i κλίνης. Mt.
Lx. 2 ; Mk. vii. 30 [R G L mrg.] ; with ίπ'ι κ\ίvηs omitted,
Mt. viii. 6, 14, cf. Lk. xvi. 20 ; rira els φυλακην, to cast one
into prison, Mt. v. 25; .xviii. 30; Lk. .xii. 58; xxiii. 19
[R G L], 25 ; Jn. iii. 24 ; Acts xvi. 23 sq. 37 ; Rev. ii. 10 ;
[_β. eVt Tiva την xe'ipa or τάς xelpas to latj hand or hands
on one, apprehend him, .In. vii. 44 L Tr WH, also ."JO L
mrg.] ; hpevavov els yrjv to appl}• with force, thrust in, the
sickle. Rev. xiv. 19 ; μάχαφαν βάλλeιv (to cast, send) ί'ττΐ
τ. -γην. Mt. χ. 34, which phrase gave rise to another
foimd in die same passage, viz. Λρηνην βάλ\. «VI τ. yffv
to east (send) peace ; ΐξω, to cast out or forth : Mt. v.
13 ; xiii. 48 ; Lk. xiv. 35 (34) ; 1 Jn. iv. 18 ; Jn. χ v. 6 ;
ίαυτον κάτω to cast one's self down : Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 9 ;
eavTov els τ. θάλασσαν, Jn. xxi. 7 ; pass, in a reflex, sense
[B. 52 (4.5)], βλήθητι, Mt. xxi. 21 ; Mk. .xi. 23; τί άφ'
eauToi to cast a thing from one's self, throw it away : Mt.
V. 29 sq. ; xviii. 8 ; ύδωρ e'x τοϋ στόματος. Rev. xii. 15 sq.
(eoii out of his mouth, Luther scho.is aus ihrem Munde) ;
ίνώπιον with gen. of place, to cast before (eagerly lay
down). Rev. iv. 10; of a tree casting its fruit because
violently shaken by the wind, Rev. vi. 13. Intrans. to
rush (throw one'sself[cl. AV. 251 (236) ; 381 (357) note';
B. 145 (127)]) : Acts xxvii. 14 ; (Hom. E. II, 722 ; 23,
462, and other writ. ; [cf. L. and S. s. v. ΙΠ. 1]). 2.
without force and effort; to throic or let go of a Ihini/
without caring where it falls : κληρον to cast a lot into the
urn [B. D. s. v. Lot], Mt. xxvu. 35 ; Mk. xv. 24; Lk.
xxiii. 34 ; Jn. xLx. 24 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19 ; («cv/Souf, Plat,
legg. 12 p. 968 e. and in other writ.), to scatter: κάπρια
[Rec." κοπρίανί, Lk. xiii. 8 ; seed twi τής γης, Mk. iv. 26 ;
its κηπον, Lk. xiii. 1 9. to throw, cast, into : άμγΰριον els
τον κορβανάν [L mrg. Tr mrg. κορβάν], Mt. xxvii. G ;
;^αλκόΐ', haipa, etc., els το γαζοφυλάκιον, Mk. xii. 41^4 ;
Lk. xxi. 1-4, cf. .In. xii. 6. βάλλeιv τί Tivt, to throw, cast,
a thing to: τΰκ ΪΊρτον to'is Kvvaplois. Mt. xv. 26 ; Mk. vii.
27; eμ1τpoσθίv Tivos, Mt. Λ'ϋ. G; ίνωΈΐόν Ttvos, Rev. ii. 14
(sec σκάν^αλον, b. /3.) ; to gire orer to one's care uncertain
about the result : apyipiov τοις τpaπeζlτa^s, to deposit, Mt.
XXV. 27. of fluids, to pour, to pour in : foil, by els, Mt.
be. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37; Jn. xiii. 5, (oivov els top
πίθον, Epictet. 4,13,12; of rivers, βόον els όλα. Αρ. Rhixl.
2, 401, etc. : Sept. Judg. vi. 19 [Aid.. Compl.]) ; to pour
βατΓτίζω
94
βάτΓΤοσμα
out, fiii Tfvot, Mt. xxvi. 12. 3. to move, give motion
to, not with force yet with attention and for a pur-
pose; (Xs Ti, to put into, insert : Mk. vii. .'Hi (rovs δακτύλου?
tiff τα ωτα) ; Jn. XX. 25, 27 ; xviii. 1 1 ; χ^άλίνονς ίΐς το σπιμα-,
Jas. iii. 3 ; to let down, cast down : Jn. v. 7 ; Mt. iv. 1 8
[cf. Mk. i. 16 Rec.] ; Mt. xvii. 27. Metaph. : fit την καρ&ί-
Qv τινός, to auf/f/est, Jn. xiii. 2 (τ1 tv θνμώ τίνος-, Horn. Od.
1, 201 ; 14, 2(;9; (Ις νουν, .schol. ad Pind. Pyth. 4, 133;
al. ; ϊμβΆλιιν ei's νουν τινι, Plut. vit. Timol. c. 3). [CoMP. :
αμφι-, άνα-, άι^ι-, άπο-, δια-, €Κ-, €μ-, ηαρ-^μ-, cm-, κατά-,
μ€τα-, πάρα-, nfpt-, προ-, συ/χ-, υπ€ρ-, υπο-βά\\ω.}
βαΐΓτίζω; [iiupi. ϊβάτττιζον^; fut. βαπτίσω; 1 aor. c'/Su-
ίττιτα ; Pass., [pres. βατιτί^ο/ιαι] ; inipf. {'ίίαπτι^ϋμτ;!'; ]>t.
l)tfp. β(βαπτίσμίνος\ 1 Άον. ϊβαπτίσθην; 1 fut. βαπτισθή-
σομαι ; 1 aor. mid. ίβαπτισάμην ; (frcqufnt. [?] fr. βάπτω,
like βαΧΧίζω fr. βάλλω) ; here and there in Phit., Polyb.,
Dioil., Strab., Joseph., Phit., al. I. 1. prop. /» dip
repeatedly, to immerge, suhmcrr/c, (of vessels sunk, Polyb.
1, 51, 6 ; 8, 8, 4 ; of animals, Diod. 1, 36). 2. to cleanse
by dipping or submerging, to wash, to make clean with
water ; in the mid. and the 1 aor. pass, to icash one's self,
bathe ; so Mk. vii. 4 [where AVH txt. ρακτι'σωιται] ; Lk.
xi. 38, (2 K. v. 14 (βαπτίσατο ev τω 'lophavrj, for IDU ;
Sir. xxxi. (x.xxiv.) 30; Judith xii. 7). 3. metaph. to
orerfrhelni, as ι^ιώτας ταΐς (ΙσφοραΙς, Diod. 1,73; υφλημασι,
Plut. Galba 21 ; rji συμφορά βιβαπτισμίνος, Helidd. Aetli.
2, 3 ; and alone, to inflict ^^i-eat and abounding calamities
on one : (βάπτισαν την πολιν, Joseph, b. j. 4, 3, 3 ; ^ ανομία
μ( βαπτίζίΐ. Is. xxi. 4 Sept. ; hence βαπτίζ(σθαι βάπτισμα
(cf. W. 225 (211) ; [B. 148 (129)] ; cf. λούίσθαι τά λου-
τρόν, Ael. de nat. an. 3, 42), to be overwlielmed tcith ca-
lamities, of those who must bear them, Mt. xx. 22 sq. Rec. ;
Mk. X. 38 sq. : Lk. xii. 50, (cf. the Germ, elwas aitszubaden
hahen, and the use of the word e. <;. respectinp; those who
cross a river with difficulty, ΐως των μαστών οι π(ζο\ βα-
πτιζύμ(νοι 8ΐίβαινον. Polyb. 3, 72, 4 ; [for exx. see Soph.
Lex. s. V. ; also T. ./. Conant, Baptizein, its meaning and
use, N. Y. 1864 (printed also as an App. to their revised
version of the Gosp. of Mt. by the " Am. Bible Union ") ;
and esp. four works by J. W. Dale entitled Classic, Ju-
daic, Johannic, Christie, Baptism, Phil. 18i;7 s()q. ; D. B.
Ford, Studies on the Bapt. Quest, (including a review of
Dr. Dale's works), Bost. 1.S79]). II. In the N. T. it
is used particularly of the rite of sacred ablution, first in-
stituted by John the Baptist, afterwards by Christ's com-
nianil received by Christians and adjusted to the con-
tents and nature of their religion (see βάπτισμα, 3), viz.
an immersion in water, performed as a sign of the re-
moval of sin, and administered to those who, impelled by
a <lesire for salvation, sought admission to the benefits
of the Alessiah's kingdom ; [for patristic reff. respecting
the mode, ministrant, subjects, etc. of the rite, cf. Snph.
Lex. s. V. ; Diet, of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Baptism], a. The
word is used absolutely, to administer the rile of ablu-
tion, to baptize, (Vulg. baptize; Tertull. tingo, tinguo, [cf.
mergito, de corona mil. § 3]) : ^Ik. i. 4 ; Jn. i. 25 sq. 28 ;
iii. 22 sq. 26 ; iv. 2; x. 40; 1 Co. i. 17 ; with the cognate
noun TO βάπτισμα. Acts xix. 4 ; ό βαπτίζων substantively
i. q. ό βαπτιστής, nfk. vi. 14, [24 Τ Tr WH]. τινά, Jn.
iv. 1 ; Acts viii. 38 ; 1 Co. i. 14, 16. Pass, to be baptized :
Mt. iii. 13 Sip 16 ; ilk. xvi. 16 ; Lk. iii. 21 ; Acts ii. 41 ;
viii. 12, 13, [36]; x.4.-; xvi. 15; 1 Co. i. LOLTTrWH;
X. 2 L Τ Tr mrg. WH mrg. Pass, in a reflex, sense [i. e.
Mid. cf. W. § 38, 3], to allow one's selflo be initialed hi/
baptism, to receive baptism : Lk. [iii. 7, 1 2] ; vii. 30 ; Acts ii.
38 ; ix. 18 ; xvi. 33 ; xviii. 8; with the cognate noun το βά-
πτισμα added, Lk. vii. 29 ; 1 aor. mid., 1 Co. x. 2 (L Τ Tr
mrg.WlI mrg. ίβαπτίσθησαν [cf.W. § 38, 4 b.]); Acts xxii.
16. foil, by a dat. of the thing with which baptism is per-
formed, ϋδατι, see bb. below, b. with Prepositions;
aa. (IS, to mark the element into which the immersion
is made : fif τον 'Ιορ$άνην, Mk. i. 9. to mark the end:
(1ς μίτύνοιαν, to bind one to repentance, Mt. iii. 11 ; fif
TO ΊωάΐΊΌυ βάπτισμα, to bind to the duties im|)osed by
John's baptism, Acts xix. 3 [cf. W. 397 (371)] ; (Ις όνομα
τίνος, to profess the name (see όνομα,ί) of one whose fol-
lower we become, Mt. xxviii. 19 ; Acts viii. 16 ; xix. 5 ;
1 Co. i. 13, 15 ; fh άφ(σιν αμαρτιών, to obtain the forgive-
ness of sins. Acts ii. 38; eis τοκ Μωϋσην, to follow Moses
as a leader, 1 Co. x. 2. to indicate the effect: ds Iv
σώμα, to unite together into one body by baptism, 1 Co.
xii. 13; ft? Χρίστοϊ/, etff Tof ^άί'ατομ αΰτοΰ, to bring by baj)-
tism into fellowship with Christ, into fellowship in his
death, by which fellowship we have died to sin. Gal. iii.
27 ; Ro. vi. 3, [cf. Mey. on the latter pass., Ellic. on the
former], bb. iv. with dat. of the thing in which one is
immersed : iv τω 'lopSavr/, Mk. i. 5 ; iv τω ΰδατί, Jn. i. 31
(L Τ Tr AVE iv ίδ., but cf. Mey. ad loc.'[who makes the
art. deictic]), of the thing used in baptizing : iv ϋδατι,
Mt. iii. 1 1 ; Mk. i. 8 [T AVH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. iv] ;
Jn. i. 26, 33; cf. B. § 13.3, 19; [cf. W. 412 (384); see
iv, I. 5 d. a.]; with the simple dat., υ8ατ£, Lk. iii. 16 ;
Acts i. 5 ; xi. IG. iv πνίύματι άγίω, to imbue richly with
the Holy Spirit, (just as its large bestowraent is called an
outpouring) : Mt. iii. 11 ; Mk. i. 8 [LTrbr. iv] ; Lk. iii.
16 ; Jn. i. 33 ; Acts i. 5 ; xi. 16 ; with the addition καΊπνρί
to overwhelm with fire (those who do not repent), i. e. to
subject them to the terrible penalties of hell, Mt. iii. 11.
iv ονόματι τοϋ κυρίου, by the authority of the Lord, Acts
-x. 4S. cc. I 'ass. f'n^i [L ir W 11 fVJ τω ονόματι Ίησοϋ
Χριστού, relying on the name of Jesus Christ, i. e. rejjos-
iug one's hope on him, Acts ii. 38. dd. inep των
νίκρων on behalf of the dead, i. e. to promote their eternal
salvation by undergoing baptism in their stead, 1 Co. .\v.
29; cf.[W. 175(165); 279(262); 382(358); Meyer (or
Beet) ad loc] ; esp. Neander ad loc. ; Riickerl, Pro^r.
on the passage, Jen. 1847; Pare! in Ewald's Jahib. d.
bibl. Wissensch. ix. p. 247 ; [cf. B. D. s. v. Baptism yill.
Alex.'s Kitto ibid. VI.].*
βάΐΓτισμα. -rof, τό, (βαπτίζω), a word peculiar to N. T.
and cccl. writ., immersion, submersion ; 1. used trop.
of calamities and afflictiims with which one is quite over-
whelmed : Mt. XX. 22 sq. Rec. ; Mk. x. 38 sq. ; Lk. xii. 50,
(see βαπτίζω, I. 3). 2. of John's baptism, that
purificatory rite by which men on confessing their sins
were bound to a spiritual reformation, obtained the par-
(ίατΓτισμός
95
Β αρθο\ομαΐο<;
don of their past sins and became qualified for the benefits
of the ΛIessiah's kingdom soon to be set up : Mt. ili. 7 ;
xxi. 25 ; Mk. xi. 30 ; Lk. vii. 29 ; xx. 4 ; Acts i. 22 ; x. 37 ;
xviii. 25 ; [xix. 3] ; βάπτ. μΐτανοία!, binding to repentance
[W. 188 (177)], Mk. i. 4; Lk. iii. 3; Acts xiii. 24; .xLx. 4.
3. of Christian baptism; tliis, according to the view
of the apostles, is a rite of sacred immersion, commanded
by Christ, by which men confessing their sins and pro-
fessing their faith in Christ are born again by the Holy
Spirit unto a new life, come into the fellowship of Christ
and the church (1 Co. xii. 13), and are made par-
takers of eternal salvation ; [but see art. "Baptism " in
BB.DD., McC. and S., Schaff-Herzog] : Eph. iv. 5 ; Col.
ii. 12 [L mrg. Tr -μω q. v.] ; 1 Pet. iii. 21 ; els τον θάνατον,
Ro. vi. 4 (see βαπτίζω, II. b. aa. fin.). [Trench § xcLx.] *
βαΐΓτισ-μόϊ, -oC, 6, (βατττίζω), a tcashing, purification
effected hi/ means of water : Mk. vii. 4, 8 [R G L Tr in
br.] (Ιίστώκ κα\ ποτηριών) \ of the washings prescribed
by the Mosaic law, Heb. ix. 10. βαπτισμών 8ιδαχης
equiv. to Βιδαχ^ης πιρΊ βαπτισμων, Ileb. vi. 2 [where L txt.
WH txt. βαπτ. δώαχτ]ν~\, which seems to mean an expo-
sition of the difference between the washings prescribed
by the Mosaic law and Christian baptism. (Among
prof. writ. Josephus alone, antt. 18, 5, 2, uses the word,
and of John's baptism ; [respecting its interchange \vith
βάπτισμα cf. exx. in Soph. Le.x. s. v. 2 and Bp. Lghtft.
on Col. ii. 12, where L mrg. Tr read βαπτισ /tos; cf.
Trench § xcix.].) *
βαίΓΓκΓτήϊ, -oG, 6, {βαπτίζω), a baptizer ; one who ad-
ministers the rite of baptism ; the surname of John, the
forerunner of Christ : Mt. iii. 1 ; xi. 11 sq. ; [.xiv. 2, 8 ;
xvi. 14 ; xvu. 13]; Mk. vi. 24 [T Tr WII τοί• βαπτίζοντας],
25; viii. 28; Lk. vii. 20, 28 [TTr WIIom.],33; ix. 19; also
given him by Josephus. antt. 18,5, 2, and found in no other
prof. writ. [joh. d. Tauferby Breest(1881), Kohler('84).]•
βάτΓτω : [fut. βάψω, Jn. xiu. 26 Τ Tr ΛΥΗ] ; 1 aor.
ίβαψα ; pf. pass. ptcp. βφαμμίνος ; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn,
down ; in Sept. for hzo ; a. to dip, dip in, immerse : τι,
Jn. xiii. 2G [but in 26• Lchm. ΐμβάψαι. as in 26' L txt.
R G] ; foU. by a gen. of the thing into which the object is
dipped (because only a part of it is touched by the act
of dipping), Lk. xvi. 24 (cf. άτττΐσθαί τίνος, \ον€σθαί ποτα-
μο'ίο, Hom.E. 5, 6; 6, 508; cf. Β. § 132, 25; [W. § 30,
8 c.]). b. to dip into dye, to di/e, color : Ιμάτιον αΐματι.
Rev. xix. 13 [Tdf. π^ριρ^ραμμίνον, see S. v. π^ριρραίνω',
WH pfpavTtapfvov, see ραντίζωΐ- (Hdt. 7, 67; Anth. 11,
68; Joseph, antt. 3, 6, 1.) [CoMP. : (μ-βάπτω.}'
βόρ, Chald. Ί3 [cf. Ps. ii. 12; Prov. xxxi. 2] ; βάρ'ϊωνά
son of Jonah (or Jonas) : Mt. xvi. 1 7, where L Τ WH
Βαριωι/ά (q. v.) Barjonah (or Barjonas), as if a surname,
like Βαρνάβας, etc. [R. V. Bnr-Jnnah. Cf. Ίωνάς, 2.] *
Βαραββα;. -5, ό. (fr. 13 son, and X3X father, hence son
of a father i. e. of a master [cf. Mt. .xxiii. 9]), a captive
robber whom the Jews begged Pilate to release instead of
Christ: Mt. xxvii. 16 sq. (where codd. mentioned by
Origen, and some other authorities, place Ίησονν before
βαραββάν, approved by Fritzsche, De Wette, Jleyer,
Bleek, al. ; [cf. ]VH. App. and Tdf.'s note ad loc. ; also
Trer/. Printed Text, etc. p. 194 sq.]), 20 sq. 26; Mk. xv.
7, 11, 15; Lk. xxiii. 18; Jn. xviii. 40.*
Βαράκ, ό, indecl., (ρ73 lightning), Barak, a commander
of the Israelites (Judg! iv. 6, 8) : Heb. xi. 32. [BB.DD.] *
BapaxCas. -ου, ό, [rTD"^? Jehovah blesses], Barachiah :
in Mt. xxiii. 35 said to have been the father of the Zach-
ariah slain in the temple ; cf. Ζαχαρίας.*
βάpβcφoΐ, -ox ; 1. prop, one whose speech is rude,
roui/h, harsh, as if repeating the syllables βαρβάρ (cf.
Strabo 14, 2, 28 p. 662; ωνοματοπ^ποίηται η Ae^ts, Etym.
Magn. [188, 11 (but Gaisf. reads βρόγχος for βάρβαρος);
cf. Curtius § 394; Vanicek p. 561]); hence 2.
one who speaks a foreign or strange language which is
not understood bi/ another (Hdt. 2, 158 βαρβάρους πάντας
οι Α,ίγνπτιοι καΤίζονσι τους μη σφίίτι όμογΧωσσυυς, Ovid,
trist. 5, 10, 37 barbarus hie ego sum, quia non intelligor
ulli) ; so 1 Co. xiv. 11. 3. The Greeks used βάρβαρος
of any foreigner ignorant of the Greek language and the
Greek culture, u-hether mental or moral, with the added
notion, after the Persian war, of rudeness and brutahty.
Hence the word is applied in the ii. T., but not re-
proachfully, in Acts xxviii. 2, 4, to the inhabitants of
Malta [i. e. ίΛ(\ίΓη, q. v.], who were of Phoenician or
Punic origin ; and to those nations that had, indeed,
some refinement of manners, but not the opportunity of
becoming Christians, as the Scythians, Col. iii. 1 1 | but
cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. But the phrase 'EXXiji/er re «cai
βάρβαροι forms also a periphrasis for all peoples, or indi-
cates their diversity yet without reproach to foreigners
(Plat. Theaet. p. 175 a.; Isocr. Euag. c. 17 p. 192 b.;
Joseph, antt. 4, 2, 1 and in other writ.) ; so in Ro. i. 14.
(In Philo de Abr. § 45 sub fin. of all nations not Jews.
Josephus b. j. prooem. 1 reckons the Jews among bar-
barians.) Cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. ii. 21 p. 61 ; [Bp.
Lghtft. on Col. u. s. ; B. D. s. v. Barbarian].*
βαρ€'ω, -ώ : to burden, weigh down, depress ; in the N. T.
found only in Pass., viz. pres. ptcp. βαροΰμ^νοι, impv.
βαριίσθω ; 1 aor• ϊβαρηθην ; pf . ptcp. βεβαρημένος ; the
better writ, do not use the pres. ; they use only the
ptcps. βίβίίρηώς and β(βαρημ(νος; see Matth. § 227 ; W.
83(80); [B. 54(47); Λ'eitch s. v.]. Used simply: to be
weighed down, oppressed, with external evils and calami-
ties, 2 Co. i. 8 ; of the mental oppression which the
thought of inevitable death occasions, 2 Co. v. 4 ; οφθαλ-
μοί βίβαρημίνοι, sc. ϋπνω, weighed down with sleep, Mk.
xiv. 40 (L TTr WII καταβαρυνόμ^νοι) : Mt. xxvi. 43;
with ϋπνω added, Lk. ix. 32 ; «V (3) κραιπάλη, Lk. xxi.
34 Rec. βαρυνθώσιν. [see βαρύνω'], (Horn. Od. 19, 122
οΊνω β(βαρηότ(ς, Diod. Sic. 4, 38 τη νόσω) ; μη βαρίίσθω
let it not be burdened, sc. with their expense, 1 Tim. v.
16, ((Ισφορα'ις, Dio Cass. 46, 32). [CoMP. : ίπι-, κατα-
βαρίω.] '
βαρϊωί, adv., (βαρύς. q. v.), heavily, with difficulty : Mt.
xiii. l."> : Acts xxviii. 27, (Is. vi. 10). [From Hdt. on.]*
Βαρθολομαιοε, -ου, ό, ("ο'^ΓΙ "'S son of Tolmai), Bar-
tholomew, one of the twelve apostles of Christ : Mt. x. 3;
Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 14; Acts i. 13. [See ΐίαθαναήλ ana
BB.DD.] •
BapLTfaow
96
βασιΧΐία
Βαρ-ιησον$, ό, (13 son, yw_ Jesus), Bar-Jc.tus, a cer-
tain false prophet : Acts xiii. 6 [where Tdf . -σοΟ ; see
his note. Cf. ΈλίμαΓ].*
Βαρ-ιωνάς, -α [cf. Β. 20 (17sf|.)], ό, (fr. 13 son, and
njv Jonali [al. [ jnv i. e. Johanan, Jona, John ; cf. Mey.
on Jn. i. 42 (43) and Lghtft. as below]), Bar-Jonah [or
Bar-./nna.•''], the surname of the apostle Peter : Mt. xvi. 1 7
[L Τ WII ; in Jn. i. 42 (43) ; x.\i. 15 sqq. son of John ;
see Lghlfi. Fresh Revision, etc., p. 159 note (Am. ed.
p. 137 note)] ; see in βΑρ and Ίωνά;, 2.*
Βορνάβαβ, -a [Β. 20 (18)], ό, (13 son, and N3: ; ace. to
Luke's interpretation v\bs -παρακΚήσίω!, i. e. excelling in
the power τηί παρακΚήσιωί, Acts iv. 3t; ; see παράκΧησα,
5), Baniahiis, the surname of Joses [better Josejih], a
Levite, a native of Cyprus. He was a distinguished
teacher of the Christian religion, and a companion and
colleague of Paul: Acts ix. 27; xi. 22, [25 Rec], 30; xii.
25 ; xiii.-xv. ; 1 Co. ix. G ; Gal. ii. 1, 9, 13 ; Col. iv. 10.*
papos, -foi, TO. heaviness, weir/ht, burden, trouble : load,
(πιτιθίνηι τιν'ι (Xen. oec. 1 7, !)), to impose upon one dilH-
cult rcipiirements, Acts xv. 28 ; βαΚΧΐί" itti τίνα. Rev. ii.
24 (where the meaning is, ' I put upon you no other in-
junction which it might be dillicult to observe'; cf.
Dusterdieck ad loc.) ; βαστάζ(ΐν το βάροί τινός, i. e. either
the burden of a thing, as to βάρος τψ ήμίρας the weari-
some labor of the day Mt. xx. 12, or that which a [lerson
bears, as in Gal. vi. 2 (where used of troublesome moral
taults; the meaning is, 'bear one another's faults').
αΐώνιον βάρος δόξης a weight of glory never to cease, i. e.
vast and transcendent glory (blessedness), 2 Co. iv. 17;
cf. W. § 34, 3 ; (πλούτου, Plut. Alex. M. 48). wei//hl i. q.
aulhority : ev βάρα elvai to have authority and influence,
1 Th. ii. 7 ((1), (so also in Grk. writ.; cf. Wesselinr/ on
Diod. Sic. 4, lil ; [exx. in Suidas s. v.]). [Syn. see
oyicos.] *
Βαρσαβ<κ 1-σαβ3άς LTTrWII; see WH. App. p.
159], -5 [B. 20 (l.S) . a, Barsabas [or Barsabbas] (i. e.
son of Saba [al. Zaba ) ; 1. the surname of a certain
Joseph : Acts i. 23, [B. D. s. v. Joseph Barsabas]. 2.
the surname of a certain Judas : Acts xv. 22, [B. D. s. v.
Judas Barsabas].•
BafHrCp.aio$ [Tdf. -μαϊος, yet cf. Chandler § 253], -ov, 6,
(son of Timsus), Barlimceus, a certain bUnd man : ilk.
X. 46.•
βαρύνω: to icerqh dotcn, overcharrje : Lk. xxi. 34 (1 aor.
pass, suh].) βαρννθώα IV Rec. [cf. W. 83 (80) ; Β. 54 (47)],
for βαρηθώσιν, see βαρίω. [CoMP. : κατα-βαρϋνω.^*
Papvs, -ίΐα, -ΰ, heavi/ ; X. prop. i. e. heavy in weight :
φορτίον, Mt. xxiii. 4 (in xi. 30 we have the opposite,
ίλαφρόν). 2. metaph. a. burdensome : ϊντολη, the
keeping of which is grievous, 1 Jn. v. 3. b. secere, stern :
eVtoToXij, 2 Co. X. 10 [al. imposing, impressive, cf. Wet-
stein ad loc.]. c. weifihty, i. e. of great moment : τα βαρϋ-
Tfpa τον νήμον the weightier precepts of the law, Mt.
xxiii. 23 ; αΐτιάματα [better αΐτιώματα (q. v.)], Acts xxv.
7. d. violent, cruel, unsparing, [A. V. grievous'] : Xvicot,
Acts XX. 29 (so also Horn. 11. i. 89; Xen. Ages. 11, 12).•
ρα^ντιμο$, -ov, (βαρύς and τιμή), of weighty (i. e. great)
value, very precious, costly : Mt. xxw. 7 [R G Tr txt.
WH], (so Strabo 17 p. 798; selling at a great price,
Heliod. 2, 30 [var.] ; jiossessed of great honor, Aeschyl.
suppl. 2.j [but Dindorf (Lex. s. v.) gives here (after a
schol.) sefereli/ punishing~\).'
βα<Γαν(ζω: [inipf. c'/Saaai'tfoi']; ΐΆθτ.ίβασάνι<τα; Pass.,
[]iTVf. βασανίζομαι] ; 1 aor. €βασανίσθην\ 1 fut. βασανι-
a^ijaoiiai ; {βάσανος) ; 1. prop, to test (metals) by the
touchstone. 2. to question by applying torture. 3.
to torture (2 Mace. vii. 13) ; hence 4. univ. to vex with
grievous pains (of body or mind), to torment : τινά, Mt.
viii. 29; Mk. v. 7 ; Lk. viii. 28; 2 Pet. ii. 8 ; Rev. xi. 10;
passively, Mt. viii. ; Rev. ix. 5 ; xx. 10 ; of the pains of
child-birth, Rev. xii. 2 (cf. Anthol. 2, p. 205 ed. Jacobs);
with eV and the dat. of the material in which one is tor-
mented. Rev. xiv. 10. 5. Pass, to be harassed, dis•
tressed; of those who at sea are struggling with a head
wind, Mk. vi. 48 ; of a ship tossed by the waves, Mt
xiv. 24. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. Often in O. T.
Apocr.) •
βαα^ανιο-μόΐ, -ov. 6. (βασανίζω, q. v.) ; 1. a testing by
the touchstone or //// torture. 2. torment, torture; a.
the act of tormenting: Rev. ix. 5. b. the state or con-
dition of those tormented : Rev. xriii. 7, 10, 1.0 ; ό κάπνος
ToC βασανισμού αντών the smoke of the tire by which they
are tormented, Rev. xiv. 11. (4 Mace. ix. fi ; xi. 2 ; [al.] ;
bad wine is called βασαιαυμός by Alexis in Athen. 1, 56
p. 30 f.) *
βασ-ανιστήί, -οϊι, ό, (βασανίζω), one who elicits the truth
by the uxc of the racL; an inquisitor, torturer, ([Antiphon ;
al.]; Dem. p. 978, 11 ; Philo in Place. § 11 end; [de
concupisc. § 1 ; (|Uod omn. prob. lib. 16 ; Plut. an vitios.
ad infel. suff. § 2]); used in Mt. xviii. 34 of a jailer
(8(σμοφΰ\αξ Acts xvi. 23), doubtless because the busi-
ness of torturing was also assigned to him.*
βά<Γανο$, -ου, ή, [Curtius p. 439] ; a. the touchstone,
[called also basanite, Lat. lapis Lydius], by wliich gold
and other metals are tested, b. the rack or instrument
of torture by which one is forced to divulge the truth, c.
torture, torment, acute pains : used of the pains of disease,
Mt. iv. 24 ; of the torments of the wicked after death,
(V βασάνοις ύπάρχ^ιν, Lk. xvi. 23 (Sap. iii. 1; 4 Mace,
xiii. 14) ; hence ό το'ποί τζ? βασάνου is used of Gehenna,
Lk. xvi. 28. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theogn.], Pind. down.) *
βασιλεία, -as, ή. (fr. βασιλεύω; to be distinguished fr.
βασίλίΐα a queen ; cf. Upda priesthood fr. Ίιρήω, and
Upfia a priestess fr. itpetr), [fr. Hdt. down] ; 1. royal
power, kingship, dominion, rule: Lk. i. 33; xix. 12, 15;
xxii. 29 ; Jn. xviii. 36 ; Acts i. 6 ; Heb. i. 8 ; 1 Co. xv.
24 ; Rev. xvii. 12 ; of the royal power of Jesus as the
triumphant Messiah, in the phrase ΐρχισθαι iv τη βασ-
αντοΰ, i. e. to come in his kingship, clothed with this pow-
er : Mt. xvi. 28 ; Lk. xxiii. 42 [fif την β. L mrg. Tr mrg.
WH txt.] ; of the royal power and dignity conferred on
Christians in the Messiah's kingdom : Rev. i. 6 (ace. to
Tr txt. WH mrg. (ποίησιν ήμίν or L ημών [yet R G Τ ΛΝ'Η
txt. Tr mrg. ήμας] βασιΚιίαν [Rec. βασιλι'ις]) ; τοΰ βιοΰ,
the royal power and dignity belonging to God, Rev. xij.
βασιΧβια
97
βασιΧΐία
10. 2. α kingdom i. e. the territory subject to the
rule of a king: Mt. xii. 25 sq. ; xxiv. 7 ; Mk. iii. 24 ; vi.
23 ; xiii. 8 ; Lk. xi. 17 ; xxi. 10 ; plur. : Mt. iv. 8 ; Lk. iv.
S ; Heb. xi. 33. 3. Fieijuent in the N. T. in refer-
ence to the Reign of thi- Μ e s s i a h are the following
phrases: ή βασίλιία τοΰ θ(υΰ {Κη^ΚΊ ΝΓΙ13^•?, Targ. Is.
xl. 9 ; Mic. iv. 7), prop, l/ie kinijdom ocer li-hich God /-ules;
ή βασι\( ία τοΰ Χρίστου (NT'ir/m jloSo, Targ. Jonath. ad
Is. liii. 10), Ike kingdom of the Messiah, which will be
founded by God througli the Messiah and over whicli the
Messiah will preside as God's vicegerent ; ή βασ. των
ουρανών, only in Matthew, but very freijuently [some 33
times], the kiiir/dnm of liearen, i. e. the kingdom which is
of heavenly or divine origin and nature (in rabbin, writ.
D'pU'n noSo is the rule of God, the theocracy viewed
universally, not the Messianic kingdom) ; sometimes
simply ή βασιΧιΙα : Mt. iv. 23, etc. ; .las. ii. 5 ; once ή βασ.
ToO Aauf ι'δ, because it was supposed the Messiah would be
one of David's descendants and a king very like David,
Mk. xi. 10; once also ή βασ. την Χριστού και θ(οϋ, Eph. ν.
:>. Relying principally on the prophecies of Daniel —
who had declared it to be the purpose of God that, after
four vast and mighty kingdoms had succeeded one an-
other and the last of them shown itself hostile to the
people of God, at length its despotism should be broken,
and the empire of the world pass over for ever to the holy
I)eopIe of God (Dan. ii. 44; vii. 14, 18, 27) — the Jews
were expecting a kingdom of the greatest felicity, which
tloil through the Messiah would set up, raising the dead
to life again and renovating earth and heaven ; and that
in this kingdom they would bear sway for ever over all
the nations of the world. This kingdom was called the
kingdom of God or the kingdom of the Messiah ; and in
this sense must these terms be understood m the utter-
ances of the Jews and of the disciples of Jesus when
conversing with him, as Mt. xviii. 1 ; xx. 21 ; Mk. xi. 10;
Lk. .xvii. 20; xix. 11. But Jesus employed the phrase
kingdom of God or of heaven to indicate that perfect order
of things which he teas about to establish, in trhich all those
of every nation irlio should believe in him tvere to be gathered
together into one society, dedicated and intimately united
to God, and made partakers of eternal salvation. This
kingdom is spoken of as now begun and actually pres-
ent, inasmuch as its foundations have already been
laid by Christ and its benefits realized among men
that believe in him: Mt. xi. 12; xii. 28; xiii. 41 (in
this pass, its earthly condition is spoken of, in which it
includes bad subjects as well as good); Lk. xvii. 21; 1
Co. iv. 20; Ro. xiv. 17 (\vhere the meaning is, 'the es-
sence of the kingdom of God is not to be found in ques-
tions about eating and drinking') ; Col. i. 13. But far
more fre(piently the kingdom of heaven is spoken of as
a future blessing, since its consummate establishment
IS to be looked for on Christ's solemn return from the
skies, the dead being called to life again, the ills and
wrongs which burden the present state of things being
done aivay, the powers hostile to God being vanquished :
Mt. vi. 10 : viii. 1 1 ; xxvi. 29 ; Mk. ix. 1 ; xv. 43 ; Lk. ix.
27; xiii. 28 sq. ; xiv. 15; xxii. 18; 2 Pet. i. 11 ; also in
the phrases fiaip^taBai tls τ. βασ. τ. ουρανών or τ θ(οϋ :
Mt. V. 20; vii. 21 ; xviii. 3 ; xix. 23, 24 ; Mk. ix. 47 ; x.
23, 24, 25 ; Lk. xviii. 24 [T Tr txt. WH ΰσπορίΰονται],
25; Jn. iii. 5; Acts xiv. 22: κληρονόμο! της βασιλείας,
Jas. ii. 5 ; κληρονομ^ιν τ. β. τ. θ- : see d. below. Βν a sin-
gular use η βασ. τον κυρίου η ίττονρόνιος God^s heavenly
kingdom, in 2 Tim. iv. is, denotes the exalted and perfect
order of things which already exists in heaven, and into
which true Christians are ushered immediately after
death ; cf. Phil. i. 23 ; Heb. .\ii. 22 sq. The phrase βασ.
i των ουρανών or τοΟ θ(θν, while retaining its meaning' king-
dom ofheitven or of (Jiid, must be understood, accordin•'
to the reijuircments of the context, a. of the beginning,
growth, potency, of the divine kingdom : Mt. xiii. 31-33 ;
Mk. iv. 30 ; Lk. xiii. 18. b. of its fortunes : Mt. xiii. 24 ;
Mk. iv. 26. c. of the conditions to be complied with iu
order to reception among its citizens : Mt. xviii. 23 ; xx.
1; xxii. 2; xxv. 1. d. of its blessings and benefits,
whether present or future ; Mt. xiii. 44 sq. ; Lk. vi. 20:
also in the phrases ζητάν την βασ. τ. β(οϋ, Mt. vi. 33
[L Τ WH oin. τ. 5(oO] ; Lk. \ii. 31 [αυτοί L txt. Τ Tr
WH] ; δίχιαθαί τ. βασ. τ. β- ώς τταιδίον, Mk. χ. 15 ; Lk.
xviii. 1 7 ; κΚηρονομΰν τ. β. τ. θ- Mt. xxv. 34 ; 1 Co. vi.
9 sq. ; xv. 50 ; Gal. v. 21 ; see in κληρονομίω, 2. e. of
the congregation of those who constitute the royal 'city
of God ' : ποίίίκ τινας βασί\(ίαν, Rev. i. 6 (ΐ Τ WH txt.
Tr mrg. [cf. 1 above] ; v. 10 (here R G βασιλί'ΐ!, so R in
the preceding pass.), cf. Ex. xix. 6. Further, the foU.
expressions are noteworthy : of persons fit for admis-
sion into the divine kingdom it is said αντών or τοιοΰτω»'
ί'στίΐ/ η βασ. τών ονρ. or τον θ(οΰ : Mt. ν. 3, 10 ; χίχ. 14 ;
Mk. χ. 14; Lk. xviii. 16. δίδομαι τινΊ τ. βασ. is used of
God, making men partners of his kingdom, Lk. xii. 32;
παρα\αμβάν(ΐν of those who are made jiartners, Heb. xii.
28. διά την βασ. τ. ονρ to advance the interests of the
heavenly kingdom, Mt. xix. 1 2 : tvfxfv ttjs βασ. τ. θ. for the
sake of becoming a partner in the kingdom of God, Lk.
xviii. 29. Those who announce the near approach of the
kingdom, and describe its nature, and set forth the condi-
tions of obtaining citizenship in it, are said htayyiWfiv τ.
βασ• τ. θ- Lk. ix. 60 ; (ΰαγγιΧίζίσϋαι την β. τ. θ- Lk. iv. 43 :
viii. 1 ; .\vi. 1 (> ; π(ρΙ της βασ. τ. θ. Acts viii. 1 2 ; κηρίσσιιν
την βασ. τ. θ- Lk. ix. 2 ; Acts xx. 25; xxviii. 31 ; το eu'ay
yCKiov τη!βασ. Mt. iv. 23 : ix. 35 ; xxiv. 14 ; with the addi-
tion of ToC Bfov, Mk. i. 14 R L br. ήγγικ(ν ή βασ. τ. ουρ.
or τοΰ θ(οΰ, is used of its institution as close at hand ; Mt.
iii. 2 ; iv. 17 ; Mk. i. 15 ; Lk. x. 9, 11. it is said ίρχισθαι
i. e. to be established, in Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2; xvii. 20;
Mk. xi. 10. In accordance with the comparison which
likens the kingdom of God to a palace, the power of ad-
mitting into it and of excluding from it is called κλίϊί
της β. τ. οΰρ. Mt. -xvi. 19 : κλ(ΐ(ΐν την β. τ. ουρ. to keep
from entering, Mt. xxiii. 13(14). vioi της βασ. are those
toΛvhom the prophetic promise of the heavenly kingdom
extends : used of the Jews, Mt. viii. 12; of those gathered
out of all nations who have shown themselves worthy of
a share in this kingdom, Mt. xiii. 38. (In the O. 1'.
βασίΧΐίος
98
βαστάζω
Apocr. ή βασ. τον dfoti ilonotes God's rule, the divine ad-
ministmtioti, Sap. vi. 5 ; x. 10 ; Tob. xiii. 1 ; so too in Ps.
cii. (ciii.) 19; civ. (cv.) 11-13; Dan. iv. 33; vi. 26; the
universe suljjc:t to God's sicni/, God's royal domain, Song
of the Three Children 32: ή βασιλεία, simplv, the O. T.
theocratic commonwealtli, 2 -Mace. i. 7.) Cf. Fleck, De
regno (livino, Lips. 1829; Baumy.-Crusius, Bibl. Theol.
p. 147 S(iq. ; Thohicl•, Die Bergrede Christi, Ste Aufl. p.
55 sqq. [on Mt. v. 3] ; Ciilln, Bibl. Theol. i. p. 067 sqq.,
ii. p. 108 s(iq. ; Schmid, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. p. 262 sqij.
ed. 4; Baiir, Neutest. Theol. p. 69 sqq.; Weiss, Bibl.
Theol. d. N. T. § 13 ; [also in his Leben Jesu, bk. iv. ch.
2] ; SchUrer, [Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29 (esp. par. 8) and
reff. there ; also] in the Jahrbb. fUr protest. Theol.,
1876, pp. 166-187 (cf. Lipsius ibid. 1878, p. 189) ; [B.D.
Am. eil. s. v. Kingdom of Heaven, and reff. there].
βασ-(λ(ΐοΐ, (rarely -f ία), -eioK, roijal, l^'inyh/, regal: 1 Pet.
ii. 9. As subst. το βασίΧαην (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 3 ; Prov.
xviii. 19 Sept.; Joseph, antt. 6, 12, 4), and much oftener
(fr. Hdt. 1, 30 down) in plur. τα βασί\(ΐα (Sept. Esth.
i. 9, etc.), the royal palace : Lk. vii. 25 [A. V. kings'
courts'].'
βα<Γΐλ(ΐί$, -€ως, 6, leader of the people, prince, com-
mander, lord of the land, kini/; univ. : oi βασιλΛ τηί
yjjs. Mt. xvii. 25 ; Rev. xvi. 14 [L Τ Tr WII om. της yijf],
etc. ; τωνϊθνων, Lk. xxii. 25 ; of the king of Egypt, Acts
vii. 10, 18 ; Heb. xi. 23, 27 ; of David, Mt. i. 6 ; Acts .xiii.
22 ; of Herod the Great and his successors, Mt. ii. 1 sqq. ;
Lk. i. 5 ; Acts xii. 1 ; xxv. 13 ; of a tetrarch, Mt. xiv. 9 ;
Mk. vi. 14, 22, (of the son of a king, Xen. oec. 4, 16 ; "re-
ges Syriae, regis Antioclii pueros, scitis Romae nuper
fuisse," Cic. Verr. ii. 4, 27, cf. de senectute 17, 59 ; [Verg.
Aen. 9, 223]) ; of a Roman emperor, 1 Tim. ii. 2 ; 1 Pet. ii.
17, cf. Rev. xvii. 9 (10), (so in prof. writ, in the Roman
age, as in Joseph, b. j. 5, 13, 6 ; Hdian. 2, 4, 8 [4 Bekk.] ;
of the son of the emperor, ibid. 1, 5, 15 [5 Bekk.]) ; of
the Alessiah, ό βaσiKfυs των Ιουδαίων, Mt. ii. 2, etc. ; τοϊι
Ισραήλ, Mk. XV. 32; Jn. i. 49 (50) ; xii. 13; of Chris-
tians, as to reign over the world with Christ in the mil-
lennial kingdom. Rev. i. 6 ; v. 10 (Rec. in both pass, and
Grsb. in the latter ; see βασιλεία, 3 e.) ; of God, the su-
preme ruler over all, Mt. v. 35 ; 1 Tim. i. 1 7 (see αΙών,
2) ; Rev. XV. 3 ; βασιΚ^ί: βασιΚίων, Rev. .xvii. 14 [but
here as in xix. 16 of the Victorious ^Messiah]; ό βασ.
τών βασιλ(υόντων, 1 Tim. vi. 15, (2 Mace. xiii. 4 ; 3 JIacc.
v. 35; Enoch 9, 4; [84, 2; Philo de decal. § 10]; cf. [κύ-
ριοι των βασ. Dan. ii. 47] ; Kvpios τ. κυρίων, Deut. χ. 1 7 ;
Ps. cxxxv. (cxx.xvi.) 3 ; [so of the king of the Par-
thians, Plut. Pomp. § 38, 1]).
pcuriXevu; fut. βασι\(ϋσω•, 1 aor. (βασί\(νσα; (βασι-
kfvs) ; — in (!rk. writ. [fr. Horn, down] Λvith gen. or dat.,
in the sacred writ., after the Hebr. (Si' Si?0), foil, by
ίττί with gen. of place, Mt. ii. 22 (where LT Wllom.
Irbr. ί'πί) ; Rev. v. 10; foil, by eVi with ace. of the
pers., Lk. i. 33 ; xLx. 14, 27 ; Ro. v. 14 ; [cf. W. 206 (193
sq.); B. 169 (147)] — to he king, to exercise kingly power,
") riign: univ., 1 Tim. vi. 15; Lk. xi,x. 14, 27 ; of the
governor of a country, although not possessing kingly
rank, Mt. ii. 22; of God, Rev. xi. 15, 17; xix. 6 ; of the
rule of Jesus, the Messiah, Lk. i. 33 ; 1 Co. xv. 25 ; Rev.
xi. 15 ; of the reign of Christians in the millennium,
Rev. v. 10; xx. 4, 6; xxii. 5; hence Paul transfers the
word to denote tlie supreme moral ilignity, liberty, bless-
edness, which will be enjoyed by Christ's redeemed ones:
Ro. v. 1 7 (cf. De Wette and Thol. ad loc.) ; 1 Co. iv. 8.
Metaph. to exercise the highest in_fluence, to control: Ro.
V. 14, 17, 21; vi. 12. The aor. ίβασίλινσα denotes /
obtained royal pouter, became king, have come to reign, in
1 Co. iv. 8 [cf. W. 302 (283); B. 215 (185)]; Rev. xi.
1 7 ; xix. 6, (as often in Sept. and prof. writ. ; cf. Grimm
on 1 Mace. p. 1 1 ; Breitenbach or Kuhner on Xen.
mem. 1, 1, 18; on the aor. to express entrance into a
state, see Bnhdy. p. 382; Kriiger § 53, 5, 1 ; [Kiiliner
§ 386, 5; Goodwin § 19 N. 1]). [CoMP. : συμ-βασι-
λί'υω.] *
βα<Γΐλικ(ί$, -ή, -όν, of or belonging to a king, kingly,
royal, regal; of a man, the officer or minister of a prince,
a courtier: Jn. iv. 46, 49, (Polyb. 4, 76, 2; Plut. Sol. 27 ;
often in Joseph.), sxibject to a king: of a country, Acts
xii. 20. befitting or worthy of a king, royal: iaO^s, Acts
xii. 21. Hence metaph. principal, chief: νόμος, Jas. ii.
8 (Plat. Min. p. 317 e. to υρθον νόμο! ΐστι βασιΧικόί,
Xen. symp. 1, 8 βασιλικοί' κάλλοί; 4 ^lacc. xiv. 2).*
[βα<Γΐλ1σκο$, -ου, ό, (dimin. of βασιλΐυ!), a petty king;
a reading noted by WH in their (rejected) marg. of Jn.
iv. 46, 49. (Polyb., al.)•]
βασίλισ-σα, -η!, ή, queen : Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31 ; Acts
viii. 27; Rev. xviii. 7. (Xen. oec. 9, 15; Aristot. oec.
9 [in Bekker, Anecd. i. p. 84 ; cf. frag. 385 (fr. Poll. 8,
90) p. 1542•, 25]; Polyb. 23, 18, 2 [excrpt. Vales. 7],
and often in later writ. ; Sept. ; Joseph. ; the Atticists
prefer the forms βασιΚίς and βασίλίΐα ; of. Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 225 ; [on the termination, corresponding to Eng. -ess,
cf. W. 24; B. 73; Soph. Lex. p. 37; Sturz, De dial.
Maced. et Alex. p. 151 sqq.; Curtius p. 053].)*
βΟΜΓΐ$, -€ω£, ή, (ΒΑΩ, βαίνω) ; 1. α stepping, walh
ing, (Aeschyl., Soph., al.). 2. that with which one
steps, the foot: Acts iii. 7, (Plat. Tim. p. 92 a. et al. ;
Sap. xiii. 18).*
βοίο-καίνω: 1 aor. (βάσκανα, on which form cf. W. [75
(72)] ; 83 (80) ; [B. 41 (35) ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 25 f^i\. ;
Paralip. p. 21 sq.] ; (βάζω, βάσκω [φάσκω] to speak, talk) ;
τινά [AV. 223 (209)] ; 1. to speak ill of one, to slander,
traduce hirn, (Dem. 8, 19 [94, 19] ; Ael. v. h. 2, 13, etc.).
2. to bring evil on one by feigned praise or an evil eye,
to charm, bezvitch one, (Aristot. probl. 20, 34 [p. 926'',
24] ; Theocr. 6, 39 ; Ael. nat. an. 1, 35) ; hence, of those
who lead away others into error by wicked arts (Diod.
4, 6) : Gal. iii. 1. Cf. Schott [or Bp. Lghtft.] ad loc. ;
Loh. ad Phryn. p. 462.•
βοσ-τάζω; fut. βαστάσω; 1 aor. fjSd στα σα ; 1. to take
up ivith the hands : Χίθουί. Jn. x. 31, (λάαν, Horn. Od. 11,
594; την μάχαιραν από τήί γηι, Joseph, antt. 7, 11, 7).
2. to take up in order to carry or bear ; to put upon one's
self (something) to be carried ; to bear what is burden-
some : τον σταυρόν, Jn. xix. 17 ; Lk. .\iv. 27, (see σταιτο!
βάτος
99
βίβαιοοα
2 a. and b.) ; Metaph. : βαστάζιιν τι, to be equal to un-
derstanding a matter and receiving it calmly, Jn. xvi.
12 (Epict. ench. 29, 5); φορτίον. Gal. vi. 5; βαστάσίΐ
TO κρίμα, must take upon himself the condemnation of
the judge. Gal. v. 10 (tJiJiyp Χ'ΰ/:, Mic. vii. 9). Hence
ίο bear, endure : Mt. xx. 12 ; Acts xv. 10 (ζυγόν) ; Ro.
XV. 1 ; Gal. vi. 2; Rev. ii. 2 sq. (Epict. diss. 1, 3, 2;
Anthol. 5, 9, 3 ; in this sense the Greeks more com-
monly use φερβικ.) 3. simply ίο fcear, can-)/ : Mt. iii.
11; Mk. xiv. 13; Lk. vii. 14; xxii. 10; Rev. xvii. 7;
pass., Acts iii. 2 ; xxi. 35. το ονομά μου ^νώττιον ΐθνων,
so to bear it that it may be in the presence of Gentiles,
i. e. by preaching to carry the knowledge of my name
to the Gentiles, Acts ix. 15. to carry on one's person :
Lk. X. 4 ; Gal. vi. 1 7 [cf. EUic. ad loc] ; of the womb
carrying the foetus, Lk. xi. 27; to sustain, i. e. uphold,
support : Ro. xi. 18. 4. by a use unknown to Attic
writ., to bear away, carry off: νόσον!, to take away or
remove by curing them, Mt. viii. 1 7 (fialen de compos,
medicam. per gen. 2, 14 [339 ed. Bas.] ψώρας re Bepa-
iTfvei και νπώπια βαστάζει) [al. refer the use in Mt. 1. c.
to 2 ; cf. Meyer]. Jn. xii. 6 (ϊβάσταζι used to pilfer [R.
V. txt. took away ; cf. our ' shop^i/?ing ', though perh. this
Ιϊβ is a diff. word, see Skeat s. v.]) ; Jn. .\x. 15, (Polyb.
1, 48, 2 6 ανΐμος τοίις TTvpyovs τί] βία βαστάζΐΐ, ApoUod.
bibl. 2, G, 2; 3, 4, 3 ; Athen. 2, 26 p. 46 f.; 15, 48 p. 693 e.;
very manv instances fr. Joseph, are given by Krebs,
Observv. p. 152 sqq.). [Syx. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.] *
pUTos, -ου, ή and (in Mk. xii. 26 GLTTrWIl) 0,
(the latter ace. to Moeris, Attic ; the former Hellenistic ;
cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 532; W. 63 (62) [cf. 36 ; B. 12
(11)]), [fr. Horn, down], a thorn or bramble-bush [cf.
B. D. s. V. Bush] : Lk. vi. 44 ; Acts vii. 30, 35 ; cVi τοΰ
(της) βάτου at the Bush, i. e. where it tells about the Bush,
Mk. xii. 26 ; Lk. xx. 37 ; cf. Fritzsche on Ro. xi. 2; [B.D.
s. V. Bible IV. 1].*
βάτο5, -ου, ό, Hebr. Γι2 a bath, [A. V. measurel, a Jew-
ish measure of liquids containing 72 sextarii [between
8 and 9 gal.], (Joseph, antt. 8, 2, 9) : Lk. xvi. 6 [see B.D.
s. V. AVeights and Measures Π. 2].*
βάτραχοι, -ου, ό, afroij, (fr. Horn. [i. e. Batrach., and
Hdt.] down) : Rev. xvi. 13.*
βαττολογί'ω [TWH ^ατταλ. (with Ν Β, see WH. App.
p. 152)], -ώ: 1 aor. subj. βαττολογήσω; a. to slammer,
and, since stammerers are accustomed to repeat the
same sounds, b. to repeat the same things over and
over, to use many and idle words, to babble, prate ; so. Mt.
vi. 7, where it is explained by in tj πολυλογία, (Vulg.
multum loqui ; [A. V. to use vain repetitions]) ; cf. Tho-
luck ad loc. Some suppose the word to be derived from
Battus, a king of Cyrene, who is said to have stuttered
(Hdt. 4, 155) ; others from Battus, an author of tedious
and wordy poems : but comparing βατταρίζίίν, which
has the same meaning, and βάρβαρος (q. v.), it seems
far more probable that the word is onomatopoetic. (Sim-
plic. in Epict. [ench. 30 fin.] p. 340 ed. Schweigh.) *
βε<λνγμα, -rof , τό, (βδίλύσ-σομαι), a bibl. and eccl. word ;
in Sept. mostly for Π3;;ίη, also for ]'ψΰ and ]'p.P> afoul
thing (loathsome on acct. of its stench), a detestable thing;
(TertuU. abominamentum) ; Luth. Greuel ; [A. V. abom•
ination]; a. univ. : Lk. xvi. 15. b. in the O. T. often
used of idols and things pertaining to idolatry, to be
held in abomination by the Israelites ; as 1 K. xi. 6 (5) ;
XX. (xxi.) 26 ; 2 K. xvi. 3 ; xxi. 2 ; 1 Esdr. vu. 13 ; Sap.
xii. 23 ; xiv. 1 1 ; hence in the X. T. in Rev. xvii. 4 sq.
of idol-worship and its impurities ; nniflv βδίλυγμα κ.
ψήιΒος, Rev. xxi. 27. c. the expression το βδ. της (ρψ
μώσίως the desolating abomination [al. take the gen. al. ;
e. g. Mey. as gen. epex.] in Mt. xxiv. 15 ; Mk. xiii. 14,
(1 Mace. i. 54), seems to designate some terrible event
in the Jewish war by which the temple was desecrated,
perh. that related by Joseph, b. j. 4, 9, 11 sqq. (Sept.
Dan. xi. 31 ; .xii. 11, /3δ. (τής) (ρημώσ^ως for DOiPO ]"ip»
and DOW "a, Dan. Lx. 27 β8. των ΐρημώσούν for D"X1pt7
D"Dt?O the abomination (or abominations) wrought by the
desolator, i. e. not the statue of Jupiter Ohinpius, but a
Uttle idol-altar placed upon the altar of whole burnt-
ofiferings; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 31; Hengstenberg,
Authentic des Daniel, p. 85 sq. ; [the principal explana-
tions of the N. T. phrase are noticed in Dr. Jas. Mori-
son's Com. on Mt. 1. c.].) *
β8€λυκτόΐ, -η, όν, (βδίλϋσσομαι), abominable, detestable :
Tit. i. 16. (Besides only in Prov, xvii. 15 ; Sir. xii. 5;
2 Mace. i. 27 ; [cf. Philo de victun. offer. § 12 sub fin.].)*
β8<λν(Γσ-ω : (βδίω quietly to break wind, to stink) ;
1. to render foul, to cause to be abhorred: την οσμήν, Ex.
V. 21 ; to defile, pollute : τας ψνχάς, τ. ψυχην. Lev. xi. 43 ;
XX. 25 ; 1 Alacc. i. 48 ; pf. pass. ptcp. (βδ(λχτγμ€νο! abomi-
nable. Rev. xxi. 8, (Lev. xviii. 30 ; Prov. viii. 7 ; Job xv.
16; 3 Mace. vi. 9; β8€\νσσόμ(νος, 2 Mace. v. 8). In
native Grk. writ, neither the act. nor the pass, is found.
2. βδίλΰσσομαι: depon. mid. (1 aor. (β8(\νξάμην often
in Sept. [Joseph, b. j. 6, 2, 10] ; in Grk. writ, depon. pas-
sive, and f r. Arstph. down) ; prop, to turn one's self away
from on account of the stench ; metaph. to abhor, detest:
Ti, Ro. ii. 22.*
β«βαιθ5, -βία (W. 69 (67); Β. 25 (22)), -aiov, (Β.λΩ,
βαίνω), [fr. Aeschyl. down], stable, fast,frm ; prop. : άγκυ-
ρα, Heb. vi. 19; metaph. sure, trusty: inayytKia, Ro. iv.
16; κΚησις (cat ϊκΧογή, 2 Pet. i. 10; λόγο? προφητικός, 2
Pet. i. 19; unshaken, constant, Ilcb. iii. 14 : (\πίς, 2 Co.
i. 7 (6), (4 Mace. xvii. 4) ; παρρησία, Heb. iii. 6 (but WH
Tr mrg. in br.) ; valid and therefore inviolable, 'Κόγος,
Heb. ii. 2 : διαθήκη, Heb. ix. 17. (With the same mean-
ings in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) *
β<βαιέ(ι>, -ω : fut. βφαιώσω \ 1 aor. (βιβαίωσα \ Pass.,
[pres. βfβaιoΰμaι'\ ; 1 aor. ϊβιβαιώθην ; {βίβαιος) ; to make
βηη, establish, confirm, make sure : τον λόγον. to prove its
truth and divinity, Mk. xvi. 20; τας (παγγ(\ίας make
good the promises by the event, i. e. fulfil them, Ro. xv.
8 (so also in Grk. writ, as Diod. 1, 5) ; Pass. : τό μαρτίριον
τοΰ Χριστού, 1 Co. i. 6 ; ή σωτηρία . . . (Ις ημάς ίβ€βαιώθη,
a eonstructio praegnans [W. § 66, 2 d.] which may be re-
solved into fty ημάς παρεδόθη κα\ tv ημΐν βίβίΐιος tyiviTO,
Heb. ii. 3 cf. 2 ; see βίβαιος. of men made steadfast and
constant in soul : Heb. xiii. 9 ; 1 Co. i. 8 {βίβαιώσιι υμάς
βΐβαίωσκ
100
ΒηθεσΒά
άικγκλητουί will so confirm you that ye may be unre-
provable [W. § 59, 6 fin.]); 2 Co. i. 21 (βφαιώι> ήμά:
€κ Χριστύν, causing us to be steadfast in our fellowship
with Christ ; cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; tV TJ πίστα, Col. ii. 7
[L Τ Tr Wll om. tV]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. and Plat,
down.) [COMP. : 8ια-β(βαιόομαι.] '
βίβαίωσ-ιβ, -<ω5, ή. (βίβαιύω), coii/irmafion : τοΟ (ΰαγγ(-
λίου, ΙΊύΙ. i. 7 ; fif βιβαίωσιν to produce confidence, lleb.
vi. κ;. (Sap. vi. i:i. Tlmi•., I'lut., Dio Cass., [al.])'
Ρ«'βηλθ5, -Of, (BAG, βαίνω, βηλός tlireshold) ; 1. ac-
cessible, lawful to be trodden ; \η•ο\). used of places ; hence
2. profane, equiv. to '7Π [i. c. unhallowed, common].
Lev. X. ] ; IS. x.\i. 4 ; opp. to oymt (as in [Ezek. .\xii.
26]; Philo, vit. iMoys. iii. § 1«): 1 Tim. iv. 7; vi. 20;
2 Tim. ii. 16; of men, profane i. e. ungodly : 1 Tim. i. 9 ;
Heb. xii. 16. (Often in Grk. >vrit. fr. Aeschyl. down.)
[Cf. Trench § ci.] '
β<βηλό(ι>, -ώ ; 1 aor. {'/3ί/3ΐ)λωσα ; (βίβηΧος); to profane,
desecrate : το σάββατον, Mt. xii. .'J ; το Ίιμύν, Acts .vxiv. 6.
(Often in Sept. for Ί'^π; Judith ix. 8; 1 Mace. ii. 12,
etc.; Ilcliod. 2, 25.)•
Β(€λζΕβονλ and, as written by some [yet no Greek]
autlioritics, Βιιλζιβούβ [cod. Β Βιιζφούλ, so cod. Ν exc.
in Mk. iii. 22 ; adopted by WH, see their App. p. 159 ; cf.
B. 6], 0, indecl., Beelzebul or Beelzebub, a name of Satan,
the prince of evil spirits: Mt. x. 25 ; xii. 24, 27 ; Mk. iii.
22 ; Lk. xi. 15, 18, 19. The form BfeAff/3ouX is composed
of S?3I (rabbin, for '731 dung) and ^i'3, loril of ilunc/
or of filth, i. e. of idolatry; cf. Lightfoot on Mt. xii. 21.
The few who follow Jerome in preferring the form BifX-
ζφοϋβ derive the name fr. 30I '7|^3, lord nf flies, a false
god of the Ekronites (2 K. i. 2) having the power to
drive away troublesome flies, and think the Jews trans-
ferred the name to Satan in contempt. Cf. Win. RWB.
8. V. Beelzebub : and ./. G. M(uller) in Ilerzog vol. i. p.
768 sqq. ; [BB.DD. ; cf. also Meyer and Dr. Jas. Mori-
son on Mt. X. 25 ; some, as ΛVeiss (on Mk. 1. c. ; Bibl. Theol.
§ 23 a.), doubt alike whether the true derivation of the
name has yet been hit upon, and whether it denotes Satan
or only some subordinate ' Prince of demons ']. (Besides
only in eccl. writ., as Ev. Nicod. c. 1 sq.) *
Β(λ(αλ, ό, (^;?'S3 worthlessness, wickedness), Belial, a
name of Satan, 2 (Jo. vi. 15 in Rec.**"'^ L. But Be\iap
(q. V.) is preferable, [see WH. App. p. 159; B. 6].*
BcXiap, ή, indecl., Beliar, a name of Satan in 2 Co. vi.
1 5 Rec." G Τ Tr AVH, etc. This form is either to be as-
cribed (as most suppose) to the harsh Syriac pronuncia-
tion of the word BcXiaX (q. v.), or must be derived from
"^J?'. ^3 loi'd of the forest, i. e. who ndes over forests and
deserts, (cf. Sept. Is. xiii. 21 ; Mt. xii. 43; [BB.DD. s. v.
Belial, esp. Alex.'s Kitto]). Often in eccl. writ.•
β«λόνη, -η!, ή. (βίλοί); a. the point of a spear, b. a
needle: Lk.xviii. 25 L Τ TrWH; see ραφΙ?. ([Batr.130],
Arstph., Aeschin., Aristot., al. ; cf. Lnb. ad Phryn. p. 90.)*
β«λθΐ, -iof, TO, (βάλλω), a missile, a dart, javelin, arrow.
Eph. vi. 16. [From Horn, down.]'
β(λτ(<ιΐν, -ov, gen. -ovot, better ; neut. adverbially in 2
'lim. i. 18 [W. 242 (227); B. 27 (24). Soph., Thuc., al.]•
Β<νιαμ1ν [-/ifiV L Τ Tr WH ; see WH. App. 155, and
s. V. «, »],o,(j"P'.J3, i. e. rp"-|3 son of the right hand, i. e.
of good fortune. Gen. xxxv. 18), Benjamin, Jacob's
twelfth son ; φυλι) Bfwu/ii'i/ the tribe of Benjamin : Acts
xiii. 21 ; Ro. xi. 1 ; Phil. iii. 5; Rev. vii. 8.*
Β<ρν(κη, •ΐ)Γ, jj, (for BtptviicTj, and this the Macedonic
form [cf. aturz, De dial. Mac. p. 31] of Φ^ρινίκη [i. e. vic-
torious]), Bernice or Berenice, daughter of Herod Agrip-
pa the elder. She married first her uncle Ilcrod, king
of Chalcis, and after his death Polemon, king of Cilicia.
Deserting him soon afterwards, she returned to her
brother Agrip])a, with whom previously when a widow
she was said to have lived incestuously. Finally she
became for a time the mistress of the emperor Titus
(Joseph, antt. 1 9, 5, 1 ; 20, 7, 1 and 3 ; Tacit, hist. 2, 2
and 81 ; Suet. Tit. 7) : Acts xxv. 13, 23; xxvi. 30. Cf.
Hiiusrat/i in Schenkel i. p. 39G sq. ; l^Farrar, St. Paul, ii.
599 sq.].•
Bc'poia, -at. ή, (also Bcppoia [i. e. well-watered]), Bercea,
a city of Macedonia, near Pella, at the foot of Mount
Bermius : Acts xvii. 10, 13.*
Bcpotaios. -a, -ov, Bera:an : Acts xx. 4.•
[Βηδσαϊδά, given by L mrg. Tr mrg. in Lk. x. 13 where
Rec. etc. ΒηθσηϊΒά, q. v.]
Βηθαβαρά, -a?, [-pi Rec.•"»•', indecl.], ή, (Π•;ΐ3>' iT3
place of crossing, i. e. where there is a crossing or ford,
cf. Germ. Furthhausen), Bethahara : Jn. i. 28 Rec. [in
Rec.'" of 1st decl., but cf. W. 61 (60)]; see \_WH.
Ajip. ad loc. .and] Βηθανίη, 2.*
Βηβανία, -at, ή, {7V)y Π"3 house of depression or misery
[cf. B.D. Am. ed.]), Bethanij; 1. a town or village
beyond the Mount of Olive?, fifteen furlongs from Jeru-
salem : Jn. xi. 1, 18; xii. 1 ; Mt. xxi. 17; xxvi. 6; Lk. xix.
29 [liere Wll give the accus. -via (see their App. p. 160),
cf . Tr mrg.] ; xxiv. 50 ; Mk. xi. 1 , 1 1 sq. ; xiv. 3 ; now a
little Arab hamlet, of from 20 to 30 families, called el-
'Azirii/eh or el-'Azir (the Arabic name of Lazarus) ; cf.
Robinson i. 431 sq. ; [BB.DD. s. v.]. 2. a town or
village on the cast bank of the Jordan, where John bap-
tized : Jn. i. 28 L Τ Tr WH, [see the preceding word].
But Origen, although confessing that in his day nearly
all the codd. read tV Βηθανία, declares that when he
journeyed through those parts he did not find any place
of that name, but that Bethahara was pointed out as the
place where John had baptized ; the statement is con-
firmed by Eusebius and Jerome also, who were well ac-
quainted witli the region. Hence it is most probable that
Bethany disappeared after the Apostles' time, and was
restored under the name of Bethahara; cf. Liicke ad
loc. !>. 391 sqq. [Cf. Prof. J. A. Paine in Phila. S. S.
Times for Apr. 16, 1881, p. 243 sq.]*
Βηβίσδά, η, indec, (Chald. KIDO i^'5> '• ^• ''""*"' "^
mercy, or place for receiving and caring for the sick),
Belhesda, the name of a pool near the sheep-gate at
Jerusalem, the waters of which had curative powers :
Jn. V. 2 [here L mrg. WH mrg. read ΒηθσαΊ&ά, Τ WH txt.
Βηθζαθά (q. V.)]. A\Tiat locahty in the modern city is
its representative is not clear ; cf. Win. RWB. 9. v. ;
Βηθζαθά
101
βιβΚίον
Arnold in Ilerzog ii. p. 117 sq.; Robinson i. 330 sq.
342 sq.; [B.D. s. v.; "The Recovery of Jerusalem"
(see index)].*
Βηβζοβά, ή, (perh. fr. Chald. Κ.Ί" n-3 house of olives;
not, as some suppose, ϋη-[η n'3 house of newness, Germ.
Neuliaus, since it cannot be shown that the Hebr. Π is
ever represented by the Grk. ζ), BethzcUha : Jn v. 2
Τ [AVU txt.] after codd. Κ L D and other authorities
(no doubt a corrupt reading, yet approved by Keim ii.
p. 177, [see also WH. App. ad loc.]), for Rec. Βηθ(σ^ά,
q. V. [Cf. Kauizsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 9.] *
Βηθ룫ν< ή• [indecl.], (in Joseph, not only so [antt. 8,
10, 1], but also Βηθλίίμη. -ης. antt. 6, 8, 1 ; 11, 7 ; [7, 1,
3] ; από Bηβ\fμωv, 5, 2, 8 ; «κ Βηθλ((μο>ν, 5, 9, 1 ; [cf. 7,
13 ; 9, 2]), Bethlehem, {uvh. Π"? house of bread), a little
town, named from the fertility of its soil, six Roman
miles south of Jerusalem ; now Beit Lachm, with about
3000 [" 5000 ", Baedeker] inhabitants : Mt. ii. 1, J sq. 8,
16 ; Lk. ii. 4, 1.5 ; Jn. vii. 42. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. ; Rob-
inson i. p. 470 sqq.; Raumer p. 313 sqq. ; Tobler, Beth-
lehem in Palastina u.s.w. 1«49; [Socin (i.e. Baedeker),
Hdbk. etc., s. v. ; Porter (i. e. Murray) ib. ; BB.DD.].•
Βηβο•αϊ5ά [WH -σαίδά; see I, i] and (Mt. -xi. 21 RG
Τ WII) -δά». τ;, indecl. but with ace. [which may, how-
ever, be only the alternate form just given ; cf. WH.
App. p. 160] ΒηθσαϊΒάν [Β. 17(16 sq.) ; Win. 61 (60) ;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 119 sq.], (Syr. jl_» ii_ts i• e. house or
place of hunting or fisldng), BethMiida ; 1. a small
city (jroXii, Jn. i. 44 (4.5)) or a village (κώμη. Mk. viii. 22.
23) on the western shore of the Lake of Gennesaret :
Jn. i. 44 (45) ; Mt. .xi. 21 ; Mk. vi. 45 ; Lk. x. 13 [here
L mrg. Tr mrg. ΒφσαΓώά : cf. Tdf. Proleg. u. s.] ; Jn.
xii. 21 (where της ΤάΚίΚαίας is added). 2. a village
in lower Gaulanitis on the eastern shore of Lake Gennes-
aret, not far from the place where the Jordan empties
into it. Philip the tetrarch so increased its population
that it was reckoned as a city, and was called Juliax in
honor of Julia, the daughter of the emperor Augustus
(Joseph, antt. 18, 2, 1 ; Plin. h. n. 5, 15). Many think
that this city is referred to in Lk. ix. 10, on account of
Mk. vi. 32, 45 ; Jn. vi. 1 ; others that the Evangelists
disagree. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.: Raumer p. 122 sq. ;
[BB.DD. s. V. 3. In Jn. v. 2 Lchm. mrg. WH mrg.
read Βηθσάίδά; see s. v. Bηθfσδά■'\'
Βηθψα-γή [but Lchm. uniforml)•. Treg. in Mt. and λΠί.
and R G in Mt. -γή (Β. 15 : W. .52 (51 ) ; cf. Tdf. Proleg.
p. 103) ; in Mt. .x.xi. 1 Tdf. ed. 7 -σφαγή'], ή. indecl., (fr.
n'5 and J3 house of unripe figs), Bethphagc, the name
of a country-seat or hamlet (Euseb. calls it κώμη, Jerome
villula), on the Mount of Olives, near Bethany: Mt. x.xi.
1 ; Mk. xi. 1 R G Tr txt. WH txt., but Tr erg. in br. ;
Lk. xLx. 29. [BB.DD. s. v.]*
βήμα, -rof, TO, (fr. ΒΑΩ. βαίνω), [fr. Horn. (h. Merc),
Pind. down] ; 1. a step, pare : βήμα πο80! the space
which the foot covers, a foot-breadth, Acts vii. 5 (for
^^-!-η3 Dent. ii. 5. cf. Xcn. an. 4. 7, 10: Cyr. 7, 5, 6).
2. a raised place mounted by steps ; α platform, tribune :
used of the official seat of a judge, Mt. xxvii. 19; Jn.
xi.x. 13 : Acts xviii. 12, 16 sq.; xxv. 6, 10, [17] ; of the
judgment-seat of Christ, Ro. xiv. 10 (LTTrWH τοΰ
0foO) ; 2 Co. V. 10 ; of the structure, resembling a throne,
which Herod built in the theatre at Cssarea, and from
which he used to view the games and make speeches to
the people. Acts xii. 21 ; (of an orator's pulpit, 2 Mace,
xiii. 2i; ; Neh. viii. 4. Xen. mem. 3, 6, 1 ; Hdian. 2, 10,
2 [1 ed. Bekk.]).•
βήρνλλο$, -ου, ό, ή, beryl, a precious stone of a pale
green color (Plin. h. n. 37, 5 (20) [i. e. 37, 79]) : Rev.
xxi. 20. (Tob. xiii. 1 7 ; neut. βηρϋΧΚιαν equiv. to □niy,
Ex. xxviii. 20 ; xxxvi. 20 (xxxLx. 13)). Cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Edelsteine, 11 ; [esp. Riehm, IIAVB. ib. 3 and 12].•
βία, -at, ή ; 1. strength, whether of body or of mind :
Hom. and subseq. writ. 2. strent/tk in violent action,
force : μίτά βία! by the use of force, with violence, Act.i
v. 26 ; xxiv. 7 [Rec] ; shock τών κυμάτων. Acts xxvii. 41
[R G, but Tr txt. br. al. om. τών κυμύτων] ; δω τ. βίαν τοΰ
όχλου, the crowd pressing on so violently. Acts xxi. 35.
[SVN. see 8ύναμις, fin.] *
βιά^ω : Οία) ; to use force, to apply force ; τινά, to
force, inflict violence on, one ; the Act. is very rare and
almost exclusively poetic, [fr. Hom. down] ; Pass. [B.
53 (46)] in Mt. xi. 12 ή βaσιλfίa τ. oip. βιάζεται, the king-
dom of heaven is taken by violence, carried by storm, i. e.
a share in the heavenly kingdom is sought for with the
most ardent zeal and the intensest exertion ; cf. Xen.
Hell. 5, 2, 15 (23) -rrSKeit ras βίβιασμίνας; [but see Weiss,
Jas. Morison, Norton, in loc]. The other explanation :
the kingdom of heaven suffereth violence sc. from its ene-
mies, agrees neither with the time when Christ spoke the
words, nor with the context ; cf. Fritzsche, De Wette,
Meyer, ad loc. Mid. βιάζομαι foil, by tU rt to force one's
wai/ into a thing, (is την Ποτίδηιακ, Fhuc. 1, 63 ; «i το (ξω,
7, 09 : i.'r την παρ(μβο\ήν, Polyb. 1, 74, 5; t's τα evras,
Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 19; iir to στρατόπίδον. Pint. Ollio
12, etc.) : eif τ. βασι\(ίαν τοΰ θ(οΰ, to get a share in the
kingdom of God by the utmost earnestness and effort,
Lk. xvi. 16. [COMP. : παραβιάζομαι.Ί*
β(αιοΐ, -a, -ov. (βία), violent, forcible : Acts ii. 2 [A. V.
mighty']. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.)*
βιοστή5, -oC, 6, (βιάζω) ; .1. strong, forceful : Pind.
01. 9, 114 [75]: Pyth. 4, 420 [236; but Pind. only uses
the form |3ιατάί, so al.]. 2. using force, violent: Philo,
agric. § 19. In Mt. xi. 12 those are called βιασταί by
whom the kingdom of God βιάζιται, i. e. who strive to
obtain its privileges with the utmost eagerness and
effort.*
βιβλαρίδιον. -ου, τ<5, (dimin. of the dimin. βιβλάριον fr.
17 βίβλος), a little book: Rev, x, 2, 8 [LTrWH βιβΧίον.
Tilf. 2 .anil 7 βιβΧΜριον, q. v.], 9, 10. Not found in prof,
auth. [Hcrm. vis. 2, 4. 3]; cf. W. 96 (91).•
βιβλι8άριον, -ου. TO, (fr. βιβλίδιον. like Ιματιδάριον fr.
ίμ.ιτι'διοί'). 'ί little book: Rev. x. 8 Tdf. [edd. 2 and] 7.
(Ar^tph. frag. 596.)•
βιβλίον -ου, τά, (dimin. of βίβ\ο{). a small book, a
scroll : Lk. iv. 17, 20: Jn. xx. 30: Gal. iii. 10:2 Tim. iv.
βίβλος
102
βΧασφημία
13, etc.; a written (looiinicnt; a sheet on which some-
tliing has been written, β. άποστασίου \Jiill of (Ih-orre-
merit']: Mt. xix. 7 ; Jlk. x. 4 ; see άίΓϋστάσιοκ, 1. βιβλίον
ζωη!, the list of those whom God lias appointed to eter-
nal salvation : Rev. xiii. 8 [Rec. τ!} βι'/ϋλω] ; xvii. 8 ; xx.
12; xxi. 27; see ζωη, 2 b. [From lldt. down.]
βίβλος, -ου, ή, (or rather ή βίβλος [but the form βίβλ.
more com. when it denotes a w r i t i η ^], the plant called
papyrus, Theophr. hist. |ilant. 4, 8, 2 sq. ; [Plin. h. n.
13, 11 sq. (21 sq.)] ; fr. its bark [rather, the cellular sub-
stance nf its stem (for it Λvas an endogenous plant)]
paper was made [see Tristram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 433 sq. ;
esp. Dureati de la Malle in the Memoires de I'Acad. d.
Inscrr. etc. torn. 19 pt. 1 (18.01) pp. 140-183, and (in
correction of current misapprehensions) Prof. E. Abbot
in the Library Journal for Nov. 1878, p. 323 sq., where
other reff. are also given]), a written hook; a roll or scroll:
Mt. i. 1 ; Lk. iii. 4 ; Mk. xii. 2(Ί ; Acts i. 20 ; rrjs ζωής,
Phil. iv. 3; Rev. iii. 5, etc. ; see βιβΧίον. [From Aeschyl.
down.]
βιβρώσκω : pf. βίβρωκα: to eat: Jn. vi. 13. (In Grk.
writ. fr. Horn, down ; often in Sept.) •
ΒιθννΟα, -as, ή, Billii/nia, a province of Asia Minor,
bounded by the Euxine Sea, the Propontis, Mysia,
Phrycria, Galatia, Paphlagonia : Acts xvi. 7 ; 1 Pet. i. 1.
[Cf. B. D. s. V. ; Diet, of Grk. and Rom. Geog. s. v. ; Coni/-
heare and Howson, St. Paul, etc. ch. viii.] *
βίο5, -ου, ό, [fr. Horn, down] ; a. life extensively,
i.e. the period or course of life [see below and
Trench § xxvii.] : Lk. viii. 14 ; 1 Tim. ii. 2 ; 2 Tim. ii. 4 ;
1 Jn. ii. 16 ; 1 Pet. iv. 3 [Rec.]. b. (as often in Grk.
writ. fr. Hes. opp. 230, 57.5 ; Hdt., Xen.) that by which
life is sustained, resources, wealth, [A. V. living] : Mk.
xii. 44; Lk. viii. 43 [WII om. Tr mrg. br. cl.] ; xv. 12,
30; xxi. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 17 [^goods]. (For onS in Prov.
xxxi. 14 (xxL\. 32).)*
[SvN. /3/oj. ζω-ί): ζ. existence (having death as its antithe-
sis) ; 0. the period, means, manner, of existence IleiHc
the former is mure uaturally used of animals, the latter ol
men ; cf. zoology, 1) i υ grapliy. X. T. us.age exalts ζω•Ιι, ami
so teiiils to deba.se /3'us- Hut see Up l/jhilt. Igu. ad Horn. 7.)
βιίω, -ω : 1 aor. inf. βιώσαι ; for which in Attic the 2
aor. inf. βιώ^αι is more common, cf. W. 84 (80) ; [B. .54
(48) ; Veitch or L. and S. s. v.] ; (/3ior) ; [fr. Hom. down] ;
to spend life, to lire : τίιν χρόνον, to pass the time, 1 Pet. iv.
2; (Job xxix. 18; ήμίρας, Xen. mem. 4, 8, 2). [Syn.
see βίος, fin.]*
ρ£ω(Γΐ5, -f ωί, i;, manner ofliring and nctinrj, iray nf life :
Acts xxvi. 4. (.Sir. prolog. 1 bia της ivvipov βι,ώσιως ;
not found in prof, auth.) *
βιωτικόί, -ή, -όν, pertaining to life and the affairs of this
life : Lk. xxi. 34 ; 1 Co. vi. 3 sq. (The word, not used in
Attic, first occurs in Aristot. h. a. 9, 17, 2 [p. 616'', 27] ;
ypt'tat βιωτικαί is often used, as Polyb. 4, 73, 8 ; Philo, vit.
Moys. iii. § 18 fin. : Diod. 2, 29; Artemid. oneir. 1, 31.
Cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 3.54 sq.) *
βλαβερός, -ά, -όν. (βλάπτω), hurtful, injurious, (Xen.
mem. 7, .5, 3 opp. to ωφίλιμος) : 1 Tim. vi. 9 ίττιθυμίαι
βλαβίραί, cf. ήίοναί β\. Xen. mem. 1, 3, 11. (Often in
Grk. writ. fr. Ilom. [i. e. h. Merc. 36 (taken fr. lies. opp.
365)] down; once in Sept., Prov. x. 26.)•
βλάπτω : fut. βλάψω ; 1 aor. ΐβλαψα ; to hurt, harm, in-
jure : Ttxtl, Mk. xvi. 18 ; Lk. iv. 35. (Very often in Grk.
writ. fr. Hom. down ; Tob. xii. 2 ; 2 Mace. xii. 22, etc.) *
βλασ-τάνω, 3 pers. sing. pres. subj. βλαστό fr. the form
βλαστάω, .Mk. iv. 27 LTTr WH (cf. 15. 5.5(48) ; [Eccl.
ii. 6 ; Ilerm. sim. 4, 1 sq.]) ; 1 aor. (βλάστησα (cf. W.
84 (80) ; [B. 1. c.]) ; 1. intransitively, to sprout, hud,
put forth leaves: Mk. iv. 27 ; Mt. xiii. 26 ; Heb. ix. 4 ;
(Num. xvii. 8; Joel ii. 22, etc. ; in (irk. writ. fr. Pind.
down). 2. in later Grk. writ, transitively, <o^roi/uee:
TOK καρπόν, Jas. v. 18. (Gen. i. 11, etc.)*
Βλάσ -Tos [i. e. a sprout], -ου, ό, Blastus, the cliamber-
lain of king Herod Agrippa I. : Acts xii. 20 [cf. Mey.
ad loc.].•
βλασ-φηικ'ω, -ώ ; impf. (βλασφημούν ; 1 aor. (βλασφή-
μησα ; Pass., [pres. βλασφημούμαι]; 1 fut. βλασφημηθί]-
σομαι ; (βλάσφημος, q. v.) ; to .ipealc reproachfuUij, rail at,
rerile, calumniate, (Vulg. hlasphemo); absol. : Lk. xxii.
65 ; Acts xiii. 45 ; xviii. 6 ; xxvi. 11 ; 1 Tim. i. 20 ; 1 Pet.
iv. 4 ; with ace. of pers. or thing (as in later Grk., Joseph.,
Plut., Appian, etc.) : Mt. xxvii. 39 ; Mk. iii. 28 L Τ Tr
WH ; XV. 29 ; Lk. .xxiii. 39; Tit. iii. 2 ; Jas. ii. 7; Jude
1 ; with the cognate noun βλασφημίαν, to utter hlasphe-
mij (Plat. legg. 7 p. 800 c. ; sec ά-γαπάω ad fin.), Mk. iii.
28 R G (where L Τ Tr WII όσα for όσας, see above) ;
[foil, by iv, 2 Pet. ii. 12; cf . Bttm. as at end, and see
άγκοίω, a.]. Pass, βλασφημούμαι to he evil spoken of, re-
viled, railed at : Ro. iii. 8 ; xiv. 16 ; 1 Co. iv. 13 (T WH
Tr mrg. &υσφημούμ(νοι) ; χ. 30 ; Tit. ii. 5 ; 2 Pet. ii. 2 ;
TO όνομα τίνος, Ro. ii. 24 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1. Spec, of those
who by contemptuous speech intentionally come short
of the reverence due to God or to sacred things (for
c]1J, 2 K. xix. 6, 22 cf. 4 ; cf. Grimm on 2 Maec. x. 34) ;
absol. : Mt. ix. 3 ; xxvi. 65 ; Mk. ii. 7 L Τ Tr WII ; [Jn.
X. 36]; τον θ(άν. Rev. xvi. 11, 21 ; τήνθ(άν, Acts xix. 37
(G L Τ Tr WH τήν θ(όν) ; τό όνομα τοϋ θ(οΰ. Rev. xiii.
6 ; xvi. 9; το πν^νμα τον θ(οΰ (βλασφημείται), 1 Pet. iv.
14 Rec; δόξα?, Jude 8 ; 2 Pet. ii. 10 (see b6^a. III. 3 b. y.) ;
iif TO πν(ϋμα το άγ. Mk. iii. 29 ; Lk. xii. 10, (eh β(ούς.
Plat. rep. 2 p. 381 e.). The earlier Grks. say βλασφ.
fi'r Tiva. nepi or κατά TtiOj ; [on the N. T. constructions
cf. W. 222 (208); 629 (584); B. 146 (128)].•
βλασφημία, -ας, ή, railing, reviling, (Vulg. blasphemia) ;
a. univ. slander, detraction, speech injurious to another's
good name : Mt. xii. 31 ; xv. 19 ; Mk. iii. 28 ; vii. 22 ; Eph.
iv. 31 ; Col. iii. 8; 1 Tim. vi. 4; Jude 9 (κρίσις βλα-
σφημίας, i. q. κρίσις βλάσφημος in 2 Pet. ii. 11, a judgment
pronounced in reproachful terms) ; Rev. ii. 9. b. spe-
cifically, impious and reproachful speech injurious to the
divine majesty : Mt. xxvi. 65 ; ]\Ik. ii. 7 [R G] ; xiv. 64 ;
Lk. V. 21 ; Jn. x. 33 ; Rev. xiii. 5 [not Lchm.] ; όνομα or
ονόματα βλασφημίας i. q. βλάσφημα (cf. W. § 34, 3 b. ;
[B. § 1 32, 10]) : Rev. xiii. 1 ; xvii. 3 [R G Tr, see γεμω] ;
τοϋ πν(ΰματος, gen. of obj., Mt. xii. 31 ; προς τον θιόν, Rev.
xiii. 6. (Eur., Plat., Dem., ah ; for ΠϊΧ;, Ezek. xxxv.
βΧάσφημος
103
βο
J 2.) [BB.DD. s. V. Blasphemy ; Cam^jJeW, Diss, on the
Gospels, diss. ix. pt. ii.] *
βλάσφημο;, -ou, (βλάξ sluggish, stupid, and φήμη speech,
report, [al. βλάπτω (ij. v.) and φ■J), speakinij evil, slan-
derouK, rrprnnchful, railinf/, abusive: Acts vi. 11 {ρήματα
βλάσφημα eis Μωνσην και τον θΐόν) ; [vi. 13 Rec. (ρ, βλ.
κατά τοί) τόπον τυΐι άγιου)] ; 2 Pet. ii. 11 (see βλασφημία,
a.) ; Rev. xiii. .5 [Lchra.] ; βλάσφημος as subst. a blas-
phemer : 1 Tim. i. 13 ; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Is. Ixvi. 3 ; Sap. i.
6 ; Sir. iii. 16 ; 2 Mace. Lx. 28 ; [x. 36 (of. 4)] ; in Grk.
writ. fr. Dem. down.) *
βλέμμα, -τοί, τό, (βλίπω) ; a look, glance : β\(μματι κ- άκοί;
in seeing and hearing, 2 Pet. ii. 8 [cf. War field iii I'resby t.
Rev. for 1 S83 p. 62:i scjci.]. (Eur., Arst ph., Dem., Plut., al.) •
βλΐΐτω ; [im])f. fβλf■πov] ; fut. βλίψω ; 1 aor. eβλe■ψa ;
[pres. pass, βλέπομαι] ; Sept. for ΠΝ";, DJS, ΠΙΠ, D"2n ;
in Grk. writ. fr. Aesehyl. down ; to see, discern ; 1.
with the bodily eye; a. to be possessed of sight, have
the power of seeing, opp. to τυφλάς: Mt. .xii. 22 : .xiii. 16 ;
XV. 31 ; Jn. ix. 7, 15, 1 9, 25 ; Acts ix. 9 ; Ro. xi. 8, 10 ;
Rev. iii. 18, etc. (Soph. Oed. Col. 73; Arstph. Plut. 15;
Xen. mem. 1, 3, 4; Ael. v. h. 6, 12, etc. Ex. iv. 11 ;
xxiii. 8, etc. Tob. xi. 15). to βλίπαν sight, the power
of seeing, Lk. vii. 21 (GLTTrWIIom. ro). b. to
perceive by the use of the eyes, to see, look; descry; a.
absol. : βλίπόντων αϋτων while they were looking, Acts i.
9 ; [xxii. 1 1 Tr mrg. W Η mrg.] ; ΐρ)(ου και βλeπf, Rec. in
Rev. vi. 1, 3, 5, 7. β. with ace. of pers. or thing: Mt.
rii. 3 ; xi. 4 ; xxiv. 2 ; Mk. v. 31 ; viii. 23 sq. ; xiii. 2 ;
Lk. vi. 41 ; xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. WH reject the vs.] ;
Jn. i. 29; Acts iv. 14, etc.; [Rev. xviii. 18 Rec. opiwff];
την φωνήν, him who uttered the voice. Rev. i. 1 2 ; όραμα.
Acts xii. 9 ; he who has free access to one, as princes,
ministers, and personal friends have to a king, is said
βλ. TO πρόσωπον tivos ('^^ΏΠ 'J3 'N'l, 2 K. xxv. 19 ; Jer.
Iii. 25 ; Esth. i. 14) ; hence in Mt. xviii. 10 angels of
closest access or of highest rank are referred to (see
"Ρχάγγ^^"')• Pass, τα βλfπόμfva the things that are
seen : 2 Co. iv. 18 ; Ileb. xi. 3 (L Τ Tr WII το βλιπόμ^νην,
the sum-total or complex of things seen) ; ίλπ'ις βλιπομίνΐ)
hope of things that are seen, i. e. that are present, Ro.
viii. 24. c. to turn the eyes to anything, to look at,
look upon, gaze at : γνναικα, Mt. v. 28 ; eU τι or τίνα [W.
§ 33 g.], Lk. ix. 62; Jn. xiii. 22; Acts iii. 4: elt τον
οΰρανόν. Acts i. 1 1 Τ Tr WH ; in the sense of looking into
(i. e. in order to read), βιβλίον. Rev. v. 3 sq. d. univ.
to perceive by the senses, to feel : την Svtpov ίσχυρόν [Τ WII
om. ϊσ•χ.],Μΐ. xiv. 30, (κτΰπον SeSopKa, Aesehyl. sept. 104).
e. to discover by use, to know by experience : τι, Ro. vii.
23 ; foil, by ort, 2 Co. vii. 8 ; by attract, το θηρίον, ότι κτλ.
Rev. xvii. 8 ; νπιρ ο βλίπ(ΐ μ( for ίιπίρ τοϋτο, ό βλίπίΐ μι
όντα, lest he think me greater than on personal knowl-
edge he finds me to be, 2 Co. xii. 6. 2. metaph. to see
with the m i η d' s eye ; a. to have (the power of) im-
derstanding : βλίποντις oi βλίπονσι, though endued with
understanding they do not understand, Mt. xiii. 13; Lk.
viii. 10. b. to discern mentulh/, observe, perceive, dis-
cover, understand; absol.: hi ίσόπτρον, 1 Co. xiii. 12; of
the omniscient God βλίπων tv τώ κρύπτω seeing in secret,
where man sees nothing, I\It. vi. 4,6,18 [here L Τ Tr
WII βλ. fV T. κρυφαίω^ ; ('■γγίζονσαν την ήμϊραν, IIclj. χ.
25 (fr. certain external sign.s) ; Ίησοϋν . . . ϊστΐφανωμί-
νον, we see (from his resurrection and from the effects
and witness of the Holy Spirit) Jesus crowned, Ileb. ii.
9 ; foil, by oTt, Ileb. iii. 1 9 ; Jas. ii. 22. c. to turn the
thoughts or direct the mind to a thing, to consider, contem-
plate, look to ; absol. βλίπιτί take heed : Mk. xiii. 23, 33 ;
with an ace. of the thing or pers., 1 Co. i. 26; x. 18;
2 Co. X. 7 ; Phil. iii. 2 ; Col. ii. 5 ; foU. by πόα with indie.
[Λν. 300 (282); Β. 255 (219)], Lk. viii. 18; 1 Co. iii.
10; Eph. V. 15; to weigh carefully, examine, foil, by
interrog. τι with indie. Mk. iv. 24 ; els πρόσωπον twos,
to lojk at i. e. have regard to one's external condition,
— used of those who are influenced by partiality: Mt.
xxii. 16 ; Mk. xii. 14. By a use not found in Grk. auth.
iavTov βλίπιιν to look to one's self (i. q. sibi cavere') : Jlk.
xiii. 9 ; foil, by Ira μή [cf. B. 242 (209)], 2 Jn. 8 ; βΚί-
π(ΐν από Tivos (i. <]. sibi cavere ab aliquo) to beware of one
[W. 223 (209), cf. 39 (38) ; B. 242 (209), cf. 323 (278)],
Mk. viii. 15; xii. 38; look to in the sense of providing,
taking care: foil, by ΐνα, 1 Co. ,xvi. 10; foil, by μή with
subj. aor., Mt. xxiv. 4; !Mk. xiii. 5 ; Lk. xxi. 8: Acts xiii.
40; 1 Co. viii. 9 (μήπωs); x. 12; Gal. v. 15; Heb. xii.
25; foil, by μή ivitli fut. indie. Col. ii. 8; Heb. iii. 12.
The Grks. say όράν μή. [cf. W. 503 (468 sq.) ; B. 242 scp
(209)]. 3. in a geographical sense, hke Lat. spccto
[Eng. lookl, of places, mountains, buildings, etc., turned
towards any quarter, as it were facing it : foil, by κατά
with ace, Acts xxvii. 12 [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Phenice],
(Sept. [Num. xxi. 20]; Ezek. xi. 1 ; [xliv. 1 ; xlvii. 1];
πράς, Xen. Hell. 7, 1, 17; mem. 3, 8, 9; Hdian. 6, 5, 2 ;
Diog. Lacrt. 1, 2, 48; Sept. Ezek. ix. 2; xl. 24; [xlvi.
1] ; ftf, viii. 3, etc. [for other exx. see Soph. Lex. s. v.]).
[Syn. see s. v. όράω. Comp. : ava-, άπο-, δια-, ΐμ-, ('πι-,
πίρι-, προ-βλΐπω.~]
βλητ€'ο5, -α, -ον, (βύλλω), which must be thrown or put,
(see βάλλω, 2) ; found only in neut. : Mk. ii. 22 (WH
Tom. Trbr.); Lk. v. 38 βλι/τ/οι/ ΐστί foil, by ace. τον
oXvov, cf. Matth. § 447, 3 a.; [B. 190 (165)]. (Besides
only in Basil i. p. 137 c. ed. Benedict.) *
Boavep^i's ([RG, so Suid. (ed. Gaisf. 751 a.) ; but] L Τ
Tr WII Boan/py/t), Boanerges. Ilcbr. ΐ7^"> "^3 i. e. sons of
thunder (as Mark himself explains it), [the name given
by our Lord to James and John the sons of Zebedoe] :
Alk. iii. 1 7 ; 3 pronounced Boa as Noabhyim for Xtbhy-
im ; see Lghlfl. Horae llebr. ad loc. ; uJl, in Ps. Iv. 15
a tumultuous crowd, seems in Sj-riac to have signified
thunder; so that the name Boavηpγe's seems to denote
fiery and destructive zeal that may be hkened to a thun-
der-storm, and to make reference to the occurrence nar-
rated in Lk. ix. 54. [Cf. 1 )r. Jas. Morison's Com. on Mk.
Lc. ; Kautzsch, Grain, d. Bibl.-.\ram. p. 9.]*
βοάω, -ώ ; rim[)f. ίΊ3όωΐ' Acts xxi. 34 Rec] ; 1 aor.
(βόησα ; (jSo^)'; fr. Ilom. down ; in Sept. mostly for
i^^R, p>!;, PilV' '" '^'^y "'"'"'• ^^0^1^ (Lat. boo) ; 1. to
raise a cry: of joy. Gal. iv. 27 (fr. Is. liv. 1); of pain.
>0€9
104
βονΚή
Μι. xxvii. 4G Lrarg. TrWII; Actsviii. 7. 2. to cri/
i. e. speah with a high, strong voice : Mt. iii. 3, Mk. i. 3, Lk.
iii. 4, Jn. i. 23, (all fr. Is. xl. 8) ; Mk. xv. 34 ; Lk. Lx. 38
(IIG άναβ.); [xviii. ;!8]; Acts xvii. C ; .xxi. 34 Rec. ;
.x.xv. 24 (R(; cV(/3.). 3. πμύί τίνα Ιο erg to one for
help, implore his aid: Lk. xviii. 7 [T TrAVII αίτώ ; cf.
W. 212 (109)], (1 S. vii. 8; 1 Clir. v. 20; IIos. vu. 14,
etc. for ^X pv). [CoMP. : ava-, ίττί-βοάω.] *
[Syx. βοάω, κα\4ω, κράζω, κραυ-γάζω: It is not UU-
iiistriK'tlvo to notice that in elas.fic us.age κα\(!ν denotes
'to cry out ' for a purpose, to cull; βοΰν to try out as a mani-
festation of feeling; κράζαν to cry out liars lily, often of
an inarticulate and hratisli sound ; tluis Ka\ctv suggests i n-
telligence; βοΰν sensibilities; κρίζαν instincts;
hence, $oav esp. a cry for help, κραιτγάζίΐν, intensive of
κράζω, denotes to cry coarsely, in contempt, etc Cf . iScluuidt
ch. 3.]
Boc's, o, Mt. i. 5 Τ WII, for Rcc. Βοόζ, q. v.
βοή, -ης, ή, fi erg : Jas. v. 4 (of tliOFC imploring ven-
geance). From Ilom. down.*
βοήθεια, -at, ή, (see βοηθίω), help : Ileb. iv. IC, (often
in Sept., cliictly for TV^VJ,, and "ITjj; in Grk. writ. fr.
Thuc. and Xen. down) ; plur. helps : Acts xxvii. 1 7
[see ILackett ad loc. ; B.D. s. v. Ship 4 ; Smith, Voyage
and Shipwr. of St. Paul, pp. 106 sq. 204 sq. ; cf. ύπ-ο^ώΐ'-
νυμι]*
βοη-θ<ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. (βοήθησα ; (f r. βοή a cry and β(ω
to run) ; in Sept. chiefly for Ίΐ;; ; in Grk. writ. fr.
[Aeschyl. and] II<lt. down ; prop, to run to the erg (of
those in danger) ; hence univ. to help, suceor, bring aid :
Tii/i, Mt. XV. 2J ; Mk. ix. 22, 24 (βοήθα μου rfj απιστία,
" (juod fiduciae meae deest bonitate tua supple," Gro-
tius); Acts xvi. 9; xxi. 28; 2 Co. vi. 2; Ileb. ii. 18;
Rev. xii. 16.*
βοηβόϊ, -ο», helping, (νή^ς, lldt. 5, Π7; στήριγμα, Tob.
viii. 6) ; mostly as subst. [so fr. Hdt. down] a helper :
Heb. xiii. 6 (of God, fr. Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 7, as often
in Sept.).•
βύβυνοΐ, -ου, ό. η pit, a ditch : Mt. xii. 1 1 ; xv. 14 ; Lk.
τί. 33. (Solon in Bekker's Anecd. i. 85; Xen. oec. 10,
3; Theophr. hist. pi. 4, 2, 2 [(var.) ; al.]; Sept. 2 S.
xviii. I 7, etc.) *
βολή, -ijs, ή, (βιίΧΧω), a throw : ώσίΐ λίθου βοΧήν about
a stone's throw, as far as a stone can be cast by the hand,
Lk. xxii. 41, (ώσίϊ τό|ου βολήν. Gen. xxi. 16 ; μίχρι λίθου
κ. ακοντίου βυλήί, Thuc. 5, 6.5 ; (ξ ακοντίου βολής, Xen.
Hell, 4, 5, 15).•
βολίζω : 1 aor. ίβόλισα ; (βολίς a missile, dart ; a line
and plummet with which mariners sound the depth of
the sea, a sounding-lead) ; to heave the lead, take sound-
ings : Acts xxvii. 28. (Besides only in Eustath. ; [Mid.
intrans. to sink in water, Geopon. 6, 1 7].) *
βολί9. -ι'δοΓ, ή, (βάλλω), a missile, dart. Javelin: Heb.
xii. 20 Rec. fr. Ex. xix. 13. (Neh. iv. 17; Num. xxiv.
8; [Sap. V. 22; Hab. iii. 11]; Plut. Demetr. 3.) •
Βο*ϊι ό, (!1'3 fleetness [but see B.D. Am. ed.]), Booz,
[more commonly] Doaz, a kinsman of Ruth, afterwards
her (second) husband, (Ruth ii. I stjq. ; 1 Chr. ii. 11):
Mt. i. 5 [Boor L Tr, Boe's Τ WH] ; Lk. iii. 32 [L Τ Tr
Wn Hour].•
βόρβορος, -ov, ό, dung, mire : 2 Pet. ii. 22. (Sept. ;
Aesch) I., Arstph., Plat., sqq. ; eV βορβόρω κνλίίσθαι, of
the vicious, Ejiiet. diss. 4, 11, 20.)•
βορρίβ, -a [\V. § 8, 1; B. 20 (18)], ό, (equiv. to
βορίας, -ίου), often [in Attic writ.], in Sept. for p3V ;
1. Boreas; the north-north-east wind. 2. the north:
Lk. xiii. 29; Rev. .\.\i. 13, [cf. W. 121 (115) s. v. ^f-
σημβρία'].*
βόσ-κω; as in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down, to feed: Mk.
V. 14; Lk. XV. 15; άρνία, πρόβατα, Jn. xxi. 15, 17, (in a
fig. disc, portraying the duty of a Christian teacher to
jironiotc in c\ery way the spiritual Λvelfare of the iiieni-
bers of the church) ; ό /3όσκωΐ' a herdsman : Mt. viii. 33;
Lk. viii. 34. In Pass, and Mid. [pres. ptcp. βησκάμ(νο(,
cf. W. § 38, 2 note] of flocks or herds, to fccil, gruzf :
Mt. viii. 30; Jlk. v. 11; Lk. viii. 32. (In Sept. for
[Svx. βόσκίΐν, ττοιμαΐνίΐν: π. is the wider, β. the nar-
rower term; the former includes oversight, the latter de-
notes nourishment ; ir. maybe rendered tmd, β. specifically
feed. See Trench § xxv. ; Mey. on Jn. u. s.; Schmidt ch. 200.]
Βοσ-όρ, ό, (11>3 a torch, a lamp; Sept. Brup, Num.
xxii. 5 ; -x.xxi. 8 ; Dcut. x.xiii. 4 ; by change of i' into σ,
Βοσόρ), liosor, the father of Balaam : 2 Pet. ii. 15 [WII
txt. Βίώρ].•
βοτάνη, -ης, ή. (βόσκω), an herb Jit for fodder, green
herb, growing jilant: Ileb. vi. 7. (Ilom., Pind., Plat.,
Eur., Diod., Ael., al. Sept. for χ•ή, ΤΧΠ, ab^. [Met-
aph. of men, Ignat. ad Eph. 10, 3; ad Trail. 6, 1 ; ad
Philad. 3, 1].)•
βότρυς, -nor, ό, a bunch or cluster of grapes : Rev. xiv.
18 [cf. B. 14 (13)]. (Gen. xl. 10; Num. xiii. 24 sq.
Grk. writ. fr. Ilom. down.) •
βουλευτή?, -οϋ, ό, a councillor, senator, (buleuta, Plin.
epp.) : first in Horn. II. 6, 114; of a member of the
Sanhedrin, Mk. xv. 43; Lk. xxiii. 50. (Job iii. 14;
xii. 17.)*
βουλ(νω : i. to deliberate, take counsel, resolve, give
counsel, (Is. xxiii. 8 ; [fr. Horn. down]). 2. to be η
councillor or senator, discharge the office of a senator :
Xen. mem. 1,1,18; Plat. Gorg. p. 473 e. ; [al.]. In the
N. T. Mid., [pres. βουλ(ύομαι ; impf. ίβουλιυόμην ; fut.
βουλίΰσομαι, Lk. xiv. 31 L mrg. Τ WH ; 1 aor. ίβουλινσά-
μην] ; 1. to deliberate with one's self, consider : foil,
by «, Lk. xiv. 31, (Xen. mem. 3, 6, 8). 2. to take
counsel, resolve : foil, by inf., Acts v. 33 [R G Τ Tr
mrg.]; xv. 37[Rec.]; xxvii. 39 ; τί, 2Co. i. 17; foil,
by "i/a, Jn. xi. 53 L Τ Tr txt. WH ; xii. 10 [cf. W. § 38,
3]. [COMP. : irapa- (-μαι), σνμ-βουλ(ΰω.^ *
βουλή, -ής, ή, (βούλομαι), fr. Hom. down ; often in
Sept. for 71V ;• ; counsel, purpose: Lk. xxiii. 51 (where
distinsuished fr. ή πράξις) : Acts v. 38; xxvii. 12 (see
τίθημι. 1 a.), 42 ; plur. 1 Co. iv. 5 ; ή βουλή τοΰ θ(οΰ, Acts
xiii. 36 ; esp. of the pnr|iose of God respecting the sal-
vation of men through Christ : Lk. vii. 30 ; Acts ii. 23 ;
iv. 28; [Ileb. vi. 17] ; πάσαν τήν βουλήν τον θ(οΰ all the
βούΧημα
105
βρέχω
contents of the divine plan, Acts xx. 27; ή βηυ\ή τοϋ
θ(\ήματο! αίτοΰ the counsel of his will, Eph. i. 11.'
βονλημα, -ros. to, (βούλομαι), will, counsel, purpose:
Acts xxvii. 43; Ko. ix. IJ; 1 Pet. iv. 3 (Rec. ΘΛημα).
(2 Mace. XV. 5 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Plat, down.) [Syn.
cf. BeXa,, fin.] •
βονλομαι. 2 pers. sing. /SovXec Lk. xxii. 42 (Attic for
βούλη, cf. W. § 13, 2 a.; B. 42 (37)); impf. {βουλόμην
(Attic [(cf. Veitch), yet commonly] ηβουλύμην) ; 1 aor.
(βυνληθηυ ( Mt. i. I'J) and ήβουληθην (2 Jn. 12 KG; but
al. (βουλί,θ. cf. [ 117/. App. p. 162] ; W. § 12, 1 c. ; B. 33
(29)) ; Sept. for n^X, γ2Γ\ ; [fr. Horn, down]; lo will,
wi^li ; and 1. commonly, to will deliberalebj, have a
purpose, be minder! : foil, by an inf., Mk. xv. 15 ; Acts v.
28, 33 (L WH Tr txt. for R G Τ ϊβουλήοντο) ; xii. 4 ; xv.
37 (L Τ Tr WH for R ί'βουλίΐΐσατο) ; xviii. 27 ; xLx. 30 ;
xxii. 30; xxiii. 28; xxvii. 43; xxviii. 18; 2 Co. i. 15;
Heb. vi. 17; 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 10 (τους βονλομίνου! sc.
€πώ(\(σθαι Tois ά5(\φον!) ; Jude 5 ; Jas. i. 18 (βουΧηθι'ί!
άτικυησιν ήμίις of his own free will he brought us forth,
with which will it ill accords to say, as some do, that they
are tempted to sin by God), with an ace. of the obj.
ToCro, 2 Co. i. 17 (L f .Tr WH for R βουλ^νόμίης) ; foil.
by an ace. with inf. 2 Pet. iii. 9. of the will electing or
choosing between two or more things, answering to
the hat. placet milii: Mt. i. 19 (cf. ίνθυμιίσθαί. 20) ; xi.
27 [not L mrg.] ; Lk. x. 22 ; xxii. 42 ; Acts xxv. 20 ; [1
Co. xii. 11]; Jas. iii. 4 ; iv. 4 ; foil, by the subj. βού\(σθ(,
ύμ'ίρ απολύσω ; is it ijour icill I should release unto i/nul
(cf. W. § 41 a. 4 b.; B. § 139, 2), Jn. xviii. 39. oif the
will prescribing, foil, by an ace. with inf.: Phil. i.
12 (γινώσκαν ίμάς βονλομαι I would have you know,
know ye) ; 1 Tim. ii. 8 ; v. 14 ; Tit. iii. 8. 2. of will-
ing as an affection, to desire : foil, by an inf., 1 Tim. vi.
9 (οι βουΧόμ(νοι nXovrdu) ; Acts xvii. 20; .xviii. 15;
ίβουλόμην (on this use of the impf. see B. 217 (187) sq. ;
[cf. W. 283 (2ΰ6); Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. 13]), Acts
XXV. 22 ; Philem. 13. On the difference between βοΰλομαι
and θίλω, see θί\ω, fin.*
βουνέβ, -oC, 0, a Cyrenaic word ace. to Hdt. 4, 199,
which Eustath. [831, 33] on E. 11, 710 says was used by
Pldlemon [No5. 1], a comic poet (of the 3d cent. B. c).
It was rejected by the Atticists, but from Polyb. on [who
(5, 22, 1 sq.) uses it interchangeably with λόφοΓ] it was
occasionally received by the later Grk. writ. (Strabo,
Pausan., Plut., al.) ; in Sept. very often forn>'3J ; (perh.
fr. Β.λΩ to ascend [cf. Hesych. βοννοϊ- βωμοί, and βωμίδις
in Hdt. 2, 125 (Schmidt eh. 99, 11)]); α hill, eminence,
mound : Lk. iii. 5 (Is. xl. 4) ; xxiii. 30 (Hos. x. 8). Cf.
Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc p. 153 sq. ; Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 355 sq. ; ^Donaldson, Xew Crat. § 469].*
βοΰϊ, βοΟ!, ace. sing, βοϋν, [ace. plur. βόας, Β. 14 (13)],
ό. ή, an οχ, a cow : Lk. xiii. 15 ; xiv. 5, 19 ; Jn. ii. 14 sq.;
1 Co. ix. 9 ; I Tun. v. 18. [From Hom. down.] •
βραβ<ΐον, -ου, τό, (βραβ(νς the arbiter and director of a
contest, who awards the prize ; called also βραβΐυτής,
Lat. designator), the award lo the victor in the garner, a
prize, (in eccl. Lat. brabeuni, brabium), (V'ulg. brarium) :
1 Co. ix. 24 ; metaph. of the heavenly reward for Chris-
tian character, Phil. iii. 14. (Oppian, cyn. 4, 197;
Lycophr. 1154; ujro/ioi/ijs βρ. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 5
[where see Lghtft., Gebh. and Ham.] ; άφδαρσίοΓ, Mart.
Polyc. 17.)•
βραβΐΰω ; in Grk. writ. fr. Isoc. and Dem. down ; 1.
to be a βμαβής or umpire (see βραβ(Ίιιν). 2. to decide,
determine. 3. to direct, control, rule : Col. iii. 1 5 [where
see -Meyer ; contra, Bp. Lghtft. CoMP. : κατα-βριιβιυω.] '
βραδύνω ; (βρα8νς) ; to delay, be slow ; 1. rarely
trans, lo render slow, retard : την σωτηρίαν, Sept. Is. xlvi.
13 ; pass. ό8ός. Soph. El. 1501 [cf. O. C. 1628]. Mostly
2. intrans. lo be long, to tarry, loiter, (so fr. Aeschyl.
down) : 1 Tim. iii. 15 ; unusually, ivith gen. of the thing
which one delays to effect, 2 Pet. iii. 9 τήι eVoyytXiat
[A. V. is not slack concerning his promise} i- e. to fulfil his
promise ; cf. W. § 30, 6 b. (Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 22.)•
βραδιητλο^'ω, -ώ ; (βρα8νς and ττΧηίς) ; to sail slowly : pres.
ptcp. in Acts .xxvii. 7. (Artem. oneir. 4, 30.) •
βρα8ν$ -da, -ύ, slow; a. prop. : e's τι, Jas. i. 19. b.
metaph. dull, inactice, in mind ; stupid, slow lo apprehend
or believe, (so Hom. II. 10, 226; opp. to σν«τΟΓ, Polvb.
4, 8, 7 ; τον νουν, Dion. Hal. de Att. oratt. 7 [de Lys.
judic.]; 6υσμαθία• βρα&υτ!)ς tv μαβήσΐΐ. Plat, defin. p.
415 ε.) : with a dat. of respect, rj καρδία, Lk. xxiv. 25.
[Syx. see αργός, fin.] *
βρα8υτή5 (on accent cf. Bllm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 417 sq. ;
[Chandler §§ 634, 635 ; W. 52 sq. (52)]), -^ror, ή, (βρα-
δύς), slowness, delay : 2 Pet. iii. 9. (From Hom. down.) *
βραχούν, -ofos, 0, [fr. Hom. down], Ihe arm : the βρα-
χίων of God is spoken of Hebraistically for the might, the
power of God, Lk. i. 51 (cf. Deut. iv. 34 ; v. 15 ; xxvi. 8) ;
Jn. xii. 38 (Is. Uii. 1) ; Acts xiii. 17.•
βραχΰ$, -f ία, -ύ, short, small, little, (fr. Pind., Hdt., Thuc.
down); a. of place; neut. βραχύ adverbially, α sAort
dL-itance, a little : Acts xxvii. 28 (2 S. xvi. 1 ; Thuc. 1, 63).
b. of time; βραχνή a short lime, for a little vrhiie: Heb.
ii. 7, 9, (where the writer transfers to time what the
Sept. in Ps. viii. 6 says of rank); Acts v. 34 [here
L Τ Tr WH om. τι] ; μ(τά βραχύ shortly afler, Lk. xxii. 58.
c. of quantity and measure; j3pa;^i τί [Tr txt. AVH
om. L Tr mrg. br. τι] some little part, a little : Jn. vi. 7
(βραχύ τι τοΰ μίλιτος, 1 S. xiv. 29 ; ίλαιον βραχύ, Joseph,
antt. 9, 4, 2 ; |3ρα;(ΰτατοΓ Χιβανωτός, Philo de vict. off.
§ 4) ; δια βραχίων in few sc. words, briefly, Heb. xiii. ii
(so [Plat., Dem., al. (cf. Bleek on Heb.'l. c.)] Joseph,
b. j. 4. 5, 4 ; iv βραχυτάτω δηΧοΰν to show very briefly,
Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 15).'
βρ«'φθ5, -ouf . TO ; a. an unborn child, embryo, foetus :
Lk. i. 41, 44 ; (Hom. H. 23, 266; Plut. rep. Stoic. 41
TO βρ. iv TJi γαστρί). b. a new-born child, an infant, a
babe, (so fr. Pind. down) : Lk. ii. 12, 16 ; xviii. 15 ; Acts
vii. 1 9 ; 1 Pet. ii. 2 ; άπο βρίφους from infancy, 2 Tim.
iii. 15 (so « βρίφους. Anth. Pal. 9, 567).*
βρ<χ» ; 1 aor. e/3pf |a ; fr. Pind. and Hdt. down : 1.
to moisten, wet, water: Lk. vii. 38 (τ. πόδας δάκρυσι, cf.
Ps. vi. 7). 44. 2. in later writ. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 291 [W. 23]) to water with rain (Polyb. IC, 12, 3). lo
βροντή
106
βωμός
cause to rain, to pour the rain, spoken of God : iirl τίνα,
Mt. V. 45 ; to send down tike rain : xipios ίβρ(ξ( ifiof κ.
Trip, Gen. xix. 24 ; χάλαζαν, Ex. ix. 23 ; [μάννα, I's. Li.wii.
(Ixxviii.) 24] ; inipers. βρίχιί it rains (cf. W. § 58, 9 b.
j3.) : Jas. V. 17; with added ace, πνρ κ. θ(Ίον, Lk. xvii.
v.) ; with added subject, ieros, Rev. xi. 6.'
βροντή, -it, ij, thunder: Mk. iii. 17 (on which see
Boavfpyis) ; Jn. xii. 29 ; Rev. iv. 5 ; vi. 1 ; viii. 5 ; x. 3 sq.;
xi. 19; xiv. 2; xvi. 18; xix. 6. [From Horn, down.]*
βροχή, -ης, ή, (βρίχω, q. v.), a later Grk. word (cf. Lob.
ad rhrvn. p. 291), a bcsprinL-linr/, watering, rain: used
of a heavy shower or violent rainstorm, Mt. vii. 25, 27 ;
Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 10; civ. (cv.) 32, for Dt?;.*
βρόχοϊ, -ου, ό, α noose, slip-knot, by which any person
or thing is caught, or fastened, or suspended, (fr. Horn,
down) : βρόχον (ττιβάλΧίΐ,ν τινί to throw a noose upon one,
a, fin•, expression borrowed from war [or the chase] (so
j3p. π(ριβάλλ(ΐν Tivl, Philo, vit. Moys. iii. § 34 ; Joseph.
b. j. 7, 7, 4), i. e. by craft or by force to bind one to some
necessity, to constrain him to obey some command, 1 Co.
vii. 3.j.•
βρνγμός, -oC, 0, (βρύχω, q. v.), a gnashing of teeth : with
των οδόντων added, a phrase denoting the extreme an-
guish and utter despair of men consigned to eternal
condemnation, Mt. viii. 12; xiii. 42, 50 ; xxii. 13; xxiv.
51 ; XXV. 30 ; Lk. xiii. 28. (In Sir. li. 3 βρυγμάς is atr
tributed to beasts, which gnash the teeth as they attack
their prey; in Prov. xix. 12 Sept. for Dpi snarling,
growling; in the sense of biting, Nic. th. 716, to be de-
rived fr. βρνκω to bite ; cf. Fritzsche on Sir. as above,
p. 308.)•
βρνχω ; [impf. (βρυχονί ; to grind, gnash, with the
teeth : όδόνταί ΐπί τίνα, Acts vii. 54, (Job xvi. 9 ; Ps.
xxxiv. (xxxv.) 16; xxxvi. (xxxvii.) Γ2 for a'yd2 ρ^^Π
and 0"4i? ρ"ίΠ ; intrans. without odovras, [Ilermipp. ap.]
Plut. Pericl. 33 fin. ; [Hipp, (see L. and S.)]). Of the
same origin as βρνκω (cf. δίχω and δ/κω), to bite, chew ;
see Hermann on Soph. Philoct. 735 ; [Ellendt, Lex.
Soph. s. V. βρύκω\'
βρνω ; 1. intrans. tn abound, gush forth, teem with
juices, ([akin to βλύω, φλνω ; see Lob. Techn. p. 22 sq. ;
Curtius p. 531], cf. Germ. Jinist, Briihe); often so fr.
Horn, down (II. 17, 56 epvos άνθι'ί βρύα). 2. more
rarely trans, to send forth abundanlli/: absol. to teem, ή
yfj βρϋ(ί, Xen. venat. 5, 12; with an ace. of flowers,
fruits, XapiTf Γ ρόδα βρνονσι, Anacr. 44, 2 (37, 2) ; to send
forth water, Jas. iii. 1 1 .*
βρωμά, -rof, τό, (βρόω i. q. βιβρώσκω), that which is
eaten, food; (fr. Thuc. and Xen. down) : 1 Co. viii. 8,
13; x. 3; Ro. xiv. 15,20; plur.: Mt. xiv. 15; Mk. vii. 19;
Lk. iii. 11 ; ix. 13 ; 1 Co. vi. 13 ; 1 Tim. iv. 3 ; Heb. xiii.
9 ; βρώματα κ. πόματα meats and drinks, Heb. ix. 10 (as
in Plat, legg- 1 1 p. 932 e. ; 6 p. 782 a. ; Critias p. 1 1 5 b. ;
in sing. Xen. Cyr. 5, 2, 17). of the soul's aliment, i. e.
either instruction, 1 Co. iii. 2 (as solid food opp. to to
γαΚα), or that which deUghts and truly satisfies the mind,
Jn. iv. 34.•
βρύσ-ιμοΐ, -ov, (βρώα -is), eatable : Lk. xxiv. 41. (Lev.
xix. 23 ; Ezek. xlvii. 12. Aeschyl. Prom. 479; [Antiatt.
in JJekker, Anecd. p. 84, 25].) *
βρωσ-ΐΐ, -eojs, ή, (βρόω, βιβρώσκω) ; 1. the act of eat-
ing, (TertuU. esus): βρωσκ κ. τιόσις, Ro. xiv. 17 (on
which see βασιλιία, 3) ; with gen. of the obj. 1 Co. viii.
4 (Plat, de rep. 10 p. 619 c. παίδων αϊιτοΰ) ; in a wider
sense, corrosion: Mt. vi. 19 sq. 2. as almost every-
where in Grk. writ, that which is eaten, food, aliment :
Heb. xii. IC; (if βρώσιν for food, 2 Co. ix. 10 (Sap. iv.
5) ; βρώσις κα'ι [so WH txt. Trmrg. ; al. rf\ νάσΐί. Col, ii.
IC, (Horn. Od. 1, 191 ; Plat. legg. 6, 783 c. ; Xen. mem.
1, 3, 15; [cf. Fritzsche on Rom. iii. p. 200 note; \icr
contra Mey. or EUic. on Col. 1. c.]). used of the soul's
aliment — either that which refreshes it, Jn. iv. 32, or
nourishes and supports it unto life eternal, Jn. vi. 27, 55.•
βρύσ-κω, unused pres. whence pf. βίβρωκα ; see βι-
βρώσκω-
βνβίζω ; [pres. pass, βυθίζομαι] ; (βυθός. q. v.) ; to
plunge into the deep, to sink : ώστ( βυθΙζ(σθαι αυτά, of
ships (as Poly b. 2, 10, 5; 16,3,2; [Aristot., Diod., al.]),
so that thei/ began to sink, Lk. v. 7; metaph. τινά its o\e-
θρον [A. V. drown], 1 Tim. vi. 9.•
βυθό$, -οϋ, 6, the bottom (of a ditch or trench, Xen. oec.
19, 11) ; the bottom or depth of the sea, often in Grk. writ,
fr. Aeschyl. Prom. 432 down; the sea itself, the deep sea:
2 Co. xi. 25, as in Ps. cvi. (cvii.) 24 ; so Lat. profundum
in Lucan, Phars. 2, 680 "profundi ora videns."*
βυρσίΐίΐ, -ί'ωΓ, ό, (βύρσα a skin stripped off, a hide), a
tanner: Acts ix. 43; x. 6, 32. (Artem. oneir. 4, 56.)
[Cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Tanner.] •
βΰσίΓίνος, -η, -ov, (ή βνσσος, q. v. ; cf. άκάνθινος. άμα-
ράντινος), made of fine linen ; neut. βΰσσινον se. ιμάτιον
(W. 591 (550) ; [B. 82 (72)]), {a) fine linen (garment) :
Rev. xviii. 12 (Rec. βίσσου), 16; xLx. 8, 14 [WHmrg.
\(υκοβΰσσινον (for βΰσσινον XfvKov)]. (Gen. xii. 42;
1 Chr. XV. 27. Aeschyl., Hdt., Eur., Diod. 1, 85 ; Plut.,
al.)•
βνσσΌί, -ου, ή. [Vanicek, Fremdworter, s. v.], byssus, a
species of Egyptian flax (found also in India and Achaia)
— or linen made from it — very costly, delicate, .soft,
white, and also of a yellow color, (see respecting it
Pollux, onomast. 1. 7 c. 17 § 75) : Lk. xvi. 19; Rev. xviii.
12 Rec. (In Sept. generally for vi'd, also 1'13, cf. 1 Chr.
XV. 27; 2 Chr. v. 12; cf. Win. R\V"B. s. v. Baumwolle;
[BB.DD. s. vv. Byssus and Linen]. Joseph, antt. 3, G,
1 sq. ; 3, 7, 2; Philostr. vit. ApoU. 2, 20 [p. 71 ed.
Olear.] ; on the flax of Achaia growing about EUs, cf.
Pausan. 5, 5, 2; 7, 21, 7.)•
βω|ΐό$, -οΰ, ό, (see βοννός), an elevated place ; very
freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down, a raised place on
which to offer sacrifice, an altar : Acts xvii. 23. (Often
in Sept. for Π3η.) *
107
Γαββαθα
Γαββαθά [-θά WH], η, indecl., Gabbaiha, Chald. Sn3J,
(Ilebr. 3J the back) ; hence a raised place, an elevation,
(cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche, Ueber die Verdienste Tholucks
u.s.w. p. 102 sq. ; Delilzsrh in the Zeitschr. f. luth. Tlieol.
for 1876, p. 605 ; \_WUnschc, Neue Beitrage u.s.w. p. 560];
but see the somewhat diff. opinion of Keim, Jesu von
Nazara, iii. 365): Jn. xix. 13, where is added the
rather loose interpretation 'Κίθόστμωτον, i. e. a stone pave-
ment, wliich some interpreters think was a portable
pavement, or the square blocks such as the Roman gen-
erals carried with them, to be laid down not only under
their seats in general, but also under those they occupied
in administering justice (cf. Suet. Jul. Caes. 46 and
Casauhon ad loc). This opinion is opposed by the cir-
cumstance that John is not accustomed to add a Greek
interpretation except to the Hebr. names of fixed Jewish
locaUties, cf. v. 2 ; ix. 7 ; xix. 1 7 ; and that this is so in
the present case is evident from the fact that he has
said i?f τόποι/, i. e. in a definite locality which had that
name. Besides, it cannot be proved that that custom of
the military commanders was followed also by the gov-
ernors of provinces residing in cities. Doubtless the
Chald aic name was given to the spot from its shape,
the Greek n:ime from the nature of its pavement.
Cf. below under λιθόστρωτοι'; Win. RWB. s. v. Litho-
stroton ; [BB. DD. s. v. Gabbatha ; Tholuck, Beitrage
zur Spracherkliirung u.s.w. p. 119 sqq.].*
Γαβριήλ, ό, (■7X'"13J, fr. "laj strong man, hero, and Sx
God), indecl., Gabriel, one of the angel-princes or chiefs
of the angels (Dan. viii. 16; ix. 21) : Lk. i. 19, 26; see
αμχύγ^ίλοί [and reff. s. v. «γγίλοί-, fin. ; BB.DD. s. v.].•
•γάγγραινα, -ijt, ή, (γράω or ypaiva to gnaw, eat), a gan-
grene, a disease by which any part of the body suffering
from inrtammation becomes so corrupted that, unless
a remedy be seasonably applied, the evil continually
spreads, attacks other parts, and at last eats away the
bones : 2 Tim. ii. 1 7 [where cf. Ellic.]. (Medical writ,
[cf. Wetst. ad 1. c] ; Plut. discr. am. et adulat. c. 36.) •
Γάδ, ό, (IJ fortune, cf. Gen. xxx. 1 1 ; [xlix. 19 ; on the
meaning of the word see B.D. s. v.]), indecl., Gar!, the
seventh son of the patriarch Jacob, by Zil]iah, Leah's
maid : Rev. vii. 5.*
Γαδαρηνόϊ, -ή, -όν, (fr. the prop, name Γαδαρά; cf. the
adj. ΆβιΚηνή, ΜαγδαΚηνη). ofGailara, a Gadarene. Gad-
ara Λvas the capital of Pera>a (Joseph, b. j. 4, 7, 3),
situated opposite the southern extremity of the Lake
of Gennesaret to the south-east, but at some distance
from the lake on the banks of the river Ilieromax (Plin.
h. n. 5, 16), 60 stadia from the city Tiberias (Joseph,
vita 65), inhabited chiefly by Gentiles (Joseph, antt. 1 7,
ΎαζοφυΚάκιον
11,4); cf . Win. Έ,νΓΒ. s. v. Gadara ; Riielschi in Herzog
iv. p. 636 sq. ; Kneucker in Schenkel ii. 313 s(|. ; Rielim,
HWB. p. 454 ; [BB.DD. s. v.]. χώρα των Γαδαρψων
the countrij of the Gadarenes, Gcdaris: Jlk. v. 1 Uec. ;
Lk. viii. 26 Rcc, 37 RG[but here ή Tifpixapos τών Γ.],
and in Mt. viii. 28 Τ Tr WH ; but the Mss. differ in
these pass. ; see Γ(ρασηνοί and TepyfOTjvol.'
γάζα, -η!, ή, a Persian word, adopted by the Greeks
and Latins (Cic. off. 2, 22), the royal treasury, treasure,
riches, (Curt. 3, 13, 5 pecuniam regiam, quam gazam
Persae vocant) : Acts viii. 27. ([Theophr.], Polyb.,
Diod. 17, 35 and 64; Plut., al. Sept. 2 Esdr. v. 17;
vii. 20.)•
Γάζα, -,f [B. 17 (15)], ij, (rt]}.] i. e. strong, fortified,
(cf. Valentia) ; the i' being represented by y, cf. n^bj'
Τομόρρα), formerly a celebrated city of the Philistines,
situated on a hiU near the southern border of the land
of Israel, between Raphia and Ascalon, twenty stadia
['at the most,' Arrian.exp. Alex. 2, 26 ; " seven," Strabo
16, 30] from the sea and eleven geographical miles from
Jerusalem. It was fortified and surrounded by a mas-
sive wall. Although held by a Persian garrison, Alex-
ander the Great captured it after a siege of two months,
but did not destroy it ([Joseph, antt. 11, 8, 4]; Diod.
1 7, 48 ; Plut. Alex. 25 ; Curt. 4, 6 sq.). Afterwards, in
the year B. c. 96, Alexander Jannjeus, king of the Jews,
took it after a year's siege and destroyed it (Joseph.
antt. 13, 13, 3). Gabinius rebuilt it B. c. 58 (Joseph.
1. c. 14, 5, 3). Finally the emperor Augustus gave it
[b. c. 30] to Herod the Great (Joseph. 1. c. 15, 7, 3),
after whose death it was annexed to Syria (Josej)h. 1. c.
17, 11, 4). Modern Ghiizzeh [or Ghazzeh'], an unforti-
fied town, having an area of two English miles, with
between fifteen and sixteen thousand inhabitants. Men-
tioned in the N. T. in Acts viii. 26, where the words
αντη f στίκ ίρημο! refer to ή όδόί ; Philip is bidden to take
the way which is ΐρημης, solitary ; cf . Meyer ad loc. ; [W.
§ 18, 9 N. 3; B. 104 (91)]. A full history of the city
is given by Stark, Gazau. d. philistiiische Kiiste. Jena,
1852; a briefer account by Ifm. RWB. [see also BB.
DD.] s. v. Gaza; Arnold in Herzog iv. p. G7I sqq.*
γαζο-φυλάκιον, -ου. τό. (fr. γάζα, q. v., and φυΚακη ; hence
i. q. θησανρυφυλάκιον, Hesych.), a repository of treasure,
esp. of public treasure, a treasury : Esth. iii. 9 ; 1 Esdr.
viii. 18, 44 : 1 Mace. iii. 28. In Sept. used for n3cS
and 7\Tai of apartments constructed in the courts of the
tem[)Ie, in which not only the sacred offerings and things
needful for the temple service were kept, but in which
also the priests, etc., dwelt : Neh. xiii. 7 ; χ 37 sqq. ; of
the sacred treasury, in which not only treasure but also
Τάϊο•{
108
Ύαμεω
the public records (Ι Mace. xiv. 49 ; cf. Grimm ad loc.)
were stored, and the property of widows and orphans was
depositc<l (2 Mace. iii. 10; ef. Grimm ad loc.) : 1 Mace,
xiv. 49 ; 2 Mace. iii. 6, 28, 40: iv. 42; v. 18. Josephi;.
speaks of botli -γαζοφυλάκια (l)lur.) in the women's court
of Herod's temple, b. j. 5, 5, 2; 6, 5, 2 ; and to -γαζοψ.,
antt. 19, 6, 1. In the N. T., in Mk. xii. 41, 4;i ; l.k. xxi.
1 ; Jn. viii. 20 («i» τω γαζοφ. nl, near, the treasury [yet
cf. W. § 48, a. 1 e.]), τό γαζ. seems to be used of that rc-
cejjtade mentioned by the Rabbins to which were fitted
thirteen chests or boxes, ni'iOliy i. e. Inmi/ifls, so called
from their sha|ic, and into which were put the contrilm-
tions made voluntarily or paid yearly by the ,Iews for
the service of tlie temple and the sui)i)ort of the poor;
cf. Light font, Horae Hebr. et 'J'ahn. p. .')3(i Sip ; Liicke
[Thohick, or Codet] on Jn. viii. 20 ; [H.D. Am. ed. s. v.
Treasury]. (.Sirabo 2 p. 319 [i. e. 7, C, I].) •
raios [WII rnios (cf. I, t)], -ου, ό, Gaiux or ( Vi/ws; the
name of a CIn-istian 1. of Derbe : Acts xx. 4. 2. of
Macedonia: Acts xix. 29. 3. of Corinth, Paul's host
during his [second] sojourn there : Ko. xvi. 2.'i ; 1 Co. i.
14. 4. of an unknown Christian, to whom the thiril
Ep. of John was addressed : 3 Jn. vs. 1. [B.U. Am. ed.
s. v. Gains ; Farrar, Early Days of Christianity, ii. SOC] '
Ύολα, -λακτοί [cf. Lat. lac; Curtius § 123], τό, [from
Hom. down], jnilL•: 1 Co. ix. 7. Metaph. of i/ic /ess
tlijjlcull truths of the Christian religion, 1 Co. iii. 2 ; Ileb.
v. 12 sq. (Quintil. 2, 4, 5 " doctoribus hoc esse cnrae
velim, ut teneras adhuc mentes more nutricum niollius
alant et satiari velut quodam jucundioris disciplinae
larte jiatiantur," [cf. Sieijfrii-d, Philo von Alex. p. 32!l,
cf. p. 2G1]) ; of the wrord of God, by which soids newly
resienerate are healthfully nourished unto growl li in the
Christian life, 1 Pet. ii. 2.•
Γολάτηβ, -ου, ό, a Galat'ian, (see να\ατΊα) : Gal. iii. 1.
(1 Mace. viii. 2; 2 Mace. viii. 20.)*
Γαλατία, -ai. ή. Galatia, Gallogriccia, a region of Asia
Minor, bounded by Paphlagonia, Pontus, Cappadocia.
Lycaonia, Phrygia, and Bithynia. It took its name from
those <;allie tribes that crossed into Asia IMinor n. c. 278,
and after roaming about there for a time at length set-
tled down ))ermanently in the above-mentioned region,
and intermarried ivith the Greeks. From B.C. 189 on,
though subject to the Romans, they were governed by
their own chiefs ; but rt. c. 24 [al. 25] their country was
formally reduced to a Roman province, (cf. Liv. 37, 8;
38, 16 and 18; Joseph, antt. 16, G; Strabol2, ,5, 1 p. .567;
Flor. 2, 11 [i. e. 1, 27]): Gal. i. 2 ; 1 Co. xvi. 1 ; 2 Tim.
iv. 10 [T Tr mrg. Γϋλλι'αν] ; 1 Pet. i. 1. Cf. Grimm, Ueb.
d. (keltische) Nationalitat dcr kleinasiat. Galater, in
the Stud. u. Krit. for 187G, p. 199 sqq. ; replied to by A'.
M'ic.ieler, Die deutsche Nationalitat d. kleinas. Galater.
Giitersl. 1877; [but see Hertzberg in the Stud. u. Krit.
for 1878, pp. 525-541 ; Bp. Lghtft. in his Com. on Gal.,
Dissertation i. also Intr. § 1].*
Γαλατικόΐ, -ή, -όν, Galatian, belonging to Galatia : Acts
xvi. G ; xviii. 23.*
•γαλήνη, -?)f, ή, (adj. ό, ij, "/αΚηνάί calm, cheerful), cnlm-
tie.ss, atiUnefs of the sea, a calm : Mt. viii. 26 ; Mk. iv. 39 ;
Lk. viii. 24. (From Horn, down.) "
Γαλιλα(α.-,ΐ5, η, Galilee, (fr. nVSjn, 2 K. xv. 29; h'hlT),
Josh. XX. 7 ; .\.\i. 32 ; S'Sj ]'"1X, 1 K. ix. 1 1, i. e. the circle
or circuit, by which name even before the exile a cer-
tain di.-itriet of northern Palestine was designated ; Sept.
Γιιλιλοι'α) ; the name of a region of northern Palestine,
boundeil on the north by Syria, on the west by Sidon,
'I'yre, Ptolemais and their territories and the promontory
of Carmel, on the south by .Samaria and on the east by
the Jordan. It was divided into Upper Galilee (extend-
ing from the borders of Tyre and Sidon to the sources of
the Jonlan), and Lmrer Galilee (which, lower and more
level, euibraceil the lands of the tril;es of Issachar and
Zebulim and the part of Naphtali bordering on the Sea of
Galilee) : ή άνω καϊ ή κάτω Γαλιλαίο (Joseph, b. j. 3, 3, 1,
where its boundaries are given). It was a very fertile
region, populous, having 204 towns and villages (Joseph,
vit. 45), and inasnnich as it had, esp. in the upper part,
many (ientiles among its inhaliitants (Judg. i. 30-33;
Strabo 16, '.'A p. 7(10), it was called, Mt. iv. 15, Γαλιλαίο
τώΐ'€5ΐ'ώΐ' (Is. viii. 23 (ix. l)),and, 1 Mace. v. 15, Γαλιλαίο
ΰλλοφνλων. Often mentioned in iheiiospels, and three
times in (he Act.s, viz. ix. 31 ; x. 37 ; xiii. 31. [Cf. Mer-
rill, Galilee in the Time of Christ, Boston 1881.]
Γαλιλαίος, -ala, -alov, Galilaan, a native of Galilee : Mt.
xxvi. 69 ; Mk. xiv. 70 ; Lk. xiii. 1 sq. ; xxii. 59 ; xxiii. 6 ;
Jn. iv. 45 ; Acts i. 11 ; ii. 7 ; v. 37.•
Γαλλία, -αί, ή, Gallia: 2 'J'im. iv. 10 Τ Tr mrg., by
whri-h is to be understood (ialatia in Asia Minor or Γαλ-
λία 17 ίώη. Λρρ. b. civ. 2, 49. [See esp. Bp. Lghtft. Com.
on (ial! pp. 3, 31 (Am. ed. pp. II, 37).]•
Γαλλίων, -ωκοΓ, ό, Gallio, proconsid of Aehaia, elder
brother of L. Annaeus Seneca the |ihilosopher. His
oriiTinal name was Marcus A iniacus X<iralus, but after
his adoption into the family of Junius (iallio the rheto-
rician, he was called Gallio : Acts xviii. 12, 14, 17. [Cf.
Β.Γ). Am. ed.: Farrar, St. Paul, i. 5G6 «(j.]*
Γαμαλιήλ, ό, (Sx'Srj recompense of God [(Jod the
avenger, Fiirst] ; Num. i. 10 ; ii. ϊ(ι), inded., Gamaliel
(distinguished by the Jews from his grandson of the
same name by the title ρίΠ' '''c elder), a Pharisee and
doctor of the law, son of 11. Simeon, grandson of llillel,
and teacher of the apostle Paul. He is said to have had
very great influence in the Sanhedrin, and to have died
eighteen years before the destruction of Jerusalem. A
man of permanent renown among the Jews : Acts v. 34 ;
xxii. 3. Cf. Gralz, Gesch. d. Juden, iii. p. 289 sqq.;
Scheulel. BL. ii. p. 328 sqq. ; [esp. Alex.'s Kitto s. v.
Gamaliel T. (cf. Fnrnir, St. Paul, i. 44 and exe. v.)].•
•γαμί'ω, -ώ : impf. ('γάμονν (Lk. xvii. 27) ; 1 aor. ίγημα
(the classic form, [Mt. xxii. 25 L Τ Tr WII] ; Lk. xiv.
20; 1 Co. vii. 28" R(i, 28"") ΆηΛί'γάμησα (the later form,
Mt. V. 32 ; [xxii. 25 R G] ; Mk. vi. 17 ; x. 11 ; 1 Co. vii.
9, [28' L Τ Tr WH], 33); pf. -/(γάμηκα; 1 aor. pass.
fyaμήθηv■, (cf. W. 84 (SO) : B. 55(48); 5«m. Ausf. Spr.
ii. 134 ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 742; [Veitch s. v.]); 1.
used of the man, as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, to lead
Ύαμίζω
109
yap
in marriage, take to wife ; a. with the addition of γνναΐκα
or other ace. : Mt. v. 32 [here WH br. the cl.] ; xix. 9 ;
Mk. vi. 17; X. Π ; I.k. xiv. 20; xvi. 18. b. without a
case, absol. to get married, to marry, [cf. B. 145 (127)]:
Mt. xix. 10 ; xxii. 25, 30 ; xxiv. 38 ; Mk. xii. 25 ; Lk. xvii.
27 ; XX. 34 sq. ; 1 Co. vii. 28, 33 ; (Ael. v. h. 4, 1 : oi ytya-
μηκάτα, Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 4; opp. to άγαμοι, Xen. symp.
9, 7). Pass, and Mid. γαμϊομαί tiw, of women [Lat. nu-
bere alicui, cf. B. § 133, 8], tu give one's self in marriage
[Λν. § 38, 3] : 1 aor. pass., Mk. x. 12 (where L Τ Tr WH
γαμηση aWov for R ( ΐ γαμηθτ^ αλλω) ; 1 Co. vii. 39. 2.
contrary to Grk. usage, the Act. γαμιΊνΐί used of women,
to give one's self in marriage; and a. with the ace:
Mk. X. 12 L Τ Tr WH (see above) ; b. absol. : 1 Co.
vii. 28, 34 (ή γαμήσασα, opp. to ή άγαμοι) ; 1 Tim. v. 11,
14. 3. absol. of both sexes: 1 Tim. iv. 3 ; 1 Co. vii.
9 sq. 36 (γιιμίίτωσαν, sc. the virgin and he who seeks her
to wife). In the O. T. γαμιΐν occurs only in 2 Mace,
xiv. 25.*
γα|ΐ(ϊ»; [Pass., pres. -γαμίζομαι; impf. (γαμιζάμην^ ;
(γάμυς) ; to give a daughter in marriaf/e : 1 Co. vii. 38'
[L Τ Tr Wl'l, 38'] G L Τ Tr WH ; Pass. : Mt. .xxii. 30
L Τ Tr WH ; [xxiv. 38 Τ WH] ; Mk. xii. 25 ; Lk. xvii.
27 ; XX. 35 [WH mrg. γαμίσκηιπ-αι^. (The word is men-
tioned in Apoll. de constr. 3, 31 p. 280, 10 ed. Bckk.)
[COMP. : (Κ-^αμίζω.~\ '
γαμύτκω, i. q. γαμίζω, q. V. [Mt. xxiv. 38 Lchm.] ; Pass,
[pres. γαμίσκομαι^ ; Mk. xii. 25 R G ; Lk. XX. 34 L Τ Tr
WH, [35 WH mrg. ; cf. W. 92 (88) ; and Tdf.'s note
on Mt. xxii. 30]. (Aristot. pol. 7, 14, 4 etc.) [Comp. :
f'κ■yaμίσκω■^ *
Ύΐί|χος, -ου, ό, [prob. fr. r. gam to bind, unite ; Curtius
p. 546 sq.], as in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; 1. a iveil-
diiig or marriiige-fe^liral : .In. ii. 1 sq. ; Rev. xix. 7 (un-
der the figure of a marriage here is represented the inti-
mate and everlasting union of Christ, at his return from
heaven, with his church) ; το Semvov toC γάμου, ibid. 9 (a
symbol of the future blessings of the Messiah's kingdom) ;
esp. α tvedfling-l>anquet, a marriage-feast: ^It. xxii. 8, 10
[here Τ AVH Tr mrg. ννμφών], 11, 12; plur. (referring
apparently to the several acts of feasting), Mt. xxii. 2
sqq. 9 ; XXV. 10 ; Lk. xii. 36 ; xiv. 8, (cf. AV. § 27, 3 ; B.
23(21)). 2. marriage, matrimonii: Heb. xiii. 4.*
γάρ, a conjunction, which ace. to its composition, ye
and ήρα (i. q. άμ), is properly a particle of affirma-
tion and conclusion, denoting Iruh/ thfrrfhre, rerih/
as the case stands, " the thing is first affirmed by the par-
ticle ye, and then is referred to what precedes by the
force of the particle άρα" (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1, p.
232; cf. Kuhner ii. p. 724 ; [.Telf § 786 ; W. 445 (415)
sq.]). Now since by a new affirmation not infrequently
the reason and nature of something previously men-
tioned are set forth, it comes to pass th.at. by the use
of this particle, either the reason and cause of a forego-
ing statement is added, whence arises the causal or
argumentative force of the particle, /or (Lat. nam,
enim; Germ, denn) ; or some previous declaration is ex-
plained, whence yap takes on an explicative force:
for, the fact is, namely (Lat. videlicet. Germ, ndmiich).
Thus the force of the particle is either conclusive,
or demonstrative, or explicative and declara-
tory; cf. Host in Passow's Lex. i. p. 535 sqq.; Kiihner
ii. pp. 724 sqq. 852 sqij. ; [cf. L. and S. s. v.]. The use
of the particle in the N. T. does not differ from that in
the classics.
I. Its primary and original Conclusive force is
seen in questions (in Grk. writ, also in exclamations) and
answers expressed with emotion ; where, ace. to the con-
nexion, it may be freely represented by assuredly, verily,
forsooth, why, then, etc. : ev yap τούτω etc. ye profess not
to know whence he is; herein then is assuredly a mar-
vellous tiling, why, herein etc. Jn. ix. 30; oi yap, άλλα
etc. by no means in this state of things, nay verily, but
etc. Acts xvi. 37 ; certainly, if that is the case, 1 Co. viii.
11 L Τ Tr AVH. It is joined to interrogative particles
and pronouns : μη yap etc. Jn. vii. 41 (do ye then sup-
pose that the Christ comes out of Galilee? What, doth
the Christ, etc. ?) ; μ!) yap . . . ουκ, 1 Co. xi. 22 (what !
since ye are so eager to eat and drink, have ye not, etc.?) ;
Ti'r yap, Ti yap : Mt. x.xvii. 23 (τί yap κακόν 4ποίησ(ν, ye
demand that he be crucified like a malefactor, Why, what
evil hath he done f) ; Mt. ix. 5 (your thoughts are evil ;
which then do ye suppose to be the easier, etc. ?) ;'^It. xvi.
26 ; xxiii. 17, 19; Lk. ix. 25 ; Acts xix. 35 ; τί γάρ ; for τί
yap ί'στι, what then ? i. e. what, under these circumstances,
ought to be the conclusion ? Phil. i. 18 [cf. EUic. ad loc] ;
πώ£ yap, Acts viii. 31 ; cf. Klotz 1. c. p. 245 sqq. ; Kuhner
ii. p. 726 ; [Jelf ii. p. 608] ; AA' . 447 (416). Here belongs
also the vexed passage Lk. xviii. 14 ζ yap eKe'ivos (so G Τ
Tr mrg., but L AA^H Tr txt. παρ' eKclvov) or do ye suj>-
pose then that that man went down approved of God?
cf. AV. 241 (226).
II. It adduces the Cause or gives the Reason of
a preceding statement or opinion ; 1. univ. : Mt. ii.
5 ; vi. 24 ; Mk. i. 22 ; ix. 6 ; Lk. i. 15, 18 ; xxi. 4 ; Jn. ii.
25 ; Acts ii. 25 ; Ro. i. 9, 11 ; 1 Co. xi. 5 ; Heb. ii. 8 ; 1 Jn.
ii. 19; Rev. i. 3, and very often. In Jn. iv. 44 yap
assigns the reason why now at length Jesus betook him-
self into Galilee ; for the authority denied to a pro])het
in his own country (Galilee), he had previously to seek
and obtain among strangers ; cf. 45 ; Meyer [yet see ed.
6 (AA^eiss)] ad loc; Strauss, Leben Jesu, i. 725 ed. 3;
Neander, Leben Jesu, p. 385 sq. ed. 1 [Am. trans, pp.
100, 168] ; Ewald, Jalirbb. d. bibl. Wissensch. x. p. 108
sqq. 2. Often the sentences are connected in such a
way that either some particular statement is established
by a general proposition (' the particular by the uni-
versal'), as in Mt. vii. 8 ; xiii. 12: xxii. 14 ; Mk. iv. 22,
25 ; Jn. iii. 20 ; 1 Co. xii. 12 ; Heb. v. 13, etc. ; or what
has been stated generally, is proved to be correctly
stated by a particular instance ('the universal by the
particular') : Mk. vii. 10; Lk. xii. 52, 58; Ro. vii. 2; 1
Co. i. 26 ; xii. 8. 3. To sentences in which some-
thing is commanded or forbidden, yap annexes the rea-
son why the thing must either be done or avoided : Mt.
i. 20 .sq. ; ii. 20 ; iii. 9 ; vii. 2 ; Ro. xiii. 1 1 ; Col. iii. 3 :
γαρ
110
ye
1 Th. iv. 3 ; Ileb. ii. 2, and very often. In Phil. ii. 13
yap connects the verse with vs. 12 thus: work out vour
salvation with most intense earnestness, for nothing
short of this accords with God's saving eflicicncv within
your souls, to whom you owe both the good desire and
the power to execute that desire. 4. To (luestions,
yap annexes the reason why the question is asked : Mt.
ii. 2 (we ask this with good reason, for we have seen
the star which announces his birth) ; Mt. .xxii. 28 ; Ro.
xiv. 10; 1 Co. xiv. 9; Gal. i. 10. 5. Fretjuently the
statement which contains the cause is interrogative ; n'r,
τι yap: Lk. xxii. 27; Ro. iv. 3; xi. 34; 1 Co. ii. IG; vii.
1 1) ; Ileb. i. 5 ; xii. 7 ; τί yap for τι yap ί'στι, Ro. iii. 3 (cf.
Fritzsche ad loc. ; [Ellic. on Phil. i. 18]); ha τί yap, 1
Co. X. 29 ; ποίο yap, Jas. iv. 14 [WII txt. oni. Tr br. yap].
6. Sometimes in answers it is so used to make good the
substance of a preceding question that it can be ren-
dered yea, assuredly: 1 Co. ix. 10; 1 Th. ii. 20; cf.
Kuhner ii. p. 724. 7. Sometimes it confirms, not a sin-
gle statement, but the point of an entire discussion : Ro.
ii. 2.5 (it is no advantage to a wicked Jew, for etc.). On
the other hand, it may so confirm but a single thought
as to involve the force of asseveration and be rendered
assurer! 1 1/, yea : Ro. χ v. 27 ((ΙΒόκησαν yap) ; so also και
yap, Phil. ii. 27. 8. It is often said that the sentence
of which yap introduces the cause, or renders the reason,
is not expressed, but must be gathered from the eon-
text and supplied in thought. But that this ellipsis
is wholly imaginary is clearly shown by Klolz ad Devar.
ii. 1 p. 236 scj., cf. W. 446 (415) sq. The particle is
everywhere used in reference to something expressly
stated. Suffice it to append a very few examjiles; the
true nature of many others is shown under the remain-
ing heads of this article: In Mt. v. 12 before yap some
supply ' nor does this happen to you alone ' ; but the rea-
son is added why a great reward in heaven is reserved
for those who suffer persecution, which reason consists
in this, that the prophets also suffered persecution, and
that their reΛvard is great no one can doubt. In Ro. viii.
18 some have supplied "do not shrink from this suffer-
in;/ with Christ ' ; but on the use of yap here, see III. a.
below. On Mk. vii. 28 [T Tr λ\ΊΙ om. L br. yap],
where before κα\ yap some supply 'but lielp me,' or 'yet
wc do not suffer even the dogs to perish with hunger,'
'see 10 b. below. In Acts ix. 11 before yap many supply
'he will listen to thee'; but it introduces the reason for
the preceding command. 9. Λ^Πιεη in successive state-
ments yap is repeated twice or thrice, or even four or five
times, either a. one and the same thought is confirmed
by as many arguments, each having its own force, as there
are repetitions of the particle [Mey. denies the coordi-
nate use of yap in the N. T., asserting that the first is
argumentative, the second explicative, see his Comm.
on the pass, to follow, also on Ro. viii. 6] : Mt. vi. 32 ; Ro.
xvi. 18 sq.; or b. every succeeding statement contains
the reason for its immediate predecessor, so that the state-
ments are subordinate one to another : Alk. vi. 52 ; Mt.
xvi. 25-27 ; Jn. iii. 19 sq. ; v. 21 sq. ; Acts ii. 15 ; Ro. iv.
13-15 ; viii. 2 sq. 5 sq. ; 1 Co. iii. 3 sq. ; ix. 15-1 7 (where
five times in G L Τ Tr WH) ; 1 Co. xvi. 7 ; Jas. ii. 10,
etc. ; or c. it is repeated in a different sense : Mk. ix.
39-41; Ro. V. 6 sq. (where cf. W. 453 (422)); x. 2-5
(four times) ; Jas. iv. 14 [WII txt. om. Tr br. the first yap,
L WII mrg. om. the second]. 10. καϊ yap (on which cf.
Kuhner ii. p. 854 sq. ; W. 448 (417) ; [Ellic. on 2 Thess.
iii. 10]) is a. for, and truly, (^etenim, nami/ue, [the sim-
ple rendering for is regarded as inexact by many ; cf.
Mey. on 2 Co. xiii. 4 and see Ilartunt/, Partikeln, i.l37 sq. ;
Kruger § 69, 32, 21]) : Mk. .xiv. 70; Lk. xxii. 37 [L Tr
br. yap] ; 1 Co. v. 7 ; xi. 9 ; xii. 1 3. b. for also, for even,
(nam etiani) : Mt. viii. 9 ; Mk. x. 45 ; Lk. vi. 32 ; Jn. iv.
45; 1 Co. xii. 14, etc. In Mk. vii. 28 (cai yap [R (i L br.]
τα Kvvaput etc. the woman, by adducing an exam])Ie, con-
firms what Christ had said, but the example is of such a
sort as also to prove that her request ought to be granted.
Te yap for indeed (Germ, dennja) : Ro. vii. 7 ; cf. Fritz-
sche ad loc.; W. 448 (417). ιδού yap, see under Ihoi.
III. It serves to explain, make clear, illus-
trate, a preceding thought or word: for \. q. that is,
namely ; a. so that it begins an exposition of the
thing just announced [cf. W. 454 (423) sq.] : Mt. i. 18
[R U] ; xix. 12 ; Lk. xi. 30 ; xviii. 32. In Ro. viii. 18 yap
introiluces a statement setting forth the nature of the
συκδο^ασΑήι/αι just mentioned. b. so that the explana-
tion is intercalated into the discourse, or even added by
way of appemlLx : Mt. iv. 18; Mk. i. 16; ii. 15; v. 42;
Ro. vii. 1 ; 1 Co. xvi. 5. In Mk. xvi. 4 the information
ην yap peyas σφόδρα is added to throw light on all that
has been previously said (in vs. 3 sip) about the stone.
rV. As respects Position: ydp never occupies the
first place in a sentence, but the second, or third, or even
the fourth (ό τοΰ deov yap utof, 2 Co. i. 19 — ace. to true
text). Moreover, "not the number but the nature
of the word after which it stands is the point to be no-
ticed," Hermann on Soph. Phil. 1437.
■γοστήρ, -ρύς (poet, -f'pos), ή, in Girk. auth. fr. Horn,
down; in Sept. for IDS; 1. the belly; by melon, of
the whole for a part, 2. Lat. uterus, the womb : ev ya-
στρΐ (χ(ΐν Ιο he with child [see (χω, I. 1 b.] : Mt. i. 1 8, 23 ;
xxiv. 1 9 ; Mk. xiii. 1 7 ; Lk. xxi. 23 ; 1 Th. v. 3 ; Rov. xii.
2 ; (in Sept. for Π^ΓΙ, fien. xvi. 4 sip ; xxxviii. 25 ; Is.
vii. 14, etc. ; Hdt. 3, 32 and vit. Ilom. 2; Artem. oneir.
2, IH p. 105; 3, 32 p. 177; Pausan., Hdian., al.) ; συ\-
\αμβάν(σθαι iv yaaTpi to conceive, become pregnant, Lk.
i. 31. 3. Ilic stomach; by synecdoche α ylutton, gor-
mandizer, a man who is as it were all stomach, Hes. theog.
26 (so also yaaTpn. Arstph. av. 1604 ; Ael. v. h. 1, 28 ; and
Lat. renter in Lucil. sat. 2, 24 ed. Gerl. ' vivite ventres ') •
yaoTipei άργαί. Tit. i. 1 2 ; sec apyor, b.*
yi, an enclitic particle, answering exactly to no one
woid in Lat. or Eng. ; used by the bibl. writ, much more
rarely than by Grk. writ. How the Greeks use it, is
shown by (among others) Hermann ad Vig. p. 822 sqq. :
Klolz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 272 sqq.; Rost in Passow's Lex.
i. p. 538 sqq. ; [L. and S. s. v. ; T. S. Evans in Journ.
of class, and sacr. Philol. for 1857, p. 187 sqt].]. It indi-
ye
111
Γβθσημανη
cates that the meaninpr of the word to which it belongs
has especial promineinT•, and therefore that that word
is to be distinguished from the rest of the sentence and
uttered with greater emphasis. This distinction " can
be made in two ways, by mentioning either the least
important or the most; thus it happens that ye seems
to have contrary significations : at least and even " (Her-
mann I.e. p. 822). 1. where what is least is indi-
cated ; indeed, truly, at least : Sia y( την avaiSfiav, Lk. xi.
8 (λνΙιβΓβ, since the force of the statement lies in the
substantive not in the preposition, the Greek should have
read δια τήν ye άραίδ-, cf. Klotz 1. c. p. 327 ; Rost 1. c. p.
542 ; [L. and S. s. v. IV.]); διά ye to wapexeiv μοί (coVof, at
least for this reason, that she troubleth me [A. V. yet
because etc.], Lk. xviii. 5 (better Greek δια τά ye etc.).
2. where what ismost or greatest is indicated ; even :
or ye the very one who etc., precisely he tvlio etc. (Germ.
der es ja ist, u-elcher etc.'), Ro. viii. 32 ; cf. Klotz 1. c. p.
305; Matthiae, Lex. Euripid. i. p. fil3 sq. 3. joined
to other particles it strengthens their force ; a. άλλα ye
[so most edd.] or aWaye [(irsb.] (cf. AV. § 5, 2) : Lk.
xxiv. 21 ; 1 Co. ix. 2 ; see άλλα, L 10. b. άρα ye or 'tpaye,
see άρα, 4. 2ρά ye, see Spa, 1. c. «ye [so G T, but L Tr
WII el ye: cf. W. u. s. ; Lips. Gram. Unters. p. 123],
foil, by the indie, if indeed, seeing that, " of a thing be-
lieved to be correctly assumed" {Herm. ad Vig. p. 831 ;
cf. Fritzsche, Praeliminarien u.s.w. p. 67sqq. ; Anger,
Laodicenerbrief, p. 46 ; [W. 448 (41 7 sq.). Others hold
that Hermann's statement does not apply to the N. T.
instances. Ace. to Meyer (see notes on 2 Co. v. 3 ; Eph.
iii. 2 ; Gal. iii. 4) the certainty of the assumption resides
not in the particle but in the context ; so EUicott (on Gal.
1. c., Eph. 1. c.) ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. c. ; Col. i. 23. Her-
mann's canon, though assented to by Bornemann (Cyrop.
2, 2, 3 p. 132), Stallbaum (Meno p. 36), al., is qualified
by Baumlein (Partikeln, p. 64 sfj.), who holds that ye
often has no other effect than to emphasize the condition
expressed by ei ; cf. also Winer ed. Moulton p. 5G1]), if,
that is to say ; on the assuynption that, (see etnep s. v. el. III.
13) : Eph. iii. 2 ; iv. 21 ; Col. i. 23 ; with καί added, if
that also, if it be indeed, ((ierm. wenn denn audi) : eiye
[L Tr WH mrg. e" irep] και evSvaa^evoi, οΰ yu^KOi evpeO.
if indeed we shall be found actually clothed (with a new
body), not naked, 2 Co. v. 3 (cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; eiye κα\
eiKTi sc. τοσαΟτα enaBere, if indeed, as I believe, ye have
experienced such benefits in rain, and have not already
received harm from your inclination to Judaism, Gal. iii.
4 [yet cf. Mey., ElHc, Bp. Lghtft., al. ad loc.]. d. ei Se
μr;ye[oΓ ei ie μή ye Lchm. Treg.] (also in Plat., Arstph.,
Plut., al. ; cf. Bornemann, Scholia ad Luc. p. 95 ; Klotz ad
Devar. ii. 2 p. 527), stronger than el Se μη [Β. 393 (336
sq.) ; cf. W. 583 (543) ; 605 (563) ; Mey. on 2 Cor. xi. 16],
a. after affirmative sentences, but unless perchance, but
if not : Mt. vi. 1 ; Lk. x. 6 ; xiii. 9. β. after negative sen-
tences, otherwise, else, in the contrary event: Mt. ix. 17;
Lk. V. 36 sq. ; xiv. 32 ; 2 Co. xi. 16. e. Kaiye [so G T,
but LTrWH καί ye; cf. reff. under etye above], (cf.
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 319 ; [W. 438 (408)]), a. and at
least : Lk. xix. 42 [Tr txt. ΛΥΗ om. L Tr mrg. br.]. β.
and truly, yea indeed, yea and : Acts ii. 18; xvii. 27 L Τ
Tr WII. f. xaiVoiye [so G Τ WH, but L καίτοι ye, Tr
καί Toi ye ; cf. reff. under c. above. Cf. Klotz ad Devar.
ii. 2 p. 654 ; W. 444 (413)], although indeed, and yet
indeed : Jn. iv. 2 ; also in Acts xiv. 17 [R G] ; xvii. 27
Rec. g. μevoΰvye see in its place, h. μητιye, see μηη,
[and in its place].'
FcSeuv, 0, indecl. [in the Bible (cf. B. p. 15 (14)), and
in Suidas (e. g. 1 737 a.) ; but] in Joseph, antt. 5, (;, [3 and]
4 re8e<uv, -ώι /ot, (JU'IJ cutting off, [al. tree-feller i. e.
mighty warrior], fr. i'lj), G'iV/co/i, a leader of the Israel-
ites, who delivered them from the power of the Midianites
(Judg. vi.-viii.) : Heb. xi. 32 [where A. V. unfortunately
follows the Grk. spelling G e i/eon].*
■ye'ewa [al. would accent yeewa, deriving it through the
Chaldee. In Mk. ix. 45 Rec." ye'era], -ης [Β. 17 (15)],
ή, (fr. DJn "J, Neh. xi. 30 ; more fully Π^Π-]? N'J, Josh.
XV. 8 ; xviii. 16 ; 2 Chr. .xxviii. 3 ; Jer. vii. 32 ; D:n-'J3 'J,
2 K. xxiii. 10 K'thibh; Chald. DJ HJ, the valley of the
son of lamentation, or of the sons of lamentation, the
valley of lamentation, DJn being used for onj lamentar
tion ; see Hiller, Onomasticum ; cf. Hitzig [and Graf] on
Jer. vii. 31 ; \_B6ttcher, De Inferis, i. p. 82 sqcj.] ; ace. to
the com. opinion Din is the name of a man), Gehenna,
the name of a valley on the S. and E. of Jerusalem [yet
apparently beginning on the W., cf. Josh. xv. 8 ; Pressel
in Ilerzog s. v.], which was so called from the cries of
the little children who were thrown into the fiery arms
of Moloch [q. v.], i. e. of an idol having the form of a
buU. The Jews so abhorred the place after these horri-
ble sacrifices had been abolished by king Josiah (2 K.
xxiii. 10), that they cast into it not only all manner of
refuse, but even the dead bodies of animals and of un-
buried criminals who had been executed. And since
fires were alwaj's needed to consume the dead bodies,
that the air might not become tainted by their putrefac-
tion, it came to pass that the place was called yeewa τοΰ
πνμάί [this common explanation of the descriptive gen.
ToO nvpos is found in Rabbi David Kimchi (fl. c. A. D.
1200) on Ps. XX vii. 13. Some suppose the gen. to refer
not to purifying fires but to the fires of Molech ; others
regard it as the natural symbol of penalty (cf. Lev. x. 2 ;
Num. xvi. 35 ; 2 K. i. ; Ps. xi. 6 ; also Mt. iii. 1 1 ; xiii. 42 ;
2 Th. i. 8, etc.). See Bottcher, u. s. p. 84 ; Mey., ( Thol.,)
AVetst. on Mt. v. 22] ; and then this name was transferred
to that place in Hades where the wicked after death will
suffer punishment : Mt. v. 22, 29 sq. ; .\. 28 ; Lk. xii. 5 ;
Mk. ix. 43, 4.") ; Jas. iii. 6 ; yeewa τοΰ τηράς, Mt. v. 22;
xviii. 9; Mk. ix. 47 [R G Tr mrg. br.] ; κρίσις τής yeevvης,
Mt. xxiii. 33 ; mos τής yeevvης, worthy of punishment in
Gehenna, Mt. x.xiii. 15. Further, cf. Dillmann, Buch
Henoch, 27, 1 sq. p. 131 sq. ; [B. D. Am. ed. ; Bottcher,
u. s. p. 80 sqq. ; Hamburger, Real-Encycl., Abth. i. s. v.
Hollc ; Barllett, Life and Death eternal, App. H.].*
Γιβσ-ημανή, or Te6σημaveί (T WH), or Teθaημave'^ (L
Tr) ; [on the accent in co<ld. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103 ; TV.
§6, 1 ni. ; indecl. B. 15(14)], (fr. ni press, and KJO» cs'!),
γείτωι»
112
7εν6Τΐ|
(iethsemane, the name of a ' place ' (χωρίον [an enclosure
or landed properly']) at the foot of the Mount of Olives,
beyond the torrent Kidron : Mt. xxvi. 36 ; Mk. xiv. 32.
[11. D. Am. ed. s. v.] •
■yeCruv, -ovos, ό, ή, [fr. yij, hence originally 'of the same
land,' cf. Curlius § 132], fr. Hom. down, α neighbor: Lk.
xiv. 12; XV. G, 9; Jn. ix. 8.*
■ycXdu, -ώ ; f ut. γελάσω (in Grk. writ, more com. ytXaao-
iiai[R. 53(46); AV.S4(80)]); [fr. I lorn, down]; lohim/lr.
Lk. vi. 21 (opj). to κλαίω), 2.'). [CoMP. : κατα-γ(\άω.'\'
γί'λωϊ, -ωτοί, ό, liiuijlitcr : .Tas. iv. 9. [From Horn, down.]*
'γ€μ(ζω : 1 aor. (γίμισα ; Pass., [pres. yfμίζoμaι] ; 1 aor.
<γ(μίσθην; (γίμω, q. v.); lo βΙΙ, βΙΙ full; a. absol. in
pass. : Mk. iv. 37 ; Lk. xiv. 23. b. τι τίνος, to fill a thing
full of something : Mk. xv. 36 ; Jn. ii. 7 ; vi. 13 ; Rev. xv.
8, (Aeschyl. Ag. 443 ; al.) ; rt από τινοί, of that which
is used for filling, Lk. xv. 1 6 [not WH Tr mrg.] ; also in
the same sense τ\ ΐκ Ttvot, Rev. viii. 5 ; [cf. Lk. .w. 16 in
Wllmrg.], (p «"^-D, Ex. xvi. 32; Jer. li. 34, etc. [cf.
Vi. §.30, 8b.; B. 163 (143)]).*
7€'μω, defect, verb, used only in pres. and impf., [in
N. Ϊ. only in pres. indie, and ptcp.] ; lo be full, Jilleil full;
a. Tivos (as generally in Grk. writ.) : Mt. xxiii. 25 Lchm.,
27; Lk. xi. 39 ; Ro. iii. 14 (fr. Ps. ix. 28 (x.7)) ; Rev. iv.
6, 8 ; V. 8 ; xv. 7 ; xvii. 3 R G (see below), 4 ; xxi. 9. b.
(K Tivos : iMt. xxiii. 25 (γίμονσιν ιξ άμπα-γη! [L om. Tr br.
('^] their contents .are derived from plunder; see γιμίζω,
h. [and reff. there]), c. Hcbraistically (see πληράω, 1
fcf. B. 164 (143) ; W. § 30, 8 b.]), with ace. of the mate-
rial, γίμοντα [Treg. γ^μον τη~\ ονόβητα βλασφηΐίίας^ Rev.
xvii. 3 [LTTrWH(seeaboveandcf. Β. so (70))].•
ytvta, -OS, ή, (ΓΕΝΩ, γίνομαι [cf. Curtius p. 610]) ; Sept.
often for "ΊΊ ; in (Jrk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; 1. a he-
t/etlhif/, birth, nativity : Hdt. 3, 33 ; Xcn. Cyr. 1, 2, 8, etc. ;
[others make the collective sense the primary signif.,
see Curtius u. s.]. 2. passively, that which haf: been
bri/Dllen, men of the same slock; a faynily ; a. i)rop. as
early as Horn.; equiv. to ΠΠ3ΐνρ, Gen. xxxi. 3, etc.;
σώζίΐν'Ραχύβην κ• την yivfav αϋτη!, Joseph, antt. 5, 1, 5.
the several ranis in a natural descent, llie successive mem-
bers of a tjenealofiy: Mt. i. 17, {Ιβ^όμη ytv^a oZtos (στιν
alto ToC ηρώτον, Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 2). b. metaph. a
race of men very like each other in endowments, pursuits,
character ; and esp. in a bad sense a perverse race : Mt.
xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 41 ; .xvi. 8; [Acts ii. 40].
3. the whole mullitw/e of men livinf/ at the same time : Mt.
xxiv. 34; Mk. xiii. 30; Lk. i. 48 (ηάσαι ai ytveai) ; xxi.
32; Phil. ii. 15; used esp. of the Jewish race living at
one and the same period : Mt. xi. 16 ; xii. 39, 41 sq. 45 ;
xvi. 4 ; x.\iii. 36; Mk. viii. 12, 38 ; Lk. xi. 29 sq. 32, 50
SI].; xvii. 25; Acts . xiii. 36; Heb. iii. 10; άνθρωποι τή:
yifeaf ταίτης, Lk. vii. 31 ; avSpes τη! yev. ταυ. Lk. xi. 31 ;
την B( yevfav αΰτοϋ Tit 6ιηγήσ(ται, who can describe the
wickedness of the present generation, Acts viii. 33 (fr.
Is. liii. 8 Sept.) [but cf. Mey. ad loc.]. 4. an age (i. e.
the time ordinarily occupied by each successive genera-
tion), the space of from 30 to 33 years (Hdt. 2, 142 et al. ;
Heraclit. in Plut. def. orac. c. 11), or ό χρόνος, ίν ω yev-
νωντα παρίχίΐ τ6ν (ζ αΰτοΰ yrytvi^pfvov ό γίννήίτας (Plut.
1. e.) ; in the Ν. Τ. com. in plur. ; Kj)h. iii. 5 [W. § 3i,
9 a.; B. 186 (161)]; παρωχημίναις yev(atc in ages gone
by. Acts .\iv. 16 ; άπο τών ycvtaiv for ages, since the gener-
ations began. Col. i. 26 ; ΐκ yfveiiv αρχαίων from the gen-
erations of old, from ancient times down. Acts xv. 21 ; eiy
yfi/iof yfveHiv unto generations of generations, through
all ages, for ever, (a jjhrase which assumes that the longer
ages are made up of shorter; see αΙών, 1 a.) : Lk. i. 50
R L (D"")11 1111, Is. li. 8) ; ds yevdis κ. yfvfas unto genera-
tions atid generations, ibid. Τ Tr WH ecpiiv. to 1Π1 in'^,
Ps. Ixxxix. 2 sq. ; Is. xxxiv. 1 7 ; very often in Sept. ; [add.
fit ηάσας rar ytvfas τοΰ alHivos των αιώνων, Eph. iii. 21, cf.
Ellic. ad loc.] (ycwa is used of a century in Gen.'xv. IG,
cf. Knobel ad loc., and on the senses of the word see the
full remarks of Keim iii. 206 [v. 245 Eng. trans.]).*
-ycvEoXoytu, -ώ : [pres. pass, yt « αλογοΟμαι] ; to act Ihr
genealogist (yevea and λί'γω), to rccimnt a family's origin
and lineage, trace ancestry, (often in Hdt. ; Xcn., Plat.,
Theophr., Lcian., Ael., al.; [Sept. 1 Chr. v. 2]); pass, ίο
draic one's origin, derive one's pedigree : ix tivos, Ileb.
vii. 6.•
γ(ν(αλο7(α, -as, ή, a genealogy, a record of descent or
lineage, (Plat. Crat. p. 396 c. ; Polyb. 9, 2, 1 ; Dion. Hal.
antt. 1,11; [al.]. Sept. [edd. Aid., Compl.] 1 Chr. vii.
5, 7 ; ix. 22 ; [iv. 33 Compl. ; Ezra viii. 1 ib.]) ; in plur.
of the orders of (eons, according to the doctrine of the
Gnostics: 1 Tim. i. 4 ; Tit. iii. 9 ; cf. De Wette on Tit. i.
14 [substantially reproduced by Alf. on 1 I'im. 1. c. ; see
also Hollzmann, Pastoralbriefe, pp. 126 sq. 134 S(|. 14.'!].*
YCVcVia, -ων, τά [cf. W. 176 (166)], (fr. the adj. yeve-
aios fr. yivcais), a birth-day celebration, a birth-day feast :
Mk. vi. 21 ; Mt. xiv. 6 ; (Alciphr. epp. 3, 18 and 55 ; Dio
Cass. 47, 18, etc. ; ή ycvtaios ήμίρα, Joseph, antt. 12, 4, 7).
The earlier Greeks used -yeviViu of funeral commemora-
tions, a festival commemorative of a deceased friend
(Lat. feriae denicales), see Loh. ad Phryn. p. 103 s(]. ;
[Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 184; W. 24 (23)]. Cf.
Keim ii. p. 51G [iv. 223 Eng. trans.].*
■ye'vio-is, -t«r, ij, (ΓΕΝΩ [Curtius § 128]), in Grk. writ.
for the first time in Hom. II. 14, 201 [cf. 246]; 1.
source, origin : βίβλος yci/eVfwr τίνος a book of one's lin-
eage, i. e. in which his ancestry or his progeny are enu-
merated (i. q. nilSin 130, Gen. v. 1, etc.), [Mt. i. 1 j.
2. used of birth, nativity, in Mt. i. 18 and Lk. i. 14, for
Ree. γίννησις (ημίραι της γ^νίσΐώς μον ef|uiv. to υφ' ου
(γ^ννηθην, Judith xii. 18 cf. 20) ; πρόσωπον της γ^νίσΐως
his native (natural) face, Jas. i. 23. 3. of that which
follows origin, viz. existence, life : 6 τροχός της γαίσιως
the wheel [cf. Eng. " machinery "] of life, Jas. iii. 6 (cf.
Grimm on Sap. vii. 5) ; but others explain it the wheel
of human origin which as soon as men are born begins
to run, i. e. the course [cf. Eng. " round "] of hfe.*
γίνίτή, -ης, η, (ΓΕΝΩ, γίνομαι), (cf. Germ, die Geworden-
helt), birth ; hence very often ίκ γινιτης from birth on
(Hom. II. 24, 535 ; Aristot. eth. Nic. 6, 13, 1 p. 1144', G
etc. ; Polyb. 3, 20, 4 ; Diod. 5, 32, al. ; Sept. Lev. xxv. 47) :
Jn. ix. 1.*
Ί^νημα
113
yevo^
Ύ^'νημα, -ατός, τό, (fr. γίνομαι), a form supported by the
best Mss. in J\It. xxvi. 2:1 ; Alk. xiv. 25 ; Lk. xii. 18 ; xxii.
18; 2 Co. ix. 10, and tlicrefore adopted by Τ [see his
Proleg. p. 79] I'r [L Wll (see WH. Ά]ψ. p. 148 and be-
low)], printed by Grsb. only in Lk. xii. IS; 2 Co. ix. 10,
but gi\ en by no granniiarian, and therefore attributed by
Kritzsehe (on Mk. p. 61 9 sq.) to the carelessness of tran-
scribers, — for llec. [but in Lk. I. e. R" reads γ(νημ.~\ yeV
ιιημα, q. V. In Mk. xiv. 2.5 Lchm. has retained the eom-
luon reading; [and in Lk. xii. 18 Trtxt. WH have
σ'ιτην. In Ezek. xxxvi. 30 codd. A Β read -γίνήματα].'
γννάω, -ώ ; fut. γΐΐ'νήσω ; 1 aor. ίγίνΐ'ησα : J)t. yeyivvriKa ;
[Pass., pres. -γ^ννάομαι, -ώμαι] ; J>f. -γΐγ^νι/ημαι ; 1 aor.
€γ(νιήθην ; (fr. yivva, poetic for yei/os) ; iu Grk. writ. fr.
Pind. down ; in Sept. for iV ; tu ber/el ; 1. properly :
of men begetting children, Mt. i. 1-16; Acts vii. 8, 29;
foil, by ex with gen. of the mother, Mt. i. 3, 5, 6 ; more
rarely of women giving birth to children, Lk. i. 13, 57;
xxiii. 29 ; Jn. xvi. 21 ; fls Sov^eiau to bear a child unto
bondage, that will be a slave, Gal. iv. 24, ([Xen. de rep.
Lac. 1, 3] ; Lcian. de sacrif. 6; Plut. de liber, educ. 5;
al. ; Sept. Is. Ixvi. 9 ; 4 Mace. x. 2, etc.). Pass, to be
hef/otlen : το tv αίτη γ^ννηθίν that which is begotten in
her womb, Mt. i. 20; lo he born: Mt. ii. 1, 4 [\V. 266
(250) ; B. 203 (1 76)] ; ,\ix. 12 ; x.xvi. 24 ; Mk. xiv. 21 ; Lk.
i. 35 ; Jn. iii. 4 ; [Acts vii. 20] ; Ro. ix. 1 1 ; Heb. xi. 23 ;
with the addition eis τον κόσμον, Jn. xvi. 21 ; foil, by ev
with dat. of place. Acts xxii. 3 ; από tivos, to spring from
one as father, Ileb. xi. 12 [L WH mrg. cyeinju. see Tdf.
ail loc.] ; ϊκ rtvot to be born of a molluT, Mt. i. 16 ; (κ
nopvfias, Jn. viii. 41 ; e^ αΙμάτων, €κ θξΧηματος άνδρόζ, Jn.
i. l.'i; €K της σαρκός, Jn. iii. 6 [Rec.•^''• γίγ^νημ.] ; ev άμαρ-
τίαΐί δλοί, Jn. ix. 34 (see αμαρτία, 2 a.) ; fl'sTt, to be born
for something, Jn. xviii. 37; 2 Pet. ii. 12 [Tdf. γ^γινημ.
80 Rec.'""^^]; with an adj.: τυφλΰς yeyeWi/^ai, Jn. ix. 2,
19 sq. 32; 'Ρωμαίος to be supplied, Acts xxii. 28; rij
dia\f κτω, fv η ίγ€ννηθημΐν. Acts ii. 8 ; γ^ννηθίΐς κατά σάρκα
begotten or born according to (by) the working of nat-
ural passion ; κατίι πν(νμα according to (by) the working
of the divine promise, Gal. iv. 29, cf. 23. 2. metaph.
a. univ. lo engender, cause to arise, excite : μάχας, 2 Tim.
ii. 23 φλάβην, Χύπην, etc. in Grk. writ.), b. in a Jew-
isli sense, of one who brings others over to his way of
Ufe : υμάς (γίννησα I am the author of your Christian
life, 1 Co. iv. 15; Philera. 10, (Sanhedr. fol. 19, 2 "If
one teaches the son of his neighbor the law, the Scrijv
ture reckons this the same as though he had begotten
him"; [cf. Philo, leg. adGaium § 8]). c. after Ps. ii. 7,
it is used of God making Christ his son ; a. formally to
show him to be the Messiah (vwv toC β(οϋ), viz. by the
resurrection : Acts xiii. 33. β. to be the author of the
divine nature which he possesses [but cf. the Comm. on
the pass, that follow] : Heb. i. 5 ; v. 5. d. peculiarly, in
the Gospel and 1 Ep. of John, of God conferring upon
men the nature and disposition of his sons, imparting to
them spiritual life, i. e. by his own holy power prompting
and persuading souls to put faith in Christ and live a
new life consecrated to himself; absol. : 1 Jn. v. 1;
mostly in pass., « 0(θϋ or ΐκ τοϋ θιοΰ ϊγίννήβησαν, ytytv-
νηται, γ^γΐννημίνος, etc. : Jn. i. 13 ; 1 Jn. ii. 29 [Rec.*' yt-
■ye'i/T/rai] ; iii. 9; iv. 7; v. 1, 4, 1-^; also c< τοϋ ττνίνματυς
γΐννΰσθαι, Jn. iii. 6 [Rec.*'"'• yeyei^^.], 8 ; ΐξ ύδατος κα\
πνεύματος (because that moral generation is effected in
receiving baptism [(?) cf. Schaff's Langc, (iodet. West-
cott, on the words, and reff. s. v. βάπτισμα, 3]), Jn. iii. 5 ;
άνωθ(ν γfvvάσθaι, Jn. iii. 3, 7 (see avwufu, c.) e(juiv. to
TtKvov θΐου γίνίσθαι, i. 1 2. [CoMr. : avayfvvam.l *
■γί'ννημα, -tos. to, (fr. yewάω), that wliicli has lieen be-
l/ollen or bin-n ; a. as in the earlier Grk. writ. fr. Soph,
down, the ojl'sprinr/, prorjenij, of men or of animals ; ϊχι-
hvuv, Mt. iii. 7 ; xii. 34 ; xxiii. 33 ; Lk. iii. 7 ; {yvvaiKUv,
Sir. X. 18). b. fr. Polyb. [1, 71, 1 etc.] on [cf. W. 23],
the fruits of the earth, /iroducts of arjrieulture, (in Sept.
often yf ννηματα της γης) : Lk. xii. 1 8 (where Tr [txt.
WH] τον οΊτον) ; της άμπίλον, Mt. xxvi. 29 ; SIk. xiv. 25 ;
Lk. xxii. 18; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 286. Metaph. /ruiV,
reward, jirnfit : της δικαιοσύνης, 2 Co. ix. 10, (Hos. x. 12 ;
της σοφίας. Sir. i. 17; vi. 19). Further, see γίνημα*
Γίννησαρί'τ [so G Τ Tr WH], -ρίθ [Lchm. in Mt. xiv.
34], \Γ(νησαρίτ Rec. in Mk. vi. 53 ; cf. Tdf. ed. 2 Proleg.
p. xxxv., ed. 7 Proleg. p. liv. note^]. (Targunis "^O'^j or
"ID13J [ace. to Delitzsch (Romerbr. in d. Ilebr. iibers. ]>.
27) Ίρ^ί, ipuj] ; Γ(ννησάρ, 1 Macc. xi. 67; Josepli. b.j.
2, 20, 6 etc.; Oenesaru, Plin. 5, 15), Gennesaret, a very
lovely and fertile region on the Sea of Galilee (Josei)h.
b. j. 3, 10, 7) : η yi, Γ(ννησ. Mt. xiv. 34 ; Mk. vi. 53; ή
λίμνη Γίννησ. Lk. v. 1, anciently Π133 D", Num. xxxiv.
ll,orrili:2) D", Josh. xii. 3, fr. thecity niJ3,Deut. iii. 1 7,
which was near b}• ; called in the (iospels ή θάλασσα της
Γαλιλαίας, ^Ik. i. 16; Mt. iv. 18; η θάλασσα της Ύιβ(ρι-
άδος, Jn. vi. 1 ; xxi. 1. The lake, ace. to Josei)h. b.j. 3,
10, 7, is 140 stadia long and 40 wide ; [its extreme di-
mensions now are said to average 12Jm. by 6 J m., and
its level to be nearly 700 ft. below that of the Jlediter-
ranean]. Cf. liuelschi in Ilerzog v. p. 6 sq. ; Furrer in
Schenkel ii. p. 322 sqq. ; \_Wilson in "The Recovery of
Jerusalem," Pt. ii. ; Robinson, Phys. Geog. of the Holy
Land, p. 199 sqq. ; BB.DD. For conjectures respecting
the derivation of the word cf. Alex.'s Kitto sub fin. ; Mer-
rill, GaUlee in the Time of Christ, § vii.].*
γί'ννησίϊ, -(ως, η, (yfwάω), a heiiettiug, enrjendering,
(often so in Plat.) ; uutiritg, birth : Rec. in Mt. i. 18 and
Lk. i. 14 ; see y«Ί<cσιy, 2.*
γ€ννητ05, -ή, -όν, (yfvvaai), begotten, horn, (often in Plat. ;
Diod. 1, 6 sqq.) ; after the Ilebr. (ΠΓΝ Ii'?', Job -xiv. 1,
etc.), γ(ννητο\ γυναικών [Β. 169 (147), born of women}
is a periphrasis for men, with the implied idea of weak-
ness and frailty : Mt. xi. 1 1 ; Lk. vii. 28.*
γί'νοϊ, -ους, τό, (ΓΕΝΩ, γίνομαι), race ; a. offspring :
τικίίί, Acts xvii. 28 sq. (fr. the poet Aratus) ; Rev. xxii.
16. b. familji : Acts [iv. 6, see άρχκρινς, 2 fin.] ; vii. 13
[al. refer this to c] ; xiii. 26. c. stock; race: Acts \ii.
19 ; 2 Co. xi. 26 ; Phil. iii. 5 ; Gal. i. 14 ; 1 Pet. ii. 9 ; (Gen.
xi. 6 ; xvii. 14, etc. for D>') ; nation (i. e. nationalitii or
descent from a particular people) : Mk. vii. 26 ; Acts iv.
36; xviii. 2, 24. d. concr. the aggregate of many mdi-
Γΐρασηνός
114
Υ')
viduals of the same nature, Und, sort, species : Mt. xiii. 47 ;
xvii. 21 [T WHoni. Tr br. the vs.]; Mk. L\. 'dd ; 1 Co.
xii. 10, 28; xiv. 10. (AVith the same significations in
Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.)*
Γίρασ-ηνόβ, -oO, 0, Gerasene, i. e. belonging to the city
Gerasa (ja Τίρασα, Joseph, b. j. 3, 3, 3) : ISIt. viii. 28
[Lchm.]; >lk. v. 1 [L Τ WH Tr txt.]; Lk. viii. 26 and 37
[L Tr WIl] ace. to very many eodd. seen by Origen. But
since Gerasa was a city situated in the southern part of
Persea (Joseph. 1. c, cf. 4, 9, 1), or in Arabia (Orig.
opp. iv. 140 ed. De la Rue), that cannot be referred to
here ; see Ταίαρηνήί, and the ne.ft word.*
Γ€ργίσην05, -r;, -ox, Gergesene, belonging to the city
Gergesa, whiuh is assumed to have been situated on the
eastern shore of Lake Gennesaret: Mt. viii. 28 Rec. But
this reading depends on the authority and 0])inion of
Origen, who thought the variants found in his Mss.
Τα6αρψων and Τιρασηνων (see these words) must be made
to conform to the testimony of those who said that there
was formerly a certain city Gergesa near the lake. But
Josephus knows nothing of it, and states expressly (antt.
1, 6, 2), that no trace of the ancient Gergesites [A. V.
Girgashites, cf. B. D. s. v.] (mentioned Gen. xv. 20;
Josh. -xxiv. 1 1 ) had survived, except the names preserved
in the O. T. Hence in Mt. viii. 28 we must read Γαδα-
ρηνων [so Τ Tr WH] and suppose that the jurisdiction
of the city Gadara extended quite to the Lake of Gennes-
aret ; but that Matthew (viii. 34) erroneously thought
that this city was situated on the lake itself. For in Mk.
V. 14 sq. ; Lk. viii. 34, there is no objection to the sui>
position that the men came to Jesus from the rural dis-
tricts alone. [But for the light thrown on this matter
by modern research, see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Gadara ;
Thomson, The Land and the Book, ii. 34 sqq. ; Wilson
in " The Recovery of Jerusalem " p. 286 sq.] *
Ycpous-Ca, -at, ή, (adj. yepoiaios, belonging to old
men, ykptov), a senate, council, of elders; used in prof,
autli. of the chief council of nations and cities (fV raii
noKeai al ytpovaim, Xen. mem. 4, 4, 16 ; in the O. T. of
the chief council not only of the whole people of Israel,
Ex. iii. 16, etc. ; 1 Mace. xii. 6, etc. ; but also of cities,
Deut. xix. 12, etc.) ; of the (ireat Council, the Sanhedrin
of the Jews : Acts v. 21, where to to awkbpiov is added
και τιάσαν την ytpovaiav των υιών ΊσραηΧ and indeed (και
explicative) all the senate, to signify the full Sanhedrin.
[Cf. Schiirer, Die Gemeindeverfassung d. Juden in Rom
in d. Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargestellt. Leips.
1879, p. 18 sq.; Hatch, Bamp. Lects. for 1880, p. 64 sq.]*
γί'ρων, -ovTos.o, [fr. Hom. down], an oUI man : Jn. iii. 4.
[Syn. cf. Augustine in Trench § cvii. 2.] *
^eiu:,[cf. LaA. gusto, (ierm. kosten; Curtius § 131]; to
cause to taste, to give one a taste of τινά (den. xxv. 30).
In the N. T. only Mid. ydopai : fut. γίύσομαι ; 1 aor.
(γ€νσάμην ; 1. to taste, try the flavor of: Mt. xxvii. 34 ;
contrary to better Grk. usage (cf. W. § 30, 7 c. [and p. 36 ;
Antiiol. Pal. 6, 120]) with ace. of the obj. : Jn. ii. 9. 2.
to ta.ile, i. e. perceive the flavor of, partake (f. enjoy :
rivor, Lk. xiv. 24 (yt uo-irai μον toC SdViOu, i. e. shall par-
take of my banquet) ; hence, as in Grk. writ. fr. Horn.
down, i. q. to feci, ynake trial of experience : twos, IIcl).
vi. 4 ; ρήμα flfoC, ib. 5, (τής γχώσίωί. Clem. Koui. 1 Cor.
3G, 2). as in Chald., Syr. and Rabbin, writers, yeufffiai
ToC θάνατον [W. 33 (32)] : Mt. xvi. 2S ; Mk. ix. 1 ; Lk.
ix. 27; Jn. viii. 52 ; lieb. ii. 9 ; [cf. Wetsti-in on Mt. 1. c. ;
Meyer on Jn. 1. c. ; Bleek, Liinem., Alf. on Heb. 1. c.].
foil, by on: 1 Pet. ii. 3 (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 9). 3. to
take food, eat: absol., Acts x. 10; xx. 11; cf. Kypke,
Observv. ii. p. 47 ; to take nourishment, eat — [but sul>
stantially as above], with gen. μι^δίχόί, Actsxxiii. 14; with
the ellipsis of a gen. denoting unlawful food, Col. ii. 21.*
■yewpYc'w, -ώ : [pres. pass, y(ωpyoϋμaι] ; (yetopyos, (|. V.) ;
to practise agriculture, to till the ground: την γην (Plat.
Theag. p. 121 b.; Eryx. p. 392 d. ; [al.] ; 1 Esdr. iv. 6 ;
1 Mace. xiv. 8) ; Pass. : Ileb. vi. 7.*
-ycώp7ιov, -ου, τό, a (cultivated) flel•! : 1 Co. iii. 9 [A. V.
husbandry (with marg. tillage)']. (Prov. xxiv. 45 (30) ;
xxxi. 16 (xxix. 34) ; Theag. in schol. Pind. Nem. 3, 21 ;
Strabo 14, 5, 6 p. 671 ; [al.].)*
γ€ωργ05, -οΰ, ό, (fr. yf) and ΕΡΓΩ), fr. [Hdt.], Xen. and
Plat, down; a husl/andmnn, tiller of the soil: 2 Tim. ii.
6 ; Jas. V. 7 ; several times in Sept. ; used of a vine-<]resser
(Ael. nat. an. 7, 28; [Plat. Theaet. p. 178 d. ; al.]) in
Mt. xxi. 33 sqq.; Mk. xii. 1 sq. 7, 9; Lk. .xx. 9 sq. 14,
16; Jn. XV. 1.*
γή, gen. y^f, ή, (contr. fr. yea, poet, yaia), Sept. very
often for y>t< and Π3ΊΚ, earth; 1. arable land: Mt.
xiii. 5, 8, 23 ; Mk. iv! S, 20, 26, 28, 31 ; Lk. xiii. 7 ; xiv.
35 (34) ; Jn. xii. 24 ; Ileb. vi. 7 ; Jas. v. 7 ; Rev. ix. 4 ;
of the earthy material out of which a thing is formed,
with the implied idea of frailty and weakness : ίκ y!js
χοϊκός, 1 Co. .XV. 47. 2. the ground, the earth as a
standing-place, (Cierm. Boden) : Mt. x. 29 ; xv. 35; xxiii.
35 ; xxvii. 51 ; Mk. viii. 6 ; ix. 20 ; xiv. 35 ; Lk. xxii. 44
[L br. WH reject the pass.] ; xxiv. 5 ; Jn. viii. 6, 8, [i. e.
Rec] ; Acts ix. 4, 8. 3. the main land, opp. to sea or
water : ISIk. iv. 1 ; vi. 47 ; Lk. v. 3 ; viii. 27 ; Jn. vi. 21 ;
xxi. 8 sq. 11 ; Rev. xii. 12. 4. the earth as a whole,
the world (Lat. terrarum orhis) ; a. the earth as ojip.
to the heavens: Mt. v. 18, 35; vi. 10; xvi. 19; χ viii. 18;
xxiv. 35 ; Mk. xiii. 31 ; Lk. ii. 14 ; Jn. xii. 32 ; Acts ii. 1!» ;
iv. 24 ; 2 Pet. iii. 5, 7, 10, 13 ; Rev. .xxi. 1 ; τα fVi τής γήί
the things and beings that are on the earth, Eph. i. 1 ;
Col. i. 16 [T WHom. LTrbr. τά]; involving a suggestion
of mutability, frailty, infirmity, alike in thought and in
action, Mt. vi. 19; τά fVl T^t y^s (equiv. to τα en-iyfia,
Phil. iii. 19) terrestrial goods, pleasures, honors. Col. iii.
2 (opp. to τα άνω) ; τα μίλη ίμων τά f πϊ της γής the mem-
bers of your earthly body, as it were the abode and
instruments of corrupt desires. Col. iii. 5; oS)v ίκ τη! y^s
. . . λαλίί (in contrast with Christ as having come from
heaven) he who is of earthly (human) origin, has an
earthly nature, and speaks as his earthly origin and
nature prompt, Jn. iii. 31. b. the inhabited eirth, the
abode of men and animals : Lk. xxi. 35 ; Acts i. 8 ; x. 1 2 ;
xi. 6 ; xvii. 26 ; Heb. xi. 13; Rev. iii. 10 ; aiptiv ζαην
Tivos or Tiva από της y^r, Acts viii. 33; xxii. z2 ; κΚηρο-
yVpa<i
115
γίνομαι
νομίΐν την γην (sec κλϊ/ροι/ομί'ω, 2), Mt. ν. 5 (4) ; πΰρ ί3άλ-
Xeii/ eVi [Kec. eis] r^vy^v, i. e. among men, Lk. xii. 49, cf.
5 1 and Mt. x. 34 ; eVt τη: -γη! among men, Lk. xviii. 8 ;
Jn. xvii. 4. 5. a country, land enclosed within fixed
boundiiries, a trad of land, territory, region ; simply, when
it is plain from the context what land is meant, as that
of the Jews : Lk. iv. 25 ; xxi. 23 ; Ro. ix. 28 ; Jas. v.
1 7 ; with a gentile noun added [then, as a rule, anar-
throus, W. 121 (114 sq.)]: yq Ισραήλ, Mt. ii. 20 sq. ;
Ίού8α, Mt. ii. 6 ; Γιννησαρίτ, Mt. xiv. 34 ; Mk. vi. 53 ; Σο-
δήμων κ. Γομάρρων, Mt. χ. 15 ; xi. 24 ; ΧαΧδαίων, Acts vii.
4 ; Αίγυπτο?, (see Αίγυπτος) ; η *Ιουδαία γη, Jn. iii. 22 ;
with the addition of an adj. : αλλότρια, Acts vii. 6 ; ίκύνη,
Mt. ix. 26, 31 ; with gen. of pers. one's country, native
land, Acts vii. 3.
-yfipas, -aos (-ω?). Ion. γηρ€ος, dat. γήρ^ί, γήρΐΐ, τό, [fr.
Horn, down], old age : Lk. i. 36 iv γήρ(ί G L Τ Tr
λ\Ή for Rec. fv γημα, a form found without var. in Sir.
XXV. 3; [also Ps. xci. (xcii.) 15; cf. Gen. xv. 15 Alex.;
xxi. 7 ib. ; xxv. 8 ib. ; 1 Chr. xxix. 28 ib. ; Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 10, 7 var.; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 117]; Fritzsche
on Sir. iii. 12; Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 155; W.
[36 and] 64 (62); [B. 15 (14)].•
γηράσκω or γΐ7ράω : 1 aor. eyijpaCTa; fr. Horn, down ; [cf.
W. 92 (88) ; Donaldson, Xew Crat. § 387] ; to grow old :
Jn. xxi. 18; of things, institutions, etc., to fail from age,
be obsolescent: Heb. viii. 13 (to be deprived of force and
authority ; [here associated with παλαιούμινο! — the lat-
ter (used only of things) marking the lapse of time, while
γηράσκων carries with it a suggestion of the waning
strength, the decay, incident to old age (cf. Schmidt ch.
46, 7 ; Theophr. caus. pi. 6, 7, 5) : "that which is becom-
ing old and faileth for age " etc.]).*
γίνομαι (in Ionic prose writ, and in com. Grk. fr. Aristot.
on for Attic γίγυομαι) ; [impf. (γίνόμην~\ ; fut. γ^νήσομαι ; 2
aor. (γίνόμην (often in 3 pers. sing, optat. γίνοιτο ; [ptcp.
γ^νάμ(νος, Lk. x.xiv. 22 Tdf. ed. 7]), and, with no diff. in
signif., 1 aor. pass, ίγινήθην, rejected by the .\tticists (cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 108 sq. ; [Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p.
75, 6 sq.]), not rare in later Grk., common in Sept. (Acts
iv. 4 ; 1 Th. ii. 14 ; 1 Co. xv. 10, etc.), impv. γΐνηθήτΌ) (Mt.
vi. 10 ; XV. 28, etc.) ; pf. γιγίνημαι and γίγοι/ο, 3 pers. plur.
γίγοναν L Τ Tr Wll in Ro. xvi. 7 and Rev. xxi. 6 (cf.
[Tdf Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 166; Soph. Lex. p.
37 sq.; Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. 187] ; W. 36 and 7C (73)
sq. ; MuUach p. 16; B. 43 (37 sq.)), [ptcp. γ(γονώς~\;
plpf. 3 pers. sing, fyeyoi-fi (Jn. vi. 1 7 [not Tdf.] ; Acts
iv. 22 [where L Τ Tr Wllyfyom, cf. W. § 12, 9 ; B. 33
(29) ; Tdf.'s note on the pass.]) ; to become, and
1. to become, i. e. to come into existence, begin to be, re-
ceive being : absol., Jn. i. 15, 30 (ΐμπροσθίν μου γίγονιν) ;
Jn. viii. 58 (πρ'ιν Άβραίιμ γινίσθαι) ; 1 Co. xv. 37 (τό σώμα
το γξνησόμ^νον) ; (κ τίνος, to l/e horn, Ro. i. 3 (ίκ σπίρματος
Δαυίδ); Gal. iv. 4 (ex yvvaiKOs) ; Mt. xxi. 19 (μτ;«'τι ίκ
σοϋ καρπός γΐνηται, come from) ; of the origin of all things,
Heb. xi. 3 ; διά τίνος, Jn. i. 3, 10. to rise, arise, come on,
apoear, of occurrences in nature or in life : as yiveTai
βροντή, Jn. xii. 29 ; αστραπή. Rev. viii. 5 ; σασμύς. Rev.
[vi. 12; xi. 13]; xvi. 18; γαλήνη, Mt. viii. 26; Mk. iv.
39; Lk. viii. 24; λαΐλαψ, Mk. iv. 37; γογγυσμός, Acts
vi. 1 ; ζήτησις, J η. iii. 25 [foil, by « of origin ; στάσις και
ζήτησις]. Acts xv. 2 [Grsb. questions ζήτ., Rec. reads
συζήτ.^ ; πόλεμος. Rev. xii. 7 ; ή βασιλίία [or α! /S.] κτλ.
Rev. xi. 15 ; .\ii. 10 ; χαρά. Acts viii. 8, and in many other
e.KX. Here belong also the phrases γίνεται ήμίρα it he-
comes day, day comes on, Lk. iv. 42 ; vi. 13 ; xxii. 66 ;
Acts xii. 18 ; xvi. 35 ; xxiii. 12 ; xxvii. 29, 33, 39 ; y. οψί
evening comes, Mk. xi. 19, i. q. y όψία, Mt. viii. 16, xiv.
15, 23; xvi. 2 [T br. WH reject the pass.] ; xxvi. 20;
Mk. xiv. 17 ; Jn. vi. 16, etc.; πρωία, Mt. xxvii. 1 ; Jn.
xxi. 4 ; ννξ, Acts xxvii. 27 [cf. s. v. ίπιγίν. 2] ; σκοτία, Jn.
vi. 1 7 [not Tdf.]. Hence
2. to become i. q. to come to pass, happen, of events ;
a. univ. : Mt. v. 18; x.\iv. 6, 20, 34; Lk. i. 20; xii. 54;
xxi. 28; Jn. i. 28; xiii. 19, etc.; τούτο yeyoj/ci/, ί α etc.
this hath come to pass that etc., Mt. i. 22 ; x.\i. 4 ; xxvi.
56; τα γινόμίνα or γινόμενα, Mt. xviii. 31; xxvii. 54;
xxviii. 1 1 ; Lk. xxiii. 48 ; [cf. τα γ(νόμ(να αγαθά, Heb.
ix. 11 L WHtxt. Trmrg.] ; το yfυόμevov, Lk. xxiii. 47;
TO γεγονός, Mk. v. 14 ; Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. WH
reject the vs.] ; Acts iv. 21 ; τό ρήμα το γ(γονός, Lk. ii.
15; τα μΐλλοι/τα yii/fffiai, Lk. .xxi. 36 : Acts xxvi. 22; την
άνάστασιν ηδη ycyovevai, 2 Tim. ii. 18; θανάτου γ^νομΐνυν
a death having taken jdace (Germ, /tach erfolgtem Tode),
Heb. ix. 15. μή γίνοιτο, a formula esp. freq. in Paul (and
in Epictetus, cf. Srhweigh. Index Graec. in Epict. p. 392),
far be it ! God forbid ! [cf. Morison, Exposition of Rom.
iii., p. 31 sq.] : Lk. xx. 16 ; Ro. iii. 4, 6, 31 ; vi. 2, 15 ; vii.
7, 13 ; ix. 14 ; xi. 1, 11 ; 1 Co. vi. 15 ; Gal. ii. 17; iii. 21
(equiv. to nS'Sn, Josh. xxii. 29, etc.) ; cf. Sturz, De dial.
Maced. etc. p. 204 scj. ; τι γίγην^ν, ότι etc. tvhat has come
to pass, that etc. i. (j. for what reason, why ? .In. xiv. 22 (τί
f'yeVeTo, ότι . . . Eccles. vii. 11 (10) ; τι ΐστιν, ώς etc., Eur.
Troad. 889). b. Very common in the first three (ios-
pels, esp. that of Luke, and in the Acts, is the phrase και
f'yei/cTo ('ri'l foil, by 1) ; of. W. § 65, 4 e. [also § 44, 3 c],
and esp. B. § 141, 6. o. και fyeirro και with a finite verb:
Mk. ii. 15 ([Trtxt. κα\ yiMTai], TWH ral γίν. [foil, by
ace. and inf.]) ; Lk. ii. 15 [R G Lbr. Trbr.] ; viii. 1 ; xiv.
1; xvii. 11 ; xix. 15; xxiv. IS [WHbr. καί] ; foil, by κα\
Ίδοί, Mt. ix. 10 [T om. και before ιδ.] ; Lk. xxiv. 4. β.
much oftener καί is not repeated : Mt. vii. 28 ; Mk. iv. 4;
Lk. i. 23; ii. [15 TWH], 46; vi. 12; vii. 11; ix. 18, 33; xi.
1 ; xix. 29 ; xxiv. 30. y. καϊ i'yev. foil, by ace. with inf. :
Mk. ii. 23 [W. 578 (537) note] ; Lk. vi. Ι,'β [R G tyfi-. δί
και]. c. In like manner ϊγίν^το δί α. foil, by και witli
a finite verb : Lk. v. 1 ; ix. 28 [WH txt. om. L br. και,
51 ; X. 38 R G Τ, L Tr mrg. br. καΐ\ ; Acts v. 7. β. ΐγίνιτα
δί foil, by a fin. verb without και : Lk. i. 8 ; ii. 1, 6 ; [vi.
12 R (J L] ; viii. 40 [WH Tr txt. om. fyfV.] : ix. 37 ; xi.
14, 27. γ. f'yivfTo δί foil, by ace. with inf. : Lk. iii. 21 ;
[vi. 1, 6 LTTrWH, 12TfrWH]; xvi. 22>v\cts iv.
5; ix. 3 [without δί], 32. 37; xi. 26 RG; χΙΛ V j [xvi.
16 ; xix. 1]; xxviii. 8, [17]. 8. f'yiV. δί [ώς δί'^ν.] foU.
by τοϋ with inf. : Acts x. 25 (Rec. om. τοί), cf.^Iey. ad
loc. andW.328(307); [B. 270 (232)]. d. with dat. of
•yivufiat,
116
ΎΙΙΌμαΐ
|)cr8. ίο occur or Ιιαρρηι to nnf, he- fall one : foil, by inf.,
Acts x.\. 16 ; fiiv γίιηται (sc. αντω) tiipdv αυτά, if it liap])en
t<) him, Mt. xviii. I.j ; (μ<ιΊ St μη yti/oiro κανχάσθαι Jar he it
from me to i/l<tri/. Gal. vi. 14, (den. xliv. 7, 17; 1 K. .\.\.
(x.\i.) 3; Alciphr. epp. 1, 26); foil. l>y ace. with inf. it
happened to me, thai etc.: Acts xi. 26 LTTr WII [but
aec. implied]; xxii. 6, 17, [cf. W. 323 (303); B. :W:>
(262)] ; with adverbs, go, fare, (Germ, ergehen) : d, Ejih.
vi. 3, (μη γίνοιτό σοι οΰτω κακώί, Ael. V. h. 9, 36). with
specification of the tliini; befalling one: τί ytyovtv [LT
Trtxt. Wll e'yfv.] αύτώ. Acts vii. 40 (fr. Ex. xxxii. 1);
tyfvtTo [L 'Γ Tr WH e'yiVeTo] πιίσι; ψυχ;/ φύβο! fear came
upon. Acts ii. 43. — Mk. iv. 11 ; ix. 21 ; Lk. xix. 9; Jn. v.
14 ; XV. 7 ; Ro. xi. 2.5 ; 1 Co. iv. 5 ; 2 Co. i. 8 [G L Τ Tr
VVIIora.d:it.]; 2 Tim. iii. 11 ; 1 Pet. iv. 12; with the
ellipsis of ήμΐν, -fn. i. 1 7. iyivtro (αίτώ) γνώμη a purpose
occurred to him, he determined, Actsxx. 3 [B. 268 (230),
but Τ Tr WII read eytv. γνώμης; see below, 5 e. a.].
foil, by prepositions : «V airrj upon (Germ, bei or an)
her, Mk. v. 33 [Rti L br.] ; etsriva. Acts xxviii. 6.
3. to arise, appear in history, come upon the stage :
of men appearing in ])nblic, Mk. i. 4; Jn. i. 6, [on which
two pass. cf. W. 3U0 (;J28) ; B. 308 (2ιί4) Sij.] ; 2 Pet. ii.
1 ; yeyavaat, have arisen and now exist, 1 .In. ii. 18.
4. In lie iniide, done, Jinis/ied : τα fpya, Ileb. iv. 3; Sia
χαρών, of things fabricated, Acts xix. 26 ; of miracles to
he performed, tcrought: δια τών χαρών τίνος, Mk. vi. 2;
διύ Τίνος, Acts ii. 43 ; iv. 1 6, 30 ; xii. 9 ; ύπό τίνος, Lk. i.\.
7 (11 L [but the latter br. ϋπ' αυτόν]); xiii. 17; xxiii. 8;
yfvopeva (1ς Καφαρν. done unto (on) Capernaum i. e. for
its benefit (W. 416 (388) ; [cf. B. 333 (2S6)]), Lk.iv. 23
[Rec. (V TTj K.]. of commands, decisions, purposes, re-
quests, etc. to be done, executed : Mt. vi. 10; xxi. 21 ; xxvi.
42 ; Mk. xi. 23 ; Lk. xiv. 22 ; xxiii. 24 ; Acts xxi. 14 ; y(-
νήσίται ά λόγος will be accomplished the saying, 1 Co. xv.
54. joined to nouns implying a certain action : ή άπώ-
Xfia γίγονί, Mk. xiv. 4 ; απογραφή, Lk. ii. 2 ; f jrayycXm
■γινομΐνη ύπό ^fou given by (iod. Acts xxvi. 6; άνύκρισις.
Acts XXV. 26 ; νόμου μ€τάθ(σις, Heb. vii. 12 ; άφισις, Ileb.
iz. 22. of institutions, laws, etc. to be established, en-
acted: TO σάβίίατον ΐγίνιτο, the institvition of the Sabbath,
Mk. ii. 27 ; ό νίψος, ( Jal. iii. 1 7 ; οΰ γίγονιν οϋτως hath not
been so ordained, Mt. xix. 8. of feasts, marriages, en-
tertainments, to be kept, celebrated : το ττΰσχα, Mt. x.xvi.
2 (i. q. npi'i, 2 K. xxiii. 22) ; to σάβϋατον. Mk. vi. 2 ; τα
iyKaivia, Jn. x. 22 ; [γ(ν(σίοις γινομίνοις (cf. W. § 31 , 9 b. ;
R (j γίνισίων άγομίνων), Mt. xiv. 6], (τά 'Ολύμπια, Xen.
Ilell. 7, 4, 28 ; Ίσθμια, 4, 5, 1) ; γάμος, Jn. ii. 1. οΰτω;
γνηται iv (μοί so done with me, in my case, 1 Co. ix. 15.
5. to become, be made, " in passages where it is speci-
fied who or what a person or thing is or has been ren-
dered, as respects quality, condition, place, rank, charac-
ter " (Wahl, Clavig Apocr. V. T. p. 101). a. with a
predicate added, expressed by a subst. or an adj. : oi λίθοι
ovTOi άρτοι γίνωνται, Mt. iv. 3 ; Lk. iv. 3 ; ύδωρ οΓΐΌΚ yfyf-
νημίνον, .In. ii. 9 ; άρχιιριυί γ(νόμ(νος, Heb. vi. 20 ; δκίκοκο;,
Col. i. 25 ; 6 λόγος σαρξ iyevfTo, Jn. i. 14 ; άνηρ, 1 Co. xiii.
11, and many other exx. ; χάρις οΰκίτι γίνιται χάρις grace
ceases to have the nature of grace, can no longer be called
grace, Ro. xi. 6 ; άκαρπος γίνιται. Ml•, xiii. 22; Jlk. iv. 1 !» ;
— in Mt. xvii. 2 ; Lk. viii. 1 7 ; Jn. v. 6, and many otlier
places, contextually, to show one's self, proce one's self:
Lk. X. 36 ; xix. 17 ; xxiv. 19 ; Ro. xi. 34 ; xvi. 2 ; 2 Co. i.
18 Rec. ; 1 Th. i. 6 ; ii. 7 ; Ileb. xi. 6, etc. ; esp. in exhor-
tations : γΊν(σβ(, Mt. X. 16; xxiv. 44; Lk. vi. 36; Eph.
iv. 32 ; Col. iii. I J ; μη γίνου, Jn. xx. 27 ; μη γίν(σθ(, Mt.
vi. 16 ; Eph. v. 7, 1 7 ; 1 Co. x. 7 ; μή γινώμιθα, (Jal. v. 26 ;
hence used declaratively, i. q. to he found, shown : Lk.
xiii. 2 (that it was shown by their fate that they were
sinners); Ro. iii. 4; 2 Co. vii. 14; — γίνομαι τινί τκ to
show one's self (to be) some one to one: 1 Co. ix. 20,
22. b. with an interrog. pron. as predicate : τί ό Πίτρος
(γίνίτο wliat had become of Peter, Acts xii. 18 [cf. use of
Ti ίγίν. in Act. Phil, in IIcU. § 23, Tilf. Acta apost. apocr.
p. 104]. c. γίνισθαί ώς or ώσά τίνα Ιο become as or like
to one : Mt. x. 25 ; xviii. 3 ; xxviii. 4 ; Mk. ix. 26 ; Lk. xxii.
44 [L br. WII reject the pass.] ; Ro. ix. 29 (fr. Is. i. 9) ;
1 Co. iv. 1 3 ; Gal. iv. 1 2. d. γίν(σθαι (ϊς τι Ιο become i. e.
be changed into somethint), come to he, issue in, something
(Germ, zu elwas werden) : ίγινήβη ίΐς κιφαλήν γωνίας, Mt.
x.xi. 42; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. xx. 17; Actsiv. Π ; 1 Pet.ii. 7,
— all after Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 22. Lk. .xiii. 1 9 ((if Sfv^pov
μίγα) ; .Τη. xvi. 20 ; Acts v. 3G ; Ro. xi. 9 (fr. Ps. Ixviii.
(lxix.)23);l Th.iii.5; Rev. viii. 1 1 ; xvi. 19,etc. (Cipiiv. to
S T\'J\ ; but the expression is also classic ; cf. W. § 29, 3 a. ;
B. 150(131)). e. yiViffflai with Cases ; a. with the gen.
to become the properly of any one, to come into the power
of a person or thing, [cf. W. § 30,5; esp. B. 162 (142)] :
Lk. XX. 14 [L nirg. «σται], 33 ; Rev. xi. 1 5 ; [γνώμης, Act.i
xx. 3 TTr WH (cf. ί'λπι'δο? μίγάλης γίν. Plut. Phoc. 23,
4)] ; προφητεία Ιδίας (πιλνσ^ως ου γίνεται no one can ex-
plain prophecy by his own mental power (it is not a mat^
ter of subjective interpretation), but to explain it one
needs the same illumination of the Holy Spirit in which
it originated, for etc. 2 Pet. i. 20. yeveauai with a gen.
indicating one's age, (to be) so many years old : Lk. ii.
42 ; 1 Tim. v. 9. β. with the dat. [cf. W. 210 sq. (198)] :
γίν(σθαι avhpi to become a man's wife, Ro. vii. 3 s(j. {7\''^
O'if.'-', Lev. xxii. 1 2 ; Ruth i. 1 2, etc.). f. joined to prep-
ositions with their substantives ; tv tiki, to come or pass
into a certain stale [cf. B. 330 (284)] : (v αγωνία, Lk. xxii.
44 [Lbr. WH reject the pass.]; ev ί'κστάσ«. Acts xxii.
17 ; Ινπνίΰματι, Rev. 1. 10; iv. 2 ; iv δόξη [R. V. came with
(in) glory], 2 Co. iii. 7; iv παραβάσιι, 1 Tim. ii. 14; er
ίαυτώ, to come to himself, recover reason, Acts xii. 1 1
(also in Grk. writ. ; cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 749) ; iv
Χριστώ, to be brought to the fellowship of Christ, to be-
come a Christian, Ro. xvi. 7 ; iv όμοιώματι ανθρώπων, to
become like men, Phil. ii. 7 ; iv λόγω κολακ(ίας [R. V.
were we found using'] flattering speech, 1 Th. ii. 5. ίπάνω
Tivo'f to be placed over a thing, Lk. xix. 19. μ€τά τιι/οί or
σύν τιι/ι to become one's companion, associate wllh him :
Mk. xvi. 10 ; Acts vii. 38 ; xx. 18 ; νπό τίνα to he made
subject to one. Gal. iv. 4. [Cf. h. below.] g. with speci-
fication of the terminus of motion or the place of rest : tit
with ace. of place, to come to some place, arrive at some
•γιρωσκω
117
Ύΐνωσκω
thing, Acts χχ. 16; xxi. 17; χχν. 15; ώι iyivtro . . . tls
τα ωτά μου when the voice came into my ears, Lk. i. 44 ;
els with ace. of pers., of evils coming upon one, Kev. xvi. 2
II G ; of blessings, Gal. iii. 1 4 ; 1 Th. i. 5 [ l.clmi. προς ; Acts
xxvi. 6 L Τ Tr \VH] ; yeveaBai in'i τοϋ τόπον, Ik. xxii.
40; fVi τη! γήί, .In. vi. 21 [Tdf. im Tijf -y.] ; liSe, ib. 25
(ί«Γ, Xen. an. 6, 3 [5], 20 ; [cf. B. 71]) ; ^πί with ace. of
place, Lk. xxiv. 22 ; Acts xxi. 35 ; [Jn. vi. 21 Tdf.] ;
fyevero διωγμό? en'i την ίκκΚησίαν, Acts viii. 1 ; eyevero
φόβος or θαμβοί fjrl iravras, Lk. i. 65; iv. 36; Acts v. 5,
11 ; [ίκστπσΐί. Acts x. 10 (Rcc. eTreweffci/)] ; cXkos kukov
K• τιονημΐίν €πϊ τ. άνθμώττυνί, Kcv. xvi. 2 \j 'Γ 'i r AVll ;
tyiviio μημα ΐπΐ τίνα, λόγο? or φωνή npos τίνα (^came /ο) :
Lk. iii. 2; Jn. χ. 35 ; Acts vii. ;jl [llec] ; x. 13, (Gen. xv.
1,4; Jer. i. 2, 1 1 ; xiii. 8 ; Ezek. vi. 1 ; Hos. i. 1) ; [enay-
yf\ia, Acts xiii. 32 ; xxvi. 6 Rec] ; κατά with ace. of jjlace,
Lk. x. 32 [Tr WII om.]; Acts xxvii. 7, (Xcn. Cyr. 7, 1,
15) ; κατά with gen. : το yevόμ(vov μημα καθ' ύλη: της Ίοχ/-
δαι'π? the matter the report of whicli sjjread throughout
all Judiea, Acts x. 37 ; ττρό? τίνα, 2 Jn. 12 (Rec. (\θ(1ν) ;
1 Co. ii. 3 ; συν Tti/t, to be joined to one as an associate,
Lk. ii. 13, (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, .H) ; fyyi.? ylvfaUai, Eph. ii. 13 ;
Tti/u?, Jn. vi. 19; h. [with ΐκ of the source (see 1
above): Mk. i. 11 (Tdf. om. cy/i/.) ; ix. 7 (TTrmrg.
WII); Lk. iii. 22; ix. 35; Acts xix. 34]; yiveaOat ck
μίσου, to be taken out of the way, 2 Th. ii. 7 ; yeviadai
ομοθυμαδόν, of many come together in one place, Acts xv.
25 cf. ii. 1 [but only in R G ; yfvoμfvoιs ομοθυμαδόν in xv.
25 may mean either having become of one mitid, or possi-
bly hwirifj come together with one accord. On the alleged
use of yίvoμa^ in the N. T. as^ interchangeable with (Ιμί
see Fritzschior. Opuscc. p. 284 note. CoMP. : άπο-, δια-,
€irt-, πάρα-, συμ- πάρα-, πpo-yίvoμaι.'j
γινύσ-κω (Attic γιγνώσκω, sci" yίvoμa^ init. ; fr. ΓΝΟΩ,
as βίβρώσκω fr. ΒΡΟΩ) ; [ini])f. ey'ivωσκov^ ; fut. yvώσoμat ;
2 aor. iyiOJi» (fr. ΓΝΩΜΙ), impv. γνώθι, γνώτω, subj. γι/ώ
(3 pers. sing.yrai, Mk. v. 43 ; ix. 30 ; Lk. xix. 15 L Τ Tr
WH, for R G γνω [Β. p. 46 (40) ; cf. ίίδωμι init.]), inf.
γνώναι, ptcp. yvovs; pf. tyvwKa (Jn. xvii. 7 ; 3 pers. plur.
ίγνωκαν for eyi /ώκασι, see reff. in γίνομαι init.) ; plpf.
tyvwKtiv; Pass., [pres. 3 pers. sing, γινώσκιται (Mk. xiii.
28 Trmrg.)] ; pf. ίγνωσμαι ; 1 aor. ίγνώσθην ; fut. γνωσθή-
νομα> ; in Grk. writ, f r. Horn, down ; Sept. for ^Ύ ; Lat.
tiosco, novi (i. e. gnosco, gnovi) ;
I. univ. 1. to learn to know, come to know, get a
knowledge of; pass, to become known : with ace, Mt. xxii.
18 ; Mk. V. 43 ; Acts xxi. 34 ; 1 Co. iv. 1 9 ; 2 Co. ii. 4 ; Col.
iv. 8 ; 1 Th. iii. 5, etc. Pass., Mt. x. 2G ; Acts ix. 24 ; Phil,
iv. 5,etc.; [iinpers. γιι/ώσ«ται, Mk. xiii. 28 Trmrg.T2, 7];
ΤΪ (K Tivos, Mt. xii. 33; Lk. vi. 44; 1 Jn. iv. 6; τίνα or τ\
(V Tivi, to find a sign in a thing by which to know, to recog-
nize in or by something, Lk. xxiv. 35 ; Jn. xiii. 35 ; 1
Jn. iv. 2 ; κατίι τι γνώσομαι τοϋτο, the truth of this promise,
Lk. i. 18 (Gen. xv. 8) ; ntp'i της διδαχής, Jn. vii. 1 7. often
the object is not added, but is readily understood from
what precedes : Mt. ix. 30 ; xii. 15 (the consultation held
by the Pharisees) ; Mk. vii. 24 (he would have no one
know that he was present) ; Mk. ix. 30 ; Ro. x. 19, etc. ;
foil, by ότι, Mt. xxi. 45 ; Jn. iv. 1 ; v. 6 ; xii. 9, etc. ; foil,
by the interrog. W, Mt. vi. 3; Lk. xvi. 4; από τινας, to
learn from one, Alk. xv. 45. with ace. of jiers. to recoi'-
nize as worthy of intimacy an<i love, to own ; so those
whom God has judged worthy of the blessings of the gos-
pel are said ΰπο τοϋ θ(οϋ γινώσκισθαι. 1 Co. viii. 3 ; Gal.
iv. 9, [on both cf. W. § 39, .) Note 2 ; B. 55 (48)] ; neg-
atively, in the sentence of Christ οίδίποτ( ίγνων ίμΰς, I
never knew you, never had any ac(|uaintance with jou,
Mt. vii. 23. to perceive, feel : ΐγνω τω σώματι, ότι etc. .\i k.
v. 29 ; ζγνων δυναμιν €^€λθοϋσαν απ' (μοϋ, Lk. viii. 46.
2. to know, understand, perceine, have knowledge of; a.
to understand : with ace, τα Xfyo/itiO, Lk. xviii. 34 ; ά
άναγινώσκιις. Acts viii. 30; full, by ότι, Mt. xxi. 45; Jn.
viii. 27 sq. ; 2 Co. xiii. 6 ; Gal. iii. 7 ; Jas. ii. 20 ; full, by
interrog, τι, Jn. x. 6; xiii. 12, 28; ό κατ(ργάζομαι ού yi-
νώσκω I do not understand what I am doing, my conduct
is inexplicable tome, Ro. vii. 15. b. to knoto : to θίλημα,
Lk. xii. 47; τα? καρδίας, Lk. xvi. 1 5 ; τον μη yvoma άμαρτίαν
ignorant of sin, i. e. not conscious of having committe<l it,
2 Co. V. 21 ; €πίστο\η γινωσκομίνη και άναγινωσκομίνη, 2 Co.
iii. 2 ; τινά, to know one, his jicrsun, character, mind,
plans: Jn. i. 48 (49); ii. 24 : Acts xix. 15; 2 Tim.ii. 19
(fr. Num. xvi. 5) ; foil, by ότι. Jn. xxi. 1 7 ; Phil. i. 12 ;
Jas. i. 3 ; 2 Pet. i. 20 ; foil, by ace. with inf. llcb. x. 34 ;
foil, by an indirect question. Rev. iii. 3 ; ΐΚΧηνιστι γινώσκ.
to know Greek (graece scire, Cic. de fin. 2, 5) : Acts xxi.
37, (ίπίστασβαι συριστΊ, Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 31 ; graece ncscire,
Cic. pro Flac. 4, 10); ϊστ^ (Rcc. c'trTf) γινώσκοιττις ye
know, understanding etc. [R. V. ye know of a surety,
etc.], Eph. V. 5 ; see W. 355 (333) ; [cf. B. 51 (44) ; 314
(269)]. impv. yιvώσκ(Tf know ye : ΛΙΐ. xxiv. 32 sq. 43 ;
Mk. xiii. 29; Lk. x. 11 ; Jn. xv. 18; Acts ii. 36; Heb. xiii.
23 ; 1 Jn. ii. 29. 3. by a Hebraistic euphemi.^m [cf.
W. 18], found also in Grk. writ. fr. the Alexandrian age
down, γινώσκω is used of the carnal connection of male
and female, rem cum aliquo or aliqua habere (cf. our
hare a [criminal] intimacy with) : of a husband, Mt. i.
25 ; of the woman, Lk. i. 34 ; (Gen. iv. 1, 17; xL\. 8 ; 1
S. i. 19, etc. ; Judith xvi. 22; Callim. epigr. 58, 3 ; often
in Pint. ; cf. Vogelin, Plut. Brut. p. 10 sqq. ; so also Lat.
Γθ7;ιο.>ϊ(•ο, Ovid. met. 4,596; lioci, Justin, hist. 27, 3, 11).
II. In particular γινώσκω. Ιο become acquainted with,
to knoir, is employed in the N. T. of the knowledge of
God and Christ, and of the things relating to them or pro-
ceeding from them ; a. τόν θίόν, the one, true God, in
contrast with the polytheism of the Gentiles: Ro. i. 21 ;
Gal. iv. 9 ; also Tof μόνον αληθινον θιόν, Jn. xvii. 3 cf. 1 Jn.
V. 20; τον θ(όν, the nature and will of God, in contrast
with the false wisdom of both Jews and (ientiles, 1 Co.
i. 21 ; τον πατί'ρα, the nature of God the Father, esp.
the holy will and affection by which he aims to sanctify
and redeem men through Christ, .In. viii. 55; xvi. 3;
1 Jn. ii. 3 sq. 14 (13); iii. 1, 6; iv. 8; a peculiar knowl-
edge of God the Father is claimed by Christ for him-
self, Jn. X. 15; xvii. 25; γνώθι τον κϋριον, the precepts
of the Lord, Heb. viii. 11 ; to θίΧτιμα (of God). Ro. ii.
1 8 ; vovv κυρίου, Ro. xi. 34 : 1 Co. ii. 16 ; την σοφίαν τοΰ
'^ίνωσκω
118
'^Κώσσα
θ(ον, 1 Co. ii. 8; Tos ohovs τοϋ θ(θΰ, Ileb. iii. 10 (fr.
Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 10). b. Χριστόκ, his blessings, Phil,
iii. 10; in \ριστυν tyvwKtvai κατά σάμκα^ 2 Co. v. 16,
Paul speaks of thai kiiuwledge of Clirist which he had
before his conversion, and l)y which he knew him merely
in the form of a servant, and therefore had not yet seen
in him the Son of (iod. Ace. to J oh η 's usage, γινώσκιιν,
e'yvwKevai Xpiorov denotes lo come to know, lo Know, his
Messianic dignity (Jn. xvii. 3; vi. 69) ; his divinity {τον
απ αρχηί, 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. cf. Jn. i. 10), his consummate
kindness towards us, and the benefits redounding to us
from fellowship ivith him (in Christ's words -γινώσκομαι
ίηυ των ΐμων, Jn. χ. 14 [ace. to the crit. texts •γινώσκονσίν
fif τα (μα]); his love of (iod (Jn. xiv. 31); his sinless
holiness (1 Jn. iii. C). John unites πιστ{ΐ!«ν and yivaiaKdv,
at one time putting πίστωναν first : vi. 69 [cf. .Schaff's
Lange or Mey. ad loc.] ; but at another time γίνώσκίΐν :
X. 38 (ace. to 11 G, for which L Τ Tr AVH read iva γνώτ^
και γινώσκητί [II. V. know and understandy) ; xvii. 8 [L
br. κ tyi/.] ; 1 Jn. iv. 16 (the love of God). C. y. τα τοϋ
πνινματυ! the things which proceed from the Spirit, 1 Co.
ii. 14 ; TO πνίΰμα τ. αληθείας και το πν. της πλάνης, 1 Jn. iv.
6 ; τα μυστήρια της βασιΧίίας των ουρανών, λΐΐ. xiii. 11 ; την
άλήθίίαν, .In. viii. 32; 2 Jn. 1; absol., of the knowledge
of divine things, 1 Co. xiii. 12; of the knowledge of
things lawful for a Christian, 1 Co. viii. 2.
[SvN. y IV ώ σ κ f IV, dZ e ν ai, 4νίστασθαι, trvvtevai:
In classic usajre {cf. Schmidt ch. 13), yivwaxeiv, distiuguished
from t he rest by its original inchoative force, denotes a dis-
criminating apprehension of external impression.s, a knowl-
edge grounded in personal experience. ti'SeVai, lit. ' to have
seen with the mind's eye,' signifies a clear and purely mental
perception, in contrast both to conjecture and to knowledge
derived from others. ίνίστασΒαι primarily expresses the
knowledge obtained by ρ ro .\ i m i ty to the thing known (cf.
our Hiidt'rstiind, (ierm. vcrstehen) ; then knowledge viewed as
the result of jirolonged practice, in oppo.'^ition to the process
of learning on the one hand, and to the uncertain knowledge
of a dilettante on the other. avvUvai implies native insight,
the soul's cap.iclty of itself not ouly to lay hold of the phe-
nomena of the outer world tlirough the senses, but by combi-
nation (σύν and I'eVai) to arrive at their underlying laws.
Hence ffiivieVai may mark an antithesis to sense-perception;
wherea.s ytvutaKfiv marks an advance upon it. As appUed
e. g. to a work of literature, yivwGKfiv expresses an acquaint-
ance with it ; ^ηίστασθαί the knowledge of its contents ;
συνίΐναι the understanding of it, a comprehension of its mean-
ing. yivMuTKeiv and ciScVai most readily come into contrast
with each other ; if dSfvai ami 4πίστασθαι are contrasted, the
former refers more to natural, the latter to acquired knowl-
edge. In the N. T., as might be expected, these distinctions
are somewhat less sharply marked. Such passages as John
i. 26,31,48 (49) ; vii. 27 Jq. ; xxi. 17; 2 Co. v. 16; 1 Jn. v. 20
may seem to indicate that, sometimes at least, yιvύσκω and
olSa are nearly interchangeable; yet see Jn. iii. 10, U ; viii.
.53 (yet cf. xvii. 25) ; 1 Jn. ii. 29 {biow . . . percetce), and the
characteristic use of flStvat by John to describe onr Lord's
direct insight into divine things: iii. 11 ; v. 32 (contrast 42) ;
vii. 29 ; viii. 55 ; xii. 50, etc ; cf. Bp. Lghtft.'s note on Gal.
iv. 9; Green, 'Critical Notes' etc. p. 75 (on Jn. viii. 35);
Westcott on John ii. 24. 711/ώσκω and ΐττίσταμαι are associ-
ated in Acts xix. 15 (cf. Green, as above, p. 97) ; οίδο and
yiviiaxu in 1 Co. ii. 1 1 ; Kph v. 5 ; οϊδο and Ιττίσταμαι in Jude
10. CoMP. : άνα-,ίια-, iiri-, κατά-, -npo-ytvaaKii).]
^XcvKos, -out, TO, muxl, the sweet juice pressed from the
grape; Nicand. alex. 1«4, 299 ; Plut., al. ; Jobxxxii. 19;
swL-i-t wine : Acts ii. 13. [Cf. BB. DD. s. v. Mine] •
γλ«κν5, -(Ία, -ΰ, itweel : Jas. iii. 1 1 (opp. to πικρόν) ; 1 2
(oiqi. to άλυκύν) ; Rev. x. 9, [10]. [From Ilom. down.] *
γλώσσα, -ης, η, [fr. Horn, down], the lon//ue ; 1. the
tonijue, a member of the body, the organ of speech : Mk.
vii. 33, 35 ; Lk. i. C4 ; xvi. 24 ; 1 Co. xiv. 9 ; Jas. i. 26 ;
iii. 5, 6, 8; 1 Pet. iii. 10; 1 Jn. iii. 18; [Rev. xvi. 10].
By a poetical and rhetorical usage, esp. Hebraistic, that
member of the body which is chielly engaged in some act
has ascribed to it what belongs to the man ; the tonijue
is so used in Acts ii. 26 (ήγαλλιάσατο ή γλωσσά μου) ; Ro.
iii. 13 ; xiv. 11 ; Phil. ii. 11 (the tongue of every man) ; of
the little tongue-like flames .symbolizing the gift of foreign
tongues, in Acts ii. 3. 2. a tongue, i. e. the Umguarje
used by a particular people in distinction from that of
other nations : Acts ii. 11 ; henceinlater Jewish usage (Is.
Levi. 18 ; Dan. iii. 4 ; v. 19 Theod.; vi. 2.3 ; vii. 14 Theod.;
Jud. iii. 8) joined with φυ\ή. λαός, ΐθνος, it serves to desig-
nate people of various languages [cf. AV'. 32], Rev. v. 9 ;
vii. 9 ; X. 1 1 ; xi. 9 ; xiii. 7 ; xiv. 6 ; xvii. 15. λαλΕΪν ίτί-
ραις γλώσσαις to speak irith other than their native i. e. in
foreign tongues, Acts ii. 4 cf. 6-11 ; y\ώσσaις XaXdv και-
να'ις to speak with new tonijues which the speaker has not
learned previously, Mk. xvi. 1 7 [but J'r txt. WII t.xt. om.
Tr mrg. br. καιναΊς] ; cf. De Wette on Acts p. 27 sqq. [cor-
rect and supplement his reff. by Mey. on 1 Co. xii. 1 ;
cf. also B. D. s. v. Tongues, Gift of~\. From both these
expressions must be carefully distinguished the sim])le
phrases \a\eiv γλώσσαις, γλώσσαις λαλίΓν, λαλ^ίν γλώσστ],
γΧώσστ] λα\('ιν (and ττροσ^ύχίσθαι γΧώσση, 1 Co. xiv. 14),
to s/ienk with [in) a tongue (the organ of sjieech), to sjieak
toitk tongues ; this, as appears from 1 Co. xiv. 7 sqrp, is the
gift of men who, rapt in an ecstasy and no longer quite
masters of their own reason and consciousness, pour forth
their glowing spiritual emotions in strange utterances,
rugged, dark, disconnected, quite unfitted to instruct or to
influence the minds of others: Acts x. 46; xix. 6; 1 Co.
xii..30; .xiii. 1 ; xiv. 2,4-6, 13, 18, 23,27,39. Theoriginof
the expression is apparently to be found in the fact, that
in Hebrew the tongue is spoken of as the leading instru-
ment by which the praises of (iod are proclaimed (ή των
ϋίίων ϋμνων μ(λωδός, 4 Macc. Χ. 21, cf. Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.)
28; Ixv. (Ixvi.) 17; Ixx. (Ixxi.) 24; c.xxv. (cxxvi.) 2; Acts
ii. 26 ; Phil. ii. 1 1 ; XaXt'iv iv γΧώσσι/, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.)
4), and that according to the more rigorous conception
of inspiration nothing human in an inspired man was
thought to be active except the tongue, put in motion by
the Holy Spirit (καταχμηται (Τ€ρης ηϋτοϋ το'ις φωνητημίοις
οργάνοις, στόματι κα\ γλώττη προς μηννσιν ων αν θ(\η,
Philo, rer. div. haer. § 53, [i. 510 ed. Mang.]) ; hence the
contrast Κιάτου νοος [crit. edd. τώ ι/οί ] λαλ^ν, 1 Co. xiv.
19 cf. 9. The phir. in the phrase γλώσσαις XaXtiv, used
even of a single person (1 Co. xiv. 5 sq.), refers to the
various motions of the tongue. By meton. of the cause for
'^Χωσσοκομον
119
γΐΌ^στος
the eflfect, -γΚωσσαι tongues are equiv. to Xoyot cV γΧώσατ)
(1 Co. xiv. 19) words spoken in a tongue (^Zuniji'nrortra-
ge) : xiii. S ; xiv. 22 ; -γίνη γλωσσών, 1 Co. xii. 10, 28, of
which two kinds are mentioned viz. τιροσινχή and ψ-αλ /iof,
1 Co. xiv. 15 ; -γΚώσσαν ΐχω, something to utter with a
tongue, 1 Co. xiv. 26. [On ' Speaking with Tongues '
see, in addition to the discussions above referred to,
Wendt in tlie 5th ed. of Meyer on Acts (ii. 4) ; Heinrici,
Korinthierbriefe, i. 372 sqq. ; Schaff, Hist, of the Chr.
Cliurcli, i. 2.34-245 (1882) ; Farrar, St. Paul, i. 95 sqq.] *
Ύλωσ-σ-όκομ,ον, -ου, τό, (for the earlier ■γΚωσσοκομ€Ίον or
γ\ωσσοκ6μιον [W. 24 (23), 94 (90); vet see Boeckh,
Corp. inscrr. 2448, viii. 25, 31], fr. -γΚώασα and κομίω to
tend) ; a. a case in which to keep the mouth-pieces of
wind instruments, b. α smallhoxfor other uses also ; esp.
a casket, purse to keep money in : Jn. xii. 6 ; xiii. 29 ; cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 98 sq. (For ρ'ΊΧ a chest, 2 Chr. xxiv.
8, 10 sq. ; Joseph, antt. 6, 1, 2; Plut., Longin., al.)*
γναψενβ, -ίως, 6, (also [earlier] κιιαφ(ΰς, fr. yvUTrra or
κνάπτω to card), a fuller: Mk. ix. 3. (Ililt., Xen., and
sii'[. ; Sept. Is. vii. 3 ; xxxvi. 2 ; 2 K. xviii. 1 7.) *
γνήσιο?, -α, -ο», (by syncope for γίΐ/ήσιοί fr. -γίνομαι,
yev-, [cf. Curtius § 128]), legitimately horn, not spurious ;
genuine, true, sincere : Phil. iv. 3 ; 1 Tim. i. 2 ; Tit. i. 4 ;
TO της αγάπης γνησιον i. q. την γνησιότητα [Α. V. the sin-
cerity'], 2 Co. viii. 8. (From Horn, down.) *
γνησ-ίωϊ, adv., genuinely, faithfully, sincerely : Phil. ii.
20. [From Eur. down.] *
•γνόψο;, -ου, -ό, (for the earlier [and poetic] 8ν6φος,
akin to νίφος [so Bttm. LexU. ii. 266 ; but see Curtius
pp. 704 scj. 706, cf. 535; Vanicek p. 1070]), darkness,
gloom : Ileb. xii. 18. (Aristot. de mund. c. 2 fin. p. 392',
12 ; Lcian. de mort. Peregr. 43 ; Dio Chrys. ; Sept. also
for rjif a cloud, Deut. iv. 11, etc. and for Ssi^^ 'thick
cloud,' Ex. XX. 21, etc. ; [Trench § c.].) *
γνώμη, -ης, η, (fr. γινώσκω) ; 1. the faculty of know-
ing, minil, reason. 2. that which is thought or known,
one's mind ; a. view, Judgment, opinion : 1 Co. i. 10 ; Rev.
xvii. 13. b. mind concerning what ought to be done,
aa. by one's self, resolve, purpose, intention : ίγίν(το
γνώμη [TTrWll γνώμης, see γίνομαι 5 e. α.] τοΰ νποστρί-
φ(ΐν. Acts XX. 3 [Β. 208 (230)]. bb. by other.s judg-
ment, advice : Μύναι γνώμην, 1 Co. vii. 25, [40] ; 2 Co. viii.
10. cc. decree: Kev. xvii. 17; χωρΧς της σης γνώμης,
without thy consent, Philem. 14. (In the same senses in
Grk. writ. ; [cf . Schmidt, ch. 1 3, 9 ; Mey. on 1 Co. i. 1 0].) *
γνωρίζω; fut. γνωρίσω (Jn. xvii. 26 ; Eph. vi. 21 ; Col.
iv. 7), Attic -ιώ (Col. iv. 9 [LWII -ίσω ; Β. 37 (32);
WH. App. p. 163]) ; 1 aor. f γνώρισα; Pass., [pres. γνωρί-
ζομαι]; 1 aor. (γνωρίσθην; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl.
down [see ad fin.] ; Sept. for i'"lin and Chald. ;πίπ ;
1. trans, to make knoum : τι, Ro. ix. 22 sq. ; τί τινι, I-k.
ii. 15; Jn. xv. 15; xvii. 26; Acts ii. 28; 2 Co. viii. 1 ;
Eph. iii. 5, 10, [pass, in these two exx.] ; Eph. vi. 21 ;
Col. iv. 7, 9 ; 2 Pet. i. 16; τιν\ τό μυστήριου, Eph. i. 9;
iii. 3 [G L Τ Tr WH read the pass.] ; vi. 1 9 ; τινι ότι,
1 Co. xii. 3 ; τινι τι, ότι i. q. τινι ότι τι, Gal. i. 1 1 ; foil. l)v
Ti interrog. Col. i. 27 ; ττίρί tii/oe, Lk. ii. 1 7 L Τ Tr WH ;
γνωριζίσθω προς τον θ(ύν be brought to the knowledge of
God, Phil. iv. 6 ; γνωρίζ(σθαι (Is πάντα τα ΐθνη to be made
known unto all the nations, Ro. xvi. 26 ; contextually
and emphatically i. q. to recall to one's mind, as though
what is made known had escaped him, 1 Co. xv. 1 ; with
ace. of pers. [(Plut. Fab. Max. 21, 6)], in pass., to
become known, be recognized; Acts vii. 13 Tr txt. \\\l
txt. 2. intrans. to know : τί α'ιρήσομαι, οϋ γνωρίζω, Phil,
i. 22 [WH mrg. punctuate τί alp. ; οϋ yv. ; some refer
this to 1 (R. V. mrg. / do not make known), cf. May. ad
loc. In earUer Grk. γνωρίζω signifies either 'to gain a
knowledge of,' or ' to hare thorough knowledge of.' Its
later (and N. T.) causative force seems to be found
only in Aeschyl. Prom. 487; cf. Schmidt vol. i. p. 287;
Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. c. Comp. : ava-, bia -γνωρίζω].'
γνώσ -is, -ecuy, ή, {γινώσκω), [fr. Thuc. down], knowl-
edge: with gen. of the obj., σωτηρίας, Lk. i. 77; τοΰ
β(οϋ, the knowledge of God, such as is offered in the
gospel, 2 Co. ii. 14, esp. in Paul's exposition of it, 2 Co.
X. 5 ; της 8όξης τοΰ β(οΰ ϊν προσώπω Χρίστου, 2 Co. iv. 6 ;
Ίι;σοϋ Χρίστου, of Christ as a saviour, Phil. iii. 8 ; 2 Pet.
iii. 18 ; with subj. gen. toC Bfoi, the knowledge of tilings
which belongs to God, Ro. xi. 33. γνώσις, by itself, sig-
nifies in general intelligence, understanding : Eph. iii. 19 ;
the general knowledge of the Christian religion, Ro. xv.
14; 1 Co. i. 5; the deeper, more perfect and enlarged
knowledge of this religion, such as belongs to the more
advanced, 1 Co. xii. 8 ; xiii. 2, 8 ; xiv. 6 ; 2 Co. vi. 6 ; viii. 7 ;
xi. 6 ; esp. of tilings lawful and unlawful for Christians, 1
Co. viii. 1, 7, 10 sq. ; tlie higher knowledge of Christian
and divine things which false teachers boast of, ψί υδώχυ-
μος γνώσις, 1 Tim. vi. 20 [cf. Holtzmann, Pastoralbriefe,
p. 132 sq.] ; moral wisdom, such as is seen in right living,
2 Pet. i. 5 ; and in intercourse with others : κατά γνώσιν,
wisely, 1 Pet. iii. 7. objective knowledge : what is known
concerning divine things and human duties, Ro. ii. 20 ;
Col. ii. 3 ; concerning salvation through Christ, Lk. ,v1.
52. T^Tiere γνώσις and σοφία are used together the for-
mer seems to be knowledge regarded by itself, the
latter wisdom as e.xhibited in action: Ro. xi. 33; 1
Co. xii. 8 ; Col. ii. 3. [" γν. is simply intuitive, σοφ. is
ratiocinati ve also; yv. applies chiefly to the appre-
hension of truths, σοφ. sujieradds the power of reason-
ing about them and tracing their relations." Bp. Lghtft.
on Col. 1. c. To much the same effect Fritzsche (on Ro.
1. c), "yK. perspicientia veri, σοφ. sapientia aut mentis
sollertia, quEe cognita intellcctaque veritate utatur, ut res
efficiendas efliciat." Meyer (on 1 Co. 1. c.) nearly re-
verses Lghtft. 's distinction ; elsewhere, however (e. g. on
Col. 1. c, cf. i. 9), he and others regard σοφ. merely as
the more general, γν. as the more restricted and special
term. Cf. Lghtft. u. s. ; Trench § Ixxv.] *
γνώστηϊ, -ου, ό, (a knower), an expert; a connoi.i.'^eur :
Acts xxvi. 3. (Plut. Flam. c. 4 ; θ(6ς 6 των κρυπτών
γνώστης. Hist. Sus. vs. 42 ; of those who divine the future,
1 S. xxviii. 3, 9, etc.) *
γνωστοί, -ή, -όν, known : Acts ix. 42 ; τινι, Jn. xviii. 15
.«([.; Acts i. 19 ; xv. 18 RL; xix. 17; xxviii. 22; γνωστό»
■γο'γ'γύζω
120
•γράμμα
ίστω ύμίl>be il (rnown Ιο you : Acts ii. 14 ; iv. 10 ; xiii. 38 ;
xxviii. 28; contextiiiiUv, notable, Acts iv. 16; γνωστόν
voif'tv to make known, disclose : Aits xv. 17 sij. (ϊ Τ Tr
Wn [al. construe yi /ωστ. as pred. of ταϊιτα : II. V. mrg.
who doeth these thiiit/s wliich were known ; cf. Mey. ad
loc.]. TO γνωστόν τοϋ θ€οϋ, eitlier llutt which may be
known of God, or i. (j. γνωσκ τοϋ Bioi, for both come to
the same thing ; Ro. i. 1 9 ; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. and W.
2.3.') (220), [and Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]. plur. oi
γνωστοί acijuninlance, intimates, (I's. .\xx. (xxxi.) 12;
(Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) !), Ill]; Nell. v. 10): Lk. ii. 44 ; xxiii.
411. (In (irk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
γογγύζω ; hnpi. fγόγγυζnv ; 1 aor. €γιΊγγυσα; to murmur,
mutter, ijrumlile, say anyt/iiny in a low tune, (ace. to Pollux
and Phavorinus used of the cooing of doves, like the
τονβρί'ζαι and τονθορνζω of the more elegant Grk. writ. ;
cf. Loh. ad Phryn. ],. 358 ; [W. 22 ; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil,
ii. 14]) ; hence of those who confer together secretly, τι
π(ρί TWOS, •Ιη. vii. 32; of those who discontentoilly com-
plain : 1 Co. X. 1 ; npos rtva, Lk. v. 30 ; μ(τ' αλλήλων,
Jn. vi. 43; κατά tivos, Mt. xx. 11 ; nept tivos, <In. vi. 41,
(il. (Sept.; Antonin. 2, 3; Epict. diss. 1, 21), 55; 4, 1,
79; [al.].) [C'OMl>. : δια- γογγνζω.'\'
γογγυσ•μ05, -οϋ, ό, {γογγνζω, ([. v.), α murmur, murmur-
inrj, muttering ; applied to a. secret debate : πτρί riraf,
Jn. vii. 12. b. secret displeasure, not openly avowed:
irpos Tiva, Acts vi. 1 ; in plur. χωρίς or av€v γογγνσμών
without querulous discontent, without murmurings, i. e.
with a cheerful and willing mind, Phil. ii. 14 ; 1 Pet. iv.
9 (where L Τ Tr WII read the sing.). (Ex. xvi. 7 stiq. ;
Sap. i. 10 sq. ; Antonin. 9, 37.) •
γογγυστήϊ, -oO, ό, a murmurer, (Vulg., Augustine, mur-
viuralor), one who discontentedly complains (against
God; for /if^\//iyoipot is added) : .lude 16. [Prov. -x.xvi.
21 Theod., 22 Symin. ; xxvi. 20, 22 Graec. Ven.] *
γόη5, -ijTos, ό, (γοάω to bewail, howl) ; 1. a waller,
howler: Aeschyl. choeph. 823 [Hermann et al. yoTjnji].
2. a jugr/ler, enchanter, (because incantations used to be
uttered in a kind of howl). 3. a deceiver, impostor:
2 Tim. iii. 13 ; (Ildt., Eur., Plat., and subseq. writ.).*
Γολγοθά [Tr λνΐΐ, or -Sh II G L Τ (see Tdf. Proleg.
p. 102 ; Kautzsch p. 10) ; also -όβ L WII mrg. in Jn. xix.
1 7 ; ace. -av Tdf. in Mk. xv. 22 (WII -άν, see their App.
p. 160), elsewhere indecl, W. 61 (60)], Golgotha, Chald.
K-iSjSj, Heb. nSj-'J (fr. '^Sj to roll), i. e. κρανίυν, a siuil
[Lat. calvaria'], the name of a place outside of Jerusa-
lem where Jesus was crucified ; so called, apparently,
because its form resembled a skull : Mt. xxvii. 33 ; Mk.
XV. 22; Jn. xix. 1 7. Cf. Tobler, Golgatha. St. Gall. 1851 ;
Furrer in Schenkel ii. 506 sqq. ; Keim, Jesus von Naz.
iii. 404 sq. ; \^Porler in Alex.'s Kitto s. v. ; F. Howe, The
true Site of Calvary, N. Y., 1871].•
Γόμορρα [or Γιιμόρρα, cf. Chandler § 1 6 7], -at, ή, and -ων,
τά, [cf. Β. 18 (16) ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 116; WH. App. p.
156], Gomorrah, (rT)"D;', cf. DJi* Gaza), the name of a city
in the eastern part of Judaea, destroyed by the same earth-
quake [cf. B. D. s. V. Sea, The Salt] with Sodom and its
neighbor cities : Gen. xix. 24. Their site is now occu-
pied by the Asphaltic Lake or Dead Sea [cf. BB. UD.
s. vv. Gomorrali and Sodom] : Mt. x. 15 ; Mk. vi. 11 11 I,
in br. ; Uo. ix. 29 ; 2 Pet. ii. 6 ; Jude 7.•
γόμοΐ, -ου, ό, (γί'μω) ; a. the lading or J'reight of a ship,
cargo, merchandise conveyed in a ship : Acts -x.xi. 3, (Ildt.
1, 194; [Aeschyl.], Uem., al. ; [in Sept. the load of a
beast of burden, Ex. xxiii. 5 ; 2 K. v. 1 7]). b. any mer-
chandise : Rev. xviii. 1 1 sq.*
γονίίϊ, -{'ωΓ, ό, (ΓΕΝΩ, γίγονα), [Hom. h. Cer., Hes.,
al.] ; a begetter, parent ; plur. oi yowit the parents : Lk. ii
41,43 Ltxt. TTrWII; [viii. 56] ; xxi. 16; Jn. ix. 2, 3,
20, 22, 23; 2 Co. xii. 14 ; Ko. i. 30 ; Ejdi. vi. 1 ; Col. iii.
20; 2Tim. iii. 2; ace. jilur. yoi-eis ; Mt. x. 21 ; [xix. 29
Lchm.mrg.] ; Lk. ii. 27 ; [xviii. 29] ; Mk. xiii. 12; [Jn.
i.x. 18]; on this form cf. W. § 9, 2 ; [B. 14 (13)].•
yaw, yoi/aTos, to, [fr. Ilom. down], fhe Knee : Heb. xii.
1 2 ; τίβίναι τά γιΊνατα Ιο bend the knees, kneel down, of
persons supi)licating : Lk. .\xii. 41; Acts vii. 60 ; ix. 40;
x.x. 36; xxi. 5; of [mock] worshippers, Mk. xv. 19, so
also προσπίιττιιν rots γόνασί tivos, Lk. v. 8 (of a suppliant
in Eur. Or. 1332) ; κύμηταν τα γόνατα to bow the knee, of
those worshipping God or Christ : τινί, Ko. xi. 4 ; npas
Tiva, Eph. iii. 14 ; reflcxively, yoiu κάμπτιι τινί, to i.e. in
honor of one, Ro. xiv. 11 (1 K. xix. 18) ; fv ύνόματι Ίησον,
Phil. ii. 10 (Is. xlv. 23).*
γον\)ΐΓ€Τί'ω, -ω; 1 aor. ptcp. γοια/ττίτήσαί ; (γονυπίτήί,
and this fr. γόνυ and ΠΕΤΩ i. ip πίπτω) ; to fall on the
knees, the act of one imploring aid, and of one e.xpress-
ing reverence and honor: τινί, Mt. xvii. 14 Rec. ; τινά,
ibid. G L Τ Tr Wl 1 ; Mk. i. 40 Κ G Tr txt. br. WH br. ; x.
17; cf. W. 210 (197); [B. 147 sq. (129)]; ίμπροσθίν
Tii/os, Mt. xxvii. 29. (Polyb., Ileliod. ; eccl. Λvrit.) *
Ύράμμα, -rot, Tci, (γράφω), that ir/iicti Ikis been written ;
1. a letter i. e. the character : Lk. xxiii. 38 [R G L br. Tr
mrg.br.]; Gal. vi. 11. 2. any writing, a document οτ
record ; a. a note of hand, bill, bond, account, icrilten ac-
knowledgment of debt, (as script io in Varr. sat. Men. 8, I
[cf. Edersheim ii. 268 sqq.]) : Lk. xvi. 6 scj. ([Joseph,
antt. 18, 6,3], in Ltxt. Τ Tr WH plur. τα γράμματα; so
of one document also in Antiph. p. 114, (30) ; Dem. p.
1034, 16; Vulg. cautio). b. a letter, an epistle: Acts
xxviii. 21 ; (Hdt. 5, 14; Time. 8, 50; Xen. Cyr. 4, .5,
26, etc.). C. τα 'κραγράμματα the sacred writings (of the
0. T. ; [so Joseph, antt. prooem. § 3 ; 10, 10, 4 fin. ; c. Ap.
1, 10 ; Philo, de vit. Moys. 3, 39 ; de praem. ct poen. § 14 ;
leg. adGai. § 29, etc. — but always τα t.y ]): 2 Tim. iii. 15
[here Τ WH om. L Tr br. τά] : γράμμα i. q. the written
law of Moses, Ro. ii. 27; ΜωΟσ/ωί -γράμματα, Jn. v. 47.
Since the Jews so clave to the li-ttcr of the law that
it not only became to them a mere letter l.'iit also a hin-
drance to true religion, Paul calls it -γράμμα in ;i ilisparag-
ing sense, and contrasts it with τό πνιϋμα i. e. the divine
Spirit, whether operative in the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 29,
or in the gospel, by which Christians are governed, Ro.
vii. 6 ; 2 Co. iii. 6 sq. [but in vs. 7 R (i Τ WH read the
plur. written in letters, so L mrg. Tr rarg.]. 3. τα
■γράμματα, like the Lat. litterae, Eng. letters, i. q. learning :
Acts xxvi. 24 ; dhivai, μίμαθηκίναι γρ. (cf. G«rm. stwlirl
Ύραμματεν•!
121
Ύράφύ
haben), of sacred learning, Jn. vii. 15. (μανθάναν, iiriara-
σθαι. etc., -γράμματα are used by the Greeks of tlie rudi-
ments of learning; of. Passow i. p. 571 ; [L. and S. s. v.
II. a.].)•
γραμματ£ύ5, -t'ws, (ace. plur. -iij, W. §9, 2; [B. 14
03)]), 0, (γράμμα), Sept. for 130 and ^OU ; 1. in
prof. auth. and here and there in the O. T. [e. g. 2 S.
viii. 17; xx. 25; 2 K. xix. 2; x.w. 19; Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 2],
a clerk, scribe, esp. a public scribe, secretary, recorder,
whose office and influence differed in different states :
Acts XLX. 35, (Sir. x. 5) ; [cf. Lijlitft. in The Contemp.
Rev. for 1878, p. 294; Wooif, Discoveries at Ephesus,
App. Inscrr. fr. the Great Theatre, p. 49 n.]. 2. in
the Bible, a man learned in the Mosaic law and in the
sacred writings, an interpreter, teacher : Mt. xxiii. 34 ; 1
Co. i. 20, ("called also νομικός in I^k. x. 25, and νομοΒιίά-
σκαλο! in Lk. v. 1 7 ; [Meyer (on -Mt. xxii. 35 ), while deny-
ing any essential diff. betw. γραμματιίί and νομικοί
(ef. Lk. xi. 52, 53 — yet see crit. txts.), regards the latter
name as the more specific (a jurisconsult) and Classic,
γρ. as the more general (a learned /natt) and Hebraistic;
it is also the more common in the Apocr., where νομ.
occurs only 4 ilacc. v. 3. As teachers they were called
νυμοδιδάσκαλοι. Cf. B. D. s. v. Lawyer, also s. v. Scribes
I. 1 note]) ; Jer. viii. 8 (cf. ii. 8) ; Neh. viii. 1 sq. ; xii.
2C, 3G; 2 Esdr. vii. 6, 11, and esp. Sir. xxxviii. 24, 31
sqq. ; xxxix. 1-11. The γραμματείς explained the mean-
ing of the sacred oracles, j\It. ii. 4 [γρ. τον λαοΰ. Josh. i. 1 ;
1 Mace. V. 42 ; cf. Sir. xliv. 4] ; xvii. 10; Mk. ix. 11 ; xii.
35 ; examined into the more difficult and subtile ques-
tions of the law, Mt. ix. 3 ; Mk. ii. 6 sq. ; xii. 2S ; added
to the Mosaic law decisions of various kinds thought to
elucidate its meaning and scope, and did this to the detri-
ment of religion, Mt. v. 20 ; xv. 1 sqq. ; xxiii. 2 sqq. ; Mk.
vii. 1 sqq. ; cf . Lk. xi. 46. Since the advice of men skilled
in the law was needed in the examination of causes and
the solution of difficult questions, they were enrolled in
the Sanhedrin ; and accordingly in the X. T. they are
often mentioned in connection with the priests and elders
of the people : Mt. xxi. 15 ; xxvi. 3 R G ; Mk. xi. 1 8, 27 ;
xiv. 1; XV. 1; Lk. xix. 47; xx. 1 ; xxii. 2. Cf. Schiirer,
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 25 ii. ; Klop/ier in Schenkel v. 247
sqq.; [and thorough articles in BB.DD. ?. v. Scribes; cf.
W. Robertson Smith, The O. T. in the Jewish Ch., Lect.
iii.]. 3. univ. a religious teacher : γραμματιϋί μαθητευ-
θ(\ί (U ιή" βασιλ. των οχιρ. a teacher so instructed that
from his learning and ability to teach advantage ftiay
redound to the kingdom of heaven, Mt. xiii. 52 [but G Τ
Tr WH read μαθ. rfi βασιλεία (L ev τ. β.): and many in-
terpret made a disciple unto the k. ofh. (which is person-
ified) ; see μαθητεύω, fin.].
γραΐΓΓ05. -ι;, -όν. written : Ro. ii. 15. [Gorg. apol. Palam.
p. UiOsub fin. ; Sept.: al] *
γραφή, -TJs, ή, (γράφω. cf. γλυφή and γλύφω) : a. α
writing, thing written, [fr. Soph, down] : πάσα γραφή every
scripture sc. of the O. T., 2 Tim. iii. 16; plur. γραφαΧ
σγιαι, holy scriptures, the sacred books (of the O. T.),
Ro. i. 2 ; προφητικαί, Ro. xvi. 26 ; at γραφαϊ των προφητών.
Mt. xxvi. 56. b. ή γραφή, the Scripture «car' εξοχήν, the
holy scripture (of the O. T.), — and used to denote either
the book itself, or its contents [some would restrict the
sing, γραφή always to a particular passage ; see Bp.
Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 22] : Jn. vii. 38 ; x. 35 ; Acts viii. 32 ;
Ro. iv. 3 ; Gal. iii. 22 ; iv. 30 ; Jas. ii. 8 ; 1 Pet. ii. 6 ; 2
Pet. i. 20; also in plur. at γραφαϊ: Mt. xxi. 42 ; xxvi. 54;
Mk. xiv. 49; Lk. xxiv. 27 ; Jn. v. 39 ; Acts xvii. 2, 11 ;
xviii. 24, 28 ; 1 Co. xv. 3 sq. ; once a'l γραφαϊ comprehends
also the books of the N. T. already begun to be collected
into a canon, 2 Pet. iii. 16; by melon, ή γριφή is used
for God speaking in it : Ro. ix. 1 7 ; Gal. iv. 30 : ή γραφή
is introduced as a person and distinguished from God in
Gal. iii. 8. ε'ώε'ναι τάς γραφάί, Mt. xxii. 29 ; Mk. xii. 24 ;
σννύναι, Lk. xxiv. 45. c. a certain portion or section oj
holy Scripture: Mk. xii. 10; Lk. iv. 21 ; Jn. xix. 37; Acts
i. 16. [Cf. B. D. s. V. Scripture.]
γράψ<ι>; [impf. εγραφον'\; fut. γράψ-ω ; 1 aor. έγραψα;
pf. γίγραφα; Pass., [jjres. γράφομαι]; pf. γέγραμμαι;
[plpf. 3 pers. sing, ε'γέγραπτο, Kev. xvii. 8 Lchm.] ; 2
aor. ε'γράφην ; (prop, to grave, scrape, scratch, engrave ;
cf. (ierm. graben, eingraben ; γρά\Ι/εν δε οί ΰστέον άχρκ
αιχμή, Horn. Π. 1 7, 599 ; σήματα γράψας εν πινάκι, ib. 6,
169 ; hence to draw letters), to write ; 1. with reference
to the form of the letters; lo delineate (or form) letters
on a tablet, parchment, paper, or other material : τω 8α-
κτνλω εγραφεν f is την γήν made figures on the ground, Jn.
viii. 6 Rec. ; ούτω γράφω so am I accustomed to form mv
letters, 2 Thess. iii. 1 7 : πηλίκοι: γράμμασι έγραψα with
how large (and so. ill-formed [?]) letters I have written,
Gal. vi. 11 ; cf. AViner. Ruckert, Hilgenfeld ad loc. [for
the views of those who regard εγρ. as covering the close
of the Ep. only, see Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. ; cf. W. 278
(261); B. 198 (171 sq.)]. 2. with reference to the
contents of the writing ; a. to express in written char-
acters, foil, by the words expressed : έγραψε λέγων Ιωάν-
νης έστι το όνομα αυτόν, Lk. i. 63 ; μή γράφε- ό βασιλεύς
των Ιουδαίων κτλ. Jn. xix. 21 ; γράψον- μακάριοι κτλ.
Rev. xiv. 13. γράφω Tt. Jn. xix. 22; pass. Rev. i. 3; τι
επί τι. Rev. ii. 1 7 ; xix. 16; Tt επί τίνα, iii. 12; επί Ttfor.
xiv. 1. b. to commit lo writing (things not to be for-
gotten), write down, record : Rev. i. 19 {γράψον ά είδες) ;
χ. 4 ; γράφειν εις βιβλίον. Rev. i. 1 1 ; fVt το βιβλίον rrjs
ζωής. Rev. xvii. 8 : γεγραμα. εν τ. βιβλία [or τη βίβλωΐ, ει-
το'ις βιβλίοις. Rev. xiii. 8 ; xx. 12, 15; .xxi. 27; xxii. 18,
1 9 ; τα ονόματα χιμων ε'γράφη [cV(f y- Tr see Ν, ν)γέγρ.Ύ Tr
WH] εν το'ις οϋρανο'ις. i.e. that ye have been enrolled
with those for whom eternal blessedness has been pre-
pared. Lk. X. 20 ; γράφειν τι τινι. to record something for
some one's use. Lk. i. 3. c. έγράφη and γέγραπται (in the
Synoptists and Paul), and γεγραμμένον εστί (in John),
are used of those tilings which stand written in the sacred
books (of the O. T.) ; absol. γέγρα-πται. foil, by the quo-
tation fr. the sacred vol.: Mt. iv. 4, 6 S(j. 10; xxi. 13:
Mk. vii. 6; xi. 17; xiv. 27; Lk. iv. 8: xix. 46 : καθώς
■γέγραπται. Acts xv. 15, very often in Paul, as Ro. i. 1 7 ;
ii. 24; iii. 4 [see below] ; iCo. i. 31: ii. 9; 2Co. viii. 15:
ix. 9; καθάπερ γίγρ. Ro. xi. 8 Τ Tr WTI; [iii. 4 Τ Tr
γραώΒη<;
122
'/υμνοτηι;
WH] ; yey pairrai yap, Mt. XX vi. 31; Lk. iv. 10; Acts
xxiii. 5; llo. xii. 19; xiv. U ; 1 Co. iii. 19; (ial. iii. 10, 13
Rec. ; iv. 22, 27 ; ό \oyos ό yfypaμμΐvoς, 1 Co. xv. 54 ; Kara
TO γ€γραμμ(νον, 2 Co. iv. 13 ; yfyμaμμ€uov «στί, Jn. ii. 17 ;
vi. 31 ; xii. 14; ΐγράφη δ« Trpot νονθίσίαν ημών, 1 Co. χ.
1 1 ; (^ράφη 8ι ήμάί for our sake, Ro. iv. 24 ; 1 Co. L\. 10 ;
with the name of the autlior of the written words or of
the hooks in wliich they are foiinil : yiypainai iv βίβΧω
ψαλμών. Acts i. 20 ; fV βίβΧω των προφητών. Acts vii. 42 ;
(V τω πρώτω [RAVII θίυτίρω] ψάΚμω, Acts xiii. 33 ; eV
Ήσαία, Mk. i. 2 [not Rec], etc. τιι/ά or W lo write of\. e.
in writing lo mention or refer to a person or a tiling : ov
(ypa\j/e Μωϋση! whom Moses had in mind in Avriting of
tlie Messiah, or whose likeness Moses delineated, Jn. i.
45 (46) ; Μωνίτης γράφει την 8ικαίθσννην την €Κ vo/iov,
Moses, writing the words on ό ηηιήσα! αυτά κτ\., points
out tlie righteousness Avhich is of the law, Ro. x. 5. yi-
γμαπται, ypάφ(ιv, etc. irfpi Tivos, concerning one : Mt.
xxvi. 24 ; 'Slk. xiv. 21 ; .In. v. 46 ; Acts xiii. 29 ; tVi τόκ
vwv τηϋ ανθρώπου, that it should find fulfilment in him,
Mk. ix. 12 .s(). [cf. ίνα, II. 2 b.] ; cV αυτώ, on him i. e. of
him (cf. W. 393 (368) [and eVi, B. 2 f. β.]), Jn. xii. 16 ;
τά yfypaμμΐva τω νΐώ του άνθρ. written for him, allotted
to him in Scripture, i. e. to be accomplished in his ca-
reer, Lk. xviii. 31 ; cf. W. § 31, 4 ; [yet cf. B. 1 78 (154)] ;
Μωνσης (ypaijffv Ιμΐν 'να etc. Moses in the Scripture cora-
nianiled us that etc. [cf. B. 237 (204)], Mk. xii. 19; Lk.
XX. 28. d. γρύφίΐν τίνί to write to one i. e. hi/ writing (in
a written epistle) to give, information, directions, etc. fo
one: Ro. xv. 15; 2 Co. ii. 4, 9 [dat. implied]; vii. 12;
Philem. 21 ; 2 Pet. iii. 15 ; 1 Jn. ii. 12 sqip ; it' όλίyωv, 1
Pet. V. 12; 8ta μίΚανος κα\ κάΚάμου, 3 Jn. 13; foil, by the
words written or to be written in the letter: Acts xv.
23; Rev. ii. 1,8, 12, 18; iii. 1,7,H ; ypάφfLvτιvίn, 1 Co.
xiv. 37 ; 2 Co. i. 13 ; ii. 3 [L Τ Tr AVII om. the dat.] ; Gal.
i. 20 ; 1 Tim. iii. 14 ; 1 Jn. i. 4 [R f r L] ; ii. 1 ; π€ρΙ tivos,
1 Jn. ii. 26 ; Acts xxv. 26 ; 2 Co. ix. 1 ; 1 Th. iv. 9 ; v. 1 ;
Jude 3 ; δια χαράς τινοί, to send a letter by one, Acts xv.
23 [see χιίρ] ; ypύφeιv τινί, foil, by an inf., by letter to
bid one do a thing. Acts xviii. 27; foU. by μη with inf.
(to forbid, write one not to etc.), 1 Co. v. 9, 11. 3.
to βΙΙ with writing, (Germ, beschreiben) : βιβΧίον yeypaμ-
μίνον ΐσωθ(ν κα\ Smadfv a volume written within and he-
hind, on the bach; hence on both sides. Rev. v. 1 (Ezek.
ii. 10) ; cf. DUsterdieck, [ALford, al.] ad loc. 4. lo
draw up in writing, compose : βιβλίον, 'Mk. x. 4 ; Jn. xxi.
25 [Tdf. om. the vs. ; see IF//. App. ad loc] ; τίτλοι/, Jn.
xix. 19; ίπιστολήν. Acts xxiii. 2.5; 2 Pet. iii. 1 ; ΐντολην
Tivi to write a commandment to one, Mk. x. 5 ; 1 Jn. ii. 7
Sip ; 2 Jn. 5. [CoMP. : άπο-, iy-, ΐπι-, κατά-, πpo-ypάφω■2
■γραώ8ηΐ, -is, (fr. ypavs an old woman, and t'Sof), old-
womanish, anile, [A. Λ'. old wives'1 : 1 Tim. iv. 7. (Strabo
1 p. 32 [p. 44 ed. Sieben.] ; Galen ; al.) •
γρηγορί'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ί'γρηγόρησα ; (f r. (γρήγορα, to have
been roused from sleep, to be awake, pf. of ^'y(ίpω ; cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 118 sq. ; Ultm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 158;
[W. 26 (25); 92 (88)]); to icalch; 1. prop.: Mt.
xxiv. 43 ; xxvi. 38, 40 ; Mk. xiii. 34 ; xiv. 34, 37 ; Lk. xii.
37, 39 RG L Trtxt. WII txt. As to .■sleep is often i. q.
lo die, so once, 1 Th. v. 1 0, ypηγ. means to lice, be ulice
on earth. 2. Metaph. to watch i. e. give strict attention
to, he cautious, active : — to take heed lest through remiss-
ness and indolence some destructive calamity suddenly
overtake one, Mt. xxiv. 42 ; xxv. 13 ; Mk. xiii. 35, [37] ;
Rev. xvi. 15; or lest one be led to forsake Christ, Mt.
xxvi. 41 ; Mk. xiv. 38 ; or lest one fall into sin, 1 Th. v.
6 ; 1 Co. xvi. 13 ; 1 Pet. v. 8 ; Rev. iii. 2 sq. ; or be cor-
rupted by errors. Acts xx. 31 ; «i/ τινι. lo be watchful In,
employ the most punctilious care in a thing : Col. iv. 2.
(Sept. ; [Bar. ii. 9 ; 1 Mace xii. 27; Aristot. plant. 1, 2
p. 816^2^.37]; Joseph, antt. 11, 3,4 ; AchiU. Tat. ; al.)
[Syn. see aypuTrwm. COMP. : δια- ypr/yopf ω.] *
γνμνάζω ; [pf. pass. ptcp. γίγυμχασμίΐ/ΟΓ] ; (γυμνοί) ;
com. in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down ; 1. prop, to ex-
ercise naked (in the palaestra). 2. to exercise vigor-
ously, in any way, either the body or the mind : ίαυτόν
προ! (ίσ€β(ΐαν, of one who strives earnestly to become
godly, 1 Tim. iv. 7 : γιγνμνιισμίνοί exercised, Hcb. v. 14 ;
xii. 11 ; Kaph'tav ■yf-yupi'. πλίονιξίαι (Rec π\(ον(ξιαις), a
soul that covctousness or the love of gain has trained in
its crafty ways, 2 Pet. ii. 14 ; cf. W. § 30, 4.•
yυμvaσ■la, -as, ή, (γυμνάζω) ; a. prop, the exercise of
the bodi/ in the pahestra. b. any exercise whatever:
σωματική γυμνάσια, the exercise of conscientiousness rel-
ative to the body, such as is characteristic of ascetics
and consists in abstinence from matrimony and certain
kinds of food, 1 Tim. iv. 8. (4 Mace. xi. 19. In Grk.
writ. fr. Plat. legg. i. p. 648 c down.) *
γυμνητίύω (γυμνϊτίύω L Τ Tr AVH ; [cf. Tdf. Prolog,
p. 81 ; W. 92 (88)]) ; (γυμνητης) ; [A. V. Uterally to be
naked \. e.'\ lobe lightbj or poorly clad: iCo. iv. 11. (So
in Dio Chrys. 25, 3 and other later writ. ; to be a light-
armed soldier, Plut. Aem. 16 ; Dio Cass. 47, 34, 2.) '
■γνμνόϊ, -f), -iv, in Sept. for ΟΊ'Ι' and Dl^i;, naked, not
covered; 1. prop. a. unclad, without clothing : 5Ik.
xiv. 52; Rev. iii. 17; xvi. 15; xvii. 16; το γυμνόν, sub-
stantively, the naked bodij : έπι γνμνοΰ, Mk. xiv. 51 ; cf.
Fritzsche ad loc; (τά γυμνά, Lcian. nav. 33). b. ill-
clad: Mt. XXV. 36, 38, 43 sq. ; Acts xLx. 16 (with torn
garments) ; Jas. ii. 15 ; (Job xxii. 6 ; xxiv. 10 ; xxvi. 6).
c. clad in the undergarment only (the outer garment or
cloak being laid aside) : Jn. xxi. 7 ; (1 S. xix. 24 ; Is. xx.
2 ; lies. opp. 389 ; often in Attic ; so nudus, Verg. Georg.
I, 299). d. of the soul, whose garment is the body,
strip! of the body, without η body : 2 Co. v. 3, (Plat. Crat.
c 20 p. 403 b. ή ψυ;(ΐ7 yii^i'i) ToC σώ/ίατοί). 2. meta])h.
a. naked, i. e. open, laid bare : Ileb. iv. 13, (γυμνός ό α8η!
(νώπιον αντοϋ. Job xxvi. 6 ; exx. fr. Grk. auth. see in
Blcek on Heb. vol. ii. 1 p. 585). b. only, mere, hare, i. q.
ψιλοΓ (like Lat. nudus) : γυμνός κόκκος, mere grain, not
the plant itself, 1 Co. xv. 37, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 24, 5
σπίρματα π(σόντα (Is την γην ζηρα και γυμνά δια\ΰ(ται) .*
γυμνότηΒ, -ητος, ή. (γυμνός), nakedness : of the body,
Rev. iii. 18 (?ee αισχύνη. 3); used of want of clothing,
Ro. viii. 35; 2 Co. xi. 27. (Deut. xxviii. 48; Antonin.
II, 27.)•
yvi'aiKapiov
Ϊ2'ό
δαιμόνιον
γυναικάριον, -ου, τό, (dimin. fr. γννη}, α Utile woman ;
used cunlemptuously in 2 Tim. iii. ij [A. V.sUli/ iromen ;
cf. Lat. maliercula^. (Diodes, com. in Bekk. Anecd. p.
87, 4; Antonin. 5, 11; occa.siuniilly in Epictet.) On
dimin. ending in άμιον see Lob. ad Pliryn. p. 180 ; Fritz-
sche on .Alk. p. 638; [cf. λ\ . 24, 90 (91)].*
γυναικείοι, -eia, -elov, of or belonging to a woman, femi-
nine, female : 1 Pet. iii. 7. (From Horn, down ; Sept.) *
γυνή, -aiKos, ή ; 1• univ. a woman of any age, wheth-
er a virgin, or married, or a widow : Mt. i.\. 20 ; xiii. 33 ;
xxvii. 55 ; Lk. xiii. 11 ; Acts v. 14, etc. ; ή μ(μνηστ(υμ4νη
Tiv\ γυνή, Lk. ii. 5 RG; ή ΰπίΐν8ρο!γυνή, Ro. vii. 2 ; yui/ij
χήρα, Lk. iv. 26 (1 K. vii. 2 (14); xvii. 9; femina vidua,
Nep. praef. 4). 2. a wife : 1 Co. vii. 3 sq. 10, 13 sq. ;
Eph. V. 22, etc. ; γυνή Tti/or, Mt. v. 31 sq. ; xL\. 3, 5 ; Acts
V. 1, 7 ; 1 Co. vii. 2 ; Eph. v. 28 ; Rev. ii. 20 [G L WH
mrg.^, etc. of α 6eiroi/ie</ woman : Mt. i. 20, 24. η γυνή
τυϋπατρόί his Step-mother : 1 Co. v. 1 (2N ΠίΙ'Χ, Lev. xviii.
8). Ζχ(ΐν γυναίκα : Mt. xiv. 4 ; xxii. 28 ; Mk. vi. 18 ; xii.
23 ; Lk. XX. 33 ; see ιχω, I. 2 b. fin. γίναι, as a form of
address, may be used — either in indignation, Lk. xxii.
57; or in admiration, Mt. xv. 28; or in kindness and
favor, Lk. xiii. 12; .In. iv. 21 ; or in respect, Jn. ii. 4;
xix. 26, (as in Hom. II. 3, 204 ; Od. 19, 221 ; Joseph, antt.
1, 16, 3).
Γώγ, o,.(J1J), indecl. prop, name, Gog, king of the land
of Magog [q. v. in BB.DU.J, who it is said in Ezek.
xxxviii. sq. will come from the remote north, with innu-
merable hosts of his own nation as well as of aUies, and
will attack the people of Israel, reestablished after the
exile ; but by divine interposition he will be utterly de-
stroyed. Hence in Rev. xx. 8 sq. ό Γώγ and ό Μαγώγ
are used collectively to designate the nations that at the
close of the miUennial reign, instigated by Satan, will
break forth from the four quarters of the earth against
the Messiah's kingdom, but will be destroyed by fire
from heaven.*
γωνία, -as, ή, [fr. Ildt. down], an angle, i. e. a. an
external angle, corner (Germ. Ecke) : των πλαταών, Mt.
vi. 5 ; κ(φά\ή γωνίας, Mt. .xxi. 42 ; Mk. xii. 10 ; Lk. xx.
17; Actsiv. 11 ; 1 Pet. ii. 7, (riJp E/N1, Ps.cxvii. (cxviii.)
22), the head of the corner, i. e. the corner-stone, (ακρο-
γωνιαίοι, q. V.) ; ai τίσσαρα γωνίαι τηι γη!, the four ex-
treme limits of the earth, Rev. vii. 1 ; x\. 8. b. like
Germ. Winkel, Lat. angulus, Eng. (internal) corner,
i. q. a secret place : Aetsxxvi. 26, (so Plat. Gorg. p. 485 d.
βίον βιώναι ϊν γωνία, Epict. diss. 2, 1 2, 1 7 ; [for other ex-
amples see W etstein on Acts I. c. ; Stallbaum on Plato
1. c.]).•
Δαβίδ (the form in Rec. after the more recent codd.
[minuscules, cf. Tdf. on Mt. i. 1, and Treg. on Lk. iii.
31]), Δαυίδ ( Grsb., Schott, Knapp, Theile, al.),an(l Δαυ-
fi'S (LTTrWH [on the « see WH. App. p. 155 and
s. V. fi, t]; cf. W. p. 44; Bleek on Ileb. vol ii. 1 p. 538;
in Joseph, [antt. 6, 8, 1 sqq. also Nicol. of Damasc. fr. 31 p.
114] Δαι/ίδί/ί, -ου), ό, (1Π, and esp. after the exile TTI,
[i. e. beloved]), David, indecl. name of by far the most
celebrated king of the Israelites: Mt. i. 1, 6, 17, etc. ή
σκηνή Δ. Acts XV. 16 ; ή κΧΛςτοϋ Δ. Rev. iii. 7 ; όΰρόνοί
Δ. Lk. i. 32 ; ό υ'ιος Α., a name of the Messiah, viz. the
descendant of David and heir to his tlirone (see ύ'ιός,
lb.); ή ρίζα Δ. the offs|)ring of David, Rev. v. 5 ; xxii.
16; ή βασιλεία του Δ. Mk. xi. 10 (see βασ-ι\(ία, 3); iv
Δαυίδ, in the book of the Psalms of David, Ileb. iv. 7 [al.
take it personally, cf. i. 1 sq. ; yet see I'v, I. 1 d.].
δαιμονίζομαι; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. 5ai^oi/ia5f if ; (ϋπίμων);
to be under the power of a demon : άλλοί κατ άΧλην Saipu-
viζfτa^ τύχην, Philem. in Stob. eel. phys. 1 p. 196; of
the insane, Plut. symp. 7, 5, 4, and in other later auth.
In the N. T. ^αιμονιζόμ^νοι are persons afflicted ivith
especially severe diseases, either bodily or mental (such
as jiaralysis, blindness, deafness, loss of speech, epilep.sy.
melancholy, insanity, etc.), whose bodies in the opinion
of the Jews demons (see baipoviov) had entered, and so
held possession of them as not only to afflict them with
Uls, but also to dethrone the reason and take its i)lace
themselves ; accordingly the possessed were wont to ex-
press the mind and consciousness of the demons dwell-
ing in them ; and their cure was thought to recjuire the
expulsion of the demon — [but on this subject see B.D.
Am. ed. s. v. Demoniacs and reff. there ; Weiss, Leben
Jesu bk. iii. ch. 6] : Mt. iv. 24 ; viii. 16, 28, 33 ; ix. 32 ;
xii. 22 ; xv. 22 ; Mk. i. 32 ; v. 15 sq. ; Jn. x. 21 ; δηιμο-
νισϋίίί, that had been possessed by a demon [demons],
Mk. V. 18; Lk. viii. 36. They are said also to be ϋχΚοϋ-
μ(νοί ύτΓο or σπο πνευμάτων ακαθάρτων. Lk. vi. 18 [Τ Tr
WH 6Vo;ifX.] ; Acts V. 16 : κατα^υναστΐυόμΐνοι υπο τοΰ hta-
βοΚου i. e. by his ministers, the demons. Acts x. 38.•
δαιμόνιον, -ου, τό, (neut. of adj. δαιμόνιος, -a, -ov, divine,
fr. δαίμων ; equiv. to το fiflov) ; 1. the divine Power,
deity, divinity; so sometimes in prof. auth. as Joseph,
b. j. 1, 2, 8; Ael. v. h. 12, 57; in plur. κοινά δαιμόνια,
Xen. mem. 1, 1, 1 sq., and once in the X. T. ^eVa δαιμό-
νια. Arts xvii. 18. 2. a spirit, a beini; infirior to God,
superior to men [παν ro δαιμόνιον μεταξύ t'oTi θ(θΰ τ( και
ΒηιμονιωΒη'ί
124
Ααμασκτινόι;
θνητοϊι. Plat, synip. 23 p. 202 e. (where see Stallbaum)],
in botli a good sense and a had; thus Jesus, after liis
resurrection, said to his diseiples ουκ <1μ\ ίαιμόνίον άσώ-
ματον, as I^nat. (ad Smyru. 3, 2) records it; πνιϊμα
δαιμονίου άκιιθιφτον (gen. of ap])osition), Lk. iv. 33;
(ποι/ηράν, I'ob. iii. 8, 1 7 ; δαιμύνιον η πικϋμα πονημύν, ibid,
vi. 8). But elsewhere in the S(;ri])tures used, without
an adjunct, of eril spirits or lite messengers and ministers
of the devil [W. 23 (22)] : Lk. iv. 35 ; ix. 1, 42 ; x. 17 ;
Jn. X. 21 ; Jas. ii. ID ; (Ps. xc. (xci.) 6 ; Is. xiii. 21 ; xxxiv.
14; Tob. vi. li<; viii. 3 ; Bar. iv. 3.">) ; τίΡίύματα δαιμονίων
(Kcc. δαιμιΊνων) i. e. of that rank of spirits that are
demons (^eii. of appos.). Rev. xvi. 14 ; ΰμχων των δαιμο-
νίων, tlie prince of the demons, or the devil : Mt. ix. 34 ;
xii. 24 ; Mk. iii. 22 ; Lk. xi. 15 ; they are said ίΐσίρχ^σθαι
t'i Tiva, to enter into (the body of) one to vex him with
diseases (see δαιμονίζομαι) : Lk. viii. 30, 32 sq. ; ίφ\η-
Sijvai and (ξ€ρχ(σθαι (κ Tivos or από Tivof, wlien they arc
forced to come out of one to restore him to health : Mt.
i.\. 33; xvii. 18; .Mk. vii. 29, 30; Lk. iv. 35,41; viii. 2,
33, 3.5. (κβάλλΐΐν δαιμόνια, is used of those who compel
demons to come out : Alt. vii. 22 ; xii. 27 sip ; Mk. i. 34,
39; Lk. ix. 49, etc. e;(eii' δηιμόΐ'ΐοΐ', to have a demon, be
possessed by a demon, is said of those who either suffer
from some exceptionally severe disease, Lk. iv. 33 ; viii.
27 (ϊχ. δαιμόνια) ; or act and speak as though they were
mad, Alt. xi. 18 ; Lk. vii. 33 ; Jn. vii. 20 ; viii. 48 sq. 52 ;
X. 20. Accordint; to a Jewish opinion which passed
over to the Christians, the (lem<ms are the gods of the
Gentiles and the authors of idolatry ; hence διιιμόΐΊα
stands for Ο'^?!* Ps. xcv. (.Kcvi.) 5, and Ό"\ΰ Dent,
xx.xii. 1 7 ; Ps. cv. (cvi.) 37, cf. Bar. iv. 7 : προσκννύν τα
δαιμόνια κάΊ τα ΰδωλα, llev. ix. 20. The a])Ostle Paul,
though teaching that the gods of the CJentiles are a fiction
(1 Co. viii. 4 ; x. 19), thinks that the conception of them
has been put into the minds of men by demons, who
appropriate to their own use and honor the sacrifices
offered to idols. Hence what the Gentiles ^ιίουσι, be
says δαιμονίϋΐς θνονσιν κα\ ου θ(ω, 1 Co. \. 20 (fr. the
Sept. of Ucut. xxxii. I 7, cf. liar. iv. 7), and tliose who
frequent the .sacrificial feasts of the Gentiles come into
fellowship with demons, 1 Co. x. 20sq. ; [cf. Baudissin,
Stud, zur semit. Rcligionsgesch. vol. i. (St. ii. 4) p. 110
sqq.]. Pernicious errors are disseminated by demons
even among Christians, seducing them from the truth,
iTim. iv. 1. Jo.sephus also makes mention of δαιμόνια
taking possession of men, antt. (i, 11, 2 ,sq. ; 6, 8, 2 ; 8,
2, 5 ; but he sees in them, not as the N. T. writers do,
bad angels, but the spirits of wicked men deceased, b. j.
7, 6, 3.
δαιμονιώδη;. -ft, (δαιμόνων, ip v., antl iiSos), resembling]
OT proccciliiii/froin fin eril spirit, di'mim-lihe : Jas. iii. 15.
[Schol. Arsti)h. ran. 295; Ps. xc. ϋ Symm.]'
8α(μων, -ovos, ό, ή\ 1. in Grk. auth. a god, a god-
dess ; an inferior deili/, whetlier good or bad ; hence
άγαθοδαιμονίί and κακοδαίμον^ς are distinguished [cf. W.
23 (22)]. 2. In the N. T. an eril spirit (see δαιμόνιοι/,
2) : Mt. viii. 3! ; Mk. v. 12 [R L] ; Lk. viii. 29 [R G L
mrg.] ; Rev. xvi. 14 (Rec.) ; xviii. 2 (where L Τ Tr WI I
δαιμονίων). [Β. ϋ. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Uemou ; cf. δαι-
μυνίζομαι.Ί '
ζίκνω; lobite; a. prop, with the teeth. b. metaph.
to wound the soul, cut, lacerate, rend ivith repniachcs :
Gal. v. 15. So even in Ilom. II. 5, 493 μίθοί δα«
φρίνας, Menand. ap. Athen. 12, 77 p. 552 e., and times
without number in other auth.*
8άκρυ, -vos, TO, and τΰ δάκρυον, -ου, [fr. Ilom. down],
a tear : Jlk. ix. 24 R G ; Acts x.\. 19, 31 ; 2 Co. ii. 4 ; 2
Tim. i. 4; Ileb. v. 7 ; xii. 1 7. The (nom.) form τό δά-
κρυον in Rev. vii. 17; xxi. 4, (Is. xxv. 8). dat. jilur.
δάκρυσι in Lk. vii. 38, 44, (Ps. cxxv. (exxvi.) 5 ; Lam.
ii. 11).•
8ακρνω : 1 aw. (δάκρυσα; to weep, shell tears: Jn. xi.
35. [From Ilom. down. Syn. see κλαίω, fin.] *
SaKTUXios, -ου, ό, (fr. δάκτυλος, because decorating the
fingers), a ring: Lk. xv. 22. (From lldt. down.)*
δόκτυλοϊ, -ου, 0, [fr. Batrach. 45 and lldt. down], a
finger: Mt. xxiii. 4; Lk. xi. 46 ; xvi. 24 ; Mk. vii. 33;
Jn. viii. G Rec. ; xx.25, 27; fV δακτύλω if oO, by the. power
of God, divine elliciency by ivhich something is made
visible to men, Lk. xi. 20 (Mt. xii. 2S iv πν(ύματι θίοϋ) ;
Ex. viii. 19, [cf. xx.xi. 18 ; Ps. viii. 4].*
Δαλμανονθά [on the accent ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 103], ή,
Dahnanutlia, the name of a little town or village not far
from Rlagdala [better .Magadan ((p v.)], or lying within
its territory : Mk. viii. 10 (cf. Mt. xv. 39), see Fritzsche
ad loc. [B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]. Derivaticra of the name
uncertain ; cf. Kcim ii. 528 [(Eng. trans, iv. 238), who
associates it with Zalmonah, Num. .x.xxiii. 41 Sfj., but
mentions other opinions. Furrer in the Zeitsclir. des
Deutsch. Palacstin.-A'ereins for 1879, p. 58 sq(p identi-
fies it with Mini/eh (abbrev. Manutha, Lat. nicnsa)].*
Δαλματία [Lchm. AcX/i. (" prob. Alexandrian but pos-
sibly genuine," Hort)], -as, ή, Dalmalia, a part of Illyri-
cum on the Adriatic Sea ; on the east adjoining Pannonia
and u])per Mocsia, on the north separated from Liburnia
by the river Titius, and extending southwards as far as
to the river Drinus and the city Lissus [cf. Diet, of Geog.
s. v. ; Conyb. and Hows. St. Paul, ii. 126 sq. ; Leicin, St.
Paul, ii. 357] : 2 Tim. iv. 10.'
δαμίάζιο : 1 aor. ϊδάμασα ; Pass., [pres. δαμάζομαι^ ; ]if.
δ(δάμασμαι; [akin to hdA. domo, dominus, Vioih. gatiim-
Jan; Eng. tame; cf. Curtius § 260]; com. fr. Ilom.
down ; to tame : Mk. v. 4 ; Jas. iii. 7 ; to restrain, curb,
την γλώσσακ, Jas. iii. 8.*
εάμαλιε, -€ws, ή, (fem. of ό δαμάλη! a young bullock
or steer), a 'joung cow, heifer, (Acschyl., Dion. Hal.,
Lcian., al.) ; use<l in Num. xix. 2, 6, 9 sq. for n^3 and
in Ileb. ix. 13 of the red heifer with whose ashes, by the
Mosaic law, those were to be sprinkled wlio had become
defiled. (Besides in Sept. chiefly for π'7^|;.) *
Δάμαρΐ5, -ιδοί, η, Damaris, a woman of Athens con-
verted by Paul : Acts xvii. 34 ; [cf. Mey. ad loc. ; B. D.
s. V.].•
Δαμασ-κηνός, -ή, -όν, of Damascus, Damascene ; sub-
stantively 01 Δαμασκηνοί ; 2 Co. xi. 32.*
Δαμασκού
125
δε
^αμ.α<ΓΚΟ!, -οΟ, ή, Damascus, (Hebr. ptSJpl), a very an-
cient (Gen. xiv. 15), celebrated, nourishing city of Syria,
lying in a most lovely and fertile plain at the eastern
base of Antilibanus. It had a great number of Jews
among its inhabitants (Joseph, b. j. 2, 20, 2 cf. 7, 8, 7).
Still one of the most opulent cities of western Asia,
having about 109,000 inhabitants [" in 1«59 about
150,000; of these 6,000 were Jews, and 15,000 Chris-
tians" (Porter)] : Acts ix. 2 sqq. ; xxii. 5 sqq. ; 2 Co. xi
3-'; (ial. i. 17. [Cf. BB.DD. s. v.. esp. Alex.'s Kitto.j•
8av£ti<i) (T λνΐΙδαΜ^ω [see I, «]) ; 1 aor. 1 8ύ«ιση (Lk.
vi. 34 L txt. Τ WII Tr nirg.) ; 1 aor. mid. ihavt^σάμηv^,
(baveuiv, i\.\•-); [fr. Arstpli. down] ; to le?i(/ ηιοιιαι/ : Lk.
vi. 34 sq. ; Λlid. to have money lent to one's aelf, to take a
loan, borrow [cf. W. § 38, 3 ; Rirldell, Platon. idioms,§ 87] :
Mt. V. 42. (l)cut. XV. 6, 8 ; Prov. xix. 17 ; in Grk. auth.
fr. Xen. and Plat, down.) *
[Syn. : δαΐ'€ί^αι, κίχρ-ημι : S. to tendon interest, as a
business transaction ; κ[χρ. to tend, grant the use of, as a
fri endly act.]
εάνειον [WII δάκιον, see I, i], tiov, τό, (Savos a gift),
a loan: Mt. xviii. 27. (Deut. xv. 8; xxiv. 13 (11);
Aristot. eth. Nic. 9, 2, 3; Diod. 1, 79; Pint.; al.)*
δανειστή? (Τ WII Βανιστη! [see I, i ]), -oO, o, (δανείζω,
q. v.), a moneij-lender, creditor : Lk. vii. 41. (2 K. iv. 1 ;
Ps. cviii. (cix.) 11 ; Prov. xxix. 13 ; Sir. xxix. 28. Dem.
p. 88.5, 18 ; Plut. Sol. 13, 5 ; de vitand. aere, etc. 7, 8 ;
[al.].)•
8αν(ζω, see δανιίζω.
Δανιήλ, ό, (^«■'JT and '7X31 i. e. judge of (jod [or God
is my judge]), Daniel, prop, name of a Jewish prophet,
conspicuous for his wisdom, to whom are ascribed the
well-known prophecies composed between B.C. 167-164;
[but cf. BB.DD.] : Mt. xxiv. 15 ; Mk. xiii. 14 Rec*
[δάνιον, see Sovfiov•]
δανιστήϊ, sec δαί/€ΐστης.
δαπανάω, -ώ : f ut. δαπανήσω ; 1 aor. (δαπάνησα ; (δαπάνη^ ;
fr. [lldt. and] Thuc. down; to incur e.r/j)nse, crprnd,
spend : τι, Mk. v. 26 (1 Mace. xiv. 32) ; (πι with dat. of
pers., for one, in his favor. Acts .\xi. 24 ; inep τίνος, 2 Co.
xii. 15. in a bad sense, to rcaste, sr/uamler, consinne :
πάντα, Lk. χ v. 14; tva iv ralr ήδοναΐί νμων δαπανήσητ(,
that ye may consume, waste what ye receive, in luxuri-
ous indulgence — [ti/ marking the realm in rather than
the object oii] : Jas. iv. 3. [CoMr. : (κ-, προσ- δαπανάω.] *
δαπάνη, -ης, ή, (fr. δάπτω to tear, consume, [akin are
δι'ιπνυν, Lat. da/is ; Curtius §261]), expense, cost : Lk. xiv.
28. (2 Esdr. vi. 4 ; 1 Mace. iii. 30, etc. Among Grk.
writ. lies. opp. 721, Pind., Eur., Thuc, et sqq.)*
Aav(CS and Δαυίδ, see Δαβίδ.
δί (related to δή, as μίν to μήν, cf. Klalz ad Devar. ii.
2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive,
liHt, moreover, (W. § 53, 7 and 10, 2) ; it is much more
fre(]. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other
books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse.
[On its general neglect of elision (when the next word
begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96 ; WII. Λρρ.
p. 146; W. §5, la. ; B. p. 10 sq.] It is used 1.
univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is
added to statements opj). to a preceding statement: f'av
yap άφητ( . . . (iiv &e μη άφήτ(, Mt. vi. 14 sq. ; eav δί ό
οφθαλμοί κτλ. Mt. vi. 23 ; ίλίΰσυνται δί ήμίραι, Mk. ii. 20;
it opposes persons to persons or things previously men-
tioned or thought of, — either with strong emphasis:
f'yi) δί, Mt. V. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39, 44 ; ήμ^Ίι δί, 1 Co. i. 23 ;
2 Co. X. 13 ; σύ δ^, Mt. vi. 6 ; ύμ(Ίι δί, Mk. viii. 29; oi' δί
υιοί τη: βασιΚ(ίας, Mt. viii. 12; α! άλώπικις . . . ό δί v'los
τοΰ άνθρ. Mt. viii. 20 ; Lk. ix. 5S ; πάς 6 λαοί . . . οί δί
Φαρισα'ιοί, Lk. vii. 29 sq. ; ό δε πνευματικοί, 1 Co. ii. 15,
and often; — or with a slight discrimination, όδί,αΐτος δε:
Mk. i. 45 ; v. 34 ; vi. 37 ; vii. 6 ; Mt. xiii. 29, 37, 52 ; .\v.
23 sqq. ; Lk. iv. 40, 43 ; v. 16 ; vi. 8 ; viii. 10, 54 ; xv. 29 ;
oi δί, Mt. ii. 5 ; Mk. iii. 4 ; viii. 28, etc., etc. ; with the addi-
tion also of a prop, name, as ό δί Ιησούς : Mt. viii. 22
[Tdf. om. Ί.]; ix. 12[RGTrbr.], 22 [Tdf. om.'l]; xiii.
57 ; Jlk. i. 41 [R G L mrg. Tr rarg.] ; άποκρ. δί (ό) Σίμων,
Lk. vii. 43 R G L br. ; ή δε Μαρία. Lk. ii. 19, etc. 2.
μίν . . . δί, sec μίν. 3. after negative sentences, hut,
but rather (Germ, n-ohl aber) : Mt. vi. 19 sq. (^μη θησαυ-
ρίζ(τ( . . . βησαυρίζ(τ( δί) ; χ. 5 .«q. ; Acts xii. 9, 14 ; Ιίο.
iii. 4 ; iv. 5 ; 1 Co. i. 10 ; vii. 37 ; 1 Th. v. 21 [not Rec] ;
Eph.iv. 14sq.; Ileb. ii. 5 scj.; iv. 13, 15; ix. 12; x. 26 sq.;
xii. 13 ; 1 Pet. i. 12 (^οϋχ 4αυτοΊς ίμ'ιν [Rec. ήμ.] δε') ; Jas.
i. 13 sq. ; ii. 11. 4. it is joined to terms which are re-
peated with a certain emphasis, and with such additions
as tend to explain and establish them more exactly ; in
this use of the particle we may supply a su))prcssed neg-
ative clause [and give its force in Eng. by inserting /
sai/, and that, so then, etc.] : Ro. iii. 21 scj. (not that com-
mon δίκαιοσννη which the Jews boast of and strive after,
but δικαιοσ. δια πίατ(ως) ; Ro. ix. 30 ; 1 Co. ii. 6 (σοφίαν
δί oi ToC αΙώνος τούτου) ; Gal. ii. 2 (I went up, not of my
own accord, but etc.) ; Phil. ii. 8 ; cf. Klolz ad Dev. ii.
2 p. 301 sq. ; L. Dindorf in Stcph. Thes. ii. col. 928 ; [cf.
W. 443 (412)]. 5. it serves to mark a transition to
something new (δε metabatic) ; by this use of the parti-
cle, the now addition is distinguished from and, as it were,
opposed to what goes before: IMt. i. 18; ii. 19; x. 21 ;
Lk. xii. 13 ; xiii. 1 ; Jn. vii. 14, 37; Acts vi. 1 ; Ro. viii.
28 ; 1 Co. vii. 1 ; viii. 1, etc, etc. ; so also in the phrase
ίγε'νετο δε', see γίνομαι, 2 c. 6. it introduces explana-
tions and separates them from the things to be explained :
Jn. iii. 19 ; vi. 39 ; 1 Co. i. 1 2 ; vii. 6, 29 ; Eph. v. 32, etc. ; —
esp. remarks and explanations intercalated into the dis-
course, or ad<lcd, as it were, by way of appendix : Mk. v.
13 (ι5<ταν δε' etc. R L br.) ; xv. 25 ; xvi. 8 [RG] ; Jn. vi. 10 ;
ix. 14 ; xii. 3 ; toCto δε γί'γονε, ^It. i. 22; xxi. 4. Owing
to this use, the partichi not infreijiiently came to be con-
founded in the Mss. (of prof. writ, also) with γάρ; cf.
Winer on Gal. i. 11 ; Fritzsche on Mk. xiv. 2 ; also his
Com. on Rom. vol. i. jip. 234, 265 ; ii. p. 4 76; iii. p. 19G :
[W. 452 (421); B. 363 (312)]. 7. after a parenthe-
sis or an explanation which had led aivay from the sul>-
ject under discussion, it serves to take up the discourse
again [cf. W. 443 (412)] : Mt. iii. 4 ; Lk. iv. 1 ; Ro. v. 8 ;
2 Co. ii. 12; v. 8 ; x. 2 ; Eph. ii. 4 ; cf. Klolz ad Devar.
Βέησι,<!
126
δεικνύω
η. 2 ρ. 376 sq. 8. it introduces the apodosis and,
as it were, opposes it to the protasis : Acts xi. 17 Rii (1
Mace. xiv. 29 ; 2 Mace. i. 34) ; after a participial con-
struction which has the force of a protasis : Col. i. 22 (21);
cf. Matthiaeii. U70; Kuhnerii. 818; [Jelf §770J; Klotz
u. s. p.370s(i.; [B. 364 (31 2)]. 9. και . . . 8e, but . . .
al.<n, ijcn ami, moreover aho : Mt. x. 18 ; xvi. 18 ; Lk. ii. 35
[ Wli txt. om. L Tr br. it] ; Jn. vi. 51 ; xv. 27 ; Acts iii. 24 ;
xxii. 29 ; llo. xi. 23 ; 2 Tim. iii. 12 ; iJn. i. 3 ; 2 Pet. i.
5; cf. Klotz u. s. p. C45 sq. ; B. 3C4 (312) ; [also W. 443
(413) ; Ellic. on 1 Tim. iii. 10 ; Mey. on .In. vi. 51]. και
iav &€ i/ea even if: Jn. viii. 16. 10. 6e' never stands
as the first word in the sentence, but generally• second ;
and when the words to which it is added cannot be sei>
arated, it stands tliird (as in Alt. -x. 11 ; -xviii. 25; Mk. iv.
34 ; Lk. X. 31 ; Acts xvii. 6 ; xxviii. 6 ; Gal. iii. 23 ; 2 Tim.
iii. 8, etc. ; in oi μόνον 8e, Ro. v. 3, 11, etc.), or even in
the fourth place, Mt. x. 18 ; Jn. vi. 51 ; viii. 16 sq. ; 1 Jn.
i. 3; 1 Co. iv. 18: [Lk. xxii. 69 LTTrWH].
8ίητιβ. -€ωΓ, ή. ( &ίομαι) ; 1. need, indiijenre, (Ps. xxi.
(xxii.) 25 ; Aeschin. dial. 2, 39 sq. ; [Plato, Eryx. 405 e.
bis]; Aristot. rhet. 2, 7 [ii. p. 1385% 27]). 2. a xeek-
inii, asking, entreating, entreaty, (fr. Plat, down) ; in the
N. Ϊ. requests addressed by men to God (Germ. Bittgc-
bel, supplication); univ. : Jas. v. Ifi ; 1 Pet. iii. 12; as
often in the Sept., joined with προσ€υχη (i. e. any pious
address to God [see below]) : Acts i. 14 Rec. ; Eph. vi.
18 ; Phil. iv. 6 ; plur. 2 Tim. i. 3 ; joined ivilh -προσίνχαΐ,
1 Tim. V. 5; with ι/ηστΐ7αι, Lk. ii. 37; τΐυΐΐ'ίσθαί ^ίησιν,
Phil. i. 4 ; π. Stijfrfif, Lk. v. 33; 1 Tim. ii. 1. contextu-
allv, of prayers imploring God's aid in some particular
matter: Lk. i. 13; Phil. i. 19; plur. Heb. v. 7; suppli-
cation for others : [2 Co. i. 11]; nfpi nvot, Eph. vi. 18 ;
imcp Ttvof, 2 Co. ix. 14; Phil. i. 4; Λνίιΐι the addition
npiis-Tuv θ(ον, Ro. X. 1.*
(Svv. δβτισίϊ, προσίΐ/χή, tvrtv^ts: irp., as Prof.
Oriinm remarks, is mirestricted as respects its contents,
ivliile 8. is petitiKnary; moreover irp. is a word of s ao re d char-
acter, being limited to prayer to God, whereas 5. may also l)e
used of a request addressed to man. In Byzantine Grk. it is
used of a w r i 1 1 e η supplication ( like our /« titiou ) \ cf . Sopli.
Lex. s. V. See more at length Trencli § Ii. ; also Bp. Lghtft.
on I'liil. iv. 6 ; Kllie. on Eph. vi. 18 ; cf. Schmidt ch. vii. In
1 Tim. ii. I to tliese two words is added exreulis, Avhicli ex-
presses couKdin}; access to God ; thus, in comliination, S(r\ais
fjives prominence to the expression of personal need, τροσ-
euxi) to tlie element of devotion, ίντ^υξα to that of child-
like confidence, by representing: prayer as tlie lieart's con-
verse with God. See Huther's extended note ad loc. ; Ellic.
ad loc. ; Trench n. s.]
8ii: subjunc. pres. Se'i; ; impf. eiei; an impers. verb
[cf. R. § 132, 12; cf. § 131, 3; fr. Ilom. down]: (δ/ω,
sc. TITOS, to have need of, be in want of; cf. Germ, e.i
bedarf), it is necessnri/, there is need of, it behooves, is
right and proper ; foil, either by the inf. alone (cf. our
one ought), or by the ace. with<inf. [cf. B. 147 (129)],
it denotes any sort of necessity ; as a. necessity
lying in the nature of the case : Jn. iii. 30 ; 2 Tim. ii.
6. b. necessity brought on by circumstances or by
the conduct of others toward us: Mt. xxvi. 35 (καν Sir)
μ( άηοθανιΊν), cf. Mk. xiv. 31 ; Jn. iv. 4 ; Acts xxvii. 21 ;
2 Co. xi. 30; [xii. 1 L Τ Tr \VH txt.] ; or inqmsed by a
condition of mind: Lk. ii. 49; xix. 5. c. necessity in
reference to what is reijuired to attain some end : Lk.
xii. 12 ; Jn. iii. 7 ; Acts ix. « ; xvi. 30 ; 1 Co. xi. 19 ; Heb.
ix. 26 (on this cf. W. 283 (266); [also B. 216 (187);
225 (195)]); lleb. xL 6. d. a necessity of law and
command, of duty, equity : Mt. xviii. 33 ; xxiii. 23 ; Lk.
xi. 42; xiii. 14; xv. 32; xviii. 1 ; xxii. 7; Jn. iv. 20;
Acts V. 29; xv. 5; Ro. i. 27 {άντιμισθίαν, ψ fSfi, sc. άπο-
\αμβάν(σθαι, the recompense due by the law of God);
Ro. viii. 2(i ; xii. 3 ; 1 Co. viii. 2, etc. or of ollice : Lk.
iv.43; xiii. 33; Jn.ix.4; x.lC; E|)h.vi.20; C'ol.iv.4;
2 Tim. ii. 24. e. necessity established by the counsel
and decree of God, es]). by that purpose of his which
relates to the salvation of men by the intervention of
Christ and wliicli is disclosed in the O. T. prophecies :
Mt. xvii. 10; xxiv. 6; Mk. ix. 11; Acts iv. 12; 1 Co. xv.
53 ; in this use, esp. of what Christ was destined finally
to undergo, his sufferings, death, resurrection, ascen-
sion: Lk. xxiv. 46 [R(iLl)r.]; Mt. xxvi. 54 ; Jn. iii. 14;
Acts iii. 21, etc. (of the necessity of /ale in Ildt. 5, 33 ;
with the addition κατά το θ(οπρύπιον, 8, .'J3 ; i hue. 5, 26.)
[SvN". : Sf7,xpii: S(7 seems to be more su^j^estive of
moral obligation, denoting esp. that constraint which arises
from divine appointment ; whereas χρ-η signilies rather the
necessity resulting from time and circumstance. Schmidt
ch. 150.]
8(Ϊ7μα, -T05, τό, (SfiKwpi) ', a. prop, thing shown,
b. a spcriincn of any thing, example, pattern : nvpus
αΙωνίου, set forth as a warning, Jude 7. (From Xcn.,
Plat., Isocr. down.) *
δειγματίζω : 1 aor. ί8(ΐγμάτισα ; (Sfiy^a) ; to make an
eiuinple of, to shoir as an ixaniplc ; τινά, to expose one
to disgrace (cf. παρα8(ΐγματίζω, 6(ατρίζω) : Alt. i. 19 LT
TrAVII; Col. ii. 15. A word unknown to Grk. writ.
[Cf. Act. Petr. ct Pauh § 33; W. 25 (24); 91 (87);
SeiypaTicrpos occurs on the Rosctta st(me, line 30 ; Doeckh,
In^crr. 4Γ.97. CoMP. : παρίί-δίίγματι'^ω.] *
SeiKvudj {hfiKvifiv, Mt. xvi. 21 : SetKvveis. Jn. ii. 18; τοΰ
SeiKviotnos, Rev. xxii. 8 [not Tdf.]) and bfUmpt (1 Co.
xii. 31 : Mt. iv. 8 ; Jn. v. 20 ; cf. B. 45 (39) ) : fut. 8(ίξω ;
1 aor. (8αξα; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. SeixBfis (lleb. viii. 5) ;
Sept. mostly for Γ\^^η ; to shou; exhibit ; 1. ])rop. to
show i. e. expose to the ei/es : rtvi τι, Mt. iv. 8 ; Lk. iv. 5 ;
XX. 24 (for Rec. eViSt.'f ) ; xxii. 12; xxiv. 40[RGL,
but Tom. Trbr.WH reject the vs.]; Mk. xiv. 15 ; Jn.
XX. 20; Acts vii. 3; όδόκ τινι, mctaph., in which one
ousht to go, i. e. to teach one what lie ought to do, 1 Co.
xii. 31 ; κατά τον τύπον τοχ 8(ΐχ(^ίντα σοι, IIcl). viii. 5;
ίαντον beiKvivai τινί to expose one's self to the view of
one, Mt. viii. 4; Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; Β(Ίξον ήμΐν τον
ιτατίρα render the Father visible to us, Jn. xiv. 8 sq. ; of
things presented to one in a vision : τινί τι. Rev. xvii. 1 ;
xxi. 9 sq. ; x.xii. 1,8; Sfi^al τινι, a 8ei γ€ν(σθαι. Rev. i. 1 ;
iv. 1 ; xxii. 6. to show, i. q. to bring to pass, produce
whatcan be seen (Germ, sehen la.tsen) ; of miracles per-
δίίλ,ΐί
127
ΔΐκάτΓοΚι.';
formed in presence of others to be seen by them : σημ^Ίον,
Jn. ii. 18, (Bar. vi. [i. e. ep. Jer.] C6 ; σήμα, Horn. OU. 3,
174; H. 13, 244) ; epya ΐκ Tivos, works done by the aid
of one, Jn. x. 32 ; την ίπιφάνααν *1η(Γοϋ Χρίστου, spoken
of God, as the author of Clirist's visible return, 1 Tim.
vi. 15 ; ίργα SfiKiweiv is used differently in Jn. v. 20, to
show works to one for him to do. 2. metaph. a.
with ace. of tlie thing, to yice the evidence οτ proof of a
thing : πίστιν, Jas. ii. 18 ; τι ΐκ Ttvos, as την τΐίστίν €κ των
€ργων, ibid. ; τα ί'ργα ΐκ της καλής ανάστροφης, Jas. iii. 13.
b. Ιο show bij irords, Ιο leach : foil, by ότι, Mt. xvi. 21
(8ι8άσκ(ΐν in Mk. viii. 31 for SdKvvav) ; foil, by an inf.
Acts X. 28. [CoMP. ; ava-, άπο-, iv-, im-, ύτΓΟ-δ^ίκΐ'υμί.] *
SciXla, -as, ή, (δίΐλόϊ), lim'idilij, fearfalness, cowardice :
2 Tim. i. 7. (Soph., [Ildt.], Eur., [Arstph.], Thuc, and
Bubseq. writ.) *
[Svs. Sfι\ίa,φ6βos,(ΰ\άβfla^. "of these three words
the first is used always iu a bad sense ; the second is a mid-
dle term, capable of a good interpretation, capable of an c\il,
and lying pretty evenly between the two ; the third is quite
predominantly used in a good sense, though it too has not
altogether escaped being employed in an evil." Trench § x.
q. V. ; cf. Sios.]
ε^ιλιάω, -ώ ; (heiKia, q. v.) ; to he timid, fearful : Jn. xiv.
27. (Deut. xxxi. ti ; i. 21 and often in Sept. ; Sir. xxii.
16; x.xxi. (xxxiv.) 16; 4 Mace. xiv. 4. Diod. 20, 78.
The Greeks prefer the comp. anoSeiXiS>.) *
SeiX09, -η, -όν, (θίίδω to fear), timid, fearful: Mt. viii.
26 ; Mk. iv. 40 ; in Rev. xxi. 8 of Christians who through
cowardice give way under persecutions and apostatize.
(From Horn, down.) *
8€Ϊνα, ό, η, TO ; gen. Sfii/o? ; dat. fieiw ; ace. τον, την, το
διϊνα (cf. Matthiae § 1•51), such a one, a certain one, i. e.
one whose name I cannot call on the instant, or whose
name it is of no importance to mention ; once in the
Scriptures, viz. Mt. xxvi. 18. (Arstph., Dem., al.) *
8civ(I>s, adv., (δανός), lerrihhj, grievously. Mt. viii. 6;
Lk. xi. .j3. [From Ildt. down.] •
Seiirvt'w, -ω : [fut. &^ιιτνήσω] ; 1 aor. ^δάπνησα ; (5fi-
πνον) ; to sup : Lk. xvii. 8 ; xxii. 20 [AVIi reject the
whole pass., see their App.] ; 1 Co. xi. 23 ; in an alle-
gory, 8(ΐπνήσω μίτ αΰτοϋ, I will make him to share in
my most intimate and blissful intercourse : Rev. iii. 20.*
Selirvov, -ου, τό, and ace. to a rare and late form ό
&(1πνυς in Lk. xiv. 16 Lchm. [cf. Tdf. on Rev. xix. 9, 17,
also λν^. 6o (64) ; on deriv. cf. ίαπάνη], (in Hom. the
morning meal or breakfast, cf. Passow [more fully L. and
S.] s. V. ; this the Greeks afterwards call το άριστον q. v.
[and reff. there], designating as to Seinvov the evening
meal or supper) ; 1. supper, esp. a formal meal usu-
ally held at evening: Lk. xiv. 17, 24; Jn. xiii. 2,4; xxi.
20 ; plur. : Mt. xxiii. 6 ; IMk. xii. 39 ; Lk. (xi. 43 Lchm.
in br.) ; xx. 46 ; used of the Messiah's feast, symbolizing
salvation in the kingdom of heaven : Rev. xix. 9,17;
κυριακίιν iemvov (see κνριακός. Π, 1 Co. xi. 20; ποκΐν
Sf'mvov, Lk. xiv. 12 (άριστον η Se'mvov) : 16 (Dan. v. 1
[Theodot.]) ; with the addition τινί, Mk. vi. 21 ; Jn.
xii. 2. 2. nniv. food taken at evening: 1 Co. xi. 21.*
ε€ΜΓΐ5αιμον£α, -ας, η, (5(ισιSaίμωv),fear of the gods ; 1.
in a good sense, reverence for the gods, piety, religion :
Polyb. 6, 56, 7; Joseph, antt. 10, 3, 2; κα\ θιοφιλης
βίος, Diod. 1, 70. 2. i. q. ή SeiKia προς το δαιμόνιο»
(Theophr. char. 16 (22) init. [cf. Jebb p. 263 Sip]) ; su-
perstition : [Polyb. 12, 24, 5] ; Plut. [SoL 12, 4] ; Alex. 7.i,
1 ; de adulat. et am. 2.j, and in his Essay πιρί της Sfiat-
Βαιμονίας; Antonin. 6, 30 θιοσ^βης χωρ'ις δ(ΐσι8αιμηνίας.
3. religion, in an objective sense ; in which sense Jose-
phus, antt. 19, 5, 3, says Claudius commanded the Jews
μη τάς των άλλων ί6νών δεισιδαιμονίας ϊξουδίνίζίΐν. Festus
in the presence of Agrippa the Jewish king employs
the word ambiguously and cautiously, in Acts xxv. 19,
of the Jewish religion, viz. so as to leave Ids own judg-
ment concerning its truth in suspense. Cf. Zezschwitz,
Profangr'acitat u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 59 ; [^K. F. Her-
mann, Lehrb. d. gottesdienstl. Alterthiimer, §8 note 6;
Trench § xlviii.; (cf. Kenricl; Bibl. Essays, 1864, p. 108
sqq. ; Fii'hl, Otiiun Xorv. iii. p. 80 scp)].*
δίκτι-Βαίμων, -ov, gen. -όνος, (δίίδω to fear, and δαίμων
deity), fearing the deity or deities, like the Lat. religiosus;
used either 1. in a good sense, reverencing god or the
gods, pious, religious : Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 58 ; Ages. 11,8;
Aristot. pol. 5, 1 1 [p. 1315", 1] ; or 2. in abad sense,
superstitious: Theophr. char. 16(22); Diod. 1, 62; 4,
51 ; Plut. de adul. c. 16 ; de superstit. c. 10 sq. Paul
in the opening of his address to the Athenians, Acts
xvii. 22, calls them, with kindly ambiguity, κατίι πάντα
δασιδαιμονιστύρους (sc. than the rest of the Greeks [W.
244 (229)], cf. Meyer ad loc), as being devout without
the knowledge of the true God ; cf. Bengel ad loc.*
StKtt, 01, a'l. τά, [fr. Hom. down], ten : Mt. .\x. 24, etc.
θλίψις ήμερων δίκα, i. e. to last a short time : Rev. ii. 10;
cf. Dan. i. 12, 14; Xum. .xi. 19; Ter. beaut. 5, 1, 36
decern dierum vix mi est familia.
8ίκα-δύο, rare in the earlier writ., frequent in the later
(see Passow s. v. δέκα [esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. ; cf. W. 23
(22) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 18]), and in Sept. ; i. q.
δώδεκα, twelve: Acts xix. 7 and xxiv. 11, in both places
L Τ Tr \VH δώδεκα : [Rev. xxi. 16 Tdf. edd. 2, 7].*
[Ε(κα-«'ξ, sixteen : Rev. xiii. 18 Lmrg. (Sept., al.) *]
[δίκα-οκτώ for δέκα κα'ι οκτώ, eighteen : Tdf. in Lk. .xiiL 4,
11, Init Wllom. L Tr br. και; cf. s. v. και, I. 1 b.*]
ScKa-ireWe, for the earlier πεντεκαίδεκα, Jifleen : Jn. xi.
18; Acts xxvii. 28; GaL i. 18; [Gen. vii. 20 Aid.,
Compl. ; Ex. xxvii. 15; 1 Mace. x. 40; Polyb. 3, 56, 3
var. ; Diod. 2, 13; Plut. Dion 38, 1 ; al. ; cf. δίκαδύο].*
Δ£κά-ΐΓολΐ5, -εως, ή, Decnpolis {regio decapolilana, Plin.
h. n. 5, 16. 1 7), i. e. a region embracing ten cities. This
name is borne by a district of the tribe of Manasseh
beyond the Jordan and bordering upon Syria, embrac-
ing ten principal cities with smaller towns also scattered
in among them. But the ancient geographers vary in
their enumeration of these ten cities. Plinv 1. c. reckons
Damascus among them, which .losephus seems to have
excluded, calling Scythopolis μεγίστην της δεκαπόλεως,
b. j. 3, 9, 7. All seem to agree in this, that (iadara,
Hippo, Pella and Scythopolis were of the number. Cf.
BeKaTeaaapet
128
Sextos'
Win. RWB. 8. V. Decapolis ; Vaihinger in Herzog iii.
325 sq. ; Riehm, IIWB. 2U6 sq. ; [BB.DD. s. v.] : Mt.
iv. 25; Mk. V. 20; y'u. 31.•
ε<κα-τ{(Γσαρ($, -ων, οί, αί, -σάρα, τά, fourteen : Mt. i. 17 ;
2Co. xii. 2; (Jal. ii. 1. [(ieii. xxxi. 41 ; Tob. viii. 19; x.
7; Polyb. 1, :»<, 11 ; cf. if καδύο.] '
&<κάτη, -ijf, ή. (bUaTos), tlie tenth part of any tiling,
a tithe ; specially the tenth part of booty taken from the
enemy : Ileb. vii. 2, 4 ; the tithes of the fruits of the
earth anil of tlie Hocks, wliich, by the law of Moses, were
presented to the Lcvites in the congregation of Israel :
Heb. vii. 8 sq. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Simon. 133 Bgk. ;
Hdt. 2, 135]; 4, 152 down; Sept. for IE/;:,•?.) [Cf.
BB.DD. s. V. Tithe.] •
8<κατοΐ, -I), -ov, (δίκα), [fr. Horn, down], the tenth : Jn.
i. 39 (40) ; Rev. xxi. 20 ; το δίκατον, subst., the tenth
part : Kev. xi. 13.*
8(κατόω. -ώ : pf. δ(δ(κάτωκα : pf. pass. &(&€κάτωμαι ', (δί-
KOTos); Ιυ KXiicI or riceire the tenth part (for ivhich (irk.
writ, use &(κατ(ΰω [W. 24]) : with ace. of pers. from
whom, Heb. vii. 6 [on the pf. of. W. § 40, 4 a. ; Li/hlfi.
St. Clement, App. p. 414] ; Pass, to pay tithes (Vulg.
decimor) : Heb. vii. 9. (Neh. x. 37.) [Co.MP. : άπο-
δίκατοω.] *
Sektos, -ή, -όν, (δ(χομαι), accepted, acceptable : Lk. iv.
24; I'liil. iv. 18; nvi. Acts .\. 35; the phrases καφΰς
SeKTOs, 2 Co. vi. 2 (Is. xlix. 8 for |ΐϊτ ny_), and €i>iavT6s
8(KTOs, Lk. iv. 19 (Is. Ixi. 2 for ρϊΐ r^yj), denote that
most blessed time when salvation and the free favors of
(lod profusely abound. (Ex. x.xviii. 34 ; Is. Ivi. 7, [etc.].
Among prof. auth. used by Jambl. protr. symb. § 20
p. 350.) •
{κλεάζω ; [pres. pass, δίλίά^ο/ιαι] ; (SeXtap a bait) ; 1.
prop, tn bait, catch bij a bait: Xeu. mem. 2, 1, 4, et al.
2. as often in prof, auth., metaph. to beffuile hi) blandish-
ments, allure, entice, deceire: τινά. 2 Pet. ii. 14, 18; Jas.
i. 14, on this pass. cf. Philo. ΐ|ΐιΐ)(1 omn. prob. lib. § 22
wpiii ΐτηθνμίαί (λαννίται η ύφ' ήδονης SeXeaffrai.*
[Δ£λματ(α see £ίά\ματία^\
Sf'vSpov, -ου, τό, α tree : Mt. vii. 1 7, etc. ; γίικσθαι Se'vSpov
or fit SfvSpov, to grow to the shape and size of a tree,
Mt. xiii. 32; Lk. xiii. 19. [(Horn., Hdt.), Arstph.,
Thuc. down.]
ε^ξΐΌ-βόλοΐ, -ου, ό, (fr. 6(ξιΟ! and βάΧλω), throwing with
the ri;/hl band, a sliniji-r, an archer : Acts xxiii. 23 in
Lchm. ed. min. ; cf. the foil, word.'
8<|<Όλάβο!, -ου, ό, (5(ξιάί and λαμβάνω), a word un-
known to the earlier writ'., found in Constant. Por-
phyro','enitus (10th cent.) de them. 1, 1, who speaks
of 8(ξιοΚάβοι, as a kind of soldiers, in company with
bow-men (τοξοφάροι) and peltasts; [they are also men-
tioned by Theoph. Simoc. (hist. 4, 1) in the 7th cent. ;
see the quotations in Meyer]. Since in Acts xxiii. 23
two hundred of them are ordered to be ready, appar-
ently spearmen are referred to (carrying a lance in the
right hand) ; and so the Vulg. has taken it. The great
number spoken of conflicts with the interpretation of
those who suppose them to be soldiers whose duty it was
to guard captives bound by a chain on the right hand.
Meyer ad loc. understands them to be [either] javelin-
men [or slingers^.'
Serins, -ά. -όΐ', (fr. δίχομαι, fut. ϋίξομαι, orfr. Se'icui, which
is akin to δίίκνυμι; ])rup. of that haii<l which is wont to
take holil o/'as welJ as lo point out ; just as o^tos comes fr.
άξω, fut. of άγω ; [cf. Curtius §§ 11, 2«(;J), the right : Mt.
v. 29, 39 ; Lk. xxii. 50 ; Jn. xviii. 10 ; Kev. x. 2 ; ij ht^ia
Xcip, Mt. V. 30 ; Lk. vi. 6 ; Acts iii. 7 ; Rev. i. IG ; xiii.
16; and (with χιΐρ omitted) ij δίξιά (like ή aptarfpii).
Mt. vi. 3 ; -xxvii. 29 ; Rev. i. 20; ii. 1 ; v. 7 ; (τί'ιτην Seliiii»
[on the right hand i. e.] at the right side, Kev. v. 1 [but
al. take it more closely, in the right hand ; cf. vs. 7 and
XX. 1] ; διδάνΐΗ TTjv διξιάν or ras δί^ιάί, to J)ledge either
a mutual friendship, or a compact, by joining the right
hands : Gal. ii. 9 (I JSIacc. vi. 58 ; xi. 50, 62, (:6 ; xiii. 50 ;
2 Mace. xi. 26; xii. 11 ; xiii. 22; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur.
ii. pp. 566 and 599 ; and in prof. auth. as Xen. an. 1, 6,
6 ; 2, 5, 3 ; Joseph, antt. 18, 9, 3 ht^iav rt ica! τιίστιν δώύναι
Tivi) ; God is said to have done sometliing τ_^ δ{|ιά αϋτοϋ
with liis right hand i. e., ace. to Ilebr. idiom, bij his on-n
power [cf. W. 214 (201)] : Acts ii. 33 ; v. 31 ; τα όπ\α τα
δ(ξιά, arms carried in the right hand and used f(H• attack,
as the sword, the spear, και άριστιρά tho.se carried in the
left hand, for tlie purpose of defence, as the shield : 2
Co. vi. 7 ; τα hf^iii μίρη τον 7r\otov, J η. x.\i. 6. τα δΐζίά
the right side [\V. 176 (li;6)]: Alk. xvi. 5; « δί^ιώι-
Tii/oi on one's right bund (Lat. ad alicuius dextram), .Mt.
XXV. 33 sq. ; xxvii. 38 ; Mk. xv. 27 ; Lk. i. 1 1 ; xxiii. 33 ;
fivai. Acts ii. 25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8, he is at my right
hand, seas a leader, to sustain me). As in this expression
the Greeks use the prep. «, so the Hebrews sometimes
use ρ (["P"•? from i. e. at the right, "3 SvXO from i. e.
at the side of any one) and the Romans ab (sedere a
dextra alicuius, proximum esse ab alitpio), because they
define the position of one standing or sitting next another
by proceeding /ram the one next to whom he is said to
stand or sit [cf. W. 3i;7 (344)]. καθίσαι t'x δίξιών κ. (ξ
(ϋωνΰμων Ttvot βασιΧίω!, to occupy the jilaces of honor
nearest the king, Mt. xx. 21, 23; Mk. x. 37, 40; (2ϋ\
"3 I"•?"'?, 1 K. ii. 19; Ps. -xliv. (xlv.) 10). Hence, after
Ps. cix. (ex.) 1 as applied to the Messiah (Mt. xxii. 44 ;
Mk. xii. 36 ; Lk. .xx. 42), Christ is said to have ascended
καθησθαι or καθίσαι eV διξιΟιν (at or on the right hand) of
(Jod, Mt. xxvi. 64 ; Mk. xiv. 62; .xvi. 19 ; Lk. xxii. 69 ;
Acts ii. 34 ; Heb. i. 13 ; (ivai or καθίσαι iv δ(ξιά τ. θίοΰ,
Ro. viii. 34 ; Eph. i. 20 ; Col. iii. 1; Heb. i. 3 ; viii. 1 ; x. 1 2 ;
xii. 2, — to indicate that he has become a partner in God's
universal goeernment (cf. Knapp, De J. Chr. ad dextram
dei sedente, in his Scripta var. arg. p. 41 sqq. ; \_Stuarl,
Com. on Heb., excurs. iv.]). That these expressions are
tobe understood in this figurative sense, and not of a fixed
and definite place in the highest heavens (as Chr. Fr.
Fritzsche in Nov. Opuscc. acad. p. 209 sijq. tries to prove,
after the orthodox theologians of the reformed church),
will be questioned by no one who carefully considers
Rev. iii. 21. Christ is once spoken of as ίστωί ix δί|ιώ»
τοϋ θ(οΰ, as though in indignation at his adversaries [ace.
ίΐομαι
129
οίσμοφυΚαζ
to others, to welcome his martyred servant] he had risen
from his heavenly throne, Acts vii. 5.) s(|.
λΌμαι; 3 pers. sint;. impf. <8e'fTo (cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 220; W. 46; [A'eitch s. v. 8ίω lo iietil fin.]), Lk. viii.
38 (where Lchm. eSte'iTo. Tr Wll ίδιΊτο; cf. !Mey. ad loc;
[ΙΓ//. App. p. ICiiJ; B. So (4S)); l aor. c'SfiV' (fr.
ifa> to want, need ; whence mid. δέομαι to stand in need
of, want_/Or one's self) ; [fr. Ildt. down] ; 1. lo want,
luck : Tivos. 2. to ilesire, long for : tivos• 3. to ask,
beg, (Germ, bitten): a. iiniv. — the thing asked for be-
ing evident from the context : with gen. of the pers. from
whom, (ial. iv. 12: the thing sought being specified
in direct discourse: I.k. v. 12; viii. 28; ix. 38 (ace. to
the reading (ττίίίλιψον Κ L) ; Acts viii. 34 (δίομαί σου,
jTfpl TiVof ό προφήτης Ae'yfi toCto; of whom, I )jray thee,
doth the prophet say this ?) ; Acts xxi. 39 ; 2 Co. v. 20 ;
foil, by the inf., Lk. viii. 38 ; ix. 38 (ace. to the reading
(7!ΐβ\'(ψαι Tr '^VII) ; Acts xxvi. 3 (where CI T. Τ Tr VTU
ova. σοϋ after 8(ομαι) ; foil, by ίνα, Lk. ix. 40 (cf. AV. 335
(315) : [B. 2.58 (222)]) ; foil, by τ6 with inf. 2 Co. x. 2
[cf. B. 2:;3 (226), 279 (239); \V. 321, 322 (301 sq.)];
with gen. of pers. and ace. of thing, 2 Co. viii. 4 (G L Τ
Tr WII ; for Rec. .adds 8ίξασθαι ^fidt without warrant),
[cf. B. 164 (143) : W. VJs (18ii)]. b. spec, of requests
addressed to God : absol. to prni/, make supplication : Acts
iv. 31 ; τοΰ θ(οϋ. Acts χ. 2; foil, by el Spa, Acts viii. 22
[B. 256 (220) ; W. 300 (282)] ; τοΟ κυρίου, 5ηωί etc. Mt.
ix. 38 ; Lk. x. 2 ; without the gen. ieoC, — foil, by d ττωι,
Ro. i. 10 [cf. W. and B. 11. cc] : by Tra. Lk. xxi. 36 ; xxii.
32; by the telic els to. 1 Th. iii. 10 [cf. B. 265 (228)];
vnkp τίνος ττρίις τον κί'ρίον. όπως. Acts viii. 24. [Syn. see
αΐτίω άώΛ 6ίησις. CoMP. : προσ-δίομαι.']*
δί'ον, -ofTos, τό, (ptcp. of Se'i, i). v.), fr. [Soph, and] Hdt.
down, titat of wliick there is need, uihich is requisite, due,
proper : Seov earl there is need, 1 Pet. i. 6 [T Tr txt. WH
cm. 'J'r mrg. br. c.] ; foil, by ace. with inf. Acts xLx. 36 ;
τα μη SeovTa that are not proper, 1 Tim. v. 13.*
Si'os. -ους, TO, (δίΐ'δω), [fr. Horn, down], /en;-, awe : μeτά
ev'>^aβ(ίaς καΐ δίους, Ileb. xii. 2S L Τ Tr WH.*
[Sv\. δ eoi {'ij>/ireliension).tpo βοί { fi^ar): Ammoninss.v.
δ. s.avs Sfos καϊ φόβοε 5ια.ψίρ€ΐ• Seos μ\ν yap etTTt ττολυχρό-
vios κακόν υπόνοια, ψό β os 5e η παραυτίκα τττόησίί. Plato
(Laches p. 198 b.) : Seos yap f tVoi προσδοκίαν μϊΚΧηντο^ κακόν.
Cf. StaUbaum on Plato's I'rotag. p. 167 ; Sclimii.lt eh. 139 ;
and see s. v. δειλία.]
Δ^ρβαϊο;, -ου, ό, of Derbe, a native ofDerbe : Acts xx. 4.*
Δί'ρβη, -ης, ή, Derbe, a city of Lycaonia, on the confines
of Isauria, [on its supposed site see Leicin, St. Paul, i.
ISl sq. ; B.D. s. v. ; cf. Conyb. and Hows. St. Paul, Index
8. v.] : Acts xiv. 6, 20: xvi. 1.*
ε^'ρμα, -Tos, TO, (fr. 8epw or διίρω, as κίρμα fr. xeipa), a
skin, hide, leather: Ileb. .\i. 37. (Horn, et s<iq.) *
Scp^aTivos, -I), -ox, (δ/ρμα), jnade of skin, leathern (ΥηΙζ.
pelliceu.i): Mt. iii. 4: Mk. i. 6; ef. 2 K. i. 8. (Horn.,
Hdt., Plat., Strab., al.) *
8<ρω; 1 aor. ίδημα: 2 fut. pass, δαρήσομαι: 1. to
llnij, skin: Hom. II. 1,459: 23, 1G7, etc. 2. to beat,
thrash, smite, (cf. (ierm. durchgerhen, [low Eng. hide']'), so
sometimes in prof. auth. fr. Arstph. ran. 619 [cf. vesp.
9
485] down : τινά, Mt. xxi. 35 ; ^Mk. xii. 3, 5 ; Lk. xx. ID
sq. ; xxii. 63; Jn. xviii. 23; Acts v. 40; xvi. 37; xxii.
19; fit πρόσωπον Sepeiv τινά, 2 Co. xi. 20; aepa Sipeiv
(see άήρ), 1 Co. ix. 26: Pass.: Mk. xiii. 9; Lk. xii. 4 7
{Sapi/oeTai ποΧΚάς. sc. πλι /yus, will be beaten with many
strijjes) ; 48, (oXiyas, cf. Xen. an. 5, 8, 12 naleiv ολίγας.
Soph. El. 1415 naifiv &ιπ\ην, Arstph. nub. 968 (972)
TinrreaBai ποΚΚάς, Plat. legg. 8 p. 845 a. μαστιγοϋσβαι
πΧηγάς; cf. [W. 589 (548)]; B. [82 (72)]: § 1.•34, 6).'
ε€<Γμ<νω ; [imjif. pass. 3 pers. sing. eSeσμeϋeτo (Lk.
viii. 29 Τ Tr WH)] ; ^5eσμάς) ; a. lo put in chains:
Lk. viii. 29 Τ Tr WH : Acts xxii. 4 ; (.Sept. Judg. xvi. 11 ;
Eur. Bacch. 616; Xen. Hier. 6, 14; Plat. legg. 7 p.
80S d.). b. to bind up, bind together: φορτία, Mt. xxiii.
4 ; (αράγματα. Gen. xxxviL 7 ; Judith viii. 3. [lies. opp.
4 79, al.jj.•
8(σ-μί'ω, -ώ : [impf. pass. 3 pers. sing, eδeσμetτo] ; to bind,
lie: Lk. viii.29 R(; L; see δeσμeϋω. ([Aristot. de plant.
1, 2 p. 81 7^ 21 ; al.]; Heliod. 8, 9.)*
8<'<Γμ.η, -ης. Or as others write it [e. g. Rec." Τ ; yet cf.
Lob. Paralip. p. 396 ; Chandler § 132] δeσμή, -ης. ψ (δεω),
ο bundle: Mt. xiii. 30. (Ex. xii. 22. Deni., Dion.
Hal., al.) *
8(<Γμιθ5, -ου, ό, bound, in bonds, a captive, a prisoner,
[fr. Soph, down]: Mt. xxvii. 15 sq. ; Mk. xv. 6; Acts
xvi. 25, 27; x.xiii. 18; xxv. 14, 27; xxviii. 16 [R G],
17; Ileb. x. 34 G L Τ Tr txt. WH ; xiii. 3; ό δί'σμιοΓ
τοϋ Χρίστου Ίησαί^, whom Christ, i. e. his truth which I
have preached, has put in bonds (W. 189 (1 78) ; [B. 169
(147)]), Ei)li. iii. 1 ; 2 Tim.i. 8 ; Philem. 1, 9; in the same
sense ό δίσ/ιιοε ev κυρίω. Eph. iv. 1 : [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on
Philem. 13].*
δ€(Γμόΐ, -οϋ. ό. (δί'ω), [fr. Hom. down], η band or bond:
Mk. vii. 3') (ίλΰθη ό 8eσμ6s της γλώσσης αίτοϋ, i. e. the
impediment in his speech was removed) ; Lk. xiii. 16
(λυθηναι άπο του δ{σμοί, of a woman bowed together,
held fast as it were by a bond). The plur. form τά Se-
σμά, the more com. form in Grk. writ. (W. 63 (62) [cf. B.
23 (21) ; see below]), is found in Lk. viii. 29 ; Acts xvi.
26 ; .XX. 23 ; the other form οί δeσμoί in Phil. i. 1 3 (άστί
τους ^eσμoύς μου φaveρoυς ev Χριστώ yeveoBai, so that my
captivity became manifest as made for the cause of Christ ),
['■ δeσμά sunt vinculo quibus quis constringitur, sed Se-
σμός est in carcerem conjectio et captivilas in vinculi< . . .
Utraque forma et ceteri Graeci omnes et Attici utuntur,
sed non promiscue ut inter se permutari possint." Cobet
as r|uoted in liulherford, Xew Phryn. p. 353] ; the gen.
and dat. in Acts xxii. 30 Rec; xxiii. 29; xxvi. 29, 31 ;
Phil. i. 7, 14, 16 (17); Col. iv. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 9 : Philem.
10 : Ileb. x. 34 R Tr mrg. ; xi. 36 : Jude 6 ; ev tois 8(σμοΊς
τοΰ evaγyeλίov. in the captivity into which the preaching
of the gospel has thrown me, Pliilem. 13 [W. 189 (1 78) :
cf. ref. s. V. Seσμtoς, fin.].*
δ€σ-μο-ψύλα^. -κος, ό, (δeσμός and φυλαζ. like θησαυρο-
φύλαξ [cf. W. 100 (95)]), (/ keeper of a prison, a jailer:
Acts xvi. 23, 27, 36. (Joseph, antt. 2. 5, 1 ; Lcian. Tox.
30; [Artem. oneir. 3, 60; al.] ; άρχι8(σμοφνλαξ. Gen
xxxix. 21-23.)•
^(σμωτηριον
130
Ζέχομαι
δ<σ-μ<ι>τήριον, -ου, τό, α prison, Jail : Mt. xi. 2 ; Acts v.
21, 23 ; xvi. 26. (Gen. .\1. 3 ; [Ildt.], Tliuc, Plat., Dem.,
al.)•
8€σ-μύτη$, -ου, ό, one hound, a prisoner: Acts x.wii.
1,42. ((ion. .\.\.\i.\. 20 ; Bar. i. 9 ; Hdt., AeseLyl., Soph.,
Tlnic, siibseq. writ.)*
8ί<ηΓΟτη5, -ου, ό, [fr. Pind. down], a master, lord (as of
δοΰλοί. οΊκ(ται) : 1 Tim. vi. 1, [2] ; 2 Tim. ii. 21 : Tit. ii.
9 ; 1 Pet. ii. IS ; God is thus addressed by one wlio calls
himself liis δοί;λοΓ : Lk. ii. 29, cf. Acts iv. 24, 29, (δίσττό-
τη! των πάντων, Job v. 8 ; Sap. vi. 8) ; Christ is so called,
as one who has bought his servants, 2 Pet. ii. 1 ; rules
over his church, .lude 4 [some take δ. here as designating
God; cf. R. V. mrg.]; and whose prerogative it is to
take vengeance on those who persecute his followers,
Rev. vi. 10.•
(Syn. ί(σπότη5, Kvpios: S. was strictly the correla-
tive of slave, Sov\oi, and licnee denoted absolute ownership
and uncontrolled power ; Kvpios had a wider meaning, appli-
cable to the various ranks and relations of life, and not sug-
gestive either of property or of alisolutism. Ammouius s. v.
ζΐσττότηί says δ. δ των άρ-γυρωνητων • κΰριοί δί καϊ ιτατήρ υίον
καϊ aiiTOs Tis eaurov. So l*hilo, (piis rer. div. heres § 6 ώστβ
Tbv ίΐσπότ-ην κίιριον flvai καΧ ίτί ωσανύ φο0ΐρί)ν κύριον, ου
μόνον τδ KUpos καϊ τό κράτο$ απάντων αν-ημμΐνον, αλλά καϊ
Sfos καϊ φόβον iKavbv ίμττοιησαι. Cf. Trench § xxviii. ; Wool•
eey, in Bib. Sacr. for 1861, p. 599 sq. ; Schmidt ch. 161, 5.)
Sevpo, adv., fr. Horn, down ; 1. of place, a. hither;
to this place, b. in urging and calling, here ! come !
(Sept. esp. for ^S and npS): Mt. xix. 21; Mk.x. 21 ; Lk.
xviii. 22 ; Jn. xi. 43 (δ€ΰρο ΐξα come forth). Acts vii. 34 ;
Rev. xvii. 1 ; xxi. 9; hevpo els γην, ην κτλ. Acts vii. 3
(^dfvpo ft? τον οίκόν σον, 1 Κ. i. 53 ; fls Πτολ^/ζαΓδα, 1 Mace,
xii. 45). 2. of time, hitherto, nou• : άχρι τοΐι δ(ϋρο up to
this time, Ro. i. 13 (μίχρι, 8eiipo, [Plat. legg. 7 p. 811 c.] ;
Atlien. 1, 62 p. 34 c. ; Pint. vit. Num. 4 ; Pomp. 24).*
Siire, adv., used when two or more are addressed [cf.
B. 70 (61)]; perhaps fr. δήιρ' hf [yet see Bttm. Gram.
21te Aufl. § 115 Anm. 8], see δίϋρο, 1 ; 1. fr. Hom.
down, come hither, come here, come : foU. by an impv.,
δίΟτί, κ\ηρονομήσατ(, Mt. .xxv. 34 ; δη)τβ, iScTf, Jit. xxviii.
6 ; Jn. iv. 29 ; SivTf, άριστήσατ(, Jn. .xxi. 12; δίϋτί, σννά-
χθψ -e (Rec. δ• και συνάγισθι), Rev. xi.x. 17. δήιτί οπίσω
μου come after me, he my disciples : Mt. iv. 19 ; JMk. i. 1 7,
(equiv. to "^ΠΧ O^, 2 K. vi. 19) ; 8(ΰτ( els T.yapovs. Mt.
xxii. 4 ; els ΐρημον τόπον. Mk. vi. 31 ; devTe npos pe, Alt.
xi. 28. 2. It gets the force of an interjection, come '
come now ! foil, by a hortat. subj. : heire, άπoκτe^vωμev,
Mt. xxi. 38 ; Mk. xii. 7 and R G in Lk. xx. 14. (Sept.
mostly for o'7, sometimes for W3.) *
SeuTipalos, -ala, -alov, (Sevrepos), [Hdt., Xen., al.], of
or belonging to the second ; of one who comes, or does a
thing, on the second day (cf. TpiToios. TeTapraios, etc.) :
δ(υτ€ραΐοι ηΚθομ(ν, Acts xxviii. 13; cf. W. § 54, 2; [B.
§123, 9].•
8€VT€po--?rps»Tos, -ov, second-first (cf. hexnepiaxaTos sec-
ond-last, last but one) : iv σαββάτω δeυτepoπpώτω in Lk.
vi. 1 seems to be, the .second of the first salihaths after the
feast of the Passover ; cf . Redslob in the Intelligenzblatt
zur Hall. Lit. Zeit. 1847, N. 70 ; Ewald, Jahrbb. d. bibl.
AVissensch. i. p. 72; ^WII. App. ad loc.]. The various
opinions of others are reviewed by Meyer [and McC'lel-
lan] ad loc. and Liibkert in the Stud, und Krit. for 1^35,
p. 664 s(|<j. (Eustrat. in vita Eutycli. n. 95 calls the first
Sunday after Easter &eυτeρoπpώτηv κυμιακήν). [But the
genuineness of the word is questionable. It is wanting in
NBLl, 33, 69 and some other authorities. Hence Trtxt.
λνΐΐ om. the word, L Tr mrg. br. it. Tischendorf, after
expunging it in his 2d ed., restored it in his 7th, subse-
quently put it in brackets, and finally (ed. 8) inserted
it again. It is questioned or discarded, by Mey., Bleek,
All., Weiss (on Mk. p. 101), Iloltz., Ililgenf., Volkm.,
Farrar (Com. ad loc. and Life of Christ i. 435), al. For
the evidence see Tdf.'s note, and for discussions of it
see WH. App. ad loc. ; Scrivener, Intr. p. 515 sq. ; Green,
" Developed Criticism " ad loc] *
Ζ(ντ((>ο%, -epa, -epov, [fr. Ilom. down; Curtius §277],
second : Mt. xxii. 26 ; Mk. xii. 21 ; Lk. xii. 38 ; Jn. iv. 54 ;
Rev. iv. 7, etc. ; the second, the other of two : Alt. xxii.
39 ; Mk. .xii. 31 ; 1 Co. xv. 47 ; Tit. iii. 10 ; 2 Pet. iii. 1 ;
Heb. viii. 7; x. 9; devTepos BavaTos (see ^άι/ατοΓ, 3), Rev.
ii. 11 ; XX. 14 ; xxi. 8 ; SevTepa χάρΐΓ in 2 Co. i. 15 is not
a double benefit, but a second, o()p. to the former which
the Corinthians would have had if Paul in passing
through Achaia into Macedonia had visited them πρότε-
pov, [WII txt. Trmrg. read SevT. χαράν, q. v.]. The
neuter SevTepov is used adverbially in the second place, a
second time [cf. W. § 37, 5 Note 1] : Jn. iii. 4 ; Rev. xix.
3 ; πάλι» is added, as often in Grk. writ, (see avwdev,
fin.): Jn. xxi. 16; also το Seirepov, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Jude
5; fV SevTepov (1 Mace. ix. 1), Mk. xiv. 72; Jn. ix. 24;
Actsxi. 9; Heb. ix. 28;cf. W. § 51, 1 d. ; with πάλιν added,
Mt. xxvi. 42 ; Acts x. 15, (Hom. Od. 3, 161 em SevTepov
alns) ; ev τώ bevrepa at the second time. Acts vii. 1 3 ( when
they had come the second time) : hevTepov in a partition,
then, in the second place : 1 Co. xii. 28.
Sc'xopiai ; [fut. 2 pers. plur. Seξeσθe, Eph. vi. 1 7 Rec.•""] ;
1 aor. fSeξάμηv^. pf. 8ebeypai (Acts viii. 14) ; depon. mid.;
Sept. mostly for npS ; 1. to take with the hand : to
γράμμα [L txt. Τ Tr AVH ra γράμματα^, Lk. xvi. 6 sq. ; τό
ποτήμιον. Lk. xxii. 1 7 ; ίο take hold of take up, r. nepi-
κεφαλαίαν, τ. μάχαιραν, Eph. vi. 1 7 ; το παώίην els Tas
ayKoXas. Lk. ii. 28. 2. to take up, receive, (Germ, auf-
nehmen, annehmen) ; a. u.«ed of a place receiving one:
ov bf'i olpavov δίξασθαί (ovp. is subject). Acts iii. 21, (Plat.
Theaet. ]). 177 a. re\evτησavτas avToi/s . . . ό των κακών
KaeaposTOnosoi&e^eTai). b. with ace. of pers. ίο receive,
grant acces, to, a visitor; not to refuse intercourse or friend-
ship: Lk. Lx. Π RG; Jn. iv. 45; 2 Co. vii. 15; Gal. iv.
14 ; Col. iv. 10 ; to receive to hospitality, ]\It. x. 14, 40 sq. ;
Mk. vi. 11 ; Lk. Lx. 5, 53 ; x. 8, 10 ; Acts xxi. 17 Rec. ;
Heb. xi. 31, (often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down) ; παιδι'ον,
to receive into one's family in order to bring up and edu-
cate, !Mt. xviii. 5; Mk. ix. 37; Lk. ix. 48: to receive els
T. oXkovs. Tas σκηνάε, Lk. ΧΛ'ϊ. 4, 9 ; Se^ai to πvevμά μον, to
thyself in heaven. Acts vii. 59. c. with ace. of the thing
offered in speaking, teaching, instructing; to receive fa-
131
ΒηΧόύ
vorably, give ear to, embrace, make one's oivn, approve,
not to reject: τον Xoyov, Lk. viii. 13; Acts viii. 14; xi.
1 ; xvii. 11 ; 1 Th. i. (J ; ii. 13 ; Jas. i. 21 ; τα τού nvev-
ματος, 1 Co. ii. 14 ; την πίΐράκΚησιν, 2 Co. viii. 1 7 ; την άγάπην
της άληθίίας sc. commeiuled to them, 2 Til. ii. 10; [add
the elliptical constr. in ;\It. xi. 14], (often in Grk. writ.) ;
to receive a benefit offered, not to reject it, 2 Co. viii. 4
Kec. d. to receive i. q. to take upon one's self, sustain,
bear, endure : τινά, his bearing and behavior, 2 Co. xi. IG,
(τη» ahiKiav, Hebr. Nb^J, Gen. 1. 1 7 ; πάν, ο iav ΐπαχθη.
Sir. ii. 4 ; μϋθον χα\ΐπόν, Horn. Od. 20, 271, and often in
Grk. writ.). 3. to receive, get, (Germ, empfangen) :
(πιστολάς. Acts xxii. S ; γράμματα. Acts xxviii. 21 ; την
βασιλ(ίαν τοΰ θιοϋ, to become a partaker of the benefits
of God's kingdom, Mk. x. 15 ; Lk. xviii. 17 ; \oyia ζωντα,
Acts vii. 38 ; ίναγγίΚιον, 2 Co. xi. 4 ; r^i; χάριν τοΰ θίον,
2 Co. vi. 1 ; — i. q. to learn: Phil. iv. 18 [(?) see the
Comm. ad loc.].*
[Syk. δέχομαι, λαμβάνω: The earlier classic nse
of these verbs sustains in the main the distinction laid down
in the glossaries (e. g. Amraonius s. v. λαβΐΐν: λαβΐΐν μίν
έστι, Th κίίμΐνάν τι ανΐΚίσθαι • δΐξασθαι Se, τίι 5ώόμ€νον 4κ
Xeipis), and the suggestion of a self-prompted taking still
adlieres to λ. in many connexions (ef. λαβιΊν τίνα γυναΊκα,
apxhv \αβ(7ν} in distinction from a receiving of what is
offered ; in use, however, the words overlap and distinctions
disappear ; yet the suggestion of a w e 1 c ο m i η g or an a p-
propriating reception generally cleaves to δ. See Schmidt
eh. 107, who treats of the comp. of 8. in detail. Comp. : ava-,
Ο7Γ0-, δια-, €(V-, €K-, άτΓ-εκ-, eV-, dm-, irapa-, wpotr-, ύτΓο-δ€χομαι.\
Sc'ti) : [fut. 8ησω1 ; 1 aor. ίδησ-α ; pf . ptcp. SeSexas (Acts
xxii. 29) ; Pass., pf. 8ί8(μαι ; 1 aor. inf. Sedr/vai (Acts xxi.
83) ; Sept. chiefly for "tpx ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to hind, tie,
fasten ; 1. prop. : τΐ, fls δ€σμάς, ilt. xiii. 30 [Tr WII
br. G prob. om. ds. cf. B. 150 (131 ) ; W. 225 (211)]; οθόνη
Τΐσσαρσιν άρχα'ις dfdep. a sheet bound by the four cor-
ners (to the sky). Acts x. 11 (G L Τ Tr WII om. SfSf^.
και) ; an animal, to prevent it from straying about, ovos
8(^(μ£νη, πώλοΓ δ(8(μίνος, Mt. xxi. 2 ; Mk. xi. 2 ; Lk. xix.
30 ; with προς τ. θνραν added, ^Ik. xi. 4 ; with ace. of
pers. to bind, to fasten with chains, to throw into chains :
αγγέλους, Rev. ix. 14 ; a madman, wi8ais και άλύσ^σι, Mk.
τ. 3 sq. ; captives, Mt. [xii. 29] ; xiv. 3 ; xxii. 13 ; xxvii.
2; Mk. [iii. 27]; vi. 17; xv. 1 ; Jn. xviii. 12 ; Acts ix. 14;
xxi. 1 1 ; xxii. 29 ; Rev. xx. 2 ; Pass., ^Ik. xv. 7 ; ,In. xviii.
24 ; Acts ix. 2, 21 (in the last two pass. 8f8epfvov tiyeiv
τινά) ; Acts -xxi. 13 ; xxii. 5 ; xxiv. 27 ; Col. iv. 3 ; αΚύσίσι,
Acts xii. 6 ; xxi. 33 ; ό λό -yor τοΰ utoi) ου 8(8(ται, fig. for
these bonds of mine in no Avay hinder its course, i. e.
the preaching, extension, and efficacy of the gospel, 2
Tim. ii. 9 ; the bodies of the dead, which ivere wont to
be bound with bandages and linen cloths : ό τ^θνηκως
8(8(μίνος τους πόδα? κ- τας χ^ρας κΐΐρίαις, bound hand and
foot with grave-cloths, Jn. xi. 44 ; το σώμα υθονίοις (Tdf.
2, 7 tV οίον.), to swathe in linen cloths, Jn. xix. 40. 2.
metajih. a. Satan is said 8ησαι a woman bent together,
i. e. by means of a demon, as his messenger, taking pos-
session of the woman and preventing her from standino•
upright, Lk. xiii. 16 cf. 11. b. to bind, i. e. piU under
obligation, sc. of law, duty, etc. : 8ί8ίμίνοί τω πνήμαη,
bound or constrained in my spirit, i. e. compelled by my
convictions, Acts xx. 22 (so not infreq. in Grk. auth.
as Plat. rep. 8 p. 567 d. avayK-rj 8(8(ται η ττροστάττΐΐ αύ-
τώ) ; witli dat. of pers. 8(8(σθαι τινί to he hound to one :
άνδρί, of a wife, Ro. vii. 2 ; yvvaiKi, of a husband, 1 Co.
vii. 27; SefitTut absol., opp. to {Xevdipa tori, ibid. 39;
(Acldll. Tat. 1, 11 p. 41 αλλ^ δί8(μαι παρθίνω, Jambl.
vit. Pyth. 11, 56 την μ€ν ayapov, . . . την δί πμό? άνδρα δ^-
διμίνην). C. by a Chald. and rabbin, idiom (equiv. to
IDX) to forbid, prohibit, declare to be illicit: Mt. xvi.
19; xviii. 18. [Comp.: κατά-, nept-, συν-, νπο-δ(ω.'\*
δη, (shortened fr. ^δι; [al. al.]), a particle which, the
Epic plirases δ^ totc, δ^ yap excepted, is never placed
at the beginning of a sentence, but is joined to some pre-
ceding word, and indicates that " what it introduces can
be taken as something settled, laid down in deed and in
truth " (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 392) : now therefore,
then, verily, in truth, (Lat. jam, igitur, sane, etc. — al-
though neither Lat., Gerin., [nor Eng.] has a word pre-
cisely equiv. to δή). 1. added to relative pronouns :
Of δή tvho is such a one as, iclio preeminently, who then,
Mt. xiii. 23. 2. joined to imperatives and hortatory
subjunctives it signifies that the thing enjoined must be
done forthwith, at once [cf. W. § 43, 3 a.], so that it may
be evident that it is being done (cf. Passow i. p. 6 12'),
where the Lat. says agcdum,jam. Germ, doch, nwr, [Eng.
now, only, 6ui] : Lk. ii. 15 ; Acts [vi. 3 L WH mrg. br.] ;
xiii. 2; xv. 36 ; 1 Co. vi. 20, (Sir. xliv. 1). 3. surely,
certainly : 2 Co. xii. 1 R G.*
δηλανγώϊ, (fr. δήλοί and αυγή), radiantly, in full light,
clearly: Mk. viii. 25 Τ WII mrg. with codd. N*CLa for
Rec. τηΧανγώς. Ilesych. says δηλαι^ώς ■ ayav φανςρώς ',
add δηΧαυγίσι τ(κμηρίοις, Democrit. in Fnhricius, ISibliolh.
Gr. iv. p. 333. With the exception of this word [δι;λο-
τΓοίί'ω, (Phit. Pericl. 33, 8 ; al.)] and the very rare δι;λο-
φανής. δήλος is not found in composition.*
δήλο9, -η, -ov, [fr. Ilom. down], clear, evident, manifest :
Mt. xxvi. 73 ; fiijXov sc. ίστιν it is manifest, evident, foil,
by oTi (4 Mace. ii. 7 ; Xen. an. 1,3, 9; al.) : 1 Co. xv. 27
[here some would take the words adverbially and paren-
thetically i. e. δ;;λονότι manifestly cf. W. § 64, 2 a.] ; Gal.
iii. 11; 1 Tim. vi. 7 (hereLTTrWII om. δ^λον).*
[Svy. δηλοϊ, φανΐ pos: S. eridejit, what is known and un-
derstood, (p. mniiifesl, as opp. to what is concealed or invisible ;
δ. points rather to inner perception, φ. to outward appear-
ance. Cf. Schmidt ch. 129.]
δηλόω, -ώ ; [inipf. (δήλουν; fut. δηλώσωΐ; 1 aor. ϊ8ή•
λωσα; Pass., [impf. 3 pers. sing, ίδηλοντο (1 Pet. i. 11
WII mrg.)]; 1 aor. (δηλύθην: (δήλος); Sept. for ;yiin
and sometimes for ΓΙ^ΙΠ ; in Grk. auth. fr. [Aeschyl. and]
Hdt. down; to make manifest: τΐ, 1 Co. iii. 13; /o make
known by relating, to declare : τι. Col. i. 8 ; Ttvi nfpl tlvos,
Sti, 1 Co. i. 1 1 ; to give one to understand, to indicate,
signify: τί, Heb. xii. 27; 2 Pet. i. 14; foil, by ace. with
inf. Heb. ix. 8 ; Λ τι, point unto, 1 Pet. i. 11.*
[Syx. Β-ηΚόω, e μφανί ζω : ίμφΛοηΐΆηϋθ^ί to the sight,
make visilile : δ to render evident to the m i η d. of such dis-
closures as exhibit character or suggest inferences ; hence
Δήμα.';
132
δια
eep. of prophetical, typical, or other supernatural diedosDres.
t"f. Scluiii.it ch. 129 § 6; Bleei; on Ileli. ix. 8.]
Δημά;, ό, Dennis, (prop, name, coiitracliMl apparently
ft•. Λημήτμιοί, ef. \V. 1U3 (117) ; [on its (ieclensioii, of. 15.
'JO (I8)J),acoiiii)aiiioii of Paul, Λνΐιο Jeserted the ajios-
tle when he was a jirisoner at Uouie anJ returned to
Thessalonica : Col. iv. 14; Philem. 24; 2 Tim. iv. 10.•
&ημηγορ€(ι*, -ώ : [inipf. ί^ημηγήμονν'] ; (to be a δημηγορος,
fr. δήμος ami dyopf ύω Ιο liaraiiL;iK• the people) ; la iii/ilrc.sx
it jiiiliiic (isscmhii/, make a uprech to t/ie peiijile : ΐδημτιγόρα
npus αυτούς [Λ. V. 7Hiiile an oriitlon^, Aets xii. 21. (.Vr-
stph., Xen., Plat., Dem., al. Prov. xx.\. 31 (xxiv. ISC);
4 .\huc. V. 1.5.)•
Δημήτριο;, -ου, ό, Di'metr'lus ; 1. a silversniitli of
Epliesti.s a heathen: Acts xL\. 24, 38. 2. a certain
Christian: 3 Jn. 12.•
εημιουρ-γόΐ, -oD, ό. (δήμιος |)ul)lie, bclonpng to tlie jieo-
pU', ami ΙίΙ'Γίί; cf. Itpovpyos, ά^πίλ«υ/)γύϊ, etc.), often in
(jrk. writ. fr. lloni. do\vn ; a. prop, a workman for ilie
pulilic. b. univ. ///« author of any work, an artisan,
fravicr, hulUltr: τίχνίτης κ. δημιουργός, IIcl)..\i. 10; (Χΐ'π.
mem. 1,4, 7 [cf. 9] σοφοϋ rii/oy δημιουργού τίχνημα. God
is called 6 του ουρανού δημιουργός in Plat. rep. 7 ]>. 5;.i0 a. ;
ό δημ. των οΧων ill Joseph, aiitt. 1, 7, 1, and often in eccl.
writ, from Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 11; 2G, 1 ; 33, 2 on;
[cf. Pliilo, de mut. nom. § 4 ; de opif. mund. ed. Jliiller
p. 133; Piper, Einl. in monument. Theol. §20; Sup/i.
Lex. .s. V.]. In the Scriptures, besides, only in 2 Mace.
iv. 1 κακών δημ.). [Cf. Trench § cv.] *
δήμος, -ου, ό, tlie people, the mass of (he people ussemlihrl
ill II pulilic place: Acts xii. 22; .\ix. 3.'!; ayfii/ [11(11,
(ΐσ('\θ(ΐν €ΐςτον δήμον: Acts xvii. 5 [fj Τ Tr λ\ II προαγ.];
xix. 30. [From Horn, down.]"
[ Syn. ίημο!, Kaos: in clas.sic Grk. $ήμο! denotes the peo-
ple a.s or^'aiiizcd into a body politic, \aos the unorganized
people at larfje. But in biblical Grk. \aii is u.sed esp. of the
chosen people of God ; Βημο: on the other hand (found only
in Acts) denotes the people of a heathen city. Cf. Trench
§ xcviii,; Schmidt ch. 199.]
&ημόσ-ι.ος, -α, -ov, esp. fre(|. in Attic; belonijinrj to the
people or stale, puldic (ojip. to ίδιος) : Acts v. 18 ; in dat.
fem. δημοσία used adverbially (opp. to ίδια) [cf. W. 591
(549) note], puhlicli/, in public places, in view of all : Acts
xvi. 37; xviii. 28; δημ. κα'ι κατ οίκους, Acts χχ. 20; (2
Mace. vi. 10 ; 3 Mace. ii. 27 ; in Grk. writ, also hi/ public
authoriti/, al the public expense).'
,8ηνάριον, -ου, τό, [Pint., Epiet., al.], a Lat. word, a de-
narius, a silver coin, oristinally consisting of ten [whence
its name], afterwards [fr. b. c. 217 on] of sixteen asses;
about [3.89S orrams, i. c. Si pence or 1C| cents; rapidly
debased fr. Nero on ; cf. BB.DD. s. r. Denarius] : Jit.
-xviii. 28; XX. 2, 9, 13; .x.xii. 19; Jlk. vi. 37; xii. 15; .xiv.
5 ; Lk. vii. 41 ; x. 35 ; xx. 24 ; .In. vi. 7 ; .xii. 5 ; Rev. vi.
6 [ef. W. 587 (540) ; B. 1G4 (143)] ; το άνα δηνάριον sc.
3» the pay of a denarius apiece jiromised to each work-
man, Mt. XX. 10 Τ Tr [txt., Trmrg. WII br. τό].*
δή -iroTe (fr. δή and ποτί), adv., now at loir/th (Jam
aliquanilo) ; at an;/ lime ; at last, etc., /«.</ exarllij ; [hence
it generalizes a relative, like the Lat. cumi/ue ; see Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 373]: ω δήποτί νοσήματι, with whatsoever
disease, .In. v. 4 [II G, but L οίωδ^ττοτοΰΐ'].*
δή-ΐΓου [L Wll δή που; cf. Lipsius, Gram. Unter.such. p.
1 23 sq.], adv., (f r. δή and πού), jirop. now in some way,
whatever that way i.i ; it is used when something is aflirmed
in a slightly ironical manner, as if with an alTectation of
unL-crtainty, perhaps, doubtless, verily : ού δήπου not .surely
(Germ, doch nicht etwa), hardly I trow ; (cf. Host in
Passow i. p. 013' ; A7o/cad Devar. ii. 2 p. 427 sip). Once
in Scripture: Ileb. ii. 111.•
[Δία, see ZnJr.]
8ιά, ["written δι' before a vowel, exc. in prop, names
and 2 Co. v. 7; Ro. viii. 10" Tdf. Proleg. p. 94], akin
to eitand Lat. dis in composition, prop, denoting a divi.s-
ion into two or more parts; a in-e|)osition taking the
gen. and the ace. In its use the bibl. writ, differ in no
respect fr. the Grk. ; cf. W. 377 (353) scpp ; 398 (372) sip
A. with the (Jenitive: throuijh; I. of Place;
1. prop, after verbs <lcnoting an extension, or a motion,
or an act, that occurs through any jilace : δι άλλης όδοΰ
άναχωρίΐν, Mt. ii. 12; δι ανύδρων τόττων,^Ιί. χϋ. 43; διά
τής Σαμαρίίας, .In. iv. 4 ; δια τής θύρας, Jn. χ. 1 sq. ; add,
Mt. xix. 24; Mk. ii. 23; x. 25; xi. 16; Lk.iv. 30; v. 19;
xviii. 25; 2 Co. -xi. 33; Ileb. ix. 11 sq. ; xi. 29, etc.; δι'
υμών, through your city, Ro. .\v. 28 ; [on δια πάντων,
Acts ix. 32, see πάς, II. 1] ; ό δια πάντων, diffusing his
saving influence through .all, Eph. iv. 6 ; σώζ(σθαι δια
πυρός, 1 Co. iii. I.j; διιισώ^. δι' ύδατος, 1 Pet. iii. 20 (Εν.
Xirod. c. 9 p. 5G8 sq. ed. Tliilo [p. 228 cd. Tdf.] δια
θαλάσσης ώς δια ζηράς) ; βλΐπ€ΐν δι ΐσόπτρου, Ι Co. χ iii.
1 2 [cf. W. 3S0 (350)]. Add the adverbial phrase δι'
όλου from top to bottom, throughout, Jn. xix. 23 (met-
ajih. i« every way, 1 Mace. vi. 18). From this use of
the preposition has come 2. its tropical use of a
state or condition in which (prop, passing through
which as through a space) one does or suffers somiv
thing, where we, with a different conception, employ
with, in, etc. (Germ, bci, untcr, mit) : ό δια γράμματος κ.
πΐριτομής παραβάτης νόμου, Ro. ii. 27 [\\ . 380 (:i5j)] ; οί
πιστίΰοντις δι άκρο^υστιας who believe though uncirciim-
eised (see άκροβνστΊα, a.), Ro. iv. 11; δια προσκόμματος
(σθί(ΐν, with offence, or so as to be an offence [cf. λ\'. ;i80
(3SC), and see πρόσκομμα^ Ro. xiv. 20 ; δια πίστιως π(ρι-
πατί'ιν, ού δια (ίδους (sec (ΐδο5, 1), 2 Co. ν. 7; τα δώ
[Lclim.mrg. (cf. Trmrg.) τα ίδια (.«ee Mey. .ad loc.)] τού
σώματος, done in the body (i. e. while we were clothed
with our earthly body [al. take διά here instriimentally ;
see III. 2 below]), 2 Co. v. 10; δια πολλών δακρύων, 2 ('ο.
ii. 4 ; δια δόξης, clothed with glory, 2 Co. iii. 1 1 ; ϊρχισβαι,
(ΐσίρχ. διά τίνος tcith a thing, Ileb. ix. 12; 1 Jn. v. il, [but
cf. W. 380 (355)]; δι' υπομονής, Ro. viii. 25, (διά πίνθους
τό γήρας διάγ»!', Xen. Cyr. 4, 6. G : cf. Matthiae ii.
p. 13.03).
II. of Time [cf. λΥ. 380 (35G) ; Ellic. or Mey. on
G.al. ii. 1; Fritzsche as below]; 1. of continued
time; hence a. of the time throuf/hout (durinrj) ivhieli
anything is done: Mt. xxvi. Gl ; Mk. .xiv. 58; δι' όλης
(τής R G) νυκτός, Lk. v. 5 ; δια τταντϋί τοΟ ζήν, Ileb. ii. 15 ;
133
δ{ά
tm TiavTOt [so L WH Tr (exc. Mk. v. 5 ; Lk. xxiv. 53)],
or written together biairainos [so G Τ (exc. in Mt.) ; cf.
W. 46 (45) ; Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 125], continualbj,
always: Mt. xviii. 10; Mk. v. 5; Lk. xxiv. 53; Acts ii.
25 (fr. Ps. XV. (xvi.) 8) ; x. 2; xxiv. 16 ; Ro. xi. 10 (fr.
Ps. Ixviii. (Lxix.) 24) ; 2 Th. iii. 16 ; Heb. Lx. 6 ; xiii. 15,
(often in Grk. writ.), b. of the time wilhiii which a
tiling is done : δ(ά την νυκτός (L Τ Tr Wll δια νυκτύς), by
night, Acts V. 19; xvi. i) ; xvii. 10; xxiii. 31, (Pahieph.
I, 10) ; δι' ήμ(ρωι/ Τ(σσαράκοντα, repeatedly within the
space of forty days. Acts i. 3 ; — (denying this use of the
prep., C. F. A. Frhzsche in Fritzschiorum Opuscc. p.
164 sq. would refer these instances to the use noted
under a. [see AVin., EUic, Mey. u. s.]). 2. of time
elapsed, and which has, so to say, been passed
through: Gal. ii. 1 [cf. W. 380 (35G)]; δι' ημιρων,
(some) days having intervened, after (some) days, Alk. ii.
1 ; δι' (τών nXeiovwv, Acts xxiv. 1 7 ; exx. fr. Grk. auth. in
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 50 ; [W. 380 (356) ; L. and S. s. v. A.
II. 2; Soph. Lex. s. v. 2; Field, Otium Xorv. iii. p. 14].
m. of the Means or Instrument by which any-
thing is effected ; because what is done by means of a
person or thing seems to pass as it were through the
same [cf. W. 378 (354)]. 1. of one who is the author
of the action as well as its instrument, or of the effi-
cient cause : δι' αύτοΰ (i. e. τοΰ θίον) τα ηάντα sc. ftrrtv
or iytvfTo, Ro. xi. 30 ; also δι' οί, Ileb. ii. 10 ; δι' ου ί'κλή-
θητί, 1 Co. i. 9 ; add [Gal. iv. 7 L Τ Tr WII, see below];
Ileb. vii. 21 (η ιατρική πάσα δια τοϋ θίοΰ τούτον, i. e. Aes-
cula])ius, κυβίρυάται. Plat. symp. p. 186 e. : cf. Fritzsche
on Rom. vol. i. p. 15, [and for exx. Soph. Lex. s. v. 1]) ; of
him to whom that is due which any one has or has done ;
hence i. q. hy the fault of any one : δι' ου το σκάνδαλο»
fp\fTai, Mt. xviii. 7 ; δι' (vq<; άνθρ. η αμαρτία . . . €ΐ<Γη\θ€,
Ro. V. 12, cf. 16—19; ησθ(Ρίΐ Sia τήί σαρκός, Ro. viii. 3;
hji the merit, aid, favor of any one : ev ζωη βασ iXfvaovai
διό etc. Ro. V. 1 7, cf. 18 sq. ; 1 Co. xv. 21 ; δια τοϋ Χριστοί,
and the like: Ro. v. 1 sq. 11 ; Acts x. 4'i ; Gal. iv. 7
[Rec, but see above] ; δοξίίζίΐν τ. Beov δια Ί^σοι" Χρίστου,
1 Pet. iv. 11, and ci;(apiCTTeii' τω ί*<ώ διά Ίϊ/σ- Χρ. Ro. i.
8 ; vii. 25 (where L Τ Tr WH txt. χάρις τω θ^ω) ; Col. iii.
17, — because the possibility both of glorifying God and
of giving thanks to him is due to the kindness of Christ ;
κηυχάσθαι (v τω Θ(ώ hia Ίϊ/σ. Χρ. Rn. v. 1 1 ; άναπαύ^σθαι
διά τιι/ος, Philcni. 7 ; οι π€7Γιστίυκ()Τ€ς δια της χάριτος. Acts
,ΧΛΊΐι. 2 7 ; 7Γολλ^9 (ιρηνης τυγχάνηντ^ς διά σοϋ . . . &ιά τί^ς
σης προνοίας, Acts .\xi\'. 2(3); ίττΐρνικάν δια του άγαττη-
σαντος ημάς, Ro. \'ΰ\. 37; η^ρισσίΰίΐν διά τίνος, by the
increase which comes from one, Pliil. i. 26 ; 2 Co. i. 5 ;
ix. 12; δια της υμών 8(ήσ€ως, Phil. i. 1 9 ; add, Philem. 22 ;
Ro. i. 1 2 ; 2 Co. i. 4 ; Gal. iv. 23 ; 1 Pet. i. 5. 2. of the
instrument used to accomplish a thing, or of the instru-
mental cause in the stricter sense: — with gen. of
pers. bi/ the .service, the intervention of, any one ; with gen.
of thins, hy means of, with the help of any thiny; a. in
passages where a subject expres.sly mentioned is said to
do or to have done a thing by some person or by some
thing : Mk. xvi. 20 {τοϋ κν^ήον τον λόγοί' βίβαιοΰντος δια
τ. σημ(ίων) : Lk. i. 70 ; Acts i. 16 ; ii. 22 (τ('ρασι κ. σημ(ί-
oiff, οίς (ποίησα δι' αύτον ο βΐός) ; viii. 20 ; χ. 36 ; χν. 23
(γρά\^ταντ€ς διά χ(ΐρος αϋτων) ; χχ. 28 ; x.xi. 1 9 ; xxviii.
25 ; Ro. ii. 16 ; iii. 31 ; vii. 13 ; [viii. 11 Rect*• "' L ed.
min. TWHt.xt.]; xv. 18; xvi. 18; 1 Co. i. 21 [cf. W.
381 (357)]; ii. 10; iv. 15; vi. 14 ; xiv. 9, 19 [RG] ; xv.
57; 2Co. i.4; iv. 14 RG; v. 18, 20; ix. 13 [cf. W. 381
(357)]; X. 9; xii. 1 7 ; Eph.i. 5; ii. 16; Col. i. 20, 22; ii.
8; iTh. iv. 14; 2Th. ii. 14; Tit. iii. 5 ; Ileb. i. 2, 3 [R
G]; ii.l4; vi.l2; vii. 19; ix. 26 ; .\iii. 2, 12, 1."j, 21 ;
Rev. i. 1 ; γή (ξ ύδατος (material cause) κ. δι' ίδατοί avvt-
στώσα τω τοΰ θίοϋ λόγω, 2 Pet. iii. 5 [W. 419 (390) cf.
217(204)]. b. in passages in which the author or prin-
cipal cause is not mentioned, but is easily understood
from the nature of the case, or from the context : Ro. i.
12; 1 Co.xi. 12[cf. W.381 (357)]: Phil. i. 20 ; 1 Th. iii.
7 ; 2 Th. u. 2, 15 ; Heb. xi. 39 [cf. W. u. s., also § 50, 3] ;
-xii. 11, 15; 1 Pet. i. 7; διά πολλών μαρτύρων, by the me-
diation (intervention) of many witnesses, they being
summoned for that purpose [cf. λλ'. 378 (.■)54) ; A. V.
amony'], 2 Tim. ii. 2. AVhere it is e\ ident from the relig-
ious conceptions of the Bible that G od is the author or
first cause : Jn. xi. 4 ; Acts v. 12; Eph. iii. 1 ; iv. 1 6 ;
Col. ii. 19 ; 2 Tim. i. 6 ; Heb. x. 10 ; 2 Pet. iii. G ; σύζι-
σθαι δια τ. πίστ€ως, Eph. ii. 8; σνν(-γΐίρ€σθαι διά τ. ττίστ.
Col. ϋ. 12; Βικαιοϊσβαι διά τ. ττίστ. < αϊ. ϋ. 16, cf. Ro. iii.
30; in the ])lirases διά τοϋ Ίησ. Χριστού, and the like:
Jn. i. 1 7 ; iii. 1 7 ; Acts xiii. 38 : Ro. i. 5 ; v. 9 ; 1 Co. xv.
57 ; I Jn. iv. 9 ; Phil. i. 11 ; διά toC (ΙαγγιΧίου, 1 Co. .xv.
2 ; Eph. iii. 6 ; διά λάγου θ(οϋ, 1 Pet. i. 23, cf. 3 : διο
νόμου, Ro. iii. 27 ; iv. 13 ; δι άποκάΚύψιως Ίησ. Χρ. Gal.
i. 12, cf. 15 sq.; δια τοϋ (άγιου) τίνίύματος, Ro. v. 5 ; 1 Co.
xii. 8 ; Eph. iii. 16; ^Ilστfύtιv διά thos ( see ττιστίϋω,
1 b. y.), Jn. i. 7 ; 1 Co. iii. 5 ; σημΐίαν yeyove δι' αίτων.
Acts iv. 10 ; ό Χόγος δι' άγγίΧων \αΧηθ(ίς. Ileb. ii. 2, cf.
Gal. iii. 19 ; ό νόμος διά Μωϊσίως (δϋβη. Jn. i. 1 7 ; in pas-
sages in which something is said to have been spoken
through the O. T. projihets, or some one of them [cf.
Lyhlft. Fresh Revision etc. p. 121 sc).] : Mt. ii. 5, 17 LT
TrVviI, 23; [iii. 3 L Τ Tr WII] ; iv. 14; viii. 17; xii.
17 ; xxi. 4 ; xxiv. 15 ; xxvii. 9 ; Acts ii. 16 ; or to have
been so written : Lk. xviii. 31 ; with the added mention
of the first cause : νπο τοΰ κυρίου δια τοϋ προφ. Jit. i. 22 ;
ii. 15. cf. Lk. i. 70; Acts i. 16; xxviii. 25; Ro. i. 2; in
passages relating to the Logos : πάντα δι αϋτοϋ (i. e.
throuffh the divine Logos [cf. W. 379 (355)]) iytvfTn or
(κτίσβη : Jn. i. 3 ; 1 Co. viii. G (where he is expressly
di.stiniTuisheil from the first cause: ιξ αύτοϋ [AV. 419
(391)]): Col. i. 10 [W. 1. c.]. cf. Ileb. i. 2, (Philo de
cherub. § 35). The instrumental cause and the princi-
pal are distinsuished in 1 Co. xi. 12 (διά της γυναικός . . .
(κ τοϋ θ(οϋ^ : Gal. i. 1 (ίΐπ' ανθρώπων ... δι' ανθρώπου [cf.
W. 418 (390)]). 3. with the gen. of a thing διά is used
to denote the manner in which a thine is done, or the
formal cause: «wf διη παραβολής, Lk. viii. 4: erne δι
οράματος. Acts xviii. 9 : airnyyiXXdv διά \όγηυ. hy tcord oj
mouth. Acts XV. 27: τω λόγω δι ϊπιστοΧών. 2 Co. χ. 11,
cf. 2 Th. ii. 15 ; η-ίστίΓ (ν(ργουμ€νη δι άγάπ-ης. Gal. v. 6;
bid
134
Sta
κίχάρισται δι' ivayytKlat. (>al. iii. 18; hov\fveiv 8ιά τηί
σγάτπ^ί, (tal. v. \'Λ\ (ττιστίλλει^ δία /:ίρα;^£ωΐ', ΙΚΊ). χίϋ.
2"2; -γράφίΐν δι' ολίγωι/. 1 IVt. ν. 12, (I'liit. Gor•;. |). 449 b.
δια μακρών Xuyovs ττοί^ισθαι [si'i• oXlyos^ ίιπ. ; οι- Η • § 51,
1 b.]); δια χάρτου και fieXncor, 2 .In. 12: δια μίλανο! κ.
κάΚάμου, 3 Jn. 13, (I'liit. Sol. 17, 3). To this head 1
should refer also the use of διό tivos in exhortations etc.,
where one seeks to strcngtlien his exhortation by the
mention of a thin^ or a jierson held .«acred by those
whom he is admonishing (διή eijuiv. to //// an allusion to,
hii rcm'indint] ijou of [cf. W. 381 (357)]) : Ho. xii. 1 ;
XV. 30 ; 1 Co. i. 10 ; 2 Co. x. 1 ; 1 Th. iv. 2 [yet cf. ΛΥ. 379
(355) note] ; 2 Th. iii. 12 II G.
B. with the Accusative [W. 398 (372) sq.]. I. of
Place; through ; often so in the Grk. poets, once in the
N. T. ace. to L Τ Tr WII viz. Lk. xvii. 1 1 δια piaov
2αμαρ(ίαί, for R G Sta μίσον Σαμ. [but see /icVor, 2].
II. of the Ground or Reason on account of which
anything is or is not done ; bi/ reason of, because of
((ierm. aus GrunJ). 1. of the reason for which a
thing is done, or of the efficient reason, wlien for
greater perspicuity it may he rendered hi/ [cf. Kiihner
§ 4:i4 Anm.] ; a. with ace. of the thing : δι' ην, viz.
την τοϋ Biuv ήμίραν (jirop. by reason of which day i. e.
because it will come [cf. W. 400 (373)]), 2 Pet. iii. 12;
8ia T. \όγον (prop, by reason of the word i. e. because
the word has cleansing power), Jn. xv. 3 ; δια το θίλημά
σηυ (^'ulg. propter voluntatem tuani i. e. because thou
didst will it). Rev. iv. 11; add, Rev. xii. 11; xiii. 14,
(^άναβίώσκΐται. dia την τον πατρός φνσίν, Plato, symp. p.
203 e.) ; cf. (jrinim on 2 Mace. iii. 1. b. with ace. of
the person, by whose will, agency, favor, fault, any-
thing is or is done : Bta τον πατίρα ... δι' ίμί (prop, be-
cause the father lives . . . because I live [cf. W. 399
(373)]), Jn. vi. 57; hia το» νποτάξαντα, by the wiU of
him who subjected it, ojjp. to ουχ ίκοΰαα, Ro. viii. 20
[cf. W in. 399 (373) note] ; μη (ΐπηι οτι δια κνριον άπί-
στην. Sir. χν. 1 1 ; so too in the Grk. writ, of every age ;
cf. Kriiger § 68, 23 ; Grimm on 2 Mace. vi. 25. Much
oftener 2. of the reason or cause on account
ο f which anything is or is done, or ought to be done ;
on account of, because of; a. in the phrases δια τούτο
for thix cause ; for this reason ; therefore ; on this account ;
since this is so: Mt. vi. 25; xii. 27, 31; xiii. 13, etc.;
Mk. vi. 14; xi. 24; Lk. xi. 49; xiv. 20; Jn. vi. 65; ix.
23 ; Acts ii. 26 ; Ro. i. 26 ; iv. 16 ; v. 12 ; xiii. 6 ; xv, 9 ;
1 Co. iv. 17; xi. 10, 30; 2 Co. iv. 1 ; Eph. i. 15; v. 17;
vi. 13 ; Col. i. 9 ; 1 Th. ii. 13 ; iii. 5, 7 ; 2 Th. ii. 11 ; 2 Tim.
ii. 10; Ileb. i. 9: ii. 1 ; 1 Jn. iv. S; 3 Jn. 10; Rev. vii.
15; xii. 12; xviii. 8. foil, by ότι, for this cause ... be-
cause, therefore . . . because: Jn. v. 10, 18; viii. 47; x.
17 ; xii. 18, 39 ; 1 Jn. iii. 1 ; cf. Tholuck ed. 7 on Jn. x.
17, [he questions, at least for x. 1 7 and xii. 39, the canon
of Meyer (on xii. 39), Luthardt (on x. 1 7), al., that in this
phrase in Jn. the toCto always looks backwards], in the
opposite order (when the words that precede with ότι are
to be emphasized) : Jn. xv. 19. It indicates the end
and purpose, being foil, either by ίνα, 2 Co. xiii. 10; 1
Tim. i. l(i ; Philem. 15, (in the opp. order, Jn. i. 31) ; or
by όπως, Ileb. ix. 15. δια τί [.so L Tr WII] and written
togetlier διατι [so G Τ ; cf. \V. 45 ; Lijisius, Gram. Unters.
p. 12i;], ιΗιι/ΐ wherefore.' Mt. ix. 11, 14; xiii. 10; xvii. 19;
Mk. ii. 18; Lk. v. 30 ; Jn.vii.45; Acts v. 3 ; Ro. ix. 32 ; 1
Co. vi. 7 ; Rev. xvii. 7. δι ην αΐτίαν, see αίτια, 1 . τι'γ ή αιτία,
δι ην, Acts χ. 21 ; xxiii. 28 ; δια ταϋτην την αιτιαν. Acts
xxviii. 20; διαταΟτα, Eph. v.6,etc. b. used, with the ace.
of any noun, of the mental affection by which one is im-
pelled to some act [Eng./or; cf. λΥ. 399 (372)] : δια φθύ-
νον, because prompted by envy, /'or envy, Mt. xxvii. 18;
Mk. XV. 10; δια ToK φϋ /doKTii/ut, .In. vii. 13 ; xix.;i8; xx.
19 ; Rev. xviii. 10, 15 ; hia την ττοΧΚην άγάηην, Κ\Λ\. ii. 4.
of any other cause on account of Avhich one is said to do
or to have done something, — as in Mt. xiv. 3,9; xv. 3, 6 ;
Jn. iv. 39, 41 sq. ; xii. 11 ; xiv. 11 ; Acts xxviii. 2; Ro.
iii. 25 (δια την πάρισιν των npoyfy• άμαρτημ. because of the
pretermission etc., i. e. becausi' lie liad left the sins un-
|)unislicd); Ro. vi. 19; χ v. 15; 2 Co. ix. 14; Gal. iv. 13
( δι' άαθίνιιαν της σαρκός, on account of an inlirniity of the
fk'sh, i. e. detained .among you by sickness; cf. Wieseler
[or Bp. Lghtf t.] ad loc.) ; — or to suffer or have suffered
something, Mt. xxiv. 9 ; xxvii. 19 ; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25 ; Acts
x.\i. 35 ; 2 Co. iv. 11 ; Col. iii. 6 ; 1 Pet. iii. 14 ; Rev. i. 9 ;
vi. 9; — or to have obtained something, Ileb. ii. 9; v. 14 ; 1
Jn. ii. 1 2 ; — or to be or to become something, Ro. viii. 10;
xi. 28; Eph. iv. 18; Heb. v. 12 [W. 399 (373)]; vii. 18.
of the impeding cause, where by reason of some per-
son or thing something is said to have been impossible :
Mt. xiii. 58; xvii. 20; Alk. ii. 4 ; Lk. v. 19; viii. 19; Acts
xxi. 34 ; Ileb. iii. 19 ; iv. 6. διά with the ace. of a pers.
is often i. q. for the benefit of, [Eng. /or the sake of^ : Mk.
ii. 27 , Jn. xi. 42 ; xii. 30 ; 1 Co. xi. 9 ; Heb. i. 14 ; vi. 7 ;
δια τους e'κ'\fκτoΰς, Mt. xxiv. 22 ; Mk. xiii. 20 ; 2 Tim. ii.
10; δια Χριστόν for Christ's sake, to promote his cause,
1 Co. iv. 10; δι' υμάς, Jn. xii. 30; 2 Co. iv. 15; viii. 9;
Phil. i. 24 ; 1 Th. i. 5. δκί τικα, because of the example
set by one : 2 Co. ii. 10 ; Ro. ii. 24 ; 2 Pet. ii. 2 ; δια τον
Χριστόν for Christ, to become a partner of Christ, Phil,
iii. 7 (cijuiv. to ΐνα Χριστόν κ€ρδήσω, vs. 8). c. διά τό,
bn-ausc that, for that, is placed before the inf., — either
standing alone, as Lk. ix. 7 ; Heb. vii. 23 ; — or having a
subject ace. expressed, as Mt. xxiv. 12 ; Mk. v. 4 ; Lk. ii.
4 ; xix. 1 1 ; Acts iv. 2 ; xii. 20 ; xviii. 2 ; xxvii. 4, 9 ; xxviii.
1 8 ; Phil. i. 7 ; Heb. vii. 24 ; x. 2 ; Jas. iv. 2 ; — or with its
subject ace. evident from the context, as Mt. xiii. 6 ; Mk.
iv. 6 ; Lk. xi. 8 ; xviii. 5 ; xxiii. 8 ; Acts viii. 11 ; xviii. 3.
C. In Composition διά indicates 1. a passing
through space or time, through, (διαβαίνω, δπρχομαι, διυ-
λίζω, etc.) ; hence 2. continuity of time (διαμίνω. δια-
Τ(λί'ω, διαττ^ρί'ω). and completeness of action {διακαθαρίζω,
διαζώνννμι). 3. distribution (διαδίδωμι, διαγγίλλω. δια-
φημίζω). 4. separation (διαλύω, διαιρίω). 5. rival-
ry and endeavor (διαπίνω, διακατίλίγχομαι ; cf. Ilcrm. ad
Vig. p. 854; [AVincr, as below, p. 6]). 6. transitioa
from one state to another (διαλλάσσω, διορθόω). [Cf. Wirt'
er, De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. ; Valckcnaer on Ildt. 5,
18 ; Cattier. Gazophyl. ed. Abresch, Cant. 1810, p. 39 ; ^.
διαβαίνω
135
Βίά'γω
Rieder, Ueb. d. mit mehr als ein. prap. ziisammeng. verba
im X. T. p. 1 7 sq.] No one of the X. T. writers makes
more freq. use of verbs compounded with διό than Luke,
[see the list in Winer, u. s. p. 3 note ; on their constr. W.
§ 52, 4, 8].
Sia -βαίνω : 2 aor. &ιίβην, inf. διαβήναι, ptcp. διαβάι ; as
in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; (Plin. pertranieo) ; to pass
through, cross over ; a. transitively : την θάλασσαν ώί διά
ξηράς, Heb. xi. 29. b. intrans. : προς τίνα, Lk. xvi. 2<j ;
fiV with ace. of place, Acts xvi. 9 ; (for "^^j.', 1 S. xiii. 7).*
δια-βάλλω : 1 aor. pass, δκβλήθην ; 1. prop, to throw
over or across, to send over, (jiiianvoi). 2. veryoften,
fr. Hdt. down, to traduce, calumniate, slander, accuse,
defame (cf. Lat. perstringere. Germ, durckziehen, [διά
as it were from one to another ; see Winer, De verb,
comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 17]), not only of those who bring a
false charge against one {διίβΧητο προς αΐτον αδίκως,
Joseph, antt. 7, 11, 3), but also of those who disseminate
the truth concerning a man, but do so maliciously, insidi-
ously, with hostility [cf. Lucian's Essay de calumn. non
temere credend.], (Dan. iii. 8 Sept.; Dan. vi. 24 Theo-
dot.) ; so δκβΚήθη αΙτω ίος διασκοριπΐζων, Lk. xvi. 1 (with
dat. of pers. to whom the charge is made, also in Hdt. 5,
35, et al. ; τίνα προς τίνα, Hdt. 5, 96, et al. ; foil, by ώί
with ptcp., Xen. Hell. 2, 3, 23 ; Plat. epp. 7 p. 334 a.).
[Syn. see κarηyopeω.~\ *
δια-β«βαιόομ.αι (-οϋμαι) ; mid. to affirm strongly, assert
confidently, [cf. W. 253 (238)]: π^ρί τίνος (Polyb. 12,
11 (12), 6), 1 Tim. i. 7 [cf. WH. App p. 1G7]; Tit. iii.
8. (Dem. p. 220, 4 ; Diod., Dion. Hal., Plut., Ael.) *
εια-βλ£'ΐΓω : fut. διαβλέψω ; 1 aor. δΰβλίψα ; to look
through, penetrate hg vision ; a. to look fixedly, stare
straight before one (Plat. Phaedo p. 86 d.) : δΐί'/3λίψ•ί, of
a blind man recovering sight, ilk. viii. 25 Τ WH Tr txt.
[some refer this to b.]. b. to see clearly : foil, by an inf.
expressing the purpose, Mt. vii. 5 ; Lk. vi. 42. ( Aristot.,
Plut. ) •
διάβολος, -01/, {διαβάΚΧω, q. v.), prone to slander, slander-
ous, accusing falsely, (Arstph., Andoc, Plut., al.) : 1
Tim. iii. 1 1 ; 2 Tim. iii. 3 ; Tit. ii. 3 ; as subst. ό διάβολο?,
α calumniator, false accuser, slanderer, [see κατηγορίω,
fin.], (Xen. Ages. 11, 5 ; [Aristot., al.]) : Sept. E.sth. vii.
4; viii. 1. In the Bible and in eccl. writ. 6 διάβολος
[also διάβ. without the art.; cf. W. 124 (118) ; B. 89
(78)] is applied κατ ΐξοχήν to the one called in Hebr.
juiyn, ό σατανάς (q. v.), viz. Satan, the prince of demons,
the author of evil, persecuting good men (Job i. ; Zech.
iii. 1 sqq.,cf. Rev. xii. 10), estranging mankind from God
and enticing them to sin, and afflicting them with dis-
eases by means of demons who take possession of their
bodies at his bidding ; the malignant enemy of God and
the Messiah : Mt. iv. 1, 5, [8, 11] ; xiii. 39 ; xxv. 41 ; Lk.
iv. 2, [3, 5 R L, 6, 13] ; viii. 12 ; Jn. xiii. 2 ; Acts x. 38 ;
Eph. iv. 27 ; vi. 11 ; 1 Tim. iii. 6 sq. ; 2 Tim. ii. 26; Heb.
ii. 14; Jas. iv. 7 ; 1 Pet. v. 8; Jude 9 ; Rev. ii. 10; xii
9, 12 ; XX. 2, 10; (Sap. ii. 24 ; [cf. Ps. cviii. (cix.) G ; 1 Chr.
xxi. 1]). Men who resemble the devil in mind and will
are said tivai fV τοϋ διαβόλου to be of the devil, prop, to de-
rive their origin from the devil, trop. to depend upon the
devil in thought and action, to be prompted and governed
by him : Jn. viii. 44 ; 1 Jn. iii. 8 ; the same are called
τίκνα την διαβ. children of the devil, 1 Jn. iii. 10 ; vioi
Toil δ. sons of the devil, Acts xiii. 10, cf. Mt. xiii. 38 ; Jn.
vui. 38 ; 1 Jn. iii. 10. The name διάβολος is fig. applied
to a man who, by opposing the cause of God, may be
said to act the part of the devil or to side with him : Jn.
vi. 70, cf. Mt. xvi. 23 ; Mk. viii. 33. [Cf. σατάκ fin.] *
δι-αγγίλλω; 2 aor. pass, διη^γίλην; fr. Find, down; to
carry a message through, announce everywhere, through
places, through assemblies of men, etc. ; to 2>ublish abroad,
declare, [see δ«ι, C. 3] : τι, Lk. ix. 60 ; Acts xxi. 26 {διαγ-
γίΧλων, sc. to all who were in the temple and ivere
knowing to the affair) ; with the addition ev πάση τη γή,
Ro. ix. ] 7 fr. Ex. ix. 16. (Lev. xxv. 9 ; Josh. vi. 10 ; Ps.
ii. 7 ; [Iviii. (hx.) 13] ; Sir. xliii. 2 ; 2 Mace. iii. 34.) •
Sid^^c, see ye, 1.
δια-γ£νομαι: 2aor. eifyfyo^ij»; 1. lo be through, con-
tinue. 2. lo be between, intervene; hence in Grk. writ,
fr. Isaeus (p. 84, 14, 9 [or. de Hagn. hered.] χμόνων διαγι-
νομ€'νων} down, the aor. is used of time, to hare intervened,
elapsed, passed meamchile, [cf. χρόνου μεταξύ διαγαιομίνου
Lys. 93, 6]: ήμερων διαγινομίνων τίνων, Acts xxv. 13 ;
ίκανον χρόνου διαγί fo^eVou, Acts xxvii. 9 ; διαγ(νυμ£νου τοϋ
σαββάτον, Mk. xvi. 1.*
δια-γινώσ-κω ; fut. διαγνώσομαι ; 1. to distinguish (Lat.
dignosco), i. e. to know accurately, ascertain exactly: τί.
Acts -xxiii. 15; (so in Grk. writ. fr. Horn. down). 2.
in a legal sense, to examine, determine, decide, (cf. Cic.
cognosce) : τα Kaff υμάς your case, Acts xxiv. 22 ; (2
Mace. ix. 15 ; Dem. p. 629, 25 ; p. 545, 9 ; al.).*
δια-^ωρ£ζω : 1 aor. δκ-γνώρισα ; to publish abroad, make
known thoroughly : nepi titoe, Lk. ii. 17 RG. Besides,
only in [Philo, quod det. pot. § 26, i. 210, 16 ed. Mang.
and] in Schol. in Bekk. Anecd. p. 787, 15 to discriminate.*
διά-γνωσιβ, -(ως. ή, (see διαγινώσκω) ; 1. α distin-
guishing. 2. in a legal sense (Lat. foi/niiio), exam/nn-
tion, opinion, decision, (Sap. iii. 1 8 ; Plat. legg. 9 p. 865 c.) :
Acts XXV. 21.*
δια-γογγΰζω : impf. δκγόγγυζον ; to murmur (8ιά i.e.
either through a whole crowd, or ' among one another,'
Germ, durch einander [cf. διό, C.]) ; hence it is always
used of many indignantly complaining (see γογγϋζω) :
Lk. XV. 2 ; xL\. 7. (Ex. xvi. 2, 7, 8 ; [Xum. xiv. 2] ; Josh.
ix. 24 (18), etc.; Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 24; Clem. Alex. i.
p. 528 ed. Pott.; Heliod. 7, 2 7, and in some Byzant. writ.)
Cf. TI7/i. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 16 sq.*
δια-γρηΎορί'αι, -ώ : 1 aor. διeypηyόρησa : to watch through,
(Hdian. 3, 4, 8 [4 ed. Bekk.] πάσης της νυκτός . . . δια-
γρηγορησαντ£ς, Xiceph. Greg. Hist. Byz. p. 205 f. and 571
a.) ; lo remain awake : Lk. ix. 32 (for they had overcome
the force of sleep, with which they were weighed down,
βφαρημ. ΐιπνω) \ [al. (e. g. R. Λ^. txt.) lo be fully awake,
cf. Xiceph. u. s. p. 205 f. δόξαν άπ(βαλόμην ωσπιρ οΊ δια-
γρηγορησαντες τά iv το\ς νπνοις oveipara; Win. De Λ'6γΚ
comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 11 sq.].*
δι-άγω ; 1. to lead through, lead across, send across.
ΒιαΒΐχ^ομαι
136
ΒίαθήκΊ)
2. Willi τον βίον. τΰν xpoyov, etc., added or un<lcrst(iod,
ίο jKixx: fSiov. 1 Tim. ii. J (vei)• often in Gik. writ.);
SiifyfiK fK T<w, .'^e. τον βίον Ιο lire [W. ;jit:i (όύΐ »<{■) ; 11.
Ul (12(;)J' ''■'• "'■ ■' t*" φιλοσοφία, Plat. Phaedr. p.
2.J!) d. ; fv ιφήν'ΐ και σχοΧ;/, Pint. Tiinol. 3).*
8ια-{^χο)ΐαι : 1 aor. 5ΐ(δ(ξαμην ; prop. Ιο receive tlirouyh
anollicr anything left or be(|ueatlied by him, lo receive in
succcssian, receive in lurii, succeeil In : την σκηνήν the
tabernaele, Acts vii. 4.'). (τψ άμχήν. τήν βασιλιίαν, etc.,
in P..KI,., 1)1(1(1., Joseph., al.) [Cf. 6,χημ^ι.}'
διάβημα, -Tiis, TO, (διαδί'ω to bind round), (/ i/iadem, i. c.
the blue band marked with while with whieli Persian
kings used to bind on the turban or tiara; the kingly or-
nament for the head : Rev. xii. 3 ; xiii. 1 ; x.ix. 1 2. (Xen.
Cyr. 8, 3, l.i ; Esth. i. 11 ; ii. 17 for in^ ; 1 Mace. i. !).)*
[Syn. $ιάΒ-ημα, ariipavos: στ. like tlie Lat. coroiin is
a crown in tlie sense of a cliaplet, wreath, or «rarland — the
bailee of "victory in the pames, of civic wortli, of military
valor, of nuptial joy, of festal gladness " ; δκίίτιμα is a crown
as tlie badge of royalty, $aai\fias ■γνώρισμα ( Luciau, I'isc. .'io).
Cf. Trencli § xxiii. ; 15|). Lglitft. on Phil. iv. 1 ; Diet, of
Christ. ^Vlitiq. β. v. Coronation p. 464 sq. ; B. D. Am. cd. s. v.
Diadem; but cf. crtpavos, a.j
8ια-δίδ<ι)μι ; fut. διαδιίώσω (Rev. xvii. 13 Rec.) ; 1 aor.
δ«δί»κα ; '2 aor. inipv. βκίδοΓ ; Pass., impf. 3 per.s. sing.
θκδι'δοτο (Acts iv. .•!;■.), for which LTTrWH read Stf-
SiSfTo (see άποδίδωμι) ; 1. Ιο ilistribule, divide amoitf/
several [cf. fim, C. 3] : τι, Lk. xi. 22 ; τι τινι, Lk. xviii. 22
(Lchm. δίίί) ; .In. vi. 11 (Tdf. ίδωκΓχ) ; pass. Acts iv. 3S.
Its meaning is esp. illustrated by Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 7 τον
Κΰρον λα^ό^Γα των κμξών διαδιδιϊΐΌί Toii . . . θίραπ€νταίί
. . . τοωΟτα eVoi'fi, €ως δΐϊδιδου ηάντα α ίλαβί κρία. 2.
Ιο give over, deliver : τι τινι. Rev. .xvii. l.i ; but here G L
TTr ΛνΐΙ have restored hi&uaai (cf. διδωμι, init.).*
διά-δοχ9$, -ov, 0, Tj, (Βιαδιχομαι), siiccedliiii/, a successor :
Acts wiv. 27. (.Sir. xlvi. 1 ; [xlviii. 8]; 2 Mace. xiv. 26 ;
often in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Ildt. 5, 26 down.)*
δια-ΐζωνννω or διαζώννυμι : 1 aor. διίζωσα ; 1 aor. mid.
δΐ€ζωσάμην ; pf. ])ass. |)tep. δtfζωσμtvos ; lo bind or e/iril
alt iirouml (διό; this force of the prep, appears in the
trop. use of the verb in Plut. Brut. 31, .'is δ' ή φληξ ρικΊσα
και διαζώσασα πανταχόθιν την πήλιν SiiXapij/e ττοΧ-
λή) : iiivTUv, .In. xiii. 4 ; Pass, διαζώννυμιά τι /" be qirded :
ω (by attraction foi• ό [yet <•ί. JNIey.]) ηι> δκζωσμίνος, Jn.
xiii. .5 ; Mid. διαζώνννμαί τι Ιο gird one's self with a lliing,
gird a Ihing around one's self: Jn. xxi. 7 ; (Ezek. xxiii.
15 [Alex.], in Grk. writ, occasionally fr. Thue. on).
Cf. Win. Dc verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 13.*
διαθήκη, -i;f, η, (δ^ατίθημι) ; 1. a dispfisilion, nrrange-
menl, of any sort, which one wi.shes to be valid, (Germ.
Verordnung, Willensverjugung): Gal. iii. 1.5, where un-
der the name of a man's ilisposilion is meant specifically a
leslainenl, so far forth as it is a specimen and example of
that dispositiijii [cf. Mey. or P.p. I.ghtft. ad loc.]; esp. Ilie
last disposal which one makes of his earthlv possessions
after his death, a IcslamenI or rvill (so in Grk. writ. fr.
[Arstph.], Plat. legg. 11 p. 922 c. sc[i\. down) : Heb. ix.
16 S(j. 2. ο comparl, covenant (Arstph. av. 440),
very often in the Seiiptures for n"\3 (Vulg. teslamen-
lum). For the word covenant is used to denote the close
relationshi]) which God (entered into, first with Noah
(Gen. vi. 18; ix. !l sipp [cf. Sir. xliv. 18]), then with
Abraham, Isaac and .Jacob and their posterity (Lev.
xxvi. 42 [cf. 2 Alacc. i. 2]), but esp. with Abraham (Gen.
XV. and xvii.), and afterwards through Moses with the
people of Israel (Ex. xxiv. ; Deut. v. 2 ; xxviii. 69 (xxix.
1)). By this last covenant the Israelites are bound to
obey God's will as exjiressed and solemnly promulged in
the Mosaic law ; and he promises them his almighty
protection and blessings of every kind in this world,
but threatens transgres.sors ivith the .severest ])iinisli-
mcnts. Hence in the N. T. we find mention of αϊ πΧάκα
TVS διαθήκη! (η•"ΐ3Π ΠΙΠΙ^, Deut. ix. 9, l.O), the tables oj
the lair, on which the duties of tlie covenant were inscribed
(Ex. XX.) ; of ή κιβωτοί τήί διαθ. (η"ΐ3Π [Ι^Κ, Deut. χ.
8 ; xxxi. 9; Josh. iii. 6, etc.), the ark of the covenant or
laiv, in which those tables were deposited, Ileb. ix. 4 ;
Rev. xi. 19; o{ ή διαθήκη πιριτυμήί tlie covenant of cir-
cumcision, made with .\brahani, whose sign and seal was
circumcision ((!en. ,\\ii. 10 .sijip). Acts vii. 8; of το αίμα
της διαθήκης the blood of the victims, by the shedding and
sprinkling of Λvllich the Mosaic covenant was ratified,
llcb. ix. 20 fr. Ex. xxiv. 8; of αϊ διαβήκαι the covenants,
one made willi Abraham, the other through Moses with
the Israelites, Ro. ix. 4 [L txt. Tr mrg. ή διαθήκη] (Sap.
xviii. 22 ; Sir. xliv. 1 1 ; 2 Mace. viii. 15 ; Ε]), of Barn. !l ;
[cf. W. 177 (166)]); of αϊ διαθήκαι της (ViiyyfXi'af, the
covenants to which the promise of salvaiion through the
Messiah was annexed, Eph. ii. 12 {συνθήκαι αγαθών νπο-
axfo-fwv. Sap. xii. 21); for Christian sahation is the
fulfilment of the divine promises annexed to those cov-
enants, esp. to that made with Abraham: Lk. i. 72s(p:
Acts iii. 25; Ro. xi. 27; Gal. iii. 17 (Avliere διαθήκη is
God's arrangement i. e. the promise made to Abiaham).
As the new and far more excellent bond of friendship
which God in the Messiah's time ivould enter into with
the peojile of Israel is called ΠΠΊΠ Π")3, καινή διαθήκη
(.Ter. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 31), — which divine jiromise Christ
has made good (Ileb. viii. 8-10 ; x. 16), — we find in the
N. T. two distinct covenants spoken of, δυο διαθήκαι (Gal.
iv. 24), viz. the Mosaic and the Christian, with the
former of which {τ;ι πρώττ) διαθήκ;/. ΙΙιΊ). ix. l.j, 18, cf.
viii. 9) the latter is contrasted, as καινή διαθήκη, Mt. xxvi.
28 ; Mk. xiv. 24 (in both pass, in R G L [in Mt. in Tr
also]) ; Lk. xxii. 20 [WIl reject the jiass.] ; 1 Co. xi. 25 ;
2 Co. iii. 6 ; Heb. viii. 8 ; κρύττων διαθήκη, Ileb. vii. 22;
αιώνιο! διαθήκη, Heb. xiii. 20; and Christ is called κρύτ-
Tiivos or καινί;; or vtas διαθήκη: μ(σίτης : Heb. viii. ti ; ix.
l.'i; xii. 24. This new covenant binds men to exercise
faith in Christ, and God promises I hem grace and salva-
tion eternal. 'J'his covenant Christ set up and ratified by
un(lergoin<4 death; hence the phra>cs τό αΓ/χη τήί καινήί
διαθήκηί, τι) αίμα τήί διαθήκης, (sec α'μα sub fin.), [Heb.
χ. 211] : τϊι αίμιί μου της διαθήκης, my blood by the shed-
ding of which the covenant is established, Mt. xxvi. 28
Τ λ\ΊΙ and Mk. xiv. 24 Τ Tr \VH (on two gen. after one
noun if. .Matthiae § 380, Anm. 1 : Kiihner ii. p. 288 sq.;
ίιαίρεσκ
137
διακονία
[Jelf § 543, 1, cf. § 466 ; W. § 30, 3 Note 3 ; Β. 155 (136)]).
By metonymy of the contained for the container ή παλαιά
ίιαθηκη h used in 2 Co. iii. 14 of Ihe sacred bouls of Ike
O. T. because in them the conditions and principles of
the older covenant were recorded. Finally must be
noted the amphiboly or twofold use [cf. Philo de mut.
nom. § G] by which the ivriter to the Hebrews, in i.\. 16
sq., substitutes for the meaning rucenant which διαθήκη
bears elsewhere in the Ep. that of leslamenl (see 1 above),
and likens Christ to a testator, — not only because the
author regards eternal blessedness as an inheritance be-
«jueathed by Christ, but also because he is endeavoring
to show, both that the attainment of eternal salvation is
made possible for the disciples of Christ by his death
(i.\. 15), and that even the Mosaic covenant had been
consecrated by blood (18 sqq.). This, apparently, led
the Latin Λ'ulgate to render διαθήκη where\ er it occurs
in the Bible [i. e. in the 'Sew Test., not always in the
Old ; see B. D. s. v. Covenant, and B. D. Am. ed. s. v.
Testament] by the word leslamentum.'
Si-aCp«ris, -(ω!, ή, {διαιρΐω, q. v.) ; 1. division, dis-
tribution, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. distinction, differ-
ence, (Plat. Soph. p. 267 b. τίνα διαίρ^σιν άγνωσίας τ€ και
γνώσεως βήσομ^ν ; al.) ; in particular, a distinction arisimj
from a different distrihutinn to different persons, [A. Λ^.
dirersili/'] : 1 Co. xii. 4-6, cf. 1 1 διαιμοϋν ιδία ίκάστω καθώς
βον\€ται.*
8ι-αιρ«ω, -ώ ; 2 aor. δκΐλον ; 1. to divide into parts.
Ιο part, to tear, cleave or cut asunder, (Hom. and subseq.
writ. ; Gen. xv. 10 ; 1 K. iii. 25). 2. to distribute : τί
τίΜ (Xen. C>T. 4, 5, 51 ; Hell. 3, 2, 10) : Lk. xv. 12; 1
Co. xii. 1 1 ; (Josh, xviii. 5 ; 1 Chr. xxiii. 6, etc.).*
[8ια-καθαίρω : 1 aor. δκκάθαρα (un-Attic and later form ;
cf. Moeris, ed. Piers, p. 137 ; Loh. ad Phryn. p. 25 ; Veitch
s. v. καθαιρώ), inf. διακαθάραι : to cleanse (throughly cf. διά,
C. 2 i.e.) t/ioriiu//lilii : Lk. iii. 17 Τ WII Lrarg. Tr mrg. :
for lie. διακαθαρίζω. (Fr. Arstph. and Plat, down.)*]
εια-καθορίξω : fut. διακαθαριώ [Β. 37 (32) ; AV. § 13, I c. ;
WH. App p. 163]; to cleanse tliorouf/hli/, (Vulg. per-
mundo) : την αΚωνα, Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 1 7 [T WH etc.
διακαθάραι, q. \.~\. (Not found in prof, auth., who use
διακαθαίρω, as τήν πλω, Alciphr. ep. 3, 26.) *
εια-κατ-Λί'γχομιαι : impf. διaκaτη\fyχ6μηv ; to confute
with riralri/ and e^'ort or in a contest (on this use of the
j)rep. διά in compos, cf. Ilemi. ad Vig. j). KS4 ; [al. give
it here the sense of completeness ; .«ee διά, C. 2]) : with
dat. of pers. [W. § 31, 1 f. ; B. 177 (154)] ; not found exc.
in Acts xviii. 28 [R. V. powerfully confuted'].'
SiaKovc'u, -ω: impf. διηκόνουν (as if the verb were com-
pounded of διά and άκοι/ί'ω, for the rarer and earlier form
ίδιακήνουν, cf. B. 35 (31 ) ; Ph. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. § 86 Anm.
6 ; Kriiger §28, 14. 13): [fut. διακονήσω]; 1 aor. διηκό-
νησα (for the earlier (διακιΊνησα) : Pass., pres. ptcp. δια-
κονονμινο! : 1 aor. inf. διακονηθηναι, ptcp. διακοιτηθύ: '■
(διάκονος, i\. V.) ; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph.], Hdt. down ; to
be a .servant, attendant, domestic; to serve, wait upon : 1.
nniv. : [absol. ο διακόνων, Lk. xxii. 26] ; with dat. of
pen. to minister to one: render ininisterini/ offices to : Jn.
xii. 26 ; Acts xix. 22 ; Philem. 1 3 ; Pass, to be served,
ministered unto (W. § 39, 1 ; [B. 188 (163)]): Mt. \x.
28 ; Mk. X. 45. 2. Like the Lat. ministrare, to wail
at table and oβ'er food and drink to the yuests, [cf. W. 593
(552)] : with dat. of pers., Mt. iv. 1 1 ; viii. 15 ; Mk. i. 13,
31; Lk. iv. 3U ; xii. 37; xvii. 8; absol. ό διακόνων, Lk.
xxii. 27 ; so also of ivomen i)reparing food, Lk. x. 40 : .In.
xii. 2 ; (Menand. ap. Atht-n. 6 c. 46, p. 245 c. ; Anacr.
4, 6 ; al. ; pass, διακονύσθαι υπό τινοι; Diod. 5, 28 ; Pliilo,
vit. contempl. § 9). 3. to minister i. e. supply food and
the necessaries of life : with dat. of pers., Mt. xxv. 44 ;
xxvii. 55 ; Mk. xv. 41 ; διηκόνουν airois eV (Rec. άττό)
των υπαρχόντων aira'is, Lk. viii. 3 ; to relieve one's neces-
sities (e. g. by collecting alms) : Ro. .xv. 25 ; Heb. vi. 10;
τραπίζαις , to jjrovide, take care of, distribute, the things
necessary to sustain life, Acts vi. 2. absol., those are
said dioKovfiv. i. e. to take care of the poor and the sick,
ivho administer the office of deacon (see διάκονος, 2) in
the Christian churches, to serve as deacons : 1 Tim. iii.
10, 13; 1 Pet. iv. 11 [many take this last ex. in a gen-
eral rather than an official sense]. 4. with ace.
of the thing, to minister i. e. attend to, ani/thinr/. that may
serve another's interests : χάρις διακουουμίνη ίφ' ημών, 2
Co. viii. 19 ; [άδμοτήί, ibid. 20] : όσα διηκόνησι, how many
things I owe to his ministration, 2 Tim. i. 18; ΐπιστολή
διακονηθίίσα ίφ' ημών, an epistle written, as it were, by
our serving as amanuenses, 2 Co. iii. 3. with ace. of the
thing and dat. of pers., to minister a Ihinr/ unto one, to
serve one with or b;/ supplying any thing: 1 Pet. i. 12; τϊ
ftr eavTois, i. e. fii άλλ^λονΕ to one another, for mutual
use, 1 Pet. iv. 10.•
SiaKovCa. -at. ή, (διάκονος), [fr. Tluic, Plat, down], ser-
vice, ministering, esp. of those who e.xecute the commands
of others; 1. univ. : 2 Tim. iv. 11 ; Heb. i. 14. 2.
of those who by the command of God proclaim and pro-
mote reliffion among men ; a. of the office of Moses:
ή διακ. τοϋ θανάτου, concisely for the ministration by
which the law is promulgated that threatens and brings
death, 2 Co. iii. 7 ; της κατακρίσιως, the ministration by
wliich condemnation is announced, ibid. 9. b. of the
office of the apostles and its administration: Acts i.
17, 25; XX. 24; xxi. 19; Ro. xi. 13; 2 Co. iv. 1 ; vi. 3:
1 Tim. i. 1 2 ; τοϋ λύγου, Acts vi. 4 ; τοΐι πνίΐματος, the
ministry whose office it is to cause men to obtain and
be governed by the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. iii. 8 ; ttjs δικαιο-
σύνης, bv which men are taught how they may become
righteous with God, ibid. 9 ; της καταΚ'Χα•/ης, the ministry
whose work it is to induce men to embrace the offered
reconciliation with God, 2 Co. v. 18 ; προς την υμών δια-
κονίαν, that by preaching the gospel I might minister
unto vou, 2 Co. xi. 8. c. of the ministration or ser\ ice
of all who, endowed bv' God with powers of mind and
heart peculiarly adapted to this end, endeavor zealously
and laboriously to promote the cause of Christ among
men, as apostles, prophets, evangelists, elders, etc. : 1 Co.
xii. 5 ; Eph. iv. 12 ; 2 Tim. iv. 5. AVhat ministry is re-
ferred to in Col. iv. 17 is not clear. 3. the 7ninistra-
tion of those who render to others the offices of Christian
δ.
ακονος
138
Βιακρίν
affection : 1 Co. xvi. 15 ; Rev. ϋ. 19, esp. of those who
succor need by either collecting or bestowing benefac-
tions [Acts xii. 25] ; the caie of the poor, the supplying
or distributing of charities, (Luther uses Hanilreickunt/) :
Acts vi. 1 ; 2 Co. i.\. 13 ; ή διακονία ή eis rovr aylovt, 2 Co.
viii. 4 ; ix. 1 ; ή διακονία τή( XtiTovpyiat, the ministration
rendered througli this \{ΐτουργία, 2 Co. ix. 12; ηίμπαν
fh SiaKoiilav τινί, to send a thing to one for the relief of
his want [.V. V. to send relief unto'], Acts xi. 2!) {κόμιζαν
χρήματα ττολλα fts ^ίακοιήαν των χηρών. Acta Thoniac § 5G,
]). 23.'! ed. I'dt. ); ή δίακηνία μου ή tts Ίιρουσαλ. "my min-
istration in bringing the money collected by me, a minis-
tration intended for Jerusalem" (Fritzsche), Ro. xv. 31
[liere L Tr mrg. read ij 8ωροφορία . . . e'v etc.]. 4. the
office of deacon in the primitive cliurch (see Siokovos,
2) : Ro. xii. 7. 5. the service of those who prepare
and present food : Lk. x. 40 (as in Xen. oec. 7, 41).*
SiOKovos, -ου, ό, ή, (of unccrt. origin, but by no means,
as was formerly thouglit, compounded of διό and kovls,
so as to mean prop. ' raising dust by hastening ' ; cf.
iyKovfiv \ for α in the prep, δια is short, iu διάκονος long.
littin. Lexil. i. p. 218 sqq. [Eng. trans, p. 231 S(|.] tliinks
it is derived fr. obsol. διάκω i. q. διηκω [allied with διώκω ;
cf. Vanicek p. 363]); one who executes the commands
of another, esp. of a master ; a servant, attendant, tnin-
isler; 1. univ. : of the servant of a king, Mt. xxii.
13 ; with gen. of the pers. served, Mt. xx. 26 ; xxiii. 1 1 ;
Mk. ix. 35; x. 43, (in which pass, it is used fig. of those
who advance others' interests even at the sacrifice of their
own) ; T-^E {'κκλησίας, of one who does what promotes the
welfare and prosperity of the church, Col. i. 25 ; διάκονοι
τοΰ θ(οΰ, those through whom God carries on his admin-
istration on earth, as magistrates, Ro. xiii. 4 ; teachers
of the Christian religion, 1 Co. iii. 5 ; 2 Co. vi. 4 ; 1 Th. iii.
2 RTTr WH txt. Lmrg. ; tlie same are called διάκονοι
(τοΰ) Χρίστου, 2 Co. .\i. 23 ; Col. i. 7 ; 1 Tim. iv. G ; cV κυρίω,
in the cause of the Lord, Col. iv. 7; [E])h. vi. 21] ; 6 διάκ.
μου my follower, Jn. xii. 2G ; toC Σατανά, whom .Satan
uses as a servant, 2 Co. xi. 15; [αμαρτία!, (!al. ii. 17];
διάκ. ■!Τ(ριτομης (abstr. for eoncr.), of Christ, who laijored
for the salvation of the circumcised i. e. the Jews, Ro. xv.
8 ; with gen. of the thing to whicli service is rendered,
i. e. to wliich one is devoted : καινής διαθήκης, 2 Co. iii. C ;
τοΰ fΰaγγe\ίoυ, Eph. iii. 7 ; Col. i. 23 ; δικαιοσύνης, 2 Co.
xi. 15. 2. a deacon, one who, by virtue of the oflice
assigned him by the church, cares for the poor and has
charge of and distributes tlie money collected for their
use, [cf. BB.DD., Diet, of Chnst.Anti(|.. Schaff-IIerzog
s. V. Deacon ; Bp. Li/hlfl. Com. on Phil, dissert, i. § i. ;
Julius Mailer, Dogmatische Alihandhingen, p. 560
sqq.] : Phil. i. 1 ; 1 Tim. iii. 8, 1 2, cf. Acts vi. 3 sqq. ;
ή διάκονος, a deaconess (ministra, Plin. epp. 10, 97), a wo-
man to wlioin the care of either poor or sick women was
entrusted, Ro. xvi. 1 [cf. Diets, as above, s. v. Deaconess ;
Lghtft. as above p. 191 ; B. D. s. v. Phoebe]. 3. a
waiter, one who serves food and drink : Jn. ii. 5, 9, as in
Xen. mem. 1, 5, 2; Hier. 3. 11 (4, 2); Polyb. 31,4, 5;
Lcian. de merced. cond. § 26; Athen. 7, p. 291 a.; 10,
420 e. ; see διακονίω, 2 and -via, 5 ; [also Wetst. on Mt. iv.
[SvN. ίιάκονο s, 5ov\os, θ f ράηων, 6v7jp4Trj s: " δί(£•
Kovos represents the servant in his activity for the w ο r k ; uut
iu Ills relation, either servile, a-s tliat of the δοΟλοι, or more
voluntary, a-s iu the case of the β(ράπων, to a person"
Trencli; [yet cf. e. g. Ho. xiii. 4; 2 Cor. vi. 4 etc.]. iovKos
opp. to 4\fueepos, anil correlate to ίίσττότηί or /tupios, denotes
a liondman, one vvlio sustains a permanent servile relation to
another, θιράπων is the voluntary iierforjuer of services,
wlietlier as a freeman or a slave ; it is a nulilcr, temlorer word
than δοϋλοϊ. ύττ-ηρ. ace. to its etymol. suggests subordi-
nation. Cf. Trench § ix. ; B. D. s. v. Minister ; Mcy. on
Eph. iii. 7 ; Schmidt cU. 164.]
SiaKOcriot, -ai, -a, tiro hundred : Mk. vi. 37 ; Jn. vi. 7, etc.
8ι-ακονιω : fut. διακοι/σομαι ; prop, to hear one throur/h,
hear to the end, hear irith care, hear full;/, [cf. δια, C. 2]
(Xen., Plat., sqq.) : of a judge trying a cause. Acts xxiii.
35 ; so in Deut. i. 16 ; Dio Cass. 36, 53 (36).'
8ια-κρΐνω ; uu\}i. διίκρινον; 1 aor. δκ'κρο'α ; ^lid., [pres.
διακρίνομαι]; iinjif. δκκρινόμην; I aor. διικμίθην (in prof,
auth. in a ])ass. sense, to he separated ; cf. W. § 39, 2 ; [B.
52 (45)]) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Ilom. down ; in Sept. cliiefly
for Uaiy, also for Γ"1ΓΙ etc. 1. to separate, make a dis-
tinction, discriminate, [cf. δια, C. 4] : ονδιν διίκρινι μεταξύ
ημών τ€ κα\ αυτών. Acts .\ν. 9 ; μηδ€ν διακρίναντα, making
no difference, sc. between Jews and Gentiles, Acts xi. 12
L Τ Tr \VH ; like the Lat. distimjuo, used emjihalically :
to distinguisli or separate a person or thing from the rest,
in effect i. q. to prefer, yield to him llie preference or
honor : τινά, 1 Co. iv. 7 [cf. W. 452 (421)] ; το σώμα (τοϋ
κυρίου), 1 Co. xi. 29. 2. to learn by discrimination,
to try, decide: Mt. xvi. 3 [Tbr. WIl reject the pass.]; 1
Co. xiv. 29 ; ίαυτόν, 1 Co. xi. 31 ; to determine, ijire judg-
ment, decide a dispute : 1 Co. vi. 5. Pass, and Mid. to he
parted, to separate one's self from; 1. to icilhilnur from
one, desert him (lluic. 1, 105; 3, 9); of heretics withdraw-
ing from the society of true Chrislians (.Sozimi. 7, 2 []). 705
ed. ^'ales.] cV τούτου o'l μΐν διιικριθίντζς idia ΐκκΧησίαζον) :
Juile 22 ace. to the• (])refcrable) reading of I^TTrtxt.
(\(γχ(Τ€ διακρινομίνους, those who separate Ihemsetccs from
you, i. e. tcho apostatize ; instead of the Rec. tXtfirt bia-
Kpivopevoi, Λvhich is to be rendered, making for yourselres
a selection; cf. Iluther ad loc. ; [others though adopting
the reading preferred above, refer διακρ. to the following
head and transhate it while tliey dispute with you; but
Wl I (see their App.) Tr mrg. follow codd. NB and a few
other author, in rea<ling cXfart διακρινόμενους ace. to
which διακρ. is probably to be referred to signifjcalion 3 :
R. V. txt. •' on some have mercy, who are in douht "]. 2.
to separate one's self in a hostile spirit, to oppose, strive
with, dispute, contend: with dat. of pers. Jude 9, (Polyb.
2,22,11 [cf. W. §31,lg.; B. 177 (154)]); Trpor τιι/α. Acts
xi. 2, (Hdt. 9, 58). 3. in a sense not found in prof,
auth. to he at variance with one's self, hesitate, doubt : Mt.
xxi. 21 ; Ro. xiv. 23 ; Jas. i. G ; ΐντβ καρδία αίτοΰ, Mk. xi.
23 ; (V Ιαυτω [i. e. -rois], Jas. ii. 4 [al. refer this to 1 : do
ye not make distinctions among yourselves] : μηδίν διακρι•
νάμινος, nothing doubting i. e. wholly free from doubt,
ϋιάκρισις
139
οι,αμαρτυρομαι
Jas. i. 6 ; without any hesitation as to whether it be law-
ful or not, Acts x. 20 and ace. to R G in xi. 12; ού 8u-
κρίθη rfi απιστία he did not hesitate through want of faith,
Ro. iv." 20.*
8id-Kpi(ri$, -€ωί, η, (διακμίρω), a distinguishing, discern-
ing. Judging: ττνίνμάτων. 1 Co. xii. 10; καλοΟ rt και κακού,
Heb. V. 14 ; μη els SiaKpiafis διαλογισμών not for the pur-
pose of passing judgment on opinions, as to which one is
to be preferred as the more correct, Ro. xiv. 1 [see δια-
λογισμοί, 1]. (Xcn., Plat., al.)*
δια-κωλΰω: impf. δκκώλυον, (διά in this compound does
not denote effort as is com. said, but separation,
Lat. dis, cf. Germ, verhindern, hat. ρ r ο hibere ; cf. Sia-
K\ficu, to separate by shutting, shut out ; cf . Win. De verb,
comp. etc. Ft. v. p. 17 sij.) ; to hinder, prevent: τιι/ά,
Mt. iii. 14 [on the tense cf. W. § 40, 3 c.; B. 205 (178)].
(From Sojih. and Tluic. down.) *
Sia-Xa\iu : impf. 8if\a\ovv; impf. pass. &ΐ(}ία\ούμην;
to converse together, to talk with, (διά denoting by turns,
or one with another; see διακατ(\ίγχομαι), τι, pass.
[were talked o/], Lk. i. 65 ; irpos άΧΚηΧουί (as Polyb. 23,
9, 6), τί αν ποιησ(ΐαν [-σακν al.], of the conference of men
deliberating, Lk. vi. 11. (Eur. Cycl. 175.) *
δια-λί'γομαι ; impf. δκλιγόμην; [1 aor. 3 pers. sing, δκ-
λίξητο (LTTrWII in Acts xvii. 2; xviii. 19)]; 1 aor.
δΐίλί'χθην: (mid. of διαλίγω, to select, distinguish) ; 1.
to think ilij/'crenl things with one's self, mingle thought with
thought (cf. διαλογίζομαι) ; to ponder, revolve in mind; so
in Horn. 2. as very freq. in Attic, to converse, dis-
course with one, argue, discuss : absol.. Acts [xviii. 4] ;
xix. 8 sq. ; [xx. 9] ; nepl tivos, Acts xxiv. 25 ; τινί, with
one. Acts xvii. 1 7 ; xviii. 1 9 ; xx. 7 ; Heb. xii. 5 ; άπο τών
γμαφΰιν, drawing arguments from the Scriptures, Acts
xvii. 2 ; προς τίνα, Acts xvii. 17 ; xxiv. 12 ; with the idea
of di.ipuliiig jirominont : προς άΧΚήλους, foil, by interrog.
Ti'f, Mk. ix. 34 ; nepi tivos, Jude 9.*
δια-λ^ίιτω : [2 aor. δίΕλιττοκ] ; to interpose a delay, to in-
termit, leave off for a time something already begun : οϋ
bieXme [T WII mrg. διe'λfιπel'] καταφιΚοϋσα (on tlie ptcp.
cf. W. § 45, 4 a.; [B. 300 (257)]), she has not ceased
kissing, has continually kissed, Lk. vii. 45. (Is. v. 14 ;
Jer. xvii. 8 ; often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) *
8ιό-λ£κτθ5,-ου, ή, (διαλί'γω) ; 1. conversation, speech,
discourse, language (Plat., Dem., al.). '2. fr. Polyb.
[cf. Aristot. [jrobl. 10, 38 toC ανθρώπου μία φωνή, άλλα
διάλ(κτοι πολλοί] down, the tongue or language peculiar
to ami peo/ile : Acts i. 1 9 ; ii. 6, 8 ; xxi. 40 ; xxii. 2 ; xxvi.
14. (Polyb. 1, 80, 6 ; 3, 22, 3 ; 40, 6, 3 sq. ; μιθίμμην^ί^ιν
els την Ελλήνων BiaXfKTov, Diod. 1,37; πάσα μ^ν διάλ(κτο5,
ή δ* €λλτ;ΐΊΚ^ ^ιaφepόvτωs ονομάτων πλovτeι, Philo, vit.
Moys. ii. § 7; [cf. Miiller on Joseph, c. Αρ. 1, 22,4 fin.].)*
[δια-λιμπάνω (or -λνμπάνω) : impf. 8ίe\ίμπavov: to in-
termit, cease : κλαίων οΰ διeλίμπavev, Acts viii. 24 WII (re-
jected) mrg.; cf. W. 345 sq. (323 sq.) ; B. 300 (257).
(Tobit X. 7 ; Galen in Hippncr. Epid. 1, 3; cf. Bornem.
on Acts 1. c. ; Veitch s. v. λιμττάΐ'ω.) *]
δι-αλλάσ-ο-ω : 2 aor. pass, διηλλάγην; (see διά, C. 6);
1. to change: τϊ αντί tivos [cf. W. 206 (194)]. 2. to
change the mind of any one, to reconcile (so fr. [Aeschyi.]
Thuc. down) : τινά τινι. Pass, to be reconciled, τινί, to re-
new friendsliip with one: Mt. v. 24; (1 S. xxix. 4; 1
Esdr. iv. 31). See Fritzsche's learned discussion of this
word in his Com. on Rom. vol. i. p. 276 sqq. [in opp. to
Tittmann's view that it implies mutual enmit}• ; see
καταλλάσσω, fin.] ; cf. TFiVi. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. pp.
7, 10; [77i(//iii7.•, BergredeChristi, p. 171 (on ^It. v. 24)].*
δια-λογ£ζομαι ; dep. mid.; impf. δΐ€λογι^όμι;ΐ' ; [1 aor.
διελογισάμτ;!/, Lk. xx. 14 Lchm.] ; (διά as in hiaXeyopai);
to briny together different reasons, to reckon up the reasons,
to reason, revolve in one's mind, deliberate : simply, Lk. 1.
29 ; v. 21 ; iv τη καρΒια. Mk. ii. 6, 8 ; Lk. v. 22 ; with ad-
dition of πιρί TIVOS, Lk. iii. 15 ; iv ίαντώ [or-roir], with-
in himself, etc., Mk. ii. 8 ; Lk. xii. 17 ; iv eavro'is i• q. iv
aK\ήλoιs among themselves, Mt. xvi. 7 sq. ; ττρόί eavrovs
i. q. πμόί άλλ^λουί, one turned towards another, one ivith
another, Mk. ix. 33 Rec. ; xi. 31 LTTrAVII; Lk. xx.
14 ; πpbs aKληλoυs, IMk. viii. 16 ; παρ eavTols [see παρά,
IL c], Mt. xxi. 25 [LTrWHtxt. iv e.] ; οτι, Jn. xi. 50
Rec. ; oTi equiv. to πίρΧ τούτου δτι, Mk. viii. 1 7. (For
3i^n several times in the Psalms; 2 Mace. xii. 43; in
Grk. writ. fr. Plat, and Xen.down.)*
δια-λογισ•μ05, -οΰ, ό, (Βιαλογίζομαι), Sept. for Π3ΠΠ0
and Chald. JVi'"^, in Grk. writ. fr. Plat, down, the thinking
of a man deliberating ivith himself ; hence 1. a thought,
inward reasoning : Lk. ii. 35; v. 22; vi. 8; ix. 46 sq. ;
Ro. xiv. 1 [yet some bring this under 2] ; the reasoning
of those who think themselves to be wise, Ro. i. 21 ; 1
Co. iii. 20 ; an opinion : κριταΧ διαλογισμών πονηρών judges
with evil thoughts, i. e. who follow perverse opinions, rep-
rehensible principles, Jas. ii. 4 [cf. W. 187 (1 76)] ; pur-
pose, design: Mt. xv. 19; Mk. vii. 21. 2. a deliberat-
ing, questioning, about \vhat is true : Lk. xxiv. 38 ; when
in reference to what ought to be done, hesitation, doubt-
ing : ^ωp\s γογγυσμών και διαλογισμών, Phil. ii. 14 ['yoyy-
is the moral, διαλ. the intellectual rebi'IIion against
God * Bp. Lghtft.] ; χωρϊ? i^pyrjs κ, διαλογισμού, 1 Tim. ii.
8; [in the last two pass. al. still advocate the rendering
disputing ; yet cf. Mey. on Phil. 1. c.].*
δια-λνω : 1 aor. pass, δ^λύθην ; to dissolve [cf. διά, C. 4] :
in Acts v. 36 of a body of men broken up and dispersed,
as often in Grk. writ.*
δια-μαρτύρομαι ; dep. mid.; impf. δ^μαρτυρόμην (Acts
ii. 40 Rec); 1 aor. δ^μαρτυράμην; in Sept. mostly for
Τ^'Π ; often in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down ; see a multitude
of exx. fr. tliem in TI7n. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 20
sqq. ; to call gods and men to witness [διά, with the inter-
position of gods and men; cf. EUic. (after Win.) on 1
Tim. V. 21] ; 1. to testify, i. e. earnestly, religiously to
charge : foil, by an impv. Acts ii. 40 ; ivamiov toD ΰ(ον κ.
Χριστον Ίησοϋ, 2 Tim. iv. 1, (2 Κ. xvii. 13 ; Xen. Cyr. 7,
1, 1 7 συ μΐ7 πρότ€ρον €μ8α\λ€ toIs πολ€μίοΐ5, διαμαρτύρομαι,
πριν etc.) ; also with ενώπιον του Oeoii κτλ. foil, by Γι^α [cf.
Β. 237 (204)], 1 Tim. v. 21, (foil, by μή. Ex. .xix. 21);
foil, by the inf. 2 Tim. ii. 14 [not Lchm.], (Neh. Lx. 2G).
2. to attest, testify to, solemnly nffrm : Acts xx. 23 ; 1 Th.
iv. 6 ; Heb. ii. 6 ; foil, by ότι. Acts x. 42 ; with dat. of pers.
Ζιαμ^αχομΛΐ
140
iunrepao)
to give solemn testijnony to one, Lk. xvi. 28 ; >vith ace. of
the obj. to confirm a thin;/ bij (the interposition of)
testimonij, to lesli/i/, cause it to be believcil : τον λόγον τοΟ
κυρίου, Acts vili. 25 ; το evayytXtov, Acts xx. 24 ; την β.ι-
atXfiav ToO θ(οϋ, Acts xxviii. 2.i ; for all the apostolic in-
struction came back linally to testimony respecting; thing's
Λvhich llicy themselves had seen or heard, or Avhicli had
been disclosed to Ihcui b_v divine revelation, (Acts i. 21
S(|.;v. 32; x. 41; xxii. IS); ivith the addition of fit ami
an ace. of the place unto which the testimony is borne :
τά jTfoi ('μοΰ ίίϊ 'ΐ(ρουσ. Acts xxiii. 1 1 ; with the addition
of a dat. of the pers. to whom the testimony is given : rolt
'loudalots τον Χριστον Ίησοϋν, the Messianic dignity of
Jesus, Acts xviii. 5 ; Ίουδ. την μίτάνοιαν και πίστιν, the
necessity of repentance and faith, Acts xx. 21 , (τί; 'ΐ(ρουσ.
τπί ανομίας, into what sins she has fallen, Ezek. xvi. 2).*
Βια-μάχομιαι ; \ni]if. 8ΐ(μαχι'>μην; Ιο Ji(/ht it out ; coiUeiiil
fiercely : of disputants, .Vets xxiii. 9. (Sir. viii. 1, 3 ;
very freq. in Attic writ.) *
εια-μ<νω ; [imjjf . &ύμ(νον'] ; 2 pers. sing, f ut. Sia^ei-fis
(Ileb. i. 11 Knapp, Bleek, al., for Koc. [GLTTr
WH al.] SiafifVfis) ; I aor. Sie/i"'"' ! γί• hιaμfμ(vηκa•, Ιο
stai) permancnihf, remain /lermnnenlti/, continue, [yi. per-
iliirt ; δκί, C. 2] ( I'hilo de gigant. § 7 πνεύμα θιΐον μίναν
bvvarov (v ψυχή, ^ιαμίνΐίν de αδύνατον) : (ial. ii. ii ; opp.
to άπόλλυ/ιαι, llel). i. 11 fr. Ps. ci. (cii.) 27; with an adj.
or ad\ . added denoting the condition : Sic'/icti/c κωφός, Lk.
i. 22 ; οΰτω, as they are, 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; to jiersercrr : ίν τινι,
Lk. xxii. 28. (Xen., Plat, and subseq. writ.) *
εια-μcp(ζω: impf. 8ΐ(μ*ριζον; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur.
hiapfpiaaTf ; Pass., [pri'S. ίίημιρίζομαι] ; pf. ptcp. διαμί-
μΐρισμίνης', 1 aor. Ηί(μ€ρίσθιιν\ f ut. διαμίρισθί}(τομαι ; [Alid.,
pres. ίιημερίζομαί ; 1 aor. &tfμ(pισiΊμηv^ ; to diriilr: ; 1.
to cleare asunder, cut inpie•/' : ζώα δίαμιρισθ^ντα so. by
the butcher. Plat. legg. 8 p. 849 <1. ; ace. to a nse pecu-
liar to l.k. in ])ass. to be dirided into opposing purls, to be
at variance, in dissension : fVt Ttva, against one, Lk. xi.
17 sq. ; eVi nvi, xii. 52 sq. 2. to dislribule (Plat, polit.
p. 289 c. ; in Sept. cliiefly for pSn) : τί, Mk. xv. 24 Rec;
Ti Tivi, Lk. xxii. 1 7 (whore L Τ Tr WII eis ίαυτούς for
11 G tauToIr) ; Acts ii. 45 ; Pass. Acts ii. 3 ; Mid. to dis-
tribute amonrj themselves : τί, Mt. xxvii. 3.Ϊ ; ^Ik. xv. 24
GLTTr WII; Lk. xxiii. 34; with ίαυτοίί added, [Mt.
xxvii. 3.'. Rec.]; Jn. .xix. 24 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19.*
Sta-iiEpurpuis, -οΰ, 6, {&ιαμ(ρίζω), divi.'<ion ; 1. a part-
ing, distribution : Plat. legg. 6 p. 771 d. ; Diod. 11, 47;
Joseph, antt. 10, 11, 7, Sept. Ezek. xlviii. 29; Mic. vii.
12. 2. disunion, dissension: opp. to (Ίρήνη, Lk. xii.
.")1 ; see Άιαμερίζω. 1.*
ξια-νεμω : 1 aor. pass, δκνεμ^θην ; to distribute, divide,
(Arstpli., Xen., Plat., sqq.) : pass, cir τοκλαόι» to be dis-
seminated, spread, among the people. Acts iv. 1 7.*
Suirvcvu ; to express one's meaning bg a sign, nod to,
hecion to, U'ink at, (διό, because " the sign is conceived of
as passing through the intervening space to him to whom
it is made " Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 4) : Lk.
i. 22. (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 19; Sir. xxvii. 22 ; Diod. 3,
18; 17 ST; Lcian. ver. hist. 2, 41 : Tcarom. IS; [al.].)*
Sια-vόημo^ -roc, To, (δίανοίω to think), a thought : Lk. xi.
17. (Sept.; Sir.; often in Plat.)*
Siavota, -as, ή, (διό and coos), Sept. for 3*7 and 22^ •
very freip in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl.] Ildt. down ; 1.
the mind as the faculty ofunderslaniling,fecUn(i, desiring:
Mt. xxii. 37; Mk. .\ii. 30 [Tr mrg. br.j ; l,k.x. 27; Kph.
i. 18 Rec. ; iv. 18 ; Ileb. viii. 10 ; x. 16 ; 1 Pet. i. 13. 2.
understanding: 1 Jn. v. 20. 3. mind \. a. spiri' (haX.
animus), u-ug of thinking and feeling: Col. i. 21 ; Lk. i.
51 ; 2 Pet. iii. 1. 4. thought; jilur. contextually in a
bad .sense, evil thoughts: Eph. ii. 3, as in Xiun. xv. 39
μνησθησ€σθ€ πασών των ίντολών κυρίου . . κα\ ου biatrrpa-
φησ^σθε ϋπίο'ω τών διανοιών υμών*
δι-αν-οίγω : inq)f. hir)voiyov; 1 aor. διήνοιξα : Pass., I aor.
διηνοίχθην ; [2 aur. διηνοίγην] ; pf. ptcp. διηνηιγμίνοί (Acts
vii. 5u L Τ Tr Wll) ; [on variations of augui. ^ee n-fl'. s. v.
ανοίγω]: .Sept. cliiefly for npp and Π,ι.^; occasionally in
]irof. auth. fr. Plat. Lys. ]>. 210 a. down; to open bg di-
viding or drawing asunder (διά),Ιο opt η Ihornughlg (ν;\ι-Λΐ
had been closed) ; 1. prop. : apatv διακοίγοκ μήτρα»,
a male o[)ening the womb (the closed matrix), i. e. the
first-born, Lk. ii. 23 (Ex. xiii. 2, etc.); oipavois, pass..
Acts vii. 56 L Τ Tr WH ; the ears, the eges, i. e. to restore
or to give hearing, sight : Mk. vii. 34, 35 R G ; Lk. xxiv.
31, (Gen. iii. 5, 7; Is. xxxv. 5 ; 2 K. vi. 17, etc.). 2.
troj). : Tos γραφάς, to open the sense of the Scriptures,
explain thcui. Lk. xxiv. 32 ; τον loiiv Tiros to open the
mind of one, i. c. cause him to umlcrstand a thing, Lk.
xxiv. 4.") ; T/jv καρδίαν to open one's .-oul, i. e. to rouse in
one the faculty of understanding or the desire of learn-
ing. Acts xvi. 14, (2 Alacc. i. 4; Themist. orat. 2 de
Constantio imp. [p. 29 ed. Ilarduin] διανοΊγίταί /ίου ή κα/)-
δία κ. diavyeoTtpa γίνεται ή ψυχή) ; ai>sol., foil, by ότι, to
explain, txpoiind se. airiU, i. c. t<is γραφιά. Acts xvii. 8.
Cf. Will. Dc verb, comii. etc. Pt. v. p. Ii) .«(p*
8ιο-νυκτ£ρί«ω ; (opp. to διημερεΐω) ; to spend the night,
to jioss the whole night, [cf. διά, C. 1] : cv τινι, in any em-
ployment, Lk. vi. 12. (Diod. 13, 62; Antonin. 7, 66 ; PluU
mor. p. 950 b. ; Ildian. 1, 16, 12 [5 Hckk.] ; Jose|ih. antt.
6, 13, 9 ; b. j. 2, 14, 7 [Job ii. 9 : Phil, incorr. mund. § 2;
in Flac. § 6] ; with την νύκτα added, Xen. Hell. 5, 4, 3.) *
Si -ανϋω : 1 aor. ptcp. διανίσας ; to accomplish fully, bring
eiuite to an end, finish : τόι/ίτλοϋΐ', Acts xxi. 7. (2 Mace,
xii. 17; fr. Ilom. down.) [Cf. Field, Otium Korv. iii.
p. 85 sq.] •
8ta-TravTOs. see διά, A. Π. 1. a.
δια-π-αρα-τριβή, -ηί, η. constant contention, incessant
wrangling or strife, (παρατρι3ή attrition ; contention,
wransling) : a word justly adopted in 1 Tim. vi. 5 l)y
G L Τ Tr WH (for Rec. παραδιατριβαί. q. v.) ; not found
elsewhere [exc. Clem. Al. etc.]; cf. W. 102 (96). Cf.
the double compounds διαπαρατηρί'ιν, 2 S. iii. 30 ; also
(doubtful, it must be confessed), διαπαρακίπτομαι, 1 Κ.
vi. 4 Aid.: διαπηροΐΰΐ'ω, Joseph, antt. 10, 7. 5. [Stejih.
gives also διαπηράγω, Greg. Nyss. ii. 177 b.; διαπαμα-
Χαμβάνω : διαπαρασιωπάω, Joseph, (ienes. p. 9 a. ; δία-
παρασί'ρω. ."^cliol. Lucian. ii. 796 Hcmst.] *
Sict-ircpau, -ώ ; 1 aor. δκπερασα ; Ιο pass over, cross over.
8ιατΓ\€ω
141
ΒιαστΓορά
e. g. a river, a lake : Mt. ix. 1 ; xiv. 34 ; Mk. vi. 53 [here
Τ WH follow with ίπϊ την γην/οΓ (to) the land (cf. K. V.
mrg.)] ; foil• by eis with aoc. of place, Mk. v. 21 ; Acts
xxi. 2 ; ιτρύς with aoc. of pers. Lk. xvi. 26. ([Eur.], Ar-
stph., Xen., subseq. writ. ; Sept. for Ί?".) *
8ια.^λ('ω : 1 aor. ptep. SianXevaas; (Plin. pernavir/o),
to sail across : neXayos (as often in Grk. writ), Acts
xxvii. 5 [W. § 52, 4, 8].'
8ια-πον£ω : to work out laboriously, make complete by la-
bor. Mid. [pres. 8ίαπονοϊμαι] ; with 1 aor. pass. δ«πο-
νήβην (for which Attic writ, δι^πονησάμην) ; a. to exert
one's self, strive ; b. to manage with pains, accomplish
with great labor ; in prof. auth. in both senses [fr. Aeschyl.
down], c. to be troubled, displeased, offended, pained,
[cf. collotj. Eng. to be worked up ; W. 23 (22)] : Acts iv.
2 ; xvi. 18. (Acpiila in Gen. vi. 6 ; 1 S. xx. 30 ; Sept. in
Eccl. X. 'J for yi^'_i ; Hesych. διαπονηθ^ίί ■ \v7n]3eis-) *
SiiwiropEvu: to cause one to pass through a place; to'car-
ry across ; Pass., [pres. 8ιαπυρ(νομαί ; impf. διf^roρevύμηv] ;
with fut. mid. [(not found in N. T.) ; fr. Hdt. doivn] ; to
journey through a place, go through : as in Grk. writ. foil,
by διά with gen. of place, Mk. ii. 23 L Tr WH txt. ; Lk.
vi. 1 ; foil, by ace. [W. § 52, 4, 8] to travel through : Acts
xvi. 4 ; absol. : Lk. xviii. 3G ; Ro. xv. 24 ; with the addition
κατά πόλίΐί και κώμα!, Lk. xiii. 22. [Sys. see ΐρχομαι.^ *
8ι-απορ€ω, -ώ : impf. δίηπόρονν ', Mid., [pres. inf. δίαττο-
ριίσθαι (Lk. .xxiv. 4 RG)]; impf. διηπορονμην (Acts ii.
12TTrWH); in the Grk. Bible only in [Dan. ii. 3
Symm. and] Luke ; prop, thoroughly (δια)άπορ(ω (q. v.),
to be entirely at a loss, to be in perplexity : absol. Acts ii.
1 2 ; foil, by 8ta τά with inf. Lk. hi. 1 ; jrepi tlvos, Lk. xxiv.
4 (here the mid. is to be at a loss ivilh one's self, for which
L Τ Tr WII read the simple απορίϊσθαί) ; Acts v. 24 ; iv
(αυτώ foil, by indir. discourse. Acts x. 1 7. (Plat., Aristot.,
Poly'b., Diod., Philo. Plut., al.) *
&ια<Γραγμ.ατεϋομαι : 1 aor. δΐ(πραγματ(νσάμην ; thorough-
ly, earnestly (διά) to undertake a business, Dion. Hal. 3, 72 ;
contextually, to undertake a business for thesake of gain :
Lk. xix. 15. (In Plat. Phaedo p. 77 d. 95 e. to examine
thoroughly.) *
8ια-πρύι> : impf. pass, δκπριήμην ; to saw asunder or in
twain, to divide by a saw: 1 Chr. xx. 3; Plat. conv. p.
193 a.; Arstph. eijq. 768, and elsewhere. Pass. trop. to
be sawn through mentally, i. e. to be rent with vexation,
[A. V. cut to the heart]. Acts v. 33 ; with the addition
Tats καρδίαις αυτών. Acts vii. .54 (cf. Lk. ii. 35) ; μρ^άλω?
(χάΚίτταινον κα\ δκττρίοντο καθ' ημών, Euseb. h. 6. 5, 1, 6
[15 ed. Ileinich. ; cf. Gataker, Advers. misc. col. 916 g.].*
8ι-αρΐΓάζω : fut. διαρπάσω ; 1 aor. [subj. 3 pers. sing,
διαρπάστ;], inf. διαρπάσαι ; to plunder : Mt. .\ii. 29* (where
L Τ Tr WH άρπάσαί). 29" (R Τ Tr WH) : Mk. iii. 27.
[From Horn, down.] *
8ια-ρρήγνυμιι and διαρρησσω (Lk. viii. 29 [R f; : see be-
low]) ; 1 aor. δύρρηξα ; impf. pass. 3 pers. sing, δκρρήγνντο
(Lk. V. G, where Lchm. txt. δι^ρήγνυτο and Τ Tr AVII
δΐ(ρήσσ(το (L mrg. διιρρ.), also LTTrWII διαρήσσων
in Lk. viii. 29 ; [WH have δύρηξ^ν in Mt. xxvi. 65,
and δίαρηξαί in Mk. xiv. 63 ; see their App. p. 163, and
s. V. P, p]) ; to break asunder, burst through, rend asunder :
τά δ(σμά, Lk. viii. 29 ; to δίκτνον, pass., Lk. v. 6 ; τά ίμάτια,
χίτώναί, to rend, which was done by the .7ews in extreme
indignation or in deep grief [cf. B. D. s. v. Dress, 4] : Mt.
.x.xvi. 65 ; Mk. xiv. 63 ; Acts .xiv. 14, cf. Gen. xxxvii. 29,
34, etc. ; 1 Mace. xi. 71 ; Joseph, b. j. 2, 15, 4. (Sept.,
[Uom.], Soph., Xen., subseq. writ.) "
8ιοσ•αφ€ω, -ώ: 1 aor. δκσάφησα; {σαφήί clear); 1.
to make clear or plain, to ex/itain, unfold, declare: τήν
παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 36 L Tr txt. AVH ; (Eur. Phoen.
398 ; Plat. legg. 6, 754 a. ; al. ; Polyb. 2, 1, 1 ; 3, 52, 5). 2.
of things done, to declare i. e. to tell, announce, narrate :
Mt. .xviii. 31; (2 Mace. 1, 18; Polyb. 1,46,4 ; 2,27, 3).
Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 622 sqq. ; Win. De
verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 11.*
8ia-a-c((i> : 1 aor. δΰσ(ΐσα ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down ;
to shake thoroughly ; trop. to make to tremble, to terrify (Job
iv. 14 for ΤΠϊΙΓΙ), to agitate; like concutio in juridical
Latin, to extort from one by intimidation money or other
property : τινά, Lk. iii. 14 [.\. V. do violence to] ; 3 Mace,
vii. 21 ; the Basilica; [Heinichen on Euseb. h. e. 7, 30, 7].*
8ια-<ΓΚορτΓ(ζω ; 1 aor. δκσκόρπισα; Pass., pf. ptcp. δκ-
σκορπισμ^νος ; 1 aor. δΐξσκηρπίσθην ; 1 fut. δΐίσκορπισθη-
σομαι ; often in Sept., more rarely in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb.
1,47,4; 27, 2, 10on(cf.Z,o/i. adPhryn.p. 218; [W. 25]);
to scatter abroad, disperse: Jn. xi. 52 (opp. to σννάγω);
of the enemy, Lk. i. 51 ; Acts v. 37, (Num. .x. 30, etc. ;
Joseph, antt. 8, 15, 4; Ael. v. h. 13, 46 (1, 6) ό δράκων
τυνς μ€ν δί(σκόρπίσ€, tovs δΐ dneKTftvc). of a flock of
sheep: Mt. xxvi. 31 (fr. Zech. xiii. 7) ; Mk. xiv. 27; of
property, to squander, waste : Lk. .xv. 13 ; xvi. 1, (likeSta-
στΐίίρω in Soph. El. 1291). hke the Hebr. Π">ί (Sept.
Ezek. V. 2, 10, 12 [Aid.], etc.) of grain, to scatter i. e. to
winnow (i. e. to throw the grain a considerable distance, or
up into the air, that it may be separated from the chaff;
opp. to συνάγω, to gather the wheat, freed from the chaff,
into the granary [cf. BB.DD. s. v. Agriculture]) : Jit.
XXV. 24, 26.*
Sta-cnrou : Pass., [pf. inf. δκσττάσθαι] ; 1 aor. δΐίσττά-
σθην; to rend asunder, break asunder: τάί oKuaets, Mk.
V. 4 (τάί vevpai, Judg. xvi. 9) ; of a man, to tear in
pieces : Acts xxiii. 1 0, (tovs SvSpas κριηυργηδόν, Hdt. 3,
13).•
8ia-«nreCpu : 2 aor. pass, δκσπάρην ; to scatter abroad,
disptrse ; Pass, of those who are driven to different places,
Acts viii. 1, 4; xi. 19. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Soph, and]
Hdt. down ; very often in Sept.) *
8ια-οηΓορά, -as, η. (δίαστ7(1ρω, cf. such words as ayopa,
διαφθορά), (Vulg. dispcrsio), a scattering, dispersion : ατά-
μων. opp. to (τίμμιξίί κ. πapάζeυξts, Plut. mor. p. 1 1 05 a. ; in
the .Sept. used of the Israelites dispersed among foreign
nations, Deut. .xxviii. 25 ; .xxx. 4 ; esp. of their Babylo-
nian exile, Jer. xU. (.xxxiv.) 17; Is. xlix. 6; Judith v.
19 ; abstr. for concr. of the exiles themselves. Ps. cxlvi.
(cxlvii.) 2 (i. q. D'niJ expelled, outcasts) ; 2 Mace. i. 27 ;
f is T. διασποράν τών ΈΧΚηνων unto those dispersed among
the Greeks [W. § 30, 2 a.], Jn. vii. 35. Transferred to
Christians [i. e. Jewish Christians (?)] scattered abroad
5ιαστί\\ω
142
Βιατίθημί
amon^ the Oontilos : .Tas. i. 1 (tv τΐ/ Starrnopa. so. oieri) ;
τταμίΐτί^ημοι διασποράς Πόιτου, sojourners far awav from
home, in I'ontus, 1 Pet. i. 1 (fcc παρ(πί5ημος). [I5B.UD.
s. V. Dispersion; esp. Scliiirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. § 31.]*
Sia-e-TcWa : to draw asunder, diciile, distinguish, dis-
pose, order, (Plat., Polyb., Diod., Strab., Plut. ; often in
Sept.); Pass. TO διαστ(\\όμ(νυν, the injunction : Ileb. xii.
■JO, (2 Mace. xiv. 2>i). Mid., [pres. δίαστί'λλομαι] ; impf.
δίίστίλλομι;»' ; 1 aor. δκστίΐλάμην ; to open one's selj i. e.
one's mind, to set forth distinctly, (Ariitot., Polyb.) ;
hence in the N. T. [so Ezek. iii. 18, 19; Judith xi. 12]
In admonish, order, charge: τινί, λΐΐί. viii. 15; Acts xv.
24 ; foil, by ira [cf. B. 237 (204)], Mt. xvi. 20 R Τ Tr WII
mrg. ; Mk. vii. 36 ; ix. 9 ; διίστείλατο π-ολλά, ίνα etc. Mk.
V. 43.•
διάστημα, -rof, τό, 1(9ιαστηνμι)^, an interval, distance;
spare of time : i>t ώμων τμιων biairr. Acts v. 7, ([(V πολλού
διαστήματος, Aristot. de audib. p. 800"•, 5 etc.] ; τιτρα^τίς δ.
J'olyb. 9. 1, 1 ; \_σνμιτας ό χμόνος ήμίρων κ- νυκτών toTt διά-
στημα, Philo, alleg. leg. i. § 2 etc., see Siegfried s. v. p.
6«j).•
διίΜΓΤολή, -ής, ι), (διαστίλλω, cf. άνατο\η), a distinction,
difference: Ro. iii. 22; x. 12; of the difference of the
sounds made by musical instruments, 1 Co. xiv. 7.
([Aristot., Theophr.], Polyb., Plut., al.) '
εια-<Γτρ{'ψω ; 1 aor. inf. διαστρίψαι: pf. pass. ptcp. δκ-
στραμμίνο! [cf. WH. App. p. 1 70 sip] ; fr. Aeschyl. down ;
a. to distort, turn aside : τάς οδούς κυρίου τωγ (ϋθύας, fig-
uratively (Prov. χ. 10), to oppose, plot against, the saving
purposes and plans of God, Acts xiii. 10. Hence b.
to turn aside from the right path, to pervert, corrupt : τό
ίθνος, Lk. xxiii. 2 (Polyb. 5, 41, 1 ; 8, 24, 3) ; τίνα από
Tims, to corrupt and so turn one aside from etc. Acts
xiii. 8, (Ex. V. 4 ; voluptates animum detorquent a vir-
tute, Cic.) ; δκστραμμίνα perverse, corrupt, wicked : Mt.
xvii. 17; Lk. ix. 41 ; Acts xx. 30; Phil. ii. 15.•
δια-σ-ώζω : 1 aor. διΐσωσα ; 1 aor. pass, δι^σώθηυ ; in
Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down ; often in Sept., esp. for dSo and
J?"iyin ; to preserve through danger, to bring safe through ;
to save Ί. e. cure one who is sick (cf. our colloq. bring
him through) : Lk. vii. 3 ; pass. Mt. xiv. 36 ; to save i. e.
leep safe, keep from perishing : Acts xxvii. 43; to save
our of danger, rescue : Acts xxviii. 1 ; « της θαλάσσης,
ibid. 4 ; — as very often in Grk. writ, (see exx. in Win.
De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 9 sq.) with specification of
the person to whom or of the place to which one is
brought safe through: προς Φήλικα, Acts xxiii. 24; eVi
την γήν. Acts xxvii. 44 ; fit τι, 1 Pet. iii. 20.*
I δια-ταγή, -ης, ή, (διατάσσω), a purely bibl. [2 Esdr. iv.
11] and eccl. word (for which the Greeks use διάταξις),
a disposition, arrangement, ordinance: Ro. xiii. 2; ίΚά-
/3fTe Toi» νυμον €ΐς διατηγας άγγίΧων, Acts vii. 53, ye re-
ceii ed the law, inlluenced by the authority of the ordain-
ing angels, or because ye thought it your duty to receive
what was enjoined by angels (at the ministration of an-
gels [nearly i. q. as being the ordinances etc.], similar
to CIS όνομα δίχίσθαι. Mt. X. 41 ; see iif. B. II. 2 d. ; [AV\
398 (372), cf. 228 (214), also B. 151 (131)]). On the
Jewish opinion that angels were employed as God's
assistants in the solemn proclamation of the Mosaic law,
cf. Deut. xxxiii. 2 Sept. ; Acts vii. 38; (jal. iii. 19 ; Ileb.
ii. 2 ; Joseph, antt. 15, 5, 3 ; [Philo de somn. i. § 22; Bp.
Lghtft. Com. on Gal. 1. c.].•
διά-τα-γμια, -τοί, τό, (διατάσσω), an injunction, mandate:
Ileb. xi. 2.'i [Lchm. δάγμα]. (2 Esdr. vii. 11 ; Add. Esth.
iii. 14 [in Tdf. ch. iii. lin., line 14]; Sap. xi. 8; Pliilo,
decal. § 4; Diod. 18, 64; Plut. MarceL. c. 21 fin.;
[al.].)•
διαταράσσω, or -ττω ; 1 aor. pass, διιταράχθην ; to agi-
tate greatly, trouble greatly, (Lat. pcrturbare) : Lk. i. 29.
(Plat., Xen., al.) •
δια-^άσσω; 1 aor. δάταξα; pf. inf. διατίτα;^^!^! (Acts
xviii. 2 [not Tdf.]) ; Pass., pf. ptcp. διατίταγ/ΐί'ι-οί; 1 aor.
ptcp. διαταχθίΐς ; 2 aor. ptcp. διαταγιίς ; Mid., pres. δια-
τάσσομαι: fut. διατάζομαι; 1 aor. δ^ταξάμην; (on the
force of δΐίί ef. Germ, verordnen, [Lat. d isponcre, Π'ί'η.
De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 7 sq.]) ; to arrange, ap-
point, ordain, prescribe, give order : τινί, Mt. xi. 1 ; 1 Co.
xvi. 1 ; foil, by ace. with inf., Lk. viii. 55 ; Acts xviii. 2
[here Τ τ^ταχ. Tr mrg. br. διη- ; τινί foil, by inf. 1 Co. ix.
14] ; Ti, pass., ό νόμος διαταγιΐς δι" άγγίλων (see διαταγή) :
Gal. iii. 19, (lies. opp. 274); τινί τι, pass.: Lk. iii. 13;
xvii. 9 [Rec], 10; Acts xxiii. 31. Mid.: 1 Co. vii. 17;
ο?τω ην διaτfτayμ(voς (cf. W. 262 (246) ; [B. 193 (167)]),
Acts XX. 13; TiW, Tit. i. 5; τι, 1 Co. xi. 34; τινί, foil, by
inf. : Acts vii. 44 ; .xxiv. 23. [Comp. : «πι-διατιίσσομαι.] *
εια-τ<λ£ω, -ώ ; to bring thoroughly to an end, acronijilish,
[cf. δια, C. 2]; with the addition of τον βίον, τον χρόνον,
etc., it is joined to participles or adjectives and denotes
the eontinuousness of the act or state expressed by the
ptcp. or adj. (as in Hdt. 6, 117; 7, 111 ; Plat. apol. p.
31 a.) ; oftener, however, without the accus. it is joined
with the same force simply to the ptcps. or adjs. : thus
άσιτοι διατ(λ(ΐτ( ye continue fasting, constantly fast. Acts
xxvii. 33 (so άσφαλίστιρος [al. -τατοί] διατίλίί, Thuc. 1,
34; often in Xen.; W. 348 (326); [B. 304 (2C,1)]).•
δια-τηρ«ω, -ώ ; 3 pers. sing. impf. δκτήριι; to keep con-
tinually or carefully (see διά, C. 2) : Lk. ii. 51, (Gen.
xxxvii. 11) ; ΐμαυτον ίκ τίνος (cf. rqpe'iv ίκ τίνος, Jn. xvii.
15), to keep one's self (pure) from a thing. Acts xv. 29;
άπά Ttvoy for 13Ei foil, by [D, Ps. xi. (xii.) 8. (Plat.,
Dem., Polyb., al.) *
6ia-Tt, see διά, Β. XL 2 a. p. 134'.
δια-^£0ημι : to place separately, dispose, arrange, appoint,
[cf. διά, C. 3]. In the N. T. only in Jud., pres. διατίθι-
μαι; 2 aor. δκθίμην; fut. διαθήσομαι; 1. to arrange,
dispose of, one's oicn affairs; a. τι, of something that
belongs to one (often so in prof. auth. fr. Xen. down) ;
with dat. of pers. added, in one's favor, to one's advan-
tage ; hence to assign a thing to another as hL<: pnsse.'tsion :
Tivi βασί\€ίαν (to appoint), Lk. xxii. 29. b. to dispose
of by will, make a testament: Heb. ix. 16 sq. | (Plat. legg.
11 p. 924 e. : with διαθήκην added, ibid. p. 923 c, etc.).
2. διατίθ(μαι διαθήκην τινί ("£3 ΓΧ η"!3 Π^?, Jer. xxxviiL
(xxxi.) 31 sqq.), to make a covenant, enter into cove-
nant, with one, [cf. W. 225 (211); B. 148 (129 sq.)]:
ίιατρίβω
143
Οια•χ\βνάζ<ύ
Heb. viii. 10, (Gen. xv. 18) ; προ? τιι«ι, Acts iii. 25 ; Heb.
X. 16, (Deut. vii. 2); μιτά Tipos, 1 Mace. i. 11. The
Grks. said συντίθιμαι npos τίνα, al npus τίνα σννθηκαι,
Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 21. [Comp. : άντι-διατίθημι.] '
8ια-τρ(β<β ; impf. 8ύτριβον ; 1 aor. δύτριψα ; to rub
between, rub hard, (prop. Horn. II. 11, 847, al.) ; to wear
away, consume ; χράνον or ημέρας, to spend, pass lime :
Acts xiv. 3, 28 ; .xvi. 12 ; xx. 6 ; xxv. 6, 14, (Lev. xiv. 8 ;
Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.) ; simply to stay, tarry, [cf. B.
145 (127); W. 593 (552)]: Jn. iii. 22; xi. 54 [WII Tr
t.\t. ΐμ(ΐν(ν~\ ; Acts xii. 19 ; xiv. 18 (Lchm. ed. min.) ; xv.
35 ; (Judith x. 2 ; 2 Mace. xiv. 23, and often in prof,
auth. fr. Horn. II. 19, 150 down).•
εια-τροψή, -ης. ή, (διατρίφω to support), sustenance :
1 Tim. vi. 8. (Xen. vect. 4, 49 ; Menand. ap. Stob.
floril. 61, 1 [vol. ii. 386 ed. Gaisf.] ; Diod. 19, 32 ; Epict.
ench. 12; Joseph, antt. 2, S, 7 ; 4, 8, 21 ; often in Plut.;
1 Mace. vi. 49.) *
ει-αυγάζω : 1 aor. διηύγασα ; lo shine through, (Tnlg.
elucesco), to dawn ; of daylight breaking through the
darkness of night (Polyb. 3, 104, 5, [cf. Act. Andr. 8
p. 116 ed. Tdf.]) : 2 Pet. i. 19. [Plut. de plac. philos.
3, 3, 2; al. (see Soph. Lex. s. v.).]*
ειαυγή9. -ff, (αΐ-γή), translucent, transparent : Rev. xxi.
21, fur the Rec. διαφανής. ([Aristot.], Philo, Apoll.
Rh., Lcian., Plut., Themist. ; often in the Anthol.) *
Sicut>aWjs, -if, (δίαψαίνω to show through), transparent,
translucent : Rev. xxi. 21 Rec. ; see διαν-γής. (Hdt.,
Arstph., Plat., al.) *
8ια-φίρω; 2 aor. SirjveyKov [but the subj. 3 pers. sing.
δκν^γκη (Mk. xi. IG), the only aor. form which occurs,
can come as well fr. 1 aor. διήνιγκα ; cf. Λ'eitch s. v.
φίρω, fin.] ; Pass., [pres. διαφίρομαι^ ; impf. δκφίρόμην ;
[fr. Ilom. (h. Merc. 255), Pind. down] ; 1. to hear or
carry through any place : oKevos δια τοϋ Upoi, 2\Ik. xi.
16. 2. to carry different ways, i. e. a. trans, to carry
in different directions, to different places: thus persons
are said διαφίρ^σθαι, who are carried hither and thither
in a ship, driven to and fro. Acts xxvii. 27, (Strab. 3, 2, 7
p. 144 ; σκάφος νπ (ναντίων πνινμάτων διαφ^ρόμίνον, Philo,
migr. Abr. § 27; Lcian. Ilermot. 28; often in Plut.);
metaph. to spread abroad : δΐ(φΐρ(το 6 Xoyor τοϋ κυρίου
δι όλης της χώρας. Acts xiii. 49, (dyyfXiar, Lcian. dial.
deor. 24, 1 ; φήμη διαφ(ρ(ται. Plut. nior. p. 1 63 d.). b.
intrans. (like the Lat. diff'ero) to differ: δοκιμάζ(ΐν τα
διαφίροντα to test, prove, the things that differ, i. e. to
distinguish between good and evil, lawful and unlawful,
Ro. ii. 18 ; Phil. i. 10, {διάκρισις καλοΟ τ( κα\ κακοϋ. Ileb.
v. 14); cf. Thol. Com. on Rom. p. Ill ed. 5.; Theoph.
Ant. ad Autol. p. 6 ed. Otto δοκιμάζοντις τα διαφέροντα,
ήτοι φως. ή σκότος, η \(υκ6ν, ή μίλαν κτλ.) ; [al.. adopting a
secondary sense of each verb in the above passages, trans-
late (cf. A. Λ'.) to approve the things that excel; see Mey.
(yet cf. ed. Weiss) on Ro. 1. c. ; Ellic. on Pliil. 1. c.].
διαφίρω τινός, to differ from one, Ί. e. to excel, surpass
one: Mt. vi. 26; x. 31 ; xii. 12; Lk. xii. 7, 24, (often so
in Attic auth.) ; τίνος tv τινι, 1 Co. xv. 41 ; \τινος ούδίν,
Gal. iv. 1]. c. impersonally, διαφίρίΐ it makes a differ-
ence, it matters, is of importance : οίδίν μυι διαφίρίΐ it
matters nothing to me. Gal. ii. 6, (Plat. Prot. p. 316 b.
ήμίν οϋδΐν διαφ(ρ(ΐ, p. 358 e. ; de rep. 1 p. 340 c. ; Dem.
124, 3 (in Phil. 3, 50) ; Polyb. 3, 21, 9 ; Ael. v. h. 1, 25 ;
al. ; [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 394 ; Wetst. on Gal. 1. c.]).*
δι.α.ψίΰ'γΐι• : [2 aor. διtφvyoυ] ; fr. Hdt. down ; to fee
through danger, to escape : Acts .xxvii. 42, (Prov. xix. 5;
Josh. viii. 22).*
8ια-ψημ£ζω ; 1 aor. δκφήμισα ; 1 aor. pass, δκφημισθην ;
to spread abroad, blaze abroad : τόι/λό^οκ, Mk. i. 45 ; Mt.
x.xviii. 15 [T WH mrg. ϊφημίσθ.^ ; τικά, to spread abroad
his fame, verbally diffuse his renown, Mt. ix. 31 ; in Lat.
diffamare aliquem, but in a bad sense. (Rarely in Grk.
writ., as Arat. phaen. 221 ; Dion. Hal. 11, 46; Palaeph.
incred. 14, 4; [cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p.
14 sq.].) •
$ια-ψθείρω: 1 aor. δΐ(φθ(ΐρα\ Pass., [pres. διαφθιίρο-
μαι]; pf. ptcp. δκφθαρμίυος ; 2 aor. δκφθάρην; Sept.
very often for ΠΠί7, occasionally for San ; in Grk. writ,
fr. Horn, down ; 1. to change for the worse, to cor-
rupt : minds, morals ; τήν γήν, i. e. the men that in-
habit the earth. Rev. xi. 18 ; δι^φθαρμίνοι τοννοϋν. 1 Tim.
vi. 5, {τήν διάνοιαν. Plat. legg. 10 p. 888 a.; την •γνώμην,
Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 21 ; τους οφθαλμούς, Xen. an. 4, 5, 12).
2. to destroy, ruin, {hat. perdere); a. ioco/isuwic, of bodily
vigor and strength : ό ίξω ημών άνθρωπος δ^aφθc^pfτaι \_is
decaying'], 2 Co. iv. 16 ; of the worm or moth that eats pro-
visions, clotliing, etc. Lk. xii. 33. b. to destroy (Lat. de-
lere) : Rev. viii. 9 ; to kill, διαφθ^Ιρ^ιν τους etc. Rev. xi. 1 8.*
Sia -ψθορά, -ας, ή, (διαφθ(ίρω), corruption, destruction ;
in the N. T. that destruction which is effected by the de-
cay of the body after death: Acts ii. 27, 31 ; xiii. 34-37
[cf. AV. § 65, 10], see {ΐδω, I. 5 and ΰποστρίφω, 2. (.Sept.
for ΡΠϋ ; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.)'
8ιά-φορο$, -ov, (διαφίρω) ; 1. different, varying in
kind, (Hdt. and sqq.) : Ro. xii. 6; Heb. ix. 10. 2.
excellent, surpassing, ([Diod.], Polyb., Plut., al.) : corn-
par, διαφορώτιρος, Heb. i. 4 ; viii. 6.*
Βια-φυλάσσω : 1 aor. inf. διαφυλάξαι ; fr. Hdt. down ;
to guard carefully: τινά, Lk. iv. 10 fr. Ps. xc. (xci.) 11.
" The seventy chose to employ this term esp. of God's
providential care; cf. Gen. xxviii. 15; Josh. xxiv. 17;
Ps. xl. (xii.) 3. Hence it came to pass that the later
writers at the close of their letters used to write διαφυ-
λάττοι, διαφυλάξοι υμάς 6 θ^ός, cf. Theodoret. iii. pp. 800,
818, 826, (edd. Schulze, Nosselt, etc. Hal.)." Win. De
verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 16.*
Sia-x«pC^u : 1 aor. mid. δκχαρισάμην ; lo move by the use
of the hanils, take in hand, manage, administer, govern, (fr.
[Andoc, Lys.], Xen. and Plato down). Mid. to lay hands
on, slay, l-ill [with one's own hand] : τινά (Polyb. 8, 23, 8;
Diod. 18, 46; Joseph., Dion. Hal., Plut., Hdian.), Acts
V. 30 : xxvi. 21.*
8ια-χλΕυάΐω ; to deride, scoff, mock, [" deridere i. e.
ridendo exagitare" Win.] : Acts ii. 13 G L Τ Tr WH.
(Plat. Ax. p.364 b. ; Dem. p. 1221, 26 [adv. Polycl. 49 I :
Aeschin. dial. 3,2; Polyb. 1 7, 4, 4 ; al. ; eccles. writ.l Cl.
Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 1 7.*
ύιαχ^ωρίζω
144
όώαχη
8ια-χωρ(ζα: Ιο separate thoroughly or wholly (cf. Sia, C.
2), (Arstph., Xen., Plat., al. ; Sept.). Pass. pres. Dia-
χωρίζομαι ([in reflex, sense] cf. αποχωρίζω) to separate
one's self, depart, ^Gen. .\iii. 9, 1 1, 14 ; Diod. 4, 53) : οπό
Tu/oi, Lk. L\. 33.*
SiSaicTiKOs, -ή, -6v, (i. q. ΜασκαΚικυ! in (irk. writ.), apt
and skilful in teaching : 1 Tim. iii. -' ; 2 Tim. ii. 24. (δι-
Βακτικη afxri), the virtue which renders one teachable,
docility, Philo, praem. et poen. § 4; [de congressu erud.
§7]•)•
SiSoKTis, -ή, -6v, (διδάσκω); 1. 'hat can be taught
(Pind., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. taught, instructed, foil, by
gen.%one [cf. W. 189 (178); 194 (182); B. 169(147)]:
ToO θ(ον, by God, .In. vi. 45 fr. Is. liv. 13 ; ττνίίματοί aylou
[(; L Τ Tr WII om. <5yiW], by the (Holy) Spirit, 1 Co. ii.
13. (νουθίτηματα κ(ίι/η! διδακτά, Soph. El. 344.)'
8ι8ασκαλία, -at, ή, (διδάσκαλοΓ), [fr. Pind. down] : 1.
teaching, instruction : Ho. xii. 7 ; xv. 4 (fts την ήμίτίραν
διδασκαλία^, that we might be taught, [A. V. for our
learning]); 1 Tim. iv. 13, 16; v. 17; 2 Tim. iii. 10, 16;
Tit. ii. 7. 2. teaching i. e. that which is taught, doc-
trine : Eph. iv. 14; iTim.i. 10; iv. 6 ; vi. 1,3; 2 Tim. iv.
3; Tit.i. 9; ii. 1, 10; plur. 5ι8ασκα\ίαι teachings, precepts,
(fr. Is. xxix. 13), Mt. xv.O; Mk. vii. 7 ; ανθρώπων. Col. ii.
22; δαιμοΐΊων, 1 Tim. iv. 1.*
SiSoo-KoXos, -ου, ό, ( διδάσκω), a teacher ; in tlie N. T. one
who teaches concerning the things of God, and the duties
of man ; 1. of one who is fitted to teach, or thinks
himself so: Heb. v. 12; Ro. ii. 20. 2. of the teachers
of the .Jewish religion : Lk. ii. 46 ; .Tn. iii. 10 ; hence the
Hebr. 3"i is rendered in Greek διδάσκαλοι : .In. i. 38 (39) ;
XX. 16; cf. below, under βαββί, and Pressel in Ilerzog
xii. p. 471 sq. ; \_CampheU, Dissert, on the Gospels, diss.
vii. pt. 2]. 3. of those who by their great power as
teachers drew crowds about them ; a. of -Jolin the Baj)-
tist:Lk.iu. 12. b. of Jesus : .In. i.38 (39); iii. 2; viii.4 ;
xi. 28 ; xiii. 13sq.; xx. 16 ; often in the first three Gos])els.
4. by preeminence used of Jesus by himself, as the one
wlio showed uien the way of salvation : Mt. xxiii. 8 L Τ
Tr WII. 5. of the apostles : ό διδάσκαλο: των ίθνων,
of Paul, 1 Tim. ii. 7 ; 2 Tim. i. 1 1 . 6. of those who
in the religious assemblies of Christians undertook the
work of teaching, with the special assistance of the Holy
Spirit: 1 Co. xii. 28 s([. ; Eph. iv. 11; Acts xiii. 1, cf.
•Tas. iii. 1. 7. of false teachers among Christians : 2
Tim. iv. 3. [Horn. (h. Merc. 556). Aeschyl., al.]
Si8ao-K<ii; impf. Εδίδασκοι/ ; fut. διδάξω: 1 aor. «δίδαξα;
1 aor. pass. (&ι5άχθην; (ΔΑΟ [<f. A'auii-ek p. 327]) ; [fr.
Horn, down] ; Sept. for ϋ'ΊΙΠ, ΓΤ^ίΠ, and esp. for Ίώ4 ;
to teach ; 1. absol. a. to hold diicourse with others
in order to instruct them, deliver didactic discourses : Mt.
iv. 23; xxi. 23 ; Mk. i. 21 ; vi. 6 ; xiv. 49 ; Lk. iv. 15 ; v.
17; vi. 6 ; Jn. vi. 59 ; vii. 14 ; xviii. 20, and often in the
Gospels; 1 Tim. ii. 12. b. to he a teacher (see διδά-
σ^σλοΓ, 6) : Ro. xii. 7. c. to discharge the office ofteach-
e' conduct one's self as a teacher: 1 Co. iv. 1 7. 2. in
construction ; a. either in imitation of the Ilebr. h TsS
(,Tob xxi. 22), or by an irregular use of the later (ireeks
(of which no well-attested example remains exc. one id
Plut. Marcell. c. 12), with dat. of person : τ^ Βαλάκ, Rev.
ii. 14 (ace. to the reading now generally accepted for the
Rec.""''' τόν Βαλ.) ; cf. Β. 149 (130) ; W. 223 (209), cf.
227 (213). b. ace. to the regular use, with ace. of pers.,
to teach one : used of .lesus and the apostles uttering in
public what they wished their hearers to know and re-
member, Mt. V. 2 ; Mk. i. 22 ; ii. 1 3 ; iv. 2 ; Lk. v. 3 ; Jn.
viii. 2 ; Acts iv. 2 ; v. 2,J ; xx. 20 ; tovs "ΐλλψαί, to act
the part of a teacher among the Greeks, .Jn. vii. 35 ; used
of those who enjoin upon others to observe some ordi-
nance, to embrace some opinion, or to obey some pre-
cept: Mt. v. 19: Acts XV. 1; Heb. viii. 11; with esp.
reference to the addition which the teacher makes to
the knowledge of the one he teaches, to impart instruc-
tion, instil doctrine into one : Acts xi. 26 ; .\.\i. 28 ; .In.
ix. 34 ; Ro. ii. 21 ; Col. iii. 16 ; 1 Jn. ii. 27 ; Rev. ii. 20.
c. the thing taught or enjoined is indicated by a foil,
on : Mk. viii. 31 ; 1 Co. xi. 14; by a foil, infin., Lk. xi.
1 ; Mt. xxviii. 20; Rev. ii. 14 ; jrepi rtvot, 1 .Jn. ii. 27;
(V Χριστώ δι8αχθηναι, to be taught in the fellowship of
Christ, E])h. iv. 21 ; foil, by an ace. of the thing, to teach
i. e. prescribe a thing : διδασκαλίας, (ντάΚματα ανθρώπων,
precepts wliich are commandments of men (fr. Is. xxix.
13), Mt. XV. 9 ; Mk. vii. 7, [B. 148 (129)] ; την oShv τοϋ
θ(οϋ, Mt. xxii. 16 : Mk. .xii. 14 ; Lk. xx. 21 : raCra, 1 'Ίΐηι.
iv. 11 ; a μη δίί. Tit. i. 1 1 ; tn ej-plnin, expound, a thintr:
Acts xviii. 11, 25; xxviii. 31 ; άποστασίαν άπο Μωνσίω!,
the necessity of forsaking Moses, Acts xxi. 21. d. with
ace. of pers. and of thing, ?o teach otie something [yV. 226
sq. (212); B. 149 (130)]: [eKflvos- νμάί διδά|« πάντα,
.Jn. xiv. 26]; τοϋ 8ι8άσκ(ΐν ΰμάί rifo τα στοιχύα, Heb. v.
12 (where R G Τ Tr and others read — not so well —
TiVa: [butcf. B. 260 (224) note, 268 (230) note]) ; (repovs
διδάξαι, sc. αντά, 2 Tim. ii. 2 ; hence pass, ίί^αχθήναί τι
[Β. 188 (163) ; W. 229 (215)] : Gal. i. 12 {Ϊ8ι8άχθην, sc.
airo'), 2 Th. ii. l.">.
8ι8αχή, -ης, η, (διδάσκω), [fr. Hdt. down] ; 1. teach-
ing, viz. that which is taught : Mk. i. 27 ; Jn. vii. 16 ; Acts
xvii. 19 ; Ro. [vi. 17]; xvi. 17 ; 2 Jn. 10 ; Rev. ii. 24 ; η
διδ. TITOS, one's doctrine, i. e. what he teaches : Mt. \ ii.
28 ; xvi. 12 ; xxii. 33 ; Mk. i. 22 ; xi. 18 ; Lk. iv. 32 ; Jn.
xviii. 19 ; Acts v. 28; Rev. ii. 14 sq. ; ή &ι8αχη of God,
τοϋ κυρίου: τοϋ Χρίστου, the doctrine which has (Jod,
Christ, the Lord, for its author and sujtporter : Jn. vii.
1 7 ; Acts xiii. 1 2 ; 2 Jn. 9 ; with the gen. of the object,
doctrine, teaching, concerning something : Heb. vi. 2 [W.
187 (176); 192 (181); 5S1 (513)]; i)lur. Heb. .xiii. 9.
2. [tlie act o(]teaching, instruction, (cf. διδασκαλία [on the
supposed distinction betw. the two words and their use
in the N. T. see Ellic. on 2 Tim. iv. 2 ; they are asso-
ciated in 2 Tim. iv. 2, 3 ; Tit. i. 9]) : Acts ii. 42 ; 2 Tim.
iv. 2 : f V τή Μαχή. irhile he was teaching, a phrase by
which the Evangelist indicates that he is about to cite
some of the many words which .Jesus spoke at that
time, Mk. iv. 2; xii. 38; τοϋ κατά την ΒιΒαχην πιστοί
λόγου, the faithful word ivhich is in accordance with the
received (2 Tim. iii. 14) instruction, Tit. i. 9 ; in partic•
δίδραχμου
145
^8ωμι
ular, the teaching of the δώάσκαλοΓ (q. v. 6) in the relig-
ious assemblies of Christians : XaXfiv ev δώσχη to speak
in the way of leaching, in distinction from otlier modes
of speaking in public, 1 Co. xiv. 6 ; ί;;^ω διδα;^^!', to have
something to teach, ibid. 26.*
SiSpa\^ov. -ου. τό. (neut. of the adj. δίδραχμοι, -ov, fc.
νόμίσμα; fr. Sis and 8ραχμη), a didraclimun or double-
ilrntlima, a silver coin equal to two Attic drachmas or
one Alexandrian, or half a shekel, [about one third of a
dollar] (see in apyipiov, 3) : Mt. .xvii. 24. (Sept. often
for Sptrj ; [PoU., Galen].) *
εί5υμας, -ij, -ov, and -or, -ov, twofold, twain, (double, Hom.
Od. 1!>, 227; as τρίΒυμο! triple, τ(τρά8νμος i|uadniple,
€7Γτπδυμο9) ; hence twin (sc. τταΐς, as τρίδυμοι παϊδβί. νΙοί,
Germ. Drillinr/e, three born at a birth), Ilebr. DSn, a
surname of the apostle Thomas [cf. Luthardt on the
first of the foil, pass.; B. D. s. v. Thomas]: Jn. xi. 16;
XX. 24 ; xxi. 2. (Hom. D. 23, 641.) *
δί8ωμι (διδώ, Rev. iii. 9 LTAVII ; [δ.δω Tr, yet see
WH. App. p. I»i7]), 3 pers. plur. Μόασι (Rev. xvii. 13
[not Rec.]), impv. δίδου (Jit. v. 42 RG); imi)f. 3 pers.
sin<r- ί'διδου, 3 pers. plur. eSiSow ( ίδιδοσαν, Jn. xix. 3 LT
TrWII [see ΐχω]) ; fut. δώσω; 1 aor. ϊδωκα [2 pers.
sing. -Kfs, Jn. x\ii. 7 Trmrg., S Trmrg. ; cf. reff. s. v.
«οτΓίαω], subjunc. δώσ?; [and δώσωμίχ] fr. an imaginary
indie, form ίδωσα, [Mk. vi. 37 Τ Trmrg.] ; Jn. xvii. 2 (Tr
mrg.AVIlδώσ«); Rev. viii. 3 (LTTr WII δώσί.: cf. ioi.
ad Phryn. p. 720 sq. ; B. 36 (31) ; W. 79 (76) ; [Veitch
s. V. 8ίί. fin., also Soph. Lex. s. v. and esp. Intr. p. 40 ;
WH. App. p. 172]); pf. δίδωκα [on tlie interchange
between the forms of the pf. and of ilic aor. in this verb
cf. B. 199 (172)]; plpf. {'δίδώχΓΐκ and without augm.
[W. § 12, 9 ; B. 33 (29)] 8e8o>K€tv, Mk. xiv. 44 : and L
txt.TTrWH in Lk. xix. 15 ; 3 pers. plur. δίδώ«ισαμ. .In.
zi. 57 ; 2 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. sing, δω [8ώη, Jn. xv. 1 (i Tr
mrg. ; Eph. i. 1 7 WH mrg. ; 2 Tim. ii. 2S L WH mrg. ;
ίοΓ, Mk. viii. 37 Τ Tr WH ; cf. B. 46 (40) ; WH. App. p.
16S ; Kuenen and Cobet, praef. p. Ixi.], plur. δώμΐκ, δώτί,
δωσιν, optat. 3 pers. sing. 8ώη for δοι'τ;, Ro. xv. 5 ; [2 Th.
iii. 16] ; 2 Tim. i. 16, 18 ; [ii. 2.5 Τ Tr WH txt. ; Eph. i.
17RG; iii. 16 RG] and elsewhere among the variants
([cf. Λν. § 14, 1 g.; B. 46 (40), cf. § 139, 37 and 62] ; see
[WH. App. u. s.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122:] Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 346; [Kiihner § 282 Anm. 2; A'eitch s. v. διδω^^ί ad
fin.]), impv. 6os, δότ(, inf. δοϋναι. ptcp. Sois; Pass., pf.
SfSopxu; 1 aor. ίδόθψ; 1 fut. δοθήσομαι; cf. B. 45 (39)
sq. ; [WH u. s.]. In the Sept. times without number for
[no, sometimes for 0>U ; and for Chald. 27)' ; [fr. Hom.
down] ; to give ;
A. absolutely and generally : μακάριόν iari μάλλον
διδόκαι, η λαμβάνίΐν, Acts χχ. 35.
Β. In construction ; I. τινί τι. to give something
to some one, — in various senses; 1. nf one's own ac-
cord to give one something, to his advantage; to bestow,
give as a gift : Mt. iv. 9 ; Lk. i. 32 ; xii. 32, and often ;
Ιοματα [cf. B. 148 (129)], Mt. vii. 11 ; Lk. xi. 13 ; Eph.
iv. 8 (Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19); τα υπάρχοντα what thou
hast Totf BTw^oir, Mt. xix. 21 ; χρήματα. Acts xxiv. 26.
2. to grant, give to one asking, let have : Mt. xii. 39 ; χΐτ.
7sq.; xvi. 4; xx. 23 ; Mk. vi. 22, 25; viii. 12; x. 40;
Lk. xi. 29 ; xv. 16 ; Jn. xi. 22 ; xiv. 16 ; xv. 16 ; xvi. 23 ;
Acts iii. 6 ; Jas. i. 5 ; [noteworthy is 1 Jn. v. 1 6 δώσ« (sc.
prob. ό peof) αίτω ζωήν τοΪγ άμαρτάνουσιν etc., where
αϋτω seems to be an ethical dat. and τ. άμαρ. dependent
on the verb; see B. 133 (116) note, cf. 179 (156); W.523
(487), cf. 530 (494)] ; in contradistinction from what
one claims: Jn. iii. 27; xix. 11. 3. to supply, furnish,
necessary things : as άρτον τινί, Mt. vi. 1 1 ; Lk. xi. 3 ; Jn.
vi. 32, 51 ; τροφήν, Mt. xxiv. 45 : βρύσιν, Jn. vi. 27 ; be-
sides in xMt. XXV. 15, 28 sq. ; Mk. ii. 26 ; iv. 25 ; Lk. vi.
4 ; viii. 18 ; xii. 42 ; xLx. 24, 26 ; Jn. iv. 10, 14, 1.3 ; Eph.
vi. 19. 4. to give over, deliver, i. e. a. to reach out,
extend, present: asMt. xiv. 19; xvii. 27; Mk. vi. 41 ;
xiv. 22 sq. ; Lk. ix. 16 ; xxii. 19 ; to ψωμίον, Jn. xiii. 26 ;
TO τιοτήριον, Jn. xviii. 1 1 ; Rev. .\vi. 1 9 ; tqs χ^Ίρας διδό-
vai to give one the hand. Acts ix. 41 ; Gal. ii. 9. b. of a
writing: αττοστάσιον, 5It. v. 31. c. to give to one's care,
intrust, commit; aa.. something to be administered;
Univ.: τταιτί ω (δόθη πολύ, Lk. xii. 4>ί; property, money,
Mt. XXV. 15 ; Lk. xix. 13, 15 ; άμπιλωνα, a vineyard to
be cidtivated, Mk. xii. 9 ; Lk. xx. 16; rat kKcIs [κΚύδας]
της βασ. Mt. xvi. 19; τήν κρίσιν, Jn. v. 22; κρίμα. Rev.
XX. 4; την (ξονσίαν ίαντων. Rev. xvii. 13 [not Rec.]; τα
fpya, iva τβλβίώσω αίτα, Jn. v. 36 ; το epyov, ΐνα ττοιήσω,
Jn. .xvii. 4; τό όνομα τοΟ 6(οΰ, to be declared, .In. xvu. il
[not Rec, 12 Τ Tr WII]. bb. to give or commit to some
one something to he rtligiousli/ observed : διαθήκην irepiTO-
μηί. Acts vii. 8 ; την πιριτομήν, the ordinance of circum-
cision, .In. vii. 22; τον νόμον, ibid. vs. 19; λόγια ζωντα.
Acts vii. 38. 5. to give what is due or obligatory, to
pay: wages or reward, Mt. xx. 4, 14 ; xxvi. 15; Rev. xi.
18; apyvpiov, as a reward, Alk. xiv. 11 ; Lk. xxii. 5;
taxes, tribute, tithes, etc. : Sit. xvii. 27; xxii. 17; Mk.
xii. 14(15); Lk. xx.22: xxiii. 2; Heb. vii. 4 ; βυσίακ sc. τώ
Kvpita, Lk. iL 24 (^υσι'αι^ αττοδοΟι^αι τω 6ftu, Joseph, antt.
7, 9,1); λόγοκ, τρηι-ΖίΓ ac(O!/ni, Ro. xiv. 12 [L txt. Trtxt.
άτΓοδ•]. 6. δίδωμι is joined with nouns denoting an
act or an effect ; and a. the act or effect of him who
gives, in such a sense that what he is said διδόναι (either
absolutely or with dat. of pers.) he is conceived of as
effecting, or as becoming its author. Hence δίδωμι
joined with a noun can often be changed into an active
verb expressing the effecting of that wliich the noun de-
notes. Thus διδόναι aivov τω θ(ω is equiv. to alvtiv το»
θ(όν, Lk. xviii. 43 : άπόκρισίν τινι i. q. άποκρίνΐσθαι. Jn.
i. 22 ; xix. 9 ; (γκοπήν δούναι τω €ναγγ€λίω i. q. ίγκότττην
το (ΰαγγ. to hinder (the progress of) the gospel, 1 Co.
i.x. 12; (ντοΧην τινι i. q. ftntWfodat τινι, Jn. xi. 57; xii.
49 ; xiii. 34 ; 1 Jn. iii. 23 ; δόξαν τινί i. q. δοξάζιιν τιμά (see
δόξα. Π.) ; (ργασίαν, after the Lat. ojicram dare, tale
pains, [A. Λ'. give diligence'}, i. q. (ρ•γάζ(σθαι, Lk. xii. 58 ;
[σνμβοΐίλιον, cf. the Lat. consilium dare, i. q. σ-υμβου\(ν•
(σβαι. Mk. iii. 6 Tr txt. WH txt.] ; διαστολής tiw i. q.
διaστCK\ftv τι, 1 Co. xiv. 7 ; jropayyeXiai', 1 Th. iv. 2 ;
■ηαράκΧησιν. 2 Th. ii. 16; (λ(οί i. q. ί\((Ίν. 2 Tim. i. 16,
18 ; ayaivnv, show [A. V. bestow], 1 Jn. iii. 1 ; ϊκδϊκησιν,
8ί8ωμι
146
ΒίΒωμί
2 Th. i. 8 ; βασανισμόν, Rev. xviii. 7 ; μάπισμα i. q. ραπί-
ζ(ΐν τινά, .)η. xviii. 22 ; .χίχ. 3 ; φίλημα i. (). φιλίϊκ τίνα.
Lk. νίϊ. 45. οΓ b. the noun denotes something to bo
(lone by liim to whom it is said to be given : δώόναι t4w
μίτάνοιαν, to cause him to rei)ent, Acts v. 31 ; xi. 18;
γνώσιν σωτηρία!, Lk. i. 77 ; Λπίδα τίκί, 2 Th. ii. 16. 7.
Joined with nouns dcnotin•; slrin^'th, faculty, power,
virtue, δί&ωμι (τινί τι) is e(|uiv. to h, funtial,, endue, (one
with a tiling) : Lk. xxi. IS (δώσω ΰμίν στόμα κ. σοφίαν) ;
Acts vii. 10; (ξυυσίαν, Mt. ix. 8 ; χ. 1 ; Lk. χ. 19; .In.
xvii. 2; Kev. ii. 2(i ; vi. 8; xiii. 7; διάνοιαν, 1 .In. v. 20;
σύνισιν, 2 Tim. ii. 7 ; and in the very common phrase
tiSovai TO πνινμα. [I'. δ• "i-i rtvostu give to one (a
part) «/etc. : Rev. ii. 1 7 (G L Τ Tr WH) δώσω αύτώ τοϋ
μάννα, cf. W. 1Π8 (186); Β. 159 (139).]
II. δίδωμί τι without a dative, and δίδωμί τίνα. 1.
δίδωμίτι; a. with tlie force of lo cause, produce, give
forth from one's self: ύ(τόν, from heaven, Jas. v. 18;
καρπόν, Mt. xiii. 8 ; Mk. iv. 7, 8 sq., (Deut. xxv. 19 ; Sir.
xxiii. 25) ; σι;;ΐίία, Mt. xxiv. 24 ; Mk. xiii. 22 [not Tdf.] ;
Acts ii. 19, (Ex. vii. 9 ; Deut. xiii. 1, etc.) ; xmohfiypji,
Jn. xiii. 15; φ«'γγοΓ, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24, (φώϊ,
Is. xiii. 10); φωνην, 1 Co. xiv. 7 sq. ; δια της γλώσσηί
Xoyov, ibid. 9 ; γνώμην, to give one's opinion, to give ad-
vice, 1 Co. vii. 25; 2 Co. viii. 10. b. διδόΐΌΐ κλήρονι
(^"'IJ ΙΠ3, Lev. xvi. 8), lo //ire i. e. hand out lots, sc. to
be cast into the urn [see xXijpot, 1], Acts i. 26. c. δίδωμί
τι with pred. ace. : Mt. xx. 28 ; Mk. x. 45, (to give up as a
λΰτροκ) ; Mt. xvi. 26 ; Mk. viii. 37, (to pay as an equiv-
alent). 2. δίδωμί τίνα ; a. wliere the noun refers to
the office one bears, lo appoint : κριτάς, Acts xiii. 20. b.
to cause to come forth : δίδωμι ίκ της συναγωγής τοϋ ΐατανά
των \(γ6ντων (sc. τι^άί [cf. Β. 158 (138) ; W. § 59, 4 b.]).
Rev. iii. 9 ; so also the sea, death. Hades, are said to
give {up) the dead who have been engulfed or received
by them. Rev. xx. 13. 3. δίδωμί τιι/ά τινι; a. to give
one to some one as his own : as the object of his saving
care, Ileb. ii. 13 ; to give one to some one, to follow liim
as a leader and master, .In. vi. 37, 39 ; x. 29 ; xvii. 6, 9,
12 [but see B. I. 4. c. aa. above], 24 ; xviii. 9 ; in these
pass. God is said to have given certain men to Christ,
i. e. to have disposed them to acknowledge Christ as the
author and medium of their salvation, and to enter into
intimate relations with him, hence Christ calls them 'his
own' (τα {μά, .Τη. χ. 14). b. to give one to some one to
care for his interests: Jn. iii. 16 {ίδωκ(ν sc. αϋτώ, i. e. τώ
κόσμω); Acts xiii. 21. c. to give one to some one to vhnm
he already belonged, to return: Lk. vii. 15 (ix. 42 άπί-
δωχ€ [so Lmrg. in vii. 15]). d. δίδωμι ϊμαυτόν τικι, to
one demanding of me something, / give mt/selfup as it
were; an hyiierbole for disregarding entirely my private
interests, I give as much as ever I can : 2 Co. viii. 5. 4.
δίδωμί Tiva with a predicate ace. : {αντον τύπον, to render
or set forth one's self as an example, 2 Th. iii. 9 ; with
a predicate of dignity, olfice, function, and a dat. of
the per.«on added for whose benefit some one invested
Λνίΐΐι said dignity or oHice is given, that is. Is l/eslotred :
αΰτον ΐδωκιν κίφαλην ίιπίρ πάντα tji ί'κκΚησία, head over
all things to the ehurch, Eph. i. 22 ; ίδωκιν tovs μϊν απο-
στόλου! κτλ. sc. Tjj ίκκλησία. Eph. iv. 11. For in neither
of these ])assages are vm obUged, with many inter])reter8,
to translate the word appointed, made, after the use of
the Ilebr. jjij ; esp. since in the second Paul seems to
wish to confirm the words (juoted in vs. 8, (δωκ( δύματα
Tois άνθρωποι!• Those in the church whom Christ has
endued with gifts and functions for the connnon advan-
tage the ai>ostle reckons among the δύματα given by him
after his ascension to heaven.
III. Phrases in which to the verb δίδωμι, cither stand-
ing alone or joined to cases, there is added 1. an
infinitive, either alone or with an accusative ; δίδωμί τινι
foil, by an infin. denoting the object : δίδωμί τινι φαγιΐν,
give, supply, something to eat, give food [B. 261 (224);
W. 318 sq. (299)], Mt. xiv. 16; xxv. 35, 42; Mk. vi. 37;
V. 43 ; Lk. viii. 55 ; ix. 13 ; Rev. ii. 7 ; π«ίκ, .In. iv. 7, 10 ;
with the addition of an object ace. depending on the
φαγ(Ίν or ττκίι/ ; Mt. xxvii. 34 ; Mk. xv. 23 [R G L] ; with
an ace. added depending on the verb δίδωμι : .In. vi. 31 ;
Rev. xvi. 6 ; foil, by an infin. indicating design [cf. B.
u. s.], to grant or permit one to etc. : Lk. i. 73 sq. (δοΰκαι
ήμΐν άφόβω! λατρ(ύ(ΐν αΰτω) ; .Jn. V. 26 ; Acts iv. 29 ; Ro.
XV. 5; Eph. iii. 16 ; Rev. iii. 21 ; vi. 4 ; vii. 2 ; [foil, by els
with the infin. : Ro. xv. 16, cf. B. 265 (228)] ; by aconstr.
borrowed from the Hebrew, καΐ δώσω to'is . . ■ κα'ι πρυφη-
τίύσουσι. Rev. xi. 3; in the passive, Mt. xiii. 12; Mk. iv.
1 1 {ΰμ'ιν δίδοται γνώναι [(! L Τ Tr ^Vll om. γνώναι] to you
it has been granted etc.); foil, by the ace. and inf.:
δώη [LTTrWII δώ] ύμ'ιν . ■ . κατοικησαι τον Χριστοί' ίν
τα'ΐ! καρδίαΐ! νμών, Ε])1ι. iii. 16 sq. ; ί'δωκίν αΰτον ΐμφανη
γινίσθμι. Acts χ. 40 ; ου δώσ(ΐ! τον όσιόν σου ίδ(Ίν δια-
φθοράν (fr. Ps. XV. (xvi.) 10), Acts ii. 27; xiii. 35. 2.
δίδωμί τινι, foil, by ίνα, lo grant or permit, that etc. [B.
238 (205) ; W. 337 (316), cf. .545 (507)] : Mk. x. 37 ; Rev.
xix. 8. to commission, Rev. i.\. 5.
IV. δίδωμί τι, or τικί τι, or τιχί or τινά, foil, hy a prep-
psition with a noun (or pronoun) ; 1. τιν\ ex τινυς [cf.
W.§28,1; 15. 159 (139)]; δάτf ήμ'ιν (ά part) (ΚτοϋϊΧαίου
υμών, Mt. XXV. 8 ; tx τώχ άρτων, easily to be siqjjilied fmiu
the context, Mk. ii. 26 ; Lk. vi. 4 ; t'x τοΟ πν(ύματο! οΰτοϋ
ΐδωκ(ν ήμΐν, 1 Jn. iv. 13 ; otherwise in Jn. iii. 34 ό ifos οϋ
δίδωσι το πνιϋμα f'x μίτρου, by measure i. e. according to
measure, moderately, [cf. W. §51, 1 d.] ; otherwise in
Rev. iii. 9 δίδωμι ίκ τ^γ συνα-γωγης, (see II. 2 b. above).
τιιΊ από τιΐΌ? : Lk. xx. 10 Ίνα οπο τοϋ καρπον τοϋ αμπελώ-
να! δώσιι. [LT TrWII δώσουσιΐ'] αντώ, sc. the portion
due. τί foil, by et! with a noun, lo give something to be
put into, Lk. vi. 38 μίτρον δώσουσιν (is τ!>ν κόλπον υμών
(shall they give i. e. pour into your bosom), or upon, Lk.
XV. 22 δότί δακτύλιον els την χ('φα αυτού (put a ring on
his hand) ; ei! τον άγρόν for the field, to pay its price, Mt.
xxvii. 10; τικί τι iis τα! χιΊρα!, Ιο commit a thing to one,
deliver it into one's power: Jn. xiii. 3 (Ilebr. "3 T3 ]Π3,
Gen. ix. 2 ; xiv. 20 ; Ex. iv. 21 ) ; fit τ. διάνοιαν, or fVl τάι
καρδία! (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 33), put into the mind, fasten
upon the heart, Ileb. viii. 10; x. Ifi; or (if τ. καρδία! with
inf. of the thing, Rev. xvii. 1 7 ; (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2, 20 διδόναι
Bieyeipci
147
Ζιίρ-χομαι
Tivi τι eli την ^|nJχηv). Ιαντον hihovai fls with acc. of place,
to betake one's self somewhere, to go into some place :
Acts xix. 31, («s τότΓουΕ παραβόλου^, Polyb. 5, 14, 9; ti's
τόπους τραχ(ίς^ Diod. 14, '^1 ; (Is Tas (ρημίαί, Diod. 5, 59 ;
Joseph, antt. 15, 7, 7 ; dt κώμην τινά, rIo^eph. antt. 7, 9, 7).
2. δίδωμί τι ev τινι, i. e. to be or remain in, so that it is in,
[of. AV. 414 (386) ; B. 329 (283)] : ev ττ, χαρί tivos, Jn.
iii. 35 ; €1/ τάις καρδίαίς, 2 Co. i. 22 ; fv ttj καρ8. τινός, 2 Co.
viii. 16, (cf. 1 K. X. 24) ; (ΐρήνην Boivai iv rf/ yj to bring
peace to be on earth, Lk. xii. 51. 3. δίδωμΙ τι imip
Tivor, give up for etc. [cf. W. 383 (358) sq.] : Jn. vi. 51 ;
tavTov xmip Tivos, Tit. ii. 14 ; ίαντον άντίλντρον νπίρ Tivos,
1 Tim. ii. 6 ; (αυτόν nepi [R WH txt. ύπίρ ; cf. nepi, I. c. δ.]
των αμαρτιών, for sins, i. e. to expiate them. Gal. i. 4.
4. diSovai Tivi κατά τα (pya, την πρΰζιν, to give one acc.
to his works, to render to one the reward of his deeds :
Rev. ii. 23 [Ps. xxvii. (xxviii.) 4] ; (cf. άττο8ώσ(ΐ, Mt. xvi.
27; Ro. ii. 6). 5. Hebraistically, δί'δωκα ΐνώπιόν σου
θύραν άνιωγμίνην Ι have set before thee a door opened
i. e. have caused the door to be open to thee. Rev. iii. 8.
[Syn. SiSovai, ζωρΐΐσθαι: SiS. to give in general, an-
tithetic to λάμβαναν ; Sap. specific, to bestow, present ; SiS. might
be used even of e ν i 1 s, but δωρ. could be used of such things
only ironically ; see δόμα, fin. Comp. : oco-, άπο-, ανταπο-,
δίο-, 4κ-, €ΐΓί-, μετά-, τταρα-, ιτρο- δίδωμι.]
Si-e-yetpu ; 1 aor. Sirjycipa ; Pass., impf. διη-γιιρόμην [but
TrAVH (Tedd. 2, 7) eifytipfi-oin Jn. vi. 18,cf. B. 34 (30) ;
WH. App. p. 161] ; 1 aor. ptcp. heyepdfis; to wake up,
awaken, arouse (from repose ; differing from the simple
€γ(ίρω, which has a wider meaning) ; from sleep : τινά,
Mk. iv. 38 [here Τ Tr WH f'yf ιρουσιν] ; Lk. viii. 24 ; pass.,
Lk. viii. 24 TTr txt. WII ; .Mk. iv. 39 ; with the addi-
tion άπο τοϋ ύπνου, Mt. i. 24 (L Τ Tr WH iyepdeis) ; from
repose, (juiet : in pass, of the sea, which begins to be agi-
tated, to rise, Jn. vi. 18. Metaph. to arouse the min/l ;
stir up, render active: 2 Pet. i. 13 ; iii. 1, as in 2 Mace.
XV. 10, Tim Tois θυμο'ΐί. (Several times in the O. T.
Apocr. [cf. W. 102 (97)]; Hippocr., [Aristot.], Hdian.;
occasionally in Anthol.) *
ει-(νθυμ<Όμαι, -οϋμαι ; to wcir/h in the mint!, consider : jrepi
TITOS, Acts X. 19, for Rec. ϊνθυμ. (Besides, only in eccl.
writ.) *
δι-ίξ-ί'ρχομαι : [2 aor. δ^Ι^λ^οκ] ; to go out through
something ; δΐ(ζ(\βηνσα, sc. δια (jypvyaviuv. Acts xxviii. 3
Tdf. edd. 2, 7. (Sept. ; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph., Hdt.],
Eur. down.) *
Si-c'^-oSos, -ου, η ; fr. Hdt. down ; a way out through,
outlet, exit : 5ιίξο&οι των οδών, Mt. xxii. 9, lit. wai/s through
which ways go out, i. e. acc. to the context and the design
of the parable places before the city where the roads from
the country terminate, therefore outlets of the country high-
ways, the same being also their entrances; [cf. Ob. 14;
Ezek. xxi. 21 ; the R. V. renders it partings of the high-
ways']. The phrase figuratively represents the territory
of heathen nations, into which the apostles were about to
go forth, (as is well shown by Fischer, De vitiis le.xx. N. T.
p. 634 sqq.). Used of the boundaries of countries, it is
equiv. to the Hebr. ηιΚϊΐη, Num. xxxiv. 4 sq. 8 sq., and
often in the book of Joshua, [cf. Rieder, Die zusammen-
gesetzten Verba u. s. w. p. 18. Others understand the
crossings or thoroughfares here to represent the most
frequented spots.]*
δι-ίρμηνίία, -as, ή, (δΐ(ρμην(νω, q- v.), interpretation: of
obscure utterances, 1 Co. xii. 10 L txt. (Not yet found
elsewhere.) '
8ι-ίρμ.ην£νΓή5, -οΰ, ό, (δΐ(ρμην(νω, q. v.), an interpreter:
1 Co. xiv. 28 [LTr Wllmrg. (ρμην.]. (Eccles. writ.)*
ει-€ρμην(νω ; impf. 8ιηρμήν(νον and (without augm. cf.
B. 34 (30)) δι(ρμήν(υον (Lk. xxiv. 27 L Tr mrg.) ; 1 aor.
(also without augm. ; so " all early Mss." Hort) Sup-
μήνιυσα (Lk. 1. c. Τ Tr txt. ΛΥΗ) ; [pres. pass, δκρμηνιϋο-
μαι] ; to interpret [δια' intensifying by marking transition,
(cf. Germ, verdeutlichen) ; Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt.
V. p. 10 sq.] ; 1. to unfold the meaning of what is said,
explain, expound : τι, Lk. xxiv. 27 ; absolutely, 1 Co. xii.
30; xiv. 5, 13, 27. 2. to translate into one's native
language : Acts ix. 36, (2 Mace. i. 36 ; Polyb. 3, 22, 3,
and several times in Philo [cf. Siegfried, Glossar. Phil.
S.V.]).*
8ι-{ρχομ.αι; impf. διηρχόμην; fut. δΐ(\(ΰσομαι (Lk. ii.
35 ; see W. 86 (82) ; [cf. B. 58 (50)]) ; 2 aor. δι^λ^ο.-;
pf. ptcp. δκληλυθώί (Heb. iv. 14); [fr. Horn, down];
1. where διό has the force of through (Lat. per; [cf.
διό, C.]) : to go through, pass through, [on its construc-
tions cf. W. § 52, 4, 8] ; a. διό τίνος, to go, walk, jour-
ney, pass through a place (Germ, den Durchweg neh-
men) : Mt. xii. 43 ; xix. 24 R L Tr mrg. WH mrg. ; Mk.
X. 25 [Rec." fi'aeXifli/] ; Lk. xi. 24 ; xviii. 25 L Tr mrg. ;
Jn. iv. 4 ; 1 Co. x. 1 ; δια μίσου αϋτων, through the midst
of a crowd, Lk. iv. 30 ; Jo. viii. 59 Rec. ; [δια μίσου (L Τ
Tr WH δ. μΐσον, see διά, Β. I.) Σαμαρύας, Lk. xvii. 11];
δι' ΰμων, i. e. διά τήί χώρα! υμών, 2 Co. i. 1 6 (where Lchni.
txt. άπ€\θ(Ίν) ; [δια πάντων sc. των άyίωv (see πάί, II. 1),
Acts ix. 32]. b. with acc. to travel the road which leads
through a place, go, pass, travel through a region : Lk.
xix. 1 ; Acts xii. 10 ; xiii. 6 ; xiv. 24 ; .xv. 3, 41 ; xvi. 6 ;
xvii. 23 (τά σ(βάσματα) ; xviii. 23 ; xix. 1,21; xx. 2 ; 1 Co.
.xvi. 5; Heb. iv. 14; of a thing: την >\τυχην δΐίΚ(ΰσίταί
ρομφαία, penetrate, pierce, Lk. ii. 35, (of a spear, dart,
with gen. Horn. II. 20, 263; 23, 876). c. absolutelv:
(κ(ίνη! SC. όδοΰ (δι' before «ei'wjs in Rec. is spurious) ήμ(\-
\f δΐ(ρχ(σθαι, for he was to pass that way, Lk. xix. 4.
d. Avith specification of the goal or limit, so that the pre^
fix διά makes reference to the intervening space to be
passed through or gone over: ΐνθάδι, Jn. iv. 15 Τ AVH,
Trmrg. ; [fit τήκ Άχαι'αΐ', Acts xviii. 27]; «s το nepav,
to go, cross, over to the farther shore, Jlk. iv. 35 ; Lk.
viii. 22 ; ό θάνατος διήλθαν tis πάντας ανθρώπους, passed
through unto all men, so that no one could escape its
power, Ro. v. 12 ; ίως τινός, go even unto, etc. Lk. ii. 15 ;
Acts ix. 38 ; xi. 19, 22 R G [W. 609 (566)]. 2. where
διά answers to the Latin dis [cf. διά, C] ; to go to differ-
ent places (2 Chr. xvii. 9 ; Am. vi. 2) : Acts viii. 4, 40 ;
[x. 38] ; δΐ(λθόντ(ς άπο της Πιργης having departed from
Perga sc. to various places. Acts xiii. 14 [al. refer this
to 1, understanding δΐίλθόιττίς oi passing through the ex-
Βι^ρωτΜΟ
148
Βίκαιο^
tout of country] ; tv mt ^ιηλθον nmonrj ii'hom i. e. in
whose countrv / m nt nhtmi, or visiti-il different places,
Acts x.\. 2.) ; ίιήμχοντιι κατά τιΊί κώμας tliev went about
in various Uiiecliuns from one village to another, Lk. ix.
(i ; of a report, to spread, i/o abroad : Βιίμχιται 6 Xo-yos,
Lk. V. 15; Thuc. 6, 46; Xen. an. 1, 4, 7. [Syn. see
(ρχομαι.] '
ει-«ρωτάω : 1 aor. ptep. δiff,ωτησas ; In ask through (i. e.
ask many, one after another) : W, to find out by asking,
to ini|uire out. Acts x. 17. (Xen., Plat., Dem., Polyb.,
Dio Cass. 43, 10 ; 48, 8.) Gf. Win. De verb. comp. etc.
Pt. V. p. 1.5.•
δ«τή5, -f'f, (Si's and fror), [fr. Ildt. down], of two years,
two years old : diro SifToCs sc. ttoiSos, Jit. ii. 1 6, cf. Fritzsche
ad loc. ; [otliers take SiiroOt here as neut. ; see Meyer].*
Sicrla, -as, η, (from tuTT)s, cf. τρκτία, τίτραβτιη), the
space of tivo years: Acts x.xiv. 27; xxviii. 30. (Philo
in Flacc. § IG ; [Grace. Ven. Gen. xli. 1 ; xlv. 5].) *
ει^γ€Όμ.αι, -οϋμαι. [impv. 2 pers. sing. iiij-yoO, ptcp. διι;-
yovpfvos^ ; fut. ^ιηγησομαι ', 1 aor. δίηγησάμην ', to lead or
carry a narration Ihrouyh to the end, (cf. the fig. use of
Germ, durc/ifutircn) ; set forth, recount, relate in full :
absol. Ilcb. xi. 32; τι, describe, Acts viii. 33 (see yfvta,
3) ; Tivi foil. Ijy indir. disc, πώς etc., Mk. v. 16 ; Acts ix.
27 ; xii. 1 7 [here Τ om. Tr br. tlie dat.] ; foil, by a elSov,
.Mk. ix. 9; όσα ίποίΐ)σ€ or (ποίησαν, Lk. viii. 39; ix. 10.
(Arstph., Thuc., Xen., Plat., al. ; Sept. often for ISO.)
[CoMI'. : «-Sti/ye'o/jat.] *
δι-ήγησ-ΐϊ, -ίωί, ή, (Siijye'ofiai), a narration, narrative:
Lk. i. 1 ; used of the Gosjiel narratives also in Euseb.
h. e. 3, 24, 7 ; 3, 39, 1 2 ; cf. Grimm in the Jahrbb. f. deutsilie
Theol. 1871, p. 36. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.; Sir. vi. 35
(34); ix. 15, etc.; 2 Mace. ii. 32; vi. 17.)*
δι-ηνίκήβ, -f's, (fr. 8ίήν(γκα, &ιαφίμω, as the simjile
ηνίκής fr. ήιχγκα, φίμω), fr. Ilom. down, continuous:
fit TO diij^Kif, continually, lleb. vii. 3 ; x. 1, 12, 14, (δι-
κτάτωμ fV το 5ιην(κίς ημίθη, Α])ρ. b. c. 1, 4).*
διθάλασσος, -ον, (δίΓ and ^ιίλίίσσα) ; 1. resembling
[οτ formingl two seas : thus of the Euxine Sea, Strab. 2,
5, 22; Dion. Per. 156. 2. lying between two seas, i.e.
washed by the sea on botli sides (Dio Chrys. 5 p. 83) :
τόπος δίθάλασσος, an isthmus or tongue of land, the ex-
tremity of which is covered by tlie waves, Acts xxvii.
41; al. understand liere a projecting reef or bar against
which the waves dash on both sides ; in opposition cf.
Meyer ad loc. (In Clem. hom. p. 20, ed. Dressel [Kp.
Petr. ad Jacob. § 14], men αλόγιστοι κ. ϊνδοιάζοντα π(μ\
των της άληθιίας (παγγιλμάτων are allegoricaUy styled
ΤίίτΓοι διθύλασσοί fit κα\ βημίώδΐΐς.) *
ει•ϊκvioμαι [L Wll Suic>'.(see I, ι)], -ονμαι ; logo through,
penetrate, pierce: Ilcb. iv. 12. (Ex. xxvi. 28 ; Thuc,
Theophr., Pint., al. ; in Homer transitively, to go through
in narrating.)'
δι-ίστημι: 1 aor. Σύστησα; 2 aor. ίιϊστην; [fr. Horn,
down] ; to place .separately, put asunder, disjoin ; in the
mid. [or pass.] and the pf. and 2 aor. act. to stand apart,
to part, depart : βρα)^ν δ< δίαστ^σαι /Tff, sc ίαντοΰς or την
vavv (ef. B. 47 (41)), when they had gone a little distance
viz. from the place before mentioned, i. e. }iaving gone
a little farther. Acts xxvii. 28; of time: &ίαστάαης ΰιμα<
μιϋί one hour haviiig intervened, Lk. xxii. :>'.); διίστη
απ' αϋτίν parted, withdrew from them, Lk. xxiv. 51.*
δι-ϊιτχυρίζομαι [L \V 1 1 δασχ. (see I, «)] : impf. δΰσχνμιζό•
μην; 1. to lean upon. 2. to aj/irm stoutly, a.iserl
confidently: Lk. xxii. 59; Acts xii. 15. (Lys., Isae.,
Plat., Dem., Joseph, antt. 2, 6, 4 ; Ael. hist. an. 7,18;
Dio Cass. 57, 23; al.) •
[δικάζω; 1 aor. |)ass. (δικάσθην; fr. Horn, down; to
Jnilyi', pass judgment: absol. Lk. vi. 37 Tr mrg. (al. κα-
τηδ«.).•]
δικαιοκρκτία, -ur, η, rigliteous judgment : Ivo. ii. 5. (an
uncert. trans, in llos. vi. 5 [where Sept. κμίμα^; Test,
xii. patr. [test. Levi § 3] p. 547, and [§ 15J p. 581, ed.
Fabric. ; Justin. Mart. resp. de resurrect, xi. (15) 28 p.
360 ed. tert. Otto; [Hippol. p. 801 a.ed. Migne] ; Basil
iii. p. 476 d. ed. (iarn. or p. 694 ed. Par. alt. 1839. [Cf.
W. L'5: 99 (94)].)•
δ£καιθ5, -aia, -αίον, (ίτ. δίκη right), [fr. Ilom. down],
pro]), the Ilebr. ρ^^ϊ, observant of ή δίκη, righteous, ob-
serving divine and human laws ; one who is such as hi•
ought to he ; (Germ, rechtbescha/l'cn ; in the earlier lan-
guage, whence ap[)ropriated by Luther, gerecht in a
broad sense; in (irk. writ, used even of physical things,
as Ίπποί, Xen. mem. 4, 4, 5 ; γήδιον δικαιότατοι/, most fer-
tile, Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 38; [άρμα δίκαιον, ib. 2, 2, 26]) ; 1.
in a wide sense, upright, righteous, virtuous, keeping Ihi•
commands of God ; a. univ. : Mt. i. 19 (the meaning is,
it was not consistent with his uprightness to expose his
betrothed to ])ublic reproach); Mt. x. 41 ; xiii. 43, 49,•
xxiii. 28; XXV. 37, 46 ; Lk. i. 6, 17; xiv. 14; xviii. 9; xx.
20 ; Ro. V. 7 [cf. W. 1 1 7 (1 1 1)] ; 1 Tim. i. 9 ; Jas. v. 6,
16; 1 Pet. iii. 12; 1 Jn. iii. 7, [10 Lchm.] ; Rev. xxii.
11; opp. to άμαρτω\ο\ και άσ(βΰς, 1 Pet. iv. 18; δίκαιοι
κάΊ άδικοι, Mt. V. 4 J ; Acts xxiv. 15 ; used of O. T. char-
acters noted for piety and probity : Mt. xiii. 1 7 ; [xxiii.
29] ; Ileb. xii. 23 ; thus of Abel, Mt. xxiii. 35 ; Ileb. xi.
4 ; of Lot, 2 Pet. ii. 7 sq. (Sap. x. 4 S(|.) ; of those who
seem to themselves to be righteous, who pride them-
selves on their virtues, whether real or imaginary : Mt.
ix.13; Mk.ii.l7; Lk. v. 32; xv. 7, (Eccl. vii. 1 7 (16))•
.Joined with (ϋλαβίις, Lk. ii. 25 (ήθη (νλαβή κ- δίκαια, το
δίκαιον κ. ιϋλαβίς, Plat, polit. p. 311 a. b.) ; with άγιοϊ,
Mk.vi. 20; with άγαβόε, Lk. xxiii. 50; with φοβούμινος τ!>ν
6(όν, Acts χ. 22; tpr^a δίκαια, opp. ίυπονημά, 1 Jn. iii. 12.
Neut. τύ δίκαιον, that which regaril J'lir duty demands, what
is right: 2 Pet. i. 13; plur. Phil. iv. 8; δίκαιοι/ (Vti, Eph.
vi. 1 ; Phil. i. 7 ; witli the addition of ϊνώπιοντον θ<υΰ, God
being judge, Acts iv. 19. b. the negative idea preilomi-
nating: innocent, faultless, guiltless, (for 'pi, Prov. i. 11 ;
Job ix. 23, etc) ; thus used of Christ in the speech of
Gentiles: Mt. xxvii. 19, 24 RG Lbr. Trbr. WII mrg.;
Lk. xxiii. 47; αίμα δίκαιον (Prov. vi. 17; Joel iii. 19
(24) ; Jon. i. 14), Mt. xxiii. 35 ; [xxvii. 4 Tr mrg. WII
txt.] ; η fvToXti άγια κ δικαία (having no fellowship
with sin [al. al., .see the Comm. ad loc]) <t. αγαθή, Ro. vii.
12. c. preeminently, of him whose way of thinking,
Βικαιοσύνη
149
6ικαίοσύι/η
feeling, and acting is wholly conformed to the will of
God, and who therefore needs no rectification in heart or
life ; in this sense Christ alone can be called SUaws : Acts
vii. 52; xxii. 14 ; 1 Pet. iii. 18; 1 .In. ii. 1 ; uytos κ. SUaws,
Acts iii. 14 ; among tlie rest of mankind it is rightly de-
nied that one Βίκαιης can Ijc found, Ιίο. iii. 10 (Keel. vii.
21 (20) άνθρωπος ουκ ecrrt δίκαιος f f τι) γί;, ος ποιησ€ί αγαθοί/
κα\ οΰχ άμαρτήσ(ται). of God: hulij, Ro. iii. 26 (ivhcre
it is to be closely rendered just or riijhfeous, on account
of the following κα\ τον δικαιονντα and the justifier or who
pronounces righteous, but the substantial meaning is
holy, that quality by virtue of which he hates and pun-
ishes sin) ; 1 Jn. ii. 29. d. contextually, approved of
God, acceptable to God, (Germ, fjottwolilf/ejdllir/) : Ro. v.
19; with the addition eV πίστεως, acceptable to God by
faith [W. 130 (129)]: Ro. i. 17; Gal. iii. 11; Ileb. x. 38;
δι'κ. παρά τώ θιώ, Ro. ii. 13. 2. In a narrower sense,
rendering to each his due ; and that in a judicial sense, pass-
in g Just judr/ment on others, whether expressed in words or
shown by the manner of dealing with them : Tit. i. 8 ;
so of God recompensing men impartially according to
their deeds, Rev. .\vi. 5 ; in the same sense also in Jn.
xvii. 25 (who does not award the same fate to the loving
and faitliful disciples of Christ and to ' the world ') ; 1
•In. i. 9 (who executes the laws of his government, and
therefore also the law concerning the pardon of sins) ;
ό δίκαιο! κριτής, of Christ, 2 Tim. iv. 8 ; κρίσις δικαία, Jn.
V. 30; vii. 24; 2 Th. i. 5; plur.. Rev. .xvi. 7; xix. 2; at
όδοι τ. θΐον δίκαιαι κ. άΧηθιναι, Rev. χν. 3 ; neut. το δίκαιον,
what is due to others, Col. iv. 1 ; what is agreeable to
justice and law, Lk. xii. 57 ; δίκαιον sc. (στίν, it is agreeable
to justice, 2 Th. i. 6 ; accordant with deserts, j\It. xx. 4,
and 7 Rec. [See reff. s. v. δικαιόω, fin. ; cf. αγαθός, lin.] *
δικαιοστίνη, -T/t, ^, (δι'καιοί) ; most frequently in Sept.
for ρΐϊ and ΠΡΙΧ, rarely for ΊΟΠ ; the virtue or qualiti/
or state of one who is δίκαιος; 1. in the broad sense,
the state of him who is such as he ought to be, righteousness
(Germ. Rechtheschaffenheit) ; the condition acceptable to
Gnd (Germ. Gottwohlgefalligkeit) ; a. univ. : Xo'yor της
δικαιοσύνης (like λόγο9 της καταΧλαγης, λ. τον σταυρόν),
the doctrine concerning the way in which man may at-
tain to a state approved of God, Heb. v. 13; βασίλίύς
δικαιοσύνης, the king ivho himself has the approbation of
God, and who renders his subjects acceptable to God,
Heb. vii. 2 ; cf. Bleek ad loc. b. integrity, virtue, purity
of life, upriqhtness, correctness in thinkinq, feeling, and
acting: Mt. iii. 15; v. 6, 10,20; vi. 1 GLTTrWII; Acts
xiii. 10 ; xxiv. 25 ; Ro. vi. 13, 16, 18-20 (opp. to αμαρτία,
ανομία, and ακαθαρσία) ; Ro. viii. 10 (opp. to αμαρτία) ;
Ro. xiv. 17 (? [seec.]) ; 2 Co.vi. 7, 14 (opp. to ανομία, as in
Xen.mem. 1,2, 24); 2 Co. .xi. 15; Eph.v. 9; vi. 14; Phil,
ill; 1 Tim. vi. 11; 2Tim. ii. 22; iii. 16; iv. 8; Tit. iii. 5;
Heb. i. 9; xii. 11 ; Jas. iii. 18 ; 1 Pet. iii. 14 ; 2 Pet. ii. 5,
21 ; iii. 13, and very often in the O. T. ; (v άδω δικαιοσύνης,
walking in the way of righteousness i. q. an upright,
righteous, man, Mt. .xxi. 32 ; τοϋ θ(οϋ, the righteousness
which God demands, Mt. vi. 33 ; Jas. i. 20 ; of righteous-
ness which manifests itself in beneficence : 2 Co. ix. 9 sq.
(cf. Tob. xiv. 11; Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p. 1151; so
Chald. n^"1V, Dan. iv. 24, and in the Talmud and rabbin,
writ. [Btixtorf. col. 1891 (p. 941 ed. Fischer) ; cf.W. 32]) ;
wliere δικ. mii ασιάτης are connected, — hk. i. 75 ; Eph.
iv. 24, (.Saj). ix. 3 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48, 4 and occasion-
ally in prof, writ.), — the former denotes right conchict
towards men, the latter piety towards God (cf. Plat.
Gorg. p. 507 b. ; Grimm on Sap. p. 181 sq. ; [cf. Trench
§ Ixxxviii. p. 328 S(j. ; for additional exx. see AVetst. on
Eph. 1. c. ; cf. ΰσιοί] ; fvaijida κ. δικαιοσύνη, Diod. 1, 2) ;
voif'iv την δικαιοσ. to do righteousness, to live uprightly :
I Jn. ii. 29 ; iii. 7 ; iii. 10 [not Lchm.] ; and in Rev. xxii.
I I ace. to the text now accepted ; in like manner (μγάζ(-
σθαι δικαιοσύνην. Acts χ. 35 ; Heb. xi. 33 ; ζην τ;/ δικαιο-
σύνη, to live, devote the life, to righteousness, 1 Pet. ii. 24 ;
7ΐ•λϊ;ρϋ0ι» ττάσακδικαιοσΰΐ'ΐ/ΐ', to iierform completely whatever
is right, Mt. iii. 1 5. Wlicn a(Iirmed of C h r i s t, δικαιοσύνη
denotes his perfect moral purity, integrity, siulessness:
Jn. xvi. 8, 10; when used of God, liis holiness: Ro. iii.
5, 25 sq. c. in the writings of Paul ή δικαιοσύνη has a
peculiar meaning, opposed to the views of the Jews and
Judaizing Christians. To understand this meaning, the
foil, facts esp. must be kept in view : tlie Jews as a peo-
I)Ie, and λ cry many who had become converts from among
them to Christianity, supposed that they secured the
favor of (iod by works conformed to the require-
ments of the Mosaic law, as though by way of merit; and
that they would thus attain to eternal salvation. But this
law demands perfect obedience to all its precepts,
and threatens condemnation to those wlio do not render
such obedience (Gal. iii. 10, 12). Obedience of this
kind no one has rendered (Ro. iii. 10), neither Jews nor
Gentiles (Ro. i. 24 — ii. 1), — for with the latter the
natural Ι,αλν of right written on their souls takes the place
of the Mosaic \avi (Ro. ii. 14 sq.). On this account Paul
proclaims the love of God, in that by giving up Christ,
his Son, to die as an expiatory sacrifice for the sins of
men he has attested his grace and good-will to mankind,
so that they can hope for salvation as if they had not
sinned. But the way to obtain this hope, he teaches, is
only through faith (see νίστις [esp. 1 b. and d.]), by
which a man appropriates that grace of God revealed
and pledged in Christ ; and this faith is reckoned by
(iod to tlie man as δικαιοσύνη: that is to say, δ. denotes
the state acceptable to God which becomes a sinner's posses-
sion through that faith by ichich he embraces the grace of
Gnd offered him in the expiatory death of Jesus Christ
(see δικηιοω, 3 b.). In this sense η δικαιοσύνη is used
without an adjunct in Ro. iv. 5 sq. 11 ; v. 17, 21 ; ix.30 sq.;
Ro. xiv. 1 7 (? [.see b.]) ; 1 Co. i. 30 ; Gal. v. 5 ; δικαιοσύνη
θ(οϋ, ή τοΰ θ(θΰ δικαιοσύνη, the righteousness which God
ascribes, what God declares to be righteousness [W. 186
(1 75)], Ro. i. 1 7 ; iii. 21 ; x. 3 ; by a pregnant use, equiv.
to that divine arrangement by which God leads men to a
state acceptable to him, Ro. x. 4 ; as abstract for con-
crete, e(]uiv. to those whom God accotmts rishteous, 2
Co. V. 21; δικ. θ(ον δια νίστ€ως. Ro. iii. 22; ή δικ. rijs
πίστίως, wluch is acquired by faith, or seen in faith, Ro.
150
όικαιοα»
iv. II, Ιο ; ή (Κ θίοΰ δικαιοσ. which comes from Ood, i. e.
is adjudged, imputed, I'hil. iii. 9 (^wliere the mldition ίπϊ
T^ πίστίί depends on ίχων, having . . . founded upon faith
[cf. \V. 137 (130); 3U2 (3(;7); vet cf. EUic. ad loc.]) ;
ή (Κ ιτίστίω! δικαιοσ. which comes from faitli, Uo. ix. 30;
X. 6 ; ή hia πίστιω: Χριστού, Phil. iii. 9 ; η κατά πίστίχ δ«-
καιοσ- according to, appmpriale to, faith, lleb. xi. 7 (but
it should be kept in mind that the conception of 'failh '
in the Ep. to the Ileb. is broader than in Paul's writings
[cf. e. g. Kurtz ad loc.]) ; Christ is called Βικαιοσ-ύνη, as
being the one without whom there is no righteousness,
as the author of righteousness, 1 Co. i. 30 ; ίΐί Βικαιοσύνην,
unto righteousness as the result, to obtain righteousness,
Ro. X. 4, 10; ή πι'στίΓ λο-γίζίταί τινι fir Βικαιυσϋνην faith
is reckoned to one for righteousness, i. e. is so taken into
account, that righteousness is ascribed to it or recognized
in it : Ro. iv. 3, 6, 9, 22 ; Gal. iii. 6 ; Jas. ii. 23 ; ή διακον/α
T^s δικαιοσ. (see διακονία, 2 b.), 2 Co. iii. 9. Ojiposed to
this dtKaioavmj arising from faith is η ίκ νόμου δίκαιοσ•, a
state acceptable to God which is supposed to result from
obedience to the law, Ro. x. S sq. ; ή 8i<. ΐν ι/όμω relying on
the law, i. e. on imaginary obedience to it, Phil. iii. 6 ; ή
ίδια δικαιοσ. and ή (μη δικ-, such as one supposes that he
has acquired for himself by his own works, Ro. x. 3 ;
Phil. iii. 9, cf. Gal. Li. 21 ; iii. 21. 2. in a closer sense,
fuslire, or the virtue which r/ires each one hi.i due ; it is said
to bclons to Grod and Christ, as bestowing Ισότιμον πίστιν
upon all Christians impartially, 2 Pet. i. 1 ; of judicial
justice, Ro. ix. 28 RGTrmrg. in br. ; Kpivttv iv δικαια-
σννη, Acts .wii. 31 ; Rev. .\ix. 11. [See refE. s. v. δικαιόω,
fin.]•
δικαιέω, -ω; fut. δικαιώσω; 1 aor. (δικαίωσα; Pass., [pres.
δικαιούμαι] : pf. δεδικαίωμαι ; 1 aor. (δικαιωθην ; fut. δικαιω-
θήσομαι; (δίκαιοί) ; Sept. for pli and ρ'ΊϊΠ
1.
prop. (ace. to the analogy of other verbs ending in όω, as
Γνφλόω, δουλόω) Ιο make δίκαιος ; Ιυ render righteous οτ
such as he our/hl to be ; (Vulg. justifico) ; but this mean-
ing is extremely rare, if not altogether doubtful ; (δικαί-
ωσα την καρδίαν μου stands for '337 'Γ\'3Ι in Ps. Lxxii.
(Ixxiii.) 13 (unless / have shoicn my heart to be upright
be preferred as the rendering of the Greek there). 2.
TtKii, to show, exhibit, evince, one to be righteous, such
as he is and wishes himself to be considered (Ezek. xvi.
51 sq. ; την ψυχην αϋτοϋ, Jer. iii. 11, and, probably, δι-
καιοΰν δίκαιον. Is. lUi. 11): ή σοφία (δικαιώθη άπο των
Τίκνωι/ αΰτηί, the wisdom taught and exemplified by John
the Baptist, and by Jesus, gained from its disciples (i. e.
from their life, character, and deeds) the benefit of be-
ing shown to be righteous, i. e. true and divine [cf. B.
322 (277) ; al. interpret, was acknowledged to be right-
eous on the part of (nearly i. q. by) her children; cf. B.
325 (280) ; see άπό, II. 2 d. bb.], Lk. vii. 35 ; Mt. xi. 19
[here Τ Tr txt. WH read ΐργων i. e. by her works] ;
Pass., of Christ: ίδικαιώθη iv πνιΰματι, evinced to be
righteous as to his spiritual (divine [(?) cf. e. g. EUic. ad
loc., or Mey. on Ro. i. 4]) nature, 1 Tim. iii. 16 ; of God :
όπωί δικαιωθης iv To'it \oyoit σου, Ro. iii. 4 fr. Ps. 1. (li.) 6
(^κύριος μόνος δικαιωθησεται. Sir. xviii, 2) ; pass, used re-
flexively, to show one's self righteous : of men. Rev. xxii.
11 Rec. ; (τι δικαιωθώμιν ; Gen. xliv. 16). 3. τινά, to
declare, pronounce, one to be just, righteous, or such
as he ought to be, (cf. όμοιόω to declare to be like, liken i. c.
compare ; όσιόω, Sap. vi. 1 1 ; άξιόω, which never means
to make worthy, but to judge worthy, to declare worthy,
to treat as worthy; see also κοινόω, 2 b.) ; a. with the
negative idea predominant, to declare guiltless one
accused or who may be accused, acquit of a charge or
reproach, (Deut. xxv. 1 ; Sir. xiii. 22 (21), etc.; an un-
just judge is said δικαιονν τόν άσιίίη in Ex. xxiii. 7 ; Is. v.
23) : ίαυτόν, Lk. .x. 29 ; pass, ol διδικαίωμαι, sc. with (iod,
1 Co. iv. 4 ; pregnantly with άπο των αμαρτιών added, to
be declared innocent and therefore to be absolved from
the charge of sins [cf. B. 322 (277)], Acts xiii. 38 (39)
(so άπο αμαρτίας, Sir. xxvi. 29 ; simply, to be absolved, sc.
from the payment of a vow. Sir. xviii. 22 (21)) ; hence
figuratively, by a usage not met with elsewhere, to be freed,
άπο της αμαρτίας, from its dominion, Ro. vi. 7, where cf.
Fritzsche or [(less fully) Meyer], b. with the posi-
tive idea predominant) to judge, declare, pronounce,
righteous and therefore acceptable, (God is said δικαιοϋν
δίκαιον, 1 Κ. viii. 32) : (αυτόν, Lk. xvi. 15 ; (δικαίωσαν τον
θ(όν declared God to be righteous, i. e. by receiving the
baptism declared that it had been prescribed by God
rightly, Lk. vii. 29; pass, by God, Ro. ii. 13; (ξ tpyav
(δικαιώθη, got his reputation for righteousness (sc. with
his countrymen [but see Mey. (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]) by
works, Ro. iv. 2 ; « τών "Κό-γων, by thy words, in contrast
with καΓαδικά^(σίαι, sc. by God, Mt. xii. 37. Especially
is it so used, in the technical phraseology of Paul, re-
specting God who judges and declares such men as put
faith in Christ to be righteous and acceptable to him,
and accordingly fit to receive the pardon of their sins
and eternal life (see δικαιοσύνη, 1 c.) : thus absolutely,
δικαιοΰκ τίνα, Ro. iii. 26 ; iv. 5 ; viii. 30, 33 (sc. ημάς, opp.
to iyKoKdv) ; with the addition of eV {in consequence of)
πίστιως, Ro. iii. 30 : Gal. iii. 8 : of δια της ττίστ(ως, Ro.
iii. 30 ; men are said δικαιονσθαι, Βικαιωβηναι, rj χάριτι
του θ(θϋ. Tit. iii. 7 ; δωρ(αν τη χάρ. τ. θιοΐι, Ιίο. iii. 24 ;
πίστίΐ, Ro. iii. 28 ; « πίστ(ως, by means of faith, Ro. v.
1 ; Gal. ii. 16 ; iii. 24; iv τω αΊματι τοϊι Χριστού (as the
meritorious cause of their acceptance, as the old
theologians say, faith being the apprehending or
subjective cause), Ro. v. 9; eV τω ονόματι τοΰ κυρίου
*Ιησοΰ και iv τω πν(νματι τοΰ θ(ον ημών, by confessing the
name of the Lord (which implies faith in him, Ro. x. 10,
cf. 2 Co. iv. l.S), and by the Spirit of God (which has
awakened faith in the soul), 1 Co. vi. 11; iv Χριστώ
through Christ, Gal. ii. 1 7 : Ads xiii. 39 : it is vehement-
ly denied by Paul, that a man δικαιούται iξ ίργων νόμου,
Gal. ii. 16, — with the addition «ρώττιον αντοΰ, i. e. of
God, Ro. iii. 20, cf. vs. 28 ; iv. 2, (see δικαιοσύνη, 1 c. sub
fin.) ; — a statement which is affirmed by James in ii. 21,
24 sq. (though he says simply iξfpyωv δικαιούται, signifi-
cantlv omitting νόμου) ; to the same purport Paul de-
nies that a man δικαιούται iv νύμω, in obeying the law, or
by keeping it, Gal. v. 4 ; with the addition jrapa τω θ(ά,
Βικαιωμα
151
ί)ί\θΎος
in the sight of God, Gal. iii. 11. Lk. xviii. 14 teaches
that a man δικαιούται by deep sorrow for his sins, which
so humbles liim that he hopes for salvation only from
divine grace.
The Pauline conceptions of fiixotor, ίικαιοσύνη, 8ικαιόω,
are elucidated esp. by Winzer, De vocabulis SUatos, etc.,
in Ep. ad Rom., Lips. 1831 ; Usteri, Paulin. Lehrbegriff
p. 811 sq. ed. 4 etc. ; Neander, Gesch. der Ptlanzung u.s.w.
ii. p. 567 sqq. et passim, ed. 3, [Robinson's trans, of ed.
4, pp. 382 sqq., 417 sqq.]; Baur, Paulus p. 072 sqq.
[(Zeller's) ed. 2, vol. ii. 145-183; Eng. trans, vol. ii. p.
134 sqq.]; iiauwenAo/T, Disquisitio etc., Lugd. Bat. 1852;
Lipsius, Die paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, Lpz. 1853;
Schmifl, Bibl. Tlieologie des X. T. p. 5G2 sqq. ed. 2, [p.
558 sqq. ed. 4 ; Eng. trans, p. 495 sq.] ; Ernesli, Vom
Ursprung der SUnde u.s.w. i. p. 152 sqq. ; Messner, Leiire
der Apostel, p. 256 sqq., [summary by S. R. Asbury in
Bib. Sacr. for 1870, p. 140 sq.] ; Jul. Kosllin in the
Jahrbb. fiir deutsche Theol. 1856 fasc. 1 p. 85 sqq. ;
Wieseler, C'ommentarii. d. Br. an d. Galater, p. 17G sqq.
[see in Schaff's Lange's Rom. p. 122 sq.] ; Kalinin, Lu-
therische Dogmatik, Bd. i. p. 592 sqq. ; Philippi, Dog-
matik, v. 1 p. 208 sqq. ; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des X. T. § 65 ;
Rilschl, Die christl. Lehre v. d. Versbhnung u. Rechtf.
ii. 318 sqq.; Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 172 sqq. [Eng.
trans, vol. i. p. 1 71 sqq. ; but esp. Dr. Jas. Morison, Crit.
Expos, of the Third Chap, of the Ep. to the Rom. j)]).
163-198. On the patristic usage see Redhmaijr, Gala-
terbrief, p. 177 sq. ; Cremer, Worterbuch, 4te Aufl. p.
285 ; Suicer, Thesaur. s. v.].
In classic Grk. δικαιόω (Ionic δικαιίω, Ildt.) is 1.
i. q. δίκαιον νομίζω, to deem right or fair : τι, often foU.
by the inf.; to choose what is right and fair, hence univ.
to choose, desire, decide : Hdt., Soph., Thuc, al. 2.
with ace. of person, ro δίκαιον ποιώ τίνα to do one justice,
in a bad sense, viz. to condemn, punish, one : Ildt., Thuc,
Plat., al. ; hence δικαιοϋσθαι, to have justice done one's
self, to suffer Justice, be treated rightly, opp. to άδικήσθαι,
Aristot. eth. Nic. 5, 9, 11 p. 1136', 18 sqq. (In like
manner the German rechtfertigen in its early forensic
use bore a bad sense viz. to try judicially (so for άνακρί-
vfiv. Acts -xii. 19 Lutlier), then condemn; execute judg-
ment, esp. put to death.) *
δικαίωμα, -το?, τό, (fr. δικαιόω ; ο δίδικαίωται or το δ(δι-
καιωμίνον), Sept. very often for ρπ, Π^Π, and Dpiyo ; for
niyp, Deut. XXX. 16; 1 K. ii. 3 ; plur. occasionally for
D'"Iip3 ; 1. that which has been deemed right so as to
have the force of law; a. what has been established and
ordained by law, an ordinance : univ. of an appointment
of God having the force of law, Ro. i. 32 ; plur. used of
the divine precepts of the Mosaic law : τον κυρίου, Lk.
i. 6 ; του νόμου, Ro. ii. 26 ; το δικαίωμα τοϋ νόμου, collec-
tively, of the (moral) precepts of tlie same law, Ro. viii.
4 ; δικαιώματα λατρείας, precepts concerning the public
worship of God, Heb. ix. 1 ; δικαιώματα σαρκοί, laws re-
specting bodily purity [(?) cf. vii. 16], ibid. vs. 10. b.
ο judicial decision, sentence ; of G ο d — either the favor-
able judgment by wliich he acquits men and declares
them acceptable to him, Ro. v. 16 ; or unfavorable: sen-
tence of condemnation. Rev. xv. 4, (punishment. Plat. legg.
9, 864 e.). 2. α righteous act or deed : τα δικαιώματα τών
άγιων. Rev. xbc. 8 (τών πατέρων. Bar. ii. 19) ; evos δικαί-
ωμα, the righteous act of one (Christ) in his giving him-
self up to death, opp. to the first sin of Adam, Ro. v. 18,
(Aristot. eth. Xic. 5, 7, 7 p. 1135», 12 sq. καλΕΪται δί
μάΧλον δίκαιοττραγημα το κοινόν, δικαίωμα 6e το ΐττανόρβωμα
τοϋ αδικήματος, [c-f. rhet. 1, 13, 1 and Cope's note on 1, 3,
9]). [Cf. re£f. in δικαιόω.] *
SiKaiois, adv., [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. justly, agreeably
to right : Kpivetv (see δίκαιο?, 2), 1 Pet. ii. 23 ; to suffer,
Lk. x.xiii. 41. 2. properly, as is right: 1 Co. xv. 34.
3. uprightly, agreeably to the law of rectitude : 1 Th. ii.
10 {όσίω! και δικαίως, as Plat. rep. 1 p. 331 a. [cf. Trench
§ Ix.xxviii. p. 32S]) ; Tit. ii. 12.' '
δικαίωσΊς. -€ως, ή, (fr. δικαιόω. oquiv. to τό δίκαιους, the
act τοϋ διιιαιοΟιτοί ; in extra-bibl. writ. fr. Thuc. on, the
justification or defence of a cause; sentence of condem-
nation ; judgment in reference to what is just), the act
of God's declaring men free from guilt and acceptable to
him ; adjudging to be righteous, [A. V. justifcationi : δια
την δικαίωσιν ημών, because God wished to declare us
righteous, Ro. iv. 2.5 ; eis δικαίωσιν ζωής. unto acquittal,
which brings with it the bestowment of life, Ro. v. 18.
[Cf . reff. in δικαιόω.] *
δικασ-τήϊ, -oC, ό, (δικάζω), a judge, arbitrator, umpire:
Lk. xii. 14 [here crit. texts κριτήν] ; Acts vii. 27 (fr. Ex.
ii. 14) ; Acts vii. 35. (Sept. for U3W ; in Grk. writ. fr.
[Aeschyl. and] Ildt. on.) *
[Syn. ίικαστήι, KpiT^is: ace. to etymol. and classic usage
S. is the more dignitied and official term ; κ. gives prominence
to the mental process, whether the 'judge ' be amagistrate
or not. Schmidt ch. 18, 6.]
δίκη, -j)f, ή, [allied with δίίκνυμι, Curtius § 14], fr.
Hom. down; 1. custom, usage, [cf. Schmidt ch. 18,
4 cf. 3]. 2. right, justice. 3. a suit at law. 4. a
judicial hearing, judicial decision, esp. a sentence of con-
demnation ; so in Acts x.xv. 15 [L Τ TrWH καταδίκ?)!»].
5. execution of the sentence, punishment, (Sap. xviii. 11 ;
2 Mace. viii. 11): δίκην ίπ(χ(ΐν, Jude 7; δίκην τίνιιν
(Soph El. 298; Aj. 113; Eur. Or. 7), to suj'tr punish-
ment, 2 Th. i. 9. 6. the goddess Justice, avenging
justice : Acts xxviii. 4, as in Grk. writ, often fr. Hes.
theog. 902 on ; (of the avenging justice of God, personi-
fied. Sap. i. 8, etc. ; cf. Grimm ad loc. and Com. on 4
Mace. p. 318, [he cites 4 Mace. iv. 13, 21 ; viii. 13, 21 ;
ix. 9; xi. 3; xii. 12; xviii. 22; Philo adv. Flacc. § IS;
Euseb. h. e. 2, 6, 8]).*
δίκτυον, -ου. τό. [perhaps fr. ΔΙΚΕΙΝ to cast, cf. EtjTn.
Magn. col. 275, 21], a net : Mt. iv. 20 sq. ; Mk. i. 18 sq. ;
Lk. V. 2, 4-6 ; .In. xxi. 6, 8, 1 1. (Ilom. et sqq.) *
[Syx. SIktvov, αμφίβ\ηστρον, σαγ-ηνη: δ. seems to be
the general name for nets of all kinds ; whereas αμφ. and aay.
designate specifically nets for fishing: — the former a cast-
ing-net, generallv pear shaped; the latter α seine or drag-net.
Cf. Trench § Ixiv. ; B.D. s. v. Net.]
δίλο-γοΐ, -ov, (διΈ and λέγω) ; 1. saying the same thing
twice, repeating: PoU. 2, 118 p. 212 ed. Hemst. ; whence
Βιό
152
Βίστομο'ζ
itXcryiiv and ίιλογία. Xen. lie re equ. 8, 2. 2. tlouble-
tonqufd^ doubir in sjHtvlty sai/itty one thing with one person,
another with another (with intent to deceive) : I Tim.
iii. ».•
Sio, conjunction i. ij. δι' 5, [fr. Thuc. and Plato down],
wherefore, on ifhich account: Mt. xxvii. M; Lie. i. 85; vii.
7; Acts X. 29; llo. i. iM ; ii. 1 ; iCo. xii. 3; 2Co. vi. 17;
Ileh. iii. 7 ; Jas. i. 21 ; 1 Pet. i. 13, and often. [Cf. W.
445 (414); B. 233 (2ilU); on Paul's use, see Kllic. on
(!al. iv. :!1.J
Si-oScvu : inipf. Sita&evov; [1 aor. 8ίώΒ(υσα}; 1. to
/xiss or travel throuijh : rimov τινά, Acts .wii. 1 ; (Sejit.,
Poljb., Plut., al.). 2. to tnu-ei hither and thither, yo
about : with κατά ττοΚιν κο\ κώμην added, through city
and villai;e, Lk. viii. 1."
Atovvrios, -ου, ό, Dioni/sius, an Athenian, a member
of the Areopagus, converted to Christianity by Paul's
insiriiuienlality : Acts . wii. 34. [Cf. B.D. s. v.] *
Sii-vcp, conjunction, (fr. διό and the enclitic particle
jTi'/j [i|. V.]), [fr. Thuc. down]; on which very account,
[A. V. wherejore']^: 1 Co. viii. 13 [Treg. διό wfp] ; -x. 14;
.\iv. 13 wliere LTTrWII διό.'
διοπίτήϊ, -f f, (fr. Διι'ί of Zeus, and πίτω for πίτττω ; in
prof. writ, also Sunfrrjs), fallen from Zeus, i. e. from
heaven : to διοπίτ/ί, sc. ά-γα\μα (wliich is e.\])ressed in
Eur. Iph. T. 977; lldian. 1, U, 2 [1 ed. Bekk.; cf. W.
234 (219); 592 (551)]), an image of the Ephesian Ar-
temis which was supposed to have fallen from heaven,
Acts .\i.\. 85 ; [cf. Meyer ad loc. ; Farrar, St. Paul, ii.
1. •!.,!.].•
διόρθωμα, -ror, το', (fr. διορθόω to set right) ; correction,
amendment, reform : Acts .\.\iv. 2 (3) L Τ Tr WH for
R(i κατορθωμάτων. (Ilippocr., Aristot., Polyb. 3, 13;
Plut. Num. 1 7 ; Diog. Laurt. 10, 121 ; [cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 250 sq.].) ♦
ει-όρθω(Γΐς, -ίωΓ, ή, (fr. Βιορθόω) ; 1. prop, in a
physical sense, a iniiLinij straight, restoring to its natural
and normal conilition something which in some way pro-
trudes or has got out of line, as (in Ilippocr.) broken or
misshapen limbs. 2. of acts and institutions, refor-
mation : xaipis διορίώσίωί a season of reformation, or
the perfecting of things, referring to the times of the
Messiah, Heb. i.\. 10. (Aristot. Pol. 3, 1, 4 [p. 1275'',
13] ; νάμον, de mund. 6 p. 400'', 29 ; [cf. Joseph, c. A p.
2, 20, 2]; Polyb. 3, 118, 12 τύν ■πο\ιτ(υμάτων, Diod. 1,
75 των αμαρτημάτων. Joseph, antt. 2, 4, 4 ; b. j. 1, 20, 1 ;
aJ. ; [cf. I.oh. ad Phryn. p. 250 sq.].) *
8ι-ορΰσ(Γω; Pass., 1 aor. inf. ίιηρνχθηναι (Mt. .xxiv. 43
Τ Tr Wll ; Lk. xii. 39 Τ WH Trmrg.) ; 2 aor. inf. «lo-
ρυγηναι, [cf. WJI. App. p. 170; fr. Ilom. down]; to dig
through : a house (Xen. symp. 4, 30; Job xxiv. 16 Sept.),
Mt. xxiv. 43 ; Lk. xii. 39 ; absol. Mt. vi. 19 sq. [W. 594
(552); B. 141) (127)].•
[Ai6s, sec Δίί•]
Δι6ο--κουροι ( Phrynichus prefers the form Δωσκοροι ;
in earlier Attic the dual τώ Διοσ-κόρω was more usual, cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 235), -ων, οί, (fr. Διόι of Zeus, and
KoCpoc or Kopot boy, as κόρη girl), Dioscuri, the name
given to Castor and [(Polydeuces, the Honian)] Pollux,
the twin sons of Zeus and Leda, tutelary deities of
sailors: Acts xxviii. 11 [R. V. The Twin Brothers; cf.
B.D. s. V. Castor and Pollux].*
8i-6ti, conjunction, equiv. to διά toCto, oti; 1. on
Ihi-i account that, because, [cf. W. 445 (415)] : Lk. ii. 7 ;
xxi. 28; Acts [xiii. 35, where lit; διό]; xvii. 31 Ilec. ;
.XX. 2G Τ Wll Trmrg. ; xxii. IH ; 1 Co. xv. 9 ; GaL ii. 16
(L Τ Tr Wll ότι) ; Phil. ii. 2G ; 1 Th. ii. 8 ; iv. G ; Heb.
xi. 5, 23 ; .las. iv. .i ; 1 Pet. i. 1«, 24 ; ii. ϋ [Rec. διό και'].
2. for (cf. Frilzsche on Ko. i. 19, vol. i. p. 57 sq. ; [per
contra j\ley. ad loc; Ellic. on (ial. ii. 16; (cf. Jebb in
Vincent and Dickson, Modern Greek etc. ed. 2, App.
§80,3)]): Lk. i. 13; Acts x. 20 Rec. ; xviii. 10; Ro. i. 19,
21 ; iii. 20 ; viii. 7 ; (1 Th. ii. 18 L Τ Tr WH for R G
διό) ; [1 Pet. i. IG" Tdf. From Hdt. down.]•
Διοτρίφήϊ [L WII -τρίφης; cf. Chamller §§ 634, 637],
0, (fr. Διόί and τρίφω, nourished by Zeus, or foster-child
of Zeus), Diolre/jhes, a Christian man, but proud and
arrogant : 3 Jn. vs. 9 sq. [Cf. B. D. (esj). Am. ed.) s. v.]•
Ειπλήος (-oCs), -όη (-ij), -άπν (-οΟκ), [fr. Horn, down],
twifold, double : 1 Tim. \. 17; Rev. xviii. G ; hmXcWtpos
(a compar. found also in Ap[)ian. hist, praef. § 10, from
the positive form διπλό'? Γ Β. 27 (24)]) ίμων, twofold more
than yourseh-es. Ml. xxiii. 15 [(cf. Just. -M.dial. 122)].*
ειττλόω, -ώ : [1 aor. «δίπλωσα]; (διιτλόοί); to double:
διπλώσατε αΐτη [only R G] διπλ5 [τα δ. Τ Tr WH br.]
i. e. return to lier douljle, repay in double measure the
evils she has brought upon you, Rev. .xviii. 6 [R.V.
double unto her the double^ (Xen. Hell. 6, 5, 19; Plut.
Cam. 41 ; Uiog. Laert. G, 22.) *
8Cs, adv., [Curtius § 277; fr. Hom. down], twice: Mk.
xiv. 30, 72 ; δ'ΐί τοϋ σιιββάτου twice in the week, Lk. xviii.
12 ; (cat άπηξ και δίί (see άπαξ, c), Phil. iv. 16 ; 1 Th. ii.
1 8. In the jjhrase Sis άπο^αχόιτα, Jude 1 2, Sis is not
Qiiuiv. to completely, absolutely: but the figure is so ad-
justed to the fact, that men are rejiresented as twice
dead in a moral sense, first as not having yet been re-
generated, anil secondly as having fallen from a state of
grace; see αποθνήσκω, I. 4; [but cf. the various interp.
as given in (Mey.) lluther or in Schaff's Lange (Fronm.)
ad loc. In the Babyl. Talm. (Ber. 10 a.) νιο read, ' Thou
art dead here below, and thou shalt have no part in the
life to come ' ].•
Ats, an unused nominat. for Ztor, gen. Διόι, ace. Δία
(Δίαν, Acts xiv. 12 Tdf. ed. 7 ; see in άρρην and B. 14
(373)), Zeus, Jupiter, the supreme divinity in the belief
of fireeks and Romans; the father of gods and mem
Acts xiv. 12 sq. (2 Alacc. vi. 2.) [Cf. Zfut•] *
εισ'-μιυρι.άς, -άδοΓ, ή, twice ten thousand, two myriads :
Rev. ix. IG L Τ ( WH dis pvptaSn), for R (ί δύο μυριάδα.*
ειστάζω: 1 aor. ί'δίοτασα; (δίί) ; to doubt, waver: Mt.
xiv. 31 ; xxviii. 1 7. (Plat., [.Soph.], Aristot., Plut., al.) *
ε(στομ.ο$, -ov, (δίί and στόμα), having a double mouth,
as a river, Polyb. 34, 10, 5 ; [οδοί i. e. branching. Soph.
O. C. 900]. As στόμα is used of the edge of a sword and
of other weapons, so δίστομοΓ has the meaning two-edged :
used of a sword in Heb. iv. 12 ; Rev. i. 16 ; ii. 12, and
Sitr^tKu
153
δόγ//.α
ace. to Schott in xix. 1 5 ; also Judges iii. 1 6 ; Prov. v. 4 ;
Ps. cxlix. G ; Sir. xxi. 3 ; ξ^•φoc, Eur. Hel. 983.*
δκΓ-χίλιοι, -at, -a, two lliousand : Mk. v. 13. [From
Ildt. down.] *
Ει-υλίζω [R G Τ Tr διϋλ. (see Y, u)] ; (ίλίζω to defecate,
cleanse from dregs or filth) ; to filter thrtmrjh, strain thor-
oughly, pour through a filler : τον κώνωπα, to rid wine of a
gnat by filtering, strain out, Mt. xxiii. 24. (Amos vi. 6
^ιυΚισμίνοί olvos, Artem. oneir. 4, 48 ίδηξαν 8ιν\ίζ(ΐν
ττρότΐρον 70V oivov, Dioscor. 2, 86 hia ράκους Xti/oG ^ινλισβίν
[et passim ; Plut. ([uaest. conviv. 6, 7, 1, .5] ; Archvt. ap.
Stob. floril. i. p. 13, 40 metaph. Betit (Ιλικρινή και διυλι-
σμίναν ζ\(ΐ τί\ν άρΐτάν, ) *
8ιχά^ω : 1 aor. inf. διχάσαι ; (6ίχα) ; Ιο rut into two parts,
cleave asunder, dissever : Plat, polit. p. 2G4 d. ; metaph.
ίιχάζω Τίνα κατά τίνος, to set one at variance with [lit.
against^ another : Mt. x. 35. [Cf. Fischer, De vitiis
lexx. etc. p. 334 sq.] *
8ιχο(Γτασ£α, -ας, ή, {ίιχοστατ€ω to stand apart), rfissen-
sion, division ; plur. : Ro. xvi. 17; 1 Co. iii. 3 [Rec] ;
Gal. V. 20. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Solon in Dem.
p. 423, 4 and Ildt. 5, 7.j on; [1 Mace. iii. 2!!].) *
διχοτομ€ω, -ώ ; fut. διχοτομήσω', (διχοτόμος cutting in
tΛvo) ; to cut into two parts (Ex. .xxix. 1 7) : Mt. xxiv. 51 ;
Lk. xii. 46, — in these passages many suppose reference
to be made to that most cruel mode of punishment, in use
among the Hebrews (1 S. .xv. 33) and other ancient nations
(see Win. RWB. s. v. Lebensstrafen ; [B. D. s. v. Pun-
ishments, III. b. 3 ; esp. Wetstein on Mt. 1. c.]), by which
criminals and captives were cut in two. But in the text
the words ivhicli follow, and Avhich imply tliat the one
thus ^cut asunder' is still surviving, oppose this interpre-
tation ; so that here the word is more fitly translated cut
up hij scourging, scourge severely, [but see Meyer on Mt.
1. c.]. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Plato down.) *
βιψάω, -ώ, subjunc. pres. 3 pers. sing, διψά (.In. vii. 37 ;
Ro. xii. 20 ; often so fr. the Maced. age on for the Attic
διψη, cf. W. § 13, 3 b.; [B. 44 (38)]; Lob. ad Phryn. p.
61); fut. δι\(τήσω ; 1 aor. ^δίψησα ; (δίψα thirst) ; [fr.
Hom. down] ; to thirst; 1. absolutely, ίο si/^er //iiV.s(;
suffer from thirst : prop., Mt. x.xv. 35, 37, 42, 44 ; Jn. iv.
15 ; xi.K. 28; Ro. xii. 20; 1 Co. iv. 11 ; figuratively, those
are said to thirst who painfully feel their want of, and
eagerly long for, those things by which the soul is re-
freshed, supported, strengthened : Jn. iv. 13sq. ; vi. 35;
vii. 37 ; Rev. vii. 16 ; xxi. 6 ; xxii. 17 ; (Sir. xxiv. 21 (20) ;
li. 24). 2. with an ace. of the thing desired : την δι-
καιοσΰνην, Mt. V. 6, (Ps. Ixii. (Ixiii.) 2 ; in the better (Irk.
writ, with gen.; cf. W. § 30, 10b.; [B. 147(129)]; eKevde-
ρ'ιας. Plat. rep. 8 p. 562 c. ; τιμής, Plut. Cat. maj. 11 ; al. ;
cf. W. 17).*
δ£ψθ5, -fof (-ovς^. TO, thirst : 2 Co. xi. 27. [From Time.
down, for the older hi^a.'\ *
δ6ψυχθ5, -ov, (δίί and ψυχή), double-minded; a. wa-
vering, uncertain, doubting : Jas. i. 8, (oi 8ίψυχοι και οί
διστάζοντας παρϊ της του θαοΰ δννήμ€ως, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
11,2; τάΧαίπωροί (Ισιν οι διψυχοι, οί διστάζοντας την ψυχήν
[al. TJj ψνχτ}^, ibid. 23, 3 ; μή γίνου δίψυχος iv προσαυχτ}
σου, (Ι ίσταί η ού, Constt. apostol. 7, 11 ; μη γίνου δίψυχο»
tv ττροσανχη σον. μακάριος yap ό μή διστάσας, Ignat. ad
Heron. 7 ; [cf. reft, in Mailer's note on Barn. ep. 19, 5]).
b. divided in interest sc. between God and the world :
Jas. iv. 8. Not found in prof. writ. [Philo, frag. ii. 663].*
διωγμοί, -οϋ, ό, {διώκω), persecution : Mt. xiii. 21 ; ]Mk. iv.
17 ; X. 30 ; Acts viii. I ; .\iii. 50; Ro. viii. SSl plur., 2 Co.
xii. 10 ; 2 Th. i. 4; 2 Tim. iii. 11. [Fr. Aeschyl. down.] *
διώκτηβ, -ου, ό, (διώκω), a persecutor: 1 Tim. i. 13.
Not finmd in prof, writ.*
διώκω ; impf. (δίωκον ; fut. διώ|ω (Mt. xxiii. 34 ; Lk.
xxi. 12; -In. xv. 20; 2 S. xxii. 38; Sap. xix. 2; a rarer
form for the more com. Attic διώξομαι, cf. Bttm. Ausf.
Spr. ii. 154 ; W. 84 (80) ; [B. 53 (46) ; esp. Veitch s. v. ;
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 377]); 1 aor. (δίωξα; Pass.,
[pres. διώκομαι] ; pf. ptcp. δαδιω-γμίνος ; 1 fut. διωχθ!]σομαι ;
(fr. δίω to flee) ; Sept. commonly for η"\ι ; 1. to make
to run or flee, put to flight, drive away : (τινά) άπο πο\(ως
«Γ πόλιι/, Mt. xxiii. 34, cf. χ. 23 Grsb. 2. to run swifly
in order to catch some person or thing, to run after ; absol.
(Horn. II. 23, 344 : Soph. El. 738, etc. ; διώκαιν δρόμω,
Xen. an. 6, 5, 25 ; cf. 7, 2, 20), to press on : fig. of one
who in a race runs swiftly to roach the goal, Phil. iii. 1 2
(where distinguished fr. κατα\αμβάν€ΐν, [cf. Ildt. 9, 58 :
Lcian. Ilermot. 77]), vs. 14. to jiursue (in a hostile
manner): τινά, Acts xxvi. 11; Rev. xii. 13. Hence,
3. in any way whatever to harass, trouble, molest one ;
to persecute, (cf. Lat. persequor. Germ, verfolgen) : Jit.
V. 10-12, 44; x. 23; Lk.xxi. 12; [.xi. 49 WH Tr mrg.] ;
Jn. V. 16 ; xv. 20 ; Acts vii. 52 ; ix. 4 sq. ; xxii. 4, 7 si). ;
xxvi. 14 sq. ; Ro. xii. 14 ; 1 Co. iv. 12; xv. 9; 2 Co. iv.
9; Gal. i. 13, 23 ; iv. 29; v. 11 ; Phil. iii. 6 ; 2 Tim. iii.
12 ; Pass, with a dat. denoting the cause, to be maltreated,
suffer persecution on account of something. Gal. vi. 12
[here L mrg. Τ read διώκοιτα^ (al. -κωιται), see WH. App.
p. 169 ; on the dat. see W. § 31, 6 c. ; B. 186 (161)].
4. without the idea of hostility, to run afler, follow after :
some one, Lk. xvii. 23. 5. metaph. with ace. of thing,
to pursue i. e. to seek after eagerly, earnestly endeavor to
acquire : Ro. Lx. 30 (distinguished here fr. καταλιιμ3ά-
veiv) ; 1 Tim. vi. 11 ; 2 Tim. ii. 22, (in both pass. ϋΐ)ρ. to
φαυγ(ΐν) ; νόμον δικαιοσύνης, Ro. ix. 31, (Prov. .xv. 9 ; τύ δί-
καιοι/, Dcut. xvi. 20 ; Sir. xxvii. 8, where distinguished fr.
καταΧαμβάνιιν) ; τ. φιΚοξανίαν, Ro. xii. 13; τα της (ΐρήνης,
Ro. xiv. 19 [here L mrg. Tr mrg. WH mrg. Τ read δι-
ώκομαν (for the διώκωμιν of al.), see ]VH. App. p. 169]; τ.
άγάπην, 1 Co. xiv. 1 ; το αγαθόν, 1 Th. v. 15 ; (ϊρήνην, Heb.
xii. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 11 (here joined with ζητα'ιντι); times
without number in Grk. writ. (fr. Hom. II. 1 7, 75 διώκαιν
άκίχητα on; as τιμάς, άρατήν, τα κα\ά. [cf. W. 30.]).
[CoMP. : €K-, κατα-διώκω.'\*
δόγμα, -tos, to', (f r. δοκάω, and equiv. to το δ(δογμίνον),
an opinion, a judgment (Vlat., a].), doctrine, decree, ordi-
nance; 1. of public (/ecrees (as τήί πόλίωΓ, Plat. legg.
1 p. 644 d. ; of the Roman Senate, [Polvb. 6, 13, 2];
Hdian. 7, 10, 8 [5 ed. Bekk.]) : of rulers, Lk.ii. 1 ; Acts
xvii. 7; Heb. xi. 23 Lchm., (Theodot. in Dan. ii. 13; iii.
10 ; iv. 3 ; vi. 13, etc., — where the Sept. use other words).
ΒοΎματίζω
154
ίιοκιμι
2. of the riili's and re(iuiremi'nts of the law of Moses, 3
Mace. i. 3 ; &ιατήμησΐί των άγιων δογμάτων, I'liilo, alleg.
legg. i. § 16 ; carrying a suggestion of severit}•, and of
threatened punishment, τόν νόμον των ίντοΚων ϊν δόγμασι,
the law containing precepts in the form of decrees [Λ. V.
Ilie law (if commnntliiunts roMMiwd in or(lht(inces~\, Eph.
ii. IS ; t6 καθ' ήμων χίΐρύγμαφον Toit Βύγμασι eijuiv. to το
τοΊς 8ΰγμασι (dat. of instrument) hv καθ' ημών, the hond
ai;ai"st us by its decrees. Col. ii. 14 ; cf.W.§ 31, 10 Note 1,
[li. 92 (SO) ; on both pass, see Bp. I.ghtft. (m Col. 1. e.].
3. of certain decrees of the apostles relative to right
living : Acts xvi. 4. (Of all the precepts of the Chri.s-
tian religion: βίβαιωθηναι ϊν τοίί h6yμaσίv τοΰ κυρίου κα\
των αποστόλων, Ignat. ad Magnes. 13, 1 ; of tlie precepts
(' sentences ' or tenets) of philosophers, in the later prof,
writ. : Cic. acad. 2, 9, 27 de suis decretis, quae philosophi
vocant (Inqmnla.) [On the use of the word in general.
see Bp. Lghtft. as above ; (cf. ' Teaching' etc. U, 3).j •
βο-γματίζω ; In iltcrec, command, enjoin, lay down an or-
dinancij : Diod. 4, 83, etc. ; Esth. iii. 9 ; 2 Mace. x. 8 [etc.] ;
Sept. (not Theodot.) Dan. ii. 13; Pass. [pres. δογματίζυ-
μαί] ; ordinances are imposed upon me, I suffer ordinances
to be imposed upon me : Col. ii. 20 [R. V. do ye suhject
yourselves to ordinances; cf. W. §39, 1 a.; B. 188 (163) ;
Mey. or Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].*
δοκίω, -ώ ; impf. f'SOKoui'; 1 aor. ? δόξα ; (akin to ii';j;o/im
or Βίκομαι, whence Bukos an assumption, opinicm, [cf. Lat.
decus, decel, dignus; Curtius § 15; cf. his Das Verbum,
i. pp. 376, 382]) ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; 1. to he of opin-
ion, think, suppose : foil, by ace. with inf., Mk. vi. 49 [II G
L Tr] ; 2 Co. xi. 16 ; 1 Co. xii. 23 ; with an inf. relating
to the same subject as that of δοκε'ω itself, Lk. viii. 18
(o hoKfi i\(tv) ; xxiv. 37 {ihOKovv ττνίνμα θ^ωρΐΊν) ; Jn.
V. 39; xvi. 2; Acts xii. 9; xxvii. 13; 1 Co. iii. IS ; vii.
40 ; viii. 2 ; x. 12 ; xiv. 37 ; Gal. vi. 3 ; Phil. iii. 4 ; Jas. i.
26 , μη δόξητί λϊγην ίν iavToit do not suppose that ye
may think, Mt. iii. 9 ; cf. Fritz.sche ad loc. foil, by ότι,
Mt. vi. 7 ; xxvi. .53 ; [Mk. vi. 49 Τ WH] ; Lk. xii. r,l ;
xiii.2, 4; xix. 11 ; Jn. v. 45; xi. 13, [31 TTr WH]; xiii.
29 ; XX. 15 ; 1 Co. iv. 9 ; 2 Co. xii. 19 ; Jas. iv. 5. so used
that the object is easily understood from the context : Mt.
xxiv. 44 (ij ωρα oi Sokc'itc ό v'ws τοΰ ανθρώπου (ρχ(ται) ;
Lk. xii. 40 ; xvii. 9 [R G L br. Tr mrg. br.] ; forming a
parenthesis in the midst of a question : πόσω, &οκήτ(.
\fipovot άξιωβήσ(ται τιμωρία!; Ileb. .\. 29; (Arstph.
Acharn. 12 πώς τοντ ίσΐΐσϊ μον, δοκβΐ?, την καρΒΙαν ;
Anacr. 40, 15 [i. e. 35 (33). 16] πόσον, Sok(U, πονονσιν,
(ρω!, όσον! σύ βάλλαι;). [Syn. see η-γίυμαι, fin.] 2.
intrans. to seem, he accounted, reputed : Lk. x. 36 ; xxii.
24 ; Acts xvii. 18 ; xxv. 27 ; 1 Co. xii. 22 ; 2 Co. x. 9 ;
Ileb. xii. 1 1 ; tho^a ί'μαυτω Seiv πράξαι, I seemed to my-
self, i. e. I thought, Acts xx.i. 9 [cf. B. Ill (97)] ; οι
BoKovvTf! άρχίΐν those that are accounted to rule, who
are recognized as rulers, Mk. x. 42 ; oi δοκοΟιτΕ? tlval τι
those who are reputed to be somewhat (of importance),
and therefore have influence. Gal. ii. 6, [9], (Plat. Eulhvd.
p. 303 c.) ; simply, o! Βηκηνντί! those highly esteemed, of
repute, looked up to, influential, (ial. ii. 2 (often in Grk.
writ, as Eur. Hec. 295, where cf. Schafer ; [cf. W. § 45,
7]). By way of courtesy, things certain are sometimes
said SoKf'tv, as in Ileb. iv. 1 (cf. Cic. offic. 3, 2, 6 ut tute
tibi dcfuisse videare) ; 1 Co. xi. 16 [but cf. Mey. ad loc.];
cf. W. § 65, 7 c. 3. impers. Boxtl μο», it seems to me;
i. e. a. / thini; Judge : thus in (piestions, τι σοι (ίμΐν)
δο<ίί; Mt. xvii. 25 ; xviii. 12 ; xxi. 28; xxii. 1 7, 42; xxvi.
ti6 ; »In. ,\i. 56 ; κατά το δοκούν αυτοίς as seemetl good
to them, Ileb. xii. 10, (Lcian. Tim. § 25, and πάρα τ6
doKovv ημίν, Thuc. 1, 84). b. ίδοξ* μοι it seemed (food to,
pleased, me; I determined; foil, by inf., Lk. i. 3; Acts .\v.
22, 25, 28, 34 Rec. ; also often in (irk. writ. CoMP. :
€v-, συν- €υ- δοκ/ω.*
(8υν•. SoKfiv'I, φαΐνισβαι: φαΐν. (primarily of luminous
bodies) makes reference to the actual external appear-
ance, generally correct but possibly (ieceptive; Sok. refers
to tjie subjective judgment, wliich may or may not
conform to the f.act. Hence such a combination as Soku
<ραίν(σθαι is no pleonasm. Cf. Trench § Ixxx. ; Schmidt
ch. l.'i.l
Βοκιμ-άξω; [fut. δοκιμάσω]; 1 aor. «δοκίμασα; Pass.,
[pres. δοκιμα^ο/ιαι] ; pf. δΐδοκιμασμαι; (δόκιμος); Sept.
chiefly for )Π3 ; as in Grk. writ. fr. [Ildt., Thuc], Xen.
and Plat, on, to try ; 1. to test, examine, prot^e, scruti-
nize (to see whether a thing be genuine or not), as
metals ! χρυσίον δια ττυρό: (Isocr. p. 240 d. [i. e. Panar
then. § 14] ; ad Demon, p. 7 b. [here Bekk. βασανίζομιν'] ;
Sept., Prov. viii. 10 ; Sir. ii. 5 ; Sap. iii. 6 ; ΰργυρυν, I'rov.
xvii. 3, [cf. Zech. xiii. 9]), 1 Pet. i. 7 ; other things : Lk.
xii. 56 ; xiv. 1 9 ; 2 Co. viii. 8 ; Gal. vi. 4 ; 1 Th. ii. 4 ; v. 21 ;
τα διαφέροντα, Ro. ii. 18; Phil. i. 10, [al. refer these pass,
to 2 ; see διαφϊρω, 2 b.] ; men, 1 Tim. iii. 1 (in the pass.) ;
ίαυτόν, 1 Co. xi. 28 ; 2 Co. xiii. 5, (cf. ϊξ(τάζ(ΐν εαυτοί/, Xen.
mem. 2, 5, 1 and 4) ; θιόν, Heb. iii. 9 (R G, fr. Ps. xciv.
(xcv.) 9 ; on the sense of the phrase see π(φάζω, 2 d. /3.) ;
τα πν(ΰματα, foil, by ft whether etc. 1 Jn. iv. 1 ; foil, by
indir. disc, Ro. xii. 2 ; 1 Co. iii. 13 ; Eph. v. 10. 2. to
recoqnize as genuine after examination, to approve, deem
irorlh)/: 1 Co. xvi. 3; τινίι σπονδαΐον όντα, 2 Co. viii. 22;
fV ω δοκιμάζίΐ for iv τούτω, ό δοκιμάζη in that which he
approves, deems right, Ro. xiv. 22 ; δ€δοκιμάσμ(θα υπό τοΖ
θ(οϋ πιστίυθηναι το ιναγγΆιον we have been approved bv
God to be intrusted with the business of pointing out to
men the way of salvation, 1 Tli. ii. 4 ; οΰκ (δοκίμασαν τον
θ(ον ϊχίΐν iv ίττιγνώσίΐ they did not think God worthy to
be kept in knowledge, Ro. i. 28. [On δοκιμάζω (as com-
pared with π(ψάζω) see Trench § l.xxiv. ; Cremcr s. v.
πειράζω. CoMI*. : αττοδοκιμά^ω.] *
δοκιμασία, -ας, ή, a /iroring, putting to the proof: πιι-
ράζ(ΐν iv δοκιμασία to tempt by proving, Heb. iii. 9 LT
TrWll. ([Lys.],' Xen., Plat., Dem., Polyb., Plut., al.;
λίθο! δοκιμασία!. Sir. vi. 21.) *
δοκιμή, -ηι, ή, (δόκιμο!) ; 1. in an active sense, a
prorinq, trial: θ\ίψ(ω!, through affliction, 2 Co. viii. 2.
2. approvedness, tried character: Ro. v. 4; 2 Co. ii. 9;
Phil. ii. 22 ; ttjs διακονία!, exhibited in the contribution,
2 Co. i.x. 13. 3. η proof [objectively], a specimen of
tried worth : 2 Co. xiii. 3. (Diosc. 4, 186 (183); occa-
sionally in eccl. writ.) *
ύοκίμίον
Ιδδ
ίιόξα
8οκ(μιον, -ου, τό, (&οκίμή) ; 1. i. q. το ίοκιμύζιιν, the
proving: rjjs πί<ττ(ωί, Jas. i. 3. 2. that hy b:/iu'li some-
thing is tried or proved, a test: Dion. Hal. ars rliet. 11 ;
γλώσσα Ύ€νσ€ως δοκίμιον, Longin. de sublim. 32. .'> : δοκι-
μιou 8i στρατιωτών κάματος, Ildian. 2, 10, 12 [G ed.
Bekk.] ; in Sept. of a crucible or furnace for smelting :
Prov. xxvii. 21 ; Ps. xi. (xii.) 7. 3. e([uiv. to 6οκιμή,
2 : ίμων της πίστ€α)9, your proved faith, 1 Pet. i. 7.
This word is treated of fully by Fritzsche in his Prali-
minarien u.s.w. pp. 40, 44.*
8<Ski|ios, -ov, (βίχομαι) ; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. prop.
accepted, particularly of coins and metals, Gen. xxiii. 16 ;
2Chr. ix. 17; Lcian. Ilerm. 68, etc. ; hence univ. proi«/,
tried : in the N. T. one who is of tried faith and integ-
rity [R. V. approved'], Ro. xvi. 10 {του ϋόκιμον iv Χριστώ,
the approved servant of Christ) ; 1 Co. xi. 19 ; 2 Co. x.
18; .xiii. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 15 (παρίστάναι iavrbv ^όκιμον τώ
Of ω); Jas. i. 12. 2. accepted Ί. (^. acceptable, pleasing :
evapetTTOs τω θεω κ. δόκιμος [L mrg. -μοις~\ Tols άνθρωποις,
Ro. xiv. 18.'•
SoKOs, -ov, ή, (fr. ^(κομαι for δίχομαι, in so far as it has
the idea of bearing [cf. Curtius § 11]) ; fr. Hom. down ;
a beam: Mt. vii. 3-5; Lk. vi. 41 sq.*
S6Xu>s, -a, -ov, (δόλοί) ; fr. Hom. on; deceitful: 2 Co.
xi. 13.*
8ολιόω : (SoXtof) ; to deceive, use deceit: in Ro. iii. 13,
fr. Ps. V. 10, impf. «δολιοΟσαν an Alexandrian form for
iSoXiovv, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 349 ; W. § 13, 2 f. ; ΛΙηΙ-
lach p. 16 ; B. 43 (37) ; [cf. «χω]. (Not found in prof,
writ. ; [Numb. xxv. 18 ; Ps. civ. (cv.) 25. Cf. W. 20
(25)].) *
SoXos, -ov, 6, (fr. δίλω to catch with a bait [(?) ; Lat.
dolus, cf. Curtius § 271] ; see διλιάζω above) ; prop, bait,
Hom. Od. 12, 252; a lure, snare; hence craft, deceit,
guile : Mt. xxvi. 4 ; Mk. xiv. 1 ; vii. 22 ; Jn. i. 47 (48) ;
Acts xiii. 10; 2Co. xii. 16; Ro. i. 29 ; 1 Th. ii. 3 (οϋκ
?στι tV δολω, there is no deceit under it) ; 1 Pet. ii. [1],
22, and Rev. xiv. 5 Rec, after Is. liii. 9 ; λαλ^ί» δόλο»
to speak deceitfully (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14), 1 Pet.
iii. 10.•
δολόω, -ώ ; (δόλοί) ; 1. to ensnare : Hes., Hdt. and
succeeding writers. 2. to corrupt, ([βδίλλιοκ and
Χίβαι/ον, Dioscor. 1, 80. 81] ; τον otvov, Lcian. Hermot. 59) :
Tiiv λύγοχ τοϋ dfoi, divine truth by mingling with it wrong
notions, 2 Co. iv. 2. [Cf. Trench § Ixii. and see καπη-
Xf υω.] *
εόμα, -ros, τό, (δίδωμι), a gift : Mt. vii. 1 1 ; Lk. xi. 13;
Eph. iv. 8; Phil. iv. 17. (Plat. def. p. 415 b.; Plut. ;
often in Sept., chiefly for Tijnp.) Cf. Fritzsche on Mt.
p. 291 sq. fwho quotes Varro de ling. Lat. 1. iv. p. 48 ed.
Bip. " dos erit pecunia si nuptiarum causa data : haec
Graece δωτΐνη, ita enim hoc Siculi• ab eodem Donum.
Nam Graece ut ipsi SOipov, ut alii δόμα, et ut Attici δόσι? ."] *
[Stn. So μα, ζόσΐί. Βώρον, SwpecE; Sotr. act. a giving, pass,
thing given, cf . medical " dose " ; δώρ. specific " present," yet
not always gratuitous or wholly unsuggestive of recom-
pense ; but Supfa differs from ίώρ. in denoting a gift ivhich
is also a gratuity, hence of the benefactions of a sover-
eign ; a S<!<rir 8eoi is what God confers as possessor of all
things ; a Sapia βίοΰ is an expression of his favor ; a Sapop
BfoH is something which becomes the recipient's abiding pos-
session. Fhilo de cherub. § 25, says πάνυ €κδήλα)$ τταριστά!
{Num. xxviii. 2), δτι των ΰντων τα μ^ν χάρίτο$ μίσ-η^ ήξίωταί,
5ϊ καλίΐτοι ζ6σι$, τα δέ ίμζίνονοί, ήϊ όνομα ΟίΚΐΙον δ ω pea.
Again, de leg. alleg. iii. § 70 (on the same bibl. pass.), δια-
Τ77ρήσ€ί5 δτί δώρα Ζομάτων Ζίαψ^ρουσί' τά μ\ν yap ΐμφασιρ
μΐ•γΐθουί Τ€\ΐίων ά.•γαθών 5η\οΰσιν . . . το δέ els βραχύτατον
€ίΓταλταί κτλ. Hence 5όμα, δοσίϊ, .9'./?; δωρϊά, ίώρον, Iten/'fac-
tioii, bounti/, etc. ; yet cf. e. g. Test. xii. Patr. test. Zab. § 1
^yw ίίμι ΖαβουΚών, S ό oris ayadij to7s yovfvai μου, with Gen.
XXX. 20 δ€δώρ7ϊταί δ Bios μοι Βώρον KaKhv ... κ. €Κ(ίλ€σε rh
όνομα αντοϋ ΖαβουΚών. Cf. Schmidt ch. 106.]
εόξα, -i;r, ή, (δοκί'ω), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. most freq.
for li22, several times for ΙΐΠ, "^ΙΠ, etc. ;
I. opinion, judgment, view: in this sense very often in
prof. writ. ; but in the Bible only in 4 Maec. v. 1 7 (18).
II. opinion, estimate, whether good or bad, concerning
some one ; but (like the Lat. exislimatio) in prof. writ,
generally, in the sacred writ, always, good opinion con-
cerning one, and as resulting from that, praise, honor,
glfirij: Lk. xiv. 10; Heb. iii. 3; 1 Pet. v. 4; opp. to
ατιμία, 2 Co. vi. 8 ; opp. to αισχύνη, Phil. iii. 19 ; joined
with τιμή, Ro. ii. 7, 10 ; 1 Pet. i. 7 ; 2 Pet. i. 1 7 ; δόξα τινός,
praise or honor coming to some one, Lk. ii. 32 ; Eph. iii.
13; coming from some one, Jn. viii. 54; xii. 43; των
ανθρώπων, τοϋ θ(θϋ, Jn. .xii. 43 ; Ro. iii. 23 ; persons whose
excellence is to redound to the glory of others are called
their δόξα : thus, iificls €στί ή δόξα ημών, 1 Th. ii. 20 ;
άδ(\φο\ ημών δόξα Χρίστου, 2 Co. viii. 23. fijTfli' την ιδία»
δόξαν, or τ. δόξ. αντοϋ, Jn. vii. 18; viii. 50; of God, to
endeavor to promote the glory of God, Jn. vii. 18 ;
ξητίΐν δόξαν ίξ ανθρώπων, 1 Th. ii. 6 ; τήν δόξαν τ. πάρα
τον θ(ον, Jn. ν. 44 : λαμβάνειν δόξαν (Lat. capture hono-
rem) to seek to receive, catch at glory, .Jn. v. 41, 44 ; to
receive glory, 2 Pet. i. 1 7 ; Rev. v. 1 2 : τήν δόξαν, the glory
due [cf. W."l05 (100) sq. ; B. 88 (77) ; Ellic. on Gal. i.
5, cf. B. 89 (78)], Rev. iv. 11; διδ^αι δόξαν τω θ(ω,
m'ri'^ 1133 Dliy or (.Jer. xiii. 16) [jij, to give or ascribe
glory to God, why and how being evident in each
case from the context : thus, by declaring one's grati-
tude to God for a benefit received, Lk. xvii. 18 ; by not
distrusting God's promises, Ro. iv. 20 ; by celebrating
his praises, Rev. iv. 9; xi. 13; xiv. 7; [xvi. 9]; xix. 7
{τήν δόξαν the glory due) ; by rendering its due honor
to God's majesty, Acts xii. 23 ; δος δόξαν τω θίω, ac-
knowledge that God knows all things, and show that
you believe it by the confession you are about to make,
Jn. ix. 24, cf. 1 S. vi. 5 ; Josh. vii. 19 ; Ev. Nicod. c. 14 [p.
622 ed. Thilo, 296 ed. Tdf.] ; cf. Grimm on 4 Mace. i. 12.
(U δόξαν 0€oi, so as to honor God, to promote his glory
(among men) : Ro. xv. 7 ; 1 Co. .x. 31 ; Phil. i. 1 1 ; ii. 1 1 ;
eiff τήν δόξ. τ. θΐον, Ro. iii. 7 ; 2 Co. iv. 1."» ; τώ θ(ώ προς
δόξαν, 2 Co. i. 20 ; προς τήν τον κνρίον δόξαι-, - Co. viii. 19 ;
νπίρ της δόξης τον θ(ον. .Τη. xi. 4 ; in doxologies : δόξα ev
ίψίσταις θιώ. Lk. ii. 14, cf. xix. 38 ; αύτώ ή δόξα, Ro. xi.
36; Eph. iii. 21: 2 Pet. iii. 18; ω ή δόξα, Ro. xvi. 27; (ial.
i. 5 ; 2 Tim. iv. 18 ; Heb. xiii. 21 ; τω θ(ω ή δόξα, Phil. iv.
Βόξα
156
8όξα
20; τιμή και 8ΰξα, 1 Tim. i. 17. [Even in classic (irk.
8όξα is a word of wide signif., ranging from one's private
opinion, fancy, to public opinion, repute, renown
(kXcoc; cf. the relation of φήμτ) to φύΐΌΐ). Coupled with
τιμή it denotes rather the spkndid condition (evident
glori/), τιμή the estimate and acknowledgment of it
(paid //')Hor).]
III. As a translation of the Ilebr. Ίί33, in a use for-
eign to Grk. writ. [W. 32], s]>linilur, l/ri'/liliic'^s ; 1.
properly: τον φωτο!, Acts xxii. 11; of Uut sun, moon,
stars, 1 Co. .\v. 40 sq. ; used of the heavenly brightness,
by which God was conceived of as surrounded, Lk. ii. 9 ;
Acts vii. 5.'>, and by ivhich heavenly beings were sur-
rounded when they appeared on earth, Lk. i.\. 31 ; Rev.
xviii. 1 ; with which the face of Moses was once made
luminous, 2 Co. iii. 7, and also Christ in his transfigura-
tion, Lk. ix. 32; δάξα τον κυρίου, in Sept. ecpiiv. to 1132
niri", in the targ. and talui. ΓυΟϋ/, Slu'kinah or Shechi-
nah [sec BB.DD. s. v.], Ilie r/lori/ nfl/ir Lord, and simply
ή δό|α, a bright cloud by which (Jod made manifest to
men his presence and power on earth (Ex. xxiv. 17 ; xl.
28 (34 ) sqq., etc.) : Ro. ix. 4 ; Rev. χ v. 8 ; xxi. 1 1 , 23 ; hence,
ό ieorr^s δόξηΐ (God to whom belongs 8όξα) ωφθη. Acts
vii. 2 ; Χ(ρυνβ(\ν δόξη^, on whom the divine glory rests
(so 8όξα without the article, Ex. xl. 28 (34) ; 1 S. iv. 22 ;
Sir. xlix. 8 ), Ileb. ix. 5. 2. magnifk-enrc, excellenrr,
preiimiiwnce, rli()iiitij, grace : βασίΚ(ΐαι τοΰ κόσμου κ. ή δόξα
αϋτων, Ί. e. their resources, wealth, the maguilicence and
greatness of their cities, their fertile lands, their throng-
ing population, Mt. iv. 8 ; Lk. iv. 6 ; ή δόξα των βασιΧιίων
της -γης, Rev. xxi. [24 ; των ϊθνών, ibid.] 2U ; used of
royal state, splendid apparel, and the like : Mt. vi. 29 ;
Lk. xii. 27, (Esth. v. 1 ; Joseph, antt. 8, G, 5) ; glorious form
and api)earance : e. g. of human boiiies restored to life,
opp. to ή άτίμία which characterized them when they
were buried, 1 Co. .w. 43 ; ή δόξα τής σαρκός "omne id,
(piod in rebus humanis magnifieum dicitur " (Calvin), 1
Pet. i. 24 ; flval τινι δόξα to be a glory, ornament, to one,
1 Co. xi. 1 5 ; univ. preeminence, excellence : 2 Co. iii. 8-11.
3. majesty; a. that which belongs to (jod; and a. the
kingly majesty Avhich belongs to him as the supreme
ruler ; so in pass, where it is joined with βασΐΚΰα, δύναμις,
κράτος, ίξουσία. and the like: Mt. vi. 13 Rec. ; esp. in
doxologies, 1 Pet. iv. 11 ; v. 11 RG; Jude 2.5 ; Rev. i.
6 ; these pass. I have preferred to distinguish fr. those
cited above, II. fin., and yet in pass, similar to each other
in form it is not :ilways clear whether δόξα is used to de-
note praise and honor, or regal majesty, as in Rev. vii.
12»; (ifXoyta κ. ή δόξα κ- ή σοφία κ. ή (νχαριστία κ. ή τιμή
κ. ή Ισχΰί, Rev. xix. 1 ή σωτηρία κ. ή δόξα κ. ή τιμή κ- ή
δΰναμις; likewise in Rev. v. 12, [13]. of the judicial
majesty of God as exhibited at the last day, Jude vs. 24.
άνήρ (Ικων κ. δόξα θ(οΰ ίητάρχων, whose function of govern-
ment rellects the majesty of the divine rider, 1 Co. xi. 7 ;
{ή) γυνή δόξα «ι/δμόί, because in her the preeminence and
authority of her husband are conspicuous, ibid. β. maj-
esli/ in the sense of the absolute perfection of the
deity : Ro. i. 23 : 2 Co. iv. 6 ; Heb. i. 3 ; 2 Pet. i. 1 7 ; 1 Pet.
iv. 14 ; eV δόξη i. q. (νδόξως, i. e. as accords with his di-
vine perfection, Phil. iv. 19 [cf. Mcy. and lij). Lghtft.
adloc.]; of the majesty of his savinggrace: Ro. ix. 23 ;
Eph. i. 12, 14, 18; iii. 16; 1 Tim. i. 1 1 ; 2 Pet. i. 3 [W.
381 (3Γ)6)] ; more fully δόξα της χάριτος, Eph. \. G ; 6 πα-
τήρ τής δόξης, the Father whose characteristic is majesty,
Ejih. i. 17 ; the majesty of (iod a.* exhibited in deeds of
poΛver: Jn. xi. 40 ; Ro. vi. 4 (whenci• δύξα for Ij,', Sept.
Is. xii. 2 ; xlv. 24) ; hence ru κράτος τής δόξης αυτοί, the
might in which his majesty e.\cels. Col. i. 11. b. maj-
e.sly which belongs to Christ; and o. the kingly
majesty of the Messiah, to which belongs his kingly stale,
the splendor of his external appearance, the retinue of
angels, and the like (see in III. 1) : Mk. x. 37; in this
sense it is said that Christ will come hereafter to set up
the Messianic kingdom ev τή δόξι; τοϋ πατρός, clothed by
the Father in kingly array, Mt. xvi. 27; Mk. viii. 38;
Lk. ix. 2lj ; μ€τα δυνάμίως κ. δόξης πολλής, Mt. .xxiv. 30;
Mk. xiii. 21) ; Lk. xxi. 27 cf. Mt. xxv. 31 ; Tit. ii. 13 ; 1 Pet.
iv. 13; also καθίσαι (π\ θρόνου δόξης αυτόν, Mt. xix. 28;
xxv. 31, ef. 1 S. ii. 8 ; ή δόξα της ισχύος αντοΐι, the majesty
of his Messianic power with which he will punish his
adversaries, 2 Th. i. 9. β. lite absolutely perfect inward
or personal excellence of Christ : 2 Co. iii. 18 ; iv. 4 ; in
which he excels by virtue of his nature as ό θιίος Xdyor,
Jn. i. 11; xii. 41 ; of which majesty he gave tokens in
the miracles he performed, Jn. ii. 1 1 cf. xi. 40 ; ό κνριος
τής δόξης, 1 Co. ii. 8 ; Jas. ii. 1. γ. the majtslii (yl'iry) nf
iinijils, as apparent in their e.xterior brightness, Lk. ix.
26 ; in a wider sense, in which angels are called δόξαι as
being spiritual beings of preeminent dignity : Jude vs. 8 ;
2 Pet. ii. 10. 4. α most r/lorious condition, most exalted
slate; a. of that condition with (iod the Father in heav-
en to which Christ was raised after he had achieved his
work on earth: Lk. xxiv. 26; Jn. xvii. .5 (ivhere he is
said to have been in the same condition before his incar-
nation, and even before the beginning of the world); ib.
22, 24 ; Ileb. ii. 7, 9 ; 1 Pet. i. 1 1, 21 ; τό σό>μα τής δόξης
αίτον, the body in which his glorious condition is mani-
fested, Phil. iii. 21 ; άνιλήφθη Iv δόξ;/, was taken uj) (into
heaven) so that he is now «i/ δόξη, 1 Tim. iii. 16 [cf. W.
413 (385); B. 328 (283)]. b. the glorious condition o/
blessedness into which it . is appointed and promised that
true Christians shall enter afier their Saviour's return from
heaven : Ro. viii. 18, 21 ; ix. 23 ; 2 Co. iv. 17 ; Col. i. 27
(twice ; cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; iii. 4 ; 2 Tim. ii. 10 ; Ileb. ii.
10; 1 Pet. V. 1; which condition begins to be enjoyed
even now through the devout contemplation of the divine
majesty of Christ, and its influence upon those who con-
template it, 2 Co. iii. 18 ; and this condition will include
not only the blessedness of the soul, but also the gain of
a more excellent body (1 Co. xv. 43 ; Phil. iii. 21) ; cf.
Lipsius, Paulin. Reehtfertigungslehre, p. 203 sqq. ; ή δόξα
ToC θ(ον, which God bestows, Ro. v. 2 ; 1 Th. ii. 12; δόξα
τοΰ κυρ. ήμ- Ίησ. Χρ. the same in which Christ rejoices,
2 Th. ii. 14 (cf. Ro. viii. 17, etc.); (is δόξαν ήμων, to
render us partakers of δόξα, 1 Co. ii. 7. Cf. Weiss, Bibl.
Theol. des N. T. § 76 d.*
Βοξάζα
157
BovXot
ίοξάΛ,ω ; [impf. ϋόξαζυν] ; fut. δοξάσω ; 1 aor. (8όξασα ;
Pass., [pres. δοξάζομαι^ ; jif. δίδό|ασμαι ; 1 aor. ϊδοξάσθην;
{δόξα) ; Vulg. konorifico, glor'ifico, clarifico ; Sept. chiefly
for 133, several times for 1X3, (in E.\. xxxiv. 29 sq.
35 δοξάζισθαί stands for y\\>^ to shine) ; 1. to think,
suppose, be of opinion, (Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plat.,
Thuc, et sqq. ; nowhere in this sense in the sacred writ-
ings). 2. fr. Polyb. (6, 5.3, 10 διδοξασμίνοι ck apfTrj) on
to praise, extol, magnify, celebrate : τινά, pass., Mt. vi. 2;
Lk. iv. 15 : ίαντόν, to glorify one's self, Jn. viii. 54; Rev.
xviii. 7 ; τον "Koyov τον κνρίαν, Acts xiii. 48 ; το όνομα του
κυρίου, Rev. χν. 4 ; τονθ^όν, Mt. v. IC ; ix. 8 ; xv. 31 : Mk.
ii. 12 ; Lk. v. 25 sq. ; vii. 16 ; xiii. 13 ; xvii. 15 ; xviii. 43;
xxiii. 47 ; Acts xi. 18 ; xxi. 20 [Rec. κνριον~\ ; Ro. xv. 6,
9 [W. §44, 3 b.: 332 (311)]; 1 Pet. ii. 12; iv. 14 Rec;
with the addition of tVi τινι, for something, Lk. ii. 20 ;
Acts iv. 21 ; 2 Co. ix. 13 ; eV «μοι, on account of me (projv
erly, finding in me matter for giving praise [cf. W. 3S7
(362) sq.]). Gal. i. 24 ; eV τω ονόματι τοντω, 1 Pet. iv. IG L
TTrWH. 3. lo honor, do honor to, hold in honor:
την διακονίαν μου, by the most devoted administration of
it endeavoring to convert as many Gentiles as possible to
Christ, Ro. xi. 13 ; a member of the body, 1 Co. xii. 26;
6eov, lo worship, Ro. i. 21 ; with the adjunct ίν τω σώματι,
by keeping the body pure and sound, 1 Co. vi. 20 ; τω
βανάτω, to undergo death for the honor of God, Jn. xxi.
I'J. 4. By a use not found in prof. writ, lo make glori-
ous, adorn with lustre, clothe with splendor; a. to impart
glory to something, render it excellent : pf. pass, διδάξα-
σμαι to e.xcel, be preeminent ; διδοξασμΐνος excelling, emi-
nent, glorious, 2 Co. iii. 10 ; δ^δοξασμίνη χάρα surpassing
i. e. heavenly joy, [A. \.full of glory'], I Pet. i. 8. b.
to make renowned, render illustrious, i. e. to caiwse the
dignity and icorth of some person or thing to become mani-
fest and acknowledged : τον λόγον τοί; 0foO, 2 Th. iii. 1 ;
Christ, the Son of God, Jn. viii. 54 ; xi. 4 ; xvi. 14 ; xvii.
10 ; God the Father, Jn. xiii. 31 sq. ; xiv. 13 ; xv. 8 ; .xvii.
1,4; 1 Pet. iv. 11; το όνομα τοϋ 5ίθΟ, Jn. xii. 28. c. to
exalt to a glorious rank or condition (Is. xliv. 23 ; Iv. 5,
etc. ; joined to Ιψοϋν, Is. i v. 2 ; Esth. iii. 1 ) : ονχ iavTov
(δόξασ( did not assume to himself the dignity (equiv. to
ονχ ίαντω την τιμήν eXa^f, vs. 4). the \vords γ^νηθηναι άρ-
χκρία being added epexegetically (W. § 44, 1), Heb. v.
5 ; of (iod e.xalting, or rather restoring, Christ his Son
lo a state of glory in heaven : Jn. vii. 39 ; xii. 16, [23] ;
xiii. 31 sq. ; xvii. 1, 5 : Acts iii. 13 ; (see δόξα. III. 4 a.) ;
i>f God bringing Cliristians to a heavenly dignity and
londition, (see δόξα. III. 4 b.) : Ro. viii. 30. [Comp. :
fv-, σνν-δοξόζω,] '
Δορκάε, -άδοί. ή. (prop, a wild she-goat, a gazelle, " πάρα
TO δίρκω, TO β\(πω• ϋξυδιρκΪ! yap το ζωον κ- (νόμματον "
Etym. Magn. [284, 6]), Dorcas, a certain Christian wo-
man : Acts ix. 36, 39 ; see Ταβιθά.'
So<ris, -(ως. ή. (δίδωμι) ; 1. α giving, [fr. Ildt.
down] ; λόγοί δόσεως κ. \ήψ(ω(, an account of giving
and receivinir [i. e. debit and credit accounts : cf. Xoyof
II. 3], Phil. iv. 15 ; here Paul, by a pleasant euphemism,
refers to the pecuniary gifts, which the church bestow-
ing them enters in the account of expenses, but he him-
self in the account of receipts ; cf. Van Hengel ad loe. ;
so δύση και λήψις, of money given and received. Sir. xii.
19 ; xiii. 7 ; [llerm. mand. 5, 2, 2], and plur. Epict. diss. 2,
9, 12. 2. a gift, [fr. Hom. down] : Jas. i. 17. [Syn.
see δόμα, fin.]*
δότη5, -ου, ό, {δίδωμι), for the more usual δοτηρ, a giver,
beslower : 2 Co. Lx. 7 fr. Prov. .xxii. 8. Xot found else-
where.'
Soυ\ayωyiω [Rec." -ayay-], -ώ ; (δονλάγωγος, ef. παιδα-
γωγοί) ; to lead away into slavery, claim as one's slave,
(Diod. Sic. 12, 24, and occasionally in other later writ.) ;
to make a slave and lo treat as a slave i. e. toith severity,
lo subject to stem and rigid discipline : 1 Co. ix. 27.
Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexicorum X. T. p. 472 sq.*
SovXcfa (Tdf. -ία. [see I, t]), -ας, ή, {δην\(νω) ; slavery,
bondage, the comlilion of a slave : της φθοράς, the bond-
age which consists in decay [ W. § 59, 8 a., cf. B. 78 (68)],
equiv. to the law, the necessity, of perishing, Ro. viii.
21 ; used of the slavish sense of fear, devoid alike of
buoyancy of spirit and of trust in God, such as is produced
by the thought of death, Heb. ii. 15, as well as by the
Mosaic law in its votaries, Ro. viii. 15 (ην^νμα δηνλίίας) ;
the Mosaic system is said to cause δονλ(ία on accoimt of
the grievous burdens its precepts impose upon its adhe-
rents : Gal. iv. 24; v. 1. [From Pind. down.]*
δουλεύω; fut. δονλ^ίσω; 1 aor. Εδονλ€υσα; pf. δ^δον-
λ(υκα ; (δοϋλοί) ; Sept. for 13^' : 1. prop, to be a slave,
serve, do service : absol., Eph. vi. 7 ; 1 Tim. vi. 2 ; tiw,
Mt. vi. 24 ; Lk. xvi. 13 ; Ro. ix. 12 ; said of nations in
subjection to other nations, Jn. viii. 33 ; Acts vii. 7 ; men
are said δουλ(ΐ;((ΐ' who bear the yoke of the Mosaic law,
Gal. iv. 25 (see δουλίία). 2. metaph. to obey, submit
to ; a. in a good sense : absol. to yield obedience, Ro.
vii. 6 ; Tivi, lo obey one's commands and render lo him the
services due, Lk. xv. 29; God: Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13;
1 Th. i. 9 ; κυμίω and τω κνρίω. Acts xx. 19; Ro. xii. 11
(not Rec", see below); Ejih. vi. 7; Christ: Ro. xiv.
18; Col. iii. 24 : νόμω θιον, ace. to the context, feel myselj
bound to, Ro. vii. 25 ; tois θ^ο'ις, to worship gods. Gal. iv.
8 ; τω καιρώ (Anth. 9,441, G), wisely adapt one's self to,
Ro. xii. 11 Rec." (see above), cf. Fritzsche ad loc. ; | er-
form services of kindness and Christian love : άΧλήλοις.
Gal. V. 13 ; used of those who zealously advance the in-
terests of anything : ώς πατρϊ τίκνον σνν ('μοΊ ίδοι'λίυσίκ
fif το eiayytXiov e((ui\ . to ώς πατρϊ τίκνον δου\(ν€ΐ. tpo'i
(δονλ(νσ(ν κπ\ οντω σνν ΐμοΊ «δούλ. etc. Phil. ii. 22 [W.
422 (393) ; 577 (537)]. b. in a bad sense, of those who
become slaves to some base power, lo yield to, give one's
self up to : T^ αμαρτία, Ro. vi. 6 ; νόμω αμαρτίας, Ro. Λ ii.
25 ; {'πιθνμϊαις κ. ηδοναΐς. Tit. iii. 3, (Xen. mem. 1, 5, 5;
apol. Socr. 1Γ, : Plat. Phaedrus p. 238e.: Polyb. 17, 15, 16 ;
Ildian. 1, 17, 22 [9 ed. Bekk.]) ; τ^ κοιλία. Ro. xvi. 18,
(yaoTpi, Anthol. 1 1, 410, 4 ; Xen. mem. 1, 6. 8 ; abdomini
servire. Sen. de benef. 7, 26, 4; ventri obedire. Sail. [Cat. i.
1]) ; μαμωνα. to devote one's self to getting wealth : Jit. vi.
24 ; Lk. xvi. 13. το'ϊς στοιχίίοις τον κόσμαν, Gal. iv. 9.*
8ονλο«, -ij, -ο», (derived by most fr. δίω to tie, bind ;
Βου\όω
158
Βύναμαι
by some fr. ΔΕΛΟ to ensnare, capture, [(?) al. al. ; cf.
Vanicek p. 322]); scrviiu/, su/jjcrt Irr. τιαμιστήσατι τα
μίΚη υμών SoiXarrj ακαθαρσία, Ro. vi. 19. Then substan-
ti\fK•, ή 8οίιλη a ft male slave, homlmaid, handmaid: τοΰ
θ(ον, τον κυρίου, one who worships God and submits to
him, Acts ii. 18 (fr. Joel ii. 29 (iii. 2)) ; Lk. i. 38, 48.
ό ίοΰλοί, Sept. for 13J? ; 1. a stave, bondman, mati of
servile condition ; a. properly : opp. to cXfuSfpos, 1 Co.
vii. 21 ; xii. 13 ; Gal. iii. 2s ; Eph. vi. 8 ; Col. iii. 1 1 ; Rev.
vi. 15; xiii. 16; .\i.\. 18; opp. to Kvpiot, δισπότη!, οίκο-
δ(σπότης, Mt. χ. 24 ; xiii. 27 sq. ; Lk. xii. 46 ; Jn. xv. 15;
Eph. vi. 5 ; Col. iii. 22 ; iv. 1 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1 ; Tit. ii. 9,
and very often, b. metaph. a. one who gives himself
up wholly to another's will, 1 Co. vii. 23; or dominion,
T^f άμαμτίαί, Jn. viii. 34; Ro. vi. 17, 20; τήί φθοράς, 2
Pet. ii. 19, (τώχ ή5ονών, Athen. 12 p. 531 c. ; των χρημά-
των, IMut. Pelop. c. 3; τοϋ nivfiv, Ael. v. h. 2, 41). β.
the θυί)λοι Χρίστου, τοΰ Χριστού, Ίϊ^σοϋ Χρίστου, are those
whose service is used by Christ in extending and ad-
vancing his cause among men : used of apostles, Ro. i. 1 ;
Gal. i. 10 ; Phil. i. 1 ; 2 Tim. ii. 24 ; Tit. i. 1 ; Jas. i. 1 ;
2 Pet. i. 1 ; of other preachers and teachers of the
gospel. Col. iv. 12; 2 Tim. ii. 24; Jude vs. 1; of the
true worshippers of Christ (who is κύριο! νάντων, Acts
X. 36), Eph. vi. 6. the SoOXoi τοϋ θfoϋ, Π1Π' "13>*, are
those whose agency God employs in executing his pur-
poses: used of apostles. Acts iv. 29; xvi. 17; of Moses
(Josh. i. 1), Rev. χ v. 3 : of prophets (Jer. vii. 25 ; xxv.
4), Rev. i. 1 ; x. 7 ; xi. 18 ; of aU who obey God's com-
mands, his true worshippers, Lk. ii. 29 ; Rev. ii. 20 ; vii. 3 ;
xix. 2, 5 ; .xxii. 3, 6 ; (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 23 ; Ixviii. (IxLx.)
37 ; Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 4, 21). γ. SoCXot Ttras, devoted to
another to the disregard of one's own interests : Mt. xx.
27 ; Mk. X. 44; strenuously laboring for another's sal-
vation, 2 Co. iv. 5. 2. a servant, atle7ulant,(oi aiing):
Mt. xviii. 23, 26 sqq. [Stn. see διάκονος-Ί
8ουλόω, -ω : fut βουλώσω ; 1 aor. (8ού\ωσα ; pf. pass,
δίδΐίΰλωμοί; 1 aor. pass, ίδουλώ^ι?!» ; (δοι'λοί) ; [fr. Aes-
chyl. and lldt. down] ; to make a slave of, reduce to hond-
aije ; a. prop. : τινά, Acts vii. 6 ; τούτω και [yet Τ WH
cm. Tr br. και] δ^δούλωται to him he has also been made a
bondman, 2 Pet. ii. 19. b. metaph. : ΐμαυτόν τινι give
myself ivhoUy to one's needs an<l service, make myself a
bondman to him, 1 Co. ix. 19 ; δαυλοϋσθαί τινι. to be made
subject to the rule of some one, e. g. τ^ δικαιοσΰντ], τω
θ>ω, Ro. vi. 18, 22; likewise into τι. Gal. iv. 3 ; δίδουλω-
μίνο! οϊνω, wholly given up to, enslaved to, Tit. ii. 3
{8ov\fCfiv οΐνω, T.iban. ei)ist. 319) ; δίδονλωμαι (v τινι, to
be under bondage, held by constraint of law or necessity,
in some matter, 1 Co. vii. 15. [CoMP. : κατα-δοι/λ<5ω.]*
δοχή- -ήί- ή> ί.Βίχομαι to receive as a guest), a feast,
banquet, [cf. our reception'] : 8οχην ποιώ, Lk. v. 29 ; xiv.
13. (i. q. ΠΓΙψα, Gen. [xxi. 8] ; xxvi. 30 ; Esth. i. 3 ; v.
4 sqq. ; Athen. 8 p. 348 f. ; Plut. moral, p. 1102 b. [i. e.
non posse suav. vivi etc. 21, 9].) •
SpdKuv, -ovTos, 6, (apparently fr. ίίρκομαι, 2 aor. {δρά-
κοι»; hence δράκων prop, equiv. to οξν β)ίίπων [Etym.
Magn. 286, 7; cf. Curtius § 13]) ; Sept. chiefly for \•)η ;
a drarjon, a great serpent, a fabulous animal, (so as early
as Ilom. II. 2, 3o« s<i., etc.). From it, after (Jen. iii.
1 sqq., is derived the fig. description of the devil in Rev.
xii. 3-17; xiii. 2,4,11; xvi. 13; xx. 2. [Cf. Haudissin,
Studien zur semitisch. Religionsgesch. vol. i. (iv. 4) p.
281 S(i(i.]•
εράμω, to run, see τρίχω.
8ράο-σομιαι ; to grasp with the hand, to take : τινά, 1 Co.
iii. 19 [B. 291 (250); W. Ά:>•2 (330)]. (In Grk. writ.
fr. Horn, down; Sept.)*
εριχμήι -ψ, η, {Βράσσομαι. [hence prop, a grip, a hand-
ful]), [fr. lldt. down], n drachina, a silver cuin of [near-
1}] the same weight as the Roman denarius (see 5ηνάριον) :
Lk. XV. 8 sq.•
SpeVavov, -ου, τό, (i. q. hpcnairq, f r. δρί'ττω to pluck, pluck
off), a sickle, a pruning-hook;ahooked vine-knife, such as
reapers and vine-dressers use : Mk. iv. 29 ; Rev. xiv.
14-19. (Ilom. and subseq. writ.; Sept.)*
8p6p.os, -ου, ό, (fr. ΔΡΑΜΩ [q. v.] ; cf. νάμης, τρόμος, and
the like), α course (Horn, et .sijq.) ; in the N. 1". fig., t/ie
course of life or of office : πΚηροίσθαι τόι/ δρόρον. Acts xiii.
25 ; TfKfiovv, Acts x.x. 24 ; τ(\ύν, 2 Tim. iv. 7."
ΔρουσΙλλα [al. Δρούσιλλα, cf. Chandler § 120], -ης, ή,
Drusilla, daughter of Agrippa the elder, wife of Felix,
the governor of Juda;a, a most licentious woman (Joseph,
antt. 20, 7, 1 sq.) : Acts xxiv. 24; cf. Win. RWB. [and
B. D.] s. v.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 19, 4.•
εύναμ,αι, depon. verb, pres. indie. 2 pers. sing, δϋνασαι
and, ace. to a rarer form occasional in the poets and fr.
Polyb. on to be met with in prose writ, also (cf. Lnli. ad
Phryn. p. 359; [TI7/. App. p. 168 ; W. § 1.3, 2 b.; Veitch
s. V.]), δύνη (Mk. ix. 22 sq. L Τ Tr WII ; [Lk. xvi. 2
Τ WII Tr txt. ] ; Rev. ii. 2) ; impf. (δννάμην and Attic
ηδυνάμην, between which forms the Mss. and editions are
almost everywhere divided, [in Mk. vi. 19; xiv. 5; Lk.
viii. 19; xix. 3; Jn. ix. 33; xii. 39 all edd. read ηδ., so
R G in Mt. xxvi. 9 ; Lk. i. 22 ; Jn. xi. 37 ; Rev. xiv. 3 ;
on the other hand, in Jit. xxii. 46 ; Lk. i. 22 : Jn. xi. 37 ;
Rev. xiv. 3, L Τ Tr WII all read ί'δ., so Τ WH in Mt.
xxvi. 9; RGin Mt. xxii. 46. Cf. TI7/. App. p. 162;
AV. § 12, 1 b. ; B. 33 (29)] ; fut. δυνήσομαι : 1 aor. ήδυνί,θη»
and (in Mk. vii. 24 Τ WII, after codd. SB only ; in Mt.
xvii. 16 cod. B) ηδυνάσθην (cf. [WII u. s. and p. 169];
Kuhner § 343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v.; W. 84 (81); B. 33
(29) ; Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. 402]) ; Sept. for Sj; ; to
be able, have power, whether by virtue of one's own ability
and resources, or of a state of mind, or through favora-
ble circumstances, or by permission of law or custom ;
a. foil, by an inf. [AV. § 44, 3] pres. or aor. (on the dis-
tinction between which, cf. λΥ. § 44, 7). ο. foil, oy a
pres. inf. : Mt. vi. 24 ; ix. 15 : Mk. ii. 7 ; iii. 23 ; l.k. vi.
39; Jn. iii. 2; v. 19; Acts xxvii. 15; 1 Co. x. 21 : Ileb.
v. 7 ; 1 Jn. iii. 9 ; Rev. ix. 20, and often, β. foil, by an
aor. inf. : Mt. iii. 9 ; v. 14 ; Mk. i. 45 ; ii. 4 ; v. 3 ; Lk. viii.
19 ; xiii. 11 ; Jn. iii. 3 sq. ; vi. 52 ; vii. 34, 36 ; Acts iv. 16
[RG]; V.39; x. 47; Ro. viii. 39; xvi. 25 ; 1 Co.ii. 14;
iii. 1 ; vi. 5 ; 2 Co. iii. 7 ; Gal. iii. 21 ; Eph. iii. 4, 20 ; 1 Th.
iii. 9; 1 Tim. vi. 7, 16 ; 2 Tim. ii. 13 ; iii. 7, 15 ; Heb. ii.
8ύναμι<!
159
δι5,
vi>au'<S
18 : iii. 19 ; [xi. 19 Lchm.] ; Jas. i. 21 ; Rev. iii. 8 ; v. 3 ;
Vi. 1 7, and very often, b. with inf. omitted, as being
ea^iIy supplied from the context : Mt. xvi. 3 [here Τ br.
WH reject the pass.] ; xx. 22 ; Mk. vi. 19 ; x. 39 ; Lk. ix.
40 ; xvi. 26 ; xix. 3 ; Ro. viii. 7. c. joined with an accus.
ίίναμαίτι, to he able to do somethiiu/ (cf. Germ, icli vennag
etwas) : Mk. ix. 22 ; Lk. xii. 2« ; 2 Co. xiii. 8, (and in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. on), d. absol., like the Lat. possu7n
(as in Caes. b. gall. 1,18, 6), i. q. to be able, capable,
strong, powerful: 1 Co. iii. 2 ; x. 13. (2 Chr. xxxii. 13;
I Mace. V. 40 sq. : in 2 Mace. xi. 13 cod. Alex., and
often in Grk. writ, as Eur. Or. 889 ; Thuc. 4, 105 ; Xen.
an. 4, .5, 11 sq. ; Isoc, Dem., Aeschin.)
8νναμις, -f ωί, ή ; [fr. Hom. down] ; Sept. for S'n, ITlOJ,
'J', n^, ^?^ i^^ army, a host) ; strength, ability, power ;
a. univ. inherent power, poicer residing in a thing by vir-
tue of its nature, or which a person or thing exerts and
puts forth : Lk. i. 17 ; Acts iv. 7 ; 1 Co. iv. 20 ; 2 Co. iv.
7 ; xii. 9 (η 8ύναμΐ! iv ασθ^νίΐα τ(\ύται [RG τίλίΐυϋτα»]) ;
xiii. 4 ; 1 Th. i. 5 ; Heb. vii. 16 ; xi. 34 ; Rev. i. 16 ; xvii.
13 ; ιδία Sura^fi, Acts iii. 12 ; μ^γάλτ) Βννάμίΐ, Acts iv. 33 ;
(κάστω κατά την ISlav 8ύναμιν, Mt. xxv. 15 ; vnep ίΰναμιν,
beyond our ])0wer, 2 Co. i. 8 ; dv δυνάμ(ΐ sc. ων, endued
with power, Lk. iv. 36 ; 1 Co. xv. 43 ; so in the phrase
ίρχίσθαι iv δυνάμει, Mk. ix. 1 ; powerfully. Col. i. 29 ; 2
Th. i. 1 1 ; contextually i. q. evidently, Ro. i. 4 ; iv δυνάμιι
σημΰων κ. τεράτων, through the power which I exerted
upon their souls by performing miracles, Ro. xv. 19 ; Svv.
€1? Tt, Heb. xi. 11 ; bvv• ίπ\ τα δαιμόνια και νόσους βΐρα-
π€ύίΐΐ', Lk. ίχ. 1 ; ή δϋναμίί της αμαρτίας ό νόμος, sin exer-
cises its power (upon the soul) through the law, i. e.
through the abuse of the law, 1 Co. xv. 56 ; της άναστάσιως
τοΰ Χρίστου, the power which the resurrection of Christ
has, for instructing, reforming, elevating, tranquillizing,
the soul, Phil. iii. 10 ; ττ/ς (ΰσ^βίίας, inhering in godliness
and operating upon souls, 2 Tim. iii. ο ; δυνάμίΐς piWovros
αΙωνος (see αΙών, 3), Heb. vi. 5 ; το πν(ϋμα της δυνάμιως
(see πνιίιμα, 5), 1 Pet. iv. 14 Lchm. ; 2 Tim. i. 7 ; δύναμις
is used of the power of angels : Eph. i. 21 [cf. Mey.
ad loc] ; 2 Pet. ii. 11 ; of the power of the devil and
evil spirits, 1 Co. xv. 24 ; toC ίχθροϋ, i. e. of the devil,
Lk. X. 19 ; ToC δράκοντας. Rev. xiii. 2 ; angels, as excelling
in power, are called δυνάμιις [cf. (Philo de mutat. nom.
§ 8 δυνάμ(ΐς ασώματοι) Mey. as above ; Bp. Lghtft. on
Col. i. 16 ; see ayycXos] : Ro. viii. 38 ; 1 Pet. iii. 22. ή
δύναμις τοΰ Beov, univ. the pou-er of God: Mt. xxii.
29; Mk. xii. 24; Lk. xxii. 69 ; Acts viii. 10; Ro. i. 20;
ix. 1 7 ; 1 Co. vi. 14 ; δύναμις ύ\/'ίστου, Lk. i. 35 ; η δΰναμις,
esp. in doxologies, the kingly power of God, Mt. vi.
13 Rec. ; Rev. iv. 11; vii. 12; xi. 17 ; xii. 10 ; xv. 8 ; xix.
1 ; and the abstract for the concrete (as n^OJn in Jew-
ish writ. ; cf. Buxtorf, Lex. talm. col. 385 [p. 201 sq. ed.
Fischer]) equiv. to ό δυνατός, Mt. xxvi. 64 ; Mk. xiv. 62 ;
δΰναμις τοΰ β(οϋ is used of the divine power considered
as acting upon the minds of men, 1 Co. ii. 5 ; 2 Co. vi.
7 ; Eph. iii. 7, 20 ; [2 Tim. i. 8 ; 1 Pet. i. 5] ; Λ τίνα, 2
Co. xiii. 4 [but WH in br.] ; Eph. i. 19 ; ivhvtadai δύναμιν
("έ υγους, Lk. x.\iv. 49 ; by melon, things or persons in
which God's sa\ ing power shows its efficacy are called iv
νάμ^ιςθίοΰ : thuso Χριστοί, 1 Co. i. 24 ; 6 Xoyos τοΰ σταυροϋ^
1 Co. i. 18 ; TO fiayyeXtox, with the addition etr σω'-ηρία»
παντι etc. Ro. i. 16 [cf. W. § 36, 3 b.]. δύναμις is ascribed
to C h r i s t, now in one sense and now in another : a power
to heal disease proceeds from him, Mk. v. 30 ; Lk. v. 1 7 ;
vi. 19 ; viii. 46; the ki ngly power of the Ales si ah is his,
Mt. xxiv. 30 ; [Mk. xiii. 26] ; Lk. xxi. 27 ; 2 Pet. i. 16 ;
Rev. V. 12; ayyeXoi της δυνάμξως ουτοΰ (see ay-yeXot, 2),
ministering to his power, 2 Thess. i. 7 [W. § 34, 3 b. note] ;
metaphysical [or essential] power, viz. that which
belongs to him as ό θ(Ιος λόγος, in the expression to ρημΜ
της δυνάμ. αϋτοΰ the word uttered by his power, equiv.
to his most powerful will and energy, Heb. i. 3 ; moral
power, operating on the soul, 2 Co. xii. 9 R G : and called
η θίΐα αντοΐι δΰναμις in 2 Pet. ί. S; η δνναμις τοΰ κυρίου,
the power of Christ invisibly present and operative in a
Christian church formally assembled, 1 Co. v. 4. δύναμις
Toil άγιου πν(ύ ματος: Acts i. 8 [λλ . 125 (1 19)] ; πν.
άγιον κ. δύναμις. Acts χ. 38 ; άττόδειζις πνεύματος κα\ δν-
νάμιως (see άττόδίΐΙΐΓ, b.), 1 Co. ii. 4 ; iv τ^ δυνάμιι τοΰ
■πνεύματος, under or full of the power of the Holy Spirit,
Lk. iv. 14 ; iv δυνάμει ννήματος άγιου, by the power and
influence of the Holy Spirit, lio. xv. 13 ; by the power
which, under the influence of the Holy Spirit, I exerted
upon their souls, Ro. XV. 19. b. specifically, ίΛί y;o"'er
of performing iniracles : Acts vi. 8; πάσα δύναμις, every
kind of power of working miracles (with the addition
και σημιίοις κ. τίρασι), 2 Th. ii. 9 ; plur. : [Mt. xiii. 54 ;
xiv. 2 ; Mk. vi. 14] ; 1 Co. xii. 28 sq. ; Gal. iii. 5 ; iv(p-
γηματα δυνάμ(ων, 1 Co. xii. 10 ; by meton. of the cause for
the effect, a riiighty work [cf. W. 32 ; Trench § xci.] : δύ-
ναμιν TToif'iv, Mk. vi. 5 ; ix. 39 ; so in the plur., Mk. vi. 2 ;
Lk. .xix. 37 ; joined with σημαία. Acts viii. 13 ; with σημ(ΐα
κ. τί'ρατα, Acts ii. 22; 2 Co. xii. 12 ; Heb. ii. 4 [?] ; noif'i»
δυνάμίΐς, Mt. vii. 22 ; [xiii. 58] ; Acts xix. 1 1 ; γίνονται
δυνάμεις, Mt. xi. 20 sq. 23; Lk. x. 13. C. moral power
and excellence of soul : 1 Co. iv. 19 ; 2 Co. iv. 7 ; Eph. iii.
16;Col. i. 11. d. the poicer and influence ichich belong to
riches; (pecuniary ability), wealth : τοΰ στρήνους, 'riches
ministering to luxury ' (Grotius), Rev. xviii. 3 ; κατά δύ-
ναμιν και Inep [al. τταρά] δύναμιν, according to their means,
yea, beyond their means, 2 Co. viii. 3 ; (in this sense, for
S'n, Sept. Deut. viii. 17 scj.; Ruth iv. 11 ; not infreq. in
Grk. writ., as Xen. Cyr. 8, 4, 34 ; an. 7, 7, 21 (36)). e.
power and resources arising from numbers : Rev. iii. 8.
f. poicer consisting in or resting upon armies, forces,
hosts, (so, both in sing, and in plur., often in Grk. writ,
fr. Hdt., Thuc, Xen. on ; in the Sept. and in Apocr.) ;
hence δννάμ(ΐς τοΰ ουρανού the hosts of heaven, Hebraisti-
cally the stars : Mt. xxiv. 29 ; Lk. xxi. 26 ; and δ. iv τοίϊ
οίρανοΊς. Mk. xiii. 25 ; equiv. to Ο'ΟψΠ NDV, 2 K. xvii.
16 ; xxiii. 4 ; Is. xxxiv. 4 ; Jer. viii. 2 ; Dan. viii. 10, etc.
[cf. σαβαώθΊ. g. Like the Lat. vis and potestas, equiv.
to the (force i. e.) meaning of a word or expression : 1
Co. xiv. 11 ; (Plat. Crat. p. 394 b. ; Polyb. 20, 9, 11;
Dion. Hal. I, 68; Dio Cass. 55, 3: al.).'
[Stn. ^iahi/vams,ivi^iyna, (ξουσία,ισχύ$, κράτος-
ϋνναμοω
160
Βυσερμήνΐντοκ
βία force, effective, often oppressive power, exhibiting itself
ID single deeds of violence; Suv. /»«•«•, natural aliility, gen-
eral and inherent ; ivipy. «'orii'n//, power in exercise, opera-
tive power ; 4ξονσ. primarily lilierty of action ; then, iiullioiilij
— eitliera-s delegated |]ower, oras unrestrained, arbitrary
power ; Ισχ. strem/lli, power (esp. pliysical) as an endowment ;
Kpiros, iiiii/hl, relative and manifested power — in the XT.
chietiy of (ukI ; rh Kparos τηί Ισχ. Epl». vi. 10, ή ivipy- rfjs δυν.
Eph. iii. 7, r] ivipy. τον κρ. τη! Ισχ. Eph. i. 19. C'f. Schmidt
ch. US ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 16 ; Mey. on Eph. i. 19.]
δυναμάω, -£> : [pres. pass. 8νι>αμοίμαι] ; to make strong,
conjinii, .■<lren;/llien : Col. i. 11 ; [Eph. vi. 10 WII mrg.] ;
1 aor. (5υναμώθησαν, Ilcb. xi. -U (R G cveb-). (Ps. Ixvii.
(Ixviii.) 2!); Eccl. x. 10; Dan. Ίκ. 27 [Theod. ; Ps. l.\iv.
(Ixv.) 4 Aq. ; Job xxxvi. 9 Aq.] and occasionally in eccl.
and Byz. writ. ; cf. Loh. ad Pliryn. p. G05 ; [W. 26
(25)].) [CoMI>. : (V -δυναμόω.] '
δυνάο-τηϊ, -ου, ό, {δύνομαι) ; fr. [Soph, and] Hdt. on ;
powerful; 1. α prince, poleniiile: Lk. i. 52 ; used of
God (Sir. xlvi. 5 ; 2 ]\Iacc. xv. 3, 23, etc. ; of Zeus, Soph.
Ant. 608), 1 Tim. vi. \^). 2. a courtier, high officer,
royal viinixler: Acts viii. 27 [A. V. (a eunuch) of great
authoriti/ ; but see Meyer ad loc], (δυχάσται Φαραώ, Gen.
1. 4).• ■
SvvaTt'u, -ω: (δυνατοί); to be powetful or might;/; shoiv
one's self powerful : 2 Co. xiii. 3 (opp. to άσβ(νω) ; to be
able, have power : foil, by an inf., Ro. xiv. 4 L Τ Tr WII ;
2 Co. ix. 8 L Τ Tr WII. Not found in prof. writ, nor
in the Sept.*
SvvaTOs, -ή, -όν, (,δϋναμαι) ; [fr. Pind. down], Sept. for
■'ISJ ; ahte, powerful, mighty, strong ; 1. absolutely ; a.
mighty in wealth and influence : 1 Co. i. 26 ; (Rev. vi. 15
Rec.) ; o< δυνατοί, tlie chief men, Acts .xxv. 5, (Joseph.
b. j. 1, 12, 4 ηκον Ιουδαίων οι δυνατοί; Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 1 ;
Thuc. 1,89; Poly b. 'J, 23, 4 ). ό δυνατά:, the preeminently
mighty one, almighty God, Lk. i. 49. b. strong in soul:
to bear calamities and trials Λvith fortitude and patience,
2 Co. xii. 10; strong in Christian virtue, 2 Co. -xiii. 9;
firm in conviction and faitli, Ro. .\v. 1. 2. in con-
struction ; a. δυνατό: (Ιμι with inf., to be able (to do soyne-
thing; [H. 260 (224); W. 319 (299)]) : Lk. xiv. 31 ; Acts
xi. 17; Ro. iv. 21 ; xi. 23 ; xiv. 4 R G ; 2 Co. ix. 8 R G ;
2 Tim. i. 12 ; Tit. i. 9 ; Heb. xi. 19 (Lchm. δύναται) ; Jas.
iii. 2. b. δυνατοί fv nvi, mighty i. e. excelling in some-
thing : fV tpytf K. λόγω, I>k. xxiv. 19 ; cV λό -yois και tpyois.
Acts vii. 22 ; tv γραφα'ι:, excelling in knowledge of the
Scriptures, Acts xviii. 24. c. προς τι, mighty i.e. having
power for something : 2 Co. x. 4. d. neuter δυνατόν [in
pass, sense, cf. B. 190 {16b')'] possible : tl δυνατόν (cari).
Ml. xxiv. 24 ; xxvi. 39 ; Mk. xiii. 22 ; xiv. 35 ; Ro. xii.
18; Gal. iv. 15; ούκ ην δυνατόν foil, by inf. Acts ii. 24;
δυνατόν τί fOTi' Tivt [B. 190 (165)], Mk. ix. 23 ; xiv. 36 ;
Acts XX. 16 ; πάρα Ufa πάντα δυνατά (στι, Mt. xix. 26 ; Mk.
.X. 27; Lk. xviii. 27. to δυνατόν αΰτοϋ, what his power
could do, equiv. to την δύναμιν αΰτοΰ, Ro. ix. 22, cf. W.
§ 34, 2.•
Suvu, δΰω ; 2 aor. (δυν ; 1 aor. (in Grk. writ, transi-
tively) (δυσα (Mk. i. 32 L Tr WII), cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr.
ii. p. 156 sq. ; W. p. 84 (81 ) : B. 56 (49) ; [Veitch s. vv.] ;
to go into, enter; go under, be plunged into, sink in : ic the
N. T. twice of the setting sun (sinking as it were into the
sea), Mk. i. 32 ; Lk. iv. 40. So times without niiinber in
Grk. writ. fr. Ilom. on ; Sept., Gen. xxviii. 1 1 ; Lev. xxii.
7, etc. ; Tob. ii. 4 ; 1 Mace. x. 50. [CoMP. : «-, djr-tn-
{-μαι), fV-, eV-fv-, παρ-ίΐσ-, cVi -διΙνΐι).] *
δύο, genit. indcd. δύο (as in ICpic, and occasionallv in
Ildt., Time., Xen., Polyb., al. for δυηΐν, more common in
Attic [see liulherford, New Pliryn. p. 289 sq.]) ; dat.
δυσί, δυσι'ν. ([-σι in Mt. vi. 24 ; l,k. xvi. 13 ; Acts xxi. 33
( ΐν-σίν), -ai'vin Mt. xxii. 40 ; Mk. xvi. 1 2 ; Lk. xii. 52 (R G
-ai); Actsxii. 6 (RGL -σι'); Ilcb. .\. 28; Rev. xi.3(RG
-σί) ; ci.Tdf. Proleg. p. 98; WII. App.p. 147] — aforiii not
found in the older and better writ., met with in Ilippocr.,
Aristot., Theophr., frecpient fr. Polyb. on, for the Attic
δυοίν); ace. δύο (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 210; Bttm. Ausf.
Spr. i. p. 276 si].; W. § 9, 2 b. : Passow i. p. 729); two:
absol., ovK (Tl fiVt δύο, αλλά σαρξ μία, Mt. .xix. 6 ; Mk. .\. 8;
δύο η Tpf if , ^It. xviii. 20 ; 1 Co. xiv. 29 ; Tpeit ίπ'ι δυσι κ. δύο
fVi τρισί, Lk. xii. 52; άνά and κατά δ'ο, two by Iwo [W.
398 (372); 401 (374); B. 30 (26)]. Lk. ix. 3 [WH om.
Tr br. άνά]; χ. 1 [WII άνά δύο [δύο]; ef. Acta Philip.
§ 36, ed. Tdf. p. 92] ; Jn. ii. 6 [apiece] ; 1 Co. xiv. 27 ; δύο
δύο two and two, Mk. vi. 7 (so, after the Ilebr., in Gen.
vi. 1 9, 20 ; but the phrase is not altogether foreign even
to the Grk. poets, as Aeschyl. Pers. 981 μυρία μυρία for
κατά μυριάδας, cf. W. 249 (234), [cf. 39 (38)]) ; neut. e.'t
δυ'ϋ into two parts, Mt. xxvii. 51 ; Mk. xv. 38; with gen.
δΐΌ τών μαθητών{αΙτου),Μ^.. xi. 1 ; xiv. 13; Lk. xix. 29 ;
[Mt. -xi. 2 RG] ; τών οίκιτων. Acts χ. 7. δύο (ζ αυτών,
Lk. xxiv. 13 [ef. Bttm. 158 (138); Win. 203 (191)].
with a i]0un or pronoun : δύο δαιμονιζι>μ(νοι, Mt. viii. 28.
δύο μάχαιραι, Lk. xxii. 38 : cVt στόματος δύο μαρτύρων, Mt.
xviii. 16; 2 Co. xiii. 1 ; δυσί κυμιΌκ, Mt. vi. 24 ; Lk. xvi.
13 ; (ϊδ( δύο άδίΧφούς, Mt. iv. is ; preceded by the article,
01 δύο the Iwo, the liniin : Mt. xix. 5 ; Mk. x. 8 ; 1 Co. vi.
1 6 ; Eph. V. 31 ; τούί δύο, Eph. ii. 15 ; a! [Rec. only] δύο
διαθήκαι. Gal. iv. 24 ; ούτοι [Lchm. br. ούτ.] οί δύο υιοί μαυ,
Mt. XX. 21 ; TTfpl τών δύο άδίλφών, Mt. χχ. 24 ; t'v ταύταΐί
ταίς δυσίν ΐντολαις, Mt. xxii. 40 ; τοϋί ^νο ιχθνας, Mt. xiv.
19; Mk. vi. 41 ; Lk. ix. 16 ; δύο δηνάρια, Lk. χ. 35.
δυ5, an inseparable prefix conveying the idea of diffi-
culty, opposition, in juriousness or the like, and
eorres])onding to our mis-, un- [Curtius § 278] ; opp. to tl.
δυσ--βά<Γτακτο$. -ov, (βαστάζω), hard [A. V. grierous] to
be borne : Mt. xxiii. 4 [T WII txt. om. Tr br. δυσβάιττ.]
and Lk. xi. 46 φορτία δυο-βάστακτα, said of jirecepts hard
to obcv, and irksome. (Sept. Prov. xxvii. 3 ; Philo, omn.
prob. lib. §5 ; Phit. (piaest. nat. c. 16, 4 p. 915 f.) •
δυ<Γίντ€ρία, -ας. ή. (fvTtpov intestine), dysentery, (Lat.
tormina inteslinormn, bowei-complaint) : Acts xxviii. 8
RG; see the foil. word. (Ilippocr. and med. writ.;
Hdt., Plat., Aristot., Polyb., al.) *
6>)criVTepiov, -ου, τό, a later form for δυσιντΐρία, q. v. :
Acts xxviii. 8 L Τ Tr AVH. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 518.'
ε«<Γίρμήν€υτθ5, -ov, (ίρμηνήω), hard to interpret, diffi-
cult of explanation : Heb. v. 1 1. (Diod. 2, 52 ; Philo de
somn. § 32 fin. ; Artem. oneir. 3, 66.) "
δύσί?
161
δωροφορία
[8«σ•ΐί, -tar, ή; Χ. α sinking or setting, esp. of the
lieavenly bodies; 2. of the quarter in which the sun
sets, the west : Mk. xvi. WII (rejected) ' Sliorter Conchi-
sion.' (So both in sing, and in plur. : Aristot. de mund.
3 p. 393% 17 ; 4 p. 394', 21 ; Polyb. 1, 42, 5 etc.)*]
8νο•κολθ5, -ov, (κο'λοί' food); 1. prop, hard to βηά
agreeable food for, fastidious about food. 2. difficult
to please, always Jinding fault; (Eur., Arstph., Xen.,
Plat., al.). 3. univ. difficult (Xen. oec. 15, 10 η γιωρ-
γία δύσκολόί ΐστι μαθ(Ίν) : ττώί 8νσκο\όν (στι, foil, by aoc.
witli inf., Mk. x. 24.»
StKTKoXus, adv., (δύσκολο?), [fr. Plato down], iciiA diffi-
cult;/ : Mt. xix. 23 ; Mk. x. 23 ; Lk. xviii. 24.*
8νσ-μ.ή, -ης. ή. [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], much often-
er in plur. [W. § 27, 3] δνσμαί, αί, (δύω or δύνω, q. v.),
sc. ήλι'ον, the setting of the sun : Lk. xii. 54 [ace. to the
reading of Τ WII Tr mrg. cVl δ. may possibly be un-
derstood of time (cf. W. 375 sq. (352)) ; see tVi, A. II. ;
al. take the prep. locally, over, in, and give δνσμ. the
meaning which follows ; see cVt, A. I. 1 b.] ; the region of
sunset, the west, [anarthrous, W. 121 (115)] : Rev. xxi. 1 3 ;
ίΐπό άνατοΚώιι και δυσμων, from all regions or nations, Mt.
viii. 11 ; xxiv. 27; Lk. xiii. 29; in Ilebr. COU/H KUO,
Josh. i. 4. Often in prof. writ. fr. Hdt. on, both with
and without ήλΙου*
δυοτόητοϊ, -ov, (νοίω), hard to be understood : 2 Pet. iii.
16. {χρησμός, Lcian. Alex. 54; Diog. Laert. 9, 13 δυσ-
νόητΰν Te καί δυσιζήγητον ; [Aristot. plant. 1, 1 p. SlCjS].)*
δυσ-ψημ^ϋ», -ώ : [pres. pass, δυσφημούμαι] ; {δνσφημος) ;
Ιο use ill icords, defame ; pass, to lie defamed, 1 Co. iv. 13
'Γ WH Tr mrg. (1 Mace. vii. 41 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Aes-
chyl. Agam. 1078 down.)*
8\ΚΓψημ(α, -as, η, both the condition of a δΰσφημος, i. e.
of one who is defamed, viz. ill-repute, and the action of
one who uses opprohriaus language viz. defamation, re-
proach : δια δυσφημίαί κ (νφημίας [Α. Λ^. hg eril report and
good report], 2 Co. vi. 8. (1 M.acc. vii. 38 ; 3 ^lacc. ii.
26. Dion. II. 6, 48 ; Plut. de gen. Socr. § 18 p. 587 f.) •
8νω, see δύνω.
8ύ8Εκα, 01. αϊ, τπ, [fr. Hom. down], twelve : Mt. ix. 20 ;
X. 1 ; [I^ Τ Tr WH in Acts xix. 7 ; xxiv. 1 1 for δβκαδύο];
Rev. vii. 5 [R G t/3'] ; xxi. 21, etc. ; at δώδεκα, the twelve
apostles of Jesus, so called by way of eminence : Mk. L\.
3") ; X. 32 ; xi. 11 ; Mt. x.xvi. 14. 20; Lk. xxii. 3, etc.
ScoSeKaTos, -ij, -ov, twelfth : Rev. xxi. 20. [ Fr. Horn, on.]*
8ω8€κά-ψυλον, -ου, τό, (fr. δώδΐκα. and φνλη tril)e), the
twelve tribes, used collectively of the Israelitish people, as
consisting of twelve tribes : Acts xxvi. 7. (Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 55, 6 ; Prot. Jac. c. 1, 3 ; 'λαοί 6 δωδeκάφv\os, Orac.
Sibyll. Cf. δίκάφυλοί, τιτράφυλοί, Hdt. 5, 66 ; [W. 100
(95)].)•
8ΰμα, -Tot, TO, (δ(μα> to build) ; 1. a building, house,
(Horn, et sqq.). 2. a part of a building, dining-room,
hall, (Hom. et sqq.). 3. in the Script, equiv. to JJ,
house-top, roof [λ\. 23]: Mt. .xxiv. 17; Mk. xiii. 15; Lk.
V. 19; xvii. 31. The house-tops of the Orientals were
(and still are) level, and were frequented not only for
walking but also for meditation and prayer : Acts x. 9 ;
hence fVi δωμάτων, on the house-tops, i. e. in public : jSIt.
X. 27 ; Lk. .xii. 3 ; eVt to δώμα . . . κατ οφθαλμούς παιηος
Ισραήλ, 2 S. xvi. 22.*
Supcd, -ac, ^, (δίδωμι) ; from [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down ;
a gift : Jri. iv. 10 ; Acts viii. 20 ; xi. 17 ; Ro. v. 15 ; 2 Co.
ix. 1 J ; Ileb. vi. 4 ; ή χάρις ΐδόθη κατά το μίτρον της δωριας
τοΰ Χριστού, according to the measure in wliich Christ
gave it, Eph. iv. 7 ; ivith an epexegetical gen. of the
thing given, viz. τοϋ αγίου ην(ΰματος, Acts ii. 38; -x. 45;
δικαιοσύνης, Ro. v. 17 [L WH Tr mrg. br. τ δωρ.]\ της
χάριτος τοΰ θ(ον, Eph. iii. 7. The ace. δωριάν ( prop, as
a gift, gift-wise [cf. W. 230 (216) ; B. 153 (134)]) is used
adverbially ; Sept. for D3n ; a. freely, for naught, gratis,
gratuitously : Mt. x. 8 ; Ro. iii. 24 ; 2 Co. xi. 7 ; 2 Th. iii. 8 ;
Rev. xxi. 6; xxii. 17, (Polyb. 18,17,7; Ex. x.xi. 11 ; δωρίαν
Avev αργυρίου, Is. Iii. 3). b. by a usage of which as yet
no example has been noted fr. Grk. writ., without Just
cause, unnecessarily. Jn. xv. 25 (Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 5;
xxxiv. (.XXXV.) 19) ; Gal. ii. 21, (Job i. 9 [?] ; Ps. xxxiv.
(x.xxv.) 7 [where Symm. άΐ'αιτίως] ; so the Lat. gratuitus :
Liv. 2, 42 gratuitus furor. Sen. epp. 105, 3 [bk. xviii. ep.
2, § 3] odium aut est ex offensa . . . aut gratuitum). [Syn.
see δόμα, fin.] *
δωρεάν, see δωρ^ά.
8ωρ<ω, -ω : Ιο present, bestow, (Hes., Find., Hdt., al.) ;
pass. Lev. vii. 5 (Heb. text vs. 15). But much more
frequently as depou. mid. δωρίομαι, -οϋμαι (Hom. et sqq.) :
1 aor. ίδωρησάμην ; pf. δίδώρημαι ; τιιί' Tt, Mk. xv. 45 ;
2 Pet. i. 3,4.*
δώρημα, -τος, τό, (δωρίομαι) ; a gift, bounty, benefaction :
Ro. V. 16 ; Jas. i. 17. ([Aeschyl.], Soph., Xen., al.) [Cf.
δόμα, fin.] *
δώρον, -ου, τό, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. generally for
[3")p, often also for nnj"? and ΛΧνύ; a gifl,present: Eph.
ii. 8; Rev. xi. 10; of gifts offered as an expression of
honor, Mt. ii. 1 1 ; of sacrifices and other gifts offered to
God, Mt. v. 23 sq. ; viii. 4 ; xv. 5 ; xxiii. 18 scj. ; Mk. vii.
1 1 ; Heb. v. 1 ; viii. 3 stp ; ix. 9 ; xi. 4 ; of money cast into
the treasury for the jiurposes of the temple and for the
support of the ])ii(ir, I.k. xxi. 1. [4]. [Syn. see δόμα, fin.] *
δωροφορία, -ας. ή. (δωραφόρος bringing gifts), the offering
of a gift or of gifts : Ro. χ v. 3 1 L Tr mrg. cf . διακονία, 3.
(Alciphr. 1, 6 ; Pollux 4, 47 [p. 371 ed. Hemst.]; several
times in eccles. writ.) •
162
Ε
t6»
«α, an interjection expressive of indignation, or of
wonder mixed with fear, (derived apparently from the
impv. pres. of the verb lav [ace. to others a natural,
instinctive, sound]), freq. in the Attic poets, rare in
prose writ, (as Plat. Prot. p. 314 d.), ha! ah!: Mk. i.
24 RG; Lk. iv. 34; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 32 sq.*
cav ; I. a conditional particle (derived fr. ei au), which
makes reference to time and to experience, introducing
something future, but not determining, before the event,
whether it is certainly to take place; if, in case, (Lat.
si ; Germ, tcenn ; im Fall, dass ; falls ; u-ofern) ; cf ., among
others, Hermann ad Viger. p. 832 ; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2
p. 450sqq.;W. 291 (273) sq. It is connected 1. with
the Subjunctive, according to the regular usage of the
more ancient and elegant classic writers. a. with the
subjunc. Present: Alt. vi. 22 (eax ουν 6 οφθαλμοί σου
άπλοίί rj, if it be the case, as to which I do not know,
that thine eye etc.) ; ibid. 23 ; xvii. 20 ; Lk. x. 6 ; Jn. vii.
17; viii. 54 [RGL mrg.] ; ix. 31 ; xi. 9. 10; Acts v. 38 ;
xiii. 41 ; Ro. ii. 25 sq. ; 1 Co. ix. 16 ; Gal. v. 2 ; 1 Tim. i.
8 [not Lchm.]; Heb. xiii. 23; 1 Jn. i. 9; ii. 3, 15 etc.
b. with the subjunc. Aorist, corresponding to the Lat.
fut. perf. : lilt. iv. 9 (ea» προσκννήστ)! μοι if thou shalt
have worshipped me) ; v. 46 ; ix. 21 ; Mk. iii. 24 ; ix. 50;
Lk. xiv. 34 ; xvii. 4 ; xx. 28 ; Jn. v. 43 ; xi. 57 ; Ro. vii. 2;
X. 9; 1 Co. vii. 8, 39: viii. 10; xvi. 10 (Jav ΐ\θη Τιμά-
β(ος ; for although he was already on his way to Cor-
inth, yet some hindrance might still prevent his arriv-
ing) ; 2 Co. ix. 4 : Gal. vi. 1 ; Jas. ii. 2 ; 1 Jn. v. 16 [Lchm.
pres.] ; Rev. iii. 20, and often ; also in the oratio obliqua,
where the better Grk. writ, use the Optative : Jn. ix. 22 ;
xi. 57 ; Acts ix. 2 (W. 294 (276; ; [cf. B. 224 (193)]).
The difference between the Pres. and the Aor. may be seen
especially from the following passages : 2 Tim. ii. 5 iau
8e και affKJj Tis, oil στfφavoΰτnt, iav μη νομιμω; άθΧηστ), 1
Co. .xiv. 2:i eav ovf συνίΧθη ή (κκλησία . . . κα\ πάντα γλώσ-
σαΐΓ ΧαΚώσιν, (ΐσί\βωσί hi Ihiunat η απιστοί, vs. 24 iav δί
nairret προφητΐΰωσίν, (Ισί\θτι δί τίί άπιστος, Mt. XXI. 21
iav ΐχητ( πίστιν καΐ μη 5ίακριθήτ(. Also ft (" quod per
• se nihil significat praeter conditionem," Klotz 1. c. p.
455) and eav are distinguished in propositions subjoined
the one to the other [W. 296 (277 S(i.)] : Jn. xiii. 17 it'
ταΰτο olSaTf, μακάριοι «OTf , cav noirjTt αυτά, Jn. iii. 1 2 ; 1
Co. vii. 36 ; in statements antithetic. Acts v. 38 sq. ; or
parallel, Mk. iii. 24-26. Finally, where one of the evan-
gelists uses «I anotlier has tav, but so that each particle
retains its own force, inasmuch as one and the same thing
is differentlv conceived of by the different minds : Mk.
ix.43 (av σκανίαλίζη [-λίστ/ L mrg. Τ WII txt.] ή χ(ίρ σου,
and vs. 47 iav 6 οφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζτ) at, i. e. if so
be that etc. ; on the other hand, Matthew, in xviii. 8 sq.
and V. 29 sq. concerning the same thing says ft. c. irreg-
ularly, but to be ex])lainedasan imitation of the Ilehr. DX
which is also a particle of time (cf. (lesenius, Thesaur. s.v.
4), iav with the Subjunc. Aor. is used of things which the
speaker or writer thinks will certainly take place, where
σταν when, whenever, should have been used : iav ΰψωθα,
Jn. .\ii. 32; iav ττοριυθώ, Jn. xiv. 3; fa» φανιρωθη, 1 .In.
ii. 28 (LTTrWII, for όταν RG) ; iii. 2: iav άκούσητ(,
Heb. iii. 7 fr. Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 8 ; (iav (Ισίλθ;μ fit τόκ
νυμφώνα, Tob. vi. 17 (!•') [al. οταν~\ : iav άπύθάνω, θάψυν
/If, Tob. iv. 3, cf. vs. 4 όταν άποθάνη, θάψον αυτήν ; for CK
ίΐ'Λέη, Is. xxiv. 13; Am. vii. 2). d. sometimes when the
particle is used with the Subj. Aor. the futurity of a thing
is not so much affirmed as imagined, it being known to
be something which never could happen : iav (ΐπη ά
ποΟί, if the foot should say, or were to say, 1 Co. xii.
15 ; fa» (Κθω npos ίμα! ■γλώσσακ λαλώ», 1 Co. xiv. C.
2. By a somewhat negligent use, met with from the
time of Aristotle on, ta» is connected also with the I n-
dicative, [cf. Klotz I.e. p. 468 .«([([. ; Kiihner § 575
Anm. 5; W. 295 (277); B. 221 (191) sq.; Tilf Prolog,
p. 124 .sq. ; WH. App. p. 171 ; Si>/)h. Lex. s. v.; Vin-
cent and Dickson, Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App. § 77]; and
a. with the indie. Future, in meaning akin, as is well
known, to the subjunc. : [fo» δύο συμφωνήσουσιν, Alt.
xviii. 19 Τ Tr] ; iav ούτοι σιωττήσουσι, Lk. xix. 40 L Γ Tr
W 1 1 ; fa» . . . όδ7}γήσ(ΐ. Acts viii. 3 1 Τ Tr WH, (fa» β(βη-
λώσουσι» αυτά. Lev. xxii. 9) ; but also b. with the indie.
Present: iav 8a»fi'ffTi, Lk. vi. 34 Lmrg. Trtxt. ; iav
στήκ^τ(, 1 Th. iii. 8 Τ Trtxt. WH; fa» re άποθνήσκομιν,
Ro. .\iv. 8 Lchm. with an indie. Preterite, but one
having the force of a Pres. : f a» [Lchm. 5»] οϊ8αμιν, 1 J η.
V. 15 without var. 3. fd» joined with other particles;
a. fo» &i και but if also, but even if, [A. V. but and if (re-
tained by R. V. in 1 Co.)] ; with the Subjunc. : Mt. xviii.
17; 1 Co. vii. 11,28; 2 Tim. ii. 5. b. iav καί: Gal. vi.
1. c. iav μη if not, unless, except; with the subjunc.
Present: Mt. x. 13; Lk. xiii. 3 [Lchm. txt. aor.]; Acts
XV. 1 [Rec.]; 1 Co. viii. 8; ix. 16 [RG L mrg. Τ WII
mrg.] ; Jas. ii. 1 7 ; 1 Jn. iii. 21 ; with the subjunc. Aorist :
Mt. vi. 15 ; xviii. 35 ; Mk. iii. 27 ; Jn. iii. 3 : viii. 24 ; 1 Co.
xiv. 6 sq. 9 ; Ro. x. 15 ; [xi. 23 R L] ; 2 Tim. ii. 5 ; Rev. ii.
5, 22 [R L], and often, with the Indicative pres. : iav μη
moTfvfTf , Jn. X. 38 Tdf. In some passages, although the
particles fa» μή retain their native force of unless, if not,
yet so far as the sense is concerned one may translate
them but that, ii-ithout : Mt. xx\-i. 42 (the cup cannot pass
bv without my drinking it) ; οΰ yap iariv κρυπτόν, iav
μη φανιρωθ^ (Treg.), there is nothing hid, but that it shall
eavTrep
163
Εβραΐο<{
be made manifest (properly, nothing whatever is hid, ex-
cept that it should be made manifest), Mk. iv. 22 ; oOSei'i•
(στιν, or άφηκ^ν οίκίαν . . . ίαν μη ^άβτ), but that shall re•
ceive (properly, unless he shall receive ... it cannot be
said that any one has left), Alk. x. 29, 30, [cf. B. § 149, C.
On the supposed use of ίάν μή {d μή) as equiv. to άλλα,
cf. Mey. on Mt. xii. 4 ; Gal. i. 7 ; ii. IG ; Fritzsche on Ro.
xiv. 14 fin. ; Ellic. and Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 11. cc. See ei,
ΠΙ. 8 c. /3.] d. (ainrep [L Tr separately, iav wfp] if only,
if indeed : Ileb. iii. ti (where L br. π(ρ, and Ϊ Tr AVH
,read eofV 14 ; vi. 3 ; it occurs neither in the Sept. nor in
the O. T. Apocr. ; on its use in Grk. writ. cf. Klotz, 1. c.
I p. 483 sq. e. tmiTt . . . eaV τί, sice . . . sive, whether . . .
or : Ro. xiv. 8 ; (often in Sept. for DK . . . DS, as Ex. xix.
13; Lev. iii. 1 ; Deut. xviii. 3). Cf. Klotz, 1. c. p. 479
sq.; KUhner § 541 ; [B. 221 (191)]. f. καν for και eav,
see κάν. II. The classic use of the conditional par-
ticle ίάν also in the contracted form άν (see p. 34'' above)
seems to have led the biblical writers of both Testaments
to connect fan with relative pronouns and adverbs in-
stead of the potential particle άν, as os f άν [so Tdf. in
12 places], ο eav [so Tdf. uniformly], etc. (this use
among prof. writ, is very doubtful, cf. W. p. 310 (291);
B. 72 (63)) : Mt. V. 19 ; x. 14 [R G] ; xv. 5 ; Mk. vi. 22
sq. ; Lk. Lx. 48 [WII Sv'] : xvii. 33 ; Acts vii. 7 [R G T] ;
1 Co. vi. 18; Eph. vi. 8 [RGLt.xt.]; 3 Jn. 5, etc.; όπου
fav, Mt. viii. 19 ; xxvi. 13 ; Mk. vi. 10 [L Tr ήν]. οσάκις
(άν. Rev. xi. 6. οί eav, 1 Co. xvi. 6 (1 Mace. vi. 3G).
κα66 (άν, 2 Co. viii. 1 2 [Tdf. άν ; οστί! Ιάν, Gal. v. 1 Τ
Tr WH ; ijris (άν. Acts iii. 23 Tdf. For many other exx.
see Soph. Lex. s. v. (άν, 3.] In many places the codd.
vary between (άν and &/; cf. άν, Π. p. 34 ; [and esp. Tdf.
Proleg. p. 96].
cav-ircp, see (άν, I. 3 d.
«αντοϋ, -r)s, -ov, etc. or (contracted) αίτον, -^t, -av. (see
p. Ν7): plur. (αυτών; dat. -ois, -ais, -ois, etc.; reflexiie
pronoun of the 3d person. It is used 1. of the 3d
pers. sing, and plur., to denote that the agent and the
person acted on are the same ; as, σώζ(ΐν (αυτόν, Mt.
xxvii. 42; Mk. xv. 31 ; Lk. xxiii. 35; i\\roiv (αυτόν, Mt.
xxili. 12, etc. (αυτω, (αυτόν are also often added to
middle verbs : Βκμίρίσαντο eairroir, Jn. xix. 24 (Xen.
mem. 1, 6, 13 ποκΊσθαι (αυτω φίλοι/) ; cf. W. § 38, 6 ; [Β.
§ 135, 6]. Of the phrases into which this pronoun enters
we notice the following : άφ' ίαυτοΰ, see από, Π. 2 d. aa. ;
di (αιτΓοϋ of itself, i. e. in its own nature, Ro. xiv. 14 [Tr
L txt. read αϋτ.^ ; ίν (αντώ, see in 8ια\ογίζ(σθαι. λίγΕίν,
(Ιπ(^ν. (Is (αυτόν (ρχίσθαι to come to one's self, to a
better mind, Lk. xv. 17 (Diod. 13, 95). καθ' (αυτόν hij
one's self, alone : Acts xxviii. 16 ; Jas. ii. 1 7. παρ' ίαντώ.
by him i. e. at his home, 1 Co. xvi. 2 (Xen. mem. 3, 13, 3).
προί (αυτόν, to himself i. e. to his home, Lk. xxiv. 12
[R G ; Τ om., WH (hut with air.) reject, L Tr (hut the
latter with αντ.) br., the verse]; Jn. xx. 10 [T Tr αιτ.
(see αύτοϋ)] ; with [cf. our ίο] himself i. e. in his own mind,
προσ(νχ(σθαι, Lk. χ viii. 11 [Tdf. om.], (2 Mace. xi. 13) ;
in the gen., joined with a noun, it has the force of a pos-
sessive pronoun, as τους (αυτών vixpois : Mt. viii. 22 ; Lk.
ix. 60. 2. It serves as reflexive also to the 1 st and 2d
pers., as often in classic Greek, when no ambiguity is
thereby occasioned ; thus, (v ίαυτοΊς equiv. to iv ήμίν αν-
τοΪΓ, Ro. viii. 23 ; (aurovs equiv. to ήμάί αΰτοΰί, 1 Co. ,\i.
31 ; άφ' (αυτοϋ i. q. άπό σ(αυτοϋ [read by L Tr VV'H], Jn.
xviii. 34 ; ίαντόν i. q. σ(αυτόν [read by L Τ Tr WH], Ro.
xiii. 9 ; eatrrois for ΙμΊν ai/Toit, Mt. xxiii. 3 1 , etc. ; cf . Mat^
thiae § 489 H. ; W. § 22, 5 ; [B. § 127, 15]. 3. It is
used frequently in the plural for the reciprocal pronoun
αλλήλων, άλλήλοΐί, άλλήλουΓ. reciprocally, mutually, one
another: Mt. xvi. 7; .xxi. 38 ; Mk. x. 26 [Trmrg. WH
αΰτόν'\ ; xvi. 3 ; Lk. xx. 5 ; Eph. iv. 32 : Col. iii. 13, 16 ;
1 Pet.iv. 8, 10; see Matthiae § 489 IIL ; Kuhnerii. p.497
sq. ; Bnhdy. p. 273; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 13].
ί'άω, -ω ; impf. ("ιων ; fut. (άσω ; 1 aor. ("υισα ; fr. Horn,
down ; 1. to allow, permit, let : foil, by the inf., ουκ
άν (ϊασ( διορυγ}ναι [Τ Tr WH -χθηναιΊ, Mt. xxiv. 43 ; by
the ace. of the person and the inf., Lk. iv. 41 (οίκ da αίτά
λαλίΐν); Acts xiv. 16; xxiii. 32; .xxvii. 32; xxviii. 4 ; 1 Co.
X. 13; by the ace. alone, when the inf. is easily supplied
from the context, ουκ (ΐασ(ν αυτούς, sc. πορ(νθί}ναι. Acts
xvi. 7 ; οίκ (ϊων αυτόν, sc. (ΐσ(λ6(Ίν, Acts χΐχ. 30 ; [cf. AV.
476 (444)]. 2. Ttvd, to suffer one to do what he wi.shes,
not to restrain, to let alone : Rev. ii. 20 Rec. ; Acts v. 38
R G ; (άτ( sc. airrois, is spoken by Christ to the apostles,
meaning, ' do not resist them, let them alone,' (the fol-
lowing (ως τούτου is to be separated from what precedes ;
[al. connect the words closely, and render ' suffer them
to go even to this extreme ' ; but cf. Mey. ad loc. ed.
AVeiss]), Lk. xxii. 51. 3. To give up, let go, leave :
τάς αγκύρας . . . (ίων (ΐς την θάλασσαν, they let down into
the sea [i. e. abandoned ; cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 3009' hot.],
Acts xxvii. 40. [CoMP. : προσ-ίάω.]*
ίβ8ο(ΐήκοντο, οί. αϊ, τά, [fr. Hdt. down], seventy: Acts
vii. 14 [here Jiec.'^' (βδομηκονΓαπ(ντ(~\; xxiii. 23 ; xxvii.
37 ; οί (βδομήκοντα \_(βδ- δύο L br. AA'H br.], the seventy
disciples whom Jesus sent out in addition to the twelve
apostles : Lk. x. 1, 17. [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Seventy Dis-
ciples.] *
[€βδομ.ηκοντ(Μ'ξ for (,ίδομήκοντα (ξ, seventy-six: Acts
xxvii. 37 Rec.*J
(βεομηκοντάκΐΐ, [Gen. iv. 24], seventy limes : ίβ&ομηκον-
τάκις (πτά, seventy times seven limes, i. e. countless times,
Mt. xviu. 22 [cf. W. § 37, 5 Note 2 ; B. 30 (26) and see
(πτά, fin. ; al. (cf. R. V. mrg.) seventy-seven limes, see
Mey. ad loc.].*
[ίβ8ομ.ηκοντα-ΐΓ€'ντί, seventy-fve : .Acts vii. 14 Rec."»
(^Gen. XXV. 7 ; Ks.. xxxix. 6 (xxxviii. 27) ; 1 Esdr. v. Γ2).•]
Ι'β£ομ.οΐ, Τ}, -ov, seventh : Jn. iv. 52; Heb. iv. 4 ; Jude
14 ; Rev. viii. 1 ; xi. 15, etc. [From Hom. down.]
Έβί'ρ [R" G], more correctly [L Τ AA'H] 'Έβ(ρ [on the
accent in codd. see Tdf Proleg. p. 103 ; Treg. "Εβ., cf.
Tdf Proleg. p. 107; WH. Intr. § 408 ; cf. B. D. s. v.
Heber], ό, Eber or Heber, indeclinable proper name of a
Hel)rew : Lk. iii. 35 (Gen. x. 24 sq.).*
Έβραϊκίϊ, -ή. -όν, Hebrew: Lk. xxiii. 38 (R G L br. Tr
mrs. br.).*
Έβραΰ)? [WH 'Έ.βρ., see their Intr. § 408], -ου, ό, α
' Εβραίς
164
eyyi"?
Hebrew ('13j> a name first given to Abraham, Gen. xiv.
13, afterwards transferred to his posterity descended
from Isaae and Jaeob ; by it in tlie (). 'Γ. the Israelites
are bolli distinguished from and desii;nated by foreign-
ers, as afterwards by I'aiisan., I'hilaruli, al. The name
is now generally derived from "15;• for '^'Π^'ΤΙ ι^^• i. e. 0/
the region beyond the Euphrates, whence "^Z)!, e(iuiv. to
one who comes from the region beyond the Euphrates; Gen.
xiv. 13 Sept. ό π(ράτη{• Cf. Gesenius, Gesch. d. hebr.
Sprache u. Schrift, p. 11 sq. ; Thesaurus, ii. p. 987;
Knoliel, A'olkertafel der Genesis, p. 17(i sqq.; Bleek; Einl.
in d. Λ. T. ed. 1, p. 73 sq. [Eng. trans, i. 7i) pcj.] ; [13. D.
s. v. Hebrew. For Syn. see'louSaios.]). In the N. T. 1.
any one of the Jewish or Israelitish nation : 2 Co. xi. 22;
Phil. iii. 5. (In this sense Eiiseb. Ii. e. 2, 4, 3 calls Philo,
the Alexandrian Jew, Έβμα'ίος, although his education
was (Ireek, and he had little [if any] knowledge even of
the Hebrew language; and in Praep. evang. 8, 8, 34 he
applies the same viord to Aristobulus, who was both an
Alexandrian, and a Greek-speaking Jeiv.) 2. In a nar-
rower sense those are called ΈβμαΙυι who lived in Pales-
tine and used the language of the «oiuitry, i. e. Chaldee ;
from whom are distinguished oi Έλληΐ'ΐσταί, (ρ v. That
name adhered to them even after tbcy had gone over to
Christianity : Acts vi. 1. (Philo in his de conf.lingg.§26
makes a contrast between 'E/3p(uoi and ήμfΐς•. and in his
de eongr. erud. grat. § 8 he calls («reek 17 ήμ(τ(ρη &ίαΚ(κτος.
Hence in this sense he does not reckon himself as a He-
brew.) 3. All Jewish Christians, whether they spoke
Aramaic or Greek, ecpiiv. to πιστοί f| Εβραίων ; so in the
heading of the E[iistle to the Hebrews; called by Euseb.
h. e. 3, 4, 2 01 f| Εβραίων ovTft. [Cf. A'. Wicseler, Unters.
ii. d. Ilebriicrbrief, 2te Ilalfte. Kiel, 1861, pp. 25-30.]•
Έβραίϊ [AVII Έβρ., see their Intr. § 408], -iSos, ψ He-
Ortii•, the Ilebreiv language; not that however in which
the (). T. was written, but the Chaldee (not Syro-Chal-
daic, as it is commonly but incorrectly called; cf. A.
Th. Hoffmann, Grammat. Syriac. p. 14), which at tlie
time of Jesus and the apostles had long superseded it
in Palestine: Actsxxi. 40; xxii. 2; xxvi. 14; 'ΐ.βραΊς φωνή,
4 Mace. xii. 7; xvi. 15. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Shemitic Lan-
guages etc. ; ib. Am. ed. s. ν . Lang, of the New Test.] *
Έβραϊο -TC [WH 'Έ,βρ., see their Intr. § 408], adv.,
[ίβραΐζω). III f/chreir, i. e. in Chaldee (see the foregoing
word and reff.) : Jn. v. 2; xix. 13, 17, 20; [xx. 16 TTr
ΛνΐΙ Lbr.]; Rev. \\.\\; .xvi. 16. [Sir. prol. Hne 13.]•
ί'γγίζω; \m\ii. ήγγιζον: Attic fut. tyyiw (.las. iv. 8 [Bttm.
37 (32); W. § 13, 1 c.]) ; 1 aor. ^yyio-a ; pf. ηγγικα;
(cyyus) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb. and Diod. on ; Sept. for
U^J3 and 31p. 1. trans, to bring near, to Join one thing
to another: Polyb. 8, 6, 7 ; Sept., Gen. xlviii. 10; Is. v.
8. 2. intrans. lo ilraw or come near, to approach ;
absol., Mt. xxi. 34: Lk. xviii. 40; [xix. 41]; xxi. 28;
xxii. 1; xxiv. 1.'); Acts vii. 17; xxi. 33; xxiii. 15; [Heb.
x. 25] ; pf. 7yy«< has come nigh, is at hand : ή βασιλ. τοΰ
θίοϋ, Mt. iii. 2 ; iv. 1 7 ; χ. 7 ; Mk. i. 15 ; Lk. x. 1 1 ; with
the addition (φ' υμάς, vs. 9 ; η ίρημωσκ, Lk. xxi. 20 : ή
ωρα, Mt. xxvi. 45 ; ό παραδώονι /if, Mt. xxvi. 46 ; [Mk.
xiv. 42 (where Tdf. ήγγισίν)]; 6 xaipus, Lk. xxi. 8; ή
ήμί'ρα, Κο. xiii. 12 ; το τΛογ, 1 Pet. iv. 7 ; η παρουσία roi
κνμίυυ, J as. v. 8. Construed with the dat. of the i)erson or
the place approached : Lk. vii. 12; xv. 1, 25; xxii. 47;
Acts ix. 3 ; X. 9 ; xxii. 6 ; eyyifdi» τω Θ(<λ (in Sept. used esp.
of the priests entering the teuqile to olfer sacrifices or to
perform other ministrations there, Ex. xix. 22 ; xxxiv. 30 ;
Lev. X. 3, etc.) : to worship God, Mt. xv. 8 Rec, fr. Is.
xxix. 13 ; to turn one's thoughts to God, to become ac-
(piainted with him, Ileb. vii. 19 ; Jas. iv. 8 ; ό fltor fyyi'f«
Tii/i, God draws near to one in the bestowment of his
grace and help, Jas. iv. 8. Foil, by f is and the ace. of the
place : Mt. xxi. 1 ; Mk. xi. 1 ; Lk. xviii. 35 ; xix. 29 ; xxiv.
28; [foil, by προί w. the dat., Lk. xix. 37, see P. § 147,28;
al. regard this as a pregn. constr., cf. W. §§ 48, e. ; 66,
2 d.] ; μίχρι θανάτου ήγγισί, to draw nigh unto, be at the
pointof, death, Phil.ii. 30 {ίγγίζαν ιΐς θάνατον, Λ t>h \-a\ni.
22) ; with an adv. of place, όπου κΚίπτης ουκ (γγίζίΐ, Lk.
xii. 33. [COMP. : πpnσ-fyyίfω.] *
[ϊγγκΓτο. neut. plur. superl. (fr. (γγία) as adv., nearest,
next: WH (rejected) mrg. in IMk. vi. 36 (al. κΟ/Λω).•]
«γ-γράψω [Τ WH evyp., see tv. III. 3]: pf. jiass. (γγί-
γραμμαι ; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down] ; to engrai:e ; m-
scrilic, write in or 071 : τί, pass, with dat. of the means
[wiV/i] and foil, by iv with dat. of the place (in minds,
tablets), 2 Co. iii. 2, 3 ; to record, enrol : τα ονόματα, pass.
Lk. X. 20 Τ Tr WH. *
?γγυθ5. -ου, ό, η. a surety, (Cic. and Vulg. sponsor) :
κρύττονοί ^ίαθήκης ίγγυος, he by whom we get full assur-
ance of the more excellent covenant made by God with
us, and of the truth and stability of the promises con-
nected with it, Ileb. vii. 22. (2 Mace. x. 28 ; Sir. xxix.
15s(i. Xen. vect. 4, 20 ; Aeschin. Epp. 11, 12 p. 128 a. ;
Aristot. occ. 2, 22 [vol. ii. p. ΓΊ.ΟΟ•, 19], Polyb., Diod., al.)*
iyyii, adv., (fr. ev and γυΐοκ [limb, hand], at hand ; [but
rather allied w. «γχι. όγχω. anxius, anguish, etc. ; see
Curtius § 166 ; Vaniiek p. 22]), [fr. Horn, down], Sept.
for 311 ρ ; near; 1. of Place and posit ion ; a.
prop. : absol. Jn. xix. 42, [cf. also 20 G L Τ Tr WH (but
see below)]; with gen. (Matthiae §339, 1 p. 812; W.
195 (183) ; [471 (439) ; B. § 132, 24]), Lk. xix. 11 ; Jn.
iii. 23; vi. 19,23; xi. 18,54; xix. 20 [Rec, but see above];
Acts i. 12 : with dat. (Matthiae § 386, 6 ; Kiihner § 423,
13; [Jelf § 592, 2]), Acts ix. 38; xxvii. 8. b. trop-
ically; oi eyy^^' t''o^e ^^i" ^i"" near of access to God i. e.
Jews, and oi μακράν, those who are alien from the true
God and the blessings of the theocracy, i. e. Gentiles :
Eph. ii. 1 7 (cf. Is. Ivii. 19) ; iyyis ■γίνισθαι, to he brought
near, sc. to the blessings of the kingdom of God, Eph. ii.
13, (so with the Rabbins not infrefpiently lo male nigh
is eipiiv. to to male η proselyte, cf. Wetstcin ad I.e.;
[Srhiiltgen. Ilorae etc. i. 761 sq. : Vnlrl: Schol. i. 363]);
eyyis σου το ρημά ίστιν. near thee i. e. at hand, already,
as it were, in thy mind. Ro. x. 8 fr. Deut. xxx. 14, [cf.
B. § 129, 11; W. 465 (4.34)]. 2. of Time; concern-
ing things imminent and soon to come to pass : Mt. xxiv.
32"; xxvi. 18; Mk. xiii. 28; Lk. xxi. 30, 31 ; Jn. ii. 13;
vi. 4 ; vii. 2 ; xi. 55 ; Rev. i. 3 ; xxii. 10 ; of the near ad-
tyyvrepov
165
eyKaivia
Tent of persons : ό κύριος (yyis, of Christ's return from
heaven, Phil. iv. 5 (in anotlier sense, of God in Ps. cxliv.
(cxlv.) 18) ; with the addition ίη'ι θύραις, at the door,
Mt. xxiv. 33 ; Mk. xiii. 29 ; i'yyis κατάρας, near to being
cursed, Heb. vi. 8 ; αφανισμού, soon to vanish, Heb. viii.
13.•
ίγγύτ€ρον, neut. of the compar. ίγγύτ(ρος (fr. ι-γγύς),
used adverbially, nearer: Ro. xiii. 11.*
«Yctpu ; fut. iyfpii ; 1 aor. ήγαρα ; Pass., pres. eyfipo-
μαι, impv. 2 pers. sing, iyfipnv (Mil. ii. 9 Tr WH), Lk.
viii. 54 (where L Tr Wll (ydpt), 2 pers. plur. eyfipfaOc,
pf. cy^yeppai; 1 aor. rjyipdqv [cf. B. 52 (45); W. § 38,
1]; 1 fut. €γ(ρθήσομαι; Mid., 1 aor. impv. tyeipat Rec. ;
but, after good codd., Grsb. has in many pass, and lately
L Τ Tr Wll have everywhere in the N. T. restored
fyfipf , pres. act. impv. used intransitively and employed as
a formula for arousing ; properly, rise, i. e. up ! come ! cf.
ayf, so in Eur. Iph. A. 624; Arstph.ran.340; cf. Fritzsche
onMk. p. 55; [B. 56 (49), 144 (126) sq. ; Kuhner§373,
2]; Sept. generally for Τ^|Π and D'pn ; to arouse, cause
to rise ; 1. as in Grk. writ. fr. Homer down, to arouse
from sleep, to awake : Acts xii. 7 ; [Mk. iv. 38 Τ Tr WH] ;
pass, to he awaked, ivake up, [A. V. arise, often including
thus the subseq. action (cf. 3 below)] : Mt. xxv. 7 ; Mk. iv.
27; \anh τού ύπνον, Mt. i. 24 L Τ Tr ΛΥΗ] ; ίy(pβeiς with
the impv. Mt. ii. 13, 20 ; with a finite verb, Mt. ii. 14, 21 ;
viii. 26 ; [Lk. viii. 24 R G L Tr mrg.] ; iyelpeaOe, Mt. xxvi.
46 ; Mk. xiv. 42. ΛIetaph. c| ΰπνον €γ€ρθψ'αι, to arise
from a state of moral sloth to an active life devoted to
God, Ro. xiii. 11 : likewise tyeipt [Rec. -pai] arise, 6
καθ(ύδων, Eph. v. 14. 2. to arouse front the sleep of
death, to recall the dead to life : with νικρούς added, Jn.
v. 21 ; Acts xxvi. 8 ; 2 Co. i. 9. tyeipe [Rec. -pai] arise,
Mk. v. 41 ; pass, iyflpov, Lk. viii. 54 [R G T] , iyipθητι,
arise from death, Lk. vii. 14 ; iydpovrai ot vcKpoi, Mt. xi.
5; Lk. vii. 22 ; xx. 37; 1 Co. xv. 15, 16, 29, 32, (Is. .xxvi.
19); eydpeiv (K vexprnu, from the company of the dead
[cf. W. 1 23 ( 1 1 7 ) : B. 89 ( 78 )], Jn. xii. 1,9; Acts iii. 1 5 ;
iv. 10; xiii. 30; Ro. iv. 24: viii. 11 ; x. 9; Gal. i. 1 ; Eph.
i. 20 ; Col. ii. 12 ; 1 Th. i. 10 ; Heb. xi. 19 ; 1 Pet. i. 21 ;
pass., Ro. vi. 4, 9 ; vii. 4 ; 1 Co. xv. 12, 20 ; Jn. ii. 22 ; xxi.
14 ; Mk. vi. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. (κ ν^κρ.] ; Lk. ix. 7 ;
[Mt. xvii. 9 L Τ Tr WH txt.] ; άπο των νικρών, Mt. xiv.
2 ; xxvii. 64 ; xxviii. 7, {vcKpov e'lc θανάτου κα\ ϊξ άδου, Sir.
xlviii. 5; for T'pD, 2 K. iv. 31); iyelpciv sim])ly: Acts
V. 30; X.40; xiii. 37; 1 Co. vi. 14; 2θυ. iv. 14; pass., Mt.
xvi. 21 ; xvii. 23 [L WH mrg. άναστήσ(τιιι'\ : [xx. 19 Τ Tr
txt. WH txt.]; xxvi. 32; xxvii. 63: Mk. [vi. 16 Τ WH
(see above)] ; xvi. 6 ; Lk. xxiv. 6 [WII reject the clause],
34 ; Ro. iv. 25 ; 1 Co. xv. 4, etc. 3. in later usage gen-
erally to cause to rise, rnise, from a seat, bed, etc. ; pass,
and mid. to rise, arise ; used a. of one sitting : c'yf i-
p€Tai [LTr W^H r|yfpθη'] ταχύ. Jn.xi. 29, cf. vs. 20; pres.
act. imperative eyeipe (see above), Mk. .x. 49 [not Rec],
cf. vs. 46 ; hence (like tlie Ilebr. Dip, Gen. xxii. 3 ; 1 Chr.
xxii. 1 9), in the redundant manner spoken of s. v. ανίστημι,
ΤΙ. 1 c. it is used before verbs of going, etc. : eyfpifif
ήκο\ούθ(ΐ [^-ησιν R G] αΰτω, ΛΙΐ. ix. 19 ; eycipf [R G -pai]
κα\ μίτρησον, Rev. xi. 1. b. of one reclining : tydptTai
(K τού fieiVyou, Jn. xiii. 4 ; ('γ(ίρ(σθ€, Jn. xiv. 31. c. of
one lying, to raise up : ήγίίριν αυτόν, Acts χ. 26 ; (γίρθητψ
arise, Mt. xvii. 7 ; iyfipi (see above) Acts iii. 6 [L Tr
txt. br.] ; ηy^pθη άπο της γης he rose from the earth.
Acts ix. 8 ; to [raise up i. e.] draw out an animal from a
pit, Mt. xii. 11. d. of one 'down' with disease, lying
sick: act., Mk. ix. 27 ; Acts iii. 7; eytpd αντον ή κύριος,
will cause hiui to recover, Jas. v. 15; j)ass. Mt. viii. 15,
(yfipf ([Rec. -pat, so Grsb. (doubtfully in Mt.)], see above)
arise : Mt. ix. 5 ; Jn. v. 8 ; Acts iii. 6 [T WH om. Tr br.].
4. To raise up, produce, cause to appear ; a. to cause to
appear, bring before the public (any one who is to attract
the attention of men) : rjyeipf τώ 'ίσραηΧ σωτήρα, Acts
xiii. 23 Rec. ; ήγαρ^ν αύτυΐς τύν Δαν^ΐδ (Ις βασιλία, Acts
xiii. 22 (so D'pn, Judg. ii. 18 ; iii. 9, 15) ; pass. (γ(!ρομαι,
to come before the public, to appear, arise : Mt. xi. 1 1 ; xxiv.
11, 24 ; Mk. xiii. 22 ; Lk. vii. 16 ; Jn. vii. 52 [cf. W. 266
(250); B. 204 (177)]; contextually, to appear before a
judge : Mt. xii. 42; Lk. .xi. 31. b. ίπΐ τίνα to raise up,
incite, stir up, against one ; pass, to rise against : Mt. .xxiv.
7 ; Mk. xiii. 8 ; Lk. .xxi. 10. o. to raise up i. e. cause to
be born : τίκνα τινί, ^It. iii. 9 ; Lk. iii. 8 ; κΐρας σωτηρίας,
Lk. i. 69 (see ανίστημι, I. C. ΐξανίστημι, 1) ; ΘΚίψιν τοις
8(σμοϊς μου, to cause affliction to arise to my bonds, i. e.
the misery of my imprisonment to be increased by trib-
ulation, Phil. i. 16 (17) L TTr WH. d. of buildings,
to raise, construct, erect : τον ναόν, Jn. ii. 19 sq. (so D'pn,
Deut. xvi. 22; 1 K. xvi. 32. Aelian. de nat. an. 11, 10;
Joseph, antt. 4. 6, 5 ; Hdian. 3, 15, 6 [3 ed. Bekk.]; 8,2,12
[5 ed. Bekk.] ; Lcian. Pseudomant. § 19 ; Anthol. 9, 696.
1 Esdr. V. 43 ; Sir. xlix. 13 ; Lat. excito turrem, Caes. b. g.
5, 40 ; sepulcrum, Cic. legg. 2, 27, 68). [Ammonius : ava-
στήναι κα\ ίγιρθηναι 8ιαφίρ(ΐ• άναστήναι μίν yap en't
tpyov, iyf ρθήναι δί e^ νπνου: cf. also Thorn. ^Jag.
ed. Ritschl p. 14, 10 scj. But see exx. above. Comp. :
δι-, ίξ-, 67Γ-, σνν-€γ€ίρω.~\
cYcptris, -€ως, ψ {ίγίίρω), α rousing, excitation : τον θνμην.
Plat. Tim. p. 70 c. ; a rising up, Ps. cxxxviii. (cxxxix.)
2; resurrection irom death: ^!t. xxvii. 53.*
«γκάβίτοϊ [Τ WH ivK; see fv. III. 3], -ου, ό, η, (e'yicaflt-
ι;;ιιι [to send down in (secretly)]), suborned to lie in
wait; a lier-in-wait, spy, [cf. Lat. insidiator; Eng. insid-
ious^ : used in Lk. xx. 20 of one who is suborned by
others to entrap a man by crafty words. (Plat. Ax. p.
368 e. ; Dem. p. 1483, 1 ; Joseph, b. j. 6, 5, 2; Polyb. 13,
.5, l,al. ; Sept.. Job [xix. 12]; xxxi. 9.)*
cYKaCvia [T WII ίνκ-, see ev. III. 3], -ων, τά, (fr. iv and
καινός) ; only in bibl. and eccl. writ., [on tlie plur. cf. W.
§27,3; B. 23 (21)]; dedication, consecration•, thus in 2
Esdr. vi. 16, 17; Neh. xii. 27 for Π3^Π ; in particular,
[Vulg. encaenium i. e. renovation'}, an annual feast cele-
brated eight days beginning on tlie 25tli of Chislev (mid-
dle of our December), instituted by Judas Maccaljaeus
[b. C. 164] in memory of the cloansingof the temple from
the pollutions of Antioclius Epiphancs (αί ήμίραι e'yicai-
νισμον τον θυσιαστηρίου, 1 ^lacc. iv. 59) : Jn. .\. 22. Cf.
Win. RWB. ra.so Kiehm, HWB.] s. v. Kirchweihfest ;
ΐ'γκαινίζίο
166
eyKpareia
Oehler in llerzog iv. p. 3S9; Grimm on 1 Mace. i. 54 ;
iv. 52; Dillmaiin in Sjcliuiikel iii. i>'ii sq. ; [BB.DU.
(esp. Kitto) s. V. Dcditaiiuii, Feast of tht•].'
€γ-καινίζω [Τ W'il ΐνκ.^ sec (v^ III. 3J : 1 aor. (ν(καΙνισα\
pf. pass. ϊγκ(κιιίΐΊσμαι ; a word exclusively bibl. and eccl.
[\V. 33]; la iiiii<H-ale,i. e. 1. Ιυ renew : 2 Chr. xv. 8.
2. lo do anew, again : σημύα, Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 6.
3. to initiate, consecrate, dedicate, ( Deut. xx. 5 ; 1 K.
viii. 63; 1 S. xi. 14, etc.) : ^ιαθτικην, Ileb. ix. 18; ohav,
Ileb. x. 20.•
^Y-KaKcu, -ώ [(see below) ; 1 aor. evtκάκησa^ ; {kukos) ;
[prop, to behave badly in ; hence] lo he icearij in uny-
tliini;, or lo lose courage, /lag, faint : adopted by L Τ Tr
Wll in place of 11 G ϊκκακίω (i[. v.) in Lk. xviii. 1 ; 2 Co.
iv. 1, 16; (ial. vi. 'J; Kph. iii. 13; 2 Th. iii. 13 — except
that Τ Wll write ivK- in Lk. xviii. 1 ; Gal. vi. 9 ; Eph.
iii. 13; so WII in 2 Th. iii. 13, also; see ev, III. 3; [cf.
Tdf.'s note on 2 Co. iv. 1 ; Meyer ibid., who thinks that
ίκκ. may have been a colloquial form. See the full exhi-
bition of the usa<;e of the Mss. given by Dr. Gregory in
his Prole;;, to Tdf. ed. 8, p. 78.] (Found a few times in
Syminachus [Gen. xxvii. 4G ; Xum. xxi. 5 ; Is. vii. 16 ;
also I'rov. iii. 1 1 Tlieod.] ; Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 2, 2 ; in
prof. writ, only in Polyl). 4, Γ.Ι, 10 to ττίμπίίν ras βοηθ(ίας
ίν(κά<ησαν they culpably neglected to send aid, [add
I'hilo deconfus. lingg. § 13 (Mang. i. 412, 36) oix (κκα-
κονμ€νος (κνάμφθην .)•
ίγ-καλί'ω [see ei/, 111. 3] -ώ; flit, ίγκάλίσω ; impf. f «κά-
λοι/ν; [pres. iiass.fyicaXoiyiai] ; prop. /o raW (something) in
some one («V [i. e. prob. in his case ; or possibly, as rooted
in him]) ; hence, lo call lo account, bring a charge against,
accuse : as in classic Grk. foil, by dat. of the person [cf.
W. § 30, 9 a.]. Acts xix. 38 ; xxiii. 2S, (Sir. xlvi. 19) ; κατά
with gen. of the pcrs. lo come forward as accuser against,
bring a charge against : Ro. viii. 33. Pass, to be accused
(cf. B. § 134, 4, [§ 133, 9 ; yet cf. Mey. on Acts as below,
W. u. s.]) ; Λvith gen. of the thing : στάσ^ωί. Acts xix.
40, (a(7f^fi'ar it του Ύιβίριον (γκληθ(ίς, l)io Cass. 58, 4;
act. Λvith dat. of the pers. and gen. of the thing, Plut.
Arist. 10, 9 ; see W. n. s. ; Matthiae § 369) ; πίρΐ τοΰ-
των, ων (γκα\οί)μαι, unless tliis is to be resolved into irepl
τοίιτων a etc., aec. to the well-known construction ίγκα-
Xci» TIKI n. Acts x.xvi. 2; πίρί τιι/οί (act. Diod. 11,83)
Acts xxiii. 29 ; xxvi. 7, [B. § 133, 9]. (In Grk. writ. fr.
Soi)h. and Xen. down.) [Syn. see κατηγυρίω, fin.] *
ίγ-κατα-λί^τω [Acts ii. 27, 31, Τ WII (μκ.; Τ also in
Ro. ix. 29, see liis note and cf. iv, III. 3] ; [inqjf. ϊ-γκατί-
"KciTTov (WII txt. in 2 Tim. iv. 10, 16)] ; fut. ey<aTaXf ι'ψω ;
2 aor. (-γκατίΧητον ; Pass., [pres. {'γκαταλίΐ'ττομαι] ; 1 aor.
Ι-^κατίΚίίφθην; Sejrt. for 3;;' ; 1. to abandon, desert,
{ev Cijuiv. to fv τίνι, in some place or condition), i. e. lo
Icare in straits, leave lielpless, (colloq. leave in the lurch) :
τινά, Mt. xxvii. 46 and Mk. xv. 34 tr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2 ;
Ileb. xiii. r> ; pass. 2 Co. iv. 9; after the Ilebr. 3;;• with
7, Ttva fit αδου [or αδτ)!/], by forsaking one to let him "O
into Hades, abandon unto Hades, Acts ii. 27, 31 (not R).
to deserl,forsalce : τινά, 2 Tim. iv. 1 0, 1 6 ; tiji/ ίπισυνα-γωγην,
Heb. X. 25. 2. to leave behind among, to leave surviv-
ing: ήμ'ιν σττίρμα, Ro. ix. 29 fr. Is. i. 9. (Hes. opp. 376;
Thuc, .s<iii.) "
ίγ-κατ-οικ€Ίι) [Τ WII tvK., see tv. III. 3], -ώ ; to dwell
among : (v avrolt among them, 2 Pet. ii. 8. (Very rare
in prof. writ, as [Hdt. 4, 201]; Eur. frag. [188] ap. Dion
Chrys. or. 73 lin. ; Polyb. 18, 26, 13.)*
(γ-κανχάομαι [Τ Wll tvK., see ev. III. 3]; to glory in:
foil, by iv with dat. of the obj. (Ps. Ii. (Iii.) 3 ; xcvi. (xcvii.)
7 ; cv. (cvi.) 47), 2 Th. i. 4 L Τ Tr Wll. (With simple
dat. of thing in eccl. writ, and Acsoj/s Fables.) *
€γ-Κ£ντρίζ<ι> [Τ WII ivK-, see iv, III. 3] : 1 aor. iveKei>-
τρισα ; Pass., 1 aor. iveκ(vτpίσθηv ; 1 fut. {γκΐντρισθησομαι ;
lo cut into for the sahe if inserting a scion; lo inorulale,
ingraft, graft in, (Aristot. ap. Athen. 14, (i8 [p. 653 d.] ;
Theophr. h. p. 2, 2, 5 ; Antonin. 1 1, M) : τινά, llo. xi. 17,
19, 23, 24 [cf. W. §52, 4,5]; in these pass. Paul likens
the heatlien who by becoming Christians have been ad-
mitted into fellowship with the people for whom the
Messianic salvation is destined, to scions from wild trees
inserted into a cultivated stock ; [cf. Beet on vs. 24 ;
B. D. s. V. Olive].•
«γκλημα [see f μ. III. 3], -rot, to, (eyxaXeiu), accusation:
the crime of which one is accused. Acts xxv. 1 6 ; (γκΧημα
(χ(ΐν, to have laid to one's charge, be accused of a crime,
Acts xxiii. 29. (Often in Attic writ. fr. Soph, and Thuc.
on.)•
[Syn. see κατη•γορ4ω\ cf. Isoc. 16, 2 τάϊ μ^ν yap StKas
ί /vip των 15ίων ^ y κ Krj μάτ ω ν Kayxayovai, τάί δέ KaT-qyo-
pias ίιτΓΐρ των τηί TTOAews ^Γpayμάτωv ττοιοΰνται, καΐ πλεΐ»
χρόνον 5ιατρί$ουσί rhv πατίρα μου δ ια β ά\Κο ντ € s ί) ίίτλ.]
€γ-κομ.βόομιαι [sec εκ.ΙΙΙ. 3], -ονμαι : [1 aor. mid. ivtKop•
βωσάμην^; (fr. fV and κομβόω Xo knot, tie, and tliis fr.
κόμβος knot, band, (Germ. Schleife), by which two things
are fastened together), lo fasten or gird on one's self; the
ίγκόμβωμα was the white scarf or apron of slaves, which
vras fastened to the girdle of the vest [cfu/it't], and dis-
tinguished slaves from freemen ; hence 1 Pet. v. 5 την
ταηιινοφρ. (γκομβώσασθι, gird yourselves with humility
as your servile garb ((-γκόμβωμα) i. e. by putting on humil-
ity show your subjection one to another. That this idea
lies in the phrase is shown by C. F. A. Frilzsche, withliis
usual learning, in Fritzschiorum Opuscc. p. 259 styi.'
«γ-κοιτή [WII ivK• Τ fKK-, see iv. III. 3], -^t, f), (iyKO-rrTw),
properly, a cutting (made in the road to impede an en-
emy in pursuit [(?)], hence), a hindrance: 1 Co. ix. 12.
(Diod. 1, 32 ; Dion. Hal. de comp. verb. p. 157, 15 (22) ;
Longin. de sublim. 41, 3 ; [al.].)*
ίγ-κόιττω [in Acts Τ WII ivK., so Τ in 1 Pet. where R
iKK.; see iv. III. 3] ; 1 aor. ivtKoi^ra; Pass., [pres. ίγκόητο-
μαι] ; impf. iυtκoπτόμηv ; lo cut into, lo impede one's course
hg culling off his way; hence univ. /« hinder (Ilesych. :
iμπo8ίζω, διακωλΰω) ; with dat. of the obj., Polyb. 24, 1,
12; in the N. T. with ace. of the obj.. 1 Th. ii. 18; foil,
by inf.. Gal. v. 7 (see ανακόπτω) ; inf. preceded by τοϋ,
Ro. XV. 22 ; fit TO μη (γκόπτισθαι ras προσ(νχαί νμων, that
ye be not hindered from praying (together), 1 Pet. iii.
7 ; i. q. to detain [A. V. lo be tedious unU)] one. Acts χχίτ.
4 [cf. Valcken. Schol. i. 600 sq.].•
<γκράτ»α [see iv. III. 3], -at, η, (ίγκρατη!), self-control.
βΎκρατΐνομαι
167
έΒαφίζο}
Lat. continentia, temperantia, (the virtue of one who mas-
ters his desires and passions, especially his sensual ap-
petites) : Acts xxiv. 25; Gal. v. 23 (22); 2 Pet. i. 6.
(Xen., Plat., sqq. ; Sir. .xviii. 29; 4 Mace. v. 34.)*
«γκρατίίομαι [see iv, III. 3] ; depon. mid. ; to be self-
controlled, continent ((γκρατήί) ; to exhibit self-government,
conduct one's self temperately : [used absol. Gen. xliii.
30] ; with dat. of respect, r^ ■γΚώσση, Sir. xix. 6 var. ;
πάντα, in everything, every way, 1 Co. Lx. 25 (in a figure
drawn from athletes, who in preparing themselves for
the games abstained from unwholesome food, wine, and
sexual indulgence) ; ονκ (γκρατ(ύ(σθαι. said of those who
cannot curb sexual desire, 1 Co. vii. 9. Thougli this
word does not occur in the earlier Grk. writ, that have
come down to us [exc. in Aristot. eth. Eudem. 2, 7 p.
1223', 13 ed. Bekk.], yet its use is approved of by Phry-
niehus ; of. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442 ; [W. 25].*
ίγκρατήϊ [see iv. III. 3], -e's, (/c/jiiros) ; 1. prop,
equiv. to ό tV lepUTit ων, strong, robust : Aeschyl., Thuc,
sqq. 2. having power over, possessed of (a thing),
with a gen. of the object ; so fr. [Soph, and] Hdt. down.
3. mastering, controlling, curbing, restraining : αφροδισίων,
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 1 ; ηδονής, ibid. 4, 5, 10 ; iavroi. Plat. ;
absol. (without a gen.), controlling one's self, temperate,
continent, ([Aristot. eth. Nic. 7, 4 p. IHG', 10 sqq.]; Sir.
xxvi. 15 ; Sap. viii. 21 ; Philo de Jos. § 11) : Tit. i. 8.*
ty-Kptvu [T WH ivK; see iv. III. 3] : [1 aor. iveKptva^ ;
to reckon among, judge among : τινά τινι, to judge one
worthy of being admitted ίο a certain class [A. V. to
number with'], 2 Co. x. 12. (From Xen. and Plato down.) *
ίγ-κρίτΓτω : 1 aor. iveKpv\j/a ; to conceal in something,
t1 i'ls- Ti (Diod. 3, 63 ; ApoUod. 1, 5, 1 § 4) ; conte.xtually,
to mingle one thing with another : Mt. .xiii. 33 ; Lk. .xiii.
21 here Τ Tr WH ίκρυψιν. (τι τινι, Horn. Od. 5, 488.) *
£γκυθ5 [WH fVK-, see iv. III. 3.], -ov, for the more
usual iγκvμωv, (fr. iv and κύω), big with child, pregnant:
Lk. ii. 5. (Hdt. 1, 5 etc. ; Diod. 4, 2 ; Joseph, antt. 4, 8,
33.)*
ί'γ-χρίω [see iv, ΠΙ. 3] : 1 aor. act. impv. ΐγχρισον, mid.
(in Γ Tr) ίγχρισαι [but L WH 1 aor. act. infin. (γχρΊσαι
(Grsb. iyxpiaai ; cf. Veitch s. v. χρίω, tin.)] ; to rub in,
besmear, anoint ; Mid. to anoint for one's self: Toir οφθαλ-
μούς. Rev. iii. 18 [cf. Bttm. 149 sq. (131) ; W. § 32, 4 a.].
(Tob. vi. 9 ; xi. 7 ; Strab., Anthol., Epict., al.)*
ί'γώ, gen. ipoi, enclitic μοϋ : dat. e'^oi, enclitic ^oi ; ace.
ipi, enclitic μι ; phir. ήμ(1ς, etc. ; personal pronoun, /.
1. The nominatives iyώ and ήμ(ΐί, when joined to a verb,
generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis,
as Mt. iii. 11 ; Mk. i. 8 ; Lk. iii. 16 (iya> μίν . . . 6 8e) ;
Alt. iii. 14 (iyai . . . ίχω. και σύ) ; v. 22, 28, 39, and often ;
ήμίϊί, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ήμ(Ϊ! κ. ol Φαρι-
σα'ιοι, Mt. ix. 14 ; cf. W. § 22, 6. But sometimes they are
used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them,
as Mt. X. 16 ; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2;
Lk. vii. 27; cf. B. § 129, 12. Ιδον iyo>, "Jjn, behold me,
here am I : Acts ix. 10 (1 S. iii. 8). iya), like -JX, I am :
Jn. i. 23 ; Acts vii. 32, [cf. W. S85 (544) ; B. 125 (109)].
2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace.
are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with
prepositions: ϊμπροσθίν μου, Jn. i. 15; οπίσω μου, Mt.
iii. 1 1 ; Ισχνροτ€ρύς μου, ibid. ; τις μου ι^ψατο, ^Ik. v. 31 ;
Xc'yfi μοι, llev. v. 5 ; άρνησηταί μΐ, Mt. χ. 33 ; Lk. xii. 9,
(on the accent in these expressions cf. W. § 6, 3 ; [iip-
sius. Gram. Untersuch. p. 59 sqq. ; Lob. Path. Elementa
ii. p. 323 sq. ; Tdf N. T. ed. 7, Proleg. p. Ixi. sq.; ed. 8
p. 104]) ; but δι iμoΰ, κατ iμoΰ, ττρο iμoΰ, etc., συν, iv (μοι,
TTfp'i, δι, in, κατ, fls ipi• The only exception is προς, to
which the enclitic fic is generally joined, Mt. xxv. 36 ;
Mk. ix. 19, and very often; very rarely iipos ίμί, Jn.
vi. 37', and ace. to LTTrWIl in Acts xxii. 8, 13;
x.xiv. 19; [also Acts xxiii. 22TTrWH ; Jn. vi. 35 and
45 Τ Tr txt. WH ; Lk. i. 43 Τ WH ; Mt. xix. 14 ; Jn. vi.
37*, 65, Tdf. ; Jn. vi. 44 Tr txt. λΥΗ mrg.; 1 Co. xvi. 11
LTr; but wpof pi, Mt. iii. 14 Tdf. and xi. 28 Grsb.; cf.
Lipsius u. s. p. 61 note]. Moreover, the full forms (μοϋ,
(μοι, ίμί are used in case of emphasis or antithesis ; thus,
(μοϋ, Lk. X. 16 ; ίμοί, Jn. vii. 23 ; x. 38, etc. ; ipi, Mk. xiv.
7 ; Jn. vii. 7, etc. 3. As in classic Greek, μοϋ and ήμων
are very often used for the possessive pronouns ίμός and
ήμίτίρος [Β. § 127, 21]; and when so used, a. they are
generally placed after their substantives, as 6 oIkus μου, η
ζωη ημών, etc. — the fuller form (μοϋ only for the sake of
distinction or antithesis [cf. B. § 1 27, 22], as μψίρα αϋτοϋ
κα\ (μοϋ, Ro. χλΙ. 13; ■ηίστ(ως ίμων τ( καΐ iμoϋ, Ro. i, 12.
But b. they are sometimes placed before substantives,
even which have the article, when no emphasis resides
in the pron. or antithesis is involved in its use [W. § 22,
7 N. 1 ; B. u. s.] : μου τοϋϊ λο'γουί, Mt. vii. 24, 26 ; even
before prepositions, μου ύπο την στίγι/ν, Mt. viii. 8 ; less
frequently ημών, as ημών την πύλιν. Acts xvi. 20 ; it is
prefixed for emphasis in ημών το πολίτ(υμα. Phil. iii. 20,
cf. W. u. s. ; Rost § 99, 4 p. 452 sqq. 7th ed. adduces a
multitude of exx. fr. Grk. auth. ; [cf. Kriiger, § 47, 9, 12
who states the rule as follows: when joined to a subst.
having the art. the reflexive gen., with αϋτοϋ ipsius,
and αλλήλων, requires the attributive position, the
personal gen., and αΰτ-οϋ ejus, the partitive posi-
tion]. 4. τί (μοΊ (ήμ'ιν) και σοι (ΰμΐν) ; ichat have I
(we) to do with thee (i/ou) ? [cf. B. 138 (121) ; W. 211
(198) ; 585 (544)] : Mt. viii. 29 ; Mk. i. 24 ; v. 7 ; Lk. viii.
28 ; Jn. ii. 4 ; Heb. ■^'ί\ 'b-nr?, Judg. xi. 12 ; 2 K. iii. 13,
2 S. xvi. 10; 2 Chr. xx.xv. 21; 1 Esdr. i. 24; also in
classic Greek; cf. Gell. n. a. 1, 2: Epict. diss. 2, 9, 16;
τί ήμινκ. αΰτω, ibid. 1, 1, 16 ; τί (μοΊ κα\ airoir, ibid. 1,27,
13; 22, 15. τί yap μοι, what does it concern mel tchat
have I to do etc. : 1 Co. v. 12 ; cf. Bos, EUipses Grace, p.
599, ed. Schaefer; Bnhdy. p. 98; Kriiger § 48,3,9;
Kiihner ii. 364 sq. ; [B. as above, also 394 (337); W.
586 (545)].
ίβαφίϊω : Attic fut. ίδαφιώ [Β. 37 (32) ; W. § 13, 1 c] ;
(see ίδαφοϊ) ; to throiv to the ground, — both of cities,
buildings, to raze, level with the earth, and of men ; in
both applications in Lk. xix. 44 [by zeugma (?) cf. W.
§ 66, 2 e.]. (Ps. cxxxvi. (cxxxvii.) 9 ; Is. iii. 26 ; Ezek.
xxxi. 12; Hos. xii. 1 (xiii. 16); Am. ix. 14 [Aid.] ; rare in
prof, writ., as [Aristot. probl. 23, 29] ; Polyb. 6, 33, 6.)•
ίΒαφυ•;
168
£(, (
ϊδαψοΐ, •*οΓ (-ουι), τό, bottom, base, ifround : mirretv (is
TO ίϋαφο!, Acts xxii. 7. (Sept. ; in t'hiss. writ. fr. llotu.
(ii)wn.) •
iSpoios, (rarely fem. -αία [\V. § II, 1]),-αίοΐ', («ίρα seat,
eliair) ; 1. sillini/, saleiitartj, (Xen., Plat., al.). 2.
firm, immovable, steculJ'axt,(VA\T.,l'\-dl., al.) ; in the N. T.
metapli., of those who are fi.xed in purpose : 1 Co. xv.
58; Col. i. 23; ίστηκιν t'u τή καρδία, 1 Co. vii. 37.*
(Βραίωμα, -τοί, τ», {(δραα'ιω to make stable, settle (irmly),
(I sluji, jirop, support, (Vul•^. finitainenlum) : 1 Tim. iii. 1 J
[A.V. i/rounil]. (Eccl. writ.)'
Έζ€κίο5 [WH Έζ-: L -Kfias, see Ti/f. Proleg. p. «5],
(Π'")!!! stri'ni;tl> of Jehovah, i. e. streni;th given by Je-
hovah ; Germ. Gottliard ; Sept. 'EfiKiar), [gen. -ου, cf. B.
17 (Hi) no. «], Hezeliah, king of Judah (2 K. xviii. 1
mj(j. ; XX. I S(iq. ; Is. xxxviii. 1 sqq.) : Mt. i. 9, 10. *
(θ<λο-6ρη<ΓΚ€ία [Τ WH -κία, see I, t], -at, η, (fr. (βί\ω
anil βρησκίΐα, <\. v. [cf. W. 100 (Ho)]), t'nluritari/,(ir/j>lmri/
irors/ii/i, (V'ulg. sapcrslilio), [A. V. will-worship'], i. e.
worship which one devises and prescribes for himself,
contrary to the contents and nature of the faith which
ought to be ilirectcd to Christ ; .said of the misdirected
zeal and i)ractices of ascetics: Col. ii. 23; .Suid. (β(\ο-
θρησκύ ■ ΐδιω θιλήματί σίβιι τό 8οκονν. Cf. (δίλόδουλοί,
(θ(λοδουλ(ία, (θίλοπρυξίνος one who acts the part of a
proxenus without ha\ ing been ajjpointed to the office,
etc. The explanation of others : simulated, counterfeit re-
lii/ion (cf. in Greek lexicon.t «Λλοφιλόσοφο?. (θίλάκωφο!,
etc.), does not scpiare so well with the context. (The
word is found besides in Mansi, Collect. Concil. vol. iv.
p. 1380, and in Theodoret, vol. iv. ep. elxi. p. [1460 b.
ed. Migne]. 13.il, Ilalle ed.; [Euseb. h. e. 6, 12, 1 ; Jerome
ep. cxxi. vol. i. 1034 ed. Migne]. Epiph. haer. I, 16 [i.
p. 318, 3 ed. Dind.] attributes (θ(λοπ( ρισσοθρησκίία
ΙΟ the Pharisees.)•
<β<λω, see ϋ(\ω.
ϋΐζω : ((θυς ([. v.) : Ιο accustom ; Pass. Ιο he accustomed ;
|it. |itc[). TO (Ιθισμίνον lisar/e, custom: τοΰ νόμου, pre-
scribed by the law, FA. ii. 27. (Eur., [Arstph.], Thuc,
Xen., Plat., al.) •
ίθνόρχη!, -ου, ό, (fr. eOvor and άρχω), [i. q. founder of
a nation, Philo, cpiis rer. div. her. § 56], an ethnarch, one
set over a people as ruler, but without the authority and
name of king (l.cian. in Macrob. §17 άντ\ (θνάρχου
iiiiai\(vs avayopcudus Βοσπόρου; .so the governor whom
the Alexandrian Jews used to have was called (θνάρχης,
of whom Josephus says, antt. 14, 7. 2, hs διοι«ί rt τό ϊθνοί
κα\ δίαιτα κρίσας κα\ συμβολαίων fntpfXtirai και προσταγ-
μάτων, ωί αν noXiTfias άρχων αϋτοτ(\οϋς ; likewise .Simon
Maceabaiius, 1 Mace. xiv. 47; xv. 1, 2; Joseph, antt.
1 3, 6, 6 ; cf. [ 1 ■>, 5, 2] ; b. j. 2, 6, 3) : 2 Co. xi. 32 ό ΐθνάρχη,
'ApeVd ToO βασιΚίως, the governor of Damascene Syria,
ruling in the name of king Aretas [(q. v.) ; cf. B. D.'s. v.
Governor, 1 1 ].•
cSviKOs, -ή, -όν, (ίθνης) ; 1. adapted to the t/enius or
customs of a people, peculiar to a people, national: Polyb.,
Diod., al. 2. suited to the manners or loiu/uai/e of for-
eigners, strange, foreign ; so in the grammarians [cf. our
' gentile ']. 3. in the N. T. savoring of the nature of
pagans, alien to the worship of the true God, heathenish ;
substantively, ό fixiKot //('■ pagan, the Gentile: Mt. xviii.
17; i)lur., Mt. v. 4 7 V, L Τ Tr WIl; vi. 7; and 3 Jn. 7
L r Tr WII.•
«θνικΰδ, adv., {sii(iieviKOs),like the Gentiles : Gal. ii. 14,
[W. 463 (431). Apollon. Dysk. p. 190, 5 ; Diog. Laert.
7, 56].•
iOvos, -out, TO ; 1. α multitude (whether of men or
of beasts) associated or liriitg toi/rther ; a coin/iiitii/, troop,
Sicar7n : (6voi ίταϊρων, (θνος Άχαιων, (θνον Χαών, 1 loin. II. ;
f^KOS μίλισσάων, 2,87; μυιάων ΐεθνια, ib. 469. 2. η
multitude tif individuals of the same nature or fjenus, (το
ίθνο! TO θήλυ η το appev, Xen. oec. 7, 26) : nav ίθνοί
άνθράιπων, the liuman race, Acts χ vii. 26 [but this seem»
to belong under the next head]. 3. race, nation : Mt.
xxi. 43 ; Acts x. 35, etc. ; i^i-os fVl ϊθνο!, Mt. xxiv. 7 ;
Mk. xiii. 8; oi άρχοντα, οί βασιλι'ις τωνΐθνών, Mt. χχ. 25;
Lk. xxii. 25 ; used [in the sing.J of the .Jewish people,
I.k. vii. 5 ; xxiii. 2; Jn. xi. 48, 50-53 ; xviii. 35 ; Acts x.
22; xxiv. 2 (3), 10; xxvi. 4 ; xxviii. 19. 4. (τα) ϊθνη,
like D'ljn in the O. Ύ., foreign nations not worshi/iping
the true God, pagans, Gentiles, [cf. Trendi § xcviii.] : Mt.
iv. 15 (Γαλιλαια των (θνών), vi. 32; [3 Jn. 7 KG; cf.
Rev. XV. 3 G L Τ Tr WII mrg. after Jn. x. 7], and very
often ; in plain contradistinction to the Jews : Ro. iii.
29 ; ix. 24 ; [1 Co. i. 23 G L Τ Tr Wil] ; Gal. ii. 8, etc. ; ό
λαό? (τοΰ ΰ(οΰ, Jews) κα'ι τα (θνη, Lk. ii. 32 ; Acts xxvi.
1 7, 23 ; Ro. XV. 1 0. 5. Paul uses τα (θνη even of (ien-
tile Christians : Ro. xi. 13; xv. 27; \vi. 4; (ial. ii. 12
(opp. vs. 13 to oi Ιουδαίοι i. e. Jewish Christians), vs. 14 :
Eph. iii. l,cf. iv. 17 [\V. §59, 4 a.; B. 130 (114)].
cOcs, -eof (-ous), [cf. v^or], τό, fr. Aeschyl. [Agam.
728 (?) ; better fr. Soph.] down, custom: Lk. xxii. 89;
(θοΐ (στί Tiw foil, by an inf., Jn. xix. 40 ; Acts xxv. 16 ;
Ileb. .X. 25; contextually, usage prescribed hi/ law, in-
stitute, prescription, rite : Lk. i. 9; ii. 42 ; Acts xvi. 21;
xxi. 21 ; .xxvi. 3 ; .xxviii. 1 7 ; τ7(ριτΐμν(σθαι τω (θ(ΐ Μωΐ•ο-ιΰ>?,
Acts .\\". 1 ; άλλίί^ϊ ί τό (θη η παρ(δωκ( Μοιΐ-σί)?, A("ts \ i. 14.*
ίθω (of the pres. only the ])tc]). ίθων is used, in Ilom.) :
pf. (ϊωθα, to be accustomt'd, used, wont ; [j'lpf. as impf.
(W. 274 (257 sq.)) (Ιώβ(ΐν] : foil, by inf. : Mt. xxvii. 15 ;
Mk. X. 1. Ptcp. TO (ΐωθός in a ])ass. sense, that which is
wont; usage, custom: κατά τό (Ιωθόί tiw as one's custom
is, as is his wont, Lk. iv. 16; Acts .xvii. 2.*
[ei, i: fi and i are frec|. interchanged in N. T. .spelling.
This is due partly to itacism, |iartly to the endeavor to mark
tlie 1 sound as long or short. See tlie remarks on this suliject
in IF//. App. p. 152 sq. (cf. lutr. § 399) : Tdf Prolog, p'. 83
si[,; Soph. Lex. s. v. ei. The use of i for ci is noticed s. v. I, i ;
instances iu which ii is substituted for ι are the foil. : Ά$(ΐ-
K-qvi] \TH ; ■ASSei Τ Tr WH ; 'Ai-Tf /ttos T ; ' ^pfo^rayι:h■ηs Τ ;
Bei/iaittiV LTTr WH; Δαυίίδ L Γ Tr WII ; 'Efeif ias L ;
Έλαμίίττ,ϊ Τ WH ; 'EAf.o-a/SeT WH; Έσλβί Τ Tr WH ; EC-
«.Vt, Rec." ; 'HAe/TTrWH; 'HAtias Τ WH ; ΊίρίΐχύΎ
WH ; Ί(ροσο\υμ(Ιτν5 Τ WH ; '1σραη\(1τηί Τ WH, so Tr iu
Jn. i. 47 (48) ; Ίωσίία! L Τ Tr WH ; Ki/s L Τ Tr WH ;
ΚκρίΓΐΌϊ Tr mrf. WH mrg. ; Aevtit Τ WH, so Trexc. in Mk.
ii. 14 : \(v(iT7]s Τ WH, so Tr exc. in Acts iv. 36 ; AfvetTiKOs
Τ WH , Μι\χι: Γ Tr WH ; Nupcl Τ Tr WH ; Ni«i.€iTr)s Τ
et
169
WH, so Tr in Mt. xii. 41 ; O(eias h Τ Tr WH ; Π€ΐλ5το5 Τ
WH ; SeMte.V Τ Tr WH ; Ταβαθά WH ; Χίρουβίίν L Τ
TrWH (-/3ίμ Κ (J); XopaCeh Τ Tr WH; άψ€/δ€ΐα L ; β,δί'α
Τ Tr WH ; ϊτταρχίΐα Τ WH ; 4πιπόβίία WH ; ijAei Τ ; wafoiKe'i
TWH; βαββ^ί I'WH; ραββουν^ί WH ; σα.βαχβακί Ύ Tr
WH ; TaKftOaWll; τάχαον WH ; τραπ€^ίΐτ7|$ Τ WH.]
f(, is lirst a conditi(jual particle, //' (Lat. si) ; secondly,
an interrogative particle, ic/it;l/ier, (Lat. an, num, ne).
I. £1 Conditional (ou the dift'erence between it and
fav, see iav, I. 1 b.) is connected, according to the variety
of conditions, with various tenses and moods ; viz. 1.
with the Indicative of all tenses, ivhen anything is
simply and generally assumed to be, or to be done, or to
have been done, or to be about to be, (W. § 41 b., 2 ; cf. 42,
2; [B. 220(100)]). a. with the Ind. Present; o. foil,
in the apodosis by the ind. pres. : Mt. ,\i.\. 10 (« οϋτωί
ίστΧν η αιτία . . . οΰ σνμφίρΐί -γαμήσαι) ; .\i. 1-4 ; Κο. νϋ.
1U, 20; viii. 25; xiv. 15; iCo. i.x. 17; (ial. ii. 18 ; v. IS;
Heb. xii. 8 ; .las. ii. 8 sq., etc. β. foil, by an Imperative
in the apodosis, — either the pres., as [Mt. xix. 1 7 L Tr
txt. WH txt.] ; Mk. iv. 23 ; vii. 1 6 R G L ; Jn. xv. 1 8 ; Acts
xiii. 15 ; xxv. 5 ; 1 Co. vii. 12, 15 ; Jas. iii. 14, etc. ; or the
aor., as Mt. v. 29, 30; viii. 31 ; xix. 17 [H ϋ Τ Tr mrg.
WII mrg.] ; Mk. ix. 22 [cf . B. 55 (48)] ; Lk. xxu. 6 7 (6(i) ;
1 Co. vii. 9. y. foil, by the Future in the apodosis : Lk.
xvi. 31 ; Acts V. 39 LTTrWII; xi.x. 39 ; lio. viii. 11,13;
2 Co. -xi. 30, etc. 8. foil, by the Perfect or the Aorist in
the apodosis, where it is declared that, if this or that is,
something else has or has not occurred : Mt. xii. 2C, 28 ;
Lk.xi. 20; 1 Co. xv. lu; Gal. ii. 21 ; Ko. iv. 14; 2 Pet. ii. 20.
(. foil, by the Imperfect, either with or without αχ, where
in the protasis something is simply assumed to be, but the
apodosis shows that what has been assumed cannot be
the case. Three passages falling under this head have
a doubtful or disputed text : ii ?χ£Τ€ (Τ Tr VVH, for the
R G L €ΐχΐτ€) . . • ελί'γ€Τ6 αν etc. Ijk. xvii. G ; tt , . . μνημο-
vfvovatv ( Τ 1 r, for It G L \\ II ΐμνημόνΐυον) . . . fi^ov αϊ/,
Heb. xi. 15 (where by the pres. tense tlii^ writer refers
to the language of the Jewish Fathers as at present re-
corded in the sacred Scriptures ; cf. τοιαντα λίγοντα vs.
14) ; ft τίκνα τοϋ Άβρ. eare (G L Τ Tr \λ'ΙΙ, for R ητ()
. . . iVoieiTf ([WH txt. ποι.] R L add άι/), .In. viii. 39; cf.
Bum. in Stud. u. Krit. for 1858 p. 474 sqq. [N. T. Gram.
§ 1 39, 26 ; but cf. Mey. on Lk. 1. c.]. But 2 Co. xi. 4 el . . .
κήρυσσα. . . . άν(ίχ£σθ( ('• Τ Tr Wll mrg. (άνίχ(σθ( L WII
t.xt.) must not be referred to this head ; here Paul in the
protasis supposes something which actually occurred,
in the apodosis censures a thing which actually occurred
viz. the readiness with which his readers gave ear con-
tinually (this is indicated by the impf.) to false teachers.
On the difficulty of the passage cf. Hols/en in the Zeit-
schr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1874, p. 1 sqq. ; [cf. also B.
226 (195) ; but W. 300 (287) and Mey. ad loc.]. ζ. with
a (|uestion as the apodosis : Mt. vi. 23 ; >In. v. 47 ; vii. 23 ;
viii. 46; 1 Pet. ii. 20. b. with the Ind. Future: Mt.
xxvi. 33 ; Jas. ii. 1 1 R G ; 1 Pet. ii. 20. c. with the Ind.
Perfect: Jn. xi. 12; Acts xvi. 15; Ro. vi. 5 ; xi. 6 (ivhere
after « supply \(ΐμμα yiynvfvir. what precedes), 2 Co. ii.
5; V. 16; vii. 14. d. with the Ind. Aorist, — foU.bythe
Pres. in the apodosis, Lk. xix. 8 ; Ro. iv. 2 ; xv. 27 ; foil.
by a question in the apodosis, Lk. xvi. 11, 12 ; Jn. xviii.
23 ; 1 Co. iv. 7 ; ix. 11 ; foil, by the Aor. in the apodosis.
Rev. XX. 15 ; by the Impv. in the apodosis, .Jn. .xviii. 23 ;
XX. 15; Ro. xi. 17 sq. ; 1 Tim. v. 9, 10; Philem. 18; by
the Fut. in the apodosis, .Tn. xiii. 32; xv. 20 ; Ileb. xii.
25 (where supjily ουκ (κφ(υξιΊμ£θα in the apodosis). 2.
Not infre(|uenlly, when a conclusion is drawn from some-
thing that is ([uite certain, « with the Indie, is used argu-
mentatively so as to be equiv. in sense to «jrW, (cf. the
use of Germ, ivenn) [cf. W. 448 (418)] : Mt. xii. 28 ; Lk.
xxiii. 31 ; Jn. vii. 4 ; Ro. v. 1 7 ; vi. 5 ; viii. 31 ; xi. 6, 12;
Col. ii. 20 ; iii. 1, etc. 3. When it is .«aid what would
have been, or what would be now or in the futiue, if
something else were or had been,ii is used with the luipf.,
Plpf., and Aor. ind.; in the apodosis it is followed in
direct disc, by Sv with the impf. or the Jilpf. or the aor. ;
sometimes Sv is omitted, (on the causes of the omission,
see B. § 139, 27) ; sometimes the apodosis is made a ques-
tion, [cf. W. 304 (285) sq.]. a. (t with the Impf., foil,
in the apodosis by ev with the impf. : Mt. x.viii. 30 ; Lk.
vii. 39 (ei oiros ην προφήτη;, (γίνωσκίν αν if this man were
a prophet, he would know) ; .In. v. 46; viii. 42 ; ix. 41 ;
XV. 19; 1 Co. xi. 31 ; Gal. i. 10; Heb. viii. 4, 7 (if . . .
were etc. there would not be sought etc. viz. in the O. T.
passage quoted vs. 8) ; by a (piestion in the apodosis :
1 Co. xii. 1 9 ; Heb. vii. 1 1 ; by άν with the aor., where
the Latin uses the plupf. subjunc. : Jn. xi. 32 {d ης iSc
if thou hadst been here, οϋκ άν άπϊθανί μου ό άδΕλφόί my
brother would not have died [Λvhen he did (cf. below) ;
B. § 139, 25 regards the impf. in prot. as expressing dur-
ation]) ; Jn. iv. 10; xviii. 30 (ii μή ην ούτος κακοποίός, ηνκ
αν σοι τταρΐ^ώκαμΐν αυτόν, we woukl not have delivered
him to thee); Acts xviii. 14; by ήι- with the plupf. : .In.
xi. 21 {el ης lihf . . . οϋκ αν ίτ(θνήκ(ΐ, ivould not have died
[and be now dead; cf. W. 304 (285) and see above; but
L Τ Tr txt. WH read the aor. here also]) ; 1 Jn. ii. 19.
b. ei with the Plpf., foil, in the apodosis by άν with the
]jll)f. or the aor., in the sense of the Latin plpf. subj. :
Mt. xii. 7 (fi fyvaiKeiTe if ye had understood i. e. if ye
knew, οϋκ &v κατ(8ικάσατ( τους αναίτιους ye would not
have condemned the guiltless) ; Mt. xxiv. 43 and Lk. xii.
39, (fi fj8(i if he had perceived i. e. if he knew, (-/ρη-γύρη-
σινιιν he would have watched, sc. before the thief had
api)roached [Tr txt. ΛλΤΙ om. άν in Lk. 1. c.]) ; Jn. iv. I ϋ ;
viii. 19; xiv. 7 [RGL]. c. with the Aor. in the same
sense as the Lat. plpf- subjunc. : ti ΐδόθη νόμος ■ ■ ■ όντως
&v CK νόμου ην ή δικαιοσύνη if a law had been given, right-
eousness would in truth come from the law, Gal. iii. 21 :
ίί αϋτοϋς Ίησοΰς κατίπαυσιν if Joshua had given them
rest, οϋκ άν nfp'i άλλης tXaXei he would not be speakin•;,
sc. in the passage i|uatcd, Heb. iv. 8 ; apodosis wiihout
3v, .In. XV. 22, see άν I. 3 p. 33 sq. 4. As in classic
Greek, a with the Ind. is often joined to verbs expressing
wonder, surprise, or other strong emotion (where ότι
might have been expected), when the thing spoken of is
either not (|uile certain, or, although certain, yet in ac-
cordance with the well-known Greek urbanity is repre-
170
sented as not quite free from doubt (Matthiae ii. p. 1474
s<i. ; Kuhner ii. p. 8S7 s<i. ; [Jelf § S04, 9] ; W. § tiO, 6 ; [B.
§ 1 89, .')2]). Thus it is joined - to tlie verb θανμάζω : ιθαΰ-
μαζ(ν. (I η&η τ(6νηκ(. for the matter had not yet been in-
vestigated: lieuee it is added ΐπηράτησιν αυτόν, tl η8η
[Κ ('• Τ Trmrii. Wll mn.:. πά\αι] aniOavfv, ^ik- xv. 44 ;
fii] iiiujiuifTf, ίϊ μισ(Ί νμ,ας ο κόσμος (tlie thing is certain)
1 .In. iii. 13 ; to llie iihrase άτηστον Kpivtrai: Acts ,\xvi.
«, (witli παράταξαν preceding, Lcian. dial. mort. 13, 1);
to καλύν (OTiv and \υσίτ(\(Ί : Mk. ix. 42 and Lk. xvii. 2
(Mt. xviii. 6 has σνμφίριι. Ινα) ; Mt. xxvi. 24 and Mk.
xiv. 21 ; to μϊ-γα ί'στί ; 1 Co. ix. 1 1 (on which see 8 below) ;
2 Co. xi. 1 5 ; τί Λλω, f ΐ lySij άνηφθη (το πϋρ), how would I
if (i. e. that) it were already kindled (but it has not yet
been kindled), Lk.xii.49 (al. al., but tf. Meyer adloc.; [so
B. 1. c. : cf. \V 448 (418) ; see rif, 1 e. y. fin.] ; Sir. xxiii.
14 6(\ήσ(ΐ{,(1 μη ί-γίννήθη!: [in addition to the other inter-
pretations noticed by Win. and Mey. 11. cc. mention may
be made of that which takes ίίλω as subjunc. : ivhal am
J to choose if (as I may well assume) it has already been
kindled; cf. Gree», 'Crit. Notes' ad loc.]). 5. Con-
trary to Greek usage, in imitation of the llebr. DK, (I with
the Indie, is so used in oaths and asseverations that by
aposiopesis the formula of imprecation [constituting
the apodosis] is suppressed (W. § 55 fin. ; B. § 149, 4) :
άμί)ν λ<γω νμ'ιν, el δοθησιται . ■ . σημίΐαν (fully expressed,
' Hiav God punish me, if it shall be given,' i. e. it shall by
no means be given), Mk. viii. 12; ωμοσα, tl elae\fvaovTat
(U την κατάπαυσϊν μου (fully, 'let my name no longer be
Jehovah, if they shall enter' etc.), Heb. iii. 11 ; iv. 3, fr.
Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 1 1 Sept. (llebr. DK, Gen. xiv. 23 ; Num.
xiv. 30 ; 1 S. xiv. 45, etc. ; we have the fuU expression
in 1 S. iii. 1 7 ; Cant. H. 7, etc.). 6. Sometimes, as in
classic Grk., after a |)rotasis with d and the Indie, the
apodosis is suppressed on account of mental agitation
and left to be supplied by the reader or the hearer from
the context, (cf. W. 599 sq. (.τ57)) : fi fjoOXfi napfveyKftv
TO ποτήρίον τοϋτο (sc. παρ(ν(γκ( [but here LTr^^lI
adopt the impv. in place of the inf.; yet cf. B. 396
(339)]), Lk. xxii. 42 ; el ie nveipa ίλάλησίν αΰτώ η Syye-
λοΓ, supply in place of an apodosis the question what
then ? Acts xxiii. 9 (the apod, added in Rec, μη θιο-
μαχωμ^ν, is spurious) ; fl ίίγνωί , . , τά irpos (Ιρηνην σου,
sc. iViVTfuft &v ί'μοί, l.k. xix. 42 [B. 396 (339)]. 7.
The conditional it is joined \vith the Ο pt at ive, to in-
dicate that the condition is merel}• though t of or
stated as a possibility, (cf. Klolz ad Devar. ii. 2 p.
491 sqq. ; AV. 293 (275) sq. ; B. § 139, 24). No example
of this construction is found in the Gospels ; very few
in the rest of the N. T. a. univ. in short intercalated
clauses : fl τϋχοι if it so chance, it may be, (see τυγχάνω,
2), 1 Co. xiv. 10; xv. 37; et dfXot το θίλημα τοϋ θ(οϋ, 1
Pet. iii. 17 (Rec. βίλα). b. where it indicates that
something may occur repeatedly (cf. Klotz 1. c. p.
492 sq.) : d κάΙ πάσχοιτί, 1 Pet. iii. 14 [cf. AV. u. s.]. c.
where the condition represents the mind and judsment
of others : (Ις ov ^βουλΐνοιηο [R G -σαντοΊ, fi δυναιντο
('|ώσαι [WH txt. ϊκσώσαι (q. v.)] το πλοίον, into which
bay [or rather ' upon which beach ' ; see ίξωθίω] they
determined to run the ship, if they could ; as though the
navigators had said among themselves, (ζώσομιν, tl δυνά-
μεθα. Acts xxvii. 39 ; so also et τι !χοί(ν πρύί μ(, if they
think they have anything against me. Acts xxiv. 19.
8. with the Subjunctive, when it is assumed that
something may take place, but whether it will in reality is
unknown before the event, in order to make the event
seem to be more certain than if eav were used (Klotz
I.e. p. 500 sqq.; W. 294 (276) ίίρ ; Β. § 139, 22) : «' . . .
θ(ρίσωμ(ν, 1 Co. ix. 1 1 Tdf. edd. 2, 7, [Lchm. mrg. ; al.
-σομ(ν] ; (Sept. Gen. xliii. 3 sq. ; Sir. xxii. 26 ; 4 Mace,
vi. 20). But see III. below, under tl μή, el μητι, el πω?,
elre . . . eire, f Γ Tir.
II. el Interrogative, whether. " The conditional
particle gets this force if a question is asked about any-
tliing, whether it is or is not so, and that about which
the question is put is uttered as it were conditionally "
(Klotz 1. c. p. 508; [W. § 57, 1 ; Bttm. 248 (214) sq(i ;
254 (218) sq.]). 1. As in Grk. writ, in an i ndirec t
question after verbs of seeing, asking, deliberating,
knowing, saying, etc. a. with the Indic. Present:
as ούδ' ft πν€ΰμα αγιον eariv, ηκοΰσαμεν (prop., acc. to
the conditional force of the particle, ' ;/' there is [i. e. has
appeared, been given ; cf. fi^t, I. 2] a Holy Spirit, we did
not even hear'), Acts xix. 2 ; ίΒωμ(ν, el epxerai, Mt. xxvii.
49; Mk. XV. 36; /SuvXeiitTat [T WU L mrg. -σΓται], ft
δυνατοί ίστιν, Lk. .\iv. 31 ; Iva emr/s, el σΰ el, Mt. x.xvi.
63 ; [ifa γνώτην δοκιμην ΰμων el (\\ Η mrg. ij) . . υπήκοοι
ioTe, 2 Co. ii. 9 (see 117/. Intr. § 404)]; after ονκ οιδα,
Jn. ix. 25; after Kpivare, Acts iv. 19; 8oκιμάζeτf [(?),
TTftpdffTf ], 2 Co. xiii. 5. b. with the Indic. Future
[cf. W. 300 (282); B. § 139, 61 b.] : if^(9,Tt, el ,φα
άφeθησeτai σοι. Acts viii. 22 ; Tt οιδας, f i . . . σό^σe^ς, 1
Co. Λ'ϋ. 16 ; παρ€τηρονν, el θeρa^τevσeL [Ttlf. -TTfvft], Mk. iii.
2 and in Lk. vi. 7 [R (ί Wll mrg.] ; ηλθev (sc. to see), ft
άρα Tl ίίμι^σίΐ, Mk.xi. 13. c. with the I η die. A orist :
οϋκ οιδα. f ί τίνα άλλον (βάπτισα, whether I baptized, 1 Co.
i. 16 ; ϊπηρώτησαν, ei πάΚαι [L I γ txt. λλ Η txt. ήδη^ άπί•
Bavev, whether he were long dead, Mk. xv. 44 ; fiVf ^ot,
ft . . . άπeδoσθe, Acts v. 8. d. with the Subjunctive
Aorist [cf. B. 255 sq. (220) ; AV. 298 (280) sq.] : διώκω,
el και καταΚάβω I press on (sc. πeψώμevos or σκοπών, try-
ing to see), whether I may also lay hold, Phil. iii. 1 2.
So .Si is used in Latin, e. g. Nep. vit. Hann. 8 Hannibal
. . . Africam accessit in finibus Cyrenaeorum (sc. exper-
turus), si forte Carthaginienses ad bellurn possent in<iuci ;
Caes. b. g. 1, 8, 4 si [)errumpere possent, conati; add
Caes. b. g. 2, 9, 1. Cf. Kuhner ii. p. 1032 sq. ; [.Jelf
§ 877 b.]. 2. Contrary to the usage of Grk. auth.,
like the Hebr. DK and interrog. Π, it is used in the Sept.
and the N. T. (esp. by Luke) also in direct ques-
tions (cf. the coUoq. use of the Germ, nb ; e. g. ob ich's
wohl thun solll) ; cf. W. § 57, 1 ; B. 248 (214), and, in
opposition to those who have striven to absolve the sa-
cred writers from this misuse of the particle (esp. Fritz-
sche and Meyer [see the latter's note on Mt. xii. 10 and
Lk. xiii. 23 ; he tjuotes with approval the language of
€t
171
ei
Ast (Lexicon Platon. τοί. i. 601), 'dubitanter inter-
rogat, ita ut interrogatio videatur directa esse']), cf.
Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 30 sqq. : — («rf
Tis αντώ^ κΰμΐΐ, el uXiyoi ot σωζόμενοι ; Lk. xiii. 23 ; Kvpie^
el πατάξομα/ ep μαχαί(,α [-ρ;; Τ Tr \\Ή] ; Lk. xxii. 49 ;
Kvpie, fi . . . άποκαβιστάν€ΐς τ. βασίλΐίαν; Acts i. 6 ; cf. be-
sides, Mt. xii. 10 ; .xix. 3 ; Jlk. viii. 23 (ace. to the read-
ing of [Tdf. 2, 7] Tr [mrg. WII txt.] « τι βλίπα: for
11 G L Τ Tr txt. WH mrg. /SXiVf») ; Acts xix. 2, etc. (Gen.
xvii. 1 7 ; xliii. 6 ; 1 S. x. 24, etc. ; in the O. T. Apocr. 2
Mace. vii. 7 ; xv. 3 ; 4 Mace, xviii. 1 7 fr. Ezek. xxxvii.
3 Sept. ; Tob. v. 5).
III. el with other particles and with the indef. pron.
Tif, t'i. 1. ίϊ άρα, see Spa, 1. 2. etye, see ye, 3 c.
3. fi Se και, a. but i/also, so that και belongs to some
word that follows : Lk. xi. 18 (but if Satan also), b.
but though, but even if, so that και belongs to ίί : 1 Co. iv,
7 ; 2 Co. iv. 3 ; T. 16 [R G ; al. om. Se] ; xi. 6 ; see 6 below.
4. el de μη, but if not ; if it is or 7vere otherwise, [B. 393
(.■f3lj sij.), cf. 345 (297) ; W. as below] : Jn. xiv. 2 (et 8e
μή, sc. ούτω; ην), 11 (ei Se μή, sc. e'μoΊ niirreiiere, i. e. my
words). As in these passages so generally the phrase
stands where a word or clause must be repeated in
thought from what immediately precedes; it thus has
the force of the Lat. alioquin, otherwise, or else, [W. 583
(543)]: Rev. ii. 5, 16; also after negative declarations,
Mk. ii. 21 sq. ; cf. Matthiae § 617 b. 5. el Se μήye, see
■yf, 3 d. 6. (I και, a. if even, if also, {cl. el he καΐ, Ά Ά.,
[and 7 below]) : 1 Co. vii. 21 [cf. Mey. ad loc. ; Bp.
Lghtft. on Philem. p. 324] ; 2 Co. xi. 15. b. though, al-
though: Lk. xi. 8; 2 Co. iv. 16; vii. 8, 12; Phil. ii. 17;
Col. ii. 5 [fi yap και] ; Heb. vi. 9 ; with the optat. 1 Pet.
iii. 14; see I. 7 b. above. 7. κάί el, even if: Mk. xiv.
29 [T Tr WH el καΐ] ; 1 Pet. iii. 1 ; cf. Klotz 1. c. p. 519
[who says, "In el και the conditional particle f ί has
the greater force ; in και ίί the conjunctive particle
και Hence και el is used of what is only assumed to
be true ; ei και, on the other hand, of what i s as it is said
to be." Baumlein (Griech. Partikeln, p. 151) says, " In
ίί και the και naturally belongs to the conditional clause
and is taken up into it, if even ; in the combination και
ίί the και belongs to the consequent clause, even if.
Sometimes however the difference disappears." Kriiger
(§ 65, 5, 15) : " with καΐ el, the leading clause is regarded
as holding under every condition, even the one
stated, which appears to be the most extreme ; with el
και the condition, which may also come to pass, is re-
garded as a matter of indifference in reference
to the leading clause; " Sauppe (on Dem. 01. ii. § 20) is
very explicit : " και el and ίί και both indicate that some-
thing conflicts with what is expressed in the leading
clause, but that that is (or is done) notwithstanding, και
el, however, represents the thing adduced in the condi-
tional sentence to be the only thing conflicting ; but when
the conditional particle precedes (el και), the represen-
tation is that something which is (or may be) accom-
panied by many others (και) conflicts ineffectually. Ac-
cordingly the phrase και el greatly augments the force of
what follows, ίί και lays less emphasis upon it ; although
it is evident that ίί καί can often be substituted for κ<ύ
el." Cf. Herm. Vig. p. 829 sq. ; W. 444 (413) ; Ellic. on
Phil.ii. 17; Schmalfeld, Griech. Syntax, §41; Paley,
Grk. Particles, p. 31]. 8. el μή, a. in a conditional
protasis, with the same sequence of moods and tenses
as the simple ίί, see I. above, if not, unless, except, [W.
477 (444) sqq. ; B. 345 (297)]: Mt. xxiv. 22 ; Jn. Lx. 33 ;|
XV. 22. 24 ; Ro. vii. 7, etc. b. it serves, with the entire
following sentence, to limit or correct what has just been
said, only, save that, (Lat. nisi quod), [B. 359 (308)] : Mk.
vi. 5 ; 1 Co. vii. 17 (where Paul by the addition ίί μή
ίκάστω κτλ. strives to prevent any one in applying what
had been said a Uttle while before, viz. ού δeδoύλωτaι . . .
ev ToiovTois to his own case, from going too far) ; in ironi-
cal answers, unless perchance, save forsooth that, (Kiih-
ner § 577, 7 ; [Jelf § 860, 5 Obs.]): «' μή χρηζομιν κτλ.
2 Co. iii. 1 Rec. c. ίί μή very often coalesce into one
particle, as it were, which takes the same verb as the
preceding negation : unless, i. q. except, save, [Kuhner
§577,8; B. 359(308)]; o. univ.: Mt. xi. 27; xii. 39;
Mk. ii. 26 ; viii. 14 ; Jn. iii. 13 ; Ro. vii. 7 ; xiii. 1, 8 ; 1
Co. viii. 4 ; xii. 3 ; 2 Co. xii. 5, etc. as in classic Greek,
μανοί, μόνον, is added pleonastically : Mt. xvii. 8 ; xxi.
1 9 ; xxiv. 3G ; Acts xi. 1 9 ; Phil. iv. 15; Rev. xiii. 1 7, etc.
β. after negatives joined to nouns it is so used as to re-
fer to the negative alone (hence many have regarded it
as used for αλλά [i.e. as being not exceptive but ad-
versative]), and can be rendered in Lat. sed lantum,
but only : Mt. xii. 4 (ουκ e^ov ήν αντω φaye'ίv ov&e toIs μ€τ
αΰτοϋ, el μή Tois ίίρίϋσι μόνοις, as if ονκ ίξον ήν φayeΊv
alone preceded) ; Lk. iv. 26 sq. ; Ro. xiv. 14; Rev. ix.
4 ; xxi. 27 (eav μή is so used in Gal. ii. 16 ; on Gal. i. 19
see 'lOKcojSos, 3); cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 195;
[see eav, I. 3 c. and reff.]. γ. when preceded by the in-
terrogative τις in questions having a negative force : Mk.
ii. 7 ; Lk. v. 21 ; Ro. xi. 15 ; I Co. ii. 11 ; 2 Co. ii. 2 ; .xii.
13; Heb. iii. 18; 1 Jn.ii. 22; v. 5; (Xen. oec. 9, 1 ; Ar-
stph. eqq. 615). S. with other conjunctions: el μή Ίνα,
Jn. X. 1 ; el μή όταν, Mk. i.x. 9 ; τι eariv, el μή ότι etc., 2
Co. xii. 13 ; Epli. iv. 9. t. it has its own verb, and
makes a phrase by itself : S ουκ eariv άλλο, ίί μή Tives
elatv οί TapaaoOvTes υμάς which means nothing else, save
that there are some who trouble you. Gal. i. 7 [so
Winer (Com. ad loc.) et al. ; but see Meyer]. d. eKTos
el μή, arising from the blending of the two expressions
ίί μή and eKTot el, Uke the Lat. nisi si equiv. to praeter-
quam si, except in case, except: 1 Tim. v. 19; with the
indie, aor. 1 Co. xv. 2; with the subjunc. pres. 1 Co. xiv.
5; (Lcian. de luctu c. 19; dial, meret. 1, 2, etc.). Cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 459 ; W. § 65, 3 c. ; [B. index s. v. eVros
el μή]. 9. el μήν, a.fsuredly, surely, in oaths: Heb. \χ
14 L Τ Tr WH (for R G ή μήν [q. v.]) and several times
in Sept. as Ezek. xxxiii. 27; xxxiv. 8; [cf. xxxvi. 5;
xxxviii. 19 ; 1 K. xxi. (xx.) 23], etc. ; here, if ft did not
come from ή by itacism, ίί μήν must be e.xplained as a
contusion of the Hebraistic et μή (see I. 5 above) and
the Grk. formula of asseveration ή μήν ; cf. Bleek on Heb.
α
17-2
eiSto
vol. ii. 2 p. 248 sq(|., and what Fritzsche says on the
other side, Com. on Bar. ii. Ji); .ludilli i. 12; [if. Kneu-
eker on Bar. 1. c. ; B. 359 (308) ; Til/. Proleg. p. U'J ; 117/.
App. p. 1 jl ; B. D. s. v. New Testament, 1. 31j. 10.
« μη τι or /ιήτι, unless in some respect, unless perchance,
unless indeed : ironically, with the indie, pres. 2 Co. -xiii.
5; hesitatingly, with the subjunc. aor. Lk. ix. 13; cf.
Meyer ad loc. [also W. 294 (276); B. 221 (191)]; d μή
τι άν: 1 Co. vii. 5, see άν, IV'. 11. ei oi (fully discussed
by W. § .").5, 2 c. and B. 315 (297) siii).). if not; this com-
bination is used much more freijucntly in the N. 'Γ. tlian
in the more elegant Grk. auth. ; it (litters from fi μή in
this, that in the latter μή belongs to the particle d, while
in fi ϋύ the oi refers to some following word and denies
it emphatically, not infrequently even coalescing with it
into a single idea. a. when the idea to which ου belongs
is antithetic a. to a positive term, either preceding
or following : cl be oi μοιχινα! φον(ν(ΐ! 8(. -las. ii. 1 1
[in R G the fiit.] ; ft yap ό θ(6ς . . . ονκ ΐφΐίσατο, . . .
aWa . . . napt8wic€v fls κρίσιν, 2 Pet. ii. 4 S([. ; cl kul ου
8ώσ(ΐ . . . did yf . ■ . δώσ(ΐ, Lk. .\i. 8 ; ft ού ποιώ . . . ft dc
ΐΓοιω, 'In. \. 37 sq. ; ft yufj ίττισπίκτί . . . , f i Sf . . . ot• 7ti-
oTfCfTf, Jn. V. 4t) sq. ; add, Mk. .\i. 26 R G L ; Ro. viii.
9 ; 1 Co. i.\. 2 ; .\i. 6 ; Jas. iii. 2. β. to some other idea
ivhieh is negative (formally or virtually) : tl . . . ουκ
άχούουσιρ,ουδΐ . . . π^ισθήσονται, Lk. xvi. 31 ; ft . , . ουκ
ίφΐίσατο, ot-Sf σον φΐΐσ^ται [Rcc. -σηται], Ro. xi. 21 ; add,
1 Co. XV. 13, 15-17 ; J Th. iii. 10; foil, in the apodosis
by a question having the force of a negative : Lk. xvi.
11 Sip ; Jn. iii. 12; 1 Tim. iii. 5. γ. the oi denies with
emphasis the idea to which it belongs : καλόν ήι> αίτω, d
ουκ (γίννήθη, good were it for him not to have been born.
Ml. xxvi. 24 ; Mk. xiv. 21. 8. the whole emphasis is
placed on the negative itself : fi σϋ ουκ ft ό Χριστός, J η.
i. 25. b. the oi coalesces, as it were, with the word to
which it belongs into a single idea : ft 8f oiic ϊγκρατιΰον-
ται, if they are incontinent, 1 Co. vii. 9 ; fi rtf τώι/ ιδίωκ
oi προνο(ϊ [or -firat Τ Tr txt. WII mrg.], nci/lecis, 1
Tim. V. 8 ; add, Lk. xiv. 2(i ; 1 Co. xvi. 22 ; Rev. xx. 15,
etc. 12. ft οΰν, if then : Mt. vi. 23 ; vii. 1 1 ; Lk. xi. 13,
30; .In. xiii. 14; xviii. 8; Acts xi. 17; Col. iii. 1 ; Philem.
17. [On fc'/teVoUKSce/ii'i'II. 4.] 13. fiTrf/j [soT WII
(exc. in 2 Co. v. 3 mrg.), but L Tr fi nep; ef. W. 45 ;
Lipsius, Gram, l.'nters. p. 123], («' and Trep, and this ap-
parently from π(ρί), prop, if on the whole ; if only, pro-
dded that, is used " of a thing which is assumed to be,
l)!it whether rightly or wrongly is left in doubt" {Herm.
ail Vig. p. 831, [.so W. 448 "(417); but cf. Baumlein,
(iriech. Partikeln, p. 202 (cf. 64 bot.) ; K/otz ad Devar. ii.
2 p. 528, and esp. s. v. fiyf (in yt, 3 c.) and the reff. to
Mey., Lghtft., Ellic, there given]) : Ro. viii. !», 1 7 ; 1 Co.
\iii. 5 ; XV. 15 ; 1 Pet. ii. 3 (where L Τ Tr WII «'); by
a species of rhetorical politeness it is used of that about
which there is no doubt : 2 Th. i. 6 ; Ro. iii. 30 L Τ Tr
W II ; 2 Co. V. 3 L Tr WH mrg. 14. ct wws [LTr
\VH] or tΐπωs [G T], if in any way, if by any means, if
possibly: with the optat. pres. (see 1. 7 abo\e). Acts
xxvii. 12: interrogatively, with the indie, fut. Uo. i. 10;
with the subjime. aor., so that before tl the word σκοπώ»
or π(ΐρώμ<νοί must be mentally supplied (see 11. 1 d.
above): Ro. xi. 14 ; Phil. iii. 11. 15. ftxf . . . ftrf,
a. whether . . . or [as disjunc. conjunc, sice . . . sice; cf.
W. 440 (409 sq.) ; B. 221 (191)], without a verb follow-
ing : Ro. xii. 6-8 ; 1 Co. iii. 22 ; viii. 5 ; 2 Co. v. 9 sq. ;
Phil. i. IS, 20, 27 ; 2 Th. ii. 15 ; Col. i. 16, 20 ; 1 Pet. ii.
13 s({. ; firf ovv . . . ftrf, 1 Co. xv. 11 ; foil, by the indie,
pres., 1 Co. xii. 26 ; xid. 8 ; 2 Co. i. 6 ; foil, by the sul»-
june. pres. 1 Th. v. 10, where the u.se of the subjunc.
was occasioned by the subjunc. ζήσωμιν in the leading
clause; cf. W. 294 (27G): B.221 (191). b. trhcther ...or
[as indirect interrogatives, utrum . . . an ; cf. B. 250(215)]
(see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Matthiae p. 1476 stp) : after
ούκ ui8a, 2 Co. xii. 2 sq. 16. fi tis, ei rt : exx. of this
coudjiuation have already been given among the preced-
ing; here may be added ft rtf tTtpns, fi τι mpov, and if
(there be) any other jienson or thing, — a phrase used as
a conclusion after the mention or enumeration of several
particuhirs liclonging to the .«ame class (in the classics
ft Tty fi'Wos, el Kin Tts «λλοϊ, κα\ ft τι άλλο, etc., in lldt.,
Xen., Plat., al.) : Ro. xiii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 10; fi Tit with
subjunc. pres. Rev. xi. 5 Rec. ; with the subjunc. aor.,
ibid. Τ Tr WII txt.
[ctYf, see ye, 3 c]
f ISe'a, -as, ij, Mt. xxviii. 3 Τ Tr WII, a poet, form for l&ea,
(J. V. [cf. WII. App. p. 153], (Bar. vi. [ep. Jer.] 62 ; Arstph.
Thesm. 438 var.). Cf. B. 5 ; [W. 48 (47) ; see ft, i]."
itSos, -out, TO, (ΕΙΔΩ), in Sept. chiefly for ΠΚ^Ο and
"^ΚΠ ; prop, that which strikes the eye, which is exposed
to λ lew ; 1. the external appearance, form, fiyure,
shape, (so fr. Horn, down) : ,In. v. 37; σωματικά eibei,
Lk. iii. 22 ; το ftoos του προσώπου αϋτυν, Lk. i,\. 29; δια
eiSuvs, as encompassed with the visible appearance (of
eternal things), (see διό, A. I. 2), 2 Co. v. 7, — com. ex-
plained, by sight i. e. beholding (Luth. : im Schauen) ;
but no ex. has yet been adduced fr. any Grk. writ, in
ivhich f tSot is used actively, like the l.at. species, of vision ;
{στόμα κατά στόμα, ev ei^ ei, κα\ ου δι* οραμάτων καί ενυ-
πνίων, Clem, homil. 17, 18; cf. Xum. xii. 8 .Se])t.). 2.
farm, kiml : άποπαντός eihovi πονηρού απί\(σθ€, i. e. from
every kind of evil or wrong, 1 Th. v. il [ef. πονηρός, sub
fin.]; (.loseph. antt. 10, 3, 1 παν tiSos πονηρίας. The
Grks., esp. Plato, oppose το fiSor to τό yffor, as the Lat.
does species to genus. Cf. Schmidt ch. 182, 2).*
ίϊδω, ϊδω. Lat. video, [Skr. vid, pf. veda k-nov; vind-a-
mi find, (cf. Vedas) ; Curtius § 282], an obsol. form of
the present tense, the place of which is supplied by όράω.
The tenses coming from f ί'δω and retained by usage form
two families, of Avhich one signifies to see, the oilier to
ktiow.
L 2 aor. elhov, the com. form, with the term, of the
1 aor. (see reff. s. v. άπίρχομαι, init.) eiSa, Rev. xvii. 3
L, 6 LTTr; 1 pers. plur. e'iSapev, LTTr WII in Acts
iv. 20; Mk. ii. 12; Tr WII in Mt. xxv. 37 ; WH in Vt.
XXV. 38; Mk. ix. 38; Lk. ix. 49; 3 pers. plur. elSav,
Τ WH in Lk. ix. 32 ; TrAVII in Lk. x. 24 : Acts vi. 15;
xxviii. 4 ; Τ Tr WII in Mk. vi. 50 ; L Τ Tr WH in Jn
eiBa
173
i. 39 (40) ; Acts L\. 35 ; xii. 16 ; WH in Mk. vi. 33 ; add
iSav Tdf . in Mt. xiii. 1 7 ; Lk. x. 24 ; l8ov (an Epic form,
cf. Matthiae i. p. 564 ; [Veitch p. 215]; very freq. in
Sept. and in 1 Mace, cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 54 ; on
tlie freq. interchange of Ιδον and elSov in codd., cf . Jacobs
ad Achill. Tat. 2, 24 ; [IKi/. App. pp. 162, 164; Tdf.
Sept. Proleg. p. Ix. ; N. T. Proleg. p. 89; B. 39 (34)]),
Tdf. in Rev. iv. 1 ; vi. 1, 2,5, 8, 9,12; vii.l.etc; 3 pers.
sing, ififv, Tdf. in Lk. v. 2 ; Rev. i. 2 ; 2 pers. plur. iSfrc,
Phil. i. 30 Rec. ; 3 pers. plur. ί'δον, Tdf. in [Lk. ii. 20] ;
Jn. xix. 6; subjiinc. ΐδω; impv. i'if (Attic ίδί',ί'ί. VV. § 6,
1 a. ; [B. 62 (54) ; Gotllinij, Accentl. 52]), [2 pers. plur.
ISfTf, Jn. i. 39 (40) RGL]; mi.lbe'iv, ptcp. ιδών; (Sept.
mostly for ΠΧΐ, sometimes for ΠΙΠ and i'T) ; to see (have
seen), be seeing (saw), i.e. 1. lo perceive (with the
eyes ; Lat. conspicere, Germ, erblicken) ; a. univ. τινά
or W : Mt. ii. 2 ; iv. 16 ; xiv. 14 ; xxviii. 6 ; Mk. i. 10, 16 ;
ii. 14 ; Lk. v. 26 ; vii. 22 ; Jn. i. 47 (4s) sq. ; vi. 26 ; xix.
6 ; Acts ix. 35 ; xii. 16 ; Gal. i. 19 ; 1 Tim. vi. 16, ami very
often. oiSinoTf οϋτωι ίΐδαμ^ν we never saw in such fash-
ion, i. e. such a sight never befell us, Mk. ii. 12, old Germ.
also hat man r.icht gesehen, seil etc. ; cf. Kuinoel ad Mat.
p. 280 ed. 4. ISe'iv τι and άκοίσαί Tt are conjoined in Lk.
vii. 22 ; Acts xxii. 14 ; 1 Co. ii. 9 ; Jas. v. 11 ; iSelv and
ISf'ii/ Tt are also used by those to whom something is pre-
sented in vision, as the author of the Apocalypse relates
that he saw this or that: Rev. i. 12, 17; iv. 1 [here βιδον
<t. ιδού a formula peculiar to Rev. ; see ιδού, sub fin.] ; v.
1 sq. 6, 11; vi. 9; vii. 1,9, etc. ; Jn. xii. 41; l&fiv ϊίρπμα,
Actsx.l7; xvi. 10; ίδίϊχ eV όράματι, Acts ix. 12 [R G] ;
X. 3 ; (V rfi opaafi, Rev. ix. 1 7 ; elliptically ISeiv τι ίκ Tivot
sc. ίκττορίυθίυ. Rev. xvi. 13, cf. i. 16 ; Hebraistically (on
which see W. § 45, « ; B. § 144, 30) ιδώ» ίΐ'δον / have
surelij seen : Acts vii. 34 after Ex. iii. 7. Frequent in
the historical books of the N. T. is the ptcp. Ιδών, IbovTes-,
continuing the narrative, placed before a finite verb, and
either having an ace. added, as in Mt. ii. 10 ; iii. 7 ; v. 1 ;
viii. 34 ; Mk. v. 22 ; ix. 20 ; Lk. ii. 48 ; vii. 13 ; Jn. v. 6 ;
vi. 14 ; Acts xiii. 12 ; xiv. 11, etc. ; or the ace. is omitted,
as being evident from the context : Mt. ix. 8, 1 1 ; xxi.
20; Mk. X. 14; Lk. i. 12; ii. 17; Acts iii. 12; vii. 31, etc.
b. with the ace. of a pers. or a thing, and a ptcp. [cf.
W. §45,4 a.]: Mt. iii. 7, 16; viii. 14 ; Mk. i. 16 ; vi. 33 ;
Lk. i.\. 49 ; .xxi. 2; Jn. i. 33, 47 (48) sq. ; Acts iii. 9;
xi. 13; 1 Co. viii. 10 ; 1 Jn. v. 16; Rev. ix. 1, and often.
c. foil, by oTi : Mk. ii. 16 L Τ Tr WII ; ix. 25 ; Jn. vi.
22, 24, etc. d. foil, by an indirect question with the
indie: with tij, Lk. xix. 3; with τι, Mk. v. 14; with
πηΚίκος, Gal. vi. II. e. (ρχου και ISe, a formula of invi-
tation, the use of which leaves the object of the seeing to
be inferred by the hearers from the matter under consid-
eration : Jn. xi. 34 (35) ; i. 46 (47) (here ίδ< is e(iuiv. to
//// seeing learn, sc. that Jesus is the Messiah), and Grsb.
in Rev. vi. 1, 5; plur. Jn. i. 39 (40) (where ΤΤγΛΥΙΙ
ϊμχ. κ- όψ(σ•5ί). The Rabbins use the phrases "'ΠΙ ΧΓ»
and ΠΧ'ίΙ N3 to command attention. f. Ιδΰν used
absol. and niartifiv are contrasted in Jn. .xx. 29. 2.
like the Lat. video, to perceive by antj of the senses : Mt.
xxvii. 54; Mk. xv. 39; Lk. xvii. 15. 3. univ. to p'r-
ceive, notice, discern, discover: την ιτίστιν αντων, Mt. ix. 2 ;
Tof ίνθυμήσα.! αντϋν, ib. 4 (where L Tr WH txt. «ΐδώί
for Ιδών) ; τ. fiiaXoyiff/ioc της καρδίας αύτόιν, Lk. ix. 47 [Τ
WH txt. Tr mrg. ίίδώϊ] ; 'iSe with ace. of the thing, Ro.
xi. 22 ; foil, by on, Mt. xxvii. 3, 24 ; Acts xii. 3 ; xiv. 9 ;
xvi. 19 ; Gal. ii. 7, 14 ; ϊδί, ότι, Jn. vii. 52 ; iSe'iv τίνα, ort,
Mk. xii. 34 [Trbr. the ace.]. 4. to see, i. e. to turn
the eyes, the mind, the attention to anything ; a. to
pail attention, observe : foil, by tl interrog. Mt. xxvii. 49 ;
by ποτ-απόϊ, 1 Jn. iii. 1. b. nepi Tims (cf. Lat. videre de
aliqua re), to see about somelhing [A. V. lo consider of~],
i. e. to ascertain what must be done about it, Acts xv. 6.
o. lo inspect, examine: τι, Lk. xiv. 18. d. τινά, to look
at, behold : Jn. xxi. 21 ; Mk. viii. 33. 5. to experience,
τΊ, any state or condition [cf. W. 17] : as τον θάνατον, Lk.
ii. 26 ; Heb. xi. 5, (Joseph, antt. 9, 2, 2 [οΓδίΐ/]), cf. Jn.
viii. 51 (Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 49) ; ττ)ν διαφθοράν, to
pass into a state of corruption, be dissolved. Acts ii. 27,
31; xiii. 35-37, (Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10); την βασι^.τ. ^cou,
to partake of salvation in the kingdom of God, Jn. iii.
3 ; πίνθο!, Rev. xviii. 7 ; την δύξαν τοϋ θιοϋ, by some mar-
vellous event get a signal experience of the beneficent
power of God, Jn. xi. 40 ; στ£νΩχωρίας, 1 Mace. xiii. 3,
(άΧόχου χάριν, Horn. II. 11, 243) ; on the same use of the
verb ΠΝ1 and the Lat. videre, cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. iii.
p. 1246. ήμίραν, to live to see a day (a time) and en-
joy the blessings it brings: ήμίρας αγαθά:, 1 Pet. iii. 10
fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13 ; την ήμίραν ΐμήν (Christ's lan-
guage) the time when I should exercise my saving power
on earth, Jn. viii. 56 ; (Ιδ( sc. τ. ήμ- ΐμήν, from the abode
of the blessed in paradise he in spirit saw my day, ibid,
(see άγαλλιάω, sub fin.) ; ίπιθυμήσιτι μίαν των ημερών . . .
iSeiv, ye will wish that even a single day of the blessed
coming age of the Messiah may break upon your
wretched times, Lk. xvii. 22; so in Grk. writ., esp. the
poets, ημαρ, ήμίραν iSf'iv, in Latin videre diem ; cf. Kuinoel
on Jn. viii. 56. 6. with ace. of pers. to see i. e. have
an interview with, to visit : Lk. viii. 20 ; Jn. xii. 21 ; Acts
xvi. 40; xxviii. 20 ; Ro. i. 11 ; 1 Co. xvi. 7 ; Phil. i. 27 ;
1 Th. iii. 6 ; 2 Tim. i. 4 ; 3 Jn. 14; to πρόσωπον twos : 1 Th.
ii. 17; iii. 10, (Lcian. dial. d. 24, 2 [cf. Rutherford on Babr.
11, 9]) ; with an ace. of place, to visit, go to : Acts xix. 21.
[Syn. : ' When f ίδοι/, iSe'iv are called " momentary preter-
ites," it must not be supposed that tliereby a quickly -past
action is designated ; these forms merely present the action
without reference to its duration.... Tlie un-
augmented moods, too, are not exclusively past, hut jireseut
or future as well, — the last most decidedly in the imperative.
Now it is obvious that when a perception is stated without
regard to its duration, its form or mode i-auuot have
prominence ; hence iSdv is much less physical than 6pav.
iSeTv denotes to perceive with the eyes; όράν [q. v.), on the
other hand, to see, i. e. it marks the use and action of the
eye as the principal thing. Perception as denoted by iSeiv.
when conceived of as completed, permits the sensuous ele
ment to he forgotten and .abides merely as an activity of the
soul; for οϊ5ο, ci'SeVai, signifies not "to have seen," but " ίο
know."' Schmidt ch. xi. Comp. : air-, iv-, προ-, συν-, ΰπιρ-
€ϊδθ".1
ΪΒω
174
είκοσι
Π. 2 pf. οιδίΐ, o'Sas (1 Co. vii. 16; Jn. xxi. 15, for the
more com. οισθα). οΐίαμιν (for ίσμ-ίν, more com. in Grk.),
o'SaTf (tffTf, the mori- usual classic form, is found only in
Kph. V. 5 G L Τ Tr Wll and Heb. xii. 1 7, [prob. also in
Jas. i. 19 ace. to the reading of L Τ Tr Wii ; but see be-
low]), oiSaai (and once the Attic ϊσασι, Acts xxvi. 4),
impv. urrf, once, Jas. i. 19 L Τ Tr WII, [but see above],
subjune. «δώ, inf. elStvai, ptcp. «δώί, (Ιδυ'ια (Mk. v. 33;
Acts V. 7) ; [ilpf. jiSfii/, 2 pcrs. everywhere ,^Sfir, 3 pers.
jfSei, plur. 2 pers. r/Sfire, 3 pers. ηδ€ΐσαν (for the more com.
'{,ϋ(σαν [Veitch p! 218; B. 43 (3.-i)J); fut. (Ιδήσω (Ileb.
viii. II) ; cf. VV. 84 (81) ; B. .'il (44); Sept. chiefly for
^'T ; like the Lat. noi>i it has the signification of a pres-
ent lo know, undcr.itand ; and the plpf. the signif. of an
impf.; [cf. W. 274 (257)].
1. to know : with ace. of the thing, Mt. xxv. 13 ; Mk.
X. 1 9 ; Jn. X. 4 ; xiil. 1 7 ; xiv. 4 ; Acts v. 7 ; Ro. vii. 7 ; 1
Co. ii. 2 ; Rev. ii. 2, 9, etc. ; τοΟτο [Rec. ; al. νάντα] foil.
by oTi etc. Jude 5 ; with ace. of pers., Mt. xxvi. 72, 74 ;
Jn. i. 31 ; vi. 42 ; Acts iii. IG ; 2 Co. v. 16, etc. ; τόν Sfov,
Tit. i. 16, cf. .In. viii. 19; xv. 21 ; Gentiles are called o!
μη fihUTd T. θ(ύν in 1 Th. iv. 5 ; 2 Th. i. 8, cf. Gal. iv. 8 ;
the predicate of the person .is added (as often in Attic),
elbius avTov iiubpa δίκαίον, SO. όντα, Mk. vi. 20 [B. 304
(2G1 )] ; in the form of a ptcp. 2 Co. xii. 2. to an accus.
of the object by attraction ( W. § 66, 5 a.; B. 377 (323))
an epexegetical clause is added [cf. esp. B. 301 (258)],
with oTi, 1 Co. xvi. 15 ; 2 Co. xii. 3 sq. ; Acts xvi. 3 ; or
an indirect question [B. 250 (215) sq.], Mk. i. 24 ; Lk.
iv. 34; xiii. 25, 27; Jn. vii. 27; ix. 29. elSivat is used
with the ace. and inf. in Lk. iv. 41 ; 1 Pet. v. 9 ; foil, by
ort, Mt. ix. 6 ; Jn. xix. 35 ; Acts ii. 30 ; Ro. v. 3, and very
often ; οϊδαμ(ν foil, by on is not infrequently, so far as
the sense is concerned, equiv. to it is well known, ac-
knowledged : Mt. xxii. 16 ; Lk. xx. 21 ; Jn. iii. 2 ; ix. 31 ;
Ro. ii. 2 ; iii. 19 ; vii. 14 ; viii. 22, 28 ; 2 Co. v. 1 ; 1 Tim. i.
8 ; 1 Jn. iii. 2 ; v. 20 ; cf. Lightfoot [in his Horae Hebr.
et Talm.] and Baumg.-Crusius on Jn. iii. 2. freq., esp.
in Paul, is the interrog. formula ουκ oiSart and η οίκ
οίδατΕ οτ(, by which something well known is commeniled
to one for his thoughtful consideration : Ro. xi. 2 ; 1 Co.
iii. 16; V. 6; vi. 2 sq. 9, 15 sq. 19; ix. 13, 24; ουκ oihare
foil, by an indir. quest. Lk. ix. 55 [Rec] ; ουκ albas ότι, Jn.
xix. 10; οίκ xi&eiTe, Lk. ii. 49; cliivai foil, by an indir.
quest, [cf. B. u. s.], Mt. .xxvi. 70; Jn. ix. 21, 25, 30; xiv.
5; XX. 13; iCo. i. 16; vii. 16; 2 Co. xii. 2 sq. ; Ro. viii.
26 ; Eph. vi. 21 ; 1 Tim. iii. 1 5, and very often. 2. lo
know i. e. get knnn'ledge of, understand, perceire ; a. any
fact : as, tos ίvθυμήσfίs, Mt. xii. 25 ; την ΰπόκρισιν, Mk.
xii. 15 ; τους διαλογισμούς αυτών, Lk. vi. 8 ; xi. 17 ; with
the addition of eV ίαντω foil, by on, Jn. vi. 61. b. the
force and meaning of something, which has a definite
meaning: 1 Co. ii. 11 sq. ; την παραβοΧήν, Mk. iv. 13;
μυστήρια, 1 Co. xiii. 2; foil, by an indir. quest. Eph. i. 18.
c. as in class. Grk., foil, by an inf. in the sense of to know
how (Lat. calleo, to he skilled in) : Mt. vii. 11 ; Lk. xi.
13; .xii. 56; Phil. iv. 12; 1 Th. iv. 4 ; 1 Tim. iii. 5; Jas.
iv. 1 7 ; 2 Pet. ii. 9 ; ur οίδατί, sc. άσφαΚΊσασθαι, Mt. .xxvii.
65. 3. Hebraistically, eihivm τίκά to have regard for
one, cherish, pan attention to: 1 Th. v. 12, (Sept. Gen.
x.xxix. 6 for i'T). [Syn. see γινώσκω.]
<18ωλ<ϊον [-λιοκ Τ Wll ; .see I, i],-ou, τό, ((ϊδωλοί', q. v.;
cf. 'ΧσκΚηπύον, ' \πολ\ων(Ιον, 'ΜρακΚύον, etc. [W. 95
(90)]), an idol's temple, temple consecrated to idols : 1 Co.
viii. 10 (1 Mace. i. 47; x. 83 ; 1 Esdr. ii. 9; not found
in prof, autli. ; for in the frag. fr. Soph. [152 Dind.] in
Plut. de amico et adul. c. 36 «δώλια has of late been
restoH'd).'
6ΐ5ωλόθυτο5, -ην, {('ίδωΚον and θύω), a bilil. and eccl.
word [W. 26; 100 {'Ji)], sacrijiced to iilols ; το (Ιδωλύθυ-
τον and τα «'δωλόίυτα denote the flesh left over from the
heathen sacrifices ; it was either eaten at feasts, or sold
(by the poor and the miserly) in the market : Acts xv.
29; x.xi. 25; 1 Co. viii. 1, 4, 7, 10; x. 19, 28 (here L txt.
TTrWII read 'κρόθυτον, q. v.); Rev. ii. 14, 20. [Cf.
Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. γ>. 308 sq.] *
«ΐε<ι>λο-λατρ(1α [-rpm WH ; see I, i], -as, ή, {ΛδωΚον,
q. v., and Xarpfia), (Tertull. al. idololatria), the worship
of false gods, idolatry : Gal. v. 20 ; used of the formal sac-
rificial feasts held in honor of false gods, 1 Co. x. 14 ; of
avarice, as a worship of Mammon [q-v.], Col. iii. 5 [Bp.
Lghtft. ad loc.] ; in plur., the vices springing from idolatry
and pceuliar to it, 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Eccl. writ. [cf. W. 26].)•
(18ωλολάτρη$, -ου, ό, («δωλον, and λάτρις i. e. a hireling,
servant, slave), a worshipper of false gods, an idolater,
(Tertull. idololatres) : 1 Co. v. 10; Rev. xxi. 8; xxii. 15;
any one, even a Christian, participant in any way in the
worship of heathen, 1 Co. v. 11 ; vi. 9 ; esp. one Λνΐιο at-
tends their sacrificial feasts and eats of the remains of
the offered victims, 1 Co. x. 7 ; a covetous man, as a
worshipper of Mammon, Eph. v. 5 ; ef. Meyer ad loc.
(Eccl. writ. [cf. W. 100 (94 sq.)].)*
€Ϊ8ωλον, -ου, τό, (eiSos [cf. W. 96 (91); Etym. Magn.
296, 9]), in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down, an image, likeness,
i. e. whatever represents the form of an object, either
real or imaginary ; used of the shades of the departed
(in Horn.), of apparitions, spectres, phantoms of the
mind, etc. ; in bibl. writ, [an idol, i. e.] 1. the image
of a heathen god : Acts vii. 41 ; 1 Co. xii. 2 ; Rev. ix. 20,
(Is. XXX. 22; 2 Chr. xxiii. 17, etc.; θ^ών ή δαιμόνων
(ΐδωλα, Polyb. 31, 3, 13); 2. a false god: Acts xv.
20 (on which see άΚίσγημα) ; Ro. ii. 22 ; 1 Co. viii. 4, 7 ;
X. 19 ; 2 Co. vi. 16 ; 1 Th. i. 9, (often in Sept.) ; φυΧάσ-
(Tfif iavTov άπ6 τ. (Ιδώλων, to guard one's self from all
manner of fellowship with heathen worship, 1 Jn. v. 21.*
ίΐκή (L WII 11°" eUij•, cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 342;
B. 69(61); [W. §5,'4e.; Jelf § 324 Obs. 6 ; Kuhner
§ 336 Anm. 7 ; esp. Etym. Magn. 78, 26 sq. ; and reff. s. v.
I, i]), adv.; in (irk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down; 1. in-
consideralelji, without purpose, without Just cause : Mt. v.
22 R(; Trbr. ; Ro. xiii. 4 (i. e. 'not to hide it in the
scabbard, but to draw it' Fritzsche); Col. ii. 18. 2.
in vain; without success or effect: 1 Co. xv. 2; Gal. iii.
4; iv. 11. [From Xenophon, Aeschyl. down.]*
ίϊκοσ-ι Tor -σιν ; Tdf. uses σι ten times before a conso-
nant, and savs -σι " ctiam ante vocalem fere semper in
ΐίκω
17ί
€ίμι
codd. antiquiss." Proleg. p. 98 : WH everywhere -at.
cf. their App. p. 148 ; B. 9], oi. αϊ, τά, twenty : Lk. xiv.
31 ; Acts i. 15, etc. [From Horn, down.]
<tKw : 1 aor. (Ιξα ; to ijieUl, [A. V. give place'\ : rivi, Gal.
ii. 5. (From Hom. down.) [Comp. : ΰπ-(ίκω.] *
F.nc.O. ■ whence 2 pf. ίΌικα with the force of a pres.
[W. 274 (257)]; to be like: τινί, Jas. i. 6, 23. [From
Horn, down.]*
ίίκών, -ofos, (ace. (Ικόναν, Rev. xiii. 14 Lchm. ; see
άί)σψ ), ή, (Ε1ΚΩ, q. v.) ; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down] ;
Sept. mostly for zhy:; an image, figure, likei^exs; a. Mt.
xxii. 20 ; Mk. xii. 16 ; Lk. .vx. 24 ; Ro. i. 23 ; 1 Co. xv. 49 ;
Rev. xiii. 14 sq. ; xiv. 9, 1 1 ; xv. 2 ; xvi. 2 ; xix. 20 ; x.x. 4 ;
7) (Ικωυ των πραγμάτων, the image of the things (so. the
heavenly things), in Heb. x. 1, is opp. to ή σκιά, just as
in Cic. de off. 3,17 solida et expressa effigies is opp. to
umhra ; (Ικων τ. β(οΰ is used of the moral Ukeness of re-
newed men to God, Col. iii. 10 ; (Ικων τοϋ νίον τοΰ Btoi
the image of the Son of God, into ivhich true Christians
are transformed, is likeness not only to the heavenly
body (cf. 1 Co. xv. 49 ; Phil. iii. 21), but also to the most
holy and blessed state of mind, which Christ possesses :
Ro.viii. 29; 2Co. iii. 18. b. metonymically, «ίκών rtvor,
the image of one ; one in whom the likeness of any one
is seen : ίΐκων Beoi is applied to man, on account of his
power of command (see δόξα. III. 3 a. a.), 1 Co. xi. 7; to
Christ, on account of his divine nature and absolute
moral excellence. Col. i. 15 ; 2 Co. iv. 4 ; [cf. Bp. Lghtft.
and Mey. on Col. 1. c.].*
[SvM. e ίκών, ομοίωμα : όμ. denotes often not mere
similarity but likeness (see ομοίωμα, b. and cf. Mey. on Ro. i.
2.3), visible conformity to its object ; fix. adds to the idea of
likeness the suggestions of representation (as a de-
rived likeness) and manifestation. Cf. Trench § xv. ;
Lghtft. u. s.]
ctXiKpCveia (-ia Τ [WH. see I, t ; on the breathing see
Wll. App. p. 144]), -as. ή, {(Ιλικρινής, n- v.), purity, sin-
cerity, ingenuousness : 1 Co. v. 8 ; 2 Co. ii. 17 ; τοί θ(οΰ,
which God effects by the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. i. 12 [W.
§ 36, 3 b.]. (Theophr., Sext. Empir., Stob.) *
cl\i.KptWjs, -es, ([on the breathing see WH. App. p.
144 ; L. and S. s. v. fin.] ; com. supposed to be fr. ιΐλη or
ί\η sunlight, and κρίνω, prop, found pure when unfohled
and examined by the sun's light ; hence some write ίίλ.
[see refE. above] ; ace. to the conjecture of others fr.
iiXuf, eiXfif, prop, sifted and cleansed by rapid move-
ment or rolling to and fro), pure, u7uullieJ, sincere ; of the
soul, an (Ιλίκοίνής man : Phil. i. 10; διάνοια, 2 Pet. iii. 1.
(Sap. vii. 25, Avhere cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdb. ; [see, on the
word, also Trench § Ixxxv.] ; [Hippoer.], Xen., Plat.,
[Aristot., Plut.], Polyb., Philo, [al.].) *
[Stn. elhiKpiviis, καθαροί: Ace. to Trench n. s. the
former word expresses freedom from the falsehoods, the
latter from the defilements, of the flesh and of the world.]
ίlλCσo•ω, Ionic and poetic and occasional in later prose
for ίλίσσω [W. § 2, 1 a.] : [pres. pass, {ίλίσσομαι] ; ((ΐΚω
to press close, to roll up, [cf. L. and S. s. v. fin.]), lo roll
up or together : Rev. vi. 14 R (ί ; but L Τ Tr WH have
restored ίΚισσόμ. (From Hom. down.) *
elfiC (fr. 60), whence ipi in inscriptions [?] ; Aeol. (μμί
[Curtius (yet ίμμι, so (i. Meyer) § 564 ; A'eitch p. 228]),
impv. Ίσθι, ΐστω, less usual ήτω, 1 Co. .xvi. 22 ; Jas. v. 12 ;
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48, 5 : [1 Mace. x. 31 ; Ps. ciii. (civ.)
31] ; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 c. [here it has given place to ?στω
(or ΐτω), see Stallb. ad loc; Veitch p. 200 sq. ; 3 pers.
plur. (στωσαν, Lk. xii. 35 ; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. iivai ; impf.
. — ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ην, 2 pers.
ησθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ^s (Mt.
XXV. 21, 23 ; Jn. xi. 21, 32 ; xxi. 18 ; Rev. iii. 15 G L Τ
Tr WH), 3 pers. ην, 1 pers. plur. ημιν, — ace. to the mid.
form, com. in laterGrk. [cf. Veitch p. 226], ημην{^Η. xxv.
35 sq.; [on Actsxi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gahi. 10,
etc.), plur. ήμ^θα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L Τ Tr WH ; Acts
xxvu. 37 L Τ Tr AVH ; [Gal. iv. 3 Τ WH Tr mrg. ; Eph.
ii. 3 Τ Tr WH ; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn. pp.
149, 152 ; fut. ίσομαι; cf. W. § 14, 2 ; B.49 sq. (43) ; lo
be;
I. f^μί has the force of a predicate [i.e. is the sub-
stantive verb] : lo he, i. e. 1. to exist ; a. passages
in which the idea of the verb preponderates, and some
person or thing is said to exist by way of distinction
from things non-existent: ίστιν 6 deas, Heb. xi. 6 ; ό
i>v καϊ ην [W. 68(66), cf. 182(172); B. 50 (43)], Rev.
i. 4, [8 ; iv. 8] ; xi. 1 7 ; xvi. 5 ; eV άρχη ην ό λόγο:, Jn. i. 1 ;
πριν Άβρααμ -γΐνΐσθαι, €γω (ίμί, Jn. viii. 58 [so WH mrg.
in 24, 28 ; xiii. 19 (see II. 5 below)] ; προ τοϋ τον κόσμον
civai, Jn. χνϋ. 5 ; ην, και ονκ €στι καίπ^ρ (στίν Rec, ace.
to the better reading καΊ πάρισται [G Tr WH, but L Γ
παρίσται, correctly; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. § 108 Anm. 20;
Chandler § 803], Rev. xvii. 8 ; ϊσμίν. Acts xvii. 28 ; τα
μη οντά and τα όντα things that are not, things that are,
Ro. iv. 17; things that have some or have no influence,
of some or of no account, 1 Co. i. 28, {eKOXeaev ημάς ονκ
οντάς κα\ ηθί\ησ(ν ξκ μη ovtos eivai ημάς, Clem. Rom. 2
Cor. i. 8 [cf. Gebh. and Ilarn. ad loc. and esp. on Herm.
vis. 1,1, 6]). Hence b. i. q. to lire : el ήμ(θα [or ημ(ν
Rec.] iv ταις ημίραις των πατίρων ημών if we had been
(viz. living) in the days of our fathers, Mt. .xxiii. 30:
oiiK elvai is used (as in class. Grk., cf. Passow i. p. 792,
[L. and S. s. v. A. I. 1]) of the dead [who are not, are no
more'\ : Mt. ii. 18. c. i. q. to stay, remain, be in a place :
Mt. ii. 13, 15 ; Mk. i. 45 [L WH br. ?.-] ; v. 21 ; Lk. i. 80;
see V. 4 below. d. i. q. lo be found, the subject bein»
anarthrous; as, ην άνθρωπος there wa^ (found, Germ, es
gab) a man, etc.: Lk. xvi. 1, 19; xviii. 23; Jn. iii. 1 ;
iv. 6 ; V. 2; vi. 10; 1 Co. viii. 5; xii. 4-6; xiv. 10; xv.
44; 1 Jn. v. 16, and often; ίσονται ϊμπαΊκται. Jude 18;
iiTTi, ην, ΐσται with a negative : ονκ ΐστι δίκαιης there is
not (sc. found) a righteous man, Ro. iii. 10; add 12, 18;
χηόνος ουκ eorai ίτι there shall be no longer time. Rev. x.
6 ; add. Rev. xxii. 3, 5 [Rec. adds t/cfi] ; xxi. 25 [here cKe'i
stands] ; άνάστασις νικρων ουκ ίστιν, 1 Co. XV. 1 2 ; μή eivai
άνάστασιν, Mt. xxii. 23 and its parall. ; Acts xxiii. 8. Here
belong also the phrases dcriv, o'l etc., olni/ft etc., there are
(some) who etc. : Mt. xvi. 28 ; xix. 12 : Mk. ix. 1 ; Lk. ix.
27 ; Jn. vi. 64 ; Acts xi. 20 ; ονδιίς (στιν, ος, Mk. ix. 39
sq. ; x. 29 ; Lk. i. 61 , xviii. 29 ; with a noun added, (ξ
et/it
17»)
€ίμι
ήμ€ραί fiVtV. (fa's etc. Lk. xili. 14 ; m «στιν, St, Mt. vii. 9
[L Tr WII 0111. «στ.] ; -xii. 1 1 [Tr om. W 1 1 l>r. ('στ.] ; (o-ri»'
ό with a ptcp. there is (viz. is not wanting) one tlinl etc.
.In. V. 32 [?J, 45; viii. 50. e. ivhen used of things,
events, facts, etc., ctvatis i. q. to happen, lake place:
mv κρίσκ iariv, Jn. xii. 31 ; -γογγναμος ην, Jn. vii. 12:
Oopvlioi τον λαοΰ, Mk. xiv. 2 ; σχίσμα, σχίσματα, Jn. i-\.
1 li ; 1 Co. i. 1 ; xii. 25 ; tptSts, 1 Co. i. 1 1 ; α'ιμίσίΐί, 1 Co.
.\i. 19 ; ηίνθοί, nouot, κραυγή. Rev. x.\i. 4 ; ϊσονται λιμοί
κ. λοιμοί [II G Tr mrg. in br., al. om. κ. λοιμ.] κ. σ(ΐσ^ιοι,
ΛΙΐ. xxiv. 7 ; ανάγκη μ€'γάλη, Lk, X-\i. 23 ; άνάστασιν ptX-
\(ΐν ίσισθαι, Acts χχιν. 1 5. of times and seasons : χίΐμών
ίοτίκ, .Τη. χ. 22; νύ^, Jn. xiii. 30; ι\ηιχοί, •ίη. xviii. 18;
καύσων, Lk. xii. 55 ; ίσπίρα, Acts iv. 3 ; πρωία, Jn. xviii. 28
[Ilec] ; σκοτία, Jn. .xx. 1 ; (στ», ην ωρα, — as ίκτη, Lk.
xxiii. 44 ; Jn. iv. 6 ; xix. 14 [L Τ Tr WH] ; i. 39 (40),
etc.; also of feasts: Jn. v. 1, 10; ix. 14 ; Acts xii. 3; Lk.
xxiii. 54 ; Mk. xv. 42. univ. to €σόμ(νου what will be,
follow, happen : Lk. xxii. 4!) ; πότ( ταϋτα ΐσται ; Mt. xxiv.
3 ; ίτώί ίσται τοΟτο ; Lk. i. 34 : after the Hebr., και (σται
(e<juiv. to Π"Π1) foil, by the fut. of another verb: Acts ii.
1 7 (fr. Joel ii. 28 (iii. 1)) ; 21 (fr. Joel ii. 32 (iii. 5)) ; Acts
iii. 23 ; Ro. ix. 26 (fr. Hos. i. 10 (ii. 1)). r/ ουν ϊστίν;
what then is it f i. e. how stands the case ? what follows
therefore t Acts xxi. 22; 1 Co. xiv. 15, 26. 2. i. q.
πάρίψι, to be present ; to he at hand ; to he in store : olvos
ovK fOTiv, Jn. ii. 3 Tdf. ; ππμπόλλου [Rec.J ο;^λου οντος,
Mfho.n there was present, ^Ik. viii. 1 ; add, ii. 15; Mt. xii.
10 KG; Heb. viii. 4; ονπω γαρ ην πν(ϋμα {άγιον), iras
not i/et present, i. e. had not yet been i/irm [which some
authorities add], Jn. vii. :i!) ; so also in the words el nvevpa
ayiOK (oTii/ [but R (ί Tr accent άγιύν ('στ., cf. Chandler
§ 93S], Acts xix. 2 ; άκούσατ ■ ■ ■ όντα σ'ιτα, tliul there ivas
an abundance of grain, Acts vii. 12 ; δΰναμί! κυρίου ην els
το Ιασθαι αυτού!, was present to heal them, Lk. v. 1 7.
3. ίστιν with inf., as in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down (see
I'assow i. p. 792 sq. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. VL] ; see e.xx.
fr. the O. T. Apocr. in Wahl, Clavis apocryph. p. 155),
it Li possible to etc. ; with a negative (as more com. in
classic Grk. also), it ώ impossible : Ileb. ix. 5 ; 1 Co. xi.
20, [cf. W. § 44, 2 b.].
II. elpi [as a copula] connects the subject with the
predicate, where the sentence shows who or what a per-
son or thing is as respects character, nature, disposition,
race, power, dignity, greatness, age, etc. 1. univ. :
(yw elpi 'ΤΓρ€σβντης, Lk. i. 18 ; (γώ elpL Ταβριή\, Lk. i. 19 ;
ίρημός eariv ο τόττοί, Mt. xiv. 1.5; προφήτης ei συ, Jn. iv.
19 ; σΰ (( 6 Χριστής, Mt. xxvi. (i3 ; καθαροί eoTe, Jn. xiii.
10 ; vpeis eare τα άλας της γης, ^It. v. 13 ; ^Ιουδαίους eivai
4αυτοίς, Rev. iii. 9, cf. ii. 9, and countless other exx. 2.
(ΐ'μί, as a copula, indicates that the subject is or is to be
compared to the thing expressed by the predicate : ή
σφραγίί μου της αποστολή? ipels (στ€, ye are, as it were,
the seal attesting my apostleship, i. e. your faith is proof
that the name of apostle is given me rightfully, 1 Co. ix.
2 ; η €ΐτιστοΧη (sc. συστατική, cf. vs. 1 ) ΰμςίς ίση, i. e. ye
yourselves are like a letter of recommendation for me,
or ve serve as a substitute for a letter of recommenda-
tion, 2 Co. iii. 2 ; τοντό cWc ro σωμά μου, this which I
now hand to you is, as it were, niy boily, Mt. xxvi. 26;
Mk. xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; ipeU ναός Beoi ('στ(' [L txt.
Τ Tr t.\t. WH ^μ(ΐ( . . . (σμ('>/] ye [we] are to be regarded
as the temple of (Jod, 2 Co. vi. 16, cf. 1 Co. vi. 19 ; ό θ(6ί
ναός αυτής eerriv [(στί(ΐ') R G Tr], κ. το άρνίον, they are to
be reganled as its temple, they occupy the place of a tem-
ple in the city because present with every one in it, Rev.
xxi. 22. Hence 3. eivai, getting an explicative
force, is often i. (j. to denote, sir/nifi/, itnport, as ό αγρός
('στίκ ό κόσμος, Mt. xiii. 37-39, 19 S(|. 22 sq. : Lk. viii. 1 1
sq. 14 sq. ; Gal. iv. 24 sq. ; Rev. xvii. l.'j; xix. 8, (Sept.
Gen. xii. 26 sq. ; Ezek. xxxvii. 11 ) ; roOr' ίστιν [so Τ Wil
uniformly, exc. that WH om. ν (φ(λκ. in Heb. ii. 14j,
Lchm. τουτίστιν [exc. in Ro. x. 6, 7, 8 ; also Treg. exc. in
Mt. xxvii. 46: Mk. vii. 2; Acts i. 19; Ro. ix. 8;x. 6, 7,8;
sometimes written ToCro eartv, see Tdf. Proleg. p. 1 1 1 ; cf.
W 45; B. 11 (10)], an explanatory formula (equiv. to
τοϋτο σημaίveι) ivhich is either inserted into the discourse
as a parenthesis, or annexed to words as an apposition
[cf.W. 530(493); B.400(342). It is to be distinguished
from toCto He eoTiv. τοϋτ eariv introduces an inciilent;il
explanation for the most part of the language; τούτο
δ(' eστtv subjoins an explanatory statement, relating gen-
erally to the thought; (cf. our "that is to sa;/," and
"that i.s"); see Ro. i. 12 and Fritzsche ad loc] ■ Mt.
xxvii. 46 ; Mk. vii. 2; Acts i. 19 ; Ro. vii. 18 ; x. 6-8 ;
Pliilem. 12; Heb. ii. 14; vii. 5, etc.; Mkewi.-:e ό cστt, Mk.
iii. 17; vii. 11, 34 ; Heb. vii. 2 ; ό eστι μeθeρμηveυόμevov,
this signifies, when interpreted, etc. Mk. xv. 34 ; Acts iv.
36 ; see G c. below. 4. In the Bible far more fretpient-
ly than in prof, auth., and in the N. T. much oftener in
the historical than in the other books, a participle
without the article serves as the predicate, being
connected with the subject by the verb eivai (cf. W. § 45,
5 and esp. B. 309 (2H5) sqq.) ; and a. so as to form a
mere periphrasis of the finite verb ; o. with the Pres-
ent ptcp. is formed — a periphrasis of the pres. : (Vri
τζροσηνα•η\ηροΰσα . . • και ^:epισσevoυσa, 2 Co. ix. 12, — a
|icriph. of the inq)f. or of the aor., mostly in Mark and
Luke [B. 312 (2i;8)] : ήν καθ(ΰ&ων. Mk. iv. 38 ; ην πρηά-
γων, χ. 32; ην σ^Jγκaθήμevoς, xiv. ut ; ήν διavevωv, Lk. i.
22 ; ήσαν κaθήμevot, v. 1 7 ; ήν ίκβάλλων, xi. 14 ; ήσαν καθ(-
ίο'μ(ΐΌΐ [Lchm.. al. καθήμ(νοι]. Acts ii. 2, and other exx. ;
once in Paul, Phil. ii. 26 ίττιπηθων ήν, — -a periph. of the
fut. ; eσovτan!i■πτovτeς [(W. R G], Mk. xiii. 25. β. Avith
the Perfect ptcp. is formed — a periph. of the aor.
[impf. (?)] : ήν ίστώς, Lk. v. 1 ; — a periph. of the plpf. :
ήσαν e\η\υθότeς,συve\η\υθυΊaι,hk.^■.\'! ; xxiii. 55 ; esp.
with the pf. pass. ptc|). : ήν ή ίτιιγραφή e'πιyeγρaμμe'vη, Mk.
XV. 26 ; ήν αυτά κeχpημaτ^σμe'vov, Lk. ii. 2il ; ήν TeBpapptvos,
Lk. iv. 16 ; add, viii. 2 ; xxiii. 51 ; Acts i. 1 7, etc. -y. once
with an Aorist ptcp. a periph. of the plpf. is formed:
ήν . ■ . β\ηθe\s (R G L Tr mrg. βιβΧημίνος) iv τη φυλακή,
Lk. xxiii. 19 Τ Tr txt. WH ; on the same use of the aor.
sometimes in Grk. writ. cf. PassoΛV i. p. 793 ; [L and S.
s. V. B. 2 ; yet cf. B. § 144, 24 fin.]. b. so as to indi-
cate continuance in any act or state [B. 310 sq.
177
€ΐμΛ
(266)] : ην 8ιδάσκω^ was wont to teach, Mk. i. 22 ; Lk.
iv. 31 ; xix. 47 ; ^i/ [T Tr txt. WH ηΧθινΙ κηρύσσων, Mk.
i. 3y ; Lk. iv. 44 ; ήσαν νηστ^ϋοντα held their fast, Mk. ii.
18 ; ήσαν σνΚ\α\ονντ(ί νκπ: talkinij, Λϋ. i.\. 4 ; ην σνγκύ-
ϊΓτουσα. Lk. xiii. 11 : ην θίΧων, Lk. .\xiii. 8 ; ην προσδ(χό-
fiifos, Mk. .XV. 43 (Lk. xxiii. .31 πρoσeStχfτo) ; once in
Paul, fial. i. 23 ήσαν άκηϋοντα. with the Future [cf.
B. 311 (267)]: ίσται 5€Β€μ^νυν,εσταίλ(λνμ(νον,\.(\. ΑυλΙ]
remain bound, shall remain loosed, Mt. .xvi. 19; ίσται
πατονμίνη shall continue to be trodden down, Lk. x.xi. 24,
and other e.xx. o. to signify that one is in the act of
doing something ; ην (ρχόμ(νον was in the act of coming,
Jn. i. 9 [cf. Mey. ed. Weiss ad loc] ; ην ϋποστρίφων, Acts
TUi. 28. d. the combination of elvat with a ptcp. seems
intended also to give the verbal idea more force and
prominence by putting it in the form of a noun [see B.
and W. u. s.] : ην ϊχων κτήματα -noWa (Germ, wohlha-
beml, [Eng. was une lliat /tadj), Mt. χίχ. 22 ; Mk. x. 22 ;
€ση σιωπών, Lk. i. 20 : ην ί-ττΐ^τασσόμίνος (^obedient, in sub-
j'eclion), Lk. ii. 51 ; ϊσθι ϊξουσίανίχων, be thou ruler over,
Lk. xix. 1 7 ; ^1/ συνινΒοκων. Acts viii. 1 ; ζων f ί/χι. Rev. i. 1 8,
and in other exx. three times in Paul ; it . . . >;X7riitOTfs
(σμίν μόνον if we are those who have only hoped, or to
whom nothing is left but hope, 1 Co. xv. l'.> ; ην . . . καταλ-
Χάσσων, the reconciler, 2 Co. v. 1 1) ; ΰτινά e'irrt Xoyox ίχοντα
σοφίας, are things having a reputation of wisdom. Col. ii.
23, (Mattliiae § 560 [(so Kiihner § 3.j3 Anm. 3)] gives
exx. fr. prof. auth. in which several words intervene be-
tween i'l/m and the ptcp.). e. Of quite another sort are
those exx. in which dvat has its own force, being equiv.
to ίο be found, to he present, to stay, (see I. above), and
the ptcp. is added to e.xpress an act or condition of the
subject (cf. B. § 144, 27) : fv τοΙς μνημασι . . . ην (was
i. e. stayed) κράζων. Mk. v. .3 ; ην Be (Kt'i (was kept there)
. . . βοσκομίνη, Mk. V. 11 ; ^It. viii. 30; ήσαν ev τη 66ω
αναβαίνοντίΫ, Luther correctly, they tcere in the road, i/o-
ing up etc. Alk. x. 32 ; fla\v av8p€s . . . ^νχην (χοντίς, Acts
xxi. 23 ; add, Mt. xii. 10 [R G] ; x.xvii. 55 ; Mk. ii. 6, (in
the last two e.xx. ήσαν were present) ; Lk. iv. 33 ; Jn. i. 28 ;
iii. 23; Acts xxv. 14; Ro. iii. 12, etc.; άνωθϊν eWtv,
καταβαΐνον etc. (insert a comma after ίστίν), is/rom abore,
καταβα'ίνον etc. being added by way of explanation, Jas.
i. 17 [cf. B. 310 (266)]. 5. The formula ΐγύ «/« (/
am he), freq. in the Gospels, esp. in John, must have its
predicate supplied mentally, inasmuch as it is evident
from the context (cf. Kriiger § 60, 7) ; thus, ΐγώ (Ιμι,
so. Ίησοΰς ό Ναζ. Jn. xviii. 5 [here L mrg. expresses ό
Ίησοϊΐ!, WII mrg. 'Iijo•.], 6, 8 ; it is I whom you see, not
another, Mt. xiv. 27 ; Mk. vi. 50 ; Lk. xxiv. 36 (Lchm.
in br.) ; Jn. vi. 20 ; sc. ό καθημινος κ. προσαιτων, Jn. ix.
9; simply €ΐμί, I am teacher and Lord, .In. .xiii. 13 ; οΰκ
ΰμί sc. ίξ αΰτων, Lk. xxii. 58 ; Jn. xviii. 25 ; / am not
Elijah, Jn. i. 21 ; spec. I am the Messiah, Mk. xiii. 6 ;
xiv. 62; Lk. xxi. 8 ; Jn. iv. 26 ; viii. 24, 2S ; xiii. 19 ; I
am the Son of God, Lk. xxii. 70 (like Kin •:κ. Deut.
xxxii. 39 ; Is. xliii. 10) ; cf. Keim iii. 320 [Eng. trans, vi.
34: Ho/mann, Schrittbeweis, i. 63 sq.]. The third pers.
if used in the same wav : tKUvos ίστιν, sc. ό v'los τοϋ βιοϋ,
Jn. Lx. 37 ; sc. ό παραδώσων ipi, .In. .xiii. 26. 6. Of
the phrases having a pronoun in place of a predi-
cate, the following deserve notice : a. Ws (Ιμι, ei, ϊστίν,
a formula of inquiry, used by those desiring — either to
know what sort of a man one is whom they see, or what
his name is, Jn. i. 1 9 ; viii. 25 ; .x.xi. 1 2 : Acts xxvi. 15; —
or that they may see the face of some one spoken of, and
that he may be pointed out to them, Lk. xix. 3 ; Jn. ix.
36 ; σύ ris ft ό with a ptcp., tc/io (i. e. how petty) art thou,
that etc.? the question of one administering a rebuke and
contemptuously denying another's right to do a thing,
Ro. Lx. 20 ; xiv. 4, (Strabo 6, 2, 4 p. 271 σν tIs et ό
τονΌμηρον ψί'γων ώί μνθύγραφον ;) ; iya3 Tis (Ιμι; tcho
(how small) am I '! the language of one holding a modest
opinion of himself and recognizing his weakness, Acts
xi. 1 7, cf . Ex. iii. 11. b. (\μι ris, like sum aliquis in Lat.,
to be somebody (eminent) : Acts v. 36 ; tlvai τι, Uke the
Lat. aliquid esse, to be something (i. e. something excel-
lent) : Gal. ii. 6 ; vi. 3 ; in these phrases τ\ί and τι are
emphatic; cf. Kuhner § 470, 3 ; [W. 170 (161) ; B. 114
(100)] ; flvai τι after a negative, to be nothing, 1 Co. iii.
7, cf. Mey. ad loc. ; also in questions having a negative
force, 1 Co. x. 19 [cf. λ\. § 6, 2]. οίδίν fi>i, 1 Co. xiii.
2 ; 2 Co. xii. 1 1 ; ovhtv ΐστιν, it is nothing, is of no ac-
count, Mt. .x.xiii. 16, 18: Jn. viii. 54 ; Acts xxi. 24 ; 1 Co.
vii. 19. c. Ttf fVrt, e. g. ή παραβολή, what does it mean ?
what is the explanation of the thing ? Lk. viii. 9 tis ΰη ή
παραβοΧή αυτή ; Acts χ. 1 7 Tt &ν fu] το όραμα ; Mk. i. 27
Tt ΐστι τοϋτο ; what is this ? expressive of astonishment,
Lk. XV. 20 Tt (ΐη ταϋτα; what might be the cause of the
noise he heard? Lk. .xviii. 36 ; Jn. x. 6 τίνα ην, & eXaXfi
αύτοΪΓ. τι c'trrt what does it mean? Mt. Lx. 13; .xii. 7;
Lk. x.x. 1 7 ; Jn. xvi. 1 7 sq. ; τι eartv el μή orj. Eph. iv. 9 ;
see n. 3 above. d. oiror, αΰτη, τοΟτό cVtik foil, by a
noun, equiv. to in this is seen, is contained, etc. a. is so
employed that the pronoun refers to something which
has just been said : oJtos γάρ ίστι 6 νόμος, the law is
summed up in what I have just mentioned, comes to this,
Mt. vii. 12. p. in John's usage it is so employed that
the pronoun serves as the subject, which is defined by a
noun that follows, and this noun itself is a substitute as
it were for the predicate : αΖτη ΐστΊν ή νίκη . . . ή πίστα
ήμων, 1 Jn. ν. 4 ; αυτή (στ\ν ή μαρτυρία τοΰ 6eov, ην etc.
1 Jn. V. 9 Rec. οίτοί, αΰτη. τοΟτό ίστι foil, by ότι [Β. 105
(92) ; cf.W. 161 (152)]: Jn. iii. Ul ; 1 Jn. i. 5 ; v. 11, 14;
foil, by Iva (to say that something ought to be done, or
that something is desired or demanded [cf. W. 338
(317); B. 240 (207)]) : Jn. vi. 29, 39 sq.; xv. 12; 1 Jd.
iii. 11, 23 ; v. 3; foil, by Zre etc. Jn. i. 19 [W. 438 (408)].
7. The participle ων, ούσα. Sv, ovret, όντα. joined to a sub-
stantive or an adjective, has the force of an intercalated
clause, and may be translated since or although I am, thou
art, etc., [here the Eng. use of the ptcp. agrees in the main
with the Grk.] : ft ovv iipeis, πονηροί ovrei. otfiaTf, Mt. vii.
1 1 ; add, xii. 34 ; Lk. xx. 36 ; Jn. iii. 4 ; iv. 9 ; Acts xvi. 21 ;
Ro. V. 10 ; 1 Co. viii. 7 ; Gal. ii. 3 ; Jas. iii. 4, and often;
twice with other participles, used adjectively [B. 310
(266)] : ovres άττηΚΧοτριωμίνοι, Col. i. 21 : (σκοτίσμ(νοί
ειμί,
178
et/it
[U G, al. -τωμΓΐΌί], Eph. iv. 18. 8. Sometimes the
copula eoTtx (with the accent [see Chandler § U38]) stands
at the beginning of a sentence, to emphasize the triitli of
what the sentence aillrms or denies : Lk. viii. 1 1 ; 1 Tim.
vi. (i ; ΐστι St mortt etc. Ileb. .\i. 1 (although some explain
it here [as a subst. verb], ' but failli exists' or ' is found,'
to wit in the examples ailduced immediately after [see
W. § 7, ;i]) ; several times so used in Philo in statements
(quoted by Delitzsch on Ileb. xi. 1) resembling defini-
tions, ουκ (στιν : Mt. xiii. 57 ; Mk. xii. 27 ; Acts x. 34 ;
I Co. -xiv. 33; Jas. iii. 15.
m. tt/ii joined with Adverbs; 1. with adverbs
of place; a. where? to he, he husy, somewhere : ixet,
Mt. ii. 15 ; xxvii. 55 ; Mk. iii. 1 [L om. Tr br. ην}, etc. ;
ivBahf, Acts xvi. 28; taw, .In. xx. 26 ; ol, Mt. ii. 9; xviii.
20; Acts xvi. 13; ίπον, Mk. ii. 4 ; v. 40; Jn. vi. G2; Acts
xvii. 1, etc.; ποϋ, Mt. ii. 2; Jn. vii. 11, etc.; iiSe, Mt.
xxviii. 6; Mk. ix. 5, etc. b. with adverbs of dis-
tance : απίναντί Ttvos, Ro. iii. 18 (Ps. xxxv. (xx.wi.) 2) ;
fKTOs τ«>Όί, 2 Co. xii. 2, [3 χαίρι! τ. LT Tr WII] ; (μπρο-
σθίν TiiOf, Lk. xiv. 2 ; «Wdr τινοί, Lk. xvii. 21 ; ivamiop
nvoi. Rev. i. 4 ; vii. 1 5 ; μακρίιν από twos, Jn. xxi. 8 ; Mk.
xii. 34 ; πόρρω, Lk. xiv. 32 ; (πάνω, .In. iii. 31", [31'' G Τ
WII mrg. om. the cl.] ; of the situation of regions and
places : άντιπίρα [or -riVfpa etc. see s. v.] tivos, Lk. viii.
2G ; iyyis, — now standing absol. .In. xix. i2; now with
gen., .In. xi. 18; xix. 20, etc. ; now with dat.. Acts ix. 38 ;
xxvii. 8. c. whence? ίο fte from some quarter, i. e. to
come, originate, from : πόθ(ν, Mt. xxi. 25 ; Lk. xiii. 25,
27 ; Jn. vii. 27 ; ix. 29 ; xix. 9 ; ii. 9 (wdifK ΐστίν sc. ό
olvos, whence the wine was procured) ; cWeOfiej/, .In. xviii.
36. 2. with adverbs of quality; οΰτωί (Ιμί, to be
thus or so, to be sur/t ; absol. Mt. xiii. 49 ; with tV νμίν
added, Mt. xx. 2G [here R G Τ ίσται] ; οϋτως ίσται. so will
it be i. e. come to pass, Mt. xiii. 40, (49 [see above]) ;
ovrms (στίν or ίσται, of things, events, etc., such >< or will
he the state of the case [W. 465 (434)] : Mt. xix. 10 ; xxiv.
27,37,39; Mk. iv. 26; Ro. iv. 18 (Gen. xv. 5): so of
persons, Jn. iii. 8. καθώς ίστιν as, even as, he etc. is, 1
.Jn. iii. 2, 7 ; iv. 1 7 ; (ΐμ\ ωσπ(ρ τις to be, to do as one,
to imitate him, be like him, Mt. vi. 5 [RG]; Lk. xviii.
II [R G Τ WII txt.] ; ίστω σοι ωσπ(ρ etc. regard him
as a heathen and a publican, i. e. have no fellowship with
him, Mt. xviii. 17 ; ίΙμ\ ώί or iiad tis, to be as i. e. like
or equal to any one, Mt. [vi. 5 L Τ Tr WII] ; xxii. 30 ;
xxviii. 3; Lk. xi. 44 ; [xviii. II LTrWIImrg.]; xxii.
27; 1 Co. vii. 29 sq. ; τα σπλά-γχνα π€ρισσοτ£ρως us vpas
ϊστιν he is moved with the more abundant love toward
you, 2 Co. vii. 15. — But see each adverb in its place.
rV. (ΙμΊ with the oblique cases of substantives or of
pronouns; 1. «και tikos, like the Lat. alicuius esse,
i. q. to pertain to a person or a thing, denotes any kind of
possession or connection (Possessive Genitive); cf. Krii-
ger§47, 6,4sqq.: W.§30,5b.;B.§132, 11. a. ofthings
which one owns : ίσται σοΰ πάσα [Rec. πάντα}, Lk. iv. 7 ;
ου (στ\ν ή ζώνη αύτη, Acts xxi. 1 1 ; add, Jlk. xii. 7 ; Jn.
X. 12; xix. 24 ; — or for the possession of which he is
'itted : τινός i<mv ή βασιΚύα τ. υϋρ. or τοϋ θ(οϋ, he is fit
for a share in the kingdom of God, Mt. v. 3, 10 ; xix. 14 ;
Mk. X. 14; Lk. xviii. 16. πάντα υμών ί'στ», all things
serve your interests and promote your salvation, 1 Ca
iii. 21. b. of things which proceed from one : 2 Co. iv.
7. c. to be of one's parli/, be devoted to erne : 1 Co. i. 12 ;
2 Tim. ii. 19 ; τοΰ Χ/ηστοΰ, Mk. ix. 41 ; Ro. viii. 9 ; 1 Co.
i. 12 ; 2 Co. x. 7 ; hence also της όδοΟ (sc. τπΰ κυρίου) eivai.
Acts ix. 2 [cf. B. 163 (142)]. d. to be subject to one ; to
be in his hands or power : Mt. xxii. 28 ; Acts xxvii. 23 ;
Ro. ix. 16 ; xiv. 8 ; 1 Co. iii. 23 ; vi. 1 9, 20 Rec. ; πνιύμα-
Tot, Lk. ix. 55 Rec. Hence e. to be suitable, ft, for one:
Acts i. 7. f. to he of a kind or class : elvai νυκτός, σκότους,
ημίρας, 1 Th. v. 5, !' ; or to he nf the niunbcr <)/ [a partit,
gen.,cf. 3.159(139)]: Actsxxiii. 6; 1 Tim. i. 20 ; 2 Tim.
i. 15. g. with a gen. of quality•. Ileb. x. 39; xii. 11.
h. with a gen. of arje : Mk. v. 42 ; Lk. iii. 23 ; Acts iv. 22,
(Tob. xiv. 11). With this use (viz. 1) of dvai, those e.x-
amj)Ies must not be confounded in which a predicate
nominative is to be repeated from the subject (cf. Kriiger
§47, 6, 1) : ουκ eoTiv ό βΐός νεκρών, άλλα ζώντων, sc. θ(ός,
Mt. xxii. 32, cf. Mk. xii. 27 ; Lk. xx. 38 ; ταϋτα τά ρήματα
ουκ ίΟΎΐ Βαιμονιζοιίίνου, sc. ρήματα, Jn. χ. 21 ; ουκ (στιν
ακαταστασίας ό θ(ός, άλλα (Ιρήνης, 1 Co. xiv. 33 ; αΧΚο
βίβλίον. 5 f'oTt της ζωής. Rev. xx. 12; add, 2 Co. ii. 3 ;
1 Pet. iii. 3. 2. ei/ii with the dative (cf. Kriiger
§ 48, 3 [who appears to regard the dat. as expressing a
less close or necessary relationship than the gen.] ; W.
§31,2); a. ΐστι μο», ήμ'ιν, etc. it is mine, ours, etc., /, we,
etc., have : Lk. i. 7 ; ii. 7, 10 ; xiv. 10 ; Jn. xviii. 10, 39 ;
xix. 40 ; Acts vii. 5 ; viii. 21 ; x. 6 ; Ro. ix. 2, 9 ; 1 Co.
ix. 16 ; 1 Pet. iv. 11, and often, οΰκ ίστι ήμ'ιν [al. ΰμ.} ή
πά\η προς etc. we have not a struggle against etc. Eph.
vi. 1 2 : f ισίκ ήμ'ιν we have here etc. Acts xxi. 23 ; τί
ΐσται ήμ'ιν what shall we have? wdiat will be given us?
Jit. xix. 27 ; ϋμ'ιν ϊστιν ή (παγγ(λία the promise belongs
to you. Acts ii. 39. b. flvai τινί τι Ιο be something to (or
for) some one, used of various ri'lations, as of service,
protection, etc. : σκιΰος (κλογής ϊστί μοι ούτος, sc. τοϋ
with inf. Acts ix. 15; ΐσεσθί μοι μάρτυρις. Acts [i. 8
R G, cf.] xxii. 15; ΐσομαι αύτώ ieoi κ. αϋτος ίσται μοι
υίόϊ. Rev. xxi. 7; ΐσονταί μοι \αός, 2 Co. vi. 16 [R G] ;
(ΐς το fivai αυτόν . . . πατίρα . . . Tolt etc. Ro. iv. 11. c.
(Ιναί τινί τι, to be to one as or for something, to pass for
etc. : 1 Co. i. 18 ; ii. 14 ; Lx. 2, cf. Mt. xviii. 17. d. eivai
τινί τι, to be i. e. conduce, redound to one for (or as)
something (cf. Kriiger § 48, 3, 5) : 1 Co. xi. 14 S(]. ; 2
Co. ii. 15 ; Phil. i. 28 ; ούαΐ δί μοι ϊστι, 1 Co. ix. 16 (Hos.
Lx. 12). e. ίσται τινί, will come upon, befall, ha/i/irn to,
one : Mt. xvi. 22 ; Lk. i. 45. f. Acts xxiv. 11 οϋ πλιίους
fiVi μοι ήμίραι ή δ(κα8ύο [L Τ Tr WII om. ή and read
δώδίκη] not more than twelve days are (sc. passed) to
me i. e. it is not more than twelve days. Lk. i. 36 οίτοΓ
μήν (κτος ('στιν αυτή this is the sixth month to (with) her.
Those passages must not be brought under this head in
which the dative does not belong to the verb but de-
pends on an adjective, as καλός, κοινωνός, φίλος, etc.
V. ίίμί with Prepositions and their cases. 1.
από Tivo ς {τόπου), to come from, be a native of: Jn. i. 44
ειμί
179
€ΐμί
(45J [cf. άπ-ο, Π. 1 a.]. 2. fis Tt, a. to have betaken
one's self to some place and to be there, to have gone into
(cf. W. § 50, 4 b. ; [B. 333 (286)]) : ei't οίκον, Mk. u. 1
[RG; al. eV] ; tls τον άγρόν, Mk. xiii. IG [R G] ; eis r.
κοίτην, Lk. xi. 7; fit τόι/ κόλποι/, .In. i. 18, where cf.
'I'holuck, [W. 415 (387) ; B. u. s.] ; (on Acts viii. 20 see
aniXfia, 2 a.), metaph. to come to : tir ρ^ολήι/ πικρία:
(hast fallen into), Acts viii. 23. b. to be directed towards
a thing : ώστε την πίστιν υμών . . . aval fti θίόν, 1 Pet.
i. 21; to tend to anything: Ko. xi. 30 [W. § 50, 6]. c.
to be for i. e. conduce or inure to, serve for, [B. 150 (131)
sq. ; W. § 29, 3 a.] : 1 Co. -xiv. 22 ; Col. ii. 22 ; Jas. v. 3 ; i>ol
€if ίλάχιστόν iari, it results for me in, i. e. I account it,
a very small thing, 1 Co. iv. 3, (els ωφέλ^ιαν, Aesop, fab.
124, 2). d. In imitation of the Ilebr. ry7\ folL by ^7,
fivat el's Ttca or τι stands where the Greeks use a nomi-
native [W. and B. u. s. ; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. tir, 3] :
Mt. xix. 5 and Mk. x. 8 and 1 Co. vi. 16 and Eph. v. 31
ίσονται fit σάρκα μίαν (fr. Gen. ii. 24) ; 1 Jn. v. 8 eis το ΐν
flaiv, unite, conspire, towards one and the same result,
agree in one ; 2 Co. vi. 18 (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 1) ; Heb.
i. 5 (2 S. vii. 14) ; viii. 10. 3. ίκ tivos, a. to be of
i. e. apart of any thing, to belong to, etc. [W. 368 (345) ;
cf. B. 159 (139)] : 1 Co. xii. 15 sq. ; ?κ τίνων, of the num-
ber of: Mt. xxvi. 73 ; Mk. xiv. 69 sq. ; Lk. x.xii. 58 ; Jn.
i. 24 ; vi. 64, 7 1 [R T] ; vii. 50 ; x. 26 ; xviii. 1 7, 25 ; Acts
xxi. 8 ; 2 Tim. iii. 6 ; 1 Jn. ii. 19 ; Rev. xvii. 11, (Xen.
mem. 3, 6, 17) ; ϊκ τοϋ άριθμοϋ τίνων, Lk. .xxii. 3. b. to
he of'i. e. to have originated, sprung, come, from [W. § 51,
1 d.; B. 327 (281 sq.)]: Lk.xxiii. 7; Jn. i. 46 (47); iii. 31
(0 iiv ίκ Tr]s yr]s) ; iv. 22 ; vii. 52 ; viii. 23 ; xviii. 36 ; Acts
iv. 6 ; xix. 25 ; xxiii. 34 ; Gal. iii. 21 ; 1 Jn. iv. 7 ; or iariv
c'l νμων, your fellow-countryman, Col. iv. 9. o. to be of
i. e. proceed from one as the author [W. 366 (344) sq. ;
B. 327 (281)] : Mt. v. 37; Jn. vii. 17; Acts v. 38 sq. ;
2 Co. iv. 7 ; 1 Jn. ii. 16 ; Heb. ii. 11 ; elvai (ξ oipavoi, (ξ
ανθρώπων, to be instituted by the authority of (iod, by
the authority of men, Mt. xxi. 25 ; I\Ik. xi. 30 ; Lk. xx. 4 ;
to be begotten of one, Mt. i. 20. d. to he of i. e. he con-
nected with one ; to be related to, [cf. Win. §51,1 d. ; cf.
in fK, II. 1 a. and 7] : 6 νόμος ονκ εστίν Ικ πίστεως, has no
connection with faith. Gal. iii. 12; e^ έργων νόμου fivai
(Luth. mit Werken umgehen). Gal. iii. 10 ; esp. in John's
usage, to depend on the power of one, to he prompted and
governed hi/ one, and reflect his character : thus fivat εκ
τηΰ Βιαβόλυν, Jn. \\ύ. 44 ; 1 Jn. iii. 8 ; εκ τον πονηρού, 1
Jn. iii. 12; ck τοϋ κόσμου, Jn. .xv. 19; xvii. 14, IC; 1 Jn.
iv. 5; when this expression is used of wickedness, it is
equiv. to produced by the world and pertaining to it, 1
Jn. ii. 16 ; opp. to εκ τον θεοϊι είναι, Jn. viii. 47 ; 1 Jn. iv.
1-3 ; this latter phrase is used esp. of true Christians, as
begotten anew by the Spirit of God (see γεννάω, 2 d.) :
1 Jn. iv. 4, 6 ; V. 19 ; 3 Jn. 1 1 ; « της αληθείας είναι, either
to come from the love of truth as an effect, as 1 Jn. ii.
21, or, if used of a man, to be led and governed by
the love and pursuit of truth, as Jn. xviii. 37 ; 1 Jn. iii.
19; 6 iiv εκ της γης εκ της γης εστί, he who is from the
earth as resjjects origin bears the nature of this his earth-
ly origin, is earthly, Jn. iii. 31. e. to be of i. a. formed
from : Rev. x.xi. 21 ; 1 Co. xi. 8. 4. ev τινι, a. with
dat. of place, to he in i. e. he present, to stay, dwell ; a.
prop. : Mt. xxiv. 26 ; Lk. ii. 49, etc. ; on the surface of a
place (Germ, auf), as ev rfj όδω, Mk. x. 32 and elsewhere;
εν τω άγρω, Lk. xv. 25. at : ev δεξιά τοΰ θεον, Ro. viii.
34 ; to live, dwell, as in a city : Lk. xviii. 3; Acts is. 10;
Phil. i. 1 ; 1 Co. i. 2, etc. ; of God, εν ονρανοίς, Eph. vi. 9 ;
of things which are found, met with, in a ])lace: 2 Tim.
ii. 20, etc. β. things so pertaining to locality that one
can, in a proper sense, be in them or be surrounded by
them, are spoken of in the same way metaph. and
improp., as eivai ev τω φωτί, ev ttj σκοτία : 1 Jn. ii. 9,
11 ; 1 Th. V. 4 ; iv σαρκί, Ro. vii. 5 ; viii. 8, (see σαρξ, 4).
b. tobe in a state or con d i tion [see B. 330 ( 2S4 ) ; cf.
W. § 29, 3 b. and ev, I. 5 e.] : ev εΙρηνη, Lk. xi. 21 ; e'v
εχθρό, xxiii. 12 ; ev κρίματι, ibid. 40 ; εν περιτομί/, εν άκρο-
βυστία, Ro. iv. 10; eV δόξη. 2 Co. iii. 8, etc.; hence
spoken of ills which one is afflicted with : έν ρνσει αίματος,
Mk. V. 25 ; Lk. viii. 43, {iv tji νόσω. Soph. Aj. 271 ; in
morbo esse, Cic. Tusc. 3, 4, 9) ; of wickedness in which
one is, as it were, merged, iv ταΐς άμαρτίαις, 1 Co. xv. 1 7 ;
of holiness, in which one perseveres, iv πίστει, 2 Co. xiii.
5. o. to be in possession if, provided with a thing [ W. 386
(361)] : Phil. iv. 11 ; iv i^ovaia, Lk. iv. 32; iv βάρει (see
βάρος,Άη.), 1 Th. ii. 7 (6). d. to he occupieil in a thing
(Bnhdy. p. 210 ; [see iv, I. 5 g.]) : iv ττ) έορτϊ), in cele-
brating the feast, Jn. ii. 23 ; to he sedulously devoted to
[A. V. give one's self wholly ίο] α thing, 1 Tim. iv. 15,
(Hor. epp. 1, 1, 11 omnis in hoc sum). e. a person or
thing is said to he in one, i. e. in his soul : thus, God (by
his power and influence) in the prophets, 1 Co. xiv. 25 ;
Christ (i. e. his holy mind and power) in the souls of his
disciples or of Christians, Jn. xvii. 26 ; 2 Co. xiii. 5 ; τό
πνενμα της αληθείας, Jn. xiv. 1 7 ; friends are said to be
iv TJI καρδία of one Λνΐιο loves them, 2 Co. vii. 3. vices,
virtues, and the like, are said to be in one : as δόλοί. .Τη.
i. 47 (48) ; αδικία, .In. vii. 18; άγνοια, Eph. iv. 18 ; αμαρτία,
1 Jn. iii. 5 ; αλήθεια, .Τη. viii. 44 ; 2 Co. xi. 10; Eph. iv.
21 ; 1 Jn. i. 8 ; ii. 4, {αλήθεια και κρίσις, 1 Mace. vii. 18) ;
αγάπη, Jn. xvii. 26 ; 1 Jn. ii. 15 ; ό Xoyof αντον (τ. θεοϊι)
ουκ ίστιν iv ήμ'ιν, God's word has not left its impress on
our souls, 1 .In. i. 10; το φως ουκ εστίν iv αντώ, the effi-
cacy or influence of the light is not in his soul, [rather,
an obvious physical fact is used to suggest a spiritual
truth : the light !.•? not in him, does not shine from within
outwards], Jn. xi. 10; σκοτία, 1 .Τη. i. 5 ; σκάνδαλον, 1 Jn.
ii. 10 i. e. there is nothing within him to seduce him to
sin (cf. Diisterdieck and lluther ad loc). Acts xiii. 15
(if ye have in mind any word of exhortation etc. [W.
218 (204 sq.)]). f. iv τω θεω είναι is said α. of
Christians, as being rooted, so to speak, in him, i. e. inti-
m.ately united to him, 1 .Tn. ii. 5 ; v. 20 ; β. of all men,
because the ground of their creation and continued being
is to be found in him alone, Acts xvii. 2S. g. with a
dat. of the pers. to he in, — [i. e. either] among the num-
ber of. Mt. xxvii. 56 ; Mk. xv. 40 ; Lk. ii. 44 ; Ro. i. 6 ;
— [or, in the midst of: Acts ii. 29 ; vii. 44 Rec, etc.]
ΐΐμί
180
h. notcworthv, further, arc the followinc;: tirri rt tvTivi
there is soinethini; (to hiame) in one, Acts xxv. ϋ ; some-
thinj; is (founded [A. V. stand']) in a thing, 1 Co. ii. 5 ;
ούκ ίστίχ iv oibevi ήλλω ή σωτηιιία salvation is (laid up,
cmhodied) in none other, can be e.\i)eeted from none,
Acts iv. 12 ; with dat. of the thing, is (contained, wrapped
up) in something : Ej)!). v. 1« ; Ileb. x. 3; 1 .In. iv. 18.
5. ίί /il ί'πί a. Tivof, to be oJi: cVJ τοϋ &ώματο!, I>k.
xvii. 31 ; tVi T^r κ(φιι\η!, .In. xx. 7 ; to be (set) over a
thing. Acts viii. 27 ; to ])reside, rule, over, Ro. ix. 5. b.
Ttfi, to be at [W. 392 (367)] : em Supatt, Mt. xxiv. S3 ;
Mk. -xiii. 29. c. τινά, to he ujMti une : χάρα ην ('πι τίνα,
was with him, assisted him, Lk. ii. 40 ; Acts iv. 33 ; πνιϋμα
ην ί'πί τίνα, had come upon one, was im|)elling him, Lk. ii.
2.'j, cf. Lk. iv. 18 ; Sept. Is. Ixi. 1 ; add, (Jal. vi. lli ; elvai
iVl TO αυτό, to be (assembled) together [cf. ainas. III. 1],
Acts i. 15; ii. 1, 44 ; of cohabitation, 1 Co. vii. 5 (ace.
to the reading ητ( for liec. σννίρχισβί). 6. fi^i
κατά a. Tti/dt, ti) he against one, to oppose him: Mt.
xii. 30; Lk. Lx. 50; xi. 23; Gal. v. 23; Ro. viii. 31 (opp.
to νπίρ TiKot, as in Mk. ix. 40). b. κατά τι, acconlini/
til something ; κατά σάρκα, κατά irvevpa, to bear the char-
acter, have the nature, of the flesh or of the Spirit, Ro.
viii. 6 ; e'rat κατ άνθρωπον, Gal. i. 1 1 ; κατ άΧηθ(ΐαν, Ro. ii.
2. 7. μ(τά TiiOf, a. to be with (i. e. to associate
with) one: Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. iii. 14; v. 18; Lk. vi. 3; .In.
iii. 26 ; xii. 17; xvi. 32 ; Acts ix. 39, and often in the Gos-
pels ; Rev. xxi. 3 ; of ships accompanying one, Mk. iv. 36 ;
of wh.at is present with one for his profit, 2. In. 2 ; Ro. xvi.
20; Ilebraistically, to be with one i. e. as a help, (of God,
becoming the companion, as it were, of the righteous) :
Lk. i. 66 ; Jn. iii. 2 ; viii. 29 ; xvi. 32 ; Acts vii. 9 ; x. 38 ; xi.
21 ; xviii. 10 ; 2 Co. xiii. 11 ; Phil. iv. 9 ; 2 ,In. 3, cf. Mt.
xxviii. 20, (Gen. xxi. 20 ; .ludg. vi. 1 2, etc.). b. to be
(i. e. to cooperate) with : Mt. xii. 30 ; Lk. xi. 23, (Xen.
an. 1, 3, 5 [al. iVrat]). 8. (Ιμι παρά a. rivdr, to
(have come and so) be from one : Christ is snid eivai
παρά τού θιοϊ), .In. vi. 46; vii. 29; ix. 16, 33; τι παρά
TWOS, is from i. e. given by one. .In. xvii. 7. b. τινί, to
Ite icith one: Mt. xxii. 25; oiic elvai παρά τω Λώ is used
to describe (pialities alien to God, as προσωπολημ-^ία,
Ro.ii.ll ; Eph.vi. 9; αδικία, Ro.ix. 14. c. τινά (τόπον),
by, by the side of: Mk. v. 21; Acts x. 6. 9. πρΟ!
T«ra [cf. W. 405 (37H)], a. towards: προς ίσπίραν ϊστΐ
it is towards evening, Lk. x.xiv. 29. b. by (turned tow-
ards) : Mk. iv. 1. c. with one: Mt. xiii. 56 ; Mk. vi. 3;
ix. 19 ; Lk. ix. 41 ; .In. i. 1 [cf. Mey. ad loc.]. 10. συν
Tivi, a. to associate leith one: Lk. xxii. 56; xxiv. 44;
Acts xiii. 7 ; Phil. i. 23 ; Col. ii. 5 ; 1 Th. iv. 1 7. b. to be
tin: companion of one, to accompani) him : Lk. τϋ. 1 2 [R'''
TTr br. WU]; viii. 38; Acts iv. 13; xxii. 9; 2 Pet. i.
18. e. to be an adherent of one. be on his side: Acts v.
17 ; xiv. 4 [A. V. to hold with], (Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 37). 11.
<ϊμ\ ίπίρ a. Tivoc, to be for one, lo favor his side:
Mk. l\. 40; Lk. ix. 50; Ro. viii. 31, (opp. to ιϊμΧ κατά
Turns), b. τινά, to be above one, to surpass, excel him :
Lk. vi. 40. 12. ίπό τίνα [cf. Β. 341 (293)], a. to
be under (i. e. subject to) one : Mt. viii. 9 R G Τ Tr ; Ro.
iii. 9 ; vi. 14 sq. ; Gal. iii. 10, 25 ; v. 18 : 1 Tim. vi. 1. b.
to be (locally) under a thing : e. g. under a tree, Jn. i. 48
(49); a cloud, 1 Co. x. 1. Further, see each preposition
in its own place.
VI. As in classical (5rcek, so also in the N. T. ii/xt is
very often omitted (cf. Winer § 64, I. 2, Λvho gives nu-
merous exx. [cf. 596 (555) ; 350 (328 s.p)] ; B. 136 (119)
sq.), ί'στίι» most freiiuently of all the parts: Lk. iv. 18:
Ro. xi. 36 ; 1 Co. iv. 20 ; 2 Tim. iii. 16 ; Ilcb. v. 13, etc. ;
in exclamations. Acts xix. 28, 34; in (piestions, Ro. ix.
14 ; ί Co. vi. 14-l(i ; τί yap, Phil. i. 18 ; Ro. iii. 3 ; τΐοΐν,
Ro. iii. 9 ; vi. 15 ; also ei. Rev. xv. 4 ; (Ιμί, 2 Co. xi. 6;
ίσμίν,ίστί, 1 Co. iv. 10 ; eiai, Ro. iv. 14 ; 1 Co. xiii. 8,etc. ;
the impv. ?στω, Ro. xii. 9 ; Heb. xiii. 4 s<|. ; corf, Ro. xii.
9; 1 Pet. iii. 8; ΰη in ivishes, INIt. xvi. 22; (Jal. vi. 16,
etc.; even the subjunc. 3 after ΐκα, Ro. iv. 16; 2 Co. viii.
1 1 [after οπωί], 13 ; often the ptcp. ων. Svrts, as (.<ee B.
§ 144, 18) in Mk. vi. 20; Acts xxvii. 33; in the expres-
sions 01 ΐκ πίριτημής. ό ck πίστεως, ol νπί) νόμον, etc.
[CoMP. : <ίπ-, €v-, (effort,) πάρ-, ονμ-ττάρ-, σνν-(ΐμι.~\
ίίμι. Ιο go. iijiproved of by some in .In. vii. 34, 36, for
the ordinary t ιμι', but cf. W. §6,2; [B. 50 (43). Com•. :
άτΓ-, (ΐ(Τ-, ίξ-, «7Γ-, aivfipx.] *
d'vcKcv, see ϊνικα, tveKtv.
ίί-ΐΓφ, see fi. III. 13.
etirov, 2 aor. act. fr. an obsol. pres. ΙίΠΩ [late Epic and
in composition ; see Veitch] (cf. evos [Curlius § 620]),
Ion. ΕΙΠΩ (like ίρωτάω, tlptuT. : ίλίσσω, ίίλίσσ.) ; sub-
junc. (ΐπω, impv. eiVf, inf. fiVfti', ptcp (ΐπών; 1 aor
(ΐπα (.In. χ 34 R G Τ Tr Wll, fr. I's. Ixxxi. (Ixxxii.)
6; Acts xxvi. 15 L Τ Tr Wll; lleb iii. 10 Lchm. fr.
Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 10; add [Mk. ix. 18 Τ WII Tr txt.];
,Iob xxix. 18; xxxii. 8, etc.: Sir. xxiv. 31 (29); 1
Mace, vi 11, etc. ; cf. Kiihner i. i-17, [esp. Veitch s. v.
pp. 232, 233]), 2 pers. emas (Mt. xxvi. 25, [64] ; Mk. xii.
32 [not Τ WII ; -In. iv. 1 7 where Τ WII again -n-fs ; Lk.
XX. 39]), 3 pers. plur. (ΐπαν (often in LTTrWil [i. e.
out of the 127 instances in which the choice lies between
3 pers. iilur. -πον of the Rec. and -rrav, the latter ending
has been .adopted by L in 56, by Τ in 82, by Tr in 74, by
WH in 104,cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 1 23], e. g. Mt. xii. 2 ; xxvii.
6; Jn. xviii. 30, etc.); impv. ίΐπόν (Mk. xiii. 4 L Τ Tr
WH ; Lk. X. 40 Τ WH Tr mrg. ; Acts xxviii. 26 G I. Τ
TrWH, [also Mt. iv. 3 WH; xviii. 17 Τ WH; xxii. 17
Τ WH Tr mrg. ; xxiv. 3 WH ; Lk. xx. 2 Τ Tr WH ; xxii.
(66) 67 Τ Tr WH ; Jn. x. 24 Τ WH], for the Attic unov,
cf. W.§6, 1 k. ; [Chandler § 775] ; Fritzsche on Mk. p.
515 sqip ; [but Win. (p. 85 (81)) regards {Ιπόν as impv.
of the 2nd aor.; cf., too. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 348; B. 57
(50) ; esp. Fritz. 1. c.]), in the remaining persons (Ιπάτω
(Rev. xxii. 1 7), (ΐπατι (Mt. [x. 27 ; xxi. 5] ; xxii. 4 ; xxvi.
18, etc. ; Mk. [.\i. 3] ; .xiv. 14 ; xvi. 7 ; [Lk. .x. 10 ; xiii.
32; .XX. 3 ; Col. iv. 17]), tmaTavav (Acts xxiv. 20) al-so
freq. in Attic, [Veitch s. v. ; WH. App. p. 1 64 ; Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 219]; ptcp., after the form chiefly Ion.,
("nas ([.In. xi. 28 Tr WH]; Acts vii. 37 L Τ Tr WH
[also xxii. 24 ; xxiv. 22 ; xxvii. 35]); thefut. ΐρώ is from the
Epic pres. (ipa> [cf. Lob. Technol. p. 137] : on the other
181
hand, from ΡΕί2 come pf. fφηκa, 3 pers. plur. (Ιρήκασιν
(Acts xvii. 2S), ί'φηκαν (Rev. xix. 3; see γίνομαι), inf.
(Ιρηκίναι, Heb. X. 15 LTTrWH; Pass., pf. 3 pers.
sing, (ϊρηται, ptcp. (ΐρημίΐΌν ; plpf. ίΐρήκαν ; 1 aor. ϊρρίθην
(Rev. vi. 11 ; ix. 4 and R G Τ WII in Mt. v. 21 S(j(i.;
L Τ Tr WII in Ro. ix. 12, 2i; ; Gal. iii. 16), ["strict"
(cf. Veitch p. 575)] Attic ίρρηθηυ (Mt. V. 21 sqq. LTr;
R G in Ro. ix. 12, 26 ; Gal. iii. 16 ; [cf. B. 57 (50) ; WH.
App. p. 106]), ptcp. ρηθήΐ, ρηθίν ; Sept. for lOS ; tospeak,
say, whether orally or by letter ;
1. with an accus. of the obj. : a. with ace. of the
thing: (Indv'Koyov, Mt. viii. 8 Rec. ; Jn. ii. 22 [L Ϊ Tr
WII]; vii. 36; xviil. ■), 32; ρήμα, Mk. xiv. 72 [Knapp
et al.] ; einelv Aoyoi/ eis τίνα, i. <j- βλασφημίΐν, Lk. .\ii. 10 ;
also κατά Ttvos, Mt. xii. 32 ; o>s (πος (Ιττύν, so fo sai/ (a
phrase f reij. in class. Grk., cf . Weiske, De iilconasmis gr. p.
47 ; Matthiae § 545 ; Delitzsch on Heb. as below ; [Kiih-
ner § 5S5, 3 ; Kriiger § 55, 1, 2 ; (Joodwin § 100 ; W. 449
(419); 317 (298)]), Heb. vii. 9, (opp. to άκριβι: λόγω.
Plat. rep. 1, 341 b.) ; την αΚήθααν, Mk. v. 33; αΚήθ^ιαν
ipS>, 2 Co. xii. 6 ; τοΰτο αληβΐς (ίρηκαί, •Ιη. iv. 18 [W. 464
(433) η.] ; τΙΛπω; ivhat shall I saij? (the expression of
one who is in doubt what to say), Jn. xii. 27 ; πως ΐρύ τό
άμην . . .; 1 Co. xiv. 16; τί epovp^v ; or tl qvv epovpev;
what shall we say? i. e. what rejily can we make? or, to
what does that bring us? only in the Ep. to the Ro.
[W. § 40, 6] viz. iii. 5 ; vi. 1 ; vii. 7 ; ix. 14, 30 ; with wpot
ταϋτα added, viii. 31 ; elne'tv τι π(ρί rivot, Jn. vii. 39 ; x.
41. Sayings from the O. T. which are quoted in the
New are \isually introduced as follows : to ρηθϊν νπο του
[LT Tr WH om. τοϊί] κυρίου Sia τοϋ ττροφήτον, Mt. i. 22 ;
ii. 15 ; υπό τοϋ θίον, Mt. xxii. .'il ; ΰπο του προφήτου Rec.
Mt. xxvii. 35, cf. ii. 17 ; το ρηθίν διά τίνος. Mt. ii. 17 LT
Tr WH, 23 ; iv. 14 ; viii. 1 7 ; xii. 1 7 ; xiii. 35 ; xxi. 4 ;
xxvii. 9 ; το (Ιρημίνον διά τον ττροφ. Acts ii. 16 ; τό (Ιρημί-
νον, Lk. ii. 24; Acts xiii. 40; Ro. iv. 18; ΐρρίθη, Mt. v.
21, etc. ; καβως eipijKfi», Heb. iv. 3. b. with ace. of the
pers. to speak of, designate by words: ov tlnov, Jn. i. 15
[(not WII txt.) ; B. 377 (323) ; cf. Ro. iv. 1 WH txt. {say
o/")] ; ό ρηθ(ίς, Mt. iii. 3. flndv τίνα καλώς. Ιο speak well
of one, praise him, Lk. vi. 26, (ίί elwe'iv τίνα, Horn. Od. 1,
302) ; κακώς, to speak ill of one. Acts xxiii. 5 fr. Ex. x.xii.
28; cf. Kuhner § 409, 2; 411, 5; [W. §32, 1 b. β. ; Β.
146 (128)]. c. with an ellipsis of the ace. αίτά (see
αύτοΓ, II. 3) : Lk. xxii. 67; Jn, ix. 27; xvi. 4, etc. <ri
(ΐπας (so. αυτό), i, e, you have just expressed it in words;
that 's it ; it is just as you say : Mt, xxvi, 25, 64, [a rabbin-
ical formula ; for exx. cf. Schoettgen or Wetstein on vs.
25; al. seem to regard the answer as non-committal,
e. g. Origen on vs. 64 (opp. iii. 910 De la Rue) ; Wiinsche,
Erl'aut. der Evang. aus Talmud usw. on vs. 25 ; but cf.
the ί γώ f Ιμι of Mk. xiv. 62 ; in Mt. xxvi. 64 WH mrg.
take it interrogatively]. 2. the person, to whom a
thing is said, is indicated a. by a dat. : dnflv τι tiw, Lk.
vii. 40, and very often ; ttnov νμϊν sc. α£τό, / (have just)
told it you ; this is what I mean ; let tliis be the word : Mt.
xxTUi. 7 ; cf. Bnhdy. p. 381 ; [Jelf § 403, 1 ; Goodwin
§ 19, 5; esp. (for exx.) Herm. Vig, p, 746], τικί πιρί
τίνος [cf. W. § 47, 4], Mt. xvii. 13 ; Jn. xviii, 34. to say
anything to one by way of censure, Mt, xxi. 3 ; to cast
in one's teeth, tpUTt /lot την τιαραβολήν, Lk, iv. 23. to
tell what anything means, e. g. τύ μυστήρίον, Rev, xvii. 7.
b. by the use of a prep. : προς τίνα [cf. Β. 172 (150);
Kriiger § 48, 7, 13], to say (a thing) to one, as Lk. iv.
23; v. 4; xii. 16, and many other jjlaces in Luke; to
say a thing in reference to one [W. 405 (378)], Mk.
xii. 12; Lk. xviii. 9; xx. 19. 3. elwov, to say, speak,
simply and without an ace. of the obj., i. e. merely to de-
clare in words, to use language ; a. with the addition of
an adverb or of some other adjunct : ομοίως, ^It. xxvi. 35 ;
ωσαύτως, Mt. xxi. 30 ; καθώς, Mt. xxviii. 6 ; Lk. xxiv. 24 ;
Jn. i. 23 ; vii. 3S ; fine διά παραβολής, making use of a
parable [see διά, A. III. 3J he spake, Lk. viii. 4 ; fv παρα-
βολα'ις, Mt. xxii. 1 ; with an instrumental dative : fwrf
λόγω, say in (using only) a (single) word, sc. that my ser-
vant shall be healed, Mt. viii. 8 (where Rec. λό-γον) ; Lk.
vii. 7. b. Avith the words spoken added in direct dis-
course ; so a hundred times in the historical books of the
N. T., as Mt. ix. 4 sq. ; viii. 32 ; [xv. 4 L Tr WH], etc. ;
1 Co. xii. 15 ; [2 Co. iv. 6 L txt. Τ Tr WH. (cf. 4 below)] ;
Heb. i. 5 ; iii. 10 ; x. 7, [15 L Τ Tr WII], 30 ; xii. 21 ; Jas.
ii. 3, 11 ; Jude 9; Rev. vii. 14 ; πίμψας dnev he said by
a messenger or messengers, Mt. xi. 2 sq. The following
and other phrases are freq. in the Synoptic (jospels : 6 bi
άποκριθάς €ίπ(ν, as Mt. iv. 4 ; .\v. 13 ; κα\ άποκριθΑς (ίπιν,
λΐΐ. xxiv.4; άποκριθ(Ίσα ή μητηρ tmfv, Lk. i. 60 ; offoicptielf
ό 2ίμων etn-fK, Lk. vii. 43, etc. ; άποκριβ€ντ(ς δί ίΐτΓον [-παν
Τ Tr WH], Lk. xx. 24 ; but John usually writes άπίκρίθη
KaifinfV. Jn.i. 48(49); ii. 19 ; iii. 10; iv. 10, 13, 17 ; vi.
26,29; vii. 16, 20 [RG], 52 ; i.x. 11 [RG L br.], 30, 36 [L
Tr mrg. om. WH br, κ- tin•,] ; xiii, 7 ; xiv, 23 ; xviii, 30 ;
— [(ΐπακ αντώ λίγοντίς. Mk. viii. 28 Τ WH Tr mrg., cf.
xii. 26]. c. foU. by on : Mt. xxviii. 7 ; Mk. xvi. 7 ; Jn.
vi. 36; vii. 42; viii. 55; xi. 40 ; xvi. 15; .xviii. 8; 1 Jn. i. 6,
8, 10; 1 Co. i. 15; xiv. 23 ; xv. 27 [L br. WII mrg. om.
ότι]- d. foil, by ace. and inf. : τί οίκ ίροίμιν Άβρααμ τοκ
πατίρα ήμων (ύρηκίναι [WH txt. om. Tr mrg. br. tvpηκ■ ;
cf. 1 b. above] κατά σάρκα; Ro. iv. 1. 4. tinfiv some-
times involves in it the idea of commanding [cf. B. 275
sq. (237)] : foil, by the inf., fwre δοθηναι αΰτη φαγ^ν, Mk,
V. 43 ; fiVe τω άδιλφώ μου μιρίσασθαί μ(τ' (μοΰ την κληρο-
νομίαν, Lk, xii. 13 ; όσα hv ΰπωσιν ύμίν (sc. τηριΐν [in-
serted in R G]), τηρ(Ίτ(, Mt. xxiii. 3, (Sap. ix. 8). foil,
by the ace. and inf., 6 (Ιπων (κ σκότους φως λάμψαι, 2 Co.
iv. 6 [R G L mrg., cf. B. 273 sq. (235) ; but L txt. Τ Tr
WH read λάμι /cei, thus changing the construction fr. the
ace. with infin. to direct discourse, see 3 b. above] ;
(ΐπ(ν αυτώ (for ίαυτω, see ouroC) φωνηθηναι τους δουλουί
τούτουΓ, he commanded to be called for him (i. e. to him)
these servants, Lk. xix. 15; cf. W. §44, 3 b. ; Kriiger
§ 55, 3, 13. foil, by "ra with the subjunc. : Mt. iv. 3 ; xx.
21 ; lA. iv. 3 ; to (iVfii- is .idded a dat. of the pers. bidden
to do something, Mk. iii. 9 ; Lk. x. 40 cf. iv. 3 ; Rev.
vi. 11; ix. 4. " Moreover, notice that ϊνα and όφρα are
often used by the later poets after verbs of command-
ing ; " Hermann ad Vig. p. 849 ; cf. W. S 44. 8 ; [B. 237
€4•7Γωί
182
είρηνικόΐζ
(204)]. 5. By a Hebraism (ΧττίΊν iv ίαντω (like inK
ύ'':2, Deut. viii. 1 7 ; Ps. x. 6 (ix. ■^7): xiii. (xiv.) 1 ; E^5th.
tI. 6) is equiv. to to think (because thinking is a silent
soliloquy) : -Mt. ix. 3 ; Lk. vii. 39 ; xvi. 3 ; xviii. 4 (else-
where also \(γ(ΐν in ίαυτω) \ and dneiv (V tj KapSia αϋτοϋ
amounts to the same, Lk. xii. 45 ; Ro. x. 6 ; but in other
passages (Γ^ον, eXfyoi/, tv iavrois is i. q. fv άλλ^λοΐί : Alt.
xxi. 38 ; see λίγω, II. 1 d. 6. ehfiVTiva wiili a pred-
icate accus. to call, sli/le, one : (Kfivovs fine θ(ονς. Jn. .x.
35 ; υμάς (ΐρηκα φίλου!, .In. XV. 1 j : (Horn. Od. 1 :•, 3.54 ;
Xen. apol. Socr. § 15 ; Lcian. Tim. § 20). [Comp. : άντ-,
απ-, προ- eiffoi/.]
€£-irii)s, see el. III. 14.
(Ιρηνενω ; (flpijini) ; 1. to make peace : 1 Mace. vi.
60 ; Dio Cass. 7 7, 1 2, etc. 2. to cultivate or keep peace,
i. e. harmony ; to be at peace, live in peace : 2 Co. .xiii. 1 1 ;
ev ά\\η\οΐ!, Alk. ix. 50; iv cavro'is [TTrairoii], 1 Th.
V. 13 ; μ(τά Tivos, Ro. xii. 18; (Plat. Theaet. p. 180 b. ;
Dio Cass. 42, 15, etc.; Sept.).'
«(ρήνη, -ijf, ή, (apparently fr. (ϊρω to join ; [al. fr. ι'ρω
i. (1- λί'γω; Etym. Magn. 303, 41 ; Vanicek p. 892; Lob.
Path. Proleg. p. 194 ; iSenfmij, Wurzellex. ii. p. 7]), Sept.
chiefly for oi^la ; [fr. Horn, down] ; peace, i. e. 1. a
state of national tranquillity ; exemption from the rage and
havoc of war : Rev. vi. 4 ; πολλ^ (φηνη, Acts xxiv. 2 (3) ;
Ta[WIItxt. om. τα] προς (Ιρήνην, things that look tow-
ards peace, as an arniistice, conditions for the restoration
of peace, Lk. xiv. 32; αΙτ^Ίσθαι (Ιρήνην, Acts xii. 20;
ΐχ(ΐν (Ιρήνην, of the church free from persecutions. Acts
Lx. 31. 2. peace between individuals, i. e. hannoni/,
concord: Mt. x. 34 ; Lk. xii. 51 ; Acts vii. 26 ; Ro. xiv.
17; 1 Co. vii. 15 ; Gal. v. 22 ; Eph. ii. 1 7 ; ir. 3 ; i. q. the
author of peace, Eph. ii. 14 [cf. B. 125 (109)]; eVeip^i^,
where harmony prevails, in a peaceful mind, Jas. iii. 18 ;
όδόί (ΐρήνης, way leading to peace, a course of life pro-
moting harmony, Ro. iii. 1 7 (fr. Is. lix. 8) ; μιτ (Ιρήνης,
in a mild and friendly spirit, Ileb. xi. 31 ; ποκΊν (ιρήνην,
to promote concord, Jas. iii. 18 ; to effect it, Eph. ii. 15 ;
ζητίΐν, 1 Pet. iii. 1 1 ; διώκίΐκ, 2 Tim. ii. 22 ; with μ(τα
πάντων added, Heb. xii. 14 ; τα της (Ιρήνης διώκαν, Ro.
xiv. 19 [cf. Β. 95 (83) ; W. 109 (103 sq.)]. spec, good
order, opp. to ακαταστασία, 1 Co. xiv. 33. 3. after the
Hebr. οΛί!', security, safety, prosperity, felicity, (because
peace and harmony make and keep things safe and pros-
perous) : Lk. xix. 42; Heb. vii. 2; (Ιρήνη κ. άσφάλίΐα,
opp. to 5λ(θρος, 1 Th. v. 3 ; «V (ΐρήντ] eWi τα υπάρχοντα
αϋτοϋ, liis goods are secure from hostile attack, Lk. xi.
21 ; ΰπαγ( (1ς (Ιρήνην, Mk. v. 34, and πορήου (1ς dp- Lk.
vii. 50 ; viii. 48, a formula of wisliing well, blessing, ad-
dressed by the Hebrews to departing friends (D'iSiy'? Τΐ'τ,
1 S. i. 17 ; XX. 42, etc. ; properly, depart into a place or
slate of peace; [cf. B. 184 (160)]) ; πορ(ν(σθαι tV (Ιρήντι,
Acts xvi. 36, and wrayfrt t'v (Ιρήνη, Jas. ii. 16, go in pence
i. e. may happiness attend you; άποΧΰαν τίνα μ(τ (Ιρήνης,
to dismiss one with good wishes, Acts .xv. 33 ; (v (Ιρήνη,
with my wish fulfilled, and therefore happv, Lk. ii. 29
(see άποΚυ(ύ, 2 a. ) ; προπίμπαν τίνα (v dp. free from dan-
ger, safe, 1 Co. xvi. 11 [al. take it of inward peace or
of harmony ; cf. Mey. ad loo.]. The Hebrews in iavok-
ing blessings on a man called out ^^ dS^V (Judg. vi.
23 ; Dan. x. 19) ; from tliis is to be derived the explana-
tion of those expressions which refer ap|iarcntly to the
Messianic blessings (see 4 below); (Ιρήνη τω οίκω
τούτή), let peace, blessedness, come to this householil, Lk.
X. 5 ; υίόί (Ιρήνης, worthy of peace [cf. W. § 34, 3 N. 2 ;
B. 161 sq. (141)], Lk. X. 6 ; ίΚθίτω ή (Ιρήνη eV αΐτόν, let
the peace which ye wish it come upon it, i. e. be its lot,
Alt. X. 13 ; to the same purport (παναπ. ή dp. νμ. «V αυτόν,
Lk. X. 6 ; ή dp. νμ. προς ΰμας (πιστραφήτω. let your peace
return to you, because it could not rest u]ion it, i. e. let
it be just as if ye had not uttered the wish, Mt. x. 13.
4. apec. the Messiah's peace : Lk. ii. 14 ; ό&ος (Ιρήνης, ihe
way that leads to peace (salvation), Lk. i. 79 ; dp. (v
ονρανώ, peace, salvation, is prepared for us in heaven,
Lk. xix.38; (ΰαγγ(\ίζ(σθαι (Ιρήνην, Acts x. S6. 5. acc.
to a conception distinctly peculiar to Christianity, the
tranquil state of a soul a-tsured of its salvation through
Christ, and so fearing nothing from God and content with
its earthly lot, of ichatsoever .tort that is : Ro. viii. 6 ; «V
(Ιρήνη sc. όντ(ς is used of those who, assured of salv.itiun,
tran(iuilly await the return of Christ and the transfor-
mation of all things which will accomi)any that event,
2 Pet. iii. 14 ; [^πληρούν πάσης . . • (Ιρήνης eV τω πιστ(ί(ίν,
Ro. XV. 13 (where L mrg. (νπ (Ιρήνη)] ; (χα,ν cV Χριστώ
(Ιρήνην (opp. to (V τω κόσμω θλίψιν (χ(ΐν), Jn. xvi. 33 ;
(χ(ΐν dp. προς τ. θ(όν, with God, Ro. v. 1, {dp. προς τίνα.
Plat. rep. 5 p. 465 b. ; cf. Diod. 21, 12 ; [cf Mey. on lio.
1. c. ; W. 186 (175) ; 406 (379)]) ; (ίαγγιλίζίσθαι dpήvηv,
Ro. X. 15 [RG Tr mrg. inbr.] ; το (ϋαγγί'Κιοντήί (Ιρήνης,
Eph. vi. 15 ; in the expression (Ιρήνην άφίημί κτλ. Jn. xiv.
27, in which Christ, with allusion to the usual Jewish
formula at leave-taking (see 3 above), says that he not
merely wishes, but gives peace ; ή (Ιρήνη τοΰ Χρίστου,
which comes from Christ, Col. iii. 15 [Rec. 6(οϋ];τοΰ
θ(οϋ, PhU. iv. 7, [cf.W. 186 (1 75)]. Comprehensively of
every kind of peace (blessing), yet with a predominance
apparently of the notion of pence with God, (Ιρήνη is used
— in the salutations of Christ after his resurrect ion, fip^vij
ΰμ'ιν (Djh Dihv), Lk. xxiv. 36 [Tom. WH reject the
cl.] ; Jn. XX. 19, 21, 26 ; in the phrases 6 κύριος τής (ψήνης,
the Lord who is the author and promoter of peace, 2
Th. iii. 16 ; ό 6(6ς τής dp. Ro. xv. 33 ; xvi. 20 ; 2 Co. xiii.
1 1 ; Phil. iv. 9 ; 1 Th. v. 23 ; Heb. xiii. 20 ; in the salu-
tations at the beginning and the close of the apostolic
Epp. : Ro. i. 7 ; 1 Co. i. 3 ; 2 Co. i. 2 ; Gal. i. 3 ; vi. 16 ;
Eph. i. 2; vi. 23; PhU. i. 2; Col. i. 2; 1 Th. i. 1 ; 2 Th.
i. 2; iii. 16; iTim.i. 2; 2 Tim. i. 2; Tit.L4; [Philem. 3] ;
1 Pet. i. 2; V. 14 ; 2 Pet. i. 2 ; 2 Jn. 3 ; 3 Jn. 15 (14) ; [Jude
2] ; Rev. i. 4. Cf. Kling in Herzog iv. p. 596 sq. s. v.
Friede mit Gott ; TTVi.s-.sBibl. Theol. d. N. T. § 83 b.;
lOtto in the Jahrbb. fur deutsch. Theol. for 1867, p. 678
sqq. ; cf. W. 549 (511)]. 6. of the blessed state of
devout and upright men afer death (Sap. iii. 8) : Ro.
ii. 10.•
«Ιρηνικίς, -ή, -όν, 1. relating to pence : ίπιστημαι, the
arts of peace, Xen. oec. 1, 17, (pya, ibid. 6, 1 ; xpf'iai.
ίίρηνοτΓοιβω
183
«s
Diod. 5, 31; often in 1 Mace. 2. peaceable, pacific,
loving peace : Jas. iii. 17; (Plat., Isoc, al. ; Sept.). 3.
bringing peace with it, peaceful, salutary, (see ΐΐμήνη, 3) :
Heb. xii. 11.'
€ΐρηνο--ΐΓθΐ£ω, -ώ : [1 aor. ίΙρηνοτΓοίησα^ ; {^ίΐ^ηνοποίός) ;
Ιο make peace, establish harmony : Col. i. 20. (Prov. x.
10; in ]VIitl., Hermes ap. Stob. eclog. ph. 1, 52 [984].)*
ίΙρηνοτΓοιόϊ, -Of, masc. a peace-maker (Xen. HeO. G, 3,
4 ; Dio Cass.) ; pacific, loving peace : Mt. v. 9 ; [others
(cf. A. V.) dispute this secondary meaning ; see Mejer
ad loo.].*
€Ϊρω, fut. e'pS, see fmov.
its, a Prep, governing the Accusative, and denoting
entrance into, or direction and limit : into, to, towards,
for, among. It is used
Δ. Properly I. of Place, after verbs of going,
coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying,
throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or
of entrance into a place, ί«ίο; and a. it stands be-
fore nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or
one in which an object can be hidden : as eis (τή") πάλιν,
Mt. .xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11 ; Mk. i. 45, and often; eir τ.
οίκον, Mt. ix. 7; σννα-γωγην, Acts xvii. 10 ; πλοΐον, Mt.viii.
23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27;
άβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31 ; ουρανάν, Lk. ii. 15 ; κόσμου, Jn. i.
9 ; iii. 19, etc. ; τα Ibia, Jn. ill; xvi. 32 ; Acts xxi. 6 ;
άποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; els τα &τα, Lk. i. 44 ; els ras ζώνας
or ζώνην. Jit. X. 9 ; Mk. vi. 8, etc. ; fls aepa, 1 Co. xiv.
9 ; CIS irvp, Mk. ix. 22, etc. ; fir airuv, of a demon entering
the body of a man, Mk. ix. 25. with ace. of pers. (Germ.
zu jeinand hinein'), into the house of one (ef. Kiihner
§ 432, 1,1a.; [Jelf § 625, 1 a.]) : ei'r την Λυδίαι/, Acts
xvi. 40 Rec, but here more correctly προς with G L Τ Tr
WII ; cf. W. § 49, a, a. (els ίμαυτόν, Sap. viii. 18). -γίνομαι
eh with ace. of place, see γίνομαι, 5 g. b. before names
of cities, villages, and countries, els may be rendered
simply to, towards, (Germ, nach ; as if it indicated merely
motion towards a destination ; [cf. W. § 49, a, o.]) ; as
ft? Ιεροσόλυμα, els Ααμασκόν, els Bepoiav, etc. ; fif ^πανίαν,
Αίγυπτον, Γαλιλαίακ, etc. ; but it is not to be so translated
in such phrases as els την 'lovSalav yrjv, etc., Jn. iii. 22 ;
Mt. ii. 12 cf. 20, 21 ; eU τα μίρη τήί Γαλιλαι'αί, Mt. ii. 22,
etc. c. elliptical expressions are — f I's ahov, sc. hopov.
Acts ii. 27 [Rec], 31 [not Τ WH] ; see aS^s, 2. ίιτιστοΧαΧ
els Δα/χασκόι», to be carried to D., Acts ix. 2 ; η διακονία
pov η els [L Tr mrg. ev~\ *Ifpov(r. (see in 8ιακυνία, 3), Ro.
.XV. 31 ; cf. Bnhdy. p. 216. d. ft's means among (in
among) before nouns comprising a multitude ; as, els
Tois \r]στάs, Lk. x. 36 ; els [L mrg. fVi] Tas ακάνθαί, Mk.
It. 7 (for which Lk. viii. 7 gives ev μίσω των ακάνθων) ;
or before persons, Jlk. viii. 19 sq. ; Lk. xi. 49; Jn. xxi.
23; Acts xviii. 6; xx. 29; x.xii. 21, 30; xxvi. 17; see
άποστίΚΚω, lb.; or before a collective noun in the
singular number, as fis τον δημον, Acts xvii. 5 ; xix. 30;
els Tw όχλοι/, Acts xiv. 14 ; fir τον \αόν, Acts iv. 1 7. 2.
If the surface only of the place entered is touched or
occupied, els, like the Lat. in, may [often] be rendered
on, upon, (Germ. aitf). [sometimes by unto, — (idioms
vary) J, to mark the limit reached, or where one sets foot.
Of this sort are els to πίραν [A. V. unlo^, Mt. viii. 18 •,
xiv. 22 ; Mk. iv. 35 ; els την γην, Lk. xii. 49 (L Τ Tr WH
(Vi) ; Acts xxvi. 14 ; Rev. viii. 5, 7 ; ix. 3 ; xii. 4, 9 ; els
την κΚίνην, Rev. ii. 22 ; fir ohov, Jit. x. 5 ; Jlk. vi. 8 ; Lk.
i. 79 ; fis την obov, Mk. xi. 8* [L mrg. iv w. dat., 8' RG
Lj ; fts T. aypov, Mt. xxii. 5 ; Mk. xiii. 16 ; els το Spos
[or els op. ; here A. V. uses inio], Mt. v. 1 ; xiv. 23 ; xv.
29 ; xvii. 1 ; Mk. iii. 1 3 ; ix. 2 ; Lk. L\. 28 ; Jn. vi. 3, etc. ;
fit T(i he^ia, Jn. xxi. C ; σ■πeίpeιv e's τι {την σάρκα), Gal. vi.
8 [here A. V. unto ; cf. ElUc. ad loc] ; avair'mTeiv els
τύπον, Lk. xiv. 10; δίχομαι els τάς ayKUXas, Lk. ii. 28;
τvπτeιv els την κeφaληv, Mt. xxvii. 30, [fis την σιαγόνα,
Lk. λ i. 29 Tdf. ; paπiζeιv els τ. σιαγόνα, Mt. v. 39 L Τ Tr
txt. WH, where RGfVi], and in other phrases. 3.
of motion (not into a place itself, but) into the vicinity
of a place ; where it may be rendered to, near, towards,
(cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 81 sq. [for exx. only]) : els τ.
ϋάλασσαν, Mk. iii. 7 G L Τ Tr mrg. ; fir πόλιν, Jn. iv. 5 cf.
28 ; fis TO μvημe'ίov, Jn. xi. 31, 38 ; xx. 1, 3 sq. 8; eγγiζeιv
els etc. Mt. xxi. 1 ; Mk. xi. 1 ; Lk. xviii. 35 ; xix. 29 ; fis
Tois φpaγμoίs• Lk. xiv. 23 ; izliTTeiv els τ. πόδαί, at, Jn. xi. 32
[T Tr WII πρόϊ J ; K\lveiv το πρόσωπον els τ. γην, Lk. .xxiv.
5 ; fis την xelpa, on, Lk. xv. 22. 4. of the limit to
which ; with ace. of place, as far as, even to : Xapneiv
f κ . . . els, Lk. xvii. 24 ; with ace. plur. of pers. to, unio :
Acts xxiii. 1 5 (fis vpas, for R G jrpor) ; Ro. v. 1 2 ; xvi. 1 9 ;
2 Co. ix. 5 [L Tr πpόs^ ; x. 14. 5. of local direc-
tion; a. after verbs of seeing: eπaίρeιv roiis όφβαΚ-
jioirs f'is Ti, Tiva, Lk. vi. 20; β\eπeιv, Lk. ix. 62; Jn. xiii.
22; Acts iii. 4; άvaβλfπeιv, Mk. vi. 41; Lk. ix. 16;
Acts xxii. 13; eμβ\eπeίv, Mt. vi. 26 ; άτevίζetv, q. v. b.
after verbs of saying, teaching, announcing,
etc. (cf. Germ, die Rede richten an etc. ; Lat. dicere ad
or coram ; [Eng. direct one's remarks to or towards^ ;
exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given by Bnhdy. p. 217; Passow
i. p. 802•' ; [L. and S. s. v. L b. 3] ; Kruger § 68, 21,6):
κηpvσσeιv. as ην κηρύσσων els Tas σνναγωγίΐ5 αυτών els
ίιΚην τηνΤαλΐΚ. preaching to the synagogues throughout all
Galilee, Mk. i. 89 (Rec. ev ra'is σνναγ., as Lk. iv. 44
[where Τ ΛΥΙΙ Tr txt. now fit ; cf. W. 416 (387) ; B. 333
(287); but in Mk. 1. c. Τ Tr txt. WII now read η\θev
κηρύσσων κτλ.]) ; το fioyy. fis όλον τ. κόσμον, Mk. xiv. 9 ;
fit πάντα τα ΐθνη, Mk. xiii. 10 ; Lk. .xxiv. 4 7 ; fit vpas, 1
Th. ii. 9 ; άπaγγeXXeιv [Rec. drayy.] τι els. Jlk. v. 14 ; Lk.
viii. 34 ; γνωρίζίΐν, Ro. xvi. 2C ; evaγyeXίζeσθa^, 2 Co. x.
16 ; fis vμάs, 1 Pet. i. 25; λfyf^I' [Rec. ; al. λαλί!!/] fis τ6ν
κόσμον, Jn. viii. 26 ; [λαλfΐI' τον λόγοι/ fis την ΙΙίργην, Acts
xiv. 25 Τ WH mrg.] ; hiap^ipTipeaeai and paprvpe'iv. Acts
xxiii. 11.
n. of Time ; 1. it denotes entrance into a
period which is penetrated, as it were, i. e. duration
through a time, (Lat. in ; Germ, hinein, hinaus) : fis τον
αΙωνα, and the like, see αιών, 1 a. ; fit το bιηveκes, Heb.
vii. 3 ; -x. ], 12, 14; fit erq πολλά, Lk. xii. 19 ; r^ fVt-
φωσκονση {rjpepq) els μίαν σαββάτων, dawning into [A. V•
toicards'] the first day of the week, Mt. xxviii. 1. Hence
2. of the time in w h i c h a thing is done ; because he
it?
184
who does or experiences a thing at any time is conceived
of as, so to speak, entering into that time : fit τόν καιρόν
αυτών, in their season, Lit. i. 20 ; (is τό μίΧΚον sc. trot,
tlie next year, [but b. v. /uXXu, 1. Grimm seems to talce
the phrase indetinitely, thenceforth (ef. Grk. txt.)], Lk.
xiii. 9 ", fit TO μfτaξϋ σύββατον, on the next sabbath, Acts
xiii. 42 ; tit το πάλιν, :ig:iin (for the second, third, time),
2Co.xiii.2. 3. of the (temporal) limit for which
anythinc is or is done; I.at. in; our for, unto: Rev.
ix. 10 ; fir την aviHiiv fi•. ήμίραν, for the morrow, Mt. vi.
34; Acts iv. 3 ; fltrjpfpavKpiafat. 2 I'et. ii. !) : iii. 7; fit
ήμίραν Χριστού, Phil. i. 10; ii. lG;f;i ήμίμαν άπολυτρώ-
σ(ωΓ, Eph. iv. 30. 4. of the (temporal) limit to
which; unto i. e. even to, until: Acts xxv. 21 ; 1 Th. iv.
15 ; fit ίΚίίνην την ήμίραν, 2 Tim. i. 12. On the phrase
fit TeXot. see Tc'Xof, 1 a.
B. Used Metapuouically, eis I. retains the force
of entering into anything, 1. where one thing ii
said to be changed into another, or to be separated into
parts, or where several persons or things are said to be
collected or combined into one, etc. : άποβαίνίΐν tit τι,
Phil. i. 19; yivfaBai its τι, see ■γίνομαι, 5 d. ; tivai tit τι,
see ίΐμ'ι, V. 2 [a. fin.] c. and d. ; στρίφίΐν τι A τι, Rev.
xi. G ; μfτaστpiφfιv, Acts ii. 20 ; Jas. iv. 9 ; μfτaXKάσσfιv,
Ro. i. 26 ; μfτaσχημaτίζfσθat, 2 Co. xi. 13 sq. ; σννοικο-
Soμfϊσθaι, Eph. ii. 'Ji ; κτίζίΐν τινϊι tit, Eph. ii. 15; λαμ-
βάνων τι fit, Ileb. xi. 8 ; \ο-/ίζ€σΰαι ftV τι, see λογίζομαι,
1 a. ί'σχίσθη fit &io. Mt. xxvii. 51 ; Mk. xv. 38, (Polyb.
2, IG, 11 σχίζίται fit δίο μίρη) : hifiv fit δίσμάί, Mt. xiii.
30 [(i om. Tr WII br. fit]: fit tv TfXfioicSai, Jn. xvii.
23 ; συνά -yiiv iit ίχ,.Ιη. xi. 52. 2. after verbs of going,
coming, leading, etc., «r is joined to nouns desig-
nating the condition or state into which one passes,
falls, etc. : flafp^faOai fit την βασιλ. των ovpav. or τον Sfov,
see βασίΚίία, 3 ]>. 97'' ; (is r. ζωήν, Mt. xviii. 8 ; .\ix. 1 7 ;
XXV. 40 ; fit T. χαράν, ^It. xxv. 21, 23 ; fit κόΧασιν αΐώνιον,
ib. 41! ; €ρχ(σθαι fit κρίσιν, Jn. ν. 24 ; fla(f3fp(iv, flσfpχ.
fit πfιpaσμiv, Mt. vi. 13; xxvi. 41 ; Mk. xiv. 38 [T WII
ίλθητΐ~\ ; fpχfσθaι fit το xflpov, Mk. v. 2G ; tit anfXfypov,
Acts .\ix. 27 ; fit ττ^οκοηην, Phil. i. 12 ; μfτaβatvfιv fit τ.
ζωην, Jn. V. 24 ; 1 .in. iii. 14 ; πopfυfσβaι fit θάνατον, Lk.
,\xii. 33 ; ύπά')'(ΐΐ' fit ιίττώλ^ιαν. Rev. xvii. 8, 1 1 ; ύϊτάγίΐν
or TTopfifaeai fit flpήvηv. see (ΐρηνη, 3; νπο<ττρίφ(ΐν fit
διαφθοράν. Acts xiii. 34 ; σvvτp6χfιv fit άνάχυσιν, 1 Pet.
iv. 4; βάΚλίΐν fit θλί^ιν. Rev. ii. 22: nfpiTptnfiv fit
μανίαν. Acts xxvi. 24 ; μίταστρΐφίΐν and στp€φfιv fit τι,
.\cts ii. 20 ; Rev. xi. G : oSij-yf iv t is τ. aXiyif inv [T fv τι) άλ.],
Jn. xvi. 13; al;^μa\ωτίζfιv fit νπακυτ}ν, 2 Co. X. 5 ; napa-
διδόκαι fis θλίψιν, .Mt. xxiv. 9; (is θάνατον, 2 Co. iv. 11 ;
(is κρίμα θανάτου, Lk. xxiv. 20 ; σχτ/κ\ίί(ΐν (is antlBfiav,
Ro. xi. 32; ί'μπίπτίΐν fit κρίμα, (is 6vfιSισμ6v και παγίδα,
tit πfιpaσμόv, 1 Tim. iii. G sq. ; vi. 9. 3. it is used of
the business Avliich one enters into, i. e. of what he
undertakes : ίΐσίρχίσθαι (is τ. κόπον τινόΐ, to take up and
carry on a labor bc^un by another, Jn. iv. 38 ; τρίχιιν
fit noKfpov, ReΛ'. i.x. 9 ; ΐρχομαι fit anoKaXvyj/fit, I come,
in my narrative, to revelations i. e. to the mention of
them, 2 Co. xii. 1.
H. (IS after words indicating motion or direc-
tion or end; 1. it denotes motion to something,
after verbs of going, coming, leailing, calling, etc., and
answers to the Lat. ad, to : καλίΐν Jiva tit γάμον, γάμουί,
δ(ίπνον, etc. to invite to, etc., Mt. xxii. 3 ; Lk. xiv. 8, 10;
Jn. ii. 2 ; καλ(ΐν τίνα tit μιτάνοιαν, etc., Lk. v. 32; 2 Th.
ii. 14 ; ayfiv τινά tit μ^τάνοιαν^ Ro. ii. 4; i•nιστpfφfLv tit
TO φωί, Acts .xxvi. 18 ; ίκτρίπίσθαι tit ματαιοΧογίιιν, I
Tim. i. G ; μίτατίθίσθαι tit ίτίρον tvayytX. (ial. i. C ; χωμή-
σαι fit ptravoiav, 2 Pet. iii. 9, etc. 2. of ethical di-
rection or reference; a. univ. of acts in which the
m i η d is directed loicarils, or looks to, something : βΧίττίΐ»
fit πρόσωπον Tivos (see βλί'πω, 2c.); άπoβXtπfιv fit τ.
μισθιιποδοσίαν, Ileb. .xi. 2G ; άφηραν fit . . . Ιησιιΐιν, ib.
xii. 2 (see A. I. 5 a. above) ; πιστtίfιv tit τίνα, and the
like, cf. under πιστίϋω, πίστκ, ίΧπίζω, [("λτΓΐί], etc. ; (Vi-
θυμίαν fxtiv t'lt τι, directed towards etc. Phil. i. 23 ;
Xtyfiv fit Tiva, to speak Λνΐΐΐι reference to one. Acts ii. 25
(Diod. Sic. 11, 50); Xiytiv τι th τι, to say something
in reference to sometbini;, E])h. v. 32 ; ληλ(ίν τι tit τι,
to speak something relating to something, Ileb. vii. 14;
oμvύfιv (is Ti, to swear with the mind directed towards,
Mt. V. 35; fiSoKtiv tit τίνα, Mt. xii. 18 [RG]; 2 Pet. i.
17. b. forone's advantage or disadvantage; o.
for, for the benefit of, to the a/lvrintai/e of: (is ήμίt, Ejjh.
i. 19 ; (is ipat, 2 Co. xiii. 4 [but ΛΥΙΙ br.]; Eph. iii. 2;
Col. i. 25 ; TrXouTflv (is ifov, to abound in riches made
to subserve (lod's purposes and promote his glory, Lk.
xii. 21 [so too AV. 307 (371) ; but cf. Mey. ed. Weiss ad
loc] ; Christ is said 7rXouT(tv (is navrat, to abound in
riches redounding to the salvation of all men, Ro. x. 12;
πΧίονάζίΐν (If Ti, Phil. iv. 17; (λ(τ;μοσύνΓ)ν ποκίν (is ri
(ovos, Acts xxiy. 17; (is τοϋί πτωχού•,, for the benefit
of the poor, Ro. xv. 26 ; (is rois aylovt, 2 Co. viii. 4 ; ix.
l,cf. 13: )toπIάv(ίsτ^vα, Ro. xvi. 6; Gal. iv. 11 ; tltXpiarov,
to the advantage and honor of Christ, Pliilem. 6; tpya-
ζ€σθαί τι (it τίνα, Mk. xiv. 6 Rec. ; 3 Jn. 5 ; XdToupyos (is
τα ίθνη, Ro. XV. 1 C ; yevoptva fit Καφηρναονμ (for Rec.
(V Kantpvaoip [cf. W. 41G (388) ; B. 333 (286)]), Lk.
iv. 23. β. iinio in a disadvantageous sense, (against) :
μηδίν άτοπον fit αυτόν yfvόμtvov, Acts xxviii. G. C. of
the mood or inclination, affecting one towards anj
person or thing; of one's mode of action towards;
o. in a good sense : αγάπη (is rtva, unto, towards, one,
Ro. v. 8 ; 2 Co. ii. 4,8; Col. i. 4 , 1 Th. iii. 1 2 ; τό αυτό tit
άΧΧήΧουί φpovfΊv, Ro. xii. 16 ; φiXόστopγot, ib. 10; φιλό-
fivos, 1 Pet. iv. 9; χρηστοί, Eph. iv. 32; άποκαταΧ-
Xάσσf^v fit αυτόν [al. αϋτ. see αΰτοΰ]. Col. i. 20 [cf. W.
397 (371)]. p. in a bad sense: apapravfiv tit τίνα (see
άμαρτάνω, b.) ; Χόγον fmflv and βXaιτφημfΊv (is τίνα, Lk.
xii. 10; Mk. iii. 29; βΧάσφημοί (ϊε τίνα, -Vets vi. 11;
βλάσφημων λίγω (is τίνα, Lk. xxii. 65 ; ('πιβουλη tit τίνα.
Acts xxiii. 30 ; ίχθρα, Ro. viii. 7 ; άντιλογια, Ileb. xii.
3: θappfΊv (ts τίνα, 2 Co. X. 1. d. of reference or
relation; with respect to, in reference to; as regards,
(cf. Kiihner ii. 408 c. ; [.Telf § 625, 3 e.]) : Lk. vii. 30 ;
Acts xxv. 20 [TTr WII om. (is] : Ro. iv. 20 ; xv. 2 ; 2
Co. X. 16 ; xiii. 3 ; Gal. vi. 4 ; Eph. iii. 16 ; Phil. i. 5 ; ii.
εκ
185
eti
22; 1 Th. V. 18 ; els τί eSiarao-as; ' (looking) unto what
(i. e. wherefore) didst tliou doubt ? Mt. xiv. 31 ; cf. Her-
mann ad Oed. C. 528 ' (Fritzsche). of the considera-
tion influencing one to do anything: ^fTavoeiu els
Kr'ipvyiia TtKOf, at the preaciiing of one, i. e. out of regard
to the substance of his preaching, Mt. xii. 41 ; 8(χ(σθαί
τίνα fh ονομά Tivosy ilt. X. 41 sq. ; els Biarayas άγγΐλων
($ee διαταγή), Acts vii. 53. e. with ace. of the pers.
towards (Germ, nach einem kin), but in sense nearly
equiv. to the simple dat. to, unto, after verbs of approv-
ing, manifesting, showing one's self: anoheheiy-
μένο! fls υμάί. Acts ii. 22 ; ίρδαξιν ΐνδιίκνυσθαι, Ί Co. viii.
24 ; φανΐρωθίντ^ς els ίμΰί, 2 Co. xi. 6 ( L Τ Tr \VH φαν€-
pwaavTft sc. την γνώσιν). 3. it denotes the end;
and a. the end to which a thing reaches or extends,
i.e.measure or degree: Ιϊφ(ρ€ν ets τριάκοντα, Mk.iv.
8 Τ Tr txt. WII ; cf. B. 30 (27) ; L. and S. s. v. A. III.
2] ; fls τα ήμιτρα, 2 Co. χ. 13 ; (Ις π^ρισσιίαν, 2 Co. χ. 15 ;
«s ίπ^ρβολήν (often in Grk. writ., as Eur. Ilipp. 939 ;
Aescliin. f. leg. § 4), 2 Co. iv. 17. of the limit: ei's to σω-
φρόνων, unto moderation, modesty, i. e. not beyond it, Ro.
xii. 3. b. the end which a thing is adapted to attain
(a use akin to that in B. Π. 2 b. ; [cf. W. 213 (200)]) :
apyos K. άκαρπο; (is τι, 2 Pet. i. S ; evOeTos, Lk. ix. C>i R G ;
xiv. 35 (34) ; (νχρηστο5, 2 Tim. iv. 1 1 ; χ^ρήσιμos, 2 Tim.
ii. 14 RG, δυvaμoΰμ€vos, Col. i. 11 ; 6co3i3.i>CTOf, 1 Th. iv.
9 ; βpaδis, Jas. i. 19 ; σoφόs, Ro. .xvi. 19 ; φω; fls άποκά-
λνψιν, Lk. ii. 32 ; δύναμκ fls etc. Ro. i. 16 ; Ileb. xi. 11 ;
avayfvvav fls, 1 Pet. i. 3 sq. ; άνακαινοω. Col. iii. 10 ; σο-
φΙζ(ΐν τινά (Is, 2 Tim. iii. 15 ; 1σχΰ(ΐν ds, Mt. v. 13. c.
the end which one has in view, i.e. object, purpose;
a. associated with other prepositions [cf. W. § 50, 5] : ίκ
TTiVreat (Is πίστιν, to produce faith. Ro. i. 1 7, cf. Fritzsche,
Meyer, Van IIeii;el. ad loc. : (ξ αΐτον καΐ Si' αϋτοϋ κα'ι ds
αυτόν, answering to his purposes (the final cause), Ivo. xi.
3G ; €^ ov τα πάντα κα\ τfμfΊs (Is αυτόν, 1 Co. viii. G ; δι* αντον
και fls αυτόν (see δω, Α. III. 2 b. sub fin.). Col. i. l(j;
δι' αΐτηϋ fls αυτόν. Col. i. 20. β. shorter phrases : ds
Tovro, to this end, Mk. i. 38 ; [Lk, iv. 43 R G Tr mrg.] ;
tit αυτό τούτο [R. Υ. for this very thing^, 2 Co. v. 5 ; ds
TovTo . . .ίνα etc. Jn. xviii. 37 ; 1 Jn. iii. 8 ; Ro. xiv. 9 ; 2
Co. ii. 9 ; 1 Pet. iv. 6 ; ds αυτό τοϋτο . . . όττωί etc. Ro.
ix. 17; ίνα. Col. iv. 8; Eph. vi. 22 ; ds τί, to what purpose,
Mt. xxvi. 8 ; Mk. xiv. 4 ; ds 5, to which end, for which
cause, 2 Th. i. 11 ; Col. i. 29. y. univ. : βαπτίζω f"f τίνα,
Τί (see βαπτίζω, IT. b. aa.) ; παιδαγωγοί fls τον Χριστόν,
Gal. iii. 24 ; σνγκ(κ\(ΐσμίνοι ds τ πίστιν, that we might
the more readily embrace the faith when its time should
come. Gal. iii. 23 ; φρονρούμΐνοι ds την σωτηρίαν, that
future salvation may be yours, 1 Pet. i. 5 ; άγοράζ(ΐν ds
T. (ορτήν, Jn. xiii. 29 ; fls ο\(θρον aapxas, 1 Co. v. 5; ds
T. ήμίτϊραν διδασκάλίαν, Ro. xv. 4, and in many other e.xx.
esp. after verbs of appointing, choosing, preparing, do-
ing, coming, sending, etc. : κ(ΐμαι. Lk. ii. 34 : Phil. i. 17
(16) ; 1 Th. iii. 3 ; τάσσω, 1 Co. .xvi. 15 ; τάσσομαι. Acts
xiii. 48 ; αφορίζω, Ro. i. 1 ; Acts xiii. 2 ; προορίζω, Eph.
L 5 ; 1 Co. ii. 7 ; άίρίομαι. 2 Th. ii. 13 ; τίθιμαι, 1 Tim. i.
12; 1 Pet. ii. 8: καταρτίζω, Ro. ix. 22 sg.: αποστέλλω.
Heb. i. 14 ; -κίμπω, 1 Th. iii. 2, 5 ; Col. iv. 8 ; Pldl. iv. IG
[L br. (W] ; 1 Pet. ii. 14 ; ίρχομαι, Jn. ix. 39 ; jroiei» τι fir,
1 Co. X. 31 ; xi. 24. Modelled after the Hebr. are the
phrases, eydpeiv τίνα ds βασϊΚία, to he king, Acts xiii. 22 :
άνατρίφ(σβαί τίνα ds υ'ιον. Acts vii. 21 ; τ(θ(ΐκά σ( ds
φώs ίβνών. Acts .xiii. 47 (fr. Is..xlLx. 6 Alex.); cf. Gesenius,
Lehrgeb.p.814; B. 150(131);[W.§32, 4b.]. 8. «jti,
indicating purpose, often depends not on any one pre-
ceding word with which it coalesces into a single phrase,
but has the force of a telic clause added to the already
complete preceding statement ; thus, ds δόξαν του θ(οϋ,
Ro. XV. 7; Phil. i. 11; ii. 11 ; ds φόβον, that ye should
fear, Ro. viii. 15 : els (νδ(ΐξιν, that he might show, Ro.
iii. 25 ; ds ζωην αΐώνιον, to i)rocure eternal life (sc. for
those mentioned), ,Jn. iv. 14 ; vi. 27, (in which passages
the phrase is by many interpp. [e. g. De AVette, Mey.,
Lange; cf. W. 397 (371) note] incorrectly joined with
aKλfσθuι and μίν(ΐν [cf. Thol., Luthardt, al.]) ; Ro. v.
21 ; 1 Tim. i. 16; Jude 21 ; add, Mt. viii. 4 ; xxvU. 7;
Mk. vi. 11 ; Acts xi. 18 ; Ro. x. 4; Phil. i. 25 ; ii. 16 ; 2
Tim. ii. 25 ; Rev. xxii. 2, etc. e. ds τό foil, by an inf.,
a favorite construction with Paul (cf. B. 264 (227) sq. ;
Hai-msen in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1874,
pp. 345-360), is like the Lat. ad with the gerundive. It
is of two kinds ; either oa. fir τό combines with the
verb on which it depends into a single sentence, as πάρα-
δώσουσικ αΰτοι» . • ■ ds το ίμπαίξαι, (Vulg. ad deludendum),
Mt. XX. 19 ; (Is TO στηυρωθήναι. Jit. xxvi. 2 ; οικοδομηθψ
aerai els το τα (Ιδωλόβυτα (σθκιν, (A'^ulg. aedificahilur ad
manducandum. idolothijta), 1 Co. viii. 10 ; μη olxlas ούκ
(χ(τ( els TO (σθί(ΐν κ. nlveiv, 1 Co. xi. 22 ; els to προσφίρ(ΐρ
δώρα Te και Θυσία5 καθίσταται, (Vulg. ad ojf'erendfi ynunint
et hoslias), Heb. viii. 3 ; add, lleb. L\. 28 ; 1 Th. ii. 16;
ir. 9 ; Phil. i. 23 ; or ββ. f I'j τό with the inf. has the
force of a separate teUc clause (equiv. to ίνα with the
subjunc), [Meyer (on Ro. i. 20) asserts that this is its
uniform force, at least in Ro. (cf. his note on 2 Co. viii.
6) ; on the other band, Ilarmsen (u. s.) denies the telic
force of els τό before an inf. Present; cf. also W. 329
(309) ; esp. B. as above and p. 265 note; EUic. on 1
Thess. ii. 12; and see below, d. fin.]: Lk. xx. 20
R G ; Acts iii. 19 [T Vt'll πpόs'\ ; Ro. i. 11 ; iv. 16, 18 ;
xi. 11 ; xii. 2; xv. 8, 13; 1 Co. ix. 18; x. 6 ; Gal. iii. 17;
Eph. i. 12, 18; 1 Th. ii. 12, 16 ; iii. 5; 2 Th.i. 5 ; ii. 2, 10;
Jas. i. 18 ; Heb. ii. 1 7 ; vii. 25 ; ix. 14, 28 ; xii. 10 ; xiii. 21 ;
fi'f TO μή, lest, 2 Co. iv. 4 ; 1 Pet. iii. 7. d. the end by
which a thing is completed, i.e. the result or ef-
fect: Actsx.4; Ro. vi. 19 (fir T. άΐΌμια» [but WH br.],
so that iniquity was the result); x. 10; xiii. 14; 1 Co.
xi. 17; 2 Co. ii. 16 ; Eph. v. 2, etc. ; els τό with Lnf. so
that [cf. ββ. above] : Ro. i. 20 ; 2 Co. viii. 6.
C. Constructions in some respects pecttliab.
1. Various forms of pregnant and brachylogical
construction (W. §66, 2; [less fully, B. 327 (282)];
Bnhdy. p. 348 sq.) : σώζeιv τίνα ds etc. to save by trans-
lating into etc. 2 Tim. iv. 18 [see σώ^ω, b. sub fin.] : δια-
σώffι>', 1 Pet. iii. 20 (Sept. Gen. xix. 19, and often in
Grk. writ.j ; μισθοϋσβαι f'pyOTas fir τ. άμπe\ωva, to go
180
eU
into etc. Mt. nx. 1 : (Χΐνθίρονν dt etc Ro. viii. 21 ; άπη-
StSovai Tiya (Ις AiyvTrrov, Acts \ii. il ; ΐνοχος (ΐς yeeuvav,
to <lo[)art into etc. [cf. 15. 1 70 (US) note], IMt. v. 21' ; κλάν
fit Tirar, to break and distribute anion•; etc. Alk. viii. 1 1) ;
άσφα\ίζ(σθαι (it το ξΰΧον, Acts xvi. 24 ; κτάσθαι χρνσον
f <£ Γ. ζώ.'α{, Mt. χ. 9 ; (ΐτίτυλιγμίνον ds ίνα τόποχ, rolled
up and laid away in etc. Jn. xx. 7. 2. Akin to this is
the very common use of fir after verbs signifyinn; re.st
or con tinuance in a place, because the idea of a pre-
vious motion into the place spoken of is involved (ef. W.
§ 50, 4 b.; B. 332 (286) sci.; Kuhner ii. p. 317; [Jelf
§ (J46, 1] ; Bnluly. p. 21.5 ; [yet ef. also exx. in Soph. Lex.
s. V. els, 1]) : (ΰρίθη (ΙςΊχζωτον, sc. transferred or carried
off to. Acts viii. 40, ef. 39 πιχϋμα κυμίηυ rjpwaae τόν Φίλιττ-
ΐΓον, (Ksth. i. 5 τοίί ίθν(σι τοις fvpfduoiv ds τ. πόλιν ;
so φαυΰσθαι is foil, by fir in 2 Mace. i. 33 ; vli. 22). SeX
/If την euprijv ποιησηί ds 'Ifpoff. sc. by going, Acts xviii. 21
Kec. ; likewise ίτοίμως (χω ππo^αI'fίl' els 'lepoa. Acts xxi.
13 {Ήφ(η(Γτίων ds Έκβΰτανα anedave, Ael. \,h. 7, S) ;
avve)ia\ev ήμίν els Άσσον, Acts xx. 14 ; ή μίλΧουσα 8όξα
els ήμα5 άποκαλνφθηναι, wliich shall be revealed (and
conferred) on us, Ro. viii. 18. KaToncelv els πόΧιν, els yrjv,
to eome into a city and dwell there, Mt. ii. 23 ; iv. 13;
Acts vii. 4, [of. Num. xxxv. 33; 2 Chr. xi.x. 4etc.]; also
TTapoiKelv, Heb. xi. 9 {evoiKelv, Xen. an. 1, 2, 24); στηναι,
{στηκίναι (because it is nearly equiv. to to have placed
one's self) «Γί «, Lk. vi. 8 ; Jn. xx. 19, 26 ; 1 Pet. v. 12 ;
καθησθαι, to have gone unto a place and to be sitting
there, Mk. xiii. 3; 2 Th. ii. 4, (on this use of these two
verbs in Grk. auth. cf. JNIatthiae ii. p. 1344 sq. ; [cf. W.
and B. u. s.]). elvai els \vith ace. of place see elpl, V. 2 a. ;
Qi els T. οικόν μου sc. oi/rff, I>k. ix. 61 ; toIs els μακράν sc.
οίσι (tienn. ins Feme hiii hefindlich), Acts ii. 39. συνά-
yeaSoL foil, by els with ace. of place : to go to a place ami
assemble there, Mt. xxvi. 3 and Acts iv. .5 R T, (1 Esdr.
V. 46 (47) ; ix. 3). Sometimes a word implying motion,
occurring in the same sentence, seems to have occasioned
the connection of a verb of rest with fit, as it were bv
a kind of attr.action [B. u. s.] : e^epxopevos ηiλ^ζeτo eis τΰ
opoSy Lk. xxi. 37; aKoCa-as . . . vvTtt σιτία els hXyvirrov
[Kec. σϊτα ev Aiy.] e^antoTeiKev e\c. Acts vii. 12 ; τταραδώ-
σονσιν vμas ds avvedpia κ• els avvay<tyyas Bap^aeaUe, Mk.
xiii. 9 [W.416 (387), B. 333 (287)]; Cnaye, νίψαι [but
L br.] els τ. κοΧυμβηθραν, Jn. ix. 7, although vlnTeauai
els Ti can also be used (as Xoΰeσθaι els το βά\αν(Ιον, Alci-
phr. epp. 3, 43 ; els Χουτρωνα:, Athen. 10 p. 438 e. ; Χοΰ-
eiv Tiva els σκήφην, Epict. diss. 3, 22, 71), since the water
with which one bathes flows down Into the pool. Cf.
Bei/er, De praepositt. els et ev in N. T. permutatione.
Lips. 1824, 4to.
D. Adverbial Phra.ses (cf. Matthiae § 578 d.) :
fis Tc'Xof (see tcXos, la.); els το πάΧιν, see A. Π. 2 above :
els TO navreXes, perfectly, utterly, Lk. xiii. 1 1 [ef. W. § 51,
1 c] ; fis Kevov (see xevos, 3) ; ds ίτπάντησιν and els άπάν-
τησιν, see each subst.
In composition fit is equiv. to the Lat. in and ml.
its, μία, ev, gen. ev6s, μιάs. evos, a cardinal numeral,
one. Used 1. univ. a. in opp. to many; and
a. a<lded to nouns after the manner of an adjective:
Mt. XXV. 15 (opp. to ne'vre, δυο) ; Ro. v. 12 (opp. to πάν
Tfi) ; Mt. XX. 13 ; xxvii. 1 5 ; Lk. xvii. 34 [but L WII br.] ;
Acts xxviii. 13 ; 1 Co. x. 8 ; Jas. iv. 13 [R G], and often ;
πάρα μίαν se. πΧτγ^ην [W. 589 (548) ; Β. 82 (72)], save
one [W. § 49, g.], 2 Co. xi. 24 ; with the article, 6 els
άνθρωπο5, the one man, of whom I have spoken, Ro. v.
15. p. substantively, with a partit. gen., — to denote
one, whichever it iiiaij he : μίαν των evToXoiv, one conunand-
ment, whichever of the \vhole number it may be, Mt. v.
19 ; add, Mt. vi. 29 ; xviii. 6 ; Mk. ix. 42; Lk. .xii. 27 ;
xvii. 2, 22; or, that one is required to be singled out
from a certain number: Lk. xxili. 39; Jn. xix. 34, etc.
foil, by eK with the gen. of a noun signifying a whole, to
denote that one of {out of) a company did tliis or that:
Mt. xxii. 35 ; xxvi. 21 ; xxvii. 48 ; Mk. xiv. 18 ; Lk. xvii.
15 ; Jn. i. 40 (41) ; vi. 8, 70 ; xii. 2 [T λΥΉ Tr mrg. in
br.], 4 [Tr om. f'/c]; xiii. 21, 23 [Rec. cm. f'<c] ; xviii. 26;
Rev. v. 5; vii. 13 ; ix. 13 ; xiii. 3 [Rec. om. eV]. γ. absol. :
Mt. xxiii. 8-10 ; Ileb. ii. 11 ; xi. 12; and where it takes
the place of a [iredicate, Gal. iii. 20 [cf. W. 593 (551)],
28 (ye that adhere to Christ make one person, just as
the Lord himself) ; avvayetv els ev, to gather together into
one, Jn. xi. 52 ; jroie'iv τα άμφύτιρα ev, E|)h. ii. 14 ; with
the article, ό fts, the one, \vhom I have named, Ro. v. 15,
19. b. in opp. to a division into parts, and in ethi-
cal matters to dissensions: ev σώμα, πολλΰ μίΧη, Ho.
xii. 4 S(j. ; 1 Co. xii. 12, 20; ev elvai, to be united most
closely (in will, spirit), Jn. x. 30; xvii. 11, 21-23; ev evX
πvevμaτι, μια. ψυχ!), Phil. i. 27 cf. Acts iv. 32, (cf. Cic.
Lael. 25 (92) auiicitiae vis est in eo, ut unus quasi ani-
mus fiat ex pluribus) ; ΰπό μι!^s (see από. III. p. 59''),
Lk. xiv. 18. c. with a negative following joined to the
verb, fis . . . ού or μη, (one . . . not, i. e.) no one, (more
ex|jlicit and emphatic than oiSfir) : ev f'| airSiv oϋπeσeΐ•
ται, Mt. X. 29 ; besides, Mt. v. 18 ; Lk. xi. 46 ; xii. 6 ; this
usage is not only Hebraistic (as that language has no
particular word to express the notion of rwne), but also
(ireek (Arstph. eccl. 153 ; thesm. 549 ; Xen. an. 5, 6, 12;
Dion. Hal. verb. comp. 18, etc.), cf. W. 172 (163) ; [B.
121 (106)]. 2. emphatically, so that others are
excluded, and fis is the same as a. α single (Lat. unus
i. q. unicxis) ; joined to nouns: Mt. xxi. 24 ; Mk. viii. 14
(ουκ . . . d μη ίνα άρτον) ; Mk. xii. 6 ; Lk. xii. 52 ; Jn. xi.
50; vii. 21 ; 1 Co. xii. 19; Eph. iv. 5, etc. ; absol.: 1 Co.
ix. 24 ; 2 Co. V. 14 (15) ; 1 Tim. ii. 5 ; Jas. iv. 12, etc. ;
oiSf fir, not even one : Mt. xxvii. 14 ; Jn. i. 3 ; Acts iv.
32 ; Ro. iii. 10 ; 1 Co. vi. 5 [R G] ; ουκ ίσην ews ivos [there
is not so much as one], Ro. iii. 12 fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3;
cf. Lat. omnes ad unum, all to a man. Neut. ev, one thing,
exclusive of the rest; one thing be/ore all others: Mk. x.
21 ; Lk. xviii. 22 ; x. 42 [but WH only txt.] ; Jn. ix. 25 ;
Phil. iii. 13 (14); Jas. ii. 10. b. alone: oi8e\s . . . el μη
els ό BeOS, Mk. ii. 7 (for which in Lk. v. 21 μάνο5 6 flfcis) ;
Mk. X. 18 ; Lk. χλΊΗ. 19. C. one and the sayne (not at
variance with, in accord with one's self) : Ro. iii. 30;
Rev. xvii. 13, 17 [L om.] ; xviii. S; to iv φρove^v, Phil,
ii. 2 [WH mrg. αυτά] ; ev eivat are one, i. e. are of the
187
ζίσΐργομΛΐ
same importance and esteem, 1 Co. iii. 8 ; fit το Iv eivat
(see ei/ii, V. 2 d.), 1 Jn. v. 8; more fully to ίν και τύ αυτά,
1 Co. -xii. 1 1 ; Ik κα\ Tu αυτό τινι, 1 Co. xi. 5. 3. the
numerical force of eif is often so weakened that it hardly
differs from the indef . pron. t'is, or from our indef. article
(W. 117(111). [cf. 29 note 2; B. 85(74)]): Mt. viii. 19
(eif ■γραμματ(ίις) ; xLx. 16 ; xxvi. 69 ; Jn. vi. 9 (τταώάριον
ΐν, where Τ Tr WII om. and L br. ΐν) ; Rer. viii. 13; ix.
13, (Arstph. av. 1292; Xen. mem. 3, 3, 12; Plat, de rep.
6 p. 494 d. ; legg. 9 p. 855 d., etc.; esp. later writ.;
[Tob. i. 19 ; ii. 3 ; 3 Esdr. iv. 18 ; Gen. x.xi. 15 ; 2 S. ii.
18 ; Judith .xiv. 6]; so the Hebr. inS, Dan. viii. 3; Gen.
xxii. 13; 1 S. i. 2; 1 K. xxi. (xx.) 13; see Gesenius,
Lehrgeb. p. 655) ; tU τκ (Lat. untis aliquis), a certain
one ; one, I know not who; one who need not be named:
with a subst. Jlk. xiv. 51 (L Tr WH om. tit) ; or foil,
by a gen. Mk. xiv. 47 where L Tr om. WH br. tIs ; foil.
by €K, (ξ, with gen. : Lk. xxii. 50 ; Jn. xi. 49, (fi/ τι των
ρημάτων, Judith ii. 13, and often in Grk. writ. ; cf. Wet-
stein on Mk. xiv. 51 ; Matthiae § 487). 4. it is used
distributively [W. § 26, 2 ; esp. B. 102 (90)] ; a. cts . . .
κα\ eh, one . . . and one : Mt. xvii. 4 ; xx. 21 ; xxiv. 40 L Τ
Tr WH, 41 ; xxvii. 38 ; Mk. iv. 8 [R G L WH mrg.], 20
[RG LTrmrg. WH mrg. in br.] ; ix. 5 ; x. 37; xv. 27; Lk.
ix. 33 ; Jn. XX. 12; Gal. iv. 22; (in Grk. auth. fls μΐν . . .€it
Se, as Aristot. eth. 6, 1, 5 ; Xen. Cjt. 1, 2, 4) ; with the art.
prefixed, ό eis Ihe one, Lk. xxiv. 18R G ; foil, by 6 els, the
one . . . the other, Mt. xxiv. 40 R G ; foil, by ό ίτιρος, Mt.
vi. 24: Lk.vii. 41: xvi. 13''; xvii. 34 R WH ; xviii. 10
R G Τ WH mrg. ; Acts xxiii. 6 ; e'r (without the art.)
. . . ό fi-epos: Lk. xvi. 13' ; xvii. 34 G L Τ Tr ; xviii. 10
L Tr \VH txt. ; nevre . . . ό c's . . . ό άλλος, Rev. xvii. 10.
b. ett ίκαστος, every one : Acts ii. 6 ; xx. 31 ; Eph. iv. 16 ;
Col. iv. 6 ; foil, by a partit. gen. : Lk. iv. 40 ; xvi. 5 ; Acts
ii. 3 ; xvii. 27 ; xxi. 26 ; 1 Co. xii. 18 ; Eph. iv. 7 ; 1 Th.
ii. 11 ; cf. B. 102 (89) sq.; άνα eh «αστοί (see ανά, 2),
Rev. xxi. 21. c. a solecism, com. in later Grk. (cf.
Lcian. soloec. [Pseudosoph.] § 9; W. § 37, 3 ; B. 30 (26)
sq.; Fritzscheon Mk. p. 613 sq. ; [5'φΛ. Le.x. s. v. Ko^fir]),
is Kaff (h, and in combination καθείς, (so that either κατά
is used adverbially, or th as indeclinable) : ό καθ' eh. i. q.
eh eKaaTos, Ro. xii. 5 (where L Τ Tr WH το καθ" eh, α.<
respects each one, severally ; cf. what is said against this
reading by Fritzsche, Com. iii. p. 44 sq., and in its favor
by Meyer) ; with a partit. gen. 3 Mace. v. 34 ; eh Kaff
[T WH Tr mrg. κατά^ eh, ever;/ one, one hy one, Mk. xiv.
19 ; .Jn. viii. 9 ; Kaff eva, Kaff ev, (as in Grk. writ.), of a
series, one by one, successirdy : Kaff ev, all in succession,
Jn. xxi. 25 [not Tdf.] ; Kaff eva Travres, 1 Co. xiv. 31
(Xen. venat. 6, 14) ; Kaff ev ίκαστον. Acts xxi. 19 (Xen.
C\T. 1, 6, 22 (27) ; Ages. 7, 1) ; u^eij oi καθ' eva ΙκαστοΓ,
ye severally, every one, Eph. v. 33. 5. like the Hebr.
ΊΠΝ, eh is put for the ordinal πρώτος, first [W. § 37, 1;
B. 29 (26)] : μΙα σαββάτων the first day of the week, Mt.
xxviii. 1 ; Mk. xvi. 2; Lk. xxiv. 1 ; Jn. xx. 1, 19 ; Acts
XX. 7 ; 1 Co. xvi. 2 [L Τ Tr WH μία σαββάτον'] ; (in Grk.
writ, so used only when joined with other ordinal num-
bers, as eh καΙ τριηκοστάς, Hdt. 5, 89 ; Diod. 16, 71. Cic.
de senect. 5 una et octogesimo anno. [Cf. Soph. Lex.
iUr -άγω : 2 aor. eltrriyayov : [pres. pass, eΐσάyoμat] ; [fr.
Hom. down] ; Sept. cliietly for S'^ri ; 1. to lead in :
τινά foil, by els with ace. of place, Lk. xxii. 54 [Tr mrg.
br.] ; Acts ix. 8 ; xxi. 28, 29, 37 ; xxii. 24 (for Rec. Sye-
σθαι) ; ί>δί, Lk. xiv. 21 ; the place into Avhich not being
expressly noted : Jn. xviii. 16 (sc. eir τηναυλήν) ; Heb. i.
6 όταν . . . eiaayayri, \iyei, God, having in view the time
when he shall have again brought in the first-bom into the
world (i. e. at the time of the παρουσία) says etc. 2.
to bring in, the place into which not being expressly
stated : Acts vii. 45 (sc. e'ls τί]ν yijv) ; Lk. ii. 27 (sc. ek
TO lepov). [CoMP. : παρ -f ισάγω.] *
εΐα-ακονω : fut. eiaaKovaopai; Pass., 1 aor. eia-qKoiae^ ;
1 fut. eiσaκovσθήσoμaι ; Sept. very often for >*ρψ, but
also for nj>• to answer ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. II. 8, 97
down ; to hearken unto, to give ear to ; i. e. 1. to give
heed to, comply with, admonition ; to obey (Lat. obedio
i. e. ob-audio) : τινός, 1 Co. xiv. 21, (Deut. i. 43 ; ix. 23 ;
Sir. iii. 6, etc.). 2. to listen to, assent to, a request;
pass, to be heard, to have one's request granted ; a. of
persons offering up prayers to God : Heb. v. 7 (on which
see από, I. 3 d. fin.) ; Mt. vi. 7. b. of the prayers offered
up: Lk. i. 13; Acts x. 31, (Ps. iv. 2; Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.)
29 (20), etc.).•
cUr-8c'xo|iai : fut. eίσ&eξoμaι ; to receive kindly, i. e. con-
textually, to treat with favor : τινά, 2 Co. vi. 1 7. [From
Pind. and Soph. down. Stj?. cf. be\opai, fin.] *
(ί<Γ-ίΐμι, inf. elaievai; impf. eiirrieiv; (€i/xt [cf. B. 50
(43)]); [fr. Hom. down]; to go into, enter: foil, by «i
with the name of the place (cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc.
Pt. ii. p. II), Acts iii. 3 ; xxi. 26 ; Heb. ix. 6 [W. 267
(251)] ; πράς τίνα, Acts xxi. 18.*
€ΐσ•-€ρχομαι ; fut. eισeλeΰσoμaι ; 2 aor. elστfλθov, 2 pers.
plur. eΊσήλθaτe ( Lk. xi. 52, but Rec. -flf Te), impv. eϊσeλθaτe
(Mt. vii. 13 but R G-irre, [3d pers. sing, -ύάτω Mk. xiii.
15, RG-5e'τω]); see άπίρχομαι, init. ; pf. etσeλήλυθa, 3
pers. plur. eiσeλήλvθav (Jas. v. 4, for RG eίσeληλίθaσιv,
see yivopai, init.) ; Sept. mostly for ΝΪ3 ; to go or come
into or in ; to enter ; 1. prop., of men and of animals :
foil, by CIS with specification of the place (cf. Win. De
verb. comp. etc. Pt. ii. p. 12 sq.), as into a house,
into a city, Mt. viii. 5; x. 12 ; Mk. ii. 1 ; xi. 11 ; Acts
-xxiii. 16, 33, and often, without specification of place,
— when mention of it has already been made, as Mt. ix.
25 ; [Mk. vii. 25 Tdf.] ; Lk. vii. 45 ; xiv. 23 ; xv. 28 cf.
25 ; xxiv. 3 ; Acts i. 13 ; v. 7, 10 ; x. 25 ; 1 Co. xiv. 23 sq. ;
or it can be easily supplied from the context, as Lk. xiii.
24; .xvii. 7; els is also added to signify among: Acts
xix. 30; XX. 29; eiaepx. δια τίνος, to enter (a place)
through something : Sia της τήλης, to enter the king-
dom of God (compared to a palace) through the gate,
Mt. vii. 13; Lk. xiii. 24 ; δια της θύρας eh τ. ανλήν, Jn.
χ. 1 sq. ; add, Mt. xix. 24 GT Tr txt. WH txt. ; [Mk. x.
25 R" L mrs. Tr mrg] ; Lk. xviii. 25 R G Τ Tr txt. WH ;
elaepx- ίπο την στ^γι/κ, by entering to come under the
roof, i. e. enter my house, Mt. viii. 8 ; with adverbs :
€ΐσερ•χομαι
188
όίΓον, Mk. xiv. 14; lleb. vi. 20; SiSt, Mt. xxii. 12; ίσω,
Mt. xxvi. 58 ; f:'r with iico. of pers., into one's liouse,
Acts xvi. 40, but on this pass, see (if, A. I. 1 a. (ίσίρχ. npU
Tiva, to one, i. e. into his house, visit, Mk. xv. 43 ; Lk. i.
2-i; Acts .X. 3; xi. 3; xvi. 40 G LTTrWII; .xxviii. S ;
Rev. iii. 20; to an assembly of persons. Acts xvii. 2.
Moreover tlie following deserve notice : a. the ])hrase
ίΐσίρχισθαι και (ξ(ρχ€σΰαι, to go in and out, (the Ilebr.
nXjl N13, or reversed Ni3? nSJ, usually denotes one's
whole mode of living and acting, Deut. xxviii. 6 ; 1 S.
xxix. C, etc.; ef. Gescnius, Thesaur. i. p. 1S4 sq.),is used
of familiar intercourse with one : tv τταντί χρόνω ω (Ιση\θ€
κ. (ξη\θ(ΐ' (φ' ήμα( ό Kvptos, equiv. to (:ση\θ( ΐφ' ήμάί Κ.
ιξϊΐ\θ( άφ' ήμ. Acts i. 21, (Eur. Phoen. ό:'Λι t's οίκου! (tcrjXof
κ. (ξηΜ [\V.e24sq. (580); but cf. Β. 390 (^34)]); fig-
uratively, of moral jjursuits unimpeded by difficulties,
Jn. X. 9. b. flatpx- tis is joined Λvith nouns designat-
in"• not a place, but what occurs in a place : «is rout
yapovs, Mt. XXV. 10 ; t's την χαραντοϋ κυρίου, 21, 23. c.
(ϊσίλθι'ϊν its TLva is used of demons or of Satan taking
possession of the body of a person: Mk. L\. 25 ; Lk. viii.
30; xxii. 3; Jn. .\iii. 27. d. ofthings; — as of food, that
enters into the eater's mouth, Mt. .xv. 11; Acts xi. 8;
figuratively, hope is called άγκυρα (Ισ^ρχομίνη t'ls το ΐσω-
Tfpov τοϋ καταπετύσματος, i. e. we firmly rely on the hope
that we shall be received into heaven, Ileb. vi. 19 ; cries
of complaint are said (Ισίρχ. eii τα &τά rtvos, i. e. to be
heard, .las. v. 4 ; of forces and influences : πνιϋμα ζωηι
{ΐηΎΐ\θ(ν fv αύτοΐζ (Tr om. WII br. ei/ ; Rec. en αυτούς
[15. 338 (291 )]), a pregnant construction, the breath of life
entered into and remained in them. Rev. .\i. 11 [\V. § 50,
4; B. 329 (283)]. 2. Metaph. used, a. of entrance
into any condition, state of things, society, employment :
fis T. ζωήν, Mt. xviii. 8 sq. ; xix. 1 7 ; Mk. ix. 43, 45 ; ei'r
T. βασιλ. των oipaviiv or τοΰ fleoC (see βασί\(ία, 3 p. S?•") :
Tois (Ισ(ρχομίνου!, that are trying to enter, or rather,
that have taken the road to enter, are (engaged in) en-
tering, Mt. xxiii. 13 (14) ; Lk. xi. 52 ; used absol. of
those who come into (i. e. become members of) the
Christian church, Ro. .xi. 25, (hence in 1 Co. v. 1 2 sq. oi
«σω and ot ίξω are distinguished) ; cis τ. κατάπαυσίν, Ileb.
iii. 11,18; iv. 1, 3, 5 sq. 10 S(|. ; ης την 8όξαν, I,k. xxiv. 2G;
iis 7Τ(φασμόν, to come (i. e. fall) into temptation, ^It. .xxvi.
41 ; Mk. xiv. 3S [T AVU ?λ %(] ; Lk. xxii. 40, 4(1 : (ίς
τόκ κύπον τινός (see eis, Β. I. 3), Jn. iv. 38. (ΐσίρχ^σθ.
(ΐς τ. κόσμον, to enter the world [cf. W. 18], is a. i. tp
to arise, come into existence, begin to be [i. e. among men] :
used thus of sin and death, Ro. v. 12; ot death. Sap. ii.
24; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 3, 4 ; of idols. Sap. xiv. 14. β.
of men, to come into life : whether by birth, Antonin. C,
56 ; or by divine creation, Philo, ojiif. mund. § 25. γ.
to come before the public : 2 .In. 7 [Rec] ; to come- to men,
of Christ, Jn. xviii. 3 7 ; (ίσ(ρχόμ. tif τ. κόσμον, ichen he
Cometh into the world, i. c. Avhen he was on the point of
entering it, viz. at his incarnation, Heb. x. 5. b. of
thoughts coming into the mind : (Ιση\θ( διαλογισμός iv
αυτο'ις, a pregnant construction, there came in and estab-
lished itself within [al. take cv outwardly : among (cf.
SiaXoy. fin.)] them, Lk. ix. 46 [cf. W. 413 (385)]. The
Grks. fr. Horn, down use ίΙσίρχ(σθαί τίνα of thoughts and
feelings, as φόβης, μένος, ττόβος, etc. [cf. W. 427 (398).
Co.Ml'. CTT-, παρ-, συν- ίΐσίρχομαι.^
<1<Γ-καλ(ομαι, -οϋμαι, (mid. of €ΐσκα\{ω) : 1 aor. j)tcp.
€Ϊσκα\(σάμ(νος; to call in unto one's self, to invite in to
one's house : rivii. Acts .x. 23. [Polyb., al.] *
(llcr-oSos, -ου, ή, (όδο'ϊ), [fr. Ilom. on], an entrance, i. e. .
both the place or iray leading into a place (as. a gate), and
the act of entering ; only in the latter sense in the N. T.
With gen. of place, τών άγιων, entrance into the holy place,
i. e. reception into heaven, Ileb. x. 19 [but in 20 a|)par-
ently called όδύί] ; c.'f τ. βασιΚ(Ιαν τοϋ κυρίου, 2 Pet. i.
11 ; of the act of coming forward to administer an oflice,
Acts xiii. 24 ; with προς τίνα added, 1 Th. i. 9 ; ii. 1."
el(r-in)Sati>, -ώ : 1 aor. (Ισιπίιδησα ; to spring in : (ΐς t'uv
όχ\ον. Acts xiv. 14 Rec. (see ΐκπηδάω) ; to rush in inqiet-
uously. Acts xvi. 29. (Xen., Dem., al. ; Sept. Am. v. 1 9.) *
ct(r<ropcvo|i.ai (pass, of (ΐσπορ(ίω to lead into, Eur. El.
1285); impf. (ΐσίττορίυόμην (Mk. vi. 50); to go into,
enter; 1. prop. a. of persons: foil, by fis with ace.
of place, Mk. i. 21 ; vi. 56 ; xi. 2 ; Acts iii. 2 ; όπου, Mk.
v. 40 ; oi, Lk. xxii. 10 [1ί G, cf. B. 71 (62) ; \V. § 54, 7] ;
without specification of place Λvllere that is evident from
the context, Lk. viii. IG ; xi. S3 ; xix. 30 ; κατά τοί /s οίκους,
to enter house after house [A. V. every house, see κατά,
II. 3 a. a.]. Acts viii. 3 ; προς τίνα, to visit one at his
d\velling. Acts xxviii. 30 ; (ΐσπομ(ϋ(σθαι κ. ΐκπορίΰισθαι
μ(τά τίνος, to associate with one. Acts ix. 28 (ΐνώπιόν τίνος,
Tob. V. 18; see (Ισέρχομαι, 1 a.). b. when used of
things it is i. q. to be carried into or put into: so of
food, which is put into the mouth, Mk. vii. 15, IK, [19] ;
]Mt. XV. 17, (see (ίσίρχομαι, 1 d.). 2. metaph.: | os
την βασιλήαν τοϋ θ(οϋ, Lk. xviii. 24 Τ Tr txt. \\ Η ; see
βασιλίία, 3 p. 9 7''] ; of affections entering the soul, Mk.
iv. 19 ; see (Ισέρχομαι, 2 b. (Of the earlier Grk. writ.
Xen. alone uses this verb, Cyr. 2, 3, 21 ; Sept. often
for Ni3.) *
£ΐσ--^ρ€χω: 2 aor. (Ισί&ραμον; to run in: Acts xii. 14.
[Thuc, Xen., al.] *
ίΐσ-φί'ρω; 1 aor. (ΐσην^γκα; 2 aor. (Ισήνιγκον; [pres.
pass, βισφίρομαι ; fr. Horn, down] ; to briny into, in or to ;
a. ΤΪ, foil, b}• (IS with ace. of place, 1 Tim. vi. 7 ; pass.
Heb. xiii. 11 ; τινά sc. (it τ. οΐκίαν, Lk. v. 18 sq. ; [τινίι
(ΤΓί τ. σνναγωγάς etc. Lk. xii. 11 Τ Tr txt. WH] ; τι «t
τας άκοάς τικοΓ, i. e. to tell one a thing. Acts xvii. 20
(φί'ρίΐκ Tt (I's τα &τά τίνος. Soph. Aj. 149). b. to lead
into : Tiva (is πfιpaσμόv, Mt. vi. 13 ; Lk. xi. 4. [CoMP. :
πα/)-(ϊσφί'ρω.] '
etra, adv. of time, then ; next ; afier that : Mk. viii. 25 ;
Lk. viii. 12; Jn. xiii. 5 ; xix. 27; xx. 27 ; Jas. i. 15; with
the addition of a gen. absol. to define it more precisely
Mk. iv. 1 7 ; as in classic Grk., it stands in enumerations
to mark a sequence depending either on temporal
succession, as Mk. iv. 28 (see ('το/) ; 1 Co. xv, 5-7 ((ΐτα
[Τ cTTeiTa, so in mrg. Tr WH] . . . ίπιιτα ■ . . tnevra . . .
(ΐτα [Τ (7Γ(ίτα, so in mrg. L Tr AVH]) ; 1 Co. xv. 24
(fnei.-a . . . (Γτα) ; 1 Tim. ii. 13 ; or on the nature of the
189
things enumerated, 1 Co. xii. 28 (πρώτον . . . ifxncpov
. . . τρίτον . . ■ ϊπΐίτα . . ■ (Ιτα for which L Τ Tr WII
'π€ΐτα); [1 Tim. iii. 10] ; in arguments it serves to add
a new reason, furthennore (Germ, sodann) : Heb. xii. 9.*
elre, see ei. III. 15.
itrtv a very rare [Ionic] form for elra (q. v.) : Mk. iv.
28 Τ WII. [Cf. Kuenen el Cobet, Nov. Test. etc. praef.
p. x.xxiii. ; Lob. Phryn. p. 124, also Pathol. Gr. Element,
ii. 155 ; Steph. Thesaur. s. v. and s. v. tneiTev.'^*
ίϊωθο, see (θω.
cK, before a vowel ΐξ, a preposition governing the gen-
itive. It denotes as well e.xit or emission out of, as
sejiaration from, sometliing with whicli there has been
close connection ; opp. to the prepositions els into and iv
in: from out of, nut from, forth fro7n, from, (Lat. e,ex), [cf.
W. 364, 366 (343) sq. ; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used
I. of Place, and 1. univ. of the place from
which; from a surrounding or enclosing place,
from the interior of: άρτος, ayyeXos, φως (ξ οΰρανοΰ,
.In. vi. 31 sq. ; Acts ix. 3 [here 11 G από]; Gal. i. 8;
ανατολή, Sivapis (ξ νψουΓ, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 4!) ; esp. after
verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, free-
ing, removing, releasing, etc. : ηκίΐν ίκ της ΊουδαίαΓ
fir τ. Γαλίλαι'ακ, Jn. iv. 47; (ξίρχ^σθαι ΐκ τίνος out of the
body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25 ; v. 8 [here
L mrg. από] ; vii. 29 ; of power emanating from the
body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258) ; W. 346 (324) ; Mey.
ed. Weiss ad loc] ; c'lc των μνημ(ίων, Mt. viii. 28 ; xxvii.
.'>3 ; ϊκπορ(ί(σθαι, Mt. xv. 11, 18 sq. ; καταβαίνίΐν e<c
τοϋ ovpavov, Mt. xxviii. 2; .In. i. 32; iii. 13: vi. 33; (ξ-
ayfiv. Acts xii. 1 7 ; φ(ϋ•γ(ΐν. Acts xxvii. 30 ; καλιΊν, Mt. ii.
15 ; metaph. cV τον σκότους ΐΐς το φως. 1 Pet. ii. 9 ; (κβά\•
\(ΐν το κάρφος €κ τον οφθαλμού, Mt. vii. [4 (R Gαπό)], 5;
Lk. vi. 42 (opp. to cV τω όφθάλμώ) ; τι (κ τοϋ θησανροϊι. ΛΙΐ.
χϋ. 35 [but see under II. 9 below] ; xiii. 52 ; το baipoviov
(Κ τίνος, out of the body of one, Mk. vii. 26 ; άποκνλίαν
τον λίθην (Κ [LTrtxt. από; cf. W. 364 (342) note] της
βύρας, Mk. xvi. 3 ; aXpciv, .In. xx. 1 sq. ; κινίω. Rev. vi. 14 ;
σώζΐΐν €K -γης Αιγντττου, Jude 5 ; δίασώ^^ιΐ' €κ της θαλάσσης.
Acts xxviii. 4. Metaph., e< της \(ΐρός τίνος, out of the
power of one [cf. B. 182 (158)] : after ίξ(ρχ(σθαι, Jn. x.
39 ; after άηάγιιν. Acts xxiv. 7 [liec.]; after άρπαζαν, .Τη.
χ. 28 sq. ; after ΐξαφ^Ισθαι, Acts xii. 1 1 ; after ρίκσθαι,
Lk. i. 74; after σωτηρία. Lk. i. 71. aiier Ttivftv, of the
thing out of wliich one drinks [differently in II. 9 below] :
(V τοϋ ττοτηρίον, Mt. xxvi. 27; Mk. xiv. 23; 1 Co. xi. 28; ck
ττίτρας, 1 Co. x. 4 ; ίκ τον φρίατος, •Ιη. iv. 1 2 ; after ΐσθί(ΐν,
of the place whence the food i? derived, ex τοΐι Upov, 1 Co.
ix. 13 [but Τ Tr WII read τα e<c κτλ.], of the place forth
from which one does something : διδάσκιιν ίκ τον πλοίου,
Lk. V. 3 [here Tdf. iv etc.]. It is joined also to nouns
designating not a place, but what is done in a place :
ίγ€!ρ(σθαί €κ τοϋ 8eiiTvov, Jn. xiii. 4 ; avakvdv ix των
■γάμων, Lk. xii. 36. 2. from the midst (of a group,
number, company, community) of many; a. after
verbs of going, leading, choosing, removing,
etc. a. before collective nouns, as (ξη\(θρ(νω ίκ τοϋ
λαοϋ, Acts iii. 23 ; προβιβάζω or συμβιβάζω ίκ τοϋ όχλου.
Acts xix. 33; (κλίγαν ίκ τον κόσμου, .Τη. χν. 19. «
μίσον τινών άφορίζίΐν, Mt. xiii. 41) ; ίξίρχισθαι, Acts xvii.
33; άρπάζ(ΐν. Acts xxiii. 10; ίξαίρ^ιν, 1 Co. v. 13; ίκ
■πάσης φυλής κ γλώσσης άγοράζιιν. Rev. ν. 9 ; ίκ παντός
■γίνους συνά•γ(ΐν, Mt. .xiii. 4 7. β. before plurals : άνιστάναι
τινά ίκ τίνων. Acts iii. 22; ίκ νικρών. Acts xvii. 31 ; άνί-
σταταΐ τις ίκ ν€κμών. Acts χ. 41 ; xvii. 3 ; iyeipeiv τινά ίκ
νεκρών, Jn. xii. 1, 9, 17; Acts iii. 15; iv. 10; xiii. 30;
Heb. xi. 19, etc. ; η άνάστασις ίκ vtKpu>v, Lk. xx. 35 ; 1 Pet.
i. 3 ; avayeiv τινά ίκ νεκρών, Ro. .χ. 7 ; ίκλίγ^ιν, Acts i. 24 :
XV. 22 ; καλ(Ίν, Ro. Lx. 24 ; iyev(To ζήτησις ίκ των etc. Jn.
iii. 25 [but cf. Π. 1 b. ; W. 368 (345)]. b. before words
signifying quantity: after eh, as Mt. x. 29; xxvi. 21 ;
Lk. xvii. 15, and often; πολλοί, Jn. xi. 19, 45, etc.; ot
■πλί'ιονς {πλeΊoveς), 1 Co. .xv. 6 ; ovδeίς, Jn. vii. 19; x\-i.
5, and elsewhere ; χίλιάSeς ίκ πάσης φνλής, Rev. vii. 4 ;
after the i η def. τις, Lk. xi. 15 ; xii. 13 ; Jn. vi. 64 ; vii.
48; Tts yvvfj ίκ τοϋ όχλου, Lk. xi. 27 ; with rives to be
added mentally [cf. W. 203(191) ; B. 158 (138)] : Jn. ix.
40 [(?) better, vii. 40]; xvi. 17; Rev. xi. 9, (1 Esdr. v.
45 (44)) ; τινάς : Mt. xxiii. 34 ; Lk. xi. 49 ; xxi. 1 G ; 2 Jn.
4; Rev. ii. 10; cf. /^ntoc//e, Conjectanea in N. T. p. 36
note ; after the interrog. τις, who f Mt. vi. 27 ; Lk. xi.
5, etc. ; Tt'f πατήρ, Lk. xi. 11 [L Τ Tr WH] ; preceded
by a generic noun : άνθρωπος ίκ των etc. Jn. iii. 1. o.
(ivai CK τίνων, to be of the number, company, fellowship,
etc., of; see ei^i, V. 3 a. 3. from a local surface,
as sometimes the Lat. ex for de ; down from : καταβαίν(ΐν
ίκ τον όρονς (Ilom. H. 13, 17 ; Xen. an. 7, 4, 12; Sept.
Ex. xLx. 14 ; xxxii. 1 ; Deut. ix. 15 ; x. 5 ; Josh. ii. 23),
Mt. xvii. 9 (for the more com. άπο τοϋ όρ. of Rec. and the
parallel pass. Mk. ix. 9 [here L WII txt. Tr mrg. ίκ'] ;
Lk. ix. 37; [cf. Mt. viii. 1]); θρΧξίκτης κeφaKής άπόλ-
λυται (unless we prefer to regard ίκ as prompted here
by the conception of the hairasfi.xed in the skin),
Lk. xxi. 18 ; Acts xxvii. 34 [here L Τ Tr WH άπά; cf.
W. 364 (342) note] ; iKnlirretv ίκ τών χ(ΐρών, of the chains
with which the hands had been bound, Acts xii. 7 ;
κρίμασθαι ίκτινος. Acts .xxviii. 4, (1 Mace. i. 61 ; 2 ^.'acc.
vi. 10: so the Grks. fr. Horn, down); φayeιv ίκ τοϋ
θυσιαστηρίου, the things laid upon the altar, Heb. xiii.
10. Akin to this is eξeλθ('ίv ίκ τοϋ eeov, from an abode
with God (for the more usual άπο τ. ίίοϋ), Jn. viii. 42.
4. of the direction whence; ίκ δeξίώv, Lat. α der-
tra, lit. from i.e. (Germ, zu) on the right, see Seξιός■, so
ίκ δί|ι5Γ, ίξ άpιστepάs. sc. χώpas [or χeφός which is
sometimes expressed ; W. 592 cf. 591 ; B. 82 ( 72)], (also
in Grk. writ., as Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 15) ; ίξ ίναντίας, over
against, Mk. xv. 39 (Hdt. 8, 6 ; Sir. xxxvii. 9; 1 Mace,
iv. 34 ; Sap. iv. 20) ; metaph. [W. § 51, 1 d.] ό ίξ ίναν-
τίας [Α. V. he that is of the contrary part], our opponent,
adversary. Tit. ii. 8 ; ίκ ριζών, from the roots, i. e. utterly,
Mk. xi. 20 (Job xxviii. 9; xxxi. 12). 5. of the con-
dition or state out of which one comes or is brought :
σώζ€ΐν ίκ θανάτου. Heb. v. 7 ; Jas. v. 20 ; epχeσθaι ίκ
[Lchm. άπο] θ^ίψ€ως. Rev. vii. 14; μ(τaβaίveιv ίκ τοϋ
θανάτου eίς τ. ζωήν, Jn. v. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 14 ; iyep0T}v{ii ίξ
I Ζπνου, Ro. xiii. U [cf. W. 366 (344) note]; ζώιη -e; ίκ
190
€Κ
νεκρών, alive from being dead (i. c. who had been dead
and -n-ere alive again), Ro. vi. 13 ; ^ω^ ex νικ^ιων i. e. of
those that had been νικροί, Ilo. xi. l.i, (eXej/ofpot €κ δούλου
καΧ πλούσιο? €κ τττωχον γίγονώϊ, Dein. |>. 270 fin. ; (κ
ττλουσίου ττίνητα •γ(νίσθαι και ίκ βασι\€ως ΐδιώτην φανηναι^
Xen. an. 7, 7, '2S ; -γίγνομαί τνφ\6ς (κ dfSopKOroi, Sopli.
Ο. τ. 4 J4 ; (Χαφον (ξ άν&μοί -/(νίσθαι, PalaejA. 3, 2 ;
add, Lys. adv. Ergocl. init. ; Tac. aun. 1, 74 e.\ pauperi-
bus d'.vites, ex contemtis raetuendi). Also of the state
out of the midst of which one does sometiiing : (κ πολλήί
0Κίψ(ω^ γράφίΐν, 2 Co. ii. 4. 6. of any kind of sep-
aration or dissolution of connection willia thing
or person [cf. B. 1.57(138)]: άνατταϋίσθαι ίκ (released
from) των κάπων. Kcv. xiv. 13; άΐ'ανηφ€ΐι> Ικ (set free
from) τηί τον διάβολου παγι'δθ9, 2 Tim. ii. 21! ; μΐτηνοών €κ
etc. Iiev. ii. 21 sij. ; ix.iOscj.; xvi. 1 1 ; «πιστρ/φΕΐι/ [i> Τ
Tr Wll ίττοστρ.^ ίκ ([Ldwo], by severing their connec-
tion with)T^r fiToX^f, 2 Pet. ii. 21 ; rqpt'iv τίνα ίκ etc. to
keep one at a distance from etc. [cf. B. 327 (281)], Jn.
xvii. 15; Rev. iii. 10; also ^ιατηρύν. Acts xv. 29; νίκάν ίκ
Tivot, by conqncst to free one's self from the power of one
[cf. B. 147 (12S) ; AV. 3G7 (344)], Rev. xv. 2; Ιψηΐισθαι U
Ttjs yfis, to be so lifted up as to dissolve present relations
to the earth [' taken out of the sphere of earthly action '
Westcott], Jn. xii. 32 ; (\(ύθ(ρος ϊκ πάντων (elsewhere
always άπα tivos), 1 Co. ix. 19. 7. Ilebraistieally :
eKSiKfii/ TO αιμά tivos ίκ )(eipot tiios (TO Dl Dp3, 2 K.
Lx. 7), to avenge the blood (murder) of one at the hand
of (on) the slayer, Rev. xix. 2 [B. 182 (158)] ; κρίναν τό
κρίμα Ttvbs cK tivos, to judge one's judgment on one,
vindicate by ven ;c;!nce on [ef. B. u. s.], Rev. xviii. 20
(cf. Sept. Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 84).
H. of the Origin, Source, Cause; 1. of gen-
eration, birth, race, lineage, nativity ; a. after
verbs of begetting, being born, etc. : iv γαστρΊ ίχιιν
(Κ Tims, Jit. i. 18 cf. 20 ; κοίτην ίχ^ιν « τ. Ro. ix. 10 ; yev-
vav Tiva ίκ with gen. of the woman, Mt. i. 3, 5 S(j. 16 ;
γίνισθαι eic yvvaiKos, to be born of a woman, Gal. iv. 4
cf. 22 sq. ; γίννάσθαι ίξ αιμάτων, ϊκ 6(\ηματο! aapKOS, •Τη.
i. 13 ; (Κ TTjs σαρκόί, Jn. iii. G ; ίκ πopvfίas, Jn. viii. 41 ;
fyfipeiv Tivi τ€κνα(κ,Μΐ.νύ.ϋ•, Lk. iii. 8 ; (t'is) f κ καρπού
TJjr ^σφύus αντοΰ. Acts ii. 30 (Ps. cxxxi. (cxxxii.) 1 1 ) ; ή
CK φύσίωΓ άκροβνστία, Ro. ii. 27. In a supernatural
sen.'O : τό πνιΰμα τό ck θιοϋ sc. ov, from the divine nature
[cf. W. I!).•! (l';2)], 1 Co. ii. 12 cf. Rev. ii. 11 ; men are
said yevvaauai (κ πν(ίιματο5, Jn. iii. 5 sq. 8 ; yeyevvημfvoι
fivni €K θ(οϋ (see yfwaw, 2 d.), and to the same purport
(Lvai CK θ(οΰ, 1 Jn. iv. 4, G ; v. 19, (see f 'μι, V. 3 d. [and
cf. 7 below]). b. eivai, γιν^σβαι, ίμχισθαι, etc., ix with
the name of the city, race, people, tribe, family, etc., fn
sprinrj or orlr/lnnlefrom, come from : « Nafnpc r «rat, Jn.
i. 46 (47) ; (K πόλίω$•,1. 44 (45) ; ίξί>ν, sc. πατίρων Γ?1. Ro.
ix. 5 ; f| o«ou Tii'os. Lk. i. 27; ii. 4 : ix yfraut, Phil. iii.
5 ; Acts iv. G ; ΈφαίοΓ ίξ 'Εβραίων, Phil. iii. 5 ; f κ φυ\η5,
Lk. ii. 36 ; Acts .xiii. 21 ; Ro. xi. 1 ; i| Ιούδα, Heb. vii.
14 ; f κ cnlppaTos tivos, Jn. vii. 42 ; Ro. i. 3 ; xi. 1 ; with-
out a verb : ίξ ίθνων αμαρτωλοί, sinners of Gentile birth.
Gal. ii. 15 ; of the country to which any one belongs : (ivat
(K TTJs f^ovaias Ήρώδον, Lk. xxiii. 7 ; i'| enap\las. Acts
xxiii. 34 ; όων ίκ τψ yr/s, Jn. iii. 31. 2. of an j oth-
er kind of origin: xanvos (κ ttjs 8όξηs τοΰ θ(οϊι. Rev.
.XV. 8; t<c των Ιουδαίων ί'στι, conies from the Jews, Jn.
iv. 22 ; fivai tx tivos, to proceed from any one as the au-
thor, Mt. V. 37; Jn. vii. 17, 22; Ro. ii. 29; 2Co. iv. 7; 1
Jn. ii. 16, 21, etc. ; with ίστίν to be mentally supplied : Ro.
xi. 36 ; 1 Co. viii. 6, (see «r, B. II. 3 c. a.) ; I Co. xi. 1 2 ;
2 Co. iii. 5 ; V. 18 ; Gal. v. 8 ; tpya (κ τοΖ narpos μου, works
of wliich my father is the author, i. e. which I, endued
with my father's power, have wrought, Jn. x. 32 ; οικο-
δομή fK BeoZ. whose author is God, 2 Co. v. 1 ; χάρισμα. 1
Co. vii. 7 ; δΐδομίνον ix τον πaτpάs, Jn. vi. 6.5 ; add, .In.
xviii. 3 ; 1 Co. vii. 7. ή ix β(ηΰ δικαιοσύνη, tliat comes
from God, i. e. is adjudged by him. Phil. iii. 9 ; ij <'^ νμων
fv ήμ'ιν [WII txt. ήμ. fv ΰμ.] (ϊγάτπ), love jiroceediug from
you and taking u]) its abode in us, i. e. your love the in-
fluence of which we feel [W. 193 (181 sq.) ; B. 157
(137)], 2 Co. viii. 7 ; ό^ξ ίιμων fijXos, your zeal, 2 Co. ix.
2 [R G ; cf. AV. u. s. note; B. u. s.] ; βλασφημία ΐκ tivos,
calumny from i. e. disseminated by. Rev. ii. 9 [not Rec] ;
fivat e^ ovpavov, (^ ανθρώπων, see (ΐμί, V. 3 c. ; with the
suggested idea of a nature and disposition derived from
one's origin ; oix ίστιν ix τον κύσμον τηντον, is not of
earthly origin nor of earthly nature, Jn. xviii. 36 ; ex τΓ;γ
yfjs (στιν, is of an earthly nature, Jn. iii. 31 ; ix tjjs y^r
λαλίΐν, to speak as an earthly origin prompts, ibid. ; hu-
man virtues are said to be from God, as having their
prototype in God and being wrought in the soul by his
power, η άyάπη ix τον θίον Ιστιν, 1 Jn. iv. 7, 3. of the
material out of which a thing is made, etc. : ij γννη ix
τον avbpos, from "one of his ribs," 1 Co. .xi. 12; στίφα-
vov (ξ ακανθών, Mt. xxvii. 29 ; Jn. xix. 2 ; add, Jn. ii. IS;
ix. 6 ; Ro. ix. 21 ; 1 Co. xv. 47 ; Rev. xviii. 12 ; xxi. 21.
Akin is 4. its use to note the price, because the
money is, as it were, changed into that which is bought,
(the simple gen. of i)rice is more common, cf. W. 206
(194) ; [B. § 132, 13]) : άγopάζfιv τι ex tivos, Mt. xxvii. 7,
(Bar. vi. [i. e. ep. Jer.] 24) ; χτάσθαι ex. Acts i. 18, (ώνίΐ-
σθαι ix, Palaeph. 4G, 3 sq.) ; σνμφωνι'ιν (κ ^ηναρίον (be-
cause the agreement conies from the promised denary [cf.
W. 368(345); B. u. s.]), JIt. xx. 2. Cognate to this is the
phrase ποκΊν Ιαυτω φίλovs ex τον μααωνά. Lk. xvi. 9. 5.
esp. after neut. and ])ass. verbs, ex is used of the cause
(whether thins; or person) by >vhich the act expressed
by the accompany ins; verb is aided, sustained, ef-
fected: ώφ(Κ(Ίσθηι ex Tivof, Mt. xv. 5; Mk. vii. 11;
ζημιοΐ/σθαι. 2 Co. vii. 9 ; Χυπί'ισθαι, 2 Co. ii. 2 ; esp. in the
Apocalypse: άδιχ^'ισθαι. Rev. ii. 11 ; άπηβανι'ιν, viii. 11 ;
[άποχτιίν^σθαιΧ i\. 18; φωτίζ(σθαι. xviii. 1 ; σχοτίζισθαι
[L Τ AVI I (Γ•(ητοΰσίαι],ϊχ. 2; πνρονσθαι, iii. IS; yfμiζfσθoι,
XV. 8 (cf. Is. vi. 4); Jn. vi. 13; yeμeιv. JIt. xxiii. 25
(where L om. Tr br. (ξ) : πληρηνσθαι, Jn. xii. 3 [Treg.
mars, ιπλήσθη^ : χηρτάζ(σθαι. l!ev. xix. 21 ; πλουτίίν,
xviii. 3, 1 9 ; μ(θύσκ(σθιιι. μ(θν(ΐν, xvii. 2, 6 [not Treg.
τηΆτ^.']: ζην ft, Ro. i. 17; 1 Co. ix. 14; (Jal. iii. 11;
αΰξησιν ποκ'ισθαι. Kpli. iv. 16; Col. ii. 19; TeXfioiaBai,
Jas. ii. 22 ; xtKomax^s, Jn. iv. 6, (Ael. v. h. 3, 23 ex τον
191
πότου cKOdfvSev). Also after active verbs : γιμίζαν, Jn. vi.
13; Rev. viii. 5; ποτίζαν, Rev. xiv. 8; [on ίκ with the
gen. after verbs of fulness, cf. B. 163 (142 sq.) ; AV. 201
(189)]. 6. of that on which a thing depends, or
from which it results: οΰκ ίστιν ή ζωη ex των ΰτταρχόν-
των, does not depend upon possessions, i. e. possessions
cannot secure life, Lk. xii. 15; tinopia ήμων ί'στι ΐκ της
ίργασίαί ταύτης, Acts xL\. 25 ; το ιξ υμών, as far as de-
pends on you, Ro. xii. IS ; in the Pauline phrases bUaios,
8ίκαιοσννη, dtKatovv €κ ττίστζως, ζζ €ργων, see [the several
words, esp.] p. 100 : e| (as the result of, in consequence of)
ΐρ-γων Χαβΐΐν το ιτνΐΰμα, Gal. iii. 2, 5 ; e^ αναστάσεως Χαβΐΐν
Tovs νεκρούς. Heb. .\i. 35 ; εσταυρώθη εξ ασθενείας, 2 Co.
.xiii. 4 ; add, Ro. xi. 6 ; Gal. iii. 18, 21 sq. ; Eph. ii. 8 S(p
7. of the ρ ο w e r on which any one depends, by which
he is prompted and governed, whose character he
reflects : εκ θεού (equiv. to θεόπνευστον) XoAeiv, 2 Co. ii. 1 7 ;
in the Johannean expressions, είναι εκ θεοϋ. Jn. viii. 47
(in a different sense above, H. 1 a.) ; έκ τοϋ διαβόλου, έκ
τοΰ πονηρού, έκ τον κόσμου, see ειμί, Ύ. 3 d. ; έκ της άΧηθείας
είναι, to be led by a desire to linow the truth, be a lover
of the truth, Jn. xviii. 37; 1 Jn. iii. 19; o! έκ νόμου, the
subjects of the law, Ro. iv. 14 ; oi εξ έριθείας Cipiiv. to
OL έριβευομενοι [cf. έριθεία'\, Ro. ii. 8 ; ά έκ πίστεως equi\'.
to ό πιστεύων, Ro. iii. 20 ; iv. 16. εϊναι εκ τίνος also means
to be bound to one, connected with him; to have relations
with him ; see εΙμί, V. 3 d. ; hence the periphrasis ol έκ
περιτομης, the circumcised: Acts xi. 2 ; Ro. iv. 12 ; Gal.
ii. 12 ; ol οντες έκ περιτομης, Col. iv. 11 ; ol έκ περιτομής
πιστοί, Jewish Christians, Acts x. 45. 8. of the
cause for which: έκτου πόνου, for pain, Rev. xvi. 10 ;
of the reason for (because of) which : Rev. viii. 13 ; xvi.
11; έκ τούτου, Jn. vi. 66 ; xix. 12; cf. Meyer on these
pass, [who urges that έκ τούτου used of time denotes
" the point of departure of a temporal series " (W. 367
(344)) : from this time ο η, thenceforth. This argument
seems not to be decisive in the second example (Jn. xLx.
12), for there the verb is in the imperfect. On the
use of the phrase in classic Grk. see L. and S. s. v. έκ, II.
1; Kruger § 68, 17, 7. CI. onr Έη^. upon tliis, hereupon,
in which the temporal sense and the causal often seem
to blend. See below, ΙΛ^. 1 fin.]. 9. of the supply
out of (from) which a thing is taken, given, received,
eaten, drunk, etc. [cf. λΥ. § 30, 7 and 8 ; B. 159 (139)
S([([.] : λαμβάνειν έκ, Jn. 1. 16 ; xvi. 14 sq.; hibavai, 8ιαδι-
δόναι, Mt. XXV. 8 ; Jn. vi. 11 ; 1 Jn. iv. 13 ; έσθίειν, 1 Co.
ix. 7 ; xi. 28 ; φαγεΐν, Jn. vi. 26, 50 sq. ; Rev. ii. 7 ; μετέ-
χειν, 1 Co. X. 1 7 (but see μετέχω) ; πίνειν, Mt. x.xvi. 29 ;
Mk. xiv. 25; Jn. iv. 13 sq. ; Rev. xiv. 10; xviii. 3, (differ-
ently in I. 1 above) ; λαλίίι/ έκ των ιδίων, Jn. viii. 44 ; έκ
τοϋ περισσεύματος της καρδίας, Mt. xii. 34 ; έκβάλλειν, ib.
35 [this belongs here only in case θησαυρός is taken in the
sense of treasure not treasury (the contents as distin-
guislied from the re po sitory) ; cf. I. 1 above, and s. v.
θησαυρός^ ; βάλλειν έκ (a part), Mk. xii. 44 ; Lk. xxi. 4.
10. of that from which any thing is obtained: συλ-
λέγειν έξ ακανθών. Tpvyav έκ βάτου, Lk. vi. 44 ; θερίζειν
έκ. Gal. \i. 8. 11. of the whole of which anything
is a part: 1 Co. xii. 15 sq. [cf. W. 368 (345)]. 12.
of the source; a. univ. : έξ έμαυτοϋ ουκ εΧαΚησα, Jn.
xii. 49, {οϋδεν έκ σαυτης λέγεις. Soph. ΕΙ. 344). b. of
the source of conduct, as to be found in the state of
the soul, its feelings, virtues, vices, etc.: έκ καρδίας,
Ro. vi. 17; έκ ^Ι^υχής, Eph. vi. 6; Col. iii. 23, (1 Mace,
viii. 27 ; έκ της ψυχής άσπάζεσθαι, Xen. oec. 10, 4) ; έκ
καθαρός καρδίας, 1 Tim. i. 5 ; 2 Tim. ii. 22 ; 1 Pet. i. 22
[L Τ Tr WH om. καθ.^ ; έξ όλης της καρδίας . . . ψυχής
. . . διανοίας κτλ. Alk. xii. 30 sqcj. (Sa]). viii. 21 ; 4 Mace,
vii. 18) ; έκ πίστεως, Ro. xiv. 23 ; έξ ειλικρίνειας, 2 Co. ii.
17; έξ έριθείας, Plul. i. 16 (17) [yet see έριθεία]. c. of
the source of knowledge: κατηχε'ισθαι έκ, Ιίο. ii. 18;
άκοΰειν έκ, Jn. xii. 34 ; γινώσκειν, Mt. xii. 33 : Lk. vi. 44 ;
1 Jn. iv. 6 ; έποπτεύειν, 1 Pet. ii. 12. δεικνύναι, Jas. ii.
18 ; ορίζειν, to declare, prove to be, Ro. i. 4 [cf. s. v.
ορίζω, 2 and Mey. ad loc.]. 13. of that from which a
rule of j udging or acting is derived; afler,accord-
ing to, [cf. W. 368 (345)] : κρίνειν έκ, Lk. xix. 22 [A. V.
out o/" thine own mouth, etc.]; Rev. xx. 12 (Xen. Cvt.
2, 2, 21 έκ των έργων κρίνεσθαι) ; δικαιονν, καταδικάζειν,
Mt. xii. 37 ; όνομάζειν έκ, Eph. iii. 15 (Horn. II. 10, 68;
Soph. Ο. Τ. 1030, etc.) ; έκ τοΰ εχειν, according to your
ability, 2 Co. viii. 11.
m. By Attraction, common in classic Grk. (cf. W.
§ 66, 6; [B. 377 sq. (323)]), two prepositions coalesce
as it were into one, so that έκ seems to be used for έν,
thus apai τα έκ της οικίας αυτοΰ concisely for τα έν τη
οΙκία αυτοΰ έξ αυτής. ^It. xxiv. 17:0 πατήρ ό έξ ουρανού
δώσει for 6 πατήρ ό έν ουρανω δώσει έκ τον ουρανού, Lk. xi.
13 ; την έκ .\αοδικείας έπιστοΧήν for την εις Ααοδικ. γεγραμ-
μένην και εκ .\αοδικείας κομιστέαν. Col. i\•. 16, (2 Mace,
iii. IS). [To this constr. some would refer έπιγνοϋς έν
έαυτώ τήν έξ αϋτοΰ δύναμιν έξεΧθονσαν. Mk. ν. 30, resolv-
ing την έν αντω δύναμιν έξελθοΰσαν έξ αντον ; cf. Fiild,
Otium Xorvicense, pars iii. ad loc]
rv. of Time [\V. 367 (344)] ; 1. of the (temporal)
point from which; \^a.t. ex, inde a; from, from ... on,
since: έκ χρόνων Ικανών, Lk. viii. 27 [RGTrmrg.]; έκ
■γενετής. .Τη. ix. 1 (Horn. II. 24, 535 ; Od. 18, C) ; έκ κοι-
λίας μητρός (see κοιλία, 4) : έκ νεότητας, Mt. xix. 20 [R G] ;
Mk. X. 20 ; Lk. xviii. 21 ; Acts xxvi. 4 (Ilom. Π. 14, 80) ;
έκ ToO αιώνος (see αΙών, 1 b.), Jn. ix. 32 (Ael. v. h. 6, 13 ;
12, 64 έξ αιώνος) ; έξ αρχής, »Τη. vi. 64 ; xvi. 4 ; έκ γενεών
αρχαίων, Acts XV. 21 έξ ετών οκτώ. Acts ix. 33 ; έκ πολ-
λών ετών. Acts xxiv. 10; έξ αντής (sc. ώρας), forthwith,
instantli/ (see έξαυτής) ; έξ Ικανού [(sc. χρόνου) ; but LT
Tr WH here έξ Ικανών χρόνων^, of a long time, Lk. xxiii. ;
8, (έκ πολλοί, Thuc. 1, 68 ; 2, 88) ; with an adverb: έκ
παιδιόθεν, Mk. ix. 21 LTTrWII, (« πρωίθεν, 1 Macc.
X. SO), cf. ΛΥ. § 65, 2 ; [Β. 70 (62)]. Many interpreters
translate έκ τούτου, Jn. vi. 66 ; xix. 12, y'rom this lime,
but cf. II. 8 above. 2. of succession in time, a
temporal series: έκ δευτέρου (as it were, proceeding
from, beginning from the second), a second time (see
δεύτερος) : έκ τρίτου, Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Tr mrg. br. έκ τριτ.] ;
ήιιέραν έξ ημέρας (diem ex die, Cic. ad Att. 7, 26 ; Caes.
b. g. 1, 16, 4 ; diem de die. Liv. 5, 48) from day to day,
19Ϊ
€κβάλ\ω
ιΐαι/ a/ler day, 2 Pet. ii. 8, (Gen. xxxix. 10; Num. xxx.
15; [2 Chr. xxiv. 11]; Sir. v. 7: Eur. Rhes. 437 (445)
etc.; fTot (ζ fTovt• Lev. xxv. ,ίΟ-, (vuwtov ΐξ (νιαυτον,
Deut. XV. 211).
v. Adverhial I'hka.ses [cf. \V. §51,1 d.], in vvliidi
lies the idea 1. of direction whence: ίξ evav
rias, cf. I. 4 above. 2. of source: ϊκ συμφώνου, by
consent, by agreement, 1 Co. vii. 5 ; e^ άνά-γκηί of neces-
sity, i. e. by compulsion, 2 Co. Lx. 7 ; necessarily, Heb.
vii. 12. 3. of the measure or standard: i κ μί-
μου!, so that each is a part of the whole, proportion-
ately, [It.V. mrg. each in Ids pari], 1 Co. xii. 27, cf.
Meyer ad loc. ; in purl, partly, 1 Co. xiii. 9 sqq. ; c'k
μίτρηυ i. <[. μιτρίω!, by measure, moderately, sparingly,
tin. iii. .'U ; ΐξ ΐσότητοί, hy erjuality, in equal proportion,
2 Co. viii. 13 (14) ((ξ ίσου, Hdt. 7, 135); «κ nfpiaaoii,
beyond measure, Mk. vi. 51 [WHom.Tr.br.].
VI. In CoMi'OSiTiox « denotes 1. egress: «βαίνω,
(ξίρχυμαι. 2. emission, removal, separation : «βάλλω,
(κπΐμπω, ί^αψίω. 3. origin : ίκγονος. 4. public-
ilv : €ξαγγ(λλω. 5. the unfoldin'Z, opening out, of
something tied together or ri)llod uji : (κτ(ίνω. ίκπιτάνημί.
6. is i. q. utterly, entirely, παντιΧΰα, [cf. Eng. out and
out], denoting completion and perfection : ίκκληριΊω,
(KTf\€u. Cf. Fritzsche on Matt. p. Γ20 sq.
ΐκαστοΐ, ij, -ov, Sept. for tP'X, [fr. Horn, down], each,
every; a. joined to a substantive: ΐκαστον btvhpov,
Lk. vi. 44 ; ίκύστω στρατιώτη, Jn. xix. 23 ; κατά μήνα
ΐκαστον, every month, liev. xxii. 2 [not Rec] ; Kaff
ίκάστην ήμίρα'ν. Ilcb. iii. 13; cf. W. HI (106); B. § 127,
30. jircccdcd by els, Lat. unustjuisqiie, every one: with
a substantive, Epli. iv. 16 ; Rev. xxii. 2 Rec. b. used
substantively : Jn. vii. 53 [Rec] ; Acts iv. 35 ; Ro. ii.
6 ; Gal. vi. 4, etc. ; once plur. «αστοί : Rev. vi. 11 Rec.
With a partitive genitive added : τιμών, Ro. xiv. 1 2 ;
υμών, Lk. xiii. 15; 1 Co. i. 12; Heb. vi. 11 ; αυτών, Jn.
vi. 7 [RG]; των σττΐρμάτων, 1 Co. xv. 38. ft? «aoros,
every one (see eir. 4 b.) ; without a partit. gen.. Acts xx.
31 ; Col. iv. 6 ; with a partit. gen., Lk. iv. 40 ; Acts ii. 3 ;
xvii. 27; 1 Co. xii. 18, etc. «αστοί;, when it denotes
individually, every one of many, i.s often added apposi-
tively to nouns and pronouns and verbs in the plural
number, (Matthiae ii. p. 764 sq. ; [AV. 516 (481); B.
131 (114)]): τ)μ(Ίί άκοΰομ^ν ίκαστο!. Acts ii. 8; σκορ-
πισθητϋ ΐκαστοί, Jn. xvi. 32 ; inopevovro πάντα • . . ,
ίκαστοί . . . , Lk. ii. 3 ; add. Acts iii. 26 ; 1 Pet. iv. 10 ;
Rev. V. 8; xx. 13; likewise e't «αστοί, Acts ii. 6; xxi.
26 ; ίμ€ΐς o'l Kaff eva €καστος την tavTov γννα'ϊκα αγαπάτω,
you one by one, each one of you severally, Eph. v. 33.
In imitation of the Ilebr., ίκαστος τω άδίλφώ αϋτοϋ
(1'ΠΧ"' C"X, Gen. xxvi. 31), Mt. xviii. 35; μίτίι τοϋ πλη-
σίον αϋτοϋ (ΐΠ>•':-'^« ϋ'ίί, Judg. vi. 29, etc.), Eph. iv. 25,
cf. Heb. viii. 11 Rec.
tKOe-roTc, adv., at every lime, always: 2 Pet. i. 15.
(Hdt., Thuc, Xen., Plat., al.) •
(κατύν, oi, aU τά, [fr. Horn, down], a hundred: Mt.
xiii. 8 (?c. κΊμποΰί): xviii. 12; Jn. xix. 39, etc.
ίκατοντα€τη5 [Ii G T],.€f, and 4κατοντα€της [L TrWH],
-i'r, (fr. c'/MTOvand trof ; on the want of uniformity in ac-
centuation among authors, copyists, and grammarians
see Lob. ad I'hryn. p. 406 sq.; V\'. §6, 1 b.; B. 29 (26) ;
[ Tilf. Prolcg. f>. 1 02 ; Ellendt, Lex. Soph. s. v. &(κ(τη! ; esp.
Chandler §§ 703, 709; Gottling p. 323 .mj.]), centenarian,
a hundred years old : Ro. iv. 19. (Pind. I'yth. 4, 502.) *
(κατονταπλασίων, -ov, a hundredfold, a hundred times
as much : Mt. xix. 29 [R G] ; Mk. x. 30 ; Lk. viii. 8. (2
S. xxiv. 3 ; Xen. oec. 2, 3.) •
€κατοντάρχη5, -ου, 0, («ατον and άρχω; on the termi-
nations άρχης anil ap;^ot see the full exposition in W.
61 (60); cf. B. 73 (64); Dornemann, Schol. ad Luc. [>.
151 sq. ; [Tdf Proleg. p. 117; ΙΓ//. App. p. 156 Ρί].]),
a centurion : Mt. viii. [5 and 8 Tdf.], 13 G L Τ Tr WH ;
[xxvii. 54 T] ; Lk. vii. [2 (?)], 6 Τ WH ; [xxiii. 4 7 Τ
TrWII]; Acts x. 1,22; x.xi. 32 L Τ Tr AVIl ; [.xxii. 26
L Τ ΛνΐΙ] ; xxiv. 23 ; xxvii. 1, 6 L Τ Tr WH, 1 1 G L Τ
Tr WH, 31, 43 L Τ Tr WU ; gen. plur. Τ WH in Acta
xxiii. 17, 23. (Aeschyl. ap. Athen. 1 p. lid.; Hdt.
7, 81 ; Dion. Hal., Plut., al). See the foil, word.*
ίκατόνταρχο5, -ου, ό, i. q. (κατοντάμχης, q. v. : Mt. viii. 5,
8 [in a, 8, Tdf. -άρχης], 13 Rec; xxvii. 54 [Ύάί.-άρχηί];
Lk. vii. 2, 6 [T WH -άρχηί]; xxiii. 47 [T TrWII ■άρ-
χης'] ; Acts xxi. 32 R G ; xxii. 25, 26 [L Τ WH -όρχη^] ;
xxvii. 6 [RG, 11 Rec, 43 R G], also xxviii. 16 Rec;
gen. plur., Acts .xxiii. 1 7 and 23 R G L Tr. (Xen. Cyr.
5, 3, 41 ; Plut., al.)* [Cf. Mcisterhans p. 53 sq.]•
{κ-βα(νω : 2 aor. (ξίβην ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to f/o out :
Ikb. xi. 15 LTTr\VH.•
4κ-βάλλω; impf. 3 pers. plur. (ξί,ίαΧΧον (Mk. vi. 13
[Tr mrg. aor.]); fut.«3nλώ; jilpf. f'it/3f/3Aijitfiv (without
augm., iMk. xvi. 9 ; cf. W. § 1 2. 9 : B. 33 (29)) ; 2 aor.
(ξίβαλον; [Pass, and Mid. pris. «βάλλομαι]; 1 aoi•.
pass. (ξ(βλήθην; fut. pass, (κβληθήσομαι : [fr. Horn,
down] ; Sept. generally for tl'^i, occasionally for Ν"ΧίΠ,
Ei'lin tSe/H ; lo cast out ; to drive out ; to send out ;
1. with the included notion of more or less vio-
lence; a. ίο drive out, (cast out) : a person, ISIt. xxi.
12; Mk. xi. 15; Jn. ii. 15 (eV) ; Lk. xx. 12, etc.; pass.
Mt. viii. 12 [T AVII (rejected) mrg. ίξίλίΰσονται] ; δαιμό-
vio, Mt, vii. 22 : viii. 16, 31; ix. 33 : Mk. i. 34, 39; Lk.
xi. 20 ; xiii. 32, etc. ; ίκ Ttvor, Mk. vii. 2G ; άπύ, Mk. xvi.
9 [LWHTrtxt. παρά]; ΐν τινι, hy, through [W. 389
(364)], Mt, ix. 34 ; xii. 24, 27 sq. ; Mk. iii. 22 ; Lk. xi. 15,
1 9 sq. : τω ΰνάματί tivos, Mt. vii. 22 : [Mk. ix. 38 R" G] ;
em τώ ov. tivos, Lk. ix. 49 [WH Tr mrg. eV ; i'v τω όν. Mk.
ix. 38 W" L Τ Tr WH] ; λόγω, Ut. viu. 16 ; τίνα ίξα
της πόλ(ω!, Lk. iv. 29 ; Acts vii. 58. b. to ca.'it out :
τινά foil, by ίξω, Jn. vi. 37 ; ix. 34 sq. ; xii. 31 (sc. out
of the world, i. e. be deprived of the power and influ-
ence he exercises in the world) : Lk. xiii. 28 ; ϊξω with
cen., Mt. xxi. 39; Mk. xii. 8 ; Lk. xx. 15. a thing:
excrement from the belly into the sink, Mt. xv. 17;
mid. {'«(βαλλόμίνοι (i. e. for themselves, that they might
the more easily save the ship and thereby their lives)
τον σίτον (Is τ. θάλασσαν, Acts xxvii. 38. c. to expel
a person from a society : to banish from a family. Gal.
iv. 30 (Gen. x-\i. 10); «κ [Tdf. om. «] της εκκλησίας, 3
ίκβασίΊ
193
€κΒικίω
Jn. 1 0. d. to compel one to depart : άπο τύν ipiav, Acts
xiii. 50 ; to bid one depart, in stem though not violent
language, Mt. ix. 25 ; Mk. v. 40 ; Acts L\. 40 ; xvi. 37
(where distinguished fr. e'|a-yeii») ; to bid one go forth
to do some business, Mt. ix. 38 ; Lk. x. 2. e. so em-
ployed that the rapid motion of the one going is trans-
ferred to the one sending forth; to command or caiixe
one to depart in haste : Mk. i. 43 ; Jas. ii. 25 ; τα πάιηα
(so. πρόβατα), to let them out of the fold so that they
rush forth, [al. to thrust them forth by laying hold of
them], Jn. x. 4. f. to draw out with force, tear oat :
Ti. Mk. ix. 47. g. with the implication of force over-
coming opposing force; to catife a thing to move straight
on to its intended goal : tj]V κρίσιν ds viKot, Mt. xii. 20.
h. to reject with contempt; to cast off οτ awaij: το όνομα
Ttpos ώί πονηρόν, Lk. vi. 22, (Plat. Crito p. 41) b. ; de rep.
2 p. 377 c. ; Soph. O. C. 63G, 646 ; of actors driven from
the stage, hissed and hooted off, Dem. p. 449, 19). 2.
without the notion of violence; a. to draw out,
extract, one thing inserted in another : to κάρφοί το ev
τω οφθαλμω, Lk. vi. 42 ; ϊκ τοϋ οφθα\μον, ibid, and Mt.
vii. 5; άπο τοϋ οφθ. 4 (where LTTrWII «). b. to
bring out of, to draw or bring forth : τι « τοΟ θησαυρού,
Mt. xii. 35 ; xiii. 52 ; money from a purse, Lk. x. 35.
c. to except, to leave out, i. e. not receive : τί, foil, by ίξω
[or (ξωθίν^. Rev. xi. 2 (leave out from the things to be
measured, equiv. to μ!/ αϋτην μ(τρήσ!)ς). ά. foD. by eir
with ace. of place, to lead one forth or awag somewhere
with a force which he cannot resist : Mk. i. 12. [On the
pleonastic phrase tV/3. ίξω (or ΐξωθ(ν) of. VV. § 65, 2.]
Ικ-βασ-ΐΐ, -ΐως, ή, (ϊκ^αίνω) ; 1. an egress, wag out,
(Ilom., et al.) : applied lig. to the way of escape from
temptation into which one (Ιαίρχΐται or ^ισφίριται (see
these words), 1 Co. x. 13. 2. in a sense foreign to
prof, auth., the issue [(cf. its objective sense e. g. Ejjict.
diss. 2, 7, 9)] i. cj. end: used of the end of life. Sap. ii.
1 7 ; ίκβ. τή? ανάστροφης τιι/ωι/, in lleb. xiii. 7, is not
merely the end of their physical life, but the manner in
which they closed a well-spent life as exhibited by their
spirit in dying; cf. Delitzsch ad loc*
ίκ-βολή, -ης, ή, (ίκβάλλω ) ; a. α casting out. b.
spec, the throwing urerl/ourd of goods and lading whereby
sailors Ughten a shij) in a storm to keep her from sinking,
(Aeschyl. sept. 769; Aristot. eth. Nic. 3, I, 5 [p. 1110%
9]; Lcian. de mere. cond. 1): ποι^ΐσθαι (κβολήν, Lat.
jacturam facere, to throw the cargo overboard. Acts xxvii.
18 ; with των σκ(υών added, Sept. Jon. i. 5 ; των φορτίων,
Poll. 1, 99 p. 70 ed. Hemsterh.•
cκ-^α|lC{ω ; Pass., [pres. €κγαμίζομαί^ ; impf. ίξιγαμι-
ζόμην; to give awag (ix out of the house [cf. W. 102
(97)]) in marriage : a daughter, 1 Co. vii. 38* R (ί,
[ibid." Rec.] ; Mt. xxiv. 38 R G Tr txt. Pass, to marry,
to be given in marriage, Mt. xxii. 30 R G [cf. Tdf.'s note
ad Joe.] ; Lk. xvii. 27 R G : see ■γαμίζω. Not found
elsewhere.*
<κ-γαμι1β-κω, i. q. (κγαμίζω. q. v. : Pass. [pres. (κγα-
μίσκο/ιαί] ; Lk. XX. 34 sq. R G ; cf. γαμίσκω and Fritzsche
on Mk. p. 529 sqq. Not found elsewhere.*
ίκ-γ>νοί, -ov, (ίκγίνομαι), sprung from one, bom, begotten.
(Hom. and sqq.) ; commonly as a subst. ό, ή ϊκγονος, οι
ίκγονοι, α son, daughter, offspring, children, descendants ;
in Sept. com. in neut. plur. ίκγονα and τα fxyova, for
nS, Deut. vii. 13 [Alex.]; xxviii. 4, etc.; D'XjXY,
Is. .\lviii. 19 ; Ixi. 9 ; [3, Is. .xlLx. 15 ; also in .Sir. xl. 15 ;
-xliv. 11, etc. In the N. T. once: 1 Tim. v. 4 τίκνα η
ίκγονα, grandchildren, [(Α. V. renders it by the obsol.
Ke/dicirs : cf. Eastwood and Wright, Bible Word-Book,
or B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Nephew)].*
lK-Sairavd<D : [fut. (κ&απανησω ; 1 fut. pass, ΐκδαπανα-
θήσομαι ; to exhaust bg expending, to spend tvholly, use
up : Tas προσόδους, Polyb. 25, 8, 4. Pass, reflexively, to
spend one's self wholly : foil, by irnep τίνος, of one ivho con-
sumes strength and hfe in laboring for others' salvation,
2 Co. xii. 15 ; cf. Kypke ad loc. ; \_Soph. Lex. s. v.].*
ίκ-8€χομαι ; impf. (ξ(Β(χόμην ; («κ from some person
or quarter) ; 1. /o /'eceii.•?, aece/)/, ([Horn.], Aeschyl.,
Hdt., sqq.). 2. to look for, expect, wait for, await : τΐ,
Jn. v. 3 RL; Heb. xi. 10; Jas. v. 7; τινά. Acts xvii.
16; 1 Co. xvi. 11; άλλ^λον; (κδ(χ(σθ( wait for one
another, sc. untU each shall have received his food, 1 Co.
xi. 33, cf. 21 ; foil, by ίως etc. Ileb. x. 13 ; [absol. 1 Pet.
iii. 20 Rec, but see Tdf.'s note ad loc.]. Rarely with
this meaning in prof, auth., as Soph. Phil. 123; ApoUod.
1, 9, 27 § 3 ; ίως αν -γίνηταί τι, Dion. Hal. 6, 67. [CoMP. :
άπ-(κδίχομαι. Cf. δίχομαι. fin.]*
ίκ-δηλο5, -OK, (δήλοί), evident, clear, conspicuous : 2 Tim.
iii. 9. (Horn. II. 5, 2; Dem. p. 24, 10; Polyb.)*
(κ&ημ«ω, -ώ ; I aor. inf. ίκίημησαι; (ικδημος away from
home) ; 1. to go abroad (Hdt., Soph., Plat., Joseph.,
al.) ; hence univ. to emigrate, depart : ίκ τοϋ σώματος,
from the body as the earthly abode of the spirit, 2 Co.
v. 8. 2. to be or live abroad : 2 Co. v. 9 ; από toD
κυρίου, abode with whom is promised us. 2 Co. v. 6 ; in
these exx. op]), to ϊνδημω, q. v.*
έκ-εί8<<ιμ.ι . Mill., fut. ίκΒώσομαι ; 2 aor. 3 pers. sing.
ίξίδοτο, Τ \\'1I cli'SfTo (see άπηδίδωμι) ; a com. word in
Grk. auth. fr. Hom. II. 3, 459 on ; to give out of one's
house, power, hand, stores ; to give out, give up, give over;
hence also to let out for hire, to farm out, Hdt. 1, 68 ;
γ(ωργίαι δι ίκδιδομίναι δούλοι?. Plat. legg. 7 p. 806 d. ;
al. In the N. T.. Mid. to let out for one's advantage :
Mt. xxi. 33, 41 [Rec. (κδόσ^ται, cf. Tdf.'s note; B. 4 7
(41)]; Mk. .xii. 1; Lk. xx. 9.*
ίκ-δι^•γ6'ο|ΐαι, -οϊ)μαι ; dep. mid. ; prop, to narrate in full
or wholly; univ. to relate, tell, declare: τί. Acts xiii. 41
(Hab. i. 5) ; xv. 3. ([Aristot. rhet. Alex. 23 p. 1434',
4] ; Joseph., [Philo], Galen, [al.] ; Sept.) *
(κ8ικΕω, -ω; fut. ίκδικήσω; 1 aor. ίξίδίκησα; {ίκδικος,
(J. V.) ; Sept. for DPJ^ "^p?, 02U ; a. τινά, to vindicate
one's right, do one justice, [A. V. avengel : Lk. xviii. 5
(1 Mace. vi. 22); τίνα από τίνος, to protect, defend, one
person from another. Lk. xviii. 3 : (αυτόν, to avenge one's
self, Ro. xii. 19. b. τί, to avenge a thing (i. e. to pun-
ish a person for a thing) : rijv παρακοην. 2 Co. x. 6 ; το
αΐμά TICS από or ίκ nvor, to demand in punishment the
blood of one from another, i. e. to exact of the murderer
ΐκύικησκ
194
eKeiiOf
the penalty of his crime, [A. V. avenge one's Hood on
or al the hand q/"] : Hcv. vi. 10; xix. 2; see «V, I. 7.
(in Grk. auth. fr. [Apollod.], Diod. down.) *
{κ-6(κηΐΓΐ$, -(as, η. ((χ8ί«ί'ω, q. v.), Sept. for iTpPJ and
DPJ, ΓΤίρϋ, D3C0 (Ezek. .\vi. 38; .\xiii. 45) and D'OpiV;
a revemjinij ; vengeance, punishment: Ro. .\ii. 19 and
Ileb. X. 30 fr. Deut. xxxii. 35 ; 2 Co. vii. 11 ; Lk. xxi.
22 ; ποκίν την (Μκησίν rivos, to vindicate one from
wron'j;s, accomplish the avenging of, Lk. xviii. 7 sq. ;
Tifi, to avenge an injured person, Acts vii. 24 (.ludg. xi.
86) ; (κϋκησί! rivos, olijec. gen., the punishment of one,
1 Pet. ii. 14 ; BtSovai (κΒίκησίν Ttvi, to inflict punishment
-on, [render vengeance to] one, 2 Th. i. 8 ; cf. [Sir. xii.
6] ; Ezek. xxv. 14. (Polyb. 3, 8, 10.) •
IkSikos, -Of, (8iici) right, justice, penalty) ; 1. with-
out law and Justice (cf. Lat. exlex), unjust: Aeschyl.,
Soph., Eur., Ael. n. an. 16, 5. 2. exacting penalti/ from
(e'lc) one ; an avenger, punisher : Ro. xiii. 4 ; nepi tivos,
1 Th. iv. 6 ; (Sap. xii. 1 2 ; Sir. .\xx. 6 ; 4 Mace. xv. 26
(29) ; [Plut. de garrul. § 14 p. 509 f.] ; Hdian. 7, 4, 10
[5ed. Sekk.; al.]).•
Ικ-^ίάκα : f ut. (κ8ιώξω ; 1 aor. £ξ(8ίωξα ; 1. to drive
out, banish : τινά, I.k. .xi. 49 [here \V II Trmrg. διώζουσιν ;
some refer this to 2]; (Thuc. 1, 24; Lcian. Tim. 10;
Sept. 1 Chr. viii. 13; Joel ii. 20, etc.). 2. to pursue
i. q. to persecute, oppress tcith calamities : τινά, 1 Th. ii.
15 Fsome refer this to 1]; (Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 157; Sir.
XXX. 19; Dem. 88.!, 27).•
«K-SoTos, -ov, («δίδωμι), given over, delivered up, (to
enemies, or to the power, the will, of some one) : \αμβά-
veiv τινά ίκδοτον, Acts ii. 23 (but λαβόντα is rejected by
GLTTrWH); btSavat or ποιΰν τίνα ίκ8. Ildt. 3, 1;
Dem. 648, 25; Joseph, antt. 6, 13, 9; Palaeph. 41, 2;
al. ; Bel and the Dragon vs. 22 ; eamliv e/c8. SiSavai τω
θανάτω, Ignat. ad Smyrn. 4, 2.*
ίκ-δοχή, -ης, ή. ((κδ(χομαι), the act ΟΓ manner of receiv-
ing from ; hence in prof. auth. 1. reception. 2.
succession. 3. [a taking in a certain sense, i.e.]
interpretation. 4. once in the sacred writings, expec-
tation, awaiting, [cf. ϊκ^ίχομαι, 2] : Heb. x. 27.*
ίκ-8νω: 1 aor. ίξί'δυσα; 1 aor. mid. e'|f8uaa^i)>'; (8υω) ;
to take off: τινά, to strip one of his garments, Mt. xxvii.
28 [L WII mrg. ίνδύσ.] ; Lk. x. 30; τινά τι (as in Grk.
fr. Horn, down), [a thing /ram a person] : Mt. x.xvii. 31 ;
Mk. XV. 20 ; Mid. to take off from one's self to put off
one's raiment, (Xen. Ag. 1, 28; Hell. 3, 4, 19); fig. to
put off the body, the clothing of the soul, [A. V. be un-
clothed} : 2 Co. V. 4 ; the reading €κ8υσάμ(νοι, adopted
in vs. 3 by certain critics [e. g. Mill, Tdf. 7, Reiche, al],
is due to a correction by the copyists ; see ■γυμνοί, 1 d.
[CoMP. : άη•-«8ίο/ιαί.] *
ίκίΐ, adv. of place, there; a. properly: Mt. ii. 13,
15 ; v. 24, and freq. In Lk. xiii. 2H Ud is not used for
iv (Κ(1νω τω κάψω foil, by όταν (<it that time . . . when
etc.), but means in that place whither ye have been ban-
ished ; cf. Meyer ad loc. oi eicei, sc. ovTfs, standing
there, Mt. xxvi. 71 [Tr mrg. αυτοί eVfi]. It answers to
a relative adv. : ov το πνιϋμα, e'ltet tXevUfpia, 2 Co. iii. 1 7
Rec. ; Mt. vi. 21 ; xviii. 20; xxiv. 28; Jlk. vi. 10; Lk.
xii. 34 ; Ilebraistically, where a preceding adv. or rel.
pron.has already attracted the verb, eicti is added to
this verb pleonastically : Rev. xii. 6 GTTrWII (όπου
€χ(ΐ (Kf'i τύπον), 14 {όπου τμίήχται ί«ΐ) ; cf. Deut. iv. 5,
14, 26 ; 1 Mace. xiv. 34, and what was said p. 86', 5
on the pron. oItos after a relative. b. by a negligent
use common also in the classics it stands after verbs of
motion for e/cflae, thither: so after άπίρχομαι, Mt. ii.
22 ; μιταβαίνω, Mt. xvii. 20 ; υπάγω, Jn. xi. 8 ; ίρχομαι,
Jn. .xviii. 3 ; προπίμπομαι, Ro. .xv. 24 ; cf. Lob. ad I'hryn.
pp. 43 sq. 128; //crmaHn on Soph. Antig. 515 ; Trachin.
1006; Bttm. on Philoct. 481; W. § 54, 7; B. 71 (G2)
and 378 (324).
4κ(ΐθ€ν, adv. of place, thence, from that place, [A. V.
sometimes /"/om thence'] : Mt. iv. 21 ; Mk. vi. 1 ; Lk. ix. 4;
Jn. iv. 43 ; Acts xiii. 4 ; and often in the historical bks.
of the N. T. oi iKUSev elliptically for o'l ΐκύθιν διαβήναι
eiXovTes, Lk. xvi. 26 (where L Wllom. oi).
CKctvos, -i;, -o, (fr. t xfi, prop, the one there, cf. Germ.
dortig, der dort), demonst. pron., that man, woman, thing
(Lat. ille, ilia, illud) ; properly of persons, things, times,
places somewhat remote from the speaker. 1. used ab-
solutely, a. in antithesis, referring to the more remote
subject: opp. to οίτος, Lk. xviii. 14; Jas. iv. 15; ύμ'ιν
. . . (Kfivois, Mt. xiii. II ; Mk. iv. 1 1 ; ΐκΰνοι . . . ημή{,
Heb. xii. 25 ; άλλοί . . . (ΐλλοι . . . tKehot. Jn. ix. 9 ; («t-
vov . . . ΐμί, Jn. iii. .'!o : o\ 'Ιουδαίοι . . . (κύνος de, Jn. ii,
20 sq. ; ό μίν κύριος Ίησοϋς [RGTom. Ί. λΥΉ Tr mrg.
br.] . , . ixfivoi 8f, Mk. xvi. 19 sq., etc. b. of noted per-
sons (as in classic Grk.) : in a bad sense, that notorious
man, Jn. vii. 11 ; ix. 28 ; in a good sense, — of the Lord
Jesus, 1 Jn. ii. 6 ; iii. 3, 5, 7, IG ; iv. 1 7 ; of the Holy Spirit,
with an apposition added, (« ti/os, το πνιϋμα της άληθιίας,
Jn. xvi. 13. c. referring to a noun immediately i)re-
ceding, he, she, it, (Lat. is, ea, id, iierm. selbiger) : Jn. vii.
45; V. 46; Mk. xvi. U; Acts iii. 13, etc.; cf. W. §23, 1;
[B. 104 (91). Here perliaps may be noticed its use to-
gether with αυτής of the same subject in the same sen-
tence : (ζωγρημίνοι υπ' αντοΰ (i. e. the devil) eij τό fKfivov
θίλημα, 2 Tim. ii. 26 ; cf. Thuc. 1, 132, 6 ; 4, 29, 3 ; Xen.
Cyr. 4, 5, 20 ; see Riddell, Apol. of Plato, App. § 4!) ;
Kuhner § 467, 12 ; cf. ζω-γρίω, 2] ; equiv. to an emphatic
(Germ, er) he, etc., Mt. xvii. 27 ; Jn. i. 8 ; v. 43 ; Tit. iii.
7; equiv. to tlie forcibly uttered Germ, der (that one
etc.), in whicli sense it serves to recall and lay stress upon
nouns just before used [cf. our resumptive the same; W.
§ 23, 4] : Jn. i. IfS ; v. 39 ; xii. 48 ; xiv. 26 ; xv. 26 ; csp.
is it thus resumptive of a subject expressed participially
[B. 306 (262 sq.)]: Mk. vii. 15 [TWHom.Trbr. the
pron.], 20; Jn. i. 33; ix. 37 (ckfIvoc (στιν, sc. ό υ'ιυς τοΟ
Seov, see (Ιμ'ι, Π. 5) ; Jn. χ. 1 ; xiv. 21 ; Ro. xiv. 14; 2
Co. X. 18 ; (Xen. C)T. 6, 2, 33 ό yap "Κόγχην άκονων, ίκΛ-
νος και την "^^τνχην τι παρακονά). d. foil. i)y oTt, Alt.
xxiv. 43; foil, by ός, Jn. xiii. 26; Ro. xiv. 15. 2.
joined with nouns, and then the noun with the article,
either precedes, or (somewhat more rarely) folkvs '•
(W. 162 (153)), [B. 119 (104) sq.] ; a. m contrasts:
195
ίκκΚτ,σι,α
η πρώτη (κΐίνη, Heb. τίϋ. 7. b. used to distinguish
accurately from others the things or the persons spoken
of, (Germ, se/iii/) : Mt. vii. 25, 27; x. 15; xviii. 32; Mk.
iii. 24 sq. ; Lk. vi. 48 sq. ; Jn. xviii. 15, and often ; esp.
of Time, — and of time past: iv τάίς ημίραΐί iKctvais,
ΟΠΠ D'^'a, at thai lime which has been spuLert n/• said of
time which the writer either cannot or will not define
more precisely and yet wishes to be connected with the
time of the events just narrated ; Jit. iii. 1 ; Mk. i. 9 ;
viii. 1 ; Lk. ii. 1, (Ex. ii. 1 1 ; Judg. xviii. 1 ; 1 S. xxviii.
1); cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 106 sq. ; at ihe lime under
consideration : Lk. iv. 2 ; Lx. .36 ; the same phrase is used
of time future: Mt. xxiv. 19; Acts ii. 18 (fr. Joel ii. 29
(iii. 2)) ; Rev. ix. 6; likewise in the singular, iv c'icft'w;
τή ήμίρα, Lk. xvii. 31 ; Jn. .xvi. 23, 26. But the solemn
phrase ϊκήνη ή ήμίρα, or ή ήμίρα e/tei'wj, simply sets future
time in opposition to the present, that fateful day, that
decisive day, when the Messiah will come to judge : Mt.
vii. 22; Lk. vi. 23; x. 12; 2 Th. i. 10; 2 Tim. i. 12, 18;
Rev. xvi. 14 (where L Τ Tr Wll om. eKfiinjs) ; so in the
phrase δ αιών iKc'ivos, Lk. .xx. 35. 3. exf I'l/ijs (in Rec. 8i
€Kf iw/s), scil. όδον, adverbially, (hy) that way : Lk. xix.
4 ; AV. § 64, 5 ; [B. 171 (149) ; see m'los, fin.]. John's
use of the pronoun «elvoy is discussed by Steitz in the
Stud. u. Krit. for 1859, p. 497 sqq. ; 1861, p. 267 sqq.,
and by Alex. Butlmann, ibid. 18G0, p. 505 sqq. and in
Ililgenfeld's Zeitsch. fiir wissenschaftl. Theol. 1862, p.
204 sqq. ; Buttmann clearly proves in opp. to Steitz
that John's usage deviates in no respect from the
tireek ; Steitz, however, resorts to psychological consid-
erations in the case of Jn. xix. 35, [regarding in. there
as expressing the writer's inward assurance. But Steitz
is now understood to have modified his published
views.]
CKcto-c, adv. of place, thither, towards that place : Acts
xxi. 3, on which see W. 349 (328) ; used for (nei in the
pregn. constr. tovs e'xeiffe όντας, collected there. Acts
xxii. 5, (Acta Thomae § 8 ) ; cf. W. § 54, 7.*
ίκ-ζητί'ω, -ώ; 1 aor. (ξ€ζήτησα; Pass., 1 aor. ('ξιζητηθην;
1 fut. ΐκζητηθήσομαι; ((κ out from a secret j)lace, from
all sides) ; Sept. very often for C/"^'l, also for Op2. etc. ;
a. to seek out, search for : properly, τινά, 1 Mace. ix. 26 ;
figuratively : τον κΰριον, τον θ(όν, to seek the favor of
God, worship him. Acts .xv. 1 7 ; Ro. iii. 1 1 [Tr mrg. WH
mrg. ζητών'] ; Heb. xi. 6, (Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 2 ; xxxiii.
(xxxiv.) 5 ; Lxviii. (Ixix.) 33 ; Amos v. 4, etc.). b. to
seek out i. e. investigate, scrutinize: τί, .Sir. xxxix. 1, 3;
TTtpl Tivot, to examine into anything, 1 Pet. i. 10, where
it is joined with e^epewav [to seek out and search οπί],
as in \ Mace. ix. 26. o. to seek out for one's self, beg,
crave : Heb. xii. 1 7. d. to demand back, require : to
αίμα των προφητών άπο τη! yfyear ταύτη!, to take ven-
geance on this generation for the slaughter of the proph-
ets (after the Hebr., cf. 2 S. iv. 11 ; Ezek. iii. 18 ; see e'lc,
L 7) : Lk. xi. 50, [51]. (In prof. auth. thus far only a
single passage has been noted in which this word ap-
pears, Arisiid. or. 8, L p. 488 [i. e. orat. 38, i. p. 726 ed.
Dind.].) •
€κ-ίήτη<Γΐ5, (^ϊκζητίω, q. v.),-fQ)s, η; 1. an investigat-
ing. 2. a subject of subtle inquiry and dispute, [R. V.
questioning] : 1 Tim. i. 4 Τ Tr [WH ; see Ellic. ad loc.
and cf. οικονομία]. (Basil Caes., Didym. Al.) •
€κ-βαμβ(ω, -ώ : Pass., [pres. ϊκθαμβονμαι] ; 1 aor. e^f-
θαμβήθην ; (ίκθαμβο!, q. v.) ; 1. trans, to throw into
amazement or terror; to alarm thoroughly, to terrify: Sir. r
XXX. 9 ; [Job x.xxiii. 7 Aq., Compl.]. 2. intrans. to
be struck with amazement; to be thoroughly amazed, as-
tounded; in Grk. writ, once, Orph. Arg. 1217. In the
N. T. only in the pass, and by Mark : to be amazed, for
joy at the unexpected coming of Christ, Lx. 15; to be
struck with terror, xvi. 5 sq. ; joined with άδημονιιν,
xiv. 33.*
ΕΚ-θαμβο$, -ov, {θαμβοί, cf. ίκφοβος), quite astonished,
amazed: Acts iii. 11. (Polyb. 20, 10, 9. Eccl. and
Byzant. writ. ; terrifying, dreadful, Dan. vii. 7 Theod.) *
Ικ-θαυμ.άζω : [impf. (ξ(θαίμαζον] ; to wonder or marvel
greatly (see ίκ, W. 6) : inl τινι, al one, Mk. xii. 1 7 Τ AVII.
(Sir. xxvii. 23 ; xliii. 18; Dion. Hal., Longin., al.) *
ίκ-βίτο5, -ov, (Ικτίθημι), cast out, exposed : πυιΰν 'κθ^τα
(equiv. to ΐκτιθίναι) τα βρίφη, Acts vii. 19. (Eur. Andr.
70; [Manetho, apoteles. 6, 52].)•
«κ-καθαίρω : 1 aor. Ιξικάθαρα [on the a cf. B. 41 (35)] ;
(eK either i. q. utterly or for ίκ τιιόγ) ; in Grk. writ. fr.
Horn. II. 2, 153 down; to cleanse out, clean thoroughly :
ϊμαυτον από τινο!, to avoid defilement from one and so
keep one's self pure, 2 Tim. li. 21 ; with ace. of the thing
by the removal of which something is made clean, [A. V.
purge out], 1 Co. v. 7. (For fl"li' i. q. to cleanse, Judg. vii.
4 var. ; for "l^^3 i. q. to lake away, Deut. xxvi. 13.)*
(K-KaCu: 1 aor. pass, (ξ^κανθην; 1. to burn out.
2. to set on fire. pass, to be kindled, to bum, (Ildt. and
sqq. ; often in Sept.) : properly, of fire ; metaph. of the
fire and glow of the passions (of anger. Job iii. 1 7 ; Sir.
xvi. 6, and often in Plut.) ; of lust, Ro. i. 27, (Alciphr. 3,
67 ovTws €^€κανθην (Ις ΐμωτα).*
(κκακί'ω, -ώ ; [1 aor. ίξ€κάκησα] ; (κακοί) ; Ιο be utterly
Sfiiridess, to be wearied out, exhausted; see (■γκακίω [cf.
W. 25].
ίκ-κ€ντ€ω, -ω : 1 aor. €'ξ(Κ(ντησα ; 1. to put out, dig
out: τα όμματα, Aristot. h. a. 2, 17 [p. δΟδ', 6]; 6,
5. 2. to dig through, transfix, pierce: τινά. Rev. i. 7;
oyjfOVTai fli ov (i. e. fit τοΰτον, ov [cf. W. 158 (150)]) f|f-
κίντησαν, Jn. xix. 37. (Polyb. 5, 56, 12; Polyaen. 5, 3,
8; for τρη, Judg. ix. 54; jin to kill, Num. xxii. 29. 2
Mace. xii. 6. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexicc. etc. p. 540 sq.)*
(κ-κλάω : 1 aor. pass, (ξfκ\άσ(lηv: to break off; to cut
off: Ro. xi. 1 7, 19, 20 R G Τ AVII (on tliis vs. see κλάω).
(Sept. Lev. i. 1 7 ; Plat. rep. 1 p. 1 1 d. ; Plut., Alciphr.,
al.)*
ίκ-κλίίω : 1 aor. inf . f κκλίΐσαι ; \ aoτ.ψ^iSs.iξfκ\fίσθηv;
[It. (Hdt.) Eur. down] ; to shut out : Gal. iv. 1 7 (viz.
from intercourse with me and w^ith teachers coiiperating
with me) ; i. q. to turn out of doors : to prevent the ap-
proach of one, pass, in Ro. iii. 27.*
ίκκλησ-ίο, -Of, ή, (fr. (κκ\ητοί called out or forth, and
this fr. e'lHcaXea)) ; proj). <i galheritig of citizens called out
ΐκκΧησία
lyti
ί'/ίλεγ»
/'mm (heir homes into some public jilave; an assemhbj; so
iisi'd 1. among the Greeks from Thuc. [cf. licit. 3,
112] down, an assrmhlij of the peuple convened at the
puhlie jilaee of eouncil for the purj)Ose of dehberating:
Aels xix. 30. 2. in tlie Sej)!. often eijiiiv. to '?Π ", the
assembly of the Israel itcs, Judg. xxi. 8; 1 Chr. x.\i.\. 1,
etc., esp. when gatliered for sacred purposes, Ueut. xxxi.
30 (xxxii. 1) ; Josh. viii. 35 (ix. 8), etc.; in tlie N. T.
thus in Acts vii. 38; Ilcb. ii. 12. 3. ani/ yalheriny or
Ihnmi) of men assemlttcil b;/ chance or tumultuously : Acts
xix. 32, 41. 4. in tlie Christian sense, a. an assem-
b'li of Christians ijalhereil for worship : iv (κκΧησία, in tlie
religious meeting, 1 Co. xiv. Ifl, 85; fV rats ίκκλησίηα,
ib. 34 ; συν(μχ«τθαι ev (κκλησία, 1 Co. xi. I S ; ct. W. § 50,
4 a. b. (1 ciiiii/xiiii/ of C 'hrlsliaiis, or of those who, hoping
for eternal salvation through Jesus Christ, observe their
own religious rites, hold their own religious meetings,
and manage their own affairs according to regulations
prescribed for the body for order's sake; aa. those
who anywhere, in city or village, constitute such a com-
pany and are united into one body: Acts v. 11 ; viii.
3 ; i Co. iv. 1 7 ; vi. 4 ; Phil. iv. 15 ; 3 Jn. 6 [cf. W. 1 22
(IK;)]; with specification of place. Acts viii. 1 ; xi. 22;
Ro. xvi. 1 ; 1 Co. iv. 1 7 ; vi. 4 ; Rev. ii. 1, 8, etc. ; Βισσα-
XovtKtiuv, 1 Th. i. 1 ; 2 Th. i. 1 ; Λαοδικί'ωι/, Col. iv. 16;
with gen. of the possessor, toC 6(οϋ (equiv. to Π1Π' /ϊ^ρ,,
Num. xvi. 3; xx. 4), 1 Co. xi. 22; and mention of the
place, 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co. i. 1. Plur. αί (κκλησίαι: Acts xv.
41 ; 1 Co. vii. 17; 2 Co. viii. 19 ; Rev. i. 4 ; iii. 6, etc. ;
with Toil θ(ον added, 1 Th. ii. 14 ; 2 Th. i. 4 ; τοϋ Χριστοί,
Ro. xvi. IG; with mention of the place, as τ^γ Άσίαί,
Γαλατίαί, etc. : 1 Co. xvi. 1,10; 2 Co. viii. 1 ; Gal. i. 2;
T^f ΊουδαιΊΐί raU (v Χριστώ, joineii to Christ [seeec, I. G b.],
i. e. Christian assemblies, in contrast with those of the
Jews, Gal. i. 22 ; ίκκΧησίαι των (θνων, gathered from the
Gentiles, Ro. xvi. 4 ; τών αγίων, composed of the saints,
1 Co. xiv. 33. ή ίκκ\ησια κατ οικόν τινοί, the church in
one's house, i. e. the com|)any of Christians belonging to
a person's family ; otliers less aptly understand the
phrase of the Christians accustomed to meet for worship
in the house of some one (for as appears from 1 Co. xiv.
23, ^he whole Corinthian church was accustomed to
assemble in one and the same place ; [but see Bp.
Lghtft. on Col. iv. l."•)]) ; Ro. xvi. 5 ; 1 Co. xvi. 19 ; Col. iv.
15; Philem. 2. The name ή εκκλησία is used even by
Christ while on earth of the company of liis adherents
in any city or village : Mt. xviii. 1 7. bb. the whole body
of Christians scattered throughout the earth; collectively,
all who worship and honor (Jod and Christ in whatever
place they may be : Mt. xvi. 18 (where perha]is the Evan-
gelist employs την ϊκκΧηηίαν although Christ may have
said την βασίλ(!αν μον) ; 1 Co. xii. 28 ; Eph. i. 22; iii. 10;
V. 23 S(iii. 27, 29. 32: Phil. iii. 6; Col. i. 18. 24; with
gen. of the possessor : τοϋ κυρίου, Actsxx. 28 [R Tr mrg.
Λ\ΙΙτ.θ(ον]:τοϋθιοΰ,('<α\Λ. 13; 1 Co.xv. 9 ; 1 Tim. iii. 15.
cc. the name is transferred to the assembly of faithful
Christians already dead and received into heaven : Heb.
xii. 23 (on this pass, see in απογράφω, b. and πρωτότοκο!.
fin.). [In general,»eeTionchi 1, and B.D.'r. v. Church,
also Am. ed. ; and for patristic usage Soph. I.ex. s. v.]
»κ-κλίνΜ [Uo. xvi. 17 Τ Tr WII]; 1 aor. ίξίκΧινα; in
Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down; Sept. chiefly for ""3 and riDp;
intrans. to turn aside, deviate (from the right way and
course, Mai. ii. 8, [cf. Dent. v. 32]) ; metaiih. and absol.
to turn (one's self) away [B. 144 (12G) sq. ; W. 251
(23U)], either from the path of rectitude, Ro. iii. 12
(Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3) ; or from evil (a malis declinarr,
Cic. Tusc. 4, G) : απίι κακοϋ, 1 Pet. iii. 11 (Pe. xxxiii.
(xx.xiv.) 15; xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 27; Prov. iii. 7); από with
gen. of pers. to turn away from, keep aloof from, one's
society; to shun one: Ro. xvi. 17, (oils, Ignat. ad Eph.
€Κ-κολνμβ<ίω, -ώ : 1 aor. pti'p. (κκοΧυμβήσο!; to swim
out of: Acts xxvii. 42. (Eur. Ilel. 1C09; Diod., Dion.
Hal.) '
£κ-κομι(ξω: impf. pass, ίξικομιζόμην; to carry out; a dead
man for burial (Polyb. 35, G, 2 ; Plut. Agis 21 ; Ildian.
2, 1, 5 [2 ed. Bekk.], etc.; in Lat. efferre) : Lk. vii. 12.•
ίκ-κοιτή, -rjt, ή, [Polyb., Plut., al.], see ΐγκοπη.
€κ-κόΐΓτω ; fut. (κκόψ-ω ; 1 aor. inipv. ckkoiZ/ok. subjunc.
(κκήψω ; [P;.ss., ])res. ΐκκόπτομαι^ ; 2 aor. {ξ(κόπην; 2 fut.
ΐκκοπτισομαι; to cut out, cut off ; a. properly: of a tree,
Mt. iii. 10; vii. 19; Lk. iii. 9; xiii. 7, 9, (Ildt. 9, 97,
etc.) ; a hand, an eye : Mt. v. 30 ; xviii. 8, (τόν υφθαΚμόν,
Dem. p. 744, (13) 17); pass, ϊκ τίνος, a branch from a
tree, Ro. xi. 22, 24. b. figuratively: την άφαρμήν, to cut
off occasion, 2 Co. xi. 12, (την «λπίδα. Job xix. 10). In
1 Pet. iii. 7 read ίγκότττίσθαί \ see ίγκόπτω."
('κ-κρ€'μιαμ.αι (mid. of (κκριμάννυμι, cf. JUlm. Ausf. Sjir.
ii. 224 .sq. ; [Veitch s. v. κμίμαμαι] ; Β. Gl (-"J.S)) : [impf.
(ξ^κριμάμην^ ; to hang from : ίξ(κρ€ματο αντοΰ άκοιων,
hung uiMiu his lips (Verg. Aen. 4, 79), I.k. xix. 48, where
Τ WII (^(KpipcTo, after codd. XB, a form which Τ con-
jectures "a vulgari usu hand alienuui fuisse;" [cf. B.u..s. ;
WH. A pp. p. 168]. (Plat., Philo, Plut., al.) •
<κ-κρ<μομα>Ί see the preceding word.
ίκ-λαλί'ω, -ώ : 1 aor. inf. «λαλ^σιιι ; to speak out, di-
rul(/e : Tivi, foil, by on, Acts xxiii. 22. (Judith xi. 9 ;
Deinosth., Philo, Dio Cass., al.) *
ίκ-λάμιτω : fut. ίΊίλ<ίμψω ; to shine forth : Mt. xiii. 43 ;
Dan. xii. 3 var. (Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.)'
(κ-λανθάνω : to cause to forr/et ; Μίά. to forrjet ; pf. e'lcXi'-
λησμαι. foil, by gen.: Ik-b. xii. 5. (Ilom. et sqq ) *
ί'κ-λί'γω : pf. pass. ptcp. fitXfXfy/ie'iOs, once in Lk. ix.
35 L mrg. Τ Tr AVII ; Mid., impf. (ξ()ί(γ6μην (Lk. xiv. 7);
1 aor. (ξ(\(ξάμην; in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down ; Sept. for
■\Π3 ; to picl: out, choose ; in the N. T. (exc. Lk. ix. 35,
where the reading is doubtful) always mid., ίκΚίγομαι, to
pick or choose out for one's self: τι, Lk. x. 42: xiv. 7 :
τινά, one from among many (of Jesus choosing his disci-
ples), Jn. vi. 70 ; xiii. 18 ; xv. 16 ; Acts i. 2 : από τίνων,
from a number of persons (Sir. xiv. 16), Lk. vi. 13; «
ToO κόσμου, Jn. xv. 19 ; used of choosing one for an office.
Acts vi. 5 ; foil, by ίκ τίνων. Acts i. 24 ; to discharge
some business, Acts xv. 22, 25 ; ev ήμ'ιν (al. ύμΐν) i^c\(-
ξατο 6 θ(0!, foil, by the ace. and inf. denoting the end.
t/cXeiTTO)
197
ΐΚΛ,υω
God made choice among us i. e. in our ranks, Acts xv. 7,
where formerly many, misled by the Hebr. 3 1Π3 (1 S.
xvi. 9 ; 1 K. viii. IG, etc., and the Sept. of these pass.),
wrongly regarded tV ήμίν as the object on which the mind
of the chooser was as it were fixed; [W. § .'i2, 3 a.; B.
159 (138)]. Especially is God said ϊκΚίξασθαι those
whom he has judged fit to receive his favors and sepa-
rated from the rest of mankind to be peculiarly his own
and to be attended continually by his gracious oversight :
thus of the Israelites, Acts xiii. 17 (Deut. xiv. 2,
[cf. iv. 37]; 2 Mace. v. 19); of Christians, as those
whom he has set apart from among the irreligious mul-
titude as dear unto himself, and whom he has rendered,
through faith in Christ, citizens in the Messianic king-
dom : Mk. xiii. 20 ; 1 Co. i. 27 sq. ; Λvith two ace. one of
the object, the other of the predicate [W. § 32, 4 b.],
Jas. ii. 5 ; τίνα iv Χριστώ, so that the ground of the choice
lies in Chri.<t and his merits, foil, by ace. with inf. denot-
ing the end, Eph. i. 4. In Lk. ix. 35 L mrg. Τ Tr WH
Jesus is called ό uior τοΰ θιοΰ ό f'lcXcXry^fiOs ( R G L t.xt.
ayanrjTOs), as being dear to God beyond all others and
exalted by him to the preeminent dignity of Alessiah ;
but see «λί<τΟΓ, 1 b.*
4K-\cCiru ; f ut. ckXciS/o) ; 2 aor. ΐξίλιπον ; 1. trans.
a. to leave out, omit, pass bi/. b. ίο /eawe, (^«iV, (a place) :
TO ζην, Toi/ βίον, to die, 2 Macc. x. 13; 3 Mace. ii. 23;
Soph. Electr. 1131; Polyb. 2, 41, 2, al. ; Dion. Hal. 1, 24 ;
Luc. Macrob. 12 ; Alciphr. 3, 28. 2. intrans. to fail•,
i. e. to leave off] cease, slop : τα ίτη, Ileb. i. 1 2 fr. Ps. ci.
(cii.) 28 (where for DOFI) ; ή πίστίί, Lk. xxii. 32 ; riches,
ace. to the reading (κλίτη} (L txt. Τ TrWII), Lk. xvi.
9 (often so in Grk. writ., and the Sept. as Jer. vii. 28 ;
xxviii. (Ii.) 30). as often in classic Grk. fr. Thuc.
down, it is used of the failing or eclipse of the light of
the sun and the moon : τοΰ ήλιου (κλιπόντο! [WH eVXfi-
irovTos], the sun having failed [^or failing^, Lk. xxiii. 45
Tdf. ; on this (without doubt the true) reading [see esp.
WH. A pp. ad loc, and] cf., besides Tdf.'s note, Keim
ill. 440 [Eng. trans, vi. 173] (Sir. xvii. 31 (20)). to
expire, die; so ace. to RG L mrg. (KXiVj/Te in Lk. xvi. 9,
(Tob. xiv. 11 ; Sap. v. 13 ; Sept. for i'lj. Gen. xxv. 8,
etc.; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 29; Lam. i. 19; for mo, -ler. xlix.
(xiii.) 1 7, 22. Plat. legg. 6, 759 e. ; 9, 856 e. ; Xen. Cyr.
8, 7, 26).*
ίκ-λ£κτ05, -ή, -όν, (c/cXcyto), picked out, chosen ; rare in
(irk. writ., as Thuc. 6, 100; Plat. legg. 11 p. 938 b.; 12,
948 a., etc.; Sept. for 1ίΠ3 and ΤΠ2 ; in the N. T. 1.
chosen hij ({oil, and a. to olHain salvation through
Chrift (see €κλίγω) ; hence Christians are called oi
eicXf icToi ToO θ(οϋ, the chosen or elect of God, [cf. W. 35
(34); 234 (219)], (njn; ■"i'ns, said of pious Israehtes,
Is. Ixv. 9, 15, 23 ; Ps! civ. (cv.) 43, cf. Sap. iv. 15) : Lk.
xviii. 7 ; Ro. viii. 33 ; Col. iii. 12 ; Tit. i. 1 ; without the
gen. 6(οΰ, Mt. xxiv. 22, 24 ; Mk. xiii. 20, 22 ; 1 Pet. i. 1 ;
with the addition of τοΰ Χρίστου, as gen. of possessor,
Mt. xxiv. 31 ; Mk. xiii. 27 [TTrom. gen.] ; κλητυΊ κάΊ
«λίκτοί κ. πιστοί. Rev. xvii. 14 ; γ/κοτ (κλίκτόν, 1 Pet. ii.
9 (fr. Is. xhii. 20, cf. Add. to Esth. viii. 40 [vi. 17, p. 64
ed. Fritz.]) ; €κΚ(κτοί, those who have become true par-
takers of the Christian salvation are contrasted with
κλητοί, those who have been invited but who have not
shown themselves fitted to obtain it, [al. regard the
' called ' and the ' chosen ' here as alike partakers of
salvation, but the latter as the ' choice ones ' (see 2 be-
low), distinguished above the former; cf. Jas. Morison
or Meyer ad loc], Mt. xx. 1 6 [here Τ AVII cm. Tr br. the
cl.] ; xxii. 14 ; finally, those are called «κλίκτοί who are
destined for salvation but have not yet been brought to
it, 2 Tim. ii. 10 [but cf. Iluther or EUic. ad loc.]. ° b.
The Messiah is called preeminently ό (κλίκτοιτον dfoO,
as appointed by God to the most exalted ofHce conceiv-
able : Lk. xxiii. 35, cf. ix. 35 L mrg. Τ Tr WH ; cf.
Dillmann, Das Buch Henoch [iibers. u. erklart ; allgem.
Einl.], p. xxiii. c. Angels are called cxXf κτοί, as
those whom God has chosen out from other created
beings to be peculiarly associated with him, and his high-
est ministers in governing the universe: I Tim. v. 21;
see aytos, 1 b. ; μαρτνρομαι bt e-yo» μΐν νμων τα ayta και
Touff ι ( ρους ayy ίλους τοΰ θίον, Joseph, b. j. 2, 16. 4 sub
fin. ; [yet al. explain by 2 Pet. ii. 4 ; Jude 6 ; cf. EUic. on
1 Tim. 1. c.]. 2. univ. choice, select, i. e. the best of
its kind or class, excellent, preeminent : appUed to cer-
tain individual Christians, 2 Jn. 1, 13 ; with ev κυρίω
added, eminent as a Christian (see cv, I. 6 b.), Ro.
xvi. 13; of things: XMor. 1 Pet. ii. 4, [6], (Is. xxviii. 16; 2
Esdr. V. 8 ; Enoch c. 8 Grk. txt., ed. Dillmann p. 82 sq.).*
Ικλογή, -ης. ή. ((κλίγω). election, choice; a. the art
of picking out, choosing: σκιϊοί (κλογή( (gen. of quality;
cf. W. § 34, 3 b. ; [B. 161 ( 14ii sii-)]), i. q. exXeio-oV, sc. τοΟ
deoi, Acts ix. 15; spec, used of 'that act of (iod's free
will by which before the foundation of the world he de-
creed his blessings to certain persons; — ij κατ (κλογήν
TrpoBeais, the decree made from choice [A. V. the purpose
ace. to election, cf. W. 193 (182)], Ro. ix. 11 (cf. Fritz-
sche ad loc. p. 298 sqq.) ; — particularly that by which
he determined to bless certain persons through Christ,
Ro. xi. 28 ; κατ' ίκλoyήv χάριτοί. according to an electimi
which is due to grace, or a gracious election, Ro. xi. 5 :
with gen. of the pers. elected, 1 Th. i. 4 ; 2 Pet. i. 10.
b. the thing or person chosen : i. q. ckXcktoI, Ro. xi. 7.
(Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Dion. Hal., al.)•
έκ-λΰω : [Pass., pres. β'ΐίλΰομαι] ; pf. ptep. c'lcXfXu/jei/os ;
1 aor. ίξίλύθην; 1 fut. ίκλνθήσομαι; often in Grk. writ,
fr. [Hom.], Aeschyl. down ; 1. to loose, unloose (cf.
Germ, auslosen), to set free : τινά τιι /os and ΐκ tivos. 2.
to dissolve ; metaph. to weaken, relax, exhaust, (.Sept. Josh.
X. 6 ; Jer. xiv. (xxxviii.) 4 ; Aristot. h. an. 9, 1 sub fin.
[p. 610% 27]; Joseph, antt. 8, 11, 3; 13, 8, 1). Com-
monly in the Pass. a. to have one's strength relaxed, to
be enfeebled through exhaustion, to grow weak, grow wean/,
be tired out, (often so in Grk. writ.) : of the body, Mt.
ix. 36 Rec. ; xv. 32 ; Mk. viii. 3 ; thus for η:>;, 1 S. xiv.
28 ; 2 S. xvii. 29 ; for r\3^, 2 S. iv. 1 etc. : of the mind.
Gal. vi. 9 (μή (κλνόμ^νοι if we faint not, sc. in well-do-
ing). Cf. Grimm on 1 Macc. iii. 17. b. to despond,
become faint-hearted : Heb. xii. 5, (Deut. x.x. 3 ; Prov.
ΐκαασσω
198
ίΚΊτΧησσω
iii. 11); with rait ψυχαίί added, Ilcb. xii. 3; τοΙγ σώ-
μασι, ταίι ψυχαις. Γι>Ι_ν1). 2:i, 4, 7; τη ψνχη, 29, 6, 14;
40, 12, 7; L-f. Griiniii υπ 1 Mace. ix. 8; 2 Mace. iii. 24.•
4κ-)»β-σ-ω; impf. (ξίμασσυν; 1 aor. (ξίμαξα; Ιο wipe
njf, to iripe aiva;/ : wiih ace. of object and dat. of instru-
ment, Lk. vii. 3S, 44 ; Jn. .\i. 2 ; xii. 3 ; xiii. 5. (Soph.,
Eur., Ilippocr., Aristot., al. Sir. xii. 11 ; Bar. vi. (ep.
Jer.) 12. 23 (13, 24).)•
ίκ-|ΐνκτηρ(]ζω : inipf. (ξιμυκτήριζον; lo deride by turning
up the tiose, to sneer ul, scqlf'ut : τινά, I>k. xvi. 14 ; xxiii.
35. (For li'h,Ps. ii. 4; [x.K.xiv. (xxxv.) 16]; 2 K. xix.
21 [here the simple verb]; 1 Esdr. i. 49 Alex.; Ev.
Nicod. c. 10. Prof. writ, use the simple verb (fr. μυκτήρ
the nose) ; [cf. W. 2.5].) •
ίκ-ν(νω : 1 aor. (ξίνιυσα ; 1. Ιο bend lo one side (τη
κίφαΧη. Xen. ven. lo, 12). 2. lo lake one's sel/awai/,
mlhdraw: Jn. v. 13, where Chrysostom says that t'|('-
vevat is equiv. to e^i'icXti/f ; but others derive the form
from c'kWa), q. v. (Sept. for"HD, Judg. iv. 18 Alex. ; Π33.
to lurn one's self, Judg. xviii. 26 Alex. ; 2 K. ii. 24 ; xxiii.
16 ; [add 3 Mace. iii. 22 ; Joseph, antt. 7, 4, 2]. In prof,
auth. also transitively, lo acoid a Ihing ; as τα βίλη, Diod.
15, 87 ; νΧηγήν. ib. ] 7, 100.) •
cK-vc'cu : 1. properly, lo swim away, escape by swim-
mitu/, (Thuc. 2, 90). 2. lo escape, slip away secretly,
([Find. Ol. 13, 1C3] ; Eur. Hipp. 470, etc.) ; in this sense
many interpp. take e'lfviuCTe in Jn. v. 13. But Jesus
withdrew not to avoid danger but the admiration of the
people ; for the dan-jer first arose after his withdrawal.*
4κ-νήφω: 1 aor. t'^e'i/jj^a; a. prop, to return lo one's
self from drunkeriness, become sober, (Gen. ix. 24 ; [1 S.
XXV. 37] ; Joel i. 5 ; [Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 2] ; Lynceus ap.
Ath. 4, 5 p. 130 b.). b. metaph. to return to soberness
of mind (cf. ανανήφω) : 1 Co. xv. 34, (Plut. Dem. 20).*
CKOvo-ios, -ov, {(κών ), voluntary : κατά €κούσιον, of free
will, Philem. 14. (Xum. xv. 3; Kaff (κονσίαν, Thuc. 8,
27 — [" The word understood in the one ease appears to
be τρόπον (Porphyr. de abst. 1, 9 καθ' ίκηύσιον τρόπον,
com p. Eur. Med. 7.") 1 ϊκουσίω τρόπω) : in the other, γνώμην
so ϊκονσία [doubtful, see L. and S.], (ξ (κουσίας, etc. ; "
cf. Lobeck, Phryn. p. 4 ; Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. 1. c. ; cf.
W. 463 (432)].)•
CKOvaCws, adv., [fr. Eur. down], volunlarily, willingly,
of one's own accord: Ueh. x. 26 («. apapravftv [A. V.
to sin wilfully'] is tacitly opposed to sins committed
inconsiderately, and from ignorance or from weakness) ;
1 Pet. V. 2.•
(Κ'ίπιλαι, adv., (fr. ck and πύλαι. formed like ίκτοτ^ [cf.
W. 24(23); 422(333); B. 321 (275)]),/rom o/oW; of
a long lime : 2 Pet. ii. 3 ; iii. 5. (A later Grk. word, fr.
Philo down; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 4.5 sqq.) *
<κ.π(ΐράζω: fut.eV!Γf^pάσω; [1 aor. ίξιπ^ίρασα. 1 Co. x.
9' Lmr.;. Τ WII mrg.] ; a word wholly biblical [put by
Philo (de congr. erud. grat. § 30, Mang. i. 543) for Sept.
π(ΐράζ. in quoting Deut. viii. 2] ; lo prot-e, test, thoroughly
[A. V. tempt] : τινά, his mind and judgment, Lk. x. 25;
TO»- θίόν, to put to proof God's character and power:
Mt. iv. 7; Lk. iv. 12, after Deut. vi. 16, where for HD: ;
τόκ Χριστόν, by irreligion and immorality to test the
patience or the avenging power of Christ (exalted to
God's right hand), 1 Co. x. 9' [(yet L Τ WII Tr txt.
κύμιον), 'J'' L mrg. Τ WII mrg. Cf. Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.)
18].•
(κ-^μπω : 1 aor. (ξ(π€μψα ; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. (κπιμ•
φθίίς; to send forth, send away: Acts xiii. 4 ; xvii. 10.
[From Horn, down.] *
«K-irepwrerus, adv., exceedingly, out of measure, the more :
used of intense earnestness, Mk. xiv. 31 LTTrWH
(for Rec. (κ jvfpiaaoi ) ; not found elsewhere. But see
νπ(ρίκπ(ρισσίύς*
ίκ-ΐΓίτάννυμι : 1 aor. ϊξ€πίτασα ; Ιο spread out, stretch
forth : Tas χ(ΐρας πρι'α τίνα, Ro. χ. 21 fr. Is. 1.x V. 2. (Eur.,
Polyb., Plut., Anthol., al.)•
ίκ^ίΓηδάω, -ώ : 1 aor. (ξιπήϋασα ; to spring out, leap
forth: (is τ. όχλον. Acts xiv. 14 GLTTrWII. (els τον
λαόν, Judith xiv. 1 7 ; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph, and] Hdt.
down. Deut. xxxiii. 22.) •
«κ^ιτίΐΓτω ; pf . (κπΐτττωκα ; 2 aor. f ^f jrf σον ; 1 aor. €^€-
πισα (Acts xii. 7 LTTrWH; Gal. v. 4; on this aor.
see [πίπτω and] άπίρχομαι); [fr. Horn, down]; to fall
out of to fall down from ; 1. prop. : αί aXiaeis ίκ των
χιιρων (see c'lc, I. 3 [cf. λΥ. 427 (3:•8) and De verb. comp.
etc. Pt. ii. p. 11]), Acts xii. 7 («κ τήί θί)κης. Is. vi. 13;
€K τοϋ οίρανοΰ. Is. xiv. 12); absol. : Mk. xiii. 25 RG;
Acts x.wii. 32; Jas. i. 11 ; 1 Pet. i. 24; of navigators,
Ικπ. (it (i. e. from a straight course) lo fall off i. e. be
driven into [cf. Stallbaum on Plato's Phileb. p. 106 sq. ;
al. supply ' from deep water,' and render e'lnr. lo be ca-<t
away]. Acts xxvii. 1 7, 2S, 29, in this last vs. L Τ Tr \VU
have adopted enrr. κατά , (often in Grk. writ., as eis γην,
Eur. Hel. 409: fir τον λιμίνα, Thuc. 2, 92). 2. met-
aph. a. Tivos [W. 427 (398), and De verb. comp. etc.
u. s.], to fall from a thing, to lose il: Trjs xapiros, Gal. v.
4 ; τοΰ idiov στηριγμον, 2 Pet. iii. 1 7, {τήs προς τον 8ήμον
eivolas, Plut. Tib. Gracch. 21 ; βασιλείας, Joseph, antt.
7, 9, 2; also λτΙιΙι prepositions, ΐκ των (όντων, Hdt. 3, 14;
άπο των Απίδων, Thuc. 8, 81 ); πόθ(ν. Rev. ii. 5 Rec.
((KeWfv. Ael. v. h. 4, 7). b. absol. to perish ; to fail,
([iroperly, to fall from a place which one cannot keep,
fall from its position) : ή άγάττη. 1 Co. xiii. 8 R (i ; to fall
powerless, fall lo the ground, be without effect: of the
divine promise of salvation by Christ, Ro. ix. 6.*
{K.^Xici> : [impf. (ξ(πλ(ον] ; 1 aor. (ξίττΧιυσα ; lo sail
from, sail away, depart by ship : από with gen. of place,
Acts XX. 6 ; els with ace. of place, Acts xv. 39 ; xviii. 18.
[Soph., Hdt., Thuc, al.] *
(κ-πληρ6ω : pf. ΐκπ(π\ήρωκα: to fill full, lo fill up com-
pletely ; metaph. την ίπαγγιΧίαν, Ιο fulfil i. e. make good :
Acts xiii. 33 (32), as in Polyb. 1, 67, 1. [From Hdt.
down.] *
ίκ-τΓλήρω<Γΐ5, -f ω5, ή, a completing, fulfilment : τ. ήμιρω»
τ. άγνισμοϊι, the time when the days of purification are
to end, Acts xxi. 26. [Dion. Hal., Strab., Philo, al.]•
ίκ-ιτλήσ-σ-ω, -ττω : Pass., [pres. (κπλήσσομαι or -ττομαι
(so R G Mt. xiii. 54 ; Tr WH Acts xiii. 12)] ; impf. cf
eπ\ησσόμηv^, 2 aor. (ξeπ\άyηv•, com. in Grk. fr. Hom
^ΚΊΓ.νεω
199
ΐκτΐίρω
down ; prop. Ιο strike out, expel by a blow, drive out or
away ; to cast off by a bloiv, to drive out ; commonly, to
strike one out of self-possession, to strike with panic, shock,
astonish; Pass, to be struck with astonishment, astonished,
amazed ; absol. : Mt. xiii. ό4 ; xix. 25 ; Mk. vi. 2 ; x. 26 ;
Lk. ii. 48 ; used of the glad amazement of the wonder-
ing people, Mk. vii. 37 ; em rfi διδαχή, Mt. vii. 28 ; xxii.
33;Mk. 1.22; xi. 18; Lk.iv.32; Actsxiii. 12; [cVtTJ^ifyu-
'Καότηη, Lk. ix. 43], (ίπϊ τω KoWei, Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 27 ;
cVi Tj %, Ael. V. h. 12, 41;'[W. §33,b.]; by the Greeks
also with simple dat. and with ace. of the thing, as Sap.
xiii. 4 ; 2 Mace. vii. 1 2). [.Syn. see φοβίω, fin.] *
ίκ-Ίτνίω : 1 aor. ΙξΙττν(υσα ; to breathe out, breathe out
one'.-' life, breathe one's last, expire: Mk. xv. 37, 39; Lk.
xxiii. 46, and often in Grk. writ., both without an object
(fr. [Soph. Aj. 1026] Eur. down), and with βίυν or ψυχην
added (fr. Aeschyl. down).*
€κ-'ΠΌρ€ύομαι ; impf. ςζΐπορίνόμ.ην ; f ut. ΐκπορΐνσομαι ;
(pass, [mid., cf. iropfiai] of (κποριΰω to make to go forth,
to lead out, with fut. mid.) ; [fr. Xen. down] ; Sept. for
KX" ; to go forth, go out, depart; 1. prop.; with men-
tion of the place whence : από, Mt. xx. 29 ; Mk. x. 46 ;
ίξω (της πό\(ωί), Mk. xi. 19; €κ, Mk. xiii. 1 ; (KfWev, jMk.
vi. 11 ; παρά tivos, from one's abode, one's vicinity, Jn.
XV. 26, (άκούσωμα/ τα (κπηρ€νόμ.ΐνα παρά κυρίου, Ezek.
xxxiii. 30) ; without mention of the place whence or
whither, which must be learned from the context : Lk.
iii. 7 ; Acts xxv. 4 ; with mention of the end to which :
(πι Ttva, Rev. xvi. 14; προς τίνα, Mt. iii. 5 ; Mk. i. 5; ϊκ-
πορ^ΐκσθαι els όδόρ, to go firih from some place into the
road [or on his way, cf. οδός, 1 b.], Mk. x. 17 ; on Acts
ix. 28 see (ίσπορίνομαι, 1 a. demons, when expelled, are
said to go out (sc. from the human body) : Mt. xvii. 21
RGL; ActsxLx. 12GLTTrA\'H. [food (excrement)]
to go out i. e. be discharged, Mk. vii. 19. to come forth,
ex των μνημείων, of the dead who are restored to life and
leave the tomb, . In. V. 29. 2. fi^. to come forth, to issue,
to proceed: with the adjuncts ίκ τοΰ ανθρώπου, ίκ τηί
καρδίας, ίκ τοΰ στόματος, of feelings, affections, deeds,
sayings, Mt. xv. 11, 18 ; Mk. vii. 15 L Τ Tr WII, 20 ; Lk.
iv. 22 ; Eph. iv. 29 ; [eσωθev eK της καρδίας, Mk. vii. 21 ;
with eσωθev alone, ibid. 23] ; πάν ρήμα (κπορ. δια στόματος
6eoiJ, every appointment whereby God bids a man to be
nourished and preserved, Mt. iv. 4, fr. Deut. viii. 3. to
break forth : of lightnings, flames, etc., eK τίνος. Rev. iv. 5 ;
LX. 17 sq. ; xi. 5. to flow forth : of a river (eK τ.), Rev.
xxii. 1. to project, from the mouth of one : of a sword,
Rev. i. 16 ; xix. 15, 21 Rec. to spread abroad, of a ru-
mor : foil, by €if, Lk. iv. 37. [Syx. cf. ΐρχομαι. fin.]*
cK.^opvcvu: 1 aor. ptcp. fem. ίκπορν(νσασα ; (the prefi.x
eK seems to indicate a lust that gluts itself, satisfies itself
completely); Sept. often for njl; to go a whoring, 'give
one's self over to fornication ' A. V. : Jude 7. Kot found
in prof. writ. [Test. .xii. Patr. test. Dan § 5 ; Poll. 6, 30
(126).]•
ίκ-ΐΓτν» : 1 aor. Ιξίπτνσα ; to spit out (Hom. Od. 5, 322,
etc.); trop. to reject, spurn, loathe: τι, Gal. iv. 14. in
which sense the Greeks used καταπτΰίΐν, προστη-ίαν,
πτν(ΐν, and Philo παραπτΰιιν ; cf. Kypke and Loesner [or
Ellic] on Gal. 1. c. ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 1 7.*
ίκ-ριζόω, -ώ: 1 aoT. eξepίζωσa; Fa.ss.,1 aor. tξepιζώθηv;
1 fut. ίκριζωβήσομαι; to root out, pluck up by the roots : τι,
Mt. xiu. 29 ; XV. 13 ; Lk. .xvii. 6 ; Jude 12. (Jer. i. 10;
Zeph. ii. 4 ; Sir. iii. 9 ; [Sap. iv. 4] ; 1 Mace. v. 51 [Alex.] ;
2 Mace. xii. 7 ; [Sibyll. frag. 2, 21 ; al] ; Geopon.) *
ίκ-<Γτασ•ΐ5, -fωs, ή, (ίξίστημι) ; 1. univ. in Grk. writ.
any casting down of a thing from its proper place or state;
displacement, (Aristot., Plut.). 2. a throwing of the
mind out of its normal state, alienation of mind, whether
such as makes a lunatic {διανοίας, Deut. xxviii. 28 ; τω»
λογισμώχ, Plut. Sol. 8), or that of the man who by some
sudden emotion is transported as it were out of himself,
so that in this rapt condition, although he is awake, his
mind is so drawn off from all surrounding objects and
whoUy fixed on things divine that he sees nothing but the
forms and images lying within, and thinks that he per-
ceives with his bodily eyes and ears realities shown him
by God, (PhUo, quis rerum divin. heres § 53 [cf. 51 ; B. D.
s. V. Trance ; Delitzsch, Psychol, v. 5]) : eπeπeσev [Rec, al.
fyeVfTo] en αυτόν ΐκστασις. Acts X. 10; eiSev iv eKaraaei
όραμα. Acts xi. 5 ; yeveaSai ev eKcrtaaei, Acts .xxii. 17, cf.
2 Co. xii. 2 sq. 3. In the O. T. and the New amaze-
ment [cf. Longin. 1,4; Stob. flor. tit. 104, 7], the state of
one who, either owing to the importance or the novelty of
an event, is thrown into a state of blended fear and won-
der : el^ev αϋτάς τρόμος και ΐκστασις, Mk. xvi. 8 ; i^eaTrf-
σαν fKtrraaei μeyaKr|, Mk. v. 42 (Ezek. xxvi. 16) ; ίκστασκ
ΐ\αβ(ν απαντάς, Lk. V. 26 ; ίπ\ήσθησαν θάμβους κ. «στά-
σeωs, Acts iii. 10; (for Π•1">Π, trembhng, Gen. xxvii. 33 ;
1 S. xiv. 15, etc.; ΊΠί), fear, 2 Chr. xiv. 14, etc.).*
ίκ-στρί'φω : pf. pass, ίξίστραμμαι ; 1. to turn or twist
out, tear up, (Hom. II. 17, os). 2. to turn inside out,
invert; trop. to change for the irorse, pervert, corrupt,
(Arstph. nub. 554; Sept. Deut. xxxii. 20) : Tit. iii. 11.»
[ίκ-σ-ώζω : 1 aor. ^ξ^σωσα ; to save from, either to keep
or to rescue from danger (fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down) :
eif αιγια\υν ίκσωσαι το πλοΐον to bring the ship safe to
shore. Acts .xxvii. 39 WH txt. ; al. ίξωσαι, see ϊξωθΐω, and
el J. 7 c.•]
£Κ-τοράσ•σ•ω ; post-classical ; to agitate, trouble, exceed-
ingly: T. πό\ιν, Acts xvi. 20. (τ. δημον, Plut. Coriol. 19,
and the like often in Dion Cass. Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 5 ;
Sap. xvii. 3, etc.) *
CK-Te£vw; fut. eKTevia; 1 aor. e^eTeiva; [fr. Aeschyl.,
Soph., Hdt. down] ; Sept, com. for ntpj, U^B and U'lU ;
to stretch out, stretch forth : την xe'ipa (often in Sept.),
Mt. viii. 3; xii. 13; xiv. 31 ; xxvi. 51 ; ^Ik. i. 41 ; iii.
5 ; Lk. V. 13 ; vi. 10 ; .In. xxi. 18 ; Acts xxvi. 1 ; with
the addition of eni τίνα. over, towards, against one —
either to point out something, Mt. xii. 49, or to lay
hold of a person in order to do him violence, Lk. x.xii.
53 ; ίκτ. τ. xe'ipa elς ϊησιν. spoken of God, Acts iv. 30 ;
αγκύρας, properly, to carry forward [R. V. lay otii] the
cable to which the anchor is fastened, i. e. to cast anchor,
[" the idea of extending the cables runs into that of car-
rying out and dropping the anchors " (Hackett) ; cf. B. D.
ί/ϊτελβω
200
ίκφίύ^α
Am. I'd. |). 3009• last par.], Acts xxvii. 30. [CoMP. : «V-,
<K-TcXfu, -ΰ> : I aor. inf. «'«rfXtVat : In finii^h, complete :
Lk. .\iv. 29 5(1• (From Horn, iluwii; i. q. nSa, Deut.
xx.\ii. 4.3.)*
(K-T(vci.a, -at, ή, (ϊκτ(νής), a later Grk. word, (cf. Lob.
ad I'lirvn. p. 311) ; a. prop, extension, b. inlenlness
(of mind), enrne.ilne.^s : {'νΐκτινύα, earnestly. Acts xxvi. 7.
(2 Mace. xiv. 38; Judith iv. 9. Cf. Grimm on 3 Mace,
vi. 41 [whiTC lie refers to Cic. ad Att, 10, 17, 1].) *
«κτίνήϊ, -i's, {(κτ(Ινω), prop, stretched out; fig. intent,
etiiuest, (tssiiluons : πμοσηχή, Act.sxii. ."i RG {fl\^. Ignat.
[inlerpol.] ad Kpli. 10 ; δ/ι/σι? κ. ί«σία, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
59,2}; dyam). 1 Pet. iv. 8. Neut. of the corapar. (ktc
viuTfpov, as ailv., more intently, more earnestly, Lk. xxii. 44
[L br. WII reject the pass.]. (f'lCTfi'^i ψίλοΓ, Aesclul.
suppl. 983 ; Polyb. 22, 5, 4 ; then very often fr. I'hilo
on; cf. Lob. ad Phrjn. p. 311.) *
iKTcvis, adv., earnestly, fervently•. Acts xii. 5 L Τ Tr
AVIl ; tiyanav. 1 Pet. i. 22. (.lonah iii. 8 ; Joel i. 14 ; 3
Mace. V. 9. Poljb. etc. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 31 1 ; [W.
2.5; 4li3 (431)].)*
ίκ^τίθημι : 1 aor. pass. ptcp. t «reifif ; Mid., impf. i^tri-
βίμην. 2 Άοτ.{ξ(θίμην; Ii> j)lafe οτ .let out, expose ; 1.
prop. : an infant, Acts vii. 21 ; (Sap. xviii. 5; [Hdt. 1,
112j; Arstph. nub. 531; Ael. v. h. 2,7; Leian. de
sacrif. 5, and often). 2. Mid. metaph. to set forth, de-
clare, expound : Acts xi. 4 ; τί, Acts xviii. 2ϋ ; xxviii. 23 ;
([.\ristot. passim]; Diod. 12, 18; Joseph, antt. 1, 12, 2;
.\tlien. 7 p. 278 d. ; al.).•
ίκ^ινάσσ-ω: 1 aor. impv. (κτινάξατ£ ; 1 aor. mid. Jitcp.
(κτιναξάμ(νοί ; Ιο shake off, so that somethint; adhering
shall fall ; τόκ ;(oi)>', Mk. vi. 11 ; τον κονιορτόν, Mt. χ. 14
(where the gen. των ποδών does not depend on the verb
but on the subst. [L Τ WH mrg., however, insert «]) ;
by this sj'mbolic act a person expresses extreme con-
tempt for another and refuses to have any further inter-
course with him [B. D. .\m. ed. s. v. Dust] ; Mid. to shake
οβ' for (the cleansing of) one's self: τ. κονιορτόν . . . ΐπΐ
τίνα, against one, Acts xiii. 51 ; τα Ίμάηα, dust from gar-
ments, .\cts xviii. (J ; [cf. 15. I), u. s.; Neh. v. 1 3]. (lo knock
oul,Tovs6SovTat. Mom. 11. Hi, 348; Plut. (at. maj. 14.)•
i'KTos. -i;, -ov, the sixth : Mt. xx. 5, etc. [From Horn.
down.]
«KTOs, adv., (opp. to eWot, q. v.), outside, beyond; a.
TO iicTOs, the outside, exterior, with possess, gen., Mt. xxiii.
2G (cf. TO f^uSev τοϋ ποτηριού, 25). On the pleonastic
phrase eVros d μη, see tl. III. 8 d. b. Tt has the force of
a prep. [cf. \V. § 54, 6], and is foil, by the gen. [so even
in Horn.] ; o. outside of: <'kt6s τοϋ σώματος out of the
body, i. e. freed from it, 2 Co. xii. 2 sq. (in vs. 3 L Τ Tr
W II read χωρί: for (κτός) : (tvai (κτος τοϋ σώμ. [Α. V.
without the body i. e.], does not pertain to the body, 1
Co. vi. 18. β. beyond, besides, except: Acts xxvi. 22
(where the constr. is oiSiv λ/γωκ ίκτοΓ τούτων, άτ( οι . . .
ί\άλησαν etc. [cf. Β. 287 (246) : W. 158 ( 149) sq.]) ; 1
Co. XV. 27. (Sept. for l^S foil, by jp, Judg. viii. 26 ;
13S-D, IK. X. 13; 2 Chr. ix.'l2; xvii. 19.)•
«K-Tp«ir« : Pass., [pres. «τρ/π-ομα»] ; 2 aor. ΐξίτράπην \
2 fut. ΐκτραπτ^σομαι; 1. to Inni or twist out; pass, in
a me(li(al sense, in a fig. of the limbs : Ίνα μη τό χω\6>
ίκτραπί], lest it be wrenched out of (its jjroper) place,
diilocaled, [R. V. mrg. put out of joint}, (seeexx. of tliis
use fr. mcd. writ, in Sieph. Thesaur. iii. col. 607 d.), i. e.
lest he who is weak in a state of grace fall therefrom,
Ileb. xii. 13 [but Liinem., Delitzsch, al., still adhere to
the meaning turn aside, go astray; cf. A. V., 11. V. txt.].
2. lo turn «//"or aside ; pass, in a mid. sense [cf. B. 192
(1 66 Sij.)], lo turn one's self aside, lo be turned aside; (in-
trans.) lo turn asiile; Ilesych. : ίξίτμάπησαν (ξίκλιναν,
(της όδοΰ, Lcian. dial. deor. 25, 2; Ael. v. h. 14. 4!) [4S] ;
ϊξω της όδοϋ, Arr. exp. Al. 3, 21, 7 [4]; absol. Xen. an.
4, ."), 15; Arst|)h. Plut. 837 ; with mention of the place
to which, Hdt. 6, 34 ; Plat. Soph. p. 222 a. ; al.) ; figu-
ratively : €ΐς ματαιοΧογίαν, 1 Tim. i. 6 ; «Vi τονς μνθουΐ, 2
Tim. iv. 4 ; οπίσω τινός, to turn away from one in order to
follow another, 1 Tim. v. 15, («V αδίκους ηράξίΐς, Joseph,
antt. 8, 10, 2). with ace. lo tuni atniy from, lo shun a
thing, to uvoiii meeliny or nssoriali/iy irilli one : rat Kfvo-
φωνίας, 1 Tim. vi. 20, (τον ί\(-γχον, Polyb. 35, 4, 14 ;
Γάλλουϊ (κτρ(7Γ(σθαι κα\ σννο8ον (pfxjyav ti)V μ(Τ αυτών,
Joseph, antt. 4, s, 4<i).•
<κ-τρ{'φω ; fr. Aeschyl. down ; 1. lo nourish up lo
maturity; then univ. to nourish: την ΐαντοϋ σάρκα, Kph.
v. 29. 2. lo nurture, bring up: τα τίκνα, Eph. vi. 4.*
[ϊκτρομοϊ, adj., (cf. ίκφοβος), trembling exceedingly, ex-
ceedinf/ly lerrifud : Ileb. xii. 21 Tr mrg. WII mrg., after
codd. Sin. and Clarom. (al. ϊντρομος. «j. v.). Not found
elsewhere.•]
cK -τρωμα. -rot, τό. (ϊκτίτρώσκω to cause or to suffer abor-
tion: like (κβρωμα fr. (κβιβρώσκω), an abortion, abortive
birth [ (III iinliiiirly hirth : 1 Co. xv. 8, where Paul likens
himself to an ΐκτρωμα, and in vs. 9 explains in what sense :
that he is as inferior to the rest of the apostles as an im-
mature birth conies short of a mature one, and is no more
worthy of the name of an apostle than an abortion is of
the name of a child. (Num. xii. 12; Eccl. vi. 3; Job
iii. 16 ; in Grk. first used by .\ristot. de gen. an. 4, 5, 4
[p. 773'', 18]; but, as Phrynichus shows, p. 20S p(|. ed.
Lob., [288 s<|. ed. Rutherford], άμβλωμα and (ξάμβλωμα
are preferable ; \_Huxlab!e in " Expositor " for .\pr. 1 882
p. 277 sqq. ; Bp. Lghlfl. Ignat. ad Rom. 9 p. 230 sq.].) •
ΐκ-φ<'ρω ; fut. ίξοίσω ; 1 aor. ίξήνιγκα ; 2 aor. ίξήν€γκον ;
1. to carry out, to bear forth : τινά. Acts v. 15 ; the de.id
for burial. Acts v. 6, 9 sq. (often so in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. II. 24, 786 down ; see €κκομίζω) ; τί, Lk. xv. 22 ; 1
Tim. vi. 7. 2. to (bring i. e.) lend oul : τικά, Mk. viii.
23 Τ Tr txt. AVH. 3. to bring forth i. e. produce : of
the earth bearing plants, Heb. vi. 8 [cf. W. § 45, 6 a.] ;
(Ildt. I. 193; Xen. oec. 16, 5; Ael. v. h. 3, 18 and often;
Sept.. Gen.i. 12; Hag. i. 11 ; Cant. ii. 13).*
»-φ«νγω : fut. (κφ^ν^υμαι ; pi. ϊκπίφ£υγα; 2 aor. ϊξ-
ίφυγον; [fr. Hom. down]; to flee out of, flee away; a.
to seek safety in flight; absol. Acts xvi. 27; ϊκτοϋ οίκου.
Acts xix. 16. b. to escape: 1 Th. v. 3; Heb. ii. 3 ; τί,
Lk. xxi. 36 ; Ro. ii. 3 ; τινά, Heb. xii. 25 L Τ Tr WII ;
<φοβέω
201
eXcut
[τάί χείρύί Tivos. 2 Co. xi. 33. Cf. W. § 52, 4, 4 ; B. 146
(12«) sq.].•
<κ-φοβ<ω, -ώ ; to frighten away, to terrify ; /o throw into
violent friijhl : T<ra, 2 Co. x. 9. (Deut. x.wiii. 26 ; Zeph.
iii. 13, etc. ; Thuc, Plat., al.) *
(κψοβοε, -ov, stricken with fear or terror, exceedingly
frightened, terrified: Mk. ix. 6 ; Heb. xii. 21 fr. Deut. ix.
19. (Aristot. physiogn. 6 [p. 812', 20] ; Plut. Fab. 6.) *
«-φ«ω; 2 aor. ^Ά^^^ί^φψ (W. 90 (86); B. 68 (60) ;
Kriiger § 40, s. v. φύω ; [ Veitch ibid.]) ; [fr. Horn, down] ;
to generate or produce from ; to cause to grow out : όταν 6
κλάδος . . . τα φύλΚα (<φν;ι (subj. pres.), when the branch
has become tender and puis forth leaces, R {not R") G Τ
WII in Mt. .xxiv. 32 and Mk. xiii. 28 ; [al., retaining the
same accentuation, regard it as 2 aor. act. subj. intrans.,
with τα φύλ. as subject ; but against the change of sub-
ject see Mever or Weiss]. But Fritzsche, Lchm., Treg.,
al. have with reason restored [after Erasmus] ίκφυί} (2
aor. pass, subj.), which Grsb. had approved : when the
leaves have grown out, — so that τα φίλλα is the subject.*
Ικ-χβω and (a form censured by the grammarians, see
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 726) (κχύι/ω (whence pres. pass. ptcp.
(κχυνόμίρο! and, in L Τ Tr WII after the Aeolic form,
ίκχυ^ήμίΡΟ! [ct. B. 69 (61); W. § 2, 1 d.; Tdf Proleg.
p. 79] : Mt. xxiii. 35 ; xxvi. 2S : Jlk. xiv. 24 ; Lk. xi. 50
[where Tr txt. Wli t."ct. ίκκιχυμίνον for ίκχυννόμ(νον];
xxii. 20 [WII reject the pass.]); iuipv. pliir. (κχ((τ€
(Rev. xvi. 1 LT WII ; on which uncontr. form cf. Bttm.
Gram. p. 196 [p. 174 Robinson's trans.]; B. 44 (38);
[some would make it a 2 aor., see WH. App. p. 165]) ;
fut. (κχίω (Acts ii. 1 7 sq. ; Ex. xxix. 12), for which the
earlier Greek used ίκχ^ίσω (W. 77 (74); [cf. 85 (82);
esp. B. 08 (60)]); 1 aor. ίξ^χια, 3 pers. sing, ΐξίχίΐ
([whereas the 3 sing, of the i m ρ f . is c ο η t r. -i>;ef -<'χ€ΐ,
cf. Rutherford, Xew Phryn. p. 299 sq.] ; cf. Bllm. Gram,
p. 196 note *" [Eng. trans, u. s. note t]), inf. ίκχίαι (Ro.
iii. 15; Is. lix. 7; Ezek. L\. 8); Pass., [pres. ίκχΐίται,
Mk. ii. 22 R G L Tr mrg. l)r. ; impf. 3 pers. sing, ίξιχ^'ίτο.
Acts xxii. 20 R G, ΐξίχνννίτο L Τ Tr WII] ; pf. (κκί-
χνμιη; 1 aor. ίξ(χνθην; 1 fut. ίκχνθησομαι (see Β. 69
(60) sq.); [fr. Horn, down] ; Sept. for ^Sl;'; to pour out;
a. prop. : φιαΚην, by meton. of the container for the
contained, Kev. .xvi. 1-4, 8, 10, 1?, 1 7 ; of wine, which
when the vessel is burst runs out and is lost, Mt. ix. 1 7 ;
Mk. ii. 22 [RGLTrrarg. in br.] ; Lk. v. 37; used of
other things usually guarded with care which arc poured
forth or cast out : of money, Jn. ii. 10 ; ΐξιχύθη τα σπλάγ-
χνα, of the ruptured body of a man, Acts i. 18 (ϊξιχύθη
ή KOiXia αϋτοϋ fir τ. γην, of a man thrust through with a
sword, 2 S. XX. 10). The phrase αίμα ίκχύν or ίκχύ-
v{v)eiv is freq. used of bloodshed : [Mt. xxiii. 35 ; Lk. xi.
50 ; Acts xxii. 20 ; Ro. iii. 15 ; Rev. xvi. 6* (where Tdf.
αίματα)] ; see αίμα, 2 a. b. metaph. i. q. to bestow or
distribute largelg (cf. Fritzsche on Tob. iv. 17 and Sir.
i. 8) : TO πν€νμα το ayiov or αττύ τοΰ πνίυματος, i. e. the
abundant bestowal of the Holy l^piril. Acts ii. 33 fr.
Joel ii. 28, 29 (iii. 1, 2); ίπί τίνα, .\cts ii. 17 sq.: x. 45;
Tit. iii. 6 : η άγάττη τον 6rov ϊκκίχνται ΐν ταΐ? καρδίαΐί
ημών διό ΤΓκ. άγιου, the Holy Spirit gives our souls a rich
sense of the greatness of God's love for us, Ro. v. 5 ;
(ϋρ^ήν, Sir. xxxiii. (.xxxvi.) 8, [cf. xvi. 11]). The pass.,
like the Lat. effundor, me effundo, is used of those who
give themselves up to a thing, rush headlong into it, (ye-
λωτι. Alciphr. ; els ίταίρας. Polyb. 32, 11, 4): absol. τή
TtKavf] τοϋ Βϋλαάμ μισθού (ξ(χύθησαν, led astray by the
hire of Balaam (i. e. by the same love of reward as Bar
laam) they gave themselves up, sc. to wickedness, Jude
11, (so (κχυθηναι in Arstph. vesp. 1469 is used absol. of
one giving himself up to joy. The passage in Jude is
cenerall V explained thus : " for hire they gave themselves
up to [R. V. ran riotously ί'η] the eiTor of Balaam "; cf.
W. 206 (194) [and De AVette (ed. Bruckner) ad loc.]).*
ίκ-χύνω, and (L Τ Tr AVH) κκχϋννω, see (κχίω.
[CoMP. : wrep- (<χννω.^
(κ-\ωρΐω, -ώ : [fr. Soph, and Hdt. on] ; to depart from ;
to remove from in the sense oi fleeing from : Lk. xxi. 21.
(For π•;»?. Am. vii. 12.)*
4κ-ψύχω: 1 aor. (ξί-^^υξα; to expire, to breathe out one's
life (see ΐκ-πνίω): Acts v. 5, 10; xii. 23. (Hippocr.,
Jambl.) •
ί'κών, -οϋσα, -όν, unforced, voluntary, willing, of one's
own will, of one's own accord: Ro. viii. 20; 1 Co. ix. 17.
[From Hom. down.] *
έλαια, -as, η. [fr. Horn, down], Sept. for n't; 1. an
olive tree : Ro. xi. 17, 24 ; plur. Rev. xi. 4. το Spos των
ίλαιών (for □"iTtn in, Zech. xiv. i), the Mount of Olives,
so called from the multitude of olive-trees which grew
upon it, distant from Jerusalem (Joseph, antt. 20, 8, 6)
five stadia eastward (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Oelberg; Ai-
nold in Herzog x. p. 549 sqq. ; Furrer in Schenkel iv.
354 sq. ; [Grove and Porter in BB.DD.]) : Mt. .\xi. 1 ;
xxiv. 3 ; xxvi. 30 ; Mk. xi. 1 ; xiii. 3 ; xiv. 26 ; Lk. xL\.
37; xxii. 39; Jn. viii. 1 Rec. ; (on Lk. xix. 29; xxi. 37,
see ίλαιών). 2. an olive, the fruit of the oUve-tree :
Jas. iii. 12.*
«λαιον, -ου, τό, [fr. Ilom. down], Sept. chiefly for '."^U,
also for 1ΠΪ" ; olive-oil: used for feeding lamps, ^It. χ.κν.
3 sq. 8 ; for healing the sick, Mk. vi. 13 ; Lk. x. 34 ; Jas.
V. 14 ; for anointing the head and body at feasts (Athen.
15, c. 11) [cf. s. V. μνρον'], Lk. vii. 46; Heb. i. 9 (on
which pass, see άγαλλιασίΓ ) ; mentioned among articles
of commerce. Lk. xvi. 6 ; Rev. vi. 6 ; xviii. 13. Cf. Win.
RWB. s. V. Oel ; Furrer in Schenkel iv. 354 , Schneder-
mann. Die bibl. Symbolik des Oelbaumes u. d. Oeles, in
the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1874, p. 4 sqq.; [B. D.
s. v. Oil, II. 4 ; and Mey. ed. Weiss on ilk. vi. 13].'
cXcuuv, -Hvos. 6. (the ending ών in derivative nouns in-
dicating a place set ivith trees of the kind designated
bv the primitive, as 8αφνών, Ιτ(ών, ίρνμών, KfSpav, cf.
Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 422 sq([. ; Kiihner i. p. 711 ; [Jelf
§ 335 d.]) ; an olive-orchard, a place planted with olive
trees, i.e. the Mount of Olives ΓΑ.Λ'^. Olivet^ (see (Xaia. 1 ) ;
Acts i. 12 (δια ToC AuiMTOs Spovs, Joseph, antt. 7, 9. 2).
In Lk. xix. 29 ; xxi. 37 also we should write to Spos τό
«αλοΰμίνοκ ίλαιών (so L Τ Tr, [but WH with R G -ώΐ']) :
likewise in Joseph, antt. 20, 8, 6 irpot opos τό ποοσαγσ
ΕΧαμίτηί,
202
ί\βΎ)(ω
ρ(υύμ(νον ίΧαιών; b. j. 2, 13, 5 and 5, 2, 3 fis (κατά)
fXatiuf κα\ονμ(νον ορός ; 6, 2, 8 κατά τυ ίλαιων ομος ; [hut
in .losrpli. 11. cc. Bekker edits -ών]. Cf. Fritzsche on
Mk. p. 794 sq.; B. 22 (19 sci•) ; \V. 182 (171) n. 1 ; [but
see IK//. App. p. 158"]. (The Sept. sometimes render
n'[ freely by ιλαιών, as Ex. .xxiii. 11 ; Deut. vi. 11 ; 1 S.
viii. 14, etc.; not found in Grk. writ.)*
'ΕλαμΙτηϊ (Τ WII ΈΧαμύτης. [see s. v. et, t]), -ου, o, (iii
EUimile, i. e. an inlialiitunt of the i)rovince of Elymais,
a rejion stretching southwards to the Persian Gulf, but
the boundaries of which are variously given (cf. Win.
RU'B. s. V. Elam; Vdihinger in Ilerzog iii. p. 747 S(|(i. ;
DiUmann in Schenkel ii. p. 91 sq. ; Schroder in Kiehm
p. 358 sq. ; Grimm on 1 Mace. vi. 1 ; [BB.DD. s. vv.
Elam, Elamites]) : Acts ii. 9. (Is. xxi. 2 ; in Grk. writ.
Έλυμαίοί, and so Judith i. 6.) *
(λάσ-σων [in Jn., Ro.] or -^των [in Ilcb., 1 Tim. ; cf. B.
V], -ov, (compar. of the Ejjic adj. ϊλαχίς equiv. to μικρός),
[It. Horn, down], less, — either in age (ijounger), Ko. ix.
12; or in rank, Ileb. vii. 7; or in excellence, icor.ie (opp.
to καλοί), «In. ii. 10. Neuter ίΧαττον, adverbially, les.i
[sc. than etc., A. V. under; cf. W. 2:i9 (225); 595 sq.
(554): B. 127 sq. (112)] : 1 Tim. v. 9.*
ίλαττονϊ'ω [Β. 7], -ώ : 1 aor. ηλαττόνησα ; (e λαττον) ;
not found in prof. auth. [yet see Aristot. de plant. 2, 3
p. 825*, 23] ; to be less, inferior, (in possessions) : 2 Co.
viii. 15 fr. Ex. xvi. 18. (Prov. xi. 24 ; Sir. xix. (5) 6 ;
also transitively, to make less, diminish : Gen. viii. 3 ;
Prov. xiv. 34 ; 2 Mace. .xiii. 19, etc.) *
έλαττόω [Β. 7], -ώ : 1 aor. ηλάττωσα ; Pass., [pres.
cXarrou/iat] ; pf. ptcp. ηληττωμίρος ; {«'λάΓτων); ίο make
less or inferior: τινά, in dignity, Ileb. ii. 7; Pass, to be
made less or inferior : in dignit}•, Heb. ii. 9 ; to decrease
(opp. to αυξάνω), in authority and popularity, Jn. iii. 30.
(Many times in Sept. ; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. on.) *
ίλαϋνω; pf. ptcp. ΐΧηΧακώς; Pass., [pres. ίΚαννημαι];
impf. ηΧαυνόμην ; to drive : of the wind driving shi]>s or
clouds, Jas. iii. 4; 2 Pet. ii. 17; of sailors propelling a
vessel by oars, to row, Mk. vi. 48 ; to be carried in a
ship, to sail, Jn. vi. 19, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Horn,
down ; often also with νηα or vaiv added) ; of demons
driving to some place the men whom they possess, Lk.
viii. 29. [CoMP. : άπ-, συΐ'-ίλαύνω.] *
^αφρ(α, -as, ή, (αλαφρός), lightness ; used of levity and
fickleness of mind, 2 Co. i. 17 ; a later word, cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 343.*
ίλαψρόΐ, -ά, -όν, light in weight, quick, agile; a light
φορτίον is used fig. concerning the commandments of
Jesus, easy to be kept, Mt. xi. 30 ; neut. to ίλαφρόν,
substantively, the lightness: τής ίλίψίωΓ [Α. Λ^. our light
a/flictiiin'], 2 Co. iv. 1 7. (From Ilom. down.) *
ίλάχισ-ΓΟϊ, -ij, -ok, (superl. of the adj. μικρός, but com-
ing fr. ϊλαχίς), [(Horn. h. Merc. 578), Hdt. down], small-
est, least, — whether in size : Jas. iii. 4 ; in amount : of
the management of affairs, πιστός iv ίΚαχίστω, Lk. .xvi.
10 (opp. to iv πολλω) ; xix. 17; iv (ΚαχΙστω άδικος, Lk.
xvi. 10; in importance: what is of the least moment,
1 Co. vi. 2 ; in authority : of commandments, Mt. v. 19 ;
in the estimation of men: of persons, Mt. .xxv. 40, 45:
in rank and excellence : of per.sons, Alt. v. 1 9 ; 1 Co. xv.
9 ; of a town, Mt. ii. G. oibi [11 G οίτί] ϊΧάχιστον, not
even a very small thing, Lk. xii. 20 ; ίμοΊ fit (λάχιστόκ
eVrt (.see dpi, V. 2 c.), 1 Co. iv. 3.*
ίλαχιστότίροϊ, -α, -ov, (compar. formed fr. the superl.
(λάχιστος; there is also a superl. Λα;(ΐστότατο9 ; "it is
well known that this kind of double comparison is com-
mon in the poets ; but in prose, it is regarded as faulty."
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 13G ; cf. W. § 11, 2 b., [also 27 (26);
B. 28 (25)]), /e.s'.s than the least, lower than the lowest:
Eph. iii. 8.•
tXiua, see iXavvw.
Έλίάζαρ, (■'Ji^^X whom God helps), ό, indecl., Eleazar,
one of the ancestors of Christ : Mt. i. 15.*
c'Xcdb), adopted for the more com. iXfim (([. v.) by L Τ Tr
WH in Ro. Lx. 16 and Jude 23, [also by WH Trrarg. in
22] ; (Prov. xxi. 26 cod. Vat. ; 4 Mace. ix. 3 var. ; Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 13, 2; Polyc. ad Philip. 2, 2). Cf. W. 85
(82) ; B. 57 (50) ; [JIu'llach p. 252 ; WH. App. p. 166 ;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 122].*
(\c-y)ios. -oC, 0, i,i\(yxw), correction, reproof, censure : 2
Tim. iii. IG L Τ Tr WH for R G ίΧίγχον. (Sir. x.xi. 6;
XXXV. (xxxii.) 17, etc. ; for ΠΠΓΐΐη chastisement, punish-
ment, 2 K. xix. 3 ; Ps. cxlix. 7 ; [Is. xxxvii. 3 ; etc.]. iiot
found in prof, writ.)*
ίλίγξυ, -(ως, ή, ((λ^γχω, q. v.), refutation, rebuke;
(Vulg. correptio ; Augustine, convictio) : tXty^iv ϊσχ(9
ιδίας παρανομίας, he was rebuked for his own transgres-
sion, 2 Pet. ii. 16. (Philostr. vit. Apoll. 2, 22 [p. 74 ed.
Olear.]; Sept., Job xxi. 4; xxiii. 2, for rrtV complaint ;
[Protevangel. Jacob. 16, 1 τό ΰδωρ της (Χ(γξ(ως κυρίου
(Sept. Num. v. 18 τό ΰδωρ τοΟ ίΧ(γμοΰ)^.)*
ίλίγχοί, -ου, ό, ((λ(γχω) ; 1. α proof that hi/ irhich
a thing is proved or tested, (το πράγμα τον tXcyxov δώσ€ΐ,
Dem. 44, 15 [i. e. in Phil. 1, 15] ; της ^ψ-υχι'αΓ, Eur. Here,
fur. 162 ; {'ι/^άδ' ό (\(γχος τοϋ πράγματος, Epict. diss. 3, 10,
11; al.) : των [or rather, πραγμάτων^ oi βΧιπομΐνων,
that by which invisible things are proved (and ive are
convinced of their reality), Ileb. xi. 1 (Vulg. argumen-
tum non apparenlinm [Tdf. rerum arg. non parentumj) ;
[al. take the word here (in accordance with the preced-
ing ίπόστασις, q. v.) of the inward result of proving viz.
a conviction ; see LUnem. ad loc.]. 2. conviction (Au-
gustine, convictio) : προς ίΧίγχον, for convicting one of
his sinfulness, 2 Tim. iii. 16 R G. (Eur., Plat., Dem., al. ;
Sept. chietly for nnDin.) *
€λ€'γχω; fut. (Χ(γξω; 1 aor. inf. (Χίγζαι, impv. ίΧίγξον;
[Pass., pres. ίΧίγχομαι ; 1 aor. (Χίγχβην] : Sept. for Π"3ίΠ ;
1. to convict, refu'e, confute, generally with a suggestion
of the shame of the person convicted, [•^ ίΧίγχιιν liatei-
gentlich nicht die Bedeutung ' tadeln, schmiihen, zurecht-
weisen,' welche ihm die Lexika zuschreiben, sondern
bedeutet nichts als ilherfuhren " (Schmidt ch. iv. § 12)] :
τινά. of crime, fault, or error ; of sin, 1 Co. xiv. 24 ;
(Χ(γχόμίνοι ύπο τοϋ νόμου ώς παραβάται, Jas. ii. 9 ; νττο
της συν(ΐδησ(ως, Jn. viii. 9 R G (Philo, opp. ii. p. 64 9
[ed. Mang., vi. 203 ed. Richter, frag, πφϊ άναστάσιως au
eXeeti/o?
203
eXeos
κρίσίωί] το avvdSos f Xey^os aScVaoTos και πάιτων άψ(ν-
δί'στατοί); foil, by π((>ί with gen. of thing, Jn. viii. 46 ;
xvi. 8, and L Τ Tr WH in Jude 15, (Arstph. Plut. 574) ;
contextually, by conviction to bring to light, to expose : τι,
Jn. iii. 20, cf. 21 ; Eph. v. 11, 13, (Arstph. eccl- 485;
τα κρυπτά, Artem. oneir. 1, (i.S ; (ΐτιστάμίνο!, iis fl καϊ
\άθυι ή £πι0ονλή κ. μη (λ^γχθ^ίη, Ildian. 3, 12, 11 [4 ed.
Bekk.] ; al.) ; used of the exposure and confutation of false
teachers of Christianity, Tit. i. 9, 13 ; ταϋτα (λ(γχ(, utter
these things by way of refutation, Tit. ii. 15. 2. to
βη(1 fault ivitli, correct; a. by word; to reprehend se-
vereli/, chide, admonish, reprove: Jude 22 LTTrtxt. ;
1 Tim. V. 20 ; 2 Tim. iv. 2 ; rtva irepi tipos, Lk. iii. 19;
contextually, to call to account, shoui one his fault, de-
mand an explanation : τινά, from some one, Mt. xviii. 15.
b. by deed ; to chasleti, punish, (ace. to the trans, of the
Hebr. n'Din, Ps. xxxvii. (xxxvlii.) 2, etc. ; Sap. xii. 2) :
Heb. xii. 5 (fr. Prov. iii. 11); Rev. iii. 19. [On this
word cf. /. C. Hare, The Mission of the Comforter,
note L; Trench § iv. Comp. : ϊξ-, δια-κατ-(-μαι).] *
c'Xeeivos, -ή, -όν, (tXeor), fr. Horn, down, to be pitied,
miserable : Rev. iii. 1 7, [where WH have adopted the
Attic form iKeivos, see their App. p. 145] ; compar. 1
Co. XV. 19. [Cf. W. 99 (94).]*
ίλίί'ω, -ώ; fut. ί'λ€ΐ7σω ; 1 aor. ηΚίησα; Pass., 1 aor.
ηλίήθην ; 1 fut. ίΚίηθήσομαι ; pf. ptcp. ηλιημίνος ; (cXeot) ;
fr. IIoiu. down; Sept. most freq. for pn to be gracious,
also for Dni to have mercy ; several times for ΤΟΠ to
spare, and onj to console ; to hare mercy on : τινά [ W.
§ 32, 1 b. a.], to succor one aiHicted or seeking aid, Mt.
ix. 27; XV. 22; xvii. 15; xviii. 33; xx. 30 sq.; Mk. v. 19
[here, by zeugma (W. § 6G, 2 e.), the όσα is brought
over with an adverbial force (W. 463 (431 sq.), /iow] ;
X. 47 sq.; Lk. xvi. 24 ; xvii. 13; xviii. 38 sq. ; Phil. ii.
27 ; Jude 22 Rec; absol. to succor the afflicted, to bring
help to the wretched, [A. V. to show mercy], Ro. xii. 8;
pass, to experience [A. V. obtain^ mercy, "SU. v. 7. Spec.
of God granting even to the unworthy favor, benefits,
opportunities, and particularly salvation by Christ : Ro.
ix. 15, 16 R G (see eXeaw), 18 ; xi. 32 ; pass., Ro. xi. 30 sq. ;
1 Co. vii. 25 ; 2 Co. iv. 1 ; 1 Tim. i. 13, 16 ; 1 Pet. ii. 10.*
[Stn. ίλ€€ω, οΙκτ(Ιρω: eA. to feel sympathy with the
misery of another, esp. such sympathy as manifests itself in
act, less freq. in word ; whereas οίκτ. denotes the inward
feeling of compassion which abides in the heart. Λ criminal
hegs i\eos of his judge; but hopeless suffering is often
the object of οΙκτφμ6$. Schmidt ch. 143. On the other
hand, Fritzsche (Com. on liom. vol. ii. p. 315) makes oiVt.
and its derivatives the stronger terms : e'A. the generic word
for the feeling excited by another's misery ; οι'κτ. the same,
esp. ivhen it calls (or is suited to call) out exclamations
and tears.]
£λ€ημθ(Γννη, -ηί, ή, ((Κ(ημων). Sept. for ΊΏΧ} and nplX
(see δικαιοσύνη. 1 b.) ; 1. merry, pity (Callim. in Oel.
152; Is. xxxviii. 18; Sir. xvii. 22 (24), etc.), esp. as ex-
hibited in giving alms, charity : Mt. vi. 4 ; πιικ'ιν (λ(ημο-
σύνην, to practise the λ irtue of mercy or beneficence, to
show one's com|iassion, ΓΑ. V. do alms'], (cf. the similar
phrases ^ικοίοσίνην, άλήθίίαν, etc. nouiv), Mt. vi. 1 Rec,
2, 3, (Sir. vii. 10 ; Tob. iv. 7 ; xii. 8, etc. ; for πρπ nbi'.
Gen. xlvii. 29) ; (λιημοσννα!, acts of beneficence, bene.
factions [cf. W. 176 (166); B. 77 (67)], Acts x. 2; e"s
Tiva, Acts xxiv. 17. Hence 2. the benefaction itself,
a donation to the poor, alms, (the Germ. Almosen Hand
the Eng. alms'] being [alike] a corruption of the Grk.
word): ΐλεημοσΰνην hi&ovai [(Diog. Laert. 5, 17)], Lk.
xi. 41 ; xii. 33 ; ahdv. Acts iii. 2 ; λαμίίάνιιν, ib. 3 ; wpos την
(λ(ημοσ. for (the purpose of asking) alms. Acts iii. 10;
plur., Acts ix. 36; x. 4, 31.*
ίλεήμων, -ov, merciful : Mt. v. 7 ; Heb. ii. 1 7. [From
Horn. Od. 5, 191 on; Sept.]*
[eXtivos, see eXeeivos-]
eXeos, -ου, ό, mercy: that of God towards sinners. Tit.
iii. 5 ; eXeov λαμβάνειν, to receive i. e. experience, Heb.
iv. 16 ; that of men: readiness to help those in trouble,
Mt. ix. 1 3 and xii. 7 (fr. Hos. vi. 6) ; Mt. xxiii. 23. But
in all these pass. L Τ Tr WII have adopted the neut.
form TO cXeos (q. v.), much more com. in Hellenistic
writ, than the masc. ό €\(os, which is the only form in
classic Grk. [Soph. (Lex. s. v.) notes τό ?λ. in Polyb. 1, 88,
2 ; and Pape in Diod. Sic. 3, 1 8 var.]. The Grk. Mss.
of the O. T. also freq. waver between the two forms.
Cf. IWH. App. p. 158]; W. 66 (64) ; B. 22 (20).*
ίλίοϊ, -ουί, τό, (a form more common in Hellenistic
Grk. than the classic ό eXcor, q. v.), mercy ; kindness or
good will towards the miserable and afflicted, joined with
a desire to relieve them ; 1. of m e η towards men :
Mt. ix. 13 ; xii. 7 ; xxiii. 23, (in these three pass. ace. to
L Τ Tr WH) ; Jas. ii. 13 ; iii. 1 7 ; nutelv e Xfos. to exer-
cise the ^irtue of mercy, show one's self merciful, Jas.
ii. 13 ; with the addition of μιτά twos (in imitation of the
very com. Hebr. phrase "D Ώ)>, ΐρπ r\uj,\ Gen. xxi. 23 ;
x.xiv. 12 ; Judg. i. 24, etc. ; cf. Thiersch, De Pentateuchi
vers. Alex. p. 147; [W. 33 (32); 376 (353)]), to show,
afford, mercy to one, Lk. x. 37. 2. of God towards
men; a. univ. : Lk.i.50; in benedictions: Gal. vi. 16 ;
1 Tim. i. 2 ; 2 Tim. i. 2 ; [(prob.) Tit. i. 4 R L] ; 2 Jn.
3 ; Jude 2. ^μ^γάλυνι Kvpios το cXtos αύτοϋ μ(τ αίτη!,
magnified his mercy towards her, i. e. showed distin-
guished mercy to her, (after the Hebr., see Gen. xix. 19),
Lk. i. 58. b. esp. the mercy and clemency of God in
providing and offering to men salvation by Christ : Lk.
i. 54 ; Ro. XV. 9 ; Eph.ii. 4 : [Tit. iii. 5 L Τ Tr λΧΗ ; Heb.
iv. 16 L Τ Tr AVH] ; 1 Pet. i. 3 ; (nr\ayxva (λίου: (gen.
of quality [cf. W. 611 (568)]), wherein mercy dwells,
— as we should say, the heart of mercy, Lk. i. 78; ποκΊν
iXeot μ^τά Tii/os (see 1 above), Lk. i. 72 ; σκίύη cXt'ouf,
vessels (fitted for the reception) of mercy, i. e. men
whom God has made fit to obtain salvation through
Christ, Ro. ix. 23 ; τω ΰμ(Τ('ρω i'Xt'fi. by (in consequence
of, moved by) the mercy sho\vn you in your conversion
to Christ, Ro. xi. 31 [cf.W. § 22, 7 (cf. § 61, 3 a.) ; B. 157
(137)]. 3. the mercy of Christ, whereby at his
return to judgment he will bless true Christians with
eternal life : Jude 21 ; [2 Tim. i. 16. 18, (on the repeti-
tion of κύριος in 18 cf. Gen. xix. 24 ; 1 S. iii. 21 : xv.
22 ; 2 Chr. vii. 2 ; Gen. i. 27, etc. W. § 22, 2) ; but Prof.
ikevOepia
204
εΧκω
(irimiii understands m'pios licrc as roferrin;; to God;
see itu^iof, c. a.]. [C'f. Trench §.\lvii. ; and see (λ»ω
lin.J •
{λ{υθ(ρ(α, -at. ή. ((\(ύθ(μος), Hherltj, [fr. Pind., Ildt.
down] ; in the X. T. a. hherty to do or to omit things
having no rehuion to salviUion, 1 Co. x. 29; from the
yoke of the Mosaic law, Gal. ii. 4 : v. 1, 13; iPet. ii. 16;
from .lewi.sli errors so blindini; tlie mental vision that it
does nut discern the majesty of Christ, 2 Co. iii. 1 7 ; free-
dom from the dominion of corrupt desires, so that we ilo
by the free ini|mlse of the soul what the will of (iod re-
quires : ό νιΊμος rijs ('\€νθ(ρία!, i. e. the Christian relijjion,
which furnishes that rule of ri;;ht living by which the
liberty just mentioned is attained, Jas. i. 25; ii. 12; free-
dom from the restraints and miseries of earthly frailty :
so in the exi)ression ή (λίνθιμία τηι 8άξηί (epe.xeget.
gen. [W. 531 (■1!)4)]), manifested in the glorious condi-
tion of the future life, Ilo. viii. 21. b. fancied liberty.
i. e. license, the liberty to do as one pleases, 2 Pet. ii. I 'J.
J. C. Erler, Commentatlo exeg. de libertatis christianae
notione in N. Ί'. libris obvia, 1830, (an essay I have never
had the good fortune to see)."
^(uOfpos, -ipa, -ipov, (ΕΛΕΥΘΩ i. q. ίρχομαι [so Curtius,
p. 497, after Etym. Magn. 329, 43 ; Suid. col. 1202 a. ed.
Gaisf.; but al. al., cf. Vanicek p. 61] ; hence, prop, one
who can go whither he pleases), [fr. Horn, down],
Sept. for 'iyiJri, free ; 1. freeborn ; in a civil sense,
one who if: nol η xlai'e: Jn. viii. 33; 1 Co. vii. 22: .\ii. 13;
Gal. iii. 28; Eph. vi. 8; Col. iii. 11 ; Rev. vi. 15; xiii. 16 ;
xi.K. 18 ; fem., Gal. iv. 22 sq. 30 sq. (opp. to ή παώίσκη) :
iif one who ceasex to be a slave, freetl, manumillcd : y'lvt-
σθαι eXeiidepov, 1 Co. vii. 21. 2. free, exempt, unre-
strained, not hound hy an obligation : 1 Co. ix. 1 ; «
ττάντων (see «, I. 6 fin.), 1 Co. ix. 1 9 ; άπό tjios, free from
i. e. no longer under obligation to, so that one may
now do what was formerly forbidden by the person or
thing to which he was bound, Ilo. vii. 3 [cf. W. 196 sq.
(ISO); B. 157 sq. (138), 269(231)]; foil, by an inf. [\V.
319 (299) ; B. 2(10 (224)]. (Κ(υθ4ρα iur\v . . . γαμηθηυαί
she is free to be married, has liberty to marry, 1 Co. vii.
39 ; exempt from paying tribute or tax, Mt. xvii. 26.
3. in an ethical sense: free from the yoke of the
Mosaic law, Gal. iv. 26 ; 1 Pet. ii. 16 ; from the bondage
of sin, Jn. viii. 36 ; left to one's own will and pleasure,
Avith dat. of respect, τή δικαιοσύνη, so far as relates to
righteousness, u.-t respects rifjhleousness, Ro. \\. 20 (AV.
§ 31, 1 k.; B. § 133, 12).*
IXcvOcpou, -ώ : fut. (\(υθ(ρώ(Γω ; 1 aor. η\(υθ(ρωσα :
Pass., 1 aor. ηΚ(υθ(ρώ6ηι>: 1 fut. ίλ(υθ(ρωθ\]σορΜΐ; (t'Xfv-
Bfpot); [fr. Aesihyl. down]; to make free, set at tilier/ij:
from the dondnion of sin, Jn. viii. 32, 36 ; τίνα άπό tivos,
one from another's control [W. 196 sq. (185); B. 157
S(\. (138)] : άπο τοΰ νόμου τ. άμαρτίαί κ. τοϋ θανάτου (see
νόμοί, 1), Ro. viii. 2 ; tijro τ. αμαρτίας, from the dominion
of sin. Ro. vi. 18, 22; άπο τ. δουλίία? τ. φθημάς fir τ.
(Xfufffplav, to liberate from bondage (see δουλίΐα) and to
brin•! (transfer) into etc. (see «s, C. 1), Ro. viii. 21;
with a dat. commodi, τ^ (\(υ6ίρία. t'.iat we mi'^ht Ix? pos-
.sessors of liberty. Gal. v. I ; cf. B. § 133, 12 [and I!p.
Lghtft. ad loe.].•
tXewris, -fair, ή, (ίρχομαι), a coming, advent, (Dion.
Hal. 8, ..i9) : Acts vii. 52. {iv Tjj f'Xftiaft αυτού, i. e. of
Christ, καϊ tmipavua τη ΰστίρα. Act. Thorn. 28 ; plur.
αί iKiiatis, of the first and the second coming of Christ
to earth, Iren. 1, 10.)•
ίλίφάντινοί, -iw;, -ifoc, ({Χίφας), of ivori/ : Rev. xviii.
12. [.Vlcae., Arstph., Polyb., al.]•"
'Ελιοκ£ίμ, (D'p'^N whom Goii set uji). ICliakim, one of
the ancestors of Christ : Wt. i. 13 ; Lk. iii. 30.*
[ίΛι-γμα. -uTot. ro, (ίΧίσσω). a roll : Jn. xix. 39 Wll txt.,
where al. read /ii'y^u, q.v. (Athen., Anth. P., al.)*]
Έλΐί'ζίρ, (τ;;•''^Ν »!// God is help), EUezer, one of the
ancestors of Christ : Lk. iii. 29.*
'ΕλιούΒ, (fr. '^N and Ί1Π glory, [?]), Eliud. one of the
ancestors of Christ : .Mt. i. 14 sq.*
Έλκτάβίτ [WII 'E\fi(7., see IK//. Apj). p. 155, and
s. V. f», i], (^•3ίϊ"^Χ mil (I'od is my oath, i. e. η worshipper
of God), Etisnhelh, vi'iie of Zacharias the priest and
mother of John the Baptist : Lk. i. 5 sqq.*
'EXurcratos and (so L T) ΈλισαίοΕ [cf. Tdf. Prolcg. p.
107; TrWII 'ΐΧισα'ιος, ef. WII. App. p. 159], -ου, ό,
(i'l^'Sx my God is salvation), Elisha, a distinguished
0, T. prophet, the disciide, companion, and successor of
Elijah (1 K. xix. 16 sip ; 2 Iv. i.-xiii.) : Lk. iv. 27.*
ελίσσω: fut. /λί^ω [Ilec'.' f λ.] ; [])res. pass, «λ/σσο/ια»;
fr. Ilom. down]; to roll tip, fold together: Ileb. i. 12
[where TTrmrg. άλλάξίίί], and Kev. vi. 14 L Τ 'IV
WII ; sec ίίλι'σσω.*
ί'λκος, -fos (-ouf ), [cf. Lat. ulcus, ulcerare ; perh. akin
to ίΧκω (Etym. Magn. 331, 3; 641, 3), yet cf. Curtius
§ 23], to; 1. a «,'ounrf, esp. a suppurated wound; so
in Ilom. and earlier writ. 2. fr. [Thuc], Theophr.,
Polyb. on, a sore, an ulcer: Rev. xvi. 2; plur., Lk. xvi.
21 ; Rev. xvi. 1 1. (for ]T\P, Ex. ix. 9 ; Job ii. 7, etc.) *
ίλκόω, -ώ : to make sore, cause to ulcerate (Hippocr.
and Mod. writ.); Pass, to he ulcerated; \<i. ptcp. pass.
ήλκωμίνο! (L Τ TrWII (1\κωμ. [117/. App. p. 161 ; W.
§ 12, 8; B. 34 (30)]), /u« of sores: Lk. xvi. 20, (Xen.
de re. eq. 1, 4; 5, 1).*
(λκνω, see f λκω.
ϊλκω (and in later writ. ίΧκόω also [Veitch s. v. ; W.
86 (S2)]) ; impf. (ΐλκον (Acts xxi. 30) ; fut. ίΧκύσω [t'X/e.
Rec''' Jn. xii. 32]; 1 aor. «ΐλκυσα ([inf. (Jn. xxi. 6)
(λκύσαι R''"-<^i' L Τ WII, -xiaai R'' G Tr] ; cf. Bllm. Ausf.
S|ir. § 114, vol. ii. p. 171; Kriiger § 40 s. v.; [Lob.
I'andip. p. 35 scp ; Veitch s. v.]) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept.
for yiyo ; to draw; 1. prop.: το δίκτνον, Jn. xxi. 6,
11 : μήχαφαν. i. e. unsheathe, Jn. xviii. 10 (So|ili. Ant.
1208 (1233), etc.); τινά, a person forcibly and against
his will (our drag, drag off), ϊξω τοϋ ifpni. Acts xxi. 30 ;
fir την άγοράν, Acts xvi. 19; fir κριτήρια, Jas. ii. 6 (jrpos
τον 8ημον, Arstph. eqq. 710; and in Latin, as Caes. b. g.
1, 53 (54, 4) cum trinis catenis vinctus traheretur, Liv.
2, 27 cum a lictoribus jam fraherelur). 2. metapli.
to draw hy inward powrr, lead, impel: Jn. vi. 44 (so in
Grk. also; as ίπιθυμΐα: ■ . ■ ίλκοίση! ('πι ήδονάί. Plat.
Ελλάς
206
ελτΓί'ι;
Phaedr. p. 238 a. ; ΰπό της ηίονη! {λκόμ€νοί, Ael. h. a. 6,
31 ; likewise 4 Mace. xiv. 13; xv. S (11). Iraliil sua
quemque voluptas, A^ergil, eel. 2, Γ..5) : ttoi/tus ίλκίσω προς
ΐμαντύν, I by my moral, my spiritual, influence will win
over to myself the hearts of all, Jn. xii. 32. Cf. Mey.
on Jn. Ti. 44 ; [Trench § xxi. Comp. : ίξ-ΐ\κω.'\ *
'Ελλάϊ, -άδοι, η, Greece i. e. Greece proper, as opp. to
Macedonia, i. q. ^^χαΐα (q. v.) in the time of the Ro-
mans : Acts XX. 2 [cf. AVetstein ad loc. ; Mey. on xviii.
12].•
"Ελλην, -ηνοί, ό ; 1. α Greek by nationality, whether
a native of the main land or of the (ireek islands or
colonies : Acts xviii. 1 7 Rec. ; "ΈΧΚηυίί re και βάρβαροι,
Ro. i. 14. 2. in a wider sense the name embraces
all nations not Jews that made the language, cus-
toms, and learning of the Greeks their own ; so that
where 'EXXiji/f r are opp. to Jews, the primary reference
is to a difference of religion and worship : Jn. vii. 35 (cf.
iMeyer ad loc.) ; Acts xi. 20 G L Τ Tr [cf. B.D. Am. ed.
p. OiK] ; Acts xvi. 1, 3 ; [x.xi. 28] ; 1 Co. i. 22, 23 Rec. ;
Gal. ii. 3, (Joseph, antt. 20, 1 1, 2) ; Ιουδαίοι τ( κα\ Έλλι;-
vei, and the like : Acts xiv. 1 ; xviii. 4 ; xix. 10, 17; xx.
21 ; Ro. i. 16 ; ii. 9, 10 ; iii. 9 ; x. 12 : 1 Co. i. 24 ; x. 32;
xii. 13; Gal. iii. 28; Col. iii. 11. The word is used in
the same wide sense by the Grk. church Fathers, cf.
Olio on Tatian p. 2 ; \_Soph. Lex. s. v.]. The Έλληικί
spoken of in Jn. xii. 20 and Acts xvii. 4 aie .Jewish
|>ropelytes from the Gentiles ; see προσήλυτος, 2. [Cf.
B. D. s. v. Greece etc. (esp. Am. ed.)] *
'Ελληνικό?, -η, -όν. Greek, Grecian : Lk. xxiii. 38 [T
Wll Trtxt. om. L Tr mrg. hr. the el.]; Rev. ix. 11.
[From Aeschyl., Ildt. down.]*
'Ελληνί;, -iSos, ή; 1. a Greek woman. 2. a Gen-
tile woman ; not a Jewess (see 'ΈΧλην, 2) : Mk. vii. 26 ;
Acts xvii. 12.*
'Ελληνιστή?, -οί, ό, (fr. ίΚληνΙζω to copy the manners
and worship of the Greeks or to use the Greek language
[\V. 94 (89 sq.), cf. 28]), a HeUenist, i. e. one who imi-
tates the manners and customs or the worship of the
(ireeks, and uses the (ireek tongue ; employed in the
N. T. of Jews born in foreign lands and speaking Greek,
^Grecian Jews'] : Acts xi. 20 R [WH ; see in "Ελλην, 2] :
ix. 29 ; the name adhered to them even after they had
embraced Christianity, Acts vi. 1, where it is opp. to
ot 'Εβραίοι, q. v. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Ilellenisten ;
Reuss in Herzog v. p. 701 sqq. ; [BB.DD. s. v. Hellen-
ist : Farrar, St. Paul, ch. vii. ; Wetst. on Acts vi. 1].*
'Ελληνιστί, adv., (ίλληνίζω), in Greek, i. e. in the
Greek language: Jn. xix. 20; Acts xxi. 37. [Xen. an.
7. 6, 8 ; ah] *
«λλογάω, i. q. ίλλογίω. t\. v.
ίλλογε'ω [see iv. III. 3], -ώ ; [Pass., 3 pers. sing. pres.
(λλογίΐται R G L txt Τ Tr ; impf. cXXoyOTo L mrg. WH ;
cf. WH. App. p. 166; T>/f. Proleg. p. 122; MuUach p.
252 ; B. 57 sq. (50): W. 85 (82)] ; (λόγος a reckoning,
account) ; to reckon in, set to one's account, Ιημ In one's
charge, impute: τοΐτο ίμο\ Λλόγ« (LTTrWIT eKKoya
[see re£F. above]), charge this to my account. Philem.
18 ; sin the penalty of which is under consideration, Ro.
V. 13, where cf. Fritzsche p. 311. (Inscr. ap. Boeckh
i. p. 850 [no. 1 732 a. ; Bp. Lghtft. adds Edict. Diocl. in
Corp. Inscrr. Lat. iii. p. 836 ; see further his note on
Philem. 18; cf. B. 57 sq. (50)].)*
"Ελμωδάμ (Lchm. Ελμηδ^/ί, TTrWH Έλμαδάμ [on the
breathing in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 107]), ό, Elmodam
or Elmailam, proper name of one of the ancestors of
Christ : Lk. iii. 28.*
ίλτΓίζω; impf. ήλπιζαν; Attic fut. ίλπιώ (Mt. .xii. 21,
and often in Sept. [(whence in Ro. xv. 12); cf. B. 37
(32); W. § 13, 1 c.]; the com. form ίλπίσω does not
occur in bibl. Grk.) : 1 aor. ήλπισα ; pf. ήλπικα ; [pres.
pass, ΐλπίζομαι] ; (Ιλπίς, <[. v.) ; Sept. for Πϋ3 to trust;
DDn to flee for refuge ; ^Π' to wait, to hope ; to hope
(in a religious sense, to wait for salcation with Joy and
full of confidence) : τΊ, Ro. viii. 24 sq. ; 1 Co. xiii. 7;
(τά) (λπιζόμινα, things hoped for, Ileb. xi. 1 [but WH
mrg. connect (λπ- with the foil. πρα•/μ.'\ ; once with dat.
of the obj. on which the hope rests, hopefullij to trust
in : τω ονόματι αντον (as in prof. auth. once τ^ "τνχη,
Thuc.'3, 97, 2). Mt. xii. 21 GLTTrWll [cf. B. 176
(153)] ; καθώς, 2 Co. viii. 5. foil, by an inf. relating to
the subject of the verb ίλπίζω [cf. W. 331 (311); B.
259 (223)] : Lk. vi. 34 ; xxiii. 8 ; Acts xxvi. 7 ; Ro. xv.
24 ; 1 Co. xvi. 7 ; Phil. ii. [19], 23 ; 1 Tim. iii. 14 ; 2 Jn.
12 ; 3 Jn. 14 ; foil, by a pf. inf. 2 Co. v. 11 ; foil, by on
with a pres. Lk. xxiv. 21 ; ότι with a fut.. Acts xxiv. 26 ;
2 Co. i. 13 : xiii. 6 ; Philem. 22. Peculiar to bibl. Grk.
is the constr. of this verb with prepositions and a case
of noun or pron. (cf. B. 175 (152) sq. [cf. 337 (290);
W. § 33, d. : Ellic. on 1 Tim. iv. 10]) : Λς τίνα, to direct
hope unto one, Jn. v. 45 (pf. ηλπίκατί. in ivhom you have
put your hope, and rely upon it [W. § 40, 4 a.]) ; 1
Pet. iii. 5 LTTrWH; with addition of ότι with fut.
2 Co. i. 10 [L txt. Tr WH br. οτι. and so detach the foil,
clause] ; ίπΐ τινι, to build hope on one, as on a foundation,
(often in Sept.), Ro. xv. 12 (fr. Is. xi. 10); 1 Tim. iv.
10; ΛΪ. 17; ?i/ tiw, to repose hope in one. 1 Co. xv. 19 ;
foil, by inf. Phil. ii. 19; eVi with ace. lo direct hope
towards something : inl τι. to hope to receive something,
1 Pet. i. 13 ; cVi τόν 6fov. of those who hope for some-
thing from God, 1 Pet. iii. 5RG; 1 Tim. v. 5. (and
often in Sept.). [CoMP. : απ-, πpc^^\πlζω.'] *
ίλιι -ts [sometimes written ίλπίς; so AVH in Ιϊο. viii.
20; Tdf. in Acts ii. 26 ; see (in 2 below, and) the re£f.
s. V. αφίίδοκ], -ι'δοί, η, (Τλπω to make to hope), Sept. for
np3 and np3"D. trust ; πρΓΤρ that in which one confides
or to which he flees for refuge; Πΐρπ expectation, hope;
in the classics a vox media, i. e. expectation whether of
good or of ill ; 1. rarely in a bad sense, expectation
of evil, fear; as. η των κακών ίλπίς. Lcian. Tyrannic, c.
3; τοΰ φόβου (λπίς, Thuc. 7, 61 : κακή cXwi's, Plat. rep.
1 p. 330 e. [cf. legg. 1 p. 644 c. fin.] ; πονηρά eXir. Is.
x.xviii. 1 9 Sept. 2. much more freq. in the classics,
and always in the N. T., in a good sense : expectation of
good, hope ; and in the Christian sense, joyful and con-
fident expectation of eternal saltation : Acts xxiii. 6 ;
ΈΧύμας
206
(μβατινω
xxvi. 7; Ro. v. 4 sq. ; xii. 12: xv. 13; 1 Co. xiii. 13; 1
I'et. i. 3; iii. 15; Λγαθη e>Mis (often in prof, auth., as
I'lat. Phaedoeif. ; ]iliii•. iXtrtdft άγαθαϊ, legj;. 1 p. G-l'.i b. ;
Χι•η. Ages. 1, 27), 2 Th. ii. Ill; tXn'is βλιπομϊρη. liope
whose object is seen, Ro. viii. 24 ; ό ^fof της «λπιδοΓ,
God, the anther of hope, Ro. .\v. 13; ij πληροφορία τηί
«λπι'δοΓ. fuhiess ί. e. certainty and strength of hope, llelj.
vi. 1 1 ; ή αγιολογία r^t Λττ. the confession of those things
wliich we liope for. lleb. x. 23 ; τό καύχημα της ίλπ. hope
wherein we glory, lleb. iii. G ; iirfiaayutyrj κμ^ίττονοί (λ-
πίδης, the bringing in of a better hope, lleb. vii. I'J;
tXnis with gen. of the subj.. Acts xxviii. 20; 2 Co. i. 7
(ti); Phil. i. 20; with gen. of the obj.. Acts .xxvii. 20;
Ro. V. 2 ; 1 Co. ix. 1 ; 1 Th. v. 8 ; Tit. iii. 7 ; with gen.
of the thing on wliich the hope dejiends, ή ίΚπ'α της tpya-
σίας αυτών, Acts xvi. 19; τΓ)ί κΚήσιως, Eph. i. 18; iv. 4;
τοϋ (ίογγίλίου, Col. i. 23 ; with gen. of the pers. in whom
hope is reposed, 1 Th. i. 3 [cf. B. 155 (136)]. «V [or ΐφ'
— soActsii.2C LT ; Ro. iv. 18 L; viu. 20 (21) Τ WII ; cf.
Scrivener, Introd. etc. p. 565 ; (but see above, init.)] ίλπίδι,
relying on linpe, harinrj hope, in linpp, (Eur. Here. fur.
804; Diod. .Sic. 13, 21 ; eV ίλπίδι ά-γαθη, Xen. mem. 2,
1, l.s) [W. 394 (368), cf. 425 (396); B. 337 (290)]:
Acts ii. 26 (of a return to life); Ro. iv. 18; with gen.
of the thing hoped for added : ζωής αιωνίου. Tit. i. 2 ;
Toi μ(τίχ(ΐν, 1 Co. ix. 10 [G L TTr WII] ; in hope, foil,
by on, Ro. viii. 20 (21) [but Tdf. reads διότι}; on ac-
count of the hope, for the hope [B. 165 (144)], with gen.
of the thing on wliich the hope rests, Acts xxvi. 6. παρ'
ίλττίδα, beijonil, a;/ain.il, hope [W. 404 (377)] : Ro. iv. 18
(i. e. where the laws of nature left no room for hope).
ίχ(ΐν ίλπι'δα (often in Grk. writ.): Ro. xv. 4; 2 Co.
iii. 12; with an inf. belonging to the person hoping, 2
Co. X. 15 ; ίλπι'δα ίχ(ΐν els [Tdf. προς'] Bfnv, foil, by ace.
with inf. Acts .x.xiv. 15, (tis Χριστον ίχαν τας Λπίδαί,
Acta Thomae § 28 ; [τ. ίλπ/δα c if τ. Ίησοΰν iv τ. nvfii-
ματί e;(oi/7-f s, Barn. ep. 11, 11]) : tVi with dat. of pers. 1
Jn. iii. 3 ; {'λπίδα μη e';(oiTfr, (of the heathen) having no
hope (of salvation), Eph. ii. 12; 1 Th. iv. 13; ή ϊλπίς
ΐστίν (1ς θ(όν, directed unto God, 1 Pet. i. 21. By nieton.
it denotes a. the author of hope, or he who is its foun-
dation, (often so in Grk. auth., as Aescliyl. choeph.
77G; Thuc. ,3, 57; [cf. Ignat. ad Eph. 21, 2; ad Magn.
1 1 fin.; ad Philad. 11, 2; ad Trail, inscr. and 2, 2, etc.]) :
1 Tim. i. 1 ; 1 Th. ii. 19; with gen. of obj. added, τής
διΊξης, Col. i. 27. b. the tiling hoped for : πρησ8(-
χ^σθαι την μακαρίαν ΐΧπίδα, Tit. ii. 13; ίΚττίδα δίκαιοσννης
άπικδίχισθαι, the thing hoped for, which is righteous-
ness [cf. Jley. ed. Siefferi ad 1.], Gal. v. 5, (ηροσδοκών
τας νπο θ(οΰ (Χπί&ας, 2 Mace. vii. 14); δια ίΚπίδα την άττο-
κίΐμΐνην iv τοΙς υνρανοΐς, Col. i. 5 ; κρατησαί της rrpoKftpi-
νης ΐλπίδος, Heb. vi. 18 (cf. Bleek ad loc). — Zockler,
De vi ac notione vocis ίλπίΓ in N. T. Gissae 1856.*
Έλΰμαβ, ό, [Β. 20 (18)], Elymas, an appellative name
which Luke interprets as μάγος. — derived either, as is
commonly supposed, fr. the Arabic αλΛ£ (elymon),
i. e. wise ; or, ace. to the more probable opinion of De-
litzsch (Zeit«chrift f. d. Luth. Theol. 1877, p. 7), fr. the
Aramaic ΝΟ'^Ν powerful : Acts xiii. 8. [BB.UD. s. v.] *
ίλωί (ΙνΤΈλωί, [WII Λωί; see I, i]), Eloi, Syriac
form (^^,:^. 'rl'^N)for Hebr. 'Sk (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2):
Mk. XV. .■)4. [Cf. Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 1 1 •] *
«μαυτοϋ, -ης, -οΰ, (fr. ίμοΰ and σΰτον), reflexive pro-
noun of 1st pers., of myself, used only in gen., dat., and
ace. sing. [cf. B. 110 (96) sqq.] : άπ' iμavτoΰ, sec όπό, II.
2 d- aa. ; ίπ iμaυτόv, under my control, Mt. viii. 9 ; Lk.
vii. 8; iμaυτύv, mi/se/f as op|i. to Christ, tlie supjiosed
minister of sin (vs. 17), Gal. ii. 18; tacitly ojip. to an
animal offered in sacrifice, .)n. xvii. 19; negligently for
αντος ίμί. 1 Co. iv. 3 [yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]. As in (irk.
ivriters (.Mattliiae § 148 Anm. 2, i. p. 354; Passow s. v.
p. 883), its force is sometimes so weakened that it
scarcely differs from the simple pers. pron. of the fir^it
person [yet denied by Meyer], as Jn. xii. 32 ; xiv. 21 ;
Philera. 13.
έμ.-βα£νω [see iv, III. 3] ; 2 aor. ίνίβην, inf. (μβηναι.
ptcp. ^μβάς; [fr. Ilom. down] ; lo i/<> into, step into : Jn.
V. 4 R L ; (Ις TO ττλοΐον, to embark, Mt. viii. 23, and
often.
ίμ-βάλλω [sec iv. III. 3] : 2 aor. inf. (μβα\(ίν; lo Ihrov
in, cast into : (ΐς, Lk. xii. 5. [From Ilom. down. CoMi". :
παρεμβάλλω.'] *
έμ-βάτΓτω [see iv, ΓΠ. 3] : I aor. ptcp. (μβάψας : to ilip
in: τι. .Τη. xiii. 26' Lclim., 26"' RGLtxt.; την χ('φα c>•
τώ τρνβλίω, yit. xxvi. 23 ; mid. ό *μβαπτόμ(νος μ(τ ίμη^
[Lchni. adds την χ«ρα] eU το [U II add cv in br.] τρι-
βλίον, Mk. xiv. 20. ( Arstph., Xen., al.) *
4μβατ(νω [see iv. III. 3] ; (iμβάrης stepping in, goinp
in); to enter; 1. prop.; πήλιν, Eur. El. 595; πατρί-
δος. Soph. O. T. 825 ; «r το ορός, Joseph, antt. 2, 12, 1 :
to frequent, haunt, often of gods frequenting favorite
spots, as νησον, Aeschyl. Pers. 449 ; τώ χωρίω, Dion.
Hal. antt. 1, 77; often to come into po.tses.iion (fa thing:
thus iis vavv, Dem. p. 894, 7 [6 Dind.]; την γην. Josh.
xix. 51 Sept.; to invade, make a hostile incursion into, df
with ace. of place, 1 Mace. xii. 25, etc. 2. tro]iically,
(cf. Germ, eini/e/ien) ; a. ίο ^o ίηίο (/eiaiZ.'s in narrating:
absol. 2 Mace. ii. 30. b. to investiijate, search into, scru-
tinize minutely: ταΐς fVionj/iaif, Pliilo, plant. Xoe § 19;
& μη 4ώρακ( (μβατίΰων, things which he has not seen, i. e.
tilings denied to the sight (cf. 1 Jn. iv. 20), Col. ii. 18, —
where, if with G L [in ed. min., but in ed. maj. rein-
serted, yet in br.] Τ Tr Wll lluther, Meyer, we expunge
^ij, we must render, "going into curious and subtile
speculation about things which he has seen in visions
granted him " ; but cf. Baumg.-Crusius ad loc. and W
§ 55, 3 c. ; [also Reiche (Com. crit.), Bleek, Ilofm., al.,
defend the μή. But see Tdf. and WII. ad loc, and Bp.
Lghtft.'s 'detached note'; cf. B. 349 (300). .Some in-
terpret " (conceitedly) takinr/ his stand on the things
which" etc.; see under 1]; Phavor. iμβaτfϋσat■ iπιβήva^
τα ϊνδον i^fpfvvfinai η σκοπήσαι ; [similarly Hesych. 2293,
vol. ii. p. 73 ed. Schmidt, cf. his note ; further see reff.
in Suidas, col. 1213 d.].•
ΐμβιβάζω
207
εμτταιζω
ίμ-βίβάΧ,ω : 1 aor. (νιβίβασα ; Ιο put in or on, lead in,
cause ίο enter; as often in the Greek writ, «κα fit το
πλοϊοΐ' : Acts xxvii. 6.*
ίμ-βλίττω [see eu. III. 3] ; impf. (νίβΚίπον ; 1 aor. tVe-
βλΕ ψα, I'tcp. Ε/χ/3λ<\|/•αί ; to turn one's eyes on ; looL• at ;
I. prop.: with ace. Mk. viii. 25, (Anth. 11, 3; Sept.
Judg. xvi. 27 [Alex.]) : nvi (Plat. rep. 10, 608 d. ; Polyb.
15, 28, 3, and elsewhere), Jit. .\ix. 2C ; Mk. x. 21, 27;
xiv. C7; Lk. xx. 17; xxii. 61; Jn. i. 36,42 (43), (in all
these pass, (μΐίλίψα! ηντω or auro'is Xf'yf t or (ΐπ(ν, cf. Xen.
Cyr. 1, 3, 2(μβ\ίπων αϋτω (Xfyef). eis τ. οίρανύν, \cts i.
11 R G L, {fls T. γήν, Is. V. 30 ; viii. 22 ; fit ΰφθαλμόν,
Plat. Ale. 1 p. 132 e.). Absol., ούκ ίνίβλίπον I beheld
not, i. e. the power of looking upon (sc. surrounding
objects) was taken away from me. Acts xxii. 1 1 [Tr mrg.
WII mrg. r^XfTT.]. (2 Chr. x.x. 24 [Aid.] ; Xen. mem. 3,
II, 10). 2. fig. to look at with the mind, to consider:
Mt. vi. 26, (Is. li. 1 sq. ; Sir. ii. 10; xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 15;
with ace. only. Is. v. 12 ; with dat., 2 Mace. xii. 45).*
<μ-βριμ.άομ.αι [see eV, III. 3], -ύμαι, depon. verb, pres.
ptcp. ξμβριμωμενος (Jn. xi. 38, where Tdf. (μβριμον μΐ-
νοί\ see {'ρωτάω, init.) ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ίνιβριμώντο
(Mk. xiv. 5, where Tdf. -μουντό, cf. ερωτάω u. s.) ; 1
aor. ('ν^βριμησάμην, and (Mt. ix. 30 LTTrWH) ive-
βριμήθην [Β. 52 (46)] ; (βριμάομαι, fr. βμίμη, to be
moved with anger) ; to snort in (of horses ; Germ, darein
schnauben) : Aeschyl. sept. 461 ; to be vertj angry, to be
moved with indignation : τινί (Liban.), Mk. xiv. 5 (see
above) ; absol., with addition of iv ίαυτω, Jn. xi. 38 ;
with dat. of respect, ib. 33. In a sense unknown to
prof. auth. to charge with earnest admonition, sternly to
charge, threateningly to enjoin : Mt. ix. 30 ; Mk. i. 43.*
ίμίω, -ώ [(cf. Skr. vatn, Lat. vom-ere; Curtius § 452;
Vanicek p. 886 sq.)] : 1 aor. inf. ίμίσαι ; to vomit, vomit
forth, throw up, fr. Horn, down : rira tic τοϋ στόματος, i. e.
to reject with extreme disgust, Rev. iii. 16.*
Ιμ-μαίνομαι [see eV. III. 3] ; τινί, to rage against [A. Y.
to be exceedingly mad againsl~\ one : Acts xxvi. 1 1 ; be-
sides only in Joseph, antt. 17, 6, 5.*
Εμμανουήλ, ό, Immanuel, (fr. IJSi' and Ss, God with
us), i. q. savior, a name given to Christ by Matthew, i.
23, after Is. vii. 14. Ace. to the orthodox interpreta-
tion the name denotes the same as θ(άνθρω-ηο<!, and has
reference to the personal union of the human nature
and the divine in Clirist. [See BB. DD. s. v.] *
Έμμοού? (in Joseph, also ΆμμαοΜ), ij, Emwiafs (Lat.
gen. -untts), a village 30 stadia from Jerusalem (ace.
to the true reading [so Dind. and Bekk.] in Joseph, b. j.
7, 6, 6 ; not, as is com. said, foil, the authority of Luke,
60 stadia), apparently represented by the modern Kulo-
nieh (cf. Ewald, Gesch. des Volkes Israel, 2te Ausg.
vi. p. 675 sq. ; l_Caspari, Chronolog. and (Jeograph.
Intr. to the Life of Christ § 191 ; Sepp, Jerus. u. d. heil.
Land, i. 52]) : Lk. xxiv. 13. There was a town of the
same name in the level country of Juda?a, 175 stadia
from Jerusalem, noted for its hot springs and for the
slaughter of the Syrians routed by Judas Maccabaeus,
1 Mace. iii. 40, 57; afterwards fortified by Bacchides,
the Sj-rian leader, 1 ISIacc. Lx. 50, and from the 3d cent,
on called Nicopolis [B. D. s. v. Emmaus or Nicopolis].
A third place of the same name was situated near Tibe-
rias, and was famous for its medicinal springs. Cf. Keim
iii. p. 555 sq. (Eng. trans, vi. 306 sq.) ; Wolff in Riehm p.
376 sq. ; [esp. Hackclt in B. D. Am. ed. p. 731].*
ίμμ€'νω [Tdf. €νμ(νω. Acts xiv. 22 ; see iv. III. 3] ; 1
aor. (ΐ/(μ(ΐνα ; fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down ; (Augustine,
immaneo), to remain in, continue; a. prop, in a place : t»
Tivi, Acts xxviii. 30 Τ Tr WH. b. to persevere in
anything, a state of mind, etc. ; to hold fast, be true to,
abide by, keep : rj πίστα, Acts xiv. 22 (νόμω, SpKois, etc.
in the Grk. writ.) ; ev rti/i (more rarely so in the classics,
as ev Toii σπονδαΪΓ, Thuc. 4, 118 ; cv τη TriVrtt, Polyb. 3,
70, 4) : iu [so R G only] rois γ^γραμμίνοις. Gal. iii. 10 fr.
Deut. xxvii. 26 ; tv τη διαθήκη, Ileb. viii. 9 fr. Jer. xx.xviii.
(xxxi.) 32. [Cf. W. § 52, 4, 5.] *
ίμμέα-ω, i. q. ev μίσω, (see μισοί, 2) : Rev. i. 13; ii. 1 ;
iv. 6 ; V. 6 ; xxii. 2, in Tdf. ed. 7 ; [see his Proleg. p. xlviii.,
(but nowhere in ed. 8, see the Proleg. p. 76 sq.) ; cf.
WH. App. p. 150; B. 8].
Έμμόρ (Έμ/ιώρ L Τ Tr, [but WH Έμμώρ, see their
Intr. §408] ), ό, ("ΊΟΠ i. e. ass), Emmor [or Hamor,
ace. to the Hebr.], proper name of a man : Acts vii. 16 ;
see concerning him, Gen. .xxxiii. 19; x.xxiv. 2 sq.*
Ιμ05, -^, -όν, (fr. ίμοϋ), possess, pron. of the first pers.,
mine; a. that which I have; what [possess: Jn. iv. 34 ;
.xiii. 35 ; [xv. 1 1 ή χαρά ή (μή (see μίνω, I. 1 b. α.)] ; xviii.
36 ; Ro. X. 1 ; Philem. 12, and often; τη (μη χιιρί, with
my own hand [B. 117 (102) note], 1 Co. xvi. 21 ; Gal.
vi. 11 ; Col. iv. 18 ; as a predicate, Jn. vii. 16; xiv. 24;
xvi. 1 5 ; substantively, to Ιμόν that which is mine, mine
own, esp. my money, Mt. xxv. 27 ; divine truth, in the
knowledge of which I excel, Jn. xvi. 15; univ. in plur.
τα ίμά my goods, Mt. xx. 15 ; Lk. xv. 31. b. proceeding
from me : o'l ίμοι λόγοι, Mk. viii. 38 ; Lk. ix. 26 [here
Tr mrg. br. λογ.] ; ό λόγο5 ό ιμός, Jn. viii. 37 ; ή ίντο\η
ή Ιμή, Jn. XV. 12; ή (μή διδαχή, Jn. vii. 16, and in other
ex.x. c. pertaining or relating to me; a. appointed
for me : 6 καιρός 6 (μόί, Jn. vii. 6. β. equiv. to a gen.
of the object: ή (μή άνάμνησις, Lk. xxii. 19: 1 Co. xi.
24 ; exx. fr. Grk. writ, are given by W. § 22, 7 ; [Kiih-
ner § 454, Anm. 11 ; Kriiger § 47, 7, 8]. γ. ίστιν ίμόν
it is mine, equiv. to, it rests with me : Mt. xx. 23 ; Mk.
X. 40. In connecting the article with this pron. the
N. T. writ, do not deviate fr. Attic usage ; cf. B.
§124, 6.
ίμτταιγμονή [see iv. III. 3], -ης. ή. (ίμπαίζω), dcrtsion.
mockery : 2 Pet. iii. 3 G L Τ Tr WII. Not found else-
where.*
έμ.^αΐ'γμέΐ [see ίν, ΠΙ. 3], -οΰ. 6, ((μπαίζαι), unknown
to prof, auth., a mocking, scoffing : Heb. xi. 36 ; Ezek.
xxii. 4 ; Sir. xxvii. 28 ; Sap. xii. 25 ; [Ps. xxxvii. (.\xxviii.)
8] ; torture inflicted in mockery, 2 Mace. vii. 7 [etc.].*
(μ-πα(ζω [see iv. III. 3] ; impf. (νίτταιζον : fut. iμπaίξω
(Mk. X. 34 for the more com. -|oCpat and -ξομαι) : 1 aor.
ivinai^a (for the oV\cr ϊνΐπαισα) : Pass., 1 ΆθΤ.(ν(ππίχθην
(Mt. ii. 1 6, for the older ίναταίσ&ην) ; 1 fut. (μπαιχθήσομαι ;
€μΐΓαίΚτη<;
208
βμττροσθίν
(of. Loh. ad Pliryn. p. 240 sq. ; Kriiger § 40 s. v. παίζω ;
[Veitch ibid.] ; B. 64 (56) sq.) ; to play in, rivi, I's.
ciii. (civ.) 26 ; Eur. Bacoh. 867. lo play with, trifle with,
(Lat. illuilere) i. e. a. to mock- : absol., Mt. -x.x. 1 !t ;
x.xvii. 41 ; Mk. x. 34 ; xv. 31 ; Lk. xxiii. 11 ; τινί (Hdt.
4. 134), Mt. xxvii. 2!), [31]; Mk. xv. 20; Lk. xiv. 29;
xxii. 63 ; xxiii. 36 ; in pas.»). Lk. xviii. 32. b. to delude.
deceive, (.So|)h. Ant. 799); in pass. Mt. ii. 16, (Jer. x.
ίμ-ΐΓαίκτη5 [see ev, III. 3], -ου, 6, {(μπαίζω), a mocker,
η .icnj/'rr: 2 Pet. iii. 3 ; Jude IH ; playing like children,
Is. iii. 4. Not used by prof, auth.*
4^-irepi^raTi« [T Wll iv, see ev, IIL 3], -ω : fut. {'μπι-
ρινατήσω ; Ιο r/o about in, walk in : tv τισι, among per-
sons, 2 t'o. vi. 16 fr. Lev. xxvi. 12. (Job i. 7 ; Sap. xix.
20 ; [I'lulo, Pint.], Leian., Achill. Tat., al.) *
ίμ-ιτίιτλημι [not ΐμπιμ πλ. (see iv, IIL 3) ; for eupho-
nv's sake, l.nh. ad Pliryn. p. 95 ; Veitch p. 536] and
ίμπιπ'Κάω (fr. which form comes the pres. ptcp. (μπητλών.
Acts xiv. 17[W. §14. If. ; B. 66(.58)]); 1 aor. eWrrXrjaa ;
1 aor. pass. (νιπΚήσθην ; pf. pass. ptep. (μπιπΧησμίνος ;
Sept. for xSd and in jjass. often for j;2'u to be satiated;
in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down : to fill up, flll full : ηνά
Tivos, to bestow something bountifully on one, Lk. i. 53;
Acts xiv. 17, (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 14 ; Ps. cvi. (cvii.) i) ;
Is. xxix. 19; Sir. iv. 12); to fill with food, i. c. satis fi/,
satiate ; pass., Lk. vi. 25 ; Jn. vi. 12, (Deut. vi. 11 ; viii.
Ill; Ruth ii. 14; Neb. ix. 25, etc.); to take one's Jill of,
f/hii one's desire for : pass, with gen. of pers., one's inter-
course and companionship. Ho. xv. 24 ; of. Kypke ad
Inc. : τον κάλλονί αύτην, gazing at her beauty, Sus. 32.*
ί'μ-ΐΓΐιτράω [s<ic ev, III. 3], (for the more com. ίμπίπρημι,
(ν-πίμπρημι toburn ; on thedroppingof tlie^cf.c^7nVA-;^i,
iuit.) ; fr. lldt.<lo«-n; tn hum, set on /ire; j)res. inlin.
]y.i!^f. (μπιημάσθαι III he (iullanicd. and so) . ««■«//( </ (llosych.
■πιμπμΰν ■ ■ ■ φναάν: Etym. Magn. 672, 23 πιμπρΰσαι• φυ-
σωσαι ; Joseph, antt. 3, 11,6; etc.) ; of the bunian body
to swell up : from the bite of a viper, .VctH xxviii. 6
Tdf., for Κ G etc. πίμπμασθαι, q. v. [and Veitch s. v.
ττίμπρημι].'
ΐμ-ττίτττω [see ev, III. 3]; fut. eμ■πeσoϋμaι^, 2 aor. ev-
eneaov, [fr. Ilom. doAvn] ; to fall into: eh βόθυνον, ^H.
xii. 11, and L Ixt. 'Γ Tr AVII in Lk. vi. 39: e!s φρϊαρ,
Lk. xiv. 5 [R ii] ; to fall among robbers, fis toUs λ^στάΓ,
Lk. X. 36, and in metaph. phrases, 1 Tim. iii. 6 s([. ; vi.
9 ; els χιΊρά': tivos, into one's jiower : τοϋ θ(οϋ, to incur
divine penalties, Ileb. x. 31, as in 2 S. xxiv. 14 ; 1 Chr.
xxi. 13; Sir. ii. 18.*
ift^XiKu [see ev. III. 3] : Pass., [pres. ^μηΧ^κομαι}; 2
aor. ptcp. ('μϊτλακίΐί; Ιο inweave; trop. in pass., with dat.
of thing, /" e>itan(/le, involve in : 2 Tim. ii. 4 ; 2 Pet. ii.
20. (From Aeschyl. down.) *
ϊμ^^λοκή [see ev, Til. 3], -^s. ή, (ί'μπλί'κω), an inter-
weaving, hraidinff. η knot : τριχών [Lohm. om.], an elab-
orate gathering of the hair into knots, Vulg. capilUilura,
[A. v. plaitini/]. 1 Pet. iii. 3 (κoμηs, Strab. 17 p. 828).*
<μ^ΊΠ>€0 [Τ WII ev-, see ev. III. 3]; 1. to breathe
in or on, [fr. Horn. down]. 2. to inhale, (Aeschyl.,
Plat., al.) ; with partitive gen., άπίΐλήι it• φόνου, threat-
ening and slaughter were so to speak the element from
which he drew his breath. Acts ix. 1 ; see Meyer ad loc.,
cf. W. § .30, 9 c. ; [B. 167 (146)]; e'pwvtov ζωηs, Sept.
Josh. X. 40.•
€μ.-πορ<νομαι [see ev, III. 3] : depon. pass, with fut. mid.
ίμπορίύσυμαι ; (fr. (μτΓοροΕ, q. v.) ; to (p) a trad! η f/, lo IriirrI
for business, to Irujfic, trade, (Thuc. et sci(|. ; .Sept.); .las.
iv. 13 [R" G here give the 1 aor. subj. -σώμιθα]; with
the ace. of a thing, to import for sole (as (λιιιοί' tis Α'ίγν-
ΤΓΓον, Sept. llos. xii. 1 ; πορφνρανάττοΦοίνίκη5, I*iog. Laiirt.
7, 2 ; yXavKas, Lcian. Nigrin. init.) ; lo deal in ; to use a
thing or a jiersoa for gain, [A. V. inake merchandise o/"],
(ώραν τον σώματοί, Joseph, antt. 4, 6, 8 ; 'Ασπασία evtno•
peveTo πλήθη -γυναικών, Athen. 13 p. 569 f.) : 2 I'et. ii. 3 ;
cf. W. 223 (2011); [B. 147 (129)].*
ΐμπορία [see ev, III. 3], -as, ή, (ίμπopos), trade, mer-
chandise : Mt. xxii. 5. (Ilesiod, sqc]. ; Sept.)*
Ιμιτύριον [see ev. III. 3], -ου. τό. (epnopos), a ]>lace
ii-hcre trade is carried on, esp. a seojiort ; a iniirl, emporium ;
(Plin. forum tiundinarium^ : oikos εμπορίου a market
house (epexeget. gen. [W. § 59, 8 a. ; A. V. α house of
merchandise']), Jn. ii. 16. (From Hdt. down ; Sept.) *
ϊμ -iropos [sec ev, III. 3], -ου, ό. (nopos) ; 1. i. <|• ό
€τγ' aWoTputs veois π\(ων μισθοί', ό ifft/:iari;y; so Ilesych.,
witli whom agree Phavorinus and the Scliol. ad Arstjih.
Plut. 521 ; and .so the word is used by Homer. 2.
after Horn, one on a journey, whether by sea or by liinti,
e.tp. for tragic ; hence 3. a merchant, (opp. to κάπηλοί
a retailer, petty tradesman): Rev. xviii. 3, 11, 15, 23;
άvθpωπos epwnpos (see άνθρωττο!, 4 a.). Mt. xiii. 45 [WH
txt. om. άνθρ.]. (Sept. for nnb and Sp'^.) *
(μ-πρήθω : 1 aor. ίνίπρησα ; fr. Ilom. down ; Sept. for
ητϋ and iTSn ; to burn ; destroy by fire : την πόλιν, Mt.
xxii. 7.*
ίμ-Ίτροσ9(ν (Tdf. in Rev. iv. 6 ίνπρ. [^cc tv. HI. 3 ; cf.
Bttm. 8]), adv. of place and of tiuic. (fr. ev and πpιΊσθev,
]irop. in the fore part); [fr. Hdt. down] ; Sept. chielly
for •JsS ; before. In the N. T. used only of jilace;
1. adverbially, in front, before : Rev. iv. 6 (opp. to όπι-
σθ(ν, as in Palaeph. 29, 2). before : πopeύeσθaι, to pre-
cede, to go before, Lk. xix. 28 ; προ^ραμων ίμπρoσθev, ib.
4 [T WH els TO ίμπρ, cf. Hdt. 4, 01 (8, 89)], like προ-
πopeveσθaι (μπροπθ(ν. Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 23 [fig. Plato, Gorg.
p. 497 a. πρόϊθι eU- to epnp] ; τά (μπρηηθ(ν the things
Λvhich lie before one advancing, the goal set before one,
Phil. iii. 13 (14) (opp. to το οπίσω). 2. it serves as a
prep., with the gen. [B. 319 (274) ; W. § 54, ll] ; a. he-
fore, i. e. in that local region Avhich is in front of a per-
son or a thing : Mt. v. 24 ; vii. 6 ; Lk. v. 19 ; xiv. 2 ; to
prostrate one's self eμπρoσθev των πο8ών tivos. Rev. xi.x.
10; xxii. 8; γowπeτ^Ίv ίμπρ. tivos, Mt. xxvii. 29; nopev
eaOai ίμπ. tivos, to go before one, Jn. .\. 4 ; άποστίλ-
\(οθαι ϋμπ- tivos, to be sent before one, Jn. iii. 28 ;
σα\•πίζ(ΐν (μπ. tivos, ^It. vi. 2 ; την nbov κατασκ€νάσαι,
where ίμπρ- tivos is nearly equiv. to a dat. [cf. I?. 1 72
(150)], Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2 Rec. ; Lk. vii. 27. b. be-
fore, in the presence of, i. q. opposite to, over against
ίμίΓτύω
209
ore : στηναι, Mt. χ xvii. 1 1 ; όμοΚοτγάν and ορν(ίσθαι [Β.
176(153)], Mt. χ. 32 sq.; xxvi. 70; Lk. xii. 8, [9 Lchm.] ;
also Gal. ii. 14 ; 1 Th. i. 3; ii. 19; iii. 9, 13 ; before one,
\. e. at Lis tribunal: Mt. xxv. 32; xxvii. 11 ; Lk. xxi.
36 ; Acts xviii. 17: 2 Co. v. 10 ; 1 Th. ii. 1 9 ; [1 Jn. iii.
1 9]. Here belong tlie expressions ίίδοκία, θίλημά iari
ίμπ)}οσθ€ΐ' deov, il is the (jood plea.iure, the will of (Jod, Mt.
xi. 2o; xviii. 14; Lk. x. 21, formed after Chald. usage;
for in 1 S. xii. 22 the words Π1Π' S'Xin, God wills, Jona-
than the targumist renders " Dip Xi>~_1 ; cf. Fischer, De
vitiis lexx. N. T. etc. p. 329 sq. ;' [cf.B. 1 72 (150)]. c.
before i. e. in the sight of one: Mt. v. ]G ; vi. 1 ; xvii. 2;
x.xiii. 13 (14); Mk. ii. 12 TTrmrg. WH; ix. 2; Lk. xLx.
27 ; Jn. xu. 37 ; Acts x. 4 L Τ Tr WII. d. before, de-
noting rank: yeyovivai ΐμπρ rivet, to have obtained
greater dignity than another, Jn. i. 15, 30, also 27 R L
br. ; (Gen. xlviii. 20 ξθηκ€ τον ^Έφραίμ (μπροσθ^ν τον
Ιΐανασση; [of. Plat. legg. 1, 6:η d.; ό, 743 c.; 7, ν05 d.]).*
ίμ-^ιττύω [see €v. Ill 3] ; impf. ένίπτνιιν ; f ut. €μπτνσω ;
1 aor. (νίΤΓτυσα ; fut. pass. €μπτνσθήσομαι ; [fr. Hdt.
dowu] ; to spit upon : nvi, Mk. x. 34; xiv. 65; xv. 19;
fir TO πρόσωπον τίνος, Mt. xxvi. 67 (Num. xii. 14 ; Plut.
ii. p. 189 a. [i. e. reg. etimper. apotheg. Phoc. 17] ; κατά
TO πρόσωπ. nvi, Deut. xxv. 9); t's two, Mt. .xxvii. 30;
Pass, to be spit upon: Lk. xviii. 32. Muson. ap. Stob.
floril. 19, 16. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. x. 17; [Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 6G].*
(μψανή; [see ϊν. III. 3], -e's, ((μφαίνω to .show in, ex-
liiliit), tnanifist: γίνομαι τινί, in its literal sense, Acts
X. 40 ; fig., of God giving jjroofs of his saving grace and
thus manifesting himself, Ro. x. 20 fr. Is. Ixv. 1. [From
Aeschyl. down.] *
ίνφαν(ζω [see tV, III. 3] ; fut. εμφανίσω [Β. 37 (32)] ;
1 aor. €ν€φάνισα ; 1 aor. pass, (νίφανίσθην; fr. Xcn. and
Plato down ; ((μφανής) ; 1. to muuifest, exhibit to
view : ίαντόν τινι. prop, to present one's self to the sight of
another, manifest one's self to (Ex. xxxiii. 13), Jn. .\iv.
22 ; metaph. of Christ giving evidence by the action of
the Holy Spirit on the souls of the disciples that he is
alive in heaven, Jn. xiv. 21. Pass, to show one's self,
come to view, appear, be manifest : tiw (of spectres. Sap.
xvii. 4 ; αυτο'ίς θ(ονς (μφανίζ^σθαι Xfyovres, Diog. Laert.
prooem. 7; so of God, Joseph, antt. 1, 13, 1), Mt. xxvii.
53 ; τω προσώπω τοϋ θ(ον. of Christ appearing before God
in heaven, Heb. ix. 24 ; (of God imparting to souls the
knowledge of himself. Sap. i. 2 ; Theoph. Ant. ad Autol.
1, 2, 4). 2. to indicate, disclose, declare, make knoxcn :
foil, by ότι, Heb. xi. 14 ; with dat. of pers. Acts xxiii. 15;
t1 πρόί Tiva, ib. 22 ; τ1 κατά Ttvos, to report or declare
a thing against a person, to inform against one. Acts
xxiv. 1 ; xxv. 2 ; ττίρί Ticor, about one. Acts xxv. 15.
[Syn. see δι;λο'ω.] *
€μ-ψοβθΐ [see e'v, in. 3], -ov. (φύβο{), thrown into fear,
terrifed, affrighted : Lk. xxiv. 5, [37] ; Acts x. 4 ; (xxii.
9 Rec.) ; xxiv. 25 ; Rev. xi. 13. Theophr. char. 25 (24),
1 ; [1 Mace. xiii. 2 ; in a good sense. Sir. xix. 24 (21)].
(Actively, inspiring fear, terrible. Soph. O. C. 39.)•
(μ^φνο-άω, -ώ [see fir, ΙΠ. 3] : 1 aor. ίνιφΰσησα; to blow
or breathe on , τινά, Jn. xx. 22, where Jesus, after the
manner of the Hebrew prophets, expresses by the sym-
bolic act of breathing ujjon the apostles the communi-
cation of the Holy Sjiirit to them, — having in view the
primary meaning of the words ΠΠ and πνήμα [cf. e. g.
Ezek. xxxvii. 5]. (Sept.; Diosc, Aret., (>eop., al. ; [to
inflate, Aristot., al.].) *
ί'μ-φυτοϊ [see ίν, III. 3], -ov, {(μφΰω to implant), in
prof. auth. [fr. Hdt. down] inborn, iinplunled by nature ;
cf. Grimm, Exeget. Hdb. on Sap. [xii. Id] p. 224; im-
planted bij others' instruction : thus Jas. i. 21 τον ΐμφυτον
\oyov, the doctrine implanted by your teachers [al. by
God: cf. Bruckner in De AVette, or Huther ad loc],
^έζασθι (V πραντητι, receive like mellow soil, as it were.*
__iv,.a preposition taking the dative after it; Hebr. 3;
Lat. in with abl. ; Eng. in, on, at, with, by, among. [W.
§ 48 a. ; B. 328 (282) sq.] It is used
I. Locally; 1. of Place proper ; a. in the in-
terior of some whole ; within the limits of some space :
€v ναστρί, Mt. i. 18 ; eV Βηθ\(€'μ, Mt. ii. 1 : iv rjj πολ«,
Lk. vii. 37 ; ev ττ/ Ίον^αία, €ντη ΐρημω, iv τω πλοί'ω, iv τω
ουρανω, and innumerable other exx. b. in (on) the
surface of a place, (tierm. auf) : tv τω opet, Jn. iv. 20
sq. ; Heb. viii. 5 : iv τ,Χαξι, 2 Co. iii. 3 ; (v ttj ayopa, Sit.
XX. 3 ; iv TTJ όδω, Bit. v. 25, etc. c. of [iroximity, at,
near, by: iv rats ywviais των π\ατ€ΐων, Mt. vi. 5; iv τω
Σιλωάμ, at the fountain Siloaui, Lk. xiii. 4 ; iv τω γαζο-
φυ\ακίω, Jn. viii. 20 [see B.l). Am. ed. s. v. Treasury :
and on this pass, and the preceding cf. W. 385 (360)] ;
καθίζίΐν iv TJi δ(ξιά θιοϋ etc., at the right hand : Heb. i.
3 ; viii. 1 ; Eph. i. 20. d. of the contents of a writ-
ing, book, etc. : iv τή (πιστόΚτ), 1 Co. v. 9 ; iv κ(φα\ί8ι
βιβΧίου γράφ(ΐν, Heb. χ. 7 ; iv TJj βίβλω, τω βιβλίω, Rev.
xiii. 8; Gal. iii. 10: iv τώ νόμω, Lk. xxiv. 44; Jn. i. 45
(46) ; iv τοις πρηφήταις, in tlie book of the prophets.
Acts xiii. 40 ; iv 'Ηλία, in that portion of Scripture
which treats of Elijah, Ro. xi. 2, cf. Fritzsche ad loc. ;
[Delitzsch, Brief a. d. Kbmer, p. 1 2 ; W. 385(360) ; B. 331
(285)]; iv Ααυιδ, in the Psalms of David, Heb. iv. 7 [see
Λαβίδ, fin.] ; iv τώ Ώση(, in the prophecies of Hosea,
Ro. ix. 25. e. trop. applied to things not perceived
by the senses, as iv ττ/ καρδία, iv Tnis καρδίαις, Mt. v. 28 ;
xiii. 19; 2 Co. iv. 6, and often ; iv τα'ις σνν€ΐδήσ(σι, 2 Co.
V. 11. 2. with dat. of a Person, in the person,
nature, soul, thought of any one : thus iv τω θ(ω Kf κρνπται
η ζωη υμών, it lies hidilen as it were in the bosom of
God until it shall come forth to view. Col. iii. 3, cf. Eph.
iii. 9 ; iv αϋτώ, i. e. in the person of Christ, learoticfi πάν
TO π\ήρωμα etc.. Col. i. 1 9 ; ii. 3 [(?), 9]. phrases in
which η αμαρτία is said to dwell in men, Ro. vii. 1 7 sq. ;
or ό Χριστοί (the mind, power, life of Christ) civai, [Jn.
xvii. 26]; Ro. viii. 10; 2 Co. xiii. 5: piveiv, Jn. vi. 56;
[xv. 4, 5]; f^i», Gal. ii. 20 ; μορφοίσίαι. Gal. iv. 19; λαλίΐκ.
2 Co. .xiii. 3; ό λόγος toC βιοΐι eivai. 1 Jn. i. 10; μίνιιν,
Jn. V. 38; ivoiKeXv or οικύν ό Xoyos τοΟ Χρίστου, Col. iii.
16 ; TO πν(νμα (of God, of Christ), Ro. viii. 9, 1 1 ; 1 Co.
iii. 16 ; 2 Tim. i. 14 ; το tv τινι χάρισμα. 1 Tim. iv. 14 ;
2 Tim. i. 6 ; ivtpyf'iv ίν τινι, Mt. xiv. 2 ; Eph. ii. 2 ; 1 Ca
ev
210
xii. 6, etc. ; ivtpytiaeat. Col. i. 2Π ; κατίργάζ(σβαι, Ko.
vii. 8. after verbs of revealing;, manifesting: άπο-
κα\\ψΜ iv ιμοί, in my .«oul, Oal. i. IG ; φανιριΊν iimv iv
aiiToii, Ro. L 19. (V ίαυτώ, iv iavro'is. within one'.s self
i. e. in the soul, .ij)irit, heart : aftir tlie verbs ftStvai.
Jn. tL 61; tlnelv, l.k. vii. 3!l; xviii. 4; ΐμβριμύσθαι, .In.
xi. 38; στίνάζίΐν, Ro. viii. 2•!; 8ιιιλογίζ(σθαι, .Mk. ii. 8
(alternating; there with «V rnit KapSiais, cf. vs. 6); Lk.
xii. 1 7 ; Sianope'iv, Acts X. 1 7 ; Ae'yfii/, Wt. iii. 9 ; i.x. 21 ;
Lk. vii. 49 ; also 2 Co. i. 9 ; for other exx. of divers
kinds, see (Ιμί, V. 4 e. 3. it answers to the Germ, an
[oh ; often freely to be rendered in the case of, with, etc.
W. § 4H, a. 3 a.], when used a. of the person or
thing on whom or on which some power is oper-
ative: ίνα οΰτω γίνηται iv iμol, 1 Co. ix. Ii5 ; ποκίκ τι iv
Tii/i, Mt. .\vii. 12; Lk. xxiii. 31 ; tf. JIatthiae ii. p. 1311 ;
[\V. u. 8. and 218 (204 s<i.) ; B. 149 (130)]. b. of that
in wldch something is manifest [W. u. s.] : μανθάν(ΐν
(V nKt, 1 Co. iv. 6; γίνώσκ(ΐν, Lk. xxiv. 35; Jn. xiii. 35;
1 Jn. iii. 19 (exx. fr. tlie classics are given by Passow
i. 2 p. 908"; [cf. L. and S. s. v. A. ΙΠ.]) ; Ukewise of that
in wliich a thing is sought: ζητί'ιν ivrivi, 1 Co. iv. 2.
C. after verbs of stumbling, striking: προσκόπτ(ΐν,
Ro. xiv. 21 ; maifiv, Jas. ii. 10; σκαν5ά\ίζ(σθαι, q. v. in
its place. 4. with, among, in tlie prcsunce of, with dat.
of pers. (also often in the classics ; cf. Matthiae ii. p.
1340 ; W. 385 (360) and 217 sip (204)) : 1 Co. ii. 6 ; iv
οφθαλμοί! ήμων, Mt. xxi. 42 ; iv ipot, in my judgment,
1 Co. xiv. 11 ; [perh. add Jude 1 LTTrAVII ; but cf.
6 b. below]. To this head some refer iv νμιν, 1 Co. vi.
2, interpreting it in your assembly, cf. INIeyer ad loc. ;
but see 5 d. y. 5. used of that with which a person
is surrounded, equipped, furnished, assisted,
or acts, [W. § 48, a. 1 b.] ; a. in i. (j. among, with col-
lective nouns: iv τω 5χλω, Mk. v. 30 [W. 414 (380)];
A» Tj ytvea ταυ'ττ], among the men of this age, Mk. viii.
88 ; iv τω yivii μου, in my nation i. e. among my country-
men, Gal. i. 14 ; esp. with dat. plur. of persons, as iv
ημΐν, iv νμιν, among us, among you, iv άΧλήλοΐί, among
yourselves, one with another: Mt. ii. 6; xi. 11 ; Mk. ix.
50; Lk. i. 1; Jn. i. 14; xiii. 35; Acts ii. 29; 1 Co. iii. 18;
V. 1, and often. b. of the garments with (in) which
one is clad : iv iv5ΰμaσι and the like, Mt. vii. 15 ; Mk.
xii. 88; Lk. .x.xiv. 4; Jn. xx. 12; Acts x. 30; Ileb. .xi.
87; Jas. ii. 2; Rev. iii. 4; ημφκσμίνον iv Ίματίοίί, Mt.
xi. 8 [T Ί'γ AVII om. L br. Ίματ.] ; Lk. vii. 2,") ; ntptfiaWf-
σθαί iv Ιματίοις, Rev. iii. 5 ; iv. 4 [L Wll txt. ora. iv]. C.
of that which one either leads or brings with him, or
with which he is fur nished or equipped; esp. after
verbs of coming, (iv of accompaniment), where we
often say with: iv Sera χί\ιάσιν ΰπαντάν, Lk. xiv. 31;
ΙίΧθιν iv μνριάσι. .fude 14 ; cf. Crinim on 1 Mace. i. 17;
ίΐσίρχισθαι iv αίματι, Ileb. ix. 25 ; iv τω ZhaTi κ. iv τω
αίματι, 1 Jn. V. G (i. e. with the water of baptism and
the blood of atonement, by means of both which he has
procured the pardon of our sins, of which fact we are
assured by the testimony of the Holy Spirit) ; iv ράβ&ω,
I Co. iv. 21 ; iv πΧηρώματι «iXoyms, Ro. xv. 29 : ώθάι /eiv
if τώ fiayyiXiffl, 2 Co. x. 1 4 ; iv πνίνμαη κ• Ιίυνάμ(ί 'Hmou,
imbued or furnished with the spirit and power of Elijali,
Lk. i. 1 7 ; iv Ty jiaaiKfla αυτοί, furuislied witli the regal
power of the Messiah, possessed of his kingly power,
[B. 330 (284)] : Mt. xvi. 28 ; Lk. xxiii. 42 [Wll txt. h
mrg. Trmrg. ds την /3.]. Akin is its use d. of tho
instrument or means by or with wliich any tiling is
accomplished, owing to the inlluence of the Ilebr. prep.
3 much more common in the sacred writ, than in prof,
auth. (cf. W. § 48, a. 3 d.; B. 181 (157) and 329 (283)
sq.), where we say with, by means of, hi/ (throuijh); a.
in phrases in >vliicli the primitive force of tlie prep, is
discernible, as iv τινρΊ κατάκαιαν, Rev. xvii. IG [Tom.
WH br. tV] ; iv αΚατι άλίζ^ιυ or άρτΰιιν, Mt. v. 13 ; Mk.
ix. 50; Lk. xiv. 'M; iv τω αίματι 'Κ(υκάν(ΐν, Kev. vii. 14;
iv αίματι καθαρΊζ(ΐν, Ileb. ix. 22; iv iSuTt βαπτίζίΐν, Mt.
iii. 11, etc. (see βαπτίζω, II. b. bb.). β. with the dat.,
where the simple dat. of the instrument might have been
used, esp. in the Revelation : iv μαχαίρα, iv ρομφαί^
cmoKTeiveiv, Rev. vi. 8; xiii. 10; τιατάσσίΐν, Lk. xxii. 49;
άηύΧΚυσθαι, Mt. xxvi. 52; καταπατάν iv To'is ποσίν, Mt.
vii. (ί ; iv βραχίυνι αΰτον, Lk. i. 51 ; iv 8ακτνλω θίον, Lk.
xi. 20, and in otlier exx. ; of things relating to the .«oul,
as iv άγιασμώ, 2 Th. ii. 13 [W. 417 (388)] ; 1 Pet. i. 2 ;
iv TJj 7ταρακλησ(ΐ, 2 Co. vii. 7 ; iv προσ(νχη, Mt. xvii. 21
[T Wll oin. Tr br. tlie vs.]; evXnyeiv iv (ϋλογία, Eph.
i. 3 ; 8ικαιοΰσΰαι iv τω αίματι, Ro. v. 9. γ. more rarely
with dat. of pers., meaning aided by one, by the interverv•
tiim or agency of some one, by (means of) one, [cf. W.
389 (3G4) ; B. 329 (283) sq.] : iv τω άρχοντι τύν δαιμο-
νίων, ΛΙΐ. ix. 34 ; iv ίτ^ρογΧώσσοις, 1 Co. .xiv. 21 ; xpivfiv
τ. οίκονμίνην iv avdpt, Acts ,\vii. 31 ; iv ίιμίν κρίνΐται ο
κόσμος ( preceded by οί άγιοι τον κοσμον κρινυνσιν'), 1 Co.
vi. 2; epydffCTOai ev Twi, Sir. xiii. 4 ; xxx. 13, 34. 8.
foil, by an inf. with the article, in that (Germ, dadurch
dass), or like the Lat. gerund [or Eng. participial noun;
cf. B. 2C4 (227)]: Acts iii. 26; iv. 30; Ileb. ii. 8; viii.
13. e. of the state or condition in which anything
is done or any one e.xists, acts, suffers ; out of a great
number of exx. (see also in γίνομαι, 5 f., and «μί, V. 4
b.) it is sufficient to cite: iv βασάνοις, Lk. xvi. 23; ίν
τω ΰανάτω, 1 Jn. iii. 14 ; iv ζωτι, Ro. v. 10 ; iv rolr 8(σμοϊς,
Pliilem. 13; iv ττίΐρασμο'ΐ!, 1 Pet. i. 6; iv όμυιώματι
σαρκός, Ro. viii. 3 ; iv ττολλώ άγωνι, 1 Th. ii. 2 ; iv δό^/;,
Pliil. iv. 19; 2 Co. iii. 7 .«(j. ; σπ(ίρ(ται iv φθορά κτΧ. it
(sc. that which is sown) is sown in a state of corrii]>
tion, sc. Sv, 1 Co. xv. 42 sq. ; iv ίτοίμω (χ(ΐν, to be pre-
pared, in readiness, 2 Co. x. G ; iv ί'κστάσ«. Acts xi. 5 ;
xxii. 17; very often so used of virtues and vices, as i»
(νσ(β(ία κ. σιμνότητι, 1 Tim. ii. 2 ; iv άγιασμω, 1 Tim. ii.
15 ; iv καινότητι ζωής, Ro. vi. 4 ; iv τη άνοχη τον OeoVf
Ro. iii. 26 (25) ; iv κακία κα\ φθήνω. Tit. iii. 3 ; iv ττανηνρ-
για, 2 Co. iv. 2; al.so with an adverbial force; as ό
δυνάμ(ΐ, powerfully, with power [W. § 51, 1 e. ; B. 33t
(284)], Mk. ix. 1 ; Ro. i. 4 ; Col. i. 29; 2 Th. i. 11 ; κρίνιιν
iv SiKatomlvT], Acts .xvii. 31 ; Rev. xix. 11; iv χαρά, in joy,
joyful, Ro. XV. 32 ; iv iKreveia, Acts xxvi. 7 ; iv (nrovSrj,
Eo. xii. 8 ; iv χάριτι. Gal. i. 6 ; 2 Th. ii. 16 ; iv τάχα. l.k.
ev
211
ep
xviii. 8; Ro. xvi. 20; Rev. i. 1. [Here perh. may be
introduced the noteworthy adv. phrase tV πάσι τούτου,
with all this, Lk. xvi. 26 Lmrg. Τ Trmrg. WH for R G
ΐτη π- τ. (see im, Β. 2 d.) ; also eV πάσιν, in all things
[R. V. icilhal], Eph. vi. 16 Ltxt. TTr WH.] A similar
use occurs in speaking f. of the form in which any-
thing appears or is exhibited, where in may be repre-
sented by the Germ, als [Eng. as] ; twice so in the
N. T. : σοφίαν λαλείν ev μυστηρίω {as a mystery [here
A. V. in]), 1 Co. ii. 7; ev τω αΰτω νποδ(ίγματι mtrreiv,
Ileb. iv. 11 [(A. V. afier); al. regard this as a preg-
nant constr., the ev marking rest after motion (R. V. mrg.
into) ; cf. Kurtz or Liinem. ad loc. ; B. 329 (283) ; and
7 below] ; (διδόκαι τι iv δωριά, 2 Macc. iv. 30 ; Polyb. 23,
3, 4 ; 21), 7, 5 ; iv μ^ρίδι, Sir. xxvi. 3 ; \αμβάν(ίν τι iv
φ(ρνη, Polyb. 28, 17, 9 ; e.xx. fr. Plato are given by Ast,
Lex. Plat. i. p. 702 ; Lat. in mandatis dare i. e. to be
considered as orders, Caes. b. g. 1, 43). [Here perhaps
may be noticed the apparent use of iv to denote " the
measure or standard" (W. § 48, a. 3 b. ; Bnhdy.
p. 211) : iv μ(τρω, Eph. iv. 16 (see μίτρον, 2) ; ίφ^ρ^ν iv
(ξήκοντα etc. Mk. iv. 8 WH txt. (note the eir, q. v. B. Π.
3 a.) ; καρπο'^ορονσιν iv τριάκοντα etc. ibid. 20 Τ Tr txt.
WH txt. ; but some would take iv here distributively,
cf. Fritzsche on Mk. iv. 8.] g. of the things in {with)
which one is busied: 1 Tim. iv. 15; Col. iv. 2; iv ols,
Acts xxvi. 12; iv αίτω, in preaching the gospel, Eph.
vi. 20 ; iv ttj eo/jTj, in celebrating the feast, Jn. ii. 23
[LTrbr. iv']; iv rg δώαχη, in giving instruction, while
teaching, Mk. iv. 2 ; xii. 38 ; see ei/xi, V. 4 d. ; Passow
i. p. 910" ; [L. and S. s. v. Π. 1]. h. of that in which
anything is embodied or summed up : iv αΰτ<!> ζωη
ην, i. e. that life of which created beings were made par-
takers was comprehended in him, Jn. i. 4 ; iv τούτω τω
λόγω άνακ(φαλαιοϊ}ται, Ro. xiii. 9, (on Eph. i. 10 see ava-
κ(φαλαώω) ; πάσαν τ. avyyivnav iv ψυχη'ί^ ίβδημηκοντα
fffWf , comprised in, consisting of, seventy-liie souls. Acts
vii. 14 [W. 391 (366)]. 6. of that in wliich any per-
son or thing is inherently fixed, implanted, or
with which it is intimately connected; a. of the
whole in which a part inheres: prop., μίνιιν iv rij
ομτΓϊλω. Jn. xv. 4 ; iv ivi σώματι μίλι/ πολλά, Ro. -vii. 4 ;
fig. κρ€μάσθαι iv τινι, Mt. xxii. 40. b. of a person to
whom another is wholly joined and to whose power
and influence he is subject, so that the former maybe
likened to the place in which the latter lives and
moves. So used in the writings of Paul and of John
particularly of intimate relationship with God or with
Christ, and for the most part involving contextually the
idea of power and blessing resulting from that union ;
thus, (tvat or μίν^ιν iv τω ττατρί or iv τω θ€ω, of Christ,
Jn. X. 38 ; xiv. 10 sq. ; of Christians, 1 Jn. iii. 24 ; iv. 13,
15 s([. ; elvai or piveiv in Christ, of his disciples and wor-
shippers, Jn. xiv. 20 ; xv. 4 sq. ; μίναν iv τω υίω κ. iv τω
πατρί. 1 Jn. ii. 24 ; iv θιω, i. c. amplified and strength-
ened in the fellowship of God and the consciousness of
that fellowship, iρyάζfσθaί τι, Jn. iu. 21 ; παρρησιάζισθαι,
1 Th. ii. 2. Of frequent use by Paul are the phrafc?
iv Χριστώ, iv Χριστώ Ίησοΰ, iv κυρίω, (cf. Fritzsche, Com.
on Rom.'vol. ii. p. 82 sqq. ; W. 389 (364) ; Weiss, BibL
Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c), ingrafted as it were in
Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord:
Ro. iii. 24 ; vi. 11, 23 ; viii. 39 ; 1 Co. i. 4 ; 2 Co. iii. 14 ;
Gal. ii. 4 ; iii. 14, 26, 28 ; v. 6 ; Eph. i. 3 [Rec. om. iv] ;
ii. 6sq. 10, 13; 1 Tim. i. 14; 2 Tim. i. 1,13; u. 1 ; 1 Pet.
iii. 16; v. 10; στηκ€ΐν iv κνρίω, Phil. iv. 1 ; iva ίίιρ^θώ iv
αΰτω, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most
intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9 ; eivai iv Χριστώ
Ίησ. 1 Co. i. 30 : ol iv Xp. Ίησ. Ro. viii. 1 ; 1 Pet. v. 14 ;
κοιμάσθαι iv Χριστώ, θνήσκ(ΐν iv κνρίω, to fall asleep, to
die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in
it [W. u. s.], 1 Co. XV. 18 ; Rev. xiv. 13. Since such
union with Christ is the basis on which actions and
virtues rest, the e.xpression is equivalent in meaning
to by virtue of spiritual fellowship or union with Christ;
in this sense it is joined to the following words and
phrases : πίπίΐσμαι, Ro. xiv. 14 [W. u. s. and 390 note] ;
ncTToiOivai, Gal. \. 10; Phil. i. 14; 2 Th. iii. 4 ; παρρησίαν
ΐχ(ΐν, PhUem. 8 ; i\πίζ(ιv, Pliil. ii. 1 9 ; καΰχησιν (χ(ΐν,
Ro. XV. 17; 1 Co. -w. 31 ; άνηκαν. Col. iii. 18; το αυτό
φρονίίν, Phil. iv. 2 ; ίπακούΐΐν, Έ.\)\ι. vi. 1 [L om. Tr WH
br. iv K.]; φως, Eph. v. S ; av^ei, ii. 21 ; ζωοποΐΐ'ϊσθαι. 1
Co. XV. 22 ; ό κόποί ουκ eirrt κενός, ib. 58 ; ayios, Phil,
i. 1 ; ή-γιασμίνυς, 1 Co. i. 2; λπλίΐκ, 2 Co. ii. 17 ; xii. 19 ;
aKriSfiav \tyeiv, Ko. ix. 1 ; \ty(iv κ. μαρτύρισθαι, Eph. iv.
17. Hence it denotes the Christian aim, nature,
quality of any action or virtue; thus, eiapearov iv
κνρίω, Col. iii. 20 G L Τ Tr WH ; ηροσδίχισθαί τίνα, Ro.
xvi. 2 ; Phil. ii. 29 ; άσπάζεσθαί τίνα, Uo. xvi. 8, 22 ; 1 Co.
xvi. 19; κοπιάν, Ro. x\-i. 12 [W. 390 note; Lbr. the cl.];
γαμηθηναι, 1 Co. vii. 39 ; χαίριιν, Phil. iii. 1 ; iv. 4, 10 ;
παρακάλ(ϊν, 1 Th. iv. 1 ; πραΐστασθαί tivos, 1 Th. v. 12 ; —
or is equiv. to in things pertaining to Christ, iti the cause
of Christ: νήπιο!, 1 Co. iii. 1 ; φρόνιμος, 1 Co. iv. 10;
τταίΐ^αγωγοί, 1•5 ; οδοί μου, 17; θύραί μοι άνεΐίτ^μίνης iv
κνρίω, in the kingdom of the Lord, 2 Co. ii. 12. δικαι-
ονσθαί iv Χριστώ, by faith in Christ, Gal. Li. 1 7. Finally,
it serves as a periphrasis for Christian (whether
person or thing) : τονς ix τών Ναρκίσσου tovs όντας iv
κνρίω (opp. to those of the family of Xarcissus who were
not Christians), Ro. .xvi. 11 ; άνθρωπος iv Xp. a Chris-
tian, 2 Co. xii. 2 ; a'l iκκKησίaι a'l iv Xp. Gal. i. 22 ; 1 Th.
ii. 14 ; οι νεκροί iv Xp. those of the dead who are Chris-
tians, 1 Th. iv. 16 ; ίκ\(κτ6ς iv κ. a Christian of mark,
Ro. xvi. 13; δόκιμοί iv Xp. an approved Christian, Ro.
xvi. 10 ; δέσμιος iv κνρ. a Christian prisoner (tacitly opp.
to prisoners of another sort [W. 388 (363)]), Eph. iv.
1 ; τΓίστόϊ διάκονος iv κ. Eph. vi. 21 ; Col. iv. 7 ; διακονίει,
17; iv Xp. yewav Ttva, to be the author of one's Christian
life or hfe devoted to Christ, 1 Co. iv. 15; δίσμοί iv Xp.
bonds occasioned by one's fellowship with Christ, Phil,
i. 13 [al. connect iv Xp. here with φανερούς]; it might
be freely rendered as Chri.ilians, as a Christian, in 1 Co.
i.x. 1 sq. ; Philem. 16. iv ννεύματι (άγίω) civai, to be in
the power of, be actuated by, inspired by, the Holy Spirit :
Ro. viii. 9 (here in opp. to iv σαρκί) ; γίνεσθαι, Rev. i
h>
212
10; iv. 2; tp ττνΐνματι θίον XaXfii», 1 Co. xii. 3; tu irvtv-
ματι or (V πν. τφ άγίω or ί'κ πν- θ(οΰ sc. ων, (being) ιιι i. e.
under the power of the S|)irit, moved by the Spirit [cf. B.
330 (283 Si].) ; W. 3U0 (304 sij.)] : Mt. xxii. 43 ; Mk. xii.
36; Lk. ii. 27; 1 Co. xii. 3; Rev. xvii. 3; xxi. 10. Mpay
irot tV πν(ϋμαη άκαθάρτω, so. ων, in the power of an un-
clean spirit, possessed by one, Alk. i. 23 ; eV τω πυνηρω
κ(ΊιΘμ, to be held in the power of Satan, 1 Jn. v. 1 9. ot
(V νόμω, subject to the control of the law, Ro. iii. 19. iV
τώ 'Λ8ά/ι άποθνησκ(ΐν. through connection with Adam, 1
(\>. w. 22. c. of that in which other things are con-
tained and upheld, as their cause and origin: ev
αύτώ (i. e. in God) ζώμ€ν κτ\. in God is found the cause
why we live, Acts .wii. 28 ; ev αυτω (in Christ, as the
divine hypostatic Xoyos) ϊκτίσθη τα -πάντα, in him resides
the cause why all things were originally created, Col. i. 1β
(the cause both instrumental and final as well, for
iV αύτώ is immediately afterwards resolved into hi αίτοΰ
». eii αντόν ''(■f. W . § 5Π, G and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]); τα
■πάντα iv αντω συνίστηκΐ, Ccl. i. 1 7 ; tv Ίσααχ κΚηθησΐταί
σοι σττίρμα, Ro. i-\. 7 ; Ileb. xi. 18, fr. Gen. xxi. 12 ; d-yui-
ζ(σθαι fv with dat. of thing, Heb. x. 10, cf. 1 Co. vi. 11 ;
iv τούτω πιστ(ίομ(ν, in this lies the reason why we be-
lieve, Jn. xvi. 30, cf. 1 Co. iv. 4 ; iv ω equiv. to iv τούτω,
ότι, [in lhat'\, since: Ro. viii. 3; Ileb. ii. 18; vi. 17, [see
8 e. below]. Closely related is the use of eV d. of
that which gives opportunity, the occasion; ΐφυγιν
iv τω λόγω τούτω («η i. e. at this word ; cf. W. § 48, a.
3 c), Acts vii. 29. e. after certain verbs denoting an
affection, because the affection inheres or resides, as
it were, in that to which it relates, [cf. B. 18.ό (160 sq.) ;
W. 232 (217 sq.)]; see ΐΰ8οκ(ω, tiioiua, (νφραίνομαι. καυ-
χάομαι, χαίρω, etc. ; likewise sometimes after ΐλπίζω,
τΓίστίύω, πίστίί, (which see in their prop, places), be-
cause faith and hope are placed in what is believed or
hoped for. 7. after verbs implying motion iv w.
the dat. is so used as to seem, according to our laws of
speech, to be employed for elt ivith the ace. ; but it in-
dicates the idea of rest and continuance succeeding the
motion ; cf. Vi. § .00, 4 ; B. 3-.>8 (282) sq. : thus after
ότΓοστίλλω, Mt. x. 16 ; Lk. x. 3 ; €ΐσίρχ(σθαι, Lk. ix. 46 ;
Rev. xi. 11 [not R Tr ; WH hr. iv] ; iξ(pχfσθaι, Lk. vii.
17 ; 1 Th. i. 8, (but not after ΐρχ(σθαι in Lk. xxiii. 42,
on which pass, see .5 c. above): καταίίαίναν. Jn. v. 4 [R L ;
cf. W. § 50, 4 a,] ; initrrpiyj/ai άπ^ιθ^Ίς iv φρονησ€ί δικαίων,
that they may abide in etc. Lk. i. 1 7 ; καλύν iv (Ιρήνη, iv
Αγιασμω, iv μια iXniSi, equiv. to <tt το (tvat ήμάί {νμάί)
iv etc. : 1 Co. vii. 15 ; 1 Th. iv. 7; Eph. iv. 4 ; esp. after
τιβίναι and Ίστάναι, ivhich words see in their places. On
the same use of the prep., common in Homer, somewhat
rare in the classic auth., but recurring freq. in writ, of
a later age, see W. 1. c. ; Passow i. 2 p. 909•; [cf. L. and
S. 9. V. I. 8]. 8. Constructions somewhat pecul-
iar: a. cV Αιγύπτου so. yrj (by an ellipsis com. in Grk.
writ., cf. Passow i. 2 p. 908"; [L. and S. s. v. I. 2] ; W.
384 (359); [B. 171 (149)]): Heb. xi. 26 [Lchm.] ; out
see ΑίγνίΓΓΟΓ. b. expressions shaped by the Hebr.
idiom : άγοράζιιν iv with dat. of price (for the price is
the means by which a thing is bought [cf. W. § 48, a.
3 e.]). Rev. V. 9, («V άργυρίω, 1 Chr. xxi. 24). άλλάσ-
σίιν τι tv rm (see άλλάσσω), Ιο exchange one tliiny fur
another (prop, to change something and have the ex-
change in [cf. \V. 388 (363) note; 206 (194)]) : Ro. i.
23, 25 [here μιτήλλαξαν}. όμνυμι ϊν τινι (3 j,'3u2, cf.
Ge-seniuf, Thesaur. iii. p. 135.0; [\V. § 32, lb.; B.
147 (128)]), to swear hi/ (i. e. the name of some one
being interposed), or as it were relying on, supported
by, some one [cf. W. 389 (364)] : .Mt. v. 34-36 ; xxiii.
16, 18-22; Rev. x. 6. c. ομολογώ ev τινι after the
Syriac (»a ^?o| ["ot the Ilebr., see Fritzsche on Mt.
p. 386; B. 176 (153); W. § 32, 3 b., yet cf. § 4, a.]),
prop, to confess in one's case (or when one's cause is iil
slalre [cf.W. I.e.; Fritzsche 1. c. ; IKii'.f.*, Das Matthiius-
evang. p. 278 note* (and in Mey. on Mt. ed. 7)]), the
nature of the confession being evident from the context;
as, to con/ess one to he mi/ masler and lord, or to he in;/
worshipper: Mt. x. 32; Lk. xii. 8; [cf. IVeslcoll, Canon,
p. 305 note *]. d. on the very com. phrase iv ΰνύματί
τίνος, see όνομα (esp. 2). [e. the phrase iv ω varies in
meaning ace. to the varying sense of iv. It may be, a.
local, wherein (i. q. iv τούτω ev ω) : Ro. ii. 1 ; xiv. 22 ;
2 Co. xi. 12. β. temporal, wh'ile (cf. Π. below; W.
§ 48, a. 2): Mk. ii. 19; Lk. v. 34; Jn. v. 7; I,k. xix.
13 (Rec. «ωι, q. v.). γ. instrumental, «7iere% : Ro. xiv.
21. S. causal, Eng. in that (see Mdtzner, Eng. Gram.,
trans, by Grece, iii. 452, — concomitance passing over
into causal dependence, or the substratum of the ac-
tion being regarded as that on which its existence
depends; cf. 'in those circumstances I did so and so'),
nn the ground of this that, because : Ro. viii. 3, etc. ; see
in 6 c. above. Ace. to the last two uses, the phrase
may be resolved into iv τούτω ότι or iv τούτω ό (cf. W.
§ 23, 2 b. and b.); on its use see AV. 387 (362) note; B.
331 (284 sq.); Bnhdy. p. 211; esp. Fritzsche on Rom.
vol. ii. p. 93 sq.]
H. With the notion of Time iv marks a. periods
and portions of time in which anything occurs, in, on,
at, during : iv ttj ήμίρα, iv rij νυκτί, Jn. xi. 9 sq., etc. ;
iv Tali ήμίρακ fKfivais, Mt. iii. 1, etc. : iv σαββάτω, Mt.
xii. 2, and in many other exx. ; iv τω devriptf, at the sec-
ond time, Acts vii. 13 ; cv τω καθιξης, Lk. viii. l; iv τφ
μιταξύ, in the meantime [W. 592 sq. (551)], Jn. iv. 31;
\_fv (σχάτω χρόνω, Jude 18 Rec.]. b. before substan-
tives signifying an event, it is sometimes equiv. to at the
time o/this or that event, (Germ, hci) ; thus ev tj π-αλιγ-
yeveaia, Alt. xLx. 28 ; iv ττ/ τταρονσ'ια αντον or μου, 1 Co.
XV. 23"; 1 Th. ii. 19 ; iii. 13 [\V. § .00,5] ; Phil. ii. 12 ; I
Jn. ii. 28 ; t'l/TJ avacrraafi, Mt. xxii. 28; Mk. xii. 23 ; Lk.
xiv. 14 ; XX. 33 ; iv ttj iaxOTji σάλπιγγι, at (the sounding
of) the last trumpet, 1 Co. -xv. 52 ; iv rj αποκαλύψει of
Christ, 2 Th. L 7; 1 Pet. i. 7, 13; iv. 13. c. before in-
finitives with the article [B. 263 (226) sq. ; W. § 44, 6] ;
before the inf. present it signifies while, as: Mt. xiii. 4
(f'l- τω airelpfiv), 25 (f» τ. καθ(ύ&(ΐν Tout άνθρόαπουί) ; Mt.
xxvu". 12; Mk. vi.48; Lk. i. 21 [cf. B. 1. c.j: xxiv. 51;
^ναΎκαλιζομαι
213
evSeica
1 Co. xi. 21; Gal. iv. 18, etc.; before the inf. aorist,
when, afier that : Lk.ix.3G; xL\. 15, etc. d. within, in
the course of: ev τρισΧν ήμίραα, lit. xxvii. 40 ; Mk. xv.
29 [L Τ Trom. WIl br. tV] ; Jn. ii. 19 [Tr WH br. eV],
20; of. W. § 48, a. 2; [B. § 133, 26].
III. In Composition. Prefixed to Adjectives eV
denotes lying or situated in some place or condition,
possessed of or noted for something ; as in «κάλιο;, ίνδο-
ξο!, (μφυβο!. Prefixed to Λ'erbs it signifies 1. re-
maining, staying, continuing in some place, state, or con-
dition ; as, ϊνίίμι, ('μμίνω, ivomiu). 2. motion into
something, entering into, mingling in ; as, (μίίαίνω, €μ-
βατ(ίω, €-γκαλίω (summon to court), (γγράφω, (γκρϋπτω.
3. in €μφνσάω, €μπρηθω, €μπτυω it answers to Germ, (in
(on).
Before 0. μ, ir. φ, ψ, eV changes to €μ; before y, κ, ξ, χ, to
iy-, before λ to i\-, although this assimilation is neglected
also in the older codd. [iu χ " not often changed," Scrivener,
Collation etc. p. Ivi. ; " in some wortls assimilation is con-
stant ace. to all or at least all primary Mss. «iiile iu a com-
paratively small number of cases authority is divided. Speak-
ing generally, assiuiilation is the ride in compouuds of eV, re-
tention of ν in those of σΰ</ " (Prof.ilort). Following manu-
script authority Τ WH write ivypapuj, 4νκάΘ€το$, ΐνκαίνια,
ίνκαινίζω, ΐνκατοίΚΐω, 4νκαυχάομαί, ΐνκ^ντμίζω, (νκρίνω, eV^e-
ριπατΐ'ω, ΐίητνίω', Τ ei /κόπτω ; WIl ΐΐ/κοττ-η, ^νκυο$ : but L Τ
Τγ \V!I retain tyKaXew, eyκ\ημa, ΐyκoμβόoμaί, iyKpareta,
4yκpaτfύoμaι, iyKpar-qs, ^yxpiw, iKKoyiw (-οω), ΐμβα,ίνω, 4μ-
βά\\αί, ΐμβάπτω, ΐμβατζΰω, €μβ\€ΤΓω, ^μβριμάομαι, ΐμμαίνομαι,
fμπaLyμop■η. ΐμπa^yμόs, ^μτταίζω, €μηαίκτη$, €μπίπ\-ημι, e'jU-
ττίτττω, (μπ\4κω, £μτΓ\οΚ'ί}, 4μπορΐνομαί, ίμπορία, ^μπόριομ, ΐμ-
TropoSj ΐμπτύο], ΐμίρανη%, εμφανίζω, €μφο0θ5. ΐμφυτοί ; L Τ Tr
^yKvos ; L Tr WH ΐμμ4νω, ^μττροσθΐν ; L Tr εγγράφω,
dyKdeeros, iyKnivta, (yKaivt^w, iyKaHew, dyKaraKfinw, tyKar-
0ίΚ€ω, fyκaυχάoμaι, iyκfvrpίζω, tyKoTT-i], 4yκό^Γτω, fyKpivtii,
^/ζτΓίρίπατί'ω, ΐμ-πνίω; Τ ^μπιπράω ; Τ WH are not uniform
in iyKaKioi, «γκαταλβιττω : nor Τ in ΐμμίνω, ίμττροσθΐΐ/ ; nor
WH in iyKOnrw. — Add L Τ Tr WH aviyK\T}roi, τταρΐμ-
βίΚΚω, παρί^βολή. See Gregory in the Proleg. to Tdf . ed. 8,
p. 76 sqq. ; Hort in WH. App. p. 149 ; Bttm. in Stud. u. Krit.
for 1862, p. 179 sq. ; esp. Meisterhans p. 46.]
cv-avKoXi^o^ai : 1 aor. ptcp. ivayκa\ισάμfvos ; (mid.
i. <J. €ΪΓ TQs ayKoXas δίχομαι, Lk. ii. 28) ; to take into the
arms, embrace: τινά, Mk. ix. 36; x. 16. (Prov. vi. 10;
xxiv. 48 (33) ; Meleag. in Anth. 7, 476, 10; Plut. ; Al-
ciphr. epp. 2, 4 ; al.) *
cv-dXios, -oi-, or cWXtor, -a, -ov, [cf. W. § 11, I], (a\s
the sea), that which is in the sea, marine ; pinr. τα eVaXm
marine animals, Jas. iii. 7. (Often in Grk. writ. ; the
Epic form (Ινάλιος as old as Horn.) *
ev-avTi, adv., {in and αντί, prop, in that part of space
which is opposite), before : as a prep. foil, by a gen. [B.
319 (273)] ; tvavri Toi ueoi, Π1Π' 'JijS, before God, i. e.
in the temple, Lk. i. 8 [Tr mrg. fVnn-iox] ; in the judg-
ment of God, Acts viii. 21 G L Τ Tr WH ; [ίναυτι Φαραώ,
Acts vii. 10 Tdf. ; cf. B. 180 (156)]. (A^ery often in
Sept., and in the Palestin. Apocr. of the O. T. : but no-
where in prof, auth.) *
iv-avrtos, -a. -ov, (avrios set against), [fr. Horn, down],
prop, that which is over against ; opposite ; used 1.
primarily of place : opposite, contrary : of the wind
(Xen. an. 4, 5, 3), Mt. xiv. 24 ; Mk. vi. 48 ; Acts xxvii.
4 ; e'l ivavrlai [W. 591 (550) ; B. 82 (71)], opposite, over
uijainst (see «, I. 4), with gen. Mk. xv. 39. 2. me-
taph. opposed as an adversary, hostile, antagonistic in feel-
ing οτ act: 1 Th. ii. 15 (on which pass, [for confirmatory
reff. to anc. auth.] cf. Grimm on 3 Mace. vii. 4 [on the
other hand, see Liinem. on 1 Thess. 1. c.]) ; ό e'^ ivavrias,
an opponent [A. V. lie that is of the contrary part~\. Tit. ii.
8; evavriov ποιύν τι τιιί, to do something against one,
Acts xxviii. 1 7 ; ivuvria ττράττζίν προς το ονομά Ttvoi, Acts
.\xvi. 9. Neutr. evavriov, adv., as a prep, is constr. Λτith
the gen. [B. 319 (273)], before, in the sight of, in the pres-
ence of, one (so in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; Sept. often
for •J3'7 and •γί'2 also for ■r;»S) : Mk. ii. 12 (T Tr mrg.
WIl ϊμπροσθίν); Lk. xx. 26; Acts vii. 10 (evavriuv
Φαραώ, when he stood before Pharaoh [here Tdf. ΐναντι,
q. V.]); Acts viii. 32; Ilebraistically, in the judi/muit,
estimation, of one, Lk. xxiv. 1 9 ; [i. 6 Τ Tr WH], ((ien.
X. 9, etc.). [^To iuavTiov i. e. τουναντίον see in its place.] *
έν-άρχομαι : 1 aor. (ΐ'ηρξάμην ; to begin, φαίβ a begin-
ning : with dat. of the thing fr. which the beginning is
made. Gal. iii. 3 ; τι, Phil. i. 6 ; 2 Co. viii. 6 Lchm. ed.
min. (Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut., Lcian. ; generally with
gen. of the thing begun, as in Sir. xxxvi. 29 (26) ; x.xxviii.
16; 1 Mace. ix. 54. in Eur. with ace, of beginning sac-
rificial rites ; at length, to govern, rule, with gen. Josh,
x. 24 Sept.) [CoMP. : 7rpo-fi'ap;(o^at.] *
cvaros, see ΐννατος.
ev -γράφω, see tv, III. 2 and 3.
ένδβήϊ, -€s, (fr. ίΐ/δί'ω to lack, mid. to be in need of),
needy, destitute: Acts iv. 34. (From [Soph.], Hdt.
down ; Sept.) *
ίν-8«γμα, -rot. to, ((ν5(ίκιηιμί), token, evidence, proof,
[A. V. manifest toktny. ■> Th. i. 5 [cf. B. 153 (134)].
(Plat. Critias p. 110 b. ; Dem. 423, 13.)*
cv-Se(Kwp.i : to point out, (Lat. indicare ; Germ, anzei-
gen), fr. Pind. down ; in mid. first in Horn. ; in the N. T.
only in Mid. : [pres. c'l/Sf ι'κι/υμαι] ; 1 aor. €ν(δ(ΐξάμην; prop.
to show 07ie's self in something, .^how somethinc in one's
self[ci. B. 192 (166)] ; 1. to show, demonstrate, prove,
whether by arguments or by acts ; τί, Ro. ix. 22 (joined
with γνωμίσαι) ; Eph. ii. 7 ; Tit. ii. 10 ; iii. 2; Heb. vi.
1 1 ; with two ace, the one of the object, the other of
the predicate, Ro. ii. 15; τι evnvi, dat. of the pers., Ro.
ix. 17 (fr. Ex. ix. 16 [cf.W. 254 (238)]) ; 1 Tim. i. 16; ri
fis TO ϋνομά Tivos, Heb. vi. 10 ; την evSfi^tv ϊνΒίίκνυσθαι (as
in Plat. legg. 12 p. 966 b. ; cf. W. 225 (211)) ; eis τίνα,
2 Co. viii. 24. 2. to manifest, display, put forth : τινί
(dat. of pers.) κακά, 2 Tim. iv. 14; Gen. 1. 15, 17.*
ev-S€i|is, -fiaf, 17, {ίνδ(ίκνυμι), demonstration, proof : i.e.
manifestation, made in act, της δικαιοσύνης, Ro. iii. 25 sq. ;
της αγάπης, 2 Co. viii. 24 ; i. (|. sign, evidence, [A. V.
evident tolen'\. άπωλίϊας, Phil. i. 28. [Plat., al.] *
ev-ScKo, 01', al, τά, eleven : oi evScKa, the eleven apostles
of Christ remaining after the death of Judas the traitor,
Mt. xxviii. 16 ; Mk. xvi. 14 ; Lk. xxiv. 9, 33; Acts i. 26;
ii. 14. [From Hom. down.] *
€νθΐκατος
214
ΐρΒώμησις
ίν-8ίκατο5. -άτη, -ατον, eleventh : Mt. χχ. 6, 9 ; Rev. xxi.
20. 1 Κι (im Horn, down.] •
ί'ν-δί'χομαι ; to receive, approve of, admit, allow, (as τον
λόγον, lldt. 1, GO). Impersonally, fvht\fTai it can he
allowed, i.i possible, mui/ he, (often thus in (irk. pro.se fr.
Thiio. down) : foil, by ace. w. inf. Lk. xiii. 33, cf. xvii. 1.
[Cf. 8(χιιμ(η. lin.] *
(νβημιίω. -ώ ; 1 aor. inf. ΐνδημησαι ; {(νΒημο! one who is
anion^ hi,•- own jHiople or in his own land, one who does
not travel abroad ; opp. to ϊκδημο:), [irop. to be among
one's own people, dwell in one's own country, stay at home
(opp. to €κ8ημ(ω, απο8ημ^ω ; see those words) ; i. q. to
have a fixed abode, be at home, iv τω σώματι, of life on
earth, 2 Co. v. 6, 9 ; πράί τον κίριον, of life in heaven, ib.
8. (Rare in the classies, as Lvs. p. 114, 3ii.) *
€vSt8v(rKu> (i. ij. ivhio) [cf. B. 56 (49)]) ; iinpf. mid.
ivtb^bvσκύμηv : to put on, clothe : τίνα πορφύραν, Mk. xv.
17 L T'l'r W'll; mid. to put on one's xelf, he clothed in
[w. ace. B. 191 (1G«) ; W. § 32, 5] : Ίμάτιον, Lk. viii. 27
[R (i L Tr mrg.] ; πορφύραν, βνσσον, Lk. xvi. 19 ; (2 S.
i. 24 ; xiii. 18; Prov. xxix. 39 (xx.xi. 21) ; Judith ix. 1 ;
Sir. 1. 11 ; Joseph, b. j. 7, 2).*
ivSiKos, -ox, (δικ))), according to right, righteous, just :
Ri). iii. s ; ILb. ii. 2. (Find., Trag., Plat.) •
ίν-δόμ,ησ-ιβ ( €ν!>ομίω to build in), and Μώμησί! Γ Tr AVI I
([see Π7/. App. p. 152] &ωμάω to build), -(ω:, η, that
which is built in, (Germ. Einbau) : τοΰ τ€ίχου{, the mate-
rial built into the wall, i. e. of which the wall was com-
posed. Rev. xxi. 18; eLsewhere only in Joseph, antt. 15,
9, 6, of a mole built into the sea to form a breakwater,
and so construct a harbor.*
ίν-8ο|άζω : 1 aor. pass. (ν(&οξάσθην ; to make ti/8o^os, to
glorify, adorn with f/lnri/. ( Vulg. giurijico, chirijico) : in
pass. 2 Th. i. 1 2 ; ϊν&οζασθηναι tv τοΐί aylois, that his glory
may be seen in the saints, i. e. in the glory, blessedness,
conferred on them, 2 Th. i. 10. (Ex. xiv. 4; Ezek.
xxviii. 22, etc. ; Sir. xxxviii. 6. Not found in prof, auth.) *
IvSo^os, -ov, (βάζα), held in good or in great esteem, of
high repute ; a. illustrious, honorable, esteemed, (Xen.,
Plat., s(iq.) : 1 Co. iv. 10, (thus in Sept. for n33J, 1 S. ix.
6 ; xxii. 14 ; Is. xxiii. 8, etc. ; Sir. .\i. 6 ; xliv. 1, etc.).
b. notable, glorious: τα ϊν8οξα, wonderful deeds, [A. V.
glorious things^, Lk. xiii. 1 7 ; (for jilS"'£3J, Ex. xxxiv. 10).
c. splendid : of clothing, [A. V. gorgeous'], Lk. vii. 25 ;
figuratively i. ιχ. free from sin, Eph. v. 27.*
ϊν8\)μα, -Tof, TO. {ϊν^ύω), garment, raiment, (Cell., Lact.
indumentum) : j\It. vi. 25, 28 ; Lk. xii. 23 ; spec, a cloak,
an outer garment : Mt. iii. 4 ; xxii. 1 1 sq. (tvS. γάμου a
wedding garment); Mt. xxviii. 3; ίΊ»δ π/5ο|3άτωι/, sheep's
clothing, i. e. the skins of sheep, Mt. vii. 15 [al. take
the phrase figuratively : ' with a Iamb-like exterior '].
([Strab. 3, 3, 7]; Joseph, b. j. 5, 5, 7 ; [antt. 3, 7, 2];
Pint. .^ol. 8; Sept. for ϋ13^.) '
Εν-5υναμόω, -ώ; 1 aor. ϊι/ιδυνάμωσα; Pass., [pres. impv.
2 pers. sing, ΐνδυνάμου, 2 pers. plur. (ρδνναμονσθ^] ; impf.
3 pers. sing. (ν(5νναμηϊιτο; 1 aor. ΐνίδυναμώθην; (fr. tV
δίναμοί etjuiv. to 6 iv ίίννάμ^ϊ ών) ; Ιο make strong, endue
with strength, strengthen : τινά, Phil. iv. 13 ; 1 Tim. i. 12 ; 2
Tim. iv. 1 7 ; passively, to receive strength, be strengthened,
increase in strength : Acts ix. 22 ; ίν τινι, in anything, 3
Tim. ii. 1 ; ev κυρία, in union ivith the Lord, Eph. vi. 10;
Avith dat. of respect, τ;/ πίστα. Ro. iv. 20; άπό άσθ(ν(ίαί,
to recover strength from weakness or disease, Ileb. xi.
34 R (i ; (in a bad sense, he bold, headstrong, Ps. Ii. (Hi.)
9; [Judg. vi. 34 Alex., Aid., Conipl. ; I Clir. xii. 18
Alex.; Gen. vii. 20 Aq.]; elsewhere only in ecel. writ.).*
cv-Suvu [2 Tim. iii. ϋ] and (V δι^ω [^Ik. xv. 17 R G] ;
1 aor. f'viSvaa ; 1 aor. mid. ('νίΒυσάμην; ])f. ptc|). mid. or
pass. eVofSu/iiVos; Sept. for ϋ3^; as in the classics, 1.
trans, (prop, to envelop in, to hide in), to put on : τινά τι,
a. in a literal sense, tn put on, clothe with a garment : Alt.
xxvii. 31 ; [with τινά alone, ib. 28 L WH mrg.] ; Mk. xv.
17 RG, 20; Lk. XV. 22. Mid. to put on one's self, be
clothed with : τί[Β. 191 (106) ; cf. W. § 32,5], Mt. vi. 25 ;
Lk. xii. 22; [viii. 27 Τ WII Tr txt.] ; Mk. vi. 9; Acts
xii. 21 ; ενδίδυ/ίί'νοΓ with ace. of a thing, Mk. i. 6 ; Mt.
x.xii. 11 [B. 148 (129) ; cf. W. § 32, 2] ; Rev. i. 13 ; xv.
6; xix. 14; ί'νδκσάμίνοΓ (opp. to yu^v<{r)cZoi/ie(/ with a
body, 2 Co. v. 3, on which pass.see -ye, 3 c, (Aristot. de
anima 1, 3 fin. p. 407••, 23 ψυχην . . . ϊνδΰισθαι σώμα).
b. in metaphorical phrases : of armor fig. so called,
ίνδν€σθαί τα οττλα [L mrg. fpyti] τοΰ φωτός. Ro. xiii. 12;
την πανοπλίαν τον 6fov, τον θώρακα της δικαιοσύνης, Eph.
vi. 11, 14 ; θώρακα πίστιως, 1 Th. ν. s (with double acc,
of obj. and ])red., θώρακα δικοίοσύνην. Sap. v. 19 (18),
[cf. Is. lix. 17]; prop, όπλα, Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 18; rov θώ-
ρακα, a,n. 1,8,3). to be furnished with anything, adorned
with a virtue, as if clothed with a garment, ΐνδΰισθαί
άφθαρσίαν, άθανασίαν, 1 Co. xv. 53 sq. ; \σπ\ά•γχνα οικτιρ-
μοΰ. Col. iii. I'Jj; δΰναμιν, Lk. xxiv. 49, (Ισχύν, Is. Ii. 9;
[Iii. 1 ; δύναμιν, (νπρίπΐίαν, Ps. xcii. (xciii.) 1 ; αισχννην,
Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 26; cxxxi. (cxxxii.) 18; 1 Mace. i.
29; 8ΐ)(πιοσι;ντ;ν, Job xxix. 14; Ps. cxxxi. (cxxxii.) 9;
σωτηρίαν, ibid. 16; etc.] : SCtiv άλκήν. Horn. II. [9, 231];
19, 36; ΐννυσθαι and ίπίίνννσθαι άλκήν. II. 20, 381; Od.
9, 214 etc.; many similar exx. in Ilebr. and Arabic,
cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. 742 ; Lat. induere novum in-
genium, Liv. 3, 33) ; τόν καινον άνθρωπον, i.e. a new pur-
pose and life, Eph. iv. 24; Col. iii. 10; Ίησοϋν Χριστόν,
to become so possessed of the mind of Christ as in
thought, feeling, and action to resemble him and, as it
were, reproduce the life lie lived, Ro. xiii. 14; (ial. iii.
27; (similarly the Greeks and Romans said [cf. W. 30],
τον Ύαρκννιον ϊνδΰισθαι, Dion. llal. 11, 5, 5; ρίψας τον
στρατιώτην ivihv τον σοφιστήν, Liban. ep. 968 ; prodi•
torem et hostem induere, Tac. ann. 16, 28 ; cf. Fritzsche
on Rom. iii. p. 143 sq. ; Wieseler on GaL p. 317 sqq. ;
[Gataker, Advers. misc. 1, 9 p. 223 sqq.]). 2. in-
trans. to creep into, insinuate one's self into; to enter : iv-
δύνοντίς fh τας οΙκίας, 2 Tim. iii. 6. [CoMP. : {'π-ίνδίω.] *
(V-hva-is, -(ως, ή. (('νδίιω), a jiuttivg on, (Germ, das An-
ziehen, der Anzug): των ιματίων, 1 Pet. iii. 3; (clothing,
Job xii. 4 ; Athen. 12 ji. 550 c.; Dio Cass. 78,3; an
entering. Plat. Crat. p. 419 c.).'
Iv-iiio. see ('νδΰνω-
€ν-δώμησΊ5. see (νδόμησΐ5'
eveyicw
215
eVeuXoyecf)
ivtyKiii, see φΐρω.
ev-e'Spa, -as, η, (fr. tV and eSpa a seat), a I'jing in tcait,
ambush : Acts xxiii. 16 [Rec" τό ivebpov, q. v.] ; (vihpav
noieiv, Acts xxr. 3. (Sept. ; Thuc, sqq.) *
<vcSp€vu; (ivibpa); to lie in wait for, to lay wait for,
prepare a trap for : τινά, a person, Lk. xi. 54 [G om. kvtb.
air., Τ om. airov^ ; Acts xxiii. 21. (Thuc, Xen., sqq.;
Sept.)•
«vcSpov, -oil, TO, i. q. iveSpa, a lying iti icait, an ambush :
Acts xxiii. 16 Rec." (Sept. ; Sap. xiv. 21 ; Sir. xi. 29 ; 1
Mace. ix. 40, etc. ; not found in prof, auth.) *
6ν-ίΐλ£ω, -ώ : 1 aor. ΐνιίλησα ; to roll in, wind in : τινά
Tixt, one in anj-thing, Mk. XV. 46. (1 S. xxi. 9 ; [Aristot.
mund. 4 p. 396% 14; Pliilo], Plut., Arteniid., Philostr.,
al.)*
ίν-ίίμι ; (ei/xi) ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to be in : τα ΐνάιηα
what is within, i. e. the soul, Lk. xi. 41 (equiv. to to
ΐσωθίν ύμων, VS. 39) ; this is to be regarded as an ironi-
cal exhortation (similar to that in Amos iv. 4) adjusted
to the Pharisees' own views : ' as respects your soul (τα
ivi'ivTa ace. absol.), give alms (to the needy), and behold
all things are clean unto you (in your opinion) ' ; cf.
Bornemann ad loc. Most interpreters think τα ϊνόντα
to be the things that are within the cup and the platter [obj.
ace. after δότΕ, with ίΚ(ημ. as pred. ace.], and to be spoken
of unjustly acquired riches to be expended in charity.
[Still others (following the same construction) take τα
ivovTa (sc. boivai) in the sense of the things within your
power, (R. V. mrg. which ye can) ; cf. Steph. Thesaur.
s. v. col. 1055 a. ; but see Mey. ed. Weiss ad loc.] More-
over, in the opinion of many m, [1 Co. vi. 5 GLTTr
WH ; Jas. i. 17;] Gal. iii. 28 ; Col. iii. 1 1 etc., is con-
tracted from (vean ; but see below under evi*
€veKo (only before consonants [Rec. three times (Grsb.
twice) out of twenty-five]), and eveK(v [R G 19 times, L
(out of 26) 21 times, Tr 20, WII 18, Τ 17], or in a form
at first Ionic elvfxfp (Lk. iv. 18 [Rec. ΐν.; .xviii. 29 Τ
WH ; Acts xxviii. 20 Τ WH] ; 2 Co. iii. 10 [R G L mrg.
iv.'] ; vii. 1 2 [R G], both the last forms alike before con-
sonants and vowels [cf. s. v. N, ν ; AV. § 5, 1 d. 1 ; B. 1
(9) ; Kruger (dialects) § 68, 19, 1 ; WH. App. p. 173]),
a prep. foil, by the genitive, on account of, for the sake
of, for: Mt. V. 10 sq.; xvi. 25; xix. 29; Mk. viii. 35; Lk.
vi. 22; Acts xxviii. 20 ; Ro. viii. 36; 2Co. iii. 10; ϊνικιν
τούτου, for this cause, therefore, Mt. xix. 5 ; τοΰτωι/, Acts
xxvi. 21 ; TITOS ϊιχκα/, for what cause, wherefore. Acts
xix. 32; before τοϋ with inf. expressing purpose [W. 329
(309); B. 266 (228)], 2 Co. vii. 12; ου ("ivfKev, because,
Lk. iv. 18; cf. Meyer ad loc.
ίνίνή κοντά, see (νν€νηκοντα.
iv£Os, see ivvfos.
evep-yeia, -ar, ή, (ΐν^ργής. q. v.), working, efficiency ; in
the N. T. used only of superhuman power, whether of
God or of the devU; of God: Eph. iii. 7; Col. ii. 12;
ij (vepyeia η (ν(ργουβίνη. Col. i. 29; with a relative inter-
vening, ivfpyeiv cvipyeiav, Eph. i. 19 sq. ; κατ' ivipyfiav
(V μετρώ ivos ίκάστον μίρουί, ace. to the working Λvhich
agrees with the measure of (is commensurate with)
every single part, Eph. iv. 16; κατά τ. cvepyaav Toi
δΰνασθαι αυτόν κτλ. according to the eiEciency by which
he is able to subject all things to himself, Phil. iii. 21.
ivepy. τοϋ 'Σατανά, 2 Th. ii. 9 ; πΚάνης, the power with
which error works, vs. 11. (Sap. vii. 17, etc. ; 2 Mace,
iii. 29 ; τ^γ προνοίας, 3 Mace. iv. 21 ; not found in Sept.;
in the classics first in Aristot. ; [on ivepytia, ivepyuv,
of diabolic infiuences, cf. Miiller on Barn. ep. 19, 6].)
[Syn. see bvvapis, fin.] *
ένίργί'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. (νήργησα ; pf. ϊνήργηκα (Eph. i. 20
L Ϊ WHtxt. Trmrg.); (cVepyoj [see i'j/fpyijrj) ; 1.
intrans. to be operative, be at work, put forth power : foil,
by iv with dat. of pers., Mt. xiv. 2 ; Mk. vi. 14 ; Eph. ii.
2 ; foil, by the dat. of advantage (dat. com. ; [cf. Bp.
Lghtft. on Gal. as below]), to work for one, aid one, (Is τι,
unto (the accompUshing of) something [W. 397 (371)]:
(Is άποστολήν, unto the assum[)tion [or discharge] of the
apostolic office ; ds τά ϊθνη. i. q. fls άποστολήν [cf. W.
§ 66, 2d.; B. § 147, 8] τ£>ν iOvSiv, Gal. ii. 8. 2. trans.
to effect: τι, 1 Co. xii. 11 ; [Eph. i. 11]; ivepytiv ivip-
yaav, Eph. i. 19 sq.; τ\ iv τινι, dat. of pers., 1 Co. xii. 6
[B. 124 (109)]; Gal. iii. 5; Phil. ii. 13. 3. Mid.,
pres. ivfpyoipai ; [impf. (νηργουμην'] ; (not found in the
O. T. or in prof, auth., and in the N. T. used only by
Paul and James [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. as below]) ; it
is used only of things (cf. AV. § 38, 6 fin. ; [B. 193 (167)]),
to display one's activity, show one's self operative : [2 Th.
ii. 7 (see μυστηριον, 2 fin.)] ; foil, by ev with dat. of the
thing, where, Ro. vii. 5; iv with dat. of the condition,
2 Co. i. 6 ; iv with dat. of pers. in whose mind a thine
shows itself active, 2 Co. iv. 12 ; Eph. iii. 20 ; Col. i. 29 ;
1 Th. ii. 13; foil, by fitu with gen. of thing. Gal. v. 6.
In Jas. V. 16 ivepyoυμfvη does not have the force of an
adj., but gives the reason why the 8tησιs of a righteous
man has outward success, viz. as due to the fact that
it exhibits its activity ["works"] (inwardly), i. e. is
solemn and earnest. (The act. [and pass.] in Grk. ivrit.
fr. Aristot. down.) [On this word cf. (besides Bp. Lghtft.
on Gal. ii. 8 ; v. 6) Fritzsche and Vaughan on Ro. vii. 5 ;
EUic. on Gal. ii. 8.] *
έν€ρ7ημ.α, -Toy, τό, (e'lTpyes)), thing wrought ; effect, op-
eration : plur. [R. Λ''. workings'], 1 Co. xii. 6 ; with the ad-
dition of the epexeget. gen. δυνάμεων, ibid. 10. (Polyb.,
Died., Antonin., [al.].) *
έν«ργή5. -is, (i. q. ivepyos, equiv. to ό ων iv τω ipya
[Eng. at work]), active: Heb. iv. 12: by a somewhat in-
congruous fig., in 1 Co. xvi. 9 a θύρα ivfpy^s is spoken
of, 'an opportunity for the working of the gospel';
ivfpy. yivopai iv tlvi, in something, Philem. vs. 6. ([Aris-
tot.], Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) *
iV-toTUs, see ivtaTTjpt.
«ν-ίυλογί'ω, -ώ : 1 int. pass. ΐνίνΚογηθήσομαι; (the prep,
seems to refer to the pers. on whom the blessinc is
conferred ; cf. Germ, e insegnen) ; to confer benefits on,
to bless : pass. foil, by iv with dat. of that in which lies
the ground of the blessing received or expected. Acts
iii. 25 (where the Rec. gives τώ σπίρμ., dat. of the in-
strument ; [WH read the simple eυλoy.]) ; Gal. iii. 8,
α'έχω
216
evvevT) Kovraevvea
wliere Κβο.•""'' has the simple eiXoy. (Gen. xii. 3;
xviii. 18; xxvi. 4 Alex.; [Ps. Ix.xi. (Ixxii.) 17 Aid.,
Conijil.] ; Sir. xliv. 21 ; not found in prof, auth.) *
ίν-*'χω; impf. ίνΛχον; [pres. pass, (νίχομαι]; to have
ititliin, to hold in; a. pass, to be lield, be entangled,
be belli ensnareil, with a dat. of the thinj; in which one
is held captive, — very often in Grk. writ., both lit. (as
T^ ηάγτ/, Ildt. 2, 121, 2) and lig. (as tjyyeXi'a, Pind. Pyth.
8, G!) ; φιλοτιμία, Eur. Ipli. A. .527 ; κακώ. Epiet. diss. 3,
22, y.i): fuyiu Sov\(ias, (ial. v. 1 ; [θλί'ψισιν, 2 Th. i. 4
W'll mrg.J, (άσί/3€ΐϋΐΓ, 3 Mace. vi. 10). b. ΐνίχω τινί,
Ιο be enraged with, set one's self against, hold a grudge
against some one : Mk.vi. 19; Lk. xi. 53, (Gen. xlix. 23);
the expression is elliptical, and occurs in full (χόλο ν τινί
to have anger in one's self against another) in Ildt. 1, 118;
8, 27; 6, 119; see a similar ellipsis under προσέχω. [In
this last case the ellipsis su|>plied is τϋν vovv, W. 593
(5.')2); 15. 144 (12G); Meyer et al. ΛνοηΚΙ supply the
same after ίνίχα,ν in Mk. and Lk. 11. cc. and render the
phrase to have (an eye) on, ivalch with hostility ; but
De \Vette, Bleek, al. agree with Grimm. Many take the
expression in Lk. 1. c. outwardly, to press upon (R. V.
txt.) ; see Sleph. Thes. s. v. ; L. and S. s. v. ; Hesych.
(Vf^fi• μνησίκακοι, ey icetTai.] *
ένβά-Βί, ad\ ., (fr. ΐνθα and the enclitic 8e; Kriiger § 9,
.S, 1 and 2; [cf. W. 472 (440); B. 71 (62)]), [fr. Horn,
down] ; a. here : Lk. xxiv. 4 1 ; Acts x. 18 ; xvi. 28 ; xvii.
(i ; XXV. 24. b. hither: Jn. iv. 15sq.; Actsxxv. 17.*
fv9iv, adv., (fr. ev and the syllable θιν, indicating the
place whence), hence: Mt. xvii. 20 L Τ Tr WII ; Lk.
xvi. 26 G L Τ Tr WIL [From Horn, down.] *
ίνθυμί'ομ,αι, -οϋμαι ; a depon. pass. ; 1 aor. ptcp. eVflu-
μηθύς \ f r. Aeschyl. down, with the object now in the
gfu. now in the ace. ; cf. Matthiae § 349, ii. p. 823 ;
ivuhner § 417 Anm. 9, ii. p. 310; [.Telf § 485] ; Kniger
§ 47, 11,1 and 2 ; (fr. ΐν and θυμός) ; to bring to mind,
revolve in mind, ponder: τι, Mt. i. 20; ix. 4; to think;
to deliberate : nept nvos, about anything. Acts x. 1 9
Ree. (So also Sap. vi. 16 ; Plat. rep. 10 p. 595 a. ; Isoc.
ep. 9 p. 614, § 9 Bekk.) [Comp. : δι-(νθυμ(ομαι.~\ *
4νθνμησι$, -«ω£, ή, a thinking, consideration : Acts xvii.
29 [A. V. device~\ ; plur. thoughts : Mt. ix. 4 ; xii. 25 ;
Heb. iv. 12 [here Lmrg. sing.]. (Rare in the classics;
llippocr., Eur., Thuc, Leian.) *
«VI i. (]. fvl, the accent being thrown back, same as tV,
used adverbially [W. § 50, 7 N. 2] for ««στι, i's in, is
aniiing, has place, is present, (llom. Od. 21, 218; Thuc.
2, 40) : Gal. iii. 28 (three times) ; Col. iii. 1 1 ; Jas. i. 1 7 ;
with addition of tp ίμίν, 1 Co. vi. 5 (where Rec. (<mv) ;
in prof. auth. fr. Sojjh. and Thuc. on very often, it can
be, is possible, is kvrful ; [here some would place Jas. 1. c•].
The opinion of many [e. g. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 642 ;
Meyer on Gal. 1. c. ; cf. Ellic. ibid.] that en is a con-
tracted form for tveari is opposed by the like use of
νάρα, Sva, which can hardly be supposed to be con-
tracted from πάριστι, ά« στι ; cf. Kriiger § 9, 11, 4 ; W.
80 (77); Gotding, Lehre v. Accent etc. p. 380; [Chan-
dler § 91 7 sq. ; B. 72 (64) ; Lob. Path. Element, ii. 315].*
iviavTOs, -oC, S, a year : Jn. xi. 49, 51 ; xviii. 13 ; Acts
xi. 26 ; xviii. 11 ; Jas. v. 17 ; Rev. ix. 15 ; plur., of the
Jewish years of Jubilee, GaL iv. 10 [cf. Ellic. ad loc.];
nutfiv i'vtnvTUv, to spend a year, Jas. iv. l.'i; ίίπαξ τοϋ cvi-
αντυϋ. llcb. ix. 7 (like ίπτάκΐ! τη! ήμίρα!, Lk. xvii. 4),
[cf. W. § 30, 8 N. 1 ; Krugcr § 4 7, 10, 4] ; κατ eviavruv,
yearl•/, lleh. i\. 25; x. 1, 3, (Thuc. 1, 93; Xcn.occ.4,6;
an. 3, 2, 12) ; in a wider sense, for some fixed and defi-
nite period of tima : Lk. iv. 19 (fr. Is. Ixi. 2), on which
pass, see δ(κτϋς. [From Horn, down.] •
[Sy\. iifiavTOs. €TOi; orij^iually iv. seems to have de-
noted (yet cf. Cunius § 210) a ye.ir viewed as a cycle or
period of time, tr. as a division or sectional jiortion of time.]
ίν-{<Γτημι : ]>{. ίνίστηκα, ptcp. (νιστηκώς ( lleb. ix. 9),
and by .syncojje ίνιστώι ; fut. mid. ΐνστί^σομαι ; to place
in or among; to put in; in pf., Jilpf., 2 aor., and in mid.
(prop, as it were to stand in sight, stand near) to be npon,
impend, threaten : 2 Th. ii. 2 ; fut. mid. 2 Tim. iii. 1 .
pf. ptcp. close at hand, 1 Co. vii. 26; as often in (!rk.
writ, (in the grammarians ό ivearmt sc. χρόνος is the
present tense [of. Philo de plant. Noe § 27 τριμ€ρι)ς χρόνο!,
Off €LS τον παρΐΧηΧνθότα και €ν€στωτα καΙ μίλλοντα τίμνΐ'
σθαί πίφνκ(ν^), pre.ient : ό xatpos ό (νιστώς, lleb. Ία. 9 ; τα
(νίστώτα ο|)ρ. to τα μί\\οντα, Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 22;
ό ίν^στως αιών πονηρός in tacit contrast with τώ /leXXon-i
αΐώνι, Gal. i. 4. (Basil, ι p. 57 ad jMclct. [iii. p. 151 c. ed.
Benedict.] ώφόλιμα διΒάγματα η εφόδια προς τ€ τον (ν^στωτα
αιώνα και τον μίλΧοιττα). [Many (so It. V.) would adopt
the meaning jtnsi nt in 2 Th. ii. 2 and 1 Co. vii. 26 al.so :
but cf. Mey. on Gal. 1. c] *
ίν-ισχύω; 1 aor. ίνίσχνσα; [cf. B. 145 (127)]; 1.
intrans. to grow strong, to receive strength: Acts ix. 19
[here WH Tr mrg. ίνισχύθη'] ; (Aristot., Theophr., Diod.,
Sept.). 2. trans, to make strong, to strengthen, (2 S.
xxii. 40 ; Sir. 1. 4 ; llippocr. leg. p. 2, 26 ό χρόνοι ταντα
πάντα (νισχϋ(ΐ) ; to strengthen one in soul, to inspirit :
Lk. xxii. 43 [Lbr. WH reject the pass.].•
ivK-, see iyK- and s. v. iv, III. 3.
[4ν-μί'νω, see ΐμμίνω and s. v. iv, III. 3.]
«wttTOS or ίνατος (which latter form, supported by the
authority alike of codd. and of inscrr., has been every-
where restored by L Τ Tr WII ; cf. [s. v. N, i/; Tdf.
Proleg. p. 80] ; Kruger § 24, 2, 12; W.43; [found once
(Rev. .\xi. 20) in Rec."]). -άτη, -ατον, [fr. Horn, down],
jiinth : Rev. xxi. 20 ; the ^νάτη ωρα, spoken of in Mt. xx.
5; xxvii. 45sq. ; Mk. xv. 33sq.; Lk. xxiii. 44; Acts iii.
1 ; X. 3, 30, corresponds to our 3 o'clock in the after-
noon ; for the sixth hour of the Jews coincides with the
twelfth of the day as divided by our method, and the
first hour of the day with them is the same as the sixth
with us. [Cf. BB. DD. s. V. Hour.]•
iwi'a, oi, at, TO, [fr. Hom. down], nine : Lk. xvii. 1 7 ;
see the foil, word.•
ίννίνηκοντα-ίνν€Ό, more correctly iv(vi)KovTa ivvta (i. e.
written separately, and the first word with a single v, as
by L Τ Tr WH ; cf. [s. v. N, v; Tdf. Proleg. p. 80 ; WH.
App. p. 148]; W. 43 sq. ; Bornemann, .Scholia ad Luc.
p. 95). ninety-nine: Mt. xviii. 12sq. ; Lk. xv. 4, 7.•
εννεος
217
ΐνο-χο<!
iwcos, more correctly ivtos (L Τ Tr WH [cf. the pre-
ceding word]), -oil, 6. (it seems to be identical with ά«ωΓ
i. q. unused Svavos, άι /aos, fr. άω, αΰω to cry out, hence
without sound, mute), dumb, mute, destitute of the power
of speech, (Plat., Aristot.) : Is. Ivi. 10, cf. Prov. xvii. 28;
ivfov μη δυνάμινον λπΧησαι. of an idol, Bar. vi. (Ep. Jer.)
40; uniibie to speak for terror, struck dumb, astounded :
so (Ίστήκασαν iveoi, stood speechless ( Vulff. slahant slupe-
facti). Acts ix. 7 ; Hesych. ϊμβροντηθίίττα• e'vfoi -γίνόμ^νοι.
Cf. Allierti, Glossar. in N. T. p. 6li. In the same sense
άπηνΐώθη, Dan. iv. 16 Theodot., fr. άπ^νιάω*
cv-vevd) : impf. ivivtvov, to nod to, signifij or express hi/
a nod or sign : τινίτι, Lk. i. 62. (Arstph. in Babyloniis
fran•. 58 [i.e. 22 ed. Brunck, 16 p. 4.5S Didot] ; Lcian.
dial, meretr. 12, 1 ; with όφίαλμω added, Prov. vi. 13 ; x.
10.)•
cwoia, -as, ή, (voCr) ; 1. the act of thinking, consid-
eration, meditation ; (Xen., Plat., al.). 2. a thought, no-
lion, conception; (Plat. Phaedop. 73 c, etc. ; esp. in phil-
osoph. writ., as Cic. Tusc. 1, 24, .ϊ7 ; Acad. 2, 7 and 10 ;
Epict. diss. 2, 11, 2 sq., etc. ; Plut. plac. pliilos. 4, 11, 1 ;
Diot'. Laert. 3, 79). 3. mind, understanding, will ;
manner of thinking and feeling ; Germ. Gesinnung, (Eur.
Hel. 1026 ; Diod. 2, 30 var. ; τοιαύτην evvmav (μποι^Ιν τινι,
Isoc. p. 1 1 2 d. ; τηρησον την ΐμην βουλην και ΐννοιαν, Prov.
iii. 21 ; φνΚάσσΐΐν evvotav άγαθην, ν. 2) : so 1 Pet. iv. 1 ;
phir. with KapSias added (as in Prov. xxiii. 19), Heb.
iv. 12 [A. V. intents oi the heart], cf. Sap. ii. 14.*
ίν-νομ.θ5, -oi', (νόμος); 1. bound to the lair; hound
by the law : Χριστώ, or more correctly Χριστοί L Τ Tr
WH, 1 Co. ix. 21 [cf. B. § 132, 23]. 2. as in Grk. writ,
fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl. down, /««/«/, rei/u/a/• : Acts xix. 39
[on which see Bp. Lghtft. in The Contemp. Rev. for
1878, p. 29.5; Wood, Ephesus etc., App. p. 38].•
ϊννυχοβ, -ov, (νΰξ), nightly, nocturnal, (Ilora., Pind.,
Tra^i:.). Neut. adverbially, &y night: Mk. i. .i.), where
LTTrWII have neut. pliir. ίνηχα [cf. W. 463 (432) ;
B. § 128, 2].•
«ν-οικί'ω. -ω; fut. €νοικησω ; 1 aor. (νωκησα; Sept. for
2ψΙ ; to dicell in ; in the X. T. with ΐν τινι, dat. of pers.
in one, everywhere metaphorically, to dwell in one and
influence him (for good) : iv τινι. in a person's soul, of the
Holy Spirit, Ro. viii. 11 ; 2 Tim. i. 14 ; of ττίστκ, 2 Tim.
i. 5; [of sin, Ro. vii. 17 Τ AVII (for simple o(«ii')] ; tV
Ιμίν, in your assembly, of Christian truth. Col. iii. 16 ; €v
αΐιτοΊί. in a Christian church, of God, 2 Co. vi. 16, cf. I
Co. iii. 16 ; [al. understand the phrase in Col. and Co.
11. CO. internally, "in your hearts " : but see Meyer].*
iv-ovTci, τά, see ίν(ΐμι.
€ν-ορκ1^ω; to adjure, put under oath, solemnh/ entreat,
with two acc, one of him who is adjured, one of him by
whom he is adjured [B. 147 (128)] : 1 Th. v. 27 L Τ Tr
WII, for RG ορκίζω, [on the inf. fol'. cf. B. 276 (237)].
Elsewhere not found except once [twice] in mid. ivop-
κΐζομαι in Boeckh. Inscrr. ii. p. 42. no. 1933 : [and Joseph,
antt. 8, 15, 4 Dind., also Bekk.] ; the subst. ίνορκισμόί
occurs in Synes. [1413 b. Migne] ; once also (νορκίω in
Schol. ad Lcian. Catapl. c. 23 ίνορκω σ( κατά την πατρός;
[to which Soph. Lex. s. v. adds Porph. Adm. 208, 18
evopKOi af ei'r τό» θ€ον ίνα άπίλΟτ/ς^.'
tvOTT\s, -ητος, ή, (fr. «r, ίνας, one), unily (Aristot.,
Plut.) ; i. q. unanimity, agreement : with gen., τής πίστιως,
Eph. iv. 13 ; τοΰ πνεύματος, ib. vs. 3.*
αι-οχΚίω, -ω ; [pres. pass. ptcp. ^νοχλονμίνος] ; (ο^λί'ω,
fr. όχλος a crowd, annoyance) ; in the classics fr. Ar-
stph., Xen., Plat, on ; to excite disturbance, to trouble,
annoy, (ev, in a person ) ; in Grk. writ. foil, by both τινά
and τινι; pass, with ά.τό τίνος, Lk. vi. 18 Τ Tr WII :
absol. of the growth of a poisonous plant, fig. represent-
ing the man who corrupts the faith, piety, character, of
the Christian church: Heb. xii. 15 fr. Deut. xxix. is
after cod. Alex, which gives ϊνοχλ^ for tv χολή, which
agreeably to the Hebr. text is the reading of cod. A'at.
(Gen. xlviii. 1 ; 1 S. xix. 1 4, etc.) [CoMP. : παρ-(νοχ\ίω.~\ '
evoxos, -ov, i. q. ό ΐν^χόμ^νος, one who is held in any-
thing, so that he cannot escape; hound, under obligation,
subject to, liable : with gen. of the thing by which one is
bound, δουλϊίαί, Heb. ii. 15 ; used of one who is held by,
possessed with, love and zeal for anything ; thus των
βιβλίων, Sir. prolog. 9 ; with dat. τοις ίρωτικο'ις, Plut. ;
[on supposed distinctions in meaning betw. the constr.
w. the gen. and w. the dat. (e. g. ' the constr. with the dat.
expresses liability, that with the gen. carries the mean-
ing further and implies either the actual or the right-
ful hold.' Green) see Schdfer on Demosth. v. p. 323;
cf. W. § 28, 2 ; B. 1 70 (148)]. As in Grk. writ., chiefly
in a forensic sense, denoting the connection of a person
either with his crime, or with the penalty or trial, or with
that against whom or which he has offended; so a.
absol. guilty, icorthy ofpunisJtmetit: Lev. xx. 9, 11, 13, 16,
27; 1 Mace. .xiv. 45. b. with gen. of the thing hv the
violation of which guilt is contracted, 17»//^^ ofani/thing;
τον σώματος κ. τον αίματος τον κνρίον, guilty of a crime
committed against the body and blood of the Lord, 1 Co.
xi. 27 [see Meyer: W. 202 (190 sq.)] ; πάντων, sc. eVaX-
μάτωκ, .Tas. ii. 1 ; 01 cra;(Oi σου. Is. liv. 1 7. C. with gen.
of the crime : αιωνίον αμαρτήματος [an eternal sin^, Mk. iii.
29 L Τ Tr txt. WH : {τών βίαιων. Plat. legg. 11, 914 e. ;
κλσττης, Philo de Jos. § 37; 'κροσνλίας, 2 Mace. xiii. 6;
Aristot. oec. 2 [p. 1 349% 1 9], and in other exx. ; but much
of tener in the classics with dat. of the crime ; cf. Passow or
[L. and S.] s. v.). d. with gen. of the penalty : θανάτου.
Mk. xiv. 64 ; INIt. xxvi. 66 ; Gen. xxvi. 1 1 : αιωνίον κρίσεως,
Mk. iii. 29 Rec. : 8fσμoi [al. dat.], Dem. p. 1229, 11. e.
with dat. of the tribunal ; liable to this or that tribunal i. e.
to punishment to be imposed by this or that tribunal :
TJj κρ'ισιι, τώ σνν(Βρΐω, Mt. v. 21 sq. ; ίνοχος -/ραφή, to be
indicted, Xen. mem. 1, 2, 64; cf. Bleek, Br. an d. Hebr.
ii. 1 p. 340 sq. ; [W. 210 (1 98)]. f. by a use unknown
to Grk. writ, it is connected with els and the acc. of the
place where the punishment is to be suffered : cir τ. yiev-
vav τον ττνρός. a pregn. constr. [W. 213 (200) : 621 (577')]
(but cf. B. 1 70 (148) [who regards it as a vivid circumlo-
cution for the dat.; cf. Green, Crit. Notes (ad loc.) ' liable
as far ' in respect of penal consequence ' as the fiery G.'])
viz. to go awav or be cast into etc. Mt. v. 22.*
ίνταΧμα
218
€VTO<i
Ινπ- see ('μπ- and s. v. iy, ΠΤ. 3 fine print.
(νταλμιι, -ΤΟΓ, τό, (cWiXXo/iai [see «Ίτίλλω]), (i precept:
pliir., Mt. xv. 9; Mk. vii. 7 ; Col. ii. 22. (Is. x.\ix. 13
StdaaKOVTtt ίνταΚματα ανθρώπων ; [Job xxiii. 11,12]. Not
found in prof, aulli. ; [W. 2ϋ].) *
ενταφιάζω ; 1 aor. inf. ϊνταφιάσαι ; Ιο see ίο τα ('ντάφια
(fr. if and τάφϋί), i. e. lo prepare a body for Ourkil, by
tlie use of every requisite provision and funereal adorn-
ment, to wit, baths, vestments, flowers, wreaths, j)er-
fumes, libations, etc. ; to lay out a cori)se (Lat. poliui-
gere) : Mt. xxvi. 12; Jn. xix. 40. (Gen. 1. 2 sq. ; Anthol.
11, 125, 5; Plut. de esu earn. 1, 5, 7 mor. p. 99j c.) *
ίνταφιασμι05, -oO, 6, {(ΐταφιάζω, q. v.), preparation of a
bodyyor burial: Mk. xiv. 8 ; Jn. xii. 7. (Schol. ad Eur.
Phoen. 16.51; [Schol. ad Arstph. Plut. 1009].)*
ίν-τίλλω: (τ€λλω equiv. to τ(\(ω) ; several times in
the poets (Piud. Olymp. 7, 73) and the later writers
(ί>τίταλ«, Joseph, antt. 7, 14, 5 [but Bekk. « i/rtraXiai] ;
καθω! €ντίτα\ταί σοι, passively. Sir. vii. 31); generally,
and so always in the N. T., depon. mid. t iTe'XXofiai ; fut.
evTf XoCfLoi ; 1 aor. (ίκτίϊΚάμην ; pf. 3 pers. sing. ΐντίταΚται
(Acts xiii. 47) ; Sept. very often for njS; to order, com-
mand to be done, enjoin : nepl rtvos, Heb. xi. 22 ; ei/cTfi-
λίΐ7-ο λίγων, Mt. XV. 4 [R Τ] ; τίΐ/Ι, Acts i. 2 ; [with λι'γων
added, Mt. xvii. 9] ; with οίτω added,Acts xiii. 47; καθώς,
[Mk. .xi. G RL mrg.] ; Jn. .\iv. 31 R GT; foil, by inf. .Mt.
xix. 7; Tivl, foil, by inf. [B. § 141, 2; 27.J (237)], Jn. viii.
5 Rec.; τινί. Ίνα [cf. Β. 237 (204)], Mk. xiii. 34 (Joseph,
antt. 7, 14, 5; 8,14,2); Tm' n, Mt. xxviii. 20 ; Mk. x. 3;
Jn. -XV. 14,17; Ttvi iiepi τίνος, gen. of pers., Mt. iv. 6 ; Lk.
iv. 10, fr. Ps. xc. (xci.) 11 sq. διαθήκην ίιττίΧλ^σθαι προς
τίνα, to command to be delivered to one, Ileb. ix. 20 ; cf.
fveT(i\aTo αυτω προς λαόν αυτοΰ. Sir. xlv. 3; the phrase
(ντίΚλ^σθαι (rtvi) διαθήκην occurs also in Josh, x.xiii. 16 ;
Judg. ii. 20 ; Jer. .xi. 4 ; Ps. ex. (cxi.) 9, but in another
sense, as appears from the full expression διαθήκην, ήν
ivfTftXaTo νμ'ιν iroieiv, Deut. iv. 13. [Syn. see neKeua,
fin.]•
ivTivtiv, adv. of place, /rom this place, hence, (as «fi-
θΐυ thence) : Mt. xvii. 20 RG; Lk. iv. 9 ; .xiii. 31 ; xvi.
26 Rec. ; Jn. ii. 16 ; [vii. 3] ; .xiv. 31 ; xviii. 36 ; evrcCeev
K. evTevBev, on the one side and the other, on each side : Jn.
xL\. 18 ; Rev. xxii. 2 Rec. [ef. Num. xxii. 24 ; Dan. xii.
5 Theodot.] ; metaph. hence, i. e./rom that cause or ori-
gin, from this source, i. q. ex τούτου [see ίκ, Π. 8], Jas. iv.
1 [\V. 161 (152); B. 400 (342)].•
£ν^6υξΐ5, -(ως. ή, {(ντιτ/χάνω, q. v.), α falling in with,
meeting with, (αί toIs Ajorait ίντίύξΐΐς, Plat, politic.
p. 298 d.) ; an interview, a coming together, to visit, con-
verse, or for any other cause; that for which an interview
is held, a conference or conversation (Polyb., Diod., al.), a
petition, supplication (Diod. 16, 55 ; Joseph, antt. 15, 3,
8; Plut. Tib. Gracch. 11) ; used of prayer to God: 1
Tim. iv. 5 ; plur. [A. V. intercessions'], I Tim. ii. 1, (Plut.
Ximi. Ii ποκΐσθαιταςπροςτί) θ(ϊον (ντ(ύξ(ΐς). [Syn. le?
^ΐησις. fin.] *
tvn^os, -ov, (τιμή), held in honor, prized; hence, pre-
tious: λίθος, 1 Pet. ii. 4, 6, (Is. xxviii. 16); honorable.
noble, Lk. xiv. 8 ; nvi, dear to one, Lk. vii. 2 ; ΐντιμορ
?χ(ΐν τινά to hold one d<ar or in honor, to value highly,
Phil. ii. 29. [(So| h.. Plat., al.)]*
ίντολή, -ής, ή, (fi /τίλλω OF ίντίλλομαι, q. v.), fr. Find,
and lldt. down ; Sept. often for niy3, in the Pss. the
plur. ί'ντολαί also for D"11p3 ; an order, command, charge,
precept ; 1. univ. a charge, injunction : Lk. xv. 29 ;
(ντυΚήν \πμβάν€ΐν πηρά τίνος. Jn. χ. 18 ; ττρός τίνα. Acts
xvii. 15 ; Xafi€lv ίντολάς π(ρι τίνος, Col. iv. 10 ; that which
is prescribed to one by reason of his cillice, (ντολήν (χ(ΐ»
foil, by inf., Ileb. vii. 5; ΐντολήν δώόναι τινί, Jn. xiv. 31
L Tr WII ; with τί Λπη added, of Christ, whom (iod
commanded what to te.ach to men, Jn. -xii. 49 ; ή (ντο\ή
αΐτον, of God, respecting the same thing, vs. 50. 2.
a commandment, i. e. a prescribed rule in accordance with
which a thing is done; a. univ. ϊνταΚή σαρκική [-ίνη G
L Τ Tr WII], a precept relating to lineage, llcb. vii. 16 ;
of the Mosaic precept concerning the priesthood, Ileb.
vii. 18 ; of a magistrate's order or edict : eWoXijc bihuvai,
ti/a, Jn. xi. 57. b. ethically; a. used of the command-
ments of the Mosaic law : ή ε'ιτολή τοΰ θ(οϋ, what God
prescribes in the law of Moses, Mt. .xv. 3, (and R G in
vs. 6) ; Mk. vii. 8 sq. ; esp. of particular precepts of this
law as distinguished from ό νύμος (the law) their body
or sum : Mt. xxii. 36,38; Mk. x. 5 ; .\ϋ. 28sqq. ; Ro. vii.
8-13 ; xiii. 9 ; Eph. vi. 2 ; Heb. ix. 19 : κατά τ. ίντολήν,
according to the precept of the law, Lk. xxiii. 5i; ; phir.,
Mt. [v. 19] ; xxii. 40; Mk. x. 19: [Lk. xviii. 20]; τηρ(Ίν
τας ζντολάς, Mt. .vi.x. 17 ; πορΐνίσθαι iv τ. ΙντοΚα'ις, Lk. i.
6 ; ό νόμος των eWoXSi', the law containing the precepts,
Eph. ii. 15 (see δόγμα, 2). β. of the precepts of Jewish
tradition : €ΐτολαϊ ανθρώπων, Tit. i. 14. γ. univ. of the
commandments of God, esp. as promulgated in the Chris-
tian religion: 1 .Tn. iii. 23; iv. 21 ; v. 3 ; ΐντολήν διδόναι,
1 .Τη. iii. 23 ; f ιτολήκ (χ(ΐν, Ίνα, 1 Jn. iv. 21 ; ίντο\ήν "Καβύν
πάρα τον πατρός, 2 .Τη. 4 ; τήρησις €ντο\ών θίον, 1 Co. vii.
19 ; τηρύν τας ίντολας αυτόν, 1 Ji\. ii. 3 s(p ; iii. 22, 24 ; v.
2 [liere L Τ Tr W'll ποιώμιν], 3 ; or τοΰ θ(οϋ. Rev. ,xii.
17; .xiv. 12; ποκ^ντας ίντοΧάς αϊιτον, Rev. xxii. 14 RG;
π(ριπατ(ϊν κατά τας ΐντολας αϋτον, 2 Jn. 6 ; of those
things which God commanded to be done by Christ, Jn.
XV. ΙΟ' ; of the precepts of Christ relative to the orderly
management of affairs in religious assemblies, 1 Co. xiv.
37 R G L Tr WIT ; of the moral precepts of Christ and
his apostles : ϊντολήν διδόναι, ίνα, Jn. xiii. 34 ; ('ντολήν
γράφ(ΐν. 1 Jn. ii. 7 sq. : [2 .In. 5] ; τας ίντολάς τηρύν, Jn.
[xiv. 15] ; xv. 10"; ϊχ^ιν τας evr. κ. τηριΐν αυτός, "habere
in memoria et servare in vita " (Λ ugustine), Jn. xiv. 21 ;
αϋτη ϊστίκ ή evT. 'να, Jn. XV. 1 2, cf. 1 Jn. iii. 23. ή {ντολή,
collectively, of the whole body of the moral precepts of
Christianity : 1 Tim. vi. 14 ; 2 Pet. ii. 21 ; iii. 2, (thus
η eWoX^ ToC θ(ον, Polyc. ad Phil. 5).•
ivTOinos, -ov, (το'ποί), a dweller in a place ; a resident or
native of a place : Acts xx•. 12. (3oi>fi. ΓΓι, r i^c, al.) •
•p^, adv., ([fr. eV], opp. to (κτ^•ς}~ >ιΛΜη, inside : with
gen. cWof νμών, irithin ynu, i. e. hi 'he midst of you, Lk.
xvii. 21, (iWof αυτών, Xen. an. 1, 10, 3 [but see the
pass.]; (VTos τούτων, Hell. 2, 3, 19; al.) ; others, within
εντρΐττω
219
evatiriop
you (i. e. in your souls), a meaning which the use of the
word permits (eWor μου, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 4 ; cviii.
(cix.) 22, etc. ; [Hippol. ref. haer. 5, 7. 8 ; Petrus Alex,
ep. can. 5]), but not the context ; το ίΐτόί, the inside,
Mt. xxiii. 26.*
ίν-τρί'ιτω ; [Mid., pres. ίντρίττομαι ; impf. ϊνΡΓρ^πόμην] ;
2 aor. pass, ίν^τράπην ; 2 fut. mid. [i. e. pass, with mid.
force, B. 52 (45)] Ιντραπησομαι ; prop, to turn about, so
in pass, even in Horn. ; τιι>ά, prop, to turn one upon him-
self, i. e. to shame one, 1 Co. iv. 14 (Diog. Laert. 2, 29 ;
Ael. V. h. 3, 17 ; Sept.); pass, to be ashamed: 2 Th. iii.
14 ; Tit. ii. 8. Mid., τικά, to reverence a person : Mt.
xxi. 37 ; Mk. xii. 6 ; Lk. xviii. 2, 4 ; xx. 13 ; Ileb. xii. 9 ;
Ex. X. 3; Sap. ii. 10 ; Polyb. 9, 36, 10; 30, 9, 2 ; eeois,
Diod. 19, 7 ; so in Grk. writ., esp. fr. Plut. on ; the earlier
Greeks said ίρτρίπισθαί ηνος ; so also Polyb. 9, 31, 6 ; [of.
W. § 32, 1 b. a.; B. 192 (166)].*
ίν-τρί'φω : [pres. pass. ptcp. en-pc<^o/i€vor] ; to nourish
in: Ttva Tivi, a person in a thing; metaph. to educate,
form the inind : τοΪγ λόγοίί της πίστ€ω!, 1 Tim. iv. 6 ; τοΪϊ
vonois, Plat. legg. 7 p. 798 a.; Pliilo, vict. offer. § 10 sub
fin.; Tois iepo'is -γράμμησι, Phil. leg. adGai. § 29 sub fin.*
€ΐ^τρο|ΐοβ, -ον, {τρόμο:, cf. ίμφοβος), trembling, terrified :
Acts vii. 32 and xvi. 29 ϊντρ. yt i/o/ifvor, becoming tremu-
lous, made to tremble; Heb. xii. 21 [Tr mrg. WH mrg.
c(cT/)o^o9, q. V.]. (Sept. ; 1 Mace. xiii. 2 ; Plut. Fab. 3.) *
ev-Tpoinj, -ήί, ^7, (evrpenw, q. v.), shame : πρόί ίντροπην
ΰμΊν λί'γω [or λαλώ], to arouse your shame, 1 Co. vi. 5 ;
XV. 34. (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 26; Ixviii. (IxLx.) 8,20;
respect, reverence. Soph., Polyb., Joseph., al.) *
έν-τρνψάω, -a; (see τρυφάω and τρνφη) ; to live in lux-
ury, live delicately or luxuriously, to revel in : ev ταΐί
άπάταΐ! [L Tr txt. WH mrg. άγάπαις, see άγάττη, 2] αϊτών,
(on the meaning see απάτη), 2 Pet. ii. 13 [cf. W. § 52, 4,
5]. (Xen. Hell. 4, 1, 30; Diod. 19, 71 ; also to take de-
light in : ev ayado'it. Is. Iv. 2 ; with dat. of thing, 4 Mace,
viii. 7 ; Hdian. 3, 5, 4 [2 ed. Bekk.].) *
ίν-τνγχόνω ; 2 aor. ίνίτνχον ; generally with a dat.
either of pers. or of thing; 1. to light upon a person
or α thing, fall in with, hit upon, a person or a thing; so
often in Attic. 2. to go to or meet a person, esp. for
the purpose of conversation, consultation, or supplication,
(Polyb., Plut., Aelian, al.) : with the addition irepi twos,
gen. of person, for the purpose of consulting about a per-
son. Acts XXV. 24 [R. V. made suiV] ; to make petition:
€V€Tv\riv τω κνρίω κα\ ΐ^ξηθην αυτόν. Sap. viii. 21 ; €νίτνχον
τω βασΐΚΐΙ την άτΐοΚνσιν . . . αιτούμενοι, 3 Macc. vi. 37 ;
hence, to pray, entreat : νπίρ with gen. of pers. to male
intercession for any one (the dat. of the pers. approached
in prayer being omitted, as evident from the context),
Ro. viii. 27, 34 ; Heb. vii. 25, (foil, by nepi with gen. of
person, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 56, 1); rm κατά τινοί, {to
plead with one against any onel, to accuse one to any one,
Ro. xi. 2, cf. 1 Macc. viii. 32 ; x. 61, 63 sq. ; xi. 25. (Not
found in Sept.) [Comp. : νπ(ρ-(ντνγχάνω.'] *
ίν-τυλ£<Γ(Γω : 1 aor. (νιτνλιξα ; pf. pass. ptcp. evreTv'Kty-
fifVos; to roll in, wrap in : τίνα aivhavi, Mt. xxvii. 59 (iv a.
Tr, [ev] a. WH) ; Lk. xxiii. 53 ; Ev. Nicod. c. 11 fin. to
roll up, vrrap togetner : pass. Jn. xx. 7. (Arstph. Plut.
692; nub. 987; Athen. 3 p. 106 sq.) *
€ν-τνΐΓΟω, -ώ : pf. pass. ptcp. ΐντιτνπωμένοί ; to engrave,
imprint (a figure) : [foil, by dat. (Rec. with ev)], 2 Co. iii.
7 [cf. W. 634 sq. (589)]. ( Aristot., Die Cass., Plut., and
in earlier frag, in Athen.)*
έν-υβρίζω : 1 aor. ptcp. (ννβρίσαί ; to treat with con-
tumely : Heb. X. 29. (From Soph, on.) *
ίνυίΓνιάζω (finmvtov,q. v.) : to dream (Aristot. h. an. 4,
10, etc.), and dep. (ννπνιάζομαι (Hippocr., Plut. Brut. c.
24) ; so always in the Bible, for D^n, with fut. pass.
ΐννπνιασθησομαί, and com. with aor. pass, ΐννττνιάσθην,
more rarely mid. ίννπνιασάμην (Gen. xxxvii. 9 ; Judg. vii.
13) ; (vvirvta ίνυπνιάζ^σθΜ (in Sept. for Π1Πί7Π π'^Π),
to dream (divinely suggested) dreams : Acts ii. 1 7 fr.
Joel iii. 1 (ii. 28); but the reading emnviois (ΐνυπνιά-
ζίσθαι) was long ago restored, which reading also cod.
Alex, gives in Joel. Metaph. to be beguiled with sensual
images and carried away to an impious course of conduct :
Jude 8.*
eviirviov, -ου, τό, {(v and ΰττνος, what appears in sleep ;
fr. Aeschyl. down), a dream (Lat. insomnium), a vision
which presents itself to one in sleep : Acts ii. 1 7, on
wliich pass, see ίνυπνιάζω. (Sept. for Οί4π.)*
ενώπιον, neut. of the adj. e'vώπtoc, -ov, (i. q. ό ev ώπΊ &v,
one who is in sight, Theocr. 22, 152 ; Sept. Ex. xxxiii.
11 ; άρτοι eVώπ^oι, Ex. xxv. 29) ; used adverbially it gets
the force of a preposition [W. § 54, 6 ; B. 319 (274)],
and is joined with the gen. (hardly to be found so in any
prof, auth.), before, in sight of any one ; time and again in
Sept. for "J';'3 and 'JsS, also for njj and IJjS ; among
N. T. writ, used most freq. by Luke and the auth. of the
Rev., but never by Matthew and Mark. It is used
1. of occupied place; in that place which is before, or over
against, opposite, any one and towards which another turns
his eyes; a. prop.: eivat ίνώττ. twos. Rev. i. 4; vii. 15;
[xiv. 5 Rec] ; so that eivai must be mentally supplied
before ενώττιον, Rev. iv. 5 sq. ; viii. 3 ; ix. 13 ; after στηναι.
Acts X. 30 ; (οτηκίναι, Rev. vii. 9 ; viii. 2 ; xi. 4 ; xii. 4 ;
XX. 12; παριστηκίναι, Lk. i. 19; Acts iv. 10; ίστάναι.
Acts vi. 6; καθήσβαι, Rev. xi. 16; θύρα άν^ω-γμίνη ev.
Ttvoi, i. q. a door opened for one (see θύρα, c. y. [B. 1 73
(150)]), Rev. iii. 8 ; after verbs signifying motion to a
place: ηθϊναι, Lk. v. 18 ; αν^βαίν^ιν. Rev. viii. 4 ; /3άλλeιv,
Rev. iv. 10; πί7π■eιv or neoelv (of worshippers), Rev.
iv. 10; V. 8; [vii. 11] ; προσκυν^Ίν, Lk. iv. 7 ; Rev. iii. 9 ;
XV. 4, [cf. B. u. s.; 147 (129); W. 214 (201)]. b. in
metaphorical phrases after verbs signifying motion :
βαστάζίίν το όνομα . . . ίνώπιον ίθνων (see βαστάζω, 3),
Acts ix. 15; σκάνδαλα (3άλλe^v (νώπ. Tivos, to cast stum-
bling-blocks (incitements to sin) before one. Rev. ii. 14 ;
after προίρχισθαι, to go before one like a herald, Lk. i.
1 7 ; [after προπορίνισθαι, Lk. i. 76 WH]. in phrases in
which something is supposed to be done by one while
standing or appearing in the presence of another [cf.
B. 176 (153)] : after άρν(Ίσθαι, Lk. xii. 9 (Lchm. ϊμπρο-
σθ(ν) ; [άπαμν(Ίσθαι, ibid.] ; όμoλoyeΐv, Rev. iii. 5 [Rec.
(ξομ.']; κατηγορών. Rev. xii. 10; [adfiv, Rev. xiv. 3];
Ενω
ΙΌ)?
220
€ξά•γαι
καυχάσθαι, to come before God and "jlory, 1 Co. i. 29 ;
SiKOioiv iavTOv, Lk. xvi. ΙΛ. c. i.i|. »//(«/ (with) ; i» the
soul of any one : χαρά ylvcrat ίνωηιον των αγγίλων, Lk,
XV. 10 [al. understand this of God's joy, by reverent
suggestion de.-icribetl as in the presence of the angels ; cf.
fv ovp. \^. 7] ; tarat σοι δυ^α (νώττ. των σννανακίΐμίνων, I^k.
xiv. 10 [al. take this outwardly; cf. 2 below]; after
verbs of remembering and forgetting : fir μνημό-
σννον fvo>n. ^L•'!! 'ΐτ ^V\l €μπροσθ€ν^ τον 6fov, .Vc(s x. 4;
μνησθηναί ΐνωπ. Τ- ^foO, Acts .\. 31 ; Kev. xvi. 1 !J ; fπtλf-
Χησμίαον (νώπ• τ. θ(θϋ, l.k. xii. (i [ef. B. § 134, .'!]. 2.
be/ore one's eyes ; in one's presence and sight or heariny ;
a. prop. : φαγ(ΐν ivim. nvos, Lk. xxiv. 43 ; this same
phrase signifies a living together in Lk. xiii. "iG (2 S.
xi. 13; 1 K. i. 2.5) ; σημίΐα noiflv, Jn. xx. 30 ; άνακρίνίΐν,
Lk. xxiii. 14 ; €νώπ. πολλών μαρτύρων, 1 Tim. vi. 12 ; add
Lk. [v. 25] ; viii. 47 ; Acts xLx. 9, 19 ; x.wii. 35 ; [1 Tim.
V. 20]; 3 Jn. 6; Kev. iii. 5; [xiii. 13; xiv. 10]. b.
melapli. : πίστινίχι ίΐ/ώπιοκτού θ(οϋ, have faith, satisfied
with this that it is not hidden from the sight of God,
Ro. xiv. 22; apapTUvttv iv. tivos {»*:c άμαρτάνω ad fin.),
Lk. XV. 18, 21 ; esp. in affirmations, oaths, adjurations:
ίνώπιον τοΐι θιοϋ, τον κνρίου, etc.. Gal. i. 20 ; 1 Tim. v. 21 ;
vi. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 14; iv. 1. Hence those are said to do
something in the presence of one who have him present
to their thought, who set him before their mind's eve :
προωρώμην [προορ. L Τ Tr Wil] τϋ»* κνριον (νώπ. μου.
Acts ii. 25; ταπανονσθαι ίν. τοϊι κνρίου, -las. iv. 10, (Sir.
ii. 17). c. at the instance of any one, //.'/ his power and
attthority: Rev. xiii. 12, 14; xix. 20. d. hefore the eyes
of one, i. e. if he turns his eyes thither : Heb. iv. 1 3 (where
ovK άφανηι (νώπ. αυτοϋ is explained by the following
γυμνά . . . τοις όφθάλμοΊς αντον ; cf. Job xxvi. 6 γυμνο! ό
α8ης ^νώπίυν ηντον, lirfari: hui tool:, to his view^. e. he-
fore one i. e. ha lookiny on and judrjing, in onf's judg-
ment [W. 32; I?. 172 (150) ; § 133, 14] : ίφάνησαν ίνώπ-
αυτών ώσιΊ ληρυς, I^k. xxiv. 11 (cf. Greek Ήρακλ(18η
ληρος πάντα 8οκ(1 fivai) ; so esp. f μώπιοι/ του θ(ον, τοΐι
κνρίου, after the foil, words : τά άριστα, 1 Jn. iii. 22 ;
β8(λιτγμα, Lk. xvi. 15; SiKatos, Lk. i. 6 (T Tr Wll εναν-
τίον); Acts iv. 19; ^ικαιοΰσθαι, Ro. iii. 20; fiapcaros,
Heb. xiii. 21 ; deis. .Vets viii. 21 Rec. ; καλόΐ', άπό8(κτον^
1 Tim. ii. 3 ; v. 4 ; Ko. xii. 17 ; 2 Co. viii. 21 ; piyas, Lk.
i. 15; πολυτίλίς. 1 Pet. iii. 4; πίπλημωμίνοί, Kev. iii. 2;
άρίσκαν, .\(ls vi. 5 (Deut. i. 23 [Alex.]; 2 S. iii. 36;
[W. § 33, f.]) ; in the sight of God i. e. God looking on
and approving : Lk. i. 75 ; Acts x. 33 ; 2 Co. iv. 2 ; vii. 12.
in the sight of God, or with God: evpioKdv χάριν ([Π Xi'O
often in the O. T.), to be approved by God, please him,
Acts vii. 4().•
Ένώί (tyiJN [i. e. man, mortal]), Enos, son of Seth
(Gen. iv. 26) : Lk. iii. 3.S.•
4νωτ(ζομαι : in bibl. writ, dejion. mid. ; 1 aor. impv. 2
pers. plur. ϊνωτίσασθι ; i. q. ev ώτίοις Βίχομαι (Ilesych.),
to receive into the ear ; give ear to : τί, Acts ii. 14 ; Sept.
for pixn ; elsewhere only in eccl. and Byzant. writ.,
and in these also as depon. pass. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis
le.xicc. p. 693 sq. ; [Stur:, Dial. Alex. p. 166; W. 33].*
Ένώχ [AVI I Ένώχ, .see their Tntr. § 40S], ('Άΐ'ω;^»^,
-on, ό, Joseph, antt. 1, 3,4 ; Ilebr. ^ύΐΊ initiated or initi-
ating, [cf. B. D. s. V.]), Enoch, father of Methuselah (Lk.
iii. 37) ; on account of his extraordinary piety taken up
alive by God to heaven ((ien. v. 18-24; Heb. xi. 5 ; [cf.
.Sir. xliv. 16; Joseph, antt. 1, 3, 4]) ; in the opinion of
later .)cvrs the most renowned antediluvian prophet; to
whom, towards the end of the second century hefore
Christ, was falsely attributed an apocalyptical book
which was afterwards combined with fragments of other
apocryphal books, and preserved by the Fathers in
(ireek fragments and entire in an Ethiopie transla-
tion. This translation, having been found among the
Abyssinian Christians towards the close of the last cen-
tury, has been edited by Richard Laurence, archbishop of
Casliel (" Liliri Henoch versioaethio|)ica." Oxon. 18.'is),
and by A. Dillmann (" Liber Henoch, aethiopice." Lips.
1S51); it was translated into English by R. Laurence
(1st ed. 1K2I ; 3d ed. 1838 [reprinted (Seribners, N. Y.)
1«83; also (with notes) by G. H. .Schodde (Andover,
1882)], into German by A. G. Hoffman (Jen. 1833-38, 2
vols.) and by A. Dillmann (Lips. 1853) ; each of the last
two translators added a commentary. From this book is
taken the ' pro|)hecy ' in Jude 14 sq. ; [cf. B.D. (Am. ed.),
also Diet, of Chris. Biog., s. v. Enoch, The Book of].*
t|, see (K.
ί'ξ, οί, al, τά, indecl. numeral, six: Mt. xvii. 1; Lk.
xiii. 14, etc.
(ξ-αγ-γελλω: 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. plur. (ξ<ιγγ(ΐ\ητ(:
first in Horn. II. 5, 390; properly, to tell out or firth
[see (K, VI. 4], to declare abroad, divulge, publish: [Mk.
xvi. \VH (rejected) 'Shorter Conclusion']; with He-
braistic emphasis, to make known by praising or proclaim-
ing, to celebrate, [A. V. shoic furth~^\ 1 Pet. ii. 9. (For
"IDD, Ps. Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 28; Ixxviii. (Lxxix.) 13, cf. Sir.
xhv. 15.)•
ίξ-αγοράξω : 1 aor. (ξηγόρασα ; [pres. mid. εξαγοράζο-
μαι] ; 1. ''* redeem i. e. by payment of a price to re-
cover from the power of another, to ransom, buy off, [<-f.
eV, ^^. 2]: prop, ^ίραπαιχίδα, Diod. 36, 1 p. 530; metaph.
of Christ freeing men from the dominion of the ]M()s:iiil
law at the price of his vicarious death (see αγοράζω.
2 b.), Tira, Gal. iv. 5 ; with addition of ex τής κατάρα! τοΟ
νόμου. Gal. iii. 13. 2. to buy up, Polyb. 3, 42, 2; Plut.
Crass. 2; Mid. τί, to buy up for one's self, for one's use
[W. § 38, 2 b. ; B. 192 (166 s(|.)] : trop. in the obscure
phrase ΐξαγ. τον καιρόν, Eph. v. 1 6 and Col. iv. 5, Avhere
the meaning seems to be to make a vise and sacred use
of every opportunity for doing good, so that zeal and
well-doin" are as it were the purchase-money by which
we make the time our own ; (act. (ξαγο(>άζ(ΐν καιρόν, to
seek [to gain lime (A. V.) i. e.] delay, Dan. ii. 8 ; mid.
with ace. of thing, ' by ransom to avert evil from one's
self ', ' to buy one's self off or deliver one's self from
evil ' : hia μιάί ωραί την αΐώνιον κόλασιν (ξαγοραζόμίνοι, of
the martyrs, Mart. Polyc. 2, 8).'
ί|-όγω: 2 aor. e^^yayoi/; Sept. often for Χ'ΧΙ'Π; to lead
out [cf. (K, yi. 1] ; Tica (the place whence being sup
έξαφέω
221
ϊζατΓοστέΧΚω
plied in thought), Mk. xv. 20 (of the city to punishment
[but Lchm. ayovaiv]) ; Acts xvi. 37, 39; v. 19 and xvi.
39 (from prison) ; Acts vii. 36 (from Egypt) ; Jn. x. 3
(sheep from the fold); with ϊξω added [in RGLbr.],
Lk. xxiv. 50 ; ?^ω τηί κώμης, Mk. viii. 23 R G L Tr mrg.
[cf. W. 003 (5C1)]; with the addition of ex w. gen. of
place, Acts vii. 40 ; xii. 1 7 ; xiii. 1 7 ; Ileb. viii. 9 ; foil,
by (If with ace. of place, Acts xxi. 38.*
e'J-aipt'w, -ώ : 2 aor. impv. e^eXf; Mid., [pres. ptcp.
ίξαφούμινοί} ; 2 aor. (ξαλόμην and in Alex, form (L Τ
TrWli) (ξίίΚάμψ (Acts vii. 10 [so Grsb.] ; xii. 11 [so
Grsb.] ; xxiii. 27; see refi. in [α'φίω and] άπίρχομαί),
inf. (ξίΧίσθαι (Acts vii. 34) ; Sept. usually fur '7'ΪΠ ; to
take out [cf. eV, VI. 2] ; 1. to pluck out, draw out, i. e.
to root out : TOf όφθαλμόν, Mt. v. 29 ; xviii. 9. 2. Mid.
a. to choose out (for one's self), select, one person from
many : Acts xxvi. 1 7 (so for "(Π3 in Is. xlix. 7 [but there
the Sept. has ίξίΧΐξάμην; perh. Is. xlviii. 10 is meant]
and sometimes in Grk. writ.; first in Ilom. Od. 14, 232)
[al. refer Acts 1. c. to the next head ; (see Ilackett ad
loc.)]. b. to rescue, deliver, (prop, to cause to he res-
cued, but the middle force is lost [cf. W. 253 (238)]) :
τινά, Acts vii. 34 ; xxiii. 27 ; rwa €κ τιι /os, Acts vii. 10 ;
xii. 11 ; Gal. i. 4 ; (Ex. iii. 8, etc. ; Aeschyl. suppl. 924;
Ildt. 3, 137; Dera. 256, 3; Polyb. 1, 11, 11).*
(ξ-α(ρω: fut. ΐξαρώ (1 Co. v. 13 Rec.) ; 1 aor. impv. 2
pers. plur. e^apare ( ib. G L Τ Tr WIl ) ; 1 aor. pass. i^r}p-
θην, to Ιίβ up or take awaij out of a, place; to remoce [cf.
ίκ, VI. 2] : Tiva e/t, one from a company, 1 Co. v. 2 Rec.
[see alpia, 3 c] ; vs. 13 fr. Deut. [xix. 19 or] xxiv. 9.*
ί'ξ-αιτί'ω, -5> : 1 aor. mid. ^ξητησάμην ; to ask from, de-
mand of [cf. ex, VI. 2]. Mid. to ask from (or beg) for
one's self: τινά, to ask that one be given up to one from
the power of another, — in both senses, either for good,
to beg one from another, ask for the pardon, the safcti/, of
some one, (Xen. an. 1, 1, 3 ; Dem. p. 546, 22 ; Plut. Per.
32; Palaeph. 41, 2); or in a bad sensed, for torture, for
/iunishment, (Plut. mor. p. 417 d. de defect, orac. 14; in
prof. auth. often with this sense in the act.) ; so of Satan
asking the apostles out of the power and keeping of God
to be tried by afflictions (allusion being made to -Job i.
1-12) : Lk. xxii. 31 (Test. xii. Patr. p. 7-.'9 [test. Benj.
§ 3] cav τα πνΐνματα τον BfXtnp ei$ ττασαν πονηρίαν 6X1-
ψ(ω^• (^αιτησωνται νμάς).*
ί'ξ-αίφνηϊ [\\ II (ζίφνη! (exc. in Acts xxii. 6), see
their App. p. 151], adv., {αίφνης, αφνω, άφνω! suddenly),
of a sudden, suddenly, uncxpectcdli/ : Jlk. xiii. 36; Lk.
ii. 13; ix. 30; Actsix. 3; .xxii. 6. (Horn, etal; Sept.)*
«ξ-ακολουθβ'ω, -ω: fut. ίξακολονθήσω; 1 aor. l)tcp. ϊξα-
κολοΐ)βί)(Τίΐί ; Ιο follow out or up, tread in one's steps ; a.
T^ όδώ Tivor, metaph., to imitate one's way of acting :
2 Pet. ii. 15, cf. Is. Ivi. 11. b. to follow one's author-
ity: μΰβοΐί, 2 Pet. i. 16 ; Joseph, antt. prooem. 4, (άρχψ
yots, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 14, 1 ; δυσΐ βασιλ(ί}σι. Test. xii.
Patr. p. (;43 [test. Zeb. § 9]). c. to comply with, yield
to : aafXyfiais [Rec. άπω\(1αις^. 2 Pet. ii. 2, (πνιΰμασι
ττΚάνηί, Test. xii. Patr. p. 665 [test. Napht. § 3 ; τοΪγ
νονηροις διαβουλίοκ, xii. Patr. p. 628 test. Is. § 6] ; cf.
also Am. ii. 4 ; Job xxxi. 9 ; Sir. v. 2). Among prof,
auth. Polyb., Plut. occasionally use the word; [add Dion.
Hal. de comp. verb. § 24 p. 188, 7 ; Epictet. diss. 1, 22,
16].*
{'ξακόσ-ιοι, -αι, -α, six hundred: Rev. [xiii. 18] ; xiv. 20.*
£ξ-αλ€(φω : fut. (ξaλfίψω^, 1 aor. ptcp. (ξαλιίψας; 1
aor. pass, infin. (ξαλαφθηναι [(Wll -λιφθηναι ; see their
App. p. 154, and s. v. 1, t below)] ; 1. {ΐξ- denoting
completeness [cf. ck, VI. 6]), to anoint or ivash in
every part, hence to besmear : i.q. cover with lime (to white-
wash or plaster), το τΰχος, Thuc. 3, 20; tovs τοίχου! τοΰ
Upov [here to overlay with gold etc.], 1 Chr. xxix. 4 ; τηρ
οΐκίαν. Lev. xiv. 42 (for Πΐϋ). 2. {^ξ- denoting re-
moval [cf. fV, VI. 2]), to wipe off, tvipe away: δάκρυον
άπο [G L Τ Tr WII ck] των οφθαλμών, Rev. vii. 17;
.xxi. 4 [R G WII mrg., al. t κ] ; to obliterate, erase, wipe
out, blot out, (Aeschyl., Hdt., al. ; Sept. for ΠΠΏ) : τί. Col.
ii. 14; TO όνομα ίκ της βίβλου. Rev. iii. 5 (Ps. Ixviii.
(Ixix.) 29, cf. Deut. ix. 14 ; xxv. 0) ; τΰς αμαρτίας, tbe
guilt of sins. Acts iii. 19, (Ps. cviii. (cix.) 13; τΰ άκό-
μημα, τας ανομίας. Is. xliii. 25 ; Ps. 1. (Ii.) 1 1 ; Sir. xlvL
20; T. αμαρτίας άπα\€ίφ(ΐν, 3 Macc. ii. 19).*
ίξ-άΧλομαι; to leap up: Acts iii. 8. (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1,
27, et al.; Sept. Is. Iv. 12.)*
ί|-ανά<Γτασ-ΐ5, -ίωί, η, {ίξανίστημι, q. v.), a rising up
(Polyb. 3, 55, 4) ; a rising again, resurrection : τών νικρω»
or (L TTr WII) ij « tSiv νεκρών, Phil. iii. 11.*
ίξ-ονα-τ£'λλω : 1 aor. ίξαν(τ(ΐ\α ; 1. trans, to make
spring up, cause to shoot forth: Gen. ii. 9, etc. 2. in-
trans. to spring up : Mt. xiii. 5 ; Mk. iv. 5. (Rare in
prof. auth. [cf. W. 102 (97)].)*
{'ξ-αν-ίσ-Γημι : 1 aoT. (ξαν(στησα; 2 aor. (ξινίστην; 1.
to make rise up, to raise up, to produce : σπιρμα, Jlk. xii.
19 ; Lk. XX. 28, (Ilebr. ;ηΐ D'pn, Gen. xxxviii. 8). 2.
2 aor. act. to rise in an assembly to speak (as in Xen. an.
6, 1 , 30) : Acts xv. 5.*
ίξ-αττατάω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ίξηπάτησα ; 1 aor. pass. ptcp.
fern, (ξαττατηθ^ϊσα ; {(ξ- strengthens the simple verb [cf.
(κ,ΎΙ. 6^), to deceive: Ro.vii.ll; .xvi. 18; 1 Co. iii. 18;
2 Co. xi. 3 ; 2 Th. ii. 3 ; pass. 1 Tim. ii. 14 [L Τ Tr AVII].
(From Horn, down ; twice in the O. T. viz. Ex. viii. 29 ;
Sus. vs. 56.)*
ίξάΐΓίνα, (a somewhat rare later Gik. form for (ξαπίνης,
(ξαίφνης, q. v. [W. § 2, 1 d.]), adv., suddenly: Mk. ix. 8.
(Sept. ; .Iambi., Zonar., al. ; Byzant.) *
fg-airopt'u and (so in the Bible) depon. pass, (ξαπορίο-
μαι, -οϊιμαι ; 1 aor. ΐξηπορηθην ; to be utterly at a loss, be
utterly destitute of measures or resources, to renounce all
hope, be in despair, [cf. cV, VT. 6], (Polyb., Diod., Plut.,
al.) : 2 Co. iv. 8 (where it is distinguished fr. the simple
anopfopai) ; τινός of anything : τοΟ ζήν, 2 Co. i. 8, on this
gen. cf. Matthiae ii. p. 828 s(j. (τοΰ αργυρίου, to be utterly
in wa7it of, Dion. Hal. 7, 18; act. with dat. of respect,
Tols λογισμοις, Polyb. 1, 62, 1 ; once in the O. T. absoL
Ps. Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) 16).*
«ξ-αΐΓθ-<ΓΤ€λλω ; fut. ίξαποστ^Χώ ; 1 aor. (ξαπ(<ττ€ΐ\α ;
[2 aor. pass, (ξαπίστάληνΐ: Sept. very often for Π^ψ;
prop, to send away Irom one's self (άτΓό) out of the place
εξαοτίζω
222
εξέρχομαι
or out of doors (tV [q. v. VT. 2]) ; 1. to send forth :
τινά, with commissions, Acts vii. 12; [xii. 11] ; Gal. iv.
4 ; foil, by inf. of purpose, Acts xi. 22 (but L Τ Tr WII
cm. the inf.) ; ch ίθνη, unto the (ientiles, Acts xxii. 21
[WII mrg. άποστ.] ; used also of powers, influences,
things, (see άποστίλλω, 1 a.) : την tnayyeXiav, the pvoni-
ised blessing, Lk. xxiv. 49TTr Wll ; τό ττνινμιι fif t«s
KapSias, to send forth i. o. imjiart tin• .'spirit to our licarls.
Gal. iv. 6; [ro . . . κηρνγμα της αιωνίου σωτηρίας^ Alk. xvi.
λ\ΪΙ in (rejected) 'Shorter Conclusion']; ύμιν ό λόγο!
. . . ΐξαπ^σταΚη, the message was sent forth, i. e. com-
manded to be announced, to you, Acts xiii. 2G L Τ Tr
WII. 2. to send away : τιι/ά tls etc. Acts ix. 30 ; foil.
by inf. of purpose. Acts xvii. 14; τίνα Kfvov, Lk. i. 53;
XX. 10, 1 1. (Dem., Polyb., Diod.) *
«|-αρτίζω : 1 aor. inf. (ξαρτΐσαί ; pf. pass. |)tcp. ΐξηρτί-
σμΐνοι; (see SpTtos, 2); rare in prof, auth.; to rnmplele,
finish; a. to furnish perfcctbj: τινά, pass., npos n, 2
Tim. iii. 1 7 (πο\€μ(Ιν . . . τοις αττασι καλώς (ξηρτισμΐνοι,
Joseph, antt. 3, 2, 2). b. τάί ήμίρας, to finish, acroniplish,
(as it were, to render the days complete) : Acts xxi. 5
(so απάρτιζαν την οκτάμηνον, Hipp. epid. ii. 180 [cf. Loh.
ad Fhryn. p. 447 sip]).*
ίξ-οστράτΓτω. 1. prop, to send forth liglilninff, to
lighten. 2. to flash out like liyhtninrj, to shine, be ra-
diant : of garments, Lk. ix. 29 ; (of gleaming arms, Nali.
iii. 3 ; Ezek. i. 4, 7 ; φόβω κ. κάλλιϊ πολλώ Trypliiodor.
103 ; [cf. W. 102 (97)]).*
ίξ-ουτί]? and it, αντής [so Rec. Jlk. vi. S.")], (sc. της ώρας
[W. 591 sq. (550) ; B. 82 (71)]), on the instant ; forth-
with: iMk. vi. 25; Acf= x. 33; xi. 11 : xxi. 32; xxiii. 30
[R G WH] ; Phil. ii. 23. (Cratin. in Bekk. anecd. i.
p. 94 ; Theogn., Arat., Polyb., Joseph., al.) *
ίξ-ίγίίρω [1 Co. vi. 14 Lchm. txt.] ; fut. f^eyepSi; 1 aor.
ίξήγ^φα ; to arouse, raise up (from sleep ; Soph., Eur.,
Xen., al.) ; from the dead (Aeschyl. cho. 495), 1 Co. vi.
14. to muse up, stir up, incite: τιμά, to resistance, Ro. ix.
17 (tok θυμόν Tivoi, 2 Mace. xiii. 4, cf. 2 Chr. xxxvi. 22),
where some explain the words ίξήγ^ιρά ae I have raised
thee up into life, caused thee to exist, or / have raised thee
to a public position, set thee up as king (Joseph, antt. 8,
11, 1 βπσιΚίυ! yap f^fyc'iperai inr' (μον) \ but the objec-
tion to these interpretations lies in the fact that Paul
draws from vs. 17 what he says in vs. 18, and tlierefore
(^fydpfiv must be nearly synonymous with σκληρύνίΐν,
[but see Meyer].*
(ξ-ειμι; impf. ί'Ι,ι/ίσαΐ' ; ((ΐμι) ; to go out, r/n forth : foil.
in Rec. by ΐκ Λvith gen. of ])lace. Acts xiii. 42 ; without
mention of the place, that being known from the context.
Acts xvii. 1.5 ; XX. 7 ; (Vi την γήν (from the water), to es-
cape to the land, Acts xxvii. 43.*
εξ-»μι from (ϊμί, see ίξ(στι.
ίξ-ίλί'γχω : 1 aor. inf. (ξιλίγξαι ; (ί| strengthens the
simple verb [cf. (κ, VI. 6]) ; to prove to be in the wrong,
convict, (chiefly in Attic writ.) : by punishing, τινά τκρί
τινοί, Jude 15 Rec. (see ίλίγχω, 1) of God as judge, as
in Is. ii. 4 ; Mic. iv. 3 for rf^in.*
^*K<a : [pres. pass. ptcp. ΐξ(λκόμ(νο!ΐ '< '" draw out.
(Horn., Pind., Attic writ.) ; metaph. i. q. to lure forth,
[A. V. ilraw away} : ίπΐι τηί • • • ΐπιθυμίας ίξ(λκόμ(νο!,
Jas. i. 14, where the metaphor is taken from hunting
and fishing : as game is lure<l from its covert, so man by
lust is allured from the safety of self-restraint to .«in.
[The language of hunting seems to be transferred here
(so elsewhere, cf. AVetst. ad loc.) to the seductions of a
harlot, personated by ΐπιθνμία; see τίκτω.]*
ί|-ϊλω, see ί^αιρίω.
φ'ραμα, -roi, τό, (fr. ίξιράΐΰ to eject, cast forth, vomit
forth; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. |). (14), vomit; what is ca.it out
by vomiting: 2 Pet. ii. 22, cf. Prov. xxvi. II. (Dioscor.
de venenis c. 19 (p. 29 ed. Spreng.) [an example of the
verb. Cf. Wetst. on Pet. 1. c, and esp. Galaker, Advers.
miscell. col. 853 sip].) *
[ίξ-ίραυνάω Τ Tr ^Vll for i^epevvdw, ([. v. ; see ϊραυνάω.^
ίξ-€ρίυνάω, -ώ : 1 aor. (ξηρ(ύνησα ; /" .tcarch out, search
anxiiiiis/i/ and diUgcnthj: nepi τίνος, 1 Pet. i. 10 [where
Τ Tr WII (ξίραυν. q. v.]. (1 Macc. iii. 48 ; ix. 2G ; Sept.;
Soph., Eur., Polyb., Phit., al.) *
ίξ-ί'ρχομαι ; inipf. (ξηρχήμην; fut. fieXtio-o^at ; 2 aor.
(ξηλθον, plur. 2 pers. (ξήλθ(τ(, 3 pers. ίξηλθον, and in
L Τ Tr WII the Alex, forms (see ά-πίρχημαι, init.) ϊζηΚ-
flare (JNIt.xi. 7, 8, 9; xxvi. 55 ; ]Mk. xiv. 48, etc.), f^^Xia»
(1 .In. ii. 19 ; 2 .In. 7 [here Tdf. -θον; 3 Jn. 7, etc.]) ; pf.
ίξίλήλυθα; plpf- ίξ(λη\νθιιν (Lk. viii. 38, etc.) ; Sept. for
ΧΪ' times without number; to go or come out of ; 1.
properly; a. with mention of the jilace out of which
one goes, or of the point from whicli he departs; a. of
those who leave a place of their own accord : with the
gen. alone, JIt. x. 14 (L Τ Tr WII insert (^ω) ; Acts xvi.
39 R G. foil, by U : Mk. v. 2 ; vii. 31 ; Jn. iv. 30 ; viii.
59; Acts vii. 3 sq. ; 1 Co. v. 10; Rev. xviii. 4, etc. foil,
by ίξω ivith gen. — with addition of tit and ace. of place,
Mt. xxi. 17; Jlk. xiv. 68; or παρά with ace. of place,
Acts xvi. 13 ; or προς τίνα, ace. of ])ers., Ileb. .xiii. 13.
(ξίρχ. από with gen. of place, Mt. xiii. 1 R G ; Mk. xi.
12; Lk. i.\. 5; Phil. iv. 15; [Ileb. xi. 15 R G] ; Ιξίρχ.
fKfieev, Mt. XV. 21 ; Mk. vi. 1, 10 ; Lk. ix. 4 ; [xi. 53 Τ Tr
txt. λΥΗ txt.] ; Jn. iv. 43 ; ooev Ιξηλθον, Mt. xii. 44 ; Lk.
xi. 24 [yet see β. below], ^ξίρχ. ίκ etc. to come forth
from, out of, a place : Mt. viii. 28; Rev. xiv. 15, 17, 18
[L ora. WII br. c^^X•] ; xv. 6 ; ίξ(λθ(Ίν από, to come out
(towards one) /com, Mt. xv. 22. In theiiospel of .lohn
Christ, who by his incarnation left his place with God
in heaven, is said (ξιλθΛν πάρα τοϋ Btoi : xvi. 27 and R G
Lmrg. in vs. 28 ; arsh Toi Benv, xiii. 3 ; xvi. 30 ; ίκ τοϋ
θ(οΰ, from his place with God, from f iod's abode, viii. 42
and L txt. Τ Tr WII in xvi. 28. β. of those expelled or
cast out (esp. of demons driven forth from a body of
which they have held possession) : ?κ τίνος, gen. of pers. :
Mk. i. 25 sq. ; V. 8 [L mrg. από] ; vii. 29 ; Lk. iv. 35 R Tr
mrg. ; or άπό τίνος, Mt. xii. 43 ; xvii. 18 ; Lk. iv. 35 L Τ Tr
txt. λνΐΐ; viii. 2'.i, 33, 35; xi. 24 [yet see a. above]; Acts
xvi. IS; [xix. 12 Rec.]. 7. of those Λvho come forth, or
are let go, from confinement in ivhich they have been
kept (e. g. from prison) : Mt. v. 2G ; Acts xvi. 40. b.
without mention of the place from which one goes out;
ΦΡΧΟΜ'Ο'''
223
ίξη^
α. where the place from which one goes forth (as a house,
city, sliip) has just been mentioned: Mt. [viii. 12 Tdf.] ;
ix. 31 sq. (from the house, vs. 28) ; x. 11 (sc. eKtWev, i. e.
(KTrjs πό\(ως η κώμηςϊκ(ίνης) ; xii. 14 (cf. 9) ; xvui. 28 (cf.
24) ; xiv. 14; Mk. i. 45 (cf. 43 ίξίβαλίν αυτόν) ; Lk. i. 22
(from the temple) ; viii. 27 ; x. 35 [Kec] ; Jn. xiii. 30, 31
(30), etc. ; so also when the verb ίξίρχισθαι refers to the
departure of demons: Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v. 13; vii. 30;
i.x. 29; Acts viii. 7; xvi. 19 (where for the name of the
demon itself is substituted the descriptive clause η έλπίί
τ. εργασίας αυτών; see 2 e. δ.). β. where one is said to
have gone forth to do something, and it is obvious that he
has gone forth from his home, or at least from the place
where he has been staying : foil, by an inf., Mt. xi. 8 ;
xiii. 3 [inf. w. τοΰ]; xx. 1 ; Mk. iii. 21 ; iv. 3 [R G inf. w.
ToC (Tr br. τοΰ)] ; v. 14 Rec. ; Lk. vii. 25 sq. ; Acts xx. 1 ;
Rev. XX. 8 ; with the addition of tVi τίνα {aijainst), Mt.
xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 48 ; Lk. xxii. 52 ; «it τούτο, Mk. i. 38;
Iva, Rev. vi. 2 ; also without any inf. or conjunction indi-
cating the purpose: Mk. vi. 12; viii. 11 ; xiv. 16; xvi. 20;
Lk. V. 2 7 ; ix. 6 ; Jn. xxi. 3 ; Acts x. 23 ; xx. 1 1 ; 2 Co. viii.
1 7 ; foil, by els with ace. of place : Mt. xxii. 10; xxvi. 30,
71; Mk. viii. 27; xi. 11 ; Lk. vi. 12; xiv. 21, 23; Jn. i. 43
(44); Acts xi. 25; xiv. 20; 2 Co. ii. 13; the place to
which one goes forth being evident either from what goes
before or from the context : Mt. xxiv. 20 (sc. els την ίρη-
μον) ; xxvh. 32 (from the city to the place of crucifixion) ;
ΐξίρχ. alone is used of a people quitting the land which
they had previously inhaljited, Acts vii. 7, cf. Ileb. xi. 8 ;
of angels coming forth from heaven, Mt. xiii. 49. e^epx-
€15 άπάντησίν Tivos, to meet one, Mt. xxv. 1 [LT TrWH
ύττάιτ.], 6; [eis άπάντ. or νττάντ.] τινί, Jn. xii. 13; Acts
xxviii. 15 RG; els συνάντησίν τινι, Mt. viii. 34 [LTTr
AVH ύπάντ-Ί- Agreeably to the oriental redundancy of
style in description (see άνίστημι, IL 1 c), the participle
i^eXBuiv is often placed before another finite verb of de-
parture : Mt. viii. 32 ; xv. 21 ; xxiv. 1 {i^eXuiiiv [from the
temple, see xxi. 23] iwopeiero άπο τον iepoi, he departed
from its vicinity) ; Mk. xvi. 8; Lk. xxii. 39; Acts xii. 9,
1 7 ; xvi. 3G, 40 ; xxi. 5, 8. 2. figuratively ; a. ex τίνων,
eK fieVou τινών, to go out from spme assembly, i. e. to for-
sake it: 1 Jn. ii. 19 (opp. to μeμevηκeισav μ(θ' ημών) ; 2
Co. vi. 17. b. to come forth from phi/sicalli/, arise from,
to be born of: ck with gen. of the place from which one
comes by birth, Mt. ii. 6 (fr. Mic. v. 2) ; ex ttjs 6σφΰos
Tivos. Hebr. Ο'ϊ'ρπι? Ni'; (Gen. xxxv. 11 ; 1 K. viii. 19;
[cf. W. 33 (32)]), Heb. vii. 5. c. ex xeipos nvos, to go
forth from one's power, escape from it in safety : Jn. x.
39. d. iir τον κόσμον. Ιο come forth (from privacy) into
the world, before the public, (of those who by novelty of
opinion attract attention): 1 Jn. iv. 1. e. of things;
a. of report, rumors, messages, precepts, etc., i. q. to be
uttered, to be heard : φωνή. Rev. xvi. 1 7 ; xix. 5 ; i. q. to be
made knonm, declared : ό Xo'yot τοΰ Beov foil, by αϊτό τίνων,
from their city or church, 1 Co. xiv. 3G ; i. q. to spread,
he diffused: ή φήμη. Mt. ix. 26; Lk. iv. 14: ij ακοή. ISIk.
i. 26 ; [Mt. iv. 24 Tr mrg.] ; ό φθάγγos, τα ρήματα, Ro. χ.
18; ό λόγοΓ the word, saying, Jn. xxi. 23; Lk. vii. 17;
ή πι'στίΓ nvos, the report of one's faith, 1 Th. i. 8 ; i. q.
to be proclaimed : δόγμα, an imperial edict, παρά tivos, gen.
pers., Lk. ii. 1. β. to come forth i. q. be emitted, as from
the heart, the mouth, etc. : Mt. xv. 18 sq. ; Jas. iii. 10 ;
[cf. ρομφαία eK τοΰ στόμaτos, Rev. xix. 21 G L Τ Tr
WH] ; i. q. to flow forth from the body : Jn. xix. 34 ; i. q.
to emanate, issue : Lk. viii. 46 ; Rev. xiv. 20. y. e^epxe-
σθαι {απ άνατο\ών), used of a sudden flash of lightning,
Mt. xxiv. 27. S. that e^ep\eaeai in Acts xvi. 19 (on
which see 1 b. a. above) is used also of a thing's vanish-
ing, viz. of a hope which has disappeared, arises from
the circumstance that the demon that had gone out had
been the hope of those who complain that their hope
has gone out. On the plirase elaepxeaOai κ. ^ξίρχίσθαι
see in elaep\opai, 1 a. [CoMP. : 8L-eζ^pχoμaL.'}
ί|-ί<ΓΤΐ, impers. verb, (fr. the unused e^eipi), it is law-
ful; a. foil, by the pres. inf. : Mt. xii. 2, 10 [Tdf. inf.
aor.], 12 ; xiv. 4 ; Lk. vi. 2 [R G T] ; .xiv. 3 [L Τ Tr WH
inf. aor.] ; with the aor. inf. : Mt. [xv. 28 L T] ; xxii.
17 ; xxvii. 6 ; Mk. iii. 4 ; xii. 14 ; Lk. vi. 9 ; Acts ii. 29
(e^ov ΐΐπΰν scil. eστω, allow me, [al. supply eart, B. 318
(273) ; W. § 64, 1. 2 a., cf. § 2, 1 d.]) ; with the inf. omitted
because readily suggested by the context, Mk. ii. 24 and
Rec. in Acts viii. 37. b. foU. by dat. of pers. and a pres.
inf. : Mk. vi. 18 ; Acts xvi. 21 ; xxii. 25 ; and an aor. inf. :
Mt. xix. 3 [L Τ WH om. dat.] ; xx. 15 ; Mk. ii. 26 [R G
LTrtxt.] ; X. 2; Lk. xx. 22RGL; Jn. v. 10; χ viii. 31 ;
Acts xxi. 37 ; ίζον ην, Mt. xii. 4 ; a ουκ ίξόν, sc. ί'στί, 2 Co.
xii. 4 ; with the inf. omitted, as being evident from the
context : πάντα (μοι) e^eariv, sc. ποί^ΐι/, 1 Co. vi. 12 ; x. 23.
c. foil, by the ace. and inf. : Lk. vi. 4 ; xx. 22 Τ Tr WH ;
so here and there even in classic writ.; cf. Rost § 127
Anm. 2 ; Kuhner § 47S Anm. 2; [B. § 142, 2].*
ί|-€τάξω : 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. e^eraaaTe, inf. eξe-
τάσαι; to search out; to examine strictly, inquire: πepl
TIVOS and with the adv. άκριΑώί added, Mt. ii. 8 ; foil, by
an indir. quest. Mt. x. 11 ; τικά inquire of some one, foil.
by a direct question, Jn. xxi. 12. (Sept.; often in Grk.
writ. fr. Thuc. down.) *
[£ξ€'φνη5, see ^ξαίφνη5-^
ί'Ι^γίομαι, -οίμαι ; impf . ^ξη-γοΰμην ; 1 aor. ^ξηγησάμην ;
1. prop, to lead out, be leader, go before, (Hom. et al.).
2. metaph. (cf. Germ, ausfiikren) to draw out in narra-
tive, unfold in teaching; a. to recount, rehearse: [w. ace.
of the thing and dat. of pers., Acts x. 8] ; w. ace. of thing,
Lk. xxiv. 35 ; Acts xxi. 1 ; without an ace, foil, by rel.
pron. or adv., 5σaeπoίησev,Actsxv. 12; καίώί, 14, (so in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down ; Sept. for 133, Judg. vii. 13,
etc.). b. to unfold, declare : Jn. i. 18 (sc. the things re-
lating to God ; also used in Grk. writ, of the interpreta-
tion of things sacred and divine, oracles, dreams, etc. ; cf.
Mcver ad loc. ; Alberti, Observationes etc. p. 207 sq.).*
f ξήκοντα, ο!, al, τά, sixty : Mt. xiii. 8, 23, etc.
€'ξή5. adv., (fr. ϊχω, fut. {ξω: cf. ΐχομαΐ τινοί to cleave
to, come next to, a thing), successirely, in order, (fr. Hom.
down) ; ό, ή, το ίξήs, the next follotcing, the next in suc-
cession : so ij ίξής ήμίρα, Lk. ix. 37 ; elliptically ev rij e^^s,
sc. ήμ^ρα, Lk. vii. 11 (here WH txt. Tr txt. L mrg. «j
e'fv.Y^ft)
224
ΐζουΒβνοο)
A^ts xxi. 1 ; x.w. 17 ; xxvii. 18.*
ίξ^χίω, -ώ : to sound fori li, emit sound, resounil; pass.
(ξηχύταί τι the simiul of s()iiiflliiu;j; is borne forth, is
propagated : άφ' νμών (ζήχψαι ό Xoyuf τοϋ κυρίου, from
your city or from your clmrcli the word of the Lord
has sounded forth i. e. has been <lisseminated by report, 1
Th. i. 8, cf. De NVette ad loc. (Joel ui. 14 (iv. VJ) ; Sir.
xl. 13; 3 Mace. iii. 2. Polyb. ;!0, 4, 7 [not Dind.]; Philo
in Place. § 6 ; [ipiis rer. div. her. § 4] ; Byzant.) *
i|is, -(ως, ή, (ϊχω. fut. ίξω), a habit, whether of body or
of mind (Xfii., l'l:it., Aristot., al.) ; ii power acquired bij
custom, practice, «,<e,("tirma(iuaedamfacilitas,quaeapud
Graecos ίξις noniinatur," Quint. 10, 1 init.) ; .so Ileb.
V. 14, (Jv τούτοις Ικα\'ην ΐζιν ΐ!(ριποιησάμ(νοί. Sir. prol. 7 ;
ΐξιν c^ftv γραμματικής, Polyb. 10,4 7, 7; ev τοις πο\(μικοΪ!,
21, 7, 3; fV άστρολογίίΐ μ(•/ίστην ΐξιν (χ(ΐν, Diod. 2, 31 ;
\oyiKl]v ΐξίυ π^μιποιούμινος, ΡΙιϋυ, alleg. legg. 1, 4).*
ί|-ίσ"Γημ.ι: likewise ί|ισ-ηίω and cl^iOTai/oj (Acts viii. 9
ptc]). (ξίοτών Ιΐνι,ίξίστάνων LTTrWH [see 'στημι']) ;
1 Άοτ.ίζίστησα; Jt;u>r. ΐξίστην; pf. Ίηί. (ξ(στακ(ναί; Mid.,
[pres. inf. (ξίστασθαι'] ; impf. 3 pers. plur. (ξίσταντο ;
1. In pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. act. to throw out of position,
to displace : τίνα τοϋ φρον(Ιν, to throw one out of his
mind, drive one out of his senses, Xen. mem. 1, 3, 12;
φρινών, Eur. Bacch. 850 ; hence simply to amaze, astonish,
l/iron• into wonderment: τινά, Lk. xxiv. 22; Acts viii. 9.
2. In perf., pluperf., 2 aor. act. and also the mid., a. to
be amazed, astounded: Mt. xii. 23 ; Mk. ii. 12; Lk. viii.
56: Actsii. 7, 12; viii. 13; ix. 21 ; .x. 45; xii. 16, (Sept.
for Tin, to tremlile, Ex. xix. 18 ; Ruth iii. 8, etc.) ; e|e'-
στησαν ίκστάσιι μ(•γάΚτ), they were amazed with a great
amazement (see ίκσ-τασις, 3), Mk. v. 42; iv ίαυτο'ις (ξί-
σταντο, Mk. vi. 51 ; ivith dat. of the thing: μαγιίαις (ξ-
ίστακίναι, had been put beside themselves with magic
arts, carried away with wonder at them. Acts viii. 11
[but this form of the perf. is transitive; cf. B. 48 (41) ;
Veitch 339] ; (ξίσταντο (πί with dat. of tiling, Lk. ii. 47
(Ex. .xi.x. 18; Sap. v. 2). b. to be out of one's mind, be-
side one's self, insane : 2 Co. v. 13 (opp. to σωφρόνων) ;
Mk. iii. 21 [cf. Β. 198(171); W. § 4o, ."> b.] ; (Grk. writ.,
where they use the word in this sense, generally add
τοϋ φρονιΐν, τών φρίνών : Isoc, Eur., Polyb., al.).*
ίξ-Μτχνω : 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. plur. (ξισχΰσητί, to
be eminently able, to have full strength, [cf. eV, VI. 6] :
foil, by an inf. Eph. iii. 18. (Sir. vii. 6; rare in Grk.
writ., as Dioscor., Strab., Plut.) *
cg-oSos, -ou, ή. (oS()f), exit, i. e. departure: Heb. xi. 22;
inetaph. ή (ξο86ς τίνος the close of one's career, one's
final fate, Lk. ix. .i 1 ; departure from life, decease : 2 Pet.
i. 15, as in Sap. iii. 2; \ii. 6; [Philo de caritate § 4];
with addition of τοϋ ^v. Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 2 ; [of τοϋ
βίου. Just. dial. c. Tryph. § 105].•
{ξ-ολοθρ£νω and (ace. to the reading best attested by
the oldest Mss. of the Sept. and received by LTTrWH
[see ο\οθρ(ΰω^) (ξ6λ(θρ(ΰω: fut. pass. (ξο\οθρ(υθησομαι;
to destroy out of its place, destroy utterly, to exlirpale : ex
τ»ϋ Καοϋ, Acts iii. 23. (Often in the Sept., and in the
0. T. Apocr., and in Test. xii. Patr. ; Joseph, antt. f<,
11,1; 1 1, C, (i ; hardly in native (Jrk. writ.) *
ίξ-ο(ΐολογίω, -ώ : 1 aor. (ξωμολιΊγησα ; Mid., [pres. (ξ-
ομυλογυίμαι]; fut, (ξιιμολογήσυμαι; [1 aor. subj. 8 pers.
sing, -γήσηται, Phil. ii. 1 1 U (i L txl. Tr txt. WH] ; (f'|
eilher_/»iV/iy;-o)n the heart, freely, or publicly, openly [cf.
W. 102 (97)]) ; act. and depon. mid. to confess, to pro-
fess ; 1. to confess : tqs αμαρτίας, Mt. iii. G ; Mk. i. 5 ;
[Jas. V. 16 L Τ Tr WII], (Jose|)h. antt. 8, 4, 6 ; [cf. b. j.
5, 10, 5 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 51,3; Barn. ep. 19, 12]) ;
τάς πράξ(ΐς. Acts xix. IS; τα τιαραιττώμητα. Jas. v. 16
RG; {iiTTav, Plut. Eum. c. 17; την αλίιβίίαν άν(υ βασά-
νων, id. Auton. c. 59). 2. to jinfrss i. e. to acknoirt-
edge openly and joyfully: το ονομά Ttras, Rev. iii. 5 Rec;
foU. by ότι, Phil. ii. 11 ; with dat. of pers. [cf. W. § 31,
If.; B. 176 (153)] to 07ie's honor, i. e. to celebrate, gice
praise to (so Sept. for h ΓΤΙΙΠ, Ps. xxix. (xx.\.) 5 ; cv.
(cvi.)47; cxxi. (cxxii.)'4, etc. ; [W. 32]) : Ro. xiv. 11;
XV. 9 fr. Ps. xvii. (.xviii.) 50, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 61, 3);
τινί (dat. of pers.) foil, by o-t : jMt. xi. 25 ; Lk. x. 21.
to profess that one will do something, to promise, agree,
engage: Lk. .xxii. 6 [Lchm. oni.] ; (in tliis sense the
Greeks and Josephus use opoXoyelv).'
ί|-όν, SLO (ξ(στι.
(ξ-ορκίζω ; 1. Ιο exact an oath, to force to an oath,
(Dem., Polyb., ApoUod., Diod., Plut., al.), for which the
earlier (irks, used (ξορκάω, [cf. W. 102 (97)]. 2. to ad-
jure : τινά κατά τίνος, one by a person [cf. κατά, I. 2 a.],
foil, by Ίνα [Β. 237 (20."))], Mt. xxvi. 63 ; (Gen. x.xiv. 3).•
6ξ-ορκι<Γτή5, -oO, 0, ((ξορκίζω) ; 1. he who exacts an
oath of another. 2. an exorcist, i. e. one who employs
a formula of conjuration for expelling demons : Acts
xix. 13. (Joseph, antt. X, 2, 5 ; Lcian. epigr. in Antliol.
11, 427; often in the church Fathers.) *
ίξ-ορ«<Γ<Γω : 1 aor. ptep. (ξορϋξαντ(ς; fr. Hdt. down;
1. to dig out: τους οφθαλμούς (l)rop. to pluck out the
eyes; so Judg. xvi. 21 [Alex.]; 1 S. .xi. 2; Hdt. 8, 116;
Joseph, antt. C, 5, 1 ; Lcian. dial. deor. 1, 1 ; al.) kqI
διδύναι τινί. metaph. to renounce the most precious things
for another's advantage. Gal. iv. 15 (similar expressions
see in Ter. adelph. 4, 5, 67; Hor. sat. 2, 5, 35 ; [Wet-
stein ad loc.]) ; in opposition to a very few interp. vrhu,
assuming that Paul suffered from a iveakness of the
eyes, understand the words literally, " Ye would have
plucked out your sound eyes and have put them into
me," see Aleyer ad loc. ; [cf. reff. s. v. σκόλο^, fin.]. 2.
to diq through : την στίγην, Mk. ii. 4.*
eJ-o\)Siveii>, -ώ : 1 aor. pass, subjunc. 3 pers. sing, (ξου-
8(νηθη ; pf. pass. ptcp. (ξουδίνημίνος ; Ιο hold and treat
as (If' no account, utterly to despise : τον Xoyov, pass., 2 Co.
X. 10 Lchm. to set at nought, treat with contumely: a
person, pass., IVPk. ix. 12 L Tr WII, (Ezek. xxi. 10). Cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 182 ; [B. 28 (25) ; VV^ 91 (87) ; Soph.
Lex. s. v.; WH. App. p. 166].•
c^-ovS<viiD, -ώ : [1 aor. pass, subjunc. 3 pers. sing.
(ξου&(νωθή'\ ; i. q. (ξονδινίω, q. v. : Mk. ix. 12 R G; often
in Sept., esp. for π;| and DK^• [Cf. reff. in the preced-
ing word.]*
(ξουθενέ
225
εξουσιάζω
ίξονθ(ν(ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ΐξουθίνησα ; Pass., pf. ptcp. ϊξον-
θατημίνο!•, [1 aor. ptcp. €^ονθ(νηβίίϊ]\ (see oiitis); to
make of no account, to despise utterly: Tina, Lk. xviii. 9 ;
Ro. -xiv. 3, 10 ; 1 Co. xvi. 1 1 ; τι, 1 Th. v. 20 : Gal. iv. U
(where it is coupled with f κτττΰω ) ; in pass, oi (ξουθινη-
μίνηι, 1 Co. vi. 4 ; τα (ξονΰίνημίνα, 1 Co. i. 28 (see ayfvris) ',
6 λόγυς (ξουθο'ημίνοί. 2 Co. X. 10 [Iiere Lchm. ί'^ουδ.] ;
6 (λί^ΟΓ ό) ΐ^ονθ^νηθύί υπό των οίκο^ομοΰντων^ set at
nought, i. e. rejected, cast aside, Acts iv. 11. To treat
with contempt (i. e. ace. to the context, with mocker//) :
Lk. xxiii. 1 1 ; (for 113, Prov. i. 7 ; ΠΙ3, Ezek. xxii. 8, etc. ;
DKO, 1 S. viii. 7. Sap. iv. 18; 2 Mace. i. 27 ; Barn. ep. 7,
9; and other eccl. writ.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 182;
[and reff. s. v. ϊξονδίνίω. fin.].*
έ|αυθ(νόω, i. q. (ξιιυθίνίω, ij. v. : Mk. ix. 12 Tdf.*
c^ovtria, -ay, ^, (fr. e^effrt, e^ov, v|. v.), fr. £ur., Xen.,
Plato down; Sept. for Π'^ψΏΟ and Chald. \φ^>; power.
1. power of choice, liberty of doing a.i one pleases;
leave or permission: 1 Co. ix. 12, IS; (χαν (ξυνσΐαν,
2 Th. iii. 9 ; with an inf. added indicating the thing to
be done, Jn. x. 18 ; 1 Co. ix. 4 sq. ; Heb. xiii. 10 [WH
br. (ξ.~\ ; foil, by an inf. with τοϋ, 1 Co. ix. 6 (L Τ Tr
WII om. ToO) ; with a gen. of the thing or the pers. with
regard to Avhich one has the power to decide : Ro.
ix. 21 (where an ex])lanatory infin. is added [B. 2(50
(224)]); 1 Co. ix. 12; tVi to ξνλον rrjs fuj^f. permission
to use the tree of life. Rev. xxii. 14 [see enl, C. I. 2 e.] ;
(ζονσίαν ΐχ(ΐν Trepl τον ίδιου θίΧηματοζ (ορρ. to ανάγκην
(χαν [cf. W. § 30, 3 Ν. ό]), 1 Co. νϋ. 37; iV τή 18ία
(|ουσία, [appointed, see τίθημι, 1 a. sub fin.] according to
his own choice. Acts i. 7 ; cV τη ση (ξουσία ίπήρχ(ν, i. e. at
thy free disposal. Acts v. 4 ; used of liberty under the
gospel, as opp. to the yoke of the Mosaic law, 1 Co. viii.
9. 2. physical and mental power; the ability or
strength with which one is endued, which he either possesses
or exercises: Mt. ix. 8; Acts viii. 19; Rev. ix. 3, 19;
xiii. 2, 4 ; xviii. 1 ; foil, by an inf. of the thing to be
done, Mk. iii. 15 ; Lk. xii. 5 ; Jn.i.l2; Rev.ix. 10; xi.
6 : xiii. .5 ; full, by τοϋ with the inf. Lk. x. 19 ; αΰττ; ίσ-τιν
ή (ξουσία τοϋ σκάτουί, this is the power that darkness
exerts, Lk. xxii. 53 ; noielv (ξονσίαν to exert power, give
e.xhibitions of power, Rev. xiii. 12; cv ίξουσϊα elvai, to be
possessed of power and influence, Lk. iv. 32; also ίξου-
σίαν ΐχιιν (both expressions refer to the ability and
weiglit which Jesus exhibited in his teaching) Mt. vii.
29 ; [Mk. i. 22] ; κατ ίξουσίαν powerfully, Mk. i. 27 ; also
(V (ξουσία, Lk. iv. 36. 3. the power of authority
(influence) and of right : Mt. xxi. 23 ; Mk. xi. 28 ; Lk.
XX. 2 ; spoken of the authority of an apostle, 2 Co. x. 8 ;
.xiii. 10; of the divine authority granted to Jesus as
Messiah, with the inf. of the thing to be done, Mt. ix. 6 ;
Mk.ii. 10; I^k. v. 24; Jn. v. 27; iv ποία ίξουσία ; clothed
in what authority (i. e. thine own or God's?), Mt. xxi.
23, 24, 27; Mk. xi. 28, 29, 33; Lk. xx. 2, 8; delegated
authority (Germ. VoUmachi, authorization) : παρά τίνος,
with gen. of the pers. by whom the authority is given, or
received. Acts ix. 14 ; xxvi. 10, 12 [R G]. 4. the power
tfrnle or government (the power of him whose will
and commands must be submitted to by others and
obeyed, [generally translated authority]) ; a. univ. : Mt.
xxviii. 18; Jude 25; Rev. xii. 10; xvii. 13; 'λaμβάvfιv
ίξονσίαν ώϊ βασιλί t'f, Rev. xvii. 12 ; ίΐμί ΰ-πο ίξουσίαν, 1
am under authority, ^It. viii. 9 ; with τασσό /iei/of added,
[Mt. viii. 9 LWHbr.]; Lk. vii. 8; ϊξουσία τιι /o's, gen.
of the object, authority (to be exercised) over, as των
πνευμάτων των ακαθάρτων, ^Ik. \ΐ. 7 ; with ωστ€ (κβάλΧΐΐν
αυτά added, Mt. χ. 1 ; (ξουσίαν πάσης σαρκός, authority
over all mankind, Jn. xvii. 2, (πάσης σαρκός κυριίαν, Bel
and the Drag. vs. 5) ; [gen. of the subject, toC 2ατανΰ,
Acts xxvi. 18] ; tVi two, power over one, so as to be able
to subdue, drive out, destroy. Rev. vi. 8 ; fVt τα δαιμόνια,
Lk. ix. 1 ; or to hold submissive to one's wUl, Rev. xiii.
7 ; €7ri Tos πΧηγάς, the power to inflict plagues and to
put an end to them. Rev. xvi. 9 ; €ϊτϊ των ΐθνών, over the
heathen nations, Rev. ii. 20 ; em' τίνος, to destroy one.
Rev. .XX. G ; (χιιν (ξηνσίαν t ττι τοϋ πυρός, to ])reside, have
control, over fire, to hold it subject to Ids ivill, Rev. xiv.
18 ; €7Γι τώι* υδάτων, ,\i. G ; ΐπάνω τίνος (ξουσίαν €\(ΐν, to
be ruler over a thing, Lk. xLx. 1 7. b. specifically, a.
of the power of judicial decision; ϊξουσίαν ίχαν
with an inf. of the thing decided : σταυρώσαι and άττολί-
σαί τίνα, Jn. xix. 1 ; foil, by κατά τίνος, the power of
deciding against one, ibid. 11 ; vapadoivai τίνα ■ . . τή
(ξουσία τοϋ ήγιμόνος, Lk. xx. 20. β. of authority to
manage domestic affairs: Mk. .xiii. 34. c. me-
tonymically, a. a thing subject to authority or rule: Lk.
iv. 6 ; jurisdiction : ίκ της (ξουσία: Ήρώδου eori'i', Lk.
xxiii. 7(1 Mace. vi. 11 [cf. Ps. cxiii. (exiv.) 2; Is. xxxi.\.
2]). β. one who possesses authority; (cf. the Lat. use
of honestales, dignitates, auctorilates [so the Eng. authori-
ties, digiuties, etc.] in reference to persons ) ; αα. a
ruler, human magistrate, (Dion. Hal. 8, 44; 11, 32):
Ro. xiii. 1-3; plur. : Lk. xii. 11; Ro. xiii. 1; Tit. iu.
1. ββ. the leading and more powerful among created be-
ings superior to man, spiritual potentates ; used in the
plur. of a certain class of angels (see αρχή, δΰναμις, ^/jo'iOr,
κυρίότης) : Col. i. 16 ; 1 Pet. iii. 22, (cf. Fritzsche on Rom.
vol. ii. p. 226 sq.; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. I.e.]) ; with t'l»
Totf (πονρανίηις added, Eph. iii. 10; πάσα (ξουσία, 1 Co.
XV. 24 ; Eph. i. 21 ; Col. ii. 10; used also of demons :
in the plur., Eph. vi. 12; Col. ii. 15; collectivel}• [cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 469], ή (ξουσία τοί ά(ρος (see at'ip), Eph. ii.
2; τοϋ σκότους. Col. i. 13 [al. refer this to 4 a. (or c. a.)
above (cf. Lk. .xxii. 53 in 2), and regard σκότος as per-
sonified; see σκότοί, b.]. d. a sign of the husband's
authority over his tcife, i. e. the veil with which propriety
required a woman to cover herself, 1 Co. xi. 10 (as /3a-
σί\(ία is used by Diodorus 1, 47 for the sign of regal
power, i. e. a crown). [Syn. see δΰναμις, fin. On the inf.
after cf and (ξ. (χ(ΐν cf. Β. 260 (223 sq.).] *
6ξον<ηάζω ; 1 f ut. pass, (ξουσιασθήσομαι ; ((ξουσία) ;
i. q. (ξονσίαν (χω, to have power or authority, use power:
[el' π\(ίοσι (ξ. πολλών μοναρχιών, Aristot. eth. End. 1, 5
p. 1216% 2] ; (v άτίμοις, Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 44 ; Tirar, to
be inasler of any one, exercise authority over one, Lk. xxii.
25 ; τοϋ σώματος, to be master of the body, i. e. to have
Φχή
226
eirarfyeXla
full and entire authority over the body, to hold the body
subject to one's will, 1 Co. vii. 4. Pass. foil, by υπό Ttxot,
to be brought under the power of any one, 1 Co. vi. 12.
(Sept. several times in Neh. and EccL, chiefly for hp^
and DSr•) [COMP. : κατ-(ξουσίάζω.'\ *
'ξοχή• "if' ή' (fr. ί'^ί'χω to stand out, be prominent; of.
imfftox^q); 1. prop, in tirk. writ, aiii/ prominence or
prujectiiin, as the peak or summit of a moimlain («V
ίξοχϊ] πίτρας, Job xxxix. 28 Sept.) ; in medical writ, a
protuberance, sirelling, wart, etc. 2. metajjli. eminence,
excellence, superiority, (Cic. ad Att. 4, 15, 7 (ζοχί) in
nuUo est, pecunia omnium dignitatem exacijuat) ; άν-
Hpfs oi κατ (ζοχην oiTf s riji πόλίωι, the prominent men
of the city. Acts xxv. 23.*
ίξ-υιτνίζω : 1 aor. subjunc. {'^υπνίσω; (Uttios) ; to Jcal'e
up, awaken out of sleep: [trans, αίτόν^, Jn. .xi. 11.
([.lud^. xvi. 14]; 1 K. iii. 15; Job xiv. 12; Antonin. 6,
31 ; I'lut. [de solert. anim. 20, 4] ; Test. xii. Patr. [Levi
§ 8 ; Jud. § 25, etc.] ; the better Grks. said αφυπνίζω,
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 224 ; [W. § 2, 1 d.].)*
i|-uirvos, -ov, (ϋπνος), roused out of sleep : Acts xvi. 27.
(1 Esdr. iii. 3 ; [Joseph, antt. 11,3, 2].) '
ίξω, adv., (fr. ίξ, as ?σω and (ΐσω fr. c's and els) ; 1.
without, out of doors; a. adverbially: Mk. xi. 4 ; joined
with verbs: ί'στάναι, Mt. xii. 46,47 [WH t.\t. om. the
vs.]; Mk. iii. 31 ; Lk. viii. 20; xiii. 25; Jn. xviii. IG; xx.
11 [Lchm. om.] ; καθησθαι, Mt. xxvi. G9 ; or with some
other verb declaring that the person without is doing
something, Mk. iii. 31. Preceded by the art. 6 ίξω,
absol. he who is without, prop, of place; metaph., in
plur., those who do not belong to the Christian church [cf.
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below ; Mey. on Mk. as below] :
1 Co. v. 12, 13; Cob iv. 5; 1 Th. iv. 12; those who are
not of the number of the apostles, Mk. iv. 11[ (cf. Meyer)
Wllrarg. ίξωθ^ν, q. v.]. With a noun added: al ίξω
TiuXett, foreign, Acts xxvi. 1 1 ; ό ϊξω άνθρωπος, the outer
man, i. e. the body (scii άνθρωπο!, 1 e.), 2 Co. iv. 16. b.
it takes the place of a prep, and is joined with the gen.,
without i. e. out of, outside of, [W. § 54, 6] : Lk. xiii. 33 ;
Acts xxi. 5; lieb. xiii. 11, 12. 2. after the verbs of
going, sending, placing, leading, drawing, etc.,
which commonly take prepositions or adverbs signifying
rest in a place rather than those expressive of motion
toward a place, (^ω has the force of the Lat. fora.i (Germ.
hinaus, heraus), forth out, out of ; a. adverbially, after
the verbs (ξίρχομαι, Mt. xxvi. 75; Mk. xiv. 6S; Lk. xxii.
62; Jn. xix.4,5; Rev.iu.l2; άγω,.Τη. xix. 4, 13 ; προάγω,
Acts xvi. 30 ; (ξάγω, Lk. x.xiv. 50 [R G I>br.] ; βάΚλω and
«βάλλω, Mt. v. 13 ; xiii. 48 ; Lk. viii. 54 R G ; xiii. 28 ;
xiv. 35 (34) ; Jn. vi. 37; ix. 34, 35 ; xii. 31 ; xv. 6; Acts
ix. 40; 1 Jn. iv. 18; Rev. xi. 2 RG; StCpo ίξω, Jn. xi.
43 ; ίξω ποκίν τίνα, Acts v. 34. b. as a ])rep. with the
gen.: after <ΐπίλβ«ι<. Acts iv. 15; άποστίΚ\(ΐν, Mk. v.
10; ίκβαΚλίΐν, Mk. xii. 8 ; Lk. iv. 29 ; xx. 15 ; Acts vii.
58; (ξ(ρχ€σθαι, Mt. xxi. 17 ; Acts xvi. 13; Heb. xiii. 13;
(κπορ(ΰ(σθαι. Mk. xi. 19 ; i^ayeiv, Mk. viii. 23 [R G L Tr
mrg.]: σΰρΕί^/τίκά, .Vets xiv. 19; eXiceii/Tii/a, Acts xxi. 30.
{{uSfv, adv., (fr. ΐξω, opp. to ΐσωθΐν fr. ίσα; cf.
άνωθιν, πάρρωθ(ν), from without, outward, [cf. W. 472
(440)]; 1. adverbially: (ou/«'ari//^), Mt. xxiii. 27 sq.;
Mk. vii. 18; 2 Co. vii. 5 ; τό (ξωβ(ν, the outside, the exte-
rior, Mt. .vxiii. 25 ; Lk. .\i. 39 sc). ; (κβάΧ\(ΐν ίξωθιν (for
Η G ίξω), Rev. xi. 2' L Τ Tr WII ; oi ίξωβ^ν lor <,! i^u,,
those who do not belong to the Christian church, 1 lim.
iii. 7 ; [cf. Mk. iv. 1 1 WH mrg. and s. v. ίξω, 1 a.] ; d ίξωθ(ψ
κόσμοί the outward adorning, 1 Pet. iii. 3. 2. as a ])rep•
osition with the gen. [cf. W. § 54, 6]: Mk. vii. 15; Rev.
xi. 2• [R"""• G L Τ Tr WH ; xiv. 20 where Rec. ΐξωΥ
(ξ-ωθ«ω, -ώ : 1 aor. ίξωσα [so accented by (i Τ ed. 7 Tr,
but L WH ΐξώσ-α] and in Tdf. f'ξίωaa [ \ΙΊί. Ai)p. p. 1G2]
(cf. W. p. 90 (8G); [B. 69 (Gl); Steph. Thesaur. and
Veitch 8. V. ωθίω]) ; to thrust out; expel from one's abode:
Acts vii. 45, (Thuc, Xen., al.). to propel, drire : το
πλοΐον fi'f αιγιαλό», Acts x.wii. 39 [WH txt. (κσ'άισ'αι;
see (κσώζω~], (the same use in Tliuc, Xcn., al.).*
ίξώτίροϊ, -fpa.-fpov, (a comparative fr. ίξω, cf. ίσώτιοο!,
ανώτερος, κατωτ(ρος), outer : τό σκύτος το €^ωτ€ρον, the
darkness outside the limits of the lighted palace (to
which the Messiah's kingdom is here likened), Mt. viii.
12; xxii. 13; xxv. 30. [(Sept.; Strabo, al.)]*
coLKa, see EIKi2.
(Όρτά^ω; (ίορτή) ; to heep a fcasl-dai/, celebrate a fes-
tival : 1 Co. V. 8, on which j}ass. see άζυμος. (Sept. for
Jjn ; Eur., .'Vrstjih., Xeu., Plato, al. ; όρτάζω, Hdt.) *
ί'ορτή, -ης, ή, Sept. for jn ; Grk. ν,-τϊΐ. fr. Horn, down;
in Hdt. όρτή; a feast-dni/, festival : Lk. ii. 42; Jn. v. 1 ;
Λ'ί. 4 ; vii. 2, 37 ; Col. ii. IG ; ή ΐορτη τοΟ πάσχα : Lk. ii.
41 [W. 215 (202); Β. 186 (161)]; Jn. xiii. 1; i. q. ή
ίορτη των αζύμων, Lk. xxii. 1 ; ev rrj topTji, during the
feast, Mt. xxvi. 5; Mk. xiv. 2; ein. iv. 45; vii. 11 ; xii.
20 ; flvai tv TJj ioprij, to be engaged in celebrating the
feast, Jn. ii. 23, cf. Baumg.-Crusius and Meyer ad loc. ;
els την ίορτήν, for the feast, Jn. xiii. 29; άναβαίνιιν (to
Jerusalem) els την ΐορτην, Jn. vii. 8, 10; ερχ(σθίΐί ets την
(ορτην, Jn. iv. 45 ; xi. 56 ; xii. 1 2 ; της ΐορτης μίο-ονσης,
in the midst of the feast, Jn. vii. 14 ; κατά ίορτήν, at
every feast [see κατά, II. 3 a. β.], Mt. xxvii. 15 ; Mk. xv.
6 ; Lk. x.\iii. 1 7 [Rec] ; την ίορτήν ποι^ΐν to keep, cele-
brate, the feast. Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.]; κατά το ίθο! τήί
ίορτής, after the custom of the feast, Lk. ii. 42.*
€ΐΓ-αγγ€λ(α, -as, ή, {ίπαγγίΧλω) ; 1. announcement :
1 .Τη. i. 5 (l{ec., Λvherc <ϊyyfλt'α was long since restored);
κατ iirayyikiav ζωής της e'v Χριστώ 'Ιησοΰ, to proclaim life
in fellowship with Christ, 2 Tim. i. 1 [W. 402 (37G);
cf. κατά, II. fin. But others give ίπαγγ. here as else-
where the sense of promise, cf. 2 below]. 2. promise;
a. the act of promising, a promise given or to be given:
προσ^ίχ(σθαι την από Tivos ίπαγγιλίαν {assent ; the ref-
erence is to a promise to surrender Paul to the power
and sentence of the Jews), Acts xxiii. 2i ; [add, ΐπαγγι-
\ίας δ λόγοί ούτος, Ro. ix. 9]. It is used also of the
divine promises of blessing, esp. of the benefits of salva-
tion by Christ, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 14] : Acts vii.
17; Ro. iv. 14, 16; [plur. Ro. ix. 4]; Gab iii. 1 7 sq. 21;
iv. 23 ; Heb. xi. 1 7 ; 2 Pet. iii. 9 (on which see βραϋνα. "^I ;
Heb. viii. 6 ; xi. 9 ; foil, by the inf. Heb. iv. 1 ; -yivfTai
ΐΤΓογγίΧΧω
227
ετταφω
run, Ro. iv. 13 ; πρόι nva. Acts xiij. 32; xxvi. 6 ; ίρρήθη
TIKI, Gal. iii. lU: ϊστΊ. tiw, belongs to one, Acts ii. 39;
iVayyeXXcCT^ai την en. 1 Jn. ii. 25 ; ίχ(ΐν ewayycXias, to
have received, Heb. vii. 6; 2 Co. vii. 1, [cf. W. 177
(166)] ; to have linked to it, 1 Tim. iv. 8 ; etvm iv i-nayyt-
λι'α, joined with a promise [al. al. ; cf. W. 3'Jl (366)],
Eph. vi. 2,η•γή TTJs eVayyeXtat, the promised land, Heb.
xi. 9 ; τα τίκνα της eVayytXias, born in accordance with
the promise, Ro. ix. 8 ; Gal. iv. 28 ; το πιχνμα της ΐπαγ-
yeXias το aytov, the promised Spirit, Eph. i. 13; αί διαθή-
και της fVayyeXiof, covenants to which was united the
promise (of salvation through the Messiah), Eph. ii. 12;
ή fVayyeXia τοΰ θ(οϊι, given by God, Ro. iv. 20 ; in the
plur. 2 Co. i. 20 ; αί cVayyf Xi'at των τιατίρων, the promises
made to the fathers, Ro. xv. 8 ; with the gen. of the
object, T^ff ζωης^ 1 Tim. iv. 8 ; της τταρονσΊας αυτον^ 2
Pet. iii. 4 ; κατ iirayyiKlav according to jiroinise. Acts
xiii. 23 ; Gal. iii. 29 ; hi ϊπαγγ^λίας, Gal. iii. 18. b. by
meton. a promised good or blessing (cf. ίλπίς, sub fin.) :
Gal. iii. 22 ; Eph. iii. 6 [yet here cf. Mey. or Ellic] ;
άποστξΧλζΐν την ΐπαγγΐΧίαν τοΰ πατρός μου, the blessing
promised by my Father, Lk. x.xiv. 49 ; rrfpi^evtw. Acts
i. 4; κομίζ^σθαι την inayyeXiav, Heb. x. 36; xi. [13 Τ Tr
WH, προσ^(\€σθαι L], 39 ; λαμβάνΐΐν τάς eTrayycXtaff,
Heb. xi. 13 [R G] ; tniTvyxaveiv (παγγίΧιών, ib. vs. 33;
κλϊ^ρονομείΐ' Tcts eVayyfXi'af, Ileb. vi. 12; entTvy^aveLV της
fVayyeXi'aff, ib. 1.5 ; κληρονόμοι, της ΐπαγγξλύις, vs. IT — (to
reconcile Heb. vi. 12, 15, 17 with .xi. 13, 39, which at
first sight seem to be in conflict, we must hold, in ac-
cordance with xii. 22-24, that the O. T. saints, after the
expiatory sacrifice ofi^ered at length to God by Christ,
were made partakers of the heavenly blessings before
Christ's return from heaven ; [al. explain the appar-
ent contradiction by the difference between the initial
and the consummate reception of the promise; see
the Comm. ad 1.]) ; with the epexeget. gen. Χαβί'ϊν την
ΐπαγγίλίαν τον άγιου ττνήματος, the promised blessing,
which is the Holy Spirit. Acts ii. 33; Gal. iii. 14, [cf.
\\ . § 34, 3 a. fin.] ; την tnayyiXlav της αιωνίου κληρονο-
μιάς, Heb. Lx. 15. ([Dem. 519, 8; Aristot. eth. Xic. 10,
1 p. 1164% 29] ; Polyb. 1, 43, 6, and often ; Diod. 1, a ;
Joseph, antt. 3, 5, 1 ; 5, 8, 11 ; 1 Mace. x. 15.)*
ίτΓ-αγγίλλω : [pres. mid. ΐπαγγίλλημαι] ; pf. pass, and
mid. ϊπήγγίΧμαι ; 1 aor. mid. ίπηγγ^ιλάμην ; from Hom.
down ; X. to announce. 2. lo jiromise : pass, ω
inrjyyeXTai, to whom the promise hath been made. Gal.
iii. 19. Mid. lo announce concerning one's self; i. e.
1. to announce that one is about to do or to furnish some-
thing, i. e. lo promise (of one's own accord), to engage
(voluntarily) : 6 ίπαγγ(ΐλάμ(νος. Heb. x. 23 ; xi. 11 ; ίττηγ-
yeXToi, he hath promised, foil, by λίγων, Heb. xii. 26 ;
Ti»/, to give a promise to one, Heb. vi. 1 3 ; τι, Ro. iv 21 ;
Tit. i. 2 ; Tin' τι, Jas. i. 1 2 ; ii. 5 ; 2 Pet. ii. 1 9 ; (παγγιλίαν,
to give a promise, 1 Jn. ii. 25 (Esth. iv. 7 ; [cf. λ\. 225
(211) ; Β. 148 (129)]); foU. by the inf. [cf. W. § 44, 7c.] :
Mk. xiv. 11 ; Acts vii. 5. 2. to profess ; τί, e. g. an art,
to profess one's self skilled in it (την άριτήν. Xen. mem.
1, 2, 7 ; την στρατιάν, Hell. 3, 4, 3 ; σοφίαν, Diog. Laert.
prooem. 12 ; σωφροίτϋνην, Clem. Al. paedag. 3, 4 p. 299,
27 ed. Klotz ; [cf. L. and S. s. v. 5]) : θ^οσίβααν, 1 Tim.
ii. 10; γνώσιν, vi. 21. [CoMP. jrpo-CTrayyi'XXa).] *
ίΐΓ-άγγΛμο, -ros, to, (ίτιαγγίλΧω), a promise : 2 Pet. i.
4 ; iii. 13. (Dem., Isoc., al.) *
eir -όγω, [pres. ptcp. ίπ-άγωκ] ; 1 aor. ptcp. ιπάξας (W.
p. 82 (78) ; [Veitch s. v. άγω]) ; 2 aor. inf. ίπαγαγί'ιν ; fr.
Hom. down ; Sept. chiefly for ΧΌΠ ; to lead or bring upon :
Tivi Ti, to bring a thing on one, i. e. to cause something to
befall one, usually something evil, 2 Pet. ii. 1,5, (-πημα,
Hesiod. opp. 240; άταν. Soph. Ajax 1189; γήρας νόσους
€πάγ(ΐ, Plat. Tim. 33 a. ; ίαυτοϊς SovXfiav, Dem. p. 424, 9 ;
Sfiva, Palaeph. 6, 7 ; κακά. Bar. iv. 29 ; άμίτρητον ν8ωρ, 3
Mace. ii. 4, and in other exx. ; in the Sept. ΐπί τινά τι, as
κακά, Jer. vi. 19; xi. 11, etc.; πληγήν, Ex..xi. 1 ; also in a
good sense, as άγαίά, Jer. xxxi.x. (.xx.xii.) 42; τιν\ (ΰφρο-
σννην. Bar. iv. 29). ίττάγΐΐν το αιμά τίνος «Vt τίνα, to bring
the blood of one upon any one, i. e. lay upon one the guilt
of, make him answerable for, the violent death inflicted
on another : Acts v. 28, (Uke (πάγ(ΐν άμαρτίαν eni nva.
Gen. .\x. 9 ; Ex. xxxii. 21,34; αμαρτίας πατέρων em τίκνα,
Ex. xxxiv. 7).*
ίΐΓ-αγωνίζομ,ΟΑ ; to contend : τινί, for a thing, Jude 3.
(τω Αννίβα, against Hannibal, Plut. Fab. 23, 2 ; τα'ις
νίκαις, added a new contest to his victories, id. Cim. 13,
4 ; by others in diif. senses.) *
ί'ΐΓ-αθροίξω : [pres. pass. ptcp. iTraipotfo/ieiOr]; lo gather
together (to others already present) : pass, in Lk. xi. 29.
(Plut. Anton. 44, 1.)•
■EiraivcTcs [so W. § 6, 11. (cf. Chandler § 325) ; Έπαι-
veTof Rec'.' T; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Lipsius, Gram.
Unters. p. 30 sq. ; Roehl, Inscrr. index iii.], (ίπαινίω),
-ου, 6, Epcenetus, the name of a Christian mentioned in
Ro. xvi. 5.•
iir-oivew, -ω ; fut. ίπαινίσω (1 Co. xi. 22, for the more
com. ίπαινίσομαι. cf. \X . 86 (82) ; [B. 53 (46)]: L txt. Tr
mrg. ίπαινω) ; 1 Άοτ.ίιτήν(σα ; (ΐτταινος) ; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for S^n and r\Td ; to approve, lo praise, (νιϊύι the
ΐπί cf. Germ, be- in beloben [Passow s. v. ϊπί. TV. C. 3
cc.]) : τινά, Ro. XV. 11 ; 1 Co. xi. 22; τινά, foil, by ότι [cf.
W. § 30, 9 b.], Lk. xW. 8 ; 1 Co. .xi. 2 ; absol.,' foil, by
ότι, 1 Co. xi. 1 ".*
ίτΓ -oivos, -ου, <5, (iVi and aivos [as it were, a tale for an-
other; cf. Bum. Lexil. § 83, 4 ; Schmidt ch. 155]) ; ap-
probation, commendation, praise : Phil. iv. 8 ; e/e τίνος,
bestowed by one, Ro. ii. 29 ; ΐπαινον (χ^ιν €κ τίνος, sen.
of pers., Ro. xiii. 3 ; 6 έπαινος γΐνησ(ται (κάστω από τοΰ
θίοΰ, 1 Co. iv. 5 ; with gen. of the pers. to whom the
praise is given, Ro. ii. 29 ; 2 Co. viii. 18: «s ίπαινον, to
the obtaining of praise, 1 Pet. i. 7 ; fh ίπαινόν τίνος, that
a pers. or thing may be praised, Eph. i. 6, 14 ; Phil. i. 1 1 ;
[ηίμπίσθαι fis ίπ. τίνος, 1 Pet. ii. 14] ; tivai ei's ίπαινόν
τίνος to be a praise to a pers. or thing, Eph. i. 1 2.*
cir-aCp<i> ; 1 aor. cTrrjpa, ptcp. ΐττάρας, impv. 2 pers. plur.
€πάρατ€, inf. ίτΐαραι : pf. €7Γηρκα (Jn. xiii. 18 Tdf.) : [Pass,
and Mid., pres. (τταίρομαιΊ ; 1 aor. pass, ίττηρθην; (on the
om. of iota subscr. see αίρω init.) ; fr. Hdt. down; Sept.
chiefly for X'^J, also for 0"!Π ; to lifi up, raise up, raise
ίτταισ-^ννομαι
228
eTTavce
on /liijh : τον άρτίμονα, to hoist up, Acts xxvii. 40 (τα ίστία.
Pint, iiior. p. 870 [de llerod. ii>alijrn. § 3!)]) ; rat χί'ψα!.
in offi-ring prayer, 1 Tim. ii. 8 (Neh. viii. 6 ; Ps. c.\.x.\iii.
(cxx.\iv.) 2) ; in blessiii•,'. Lk. xxiv. 50 [cf. W. § 6.5, 4 c]
(Lev. ix. 22 [yet here i'^npar] ; Sir. 1. 20) ; rat κίφαλάί,
of the timid and sorrowful recoverin•» spirit, Lli. xxi.
28 (so αίχίνα, Pliilci dc prof. § 20) ; roit οφθαΚμοίί, to
look lip, Mt. xvii. 8; l,k. xvi. 23; .la. iv. 3.j ; vi. 5; tir
TiiO, Lk. vi. 20; «r τοκ οίρανόν, Lk. χ viii. 13; Jn. xvii.
I ; την φωνην, Lk. xi. 27 ; Acts ii. 14 ; xiv. 11 ; xxii. 22,
(Dcin. 419, 13 ; Sept. Judg. ii. 4 ; ix. 7 ; 2 S. xiii. 3(3) ;
Την iTTtfivav (πι Ttva, to lift the heel against one (see
WTf'/jra), .In. xiii. 18. Pass, ίττήμθη, was taken np (of
Christ, taken up into heaven). Acts i. 9; reflex, and
metaph. lo be lij'led up with pride, to exalt one's self: 2
Co. xi. 20 (.ler. xiii. 15; Ps. .\lvi. (xlvii.) 10; Sir. xi. 4;
XXXV. (xxxii.) 1 ; 1 Mace. i. 3 ; ii. (i3 ; Arstph. nub. 810 ;
Thuc. 4, 18; Aeschin. 87, 24; with dat. of the thing of
which one is proud, Prov. iii. 5; Zeph. i. 11; Ildt. 9,
49 ; Thuc. 1, 120 ; Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 24) ; —on 2 Co. x.
5 see τψ-ωμη.*
*ιτ-<ιισ-χΰνομαι ; ίη\.(7Γαίσχννθησημαι; 1 aor. ί7ΐ7;σ;^;υΐ'^τ;ΐ',
and with neglect of augm. ΐπαισχννθην (2 Tim. i. Ill L Τ
Tr \VH ; cf. [ 117/. App. p. lUl J ; 15. 34 (30) ; [W. § 12
fin.]) ; fr. Aeschyl. down ; to be iixliamed (eVi on account
of [cf. Is. i. 29 Alex. ; Ellic. on 2 Tim. i. 8] ; see αίσχΰνω) :
ahsol. 2 Tim. i. 12 ; τικά [on the accus. cf. AV. § 32, 1 b. a. ;
I{. 192 (1G6)], of a person, Mk. viii. 38; Lk. i\. 2i; ; τι, of
a thing, Ro. i. 1 •! ; 2 Ί'ίηι. i. 8, 1 β ; eVi τινι, dat. of a thing,
Ko. vi. 21 ; foil, by the inf. Ileb. ii. 11 ; with the ace. of
a pers. and the inf. of a thing, Ileb. xi. IG. (Twice in
the Sept. : Is. i. 29 [Alex. ] ; Job xxxiv. 19.) •
tir-oiTi'ti), -ώ ; 1. Ιο ask besides, ask for more : Horn.
11. 23, 593. 2. to ask again and again, importunatel ij :
Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1416; to beg, to ask alms: Lk. xvi. 3;
[xviii. 35 L Τ Tr WII] ; (Ps.'cviii. (cix.) 10 ; Sir. xl. 28 ;
S<iph. Oed.Col. 13G4).•
ίτΓ-ακολουθί'ω, -ω ; 1 aor. ΐπηκοΚοϋθησα ; tofollnir (dose)
upon, follow after; in the N. T. only metaph. roit ίχνισί
Tivos, to tread in one's footsteps, i. e. to imitate bis ex-
ample, 1 Pet. ii. 21 ; with the dat. of a pers. 1 Tim. v.
24 (opp. to προάγω, to go before ; the meaning is, ' the
sins of some men are manifest now, even before they are
called to account, but the misdeeds of others are exposed
when finally judgment is held'; cf. Huther [or Ellic]
ad loc.) ; epya άγαθω, to be devoted to good works, 1 Tim.
v. 10 ; used, with the dat. of the pers. to be mentally sup-
plied, of the miracles accompanying the preaching of
Christ's ministers, Mk. xvi. 20. (Arstph., Thuc, Xen.,
Plato, sfiq•; occasionally in .Sejit.)*
4π-ακονω : 1 aor. ΐπήκουσα ; fr. Ilom. down ; Sept. often
for njij and y^V : 1. to give ear to, listen to ; to per-
ceive by the ear. 2. to listen to i. e. hear with favor,
grant one's prayer, (Aeschyl. choeph. 725 ; τών (υχων,
Lcian. Tim. 34) : titos, to hearken to one, 2 Co. vi. 2 fr.
Is. xlix. 8 ; often so in Sept.*
(ΐΓ-ακροόομαι, -ώμαι : 3 pers. plur. impf. ίπηκρηωντο ; Ιο
listen to : with the gen. of a pers. Acts xvi. 25. (Plat.
comic, in Rekk. anecd. p. 360; Lcian. Icarom. 1 ; Teat,
xii. Patr. p. 710, test. .los. § 8.)*
<ΐΓ-άν, conj. (fr. «Vfi and Sv), nfler, when : with the sub-
junc prcs. Lk. xi. 34 ; with the subjunc aor., answering
to the Lat. fut. exact, (fut. perf.), Mt. ii. 8 ; Lk. xi. 22.
Cf. Klolz ad Devar. ii. 2, p. 547.•
ΜΙναγκΐς, {ανάγκη, [hence lit. on compulsion']), ner.es-
sarilg : π\ην των ίπάναγκα τούτων, besides these things
wlii<'b are necessarily imposed. Acts xv. 28 [B. 27 (24)].
(Ildt., Andoc, Plato, I)em., Aristot., Dion. Hal., Plut.,
Aelian, Epict.) *
«ΐΓ-αν-άγω ; 2 aor. inf. ΐπαναγαγΐ'ιν, iinpv. (πανάγαγί,
[ptcp. (παναγαγών, Mt. xxi. 1 Η Γ W 1 1 txt. Tr mrg.] ; 1.
lit. lo lead up upon, sc. το πΧοΙον, a ship upon the deep,
i. e. lo put out, Lk. v. 3 (Xen. Hell. G, 2, 28; 2 Mace,
xii. 4) ; with ets τό βάθο{ added, into the deep, ibid. 4.
2. lo lend hack; intrans. to return [cf. B. 144 (126)]:
Mt. xxi. 18 ; (2 Mace. ix. 21 ; Xen. Cyr. 4, 1, 3 ; Polyb.,
Diod., .Toseph., Ildian., al.).*
4ΐΓ-ανα-μ.ιμνήσ•κω ; to recall to mind again: τινά, remind-
ing one, Ro. XV. 15. (Rare; Plato, legg. 3 p. G88 a.;
Dem. 74, (7) 9; [Aristot.].)*
ίτΓ-ανα^ιτανω : 1. lo cause to rest upon anything :
Sept. in Judg. xvi. 26 ace to cod. Alex. ; Greg. Nyss.
2. Alid., [pres. ίπαναπαίομαι] ; fut. ΐπαναπαύσομαι, and
(l^k. X. 6 Τ WII after codd. KB) (παναπαησομαι (.see
αναπαύω) ; to rest upon anything : τινί, metaiih. τω νάμω,
to lean upon, trust to, Ro. ii. 17 (Mic iii. 11 ; 1 Mace. viii.
12). to settle υροη,βχ its abode upon ; (πι τίνα, with the
included idea of antecedent motion towards (see ds, C. 2
p. 18G") ; ή (Ιρηνη <π' αίτόν i. e. shall rest, remain, upon
him or it, Lk. x. G (ro πνιϋμα ί'πί τίνα. Num. xi. 25; 2 Κ.
ii. 15; ί'πίηΐΊ, Num. xi. 26 var.).*
ΪΊΓ-αν-ί'ρχομαι ; 2 aor. (πανηλθον ; lo return, come back
again: Lk. x. 35; xix. 15. (Ildt.; freq. in Attic writ.) *
«ΊΓ-αν-Οσ-Γημι : fut. mid. (παναστησομαι ; to cause to rise
up against, to raise up against ; Mid. lo rise up against
(Ildt., Arfstph., Thuc, Polyb., al.) : ίπί nva, Mt. x. 21 ;
Mk. xiii. 12, as in Dcut. xix. 11 ; xxii. 2G ; Mic. vii. 6.*
€ΐΓ-αν-όρθω(Γΐ5, -ίω?, η, {(ηανορθόω), restoration to an up-
right or α right slate; correction, iinprovement, (in (!rk.
writ. fr. Dem. down) : of life and character, 2 Tim. iii.
^ 6 [cf. τον θ(ον . . . χρόνον γ€ προς ίπανόρθωσιν {αντοΊς)
προσιζάναν, Plut. de sera num. vind. G] ; ivith τοί βίου
added, Polyb. 1, 35, 1 ; Epict. diss. 3, 21, 15 ; σιαυτοϋ,
id. ench. 51,1; [ηβικη hi τίχ προς ανθρωπίνων ίπανόρθωσιν
ηθών, Philo de ebriet. § 22 ; cf. de confus. lingg. § 36 fin.] ;
(cf. (πανορθονν κα\ (Ις μξτάνοιαν άπύγαν, .losej)h. antt. 4,
6, 10).•
ίΐΓ-όνω, adv., (€'πί and άνω [cf. W. 102 (97); Β. 31:•
(273)]), Hdt. et .sqq. ; often in the Sept.; above; 1.
adverbially, a. of place: Lk. xi. 41; b. of number;
beyond, more than : πραθηναι ξπάνω τριακοσίων δηναρίων,
sold for more than three hundred denaries, Mk. xiv. 5 ;
ωφθη (πάνω πιντακοσίοκ άδ(\φο~ΐί, by more than five hun-
dred brethren, 1 Co. .xv. 6; cf. Vv. § 37, 5; [B. 168
(14G)]. 2. as a preposition it is joined with the gen.
[W. § 54, 6], a. of place: Mt. ii. 9; v. 14; xxi. 7 RG;
ΐτταρατο•;
229
tTreLvep
ixiii. 18, 20, [22]; χχτϋ. 37; xxviii. 2; Lk. iv. 39 ; [x.
19]; Rev. vi. 8 [\VH br. the gen.]; xx. 3, [11 Tr txt.].
b. of dignity and power : ^ξονσίαν ^χ^*-ν (πάνω Tittosy Lk.
xix. 17, [19]; ϊπάνω πάντων €στί, Jn. iii. ol", [31" (but
here G Τ WH mrg. om. the cl.)].*
€π-άρατο$, -ov, {ΐπαράομαι [to call down curses upon]),
accursed: Jn. vii. 49 LTTrWH. (Thuc, Plato, Aes-
chin., Dio Cass., al.) *
(ΐΓ-αρκ€», -ω; 1 aor. [iVi;p/ceffa], subjunc. ίπαρκίσα>\
properly, to avail or be stronr) enough for . . . (see άμκίω) ;
hence a. to ward off οτ drive αιηαι/,τί rivt, a, tinn'^ior
another's advantage i. q. a thing from any one (Horn.),
to defend. b. to aid, give aisislance, relieve, (Hdt.,
Aeschyl., al.) : τινί, 1 Tim. v. 10; Mid. to give aid from
one's own resources, 1 Tim. v. Ifi ace. to the reading
(παρκ^Ισθω (L txt. Τ Tr WII mrg.) for ίπαρκ(ίτω (R G L
mrg. WH txt.) ; (κατά ^ΰναμιν αλλι^λοίϊ ΐπαρκΐϊν, Xen.
mem. 2, 7, 1).*
Επάρχ»οΐ, -ov, belonging to an ίπαρχος or prefect ; ή
(πάρχ(ΐος sc. ΐξουσία, i. q. ή ΐπαρχία (see the foil, word),
a prefecture, province : Acts xxv. 1 Τ WII mrg. So ή
ϊπάρχιο!, Euseb. h. e. 2, 10, 3 (with the var. (πάρχ^ιον) ;
2, 26, 2; 3, 33, 3; de mart. Pal. 8, 1 ; 13, 11.*
cirapx(a [-χβία Τ WH (see fi, t)], -as, ή, (fr. ίπαρχοί
i. e. ό cV ap!(fj ων the one in command, ])refect, gov-
ernor), prefecture ; i. e. 1. the office of ίπαρχος or
prefect. 2. the region subject to a prefect ; a province
of the Roman empire, either a larger province, or an ap-
pendage to a larger province, as Palestine was to that
of .Syria [cf. Schiirer, Zeitgesch. p. 144 sqq.] : Acts xxiii.
.'U; XXV. 1 [see the preced. word]; (Polyb., Diod., Plut.,
Dio Cass.). Cf. Krebs, Observv. etc. p. 2.5fi sqq. ; Fischer,
De vitiis Lexx. N. T. p. 432 sqq. ; [BB.DD. (esp. Kitto)
s. V. Province].*
eir-au\is, -fwf, ή, (ΐπί and αυλις tent, place to pass the
niglit in ; hence a country-house, cottage, cabin, fold),
a farm; a dicelling, [A. V. habitation'] : Acts i. 20 fr. Ps.
Ixviii. (Ixix.) 26. (Diod., Plut., al. ; also a camp, military
iinarlcrs, Plato, Polyb.)*
('π-ανριον, adv. of time, i. q. eV avpiov, on the morrow ;
in the N. T. τη ίπαΰμιον, sc. ήμίρα, the next day, on the
morrow: Mt. xxvii. 62; Mk. xi. 12; Jn. i. 29; Acts x.
9, etc.; Sept. for η";πα::.
cir -αυτοψώρω, see αυτόφωρος, p. 87".
Έπαφρά?, -a [B. 20 (17 sq.)], ό, Epaphrns, a Christian
man mentioned in Col. i. 7; iv. 12; Philem. 23. The
conjecture of some that the name is contracted from
'Έπαφρό^ιτοί (q. v. [cf. W. 103 (97)]) and hence that
these two names belong to one and the same man, is not
probable; [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Epa])hras; Bp. Lghtft.
Com. on Phil. p. 61 note ■*]. The name is com. in
inscriptions.*
ίτΓ-αφρίξω; to foam up (Mosch. 5, 5); to cast out as
foam, foam out: τι, Jude 13 calls the godless and grace-
less set of whom he speaks κύματα ϊπαφρίζοντα ras ίαυτών
αΐηχύνας, i. e. (dropping the figure) impelled by their
restless passions, they unblushingly exhibit, in word and
deed, their base and abandoned spirit ; cf. Is. Ivii. 20.'
'ΕτταφρόΒιτοϊ, -ου, ό, (fr. Αφροδίτη, prop, 'charming'),
Epnphroditus, an associate with Paul in the ministry :
Phil. ii. 2.) ; iv. 18. See Έπαφρα! above.*
ΐπ-£γ(£ρω : 1 aor. eTTrjyfipa ; to raise or excite against :
t\ ('πι nva. Acts xiii. 50 (διωγ/ιόκ) ; κατά τίνος, to stir up
against one : τας ψνχας . . . κατά των άδ(λφων. Acts xiv. 2.*
iml, [fr. temporal iVi and fi, lit. thereupon when; Cur-
tius, Erlaut. etc. p. 182; cf. Etym. Magn. 35G, 7], conjunc-
tion, (Lat. cum), tchen, since, [cf. W. § 53, 1] ; used 1.
of time, after; so once in the N. T. : Lk. vii. 1 (where
L Τ Tr txt. WH txt. (π(ώή). 2. of cause, etc., since,
seeing that, because: Mt. xviii. 32; [xxi. 46 TTrWII];
xxvii. 6 ; Mk. xv. 42 ; Lk. i. 34 ; Jn. xiii. 29 ; xix. 31 ;
1 Co. xiv. 12; 2Co. xi. 18; xiii. 3; Heb.v. 2, 11; vi. 13;
ix. 17; xi. 11; end olv since then, Heb. ii. 14; iv. 6.
Agreeably to a very common abbreviation of speech,
we must often supply in thought between iVti and the
proposition depending upon it some such phrase as if it
is (or were) otherwise ; so that the particle, although
retaining the force of since, is yet to be rendered other-
wise, else, OT for then, (Germ, sonst) ; so in Ro. xi. 6, 22 ;
Heb. ix. 26 ; (π(1 άρα, 1 Co. v. 10 ; vii. 14, [cf. W. § 53,
8 a.]; ί'πίΐ alone before a question [cf. W. 480 (44 7);
B. 233 (200)]: Ro. iii. 6; 1 Co. xiv. 16; xv. 29; Heb. x.
2; (4Macc. i. 33; ii. 7, 19; vi. 34 (35) ; vii. 21 ; viii. 8).
Cf. Matthiae § 618; [B. § 149, 5].*
ίΐΓίΐ-8ή, conjunction, (fr. (π(ί and 5η), Lat. cum Jam,
when now, since now, [cf. W. 434 (404), 448 (417) ; Ellic.
on Phil. ii. 26] ; 1. of time ; when now, after that ;
so once in the N. T. : Lk. vii. 1 L Τ Tr txt. WH txt. 2.
of cause; since, seeing that,forasnnich as: Mt. xxi. 46
[RGL]; Lk. xi. 6: Acts xiii. 46; xiv. 12; χ v. 24; 1 Co.
i. 21, 22; xiv. 16; xv. 21 ; [2 Co. v. 4 Rec."']; Phil. ii. 26.*
€ΐΓίΐ-δή-ΐΓ£ρ [f7rfi6i7 π(ρ Lchm.], conjunction, (fr. en-it,
δή and πε'ρ), seeing that, forasmuch as; Itala and Vulg.
</uoniam (piidem, since now, [cf. W. 448 (41 7)] : Lk. i. 1.
(Aristot. phys. 8, 5 [p. 256", 25] ; Dion. Hal. 2, 72; Pliilo
ad Gai. § 2.">. and Attic writ. fr. Thuc. down.) *
«ir-ttSov [Tdf. 7 (φ(18ον~\ ; inipv. ΐπιδί (Lchm. ίφιδί, cf.
W. § 5, 1 d. 14 ; B. 7 ; [reff. s. v. άφ(ΐδον] ; besides see
(ίδω, I.) : til look upon, to regard : foil, by a telic inf.,
(π(Ίδ(ν άφβλίίκ το όν(ΐδόί μου ([R. V. looked upon me to
take away etc.]. Germ, hat hergehlickt), Lk. i. 25 ; ίπΐ τι,
to look upon (for the purpose of punishing, cf. Lat. o;i/-
madvertere). Acts iv. 29.*
ίτΓ-ίίμι; (ί'πί, and dpi to go) ; to come upon, approach ;
of time, ίο come on, be at ham! ; ptcp. (πιών, -οίσα, -ov,
next, following : τη ίπιονση, sc. ήμ(ρα• on the following
day. Acts xvi. 11; xx. 15; xxi. 18, (Pulyb. 2, 25, 11 ;
5, 13. 10; Joseph, antt. 3, l,(i; [Prov. xxvii. 1]; etc.):
with ήμ(ρα added (as in the earlier writ. fr. Hdt. down),
Acts vii. 26; τη (πιοΰση ννκτί. Acts xxiii. 11. Cf. f.ob.
ad Phryn. p. 464.*
iiTii-irep, conjunction, (ϊπίί, π/ρ), since indeed, since al
all events; [it introduces a " known and unquestioned
certainty "] : Ro. iii. 30 R G (but L Tr d π(ρ. Τ WH
(ΐπίρ). Cf. Hermann SiaWg. p. 7Si; [Baumlein p. 204 ;
AV. 448 (417). Fr. the Tragg. down.]*
ΐττεισαΎωΎη
230
eire ρώτημα
«ΐΓ<ισ-αγωγή, -^r, ij, a bringing in hexides or in n'l(Ution
to ir/iiil i.\' or has hcen hrouf/ht tn : κρύττονος Λττιδοί, Hub.
vii. 19. (Ill .Iose])li. aiitl. 1 1, (!, 2 used of the introduotion
of a new ivife in place of one repmliated; ίτίρων Ιητρων,
Hippocr. p. 27 [vol. i. )). 81 ed. Ki'ibn]; προσώπων, of
characters in a plav, Dion. Hal. scr. cens. 2, 10; in the
plur. of places for lettin<; in the enemy, Thuc. 8, 92.) *
έΐΓ-«ισ--^ρχο|χαι : fut. itrticeXfiaopai ; 1. to come in
besides or lo llmse who are alreaili/ aithin; to enter aftev-
umrds, (lidt., Time, Plalo, al.). 2. lo come in upon,
come upon !>>/ enterinf] ; lo enter against : cVt τίνα, ace. of
pers., Lk. .\.\i. ;ί3 L Τ Tr txt. Wll ; with simple (hit. of
pers. 1 Maec. -wi. 16.*
ϊτΓίΐτο, adv., (eVi, (Ιτά), thereupon, thereafter, then,
afiericards; used a. of time: Mk. vii. 5 II G; Lk.
xvi. 7; Gal. i. 21 ; .las. iv. 14 ; μίτά τοϋτο is added re-
dundantly in Jn. xi. 7 (cf. Meyer ad loc. ; W. § G5, 2 ;
[15. 397 (340)]) ; a more definite specification of time is
added epe.\c'(;etically, μιτα ΐτη τρία, (ial. i. 18; δια 8e•
KuTfaaapav ΐτων, Gal. ii. 1. b. in enumerations it is
used a. of time and order: πρώτον . . . ΐπΐίτα, 1 Co.
XV. 46; I Th. iv. 17; πρότ^μυν . . . ΐπατα, Ileb. vii. 27;
απαρχή . . . «πίΐτα, 1 Co. XV. 23 ; tiTa [but Τ Tr mr^.WII
nirg. Ιπίΐτα] . . . ίπατα, 1 Co. xv. 5, 6 ; iireira . . . ίπατα,
ib. 7 Lmrg. Τ Tr mi-n;. U'H mrg. β. of order alone :
πρώτον . . . ίπατα, Ileb. vii. 2 ; τρίτον . . . «jrftra . . . £πίΐ-
τα (II G «τα), 1 Co. .xii. 2S.*
cir-cKciva (i. ([. «V (Kelva sc. μίρη [cf. W. § 6, 1 1. fin.]),
adv., l/eijond : with the '.xcn., Βαβυλώνας, Acts vii. 43.
(Often in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down both with and without
the gen.; in the Sept. x\m. v. 2"; Gen. xxxv. IG; Jer.
xxii. 19.)•
6ΐΓ-ίκ-τίΙνω : [pres. mid. ptcp. eVeKrciTO/jfi/of] ; to
stretch out to or towards ; Mid. to stretch (one's self) for-
ward to : with dat. of tiling indicating the direction [W.
§52,4, 7], Phil. iii. 13 (14), (see ϊμπροσθίν, 1 fin.).*
ίτΓίνεύτηϊ, -ου, ό, {^π^νδυνω or ίπΐνδνω, q. v., [cf. U . 25 ;
94 (90)]),(/ii n/i/iirijarmeni, (TertuW. superindumentum) :
Jn. xxi. 7, whore it seems to denote a kind of linen blouse
or frock which fishermen used to wear at their work.
(Soph. frag. 391 Diml. [(248 Ahrens) ; Poll. 7, 45 p. 717];
Sept. twice [thrice] for 4'i'"3, 1 S. xviii. 4 [Alex.] ; 2 S.
xiii. 18 ; [add Lev. viii. 7 Alex.].) *
iir-iv -δύω: I aor. mid. inf. ΐπινδύσασθαι ; to put on over
[A. V. to he clothed upon] ; 2 Co. v. 2, 4. (Plut. Pelop.
U ; actively, Joseph, antt. 5, 1, 12.) *
ίΐΓ-ί'ρχομαι ; fut. ΐπ(\(ϋσομαι ; 2 aor. (πηλθον (3 pers.
plur. (πηλθαν. Acts xiv. 19 L Τ Tr VVII) ; Sejrt. chiefly
for Kl3 ; 1. In come lo, to arrive ; a. univ., foil, by
από with a gen. of place. Acts xiv. 19. b. of time; In
come on, he at hand, be future : iv toIe αϊώσι to'is ίπιρχο-
μίνοκ, Eph. ii. 7, (Is. xli. 4, 22, 23 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn,
down); of that \vliich time will bring, lo impend: ή τα-
λαιπωρία ή ίπίρχομίνη, Jas. V. I ; τινί, Lk. xxi. 26, (Is.
Ixiii. 4 ; also of things favorable, η ei\oyia. Sir. iii. 8).
2. to come upon, overtake, one ; so even in Hom., as of
rfeep, τινά. Od. 4, 793; 10, 31 ; τιι-ί, 12, 311 ; of disease,
11, 200; ί'πί τίνα, a. of calamities: Lk. xxi. 35 RG;
Acts viii. 24 ; xiii. 40 [L Τ Tr txt. WII om. Tr mrg. br.
ίφ' ύ.], (Gen. xiii. 21 ; Mic. iii. 1 1 ; Zeiih. ii. 2 ; 2 Cli. xx.
9; Jer. v. 12 [here ^|it]). b. of the Holy .Spirit, de-
scending and ojieratiug inone : Lk. i. 35; Acts i. 8. c.
of an enemy attacking one : ΐπίλθων νικήσ-η αίτιΊν, Lk. xi.
22; (Horn. II. 12, 136; 1 S. x.xx. 23; w. dat. of jiers.
Ildian. 1, 8, 12 [6 Bekk.]).•
4π-«ρωτάω, -ω ; impf. «τιτ/ρώτων? fut. ίττ^ρωτησω; 1 aor.
(πηρώτησα; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. {πίρωτηθύς; Sept. mostly
for ^Vt.O, sometimes for ϋ"Π ; 1. lo accost one with an
iiii/uiri/, put a i/ueslion to, inquire of, ask, inlerrogale,
[cV; directive, uniformly in the N.T.; Mey. on .Mk.
xi. 29 (cf. f ίτι, D. 2)] : tito, Mk. i.\. 32 ; xii. 34: λΜΙ. xxii.
46 ; Lk. ii. 46 ; 1 Co. xiv. 35 ; Jn. xviii. 21 Κ (J; τιχά τι,
ask one any tlUng, Mk. vii. 1 7 L Τ Tr \V II ; xi. 29 ; Lk.
.\x. 40 ; Tiva πίρί Ttvoj, one about a thing, Mk. vii. 1 7 II (ΐ ;
[Lk. ix. 45 l.chm.], (Ildt. 1, 32; Dem. 1072, 12); foil,
by λίγωκ with the words used by the questioner, Mt. xii.
10; xvii. 10; Mk.ix. 11 ; xii. IH; Lk. iii.lO, 14; xx. 27;
xxiii. 3 [K(; L]. and often in the Synoptic Gospels; foil.
by cl, irhi'lher, Mk. viii. 23 ; xv. 44 ; Lk. xxiii. 6 ; or some
other form of the indirect question, Acts xxiii. ;i4 ; ϊπηρώ-
των Xiyovres [L Τ Tr WH om. Aty.], τι'γ ("η, Lk. viii. 9 ;
(π(ρωτάν θ(όν Ιο consult God (Num. x.xiii. 3 ; .Josh. Ix. 20
(14) ; Judg. i. 1 ; xviii. 5 ; Is. xi.x. 3, etc.; Thuc. 1, 118,
[etc.]), hence to seek to know God's purpose and lo do his
ici!/, Ro. X. 20 fr. Is. bcv. 1. 2. by a usage foreign
to the Greeks, lo addi-ess one with a request or demand;
to ask of or demand of one : foil, by the inf. Mt. xvi. 1 (so
cVfp. τινά τι, Ilebr. hw, in Ps. cxxxvi. (cxxxvii.) 3 : [this
sense is disputed by some; see Zezschwitz as referred to
at end of next word; cf. Weiss on Mt. 1. c, and see
ίρωτάω, 2]).
ίτΓΐρώτημα, -ros, τ<5, (ί'ττίρωτάω) ; 1. an inquiry, a
question : Ildt. 6, C7 ; Thuc. 3, 53. 68. 2. a demand;
so for the Cliald. xSKl^ in Dan. iv. 14 Theod.; seet^eptu•
τάω, 2. 3. As the terms of in(iuiry and demand often
include the idea of desire, the word thus gets the signi-
fication of earnest seeking, i. e. a craving, an intense de-
sire (so ΐπιρωτανιΐίτι, lo long for something, 2 S. xi. 7 —
[but surely the phrase here (like ^ O^'d) means simply
to ask in reference lo, ask about]). If this use of the
word is conceded, it affords us the easiest and most con-
gruous explanation of that vexed passage 1 Pet. iii. 21 :
"which (baptism) now saves us [you] not because in re-
ceiving it we [ye] have put away the filth of the flesh,
but because we [ye] have earnestly sought a conscience
reconciled to God " (σ-υν(ώησ(ως άγαβης gen. of the obj.,
as opp. to σαρκ6ς ρίπου). It is doubtful, indeed, whether
fif 6(ύν is to be joined with ίπψώτημα, and signifies a,
craving directed tinio God [W. 194 (1.S2) — yet less fully
and decidedly than in ed. 5, p. 21 G sq.], or with συνίίδησκ,
and denotes the attitude of the conscience towards (in
relation to) God ; the latter construction is favored by a
comparison of Acts xxiv. 16 άπρόσκοπον συνιίδησιν ?χ(ΐν
προ: τόι/ θιάν. The signification of tVip. which is ap)-
proved by others, viz. stipulation, agreement, is fir.st met
with in the Byzantine writers on law ; " moreover, tli»
εττεχω
231
€7ri
formula κατά το ΐπ^ρωτημα της σ(μνοτάτης βουλής, common
in inscriptions of tlie age of the Antonines and the follow-
ing Cxsars, exhibits no new sense of the word 1,::ρώτημα•,
for this formula does not mean ' ace. to the decree of the
senate' (ex senatus consuUo, the Grk. for which is κατά
τά δό^αιτα τη βου\η), but ' after inquiry of or application
to the senate,' i. e. ' with government sanction.' " Ze-
zschwitz, Petri ap. de Christi ad inferos descensu senten-
tia (Lips. 1857) p. 45; \_Farrar, Early Days of Christi-
anity, i. 138 n.; Kahler, Das Gewissen, i. 1 (Halle 18 78)
pp. 331-338. Others would adhere to the (more ana-
logical) passivi; sense of iTsep. \\z. 'the thing asked
(the demand) of a good conscience towards God ' i. q.
the avowal of consecration unto him].*
«Γ-ί'χω ; impf. ίπ^Ιχον ; 2 aor. ίπίσχον ; 1. to have
or hold upon, apply : sc. τον νουν, to observe, attend to, foil,
by an indir. quest., Lk. xiv. 7 ; τίνί, dat. of pers., to give
attention to one. Acts iii. 5 ; 1 Tim. iv. 16, (with dat. of a
thing, Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 2 ; 2 Mace. hi. 25 ; Polyb. 3, 43,
2, etc. ; fully οφθαλμάν τινι, Lcian. dial. mar. 1, 2). 2.
to hold towards, hold forth, present : λόγον ζωής, as a light,
by which illumined ye are the lights of the world, Phil. ii.
16 [al. al., cf. Mey. or Ellic. ad loc.]. 3. to check ([cf.
Eng. hold up']. Germ, anhalten) : sc. ίμαυτάν, to delay,
stop, stay, Acts xix. 22, and in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ;
[cf. W. § 38, 1 ; B. 144 (126) ; Fritzsche on Sir. v. 1].*
«τηρίάζω; {ίττήραα [spiteful abuse, cf. Aristot. rhet. 2,
2, 4]) ; to insult; to treat abusively, use desjjitefully ; to re-
vile : ηνά, Mt. V. 44 R G ; Lk. vi. 28, (with dat. of pers.,
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 31 ; 3, 5, 16) ; in a forensic sense, to
accuse falsely: with the ace. of a thing, I Pet. iii. 16.
(Xen., Isaeus, Dem., Philo, Plut., Lcian., Hdian. ; to
threaten, Hdt. 6, 9 [but cf. Cope on Aristot. u. s.].) *
«rt, [before a rough breathing /φ' (occasionally in Mss.
ίπ; see e. g. Ps. cxlv. (cxlvi.) 3), and also in some in-
stances before a smooth breathing (as 4(f> Ikirihi, Acts
ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20(21) Tdf.) ; seea0e(8oi/. It neglects
elision before proper names beginning with a vowel
(exc. hlyvwrov Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.'s
txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq. ;
cf. Λν. §5, 1 a. ; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr.
local prefix dpi; Curtius §335], joined to the gen., the
dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat.
super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note]).
Δ. with the Geniti\t: [cf. TV. § 47, g. ; B. 33G
(289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on
which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with
the abl.. Germ, ou/with the dat.); after verbs of abid-
ing, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.;
of doing anything: ΙτΛ κλίνης, ilt. ix. 2: Lk. xvii.
34 ; (πι του δώματος, Mt. xxiv. 17; Lk. xvii. 31 : cir' ίρη-
μίας (cf. on a desert), Jlk. viii. 4 : ini των νιφΛών, Mt.
-xxiv. 30 ; xxvi. 64 ; ίπ\ (της) γ^ς, Mt. vi. 1 ; ix. 6 ; xxiii.
9; xxviii. 18; Lk. xxi. 25; Acts ii. 19, and very often;
em T^r θαλάσσης, on (the surface of) the sea, Mt. xiv.
25 RG; 26 LTTr WII; Mk. vi. 48, [49]; Rev. v. 13,
and,acc. to theinterp. of raany,.Tn.vi. 19: but cf . Baumg•-
Crusius ad loc. [per contra, cf. LUcke ad loc. ; Meyer on
Mt. 1. c.], (.Job ix. 8 ; βάδιζαν ΐφ' CSaros, Lcian. philops.
13 ; ζττϊ Toil πίλάγονς ^ιαθίοντξς, v. h. 2,4; [Artem. oneir.
3, 16] ; on a different sense of the phrase in't τής θαλάσ-
σης see 2 a. below [\V. 374 (351)]) ; nou'tv σημ(Ία (ττΐ των
άσθ(νοΰντων, to be seen upon the bodies of men, exter-
nally, {on the sick [cf. AV. 375 (351)]), Jn. vi. 2 ; ίκάθισα
and κάθημαι [καθίζομαι} etri, Jit. xix. 28 ; xxiii. 2 ; xxiv.
3 ; XXV. 31 ; xxvii. 1 '.} ; ,In. xix. 13 ; Acts xx. 9 : Rev. ix.
1 7, etc. ; ΐστην, ΐστηκα inl, Lk. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 40 ; Rev.
X. 5, 8 ; where parts of the body are spoken of : im χιιρων,
Mt. iv. 6 ; Lk. iv. 11 ; i^i τής κίφαλής, Jn. xx. 7; 1 Co.
xi. 10 ; Rev. x. 1 R G [al. ace] ; xii. 1 ; σινδόνα ΐπ\ γυμνού,
Mk. xiv. 51 ; ejr! toC μετώπου [or -ττων]. Rev. vii. 3 ; i.x.
4 ; xiii. 16 [Rec, al. ace] ; xiv. 9. b. Like the prep, t»
(see the exposition s. v. h, I. 7 p. 21 2••), so also ίττί with
the gen. is used after verbs expressing motion to indi-
cate the rest following the motion ; thus after β,ιλλ^ιν,
Mk. iv. 26 ; Mt. xxvi. 12 ; anflpeiv, Mk. iv. 31 : τιθίναι,
.In. xix. 19; Acts V. 15; [Lk. viii. 16 L Τ Tr WH] ;
(πιτιθίναι, Lk. viii. 16 [R G] ; καθύναι. Acts x. 11 ; πίπτ^ιν,
Mk. ix. 20; xiv. 35 ; ίπιγράφ^ιν, Heb. x. 16 R G ; ίλκίίΐν,
Jn. xxi. H R G ; ίρχισθαι, Heb. vi. 7 ; Rev. iii. 10 ; [άι/α-
Γίλλίΐι», Lk. xii. 54 Τ Tr mrg. AV'H]; ■γ(νόμ(νος ϊττι τοΰ
τόπου (cf. our having arrived on the spot), Lk. xxii. 40,
[cf. W. p. 376 (352) and see below, C. L 1 b. fin.]. Kpepip
Tiva fni (Hebr. ^•^_ nSri, Gen. xl. 19 ; Deut. x.xi. 22, etc.),
for which the Latin has su.<j)endere ex, de, a, and alicui.
Acts V. 30; X. 39; Gal. iii. 13. c. fig. used of that upon
which any thing rests, (like our upon) [cf. W. 375
(351) ; B. 336 (289) ; Ellic. on 1 Tim. as below] : ίνα
σταθΐι ίπ\ στόματος etc. ("S'S;; ^'P,"' Deut. xLx. 15), rest-
ing on the declaration, etc., Mt. xviii. 16 ; 2 Co. xiii. 1 ;
more simply ίπ\ μαρτνρων, 1 Tim. v. 19 ; in the adv. phrase
fn' αληθείας (on the ground of truth), see oXijfleia, I. 1.
[c'. akin is its use (with a personal or a reflex, pron.) to
denote dependence, as in λογιζίσθω ϊφ' (al. άφ' q. v.
Π. 2 d. aa.) ίαντον. 2 Co. x. 7 Τ Tr WH {for kim.ielf, i. e.
apart from and independently of others ; R. V. uyith him-
self) ; cf. Kuhner ii. 432 ; L. and S. s. v. A. I. 1 d.] d.
fig. used of things, affairs, persons, which one is
set over, over which he exercises power; Lat.
supra, our over [cf. below, B. 2 b. and C. I. 2 e.] : ίπ\
πάντων, Ro. ix. 5 ; Eph. iv. 6 (where ίπι, διά and iv are
distinguished) : καθίστημί τίνα ίπι τίνος, Mt. x.xiv. 45 ;
.■ίχν. 21, 23; Lk. xii. 42; Acts vi. 3, (Gen. xxxix. 4, 5;
1 ;Macc. vi. 14 ; x. 37, etc. ; Plat. rep. 5 p. 460 b., etc.) ;
8ί8ωμΙ τινι (ζονσίαν ίπ'ι τίνος. Rev. ii. 26 ; €χ^ω ίζηυσία»
ΙπΙ τίνος. Rev. xx. 6 ; βασίλή^ιν ΐπϊ τικογ, Mt. ϋ. 22 R G
Tr br. ; Rev. v. 10 ; ?χ(ΐν ϊφ' ίαυτοϋ βασίλία. Rev. ΐχ. 11 ;
€χ(ΐν βασιλίίαν €π\ των βασιλέων, Rev. χ\η. 18 ; 6f ην ίπι
της Ύάζης, who was over the treasury. Acts viii. 27 ; ό ewi
τοΰ κοιτώνας, he who presided over the bed-chamber, the
chamberlain. Acts xii. 20 (Passow i. 2 p. 1035* gives
many exx. fr. Grk. auth. [cf. L. and S. s. v. A. ill. 1; Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 474 ; Soph. Lex. s. v.] ; for e.xx. fr. the Ο Τ.
Apocr. see Wahl, Clavis Apocr. p. 218*). e. of that to
which the mental act looks or refers: λί•γ(ΐν ίπΐ
τίνος, to speak upon {of) a thing. Gal. iii. 16 (Plato,
232
€7ΓΙ
Charm, p. 155 d. ; legg. 2 p. GG-.' d.; Ael. v. h. 1, 30;
scrihere super re, Cic. ad Att. 16, 6 ; dixserere super, Tiic.
ann. 6, 28; cf. VV. 375 (351); [B. 83G (289)]). f. of
one on whom an obligation lia.s been laid: (ϋχην ϊχιιν
ΐφ' (αντον, have (taken) on themselves a vow, have
bound themselves by a vow, Acts ,\.\i. 23 [WII txt. <ϊφ'
ί'αυτ. (see άιτό, II. 2 d. aa.)]. 2. used of vicinity,
i. e. of the pl.ace <il, ticnr, hard hi/, which, ((ierm. bei, an) ;
a. prop. KoKnos ό fVt ηοσιΒηίου, lldt. 7, 11."); e'n'i των
ΰνρων, [Acts V. 23 LT Tr Wll] (1 Mace. i. 55; [I'lut.
G. (!r.icch. 14, 3 p. 841 c.]) ; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 13C6
§ 584 ; Passow s. v. p. 1U34'' ; [L. and S. s. v. I. 1 a. sub
fin.]. But the e.N.x. of this signification adduced from
the N. T. [with the e.xception of Acts 1. c] (and most
of those fr. (!rk. auth. also) are such as to allow the ren-
dering of fVi by super also, over or abore [so W. 374 sq.
(351)] : «Vl T^i θαΧάσαηί at the sea, upon the shore, or
ahore the sea, for the shore overhung the sea, Jn. vi. 19
(?[cf. 1 a. above]); .\.\i. 1, (Ex. xiv. 2; Deut. i. 40; 1
.Mace. xiv. 34 ; xv. 1 1 ; Polyb. 1, 44, 4 ; cf. the French
Boulogne sur mer, Chalons sur Marne, [Eng. Stratford
on AvonJ, etc. ; «Vl τοϋ ■ποταμού, Ezek. i. 1 ; [Xen. an.
4, 3, 28] ; tVl τοϋ 'lopMvav, 2 K. ii. 7) ; cVdi'nv «Vi ttjs
τραπίζη! Tivos (Germ, iiber demands Tixche essen, [cf.
KuL'. (ircr one's food, over one's cups, etc.]), food and
drink placed upon the table, Lk. xxii. 30 cf. 21 ; σνκην
ί'πΐ τ^Γ όδοΟ, a fig-tree above (i. e. higher than) the way,
Mt. x.\i. 19. b. before, with gen. of a pers., in the pres-
ence of one as spectator, or auditor, [W. 375 (351) ; B.
33t! (289)] : Mt. xxviii. 14 [L Tr WH mrg. wrd] ; Mk.
.\iii. 9 ; Acts xxiv. 19, 20 ; xxv. 9 ; xxvi. 2 ; 1 Co. vi. 1,
6 ; 2 Co. vii. 14; 1 Tim. vi. 13 [some bring this under II.
below ; see μαρτνρίω^ ; ί'πΐ τοΟ βήματος Και'σαροΓ, Acts
XXV. 10. c. e'jrl τον ( Rec. τηί) βάτου at the hush, i. e. at
the place in the sacred volume where the bush is spoken
of, Mk. xii. 2(i (see iv, I. 1 d.). II. of Time when;
with gen. of a pers. in the time or aye of a, man, [" in the
dn>/s o/""] ; at the time when an office was held h>i one ;
under the administration of, [cf. AV. 375 (352); B. 33G
(289)]: Mk. ii. 26; Lk. iii. 2; iv. 27; Acts xi. 2>i ; (1
Mace. xiii. 42; xiv. 27, [for other exx. in which this
phrase is equiv. to " in or of the reign etc. of" and is
preceded by a specification of the year etc., see B. D.
Am. ed. p. 651 note'']; 2 Mace. viii. 19; xv. 22; for
nunierou.s exx. fr. Grk. writ, see Passow i. 2 p. 1035,
[less fully in L. and S. s. v. A. Π.]). with the gen. of a
thing, at the time of any occurrence: em τής μ(τοίκ(σίαί
Ba/3vXoufot, at the time of the deportation to I>al)ylon,
Mt. i. 1 1 ; [on Lk. xii. 54 Τ Tr mrg. WH see δυσμή} : of
the time when any occupation is (or was) carried on : ΐπι
των προσ(υχων μον, Lat. in precibus meis, at my prayers,
when I am praying, Ko. i. 10 (9); Eph. i. 16; 1 Th. i.
2; Philcm. 4. of time itself, in ΐσχάτων and (ace. to
another reading) ίσχάτου των ήμ(ρων (lit. at the end of
the days) : 2 Pet. iii. 3; lleb. i. 2 (1), (for the Hebr.
D"p;n η'1.ΠΚ3, Gen. xHx. 1 ; Xum. xxiv. 14; .Ter.xx.xvii.
(xxx.)24 : Mic.iv. 1 : Dan. x. 14); ϊπ ϊσχάτου τοΐι χρόνου.
Jude 18 L Τ TrWII ; [τύνχράνων, 1 Pet. i. 20 L Τ TrWH].
B. with the Dative, used of Place [W. 392 (366)
sq. ; B. 33U (289) sq.] ; and 1. properly ; a. of the
place where or in which (Lat. in with the abl.,
(ierm. aw/ with the dat.) [Eng. on, etc.], where contin-
uance, position, situation, etc., are spoken of: ίφ' ω (L
txt. Τ Tr WII όπου) κατίκατο, Mk. ii. 4 ; λίθος i'lrl λί^ω
Ι-θον Τ Tr WII], Mk. xiii. 2 ; «'πϊ πίνακί, Mt. xiv. 8, ΐΓ;
Mk. vi. 25; en't τοίί κροββάτοΐί, Mk. vi. 55; άνηκλ'ίναί
πάντας <πί τω χύρτω, ^ik. vi. ;>!Ι ; ίπίκίΐτο (π αΰτώ. lay
upon it, Jn. xi. 38 ; ΐφ' imrois, Kev. xix. 14. b. of the
place in which (Lat. in with the abl.. Germ, auj
with the ace), after verbs expressing motion towards
a place, to denote a remaining in the place after the
motion, [Eng. upon, at, etc.] : βά\λ(ΐν\ίθον ϊηίτινι. dat. of
pers.. Jn. viii. 7 Rec. ; οικοδομ(Ίν, Mt. xvi. IK ; (ποικο8ομ€Ϊν,
Eph. ii. 20; (πιβάΧλιιν,Μΐ. ix. 16 (Lk. v. 3i; (ττιβάλλίΐν
ίπί τι) ; (πφράπτ{ΐν, Mk. ii. 21 (where L Τ Tr Wll have
ini with ace); ίπιπίπταν, Acts viii. 16. c. of the
place above which (Lat. super. Germ, iiber, [Eng.
overl) : ϊπ αίτω, over his head, Lk. xxiii. 38 (for which
Mt. xxvii. 37 (πάνω Trjs κ(φα\ή! αυτού). d. of the
place at, or by, or near which: ίπι θύρακ and «π! τ^
βΰρα, Mt. xxiv. 33 ; Mk. xiii. 29 ; Acts v. 9. (and often
in Grk. writ.; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1037'; [L. and S. s. v.
B. I. la.; cf. A. I. 2 a. above]) ; em τή προβατικη, Jn.
V. 2; cttI τω ιτοταμω. Rev. ix. 14 ; «ττΐ τη στοά. Acts iii.
11; i'lr' [L Τ 'J"r Wll παρ'] αίτοί! fVi/jfii/tu, .Vets xxviii.
14. 2. Metaph. ; a. of that upon which any action,
effect, condition, rests as a basis or sup port; prop.
upon the ground of; and a. of that upon which any-
thing is sustained or upheld: ζήν ίπί τινι, to sus-
tain life on (by) a thing, Mt. iv. 4 (where LTr, the sec-
ond time, fV, [cf. W. 3.s9 (364) note]) ; Lk. iv. 4, (Deut.
viii. 3 for S^ Π'ΓΙ ; Plat. Alcib. 1 p. 105 c. ; Pint, de
cup. divit. 7 p. 526 d. ; Alciphr. epp. 3, 7, etc.) ; auvUvat
en'i To'is opTois, to understand by reasoning built upon
the loaves, .Mk. vi. 52 [cf. W.392 (367) ; B. 337 (290)].
β. of that upon which anything rests (our upon):
en (XntSi [see in {λπίϊ, 2], supported by hope, in hope,
[cf. W. § 51, 2 f.], Acts ii. 2C ; Ro. iv. 18 ; 1 Co. ix. 10,
[differently in f . below] ; to do any thing tni τω ονόματι
Ttvos, relying upon the name i. e. the authority of any
one [cf. W. 393 (367)] : iXcvaovTai ίπΐ τω ονόματι μου,
appropriating to themselves the name of .Messiah, which
belongs to me, Mt. xxiv. 5 ; Mk. xiii. 6 ; Lk. xxi. 8, (in
ivhich pass, λί'γοντα, ότι ίγώ fipi ό Χρισ-τόί is added by
way of explanation) ; βαπτίζ(σθαι «πϊ [L Tr Wll tv] τω
όν. Χριστοί", so as to repose j'our hope and confideucc in his
Messianic authority. Acts ii. 38 ; 8(χ(σθ<ιί τίνα (Vi τω όν.
μου, to receive one because he bears my name, is devoted
to my authority and instruction, Mt. xviii. 5 ; Mk. ix. 37 ;
Lk. ix. 48. to do anything upon the name of Christ, his
name being introduced, appeal being made tohis authority
and command : as κήρυσσαν, bihaoKfiv, etc., Lk. x.xiv. 4 7 :
Acts iv. 17, 18 ; v. 28, 40 ; βνναμιν noittv, δαιμόνια (κβαΚ
\fiv, using his name as a formula of exorcism, [cf. W.
393(367)], Mk.ix. 39; Lk. ix. 49 [VVH Tr mrg. cv]. γ.
of that unon which as a foundation any super•
233
structure is reared : νομοθρτίΐσθαι, Heb. vii. 11 (eV
aiiT^, for which L Τ Tr WH have eV αΐτης) ; viii. 6 ; after
verbs of trusting, belie vinj. hoping, etc.: άμκ(ΐ-
σθαίίττίτινι. 3 Jn. 10 ; τταρρησίάζΐσθαί. Acts xiv. 3 ; irtnoi-
θίναι, Mt. xxvii. 43 L txt. WII mrg. ; Lk. xi. 22; xviii.
9 ; Mk. X. 24 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.] ; 2 Co. i.
9; Heb.ii.13; iriareufii', Lk. xxiv. 2.5 ; Ro.ix.33; x.ll,
etc.; ίλπίζίΐν (see ελπίζω), [cf. C. I. 2 g. a. below]. 8. of
the reason or motive underlying words and deeds,
so that fVt is equiv. to for, on account of, [AV. 394 (368) ;
B. 337 (290)] : Mt. xLx. 9 R G Τ Tr WH txt. ; Lk. v. 5
(iVi τω ρήματί a ου, at thy word, Germ, auf; [cf. W. §48,
c. d. ; in reliance o/i]) ; Acts iii. IG [WH om.] ; iv. 9;
xi. 19 [L Tr mrg. have the gen.] ; xxi. 24 ; 1 Co. viii. 11
(άποΚΧυσίαι eVi Tiw, Germ, zu Gruii<le (jelien iiber etc.
[cf. W. 394 (36S) note, but L Τ Tr WH read iV]) ; Phil,
iii. S ; after aivciv, Lk. ii. 20; δοξάζ^ιν, Actsiv. 21 ; 2 Co.
ix. 13 [cf. W. 381 (3o7)]; μαρτνμ(ΐν, Heb.xi. 4; (ίχαρι-
arfivetc. to give thanks ybr, 1 Co. i. 4 ; 2 Co. ix. 15 ; Phil,
i. 5 ; 1 Th. iii. 9. €φ' ω (equiv. to eVl τούτω, ότι for that,
on the ground of this, that) because that, because, Ro. v.
12 (on the various interpp. of this pass, see Dietzsch,
Adam und Christus. Bonn 1871, p. 50 sqtj.) ; 2 Co. v. 4
[Rec"* cTTfiSi;]; Phil. iii. 12, (ίφ* ω — ό σατανάς — ονκίσχνσ€
θανατωσαι αϊτούς. Theoph. ad Autol. 2, "-'9 p. 138 ed. Otto ;
ίφ' ω Tfrnabinv eypa^ev, for the reason that he had ac-
cused Gennadius, Synes. ep. 73 ; cf. Hermann ad Λ'ig.
p. 710 ; the better Greeks commonly used ΐφ' ols in the
same sense, cf. AV. 394 (368) ; [Fritzsche or Mey. on Ro.
1. c. ; Ellic. on Phil. 1. c.]). Used esp. after verbs sig-
nifying a mental affection or emotion, where we
also often say over (for exx. fr. Grk. writ, see Passow i.
2, p. 1039'' ; Kruger § 6S, 41, 6 ; [cf. W. 393 (368) c.]):
as άγαλλιάΐ', Lk. i. 47 ; χαίρίΐν, Mt. xviii. 13 ; Lk. i. 14 :
xiii. 17; Ro. xvi. 19, etc.; χαρά ΐσται, Lk. xv. 7; χαραν
(Rec. χάριν) €χω, Philem. 7 ; παρακηλεϊν, τταρακαΧ^ίσθαι,
1 Co. i. 4 ; \ii. 13 ; 1 Th. iii. 7 ; ύ>.αί(ΐν, Lk. xix. 41 R G ;
KOTitTov ποκϊν. Acts viii. 2 •. κό-πτισθαι. Rev. xviii. 9 [T Tr
WII txt. tlie ace.]; οίυνάσθαι. Acts xx. 38; υΚ6Κύζ(ΐν,
Jas. V. 1 ; o-ruyrafeif. Mk. x. 22 ; συ\\υπ(Ίσθαι. Mk. iii.
5; μίτανοί'ιν eVi. to grieve over, repent of 2 Co. xii. 21 ;
σπ\αγχν:ζ(σθαι, Mt. xiv. 14 GLTTr WH ; Mk. vi. 34
R Ct ; Lk. vii. 13 [Tdf. the ace] ; μακροθνμιΊν, Mt. xviii.
26 [Tr the ace], 29 [L Tr the ace.]; Lk. xviii. 7 [see
μακροθυμΐω, 2] ; Jas. v. 7 ; οργίζ€σθαι, Rev. xii. 1 7 [Lchm.
om. iVi] ; (κπλήσσισθαι. Mt. vii. 28 ; Mk. i. 22 ; Lk. iv. 32 ;
Acts xiii. 1 2 ; διαταράσσισθαι, Lk. i. 29 ; (ξίστασθαι, Lk. ii.
47 ; θαμβύσθαι. Mk. x. 24 ; θάμβος, Lk. v. 9 ; Acts iii. 10 ;
θανμάζ(ΐν. :\Ik. xii. 17 ; Lk. ii. 33 ; iv. 22 ; ix. 43 ; .xx. 26 ;
Acts iii. 12 ; κανχάσθαι. Ro. v. 2; ίπαισχύν^σθαι, Ro. vi. 21 ;
παραζηΚονν ΆηΛ ^τapoρyίζ€lv τινα€πΊτινι,\\ο.'Χ.. 19. €. of
the rule, orcondition [W. 394 (36S) d.] : in ίΚπίδι, a
hope being held out or given, Ro. viii. 20 ; Tit. i. 2, (differ-
ently in β. above) ; eVl 8υσ\ν . . . μάρτνσιν. on condition
that two witnesses testify to the matter in question, [a/
(the mouth of) two etc. : cf. W. 392 (367)], Heb. x. 28;
f'lri vtKpoU, equiv. ίοόντων νεκρών (in the case of the dead),
if any one has died, Heb. ix. 17. J. of the purpose
and end \^u>ito, for ; W. 394 (368) e.] : cV ονόματι αΰτοϋ,
to worship and profess his name. Acts xy. 14 Rec. : KaXeir
Tiva «Vi Tivi, Lat. ad aliquid. Gal. v. 13 ; 1 Th. iv. 7. (fVi
$fvia, Xen. an. 7,6,3; cf. λΥ. u. s.") ; κτισθίντις t πι 'pyoK
άγαθοίς, Eph. ii. 10 ; φpovf^v cm τινι to take thought for
a thing, Pliil. iv. 10 ; €φ' ω (by a later Grk. impropriety
for eVi τίνι, cf. W. § 24, 4 ; [B. § 139, 59 ; but on the e.x-
treme doubtfulness of this alleged use of or in direct
questions, see Pres. T. D. AVoolsey in the Bibliotheca
Sacra for Apr. 1874, p. 314 sqq.]) jra'pei; for what pur-
pose art thou come? Vulg. ad quid [al. quod^ venistif
Ut. xxvi. 50 R [but G L Τ Tr AVH ϊφ' S. see C. I. 2 g. γ.
aa. below] (Theoph. cm ποίω σκοπώ; cf. Ildt. 7, 146
Trvftl/xfOf) fT' οΐσι ηλΰυν ; [but the view of many ancient
expositors which explains the passage by an aposiopesis :
"that for which thou hast come — do" is thoroughly es-
tablished by Dr. Woolsey u. s.]). of the issue or unde-
signed result; \ογομαχ€Ϊν fVi καταστροφή των άκονόν•
των, 2 Tim. ii. 14 ; (τοϊς cni ώφΐλ^ία π^ττοιημίνοις «πϊ ^\ut:ijj
χρήσθαι, Xen. mem. 2, 3, 19). η. of the pattern or
standard [A.Y. after; W. 394 (368) f.] : καλΛ τίνα
iVl τω ονόματι τίνος, to call one after the name of another,
Lk. i. 59 (Xeh. vii. 63 [W. 410 (3.S2)]) ; cVi τώ όμοιώματί
τt^of after the likeness of a thing, Ro. v. 14. b. of that
over which one is placed, for its care or adminis-
tration: eVi Tois νπάρχουσΐ τίνα καθιστάναι, Lk. xii. 44
(cf. A. I. 1 d. above, [also C. I. 2 e. below] ; Loh. ad
Phryn. p. 474 sq. ; Bnhdy. p. 249; [W. 393 (367) a.]).
c. used of a hostile aim, against (for exx. fr. Grk. writ,
fr. Horn, down, see Passow i. 2 p. 1036* ; [cf. L. and S. s. v.
B. L 1 c; W. 392(367); B. 337 (290)]): Lk. xii.52sq.;
θλίψις "/(νυμίνη em Στιφάνω [-νου, L Tr mrg.]. Acts xi. 1 9
[A. V. aiou/]. d. of that to which anytliing is added
(so that it is, as it were, upon it ) ; in addition to ; over ami
above, [W. 393 (367 sq.) b.] : 2 Co. vii. 13 (L Τ Tr AVH
eVl δβ Tfi 7Γαρακ\ησ€ΐ νμων [but L Τ Tr AA Η ημων~\ ττ^ρισ-
σοτίρως κτλ. but in addition to the comfort given (us) by
you, we rejoiced the more exceedingly etc. [A. V. in etc.
(of condition)]); Kfpbaivdv τι ίττ'ι τινι, Mt. xxv. 20, 22
R G J (Xfiv \νπην em λίπτ;, Phil. ii. 27 Rec. (Eur. Iph. T.
197 φόνος em φάνω, Troad. 596 em δ* αλ•/(σιν u\yea. Soph.
O. C. 544 em νόσω νόσον; [cf. Mey. on Phil. I.e.; but
G L Τ Tr AA'H give the ace, see C. ί. 2 e below]) ; προσ-
τιθίναι ίπί, Lk. iii. 20 ; em πάσι τοίΛ-οίΓ, besides all this,
Lk. xvi. 26 [L mrg. Τ Tr mrg. AA'H iv, see ev, I. 5 e
p. 211•] ; Eph. vi. 16 [L txt. Τ Tr ΑΑΉ ev (and there is
no τούτοις) ; see iv, u. s.] ; Col. iii. 14, (Sir. xxxvii. 15:1
Mace -x. 42 ; [classic exx. in AVetst. on Lk. 1. c.]) ; add also
Ileb. viii. 1 [see LUnem. ad loe] ; ix. 10 ; 1 Co. xiv. 16.
e. of that which is connected as an adjunct (esp. of
time) with the principal matter under consideration, (in
Germ, generally bei, i. e. at, on, etc.) [AA^ 392 (367)] :
€νχαριστω τω Be^ μου em πάση ttj pveia νμων. at every men-
tion of you. as often as I call you to mind, Phil. i. 3 [but
see Mey., EUie, Bp. Lghtft. ad 1., and s. v. πάς, I. 2] ; σπίν-
δομαι fVi TJj θυσία, while engaged in (busied over) the
sacrifice, Phil. ii. 17; iπΊ συντίλίία των αιώνων. Heb. ix.
26; ίπ\ ττ/ πρώττ} διαθηκτ], ib. 15: ^Keipeiv and θepίζeιv
234
(π fiXoylaii, so that blessings attend, i. e. bountifully,
frt'cly, 2 Co. ix. β ; tm πάση τη ανάγκη, 1 Tb. iii. 7 ; «πι τω
παροργισμώ ίμων wliiio your anger lasts, Eph. iv. 26 ; fVi
τηΰτω meanivliile, i. e. wliile this was fjoing on [(?), upon
t/ii.t], .In. iv. 27. f. of tlie object of an action, and a.
where tlie Germ. uses«/i, [Eng. <in (nearly i.q. '")]: πράσ-
ofiv Ti ίπίτινι, Acts v. 3•") (like bpavn ϊπίτινι, I kit. 3, 14 ;
Ael. n. an. 11, 11) ; of. linhdy. p. 2.00 bot. ; [but see B.
337 (290)] ; S γίγανιν en αυτή, Mk. V. 33 [T Tr WII om.
Lbr. f'm']; άναπ\ηροίΐσθαι, 'S\l. ιάη. 14 Rec. β. where
the Germ, says Wier, [Eng. upon, of, concernimf], after
verbs of writ ing, speaking, t h i η k i η g : yf γ/χιμ/κΐΌ
(π αυτΰί,Λη. xii. 16 (Ildt. 1, 66) ; ηροφητίΰα.ΐ', I\ev. χ. 1 1 ;
papTvpflf, xxii. 16 It ( ί Τ Tr txt. \\ 11 txt. [see μαρτυρίω.
a.], (δο|α f τΓΪ τη (νσίβίία, an opinion about, on, piety, 4
M.-ICC. V. 17 (18)).
C. with the Accusative [W. § 49,1.; B. 337 (290)
s(|.]; I. of Place; 1. properly; a. of the place
above, over, which, our up on, on tn: after verbs
signifying motion and continuance, ίλθύν, Ttepma-
Tf'iv (π\ τά vSara, Mt. xiv. 28 sip ; eirl την θάλησσαν, ii).
25 I. Τ Tr NVH, 26 R G, (πλίίι/ eVi ttoWoi', lloui. Od. 1,
183); άναπισίίν (π\ την γην, Mt. .\ν. 3.";; ϊπϊ το στήθύ:
Ttvos, •Τπ. xxi. 20 ; ΰνακΧιθηναί (πϊ τους χόρτου!, Mt. xiv.
19 R G ; KaTOLKfLv €πϊ πάν το πρόσωπον (L Τ Tr W1I παι^
Tot προσώπου [cf. nas, I. 1 c.]) Trjs y^r, Acts xvii. 26 ;
καθησθαι, Lk. xxi. 35 ; η\θ( λίμα; ϊφ' ολην την γην. Acts
νϋ. 1 1 ; σκότο! (γίνιτο en-l πάσαν την γην, Mt. χ.χνϋ. 45.
over i. e. αίοηΐ] : ΐϊστηκ^ι ίπϊ τον αΙγιαΚόν, Mt. xiii. 2 [W.
408 (380); differently in d. below]. b. of motion to
a place whose surface is occupied or touched (Germ,
mi/' with the ace), Mpnn, unto, etc.; after verbs of going,
coming, ascending, descending, falling, etc. :
πορ(ν€σθαι eVi την oSoV, Acts viii. 26; ix. 11 ; ίπ\ Tas
Sif|oSous, Mt. xxii. 9 ; προίρχ^σθω, Acts xx. 13 [here Tr
WII mrg. προσ/ρχ.] ; φ(ύγ(ίν, Mt. xxiv. 16 (where L Tr
WH txt. (h) ; (ξιρχ(σθαί, Lk. viii. 27; {ξύναι, Acts xxvii.
43 ; (πιβαίναν, Mt. xxi. 5 ; άvaβaivfιv, Lk. v. 19 ; xix. 4 ;
Acts X. 9; Rev. xx. 9; καταβαίνίΐν, Lk. xxii. 44 [L br.
WII reject the pass.] ; Rev. xvi. 21 ; άπίρχίσθαι, \M.
xxiii. 33 [LTrWII (ρχ^σθαι]; πίπτιιν eVl τοιιγ πόδαΓ,
Acts χ. 25 ; eVl πρόσωπον, to fall upon the face, Mt. xvii.
6; x.wi. 39; Lk. v. 12; xvii. 16; iCo. xiv. 25; Rev.vii. 11.
After verbs of placing, leading, bringing, build-
ing, laying, throwing, etc. : τιθίναι, Mt. v. 15; Lk.
xi. 33 ; (πιτιθίναι, Mt. xxiii. 4 ; Lk. χ v. 5 ; Acts χ v. 10, etc. ;
TtBtvai Tti γόνατα «π/. Acts xxi. 5 ; οΙκοΒομ^'ΐν, ]\it. vii. 24,
26; Lk. vi. 49 ; Ro. xv. 20 ; (ποίκο^ομύν, 1 Co. iii. 12;
β(μ(\ιυΐιν, Lk. vi. 48 ; βοΐΚ\(ΐν, ,Ιη. viii. 59 ; Rev. ii. 24 ;
xiv. 16 ; xviii. 19 ; (πιβάλλ(ΐν, Lk. v. 3G (ϊπιβ ίπίτινι, Mt.
ix. 16) ; (πιβάΧΚΐΐν τας χείρας (π'ι Ttva, Mt. xxvi. 50, etc.
(see (πίβάλ\ω, 1 a.) ; ΐπιρρίπτ€ΐν, Lk. xix. 35 and tropi-
cally 1 Pet. V. 7; ραπίζαν, IMt. v. 39 [LTTr txt. WII
ϊίί] ; τΰπτ(ΐν, Lk. vi. 29 [Tdf. cir] ; αναβίβαζαν, Mt. xiii.
48 [not Lchm. txt.] ; ίπιβίβάζαν, Lk. x. 34 ; κατάγ^ιν, Lk.
V. 1 1 ; aapfdeiv, Ro. xii. 20 ; bihovai, Lk. vii. 44 ; xix. 23 ;
Rev. viii. 3 ; άναφίριιν, 1 Pet. ii. 24 ; κριμαν, Mt. xviii. 6
'L Τ Tr WII TTf pi'] ; γράφαν. Rev. ii. 1 7 ; iii. 1 2 ; xix. 1 6 ;
(πιγράφαν, Heb. viii. 10. After verbs which include an-
other verb signifying motion, or transfer, or entrance
into, (where (ierm. uses aiif or iihi'r; our on, to, etc.):
avaTtXKtiv, Mt. V. 45 ; βρίχαν, ibiil. ; πνίαν, Rev. vii. 1
(here we see the difference betw. eVi with the gen. to
blow over a thing, (Jerm. «//i;•, and ίπί with the ace. to
blow on a thing, to come blowing upon it, Germ, cinen
antvelien, wehend aufeinen kommen) ; [apparently nearly
the same view of the distinction betw. the cases is taken
by Thiersch § 274, 6 ; Hermann on Eur. Alcest. 845.
But Kruger (§ 68, 40, 3), Kiihner (ii. § 438, I. 1 b.), al.,
regard e. with the ace. as denoting merely movement
towards a place, while i. with the gen. involves the idea
of actual or intended arrival ; cf. L. and S. .s. v. A. I. 1.
Still others hold the two expressions to be substantially
synonymous: e.g. Dllm. Gram. §147 (p. 417 Kng.
trans.); Matthiae § 584 ; Passow p. 1034•; — esp. in
the N. T., see W. 409 sq. (382) ; 408 (381) note ; B. 338
(291). On the variations of case with this prep, in the
Rev. cf. Alford on iv. 2]; ^ιασωθήναι <π\ την γήν, Acts
xxvii. 44. c. It is used of persons unr whom anything
is done, that thereby some benefit may accrue to them,
(Germ, uhfi- with the dat.) [W. 408 (381) note] : ονόμα-
ζαν TO όνομα ^\ησοΰ eVi τίνα, to name the name of Jesus
(as a spell, a magic formula) over one, sc. that help
may come to him from that name, Acts xix. 13; προσ-
(ϋχ(σθαι ϊπί τίνα, .las. v. 14. d. As or (q. v. C. 2 p.
186"), so e'ffi also stands after verbs of rest and con-
tinuance [B. 337 (290) sq. ; W. §49, Ll]: καθίίδην
(πι τι, Mk. iv. 38 ; στηναι. Rev. xi. 11 ; σταθψαι tVi τι,
Rev, xii. 18 (xiii. 1) ; Ιστηκίναι, Jn. xxi. 4 {(π\τόν αΙγιάΚόν
L Τ Tr mrg. WH mrg. ; otherwise where m a η y are
spoken of ; see a. fin. above) ; Rev. xiv. 1 ; καθησθαι,
Jn. xii. 15; Rev. iv. 4; vi. 2 [Rec. dat.]; xi. 16; xiv.
14, 16 [L Τ Tr WII txt. gen.] ; xvii. 3 ; xix. 11 ; κ(κα-
θικίναι, καθίσαι, Mk. xi. 2; Lk. xix. 30; Jn. xii. 14;
Rev. XX. 4 ; καθίσισθαι, Bit. xix. 28 ; σκηνοΰν, Rev. vii.
15 ; κύσθαι, 2 Co. iii. 15 ; κατακύσθαι, Lk. v. 25 Τ Tr
λνΐΐ ; f 'rat fVi TO αυτό, to be together, assembled, in
the same place: Lk. xvii. 35; Acts i. 15; ii. 1, 44, —
lo come toijether, of sexual intercourse, 1 Co. vii. 5 (ί L
Τ Tr Αλ Η ; σννίΚθάν ΐπι το αυτό have convened, come
together, to the s.arae pl.ace, 1 Co. xiv. 23 [Ltxt. (λθιΊν'} ;
simply ϊπ'ι το αϊτό sc. δντις, tof/elher. Acts iii. 1 [but L Τ
Tr WII (so R. V.) connect ί'ττΐ τ. α. here with ii. 47] ; 2 S.
ii. 13 [cf. B. 338 (291)]. e. used of motion or arrival
into the vicinity of a place (not to the place itself);
near ; lo, as far as ; (Germ, an, bei, zu. Inn . . . zu) : Ιπ\ τά
μνημάον [or μνήμα], Mk. xvi. 2 ; Lk. xxiv. 12 [L Tr br. Τ
om. WH reject the vs.], 22, 24 ; «Vi tovs άναβοθμού!. Acts
xxi. 35 ; (ρχ(σθαί eni τι υ^ωρ, Acts \'\\\. 36 ; ξπ\ την πν\ην.
Acts xii. 10 ; ΐπιστηναι eVi τον πυ\ώνα. Acts .\. 17; κατα-
βαΐνίΐν (πι την θάλασσαν, -In. vi. 16, etc., etc. ; with the ace.
of a pers. to, near to one : Jn. .xi.x. 33 ; Acts xxv. 12; 2 Th.
ii. 1 ; Rev. xvi. 14 ; esp. to judges, kings, etc., i. q. to their
tribunal : Mt. x. 18 ; Lk. xii. 58 ; xxi. 12 ; xxiii. 1 ; Acts
ix. 21 ; xvi. 19. also in pregn. constr. after verbs of s it-
ting, standing, etc. : καθησθαι ϊπ'ι τό τ^λώνιον, Mt. ix.
CTTt
235
9 ; Mk. ii. 14 ; ίστηκίναι ί'ττί, Rev. iii. 20 ; xv. 2 ; ίττιστηναι
iVi, Acts X. 1 7 ; xi. 11; em την διξιάν on the right hand,
Rev.v.l. f. of mere direct ion towardsa terminus
(so that the terminus itself is not reached) : nopeveaSai eVi
TO άπολωλοί, to recover it (where we say after), Lie. xv.
4 ; eKTciveiv Tat xflpas em', against one, to take him, Lk.
xxii. 53 ; towards one, in pointing liim out, Mt. xii. 49 ;
(ξίρχ^σθαι, Ιπ'ι Χ^στήν, to take a robber, ΛΙΙ. xxvi. 55 ;
Mk. xiv. 48; Lk. xxii. 52, cf. Lk. xiv. 31. 2. It is
used metaphorically, a. with the ace. of a pers. after
verbs of coming, falling, bringing, etc. o. of
evils befalling (faUing ' upon ') one, and of pertur-
bations coming upon the mind: το αΐμά tlvos (the
penalty for slaying \άΐίΐ)ηκ(ΐοτ (ρχ^ταιί-πΊτινα, Mt. xxiii.
35 sq. ; x.wii. 25 ; enayfiv το αίρά τίνος ini τίνα. Acts ν,
28 ; ΐρχίσθαι and iJKtiv ίπί τίνα, of other evils, Jn. .xviii.
4 ; Eph. V. 6 ; Rev. iii. 3 ; after γίν(σθαι, Lk. i. 65 ; iv.
3(i ; Acts V. 5 ; ίπίρχια-θαι [eTreiai'p;^. L Τ Tr WH], Lk.
xxi. 35 ; (πιπίπταν, Lk. i. 1 2 ; Acts xiii. 1 1 [L Τ Tr AVH
πιτη-βίκ] ; xix. 1 7 [L Tr ττιτΓτίΐι/] ; Ro. xv. 3 (fr. Ps. Lwiii.
(Ixix.) 10); Rev. xi. 11 [Rec. πίπτΗκ] ; imarijvai, Lk.
xxi. 34. β. of blessings coming upon one : after ΐρχιαβαί,
Mt. X. 13 ; (■nirtivTeiv, of a trance. Acts x. 10 [L Τ Tr
AA IT •γίν€σβαι\ ; επισκηνοϋν, 2 Co. xii. 9 ; βφθασεν and
ijyyiKfv (φ' ύμας (upon ijou sc. fr. heaven, [cf. W. 407
(3a0) note]) ή βασιλύα τοΟ θ(οϋ, Mt. xii. 28 ; Lk. χ. 9 ;
.xi. 20. the Holy Spirit is said at one time iirl τίνα
ίκχ(ίσβαι. Acts ii. 1 7 sq. ; X. 45 ; Tit. iii. 6 ; at another,
άποστίΚΚ^σθαι [or ίξαποστίΚ. Τ Tr WH], Lk. xxiv. 49 ;
again, ίπίρχίσθαι. Acts i. 8 ; once more, καταβαίν^ιν, Mk.
i. 10 [L txt. Τ Tr WH «V] ; Lk. iii. 22 ; Jn. i. 33 ; emaev
ό KXrjpos ίπι Ttva, Acts i. 26 ; after words of rest and
continuance : χάρίς ην ίττΐ τίνα, Lk. ii. 40 ; Acts iv. 33 ;
ίπαναπαϋ^σθαι, Lk. x. ; the Holy Spirit is said at one
time Επί τίνα μίναν, descending upon one to remain on
him, Jn. i. 32 sq. [B. 338 (291)] ; and again άναπαύίσ^αι,
1 Pet. iv. 14. b. of one upon whom anything is im-
posed, as a burden, office, duty, etc. : την μίριμναν ΐπιρ-
ρίπτ€ίν €π\ Beov, I Pet. v. 7 ; σνντξλςίν ^ίαθηκην eVt τίνα, to
put a covenant upon one, to be kept by him, lleb. viii. 8,
(in Ps. Ixxxii. (Ixxxiii.) 6 "3 hy_ n't.3 ni3 is to make a
covenant a^ai'nsi one). c. of that to which anything is
added, [Eng. u;)o« (nearly i. q- a/?er)] : Χΰττη (-πίΧύττην,
PhiL ii. 27 GLTTr WH (Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 27; Ezek.
vii. 26 ; [esp. Is. xxviii. 10, 13 ; cf. Lat. super in Liv. 1,
50 ; 22, 54 etc.] ; see above, B. 2 d.) ; [so some take
oIkos ίπ οίκον, Lk. xi. 17, Β. 338 (291) ; see οΓκοί, 2]; επι-
KaXe'iV όνομα ί'ττί τίνα (see {πικαλ/ω, 2 [and Β. 338 (291 )]),
to call (put) a name upon one, Acts xv. 17; Jas. ii. 7.
d. of the number or degree reached; Lat. usque ad
[W. § 49, 1. 3 a.] : cni σταδίους δώδίκο. Rev. xxi. 16 [R*
Τ Tr WH txt. gen.] (Xen. mem. 1, 4, 17; an. 1, 7, 15 ;
Polyb. 3, 54, 7 ; Song of the Three 23) ; fVl rpis, A'ulg.
per ler, for three times, thrice : Acts x. 16 ; xi. 10 (so tit
Tpts, Ildt. 1, 86; Xen. an. 6, 4, 16. 19; Cyr. 7, 1, 4 etc.
[cf. W. 422 (394)]) ; em nkelov more widely, to a greater
degree, further, the more, [differently below, II. 1] : Acts
iv. 17; [xx. 9 WH mrg.] ; 2 Tim. ii. 16; iii. 9; «φ'
όσον, forasmuch as, inasmuch as, [differently Π. 1 be-
low] : Mt. xxv. 40, 45 ; Ro. xi. 13. e. of care, pow-
er, control over anything, (Germ, iiber with the ace.)
[W. § 49, 1. 3 b.]. (cf. above, A. I. 1 d. and B. 2 b.) : /3a-
aiXeCeiv eirl τίνα (Hebr. Si' '7B'"?), Lk. i. 33 ; xix. 14, 27 ;
Ro. V. 14 ; ήγοι'μ(νυν iV Αίγνπτον, Acts vii. 10 ; καθίστημι,
Heb. ii. 7 R [(fr. Ps. viii. 7), L Tr WH br.] ; iVi τον οίκον
αντοϋ sc. eoTL, lleb. iii. 6 ; lepea μ6•γαν ent τον οίκον τον θΐον
sc. κaθeστηκότa, Heb. χ. 21 ; καθισταναι Βικαστην eni, Lk.
xii. 14 {άρχοντα, Xen. Cyr. 4, 5 fin.) ; ίξουσία, Lk. x. 19 ;
Rev. vi. 8 ; xvi. 9 ; xxii. 14 ; φυ\άσσeιv φύλακας, Lk. ii. 8 ;
of usurped dignity : mepaipeaBai t π1 πάντα \eyόμevov β(όν,
2 Th. ii. 4 cf. Dan. xi. 36 sq. [al. refer the use in Th. 1. c. to
g. y. ββ. below]. Akin to this is the expression πιστός ίπΐ
τι (because fidelity is as it were spread over the things
intrusted to its care), Mt. xxv. 21. f. of the e η d which
the mind reaches or to which it is led; Lat. ad, to,
unto : ^πιστρίφίίν, eπιστpeφeσθaι eni τίνα, esp. to G ο d,
Lk. i. 1 7 ; Acts L\. 35 ; xi. 21 ; .xiv. 15 ; xxvi. 20 ; GaL iv.
9; 1 Pet. ii. 25. g. of direct ion towards a jierson
or a tiling ; o. after verbs of trusting and hoping,
(Germ, auf, upon ; see above, B. 2 a. y.) : after eXniCeiv,
1 Pet. i. 13 ; iii. 5 R G ; 1 Tim. v. 5, (and often in Sept.) ;
maTeveiv, Acts ix. 42 ; xi. 17; xvi. 31 ; xxii. 19; Ro. iv.
24 ; πίστις, Heb. vi. 1 ; nenoidevai, Mt. xxvii. 43 (where
L txt. WH mrg. Εττί with dat.). β. of the feelings,
affections, emotions. Germ, uber, over: κάπτομαι.
Rev. i. 7 ; xviii. 9 [R G L WH mrg. w. dat.] ; κλαίω, Lk.
xxiii. 28 ; Rev. xviii. 9 ; evφpaiveσθaι, Rev. .xviii. 20 [G L
Τ Tr WH w. dat.]. unto, towards, Lat. erga : σπλαγχνί•
ζομαι, Mt. XV. 32 ; Mk. viii. 2 ; ix. 22 ; lμaκpoθυμeω, Mt.
xviii. 26 Tr, 29 L Tr] ; χρηστός, Lk. vi. 35 ; χρηστότης, Ro.
xi. 22; Eph. ii. 7. γ. of the direction of the will and
action; oo. of purpose and end [ W. § 49, 1. 3 d.] : eVt
TO βάπτισμα αΐτοΰ, to receive his baptism, Mt. iii. 7 ; Επι
θΐωρίαν ταίίτην, Lk. xxiii. 48 ; εφ' ο πάρ€ΐ, ΛΙί. xxvi. δΟ G L
Τ Tr WH (see above, B. 2 a. ζ.) ; where aim and result
coalesce: ίπι το σvμφepov, Heb. xii. 10. ββ. of things
done with hostility ; against: after αττοτο/ζία, Ro. xi.
22 ; άναστηναι, Mk. iii. 26 ; eyeίpeσθaι, Mt. xxiv. 7 ; Jlk.
xiii. 8 ; Lk. .xxi. 10 ; eπfyeίpeιv διωyμόv, Acts .xiii. 50; μ€ρι-
σθηναι, Mt. xii. 26 ; Mk. iii. 24 sij. ; eπaίρe^v τι ίπί, Jn.
xiii. 18 ; μάρτνρ, 2 Co. i. 23 ; μαρτνριον, Lk. i.\. 5 ; άσχψ
μονίΐν, 1 Co. vii. 36 {ιΐςτινα, Dion.Hal. 2, 26) ; μοιχάσθαι,
Mk. X. 11 ; τολμάν, 2 Co. x. 2; βpiχe^v οδόντας. Acts vii.
54. γγ. of that to which one refers in Λvriting or
speaking [cf. W. § 49, 1. 3 d.] : after Xiyeiv. Heb. vii.
13; 6 ovv μακαρισμος . . . άκροβνστίαν, SC. XtyeTai [W.
587 (546), cf. B. 394 (338)], Ro. iv. 9 ; πpoφητeia, 1 Tim.
i. 18; on Mk. ix. 12 sq. see γράφω, 2 c. 88. upon i. e.
in reference to ; for : after βάλλetv κληρον. Mk. xv. 24 ;
Jn. xix. 24 ; cf. Fritzsche on Mark p. 686 [who com-
pares Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19, and remarks that an Attic
writ, would have said tVi Ttvi]. II. of Tinie[W.
§ 49,1. 2] ; 1. of time during or for ['for the space of]
which (Germ, auf, wdhreml) : ίπ\ ίτη τρία, Lk. iv. 25
[R G Τ WH mrg.] ; iVl ημίρας πλιίονς, Acts xiii. 31 ; add
also .xvi. 18 ; xvii. 2 ; xviii. 20; .xix. 10 ; Heb. .xi. 30, etc.,
έτΓΐβαίνο)
236
€irtyeio<!
and often iu (!rk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; of. Passow s. v.
p. 1044, [L. ;uk1 S. s. v. C. II.] ; «φ' όσον χμόΐΌΐι fur so
long lime as, Ro. vii. 1 ; 1 Co. vii. 3!» ; Gal. iv. I ; and
siinplv ίφ' όσον as loiuj as [iliffrrentlv in I. 2 d. above],
Alt. ix. l.•) ; 2 I\'t. i. i;i ; ίφ' Ίκανύν\οιν^ enougli, for a iim-
sidfrahlc time. Acts .\.\. 11 ; eVi wXtiof somewhat lon^,
too lonj; [dilTerently in I. 2 d. above] : Acts .nx. !I [not
AVII nirij., see n. s.] ; xxiv. 4. 2. ahotil, Inwards,
((ierni. gegen) : cm την αϋριον on the morrow, Lk. .\. ;35;
Acts iv. 5 ; iiti την ωραν τη! ιτροσιυχη!. Acts iii. 1 ; eVi
TO πρωί, Mk. xv. 1 [R G] ; rarely so in Grk. writ., as
Arr. exp. Al. 3, 18, 11 (7) tVi [al. ΰπό] την «ω.
D. In CoMl'OSlTlON e'jri denotes 1. continuance,
rest, influence upon or over any person or thing: cVi-
yeioy, (πονράνιος, €7Γίδτ;μίω, ίπαναπανομαί, etc. 2. mo-
tion, approacli, direction towards or to anytliin'j; : fVa-
κονω, ('πιβοάω, ΐιηΙ'ί\ίπω, (πΐκτίίνω, etc. 3. imposi-
tion : €τηκ(ΐβίζω, ΐπιτίβημι, (ηι,ίιΐ^άζω, ϊπίβαρΐω, ΐπιγράφω,
(πιρρίπτω, ΐπιτάσσω, etc. 4. accumulation, increase,
addition : ^ττίκταγωγη, €πισννάγω, €πισωρ€νω, ΐτηκάΚίω
(by a cognomen), etc. 5. repetition : fVaiTt'u). fVoiO/xi-
μν^σκω, etc. 6. UJ),ii/>ir(in/ : (ΐταίρω,(πανάγω,(παφ)ΐίζω,
etc. 7. against : cVi/iouXr;, (πανίστημι, ΐπίηρκυς, eVt-
ομκίω, etc. 8. superintendence : ίπιστάτης.
ίτΓΐ-βαίνω ; 2 aor. (πίβην; pi. ptcp. (πίβιβηκώς: 1.
to get upon, mount: eVi τι, Mt. xxi. 5 (Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 1,
etc.; (ien. xxiv. CI); τω πλοίω [to embark in'], Acts
xxvii. 2 (Tliuc. 7, 70); els το πΧο'ίον, Acts xxi. G RG;
used without a case, of going almaril (a ship). Acts xxi.
2 ; to go up : ds 'Upoa-oX. Acts xxi. 4 L Τ Tr WII, [yet
al. refer this to 2]. 2. to set foot in, enter: «s with
the ace. of place, Acts xx. 18; with the dat. of place
(as also in Grk. writ.). Acts xxv. 1.*
^πι- βάλλω ; impf. ίπίβαΧλον; fut. ί'πιβπλώ ; 2 .lor. eVf-
βα>.αν, [3 [lers. plur. -λαΐ'. Acts xxi. 27 Τ Tr WII ; Mk. xiv.
4li TWII, (seeiin-e'p;(o/aa(, init.)]; 1. Transitiveh', a.
to cast upon : τινι βρόχον, 1 Co. vii. 35 ; τιν\ τα Ιμάτια, Mk.
xi. 7 ; [χουν eVl τας κ(φ. Rev. xviii. 19 WII nirg.] ; to laij
upon, iiri τίνα την χ^Ίρα or τάς χίΊρας, used of seizing one
to lead hiu» off as a prisoner : Mt. xxvi. 50 ; Mk. xiv.46
R G L ; Lk. xx. 19 ; xxi. 1 2; Jn. vii. 30 [L mrg. ?/3αλβν],
44 (L• Tr WII the simple βάλλαν) ; Acts v. 18 ; xxi. 27,
(for the Ilebr. "3 '7N Τ nSu, Gen. xxii. 12); also τικ
Xe'tpas Tivi, Mk. xiv. 46 f Tr WII , Acts iv. 3, ( Polyb. 3,
2,8; 5,5; Lcian. Tim. 4) ; (πιβάλ\(ίν τάς xfipas (oW.hy
the inf. indicating the purpose. Acts xii. 1 ; την χύρα
ι'π άροτρην, to put the hand to the plough (to begin
work), Lk. ix. G2. b. to put (i. e. sew) on : ('πίβλημα
fVt Ίμάτιον, Lk. V. 36 ;'eVi Ιματίω, Mt. ix. 16. 2. In-
trans. (as in Grk. writ. fr. Ilom. down, [cf. W. 251 (236) ;
li. 144 (126) sq.]) to throw one's self upon, rush upon:
«if TO πλοΐοκ, of waves rushing into a ship, Mk. iv. 37; to
put one's mind upon a thing, attend to, with the dat. of
the thing: τούτω ynp <πι/3άλλωι/ for if you think thereon,
Antonin. 10, 30; μη8(ν\ yap ϊπιβάλλιιν μη&ιτι'ραν (i. e.
την α"σθησιν κα\ την νόησιν) χωρίί τηϋ προσπίπτοντος dSa-
λου, I'lut. plac. phil. 4, 8 ; absol. ΐπιβάλών, sc. τώ ρήματι
τοΰ Ί>;<τοϋ, when he had considered the utterance of
Jesus, Mk. xiv. 72 ; cf. Kypke, [AVetst., McClellan] ad
loc.; B. 145 (127); [and for the ditT. inter|)p. see Mey.
andesp. Morisonad loc.]. 3. Impersonally, fVi/iiXXfc
pot it litliings lo mr, falls to my aliare: τύ ('πιβ'ιλλην (sc.
μοί) μϊροί τη! ουσία!. Lk. xv. 12 (κτημάτων το (πιβάλΧον,
lldt. 4, 115; τύ επι/ίαλλοί' αϋτοίί μί'ρυ?, Dioi Ι. 14, 1 7, and
the like often in other writ, [see .Meyer; σοϊ ίπιβάΚΧα ή
κληρονομιά, Tob. vi. 1 2 (cf. iii. 1 7 ; 1 Mace. x. 30, etc.)])."
ίτη-βαρίω, -ά> ; 1 aor. inf. (πιβαρήσαι ; Ιο put a burden
upon, to load, [cf. cVi, D. 3] ; trop. lo he burden.iome ; so in
the N. T. : τινά, 1 Tli. ii. 9 ; 2 Th. iii. 8 ; absol. ΐνα μη eVi-
βαρώ ' that I press not too heavily ' i. c. lest I give |)ain by
too severe language. 2 Co. ii. 5. (Dion. Ilal., Appian.)*
έΐΓΐ-βιβάζω: 1 aor. ΐπιβίβασα: lo I'ause lo mount; to
place tipon, [cf. «Vi, I). 3] : τίνα or τι <'πί τι, Lk. χ. 34 ;
xix. 35; Acts xxiii. 24. (Time, Plat., Diod., al. ; Sept.
several times for D'3"\ri.) "
ί•ΐΓΐ-βλ€'•ΐΓω : 1 aor. eV<'/3Xe^a ; in the Sept. often for
D'2n and nj3, also for ΠΝί ; lo turn the eyes upon. In
look upon, gaze upon, (eVi upon [cf. eVi, D. 2]) : eVi τίνα,
contextually, to look upon one Λvith a feeling of admira-
tion and respect, to look up lo, regard, Jas. ii. 3 ; contextu-
ally, to look upon in pity for the sake of giving aid, i. <|.
/() //(((■(' regaril for, to rigurd, Lk. ix. 38 (where for cVi-
βΧφ,ν [KL] and ίπίβλιψαι [G T] write [with Tr WII]
(πιβλίψαι, 1 aor. act. inf. ; cf. Bornemann, Schol. ad loc,
and above in Βίομαι, 3 a., [also B. 273 (234) note]) ; (VI
την ταττ(ίνωσΙν twos, Lk. i. 48 ; often in the O. T. in the
same sense, as 1 S. i. 11; ix. 16; Ps. xxiv. (x.xv.) IG;
Ixviii. (Ixix.) 1 7 ; Tob. iii. 3, etc. (In Grk. writ. fr. Soph,
and Phito down, both lit. and fig.) *
eirt -βλημιο, -rof, το'. (f7ri/3iiAXci>), that which is thrown or
put upon a thing, or tliul which is added to it ; an aildilion ;
spec, that which is sewed on to corer a rent, a patch ; Vidg.
assumenlum [(also commissnra)']. (i. q. (πίρραμα) : Alt.
ix. IG ; Mk. ii. 21 ; Lk. v. 36. [Sept., Plut., Arr.] *
ί'ΐΓΐ-βοάω, -ω ; to cry out to [cf. (πι, D. 2], cry out : foil.
by ace. with inf. Acts xxv. 24 R G, [but L Τ Tr WH
βοάω, (|. v. 2, and fin. From Ilom., Ildt. down].*
ίπι-βουλή, -ης, ή, a plan formeil against one [ef. fVi, D.
7], a plot : Acts i.x. 21 ; yLucrat τινι ΐπιβουλη υπό tivos,
Acts XX. 3; ('is Tiva, Acts xxiii. 30; plur. Acts xx. 19.
(From [Iiat.], Thtic. down.)•
ίΐΓΐ-γαμβρίνω : fut. (ττιγαμβρίΰσω ; lo he related lo by
marriagi•, oiler into njfinily with ; 1. Sept. for [ΓΙΠίΙΠ, to
become Any one's father-in-law OT son-in-law : τιν'ι, (ien.
xxxiv. 9 ; 1 S. xviii. 22 sqq. ; 2 Chr. xviii. 1 ; 2 Esdr. ix.
14 ; 1 Mace. x. 54, 56. 2. τινά, for D3', to marry the
widow of a brother who has died childless: Gen. xxxviii.
8 ; Mt. xxii. 24, where allusion is made to the levirate
law recorded in Deut. xxv. 5-10; cf. Win. RWB. s. v.
Leviratsehe ; [BB. DD. s. v. Marriage]. (Not found in
native Grk. auth. [e.xc. schol. ad Kur. Or. 574 sqq.; cf.
W. 2li].)•
eir(-Y(ios, -ov, («πί and y^), existing upon the earth,
earthli/, terrestrial: οικία, the house we live in on earth,
spoken of the body with which we are clothed in this
world, 2 Co. V. 1 ; σώματα eVt'yfia, opp. to (πονράνια, I
iviyivofMU
237
Ι^ημ^ω
Co. XV. 40 ; absolutely, oi iniytioi (opp. to o! iirovpavioi
and oi καταχθόνιοι), those who are on earth, the inhabits
ants of the earth, men, Phil. ii. 10; τα enlyeia, things
done on earth, spoken of the new birth wrought by the
Holy Spirit, Jn. iii. 12; cf. Knapp, Scripta var. Arg.
p. 212 sq. ; τα in'iyna φρονύν, to set the mind on the
pleasures and good things of earth, Phil. iii. 19 ; σοφία
iVi'yfiof (<*(ip. to 15 άνωθιν κατιμχομίνη), the wisdom of
man, liable to error and misleading, .las. iii. 15. (From
Plato down; nowhere in the O. T.) *
ί'ΐΓΐ-γίνομαι : 2 aor. (πιγινόμην ; 1. to become or
happen afterwards ; to be born afler. 2. to come to,
arrive : of time, τ^σσαρΐσκαι^ΐκάτη ννξ cntyivfTo, Acts
xxvii. 27 L [ed. ster.], Τ [edd. 2, 7] ; {ϊαρος eViyiyi/erai
ωρη, Ilom. II. 6, 148). 3. to arise, spring np, come on:
(πιγ€ΐ/ομίνου νήτον, a south wind having sprung up, Acts
xxviii. 13; (Thuc. 3, 74; 4, 30).*
ίΐΓΐ-γινώσ'κω ; [impf. επίγ/ι^ωσΑίοι/] ; ίιύ, €πιγνώσομαι \ 2
aor. ίπ^γνων'. yti. ^ιτίγνωκα; [Pass., pres. iVtyifojaKo^at ;
1 aor. (π(γ•'ώσθην^; («Vi denotes mental direction tow-
ards, application to, that which is known) ; in the Sept.
chiefly for i*T and 13J, "^"27) ; 1. to become thorough-
ly acquainted with, to know thoroughly; to know accu-
rately, know tcell, [see reff. s. v. (πίγνωσις. init.J : 1 Co.
xiii. 1 2 (where γινώσκω «κ μίρουί and entyiu. i. e. to know
thoroughly, know well, divine things, are contrasted [W.
§ .•!9, 3 Ν. 2]) ; with an ace. of the thing, I.k. i. 4 ; 2 Co. i.
1 3 ; την χάριν τον θΐοΰ, Col. i. 6 ; την άλη6€ΐαν, 1 Tim. iv. 3 ;
την όδύν της δικαιοσύνης, 2 Pet. ii. 21 [cf. Β. 30,5 (262)];
το δικαίωμα τοϋ θ^οϊι, Ro. i. 32 ; τι foil, by οτι (by the fa-
miliar attraction [AV. «26 (581) ; B. 376 (322) ; some
bring this ex. under 2 a. in the sense of acknowledge']),
1 Co. xiv. 37; τινά, one's character, will, deeds, deserts,
etc., 1 Co. xvi. 18 ; 2 Co. i. 14 ; [pass. opp. to ΰγνοοΰμ^νοι,
2 Co. vi. 9] ; Tiva από τίνος (gen. of thing), Mt. vii. 16, 20
[Lclim. ίκ~\ (" a Gallicis armis atque insignibus cogno-
scere," for the more common ex, Caes. b. g. 1, 22, 2 [cf. B.
324 (278 sq.); W. 372 (348)]); by attraction τινά, on
etc. 2 Co. xiii. 5 ; (πιγινώσκιι τΐ>ν ν'ιόν, τον πατίρα, Jit. .xi.
27. 2. univ. to know; a. to recognize : τινά, i. e. by
sight, hearing, or certain signs, to perceive who a person
is, Mt. xiv. 35 ; Mk. vi. 54 ; Lk. x.xiv. 16, 31 ; Mk. vi. 33
[R T, but G WH mrg. without the accus.] ; by attrac-
tion, τινά, ότι. Acts iii. 10; iv. 13; τιι/ά, his rank and
authority, I\It. xvii. 12; with ace. of the thing, to recog-
nize a thing to be what it really is : την φωνην τοϋ XIcVpou,
Acts xii. 14; την γήν. Acts xxvii. 39. b. to know i. q.
to perceive : τι, Lk. v. 22 ; ev (αντω, foil, by ace. of the
thing with a ptcp. [B. 301 (258)], Mk. v. 30 ; foil, by 5τι,
ϋ. i. 22 ; τω ννινμΛτι foil, by ότι. JMk. ii. 8. c. to know
i. e. to find out, ascertain : sc. αϊτό. Acts ix. 30 ; foil, by
ότι, Lk. vii. 37 ; xxiii. 7 ; Acts xix. 34 ; xxii. 29 ; xxiv. 1 1
L Τ Tr WH ; xxviii. 1 ; τί, foil, by an indirect quest..
Acts xxiii. 28 L Τ Tr WH ; [δι' ην αΐτίαν etc. Acts xxii.
24] ; τταρά Tiraf (gen. of pers.) Trepi tixos (gen. of thing).
Acts xxiv. 8. d. to know i. e. to understand : Acts xxv.
10. [From Hom. down.]"
iir(-7V<eoris, -tns, ή, (('πιγινώσκω, q. v. [cf . also Bp. Lghtf t.
on Col. i. 9 ; Trench § ixxv. ad fin.]), precise and cor-
rect knowledge ; used in the N. T. of the knowledge of
things ethical and divine : absol., PhU. i. 9; Col. iii. 10;
κατ' (πίγνωσιν, Ro. χ. 2 ; with gen. of the thing known.
Col. i. 9 ; ii. 2 ; Philem. 6 ; της αληθείας, 1 Tim. ii. 4 : 2
Tim. ii. 25 ; iii. 7 ; Tit. i. 1 ; Heb. x. 26 ; της αμαρτίας,
Ro. iii. 20; with gen. of the person known; — of (iod,
esp. the knowledge of his holy will and of the blessings
wliich he has bestowed and constantly bestows on men
through Christ ; Eph. i. 17 ; Col. i. 10; 2 Pet. i. 2 ; ot
Christ, i. e. the true knowledge of Christ's nature, dig-
nity, benefits : Eph. iv. 13; 2 Pet. i. 8 ; ii. 20 ; of God
and Christ : 2 Pet. i. 2 ; θ(ον ΐχίΐν iv ί'πιyl'ώσf ι, i. e. to keep
the knowledge of the one true God ubich has illumineo
the soul, Ro. i. 28. (Polyb., Plut., Hdian., [al.] ; Sept.
occasionally for Π^Τ; 2 JIacc. ix. 11.) *
ίΐι-1-γροφή, -ης, η. ((πιγμάφω), an inscription, title : in
the X. T. of an inscription in black letters upon a
whitened tablet [B. D. s. v. Cross], Lk. xxiii. 38 ; with
the gen. tt^s αιτίας, i. e. of the accusation, Mk. xv. 26,
(γράμματα την αιτίαν της θανατώσΐως αυτόν δηΚονντα, Dio
Cass. 54, 3; cf. Sueton. Calig. 32; Doiait. 10); of the
inscription on a coin : Mt. xxii. 20 ; Mk. xii. 16 ; Lk. xx.
24. (From Thuc. down.) *
ΙτΓΐ-γράφω ; fut. «πιγράψω ; pf. pass. picp. i-niy^ypap•
μίνος; plpf. 3 pers. sing. ineyiypavTo; to write upon, in-
scribe : ίττιγραφήν, Mk. XV. 26 and I> Tr br. in Lk. xxiii.
38; ονόματα. Rev. xxi. 12; €v τινι. Acts xvii. 23; fig. to
write upon the mind, i. e. to fi.x indelibly upon it, cause
to cleave to it and to be always vividly present to it :
νόμους ini καρδίας [-δίακ Τ WH mrg.], Heb. viii. 10; tTrt
των διανοιών, Ileb. X. 16 R G, en\ την διάνοιαν, ibid. L Τ
Tr λλ Η, (τουί Χόγονς 6πι το πΧάτος της καρδίας, Prov,
vii. 3). [From Horn, down.] *
€ΎΓΐ-8€£κνυμ.ι ; 1 aor. iiredfi^a ; [jires. mid. ΐττιδίίκννμαι] ;
to exhibit, shon; [as though for c .x ρ ο s i t i ο η or e .χ a m i-
nation (Schmidt ch. 127, 5); fr. Pind.. Hdt. down.];
a. to bring forth to view : τί, Jit. xxii. 1 9 ; and Lk. x,\. 24
Rec. ; τί Tiw, Lk. xxiv. 40 R G ; ('αυτόκ τικι, Lk. xvii. 14 ;
to show i. e. bid to look at, τί τινι, Mt. .xxiv. 1 ; to show
i. e. furnish to be looked at, produce what may be looked
at : σημΛον, Mt. xvi. 1 ; Mid. with ace. of the thing, to
display something belonging to one's self: χιτώνας, the
tunics as their own. Acts ix. 39 [see Meyer], b. to prove,
demonstrate, set forth to be knoioi and acknowledged:
Heb. vi. 1 7 ; foil, by the ace. and inf. Acts xviii. 28.*
ίττι-δΕχομιαι ; [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. to receive hospi-'
tably : τικά, 3 Jn. 10 (Polyb. 22, 1, 3). 2. to admit, i. e.
not to reject : τινά, one's authority, 3 Jn. 9 (τους Xo'yous,
1 Mace. X. 46 ; naihfiav. Sir. Ii. 26). [Cf. δίχομαι, fin.] *
Ι-ηδημεω, -ω ; (ϊπίδημος); 1. to be pre.'<ent among
one's people, in one's city or til one's native land, [cf. c'n-i,
D. 1], (Thuc, Plato, al. ; opp. to άποδημ^ϊν, Xen. Cyr.
7, 5, 69 ; ίπιδημίΐν iv τωδι τω βίω, Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 12
[p. 88 ed. Otto]). 2. to be a sojourner, a foreign resi-
dent, among any people, in any country : Acts ii. 10 ; o«
(πιδημονντ€ς ξΐνοι. Acts xvii. 21 ; (Xen., Plato, Theophr.,
Lcian., Aelian, al.).*
ετηύιατασσομαι
238
ίτΓίθυμια
{πι-εια-τάσ-(Γομαι ; Ιο ordain besides, to add something to
u-hal lioi bttn ordained, [ci. eni, D. 4}: Gal. iii. 15. Not
found elsewhere.*
{πι-ΰ(8ωμι : 3 pers. sing. impf. cVf ίι'ίου ; fiit. (ττιθώσω ;
1 aor. f π/δωκα ; 2 aor. l)tfp. pliir. eniSopTfi; 1 aor. pass.
(π^^ύθην; [fr. Horn, down] ; to (jire over; 1. to hand,
give hi/ handing : τινί τι, Mt. vii. 9 sq. ; Lk. xi. 1 1 sij. ;
xxiv. 30, 42; Jn. xiii. 26 [R G L] ; Acts xv. SO; pass.
Lk. iv. 1 7. 2. to give over, i. e. f/ive up to the power or
will of one (^Germ. /ircisgeben) : Actsxxvii. 15 (sc. iavrois
or TO πλοίοι/ τω άνίμω).*
ίιη-δι-ορβόω ( sci- δκΊμθωσκ) : to set in order besides or
further {\vha.t still remains to be set in order, [cf. eVi, D.
4]) : Tit. i. 5, where, for the common reading ΐπιδιορθώση
(1 aor. mid. subjunc), Lchm. has adopted (πώωρθώσηί
(1 aor. act. subjunc). Found also in inscriptions
(Boeckh ii. 409, 9), and in eccl. writ.*
tm-Svu ; to go doivn, set (of the sun) : Eph. iv. 26, on
which see tVi, B. 2 e. (Deut. xxiv. 17 (15) ; Jer. xv. 9 ;
[Philo de spec. legg. 28] ; and with tmesis, Horn. 11. 2,
413.)•
imtUaa [WII -κία, see I, i], -ay, η, {intetK^s, q. v.),
mildness, gentleness, fairness, [^ sweet reasonableness'
(JIatthew Arnold)] : Acts xxiv. 4 ; joined with πραότη!
[<]. v.], 2 Co. x. 1 ; Plut. Pericl. 39 ; with φιλανθρωπία,
Polyb. 1, 14, 4 ; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 36 ; witli χρηστότης,
Hdian. 5, 1, 12 [6 ed. Bekk.]. 'cf. Plato, defin. p. 412 b. ;
Aristot. eth. Xic. 5, 10. (Bar. ii. 27 ; Sap. ii. 19 ; xii. 18 ;
2 Mace. ii. 22; 3 Mace. iii. 15.)•
[Stn. ίτΐ€ΐ'κ€ΐο, irpaOTTis: " irp. magis ad aniraum,
ίπι. vero magis ad exteriorem conversationem pertinet"
(Estius on 2 Co. x. I), "τρ. virtus magis absoluta ; ίπι.
m.agis refertur ad alios " (Bengel, ibid.). See at length
Trench § .xhii.]
ΙτΓΜίκήί, -f'r, (fiVo'f, what is reasonable) ; 1. seemlg,
suitable, (fr. Horn. down). 2. equitable, fair, mild,
gentle : 1 Tim. iii. 3 ; Tit. iii. 2 ; 1 Pet. ii. 18 ; Jas. iii. 1 7.
Neut. TO (TtKiKfs (as often in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down)
νμών i. q. ή cVtf I'xfia ίμων, Phil. iv. 5. [See cVtfi'iceta,
fin.]*
ίΐΓΐ-ζητί'ω, -ω ; impf. fVefijTovf ; 1 aor. ΐπιζήτησα; fr.
lldt. down ; Sept. for ί^^ιη and in 1 S. xx. 1 ; Eccl. vii. 29
(28) for Wp2 ; to inquire for, seek for, search for, seek
diligently, (Germ, herbeisuchen [the fVi- seems to be di-
rective rather than intensive]) : τινά, Lk. iv. 42 (for Rec.
f'(ijrovv) ; Acts xii. 19 ; i. q. to desire, wish for, crave : ri,
Mt. vi. 32 ; Lk. xii. 30 ; Ro. xi. 7 ; Phil. iv. 1 7 ; Ileb. xi.
14 ; xiii. 14; nepi τίνος. Acts xix. 39 [R G T] (but if
your inquiry or desire has reference to other matters) ;
with the inf. Acts xiii. 7 (as in Polyb. 3, 57, 7 ; Diod. 19,
8) ; i. q. to demand, clamor for : σημύον, Mt. xii. 39 ; xvi.
4; Mk. vui. 12 RG; Lk. xi. 29 (where Τ Tr WII ζητ^Ί
[as LTTrWIIinMk. 1. c.]).•
επιθανάτιος, -ov, {θάνατος), doomed to death : 1 Co. iv.
9. (Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 35.)•
«rC-flio-is, -ί<ι)Γ, ή, {(■πιτΊθημι), a laying on, imposition :
των χαίρων. Acts viii. 18 ; 1 Tim. iv. 14 ; 2 Tim. i. 6 ; Ileb.
vi. 2. The imposition of hands, χ(ΐροθ(σία, was a sacred
rite transmitted by the Jews to the Christians, and em-
ployed in praying for another, or in conferring upon him
divine blessings, especially bodily health, or the Holy
Spirit (at the administration of baptism and the inaugu-
ration to their oflice of the teachers and ministers of the
church): Gen. xlviii. 14; Num. x.wii. 18, 23; Deut.
xxxiv. 9; 2K. v. 11, etc.; Mt. xix. 13; Mk. xvi. 18; Acts
vi. 6 ; xiii. 3 ; xix. 6, etc. [See B. D. s. v. Baptism (.sup-
[)lcment) ; McCl. and Strong and Diet, of Chris. Antiq.
s. V. Iiiiposition of Hands.]•
ίιτιθυμί'ω, -ώ ; [impf. ('πίθνμουν]; f\u. ίπιθυμήσω; 1 aor.
('πίθύμησα; {θυμός); fr. Aeschyl. down; Sejit. for ΠϊΚ
and ΊΟΠ ; prop, to keep the θυμός turned upon a thing,
hence [cf. oiar to set one's heart uponl to have a desire for,
long for ; absol. to desire [A. V. lust'], Jas. iv. 2 ; to lust
after, covet, of those who seek things forbidden, Ro. vii.
7; .xiii. 9 (fr. Ex. xx. 1 7) ; 1 Co. x. G, (4 Mace. ii. 6);
κατά τίνος, to have desires opposed to [Α.Λ'. lust against'] a
thing, (ial. v. 17 [B. 335 (288)] ; τινός, to long for, covet
a thing. Acts x.\. 33 ; 1 Tim. iii. 1 ; of sexual desire,
γυναικός, Mt. v. 28 Rec. [see below] (παιδοί η γυναικός,
Xen. an. 4, 1, 14 ; with the gen. also in Ex. xxxiv. 24 ;
Prov. xxi. 26; xxiii. 3, 6 ; Sap. vi. 12; Sir. xxiv. 19 (18),
etc.) ; contrary to the usage of the better Grk. writ, with
the ace. of the object, Mt. v. 28 L Tr (WH br.), and with-
out an obj. Tdf. (Ex. xx. 17 ; Deut. v. 21 ; Mic. ii. 2 ; Sap.
xvi. 3 ; Sir. i. 26 (23), etc. ; cf. W. § 30, 10 b.) ; as often
in Grk. writ., foil, by the inf. : Mt. xiii. 1 7 ; Lk. xv. 16 ;
[xvi. 21] ; xvii. 22 ;' 1 Pet. i. 1 2 ; Rev. ix. 6 ; full, by the
ace. with the inf. Heb. vi. 1 1 ; ίπιθυμία (πεθύμησα I have
greatly desired, Lk. x.xii. 15 ; cf. W. § 54, 3 ; B. § 133,
22 a.•
ίιηθυμητήϊ, -ov, 6, (ΐπιθυμίω), one who longs for, a
craver, lover, one eager fir : κακών, 1 Co. X. 6 (Num. xi.
4). In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.•
«τιθυμία, -ας, ή, ((■πιθνμίω), [fr. Hdt. on], Sept. chiefly
forniKn, n^K, inn; desire, craving, longing: Lk. xxii.
15 (on which see in ΐπιθυμίω, fin.); Rev. xviii. 14; την
(πιθυμΐαν (χ(ΐν f is τι, the desire directed towards, Phil. i.
23; cV πολλ,^ επιθυμία %vith great desire, 1 Th. ii. 17;
plur. αϊ nep'i τα λοιπά ('πιθυμίαι, Mk. iv. 19 [W. § 30, 3 N.
5]; spec, desire fir wliat is forbidden, lust, (Vulg. con•
cupiscentia) : Ro. vii. 7sq. ; Jas. i. 14 sq. ; 2 Pet. i. 4 ; πάθος
('πιβυμίας, 1 Th. iv. 5 ; ϊπιθυμία κακή, Col. iii. 5, (Prov. xxi.
26; [xii. 12]; Plat. legg. 9 p. 854 a. ; ποη7μά, Xen. mem.
1, 2, 64; άγαθη, Sir. xiv. 14 where see Fritzsche, [who
cites also Prov. xi. 23; xiii. 12]) ; plur.. Gal. v. 24 ; 1
Tim. vi. 9 ; 2 Tim. ii. 22 ; iv. 3 ; 1 Pet. i. 14 ; iv. 2 ; with
a gen. of the object, ίπιθυμία μιασμοϋ, for unclean inter-
course, 2 Pet. ii. 10 [al. with W. § 34, 3 b. take μιασμ. as
gen. of quality] ; with a gen. of the subject, a'l (πιθυμίαι
των καρδίων, Ro. Ι. 24 ; with a gen. of the thing by which
the desire is excited, ή ΐπιθυμια τον κόσμου, 1 Jn. ii.
17; τοΰ σώματος, Ro. vi. 12; της απάτης (see απάτη),
Eph. iv. 22; της σαρκός, των οφθαλμών. 1 Jn. ii. 16 (cf.
Huther ad loc.) ; 2 Pet. ii. 18; reXc'iv ΐπιθυμίαν σαρκός,
<Ίά\. v. 16; a'l σαρκικα'ι ϊπιθυμίαι. 1 Pet. ii. II (ψνχικαί,
σωματικοί, 4 Mace. i. 32) ; αί κοσμικα'ι (πιθυμίαι. Tit. ii.
ίτηκαθίζω
239
eiriKovpia
12 ; ils (πιθυμία{ to arouse lusts, Ro. xiii. 14 ; noie'iv ras
cViftv/iVaf, Jn. viii. 44 ; ιητακονΐΐν rais ΐπίβνμίαις, Ko. vi.
12 [LT Tr WII] ; SovXeCav ΐπιθνμίαις (see δουλίύω, 2
b. ), Tit. iii. 3; ΰγισθαι (-πιθυμίαις, '■!■ Tim. iii. 6; iropeve-
σθαι iv ίπιθυμίαις, 1 Pet. iv. 3 ; πορ(ύ(σθαι κατά rat fVi-
θυμίας, Jiide IG, 18; 2 Pet. iii. 3; άναστρίφ(σθαι iv Tois
ίπιθυμίαις τηί σαρκόί, Eph. ii. 3. [Syn. ef. πάθο;, and
see Treneli § Lx.x.wii.] *
ίιη-κοθ-6ζω : 1 aor. επικάθισα ; 1. to cause to sit
upon, to set upon : Mt. xxi. 7 Rec.*'^ 2. intrans. to sit
upon : Matt. 1. c. [Rec."] G L Τ Tr WH al.•
(πι-καλε'ω, -ώ : 1 aor. (π(κά\€σα ; [Pass, and Mid., pres.
(πικα\ονμαι] ; pf. pass, ^πικίκλημαι ; plpf. 3 pers. sing.
ίΈ(κ€κ\ητο, and with neglect of augm. [cf. W. § 12, 9 ; B.
33 (211)] ϊττικίκΚητο (Acts xxvi. 32 Lchm.) ; 1 aor. pass.
4πΐκΚτ]θην ; fut. mid. ΐττικάΚίσομαι ; 1 aor. mid. cVfKoXe-
σάμην ; Sept. very often for Kip ; 1. to put a name
upon, to surname : τινά (Xen., Plato, al.), Mt. x. 25 G
Τ Tr Wli (Rec. ΐκαΚ(σαν) ; pass, ό ίπικαΚοίμ^νο!, he who
is surnamed, Lk. xxii. 3 R G L ; Acts x. 18 ; xi. 13 ; xii.
1 2 ; XV. 22 R G; also os επικαλείται. Acts x. 5, 32 ; ό tVi-
κληθίίς, Mt. X. 3 [R G] ; Acts iv. 3C ; xii. 25 ; i. q. 05 «Ve-
κλήθη, Acts i. 23. Pass, with the force of a mid. [ef. W.
§ 38, 3], to permit one's self to be surnamerl : Ileb. xi. 16 ;
Mid. w. τινά : 1 Pet. i. 1 Γ d πατέρα ίπικαΚ(ίσθ( τόι/ etc. i. e.
if ye call (for yourselves) on him as fatlier, i. e. if ye sur-
name him your father. 2. (τηκα\(Ίται τ6 ονομά tivos
ί'πί τιυα, after the Hebr. "a Sj7 "3 D'^ ^Ip.h ^e name
of one is named upon some one, i. e. he is called by his
name or declared to be dedicated to him (cf. Oesenius,
Thesaur. iii. p. 1232") : Acts xv. 17 fr. Am. Lx. 12 (the
name referred to is the people of God) ; Jas. ii. 7 (the
name oi τοϋ Χρίστου). 3. τινί with the ace. of the
object; prop, to call something to one [cf. Eng. to cry out
upon (or against) one'] ; to charge something to one as a
crime or reproach ; to summon one on any charge, prose-
cute one for a crime ; to blame one for, accuse one of,
(Arstph. pax 663; Thuc. 2, 27; 3, 36; Plat. legg. 6,
761 e. ; 7, 809 e. ; Dio Cass. 36, 28 ; 40, 41 and often in
the orators [cf. s. v. κατηΎορίω]) : ci τώ οικοΒ^σπότυ BffX-
ζ(βοΰλ enfKOXfcrav (i. e. accused of commerce with Beel-
zebul, of receiving liis help. cf. Mt. ix. 34; xii. 24 ; Mk.
iii. 22; Lk. xi. 1.5), ττόσω μά\\ον τοίς οικιακοις αντον, Mt.
χ. 25 L WH mrg. after cod. Λ''at. (see 1 above), a read-
ing defended by Rettig in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1838,
p. 477 sqq. and by Alex. Bttm. in the same journal for
1860, p. 343, and also in his N. T. Gram. 151 (132) ;
[also by Weiss in Mey. ed. 7 ad loc.]. But this expres-
sion (Beelzebul for the help of Beelzebul) is too hard
not to be suggestive of the emendation of some ignorant
scribe, who took offence because (with the exception of
this passage) the enemies of Jesus are nowhere in the
Gospels said to have called him by the name of Beelze-
bul. 4. to call upon (like Germ, anrvfen), to invoke;
Mid. to call upon for one's self, in one's behalf : any one
as a helper. Acts vii. 59, where supply τον κΰριον Ίησοϋν
(βοηθ6ν. Plat. Euthyd. p. 297 c. ; Diod. 5, 79) ; τίνα
uapTvpa. as my witness, 2 Co. i. 23 (Plat. legg. 2, 664 c.) ;
as a judge, i. e. to appeal to one, make appeal unto : Καί-
σαρα, Acts XXV. 11 s,i\. ; xxvi. 32: xxviii. 19; [τον ?(3α-
στόν. Acts XXV. 25] ; foU. by the inf. pass. Acts xxv. 21 (to
be reserved). 5. Hebraistically (like ΠΙΓΙ' ϋ'ύ'Ά Χ"»ρ
to call upon by pronouncing the name of Jehovah, Gen.
iv. 26: xii. 8; 2 K. v. 11, etc.; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. p.
1231'• [or Hebr. Lex. s. v. X"^P]; an expression finding
its explanation in the fact that prayers addressed to God
ordinarily began with an invocation of the divine name :
Ps. iii. 2 ; vi. 2 ; vii. 2, etc.) έπικαλοΟμαι το όνομα τοϋ κυρίου,
Ι call upon (on my behalf) the name of the Lord, i. e. to
invoke, adore, worship, the Lord, i. e. Christ : Acts ii. 21
(fr. Joel ii. 32 (iii. 5)) ; ix. 14, 21 ; xxii. 16; Ro. x. 13
sq. ; 1 Co. i. 2; τον κνριον, Ro. χ. 12; 2 Tim. ii. 22;
(often in Grk. writ. ί-πικαΚεϊσθαι τοΪί θιοϋς, as Xen. Cyr.
7, 1, 35 ; Plat. Tim. p. 27 c. ; Polyb. 15, 1, 13).*
«πι-κάλυμμα, -Tof, τό, {ϊπικάΚϋπτω), a covering, veil;
prop, in Sept.: Ex. xxvi. 14; x.\xvi. 19 Compl. [cf.
xxxix. 21 Tdf.] ; metaph. i. q. a pretext, cloak: τη; κακίαί,
1 Pet. ii. 16 (πλοΟτοΓ δε πολλών ίΤτικάΚνμμ έστ! κακών,
Menand. ap. Stob. flor. 91, 19 [iii. 191 ed. Gaisf.] ;
" quaerentes libidinibus suis patrocinium et velamen-
tum," Seneca, vita beata 12).*
ίΐΓΐ-καλύτΓτω : [1 aor. ίπ(κα\ΰφθην] ; to cover over : at
άμαρτίαι (πι.κα\ύ-πτονται, are covered over so as not to
come to view, i. e. are pardoned, Ro. iv. 7 fr. Ps. xxxi.
(xxxii.) 1.*
ίΐΓΐ-κατ-άρατο5. -ov, (ί-πικαταράομαι to imprecate curses
upon), only in bibl. and eccl. use, accwsed, execrable, ex-
posed to divine vengeance, lying under God's curse : Jn.
vii. 49 R G ; Gal. iii. 10 (Deut. xxvii. 26) ; ibid. 13 (Deut.
xxi. 23) ; (Sap. iii. 12 (13); xiv. 8; 4 Mace. ii. 19; in
Sept. often for -ins).*
ίΐΓ£-Κ€ΐμαι ; impf. (πικείμην ; to lie upon or over, rest
upon, be laid or placed upon ; a. prop.: ίπι tiw. Jn. xi.
38 ; sc. on the burning coals, Jn. xxi. 9. b. figuratively,
a. of things : of the pressure of a violent tempest, χει-
μώνας επικειμένου. Acts xxvii. 20 (Plut. Timol. 28, 7) ;
ανάγκη μοι επίκειται, is laid upon me, 1 Co. ix. 16 (Hom.
n. 6, 458) ; επικείμενα, of observances imposed on a man
by law, Heb. Lx. 10 [ef. W. 635 (589)]. β. of men ; tv
jiress upon, to be urgent : with dat. of pers. Lk. v. 1 ;
επίκειντο αιτούμενοι, Lk. XXIU. 23 (ττολλω μάλΧον επεκειτο
άΙ^ιών, Jose])h. antt. 18, 6,6; μαΚ\ον έπε'κειντο βλάσφη-
;ioCvTcr, 20, 5, 3).*
ίΐΓΐ-κελλω : [1 aor. επεκειΚα]; to run a ship ashore, to
bring to land; so fr. Hom. Od. 9, 148 down; επεκε:\αν
(RG επώκειλαν) την ναϋν. Acts xxvii. 41 L Τ Tr WH ;
but in opposition see Meyer ad loc. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed.
p. 3009.]•
[ίτΓΐ-κίφάλοιον, -oυ,τό,head-money, poll-tax, (Aristot. oec.
2 p. 134(>, 4 and 1348% 32) : Mk. xii. 14 WH (rejected)
mm. for κηνσον (al.).*]
'EiriKoipeios [-pioy Τ λΥΉ ; see I, 1]. -ov, 6, Epicurean,
belonging to the sect of Epicurus, the philosopher : Acts
xvii. 18.•
cniKoupCa, -as, ή, (επικουρεω to aid), aid, succor: Acti
xxvi. 22. (Sap. xiii. 18 ; fr. Thuc. and Eur. down.) *
ewivptj/tB
240
ΐΤΓΐμβνα
{m-Kpivu : 1 aor. ατίκρινα ; to aiijudije, approve oy one's
decision, decree, give sentence : full, by the ace. with inf.,
Lk. .xxiii. 24. (Plato, Dera., Pint., Ildian., al.) *
ίΐΓΐ-λαμβάνω ; 2 aor. mid. ϊιτίΚαβύμψ ; to take in addi-
tion [ef. cVi, D. 4], to take. Ια;/ hold of, take possession
of, overtake, attain to. In the Hible only in the mid. ;
Sept.. for ΙΠΧ and ρ'ΙΠΠ ; a. ])ΐ•ϋρ. to lay hold of or to
seize upon anylhintj with the hands (Germ, sich an etwas
anhalten) : των άφλάστων νηόί, Hdt. 6, 114 ; hence, univ.
to take hold of, lay hold of: with gen. of pers., Mt. xiv.
31 ; Lk. ix. 47 [Tr AVII ace.]; (x.\.iii. 2G KG); Acts
xvii. 19; xxi. 30, 33; with ace. of pers., Lk. xxiii. 26 L
Τ Tr WII, but in opposition see Meyer ; for where the
ptcp. ('πιΚαβόμιΐΌ! is in this sense joined with an ace,
the ace, by the σχήμα απο κοινού, depends also upon the
accompanying finite verb (cf. B. § I.'i2, 9; [so AV. (ed.
Liinem.) 202 (190)]): Acts ix. 27; xvi. 19: xviii. 17. cf.
Lk. xiv. 4. with the gen. of a thing : t^s χ(Ίρύί nvos.
Mk. viii. 23; Acts xxiii. 19; of a leader, and thus niet-
aph. of God, Ileb. viii. 9 [cf. W. .57] (Γ)31); Β. 31(;
(271)] ; with gen. of a pers. and of a thing : «ViX. rivos
λόγου, ρήματος, to take any one in his speech, i. e. to lay
hold of something said by him which can be turned
against him, Lk. xx. 20 [Tr λόγοι/], 26 [WH Tr mrg. τοϋ
for αύτοΰ] : «ττίλ. της αιωνίου [:d. οι/τωϊ] ζωής, to seize
upon, lay hold of, i. e. to struggle to obtain eternal life,
1 Tim. vi. 12, 19, [cf. W. 312 (29:i)]. b. by a metaph.
drawn from laying hold of another to rescue him from
peril, to help, to suci-or, (cf. Germ, sich eincs annehmen) :
τινός, Ileb. ii. 16 ; in this sense used besides only in Sir.
iv. 11 and Schol. ad Ae-schyl. Pens. 739. In .Appian.bel.
civ. 4, 96 the act. is thus used with ilie diil.: ήμΊν rb
δαιμόυιον ΐπιΧαμβάνίΐ.
(Ίτι-λανθάνομαι. ; pf. pass, «πιλίλτ/σμαι ; 2 aor. mid. eVi-
λαθάμην, Sept. often for UD'd ; tojoiy/il: foil, by the inf.,
Mt. xvi. .') ; ^Ik. viii. 11; foil, by an indir. (picst. .las.
i. 24 ; in the sense of iief/lecting, no longer rtirini/ for :
with the gen.. Ileb. vi. 10; xiii. 2, 16 ; with the ace. (cf.
\V. § 30, 10 c. ; Matthiae § 347 Anm. 2, ii. p. 820 S(i.),
Phil. iii. 13 (14) ; with a pass, signification (Is. xxiii. 16 ;
Sir. iii. 14 ; .\x.\ii. (xxxv.) 9 ; Sap. ii. 4, etc. [cf. B. .52
(46)]) : ίΐτιΧ(\ησμίνος forgotten, given over to oblivion,
i. e. nnciired fur, ίνώπιον τοϋ aeoij before God i. e. by
God (Sir. xxiii. 14), Lk. xii. G. [(From Horn, on.)]*
ίτΓΐ-λίγω: [pres. |)ass. ptcp. {'π-ιλίγόμί ras] ; I anr. mid.
ptcp. €πΟ^(ξάμ(νος ; 1. to say htsides [cf. cVi. D. 4],
(lldt. et al.) ; to surname (Plato, lesg. 3 p. 700 b.) : in
pass. .In. V. 2 [Tdf. roXfy.]. unless the meanins to name
(put a name u])on) be jireferred here; cf. επονομάζω.
2. to choose for (Hdt. et sqq. ; Sept.) ; mid. to choose for
one's self : Acts xv. 40 (2 S. x. 9 ; Hdt. 3, 157; Time.
7, 19: Diod. 3, 73 (74); 14, 12; Joseph, antt. 4, 2, 4,
and others).*
ίτη-λίίιτω : fnt. eViXf ίψω ; to fail, not to suffice for (any
purpose, for the attainment of an end) : τίνα ό χρόνος,
time fails one, Ileb. xi. 32 and many like e.\x. in Grk.
writ, f r. Dem. dowu ; see Bleek, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2
p. 818.•
{ιη-λ((χω ; impf. ίπί'Κιιχον ; to lick the surface of, licit
over ([cf. ί'πί, D. 1] ; Germ, belecken) : with the ace. of a
thing, Lk. xvi. 21 L Τ TrWH ; (in Long. past. 1, 24
(11) a var. for Ι-πιτριχω).'
ίΐΓίλησμονή, -ης, ή, ((ττιλήσ/ιωΐ' forgetful [W. 93 (89)]),
forgetfiilness : άκροαττ^ς ΐπιΧησμονης, a forgetful hearer
[cf. W. § 34. 3b.: B. nil (140)], .Jas. i. 25. (.Sir. xi. 27
(25).)•
iir£Aoiiros, -ov, (λοιπός), remaining besides, left over,
[cf. eni, D. 4] : 1 Pet. iv. 2. (Sept. ; Grk. writ. fr. lldt.
down.) *
ίιτί-λυσίϊ, -iwf, ή, (ί'πιλύω, q. v.), α loosening, unloosing
(Germ. Λ ufliisung) ; metaph. interpretation : 2 Pet. i.
20, on which pass, see yivopai, 5 e. o. (Gen. xl. 8 Aq. ;
Ileliod. 1, IS ; but not I'hilo, vitacontempl. § 10, where
ϊπι8(ίξ(ως was long ago restoied.) *
ίτΓΐ-λνω : impf. ('ττίλυοΐ'; 1 fut. pass. eViXu^ijffo^ot ; a.
projierly, to vnloosi; untie (Germ, (lujliisrn) anything
knotted or bound or sealed up ; (Xen., Theocr., I Idian.).
b. to clear (a controversy), to ileci/le, settle: Acts xix.
39 ; to explain (what is obscure and hard to understand) :
Mk. iv. 34 (as in Gen. xli. 12 var. ; Philo, vita contempl.
§ 10: de agricult. § 3 ; Sext. Empir. 2, 246; γρίφους,
Athen. 10 p. 449 e. ; also in mid., Athen. 10 p. 450 f. ;
.Joseph, antt. 8, 6, 5, and often by the Scholiasts).•
4ΐΓΐ-μορτυρ€'ω, -ώ ; to hear iritness In, establish liy testi-
mony: full, by the ace. with inf., I Pet. v. 12. (Plato,
.Joseph., Pint., J/cian., al.) [CoMi•. : συν-ιπιμαρτυρίω.^'
4ΐΓΐμ€λ»α, -ας, ή, (fVi^eXiiscareful), rare, attention : Acts
xxvii. 3. (Prov. iii. 8; 1 Mace. xvi. 14 ; 2 Mace. xi. 23 ;
very com. in Grk. prose writ., not used in the poets.)*
^ι-μ€λΕθμαι, -ονμαι, and (πιμίλομαι: fut. €7τιμ€λήσομαι\
1 aor. ίττίμίΧήβην: with gen. of the object, to lake cure oj
a person or thing {Ι-πί denoting direction of the mind
toward the object cared for [cf. ini, D. 2]) : Lk. x. 34 sq. ;
1 Tim. iii. 5. (Gen. xliv. 21 ; 1 Mace. xi. 37 ; 1 Esdr.
vi. 2(i : used by Grk. writ. esp. of prose fr. lldt. down.) *
«πιμελώβ, adv., ililigenlly, carefully : Lk. xv. 8.*
ΙΐΓΐ-μίνω; [impf. Ιττΐμΐνον^; fut. Ιτημ^νω; 1 aor. «Ve-
ptiva ; to stay at or with ; to tarry still ; still to abide, to
continue, remain; a. prop, of tarrying in a place: eV
Έφ/σω. 1 Co. xvi. 8; iv TTJ σαρκί, to live still longer on
earth, I'liil. i. 24 (G Τ WU om. ev) ; αυτοί, there. Acts xv.
34 [Rec.]: xxi. 4 [Lchm. αυτοΊ.ς"\•, with dat. of thing: τΓ;
σαρκί, to abide as it were a captive to life on earth, Phil.
i. 24 G Τ WH ; tVi τινι. ivith one. Acts xxviii. 14 [LT
Tr WII παρ''\ : προς τίνα, with one, 1 Co. xvi. 7 ; Gal. i.
18; with specification of time how long: Acts x. 48;
xxi. 4, 10; xxviii. 12, 14; 1 Co. xvi. 7. b. trop. toper-
severe, continue ; with dat. of the thing continued in
[cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. ii. p. 10 sq.] : Ty αμαρτία,
Ro. vi. 1 ; TT) απιστία, Ro. xi. 23 ; tjj πίστ(ΐ. Col. i. 2.'! ; U\
the work of teaching. 1 Tim. iv. 16 (τω μι) aSiKtiv, Xen.
oec. 14, 7 : τη μνηστ^ία, Acl. v. h. 1 0. 1 5 ) : with dat. of the
blessing for which one keeps himself fit : ry χάριτι, Acts
xiii. 43 Rec; Ty χρηστότητι, Ro. xi. 2-'; with a ptcp.
denoting the action persisted in : .In. viii. 7 Rec. ; Acts
xii. 16 ; cf. B. 299 sq. (257) ; [W. § 54, 4].*
ίΤΓίΐ'βυω
241
έττιητοθεω
4irtrvcuii> : 1 aor. enivevaa ; fr. Horn, down ; to nod to ;
trop. (by a nod) to express approval, to asseril : Acts xviii.
20, as often in Grk. writ.*
eirCvoia, -ar, ή, (ίττινοίω to think on, devise), thought,
purpose : Acts viii. 22. (Jer. ,\x. 10 ; Sap. vi. 17, etc.;
often in Grk. writ. fr. .Soph, and Thue. down.) *
«ΐΓίορκίω, -ώ : fut. ϊπιορκήσω, cf. Kriiger §40 s. v., and
§39,12,4; [Veitch s. v. ; B. 53 (4G)] ; (eViopicor, q.v.) ;
to swear falsebj, forswear one's self: Mt. v. 33. (Sap.
xiv. 28 ; 1 Esdr. i. 46 ; by Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) *
€irC-opKos, -ov, (fr. tVi [q. v. D. 7] against, and ορκοί) ;
[masc. as subst.] a false swearer, a perjurer : 1 Tim. i. 10.
(From Horn, down.)*
ίΐΓίοΰΐτα, see CTrei^t.
tiriovcrios, -ov, a word found only in Mt. Ti. 1 1 and Lk. .\i.
Ά, in tlie phrase npros i-niovaios ([Pesh.] Syr. (^^ »«\
7 >
—laiQIffJ the bread of our necessity, i. e. necessary for
us [but the Curetonian (earlier) Syriac reads j ' -^"]
continual; cf. Bp. Lghtft. as below, I. 3 p. 214 sqq. ; Tay-
lor, Sayings of the Jewish Fathers, p. 139 sq.] ; Itala
[Old Lat.] panis quolidianus). Origcn testifies [de orat.
L'7] that the word was not in use in ordinary speech, and
accordingly seems to have been coined by the Evange-
lists themselves. Many commentators, as Beza, Kui-
noel, Tholuck, Ewald, Bleek, Keim, Cremer, following
Origen, Jerome (who in Mt. only translates by the bar-
barous phrase panis supersuhstantialis"), Theophylact,
Euthymius Zigabenus, explain the word by bread for
sustenance, which serves to sustain life, deriving the word
from ουσία, after the analogy of (ξοΰσιος. ivoiaios• But
ουσία very rarely, and only in philosoiihic language, is
e()uiv. to ΰπαρξΐ!, as in Plato, Theaet. j). 18.!) c. (opp. to
TO μη flvat), Ari.stot. de part. anim. i. 1 {ή yap yevfais
tv(Ka της ουσία? ίστίν, uhW ονχ η ουσία ΐνΐκα της γΐνίσίως;
for other ex.x. see Bonitz's Index to Aristot. p. 544), and
generally denotes either essence, real nature, or sub-
stance, property, resources. On this account Leo Meyer
(in Kuhn, Zeitschr. f. vergleich. S])rachkunde, vii. pp.
401-430), Kamphausen (Gebet des Ilerrn, pp. 8G-102),
with whom Keim (ti. 278 sq. [Eng. trans, iii. 340]), Weiss
(Mt. 1. c), Delitzsch (Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. 187(! p.
402), agree, prefer to derive the word from ineivat (and
in particular fr. the ptc|). ίπών, (-ποϋσιος for (πόντιος, see
below) to be present, and to understand it bread which is
ready at hand or suffices, so that Christ is conjectured to
have said in Chald. NJpnT «onS (cf. 'Pn onS my allow-
ance of bread, Prov. xxx. 8) or something of the sort.
But this opinion, like the preceding, encounters the great
objection (to mention no other) that, although the ι in tVt
is retained before a vowel in certain words (as ίτιιορκος,
f'mopKfiu, ΐπιόσσομαι, etc. [cf. Bp. Lghtft., as below, I.
§ I ] ), yet in iiruvai and words derived from it, {'πούσια,
(πουσιώ^ης, it is always elided. Therefore much more cor-
rectly do Grotius, Scaliger, Wetstein, Fischer (De vitiis
Ifxx. etc. p. 306 sqq.), Valckenaer, Fritzsche (on Mt. p.
•ifi 7 sqq.), Winer (97 (92)), Bretschneider, Wahl, Meyer,
[Bp. Lghtft. (Revision etc., App.)] and others, compar-
ing the words ίκονσιος, (StXovaios, yepovaios, (fr. ίκών, ίθί-
\ων, yiptav, for ίκοντιος, ΐβΐΚόντιος, yepovrios, cf. Kiihner i.
§ (i3, 3 and § 334, 1 Anm. 2), conjecture that the adjec-
u\e ('πιοϋσιος is f(jrmed fr(jm (πίών, ϊπιοϋσα, with refer-
ence to the familiar expression ή ϊπιοίσα (see ΐπαμι),
and ίίρτος eVtouVtoy is eijuiv. to πρτιις της ^πιπίσης ημέρας,
food for (i. 6. necessary or sufficient for) the morrow.
Thus ΐπιούσιον and σίιμφον admirably answer to each
other, and that state of mind is portrayed which, piously
contented vfithfood sufficinrj from one day to the next, in
praying to God for sustenance does not go beyond the
absolute necessity of the nearest future. This explana-
tion is also recommended by the fact that in the Gospel
according to the Hebrews, as Jerome testifies, the word
επιούσιος was represented by the Aramaic ΊΠ"?, "quod
difitur crastinus " ; hence it would seem that Christ him-
self used the Chaldaic expression nno^ 'T ί<"3π'7. Nor
is the prayer, so understood, at variance with the mind
of Christ as expressed in Mt. vi. 34, but on the contrary
harmonizes with it finely; for his hearers are bidden
to ask of God, in order that they may themselves be
relie\ ed of anxiety for the morrow. [See Bp. Lghtft.,
as above, pp. 195-234; McCtellan, The New Test. etc.
pp. 632-647 ; T/io^uct, Bergpredigt, Mt. 1. c, for earlier
reff.] »
ίΐΓΐ-^ίΐΓτω ; 2 aor. t πίπεσοι/, 3 jiers. phir. ΐπίπίσαυ, Ro.
XV. 3 L Τ Tr AVII [ef. άπΐρχομαι init.] ; pf. ptcp. inmf-
πτωκώς ; [see πίπτω] ; Sept. for 73J ; to fall upon ; to
rush or press upon; a. prop.; rm, upon one, Mk. iii.
10; to He upon one, Acts xx. 10; «Vi τον τράχηλήν τίνος,
to fall into one's embrace, Lk. xv. 20 ; Acts xx. 37, (Gen.
.xlvi. 29; Tobit xi. 8, 12; 3 Mace. v. 49); to fall back
upon, ίπίτΰ στηθός τίνος, Jn. xni. 2.>Ή,ΟΎ. b. metaph.
6πι' Tiva. Ii> fidl upon one, i. e. to seize, take possession oj
him: φό^οί, Lk. i. 12 ; Acts xix. 17 [LTroriaci'] ; Rev.
xi. U LTTr AVH ; (κστασίί, Acts x. 10 Rec; άχΚίς,
Acts xiii 11 [RG]. used also of the Holy Spirit, in its
inspiration and impulse : <'πί τινι. Acts viii. 16 ; eVi τίνα,
X. 44 [Lchm. £7Γίσί] ; xi. 15, (Ezek. xi. 5) ; of reproaches
cast upon one : Ro. xv. 3 [Noteworthy is the absol.
use in Acts xxiii. 7 WH mrg. Ιπίπ^σ^ν (al. iyivtro) στά-
σις. (From Hdt. down.)] "
ίτη-ίΓλήσ-σ-ω : 1 Hor. ίπίπ\ηζα; a. prop, to strike
upon, beat upon : Horn. II. 1 0, 500. b. trop. to chas-
tise tcith words, to chide, upbraid, rebuke : 1 Tim. v. 1.
(Horn. Π. 12, 211 ; Xen., Plato, Polyb., al.) •
ίΐΓΐ^ίΓοβί'ω, -ω ; 1 aor. ίπ(πό6ησα ; prop, πόθαν ίχω ίπι
τι [i. e. c'lri is directive, not intensive; cf. ΐπί, D. 2]
(cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 30 sq.) ; to long for, de-
sire : foil, by the inf. 2 Co. v. 2 ; ISfiv τίνα. Ro. i. 1 1 ; 1
Th. iii. 6 ; 2 Tim. i. 4 ; Phil. ii. 26 L br. WH txt. br. ; τί,
1 Pet. ii. 2 (f'n-i Ti, Ps. xli. (xlii.) 2) ; τινά. to be possessed
with a desire for, long for, [W. § 30. 10 b.], Phil. ii. 26
RGTTrWHmrg. ; to pursue with love, to long afer;
2 Co. ix. 14 ; Phil. i. 8, (τας (ντο\ας θ(οϋ, Ps. cxviii.
(cxix.) 131); absol. to lust [i. e. harbor forbidden desire] :
Jas. iv. 5, on which pass, see φθόνοι• (Hdt., Plat., Died.,
Plut., Lcian.) *
ε7η7Γοθησι<!
242
ίΤΓίσκοττη
ίιινίΓίβησίί, -tat, ή, longing: 2 Co. vii. 7, 11. (Ezek.
xxiii. 1 1 Aq. ; Clem. Ales., strom. 4, 21, 131 p. 527 a.) *
ίττί-ττόβιγτοί.-ον, longed for: Phil. iv. 1. ([Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 65, 1 ; Barn. ep. 1, 3]; App. Ilisp. 43; Eustath. ;
[cf. W. § 34, 3].) •
ίιηίΓοθία [WII -^όθίΐα, see s. v. «, i],-at, η, longing: Ro.
XV. 23 ; άπαξ λιγόμ. [On the passage cf. 15. 294 (2.52).] '
ίιη-ΐΓθρίίίομαι ; /ο go or Journey ίο : npos τίνα, l.k. viii.
4; (foil, by tVi with the ace. Ep. Jer. Gl (62) ; I'olyb. 4,
9, 2; freq. used by Polyb. with the simple ace. of i)lace:
both to go to, traverse regions, cities (so την γην, Ezek.
xx.xi.\. 14 for "Ι5>; ; ras δυνάμίΐί, 3 Mace. i. 4), and also
to make a hnnlile inroad, ocerrun, march over).'
ίπχ-ρράπτα (Τ Tr WII ίπιράπτω, see P, p) ; (βάτη-ω to
sew) ; to sew upon, sew to: t'nl τινι [R G; al. τίνα], Mk.
ii. 21.•
im-ppCirr» (LTTrWlI ('πφίτττω, see P, p) : 1 aor.
ΐπιρρίψα ; (ρίπτω) ; Ιο throw upon, place upon : τί «Vt τι,
Lk. xix. 35 ; ( Vulg. projicere, to throw away, throw off) :
την μίριμναν «πι θ(όν, i. β. to cast upon, give up to, God,
1 Pet. V. 7, fr. Ps. liv. (Iv.) 23. [Occasionally fr. Horn.
Od. 5, 310 down.]•
ί•π•ίσ-ημο5, -01/, (σήμα a sign, mark) ; 1. prop, hnring
a mark on it, niar/ccd, stamped, coined : άργΰριον, χρυσοί,
(lldt., Thuc.,Xen., Polyb., Joseph.). 2. trop. nmricd
(Lat. insignis). both in a good and bad sense ; in a good
sense, of note, illustrious : Ro. xvi. 7 (Hdt. et sqq.) ;
in a bad sense, notorious, infamous: Mt. xxvii. 16 (Eur.
Or. 249 ; Joseph, antt. 5, 7, 1 ; Plut. Fab. Max. 14 ; al.).*
«η(Γΐησ-μ6$, -oC, ό, {(πισιτίζομαι to provision one's
self) ; 1. a foraging, providing food, (Xen., Plut.,
al.). 2. supplies, provisions, food lA.y. victuals']: Lk.
L\. 12 (.Sept., Xen., Dem., Ildian., al.).*
ίτη-σκί'τΓτομαι ; fut. 3 pers. sing, ϊπισκίψίται, Lk. i. 78
Tr mrg. WII ; 1 aor. ϊπ(σκ(ψάμην•, fr. Hdt. down ; Sept.
often for ΊΓ53 ; to look upon or after, to inspect, examine
with the eyes ; a. τινά, in order to see how he is, i. e. to
visit, go to see one : Acts vii. 23 ; xv. 3G, (Judg. xv. 1) ;
the poor and afflicted, Jas. i. 27 ; the sick, Mt. xxv. 36,
43, (.Sir. vii. 35; Xen. mem. 3, 11, 10 ; Plut. mor. p. 129 c.
[de sanitate praecept. 15 init.] ; Lcian. philops. 6, and in
med. writ.). b. Hebraistically, to look upon in order to
help or to benefit, i. q. to look afler, have a care for, pro-
vide for, of God : Tira, Lk. vii. 16 ; Heb. ii. 6, (Gen. xxi.
1 ; Ex. iv. 31 ; Ps. viii. 5; Ixxix. (Ixxx.) 15 ; Sir. xlvi.
14 ; Jud. viii. 33, etc.) ; foil, by a telic inf. Acts xv. 14 ;
absol. (Sir. xx.xii. (xxxv.) 21) yet with a statement of
the effect and definite blessing added, Lk. i. 68 ; (Vt-
σκίψατο [WH Tr mrg. ίπισκίψΐται'] ημάς ανατολή (ξ
ΰψουΓ a light from on high hath looked [al. shall look]
upon us (cf. our the sun looks down on us, etc.), i. e. sal-
vation from God has come to us, Lk. i. 78. (In the O. T.
need also in a bad sense of God as punishing, Ps.
Ixxxviii. (Lxxxix.) 33 ; Jer. ίχ. 25; xi. 22, etc.) c. to
look (about) for, look out (one to choose, employ, etc.) :
Acts vi. 3.•
ίτι-σ-κΓυά^ω : to furnish with things necessary; Mid. to
fitmish one's self or for one's self: (ΐτισκ(νασάμ€νοι, hav-
ing gathered and made ready the things necessary for
the journej, Acts x.xi. 15 L Τ Tr WII, for HGanooKcv
ασάμινοι (which see in its place).*
ίτΓΐ-σκηνόω, -ώ : 1 aor. ίπ(σκηνωσα ; to fx a tent or habi-
tation on : ίτΓΐ ras o'lKiat, to take possession of and live
in the houses (of the citizens), Polyb. 4, 18, 8; rais
oiKiais, 4, 72, 1 ; trop. eVi τίνα, of the ])owcr of Christ
descending upon one, working within him and giving
him help, [A. V. rest upon], 2 Co. xii. !).•
«Γΐ-ο-κιάζω ; [impf. {πίσκιαζον, Lk. ix. 34 Lmrg. TTr
txt. WH] ; fut. €πισκιάσα> ; 1 aor. ίπισκίασα ; to throw a
shadow upon, to envelop in shadow, to overshadow : τινΙ,
Acts V. 15. From a vaporous cloud that casts a
shadow the word is transferred to a shining cloud
surrounding and enveloping persons with brightness:
τικύ, Mt. xvii. 5 ; Lk. ix. 34 ; τινί, Mk. ix. 7. 'JVopi-
cally, of the Holy Spirit exerting creative energy upon
the womb of the virgin Mary and impregnating it, (a
use of the word which seems to have been drawn from
the familiar O. T. idea of a cloud as symbolizing the
immediate presence and power of God) : with the dat.
Lk. i. 35. (In prof. auth. generally w. an ace. of the
object and in the sense of obscuring : Hdt. 1, 209 ; Soph.,
Aristot., Theophr., Philo, Lcian., Ildian., Geop. Sept.
for ^po to cover, Ps. xc. (xci.) 4 ; cxxxix. (cxl.) 8 ; for
pci, Ex. xl. 29 (35) (π(σκίαζ(ν im την σκηνΐ]ν η νιφίλη ;
[cf. W. § 52, 4, 7].) *
έτΓΐ-σ-κοίΓί'ω, -ώ ; to look upon, inspect, oversee, look after,
care for : spoken of the care of the church which rested
upon the presbyters, 1 Pet. v. 2 [T WH om.] (with τη»
ΙκκΚησΐαν added, Ignat. ad Rom. 9, 1); foil, by μή [q. v.
II. 1 a.] i. q. Lat. caveo, to look carefully, beware : Heb.
xii. 15. (Often by Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.)•
ίτη-σ-κοττή, -ης, η, (eniaKonf'w), ins]>ection, visitation,
(Giirm. Be.iichtigung); a. prop.: fis «ττισκ. τοϋ παιδόί
to visit the boy, Lcian. dial. deor. 20, 6 ; Avith this ex-
ception no example of the word in prof. writ, has yet
been noted. b. In biblical (Jrk., after the llebr.
mpiJ, that act by which God looks into and searches
out the ways, deeds, character, of men, in order to ad-
judge thtm their lot accordingly, whether joyous or sad;
inspection, investigation, vi.-dtalion, (Vulg. usually visita-
tio) : so univ. iv ίπισκοπη ψυχών, when he shall search
the souls of men, i. e. in the time of divine judgment,
Sap. iii. 13; also iv ωρα ίπισκοπης, Sir. xviii. 20 (19);
so perhaps iv ήμίρα ίπισκυπης, 1 Pet. ii. 12 [see below] ;
in a good sense, of God's gracious care : τον καιρόν τη!
ίπισκοττης <τον, i. e. τ6ν καιρόν iv ω €π€σκΐψατο σ€ ό θ^ος.
Ία which God showed himself gracious toward thee and
offered thee salvation through Christ (see ίπισκίτττομαι,
b.), Lk. xix. 44 ; iv καιρώ ίπισκοπής, in the time of divine
reward, 1 Pet. v. 6 Lchm. ; also, in the opinion of many
commentators, 1 Pet. ii. 12 [al. associate this pass, with
Lk. xix. 44 above ; cf. De Wette (ed. Briickner) oi
Iluther ad loc] ; fr. the O. T. cf. Gen. 1. 24 sq. ; Job
xxxiv. 9 ; Sap. ii. 20 ; iii. 7, etc. with a bad reference
of divine punishment : Ex. iii. 16 ; Is. x. 3 ; Jer. x. 15
Sap. xiv. 11 ; xix. 14 (15) ; [etc. ; cf. Soph. Lex. β. v.J
κΤΓίσκοτΓος
243
ίττιστρΐφω
ο. after the analogy of the Hebr. rnp3 (Num. iv. 16;
1 Chr. xxiv. 19 [here Sept. (πtσκeψis], etc.), oversight
i. e. overseerskip, office, charge ; Vulg. episcopatus : Acts
i. 20, fr. Ps. cviii. (cLx.) 8 ; spec, the office of a bishop
(the overseer or presiding officer of a Christian
church): 1 Tim. iii. 1, and in eccl. writ.*
iiri-o-Koiros, -ου, ό, (ίπισκίπτομαι), an overseer, a man
charged with the duty of seeing that things to be done
by others are done rightly, any curator, guardian, or
superintendent ; Sept. for TpS, Judg. ix. 28 ; Neh. xi.
9, 14, 22; 2 K. xi. 15, etc.; 1 Mace. i. 51. The word
has the same comprehensive sense in Grk. writ. fr.
Homer Odys. 8, 163; Π. 22, 255 down; hence in the
N. •Τ. ίπίσκ. των ψυχών guardian of souls, one who
watches over their welfare : 1 Pet. ii. 25 ([^rbv παντύι
ην(ίματο! κτίστην κ. (πίσκοπον, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 3] ;
άρχίίρ^νς και προστάτης των ψυχών ημών ^Ιησοΰς Χρ. ibid.
61, 3; [cf. Sir. i. 6]), cf. Heb. xiii. 17. spec, the super-
intendent, head or overseer of any Christian church ; Vulg.
episcopus : Acts xx. 28 ; Phil. i. 1 ; 1 Tim. iii. 2 ; Tit. i.
7 ; see πρισβΰτίρης, 2 b. ; [and for the later use of the
word, see Diet, of Chris. Antiij. s. v. Bishop].*
«Γΐ-σιτάω, -<a : fr. Aeschyl. down ; to draw on : μη ίπι-
σ-πάσθω, sc. άκροβυστίαν, let him not draw on his fore-
skin (Ilesych. μη ίπκτπάσθω • μη ίΚκνίτω τό heppa) [Α. V.
let him not become uncircumcised'\, 1 Co. vii. 18. From
the days of Antiochus Epiphanes [b. c. 175-164] down
(1 Mace. i. 15; Joseph, antt. 12, 5, 1), there had been
Jews who, in order to conceal from heathen persecutors
or scoffers the external sign of their nationality, sought
artificially to compel nature to reproduce the prepuce,
by extending or drawing forward with an iron instru-
ment the remnant of it stiU left, so as to cover the
glans. The Rabbins called such persons D'Dlu:?, from
Ij'i^O to draw out, see Buxtorf, Lex. Talm. p. 1274 [(ed.
Fischer ii. 645 sq.). Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Circumcision,
esp. McC. and S. ibid. II. 2.] *
«ri-o-iriipm : 1 aor. ίπίσπαρα ; to sow above or besides :
Mt. xiii. 25 L Τ Tr AVH. (Hdt., Theophr., [al.].) *
«πίο-ταμαι (seems to be the Ionic form of the Mid. of
(φίστημι. Isocrates, Aristot., al., also use ίπιστησαι την
Stavoiav, τον νουν, (αυτόν for to put one's attention on, fix
one's thoughts on ; indeed, the simple (πιστησαι is used
in the same sense, by an ellipsis analogous to that of
Toi/ νουν with the verbs ιτροσίχ^ιν, ίττίχΐίν, and of την οψΊΜ
with ιτροσβόΐΚΚ^ιν; see Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 281 sq.
Hence ϊπίσταμαι is prop, to turn one's self or one's mind
to, put one's thought upon a thing) ; fr. Horn, down ;
Sept. chiefly for ^T; (cf. Germ, sich worauf verstehen) ;
a. to be acquainted with : τί. Acts xviii. 25 ; Jas. iv. 14 ;
Jude 10; τινά. Acts xix. 15; with reference to what is
said or is to be interpreted, to understand : Mk. xiv. 68 ;
1 Tim. vi. 4. b. to knoii• : nepi tivos. Acts xxvi. 26 ;
foU.-by an ace. with a ptcp. Acts xxiv. 10 [AV. 346 (324) ;
B. 301 (258)] ; foil, by 5«. Acts xv. 7 ; xLx. 25 ; x.xii.
19 ; foil, by as, Acts x. 28 ; by πώί. Acts xx. 18; by ποΰ,
Heb. xi. R. [Syn. see γιι/ώσκω.] *
iwlrrraa^t, -(ωί, ή, {(φίστημι, ίφίσταμαι), an advanc-
ing, approach ; incursion, onset, press : της Koxias (Vulg.
malorum incursio), 2 Mace. vi. 3, where cf. Grimm; used
of the pressure of a multitude asking help, counsel, etc.,
Tiw (on which dat. cf. W. §31,3; [B. 180 (156)] ; Kuhner
§ 424, 1) to one, 2 Co. xi. 28 LTTrWII (but others
would have us translate it here by oversight, attention,
care, a com. meaning of the word in Polyb.) ; used of a
tumultuous gathering in Acts xxiv. 12 L Τ Tr AVH. Cf.
B. u. s.•
«Γΐ(Γτάτη$, -ου, ό, (ΐφίστημι), any sort of a superintend-
ent or overseei (often so in prof, writ., and several times
in Sept., as Ex. i. 11 ; v. 14 ; 1 K. v. 16; 2 K. xxv. 19;
Jer. xxxvi. (xxix.) 26; 2 Chr. ii 2; xxxi. 12); a master,
used in this sense for 'ST by the disciples [cf. Lk. xviL
13] when addressing Jesus, who called him thus "not
from the fact that he was a teacher, but because of his
authority" (Bretschneider) ; found only in Luke: v. 5;
viii. 24, 45 ; ix. 33, 49 ; xvii. 13.*
«Γΐ-σ-Γίλλω : 1 aor. eWoreiAa ; prop, to seiid to one a
message, command, (Hdt. et sqcj.) ; ίπιστολάί, to send
by letter, write a letter, Plato, epp. p. 363 b., hence
simply to write a letter [cf. W. § 3, 1 b.] : τινί, Heb. xiii.
22 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 7, 1 ; 47, 3 ; 62, 1 ; and often in
Grk. writ.) ; to enjoin by letter, to write instructions : Acts
xxi. 25 R G Τ Tr mrg. WH mrg. ; foU. by τοϋ with an
inf. expressing purpose [cf. W. 326 (306) ; B. 270
(232)] : Acts xv. 20.*
ίιησ-Γήμων, -ov, gen. -ovot, ((πίσταμαι), intelligent, ex-
perienced, [esp. one having the knowledge of an expert;
cf. Schmidt ch. 13 §§ 10, 13] : Jas. iii. 13. (From Horn,
down ; Sept.) *
«Γΐ-<Γτηρ£ζω; 1 aor. «ΓΕστήριξα; a later word; to estab-
lish besides, strengthen more ; to render more firm, confirm :
τινά, one's Christian faith, Acts xiv. 22 ; xv. 32, 41 ;
xviii. 23 R G.*
ίτΓΐ-σ-Γολή, -η{, ή. (Επιστίλλω), a letter, epistle: Acts xv.
30 ; Ro. xvi. 22 ; 1 Co. v. 9, etc. ; plur.. Acts Lx. 2 ; 2 Co.
X. 10, etc. ; f'nicrroXai συστατικαί, letters of commendation,
2 Co. iii. 1 [AV. 176 (165). On the possible use of the
plur. of this word interchangeably with the sing. (cf.
Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 113, 8), see Bp. Lghtft. and
Meyer on Phil. iU. 1. (Eur., Thuc, al.)]
€ΐη-στομ(ζω ; {στόμα) ; prop, to bridle or stop up the
mouth ; metaph. to stop the mouth, reduce to silence : Tit.
i. 11. (Plato, Gorg. p. 482 e. ; Dem. 85, 4; often in
Plut. and Lcian.) *
€ΐη-ο-τρί'φω ; fut. (πιστρϊψω ; 1 aor. (ΐτίίΓτρίψα : 2 aor.
pass, (πιστράφην ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for ^3Π^ Z20
and 3Dn, DJi), and times without number for 31C and
y'd7\ ; 1. transitively, a. to turn to : iiti τον Beov, to
the worship of the true God, Acts xxvi. 20. b. to cause
to return, to bring back ; fig. τινά eVt κύριον τον β(όν, to the
love and obedience of God, Lk. i. 16; «Vi τίκνα, to love
for the children, Lk. i. 1 7 ; ev φρονήσει δικαίων, that thejr
may be in [R. V. to walk in] the wisdom of the rishteous,
Lk. i. 17 ; τικά t'ni τίνα, supply from the conte.xt (VI τη»
ά\ήθ(ΐαν and fjri την 6Sov, Jas. v. 19 sq. 2. intrans.
(W. § 38, 1 [cf. p. 26; B. 144 (126 sq.)]) ; a. to turn.
(ΐΓίστροφή
244
■Ιθημι
to turn one's self: «VI τόι» κΰριον and «Vl τον β(άν, of Gen-
tiles passing over to tlie religion of Christ, Acts ix. 35;
xi. 21 ; xiv. 15; xv. 19; xxvi. 20, cf. 1 Pet. ii. 25; πρόί
τ». Acts ix. 40 ; npat τον θ(όν, 1 Th. i. 9 ; 2 Co. iii. 16 ;
από Tixot fit Ti, Acts xx\ i. IS. b. to turn one's self about,
turn buck : absol. Acts xvi. 18 ; foil, by an inf. express-
ing purpose, Rev. i. 12. C. to return, turn back, come
buck ; o. properly : Lk. ii. 20 Rec. ; viii. 55 ; Acts xv. 36 ;
with the adilition of οπίσω (as in Ael. v. h. 1,6 [var.]),
foil, by an inf. of purpose, Mt. xxiv. 18 ; foil, by fir with
ace. of place, Mt. xii. 44 ; [Lk. ii. 39 Τ WH Trmrg.]; fls
τα οπίσω, Mk. xiii. 16 ; Lk. xvii. 31 ; em' Tt, to, 2 Pet. ii.
22. β. metaph. : ι'πί rt. Gal. iv. 9 ; enl τίνα, Lk. xvii. 4
Rec, but (ί om. fVi oe ; npos τίνα, ibiil. L Τ Tr WII ; cV
της (ντολης, to leave the commandment and turn back to
a worse mental and moral condition, 2 Pet. ii. 21 RG;
absol. to turn back morally, to reform : Mt. xiii. 15 ; Alk.
iv. 12 ; Lk. xxii. .'!2 ; Acts iii. 19 ; xxviii. 27. In the mid.
and 2 aor. pass. a. to turn one's self about, to turn
around : absol., Mt. ix. 22 R G ; Mk. v. 30 ; viii. 33 ; Jn.
xxi. 20. b. to return : foil, by jrpris [WII txt. tVi] τίνα,
Mt. X. 13 (on which pass, see (ϊρήνη. 3 fin.); cVl τονθ(όν,
1 Pet. ii. 25 (see 2 a. above) ; to return to a better mind,
repent, Jn. xii. 40 [R ii].*
ΐπ-ι-οτροφή, -r)s, ή, (ϊ-πιστρΐφω), roncersion (of Gentiles
fr. idolatry to the true God [cf. W. 26]) : Acts xv. 3.
(Cf. Sir. xlix. 2; xviii. 21 (20); in Grk. writ, in many
other senses.) *
«ιη-οτ)ν-ά•γω ; fut. (πισυνάξω ; 1 aor. inf. ιπισυνάξαι ; 2
aor. inf. imavvayayfiv. Pass., pf. ptcp. ('πισυνηγμίνοί',
1 aor. ptcp. £πισυ>'α;^ίίί'ί ; [fut. {πισυΐ'α;(5ήσομα», Lk. xvii.
37 Τ Tr WII] ; Sept. several times for -px, -,'^η SnP;
1. to i/ather together besides, to bring together to others
ahead I assembled, (Polyb.). 2. to gather together
against (Mic. iv. 11 ; Zech. xii. 3; 1 Mace. iii. 58, etc.).
3. to gather together in one place («Vt to) : Mt. xxiii. 37 ;
xxiv. 31 ; Mk. xiii. 27 ; Lk. xiii. 34 ; Pass. : Mk. i. 33 ; Lk.
xii. 1 ; xvii. 37 Τ Tr WII, (Ps. ci. (cu.) 23 ; cv. (cvi.) 47 ;
2 Mace. i. 27, etc.; Aesop 142).*
^νίτο-υν-α-γωγή, -ης, ή, (ίπισυνάγω, q. v.) ; a. a gather-
ing together in one place, i. <|. το ϊπισννάγ(σθαι (2 Mace.
ii. 7) : iVi Tiva, to one, 2 Th. ii. 1. b. (the religious)
assembly (of Christians) : Heb. x. 25. *
€•ιη-<Γυν-τρ«χω ; to run together besides (i. e. to others
already gathered) : Mk. ix. 25. Not used by prof.
writ.•
€in.-OT)OToo-is, -*ω!, ή. {i -πισννΊσταμαί to collect togeth-
er, conspire against) a gathering together or combining
against or at. Hence 1. α hostile banding together or
concourse : ποιι'ιν (πισΰστασιν, to excite a riotous gather-
ing of the people, make a mob, Acts xxiv. 12 RG; 1
Esdr. v. 70 Alex.; Sext. Empir. adv. eth. p. 127 [p. 571,
20 ed. Bekk. ; cf. Philo in Flac. § 1] ; Tivor, against one,
Num. xxvi. 9 ; a conspiracy, Joseph, c. Ap. 1 , 20. 2.
a troublesome throng of persons seeking help, counsel,
comfort : Ttvor, thronging to one, 2 Co. xi. 28 R G (see
ιπίστασκ) ; Luther, dnss ich werde angelaufen*
{ιηο-φαλήϊ, -ίς, (σφάλλω to cause to iaW), prone to fall:
πλοΰι, a dangerous voyage, Actsxxvii. 9. (Plato, Polyb.,
Plut., al.) *
ίΐΓ-Μτχν» : [impf. iViV;^voi»] ; 1. trans, to give addi-
tional strength ; to make stronger, (Sir. xxix. 1 ; Xen. oec.
11, 13). 2. intrans. ίο receive greater strength, grov
stronger, (1 Macc. vi. 6 ; Theophr., Uiod.) : ίπΐσχυο»
XtyovTut, they were the more urgent saying, i. e. they
alleged the more vehemently, Lk. xxiii. 5.*
ίΐΓΐ-σ-ωρίνω : fut. (πισωρίύσω ; to heap up, accumulate
in piles ; διδασκάλου;, to choose for themselves and run
after a great number of teachers, 2 Tim. iv. 3. (Plut^
Athen., Artemid., al.) *
ίΐΓ^ταγή, -ijf, ή, ((πιτάσσω), an injunction, mandate,
command : Ro. .\vi. 26 ; 1 Co. vii. 25 ; 1 'Jim. i. I ; Tit. i. 3 ;
μ(τά πάση! ίπιταγη!, with every possible form of atilhop-
ity, Tit. ii. 15; κατ ΐπιταγήν, by way of command, 1 Co.
vii. 6 ; 2 Co. viii. 8. (S;ip. xiv. 1 ιϊ, etc. ; Polyb., Diod.) *
«η-τάο-σω ; 1 aor. ϊπίταξα ; (τάσσω) ; to enjoin npon,
order, command, charge: absol. Lk. xiv. 22; τινί, Mk. i.
27 ; ix. 25 ; Lk. iv. 36 ; viii. 25 ; tiw to ανήκον, Philein. 8 ;
Tii/i foil, by the inf., Mk. vi. 39 ; Lk. viii. 31 ; Acts xxiii.
2 ; foil, by ace. and inf. Mk. vi. 27 ; foil, by direct dis-
course, Mk. ix. 25. (Several times in Sept. ; Grk. writ,
fr. lldt. down.) [Syn. see KeXfim, fin.]*
ίτη-τίλί'ω, -ω ; fut. ίπιτ(\(σω ; 1 aor. (π(τίΚ(σα ; [pres.
mid. and pass. Εττίτβλοϋ^χαί] ; 1. to bring to an end,
accomplish, perfect, execute, complete : substantively, τΑ
eVireXeVat, 2 Co. viii. 11 ; τι, Lk. xiii. 32 [R G] ; Ro. xv.
28; 2 Co. vii. 1 ; viii. 6, 11 ; Phil. i. 6 ; Ileb. viii. 5 ; τ«
Xarpeiai, to perform religious services, discharge relig-
ious rites, Ileb. ix. 6 (similarly in prof, writ., as θρησκιΊαί,
Hdt. 2, 37; όρτάί, 4, 186; βνσίαν, θυσίας, 2, 63; 4, 26;
Ildian. 1. 5, 4 [2 ed. Bekk.]; Χιιτου ,yias, Philo de som.
i. § 37). Mid. (in Grk. writ, to take upon one's srlf: τα
ToO γήρω!, the burdens of old age, Xen. mem. 4, 8, 8 ;
θάνατον, Xen. apol. 33 ; with the force of the act. : τί,
Polyb. 1, 40, 16 ; 2, 58, 10) to make an end for one's self,
i. e. to leave off (cf. παύω) : tj σαρκί, so as to give your-
selves up to the flesh, stop with, rest in it. Gal. iii. 3 [oth-
ers take it passively here : are ye perfected in etc., cf.
Meyer]. 2. to appoint to, impose upon : nvl παθήματα,
in pass. 1 Pet. v. 9 (την Βίκην, Plat. legg. 10 fin.).*
«ιητή&Μθ$, -(ία, -€«»', also -or, -ov, [cf. W. §11,1], (tVp
TijSc'f, adv., enough ; and this ace. to Buttmann fr. tVl
TOSe [? cf. Vanicek p. 271]) ; 1. fit, suitable, conven-
ient, advantageous, 2. needful; plur. τα ίπιτι^δί la esp.
the necessaries of life (Thuc. et sqq.) : with addition of
τον σώματος, Jas. ii. 16.*
ίιη-τίθημ.ι, 3 pers. plur. (πιτιθίασι (Mt. xxiii. 4 ; cf. W.
§ 14, 1 b. ; B. 44 (38) ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 505 ; Kuh-
ner i. p. 643 ; [Jelf § 274 ; and on this and foil, forms
see Veitch s. vv. τιδι;μι, τιθίω^), impv. ϊπιτίθιι (1 Tim.
V. 22; see Matthiae § 210, 2 and 6; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i.
p. 508; Kiihner § 209, 5 ; [Jelf § 274 obs. 4]) ; impf. 3
pers. plur. (π^τίθουν (Acts viii. 17 RG), (π(τίθ(σαν (ib.
L Τ Tr WH ; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 509 ; B. 45 (3!•)) ;
fut. ίπιθήσω; 1 aor. t ττί ^7x0 ; 2 aor. ίπίθην, impv. ΐπίθα
(Mt. ix. 18; Gen. xlviii. !>»; Judg. xviii. 19); Mid.
ΐττιτιμαω
245
έτΓΐφύνεια
[pres. (πιτίβίμαι^ ; fut. (ττιθήσομαι ; 2 aor. <π(θ('μην ; [1
aor. pass, ίπιτΐθην (Mk. iv. 21 11 (ί)] ; in Sept. chiefly
for [jlj, Ώνύ and D'Cri; 1. Active: a. to put or lay
upon : Ti im τι, Mt. xxiii. 4 ; xxvii. 29 R G L ; Mk. iv. 21
R G; Lk. XV. 5; Jn. ix. [G WH txt. Trmrg.], 15; [xL\. 2
Lmrg., see below] ; Acts xv. 10 [of. W. 318 (298) ; B.
2ϋ1 (224)]; xxviii. 3; τ1 eVi Ttfor, gen. of thing, Jit.
xxvii. 29 Τ Tr WII ; iv with dat. of thing, Mt. xxvii. 29
L Τ Tr WII ; την χ(ψα [or ras χ€φα! or χίφα:^ eVi τίνα,
Mt. ix. 18; Mk. viii. 2.5 [(WII Trt.xt.tflTjKfv)] ; xvi. 18;
Acts viii. 1 7 ; [ix. 1 7] ; Rev. i. 1 7 Ilec. ; (πι rtva TrXijydf,
calamities. Rev. xxii. 18 [but see b. below] ; (πάνω τινός,
Mt. xxi. 7 RG; xxvii. 37 ; tncTivos, Lk. viii. Ki RG ; τι
Tivi, Lk. xxiii. 26 ; Jn. xix. 2 [not L inrg., see above] ;
Acts XV. 28 ; rtvl όνομα, ilk. iii. Ifi sq. ; τινί tos Xflpas, Mt.
xi.\. 13 [cf. B. 233 (201) ; W. 288 (270 »<[.)]. 1.5 ; Mk. v.
23 ; [viii. 23, here Tr mrg. αΰτοϋ] ; Lk. iv. 40 ; xiii. 13 ;
Acts vi. 6 ; viii. 19 ; xiii. 3 ; .\ix. 6 ; xxviii. 8 ; 1 Tim. v.
22; l^Tivi την χρίρα, Mk. Λ'ϋ. 32] ; χε'ϊρα [RG, χίΐρας or
rasxctpas L Τ TrAVlI], Acts ix. 12 ; τιν'ι πληγά:, to in-
flict blows, lay stripes on one, Lk. x. 30 ; Acts xvi.
23. b. to add to : Rev. xxii. 18 (opp. to άφαιρΕΐκ vs. 19).
2. Middle; a. to have put on, bill to he laid on ; tIcViti
(Xen. Cyr. 8, 2, 4) ; τα irpbt την χρ^ίαν, sc. Ttvi, to ]5rovide
one with the things needed [al. jiut on hoard sc. the ship].
Acts xxviii. 10. b. to lay or tlirow one's self upon; with
dat. of pers. to attack one, to make an assault on one :
Acts xviii. 10 ; Ex. xxi. 14 ; xviii. 11 ; 2 Chr. xxiii. 13,
and often in prof. writ. ; cf. Kuinoel ad loc. ; [W. 593
(552). CoMP. : ονν-ίπιτίβημι-Ί *
ίΐΓΐ^ιμάω, -ώ ; impf. 3 pers. sing, ϊπιτίμα, 3 pers. plur.
(πίτίμων ; 1 aor. (πιτίμησα ; Sept. for Ί;Μ ; in Grk.
writ. 1. to show honor to, to honor : τινά, Ildt. 6, 39.
2. to raise the price of: 6 σίτος ΐπίτιμήθη, Dem. 918, 22;
al. 3. to adjudge, aicanl, (fr. ημή in the sense of
merited penalty) : την Βίκην, Ildt. 4, 43. 4. to tax with
fault, rate, chide, rebuke, reprove, censure severely, (so
Thuc, Xen., Plato, Dem., al.) : absol. 2 Tim. iv. 2 ; τιι/ί,
charge one with wrong, Lk. [i.x. 55] ; xvii. 3 ; xxiii. 40 ;
to rebuke — in order to curb one's ferocity or violence
(hence many formerly gave the word the meaning to re-
strain ; against whom cf. Fritzsche on Matt. p. 325), IMt.
viii. 26; xvii. 18; Mk. iv. 39; Lk. iv. 39, 41 ; viii. 24; ix.
42; Jude 9 [where Rec.'•^ strangely ίπιτιμησαι (1 aor.
act. inf.) for -μήσαι (opt. 3 pers. sing.)] ; or to keep one
away from another, Mt. xix. 13; Lk. xviii. 15; Jlk. x.
13; foil, by ίνα (with a verb expressing the opposite of
what is censured) : Mt. xx. 31 ; Mk. x. 48; Lk. xviii.
39 ; with the addition of λίγων [και Xeytt, or the like]
arid direct discourse : Mk. i. 25 [T om. WII br. Xeyav] ;
viii. 33 ; ix. 25 ; Lk. iv. 35 ; xxiii. 40, (cf. Ps. cv. (cvi.) 9;
cxviii. (cxix.) 21 ; Zech. iii. 2; and the use of l^'J inNah.
i. 4 ; Mai. iii. 11). Elsewhere in a milder sense, to ad-
monish or charge sharply: τιν'ι, Mt. xvi. 22; Mk. viii. 30;
Lk. ix. 21 (('πιτιμήσας αΰτο'ις παρήγγΗλίν, foil, by theinf.),
xix. 39; with Ίνα added, Mt. xvi. 20 L WII txt.; Mk.
Tiii. 30; ίνα μη, 'Mt. \ύ. 16 ; Mk. iii. 12. [Cf. Trench
Jiv; Schmidt ch. 4, 11.]•
ϊπιτιμία, -at. r; {(πιτιμάω), punishment (in Grk. writ, το
ίπιτίμιον) : 2 Co. ii. U [B. § 147, 29]. (Sap. iii. 10; [al.].)*
[tiri -το-αυτό, Rec.'' in Acts i. 15; ii. l,etc. ; see αΰτόϊ,
III. 1, and cf. Lipsius, Gramm. Unters. p. 125 sq.]
eiri-rpt'iro) ; 1 aor. ΐπίτρίψα ; Pass., [pres. ίπιτρίπομαί] ;
2 aor. ίπΐτράπην ; pf. 3 pers. sing, (πιτίτραιτται ( 1 Co.
xiv. 34 R G) ; fr. Horn, down ; 1. to turn to, transfer,
commit, intrust. 2. to permit, allow, give leave : 1 Co.
xvi. 7 ; Heb. vi. 3 ; τινι, Mk. v. 13 ; Jn. xix. 38 ; with an
inf. added, Mt. viii. 21 ; xix. 8 ; Lk. viii. 32 ; ix. 59, 61 ;
Acts xxi. 39 sq. ; 1 Tim. ii. 12; and witliout the dat. iMk.
X. 4 ; foil, by ace. with inf. Acts xxvii. 3 (where L Τ Tr
WH πορ(νθέντι} ; cf. Xen. an. 7, 7, 8; Plato, legg. 5 p.
730 d. Pass, ΐπιτρΐπίταί τινι, with inf. : Acts xxvi. 1 ;
xxviii. 1(5 ; 1 Co. .xiv. 34.*
[iiriTpoireuu ; (fr. Ildt. down); to he ίττΊτ poinos or proc-
urator: of Pontius Pilate in Lk. iii. 1 WII (rejected)
mrg. ; see their App. ad loc* ]
ίΐΓΐ-τροτΓή, -ης, ή, {ϊιτιτρίπω), permission, power, commis-
sion : Acts xxvi. 12. (From Thuc. down.) *
eiriTpoiros, -ου, 6, ((πιτρίπω), univ. one to whose care or
honor anything has been intrusted; a curator, guardian,
(Pind. 01. 1, 171, et al. ; Philo de mundo §76 θ(6ς και
ηατηρ κα\ Τ€χνίτης και €πιτροπος των iv ονρανω τ€ και ev
κόσμω). Spec. 1. α sleivard or manager of a house-
hold, or of lands ; an overseer: Mt. xx. 8; Lk. viii. 3;
Xen. oec. 12, 2; 21,9; (Aristot. oec. 1, 5 [p. 1344", 26]
δούλων Be fi'Sij δυο, (ττίτροπος και ΐ(Γ/άτης). 2. one who
has the care and tutelage of children, either where the
father is dead (a guardian of minors : 2 Mace. xi. 1 ;
xiii. 2; iir'iTpmroi ορφανών, Plato, legg. 6 p. 766 c. ; Plut.
Lye. 3 ; Cam. 15), or where the father still lives (Ael.
V. h. 3, 26) : Gal. iv. 2.*
eiri -τνγχάνω : 2 aor. (πίτνχον, 1. to light or hit
upon any person or thing (Arstph., Thuc., Xen., Plato).
2. to attain to, obtain : Jas. iv. 2 ; with gen. of thing,
Heb. vi. 15 ; xi. 33 ; with ace. of tiling : τοντο, Ro. xi. 7
(where Rec. τούτου). Cf. Matthiae §328; [W. 200
(188)].•
ίΐΓΐ-φοίνω; 1 aor. inf. ΐπιφάναι (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
24 sqq. ; AV. 89 (85) ; B. 41 (35) ; [Sept. Ps. xxx. (xxxi.)
17; cxvii. (cxviii.) 27, cf. Ixvi. (Ixvii.) 2]); 2 aor. pass.
ϊπίφάνην ; fr. Horn, down ; 1. trans, to show to or
upon ; to bring to light. 2. intrans. and in Pass, to
appear, become visible ; a. prop. : of stars. Acts xxvii.
20 (Theocr. 2, 11); τινί, to one, Lk. i. 79. b. fig. i. q.
to become clearly known, to show one's self: Tit. iii. 4 ;
Tivl, Tit. ii. 11.*
«πιψάνΜα, -ας, ή, (ίττιφαι/ήί), an appearing, appearance,
(TeHuU. apparent ia); often used by the Greeks of a
glorious manifestation of the gods, and esp. of their ad-
vent to help; in 2 Mace, of signal deeds and events
betokening the presence and power of God as helper;
cf. Grimm on Mace. p. 60 sq. 75, [but esp. the thorough
exposition by Prof. Abbot (on Titus ii. 13 Note B) in
the Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. and Exegesis, i. p. 16 sq.
(1882)]. In the N. T. the 'advent'of Christ, — not
only that which has already taken place and by which
βτΓΐφανή<:
246
67Γ0ν
his presence and power appear in the saving light he
has shed upon mankind, 2 Tim. i. lU (note the word
φωτίσαιττο! in this pass.); but also that illustrious return
from lioaven to earth hereafter to occur : 1 Tim. vi. 14 ;
2 Tim. iv. 1,8; Tit. ii. i:i [on which .see esp. I'rof. Abbot
u. s.] ; ή ίπιφάνίΐα (i. e. the breaking forth) της παρου-
σία! αίτον, 2 Th. ii. 8. [Cf. Trench § xciv.j *
(ΐηφανής, -«, ((πιφαίνω), conspicuous, manifest, illus-
Irioux: Acts ii. 20 [Tdf. om.] fr. Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4) ; the
Sept. here and in Judg. xiii. 6 [Alex.]; Ilab. i. 7; Mai.
i. 14 thus render the word KilJ terrible, deriving it in-
correctly from nX"; and so confounding it with HKIJ.*
€ΐΓΐ-φαΰ(Γκω (i. (J. the ίπιφώσκω of (irk. writ., cf. W.
90 (SS) ; B. Ii7 (59)): fut. ίπιφαύσω; to shine upon:
Tivi, Eph. V. 14, where the meaning is, Christ will pour
upon thee the light of divine truth as the sun gives light
to men aroused from sleep. (Job xxv. 5 ; xxxi. 26 ;
[xli. 9] ; Acta Thomae § 34.) *
ciri -ψερω ; [impf. (π(φ€ροι>2 ; 2 aor. inf. iniveyKciv ;
[pres. pass, (πιφίρομαι] ; 1. to bring upon, bring for-
ward : αΐτίαν, of accusers (as in Hdt. 1, 26, and in Attic
writ. fr. Thuc. down; Polyb. 5, 41, 3; 40, 5, 2; Joseph,
antt. 2, 6, 7; 4, 8, 23; Hdian. 3, 8, 13 (6 ed. Bekk.)),
Acts XXV. 18 (where LTTrWII (φ(ρον); κρίσιν, Jude
9. 2. to lay upon, to inflict : την όργήν, Κυ. iii. 5
(πληγην, Joseph, antt. 2, 14, 2). 3. to bring upon i. e.
in addition, to adil, increase : θλίφιν τοΐί δίσμοϊί, Phil. i.
16 (17) Rec., but on this pass, see e'yf /ρω, 4 c.; (πϋρ
(ΐηφ(ρ(ΐν πνρί, Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 18; [cf. W. § .52,
4, 7]). 4. to put upon, cast upon, impose, {φάρμακον,
Plat. ep. 8 p. 3.'>4 b.) : τ\ ίπί τίνα, in pass.. Acts xix. 12,
where L Τ Tr ΛΥΙΙ άποφίρίσθαι, q. v.*
ίτη-φωνίω, -ώ : [impf. ίπβφώνουΐ'] ; to call out to, shout :
foil, by direct disc., Lk. xxiii. 21 ; Acts xii. 22; foil, by
the dat. of a pers.. Acts xxii. 24 ; τι. Acts xxi. 34 L Τ
TrWII. [(Soph, on.)] •
ίΐΓΐ-φώ(Γκω ; [impf. ('πίφωσκον] ', to grow light, to dawn
[cf. B. 68 (60)] : Lk. xxiii. 54 ; foil, by «r, Mt. xxviii.
1, on which see tU, A. II. 1.•
ίιτιχίΐρίω, -ω: impf. (πίχύρουν; 1 aor. ίπιχΰρησα;
(χ(ίρ) ; 1. prop, to put llie hand to (Ilom. ()d. 24,
386, .•ί95). 2. often fr. Ildt. down, to take in hand,
undertake, attempt, (anything to be done), foil, by the
inf. : Lk. i. 1 ; Acts ix. 29 ; xix. 13 ; (2 Mace. ii. 29 ; vii.
19). Grimm treats of this word more at length in the
Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 36 sq.•
£m-x«'ci>; fr. Horn, down; to pour upon: τι, Lk. x. 34
(sc. iVi τα τραύματα; Gen. xxviii. 18; Lev. v. 11).*
ίτη-χορηγί'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. unpv. (-πιχορηγήσατί; Pass.,
[pres. (Vt;(opi;yoC/jai] ; 1 fut. {7π;(ορι;γ^^ΐ7σοραι; {sen χορη-
yia); to suppli), furnish, present, (Germ, darreichen):
Tivi Ti, 2 Co. ix. 10 ; Gal. iii. 5; i. q. to show or afford
by deeds : την άρ(την, 2 Pet. i. 5 ; in pass., elaoSot, fur-
nished, provided, 2 Pet. i. 11 ; Pass, to be supplied, )nin-
utered unto, assisted, (so the simple χορη-γάσθαι in Xen.
rep. Athen. 1, 13 ; Polyb. 3, 75, 3 ; 4, 77, 2 ; 9, 44. 1 ;
Sir. xliv. 6; 3 Mace. vi. 40): Col. ii. 19, Λvhere Vulg.
subministratum. (Rare in prof. writ, as Dion. Hal. 1,
42; Phal. ep. 50; Diog. Laert. 5, 67; [Alex. Aphr.
probl. 1, 81].)*
ϊ-ΐΓΐ-χορηγία, -as, ή, {('ττιχορηγίω, q. v.), (Vulg. submin-
istratio), a supplying, supply: Eph. iv. 16; Phil. i. 19.
(Eccl. writers.) *
i-iri -χρίω: 1 aor. ϊπίχρισα; to spread on, anoint: τ\ em
Tt, anytliiug upon anything, Jn. ix. 6 [W'll txt. Tr mrg.
(π(θηκ(ν] ; Ti, to anoint anything (sc. with anything),
ibid. 11. (Ilom. Od. 21, 179; Lcian. hist, scrib. 62.)*
ί•π--«ικοδομί'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ίπωκο8όμησα, and without
augm. ίποικο&όμησα (1 Co. iii. 14 Τ Tr WH ; cf. Tdf.'s
note on Acts vii. 47, [see οίκοδο/χί'ω]) ; Pass., pres. tiroi-
κο&ομοϋμαι; 1 aor. ptcp. (τιοικο&ομηθίντίς; in the N. T.
only in the fig. which likens a company of Christian
believers to an edifice or temi)le; to build upon, build up,
(Vulg. superaedi/ico) ; absol. [like our Eng. build up]
viz. 'to finish the structure of which the foundation has
already been laid,' i. e. in plain language, to give con-
stant increase in Christian knowledge and in a life con-
formed thereto: Acts xx. 32 (where LT TrWH oiVod.
[Vulg. aedifco']); 1 Co. iii. 10; (1 Pet. ii. 5 Tdf.); (Vi
Tuf θ(μί\ιον, 1 Co. iii. 12; τι, ibid. 14 ; tV Χριστώ, with
the pass., in fellowship with Christ to grow in spiritual
life. Col. ii. 7 ; ΐποίκο^υμηθ. €πι θ(μ€\ίω των άποστόΧων,
on the foundation laid by the apostles, i. e. (dropping
the fig.) gathered together into a church by the ajjostlcs'
preaching of the gospel, Ej)h. ii. 20 ; ίποικο8ομ(Ίν ίαντον
Trj ■nioTfi, Jiule 20, where the sense is, ' resting on your
most holy faith as a foundation, make i)rogress, rise like
an edifice higher and higher.' (Thuc, Xen., Plato, al.) *
<ΐΓ-οκ€λλω : 1 aor. <'πώκ(ΐλα ; to drive upon, strike
against: την ναΰν [i. e. to run the ship ashore'\. Acts
xxvii. 41 RG; see ΐπικίλλω. (Hdt. 6, 16; 7, 182;
Thuc. 4, 26.) *
«■ΐΓ-ονομόξω : [pres. pass, ί'ποκο^ιά^ομαι] ; fr. Ildt. down;
Sept. for K"ip ; to put a name upon, name ; Pass, to be
named : Ro. ii. 17; cf. Fritzsche ad loc*
ίΐΓ-οΐΓΓ€ύω [ptcp. 1 Pet. ii. 12 LTTrWII]; 1 aor.
ptcp. (πο7ΓΤ(ίσαντ(! ; 1. to be an overseer (Homer,
Hesiod). 2. univ. to look upon, view attentively; to
watch ( Aeschyl., Dem., al.) : τι, 1 Pet. iii. 2 ; ίκ tivos,
sc. την άναατροφην, 1 Pet. ii. 1 2.*
eiroim]s, -ου, ό, (fr. unused (πότττω) ; 1. an over-
seer, inspector, see επίσκοπος; (Aeschyl., Pind., al. ; of
God, in 2 Mace. iii. 39 ; vii. 35 ; 3 Mace. ii. 21 ; Add.
to Esth. V. 1 ; ανθρωπίνων (ργων, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59,
3). 2. a spectator, eye-witness of anything : so in 2
Pet. i. 1 6 ; inasmuch as those were called (πόπται by
the Grks. who had attained to the third [i. e. the high-
est] grade of the Eleusinian mysteries (Plut. Alcib. 22,
and elsewh.), the word seems to be used here to desig-
nate those privileged to be present at the heavenly spec-
tacle of the transfiguration of Christ.*
€iros, -€0f, (-ouf), TO, a tvord : ως βπος €ΐπ(ΐν (see ftnov,
I a. p. 181"), Heb. vii. 9.•
[SvN. eiros seems primarily to desifinate a word Jis an ar-
tirul.ate manifestation of a mental state, and so to differ from
βήμα (q. v.), the mere vocable; for its relation to Aiiyos see
kayos I. I.]
εττουρανιος
247
epycuria
«ir-oupavios, -οι», (οίρανός), prop, existing in or above
heaven, heavenly ; 1. exislinij in heaven : 6 ττατηρ ί'που-
ράνιος, i. e. God, Mt. xviii. 35 Rec. (θ(οί, fleof, Horn. Od.
17,484; E. 6, 131, etc. ; 3 Mace. vi. I'S ; vii. 6) ; ol ίπου-
ράνιοι the heayenly beings, the inliabitants of heaven,
(Lcian. dial. deor. 4, 3 ; of the gods, in Theocr. 25, ft) :
of angels, in epp. to iniyeioi and καταχθόνιοι, Phil. ii. 10 ;
Ignat. ad Trail. !), [cf. Polyc. ad Philipp. 2] ; σώματα,
the bodies of the stars (which the apostle, ace. to the
universal ancient conception, seems to have regarded as
animate [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 37(5; G/riirer, Philo
etc. 2te Aufl. p. 349 sq. ; Siegfried, Phiio von Alex. p.
306 ; yet cf. Mey. ed. Heinrici ad loc], cf. Job xxxviii. 7 ;
Enoch xviii. 14 sqq.) and of the angels, 1 Co. .w. 40; η
βασιλ€ΐ'α ή f -πουρ. (on which seep. 97), 2 Tim. iv. 18; sub-
stantially the same as ή πατρΊς ή enovp. Ileb. xi. 16
and ΊίρουσάΚημ ϊπουρ. xii. 22 ; κΧησίί, a calling made
(by God) in heaven, Heb. iii. 1 [al. would include a ref.
to its e η d as well as to its ο r i g i η ; cf . Liinem. ad loc.],
cf. Phil. iii. 14 [Bp. Lghtft. cites Philo, plant. Noe
§ 6]. The neut. τα evovpavia denotes [cf. W. § 34, 2]
a. the things that take place in heaven, i. e. the purposes
of God to grant salvation to men through the death of
Christ: Jn. iii. 12 (see ΐπίγίίος). b. the heavenly re-
gions, i. e. heaven itself, the abode of God and angels:
Eph. i. 3, 20 (where Lchm. t.xt. ovpavoii) ; ii. 6 ; iii. 10 ;
the lower heavens, or the heaven of the clouds, Eph. vi.
12 [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Air]. c. the lieavenly temple
or sanctuary : Heb. viii. 5 ; ix. 23. 2. of heavenly
origin and nature : 1 Co. xv. 48 sq. (opp. to χοϊκύί) ; η
δωρεά ή ϊπουρ. Heb. vi. 4.*
ί'ΐΓτά, οϊ, at, τά, seven : Mt. xii. 45 ; xv. 34 ; Mk. viii. 5
sq. ; Lk. ii. 36 ; Acts vi. 3, etc.; often in the Apocalypse;
01 ίπτά, sc. διάκονοι, Acts xxi. 8. In ]\It. .xviii. 22 it is
joined (instead of (πτάκις) to the numeral adv. ίβδομη-
κοντάκις, in imitation of the Hcbr. > DO, Ps. cxviii. (cxix.)
164 ; Prov. xxiv. 16 ; [see (βδομηκοντάκις, and cf. Keil,
Com. on Mt. 1. c.].
€ΐΓτόκΐ8, (ίπτά), seven times: Mt. xviii. 21 sq. ; Lk. .xvii.
4. [(Pind., Arstph., al.)]•
ΪΊΓτακι$-χΙΧιοι,•αι,-α, seven thousand : Ro. xi.4. [(Hdt.)]*
€ΐΓω, see eiirov.
"EpaoTos, -ου, 6, Erastus, (ipacrTos beloved, [cf. Chan-
dler § 325 ; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 30]), the name
of two Christians : 1. the companion of the apostle
Paul, Acts xix. 22 ; 2. the city treasurer of Corinth,
Ro. xvi. 23. 'Which of the two is meant in 2 Tim. iv.
20 cannot be determined.*
«ραννάω, a later and esp. Alexandrian [cf. Sturz, Dial.
Maced. et Alex. p. 117] form for eprvvaa, q. v. Cf. Tdf.
ed. 7 min. Proleg. p. xxxvii. ; [ed. maj. p. x.xxiv. ; esp.
ed. 8 Proleg. p. 81 sq.] ; B. 58 (50).
ΐργά^ομαι; depon. mid.; impf. {ϊργαζόμην (ηργαζόμην.
Acts -xviii. 3 LTTrWH; [so elsewli. at times; this
var. in augm. is found in the aor. also] ; cf . W. § 1 2, 8 ;
B. 33 (29 sq.) ; Steph. Thesaur. iii. 1970 c.;lCurtius, Das
A^erbum, i. 124 ; Cramer, Anecd. 4, 412 ; Veitch s. v.]) ;
1 aor. (Ιργασάμην (ηργασ. Mt. xxv. 16 ; [xxvi. 10] ; Mk.
xiv. 6, in Τ WH, [add, 2 Jn. 8 WH and Hebr. xi. 33 Τ
Tr WH ; cf. reff. as above]) ; pf. (ΐργασμαι, in a pass,
sense [cf. "W. § 38, 7 e.], Jn. iii. 21, as often in Grk.
writ. [cf. Veitch s. v.] ; (epyov) ; Sept. for ^^'3^ np;?,
sometimes for T\tiy^ ; 1. absol. a. to work; labor, do
work: it is opp. to inactivity or idleness, Lk. xiii. 14;
Jn. V. 17; ix. 4 ; 2 Th. iii. 10; with addition of Toir
χιρσί, 1 Co. iv. 12; 1 Th. iv. 11; with ace. of time:
νύκτα (cat ήμ^ραν, 2 Th. iii. 8 [but L txt. Τ Tr WH the
gen., as in 1 Th. ii. 9 (see ήμίρα, 1 a.) ; cf. W. § 30, 11
and EUic. on 1 Tim. v. 5] ; with the predominant idea
of working for pay, Mt. xxi. 28 (cV τω άμ•π(\ωνι) ; Acts
xviii. 3 ; 1 Co. ix. 6 ; 2 Th. iii. 12 ; ace. to the concep-
tion characteristic of Paul, ό (ργαζόμινο! he that does
works conformed to the law (Germ, der Werlclhalige) :
Ro. iv. 4 sq. b. to trade, to make gains by trading, (cf.
our " do business ") : ?v τινι. ivith a thing, Mt. xxv. 1 6
(often so by Dem.). 2. trans, a. (to work i. e.) to
do, work out : τΊ, Col. iii. 23 ; 2 Jn. 8 (with which [ace.
to reading of L Τ Tr txt.] ef. 1 Co. xv. 58 end) ; μφίν,
2 Th. iii. 11 ; epyov. Acts xiii. 41 (-!^\2 bi\2, Hab. i. 5) ;
fpyov καλόν (is Tiva, Mt. xxvi. 10 ; ei» τινι (dat. of pers.
[cf. W. 218 (205)]), Mk. xiv. 6 [Rec. ds ('μι']; tpya,
wrought, pass., Jn. iii. 21 ; τα ?pya toC θ(οΰ, what God
wishes to be done, Jn. vi. 28 ; ix. 4 ; roG κυρίου, to give
one's strength to the work which the Lord wishes to
have done, 1 Co. xvi. 10; το αγαθόν, [Ιίο. ii. 10]; Eph.
iv. 28; προΓ τίνα, Gal. vi. 10; κακόν τινι τι, Ro. xiii. 10
{τινά τι is more com. in Grk. writ. [Kiihner § 411, 5]) ;
Tt fit Tiva, 3 Jn. 5. with ace. of virtues or vices, {to work
i. e.) to exercise, perforin, commit : δικαιοσύνην. Acts x.
35 ; Heb. .xi. 33, (Ps. xiv. (xv.) 2 ; Zeph. ii. 3) ; tjji- οιό-
μίαν, Mt. vii. 23 (Ps. v. 6 and often in Sept.) ; άμαρτίαν,
Jas. ii. 9. σημί'ίον, bring to pass, effect, .In. vi. 30 ; τα
Upa, to be busied with the holy things i. e. to administer
those things that pertain to worship, which was the busi-
ness of priests and among the Jews of the Levites also,
1 Co. ix. 13 ; την θάλασσαν lit. work the sea {mare exerceo,
Justin, hist. 43, 3) i. e. to be employed on [cf. " do busi-
ness on," Ps. cvii. 23] and make one's living from it. Rev.
xviii. 17 (so of sailors and fishermen also in native Grk.
writ., as Aristot. probl. 38, 2 [p. 966', 26] ; Dion. Hal.
antt. 3, 46 ; App. Punic. 2 ; [Lcian. de elect. 5 ; AV. 223
(209)]). to cause to exist, produce : τι, so (for R G κα-
τ(ργάζ€ται) 2 Co. vii. 10 L Τ Tr AVH ; Jas. i. 20 L Τ Tr
WH. b. to tpork for, earn by rrorking, to acquire, (cf.
Germ, erarbeiten) : την βρώσιν, Jn. vi. 27 (χρήματα, Hdt.
1, 24; TO (πιτήδιια, Xen. mem. 2, 8, 2 ; Dem. 1358, 12;
apyvpiov, Plato, Hipp. maj. p. 282 d. ; βίον, Andoc. myst.
[IS, 42] 144 Bekk. ; θησαυρού!, Theodot. Prov. xxi. 6;
βρώμα, Palaeph. 21, 2; al.) ; ace. to many interpreters
also 2 Jn. 8 ; but see 2 a. above. [Comp. : κατ-, wepi-,
προσ-€ργάζομαι.~\ *
(ρΎοσία, -ας, η, (ΐργάζομαι) ; 1. i. q. ro {'ργάζ(σθαι,
a working, performing : ακαθαρσίας, Eph. iv. 19. 2.
work, business : Acts xi.x. 25 (Xen. oee. 6, 8 et al.).
3. gain got by work, profit : Acts xvi. 19 ; παρίχ^ν epya-
σίαν τινι, ib. 16; xix. 24 [yet al. refer this to 2 above] ;
(ρ-γατης
248
epyov
(Xen. mem. 3, 10. 1 ; cvnec;. 3, 3 ; Polyb. 4, 50, 3). 4.
endeaviir, pains, [Λ. V. ilitKjence] : δι'βωμι ipyaaiav, after
the I.atinism operant do, Lk. xii. 58 (llermo;;. iK• invent.
3, 5, 7).•
ίργάτηϊ, -ου, 0, (('(ιγάζυμαι) ; 1. as in (!rk. writ.»
icoriimin, a laborer: usually one who works for hire, ^It.
X. 10; Lk. X. 7; I Tim. v. 18; esp. an agricultural laborer,
Mt. ix. 37 sq. ; XX. 1 sq. 8 ; Lk. x. 2 ; .las. v. 4, (Sap. xvii.
16) ; those whose labor artificers employ [i. e. workmen
in the restricted sense]. Acts xLx. '25 (opp. to roir τ(χνί•
Tacf [A. V. craftsmen'}, ib. 24), cf. Bengel ad loc. ; those
wlio as teachers Labor to propagate and promote Christi-
anity among men: 2 Co, xi. 13 ; Phil. iii. 2; 2 Tim. ii.
15, cf. Mt. ix. 37 S(i. ; Lk. x, 2. 2. one xrho iloex, a
worker, perpetrator : της αδικίας, Lk. ,\iii. '27 (της άνομίαί,
ι Mace. iii. ; τώι/ καλών και σ<μνων. Xen. mem. 2, 1, 27).*
Ιργον, -ου, τό, anciently /"fpyoi/, (Germ.WerL; [Eng. work;
cf. Vanicek p. 922]) ; Sept. for Si'S, ΓΤ13>1 and count-
less times for TUnSd and niyjt?"3 ; work i. e. 1. busi-
ness, emploi/meni, thai willi which ani/ one is occupied :
Mk. xiii. 34 {8ώόναι τινί τό ίργον αΰτοϋ) ", Acts xiv. 26
(πληρούν) ; 1 Tim. iii. 1 ; thus of the work of salvation
committed by God to Christ : διδόναι and rtXtiovv, Jn.
xvii. 4 ; of the work to be done by the apostles and other
Christian teachers, as well as by the presiding officers of
the religious assemblies, Acts xiii. 2 ; xv. 38 ; 1 Th. v.
13 ; Pliil. i. 22 ; το ίργον τινός, gen. of the subj., the work
which one does, service which one either performs or
ought to perform, 1 Th. v. 13; epyov ποκϊν τίνος to do
the work of one (i. e. incumbent upon him), iuayyfXi-
στοϋ, 2 Tim. iv. .5 ; τό ϊργον τινός i. e. assigned by one and
to be done for his sake : τό ίμγον τοΰ ifou rfXttouf, used
of Christ, Jn. iv. 34 ; (τον) Χρίστου (WH txt. Tr mrg.
κυρίου), Phil. ii. 30 ; toC κυρίου, 1 Co xv. 58 ; xvi. 10; with
gen. of thing, ei't tpyov διακονίας, E])h. iv. 12, which means
either to the work in which the ministry consists, the
work performed in undertaking the ministry, or to the
execution of the ministry. of that which one under-
takes to do, enterprise, undertakinij : Acts v. 38 (Deut.
XV. 10; Sap. ii. 12). 2. any product whatever, an;/
thini/ accomplished hi/ hand, art, industry, mind, (i. q. 7701-
ημα, κτίσμα) : 1 Co. iii. 1.3-15 ; with the addition of των
χίίρων, things formed by the hand of man. Acts vii. 41 ;
of tlie works of God visible in the created world, Heb.
i. 1 0, and often in Sept. ; τα iv Tjj γη (ργα. the works of
nature and of art (Bengel), 2 Pet. iii. 10 ; of the arrange-
ments of God for men's salvation: Acts xv. 18 Rec. ; to
tpy. τοΰ θ(οϋ what God works in man, i. e. a life dedi-
cated to (iod and Christ, Ro. xiv. 20 ; to the same effect,
substantially, ίργον αγαθόν, Phil. i. 6 (see dya^or, 2) ; τα
tprya τοΰ διαβόλου, sins and all the misery that springs
from them, 1 .In. iii. 8. 3. an act, deed, thing done:
the idea of workinac is emphasized in opp. to that which
is less than work, Jas. i. 25 ; Tit. i. 16 ; τό ίργον is dis-
tinguished fr. ό λύ -yof : Lk. xxiv. 19; Ro. xv. 18 ; 2 Co.
X. II; Col. iii. 17; 2 Th. ii. 17; 1 Jn. iii. 18, (Sir. iii. 8) ;
plur. (V Χόγοις κα\ iv ΐργοις. Acts vii. 22 (4 Mace. v. 38
(37); for the same or similar contrasts, com. in Grk.
writ,, see Fritzsche on Rom. iii. p. 268 sq. ; Bergler on
Alciphr. p. 54; Bornemann and KUhner on Xen. mem.
2, 3, 6 ; Passow s. v. p. 1151) ; [L. and S. s. v. L 4 ; Lob.
Paralip. pp. 64 sq., 525 sq.]). ίργα is used of the acts
of God — both as creator, Heb. iv. 10; and as gov-
ernor, .In. ix. 3; Acts xiii. 41; Rev. xv. 3; of .sundry
signal acts of Christ, to rouse men to believe in him
and to accomplish I heir salvation: Mt. xi. 2 [cf. ίργα
της σοφίας ib. 1 !) Τ \VH Tr txt.], and esp. in the Gosp. of
John, as v. 20, 36 ; vii. 3 ; x. 38 ; xiv. 1 1 sq. ; xv. 24, (cf.
Grimm, Instit. theol. dogmat. p. 63, ed. 2); they are
called τα ίργα τοΰ πατρός, i. e. done at the bidding and
by the aid of the Father, Jn. x. 37; ix. 3s(i., cf. x. 25, 32;
xiv. 10 ; κπλύ, as beneficent, .In. x. 32 sq. ; and connected
with the verbs btiKvvvai, ποιύν, ipγάζ(σβaL, Ttk^iouv. ίργα
is applied to the conduct of m e n, measured by the
standard of religion and righteousness, — whether bad,
Mt. xxiii. 3 ; Lk. xi. 48 ; Jn. iii. 20 ; Rev. ii. 6 ; xvi. 11,
etc.; or good,Jn.iii. 21 ; Jas.ii. 14,17sq. 20-22, 24-26;
iii. 13; Rev. ii. 5, 9 [Rec.], 19; iii. 8; νόμος ίργων, the
law which demands good works, Ro. iii. 27 ; with a
suggestion of toil, or struggle with hindrances, in the
phrase κατάπαυαν από των ίργων αντοΰ, lleb. iv. 10; to
recompense one κατίι τα ίργα αίτοΰ, Ro. ii. 6 ; 2 Tim. iv.
14; Rev. ii. 23 (Ps. Ixi. (Ixii.) 13),cf. 2Co. xi. 15; Rev.
xviii. 6 ; xx. 1 2 sq. ; the sing, τό ίργον is used collectively
of an aggregate of actions (Germ, das Handeln), .Jas. i.
4 ; τινός, gen. of pers. and subj., his whole way of feeling
and acting, his aims and endeavors : (!al. vi. 4 ; 1 Pet. i.
1 7 ; Rev. xxii. 12 ; τό ίργον τοΰ νόμου, the course of action
demanded by the law, Ro. ii. 15. With epithets: άγαθορ
ίργον, i. e. either a benefaction, 2 Co. ix. 8 ; ])lur. Acts
Lx. 36 ; or every good work springing from piety, Ro. ii.
7; Col. i. JO; 2 Th. ii. 17; Tit. i. IC; 2 Tim. ii. 21 ; iii.
17; Ileb. xiii. 21 [T WHom. ίμγ-']; plur. Eph. ii. 10;
or what harmonizes with the order of society, Ro. xiii.
3 ; Tit. iii. 1 ; ίργον καλόΐ', a f/ood deed, noble action, (see
καΚός, b. and c.) : Mt. xxvi. 10 ; Mk. xiv. 6 ; plur. (often
in Attic writ.), Mt. v. 16; 1 Tim. v. 10, 25 ; vi. 18 ; Tit.
ii. 7 ; iii. 8, 14 ; Heb. x. 24 ; 1 Pet. ii. 12 ; τά ίργα τα iv
δικαιοσύνη equiv. to τά δίκαια. Tit. iii. 5 ; τα ίργα τοΰ θ(οΰ,
the works required and approved by God, Jn. vi. 28
(Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 10; 1 Esdr. vii. 9, 15), in the same
sense ίργα μου i• e. of Christ, Rev. ii. 26 ; ίργον πίστιως,
wrought by faith, the course of conduct whirli springs
from faith, 1 Th. i. 3 ; 2 Th. i. 1 1 ; ίργα άξια τής μιτανοίας.
Acts x.wi. 20 ; ίριγα πιπληρωμίνα ίνώπιον τοΰ 6(οΰ, Rev.
iii. 2 ; ίργα πονηρά. Col. i. 21 ; 2 Jn. 1 1, cf. Jn. iii. 19 ; vii.
7; 1 Jn. iii. 12; ίργα νικρά, works devoid of that life
which has its source in God, works so to speak unwrouffht,
which at the last judgment will fail of the approval of
God and of all reward : Heb. vi. 1 ; ix. 14 ; άκαρπα, Eph.
v. 11 (άχρηστα. Sap. iii. 11 ; the wicked man μ€τά των
ίργων αντοΰ συναπο\(Ίται, Barn. ep. 21, 1) ; άνομα, 2 Pet.
ii. 8 ; ίργα άσφύας, Jude 15 ; τοΰ σκότους, done in dark-
ness, Ro. xiii. 1 2 ; Eph. v. 1 1 ; [opp. to ίργ. τοΰ φωτός,
Ro. xiii. 12 L mrg.] ; in Paul's writ, ίργα νόμου, works
demanded by and agreeing •with the law(cf. Wieseler,
ίρεθίζα.
249
4ριφιορ
Com. lib. d. Br. an d. Gal. p. 194 sqq.) : Ro. iii. 20, 28;
ix. 32 Rec. ; Gal. ii. 16 ; iii. 2, .5, 10 ; and simply tpya :
Ro. iv. 2, 6 ; Lx. 12 (11) ; ib. 32 G L Τ Tr WH ; xi. 6 ;
Eph. ii. 9 ; 2 Tim. i. 9, (see δκαιόω, 3 b.). τα ΐργα vivos
ποκίρ, to do works the same as or like to those of anoth-
er, to follow in action another's e.xample : Abraham's,
Jn. viii. 39 ; that of the devil, ,Tn. viii. 41.
ί(κ6ίΧ,ω; 1 aor. ηρίθισα; {ίμίθω io exe'iie); lo stir up,
excite, stimulate : τινά, in a good sense, 2 Co. i.x. 2 ; as
com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, in a bad sense, lo pro-
voke: Col. iii. 21, where Lchm. παροργίζ(τ(.*
(ptiSa: to βχ, prop firmly; intrans., 1 aor. ptcp. ipfi-
σασα (ή πρώρα), stuck [R. V. struck'], Acts xxvii. 41.
(From Horn, down.) *
(p(iyo}i.ai : fut. epev^opai ; 1. to spit or spue out,
(Horn.). 2. to he emptied, discharge itself, used of
streams (App. Mithr. c. 103) ; witli the ace. to empti/,
discharge, cast forth, of rivers and waters : Lev. xi. 10
Sept. 3. by a usage foreign to classic Greek [W. 23
(22 sq.)], to pour forth words, to speak out, utter: Mt. xiii.
35 (Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 2 ; of. xviii. (xix.) 3 ; cxliv. 7
[Alex.]). The word is more fully treated of by Lobeck
ad Phryn. p. 63 ; [cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 138].*
ερευνάω, -ώ ; 1 aor. impv. ίρ^ΰνησον ; {ή tpfwa a search) ;
fr. Horn, down ; to search, examine into : absol. Jn. vii.
52 ; τί, Jn. v. 39 ; Ro. viii. 27 ; 1 Co. ii. 10 ; Rev. ii. 23
with which passage cf. Jer. xi. 20; xvii. 10; xx. 12; foil.
by an indir. quest. 1 Pet. i. 11 (2 S. x. 3; Prov. xx. 27).
The form €ραννάω (q. v. in its place) Τ Tr WH have
received everywhere into the text, but Lchm. only in
Rev. ii. 23. [Comp. : f|- ^ρηνύω.] *
4ρημία, -OS, ή, (ίρημος), η solitude, an uninhabited re-
gion, a waste \ Mt. XV. 33 ; Mk. viii. 4; Heb. xi. 38; opp.
to π-όλίί, 2 Co. xi. 26. as in Joseph, antt. 2, 3, 1.*
?ρημο5, -OK, (in classic Grk. also-or, -ij, -oi/, cf. ^AΓ. § 11,
1 : [B. 25 (-23) ; on its accent cf. Chandler §§ 393, 394 ;
W. 52 (51)]) ; 1. adj. solitary, lonely, desolate, unin-
habited : of places, Mt. xiv. 13, 15 ; 'Mk. i. 35 ; vi. 32 : Lk.
iv. 42 ; ix. 10 [R G L], 12; Acts i. 20, etc. ; ή όδόϊ, leading
through a desert. Acts viii. 26 (2 S. ii. 24 Sept.), see Τάζα,
sub fin. of persons: deserted by others; deprived of the aid
and protection of others, esp. of friends, acquaintances,
kindred ; berefi ; (so often by Grk. writ, of every age, as
Aeschyl. Ag. 862; Pers. 734; Arstph. pax 1Γ2; ίρημός
T( και ΰτΓο πάντων καταλ^ιφθίΐί, Hdian. 2, 12, 12 [7 ed.
Bekk.] ; of a flock deserted by the shepherd, Hom. Ώ. 5,
140) : yvvri, a woman neglected by her husband, from
whom the husband withholds himself, Gal. iv. 27, fr. Is.
liv. 1 ; of Jerusalem, bereft of Christ's presence, in-
struction and aid, Mt. xxiii. 38 f L and WH txt. om.] ;
Lk. xiii. 35 Rec. ; cf. Bleek, Erkliir. d. drei ersten Ενν.
ii. p. 206, (cf. Bar. iv. 19 ; Add. to Esth. viii. 27 (vi. 13) ;
2 Mace. viii. 35). 2. subst. ή fpr)ftof, sc. χώρα ; Sept.
often for 13T3 ; a desert, wilderness. (Hdt. 3, 102) : Mt.
xxiv. 26 ; Rev. ,xii. 6, 14 ; xvii. 3; at ΐρημοι. desert places,
lonely regions : Lk. i. 80 ; v. 16; viii. 29. an unculti-
vated region fit for pasturage, Lk. xv. 4. used of the
desert of Judaja [cf. ΛΥ. § 18. 1], Mt. iii. 1 : Mk. i. 3 sq.;
Lk. i. 80 ; iii. 2, 4 ; Jn. i. 23 ; of the desert of Arabia,
Acts vii. 30, 36, 38, 42, 44 ; 1 Co. x. 5 ; Ileb. iu. 8, 17.
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. AVuste; Furrer in Schenkel v. 680
sqq. ; [B. D. s. vv. Desert and Wilderness (.\m. ed.)].
ίρημόω, -ώ : Pass., [pres. 3 pers. sing. (cf. B. 38 (33))
ϊρημονται]; \>f. ptcp. ηρημωμίνος ; 1 ΆΟΤ.ημημώθην; {ίρψ
/lot); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. usually for 2"'_Π, 3")ΠΓΙ, DOiV;
to make desolate, lay waste ; in the N. T. only in the Pass. :
πόλιΐ', Rev. xviii. 19; to ruin, bring to desolation: βα-
σιλίίαν, Mt. χϋ. 25 ; Lk. xi. 17; to reduce to naught :
ττλοΰτοί'. Rev. xviii. 17 (16) ; ηρημωμίνην και yvpvrjv ποΐ(ΐν
τίνα, to despoil one, strip her of her treasures, Rev. xvii.
16.•
ί'ρήμωσι;, -(ως. ή. ((ρημόω), a making desolate, desola-
tion: Mt. -vxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; Lk. xxi. 20; see jSSe-
\νγμα, c. (Arr. exp. Alex. 1, 9, 13 ; Sept. several times
for Π3•'Π, H'DC', etc.) *
t'pC^u: [fut. (ρίσω, cf. B. 37 (32)]; (epts) ; to wrangle,
engage in strife, {hat. rixari) : Mt.xii. 19, where by the
phrase οϋκ iplati the Evangelist seems to describe the
calm temper of Jesus in contrast with the vehemence of
the Jewish doctors wrangling together about tenets and
practices. [(From Hom. down.)]*
ίριβίία (not ipiSfia. cf. W. § 6, 1 g. ; [Chandler § 99])
[-^ίαλΥΗ ; see I, ι and Tilf. Proleg. p. 88], -eiai, i}. {ίριθιύω
to spin wool, work in wool, Heliod. 1,5; Mid. in the same
sense, Tob. ii. 1 1 ; used of those who electioneer for office,
courting popular applause by trickery and low arts, Ar-
istot. polit. 5, 3 ; the verb is derived from ΐριθος working
for hire, a hireling ; fr. the Maced. age down, a spinner
or weaver, a worker in wool. Is. xxxviii. 12 Sept.; a
mean, sordid fellow), electioneering or intriguing for office,
Aristot. pol. 5, 2 and 3 [pp. 1302^ 4 and 1303•, 14] ; hence,
apparently, in the N. T. a courting distinction, a desire
to put one's self forward, a partisan and factious spirit
which does not disdain low arts: partisanship, factiousness:
Jas. iii. 14, IC ; κατ ίριθιίαυ, Phil. ii. 3 ; Ignat. ad Phila-
delph. § 8 ; oi «ξ ipiBelas ( see «, Π. 7), Phil. i. 1 6 ( 1 7) [yet
see ί'κ, Π. 12 b.] ; i. q. contending against God. Ro. ii. 8
[yet cf. Mey. (ed. Weiss) ad loc.] ; in the plur. a'l (ριθι'ιαι
[W. § 27, 3'; B. § 123, 2] : 2 Co. xii. 20 ; Gal. v. 20. See
the very full and learned discussion of the word by
Fritzsche in his Com. on Rom. i. p. 143 sq. ; [of which a
summary is given by Ellic. on Gal. v. 20. See further
on its derivation, Lobeck, Path.. Proleg. p. 365 ; cf. W.
94 (89)].*
Ipiov. -ου, TO, (dimin. of τό epos or i'pot), wool : Heb.
ii. 19; Rev. i. 14. [From Hom. down.]*
ipis, -i8of, η, ace. epiv (Phil. i. 15), pi. iptSfs (1 Co. i.
11) and fp«f (2 Co. xii. 20 [R G Trtxt. ; Gal. v. 20 R G
WHmrg.]; Tit. iii. 9 [R GLTr]; see [WH. App. p.
157] ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 326 ; Matthiae § 80 note 8 ; Bttm.
Ausf. Spr. p. 191 sq. ; [W. 65 (63) ; B. 24 (22)]) : conten-
tion, strife, wrangling : Ro. i. 29 ; xiii. 13 ; 1 Co. i. 11 ;
iii. 3 ; 2 Co. xii. 20 ; Gal. v. 20 ; Phil. i. 15 ; 1 Tim. vi. 4 ;
Tit. iii. 9. [From Hom. down.]'
ίpCφιov, -ου. TO, and ίριφο!, -ου, ό, σ kid, a young goat :
Mt. XXV. 32 sq. ; Lk. xv. 29. [Ath. 14, p. 661 b.] *
Έρμα,ί
250
βρχομαι
Έρι«!β, ace. Έρμα» {cf. Β. 20 (18)], 6, (Doric for
Έ,pμηt)y Hennas, a certain Christian (wliom Origcn and
Otliers thought to be tlie author of tlie book untitled
" The Shepherd " [cf. Salmon in Diet, of Chris. Biog.
8. V. ricrmas 2]) : Uo. xvi. 14.*
ίρ)ΐην((α [WIl -via; see I, t], -as, ή, (ίρμηνινω), inlcrpre-
talion (of what has been spoken more or less obscurely
by others) : 1 Co. xii. 10 [L t.xt. δκρμ. q. v.] ; xiv. 26.
[From Plato down.] *
ίρμηνίΐιτή5, -οΰ, ό, (Ιρμην(νω, q. v.), an interpreler : 1
Co. xiv. 2S L Tr WIl mrg. (Plat, politic, p. 290 c; for
y•*?? in Gen. xlii. 23.) •
<ρ|χην€νω : [pres. pass. Ιρμηιχΰομαι^ \ (fr. Έρμη!, who
was held to be the god of speech, writing, eloquence,
learning); 1. to explain in words, expound : [Soph.,
Eur.], Xen., Plato, al. 2. to interpret, i. e. to trans-
late what has been spoken or written in a foreign tongue
into the vernacular (Xen. an. 5, 4, 4) : Jn. i. 38 (39) R G
T, 42 (43) ; ix. 7 ; lleb. vii. 2. (2 Esdr. iv. 7 for DJlJI.)
[CoMP. : St-, μ(θ-(ρμηι>ήω.^*
'Ep(if|s, ace. Έρμην, 6. prop, name, Hermes; 1. a
Greek deity called by the Romans Mercurius (Mercury):
Acts xiv. 12. 2. a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 14.*
Έρμογ€νηβ, [i. c. born of Hermes; Tdf. Έρμογ.^, -ους, 6,
Herm(ji/enrs, a certain Christian: 2 Tim. i. 15.*
ipircTOv, -oO, TO, (fr. ίρπω to creep, crawl, [Lat. serpo;
hence ser[)ent, and f r. same root, reptile ; Vanicek p.
1030 sq.]), a creeping thing, reptile; by prof. writ, used
chiefly of serpents ; in Horn. Od. 4, 418 ; Xen. mem. 1,
4, 1 1 an animal of any sort ; in bibl. Grk. opp. to quad-
rupeds and birds, Acts x. 12 ; xi. 6 ; Ro. i. 23 ; and to
marine animals also, Jas. iii. 7 ; on this last pass. cf. Gen.
ix. 3. (.Sept. for iVOT and ]'yd.) '
ίρνθρόϊ, -ά, -όν, red; fr. Ilom. down ; in the N. T. only
in the plirase η ϊρυθρα θάΚασσα the Red Sea (fr. Hdt.
down [cf. Rawlinson's Herod, vol. i. p. 143]), i. e. the
Indian Ocean washing the shores of Arabia and Persia,
with its two gulfs, of which the one lying on the east is
called the Persian Gulf, the other on the opposite side
the Arabian. In the N. T. the phrase denotes the upper
part of the Arabian Gulf (the Herod polite Gulf, so called
[i. e. Gulf of Suez]), through which the Israelites made
their passage out of Egypt to the shore of Arabia : Acts
vii. 36 ; Heb. xi. 29. (Sept. for tllD^D', the sea of sedge or
sea-weed [cf. B. D. as below]. Ci. Win. RWB. s. v.
Meer rothes; Pressel in Herzog ix. p. 239 sqq. ; Furrer
in Schenkel iv. 150 sqq.; [B. D. s.w. Red Sea and Red
Sea, Passage of; Trumbull, Kadesh-Barnea, p. 352 sqq.].) '
ϊρχομαι. impv. ίρχου. ϊρχ(σθ(, (for the Attic Mi, irt fr.
ii/ii) ; impf. ηρχόμην (for rjeiv and f/a more com. in Attic) ;
fut. fXfϋσoμaι; — (on these forms cf. [esp. Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 103 sqq. ; \''eitch s. v.] ; Matthiae § 234;
Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 182 sq. ; Krtiger §40 s. v.; KUhner
§.343; W. § 15 s. v.; [B. 58 (50)]); pf. ΆήΧυθα; plpf.
ί\η\νθ(ΐν; 2 aor. ξλβοί' and (occasionally by L Τ Tr WIl
[together or severally] — asMt.vi. 10; [vii. 25, 27; x. 13;
xiv. 34;xxv. 36: Mk. i. 29; vi. 29; Lk. i. 59; ii. 16; v. 7;
vi. 1 7 ; viii. 35 ; xi. 2 ; xxiii. 33 ; .\.\iv. 1, 23] ; Jn. [i. 39 (40) ;
iii. 26] ; iv. 27 ; [xii. 9] ; Acts xii. 10 ; [xiv. 24] ; xxviii.
14 sq. etc.) in the Alexandrian form ηΚθα (see άπΐρχομαί
init. for relf.) ; Sept. for Ni3, rarely for ΤλΤ}'^ and T)S; ;
[fr. Horn, down] ; I. to come; 1. prop. a. of
persons; a. univ. (o come from one place into another,
and used both of persons arriving, — as in Mt. viii. 9 ; x.xii.
3 ; Lk. vii. 8; xiv. 17 [here WH mrg. read the inf., see
their Intr. § 404], 20 ; .In. v. 7 ; Acts x. 29 ; Rev. xxii. 7,
and very often ; oi ϊρχόμίνοι κ. οί vnayovrfs, Mk. vi. 31 J
— and of tho.se returning, as in .In. iv. 27 ; ix. 7 ; Ro. ix.
9. Constructions : foil, by από w. gen. of place, Mk.
vii. 1 ; XV. 21 ; Acts xviii. 2 ; 2 Co. xi. 9 ; w. gen. of pers.,
Mk. V. 35 ; Jn. iii. 2 ; Gal. ii. 12, etc. ; foil, by « w. gen. of
place, Lk. v. 1 7 [L txt. συνίρχ.'] ; Jn. iii. 3 1 , etc. ; foil, by
€ts w. ace. of place, to come into : as eir τ. οΐκίαν, τον οίκοι»,
Mt. ii. U ; viii. 14; Mk. i. 29; v. 38, etc. ; ds την πύλιν,
Mt. L\. 1, and many other exx. ; foil, by tls to, towards,
Jn. XX. 3 sq. ; elt το vepav, of persons going in a boat,
Mt. viii. 28 ; of persons departing ϊκ . . . ds, Jn. iv. 54 ;
διό w. gen. of place foU. by eis (Rec. Trpos) to, Mk. vii. 31 ;
tit T. ίορτήν, to celebrate the feast, Jn. iv. 45 ; xi. 56 ; i»
w. dat. of the thing with which one is equipped, Ro. xv.
29 ; 1 Co. iv. 21 ; foil, by ΐπί w. ace. of place, (Germ.
uber, over), Mt. -xiv. 28 ; (Germ, auf), Mk. vi. 53 ; ((ierm.
an), Lk. ,\ix. 5; [xxiii. 33 L Tr] ; Acts xii. 10, 12; to
w. ace. of the thing, Mt. iii. 7; xxi. 19 ; Mk. xi. 13; xvi.
2; Lk. xxiv. 1; w. ace. of pers., Jn. .\ix. 33; to one's
tribunal. Acts xxiv. 8 Rec. ; against one, of a military
leader, Lk. xiv. 31 ; κατά w. ace, Lk. x. 33 ; Acts xvi. 7 ;
παρά w. gen. of pers. Lk. viii. 49 [Lchm. άττό] ; w. ace.
of place, to [the side of], Mt. xv. 29 , προς to, w. ace. of
pers., Mt. iii. 14 ; vii. 15 ; [xiv. 25 L Τ Tr WlI] ; Mk. ix.
14 ; Lk. i. 43 ; Jn. i. 21» ; 2 Co. xiii. 1, and very often, esp.
in the Gospels ; από twos (gen. of pers.) npos tivu, 1 Th.
iii. 6 ; with simple dat. of pers. (prop. dat. commodi or
incommodi [cf. W. § 22, 7 N. 2 ; B. 179 (1.05)]) : Mt.
xxi. 5 ; Rev. ii. 5, 16, (exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v.
p. 1184• bot.; [L and S. s. v. Π. 4]). with adverbs
of place: πό^ί », Jn. iii. 8 ; viii. 14; Rev.vii.l3; άνωθΐν,
Jn. iii. 31 ; όπισθιν, Mk. v. 27; 2>8f, Mt. viii. 29; Acts
i.x. 21; ϊνθάδί, Jn. iv. 15 [R G L Tr], 16; «ft, Jn.
xviii. 3 [cf. W. 472 (44i.)] ; jroC, Heb. .xi. 8 ; cat nvos,
Lk. iv. 42; άχρι τινήί. Acts .\i. 5. The purpose for
which one comes is indicated — either by an inf., Mk.
[v. ]4LTTrWH]; .xv. 36; Lk.i. 59; iii. 12; Jn. iv. 15
[T WH δκ'ρ;^.], and very often ; or by a fut. ptcp., Mt.
xxvii. 49; Acts viii. 27; or by a foU. ha, Jn. xii. 9; «t
toCto, ίνα. Acts ix. 21 ; or by διό τίνα, Jn. xii. 9. As
one who is about to do something in a ])lace must neces-
sarily come thither, in the popular narrative style the
phrases (ρχ^ται και. ηΚθί και, etc., are usually placed be-
fore verbs of action : Mt. xiii. 19, 25; Mk. ii. 18; iv. 15;
v.33; vi.29; xii. 9 ; xiv. 37; Lk. viii. 12, 47; Jn. vi. 15 ;
xi. 48; xii. 22; xLk. 38; .\x. 19, 26; xxi. 13; 3 Jn. 3;
Rev. V. 7; xvii. 1 ; xxi. 9 ; (ρχου κ. iSe (or jtJXi'n-f), Jn. i.
46 (47) ; xi. 84 ; [and Rec. in] Rev. vi. 1, 3, 5, 7, [also
Grsb. exc. in vs. 3] ; plur. Jn. i. 39 (40) ([T Tr WH
o^fffif], see €Ϊ8ω, I. 1 e.) ; — or ίλθών is used, foil, by a
άρχομαι
251
€ρχομαι
finite verb: Mt. ϋ. 8 ; viii. 7 ; ix. 10, 18 ; xii. 44 ; xiv. 12,
33 [R G L] ; xviii. 31 ; xxvii. 64 ; xxviii. 13 ; Mk. vii. 25
[Tdf. fiVfXfl.] ; xii. 14, 42 ; xiv. 45 ; xvi. 1 ; Acts xvi. 37,
39; — or ep;(o/xi>'of, foil, by a finite verb : Lk.xui.l4; xvi.
21 ; xviii. 5. in other places ίΚθών must be rendered
when I Qhou, he, etc.) am come : Jn. xvi. 8 ; 2 Co. xii. 20 ;
Phil. i. 27 (opp. to απών). β. to come i. e. to appear,
make one's appearance, come before the public : so κατ
€ξοχΊ]ν of the ilessiah, Lk. iii. 16; Jn. iv. 25; vii. 27, 31;
Heb. .X. 37, who is styled pre-eminently ό ΐρχόμίνοί, i. e.
he that cometh (i. e. is about to come) ace. to prophetic
promise and universal expectation, the coming one [W.
341 (320) ; B. 204 (1 76 sq.)] : Mt. xi. 3 ; Lk. vii. 19 sq. ;
with fir τόΐ" κόσμοι» added, Jn. vi. 14 ; xi. 27 ; tv τω ονόματι
τοΰ κνμ'ιου, he who is already coming clothed with divine
authority i. e. the Messiah, — the shout of the people joy-
fully welcoming Jesus as he was entering Jerusalem, —
taken fr. Ps. ex vii. (ex viii.) 25 sq. : Mt. xxi. 9; xxiii. 39;
Mk. xi. 9; Lk. xiu. 35 ; .xLx. 38 [Tdf. om. ίρχ. (so WH
in their first mrg.)] ; Jn. xii. 13. ΐρχ^σθαι used of Elijah
who was to return fr. heaven as the forerunner of the
Messiah: Mt. xi. 14; xvii. 10; Mk. Lx. 11-13; of John
the Baptist, Mt. xi. 18 ; Lk. vii. 33 ; Jn. i. 31 ; with els
μαρτνρίαν added, Jn. i. 7; of Antichrist, 1 Jn. ii. 18; of
"false Christs" and other deceivers, false teachers, etc. :
Mt. xxiv. 5 ; Mk. xiii. (> ; Lk. xxi. 8, (in these pass, with
the addition eVl τω ονόματι μου, relying on my name, i. e.
arrogating to themselves and simulating my Messianic
dignity) ; Jn. x. 8 ; 2 Co. xi. 4 ; 2 Pet. iii. 3 ; Rev. xvii.
10; with the addition eV τώ ονόματι τω Ιδίω in his own
authority and of his own free-wiU, Jn. v. 43. of the Holy
Spirit, who is represented as a person coming to be the
invisible helper of Christ's disciples after his departure
from the world: Jn. xv. 26 ; xvi. 7 sq. 13. of the ap-
pearance of Jesus among men, as a religious
teacher and the author of salvation : Mt. xi. 19 ; Lk. vii.
34 ; .In. v. 43 ; vii. 28 ; viii. 42 ; with the addition of fir
T. κόσμον foU. by iva, Jn. xii. 46 ; xviii. 37 : fis κρίμα. Ίνα,
Jn. ix. 39 ; foU. by a telic inf. 1 Tim. i. 15 ; ?ρχ(σθαι οπίσω
TITOS, after one, Mt. iii. 11 ; Mk. i. 7; Jn. i. 15, 27, 30;
ό ίΚθών δι' ΰδατοΓ καΐ αίματοί, a terse expressioij for, 'he
that publicly appeared and approved himself (to be
God's son and ambassador) by accomplishing expiation
through the ordinance of baptism and the bloody death
which he imderwent '[cf. p. 210* bot.], 1 Jn. v. 6 ; ΐρχ^-
σθαι foil, by a telic inf., Mt. v. 17; x. 34 sq. ; Lk. xix. 1 ;
' foil, by Ίνα, Jn. -x. 10; ίΚηΚνθίναι and ΐρχισθαι iv σαρκί
are used of the form in which Christ as the divine Logos
appeared among men : 1 .Jn. iv. 2, 3 [Rec] ; 2 Jn. 7. of
the return of Jesus hereafter from heaven in
majesty: Mt. x. 23 ; Acts i. 11 ; 1 Co. iv. 5 ; xi.26; 1
Th. V. 2 ; 2 Th. i. 10 ; with ev rj δόξη αϋτοΰ added, Mt.
xvi. 27; xxT. 31 ; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 20 ; (π\ τώνν(φ(λων
(borne on the clouds) pera 8υνάμ(ως κ. &όξη!. Mt. .xxiv.
80 ; Cf ν(φίλαΐί, iv ν(φί\τ} κτ\., Mk. xiii. 26 ; Lk. xxi. 27;
tv T3 βασί\(ία αυτού (see iv, I. 5 c. p. 210' top), Mt. xvi.
28 ; Lk. xxiii. 42 [th την β. L mrg. Tr mrg. WH txt.]
b. of time, like the Lat. venio : with nouns of time, as
ίρχονται ημίραι, in a fut. sense, will come [cf. B. 204 (1 76
sq.) ; W. § 40, 2 a.], Lk. xxiii. 29 ; Heb. viii. 8 fr. Jer.
xxxviii. (xxxi.) 31 ; ίΚήσονται ήμίραι, Mt. ix. 15; Mk. ii.
20 ; Lk. v. 35 ; xvii. 22 ; x.xi. 6 ; ηλθ^ν ή ήμίρα, Lk. xxii.
7; Rev. vi. 17 ; ίρχΐται ωρα, ore, Jn. iv. 21, 23; v. 25;
xvi. 25 ; foil, by Iva, Jn. xvi. 2, 32 ; ηΚθΐν, is come, i. e. is
present, Jn. xvi. 4, 21 ; Rev. xiv. 7, 15 ; ίΧηΚυθΐ ή ώρα.
Ίνα, Jn. xii. 23 ; xiii. 1 (L Τ Tr WH ηλθιν) ; xvi. 32 ; xvii.
1 ; (λη\ΰθ(ΐ ή ωρα αυτόν, had Come (Lat. aderal), Jn. vii.
30; viii. 20 ; €ρχ^. νΰξ, Jn. ix. 4 ; η ημ^ρα τοΰ κυρίου, 1 Th,
V. 2; καιροί. Acts iii. 19. with names of events that oc-
cur at a definite time : ό θίρισμός, .Jn. iv. 35 ; ό γάμο; τοΰ
άρνίου. Rev. xix. 7 ; ηΚβίν η κρίσις, Rev. xviii. 10. in imi-
tation of the Hebr. Χ3Π, ό, η, το €ρχόμ(νος, -ίνη, -tvov, is
i.q. to come, future [cf. B. and W.u. s.] ; ό αΙών, Mk. χ. 30 ;
Lk. xviii. 30 ; ή ίορτή, Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.J ; ή οργή, 1 Th.
i. 10; τάipχόμeva, things to come, Jn. xvi. 13 (□"SSn the
times to come, Is. xxvii. 6) ; in the periphrasis of the
name of Jehovah, ό t>v και ό ην καΊ ό (ρχόμκνο!, it is
equiv. to iσόμevoς, Rev. i. 4; iv. 8. c. of things and
events(so very often in Grk. auth. also) ; of the advent
of natural events : ποταμοί, Μ t. vii. 25 [RG]; κατακλυ-
σμός, Lk. xvii. 27 ; λιμοί. Acts vii. 11 ; of the rain coming
down Επί TJjs yrjs, Heb. vi. 7 ; of alighting birds, Mt. xiii.
4, 32; Mk. iv. 4; of a voice that is heard (Hom. D. 10,
139), foil, by e'lc with gen. of place, Mt. iii. 1 7 [?] ; Uk. Lx.
7 [T WH Tr mrg. eycVrro] ; Jn. .xii. 28 ; of things that are
brought: ό λύχνος, Mk. iv. 21 ^πιστοΚή, Liban. ep.
458; other e.x.x. fr. Grk. writ, are given in Kypke, I'iui-
noel, al., on Mk. 1. c.). 2. metaph. a. of Christ's
invisible return from heaven, i. e. of the power
which through the Holy Spirit he will exert in the sotds
of his disciples : Jn. .xiv. 18, 23 ; of his invisible advent
in the death of believers, by which he takes them to
himself into heaven, Jn. xiv. 3. b. equiv. to to come
into being, arise, come forth, shotc itself, fnd place or in-
fluence : τα σκάνδαλα, Mt. xviii. 7 ; Lk. .xvii. 1 ; τα αγαβά,
Ro. iii. 8 (Jer. xvii. t; ) ; το TtKnov, 1 Co. .xiii. 10 ; ^ πίστις.
Gal. iii. 23, 25 ; η αποστασία, 2 Th. u. Ζ', η βασιλεία τοΰ
θ(οΰ, i. q. be established, Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2; xvii. 20,
etc. ; ή {'κτολή, i. q. became knoicn, Ro. vii. 9. c. with
Prepositions: «κ τής [Lchm. άπο] &Κί•^(ως, suffered
tribulation. Rev. vii. 14. foil, by «s, to come (fall) into
or unto: άς τό χ(Ί.ρον, into a worse condition, Mk. τ. 26;
ftf π€ΐρασμ6ν. Mk. χϊλ'. 38 Τ ΛΑ Η ; ίΐς άπ^λεγμόν (see
άτΓρλργμό?), Acts xix. 27 ; ft? την ώραν ταντην, .Jn. xii. 27 ;
(Ις κρίσιν, to become liable to judgment, .Τη. v. 24: Wj
iπίγvωσιv, to attain to knowledge, 1 Tim. ii. 4 ; 2 Tim.
iii. 7 ; fir το φαν(ρόν, to come to light, Mk. iv. 22 ; fiy
προκοπην ίΚή\υθ(. has turned out for the advancement,
Phil. i. 12 ; ΐρχ. tts τι, to come to a thing, is used of a
writer who after discussing other matters passes on to
a new topic, 2 Co. xii. 1 ; fit ΐαυτόν, to come to one's
senses, return to a healthy state of mind, Lk. xv. 17
(Epict. diss. 3, 1, 15 ; Test. xii. Patr., test. Jos. § 3, p.
702 ed. Fabric), ΐρχ. ivl τίνα to come upon one : in a
bad sense, of calamities, .Jn. xviii. 4 ; in a good sense, of
the Holy Spirit, Mt. iii. 16; Acts xix. 6: to devolve
epot
252
τθίω
upon one, of the t;uilt and punishment of murder, Mt.
xxiii. 35. ίρχ. npot τον Ίησοϋν, to commit one's self to
the instruction of Jesus and enter into fellowship with
him, Jn. v. 40 ; vi. 35, 37, 44, 45, Co ; jrpor τό φως, to sub-
mit one's self to the power of the lisht, Jn. iii. 20 sq.
n. loffo: οπίσω Tims ("^T^i^ t^^)' '" follow one, Mt. xvi.
24 ; [.Mk. viii. 34 KL Tr mrg.' Wll]; Lk. i.\. 23; xiv.
27, (Cien. x.xiv. J, 8; χ.χχνϋ. 17, and elsewhere); npos
τίνα, Lk. XV. 20; σύν τινι, to accompany one, Jn. xxi. 3
[cf. B. 210 (1S2)] ; 6h6v ίμχ(σθαι. Lk. ii. 44 [cf. W.
220 ( 2 1 2 )]. [Com P. : άι^, ίπ-αν-, απ-, δι-. (iV-, ί'π-ίΐΓ-. παρ-
'ΐα-, σνν•(ΐσ-, (ζ-, ti-e^-, in-, κατ-, παρ-, άντι-παρ-, vtpi-,
ηρυ-, προσ-, ίτνν-ίρχομαί.~\
[SvN.: ίρχΐσθαι, {βαίνΐΐν,) ττορΐύ^σθα ι, χωρ€7ν:
with the Ν. Τ. use of these verlis ami their compounds it may be
interesting to comp.ire the distiuotious ordinarily recognized
in classic Grk., where (ρχισβαι denotes motion or progress
generally, and of any sort, hence to rom<• and (esp. ίλβίΓι/)
arrive at, as well a.s to i/o (βαίναν). βα,ίνιιν primarily signi-
fies to walk, lake sttps, picturing the nioile of motion ; to go
away, πορίΐίίσβαί expresses motion in general. — often con-
fined within certain limits, or giving prominence to the
bearing; hence the regular word for the march of an
army, χωριϊν .ilways empliasizes the idea of separation,
ch.ange of place, and does not, like e. g. πορ6ΐ/6σ9οι, note the
external ami perceptible motion, — (a man may he recog-
nized liy Ids Troptla). Cf. Schmidt ch xxvii.]
€ρώ, see cmov.
{ρωτάω, -it, [(inf. -^av L Τ Tr, -rav R G WII ; .see I, «)] ;
impf. 3 pers. plur. ηρώτων and (in Mt.xv. 23 LT Tr WH,
Mk. iv. 10 Tdf.) ημώτουν, cf. B. 44 (38) ; [W. 8S (82) ;
r<//". Proleg. p. 1 22 ; Soph. Lex. p. 41 ; WH. App. p. 1G6 ;
Mullach, Griech. Vulgarspr. p. 252] ; fut. ϊρωτησω; 1 aor.
ηρώτησα ; Sept. for '7X2' ; to ask, i. e. 1. as in Grk.
writ. fr. Horn, down to question : absol., Lk. xxii. G8 ; Jn.
viii. 7 [11] ; τινά, Jn. Lx. 21 ; .xvi. 19, 30 ; [xviii. 21 where
Rec. enfp.J, etc. ; with the addition of λί'γω» and the
words of the questioner: Mt. xvi. 13 ; Lk. xLx. 31 [om.
λίγων ; xxiii. 3 Τ Tr WH] ; Jn. i. 1 9, 21 ; v. 1 2 ; Lx. 1 9 ;
xvi. 5 ; τινά τι [cf. W. § 32, 4 a.], Mt. xxi. 24 ; Mk. iv. 10;
Lk. XX. 3 ; .in. xvi. 23 [al. refer this to 2] ; τίνα πίρΐ nvos,
Lk. ix. 45 [Lchm. fVfp.] ; Jn. xviii. 19. 2. to ask i. e.
to request, entreat, her/, beseech, after the Hebr. Ske', in a
sense very rare in prof. auth. (.Joseph, antt. 5, 1, U [but
here the text is uncertain ; substitute antt. 7, 8, 1 ; cf.
Dr. Ezra Abbot in No. .\m. Rev. for 1872, p. 173 note];
Babr. fab. [42, 3] ; 97, 3 ; Apoll. .synt. p. 289, 20 ; cf. W.
pp. 30 and 32) : Ttra. Jn. xiv. 16 ; with the addition of
λίγων and the words of the asker, Alt. xv. 23 ; Jn. .xii.
21 ; foil, by impv. alone [B. 272 sq. (234)], Lk. .xiv. 18
sq. ; PhiL iv. 3 ; foil, by ίνα [cf. W. § 44, 8 a.; B. 237
(204)], Mk. vii. 26; Lk. vii. 36; xvi. 27; Jn. iv. 47 ;
xvii. 15 ; xLx. 31, 38; 2 Jn. 5; 1 Th. iv. 1 ; by όπωί, Lk.
τϋ. 3 ; xL 37 ; Acts x.xiii. 20 ; by the inf. [Β.'2ύ8 (222) ;
cf. W. 335 (315)], Lk. V. 3 ; viii. 37 ; Jn. iv. 40 ; Acts
iii. 3 ; X. 48 ; xxiii. 18 ; 1 Th. v. 12 ; τινά πιρί tivos, Lk.
iv. 38; Jn. xvii. 9, 20; 1 Jn. v. 16 ; imip tivos [foil, by
fk w. inf.; cf. B. 265 (228)], 2 Th. ii. 1 S(|. ; ϊρωτάν τα
[AVII txt. om. τά] προς (ΐρήνην (see (Ιρηνη, I ), Lk. xiv. 32.
[Syn. see αΐτίω, fin. CoMP. : δι-, (ττ-^ρωτάω.Ί
«■(τβή!. -rJTos, ή, (fr. ΐννυμι, ΐσθην. hence it would be
more correctly written ίσθης [so Rec.''" in Lk.], cf.
Kiihner i. p. 217, 3), formerly Ρισθης (cf. Lat. veslbi.
Germ. Weste, Eng. vest, etc.), clothing, raiment, apparel:
Lk. x.xiii. 11; xxiv. 4 LTTr WII ; Actsi. lORG; x.30;
xii. 21 ; Jas. ii. 2 sq. [Erom Horn, down.]*
€<Γβησ•ΐ5 [Rec.''' fa^.], -€ωί, η, (fr. ίσθίω, anil this fr.
ΐσθής, q. v.), clothing, apparel: plur., Lk. xxiv. 4 Ii G;
Acts i. 10 LTTrWH; [cf. Philo, vit. Moys. iii. § 18;
Euseb. h. e. 2, 6, 7 and Heinichen's note]. (Rare in prof,
writ. [Aristot. rhet. 2, 8, 14 var.] ; cf. W. § 2, 1 c.) *
itrilia and ϊσθω, (]. v., (lengthened forms of ίδω [cf.
Curliiis, Das Vcrbum, ii. p. 420]) ; impf. ησθιον; 2 aor.
'φαγον (fr. ΦΑΓΩ) ; fut. φάγομαι (2 pers. φάγfσaι, Lk.
xvii. 8 [reff. s. v. κατακαυχύημαι, init.]), for the classic
e'Souai, see Bitm. Ausf. .Spr. ii. |). I So; Kiihner i. p. 824;
[W. 89 (85) ; B. 58 (51 ) ; but esp. Veitch s. v.] ; Sept.
for SpN; [fr. Horn, down] ; to eat; Vul•^. manduco, [^edo,
etc.]; (of animals, ίο f/crour); a. absol.: Mt. xiv. 20
sq. ; XV. 37, 38; xxvi. 26; Mk. vi. 31; viii. 8; Jn. iv. 31,
and often ; €v τω φαγ(ΐν, in eating (the supper), 1 Co.
xi. 21 ; SiSovai Tii/i φαγΐίν, to give one (something) to
eat, Mt. xiv. 16; xxv. 35, 42; Mk. v. 43 ; vi. 37; Lk.ix.
13, (and with addition of an ace. of the thing to be e.iten,
Jn. vi. 31, 5-'; ?κ rtfof, liev. ii. 7; [cf. W. 198 (187) sq.]);
φίριιν τινι φαγύν, to bring one (something) to eat, Jn.
iv. 33; spec, in opp. to abstinence from certain kinds of
food, Ro. .xiv. 3, 20; ίσθίίΐν κ. πίν^ιν (and φαγΐΐν κ. πι^ιν),
to use food and drink to satisfy one's hunger and thirst,
1 Co. xi. 22 ; contextually, to be .supported at the ex-
pense of others, 1 Co. ix. 4 ; not to shun choice food and
in a word to be rather a free-liver, opp. to the narrow
and scrupulous notions of those who abstain from the
use of wine and certain kinds of food, Mt. .xi. 19; Lk.
vii. 34 ; opp. to fasting (το νησΎ(ϋ(ΐν), Lk. v. 33 ; of
those who, careless about other and esp. graver matters,
lead an easy, merry life, Lk. xii. 19; .xvii. 27 sq. ; 1 Co.
XV. 32, (Is. xxii. 13); of the jovial use of a sacrificial
feast, 1 Co. X. 7 fr. Ex. x.x.\ii. 6 ; preceded by a nega-
tive, to abstain from all nourishment. Acts xxiii. 12, 21 ;
to use a spare diet, spoken of an ascetic mode of life,
Alt. xi. 18 ; of fasting. Acts ix. 9 ; iauifiv (κ. πίνίΐν) μιτά
Tivos, to dine, feast, (in company) with one, .Mt. ix. 11;
Alk. ii. 16; Lk. v. 30; with one (he providing the onier-
tainment), i. e. at his house, Lk. vii. 36; μfτa των μιβυόν-
των etc., of luxurious revelling, Mt. xxiv. 49; Lk. xii.
45 ; iVi τραπίζης τον Χρίστου, the food and drink spread
out on Christ's table, i. e. to enjoy the blessings of the
salvation procured by Christ (which is likened to a ban-
quet), Lk. xxii. 30 ; ίσθίίΐν τίκι, to one's honor, Ro. xiv.
6. b. construed w. an ace. of the thing, to eat {con-
sume) a thing [W. 198 (187) note]: Mt. vi. 25; Aik. i.
6; Jn. iv. 32; vi. 31; Ro. xiv. 2; 1 Co. viii. 13; x. 25,
etc. ; άρτον, to take food, eat a meal, (after the Hebr.
OnS Spx, Gen. xliii. 25 ; Ex. ii. 20 ; 1 S. xx. 24 ; Prov.
xxiii. 7), Mt. XV. 2 ; Mk. iii. 20: Lk. xiv. 1, 15 ; τόι/ ίαν
τοΰ άρτον, obtained by his own labor, 2 Th. iii. 12; άρτο»
παρά Tifof (gen. of pers.) to be supported by one, 2 Th.
τθα>
253
€σχατο9
iii. 8 ; τα ιταρά rtms, the things supplied by one, L,k. x.
7, i. q. τα παρατιθίμ^να in vs. 8 [cf. W. 3(JG (343)]; 1 Co.
.\. 27 ; μτΐ7( apTov ΐσθ• μητ€ oivov Ήΐναν-, to live frugally,
Lk. vii. 33 ; το κυριακον biinvov φαγ€ΐν, to celebrate the
Lord's supper, 1 Co. .xi. 20 ; τό πύσχ^α, to eat the paschal
lamb, celebrate the paschal supper, Mt. xxvi. 1 7 ; Mk.
-xiv. 12, 14; Lk. xxil. 8, 11, 15, 16 L Τ Tr WH ; Jn.
xviii. 28 ; τας θυσίας, to celebrate the sacrificial feasts,
said of Jews, 1 Co. x. 18; of animals, in Lk. xv. 16
(where Sit> stands by attraction for ά, because eaBUiv
ivith a simple gen. of thing is nowhere found in the N.
T. [W. 198 (187) note]), by a usage hardly to be met
with in class. Grk. (W. § 28, 1 ; [B. 159 (139)]), l< Tims,
to (take and) eat of a thing: Lk. xxii. 16 [RG] ; Jn. vi.
26, 50 sq. ; 1 Co. xi. 28 ; on the other hand, ίκ τυϋ καρπού
(L Τ Tr WFI τον καρπόν), €κ τοϋ -γάΧακτος ίσθίΐΐν, in 1 Co.
ix. 7, is to support one's self by the sale of the fruit and
the milk [but cf. B. as above, and Meyer ad loc.]. t'/c
with gen. of place : e'/c τοϋ Upov, draw their support from
the temple, i. e. from the sacrifices and offerings, 1 Co.
ix. 13 [but Τ Tr WH read τά ί'κ τ. ί.] ; also i< θυσιαστη-
ρίου, i. e. from the things laid on the altar, Heb. xiii. 10
[W. 366 (344)]. by a Hebraism (p SjK), άπά τινοί [cf.
\V. 199 (187)]: Mt. xv. 27; Mk. vii. 28. Metaph. (o
devour, consume: τινά, Heb. x. 27; τι, Rev. xvii. 16; of
rust, Jas. V. 3. [Comp. : κατ-, συν-ισθίω^}
(<r9ta, i. q. ίσθίω, a poetic form in use fr. Horn, down,
very rare in prose writ. ; from it are extant in the N. T.
the ptcp. ϊσθων in Mk. i. 6 Τ Tr WH ; [Lk. x. 7 L Τ Tr
WH] ; Lk. vii. 33 L Tr WH, [also 34 WH] ; the pres.
subj. 2 pers. plur. ΐσθητι in Lk. x.xii. 30 LTTrWH;
[cf. κατ(σθΙω]. It occurs several times in the Sept., as
Lev. xvii. 10; Judg. xiv. 9 [Alex.] ; Is. ix. 20; Sir. xx.
16 ; (σθ(τ(, Lev. xLs. 26. Cf. [Γ<//. Proleg. p. 81]; B.
58 (51).
Έσ-λίί (TTrWH, [see WH. App. p. 155, and s. v.
»i, t]) or Έσλί, ό, Esli, one of Christ's ancestors: Lk.
iii. 25.•
€ο•-οΐΓτρον, -ου, τό, (ΟΠΤΩ), α mirror: 1 Co. xiii. 12;
Jau. i. 23. (Sap. vii. •2ύ ; Sir. xii. 11 ; Find. Nem. 7, 20;
Anacr. 11, [7 (6)] 3 ; Plut. ; al.) The mirrors of the
ancients were made, not of glass [cf. B.D. s. v. Glass,
fin.], but of steel; Plin. h. n. 33, (9) 45; 34, (17) 48
[but see the pass, just referred to, and B.D. s. v. mirror'].'
iirttipa., -as, ή, (Jc-nfpos of or at evening), evening, even-
tide : Acts iv. 3 ; .xxviii. 23 : npos ίσπ- ϊστίν, it is towards
evening, Lk. x.xiv. 29. [From I'ind. and lldt. down.]*
[iOTTcpivos, -ή, -Of, belonging to the evening, evening :
φυλακή, Lk. xii. 38 WH (rejected) mrg. (Sept.; Xen.,
Dio Cass., Athen., al.)*]
Έσ-ρώμ [or Έσρών in Lk. R•"• L txt. Tr mrg. ; WH
Έσρ., see their Intr. § 408], «5, Esrom or Hezrom or //e.<-
ron, one of Christ's ancestors : Mt. i. 3 ; Lk. iii. 33.*
[Έο-ρών or Έσ-ρ. see the preceding word.]
«o^toTos, -77. -on, (fr. (χω, 'σχον adhering, clinging close ;
[ace. to al. (Curtius § 583 b.) super!, fr. c'l, the outer-
most]), Sept. for |1"'ΠΚ, Π'•ιΠΙ<; [fr. Horn, down]; ex-
treme, last in time or in place ; 1. ioined to nouns :
τότΓΟΓ, the last in a series of places [A. V. lowest], Lk
xiv. 9 sq. ; in a temporal succession, the last: ϊσχατοζ
ίχθρός, that remains after the rest have been concjuered,
1 Co. XV. 26 ; Ko&pavrqs, that remains when the rest
have one after another been spent, Mt. v. 26 ; so Xctttui»,
Lk. xii. 59 ; ή ΐσχ. σάλπιγξ, the trumpet after which no
other will sound, 1 Co. xv. 52, cf. Meyer ad loc. ; at ΐσχ.
πληγαί. Rev. xv. 1 ; xxi. '.) ; ή ϊσχάτη ήμίρα ttjs (oprijs,
Jn. vii. 37. When two are contrasted it is i. q. the
latter, opp. to ό TrpHros the former (Deut. xxiv. 1—4) :
thus ra epya (opp. to των πρώτων). Rev. ii. 19 ; ή πΚάνη,
Mt. xxvii. 64 (where the meaning is, ' lest the lattei
deception, caused by the false story of his resurrection,
do more harm than the former, which was about to pro-
duce behef in a false Messiah ') ; ό taxaTos Αδάμ, the
latter Adam, i. e. the Messiah (see Αδάμ, 1), 1 Co. xr.
45. ή ΐσχ- ήμίρα, the last day (of all days), denotes
that with which the present age (ΠΤΠ dSi>TI, see αιών,
3) which precedes the times of the Jlessiah or the glori-
ous return of Christ from heaven will be closed : Jn. vi.
39 sq. 44, [54] ; xi. 24 ; xii. 48. of the time nearest the
return of Christ from heaven and the consummation of
the divine kingdom, the foil, phrases are used : (σχάτη
ώρα, 1 Jn. ii. 18 ; ex καιρώ ίσχ. 1 Pet. i. 5 ; iv ΐσχ. χρόνω,
Jude 18 Rec, in ίσχάτου χρόνου ibid. Tr WH; iv (σχά-
Tais ήμepaιs, Acts ii. 1 7 ; Jas. v. 3 ; 2 Tim. iii. 1 ; for other
phrases of the sort see 2 a. below ; in iσχάτωv των χρό-
νων, 1 Pet. i. 20 R G, see below. 2. 6, ή, τό ίσχ absol.
or with the genitive, a. of time: o'l ίσχατοι, who had
come to work last, Mt. xx. 8, 12, [14] ; the meaning of
the saying έσονται πρώτοι έσχατοι και ίσχατοι πρώτοι is not
always the same : in Lk. xiii. 30 it signifies, those who
were last invited to enter the divine kingdom will be
first to enter when the opportunity comes, i. e. they will
be admitted forthwith, while others, and those too who
were first among the invited, will be shut out then as
coming too late; in Mt. xix. 30; xx. 16 it means, the
same portion in the future kingdom of God will throuo^h
his goodness be assigned to those invited last as to
those invited first, although the latter may think they
deserve something better; cf. Mk. x. 31. ό πρώτος κ 6
?σχ. i. e. the eternal. Rev. i. 11 Rec, 17; ii. 8 ; xxii.
1 3. ΐσχατος as a predicate joined to a verb adverbially
[cf. W. 131 (124); § 54, 2]: Mk. xii. 6 ; iσχάτη (RG:
but see below) πάντων άπίθανι, Mk. xii. 22. ΐσχατον,
ίσχατα, used substantively [cf. B. 94 (82) § 125, 6]
in phrases, of the time immediately preceding Christ's
return from heaven and the consummation of the divine
kingdom : in' iaxarou or iσχάτωv τών ήμιρών, Heb. i. 2
(1) ; 2 Pet. iii. 3, (Barn. ep. 16, 5) ; τών χρόνων, 1 Pet.
i. 20 ; iπ' iaxarov τοΟ χρόνου, Jude 1 8 L Τ (see 1 abo\e, and
iπί, A. Π. fin.), cf. Riehm, Lehrbegr. d. Hebraerbriefes,
p. 205 sq. TO ίσχατα with gen. of pers. the last state of
one : Mt. xii. 45 ; Lk. xi. 26 ; 2 Pet. ii. 20 [but without
gen. of pers.]. Neut. ΐσχατον, adv., lastly : [w. gen. of
pers., Mk. xii. 22 LTTrWH]; 1 Co. xv. 8. b. of
space: το ?σ•;ΐ(ατοΐ' τ^γ y^r, the uttermost part, the end,
of the earth, Acts i. 8 ; xiii. 47. c. of rank, grade of
ίσγατωϊ
254
Ir»
worth, last i. e. lowest : Mk. ix. 35 ; Jn. viii. 9 Rec. ; 1 Co.
iv. !.,•
»σχί.τ«)ί, adv., extremely, [Xen. an. 2, 6, 1 ; Aristot.,
al.j i €<τχάτω! «χί"' (in extremis esse), to be in the last
gn.-p, at the point of death : Mk. v. 23. Diod. excrpt.
Vales, p. 242 [i. e. fr. 1. 10 § 2, 4 Dind.] ; Artcm. oneir.
8, GO. The phrase is censured by the Atticists ; cf.
Fischer, De vitiis lexx. etc. p. 704 sq.; Lob. ad Thryn. p.
889; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 178 sq. ; [Win. 26].•
4'σ•ω, adv., (fr. e's, for ίϊσω [fr. Horn, on] fr. eis\ cf. W.
52 ; [B. 72 (63) ; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 432]) ; 1.
to within, into : Mt. xxvi. 58 ; Mk. xiv. 54 ; with gen.
Mk. XV. 16 [W. § 54, 6]. 2. within : Jn. .xx. 26 ; Acts
V. 23 ; 6 Ισω ήνθρωπο!, tlie internal, inner man, i. e. the
soul, conscience, (see ΰνθρωττοί, 1 e.), 2 Co. iv. 16 LTTr
Wll; Ro. vii. 22; Eph. iii. 16; o! εσω, those who belong
to the Christian brotherhood (opj). to oi ΐξω [q. v. in
?|ω, 1 a.]), 1 Co. V. 12.•
ϊσ-ωβεν, («σω), adv. of place, fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt.
down; [1. adverbially;] a. from irithin (Vulg. de
intus, ab intus, intrinsecus, [etc.]) : Mk. vii. 21, 23; Lk.
xi. '< ; 2 Co. vii. 5. b. within (cf. W. § 54, 7) : Mt.
vii. 15; xxiii. 25, 27, 28; Rev. iv. 8; v. 1 [ef. γράφω, 3];
ό ΐσωθιν άνθρωπος, 2 Co. iv. 16 RG (see ?σω, 2); τά
ϊσωθιν, that which is within, the inside, Lk. xi. 40 ; with
gen. of pers. i. q. your soul, ibid. 39. [2. as a prop, with
the gen. (W § 54, 6) : Rev. xi. 2 Rec." (see ΐξωθ^ν, 2).] •
ίσώτίροΐ, -fpa, -epov, (compar. of ΐσω, [cf. B. 28 (24
sq.)]), inner: Acts xvi. 24; το iawrepov τοΰ καταπ^τά-
σματος, the inner space Λvhich is behind the veil, i. e. the
shrine, the Holy of holies, said of heaven by a fig. drawn
from the earthly temple, Ileb. vi. 19.*
έταϊροΐ, -ου, 6, [fr. Horn, down], Sept. yn; a comrade,
male, partner, [.\. Ύ. fellow']: Mt. xi. 16 (where Τ Tr
Wn τ,,Ις irepoi, [q. v. 1 b., and cf. IF//. Intr. § 404]) ;
voc. in kindly address, yWeni/ (?n^ (70O'/y"ne«(/) : Mt. xx.
13; xxii. 12; xxvi. 50.*
ίτίρ<5-γλωσ•σ-05, -ου, 6, (erfpos and γλωσσά), one who
speaks [another i. e.] a foreign tongue (opp. to όρόγΧωσ-
aot) : Ps. cxiii. (cxiv.) 1 Aq. ; Polyb. 24, 9, 5 ; Strab.
8 p. 833 ; [Philo, confus. Ungg. § 3 ; al.] ; but different-
ly in 1 Co. xiv. 21, viz. one who speaks what is utterly
strange and unintelligible to others unless interpreted ;
see what is said about ' speaking with tongues ' under
γλώσσα, 2.*
ϊτ6ροει8ασ-καλ(ω, -ώ; (errpos and θιδίίσκαλοΓ, cf. κακό•
hihaaKu^fiv, Clem, liora. 2 Cor. 10, 5) ; to tcarh other or
different doctrine i. e. deviating from the truth : 1 Tim.
L 3 ; vi. 3. (Ignat. ad Polyc. 3, and al. eccl. writ.) *
ίτερο-ζνγί'ω, -ώ; (ίτίρόζυγος yoked with a different
yoke; used in Lev. xix. 19 of the union of beasts of
different kinds, e. g. an ox and an ass), to come under
an unequal or different yoke (Beza, impari j'ugo copidor),
to be unequalh/ yoked : τιυ'ι (on the dat. see W. § 31, 10
N.4 ; B. § 133, 8), trop. to hare fellowship with one who is
not an equal: 2 Co. vi. 14, where the apostle is forbid-
ding Christians to have intercourse with idolaters.•
<T£pos, -ipa, -tpov, the other; another, other; [fr. Horn.
on] ; Sept. chiefly for ιπκ. It refers 1. to η u ni ben
as opp. to some former pers. or thing ; a. without the
article, other : joined to a noun (which noun denotes some
number or class within which others are distinguished
from the one), Mt. xii. 45 and Lk. xi. 26, ΐπτα trtpa
πν(ΰματα, i. 6. from the number of the ττν(ϋματα or ilcinong
seven others, to be distinguished from the one already
mentioned ; add, Mk. xvi. 1 2 ; Lk. vi. 6 ; ix. 56, etc. ; .In.
xix. 37; Actsii. 40; iv. 12,etc. ; Ro. vii. 3; viii. 39; xiii. 9;
cTfpni γ(ν(αί, other than the present, i. e. past generations,
Eph. iii. 5 ; as in class. Grk. aK\os, so sometimes also
€T(pos is elegantly joined to a noun that is in apposition:
twice so in Lk., viz. erepoi δύο κακούργοι two others, Λνΐιο
were malefactors [Bttm. differently § 150, 3], Lk. xxiii.
32; ίτίρουί (β^ομηκοντα equiv. to ίτίρουι μαθητάς, uinves
ήσαν (β8. Lk. χ. 1 ; reliqua pricala atdijicia for 'the rest
of the buildings, which were private ' Caes. b. g. 1, 5 ; cf.
Bornemann, Scholia ad Luc. p. 147 s(i.; W. 530 (493);
[Joseph, c. Ap. 1,1•"), 3 and Miiller's note], simply, with-
out a noun, i. (j. (ΐλλοί tis another, Lk. Lx. 59 ; xxii. 58;
Acts i. 20 ; Ro. vii. 4 ; hipoi πολλοί, Mt. xv. 30 ; Lk. viii.
3; Acts XV. 35 ; oiSev trepov, Acts xvii. 21 ; erepa, other
matters. Acts xix. 39 RGT; πολλά καΐ erepa, many
other things also [hardly " also," see καΐ, I. 3 ; cf. remark
s. V. πολίί, d. a. fin.], Lk. iii. 18 ; erepos with gen. of jiers.
Gal. i. 19; τα (τίρων (opp. to τα e'auToC), Phil. ii. 4; eV.
with tIs added. Acts viii. 34 ; ncut. 1 Tim. i. 10; [iv
ΐτίρΐύ, introducing a quotation, Ikb. v. C, cf. AVin. 592
(551) — but in Acts xiii. 35 supply ψαλρώ]. in partitive
formulas : άλλοι . . . «repot fie', lleb. xi. 36 cf. Acts ii. 13 ;
ό πρωτοΫ . . . fTtpos, Lk. xiv. 19 sq. ; xvi. 7; ό Bfiirepos
. . . erepof , Lk. xix. 20 (where L Τ Tr WH 6 trepot) ;
Tivfs . . . eVepot de, Lk. xi. 16 ; ω μ€ν . . . άλλω de . . .
ίτίρω 8e ... άλλω hi, 1 Co. xii. 9 sq. ; oi pex . . . άλλοι [ L oi j
6e . . . «repot bi, ]\lt. xvi. 14. b. with the article, the
other (of two) : oi (repot, the others, the other Jiarty, Mt.
xi. 16 TTrAA'Il (see e'raipoi). distinctively: eit or 6
ets .. .6 eVepof, Mt. vi. 24; Lk. vii. 41 ; xvi. 13; xvii.
34 sq. ; xviii. 10; .xxiii. 40; το trtpov ttKo'lov, Lk. v. 7;
rfi 8e ίτίρα sc. ήμίρα, the next day, the d.ay after. Acts
XX. 15 ; x.wii. 3, (Xen. Cyr. 4, 6, 10, [al.]). ό erepor, the
other, when the relation of conduct to others is under
consideration is often put by way of example for any
other person whatever, and stands for 'the other affected
by the action in question ' [and may be trans, thy neigh-
bor, thy fellow, etc.] : Ro. ii. 1 ; xiii. 8 ; 1 Co. vi. 1 ; x. 24,
29; xiv. 17; Gal. vi. 4; [Jas. iv. 12 RG]; plur. oi, ai,
τα erepot, -at, -a, the others i. e. the rest, Lk. iv. 43. It re-
fers 2. to quality; another i. e. one not nf the same
nature, form, class, kind; different, (so in Grk. writ. fr.
Horn, down) : Ro. vii. 23 ; 1 Co. xiv. 21 ; xv. 40; 2 Co.
xi. 4; Gal. i. 6; Heb. vii. 11,13,15; Jas. ii. 25 ; Jude 7.
[S'i'N. see πλλοΓ.]
ί'τί'ρωϊ, adv., otherwise, differently : Phil. iii. 15. [From
Ilom. (apparently) down.] *
eTi, a<iv., as yet, yet, still; 1. of time; a. of a
thing which went on formerly, whereas now a differ-
ent state of things exists or has begun to exist : added
ετοιμάζω
255
ΐΤΟζ
to a ptcp., Mt. xxvii. 63 ; Lk. xxiv. 6, 44 ; Acts ix. 1 ;
xviii. 18; 2 Th. ii. 5; with gen. absol. : en {8e) αυτού
\aKoivToi, Mt. xii. 46 ; xvii. δ ; xxvi. 47 ; Mk. .xiv. 43 ;
Lk. viii. 49; xxii. 47; add, Lk. ix. 42 ; xxiv. 41; Jn. xx.
1 ; Acts x. 44 ; Ro. v. 8 ; Ileb. Lx. 8 ; witli a finite verb,
Heb. vii. 10; transposed so as to stand at the beginning
of a sentence : en γαρ Χριστοί όντων ημών άσθ. ■ • ■ άπί-
θαν€, Ro. ν. 6; cf. W. § 61, 5 ρ. όο3 (515); [Β. 389
(333)] ; with another notation of time, so that it may be
trans, βυεη (cf. Lat. jani) : ert « κοιλίας μητρόί, Lk. i. 15
(cT-t in βρ^φίος, Anthol. 9, 507, 1 ; en άπ άρχης, Plut.
consol. ad Apoll. 6 p. 104 d.). b. of a thing which
continues at present, even now : Mk. viii. 1 7 R G ; Lk.
xiv. 22; Gal. i. 10; 1 Co. xv. 17; with νΐιν added, 1 Co.
iii. 2 [L WH br. ϊτι\ ; further, longer, (where it is
thought strange that, when one thing has estabUshed
itself, another has not been aUered or aboUshed, but is
still adhered to or continues) : Ro. iii. 7 ; vi. 2 ; ix. 1 9 ;
Gal. V. 11. o. with negatives: οϋ . . . crt, ούκ «Vi, no
longer, no more, Lk. xvi. 2 ; xx. 36 ; xxi. 1,4; xxii. 3 ;
Iva μη ίτι lest longer, that . . . no more. Rev. xx. 3 ; oi μη
€Τί, Rev. iii. 12; xviii. 21-23 ; oiSeis, μηδιίί, -δί/χία, -8ev
tTi, nobody, nothing more, Mt. v. 13 ; Heb. x. 2, (see μηκίτι,
ovKcTi). 2. of degree and increase; with the
comparative, even, yet: Phil. i. 9; Ileb. vii. 15, (W.
240 (225)). of what remains, [yet] : Jn. iv. 35 ; vii. 33 ;
xii. 35 ; xiii. 33 ; Mt. xix. 20 ; Mk. xii. 6 ; Lk. xviii. 22 ;
of Avhat is added, henides, more, further : in άπαξ, Heb.
xii. 26 sq. ; cri ίνα η δύο, Mt. xviii. 16 ; add, Mt. .xxvi. 65 ;
Heb. xi. 32; ert δί yea moreover, and further, (hat. prae-
terea vera), Heb. xi. 36 (Xen. mem. 1, 2, 1 ; Diod. 1,
74 ; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. vi. 4) ; iVt Se καΐ {but or) yea
moreover also (Lat. praelerea vera etiam), Lk. xiv. 26 R
G Τ L mrg. ; Acts ii. 26 ; i'n rt και and moreover too (Lat.
insuperque adeo), Lk. xiv. 26 L txt. Tr WH ; Acts xxi.
28, [cf. B. § 149, 8 ; W. 578 (537) note].
ετοιμάζω ; fut. ετοιμάσω ; 1 aor. ητοίμασα ; ])f. ητοίμακα
(Mt. xxii. 4 L Τ TrWH) ; Pass., pf. ήτοίμασμαι; 1 aor.
ήτοίμάσθην; ((τοιμος) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. very often
for 1J13 and !'^Π ; to make ready, prepare : absol. to
make the necessary preparations, get everything ready, Lk.
xii. 47 ; of preparing a feast, Lk. xxii. 9, 12, (Gen. xliii.
15 ; 1 Chr. xii. 39) ; w. dat. of pers.,for one : of prepar-
ing a lodging, Lk. ix. 52 [W. 594 (552) ; B. § 130, 5] ;
a supper, Mk. .xiv. 15 ; also w. a telic inf. added, Mt. xxvi.
17; foil, by ΐνα [cf. B. 237 (205)], Mk. xiv. 12; w.
ace. of the thing : a ήτοίμασαί the things which thou hast
prepared (as a store), Lk. xii. 20 ; [τί δαπνήσω, Lk. xvii.
'8] ; TO άριστον, Mt. xxii. 4 ; to ττάσχα, Mt. xxvi. 19 ; Mk.
xiv. 16 ; Lk. x.xii. 8, 13 ; αρώματα, Lk. xxiii. 56 ; xxiv. 1 ;
τόποκ τινί, .In. xiv. 2 sq. ; ξινίαν, Philem. 22 ; [^σνμβοίΚιον,
Mk. xv. 1 Τ WH mrg., cf. συμβ-^ ; την ό&ον κυρίου (by a
fig. drawn from the oriental custom of sending on before
kings on their journeys persons to level the roads and
make them passable), to prepare the minds of men to
give the Messiah a fit reception and secure his blessings:
Mt. iii. 3 ; Mk. i. 3 ; Lk. iii. 4, (fr. Is. xl. 3) ; i. 76 ; [tva ίτοι-
νασθί] η όδοί των βασιΚίων, Rev. xvi. 12] ; w. acc. of pers.,
στρατιάτας. Acts xxiii. 23 ; t(w τίνα, one for one, Lk. i.
17; iavTOv, Rev. xix. 7; foil, by iva [cf. B. 237 (205)],
Rev. viii. 6 ; ψ-οιμασμΐνη ώί νύμφη, i. e. beautifully
adorned. Rev. xxi. 2 ; ήτοιμασμ. e'U τι, prepared i. e. fit
for accomplishing any thing, 2 Tim. ii. 21 ; Rev. ix. 7;
prepared i. e. kept in readiness, els την ωραν κ. ήμίραν
etc., for the hour and day sc. predetermined, Rev. ix. 15.
In a peculiar sense God is said ίτοιμάσαι τι for men, i. e.
to have caused good or ill to befall them, almost i. q. to
have ordained ; of blessings : ri, Lk. ii. 31 ; Rev. xii. 6 ;
Tivl T(, Mt. XX. 23 ; xxv. 34 ; Mk. x. 40; [1 Co. ii. 9];
Heb. xi. 16 ; of punishment : τινί τι, Mt. .xxv. 41.
[COMP. : πpo-eτoιμάζω■^ *
(τοιμΟΛτία, -as, η, {ίτοιμάζω, cf. θαυμάσια, eiKaola, ep-
yaaia) ; 1. tJie act of preparing : ttjs τροφής, Sap. xiii.
1 2 ; των κλιναρίων, Artem. oneir. 2, 5 7. 2. i. q. tVoi-
μότηs, the condition of a pers. or thing so far forth as jire-
pared, preparedness, readiness : Hipp. p. 24 [i. 74 ed.
KUhn] ; Joseph, antt. 10, 1, 2; readiness of mind (Germ.
BereitwiUigkeit), ttjs KapSlas, Ps. ix. 38 (x. 17) : ev ίτοι-
μασία τοϋ eiayyeXiou, with the promptitude and alacrity
which the gospel produces, Eph. vi. 15.*
ί'τοιμοϊ (on the accent cf. [Chandler § 394] ; W. 52
(51)), -ij (2 Co. ix. 5 ; 1 Pet. i. 5), -ov, and -os, -ov (Mt.
xxv. 10 [cf. WH. App. p. 157• ; W. § 11, 1 ; B. 25 (22)]) ;
fr. Hom. down ; prepared, ready ; a. of things : Mt.
xxii. 4, 8, [(Lk. xiv. 1 7)] ; Mk. xiv. 15 [L br. £τ.] ; 2 Co.
ix. 5 ; ready to hand : τα ίτοιμα, the things (made) ready
(in advance by others), i. e. the Christian churches al-
ready founded by them, 2 Co. x. 10; i. q. opportune,
seasonable, 6 Kaipos, Jn. vii. ; σωτηρία ίτοίμη άποκαΧυ-
φθήναι, on the point of being revealed, 1 Pet. i. 5. b. of
persons ; ready, prepared : to do something, Acts .xxiii.
21 ; to receive one coming, Mt. xxiv. 44 ; xxv. 10; Lk.
xii. 40 ; προς τι, for (the doing of) a thing. Tit. iii. 1 ;
1 Pet. iii. 15; foil, by the inf. [cf. B. 200 (224)], Lk.
x.xii. 33; by τοϋ with inf., Acts xxiii. 15 [B. § 140, 15;
W. § 44, 4 a.] ; ev ίτοίμω ίχω, to be in readiness, foil, by
the inf. (Philo, leg. ad' Gai. § 34 sub fin.) : 2 Co. x. 6
[cf. W. 332 (311)]. (For JIJJ, E.\. -xLx. 11, 15 ; Josh,
viii. 4, etc.) *
€τοίμω5, adv., [fr. Thuc. on], readily ; ί'τοι'/χωϊ ίχω to
be ready : foil, by inf.. Acts xxi. 13 ; 2 Co. xii. 14 ; 1
Pet. iv. 5 [(not WH)]. (Sept. Dan. iii. 15; Diod. 16,
28; Joseph, antt. 12, 4, 2; 13, 1, 1.) •
tTOs, -ουί, [gen. plur. ίτών, cf. B. 14 (13)], τό, [fr.
Hom. down], llebr. T\iO, a year; Lk. iii. 1 ; Acts vii.
30 ; Heb. i. 12; 2 Pet. iii. 8 ; Rev. xx. 3, etc. ; ίπ; ΐχιιν,
to have passed years, Jn. viii. 57; with ev aaSeveia
added, Jn. v. 5 [cf. W. § 32, 6] ; eivai, ylveaBai, yeyovi-
vai ίτών, e. g. δώδβκα, to be twelve years old [cf. Eng. (a
boy) of twelve years'] : Mk. v. 42; Lk. ii. 42; iii. 23 [cf.
AV. 349 (328)] ; viii. 42 ; Acts iv. 22 ; yfyoTOla IKarrov
ίτώκ ίξήκοντα. less than sixty years old, 1 Tim. v. 9 [W.
590 (549)]; dat. plur., of the space of time within which
a thing is done [W. § 31, 9 a.; B. § 133, 26], Jn. ii. 20;
Acts xiii. 20 ; acc, in answer to the quest, hoio long f :
Mt. ix. 20 ; Mk. v. 25 ; Lk. ii. 36 ; xiii. 7 sq. 11. 16 ; χτ.
cS
256
evayye\iζtό
29; Acts vu. 6, 36, 42; Heb. iii. 10 (9), 17 ; Rev. xx. 2,
4, 6. preceded by a i)rep. : άπα, from . . . on, since, Lk.
viii. 43 ; Uo. xv. 23 ; in the same sense cV, Acts ix. 33 ;
xxiv. 10 [A. V. of many years'] ; διό with gen years
having intervened, i. e. afler [see διύ, 11. 2] : Acts xxiv.
17; Gal. ii. 1 ; fit, fir . . . years, Lk. xii. 19; tVi with
arc. (see «πί, C. II. 1 ]). 235' hot.), fir (the space of),
Acts .\i.\. 10; μ(τά with ace, afler, (iai. i. 18; iii. 17;
wpa with gen., before [Kng. ago ; cf. πρύ, b.], 2 Co. .\ii. 2;
κατ (Tos, yearly, Lie. ii. 41. [Syn. cf. eviavros]
ti, adv., (prop, to, the unused neut. of the adj. tis in
Horn.), ivell: fi πράσσω, not as many interp. take it,
contrary to ordinary Grk. usage, to do well i. e. act
riijlilly (wliich in (ireek is expressed by opdas or καΚω!
πράσσω), but to lie well off, fare icell, jirosper, Acts xv.
29 [R. V. ii shall he well with you'] (Xcn. mem. 1, G, 8;
2,4,6; 4, 2, 26; oec. 11,8; .Joseph, antt. 12,4, 1; 5<TTtr
κά\ω! TrpuTTfi, οΰχ\ και eS πράττα; Plat. Ale. i. p. 116 b.;
«' fi ττράττηνσι ά&ικοϋντα, I'rot. p. 333 d. ; Λ Ttf (ΐλλοΓ d
μίν ίποίησΐν vpas (υ ττράττων, Iveni. 469, 14; and some
began tlieir letters with (v πράτταν, cf. 2 Mace. ix. 19;
Diog. Laert. 3, 61 and Menagius (Menage) in loc. In
one passage alone, Xen. mem. 3, 9, 14, the drift of the
discussion permits Socrates to deviate from common
usage by attaching to the phrase the notion of right con-
duct, acting well ; [yet this sense occurs in eccles. Grk.,
see e. g. Justin M. apol. 1, 28 and Otto's note; cf. L.
and S. s. v. πράσσω, IV•]) ; Ίνα €u σοι γίνηται that it
may be well, things may turn out well, ivith thee, Eph.
vi. 3 (Gen. xii. 13; [Kx. xx. 12]; Deut. iv. 40; [v. 16];
Orat. Az. [i. e. Song of the Three Children] vs. 6) ; eS
irotf I» τιι/α, to do one good, jMk. xiv. 7 [here Τ om. the
ace; LTrWII read dat.], (Judith x. 16; Bar. vi. (i. e.
Ep. Jer.) 37 (38) ; Sir. xiv. 1 1 ; Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 30). In
commendations, f! (SoOXe ayade), well.' well done! Mt.
XXV. 21, 23; Lk. xix. 17 RG; Xen. venat. 6, 20; see
fV•'
Εία [WII Εύα (see their Introd. § 408) ; Rec. Eva, so
<; Tr in 1 Tim. ii. 13, where R" Εία], -at [B. 17 (15)],
it (n;n, explained Gen. iii. 20), Eve, the wife of Adam :
2 Co.'xi. 3; 1 Tim. ii. 13.•
(ναγγελίζω: 1 aor. (ΙηγγίΚισα (Rev. χ. 7; xiv. 6; 1 S.
xxxi. 9; 2 S. xviii. 19; W. 71 (69); [B. 35 (30)]); Pass.,
pres. (ϋαγγιλίζομαι ; pf. ptcp. (νηγγιλισμίνοι (Heb. iv.
2); I aor. eίηγy€\^σθηv■, Mid., pres. euayycXifofiat; impf.
tiηγy(\ιζ,^,μηv (.\cts viii. 25 L Τ Tr WH) ; 1 aor. fir/yyt-
λισάμην; (fudyyfXor bringing good news); Sept. for
■^^3; to bring good news, to announce glad tidings; Vulg.
evangelizo [etc.] ; used in the O. T. of any kind of good
news : 1 S. xxxi. 9 ; 2 S. i. 20 ; 1 Chr. x. 9 ; of the joyful
tidings of God's kindnesses, Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 10; το σω-
τήριου θίοϋ, Ps. xcv. (xcvi.) 2; in particular, of the
Messianic blessings: Is. xl. 9; Iii. 7; Ix. 6; Ixi. l,etc.;
in the N. T. used esp. of the glad tidings of the coming
kingdom of God, and of the salvation to be obtained in
it through Christ, and of what relates to this salvation.
I. In the Active (rare in Grk. auth. also, in fact found
only in later Grk., as Polyaen. 5, 7 ; ενηγγιλίκη αντψ.
Dio Case. 61, 13 ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 268 ; [W. 24]) :
w. dat. of the pers. to whom the news is brought. Rev.
X. 7 Rec. ; w. ace. of the pers. to whom the announce-
ment is made, ibid. G L Τ Tr WH ; Rev. xiv. 6 Κ ( ! ; by a
construction not found elsewhere, «Vi τίνα (cf. (Jerm. die
Botschaf a η einen bringen), ibid. (J L Τ Tr WH. II.
Passive [cf. W. 229 (215); B. 188 (163)]; of persons,
glad tidings are brought to one, one has glad tidings pro-
claimed to him : Mt. xi. 5 ; Lk. vii. 22 ; Heb. iv. 2, 6 ; of
things, to be proclaimed : (ναγγ(\ίζ(ται ή βασιλίία τοϋ
θ(ον, the glad tidings are published of the kingdom of
God close at hand, Lk. xvi. 16 ; τό (ϋαγγίΧιον, the joyful
announcement of man's salvation is delivered, (ial. i. 11
[B. 148 (129 S([.)] ; to ρήμ:ι το (ίαγγιλισθίν (Is ipas, the
word of good tidings brought unto you (sec n's, A. I. 5
b. [cf. W. 213 (200)]), 1 Pet. i. 25 ; impers. (ίηγγιλίσθη
ηνί, the good news of salvation was declared, 1 I'et. iv.
6. III. as deponent Middle (in Grk. writ. fr.
Arstph. eqq. 643 down), to proclaim glad tidings; spec.
to in.'itruct (men) concerning the things that pertain to
Christian salvation : simply, Lk. ix. 6 ; xx. 1 ; Acts xiv.
7; Ro. XV. 20; 1 Co. i. 17; ix. 16, 18; τίνι λόγω fii/yye-
λισάμην ΙμΊν ei κατ()^(Τ(, if ye hold fast in your niiiids
with what word (i. e. with what interpretation; for he
contrasts his own view of Christian salvation with his
opponents' doctrine of the resurrection) I preached to
you the glad tidings of salvation, 1 Co. xv. 2. w. dat.
of pers. (as com. in Grk. writ.), to any one; Lk. iv. 18
fr. Is. l.\i. 1 ; spec, to bring to one the good tidings con-
cerning Jesus as the Messiah: Gal. i. 8; iv. 13; Ro. i.
15 ; eiayy. w. ace. of the thing : univ., τήν π'ιστιν τινός,
to bring good tidings of the faith in which one excels,
1 Th. iii. 6 ; of Messianic blessings : (Ιρήνην, Acts x. 36 ;
Ro. X. 15 [R G Tr rarg. br.] (fr. Is. Hi. 7) ; την βοσιλίίαν
τ. θ(οϋ, Lk. viii. 1 ; τα ntp\ τηΐ βασ. τ. θ(οΐι, Acts viii. 12
(where GLTTrAVH om. τά; cf. Joseph, antt. 15, 7, 2
ό μζν . , . Τ7) yvvaiKi π(ρ\ τούτων (υηγγίλίζίτο) ; την πίστιν,
the necessity of having faith in Christ, Gal. i. 23. τί
Tm[B. 150 (131)], Lk. i. 19; ii. 10; Acts xvii. 18[TTr
WH om. dat.] ; Eph. ii. 17; tiki t. βασ. τοϋ θ(οϋ, Lk. iv.
43 ; (vayy. Ίησοΰν τον Χριστόκ or (so L Τ Tr A\ II) τον
Χριστον Ίησοϋν, to proclaim the glad news of Jesus the
Christ, Acts v. 42, and (which comes to the same thing)
τον Kvpiov Ίι;σοΰΐ', Acts xi. 20 ; τον νΐϋν τοΐι θΐον ev τοΙς
ϊθν(σι, among the Gentiles, Gal. i. 16; τον Ίτ;σ•οϋΐ' τινι,
Acts viii. 35 ; with και την άνάστασίν τινι added. Acts
xvii. 18 (where TTr WHom. αίτοΊς) ; τον Xo'yov, to an-
nounce the glad tidings of the Messiah, or of the king-
dom of God, or of eternal salvation offered through
Christ, Acts viii. 4 ; τοι» Xoyov τοϋ κυρίου. Acts xv. 35 ;
TO fuayye'Xtov, 1 Co. XV. 1 ; w. dat. of the pers. added to
whom it is preached, 2 Co. xi. 7 ; -ov πλοίτον [το πλον-
Tos] τοϋ Χριστού f'v Tois ίθν^σι, among the Gentiles [but
L Τ Tr WH om. iv], Eph. iii. 8. By a constr. unknown
to the earlier Grks. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 268), with
ace. of the pers. to whom the announcement is made
[W. 223 (209)]: Lk. iii. 18; Acts xvi. 10; Gal. i. 9
(where it is interchanged with <ϋαγγ. nw vs. 8) ; I Pet.
tvayyeXiov
25T
ευγει/ι;?
L 12, (Justin Μ. apol. 1, 33) ; τινά η, ace. of the thing
(Alciphr. epp. 3, 12; Ileliod. 2. 10; Euseb. h. e. 3, 4 ;
fcf. W. 227 (213); B. IJO (131)J), foil, by £n etc. Acts
xiii. 32; τινά foil, by inf. Acts xiv. 15; rat κώμα!, ras
iroXeir, Acts viii. 25, 40; xiv. 21; [«'r τά vTiepeKfiva,
! Co. x. 16 (cf. W. 213 (200), and II. above). CoMP. :
£ρο•ΐναγγ€\ίζομαί•^ *
ίύαγγελιον, -ου, τό, (euayyfXoff [cf. €ναγγ€λίζω^), Ilebr.
rfilU'B and nityS ; 1. (i reward /or ijoud t'ldingx (cf.
τά ^ώασκάΚια, the fees given the hιhάσκaKoί), Horn. Od.
14, 152; Cic. ad Att. 2, 3 and 12; 13, 40; Pint. Demetr.
17; Ages. 33; Sept. 2 S. iv. 10. 2. ijoml tidhiijs:
Lcian. asin. 26; App. b. civ. 4, 20; Plut.: al. ; plur.
Sept. 2 S. xviii. 22, 25, com. txt.; but in eaih place euay-
γίλι'α should apparently be restored, on account of vs. 20
άνήρ (ΰαγγίλίας. In the N. T. spec. a. llie i/lad lidinys
II f the L-irif/dom of Got! soon to he set up, and subsequently
also of Jesus, the Messiah, the founder of this kingdom:
Mk. i. 15; viii. 35; x. 29; xiii. 10; .\iv. 9; xvi. 15; Mt.
xxvi. 13 ; w. a gen. of the obj. added : t^s βασιλίίαϊ, Mt.
iv. 23; L\. 35; xxiv. 14; Mk. i. 14 R L br. After the
death of Christ the term to ewiyyiXiov comprises also
the preaching of (concerning) .lesus Christ as having
suffered death on the cross to procure eternal salvation
for men in the kingdom of ( Jod. but as restored to life
and exalted to the ri'jht hanil of God in heaven, thence
to return in majesty to consummate the kingdom of God ;
so that it may be more briefly defined as tlie glad tidings
of sali'alion tlirough Christ; the proclamation of the grace
of God manifested and pledged in Christ; the gospel
[A-S. god-spell (see Skeat, Etym. Diet. s. v.)] : Acts
XV. 7 ; Ro. i. 16 G L Τ Tr Wll ;" x. 16 ; xi. 28 ; 1 Co. iv.
15 ; ix. 14, IS [G L Τ Tr WH], 23 ; xv. 1 ; 2 Co. viii. 18 ;
Gah ii. 2 ; Eph. iii. 6 ; vi. 1 9 [L WH br. evay.'] ; Phil. i. 5,
7, 12, 17 (16) ; [ii. 22, cf. ds, B. Π. 2 d.] ; iv. 3, [15, cf.
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 2]; 1 Th. ii. 4; 2 Tim. i. 8, 10; w.
gen. of the obj., the gospel concerning etc. : τοΟ Χριστού
[cf. W. 186 (175) sq.], Ro. i. 16 Rec. ; .xv. Ill, 29 Rec. ;
1 Co. i.x. 12, 18 [Rec] ; 2 Co. ii. 12; ix. 13 ; x. 14 ; Gal.
i. 7 ; Phil. i. 2 7 ; 1 Th. iii. 2 ; τοϋ κυρίου ημών Ίησ. Χρ.
2 Th. i. 8 [TTr WII om. Lbr. Χριστού]; τοϋ υ'ιοϋ τοΰ
θ(οϋ, Ro. i. 9 cf. Mk. i. 1 : t^s σωτηρίαί- ίμών, Eph. i. 13;
της €ίρηνης, Eph. vi. 1.'); της χάριτος τοΰ θίοϋ. Acts XX.
24; της &όξης τοΰ μακαρίου θαιν. 1 Tim. i. 11 : της 8όξης
τοΰ \ριστοϋ, 2 Co. iv. 4. ή άληθΐΐα τοΰ e^ayyeXiou. the
truth contained in the sospel [cf. W. 236 (221 sq.)].
Gal. ii. 5, 14; Col. i. 5; ή ΐλπΊς τοΰ eiayy. the hope which
the gospel awakens and strengthens, Col. i. 23 ; ή πίστις
τοΰ (ΰαγγ. the faith given the gospel, Phil. i. 27; oi
beapol τ. fiayy. (see 8(σμής. fin.), Philem. 13; cTtpov
eiayy. of another sort, i. e. different from the true doc-
trine concerning Christian salvation. Gal. i. G; 2 Co. xi.
4 ; αίώνιον eiayy. the contents of which were decreed by
God from eternity. Rev. xiv. 6. with gen. of the au-
thor ; and that a. of the author of the subject-matter
or facts on which the glad tidings of man's salvation
rest, and who wished these glad tidings to be conveyed
to men: τό tlayy. τοΰ θ(οΰ, Ro. χ v. 16:2 Co. xi. 7; 1 Th.
ii. 2, 8 sq. ; 1 Pet. iv. 17; more fuUy τοΰ β(οΰ wepi f oO
uioC αντοΰ, Ro. i. 1-3. β. of the author of the partic-
ular mode in which the subject-matter of the gospel is
understood (conception of the gospel) and taught to
others; thus Paul calls his exposition of the gospel (and
that of the teachers who agree with him), in opposition
to that of those teaching differently, το eiayy ήμωι ;
2 Co. iv. 3, [cf. TO ei. το eiayyeXioSev νπ (μοΟ. Gal. i.
11] ; κατά TO eiayy. μου, as I expound it, Ro. ii. 16 ; xvi.
25 ; 2 Tim. ii. 8. γ. of him who preaches the gospel :
ήμων, 1 Th. i. 5 ; 2 Th. ii. 14. with gen. of those to
ivhora it is announced : ttjs πeριτoμηs (i. e. τώκ ^τeρtτeτμη-
μίνων), to be preached to the circumcised or Jews; and
Tu ei. της άκρυβυστίας, to be carried to the Gentiles, Gal.
ii. 7. b. .\.s the Messianic rank of Jesus was proved
by his words, his deeds, and his death, the narrative of
the sai/ings, deeds, and death of Jesus Christ came to be
called eiayyeXtov: so perhaps in Mk. i. 1 ; for the pas-
sage may also mean, 'glad tidings concerning Jesus
Christ began to be proclaimed even as it is written,' viz.
by John the Baptist ; cf. De Wette ad loc. At length
the name was given to a w r i 1 1 e η narrative of the glad
tidings ; so in the titles of the (iospels, on which see
κατά, II. 3 c. a. [On the eccl. senses of the word, see
Soph. Lex. s. v.] *
ίΐαγ7€λι<ΓΓή5, -ου, ό, (eiayγe\ίζω) , a bilil. and eccl. word,
ο hrlnger of good tidings, an erangelisl (Vulg. erangelis-
ta). This name is given in the N. T. to those heralds of
salvation through Christ who are not apostles : Acts xxi.
8 ; Eph. iv. 1 1 ; 2 Tim. iv. 5. [B. D. s. v. EvangeUst.] *
eΰaρe<rτeω, -ω : 1 aor. inf. eiapeirrrivai ; pf. inf. eiηpe-
στηκύαι. and without augm. eiapearriK. Ileb. xi. 5 L WH
[cf. 117/. App. p. 162; B. 35 (30)]; to be well-pleasing :
τω θ(ώ (Sept. for D'Tl'^Sri-j-iN ^''ΠΠΠ, Gen. v. 22, 24 ;
vi. 9),'Heb. xi. 5 sq. (Sir.' xliv. 16 ;' Philo de Abr. § 6 ;
de exsecr. § 9 : τινί, Diod. 14, 4). Pass. pres. eiape-
στοΰμαι; Tti-i [B. 188 (163); AV. § 39, 1 a.], to be well
pleased icith a thing: Heb. xiii. 16 (Diod. 3, 55; 20, 79;
Diog. Laert. 10, 137).*
ί«-άρί(ΓΤ05, -OK, (fr. eS and apeirrot). well-pleasing, ac-
ceptable : Ro. xii. 2 ; τινί, to one, Ro. xii. 1 ; xiv. 18 ; 2 Co.
V. 9; Eph. V. 10; Phil.iv.18; ii/Tm. in anything. Tit. ii.
9 ; ev κνρίω (see iv I. 6 b., p. 21 1' mid.). Col. iii. 20 ( R om.
iv) ; evumiov with gen. of pers., in one's judgment : Heb.
xiii. 21. (Sap. iv. 10; L\. 10; Clem. Al. [strnm. 2, 19 p.
4S1, 21 etc. ; Just. M. apol. 1, 44 sub fin.; Clem. Rom. 1
Cor. 49, 5].) .See the foil, word.*
tu-apt'o-ru)s, adv., in a manner well-pleasing lo one, ac-
ceptuhhj: τω 6ea, Heb. xii. 28. (Xen. mem. 3, 5, 5;
gladly, willingly, Epict. diss. 1, 12, 21 ; frag. 11.)*
Έίίβουλο$, -ου, ό, [lit. of good counsel], Eubulus, a
Christian : 2 Tim. iv. 21.*
ίΰ-γί, used in commendation, >rcll done .' Lk. xix. 1 7 L Τ
Tr WII. (Arstph., Plat., al. ; Sept. for ΠΚΠ.) Cf. eS. fin.'
«νγίνήϊ, -eV, (fr. eS and ytvos) ; 1. well-born, of noble
race: Lk. xix. 12 (of a prince) ; iCo. i. 26. 2. noble-
minded: compar. eiyevearepos. Acts xvii. 11. (Sect.;
often in Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. andTragg. down.)*
■tiBia
258
■ΰθύν
ciSCa, -as, η, (fr. «iSiot, -ov, and this fr. fiJ and Z<it,
gen. Διόί, Zeus, the ruler of the air and sky), a serene
skij, J\iir weather: Mt. xvi. 2 ['1' br. WH reject the
passage]. (Sir. iii. \b ; Pind., Aeschvl., Hippocr., Xen.,
and si|q.) •
ιϋ-8οκ<'ω, -ώ ; impf. 1 pers. phir. ίνΒοκονμιν ( 1 Th. ii. S
[where WII after eod. Vat. ηίδοκ. ; \V.and Β. as below]) ;
1 aor. (ίδύκησα and (in Ilcb. .\. (i, 8, L Τ Tr; 1 Co. .\. 5
LTrWII ; Ko. .xv. 26, 27 and 1 Th. iii. 1 TTr AVII ; Mt.
xii. 1 8 Τ Tr ; Mt. iii. 1 7 Τ ; Col. i. 1 9 L mrg.) ηί86κησα,
cf. Λ»//, ad Phryn. p. 45G and 140; W. 71 (CD); [B.
34 (.Ί0); r<//. I'rolec,'. p. 120; WII. App. p. 102]; (fr.
tl and δοκί'ω, cf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 370, who treats
of the word fully and with his usual learning [cf. W.
101 (9•>)]) ; Sej)!. mostly for ΠΧΤ ; among Grk. Λvrit.
used esp. by Polyb., Diod., and Dion. Hal.; 1. as in
prof, auth., foil, by an inQn., ii seems good ίο one, is one's
(jood pleasure ; to think it good, choose, determine, decide :
Lk. xii. 32; 1 Co. i. 21 ; Gal. i. 15; once foil, by ace. w.
inf., Col.i. 19[cf. Rp.Lghtft.; W. § «4, 3 b.; B. § 129, 16];
with the included idea of kindness accompanying the de-
cision, Ilo. XV. 2(j sip ; to do icillinijlij what is signified by
the inf., to be rcadi/ to, 1 Th. ii. 8 ; to prefer, choose rather,
[A. V. we thought it good], 1 Th. iii. 1; Sir. xxv. 16;
more fully μαΚλον ευδοκώ, 2 Co. v. 8. 2. by a usage
peculiar to bibl. writ., foil, by en tiw, to be well pleased
rvith, take pleasure in, a pers. or thing [cf. W. 38, 232
(218); B. 185 (160)]: Mt. iii. 17; xii. 18 Tr ; xvii.
5; Mk. i. 11; Lk. iii. 22, [on the tense in the preceding
pass.cf. W. 278 (261); B. 198 (171)]; 1 Co. x. 5 ; 2 Co.
xii. 10; 2Th. ii. t2RGLbr. ; Ileb. x.38, (3 ]•3Π, 2 S.
xxii. 20 ; Mai. ii. 1 7 ; 3 ΠΧ^, Ps. cxlix. 4). foil, by fts
Tiva (i.e. when directing the mind, turning the thoughts,
unto), to be fiicorabty inclined towards one [cf. W. § 31,
5; B. § 133, 23]: Mt. xii. 18 RG; 2 Pet. i. 17; w. sim-
ple ace. of pers. to be favorable to, take pleasure in [cf.
W. 222 (209)] : Mt. xii. 18 L Τ WH; with ace. of the
thing : Heb. x. 6, 8, (Ps. 1. (Ii.) 18, 21 ; Ixxxiv. (Ixxxv.) 2;
Gen. xxxiii. 10; Lev. xxvi. 34,41); as in Grk. writ,
also, w. the dat. of the pers. or thing Λvith which one is
well pleased: 2 Th. ii. 12 Τ Tr WII (see above); 1
Mace. i. 43 ; 1 Esdr. iv. 39. [CoMi•. : συι/-Γυδοκί'ω.] *
cvSoKla, -as, ή, (fr fΰSoκ('ω, as (νλογία fr. (υλογιω),
unknown to prof. auth. [Boeckh, In.scrr. 5960], found in
the O. T. in some of the Pss. (for ρϊ"^) and often in Sir.;
on itcf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 371 sq. ; [esp. Β p. Lghtft.
on Phil. i. 15]; prop, beneplacitum (Vulg. [ed. Clement.]
Eph. i. 9); 1. icill, choice: Mt. xi. 26; Lk. x. 21,
(on both pass, see ίμπροσθιν, 2 b.) ; Sir. i. 27 (24) ;
xx.xvi. 13, etc. ; in particular, {/nod-wi/l, kindly intent, be-
nevolence : Eph. i. 5, 9 ; Phil. ii. 1 3. (Ps. 1. (Ii.) 20 ; Sir. ii.
16 ; xj. 1 7 ( 1 5) etc.) : 8i' (νδοκίαν, prompted by good will,
Phil. i. 15. 2. delight, pleasure, satisfaction : with
gen. of the thing that pleases, 2 Th. i. 11 ; fv άνθράτποκ
fiSoKia, either among men pleasure produced by salvar
tion, or God's pleasure in men, Lk. ii. 14 R G Tr mrg.
WII mrg.; Sv6pwrroi (iSoKias, men in whom God is well
picased [i. e. η ο t a particular class of men (viz. believ-
ers), but the whole race, contemplated as blessed in
Clirist's birth], ibid. LTTr txt. WII txt. [see WH.
Ap]). ad loc. ; Field, Otium Norv. iii. ad loc], (Ps. cxliv.
(cxlv.) 10 ; Sir. ix. 12). 3. desire (for delight in any
absent thing easily In-gets a longing for it) : Ro. x. 1 ;
cf. Philii)|)i and Thohick ad loc.*
c^cp7«ria, -as, ij, (iicpytVijf ) ; a good deed, benefit : 1
Tim. vi. 2 (on which see άι/τ-ιλιιμ^άι/ω, 2) ; with gen.
of the pers. on whom the benefit is conferred [\ν. 185
(174)], Actsiv. 9. (2 Mace. vi. 13; ix. 26 ; Sap. xvi. 11,
24 ; in Grk. auth. fr. Horn, down.) *
(v(py(T((i>, -ώ ; (eiepyίτηs), to do good, bestow benefits :
Acts X. 38. (Sept. ; often in Attic writ.) *
ιύίργί'τηβ, -ου, ό, a benefactor (fr. I'ind. and Ildt.
down); it was :dso a title of honor, conferred on such
as had done their country service, and upon princes;
equiv. to Soter, Pater Patriae : Lk. xxii. 25. (Cf. Hdt.
8, 85; Thuc. 1, 129; Xen. vect 3, 11; HeU. 6, 1, 4;
Plat, de virt. p. 379 b. ; al. ; cf. 2 Mace. iv. 2 ; joined
with σωτημ, Joseph, b. j. 3, 9, 8; Addit. to Esth. vi. 12
[Tdf. viii. 1. 25]; Diod. 11,26.)•
(«-βίτο5. -OV. (fr. ei and θ^τύς), Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl.
and IIip|i()cr. down; \>yo\>. ircll-placed; λ. fit : ut τι,
Lk. ix. 62 II G ; xiv. 35 (34), (Diod. 2, 57 et al.) ; with
dat. of the thing /or which : Lk. ix. 62 L Τ Tr WH (τω
πράγματι, Nicol. Stob. fl. 14, 7 [149,4]). b. useful:
Tivi, Ileb. vi. 7 [some would make the dat. here depend
on the ptcp.] ; (of time, seasonable, Ps. xxxi. (xxxii.) 6 ;
Susan. 15).*
ίίθί'ω;, adv., (fr. (vBis), straightway, immediately, forth-
with : Mt. iv. 20, 22; viii. 3, and often in the histor. bks.,
esp. Mark's Gospel [where, however, Τ Tr WII have
substituted (Ιθν% in some 35 out of 41 cases]; elsewhere
only in (ial. i. IG ; Jas. i. 24 ; Rev. iv. 2, (for 0ΝΠ3, .lob
V. 3). shortly, soon : 3 Jn. 14. [From Sopli. down.]
(ίθυ8ρομ£ω, -ω : 1 aor. (ίθυδρόμησα [see ίίδοκί'ω] ; (fu-
6v8pόμos, i. e. eieis and δρόμos) ; to make a straight course,
run a straight course : foil, by els w. ace. of place. Acts
xvi. 11; (ΰθυδρομήτα! ηλθον ei's. Acts xxi. 1. (Philo,
alleg. legg. iii. § 79 : ile agricult. § 40.) •
«ΰθυμίω, -ώ ; (tC^iiuor) ; 1. trans, to put in good
spirits, (jladden, make cheerful, (Aeschyl. in Plat, de rep.
2, ;i83 b.). Mid. to be of good spirits, to be cheerful, (Xen.,
Plat.). 2. intrans. to be Joyful, be of good cheer, oj
good courage: Acts xxvii. 22, 25; Jas. v. 13. (Eur.
Cycl. 530 ; Plut. de tranquill. anim. 2 and 9.) •
cv -θυμος, -nv, (fS and θυμά^) ; 1. well-disposed, kind,
(Hom.Od. 14,63). 2. of good cheer, of oood courage : kcts
xxvii. 36 ; [compar. as adv. xxiv. 10 Ren. (see fii^i^ws)],
(Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down ; Si Mace. xi. 26).•
£ύθύμω5, adv., [Aeschyl.. Xen., al.], cheerfully: Acts
xxiv. 10 L Τ Tr WII, for Rec. (ίθυμότ(ρον the more con-
fidently.•
(ϊιθννω ; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. phir. ίΰθΰνατί ; (fvuis) ;
a. to make straight, level, plain : την ohuv, Jn. i. 23 (Sir.
ii. fi ; xxxvii. 15). b. to lead or guide straight, to keep
straight, to direct, (often so in Grk. writ.) : δ eieivw, the
steersman, helmsman of a ship, Jas. iii. 4. (Eur. Cycl
evUvi
259
€v\oyiu
15; of a charioteer, Num. xxii. 23; Isocr. p. 9; al.)
[CoMP. : Kar-evdifw.} *
iieis, -(ta, -V, Sept. for Ίψ'^, [fr. Find, down"], slraight;
a. prop, straight, level : of a way, [Mt. iii. 3] ; Mk. i. ."! ;
Lk. iii. 4 ; Acts ix. 1 1 ; (Ις fvOflav ( L Τ Tr WH eis eidfias),
sc. ό&όυ (an elli[)sis com. also in class. Grk. cf. AV. § iJ4,
5), Lk. iii. 5; elSela ohas the straight, the right u-ai/, is fig.
used of true religion as a rule of life leading to its goal
i. e. to salvation, 2 Pet. ii. 15 ; at oSoi κυρίου, the right
and saving purposes of God, Acts xiii. 10 (Song of the
Three vs. 3). b. trop. straightforward, upright, true,
sincere, (as often in prof, auth.) : καρδία. Acts viii. 21
(ei^fts rfi KapSia often in the Pss., as vii. 11; xxxi.
(.\xxii.) 11 ; x.xxv. (.xxxvi.) 11).*
ίνβί?, adv., [fr. Find, down], i. q. (υθΐως, with which it
is often interchanged in the Mss. [see (ΙΘΙως^ ; straight-
wag, immediatebj, forthwith: Mt. iii. 16; xiii. 20; Jn.
xiii. 32, etc. [Cf. Phrvn. ed. Loh. p. 145.]
βϋθύτηϊ, -T)Tof, ή, ( f r. the adj. deus), rectitude, upright-
ness ; trop. paiiSos eiourijTOf, an impartial and righteous
government, Ileb. i. 8 fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 7.*
cvKaipc'ie, -<5 : impf. (υκαίρουν [so L Τ Tr WH in Mk.
vi. 31 ; KG in Acts xvii. 21] and ηυκαίρουν [R G in
Mk. 1. c. ; L Τ Tr WH in Acts 1. c], (betw. which the
Ms.S. vary, see dhoKiw, init.) ; 1 aor. subjunc. (ίκαιρήσω ;
(ei"ftaipos) ; a later word, fr. Polyb. onwards (cf. Luh.
ad Pliryn. p. 125 sq.; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 205;
Soph. Lex. s. v.]) ; to have opportunity : 1 Co. xvi. 12 ; to
have leisure, foil, by an inf., to do something, Mk. vi. 31
[(Plut. ii. p. 223 d. Cleora. Anax. §9)]; to give one's
time to a thing, (It τι. Acts xvii. 21.*
evKoipCa, -as, ή, ((ϋκαιρος), seasonable time, opportunity:
ζητιϊν eiK; foil, by [ΐνα Β. 237 (205)], Mt. xxvi. 16;
[Lk. xxii. 6 Lchm. mrg.] ; by τοϋ with inf. Lk. xxii. C.
(.Sept. : in Grk. writ, first in Plat. Phaedr. p. 272 a.) *
(ύ'-καιροΐ, -ov, ((υ and καιρός), srasonahle, timely, op/ior-
lune : βοήθεια, Heb. iv. lii; ήμίρα ίΰκ. a convenient day,
Mk. vi. 21. (2 Mace. xiv. 29 ; [Fs. ciii. (civ.) 27; Soph.
O. C. 32] ; Theophr., Polyb., al.) *
cvKa(p(i>s, adv., seasonably, opportunely ; ivlien the op-
portunity occurs: Mk. xiv. 11 ; opp. to άκαίρωι (q. v.),
2 Tim. iv. 2. (Xen. Ages. 8, 3 ; Plat, and sqq. ; Sir.
xviii. 22.) *
iv-Koiros, -ov, (fv and Konos), that can be done with
easy labor; easy: Polyb. et al. ; Sir. xxii. 15; 1 Mace,
iii. 18 ; in the N. T. only in the phrase (ϋκηπώτ(ρόν eVn.
— foil, by inf., Mt. ix. 5 ; Mk. ii. 9 ; Lk. v. 23 ; by ace. w.
inf., Mt. xi.x. 24; Mk. x. 25; Lk. xvi. 17; .xviii. 25.•
euXdpcia, -eiaj, η, the character and conduct of one who
is (υλαβήί (q. v.) ; 1. caution, circumspection, dis-
cretion : Soph., Eur., Plat., Dem., sijq. ; Sept. Prov.
xxviii. 14 ; joined w. πρόνοια, Plut. Marcell. 9 ; used of
the prudent delay of Fabius Maximus, Polyb. 3, 105, 8 ;
ή fix. σώζ(ΐ πάντα, Arstph. av. 377; i. q. avoidance,
π'\ηγων. Plat. legg. 7 p. 81 5 a. et al. (in which sense Zeno
the Stoic contrasts ή (1\άβ. caution, as a rUXoyns (κκΧισκ
a reasonable shunning, with ό φάβα, Diog. Laert. 7, 116,
cf. Cic. Tusc. 4, 6, 13). 2. reverence, veneration: η
προ! το θ^ίον fix. Diod. 13, 12; Plut. Camill. 21 ; de ser.
num. vind. c. 4, and elsewh. ; πρία tovs νόμου!, Plut. Ages.
15 ; θ(οϋ, objec. gen., Philo, Cherub. § !) ; simply reverence
towards God, godly fear, piety : lleb. xii. 2H and, in the
opinion of many, also v. 7 [cf. από, II. 2 b. ; see below].
3. fear, anxiety, dread : Sap. xvii. 8 ; for rtjNT , Josh.
xxii. 24 ; Joseph, antt. 11,6,9; Plut. Fab. 1 (the f ί/3ουλι'α
of Fabius seemed to be fiXa^fia) ; so, most probably, in
Ileb. V. 7 (see [above and] άπό, I. 3 d.), for by using
this more select word the ivriter, skilled as he was in the
Greek tongue, speaks more reverently of the Son of
God than if he had used φάβα. [Syn. see SaXia, fin. ;
cf. Trench § xlviii. ; Delitzsch on Ileb. v. 7.] *
ίϋλαβί'ομαν, -ovpat : 1 aor. ptcp. (ϋλαβηθ^ΐ! ; prop, to
show one's self (ίλαβήί, i. e. 1. to act cautiously, cir-
cumspectly, (Tragg., Xen., Plato, and sqq.). 2. to be-
ware, fear: as in 1 JIacc. iii. 30; xii. 40 [Alex, etc.] and
often in prof, auth., foil, by μή lest [B. 241 sq. (208)],
Acts x.xiii. 10 IIG (Deut. ii. 4; 1 S. xviii. 29; Job xiii.
25 ; Jer. v. 22 ; Dan. iv. 2 ; 2 Mace. viii. 16 ; Sir. .xii. 3).
3. to reverence, stand in awe of, (τον θ(όν. Plat. legg. 9
p. 879 e. ; Sept. Prov. ii. 8; xxiv. 28 (.x.xx. 5) ; Nah. i.
7) : God's declaration, Ileb. xi. 7.*
ΐϋλαβή$, -f'r, (fu and \αβ(1ν), in Grk. writ. fr. Plat,
down ; 1. taking hold tcell, i. e. carefully and surely;
cautious. 2. reverencing God, pious, religious, [A. V.
devoull : Acts ii. 5 ; viii. 2, (Mic. vii. 2 [Alex, etc.]) ;
joined with δίκαιο? (as in Flat, polit. p. 311 b.) : Lk. ii.
25; fix. κατά τόι» νόμον, Acts xxii. 12 LT Tr λ\Ή. [Cf.
reff. s. v. fiXd^fia, fin.] *
€ΰλογ€ω,-ώ: fut. f ΰλογ^σω ; irapf. f iXo-youi/ and ϊ^ύλό-^ουΐ'
(Mk. x. 16, where the Mss. fluctuate betw. the two forms
[cf. ]VH. App. p. 162]) ; 1 aor. (υΚόγησα (ηνλόγησα, Mt.
Xiv. 19 LTr; Lk. xxiv. 30 L ; Ileb. xi. 20 and 21 L) ;
pf. fiXoyijKa (ηϋΧόγηκα, Heb. vii. 6 L ; see elSoKeoi init. [cf.
Vcitch s. v.; Tdf. un Lk. I.e.]); Pass., pf. ptcp. fiXoyi;-
μΐνο!; 1 hit. (ΰλογηθήσομαι; (fvXoyoi) ; Sept. very often
for Yf2 and ';]'^3; Vulg. benedico; mostly w. ace. of the
obj., to bless one; 1. as in Grk. writ., to praise, cele-
brate with praises : τον deov, Lk. i. 64 ; ii. 38 ; xxiv.
51, 53 [Tdf. om.] ; Jas. iii. 9; absol. in the giving of
thanks : Mt. xiv. 19 ; .xxvi. 26 [cf. 3 below] ; Mk. vi. 41 ;
viii. 7 R G Τ [?] ; xiv. 22 [cf. 3 below] ; Lk. xxiv. 30 ;
1 Co. xiv. 16. (AVlien used in this sense fiXoyfif differs
from (ΰχαριστύΐ' in referring rather to the for m, fi;^. to
the substance of the thanksgiving.) By a usage
purely bibl. and ecel. like the Hebr. ^Il^^a, 2. to in-
voke blessings : rtra, upon one, Mt. v. 44 Rec. ; Lk. vi. 28 ;
Ro. xii. 14; absol., 1 Co. iv. 12; 1 Pet. iii. 9 ; of one tak-
ing lea^'e, Lk. xxiv. 50 sq. ; of one at the point of death,
Heb. xi. 20 sq. (Gen. xlviii. 9) ; in congratulations, Heb.
vii. 1, 6 sq. (Gen. xiv. 19) ; Mk. x. 16 11 (', L ; Lk. ii. 34 ;
(ίλογημινος (^OS), praised, blessed, [cf. iiXoyiji-os] : Mt.
xxi. 9; xxiii. 39; ^Ik. xi. 9 .sq. ; Lk. xiii. 35; xix. 38; Jn.
xii. 13, (in all which pass, it is an acclamation borrowed
fr. Ps. cxvii. (cwiii.) 26). 3. with ace. of a thing, to
consecrate a thing with solemn prayers; to ask God's bless-
ing on a thing, pray him 'o bless it to one's use, pronounce
ΐνΚο•/ητος
260
αέόω
U rottuccralory blessing on : Ιχθϋια. Mk. viii. 7 L Tr λΛ II ;
rout άμτουί, Lk. ix. 16; το πυτήριον, 1 Co. χ. 16; την
θνσίαν, 1 S. ix. 13; and perh. γο» άριτον, Mt. xxvi. 26;
.Mk. \iv. 22, (but see above under 1); cf. Riiekert, Das
Abindni.ihl, p. 220 *i\. 4. of God, to cause to prosper,
lo initLe li"/>l>!f, lo IjcsIow lilessiii'j.i on, [cf. W. 32] : τινά.
Acts iii. 26; foil, by iv with dat. of the blessing, ev ηάση
flXiiyia. with every kind of blessing, Eph. i. 3 (f\ ayuSols,
Test. .\ii. I'atr. [test. -Jos. § 1.H] p. 722 [tV eiXoyiuLt γης,
iv ημωτογα/ήμασι καμπών, test. Isach. § .') p. 626 sip J) ;
ίϊλι,γών (ΪΧογ'ισω σ( (after the Ilebr., (ien. xxii. 17; see
iiiW, I. 1 a. [for reff.]), I will bestow on thee the greatest
blessings, lleb. vi. 14; Gal. iii. 8 liec. "'■'<■■ (see tWuXo-
yia>), :) ; ίίλογημίν.)! fncoreil of God, lilessetl, Lk. i. 42'
(ef. Deut. xxviii. 4) : iv γυναιξί, blessed among virouien,
i. e. before all other wunien, l.k. i. 2S Η G L Tr txt. br. ;
42", (ef. W. 246 (2:!1) ; [15. K;i (?3)]); (νΚογημϊυυι τοϊι
ηατρόί (i. cp νπό τοΟ πατμός, like tiX. ίπο θ(ον. Is. Ixi. 9;
Ixv. 2:i;cf. \V. ls9 (1 78) and § 30, 4 ; [ef. B. § 132, 23]),
appointed to eternal salvation by my father, Mt. xxv. 34.
[Com I'.: iv-, κατ-ΐνΧογίω.~\*
€νλογητό$, -όν, ((ϋλογίω), Sept. for '^1''3, a bibl. and
eeel. word; blessed, praised, \'^ulg. benediclus: applied
to (!od, Lk. i. 68; Ro. i. 25; ix. 5 [on its position here
cf. W. o.Jl (."jr2s(p); Ps. Ixviii. (Ixvii.) 20; Gen. xxvii.
2:1 ; I'ss. of Sol. 8, 40. 41 ; also 1 K. x. 9; 2 Chr. ix. 8; Job
i. 21 ; Ps. cxii. (cxiii.) 2; Ruth ii. 19; Dan. ii. 20, and esp.
the elaborate discussion of Ro. 1. c. by Professors Dwight
anil Abbot in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. etc. i. pp. 22-.J.5,
87-154 (1882)]; 2 Co. i. 3; xi. 31 ; Eph. i. 3 ; 1 Pet. i.
3 ; cf. B. § 129, 22 Rem. [contra, W. .'586 (545) ; Mey. on
Gal. i. 5]; absol. ό f uXoyijTOr, of God : Mk. xiv. 61. [The
distinction betw. €ν\ογητόί and (ϋΧογημίνοί is thus stated
by Pliilo (ile migr. Abr. § 19, i. 453 Mang.) : iiXoyrjros,
οΰ μόνον (ι\ογημίνηί ' ... TO μίν γαρ τω π^φυκ^ναι. το δί
τω νομίζΐσθαι Χίγίται μόνον ... τω ττ^φυκίναι (vXoyias
άξιον . . . οπ(ρ €ν\ογητ6ν iv To'is χρησμοίς adfTai. Cf.
Gen. .\iv. 19, 20; 1 S. xxv. 32,33; Tub. xi. 16 cod.
Sin. ; contra, Jud. xiii. 18. Έΰλογητός is applied to
men in Gen. xxiv. 31; xxvi. 29; Deut. vii. 14; Judg.
xvii. 2; 1 S. xv. 13; Ruthii. 20; .Tud. and Tob. u. s. etc.
See Prof. Abbot's careful exposition u. s. p. 152 sq.] *
(νλογία, -at, ij, (f iXoyos) ; Sept. for Πρ";3 ; Vulg. bene-
dictio; as in class. Grk. 1. praise, laudation, pane-
f/yric: of God or Christ, Rev. v. 12, 13; vii. 12. 2.
/ine f/i.vcour.s'c, polisliitil lanr/uar/e : Plat. rep. 3 p. 400 d. ;
Luc. Lexiph. 1 ; in a Ijail sense, language artfully adapted
to captivate the hearer, Jhir speaiinr/, fine .speeches :
Ro. xvi. 18 (joined with χρηστηΧογία, the latter relating
to the substance, dXoyla to the e.xpression) : plur. in
Aesop, fab. 229 p. 150 ed. Cor. iav aii (ίΧογίας einopjjs,
ίγωγί σου oi κή8ομαι, [but why not gen. sing.?]. By a
usage unknown to native Grks. 3. an invocation of
blessinifs, benediction: Heb. xii. 17; Jas. iii. 10, (Gen.
xxvii. 35 sq. 38. al. ; Sir. iii. 8 ; xxxvii. 24 ; Joseph, antt.
4,8,44): see {ύλογί'ω, 2. 4. consecration: το ποτήριον
τη! (ΰΧογΐαί, the consecrated cup (for that this is the
meaning is evident from the explanatory adjunct €UXo-
γοϋμτν, see iiXoyco) 3 [al. al. ; cf. Mey. ed. Heinrici ad
loe.; W. 189 (W8)]), 1 Co. x. 16. 5. a (concrete)
blessing, benejit, (Deut. xi. 26, etc. ; Sir. vii. 32 ; xxxix.
22, etc.) ; univ. 1 Pet. iii. 9 ; of the blessings of Chris-
tianity, Ro. xv. 29 ; Eph. i. 3 ; ή tiXoyia τοϋ Άβρ. the
salvation (by the Messiah) promised to Abraham, Gal.
iii. 14; of the continual fertility of the soil granted by
(iod, Heb. vi. 7 (Lev. xxv. 21 ; itTos fiXoyiat, Kzek.
.x.\xiv. 26 ; cf. (ΰΧογί'ιν άγρόν, Gen. xxvii. 27) ; of the bless-
ing of a ijollection sent from Christians to their brethren,
2 Co. i,\. 5 (of the gifts of men, (!cn. xxxiii. 1 1 ; Judg. i.
15; 1 S. XXV. 27); tV (iXoyiais. tliat blessings may ac-
crue, bountifullij (opp. to φιώνμ^νως), 2 Co. ix. 6 (see tVi,
B. 2 e. p. 234" top).•
€ύ-μίτό-8οτοϊ, -υν, ((υ and μfτa&Ί&a)μι), ready οτ free to
imparl; lil/eral: 1 Tiin. vi. 18 [A. V. ready lo distribute^.
(.Vntunin. 1, 14; 6, 48.)*
Εύνίκη [R" -νίίκη (see €1, i) ; lit. conquering well], -i;t,
ή, /Cnni'i; the mother of Timothy: 2 Tim. i. 5.'
(ύ-νοΐω,-ώ; {(ϋναος); Ιο irish {una} well; to be wcll-dis-
poscil, of a peaceable s/)iril : τινί, towards any one, Mt.
V. 25. (3 Mace. vii. 1 1 ; Sui)h., Arstph., Xen., Polyb.,
Plut., Hdian.) •
cvvoia, -as, η. (fvvoos), i/ood-irlll, L'indness : 1 Co. vii. 3
Rec. ; μ(τ' (ivoias, Kjjh. vi. 7. [From Aesehyl. down.] *
ίϋνουχίζω : 1 aor. €ΰνοΰχισα ; 1 aor. pass, (ΰνουχίσθην ;
[on the augm. cf. B. 34 (30) ; 117/. .\pp. ]>. 162J ; lo cas-
Irate, nnmnn : pass. ϋπ<! Tinor, Mt. xix. 12"; metajih.
(ϋνουχ. ίηυτόν to make one's self a eunuch, viz. by ab-
staining (like a eunuch) from marriage, Mt..xix. 12ί (.Jo
se])h. antt. 10, 2, 2; Lcian., Dio Cass., al.) "
(vvoSxos, -ου, ό, (fr. (Ινή a bed, and ϊχω), Sept. 0"")0 ;
fr. Ildt. down; prop, α bed-keeper, bed-yuard, superin-
tendent of the bedchamber, chamberlain, in the palace of
oriental monarchs who support numerous wives ; the
superintendent of the tcotnen's apartment or harem, :in
office held by eunuchs ; hence a. an emasculated
man, a eunuch: Mt. xLx. 12''. But eunuchs in ori-
ental courts held other offices of greater or less impor-
tance, like the oversight of the treasur}•, held by the
Ethiopian eunuch mentioned in Acts viii. 27, 34, 36, 38
sq. ; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 973; [B. D. s. v. Eunuch].
b. one naturally incapacitated — either for marriage, Mt.
xix. 12*; or for begetting children, Sap. iii. 14, cf. Grimm.,
exft. Ildb. ad loc. c. one who voluntarily abstains
from marriage : Mt. xix. 12'. ΛΛχ/ίίΊ•, De viliis lexx.
N. T. etc. p. 485 sqq. treats of the word more fully.*
ΕνοΒία [(lit. prosperous journey), -ωθι'α R" (lit. fra-
grant)], -as, ή, Euodio, a Christian woman [transformed
by A. V. into a man, Euodias']: Phil. iv. 2 [see Bp.
Lghtf. ad loc.].•
Λ<Ι66α, -ω : [Pass., pres. (ΰοδοϋμαι ; fut. (νυ8ωθήσομαι;
1 aor. subj. (ϋο8ωθή, 1 Co. xvi. 2 AVH mrg. who regard
the fioSirai of the text here as perf. (either ind. or
subj.) see their App. p. 172] ; (fCoSor) ; Sept. principally
for nSy and ΓτΗϊΠ ; to grant a prosperous and expedi-
tious Journey, to lead by a direct and easy way : Gen.
xxiv. 48 ; much more freq. tropically, to grant a success•
einrapeBpo^
261
€υρισκω
ful issue, to cause to prosper : τί, as την όδάν τικ)ϊ, Gen.
xxiv. 21, 40 ; Is. Iv. 11, etc. ; τα epya Tivof, Sap. xi. 1 ; in
the Pass, always trop. lo prosper, be successful ; of per-
sons, Josh. i. 8 ; Prov. x.wiii. 13 ; 2 Chr. xiii. 12 ; xviii.
11, etc.; 3 Jn. 2; (ΐπως (νοΒωθήσυμαι (Κθ^Ιν if haply I
shall he so fortunate as to come, Ko. i. 10; of things : 2
Esdr. V. 8 ; Tob. iv. 19 ; 1 Mace. iii. 6, etc. ; τω KXfo-
uiVel (Ιω^ώθη το πρηγμα, Iltlt. G, 73 ; ο, τι αν «υοδώται
[see above, init.] whatever (business) has prosiiered,
i. e. (contextually) its gains, 1 Co. xvi. 2.*
«ΰ-πάρ-(δρο$, -ov, (fi, and vaptSpos [sitting beside]),
sitting constant!;/ by ; assiduous : προς το dnapeSpov τω
κυρίω, that ye may be constantly devoted to the Lord
and liis cause, 1 Co. vii. 36, for Rec. (ίηρόσιΒρον, which
does not differ in sense, [A.V. attend upon^. (Hesych.
finapf&pov καλώ! παράμεναν.) *
€ΰ-ΐΓ6ΐβή5, -e's, (fJ, and πείθομαι to comply with, obey),
easily obeying, compliant, [A. V. easy to be intrealed^ :
Jas. iii. 17. (Aeschyl., Xen., Plat., and sqi].) *
iv-irep£-o-raTos, -ov, (fr. tS and πιριΐστημι), skilfully
surrounding i. e. besetting, sc. to prevent or retard run-
ning: Ileb. .xii. 1 [some passively (cf. Isocr. 135 e.),
well or much admired (cf. R. V. mrg.)]. (Not found
ehsewhere.) *
eu-iroi£a [-τΓΟίία WH (cf. I, «, fin.)], -as, ή, (fOTTOiof), a
doing good, beneficence: Heb. xiii. IC ; Arr. exp. Alex.
7, 28, 8 ; Alciphr. 1, 10 ; Lcian. imag. 21 ; a benefit,
kindness, Joseph, antt. 2, 11, 2; (plur. ib. 19, 9, 1).*
€ΰ-τΓορί'ω, and (esp. in later Grk.) mid. ^υ-πορίομαί,
-οϋμαι : impf. 3 pers. sing, ηνπορίΐτο (R G) and (ίπορ. (L
Ϊ Tr WH ; for reff. see eiSoKew, init.) ; {(ϋπορος well
off) ; to be well off] have means: Acts xi. 29 [A. V. ace.
to his ability']. (Lev. xxv. 26, 28, 49 ; often in the
classics.) •
cv<ropCa, -as, ή, {(ϋπορος, see the preced. word), riches,
meunx, wealth : Acts xix. 25. (Xen., Plat., al. ; in diff.
senses in diff. auth.) •
eu-n-peweia, -ας, ή, ((ϋπριττης well-looking), goodly ap-
pearance, shapeliness, beauty, comeliness : τού προσώπου,
Jas. i. η . (Thuc, Plat., Aeschin., Polyb., Plut. ; Sept.) •
€ύ--ιτρώσ•-δ€κτο5, -ov, {d and προσ^ϊχομαι), well-received,
accepted, accepitable: Ro. .xv. IG; 2 Co. vi. 2; viii. 12;
Ttvl, Ro. XV. 31 ; 1 Pet. ii. 5. (Plut. praecept. rei publ.
ger. c. 4, 17 p. 801 c. ; eccl. writ.)*
€U.irpo<r-t8pos, -ov, (eu, and πρόσ(8ρος [sitting near]),
see iimapihpoi.
€ΰ-•ΐΓροσ•ω'ΐΓ€ω, -ώ : 1 aor. inf. evn ροσωπησΌΐ ; (^^ν-πρόσωπος
fair of face, of good appearance) ; to make a fair show,
to please [a weak trans. (?) ; yet A''ulg. placerel : iv
σαρκΐ, in things pertaining to the flesh. Gal. vi. 12.
(Elsewh. only in Chrysost. hom. ad Eph. xxii. § 5, Opp.
xi. 1 73 c. ed. Montf. [var.] and several times in Byzant.
writ. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].) *
(ϋρ-ακνλων, -ωνος, ό, (fr. eipos and Lat. aqnilo, like
ίυρόνοτης, and euroauster [B. IG (15)]), A'^ulg. euroaquiln;
the Eurnquilo, a jV. E. wind : Acts xxvii. 14 L Τ Tr
WH, for Rec. (Ιροκ\'8ων (Grsb. ιυμνκΧ.) <|. v. (Xot
found elsewhere.) [B. Χϊ ?. v. Enrnclydon.] *
cvpCo-Ku ; impf. (νρισκον (Ilk. xiv. 55 [R G T] ; Lk.
xLx. 48 [R G i ] ; Acts vii. 11 [exc. Tr WH]) and more
rarely >;ΰρισκον (cf. Kijhner § 343, i. 825 sq. [esp. Λ'eitch
s. V. fin.] and i-eff. under ei/SoKiai) ; fut. tύpήσω■, pf. (ϋρηκα;
1 aor. (υρησα (which aor., unknown to the earlier Grks.,
occurs in Aesop, f. 131 [f. 41 ed. Furia, p. 333 ed. Cor.] ;
Maneth. 5, 137 and in Byzant. writ. ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 721; W. 8G (82) ; [cf. B. 36 (31)]), Rev. xviii. 14
Rec. ; 2 aor. evpov, 1 pers. plur. in Alex, form [ WH. App.
p. 164; B. 39 (34) ; W. § 13, 1 (56βάπ(ρχομαι)](ϋραμ(ν,
Lk. xxiii. 2 Τ Tr WH, 3 pers. plur. dpav, Lk. viii. 35
Tr WH ; Acts v. 10 Tr (in Sept. often eupotrav) ; Pass.,
pres. (ύρίσκομαι ; impf. 3 pers. sing, ινρίσκιτο, Heb. xi.
5 RG, ηί,ρίσκίτο LT Tr WH, (cf. Bleek and DeUtzsch
ad loc. [Veitch u. s.]) ; 1 a.OT. (νρίθην, hit. (νρ(θήσομαι;
2 aor. mid. (ίρόμην and later (ϋράμην (Ileb. ix. 12, [cf.
reff. above (on 2 aor. act.)]) ; Sept. numberless times for
SXD, sometimes for ΤΌΤ\ to attain to, and for Chald.
n^E? ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to find ; i. e.
1. \>τογ. to come upon, hit upon, to meet with; a. after
searching, to find a thing sought : absol., opp. to ζητ^Ιν, Mt.
vii. 7 sq. ; Lk. xi. 9 sq. (fijTfi και (ΰρήσίΐς, Epict. diss. 4, 1,
51) ; Tim, Mt. ii. 8 ; Mk. i. 37 ; Lk. ii. 45 ; Acts xi. 2G
(2.j) ; xiii. 22; 2 Co. ii. 13 (12) ; 2 Tim. i. 17; Rev. xx.
15, etc. ; οίχ^ (ύρίσκιτο, lie had vanished, Heb. xi. 5 ; with a
specification of place added : πίμαν w. gen. .in. vi. 25 ; eV
w. dat. Acts V. 22 ; (ίρ^θη fir, Acts viii. 40 (see eis, C. 2) ;
w. ace. of the thing, Mt. vii. 14 ; xiii. 46 ; xviii. 13 ;
Lk. xxiv. 3; Jn. x. 9; Acts vii. 11; Ro. vii. 18 Rec,
etc. ; foil, by indir. disc, Lk. v. 1 9 ; οΐχ (ίρίθησαν, had
disappeared. Rev. xvi. 20, cf. .xviii. 21 ; v/. dat. of ad-
vantage. Rev. XX. 11 ; foil, by ev w. dat. of place, Mt.
.xxi. 19; Rev. xii. 8. τικά or τί ζητίϊν κ οΐχ (ίρίσκιιν:
Mt. xii. 43 ; x.xvi. CO ; Mk. xiv. 55 ; Lk. xi. 24 ; xiii. G sij.;
Jn. vii. 34 ; Rev. ix. 6, (2 K. ii. 17; Xeh. vii. G4 ; Ps. ix.
36 [x. 15]; Eccl. vii. 29; Ezek. xxii. 30; xxvi. 21 Aid.
Comp. ; Hos. ii. 7) ; γη καϊ τα ev αντγι fpya ίνρΐ6ί]σίται
.■ihall be found sc. for destruction, i. e. will be unable to
hide themselves from the doom decreed them by God,
2 Pet. iii. 10 Tr WII, after the strange but improbable
reading of codd. ΪΈ and other authorities ; [see 1Γ//.
Intr. § 365 and App. ad loc]. b. without previous
search, to find (by chance), to fall in with : τινά, Mt.
.xviii. 28; .xxvii. 32 ; Jn.i. 41 (42), 45 (46); v. 14; ix. 35;
Acts xiii. 6 ; xviii. 2 ; xix. 1 ; xxviii. 14 ; foil, by eV w.
dat. of place, Jn. ii. 14. τί, Mt. xiii. 44 ; xvii. 27 ; Lk.
iv. 17 ; Jn. xii. 14 ; Acts xvii. 23 ; foil, by ev w. dat. of
place, Mt. viii. 10; Lk. vii. 9. c. (ύρίσκω Tti /ά or τι
with a prcd. ace. is used of those >vho come or return to
a place, the predicate ptcp. or adj. describing the state
or condition in which the pers. or thing met with is
found, or the action which one is found engaged in :
Λν. an adj.. Acts v. 10; 2 Co. ix. 4; xii. 20: Λν. a
ptcp. [cf. B. 301 (258)], Mt. xii. 44; xx. 6; xxi. 2:
.xxiv. 46 ; xxvi. 40, 43 ; Mk. xi. 2 ; xiii. 36 ; xiv. 37, 40 ;
Lk. ii. 12; vii. 10; viii. 35 ; xi.25; xii. 37, 43; xix. 30;
xxiii. 2: xxiv. 2, 33; Acts v. 23; ix. 2; x. 27; xxi. 2;
xxiv. 12. IS: xxvii. 6: foil, bv κ:ιθύ,ς. Mk. xiv. Ifi: I.k.
ίύροκλ.ύ8α}ν
262
ευσχτιμοσνιηι
xix. 32 ; xxii. 13 ; foil, by a pred. substantive to which
Sirra must be supplied, Acts xxiv. 5 [cf. W. § 45, 6 b. ; B.
304(201)]. 2. \.TO\)U:\\\\\, Ιοβ'κΙ hi/ inquiry, llioughl,
exarninalion, scrutini/, observation, hearing ; lo Jind out
by practice anil experience, i. e. to see, learn, discover, un-
derstand : κατηγιψίαν, Lk. vi. 7 [T Tr t.\t. AVII κατηγο-
ρίίκ]; τινά full, by ptep. in the predicate, Acts .\.xiii. -J'J ;
by ort, Ilo. vii. 21 ; after an examination (πίφάζα,ν), τινά
[τι] w. a i)red. adj. [ptep.]. Rev. iii. 2 ; of a judye : ιΰτιαν
ϋανάτην. Acts .\iii. 28 ; αΐτίαν, κακόν, αδίκημα ΐν τινι, Jn.
.wiii. 38; .xix. 4, 6 ; Acts xxiii. 9 ; xxiv. 20; after a com-
putation, w. an ace. of tlie price or measure, Acts xix.
19 ; xxvii. 28 ; after ileliln'ralion, το τ/ ποιήσωσι, Lk. xix.
48; TO πώς κοΧάσωνται αυτούς. Acts iv. 21. lass, (vpi-
σκομαι to lie found, i.e. to he seen, be present: Lk. ix. 36
((ien. xviii. 31); often like the Ilebr. KSOJ ίο be dis-
covered, recognized, detected, to show one's self out, of
one's character or state as found out by others (men,
God, or both), (cf. W. §65, 8) : ίίρίβη f'v yaaTfA ίχονσα,
Mt. i. 18 ; 'tva ίνρΐθώσι καθώς κ• ήμ^ΐς, 2 Co. .\i. 12; cv-
pt3q μηι ή evTuXtj f if θάνατον so. οίσα, the commandment,
as I found by experience, brouglit death to me, Ro. vii.
10; add, Lk. xvii. 18 (none sliowed themselves as hav-
ing returned) ; Acts V. 39; 1 Co. iv. 2; xv. 15; 2 Co. v.
3 ; (jal. ii. Π ; 1 Pet. i. 7 ; Rev. v. 4 ; τινί, dat. of the
pers. taking cognizance and judging [W. §31,10; B.
187 (162)], 2 Pet. iii. 14, [add 2 Co. xii. 20, yet cf. B.
1. c. and § 133, 14 ; W. § 31, 4 a.] ; ίνα (Ιριθω ϊναΐτω i. e.
iv Χριστώ, sc. ων, Phil. iii. 9 ; σχί]ματι (νρίθΛς i>s άνθρω-
πος, Phil. ii. 7 (8), (Joseph, b. j. 3, 6, 1 ; so the Lat.
inrenior, Cic. de amic. 19, 70; reperior, Tuscul. i. 39, 94).
(νρίσκΐΐν θ(6ν (opp. to ζψ^Ι-ν αυτόν, see ζητΐω, 1 c. [cf.
€κζητ€ω, a.]), to get l-noiclidgr of, come to know, God, Acts
.xvii. 27 ; (ύμίσκίταί (6 θ(ός) τινι, discloses the knowledge
of himself to one. Sap. i. 2 ; cf. Grimm, exgt. Ildb. ad
loc. [who refers to Philo, monarch, i. § 5 ; Orig. c. Cels.
7, 42]. On the other hand, in the O. T. (ίρίσκίται 6
θίός is used of God hearing prayer, granting aid im-
plored, (1 Chr. xxviii. 9 ; 2 Chr. xv. 2, 4, 15 ; Jer. xxxvi.
(xxix.) 13); hence ιύρίθην [L and Tr in br. WII mrg.
add ex] To'itf'pe μη ζητοϋσι, Ro. X. 20 fr. Is. l.w. 1, means,
ace. to Paul's conception, / granted the knowledge and
deliverance of the gospel. 3. Mid., as in Grk. writ.,
to find for one's self, to acquire, get, obtain, procure :
λύτρωσιν, Ileb. i.x. 12; contrary to better Grk. usage,
the Act. is often used in the Scriptures in the same sense
[cf.B. 193(167); W. 18; 33 (32) n.] : την yjrvxfiv, Mt. x.
39; xvi. 25; άνάπαυσιν (Sir. xi. 19) rah ψνχαΐς υμών,
Mt. xi. 29 ; μιτανοίας τόπον, place for recalling the de-
cision, changing the mind, (of his father), Ileb. xii. 17
[cf. \V. 147 (139)]; σκήνωμα τω θ(ω. opportunity of
building a house for God, Acts vii. 46 ; dp χάριν, grace,
favor, Ileb. iv. 16; χάριν πάρα τω θ(ώ. Lk. i. 30 ; ίνώπιον
του θ(οϋ, Acts vii. 46 ; ί\(ος παρίι κυρίου, 2 Tim. i. 18;
(\ri*,3 ;Π KVD, Gen. vi. 8; xviii. 3; x.\.x. 27; xxxii. 6;
Ex. xxxiii. 12; Deut. xxiv. 1, etc.; 1 Esdr. viii. 4).
[CoMP. ; άν-{υρίσκω.]
«νρο-κλίδων, -ωνος. ό, (fr. fupos the S. E. wind, and
κ\ΰδων a wave), a S, E. leind raising mighty waves : Acts
xxvii. 14 Rec. But respectable authorities read eipt-
κλίδων, ])referred by Griesbach et al., from (ίρΰς broad,
and κλίδων, a tcind causing broad waves (Germ, der
BreilspUlintle, the Wide-washer); Etyni. Magn. p. 772,
30 s. v. τνφών "τυψώΐ' yi'tp ίστιν ήτοϋ άνίμυυ σφοδρά πνοή,
ος και (ΰρυκλυδων KoKeiTai." Others (νρακνΧων, (ΐ. ν.•
£ΰρν-χωρθ5, -ον, ((ΰρΰς broad, and χώρα), .'spacious,
broad: Mt. vii. 13. (Sept. ; Aristot. h. anim. 10, 5 [p.
637•, 32]; Died. 19, 84; Joseph, antt. I, 18, 2; [8, 5, 3 ;
c. Ap. 1, 18, 2].)•
fv-a-iPfia, -ας, ή, ((ύσ(βής), reverence, respect; in the
Bible e\ery wliere piety towards God, godliness : Acts iii.
1 2 ; 1 Tim. ii. 2 ; iv. 7, 8 ; vi. 5 Sip 1 1 ; 2 Tim. iii. 5 ; 2
Pet. i. 3, 6 sq. ; ή κατ (νσίβ(ΐαν διδασκαλία, the doctrine
that promotes godliness, 1 Tim. \ i. ;j [see κατά, II. 3 d.];
ή ύλήθιια ή κατ (ΰσίβ(ΐαν, the truth that leads to godli-
ness, 'lit. i. 1 ; TO μυστήριον της ίϋσ(β(ίας, the mystery
which is held by godliness and nomishes it, 1 Tim. iii.
16 ; in plur., aims and acts of godliness, 2 Pet. iii. 1 1 ; cf.
Pfleiderer, Paulinism. p. 477 sq. [Eng. trans, ii. 209 .sq.].
(Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plat., sqq. ; often in Joseph. ;
Sept. Prov. i. 7; xiii. 11 ; Is. xi. 2; Sap. x. 12; often in
4 Mace; προς τοι/ θ(όν, Joseph, antt. 18, 5, 2; \π(ρι το
ieioi/] c. Αρ. 1, 22, 2 ; fit θ(οΰς κα'ι γονέας, Plat. rep. 10
p. 615 c.) [Cf. Schmidt eh. 181.] •
ίν-σ-ιβίω, -ω; ((ΰσfβήt) ; to be (ίσίβής (pious), to act
piously or reverently (towards God, one's country, magis-
trates, relations, and all to whom dutiful regard or rev-
erence is due) ; in prof. auth. foil, by (ίς, πιρί, προς τίνα ;
rarely also trans., as Aeschyl. Ag. 338 (τους θ(ούς) and
in the Bible : τοι/ Ίδιον οίκον, 1 Tim. v. 4 ; θ€Ον, to wor-
ship God, Acts xvii. 23 ; 4 Mace. v. 24 (23) var. ; xi. 5 ;
[Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 11, 1].*
(νσ-(βή;, -tr, (d and σίβομαι), pious, dutiful (towards
God [A.V. devout, godly^ ; (υσ^βίω) : Acts x. 2, 7; xxii.
12 RG; 2 Pet. ii. 9. "([Theogn.], Pind., Tragg., Ar-
stph.. Plat., al. ; thrice in Sept. for 3'nj noble, gener-
ous, Isa. xxxii. 8 ; for p'^S, Is. xxiv. 16 ; xxvi. 7 ; often
in Sir. and 4 Mace.) [Cf. Trench § xlviii.] *
«io-ipMs, .adv., piously, godly: ζην, 2 Tim. iii. 12; Tit.
ii. 12. (Pind. [-^c'ws], Soph., Xen., Plat., al. ; 4 Mace,
vii. 21 [Fritzsche om.].)*
«ϋο-ημο;, -Of, (el and σήμα a sign), well-marked, clear
and definite, distinct : "Kiyoi, 1 Co. xiv. 9 [A. V. easy to
be understood:]. (Aeschyl., [Soph.], Theophr., Polyb.,
Pint.) *
ίίσττλαγχνοϊ, -ov, (ev and σπλάγχνον, q. v.), prop, hav-
ing strong bowels ; once so in Ilippocr. p. 89 c. [ed. Foes.,
i. 197 ed. Kiihn] ; in bibl. and eccl. lang. compassionate,
tender-hearted: Eph. iv. 32 ; 1 Pet. iii. 8 ; prec. Manass.
7 [(see Sept. ed. Tdf. Proleg. § 29) ; Test. xii. Patr. test.
Z.ib. § 9 : cf. Ilarnack's note on Herra. vis. 1, 2].•
(ΰο-χημίνωϊ, adv., (see (υσχήμων), in a seemly manner,
decently: 1 Co. .\iv. 40; π(ριπατ(ΐν, Ro. xiii. 13; 1 Th.
iv. 12. (Arstph. vesp. 1210; Xen. mem. 3, 12, 4; Cyr.
1,3,8 sq. ; al.) •
ί{σχημ.ο<Γύνη, -ης, ή, ((υσχήμων, q. v.), charm or elegance
ευσχήμων
263
ευχαριστεω
of figure, external beauty, decorum, modesty, seemliness
(Xen., Plat., Polyb., Diod., Plut.) ; of external charm,
comeliness : 1 Co. xii. 23.*
ιΰσχήμων, -ov, (fi, and σχήμα the figure, Lat. habitus) ;
1. of i-lerjanl frpirc, shapely, yraceful, comely, bearing
one's self becomingly in speech or behavior, (Eur., Arstph.,
Xen., Plat.) : τα (υσχημονα ήμων, the comely parts of the
body that need no covering (opp. to τα άσχήμονα ήμων,
vs. 23), 1 Co. xii. 24 ; of morals : iipos τό (ΰσχημον, to
promote decorum, I Co. vii. 35. 2. in later usage (cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 333), of good standing, honorable, in-
fluential, iceallhy, respectable, [β.. Y. of honorable estate^'-
Mk. .XV. 43; Acts xiii. 50; xvii. 12. (Joseph, de vita
sua § 9 ; Plut. parallel. Graec. et Rom. c. 15 p. 309 b.) *
cirovws, adv., (fr. evrovos, and this fr. ev and τίίρω to
stretch [cf. at full stretch, tcetl strung, etc.]), vehemently,
forcibly: Lk. xxiii. 10; Acts xviii. 28. (Josh. vi. 8;
2 Mace. xii. 23; Xen. Hier. 9, 6; Arstph. Plut. 1095;
Died., al.) *
(ντραπ<λ(α, -as, η, (fr. (ϋτράτΓ(\θ!, fr. (S, and τρίπω to
turn ; easily turning; nimble-witted, witty, sharp), pleas-
antry, humor, facetiousness, ([Hippocr.], Plat. rep. 8 p.
563 a.; Diod. 15, 6; 20, 63; Joseph, antt. 12, 4, 3;
Plut., al.) ; in a bad sense, scurrility, ribaldry, low jesting
(in which there is some acuteness) : Eph. v. 4 ; in a mild-
er sense, Arist. eth. 2, 7, 13; \_η ^ντραττΐΧία ττ^παιδ^νμΐνη
νβρκ €στίν, rhet. 2, 12, 16 (cf. Cope in loc.) ; cf. Trench
§ xxxiv. ; Matt. Arnold, Irish Essays etc. p. 187 sqq.
(Speech at Eton) 1882].*
ΕίΙτυχοϊ [i. e. fortunate; on accent cf. W. 51 ; Chan-
dler § 331 sq.], -ov, 6, Eutychus, a young man restored
to life by Paul : Acts xx. 9.*
ίύφημία, -as, ή. (eϋφημos, q. v.), prop, the utterance of
good or auspicious tcords ; hence good report, praise :
2 Co. vi. 8 (opp. to 8υσφημία), as in Diod. 1, 2 [4 ed.
Dind.] ; Ael. v. h. 3, 47. (In difE. senses in other auth.
fr. Pind., Soph., and Plat, down.) *
ίνφημοϊ, -ov, (fS and φήμη), sounding well; uttering
words of good omen, speaking auspiciously : neut. plur.
(ϋφημα, things spoken in a kindly spirit, with good-will
to others, Phil. iv. 8 [A. V. of good report, (R. V. mrg.
gracious)']. (In very diverse senses com. in Grk. writ,
fr. Aeschyl. down.)*
«ν-ψορΕω, -ώ : 1 aor. (υφόρησα (Ixhm. ηϋφόρησα, see
reff. in (ϋδοκίω, init.) ; (cC^opor [bearing well]) ; to be
fertile, bring forth plentifully : Lk. xii. 16. (Joseph, b. j.
2, 21, 2; Hippocr., Geop., al.)*
€ΰψρα(νω ; Pass., pres. ευφραίνομαι', impf. ίνφραινομην
(Acts vii. 41, where a few codd. ηΰφρ. [cf. WH. App.
p. 162]) ; 1 aor. (νφράνθην and L Τ Tr WH ηΰφρ. (Acts
ii. 26 ; see reff. in t ΰδοκί'ω, init.) ; 1 fut. ίϋφρανθήσομαι ;
(fu and φρήν) ; in Sept. very often actively for Π^ϋ to
make joyful, and pass, for Π3Π to be joyfiJ, sometimes
for μ"ΐ to sing; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to glad-
den, make joyful : Τίνα, 2 Co. ii. 2 (opp. to Xmrfiv). Pass.
to be glad, to be merry, to rejoice: absol., Lk. xv. 32;
Acts ii. 26 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9) ; Ro. xv. 10 (fr. Deut.
xxxii. 43) : Gal. iv. 27 (fr. Is. liv. 1) ; Rev. xi. 10 ; xii.
12 ; ei» rtw, to rejoice in, be deUghted with, a thing, Acts
vii. 41 (Xen. Hier. 1, 16); eVt rtvi, Rev. xviii. 20 L Τ
Tr WH (for Rec. eV αΐτήν) ; of the merriment of a feast,
Lk. xii. 19; xv. 23 sq. 29, (Deut. xiv. 25 (26); x.wii. 7);
with \aμ■πp<ύs added, to live sumptuously: Lk. xvi. 19
(Horn. (J<i. 2, 311 ; Xen. Cyr. 8, 7, 12).*
Ευφράτη?, -ου, ό, Euphrates, a large and celebrated
river, which rises in the mountains of Armenia Major,
flows through Assyria, Syria, Mesopotamia and the
city of Babylon, and empties into the Persian Gulf,
(Hebr. IT'i) [i• e. (prob.) ' the great stream ' (Gen. i.
18) ; cf. Fried. Delitzsch, Wo lag d. Par. p. 169]) : Rev.
ix. 14; xvi. 12. [B. D. s. v. and reff. there.]*
ίνφροστϋνη, -ηs, ή, ((ΰφρων [well-minded, cheerful]), fr.
Hom. down ; good cheer, joy, gladness : Acts ii. 28 (Ps.
.XV. (xvi.) 11); xiv. 1 7.»
€ΰχορι<ΓΤ€'ω, -ώ; 1 aor. (νχαρίστ-ηαα (Acts xxvii. 35)
and ηϋχαρίστησα (Ro. i. 21 GLTTrWH; see reff. in
(ύ8οκ(ω, init.) ; 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, (νχαριστηθη
(2 Co. i. 11); ({ίχάριστοί, q. v.); 1. to be grateful,
feel thankful; so in the decree of the Byzantines in Dem.
pro cor. p. 257, 2. 2. to give thanks (so Posid. ap.
Athen. 5 p. 213 e. ; Polyb., Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut.,
Epictet., al.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 18 [W. 23 (22)]):
Tivt, esp. τω βιω, Lk. -xvii. 16; Acts .xxvii. 35; xxviii. 15;
Ro. xiv. 6 ; xvi. 4; 1 Co. xiv. 18 [see below] ; Phil. i. 3;
Col. i. 3, 12; Philem. 4; (w. the ace. [hence as nom.]
in the passive, ίνα . . . ίπίρ των αγαθών ό 5for ίνχαριστή-
ται, Philo, quis rer. div. her. § 36). simply, so that τω
θ(ώ must be added mentally: Ro. i. 21; [1 Co. xiv. 17];
1 Th. V. 18; esp. where the giving of thanks customary
at the beginning of a feast, or in general before eating,
is spoken of: Mt. xv. 36; xxvi. 27; Mk. viii. 6; xiv. 23;
Lk. xxii. 1 7, 19 ; Jn. vi. 11, 23 ; 1 Co. xi. 24 ; ινχαριστίΐν
τω θ€ώ δια Ίτ^σ. Χριστοί, through Christ i. e. by Christ's
help (because both the favors for which thanks are
given and the gratitude which prompts the thanks are
due to Christ [cf. W. 378 (354) note]) : Ro. i. 8 ; vii. 25
R WH mrg.; Col. iii. 17; τω θιω ev όνό^ιατι Χρίστου
(see όνομα, 2 e.), Eph. v. 20. Of that for or on account
of which thanks are given to God, we find — πιρί twos,
gen. of pers., concerning, with regard to one, [1 Th.
i. 2] ; 2 Th. i. 3 [cf. EUic. in loc] ; w. ότι added epe.x-
egetically, Ro. i. 8 (where R G inip); 2 Th. ii. 13; w.
addition of «Vt and dat. of the thing for, on account
of, which, 1 Co. i. 4 ; ίπίρ twos, gen. of pers., Eph. i.
16 ; Intp w. gen. of the thing, /or, on account of, 1 Co.
X. 30 ; Eph. v. 20 ; the matter or ground of the thanks-
giving is expressed by a foil, οτι: Lk. xviii. 11 ; Jn. xi.
41; iCo. i. 14; iTh. ii. 13; Rev. .xi. 17; or is added
asyndetieally without ότι. 1 Co. xiv. 18 (λαλώ L Τ Tr
WH, for which R G "Καλών, the ptcp. declaring the cause
which prompts to thanksgiving [W. 345 sq. (324) ; B.
300 (258)]). Once «ύχαρ. τι, for a thing, in the pass.
2 Co. i. η [cf. B. 148 (130); W. 222 (209)]; « the
Fathers (υχαριστιΊν τι is to consecrate a thing by giving
thanks, to 'bless': ό €vxapiarqee\s SpTos κ. o?i»of, Justin
M. apol. 1, 65 fin.; (Ιχαριστηθύσα τροφή, ibid. c. 66;
ΐυχαριστια
•2(54
"Κφΐσο^
ίίσϊκ οί fixapiaroiai ψιλον ΰδωρ, Clem. ΑΙ. Strom, i. p.
.•Π7 eil. Sylb.; [cf. Suicer, Tliesiiur. i. 12(1!). "The
words (v^afitirros, ίνχαμιστΰν, (ίχαριστία, occur in St.
I'aiil's writiii'^s alone of the :ii)ostolic Epistles " (I5p.
I.^'htft. ; cf. Ellic. on Col. i. I2)J.•
(ΰχαριστία, -as, η. ((ίχύμιστοί. i\. v.) ; 1. Ihankful-
hfss: decree of the Η_νζ:ιηύΜΐ•.•< in I)em. p. 2.')(>, UM
I'olyb. 8, 14, 8; Add. to Esth. vi. 4 ed. Fritz. ; 2 ilacc.
ii. 27; Sir. xxxvii. 11 ; ■πρόί τίνα, Diod. 17, OU; .Joseph,
antt. 3, 3. 2. the (jiciiKj of llianks: Acts xxiv. 3 ; for
(iod's blessings, 1 Co. xiv. 16; 2 Co. iv. 1.ϋ; Eph. v. 4
(cf. 1 Th. V. IS) ; Phil. iv. 6 ; Col. ii. 7 ; iv. 2 ; 1 Th. iii.
9; 1 Tim. iv. 3 Si). ; Rev. iv. 9 ; vii. 12; Λν. dat. of the
pers. to whom thanks are given : τω 6(ω (cf. W. §31,3;
[H. 180 (lot;)]; KUlmcr§424, 1), 2Co. ix. 11 (toC flioO,
Sap. xvi. 28); in phir., 2 Co. ix. 12; 1 Tim. ii. 1.'
€ΰχάρΐ(Γτο5, -ov, (d and χαρίζομαι), iiiinilful offacora,
grulijul, tliauhful: to God, Col. iii. 15 (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3,
49; Plut. ; al.); pleasing, agreeable [cf. Eng. grateful in
its secondary sense] : fu\api(TT0L Xoyoi, pleasant conver-
sation, Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 1 ; ui-replable to others, winning:
yvinj (ϋχάριστος tyfipii avdpl ^o^av, I*rov. xi. 1 (i ; hheral,
lieiiifieint, Diod. IX, 2.S.•
«ΰχή, -ijs, ή, {(ϋχομαι), [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. α pray-
er to Ood : Jas. v. 1.'). 2. a vow (often so in Sept. for
11} and TIJ, also for IIJ consecration, see ά-γνίζω) : (ΰχην
ϊχίΐν, to have taken a vow, Acts .xviii. 18; with ίφ'
ίηυτών added (see ini, A. I. 1 f. p. 232'), Acts xxi. 23.*
(ίίχομαι.; impf. ηνχήμηυ (Ro. ix. 3) and (ΰχόμην (Acts
xxvii. 29 Τ Tr, see (νδοκίω init. [cf. Veitcli s. v.; Tilf.
I'roleg. p. 121]) ; [1 aor. mid. (ίιξάμην Acts xxvi. 29 Tdf.,
where others read the opt. -αίμην, depon. verb, cf. AV.
§ 38, 7]; 1. to prai/ to Gixl (Sept. in this sense for
'7^iJi"in and ^Hi') : τω θ(ώ (as very often in class. Grk.
fr. Horn, down [cf. W. 212 (199); 15. 177 (1."j4)]), foil.
by ace. w. inf.. Acts xxvi. 29 ; προς τον βιάν (Xen. mem.
1, 3, 2; symp. 4, 55 ; often in Sept.), foil, by ace. w. inf.
2 Co. xiii. 7; xnrfp w. gen. of pers., /i;;• one, Jas. v. 16
where L WII txt. Tr mrg. προσ(ί•χ(σθ( (Xen. mem. 2, 2,
10). [Syn. see Ηΐτ-ί'ω, fin.] 2. to wi.ih : τι, 2 Co. xiii.
9 : full, by ace. with inf. 3 Jn. 2, [al. adhere to the re-
ligious sense, to prn>i, prni/ for, in both the preceding
pass.] ; Acts xxvii. 29 ; ηνχόμην (on this u.'ie of the impf.
cf. W. 283 (2;.fi) ; 15. S 139, 1.5 ; [Bp. Lghtft. on Philem.
13]) f'l/Qi, I could wish to be, Ro. ix. 3. [CoMi>. : προσ-
fv\opat.1 *
'""Xi"l''"'"'S, -ov, (eS and χράομαι), easy to make use of
useful: w. dat. of pers. 2 Tim. ii. 21 ; opp. to άχρηστος,
Philem. 11 : tU τι, for a thing, 2 Tim. iv. 11. (Diod. 5,
40 ; Sap. xiii. 13 ; προς τι, Xen. mem. 3, 8, 5.) *
(ΰ\)ηιχ<'ω, -ώ ; ^f!'■■ι|rvχoς) ; Ιο he of good courage, to be of
(I ehnrful spirit: I'liil. ii. 1'). (Joseph, antt. 11, 6, 9;
[Poll. 3, 28 § 13.") fin.]; in epitaphs, €ϋψΰχ(ΐ\ i. cj. Lat.
hare pia nnima .') '
evioSta, -ας, ή, (fr. (ίώ8ης ; and this fr. ιυ and ί^ω, pf.
ίδωία) ; a. astt'sc/.s-meZ/jyTai^traHrc, (Xen., Plat., Pint.,
lldian., al.) ; metaph. Χρίστου {ύωδι'α ϊσμϊν τω β(ω, i. e.
(dropping the fig.) our efficiency in wliii-h the power of
Christ himself is at work is well-pleasing to Cod, 2 Co.
ii. 15. b. a fragrant OT sweet-smelling tiling, incense:
Diod. 1, 84; 1 Esdr. i. 11, etc.; hence ΰσμη (ίω&ίας, an
odor of something sweet-smelling, in Sejjt. often for
ΠΙΠ'ί'Π""^, an odor of acijuiescence, satisfaction; a sweet
odor, spoken of the smell of sacrifices and oblations, Ex.
xxix. 18; Lev. i. 9, 13, 17, etc., agreeably to the ancient
[anthropopalhic] notion that (iod smells and is pleased
with the odor of sacrifices, (ien. viii. 21 ; in the N. T.
by a metaphor borrowed from sacrifices, a thing well-
pleasing to God: Eph. v. 2; Phil. iv. 18, [W. 60.) (562)
cf. 237' (222)].•
[EuwSCa, -aj, Phil. iv. 2 Rec.•' for Εϋοδία, ([. v.]
«ίώνυμοϊ, -ov, {(υ and Άνομα) ; 1. of good name
(lies., Pind.), and of good omen (Plat, polit. p. 302 d. ;
legg. 6 p. 754 e.) ; in the latter sen.se used in taking
auguries; but those omens were euphemistically called
(ϋώννμα which in fact were regarded as unlucky, i. e.^
which came from the lef, sinister omens (for which
a good name was desired) ; hence 2. left (so fr.
Aeschyl. and Ildt. down): Acts xxi. 3; Rev. x. 2; ί'ξ
(Ιωνίμων [cf. W. § 27, 3; § 19 s. v. iefio; B. 89 (78)],
on the left hand (to the left) : Mt. xx. 21, 23; xxv. 33,
41 : xxvii. 38; Mk. x. 37 [RG L], 40; xv. 27.*
ίφ-άλλομαι ; 2 aor. ptc|). (φαλόμινος L Τ Tr WII; (eVi
and Άλημαι, c|. v.) ; fr. Horn, down; to leap upon, spring
upon: eVi τίνα, Acts xix. 16 [here RG pres. ptcp.] ;
(1 S. X. C; xi. 6; xvi. 13).*
ίφ-άτΓοξ [Treg. in Ileb. ϊφ' άπαξ ; cf. Lipsius, gram.
Unters. p. 127], adv., (fr. tVi and άπαξ [cf. W. 422
(393) ; B. 321 (275)]), once; at once i. e. a. our all
al once: 1 Co. xv. C. b. our once for all: Ro. vi. 10;
Ileb. vii. ■27 ; ix. 1 2 ; x. 10. (Lcian., Dio Cas.s., al.) •
£ψ€ΐ&ον, see «Vf ϊδον.
Έφίσ -ivos, -η, -ov Ephesian : Rev. ii. 1 Rec*
■Εφ€σιο5, -α, -ov, (an) Ephesian, i. e. a native or in-
habitant of Ephesus : Acts xix. 28, 34 sq. ; xxi. 29.•
Έφ€<Γ05, -ου. ή. Ephesus, a maritime city of Asia Minor,
capital of Ionia and, under the Romans, of proconsular
Asia [see Ασία], situated on the Icarian Sea between
Smyrna and Miletus. Its chief splendor and renown
came from the temple of Artemis, which was reckoned
one of the wonders of the world. It was binned down
B. c. 356 by Ilerostratus, rebuilt at the connuon expense
of Greece under the supervision of Deinocrates (Pausan.
7, 2, 6sq.; Liv. 1,45; Plin. h. n.5, 29 (31) ; 36,14(21)),
and in the middle of the third century after Christ utterly
destroyed by the. Goths. At E|)hesus the apostle Paul
founded a very flourishing church, to which great praise
is awarded in Rev. ii. 1 sijq. The name of the city oc-
curs in Acts xviii. 19, 21, 24 ; xix. 1, 17, 2(j ; xx. 16 sq.;
1 Co. XV. 32; xvi. 8; Eph. i. 1 (where ίΐ/Έφίσω is omitted
bv cod. .Sin. and other ancient author., [bracketed by Τ
WII Tr mrg. ; see WH. App. ad loc. ; B. D. Am. ed. s. v.
Ephesians, The Ep. to the]) ; 1 Tim. i. 3 ; 2 Tim. i. 18;
iv. 12; Rev. i. 11, and (ace. to G L Τ Tr WII) ii. 1.
Cf. Zimmermann, Ephesus im 1. christl. Jahrh., Jena
1874; [Wjjod, Discoveries at Ephesus (1877)].•
ΐφΐρρετης
265
«χω
ίφ-£υρ£τή9. -οϋ, ό, {ίφενρίσκω to find out), an inventor,
contriver, (Anacr. 41 (36), 3; Schol. ad Arstph. ran.
1499) : κακών, Ro. i. 30 {κακωρ dperai, Philo in Flacc.
§4 mid.; ό καινών αδικημάτων (ύριτής, ibid. § 10; πάση:
κακίαί fipfrijr, 2 JMacc. vii. 31 ; Sejanus facinoruin om-
nium rrperlor. Tacit, ann. 4. 11).*
ίφ-ημ.€ρ£α, -as, ή. (ΐφημίριοί, -ov, \>y day, lasting or act-
ing for a da\-, dail)), a ivurd not found in prof. auth. ;
Sept. in Chron. and Nell. ; 1. a service limited to
a staled series of days (cf. Germ. Taydiensl, Woclien-
dienst) ; so used of tlie service of the priests and Levites :
Neh. xiii. 30; 1 Chr. x.w. 8; 2 Chr. .\iii. 10, etc. 2.
the class or course itself of priests who for a week at a time
performed the duties of the priestly office (Germ. Wbch-
nerzunf) : 1 Chr. .xxiii. 6 ; xxviii. 1 3, etc. ; 1 Esdr. i. 2,
15; so twice in the N. T. : Lk. i. 5, 8. For David di-
vided the priests into twenty-four classes, each of which
in its turn discharged the duties of the office for an en-
tire week from sabbath to sabbath, I Chr. xxiv. 4; 2 Chr.
viii. 14 ; Neh. xii. 24 ; these classes Josephus calls ηατριαί
and ίφημ(ρ18α, antt. 7, 14, 7 ; de vita sua 1 ; Suidas, ϊφψ
μ€ρια • η πατριό• Xeyerai δε καΊ η της ημέρας XeiTovpyia.
Cf. Frilzsche, Com. on 3 Esdr. p. 12. [BB.DD. s. v.
Priests; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, bk. ii. ch. iii.] *
4<|>-ήμ(ρο$, -ην, (i. q. ό eV! ήμ/ραν ων) ; 1. lasting for
a f/ny (Find., Hippocr., Plut., Galen.; al.). 2. daily:
η τροφή (Diod. 3, 32; Dion. Hah 8, 41 ; Aristid. ii. p.
31t8 [ed. Jebb; 537 ed. Dind.]), Jas. ii. 15."
εψιδε, see cne'iSov.
(φ-ικνε'ομαι, -οϋμαι : 2 aor. inf. εφικέσβαι ; [fr. Ilom.
down]; to come to : άχρι w. gen. of pers. 2 Co. x. 13 ; to
reach : Λ τίνα, ibid. 14.*
«φ-ί<Γτημι: 2 aor. έπε'στην, ptcp. (πιστός, impv. (πΐστηθι;
pf. \iie\>. ίφ(στώς\ to place at, place ujion, place over; in
the N. T. only in the mid. [pres. indie. 3 pers. sing.
(πί(τταται (for ΐφίστ.), 1 Th. v. 3 Τ Tr WH; see reff.
s. V. αφ('ώον~\ and the intrans. tenses of the act., viz. pf.
and 2 aor. (see άνίστημι) ; to stand by, be present: Lk. ii.
38; Acts xxii. 20; ΐπόνα> w. gen. of pers. to stand over
one, place one's self above, Lk. iv. 39 ; used esp. of per-
sons coming upon one suddenly : simply, Lk. x. 40 ; xx.
1; Acts vi. 12; xxii. 13; xxiii. 27; of an angel, Acts xii.
7 ; w. dat of pers.. Acts iv. 1 ; xxiii. 1 1 ; of the advent
of angels, Lk. ii. 9 ; xxiv. 4, (of Hephaestus, Lcian. dial,
deor. 17, 1 ; freq. of dreams, as Horn. II. 10, 49fi; 23,
106; Hdt. 1, 34; al.) ; w. dat. of place. Acts xvii. 5;
foil, by eVi with ace. of place. Acts x. 17; xi. 11; of
evils coming upon one : w. dat. of pers., 1 Th. v. 3 [see
above] ; enl τιυα, Lk. xxi. 34 (Sap. vi. 9 ; xix. 1 ; Soph.
O. R. 777; Thuc. 3, 82). i. q. to be at hand i. e. be
ready: 2 Tim. iv. 2, cf. Leo ad loc. (Eur. Andr. 547;
Dem. p. 245, 11). to be at hand i. e. impend: of time, 2
Tim. iv. 6. tn come on, of rain. Acts .xxviii. 2. [CoMP. :
κατ-, σνν-€φίστημι.~\ *
[ίφνίΒιΟϊ, see αΙφνί8ιος.1
'Εφρο(μ or (so R Tr) Έφραίμ [cf. I, I, fin.], (N L Η
Έφρ(μ, Vulg. Ephrem, Efrem), Ephraim, prop, name of
a city situated ace. to Eusebius eight [but ed. Larsow
and Parthey, p. 196, 18, twenty], ace. to Jerome twenty
miles from Jerusalem; ace. to Joseph, b. j. 4, 9, not
far from Bethel ; conjectured by Robinson (Palest, i.
444 sq. [cf. Bib. Sacr. for May 1845, p. 398 sq.]), Ewald
et al. dissenting, to be the same as the village now called
et-Taiyibeh, a short day's journey N. E. of Jerusalem :
Jn. xi. 54. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. ; Keim iii. p. 7 .sq.
[Eng. trans, v. 9: esp. Schi/rer, Gesch. i. 183].'
έφφαβά, ephphatha, Aram. ΠΓΐϊΙΠΚ (the ethpaal impv.
of the verb ΠΠ?) Hebr. ΠΓΙ^, to open), be thou opened
(i. e. receive the power of hearing; the ears of the deaf
and the eyes of the blind beingeonsidered as closed) : ^Ik.
vii. 34. [See Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 10.] *
ί'χθΕϊ and (Rec, so Grsb. in Acts and Heb.) χθϊς (on
which forms cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 323 sq. ; [esp. Ruth-
erford, New Phryn. p. 370 sq.] ; Bleel•, Br. an d. Hebr.
ii. 2 p. 1000; ^Tdf Proleg. p. 81 ; W. pp. 24, 45; B. 72
(63)]), adv., ve.sVerf/(7// : Jn. iv. 52; Acts vii. 28 ; of time
just past, Heb. xiii. 8. [From Soph, down.] •
ί'χθρα, -ας. ή, (fr. the adj. (χθρός), enmity: Lk. xxiii.
12; Eph.ii. 14(15), 16; plnr. Gal. v. 20 ; f^flpa (Lclim.
(χθρά fern. adj. [Vulg. inimical) ^"S, towards God, Jas.
iv. 4 (where Tdf. τω θεώ) ; ei'r Sfav, Ro. viii. 7 ; by meton.
i. q. cause of enrnity, Eph. ii. 14 (15) [but cf. Meyer.
(From Pind. down.)] *
ίχθρίϊ, -ά, -όΐ', (ϊχθος hatred) ; Sept. numberless times
for U'lS also for ii", several times for NJID' and Ν3ϋΟ, a
hater; 1. passively, Λα /erf, odious, hateful (in Horn,
only in tliis sense) : Ro. xi. 28 (opp. to αγαπΎ/τός). 2.
actively, hostile, hating and opposing another : 1 Co. xv.
25 ; 2 Th. iii. 15; w. gen. of the pers. hated or opposed,
Jas. iv. 4 Lchm. ; Gal. iv. 16, cf. Meyer or Wieseler on
the latter pass, used of men as at enmity with God by
their sin: Ro. v. 10 (cf. Ro. viii. 7; Col. i. 21 ; Jas. iv. 4)
[but many take ϊχθρ. here (as in xi. 28, see 1 above) pas-
sively; cf. Meyer]; rfi hiavo'ia, opposing (God) in the
mind, Col. i. 21; ίχθρος άνθρωπος, a man that is hostile,
a certain enemy, Mt. xiii. 28 ; ό έχθρας, the hostile one
(well known to you), i. e. κατ ϊξοχήν the devil, the most
bitter enemy of the divine government : Lk. x. 19, cf.
Mt. xiii. 39 (and ecch writ.). 6 ΐχθρός (and {χθρός) sub-
stantively, enemy [so the word, whether adj. or subst.,
is trans, in A. V., exc. twice (R. V. once) /"of : ίσχατος
(χθρός, 1 Co. .XV. 26] : w. gen. of the pers. to whom one
is hostile, Mt. v. 43 sq. ; x. 36 ; xiii. 25 ; Lk. i. [71], 74 ;
vi. 27, 35; xLx. 27, 43; Ro. xii. 20; Rev. xi. 5, 12; in
the words of Ps. cix. (ex.) 1, quoted in Mt. xxii. 44 ; Mk.
xii. 36 ; Lk. xx. 43 ; Acts ii. 35 ; 1 Co. xv. 25 [L br. ; al.
om. gen. (see above)]; Heb. i. 13; x. 13. w. gen. of
the thing : Acts xiii. 10 ; toC σταυρού τον Χριστοϊι, who
given up to their evil passions evade the obligations
imposed upon them by the death of Christ, Phil. iii. 18.*
«χιδνα, -ης, ή, a viper: Acts xxviii. 3 (Hes., Hdt.,
Tragg., Arstph., Plat., al.) ; γίννήματα (χι5νών offspring
of vipers (anguigenae, Ovid, metam. 3,531), addressed to
cunning, malignant, wicked men : Mt. iii. 7 ; xii. 34 ;
xxiii. 33 ; Lk. iii. 7.*
«χω ; flit, (ξω : inipf. f';(o>», [1 pers. plur. ('χαμ(ν, 2 Jn.
€χ(.
266
^χω
5 Τ Τγ WH], 3 pers. plur. (ΐχαν (Mk. viii. 7 L Τ Tr WH ;
Rev. ix. 8 L Τ Tr WH ; but cf. [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38 ;
T,lf. Proleg. p. 123; IVH. App. p. 1G5]; B. 40 (35))
and ύχοσαν(_\. Τ Tr WII in Jn. xv. •>■>, 2i ; but cf. Btlm.
in 'I'liful. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 Sijq. 491 ; see bis
N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Sojili. Lex., lutr. p. 39; Tdf.
Proleg. p. 124; 117/. App. p. 1U5; cf. δολίόω]) ; pres.
mill. ptcp. (χόμ(>/ο!; to have, — witli 2 aor. act. ίσ)^ον;
pf. (σχηκα ;
I. Transitively. 1. tn have i. q. to hold; a. lo
have (hold) in the hand: τ\ ev rfj χ(ψί, Kev. i. 16 ; vi. 5;
X. 2 ; xvii. 4 ; and simply, Rev. v. 8 ; viii. 3, 6 ; xiv. (I,
etc.; Heb. viii. 3. b. in the sense of wearini/ (Lat.
geslare) ; of garments, arms and the like : το ΐν^υμα, Mt.
iii. 4; xxii. 12; κατά κ(φαλής (χων, sc. τι, having a cov-
ering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head
covered [B. § 130, 5 ; W. § 4 7, k. cf. 594 (552)], 1 Co.
xi. 4 ; θώρακας, Kev. ix. 17; μά^^αίρακ, Jn. xviii. 10; add,
Mt. xxvi. 7 ; Mk. xiv. 3 ; of a tree having (bearing)
leaves, Mk. xi. 13; tV γαστρι (χιιν, sc. ίμβρυον, to be
pregnant [cf. W. 594 (552) ; B. 144 (126)], (.see γαστήρ,
2). ^letaph. ev ΐαντω fXfiv τό απόκριμα, 2 Co. i. 9 ; την
μαρτυρΐαν, 1 Jn. v. 1 ; cv KapSia (χ(ΐν τινά, to have (carry)
one in one's heart, to love one constantly, Phil. i. 7. c.
trop. to hare (hold) possession of the mind ; said of alarm,
agitating emotions, etc. : ^ιχ€ν αντάς τρόμος κ. (κστασις^
Mk. xvi. 8 (Job x.xi. 6 ; Is. xiii. 8, and often in prof,
auth. ; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1294 sq. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. I.
8]). d. to hoid fast, keep : η μνα σου, ην αχον άποκςι-
μίνην iv σον8αρίω, Lk. xi-x. 20 ; trop. τον Beov txfiv eV
ί'πιγί'ώσίΐ. Ho. i. 28 ; to keep in mind, τας ϊντολάς, Jn.
xiv. 21 (see ίντοΧή, sub fin.) ; την μαρτυρΐαν. Rev. vi. 9 ;
xii. 1 7 ; xix. 10 ; το μνστηριον της πίστ€ως iv καθαρά σννίΐ-
δ^σβι, 1 Tim. iii. 9 ; ί/ποτύπωσιν υγιαινόντων λύγων, 2 Tim.
1. 13. e. to have (in itself or as a consequence), com-
prise, involve : ipyov, Jas. i. 4 ; ii. 1 7 ; κόΧασιν, 1 Jn. iv.
18; μισθαποΒοσίαν, Heb. x. 35 (Sap. viii. 16). See exx.
fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. p. 1296 sq. ; [L. and S. s. v.
A. I. 8 and 10]. f. by a Latinism i. q. aestimo, to re-
gard, consider, hold as, [but this sense is still denied by
Aleyer, on Lk. as below ; Mt. xiv. 5] : τινά w. ace. of the
predicate, ίχι μ( ιταρτιτημίνον, have me excused, Lk. xiv.
1 8 ; Ttva ως προφητην, Mt. xiv. 5 ; .\xi. 26, (ίχ€ΐν ^\αννην κ.
Ίαμβρην ώς θ(ονς. Εν. \icod. 5) ; τινά Ιντιμον (see Ιντιμης),
Phil. ίί. 29 ; την ψ•υ;^τ}ΐ' μον [(i οπι. μου] τιμίαν (μαντώ, Acts
XX. 24 R G ; τινά (ΐς προφητην (a llebr.aism [see fir. Β. IL
3 c. γ. fin.]), for a prophet, Mt. xxi. 46 L Τ Tr AVH, cf. B.
§ 131, 7 ; τινά, ότι όντως [Τ Tr WII όντως, ότι etc.] ττρο-
φήτης ην, Mk. xi. 32, cf. Β. § 151, 1 a. ; [λΥ. § 66, 5 a.].
2. to have i. q. <ο ο«Ώ, /josses.f ; a. external things
such as pertain to property, riches, furniture, utensils,
goods, food, etc. : as τον βίον, Lk. xxi. 4 ; 1 Jn. iii. 1 7 ;
κτήματα, Mt. xix. 22 ; Mk. x. 22 : θησαυρόν, Mt. xix. 21; Mk.
X. 21 ; αγαθά, Lk. .xii. 19; πρό3ατα, I-k. xv. 4; Jn. x. 16;
Βραχμάς, Lk. .xv. 8; πλοία, Rev. .xviii. 19; κληρονομίαν,
Eph. V. 5; [cf. Mt. xxi. 38 LT TrWlI, where RGicaT<i-
σχωμ€ν^ ; μίρος foil, by cf w. dat. of the thing, Rev. xx.
6 ; θνσιαστηριον, Heb. xiii. 10 ; όσα ΐχ(ΐς, Mk. X. 21 ; xii.
44 ; Mt. xiii. 44, 46 ; xviii. 25 ; μηϋν, 2 Co. vi. 10; τΊ Si
ίχ(ΐς, ό etc. 1 Co. iv. 7 ; with a pred. ace. added, (ΐχον
άπαντα κοινά, Acts ii. 44 ; absol. (χ(ΐν, to have property,
to be rich : οΰκ and μη ίχ(ΐν [Α. V'. Ιο have tioQ, to be
destitute, be poor, Mt. xiii. 12 ; xxv. 29 ; Mk. iv. 25 ; Lk.
viii. 18 ; xix. 26 ; 1 Co. xi. 22 ; 2 Co. viii. 12, (Neh. viii.
10 ; 1 Esdr. ix. 51, 54 ; Sir. xiii. 5 ; exx. fr. Grk. auth.
in Passow s. v. p. 1295'' ; [L. and S. s. v. A. I. 1 ; cf. W.
594 (552)]) ; ex τοϋ ϊχιιν, in proportion to your means
[see cK, IL 13 fin.], 2 Co. viii. 11. b. Under the head
of possession belongs the phrase ΐχίΐν τινά as com-
monly used of those joined to any one by the bonds of
nature, blood, marriage, friendshi]), duty, law, compact,
and the like : πατίρα, Jn. viii. 41 ; ά&ί\φούς, Lk. xvi. 28;
uv&pa (a husband), Jn. iv. 17 sq. ; Gal. iv. 27 ; yvva'iKa, 1
Co. vii. 2, 12 sq. 29; τίκνα, Mt. xxi. 28; .xxii. 24 ; 1 Tim.
iii. 4 ; Tit. i. 6 ; υίοΰί. Gal. iv. 22 ; σπίρμα, offspring, Mt.
x.xii. 25 ; χήρας, 1 Tim. v. IG ; άσθίνοίιντας, Lk. iv. 40 ;
φίλον, Lk. xi. 5; παιδαγωγούς, 1 Co. iv. 15 ; ίχ^ιν κνριον,
to have (be subject to) a master. Col. iv. 1 ; δισπότην, 1
Tim. vi. 2 ; βασϊΚία, Jn. xix. 15 ; with ίφ' (αυτών added.
Rev. ix. 11; €χ€ΐ τον κρίνοντα αυτόν, Jn. xii. 48; (χίΐν
οίκονόμον, Lk. xvi. 1 ; dovXov, Lk. xvii. 7 : άρχκρία, Ileb.
iv. 14 ; viii. 1 ; ποιμίνα, Mt. i.\. 36 ; (χων ύπ^ ΐμαυτυν στρα-
τιώτας, Lk. vii. -s ; (χίΐν τον νιον κ. τον πατέρα, to be in
living union with the Son (Christ) and the Father by
faith, knowledge, profession, 1 Jn. ii. 23 ; (v. 1 2) ; 2 Jn. 9.
^V'ith two accusatives, one of wliich serves as a predicate :
πατέρα τον Αβραάμ, Abraham for our father, Mt. iii. 9 ;
add. Acts xiii. 5 ; Phil. iii. 1 7 ; Heb. xii. 9 ; (χ(ΐν τίνα
γυναίκα, to have (use) a woman (unlawfully) as a wife,
Mt. xiv. 4 ; Mk. vi. 18 ; 1 Co. v. 1 [where see Meyer], (of
lawful marriage, Xen. Cyr. 1,5,4). c. of attend-
ance or companionship: ίχιιν τινά μ(& ίαυτοϋ, Mt.
XV. 30; xxvi. 11; Mk. ii. 19; .xiv. 7; Jn. xii. 8. d.
(χ(ΐν τι to /(«re a thing in readiness, have at hand, have in
store : οΰκ ίχομιν d μή πίντί άρτους, Mt. .xiv. 1 7 ; add, xv.
34 ; Jn. ii. 3 [not Tdf.] ; iv. 11 ; xii. 35 ; 1 Co. xi. 22 ; xiv.
26 ; οΰκ ίχω, 6 παραθήσω αΰτω, Lk. xi. 6 ; ττοΰ σννάξω
τους καρπούς μου, Lk. xii. 1 7 ; W (cf. Β. § 139, 58) φάγωσι,
Mk. viii. 1 sq. ; (χ(ΐν τινά, to have one at hand, be able to
make use of : Μωί'σί'α κ. τ. προφήτας, Lk. .xvi. 29 ; τταρά-
κ\ητον, 1 Jn. ii. 1 ; μάρτυρας, Heb. .\ii. 1 ; οΰδΐ'να (χω etc.
Phil. ii. 20 ; άνθρωπον, Ίνα etc. Jn. v. 7. e. a person or
thing is said (χ(ΐν those things which are its parts or
are members of his body : as χιΊρας, πόδας, οφθαλμούς,
Mt. xviii. 8 sq. ; Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47 ; ους. Rev. ii. 7, 1 1,
etc. ; ίτα, Mt. xi. 15 ; Mk. vii. 16 [T λ\ΤΙ om. Tr br. the
vs.]; viii. 18; μίλη, Ro. xii. 4; 1 Co. xii. 12; σάρκα κ.
όστί'α, Lk. xxiv. 39 ; άκρηβυστΐαν. Acts xi. 3 ; an animal
is said (χ(ΐν head, horns, wings, etc. : Rev. iv. 7 sq. ; v.
6 ; viii. 9 ; ix. 8 sqq. ; xii. 3, etc. ; a liouse, city, or wall,
(χ<ιν θ(μ('Κίους, Heb. xi. 10; Rev. xxi. 14; στάσιν, Heb.
ix. 8; [add ('πιστολην ίχουσαν (R G πίριίχ.) τον τύπον
τούτον, Acts xxiii. 25]. f. one is said to have the dis-
eases or other ills with which he is affected or af-
flicted: μάστιγας, Mk. iii. 10; άσθ(ν(ίας. Acts xxviii. 9;
wounds. Rev. :ij,ii. 14 ; ΘΧΊ-^ιν, Jn. xvi. 33; 1 Co. vii. 28;
Εχω
267
^Χω
Rev. ii. 10. Here belong the expressions 8αψ6νιον ΐχαν,
to be possessed by a demon, Mt. xi. 18 ; Lk. vii. 33 ; viii.
27 ; Jn. vii. 20 ; viii. 48 sq. 52 ; x. 20 ; BfeXfe(3oiX, Mk.
iii. 22 ; πικνμα άκάθαρτον, Mk. iii. 30 ; vii. 25 ; Lk. iv. 33 ;
Acts viii. 7 ; πριΰμα ττονηρύν, Acts six. 13 ; πνιϋμα άσθ^-
ffiac, i. e. a demon causing infirmity, Lk. xiii. 1 1 ; πνιϋμα
άλαλον, Mk. ix. 17; Xeyfaiva, Mk. v. 15. g. one is said
to haee intellectual or spiritual faculties, endow-
ments, virtues, sensations, desires, emotions,
affections, faults, defects, etc. : σοφίαν. Rev. xvii.
9; yuaiatv, 1 Co. Λ'ΐϋ. 1, 10; χαρίσματα, Ro. xii. 6 ; προ-
φητ(ίαν, 1 Co. xiii. 2 ; πίστιν, Mt. xvii. 20; xxi. 21 ; Mk.
xi. 22 ; Lk. xvii. 6 ; Acts xiv. 9 ; Ro. xiv. 22 ; 1 Tim. i.
1 9 ; Philem. 5 ; π^ποίθησιν, 2 Co. iii. 4 ; Phil. iii. 4 ; παρ-
ρησίιιν, Philem. 8 ; Heb. x. 1 9 ; 1 Jn. ii. 28 ; iii. 21 ; iv. 1 7 ;
V. 14 ; άγάττην, Jn. v. 42 ; xiii. 35 ; xv. 13 ; 1 Jn. iv. 16;
1 Co. xiii. 1 sqq. ; 2 Co. ii. 4 ; Phil. ii. 2 ; Philem. 5 ; 1
Pet. iv. 8 ; ελπίδα (see Airir, 2 p. 201!' mid.) ; ζηλον, zeal,
Ro. X. 2; envy, jealousy (iv rrj καρδία), Jas. iii. 14 ; χάριν
riw, to be thankful to one, Lk. .xvii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 12; 2
Tim. i. 3; θνμόν. Rev. xii. 12; νπομονήν. Rev. ii. 3;
φόβον, 1 Tim. V. 20 ; χαράν, Philem. 7 [Rec." χάριν] ; 3
Jn. 4 [AVH t.xt. χάρίν\\ λύπην, Jn. xvi. 21; 2 Co. ii. 3;
Phil. ii. 27 ; ΐπιθυμίαν, Phil. i. 23 : (ττιποθίαν, Ro. xv. 23 ;
pv€iav Ttvos, 1 Th. iii. G. σννζ ί^ησιν καλην, άγαθην-,
άπρόσκοπον: Acts xxiv. 16; 1 Tim. i. 19; 1 Pet. iii. 16;
Ileb. xiii. 18; συν€ΐ8ησιν αμαρτιών, Heb. χ. 2; άγνωσίαν
β(οϋ, 1 Co. XV. 34 ; άσθίνααν, Heb. vii. 28 ; άμαρτίαν, Jn.
ix. 41; .XV. 22, etc. h. of age and time: ήλικίαν,
mature years (A. V. to be of age), Jn. ix. 21, 23 ; en/, to
have (completed) years, be years old, Jn. viii. 57 ; with
fv Tivi added : in a state or condition, Jn. v. 5 [W. 256
(240) note 2; B. § 147, 11]; in a place, τίσσαρας ημέρας
iv τώ μνημΐίω, Jn. xi. 1 7 ; beginning or end, or both, Heb.
vii. 3 ; Mk. iii. 26 ; Lk. xxii. 37 [see τίΚος, 1 a.]. i. ϊχίΐν
τι is said of opportunities, benefits, advantages,
conveniences, which one enjoys or can make use of:
βάθος γης, Mt. xiii. ό;γην πολλήκ, Mk. iv. 5 ; ικμά8α, Lk. viii.
6 ; καιρόκ. Gal. vi. 10; Heb. > i. 15; Rev. xii. 12; (ξουσίαν,
see (ξουσίη, passim ; «ipi/fTji/ διά τίνος, Ro. v. 1 (where we
must read ίχομ^ν, not ^Tith Τ Tr WII L mrg. (cf. WH.
Intr. § 404)] €χωμ€ν) ; ίΚΐυθ^ρΙαν, Gal. ii. 4 ; irvfvpa θ;οϋ,
1 Co. vii. 40 ; πν^ΰμα Χριστού, Ro. viii. 9 : vovv Χριστού,
1 Co. ii. 16 ; ζωήν, Jn. v. 4 " ; x. 10; xx. 31 ; την ζωήν. 1
Jn. V. 12; ζωην αιώνιον, Mt. xi.t. 16; Jn. iii. 15 sq. 36
[cf. W. 206 (249)] ; v. 24, '?9 ; vi. 4 \ 47, 54 : 1 Jn. v. 13 ;
i^rayyiKΊaς, 2 Co. vii. 1 : Heb. vii. 6 ; ρ'σθόν, Mt. v. 46 ;
vi. 1 ; 1 Co. i.x. 17; τα αιτήματα, the things which we have
asked, 1 Jn. v. 15 ; ϊπαινον, Ro. xiii. ■" ; τιμήν, Τη. iv. 44 ;
Heb. iii. 3 ; \όγον σοφίας, a reputation f^r wisdom. Col.
ii. 23 [see \όγος, I. 5 fin.] : καρπόν, Ro. i. 1." ; vi. 21 sq. ;
χάριν, benefit, 2 Co. i. 15 [where Tr mrg. WH txt. χαράν] ;
χάρισμα, 1 Co. vii. 7; προσαγωγή-: Eph. ii. 18; iii. 12;
άνιίπηυσιν, Rev. iv. 8 ; xiv. 1 1 ; άττοΚαυσΐν τίνος, Heb. xi.
25 ; νρόφασιν, Jn. xv. 22 ; καύχημα, that of which one
may glory, Ro. iv. 2 ; Gal. vi. 4 ; καύχησιν, Ro. .xv. 1 7.
k. ίχαν τι is used of one on whom something has been
laid, on whom it is incumbent as something to be
borne, observed, performed, discharged : άνάγισιν, 1 Co.
vii. 37 ; ανάγκην foil, by inf., Lk. xiv. 18 ; xxiii. 17 [R L
br. Tr mrg. br.] ; Heb. vii. 27 ; xpfiav τινός (see xpfia, 1) ;
€νχην €φ' ίαντών, Acts xxi. 23 ; νόμον, Jn. xi.\. 7 ; ivroXjjv,
2 Jn. 5 ; Heb. vii. 5 ; ιπιταγήν, 1 Co. vii. 25 ; Βιακυνίαν,
2 Co. iv. 1 ; ττράξιν, Ro. xii. 4 ; άγωνα, Phil. i. 30 ; Col. ii.
1; ίγκλημα, Acts .xxiii. 29; κρίμα, 1 Tim. v. 12. 1.
€χ€ίν τι is used of one to whom something has been i n-
trusted: τας κλίϊς, Rev. i. 18; iii. 7; το γλωσσόκομον,
Jn. xii. 6 ; xiii. 29. m. in reference to complaints
and disputes the foil, phrases are used: ?χω τι [or
without an ace, cf. B. 144 (126)] κατά τίνος, ίο have
something to bring forward against one, to have some-
thing to complain of in one, Mt. v. 23 ; Mk. xi. 25 ; foil,
by ότι. Rev. ii. 4 ; ίχω κατά σού 6\ίγα, ότι etc. ib. 14 [here
L WH mrg. om. on], 20 [here G L Τ Tr WH om. όλ.] ;
«χω τι προς τίνα. Ιο hare some accusation to bring against
one. Acts .x.xiv. 19 ; συζήτησιν iv ίαυτο'ις. Acts .xxviii. 29
[Rec.]; ζητήματα προς τίνα, Acts x-xv. 19; λόγοκ (χ(ΐν
προς τίνα. Acts xix. 38 ; πράγμα προς τίνα, 1 Co. \i. 1 ;
μομφήν προς τίνα. Col. iii. 13 ; κρίματα μ(τά τίνος, 1 Co. vi.
7. η. phrases of various kinds : ΐχ(ΐν τινά κατά πρόσω-
πον, to have one before him, in his presence, [A. Υ .face to
face ; see πρόσωπον, 1 a.]. Acts x.xv. 16 ; κοίτην ίκ τίνος,
to conceive by one, Ro. ix. 10 ; τούτο ΐχ^ις, ότι etc. thou
hast this (which is praiseivorthy [cf. λ^'. 595 (553)]) that
etc. Rev. ii. 6 ; iv iμoΊ ονκ ?χ« οίδίν, hath nothing in me
which is his of right, i. q. no power over me (Germ, er
hat mir nichts on), Jn. xiv. 30 ; 5 ίστιν . . . σαββάτου ϊχον
όΒάν, a sabbath-day's journey distant (for the distance is
something which the distant place has, as it were). Acts
i. 12; cf. Kypke ad loc. o. ΐχω with an inf. [W. 333
(313); B. 251 (216)], o. like the Lat. Aaieo ^uorf w. the
subjunc, i. q. to be able : ίχω αποδούναι, Mt. xviii. 25 ; Lk.
vii. 42 ; xiv. 14 ; τϊ ποι^σαι, Lk. .xii. 4 ; olhkv ιίχον άντιιπΛν,
they had nothing to ppose (could say nothing against
it). Acts iv. 14 ; κατ ouScfos «ιχί μείζονος όμόσαι. Heb.
vi. 13; add, Jn. viii. 3 (Rec); Acts xxv. 26 [cf. B. as
above]; Eph. iv. 28; Tit. ii. 8 ; 2 Pet. i. 15 ; the inf. is
om. and to be supplied fr. the context : ο ίσχ(ν, sc.
ποιήσαι, Mk. xiv. 8 ; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow
s. V. p. 1297*; [L. and S. s. v. A. HI. 1]. β. is used of
what there is a certain necessity for doing : βάπτισμα
(χω βαπτισθήναι, Lk. .xii. 50 ; ίχω σοι τι fίπ(Ίv, vii. 40 ;
άπαγγίίλαι. Acts x.xiii. 17, 19; λαΧήσαι. 18; καττ/γορ^σαι,
Acts xxviii. 19; ποΧΚα γράφιιν, 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 13.
II. Intransitively. a. (Lat. me habeo) to hold one's
selforfnd one's self so and so, to be in such or such a
condition : ίτοίμως ίχω, to be ready, foil, by inf.. Acts
x.xi. 13 ; 2 Co. xii. 14 ; 1 Pet. iv. 5 [not WH] : (σχάτως
(see €σχάτως), Mk. v. 23 ; κακώς, to be sick, Mt. iv. 24 :
viii. 16; is. 12; [xvii. 15 LTrtxt. WH txt.], etc.; καλώ?,
to be well, Mk. xvi. 18 ; κοαψότιρον,Ιο be better, Jn. iv.
52 ; πώς. Acts xv. 36 ; iv ίτοίμω, foil, by inf., 2 Co. x. 6.
b. impersonally : ίΐΚΚως ίχ(ΐ, it is otherwise, 1 Tim. v.
25 ; όντως. Acts vii. 1 ; xii. 15 ; xvii. 11 ; xxiv. 9; το vit
(χον, as things now are, for the present, Acts xxiv. 25
(Tob. vii. 11, and e.xx. fr. later prof. auth. in Kypke,
6ω<Γ
268
?&)?
Observv. ii. p. 1 24 ; cf. Vig. ed. Ilerm. p. 9 ; [cf. \V. 4C3
(«32)]). _
III. Mid. ΐχομαί Tivot (in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down),
prop. In hold υηβ'χ self to a tiling, to lay hold of a tiling,
III (tdhcre or cliiif) to ; to he closeli/ joined to a pers. or
thin'j [cf. W. 202 (1!K>) ; B. 192 (ICG sq.), 161 (110)]:
T<i (χύμίνα τηί σωτηf>ίas, Vulg. ficiiiiora stduli, conncctoil
ividi s:ilvatii)n, or wliicli lead to it, Ileb. vi. 9, where cf.
Hleek ; S ίχόμοΌΐ, neiir, (idjoiniiii/, ricii/ld/orinr/, liiinler-
ing, next: of place, κωμοπόΧιΐί, Mk. i. 38 (^νησοί, Isocr.
paneg. § 9G ; oi ϊχιψ^νοι, nci^^libors, Ildt. 1, 134); of
time, rfi ΐχομίνη sc. ήμίμα, tlie following day, Lk. .\iii. 33 ;
Acl.s XX. 1."), (1 .Mace. iv. 28; Polyb. 3. 112, 1; 5, 13, 9);
with ήμίμα added, Acts xxi. 26; σαββύτω, Acts .\iii. 44
(where R Τ Tr WII txt. ('ρχημίνω) ; ιρκιντω, 1 Maec. iv.
28 (with var. ϊιΐχημ^νω iV.) ; τυϋ (χαμένου crou?, Thuc. 6,
3. [C*)MP. ; «1^, τ:μοσ-αν•, άντ-, άπ-, iV-, e'ff-, κατ-, μ(τ-, ττιιμ-,
jTfpi-, trpo-j Ίτροσ-, σνν-, imtp-, ν7:-ίχω.~\
?us, a particle marking a limit, and
I. as a C0N.JUNCTION signifying 1. the tempo-
ral terminus ad quem, Idl, until, (Lat. doner, usque
diim) ; as in the best writ. a. with an indie, pret.,
where something is spoken of which continued up to a
certain time: Mt. ii. 9 («ω? . . . 'στη [('στάθη L ϊ TrWII]) ;
xxiv. 39, (1 Mace. .\. 50 ; Sap. x. 14, etc.). b. Avith άκ
and the aor. subjunc. (e(|iiiv•. to the Lat. fiit. perf. ), where
it Is left doubtful ivhen that will take place till which it
is .said a thing will continue [ef. W. § 42, 5] : ϊσθι «Vfi,
«otAKctn-u) σοι, Mt. ii. 13 ; add, v. 18; x. 11 ; xxii. 44; Mk.
vi. 10; xii. 36; Lk. xvii. 8 ; xx. 43 ; Acts ii. 3.5 ; Ileb. i.
13; after a negative sentence: Mt. v. 18, 26; x. 23 [T
Wlloin. άχ]; xii. 20; xvi. 28; xxiii. 39; xxiv. 34; Mk.
ix. 1 ; Lk. ix. 27; xxi. 32; 1 Co. iv. 5; with the aor. subj.
Avithoiit the addition of Sv. Mk. vi. 45 RG; xiv. 32 [here
Trnu'/.fut.]; Lk.xv.4; [xii. 59TTrWII; xxii. 34 L Τ
TrWII]; 2 Th. ii. 7; Ileb. x. 13; Rev. vi. 11 [Rcc. ia,s
ου] ; ουκ άνίζησαν ίως Τίλίσθη τα χίλια 'ίτη, <lid not live
again till the thousand years had been finished {elopsi
fuerint), Rev. xx. 5 Rec. Cf. W. § 41 b. 3. c. more
rarely used with the indie, pres. where the aor. stibj. might
have been expected [W. u. s. ; B. 231 (199)]: so four times
ίωΓ ίμχημαι, Lk. xix. 13 (where L Τ Tr WIT fV ω for ϊω:.
but cf. Bleck ad loc.) ; Jn. xxi. 22 sq.; 1 Tim. iv. 13 ; ews
άπολΜΐ, Mk. vi. 45 L Τ Tr WII, for R G άπολύαη (the
iiiilic. being due to a blcndinr; of dir. and iiidir. disc. ; as
Ml 1 hit. Lycurg. 29, 3 fifty ovv (Kttvovs ίμμίν^ιν τοις καθΐ-
ιττώσι νόμοΐί . . . (u>s ϊπάν(ΐσιν). d. once Λνϊίΐι the indie,
f ut., ace. to an inqirobable readins; in Lk. xiii. 35 : ίως ηξ(ΐ
Tdf., ίως tiv iJIfi I.ehm., for R G e'ws ho ^^rf, [but WII
(omitting av ηξη !Ίτ() read ίως (Ίπητι; Tr om. άν and br.
17. 5.; cf. B. 231 (199) sq.]. 2. as in Grk. writ. fr.
Horn, down, as lonr/ at, while, foil, by the indie, in all
tenses, — in the N. T. only in the pres. : tuis ήμίρα ίστίν,
.In. ix. 4 [Tr mrg. WII ilirg. ώί] ; ("ω? (L Τ TrWII ώς)
το φως (χ(Τ(, Jn. xii. 35 sq., (ίως en φως ΐστιν. Plat.
PIkumIo p. 89 c.) ; [Mk. vi. 45 (cf. c. above)].
H. By a usage chiefly later it gets the force of an
ΑοΛΈΠΒ, Lat. Η!Ί]ηι• (id: and 1. used of a tempo-
ral terminus ad quem, until, (unto) ; a. like a prep-
osition, w. a gen. of time [W. § 54, « ; B. 319 (274)] :
(ως αώνος, Lk. i. 55 Grsb. (Ezek. xxv. 15 Alex.; 1 {.'hr.
xvii. 16; Sir. xvi. 26 Fritz.; .xxiv. 9, etc.); τήί ημίρας,
Mt. xxvi. 29 ; xxvii. G4 ; Lk. i. 80 ; Acts i, 22 [Tdf. <%)i] ;
l!o. xi. 8, etc.; ώρας, Mt. xxvii.45; Mk. xv. 33; Lk. xxiii.
44 ; της -πεντηκοστής, 1 Co. .xvi. 8 ; τ^Κονς, 1 Co. i. 8 ; 2 Co.
i. 13; της σί)μ(ρον sc. ημίρας, Mt. xxvii. 8; τοί νϋν, ΛΙί.
xxiv. 21 ; Mk. xiii. 19, (1 Mace. ii. 33) ; χΐιρα ϊως «τω»
I'lySoifK. τίσσύρων a widow (who had attained) even unto
eighty-four years, Lk. ii. 37 L Τ TrWII; before the
η a m e s of i 1 1 u s t r i ο u s in e η by which a period of time
is marked: Mt.i.l7; xi.l3; Lk.xvi.lG (whereTTrWH
μίχμι) ; Acts xiii. 20; before the names of events:
Mt. i. 17 (ίως μ(τηικ(σίας ΰαβυλωΐΌς) : ii. I'l; xxiii. 35;
xxviii. 20; Lk. xi. 51 ; Jas. v. 7 ; (ως τον (λθ(1ν, Acts viii.
40 [Β. 266 (228); cf. W. § 44, 6 ; .ludith i. 10; xi. 19,
etc.]. b. with the gen. of the neul. rel. pron. oJ or oTou
it gets the force of a conjunction, until, till (the time
when) ; a. ίως ου (first in Ildt. 2, 143 ; but after that
only in later aiitli., as Plut. et al. [W. 296 (278) note;
B. 230 sq. (199)]) : foil, by the indie., Mt. i. 25 [WH
br. ου]; xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21; Acts xxi. 26 [B. 1. e.]; foil.
by the subj. aor., equiv. to Lat. fiit. pf., Mt. xiv. 22 ; xxvi.
36 (where AVH br. ου and I. chin, has ίως ου ίΐν) ; Lk. xii.
50 [Rec. ; xv. 8 Tr WII] ; xxiv. 49 ; Acts xxv. 21 ; 2 Pet.
i. 19 ; after a negative sentence, Mt, xvii. 9 ; Lk. xii. 59
[RGL; xxii. 18 TrWII]; Jn. xiii. 38; Acts xxiii. 12,
14, 21. β. ίως ότου, αα. until, till (the time when) :
foil, by the indie., Jn. ix. 18; foil, by the subj. (without
Sv), Lk. xiii. 8 ; xv. 8 [R G L T] ; after a negation, Lk.
-xxii. 16, 18 [RGLT]. ββ. as long as, u-hilst (Cant. i.
12), foil, by the indie, jires., Mt. v. 25 (see ίίχρι, 1 d. fin.).
c. before adverbs of time (rarel)• so in the earlier and
more elegant writ., a» (ως ΰψ-ί. Time. 3, 1 08 ; [cf. W. § 54,
G fin. ; B. 320 (275)]) : ίως άρτι, up to this time, until
now [Λ^ig. ed. IIen7i. p. 388], Mt. xi. 12; Jn. ii. 10; v.
1 7 ; xvi. 24 ; 1 Jn. ii. 9 ; 1 Co. iv. 1 3 ; viii. 7 ; xv. G ; ΐως
ware; how long f Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 41;
Jn. X. 24 ; Kev. vi. 10, (Ps. xii. (xiii.) 2 sq.; 2 S. ii. 26 ;
1 Mace. vi. 22) ; ίως σήμιρον, 2 Co. iii. 15. 2. acc. to
a usage dating fr. Aristot. down, employed of the local
terminus ad (juem, unto, as far as, even to; a. like a
prep., with a gen. of place [W. § 54, G ; B. 319 (274)] :
(ως abov, (ως του ουρανού, Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x. 15; add, Mt.
xxiv. 31; xxvi. 58; Mk.xiii.27; Lk.ii.l5; iv. 29 ; Acts
i. 8; xi. 19, 22; xvii. 15; xxiii. 23; 2 Co. xii. 2; with
gen. of pers., to the place where one is : Lk. iv. 42 ; Acts
ix. 38, (ίως Ύπ(ρβορ4ων, Ael. v. h. 3, 18). b. with ad-
verbs of [ilace [W. and B. as in c. above] : ίως ϊίνω, Jn.
ii. 7; ίως ίσω, Mk. xiv. 54; ίως κάτω, Mt. xxvii. 51;
Mk. XV. 38 ; ίως Ue, Lk. xxiii. 5 [cf. W. § 66, 1 c.J.
c. ivith prepositions : ίως ίξω της πόΧίως, Acts .xxi. 5 ;
ίως (Ίς. Lk. xxiv. 50 [RGL mrg., but L txt. Τ TrWII
(ως πρής as far as ίο (Polyb. 3, 82, 6 ; 12,17,4; Gen.
xxxviii. 1)]; Polyb. 1. 11, 14; Ael. v. h. 12, 22. 3.
of the limit (terminus) of cjuantity; with an adv. of
number: ίως ίπτάκις, Mt. xviii. 21 ; with numerals: Mt.
ΖΛ
269
ξπΜ
.Txii. 26 (e<af των iwra) ; cf. xx. 8 ; ,Τη. viii. 9 (Rec.) ;
Actsviii. 10; Ileb. viii. 11; οΰκ ((ττιν ίωι «tos, there is
not so much as one, Ilo. iii. 12 fr. Fs. xiii. (xiv.) 3. 4.
of the limit of measurement: (ws ημίσουι, Jlk. vi. 23 ;
£stb. V. 3, 6 Alex. S. of the end or limit in acting
and suffering: ews τούτον, Lk. xxii. 51 [see (άα, 2];
f ωί τοΰ θιρισμοΰ, Mt. xiii. 30 L Tr WII txt. ; ίω: θανάτου,
even to death, so that I almost die, Mk. xiv. 34; Mt.
xxvi. 38, (Sir. iv. 28; xxxi. (xxxiv.) 13; ixxvii. 2;
4 Mace. xiv. 19).
[Z, I, on its substitution for σ see 2, «r, r•]
Ζαβουλών, ό, indecl., (ll^Pf [but on the Ilebr. form see
B. D.] habitation, dwelling, Gen. xxx. 20), Vulg. Zabu-
Ion ; Zebulun, the tenth son of Jacob ; by meton. the
tribe of Zebulun: Mt. iv. 13, 15; Rev. vii. 8.*
Ζακχαΐος, -ου, ό, ('31 pure, innocent; cf. 2 Esdr. ii. 9;
Neh. vii. 14), Zacchceiis, a chief tax-collector : Lk. xi.\.
2, 5, 8. [B. D. s. V.]*
Ζαρά, ό, (ΓΤ'Ι a rising (of light)), indecl., Zarah [better
Zerah^, one of the ancestors of Christ : Mt. i. 3 ; cf. Gen.
xxxviii. 30.'
Ζαχαρίας, -ου, ό, (iT'lDt and iri'iDt i. e. whom Jehovah
remembered), Zadiarias or Zacharlali or Zecluiriah ;
1. a priest, the father of John the Baptist : Lk. i. 5,
12sq. 18, 21, 40, 59, 67; iii. 2. 2. a prophet, the son
of Jehoiada the ]iriest, who was stoned to death in the
mid. of the ix. cent, btifore Chiist in the court of the
temple: 2 Chr. .\xiv. 19 sqq. ; Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 51.
Yet this Zachariah is called in Mt. 1. c. the son not of
Jehoiada but of BaracliiaJi. But most interpreters now
think (and correctly) that the Evangelist confounded
him with that more noted Zachariah the prophet who
lived a little after the exile, and >vas the son of Bara-
chiah (cf. Zech. i. 1), and whose jirophecics have a ]jlace
in the canon. For Christ, to prove that the Israelites
throughout their sa red history had been stained with
the innocent blood of righteous men, adduced the first
and the last example of the murders connnitted on good
men ; for the bks. of the Chron. stand last in the Hebrew
canon. But rpinions differ about this Zachariah. For
according to an ancient tradition, which the Greek
church follows (and which has been adopted by C/ir. W.
MilUer in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1841, p. 673 sqq.,
and formerly by Ililr/enfeliJ. krit. L'ntersuchungen iib. die
Evangg. Justins, etc., p. 1.">.J and die Evangg. nach ihrer
Kntstehung, p. 100), Zachariah the father of John the
Baptist is meant (cf. Protcv. Jac. c. 23); others think
(so quite recently Keim, iii. 184 [Eng. trans, v. 218], cf.
Weisr, das Matthauscvang. p. 4'.)9) a certain Zachariah
son of Baruch (ace. to anotlicr reading Βαρισκαίου). wlio
during the war between the Jews and the Rouiaus was
slain by the zealots ev μίσω τω iepa. as Jo?e|ih. b. j. 4,
5, 4 relates. Those who hold this opinion believe, either
diat Jesus di\inely predicted this murder and in the
prophetic style said ίφονήσατί for φον(ΰσ(τί [cf. B.
§137,4; W. 273 (250) n.; §40,5 b.], or that the Evango-
list, writing after the destruction of Jerusalem, by an
anachronism jnit this murder into the discourse of Jesus.
These inventions are fully refuted by Fritzsc/ie on Mt.
1. c, and Bleek, Erkliir. der drei ersten Evangg. ii. p. 177
s<iq. ; cf. Hilgenfcld, Einl. in d. N. T. p. 487 sq. ; [and
Dr. James Morison, Com. on Mt., 1. c. ; B. D. s. v. Zech-
ai-iah 6 and s. v. Zacharias 11].*
ζάω, -ώ, ^s, ζτ), inf. ζην [so L T, but R G WH -j,-, Tr
also (exc. 1 Co. ix. 14 ; 2 Co. i. 8) ; cf. W. § 5, 4 c. ; WH.
Intr. § 410; Lipst. Gram. Unters. p. 5 sq.], ptcp. ^ώι»;
impf. (ζων (Ro. vii. 9, where cod. Vat. has the inferior
form (ζην [found again Col. iii. 7 ef^ri] ; cf. Fritzsche
on Rom. ii. p. 38 ; [ WII. App. p. 1 (19 ; Veitch s. v.]) ; f ut.
in the earlier form ζήσω (Ro. vi. 2 [not Lmrg.]; Ileb.
xii. 9; LTTrWII also in Jn. [v. 25]; vi. [δΓτ WH],
57, 58 [not L; xiv. 19 Τ Tr WH] ; 2 Co. xiii. 4 ; Jas. iv.
15), and much oftener [(?) five times, quotations ex-
cepted, viz. Mt. ix. 18; Lk. x. 28; Jn. xi. 25; Ro. viii.
13; X. 5; cf. Moulton's Winer p. 105] the later form,
first used by [Hippocr. 7, 536 (see Veitch s. v.)] Dcm.,
ζήσομαι; 1 aor. (unused in Attic [Hippocr., Anth. Pal_
Pint., al. (see Veitch)]) ΐζησα (Acts xxvi. 5, etc.); cf.
Bitm. Ausf. Sprachl. ii. 191 sq. ; B. 58 (, 1); Kriiger i.
p. 1 72 ; Kuhner i. 82!) ; W. 86 (83) ; [Veitch s. v.] ; Hebr.
Π'Π ; [fr. (Hom.) Theogn., Aeschyl. down] ; to live ;
I. prop. 1. to live, be among the living, be alive (not
lifelesf!, not dead) : Acts xx. 12; Ro. vii. 1-3; 1 Co. vii.
39; 2 Co. i. 8 ; iv. 11 ; 1 Th. iv. 15, 17 ; Rev. xix. 20, etc.;
ψΐ'χή ζώσα, 1 Co. xv. 45 and R Tr mrg. Rev. xvi. 3 ; δια
navTos τοϋ fiji', during all their life (on earth), Ileb. ii.
15 (diarfXeiv πάντα τον τοΰ ζην χρόνον, Diod. 1, 74 [cf. Β.
262 (225)]); ?τι ζών (ptcp. impf. [cf. W. 341 (320)]),
while he Avas yet alive, before his death, Sit. xxvii. 63 ;
with fv σαρκΐ added, of the earthly life, Phil. i. 22 ; 5 δί
vtv ζω ev σαρκί, that life which I live in an earthly bodv.
Gal. ii. 20 [B. 149 (130); W. 227 (213)]; eV αΙτώ ζώμΐν,
in God is the cause why we live. Acts xvii. 28 ; ζώσα
τ(βνηκ(, 1 Tim. V. 6 ; (μο\ το ζί]ν Χριστός, my life is de-
voted to Christ, Christ is the aim, the goal, of my life.
Phil. i. 21 ; ζώντ€! are opp. to νεκροί, Mt. xxii. 32; Mk.
xii. 27; Lk. xx. 38; ζωντα κα\ νεκροί. Acts χ. 42; Ro.
xiv. 9 ; 2 Tim. iv. 1 ; 1 Pet. iv. 5 ; in the sense of living
270
?βΟγο9
and thriving, 2 Co. vi. 9; 1 Th. iii. 8; ζη ev ίμοΊ
Χριστοί, Christ is living and operative in me, i. e. the
holy mind and energy of Christ pervades and moves me,
Gal. ii. 20; (κ &ννάμ(ωί flfoO ζήν fit Tiva, through the
power of God to live and be strong toward one (sc. in
correcting and judging), 2 Co. xiii. 4 ; in the absol. sense
God is said to be 6 ζων: Mt. xvi. 16; xxvi. 6.3; Jn. vi.
57; vi. 69Kec. ; Actsxiv. 15; Ro. ix. 26 ; 2 Co. iii. 3 ;
vi. 16; iTh. i. 9; iTim. iii. 15; iv. 10; vi. 17RG;
Ileb. iii. 12; L\. 14; x. 31; xii. 22; Kev. vii. 2, (.Tosh. iii.
10; 2K.xix.4,16; Is. xxxvii. 4, 17 ; Ilos.i.lO; Dan.
vi. 20 Theod., 26, etc.) ; with the addition of ds rois
alavas των αιώνων, Rev. iv. 9 ; xv. 7 ; ζώ ίγω ("JK ""Π,
Num. xiv. 21 ; Is. xlix. 18, etc.) as I lire, (hy mi/ life),
the formula by which God swears by himself, Ro. xiv.
11. i. q. /o continue to live, to be kept alive, (όστίΓ ζην
€πιθυμ(ί. τταράσθω νικάν, Xen. an. 3, 2, 26 (39)) : tav 6
κύριοί θ(Κτ)σΐ] και ζήσωμιν [-σομ(ν L Τ Τγ WH], Jas. iv.
15 [Β. 210 (181 ) ; W. 286 (268 sq.)] ; ζην ίπ άρτω (Mt.
iv.4,etc.) see tVi, Β. 2 a. a. (Tob. v. 20) ; ζην ίκ tivos, to
get a living from a thing, 1 Co. ix. 14 ; also when used
of convalescents, Jn. iv. 50 sq. 53 ; with tx της άρρω-
m-ias added, 2 K. i. 2 ; viii. 8 sq. figuratively, to live
and be strong: ev τούτοις (for Rec. fv αΰτο'ις} in these
vices, opp. to the ethical death by which Christians are
wholly severed from sin (.see αποθνήσκω, II. 2 b.), Col. iii.
7 ; cf. Meyer ad loc. i. q. to be no longer dead, to recover
life, he restored to life: Mt. ix. 18; Acts ix. 41 ; so of
Jesus risen from the dead, Mk. xvi. 1 1 ; Lk. xxiv. 5, 23 ;
Acts i. 3; XXV. 19; Ro. vi. 10; 2 Co. xiii. 4 ; opp. to
νικρός. Rev. i. 18; ii. 8 ; ίζησ^ν came to life, lived again,
Ro. xiv. 9 GLTTrWH (opp. to άπ€θανε); Rev. xiii.
14 ; XX. 4, 5 [Rec. άνίζ.], (Ezek. xxxvii. 9 sq. ; on the
aorist as marking entrance upon a state see βασίΚ^ίω,
fin.) ; ζην (Κ νίκρών, tro]). out of moral death to enter
upon a new life, dedicated ami acceptable to God, Ro. vi.
13 ; [similarly in Lk. xv. 32 Τ Tr WII]. i. q. not to be
mortal, Ileb. vii. 8 (where άνθρωποι άποθνήσκοντ(ς dying
men i. e. whose lot it is to die, are opp. to ό ζων). 2.
emphatically, and in the Messianic sense, to enjoy real
life, i. e. io have true life and worthy of the name, — active,
blessed, endless in the kingdom of God (or ^ω^ αιώνιος; see
ζωή, 2 b.) : Lk. X. 28 ; Jn. v. 25 ; xi. 25 ; Ko. i. 1 7 ; viii.
13; xiv. 9 [(?) see above]; Gal. iii. 12; Ileb. xii. 9; with
tlie addition of « πίστΐως, Ileb. x. 38 ; of fif τον αΙώνα, Jn.
vi. 51, 58; σνν Χριστώ, in Christ's society, 1 Th. v. 10;
this life in its absolute fulness Christ enjoys, who owes it
to God ; hence he says ζώ δια τον πατϊρα, Jn. vi. 57 ; by
the gift and power of Christ it is shared in by th: faith-
ful, who accordingly are said ζήσίΐν hi αυτόν, Jn. vi. 27;
8i' αντοΐι, 1 Jn. iv. 9. with a dat. denoting the respect,
πνΐνματι, 1 Pet. iv. 6 ; όνομα €χ€ΐς οτι ζης και νεκρός ei, thou
art said to have life (i. e. vigorous spiritual life bringing
forth good fruit) and (yet) thou art dead (ethically).
Rev. iii. 1. In the O. T. ζην denotes to live most happily
in (he enjoyment of the theocratic blessings : Lev. xviii. 5 ;
Dent. iv. 1 ; viii. I ; xxx. 16. 3. to live i. e. pass life,
of the manner of living and acting ; of morals or char-
acter: μtτa ανδρός with ace. of time, of a married woman,
Lk. ii. 3(; ; χωρ\ς νόμου, without recognition of the law,
Ro. vii. 9 ; Φαρισαιος, Acts xxvi. 5 ; also tv κόσμω. Col. ii.
20 ; with ev and a dat. indicating the act or state of the
soul : ev πίοτί», Gal. ii. 20 ; ev τη αμαρτία, to devote life
to sin, Ro. vi. 2; with adverbs expressing the manner:
fυσeβώς, 2 Tim. iii. 12; Tit. ii. 12; άσώτως, Lk. xv. 13;
ίθνικώς, (jal. ii. 14; αδίκως. Sap. xiv. 28; ^v τινι (dat.
of pers., a phrase com. in Grk. auth. also, in Lat. vivere
alicui; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. voL iii. p. 176 sqq.), to
devote, consecrate, life to one; so to live that life results
in benefit to some one or to his cause : τώ θeώ, Lk. xx.
38; Ko. vi. 10 sq. ; GaL ii. 19, (4 Mace' xvi! 25); τώ
Χριστώ, 2 Co. V. 1 5 ; that man is said 4αυτώ ζήν who
makes his own will his law, is his own master, Ro. xiv.
7 ; 2 Co. V. 15 ; w. dat. of the thing to wliich life is de-
voted : τη δικαιοσύνη, 1 Pet. ii. 24 ; πveύμaτι, to be actu-
ated by the .Si)irit, Gal. v. 25 ; κατά σάρκα, as the flesh
dictates, Ro. viii. 12 sq.
H. Metaph. of inanimate things ; a. ίδωρ ζών, D'O
D"'n (Gen. .xxvi. 19 ; Lev. .xiv. 5 ; etc.), living trater, i. c.
bubbling up, gushing forth, flowing, with the suggested
idea of refreshment and salubrity (opp. to the water of
cisterns and pools, [cf. our .syirini/icaier]), is figuratively
used of the spirit and truth of God as satisfying the
needs and desires of the soul: Jn. iv. 10 sq. ; vii. 38;
f πϊ ζώσας πηγάς ύ8άτων, Rev. vii. 1 7 Rec. b. having
vital power in itself and exerting the same upon the soul:
ίΚπ\ς ζώσα, 1 Pet. i. 3; Xoyot θ(οϋ, 1 Pet. i. 23 ; Ileb. iv.
12; \oyia sc. toC θ(οϋ. Acts vii. 38, cf. Deut. xxxii. 47;
ό&Ός ζώσα, Ileb. χ. 20 (this phrase describing that char-
acteristic of divine grace, in granting the pardon of sin
and felloΛvship with God. wliich likens it to a way lead-
ing to the heavenly sanctuary). In the same manner the
predicate ό ζών is applied to those things to which
persons are compared who possess real life (see I. 2
above), in the expressions "Κίθοι ζώvτeς, 1 Pet. ii. 4 ; «5
άρτος 6 ζών (see άρτος, fin.), Jn. vi. 51 ; θυσία ζώσα
(tacitly opp. to slain victims), Ro. xii. 1. [Co.Mp. : ava-,
σν-ζάω.'\
ζβί'ννυμι, see σβίννυμι and s. V. 2, σ, ς.
ZtPiSalos, -ου, ό, Zehedee, ('Ί3Τ for •'131 [i. e. my gift],
a form of the prop, name which occurs a few times in
the O. T., as 1 Chr. xxvii. 27 (Sept. Ζαβ&Ί), munificent,
[others for n"1?I gift of Jehovah] ; fr. 1?I to give), a
Jew, by occupation a fisherman, husband of Salome, fa-
ther of the apostles James and John: Mt. iv. 21 ; x. 2
(3) ; XX. 20 ; xxvi. 37 ; x.xvii. 56 ; Mk. i. 19 sq. ; iii. 1 7 ; x.
35: Lk. V. 10; Jn. xxi. 2.*
JeoTOs. -ή, -όν, (ζίω), boiling hot, hoi, [Strab., App.,
Diog. Laurt., al.] ; metaph. of fervor of mind and zeal :
Rev. iii. 1 5 sq.*
iivYos, -COS (-ws), TO, {ζeύyvυμι to join, yoke), two
draughl-catlle (horses or oxen or mules) yoked together,
a pair or yoke of beasts : Lk. xiv. 19 (τρν, 1 Kings xix.
19, etc.; often in Grk. writ. fr. Horn. II. 18, 543 down).
2. univ. a pair: Lk. ii. 24 (Hdt. 3. 130; Aeschyl. Ag.
44 ; Xen. oec. 7, 18, and often in Grk. writ.).'
ζβυ κτήρια
271
ζημία
ζίυκτηρία, -αϊ, ή, (fr. the adj. ζινκτήριο!, fit for joining
or binding together), a band, fastening: Acts xxvii. 40.
Found nowhere else.*
Zevs, [but gen. Aios, (dat. Λα), aec. Δία (or Aiav), (fr.
old nom. Διγ), Zeus, corresponding to Lat. Jupiter (A.
V.) : Acts xiv. 1 2 (see Δι?) ; 6 Upevi τον Aios του οντος
προ τηί πόλίωί, the priest of Zeus whose temple was be-
fore the city, ibid. 13 (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]. See Λίς."
χίω; to boil icith heat, be hot; often in Grk. writ.; thus
of water, Horn. H. 18, 349; 21, 362 (365); metaph.
used of ' boiUng ' anger, love, zeal for what is good or
bad, etc. (Tragg., Plat., Plut., al.) ; ζίων (on this uncon-
tracted form cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. [or his School Gram.
(Robinson's trans.)] § 105 N. 2, i. p. 481 ; Matthiae i.
p. 151 ; [Iladley § 371 b.]) τω πι>ίΰ μάτι, fervent in spirit,
said of zeal for what is good, Acts xviii. 25 ; Ro. xii. 1 1 ;
cf. esp. RUckert and Fritzsche on Ro. 1. c*
ζηλ(νω; i. q. ζηλόω, q. v. ; 1. to envy, be jealous:
Simplicius in Epict. c. 26 p. 131 ed. Salmas. [c. 19, 2 p.
56, 34 Didot] ον^ΐΧ^των τ ά•γιιθοντ6 άνθρώτνίνον ζητουντων
φθονίΐ η ζηΚιίίΐ ποτί. 2. in a good sense, to imitate
eniulousli/, strive after: tpya άρ€της, ov Xoyovs, Democr,
ap. Stob. flor. app. 14, 7, iv. 384 ed. Gaisf. ; intrans. to
be full of zeal for (joo/l, be zealous: Rev. iii. 19 LTTr
txt. Wli, for Rec. ζήλωσον [cf. WH. App. p. 171].•
ζήλο?, -ου, 6, and (in Phil. iii. 6 L Τ Tr WH ; [2 Co.
ix. 2 Τ Tr WII]) TO ζήλος (Ignat. ad Trail. 4 ; διό ζήλος,
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 4, 8 [" in Clem. Rom. §§ 3, 4, 5, 6 the
masc. and neut. seem to be interchanged without any
law " (Lghtft.). For facts see esp. Clem. Rom. ed. 2
Hilgenfeld (1876) p. 7; cf. WH. App. p. 158 ; W. § 9, N.
2; B. 23 (20)]; (fr. ζ^ω [Curtius § 567; Vanidek p.
757]) ; Sept. for nXJP ; excitement of mind, ardor, fervor
of spirit ; 1. zeal, ardor in embracinrj, pursuing, de-
fending anything : 2 Co. vii. 11; ix. 2 ; κατά ζηλης, as re-
spects zeal (in maintaining religion), Phil. iii. 6; with
gen. of the obj., zeal in behalf of for a pers. or thing,
Jn. ii. 17 fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 10; Ro. x. 2, (1 Mace. ii.
58; Soph. O. C. 943) ; vnep tivos, gen. of pers., 2 Co.
vii. 7 ; Col. iv. 13 Rec. with subject, gen. ζήλω θιοΰ,
with a jealousy such as God has, hence most pure and
solicitous for their salvation, 2 Co. xi. 2 ; the fierceness
of indignation, punitive zeal, trvpos (of penal fire, which
is personified [see ττϋρ, fin.]), Ileb. x. 27 (Is. xxvi. 11;
Sap. V. 18). 2. an envious and contentious rivalry,
jealousy : Ro. xiii. 13 ; 1 Co. iii. 3 ; Jas. iii. 14, 16 ; tVAij-
σθησαν ζήλου, Acts v. 17; xiii. 45 ; plur. ζήλοι, now the
stirrings or motions of ζήλος, now its outbursts and man-
ifestations : 2 Co. xii. 20 ; Gal. v. 20 ; but in both pass.
L Τ Tr [WH, yet in Gal. 1. c. WH only in txt.] have
adopted ζήλος (ζήλοι re και φθόνοι. Plat. legg. 3 p. 679 c).
[On the distinction betiveen ζήλος (which may be used
in a good sense) and φθόνος (used only in a bad sense)
cf. Trench, Syn. § xxvi.; Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 11,
I (Bio κα\ cVifiKt'f (OTiv ό ζήλος και (πκικων, τό δί φθονι'ιν
φανλον καΐ φαύλων).]*
ζηλόω, -β ; 1 aor. ΐζήλασα ; pres. pass. inf. ζηλοϋσθαι ;
\ζήλος, q. ν.) ; Sept. for KJP ; to burn with zeal; 1.
absol. to be heated or to boil [A.V. to be movetT] tvith envy,
hatred, anger : Acts vii. 9 ; xvU. 5 (where Grsb. om.
ζηλώσ.) ; 1 Co. xiii. 4 ; Jas. iv. 2 ; in a good sense, to be
zealous in the pursuit of good, Rev. iii. 19 RGTrmrg.
(the aor. ζήλωσον marks the entrance into the mental
state, see βασιλ(ΰω, fin. ; (ζήλωσ^, he was seized with
indignation, 1 Mace. ii. 24). 2. trans.; τί, to desire
earnestly, pursue: 1 Co. xii. 31 ; xiv. 1, 39, (Sir. Ii. 18;
Thuc. 2, 37; Eur. Hec. 255 ; Dem. 500, 2; al.) ; μάλλον
8e, sc. ζηλούτ(, foil, by ti-a, 1 Co. xiv. 1 [B. 237 (205); cf.
W.577(537)]. τινά, a. to desire one earnestly, to strive
afier, busy one's self about him : to exert one's self for one
(that he may not be torn from me), 2 Co. xi. 2 ; to seek
to draw over to one's side, Gal. iv. 17 [cf. Γχα, II. 1 d.];
to court one's good will and favor, Prov. xxiii. 1 7 ; xxiv.
1 ; Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 1 ; so in the pass, to be the object
of the zeal of others, to be zealously sought after: Gal. iv.
18 [here Tr mrg. ζηλοΐ,σθί, but cf. WH. Intr. § 404].
b. to envy one: Gen. xxvi. 14; xxx. 1 ; xxxvii. 11; Hes.
opp. 310; Horn. Cer. 168, 223 ; and in the same sense,
ace. to some interpp., in Acts vii. 9 ; but there is no
objection to considering ^77λώσαι/τεΓ here as used absol.
(see 1 above [so A.V. (not Η.Λ^)]) and τον'ίωσήφ as
depending on the verb άπίδοντο alone. [COMP. : rrapa-
ζηλόω.]*
ζηλωτή?, -oC, ό, (ζηλόω), one burning tvith zeal ; a zealot ;
1. absol., for the llebr. S3P, used of God as jealous of
any rival and sternly vindicating his control : Ex. xx.
5 ; Deut. iv. 24, etc. From the time of the Maccabees
there existed among the Jews a class of men, called
Zealots, who rigorously adhered to the Mosaic law and
endeavored even by a resort to violence, after the ex-
ample of Phinehas (Num. xxv. 11, ζηλωτής Φιι /ee's 4 Mace,
xviii. 12), to prevent religion from being violated by
others ; but in the latter days of the Jewish common-
wealth they used their holy zeal as a pretext for the basest
crimes, Joseph, b. j. 4, 3, 9 ; 4, 5, 1 ; 4, 6, 3 ; 7, 8, 1. To
this class perhaps Simon the apostle had belonged, and
hence got the surname ό ζηλωτής: Lk. vi. 15; Actsi. 13;
[cf. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch., Index s. v. Zeloten ;
Edersheim, Jesas the Messiah, i. 237 sqq.]. 2. with
gen. of the obj. : w. gen. of the thing, most eagerly desirous
of, zealous for, a thing ; a. to acquire a thing, [zealous
o/] (see ζηλόω. 2) : 1 Co. xiv. 12; Tit. ii. 14; 1 Pet. iii.
13 L Τ Tr Wll, (άρβτής, Philo, praem. et poen. § 2 ; τής
(ΰσ€β€ίας, de monarch. 1. i• § 3 ; (ΰσ(β(ίας κ- δικαιοσύνης,
de poenit. § I ; των πολεμικών ΐργων, Diod. 1, 73; rrtpl
των ανηκόντων fit σωτηρίαν, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 45, 1). b.
to defend and uphold a thing, vehemently contend-
ing for a thing, [zealous fori : νόμου, Acts xxi. 20 (2
Mace. iv. 2) ; των πατρικών παραδόσίων, Gal. i. 14 (των
αιγχηττιακών πλασμάτων, Philo, vit. ^loys. iii. § 19 ; τής
αρχαίας κ. σώφρονος άγίύγής, Diod. e.xcerpt. p. 611 [fr. 1.
37, vol. ii. 564 Didot]) ; w. gen. of pers. : flfoC, intent on
protecting the majesty and authority of God by contend-
ing for the Mosaic law. Acts xxii. 3. (In prof. auth.
also an emulator, admirer, imitator, follower of any one.)'
ζημία, -<i9, ή, damage, loss, [Soph., Hdt. down] : Act«
ζημιοω
272
ζί/γο«
xxviL 10, 21 ; ήγίΐσΰαι ζημίαν (Xen. mem. 2, 4, S ; ταιά,
ace. of pers., 2, .'i, 2), τϊ, to regard a thing as a loss : I'liil.
iii. 7 (opp. to Ktf>iot), 8.'
ζημιό», -ώ ; (ζημία), (ο affect with damage, do damar;e
Id : τίκά ([Tliiic], Xeii., Plat.) ; in the N. T. only in
Pass., fut. ζημιωθήσημαι ([Xcn. luem. .i, 9, 1 ■>, a\. ; but '• as
often"] in prof. aulh. [fut. mill.] ζημιώσομαι in pass,
sense; cf. Kniger § 39, 11 Auni. ; Kuliner on Xen.
mem. u. s.; [L. and S. s. v.; Veitch s. v.]) ; 1 aor. (ζημιά-
θην ; absol. Ιο suslain damage, to receive injury, suffer loss :
I Co. iii. 15 ; tv nin ίκ rivos, in a thing from one, 2 Co.
vii. 9 ; with ace. of tlie tiling : (one from whom another
is taken away [as a penalty] by death, is said την ψυχήν
τιΐΌϊ ζημιοϋσθαι, lldt. 7, 39), την ^Ιτνχην αϋτον, to forfeit
his life, i.e. ace. to the context, eternal life, Mt. xvi. 2(i ;
Mk. viii. 3(i, foi• which Luke, in i.x. 25, tauTOv i. e. him-
self, by bcini slmt out from the everlasting kingdom of
God. πάντα ϊζημιώθην, retlexive [yet see Meyer], I for-
feited, gave up all things, I decided to suffer the loss of
aU these [(?)] tilings, Phil. iii. 8.•
Ζτ,νά3 [ef. 1{|.. l/.'htft. on Col. iv. 1.5 ; W. § 16 N. 1], -av,
[B. 20 (!•*>)]. 0, Zdiik, at first a teacher of the Jewish
law, afterwards a Christian: Tit. iii. 13. [B.D. s. v.]*
ζητί'ω, -ώ ; impf. 3 pers. sing, (ζήτα, plur. ΐζήτουν; fut.
ζητήσω: 1 aor. (ζήτησα; Pass., pres. ζητούμαι : impf. 3
]iers. sing. ϊζητιΊτο (Ileb. viii. 7); 1 fut. ζητηθήσομαι
(Lk. xii. 48); [fr. llom. on]; Sept. for vyi, and much
oftener for Β?'Γ)3 ; to seel; i. e. 1. to seek in order to
tinil ; a. imiv. and absol. : ^It. vii. 7 srp ; Lk. xi. 9 sq.
(see ίνρίσκω. 1 a); τιι/ά, Mk. i. 37: Lk. ii.[4oRLrarg.],48:
[iv. 42 Roc.]; Jn. vi. 24; xviii. 4, 7; Acts x. 19, and
often ; foil, by iv w. dat. of place, Acts ix. 11 ; w. ace. of
the thing (μαμ-^αμίταί), of buyers, Jit. xiii. 43 ; something
lost, Mt. xviii. 12 ; Lk. xix. 10; τϊ ev τίνι, as fruit on a
tree, Lk. xiii. 6 stj. ; άνάπανσιν, a jjlace of rest, Jit. xii.
43; Lk. xi. 21; after the Ilebr. {"3 iVarriK u;p3 [cf.
\V. 33 (32) ; 18]) ■^υχήν tivos, to seek, plot against, the
life of one, Mt. ii. 20 ; Ro. xi. 3, (Ex. iv. 19, etc.) ; univ.
Ti frjTfti; what dost thou seek? what dost thou wish?
Jn. i. 38 (39) ; [iv. 27]. b. to seek [i. e. in order to find
oul\ hji lliiiilinfi, meditating, reasoning; to inquire into:
ffep! TiVor ζητ(Ίτ( μιτ αΚ\ή\ων•, Jn. xvi. 19; foil, by indi-
rect disc, σώί, τ'ί, Tim: -Mk. xi. 18; xiv. 1, 11 ; Lk. xii.
29 ; xxii. 2 ; 1 Pet. v. 8 ; τύι/ θ(όν, to follow up the traces
of divine majesty and power, Acts xvii. 27 (univ. to seek
the knowledge of God, Sap. i. 1 ; xiii. 6 ; [Philo,monaroh.
i. § 5]). c. to seek after, seek for, aim at, strire afer:
(ΰκαψίαν, Mt. x.\vi. 16; Lk. xxii. 6; ^f υδομαρτ-υρίακ, Mt.
xxvi. 59 ; Mk. xiv. 55 ; τόκ θάνατον, an (){)portunity to die.
Rev. ix. 6; Χύσιν, 1 Co. vii. 27; την βασΛ. τοϋ θ(οΰ, Mt.
vi. 33; Lk. xii. 31 ; τα άκω. Col. iii. I : (Ιμήνην. 1 Pet. iii.
I I : άφθαρσΐαν etc. Ro. ii. 7 ; Βόξαν ίκ Ttvos, 1 Th. ii. 6 : τήν
So^av τήν πα\ιά τίνος, Jn. v. 44 : τά Ttvos. the property of
one. 2 Co. xii. 14 ; τήν Βόξαν β(οΰ, to seek to promote the
glory of (tod, Jn. vii. 18 ; viii. 50 ; τό θίλημά tivos, to at-
tempt to establish. Jn. v. 30 ; το σύμφορόν twos, to seek
to further the profit or advantage of one, 1 Co. x. 33, i. q.
ζητ(Χν τά Tivof. ib. X. 24 ; xiii. 5 ; Phil. ii. 21 ; υμάί, to seek
to win your souls, 2 Co. xii. 14 ; τ6ν θιό», to seek the favor
of God (see ('χζητϊω, ά.), Ro. χ. 20; [iii. 11 Trmrg. AVM
mrg.]. foil, by inf. [B. 258 (222) ; \V. § 44, 3] to seek i. e.
desire, endeavor: Mt. xii. 46, [47 (Wll in mrg. only)];
xxi. 46; Mk. [vi. 19LTrmrg.]; .xii. 12; Lk. v. 18; vi. 19;
i.\. 9; Jn. v. 18; vii. 4 [B. § 142, 4], 19 S(|.; Acts xiii. 8:
xvi. 10; Ro. .X. 3; Gal. i. 10; ii. 17; foil, by Ίνα [Β. 237
(205)], 1 Co. xiv. 12. 2. to seek i. e. require, demand:
[σημιΐον, Mk. viii. 1 2 L Τ Tr WII ; Lk. xi. 29 Τ Tr WIT] ;
σοφίαν, 1 Co. i. 22 ; δοκιμήν, 2 Co. xiii. 3 ; τΐ παμά tivos,
to crave, demand something from some one, Mk. viii.
11 ; Lk. xi. 16; xii. 48 ; tv tiw, dat. of pers., to seek in
one i. e. to reiiuire of him, foil, by Ίνα, 1 Co. iv. 2.
[CoMP. : ava-, iV-, «Vi-. σν-ζητίω.^
ζήτημα, -ros, τό, ( ζητ(ω), a question, debate : Acts xv. 2 ;
xxvi. 3 ; νόμου, about the law. Acts xxiii. 29 ; πίρί tihos,
Acts xviii. 15; xxv. 19. [From Soph, down.]*
ζήτησίί, -«us, ή, ( ζητίω) ; a. a seeking : [lldt.], Thuc.
8, 57; al. b. inquiry (Germ, die Frage) : ττίρί T-jvor, Acts
xxv. 20. c. a questioning, debate : Acts xv. 2 (for Rec.
cri>fi)TT;CTit) ; 7 Τ Tr txt. WH ; rtfpi tivos, Jn. iii. 25. d.
a subject of questioning or debate, mutter of controversy;
1 Tim. i. 4 R V, L ; vi. 4 ; 2 Tim. ii. 23 ; Tit. iii. 9.•
ζιζάνιον, -ου, τό, (doubtless a word of Semitic origin ;
Arab. M'jV i^yi". i^W^} [see .S^c/iOf?/, Lex. s. V. p. 148],
Talmud ]"Jir or ["Jli; Suid. ζίζάνίον ή tv τω σ/τω αίμα),
zizanium, [Α. V. tares'], a kind of darnel, bastard wheat
[but see reff. below], resembling wheat except that the
grains are black: Mt. xiii. 25-27, 29 sq. 36, 38, 40.
(Geop. [for reff. see B. D. Am. ed. p. 3177 note]). Cf.
Win. RWB. s. V. Lolch ; Furrer in .Schenkel B. L. iv. 57 ;
[B.D., and Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, s. v. Tares].*
Ζμίρνο, so Tdf. in Rev. i. 11. etc., for Σμύρνα, q. v.
Ζοροβάβίλ, in Joseph. Ζοροβά;ίη\ος, -ου. ό, ('733"JI , i. e.
cither for '753ίτ; dispersed in Babylonia, or for '733 i'lll
begotten in B.abylonia), Zerubbabel, Vulg. Zorobabel, a
descendant of David, the leader of the first colony of the
Jews on their return from the Babylonian exile : Mt. i.
12 sq. ; Lk. iii. 27.•
ζόψοΐ, -ου, ό, (akin to γνόφο!, δνόφοί, νίφος, κνίφας. see
Btlm. Lexil. ii. p. 2G6 [Fishlake's trans, p. 378]; cf. Ciir-
tius p. 706), darkness, blackness: Heb. xii. 18 L Τ Tr
WII;asinHom.Il. 15,191 ; 21,56, etc., used of the dark-
ness of the nether world (cf. Grimm on Sap. xvii. 14),
2 Pet. ii. 4 ; Jude 6 ; ζΰφο! τοΰ σκότου! (cf. n'72N-:|tyn,
Ex. X. 22), the blackness of (i. e. the densest) darkness,
2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 13. [Cf. Trench § c] *
ξιτγόϊ, -οϋ, ό, for which in Grk. writ, before Polyb. τά
ζυγόν was more com., (fr. ζ(ϋγννμι); 1. a yoke; a.
prop, such as is put on draught-cattle. b. metaph.
used of any burden or bondase : as that of slavery, 1
Tim. vi. 1 (Lev. xxvi. 13), δηνλίΐαί. Gal. v. 1 (Soph. Ai.
944; SouXoauwjr, Dem. 322, 12); of troublesome laws
imposed on one, esp. of the Mosaic law. Acts xv. 10;
Gal. V. 1 ; hence the name is so transferred •.o the com-
mands of Christ as to contrast them with the commands
of the Pharisees which were a veritable 'yoke'; yet
ζύμη
273
ζωή
even Christ's commands must be submitted to, though
easier to be kept : Mt. xi. 29 sq. (less aptly in Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 16, 17 Christians are called ot νπο τον ζvy6v ttj!
χάριτο! (Κθόντα [cf. Harnack ad loc.]). 2. u balance,
pair of scales : Rev. vi. .5 (as in Is. ,\1. 12; Lev. xix. 36;
I'lat. rep. 8, 550 e. ; Ael. v. h. 10, 6 ; al.).*
ζύμη, -ης, ή, {ζ^ω [but cf. Curtius p. 62U sq. ; Vanicek,
p. 760]), leaceit : Mt. .\iii. 33 ; Lk. xiii. 21, (Ex. xii. 15;
Lev. ii. U ; Deut. xvi. 3, etc. ; Aristot. gen. an. 3, 4 ; Jo-
seph, antt. 3, 10, 6; Plut. mor. p. 2s9 s([. [(juaest. Rom.
103j) ; Toil SpTov, Mt. xvi. 12; metaph. of inveterate
mental and moral corruption, 1 Co. v. [7], 8, (Ignat. ad
Magnes. 10); viewed in its tendency to infect others,
ζύμη των ΦαρισαΙων: Mt. xvi. 6, 11 ; Mk. viii. 15; Lk. xii.
1, which fig. Mt. xvi. 12 explains of the teaching
of the Phar., Lk. 1. c. more correctly [definitely ?] of their
hypocrisy. It is applied to that which, though small
in ([uantity, yet by its influence thoroughly pervades a
thin"• : either in a good sense, as in the parable ^It. xiii.
33 ; Lk. xiii. 21, (see ζνμόω) ; or in a bad sense, of a per-
nicious influence, as in the proverb μικρά ζνμη ολοκ τό
φν^ιαμα ζυμοΐ α Utile leacen leaveneth the wltule lump,
which is used variously, ace. to the various things to which
it is appUed, viz. a single sin corrupts a whole church,
1 Co. V. 6 ; a slight inchnation to error (respecting the
necessity of circumcision) easily perverts the whole con-
ception of faith. Gal. v. 9 ; but many interpp. explain
the passage ' even a few false teachers lead the whole
church into error.' *
|υ|ΐόω, -ώ ; 1 aor. pass, ίζνμώθην ; (ζνμη) ; to leaven (to
mix leaven with dough so as to make it ferment) : 1 Co.
T. 6 ; Gal. v. 9, (on which pass, see ζύμη) ; «or ΐζυμώθη
όλον, sc. TO SXevpov, words which refer to the saving
power of the gospel, which from a small beginning will
gradually pervade and transform the whole human race:
Ht. xiii. 33 ; Lk. xiii. 21. (Sept., Hipp., Athen., Plut.) *
ζω-γρεω, -ώ ; pf. pass. ptcp. (ζωγρημίνος : (ζωΟ! alive,
and α-γρίω [poet, form of άγρίΰω, ([. v.j) ; 1. to take
eZue (Ilom., Udt., Thuc, Xen., al. : Sept.). 2. univ.
to lake, catch, capture : ΐζω-γρημίνοι υπ αίτοϋ (i.e. τοϋ δια-
βόλου) fls το sKeivov θίΚημα, if they are held captive to
ido his will, 2 Tim. ii. 26 [al. make cf. νπ αΰτ. paren-
thetic and refer exflvov to G ο d ; see ixdvot, 1 c. ; cf. EUic.
in loc] ; ανθρώπους ?σΐ) ζωγρών, thou shalt catch men,
L e. by teaching thou shalt win their souls for the king-
dom of God, Lk. v. 10.*
ζωή, -^f , ή, (fr. ^άω, ζω), Sept. chiefly ίορΟ^'Π; life;
1. univ. life, i. e. the slate of one who is possessed of vital-
it// or is animate : 1 Pet. iii. 10 (on which see ά-γαπάω) ;
Ileb. vii. 3, 16 ; αντος (ό ^«of) didovs πάσιν ζωην #c. πνοην.
Acts xvii. 25 ; πνινμα ζωής ίκ τού if οΰ, the vital spirit,
the breath of (i. e. impartint;) life. Rev. xi. 11 (Ezek.
xxxvii. 5) ; πάσα ψνχη ζωής, gen. of possess.,ei'er^ living
soul. Rev. xvi. 3 (ί L Τ Tr txt. Wll ; spoken of earthly
life: 17 ^ωή TiiOs, Lk. xii. 15; Acts viii. 33 (see αίρω, 3 h.);
tfas. iv. 14 ; iv rij ζωή σον, whilst thou wast Uving on
earth, Lk. xvi. 25 (c'v rj ^ω^ αϋτοϋ. Sir. xxx. 5: 1. 1); f'v
τη ζωη ταντΊ], 1 Co. Χ v. 19: ττάσαι at ημίραί της ζωής τίνος.
Lk. i. 75 Rec. (Gen. iii. 14; Ps. cxxvii. (cxxviii.) 5 ; Sir.
xxii. 12 (10)). ('παγγίλία ζωής της vvv κ. τής μιΚΚοϋσης, a
promise looking to the present and the future life, 1 Tim.
iv. 8 ; ζωή and θάνατος are contrasted in Ro. viii. 38 ;
1 Co. iii. 22 ; Phil. i. 20 ; of a life preserved in the midst
of perils, with a suggestion of vigor, 2 Co. iv. 12 (the
life of Paul is meant here, which exerts a saving power
on the Corinthians by his discharge of his apostolic
duties) ; of the life of persons raised from the dead : e»
καινότητι ζωής, figuratively spoken of a new mode of life,
dedicated to God, Ro. vi. 4 ; of the life of Jesus after his
resurrection. Acts ii. 28; Ro. v. 10; of the same, with
the added notion of vigor, 2 Co. iv. 10 sq. 2. used
emphatically, a. of the absolute fulness of life, both
essential and ethical, which belongs to God, and through
him both to the hypostatic λόγος and to Christ in whom the
λόγοΓ put on human nature : ωσπιρ 6 πατήρ ίχ(ΐ ζωήν ίν
(αντώ, οΰτως ΐ8ωκ(ν καί τώ νΐω ζωήν (χ^ιν €v ίαντω, Jn. ν.
26 ; ίν αυτώ (sc. τω λύγω) ζωή ην και η ζωή ην το φως τώ»
ανθρώπων, in him life was (comprehended), and the life
(transfused from the Logos into created natures) was the
lifht (i. e. the intelligence) of men (because the life of
men is self-conscious, and thus a fountain of intelligence
springs up), Jn. i. 4 ; ό Χόγος της ζωής, the Logos having
life in itself and communicating it to others, 1 Jn. i. 1 ; ή
ζωή (φαν^ρώθη, was manifested in Christ, clothed in flesh,
ibid. 2. From this divine fountain of life flows forth
that life wliich is next to be defined: viz. b. life real
and genuine, " vita quae sola vita nominanda" (Cic. de
sen. 21, 77), α life active and vigorous, devoted to God,
blessed, the portion even in this world of those who put their
trust in Christ, but afier the resurrection to be consummated
by new accessions (among them a more perfect body), and
to last forever (the writers of the O. T. have anticipated
the conception, in their way, by em]iloying D"n to de-
note a happy life and every kind of blessing : Deut. xxx.
15, 19; Mai. ii. 5; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; Prov. viii. 35 ;
xii. 28, etc.) : Jn. vi. 51, 63 : xiv. 6 ; Ro. vii. 10 ; viii. 6,
10; 2 Co. ii. 16 ; PhU. ii. 16 : [Col. iii. 4] ; 2 Pet. i. 3 ;
1 Jn. V. 11, 16, 20; with the addition of τοϋ θίοΰ, sup
plied by God [λΥ. 186 (175)], Eph. iv. 18; ή iv Χριστώ,
to be obtained in fellowship with Christ, 2 Tim. i. 1 ;
μ€ταβ(βηκ€ναι €Κ τον θάνατον fi'ff ^ωι^ΐ', Jn. v. 24 ; 1 Jn. 111.
14; όψίσθαι τήν ζωήν, Jn. iii. 36 ; (χ(ΐν ζωήν, Jn. v. 40;
X. 10 ; 1 Jn. v. 12; with ev (αντω (or -rois ) added, Jn. v.
26 ; [vi. 53] ; διδύι-αι, Jn. vi. 33 ; ;^<iptf ζωής, the grace of
God evident in the life obtained, 1 Pet. iii. 7 ; τό πνινμα
τής ζωής ev Χριστώ Ίησοΰ. the Spirit, the repository and
imparter of life, and which is received by those united
to Christ, Ro. viii. 2 ; ό άρτοϊ τής ζωής (see άρτος, fin.),
Jn. vi. 35, 48; τό φως τής ζ. the light illumined by which
one arrives at life, .Tn. viii. 1 2. more fully ζωή αιώνιος
and ή ζωή ή αιώνιος [(cf. Β. 90 (79)) ; see below] : Jn. iv.
36; [xii. 50]: xvii. 3: 1 Jn. i. 2; ii. 25; [^ρήματα ζωής
αιών. Jn. vi. 68] ; f if ζωήν al. unto the attainment of eter-
nal lite [cf. eh, B. II. 3 c. δ. p. 185'], Jn. iv. 14; vi. 27;
I δι8ήναι ζωήν at-, Jn. x. 28 ; xvii. 2 : 1 .Tn. v. 1 1 ; Ζχ(ΐν ζωήν
at., Jn. iii. 15, [and 16], (opp. to άπόλλυσ^αι), 36 ; v. 24.
ζωη
274
ζωυτΓοιέω
39; vi. 40, 47, 54; χχ. SlLbr. ; iJn. v. 13; ουκ ΐχαν
ζωην αί. €ν ίαυτφ, 1 .In. iii. IJ; (in Enoch xv. 4, 6 the
wicked angels are said before their fall to have been
spiritiKil and partakers of eternal and immortal life), ζωή
and ή ζωή, without epithet, are used of the blessing of
real life after the resurrection, in Mt. y'li. 14; Jn.
xi. 25; Acts iii. 15; v. 20; xi. 18; Ro. v. 17, 18 (on
wliidi sec δι«αίωσΐΓ, fin.) ; 2 Co. v. 4 ; Col. iii. 3 ; 2 Tim.
i. 10; Tit. i. 2; iii. 7; ζιή ϊκ υικμών, life breaking forth
from the abode of the dead, Ko. xi. l."); (ΐσ(\θ(Ίν fit
T. ζωήν, Mt. xviii. 8 sq. ; xix. 17; Mk. ix. 43, 4ύ; ανά-
σταση ζωής i. (]. ίΪΓ ζωήν (2 Macc. vii. 14), Jn. v. 29 (on
the gen. cf. W. l.S« (1"')) ; στίφανο! rijf ζωής i. q. ή ζωή
i)S στίφανο!, Jas. i. 12; Rev. ii. 10; ξύλον τής ζωής, the
tree whose fruit gives and maintains eternal life, Rev.
li. 7; x.xii. 2, 14, 19 [GLTTrWII], (cf. Gen. ii. 9;
Prov. iii. IS; SivSpov ζωής, Prov. xi. 30 ; xiii. 12); cf.
Bleek; Vorless. ub. d. Apokalypse, p. 1 74 sq. : ϋδωρ ζωής,
water the use of wliich serves to maintain eternal life,
Rev. xxi. 6; xxii. 1, 17; in the same sense ζωής πηγαΐ
ν8,Ίτων, Rev. vii. 17 (i L Τ Tr WII ; 17 β!βλο! and το βι-
βλίορ τη! ζωήί, the book in which the names of those are
recorded to whom eternal life has been decreed : Phil,
iv. 3; Rev. iii. 5; xiii. 8 ; xvii. 8 ; xx. 12, 15; xxi. 27;
[xxii. 19 Rec. ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. c.]. more fully
ή όιττω! [Rec. αίώκ.] ζωή, 1 Tim. vi. 19 ; ζωή alaivios [cf.
above] (.iustin. de resurr. 1 p. 588 c. ό λό -yos . . . SiSois
ήμ'ϊν (If ίαντώ την ίκ νίκμων άνάστασιν κα\ τήν μίτά ταΐ/τα
ζωήν αιώνων). Ml. .\χν. 41) (ορρ. to κύΧασις αιών.) ; Acts
xiii. 4G, 48; Ro. ii. 7; vi. 22 sq.; Gal. vi. 8; 1 Tim. vi.
12; after tV τω αϊωνι τω (ρχομίνω, Mk. χ. 30 ; Lk. xviii.
30 ; ίχ(ΐν ζωήν αΐ. Mt. xix. IG ; κ\ηρονομ(Ιν, Mt. xix. 29 ;
Mk. .\. 17; Lk. X. 25; xviii. 18; ii's ^ωήκ αίώκίοι/, unto the
attainment of life eternal, Jn. xii. 25 ; Ro. v. 21 ; 1 Tim.
i. 16 ; Jude 21, (Dan. xii. 2 ; 4 Macc. xv. 2 ; aivvaos ζωή,
2 Macc. vii. 36 ; diSiof ζωή, Ignat. ad Eph. 19). Cf. Kiist-
lin, LehrbegriCf des Ev. Johann. etc. pp. 234 sqq. 338
sqq. ; Reuss, .lohann. Theologie (in Beitrage zu d. theol.
Wissenschaften, vol. i.) p. 76 sqq. [cf. his Hist, de la
Theol. Chrut. bk. vii. ch. xiv.] ; Lipsius, Paulin. Recht-
fertigungslehre, pp. 152 sqq. 185 sq. ; Giider in Ilerzog
viii. 2.54 (ed. 2, 509) sqq. ; B. B. Brilckner, De notione
vocis ζωή ia N. T. Lips. 1858 ; Huther, d. Bedeut. d. Be-
griffe ζωή u. -niirrcidu iiu M. T., in the Jahrbb.f. deutsclie
Theol. lS72,p. 1 S(i<i. [For the relations of the term to
heathen conceptions cf. G. TeichmilUer, Aristot. Forsch.
iii. p. 127 sqq.] Some, as Bretschneider, Wahl, Wilke,
esp. Kauffer (in his book Do biblica ζωή! αιωνίου notione.
Dresd. 1S3S), maintain that ζωή αιώνιος everywhere even
in John's writings refers to life after the resurrection \ but
in this way they are compelled not only to assume a
prophetic use of the perf . in the saying tV τοΟ θανάτου
μ(ταβ(βηκ(ναί fit τ. ζωήν (Jn. V. 24 ; 1 Jn. iii. 14), but
also to interpret the common phrase €χ(ΐ ζωήν αϊ. as
meaning he has eternal life as his certain portion though
as yet on hi in hope, as well as to explain ζωήν ai. oiic
i^ft» €v ίαυτω μίνουσαν (1 Jn. iii. 15) of the hope of
eternal hfe. [.Syn. see βίος, fin.] *
ζώνη, -ης, ή, {ζώννυμι), [iv. Horn, down], a yirdle, belt,
serving not only to gird on flowing garments, Mt. iii. 4 ;
Mk. i. 6 ; Acts xxi. 11 ; Rev. i. 13 ; xv. 6 ; but also, since
it was hollow, to carry money in [A. V. pursel : Mt. x.
9 ; Mk. vi. 8 ; Plut. mor. p. 665 b. ijuaest. conviv. iv. 2,
3, 2 ; " argentum in zonis habentes," Liv. 33, 29. [B. I).
s. v. Girdle.]•
ζώνννμ,ι and ζωννύω: impf. 2 pers. sing, ίζώννυα; ful.
ζώσω; 1 aor. mid. impv. ζώσαι; to gird: τινά, Jn. xxi.
18; Mid. to gird one's self: Acts xii. 8 LTTrU'lL
(Ex. xxix. 9 ; Hom. et al.) [Comp. : άνα-, Sia-, vtpi-,
ΰττο-ζώννυμι.~\ *
ζωογον€'ω. -ώ : fut. ζωoyov^]σω; pres. inf. pass, ^ωανονη-
σβαι; (fr. ζωο-γύνος viviparous, and this fr. ζωύς and
ΓΕΝΩ) ; 1. prop, to bring forth alice (Theo|)hr.,
Diod., Lcian., Plut., al.). 2. to give life (Theoj)hr. de
cans. ])1. 4, 15, 4 ; Ath. 7 p. 298 c.) : τά πάντα, of God, 1
Tim. vi. 13 LTTr WII, [(1 S. ii. 6)]. 3. in the Bible
to preserve alive : τήν ψυχήν, Lk. xvii. 33 ; pass. Acts vii.
19. (For n;nn, Ex. i. 17 ; Judg. viii. 19; [1 S. xxvii. 9,
11; 1 K. xxi'.(xx.)31].)*
ϊωον [or ζώον (so L WH uniformly, Treg. in Heb. and
Rev. ; see Etym. Magn. 413, 24, and reff. s. v. I, ()], -ου,
TO, {ζωάς alive) ; 1. α living being. 2. an animal,
brute, beast: Heb. xiii. 11; 2 Pet. ii. 12; Jude 10; Rev.
iv. 6-9 [on vs. 8 cf. B. 130 (114)], etc.
[SvN.: ζωον differs from θηρίον (at least etymologi-
cally ; but cf. Schmidt as below) in giving prominence to
the vital clement, ivhile βιφίον empliasizes the bestial
element. Hence in Rev. as above ζ. is fitly rendered linii;/
creature in contradistinction to the θηρίον hmst, cf. xi. 7 ; xiii.
1, etc. Sec Trench § Ixxxi. ; Schmidt ii. cb. 70.]
ζωο^ίΓοκ'ω. -ώ : fut. ζωοποιήσω; 1 aor. inf. ^ωοποι^σα>;
Pass., pres. ζωυπηιηϋμαι; 1 fut. ζωοποιηθήσομαι; 1 aor.
ptcp. ζωοπυιηθιίς ; ( ζωοποιοί making alive) ; 1. to
produce alive, beget or bear living young, (Aristot.,
Theophr.). 2. to cause to live, make alive, give Hfe :
τά πάντα, of God, 1 Tim. vi. 13 R G [cf. Neh. ix. 6 ; 2 K.
V. 7 ; Diogn. ep. 5 fin.] ; by spiritual power to arouse and
invigorate, 2 Co. iii. 6 ; Gal. iii. 21 ; to give ζωή αΙώνιος
(in the Johannean sense), Jn. vi. 63 ; of the dead, to re-
animate, restore to life: iCo. XV. 45; Ttra, Jn. v. 21 ; Ro.
iv. 1 7 ; viii. 1 1 ; pass. 1 Co. xv. 22 ; i. q. to give increase
of life: thus of physical life, πρώτον το παιΒίον μίΚιτι,
(ΐτα γάλακτι ζωοποιιΊται, Barn. ep. c. 6, 1 7 ; of the spirit,
ζωοποιηθ<Ίς πνίΰματι, quickened as respects the spirit,
endued with new and greater powers of life, 1 Pet. iii. 18,
on which cf. Lechler, Das apost. u. nachapost. Zeitaltcr,
p. 182 ed. 2; [Zezschtoitz, De Christi ad inferos de-
scensu (Lips. 1857) p. 20]. metaph. (Geop. 9, 11, 7)
of seeds quickening into life, i. e. germinating, springing
u]), growing : 1 Co. xv. 36. [COMP. : σ-υ-ζωοπούω.^ *
275
Η
η, a disjunctive conjunction [of. W. § 53,6]. Used
1. to distinguish things or thoughts which either mu-
tually exclude each other, or one of which can take the
place of the other : ο r (Lat. out, vel) ; a. to distin-
guish one thing from another in words of the same con-
struction : Mt. V. 17 (τον νόμον η τονς προφηταί), 36
(Χ€νκην ή μίλαιναν) ; vi. 31 ; νϋ. l(i ; ilk. vi. 56 ; vii. 11
sq. ; Lk. ii. 24 ; ix. 25 ; Jn. vii. 48 ; xiii. 29 ; Acts i. 7 ;
iii. 12 ; iv. 7 ; Ro. i. 21 ; iii. 1 ; 1 Co. iv. 3 ; v. 10 sq. ; x.
19 ; Gal. i. 10, etc. b. after an interrogative or a de-
clarative sentence, before a question designed to prove
the same thing in another way : Mt. vii. 4, 9 ; xii. 29 ;
xvi. 26 ; xxvi. 53 ; Mk. viii. 37 ; Lk. xiii. 4 ; xiv. 31 ; xv.
8 ; Ro. ix. 21 ; xiv. 10 ; 1 Co. vi. 16. c. before a sen-
tence contrary to the one just preceding, to indicate
that if one be denied or refuted the other must stand :
Sit. XX. 15 (i. e. or, if thou wilt not grant this, is thine eye
etc.) ; Ro. iii. 29 ; 1 Co. ix. 6 ; x. 22 ; xi. 14 [Rec] ; xiv.
36 ; 2 Co. xi. 7 ; η ayvoe'iTe etc., Ro. vi. 3 ; vii. 1 (cf. vi.
14) ; η οίκ o'tdare etc., Ro. xi. 2 ; 1 Co. vi. 9, IG, 19. d.
η .. .ή, either. . . or, Mt. vi. 24 ; xiL 33 ; Lk. xvi. 13; Acts
xxiv. 20 sq. ; 1 Co. xiv. 6. 2. in a disjunctive ques-
tion it corresponds to the Lat. an after utrum ; a. pre-
ceded by nOTfpov, .Tn. vii. 1 7 ; cf . Kiolzad Dev. ii. 2 p. 574
sq. ; i)receded by the interrog. μή, 1 Co. ix. 8 ; preceded
by μήτι, 2 Co. i. 1 7. b. without an interrog. particle
in the first member of the interrogation : ri f trrt (ίκοπώ-
τΐραν. elne'iv . . . η tlndv, Mt. ix. 5 ; Mk. ii. 9 ; Lk. v. 23 ;
add, Mt. xxi. 2J ; xxiii. 17,19; xxvii. 1 7 ; ]\Ik. iii. 4 ; Lk.
vii. 19 ; Acts viii. 34. c. η ... η ... ή, Mk. xiii. 35.
3. as a comparative conj., than ; a. after compara-
tives : Mt. X. 15 ; xi. 22 ; Lk. ix. 13 ; xvi. 1 7 ; Jn. iii. 19 ;
iv. 1 [Tr mrg. om. WII br. if] ; Acts iv. 19; Ro. xiii. 11,
and often, ή is wanting after ifKtiovi foil, by a noun of
number: Mt. xxvi. 53 TTrWII; Actsiv. 22; xxiii. 13,
21 ; xxiv. 1 1 (where Rec. adds η)\ cf. Matthiae § 455
note 4 ; Kuhner ii. p. 847 ; [Jelf § 780 Obs. 1] ; W. 595
(554) ; [B. 168 (146)] ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 410 sq. b.
after ϊτιρον : Acts xvii. 21. c. πρ\ν ή, before that, before,
foil, by ace. with inf. [cf. B. § 139, 35 ; W. § 44, G, also p.
297(279)]: Mt. i. 18; Mk. xiv. 30; Actsii. 20 R G WH
mrg. ; vii. 2; foil, by the aor. subjunc, Lk. ii. 26 Trtxt.
om. WH br. rj; xxii. 34 R G [al. ϊως] : foil, by pres. optat.
Acts .XXV. 16. d. after βίλω i. q. tn prefer : 1 Co. xiv.
19 (foil, by ηΐΓίρ. 2 Mace. xiv. 42) ; exx. fr. Grk. auth. are
given in Kloi: ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 589 sq. ; W. § 35, 2 c. ;
[B. § 149, 7] ; Kuhner ii. p. 841 ; [Jelf § 779 Obs. 3].
e. after oi: Jn. xiii. 10 R G, where after oi χρύαν ΐχα
the sentence goes on as thoucrh the writer had said οίκ
άλλου Ttfos xpelav (χ(ΐ, [cf. AV. 508 (473)]. f. after
ήy€μωv
positive notions, to which in this way a comparative
force is given : after καλόν eori [ii is good . . . rather
Man] i. q. it is better, Mt. xviii. 8 sq. ; Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47 ;
cf. Menander's saying κάΚον το μη ζήν, η ζην άθλίω!, and
Plant, rud. 4,4, 70 tacita niulier est bona semper, quam
loquens; similar exx. in the O. T. are Gen. xlix. 12; Ps.
cxvii. (cxviii.) 8 ; Jon. iv. 3, 8 ; Tob. vi. 13 ; xii. 8 ; Sir.
XX. 25 ; xxii. 15 ; 4 Mace. ix. 1 ; also after λυσιτίλίΐ [ii
is gain . . . rather than^ i. q. it is better (Tob. iii. 6), Lk.
xvii. 2 ; after χαρά iOrot [there will be Joy . . . more than],
Lk. XV. 7 ; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Bttm. Gram. § 149, 7 ;
[B. p. 360 (309)] ; AViner, Kuhner, al, as above. 4.
with other particles; a. αλλ' ή. see άλλύ, I. 10 p. 28'.
b. η yap, see yap, I. fin. c. η καί [cf. W. § 53, 6 note],
a. or even, or also, (Lat. out etiam, rel eliam) : [Mt. vii.
10 LTTrAVH]; Lk. .xi. 11 GLTTrAVH, 12; xviii.
11 ; Ro. ii. 15; 1 Co. xvi. 6 ; 2 Co. i. 13. β. or also (Lat.
an etiam), (in a disjunctive question): Lk. xii. 41 ; Ro.
iv. 9. d. ηπ(ρ, than at all (Lat. quain forte ; Germ.
als etwa), after a compar. [cf. Jelf § 779 Obs. 5] : Jn. xii.
43 [L η nep. WII mrg. ΰπί'ρ], (2 Mace. xiv. 42; Horn.,
Hes.). e. ήτοι . . . ή, either indeed [cf. Kuhner § 540,
5] ... or: Ro. vi. 16 (Sap. xi. 19 ; Hdt. and sqq.).
η |ΐήν, assured! ι/, most certainly, full surely, (a particle
used in asseverations, promises, oaths [cf. W. § 53, 7 b. ;
Paley, Grk. Particles, p. 38 sq.]) : Heb. vi. 14 R G ; see el,
III. 9. (.Sept. ; very often in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down.) *
η-γεμονενω ; {ήγ(μών) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; a. to be
leader, to lead the 'ray. b. to rule, command : with gen.
of a province [cf. B. 169 (147)], to be governor of a prov-
ince, said of a proconsul, Lk. ii. 2 ; of a procurator, Lk.
iii. 1.•
ηγεμονία, -as, η, (ήγ(μών), [Hdt., Thuc, Plat., al.],
chief command, rule, sovereignty : of the reign of a Ro-
man emperor, Lk. iii. 1 ; Joseph, antt. 18, 4, 2.*
η-γεμών, -ovoj, a, {ή-γ^ομαι), in class. Grk. a word of
very various signification : α leader of any kind, a guide,
ruler, prefect, president, chief, general, commander, sover-
eign ; in the N. T. spec. 1. a ' legatus Caesaris,' an
officer administering a province in the name and with the
authority of the Roman emperor; the governor of a prov-
ince: Mt. X. 18; Mk. .xiii. 9; Lk. xxi. 12 ; 1 Pet. ii. 14.
2. a procurator (Vulg. praeses; Luth. Landpfleger), an
officer who was attached to a proconsul or a propraetor
and had charge of the imperial revenues ; in causes re-
lating to these revenues he administered justice, (called
fViVpoTrof, δίοικΐ)τήί, in prof. auth.). In the smaller
provinces also, which were so to speak appendages of
the greater, he discharged the functions of governor of
the province ; and such was the relation of the procu-
ήΎίομαι
276
ηκιο
rator of <Ιιι<1α>α to the governor of Syria (cf. Krchs,
Obscrvv. J), (il s(i(|. ; Fiic/iei; De vitiis lexx. etc. p. i'J'i
s<jq.; It-'i». KWB. s. V. Procuratoreii; Sieffert in Uerzo^
2 8. V. Laiidplleger; Kreukel in Scbenkel iv. 7; [BB.
DD. 6. V. IVocurator]) ; so of Pilate, Felix, Festus: Mt.
xxvii. 2, 11, 14 S(i. 21, 23 [R G L Trmrg.], 27; xxviii.
14 ; Lk. XX. 20; Acts xxiii. 24, 2G, 83 ; xxiv. 1, 10; xxvi.
30 ; Πίλύτοί ό T^t Ίοι/δαίαΓ ή-γιμών, .losepli. antt. 18, 3, 1 ;
(Tai'it. ann. lo, 44 Chri.'itiis 'Πίκτίο iiiiperitante per
procuratorem Pontiuni Pilatum supplicio adfectus
erat). 3. frst, lending, chief: so of a principal town
as the capital of the region, iMt. ii. β, where the meaning
is, ' Thou art by no means least among the chief cities
of Judah;' others less aptly (Bleek also [(where?);
in his (posthumous) Synopt. Erkliirung etc. i. 119
he repu<liate3 tliis interp. (ascribed by him to Hof-
mann, Weiss, u. Erfiill. ii. 56)]), 'Thou shalt by no
means be regarded as least among i. e. by the princes,
the nobles, of the state.' The saying is taken fr. Mic. v.
2 (1), where the Ilebr. '£3^X3 (which the Sept. give cor-
rectly, (V χι\ιάσι) seems to have been read "37N3 by the
Evangelist [ef. Eilcra/ieiin, Jesus the Messiah, i. 206].*
ήγ<Όμαι, -οϋμαι ; pf . ηγημω ; 1 aor. ήγησάμην ; (f r. άγω
[cf. Curtius p. 688]); dep. mid.; fr. llom. down; 1.
to lead, i. c. a. lo go before ; b. lo be a leader ; to
rule, command; lo have autliorily over: in the N. T.
BO only in the pres. ptcp. ή•γοΰμ(νος, π prince, of regal
power (Ezek. xliii. 7 for ^^o ; Sir. xvii. 1 7), Mt. ii. 6 ; a
(royal) governor, viceroi/. Acts vii. 10; chief Lk. xxii.
26 (opp. to ό 8ιακομώι>) : leading as respects influence,
controlling in counsel, tv τισι, among any. Acts .w. 22 ;
with gen. of the ])ers. over whom one rules, so of the
overseers or leaders of Christian churches: lleb. xiii.
7, 17, 24, (οϊκου, 2 Chr. xxxi. 13; των πάτριων, 1 Esdr.
V. 65 (66), G7 (6H) ; της πά\(ως, Judg. ix. 51 Alex.; a
military leader, 1 Alacc. ix. 30; 2 Mace. xiv. 16; used
also in (!rk. writ, of any kind of a leader, chief, com-
mander, So))h. Phil. 3S6; often in Polyb. ; Diod. 1, 4 and
72; I.cian. Alex.44; al.); witligen.of tliething, ToOXoyou,
tlie leader in speech, chief speaker, spokesman ; Acts
xiv. 12 of Mercury, who is called also τοί λόγου ήγfμώv
in Jambhch. de myster., init. 2. (like the Lat. (/«co)
L q. to consider, deem, account, lliink: with two ace, one
of the obj., the other of the pred., Acts xxvi. 2 ; Phil. ii.
3, 6 (on which see άρπα-γμός, 2 [\V. § 44, 3 c.]) ; iii. 7 [cf.
B. 59 (51) ; W. 274 (2.^8)] ; 1 Tim. i. 12; vi. 1 ; Heb.
X. 29; xi. 11, 26; 2 Pet. i. 13; ii. 13; iii. 9, 15. τικα
i)S Tiva, 2 'I'h. iii. I. τ [cf. W. § 65, 1 a.] ; Tivh νπ(ρ(κπ(ρισ-
σωί, to esteem one exceedingly, 1 Th. v. 13 (jrfpi η-ολλοΟ,
Ildt. 2, 115 ; 77f/)! πλίίστου, Thuc. 2, 89) ; w. aco. of the
thing foil, by όταν. .las. i. 2 ; arayieaioi', foil, by an inf.,
2 Co. ix. 5 ; Phil. ii. 25 ; hUamv, foil, by an inf., 2 Pet. i.
13 ; foil, by an ace. w. inf., Phil. iii. 8. [Comp. : δι-, cV-
i»-. (f-, πρι>•ηγ(ομαί'
Syn.: Sojffo) 1, τΐΎΐομαι 2, νομίζω 2, οίομαι: rjy.
and νομ. denote a holief restini: not on one's inner feelini^ or
sentiment, but on tiie due consideration of external f^rounds,
the weighing and comparing of facts ; Sok. and oi., on the
other hand, describe a snlijective judgment growing out of
inclination or a view of facts in their relation to us. 7/7.
denotes a more deliberate and careful judgment than νομ. ;
of. a subjective judgment which hius feeling rather than
thought {Son.) for its ground. Of. Schmidt ch. 17.]
T)8('ci>f, adv., (fr. ή6ύ{ sweet, nleasant), with /ilrn.oire,
gladly: Mk. vi. 20; xii. 37; 2Cj. xi. 19. [From .Soph.,
Plat, down.] '
ήΒη, adv., [fr. Horn, down ; on deriv. see Vanicek p.
745; Peile p. 395], in the N. T. every wh. of time, uoic, al-
ready, {hsA. jam): Mt.iii. 10; v. 28; xiv. 1.') ; .Mk.iv.37;
xi. 11; Lk. vii. 6; xii. 49; [xxiv. 29 Τ WH Tr txt., L Tr
mrg. br.] ; Jn. iv. 35 (36), 51 ; xix. 28 (that all things
were now finished and that nothing further remained
for him to do or to suffer) ; Acts xxvii. 9 ; l!o. xiii. 1 1
(that it is already time to wake up and imlidge no
longer in sleep) ; 1 Co. iv. 8, and often ; νϋν . . . iJSij, now
already (Lat. Jam nunc) : 1 Jn. iv. 3 ; ή&η -ποτί, now at
last, at length /tow: with fut. Ro. i. 10; [with aor. I'hil.
iv. 10. Syn. see ιΊρτι, Hn.]
ήεκΓτο (neut. |)lur. of the superl. rjbtcrroi fr. {j8vs), adv.,
most glailly (cf. ή&ϊω!) : 2 Co. xii. 9. 15. (Soph., Xen.,
Plat., al.) •
ηδονή, -η!, ή, (ηδομαι), [Simon. 1 1 7, Ildt. down], pleas-
ure: 2 Pet. ii. 13; plur., Lk. viii. 14 (al ή&οναι τ. βίου);
Tit. iii. 3 ; Jas. iv. 3 ; by meton. desires for pleasure
(Grotius, cupiditales rerum voluptariarum), Jas. iv. 1.*
ήδνι-οσ•μο5, -ov, {^hvs and οσμή), .^wect-smelling (Plin.
jucmide olens) ; neut. to ήδ. as subst. garden-mint (i. q.
μίνθη, Strab. 8, 3, 14 p. 344; Theojdir. hist. i)lant. 7, 7;
cf. cans, jilant. 6, 22 (20)), a kin<l of small odoriferous
herb, with whi( h the Jews used to streiv the floors of
their houses and synagogues; (it was called by them
Xnro, see Buxtorf Lex. talm. s. v. j). 122S [p. (;2:! cd.
Fischer]) : Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi. 42. [BB.DD.]•
ηθθ5, -for (-our), TO, (akin to ΐβος, prob. fr. E£2, wlieiu'e
ημαι, (ζω, [cf. Vanicek p. 379]); 1. a customary
abode, dwelling-place, haunt, customary state, (llom.,
Hes., Ildt., al.). 2. custom, usagi, (cf. (ierni. Sitzeti,
Silte) ; phir. τα ηθη morals, character, (Lat. mores) : 1 Co.
XV. 33 fr. Menander ; cf. Menand. fragm. ed. Meineke
p. 75. (Sir. XX. 26 (25) ; 4 Mace. i. 29 ; ii. 7, 21.) *
ήκω; impf. ηκον (Acts xxviii. 23. where LTTr WII
7,\θου) ; fut. η^ω ; 1 aor. ηξα (Lk. xiii. 35 R G ; Κι•ν. ii.
25 ; iii. 9 Hec.) ; pf. ηκα (often in Sept., as Gen. xiii. 7,
9; .xiv. 16; [xlvii. 4]; Jo.sh. ix. 12 (7); Job xvi. 22,
etc. ; in the N. T. once, Mk. viii. 3 R" L Τ Tr txt., see
WH. App. p. 169; the older and more elegant writ.
[Aeschyl., Ildt., Thuc., al.] use only the pres. impf. and
fut. ; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 743 sq. ; Bttm. Ausf. Si)r. ii.
205; [Veitch s. v.]; "W. 87 (S3); [B. 59 (51)]) ; Sept.
for K13; lo have come, have arrived, be present, [W. 274
(258) ; B. 203 (176)] ; hence impf. with force of plupf.
(cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1136; Kruger § 5.S, 1, 4) : absol. of
persons, Mt. xxiv. 50; Mk. viii. 3 ; Lk. xii. 46; xv. 27;
Jn. viii. 42 ; Heb. x. 7, 9, 37 ; 1 Jn. v. 20 ; Rev. ii. 25 ;
iii. 9 ; xv. 4 ; foil, by από with gen. of place, Mt. viii. 1 1 ;
Lk. xiii. 29 ; by eV with gen. of place. Ro. xi. 26 ; with
ήΧί 277
addition of (tr w. ace. of place, Jn. iv. 47 ; μακρόθίν, Mk.
viii. 3 ; npos τίνα, Acts x.wiii. 23 Rec. ; metapii. lo come
to one i. e. seek an intimacy with one, become his fol-
lower: Jn. vi. 37 ; ΐπΐ τίνα, to come upon one (unexpect-
edly). Rev. iii. 3. of time and events : absol., Mt. xxiv.
14 ; Jn. ii. 4 ; 2 Pet. iii. 10 ; Rev. xviii. 8 ; ews «v ηξη [L
Τ WH Tr in br. ηξ^; see above and B. 231 (199)J (sc.
β καφόί), oTf (ϊττητί, Lk. xiii. 35 ; ΐπΐ τίνα, metaph. to
come upon one, of things to be endured (as evils, calami-
tous times) : Mt. xxiii. 36 ; Lk. xix. 43. [Comp. : av,
Λαθ~τικω•'\ *
ήλΐ (L η\ί, Τ ηΚ(Ί [see WH. Λρρ. p. 105, and s. v. «,
i; on the breathing cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 107; WH. Intr.
§408; WH Λωί]), allobr. word, ■'7i?, my God: Mt.
.vxvii. 46. [Cf. ί\<ύΐ, and the ref. there.] *
"HXC (R" Ήλί [on the breathing in codd. see Tdf.
Proleg. p. 107], TTr WH Ήλ« [see WH. App. p. 155,
and s. V. «, i]), indecl., Huli, the father of Joseph, the
husband of Mary : Lk. iii. 23.*
'HXmf ([so R"«'^G; WII'HXfi'at cf. WH. App. p.
155 ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 84 and see ei, i, but] L Tr Ήλι'αΓ,
Tdf. 'HXei'ar, [on the breathing in codd. see Tdf. Proleg.
p. 107; WH. Intr. § 408; current edd. are not uni-
form]), -ου [Β. 17 (16), 8; but once (viz. Lk. i. 17 TTr
mrg. WH) -a], o, (Π^^Κ or in^Sx i. e. either ' strength of
.Jehovah' or 'my God is Jehovah'), Elijah, a prophet
born at Thisbe [but see B. D. s. v., also s. v. Tishbite], the
unflinching champion of the theocracy in the reigns of
the idolatrous kings Ahab and Ahaziah. He was taken
up to heaven without dying, whence the Jews expected
he would return just before the advent of the Messiali,
whom he would jjrepare the minds of the Israelites to
receive (1 K. xvii.-xix. ; 2 Iv. ii. 6 sqq. ; 2 Chr. xxi. 12 ;
Mai. iv. 4 (iii. 22); Sir. xlviii. 1, 4, 12 [cf. Ederskeim,
Jesus the Messiah, App. viii.]) : Mt. xi. 14; .\vi. 14;
xvii. 3 sq. 10-12; xxvii. 47, 49; Mk. vi. 15; viii. 28; ix.
4sq. 11-13; xy. 35sq.; Lk. i. 17; iv. 25 sq.; ix. 8, 19,30,
33, 54 [R G L]'; .In. i. 21, 25 ; .las. v. 1 7 ; ev Ηλία, in the
narrative concerning Elijah, Ro. \i. 2 [see ev, 1. 1 d.].*
ηλικία, -as, ή, (ίλι| mature, of full age, Horn. Od. 18,
373 [al. of the same age; cf. Ebeling, Lex. Horn. s. v.;
Pnpe, Lex. s. v.]); fr. Hom. down; 1. age, time of
life; a. univ. : Mt. vi. 27; Lk. xii. 25, [in these pass.
' term or length of life ' ; but others refer them to 2
below ; see Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. p. 4 ; Jws. Mori-
.von. Com. on Mt. 1. c] cf. ττήχνς, and De Wette, Meyer,
Bleek on Mt. 1. c. ; παρά καφαν ηλικίας, beyond the proper
stage of life [A. V. past age'\, Heb. xi. 1 1 ("2 Mace. iv.
40 ; 4 Mace. v. 4). b. adult age, tnaturiti/ : ίχ€ΐν ήλί-
κίαν [Α. V. to he of age~\, .In. i.\. 21, 23. c. .*{iitfahle affe
for anything ; with gen. of the thins; for which it is fit :
του γάμον, Dem. ; τοϋ η5η φρον(ΐν. Plat. Eryx. p. 396 b. :
metaph. of an attained state of mind fit for a thing :
τοϋ πληρώματος τοϋ Χρίστου, the age in which we are
fitted to receive the fulness (see πλήρωμα, 1 ) of Christ.
Eph. iv. 13 [al. refer this to 2; cf. EUic. in loc.]. 2.
mature (Dem., Plut., al.) : rij ηλικία μικρός, Lk. xix. 3 ;
TrpoKoirrdv ηλικία, i. e. in height and comehness of stature I
ήμερα
(Bengel, Juslam proceritatem nactus est et decoram), Lk.
ii. 52 ; cf. Meyer, Bleek, ad loc*
ηλίκοΐ, -η, -ov, (ηλιξ, See ηλικία), prop, as old as, as tall
as ; univ. (Lat. i/uantus) : how great. Col. ii. 1 ; Jas. iii.
5 [cf. B. 253 (21 7)] ; how small (Lcian. Hermot. 5), ήλικοψ
πύρ. Jas. iii. 5 L Τ Tr WII [B. 1. c.].•
ηλιοϊ, -OV, 6 [often anarthrous, W. 120 (114); B. 89
(78)], {ίλη [root us to burn, cf. Curtius § 612]) ; Sept. for
ν?ψ ; the sun : Mt. v. 45 : .xiii. 43 ; Mk. xiii. 24 ; Lk. iv.
40; .xxi. 25; Actsxxvi. 13; iCo. xv. 41; Rev. i. 16, etc.
i. q. the rags of the sun. Rev. vii. 16; i. q. the light oj
dag: μη βλίπων τον ηλιον, of a blind man. Acts xiii. 11.
ηλοϊ, -ου, ό, α nail: Jn. xx. 25. [(From Hom. on.)]*
ημ4ΐΐ, see (γώ.
ήμί'ρα, -at, ή, (fr. rjpepos, -ov, prop, ήμίρα ωρα the mild
time, cf. Lob. Paral. p. 359 ; [but cf. Curtius p. 594 sq. ;
Vanicek p. 943]); Ilebr. Dl'' ; dag; used 1. of the
natural dag, or the interval betiveen sunrise and sun-
set, as distinguished fr. and contrasted with night ; a.
prop, ημίρας, by day, in the daytime, [cf. colloq. Eng.
of a dag; W. § 30, I'l ; B. § 132,' 26], Rev. xxi. 25; ήμί-
pas K. νυκτός, day and night [cf. W. 552 (513 sq.); Lob.
ParaUp. p. 62 sq. ; Ellic. on 1 Tim. v. 5], Mk. v. 5 ; Lk.
.xviii. 7; Acts ix. 24 ; 1 Th. ii. 9 ; iii. 10; [2 Th. iii. 8 L
txt.TTrWH]; lTim.v. 5; 2 Tim. i. 3; Rev.iv.8; vii.
15; xii. 10; xiv. 11; xx. 10; ήμίρας μίσης, at midday.
Acts xxvi. 1 3 ; νύκτα κα'ι ήμϊραν [ W. 230 ( 2 1 6 ) ; Β. § 1 3 1 ,
11], Mk. iv. 27; Acts .\x. 31 ; 2 Th. iii. 8 R G ; hyper-
bolically i. q. tvithout intermis.'<ion, λατριϋ^ιν, Lk. ii. 37;
Acts xxvi. 7 ; ήμίρας 68ός, a day's journey, Lk. ii. 44
((Jen. xxxi. 23 [μιας ήμίρας όδόν, .loseph. c. Αρ. 2, 2, '.) :
cf. W. 188 (177) ; B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Day's Journey]) :
τας ήμίρας, acc. of time [W. and B. as above], during the
dags, Lk. xxi. 37; ΐκιίνην τ. ήμίραν, Jn. i. 39 (40) ; πΰσαν
ημίραν, daily, Acts v. 42; ίκ δηναρίου την ήμίραν, so sonn-
times we say, for a shilling the dag, Mt. xx. 2; δά>δ(κά
(Ισιν ωραι της ημίρας, Jn. xi. 9 ; to the number of dav.s
are added as many nights, Mt. iv. 2; ,\ii. 40; yiverai
ήμιρα, day dawns, it grows light. Lk. iv. 42 ; vi. 13 ; xxii.
66; Acts xii. 18; xvi. 35; xxiii. 12; xxvii. 29, 33, 39,
(Xen. an. 2, 2, 13 ; 7, 2, 34) : πιριπατίΊν iv τ. ήμϊρα, .In.
xi. 9 ; ή ήμίρα φαίνιι. Rev. λ iii. 12 ; ij ήμ^ρα κλίνιι, the day
declines, it is towards evening, Lk. L\. 12 ; xxiv. 29. b.
metaph. the ' day ' is regarded as the time for abstaining
from indulgence, vice, crime, because acts of the sort are
perpetrated at night and in darkness: 1 Th. v. 5, 8;
hence ό αίων αυτοί (see αιών. .i) is likened to the night,
αιών μίλλων to dag, and Christians are admonished to
live decorously as though it were liiilit, i. e. as if ό αΙών
6 μίλλων were already come, Ro. xiii. 1 2 sq. ίως ήμίρα
ΐατίν while it is day, i. e. while life gives one an ojjpor-
tunity to work, Jn. ix. 4. of the light of knowledge,
2 Pet. i. 19. 2. of the civil dag, or the space of
twenty-four hours (thus including the night) : Jit. vi. 34 ;
Mk. vi. 21 ; Lk. xiii. 14, etc. ; opp. to an hour, Mt. xxv.
13; to hours, months, years, Rev. ix. 15; Gal. iv. 10:
r; (V ημίρα τρυφη. the revelling of a day, i. e. ephemeral,
very brief, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [al. refer this to 1 b. above];
ήμ€ρα
278
ήμερα
(πτάκΐ! τ^Γ ήμ. seven times in the (space of a) day, Lk.
xvii. 4 ; the dat. ήμίρα of tlie day on (in) ichich [cf. W.
§ 31, 9 ; B. § 133 (.'(i)] : as τρίττ, ήμίρα, Mt. xvi. 21 ; Mk.
ix. 31 [Rec.] ; Lk. xvii. 29 sq. ; Acts ii. 41, etc. ; ήμίρα κ.
ήμίρα, day by day, every day, 2 Co. iv. 16 (after the
Ilebr. DV1 DV Esth. iii. 4, where Sept. naff ίκάστην ημί-
pav. and Dl" DV Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 20, where Sept. ήμίραν
κα<)' ήμίραν; [cf. W. 4G3 (432)]) ; ήμίραν (ξ ήμίρα! (see
(Κ. \\. 2), 2 Pet. ii. 8; as an ai-e. of time [\V. 230 (215
sq.) ; B. § 131, 11] : οΚην τ. ήμίραν, Κο. viii. 3G ; χ. 21 ;
μιαν ήμίραν. Acts xxi. 7; and in the phir., .In. ii. 12; iv.
40; xi.fi; Actsix.l9; x.48; xvi.l2; xx.6; xxi. 4,10;
x.w. (!, 14; xxviii. 7, 12[Ldat.], 14; Gal. i. 18; Rev. .\i.
3, 9. joined vpith Prepositions: άπο with gen. from
. . .forth, from . . . on, Mt. xxii. 46 ; Jn. xi. S3 ; Acts x.
30; XX. IH; Phil. i. 5; άχρι w. gen. until, up to, Mt. xxiv.
38; Lk. i. 20; xvii. 27; Acts i. 2 ; [22 Tdf.] ; ii. 29 ;
xxiii. 1 ; xxvi. 22 ; άχρι niirrc ήμερων, until five days had
passed, i. e. after five days. Acts xx. li ; μίχρι w. gen. until,
Mt. xxviii. 1.5 [LTr, Wll in br.]; ίωί w. gen. until, Mt.
xxvii. 64 ; Acts i. 22 [T άχρι] ; Ro. xi. 8 ; διά w. gen., see
διό, A. II. ; ττρό w. gen. before, .In. xii. 1 (on which see προ,
b.) ; (v w. dat. sing., Mt. xxiv. 50 ; Lk. i. 59 ; Jn. v. 9 ; 1 Co.
X. 8 [L Τ Tr WH txt. om. eV] ; Heb. iv. 4, etc.; iv w. dat.
plur., Mt. xxvii. 40 ; Mk. xv. 29 [L Τ Trom. AVH br. iv'] ;
Jn. ii. 1 9 [Tr ΛΥΗ br. iv], 20, etc. ; ds, unto, (ar/ainst), Jn.
xii. 7 ; Rev. ix. 15 ; «Vi w. ace. for, (Germ, auf . . . hin),
Actsxiii.31 (for many days successively) : xvi. 18; xxvii.
20; Heb. xi. 30; Kaff ήμίραν, daily [\V. 401 (374 sq.)],
Mt. xxvi. 55 ; Mk. xiv. 49 ; Lk. xvi. 19 ; xxii. 53 ; Acts
ii. 46 »i\. ; iii. 2 ; xvi. 5 ; xix. 9 ; 1 Co. xv. 31 ; 2 Co. xi.
28 ; Heb. vii. 27 ; x. 1 1 ; also τό Kaff ήμίραν, Lk. xi. 3 ;
xix. 4 7 ; Acts xvii. 11 [L Τ Tr txt. ora.AVH br. το], (Polyb.
4, 18, 2 ; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 734 ; [Jelf § 456] ; Bnhdy. p.
329; B. 96 (84)); Kaff ίκάστην ήμίραν, every day, Heb.
iii. 13 (Xen. mem. 4, 2, 12); also κατά πάσαν ήμ. Acts
xvii. 1 7 ; μ^τά, after, Mt. xvii. 1 ; xxvi. 2 ; .x.xvii. 63 ; Mk.
viii. 31 ; Lk. i. 24 ; Jn. iv. 43 ; xx. 2G ; Acts i. 5 ; .xv. 36,
etc. οΰ jrXiiout flalv efiol ήμίραι αφ' ή{, sc. ήμίρα!, Acts
xxiv. 11. A specification of the number of days is
thrust into the discourse in the nominative, as it were
adverbially and without any grammatical connection,
(cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 310 sq.; ΛΥ. 516 (481) and § 62,
2; [B. 139 (122)]) : ήδη ήμίραι (Rec. ήμίρα!. by correc-
tion) Tpfii, Mt.xv. 32 ; Jlk. viii. 2 ; ώσύ ήμίραι όκτιά, Lk.
ix. 28. ήμ€ρών Βιαγίνομίνων τίνων, certain days having
intervened. Acts .xxv. 13. ήμίρα and ήμίραι are used w.
the gen. of a noun denoting a festival or some solemnity
usually celebrated on a fixed day : τύν άζΰμων. Acts xii.
3; T^t nfvTeKooTrJ!, Acts ii. 1; xx. 16; τον σαββάτου,
Lk. xiii. 14, 16 ; Jn. xix. 31 ; ή κυριακή ήμίρα, the Lord's
day, i. e. the day on which Christ returned to life, Sun-
day therefore. Rev. i. 10; the foil, phrases also have
reference to sacred or festival days : Kpiveiv ήμίραν παρ'
ήμίρα", to exalt one day above another, and Kplvciv πάσαν
ήμίραν. to esteem every <lay sacred, Ro. xiv. 5 : φρονά,ν
την ήμίραν, to regard a particular day that is selected for
religious services, Ro. xiv. 6 ; ήμίρα! παρατηρ^Ίσθαι, to
observe days, Gal. iv. 10. After the Hebr. usage, which
in reference to a definite ])eriud of time now elapsed
speaks of a certain number of days as fulfilled or
completed (see Gesenius s. v. vh'3), we have the
phrases ίπλήσθησαν a'l ήμίραι τη! Xftroupyiar, the days
spent in priestly service, Lk. i. 23 (when he had been
eni))loyed in sacred duties for the appointed time) ; του
fffpiTfpfii/ αΐτήν, for him to be circunicised, Lk. ii. 21 ;
του καθαρισμού αυτών. 'i\i. 22 ; σνιη•€\(σθ€ίσών ήμΐρών, Lk,
iv. 2 ; τ€\€ΐωσάντων τάί ημίρα!, when they had spent
there the time appi)intecl, Lk. ii. 43; iv τώ σνμπληροΰ-
σθαι τα! ήμ. τη! άναλή^Ιτιω! αϋτοΰ, ivhen the numljer of
days was now being completed which the reception of
Jesus into heaven required, i. e. before which that re-
ception could not occur, Lk. ix. 51 ; ή ίκπλήρωσΐ! των
ήμ(ράιν τοΰ άγνισμοΰ, the fulfilment of the days required
for the purification, Acts xxi. 2G ; συvτf\ovvτaι at ήμίραι,
ib. 27 ; iv τώ σνμπ'^ηρονσθαι τ. ήμίραν τη! π(ντ€κηστή!,
when the measure of time needed for the day of Pente-
cost was being completed, i. e. on the very day of Pen-
tecost, Acts ii. 1. As in some of the exx. just a<lduced
ήμίρα is joined to the gen. of a thing to be done or to
happen on a certain day, so also in ήμ. τοΰ ίνταφιασμοΰ,
.Τη. xii. 7 ; άναδιίξίω!, Lk. i. 80. with gen. of pers., iv
t;i ήμίρα σου [but L Γ Tr WII om. σου] in the day favor-
able for thee, the day on which salvation is offered thee
and can be obtained, Lk. xix. 42 (Polyb. 18, 5, 8 μή
napfj! τον καιρόν . . . ση νυν ίστιν ήμίρα, σο! ό καιρός ;
"mens dies est, tempore accepto utimur" Sen. Med.
1017). 3. of t Ii e las! day of the prenent a<je (see
αιών, 3), the day in which Christ will return from heavei»,
raise the dead, hold the final judgment, and perfect his
kingdom, the foil, expressions are used : ή ήμίρα, simply,
Ro. xiii. 12; Heb. x. 25, cf. 1 Th. v. 4 ; (t/) ήμίρα τον
κυρίου, Χρίστου, 'ίησον Χρίστου, τοΰ νΐοΐι τον άνθρώττου,
Lk. xvii. 24 R (! Τ Tr WH mrg. ; 1 Co. i. 8 ; v. 5 ; 2 Co.
i. 14; Phil. i. 6. 10; iTh.v. 2; 2Th.ii. 2; 2Pet. iii. 10; ή
ήμίρα κυρίου ή μ(γύ\η, Acts ii. 20 (fr. Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4)) ;
ήμίμα J] 6 υ\ο! τοΰ άνθρώηου άτΓυκα\υπτ€ται, Lk. xvii. 30; η
ήμίρα τ. θfoΰ, 2 Pet. iii. 12; ή ήμίρα ίκίίνη η μ€γάλη τοΰ
παιτοκράτορο!. Rev. xvi. 14, (even in the prophecies of
the O.T. t/ie datj of.Tehovah is spoken of, in which .Jehovah
will execute terrible judgment upon his adversaries, as
.Joel i. 15; ii. 1, 11 ; Is. ii. 12; xiii. 6,9; Am. v. 18,20;
Jer. xxvi. 10 (xlvi. 10) ; Ezek. xiii. 5 ; xxx. 2 sqcp ; Ob.
1 ."j ; Zeph. i. 7 sqq. ; Mai. iii. 11); ή ήμ. ίκίΐνη and ίκιίνη
ή ήμ., Mt. \n. 22 ; Lk. vi. 23; χ. 12; xxi. 34 ; 2Th.i. 10;
2 Tim. i. 12, 18 ; iv. 8 ; ή ίσχάτη ήμ., Jn. vi. 39 .«fp 44, 54 ;
xi. 24 ; xii. 48 ; ήμ. άπολυτρώσ^ως, Eph. iv. 30 ; ίπισκοηη!
(see ίπισκοπή, b.), 1 Pet. ii. 12 ; κρΊσ(ω!, Mt. x. 15 ; xi.
22,24; xii. 36; Mk. vi. 11 R Lbr.; 2Pet.ii.9; iii. 7, cf.
Acts xvii. 31 ; rrJ! «piVewr, 1 Jn. iv. 17; opyijf κ. άποκα•
\ΰψ(ω! δικαιοκρισία! τ. Beov, Ro. ii. 5 (D>'t"DV, Ezek.
xxii. 24; Π•ίΠ•-•1Χ Dl", Zeph. ii. 3 sq. ; [rT)3j'-D1", Prov.
xi. 4 ; Zeph. i. 15, 18, etc.]); ή ήμ. ή μιγάλη τη! όργήι
αντοΰ, Rev. vi. 17; ήμ. σφαγής, of slaughter (of the
wicked), Jas. v. 5 [(.Jer. xii. 3, etc.)]. Paul, in allusion
to the phrase ήμίρα κυρίου, uses the expression ανθρωπινή
ημ,ετερον
279
ηρ€μθ=;
ήμίρα for a tribunal of assembled judges on the day of
trial [A. V. ynan's judgment'] (cf. the Germ. Landtag,
Reichstag), 1 Co. iv. 3. 4. By a Hebraistic usage
(though one not entirely unknown to Grk. writ. ; cf.
Soph. A]. 131, 623 ; Eirr. Ion 720) it is used of time in
general, (as the Lat. dies is sometimes) : Jn. xiv. 20 ;
xvi. 23, 26; Heb. viii. 9 [cf. B. 316 (271); W. 571
(531)]; την (μην ήμΐραν, the time when I should appear
among men as ^Messiah, Jn. viii. 56 ; cV τί) ημ τΐ] πονηρά,
in the time of troubles and assaults with wliiuli demons
try Christians, Eph. vi. 13 ; ήμ. σωτηρίας, the time wlien
any one is or can be saved, 2 Co. vi. 2 ; eh ήμίραν αΙωνος,
for all time, forever (see αιών, 1 a.), 2 Pet. iii. 1**; much
uftener in the plur. : ημίραι πονηροί, Eph. v. 16 αφ' ήμε-
ρων αρχαίων. Acts XV. 7; αί πρϋτΐρον ήμ. Heb. ΧΓ 32;
πάσα! rat ήμ€ρας, through all days, always, Mt. xxviii. 20
(D'P'n-S^, Deut. iv.40; v. 26 (29), and very often; ηματα
πάντα, Horn. II. 8, 539 ; 12, 133 ; 13, 826, etc.) ; ai Εσχα-
τοι ήμ. (see βσχατοΓ, 1 sub fin.), Acts ii. 1 7 ; 2 Tim. iii. 1 ;
Jas. V. 3 ; αϊ ήμ. ανται, the i)resent time, Acts iii. 24 ; the
time now spoken of, Lk. i. 39; vi. 12; Acts i. 15, etc.;
€v Ta'ts ήμ. €K€tvais (see €Κ€ίνος, 2 b. p. 195'') ; προ τούτων
των ήμΐρόιν, Acts V. 36 ; xxi. 38 ; προς ολίγας ήμ. for a
short time, Heb. xii. 10; ίΚίΰσονταί ήμ. όταν etc., Jit. i.x.
15 ; Mk. ii. 20 ; Lk. v. 35 ; 6τ€ etc. Lk. xvii. 22 ; ήξουσιν
ήμ. €πι at, και foil, by a fut. Lk. xix. 43 ; Ζρχονται ήμ.. και
foil, by fut. Heb. viii. 8 ; ζΚΐΰίτονται or άρχονται ήμ., tv αίς [
etc., Lk. xxi. 6 ; xxiii. 29. with a gen. of the thing done |
or to happen: της απογραφής. Acts v. 37; της φωνής,
Rev. X. 7 ; τής σαρκός αϋτοϋ, of his earthly life, Heb. v.
7. ai ήμ. with the gen. of a pers., one's lime, one's days,
i. e. in which he lived, or held office : Mt. ii. 1 ; xi. 12 ;
xxiii. 30; xxiv. 37; Lk. i. 5; iv. 25; xvii. 26, 28; Acts
vii. 45 ; xiii. 41 ; 1 Pet. iii. 20, (Gen. xxvi. 1 ; 1 S. xvii.
10 ; 2 S. xxi. 1 ; 1 K. x. 21 ; Esth. i. 1 ; Sir. xliv. 7 ; xlvi.
7 ; Tob. i. 2 ; 1 Mace xiv. 36, etc.) ; αί ήμίραι τοϋ υίοΰ
τοϋ άνθρ. the time immediately preceding the return of
Jesus Christ from heaven, Lk. xvii. 26 ; μίαν των ήμ. τοϋ
vi. τ. άνθρ a single day of that most blessed future time
when, all liostile powers subdued, the Messiah will reign,
Lk. xvii. 22. Finally, the Hebrews and the Hellenists
who imitate them measure the duration and length also
of human I ife by the number of days : πάσας τάς ήμίρας
[L mrg. Tr mrg. WH dat.] της ζωής [G L Τ Tr WH om.]
ήμων, during all our life, Lk. i. 75 Rec. (Gen. xlvii. 8 sq. ;
Judith X. 3 : Tob. i. 2 (3) ; Sir. xxii. 12 ; xxx. 32 (24) ;
I Mace. ix. 71) ; προβίβηκως ev τάϊς ήμ^ραις αντον, far
advanced in age, Lk. i. 7, 18; ii. 36 (D'p-a X3, [Sept.
προβ. ήμερων or ήμίραις]. Gen. xviii. 11 ; xxiv. 1; Jo.sh.
xiii. 1 ; [xxiii. 1 ; 1 K. i. 1 ; see προβαίνω, fin.]); αρχή
ήμfpώv, beginning of life, Heb. vii. 3 (αί ίσχαται ημίραι
τινός, one's last days, his old age, Protev. Jac. c. 1);
ήμΐραι αγαθοί, 1 Pet. iii. 10.
ήμί'τίροβ. -e'pa, -fpov, {ήμιΐς), possess, pron. of the 1
pers. plur., [fr. Hom. down], our : with a subst.. Acts ii.
II ; xxiv. 6 [Rec.]; xxvi. 5; Ro. xv. 4; [1 Co. xv. 31
Rec.•• "■"] ; 2 Tim. iv. 15 ; 1 Jn. i. 3 : ii. 2 ; oi ήμίτ^ροι,
suostantively, ^our people,' (the brethren): Tit. iii. 14.
[Xeut. TO ήμίτ. substantively: Lk. xvi. 12 WH txt. Cf.
W. § 22, 7α<ι<[.; Β. § 127, i9sqq.]•
η μην, see ή.
ήμιθανή$, -ίς, (fr. ήμι half, and θνήσκω, 2 aor. ίθανον),
half dead: Lk. χ. 30. ([Dion. Hal. 10, 7]; Diod. 12, 62;
Strab. 2 p. 98; Anthol. 11, 392, 4; [4 Mace. iv. 11];
al.)'
ημιστ)5, -fia, -u ; gen. ήμ'σους (Mk. vi. 23 [Sept. Ex.
XXV. 9 ; etc.], for the uncontr. form ήμίσ^ος which is more
com. in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. [fr. Ildt.
down]) ; neut. plur. ήμίση, Lk. xix. 8 R G, a form in use
from Theophr. down, for the earlier ημίσεα adopted by
Lchm. (cf. Passow [also L. and S.] s. v.; W. § 9, 2d.;
ημίσεια in Τ Tr [τιμίσια WH] seems due to a corruption of
the copyists, see Steph. Thes. iv. p. 1 70 ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr.
i. p. 248; Alex. Bttm.in Stud. u. Krit. for 1862, p. 194
sq. ; [N. T. Gram. 14 (13); Γ(//. Proleg. p. 1 1 8 ; but esp.
WH. App. p. 158]); Sept. for Π'ΪΠΟ, much oftener
'ΪΠ ; h a If; it takes the gender and number of the
annexed substantive (where to ήμισυ might have been
expected) : τά ήμίση των υπαρχόντων, Lk. xix. 8 (so Grk.
writ, say ό ήμισυς τοΰ βίου, οί ήμίσζΐς των ιππέων, see
Passow s. v.; [L. and S. s. v. I. 2 ; Kiihner §405, 5 c.];
Tos ήμίσίΐς των δυνάμιων, 1 Macc. iii. 34,37); neut. το
ήμισυ, substantively, the half; without the art. a half:
€ως ήμίσους τής βασϊΚΐίας μου (Esth. v. 3 ; Λ'ϋ. 2), Mk. Λ"ί.
23; ήμισυ καιροί. Kev. xii. 14; as in class. Grk., καΧ
ήμισυ is added to cardinal numbers even where they are
connected with masc. and fern, substantives, as rptii
ήμίρας κα\ ήμισυ, three dai/s and a half. Rev. xi. 9, 11,
{ό^Ιτωνξ'ιν δυοΊν δραχμών κα\ ήμίσους, Ath. 6 p. 274 c. ; δύο
or 4ν6ς πήχεων κα\ ήμίσους, Ex. χχν. 16; xxvi. 16;
xxxviii. 1 [Alex.]); with κα\ omitted: Rev. xi. 9 Tdf.
ed. 7 {^μυριάδων ίπτα ήμίσους, Plut. Mar. 34).*
ήμιώριον and (L Τ Tr WH) ήμίωρον (cf. Kiihner § 185,
6, 2 ; [Jelf § 165, 6, 1 a.]), -ου. τό, (fr. ήμι and ώρα, of. το
ήμικυτυΧίον, ήμιμοίριον. ήμικόσμιον. ήμιχοινίκιον. ήμιωβύλιον,
etc.), half an hour . Kev. viii. 1. (Strab. 2 p. 133 ; Geop. ;
al. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].) *
ήν(κα, a rel. adv. of time, [fr. Hom. down], at tchich
time ; when : foil, by the indie, pres., of a thing that
actually takes place, 2 Co. iii. 15 RG ; foil, by 5v Λνίιΐι
subj. pres., whensoever : ibid. L Τ Tr WH ; foU. by Sv
and the aor. subj. with the force of the Lat. fut. pf., at
length when (whensoever it shall have etc.) : 2 Co. iii. 16;
Ex. i. 10; Deut. vii. 12; Judith xiv. 2. [On its constr.
see W. 296 (278) sq. ; 308 (289) ; B. § 139, 33.] *
ήΐΓίρ, see ή, 4 d.
ή'τΓίοβ, -α, -ov, rarely of two terminations, (apparently
derived fr. en-ur. eiVelK, so that it prop, means affable [so
Etym. Magn. 434, 20 ; but cf. VaniC-ek p. 32]) ; fr. Horn,
down ; mild, gentle : 1 Th. ii. 7 (where L WH νήπιος, q. v.
fin.) ; προς τίνα, 2 Tim. ii. 24.*
"Hp. Lchm. 'Up [on the breathing in codd. see Tdf.
Proleg. p. 107], ("\|• watchful, fr. Ίί^• to be awake), Er,
one of the ancestors of Christ : Lk. iii. 28.*
ηρ<μος, -ox, ipiiel, tranquil : rjpepov κ. ήσύχιον βίον, 1
Tim. ii. 2. (Lcian. trag. 207 ; Eustath., Hesych. ; com•
HpujoTj'i
280
'HprnBiwi
parat. ηριμίστιροί. fr. an unused ηριμή^, Xen. Cyr. 7, 5,
t'.;i ; more cDni. in llic o.irlier (irk. writ, is the adv.
ήμίμα. [Cf. W. § II lin. ; B. 28 (24).]) *
Ήρωεη$, -oil, o, (equiv. to Ήρωίδη!, sprung from a hero :
honoc the Ktym. Magn. i)[). U!.5, -l.'i ; 4.i7, 56 directs it to
be written 'HpoJSijs [so ^\'H], as it is found also in certain
inscriptions [cf. Lipsius, (!ram. Unters. ]). 9; 117/. Intr.
§ 410; Til/. Proleg. 100; I'ltpc, Eiiicnnamen, s. v.]),
Herod, the name of a royal family tliat (loiirished among
the Jews in the time of Jesus and flu• apostles. In the
N. T. are mentioned, 1. the one who gave the family
its name, Herod surnamcd the Greal, a son of \ntipater
of Iduma;a. Appointed king of Jud;ea B.C. 40 by the
Roman senate at the suggestion of Antony and with the
consent of Octavian, he at length overcame the great
o])p()silion which the country made to him and took
possession of the kingdom B. c. 37 ; and, after the battle
of .Xctium, he was confirmed in it by Octavian, whose
favor he ever after enjoyed. He was brave and skilled
in war, learned and sagacious ; but also extremely sus-
picious and cruel. Hence he destroyed the entire royal
family of the llasmonieans, put to death many of the
Jews that opposed his government, and proceeded to
kill even his dearly beloved wife Mariamne of the Ilas-
nionxan line and the two sons she had borne him. By
these acts of bloodshed, and especially by his love and
imitation of Roman customs and institutions and by the
burdensome taxes imposed upon his subjects, he so
alienated the Jews that he was unable to regain their favor
by his splendid restoration of the temple and other acts
of munificence. He died in the 70th year of his age, the
37th of his reign, the 4th before the Dionysian era. Cf.
Joseph, antt. 14, 14, 4 ; 15, 6, 7; 7, 4 ; 8, 1 ; 16, 5, 4 ;
11,6, etc. In his closing years John the Baptist and
Christ were born, Mt. ii. 1 ; Lk. i. 5 ; Matthew narrates
in ch. ii. (cf. Macrob. sat. 2, 4) that he commanded the
male children in Bethlehem from two years old an<l under
to be slain. Cf. especially Keim in Schcnkel iii. 27
8(1(1.; ^cliilrKr, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 1."), and the books
there mentioned. 2. Herod surnamcd Anli/m.i, son
of Herod the Great and Malthace, a Samaritan woman.
."Vfter the death of his father he was appointed by the
Romans tetrach of Galilee and Pera;a. His first wife
was a daughter of Aretas, king of Arabia ; but he sub-
seipiently repudiated her and took to himself llcrodias,
the wife of his brother Herod (see ΦίλιπποΓ, 1) ; and in
consciiuence Aretas, his father-in-law, made war against
him and con(iuered him. He cast .John the Baptist into
prison because John had rebuked him for this imlaw-
ful connection : and afterwards, at the instigation of
Ilerodias, he ordered him to be beheaded. Induced by
her, too, he went to Rome to obtain from the emperor
the title of king. But in consequence of accusatiims
brought against him by Herod Agrippa I., Caligula
banished him (.\.D. 39) to Lugdununi in Gaul, where he
seems to have died. [On the statement of Joseph, (b.
j. 2, 9. 6) that he died in Spain see the conjecture in
B. D. s. V. Herodias.] He was light-minded, sensual,
vicious, (Joseph, antt. 17, 1, 3; 8, 1 ; 11,4; 18, 5, 1 ; 7,
1 Sip ; b. j. 2, 9, 6). In the N. T. he is mentioned by
the simple name of llerod in Mt. xiv. 1, 3, 6; Mk. vL
16-18, 20-22; viii. 15; Lk. iii. 1, 19; viii. 3; ix. 7, 9;
xiii. 31 ; xxiii. 7 Sij. 1 1 Si\. 1 5 ; Acts iv. 27 ; xiii. 1 ; once,
Mk. vi. 14, he is called βασίΚιίί, either improperly, or
in the sense of royid liuemje (see tiaaiKtlt). Cf.
Keim 1. c. p. 42 S(i(i. ; Schiirer 1. c. p. 2.'{2 «iq. 3.
Herod Ae/rippa J. (who is called by Luke sinqily Herod,
by Josephus everywhere Ai/rippn), son of Aristobulus
and Berenice, and grandson of llerod theiircat. After
various changes of fortune, he gained the favor of the
emperors Caligula and Claudius to such a degree that
he gradually obtained the government of all Palestine,
with the title of king, lie died at Caisarea, a.d. 44,
at the age of 54, in the seventh [or 4th, reckoning from
the extension of his dominions by Claudius] year of his
reign (.loseph. antt. 1 7, 1, 2 ; IK, 6 ; 19, 4, 5 ; 6, 1 ; 7,
3; b. j. 2, 11, 6), just .after having ordered James the
■apostle, son of Zebedee, to be .slain, and I'eler to be cast
into prison: Acts xii. 1, 6, II, 19-21. Cf. Keim 1. c. p.
49 s(i(i. ; Schiirer 1. c. p. 290 S(|(|. ; [Farrar, St. Paul,
vol. ii. Excurs. vi.]. 4. (Herod) Ae/rippa II., son of
the preceding. A\'lien his father died he was a youth of
seventeen. In A.b. 48 he received from Claudius Ca?sar
the government <..i Chalcis, with the I'ight of appointing
the .lewish high-priests, together with the care and over-
sight of the temple at .Jerusalem. Four years later
CIaudi;is took from him Chalcis and gave him instead a
larger dominion, viz. Batan:ca, 'I'rachonitis, and Gaul-
anitis, with the title of iinr/. ΊΌ these regions N^ero, in
A.D. 53, added Tiberias and Tarichacae and the Peraan
Julias, with fourteen neighboring villages. Cf. Joseph,
antt. 19, 9, 1 sq. ; 20, 1,3; 5, 2 ; 7, 1 ; 8, 4 ; b. j. 2, 12,
1 and 8. In the N. T. he is mentitmcd in Acts xxv. 13,
2.'-2(i; xxvi. 1 sq. (7), 19, 27 S(i. 32. In the Jewi.-li
war, although he strove in vain to restrain the fury of
the seditious and bellicose populace, he did η(Λ desert
the Roman side. After the fall of .Icrusalcui, he was
vested with praetorian rank and kept the kingdom en-
tire until his death, which took place in the third year
of the emperor Trajan, [the 73d of his life, and U2nd of
his reign]. He ivas the last representative of the Ile-
rodian dynasty. Cf. Keim 1. c. p. 5G sqq. ; .Schiirer 1. c.
p. 315s(i(i. [Less complete accounts of the family may
be found in BB.DI). ; Sielferl in llerzog ed. 2 s. v.;
an extended narrative in Hausralli, Neutest. Zeitgesch.
vol. i. Abschn. v. Cf. also Edersheim, Jesus the JMes-
siah, bk. ii. ch. ii. and App. iv.]
'HpuSiavoC [WIT 'H/)(jS., see Ηρώδης and I, i; cf. AV.
§16, 2 y.], -ων. οι, Herodianx, i. e. Herod's partisans (oi
T(i Ήρώ^ου φροιιοϊιντα, Joseph, antt. 14, 15, 10): Mi.
xxii. 16; Mk. iii. 6; xii. 13. Cf. Keim, Jesu von Naz.
iii. 130 sqq. [Eng. trans, v. p. 156 sq.1, and in Sehenkel
iii. 115 s(]i|.; fcf. B. D. s. v.; Edersheim. Index s. v.].'
'HpiaSiis [WH 'Ήρω8ιάς, see Ήρώίης and 1, i], -uS.js, ή,
Herodlii,-; daughter of Aristobulus and granddaughter
of Herod the (ireat. She was first married to Herod
ΉρωΒιων
281
ηχΟΊ
[Philip (see Φιλιπιτοί, 1)], son of Herod the Great, a
man in private life ; but she afterwards formed an un-
lawful union with Herod Antipas, whom she induced
not only to slay John the Baptist but also to make the
journey to Rome which ruined liim; at last she followed
him into exile in Gaul (see Ήμώδη^, 2) : Mt. xiv. 3, 6 ;
Mk. vi. 17, 10, 22 There WIl R im- αίτοϋ]; Lk. iii. 19.*
Ήρω5(ων [WII Ήρωδ; see Ηρώδη: and I, t], -ωνος, ό,
Heroilion, a certain Christian, [Paul's " kinsman " (see
avyyetn)s)~\: Ro. xvi. 11.*
'Hffotos (Lchm. Ήσ. [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 107; WII
Ησαΐας, see I, «]), -ου [Ε. 17 (IG), 8], ό, (so Sept. for
ΙΠ'ϋΕ'', Jehovah's help, fr. i'u" and Π'), Isaiah (Vulg.
Isaias, in the Fathers also Eaaia.-'), a celebrated Hebrew
prophet, who prophesied in the reigns of Uzziali, Jo-
tham, Ahaz, and Hezekiah : Jit. iii. 3; iv. 14; viii. 17;
xii. 17; xiii. 14; (xiii. 35 ace. to the reading of cod.
Sin. and other authorities, rightly approved of by Bleek
[Ilort (as below), al.], and received into the text by Tdf.
[noted in mrg. by WII, see their App. ad loc. ; per con-
tra cf. Meyer or EUicott (i. e. Plumptre in X. T. Com.) ad
loc.]); XV. 7; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. iii. 4; iv. 17; Jn. i. 23;
xil. 38 sq. 41 ; Acts xxviii. 25 ; Ro. ix. 27, 29 ; x. 16, 20 ;
XV. 12; i. q. the book of the prophecies of Isaiah, Acts
viii. 28, 30; (v {τω) Ήσαία, Mk. i. 2 G L txt. Τ Tr WII.*
Ήσ-αΰ [Ήσ. Ro. ix. 13 R"Tr; Heb. xii. 16 R"; Ileb.
xi. 20 R"'''], ό, {yc>'J_ i. e. hairy [Gen. xxv. 25 ; Joseph,
antt. 1, 18, 1]), indecl., Esau, the firstborn son of Isaac :
Ro. ix. 13; Heb. xi. 20; .xii. IG.*
ΐ)(Γ(Γ<1ομ.αι, see ήττάω and s. v. S, σ, c
[η<Γσ•ων, see ήττων•']
ησ-νχάζω ; 1 aor. ησν\ασα\ {iJav)(os [i. q- ήσυ^^ιοςΎ) ',
as in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, lo keep quiet, i. e. a.
to rest, to cease from tabor: Lk. xxiii. 56. b. to lead
a quiet life, said of those who are not running hither
and thither, but stay at home and mind their business :
1 Th. iv. 11. c. to be silent, i. e. to say nothing, hold
one's peace : Lk. xiv. 4 (3) ; Acts xi. 18 ; xxi. 14, (Job
ix.xii. 7 ; ησύχασαν κα\ οϋχ (υροσαν \6yov, \eh. v. 8).*
[8γΝ.ήσυχά^Ρί ν, σ lyav, σ ιωπ αν: ησ. describes a quiet
condition in tlie general, inclusive of silence; σιγ. de-
scribes a mental condition and its manifestation, especially
in speechlessness (silence from fear, grief, awe, etc.) ; σιωπ.,
the more external and physical term, denotes abstinence
from speech, esp. as antithetic to loquacity. Schmidt i.
ch. 9; iv. ch. 175.]
ήσ-υχία, -at, ή, (fr. the adj. ήσϋχια. q- v.; the fem. ex-
presses the general notion [W. 95 (90)], cf. αίτια, άριτή.
ΐχΰρά, etc.), [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. quietness : descri[»-
tive of the life of one who stays at home doing his own
work, and does not officiously meddle with the affairs of
others, 2 Th. iii. 1 2. 2. silence : Acts xxii. 2 ; 1 Tim.
ii. 1 1 sq.*
ή(Γΰχιο5, -a, -ov, [(perh. akin to ξμαι to sit, Lat.serfa^ux;
cf. Curtius § 568 ; Vanicek p. 77)]; fr. Horn, down;
quiet, tranquil : 1 Pet. iii. 4 ; iilos, 1 Tim. ii. 2 ; Joseph.
antt. 13, 16, 1.*
ήτοι. see η, 4 e.
ήττάω ; ( ήττων) ; to make less, inferior, to overcome
(the Act. only in Polyb., Diod., Joseph, antt. 12, 7, 1
[other exx. in Veitch s. v.]); Pass, ήττάομαι, fr. [Soph,
and] Hdt. down; pf. ηττημαι; 1 aor. ηττήθην (ήσσώθην,
2 Co. xii. 13 LTTrWIl; in opp. to which form cf.
Fritzschc, De conform. N. T. crit. ipiani Lchm. ed. p. 32
[yet see Kuenen and Cohet, N. T. ad fid. cod. Vat. p. .\c. ;
ivH. App. p. 166 ; B. 59 (52) ; Veitch s. v.]) ; to he made
inferior ; to be overcome, worsted : in war, νπό τ»ιόϊ,
2 Mace. χ. 24; univ., τιή [cf. Β. 168 (147); W. 219
(206)], to be conquered by one, forced to yield to one,
2 Pet. ii. 19 ; absol. ib. 20. τ\ imp τίνα, i. q. ήττον ίχω
τι, to hold a thing inferior, set beluic, [on the ace. (o) cf.
B. § 131, 10; and on the compar. use of Ιπίρ see imfp,
U. 2 b.], 2 Co. xii. 13.•
ή'ττημ,οι [cf. B. 7; WH. App. p. 166], -roy. τύ, (ήττάο-
μαι) ; 1. a diminution, decrease : i. e. defeat. Is. xxxi.
8; αυτών, brought upon the Jewish people in that so few
of them had turned to Christ, Ro. xi. 12 [R. V. loss].
2. loss, sc. as respects salvation, 1 Co. vi. 7 [R. Λ^. txt.
defect]. Cf. Meyer [but cf. his 6te Aufl.] on each pass.
(Elsewhere only in eccl. writ.) *
ήττων or [so L TTr WII, see Σ, σ. s] ησσων, -ov, infe-
rior; neut. adverbially [fr. Horn, down] less, 2 Co. xii.
15; CIS TO ησσον, fir the worse (that ye may be made
worse; opp. to ds το κριίττον), 1 Co. xi. 17.*
ήχίω(-ώ); (ξχοί, q. v.); [f r. Hesiod down] ; to sound:
1 Co. xiii. 1 ; used of the roaring of the sea, Lk. xxi. 25
Rec. [COMP. : (ξ-, κατ-ηχίω.] '
ηχοϊ [cf. Lat. echo, cox. Germ, sprechen, etc.; A'anicek
p. 858], -ou, ό, and (Lk. xxi. 25 GLTTr WH) τό ήχος.
-ovs (cf. W. 65 (64) : [B. 23 (20)] : Delitzsch on Heb. xii.
19 p. 638; [or ήχους may come fr. ήχώ, -οΰς, see esp. WII.
App. p. 158'; Mey. on Lk. as below]); 1. a sound,
noise : Acts ii. 2 ; Heb. xii. 1 9 ; spoken of the roar of
the sea's waves, Lk. xxi. 25 G L Τ Tr WH. 2. rumor,
report : nepl tii/os, Lk. iv. 37.•
282
Θ
θαΒΒαΐος
Θα88αΐο$, -ου, ό, C'^Pi, peril, large-hearted or coura-
geous, although it has not been shown that ΊΠ e(iuiv. to
the Hebr. "W can mean pectus as well as mamma : [some
would connect the terms by the fact that the ' child of
one's heart ' may be also described as a ' 6o.so»i-child ' ; but
*ee B. D. s. v. Jude]), Thaddceus, a surname of the
a])0stle Jude ; he was also called Lebbceus and was the
brother of James the less: Mt. x. 3 R G L Tr Wll ; Mk.
iii. 18. [Cf. B. D. s. V. ; Keil on Mt. 1. c. ; Wll. App.
p. ll'. The latter hold the name Α(ββαΐο{ to be due to
an early attempt to bring Levi (Acutis) the publican
(Lk. V. 27) within the Twelve.]*
βάλασ-σ-α [cf. B. 7], -ijr, i), (akin to όλϊ [better, allied
to ταράσσω etc., from its tossing ; cf. VaniCek, p. 303] ;
Sept. for d;), [fr. Horn, down], the sea; [on its distinc-
tion from TreKayos see the latter word] ; a. univ. :
iMt. .\.\iii. 15; Mk. .\i. 23; Lk. .xvii. 2, 6; x.xi. 2ή; Ro. ix.
27; 2 Co. .xi. 26 ; Ilcb. xi. 12 ;, Jas. i. 6 ; Jude 13 ; Rev.
vii. 1-3, etc. ; ΐργάζισθαι την θαΚ. (see (μγάζυμαι, 2 a.),
Rev. xviii. 17; το rrf^ayot Trjs θαλ. (<{•(' πίλαγος, a.), Mt.
xviii. 6 ; joined with y^ and oipavas it forms a periph-
rasis for the whole world, Acts iv. 24 ; xiv. 15 ; Rev. v.
13; X. 6 [LWHbr.]; xiv. 7, (Hagg. ii. 7; Ps. c.xlv.
(cxlvi.) 6 ; Joseph, antt. 4, 3, 2 ; [c. Ap. 2, 10, 1]) ; among
the visions of the Apocalypse a i/lassi/ sea or sea of (jlass
is spoken of; but what the writer symbolized by this
is not quite clear : Rev. iv. 6 ; -xv. 2. b. spec, used
[even without the art., cf. W. 121 (115) ; B. § 124, 8 b.]
of the Mediterranean Sea: Acts x. C, 32 ; xvii. 14; of
the Red Sea (see ίρυθρόί), ή ipvdpa θάΚ., Acts vii. 36 ;
1 Co. X. 1 sq. ; Heb. xi. 29. By a usage foreign to native
Grk. writ. [cf. Aristot. meteor. 1, 13 p. 351', 8 ή ίπο
τον Κανκασορ Χίμνη ην κάλοΰσιν οί tK€L θάΧατταν, and
Ilcsyeh. defines \ίμνη : ή θάΚασσα και ό ώκ€ανός} em-
])loyed like the Hebr. D', [e. g. Num. xxxiv. 11], by Mt.
Mk. and Jn. (nowhere by Lk.) of the Lake of Γιννησα-
ptT (q. V.) : I) θάλ. τηί Γαλιλαι'αΓ, Mt. iv. 18 ; xv. 29 ; Mk.
i. I G ; vii. 31, (similarly Lake Constance, der Bodensee, is
called mare Suebicum, the Suabian Sea) ; Trjs ΎιβίριάΒο!,
Jn. xxi. 1 ; τη! Γαλιλ. τηί Ύφιριάδοι (on which twofold
gen. cf. W. §30, 3 Ν. 3; [B.400 (343)]), Jn. vi. 1 ; more
frequently simply ij θάλασσα : Mt. iv. 15, 18 ; viii. 24, 26
sq. 32; xiii. 1, etc.; Mk. ii. 13; iii. 7; iv. 1, 39; v. 13,
etc. ; Jn. vi. 16-19, 22, 25 ; xxi. 7. Cf. Furrer in Schen-
kel ii. 322 sqq. ; [see ΓιννησαρίτΊ.
θάλπ»; 1. prop, to irnrm, keep warm, (Lat./bceo) :
Horn, et sqq. 2. like the Lat. fovea, i. q. to cherish
with tender love, to foster with tender care: Eph. v. 29;
1 Th. ii. 7; ([Theocr. 14, 38]; Alciphr. 2, 4; Antonin.
5, υ-•
θάνατος
Θάμαρ [Treg. θαμάρΊ, ή, (ΊΏΓΙ [i. e. palm-tree]). Τα-
mar, prop, name of a woman, the daughter-in-law of
Judah, son of the patriarch Jacob (Gen. x.xxviii. 6) : Λΐι.
i. 3.•
θαμβ<ω, -ω ; Pass., impf. ΐθαμβοΰμην; 1 aor. ίθαμβήθην ;
(θάμβος, q. v.) ; 1. to he astonished : Acts ix. fi Rec.
(Hom., Soph., Eur.) 2. to astonish, terrify : 2 S. xxii.
5; pass, to be amazed: Mk. i. 27; x. 32; foil, by Μ w.
dat. of the thing, ilk. x. 24 ; to he frightened, 1 Mace.
vi. 8; Sap. xvii. 3; Plut. Caes. 45; Brut. 20. [Comp. :
(κ-θημβίω.^ '
θάμβος [allied with τάφοι amazement, fr. a Sanskrit
root signifying to render immovable ; Curtius § 233 ;
Vanicek p. 1130], -ode, to; fr. Ilom. down; amazement:
Lk. iv. 36 ; v. 9 ; Acts iii. 10.*
θανάσ-ιμοΐ, -ov, (θανι'ίν, θάνατος), dead/;/: Mk. .xvi. 18.
([Acschyl.], Soph., Eur., Plat., s(jq.) •
θανατη-φόρο9, -ov, {θάνατος and φίρω), deatli-brinqitiq,
deadly: Jas. iii. 8. (Num. xviii. 22; Job xxxiii. 23;
4 Mace. viii. 17, 25; xv. 26; Aeschyl., Plat., Arist.,
Dio.l., Xen., Plut., al.) •
θάνατος, -ου, ό, (θανάν); Sept. for ΠΙΟ and ΠΙ'Ο, also
for Ί^Τ pestilence [AV. 29 note] ; (one of the nouns often
anarthrous, cf. W. § 19, 1 s. v.; [B. § 124, 8 c.]; Grimm,
Com. on Sap. p. 59); death; 1. prop, the death of
the body, i. e. that separation (whether natural or violent)
of the soul from the body by which the life on earth is
ended: Jn. xi. 4, [13]; Acts ii. 24 [Trmrg. άδου] (on
this see iihiv) ; Phil. ii. 27, 30 ; Heb. vii. 23 ; ix. 15 sq. ;
Rev. ix. 6 ; xviii. 8 ; opp. to ^ωι;, Ro. viii. 38 ; 1 Co. iii.
22 ; 2 Co. i. 9 ; Phil. i. 20 ; with the implied idea of future
misery in the state beyond, 1 Co. χ v. 21 ; 2 Tim. i. 10 ;
Ileb. ii. 14 sq. ; i. q. the power of death, 2 Co. iv. 12.
Since the nether world, the abode of the dead, was con-
ceived of as being very dark, χώρα κα\ σκιίι θανάτου
(j^irDSx) is equiv. to the region of thickest darkness, i. e.
figurativclv, a region enveloped in the darkness of igno-
rance and sin: Mt. iv. 16; Lk. i. 7Π, (fr. Is. ix. 2); θάνα-
τος is used of the punishment of Christ, Ro. v. 1 : vi.
3-5 ; 1 Co. xi. 26 ; Phil. iii. 10 ; Col. i. 22 ; Heb. ii. [9],
14 ; σώζαν τίνα e/c θανάτου, to free from the fear of death,
to enable one to undergo death fearlessly, Heb. v. 7 [but
al. al.] ; ρϋισθαι Ικ θανάτου, to deliver from the danger
of death, 2 Co. i. 10 ; plur. θάνατοι, deaths (i. e. mor'oi
perils) of various kinds, 2 Co. xi. 23 ; π(ρίλυπος tees
θανάτου, even unto death, i. e. so that I am almost dying of
sorrow, Mt. xxvi. 38; Mk. xiv. 34, (λίλΰτη/μαι ίως θανά-
του, Jonah iv. 9 ; \ΰπη (ως θανάτου. Sir. .xxxvii. 2, cf.
Judj. xvi. 16) : μίχρι θανάτου, so as not to refuse to un-
I dergp even death, Phil. ii. 8 ; also άχρι θανάτου, Rev. ii.
θάτι
283
θανμα
10; χϋ. 1 1 ; ίσφαγμίνος eir θάνατον, that has receired
a deadly wound, Rev. xiii. 3 ; πληγή θανάτου, a deadly
wound [_dealh-stroke, cf. W. § 34, 3 b.]. Rev. xiii. 3, 12;
Ibeiv θάνατον, to experience death, Lk. ii. 26 ; Heb. xi.
5 ; also yeifaSai θανάτου [see -yeu&j, 2], Mt. xvi. 28 ; Mk.
ix. 1 ; Lk. ix. 27 ; 8ιώκ(ΐν τίνα άχρι θανάτου, even to de-
struction, Acts xxii. 4 ; κατακρίν(ΐν τινά θανάτω, to con-
demn one to death (ad mortem damnare. Tacit.), Mt. x.x.
18 [here Tdf. eis θάν.'\; Mk. x. 33, (see κατακρίνω, a.);
Ίίοριΰισθαι els θάν. to undergo death, Lk. xxii. 33 ; τταρα-
hibavai τινά fit θάν. that he may be put to death, Mt.
X. 21 ; Mk. xiii. 12 ; pass, to be given over to the peril
of death, 2 Co. iv. 11 ; παραδ. els κρίμα θανάτου, Lk. xxiv.
20; άποκτΐΐναί τίνα iv θανάτω (a Hebraism [cf. B. 184
(159 sq.)]). Rev. ii. 23; vi. 8, [cf. W. 29 note]; αιτία
θανάτου (see αΙτία, 2), Acts xiii. 28; xxviii. 18; άξιον τι
θανάτου, some crime worthy of the penalty of death.
Acts xxiii. 29; xxv. 11, 25 ; [xxvi. 31] ; Lk. x.xiii. 15, 22
[here αίτιοι» (q. v. 2 b.) θαν.'\ ; evo^os θανάτου, worthy of
punishment by death, Mt. xxvi. 66; Mk. xiv. 64; θανάτω
τΕλίυτάτω, let him surely be put to death, Mt. xv. 4 ;
Mk. vii. 10, after Ex. xxi. 1 7 Sept. (Ilebr. npv Πή) ; cf.
λν. § 44 fin. X. 3 ; [B. u. s.] ; θάν. σταυροϊι, Phil. ii. 8 ;
■ποία θανάτω, by what kind of death, Jn. .xii. 33 ; xviii.
32; -xxi. 19. The inevitable necessity of dying, shared
alike by all men, takes on in the popular imagination
the form of a person, a tyrant, subjugating men to
his power and confining them in his dark dominions :
Ro. vi. 9 ; 1 Co. xv. [26], 54, 56 ; Rev. xxi. 4 ; Hades
is associated with him as his partner : 1 Co. xv. 55 R G ;
Rev. i. 18 (on which see kKcIs) ; vi. 8; xx. 13, [14'], (Ps.
xvii. (.xviii.) 5 ; c.xiv. (cxvi.) 3 ; Hos. xiii. 14 ; Sir. xiv.
12). 2. metaph. the loss of that life which alone is
worthy of the name, i. e. the misery of soul arising from
sin, which begins on earth but lasts and increases after the
death of the body: 2 Co. iii. 7; Jas. i. 15, (Clem. Rom.
2 Cor. 1, 6 says of life before conversion to Christ, ό βlos
ημών o\os άλλο olhev ην el μη θάνατο5 [cf. Philo, praem.
et poenis § 12, and refi. in 4 below]) ; opp. to ή ζωή. Ro.
vii. 10, 13; 2 Co. ii. 16; opp. to σωτηρία, 2 Co. vii. 10;
i. q. the cause of death, Ro. vii. 13; σώζeιv ψυχήν «κ,
θανάτου, .las. v. 20 ; μeτaβeβηκevaι ex τοΟ θανάτου els τ.
ζ.ιιήν, Jn. v. 24 ; 1 Jn. iii. 14 ; μΐνΐΐν iv τω θανάτω, 1 Jn.
iii. 14; θίωρΐ\ν θάνατον, Jn. viii. 51 ; yeveaSai θανάτου, 52
(see 1 above) ; αμαρτία and άμαρτάν€ΐν npos θάνατον (see
αμαρτία, 2 b.), 1 Jn. v. 16 s([. (in the rabbin, writers
ΠΙΟ"" Xan — after Num. xviii. 22, Sept. αμαρτία θανατη-
φ6ρο5 — is a crimen capitate), 3. the miserable slate
of the wicked dead in hell is called — now simply ίάκατοΓ,
Ro. i. 32 (Sap. i. 1 2 sq. ; ii. 24 ; Tatian or. ad Graec. c.
13; the author of the ep. ad Diognet. c. 10, 7 distin-
guishes between ό δοκών ivθάhe θάνατο!, the death of the
body, and ό όιτωτ θάνατοί, os φυ\άσσ(ται to'is κατακριθη-
σoμivoιs els το πνρ το αΐώνιον) ; now ο beυτepos θάνατο5
and ό θάν. ό 8(ϋτ. (as opp. to the former death, i. e. to
that by which life on earth is ended). Rev. ii. 1 1 ; xx. 6,
14' ; xxi. 8, (as in the Targums on Deut. x.xxiii. 6 ; Ps.
xlviii. (xlix.) 11; Is. xxii. 14; Ixvi. 15; [for the Grk.
use of the phrase cf. Plut. de facie in orbe lunae 27, 6
p. 942 f.] ; θάνατο! alaivios. Barn. ep. 20, 1 and in eccl.
writ, [ό atSios θάvaτos, Philo, post. Cain. § 1 1 fin. ; see
also Wetstein on Rev. ii. 11]). 4. In the widest
sense, death comprises all the miseries arising from sin,
as well physical death as the loss of a life consecrated to
God and blessed in him on earth (Philo, alleg. legg. i. § 33
ο \|/υχήs Bavaros dpfr^f μζν φθορά iaTi. κακία! de άνάλη^Ι/ΐ!,
[de profug. § 21 θάvaτns ψυχήs 6 peTa κακίας ί'στϊ βίος,
esp. §§ 10, 1 1 ; quod det. pot. insid. §§ 14, 15 ; de poster.
Cain. § 21, and de praem. et poen. as in 2 above]), lo
be followed by wretchedness in the lower world (opp. to
ζωή aliuvios) : θάνατος seems to be so used in Ro. v. 1 2 ;
vi. 16, 21, [23 ; yet al. refer these last three exx. to 3
above] ; vii. 24 ; viii. 2, 6 ; death, in this sense, is per-
sonified in Ro. V. 14, 17, 21 ; vii. 5. Others, in all these
pass, as well as those cited under 2, understand physical
death; but see Philippi on Ro. v. 12; Messner, Lehre
der Apostel, p. 210 ^i{>{.'
θανατόω, -ώ ; fut. θανατώσω; 1 aor. inf. θανατώσαι, [3
pers. plur. subjunc. θανατώσωσι, Mt. xxvi. 59 R G] ;
Pass., [pres. θανατοϋμαι] ; 1 aor. 4θανατώθην ; (fr. θάνα-
τος) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; Sept. for Vi"!yr\j J">n,
etc. 1. prop, to put to death : τινά, Mt. x. 21 ; xxvi.
59; xxvii. 1 ; Mk. xiii. 12; xiv. 55; Lk. xxi. 16; 2 Co.
vi. 9; 1 Pet. iii. 18; pass., by rhetorical hyperbole, to
be in the state of one who is being put to death, Ro.
viii. 36. 2. metaph. a. to make to die i. e. destroy,
render extinct (something vigorous), Vulg. mortifco [A.
V. mortify'] : τί, Ro. viii. 13. b. Pass, with dat. of the
thing, by death to be liberated from the bond of anything
[Ut. to be made dead in relation to; cf. W. 210 (197) ; B.
178 (155)]: Ro. vii. 4.*
βό-ΐΓτω : 1 aor. ίθα-^α ; 2 aor. pass, ίτάφην ; fr. Hom.
down; Sept. for 13P; to bury, inter, [BB.DD. s. v. Bur-
ial ; cf. Becker, Charicles, sc. ix. Excurs. p. 390 sq.] :
τινά, Mt. viii. 21 sq. ; xiv. 12 ; Lk. ix. 59 sq. ; xvi. 22 ; Acts
ii. 29 ; v. 6, 9 S(j. ; 1 Co. xv. 4. [Co.MP. : συν-θάτττω.'] *
θάρα [WH Qapa], 6, (ΓΤ^ΓΙ a journey, or a halt on a
journey [al. 'loiterer']), indecl. prop, name, Terah, the
father of Abraham : Lk. iii. 34.*
βαρρΐ'ο) (a form current fr. Plato on for the Ionic and
earlier Attic ίαρσί'ω), -ω ; 1 aor. inf. ίαμρ^σαι ; [fr. Hom.
on] ; to be of good courage, to be hopeful, cimfident : 2 Co.
V. 6, 8 ; Heb. xiii. 6 ; to be bold : rfj πeπoιθήσeι, with the
confidence, 2 Co. x. 2 ; e's τίνα, towards (against) one,
2 Co. X. 1 ; ev τινι, the ground of my confidence is in one,
I am made of good courage by one, 2 Co. vii. 1 6. [Syx.
see τολμάω.] *
θαρσ-ΐ'ω, -ώ ; (see θαρρίω) ; to be of good courage, be of
good cheer ; in the X. T. only in the impv. : θάρσeι, Lk.
viii. 48 R G; Mt. ix. 2, 22; Mk. x. 49; Acts xxiii. 11,
(Sept. for sy ri-Sx, Gen. xxxv. 1 7, etc.) ; θapσeΊτe, Mt.
xiv. 27; Mk! vi. 50; Jn. xvi. 33, (Sept. for ΙΚΤΗ"'?»,
Ex. xiv. 13 ; Joel ii. 22, etc.). [Syn. see τολμάω.] *
θάρσ-οΐ, -Off, TO, courage, confidence; Acts x.xviii. 15.*
βαϋμα, -tos, to, (ΘΑΟΜ.^Ι [to wonder at], to gaze at,
cf. Bum. Gram. § 114 s. v. ; Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 196 ; Curtius
θαυμάζω
284
Oeiov
§ 308) ; 1. α wonderful thini/. a marvel : 2 Co. xi. 14
L Τ Tr WH. 2. wonder: θαύμαζαν θαϋμα μί'-γα (cf. \V.
§ 32, 2; [Β. § 131, 5]), to wonder [with great wonder
i. e.] exceedingly. Rev. xvii. 6. (In both senses in C!rk.
writ. fr. Horn, down; Sept. Job xvii. 8; xviii. 20.) *
θαυμάζω; iinpf. ιθανμαζυν; fut. θανμάσομαί{Κκν. xvii.
8 R (i Τ I'r, a form far more com. in tlie best (irk. writ,
also than θανμάσω ; cf. Kriiger § 40 s. v. ; KUliner § IW.!
s. V. ; [Veitcli s. v.]) ; 1 aor. (θαύμασα ; 1 aor. pass, euav-
μάσθψ in a mid. sense (Rev. xiii. .'i R" LTrt.st.); uImi
1 fill. ]iass., in I he sense of the mill., θαυμασθήσομαι (Re. .
xvii. 8 L WII ; but the very few cxx. of the mid. use in
prof. auth. are doubtful ; cf. Stephanus, Thesaur. iv. p.
259 s(j. ; [yet see Veitch s. v.]) ; to wonder, wonder at,
maroel: absol., Mt. viii. 10, 27; ix. 8 Rec, ΆΖ; xv. 31 ;
xxi. 20 ; x.xii. 22 ; .\xvii. 14; Mk. v. 20 ; vi. 51 [Rec. ; L
br.Trmrg.br.]; xv. 5; Lk. i. 21 [.see below], G3; viii. 25;
xi. 14 ; xxiv. 41 ; .In. v. 20; vii. 15; Acts ii. 7; iv. 13;
xiii. 41 ; Rev. xvii. 7 sip ; with ace. of the pers. Lk. vii.
!) ; with ace. of the thing, Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Tr br.
WII reject the v.s. (see πρόί. I. 1 a. init. and 2 b.)]; Jn. v.
28 ; Acta vii. 31 ; θαύμα μίγα (.-ice θαύμα, 2), Rev. xvii.
6 ; πρόσωπον, to admire, ])ay regard to, one's external
appearance, i. e. to be influenced by partiality, Jude 16
(Sept. for D-:D NV.}, Dent. x. 17; Job xiii. 10; Prov.
xviii. 5 ; Is. ix. 14, etc.) ; foil, by Siti τι, Mk. vi. G ; Jn. vii.
21 where Sia τούτο (omitted by Tilf.) is to be joined to vs.
21 [so G L Tr nirg. ; cf. Meyer (ed. Wei-<s) ad loc. ; W.
§ 7, 3], (Isocr. p. 52 d.; Ael. v. h. 12, 6; 14, 36) ; [foil.
by tv w. dat. of object, ace. to the constr. adopted by
some in I^k. i. 21 ΐθαύμ. iv τω χρόνιζαν αυτόν, at his tarry-
ing; cf. W. §33, b.; B. 264 (227); 185 (160 sq.) ; Sir.
xi. 19 (21); evang. Thom. 15, 2; but see above]; foil,
by eVi w. dat. of pers. Mk. xii. 17 [Rd LTr]; by iVi w.
dat. of the thing. Lk. ii. 33 ; iv. 22 ; ix. 43 : xx. 26 ; [Acts
iii. 12], (Xen., Plat., Time, al. ; Sept.); ntpi rivos, Lk.
ii. 18 ; by a pregnant constr. [of. B. 1Η5 (161 )] ΐθαύμασιν
ή yfi οπίσω τοϋ θηρίου, followed the beast in wonder, Rev.
xiii. 3 [cf. B. 59 (52)]; foil, by on, to marvel that, etc.,
Lk. xi. 38 ; Jn. iii. 7 ; iv. 27 ; Gal. i. 6 ; by el (see €Ϊ, I. 4),
Mk. XT. 44; 1 Jn. iii. 13. Pass, lo be wondered at, to be
had in admiralUm, (Sir. xxxviii. 3 ; Sap. viii. 11 ; 4 Mace,
xviii. 3), foil, by iv w. dat. of the pers. whose lot and
condition gives matter for wondering at another, 2 Th.
i. 10; eV with dat. of the thing. Is. Ixi. 6. [CoMP. : tV
θανμάζ<ύ.~1 *
θαυ)ΐά<ηο;, -α, -οι», rarely of two terminations, (θαύμα),
[fr. Hes., Horn. (h. Merc. 443) down], wonderful, mar-
rellottx; neut. plur. θαυμάσια (Sept. often for riix'73J,
also for X^3), wonderful deeds, wonders : Mt. xxi. 15.
[Cf. 'I'riMi.h 5 \ci. ; better, Schmidt ch. 168, 6.] *
θανμα<Γτές, -ή. -όν. {θανμάζω). in Grk. writ. fr. [Horn,
(h. Cer. etc.)]. Ildt., Pind. down: [interchanged in Grk.
writ, with θανμάσιο!, cf. Lob. Path. Elem. ii. 341] ; irnn-
derful, marvellous; i.e. a. wnrl/t>i of pious admiration,
admirable, excellent: 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36,
2 ; for I'lK, Ps. viii. 2; xcii. (xciii.) 4, (5)). b. passinr/
human comprehension : Mt. xxi. 42 and Mk. xii. 11, (fr.
Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 22 sq., where for n'^SJ, as Job xiii. 3 ;
Mic. vii. 15, etc.). c. causini/ amazement joined with
terror: Rev. xv. 1, 3, (so for N-iu, Kx.xv. 11, etc.). d.
marvellous i. e. extraordinary, slrikiny, surprising: 2 Co.
xi. 14 11 G (see θαύμα, 1) ; Jn. Lx. 30.•
βίά, nut, ή, (feni. of flfcis), [fr. Horn, down], a goddess:
Acts xix. 27, and Rec. also in 35, 87.'
β€(ίομοι, -ωμαί : 1 aor. ϊθ(ασάμην ; pf . τ^θύιμαι ; 1 aor.
pass. ίθ(οθψ in pass, sense (Mt. vi. 1; xxiii. 5; Mk
wi. 11; Thuc. 3, 3.^, 3; cf. Kriiger §40 s. v. ; [but
Kriiger himself now reads Βρασθίν in Thuc. I.e.; see
Veitch 8. v.; W. § 38, 7 c. ; B. 52 (40)]); depon. verb;
(fr. 0ea, ΘΑΟΜΑΙ, with which θαύμα is connected, q. v.) ;
lo behold, look upon, view alteniivelg, contemplate, (in Grk.
writ, often used of public shows; cf. θία, θάιμα, θία-
τρον, θαιτρίζω, etc. [see below]) : τί, Mt. xi. 7 ; Lk. vii. 24 ;
Jn. iv. 35 ; xi. 45 : of august things and persons that are
looked on with admiration : τι, Jn. i. 14, 32 ; 1 Jn. i. 1 ;
Acts xxii. 9, (2 Mace. iii. 36) ; tiwi, with a ptcp., Mk.
xvi. 14 : Acts i. 1 1 ; foil, by ΰτί, 1 Jn. iv. 14 ; θ(αθηναι υπό
T»Ot, Mk. .\vi. 1 1 ; npiis το θίαθηνηι αύτο'α, in order to
make a show to them, Mt. vi. 1 ; xxiii. 5; lo view, take a
view of: τ/, Lk. xxiii. 55 ; τινά, Mt. xxii. 11 ; in the sense
of visiting, meeting with a person, Ro. xv. 24 (2 Chr.
xxii. 6; .Joseph, antt. 16, 1,2) ; lo learn by looking: foil.
by oTt, Acts viii. 18 Rec.; to see ivilh Ihe eyes, 1 Jn. iv.
12; \.(\. (Lat. conspirio) to perceive: τιι/ά, Jn. viii. 10
RG; Acts xxi. 27; foil, by ace. with ptcp., Lk. v. 27
[not Lmrg.]; Jn. i. as ; foil. In ΰη, Jn. vi. 5."
Cf. 0. F. Fritzsche, in Fritzsihiorum Opuscc. p. 295 sqq.
[Ace. to Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 11, θίοσβοι in its earlier ilas.sic
use denotes often a w ο η d e r i η g regard, (if. even in Stralio
14, 5, τα eiTTo θί(ί/ιοτα i. q. βοΰ^ιατο). This spoiific sliaile of
meaning, however, gradually faded out. anil left tlie more
general signification of such a looking as seeks merely the
satisfaction of the sense of sight. Cf. fliiupe'ii).)
OcarpC^u : (θίατρον. q. v.) ; prop, to bring ujion Ihe stage ;
hence /i< sil firlli ax ii s/i< rtacle, expose lo contempt; Pass.,
pres. ptcp. θ(ατριζόμ(νο! [A. V. being made a gazing-
slock'], lleb. x. 33. (Several times also in eccl. and ,
Jiyzant. writ. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.] ; but in the same sense
(κθ(ατρίζω in Polyb. 3, 91, 10; al. ; [cf. W. 25 (24) note;
also Tilf. ed. 7 Proleg. p. lix. sq.].) *
βί'ατρον, -ου, τ<5, (θίάομαι) ; 1. a theatre, a place in
which games and dramatic spectacles are exhibited, and
public assemblies held (for the Greeks used the theatre
.also as a forum): Acts xix. 29, 31. 2. i. q. θία and
ίί'ημα, a public show (Aeschin. dial. socr. 3, 20 ; Achill.
Tat. 1, 16 p. 55), and hence, metaph., a man who is ex-
hibited to be gazed at and made sport of: 1 Co. iv. 9 [A.
V. a spectacle'}.'
θ6ΐον, -ου. TO, (apparently the neut. of the adj. ίίίοι i. q.
divine incense, because burning brimstone was regarded
as having power to purify, and to ward of? contagion
[but Curtius § 320 allies it w. θνω ; cf. Lat. fumux,
Eng. rfws•/]), brimstone : Lk. xvii. 29 ; Rev. ix. 1 7 sq. ; xiv.
10 ; xix. 20 ; [xx. 10] ; xxi. 8. (Gen. xix. 24 ; Ps. x. (xi.)
6; Ezek. xxxviii. 22; Horn. II. 16, 228; Od. 22, 481,
ββίος
285
θβ\ω
i'J3; (Plat.) Tim. Locr. p. 99 c. ; Ael. v. h. 1.3, 15 [16];
Hdian. 8, 4, 26 [9 ed. Bekk.].) •
Oeios, -tia, -dou, (θ(6:), [fr. Horn, down], divine : ή θ(ία
Ιΰναμις, 2 Pet. i. 3 ; φύσΐ! (Diod. 5, 31), ibid. 4 ; neut. to
Beiov, divinily, deity (Lat. numen diciniini), not only
used by the Greeks to denote tlie divine nature, power,
providence, in the general, without reference to any
individual deity (as Hdt. 3, 108; Thuc. 5, 70; Xen. Cyr.
4, 2, 15 ; Hell. 7, δ, 13; mem. 1, 4, 18; Plat. Phaedr. p.
242c.; Polyb. 32, 25, 7 ; Diod. 1,6; 13, 3; 12; 16,60;
Lcian. de sacrif. 1 ; pro imagg. 13, 17. 28), but also by
Philo (as in mundi opif. § 61 ; de agric. 1 7 ; leg. ad Gai.
I), andby Josephus (antt. 1,3, 4; 11,1; 2,12,4; 5,2,
7; 11, 5, 1; 12, 6, 3; 7, 3; 13,8, 2; 10, 7 ; 14,9,5; 17,
2, 4; 20,11, 2; b. j. 3, 8, 3; 4, 3, 10), of the one, true
God; hence most appositely employed by Paul, out of
regard for Gentile usage, in Acts xvii. 29.*
β€ΐότη5, -))Tor, ή, dioinitij, dioine nature : Ro. i. 20.
(Sap. xviii. 9; Pliilo in opif. § 61 fin.; Plut. symp. 6G.0 a. ;
Lcian. calumn. c. 17.) [Syn. see θ(ότης.~\*
θίΐώΒηϊ, -€s, (fr. Belov brimstone [q. v.]), of brimstone,
."ulpliuroux: Rev. ix. 17; a later Grk. word; of. Lob. ad
Phryn. ρ 228; ISopli. Lex. s. v.].•
βί'λημα, -το$, το, (θίλω), a word purely bibl. and eecl.
[yet found in Aristot. de plant. 1, 1 p. 815'', 21];
Sept. for ί'3Π and Jii'l ; tvil I, i. e. a. what one wishes
or has determined shall be done, [i. e. objectively, thing
willed^ : Lk. xii. 47 ; Jn. v. 30 ; 1 Co. vii. 37 ; 1 Th. v.
18 ; 2 Tim. ii. 26 ; Heb. x. 10 ; Rev. iv. 11 ; θίλημα τοΟ
6cod is used — of the purpose of God to bless mankind
through Christ, Acts .xxii. 14 ; Eph. i. 9 ; Col. i. 9 ; of what
God wishes to be done by us, Ro. xii. 2 ; Col. iv. 12 [W.
Ill (105)]; 1 Pet. iv. 2; and simply το ίίλι;μα, Ro. ii. 18
[W. 594 (553)] (Sir. xliii. 16 (17) [but here the better
txt. now adds αϋτοΟ, see Fritzsche; in patrist. Grk., how-
ever, θίλημα is so used even without the art. ; cf. Ignat.
ad Rom. 1,1; ad Eph. 20, l,etc.]) ; toC κυρίου, Eph. v.
1 7 ; plur. commands, precepts : [Mk. iii. 3.') WIL nirg.] ;
Acts xiii. 22, (Ps. cii. (ciii.) 7; 2 Mace. i. 3) ; eW! ro θί-
λημά Ttvos, foil, by ΐι/α, Jn. vi. 39 sq. ; ! Co. xvi. 12, cf.
Mt. xviii. 14 ; foil, by inf., 1 Pet. ii. 15 ; by ace. with iuL,
1 Th. iv. 3. [Cf. B. 237 (204) : 240 (207) ; W. § 44, 8.']
b. i. q. TO eiXftv. [i. e. the abstract act of wHlin;/, the
subjective] trill, choice: 1 Pet. iii. 17 [cf. W. 604 (562)];
2 Pet. i. 21 ; nouh τ. θΐλ. tivos (esp. of God), Mt. vii.
21 ; xii. 50 ; xxi. 31 ; Mk. iii. 35 [here WH mrg. the plur.,
see above] ; Jn. iv. 34 : vi. 38 ; vii. 1 7 ; ix. 31 ; Eph. vi.
6; Ileb. X. 7, 9,36; xiii. 21 ; iJn.ii. 17; το ifX. (L Τ Tr
WII βοί\ημα) TIVOS κατ(ργάζ(σθαί, 1 Pet. iv. 3; yivfrcu το
ei\. Tivot. Alt. vi. 10 ; xxvi. 42 ; Lk. xi. 2 L R ; .xxii. 42 ;
Acts xxi. 14 ; ή βου\η τοϋ 6(\ήματος, Eph. i. 11 ; ή {ϋ8ο-
κία τοϋ θ(\. ib. 5 ; cV τω θ(\. τοΐι θίοϋ, if God will, Ro. i.
10 ; δίά ΘΛηματοί θ€ού, Ro. χν. 32 ; 1 Co. i. 1 ; 2 Co. i. 1 ;
viii. 5 ; Eph. i. 1 ; Col. i. 1 ; 2 Tim. i. 1 ; κατά το θ(\.
ToC etoi. Gal. i. 4 ; [1 Pet. iv. 19] ; 1 Jn. v. 14. i. ((.
pleasure : Lk. xxiii. 25 ; i. q. inclination, desire : aapxas,
avSpos, Jn. i. 13; plur. Eph. ii. 3. [Syn. see θίλω,
fin.]•
βΛησαϊ, -tos, η, (θίΚω), i. q. το θ^\(ίν, a williny, urill :
Heb. ii. 4. (Ezek. xviii. 23; 2 Chr. xv. 15; Prov. viii. 35;
Sap. xvi. 25 ; [Tob. xii. 18]; 2 Mace. xii. 16; 3 Mace. ii.
26 ; [plur. in] Melissa epist. ad Char. p. 62 Orell. ; ace. to
Pollux [1. 5 c. 47] a vulgarism ^ίδtωτiκόv) ; [cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 353].) *
StXa (only in this form in the N. T. ; in Grk. auth. also
ί'^ίλω [Veitch s. v.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 7; B. 57 (49)]);
impf. ήθιλον; [fut. 3 pers. sing. βιΧήσα, Rev. xi. 5 WII
mrg.] ; 1 aor. ηθέλησα ; (derived apparently fr. eXtii'
with a fuller aspiration, so that it means prop, to seize
with the mind ; but Curtius p. 726, ed. 5, regards its
root as uncertain [he inclines, however, to the view of
Pott, Fick, Vanicek and others, which connects it with
a root meaning to hold to]) ; Sept. for Π3Χ and vsn ; TO
WILL, (_have in mind,) intend; i. e. 1. to be resolved
or determined, to purpose: absol., ό θ(\ων, Ro. ix. 16;
roC OfoC ii'AoiTos if God will. Acts .xviii. 21 ; eiv ό xipiot
θίληση (in Attic eai/ ifof ίί'λι;, ηιι οι θ(οΊ θί\ωσιν [cf. Lob.
u. s.]), 1 Co. iv. 19; Jas. iv. 15: καθώς ήθίλησι, 1 Co. xii.
18 ; XV. 38; τί, Ro. vii. 15 sq. 19 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 36; Gal.
v. 1 7 ; with the aorist inf., Mt. .xx. 14 ; xxvi. 15 ; Jn. vi.
21 (where the meaning is, they were willing to receive
him into the ship, but that was unnecessary, because
unexpectedly the ship was nearing the land ; cf. Liicke,
E-Crusius, Ewald, [Godet], al. ad loc. ; W. § 54, 4 ; [B.
375 (321)]) ; Jn. vii. 44 ; Acts xxv. 9 ; Col. i. 27 ; 1 Th.
ii. 18 ; Rev. xi. 5, etc. ; with the present inf., Lk. x. 29
RG; Jn. vi. 67; vii. 17; viii. 44; Acts xxiv. 6 [Rec.];
Ro. vii. 21 ; Gal. iv. 9 [here Τ Trtxt. WH txt. 1 aor. inf.] ;
with an inf. suggested by the context, Jn. v. 21 (oCr fliXet,
sc. f ωοποιί}σαι ) ; Mt. viii. 2; Jlk. iii. 13; vi. 22; Ro. ix.
18; Rev. .xi. 6, etc. οΰ θίλω to be unwilling: with the
aorist inf., Mt. ii. 18; xv. 32; xxii. 3; Mk. vi. 26; Lk.
XV. 28 ; Jn. v. 40 ; Acts vii. 39 ; 1 Co. xvi. 7 ; Rev. ii. 21
[not Rec.], etc. ; with the present inf., Jn. vii. 1 ; Acts
xiv. 13; .xvii. 18; 2 Th. iii. 10, etc.; with the inf. om.
and to be gathered fr. the context, Mt. xviii. 30; xxi.
29 ; Lk. xviii. 4, etc. ; ΘΛω and ού θίΚω foil, by the ace.
with inf., Lk. i. 62; 1 Co. x. 20; on the Pauline phrase ου
θ(\ω ίμάς d-yi'Ofii', see ά•/νο(ω, a. ; corresponding to θίλω
ίμας elStvat, 1 Co. xi. 3; Col. ii. 1. θ(λ€ΐν, used of a
purpose or resolution, is contrasted with the carry-
ing out of the purpose into act: opp. to Troirlv, πράσ-
aeiv, Ro. vii. 15, 19; 2 Co. viii. 10 sq. (on which latter
pass. cf. De Wette and Meyer; W. § 61, 7b.); to evtp-
yfii/, Phil. ii. 13, cf. Mk. vi. 19 ; Jn. vii. 44. One is said
also θΐΚα,ν that which he is on the point of doing : Mk.
vi. 48 ; Jn. i. 43 (44) ; and it is used thus also of things
that tend or point to some conclusion [cf. W. § 42, 1 b. ;
B. 254 (219)]: Acts ii. 12; xvii. 20. "Κανθάνιι airroiis
rovTo θίλοιηας this (viz. what follows, ότι etc.) escapes
them of their own will, i. e. they are purposely, wilfully,
ignorant, 2 Pet. iii. 5, where others interpret as follows:
this (viz. what has been said previously) desiring (i. e.
holding as their opinion [for e.xx. of this sense see Soph.
Lex. s. v. 4]), they are ignorant etc. ; but cf. De Wette
ad loc. and W. § 54, 4 note; [B. § 150, 8 Rem.], τάς
θί\(ύ
286
θ€μέ\ιο<;
ΐπιθνμΐα! τοΰ πατροί νμων ufKtTt Trottlv it is your purpose
tu fullil tlie lusts of jour father, i. e. ye are actuated by
him of your own free knowledge and choice, Jn. viii. 44
[W. u. s. ; B. 375 (321)]. 2. i. q. to ilesire, to wish:
Tt, Mt. XX. 21 ; Alk. xiv. 36 ; Lk. v. 39 [but WH in br.] ;
Jn. XV. 7 ; 1 Co. iv. 21 ; 2 Co. xi. 1 2 ; foil, by the aorist
inf., Mt. V. 40 ; xii. 38 ; xvi. 25 ; xix. 1 7 ; Mk. x. 43 sq. ;
Lk. viii. 20 ; xxiii. 8 ; Jn. v. 6, 35 (ye were desirous of
rejoicing) ; xii. 21 ; Gal. iii. 2; Jas. ii. 20 ; 1 Pet. iii. 10 ;
foil, by the present inf., Jn. ix. 27 ; Gal. iv. 20 (ήθ(\ον I
could wish, on wliicli impf. see (ΰχημαι, 2) ; the inf. is
wanting and to be supplied fr. the neighboring verb,
Mt. xvii. 12; xxvii. 15; Mk. ix. 13 ; Jn. xxi. 18 ; foil, by
the ace. and inf., Mk. vii. 24 ; Lk. i. 62 ; Jn. x.xi. 22 sq. ;
Ro. xvi. 19 ; 1 Co. vii. 7, 32 ; xiv. 5 ; Gal. vi. 13 ; οϋ ίί'λω
to be unwilling, {desire not) : foil, by the aor. inf., Mt.
xxiii. 4 ; Lk. xLx. 14,27; 1 Co. x. 20 ; foil, by 'tva, Ut. vii.
12; Mk. vi. 25; ix. 30 ; x. 35 ; Lk. vi. 31; Jn. xvii. 24 ;
cf. W. § 44, 8 b.; [B. § 13Π, 46]: foil, by the delib. aubj.
(aor.) : OtKeis σνλλίξωμ^ν αυτά (cf. the Germ, willst ilii,
sollen wir zusammenlesen'i [Goodwin § 88]), Mt. xiii. 28 ;
add, Mt. XX. 32 [where L br. adds Ίνα] ; xxvi. 1 7 ; xxvii.
17, 21; Mk.x.51; xiv. 12; xv. 9, 12 [Trbr. iA.]; Lk. ix.
54 ; xviii. 41 ; xxii. 9, (cf. W. § 41 a. 4 b. ; B. § 139, 2) ;
foil, by «i, Lk. xii. 49 (see tl, I. 4) ; foil, by ij, to prefer,
1 Co. xiv. 19 (see ή, 3 d.). 3. i. q. to love; foil, by an
inf., to like to do a thing, be fond of doing: Mk. xii. 38;
Lk. .XX. 46 ; cf. W. § 54, 4 ; [B. § 150, 8]. 4. in imi-
tation of the ITebr. |'3Π, to take delight, have pleasure
[opp. by B. § 150, 8 Rem. ; cf. AV. § 33, a. ; but see exx.
below] : ίν nw, in a thing. Col. ii. 18 (tV κάΚω, to delight
in goodness. Test. xii. Patr. p. 688 [test. Ash. 1 ; (cf. th
ζωήν, p. 635, test. Zeb. 3) ; Ps. cxi. (cxii.) 1 ; cxlvi.
(cxlvii.) 10]; ei» tiw, dat. of the pers., 1 S. xviii. 22; 2 S.
XV. 26 ; [1 K. X. 9] ; 2 Chr. ix. 8 ; for 3 Πϊ"!, 1 Chr.
xxviii. 4). τινά, to love one : Mt. xxvii. 43 (Ps. xxi.
(xxii.) 9; [xvii. (xviii.) 20; xl. (xii•) 12]; Ezek. xviii.
32, cf. 23 ; Tob. xiii. 6 ; opp. to μισ^Ίν, Ignat. ad Rom.
8, 3 ; θίληθήναι is used of those who finil favor, ibid. 8,
1). τί, Mt. ix. 13 and xii. 7, (fr. Hos. vi. 6) ; lleb. x. 5,
8, (fr. Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7). As respects the distinction
between ^ονΧομαι and βίΚω, the former seems to desig-
nate the will which follows deliberation, the latter
the will which proceeds from inclination. This ap-
pears not only from Mt. i. 19, but also from the fact that
the Sept. express the idea of pleasure, delight, by the
verb ei\fiv (see just above). The reverse of this dis-
tinction is laid down by Bitm. Lexil. i. p. 26 [Eng. trans,
p. rJ4]; Delitzsch on lleb. vi. 17. Ace. to Tiltmann
(Syn. i. p. 124) θίΧα,ν denotes mere volition, βούλισθαι
inclination; [cf. Whislon on Dem. 9,5; 124, 13].
[Philip Buttmann's statement of the distinction between
the two words is quoted with approval by Srhmidt (Syn. iii.
ch. 146), who adduces in confirmation (hesides many exx.)
the assumed relationship between β. and feK-rls, 4\nls ; the
use of β. in the sense of ' resolve ' in such passages as Thuc.
5, 9 ; of SeKav i. q. ^Setoi in the poets ; of 0. as parallel to
ί-κιθυμΰν in Dem. 29, 45, etc. ; and pass, in which the two
words occur together and β. is apparently equiv. to ' wish '
while β. stands for ' will,' aa Xen. an. 4, 4, 5 ; Eur. Ale. 281,
etc., etc. At the same time it must be confessed that sdiolars
are far from harmonious on the subject. Many afrrec with
Prof, (iriinm that Θ. f;ives prominence to the emotive ele-
ment, β. to the rational anil volitive; that β. signifies the
choice, while β. marks the choice as deliberalr and mielliqent ;
yet tliey acknowledge that the words are sometimes used
indi,scriminately, and esp, that β. as the less siiarjily dclined
term is put wlicre β. woidd be proper; see Klltmli, Lex.
Soph.; I'ape, Haudwurterb. ; Seder, Worterb. d. Horn., s. v.
βονΚομοί ; Suhle und Schnetdewin, Haudwurterb. ; Croshy,
Lex. to Xen. an., s. v. efle'Aia; (Arnold's) Pdlon, Grk. Syn.
§129; Webster, Syut. and Syn. of the Grk. Test. p. 197;
Wilke, Clavis N. T., ed. 2, ii. 603 ; Schlensner, N. T. Lex.
s. V. βούκ. ; Munthe, Observv. pliil. in N. T. ex Diod. Sic. etc.
p. 3 ; Valckenaer, Scholia etc. ii. 23 ; Westermann ou Dem.
20, 111 ; the commentators generally on Mt. as abo\e ; Bp.
L•Jtitβ. on Philem. 13, 14; liiddie in Schaff's Lange on V.\A\.
p. 42; this seems to be roughly intended i^y Ammonias
also ; βοΰΚΐσθαι μίν eVl μόνου Κΐκτίον του XoytKOv ' τί) δέ
θ(\(ΐν κώ Ιτ\ a\6you ζύου; (and Kustath. on Iliad 1, 112, p.
61, 2. says oij\ απλών βίΚω, αλλά βοΰΚομαι, oirtp 4πίτασί$ τοΟ
θ4Κ(ΐν (στίν). On the otlier hand, L. and S. (s. v. ίβ(\ω) ;
Passim' ed. 5 ; Rost, Wiirterb. ed. 4 ■ Sdieiikl, Schulwiirterh. ;
Donaldson, Crat. § 463 sq. ; Wahl, Clav. Apocr., s. v. βοΰ\. ;
Cremer s. vv. βούΚαμαι and θέλω ; esp. Stallb. on Plato's de
repub. 4, 13 p. 437 b., (cf. too Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 19,
19) ; Franke on Dem. 1, 1, substantially reverse the distinc-
tion, as does EUicott on 1 Tim. v. 14 ; Wordsworth on 1 Th.
ii. 18. Although the latter opinion may .seem to be favored
by that view of the derivation of the words which allies βούΚ.
with voliiptas (Curtius § 659, cf. p. 726), and makes β4\. sig-
nify 'to hold to something,' 'form a fixed resolve' (see
above, ad init.), yet the predominant usage of the N. T.
will be evident to one who looks out the pass, referred to
above (Fritzsche's explanation of Mt. i. 19 is hardly natu-
ral) ; to which maybe added such as Mt. ii. 18 ; ix. i;) ; xii.
38; XV. 28; xvii. 4 (xx. 21, 32) ; xxvi. 15, 39 (cf. Lk. xxii.
42) ; Mk. vi. 19 ; vii. 24 ; ix. 30 ; x. 35 ; xii. 38 ; .xv. 9 (cf. .In.
ΧΛ'ίϋ. 39), 15 (where R. V. wishing is questionable; cf. Lk.
xxiii. 20) ; Lk. x. 24 ; xv. 28 ; xvi. 26 ; Jn. v. 6 ; vi. 1 1 ; xii.
21 ; Acts X. 10; xviii. 15; Ro. vii. 19 (cf. 15, its opp. to μισώ,
and indeed ihe use of Θε λα? throughout tins chapter) ; 1 Co. vii.
36,39; xiv.35; Kph. i. 11; 2 Th. iii. 10, etc. Such passages
as 1 Tim. ii. 4 ; 2 Pet. iii. 9 will be ranged now on one side,
now on the other; cf. 1 Co. xii. 11, 18. β4Κω occurs in the
N. Τ about five times as often as βού\ομαι 'on tlie relative
use of the words in classic «Titers see Tycho Mommsen in
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 415 sq.). The usage of the Sept.
(beyond the particular specified by Prof. Grimm) seems to
afford little light ; see e. g. Gen. xxiv. 5, 8 ; Deut. xxv. 7 ;
Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7, 9, etc. In modern Greek β4\ω seems
to have nearly driven βοΰλομαι out of use ; on θίΚω as an
auxiliary cf. Jebb in V^incent and Dickson's Handbook, Α\ψ.
§§ 60, 64. For exx of the associated use of the words in
classic Grk., see Ste/ih. Thesaur. s. v. βού\ομαι p. 366 d. ; Bp.
Lghtft., Cremer, and esp. Schmidt, as above |
βΕμΐ'λιοΐ, -OK, (θίμα [i. e. thing laid down]), laid down
as a foundation, belonging to a foundation, (Diod. 5, 66;
θιμίΚιοι λίθοι, Arstph. av. 1137); generally as a subst.,
ό θ(μ(λιο! [sc. λίθος] (1 Co. iii. 11 sq. ; 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; Rev.
xxi. 19), and το iffitAtow (rarely so in Grk. writ., as [Ar-
istot. phys. auscult. 2, 9 p. 200', 4] ; Pans. 8, 32, 1 ; [al.]),
the foundation (of a building, wall, city): prop., Lk. vi.
θεμίλιόω
287
Oeo^
49 ; Tiffevai θ(μίΚιον, Lk. vi. 48 ; xiv. 29 ; plur. oi θ(μίΚιυι \
(chiefly so in Grk. writ.), Heb. xi. 10 ; Rev. x.xi. 14, 19 ;
neut. TO θ(μ. Acts xvi. 26 (and often in the Sept.) ;
metaph. the foundations, beginnings, first principles, of
an institution or system of truth: 1 Co. iii. 10, 12; the
rudiments, first principles, of Christian life and knowl-
edge, Heb. vi. 1 (μίται/οιαε gen. of apposition [W. 531
(494)]) ; a course of instruction begun by a teacher,
Ro. XV. 20; Christ is called θιμίΧ- i. e. faith in him,
which is like a foundation laid in the soul on which is
built up the fuller and richer knowledge of saving truth,
1 Co. iii. 11; των άπο<ηο\ωυ (gen. of appos., on account
of what follows : ovtus ■ ■ ■ Χριστού, [al. say gen. of origin,
see ΐποικο^ομίω ; cf. W. § 30, 1 ; Meyer or Ellicott ad
loc.]), of the apostles as preachers of salvation, upon
which foundation the Christian church has been built,
Eph. ii. 20 ; a solid and stable spiritual possession, on
which resting as on a foundation they may strive to lay
hold on eternal life, 1 Tim. vi. 19; the church is appar-
ently called θ€μ. as the foundation of the ' city of God,'
2 Tim. ii. 19, cf. 20 and 1 Tim. iii. 15. (Sept. several
times also for ji'D'^X, a palace. Is. x.w. 2 ; Jer. vi. 5 ;
Amos i. 4, etc.) *
θεμΑιόω : fut. θιμ^Χιωσω ; 1 aor. 4θ(μ(Κίωσα ; Pass., pf.
ptcp. τ(θ(μ(\ιωμ(νος \ plupf. 3 pers. sing. Teic/xfXtwro
( .Mt. vii. 25 ; Lk. vi. 48 R G ; without augm. cf. λ\. § 1 2,
9 ; [Β. 33 (29) ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 121]) ; Sept. for ip;; [fr.
Xen. down]; to laij the foundation, to found : prop., την
yi)v, Heb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 26 ; Prov. iii. 1 9 ; Is. xlviu. 13,
al.) ; t\ cVi Ti, Mt. vii. 25 ; Lk. vi. 48. metaph. (Diod.
II, 68 ; 15, 1) to make stable, establish, [A. V. ground'] :
of the soul, [1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing.] 1 Pet. v. 10 [Rec. ;
but T, Tr mrg. in br., the fut.] ; pass., Eph. iii. 17 (18) ;
Col. i. 23.*
6eo-S(SaKTo$, -ok, (flfoj and StdaKTos), taui/lit of God : 1
Th. iv. 9. ([Barn. ep. 21, 6 (cf. Harnack's note)];
eccles. writ.)*
β£θ-λ<ίγο8, -ου, ό, (θ(6ς and Χίγω), in Grk. writ. [fr. Aris-
tot. on] one who speaks (treats) of the gods and divine
things, versed in sacred science ; ( Grossmann, Quaestiones
Philoneae,Lp. 8, shows that the word is used also by Pliilo,
esp. of Moses [cf. de praem. et poen. § 9]). This title is
given to John in the inscription of the Apocalypse, ace.
to the Rec. text, apparently asi/ie publisher and interpre-
ter of divine oracles, just as Lucian styles the same per-
son OfoKoyos in Alex. 19 that he calls προφήτης in c. 22.
The common opinion is that John was called ^ioAoyot in
the same sense in which the term was used of Gregory
of Xazianzus, viz. because he taught the θιστη! of the
\oyot. But then the wonder is, why the copyists did
not prefer to apply the epithet to him in the title of the
Gospel.*
θ(ομαχ(<ι>, -ω ; (θ(ομάχος) ; to fight against God : Acts
xxiii. 9 Rec. (Eur., Xen., Diod., al. ; 2 Mace. vii. 19.)*
θ€θμάχο5, -ου, ό, (Bfot and μάχομαι), fighting against
God, resisting God: Acts v. 39. (Symm.,Job xxvi. 5;
Prov. ix. 18; xxi. 16; Heracl. Pont, alleg. Homer. 1;
Lcian. Jup. tr. 45.) •
θίόίΓνοΛΓτοί, -ov, (fifos and πνίω), inspired by God:
■γραφή, i. e. the contents of Scripture, 2 Tim. iii. 16 [see
■πάς, 1. 1 c] ; σοφίη, [pseudo-] Phocyl. 121 ; Svetpoi, Plut.
de plac. phil. 5, 2, 3 p. 904 f. ; [Orac. Sibyll. 5, 406 (cf.
308) ; Nonn. paraphr. ev. loan. 1, 99]. (βμπνίνστος also
is used passively, but απν^υστος, ΐνπνΐνστος, ττυριπνΐνστος,
[δυσδιάτΓΐ'ίυστοί], actively, [and ^υσανάπι/ιυστος appar.
either act. or pass. ; cf. W. 96 (92) note].)*
θ€05, -οϋ, ό and ή, voc. fl«', once in the X. T., Mt. xxvii.
46; besides in Deut. iii. 24 ; Judg. [xvi. 28;] xxi. 3; [2
S. vii. 25 ; Is. xxxviii. 20] ; Sir. xxiii. 4 ; Sap. ix. 1 ; 3
Mace. vi. 3 ; 4 Mace. vi. 27 ; Act. Thom. 44 sq. 57 ; Eus.
h. e. 2, 23, 16 ; [5, 20, 7 ; vit. Const. 2, 55, 1. 59] ; cf. W.
§ 8, 2 c. ; [B. 12 (11)] ; ([on the eight or more proposed
derivations see Vanicek p. 386, who follows Curtius (after
Doderlein) p. 513 sqq. in connecting it with a root mean-
ing to supplicate, implore ; hence the implored ; per con-
tra cf. Max Mailer, Chips etc. iv. 227 sq. ; L. and S. s. v.
fin.]) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; Sept. for '^X, DTibN and 7iy\' ;
a god, a goddess ; 1. a general appellation of deities
or divinities: Acts xxviii. 6; 1 Co. viii. 4; 2 Th. ii. 4;
once ή β^ός. Acts xLx. 37 G L Τ Tr Wll ; θ(οϋ φωνή neat
ουκ ανθρώπου, Acts xii. 22 ; άνθρωπος i)v ιγοιεΙγ aeaurov
θ€Ον, Jn. χ. 33 ; plur., of the gods of the Gentiles : Acts
xiv. 11 ; xix. 26 ; Xeyo/jfiOi θ(οί, 1 Co. viii. 5' ; oi φΰσ€ΐ μή
όντ(ς θ(οί. Gal. iv. 8 ; τοϋ θιοϋ 'Ρ^φάν [q. v.]. Acts vii. 43 ;
of angels: (ΐσ\ θ(οϊ πολλοί, 1 Co. viii. 5' (on which cf.
Philo de somn. i. § 39 ό μίν άληθίΐα θ(ος fis ίστιν, οΊ δ' ev
κατάχρηση Xfyofierai πλ(ίους). [On the use of the sing.
θ(ός (and Lat. deus) as a generic term by (later) heathen
writ., see Norton, Genuinen. of the Gosp. 2d ed. iii. addit.
note D; cf. Dr. Ezra Abbot in Chris. Exam, for X'ov.
1848, p. 389 sqq.; Huidekoper, Judaism at Rome, ch. i.
§ii. ; see Bib. Sacr. for July 1856, p. 666 sq.. and for addit.
exx. Nagelsbach, Homer. Theol. p. 129 ; also his Nachho-
merische Theol. p. 139 sq. ; Stephanus, Thes. s. v. ; and
reff. (by Prof. Abbot) in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. and
Exeg. i. p. 120 note.] 2. Wliether Christ is called
God must be determined from Jn. i. 1 ; xx. 28 ; 1 Jn. v.
20 ; Ro. ix. 5 ; Tit. ii. 13 ; Heb. i. 8 .sq., etc. ; the matter
is still in dispute among theologians; cf. Grimm, Insti-
tutio theologiae dogmaticae, ed. 2, p. 228 sqq. [and the
discussion (on Ro. ix. 5) by Professors Dwight and Ab-
bot in Journ. Soc. Bib. Lit. etc. u. s., esp. pp. 42 sqq.
113 sqq.]. 3. spoken of the only and true God: with
the article, Mt. iii. 9 ; Mk. xiii. 19; Lk. ii. 13; Acts
ii. 11, and very often; with prepositions: « τοϋ θ. Jn.
viii. 42, 47 and often in John's writ. ; νπο τον θ. Lk. i.
26 [Τ Tr WH άπό] ; Acts xxvi. 6 ; παρά τον θ. Jn. viii.
40 ; ix. 16 [L Τ Tr WH here om. art.] : παρά τω θ. Ro.
ii. 13 [Tr txt. om. and L WH Tr mrg. br. the art.] ; ix.
14 ; iv τω θ- Col. iii. 3 ; c'ffi τώ θ. Lk. i. 47 ; it's τον θ. Acts
xxiv. 15 [Tdf. προς] ; (π\ τον θ. Acts χν. 19; xxvi. 18,
20 ; προς τον θ- Jn. i. 2 ; Acts xxiv. [15 Tdf.], 16, and
many other exx. without the article: Mt. vi. 24; Lk.
iii. 2 ; XX. 38 ; Ro. viii. 8, 33; 2 Co. i. 21 ; v. 19 ; vi. 7;
1 Th. ii. 5, etc. ; with prepositions : άττο θ(οΰ, Jn. iii. 2 ;
xvi. 30 ; Ro. xiii. 1 [L Τ Tr AVH ύπο] ; παρά θίοί, Jn. ί. 6;
6e6i!
288
OepairevM
U θίον. Acts V. 39 ; 2 Co. v. 1 ; Phil. iii. 9 ; trapa βίώ, 2
Th. i. 6 ; 1 Pet. ii. 4 ; κατά θιύν, Uo. viii. 27 ; 2 Co. vii.
9sq. ; cf. W. § 19 s. v. ό ^for xii-or (gen. of pers.), Ihe
(guardian) God of any one, blessing and protecting him :
Mt. xxii. 32 ; Mk. .\ii. 26 sq. [29 \VH mrg. (see below)];
Lk. XX. 37; .In. xx. 17; Acts iii. 13; xiii. 17; 2 Co. vi.
16; Ileb. xi. 16; Rev. .x.xi. 3 [without ό : but GTTrWII
txt. om. the phrase] ; ό flfut μου, i. «j. οί flμί, ω και λατρεύω
(Acts xxvii. 23) : Κο. i. 8 ; 1 Co. i. 4 [Tr mrg. br. the
gen.] ; 2 Co. xii. 21 : Phil. i. 3; iv. 19; Philera. 4 ; Kvpios ό
ifoi σου, ημών, υμών, αυτών (in imit. of Ilebr. ^'r!"7S ΠΙΓΤ ,
irn'7!< "■, DD-riSx "•, Dn'nSlj! '"): Mt. iv. 7; xxii. 37;
Mk. xii. 29 [see above]; Lk. iv. 8, 12; x. 27; Acts ii.
39 ; cf. Thilo, Cod. apocr. Nov. Test. p. 169 ; [and Bp.
Lghtft. as (juoted s. v. Kupios, c. a. init.]; ό fleor κ. ιτατηρ
του κυρίου ημών Ίησοΰ Χριστού : ΙΙο. .\ν. 6 ; 2 Co. 1. 3 ; XI.
31 [L Τ Tr W'll om. ήμ. and Χρ.] : Eph. i. 3 ; Col. i. 3 [L
Wllom. καί] ; 1 Pet. i. 3; in which combination of words
the gen. depends on ό flfuf as well as on πατήρ, cf. Fritz-
sche on Rom. iii. p. 232 sq. ; [Oltramare on Ro. 1. c;
Β p. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 4 ; but some would restrict it to
the latter; cf. c. g. Meyer on Ro. 1. c, Eph. I.e.; EUic.
on Gal. 1. c, Eph. 1. c] ; ό flfos τοϋ κυρ. ήμ- Ίησ- Χρ- Eph.
i. 17; ό ifor κ. πατήρ ημών, (ial. i. 4 ; Phil. iv. 20 ; 1 Th.
i. 3 ; iii. II, I •! ; edit ό πιιτήρ, 1 Co. viii. 6 ; ό θ(6ί κ. πατήρ,
1 Co. XV. 24 ; Eph. v. JO ; .las. i. 27 ; iii. 9 [Rec. ; al. κΰριο!
κ. 7Γ.] ; άπο θίού πητροί ημών, Ro. i. 7 ; 1 Co. 1. 3 ; 2 Co. ι.
2 ; Eph. i. 2 ; Phil. i. 2 ; Col. i. 2 ; 2 Th. i. 2 ; 1 Tim. i.
2 [Rec., al. om. ήμ."] ; Philem. 3 ; [ό θ(θ! πατήρ. Col. iii.
17 LTTr WH (cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.) ; elsewhere with-
out the art. as] θ(οΰ πατρο! (in which phrase the two
words have blended as it were into one, equiv. to a prop,
name, Germ. Gollrnter [A. V. God the Father]) : Phil. ii.
1 1 ; 1 Pet. i. 2 ; άπό θιοΰ πατρός. Gal. i. 3 ; Eph. vi. 23 ;
2 Tim. i. 2 ; Tit. i. 4 ; παρά θίοΰ πατρός, 2 Pet. i. 1 7 ; 2
■In. 3; cf. Wieseler, Com. ub. d. Brief a. d. Galat. p. 10
sqq. ό flfiif w. gen. of the thing of which God is the au-
thor [cf. W. § 30, I] : T^t ΰίτομοι/^ί it. της παρακλήσιως. Ro.
XV. 5 ; της (λτη'δοί, ib. 1 3 ; t^s (Ιρήνης, 33 ; 1 Th. V. 23 ;
της παρακ\ήσ(ως, 2 Co. i. 3. τά τοΰ θ(οϋ, the things of
Goil,i.e. o. his counsels, 1 Co. ii. 11. β. his interests,
Mt. xvi. 23 ; Mk. viii. 33. γ. things due to God, Mt.
xxii. 21 ; Mk. .xii. 17 ; Lk. xx. 25. τά προς τον θιόν,
things respecting, pertaining to, God, — contextually i.q.
the sacrificial business of the priest, Ro. xv. 17; Ileb. ii.
17 ; v. 1 ; cf. Xen. rep. Lac. 13, 11 ; Fritzsche on Rom.
iii. p. 262 sq. Nom. ό 6(ός for the voc. : Mk. xv. 34 ;
Lk.xviii.11,13; .In. XX. 28; Acts iv.24 [RG; Heb.i.8?];
X. 7 ; cf. W. § 29, 2 ; [B. 140 (123)]. τω θ(ώ, God being
judge [cf. W. § 31, 4 a.; 248 (232 sq.)'; B.' § 133, 14] :
after Βυνατός, 2 Co. x. 4 ; after άστftoς, Acts vii. 20, (after
άμίμτΓτος, Sap. .X. 5 ; after μίγας. .Jon. iii. 3 ; see άστ(ΐος, 2).
For the expressions άνθρωπος θ(οΰ, ϋναμις θ(οϋ, υΙος θιοΰ,
etc., θ(6ς της (\π18ος etc., ό ζών θ(ός etc., see under άνθρω-
πος 6, ^νναμις a., ν(όί τον ^(οΰ, ί\πίς 2, ^άω L 1, etc.
4. θ€(Ίς is used of trhnlerer can in any respect he likened
to God, or resembles him in any way : Hebraistically i. q.
God's representative or vicegerent, of magistrates and
judges, Jn. x. 34 sq. after Ps. Ix.x.xi. (Ixxxii.) 6, (of the
wise man, Philo de mut. nom. § 22 ; (juod omn. prob. lib.
§ 7 ; [ό σοφός Xiytrat θίίις τοϋ άφρονος . . . θ€6ς προς φαν•
τασίαν κ. 8άκησιν, <\ιιοά det. pot. insid. §41]; πατήρ κ.
μήτηρ (μφανί'ίς fiVt θίο\, μιμονμΐνοι τί)ν άγΐννητον ev τω
ζωοπ'^αστί'ιν, de decal. § 23 ; ωνομάσθη (i. e. Moses) ο\ηυ
τοϋ (βνους θ(6ς κ. βασίΧίϋς, de vita Moys. i. § 28 ; [de niigr.
Abr. § 1.5; de alleg. leg. i. § 13]); of the devil, ό 6(ος
τοϋ αιώνος τούτου (see αΙών, 3), 2 Co. iv. 4 ; the |>ers. or
thing to which one is wholly devoted, for which alone
he lives, e. g. ή κοιλία, Phil. iii. 19.
SeocTiPcia, -ας, ή, {θίοσ(βής), reference towards God,
qodliness: 1 Tim. ii. 10. (Xen. an. 2, 6,26; Plat. epin.
p. 985 d. ; Sept. Gen. xx. 1 1 ; Job xxviii. 28 ; Bar. v. 4 ;
Sir. i. 25 (22) ; 4 JLaec. i. 9 (Fritz.) ; vii. 6, 22 (var.).) •
θ€θσ£βής, -if, (θιύς and σίβομαι), icorshijipinr/ God,
pious: Jn. ix. 31. (.Sept.; Soph., Eur., Arstph., Xen.,
Plat., al. ; [cf. Trench § xlviii.].)•
θ€οσ"τνγή5, -€f, (θ(ός anil στυγ€ω; cf. 6(ομισής, θ(θμνσής,
and the subst. θιοστυγία, omitted in the lexx., t'iem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 35, 5), hateful to God, exceptionally impious
and wicked ; (Vulg. deo odibilis) : Ro. i. 30 (Eur. Troad.
1213 and Cyclop. 396, C02; joined with «δικοί in Clem,
horn. 1, 12, where just before occurs οί θ('υν μισοϋνης).
Cf. the full discussion of the word by Frilzschr, Com. on
Rom. i. p. 84 s<|q. ; [and see W. 53 sq. (53)].*
eeirqs, -ητος, ή, (deltas, TertuU., Augustine [de civ.
Dei 7, 1]), deity i. e. the state of being God, Godhead:
Col. ii. 9. (Lcian. Icar. 9; Plut. de defect, orac. 10 p.
415 c.)•
[Syn. βίότηί, θαίτης: β(ότ. deity differs from flcKJT.
divinity, as essence differs from quality or attribute; cf.
Trench § ii. ; Bp. Lghtft. or Mey. ou Col. 1. c. ; Fritzsche on
Ro. i. 20.]
Θεόφιλο;, -ου, (θίάς and φίλος). Theophilus, a Christian
to whom Luke inscribed his (iospel and Acts of the
Apostles : Lk. i. 3 ; Acts i. 1. The conjectures concern-
ing his family, rank, nationality, are reviewed by (among
others) Win. R\VB. s. v. ; Bleek on Lk. i. 3 ; [B. D. s .v.] ;
see also under κράτιστος.'
6cpairc(a, -at, ή. {θ(ραπ(ύω) ; 1. service, rendered by
any one to another. 2. spec, medical service, curiny,
healiny : Lk. ix. 11; Rev. xxii. 2, ([Hippocr.], Plat.,
Isocr., Polyb.). 3. by melon, household, i. e. body tij
attendants, servants, dotnestics: Mt. ,xxiv. 45 RG; Lk.
xii. 42, (and often so in Grk. writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
469 : for m?;•, Gen. xlv. 16).*
θίραπενιι) ; impf. fθepάπιυov: (at. θeρnπfίσω: 1 aor. t ί(-
ράπ(υσα; Pass., pres. Sfpantvopai: iuqif. (θ(ραπίυύμην;
pf. ptcp. τίθιραπιυμίνος; 1 aor. €'θ(ραπ(νθην: (θίραψ, i.<i.
θιράπων) ; fr. Hom. down ; 1. to serve, do service :
τινά, to one ; pass, θιραπ. υπό τίνος, Acts xvii. 25. 2.
to heal, cure, restore to health: Mt. xii. 10; Mk. vi. 5 ; Lk.
vi. 7 ; ix. 6 ; xiii. 14 ; xiv. 3 ; Tcra, Mt. iv. 24 ; viii. 7, 16,
etc. ; Mk. i. 34 ; iii. 10; Lk. iv. 23 ; x. 9 ; pass., Jn. v. 10 ;
Acts iv. 14 ; v. 16, etc. ; τίνα απότινος, to cure one of any
disease, Lk. vii. 21; pass., Lk. v. 15; viii. 2: Otpantidv
νόσους, μαΚακίαν: Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; x. 1; Mk. iii. i5
θ^ραττων
289
Vfwpew
[R G L, Tr mrg. in br.]; Lk. ix. 1 ; a wound, pass., Rev.
xiii. 3, 12.
θ£ρά'π'ων, -οντοί, 6, [perh. fr. a root to hold, have about
one: cf. Eng. retainer; Vanicek p. 396 ; fr. Horn, down],
Sept. for 12j.\, an attendant, servant : of Uod, spoken of
Moses discharging the duties committed to him by God,
Heb. iii. 5 as in Num. .\ϋ. 7 sq. ; Josh. i. 2 ; viii. 31, 33
(ix. 4, G) ; Sap. x. 16. [Syn. see διάκονοί-Ί*
eepC^u; fut. θερίσω [Β. 37 (32), cf. IK//. App. p. 1G3
S([.]; 1 aor. ίθίρισα; 1 aor. pass. (θ(ρίσθην; {fiipos) ;
Sept. for li'p ; [fr. Aeschyl., Ildt. down]; to reap, har-
vest ; a. prop. : Mt. vi. 26 ; Lk. xii. 24 ; Jas. v. 4 ; [fig.
Jn. iv. 36 (bis)]. b. in proverbial expressions about
sowing and reaping : άλλο? . . . ό θ^ρΊζων, one does tlie
work, anotlier gets tlie reward, Jn. iv. 37 sq. (where the
meaning is 'ye hereafter, in winning over a far greater
number of the Samaritans to tlie kingdom of God, will
enjoy the fruits of tlie work which I have now com-
menced among them ' [al. do not restrict the reference
to converted Samaritans]); βιρίζων οπού ηΐκ tanei-
pas. unjustly appropriating to thyself the fruits of oth-
ers' labor, Mt. xxv. 24, 26 ; Lk. xix. 21 sq. ; ό eav . . .
eepiofi, as a man has acted (on earth) so (hereafter by
God) will he be requited, either with reward or pen-
alty, (his deeds will determine his doom). Gal. vi. 7
(a proverb : ut setnentem fereris, ita metes, Cic. de orat.
2, 65 ; [σν δί ταϋτα αίσχρωί μϊν eanfipas κακώς Se eSe-
ρισας, Aristot. rhet. 3, 3, 4 ; cf. Plato, Phaedr. 2C0 d. ; see
Meyer on Gal. 1. c.]) ; τί, to receive a thing by way of
rew.artl or punishment: ra σαρκικά, 1 Co. i.\. 11 ; φθοράν,
ζωηρ αΐώνιον, (ial. vi. 8, {σπΐίμ^ιν πνρονς, θ^ρίζ^ιν άκάι/θας,
.Ter. xii. 13 ; ό ση^ίρων φανΧα βΐρίσ^ι κακά, Prov. xxii. 8;
fctu στΓίΐρητί κακά, πάσαν τηραχην και θλΐψιν θίρΊσ(Τ€,
Test. χϋ. Patr. ρ. 576 [i. e. test. Levi § 13]) ; absol. : of
the reward of well-doing, Gal. vi. 9 ; 2 Co. ix. 6. c. As
the crops are cut down with the sickle, θίρίζιιν is fig.
used for to destroy, cut off: Rev. xiv. 15 ; with the addi-
tion of 1-17» γι", to remove the wicked inhabitants of the
earth and deliver them up to destruction, ib. 16 [την
Άσίαν, Plat. reg. et. imper. apophthegm. (Antig. 1), p.
182 a.].•
θίρκτμόΐ, -οΰ, ό, (θ€ρίζω), harvest : i. q. the ac t of reap-
ing, Jn. iv. 35 ; fig. of the gathering of men into the
kingdom of God, ibid. i. q. the time of reaping, i. e.
fig. the time of final judgment, when the righteous are
gathered into the kingdom of God and the wicked are
delivered up to destruction, Mt. xiii. 30, 39 ; Mk. iv. 29.
I. ([. the crop to be reaped, i. e. fig. a multitude of men to
be taught how to obtain salvation, Mt. ix. 37 sq. ; Lk. .x. 2 ;
€ξηράνθη 6 θίρισμόί, the crops are ripe for the harvest,
i. e. the time is come to destroy the wicked, Rev. xiv.
15. (Sept. for TXP; rare in Grk. writ., as Xen. oec.
18, 3; Polyb. 5, 95, 5.)*
βίρνσ-τήϊ, -oO, ό, (θ(ρΊζω), a reaper: Mt. xiii. 30, 39.
(Bel and the Dragon 33; Xen., Dem., Aristot., Pint.,
al.)•
θ£ρμ.α(νω : Mid., pres. dtppaivopai; impf. ΐθ(ρμαινόμην:
{fifppos)' fr. Horn, down; to make warm, to heat ; mid.
to warm one's self: Mk. xiv. 54, 67; Jn. xviii. 18, 25;
Jas. ii. 16.•
θί'ρμ,η (and θίρμα; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 331, [Rather
ford, Xew Phryn. p. 414]), ->;f, ή, heal: Acts .xxviii. 3.
(Eccl. iv. 1 1 ; Job vi. 1 7 ; Ps. xviii. (xix.) 7 ; Thuc, Plat.,
Menand., al.) *
Bc'pos, -ου£, TO, (ίί'ρω to heat), summer: Mt. xxiv. 32;
Mk. xiii. 28; Lk. xxi. 30. (From liom. down; Hebr.
]•'ρ, Prov. vi. 8 ; Gen. viii. 22.) •
Θίσ-σ•αλονικίν5, -(tut, 6, a Thessalonian : Acts xx. 4 ;
xxvii. 2 ; 1 Th. 1. 1 ; 2 Th. i. 1.•
Θε(Γ(Γαλον(κη, -ijr, ή, Thessalonica (now Saloniki), a
celebrated and populous city, situated on the Thermaic
Gulf, the capital of the second [(there were four ; cf. Liv.
xiv. 29)] division of .Macedonia and the residence of a
Roman governor and quaestor. It was anciently called
Therme, but was rebuilt by Cassander, the son of Anti-
pater, and called by its new name [which first appears
in Polyb. 23, 11, 2] in honor of his wife Thessalonica,
the sister of Alexander the Great; cf. Strabo 7, 330.
Here Paul the .apostle founded a Christian church : Acts
.xvii. 1, 11, 13; Phil. iv. 16; 2 Tim. iv. 10. [BB. DI).
s. v. ; Leirin, St. Paul, i. 225 .s<|q.] •
@ev8as [prob. contr. fr. 6(όδωρο!, W. 103 (97); esp.
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15 ; on its infiection cf. B. 20 (18)],
0, Theudas, an impostor who instigated a rebeDion which
came to a wretched end in the time of Augustus : Acts
V. 36. Josephus (antt. 20, 5, 1) makes mention of one
Theudas, a magician, who came into notice by pretend-
ing that he was a prophet and was destroyed when
Cuspius Fadus governed Judiea in the time of Claudius.
Accordingly many interjireters hold that there were two
insurgents by the name of Theudas ; while others, with
far creater probability, supjiose that the mention of
Theudas is ascribed to Gamaliel by an anachronism on
the part of Luke. On the different opinions of others
cf. Sleyer on Acts 1. c. ; Win. RWB. s. v. ; Keim in
Schenkel v. 510 sq. ; [esp. Ilackett in B. D. s. v.].•
6(ωρίω, -ω ; inipf. (θ(ώρονν\ [fut. βιωρησω, Jn. vii. 3 Τ
Tr WH] ; 1 aor. ϊθιώρησα ; (θ(ωράς a spectator, and this
fr. θίάομαι, q. v. [cf. Vanicek p. 407; L. and S. s. v.;
Allen in the Am. Journ. of Philol. i. p. 131 sq.]); [fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down] ; Sept. for nX") and Chald. nm ;
1. to he a spectator, look al, behold, Germ, schauen, (the
Bempoi were men who attended the games or the sacri-
fices as public deputies; cf. Grimm on 2 Jlacc. iv. 19);
absol.: Mt. xxvii. 55; Mk. .\v. 40; Lk. xxiii. 35; foil,
by indir. disc, Mk. xii. 41 ; xv. 47 ; used esp. of persons
and things looked upon as in some respect noteworthy :
τινά, Jn. vi. 40; xvi. 10, 16 .sij. 19; Acts iii. IC ; xxv. 24;
Rev. xi. 1 1 sq. ; ό θ(ωρών τον νίον θιωρίϊ τον πατέρα,
the majesty of the Father resplendent in the Son, Jn.
xii. 45 ; τινά with ptcp. [B. 301 (258) : Mk. v. 15] ; Lk.
X. 18; Jn. vi. 19; [x. 12]; xx. 12, 14; [1 Jn. iii. 17];
τί, Lk. xiv. 29 ; xxi. 6 ; xxiii. 48 ; Acts iv. 1 3 ; τα a-qpeia,
Jn.ii.23; vi.2LTrWH; Acts viii. 13, (ίαυ^ιαστα τί'ρατα.
Sap. xi.x. 8) ; τα tpya τοΰ Χρίστου, Jn. vii. 3 ; τί with
ptcp., Jn. XX. 6 ; Acts vii. 56 ; x. 11 ; foil, by oTt, Acts
ί>€ωρΜ
290
θ
ησαυρο^
χχχ. 26; to view attentively, take a view of, survey: τ»,
Mt. xxviii. 1 ; to view mentally, consider : foil, by oral,
obliq., lleb. vii. 4. 2. to see ; i. e. a. lo perceive
with the eyes : πικΰμα, Lk. xxiv. 37 ; rtra with a ptcp., ibid.
39 ; τίκά, ότι, fin. ix. 8 ; τΰ πρόσοητόν Tivof (after the Ilebr. ;
see ιτρόσωπον, 1 a.), i. ij. to enjoy the presence of one,
have intercourse with him, Acts xx. 38 ; oixtTi Bfrnpe'iv
Tiva. used of one from whose si^lit a person lias been
withdrawn, .In. .xiv. 19 ; οΰ θιωρύ A κύσμο! το πιχνμα, ϊ. e.
SO to speak, has no eyes with which it can see the Spirit;
he cannot render himself visible to it, cannot give it his
presence and power, .In. xiv. 1 7. b. to discern, descry:
Ti, Mk. V. 38 ; τινά, Mk. iii. 1 1 ; Acts Lx. 7. c. to ascer-
tain, Jind out, by seeing : τινά with a pred. ace., Acts xvii.
22; τί with ptcp., Acts xvii. IG ; xxviii. 6; ort, Mk. xvi.
4; .In. iv. 19; xii. 19; Acts xix. 26; xxvii. 10; foil, by
indir. disc, Acts xxi. 20; Ilebraistically (see €ίδω, I. .ϋ)
i. q. to yet knowledge of: Jn. vi. G2 (r. vlov τ. άνθρώιτον
άναβαίνοντα the Son of Man by death ascending; cf. LUcke,
Meyer [yet cf. Weiss in the 6te Aufl.], Baumg.-Crusius,
in loc.) ; τ6ν θάνατον i. e. to die, Jn. viii. 51 ; and on the oth-
er hand, την &ύξαν τοϋ Χριστού, to be a partaker of the
glory, i. e. the blessed condition in heaven, which Christ
enjoys, Jn. .wii. 24, cf. 22. [Comp. : ava-, παρα-θ(ωρίω.1 *
[Syv. θ(ωρ€ίν, θΐασθαι. bpav, σκοΐΓ€Ϊν: θΐωρ, is
used primarily not of an indifferent spectator, but of one
who looks at a thing with interest and for a purpose : βίωρ.
would be used of a general officially reviewing or inspecting
an army, θιασθ. of a lay spectator looking at the parade,
flfwp. as denoting the careftd observation of details can even
be contrasted with Spav in so far as the latter denotes only
perception in the general ; so used Oewpftv quite coincides
with σκοτ. Schmidt i. ch. 11; see also Green, ' Crit. Xote ' on
Mt. vii. 3. Cf. s. vv. bpicji, σκοττίω.]
Ociupla, -ar, ή, (θιωράι, on which see θιωρΐω inlt.) ; fr.
[.Veschyl.], lldt. down ; 1. a viewing, beholding. 2.
that which is viewed; a spectacle, sight: Lk. x.xiii. 48 (3
Mace. V. 24).•
βήκη, -i)y, η, (τΊθημι) ; fr. [Aeschyl.], Ildt. down ; that
in which a thing is put or laid aicay, a receptacle, reposi-
tory, chest, box: used of the sheath of a sword, Jn. xviii.
11; Joseph, antt. 7, 11, 7; Poll. 10, (31) 144.*
θηλάζω ; 1 aor. ϊθήΧασα ; (θη^η a breast, [cf. Peile,
Etym. p. 124sq.]); 1. trans, to give the breast, give
such,lo sucHe: Mt. xxiv. 19; Mk. xiii. 17; Lk. xxi. 23,
(Lys., Aristot^ al. ; Sept. for ρ'ΓΠ) ; μαστοί (θηΚασαν,
Lk. x.xiii. 29 KG. 2. intrans. to suck: Mt. .xxi. 16
(Aristot., Plat., Lcian., al. ; Sept. for pj;) ; μαστοΐί, Lk.
xi. 27; Job iii. 12; Cant. viii. 1; Joel ii. 16; Theocr.
iii. 1*;.•
θήλνϊ, -fio, -υ, [cf. θηΚάζω, init.], of the female sex; η
θή\€ΐα, subst. a wnman, a female : Ro. i. 26 sq. ; also τί
θ'ηΧν, Mt. .\i.x. 4 ; Mk. x. 6 ; Gal. iii. 28. (Gen. i. 27 ;
vii. 2 ; Ex. i. 16, etc. ; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.)*
θήρα [Lat. fera ; perh. fr. root to run, spring, prey,
Vanicek p. 415; cf. Curtius §314], -as, ή; fr. Horn,
down; a hunting of wild beasts to destroy them; hence,
fio-uratively, of preparing destruction for men, [A. V. a
trup'l, Ro. xi. 9, on which cf. Fritzsche.•
βηρ<ν« : 1 aor. inf. θηρησαι ; (fr. ΰηρα, as ατγρήω fr.
iypa [cf. Schmidt ch. 72, 3]) ; fr. Ilom. down \ to go a
hunting, to hunt, lo catch in hunting; metaph. to lay wail
for, strive to ensnare ; to catch artfully : τ\ « στόματόί
Tivos, Lk. xi. 54.•
θηριομαχ€<ιΐ, -ά : 1 aor. €θηριομάχησα : (θηριομάχοΐ) ; to
fight with wild beasts (Dioil. 3, 43, 7 ; Artem. oneir. 2, 54 ;
5, 49) ; fi (θηριομάχησα iv Έφίπαι, 1 Co. xv. 32 — these
words some take literally, supposing that Paul was con-
demned to fight with wild beasts; others explain them
tropically of a fierce contest with brutal and ferocious
men (so θηριομαχι'ιν in Ignat. ad Rom. 5, [etc.] ; oioir
θηρίοί! μαχόμίθα says Poinpey, in Apji. bell. civ. 2, 61 ;
sec θηρΐον). The former opinion encounters the objec-
tion that Paul would not have omitted this most terrible
of all perils from the catalogue in 2 Co. xi. 23 sqq.•
θηρ(ον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of θηρ ; hence a little beast, little
animal; Plat. Theaet. p. 171 e.; of bees, Theocr. 19, 6;
but in usage it had almost always the force of its primi-
tive ; the later dimin. is ϋηρίδιον [cf. Epictet. diss. 2, 9,
6]) ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; Sept. for Π'Π and Π3Π2, an ani-
mal; a icild animal, wild beast, beast: prop., Mk. i. 13;
Acts X. 12 Rec. ; xi. 6; χ.χτϋ1. 4 sq. ; lleb. xii. 20; [.Jas.
iii. 7] ; Rev. vi. 8 ; in Rev. xi. 7 and chh. xiii.-xx., under
the fig. of a 'beast' is depicted Antichrist, both his
person and his kingdom and power, (see αντίχριστος) ;
metaph. a brutal, bestial man, savage, ferocious. Tit. i.
12 [coUoq. 'ugly dogs'], (so in Arstph. eqq. 273 ; Plut.
439; nub. 184; [cf. Schmidt ch. 70,2; apparently never
with allusion to the stupidity of beasts]; still other
e.xx. are given by Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 379; θηρία
άνθμωπήμορφα, Ignat. Smyrn. 4, cf. ad Ephes. 7). [Syn.
sec ζώον.] '
θησ-αυρίζω ; 1 aor. (θησαύρισα ; pf. pass. ptcp. τίθησαυ-
ρισμίνος ; (θησαυρό:) ; fr. Ildt. down ; lo gather and lay
up, to heap up, store up : to accumulate riches, Jas. v. 3;
Tivi, Lk. xii. 21 ; 2 Co. xii. 14 ; τί, 1 Co. xvi. 2 ; θησαυρού!
ίαντώ, Mt. vi. 19 sq. ; i. q. to keep in store, store up, reserve :
pass. 2 Pet. iii. 7 ; metaph. so to live from day to day as
to increase either the bitterness or the happiness of one's
consequent lot : όργην ίαυτω, Ro. ii. 5 ; κα<ά, Prov. i. 1 8 ;
ζωήν, Pss. of Sol. 9, 9, ((ντνχίαν, .•\ρρ. Samn. 4, 3 [i. e.
vol. i. p. 23, 31 ed. Bekk.] ; τιθησανρισμίνο! κατά tivos
φθόνος, Diod. 20, 36). [CoMP. : άπο- θησαυρίζω.]*
θησαυροί, -oO, ό, (fr. ΘΕΩ [τίθημί] with the paragog.
term, -αυρος) ; Sept. often for lyiK ; Lat. thesaurus ; i. e.
1. the place in which goods and precious things are col-
lected and laid up; a. α casket, coffer, or other recep-
tacle, in which valuables are kept: Mt. ii. 11. b. a
treasury (Ildt., Eur., Plat., .\ristot., Diod., Plut., Hdian. ;
1 Mace. iii. 29). c. storehouse, repository, magazine,
(Neh. xiii. 12; Deut. xxviii. 12, etc. ; App. Pun.88, 95) :
Iklt. xiii. 52 [cf. jroXoio't, 1] ; metaph. of the soul, as the
repository of thoughts, feelings, purposes, etc. : [Mt. xii.
35* G L Τ Tr AVH, 35'] ; with epex. gen. τηι KopSias, ibid,
xii. 35' Rec. ; Lk. vi. 45. 2. the things laid up in a
treasury; collected treasures: Mt. vi. 19-21; Lk. xii
33 sq. ; Heb. xi. 26. θησαυρον (χ(ΐν iv ονρανω, to have
uiTfyav
291
θρήνοι;
treasure laid up for themselves in heaven, is used of those
to whom God has appointed eternal salvation : Mt. xLx.
21; Mk. X. 21; Lk. xviii. 22; something precious, Mt.
xiii. 44 ; used thus of the Ught of the gospel, 2 Co. iv. 7 ;
with an epex. gen. της σοφίας (Xen. mem. 4, 2, 9 ; Plat.
Phil. p. 1.5 e.) κ. -γι/ώσ^ω!, i• q- πάσα ή σοφία κ. -γνώσΐ! ωί
θησαυροί, Col. ii- 3.*
βιγγάνω [prob. akin to τ(Ίχο5, Jingo, βοΐίοη, etc.; Cur-
tius § 14.5]: 2 aor. ΐθιγον; to touch, handle: μηίΐ θίγτ)!
touch not sc. impure things, Col. ii. 21 [cf. άπτω, 2 c] ;
Tira's, Heb. xii. 20 ([Aeschyl.], Xen., Plat., Tragg., al.);
Uke the Hebr. ;'JJ, to do violence to, injure : τινόί, Heb.
xi. 2-S (Eur. Iph. Aul. 13S1 ; hv a'l βλάβαι αύται θιγγά-
ί-ουσι. Act. Thom. § 12). [Syx. see άτιτω, 2 c] *
θλίβω; Pass., pres. θλίβομαι: pf. ptcp. τιθΚψμίι/ος ;
l^aXWftdviuiflagrum, affliction: fr. Hom. down] ; to press
(as trrapes), press hard upon : prop, τινά [A. \ . throng^,
Mk. iii. 9 ; oSor τΐθλιμμίνη a compressed wag, i. e. nar-
row, straitened, contracted, Mt. vii. 14; metaph. to trouble,
aβict, distress, (Vulg. tribulo) : τινά, 2 Th. i. 6 ; pass.
(Vulg. Iribulor, [also angustior^ ; tribulationem potior) :
2 Co. i. 6; iv. 8; vii. 5; [1 Th. iu. 4 ; 2 Th. i. 7]; 1 Tim.
V. 10; Heb. xi. 37. (oi θλίβοντις for πηΧ in Sept.)
[COMP. : άπο-, σνν-θ\ίβω.'] *
βλίψΐί, or ίλΙψίΓ [so L Tr], (cf. W. § 6, 1 e. ; Lipsius,
Grammat. Untersuch. p. 35), -(ws, ή, (θλίβω), prop, a
pressing, pressing together, pressure (Strab. p. 52; Ga-
len) ; in bibl. and eccles. Grk. metaph., oppression, afflic-
tion, tribulation, distress, straits; Vulg. tribulatio, also
pressura (2 Co. i. 4*•; Jn. xvi. [21], 33; [Phil. i. 16 (17) ;
and in Col. i. 24 passioj) ; (Sept. for ΓΤΐγ, also for Ίϊ,
■(•nSetc.): Mt.xxiv.9; Acts vii. 1 1 ; xi. 1 9 ; Ro. xii. 1 2 ;
2 Co. i. 4, 8 ; iv. 17 ; vi. 4 ; vii. 4 ; viii. 2 ; 2 Th. i. G ;
Rev. i. 9 ; ii. 9, 22 ; vii. 14 ; joined with στfvoχωpίa [cf.
Trench § Iv.], Ro. ii. 9; viii. 35, (Deut. xxviii. 53 sq. ;
Is. [viii. 22] ; xxx. 6) ; with ανάγκη, 1 Th. iii. 7 ; with
διωγμοί, Mt. xiii. 21 ; Jlk. iv. 17 ; 2 Th. i. 4 ; of the afflic-
tions of those hard pressed by siege and the calamities
of war, Mt. xxiv. 21, 29; Mk. xiii. 19, 24 ; of the straits
of want, 2 Co. viii. 13; Phil. iv. 14 [here al. give the
word a wider reference] ; Jas. i. 2 7 ; of the distress of
a woman in child-birth, Jn. xvi. 21. θλίψιν ίχω (i. q.
θλίβομαι), Jn. xvi. 33 ; 1 Co. vii. 28 ; Rev. ii. 10 ; θλίψα
Ιπί τίνα ΐρχίται. Acts vii. 11; eV θλίψιι, 1 Th. i. 6. plur. :
Acts vii. 10 ; xiv. 22 ; xx. 23 ; Ro. v. 3 ; Eph. iii. 13 ; 1
Th. iii. 3 ; Heb. x. 33 ; roC Χρίστου, the afflictions which
Christ had to undergo (and which, therefore, his fol-
lowers must not shrink from), Col. i. 24 (see ανταναπλψ
ρόω) ; θλί^Ι/κ τη! KapSias (κ. συνοχή), anxiety, burden of
heart, 2 Co. ii. 4 ; ΘΧίψιν ΐπιφίρ^ιν ( L Τ Tr ΛΥΗ iyeipeiv,
see iyfipo}, 4 c.) τοΐί δ€σμοΪΓ τίνος, to increase the misery
of my imprisonment by causing me anxiety, Phil. i. 16
(17).•
θνήβ-κω : pf. τίθνηκα, inf. τ(θνάναι and L Τ Tr WH
Τ(θνηκ(ναι (in Acts xiv. 19), ptcp. Τ(θνηκώς: plupf. 3
pers. sing. (τ(θνήκ(ΐ (.Jn. xi. 21 Rec); [fr. Hom. down];
Sept. for nn ; to die ; pf. to be dead : Mt. ii. 20 ; Mk. xv.
44; Lk. vii. 12 [L br.] ; viii. 49 ; Jn. xi. 21, Rec. in 39
and 41, 44 ; xii. 1 [T WH om. L Tr br.] ; xix. 33 ; Acts
xiv. 1 9 ; XXV. 1 9 ; metaph., of the loss of spiritual life :
ζώσα τ(θνηκ(, i. e. κ&ν δοκ,ή ζην ταύτην την αίσθητην ζωήν,
τίθνηκί κατά πν(ϋμα (Theoph.) : 1 Tim. ν. Ο (Philo de
prof. § 10 ζώντις tvioi τιθνήκασι και τ(θνηκάτ€ς ζωσΐ).
[CoMP. : άπο-, σνν-απο-θνησκω.^*
θνητόϊ, -ij, -oV, (verbal adj. fr. θνήσκω), [fr. Hom.
down], liable to death, mortal: Ro. vi. 12; viii. 11; 1 Co.
XV. 53 sq. ; 2 Co. iv. 11 ; v. 4. [θνητός subject to death,
and so still living ; νεκρός actually dead.'] *
θορυβάξω : {θόρυβος, q. v.) ; to trouble, disturb, (i. e.
τυρβάζω, q. v.) ; Pass. pres. 2 pers. sing, θορυβάζτ] in Lk.
X. 41 L Τ Tr WH after codd. ν Β C L etc. (Xot found
elsewh. [Soph. Lex. s. v. quotes Euseb. of Alex. {Migne,
Patr. Graec. vol. Ixxxvi. 1) p. 444 c.].) *
θορυβί'ω, -ώ : impf. (θορυβούν: pres. pass, θορυβούμαι;
{θόρυβος) ; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to make a noise or up-
roar, be turbulent. 2. trans, to disturb, throw into con-
fusion : την πόλιν, to " set the city on an uproar," Acts
xvii. 5 ; pass, to be troubled in mind, Acts xx. 10 [al. here
adhere to the outward sense]; to wail tumultuously,
Mt. Lx. 23 ; Mk. v. 39.»
θόρυβο$, -ου, ό, (akin to θρόος, τνρβη, τυρβάζω, [but
τίιρβη etc. seem to come from another root ; cf. Curtius
§ 250]), a noise, tumult, uproar : of persons wailing, Mk.
V. 38 ; of a clamorous and excited multitude, Mt. xxvii.
24 ; of riotous persons. Acts xx. 1 ; xxi. 34 ; a tumult,
as a breach of public order, Mt. xxvi. 5 : Mk. xiv. 2 ;
Acts xxiv. 18. (In Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down;
several times in Sept.)*
θρανω: pf. pass. ptcp. τιθραυσμίνος; fr. [Hdt.], Aes-
chyl. down, to break, break in pieces, shatter, smite through,
(Ex. XV. 6; Num. xxiv. 17, etc.; 2 Mace. xv. 16) : re-
θραυσμίνοι, broken by calamity [A. V. bruisedl, Lk. iv.
18 (19) fr. Is. Iviii. 6 for D-yiX";• [Stn. see ρήγνυμι.]*
θρ«'μ.|ΐα, -τος, τό, (τρίφω), whatever is Jed or nursed;
hence 1. a ward, nursling, child, (Soph., Eur., Plat.,
al.). 2. a flock, cattle, esp. sheep and goats : Jn. iv.
12. (Xen. oec. 20, 23; Plat., Diod., Joseph., Plut.,
Lcian., Aelian, al.) *
βρηνεω, -ά : impf. ϊθρήνουν : fut. θρηνήσω ; 1 aor. ^θρη-
νησα ; {θρήνος, q. V.) ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for ^"Vn,
nip, etc. ; 1. to lament, to mourn: Jn. xvi. 20 ; of the
singers of dirges, [to wait], Mt. xi. 17; Lk. vii. 32. 2.
to bewail, deplore: τινά, Lk. xxiii. 27.*
[On Θρην4αι to lament, κόπτομαι to smite the breast in fimf,
\υτΓ(ομαι to he pained, saddened, πινθίω to ninum, cf. Trench
§ Ixv. and see κλαίω fin. ; yet note that in classic Grk. \tnr.
is the most comprehensive word, designating every species
of pain of body or sonl ; and that ττ^νβίω expresses a self-
contained L'rief. never riolent in its manifestations ; like our
Eng. word " mourn " it is associated by usag-e with the death
of kindred, and like it used pregnantly to suggest that event.
See Schmidt vol. ii. ch 83.]
θρήνος, -OV, 0, (θρίομαι to cry aloud, to lament ; cf.
Germ. Thrane [(?), rather dronen; Curtius § 317]), a
lamentation : Mt. ii. 18 Rec. (Sept. for nrp, also "HJ ;
O. T. Apocr.; Hom., Pind., Tragg., Xen. Ages. 10, 3;
Plat., al.)•
θρησκεία
292
θιτγάτηρ
βρησκ€(α T(lf. -ία [see !, «], (a later word ; Ion. θρησκίη
in Ililt. [2, 18. 37 J), -at, ή, (fr. θμησκ(ύω, and this fr.
θρήσκοι, q. V. ; hence apparently primarily fear of the
gotls); religious worship, esp. external, that which consists
in ceremonies : hence in plur. θρησκίας (iriTtkdv μυρίαί,
Hdt. 2, 37 ; καθίστας ayvfiai re κα\ θρησκΐία^ καΐ καθαρ-
μού!, Dion. Hal. 2, (ill; univ. riliijinus worshij), .las. i.
26 sq. ; with gen. of the obj. [W. 1S7 (Ι'ΰ)] τ-ώκ ayyt-
λω]/, Col. ii. IH {των (Ι^ώλων, Sap. ,\iv. 27 ; των 6αίμύνων,
Euseb. h. e. G, 41, 2; τύν θ(ών, ib. 9, 1», 14; toC θtuϋ,
Ildian. 4, 8, 17 [7 ed. Bekk.] ; often in Josephus [cf.
Krebs, Observv. etc. p. 339 sq.] ; Clem. Kom. 1 Cor. 45,
7) ; reliijious discipline, rfligion : ήμιτίρα θρησκ(1α, of
Judaism, Acts .xxvi. 5 (την ΐμην θμησκιίαν καταλιπών, put
into the mouth of (iod by .Tosepli. antt. 8, 11, 1 ; with
gen. of the subj. των Ίονδαίων, i Mace. v. 6, 13 (12);
Jose[)h. antt. 12, 5, 4; θρ. κοσμική, i. e. worthy to be
embraced by all nations, a wnrlil-rcliijion, b. j. 4, .O,
2; pieti/, TTtpi τ. θιόν, antt. 1, 1.'!, 1; κατίι την ίμφυτον
θρησκ(ίαν των βαρβάρων προ! το βασιΧικον όνομα, L'liarit.
7, 6 ρ. 165, 18 ed. Keiske; of the reverence of An-
tiochus the Pious for the Jewish religion, Josejih. antt.
13, 8, 2). Cf. Grimm on 4 Mace. v. 6; [esp. Trench
§ xlviii.].•
βρή(Γκο5 (TWn θρησκό!, cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 101];
W. § 6, 1 e. ; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 28), -ou, ή,
fearing or loorshipping God; religious, (apparently fr.
Tp(u> to tremble ; hence prop, trembling, fearful ; cf. J. (1.
MiUler in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 121 ; on the
different conjectures of others, see Passow s. v. [Cur-
tius § 316 connects with θρα; hence ' to adhere to,' 'be
a votary of ' ; cf. Vanicek p. 395]) : Jas. i. 26. [Cf.
Trench § xlviii.] •
βριαμβίύω ; 1 aor. ptcp. θpιaμβfiσas ; (θρίαμβος, a hymn
sung in festal processions in honor of Bacchus ; among
the Romans, a triumphal procession [Lat. triumphus, with
which word it is thought to be allied ; cf. Vanicek p.
317]) ; 1. to triumph, to celebrate a triumph, (Dion.
Hal., App., Plut., lldian., al.) ; τιι/ά, over one (as Plut.
Thes. and Rom. comp. 4) : Col. ii. 15 (where it signifies
the victory won by God over the demoniacal powers
through Christ's death). 2. by a usage unknown to
prof, auth., with a Iliphil or causative force (cf. W. p. 23
and § Ά8, 1 [cf. B. 147 (129)]), with the ace. of a pers., to
cause one to triumph, i. e. metaph. to grant one complete
success, 2 Co. ii. 14 [but others reject the causative
sense ; see Mey. ad loc. ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.].*
βρίξ, τριχήί, dat. phir. θριξί, ή, [fr. Hom. down], the
hair; a. the hair of the head: Mt. v. 36; Lk. vii. 44;
xxi. 18 ; Jn. xi. 2 ; xii. 3 ; Acts xxvii. 34 ; 1 Pet. iii. 3
[Lchra.om.]; Rev. i. 14; with της κ(φα\η! added (Hom.
Od. 13, 399. 431), Mt. X. 30; Lk. vii. 38 ; xii. 7. b.
the hair of animals: Rev. ix. 8 ; evSfSvp. τρίχας καμήλου,
with a garment made of camel's hair, Mk. i. 6, cf. Mt.
iii. 4 ; iv . . . τριχών καμη\(ίων π\(γμασιν πιρκτιάτησαν,
Clem. Ale.x. strom. 4 p. 221 ed. .Sylb.*
epoc'u, -ώ : (θροός clamor, tumult) ; in Grk. writ, to cry
alowl, make a noise by outcry ; in the N. T. to trouble.
frighten; Pass. pres. θροονμαι; to be troubled in mind, to
be frightened, alarmed: Mt. xxiv. 6 [B. 243 (209)] ; Mk.
xiii. 7 ; 2 Th. ii. 2 ; [1 aor. ptcp. θροηθίντα, Lk. xxiv. 37
Trmrg. WHmrg.]. (Cant. v. 4.)*
θρόμβος, -ου, ό, [allied with τρϊφω in the sense lo
thicken; Vanicek p. 3U7], a large thick drop, esp. of
clotted blood (Aeschyl. Eum. 184); with αίματος added
(Acschyl. choeph. 533, 546; Plat. Critias p. 120 a.),
Lk. xxii. 44 [Lbr. WH reject the pass, (.see WII. App.
ad loc.)].•
θρόνοϊ, -ου, ό, (ΘΡΑ12 to sit; cf. Curtius §316), [fr.
Hom. down], Sept. for {<D3, a throne, seat, i.e. a chair of
state having a footstool ; assigned in the N. T. to kings,
hence by meton. for kingly power, royalty: Lk. i. 32,52;
Acts ii. 30. metaph. to God, the governor of the world :
Mt. v. 34 ; x.xiii. 22 ; Acts vii. 49 (Is. Ixvi. 1 ) ; Rev. i. 4 ;
iii. 21 ; iv. 2-6, 9, 10, etc. ; Heb. iv. 16 ; viii. 1 ; xii. 2. to
the Messiah, the partner and assistant in the divine
administration: Mt. xix. 28; xxv. 31 ; IJev. iii. 21 ; xx.
11; xxii. 3 ; hence the divine power belonging to Christ,
Heb. i. 8. to judges, i. q. tribunal or bench (Plut. mor.
p. 807 b.) : Mt. xix. 28; Lk. xxii. 30; Rev. xx. 4. to
elders: Rev. iv. 4 ; xi. 16. to Satan: Rev. ii. 13 ; cf.
Bleek ad loc. to the beast (concerning which see
θηρίον) : Rev. xvi. 10. θρόνος is used by meton. of one
who holds dominion or exercises authority ; thus in plur.
of angels: Col. i. 16 [.see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].
Θυάτίίρα, -ων, τά, (and once -ας, η, Rev. i. II Lchm.
θνάτιφαν [cf. Tdf. ad loc; H7/.App. ji. 156 ; B. 18(16)]),
Thyatira, a city of Lydia, formerly Pelopia and Euhippia
(Plin. h. n. 5, 31), now Akhissar, a colony of Macedonian
Greeks, situated between Sardis and Pergamum on the
river Lyeus ; its inhabitants gained their living by
traflic and the art of dyeing in purple: Acts xvi. 14;
Rev. i. 11 ; ii. 18, 24. [B. D. s. v.]*
θογάτηρ, gen. θυγατρύς, dat. θυγατρί, ace. θυγατίρα, voc.
θι'γατ(ρ, ])lur. βχτγατ€ρ(ς, ace. -ίρας, ή, (of the same root
as (iothic dauhlar, Y^'g. daughter. Germ. Tochler [Curlius
§ 318; Vanicek p. 415]); Hebr. n3 ; [fr. Hom. down];
a daughter: prop., Mt. ix. 18; x. 35, 37; xv. 22; Acts
vii. 21, etc. improp. a. the vocative [or nom. as voc.
cf. W.§29,2; B. §129a. 5; I-F/Z.App. p. 15S] in kindly
address : Mt. ix. 22 ; Mk. v. 34 [L Tr AVll θνγάτηρ] ; Lk.
viii. 48 [Tr Wn θυγάτηρ'], (see υΙός 1 a. fin., τίκνον b. a.).
b. in phrases modelled after the Ilcbr. : a. a daughter
of God i. e. acceptable to God, rejoicing in (iod's i)ecu-
liar care and protection : 2 Co. vi. 18 (Is. xliii. 6; Sap.
ix. 7 ; see υ'ιΌς τ. θ(οΰ 4, τίκνον b. y.). β. with the name
of a place, city, or region, it denotes collectively all its
inhabitants and citizens (very often so. in the O. T., as
Is. xxxvii. 22; Jer. xxvi. (.xlvi.) 19; Zeph. iii. 14, etc.);
in the N. T. twice ή θυγ. Σιώχ, i. e. inhabitants of Jeru-
salem : I\It. xxi. 5 ; Jn. xii. 15, (Is. i. S; x. :i2; Zech. ix.
9, etc. ; see 2ιών, 2). γ. θυ•/ατΐρ(ς 'UρoυσάKήμ, women
of .Jerusalem : Lk. .xxiii. 28. 8. female descenilant : a'l
θχτγατίρα Ααρών, women of Aaron's posterity, Lk. i. 5 ;
θυγάτηρ Αβραάμ daughter of Abraham, i. e. a woman
tracing her descent fron» Abraham, Lk. xiii. 16, (4 Mai^o.
θυ^άτρι
293
θύρα
XV. 28 (25) ; Gen. xxviii. 8 ; zxxvi. 2 ; Judg. xi. 40 ; Is.
xvi. 2, etc.).
βνγάτριον, -ου, τό, α /iVi/e daughter : Mk. v. 23 ; vii. 2.5.
[Strattis Iiicert. 5 ; MenanU., Athen., Plut. reg. et imper.
Apophtheg. p. 179e. (Alex. 6); al.] *
θν€λΛα, -η!, η, (θύω to boil, foam, rage, as aeWa fr. άω,
ΰημι), a sudden storm, tempest, ivhirlwind : Heb. xii. 18.
(Deut. iv. 11; v. 22; Horn., Hes., Tragg., al.) [Cf.
Schmidt eh. 55, 11 ; Trench § Ixxiii. fin.] •
βύϊνοί [AVH om. the diter. (cf. I, i, fin.)], -η, -ov, (fr. θυία
or θΰα, the citrus, an odoriferous North-African tree
used as incense [and for inlaying ; B. D. s. v. Thyine
wood; Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 401 sq.]),
thyine (Lat. citrinus) : ξίλον. Rev. xviii. 1 2 as in Diosc.
1, 21 ; cf. Plin. h. n. 13, 30 (16).•
θυμ,ίαμα, -ros, τό, (θυμιάω), Sept. mostly for Π"ίΟΡ, an
aromatic substance burnt, incense : generally in plur..
Rev. V. 8 ; viii. 3 sq. ; xviii. 13 ; η ωρα τοΟ θ., ivhen the
incense is burned, Lk. i. 10 ; θυσιαστήριον τοΰ θνμ. ib. 11.
(Soph., Hdt., Arstph., Plat., Diod., Joseph. ; Sept.) *
θνμιατήριον, -ου, τό, (θυμιάω), prop, a utensil forjumi-
gating or Imniing incense [cf. W. UG (91)] ; hence 1.
a censer: 2 Chr. xxvi. 19; Ezek. viii. 11 ; Hdt. 4, 162;
Thuc. 6,46; Diod. 13,3; Joseph, antt. 4, 2, 4 ; 8, 3, 8 ; Ael.
V. h. 12, 51. 2. the altar of incense : Philo, rer. div.
haer. § 46 ; vit. Moys. iii. § 7 ; Joseph, antt. 3,6,8; 3, 8,
3 ; b. ]'. 5, 5, 5 ; Clem. Alex. ; Orig. ; and so in Heb. ix.
4 [(where Tr mrg. br.), also 2 Tr mrg. in br.], where see
Bleek, Liinemann, Delilzsch, Kurtz, in opp. to those
[(A. V. included)] who think it means ceriser; [yet cf.
Harnack in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1876, p. .")72s(|.].*
θυμιάω, -ώ : 1 aor. inf. θυμιάσαι [RG -άσαι] ; (fr. θϋμα,
and this fr. θΰω, q. v.) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Find., Hdt.,
Plat, down ; Sept. for lap and TDpD ; to bum incense :
Lk. i. 9.•
θυμομαχ<ω, -ώ; (θυμο! and μάχομαι) ; Ιο carry on war
with great animosity (Polyb., Diod., Dion. H., Plut.) ; to
be very angry, be exasperated [A. V. nighly displeased'] :
Tivi, with one, Acts xii. 20. Cf. Kypke, Observv. ii.
p. 62 sq.»
Θ«μ05, -oC, 0, (fr. θΰω to rush along or on, be in a heat,
breathe violently ; hence Plato correctly says, Cratyl.
p. 41 9 e., θνμο! άπα τηί θΰσ(ωι κ. ζίσιω: τη! ψυχή:; ac-
cordingly it signifies both the spirit panting as it were
in t)>e body, and the rage with which the man pants and
swells), [fr. Horn, down], Sept. often for nx anger, and
non excandescentia ; also for tnn aestus. In the N. T.
1. passion, angry heat, {excandescentia, Cic. Tusc. 4, 9,
21), anger forthwith boiling np and soon subsiding again,
(ΰργή, on the other hand, denotes indignation which has
arisin grailually and become nwre settled; [cf. (Plato)
deiT. 1 1 5 e. θυμός- ορμή (iiaLos nv€v λογισμού• νόσος τάζ^ως
ψνχης αλόγιστου. ιΊργή• παράκλησα τοΰ θυμικυϋ fir τό
τιμωρύσθαι. Greg. Naz. carm. 31 θυμός μίν ΐστιν αθρόος
ζίσις φρ€νύς. οργή δί θυμός ίμμίνων, Herm. mand. 5, 2, 4
4κ fie της πικρίας θυμός, (Κ Si τοΰ θυμού οργή ; cf. Aristot.
rhet. 2, 2, 1 and Cope's note] ; hence we read in Sir.
xlviii. 10 κοπάσαι οργην πρ6 θυμού, before it glows and
bursts forth ; [see further, on the distinction betw. the
two word.s, Trench § xxxvii., and esp. Schmidt vol. ϋί
ch. 142]): Lk. iv. 28; Acta xix. 28; Eph. iv. 31; Col.
iii. 8 ; Heb. xi. 27 ; 6 Θ. τοί flfoi. Rev. xiv. 19 ; xv. 1, 7 ;
xvi. 1 ; exeix θυμόν, to be in a passion. Rev. xii. 12 (Ael.
v. h. 1, 14) ; οργή κα\ θυμός (as Sept. Mic. v. 15; Isocr.
p. 249 c. ; Hdian. 8, 4, 1 ; al.) : Ro. ii. 8 (Rec. in the in-
verse order; so Deut. ix. 19 ; xxix. 23, 28, [cf. Trench
u. s.]) ; plur. θυμοί impulses and outbursts of anger [W.
176 (166); B. 7 7 (67)]: 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20, (2
Mace. iv. 25, 38 ; ix. 7 ; x. 35 ; xiv. 45 ; 4 Mace, xviii.
20; Sap. x. 3 ; Soph. Aj. 718 [where see Lob.'] ; Plat. Pro-
tag, p. 323 e. ; [Phileb. p. 40 e. ; Aristot. rhet. 2, 13, 13] ;
Polyb. 3, 10, 5 ; Diod. 13, 28 ; Joseph, b. j. 4, 5, 2 ; Plut.
Cor. 1 ; al.). 2. glow, ardor : a οΐης τού θυμού [see
oifor, b.] the wine of passion, inflaming wine. Germ.
Glutwein (which either drives the drinker mad or kills
him with its deadly heat ; cf. Is. Ii. 1 7, 22 ; Jer. xxxii. 1
(xxv. 15) sqq.) : Rev. xiv. 8; xviii. 3; with τού θ(ού
added, which God gives the drinker, Rev. xiv. 10 ; with
T^s υργης τού θ(ού added [Α. Ύ . ferceness]. Rev. xvi. 19 ;
xix. l.j ; cf. Ewald, Johann. Schriften, Bd. ii. p. 269
note.•
θνμ,όω, -ώ : 1 aor. pass, ίθυμώθην ; {θυμός) ; to cause
one to become incensed, to proroke to anger ; pass. (Sept.
often for Π1Π) to be wroth: Mt. ii. 16. (In Grk. writ,
fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down.) *
θύρα, -ας, ή, (fr. θΰω to rush in, prop, that through
which a rush is made ; hence Germ. Thiir [Eng. door ;
Curtius § 319]), [fr. Horn, down], Sept. for ri'^T and
nr\3, sometimes also for fyV; a (house) dom-; [in plur.
i. q. Lat. fore.i, folding doors; cf. W. 176 (166) ; B. 24
(21) ; cf. πΰλη] ; a. prop. : Kkeieiv etc. την θ., Mt. vi.
6 ; Lk. xiii. 25 ; pass., Mt. x.xv. 10; Lk. xi. 7; Jn. xx. 19,
26; Actsxxi. 30; άνοίγΐΐν. Acts v. 19; pass. Acts xvi.
26 sq. ; κροΰιιν. Acts xii. 13 ; δια της θ. Jn. χ. 1 sq. ; προς
την θ., Mk. i. 33; .xi. 4 [Tr WH urn. τ^ι/; cf. W. 123
(IK))]; Acts iii. 2; τά πρΌς την θ. the vestibule [so Β.
§ 125, 9 ; al. the space or parts at (near) the door], Mk.
ii• 2 ; προς τη θ. Jn. xviii. Hi ; eVi τ^ θ. Acts v. 9 ; προ
της θ. Acts xii. 6 ; eVi των θυρών, Acts v. 23 [RG πρό].
b. θΰρα is used of any opening like a door, an entrance,
way or passage into : ή θ. τού μνημείου, of the tomb, Mt.
xxvii. 60 ; xxviii. 2 R G ; Mk. xv. 46 ; xvi. 3, (Horn. Od.
9, 243 ; 12, 256 ; al.). c. in parable and metaph. we
find a. ή θύρα των προβάτων, the door through which
the sheep go out and in, the name of him who brings
salvation to those who follow his guidance, .In. x. 7, 9;
cf. Christ. Fr. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opuscc. p. 20
sqq. ; (in I'^nat. ad Philad. 9 Christ is called ή θΰρα τοΰ
πατρός, δι ης (ΐσίρχουται Άβρααμ . . . και οΊ προφήται ; cf.
Harnack on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48. 3 sq.). β. 'an open
door ' is used of the opportunity of doing something : t^s
πΐστίως, of getting faith. Acts xiv. 27; open to a
teacher, i. e. the opportunity of teaching others, 2 Co.
ii. 12; Col. iv. 3; by a bold combination of metaph. and
literal language, the phrase θΰρα μιγάλη κ. (νιργής [Α. V.
α great door and effectual] is used of a large opportunity
θυρΐός
294
θώραξ
of teacliing a great nuiltitiule the way of salvation, and
one encouraging tlie liui)e of tlie most successful results:
1 Co. xvi. 9. γ. Ilie dour of Ike kingdom of heaven
(likened to a palace) denotes the conditions which
must be comi)lied ivilh in order to be received into the
kingdom of Uod: l.k. xiii. 24 (for Rec. πνληί) ; power
of entering, access into, God's eternal kingdom, Kev. iii.
8 cf. 7, [but al. al. ; add here Kev. iv. 1 ]. 8. he whose
advent is just at hand is said tnl uvprns αναι, Mt. .\.\iv.
33 ; Mk. xiii. '2'K and προ θιψων ίστηκίναι, Jas. v. 9. 6.
(στηκω! <V! τψ θύμαν κ. κρηνών is said of Christ seeking
entrance into souls, and they who comply with his en-
treaty are said avoiydv τ. θνραν, Rev. iii. 20.*
eupeos, -ov, 6, (fr. βΰρα, because shaped like a door [cf.
W. I'S]), a shield (Lat. scMum); it was large, oblong,
and four-cornered : τον θ- τη! πίστΕ wr, i. q. τήν πίστιν ω:
Bvpeav, Eph. vi. ΐιί. It differs from aanis (Lat. clipeus),
which was smaller and circular. [Polyb., Dion. Hal.,
Pint., al.]•
θυρ£5, -I'Sof, I), (diniin. of βνρα, prop, a little door; Plat.,
Dio Cass.), α window : Acts xx. 9 ; 2 Co. xi. 33. (Arstph.,
Theophr., Diod., Joseph., Plut., al. ; Sept.) *
θυρωρός, -οΰ, ό, η, (fr. θίιρα, and ωρα care ; cf. άρκυωράί,
ττυλωρύί, τιμωρό! ; cf. Curtius § 501, cf. ρ. 101 ; [Vanicek
p. 900 ; Allen in .\m. Journ. of Philol. i. p. 1 29]), a door-
keeper, porter; male or female Janitor: masc, Mk. xiii.
34 ; Jn. x. 3 ; fern. .In. xviii. IG sq. ([Sappho], Aeschyl.,
Ildt., Xen., Plat., Aristot., Joseph., al. ; Sept.) *
θυσία, -a!, ή, (ίύω), [fr. Aeschyl. down], Sept. for
nn:•? an offering, and Π^Ι ; a sacrifice, victim ; a.
prop. : Mt. ix. 13 and ,\ii. 7, fr. Hos. vi. 6 ; Mk. ix. 49
([R G L Tr txt. br.], see άΧΙζω) ; Eph. v. 2 ; Heb. x. 5,
2(; ; plur., Mk. xii. 33 ; Lk. xiii. 1 ; Heb. Lx. 23 ; [x. 1, 8
(here Rec. sing.)] ; avaytiv θυσίαν τινί, Acts vii. 41 ; ava-
(jiipeiv, Heb. vii. 27, (see ανάγω, and άναφίρω 2) ; [δοίκαι
θ. Lk. ii. 24]; προσφίραν, Acts vii. 42; Ileb. v. 1 ; viii.
3; x. [11], 12; [xi. 4]; pass. Ileb. ix. 9; Sta τής θυσία!
αϋτοϊι, by his sacrifice, i. e. by the sacrifice which he
offered (not, /«/ ojferinff up hitnself; that would have
been expressed by &ia τηι θυσία! τη! ίαυτοϋ, or δια τη!
ίαυτοϋ θυσία!}, Heb. ix. 26; (σθίαν τα! θυσία!, to eat the
flesh left over from the victims sacrificed (viz. at the
sacrificial feasts; cf. [Lev. vii. 15 sqq. ; Deut. xii. 7 sq.
1 7 sq., etc.] Win. RWB. s. v. Opfermahlzeiten), 1 Co. x.
18. b. in expressions involving a comparison : θυσίαι
πν(νματικιιί (see πι>(υματικΟ!, 3 a.), 1 Pet. ii. 5; θυσία, a
free gift, which is likened to an offered sacrifice, Phil,
iv. IS; Heb. xiii. 10 (τοιαίταΐ! θνσίαα, i. e. with such
things as substitutes for sacrifices God is well pleased) ;
θυσία ζώσα (sec ζάω, II. b. fin.), Ro. xii. 1 ; άναφίραν
θυσίαν αΐνίσίω!, Heb. xiii. 15 (if this meant, as it can
mean, aiWatv ώί θυσίαν, the author would not have
added, as he has, the explanation of the words; he
must therefore be supposed to have reproduced the
Hebr. phrase min""n3I, and then defined this more
e.\actly ; Lev. vii.'s (13) [cf. 2 (12)]; Ps. cvi. (cvii.) 22;
see αΐνίσα) ; «Vi ttj θυσία . . . τη! ττίστίωί ίιμών (e|>ex.
gen.), in the work of exciting, nourishing, increasing,
your faith, as if in providing a sacrifice to be offered to
(;od [ef. tVi, p. 233" bot.], Phil. ii. 17.•
θυοΓίασ-τήριον, -ου, τό, (ncut. of the adj. θυσιαστήριοι
[cf. \V. 90 (91)], and this fr. θυσιάζω to sacrifice), a word
found only in Philo [e. g. vita Moys. iii. § 10, cf. § 7;
Jose|)h. autt. 8, 4, 1] and the bibl. and ccd. writ. ; Sejrt.
times without number for Π3ΐρ ; prop, an altar for the
slaying and burning of victims ; used of 1. the altar
of tchole burnt-offerings which stood in the court of the
priests in the temple at Jerusalem [B. D. s. v. Altar] :
Mt. V. 23 sq. ; xxiii. 18-20, 35 ; Lk. xi. 51 ; 1 Co. ix. 13 ;
x. 18; Ileb. vii. 13; Rev. xi. 1. 2. the altar of incense,
which stood in the sanctuary or Holy place [B. D. u. s.] :
TO θυσιαστ. τοϋ θυμιάματα!, Lk. i. 11 (Ex. XXX. 1) ; [sym-
bolically] in Heaven: Rev. vi. 9; viii. 3, 5; ix. 13; xiv.
18; .xvi. 7. 3. any other altar, Jas. ii. 21 ; plur. Ro.
xi. 3 ; metaph., the cross on which Christ suffered an
expiatory death: to eat of this altar i. e. to appropriate
to one's self the friuts of Christ's expiatory death, Heb.
xiii. 10.•
θύω; impf. (θυον; 1 aor. ΐθυσα; Pass., pres. inf. θΰ(-
σθαι; pf. jjtcp. Teflu/ifVor; 1 aor. fTui?)!' (1 Co. V. 7, where
Rec.'•"'" (θίθην, cf. W. § 5, 1 d. 12); [fr. Horn, down];
Sept. mostly for ΠΠ!, also for DDE', to slay ; 1. to sac-
rifice, immolate: absol. Acts xiv. 13; τινί, dat. of pers.
(in honor of one), Acts xiv. 18 ; τινί τι, 1 Co. χ. 20. 2.
to slay, kill : absol., Acts x. 13 ; xi. 7 ; τι, Lk. χ v. 23, 27,
30; pass. Mt. xxii. 4 ; το ττάσχα, the paschal lamb, Mk.
xiv. 12; pass., Lk. xxii. 7; 1 Co. v. 7, (Deut. xvi. 2, G).
3. to slaughter: absol. Jn. x. 10; τίΐ/ά. Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.)
24; I .Mace. vii. 19.•
Θωμάς, -a, 6, (DISn [i. e. twin], see δίδυμο!), Thomas,
one of Christ's apostles: Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi.
15; Jn. xi. 16; xiv. 5; .xx. 24-29 [in 29 Rec. only] ; x.xi.
2; Actsi. 13. [B. D. s. v.] •
θώρα|, -ακο!, ό ; 1. the breast, the part of the body
from the neck to the navel, where the ribs end, (Aristot.
hist. an. 1, 7 [cf. 8, p. 491% 28] ; Eur., Plat., al.) : Rev.
ix. 9 [some refer this to the next head]. 2. a breast-
plate or corselet consisting of two parts and protecting
the body on both sides from the neck to the middle,
(Ilom., Ildt., Xen., Plat., al.) : Rev. ix. 9, 1 7 ; ίνδίισθαι
τ. θώρακα τη! δικαιοσύνη!, i. e. δικαιοσννην ω! θώρακα,
Eph. vi. 14 ; θώρακα πίστ(ω!, i. e. ιτίστιν ω! θώριικα, 1 Τ1ι.
ν. 8, {ίνδϋισθαι δικαιοσύνην ώϊ θώρακα, Is. hx. 1 7 ; ϊνδ.
θώρακα δικαιοσύνην. Sap. ν. 19 (18)).*
295
I
I,c
[I, t : on iota subscript in Mss. and edd. of the N. T. see
Lijjsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 3 sqq. ; Scrivener, Introd. etc.
p. 42, and Index II. s. v. ; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. Vat.,
praef. p. xi. sq ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 109; iVH. Intr. §410; W.
§ 5, 4 ; B. pp. 1 1, 44 sq., 69 ; and 3. vv. αβψο!, ζφον, Ήρψ8η5
etc., τρφρα, Ύρψάί, tfoy. ι is often substituted for ei, esp. in
nouns ending iu eia (ία; on tlieir accent see Cliandler §95
sqq.), in proper names, etc.; cf. WII. Λρρ. p. 153; lutr.
§ 399 ; TJf. I'roleg. pp. 83, 86 sq. ; Scrivener, Introd. etc. p.
10 sq. ; Soph. Lex. s. v. EI ; Meisterhans p. 23 sq. ; (on the
u.sage of the Mss. cf . Tdf. Conlatio critica cod. Sin. c. text.
Elz. etc. p. xviii. ; Scrivener, Full Collation of the cod. Sin.
etc. 2d ed. p. lii.). Examples of this spelling in recent edi-
tions are the following : άγν ta WH, αΚαζονία Τ WH, avaiSia Τ
WH, ο7Γ6ΐβ/ο WH (exc. Heb. iv. 6, 1 1 ), ίρ^σκία Τ WH, SovKla
T, ίθβλοθρ-ησκία Τ WH, €ΐ'δωλολατρίο Wil, elKixpivia Τ WH,
iirtetKLa WH, βριθία WH, ίρμηνία WH, θρησκία Τ, Uparia
WH, κακοηθία WH, κακοπαβία WH, καΚακία Τ WH, κυβία Τ
WH, μαγία Τ WH, μιθοΒία Τ WH, ορθαΚμο3ου\ία Τ WH,
παιίΐα Τ (everywhere ; see his note on Heb. xii. 5), νραγματία
TWH,πpα^παθiαTWH,ίlαp/^α^cίαTWH(πow in Gal. v. 20),
ΰφ€\ία WH, Άτταλία Τ Wll, Kmaapia Τ WH, Λαοδικίο Τ
WH,2ajUopiaT WH {'Σαμαρίτηί, 2a/xapiTiS,T),26A6Uic/aTWH,
ΦιλαδΕλφία Ϊ WH ; occasiouaUy the same sub.stitutiou occurs
iu other words : e. g. alyios WH, "Apioy (πάγοτ) Τ, 5ανίζω Τ
W Η, SaULQi/ \Vli,5ayifrT7is 'V Wll, eiSwKiOf Τ WH, 4ξαΚιψβηναί
WH, 'ETifcouptos Τ WH, ημίσία WH (see ii/iiffus), κατα\€Κιμ-
μίνοί WH, χίμμα WH, NecpflaAiV WH in Rev. vii. 6, opivos
WH, TTtfltis WH, σκοτίνόί WH, ίιπ6\ιμμα Wll. φωτιι^ύ^ WH,
χρ(οφι\4τ-η5 (Τ?) WH ; also in augm., as iVt^kch' WH, iSov
(see fiSw I. iuit.) ; cf. WH. App. p. 162'». Un ί as a dem-
onst. addition to adverbs etc., see νυνί ad init. On the use
and the omission of the mark of diajresis with i in certain
words, see Tdf. Proleg. p. 108; Lipsiiis, Gram. Untersuch.
p. 136 sqq.)
'luipos, -ου [cf. B. 18 (16)], ό, (ΤΧ' [i. e. whom Jeho-
vah enlightens], Xum. xxxii. 41 ), .fairus [pron. Ja-i'-rus],
a ruler of the synagogue, whose daughter Jesus restored
to life: Mk.v. 22; Lk.viii. 41. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]*
'Ιακώβ, ό, (2pm [1. e. heel-catcher, supplanter]), Ja-
cob ; 1. the second of Isaac's sons : Mt. i. 2 ; viii. 1 1 ;
Jn. iv. 5 sq. ; Acts vii. 8 ; Ro. ix. 1 3, etc. Hebraistieally
i. q. the descendants of Jacob : Ro. xi. 26, (Num. x.xiii. 7 ;
Is. xli. 8; Jer. [Hebr. txt.] xxxiii. 26 ; Sir. xxiii. 12; 1
Mace. iii. 7, and often). 2. the father of Joseph,
the husband of Mary the mother of the Saviour : Mt. i.
1,5 sq.
Ίάκωβοί, -ου, ό, (see the preceding word [and cf. B. 6,
18 (16)]),/(im«s; 1. son of Zebedee, an apostle, and
brother of the apostle John, (commonly called James the
greater or elder). He was slain with the sword bv the
command of king Herod Agrippa I. (c. a. d. 44) : Mt. iv.
21; X. 2 (3); xvii. 1; Mk. i. 19, 29; iii. 17; v. 37; i.x.
Ίαμβρηι;
2 ; X. 35, 41 ; xiii. 3 ; xiv. 33 ; Lk. v. 10 ; vi. 14 ; viii. 51 ;
ix. 28, 54; Acts 1.13; xii. 2. 2. James (commonly
called the less), an apostle, son of Alphteus : Mt. x. 3 ;
Mk. iii. IH ; Lk. vi. 15 ; Acts i. 13 ; apparently identical
with Ίάκωβο! ό μικροί James the little [A. V. the less'\, the
son of Mary, Mk. xv. 40 (Mt. xxvii. 56) ; xvi. 1, wife of
Cleophas [i. e. Clopas q. v.] or Alphieus, Jn. xix. 25 ; see
in ΆλφαίοΓ, and in Μαρία, 3. 3. James, the brother
of our Lord (see ΰδελφόί, 1) : Mt. xiii. 55 ; Mk. vi. 3 ; Gal.
i. 19 (where «' μή is employed ace. to a usage illustrated
under ei, III. 8 c. β.) ; ii. 9, 12 ; Acts xii. 17; χ v. 13 ; xxi.
18; 1 Co. XV. 7 (?) ; Jas. i. 1, the leader of the Jewish
Christians, and by them surnamed ό δίκαιος the Just, the
overseer (or bishop) of the church at Jerusalem down to
the year 62 or 63 (or ace. to Hegesippus in Euseb. h. e. 2,
23 [trans, in B. D. p. 1206] down to 69, which is hardly
probable [see Heinichen's note ad loc.]), in which year
he suffered martyrdom, Joseph, antt. 20, 9, 1. In opposi-
tion to the orthodox opinion [defended in B. D. s. v.
James], which identifies this James with James the son
of Alphffius, and understands ό άδιλφος τοϋ κυρίου to mean
his cousin, cf. esp. Clemen in Winer's Zeitschr. f. wis-
sensch. Theol. for 1829, p. 351 sqcp ; Dlom, Diss, de ro'is
a8eX<^ois . . . τον κυρίου. Lugd. 1839; 117/(4. Grimm in
Ersch u. Gruber's Encycl., Sect. 2, vol. 23 p. 80 sqq.;
Schaff, Das Verhiiltniss des Jacobus, Bruders des Herrn,
zu Jacobus Alphui. Berl. 1842 [also his Church Hist.
(1882) i. 272 sq.]; HiUjenfeld, Galaterbrief etc. p. 138
sqq.; Hausrath in Schenkel iii. p. 175 sqq.; \_Sieffert in
Herzog ed. 2, vi. 464 sqq. ; and reff. s. v. ά&(Κφόί, 1 (esp.
Bp. Lghtft.)]. 4. An unknown /ame.s-, father of the
apostle Judas [or Jude]: Lk. vi. 16; Acts i. 13, ace. to
the opinion of those interpreters who think that not
άδίλφόν but υ'ιόν must be supplied in the phrase Ίοϋδαν
Ιακώβου; see 'loijfias, 8.
ΐαμα, -τοί, τό, (Ιάομαι) ; 1. α means of healing, rem•
edi/, medicine; (Sap. xi. 4; xvi. 9; Hdt. 3, 130; Thuc.
2, 51 ; Polyb. 7, 14, 2 ; Plut., Lcian., al.). 2. a heal-
ing: plur., 1 Co. xii. 9, 28, 30 ; (Jer. xl. (xxxiii.) 6, etc. ;
Plat. legg. 7 p. 790 d.).*
Ίαμβρή;, ό, and ό Ίαννή; [cf. Β. 20 (18)], Jamhres
(for which the Vulg. seems to have read Μαμβρης, as in
the Babylonian Talmud tract. Menaeh. c. 9 in the Ge-
mara; cf. Buxtorf Lex. Talm. p. 945 sq. [p. 481 sq. ed.
Fischer]), and Jannes. two Egyptian magicians who in
the presence of Pharaoh imitated the miracles of Aaron
in order to destroy his influence with the king : 2 Tim.
iii. 8 (cf. Ex. vii. 11 sq.). The author of the Epistle de-
rived their names from the tradition of the Talmudists
and the Rabbins, [cf. B.D. art. Jannes and Jambres']•
Ιαννά
296
10ί0%
I'Lese Magi are riientioneil uot onl)- in the tract of the
Babyl. Talmud just referred to, but also in the Targ.
of Jonath. on Ex. vii. 11 ; the book Sohar on Num. .\.\ii.
2'2 ; Numenius nepi τάγαθοϋ in Orig. c. Cels. 4, .51 ; Euseb.
praep. evang. H, Η ; Evang. Nicod. c. 5, and other writ,
enumerated by Thilo in his Cod. a|)i)cr. p. .5.52 sq. ; [and
VVetstein on 2 Tim. I.e.; Ilohzmann ibid. p. 140 sq.].*
"Ιαννά, (L Τ Tr WII ΊανναΙ) ; Jannni, Vulg. Janne
[Tdf. txt. (cod. Amiat.) I<inimr~\, indeil. prop, name of
one of the ancestors of Jesus : Lk. iii. 24.*
Ίαννή5, ό, see *1αμβρήζ'
Ιάομοι, -ωμαι: [perh. fr. las, Lob. TechnoL p. 157 sq. ;
cf. Vanicek p. 87] ; a depon. verb, whose pres., impf.
ιώμην. fut. Ιάσομαι, and 1 aor. mid. Ιασάμην have an act.
signif., but whose pf. pass, ΐαμηι, 1 aor. pass. Ιάθην, and
I fut. pass, ίαθήσομαι have a pass, signif. (cf. Kriiger § 40
S.V.; [Veitch s. v.; B.52 (46); W. § 38, 7 c.]); [fr. Iloni.
down]; Sept. for XiJI ; to liuat, cure : τινά, Lk. iv. 18 R
L br.; v. 17; vi. IdVix. 2 [here Τ AVII om. Tr br. the
ace.], 11, 42 ; .\iv. 4 ; xxii. δ1 ; Jn. iv. 47 ; Acts i-\. 34 ;
X. 38 ; xxviii. 8 ; pass., Mt. viii. 8,13; xv. 28 ; Lk. vii. 7 ;
viii. 47 ; xvii. 1.5 ; Jn. v. 13 [Tdf. ασθενών] ; and Acts iii.
II Ilec. ; Tti/a από tivos- to cure (i. e. by curing to free)
one of [lit./ro;n ; cf. B. 322 (277)] a disease: pass., Mk.
V. 29 ; Lk. vi. 18 (17). trop. to make whole i. e. to free
from errors and sins, to bring about (one's) salvation :
Alt. xiii. 15 ; Jn. xii. 40; Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Is. vi. 10) ;
pass., 1 Pet. ii. 24 ; Jas. v. 1 li ; in fig. discourse, in pass. :
Heb. xii. 13.•
'Iap<'S (T WII 'lap(T, Lehm. 'lapfS; [on the accent in
codd. see Tilf. Proleg. p. 103]), ό, (Ileb. it descent),
Jared, indecl. prop, name (Ίαράδη: [^lapeSes, ed. Bekk.]
in Joseph, antt. 1, 2, 2), the father of Enoch (Gen. v.
15, 18 ; 1 Chr. i. 2 [here A. V. Jered']) : Lk. iii. 37.*
{αα-ΐΐ, -(ω!, ή, a healing, cure ; Lk. xiii. 32 ; Acts iv. 22,
30. (Prov. iii. 8; iv. 22; [Arcliil.], Hippocr., Soph.,
Plat., Lcian., al.) '
too-TTis, -ibot, ψ [fr. Plato down], jasper ; a precious
stone of divers colors (for some are purple, others blue,
others green, and others of the color of brass ; Plin. h. n.
37, 37(8)): Rev. iv. 3; xxi. 11,18 sq. [But many think
(questionably) the diamond to be meant here ; others the
precioux opal; see Riehm, HWB. s. v. Edelsteine, 8 and
10 ; B. D. s. v. Jasper ; cf. ' Bible Educator ' ii. 352.] •
Ίάο-ων, -ονοί, ό, Jason, a Thessalonian, Paul's host :
Acts .xvii. 5-7, 9 ; whether he is the same who is men-
tioned in Ro. xvi, 21 as a kinsman of Paul is uncertain.*
larpos, -oil, ό. (Ιάομαι), [fr. Ilom. down], a phi/sirian :
Mt. ix. 12 ; Jlk. ii. 17 ; v. 2G ; Lk. v. 31 ; viii. 43 [here
WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.] ; Col. iv. 14 ; ίατρί, Bepamv-
σον afavTov, a proverb, applied to Christ in this sense :
' come forth from your lowly and mean condition and
create for yourself authority and influence by perform-
ing miracles amon'i us also, that we may see that you
are what you profess to he,' Lk. iv. 23.*
ISe [so occasionally Grsb. and Rec.'"'' "• ; e. g. Gal. v.
2 : Ro. xi. 22] and (later) iSf (IBc άττικώς ώς το tine,
λαβί• fvof• i&t ίΧληνικίΛΐ, Moeris Γρ. 193 ed. Piersonl:
cl. W. § C, 1 a. ; [B. 62 (54)]), impv. fr. €iSof, i\. v. ; [fr.
Hom. down]. In so far as it retains the force of an
imperative it is illustrated under ΰίΐω, I. 1 e. and 3.
But in most places in the N. T. it stands out of con-
struction like .an interjection, even when many are ad-
dressed, [cf. B. 70 (61); and esp. 139 (121 scj.)]; Lat.
en, ecce; see! behold! lo ! a. at the beginning of
sentences : as the utterance of one who wishes th.at
something should not be neglected by another, Mt. xxvi.
65 ; Mk. ii. 24 ; xi. 21 ; xiii. 1 ; Jn. v. 14 ; xviii. 21 ; Ro.
ii. 1 7 Rec. ; equiv. to Germ, sieh' dnch [see, pray ; yet
.set'], Jn. xi. 36 ; xvi. 29 ; xix. 4 ; Gah v. 2 ; or of one
who brings forward something new and unexpected, Jn.
vii. 26; xi. 3; xii. 19; or of one pointing out or .show-
ing. Germ, hier ist, da ist, dieses ist : tSt ό τόπο5 (French,
void te lieu), Mk. xvi. 6; add, Mk. iii. 31 (l.Trmrg.
ίδού); Jn. 1.29,36,47 (48); xix.5[TTrWlI iSoiJ], 14,
26 sq. (where some ιδού) ; where \vc [might] use siuqily
here, Mt. xxv. 25; with adverbs of place: i&e [R(iL
ίδον] 2)δ€ ό Χριστός, ιδε [R G ίδοΰ] iKft, Mk. xiii. 21. b.
inserted into the midst of a sentence, in such a Avay that
the words which precede it serve to render the more evi-
dent the strangeness of what follows : Mt. xxv. 20, 22 ;
Jn. iii. 26.
tSe'a, -as, ή, (fr. ei8ov, lS('iv),form, external a/ijnarance;
asjicct, look: Mt. xxviii. 3 (T Tr WH eihia, q. v.), cf.
Alberti, Observv. ad loc. ; [Tdf. I'roleg. p. 81]. (Grk.
writ. fr. Pind. and Ildt. down ; 2 Mace. iii. 16 ; for mo^
(ien. V. 3.) [Cf. Schmidt eh. 182, 3.]•
tSios, -a. -uv, (in |)rof. auth. [esp. .\ttic] also of two
term.), [fr. llora. down] ; 1. pertaining to one's self,
one's own; used a. univ. of what is one's own as opp.
to belonging to another: τα "δια πρόβατα, Jn. χ. 3 s(]. 12;
τΰ ιμάτια τ& ΐ&ια, Mk. XV. 20 R G Tr (for which Τ τύ ί'δ.
Ίμ. αίτοϋ, L W1I τα Ιμ- αϋτοϋ); τι) ϊ&ιον (for his own use)
κτήνος, Lk. χ. 34 ; 8iti τοϋ ίδιου αίματος, Ilcb. ix. 1 2 ; xiii.
12, (ϊδι'ω αΐματι, 1 Mace. vii. 8) ; το ϊδιοκ μίσθωμα, ivhich
he had hired for himself (opp. to ή ξινία [(|. v.], 2•'!), Acts
xxviii. 30; add, Jn.v.43; vii. 18; Acts iii. 12; xiii. 36;
Ro. xi. 24 ; xiv. 4 sq.; 1 Co. iii. 8 (ΐδιον κόπον) ; vi. 18;
vii. 4, 37; ix. 7 ; xi. 21 ; Gal. vi. 5 ; 1 Tim. iii. 4, 12 ; v.
4 ; 2 Tim. i. 9 ; iv. 3 ; ηράσσην τα iSia, to do one's own
business (and not intermeddle with the affairs of others),
1 Th. iv. 11 ; ιδία ΐπίλυσις, an interpretation which one
thinks out for himself, opp. to that ivhich the Holy Spirit
teaches, 2 Pet. i. 20 [see -γίνομαι, 5 e. a.] ; την Ιδίαν δίκαιο-
σίινην. which one imagines is his due, opp. to δικαιοσύνη
θ€οϋ. awarded by God, Ro. x. 3; Ιδία ϊπιθυμία, opp. to di-
vine prompting, Jas. i. 14; κατά τας ίδιας ΐπιθυμίας, ο|)ρ.
to God's requirements, 2 Tim. iv. 3 ; with the possess,
pron. αυτών added [B. 118 (103); cf. W. 154 (146)], 2
Pet. iii. 3 ; ίδιος αυτών προφήτης. Tit. ϊ. 1 2 ; with πΰτοΟ
added. Mk. xv. 20 Tdf. (see above) ; τα "ίδια [cf. Β. § 1 27,
24], those things in which one differs from others, his nat-
ure and personal character, — in the ]ilirase eV των ίδιων
λαλίίι/, Jn. viii. 44 ; [cf. the fig. τα ίδια τοι) σώματοί, 2 Co.
V. 10 Ij mrg. (cf. Trmrg.); see διό, A. I. 2]; ίδιος, my
own : ταΐι Ιδίαις γιρσί (unassisted by others), 1 Co. iv.
18ί(ι>τη<:
297
Ίδ,
ουμαΐΛ
12; Ihineown: eV τώ ίδίω όφίαλ^ώ, Lk. νί. 41. b. of
what pertains to one's property, family, dweUing, country,
etc. ; of property, οϋδε f is τι τώι/ υπαρχόντων αυτω tKcytv
iStov ttvai. Acts iv. 32 ; τά ϊδια, res noalrue, our own things,
i. e. house, family, property, Lk. xviii. 28 L Τ Tr WH [cf.
B. § 127, 24; W. 592 (551)]; rrj Ιδία ytvea, in his own
yeiieration, i. e. in the age in which he lived. Acts xiii. 36 ;
ή ιδία πόλΐΓ, the city of which one is a citizen or inhabi-
tant, Lk. ii. 3 [R G Tr mrg.]; Mt. ix. 1 ; tjj I8ia διαλ^κτω,
in their native tongue, Acts i. 19 [WHom. Trbr. ίδια];
ii. 6, 8 ; ij IBia δfισιδαι/lOl/ία, their own (national) religion.
Acts XXV. 19 ; oi ίδιοι, one'.•! own people (Germ, die An-
gehorigen), one's fellow-countrymen, associates, Jn. i. 11,
cf. 2 Mace. xii. 22 ; one's household, persons belonging to
the house, family, or company, Jn. xiii. 1 ; Acts iv. 23 ;
xxiv. 23 ; 1 Tim. v. 8 ; ds τα ί'δια (Germ, in die Heimat),
to one's native land, home, Jn. i. 11 (meaning here, the
land of Israel) ; xvi. 32 ; xix. 27, (3 Mace. vi. 27 ; 1 Esdr.
V. 4() (47) ; for in'3-'7K, Esth. v. 10 ; vi. 12) ; ό Ibioi άνήρ,
a husband, 1 Co. vii. 2 [B. 117 (102) note; cf. W. 154
(146)] ; plur., Eph. v. 22 ; Tit. ii. 5 ; 1 Pet. iii. 1,5; Eph.
V. 24 R G; Col. iii. 18 R; oi ίδιοι δίσπόται (of slaves). Tit.
ii. 9. of a person who may be said to belong to one,
above all others : vias, Ro. viii. 32 ; πατήρ, Jn. v. 18 ; μα-
βηταί, Mk. iv. 34 Τ WH Tr mrg. o. harmonizing with,
or suitable or assigned to, one's nature, character, aims,
ads ; appropriate : ttj ιδία ϊξουσία, Acts i. 7 ; τον t8iov
μισθόν, due reward, 1 Co. iii. 8 ; το ίδιον σώμα, 1 Co. .\v.
38; κατά την Ιδίαν δνναμιν, Mt. ,χχν. 15; tv τω ίδι'ω
τάγματί, 1 Co. XV. 23 ; το ίδιοι' οίκητηριον, Jude 6 ; fis τον
τόποκ τόι/ ΐδιοχ, to the abode after death assigned by God
to one ace. to liis deeds. Acts i. 25 (Ignat. ad Magnes. 5 ;
Baal Turim on Num. xxiv. 25 Balaam ivit in locum suum,
i. e. in Gehennam ; see τόπος, 1 α. fin.) ; κάψω ίδι'ω, at a
time suitable to the matter in hand [A. V. in due season'].
Gal. vi. 9 ; plur., 1 Tim. ii. 6 ; vi. 15 ; Tit. i. 3. d. By
a usage foreign to the earlier Greeks, but found in the
church Fathers and the Byzant. writ, (see W. § 22, 7 ;
cf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 208 sq. ; [B. 117 sq. (103)]),
it takes the place of the poss. pron. αύτοΰ : l\lt. xxii. 5 ;
XXV. 14; Jn. i. 41 (42), (Sap. x. 1). 2. private (in
class. Grk. opp. to δημόσιος, koivos) : ιδία [cf. W. 591
(549) note] adv. severally, separately, 1 Co. xii. 11 (often
in Grk. writ.), κατ Ιδίαν (sc. χώραν), a. apart: Mt.
xiv. 13; xvii. 19; xx. 17; xxiv. 3; Mk. vi. 31 sq. ; vii.
33 ; ix. 2, 28 ; .xiii. 3 ; Lk. ix. 10 ; x. 23 ; Acts xxiii. 19,
(Polyb. 4, 84, 8) ; with μόνος added, Mk. ix. 2 ; β. in
private, privately: Mk. iv. 34; Gal. ii. 2, (Diod. 1, 21,
opp. to κοινή, 2 Mace. iv. 5 ; Ignat. ad Smyrn. 7, 2).
The word is not found in Rev.
ιδιώτη?, -ου, ό, (ίδιοϊ), very com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.
down ; prop, a private person, opp. to a magistrate, ruler,
king; but the noun has many other meanings also, each
one of which is understood from its antithesis, as e. g.
a common soldier, as opp. to a military officer ; a writer
of prose, as opp. to a poet. In the N. T. an unlearned,
illiterate, man, opp. to the learned, the educated : Acts
iv. 13; as often in class. Grk., unskilled in any art: in
eloquence (Isocr. p. 43 a.), with dat. of respect, τώ λόγφ,
2 Co. xi. 6 [A. V. rude in speech] ; a Christian who is
not a prophet, 1 Co. xiv. 24 ; destitute of the • gift of
tongues,' ibid. 16, 23. [Cf. Trench § Ixxix.]•
tSou, a demonstrative particle, [in Grk. writ. fr. Soph,
down], found in the N. T. esp. in the Gospels of Matthew
and of Luke, used very often in imitation of the Ilebr.
Τ\ί'Γ], and giving a pecuhar vivacity to the style by bid-
ding the reader or hearer to attend to what is said : be-
hold I see ! lo ! It is inserted in the discourse after a
gen. absol., Mt. i. 20; ii. 1, 13 ; ix. 18 ; xii. 46 ; xvii. 5;
xxvi. 47 ; xxviii. 11. κα\ Ιδυύ is used, when at the close
of a narrative something new is introduced, Mt. ii. 9 ;
iii. 16; iv. 11; viii. 2, 24, 29, 32, 34 ; ix. 2 sq. 20 ; .\ii. 10;
XV. 22 ; xvii. 3 ; xix. 16 ; xxvi. 51 ; xxvii. 51 ; xxviii. 2,
7; Lk.i. 20,31,36; ii. 9 [RGLTrbr.], 25; Lx.30,38sq.;
x. 25 ; xiv. 2 ; x.xiv. 13 ; Acts xii. 7 ; xvi. 1 ; when a thing
is specified which is unexpected yet sure, 2 Co. vi. 9
(και ιδού ζάιμιν, and nevertheless we live), cf. Mt. vii. 4 ;
when a thing is specified which seems impossible and
yet occurs, Lk. xi. 41 ; Acts xxvii. 24. The simple ιδού
is the e.xclamation of one pointing out sometliing,
Mt. xii. 2, 47 [WII here in mrg. only] ; xiii. 3 ; xxiv. 26 ;
Mk. iii. 32; Lk. ii. 34 ; and calling attention, Mk. xv. 35
[TTr WII ίδ(] ; Lk. xxii. 10 ; Jn. iv. 35; 1 Co. xv. 51 ;
2 Co. V. 17; Jas. V. 9 ; Jude 14; Rev. i. 7; ix. 12;
xi. 14 ; xvi. 15 ; xxii. 7 [Rec] ; in other places it is i. q.
observe or consider : Mt. x. 16 ; xi. 8 ; xix. 27 ; xx. 18 ;
xxii. 4 ; Mk. x. 28, 33 ; xiv. 41 ; Lk. ii. 48; vii. 25 ; xviii.
28, 31, etc.; also κα\ ιδού, jMt. xxviii. 20; Lk. xiii. 30;
ι'δοΰ yap, Lk. i. 44, 48 ; ii. 10 ; vi. 23 ; xvii. 21 ; Acts ix.
11 ; 2 Co. vii. 11 ; Ιδού where examples are adduced:
Jas. iii. 4 sq. ; v. 4, 7, 1 1 ; for the Hebr. 'Jjn, so that it
includes the copula: Lk. i. 38; i. q. here I am: Acts
ix. 10; Heb. ii. 13. ιδού is inserted in the midst of a
speech, Mt. xxiii. 34 [here WH mrg. Ίδοϋ (see the
Comm.)] ; Lk. xiii. 16 ; Acts ii. 7 ; xiii. 1 1 ; xx. 22, 25.
The passages of the O. T. containing the particle which
are quoted in the New are these : Mt. i. 23 ; xi. 10 ; xii.
18; x.xi. 5 ; Mk. i. 2 ; Lk. vii. 27 ; Jn. xii. 15 ; Ro. ix. 33 ;
Heb. ii. 13 ; viii. 8 ; x. 7, 9 ; 1 Pet. ii. 6. Like the Ilebr.
T\iTy, Ιδού and κα\ ιδού stand before a nominative which
is not followed by a finite verb, in such a way as to in-
clude the copula or predicate [cf. B. 139 (121 sq.)] : e. g.
tvas heard, Mt. iii. 1 7 ; is, is or was here, exists, etc., Mt.
xii. 10 LT Tr WII, 41 ; Mk. xiii. 21 R GL; Lk. v. 12,
18 ; vii. 37 ; xi. 31 ; xiii. 1 1 (R G add ην) ; xvii. 21 ; xLx.
2, 20; xxii. 38, 47 ; xxiii. 50 ; Jn. xix. 26 [Rec, 27 R G] ;
Acts viii. 27, 30 ; 2 Co. vi. 2 ; Rev. vi. 2, 5, 8 ; vii. 9 [not
L]; xii. 3 ; χ1λ•. 14; xix. 11; xxi. 3; is approaching, Mt.
XXV. 6 G L Τ Tr WH (Rec. adds Ιρχίται) ; but also in
such a way as to have simply a demonstrative force :
Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34.
Ίδουμαία, -ας, ή, Idumcea, the name of a region be-
tween southern Palestine and Arabia Petraea, inhabited
by Esau or Edom (Gen. -xxxvi. 30) and his posterity
(the Edomites), (Josh. xv. 1, 21 ; xi. 17; xii. 7). The
Edomites were first subjugated by David; but after
ΙΒρως
298
lepov
his death they disputed Solomon's authority and in the
reign of Joram recoveri'd their liberty, which tliey main-
tained, transmitting from generation to generation their
hatred of Israel, until they were conquered again by
Hyrcanus and subjected to the government of the Jews:
Mk. iii. 8. [For details of boundary and history, see
Bertheau in Sehenkel and Porter in B. D. s. v. Edom ;
also the latter in Kitto's Cycl. s. v. Idumaea.] *
Ϊ8ρώ5, -ώτοΓ, ό, [allied w. Lat. sudor, Eng. sweat ; Cur-
tius § 28:!; fr. Mom. down], sweat: Lk. xxii. 44 [L br.
WI I reject the pass. ; (Tr accents ISpHs, yet cf. Chandler
§n.i,)].•
Ίίζάβιλ ([soGTAVII, L 'Iff.; Tr -0A ] ; Rec. 'Ufa-
βη\), ή, (^3"« ['perh. intact, chaste; cf. Agnes' ((Je-
senius)]), Jezebel [mod. Isabel], wife of Ahab ([c.] B. c.
917-897; 1 K. xvi. 29), an impious and cruel queen,
who protected idolatry and persecuted the prophets (1
K. xvi. 31-2 K. ix. 30) ; in Rev. ii. 20 i. q. a second Jez-
ebel, the svmbolic name of a woman who pretended to
be a prophetess, and who, addicted to antinomianisni,
claime<l for Christians the liberty of eating things sacri-
ficed to idols, Rev. ii. 20.*
ΊίράτΓολίϊ [λνΐΐ 'Upa ΠολίΓ ; cf. Β. 74 ; Lob. ad Phryn.
604 Sep], -(ως, ή, Ifiernpolis, a city of Greater Phrygia,
near the river Maeander [or rather, near the Lycus a few
miles above its junction with the Maeander], not far
from Colossie and Laodicea, now Pambuck Kulnsi, [for
reff. see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 1 scp ; B. D. Am. ed. s. v.] :
Col. iv. 13.•
1(ρατ(ία [WII -rta ; cf. I, i], -of, η, (ι'ίρατίΰω), the priest-
hood, the office of priest : Lk. i. ii ; lleb. vii. 5. (Sept. for
η3Π3 ; Aristot. pol. 7, 8 ; Dion. Hal. ; Boeckh, Inscrr. ii.
pp.' 127, 23; 363, 27.)•
ΐ€ράτ<νμα, -τοί, τό, (1(ρατ€νω), [^priesthood ΐ. e.] a.
the o[fice nf priest. b. the order or bodij of priests (see
ά8(\φότης, αιχμαλωσία, διασπορά, θ(ραπ( ία) ; so Christians
are called, because they have access to God and offer
not external but ' spiritual ' (πνινματικά) sacrifices : 1
Pet. ii. 5 ; also iepar. βασί\€ΐον. ib. 9 (after Ex. xix. 6
Sept.), priests of kingly rank, i. e. exalted to a moral
rank and freedom which exempts them from the control
of every one but God and Christ. ([Ex. xxiii. 22, etc.;
2 Mace. ii. 1 7] ; not found in prof, auth.) *
lepaTcuoi; (fr. Upaopai and the verbal adj. Ifparos,
though this adj. does not occur); to be priest, discharr/e
the priest's office, be busied in sacred duties : Lk. i. 8.
(Joseph, antt. 3, 8, 1 ; Ildian. 5, 6, 6 [3 ed. Bekk] ; Pau-
san., Ileliod., Inscrr. [see L. and S.] ; Sept. for [Π3.) •
'Ιεριχώ, see 'ΐ€ριχώ.
■Iepe|itos [WII 'Up. (see their Intr. §408); so Rec."
in Mt. xxvii. 9], -ου [Β. 17 (16), 8], ί, (π;•3-)•: or ΙΠ'ΟΤ,
i. q. Π' Π3Ί' 'Jehovah casts forth' (his enemies?), or
'Jehovah hurls' (his thunderbolts?) ; cf. Bleel; Einl. in
das A. T. § 206 p. 469, [cf. B. D. s. v. Jeremiah]), Jere-
miah [A. V. also Jeremias, .Teremyl, a famous Hebrew
prophet, who prophesied from [c] n. c. 627 until the de-
struction of Jerusalem [n. c. .5^6]. He afterwards de-
parted into Egypt, where he appears to have died; [cf.
B. D. s. T. Jeremiah, L 6] : Mt. ii. 1 7 ; xvi. 14 ; xxvii. 9 (in
the last pass, his name is given by mistake, for the words
quoted are found in Zech. xi. 12 sq.; [cf. Prof. Bron-n in
Journ. of Soc. for Bibl. Lit. and Exeg. for Dec. 18«2,p.
101 sqq. ; Toy, Quot. in N. T. p. 68 sqq. ; for a history
of attempted explanations, see Dr. Jas. Morison, Com.
on Mt. 1. c.]).•
Up<vs, -ίωί, ό, (ifpo's), [fr. Horn, down], Hebr. jnj), a
p>riesl ; one who offers sacrifices and in general is busied
with sacred rites ; a. prop., of the i)riests of the
Gentiles, Acts xiv. 13 ; of the priests of the Jews, Mt.
viii. 4; xii. 4 sq. ; Mk. i. 44; [ii. 26]; Lk. i. 5 ; v. 14;
Jn. i. 19 ; Heb. vii. [14 L Τ Tr WH], 20 (21) ; viii. 4,
etc.; of the hif/h-priesi, Acts v. 24 RG (Ex. xxxv. 18;
1 K. i. 8 ; 1 Mace. xv. 1 ; Joseph, antt. 6, 12, 1) ; and
in the same sense Christ is called UptCs in Heb. v. 6 (fr.
Ps. cix. (ex.) 4); Heb. vii. 17; also ie/jtvs fieyar, Heb.
X. 21 (see apxitpeis, 3) [al. take the adj. here not as
blending with Up. into a technical or official appellation,
but as descriptive, yreat; cf. iv. 14]. b. metaph. of
Christians, because, purified by the blood of Christ and
brought into close intercourse with God, they devote
their life to him alone (and to Christ) : Rev. i. 6 ; v. 1 ;
XX. 6, cf. i. 5 ; V. 9.
Ίίριχώ (Tdf. Ί(ρ(ΐχώ [see his Proleg. p. 85 ; WH.
App. p. 15.5, ands. V. ft, i; WH 'Up. see their Intr.
§408; on its accent in codd. cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 103]),
17, indccl. (on its dedens. in other writ. cf. W. § 10, 2 ; in
Strabo 'Upικoΰς -οΰντος ; 'ΐ€ριχοϋ!, -ονντοί in Joseph., cf.
Λν. 1. c; Hebr. ixvy , fr. Π'Ί to smell, so called from its
fertility in aromatics), Jericho, a noted city, abounding
in balsam [i. e. perh. the opobalsamum ; cf. Tristram,
Nat. Hist. etc. p. 33 7; B. D. s. v. Balm], honey, Cyprus
[prob. Arab, "el-henna"; cf. Tristram u. s., s. v. Cam-
phire], myrobalanus [Arab. " zukkum "], roses, and other
fragrant productions. It was situated not far from the
northern shore of the Dead .Sea, in the tribe of Benjamin,
between the city of Jerusalem and the river Jordan, 150
stadia from the former and (!0 from the latter. Josejjh.
b. j. 4, 8, 3 calls its territory Sflov χωρίον. It is mentioned
in the N. T. in Mt. xx. 29 ; Mk. x. 46 ; Lk. x. 30 ; xviii.
35; xix. 1 ; Heb. xi. 30. As balsam was exported thence
to other countries, we read Lk. xix. 2 that reXavai were
stationed there, with an άρχιΤί'Κώνης, for the purpose of
collecting the revenues. For a fuller account of the city
see Win. RWB. s. v.; Arnold in Herzog vi. p. 494 sq. ;
Furrer- in Sehenkel iii. 209 sq. ; Keim iii. 17 sq. [Eng.
trans, v. 21 sq. ; BB.DD. s. v. ; cf. also Robinson, Re-
searches etc. i. 547 sqq.].*
ίίρόθυτοί, -ov, (fr. Upas and θΰω, cf. (Ι&ωλόθυτο!), sac-
rificed, offered in sacrifice, to the gods ; as in Plut. symp.
8, 8, 3 init., used of the flesh nf animals offered in sac-
rifice : 1 Co. X. 28 L txt. Τ Tr WH. On the use of the
word in Grk. writ. cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 159.*
Up<5v, -oi), TO, (neut. of the adj. Upas, -a, -ov, cf. to
δγιον), [fr. Ildt. on], a sacred place, temple : of the tem-
ple of Artemis at Ephesus, Acts xix. 27 ; of the temple
at Jerusalem twice in the Sept., Ezek. xlv. 19 ; 1 Chr.
tepoTrpeTrr)^
299
ίΐροσυΧέω
xxix. 4 ; more freq. in the 0. T. Apocr. ; in the N. T.
often in the Gospels and Acts ; once elsewhere, viz. 1 Co.
ix. 13. TO iepov and ό vaos di£Eer, in that the former
designates the whole compass of the sacred enclosure,
embracins; the entire agirregate of buildings, balconies,
porticos, courts (viz. that of the men or Israelites,
that of the women, that of the priests), belonging to
the temple ; the latter designates the sacred edifice prop-
erly so called, consisting of two parts, the 'sanctuary'
or 'Holy place' (which no one except the priests was
allowed to enter), and the'HoIy of holies ' or 'most
holy place' (see Syior, 1 a.) (which was entered only
on the great day of atonement by the high-priest alone) ;
[cf. Trench, Syn. § iii.]. Upov is employed in the N.
T. either explicitly of the whole temple, Mt. xii. 6;
x.xiv. 1 ; Mk. xiii. 3 ; Lk. .xxi. 5 ; xxii. 52 ; Acts iv. 1 ;
xxiv. 6; XXV. 8; 1 Co. ix. 13, etc. ; or so that certain
definite parts of it must be thought of, as the courts,
esp. where Jesus or the apostles are said to have gone up,
or entered, ' into the temple,' to have taught or encoun-
tered adversaries, and the like, ' in the temple,' ilt. xxi.
12, 14 ; xxvi. 55 ; Mk. xiv. 49 ; Lk. xis. 47 ; .xxi. 37 ;
xxii. 53 ; xxiv. 53 ; Jn. v. 14 ; vii. 14, 28 ; viii. 20 ; xviii.
20; Acts iii. 2 ; v. 20; xxi. 2G, etc. ; of the courts and
sanctuary, Mt.xii. 5 ; of the court of the Gentiles,
out of which Jesus drove the buyers and sellers and
money-changers, Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. .xix. 45;
Jn. ii. 14 sq.; of the court of the women, Lk. ii. 37;
of any portico or apartment, Lk. ii. 46, cf. Jn. x. 23.
On the phrase to nrepiyiov τοϋ Upov see Trrcpiyiov, 2.
tepoirpt-nnfis, -e's. (fr. iepos. and ffpeVfi it is becoming),
hefitlinq men, places, actions or things sacred to God; rev-
erent: Tit. ii. 3. (4 Mace. ix. 25 ; xi. 19; Plat., Philo,
Joseph., Lcian.,al.) [Cf. Trench § xcii. sub fin.]*
Upos, -ά, -όν, [its primary sense is thought to be might'/;
cf. Curtius § 614 ; Vaniiek p. 88 ; jet see Schmidt u. i. ; fr.
Hum. down], sacred, consecrated to the deity, pertaining to
God : Upa γράμματα, sacred Scriptures, because inspired
bv God, treating of divine things and therefore to be de-
voutly revered, 2 Tim. iii. 15 (.Toseph. antt. prooem. 3;
[10, 10,4 fin.]; b. j. 6,5,4; c. Ap. 1,[10, 3; 18,6]; 26,
1 ; lepal βίβλοι, antt. 2, 16, 5 ; [c. Ap. 1, 1 ; 23, 4], etc. ;
ουκ ίνίτράφη! olh( ϊνησκήθηί Toif iepoli γράμμασι, Philo,
leg. ad Gaium § 29, ed. Mang. ii. p. 574) ; [κήρυγμα, Mk.
xvi. W'll in (rejected) ' Shorter Conclusion '] ; neut. plur.
as subst. τα iepa, the holy things, those which pertain to
the worship of God in the temple, 1 Co. ix. 13, cf. ϊργάζο-
μαί, 2 a. [See reff. s. v. ayior, fin. ; esp. Schmidt ch. 181.] •
Ί£ροσόλυμα [WIT 'Up., see their Intr. § 408], -ων, τά,
(the invariable form in Mk. and Jn., almost everywhere
in Mt. and Joseph, [c. Ap. 1, 22, 13, etc. ; Philo, leg. ad
Gaium § 36 ; (cf. Polyb. 16. 39, 4) ; al.]), and Ιερουσαλήμ
[WH 'Up. (see ref. u. s.)], ή, indecl., (the invariable form
in the Sept. [Josh. x. 1, etc. ; Philo de somn. ii. 39 init. ;
so Aristot. in Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 22, 7 (where see Miiller)] ;
in the N. T. where a certain sacred emphasis, so to epeak,
resides in the very name, as Gal. iv. 25 sq. [see Bp.
Lshtft. ad loc] ; Heb. xii. 22 ; Rev. iii. 12 ; xxi. 2, 10 ;
thus in direct address : Mt. xxiii. 37 ; Lk. xiii. 34 ; both
forms are used promiscuously [yet with a marked pref-
erence for the indeclinable form] in the O. T. Apocr.,
and in the writ, of Luke and of Paul ; [cf. Tdf. Proleg.
p. 119; WH. App. p. 160]. Whether there is also a
third and unusual form 'UpoσoKυμa, -ης, ή, in Mt. ii. 3 ;
iii. 5, is extremely doubtful ; for in the phrase ϊξίπο-
pciero . . . 'Upoa-uXupa, iii. 5, the noun can be taken as
a neut. plur. with a sing, verb, cf. W. § 58, 3 a. ; and in
the former passage, ii. 3, the unusual coupling of the
fem. πάσα with the neut. plur. Ιεροσόλυμα is easily ex-
plained by the supposition that the appellative idea, ή
πόλίί, was in the writer's mind; see Fritzsche and Bleek
ad loc; cf. B. 18 (16); [yet see Pape, Eigennamen, s.
V.]. Hebr. P7Dn' and D'Syin- , Chald. Ο*?!?!"!•, S)t.
/ ON ^^ol- Many suppose that the Hebr. name is com-
posed of lyn' possession, and Ο'ΐψ, so that it signifies tran-
quil possession, habitation of peace ; but the matter is very
uncertain and conjectures vary ; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii.
p. 628 sq. ; [B. D. s. v.] ; on the earlier name of the city
see below in ^α\ήμ ; Lat. Hierosolyma, -orum, also [ Vulg.
e. g. codd. Amiat. and Fuld. Mt. x.xiii. 37; but esp.] in
the ch. Fathers Hierusalem, but the form Hierosolyma,
-σί•, is uncertain [yet see even Old Lat. codd. in Mt. ii. 1,
3]), — Jerusalem [λ.Ύ. Hierusalem and ferusalemi,
the capital of Palestine, situated nearly in the centre of
the country, on the confines of the tribes of Benjamin
and Judah, in a region so elevated that ανάβαιναν,
nSj/, to go up, fitly describes the approach to it from any
quarter. The name is used in the K. T. 1. to de-
note, either the city itself, Mt. ii. 1 : Mk. iii. 8 ; Jn. i. 19,
etc. ; or its inhabitants, Mt. ii. 3 ; iii. 5 ; xxiii. 37 ; Lk.
xiii. 34. 2. ή νϋν 'Uρoυσ. [_the Jerusalem that now
isl, with its present religious institutions, i. e. the Mosaic
system, so designated from its primary external location.
Gal. iv. 25, with which is contrasted ή άνω 'Up. (after the
rabbin, phrase π'7>Ό '71? D'Si?11', Jerusalem that is above,
i. e. existing in heaven, according to the pattern of which
the earthly Jerusalem Πϋ"3 Sty D'Siyn" was supposed to
be built [cf. Schottgen, Horae Hebr. i. 1207 sqq.]), i. e.
metaph. the City of God founded by Christ, now wearing
the form of the church, but after Christ's return to put on
the form of the perfected Messianic kingdom. Gal. iv. 26 ;
'Upoυσ. επουράνιος, the heavenly Jerusalem, i. e. the heav-
enly abode of God, Christ, the angels, beatified men (as
well the saints of the O. T. as Christians), and as citizens
of which true Christians are to be rejarded while still liv-
ing on earth, Heb. xii. 22 ; ή καινή 'Up. in the visions of
John 'the Revelator,' the neu• Jerusalem, a splendid visi-
ble city to be let down from heaven after the renovation
of the world, the future abode of the blessed : Kev. iii.
12: xxi. 2. 10.
Ίίροσολνμίτη? [Tdf. -μείτης, see it, i ; WH 'Upoσo\xr■
μείτης, see their Intr. § 408], -ου, 6, a citizen or inhabitant
of Jerusalem : Mk. i. 5 ; Jn. vii. 25. [Joseph, antt. 5, 1,
17, etc.]*
κρο-<Γυλί'ω, -ω ; (ιερόσυλος, q. V.) ; to commit sacrilege,
iepoavXo^
300
to rob a templt: : Ro. ii. 22, where the meaning is, ' thou
who abhorrest idols and their contamination, dost yet
not liositale to plunder tlieir shrines '; cf. Fritzsche [and
Delitzsch] ad loc. (Arstph., Plat., Dem., al.) *
1<ρό(Γυλο$, -OK, (fr. ifpov and συλάω), guill>/ ofsacrileije :
Acts xix. 37 [Λ. V. ruhhtrs of temples; cf. Bp. LghlJ'U in
The Contemp. Rev. for 1878, p. 2:H sq.]. (2 Mace. iv.
42; .\rsti)li., Xen., Plat., Polyb., Diod., al.) *
1(ρουρΎ(<ι>, -ώ ; (fr. Itpovpyos, and this fr. If put and
ΕΡΓΩ) ; '" I'd Inisiril irilh .s-a(,-/-t'i/ iJiini/s ; lo perform sacred
riles, (Pliilo, Ildian.); used esp. of persons sacrificing
(Joseph, antt. 7, 13, 4, etc.) ; trans, to minister in the man-
ner of a priest, minister in priestly service: τϋν νόμον, of
those who defend the sanctity of the law by undergoing
a violent death, 4 .Mace. vii. 8 ; to eiayyeKtov, of the
preaching of the gospel, Ro. xv. 16 (where Fritzsche
treats of the word fully; [cf. W. 222 sq. (209)]).•
Ί^ρουσΌλήμι, si'c Ίιροσόλυμα.
'ufm<rvvr\ [on the ω see άγαθωσΰνη, init.], -ijs, ψ (Upas),
prieslltooil, the priestly office : lleb. vii. 11 s<\. 1 4 11 (}, 24.
(Sir. xlv. 24; 1 Esdr. v. 3s ; 1 Mace. ii. 54; iii. 49; 4
Mace. V. 34; Ililt., Plat., Dem., Diod., Joseph., Plut.,
Hdian., al.)*
Ί€σσαΙ ('Uaamo! in Joseph.), ό, ('V\ [cf. B. D. Am.
ed. s. V.]), Jesse, the father of David the king (1 S. xvi.
1, 10; .wii. 12 Alex.; xx. 27) : Mt. i. 5 sq. ; Lk. iii. 32;
Acts xiii. 22; Ro. .xv. 12.•
Ίίφθάί (Ίίφίήί, -oC, in .Joseph.), <5, ( ΠΓ13' [fut. 3 sing,
mase.], fr. Π,ιο to open), Jeplithah, the son of Gilead
[cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Gilead, 4], and a judge of Israel
(Judg. xi. sq.) : Ileb. xi. 32.•
Ίίχονίοϊ, -ου, ό, (ΐ'ρ;ΐΠ' Jehoiakin, i.e. whom Jehovah
appointed; Sept. ΊωαχΙν [(?) see B. D. Am. ed. s. v.
Jehoiaehin]), Jechoniah, king of Judah, carried off into
exile by Nebuchadnezzar [c] B. C. 600 after a reign of
three months, 2 K. .xxiv. 8-17 ; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 9 sq. ; Jer.
Hi. 31. He is mentioned Mt. i. 11 sq. But he was not,
as is there stated, the son of Josiah, but of Jehoiakim ;
nor had he ' brethren,' but his father had. Accordinijly
in the Evangelist's genealogy the names □•ρ"1Π' and
J'P'irr have been confounded ; [cf. B. D. u. s., and refi.
there].•
Ίησονϊ, -oC, dat. -oO, ace. -ovv, voc. -oC, [W. § 10, 1],
6, Jesxis (iityirr and ace. to a later form i'Val, Syr.
>> "•
'^OAa, i. e. whose help is Jehoirah; Germ. Golthilf;
but later writ, gave the name the force of Π^'ί!?', see
Mt. i. 21, cf. Sir. xlvi. 1 Ί^σοΟ? ot iytvero κατά το
όνομα αντοΰ ptyas €7Tt σωτηρία €κ\€κτων αυτόν, of
.Toshua, the successor of Moses; Philo, nom. mutat. § 21
'lijaoif €ρμηνζν(ται σ ωτηρία κυρίου), a very com. prop,
name among the Israelites; cf. Delitzsch, Der .lesusname,
in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, p. 209 sq. [or
Talmud. Stud. xv.]. In the N. T. 1. Joshua [fully
Jehoshna], the famous captain of the Israelites, Moses'
successor : Acts vii. 45 ; Heb. iv. 8. 2. Jesus, son
of Eliezer, one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 29 L Τ Tr
WH. 3. Jesus, the Son of God, the Saviour of
m.-inkind : Mt. i. 21, 25; Lk. LSI; ii. 21, and very often ;
see Kvpios and Xpiarot. 4. Jesus Burabbds ; see
βαραββά^- 5. Jesus, gurnamed Justus, a Jewish
Christian, an associate with Paul in preaching the gos-
pel: Col. iv. 11.
Ikovos, -fj, -iv, (fr. Χκω, Ίκάνω ; prop. ' reaching to ', ' at-
taining to'; hence 'adequate') ; as in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt.
and Thuc. down, sufficient; a. of number and
([uantity ; >vith nouns, many enough, or enough with a
gen. : Ιίχ\ΐ}ί ικανοί, a great multitude [A. V. often much
people], Mk. K. -Ιΰ ; Lk. vii. 12; Acts xi. 24, 26 ; xix.
2G; λαοί, Acts v. 37 11 (i; κ\ανθμι'>!, Acts xx. 37; άργίτ
pia Ικανά, [A. \'. large money, cf. the eollo(|. ' money
enough 'J, Mt. xxviii. 12; \αμπιώ(!, Acts xx. 8; Xiryot,
Lk. xxiii. 9; φώί Ίκανόν, a considerable light [A. V. a
great light]. Acts xxii. 6. of time: ϊκανιύ χμόνω [cf.
W. § 31, 9 ; B. § 133, 26] for a long time, [l.k. vi'ii. 27
TTrtxt. WII]; Acts viii. 11; also Ίκανον χράνον. Acta
xiv. 8; and plur. Lk. xx. 9; i| Ίκανον, of a long time,
now for a Ion•.; time, Lk. x.\iii. 8 RfJ; also «<e χρόνω»
'ικανών, Lk. viii. 27 R G LTr mrg. ; x.xiii. 8 L Τ Tr WII ;
[από Ίκανίύν (Των, these many years, Ro. xv. 23 WII Tr
txt.] ; Ίκανον χρον. biaycv. much time having elapsed,
Acts xxvii. 9; ίφ' Ίκανύν, for a long Λvhile, Acts xx. 11
(2 Mace. viii. 2.'); Diod. 13, 100; Palaeph. 28); ημίραι
[cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. ]>. 89 n.]. Acts ix. 23, 43 ; xviii.
IS; xxvii. 7. absol. Ικανοί, many, a considerable num-
ber : Lk. vii. 1 1 [R G L br. Τ Tr mrg. br.] ; Acts xii. 1 2 ;
xiv. 21 ; xix. 19; 1 Co. xi. 30, (1 Mace. xiii. 49, etc.).
ίκίΐνόν (στιν, it is enough, i. q. enough has been said on
this stibjc'tt, Lk. xxii. 38 (for Jesus, saddened at the
paltry ideas of the disciples, breaks off in this way the
conversation ; the Jews, when a companion uttered any
thing absurd, were wont to use the phrase DpS 2"^^ [A. V.
let it suffice thee, etc.], as in Dent. iii. 20, where Sept. Ικα-
νονσθω) ; Ίκανον τω τοιοντω η (πιτιμία αΰτη, se. ΐστί, stllli-
cient ... is this punishment, 2 Co. ii. 6 ; after the LaU
idiom satisficcre alicul, to ik. iroitiv Ttvi, to take away
from one every ground of complaint [A. \. to content],
iMk. XV. lo (Polyb. 32, 7, 13; App. Pun. p. 68 ed. Toll.
[§ 74, i. p. 402 ed. Schweig.] ; Diog. Laert. 4, 50) ; τ4
Ίκ. λαμβάνω (Lat. satis accipio), to take security (either
by accc[)ting sponsors, or by a deposit of money until
the case had been decided). Acts xvii. 9. b. suffi-
cient in ability, i. e. meet, βΐ, (Germ, tuchtig [A. V.
worthy, able, etc.]) : npos τί, for something, 2 Co. ii. 16 ;
foil, by an inf. [B. 260 (•22.! sq.)], Mt. iii. 11 ; Mk. i. 7 ;
Lk. iii. 16 ; 1 Co. xv. 9 ; 2 Co. iii. 5 ; 2 Tim. ii. 2 ; foil,
by Ίνα with subjunc. [B. 240 (207); cf. W. 335 (314)]:
Mt. viii. 8; Lk. vii. 6.•
ίκονότηϊ, -ijTor, ή, sufficiency, ability or competency to
do a thing : 2 Co. iii. 5. (Plat. Lys. [p. 215 a.] ap. Poll. ;
[al.].)•
ίκανόω, -ώ: 1 aor. Ικάνωσα; (ικανοί); to male suffi-
cient, render fit ; with two ace, one of the obj. the other
of the predicate: to equip one with adequate power to
perform the duties of one, 2 Co. iii. 6 ; τίνα tis τι. Col. i.
12. [Sept.; Dion. Hal, al.] •
ίΚ€ΤηρΐΟ<!
301
ΊΧΚνρι
Ιχ€τήριθ5, -β, -ον, (i<trnjr a suppliant), pertaining to a
suppliant, fit for a supplianl; ή UfT-qpia, as subst., sc.
eXaia or ρά3δος ; 1. an otife-l/ranch ; for suppliants
approached the one whose aid they would implore hold-
ing an olive-branch entwined with white wool and fillets,
to signify that they came as suppliants [cf. Trench § li.
sub fin.]: \αμβάν(ΐν Ικ(τηρίαν, lldt. 5, 51; ϊκιτηρίαν TiBi-
vai or ιτροβαΚΧΐσθαί παρύ τινι, etc. 2. i. q. ίκ^σία,
supplication (Isocr. p. 18G d. var. ; Polyb. ; 2 Mace. ix.
18) : plur. joined with fifijaeif (Polyb. 3, 112, 8 ; sing. Job
xl. 22 Sept.), Ileb. v. 7.*
(κμά;, -άδθ£, ή, moisture : Lk. viii. 6. (Sept. Jer. xvii.
8; Horn. II. 17, 392; Joseph, antt. 3, 1, 3, and often in
other auth.) '
"Ικόνιον, -ου, TO, Iconium, a celebrated city of Asia
Minor, which in the time of Xen. (an. 1, 2, 19) was 'the
last city of Phrygia,' afterwards the capital of Lycaonia
(Strab. 12 p. 568; Cic. ad divers. 15, 4); now Konia
[oT Komeh~\: Acts -xiii. 51 ; xiv.1,19,21; xvi.2; 2 Tim.
iii. 11. Cf. Oierbeck in Schenkel iii. 303 sq. ; [B. D.
(esp. Am. ed.) s. v. ; Leicin, St. Paul, i. 144 sqq.].*
IXapos, -ά, -όν. (Ιλαοί propitious), cheerful, joyous,
prompt to do antjihing: 2 Co. ix. 7 ; Prov. xix. 12 ; xxii.
8; Sir. xiii. 26 (25) ; xxvL 4; 3 JIacc. vi. 35; Arstph.,
Xen., al.*
kXc4>a'nis, -i)Tof, ή. cheerfulness, readiness of mind : Ro.
xii. 8. (Prov. xviii. 22 ; [Diod., Philo (de plant. Noe
§ 40), Plut., al.] ; Acta Thorn. § 14.) *
Ιλάο-κομαι ; (see below) ; in class. Grk. the mid. of an
act. ιΚάσκω {to render propitious, appease) never met
with ; 1. to render propitious to one's self, to ap-
pease, conciliate to one's self (ΐτ. ΐλαος gracious, gentle) ;
fr. Horn, down ; mostly w. ace. of a pers., as fleoi/, Άθη-
νην, etc. (τόκ deov ΐΚάσασθαι, .foseph. antt. 6, 6, 5) ; very
rarely w. ace. of the thin^;. as την δργήν, Plut. Cat. min.
61 (with which cf. (ξι\άσκ(σθαί θυμόν, Prov. xvi. 14
Sept.). In bibl. Grk. used passively, to become propitious,
be placated or appeased ; in 1 aor. impv. ΙΧάσθητι, be pro-
pitious, be gracious, be merciful, (in prof. auth. 1\ηθι and
Dor. ΐΧαθι, which the gramm. regard as the pres. of an
unused verb ιΧημι, to be propitious; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Sp.
ii. p. 20G ; Kiihner § 343, i. p. 8:59; Passow [or L. and
S., or Veitch] s. v. 1X17^1), with dat. of the thing or the
pers. : Lk. xviii. 13 (ταϊς άμαρτίακ, Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxix.)
9 ; [Lxxvii. (Ixxviii.) 38] ; rrj αμαρτία, Ps. xxiv. (xxv.)
1 1 ; ίλάσ^ι; ό Kvpms ircp'i της κακίας, Ex. xxxii. 14 Alex. ;
Ί\ασθήσ€ταί κίρ. τω δούλω σου, 2 Κ. ν. 18). 2. by
an Alexandrian usage, to expiate, make propitiation for,
(as ίξί\ύσκ(σθαί in the O. T.) : xar αμαρτίας. Ileb. ii. 17
{ήμων τας ψνχάς. Philo. allej. leg. 3, 61). [Cf. Kurt;,
Com. on Heb. 1. c. : AV. 227 (213) fWestcolt, Epp. of S. Jn.
p. 83 sq.]•
lX(urp.os, -ov, a. ('t\άσκnμai) : X. an appeasing,
propitiating, Vulg. propitiatio, (Plut. de sera num. vind.
c. 17; plur. joined with καθαρμοί, Plut. Sol. 12; with
gen. of the obj. των θιών. Orph. Arg. 39: Plut. Fab. 18;
Bftiiv μηυιν ιλασμον κα\ χαριστηρίων δ^ημίνην. vit. CamiU.
7 fin. ; ποκίσθαι ίΧασμόν, of a priest offering an expia-
tory sacrifice, 2 Mace. iii. 33). 2. in Alex, usage the
means of appeasing, a propitiation : Philo, alleg. leg. iii.
§61; ττροσοίσουσιν ΐΚασμόν, for ΓΚφΠ, Ezek. xliv. 27;
irepX των αμαρτιών, of Christ, 1 Jn. ii. 2; iv. 10, (leptor
ToD ίΚασμοϋ, Xum. v. 8; [cf. ημίρα τ. ΐΚασμον. Lev. xxv.
9]; also for ΠΠ'^ρΟ, forgiveness, Ps. cxxi.\. (cxxx.) 4;
Dan. ix. 9 Theodot.). [Cf. Trench § lxxvii.]'
IXouriTJpios, -a, -ov, (]Χάσκομαι, q. v.), relating to aj)-
peasing or expiating, hacing placating or expiating force,
expiatory : μνήμα ΙΧαστήριον, a monument built to propi-
tiate God, .loieph. antt. 16, 7, 1 : ίΧαστηριος θάνατος,
4 Mace. xvii. 22 ; χείρας ίκίτηρίονς, cl βούΧΐί δε ίλαση/-
ρίους, (κτίίνας θ(ώ, Xice]ih. in act. S.S. ed. Mai, vol. v.
p. 335, 1 7. Xeut. ro ΊΧαστήριον, as subst., a means oj
appeasing or expiating, a propitiation, (Germ. Vcrsoh-
nungs- oder SiHinmittel) ; cf. W. 96 (91); [592 (-"'51)].
So used of 1. the well-known cover of the ark of
the covenant in the Holy of holies, which was sprinkled
with the blood of the expiatory victim on the annual
day of atonement (this rite signifying that the life of
the people, the loss of which they had merited by their
sins, was offered to God in the blood as the life of the
victim, and that God by this ceremony was appeased
and their sins were expiated) ; hence the lid of expia-
tion, the propitiatory, Vulg. propilialorium ; Luth. Gna-
denstuhl, [A. V. mercy-seal'] : Heb. ix. 5 (Sept. Ex. xxv.
18 sqq. ; Lev. xvi. 2, etc. ; more fully ΊΧαστήριον eVi^eiwi.
Ex. xxv. 17; xx.xviii. (xxxvii.) 7 (6), for the Ilebr.
jT'iJS, fr. liJi to cover, sc. sins, i. e. to pardon). Theod-
oret, Theophyl., Oecum., Luther, Grotius, Tholuck,
Wilke, Philippi, L'mbreit, [Cremer (4te Auti.)] and others
cive this meaning to the word also in Ro. iii. 25, viz.
that Christ, besprinkled with his own blood, was truly
that which the cover or • mercy-seat ' had been t y ρ ί-
ο ally, i. e. the sign and pledge of expiation; but in
opp. to this interpretation see Fritzsche, Meyer, A'an
Hengel, [Godet. Oltramare] and others ad loc. 2.
an expiatory sacrifice ; a piacular victim (Vulg. propitia-
tio) : Ro. iii. 25 (after the analogy of the words χαρι-
στήρια sacrifices expressive of gratitude, thank-ofierings,
σωτήρια sacrifices for safety obtained. On the other
hand, in Dion Chrys. or. 11, 121, p. 35.5 ed. Reiske, the
reference is not to a sacrifice but to a monument,
as the preceding words show : KaraXti^fiv yap αΐτοϋς
ανάθημα κάΧΧιστον κα\ μίγιστον ττ/ Αθηνά και eViypo-
ψίΐν, ΙΧαστήριον "Αχαιοί TJj ΊΧιάδι). [See the full discus-
sion of the word in Dr. Jas. Morison. Crit. Exposition of
the Third Chap, of the Ep. to the Rom. pp. 281-303.]•
iXeus, -ων, (Attic for ΤλαοΓ [cf. W. 22], fr. Horn.
down), propitious, merciful • ίσομαι "Χ- τα'ις άδικίαις, i- e.
I will pardon, Heb. viii. 12; Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34;
xliii. (xxxvi.) 3: also ταϊς άμαρτίαις. 1 Κ. viii. 34 ; 2 Chr.
vi. 25, 27, etc.; ΤΚιώς σοι, sc. ϊστα> [or (Ίη, Β. § 129, 22]
ό θ(6ς, i. e. God avert this from thee, Mt. xvi. 22; Sept.
for nS-Sn foil, by ^7, be it far from one, 2 S. xx. 20 ;
xxiii. 17.•
'Ιλλυρικόν, -oC, TO, Illi/rictim, a region lying between
Italy, (Jermany, Macedonia and Thrace, having on one
ιμα<ί
302
ινα
side the Adriatic Sea, and on the other the Danube : Ro.
XV. 1 9 [cf. B. D. Am. ed.].'
l|ias, -avTos, 6, (fr. iij^i to .«end ; sc. a vessel, wliich was
tied to thongs of leather and let down into a well for the
purpose of drawing water; hence ίμάω also, to draw
something made fa.st to a thong or rope [recent etymol.
connect it w. Skt. si to bind ; cf. Curtius § 602 ; Vanicek
p. 1041]) ; fr. Horn, down ; a titonij of leather, a strap ;
in the X. T. of the thongs with which captives or crimi-
nals were either bound or beaten (see ηροτ(Ινω), Acts
xxii. 25 (4 Mace. ix. 11; Sir. xxx. 35); of the thongs
or tics by which sandals were fastened to the feet, Mk.
i. 7; Lk. iii. 16 ; Jn. i. 27, (so also in Is. v. 27; Xen.
.anab. 4, 5, 14; Plut. symp. 4, 2, 3 ; Suid. ίμα!• σφαψω-
τηρ σαν^αΚΊου, ζανίχιον, οίον το \ώριον τοΟ νποδήμΑ,ιτος).'
ίματίζω : pf. pass. ptcp. ipaTiapevos '• (Ιμάτιον); to
clntlie : Mk. v. 15 ; Lk. viii. 35. (Found neither in Sept.
nor in prof. auth. [cf. W. 26 (23)].) '
ιμάτιον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of ϊμα i. q. (ΐμα, an article of
clothing, garment ; and this fr. ΐνννμι to clothe, cf. Germ.
Hemd) ; [fr. Hdt. down] ; Sept. mostly for 1J2, also
for nSpty, no^i^, etc.; 1. a garment (of any sort) :
Mt. ix. 16 ; xi. 8 [R G Lbr., al. om. ; cf. W. 591 (550) ;
B. 82(72)]; Mk. ii. 21; XT. 20; Lk. v. 36; vii. 25; Heb.
i. 11 ; plur. garments, i. e. the cloak or mantle and the
tunic [cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24(23)]: Mt. xvii. 2; xxiv.
18 [Rec] ; xxvii. 31, 35 ; Jn. xLx. 23 ; Acts vii. 58 ; Jas.
V. 2, etc. ; to rend τα Ίμ. (see htapρήywμ^), Mt. xxvi. 65 ;
Acts xiv. 14; xxii. 23. 2. the upper garment, the
cloak or mantle (which was thrown over the tunic, ό
χιτών) [Rutherford, Xew Phryn. p. 22] : Mt. be. 20 ;
[xxiv. 18 L Τ Tr Wll] ; Mk. v. 27 ; Lk. viii. 44 ; Jn. xix.
2 ; Rev. xLx. 16; it is distinguished from the χιτών in
Mt. V. 40 ; Lk. vi. 29 ; [cf. Jn. xix. 23] ; Acts ix. 39. [Cf .
Trench § 1. ; BB. DD. s. v. Dress ; Edersheim, Jewish .So-
cial Life, ch. xiii. ; esp. 'Jesus the Messiah,' i. CJOsci^.J
Ιματισμός, ~ov, ό, {Ιματίζω). rlo/hiitg, apparel: univ.,
Lk. vii. 25 ; Acts xx. 33 ; 1 Tim. ii. 9; of the tunic, Mt.
xxvii. 35 Rec. ; Jn. xix. 24 ; of the cloak or mantle, Lk.
ix. 29. (Sept.; Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Plut., Athen.)
[Cf. Trench § 1.] •
Ιμίίρω : mid. Ιμ(ίρομαι ; (ΐμιρο! desire, longing, [allied w.
ΐλιως: \'anicek p. 88]; cf. οίκτιίρω) ; to desire, long for,
esp. of the longing of love : ΰμων [W. § 30, 10 b.] i. e. your
souls, to win them to Christ, 1 Th. ii. 8 Rec. ; see όμ^ίρο-
μαι. (Sept. Job iii. 21 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) •
ίνα, I. an adv. of Place, fr. Horn, down, esp. in
the poets; a. where; in ichat place. b. lo ivhat
place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A.
Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836 ; differently in Fritzschiorum
Opuscc. p. 186 sqq.) thought he had found two examples
in bibl. Greek, and H. A. ΛΥ. Meyer agrees with him.
The first viz. Iva μη φνσιοΰσθί, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain
thus : where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have
leafned from my example to think humbly of yourselves)
the one is not exalted lo the other's disadvantage; the
second, Xva avroiis fijXoOre, Gal. iv. 1 7, thus : where ye
zealously court them ; but see Π. 1 d. below.
Π. a final Conjunction (for from local direc-
tion, indicated by the adverb, the transition was ea.<y to
mental direction or intention) denoting purpose and
end: to the intent that ; to the end that, in order that ; Iva
μή, that not, lest ; it is used
1. prop. of the purpose or end; a. foil, by the
Optative; only twice, and then preceded by the pres.
of a verb of pray i ng or beseeching, where the wish
(opiatio) expressed by the prayer gave occasion for the
use of the optat. : Eph. i. 1 7 but λ\Ί1 mrg. subj. ; iii. 16
RG; cf. W. 290 (273); B. 233 (201); and yet in both
instances the telle force of the particle is so weakened
that it denotes the substance rather than the end of
the prayer; see 2 below. b. foil, by the Subjunc-
tive, not only (according to the rule observed by the
best Grk. writ.) after the primary tenses (pres., pf., fut.)
or the imperative, but (in accordance with that well-
known negligence with which in later times and esp. bv
Hellenistic writers the distinction between the subjunc.
and the optat. was disregarded) after preterites even
where the more elegant Grk. writ, were wont to use the
optat. ; cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 847 sqq. ; Klntz ad Dev.
ii. 2 p. 616 sqq. ; W. 287 (270) sqq. ; B. 233 (201). o.
after a Present: ISIk. iv. 21; vii. 9; Lk. vi. 34 ; viii. 12;
xvi. 28; Jn.iii. 15; v. 34; vi.30; Acts ii. 25; xvi. 30; Ro.
i. 11; iii. 19; xi. 25; iCo. vii. 29; ix. 12; 2Co. i. 17; Gal.
vi. 13 ; Phil. iii. 8; Heb. v. 1 ; vi. 12; ix. 25; 1 Jn. i. 3;
Rev. iii. 18; xi. 6, and often. β. after a Perfect:
.ΛΙι. j. 22; xxi. 4; Jn. v. 23; [36 Τ Tr WH ; cf. (.] ; vi.
38; xii. 40, 46; xiv. 29; xvi. 1.4; xvii. 4 ; xx. 31 ; 1 Co.
L\. 22 ; 1 Jn.v. 20 [here Τ TrWH pres. indie; seed.].
γ. after an Imperative (either pres. or aor.) : Jit. vii.
1 ; ix. 6 ; xiv. 15 ; xvii. 27 ; xxiii. 26 ; Mk. xi. 25 ; xiii. 18 ;
Jn. iv. 15 ; v. 14 ; vii. 3 [R G L] ; x. 38 ; 1 Co. vii. 5; xi.
34 ; 1 Tim. iv. 15; Tit. iii. 13, etc.; also after a horta-
tive or deliberative subjunc. : Mk. i. 38; Lk. xx.
14 ; Jn. vi. 5 [R''" L Τ Tr WH] ; xi. 16 ; Heb. iv. 16,
etc. 8. after aFuture: Lk. xvi. 4 ; xviii. 5 ; Jn. v. 20
[liere Tdf. indie, pres.; seed.]; xiv. 3, 13, 16; 1 Co. .\v.
28; Phil. i. 26. i. after II istoric tenses: after the
impf., Mk. iii. 2 [here LTr fut. indie. ; see c.] ; vi. 41;
,viii. 6 ; Lk. vi. 7; xviii. 15, etc.; after the plupf., Jn. iv. '
8; after the aor., Mt. xix. 13; Mk. iii. 14; xi. 28; xiv.
10 [B. § 139, 37]; Lk. xLx. 4, 15; Jn. v. 36 [RGL; cf.
β.]; vii. 32; xii. 9; Acts xix. 4 [?] ; Ko. vi. 4; 2 Co. viii.
9 ; Heb. ii. 1 4 ; xi. 35 ; 1 Tim. i. 1 6 ; 1 Jn. iii. 5, 8, etc. c.
As prof. auth. join the final particles όφρα, μή, and esp.
όπωΓ. also with the future Indicative (cf. Matthiae
§ 519, 8 ii. p. 1186 sqq.), as being in nature akin to the
subjunc, so the N. T. writ., ace. to a usage extremely
doubtful among the better Grk. writ. (cf. Klotz 1. c. p.
629 sq.), also join em with the same [cf. WH. App. p.
171'sq.; .So/)A. Lex. s. v. "j/a, 1 7] : Ίνα θήσω, \ Co. \\. \f: ;
L Τ Tr AVH in the foU. instances : σταυρώσουσιν, Mk.
XV. 20 [not WH (see u. s.)], δώσονσιν, Lk. xx. 10; Kfvai-
σ(ΐ, 1 Co. ix. 15 [not Lchm.], [καταδουΚώσονσιν, Oal. ii.
4 (but cf. Hort in AVH u. s. p. 167')]; κιρ^ηθήσονται,
1 Pet. iii. 1 ; σφάξουσιν. Rev. vi. 4 ; δώσα. Rev. viii. 3 ;
303
νροσκυνήσουσιν, [Rev. ix. 20] ; xiii. 12 [(cf. 2 a. fin. be-
low)] ; Ιάναπαησονται, Rev. xiv. 1 3 (see αναπαύω) cf . 4 b.]; L
Tr in the foU. : κατηγορήσουσιν, Mk. iii. 2, (cf. b. f . above) ;
τροσκννήσονσιν, Jn. xii. 20 ; Τ Tr AVH in [βιωρησουσίν,
Jn. vii. 3] : ξυρησονται, Acts xxi. 24 ; L Τ WII Tr mrg.
in ά&ίκήσουσιν, Rev. ix. 4 [(cf. 2 b. below)] ; [add, tpti,
Lk. xiv. 10 Τ WH Tr txt. ; ^ξομο\ογήσ(ται, Phil. ii. 1 1 Τ
L mrg. Tr mrg.; καυθήσομαι, 1 Co. xiii. 3 T; Βώσιι, Jn.
xvii. 2 WII Tr mrg.; άναπαϋσονται, Rev. vi. 11 ΛΥΗ;
δώσ«, Rev. xiii. 16 WH mrg.], (ira καταργήσ€ί το!/ iura-
TOK και την eK νΐκρων άνάστασιν 8fi$ci, Barn. ep. 5, 6 [so cod.
t5, but HUgenf., Miiller, Gebh., al., adopt the subjunc. ;
yet see Cunningham's note ad loc.]) ; so that the fut. al-
ternates with the subjunc. : iva ΐσται . . . και (ΙσίΚθωσιν,
Rev. χχϋ. 1 4 ; ■γίνηται κα\ ίση (Vulg. sis'), Eph. vi. 3 ; in
other pass. L Τ Tr WH have restored the indie, as ίνα
ηζονσι κ. ττροσκννησονσιν ... κ. γι^ώσΐΓ, Rev. iii. 9 ; ινα
. . . TTiVrjrf . . . κα\ καθίσ^σθί or καθήσισθί [but λ\ Η txt.
Koiraif] (Vulg. €t sedealis'), Lk. xxii. 30; κάμψη κ- ίξο-
μοΧογησιται, Phil. ii. 11 [Τ L mrg. Tr mrg.] ; cf. B. § 139,
38 ; W. § 41 b. 1 b. d. By a solecism freq. in the
eccles. and Byzant. writ, ίνα is joined with the indie.
Present: 1 Co. iv. 6 (φυσιοΰσθ^) ; Gal. iv. 17 (ζψ
\oiTe) ; [cf. Test. xii. Patr., test. Gad § 7 ; Barn. ep. 6,
5 ; 7,11; Ignat. ad Eph. 4, 2 ; ad Trail. 8, 2, and other
exx. in Win. and Bit m. as below ; but see Hort in WH.
App. p. 167% cf. pp. 169'', 171 sq.] ; but the indie, is very
doubtful in the foil, passages: [.In. iv. 15 Trtxt.]; v.
20 (Tdf. θαυμάζίτί) ; xvii.3 Τ Tr txt. ; Gal. vi. 12 Τ L
mrg. ; [1 Th. iv. 13 L mrg.] ; Tit. ii. 4 Τ Tr L mrg. ; 2 Pet.
i. 10 L• ; [1 Jn. v. 20 Τ Tr WH (cf. b. β. above)] ; Rev.
xu. 6 (T Tr τρίφουσιν) ; [xiii. 1 7 ΛΥΗ mrg.] ; cf. W. § 41
b. 1 c. ; B. § 139, 39 ; Meyer on 1 Co. iv. 6 ; Wieseler on
Gal. iv. 1 7 ; [Soph. u. s.]. (In the earlier Grk. writ, ίνα
is joined with the indie, of the past tenses alone, 'to
denote something wliich would have been, if something
else had been done, but now has not come to pass ' Her-
mann ad Vig. p. 847, cf. Klolz ad Dev. ii. 2 p. C30 sq. ;
Kiihner § 553, 7 ii. 903 ; [Jelf § 813 ; cf. Jcbb in App. to
Vincent and Dickson's Modern Greek, § 79].) e.
the final sentence is preceded by pre])aratory demon-
strative expressions [W. § 23, 5] : ds τούτο, ίο this end,
Jn. xviii. 37 ; 1 Jn. iii. 8 ; Ro. xiv. 9 ; 2 Co. ii. 9 ; 1 Pet.
ii. 21; iii. 9; iv. 6, (Barn. ep. 5, 1, 11 ; [14,5]); els airo
toCto, Eph. vi. 22 ; Col. iv. 8 ; δια τοϋτο, Jn. i. 31 ; 2 Co.
xiii. 10 ; Philem. 15 : 1 Tim. i. 16 ; τούτου χάριν, Tit. i. 5.
2. In later Grk., and esp. in Hellenistic writers, the
final force of the particle ΐνα is more or less weakened,
so that it is frequently used where the earlier Greeks
employed the Infinitive, yet so that the leading and
the dependent sentence have each its own subject. The
first extant instance of this use occurs in the Amphic-
tyonic decree in [pseudo-] Dem. p. 279, 8 [i.e. de coron.
§ 155] : πρ^σβίνσαι προς Φιλιππον και άζιονν ίνα βοηθηση.
[cf. Odyss. 3, 327 \ΐσσ(σθαι . . . Ίνα νημίρτίί ίνίσπτ] (cf.
3, 19)], but it increased greatly in subse<iuent times: cf.
W. § 44, 8 ; B. 237 (204) : [Green I 71 sq. ; Goodwin § 45
N. 5 b. ; Jebb in App. to Vincent and Dickson's Modern
Greek, § 55]. Accordingly Ίνα stands with the subjunc.
in such a way that it denotes the purport (or object)
rather than the purpose of the action expressed by
the preceding verb. This occurs a. after verbs of
caring for, deciding, desiring, striving: /3Xe-
jreiv, 1 Co. xvi. 10; Col. iv. 17; 2 Jn. 8; ζήτω, 1 Co. iv.
2; .xiv. 12; φυλάσσομαι, ίνα μή, 2 Pet. iii. 17; μίριμ,νάω,
1 Co. vii. 34 ; ^?;λόω, 1 Co. xiv. 1 ; βουλιίομαι, Jn. xi. 53
[RGTrmrg. συμβου.]; xii. 10; άφίημι.^Ιίί. xi. 16; Jn.
xii. 7 L Τ Tr WH ; θ(λημά ϊστι, Mt. xviii 14 ; Jn. vi. 39
sq. ; θί\ω, Mt. vii. 12; ]Mk. vi. 25; L\.30; x. 35 ; Lk. vi.
31 ; so that it alternates with the inf., 1 Co. xiv. 5 ; 8ί8ωμι,
to grant, that, Mk. x. 37 ; Rev. ix. 5, etc.; ποιώ. Rev. xiii.
1 2 [here L Τ Tr WH indie, fut. (cf . 1 c. above)]. b.
after verbs of saying (commanding, asking, exhorting;
but by no means after KcXeveiv [cf. B. 275 (236)]) :
eh('iv, in the sense of to bid, Mt. iv. 3 ; !Mk. iii. 9 ; Lk. iv.
3 ; also Xi'yf iv. Acts xix. 4 ; 1 Jn. v. 1 6 ; ίρρή&η. Rev. vi. 1 1
[WH indie, fut.] : ix. 4 [L Τ Trmrg. WH indie, fut. (see
1 c. above)] ; διαμαρτύρομαι, 1 Tim. v. 21 (otherwise [viz.
telic] in Lk. xvi. 28) ; ίρωτώ, to asl; beseech, Mk. vii. 26 ;
Lk. vii. 36 ; xvi. 27 ; Jn. iv. 47 ; xvii. 15, 21 ; xix. 31 ;
2 Jn. 5 ; παρακαλώ, Mt. xiv. 36 ; ISIk. v. 10, 18; vii. 32;
viu.22; Lk. viii. 32; 1 Co. i. 10; xvi. 12, 15 sq.; 2 Co.
viii. 6 ; ix. 5 ; xii. 8 ; 1 Th. iv. 1 ; 2 Th. iii. 1 2, (Joseph.
antt. 12, 3, 2) ; προσεύχομαι [q. v.], Sit. xxiv. 20 ; Mk.
[xiii. 18]; xiv. 35 ; Seopai, Lk. Lx. 40; xxii. 32, (Dion.
Hal. antt. 1, 83) ; ΐπιτιμω, Mt. xii. 16 ; [xvi. 20 L WH
t.xt.]; X.X.31; Mk.iiil2; viii. 30; x.48; Lk. xviii 39 ;
ϊντίλλομαι, Mk. xiii. 34 ; Jn. xv. 1 7 ; ίντο'Κην δίδωμι or
λαμ^άι-ω, Jn. xi. 57; xiii. 34 ; xv. 12; γράψω, with the
involved idea of prescribing, Mk. ix. 12 [cf. W. 462
(430) and the txt. of L T] ; xii. 19; Lk. xx. 28; dia-
στίΧλομαι, Mt. xvi. 20 [L WH txt. ('πιτιμώ (see above)];
Mk. V. 43 ; vii. 36 ; Lx. 9 ; π•αραγγ<'λλω. Mk. vi. 8 [cf. W.
578 (538)]; σνντΊΘ(μαι, Jn. ix. 22: aγyapeύω, Mt. xxvii.
32; Mk. XV. 21 : κηρύσσω, Mk. vi. 12: άπαγγϊΧΚω, Mt.
xxviii. 10; (ξορκίζω, Mt. xxvi. 63. [For exx. (of its use
with the above verbs and others) drawn from the later
Grk. writ, see Sophocles, Glossary etc. § 88, 1.] c.
after words by which judgment is pronounced con-
cerning that which some one is about to do (or which is
going to happen), as to whether it is expedient, be-
fitting, proper, or not; as συμφίρ(ΐ. Mt. xviii. 6; v.
29 sq. ; Jn. xi. 50 ; xvi. 7 ; λυσιτfλ(ΐ, Lk. xvii. 2 ; άρκετόν
ίση, Mt. X. 25 ; also after άξιο!, Jn. i. 27 ; Ικανός, Mt.
viii. 8 ; Lk. vii. 6 ; ίΚάχιστόν μοί (στιν, Ίνα, 1 Co. iv. 3 ;
ηγαΚΚιάσατο, ινα ιδη. Jn. viii. 56; χρεΊαν (χω, Jn. ii. 25;
xvi. 30; 1 Jn. ii. 27 ; eSti, Ίνα fVl ξνλου πάύτ/. Barn,
ep. 5, 13. [For other exx. see Soph, as above § 88,
3, 4.] d. after substantives, to which it adds a
more exact definition of the thing; after subst. of
time: χρόνον, Ίνα μιτανοήση. Rev. ii. 21 : after ωρη, Jn.
xii. 23 : xiii. 1 ; xvi. 2, 32, (elsewhere ότί, Jn. iv. 23 ; v.
25) ; in these exx. the final force of the particle is still
apparent ; we also can say " lime that she should re-
pent " [cf- W. 339 (318); B. 240 (207)]; but in other
expressions this force has almost disappeared, as in
ίνα
304
«στι» συιήιθίΐα νμϊρ, ινα . . . απολύσω, Jn. xviii. 39 ; after
μισθός, 1 Co. i.\. 18. e. it looks back to a de-
monstrative pronoun; cf. W. 888 (317) ; [Β. § 139,
45] ; πόθεν μοι τοϋτο. Ίνα eX^i; κτλ. for τό €\θίΐν την etc.
Lk. i. 43; esp. in .lolui, cf. vi. 29, 50; xv. 13; xvii. 3
[here Τ Tr txt. indie. ; see 1 d. above] ; 1 Jn. iii. 11, 23 ;
V. 3; 2 Jn. 6; Phil. i. 9; f'v τούτω, Jn. xv. 8; 1 Jn. iv.
1 ', (θίον δί το dwaTuv (V τυντω δίίκνυται, tva . . . ίζ ονκ
όντων TTotf] τα •γίνύμ(να, ΊΊιοο])Ιιϋ. ad Autol, 2, 13 ; after
ToSf, Epict. diss. 2, 1, 1 ; [other exx. in Soph. hex.
8. V. 6]).
3. According to a very ancient tenet of the gramma-
rians, accepted by Kii'iner, § 553, 2 Anm. 3; [Γ. S.
Green, N. T. (iram. p. 172 sq.], and not utterly rejected
by Alex. Bllm. N. T. Gr. p. 238 .sq. (20G), ίνα is alleged to
he used not only τίΧικωι, i. e. of design and end, but also
frequently (κβατικώς, i. e. of the result, signifying with
Ihe issue, thai; irllh the result, that; so tlia: (equiv. to
&στΐ). But C. F. A. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 83G sqq. and
Win. 338 (317) and 4.J7 (426) sqq. have clearly shown,
that in all the passages adduced from the N. T. to prove
this usage the telic (or final) force prevails: thus in
Ίνα μη λυθη ό νόμο! Μωίσί'ωΓ, that the law of Moses may
not be broken (\vhich directs a man to be circumcised
on the eighth and on no other day), Jn. vii. 23; oiic
(are ίνσ<ότ(ΐ, ίνα η ήμίρα ίμίΐ! ■ ■ ■ κατα\άβΐ], that the day
should overtake you (c-f. the final force as brought out by
turning the sentence into the pass, form in Germ, um
vom Tage erfasst zu werden), 1 Th. v. 4 ; ττροσευχίσθω,
ϊνα διερμηνήτι, let him pray (intent on this, or λυΙιΙι this
aim), that (subsequently) he may interpret, 1 Co. xiv.
13 ; likewise (π(νθήσατ(, ίνα etc. 1 Co. v. 2, and μετινάη-
σαν, Ίνα μη, Rev. ix. 20; μιτάθισιν, . . . ίνα etc. that the
change may be to this end, that etc. Heb. xii. 27 ; ΐνα μη
. . . notrjTf, that ye may not do, Gal. v. 17 (where ή σαρξ
and το πν(ϋμα are personified antagpnistic forces con-
tending for dominion over the will of the Christian ; cf.
Wieseler ad loc.) ; the words ΐνα . . . φραγή κτλ. in Ro.
ill. 19 describe the end aimed at by the law. In many
passages where ΐνα has seemed to interpreters to be used
(κβατικώί, the sacred writers follow the dictate of ρ i e ty,
which bids us trace all events back to God as their au-
thor and to refer them to God's purposes (,/o. Dama-
scen. orthod. fid. 4, 11) Woi τη γραφή, τίνα (κβατικω!
οφ(ΐ\οντα \ίγ(σθαι, αΐτιολογικως λίγαν) ; so that, if we
are ever in doubt whether ΐνα is used of design or of
result, we can easily settle the question when we can
interpret the passage ' that, by God's decree,' or ' that,
according to divine purpose' etc.; passages of this
sort are the following: Mk. iv. 12; Lk. ix. 45; xi. 50;
xiv. 10 ; Jn. iv. 36 ; ix. 2 ; xii. 40 ; xix. 28 ; Ro. v. 20 ; vii.
13; viii. 17; xi. 31sq.; iCo. vii. 21); 2Co. iv. 7; vii. 9;
also the phrase ΐνα πΧηρωθη, wont to be used in refer-
ence to the O. T. prophecies : IMt. i. 22 ; ii. 15 ; iv. 14 ;
xii. 1 7 L Τ Tr WII ; xxi. 4 ; xxvi. 56 : xxvii. 35 Rec. ; Jn.
xiii. 18 ; xvii. 12 ; xix. 24, 3G ; ΐνα πληρωθη 6 Χόγοί, Jn.
xii. 38; xv. 25, cf. xviii. 9, 32. [Cf. AVin. 461 (429).
Prof. Sophocles although giving (Lex. s. v. ΐνα, 19) a co-
pious collection of exx. of the ecbatic use of the word,
defends its telic sense in the phrase ΐνα πΚηρ-, by calling
attention not merely to the substitution of όπωί ττ\ηρ.
in Mt. viii. 17; xiii. 35, (cf. ii. 23), but esp. to 1 Esdr. i.
54 (fis αναπ\ηρωσιν ρήματος τον κυρίου (v στόααη *Ii^f-
μίου) ; ii. 1 (fh συντΐλεια^' ρήματος κυρ. κτΧ.) ; 2 Esdr. i. 1
(roC τίλίσθηναι λόγοι/ κυρίου άπο στόματος 'leprpiov) : Jo-
stq)li. antt. 8, 8, 2 fin. ταϋτα δ' (πράττίτο κατά την τοΰ θΐον
βουΧησίν tva \άβη τίΧης α προξφητ(υσίν Άχίας; cf. Bib.
Sacr. '61 p. 729 sii<i. ; Luthardl's Zeitschr. '83 p. 632 sqij.l
4. The elliptical use of the particle; a. the
telic ΐνα often depends on a verb not expressed, but to
be repeated or educed from the context (cf. Fritzschi
on Mt. p. 840 .sq. ; W. 316 (297); [B. § 139, 47]) : άλλ'
(sc. η\θ(ν, cf. vs. 7) ΐνα μαρτυρήση, Jn. i. 8; άλλ' (sc.
ίγίν(το άηόκρυφον) ΐνα (Ις φανΐρον ίΧθη, Mk. iv. 22 ; αλλ*
(sc. κρατ(Ίτί μ() ΐκα etc. Mk. xiv. 49; add, Jn. xv. 25;
1 Jn. ii. 19. b. the weakened ΐνα (see 2 above)
with the subjunc. (or indie, fut. [cf. 1 c]. Rev. xiv.
18 L Τ Tr AVII) denotes something which one
wishes to be doneb.v another, so that before the iva
a verb of commanding (exhorting, wishing) must
be mentally supplied, (or, as is commonly said, ic
forms a periphrasis for the imperative): iva
. . . (ηιθης τας χΐΐρας αντη, Mk. v. 23; η γννη ΐνα φόβητΜ
τοκ ("νδρα, Eph. ν. 33 ; Gal. ii. 10; add 2 Co. viii. Γ ; ΐνα άνα•
πανσωνται [LTTrWH -παησονται (see αναπαύω init.)],
Germ, sie sollen ruhen [A. V. that they may rest etc.].
Rev. xiv. 1 3 ; [perh. also Col. iv. 1 6, cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad
loc], (2 Mace. i. 9 ; Epict. ench. 23 (17) ; diss. 4, 1, 41 ;
among the earlier Greeks once so. Soph. O. C. 155; in
Latin, Cic. ad divers. 14, 20 'ibi ut sint omnia parata';
in Germ, stern commands: 'dass dugehest.'' ' dass du
nicht .•^diimest .' ' cf. W. § 48, 5 a. ; [B. 241 (208)]). c.
ΐνα without a verb following, — which the reader is left
to gather from the context ; thus vre must mentally sup-
ply• ίναγγ{\ιζύ>μ(θα, ίϋαγγίΧίζωνται in Gal. ii. 9, cf. W.
587 (546); [B. 394 (338)]; ΐνα κατά χάριν, sc. .τ', that
the promise may I"; a gift of grace, Ro. iv. 16 [W. 598
(556) ; B. 892 (336)] ; ΐνα άΚλοις ,'ν(σις sc. γίνηται, 2 Co.
viii. 13 [W. 586 (545) ; B. § 12», 22]; ΐνα sc. γίνηται, 1
Co. i. 31, unless preference be given there to an anaco-
luthon [W. 599 (557) ; B. 234 (201)] : ΐνα . . . καυχάαθω
for καυχάται- {ΐνα ώς άνθρωπος, sc. (ργάζ;ι, Epict. diss. 3,
28, 4.)
5. (Jenerallv "ιό stands first in the final sentence;
sometimes, however, it is preceded by those words in
which the main force of the sentence lies [W. 550 (511);
B. §151, 18] : Acts xix. 4; Ro. xi. 31 (join τω ύμίτΐρω
(•λ«ι ΐνα) ; 1 Co. ix. 15 fin. [R G] ; 2 Co. ii. 4 ; xii. 7 ; Gal.
ii. 10; TO \οιπί>ν ΐνα κτ\. 1 Co. vii. 29 Rec."= ^" L T.
Among N. T. writ. John uses this particle oftener, Luke
more rarely, than the rest; [on Jn.'s use see \V. 338
(317) .sq.; 461 (430); B. 286 (203) ; 244 (210) note;
§ 140, 10 and 12; on Luke's cf. B. 285 sq. (203)]. It
is not found in the Epistle of Jude. [For Schaeffer's
reff. to Grk. usage (and edd.) see the Lond. (Valpy's)
ed. of Stephanus s. v., col. 4488.]
iva τ(
805
lovBauK
tvo t£ [so L WH uniformly, also Tr exc. (by mistake?)
in Mt. xxvii. 46], and written unitedly ίνατΐ [so Rec." ^'
G Τ uniformly ; see W. § 5, 2] ; Lat. ut quid f i. e.for what
purpose f whereforei tchi/? an elliptical formula, due to
the fact that a questioner begins an answer to bis own
iiuestion with the word ϊνα, but not knowing how to com-
plete it reverts again to the (juestion, as if to ask what
will complete the answer: that (^what?) may or miyht
liuppen, (ut (quid ?) fat or fierel) ; see Henn. ad Vig. p.
«47; Kuhner § 587, 5 ii. p. 1020; W. § 25, 1 fin.; [B.
§ 149, 2] : Mt. Vi. 4 ; xxvii. 46 ; Lk. xiii. 7 ; Acts iv. 25;
vii. 26 ; 1 Co. x. 29. Add, from the Sept., Gen. iv. 6 ;
XXV. 32; xxvii. 46; Num. xiv. 3 ; .xxii. 32 [Aid.] ; Judg.
vi. 13[Ale.\.,Ald.,Compl.]; IS. i. 8; 2S. iii. 24; xv. 19;
Job iii. 12; x. 18; Jer. ii. 29; .xiv. 19; xv. 18; Dan. x.
20 [Theodot.] ; Ps. ii. 1 ; x. 1 (ix. 22) ; .x.xi. (xxii.) 2,
etc.; Sir. xiv. 3 ; 1 Mace. ii. 7. (Arstph., nub. 1192;
Plat. apol. c. 14 p. 26 c; al.)*
ΊόιπΓη (to which com. spelling the ancient lexicogra-
phers prefer Ίόττη, cf. Movers, Phbnizier, ii. 2 p. 176
Anm.),-i)E, ή, (Hebr. 13; i. e. beauty, fr. ns^ to shine, be
beautiful; [al. make the name mean 'an eminence'; al.
al.]), Joppa, a city of Palestine on the Mediterranean,
lying on the border of the tribes of Dan and Ephraim.
It was subject to the .Tews from the time of the Macca-
bees. It had a celebrated but dangerous port and car-
ried on a flourishing trade ; now Yufa (not Jaffa) : Acts
ix. 36, 38, 42 sq. ; x. 5, 8, 23, 32 ; xi. 5, 13. Cf. 117/1. RWB.
β. V. Joppe ; Ruelschi in Ilerzog vii. p. 4 sq. ; Fritzsche
in Schenkel iii. 376 sq.; [BB.DD.].*
'Ιορδάνη;, -ου [Β. 17], ό [cf. W. § 18, 5 a.], (ρΎ_, fr. ΠΊ;
to descend ; for other opinions about the origin of the
name see Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 626 [cf. Alex.'sKitto s. v.
Jordan]), the Jonian, the largest and most celebrated
river of Palestine, which has its origin in numerous tor-
rents and small streams at the foot of Anti-Lebanon,
flows at first into Lake Samochonitis {Mnrom soKialled ;
[mod. el-HMeh; see BB.DD. s. v. Merom (Waters of)]),
and issuing thence runs into the Lake of Tiberias (the
Sea of Galilee). After quitting this lake it is augmented
during its course by many smaller streams, and finally
empties into the Dead Sea : Mt. iii. 5 sq. 13 ; iv. 1.5, 25 ;
xix. 1 ; Mk. i. 5, 9 ; iii. 8 ; x. 1 ; Lk. iii. 3 ; iv. 1 ; Jn. i. 28 ;
iii. 26 ; X. 40 ; cf . Win. RWB. [and BB.DD.] s. v. -Jordan ;
Arnold in Herzog vii. p. 7 sqq. ; Furrer in Schenkel iii.
p. 378 s(iq. ; \_Rohinsoti, Phys. Geogr. of the Holy Land,
pp. 144-186].•
Ws, -oO, 0, (on its very uncert. deriv. see Kreussler in
Passow s. v.; Curtius § 591 ; [Vanicek p. 9G9]) ; 1.
poison (of animals) : I'of ααττϋων imo τα χ(ίλη αυτών, the
poison of asps is under their hps, spoken of men given to
reviling and calumniating and thereby injuring others,
Ro. iii. 13 (fr. Ps. cxxxix. (cxl.) 3 (4)) ; by the same fig.
(γλώσσα) μ^στη Ιοϋ θανατηφόρου, Jas. iii. 8 ; (in Grk. writ,
fr. Pind. down). 2. rust : Jas. v. 3 ; (Ezek. xxiv.
6. 11 sq. ; Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer.] 11 (12), 23 (24) ; Theogn.,
Theocr., Plat., Theophr., Polyb., Lcian., al.).*
'lovSa, (see 'loiSas, init. and 1), indecl., Judah, a prop.
name ; in Sept. 1. the fourth son of the patriarch
Jacob. 2. the tribe that sprang from him. 3.
the region which this tribe occupied (cf.W. 114 (108)); so
in the N. T. in Mt. ii. 6 (twice) ; πόλΐΓ 'loiba (Judg. xvii.
8), a city of the tribe of Judah, Lk. i. 39, where it is a
matter of dispute what city is meant ; the most probable
conjecture seems to be that Hebron is referred to, — a
city assigned to the priests, situated ' in the hill country '
(\(βρών iv τω opti Ίοΰ&α, .Tosh. x.xi. 11), the native place
of John the Baptist ace. to Jewish tradition. [Cf. B. D.
Am. ed. s. v. Juda, a City of.] *
'Ιουδαία, -at, ή [cf. W. § 18, 5 a.], (sc. γή, which is added
Jn. iii. 22, or χώρα, Mk. i. 5 ; fr. the adj. Ίουδαίοί, q. v.),
Judtea (Hebv. ΠΙ^Π") ; in the O. T. a region of Palestine,
named after the tribe of Judah, which inhabited it:
Judg. xvii. 7-9 ; Ruth i. 1 sq. ; 2 S. ii. 1, etc. Its bound-
aries are laid down in Josh. xv. 1 sqq. After the time
of David, when the kingdom had been rent asunder, the
name was given to the kingdom of Judah, to which were
reckoned, besides the tribes of Judah and Benjamin, cer-
tain cities of the tribes of Dan and Simeon, together with
the metropolis of Jerusalem : 1 K. xiv. 21, 29 ; xv. 7, etc.
In the N. T. the name is given 1. in a narrower
sense, to the southern part of Palestine lying on this side
of the Jordan and the Dead Sea, to distinguish it from
Samaria, Galilee, Peraa, Idumaea (Mk. iii. 8) : Mt. ii. 1,
5,22; iii. 5 ; iv. 25; xxiv. 16; !Mk. iii. 7 ; xiii. 14; Lk. ii.
4 ; Jn. iv. 3, 47, 54 ; Acts i. 8; viii. 1, etc. ; it stands for
its inhabitants in Mt. iii. 5 ; Mk. i. 5, (2 Chr. xxxii. 33 ;
XXXV. 24). 2. in a broader sense, to all Palestine :
Lk. i. 5; [iv. 44 WH Trmrg.] ; vii. 17; xxiii. 5; Acts ii.
9; .X. 37; xi. 1, 29, (and perh. 2 Co. i. 16; Gal. i. 22);
πάσα η χώρα της Ιουδαίας, Acts xxvi. 20 ; els τα όρια της
Ιουδαίας ττίραντοϋ Ιορδανού, into the borders of Judaea (in
the broader sense) beyond the Jordan, i. e. into Periea,
Mt. xix. 1 ; on the contrary, in the parallel pass. Mk. x.
1 R G, fit τα όρ. της Ίουδ. δια toC πίραν τοϋ Ίορδ., Jesus is
said to have come into the borders of Judaa (in the nar-
rower sense) through Percea ; but ace. to the reading of
L Τ Tr WH, viz. κα\ πίραν τοϋ Ίυρδ. and (in particular
that part of .Juda-a which lay) beyond the Jordan, Mark
agrees with Matthew; [others regard πίραν τοϋ Ίορδ.
here as parall. with της Ίουδ. and like it dependent upon
Spta^.
Ίο«8αίζω ; (fr. Ιουδαίο?, cf. Ελληνιστής [W. 92 (87)]),
to adopt Jewish rustoms and rites, imitate the Jews, Juda-
ize : of one who observes the ritual law of the Jews, Gal.
ii. 14. (Esth. viii. 1 7 ; Ignat. ad Magnes. 10, 3 ; Evang.
Nicod. c. 2 ; Pint. Cic. 7 ; to favor the Jews, Joseph, b. j.
2,18,2.)•
Ίουδαϊκόϊ, -ή, -όν, Jewi.ih : Tit. i. 14. (2 Mace. viii. 11 ;
xiii. 21 ; Joseph, antt. 20, 11, 1 ; Philo [in Flac. § 8].) *
Ίουδαϊκώβ, adv., Jewi.shly, after the manner of the Jews:
Gal. ii. 14. [(.Joseph, b. j. 6, 1, 3.)]*
'Ιουδαίοι, -αι'α, -αΐοκ, (Ιούδα), [ Aristot. (in Joseph, c. Ap.
1, 22, 7 where see Miiller), Polyb., Diod., Strab., Plut.,
al. ; Sept. ; (cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.)], Jewish ; a. joined to
nouns, belonging to the Jewish race : άνηρ, .\ct8 x. 28 ; xxii.
ΊουΒαϊσμόί
306
Ίο'α
3, (Ι Mace. ii. 23); άνΰρωΠΌΐ, Aci,3 xxi. 89; ψ-ίυδοπρο-
φήτη!, Acts xiii. G ; άρχκρ^νί, Acts xix. 14 ; γυνή, Acts
xvi. 1 ; xxiv. 24; γή, .In. iii. ■_'2; χώρα, ilk. i. 5. b.
without a iiouu, substantively, Jewish as respects birth,
race, religion; a Jew. Jn. iv. 9; Acts xviii. 2, 24 ; Ro. ii.
28 sq. ; plur., Kev. ii. 9 ; iii. 9 ; o! "Ιουδαίοι (D'lin", be-
fore the exile citizens of the kiiiyduiii ufJaduh ; after the
exile all the Israelites [cf. Wright in B.U. s. v. Jew]), the
Jews, the Jewish race : Mt. ii. 2 ; xxvii. 11, 29 ; Mk. vii.
3 ; XV. 2 ; Jn. ii. 6 ; iv. 22 ; v. 1 ; xviii. 33, etc. ; Ιουδαίοι
T( κηΐ "Ελληιια, Acts xiv. 1 ; xviii. 4 ; xL\. 10 ; 1 Co. i. 24 ;
'Ιουδαίοι re κα'ι προσήλντοι, Acts ii. 11 (10); ίθ^η τ( καί
Ιουδαίοι, Acts xiv. ΰ ; sing., Κο. i. 16 ; ii. 9 ; οϊ κατά τα
ίθνη 'Ιουδαίοι, who live in foreign lands, among the (rcn-
tiles. Acts xxi. 21 ; Ιουδαίοι is used of converts from
Judaism, Jewish Christians (see tBi/os, 5) in Gal. ii. 13.
[Syn. Έ3ραΐο5, 'Ιουδαίο?, Ίσραηλίτ7)$: " restricting our-
selves to the employment of tliese tliree words in tlie N. T. we
may8.iyth.it in the first is preilomiuautly noted language;
in the second, nationality; in the third (the augustest title
of all), theocratic privileges and glorious vocation"
(Trench § xxxix.); cf. B.D. s. vv. Hebrew, fcraehte, Jew.]
The apostle John, inasmuch as agreeably to the state
of things in his day he looked ujinn the Jews as a body
of men hostile to Christianity, witli whom he had come
to see that both he and all true Christians had nothing
in common as respects religious matters, even in liis
record of the life of Jesus not only himself makes a dis-
tinction bet\veen the Jews and Jesus, but ascribes to
Jesus and his apostles language in which they distin-
guish themselves from the Jews, as though the latter
sprang from an alien r.ace : Jn. xi. 8 ; xiii. 33. And
those who (not only at Jerusalem, but also in Galilee, cf.
vi. 41, 52) opposed his divine Master and his Master's
cause, — esp. the rulers, priests, members of the .Sanhe-
drin, Pharisees, — he does not hesitate to style oi Ίου-
βαίοι, since the hatred of these leaders exhibits the
hatred of the whole nation towards Jesus : i. 19 ; ii. 18,
20; v. 10, 15s(i. 18; vi. 41, 52 ; vii. 1, 11, 13; ix. 18, 22;x.
24, 31,33; xviii. 14. [Cf. B.D. s. v. Jew ; Franlce, Stel-
lung d. Johannes z. V'olke d. alt. Bundes. (llalle, 1882).]
Ιου8αΐσ-μό;, -oO, o, {Ιουδαίζω), the Jewish faith and wor-
ship, the rclii/ion of the Jews, Judaism: Gal. i. 13 sq.
(2 Mace. ii. 21, etc. ; cf. Grimm, Com. on 2 Mace. p. 61.
[B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Judaism].) *
"loiSas, -a, dat. -a, ace. -αϊ», [Β. 20 (18)], S, (ΉΊλη], fr.
the Hoph. of r\T, praised, celebrated; see Gen. .xxix.
35), Judah or Judas (see below) ; 1. the fourth son
of the patriarch .lacob : Mt. i. 2 sq. ; Lk. iii. 33 ; Rev. v.
5 ; vii. 5 ; by meton., the tribe of Judah, the descendants
of .Judah: Heb. vii. 14; 6 οΊκος Ιούδα, citizens of the
kingdomof Judah, IIeb.viii.8. 2. Judah {or Judas)
an unknown ancestor of Christ : Lk. iii. 26 R G L. 3.
another of Christ's ancestors, equally unknown : Lk. iii.
30. 4. Judas surnamed the Galilcean, a man who
at the time of the census under Quirinus [better Quiri-
nius], excited a revolt in Galilee: Acts v. 37 (Joseph,
antt. 18, 1, 1, where he is called ό rauXai/i'j-ijs because he /
came from the city Gamala, near the Lake of Galilee in
lower (iaulanitis; but he is called also ό Γαλιλαίοί by
Joseph, antt. 18, 1, 6 ; 20, 5, 2 ; b. j. 2, 8, I). 5. [Ji<-
ilas] a certain .lew of Damascus: Acts ix. 11. 6.
Jwlas surnamed 'Ισκαριώτη: (q. v.), of Carioth (from the
city of Kerioth, .Josh. .xv. 25 ; Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 41 ; Amos
ii. 2; [but see BB.DD. s. v. Kerioth]; some codd. in .In.
vi. 71 [cf. Tdf.'s note in loc.] ; xii. 4, read άπ6 Καριώτου
instead of Ίσκαριώττ^ί), the son of one Simon (who in
Jn. vi. 71 LTTrWll; xiii. 26 Τ TrWIl, is himself sur-
named Ισκαριώτης), one of the apostles of Jesus, who
betrayed him : -Mt. x. 4 ; xxvi. 14, 25, 47 ; xxvii. 3; ]\Ik.
iu.l9; xiv. 10,43; Lk.vi.l6; xxii. 3, 4 7 Sij. ; Jn.vi.71;
xii. 4 ; xiii. 2, 26, 29 ; xviii. 2 sq. 5 ; Acts i. 16, 25. Mat-
thew (xxvii. 5), Luke (Acts i. 18), and Papias [cf. WeniU
in Meyer's Apostelgesch. 5te Aufl. p. 23 note] in a frag,
quoted by Oecum. on Acts i. 18 differ in the account of
his death, [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v.] ; on his avarice cf.
Jn. .xii. 6. 7. Judas, surnamed Barsabas [or iJar-
sabbas, see the word], a prophet of the church at Jeru-
salem: Acts XV. 22, 27, 32. 8. Judas, an apostle,
Jn. xiv. 22, who is called Ίοΰδαί Ιακώβου in Lk. vi. 16;
Acts i. 13 (see Ιάκωβο:, 4), and, as it should seem, was
surnamed Lebbceus or Thaddaus (see Qahha'ios). Ac-
cording to the opinion of the church he wrote the Epistle
of Jude. 9. Judas, the brother of our Lord : Mt.
xiii. 55 ; Mk. vi. 3, and very probably Jude 1 ; see Ιάκω-
βος, 3.•
'lovXCa, -at, ή, Julia, a Christian woman [cf. Bp. Lghtft.
on Philip, p. 177] : Ro. xvi. 15 [Lmrg. Ίουκιαν].*
ΊοΟλιοϊ, -ου, 6, Julius, a Roman centurion : Acts xxvii.
1,3.•
'IcuvCas [al. -Mat, as contr. fr. Junianus ; cf. W. 102 sq.
(97)], -a [but cf. B. 17sq. (16)], ό, /«niVis, a convert from
Judaism, Paul's kinsman and fellow-prisoner : Ro. xvi. 7
[(here A. V. Junia (a woman's name) which is possi-
ble). The name occurs again as the name of a Christian
at Rome in Ro. xvi. 15 Lchm.mrg. (where al. Ίουλίαι/).]•
Ίοΰσ -Tos, -ου, ό, Justus [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. U],
the surname 1. of Jose/)/;, a convert from Judaism,
who was also surnamed Barsabas [better Barsabbas q.
v.] : Acts i. 23. 2. of Titus, a Corinthian [a Jew-
ish proselyte] : Acts xviii. 7. 3. of a certain Jesus,
[a Jewish Christian] : Col. iv. 11.*
ΙτπΓίύϊ, -io)t, 6, {miTos), a horseman : Acts xxiii. 23, 32.
[From Horn, down.]*
iinriKOs, -ή, -όν, equestrian ; τό Ίππικάν, the horse (-men),
cavalri/: Rev. ix. 16 (as Ildt. 7, 87 ; Xen., Plat., Polyb.,
al. ; more fully τό ίππικΙ>ν στράτιυμα, Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 26 ;
so TO πίζικόν, the foot (-forces), infantry, Xen. Cyr. 5, 3,
38).•
tinros, -ου, ό, [Curtius § 624; Peile, Grk. and Lat•
Etymol., Index s. v.], a horse : .las. iii. 3 ; Rev. vi. 2, 4 sq.
8; ix. 7, 9, 17, [19 GLTTrΛVH] ; xiv. 20; xviii. 13; xix.
11-21. [From Horn, down.]*
tpis, -i&ot, ή, (Iris), a rainbow : Rev. iv. 3 ; x. 1. (Horn.,
Aristot., Theophr., al.) *
Ίο-οάκ. ό. indecl. (ρηΤ., fr. ρπΧ to laugh : Gen. xxi. 9;
ισάγγ^λοϊ
307
ίστημι
χνϋ. 1 7 ; in Joseph. Ίσακος, -ου), Isaac, the son of Abra-
ham by Sarah: Mt. i. 2 ; viii. 11; xxii. 32; Ro. ix. 7, 10;
Gal. iv. 28 ; Heb. xi. 9, 17 sq. 20; Jas. ii. 21, etc.
1<Γάγγ€λθ5, -ov, (ίσοί and a-yycXos, formed like laoBfOS
[cf. ίσάδελφοί (Eur. Or. 101.JJ, Ισάστιροί (4 Mace. xvii.
5), and other compounds in Koumanuudes, Συναγωγή κτλ.
p. 166 sq.]), like the angels: Lk. xx. 36. (Eccl. writ.;
[cf. ίσος άγγf\oιt γίγονώί, Philo de sacr. Ab. et Cain. § 2 ;
W. § 34, 3 cf. p. 100 (95)].) *
Ίσαίτχάρ [Rec."^] and Ίσαχάρ [R" G L] [ΊσσιΙχαρ
Tdf., Ίσσαχάρ TrWH),o, (Jtyc>p\, fr. t^'. there is, and
13ty a reward [(cf. Jer. xxxi. 16) yet cf. Miihlau u. Volck
s. v.] ; Joseph. Ίσάσχαρκ ["Icraj^apts^), Issachar, the son
of the patriarch Jacob by Leah (Gen. xxx. 18) : Rev.
vii. 7.*
ϋσημι, found only in the Doric form Χσαμι, to know,
from which some derive the forms lore and ϊσμιν, con-
tracted from Ίσατί and ϊσαμ(ν; but these forms are more
correctly derived from Είδω, 'ίσμ^ι/ i. q. 18μ^ν, etc., (cf.
Blliii. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 548) ; on the phrase 'ίστ( [RcVre]
γινύύσκοντζς-, Kph. v. 5, see γινώσκω, I. 2 b.
Ίο-καριώτη5, and (Lchm. in Mt. x. 4 ; Τ WH in Mk.
xiv. 10 ; L Τ Tr WH in Mk. iii. 19 ; Lk. vi. 16) Ίσκαριώθ,
i. e. ni'")p ϋ'ϋ ; see 'loiSat, 6 and 2ιμωι/, 5.
£<ros (not ισο£ [yet often so R"'«'» G Tr], which is Epic ;
cf. Bornemann, SchoUa in Luc. p. 4 ; Gottling, Lehre
vom Accent p. 305 ; [Chandler § 406] ; Lipsius, Gram-
mat. Untersuch. p. 24 ; [L. and S. s. v. fin. ; W. 52]), -η,
-ov, equal, in quaUty or in ijuantity : ή 'ίση δωριά, the same
gift. Acts xi. 17; 'ίσαι μαρτνρίαι, agreeing testimonies,
Mk. xiv. 56, 59 ; 'ίσον ποιύν τικά τινι, to make one equal
to another, in the payment of wages, Mt. xx. 12 ; ίαντον
τώ θ(ώ, to claim for one's self the nature, rank, author-
ity, which belong to God, Jn. v. 1 8 ; τα 'ίσα άπολαβιϊν, Lk.
vi. 34. The neuters ίσον and ϊσα are often used adver-
bially fr. Horn, down (cf. Passow s. v. p. 1505"; [L. and
S. s.'v. IV. I] ; W. § 27, 3 fin.) : ϊσα elvai (B. § 129, 11),
of measurement. Rev. xxi. IG ; of state and condition, τώ
θιω, Phil. ii. 6 (on which see in μορφή).*
ίσ-ότη5, -TjTos, ή, (ϊσοί) ; 1. equality : ΐξ Ισότητος
[cf. ex, V. 3] by equaUty, 2 Co. viii. 13 (14), i. q. όπως
γίνηται Ισότης, 14. 2. equilij, fairness, what is equi-
luhle, joined with to δίκαιον: Col. iv. 1. (Eur., Plat.,
Aristot., Polyb., al. ; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c, yet per
contra Meyer].) *
1(ΓΟτιμο9, -ov, {'σος and τιμή), equallij precious ; equalbj
honored : tiki, to be esteemed equal to, Ισότιμον ήμ'ιν
πίστίν [η like precious failh with «.<], concisely for πίστιν
Tfi ήμων πίστα ισότιμον [W. § 66, 2 f . ; Β. § 133, 10]: 2
Pet. i. 1. (Philo, Joseph., Plut., Lcian., Ael., al.) *
Ισό\|Γυχο5, -ov, (ίσος and ■^νχή), equal i/i soul [A. V.
like-minded], (Vulg. unanimus) : Phil. ii. 20. (Ps. liv.
(Iv.) 14 ; Aeschyl. Ag. 1470.) *
'Ισραήλ (Joseph. Ίσράηλος, -ου), ό, indecl., (Sx")!?', fr.
Sx and mty, wrestler with God, Gen. xxxii. 28 ; Hos. xii.
4, cf. Gen. xxxv. 10), Israel, a name given to the pa-
triarch Jacob (and borne by him in addition to his former
name from Gen. xxxii. 28 on) : ό οΓκοϊ Ισραήλ, the family
or descendants of Israel, the race of Israel [A. V. the
house of Israel], Mt. x. 6 ; xv. 24 ; Acts vii. 42, (Ex.. xvi.
31 ; IS. vii. 2, and often) ; oi υίοϊ Ίσρ. the [sons i. e. the
children, the] posterity of Israel, Lk. i. 16; Acts v. 21;
vii. 23, 37 ; Ro. ix. 27 ; a'l φυλα'ι τοΟ Ίσρ., Mt. xix. 28 ;
Lk. xxii. 30 ; Rev. vii. 4. By melon, for the posterity of
Israel i. e. the Israelites (a name of esp. honor because
it made reference to the promises of salvation through
the Messiah, which were given to Jacob in preference
to Esau, and to be fulfilled to his posterity [see Ιουδαίος,
b.]): Mt. ii. 6; viii. 10; ix. 33 ; Lk. i. 54, 68, 80 ; Acts
iv. 8[RG]; Eph. ii. 12; Ro. .\i. 2, 7, 26, etc. (Ex. v. 2 ;
xi. 7, and often) ; ό λαό? Ίσρ., Acts iv. 10, 27 ; y^ Ίσρ.
i. e. Palestine [(1 S. .xiii. 19, etc.)], Mt. ii. 20 sq. ; βασι-
λεύς Ίσρ-, Mt. xxvii. 42 ; Jn. i. 49 (50) ; ή (λπις τοϋ Ίσρ.
Acts xxviii. 20; ό Ίσρ. τοϋ θ(οϋ (gen. of possession), i. e.
Christians, Gal. vi. 16; ό Ίσρ. κατά σάρκα, IsraeUtes by
birth, i. e. Jews, 1 Co. x. 18 ; in an emphat. sense, οϋ γαρ
πάντες οΊ (ξ Ίσρ. κτλ. for not all those that draw their
bodily descent from Israel are true Israelites, i. e. are
those whom God pronounces to be IsraeUtes and has
chosen to salvation, Ro. ix. 6.
'Ισραηλίτη? (Τ WH Ίσρα?)λίί7-7;Γ, Tr only in Jn. i. 47
(48) ; [see Tdf. Proleg. p. 86, and cf. s. v. «, i] ), -ov, ό,
{'Ισραήλ, q. v.), an Israelite (Hebr. 'Sx'liy' ; Sept. Ίεζραψ
λίτης, 2 S. xvii. 25), one of the race of Israel, a name
held in honor (see Ισραήλ) : Jn. i. 47 (48) ; Ro. ix. 4 ;
xi. 1 ; 2 Co. .xi. 22 ; άνδρες Ίσραηλΐται [W. § 65, 5 d. ; B.
82 (72)], Acts ii. 22; iii. 12; v. 35; xiii. 16; [xxi. 28],
(4 Mace, xviii. 1 ; Joseph, antt. 2, 9, 1). [Cf. B. D. (Am.
ed.) s. V. Syn. see Ιουδαίος, b.] *
[Ίσσάχαρ, Ίσσα;^άρ, see Ίσασχάρ.]
ϊστημι, more rarely ίστάω ([(fr. Hdt. down ; cf. Veitch
s. V.)] ίστωμεν, Ro. iii. 31 RG) and Ίστάνω ([(late; cf.
Veitch s. V.)] ίστάνομεν, Ro. iii. 31 LT TrAVH), [cf. B.
44 (38) sq. ; W. § 14, If.; 87 (83) ; WH. App. p. 168 ;
Veitch p. 337 sq.] ; fut. στήσω; 1 aor. έστησα; 2 aor. εστην,
impv. στήθι, inf. στήναι, ptcp. στάί; pf. εστηκα [with [ires.
force; AV. 274 (257)], inf. ίστάναι [R'i^"i>" G Tr -avM
in Acts xii. 14] (nowhere έστηκίναι), ptcp. masc. εστηκώς
with neut. «στι^κόί, and in the shorter form ίστώς, εστώσα
(Jn. viii. 9), with neut. ίστώς and (LTTr WH in Mt.
xxiv. 15 [here R" also]; Rev. xiv. 1) ί'στόί, (cf. Bllm.
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 208; [^Rutherford, Babrius p. 39 sq. ; W.
§ 14, 1 i. ; B. 48 (41)]) ; plupf. εΐστήκειν [(but WH uni-
formly ίστ.; see I, t) with force of impf. W. 274 (257)],
3 pers. plur. ε'ιστήκεισαν (Mt. xii. 46 ; Jn. xviii. 18 ; Acts
ix. 7 and L Τ Tr WH in Rev. vii. 11) and έστήκεσαν
(Rev. vii. 11 R G [cf. W. § 14, 1 a. ; yet B. 43 (38)]) ;
Pass., 1 aor. εστάθην ; 1 fut. σταθήσομαι ; 1 fut. mid. στήσο-
μαι (Rev. xviii. 15) ;
I. Transitively in the Pres., Impf., Fut., and 1
Aor. act.; likewise in the tenses of the Pass. [cf. B.
47 (41) contra W. 252 (237)], (Sept. for TOi-ri. Ο'ρΠ,
3'ΧΠ) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to cause or make to stand; to
place, put, set ; 1. univ. a. prop, τινά, to bid to
stand by, [set up] : Acts i. 23 ; vi. 13 ; in the presence of
others : tv μέσω, in the midst, Jn. τϋΐ. 3, and cv τω μέσω,
στί;/*4
308
t(rrope<u
Acts iv. 7 ; ('νώπιόν runs, Acts vi. 6 ; before judges : tU
avToii, before the meiubers of the Sanhedrin, Acts xxii.
30 ; fv τω συνι^ρίω. Acts v. 27 ; ίπί with gen. of the judge,
pass. σταθϊισ(σθ(, Jlk. xiii. 9 ; Τ4να ύμωμον κατινώπιόν
rims, to [set one i. c] cause one to make his appearance
faultless before etc. Jude 24 ; lo place {\. e. designate
the place for one to occupy) : «V μίσω τινών, Mt. xviii. 2 ;
Mk. ix. 31) ; παρ ίαυτώ, I-k. ix. 47 ; « 8(ζίών, Mt. xxv. 33 ;
t'lri Ti (ace. of j)lace), Jit. iv. 5 ; I.k. iv. 9. Mid. to place
one's self, lo sland (Germ, sick hinslellen, hinlreten) : άπο
μακρόθ(ν. Rev. xviii. 15 ; likewise in the passive : σταθιίς,
Lk. xviii. U, 40; xix. f; [ίστάβησαν σκυθρωποί tlici/ si ood
stUl, looking sad, Lk. xxiv. 1 7 Τ WII Tr txt. (cf. II. 1 b.
β.)'] ; Acts ii.l4 ; xi. 13 ; Avith iv μίσω τίνός, τίνων, added,
Acts xvii. 22; xxvii. 21 ; στηθίντα, when they had ajn
peared (before the judge), Acts xxv. 18. p. trop. lo
make firm, Jix, establish : n, τινά, lo cause a pers. or ihiiKj
to keep his or its place ; pass, to stand, be kept intact (of
a family, a kingdom) : Mt. -xii. 25 sq. ; Lk. xi. 18 ; i. q. lo
escape in safely. Rev. vi. 1 7 ; with ϊμπροσθ^ν του υΐοΰ τοϋ
άνθρ. added, Lk. xxi. 36 ; στησαίτινα, to cause one to pre-
serve a right state of mind, Ro. xiv. 4 [see Aleyer] ;
pais. σταίΐ)σεται, shall be made to stand, i. e. shall be
kept from falling, ibid. τι, to establish a thintj, cause it
to sland, i. e. to uphold or sustain the aulhorily or force of
any thing : Heb. -x. 9 (opp. to avaipe'iv) ; την παράίοσιν,
Mk. vii. 9 ; την ιδίαν δικαιοσ•. Ro. χ. 3 ; τον νύμον (opj). to
καταργώ), Ro. iii. 31, (τοι» ορκον. Gen. xxvi. 3 ; την διαθή-
κην, Ex. vi. 4 ; 1 Mace. ii. 27). i. q. to ratify, confirm :
σταθή, σταθήσ(ται παν ρήμα, Mt. xviii. 16 ; 2 Co. xiii. 1.
to appoint, [cf. coUuip Eng. set}: ήμίραν, Acts xvii. 31 ;
cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. iv. 59. 2. lo set or place in
a balance; to weigh : money to one (because in very early
times, before the introduction of coinage, the metals used
to be weighed) i. e. lo pay, Mt. xxvi. 15 (so in Grk. writ.
fr. Horn, down ; cf. Passow s. v. p. ISOS' ; [L. and S. s. v.
A. IV.] ; Sept. for ^Οψ, Is. xlvi. 6 ; Jer. xxxix. (x.xxii.)
9 sq. ; Zecb. xi. 12 ; 2 Esdr. viii. 25 sq. ; etc.) ; this fur-
nishes the explanation of the jihrase μη στήση! airnls την
άμαρτίαν ταϋτην, do not reckon to them, call them to ac-
count for, this sin [A. V. lay not this sin lo their charge}.
Acts vii. 60 [(cf. Meyer ad loc.)].
n. Intransitively in the Perf. and Plupf. (hav-
ing the sense of a pres. and an impf. [see above]), also
in 2 A or. act., lo sland; Sept. for 3iJ, ^?>',, D'p? 1•
prop. a. foil, by prepositions or adverbs of place :
foil, by fv w. dat. of place [ef. B. 329 (283)], Mt. vi. 5 ;
XX. 3; xxiv. 15; Lk. xxiv. 36; Jn. viii. 9 ; xi. 56 ; Acts
T. 25 ; vii. 31! [L Τ Tr WII t jri w. dat.] ; Rev. v. 6 ; xix.
17 ; ΐνώπιόν nvos. Acts x. 00 ; Rev. vii. 9 ; viii. 2 ; xi. 4 ;
xii. 4 ; πμΟ! w. dat. of place, Jn. xviii. 16 ; «πί Λν. gen.
of place (Germ, auf, upon), Lk. vi. 17; Acts .\xi. 40;
Rev. x. 5, 8 ; w. gen. of the judge or tribunal, before [cf.
cTri, A. L 2 b.], Acts xxiv. 20 ; xxv. 10 ; πΐραν with gen.
of place, Jn. vi. 22 ; rrpri, Acts v. 23 [R G ; but L Τ Tr WII
tVl των θυρών (at, Germ, an ; cf. above and see eVi, A. I.
2 a.)] ; xii. 14 ; ΐμπροσθϊν tivos, before one as judge, Mt.
xxvii. 11 ; κύκλω (τικογ), around, Rev. vii. 11 ; pea-os υμών.
in the midst of you, living among you, Jn. i. 26 ; cV ίιξιώ*
TiTOf, Lk. i. 1 1 ; Acts vii. 55 stp ; iv μ<σ&>, Jn. viii. 9 ; πρό(
w.acc. ((i LTTr WII w.dat. [seewpot, II.]) of place, Jn.
XX. 11 ; iπΊ w. ace. of place (see ini, C. I.), Mt. xiii. 2;
Rev. iii. 20 ; vii. 1 ; xiv. 1 ; xv. 2 ; «Vi τους πό^αί, to stand
upright. Acts x.xvi. 16 ; Rev. xi. 1 1 ; παρά vf. ace, Lk. v.
2 ; vii. 38 ; «it, Jn. xxi. 4 (L Ϊ Tr mrg. WII mrg. «Vi [see
iπi, C. I. 1 d.]) ; ixfi, Jit. xxvii. 4 7 ; Mk. xi. 5 ; Jas. ii. 3 ;
iSf, Jit. xvi. 28; XX. G; Mk. ix. 1 ; Lk. ix. 27 [here TTr
Wll αίτοΟ, q. V.]; όπου, Μ k. xiii. 14; «^ω, Mt. xii. 46, 47
[here WII in mrg. only]; Jlk. iii. 31 ; Lk. viii. 20; xiii.
25; ^laKpuifv, Lk. xviii. 13; xxiii. 49 [RG Trtxt.] ; ιϊπύ
μακρύθ(ν, Rev. xviii. 10, 17; [Lk. xxiii. 49 L Τ WII Tr
mrg. (butan-<5 in br.)] ; πόρρωθ(ν, Lk. xvii. 12. b. ab-
solutely; a. lo stand by, stand near, (m Ά ])lace al-
ready mentioned, so that the reader readily luiderstands
where): Mt. xxvi. 73; Jn. i. 35; iii. 29; vii. 37; xii. 29;
xviii. 18, 25 ; .\x. 14; Acts xvi. 9 ; xxii. 25; Avithaptcp.
or adj. (indicating the purpose or act or condition of
the one standing) : Mt. xx. 6 ; Lk. xxiii. 10 ; Acts i. 1 1 ;
ix. 7 ; xxvi. 6 ; opj). to καθίζ^ιν, Ileb. x. 11 sq. β. if what
is said to stand had been in motion (walking, (lowing,
etc.), to slop, stand still : Mt. ii. 9 (Rec. ϊστη, L Τ Tr WII
ίστάθη [cf. 1. 1 a.]) ; Mt. XX. 32 ; Mk. X. 49 ; Lk. viii. 4Λ ;
Acts viii. 38. γ. contextually, to sland immovable, sland
firm, of the foundation of a building : 2 Tim. ii. 19. 2.
metaph. a. to sland, i. e. conlinue safe and sound,
stand unharmed : Acts xxvi. 22. b. to stand ready or
prepared: with a ptcp., Eph. vi. 14. c. to be of a
steadfast mind; so in the maxim in 1 Co. x. 12. d.
foil, by a ptcp. of quality. Col. iv. 12 ; os ϊστηκιν iSpinos,
who does not hesitate, does not waver, 1 Co. vii. 37 ; in
a fig., of one who vancpiishes his adversaries and holds
the ground, Eph. vi. 13 ; also of one vvho in the midst of
the fight holds his position προς τίνα, against the foe,
Eph. vi. 11, (cf. Ex. xiv. 13 ; Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.) 13). In
persist, continue, persevere : τ^ πΐσ■τfι, dat. commodi (so
as not to fall from thy faith [al. take the dat. instru-
mentally, by thy faith ; cf. W. § 31, 6 c. ; B. § 133, 24]),
Ro. xi. 20 ; ίν τη άληθ(ία, Jn. viii. 44 (where the meaning
is, his nature abhors, is utterly estranged from, the truth;
Vulg. incorrectly, in verilale non stelil; Luther, iVinic/i/
beslanden [A. V. abode not etc.] ; but the Zurich version
correctly, heslehl nicht [WII read ΐστηκιν. inipf. of στήκω,
q. V.]) ; iv τη χάριτι, Ro. v. 2 ; iv τω (vayyi^im, 1 Co. xv.
1 ; fir ην (sc. χάριν) ίστή<ατ(, into which ye have entered,
that ye may stand fast in it, 1 Pet. v. 12 [but L Τ Tr WII
read στψ( (2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur.) enter and
standfast ; B. § 147, 16, cf. p. 329 (283)]. N. B. From
ίστηκα is formed the verb στήκω, which see in its place.
[CoMP. : av-, ίπ-αν-, i^-av-, άνθ-, αφ-, δι-, iv-, ίξ-, iV- (-μαι),
{'φ-, κατ-(φ-, συν-(φ-, καθ-, άντι-καθ-, άπο-καθ-, μ(θ-, παρ-,
πίρι-, προ•, συν-Ιστημι•}
Ιστορί'ω : 1 aor. inf. Ίστορησαι ; {'στωρ [allied with oiSa
(ίστω), videre (visus), etc. ; Curtius § 282], -opos, one
that has inquired into, knowing, skilled in) ; fr. Aeschyl.
and Ildt. down ; 1• to inquire into, examine, inves-
tigate. 2. lo find out, learn, by inquiry. 3. t-
ισχυροί;
809
Ιωάννη<:
gain knotcledge of hy visiting : sometliing (worthy of
being seen), την χώραν, Plut. Thes. 30 ; Pondp. 40 ; rti-a,
some distinguished person, to become personally ac-
quainted with, know face to face : Gal. i. 18 ; so too in
Joseph, antt. 1, 11, 4 ; b. j. 6, 1, 8 and often in the Clem.
homiUes; cf. Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief, p. 122 note; [El-
licott on (lal. 1. c.].*
Ισ-χυρ<55, -ά, -όν, (ίσχιΐω). [fr. Aeschyl. down], Sept.
mostly for Sx, "ii3j, pjn, Dli'>;, and Chald. =]'ρΐΊ; strong,
mighty; a. of living beings : strong either in body or in
mind, Mt. xii. 29 ; Mk. iii. 27 ; Lk. xi. 21 .--(j. ; Kev. v. 2 ; x.
1 ; xviii. 21 ; ΐνποΧίμω, mighty i. e. valiant, Heb. xi. 34, cf.
Rev. xix. 18 ; of one who has strength of soul to sustain
the assaults of Satan, 1 Jn. ii. 14 ; univ. strong, and
therefore exhibiting many excellences, 1 Co. iv. 10 (opp.
to άσθίνήί) ; compar., Mt. iii. 11 ; Mk. i. 7; Lk. iii. 16 ;
mighty, — of God, 1 Co. i. 25 ; Rev. xviii. 8, (Deut. x. 1 7 ;
2 Mace. i. 24, etc.) ; of Christ raised to the right hand of
God, 1 Co. X. 22 ; of those who wield great influence
among men by their rank, authority, riches, etc., τα ισχυρά
i. q. Tovs Ισχυρούς (on the neut. cf. W. § 27, 5), 1 Co. i. 27
(o! Ισχυροί της γης, 2 Κ. xxiv. 15) ; joined with πλούσιοι.
Rev. vi. 15 (Rec. oi Βυνατοί). b. of inanimate things :
strong i. q. violent, άν(μος, Mt. xiv. 30 [T WII om. Ισχΐ ;
forcibly uttered, φωνή. Rev. xviii. 2 [Rec. μfyά\η] (Ex.
xi.x. 19); κραυγή. Htb. v. 7; jSpoi/rai, Rev. xix. 6 ; λιμός,
great, Lk. xv. 14 ; (τηστοΧαί (stern, [forcible]), 2 Co. x.
10; strong i. q. /iVm, χιινβ,παράκΚησις, Heb. vi. 18; fitted
to withstand a forcible assault, πολκ, well fortified. Rev.
xviii. 10 (τ(ϊχος, 1 Mace. i. 33 ; Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 7 ; ηύργος,
Judg. ix. 51). [Cf. δΰναμίΓ. fin.] *
Ισχύϊ, -ύος, ή, (ϊσχω [allied w. ΐσχον; to hold in check]),
[fr. Hes. down], Sept. esp. for r\2, S'n, T>, ΓΤ^Ο:; abil-
ity, force, strength, might: 2Pet.ii. 11 (joined w.6wa;xit) ;
Rev. V. 12; vii. 12; το κράτος της Ισχύος, power (over ex-
ternal things) afforded by siranglli, Eph. i. 19 ; vi. 10,
(Is. xl. 2)) ; ή 8o'|a της Ισχ. (see δό|α, ΠΙ. 3 b. α. fin.),
2 Th. i. 9 ; κράζ(ΐν iv Ισχύιι, with strength, mightily. Rev.
xviii. 2 Rec. ; «ξ ισχύος, of one's strength, to the extent
of one's ability, 1 Pet. iv. 11 ; with όλης added, Mk. xii.
30, 33 ; Lk. x. 27 [here L txt. Τ Tr Λ\Ή read tv ολη τή
Ισχίί]. [Syn. see ίΰναμις, fin.]*
[(τχύω ; impf. ίσχυαν ; fut. Ισχύσω ; 1 aor. Ίσχυσα ;
(ισχύς) ; Sept. for ρίΠ, Ι'Πίί, Di'>;, etc. ; to be slrnng, i. e.
1. ti) be strong in body, to be robust, to he in sound health :
a'l ισχύοντας, as subst., Mt. ix. 1 2 ; Mk. ii. 1 7, (.Soph. Tr.
234 ; Xen. CjT. 6, 1, 24 ; joined with iytaiveiv, id. mem.
2, 7, 7). 2. to have power, [fr. Aeschyl. down], i. e.
a. to have a power evinced in extraordinary deeds, i. e.
to exert, wield, power: so of the gospel. Acts xix. 20;
Ilebraistically, to have strength to overcome : ουκ Ίσχυσαν,
[Α. V prevailed not i. e.] succumbed, were conquered,
(so h'3' N^, Gen. xxxii. 2G (25)), Rev. xii. 8; κατά TtKor,
against one, i. e. to use one's strength against one, to
treat him with violence. Acts xix. IG. b. i. q. to be
of force, avail (Germ, gelten) : Heb. ix. 1 7 ; τί. Gal. v. 6,
and Rec. in vi. 15. c. to be serviceable: t's τ» [A. V.
φΜχ/ for"], Mt. ▼. 13. d. foil, by inf. to be Me, can:
Mt. viii. 28 ; xxvi. 40 ; Mk. v. 4 ; [ix. 18 (inf. to be sup-
plied)]; xiv. 37; Lk. vi. 48; viii. 43; [.xiii. 24]; xiv. 6,29
sq.; xvi. 3; xx. 26; Jn. xxi. 6 ; Actsvi. 10; xv. 10; xxv.
7 ; xxvii. 16, (Plut. Pomp. 58). with ace, πάντα, Phil. iv.
13; πολύ, Jas. V. 16. [CoMP. : ΐν-,ϊξ-, ΐπ-,κατ-ισχύω.^'
lo-us, (ϊσοί, q. v.), adv., [fr. Soph, down] ; 1.
equally, in Hie manner. 2. agreeably to expecta-
tion, i. e. it may be, probably ; freq. an urbane expression
of one's reasonable hope (Germ, wohl, hoffentlich) : Lk.
XX. 13, and often in Attic writ.*
"ItoXCo, -as, η, Italy: Acts xviii. 2; xxvii. 1, 6; Heb.
xiii. 24.*
'Ιταλικό?, -ή, -Of, (Ιταλία), [fr. Plat, down], Italian :
σπίίρα Ιταλική, the Italian cohort (composed of Italian,
not provincial, soldiers). Acts x. 1 ; cf. Sckiirer, in the
Zeitschrift f. wissensch. Theol. for 1S75, p. 422 sqq. ;
[HacL-ett, in B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Italian Band].*
ΊτονραΙα, -or, ή, Ilurcea, a mountainous region, lying
northeast of Palestine and west of Damascus (Strabo
16 p. 756 §18; Plin.h. n. 5, (23) 19). Ace. to Luke (iii.
1) at the time when John the Baptist made his public
appearance it was subject to Philip the tetrarch, son of
Herod the Great, although it is not mentioned by Joseph,
(antt. 1 7, 8, 1 ; 1 1 , 4, 1 8 ; 4, 6 and b. j. 2, 6, 3) among the
regions assigned to this prince after his father's death ;
(on this point cf. Schurer in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch.
Theol. for 1877, p. 577 sq.). It was brought under Jew-
ish control by king Aristobulus c. B.C. 100 (Joseph, antt.
13, 11, 3). Its inhabitants had been noted for robbery
and the skilful use of the bow (Verg. geor. 2, 448 ; Cic.
Phil. 13, 8, 1« ; Strabo 16 p. 755 sq. ; Lucan, Phar. 7, 230,
514). Cf. Miinter, Progr. de rebus Ituraeorum, Hafn.
1824 ; Win. RAVB. s. v. Ituraea; Kneucker in Schenkel
iii. p. 406 sq. ; [B.D. Am. ed. s. v.].*
ίχθύ8ιον, -ου, το', (dimin. fr. ιχθύς), η little fsh : Mt. xv.
34 ; !Mk. viii. 7. [From Arstph. on.] *
Ιχβίϊ, -ύος, ό, [fr. Horn, down], a fsh : jMt. vii. 10; Mk.
vi. 38; Lk. v. 6; Jn. xxi. 11, etc.; 1 Co. xv. 39.
txvos, -fos (-out), TO, (fr. ΰω i. q. Ίκνίομαι, to go), [fr.
Horn, down], a footprint, track, footstep: in the N. T.
metaph., of imitating the example of any one, we find
στοιχύν τοΊς Χχνίσί τίνος, Ro. iv. 12; π^ριπατΐΐν τοις ιχν.
τ. 2 Co. xii. 18 ; ΐπιικολουθΰν τ. ίχν. τ(ΐ/. 1 Pet. ii. 21, (e'l'
ΐχν(σί τίνος ίον πόδα vipeiv, Pind. ^em. 6, 27) ; cf. Lat.
insistere vestigiis alicuius.'
Ίωάθαμ, [-θάμ WHl, ό, (ΠΠν i. e. Jehovah is perfect),
indecl., Jotham [A. V. (1611) Joatham^, king of Judah,
son of L'zziab, B.C. 758-7 to 741, or 759 to 743 : Mt. i. 9.*
"Ιωάννα [Tr Wll Ίωάνα ; cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 79 ; WH.
App. p. 159 ; s. v. N, v], -ης. ή, (seeΊωάw/7;5), Joanna, the
wife of Chuzas, Herod's steward, and a follower of Jesus :
Lk. viii. 3; xxiv. 10.*
Ίωαννάβ, -a, and (ace. to L Τ Tr WH) Ίωανάν, indecl.,
(see Ιωάννης), δ, Joannas [or Joanan"], one of the ances-
tors of Christ : Lk. iii. 27.*
'Ιωάννη? and ([so Wll uniformly, exc. in Acts iv. 6 ;
xiii. 5 ; Rev. xxii. 8] Tr in the Gospels of Lk. and Jn., [in
the Acts, exc. iv. 6] and the Rev. [exc. xxii. 8]) Ί<μι>%
Ίωάννηί
310
Ιωσης
[cf. Τ(ί/. Proleg. p. 79 ; WH. App. p. 159 ; Scrivener, Intr.
p. 562 (cf. s. V. N, k)], gen. -ου, tlat. -p and (in [Mt. xi.
4 ΛΥΙΙ ; Kev. i. 1 WII] ; Lk. vii. 18 Τ Tr WH, [22 Τ Tr
WH]-€»[cf. Π'//.Αρρ.ρ. 158; B.17 (16), 7J), ace. -i;v,
(5, (pni' and ΜΠΙΠ", to whom Jehovah is gracious, [al.
whom Jehovah has graciously given], Germ. Gutlhold;
Sept. Ίωαννάν [Tdf. Ίωανά»'], 1 Chr. iii. 24 ; Ίωνά, 2 Κ.
XXV. 23 ; Ίωάνη:, 2 Chr. .xxviii. 12, [cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v.
Johanan]), John ; in the N. T. the men of this name are,
1. John the Baptist, the son of Zacharias the priest and
EUsabeth, the forerunner of Christ. By order of Her-
od .\ntipas he was cast into prison and afterwards be-
headed : Mt. iii. 1 ; xiv. 3, and often in the histor. blcs.
of the X. T. ; Joseph, antt. 18, 5, 2, [B.D. Am. ed. s. v.
Machierus]. 2. John the apostle, the writer of the
Fourth Gospel, son of Zebedee and Salome, brother of
James the elder : Jit. iv. 21 ; x. 2 (3) ; Mk. i. 19 ; ix. 2,
38 ; Lk. V. 10 ; vi. 14 ; Acts i. 13, and often ; Gal. ii. 9.
He is that disciple who (without mention by name) is
spoken of in the Fourth Gospel as esp. dear to Jesus (Jn.
xiii. 23 ; xix. 26 ; xxi. 7, 20), and ace. to the traditional
opinion is the author of the Apocalypse, Rev. i. 1, 4, 9 ;
xxi. 2 Rec. ; xxii. 8. In the latter part of his life he had
charge of the churches in Asia Minor, and died there at a
very advanced age. That he never came into Asia Elinor,
but died in Palestine somewhat in years, the following
writers among others have attempted to prove, though by
considerations far from satisfactory : Liitzelberger, Die
kirchl. Tradition Ub. d. Ap. Johannes u. s. Schriften.
Lpz. 1840 ; Keim, i. p. 161 sqq. [Eng. trans, i. 218 sqq.] ;
Hottzmann in Schenkel iii. p. 332 sqq.; Scholten, Der
Ap. Johannes in Kleinasien. Aus. d. Holland, deutsch v.
Spiegel. Berl. 1872. On the other side cf., besides oth-
ers, Grimm in Ersch u. Gruber's Encyklop. 2d sect. vol.
xxii. p. 6 sqq. ; Steitz, Die Tradition Ub. die Wirksam-
keit des Joh. in Ephesus, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit.
for 1868, 3d Heft; Krenkel, Der Apost. Johannes. Berl.
1 868 ; Hilgenfeld in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for
1872,p. 372sqq., andfor 18 7 7, p. 508 sqq. ; [also Einl. in
d. N. T. p. 394 sqq.] ; Luthardt, Der johann. Ursprung
des4tenEvang. (Lpz. 1874) p. 93 sqq. [Eng. trans, p. 115
sqij. ; Godet, Commentaire etc. 3d ed. vol. i. Intr. 1. i. § iv.
p. 57 sqq. ; Bleel; Einl. in d. N. T. (ed. Mangold) p. 167
sqq. ; Fisher, The Beginnings of Christianity, p. 327
sqq.]. 3. the father of the apostle Peter : Tdf. in
Jn. i. 42 (43) and xxi. 15 sqq. (in both pass. R G Ίωνά, L
Tr λ\ Η Ίωάνου) [see Ίωι /as, 2]. 4. a certain man
eV ytvov! άρχκρατίκοϋ, a member of the Sanhedrin [cf.
apxieptis, 2] : Acts iv. 6. 5. John sumamed Mark,
the companion of Barnabas and Paul: Acts xii. 12, 25;
xiii. 5, 13 ; xv. 37, [Tr everywh. with one ν ; so WH exc.
in .xiii. 5]; see ΜάρκοΓ. 6. John, ace. to the testi-
mony of Papias in Euseb. h. e. 3, 39 [cf. Westcnit, Canon,
5th ed. p. 70], a disciple of Christ and afterwards a Chris-
tian presbyter in Asia Minor, whom not a few at the
present day, following the opinion of Dionysius of Alex-
andria [in Euseb. h. e. 7, 25] regard as the author of the
Apocalypse, and accordingly esteem him as an eminent
prophet of the primitive Christians and as the person
referred to in Rev. i. 1, 4, 9 ; .xxi. 2 Ree. ; .vxii. 8. Full
articles respecting him may be found — by Grimm in
Ersch u. Gruber's Encyklop. 2d sect. vol. x.\iv. p. 217
Sfj. ; Gass in Herzog vi. p. 763 stjq. ; Ilollzmann in Schen-
kel iii. p. 352 sq. ; \_Salmon in Diet, of Chris. Biog. iii.
398 sqq. ; cf. C. L. Leimbach, Das Papiasfragment (Gotha,
1875), esp. p. 114 sqq.]•
Ίώβ, ό, indecl., (31'K i. e. harassed, afflicted [but queer
tioned ; see Gesenius, Lex. (8th ed., by Miihlau and Volck)
s. V.]), Job, the man commended in the didactic poem
which bears his name in the canon of the O. T. (cf. Ezek.
xiv. 14, 20) for his piety, and his constancy and fortitude
in the endurance of trials: Jas. v. 11.*
Ίωβή8, ό, indecl.. Jolted : Mt. i. 5 and Lk. iii. 32 in L
Τ Tr [ WH ; (yet WH in Lk. 1. c. -/3ήλ)] for R G Ώβή»,
q. v.*
[Ίωβήλ, see the preceding word.]
Ίωδά, ό, indecl., Joda : Lk. iii. 26 Τ Tr WH, for R G L
'loiSa, see 'loiSas, 2.*
Ίωήλ, ό, indecl., (Sxv whose God is Jehovah, i. q. a
worshipper of God, [al. ' Jehovah is God ']), Joel, the
eminent prophet who ace. to the opinion of very many
recent writers prophesied in the reign of Uzziah [cf.
B. D. s. V. Joel, 3] : Acts ii. 16.•
Ίωνάν and (so Τ Tr WH) Ίωνάμ, 6, indecl., (see Ίωάν-
ι^ί), Jonan [or Jonaiii], one of the ancestors of Christ :
Lk. iii. 30.•
Ίωνάβ, -ά [Β. 20 (17 sq.)], ό, (njV a dove), Jonah (or
Jonas) ; 1. Jonah, the O. T. prophet, a native of
Gath-hepher in the tribe of Zebulun. He lived during
the reign of Jeroboam II., king of Israel (2 K. xiv. 25).
The narrative of his miraculous experiences, constructed
for a didactic purpose, is given in the book which bears
his name [on the historic character of which cf. B.D.
(esp. Am. ed.) or McC. and S. s. v. ; also Ladd, Doctr. of
Sacr. Script, i. 65 sqq.] : Mt. xii. 39—41 ; xvi. 4 ; Lk. xi.
29 sq. 32. 2. Jonah (or Jonas), a fisherman, father
of the apostle Peter : Mt. xvi. 1 7 [L Τ WH here βαριωνα,
see Βαριωκάί] ; Jn. i. 42 (43) [R G L mrg. Tr mrg., and
RG in] xxi. 15. [16, 17], (see Ιωάννης, 3).*
Ίωράμ, 6, indecl., (ΟΙΙΠ' i. e. whom Jehovah exalted),
Joram, the son and successor of Jehoshaphat on the
throne of Judah, fr. [c] B. c. 891 to 884 (2 K. viii. 16
sqq. ; 2 Chr. xxi. 2 sqq.) : Mt. i. 8.*
Ίωρ<(μ. ό, indecl., Jorim, one of the ancestors of Christ :
Lk. iii. 29.*
Ί&κΓαψ<1τ, ό, indecl., (uSCnTT. i. e. Jehovah judges),
Jehoshaphat, king of Judah fr. [c.] B. c. 914 to 889 (1 K.
xxii. 41 sqq. ; 2 Chr. xvii.-.xx.) : Mt. i. 8.*
[Ίωο-ή (A. V. Jose, incorrectly), see Ίωσήί, init.]
Ίοκτήϊ, gen. Ίωση [R G in Lk. iii. 29 Ίωση (which A.
V. incorrectly takes as nom. Jose)] and (L Τ Tr WH in
Mk. vi. 3 ; XV. 40, 47) Ίωσητο! (cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p.
199; B. 19 (17) sq. ; W. § 10, 1 ; [IF//. App. p. 159']),
6, Joses; 1. one of the ancestors of Christ : Lk. iii.
29 ([see above] ; L Τ Tr WH Ίησοϋ, q. v. 2). 2. the
own brother of Jesus : Mk. vi. 3, and R G in Mt. χϋί
'Ιωσήφ
811
καθαφέω
55 (where L TTr WH 'Ιωσήφ, q. v. 6) ; see Ιάκωβο!,
3. 3. the son of Mary, the sister of the mother of
Jesus [see Μαριάμ, 3] : Mt. xxvii. 56 (where Τ Tr mrg.
WH txt. Ιωσήφ [Ίωση! and Ιωσήφ seem to have been
difi. forms of one and the same name ; cf. Renan in
the Journ. Asiat., 1864, ser. vi. T. iv. p. 536; Frankel,
Hodeget in Misch. p. 31 note; Bohl, Volksbibel u. s. w.
p. 15]); Mk. XV. 40, 47. 4. a Levite, surnamed
Βαρνάβας (q. v.) : Acts iv. 36 (where LTTrWH Ίω-
<τήφν
Ίωσ-ήφ, indecl., (in Joseph, [e. g. c. Ap. 1, 14, 16 ; 32,
3 ; 33, 5] ΊώστρΓοί), ό, (J\OY, It. ηρ' to add, Gen. xxx.
23 sq. [cf. B. D. 6. V. Joseph]), Joseph ; 1. the pa-
triarch, the eleventh son of Jacob : Jn. iv. 5 ; Acts vii.
9, 13 sq. 18 ; Heb. xi. 21 sq.; φυΚή Ιωσήφ, i- e. the tribe
of Ephraim, Rev. vii. 8. 2. the son of Jonan [or
Jonam], one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 30. 3.
the son of Judah [or Judas ; better Joda] another an-
cestor of Jesus : Lk. iii. 26 (where L mrg. Τ Tr WH Ί&>-
<"7Xi <1• ■^■)• *• Λβ son of Mattathias, another of the
same: Lk. uL 24. 5. the husband of Mary, the
mother of Jesus : Mt. i. 16, 18-20, 24 ; ii. 13, 19 ; Lk. L
27; ii. 4, 16, 33RL, 43RGLmrg.; iii. 23 ; iv. 22; Jn.
i. 4a (46) ; vi. 42. 6. an own brother of our Lord :
Mt. .\iii. 55 LTTr WH (for R G Ίωση! [q. v. 2]). 7.
Joseph of Arimathaa, a member of the Sanhedrin, who
favored Jesus: Mt. xxvii. 57, 59; Mk. xv. 43, 45 ; Lk.
xxiii. 50 ; Jn. xix. 38. 8. Joseph, surnamed Βαρι/ά-
βα! (q. V.) : Acts iv. 36 L Τ Tr WH (for R G Ίωσήί [q.
V. 4]). 9. Joseph called Barsabas [better Barsab-
bas; see the word], and surnamed Justus: Acts i. 23.
[See Ίωσ^Γ, 3.]
Ίωσ-ηχ, Josech, see Ιωσήφ, 3.
Ίωσ -Cos (LTTrWH Ίωσίΐ'αΓ [see WH. App. p. 155;
s. V. fi, i]),-oD, 0, (in'CiN" i. e. whom 'Jehovah heals'),
Josiah, king of Judah, who restored among the Jews the
worship of the true God, and after a reign of thirty-one
years was slain in battle c. b. c. 611 (2 K. xxiL sq. ; 2
Chr. xxxiv. sq.) : Jit. i. 10 sq.*
Ιώτα, TO, tola [A. 'V.Jot']. the Hebr. letter \ the small-
est of them all ; hence equiv. to the minutest part : Mt.
v. 18. [Cf. I, I.]•
Κ
κάγώ [so the recent edd. usually, (in opp. to the κάγά
stc. of Grsb. et al., cf. Herm. Λ^ig. p. 526 ; W. § 5, 4 a. ;
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 4 ; cf. I, i)], (by crasis fr.
«al eya [retained e. g. in Mt. xxvi. 15 Τ ; Lk. ii. 48 WH;
.-cvi. 9 Τ Tr WH ; Acts x. 26 Τ Tr WH ; xxvi. 29 WH,
etc. ; cf. B. 10 ; W. § 5, 3; WH. App. p. 145 : esp. Tdf.
Proleg. p. 96 sq.], for tlie first time in Horn. H. 21, 108
[var., cf. Od. 20, 296 var. (h. Merc. 1 7, 3) ; cf. Ebeling,
Lex. Horn. p. 619]), dat. κά,>«)ί [και 4μοΊ Acts χ. 28 R G],
ace. (cd^t; 1. nnf/ /, the <caisim])ly connecting: Jn.
X. 27, etc. ; and I (together), Lk. ii. 48 ; distributively,
a»d I (in like manner) : Jn. vi. 56 ; xv. 4 ; xvii. 26 ; and
I (on the other hand), Jas. ii. 18 (κάγω tpya ΐχω) ; Lk.
xxii. 29 ; Acts xxii. 19 ; and I (indeed), Jn. vi. 57 ; Ro.
xi. 3. at the beginning of a period, Lat. et equtdem, and
I (to speak of myself) : Jn. i. 31, 33 sq.; xii. 32; 1 Co. ii.
1 ; with the και used consecutively (see under και, I. 2 d.),
cf. our one? so : Mt. xi. 28 ; Jn. xx. 15; Acts xxii. 13; 2
Co. vi. 1 7 ; κάγω . . . (cat, both . . . and : κάμί otSare, και
οίδατί πόβ(ν (Ιμ'ι, both me (my person) and my origin,
Jn. vii. 28. 2. / also ; / as well ; / likewise ; in like
manner I: so that one puts himself on a level with
others, Mt. ii. 8 ; x. 32 ; Lk. .xi. 9 ; xvi. 9 ; Jn. xv. 9, [10
Tdf.] ; xvii. 18 ; Acts x. 26 ; 1 Co. vii. 40 ; 2 Co. xi. 16,
18, 21 sq. ; in the second member of a comparison, after
ίϊΓοίοΓ, ώί, καθω!. Acts xxvi. 29 ; 1 Co. vii. 8 ; xi. 1 ; I?ev.
ii. 28 (27) ; see under καΊ, ΓΓ. 1 a. with a suppression of
the mention of those with whom the writer compares
himself: Eph. i. 15 (as well as others) ; 1 Th. iii. 5 (as
well as my companions at Athens ; cf. Liinemann ad
loc). κάμοΊ : Lk. i. 3 ; Acts viii. 19; 1 Co. xv. 8 ; καμί :
1 Co. xvi. 4. i. q. / in turn : Mt. xvi. 18 ; xxi. 24 ; Lk.
XX. 3 ; Gal. vi. 14. 3. even I, this selfsame I, the καΊ
pointing the statement : Ro. iii. 7 ; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p.
835.
καθά, adv. for Kaff 3, according as, just as : Mt. xxvii.
10. (Xen., Polyb., Diod., al. ; 0. T. Apocr.; Sept. for
TiJXS, Gen. vii. 9, IG, etc., and for 3, Gen. xix. 8 ; Ex.
xii. 35, etc.) *
καθ-αΟρ€<Γΐΐ, -ίωί, ή, (καβαιρίω. q. v.), a pulling down,
destruction, demolition : όχνρωμάτων, [A. V. of strong-
holds'], 2 Co. X. 4 (rai/ τ€ΐχών, Xen. Hell. 2, 2, 15; 5, 1,
35 ; Polyb. 23, 7, 6 ; Diod. excerpt, leg. 1 3 ; destructio
murorum. Suet. Galba 12) ; ds οίκοδ. . . . καθαίρισιν υμών,
for building up (increasing) not for casting down (the
extinction of) the godly, upright, blessed life you lead in
fellowship with Christ (see οικοδομή, 1) : 2 Co. χ. 8; xiii.
10. [From Thuc. down.] •
καθ-αιρ<ω, -ω; fut. καθ(\ώ (Lk. xii. 18 [see άφαιρία,
init.]1 ; 2 aor. καθί'ΪΚον, (fr. obsol. ?λω) ; pres. pass, κα-
θαιρονμαι ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for ΤΊίΠ, to cause to
go down; Di.n, vnj, V"^?; 1. to take down: with-
312
καθαρ6<!
out the notion of violence, «ro, to detach from the cross
one cruci6ed, Mk. xv. 3fi, -Iti ; Lk. xxiii. 53, (Polyb. I, 86,
6; Philo in Flacc. § 10); τίνα άπο τοϋ ξίλον, Acts xiii.
29 (Sept. .Josh. viii. 29 ; x. 27) ; with the use of force, to
throw down, cast ihiwn : nva άπο θρύνον, Lk. i. 52. 2.
to pull doicn, demolish : τα^- άποθήκαί, opp. to οίκοδομίϊν.
Lk. xii. 18; Χογισμον!, the (subtle) reasonings (of op-
ponents) likenuil to fortresses, i. q. to refute, 2 Co. x. 4
(5); lo destroi/, (θνη, Acts xiii. 19 (.lor. xxiv. 6; Tluic. 1,
4 ; Ael. V. h. 2, 2.")) ; την μι-γαΚα-ύτητά Tivot, Acts xix. 27,
where if prefcri'iici• is <;ivcn (with L Τ Tr WII) to the
reading rrjt /ifyuXeiiinjrof aur^r, it must be taken as a
partitive gen. stimewlial of her maiinijicence; cf. B. 1.58
(138) note [so Meyer; cf. Xen. Hell. 4, 4, 13. Al. trans-
late that she should eren be deposed from her matjnifi-
cence ; cf. W. § 30, 6 ; B. § 132, 5].*
καθαΙρω ; pf. pass. ptcp. κικαθαρμίνοί ; (καθαρό!) ; Ιο
cleanse, prop, from filth, impurity, etc. ; trees and vines
(from useless shoots), lo prune, Jn. xv. 2 (Se'vSpa . . . νπο-
τ(μνΑμ{να καθαίριται, Philo de agric. § 2 [cf. de somniis
ii. § 9 mid.]); metaph. from guilt, to expiate: pass. Ileb.
X. 2 R(i [see καθπρίζω, init.], (Jer. xiii. 27; and so in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down). [Comp. : δια-, (κ-καθαίρω.]*
καθάπ^ρ, (καθ' anfp),nccordinrias,just as,even α.ν, [(''κα-
θά marking the comparison, itip (akin to the jire]). πιρί)
the latitude of the application ") : Ro. ix. 13 WII txt. ; x.
15 WII txt. ; also] xi. 8 and 1 Co. x. 10 in TXr WII ; 2 Co.
iii. 13, 1 8 [here WII mrg. καθά,σικρ] ; 1 Th. ii. 1 1 ; καθά-
ntp και, Ro. iv. 6 ; 2 Co. i. 14 ; 1 Th. iii. G, 12; iv. 5 ; Heb.
iv. 2, and RG in Ileb. v. 4 ; καθάπιρ foil, by οΰτω (or
οΖτωί), Ro. xii. 4 ; 1 Co. xii. 12; 2 Co. viii. 11. ([From
Arstjih. down]; Sept. for "lU'ND, Ex. vii. 6, 10.)*
καθ-άΐΓτω: 1 Άοτ. καθήψα; 1. to ft or fasten to,
bind on. 2. to lay hold of, fasten on (hostilely) :
T^t xfipos αύτοΰ, Acts xxviii. 3 [cf. W. 257 (241)]; τοϋ
τραχήλου, Epict. diss. 3, 20, 10. [In ^lid. fr. Horn, down,
(w. gen. fr. Hdt. on).] *
καθαρίζω (Hellenistic for καθαιρώ, which classic writ,
use) ; Attic fut. [cf. B. 37 (32); W. § 13, 1 c. ; Wli. App.
p. 103] καθάρια) (Heb. ix. 14) ; 1 aor. (καθάρισα [see be-
low] ; pres. pass, καθαρίζομαι ; 1 aor. pass, ίκαθαρίσθην ;
pf. pass. ptcp. κίκαβαρισμίνος (Heb. x. 2 TTrAVII; on
the forms (καθίρίσθη, Τ WII in Mt. viii. 3; Mk. i. 42,
[€καθί piafv, Tr in Acts x. 15 ; xi. 9] and κικαθι piapivot
Lchm. in Ileb. x. 2, cf. [Tdf Proleg. p. 82; Π7/. App.
p. 150] ; Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 118; Delitzsch on
Heb. X. 2 ; Kriiger Pt. ii. § 2, 2, 6 p. 4 ; [B. 29 (25 sq.) ; AV.
43]) ; (καθαρός) ; Sept. mostly for "\ntp ; 1. to make
clean, to cleanse ; a. from physical stains and dirt :
e.g. utensils, Mt. xxiii. 25, [fig. 2C] ; Lk. xi. 39; food,
Mk. vii. 19; τινά. a leper, to cleanse hi/ curing, Mt. viii. 2
sq.; Χ.8; xi. 5; Mk.i. 40-42; Lk. iv. 27; v. 12sq.; vii. 22;
xvii. 14, 17, (Lev. xiv. 8) ; to remove by cleansinr/ : ή \ίπρα
ίκαθαρίσθη, Mt. viii. 3 (καθαρκ'ΐ! το αίμα το άναίτιον (ξ
^Ισραήλ, Deut. xix. 13 ; ίκαθάριζί τηνττ^ρι ταντα σννήθ^ιαν,
the custom of marrying heathen women, Joseph, antt. 11,
5, 4 ; KaSaipciv αίμα, Horn. Π. 16, 667; cf. (κκαθαίρω). b.
in a moral sense ; o. to free from the defilement of sin
and from faults ; to purify from wickedness : ίαντ6» άπο
μολυσμον σαρκός, 2 Co. vii. 1 ; r^ πίστ(ΐ τας καρδίας, Acts
.XV. 9 (καρδίαν am αμαρτίας. Sir. ,χχ.χνίϋ. 10) ; τάς χ(Ίρας,
to abstain in future from wrong-doing, Jas. iv. 8. β. to
free from the tju ill of sin, lo purify : τίνα άπο πάσης αμαρ-
τίας, 1 »Ιη. i. 7 ; [τ. ά.π• αδικία?, ibid. 9] ; την σνν€ίδησιν άπα
νεκρών (pyu)V, Ilcb. ix. 14 ; την ικκΚησίαν τω λοιττρω τον
ύδατος (instrumental dat.), Eph. v. 26 ; λαϋν (πυτω. Tit.
ii. 14. γ. to consecrate by cleansing οτ purifying: τιΖ»
Tivi, dat. of instr. [W. 388 (363)], Heb. ix. 22 ; i. q. to
consecrate, deilicate,Ti τινι (dat. of instr.), ibid. 23. 2.
to pronounce clean in a levitical sense : Acts x. 15 ; xi. 9,
(Lev. xiii. 13, 1 7, 23, 2S). [CoMP. : δια-καθαρίζω-Ί *
καθαρι<Γμ.ό$, -oO, ό, (καθαρίζω), a cleatising, purification;
a ritual purgation or washing, (Vu\^. purgalio,purificalio,
emundalio) : used with a gen. of the subj., τά>ν Ιουδαίων,
of the washings of the Jews before and after their meals,
Jn. ii. 6 ; without a gen., of baptism (a symbol of
moral cleansing), Jn. iii. 25 ; with a gen. of the obj., and
that a person, — of the levitical purification of women
after childbirth, Lk. ii. 22 ; and of lepers, Jlk. i. 44 ; Lk.
v. 14 ; with a gen. of the thing, αμαρτιών or Αμαρτημά-
των, a clea7ising from the guilt of sins (see καθαρίζω, 1 b.
j3.) : wrought now by ba|)tism, 2 Pet. i. 9, now by the ex-
piatory sacrifice of Christ, Heb. i. 3 on ivhich ef. Kurtz,
Com. p. 70 ; (Ex. xxx. 10 ; της αμαρτίας μου, Job vii. 21 ;
of an atonement, Lcian. asin. 22).•
KaOapos, -a, -όν ; [akin to Lat. castus, in-cestus, Eng.
chaste, chasten ; Curtius § 26; VaniCek p. 177]; fr. Ilom.
down ; Sept. mostly for ΙΙΠϋ ; clean, pure, (free from the
admixture or adhesion of any thing that soils, adulter-
ates, corrupts) ; a. jjhysically : Mt. xxiii. 26 ; .xxvii.
59 ; Heb. x. 22 (23) ; Rev. xv. 6 ; xix. 8, 14, and Rec. in
xxii. 1 ; χρυσίον, purified by fire. Rev. xxi. 18, 21 ; in a
similitude, like a vine cleansed by pruning and so fitted
to bear fruit, Jn. .xv. 3 ; ό \(\ουμ. . . . καθαρός o\os (where
the idea which Christ expresses figuratively is as follows :
' he whose inmost nature has been renovated does not
need radical renewal, but only to be cleansed from
every se\ eral fault into which he may fall through intei^
course with the unrenewed world'), Jn. .xiii. 10. b.
in a levitical sense ; clean, i. e. the use of which is not for-
bidden, imparts no uncleanness : πάι^α καθαρά, Ro. xiv.
20 ; Tit. i. 1 5. c. ethically ; free from corrupt desire,
from sin and guilt: Tit. i. 15; ίμ(1ς καθαροί, Jn. xiii. 10,
[11]; oi K. Tji καρδία (as respects heart [W. § 31, 6 a.]),
Mt. V. 8 (καθαρός χ(Ίρας, Hdt. 1, 35 ; κατά το σώμα κ. κατίί
την ψυχήν, Plat. Crat. p. 405 b.) ; free from ercry admix-
ture of what is false, sincere, (κ καθαρός καρδίας, 1 Tim. i.
5 ; 2 Tim. ii. 22, and R G in 1 Pet. i. 22 ; eV καθαρά avvti-
δήσιι, 1 Tim. iii. 9 : 2 Tim. i. 3 ; genuine (joined with αμί-
αντος) θρησκεία, Jas. i. 27 : blameless, innocent. Acts xviii.
6. Hebraistically with the addition of από τίνος, pure
from, i. e. unstained with the guilt of, any thing [W. § 30,
6a.; B. 157 (137) sq.]: άπό τ. ai/iaros. Acts xx. 26 ; Sus.
46 Alex., cf. Gen. xxiv. 8 ; Tob. iii. 14 ; καθαρας ΐχιιν τάς
χ^Ίρας από τοΰ φόνου, Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 16 ; in class. Grk.
with a simple gen., as φόνου, Plat. legg. 9 p. 864 e. ; cf.
καθαρότηι
313
κάθιζα.
Passow 6. V. p. 1528' ; [L. and S. s. v. 3] ; Kiihner § 421,
4 ii. p. 344. d. in a levitical and ethical sense: ηάντα
καθαρά ΙμΙν. Lk. xi. 41, on whicli see cv«/x(. [Syn. see
ίίΚικρίνήί; cf. Westcott on I Jn. iii. 3.]'
καθορότη5, -ijTor, ή, (καθαροί), cleanness, purity; in a
levitical sense, Tti/or, Heb. ix. 13. (Xen. mem. 2, 1, 22;
Plato, al.) *
καθ -cSpa, -as, ή, (κατά and ίδρα), η chair, seat: Mt. xxi.
12; Mk. xi. 15, (Sir. .\ii. 12; Hdian. 2, 3, 17 [7 ed.
Bekk.]) ; of the exalted seat occupied by men of eminent
rank or influence, as teachers and judges: eVi rrjs Μωϋ-
σ(ω! καθ€δρας ('κάθισαν, sit on the seat which Moses for-
merly occupied, i. e. bear themselves as Jloses' succes-
sors in explaining and defending his law, Mt. xxiii. 2.
(Sept. for 2mo and i^Td. [Xen., Aristot., al.]) •
καβ-ί'ξομω; impf. ίκαθιζόμην; [fr. Horn, down]; to sit
down, seat one's self, sit : Jn. xx. 12 ; foil, by fv with dat.
of place, Mt. xxvi. 55 ; Lk. ii. 46 ; Jn. xi. 20; Acts vi. 15;
foil, by eVi with gen., Acts xx. 9 L Τ Tr WH ; by eVi with
dat., Jn. iv. 6 ; f«i, Jn. vi. 3 Tdf. ; [oi where. Acts ii. 2
I^hm. Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 336 sq.; B. 56
(49) ; 60 (52). CoMP. : παρα-καθ^ζομαι.']'
καθ-£ΐ$, more correctly καθ" (h, see eh, 4 c. p. 187'.
καθ-<ξή3, (κατά and e^^f, q. v.), adv., one after another,
successively, in order : Lk. i. 3 ; Acts xi. 4 ; .xviii. 23 ; oi
ΐίαθ(ξ. those that follow after. Acts iii. 24 [cf. W. 633
(.588)] ; iv τω καθ. sc. χρόνω [R. V. soon aferwards'], Lk.
viii. 1. (Ael. v. h. 8, 7; Plut. symp. 1, 1, 5; in earlier
Grk. l^rjs and (φιξη: are more usual.) *
καθ-<νδω ; impf. 3 pers. plur. €κάθ(υδον ; f r. Horn, down ;
Sept. mostly for 33ΐ7 ; 1. to fall asieep, to drop off
to sleep : Mt. xxv. 5. 2. to sleep ; a. prop. : Mt.
viii. 24 ; Lx. 24 [on this and its paral. cf. B. D. Am. ed. p.
1198']; .xui. 25; xxvi. 40, 43, 45 ; Mk.iv. 27, 38; v. 39;
xiii. 36 ; xiv. 37, 40 sq. ; Lk. viii. 52 ; xxii. 46 ; 1 Th. v.
7. b. euphemistically, ?o Je rfead: 1 Th. v. 10 ; (Ps.
Ixxxvii. (Ix.xxviii.) 6 ; Dan. xii. 2). c. metaph. to
yield to sloth and sin, and be indifferent to one's salvation :
Ejih. V. 14; iTh. v. 6.•
καβηγητή5, -oO, ό, {καθηγίυμαι to go before, lead) ; a.
prop, a guide: Numen. ap. Ath. 7, p. 313 d. b. a
master, teacher: Mt. xxiii. 8 R G, 10. (Dion. H. jud. de
Thuc. 3, 4 ; several times in Plut. [cf. Wetst. on Mt. I.e.]) *
καθ-ήκ» ; [fr. Aeschyl., Soph, down] ; 1. to come
down. 2. to come to, reach to ; impers. καθήκ€ΐ, it is
hccoming, it is fit (cf. f!erm. zukommen), Ezek. xxi. 27;
οΰ καθηκίν (Rec. καθήκον), foil, by the ace. with inf., Acts
xxii. 22 [W. 282 (ίβό) ; Β. 21 7'(187)] ; rh μή καθήκοντα,
things not fitting, i. e. forbidden, .shameful, Ιίο. i. 28 ; 2
Mace. vi. 4. Cf. ανήκω.*
κάθ-η|χαι, 2 pers. sing, κάθη a later form for κάθησαι
(.\ct3 xxiii. 3), impv. κάθου for κάθησο [yet cf. Kiihner
as below] (cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 359 ; Kriiger §38, 6 sq.
i. p. 147; Kuhner § 301 i. p. 671 ; W. § 14, 4 ; [B. 49
(42)]), [subjunc. 2 pers. plur. κάθησθ^, Lk. xxii. 30 Tr
mrg. ; but WH txt. καθήσθ^ : see Veitch s. v.; Kriiger
§38, 6, 1 (cf. καθίζω), inf. καβήσθαι, ptcp. καθήμ€νοί] ; impf
(καθήμην; and once the rare [cf. Veitch p. 34 7] fut. καθή-
σομαι, Lk. xxii. 30 Τ Tr txt.WH mrg. [so WH in Mt. xix.
2.S also ; cf. καθίζω, fin.] ; (ήμαι) ; a verb of wliich only
the pres. and impf. are in use in class. Grk. [cf. B. 60
(52)] ; Sept. for 21?\; 1. to sit down, seat one's self:
foil, by fv w. dat. of place [cf. W. § 52, 4, 9], Mk. iv. 1 ;
Lk. x.xii. 55 [here Τ Tr WH ^tVor] ; els, Mk. xui. 3 [B.
§ 147, 16]; μeτά w. gen. of pers., Mt. .xxvi. 58; κάβου e<c
δeξιώu μου, i. e. be a partner of my power, ^It. xxii. 44 ;
Mk. xii. 36 [Trt.\t.WHmrg. κάθισαν]; Lk. xx.42; Acts
ii. 34 ; Heb. i. 13 (Ps. cix. (ex.) 1) ; κάθον &δβ wro with
ace, Jas. ii. 3. παρά w. ace. of place, Mt. xiii. I ; ίπάνω
w. gen. of place, Mt. xxviii. 2; with Ue'i, Mt. xv. 29; Jn.
vi. 3 [Tdf. eκaθtζeτo'] ; the place to be supplied fr. the
conte.\t, Mt. xiii. 2. 2. to sit, be seated, of a place
occupied : foil, by ev with dat. of place [W. as under 1],
Mt. xi. 16 ; xxvi. 69 ; e'v 1-3 δeξιά τ. θeoi, Col. iii. 1 ; cV
Tois δeξιo'^s, Mk. .\vi. 5; eVi tiios, Mt. .xxiv. 3; xxvii. 19;
[.Vets XX. 9 R G] ; «Vi τοϋ θρόνου [but also, esp. in the
crit. edd., with the dat. and the ace. (.•;ββ below) • cf.
Alford on the foil, pass.]. Rev. iv. 2 etc. ; t^s veφί\ηs [or
w. the ace]. Rev. xiv. 15, and in other exx. ; inl τινι.
Acts iii. 10 ; cVi τι [cf. B. 338 (291)], Mt. Lx. 9 ; Mk. ii.
14 ; Lk. v. 27 ; ,Jn. xii. 15 ; Rev. iv. 4 ; vi. 2 [R dat. (as
in foil.)] 4 sq. ; xi. 16 ; xvii. 3 ; xix. 11 ; παρά την όδόν,
Mt. XX. 30 ; Mk. χ. 46 ; Lk. xviii. 35 ; πρ6s to φως. Lk.
xxii. 56 ; ίπάνω tivos, Mt. xxiii. 22 ; Rev. vi. 8-, π^ρΊ τιι/α,
Mk. iii. 32, 34 ; άττίναντϊ τίνος, Mt. xxvii. 61 ; c'/c δ<ξιών
Tivos, Mt. xxvi. 64 ; Mk. xiv. 02 : Lk. xxii. 69 ; Uel, Mk.
ii. 6 ; at, where. Acts ii. 2 [L καθ(ζήμ(νοί] ; Rev. xvii. 15;
without specification of place, Mk. V. 15: Lk. v. 17; viii.
35; Jn. ii. 14: ix. 8; 1 Co. xiv. 30. «a^ij/iai as descrip-
tive of a certain state or condition is used of those who
sit in discharging their office, as judges, κάθη κρίνων. Acts
xxiii. 3 ; of a queen, i. q. to occupy the throne, to reign
[A. v. / sit a queeni. Rev. xviii. 7 : of money-changers,
Jn. ii. 14; of mourners and penitents : «V σάκκω, clothed
in sackcloth, ev σποδω, covered with ashes, Lk. x. 13;
of those who, enveloped in darkness, cannot walk about,
Mt. iv. 16 ; Lk. i. 79 (Is. xhi. 7) ; of a lame man, Acts xiv.
8. i. q. to have a fixed abode, to dwell : «Vi πρόσωττον τής
■y^r, Lk. xxi. 35 ; Rev. xiv. 6 (where Rec. κατοικοίντας) ;
em θρόνον. Rev. xx. 11 G Τ [WH mrg. ; but see above] ;
ev 'ί(ρουσα\ημ, Neh. xi. 6 ; [eV Spei 'Sapapelas, Sir. 1. 26.
CoMP. : σνγκάθημαι\.
καθημ,Εραν. i. q. καθ' ήμίραν, see ήμίρα, 2 p. 278*.
καθημ6ριν68. -ή, -όν, (fr. καθ' ημίραν), daily: Acts vi. 1.
(.Tudith xii. 15; Tlieophr., Athen., Plut., Alciphr. epp.
i. 5; Joseph, antt. .3, 10, 1; [11, 7, 1]; Polyaen. 4, 2,
10.) Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 53 [(yet see L. and S.) ; W.
25 (25 sq.)].*
καθ-ίζω; fut. καθίσω [Β. 37 (32)]; 1 aor. ίκάθισα (impv.
2 sing, κάθισαν once, Mk. xii. 36 Tr txt. AVH mrg.) ; pf.
KCKaeiKa (Jlk. xi. 2 [not WH Tr mrg. ; Heb. .xii. 2 L Τ
Tr AVH ; a late form, see A'eitch s. v.]) ; 1 aor. mid.
subjunc. 2 pers. plur. (tafli'oTj^if (Lk. xxii. 30 Rec.) ; fut.
mid. καθίσομαι; fr. Hom. down; [cf. B. 60 (52)]; 1.
trans. to make to sit down (κατά; q. v. ITT. 1), to -fef, ap
point ; Sept. for Τ&\7\ : τίνα tVi θρόνου [L Τ Tr WH τύι
ιθίημι
314
lOwi
θμόνον], to confer the kingdom upon one, Acts ii. 30 ; τινά
ev δίξιά αϋτοϋ, Kph. i. 2(J ; τινά, to appoint one to act as
judge, 1 Co. vi. 4 (Βικαστην, Plat. legg. 'J p. 873 e. ; I'ol^b.
40, 5, 3 ; σννίδμιον κριτών, Joseph, autt. 20, 9, 1). 2.
intrans. ; Sept. for 2iyy, a. lo nil doicn : univ., Mt. v. 1 ;
xiii. 48; ]Vlk. i.\. 35; Lk.iv.20; v. 3 ; .\iv.28,31; .\vi.6;
Jn. viii. 2 ; Acts .xiii. 14 ; xvi. 13 ; with a telic inf. 1 Co. x.
7 ; with specification of the place or seat : eV δ(ξια nvos,
Ileh. i. 3; viii. 1 ; .x. 12; .xii. 2; eVi rm, Mk. -xi. 7 [Kec.];
els t6v ναόν, 2 Th. ii. 4 [B. § 147, Hi ; VV. 415 (38(;)J ; eVi
with ace. [cf. B. 338 (290)], Rev. xx. 4 ; Jn. xii. 14 ; iMk.
xi. 2, [7 L Τ Tr WH] ; Lk. xix. 30 ; [add Acts ii. 3, see
B. § 129, 17; AV. 516 (481)]; tVi τοΰ βήματοί, of a judge,
Jn. xix. 13 ; Acts xii. 21 ; xxv. 6, 1 7 ; κατίναντΊ [or άπί-
ναντί Tr etc.] τίνος, Mk. xii. 41 ; ivith adverbs of place,
Jlk. xiv. 32; -Mt. xxvi. 36. b. to sit: [absol. (of a
dead man restored to life) (κάθισιν .lat, sat up, I.k. vii. 15
L mrg. WIl mrg.j ; e'v τω θρύνω, Ivev. iii. 21 ; dni w. gen.
of the seat, Mt. xxiii. 2; xxv. 31 ; «κ διξιων κ- (ξ (Ιων.,
Mt. χ.\. 21, 23 ; Mk. χ. 37, 40. i. q. to have fixed one's
abode, i. e. to sojourn [cf. our settle, settle rfoion]. Acts
xviii. 11 ; foil, by iv with dat. of place, Lk. xxiv. 49 [here
A.V. larry'\, (Ex. xvi. 29 ; Jer. xxx. 11 (xUx. 33) ; [Neh.
xi. 25]). Mid. [Pass.? cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p.
336 Sep] to sit: tVl θρόνων, Lk. xxii. 30 [RGL: see κά-
θημαι]; cm θρόνου!, Mt. xix. 28 [W!I καθήσ(σθ( ; see
κάθημαι. Coin•.: ava-, eVi-, πάρα-, ττιρι-, συγκαθίζω.^
καθ-ίημ.ι: \ iior. καθηκα; [fr. Horn, on] ; to semi down,
let down: tls, Lk. v. 19; &ιά w. gen. of place, ibid, and
Acts ix. 25 ; pres. pass. ptcp. «afte'/ieirar let down, tVi τη!
γη!, Acts X. 1 1 ; (Κ τοϋ οΰρανοϋ. Acts .xi. 5.*
καβ-ί<Γτημι (also καθιστάω, whence the ptcp. καθιστών-
Tf! Acts .wii. 15 R G ; and καθιστάνω, whence καθιστά-
i/oin-ft ibid. L Τ Tr WII ; see ΐστημι, init.) ; fut. καταστήσω ;
1 aor. κατίστησα : Pass., pres. καθίσταμαι ; 1 aor. κατιστά-
βην; I flit, κατασταθήσομαι; Sept. for Ώ'ΌΤ\, Π'ΡΓΙ, "'"prT',
ΠΧ'ΠΓΙ, TD^rij tnj ; (prop, ίο set down, put down), to set,
place, put : a. τινά iiri τινοι, to set one over a thing
(in charge of it), Mt. xxiv. 45 ; xxv. 21, 23 ; Lk. xii. 42 ;
Acts vi. 3 ; also eVi τινι, ]\It. x.\iv. 47 ; Lk. xii. 44 ; cm τι,
Heb. ii. 7 Rec. fr. Ps. viii. 7. b. τινά, to appoint one
to administer an ojpce (cf. Germ, bestellen) : πριαβυτί-
povs. Tit. i. 5 ; τινά els τό with inf., to a])point to do
something, Ileb. viii. 3 ; τα προ! τ. Beiv to conduct the
worship of God, Heb. v. 1 ; foil, by Ίνα, ibid. ; τινά with
a pred. ace. indicating the office to be administered \to
mid-e one so and so; cf. W. § 32, 4 b.; B. § 131, 7], (so
very often in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down), Lk. xii. 14 ; Acts
vii. 10, 27, 35 ; Ileb. vii. 28. o. lo set down as, con-
stitute (Lat. sisto), i. q. to declare, shorn to be : pass, with
αμαρτωλός, δ/καιοΓ, Ro. v. 1 9 [cf. Prof. T. Dwif/ht in New
Englander for 186 7, p. 590 sqq. ; Dietzsch, Adam u.
Christus (Bonn, 1871) p. 188]. d. to constitute (Lat.
sisto) i. q. lo render, make, cause to be : τινά ουκ ipyov,
oiSi άκαρπον, i. e. (by litotes) laborious and fruitful, 2
Pet. i. 8. e. to conduct or hrinij to a certain place ;
τινά. Acts xvii. 15 (2 Chr. xxviii. 15 for ΚΟΠ ; Josh. vi.
23 ; 1 S. v. 3 ; Hom. Od. 13, 274 ; Xen. an. 4, 8, 8 and in
other prof. auth.). f. Mid. to shou) or exhibit one's
self; come forward as : with a pred. nom., Jas. iv. 4 ; ή
■γλώσσα . . . η σπιλοΟσα, Jas. iii. 6. [CoMP. : aim-, airo-
καθίστημι.^ '
κοβό (i. e. καθ' ο), adv., [fr. Lys. and Plat, down], ao•
cordiny to what, i. e. 1. as : Ro. viii. 26. 2.
according as; in so far as, so far forth as: 1 Pet. iv. 13
(Rec.»'"^ κaθώs) ; 2 Co. viii. 12 [W. 307 (288) ; cf. B. § 139,
30].•
καθολικό;, -ή,-όν, (καθόλου, >[■ v.), general, unirersal (oc-
casionally in i)rof. auth. fr. [Aristot. and] Polyb. down,
as καθ. και κοιχή 'ιστορία, Polyb. 8, 4, 11 ; often in eccl.
writ. ; the title ή καθολική iκκλησta first in Ignat. ad
Smyrn. c. 8 and often in Polye. martyr, [see ed. (Gebh.
Ilarn.) Zahn, p. 133 note] ; cf. καθολική άvάστaσιs, [Justin
c. Tryph. 81 sub fin.]; Tlieoph. ad Autol. [I. i. § 13]
p. 40 ed. Otto) ; ίπιστολαΊ καθολικοί, or simply καθολικοί,
in the title of the E])p• of Jaiucs, I'eter, John, and .hide
(RGL; cf. των ίπτά λ€γομ(νων καθολικών sc. επιστολών,
Eus. h. e. 2, 23, 25), most |)rob. because they seemed to
be written not to any one church alone, but to all the
churches. [Cf. Diet, of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Catholic] *
καθόλον (i. e. καθ' όλου [" as it is written in auth. before
Aristot." (L. and S.)]), adv., u-holly, entirely, at all :
Acts iv. 18. ([Ex. xxii. 11] ; Ezek. xiii. 3, 22; Am. iii.
3, 4; Xen., Plat., Dem., .\risl(it. and sq(i.) *
κοθ-οιτλίζω : pf . pass. ptcp. καθωπλισμίνο! ; to arm [fully
(cf. κατά. III. 1 fin.)], yur/iisA with arms: Lk. xi. 21.
(Xen., Pint., al.; Sept.) *
καθ-οράαι, -ώ : 1. to look down, see from above,
view from on high, (Hom., Ildt., Xen., Plat., al.). 2.
to see thoroughly [cf. κατά, III. 1 fin.], perceive clearly, un-
derstand (Germ, erschauen) : pres. pass. 3 pers. sing, κα-
θοραται, Ro. i. 20 (3 Macc. iii. 11, and often in class.
Grk.). Cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 61.*
καθότι (i. e. κα^ δ Ti), according to what, i. e. 1.
so far as, according as: Acts ii. 45; iv. 35, (Polyb. 18,
19 (36), 5; for 11?Ν3, Ex. i. 12, 17). 2. because
that, because, [cf. W. § 53, 8] : Lk. i. 7; xix. 9; Acts ii.
24, and LTTr WH (for Rec. διότι) in Acts xvii. 31,
(Tob. i. 12; xiii. 4 ; Polyb. 18, 21 (38), 6). 3. as,
Just as : Bar. vi. (Ep. Jer.) 1 ; Judith ii. 13, 15 ; x. 9, and
often in Thuc. et al.*
καθω; (i. e. καθ" ώς), a particle found occasionally in
prof. auth. fr. Aristot. down for the Attic καθά and κοβό,
but emphatically censured by Phryn. and the Atticists ;
cf. Slurz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 74 sqq. ; Lob. ad Phryn.
p.425sq. ; [W. 26 (25)]; 1. according as, just as,
even as : in the first member of a comparison, Lk. vi. 31 ;
1 Jn. ii. 27 ; foil, by οΰτως in the second member [cf. W.
§53, 5],Lk. xi. 30; xvii. 26 ; Jn. iii. 14; 2Co.i. 5; x. 7;
Col. iii. 13 ; 1 Jn. ii. 6 ; foil, by κοί also, Jn. xv. 9 ; xviL 18 ;
XX. 21 ; 1 Jn. ii. 18 ; iv. 1 7 ; 1 Co. xv. 49 ; it is annexed to
precedinc: words after the demonstrative οΰτωϊ, Lk. xxiv.
24 ; with οΰτως unexpressed, Mt. xxi. 6 ; xxviiL 6; Mk.
xvi. 7; Lk. i. 2, 55, 70; xi. 1 ; Jn. i. 23: v. 23; Acts x.
47 [here LTTr WHii]; XV. 8; Ro.i.l3; xv.7; 1 Co.
viii. 2 ; x. 6 ; 2 Co. i. 14 ; ix. 3 ; xi. 12 ; Eph. it. 17, and
κασωστηρ
315
often ; καθίο^ διδάσκω, agreeably to my method of teach-
ing, 1 Co. iv. 17 ; καθίΰί yiypanTai, Mt. xxvi. 24 ; Mk. ix.
13 ; Acts vii 42 ; xv. 15 ; Ho. i. 17, and often in Paul ;
the apodosis wanting, and to be gathered fr. the con-
text : καθωί παρΕκάλίσά σϊ . . . iv πίστί t, sc. ούτω και νυν
παρακαλώ, 1 Tim. i. 3, cf. W.570 (530); [Β. 38(; (331)];
ήρξατο αΙτ(Ίσθαί (sc. οΰτω ποίί'ιν airois), καθωι κτλ. Mk.
XV. 8 [Β. § 151, 23 b.; cf. W. 584 (543 sq.)] ; in com-
parison by contrary we find the negligent use : ά-γαηωμιν
άλληΚονι, οϋ καθώς Κάιν κτλ. 1 Jn. ϋϊ. 11 sq., cf. De
Wette ad loc. and W. 623 (579); οίτ09 eVtiv ό apros
. . . οΰ καθώς etc., not such as they ate etc., Jn. vi. 58.
with the verb ίΐμί, equiv. to Lat. qualis, such as, 1 Jn.
iii. 2; in a parenthesis, 1 Th. ii. 13 (as it is in truth).
2. according as i. e. in proportion as, in the degree that :
Mk. iv. 33 ; Acts vii. 1 7 (cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; xl. 29 ; 1
Co. xii. 11,18; 1 Pet. iv. 10. 3. since, seeing that,
agreeably to the fact that, [cf. W. § 53, 8; 448 (417)]:
Jn. xvii. 2 ; Ro. i. 28 [yet here al. regard καθ. as c ο r-
responsive rather than causal or explanatory] ; 1 Co.
i. 6 ; V. 7 ; Eph. i. 4 ; Phil. i. 7. 4. it is put for the
simple ώϊ, a. after verbs of speaking, in indir. disc.
Acts XV. 14 ; it serves to add an epexegesis, 3 Jn. 3
(to σον Tg άληθ(ία). b. of time, when, after that, (cf.
Lat. ui) : 2Macc. i. 31; [Neh. v. 6]; here many bring in
Acts vii. 1 7 ; but see 2 above.
καθώσ-ΐΓ£ρ, [Tr καθώς Trfp], just as, exactly as : Heb. v.
4 Τ Tr WH [also 2 Co. iii. 1» Wfl mrg.]. (Himer., Psell.,
Tzetz.) *
κα£, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the par-
ticles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3 sqq. ; B.
361 (310) sqq., and cf. EUicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the
difiference between it and τί see s. v. re ad init.]
I. It serves asacopulativei. e. to connect (Lat. el,
atque. Germ, und) ; 1. it connects single words
or terms: a. univ., as oi ΦαρίσαΙυι καΙ Σαδδουκαΐοι,
Mt. xvi. 1 ; ό θ(6ς κα\ -πατήρ, he who is God and Father
(see θ(6ς, 3) ; iv καρδία καλή και αγαθή, Lk. viii. 15 ; πολυ-
μ(ρώς κα\ πολντρόπως, Heb. i. 1 ; it is repeated before
single terms, to each of which its own force and weicrht
is thus given : ή υιοθεσία κα\ ή 8όξα και α'ι 8ιαθήκαι καϊ ή
νομοθίσία και ή λατρι'ια κα\ α'ι ϊπαγγ(λίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ayia
κα\ δικαία και αγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23 ; Lk.
xiv. 21 ; Jn. xvi. 8 ; Acts xv. 20, 29 ; xxi. 25 ; Heb. ix. 10 ;
Rev. V. 12 ; .xviii. 12 sq. ; cf. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it
connects numerals ; and so that (contrary to the more
com. usage) the greater number precedes: δίκα κ. οκτώ,
Lk. xiii. 4, 11, [but in both pass. L and Tr br. WH om.
και; Tdf. δίκαοκτώ], 16 ; τισσαράκοντα κ. ϊξ, .Jn. ii. 20;
add, Jn. v. 5 (i T; Acts xiii. 20; cf. W. § 37, 4 ; [Bp.
Lghtft. on Gal. i. 18 ; noteworthy also is its use in 2 Co.
xiii. 1 (cf. Deut. xLx. 15 Sept.) fVi στάματος δΰο μαρτύρων
και τριών (in Mt. xviii. 16 η τρ. cf. W. 440 (410) note) al
the mouth of two witnesses and (should there be so many)
of three ; a similar use of και, to lend a certain indefinite-
ness to the expression, occurs occasionally with other
than numerical specifications, as Jas. iv. 13 σήμ(ρον κα\
(R"G; but LTTr WH t,) αΰριον; cf. Kiihner § 521, 2;
Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. p. 614•]. c. it joins to par-
titive words the general notion ; so that it is equiv.
to and in general, and in a word, in short : 6 Πέτρος κ. οΊ
απόστολοι. Acts v. 29 ; οι άρχΐίρ(ϊς [^καϊ οΊ πρεσβύτεροι
Rec] και το σννέδριον όλον, Mt. -x.xvi. 59 ; καϊ δικαιώμασι
σαρκός, Heb. ix. 1 Rec. Tr br. WH mrg. ; κα\ in'i τον
'Ισραήλ τον θεοϋ. Gal. vi. 16, and often in Grk. writ.; cf.
W. 437sq. (407); 520sq. (485); [B. 363 (311 sq.) ; 400
(343)] ; with re preceding, η τ( . . . αντοϋ δύναμις κα'ι
θειότης, Ro. i. 20 [see re, 2 a.] ; and, on the other hand,
it joins to a general idea something particular, which is
already comprised indeed in that general notion but by
this form of expression is brought out more emphatically
(which Strabo 8 (1) p. 340 calls συι/καταλ/γ^ικ το μέρος
τω όλω) ; so that it is equiv. to and especially [cf . W. u. s.] :
τα πάντα και τα τών δαιμονιζομίνων, Mt. viii. 33 ; τοϊς μα-
θηταις αντον κ. τω Ώετρω, Mk. xvi. 7 ; αί φωνάι αυτών κ.
τών αρχιερέων, Lk. xxiii. 23 [RG] ; σννγνναιξϊ κα\ Μαριάμ,
Acts i. 14; iv Ιούδα κ. Ιερουσαλήμ, 1 Mace. ii. 6; πας
Ίοίδα κ. Ιερουσαλήμ. 2 Chr. χχχν. 24, cf. xxxii. 33 ; often
so in Grk. writ. also. 2. It connects clauses and
sentences; a. univ., as διακαθαριεί την άλωνα αυτοϋ
κ. συνάξει τον σ'ιτον κτλ. Mt. iii. 12 ; εισήλθαν . . . κα'ι έδί-
δασκον. Acts ν. 21 ; and in innumerable other e.xx. b.
In accordance with the simpUcity of the ancient popular
speech, and esp. of the Hebr. tongue, it links statement
to statement, the logical relations of which the more cul-
tivated language expresses either by more exact parti-
cles, or by the use of the participial or the relative con-
struction (cf. W. § 60, 3 ; B. 288 (248) sqq. ; 3G1 (310)
sq.) : e. g. that very freq. formula iytveTo . . . κα'ι (see
γίνομαι, 2 b.) ; και ειδον και (equiv. to οτι) σεισμός iγivετo,
Rev. vi. 12 ; τεξεται υΐον κ. καίΧεσεις το όνομα αυτού (equiv.
to ου όνομα καλέσεις). ^It. i. 21 ; καλόν εστίν ημάς 2>δβ είναι,
κα\ (equiv. to όθεν) ποιήσωμεν σκηνάς, Mk. ix. 5 ; clauses
arc thus connected together in clusters ; as, Mt. vii. 25,
27 (an examjile of six clauses linked together by και) ;
]Mt. xiv. 9 sqq.; Mk. i. 12-14; Lk. xviii. 32-34; Jn. ii.
13-16; x. 3; 1 Co. -xii. 5-6 ; Rev. vi. 2, 8, 12-16 ; ix. 1-4
(where nine sentences are strung together by και), etc.
after a designation of time καί annexes what will be
or was done at that time : ήγγικεν ή ώρα και πapaδίδoτa^
κτλ. Mt. xxvi. 45 ; ην δε ώρα τρίτη κα\ εσταυρωσαν αυτόν,
Mk. XV. 25 ; iγyύς ην το πάσχα ... κ. άνεβη εΙς Ίεροσ. ό
Ιησούς, Jn. ii. 13; ήμεραι έρχονται και συντελέσω, Heb.
viii. 8 ; add, Lk. xxiii. 44 ; Jn. iv. 35; v. 1 ; xi. 55 ; Acts
V. 7 ; and not infreq. so in Grk. writ., as ^δτ; δέ ήν όψί και
οΊ Κορίνθιοι εζαπίνης πρύμναν εκρούοντο. Thuc. 1, 50; cf.
Matthiae § 620, 1 a. p. 1481 ; W. 436 (405 sq.) ; [B. 361
(310)]. c. it joins affirmative to negative sentences,
as μή συκοφαντήσατε κα\ άρκεΐσθε, Lk. iii. 14 ; ουτ€ αντλημα
έχεις και το φρέαρ εστ\ βαθύ, Jn. iv. 1 1 ; οϋτε . . . iπιδέχετaι
καΐ . . . κωλύει, 3 Jn. 10, (rarely so in Grk. writ., as Eur.
Iph. Taur. 578; cf. Klolz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 714); much
oftener it annexes a clause depending on the preceding
negative : μήποτέ σε παραδω . . . και 6 κριτής σε παραδα
. . . και εις φυλακήν βληθήστ/, Mt. ν. 25 ; add, Mt. vii. 6 ;
χ. 38 ; xiii. 15 ; xxvii. 64 ; Lk. xii. 58 ; xxi. 34 ; Jn. vi.
KM
816
ΚΛ
53 ; xii. 40 ; Acts xxviii. 27 ; 1 Tb. iii. 5 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1 ;
Heb. xii. 15 ; Rev. xvi. 15 ; [see 15. 368 (.ilS) d. ; cf. W.
§56. 2 a.]. d. it anne.xes what follows from something
eaiil before (καί consecutive), so as to be equiv. to mid
so : Mt. V. 15 {και λάμπ(ΐ) ; Mt. xxiii. 32 (και ηληρώσατί) ;
2 Co. xi. 9 (και eV παι^ί) ; Heb. iii. 19; 1 Jn-. iii. 19 {και
ίμπροσθίν); 2 Pot. i. 19 {και ΐχημίν); so in statements
after imperatives and words havin;; the force of an im-
perative : beiiTf ΰπίσω μου, και πυιήσω ίμα! etc. jMt. iv.
19; ecVe λόγω, και Ιαθησίται ό miif μου. Mt. viii. 8; Lk.
vii. 7 ; άντίστητί τω δισ^όλω και φ(ύξ(ται αφ' ίμων, .las.
iv. 7; add, Mt. vii.'? ; Mk. vi. 22; Lk. x. 28; Jn. xiv. Iii ;
Rev. iv. I ; cf. Fritzscbe on Mt. pp. 187 (and 416), [cf.
Sir. ii. 6 ; iii. 1 7]. e. with a certain rhetorical em-
phasis, it annexes something apparently at variance with
what has been previously said ; so that it is equiv. to
ami yet (cf. Stallbaum on Plat. apol. p. 29 b.) ; so the
Lat. alque (cf. Beicr on Cic. de off. 3, 11, 48) : Mt. iii. 14
(«at σϋ tpxn wp6s μ^); Mt. vi. 2S ; x. 29 ; Jlk. xii. 12;
Jn. i. 5 (και ή σ<οτία κτλ.), 10 (και ό κόσμος) ; Jn. iii. 11,
32 ; V. 40 (καΊ oi θί\(τ() : Jn. vi. 70 ; vii. 28 ; viii. 49, 55
(και ουκ ΐγνώκατί) ; Jn. ix. 30 ; 1 Co. v. 2 ; 2 Co. vi. 9 ;
Heb. iii. 9; Uev. iii. 1 (. . . f^s, και veKpos ft), etc. wlien
a vain attempt is spoken of : Mt. xii. 4:i {ζητιϊ και οίχ ίΰ-
ρίσκα) ; xiii• Π; xxvi. 60; Lk. xiii. 7; 1 Th. ii. 18. f.
like the Ilebr. 1 (see Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 396°), it begins
an apodosis, which is thus connected with the protasis,
cf. the derm, da [or Eng. /Ac/i], (in class, (irk. some-
times «i ; see hi, 8) [cf. B. 362 (311) d.; W. § 53, 3 f. ;
Ellic. on Phil. i. 22] : with orf or a temporal if preced-
ing in the protasis [as sometimes in Grk. prose (e. g.
Thuc. 2, 93, where see KrUger)], Lk. ii. 21 ; Acts xiii.
1 8 sq. [here WH txt. om. και ; see a>r, I. 7] ; ir . . . κα\
;8ού, Lk. vii. 12; .\ctsi. 10; .\. 17 [RGTrmrg. br.]; iav
. . . και eiVcXfio•. Rev. iii. 20 Τ WH mrg., although here
και may be rendered also (I also will come in, etc.), de-
claring that, if tlie first thing (expressed in the protasis)
be done, the second (expressed in the apodosis) will be
done also. g. as in class. Grk., it begins a question
thrown out with a certain impassioned abruptness and
containing an urgent rejoinder to another's speech (cf.
W. § 53, 3 a. ; Matthiae § 620, 1 d. ; Kiibner § 521, 3 ii.
p. 791 Sfj.) ; και τΙς δύναται σωθηναι; Mk. χ. 26; Koi τις
ίστΊ μου πλησίον ; Lk. χ. 29 ; και τι? cVtik κτλ. Jn. ix. 36
[G Τ Tr WH] ; .add, Jn. xiv. 22 [G T]. Peculiar is 2 Co.
ii. 2 : el yap cyoj λυπώ ΰμας, και tic . . . (μου (a swarm of
exx. of this form of speech occur in Clem, homil. 2, 43,
e. g. ft ό 6ebs ψ? uScrat, καΐ τις άληθ(ΰ£ΐ ;), where the
writer after the conditional protasis, interrupting him-
self as it were, utters the substance of the negative
apodosis in a new question, where we render who then is
he that etc., for then there is no one who etc. h. it
introduces parentheses [cf. W. § 62, 1] : και ίκωλΰθηρ
άχρι τοΐι 8fCpo, Ro. i. 13 (Dem. Lept. p. 488, 9; so the
Lat. et, e. g. praeda — et aliriuanturo ejus fuit — militi
concessa, Liv. 27, 1); cf. Fntz.'^che, Ep. ad Rom. i. p.
35 sq. 3. It annexes epexegetically both words
and sentences {καΐ epe.xegetical or 'explicative'), so
that it is equiv. to and indeed, namely, [ W. § 53, 3 c. ; cf.
§ 66, 7 fin.] : χάριν και αποστολήν, Ro. ί. 5, where ct.
Fritzsche ; ircpt ίλπί^ος και αναστάσεως ν€κρών, Acts .\xiii.
6 ; πολλά ... κ. ίτίρα, Lk. iii. 1 8 ; πολλά . . . και άλλα
σημΰα, Jn. .\χ. 30 ; πολλά και βαρ^α αιτιώματα, Acts .\χν.
7 ; πολλοί κ. ΰιαιπ<ίτακτοι. Tit. i. 10 [Ιί G; on the prec(Mling
use of και cf. ττολΰς, d. a. lin.] ; και [L br. κ.] όταν άπαρθ!/,
and indueil [i. e. viz.] when he shall be taken away etc. Lk.
v. 35 [others find here an aposiopesis ; cf. Meyer ad lac.
(ed. )tV(.<,<)] ; και χάριν άντΊ χάριτος, Jn. i. 16 ; και 7τ>ρισ-
σϋν ίχωσιν, Jn. χ. 10, add 3.i (where the words και ότι
κτλ. show what kind of blasphemy is meant) ; Acts v.
21 (on which see ■γ(ρουσία) ; Ro. ii. 15 (where και μιταξυ
κτλ. adds an explanation respecting the testimony of
conscience) ; 1 Co. iii. 5 ; xv. 38, etc. ; cf. Borne.mann,
Scholia, p. 38 ; Fritzsche, Quaest. Lcian. p. 9 sqq. ; so the
Lat. el in Cic. Tusc. 3, 20, 48 laiidat. et saepe, virtulem;
pro Mih 25 te enim jam apjiello et ea voce ut me exau-
direpossis; cf. /iu;ns7ior;i, Lat. Gram. ii. p. 809; [Har-
pers' Lat. Diet. s. V. et, II. Λ.] ; i. q. and inileed, to
make a climax, for and besides : και ηκατάκριτο», AcIm
.xxii. 25 ; και toCtoi' ίσταυρωμίνον, 1 Co. ii. 2 ; και τούτο,
Lat. idque (Cic. off. 1, 1, 1 te . . . audientem Cratippum
idque Athenis), our and this, and that, and that too, i. q.
especially : Ro. xiii. 11 ; 1 Co. vi. G, and LT Tr WH in
8, (4 Mace. xiv. 9) ; also και ταύτα (com. in Grk. writ.).
1 Co. vi. 8 Rec; Heb. xi. 12; cf. Klolz, Devar. i. p. lOS;
ii. 2 p. 052 sq. ; [cf. W. 162 (153)]. 4. it connects
whole narratives and expositions, and thus forms a tran-
sition to new matters : Mt. iv. 23 ; viii. 14, 23, 28 ; ix. 1,
9, 27,35; x. 1; Mk. v. 1, 21; vi. 1,6; Lk. viii. 26; Jn. i.
19 (cf. 15) ; 1 Jn. i. 4, etc. ; esp. in the very com. και eyt-
v€TO, Mt. vii. 28; Lk. vii. 11 ; viii. 1, etc. (see γίνομαι,
2 b.). 5. καί . . . και, a repetition which indicates
that of two things one takes place no less than the other:
both . . . and, as well . . . as, not only . . . but also, [W. § 53,
4] : it serves to correlate — not only single terms, as κάί
[L br. K.] ^υχην κα\ σώμα, Mt. χ. 28 ; add, Mk. iv. 41 ; .In.
iv. 36 [here Tr WH om. first κ.] ; Ro. xi. 33 ; Phil. ii. 13 ;
iv. 1 2, etc. ; και iv ολίγω κα\ iv πολλώ [L Τ Tr WH μ(γαΚω\
both with little effort and with great [but see μίγας, 1 a.
■y. fin.]. Acts xxvi. 29 ; but also clauses and sentences, as
Mk. ix. 13; Jn. vii. 28; i.\.37: xii. 28 ; 1 Co. i. 22; and
even things that are contrasted [cf. W. u. s.; B. § 149,
8 b.] : Jn. xv. 24 ; Acts xxiii. 3 ; καί . . . και ού, Lk. v.
36 ; ,Τη. vi. 36 ; now . . . now, >Ik. ix. 22 ; και οΰ . . . καί,
Jn. xvii. 25. 6. τί . . . και, see ri, 2.
II. It marks something added to what has already
been said, or that of which something already said Iiolds
o-ood ; accordingly it takes on the nature of an adverb,
also (Lat. enam, quoque. Germ, auch [cf. W. and B. as
ad init. In this use it generally throws an emphasis
upon the word Λvhich immediately follows it; cf. Klotz,
Devar. ii. 2 p. 63S.]) ; 1. used simply, a. also,
likewise: Mt. v. 39 sq.; xii. 45; Mlc. ii. 28; Lk. iii. 14;
Jn. viii. 19; Ro. viii. 17 ; 1 Co. vii. 29 ; xi. 6. etc.; very
freq. with pronouns: και νμ(ϊς, Mt. xx. 4, 7; Lk. xxi.
:ll : .7n. vii. 47, etc. : κά-γώ. καί rye, see κά-γώ, 2 ; koJ
317
καίνο<!
auTos, fee airros, I. 1 a. preceded by an adverb of com-
parison in tlie former part of tlie sentence : καθων ■ . .
και, Lk. vi. 31 [WHtxt. cm., LTrmrg.br., και i/iilr] ;
Jn. vi. 57; xiii. 15, 33; iJu. ii. 18; iv. 17; iCo. xv. 49;
ώσπίρ . . . ούτω και, Ro. xi. 30 sq. ; 1 Co. xv. 22 ; Gal. iv.
29 ; καθάηΐρ . ■ . οντω καί, 2 Co. Λ'ίϋ. 11; a>f . . . και, Mt.
vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2 RLbr. ; Acts vii. 51 [L καθώ^; 2 Co.
xiii. 2 see it, L 1 fin.] ; GaL i. 9; Phil. i. 20, (Tliuc. 8, 1 ;
ωστΓίρ . . . «αί, Xen. mem. [2, 2, 2 (and Kuhneradloc.)] ;
3, 1,4; [4,4, 7; cf. B. 3G2 (3U)c.]); with d preceding,
GaL iv. 7. sometimes και stands in each member of the
comparison: 1 Th. ii. 14; Ro. i. 13; Col. iii. 13, (2 Mace.
ii. 10; vi. 14; also in Grk. writ., cf. Kluiz ad Dev. ii. 2 p.
635 ; Kiihner on Xen. mem. 1,1,6 [also in his GrK. Gram.
§ 524, 2 vol. ii. 799 ; cf. Ellic. on Eph. v. 23 ; W. § 53,
5]). b. i. q. even [A. V. sometimes yea], (Lat. vel,
adeo; Germ, sogar, selbst) : Mt. v. 46 sq. ; .\. 30; Mk.
L27; Lk. X. 17; iCo. ii. 10; Gal. ii. 17; Eph. v. 12,
etc. c. before a comparative it augments the gror
dation, even, slill, (Germ, nock) : Mt. xi. 9 ; [Jn. xiv. 12];
lleb. viii. 6 [B. 363 (311) g. ; al. regard the και in this
pass, as corresponsive {also) rather than ascensive,
and connect it with 5σω]. d. with a ptcp. i. q. al-
t/wurjh [cf. Kruger § 56, 13, 2]: Lk. xviii. 7 RG [see
μακροθυμίω, 2]. 2. joined with pronouns and par-
ticles, also ; a. with comparative adverbs : ώί και,
Acts xi. 17; 1 Co. vii. 7 ; ix. 5, etc. ; καθώς και, Ro. xv. 7 ;
1 Co. xiii. 12; 2 Co. i. 14; Eph. iv. 17, 32; v. 2, etc.; οΖτω
και, Ro. V. 15 [WH br. /cai], 18 sq. ; vi. 11 ; 1 Co. xi. 12,
etc.; ομοίως και, Jn. vi. 11 ; ωσαύτως καί, Lk. .\.\ii. 20 [R
G LTrmrg., TTrtxt. WH κ. ώσ. (but \VIi reject the
pass.)] ; 1 Co. xi. 25 ; καβάη^ρ καί (see καθάπ(ρ). b.
added to words designating the cause, it marks some-
thing which follows of necessity from what has been
previously said : 8to και, Lk. i. 35 ; Acts x. 29 ; Ro. i. 24
Rec. ; lleb. xiii. 12 ; [1 Pet. ii. 6 R] ; 8ιά τοϋτο καί, Lk. xi.
49 ; Jn. xii. 18 [here Tr txt. om. Tr mrg. br. καί]. c.
after the interrog. τί, κα'ι (which belongs not to τι, but
to the following word [to the whole sentence, rather;
cf. Baumtein, Partikeln, p. 152]) points the significance
of the question, and may be rendered besides, moreover,
(Germ, noch) [cf. AV. § 53, 3 a. fin.; esp. Kriiger § 69,
32, 16]: τί και βατττΊζονται; [Α. Λ'^. why then etc.], 1 Co.
XV. 29; τί κα\ (\πίζ€ΐ; (prop, why doth he also or ye!
hope for, and not rest in the si'r/ht ?), Ro. viii. 24 [R G T] ;
tva τί καί, Lk. .xiii. 7. d. άλλα καί, hitt also: Lk.
xxiv. 22; Jn. v. 18 ; Ro. i. 32 ; v. 3, 11 ; viii. 23 ; ix. 10 ;
2 Co. vii. 7 ; viii. 10, 19, 21 ; ix. 12 ; 1 Jn. ii. 2, etc. ; i. ([.
Lat. at et'iam (in an apodosis after fi) : Ro. vi. 5 [W. 442
(412)]. e. he καί, and 8e . . . καί, hut also, and also:
Mt. iii. 10 [RG]; .xviii. 17; xxvii. 44; Mk. xiv. 31 [WH
br. it"]; Lk. ii. 4; ix. 61 : xiv. 12. 26 [L txt.TrAVH ίτι
T( καί, see €Ti, 2 fin.] ; xviii. 1 [R G], 9 [L br. καί] ; Jn. ii.
2; iii. 23; xviii. 2, 5 ; Acts v. 16; iCo. i. 16; iv. 7 ; xiv.
15 ; XV. 15 ; 2 Co. iv. 3, etc. καί . . . yap. iav καί. el καί,
ή καί, Kaiyf, κα'ι , . . &e, see γάρ II. 10, (άν I. 3, fi HI. 6 sq.,
ή 4 c, ye 3 e., St 9. The examples of crasis with καί in
the N. T., viz. κάγώ (χαμοί, κάμί), Kwtei, KaKfieev, κάκιΐνος,
καν, are noticed each in its place ; for references see
especially κάγώ, init.
Καϊάφα; [λΥΉ Καϊάφας (cf. I, ι fin.) ; Lchm. in Lk. iii. 2
Καιφας], -a [B. 20 (18) ; W. § 8, 1], 6, (supposed by many
to be the same as H2'2, a stone, a rock ; others more cor-
rectly i. q. X0;3, depression, Targ. on Prov. xvi. 26 [ace.
to DeUtzsch (Brief an d. Rom. ins Ilebr. etc. p. 28) ΝϊΙ•;[^]),
Cuia/jhas • ace. to Joseph, (antt. 18, 2, 2) Ίώσηπος, ό
και Καϊάφας {^ϊώσηττον, τον καΐ Καϊίίφαΐ' eπικa\^)ΰμevov,
antt. 18, 4, 3), high-priest of the Jews. He was ap-
pointed to that office by Valerius Gratus, governor of
Judaea, after the removal of Simon, son of Caraith, a.d.
18 [cf. Sc/iurer, N. T. Zeitgesch. § 23 iv.], and Avas re-
moved A.d. 36 by A'itellius, governor of Syria, who ap-
pointed Jonathan, son of the high-priest Ananus [i. e.
Annas, father-in-law of Caiaphas, Jn. xviii. 13], his suc-
cessor (Joseph, antt. 1 8, 4, 3) : Mt. x.xvi. 3,57; Lk. iii. 2 ;
Jn. xi. 49 ; xviii. 1 3 sq. 24, 28 ; Acts iv. 6. Cf. Hausrath
in Schenkel iii. 463 sq.*
καίγΕ, sec ye, 3 e.
Κάϊν [WH Καίν (cf.I, ι fin.)].-o,indecl., (in Joseph.with
a Grk. ending, Kat't, -tos ; Hebr. Γρ i. e. a spear, although
the author of Genesis, iv. 1, derives itfr. njp_ to produce,
beget, acquire, so that it is i. q. rjp, Ps. civ. 24 [cf. B.D.
Am.ed. s. v.]), Cain, the fratricide, the first-born son of
Adam : Heb. xi. 4 ; 1 Jn. iii. 12 ; Jude 11.*
Καΐνάν [so R G L both 1 and 2 ; Tr ΚαΧνάν in 1 and
Tr txt. in 2, but Tr mrtr. Καινάμ in 2, WH Καινάμ 1 and
2; Τ Kaii/apboth 1 and 2], ό, (Hebr. M'p a lance-maker
[al. ' possessor ' or 'possession']), Cainan ; 1. son
of Enos (Gen. v. 9 sq.) : Lk. iii. 37. 2. son of Ar-
phaxad, ace. to the Sept. of Gen. x. 24 ; xi. 12 ; [1 Chr.
i. 18 Alex.], which Luke follows in iii. 36. [See B. D.
s. v.] *
καινό$, -η, -6v ; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down] ; Sept.
for tyin ; neiD, i. 6. a. as respects form ; recently
made, fresh, recent, unused, unworn (opp. to παλαιοί old,
antiquated) : as ασκός, Mt. ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22 [Tom. Tr
WH br. the cl.] : Lk. v. 38 ; ίμάτιοκ, Lk. v. 3G ; πλήρωμα,
Mk. ii. 21 ; μvημeΐov, Mt. .xxvii. 60 ; with ev ώ oi8eπω olSe'is
(τίθη added, Jn. xi.x. 41 ; καινά κ- τταΧαιά, Mt. xiii. 52;
new, which as recently made is superior to what it suc-
ceeds : Βιαθήκη, ]Mt. xxvi. 28 (S" AVH om. καιν.) ; Mk. xiv.
24 R L ; Lk. xxii. 20 (WH reject the pass.) ; 1 Co. xi. 25 ;
2 Co. iii. 6 ; Heb. viii. 8, 13 ; ix. 15, (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.)
31); καινοί ουρανοί, καινή yri, 2 Pet. iii. 13; Rev. xxi. 1,
(Is. Ixv. 17 ; l.xvi. 22) ; 'leρπvσάλήμ (see Ίίροσολυμα, fin.).
Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2; άνθρωπος (see the word, 1 f.), Eph.
ii. 15 ; iv. 24, (καρΒία, ττν^μα. Ezck. xviii. 31 ; x.xxvi. 26) ;
καινά ιτάντα ποιώ. I bring all things into a new and better
condition. Rev. .x.xi. 5 ; γίννημα της άμπίΧου, Mt. xxvi. 29 ;
^Ik. xiv. 25. b. as respects substance ; o/ a new kind ;
unprecedented, novel, uncommon, unheard of, {eTtpa καί
καινά δαιμόνια, Xen. mem. 1,1,1): διδα;^^, Mk. i. 27; Acts
xvii. 19 ; ΐντοΧή. given now for the first time, Jn. xiii. 34 ;
1 Jn. ii. 7sq.; 2 Jn. 5; όι/ομα, with the added explana-
tion ο ouSf is otSf ν (("γνω Rec), Rev. ii. 1 7 (Is. Ixii. 2 ; Ixv.
15) ; ώδή. Rev. v. 9 ; xiv. 3, (Ps. cxliii. (c.xliv.) 9 : νμνος.
καινοτηί
318
καψος
Is. xlii. 10; άσμα, Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 3; xxxix. (xl.) 4,
etc.) ; Xf'yfii' Ti καΐ \_η L Τ 'JV WIIJ άκοίκιν καινότ(ρον,
Acts xvii. 21 (newer so. than that which is already ; [cf.
W. 244 (228 sq.)]); κτίσΐί, Gal. vi. 15; καινά τά ■πάντα,
all things are new, previously non-existent, begin to be
far dilTerent from what they were before, 2 Co. v. 17 [L
Ϊ Tr ^VΊ1 cm. τά πύι^α] ; μηκίτι υνσης τηί ανυμίαί, καινών
Bi γΐγονότων πάντων νπο κυρίου, ϋ'Λνη, ϋρ, 1ϋ, 7. γλώσσαι
(see γλώσσα. 2) : -Mk. xvi. 17 [Tr txt. Wll txt. om. Tr
mrg. br. καιν] '
(SvN. καινό s, v4os: v. denotes the new primarily in refer-
ence to time, the young, recent; κ. denotes the new prima-
rily in reference to quality, the fresh, unworn; 'vtos ad
teiii/mx refertur, xaivos ad rem ; ' see Trench § Ix. ; Tittmaun
i. p. 59sq. ; Green, 'Crit. Note' on Mt. ix. 17 (where the
words occur together). The same distinction, in the main,
holds in classic usage; cf. Schmidt ii. ch. 47.]
καινότη5, -i?roi, 17, (καινός), neivncs^ : iv καινότητι TTVfv-
ματοί, in the new state (of life) in which the Holy .Spirit
places us, Ro. vii. 6 : iv καινότητι ζωηί in a new condition
or state of (moral) Ufe, Ko. vi. 4 {ds καινάτητα aiSiov ζωής,
so as to produce a new state which is eternal life,
Ignat. ad Eph. 19 ; among prof. writ, it is used by Thuc.
3, 38 ; Isocr., Athen., al. ; often by Plut., [applied to the
'novelties' of fashion (French nouvcaute)^).*
καίπερ [Treg. καί irep in Ileb. ; fr. Horn. Od. 7, 224
down], conjunc., [originally even very much, cf. Donald-
son § G21 ; Hiiumlein p. 200 sq.; Krtiger § .56, 13, 2; B.
§ 1 14, 23 ; ^y. § 45, 2 tin.], alllioiir/h ; it is joined to a ptcp.
(in Grk. writ, sometimes also to an adj., so that ων must
be supplied) : Piiil. iii. 4 ; Heb. v. 8 ; vii. 5 ; xii. 1 7 ; 2 Pet.
i. 12; contrary to ordinary usage [yet so occasionally in
Grk. writ.] with a finite verb, Kaiirep ΐστίν, Rev. xvii. 8
Rec. ; but since Grsij. κα'ι πάρισται [correctly τταρίσται
(see in iTaptipi)'\ has been restored after the best codd.*
καιρός, -oO, 0, (derived by some fr. κάρα or κάρη, τ6, the
head, summit, [al. al. ; cf. Vanicek p. 118]); Sept. for I\y
and ^>M■^; in Grk. writ. [fr. lies, down] 1. due
measure ; nowhere so in the bibl. writ. 2. a measure
of time ; a larger or smaller portion of time ; hence a.
univ. a fixed and definite lime: Ro. xiii. 11 ; 2 Co. vi. 2;
νστιροι καιροί, 1 Tim. iv. 1 ; άχ^ρι καιροΰ, up to a certain
time, for a season, Lk. iv. 13 [but in ΰχρι, 1 b. referred
apparently to b. below ; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 309 scp] ;
Acts xiii. 11 ; n-por καιρόν, for a certain time only, for a
season, Lk. viii. 13 ; 1 Co. vii. 5 ; π/)0Γ καιρόν ώρας, for the
season of an hour, i. e. for a short season, 1 Th. ii. 17;
κατά καιρόν, at certain seasons, (from time to time), Jn. v.
4 [K G L] ; at the (divinely) appointed time, Ro. v. 6 [al.
bring this under b.J ; before the time ap]jointed, Mt. viii.
29 ; 1 Co. iv. 5 ; ίσται καιρός, ότ( etc. 2 Tim. iv. 3 ; ολίγον
καιρόν ίχ(ΐ, Ά short time (in which to exercise his poiver)
has been granted him. Rev. xii. 12; (v ϊκίίνω τω καιρώ,
Mt. xi. 25; xii. 1; xiv. 1; Eph. ii. 12; κατ tKf'ivov τ. κ-.
Acts .xii. 1 ; xix. 23 ; κατά τ. κ. τοϋτον, Ro. ix. 9 ; ev αΰτω τώ
κ. Lk. xiii. 1 ; eV ω κ. Acts vii. 20 ; fv τώ viv κ., Ro. iii. 26 ;
xi. 5; 2 Co. viii. 14 (13); cv παντΊ κ. always, at every
season, [Aristot. top. 3, 2, 4 p. 1 1 7*, 35], Lk. x.xi. 36 ; Eph.
vi. 18; its τίνα καιρόν, 1 Pet. i. 11. with the gen. of a
thing, the time of etc. i. e. at which it will occur: τη!
('μής άναλϋσ€ω!, 2 Tim. iv. 6; τής (πισκοπης, 1 Pet. v. 6
Lchm. ; Lk. xix. 44 ; πιιμασμοΰ, Lk. viii. 13 ; τοϋ αρξασθαι
το κρίμα, for judgment to begin, 1 Pet. iv. 1 7 ; καιροΊ των
λόγων, of the time when they shall be proved by the event,
Lk. i. 20 ; — - or when a thing usually comes to pass : toC
θιρισμοϋ, Mt. xiii. 30 ; των καρπών, ivhen the fruits ripen,
Mt. xxi. 34, 41 ; σύκων, Mk. xi. 13. with the gen. of a
pers. : καιροΊ ϊθνών, the time granted to the Gentiles,
until God .shall take vengeance on them, Lk. xxi. 24 ;
ό iavToi (T Tr ^\'H αυτοϋ) κ. the time when antichrist
shall show himself openly, 2 Th. ii. 6 ; ό καιρός μου, the
time appointed for my death, Mt. xxvi. 18; των ν(κρών
κριθηναι, the time appointed for the dead to be recalled
to life and judged. Rev. xi. 18 [B. 260 (224)] ; ό ίμός, 6
ίμίτίρος, the time for appearing in public, a])p()inted
( by God) for me, for you, Jn. vii. 6, 8 ; καιρώ ΙΆίω. the
time suited to the thing under consideration, at its
|)roper time. Gal. vi. 9; plur., 1 Tim. ii. G; vi. 15; Tit.
i. 3. 6 καιρός alone, the time when things are brour/ht to a
crisis, the decisive epoch waited for : so of the time when
the Messiah will visibly return from heaven, Mk. xiii.
33 ; ό καιρός ήγγικ(ν, Lk. xxi. 8 ; ΐγγύς ϊστιν. Rev. i. 3 ;
xxii. 10. b. opportune or seasonable time : with verbs
suggestive of the idea of advantage, καιρόν μ(ταλαμ•
βάνιιν, Acts xxiv. 2.5 ; (χ€ΐν, (ial. vi. 10 (Plut. Luc. 16) ;
(ξαγοράζ€σθαι, Ej>h. v. 16; Col. iv. 5, see εξαγοράζω, 2;
foil, by an inf., opportunity to do something, Ileb. xi. 15 ;
παρά καιρόν ηλικίας, past the opportunity of Ufe [A. V.
pojit af/e], Heb. xi. 1 1 (simi)ly παρά καιρόν, Pind. 01. 8, 32 ;
several times in Plato, cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 1 26). c.
the right time : ev καιρώ (often in class. Grk.), in due sea-
son, Mt. xxiv. 45; Lk. xii. 42; xx. 10 RG L [(ed. ster-
eotyp. only)] ; 1 Pet. v. 6 ; also καιρώ, Lk. xx. 10 L Τ
Tr WII ; τώ καιρώ, ^Ik. xii. 2. d. a (limited) jieriod
of time : [1 Co. vii. 29] ; plur. the periods prescribed by
God to the nations, and bounded by their rise and fall,
Acts .xvii. 26 ; καιροί καρποφόροι, the seasons of the year
in which the fruits grow and ripen. Acts xiv. 1 7 [cf.
Gen. i. 14 Sept.]; καιρόν και καιρούς και ήμισυ καιροΰ, a
year and two years and si.x months [A. V. a lime, and
times, and half a time; cf. W. §27, 4], Rev. xii. 14 (cf. 6;
fr. Dan. vii. 25 ; xii. 7) ; stated seasons of the year sol-
emnly kept by the Jews, and comprising several days, as
the passover, pentecost, feast of tabernaclef;, Gal. iv. 10
[2 Chr. viii. 13 ; cf. Bar. i. 14]. in the divine arrange-
ment of time adjusted to the economy of salvation : ό
καιρός (π(πλήρωται), the preappointed period which ace.
to the purpose of God must elapse before the divine
kingdom could be founded by Christ, Mk. i. 15; plur.,
the several parts of this period, Eph. i. 10; ύ καιρός ό
(νιστώς, the present period, i. q. ό αΙών ούτος (see αιών,
3), Heb. i.\. 9, opp. to καιρός 8ιορθώσ(ως, the time when
the whole order of things will be reformed (i. q. αιών μίλ-
λων), ib. 10; ό καιρός ούτος, i. q. ό αίο^ν ούτος (see αιών,
3), Mk. χ. 30; Lk. xviii. 30; ό νϋν καιρ. Ro. viii. 18; ΐν
καιρώ ΐσχάτω, the last period of the present age, the time
just before the return of Christ from heaven (see ΐσχατος,
Krricrao
319
κακ€ΐνη<!
1 sub fin., etc), 1 Pet. i. 5 ; καιροί αναψύΐίωο ατό προσώ-
π•θ€. 100 κυρίου, denotes the time from the return of Christ
on, the times of the consummated divine kingdom. Acts
iii. 20 (19). e. as often in Grk. writ., and like the
Lat. tempus, καιρός is equiv. to what time brings, the state
oj the limes, the tilings and events of time : Lk. xii. 5G ; δου-
XeiJiic τώ καιρώ, Lat. tempori servire (see δουλβνω, 2 a.),
Ro. xii. 1 1 Kec." ; τα σημίΜ των καιρών, i. q. a. oi καιροί
σημαίνουσι, Mt. xvi. 3 [liere Τ br. λΥΙΙ reject the pass.];
καιροί χα\(ποί, 2 Tim. iii. 1 ; χρόνοι η καιροί (jimes or
seasons. Germ. Zeitumslande), Acts i. 7 ; oi χρον. καΙ οί
καιρ. 1 Th. V. 1 ; and in the opp. order, Dan. ii. 21 Sept.;
Sap. viii. 8.*
[Syh. Katpos, xpovos: χρ. time, in general; κοφ. a defi-
nitely limited portion of time, with the added notion of suit-
ableness. Yet while, on the one hand, its meaning may be
so sliarply marked as to permit such a combination as χρόνου
Kdipos ' the nick of time,' on the other, its distinctive sense
may so far recede as to allow it to be used as nearly equiv.
to xpovos; cf. Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 206, 15 sqq. (after
Ammouius s. v.) ; p. 215, 10 sqq. καιροί ου μόνον «πΙ χρόνου
atrKu/s τίθ€ται, άλλα καΐ €πϊ τοΰ αρμοδίου και ττρίποντοί, κτλ. ;
Schmidt ch. 44; Trench § Ivii. ; Tittmauu i. 41 .sqq.; Cupe
on Aristot. rhet. 1, 7, .32. " In modern Grk. xaipos means
weather, xpovos year. In both words the kernel of meaning
has remained unaltered ; this in the case of καιρ. is change-
ableness, of χρ. duration." Curtius, Etym. p. UOsq.]
Kat<rap, -αροΓ [Bttm. 16 (15)], 6, Ccesar (prop, the sur-
name of Julius Caesar, which being adopted by Octavia-
nus Augustus and his successors afterwards became an
appellative, and was appropriated by the Roman empe-
rors as a part of their title [cf. Diet, of Biogr. and
Mythol. s. V. Caesar]) : Mt. xxii. 17, 21 ; Mk. xii. 14,
16 sq. ; Lk. ii. 1 ; iii. 1 ; xx. 22 ; x.xiii. 2; Jn. xix. 12; Acts
xi. 2-S [Rec] ; xvii. 7, etc. ; Phil. iv. 22.*
Καισ-άρ€ΐα [-ία Tdf. (cf. his note on Acts ix. 30), WH ;
see I, i], -as, ή, Ccesarea ; there were two cities of tliis
name in Palestine: 1. Ccesarea PliiUppi (Καισά-
pfia ή φιλίππου), situated at the foot of Lebanon near
the sources of the .Jordan in Gaulanitis, and formerly
called Paneas (ijv Tlaveada Φοίνικΐ! προσαγορ^υονσιν, Eus.
h. e. 7, 17); but after being rebuilt by Philip the te-
trarch, it was called by him Ccesarea in honor of Tibe-
rius Caesar (.Joseph, antt. 18, 2, 1 sq.) ; subsequently it
was called Neronias by Agrippa II., in honor of Nero
(.loseph. antt. 20, 9, 4) ; now Banias, a village of about
150 [(?) "about 50" {Bddeker), "some forty" {Mur-
ra.i/)] houses: Mt. .xvi. 13; Mk. viii. 27. 2. CcEsa-
rea (more fully Ccesarea of Palestine [mod. Kaisarti/eh']),
built near the Mediterranean by Herod the Great on
the site of Strato's Tower, between Joppa and Dora.
It was provided with a magnificent harbor and had con-
ferred upon it the name of Ccesarea, in honor of Augus-
tus. It was the residence of the Roman procurators,
and the majority of its inhabitants were Greeks (Joseph,
antt. 13, 11,2; 15.9,6; 19,8,2; b. j. 2, 9, 1): Acts viii.
40; IX. 30 ; x. 1, 24 ; xi. 11 ; xii. 19 ; .xviii. 22 ; x.xi. 8, 16 ;
xxiii 23, 33 ; xxv. 1, 4, 6, 13. Cf. Win. RWB. [and BB.
DD 8. V. Caesarea ; Arnold in Herzog ii. p. 486 sqq.;
OverhecH- in Schenkel i. p. 499 sq. ; [Schiirer § 23, i. 9;
and for other reff. cf. Mc. and S. s. v.].*
καίτοι, (fr. καί and τοί), conjunction, with a ptcp. [bu^,
in class. Grk. with a finite verb also (as in Acts below);
Kriiger § 56, 13, 2; cf. reff. s. v. KatVfp], and yet, al-
though : Heb. iv. 3 (although the work of creation had
been finished long ago, so that the rest spoken of cannot
be understood to be that of God himself resting from
that work [cf. Kurtz in loc.]); [Acts xiv. 17 LTTr WH
(but Tr καί Tot)].*
κα£τοίγ€, see ye, 3 f.
[Καίφαϊ, see Καϊάφαί.]
καίω [Vanicek p. 98] ; Pass., pres. καίομαι ; pf. ptcp. Kf-
κανμ/ι/οί; 1 fut. καυθήσομαι (1 Co. xiii. 3 Tdf., where R
G L Tr give the solecistic fut. subjunc. καυθήσωμαι, on
which cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 720 sq. ; W. § 13, 1 e. ; B.
35sq. (31)); [5o;jA. Lex., Intr. p. 40 ; JFi/. App. p. 1 72;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 122. WH txt. Lchm. ed. ster. read καυ-
χήσωμαι (with X A Β etc.) ; on this reading see WH. App.
ad loc; .1. 1Γ. Tgler in Bib. Sacr. for July 1873, p. 502
sq. ; cf. Scrivener, Introd. etc. p. 629 sq. ; Tregelles,
Printed Text etc. p. 191 sq.; Tdf. ad loc.]; Sept. for
1^'3 τΓ\β etc.; [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to set fire to,
light: λίχνον, Mt. v. 15; pass. ptcp. καιόμ^νος, burning,
Lk. xii. 35 ; Rev. iv. 5 ; viii. 10 ; xix. 20 ; with ττυρί added,
Heb. xii. 18 ; Rev. viii. 8 ; xxi. 8 ; in fig. disc. λκ'χχοΓ καιό-
pevos, a light showing the right way, Jn. v. 35 (a com-
parison pointed at the Jews, to whom John the Bap-
tist had been as a torch lighted for a merry-making) ;
metaph. ή καρ&ία ην καιομίνη was glowing, burning, i. e.
was greatly moved, Lk. x.xiv. 32 [W. § 45, 5 ; B. § 144,
28]. 2. to burn, consume with fire: pass., Jn. xv. 6 ;
1 Co. xiii. 3 [see above] ; with ττνρΐ added (cf. igni cre-
mare, Caes. b. g. 1, 4), Mt. xiii. 40 G Tr for R L Τ WH
κατακαί(ται. [Co.MP. : eV, κατα-καίω.'] *
κάκ€ΐ [Grsb. κά.κ(Ί ; cf. κάγώ and reff.], (by crasis fr. km
and «« [cf. Λν". § 5,3; Β. p. 10; esp. Tdf Proleg. p.
96]); 1. and there: Mt. v. 23 [Tr mrg. καΐ iKetJ ;
X. 11 ; x.xviii. 10 [Tdf. καΐ tKfl] ; Mk. i. 35 (Lchm. Koi
(Kfi) ; Jn. xi. 54 ; Acts xiv. 7 ; xxii. 10 ; xxv. 20 ; xxvii.
6. 2. there also : Mk. i. 38 (G WH καϊ ΐκΛ) ; Acts
xvii. 13.*
κάκάθίν [Grsb. κάκ- ; see κάγώ and reff.], (by crasis fr.
καί and ίκύθ^ν [cf.'^V. § 5, 3 ; B. 10 ; esp. Tdf Proleg.
96 sq.]) ; Lat. et inch ; a. of place, and from thence,
and thence : Mk. ix. 30 (R G και ίκύβ^ν) ; χ. 1 [L Τ Tr
WH Kcu. (K. ; Lk. xi. 53 Τ Trtxt. WH] ; Acts vii. 4 ; xiv.
26; xvi. 12 [ίκίΐθίν « RG]; x.x. 15; x.xi. 1 ; xxvii. 4, 12
[LTTrWH eKfiifi/]; .xxviii. 15. b. of time, and
thereafter, and afterward [cf. Bornem. Scholia in Luc. p.
90 sq.] : Acts xiii. 21.*
KUKEivos [Grsb. κάκ- ; see κάγώ and reff.], -ίίνη, fivo,
(by crasis fr. καί and cKfivos [cf. W. § 5, 3 ; esp. Tdf
Proleg. p. 97]); 1. ε'κεΙιόγ referring to the more
remote subject; a. and he (Lat. et ille) : Lk. xi. 7 ;
xxii. 12; Acts xviii. 19; ταίτα . . . κάκίϊνα [Α. V. the
other'], Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi. 42. b. he also: Acts xv.
11 ; Ro. xi. 23 [Rec." και «.] ; 1 Co. x. 6. 2. tKeivot
320
κακοο»
referring to the nearer subject [cf. «wivoi, 1 c.] ; a.
and he (Lat. et is, Germ, uni/ selbiyer) : Mt. xv. 18; Jn.
νϊϊ.29; xix. 35 [LTrWII (caif'ie.J. b. he also (Germ,
auch selbiger) : Mt. xx. 4 [T WII και tV.]; Mk. xii. 4 sq. ;
xvi. 11,13; Lk. xxii. 12 ; Jn. xiv. 12 ; xvii. 24.
κακία, -Of, ή, {κακοί), [fr. 'I'lieognis down], Sept. chiefly
for y, and n>'1 ; 1. malir/nili/, malice, ill-will, ile-
sire to injure : Ho. i. 29 ; Eph. iv. 31 ; Col. iii. 8 ; Tit. iii.
3; Jas. i. 21; 1 Pet.ii. 1. 2. wickedness, depravily:
1 Co. V. 8 [cf. W. 120 (114)] ; xiv. 20; Acts viii. 22 (cf.
21); wickedness that is not a.sliamed to break the laws,
iPet. ii. 16. 3. Ilellenistically, evil, trouble: Mt.
vi. 34 (as Amos iii. 6 ; [IS. vi. 9] ; Eccl. vii. 15(14); .\ii.
1 ; Sir. xix. 6 ; I Mace. vii. 23, etc.).*
[Syn. κακία, ΐΓονηρία: a.s.sociated Ro. i. 29 ; 1 Co. v. 8.
Ace. to Treiicfi, Syn. § xi., endorsed by EUic. (on Eph. iv. 31 )
and Bp. Lghtft. (on Col. iii. 8), κακία denotes rather the vi-
cious disposition, ττονηρία tlni ;ictive exercise of the same ; cf.
Xen. mem. 1.2, 28 ei μίΐ'αΐ'τΐ)^ (i.e. ^ωκράτη$) ΐπο'ΐΐΐ τι φανΚον,
fiKOTus hv fSOKft πονηρίιί flyai ' ft δ' auris ffdj^pofaif StfreAfi,
irdj fef StKG'.ujs Tris οί/κ (Vovai}s αντω κακίας aWiav «χοί; But
Fritzsche, Meyer (on Ro. 1. c. ; yet cf. Wei.^is in ed. 6), al. dis-
sent, — seemin}.' nearly to rever.se tliis distinction: cf. Suidas
s. v. κακία• ίσην τ) τον κακώσαι rhif nf\as σττουΒ-η, πάρα τψ
αποστ&\ψ\ see •πονηρ6ί, 2 Ι).]
κακοήθεια [-5ίσ WII ; see Ι, t], -πγ, η, (fr. κακοήθης, and
this fr. κακής and ήθος), bad character, depravity of heart
and life, Xen., Plat., Isocr., al. ; 4 Mace. i. 4, where cf.
Grimm p. 21)0 : spec, used of malir/nanl sublleli/, malicious
craftiness : Ro. i. 29 (3 Mace. iii. 22; Add. to Esth. viii.
1. 12; Clem. Kom. 1 Cor. 3."), 5; Joseph, antt. 1, 1, 4; 16,
3, 1 ; [c. Ap. 1, 24, 4]; Polyb. 5, 50, 5, etc.). On the
other hand, Aristot. rhet. 2, 13, [3 p. 81] defines it το tVl
TO χ(7ι)ον ίπo\aμβά<'fιv πάντα, \jaking all things in the evil
part, (ienevan N. T. Cf. Trench § xi.].*
κακολογί'ω, -ω ; 1 aor. inf. κακοΚογησαι; {κακοΚό-γος);
ΐ. q. κακώς λί'γω (which the old grammarians prefer, see
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 200) ; 1. to speak ill of, revile,
abuse, one; to calumniate, traduce: τινά, Mk. i.\. 39; τί.
Acts xix. 9 ; (2 Mace. iv. 1 ; Lys., Plut., al.). 2.
Hellenistically, to imprecate evil on, curse : τινά, Mt. xv.
4; Mk. vii. 10, (so for SSp, Prov. .xx. 20; Ezek. .xxii. 7;
E.\. .xxii. 28).•
κακοττάθεια [-θία WH ; see 1, j], -at. ή, (κακοτταθής suffer-
ing evil, afflicted), prop, the suffering of evil, i. e. Iniulile,
distres.'s, affliction: Jas. v. 10 (Mai. i. 13; 2 Mace. ii. 2G
sq.; [Antipho]; Thuc. 7, 77; Isocr., Polyb., Uiod., al.).*
κακοπαθεια, -ώ ; 1 aor. impv. 2 sing, κακοπάθησον ; (κα-
κοπαθής); to suffer {endure) evils (hardship, troubles); to
be afflicted: 2 Tim. ii. 9; Jas. v. 13 [W. § 41 a. 3 fin. ; cf.
§ 60, 4 c.; B. § 139, 28], (Sept. Jon. iv. 10 ; Xen., Plut.,
al.) ; used freq. of the hardships of military service
(Thuc. 4, 9; Polyb. 3, 72, 5; Joseph, antt. 10, 11. 1 ; b. j.
1, 7, 4); hence elegantly κακοπάιίι/σοι/ (I. TTrWII σνγ-
[T WH σνν- (q. V. fin.)] κακοπάθησον) ojt καΧος στρατιώτης,
2 Tim. ii. 3 ; ib. iv. 5. [CoMP. : ανγ-κακοπαθίω.] '
κακο-ίΓΟκ'ω, -ω ; 1 aor. inf. κακοποιι;σαι; (κπκοτΓοιόί); 1.
to ao harm : Mk. UL 4 ; Lk. vi. 9. 2. to do evil, do
wrong: iPet. iii. 17; SJn. 11. ([Aeschyl., Arstph. I,
Xen., Polyb., Ant(min., Plut. ; Sept.) *
KaKoirouSs, -όν, (κακόν and ποκ'ω), doing evil; subst. an
evil-iluer, malefactor : Jn. xviii. 30 [but L mrg. Τ Tr WH
κακό» ποιώχ] ; 1 Pet. ii. 12, 14 ; iii. 16 [T Tr mrg. WII om.
the cl.]; iv. 15. (Prov. xii. 4; Pind., Aristot., Polyb.,
Plut.) *
κακό%,•ή,•όν, Sept. for ^n, [fr. Horn, down], bad, [A.V.
(almost uniformly) evil] ; 1. univ. of a bad nature;
not such as it ought to be. 2. [morally, i. e.] of a
mode of thinking, feeling, acting ; base, wrong, wicked :
of persons, Mt. xxi. 41 [cf. AV. 637 (592); also B. 143
(126)]; xxiv.48; Phil. iii. 2; Rev.ii. 2. διαλογισμοί', . Μ k.
vii. 21 ; όμιλίαι, 1 Co. xv. 33 ; ΐπιθυμία. Col. iii. 5 ( Prov.
.xii. 12) ; ίργα [better tpyoi/], Ro. xiii. 3. neut. κακόν, το
κακόν, evil i. e. what is contrary to law, either divine or
human, wrong, crime: [.Jn. .xviii. 23] ; Acts x.\iii. 9; Ro.
vii. 21; xiv. 20; xvi. 19 ; 1 Co. xiii. 5 ; Heb. v. 14 ; 1 Pet.
iii. lOsq. ; 3 Jn. 11 ; plur. [evil things^ : Ro. i. 30; 1 Co.
X. 6 ; 1 Tim. vi. 10 [πάντα τα κακά all kinds of eviQ; Jas.
i. 13 [W. § 30, 4 ; B. § 132, 24] ; κακόν nou'iv, to do, com-
mit evil : Mt. xxvii. 23 ; Mk. xv. 14 ; Lk. xxdi. 22 ; 2 Ca
xiii. 7 ; iPet. iii. 12; το κακό», Ro. xiii. 4 ; τά κακά, iii. 8;
κακόι/, TO κακό» τΓρίίσσίίΐ/, Ro. vii. 19; ix. II. [Hec.]; .\iii.
4 ; [2 Co. V. 10 11 (; L Tr mrg.] ; το κακόν κατ(ι>γάζ(σθαι,
Ro. ii. 9. spec, of wrongs inflicted: Ro. xii. 21 ; κακόν
ϊργάζομαί Tiw [to work ill to one], Ro. xiii. 10; tvSfίκvvμί,
2 Tim. iv. 14; ποιώ. Acts ix. 13 ; αττοδίδω/α κακόν άντϊ κα•
καν, Ro..xii. 17; 1 Th. v. 15; 1 Pet. iii. 9. 3. Iroublf
some, injurious, pernicious, destructive, baneful : neut.
κακόν, an evil, that which injures, .las. iii. 8 [W. § 59, 8 b. ;
B. 79 (69)]; with the suggestion of ivildness and ferocity,
θηρία. Tit. i. 1 2 ; substantially i. q. had, i. e. distressing,
whether to mind or to body : ίΧκος κακόν κ. πονηρόν [A.V.
α noisome and grievous sore'\. Rev. xvi. 2; κακόν πράσσα
ϊμαυτω, l.at. vim mihi infero, to do harm to one's selj. Acts
xvi. 28 ; κακόν τι πάσχω, to suffer some harm. Acts xxviii.
5 ; τα κακά, evil things, the discomforts which plague one,
Lk. xvi. 25 (opp. to τα αγαθά, the good things, from which
pleasure is derived). [Syn. cf. κακία-] *
κακοΰρ-γος, -ov, (contr. from κακούργος, fr. κακόν and
ΕΡΓΩ ; cf. πανούργος, and on the accent of both see
Gottling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 321 ; [Chandler § 44.5]), as
subst. a malifaclor: 2 Tim. ii. 9; of a robber, Lk. xxiii.
32s(i. [cf. W.530(493); B. § 150, 3], 39. (Prov. xxi. 15;
in Grk. Λvrit. fr. [Soph, and] Ildt. down.) *
κακουχε'ω, -ώ : (fr. obsol. κακονχος, fr. κακόν and f\<•^) ;
to treat ill, oppress, plague : τινά : pres. pass. ptcp. κακου-
;(ούμίΐ'οι, maltreated, tormented, Heb. xi. 37; xiii. 3. (1
K. ii. 26; xi. 39 Alex.; Diod. 3, 23 ; 19, 11 ; Dio C. 35
(36), 9 (11) ; Plut. mor. p. 114 e.) [Comp. : (τυγ-κακου-
χί'ω.]•
κακόω, -ώ : f ut. κακώσω ; 1 aor. ίκάκωσα \ (κακός) ; 1.
to oppress, afflict, liarm. maltreat : τινά. Acts vii. 6, 1 9 ; xii.
1 ; .xviii. 10 ; 1 Pet. iii. 13, (Ex. v. 22; xxiii. 9 Alex. ; in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down). 2. by a usage foreign
to the classics, to embitter (Vulg. ad iracundiam concίιo^ ;
render evil affected, (Ps. cv. (cvi.) 32 ; Joseph, antt. 16,
Λακως
321
<αΛ6(•
1, ? ; 7, 3 ; 8, 6) : την >|α;χίΐ'τ•ι«Γ κατά nirot, against one,
Acts xiv. 2.•
κακώς, (kcucos), adv., [fr. Horn, down], badly, ill, i. e. a.
[in a physical sense] miserably : ίχαν, to be ill, sick [see
ίχω, II. a.], Mt. iv. 24 ; viii. 1 (i ; ix. 1 2 ; xiv. 35 ; [xvii. 15
LTrtxt.WHtxt.]; Mk. [i. 32, 34]; ii. 1 7 ; [vi. 55];
Lk. V. 31 ; vii. 2, etc. ; πάσχαν, Mt. xvii. 15 [R GT Tr
mr!;. \VH mrg.] ; δαιμονίζισθαι, Mt. -xv. 22 ; κακοϋς κακώς
άπολίσ(ΐ, Mt. xxi. 41, υπ tliis combination of words with
verbs of destroying, perishing, etc., which is freip in Grk.
writ, also, cf. Kuinoel ad loc; W. §68, 1. b. [mor-
ally] improperly, wrongly : Jn. xviii. 23 ; kokqis iiVfii* τίνα,
to speak ill of, revile, one. Acts xxiii. 5 ; with bad in-
tent, αϊτίίσθαι. .las. iv. 3.*
κόκωσ -is, -ewf, ψ (κακόω), ill-lrealment, ill-usage, (Vulg.
αβίι'ύο) : Acts vii. 34. (Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 19 ; Ex. iii. 7,
17 ; Job xxxi. 29 [Symm.]; Thuc, Xen., Plut., al.)•
καλάμη, -η!, ή, a slalL' of grain or of a reed, the stalk
(left after the ears are cut off), stubble: 1 Co. iii. 12.
(Ex. v. 12 ; XV. 7 ; Is. xvii. 6 ; Horn, et sqq.) *
κάλαμο;, -ου, ό, fr. Find, down, Lat. calamux i. e. a. α
reed : Mt. xi. 7 ; xu. 20 (fr. Is. xlii. 3) ; Lk. vii. 24. b.
a staff made of a reed, a reed-staff, (as in 2 K. xviii. 21) :
Mt. xxvii. 29 sq. 48 ; Mk. xv. 19, 36. o. α measuring
reed or rod: Rev. xi. 1 ; xxi. 15 sq., (Ezek. xl. 3-6; xlii.
16-19). d. a tcriter's reed, a pen: 3 Jn. 13; [see
Gardtkausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 71 sq.].*
καλ^'ω, -ώ; inipf. ίκαΚουν: fut. καλέσω ( W. § 13, 3 c.) ;
1 aor. f κάλεσα; pt• κίκίηκα; Pass., pres. καλοΟμαι ; pf.
3 pers. sing, κίκληται (1 Co. vii. 18 LTTrWH; [Rev.
xix. 13 LTTrWH]), ptcp. κ(κ\ημίνο!; 1 aor. (κ\ήθην;
1 fut. κΧηθησομαί ; [fr. Horn, down] ; Ilebr. Xip ; Lat.
roco; i. e. 1. to call (Germ, rtifen [cf. βοάω,
fin.]) ; a. to call aloud, utter in a loud voice : άχριι ου
το σημίρον καΚ(Ίται, as long as the word ' to-day ' is called
out or proclaimed, Ileb. iii. 13; τινά. to call one to ap-
proach or stand before one, Mt. xx. 8; xxii. 3 (where
it's Toiis γάμους seems to belong to tovs κfκ^ημfvovi) : ^It.
XXV. 14 ; [Mk. iii. 31 L Τ Tr\VH] ; Lk. xix. 13 ; τά TSta
πρόβατα κατ όνομα, his own sheep each by its name, .In.
X. 3 (where LTTrWH φωι/ίί); used of Christ, calling
certain persons to be his disciples and constant compan-
ions, Mt. iv. 21 (note what precedes in 19 : Stirf όπΙσω
μου) ; Mk. i. 20 ; to order one to be summoned, Mt. ii. 1 5
[see just below]; before the judges. Acts iv. 18; xxiv.
2 ; foil, by ck with gen. of place, i. q. to call out, call forth
from : Mt. ii. 15, cf. Heb. xi. 8. metaph. to cattse to pass
from one state into another : τίνα €κ σκότουρ fit το φως,
1 Pet. ii. 9. b. like the Lat. voco i. q. to invite ; a.
prop. : iis τους γάμους. Mt. xxii. 3, 9 ; Lk. xiv. 8 sq. ; Jn.
ii. 2; to a feast, Lk. xiv. 16; 1 Co. x. 27 [cf. W. 593
(552)]; Rev. xix. 9; ό κα\4σας. Lk. vii. 39; xiv. 9; ό
κίκληκώς Tiva.ih']'] 10,12; οί «κλι/μ/ι/οι, Mt. xxii. 8: Lk.
xiv. 7, 1 7, 24 : (2 Sam. xiii. 23 : Esth. v. 12 ; and often
soinGrk.writ.fr. Horn. Od. 4, 5:!2; 11, 187 down"). β.
metaph. : to invite one, «f τ», to something i. e. to par-
ticipate in it, enjoy it; used thus in the Epp. of Paul
and Peter of God as inviting men by the preaching of
the gospel (8ta toG (Ιαγγ(\Ίου. 2 Th. ii. 14) to tfie tiless-
in^s of the heavenly kingdom : els την i::aat\fiav τοϋ 6fov,
1 Th. ii. 12; ιΐς ζωήν αιώνων, 1 Tim. vi. 12; (is 8ύξαν
οίώνιον,' ι Pet. v. 10 ; (ίς τί)ν κοινωνίαν του υίον αντον, 1 Co.
i. 9 ; so Kohf'iv τίνα used alone : Ro. viii. 30 ; ix. 24 sq. ;
1 Co. vii. 17'sq. 20-22, 24; rti/a καλίίν κλησίΐ, 2 Tim. i. 9;
eV ω (κλήθημιν, in whom lies the reason why we were
called, who is the ground of our having been invited,
Eph. i. 1 1 Lchm. ; άξιος τής κλήσεως, ης (by attraction
for rj [or perh. i^v: cf. W. § 24, 1 ; B. 287 (24V) ; EUi-
cott in loc.]) (κλίιθητ(, Eph. iv. 1 ; God is styled ό καλώ»
τίνα (he that calleth one, the caller, cf. W. § 46, 7), Gal.
v. 8 ; 1 Th. V. 24 ; and ό καλίπας τινά. Gal. i. 6-, Col. i. 12
Lchm. ; 1 Pet. i. 15 ; 2 Pet. i. 3. ol κ(κ\ημ<νοι, Ueb. ix.
15 ; KoKfiv and κοϊΚύσβαι are used with a specification of
the mediate end (for the highest or final end of the call-
inc is eternal salvation): eV ίΚ^υβιρΙα. Gal. v. 13; οίκ
ΐπ ακαθαρσία αλλ' eV άγιασμω, 1 Th. iv. 7 ; cv (ΐρηντ), 1 Co.
vii. 15 ; 4v ίνϊ ί\πί&ι. that ye might come into one hope,
Eph. iv. 4 (see iv, I. 7 [yet cf. W. 417 (389) ; B. 3i9
(283); esp. ElUcott in loc], and fVi, B. 2 a. ζ.); (Ις dpif
νην τοϋ Χρίστου iv ivi σώματι, that ye may be in one
body i. e. be members of one and the same body, Col. iii.
15; eis toCto (which refers to what precedes) foil, by
Ίνα, 1 Pet. ii. 21 ; iii. 9; (but everywhere in the N. T.
Epp. only those are spoken of as called by God who have
listened to his voice addressed to them in the gosjiel,
hence those who have enlisted in the service of Christ —
see Ro. viii. 30 and Riickert's Com. in loc. p. 464. cf. 1
Co. i. 24 ; those who have slighted the invitation are nut
reckoned among the called); Christ also is said KoKeiv
Tiva, sc. to embrace the offer of salvation by the Messiah,
in Mt. ix. 13 and Mk. ii. 17 (in both which pass. Rec.
adds etr μ(τάνυιαν). God is said to call those who are
not yet born, viz. by promises of salvation which have
respect to them, so that KoKtiv is for substance equiv. to
to appoint one to salvation, Ro. ix. 12 (11) ; καΚοίντος τα
μη όντα ως όντα. Ro. iv. 1 7, where cf. Fritzsche, [al. al.,
cf. 'Sleyer (esp. ed. Weiss) ad loc.]. to call (i. ip to select)
to assume some offce, τινά. of God appointing or commit-
ting an office to one, (Germ, berufen) : Gal. i. 15; Heb.
V. 4, (Is. xlii. 6 ; xlix. 1 : Ii. 2). to invite i. q. to rouse,
summon : to do something, ίϊί μίτάνοιαν, Lk. v. 32, added
in Rec. also in Mt. ix. 13 and Mk. ii. 17. 2. to call
i. e. to name, call by name; a. to give a name to; with
two ace, one of the object the other of the name as a
predicate [to call one (by) a name : Mt. x. 25 Rec. ; cf.
W. § 32, 4 b.; B. 151 (132) note] ; pass. w. the nom. of
the name, to receive the name of receive as a name : Mt
ii. 23 ; xxvii. 8 ; Lk. i. 32, 60, 62 ; ii. 4, etc. ; καλούμ(νος.
called, whose name or .surname is, Lk. vii. 11 ; Lx. 10; -χ.
39 ; Acts vii. 58 ; xxvii. 8, 16 ; ό καΧοϋμιΐ'ος [on its posi-
tion cf. B. § 144, 19] : Lk. vi. 15 ; viii. 2 ; [.vxii. 3 Τ Tr
Will: xxiii. ••!3; Acts i. 23 ; x. 1 ; xiii. 1 ; [xv. 22 L Τ
Tr WIT] : xxvii. 14 ; Rev. xii. H : xvi. 16 ; with ονόματι
added, Lk. xix. 2 : κα\ί~ισθαι ονόματι τινι. to be called
bv a name, Lk. i. 61 : κα\(Ίν τίνα ϊπ\ τω ονόματι τ^^of,
' Lk. i. 59 (see tVi, Β. 2 a. η. p. 233") ; aiter the Hebr. K-;p,
χαλλίέΧαιοί
822
κάλυμμα
102?-ΠΚ, καλίίι» τΑ ίνομά τινοί, with the name in the ace,
ίο give some name to one, call hia name : ^It. i. 21, 23, 25 ;
Lk. i. 13, 31 ; pass., Lk. ii. 21 ; Rev. .xL\. 13 ; Gen. xvii.
19 ; 1 S. i. 20, etc. (simihirlv sometimes in Grli. writ., cf.
Fritzsche on ISIt. p. 45 [B. 151 (132)]). b. Pass.
καλούμαι with |)rcclicale nom. to he called i. e. to bear a
name or lille (among men) [cf. W. § 65, 8] : Lli. i. 35 ;
xxii. 25 ; Acts viii. 10 [llec. om. καλ.] ; 1 Co. xv. 9 ; to be
said to be (i. q. to be acknowledged, pass as, the nomina-
tive expressing the judgment passed on one) : Mt. v. 9,
19; Lk. i. 32, 35, 76 ; ii. 23 ; xv. 19; Ro. ix. 26 ; Jas. ii.
23 ; opp. to dvai, 1 Jn. iii. 1 L Τ Tr WH ; Ilebraistioally
(Gen. xxi. 12) <V Ισαάκ κληθησ(ταί σοί σττίμμα, through
[better in, cf.ev, I. 6 c. ;uul Jleyer (cd. Weiss) ad Ro. 1.
c.] Isaac shall a seed be called for thee, i. e. Isaac (not
Ishmael) is the one whose posterity shall obtain the name
and honor of thy descendants, Ro. ix. 7 and Heb. xi.
18. c. καλώ Tiva, with an ace. of the predicate or a
title of honor, to salute one by a name : Mt. xxiii. 9 ;
Pass., ib. 7 sq. 10 ; Rev. xix. 1 1 [but Tr mrg. WH br. κ.] ;
to give a name to one and mention him at the same time,
Mt. xxii. 43, 45 ; Lk. xx. 44. [Comp. : άντι-, iv-, ela-
(^-μαι), €7Γΐ-, μ(τα-, πάρα-, σνν-^αρα-, ιτρο-, ττροσ-, συγ-καλβ'ω-]
καλλι-ίλαιθ9, -ου, η, (fr. κάλλορ and ίΧαία), the fjarden
olive, [Α. V. good olive trce~\, (opp. to dypieXator tlie wild
oHve) : Ro. xi. 24. Aristot. de plant. 1, 6 p. 820", 40.'
καλλΐων, see koKos, fin.
καλο-ει8άσκαΛο5, -ου, ό, ή, (διδάσκαλοΓ and κάΚόν, cf.
UpohihavKoKoi, ΐΌ/ιοδιβάσκαλο?, γρρο^ι^άσκαλοί) , teaching
that ichich is good, a teacher of goodness: Tit. ii. 3. No-
where else.*
καλοί λιμ€'ν<$ (καλοΓ and \ιμψ), Fair Havens (Germ.
Schonhafen ; Luth. Gutfurt), a bay of Crete, near tlie
city Lasa;a ; so called because offering good anchorage ;
noiv Limenes kali [BB.DD.] : Acts xxvii. 8.*
καλ(Ηποΐ(ω, -ώ; (i. q. καλώ; ποιώ, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
199 sq. [W. 25]); to do well, act uprighlhj: 2 Th. iii. 13.
(Etym. Magn. 189, 24; [Lev. v. 4 Aid. (as quoted in)
Philo de somn. 1. ii. § 44].) *
καλέ;, -η, -όν, [prob. primarily ' sound,' ' hale,' ' wliole ; '
cf. Vanicck p. 140 sq. ; Curtius § 31], Sc])t. for Π3" beau-
tiful, but much oftener for 2)0 good ; beautiful, appUed
by the (ireeks to everything so distinguished in form, ex-
cellence, goodness, usefulness, as to be pleasing ; hence
(ace. to the context) i. q. beautiful, handsome, excellent,
eminent, choice, surpassing, precious, useful, suitable, covi-
mendable, admirable ; a. beautiful to look at, shapeli/,
magnificent : "ΚΙΘοίί καλοί; κ^κόσμηται [Α. V. goodlif], Lk.
xxi. 5. b. good, excellent in its nature and character-
istics, and therefore well-adapted to its ends : joined to the
names of material objects, univ. 1 Tim. iv. 4 (i. q. pure) :
esp. of things so constituted as to answer the purpose for
which that class of things was created ; good of its kind :
τα καλά, of fish, opp. to such as are thrown away (τα
σατρα), Mt. xiii. 48; σπίρμα, Mt. xiii. 24, 27, 37 sq. ;
Kapiras, Mt. iii. 10 ; vii. 17-19; xii. 33 ; Lk. iii. 9 [L WH
br. καλ.] ; vi. 43 ; ttvipov, opp. to σαπρόν, Mt. xii. 33 ;
Lk. vi. 43 ; γη, Mt. xiii. 8, 23 ; Mk. iv. 8, 20 ; Lk. viii. 15 ;
καλόν TO άλοΓ (is an excellent thing), Mk. ix. 50 ; Lk. xlv.
34 ; so too ό i/o/iof, good in its substance and nature, and
fitted to beget good, Ro. vii. 16; 1 Tim. i. 8; διδασκαλία,
true anil approved teaching, 1 Tim. iv. 6 ; καρδία καλι) κ.
άγαθί), Lk. viii. 15; παραθί]κη [([. v.] (containing [rather,
consisting of] καλά), 2 Tim. i. 14; μίτρον, ample mea.s-
ure (rabbin, n^lu ΓΠη ; Eng. gooil measure), Lk. vi. 38 ;
βαθμό! (firm [but see /3ad/xor]), 1 Tim. iii. 13 ; also θ(μί-
λιοί, 1 Tim. vi. 19; i. q. genuine, approved, πάντα δοκιμά-
ζίτι, το καλόν KaTf\fTf, 1 Til. v. 21 ; i. q. precious [.V.V.
goodly}, μαργαρίται, Mt. xiii. 45 ; i. (j. superior to other
kinds, olvos, .In. ii. 10 ; joined to names of men desig-
nated by their othce, ro/npelcnt, able, such as one ou)/lil to
be : ποιμην, Jn. x. 11, 14 ; διάκονος, 1 Tim. iv. G ; οικονόμος,
1 Pet. iv. 10; στρατιώτης, 2 Tim. ii. 3; joined to nouns
denoting an effect estimated by the power it involves,
or by its constancy, or by the end aimed at by its author,
i. ({. praiseworthy, noble: στρατΰα, 1 Tim. i. 18; ayui>, 1
Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 7 ; ομολογία, 1 Tim. vi. 12 sq. ;
tpyov, Mt. x.xvi. 10 ; Mk. xiv. G ; Jn. x. 33 ; 1 Tim. iii. 1 ;
plur. Jn. X. 32. καλόν ίστιν, it is expedient, proftable,
wholesome : foil, by an inf. as subject, 1 Co. vii. 1 ; w. Ttxi
added [so in 1 Co. 1. c. also], Mt. xviii. 8 sq. [cf. W. 241
(226) ; B. § 149, 7] ; Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47, R (ί [also L Tr
mrg. in 47] ; 1 Co. vii. 26 ; ix. 15 ; κ. icrriv foil, by the ace.
and inf., Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47, L (but see above) Τ Tr (but
not mrg., see above) WH ; Heb. xiii. 9 ; foil, by d [cf.
B. 217 (187sq.); W. 282 (265)], Mt. xxvi. 24 ; Mk. ix.
42 ; xiv. 21 ; foil• by iav [B. and W. u. s.], 1 Co. vii. 8 ;
it is pleasant, delightful, foil, by ace. witli inf. : Mt.
xvii. 4 ; Mk. ix. 5 ; Lk. ix. 33. c. beautiful by rea-
son of purity of heart and life, and hence praiseworthy ;
morally good, noble, (Lat. honrslus; [cf. Aristot. το καθ'
αντί) καλοΊ»]): διάκρισις καλοϋ τί και κακοΟ, Ileb. ν. 14;
tpya, Mt.v. 16; 1 Tim. v. 10, 25 ; vi. IS ; Tit. ii. 7, 14 ; iii.
8, 1 4 ; Ileb. x. 24 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 2, and Lchm. in 2 Pet. i. 1 ;
ανάστροφη, Jas. iii. 13 ; 1 Pet. ii. 12; καλή σννίίδησις, con-
sciousness of good deeds, [A.V. a gooii conscience'], Heb.
xiii. 18; καλά, καλόκ ίνώπιόν τίνος, in one's judgment, Ro.
xii. 17 ; 2 Co. viii. 21 ; 1 'Jim. ii. 3 and Kec. in v. 4 ; ζηλοϋ-
σθαι iv κιϊλω, Gal. iv. 18 ; το καλοί/ κατ(ρ-/άζ(σθαι, Ro. vii.
1 S ; noiiiv, ib. 21 ; 2 Co. xiii. 7 ; Gal. vi. 9 ; Jas. iv. I 7 ; καλόν
ίστιν, it is right, proper, becoming, foil, by an inf. : Mt. xv.
26 (L Τ ^(στιν) ; [Mk. vii. 27] ; Gal. iv. 1 8 [here Tr mrg.
impv.] ; Ro. xiv. 21. d. honorable, conferring honor:
μαρτυρία, 1 Tim. iii. 7 ; όνομα, Jas. ii. 7 ; οΰ kclKov to καύ-
χημα ίμων, 1 Co. V. 6. e. affecting the mind agreeably,
comforting and confirming : θ(οϋ ρήμα (Sept. for 2)0 "^y^,
which is spoken of the divine promises. Josh. xxi. 45 ;
Zech. i. 13), the gospel and its j)romises full of consola-
tion, Heb. vi. 5. Compar. καλλίωι^, -ov, better: neut.
adverbially, σϋ καλλιον ίπιγινώσκ(ΐς, i. e. better than by
thy question thou seemest to know, Acts xxv. 10 [W. 242
(227)]. The word is not found in the Apocalypse. [Cf.
Trench § cvi. fin.; Zezschwitz, Profangracitat u. s. w. p.
60 sq. (cf. ά•)ΐαθός, fin.) ; Westcott on Jn. x. 11.] *
κάλνμμα, -ros, το, (καλϋητω), a veil, a covering : 2 Co. iii.
13 (Ex. xxxiv. 33) ; [καΚνμμα, or its equiv., is suggested
ΐίίΧυ-Ί
323
καν
to the reader by tlie context in 1 Co. xi. 4 κατά Κ€φαλή!
ϊχων; see ίχω, I. 1 b.] ; metapb., 2 Co. iii. 14-16, of that
which prevents a thing from being understood. (Ilom.,
Tragg., Arstph., al. ; Sept.)*
καλνίΓτω ; fut. καλύψω; 1 aor. (κά\υψα\ Pass., pres. inf.
καλντττςσθαί ; pf. ptcp. κΐκάλυμμ^νυς ; [allied with κρύπτω ;
Vanicek p. 1091 ; Curliu:<, Das Verbum, i. 242;] Sept.
for nD3 ; often in Horn., Tragg. and otlaer poets, more
rarely in prose ; to cover, cover up ; prop. : τινά, Lk. xxiii.
30 ; Ti Tivi, a thing with anything, Lk. viii. Hi ; pass. Mt.
viii. 24 ; trop. to hide, veil, i. e. to hinder the knoidedge
of a thing : pf. pass., ^It. x. 2ti ; 2 Co. iv. 3 ; πλήθος αμαρ-
τιών, not to regard or impute them, i. e. to pardon them,
1 Pet. iv. 8 ; to procure pardon of them from God, Jas.
V. 20; cf. Ps. Ixxxiv. (Ixxxv.) 3 (2) ; xxxi. (xxxii.) 1 sq.
[CoMP. : ava-, ano-, iiri-, κατά-, πάρα-, π(ρι-, συγ-καΧΰπτω.^ '
καλώϊ, (καλός), adv., [fr. Hom. down], beaitlifuUij, fine-
ly, excellenlhj, well: [univ. δια το καλώς οίκο8ομήσθαι
(Tr -μά,σθαι, q. v.), Lk. vi. 48 Τ Tr WII] ; spec. a.
righthj, xo that there shall he no room for blame: joined to
verbs of speaking {άποκρίν^σθαι, λαΧξΙν, Xi'yfii/, προφη-
Tfidv, etc.), well, truly, ΛΙΐ. xv. 7 ; Mk. vii. 6 ; Lk. xx. 3'j ;
Jn. iv. 1 7 ; viii. 48 ; xiii. 13 ; [xviii. 23] ; Acts xxviii. 25 ;
fitlg, i. e. agreeably to the facts and words of the case,
Mk. xii. 28 ; καλώς right .' well ! an expression of approv-
al: Mk. xii. 32; Ro. xi. 20; of deeds: κ- ποκΊν, to do
well, act uprightly, Jas. ii. 19 ; 1 Co. vii. 37 sq. (where the
teaching is, that one can do καλώ?, but another κρύσσον) ;
καλώς ποκίν with ptcp. to do well that, etc. [B. § 144, 1.5 a. ;
W. 345 (323)], Acts x. 33 ; Phil. iv. 14 ; 2 Pet. i. 19 ; 3
Jn. 6. (1 Mace. xii. 18, 22; 2 JNIacc. ii. 16, etc.); with
verbs denoting a duty or office which one fulfils wtU :
1 Tim. iii. 4,12 sq. ; v. 17; spec, honestly, uprightly :
Gal. iv. 17 ; άναστρ(φ(σβαι, Heb. xiii. 18 ; jroieiv, Jas. ii.
8. b. excellently, nobly, commendably : 1 Co. xiv. 1 7 ;
Gal. V. 7; καλώς πάντα π(ποίηκ(, Mk. vii. 37; with bitter
irony, Mk. vii. 9 (where cf. Fritzsche p. 271 sq.) ; 2 Co.
xi. 4. c. honorably, in honor : Jas. ii. 3 [al. give it
here an outward reference, i. q. in a good place, comfori-
ably']. d. καλώς eme'iv τίνα, to speak well of one, Lk.
vi. 26 ; K. πο^'ϊν τίνα, to do good to, benefit one, Mt. v. 44
Rec. ; Tivi [\V. § 32, 1 0. ; B. 146 (128)], Lk. vi. 27 ; καλώς
TTOieiv, simply, to do good : Mt. xii. 1 2. e. καλώς ΐχιιν,
to be well (of those recovering health) : Mk. xvi. 18.*
[κάμΐ€, see κάγώ.]
κάμηλο?, -ου, ό, ή, Hebr. 70J, [fr. Hdt. down], a camel
[BB.DD. s. V. ; Tristram, Nat. Ilist. etc. p. 58 sqq.] :
Mt. iii. 4 ; Mk. i. 6 ; in proverbs, Mt. xix. 24 ; Mk. x. 25 ;
Lk. xviii. 25, (meaning, ' something almost or altogether
impossible' [cf. Farrar in The Expositor for 1876 i. p.
369 sqci- ; esp. Wetzstein in the Sitzungsberichte d. Akad.
d. Wissensch. zu MUnchen, 1873, pp. 581-596]) ; Mt.
xxiii. 24 (of one who is careful not to sin in trivial mat-
ters, but pays no heed to the more important matters).*
κάμιλοΐ, -ου, ό, a cable ; the reading of certain Jlss. in
Mt. xix. 24 and Lk. xviii. 25, [see Tdf.'s notes]. The
word is found only in Suidas [1967 c] and the .Schol. on
Arstph. vesp. [1030] : " κάμιλος τό παχύ σχοινίον Sia τοϋ
t." Cf. Passow [or L. and S.] s. v.; [WH. App. p.
151"].*
κάμινοϊ, -ou, ή, ή. [Hom. ep. 14, 2 etc., Hdt. on], a furnace
(either for smeUing, Xen. vectig. 4, 49, or for burning
earthen ware, or baking bread, Gen. xix. 28 ; Ex. xix.
18 ; Jer. xi. 4 ; Dan. iii. 6) : Mt. xiii. 42, 50 ; Rev. i. 15 :
i.x. 2.*
καμμΰω, a form which passed over from the Epic (cf.
Hom. batrach. 191) and com. language [ApoU. Dysc.
synt. 323, 22 ; 326, 9] into the Alexandrian and decaying
Greek ; condemned by Phryn. [as below] ; derived by
syncope and assimilation from καταμνω (which the earlier
and more elegant Greeks use), (cf. καμμίν, καμμονή, κάμ-
μορος, fr. κατά μίν, καταμονη, κατάμορος, cf. Bttm. Gram.
§ 117, 2 Anm. 2; Ausf. Gram. ii. p. 373; Fischer, De
Vitus lexx. N. T. p. 678 sq.; Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc.
p. 173 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 339 sq.; Schafer ad Lamb.
Bos p. 368 ; [cf. B. 62 (55) ; W. 24, 46]) ': 1 aor. eVd^-
μυσα; to shut the eyes, close the eyes : often w. τους οφθαλ-
μούς added ; so Mt. xiii. 15 and Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Sept.
Is. vi. 10, for i^pri, i. e. to besmear), in both which pass,
the phrase designates the inflexible pertinacity and ob-
stinacy of the Jews in their opposition to the gospel.
(Is. .xxix. 10; Lam. iii. 43; καμμύ^ιν το της ψνχής όμμα,
Philo de somn. i. § 26.) *
κάμνω ; 2 aor. ϊκαμον ; pf. κίκμηκα ; 1. to grow
iceary, be weary, (so fr. Hom. down) : Rev. ii. 3 Rec. ;
Heb.xii. 3. 2. ίο ie s/ct: Jas. v. 15 (Soph., [Hdt.],
Arstph., Eur., Xen., Plat., Aristot., Diod., Lcian. al.).*
[κάμοί, see κάγώ.]
κάμίΓτω; fut. κάμψω; 1 aor. ίκαμψα; a. to bend,
bow : TO yo'n; (and τα γούνατα), the knee (the knees), used
by Hom. of those taking a seat or sitting down to rest
(Π. 7, 118; 19, 72); in bibb Grk. with dat. of pers. to
one i. e. in honor of one, in religious veneration ; used
of worsliippers : Ro. xi. 4 and 1 K. xix. 1 8 (where for
>'Ί3 foil, by S) ; προς τίνα, towards (unto) one, Eph. iii.
14. b. reflexivelj', to bow otie's self: κάμψει πάν
γόνν ΐμοί, shall bow to me (in honor), i. e. every one shall
worship me, Ro. xiv. 11 (fr Is. xlv. 23) ; iv τω ονόματι
Ίι/σοϋ, in devout recognition of the name (of κύριος)
which Jesus received from God, Phil. ii. 10 [cf. W. 390
(365) ; Bp. Lghtft., Meyer, in loi,.; also όνομα, esp. sub
fin. CoMP. ; ava-, σνγ-κάμπτω~]*
Kciv [Grsb. καν; see κά•/ώ, init.], by crasis for καΐ (άν
[cf. W. § 5, 3 ; B. p. 10 ; Tdf Proleg. p. 97 ; T17/. Α]ψ.
p. 145'] ; hence joined with tlie subjunctive ; 1.
and if: Mt. x. 23 G L; Mk. xvi. 18 ; [Lk. xii. 38 (bis)
Τ Tr txt. WH ; Jn. viii. 55 L Τ Tr WH; 1 Co. .xiii. 2'
L WH, 2' Tr txt. WH, 3» L Tr WH, 3' L AVH]; Jas.
V. 15 ; by aposiopesis Avitli the suppression of the apodo-
sis, K&v μ£ν ποιήα-τ) καρπόν, sc. (S ίχ€ΐ it is well (or some
such phrase), Lk. xiii. 9 ; cf. W. 600 (558) ; [B. § 151,
26]. 2. also or even if; a. if only, at least, in
abridged discourse : κ&ν τών Ιματίων αυτού, sc. αψωμηι,
Mk. V. 28 ; also ίνα (sc. αψωνται avTov) καν τον κρασπίδου
. . . άψωνται, Mk. vi. 56 ; ινα ΐρχομίνον Τΐίτρον (sc. τι
αύτοϋ ϊπισκιάση αντών) κ&ν η σκιά etc. Acts ν, 15 ; κ&ν ώς
Κα
324
«αττηλευω
δφρονα SC. ϋξησθί μ(, 2 Co. xi. IG : (Sap. xiv. 4 ; χ v. 2).
Cf. B. §149, G; [W. 584 (543): Green, Gram, of the
N. T. p. 230 ; Klol: ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 189 sq. ; L. and S.
s. V. ; Soph. Lex. s. v.]. b. even if: Mt. xxi. 21 ; xxvi.
35; Jn. viii. 14; x. 38; [.\i. 2.^>] ; Ileb. xii. 20.•
Κανά Ι-νά AVII; cf. T,lf. ProU•-. p. 103; W. § G, 1 m.],
ή [Β. 21 (19)], Caim, indecl. [W. Gl (GO); but dat. -ι/ά
Kec." in .In. ii. 1, 11], prop, name of a village of (ialilee
about three hours distant from Nazareth towards tlie
northwest, surviving at jiresent in a place (partly unin-
habited and partly ruinous) called Kana el-.Iei'il\ cf.
Robinson, Bibl. Researches, ii. 346 sq. ; also his Later
Bibl. Researches, p. 108; cf. Ewald, Gesch. Christus
u. s. w. p. 147 (ed. 1) ; ΛϋείΛ'Λί in Herzog vii. 234; [Por-
ter in Alex.'s Kitto s. v. Several recent writers are in-
clined to reopen the question of the identification of
Cana ; see e. g. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. ; Zeller, in Quart.
Statem. of Palest. Expl. Fund, Xo. iii. p. 71 sq.; Arnawl,
Palestine p. 41 2 sq. ; Conder, Tent Work etc. i. 150 sq.] :
Jn. ii. 1, 11 ; iv. 4G ; xxi. 2.•
Kavovaios I.. Ϊ Tr WII in Mt. x. 4 and :\Ik. iii. 18 (for
RG \ίανανίτψ, q. v.) ; ace. to the interp. of Bleek (Erkliir.
d. drci ersten Ενν. i. p. 41 7) et al. α native of Cana (see
Καΐ'ά) ; but then it ought to be ivritten Kavaios. The
reading Kuvavaios seems to be a clerical error occasioned
by the preceding θαδδαίοΓ [or Af/3,3aios] ; ef. Fritz.sche
on Mt. X. 4. [But -aios is a common ending of the Gre-
cized form of names of sects (cf. Άσσιδαϊοί, ΦαρισαΊηί,
2αδδουκηΐ()5, Έσσαίοί). Hence the word is prob. derived
fr. the Aramaic [KJ") (see next word) and corresponds
to ^Γ;λωτ7)Γ, q. V. (cf. Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13). See Bp.
Lijlilfl. Fresh Revision etc. p. 138 sq.] *
Κοναν(τη5, -ου, ό, (fr. Chald. JSjp, Ilebr. Κρ,), i. q- 6
ζηλί^της (acc. to the interpr. of Luke in vi. 15; Acts i.
13), q. v., the Zealot, a surname of the apostle Simon :
RG (the latter with small κ) in Mt. x. 4 and Mk. iii. 18.*
Κανδάκη, -η!. ή.ΟαηιΙαπ', a name common to the queens
of a region of Ethiopia whose capital Avas Napata; just
as the proper name Ptolemi/ was common to the Egyp-
tian kings, and Ilcnnj to the Reuss princes (Strabo 1 7,
1, 54 p. 820 ; Plin. h. n. G, 35 ; Dio Cass. .54, 5) : Acts viii.
27; cf. Laurent, Die Konigin Kandake, in the Zcitschr.
f. d. luth. Theol. for 18(;2, p. i;32 scjq. [reprinted in his
N. T. Studien p. 140 sq. ; cf. esp. B. I). Am. ed. s. v.].•
κανών, -ovos, 6, (κάννα. Ilebr. r\^n^ a cane, reed; Arab.
<5
isLo a reed, and a spear, and a straight stick or staff
[ef. Vaiucek; Fremdworter etc. p. 21]), prop, a rod or
straight piece of rounded wood to which any thing is
fastened to keep it straight ; used for various purposes
(see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v.) ; a measurinc; rod, rule;
a carpenter's line or measuring tape, Scliol. on Eur.
Ilippol. 468 : hence i. (j. to μίτρον τοί -πήγματος (Pol-
lux, Onom. 3, 30, 151), the measure of a leap, as in the
Olympic games ; accordingly in the N. T. 1. a
definitely bounded or fixed space within the limits of which
one's power or influence is confined ; the province assigned
one; one's sphere «f activity: 2 Co. x. 13, 15 sq. 2.
Metaph. any rule or stayidard, a principle or law of in-
vestigating, judging, living, acting, (often so in class.
Grk., as τον καΚον, Eur. llec. G02; opoi των αγαθών κ.
κανόνα, Dera. pro cor. p. 324, 27) : Gal. vi. 16; Phil. iii.
16 Rec. Cf. Credner, Zur Geseli. des Kanons (Hal.
1847), p. G sq((.; [esp. Westcott, The Canon of the N. T.,
App. A; briefly in 15. D. s. v. Canon of Scripture; for
exx of later usage see Soph. Lex. s. v.].'
ΚαΐΓίρναούμ or more correctly (with LTTr AVIl [cf.
WII. App. p. USO; Scrivener, Introd. p. 5GI]) Καφαρ-
ναονμ, (133 a village, and Dinj consolation; hence 'the
village of consolation,' [aL 'village of Nachum' (a
prop, name)]; Καπαρναοίμ,νίοΙ. 5,16,4), ή,Capernnum
or Caphamaum, a flouri.shing city of (ialilee (Mt. xi. 23 ;
Lk. X. 15), situated on the western shore of the Sea of
Galilee or Lake of Gennesaret (Jn. vi. 17, 24 ; hence ή
παραθαλάσσια, Mt. iv. lo), near the j)lace where the Jor-
dan ilons into the lake. Being nowhere mentioned in
the (). T. it seems to have been built after the exile [cf.
also B. D. s. V. Caphar]. Josephus mentions (b. j. 3, 10,
8) a fountain in Galilee called by the neighboring
residents Καφαρνηυύμ, and (vita 72) ' κώμηυ Κιφαρνώμην',
and it is (piil(i jirobable that he meant the town we are
speaking of. It is mentioned in the N. T. (besides the
pass, already cited) in Mt. viii. 5 ; xvii. 24 ; Mk. i. 21 ; ii.
1 ; ix. 33; Lk. iv. 23, 31 ; vii. 1 ; Jn. ii. 12; iv. 46; vi. 59.
Cf. n'i'n. RWB. s. v. ; Vaihint/er in Ilerzog vii. 3(19;
Fiirrer in Schenkel iii. 493 S([. ; [the last nanii'd writ.
gives at length (see also Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Palaest.-
Vereins for 1879, p. 63 sqq.) his reasons for preferring
(contra Robinson, Scpp, etc.) to identify C. with Tell
Hum ; so (after earlier writ. ; cf. Arnaud p. 414),AViner
u. s.. Dr. AA'ilson, Lynch, Ritter, Delitzsch, Tristram
(Land of Israel, ed. 3, p. 428 sqq.) and more recently
Capt. AVilson (-Our Work in Palestine' p. 186 sq. and
' Recovery of .Jerusalem ' p. 2(ji; sq. (292 sq(j.)). But Con-
der (Tent Work in Palestine ii. 182 sqcj.) argues fr.
Jewish author, in favor of Khan ^finyeh ; see B. D. Am.
ed. s. V.].•
κα•ΐΓηλ€ύω ; (κάηηΚος, i. e. a. an inn-keeper, esp. a vint-
ner; b. a petty retailer, a huckster, pedler; cf. Sir.
xxvi. 20 οϋ ^ικαΐίύθησίται. κάπηΚοί άττο αμαρτίας) ; a.
to be a retailer, to peddle ; b. with ace. of the thing,
to make money by sellinr/ anything; to get sordid gain by
dealing in anything, to do a thing for base gain (oi τα μα-
θήματα nfpu'tyovTfs κατά ηολίΐς κα\ ττωλονντίς κ. καπηΧ^ν-
ovTtt, Plat. Prot. p. 313 d.; μάχην, Aeschyl. Sept. 551
(545) ; Lat. cauponari bellum, i. e. to fight for gain, trade
in war, Enn. ap. Cic. offic. 1, 12, 38; έταίραν το τηί upas
άνθο! κατΓηΚίύουσαν, Philo de caritat. § 14, cf. leg. ad
Gaium § 30, and many other exx. in other auth.). Hence
som(i suppose that κατπ)\(ύ(ΐν τ. λόγον τοί θιοΐι in 2 Co. ii.
1 7 is eipnv. to lo trade in the icord of God, i. e. to try to
get base gain by teaching divine truth. But as jied-
lers were in the habit of adulterating their commodities
for the sake of gain (oi κάηηΚοί σου μΐσγονσι τον otvov
ν5ατι. Is. i. 22 Sept. ; κάπηΧοι, ol τον otvnv κ(ρανννντα,
Pollux, onomast. 7, 193; oi φϊΚόσοφοι ano&idovrat τα ματ
«■ατΓίΌί
325
τρΒία
βήματα, ωσπ(ρ ο! κάττηΚοι, κ(ρασάμ(νοί ye οΐ πολλοί και
δϋλώσαιτίί κα\ κακομ(τροϋντ(ί, Lucian. Ilermot. 59), καπψ
\(ΰ(ίν τι was also used as synonymous with to corrupt, to
adulterate (Themist. or. 21 p. 247 ed. Hard, says that
the false philosopliers τό θίίότατον των ανθρωπίνων ά-/αθων
κίβδηλ(ΰ(ΐν τί και αισχννιιν κ. καπη\(ΰ(ίν) ; and most in-
terp. ri'.;htly decide in favor of this meaning (on account
of the context) in 2 Co. ii. 1 7, cf. δολοϋν τον λο^ον τοΟ
ieoO, ib. iv. 2. [Cf. Trench § l.\ii.] •
Kairvos, -oC, ό, [fr Horn, down], smoke : Rev. viii. 4 ; ix.
2sq. 17, 18; .xiv. 11; xv. 8; xviii. 9, 18; xix. 3 ; άτμΐ!
καπνού, Α. V. vapor of smoke. Acts ii. 19 after Joel ii. 30
Cm. 3).•
ΚαΐΓπ•α8οκ£α, -as, ή, Cappadocia, a region of Asia Minor,
bounded under the Roman empire on the N. by Pontus,
on the E. by Armenia Minor, on the S. by Cilicia and
Commagene, on the W. by Lycaonia and Galatia [BB.
DD. s. v.] • Acts ii. 9; 1 Pet. i. 1.•
KopSCa, -as, 17, poetic κρα8ία and καρ8ίη (in the latter
form almost always in Horn, [only at the beginning of a
line in three places; everywhere else by metathesis κρα-
ίΐΐη . Ehelinrj, Lex. Hom. s. v.]), [fr. a root signifying
to quiver or palpitate ; cf. Cartius § 39 ; Λ^anit•ek p.
1097 (Etym. Magn. 491, 56 πάρα το κραδαίνω, το σ(ίω•
ά€ΐκίνητο! yap ή καρ8ία) ; allied with Lat. cor; Eng.
heart] ; Sept. for 2'! and 33'7 ; the heart ; 1. prop,
that organ in the animal body which is the centre of the
circulation of the blood, and hence was regarded as the
seat of physical hfe : 2 S. xviii. 14; 2 K. ix. 24; Tub.
vi. 5 (4), 7 (6) sq., 17(16). Hence 2. univ. καρ8ία
denotes the seat and centre of all physical and spiritual
life; and a. the vigor and sense of pht/sical life (Ps.
ci. (cii.) 5 ; στηρισον την καρδίαν ,σον ψωμώ αρτον, Juilg.
xix. 5 ; to which add Ps. ciii. (civ.) 1.5) : τρ€φ(ιν tos καρ-
δίας, Jas. v. 5 ; ΐμπιπΚων τας καρδίας τροφής. Acts xiv. 1 7 ;
βαρΐΐν τ. καρδίας κραιπάΧη και μ*θτ], Lk. xxi. 34 ; [but see
b. 8. below] ; b. the centre and seat of spiritual life,
the soul or mind, as it is the fountain and seal of the
thoughts, passions, desires, appetites, affections, purposes,
endeavors [so in Eng. heart, inner man, etc.] ; o.
univ.: Mt. v. 8; vi. 21 ; Mk. vii. 19; Lk. i. 51 ; ii. 51 ;
viii. 12, 15 ; Acts v. 3 ; Ro. x. 9 sq. ; 1 Co. xiv. 25 ; 2 Co.
vi. 1 1 ; Eph. vi. 5 ; Col. iii. 22 ; 1 Pet. iii. 4, etc. ; Plur. :
Mt. ix. 4; Mk. ii. 6, 8; iv. 15 [R L txt. Tr mrg.] ; Lk. i.
17; ii. 35;v. 22; [xxiv. 38 RGLmrg. ; Acts vii. 51 L Τ
Tr WH t.x't.] ; Ro. ii. 1 5 ; xvi. 18 ; 2 Co. iii. 2 ; Gal. iv. 6 ;
Phil. iv. 7; Eph. v. 19 Lchm.; Heb. viii. 10 [TAVII mrg.
sing.] ; X. 16, etc. ί καρδία is distinguished fr. το στόμα or
fr. τά xelXea: Mt. χ v. 8, 18 sq. ; Mk. vii. C ; 2 Co. vi. 1 1 ;
Ro. X. 8 sq. ; fr. τό πρόσωπον : 2 Co. v. 12 ; 1 Th. ii. 17;
πιριτομή καρδίας, Ro. ii. 29 ; ά7Τ€ρίτμητοι τη καρδία. Acts
vii. r>\ [L Τ Tr WIl txt. -8iais, AVH mrg. gen. -δίας, cf. B.
1 70 (148)]. of things done from the heart i. e. cordialli/ or
sincerely, truh/ (without simulation or pretence) the foil,
phrases are used : eK καρδίας (.Arstph. nub. 86), Ro. vi. 1 7;
and L Τ Tr AVH in 1 Pet. i. 22, where R G ϊκ καθαρός καρ-
ii'ar, as in 1 Tim. i. 5 ; 2 Tim. ii. 22 ■ άπο των καρδιάιν, Mt.
xviii. 35 (άπο καρδίας €ϋχάριστος τοίί dfoic, Antonin. 2,
3) ; ev οΚχ] τ. κ. and (ξ όλης τ. κ., Mt. χχϋ. 37 ; Mk. xiL
30, 33 ; Lk. .χ. 27, and Kec. in Acts viii. 37, (Deut. vi. 5;
-x.xvi. 16; Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 34); μιτ (5λτ)5ιι/ήί καρίιαΓ,
Heb. χ. 22. epewav τίις καρδίας, Ro. viii. 27 ; Rev. ii. 23;
δοκίμαζαν, 1 Th. ii. 4; γινώσκιιν, Lk. xvi. 15, (ί'τάζην, Jer.
xvii. 10; Ps. vii. 10) ; διάνοιγαν την κ. (see διανοίγω, 2),
Acts xvi. 14; ην ή καρδία κ- ή ψνχή μία, there Λν35 perfect
unanimity, agreement of heart and soul. Acts iv. 32;
Tiuevai Tt fv τη κ. (11^3 and 3S '7i' O\V, 1 S. xxi. 12; MaL
ii. 2 ; Dan. i. 8 ; τιθίναι iv στήθισσιν, iv φρισίν, etc., in
llom.), to lay a thing up in the heart to be considered
more carefully and pondered, Lk. i. 66 ; tofx in the heart
i. e. to purpose, plan, to do something, Acts v. 4 [A. V,
conceived in thy heart'\ ; also tis τ. καρδίαν [L Τ Tr WH
iv T. <c.] foil, by the inf., Lk. xxi. 14 ; βά\Χ(ΐν fis τήν κ.
TiTOt, foil, by ίνα, to put into one's mind the design of
doing a thing, .In. xiii. 2 ; also διδόναι foil, by an inf.,
Rev. xvii. 1 7 ; ανάβαινα tVi τήν κ- τινός, foil, b)' an inf.,
the purpose to do a thing comes into the mind, .\cts vii.
23 ; iv τη καρδία joined to verbs of thinking, reflect-
ing upon, doubting, etc.: ivθvμfiσθaι, διαλογίζισθαι,
Mt, ix. 4; Mk. ii. 6, 8; Lk. iii. 15; v. 22; λίγαν, elufir
(13^3 I"?*?), to think, consider with one's self, Mt. x.xiv.
48 ; Lk. xii. 4.5 ; Ro. x. 6 ; Rev. xviii. 7, (Deut. viii. 1 7 ;
ix. 4); συμβάXKftv, to revolve in mind, Lk. ii. 19; Sta-
κρίν(σθαι, to doubt, Mk. .xi. 23 ; διαλογισμοί άναβαίνουσι,
of persons in doubt, Lk. xxiv. 38 [RiiLmrg. plur.];
avafiaivei τι (πι καρδίαν, the thought of a thing enters the
mind, 1 Co. ii. 9. β. spec, of the understanding, the
faculty and seat of intelligence (often so in Hom. also [cf.
Nagelsbach, Homer. Theol. p. 319 sq.; Zezschwitz, Pro-
fangracitiit u. s. w. pp. 25 sq. 50] ; " cor domicilium sapi-
en:iae," Lact. de opif. dei c. 10, cf. Cic. Tusc. 1, 9; 37,
1 K. X. 2 ; Job xii. 3 ; xvii. 4, etc. ; [cf. Meyer on Eph.
i. 18 and re£f.]) : Ro. i. 21 ; 2 Co. iv. 6 ; Eph. i. 18 [Rec.
διανοίας']; 2 Pet. i. 19: σννιίναι τη καρδία, .Mt. xiii. 15;
Acts xxviii. 27; voe'iv τή κ. Jn. xii. 40. of the dulness
of a mind inca[)able of perceiving and understanding
divine things the foil, expressions occur: ίπαχίνθη ή κ.
j\It. .xiii. 15 ; Acts .xxviii. 27, (fr. Is. vi. 10) ; πωρηϋν τήν
καρδίαν, fJn. xii. 40; πίτωρωμίνη κπρδι'α, Mk. vi. 52; \\n.
17; ήπώρωσις της κ. Mk. iii. 5; Eph. iv. 18; βραδύς τή κ.
slow of heart. Lk. .xxiv. 25 ; καΚνμμα €7γΪ τήν κ. κάται, 2
Co. iii. 15. γ. of the will and character; άγνίζαν καρ-
δίας, Jas. iv. 8 ; καθάριζαν τας κ• Acts xv. 9 peppavri-
σμίνοι τας κ. Heb. χ. 22 ; καρδία (υθάα [cf. AV. 32], Acts
viii. 21 ; ποί'ηρά, Heb. iii. 12 [cf. B. § 132, 24; W. 194
(183)]; αμετανόητος, Ro. ii. 5; γζγνμνασμίνη π'^ΐονεζίας,
2 Pet. ii. 14; στήριζαν τας κ. 1 Th. iii. 13; βεβαιοϊν, in
pass., Heb. xiii. 9; σκΚηρννειν, Heb. iii. 8; ή irrivoia τής
κ. Acts viii. 22; at βονλαι τώνκ. 1 Co. iv. 5; προαιράσθαι
Tjj κ. 2 Co. ix. 7 ; κρίναν (to determine) and (δραϊος iv τή
κ. 1 Co. vii. 37. 8. of the soul iio far forth as it is affected
and stirred in a had way or good, or of the soul as the seat
of the sensibilities, affections, emotions, desires, appetites,
paisions : ή καρδία καιομΐνη ήν, of the soul as greatly and
peculiarly moved, Lk. xxiv. 32 ; αϊ ιττιθυμίαι των καρδίων,
Ro. i. 24 : στήριζαν τας κ. of the cultivation of constancy
καρΒιθΎνωστη\•
326
κατά
and endurance, .las. v. 8. in ref. to good-will and love :
f;^fii' Tiva iv rij κ- to have one in 07ie'.t heart, of constant re-
membrance and steadfast affection, Phil. i. 7 (' te tamen
in toto pcctore sciiii)cr habet ' Ovid, trist. 5, 4, 24); chai
fv TJ K. Tiwos, to be cherished in one's heart, to be loved
by one perpetually and unalterably, 2 Co. vii. :! ; (ΰδοκία
T^s K. Ro. X. 1. in ref. to joy and pleasure : ηΰφμάνθη ή
κ. Acts ii. 26 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9) ; χαρήσιται ή κ. .In. xvi.
22; άνηρ κατά την κ. τυϋ θ(οϋ, Ί. e in whom God delights.
Acts xiii. 22 ; of tlie pleasure given by food, Acts xiv. 17
([W. 156 (148) note] see 2 a. above), in ref. to grief,
pain, anguish, etc. : ή \ΰπη π(πλήρ<ύκ( την κ. .In. xvi. 6 ;
οδύνη τΐ] καρδία μου, Κο. ix. 2 ; ή κ- ταράσσιται, 3η. xiv. 1,
27 ; σννοχη καρδίας, 2 Co. ii. 4 ; βαρί'ιν τ. καρδία! pepipva'is
βιωτικαΐί, I-k. xxi. .'U [cf. 2 a. above] ; διαπρίομαι rij κ. .\cts
vii. 54 ; συντ(τριμμίνο! την κ. Lk. iv. IS Κ L br. ; κατίννγη-
aavTJj K. Acts ii. 37 [L Τ Tr Wll την κ.] ; συνθρΰπτ€ΐν την
κ. Acts .xxi. 1 3. €. ο/α soul conscious ofyooil or bad deeds
(our conscience) : 1 Jn. iii. 20 sq. (Eccl. vii. 22; so 33S,
Job xxvii. 6 ; η καρδία πάτασσα τίνά, 1 S. xxiv. 6 ; 2 S.
xxiv. 10). 3. used of the middle or central or inmost
part of any tliinr/, even though inanimate : rrjs γηί (which
some understand of Hades, others of the sepulchre), Mt.
xii. 40 (τής θαλάσσης, .Ion. ii. 4 for jh ; and for the same
ev μίσω θαλάσσης, Ex. xv. t<, 19 ; add Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer.]
19; T-^f κλίλΙ^ύδραΓ, Aristot. probl. 16, 8 [al. κωδι'α]). Cf.
Beck, Bibl. Seclcnlelire, ch. iii. § 20 sqq. p. 64 sqq. ; De-
litzsch, Bibl. Psychologic (Leipz. 1861) iv.§ 12p. 248 sqq.
[also in Ilerzog 2, vi. .57 sqq.]; Oehlcr in Ilerzog vi. p.
15 sqq. [also in his O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) § 71]; Wit-
tichen in .Schenkel iii. 71 sq.
καρδιο--γνώο-τη5, -ου, 6, {καρδία, -γνώστης), I'notver of
hearts: Acts i. 24 ; xv. 8. (Eccl. writ. [AV. 100 (94)].) "
Κάρπο$ [cf. W. p. 51], -ου, ό. Carpus, the name of an
unknown man : 2 Tim. iv. 13.•
Kapiros, -οϋ, 6, [cf. Lat. carpo ; A-S. hearf-est (harvest
i. e. the ingathering of crops); Curtius §42]; Ilebr.
"13 ; fr. Ilom. down ; fruit ; 1. prop. : the fruit of
trees, Mt. xii. 33 ; xxi. 19 ; Mk. xi. 14 ; Lk. vi. 44 ; xiii.
6 sq. ; of vines, Mt. xxi. 34 ; Mk. xii. 2 ; Lk. xx. 10 ; 1 Co.
ix. 7 ; of the fields, Lk. xii. 1 7 ; Mk. iv. 29 ; 2 Tim. ii. 6 ;
[Jas. V. 7] ; βλαστάν^ιν, .Tas. v. 1 8 ; ποκ'ιν, to bear fruit
(after the Ilebr. '-la Τ•.ψί\ [see ηούω, I. 1 e.]), Mt. iii.
10 ; vii. 17-19; xiii. 26 ; Lk. iii. 9 ; vi. 43 ; viii. 8 ; xiii. 9 ;
Rev. xxii. 2; διδόι/αι, Mt. xiii. 8; Mk. iv. 7 sq. ; φίραν,
Mt. vii. 18 Τ WII ; .In. xii. 24 ; xv. 2, 4 sq. ; (trop. xv. 8,
16); άποδιδύναι, to yield fruit. Rev. xxii. 2; to render
(pay) the fruit, Mt. xxi. 41 ; by a Hebraism, 6 καρπός της
κοιλίας, i. e. the unborn child, Lk. i. 42 (|p3 ""ID, Deut.
xxviii. 4, where Se])t. τα (κγονα της κοιλίας) ; r^f όσφίος
the fruit of one's loins, i. e. his proyeny, his posterity,
Acts ii. 30 (Gen. xxx. 2 ; Ps. cxxvi. (cxxvii.) 3 ; c.xxxi.
(cxxxii.) 11 ; Mic. vi. 7) ; cf. W. 33 (32). 2. Me-
taph. that which oriyinales or comes from something; an
effect, result ; a. i. q. fpynv, work, act, deed : with gen.
of the author, toC πνίίματος. Gal. v. 22 ; toC φωτός, Eph.
V. 9 (Rec. T. πν(ΰματος) ; της δικαιοσύνης, Phil. i. 1 1 [cf.
b. below] ; of Christian charity, i. e. benefit, Ro. xv. 28;
καρπον πολύν φίριιν, to accomplish much (for the propa-
gation of Christianity and its furtherance in the souls of
men), .In. xv. 8, 16; used of men's deeds as exponents
of their hearts [cf. W. 372 (348)], Mt. vii. 16, 20; aya•
θοί, .las. iii. 1 7 ; καρποΧ της βασ. τοΟ θ(ον, deeds required
for the attainment of salvation in the kingdom of f!od,
Mt. .x.xi. 43 ; ποίίίν καρπούς άζίονς της μετανοίας, to exliiltit
deeds agreeing with a change of heart, Mt. iii. 8 ; Lk. iii.
8, (cf. a^ia της μετανοίας ^pya πράσσΐΐν. Acts xxvi. 20).
b. adviintayc, profit, utility: Pliil. i. 22 ; iv. 17; ΐχ(ΐυ kh/j-
πόν, to get fruit, Ro. i. 13 ; vi. 21 sq. ; της δικαιοσύνης,
benefit arising from righteousness [al. make it gen. of
apposition, W. § 59, 8 a.], Heb. xii. 1 1 ; which consists in
righteousness (gen. of appos.), Jas. iii. 18 [cf. I'liil. i. 11
in a. above, and Meyer ad loc. ; Prov. .\i. 30; Amos vi.
12]. c. by a Hebraism oi καρποί των χίΐλίων, praises,
which are presented to God as a thank-offering: Heb.
xiii. 15 (IIos. xiv. 2 ; Prov. xii. 14; xxix. 49 (xxxi. 31)).
Cf. W. 33 (32) note 1. d. συνάγιιν καρπον (ΐς ζωην
αιώνων, to gather fruit (i. e. a reaped harvest) into life
eternal (as into a granary), is used in fig. discourse of
those who by their labors have fitted souls to obtain eter-
nal life, Jn. iv. 36.•
καρτΓο-φορίω, -ώ ; 1 aor. (καρποφόρησα ; pres. pass. ptcp.
καμποφορούμίνος: (καρποφόρος, (^.v.) ; tohenr fruit; (Vulg.
frurtijico; Colum., TertuU.) ; a. pro]i. {[Xen., Aris-
tot.], Thcophr. de hist, plant. 3, 3, 7 ; Diod. 2, 4:>) : χόρ-
Tor, Mk. iv. 28 (φυτά, .Sap. x. 7). b. metaph. to bear,
briny forth, deeds : thus of men who show their knowl-
edge of religion by their conduct, INIt. xiii. 23 ; Mk. iv.
20 ; Lk. viii. 15 ; fv (for R G L Tr mrg. WH mrg. ίν [cf.
B. 103 (90), see (ΐς, 4 a.]) τριάκοντα etc. sc. καρποΐς, Mk.
iv. 20 Τ Tr txt. WH txt. [see e'v, I. 5 f.] ; iv παντί ipyia
άγαθώ. Col. i. 10; τινί (dat. commodi) to one who reaps
the fruit, i.e. fruit acceptable to him, τω θιω. Ro. vii. 4 ;
τώ θανάτω, i.e. (without the fig.) to produce works re-
warded with death, Ro. vii. 5 ; in mid. to hear fruit oj
one's self Col. i. 6 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].•
καρΐΓθ-φόρο5, -ov, (καρπός and φίρω), fruit-beariny,
fruitful, productive : Acts xiv. 1 7. (Pind., Xen., Theo-
[ihr., Diod., Sept.) *
καρτ€ρ(ω, -ώ : 1 aor. ίκαρτίρησα ; (καρτιρός [f r. κάρτος
i. e. κράτος, ' strong ']) ; to be steaelfast : Heb. xi. 27 [A.V.
endured^ (Job ii. 9; Sir. ii. 2; xii. 15; often in (irk.
writ. fr. Soph, and Thuc. down.) [Co>lP. : προσ-καρ-
Τ(ρβω.^
κάρφοϊ, -COS (-ους), τό, (fr. κάρφω to contract, dry up,
wither), a dry stalk or twig, a straw; chaff, [A. V. mote'] :
Mt. vii. 3-5 ; Lk. vi. 41 sq., where it figuratively denotes
a smaller fault. (Gen. viii. 1 1 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl.
and Hdt. down.) *
κατά, [on its neglect of elision before a vowel see Tdf.
Proleg. p. 95 ; cf. W. § 5, la.; B. 1 ; WH. App. p. 146•],
a preposition denoting motion or diffusion or direction
from the higher to the lower ; as in class. Grk., joined
with the gen. and the ace.
I. With the Genitive (W. §47, k. p. 381 (357); [B.
§147,20]); 1. prop. a. down from, down: κατά
327
ToC κρημνού, Mt. viii. 32 ; Mk. v. 13 ; Lk. viii. 33 ; κατ(χ((ν
κατά Trjs κίφαΧής (so that it flowed down from his head
[cf. W. 381 (3οΓ) note]; but it is more correct here to
omit κατά with LTTrWH; see καταχτώ), Mk. xiv. 3;
hence κατά κεφαλή: (a veil hanging down from his head)
ΐχων, 1 Co. -xi. 4 ([A. V. harinr/ his head covered] cf. κα-
ταπίτασμα [or rather κάλυμμα (q. v.), but see ΐχω 1. 1 b.]).
b. doivn upon (dotvn into) anytliing : Acts.x.wii. 14 [W.
381 (357) notei; cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Crete]; trop. ή
κιιτά liadovs πτωχ€ία reaching down into the depth, i. e.
deep or extreme poverty, 2 Co. viii. 2 (cf. Strabo 9, 5
p. 411) €στι TO μαντΐΐον ίιιηρον κοίλοι' κατά βάθους)- C.
used of motion or extension tlirough a space from top to
bottom ; hence through, throughout : in the N. T. [and in
Luke's writ.; B. § 147, 20] everywh. with tlie adj. oKos,
as Kaff όλη! Trjs πίριχώρου τή: Ίουδαι'αΓ, της 'Io'tttitjs, l^k.
iv. 14 ; .xxiii. a ; Acts i.x. 31 ; .x. 37, (8ΐ(σπάρησαν κατά τη!
νήσου, Polyb. 3, 19, 7 ; ΐσκΐ^ασμίνοι κατά της χώρας, 1,17,
10; 3, 76, 10; μη παραβαίν€ΐν τάς άρματοτροχίας, αλλά
κατ αυτών Ιίναι, Ael. ν. h. 2, 27). 2. metajih. a.
after verbs of swearing, adjuring, (the hand being,
as it were, placed down upon the tiling sworn by [cf.
Bnhdy. p. 238 ; Kiiliner § 433 fin.]), by : Mt. xxvi. 63 ;
Heb. vi. 13, 16, (Is. xlv. 23 ; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 13 ; Judith i.
12 ; Dem. 553, 17 ; 554, 23). b. against (prop, down
upon [W. 382 (358)] ; Hebr.S;•) : opp. to ύηίρ, Mk. ix.
40 ; 2 Co. xiii. 8 ; Ro. viii. 31 ; opp. to μ^τά, Mt. -xii. 30;
Lk. xi. 23 ; after ίτηθνμύν. Gal. v. 1 7 ; emflv πονηρον
(ρήμα), Mt. V. 1 1 ; XaXtii', Acts vi. 13; .lude 1 5 ; μαρτυρία,
Mk. xiv. 55 ; Mt. xxvi. 59 ; μαρτυρύν, 1 Co. xv. 15 [here
many take κ. i. q. with regard to, of; cf. De Wette ad loc. ;
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 272] ; ^(υ^ομαρτυρύν, Mk. xiv. 56 sq. ;
yoyyύζflv, Mt. xx. 11 (Ex. .xv. 24 Alex.) ; διδάσκΕίν, Acts
-xxi. 28; ^eiSf σίαι, Jas. iii. 14 (Xen. apol. 13) ; συμβούλων
λαβίΐν or ηοκ'ιν, Mt. xxvii. 1 ; Mk. iii. 6 ; αιτ€ΪσθαΙ τι. Acts
XXV. 3, 15; after verbs of a c c u s i η g, etc. : ίχαν τι, Mt.
V. 23; Mk. xi. 25; Rev.ii.4, 14, 20; κατηγορύν, Lk. .xxiii.
14; κατηγορία,. Τ n. xviii. 29 [Tdf. om. κατά] ; (γκαλίίν, Ro.
viii. 33; ϊντυγχάνΐΐν τινί, Ro. .xi. 2; add. Acts -xxiv. 1 ;
XXV. 2 ; Jas. v. 9 ; το χ€ίρό-γραφον. Col. ii. 14 ; κρίσιν noielv,
JudelS; after verbs of rebelling, fighting, pre-
vailing: Mt. X. 35; xii. 25; Acts xiv. 2; 1 Co. iv. 6;
2 Co. X. 5 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 1 ; [Rev. xii. 7 Rec] ; ισχίκιν. Acts
xix. 16 ; ίξουσίαν ίχ(ΐν, •Τπ. xix. 11.
II. AVith the Accusative; cf. W. § 49d.; Bnhdy. p.
239 sqq. 1. of Place; a. of the place through
which anything is done or is extended (prop, down
through ; opp. to ανά, up through^ : Kaff ΰλην την ■πάλιν
κΐιρυτσΐΐν, Lk. viii. 39 ; Ικφίρ^ιν κατά τάς τνλατ(ίας. Acts
\. i5 [R G] ; add, Lk. ix. 6 ; xiii. 22 ; xv. 14 ; Acts viii.
1; xi. 1 ; xv. 23; xxi. 21 ; xxiv. 5, 12; xxvii. 2; τους κατά
τα ίθνη (throughout Gentile lands) ττάντας Ιουδαίους, Acts
xxi. 21, cf. Grimm on 2 ^lacc. i. 1 ; κατά την obov, along
the way i. e. on the journey [W. 400 (374) note '], Lk.
X. 4; Acts viii. 36 ; xxv. 3; xxvi. 13; along (Ijixt. secun-
dum or praeter [R. V. off"]), πίλα-γος το κατά την Κιλικίαν,
Acts xxvii. 5. b. of the pl.ace t ο which one is brought
(down) : yevo^cvoi ΓTrΛVlI om. y.] κατά τον τόπον [«λ-
θών etc.], Lk. χ. 32 [cf. Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad
loc] ; ikeovTfS κατά την Μυσίαν, Acts -xvi. 7 ; κατά την
Κκ/δοι/, Acts x.xvii. 7 ; κατ αυτόν, (came) to him, i. e. to
the place where he was lying, Lk. x. 33. c. of direc-
tion ; towards : Α,ιβύη ή κατά Κυρήνην, that Libya which
lay towards Cyrene, i. e. Libya of Cyrene (i. e. the chief
city of wliich was Cyrene), Acts ii. 10 ; βλίπ^ιν, to look, lie
towards (see/3λtVω, 3), Acts .xxvii. 12; nopdeadai κατά
μ^σημβρίαν. Acts viii. 26 ; κατά σκοπόν, towards the goal,
my eye on the goal, Phil. iii. 14. against (Lat. adrersus
w. the ace); over against, opposite: κατά πρόσωπον, to
the face. Gal. ii. 11 (see -πρόσωπον, 1 a.) ; i. q. present,
Acts -XXV. 16 [A. Y.face to face] ; 2 Co. x. 1 ; w. gen. of
pers. added, before the face of, in the presence of, one:
Lk. ii. 31; Acts iii. 13; τά κατά πρόσωπον, the things
that are open to view, known to all, 2 Co. x. 7 ; κατ
οφθαλμούς, before the eyes, Gal. iii. 1 ; here, too. ace. to
some [cf. W. 400 (374) note ^] belongs κατά θ(όν, Ro.
viii. 27, but it is more correctly referred to 3 c. a. be-
low, d. of the place where: κατ οΓκοι/ (opp. to
iv τω if ρω), at home, privately [W. 400 (374) note'],
Acts ii. 46 ; v. 42. e. of that which so joins itself
to one thing as to separate itself from another; ourybr,
by : κατ ιδίαν, apart, see ίδίοί, 2 ; καθ' (αυτόν, alone (hi/
himself). Acts xxviii. 16 ; Jas. ii. 17 [R. V. in itself], (2
Mace. xiii. 13; oi καθ' αύτοϋς "Ελληνας, Thuc. 1, 138; oe
BotwTol καθ' αΰτονς, Died. 13, 72; other ex.x. are given
by Alberti, Observv. etc. p. 293; Loesner, Observv. e
Philone p. 460 sq.) ; (χ^ιν τι καθ' (αυτόν, to have a thing
by and to one's self, i. e. to keep it hidden in one's mind,
Ro. xiv. 22 (Josei)h. antt. 2, 11, 1 ; Heliod. 7, 16 ; [cf. W.
401 (375) note']); hence, of that which belongs to
some pers. or thing : κατά την ουσαν (κκΚησίαν, belonging
to [Α. V. in] the church that was there. Acts xiii. 1 ; ή
(κκλησία κατ οΐκόν τίνος, belonging to one's household
(see Ικκλησία, 4 b. aa.) ; hence it forms a periphrasis —
now for the gen., as τά κατά Ιουδαίους ϊθη (i. q. των Ιου-
δαίων), Acts .xxvi. 3 ; now for the possessive ])ron., oi
Kaff υμάς ποιηταί, your own poets, Acts xvii. 28 [here
WH mrg. καθ' {]μάς, see their Intr. § 404]; νόμου τοΰ
καθ' υμάς, [a law of your own]. Acts xviii. 15; το κατ ϊμί
πρόθυμον, my inclination, Ro. i. 15 [see πρόθυμος]; ή καθ'
υμάς πίστις, Eph. i. 15, (ή κατά τον τΰραννον ώμότης re και
δύναμις, Diod. 14, 12; μίχ^η των καθ' ημάς χρόνων, Dion.
Hal. antt. 2, 1; cf. Grimm on 2 JNIacc. iv. 21 p. 88 ; a
throng of e.x.x. fr. Polyb. may be seen in Schweighaeuser,
Lex. Polyb. p. 323 sq.; [cf. W. 1.54 (146); 400 (374)
note^; esp.B.§ 132,2]). 2. of Time [cf. W. 401
(374)]; during, about; hat. tempore : κατ (Ke'ivov or τού-
τον Tor καιρόν. Acts xii. 1 ; xix. 23; Ro. ix. 9 ; Heb. ix. 9
[R G] ; κατά TO αυτό, at the same time, together, Acts
xiv. 1 (see αϋτοΓ, III. 1); κατά το μισονύκτιον. Acts xvi.
25 ; κατά μίσον της νυκτός. Acts xxvii. 27 ; [possibly also
κατά μ(σημβρίαν, at noon. Acts viii. 2G (see μισημβρία, b.)] ;
κατά καιρόν, see καιρός, 2 a.; κατ αρχάς (Hdt. 3, 153), in
the beginning (of things), Heb. i. 10 ; κατά την ήμίραν το«
πίΐρασμοΰ, Heb. iii. 8 [as the Sept. in this ])ass. have ren-
dered the prep. 3 in the context by ως (Jv τ^ παραπικρα
328
σμω, Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 8), some would take it and κατά here
i. ij. ^iXe<i.sin tlieday etc.; Vulg.stfuiu/um]; κατά πάν σάβ-
βατον. Acts xiii. 27; xv. 21 ; xviii. 4 ; Kaff ίκάστην ήμίραν,
Ileb. iii. 13; κατά μήνα (ίνα) ϊκαστοι/, Kev. xxii. 2; κατ"
οναρ, during a divaiii, see uvap. 3. it denotes re f-
ere nee, relat ion, proportion, of various sorts; a.
dist ribu ti vely, indicating; a succession of tilings fol-
lowing one another [W. 101 (374) ; B. § 147, 20] ; a.
in rcf. to place • κατά πύλιν. in every city, (^cili/ hi/ citi/,
from I'lltj to city), Lk. viii. 1,4; Acts xv. 21 ; xx. 23 ; Tit.
i. 5, (Thuc. 1, 122) ; «ear (κκλησίαν, in every church, Acts
xiv. 23: w. the plur., κατά m'i\eii, Lk. xiii. 22; κατά τάι
κώμα!, Lk. ix. G (lidt. 1, 9U) ; κατά τάπουι, Mt. x.\iv. 7 ;
Alk. xiii. 8; Lk. xxi. 11 ; κατά rat συΐ'αγωγάς, in every
synagogue, Acts χ.\ϋ. 1 9 ; [cf. κατά τ. οίκους (ΐσπορ(υάμ(-
vot. .\cts viii. 3]. β. in ref. to t i m e : κατ ετογ, yearly,
year by year, Lk. ii. 41 ; also κατ ('νιαυτόν (see iviavrut) ;
καθ' ήμίραν etc., see ημίρα, 2 p. 278'; κατά μίαν σα^βάτου
[R (i -τωκ], on the first day of every week, 1 Co. xvi. 2 ;
κατά ίορτήν, at any and every feast. Jit. xxvii. 15 ; Mk.
XV. 6 ; Lk. x.\iii. 1 7 [Ilec. ; cf. B. § 133, 26. Others un-
derstand tlie plirase in these pass, (contextually) at or
durinii (see 2 above) t h e fea^t, viz. the Passover; cf. W.
401 (374)]. γ. univ. : καθ' ίνα πάντίς, all one by one,
successively, 1 Co. xiv. 31, see more fully in e'r, 4 c. ;
κατά fiio, by two, 1 Co. xiv. 27; κατά ίκατον κ. κατά ττ^ντή-
κοντα, by hundreds and by fifties, Mk. vi. 40 L Τ Tr WII ;
κατά pipes, severallij, singly, part by part, Heb. ix. 5
(Hdt. 9, 25 ; Xen. anab. 3, 4, 22) ; κατ' όνομα, by name
i. e. each by its own name (Vulg. nominalim [or per
nomeii]) : Jn. x. 3 ; 3 Jn. 15 (14) ; cf. Henn. ad Vig. p.
858 sq. b. equiv. to the Lat. ratione huhita aliciii'is
rei vel personae ; as respects; loith regard tn; in reference
to; so far as relates to; as concern in (/; [W. 401 (375)]:
κατά σάρκα or κατά την σ., as to the flesh (see σαρξ [esp.
2b.]), llo. i. 3; ix. 3, .=> ; lCo.i.26; x.l8; 2Co.xi.l8;
oc κί'ριοι κατά σ. (I>uther well, tlie leiblichen Herren), in
eartlily relations, ace. to the arransements of society,
Eph. vi. 5 ; κατά το flayy., κατά την ϊκΚογήν, Ro. xi. 28 ;
add Ro. i. 4; vii. 22; Pliil. iii. 5 S(i.; Ileb. ix. 9; τά κατά
Τίνα, one's affairs, one's case, Acts xxiv. 22; xxv. 14;
Eph. vi. 21 ; Phil. i. 12; Col. iv. 7, (and very often in
class. Grk.) : κατά πά«τα τρόπον, in every way, in every re-
spect. Ho. iii. 2 ; the op[). κατά μηδίνα τρήπον, in no wise,
2 Th. ii. 3; κατά ηάντα, in all respects, in all things, Acts
xvii. 22; Col. iii. 20, 22; Ileb. ii. 17: iv. 15, (Thuc. 4,
81). c. accordintj to, arjreeahlij to; in reference to
agreement or conformity to a standard, in various ways
[W. 401 (375)]; o. accordintj to anything as a stand-
ard, agreeahhj to : rrepnraTe'iv κατά τι, Mk. vii. 5 ; Ro. viii. 1
[Rec.], 4 ; xiv. 15:2 Th. iii. 6 ; Eph. ii. 2 : ζήν κατά. Acts
xxvi. 5; Ro. viii. 12 sq. ; πηρίύισθαι. 2 Pet. iii. 3 ; άσοδι-
Sorat τινί, Mt. xvi. 27, etc. (see άττοδ/δωμι, [esp. 4]);
Χαμβάνίΐν, 1 Co. iii. 8; so with many other verbs a thing
is said to be done or to occur κατά, as in Lk. ii. 27, 29;
Jn. vii. 24 ; Col. ii. 8 , iii. 10 ; 1 Tim. i. 18 ; Heb. vii. 15 ;
viii. 5, 9 ; 1 Jn. v. 14, etc.; (on the phrase κατ' άνθραιπον,
see άνθρωπο!, esp. 1 c. ; [cf. t. below : W. 402 (376)]) ;
κατά την γραφήν, rat γραφάί, Jas. ii. 8 ; 1 Co. xv. 3 sq. ;
κατά TO γίγραμμίνον, 2 Co. iv. 1 3 ; κατά ri ίϊρημίνον, Ro.
iv. 18; κατά τϊιν νόμον, Lk. ii. 39; Jn. xviii. 31 ; xix. 7;
lleb.ix. 22; κατά το ii'ayy. μου, Ro. ii. IG; xvi. 25; 2 Tim.
ii. 8, cf. 1 Tim. i. 1 1 ; κιιτά τό ίαρισμίνον, Lk. xxii. 22;
καθ' όμοι'ωσιν θtoϋ, Jas. iii. 9 ; κατά λόγοχ rightly, justly,
[.\. v. nasoii irould etc.]. Acts xviii. 14 ; κ<ιτά τίνα, agree-
ably to the ivill of any one, as pleases him, [W. 401 sq.
(375)]: so κατά β(όν, llo. τίϋ. 27 [cf. 1 c. above]; 2 Co.
vii. 9, 11 ; κατά Χριστον Ίησονν, Ro. xv. 5; κατά κίιριην,
2 Co. xi. 17; κατά τον καθαρισμύν, after the manner of
purifying, as the rite of purification prescribed, Jn. ii.
6 ; oi κατά σάρκα Ζντα, who bear, refiect, the nature of
the ilesh, i. q. oi σαρκικοί, :ind oi κατά πνΐΰμα ot/T€s i. (|. oi
πνίνματικοί, Ro. viii. 5; κατά τι γνωσομαι : in accordance
with what criterion i. e. by what si.tn shall I know? I,k.
i. 18. Here belongs the use of the preposition in the
titles of the records of the life of Christ : elayy. (which
word codd. Sin. and Vat. omit) κατά ΐΛατθα'ιον, Μύρκοι»,
etc., as Matthew etc. composed or wrote (it). This use
of the prep, was not primarily a mere periphrasis for
the gen. (Ματθαίον, etc., see II. 1 e. above), but indicated
that the same subject had been otherwise handled by
others, cf. η παλίΐιά διαθήκη κατά τους ίβ8ημτ}κοντα
(in tacit contrast not only to the Hebrew text, but also
to the Greek translations made by others) ; oi υπομνη-
ματισμοί oi κατά Nff^tai/, 2 Mace. ii. 13 [see (iriuun ad
loc.]. Subse(|uently κατά with an ace. of the writer came
to take the |)lace of the gen., as ή κατά Μωνσία π(ντάτ(ν
χο! in Epiphanius [haer. 8, 4. Cf. W. 402 (375) ; B.
3; 157(137); and see, further, .?«/;/'. Lex. s. v. c iayyeXioi»,
Jas. Morison, Com. on Mt., Intr. § 4]. β. //( /iro/iorlion
to, arrnrdinfj to Ih'i measure of : χαρίσματα κατίι την χάριν
την δοθ(ϊσαν ημΊν διάφορα, 11ο. χϋ. 6 ; κατά τϊι μίτρον, 2
Co. χ. 13; Eph. iv. 7; κατά tijv σκληρότητα σου, Ro. ii. 5;
κατά τον χρόνον, Mt. ii. 16; f κιίστω κατά την ιδίαν δυναμιν,
Mt. .\χν. 15; without the art. κατά δΰναμιν, 2 Co. viii. 3
(ορρ. to ΰπίρ δΰναμιν, as Hom. II. 3, 59 κατ' αισαν, οΰδ'
ΰπϊρ αισαν) ; καθ' όσον, by so much as, inasmuch as, Heb.
iii. 3; vii. 20; ix. 27; κατά τοσούτο, by so much, Heb. vii.
22. γ. used of the cause; through, on account of,
from, oioing to, (in accordance with i. e. in consequence
of, by virtue of) [W. 402 (37fi)] : κατά πάσαν αΐτίαν, [for
every cause], Mt. xi.K. 3 ; κατά την χάριν τοϋ θίοϋ, 1 Co.
iii. 10; 2 Th. i. 12; 2 Tim. i. 9, {κατά την τοϋ θ(οΰ πρό-
νοιαν, Joseph, antt. 20, 8. G) ; κατά χάριν, Ro. iv. 16; also
ορρ. to κατά οφίίλημα [II. V. as of . . . as of], Ro. iv. 4 ;
oi κατά φίισιν κλάδοι, the natural branches, Ro. xi. 21 [cf.
B. 1G2 (141)] ; η κατά φΰσιν άγρύλαιος, the natural wild
olive tree, ib. 24 ; ή κατά ττίστιν δικαιοσύνη, righteousness
proceeding from faith, Heb. xi. 7; add, Ro. viii. 28; ix.
11; xi. 5; xvi. 25 sq.; iCo. xii. 8; 2Co. xiii. 10; (ial. ii.
2; iii. 29; Eph. i. .'i, 7,9, 11, 19; iii. 7,11, 16,20; Col. i.
11.29; Phil. i. 20: iii. 21 ; iv. 11,19; 2Th. i. 12; ii. 9 ;
2 Tim. i. 8 sq. ; Heb. ii. 4 ; vii. 16 ; Tit. i. 3 ; 1 Pet. i. 3 : 2
Pet. iii. 15. adverbial phrases [W. § 51, 2 g.] : κατ ΐξον
σίαν Iwith authority], Mk. i. 27 ; κατ ανάγκην, κατά «ού-
σιοκ (q. ν), [ί;/ necessity, ο/" free will], Phileui. 14 ; κατο
329
καταβα\\ω
γνώσιν, 1 Pet. iii. 7 ; κατ ('πίγνωσιν, Ro. χ. 2 [cf. W. 403
(37(1)]; κατά ΰγνουζν, [in ignorance], Acts iii. 17. 8.
of likeness: as, like as : σνντίΚίσω . . . ^ιαθηκην καίνην,
ov κατά την &ιαθήκην κτλ. Heb. viii. 8 Sij. (1 Κ. xi. 10) ; so
witli the ace. of a pers. [cf. under a. above], Gal. iv. 28 ;
1 Pet. i. 15 : κατά ^fooafter the inias;e of God, Eph. iv.
24; κρίνισθαι κατά άνθρωπου!, ζην κατά Sfov, to be judged
as it is fit men sliould be judged, to live as God hves, 1
Pet. iv. 6. Hence it is used «. of the mode in
which a thing is done; of the quality: SfSpes oi κατ•'
(ξοχην της πόλεως, the principal men of the city, Acts
.x\v, 23 ; Kaff νπομξνήν tpyov άγαθοϋ, i. ij. νκομίνοντ€ς ev
ίργω άγαθω, [by constancy in well-doing], Ro. ii. 7 ; esp.
in adverbial phrases : κατά ταΰτα in [or afier^ the same
[or //iii] mnnner, Lk. vi. 23 (Ltxt. TTrWH κ. τα αίτά,
L. mrg. κ. ταϋτά), [26 (edd. as before)] ; Lk. .wii. 30 (T
Tr Wll K. τα αυτά, G L κ. ταύτα) ; καθ^ νπ^ρβολην, Ro. vii.
13; 1 Co. xii. 31, etc., [cf. W. 4i;G (434); B. 96 (■S4)];
κατά πίστιν i. q. τ!ΐστ(ΰοντ(ς [A. V. in faith ; cf. W. 403
(376)], Heb. .\i. 13; κατίι σνγγνωμην, ov κατ (πιτο-γην, by
way of concession, not by way of commandment, 1 Co.
vii. 6, cf. 2 Co. viii. 8; κατά κράτοί. Acts xix. 20; Kaff
ομοιότητα, Heb. iv. 15 ; on the phrase κατά άνθρωπον see
άνθρωπος, 1 c. [cf. a. above]. d. of the end aimed
at; the goal to which anything tends; (Lat. ad
[W. 402 sq. (376)]): κατ' inayyeXlav ζωής, to proclaim
life, 2 Tim. i. 1 [but see inayytXla, I ] ; κατ (νσίβιιαν,
tending to godliness, [1 Tim. vi. 3; Tit. i. ]] (see eiac-
fifia ; [yet al. refer these exx., and that which follows, to
the use set forth above, in c.]) ; κατά πίστιν, to awaken,
produce faith. Tit. i. 1, (exx. of this use of κατά fr. Horn.,
Hdt.. Thuc, Xen., may be seen in Passow s. v. II. 3 p.
1598'; [L. and S. s. v. B. III. 1] ; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p.
632; Kiihner ii. p. 412) ; many refer to this head also
κατ' άτιμίαν (to my dishonor [W. 402 sq. (376)]) λε'-^ω,
2 Co. xi. 21 (κατά την τιμήν τον θ€ον τοντο ποιων, to the
honor of (iod, .Joseph, antt. 3, 11,4); but see ατιμία.
III. In Composition κατά denotes, 1. /mm.
down from, frtDii a higher to a loicer place : with special
ref. to the terminus from which, as καταβαίνω, καταβιβάζω,
etc. [cf. Λν. 431 (401 sq.)] ; with more prominent ref. to
the lower terminus (down), as καταβάΧΧω, καταπατίω, etc.
[cf. W. u. s.]; also of the situation or local position,
as κατάκίΐμαι. κπθ(ί8ω, κατατίθημι, καθίζω, etc. from lop
In hollow, nict;i|ili. of things done ΛνίΐΙι care, thoroughly,
as καταμανθύνω, καθιψάω, etc. 2. in succession, in
course : καθίξης ; one part after another, καταρτίζω, κατ(ν-
βϊινω, etc. 3. under, underneath : καταχθόνιος : the
idea of putlinij under resides in verbs denoting victorv,
rule, etc., over others, as κατα8νναστ(ΰω, κατακνρκνω, κη-
τfξυvσιύζω, καταδουλόω ; likewise in verbs naming that
with which anything is covered, concealed, overwhelmed,
etc., as κατακαλντΓτω, καταλιθάζω, κατασφραγίζω, κατα-
σκιάζω, καταισχύνω, (where the Germ, uses the prefix uher
[Eng. oi'er^, as iibersrhalten, uberdecken, or the syllable
be, as beschatten, besierjein); also in adjj. denoting an
abundance of that with which a thing is filled up or as
it were covered up : see below in κατ(ί8ω\ικ. 4. '
like the Germ, i-er-, zer-, it denotes separation•, dissolu-
tion, in verbs of wasting, dissolving, etc., as κατα-
κΰπτω, κατάγννμι, κατακαίω, κατακλάω, καταΧνω, κατηκ'Κί'ζω,
καταναλίσκω, καταφθίίρω, etc. 5. i. q. after, behind :
καταδιώκω, καταλείπω. κατακολονΘ€ω, etc. 6. used
of proportion and distribution, as κατακλι;ροδοτί'ω,
κατακλ>;ροι/ομί'ω, etc. 7. of host ility, ai/ainsi etc.:
καταδικυζω, κατακρίνω, καταλαλ^ω, καταγινώσκω, etc. Cf.
Hirm. ad Vig. p. 637 sqq. [On the constr. of verbs com-
pounded w. κατά, see AV. u. s. ; cf. B. 165 (143 sq.).]
κατα-βαίνω: impf. 3 pers. plur. κατΐβαινον, fut. καταβίγ-
σομαι; 2 aor. κατίβην, impv. κατάβηθι (Mt. xxvii. 40; Lk.
xix. 5 ; Jn. iv. 49 ; Acts x. 20) and κατάβα (Mk. xv. 30
[R G (where L Τ TrAVH ptcp. καταβιΐί)], see αναβαίνω) ;
\>ί. καταβίβηκα; [fr. Horn, on] ; Sept. for T1^; lo ijo down,
come dijint, descenil ; 1. of persons ; a. prop. :
absol., the place from which one has come down being
evident from the context, καταβάς ίστη, Lk. vi. 1 7 (cf.
12); xvii. 31 [foil, here by inf., so Mt. xxiv. 17]; Lk. xix.
5 sq.; Jn. v. 7; Acts xx. 10; Eph. iv. 10; foil, by από w.
gen. of the place, Mt. viii. 1 ; xiv. 29 ; xvii. 9 Rec. ; xxvii.
40,42; Mk. ix. 9 [LTrmrg. WHtxt. «]; xv.30,32; by
ex w. gen. of place, Mt. xvii. 9 G L Τ Tr V\'H [see «, I.
3]; by ds w. ace. of place, Mk. xiii. 15 [RCiLbr. Tr;
al. om. ei'r etc.] ; Acts viii. 38 ; [Ro. x. 7] ; Eph. iv. 9. b.
lo come down, as fr. the temple at Jerusalem, fr. the city
of Jerusalem ; also of celestial beings coming down to
earth: absol., Mt. iii. 16 ; Lk. ii. 51 ; x. 31 ; Jn. iv. 47,
49,51; Acts [vii. 34]; viii. 15; x. 20; [xxiii. 10]; xxiv.
1, 22 ; foil, by από w. gen. of the place, Mk. iii. 22 ; Lk.
X. 30; Acts XXV. 7; 1 Th. iv. 16; eK τοΰ oipavov, Mt.
xxviii.2; Jn.i.32; iii.l3; vi.33,38[RG; 3ΐ.άπό],41
sq. 50 sq. 58, [on these pass. cf. B. 297 (255)] ; Kev. x.
1 ; xviii. 1 ; xx. 1. foil, by els w. ace. of place, Lk. x. 30 ;
xviii. 14; Jn. ii. 12; Acts vii. 15; xiv. 25 ; xvi. 8 ; xviii.
22; xxv. 6 ; by ΐπί w. ace. of place, Jn. vi. 16 ; w. ace.
of the pers., Mk. i. 10 [R G L mrg.] ; Lk. iii. 22 ; Jn. i.
33, 51 (52) ; by fv w. dat. of place, Jn. v. 4 [R L] (see
f'v, I. 7) ; by προς w. ace. of pers., Acts x. 21 ; xiv. 11 ;
contextually i. q. lo be cast doicn, of the devil. Rev. xii.
12. 2. of things. In come (i. e. be sent) <loicn : Acts
x. 11 (Rec. adds ίπ" αντόν) ; xi. 5; foil, by από w. a gen.
of pers., Jas. i. 17 ; ί'κ τοΰ ovpavov άπο τοΟ βιον, Rev. iii.
12; .xxi. 2, 10; lo come (i. e. fall) down: fr. the upper
regions of the air ; as βροχή, Mt. vii. 25, 27 ; λα'ιλαψ, Lk.
Λ'ΐϋ. 23 ; πνρ από [Lchm. βκ] τον ονρ. Lk. ix. 54 ; ck τον
ovp. fii τ. γην. Rev. xiii. 13: ί'κ τοΰ oip. από τ. θεηϊι. Rev.
.XX. 9 [R G Tr] ; χάλαζα c'k τον ονρ. ΐπί τίνα. Rev. xvi. 21 ;
θρόμβοι (πι την γψ, Lk. χχϋ. 44 [L br. WH reject the
pass.] ; of a Λvay leading downwards. Acts viii. 26. 3.
figuratively, καταβ. ίως αδον. to (go i. e.) be cast down
to the lowest state of wretchedness and shame : Mt. xi.
23 L Tr W Η ; [Lk. x. 1 5 ΛΥΗ txt. Tr mrg. CoMP. : σνγ-
κατα3αίνω.~\ *
κατα-βάλλω : Pass, and Mid. pres. ptcp. κατα|3αλλ<>-
μ(νος : 1 aor. pass. κατ€βλήθην : [fr. Horn, down] ; Sept.
for "TSn; 1. lo cast down : τινά, pass., Rev. xii. 10
Rec. ; to throw to the ground, prostrate : pass., 2 Co. iv. 9
καταβαρέω
330
κατα/γωνίζομαι
(where the metaph. is taken from an atlilete or combat-
ant). 2. Ill put in a lower place : in the phrase dt-
μίΚιον κατίΐβάλλομαι, to lay {down) a foundation (Joseph,
antt. 11,4, 4; 15,11,3; Dion. li. antt. 3, G9 ; al.), Ileb.
\i. I.•
κατα-βαρ{(ι>, -ώ : 1 aor. κατ(βάρησα ; prop, to press down
III/ (in impost il weight; to weiijii down; ineta|)li. to bur-
den: τινά, any one, 2 Co. xii. 1(5. (I'olyb., Diod., App.,
Lcian.) *
κατα-βαρύνω ; i. q. καταβαρίω (q. V.) ; pres. pass. ptcp.
καταβαρυι•ύμ(νο!, Jlk. xiv. 40 LTTrWlI; see βαρίω.
(Sept. ; Tlicojihr. et al.) *
κατά-β(»Γΐ5, -fojs, ή, (καταβαίνω), [fr. Hdt. down], de-
scent ; a. the act of descendini/. b. the place
of descent : τον Spovs, i. e. tliat part of the mountain
where the descent is made, Lk. -xix. 37 ; so Josh. x. 11
Sept. ; Diod. 4, 21 ; opp. to άνάβασις, tlie place of ascent,
way up, I Mace. iii. 16, 24 ; Xen. Cyr. 7, 2, 3. So Lat.
descensus; <■{. Ilerzog on Sail. Cat. 57, 3.*
κατα-βιβάζω ; 1 fut. pass, καταβιβασθησομαι ; to cause
to godown (Hdt. 1, 87; Xen. Cyr. 7,5, 18; Sept. several
times for Tlin ; to bring down. Bar. iii. 29) ; to cast
down, thrust down : pass., ecay aSou (see ά^ηί, 2), Mt. xi.
23 RGT; Lk. x. 15 [Tr rar<T.' WH txt. καταβήση (q. v.
3)] ; f!s αδου, Ezek. xxxi. IC*
κατο-βολή, -ης, η, {καταβάΧλω, (]. v.) ; 1. a throw-
ing or Idi/ing down : τον σπέρματος (sc. eU την μητραν),
the injection or depositing of the i-irile semen in the
womb, Lcian. amor. 19; Galen, aphorism, iv. § 1 ; of the
seed of animals and plants, Philo de opif. mund. §§ 22,
45 ; σπίρματα τα tls γην η μήτραν καταβαλλόμενα, Anto-
nin. 4, 36 ; accordingly many interpret the words 2άρρα
δύναμιν €LS καταβοΧην σπέρματος ελα/3€ in Heb. xi. 1 1 , she
received power to conceive seed. But since it belongs
to the male καταβάλλειν τό σπίρμα, not to the female,
this interpretation cannot stand [(ace. to the reading of
AVHmrg. αίτϊι Σάρρα, Abr. remains the subj. of eXafitv;
but see 2 below)] ; cf. Bleek [and, on the other side,
Kurtz] ad loc. 2. a founding {laying down a foun-
dation) : (Is καταβ. στΐίρματος, to found a posterity, Ileb.
xi. 11 [but cf. above] (Tvpavvibos, Polyb. 13, 6, 2; άμα ttj
πρώτη καταβοΧί] των ανθρώπων. Flat, aquae et ignis conip.
C. 2). άτΓο καταβολής κόσμου, from the foundation of the
world : Mt. xiii. 35 [L Τ Tr WII om. κόσμου'] : xxv. 34 ;
Lk. xi. 50 ; Ileb. iv. 3 : ix. 26 ; Rev. xiii. 8 : xvii. 8 ; προ
καταβολής κόσμου, Jn. xvii. 24; Eph. i. 4 ; 1 Pet. i. 20.*
κατα-βραβ<νω, impv. 3 pers. sing, καταβραβίυίτω ; (prop.
βραβεύω to be an umpire in a contest, κατά sc. ηνός,
against one) ; to decide as umpire against one, to declare
him unworthy of the prize; to defraud of the prize of vic-
tory: Ttvii, metaph., to deprive of salvation. Col. ii. 18,
where cf. Meyer. [Bp. Lghtft., esp. Field, Otium Norv.
Pars iii.]. (Eust.ath. ad II. 1. 93, 33 (vss. 402 sq.) κατα-
βραβίΰει αυτόν, ώς φασιν ο! παλαιοί; but in the earlier
Grk. writ, that have come down to us, it is found only
in [pseudo-] Dem. adv. Mid. p. 544 end, where it is used
of one who by bribing the judges causes another to be
condemned.)•
καταγγ€λ€ν5, -/car, 6, (καταγγίλλω, q. v.), announcer
(Vulg. annuntiator), proclainicr: with gen. of the obj.,
Acts xvii. 18. (Eecles. writ.)*
κοτ-ογ-γίλλω ; impf. κατήγγελλαν; 1 aor. κατήγγιιλα;
Pass., pres. καταγγέλλομαι; 2 aor. κατηγγίλην; to an-
nounce, declare, proniulgnle, make known ; to proclaim
publicly, publish : τον λότγον τοΟ θιοϋ. Acts xiii. 5 ; xv. 36 ;
pass. Acts xvii. 1 :! ; (θη. Acts xvi. 2 1 ; to εΐαγγΐλιον, 1 Co.
i.x. 14 ; την άνάστασιν την εκ νεκρών, Acts iv. 2 ; τίις ήμ('ρα$
ταύτας, Acts iii. 24 G L Τ Tr WII ; θεόν [al. ό]. Acts xvii.
23; Ίι^σοΟκ, ib. 3 ; Christ, Phil. i. 1 6 (17), IS; Cohi.28;
τινί τι, Acts xiii. 38 ; xvi. 17; 1 Co. ii. 1 ; with the in-
cluded idea of celebrating, commending, openly praising
(hut. praed icare) : τι, Ro. i. 8 [A.V. ii spoken of] ; 1 Co.
xi. 26. (Occasionally iu Grk. writ. fr. Xen. an. 2, 5, 38
where it means to denounce, report, betray ; twice in the
O. T. viz. 2 Mace. viii. 36; ix. 17. [Cf. Wcstcott on
1 Jn. i. 5.]) [CoMP. : προ-καταγγέλλω.] '
κατα-γίλάω, -ώ : impf. 3 pers. ])lur. κατεγέλων; to de-
ride, [A.V. laugh to scorn] : τινός, any one [cf. B. § 132,
15], Mt. ix. 24 ; Mk. v. 40 ; Lk. viii. 53. (From [Aeschyl.
and] Hdt. down ; Sept.) *
κατα-γινύσκω ; pf. pass. ptcp. κατεγνωσμΐνος ; to find
fault with, blame: κατεγνωσμένος ην, he had incurred the
censure of the Gentile Christians; Luther rightly, es war
Klage uber ihn kommen [i.e. a charge had been laid against
him; but al. he stood condemned, see Meyer or Ellie.
in loc. ; cf. Bttni. § 134, 4. 8], Gal. ii. 1 1 ; to accuse, con-
demn : τινός, any one. 1 Jn. iii. 20 sq., with which cf . Sir.
xiv. 2 μακάριος, ου ου κατεγνω ή ψυχή αίιτον. (In these
and other signif. in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt.
down; [see EUicott u. s.].) *
κατ-άγνυμ,ι : int. κατεάζω; 1 HOT. κατεαζα (impv. κάτα^οι»,
Dout. xxxiii. 11); Pass., 2 aor. κατεάγην. whence subjunc.
3 pers. plur. κατεαγώσιν; 1 aor. κατεάχθην in Sept. Jer.
xxxi. (xlviii.) 25 ; (on the syllabic augment of these forms
cf. Btt7n. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 97 sq., ef. i. p. 323 sq. ; Matthiae
i. p. .')20 sq.; W. § 12, 2 ; ICurtius, Das Verbum, i. p. 118;
Veitch s. V. ; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T., Praef. p. Lxxix.]) ;
fr. Hom. down ; to break : τι, Mt. xii. 20 ; Jn. xix. 31-33.
[Syn. see Schmidt eh. 115, 5 and cf. βήγνυμι.]*
κατα-γράφω : impf. 3 pers. sing, κατεγραφεν ; to draw
(forms or figures), to delineate: Jn. viii. 6 cod. D etc.
which Τ Tr WII (txt.) would substitute for RG εγραφεν.
(Pausan. 1, 28, 2. Differently in other Grk. writ.)
[Perh. it may l)e taken in Jn. 1. c. in a more general sense :
to mark (cf. Pollux 9, 7, 104, etc.).]*
κατ-άγω : 2 aor. κατήγαγον ; 1 aor. pass, κατήχθην ; Sept.
for Τ11Π, to make to descend ; to lead down, bring down :
τινά, Acts xxii. 30 ; Ro. x. 6 ; τινά foil, by εις w. ace. of
place. Acts ix. 30; xxiii. [15 L Τ Tr AVII], 20, 28; τινά
foil, by πρόί w. ace. of pers.. Acts xxiii. 15 [RG]; τόπλοΊον
επ\ τήν γήνΙο bring the ve.isel (down from deep water) to
the land, Lk. v. 11 ; κατάγεσθαι, to be brought (down) in
a ship, to land, touch at : foil, by f is iv. ace. of place, Acts
xxi. 3 [LTTrWH κατήλθομεν]; xxvii. 3; xxviii. 12;
often so in Grk. writ.*
κατ-αγωνί^ομαι : deponent mid. ; 1 aor. κατηγωνισά-
καταοεω
331
νΚηρο^ο
μην; Χ. loslrugg!ea(jainst(Po\yh.2,i2,3,etc.). 2.
to overcome (cf. Germ, nied erkampfen) : Heb. xi. 33.
(Polyb., Joseph., Lcian., Pint., Aelian.) *
κατα-8€'ω, -ώ : 1 aor. Kwribq^a ; fr. Horn, down ; to hind
up : τα τραύματα, Lk. χ. 34. (Sir. xxvii. 21 acc. to the true
reading τμαϊμα.)*
κατά-δηλο5, -ov, (8ή\ος), thoroughly clear, plain, evident :
Heb.vii. 15. ([Soph.], Ildt., Xen., Plat, al.) [Cf. δ^λοι,
fin.]•
κατα-8ικάζω ; 1 aor. κατ(8ίκασα ; 1 aor. pass, κητίδικά-
σθη•^ ; 1 fut. pass, καταδίκασθήσομαι ; to give judgment
against (one), to pronounce guilty ; to condemn; in class.
Grk. [where it differs fr. κρίναν in giving prominence
to the formal and official as distinguished from the
inward and logical judging (cf. Schmidt, Syn. ch. 18,
6)] it is foil, by the gen. of the pers., in the N. T. by the
acc. [B. § 132, 16] : Mt. xii. 7 ; Lk. vi. 37 [here Tr mrg.
the simple verb] ; Jas.v.G; pass., iMt. xii. 37; [Lk.vi.37''
(not Tr mrg.)]. (Sept. Lam. iii. 35 ; Joseph, antt. 7, 11,
3.)•
κατα-δίκη, -?)f, ή ; 1. damnatory sentence, condcm-
naliun : Acts xxv. 15 L Τ Tr WII ; ([Epicharm. in Ath.
2, 3 p. 36 d.], Polyb., Plut., Iren. 1,16, 3). 2. pen-
alty, esp. a fine; (Thuc, I)em., Lcian.).*
κατα-διώκω : 1 aor. κάτ(ξΙωξα ; Sept. often for cjlT ; to
follow after, follow up, (esp. of enemies [Thuc. et al.]) ;
in a good sense, of those in search of any one : τινά, ^Ik.
i. 3'). (to eXeus σου κατα8ιώ^€ταί μ€, Ps. xxii. (xxiii.) 6 ;
ov κατΐ^ίο'ζαΐ' μ^θ' ήμων, 1 8. xx.\. 2'2 ; οπίσω τινός, to fol-
low aftur one in order to gain his favor. Sir. .xxvii. 17.) *
κατα-δουλόω, -ώ ; fut. κατα8ον\ώσω ; 1 aor. mid. xare-
δουλωσά^ιτ)!/ ; (κατά under [see κατά, ΠΙ. 3]); [fr. Hdt.
down] ; to bring into bondage, enslave : τινά, Gal. ii. 4 L Τ
Tr WH ; 2 Co. xi. 20 [cf. W. 255 sq. (240)] ; mid. to en-
slave to one's self, bring into bondage to one's self: Gal.
ii. 4 R G.*
κατα-δυνασ-τΕΐΙω : pres. pass. ptcp. καταδυΐ'αστί υόμίΐΌΓ ;
Sept. fur njin, \>pj,\, etc.; with gen. of jjers. [\V. 206
(193) ; B. 169 (147)], to exercise harsh control over one,
■ to use one's power against one: Jas. ii. 6 [not Tdf. (see
below)] (Diod. 13, 73) ; τινά, to oppress one (Xen. conv.
5, 8 ; often in Sept.) : Jas. ii. 6 Tdf. ; pass. Acts x. 38.*
κατά-βΕμ,α, -ror, τό, i. q. κατανάθ(μα (q. v.), of which it
seems to be a vulgar corruption by syncope [cf. Kou-
manoudes, Συναγωγή λί^Εων άθησανρ. κτ\. s. V. κατάς] ; a
curse ; by meton. worthy of execration, an accursed thing:
Rev. xxii. 3 [Her. κητανάθ€μα ; cf. Just. M. quaest. et resp.
121 fin. ; ' Teaching ' 16, 5]. Not found in prof, auth.*
κατα-βίματίξω; (κατάθ€μα. q. v.) ; to rail down direst evils
on, to curse vehemently: Alt. xxvi. 74 (liec. καταναθιματί-
ζ(ίν). (Iren. adv. haer. 1, 13, 4 and 16, 3.)*
κατ-αΐίτχίνω ; Pass., impf. καττ)σχννόμην ; 1 aor. καττι-
σχύνθην; fut. κατοίσχυνθήσομαι; Sept. chiefly for ϋ'3ΓΙ
and ty'^il; as in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down; 1. to dis-
lionor, disgrace : την κιφα^ην, 1 Co. xi. 4 sq. (σποδω την
Κ€φαλήν, Joseph, antt. 20, 4, 2). 2. to put to shame,
maheashamed: τινά,Ι Co.i.27; xi. 22; pass, to be ashamed ,
blush with shame: Lk. xiii. 17; 2 Co. vii. 14; ix. 4; 1 Pet.
iii. 16 ; by a Hebr. usage one is said to be put to shame
who suβ'ers a repulse, or whom some hope has deceived ;
hence ίλπα ού καταισχύνιι, does not disappoint: Ro. v. 5
(cf. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 6 ; xxiv. (.xxv.) 2 sq. ; cxviii. (cxix.)
116) ; pass., Ro. ix. 33; .κ. 11 ; 1 Pet. ii. G, (Is. xxviii.
16 ; Sir. ii. 10).*
κατα-κα(ω : impf. 3 pers. plur. κατίκαιον ; fut. κατακαίσω ;
1 aor. inf. κατακανσαι; Pass., pres. κατακαίομαι; 2 aor.
κατ(κάην; 2 fut. κατακαήσομαι [cf. Tilf. Pruleg. p. 123;
IFii. App.p. 170»]; 1 iut. κατακαυθήσομαι (Kiihneri. 841 ;
[Veitch s. v. καίω; Β. 60 (53); W. 87 (83)]); Sept.
chiefly for ^"^i^; fr. Hom. down; to burn up [see κατά,
lU. 4], consume by fire: τι, Mt. xiii. 30; Acts xix. 19 ;
pass., 1 Co. iii. 15 ; Heb. xiii. 11 ; 2 Pet. iii. 10 [Tr WH
ΐύρΐθήσ^ται, see ΐΰρίσκω, 1 a. fin.] ; Rev. viii. 7 ; with ττυρί
added, Mt. iii. 1 2 ; xiii. 40 R L Τ WII, but G Tr καίω ; Lk.
iii. 17, (Ex. xxix. 14; xxxii. 20 Alex., etc.; see καίω).
€v ττνρί (often so in Sept.), Rev. xvii. 16 ; xviii. 8. (καία
and κατακαίω are distinguished in Ex. iii. 2.) *
κατα-καλύτΓτω : Sejjt. for Γ\Β2 : fr. Hom. down ; to cover
up [see κατά. III. 3] ; Mid. pres. κητ-ακαλι'τττομαι. Ιο red
or cover one's self: 1 Co. xi. 6 ; την κιφαλήν, one's head,
ib. 7.*
κατα-καυχάομαι. -ώμαι, 2 pers. sing, κατακαυχάσαι (contr.
fr. κατακαυχύ(σαι) for the Attic κατακαυχά (Ro. xi. 18; cf.
W.§13, 2b.; [B. 42(37); 5ο/)Λ. Le.x., Introd. p. 40 sq. ;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 123 sq.] ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 360), impv. 2
pers. sing, κατακαυχω (Ro. xi. 18) ; (κατά against [cf. κατά,
III. 7]) ; prop, to glory agaiiist, to exult over, to boast one's
self to the injury of (a person or a thing) : Tivor, Ho. xi.
18 ; Tdf. in Jas. iii. 14 ; κατά τίνος, ibid. R G L Tr AVII
[B.185(160); W. § 30, 9 b. (cf. 432 (402))]; eAeui(i.q.
ό eXfoiv) κατακαυχάται κρίσεως, mercy boasts itself supe-
rior to judgment, i. e. full of glad confidence has no fear
of judgment, Jas. ii. 13. (Zech. x. 12; Jer. xxvii. (1.)
10, 38; not found in prof, auth.)*
κατά-κ£ΐμαι; impf. 3 pers. sing, κατίκίΐτο; (κeiμat,to
lie [see κατά. III. 1]); to have lain down i. e. to lie pros-
trate; a. of thesick [cf. coUoq. 'ί/οί'Ή sick'] (Hdt. 7,
229; Lcian. Icarom. 31 ; [Plut. vit. Cic. 43, 3]) : Mk. i.
30 ; Jn. v. G ; Acts xxviii. 8 ; foil, by eVi w. dat. of the
couch or pallet, Alk. ii. 4 R G L mrg. ; [Acts ix. 33 R G] ;
Lk. v. 25 R L ; eVi' τίνος. Acts ix. 33 [L Τ Tr WII] ; eVi'
Ti, Lk.v. 25TTrWH[B. §147, 24note; W. 408 (381)
note] ; ev w. dat. of place, Jn. v. 3. b. of those at
meals, to recline (Athen. 1, 42 p. 23 c. ; Xen. an. 6, 1, 4;
conv. 1, 14; Plat. conv. p. 177 d.; rep. ii. p. 372 d., etc. ;
Diog. Laert. 7, 1, 19; see άνάκ€ΐμαι) : absol., Mk. xiv. 3;
Lk. r. 29 ; foil, by eV w. dat. of place, Mk. ii. 15; 1 Co.
viii. 10; Lk. vii. 37 LTTrWII.•
κατα-κλάω, -ώ : 1 aor. κατίκ\ασα ; fr. Horn, down ; to
break in pieces (cf. Germ, zerbrechen [see κατά. III. 4]) :
τους άρτους, Mk. vi. 41 ; Lk. ix. IC.*
κατα-κλείω : 1 aor. (tare'/cXf ισα ; fr. [Ildt.], Thuc. and
Xen. down; to shut up, confine: τίνα ev rfj φνΧακί}, Lk.
iii. 20; fV (which Rec. om.) φυλακα'ις. Acts xxvi. 10 (Jer.
xxxix. (.xxxii.) 3).*
κατα-κληρο8οτ£'ω, -ώ (sec κατά, III. 6) : 1 aor. κατικΚηρο•
κατακΧηρονομέω
332
καταΧαμβάνι»
ίάττ^σα; Ιο ilialriliute bi/ lot; Ιο dislriliule αχ an inheritance \
τινίτι. Acts xiii. 19 Rec. ; see the foil. word. (Deut. i.
38; .\xi. Iti ; Josh. xix. 51 Ald.,Compl. ; 1 Mace. iii. 36,
— in .all with the var. κατακ\ηρονομάν. Not found in
prof, aiitli.) *
κατα-κληρονομί'ω, -ώ [see κατά. III. 6] : I aor. κατ(κ\ηρο-
νόμησα ; In 'Its/n/tute b;i lol, la datlrihute as an inhcrlidiirr :
Tivi Ti, Acts xiii. 19 () L Τ Tr WII. (Num. xxxiv. IS ;
Deut. iii. 28 ; Josh. xiv. 1 ; Judg. xi. 24 Alex. ; 1 S. ii. 8;
1 Esr. viii. 82. Also often intrans. to receive, obtain, ac-
quire (W an inheritance; as, Deut. i. 8 var., 38; ii. 21.
Not found in prof, autli.) *
κατα-κλίνω : 1 aoi•. κατίκλινα ; 1 aor. pass. κατ(κ\1θην ;
fr. lliDu. down; iu tlie N. T. in ref. to eating, la iiiaLe
lu recline: τινά, Lk. ix. 14, [also 15 TTrWll], (eVi το
hfltrvov, Xen. Cvr. ■>, 3, 21); mid., with 1 aor. pass., to
recline (nl tahle) : Lk. vii. SU L Τ Tr WII ; xxiv. 30 ; ei't
Tijv πρίύτοκΚισίαν, Lk. .\iv. 8, (fty το ίσθϊΐΐν, Judith xii. 15 ;
iis TO ϋύπνον, Joseph, antt. (i, 8, 1 [var.]).*
κατα-κλνζω: 1 iior. pass. ptcp. κατακλιισβίΐί; fr. [Pind.,
Hdt.], Aeschyl. down ; to overwhelm ivith water, to sulj-
merfje, deluge, fcf. κατά. III. 4] : 2 Pet. iii. 6. (Sept. sev-
eral times for ΠΟΠ.) '
κατα-κλυσμ05, -οϋ, ό, (κατακλύζω), inundiitinn, deluge : of
Noah's dfUr^c, .Mt. xxiv. 3~i ii[. ; Lk. xvii. 27; 2 Pet. ii.
5. (Sept. for ^OO; Plato, Diod., I'hilo, Joseph., Plut.)"
κατ-ακολουβί'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ptcp. κατακο\ουθ1]σα! ; lu fol-
low afer [see κατά. III. 5] : Lk. xxiii. .55 ; riW, .Vets xvi.
I 7. [Sept., PoI>b., Plut., Joseph., al.] *
κατα-κόΐΓτω; 1. to cut tip, cut to pieces, [see κατά,
111.4]; to slay: Is. xxvii. 9; 2 Chr. xxxiv. 7, ete. ; lldt.
et sqq. 2. to beat, bruise : ίαυτον λίθοις, Mk. v.
5 ; [al. retain here the primary meaning, to cut, i/ash,
maiif/le'].'
κατα-κρημνίζω ; I aor. inf. κατακρημνίσαι; Ιο caxt down
a /jrccipice; tn throw doicn heiidloni/: Lk. iv. 29. (2 Chr.
XXV. 12; 2 Mace. xiv. 43; 4 Mace. iv. 25; Xen. Cyr. 1, 4,
7; 8,3,41; Dem. 446, 11; Diod. 4, 31 ; [Philo de agric.
Xoii § 15] ; Joseph, antt. 6, 6, 2; 9, 9, 1.) *
κατά-κριμα, -τος, τό, (κατακρίνω), damnrilori/ sentence,
condentniilion: Ro. v. 1(1 (on which see κρίμα, '_'). ib. 18;
viii. 1. (κατακριμάτων άφίσιΐί, Dion. Ilnl. (i. 61.) '
κατα-κρίνω; ful. i«iri;/cpir/a>; 1 a.or. κατίκρινα: Pass., pf.
κατακίκριμαι; 1 aor. κατίκμίίΐ)ΐ'; 1 (ut. κατακριθήσομαι; to
f/ioe juilymenl iirjainst (one [see κατά. III. 7]), to judge
icorlhy of punishment, to condemn; a. prop.: Ro.
viii. 34; τινά, Jn. viii. 10 sq.; Ro. ii. 1, where it is dis-
ting. fr. KpineiP, as in 1 Co. xi. 32; 'pass., Mt. xxvii. 3;
Ro. xiv. 23 ; Tiva θανάτω, to adjudire one to death, con-
demn to death, .Mt. xx. 18 [Tdf. di θάιιατην] ; Mk. x. 33,
(κίκριμμίνοι θαράτω. to eternal death, Barn. ep. 10, 5);
Tfl καταστροφή, 2 Pet. ii. 6 [AVII om. Tr mrg. br. κατα-
στροφήΐ, (the Greeks say κατακρ. τινίι θανάτου or θάνα-
τον: cf. W. 210 (197 sip); B. § i:!2, l(i; Grimm on .'^ap.
ii. 20); w. the ace. and inf., τινά evo)(ou tivai θιιΐ'άτον. Mk.
xiv. 64; simply, of God condemning one to eternal mis-
ery: pass., Mk. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xi. 32; Jas. v. 9 Rec. b.
improp. i. e. by one's good example to render another's
wickedness the more evident and censurable : Mt. xii. 4 I
sq. ; Lk. xi. 3 1 sip ; Ileb. xi. 7. In a peculiar u.se of the
word, occasioned by the employment of the term κατά-
κριμα (ill vs. I ), Paul says, Ro. viii. 3, ό Λογ κατίκρινι την
ύμαρτίαν iv τί) σαρκί, Ί. e. through his Son, who partook
of hiuiian nature but was without sin, (iod deprived sin
(which is the ground of the κατάκριμιι) of its power in
human nature (looked at in llie general), broke its
deadly sway, (just as the condemnation and punishment
of wicked men ])uts an end to their power to injure nr
do harm). [(From Pind. and lldt. down.)]*
κατά-κρισ-ι;, -fius, ή, (κατακρίνω), condemnation : 2 Co.
iii. 9 (see binKouia, 2 a.); πραί κατάκρισιν, in order to con-
demn, 2 Co. vii. 3. (Not found iu prof, autli.)*
κατα-κυρίίίω ; 1 aor. ptcp. κατακυρκύσας: (κατά [(ρ v.
III. ο] under) ; a. lo bring nniler tmi '.< power, to sub-
ject til one's self, to subdue, master: t(tos. Acts xix. IC
(Diod. 14, 04 ; for ΰ22 Gen. i. 28; Sir. xvii. 4). b.
to hold in subjection, to be master of, exercise lordship over :
Tivor, Mt. XX. 25; ^Ik. x. 42; 1 Pet. v. 3; (of the benign
government of God, Jer. iii. 14). *
κατα-λαλίω, -ώ; to speak against one, to criminate, Ira-
ilure: τιΐ'όί (in class. Grk. mostly w. the ace; in the
Sept. ehielly foil, by κατά tivos), Jas. iv. 1 1 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 2 ;
iii. I G [here Τ Tr mrg. W II e'v ω κατα\ά\(1σθ(, wherelti ye
are sjxih η ogaiitst^.*
κατα-λαλιά, -as, η, (καταλαλοί, q. v.), defamation, evil-
speaking : 2 Co. xii. 20 ; I Pet. ii. 1, [on the plur. cf. VV.
17G (IGG); B. 77 (G7)]. (Sap. i. 11 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
30, 1 ; 35, 5. and eecl. writ. ; not found in class. Grk.) *
κατά-λαλο5, -ου, ό, a defamer, evil speaker, [A. V. back-
biiers] : Ro. i. 30. (Found nowhere else [Ilerm. sim. 6,
5, 5; also as adj. 8, 7, 2 ; 9, 2G, 7].)*
κατα-λαμ.βάνω : 2 aor. κατίλαβον; pf. inf. κατ(ι\ηφίναι;
Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. κατ(ΐΚηπται (.In. viii. 4 as given
in L Τ Tr WII t.xt.), pf. ptcp. κατ(ΐ\ημμ(νη! ; 1 aor. κα-
τ^ι'Κήφθην (Jn. viii. 4 R'"'"e'-G) [on the augm. cf. W.
§ 12, 6], and κατ(\ήφθην (Phil. iii. 12 RG), and κατ-Ε-
λημφθην (ibid. L Τ Tr WTI ; on the μ see s. v. M, μ);
Mid., prss. καταλαμβάνομαι; 2 aor. (£ατίλα/3ϋ'μι;ι/ ; cf.
Kiihner i. p. 8.')G ; [Veitch, s. v. λαμβάνω] ; Sept. for
yUTI 13^, also for Ν jO, etc. ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; to lay
hold of; i. e. 1. lo lay hold of so as to make one's
own, to obtain, attain lo: w. the ace. of the thing; the
prize of victory, 1 Co. ix. 24; Phil. iii. 12 sq. ; την δικαιο-
σϋνηι, Ro. ix. 30 ; i. q. to make one's own, to lake into
one's self, appropriate : ή σκοτία αΰτ!) (Ί. e. τό φώί) οϋ κα-
τίλαβ(ν, Jn. i. 5. 2. lo seize upon, lake possession of,
(Lat. occupare) ; a. of evils overtaking one (so in Grk.
writ. fr. Horn, down) : τινά, σκοτία, Jn. xii. 35 ; [so physi-
callv, Jn. vi. 17 Tdf.]; of the last day overtaking the
wicked with destruction. 1 Th. v. 4; of a demon about
to torment one, Mk. ix. 18. b. in a good sense, of
Christ bv his holy power and influence laying hold iif
the human mind and will, in order to prompt ami govern
it, Phil. iii. 1 2. 3. lo delect, catch : nva ίν τινι, in
pass. Jn. viii. 3 [WH «Vi τ.] ; with a ptcp. indicating
the crime, ib. 4. 4. to lay hold of with the m i nd;
καταΧέ'γω
333
καταΚυμα
to understand, perceive, learn, comprehend, (Plat. Phaedr.
p. 250(1.; Axioch. p. 370 a.; Polyb. 8, 4, 6 ; Philo, vita
contempl. § 10; Dion. Ilal. antt. 5, 4β); Mid. (Dion.
Hal. antt. 2, 66 ; [cf. W. 253 (238)]), foil, by ότι. Acts
iv. 13 ; X. 34 ; foil, by the ace. w. inf., Acts xxv. 25 ; foil.
by indir. disc, Eph. iii. IS.*
κατα-λί'γω : pres. pass. impv. (caraXeyfVflsi; 1. prop.
to lay (lotcn ; mid. to lie down (lloiii.). 2. to narrate
at length, recount, set forth, [fr. Horn. on]. 3. to set
down in a Hit or register, to enroll, (esp. soldiers ; see
Passow s. V. 5 ; [L. and S. s. v. II. 2 (yet the latter connect
this use with the signif. to choose)'\) : of those widows
who held a prominent place in the church an<le.\ercised
a certain superintendence over the rest of the women,
and had charge of the widows and orphans supported at
public expense, 1 Tim. v. 9 fW. 590 (549)]; cf. De Wette
[or Ellicott] ad loc*
κατά-λ6ΐμιμ.α, -ror, to, (raraXf ίπω), a remnant, remains :
Ro. ix. 27 R G, where it is equiv. to a few, a small part ;
see ύπόλίίμμα. (Sept., Galen.) '
κατα-λίίττω ; fut. καταλβίψ-ω ; 1 aor. κατβλκψα (in later
auth.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 713 siiq. ; [Veitch s. v. XfiVoj;
WH. App. p. 169 sq.]); 2 aor. κατΛιττοί' ; Pass., pres. κα-
ταΚ(ΐττυμαι\ pf. ptcp. κaτtϊKi\ftμμ(vos [Wll -Χιμμΐυο!, see
(their App. p. 154', and) s. v. I, i]; 1 ίοτ. κατ(\(ίφθην•, (see
«ατά, III. 5) ; Sept. for τηΐπ, τχ^ίΠ, 2]•),\ ; [fr. Horn,
down]; to leave behind; with ace. of place or pers. ; a.
i q. to depart from, leave, a pers. or thing : Mt. iv. 13 ;
tvi. 4 ; xxi. 1 7 ; Heb. xi. 27 ; raetaph. ^ίθ^Ιαν όδον, to for-
sake true religion, 2 Pet. ii. 15. pass, to be left : .In. viii.
9; i. q. to remain, foil, by eV with dat. of place, 1 Th. iii.
1. b. i. q. to hid (one) to remain : τινά in a place. Acts
xviii. 19 ; Tit. i. 5 [R G; al. airiiKeiirm]. c. to forsake,
leave to one's selj a pers. or thing, by ceasing to care for
it, to abandon, leave in the lurch : τον πατϊρα κ. την μητίρα,
Mt. xix. 5 ; Mk. χ. 7 ; Eph. v. 31, fr. Gen. ii. 24 ; pass, to
he abandoned, forsaken : elt αδου [or ά&ην (q. v. 2)], Acts
ii. 31 Ree. (see eyκaτciKeίπω, 1 ) ; w. ace. of the thing, Mk.
xiv. 52 ; Lk. [v. 28] ; xv. 4 ; τον Xoyov, to neglect the
office of instruction, .\ets vi. 2. d. to cause to he left
over, to reserve, to leave remaining : ^μαυτώ, Ro. xi. 4 (1
K. xL\. 18) ; KoTaXfiVfTai, there still remains, inayyt\la, a
promise (to be made gucjd by the event), Ileb. iv. 1 {μάχη,
Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 1 1 ; σωτηρία! (λπίς, Joseph, b. j. 4, 5, 4) ;
τινά with inf. (to leave any business to be done by one
alone), Lk. x. 40. e. like our leave behind, it is used
of one who on being called away cannot take another
with him: Actsxxiv. 27; xxv. 14; spec, of the dying (ίο
leave behind), Mk.xilW, [21 Lmrg.TTrWH]; Lk.
XX. 31,(Deut. xxviii. 54; Prov. xx. 7; and often in Grk.
writ. fr. Horn. Ή. 24, 726; Od. 21, 33 on). f. like our
leave i. q. leave alone, disregard: of those who sail past a
place without stopping, Acts xxi. 3. [Comp. : ϊγ-κατα-
λf£πω. J *
κατα-λιθάζω : fut. καταλιθάσω ; (see κατά, TIL 3 [cf. W.
102 (97)]) ; to overwhelm with stones, to stone : Lk. xx. 6.
(Eccles. writ.) •
κα'τ^λλαγή, -^r, ij, (κατάΚΧάσσα, q. v.) ; 1. ex•
change ; of the business of money-changers, exchang-
ing equiv. values [(Aristot., al.)]. Hence 2. ad-
justment of a difference, reconciliation, restoration to favor,
[fr. Aeschyl. on] ; in the N. T., of the restoration of the
favor of God to sinners that repent and put their trust
in the expiatory death of Christ : 2 Co. v. 18 sq. ; w. Ilie
gen. of the one received into favor, τοί κόσμου (opp. to
αποβολή), Ro. xi. 15; καταλλαγήν (λάβομ^ν, we received
the blessing of the recovered favor of God, Ro. v. 11 ; w.
the gen. of him whose favor is recovered, 2 Mace. v. 20.
[Cf. Trench § lxx%ii.]•
κατ-αλλάσ-σ-ω ; 1 aor. ptcp. καταΧΧάξαί ; 2 aor. pass.
κατηλλά-γην ; prop, to change, exchange, as coins for others
of eijual value ; hence to reconcile (those who are at vari-
ance) : Ttfos, as Tois Θηβαίου! και τους Πλαταΐί'αΓ, Ildt. 6,
108 ; κατη\\αζάν σφίας οι ηάριοι, 5, 29 ; Aristot. oecon.
2, 15, 9 [p. 1348'', 9] κατήλ\αξ(ν αϋτοϋί προΓ άλλ^λουί ;
pass, τινί, to return into favor with, be reconciled to, one,
Eur. Iph. Aul. 1157; I'lat. rep. 8 p. 566 e.; προς aXXijXous,
Thuc. 4, 59; but the Pass, is used also where only one
ceases to be angry with another and receives him into
favor; thus καταλλα -yfis, received by Cyrus into favor,
Xen. an. 1, 6, 1 ; κατο\\άττ€ται προ! αΐτήν, regained her
favor, Joseph, antt. o, 2, 8; and, on the other hand, God
is said καταλλαγηναϊ τινι, with whom he ceases to be of-
fended, to whom he grants his favor anew, whose sins he
pardons, 2 Mace. i. 5 ; vii. 33 ; viii. 29; Joseph, antt. 6,
7, 4 cf. 7, 8, 4, (so (πικαταΧ\άττ€σθαί τινι, Clem. Rom. 1
Cor. 4S, 1). In the N. T. God is said καταλλάσσ«»
ίαυτω τίνα, to receive one into his favor, [A. V. reconcile
one to himselfl, 2 Co. v. 18 s<\. (where in the added ptcps.
two arguments are adduced which prove that God has
done this : first, that he does not impute to men their
trespasses; second, that he has deposited the doctrine
of reconciliation in the souls of the preachers of the
gospel) ; καταλλαγήναι τω θιω, to be restored to the favor
of God, to recover God's favor, Ro. v. 10 [but see ίχθρο!,
2] ; κατα\\ά•/ητΐ τώ 6ίω, allow yourselves to be recon-
ciled to God ; do not oppose your return into his fa\or,
but lay hold of that favor now offered you, 2 Co. v. 20.
of a woman : κατάλ\αγ)τω τω άνδρΐ, let her return into
harmony with [A. Λ'. be rei-onciled to'] her husband, 1 Co.
vii. 11. Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 276 sqq. [who
shows (in opp. to Tittmann, N. T. Syn. i. 102, et al.) that
καταλλάσσω and διαλλάσσω are used promiscuously ; the
prepp. merely intensify (in slightly different modes) the
meaning of the simple verb, and there is no evidence
that one compound is stronger than the other; διαλλ.
and its derivatives are more common in Attic, καταΧλ.
and its derivatives in later writers. Comp. : άπο-κατα\-
λάσσω.] *
κοτά-λοιττοϊ, -OP, (Xowror), lefl remaining : [οι κατάλοι-
ποι τ. ανθρώπων Α. V. the residue of men], Acts xv. 1 7.
(Plat., Aristot., Polyb. ; Sept.) *
κατά-λυμα, -ror, to, (fr. καταλύω, C ; q.v.), an inn, lodg-
ing-place : Lk. ii. 7 (for Jl'^O, Ex. iv. 24) ; an eating^oom,
dining-room, [A.V. guest-chamber'] : Mk. xiv. 14 ; Lk. xxii.
11; in the same sense for n^vh, 1 S. ix. 22. (Polyb. 2
καταλύω
334
καταννσσω
36, 1 [|>Iur.]; 32, 19, 2; Diod. 14, 93,5; [al.; cf. W. 25,
93 (89)].)•
κατα-λύω ; f lit. καταλύσω; \ aor. κατΆνσα; 1 aor. pass.
κατ(λύθην ; 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing, καταλυβήσίται ; Ιο </(»-
so/ce, di.tunile, [see κατά, III. 4] ; a. (wliat has been
joined together) 1. q. lo destroy, demolish : XiSovc [A. V.
throw down], Mt. xxiv. 2; Mk. .\iii. 2; Lk. xxi. 6; τον
rativ, Mt. -x.wi. CI; xxvii. 40; Mk. xiv. 58 ; xv. 29; Acts
vi. 14 ; nUiav, 2 Co. v. 1 ; univ. opp. to ο2κο8ομ(ϊΐ', Gal. ii.
IH (2 Esdr. V. 12; Iloin. 11. 9, 24 sq. ; 2,117; τηχη,Εΐίτ.
Tro. 819; γ,'φυραν, Ildian. 8, 4, 4 [2 ed. Bekk.]). b.
metaph. to orert/trow i. e. render vain, deprive of success,
hriiKj to naught : την βουλην η τό 'ργον. Acts v. 38 (ται
uTTfiXaf, 4 Mace. iv. 16); τινά, to render fruitless one's
desires, endeavors, etc. ibid. 39 G L Τ Tr WH (Plat,
legg. 4 ρ 714 c.); to subvert, overthrow, το epyov τοϋ θ(οϋ
(see ά-γαθός, 2), Ro. xiv. 20. As in class. Grk. fr. Ildt.
down, of institutions, forms of government, laws, etc., to
deprive of force, annul, abrogate, discard : τον νόμον, Mt.
V. 17 (2 Mace. ii. 22 ; Xen. mem. 4, 4, 14; Isocr. paneg.
§ 55 ; Philost. v. Apoll. -l, 40). c. of travellers, to halt
on a journey, to put up, lodge, (the fig. expression origi-
nating in the circumstance that, to put up for the night,
the straps and packs of the beasts of burden are unbound
and taken off ; or, perh. more correctly, fr. the fact that
the traveller's garments, tied up when he is on the jour-
ney, are unloosed at its end ; cf. αναλύω, 2) : Lk. ix. 1 2 ;
xix. 7 ; so in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc, Xen., Plat, down ;
Sept. for pS, Gen. xix. 2 ; xxiv. 23, 25, etc. ; Sir. xiv. 25,
27; x.xxvi. 31; [cf. B. 145 (127)].*
κατα-μανθάνω : 2 aor. κατίμαθον; met with fr. Ildt.
down ; esp. fre(|. in Xen. and Plat. ; to learn thoroughly
[see κατά, III. 1], examine carefully; to consider well: τι
foil, by πώί, Mt. vi. 28. (Gen. xxiv. 21 ; Job xxxv. 5,
etc. ; τταρθίνου. Sir. ix. 5 ; κάλλο? αΚΧότριον, ibid. 8.) *
κατα-μ.αρτυρ€'ω, -ώ ; to bear witness aqatnst : τί τίνος,
testify a thing against one [B. 16.j (144), cf. 178 (154)],
Mt. xxvi. 62; xxvii. 13; Jlk. xiv. GO, and R G in xv. 4.
(1 K. XX. (xxi.) 10, 13 ; Job xv. 6 ; among Grk. writ. esp.
by the Attic orators.) *
κατα-μΐ£'νω; ίο remain permanently, <o αδίίίβ : Acts i. 13.
(Xum. xxii. 8 ; Judith xvi. 20 ; Arstph., Xen., PhUo de
gigant. § 5.) *
καταμόναϊ, and (as it is now usually written [so L Τ
TrWII]) separately, κατά μόνα: (so. χώραί), apart, alone:
Mk. iv. 10 ; Lk. ix. 18. (Thuc. 1, 32. 37 ; Xen. mem. 3,
7, 4 ; Joseph, antt. 18, 3, 4 ; Sept. for T13 and Tl^'?, Ps.
iv. 9 ; Jer. xv. 1 7, etc.) *
κατ-ανά-βίμα, -rot, τό, once in Rev. xxii. 3 Rec. ; see
άvάθeμa and κατάθίμα. Not found in prof, auth.*
κατ-ονα-βίματίζω ; (κατανάθ(μα, q. v.) ; i. q. καταθιμα-
τίζω (q. V.) : .Alt. xxvi. 74 Rec. (Just. M. dial. c. Tr. c.
47, and other eccl. writ.)*
κατ-αν-αλ(σ-κω ; (see άνη'ΚΙσκω, and κατά, HI. 4); lo
consume: of fire, Ileb. xii. 29 after Deut. iv. 24; ix. 3.
(In Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat, down; Sept. several
times for SdN.) *
■caTa -ναρκάω, -« : fut. καταναρκησω ; 1 aor. κατ^νάρκησα ;
{ναρκαα to become numb, torpid ; in Sept. trans, to
affect with numbness, make torpid. Gen. xxxii. 25, 32 ;
Job x.\xiii. 1 9 ; f r. νάρκη torpor) ; prop, to cause lo grow
numb or torpid; intrans. to be torpid, inactive, to the det-
riment of one ; lo weigh heavily upon, be burdensome to :
Tiviit (gen. of pers.), 2 Co. xi. 9 (8) ; xii. 13 sq. (Ile-sych.
κατ(νάρκησα ■ κατίβάρησα [al. ί'^άριικα]) ; Jerome, ad Al-
gas. lU [(iv. 204 ed. Benedict.)], discovers a t'ilieism in
this use of the word [cf. W. 27]. Among prof, autli.
used by Ilippocr. alone, and in a pass, sense, to be quite
numb or sli^'.'
κατα-ν^ύω: 1 aor. κατίνίνσα; fr. Hom. down; to nod
to, make a sign to : Tivi, foU. by του w. aor. inf., to indi-
cate to another by a nod or sign what one wishes him to
do [A. V. beckoned to . . . thai they should come, etc.], Lk.
V. 7.•
κατα-νο(ω, -ω ; impf. kotcvoovv ; 1 aor. κατινόησα ; fr.
Ildt. <luwn ; Sept. here and there for [3ί3ΠΠ, 0"3Π,
ΠΝ1 ; 1. Ιο perceive, remark, observe, understand : τι,
Mt. vii. 3 ; Lk. vi. 41 ; xx. 23 ; Acts xxvii. 39. 2. to
consider attentively, fix one's eyes or mind upon: τι, Lk.
xii. 24, 27; Actsxi. 6; Ro. iv. 19; w. the ace. of the thing
omitted, as being understood fr. the context, Acts vii. 31
sq. ; Tira, Ileb. iii. 1 ; x. 24 ; Jas. i. 23 sq.*
κατ-αντάω, -ώ : 1 aor. κατήντησα; pf. κατήντηκα (1 Co.
X. llLTTrWH); to come to, arrive at; a. prop.:
foil, by eif w. ace. of place. Acts xvi. 1 ; xviii. U», 21 ;
xxi. 7; XXV. 13; xxvii. 12; xxviii. 13, (2 Mace. iv. 44) ;
αντικρύ Tivos, to a jilace over against, opposite another,
Acts XX. 15; tls Ttva τα τίλη των αΙώνων κατηντηκ€ν, i. e.
whose lifetime occurs at the ends of the ages, 1 Co. x.
11. b. metaph. th τι, like the Lat. ad aliquid per-
venio, i. e. to attain to a thing: Acts xxvi. 7; Eph. iv. 13;
Phil. iii. 1 1 ; καταντά τι (is τίνα, to one, that he may be-
come partaker of it, 1 Co. xiv. 36. (Polyb., Diod. ;
eccl. writ.)*
κατά-ντ)ξΐ5, -fwt, ή, (καταννσσω, q. v.) ; 1. a prick-
ing, jiiercing, (Vulg. co7rtpunctio). 2. severe sorrow,
extreme grief. 3. irtsensibility or torpor of mind,
such as extreme grief easily produces; hence πνίΐιμα
καταννξ(ω!, a spirit of stupor, which renders their souls
tor|)id, i. e. so insensible that they are not affected at
all bv the offer made them of salvation through the Mes-
siah, Ro. xi. 8 fr. Is. xxix. 10 Sept. (where the Ilebr.
ΠΟ'ΠΙΓΙ ΠΙ^, a spirit of deep sleep, is somewhat loosely so
rendered ; o'vos κατανΰξιως for Π^ΙΟΟ γ-, wine which
produces dizziness, reeling, Germ. Taumelwein, Ps. lix.
(Ix.) 5). Not found in prof. auth. Cf. Fritzsche's full
discussion of the word in his Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 558
sqq. ; [cf. W. 94 (90) ; Bp. Lghtft. ' Fresh Revision ' etc.
p. 139 note].*
κατα-νΰσσω : 2 aor. pass, κατίννγην [Β. 63 (55)] ; ίο
prick, pierce ; metai>h. to pain the mind sharply, agitate it
vehementli/ : used esp. of the emotion of sorrow ; κατινΰγη-
σαν rfi Kapbia (την Kaphiav LTTrWH), they were smit-
ten in heart with poignant sorrow [A. V. lit. pricked].
Acts ii. 37 (κατανινυγμίνον Trj KapSia, Ps. cviii. (cix.) IG;
add, Gen. xxxiv. 7 ; Sir. xii. 12 ; xiv. 1, etc. ; of lust, Sua.
κατα^ιόω
385
κατάρα
10; of violent pity, Joann. Malal. chronogr. 1, 18, ed.
Bonn. p. 460). Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 558 sqq.*
κατ-αξιόω, -ώ : 1 aor. pass, κατηξιώθην; Ιο account worthy,
judye u-orthij : τίκά rivos, one of a thing, 2 Th. i. 5 (Polyb.
1, 23, 3, etc. ; Diod. 2, 60 ; Joseph, antt. 15, 3, 8) ; foil,
by an inf., Lk. xx. 35 ; xxi. 36 [T Tr txt. WH κατισχΰ-
<njrf]; Acts V. 41, (Dem. 1383, 11 [cf. Plat. Tim. 30 c.]).*
κατα-^ττατίω, -ώ; fut. καταπατήσω (Mt. vii. 6 L Τ Tr
^\I1); 1 aor. κατίπάτησα; Pass., pres. καταπατοΐψαί ;
1 aor. κατι-πατήθτιν; to tread down [see κατά, III. 1], tram-
ple under J'ljot : τΐ and τιι/ά, Mt. v. 13 ; vii. 6 ; Lk. viii. 5 ;
xii. 1, (Hdt. et sqq.; Sept.); metaph., like the Lat. con-
culco, to trample on i. q. to treat with rudeness and insult,
2 Mace. viii. 2, etc.; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 61 [where
its use to denote desecration is illustrated] ; to spurn,
treat with insulting ner/lect : ^ov v'lov toC θ^οϋ, Heb. x. 29 ;
SpKta, Horn. II. 4, 157 ; rois νόμηυς. Plat. Icgg. 4, 714 a. ; τα
γράμματα. Gorg. p. 4S4 a.; τούί Xdyow, Epict. 1, 8, 10;
τά ρηματά μου. Job vi. .3 Aq.*
κατά-ΐΓαυοΓΐ5, -fωs, ij, (καταπαύω, q. v.); 1. actively,
a putting to rest : των πνίυμάτων, a calming of the winds,
Theophr. de ventis 1 8 ; τυράννων, removal from office,
Hdt. 5, 38. 2. In the Grk. Scriptures (Sept. sev-
eral times for nnijp) intrans. a resting, rest: ήμίρα της
καταπ. the day of rest, the sabbath, 2 Mace. xv. 1 ; τόποι
της καταπ- μου, where I may rest. Acts vii. 49. Metaph.
ή κατάπ. την θ(οϋ, the heavenly blessedness in which God
dwells, and of which he has promised to make persever-
ing beUevers in Christ partakers after the toils and trials
of life on earth are ended: Heb. iii. 11, 18; iv. 1, 3, 5,
10 sq., (after Ps. xciv. (.\cv.) 11, where the expression
denotes the fixed and tranquil abode promised to the
Israelites in the land of Palestine).*
κατα-ττανω : 1 aor. κατίπαυσα ; (κατά, like the Germ.
nieder, down) ; 1. trans. (Sept. for Π";Π^ jTatyri)
to make quiet, to cause to he at rest, to grant rest; i. e. a.
to lead to a quiet abode: τινά, Ileb. iv. 8 (Ex. .xxxiii. 14;
Deut. iii. 20 ; v. 33 ; xii. 10 ; Josh. i. 13, 15 ; 2 Chr. xiv.
7; xxxii. 22; Sir. xxiv. 11). b. to still, restrain, to
cause (one striving to do something) to desist : foil, by
τοϋ μη and an inf.. Acts xiv. 18 [cf. B. § 140, 16 β.;
W. 325 (305)]. 2. intrans. to rest, take rest (Hebr.
nij, ϊ^2ψ) : από τίνος, Heb. iv. 4, 10. (Gen. ii. 2). In the
same and other senses in Grk. writ. fr. Ilom. down.*
κατα-τΓ€τασ•μ.α, -τος, τό, (καταπ€τάννυμι to spread out
over, to cover), an Alex. Grk. word for παραπέτασμα,
which the other Greeks use fr. Hdt. down ; a red spread
out, a curtain, — the name given in the Grk. Scriptures,
as well as in the vvritings of Philo and Josephus, to the
two curtains in the temple at Jerusalem (τά καταπατά-
σματα, 1 Mace. iv. 51 ; [yet cf. Edersheim, Jesus the
Messiah, ii. 611]): one of them (Hebr. ^Do) at the
entrance of the temple separated the Holy place from
the outer court (Ex. xxvi. 37; xxxviii. 18; li^um. iii. 26;
Joseph, b. j. 5, 5, 4; it is called also τό κάλυμμα by the
Sept. and Philo, Ex. xxvii. 16 ; Xum. iii. 25 ; Philo, vit.
jvioys. iii. §§ 5 and 9), the other veiled the Holy of holies
>om the Holy place (in Hebr. the Π3Ί3 ; ivhartpov κα-
ταπίτασμα, Joseph, antt. 8, 3, 3 ; τό ϊσώτατον καταπίτασμα
Philo de gig. § 12 ; by the Sept. and Philo this is called
pre-eminently τό καταπίτασμα, Ex. xxvi. 31 sqq.; Lev.
xxi. 23 ; xxiv. 3 ; Philo, vit. Moys. u. s.). This latter
καταπίτασμα is the only one mentioned in the N. T. : το
καταπίτασμα τοΰ ναοϋ, Mt. xxvii. 51 ; Mk. xv. 38 ; Lk.
xxiii. 4.3 : τό devTepov κατατητασμα, Heb. ix. 3 ; τό (σωτ€•
pov τον καταπίτάσματος (cf. Lev. xvi. 2, 12, 15; E.\. .xxvi.
33) the space more inward than the rei7,equiv. to 'the
space within the veil,' i. e. the Holy of holies, figura-
tively used of heaven, as the true abode of God, Heb. vi.
19; in a similar figurative way the body of Christ is
called καταπίτασμα, in (Heb.) x. 20, because, as the veil
had to be removed in order that the high-priest might
enter the most holy part of the earthly temple, so the
body of Christ had to be removed by his death on the
cross, that an entrance might be opened into the fellow-
ship of God in heaven.*
κατο-ιτίνω ; 2 aor. κατίπιον ; 1 aor. pass, κατιπόθην ; [f r.
Hes. and Hdt. down] ; prop, to drink down, swallow
down : Mt. xxiii. 24 ; Rev. xii. 16; to devour, 1 Pet. v. 8
[here Tr -n-iftK by mistake ; (see πίνω, init.)]; to swallow
up, destroij, pass., 1 Co. xv. 54 ; 2 Co. v. 4 ; Heb. xi. 29 ;
trop. \νπτ] καταποθηναι, to be consumed with grief, 2 Co.
ii. 7.•
κατο-ττίτΓΓω ; 2 aor. κατίττεσοζ/ ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to fall
dnirn : Acts x.xviii. 6 ; eij την yijv. Acts xxvi. 14 ; eV» τη»
ττίτραν, Lk. viii. 6 TTrWlL*
κατα-ιτλίω : 1 aor. κατίπλ(υσα ; [fr. Hom. on] ; to sail
down from the deep sea to land ; to put in : ets την χώραν,
Lk. viii. 26.•
κατα^ίΓονίω. -ώ : pres. pass. ptcp. καταπονουμενος ; prop.
to tire down with toil, exhaust with labor; hence to afflict
or oppress with evils; to make trouble for; to treat roughly:
τινά, in pass.. Acts vii. 24 ; 2 Pet. ii. 7 [R. V. sore dis-
tressed^. (3 Mace. ii. 2, 13; Hippocr., Theophr., Polyb.,
Diod., .Tosei)h., Aelian., al.) *
κατα-ΐΓθντ£ζω : Pass., pres. καταποντίζομαι ; 1 aor. kotc
ποντίσθην; to plunge or sink in the sea; Pass, in the in-
trans. sense, to sink, to go down : Mt. xiv. 30 ; a grievous
offender for the purpose of killing him, to drown : pass.
Mt. xviii. 6. (Lys., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut., [Joseph,
antt. 10, 7, 5; 14, 15, 10; c. Apion. 2, 34, 3], al. ; Sept.;
[cf. W. 24; Loh. Phryn. p. 361 note].)'
κατ-άρα, -as, ή, (κατά and αρά, cf. Germ. Verfluchung,
VerwUnschung, [cf. κατά. III. 4]); Sept. chiefly for
rnip; an execration, imprecation, curse: opp. to fvXoyia
(q. v.), Jas. iii. 10 ; y^ κατάρας iyyvs, near to being cursed
by God i. e. to being given up to barrenness (the allu-
sion is to Gen. iii. 1 7 sq.), Heb. vi. 8 ; ύπ-ό κατάραν tlvai,
to be under a curse i. e. liable to the appointed penalty
of being cursed. Gal. iii. 10 ; ίξαγοράζίΐν τινά ίκ της κ. to
redeem one exposed to the threatened penalty of a curse,
ib. 13; τίκνα κατάρας, men worthy of execration, 2 Pet.
ii. 14 ; abstract for the concrete, one in whom the curse
is exhibited, i. e. underfjoing the appointed penalty of
cursing. Gal. iii. 13; eyii κατάρα ίγηηθψ, Protev. Jac
c. 3. "(Aesch;-!., Eur., Plat., al.) *
και αραομαι
336
κατασκβυάζα
κατ-αράομ.αι, -ωμαι ; (dcp. mid. fr. κατάρα) ; 1 aor. 2 pers.
sin^. κατηράσω; [pf. pass. ptcp. κατηραμίνο! (_see below)] ;
fr. Horn, down; Sept. mostly for 7'7P and T'X; to curse,
doom, imprecate, evil on : (opp. to iuXoyiii/) absol. Ho. .\ii.
14; w. dat. of the obj. (as iu the earlier Grk. writ.), Lk.
vi. 28 Rec. (Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer. GJ] 6ii ; [.Joseph, c. Ap.
1, 22, IG]) ; w. ace. of the obj. (as often in the later Grk.
writ., as Plut. Cat. min. 32, 1 var. [B. § 133, 9; W. 222
(208)]), Mt. V. 44 Uec; Lk. vi. 2$ GLt.\t. TTr Wll;
Jas. iii. 9; α tree, i. e. to wither it by cursing, Mk. xi. 21
(see Heb. vi. 8 in κατάρα), pf. pass. ptcp. κατηραμίνος
in a pass, sense, accurserl (Sap. .\ii. 11 ; [2 K. ix. 34];
Plut. Luc. 18; and κ(κατηραμ. Deut. .xxi. 23; [Sir. iii.
IC]) : Mt. XXV. 41 (also occasionally κίκατάρανηη. Num.
xxii. 6 ; xxiv. 9 ; [but Tdf. etc. τηρ- ; see Veitch s. v.
άράομοί]).*
κοτ-οργ(ω, -ω; fut. καταργήσω ; 1 aor. κατήργησα; pf. κα-
τήργηκα; Pass., pres. xaTapyoO/iat; pi. κατήργημαι; 1 aor.
κατηργήθη»; 1 fut. καταργηθήσυμαι; causative of the verb
άργϊω, equiv. to apyov (i. e. άιργον [on the accent cf.
Chandler § 444]) ποιώ; fre(j. with Paul, who uses it 25
times [elsewhere in N. T. onl}• twice (Lk., Heb.), in Sept.
4 times (2 Esdr., see below)] : 1. to render idle, un-
emploijed, inactive, inoperative : τήυ yqv, to deprive of its
strength, make barren [A. V. cuinhi:r'\, Lk. xiii. 7 ; to
cause a pers. or a thing to have no further efficiency ; to
deprive of force, influence, power, [A. V. bring to nought,
make of none effect^ : τι, Ro. iii. 3; 1 Co. i. 28; τινά, 1 Co.
ii. 6 [but in pass.] ; diabolic powers, 1 Co. .xv. 24 (Justin,
apol. 2, 6) ; Antichrist, 2 Th. ii. 8 ; τον θάνατον, 2 Tim. i.
10 (Barnab. ep. 5, G) ; του 8ιάβη\ον, Ileb. ii. 14 ; pass. 1
Co. XV. 26 ; to make void, τήν tnayyeXiav, Gal. iii. 1 7 ;
pass. Ro. iv. 14. 2. to cause to cease, put an end to,
do awatj with, annul, abolish : τι, 1 Co. vi. 13; xiii. 11 ;
τον νόμον, Ro. iii. 31 ; Eph. ii. 1.5 ; τον καιρόν τον ανόμου,
Barnab. ep. 15, 5; pass, πόλ^μοί καταργίΐται (πονρανίων
και ϊπιγ^Ίων, Ignat. ad Kph. 13, 2; ινα καταργηθη το σώμα
τη! αμαρτία!, that the body of sin might be done away,
i. e. not the material of the body, but the body so far
forth as it is an instrument of sin; accordingly, that the
body may cease to be an instrument of sin, Ro. vi. G.
Pass, to cease, pass away, be tlone away : of tilings. Gal.
V. 11 ; 1 Co. xiii. 8, 10; 2 Co. iii. 7, 11, 13 sq.; of persons,
foil, by από tivos, to be severed from, separated from, di.•'-
charged from, loosed from, any one; to terminate all in-
tercourse with one [a pregn. eonstr., cf. W. 621 (577);
B. 322 (277)] : «Jjro τον Χρίστου, Gal. v. 4 [on the aor. cf.
W. § 40, 5 b.]; άπο τοϋ νόμου, Ro. vii. [2 (R•'" om. τ. i».)], 6.
The ^τord is rarely met with in prof, auth., as Eur. Phoen.
753 καταργ. χίρα, to make idle, i. e. to leave the hand
unemployed ; Polyb. ap. Suid. [s. v. κατηργηκίναι] τονί
καιρούς, in the sense of to let slip, leave unused; in Sept.
four times for Chald. Sp3, to make to cease, i. e. restrain,
check, hinder, 2 Esdr. iv. 21, 23; v. 5 ; vi. 8.*
κατ-αριθμ<(ι>, -ώ : to number with : pf. pass. ptcp. καττ;-
ριθμημίνος iv (for Rec. σνν) ήμ'ιν, was numbered among
ui, Actsi. 17; cf. 2 Chr. xxxi. 19; [Plar. politicus 266 a.
etc.].•
κατ-αρτ(ζω; fut. καταρτίσω (1 Pet. v. 10 L TTr Wll
[B. 37 (32) ; but Rec. καταρτϊσαι, 1 aor. op tat. 3 piTS.
*'"?•])• ' '^'^^• 'if• καταρτϊσαι; Pass., pres. καταρτίζομαι;
pf. κατήρτισμαι; 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing, κατηρτίσω; prop.
to render άρτιοι i. e. ft, sound, complete, [see κατά, IIL 2];
hence a. to mend (what has been broken or rent),
to repair: τα Βίκτυα, Mt. iv. 21 ; Mk. i. 19, [al. ref. these
exx. to next head], i. q. to complete, τα ίστ(ρήματα, 1 Th.
iii. 10. b. to fit oat, equip, put in order, arrange, ad-
just: Toic alavat, the worlds, pass. Heb. xi. 3 (so, fur
[■jn, ηλιον, Ps. Ixxiii. (Ixxiv.) IG; σ(\ήνηι>, Ixxxviii.
(l.>i.\.xix.) 38) ; σκ^ΰη κατηρτισμίνη (It άπώλ(ΐαν. of men
whose souls God has so constituted that they cannot es-
cape destruction [but see Mey. (ed. Weiss) in loc], Ro.
ix. 22 (irXula, Polyb. 5, 46, 10, and the like); of the
mind : κατηρτισμίνο! u>s etc. so instructed, equipped, as
etc. [cf. B. 311 (267) ; but al. take κατηρτ. as a circum-
stantial ptcp. when perfected shall be as (not ' above ')
his master (see iley. in loc.) ; on this view the passage
may be referred to the next head], Lk. vi. 40 ; mid. to
fit or frame for one's self, prepare : aivov, Mt. xxi. IG (fr.
Ps. viii. 3 ; Sept. for ^y) ; σώμα, Heb. x. 5. c. ethi-
cally, to strengthen, perfect, complete, make one what he
ought to be: τινά, [1 Pet. v. 10 (see above)]; Gal. vi. 1
(of one Λνΐιο by correction may be brought back into the
right way) ; pass., 2 Co. xiii. 11 ; τινά «ν παντΊ ίργω [(Γ
WH om.)] άγαθω, Heb. xiii. 21 ; κατηρτισμίνοι iv τω αντω
vol κτλ. of those who have been restored to harmony
(so τΐάντα ftf τωυτο, Hdt. 5, lOG ; Ίνα καταρτισθη ή στασιά•
ζούσα πύλΐί. Dion. Hal. antt. 3, 10), 1 Co. i. 10. [CoMl'. :
προ-καταρτίζω.] '
κατ-άρτισ -is, -ίωί, ή, {καταρτίζω, q. v.), α strengthening,
perfecting, of the soul, (A'ulg. consummatio) : 2 Co. .xiii.
9. (a training, disciplining, instructing, Plut. Them. 2,
7 [var.]; Alex. 7, 1.)•
καταρτΐ(Γμό$, -oC, o, i. q. κατάρτισΐ!, q. v. : tivos fit τι,
Eph. iv. 12. [(Galen, al.)] •
κατα-σίΐω: 1 aor. κατίσίίσα; 1. to shake down,
Ihriiw down, [cf. κατά, KL 1 ; (fr. Thuc. on)]. 2.
ίο shake : τήν χιφα, to make a sign by shaking (i. e. ΤΆ\>-
idly ivavin'z) the hand (Philo, leg. ad Gaiura § 28 ; τη>
Xdpns, ib. de Josepho § 36) ; of one about to speak wlm
signals for silence. Acts .\ix. 33 ; hence simply κατασίΐΈιν
τινί, to make a sign, to signal with tlie hand to one, Xcn.
CjT. 5, 4, 4; Joseph, antt. 8, 11, 2; then, with a diire-
gard of the origin of the phrase, the instrument, dat. τ?/
χίΐρί was added, Polyb. 1, 78, 3 ; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 48 ;
so of one about to make an address : Acts -xii. 17 ; xiii.
16; xxi. 40; Joseph, antt. 8, 11, 2.*
κοτοσ-κάΐΓτω : 1 aor. κατίσκαψα ; pf. pass. ptcp. κατε-
σκαμμίνος; to dig under, dig down, demolish, destroy: τι,
Ro. xi. 3, fr. 1 K. -xix. 10 ; pass. Acts xv. 16 [R G L], fr.
Amos ix. 11 [(but see καταστρ(φ<ύ)'\. (Tragg., Thuc,
Xen., sqq.).•
κατα-σ'Κ€υίζω : fut. κατασκευάσω ; 1 aor. κατ(σκ(νασα :
Pass., pres. κατασκευάζομαι; pf. ptcp. χατεσκενασμίνο!;
1 »or. κατεσκευάσθην ; to furnish, equip, prepare, make
ready ; a. of one who makes any thing ready for
κατασκηνοω
337
κατατίβημι
pers. or thing: την όδό», Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii.
27; pf. pass. ptcp. prepared in spirit, hk. Ί. 17 (Xen.
Cyr. 5, 5, 10). b. of builders, to construe:, erect,
with the included idea of adorning and equipping with
all things necessanj, (often so in Grk. auth. ; cf. Bleek,
Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. .398 sq.) : ol<ov, lleb. iii. 3 sq. ;
κιβωτόν, Heb. xi. 7 ; 1 Pet. iii. :iO; σκηνήν, Heb. L\. 2, 6;
Sept. for χ-13. Is. xl. 2>) ; xliii. 7.*
κατα-<Γκηνόω, -ώ, inf. -σκηυοΊν (Mt. xiii. 32 LTTrAVH,
Mk. iv. 32 WH, see άπ-οδί «ατόω ; [but also -σκηνονν, Mt.
1. c. R G ; Mk. 1. c. R ϋ L Τ Tr ; cf . Tdf. Proleg. p. 1 23]) ;
fut. κατασκηνώσω ; 1 aor. κατασκήνωσα ; prop, to pitch
one's tent, to fix one's abode, to dwell : (φ' ίΚπΐ8ι, Acts ii.
2t> fr. Ps. XV. (.xvi.) 9 ; foil, by ev w. dat. of place, Jit.
xiii. 32; Lk. xiii. 19; ίπά w. ace. of place, Mk. iv. 32.
(Xen., Polyb., Diod., al. ; κατ(σκήνωσ(ν ό ieur τω ναω
τούτω, Joseph, antt. 3, 8, 5 ; add, Sir. x.xiv. 4, 8 ; Sept.
mostly for p-y.) *
κατ<ΜΓκήνωσ•ΐ5, -ΐωί, η, (^κατασκηνοω, q. v.), prop, the
pitching of tents, encamping; place of tarrying, encamp-
ment, abode: of the haunts of birds, Mt. viii. 20; Lk. Lx.
58; (for ]TC)'i, Ezek. xxxvii. 27; cf. Sap. Lx. 8; Tob. i.
4 ; Polyb. 11. 26, 5 ; Diod. 17, 95).•
κατα-<Γκιάζω ; to ocershadoic, cover with .shade, [see κατά,
m. 3] : τί, Heb. ix. 5. (lies., Eur., Plato, al.; κατασκιάω,
Horn. Od. 12, 43u.)•
κατα-ο-κοίΓίο), -ώ : 1 aor. inf. κατασκοπήσαι ; to inspect,
view closely, in order to spg out and plot against: τι. Gal.
ii. 4 ; (of a reconnoitre or treacherous examination, 2 S.
X. 3 ; .Tosh. ii. 2 sq. ; 1 Chr..xix.3; Eur. Hel. 1607 (1623);
so used, esp. in mid., in the other Grk. writ. fr. Xen.
down).*
κατά-(ΓΚ0ΐΓ05, -ου. 6, (κατασκίπτομαι [i. q. κατασκοπάω^),
an inspector, a spg : Heb. xi. 31. (Gen. xiii. 9, 1 1 ; IS.
xxvi. 4 ; I Mace. xii. 26; in prof. auth. fr. Ildt. down.) *
κατα-σΌψΓζομαι : 1 aor. ptcp. κατασοφισήμανος ; (σο-
φίζω): dep. mid., in prof. auth. sometimes also pass.; to
circumvent bg artifice or fraud, conquer by subtle devices:
to outwit, overreach ; to deal craftily with : τινά. Acts vii.
19 fr. Ex. i. 10. (.ludith v. 11; x. 19; Diod., Philo,
Joseph., Lcian.. al.) *
κατα-<ΓΤ€λλω : 1 aor. ptcp. καταστ(ί\αί ; pf. pass. ptcp.
κατ(στα\μίΐ'ο( ; a. jirop. to senit or put down, to
lower. b. to put or keep down one who is roused or
incensed, to repress, re.itrain, appease, quiet: τινά. Acts
xix. 35 sq.; 3 Mace. vi. 1; Joseph, antt. 20, 8, 7 ; b. j.
4, 4, 4 : Plut. mor. p. 207 e.*
κοταΗΤτημα, -ror, to, (καθίστημι), (Lat. slatwt, habitus),
[ilemeanor, deportment, bearing'] : Til. ii. 3. (3 Mace. v.
45; Joseph, b. j. 1, 1, 4 [of a city; cf. άτριμαίω τω κατα-
στήματι προς τ. θάνατον άττηαι, Joseph, antt. 15, 7, 5 ; Plut.
Marcell. 23, 6 : cf. Tib. Graoch. 2. 2. See Wetst. on
Tit. 1. c. ; cf. Ignat. ad Trail. 3, 2 (and Jacobson or
Zahn in loc.)].) *
κατα-στολή, -ήτ, ή, (καταστί\\ω, q. V.) ; 1. prop.
a lowering, letting down; hence 2. in bibl. Grk.
twice, a garment let down, dress, attire : 1 Tim. ii. 9,
Vulg. habitus, which the translator, ace. to later Lat.
33
usage, seems to understand of clothing (cf. the French
I'habit) ; [cf. Joseph, b. j. 2, 8, 4] ; for Πϋ^'Ο, Is. Lxi. 3.
with which in mind Hesych. says raTaoroXijii • ηριβοΧήν
[cf. W. 23, but esp. Ellicott on 1 Tim. 1. c.].'
κατα-ο-τρ€φω : 1 aor. κατίστριψα ; pf. pass. ptcp. «coTf-
στραμμίνο! (Acts -XV. 16 T[WH,but Tr -στραμμίνοί; cf.
WII. App. p. 170 sq.]) ; 1. to turn over, turn un-
der: the soil with a plow, Xen. oec. 17, 10. 2. to
overturn, overthrow, throw down: τί, Mt. .xxi. 12; Mk. xi.
15 ; [τά κατ f στρ. ruins']. Acts xv. 1 6 Τ Tr WH [(cf. κατα-
σκάπτω)]; so Hag. ii. 22: Job ix. 5; Joseph, antt. 8, 7,
6; AnthoL 11, 163, 6; Diog. L. 5, 82.»
κατα-στρηνιάω : 1 aor. subjunc. καταστρηνιάσω [(fut. 1
Tim. V. 1 1 Lulim. mrg.)] ; (see στρηνιάω) ; lO feel the im-
pulses ofsexiKd desire, [A. V. to grow iranlon]; (Vulg.
luxurior) : rifot, to one's loss [A. V. against], 1 Tim. v.
11 ; l^nat. ad .\ntioch. c. 11.*
κατα-σ~Γροφή, -ijs, η, {καταστρέφω), (\^ulg. subversio,
l_erersio]), ooerlhniw, destruction : of cities, 2 Pet. ii. 6
[WH om. Tr mrg. br. καταστρ.] (Gen. xLx. 29) ; metaph.
of the extinction of a spirit of consecration to Christ,
[A. V. the subverting] : 2 Tim. ii. 14. (Aeschyl. Eum.
490.)•
κατα-<Γτρώννυμι : 1 aor. pass, καταστρώθην ; to strew over
(the groimd) ; to prostrate, slay, [cf. our to lay low] : 1 Co.
x. 5 [A. V. overthrown]. (Num. xiv. 16; .Judith vii. 14;
xiv. 4; 2Macc. V. 26,etc.; Hdt. 8, 53; 9,76; Xen. Cyr.
3, 3, 64.)•
κατα-στίρω; [fr. Ildt. down]; 1. prop, ίο draw
down, pull down, Isee κατά. III. Ϊ]. 2. to draw along,
drag forcihhj, (τίνα δια μίση! αγοράς, Philo in Flacc. § 20;
leg. ad Gaium § 19) : τιιίΪ προς tow κριτήν, Lk. .xii. 58.
(Cic. pro Mil. c. 14, 38 quom in judicium detrain non
posset.) *
κατα-ιτψάζω [or -σφαττω] : 1 aor. κατάσφαζα; to kill ojf
[cf. κατά. III. 1], to slaughter: Lk. xix. 27. (Sept.;
Hdt.. Tragg., Xen., Joseph, antt. 6, 6, 4 ; Ael. v. h. 13,
2; Hdian. 5, 5, 16 [8 ed. Bekk.].) •
κατα-σ'ψρα'γίζω : pf. pass. ptcp. κατΐσφρα-γισμίνος ; to
cover icilh a seal [see κατά. III. 3], to seal up, clo.'^e with
a seal: /3»/3λιΌι» σφραγϊσιν, Rev. v. 1. (Job ix. 7; Sap.
ii. 5 ; Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., Plut., Lcian., al.) *
KaT<wrxi<ris, -<ωί, ή, (κατίχω), Sept. often for ΠΤΓ1Ν,
possession; 1. a holding back, hindering: anonym,
in Walz, Rhetor, i. p. 616, 20. 2. a holding fast,
possession : yrjv boivai els κατάσχ. to give in possession
the land. Acts vii. 5, as in Gen. xvii. 8 ; Deut. xxxii. 49
Alex. : Ezek. xxxiii. 24 ; xxxvi. 2 sq. 5 ; Joseph, antt.
9, 1, 2; [Test. xii. Patr., test. Benj. § 10]; w. gen. of the
subj. τών (θνων, of the territory possessed by [Me pos-
se.-siV)ii of] the nations, Acts vii. 45 ; (a portion given to
keep, Philo, rer. div. haer. § 40 [cf. Ps. ii. 8]).*
κατα-τίθημι : 1 aor. κατίθηκα ; 2 aor. mid. inf. καταθί-
^τθαι: [fr. Hom. down]; to lay down [see κατά, III. 1],
deposit, lay up : act. prop, τινά iv μνημιίω, Jlk. -xv. 46
[LTr WH iftyKii»] ; mid. to lay by or lay up for one's
ie(/J for future use: rm, with any one ; ;^<ίριι< [better -ra;
see χάρις, init.] and χάριτος κατατ. τινι, to lay up favor
κατατομή
338
KarevavTi,
for one's self with any one, to gain favor with (to do some-
thing for one which may win favor), Acts xxiv. 27 ; xxv.
9; soHdt. 6, 41; Thuc. 1,33; Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 2(i ; Uem.
193, 22 (20) ; φιλίαν τινί, 1 Mace. χ. 23 ; dtpyealav τινι,
Joseph, antt. 11, 6, 5 ; [cf. Dem. u. s.]. [CoMi•. ; avy-
καταΤίθημι•'] *
κατα-τομή, -ης, ψ (fr. κατατ€μνω [cf. κατά, III. 4] to cut
up, mutilate), mutilation (Lat. concisio) : Phil. iii. 2,
where Paul sarcastically alludes to the word πιριτομή
which follows in vs. 3 ; as though he would say, Keep
your eye on that boasted circumcision, or to call it by its
true name ' concision ' or ' mutilation.' Cf. the similar
passage, Gal. v. 1 2 ; see αποκόπτω.'
κατα-τοξίύω : 1 fut. pass, κατατοξίνθησομαι ', to shoot
down or thrust throuf/h with an arrow, τίνα βολίδι, Ileb.
xii. 20 Rec. fr. Ex. xix. 13. (Num. xxiv. 8 ; Ps. x. (xi.)
2; Ildt., Thuc, Xen., al.) *
κατα.τρί'χιιΐ : 2 aor. κατ/δρα/χοκ ; to run down, hasten
down : tVi Ttvas, to quell a tumult. Acts xxi. 32. [Hdt. on.] •
[κατ-αυγόζω : 1 aor. inf. καταυγάσαι ; to beam down
upon ; /<) .■ihiiie forth, shine brii/hlli/ : 2 Co. iv. 4 L mrg.
Tr mrg., wliere al. aiyaaai q. v. ; cf. φωτισμός, b. ; (trans.
Sap. xvii. .5, etc.; intrans. 1 Mace. vi. 39; Heliod. 5, 31).*]
καταφάγω, sec κατΐσθίω.
κατα-φ€ρω ; 1 aor. κατηνίγκα ; Pass., pres. καταφέρομαι ;
1 aor. κατηνίχθην; [fr. lioni. down] ; to bear doicn, bring
down, cast down : ψηφορ, prop, to cast a pebble or calcu-
lus sc. into the urn, i. e. to give one's vote, to approve.
Acts xxvi. 10 ; αΐτιώματα κατά τίνος (see κατά, I. 2 b. [but
the crit. edd. reject κατά κτλ.]), Acts xxv. 7 LTTrAVH.
Pass, to be borne doirn, to sink, (fi'om the window to the
pavement), άπο τοϋ νπνου, from sleep (from the effect of
his deep sleep [cf. B. 322 (277) ; AV. 371 (348)]), Acts
x.x. 9' ; metaph. lo he ireighed down bi/, overcome, carried
away, καταφιρόμινος νπκω βαθύ, sunk in a deep sleep.
Acts XX. 9»; of a different sort [contra W. 431 (401)] is
the expression in prof. auth. καταφίρομαι tU ΰπνον, to
sink into sleep, drop asleep, Joseph, antt. 2, 5, 5 ; Ildian.
2, 1, 3 [2]; 9, 6 [5]; τοϊσιν νπνοισιν, Hipp. p. 1137c.
[(Kuhn iii. p. .">39)], and in the same sense simply κατα-
φίρομαι ; cf. [L and .S. s. v. I. 2 d.] ; Steph. Thes. iv. col.
1286 [where the pass. fr. Acts is fully discussed].'
κατα-ψεν-γω : 2 aor. κατίφχ/γον; [fr. Hdt. down]; to
flee away, flee for refuge : foil, by ds w. ace. of place,
Acts xiv. 6 ; oi καταφνγόντ^ς, we who [cf. B. § 144, 9 c]
have fled from sc. the irreligious mass of mankind, foil,
by an infin. of purpose, Heb. vi. 18 ; cf. Delitzsch ad loc*
κατο-φθ€(ρω : pf. pass. ptcp. κατιφθαρμίνος ; 2 fut. pass.
καταφθαρησομαι ; [see κατά, ΠΙ. 4] ; 1. to corrupt,
deprave ; κατ^φθαρμίνοι τον νουν, corrupted in mind, 2
Tim. iii. 8. 2. to destroy ; pass, to be destroyed, to
perish : foil, by tv w. dat. indicating the state, 2 Pet. ii.
12 RG. [From Aeschyl. down.] •
κατα-ψιλ('ω, -ώ ; Ίαιγ{. κατ€φίλουν; 1 α,οτ. κατίφίλησα; to
kiss much, kiss again and again, kiss tenderly, (Lat. d e-
osculor, etc.) : τινά, Mt. xxvi. 49; Mk. xiv. 45 ; Lk. vii.
38,45; XV. 20; Acts xx. 37. (Tob. vii. 6; 3 Mace. v. 49;
Xen. Cyr. 6,4, 10; 7, 5, 32; Polyb. 15, 1, 7; Joseph, antt.
7, 11, 7; Ael. v. h. 13, 4; Plut. Brut. 16; Lcian. dial,
deor. 4,5; 5,3; φίΚ(Ιν and καταφίΚάν are distinguished
in Xen. mem. 2, 6, 33 ; Plut. Ale.x. c. 67. Sept. for puJ
prop, to join mouth to mouth.) Cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p.
780; Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. ii. p. 18, note -'.*
κατα-ψρον6'ω, -ώ ; iut. καταφρονήσω; 1 aor. κατ(φμύνησα;
[fr. Ildt. down]; to conlinm, d(.<jii..<e, disdain, think little
or nothing of: w. gen. of the obj. [B. § 132, 15], Mt. vi.
24 ; xviii. 10 ; Lk. xvi. 13 ; Ro. ii. 4 ; 1 Co. xi. 22 ; 1 Tim.
iv. 12; vi. 2; 2 Pet. ii. 10; Heb. .xii. 2.*
καταψρονητή;, -οΰ, 6, {καταφρονίω), a despiser : Acts. xiii.
41. (Ilab. i. 5; ii. 5 ; Zepli. iii. 4 ; Philo, leg. ad Gaium
§ 41 ; Joseph, antt. 6, 14, 4 ; b. j. 2, 8, 3 ; Plut. Brut. 1 2,
and in eccl. writ.) *
κατα-χ€'ω: 1 aor. 3 pers. sing, κατίχ^ιν (see (κχΐα); to
pour ilown upon ; pour over, pour upon : eVl τήν κιφαλήν
(L Τ Tr AVll ίπιτης Κ€φα\ης), ΛΙί. xxvi. 7 ; Kara της Κίφα•
\ης (Plat. rep. 3 p. 398 a.; Epiet. diss. 2, 20, 29), Mk.
xiv. 3 (where L Τ TrWH om. (tard [cf. W. 381 (357) scp;
Hdt. 4, 62 ; Plat. legg. 7 p. 814 b. ; Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 36,
2. Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. G6 sq.]).*
κατα-χθόνιοϊ, -ov, (κατ-ά [see κατά. III. 3], γ^θών [the
earth] ), sul/lerrnnean, Vulg. infern us : plur., of those who
dwell in the world below, i. e. departed souls [cf. W. § 34,
2 ; but al. make the adj. a neut. used indefinitely ; see
Bp. Lghtft. in loc], Phil. ii. 10. (Hom., Dion. II., An-
thol., etc., Inscrr.) *
κατα-χράομαι. -ώμαι ; 1 aor. mid. inf. καταχρήσασθαι ;
in class. Grk. 1. touse^nuchor excessively or ill. 2.
to use up, consume by use, (Germ, ν e rhrauchen). 3.
to use fully, the κατά intensifying the force of the simple
verb (Germ, g e brauchen), (Plato, Dem., Diod., Joseph.,
al.) : 1 Co. vii. 31 [cf. B. § 133, 18 ; W. 209 sq. (197)];
Tivl, ib. ix. 18.*
κατο-ψΐχω : 1 aor. κατίψυξα ; to cool off, (make) cool :
Lk. xvi. 24. (Gen. xviii. 4 ; Hippocr., Aristot., Theophr.,
Plut., al.) *
κατ££δωλθ5, -ov. (κατά and «δωλοι/ ; after the analogy of
κατάμπίλος, κατά-/ομος, κατάχρνσος, κατάδ^ν^ρος, etc, [see
κατά, III. 3, and cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 638]), /«// of idols :
Acts xvii. 16. (Not found in prof. auth. [cf. W. § 34.
3].)•
κατ-<'ναντι, adv.; not found in prof. auth. [AV. 102
(97)] ; in Sept. mostly for njj, IJjS, 'JijS, (see ίναντι and
anevairri) ; prop, over against, opposite, before : foil, by the
gen. [B. 319 (273); cf. W. § 54, G], Mk. xi. 2; xii. 41
[Tr txt. WH mrg. απέναντι'] ; xiii. 3, and L Τ Tr WH in
Mt. xxi. 2 ; L Tr WH txt. also in xxvii. 24 ; ή κατίναντι
κώμη, the village opposite, Lk. xix. 30. Metaph., w. gen.
of pers., before one i. e. he being Judge (see ϊνώπιον [esp.
2 e. and 1 c]) : τοϋ Seov, Ro. iv. 1 7 (which, by a kind of
attraction somewhat rare, is to be resolved κατίναντι 5foC,
ω ϊπίστίυσί, who is the father of us all ace. to the judg-
ment and appointment of God, whom he believed, —
the words καθίύς . ■ . τίθίΐκη forming a parenthesis ; cf.
Fritzsche ad loc. ; [B. 287 (247) ; but al. resolve it,
κατίναντι τ. θ(οΰ κατίν. ου ίπίστ., cf. Meyer (per contra
ed. Weiss) ad loc ; W. 164 (155)]) ; or, he being witness
κατενωτηον
339
κατέχω
[in the sii/ht ο/] : τού θ(οϋ, L Τ Tr WH in 2 Co. ii. 1 7 and
xu. 19.•
κατ-ίνώτΓίον, adv., not met with in prof. auth. ([W. 102
(97)] see ϊνώπιον), over against, opposite, before the face of,
before the presence of, in the sight of, before : foil, by the gen.
[B. 319(273sq.); cf. W. § 54, 6]; a. prop. of place,
Jude 24 (Lev. iv. 17; Josh. i. 5; iii. 7; .x.xiii. 9). b.
metaph. having one as it were before the eyes, before one
as witness : τοΟ deoi, Rec. in 2 Co. ii. 17 ; xii. 19, (see
κατίναντι) \ btfore God as Judge, Eph. i. 4 ; Col. i. 22 [cf.
Bp. I.ghtft. inloc; also B. 173, 180, 188].*
κατ-(ξου<Γΐ(ίξω ; not found in prof. auth. ; to exercise axir
thority, wield power, [see κατά, III. 3] : τικόί, over one,
Mt. XX. 2.5 ; Mk. χ 42.•
κατ-εργάζομαι ; ])f. inf. κατιιργάσθαι ( 1 Pet. iv. 3 L Τ
TrW'H); 1 aor. mid. κατίφγασάμην, and κατηργασάμην
(Ro. vii. 8 Τ Tr. ; [2 Co. vii. 11 ']']) ; 1 aor. pass. Kareip-
■γάσθην, and κατηργάσθην (2 Co. xii. 12 Tdf.) ; see tpya-
ζομαι, init. ; a de(jon. mid. verb ; [ace. to Fritzsche, Rom.
i. p. 107 the κατά is eitlier intensive {ha,t. ρ e rfcere) or
descensive (Lat. ρ e r petrare)'] ; a. to perform, ac-
complish, achieve, [R. V. often worki : Ro. vii. 15, 17 sq.
20; Ti διά Ttvos (gen. of pers.), Ro. xv. 18 ; άπαντα κα-
τ(ρ-γασάμ€!>οι haiing gone through every struggle of the
fight, Eph. vi. 13 [cf. Meyer in loc] ; σημ€Ϊα, pass. 2 Co.
xii. 12; of disgraceful actions, i. q. to perpetrate, Ro. i.
27; ii. 9; 1 Co. v. 3 ; 1 Pet. iv. 3. b. to work out
(Lat. efficere), i. e. to do that from which something results;
of man : την σωτηρίαν, make every effort to obtain salva-
tion, Phil. ii. 12 ; of things : bring about, result in, Ro. iv.
15; V. 8; vii. 8; 2 Co. vii. 10 (where L Τ Tr WH
e'pyaf.) ; Jas. i. 3, and RG in 20; τί τινι, Ro. vii. 13 ; 2
Co. iv. 17; vii. 11 ; ix. 11. c. Karepy. τίνα eitTt, to
fashion,!, e.. render one ft for a thing: 2 Co. v. 5. (Often
in Cirk. writ. fr. Soph, and Hdt. down ; several times in
Sept.)•
κατ-€ρχομ.αι ; 2 aor. κατή\θον, 1 pers. plur. κατηΧθαμιν
(Acts xxvii. S Τ Tr WH ; on which form see άπΐρχομαι,
init.) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to come dorm, go down ; prop, of
one who goes from a higher to a lower locality : foil, by
eli w. ace. of place, Lk. iv. 31 ; Acts viii. 5 ; xiii. 4 ; [xix.
1 Τ Tr mrg.] ; and L Τ Tr WH in χ v. 30 ; foil, by οπό
w. gen. of place, Lk. ix. 37; Acts xv. 1 ; xviii. 5; xxi.
10; foil, by από and els. Acts xi. 27; xii. 19; of those
who come to a place by ship [Eustath. (ad Hom.) 140S,
29 (Od. 1, 18.Ϊ) KUTeXeeiv, ov μόνον το άπ\ώς κάτω που
ΐΧθίΙν, άλλα και το es λιμένα (XOeiv, ωσττρρ κα\ καταβηναι κ.
καταπ\ξΐ/σαι κ• καταχ^θηναι κ. κατάραι. τυ ίλλιμ^νίσαι Xe'-yerat ;
aLso 19.56, 35 (Od. 24, 115) κατηΧθον η άντ\ τοΰ (vf\ipfvi-
σθην,• ως ποΧλαχού ίρρίθη, η άντ\ του άπλω? ηΚθον ; cf.
Ebeling, Lex. Homer, s. v.] : foil, by eis, Acts xviii. 22;
xxi. 3 L Τ Tr WH ; xxvii. 5 ; πρόί τίνα. Acts ix. 32.
Metaph. of things sent down from heaven by God : Jas.
iii. 15.*
κατ-ίσ-βίω, ptcp. plur. κατίσθοντΐς (jNIk. xii. 40 Tr WH ;
see ίσθίω and ίσθω ; cf. Fritzsche, Hdbch. z. d. Apokry-
plien, i. p. 150 [who says, 'The shorter form occurs freq.
in the Sept., Lev. xix. 26 ; Sir. -xx. 15, (16),elsewh. almost
e.xclusively poetic; see Bttm. Ausf. Sprachl. ii. p. 185'
(cf. Veitch s. v. eVA'w)]) ; fut. καταφάγομαι ( Jn. ii. 1 7 G L
Τ Tr WH ; see ΐσθίω) ; 2 aor. κατίφαγον ; Sept. for
75X ; 1. prop, to consume by eating, to eat up, de-
vour : τί, of birds, Mt. xiii. 4 ; Mk. iv. 4 ; Lk. viii. 5 ; of
a dragon, Rev. xii. 4 ; of a man, eating up the little book,
i. e. eagerly taking its entire contents into his inmost soul,
and, as we say, digesting it (borrowed fr. the fig. in Ezek.
ii. 10 ; iii. 1-3, cf. Jer. xv. 16) : Rev. x. 9 sq. 2.
Metaph. in various uses ; a. to devour i. e. squander,
waste, substance : Lk. .xv. 30 (often so in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. Od. 3, 315; 15, 12 down; devorare patrimonium,
Catull. 29, 23). b. to devour i. e. forcibly appro-
priate : Tas οικίας των χηρών, widows' property, IMt. x.xiii.
14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40 [cf. B. 79 (69); W. § 29,
2] ; Lk. XX. 47. c. with an ace. of the pers. ou
to strip one of his goods: 2 Co. xi. 20. β. to ruin (by
the infliction of injuries) : Gal. v. 15. d. of fire, to
devour i. e. utterly consume, destroy : τινά, Rev. xi. 5 ; x.x.
9. e. of the consumption of the strength of body
and mind by strong emotions : rti-a, Jn. ii. 1 7 (Ps. Ixviii.
(Ixix.) 10; Joseph, antt. 7, 8, 1).•
κατ-€υβννω : 1 aor. inf. κατ(υθνναι ; 3 pers. sing. opt.
καχ€νθϋναι; (see κατά, HL 2) ; Sept. mostly for ID" and
p13, riin ; to make straight, guide, direct: τους ποίας (ΐς
686v dp. Lk. i. 79 ; την όδόκ προς τίνα, of the removal uf
the hindrances to coming to one, 1 Th. iii. 1 1 ; τάς καρ-
δίας (1 Chr. xxix. 18 ; 2 Chr. xix. 3) eif την άγάττην τοϋ
θ(ού, 2 Til. iii. 5. (Plat., Aristot., Pint., al.) "
KCLT-ivXayto : impf. 3 pers. sing. KoTevXayei (T WH)
and κατηυ\όγ€ΐ (Tr), [cf. ίνδοκί'ω, init.]; to call down
blessings on : τίκά, Mk. x. 16 Τ Tr WH. (Tob. [x. 13] ;
xi. 16; Plut. amator. 4.)*
κατ-ΐφ-ίστημι : to set up against ; [2 aor. act. 3 pers.
plur.] κατ^πίστησαν τω ΪΙανλω, they rose up against Paul,
i. e. with hostile intent, Acts xviii. 12. Found nowhere
else.•
κατ-ί'χω ; impf. κατιΊχον; 2 aor. subjunc. κατάσχω;
impf. pass, κατιιχόμην; 1. to hold back, detain, re-
tain ; a. τινά, from going away, foil, by τοϋ μή w. inf.,
Lk. iv. 42 [B. § 140, 16 β. ; cf. W. 604 (561)] ; rtfa πρ6ς
ίμαυτόν, Philem. 13. Pass, (as often in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1677"; [L. and S. s. v.
II. 6]), of some troublesome condition or circumstance
by which one is held as it were bound : νοσήματι, Jn. v.
4 [G Τ Tr WHom. the passage] ; ΐντινι, Ro. vii. 6. b.
to restrain, hinder (the course or progress of) : τ. a\tf
5f lav fv αδικία, Ro. i. 1 8 ; absol. to κατίχον, that which
hinders, sc. Antichrist from making his appearance (see
αντίχριστος^ ; the power of the Roman empire is meant ;
ό κατίχων he that hinders, checks, sc. the advent of Anti-
christ, denotes the one in whom that power is lodge<l, the
Roman emperor : 2 Th. ii. 6 sq. (cf., besides De Wette
and Liinemann ad loc, [Bp. Lghtft. in B.D. s. v. Thess.
Second Ep. to the], esp. Schneckenburger in the Jahr-
biicher f. deutsche Theol. for 1859 p. 421 sq.). κατίχω
(sc. την vavv) fit Tr)v aiyiaXov, to check the ship's head
way [better (cf. the preceding context) to hold or head
κατηη/ορίω
340
κατισχύω
the ship, cf . Hdt. 7, 59. 1 88 etc. ; Bos, EUips. (ed. Schaefer)
p. 318 ; see, too, Od. 1 1, 405 S(i. (cf. Eustath. 16i"J, 18 ;
Thorn. Mag. ed. RitschI p. 310, 7 sqij.) ; but Passow (as
below) et al. take the verb as intrans. in such a connec-
tion, viz. lo miiLe for; of. Ki//tke, Observv. ii. 144] in
order to hind, -Vets xxvii. -10 (Xen. lleU. 2, 1, 29 κατα-
σχων fVi την '\β(ρνίδα; many oilier e.\.\. are given in
Passow s. V. II. 3 ; [L. and S. s. v. B. 2]). c. lo hold
fast, keep secure. Keep Jinn possession of: with ace. of the
thing, TO» λόγο», Lk. viii. 15 ; foil, by the orat. obli(j., 1 Co.
XV. 2 [B. §§ 139, 58; 150, 20; W. 561 (522)] ; Tas παρα-
&όσ€ίς, 1 Co. xi. 2 ; το καΧάι/, 1 Th. v. 21 ; την παρμησίαν
[τ. άρχ^ην etc.] ρί\ρι rtAouf βΐβιΰαν κατασ^^ζϊν, lleb. iii. 6,
14; Tr/V όμολογίαν της «λπ/δοί ακλιΐ'^, llcb. \. 23, 2.
e([uiv. to l^at. ohlinere, i. e. a. lo yel possession of,
take: Mt. xxi. 38 RG ; Lk. .xiv. 9. b. lo possess: 1
Co. vii. ;iO; 2Co. vi. 10.•
κατηγορ€'ω. -ώ; inij>f. κaτηyήρovv : fut. κατηγορήσω: 1
aor. κατηγόρησα ; pres. pass, κατηγορούμαι : (κατά and αγο-
ρίΰω, prop, to speak against [cf. κατά. III. 7] in court, in
the assembly of the people), lo accuse ; a. before a
judge: absol. [lo make accusatioix']. Acts xxiv. 2, 19;
Tivas, to accuse one, Mt. xii. 10; Mk. iii. 2 ; I.k. vi. 7 Τ
Trtxt.WII; xi. 54 R L Tr br. ; xxiii. 2, 10; Jn. viii. 6 ;
Aot.s XXV. 5 : x.xviii. 19 ; with the addition of a gen. of
the thing of which "jne is accused (as Dem. 515 fin.):
Acts xxiv. 8; xxv. U, (unless it be thought preferable
to regard the relative in these instances as in the gen.
by attraction [so B. § 132, Iii fin.], since the com. constr.
in Grk. authors is κατηγ. τι τινοΐ, cf. Matthiae § 370
Anm. 2 p. 849 sq., and § 37s p. 8.39; cf. W. § 30, 9 a.) ;
TWOS Tiep'i Tivos, Acts xxiv. 13 (Thuc. 8, 85 ; Xen. Hell. 1,
7, 2) ; \v. gi'n. of pers. and ace. of the thing, Mk. xv. 3
(unless πολλά should be taken adverbially : much, celi<-
mentl;/); πόσα, ib. 4 LTTrWlI (Eur. Or. 28); foil.
by κατά w. gen. of pers., Lk. xxiii. 14 (Xen. Hell. 1, 7,
9 [cf. W. § 2-<, I ; p. 431 (402); B. § 132, 16]); pass.
, lo be accused (as 2 Mace. x. 13 ; Xen. Hell. 3, 5, 25 ; cf.
B. § 134, 4) : υπό τινοί, Mt. xxvii. 12; Acts xxii. 30 L Τ
Tr ^VH for Rec. παρά (το τι κτλ. ic/ii/ [Α. V. wherefore]
he was accused; unless it is to be explained, whnl accu-
sation was hrouf/ht forward etc.) ; ό κατηγοροΰμινος. Acts
x.xv. 16. b. of an extra-judicial aciusation (Xen.
mem. 1, 3, 4) : absol. Ro. ii. 15 ; rtras, Jn. v. 45 [cf. B.
295 (254)] ; Rev. xii. 10 RG Tr; solecistically τινά. Rev.
xii. 10 LTWII [cf. B. § 132, 16].•
[SvN. ο ίτιοσβοι, διθι8<£λλ€ If, 6 -yxoA err. iiri It αλί ΐι/.
κατηγορ(7ν . α'ιτιασβαι to accuse with primary reference to
the ground of accusation (αιτία), the crime; κατηγορίΐν to
accuse formally and before a tribunal, brinfr a char<;e against
[κατά sugfcstive of animosity) publicly ; ίγκαΚιΐν to accuse
with pubhcity (καλιΤν), but not necessarily formally or before
a tribunal; ίπικα\(~ν ' to cry out upon', 9ug<restive of public-
ity and hostility; SiaSiWuv prop, to make a verbal assault
wliich reaches its coal (5ιό) ; in distinction from tbe words
which allude to authorship {αΐτιάομαή, to judicial i)ro<e(Iure
(κατηγορίω). or to open averment (e'y/taAf'iu, (ΐτ,καλίω). Sta-
βά\\κ expresses the giving currency to a damaging insinua-
tion. Sii$o\os a secret and calumnious, in distinction from
KuTityopoi an open and formal, accuser. Schmidt ch. 5]
κατηγορία, -ar, ή, («ta-njyopot), [fr. Hdt. down], αα•η.•<α-
lion, cliarije: w. gen. of the pers. accused, Lk. vi. 7 RG
L Tr mrg. ; [Jn. .wiii. 29 Τ \\"H] ; κατά τινοι, Jn. xviii.
29 [R G L Tr] ; 1 Tim. v. 19 ; w. gen. of the crime, Tit.
i. 6.•
κατήγοροι, -ου, ό, (κατηγυρίω [(|. ν. ad fin.]), an αο
cuser: Jn. viii. 10; Acts xxiii. 80, 35 ; .xxiv. 8 [R] ; xxv.
16, 18; Rev..\ii. lORTr. [(Fr. Soph, and Hdt. down.)]*
κατήγωρ, ό, an accuser: Rev. xii. 10 GLTWH. It
is a form unknown to Grk. writ., a literal transcription
of the Ilebr. lU'DP, a name given to the devil by the
Rabbins; cf. Buxtorf, Lex. Chald. tahn. et rabb. p. 2009
(p. 997 ed. Fischer); ISchotlgcn, Horae Ilebr. i. p. 1121
sq.; cf. B. 25 (22)].*
κατήψ(ΐα, -at. ή, ( f r. κατηφής, of a downcast look ; and
this fr. κατά. and τύ φάη the eyes; Etym. Masn. [496, 53]
κατϊιφΐυι • από τοϊι κάτω τα φύη βάλλΐΐν τους ον(ΐΐ)ίζ<•ιμ(νυνς
ή Xvnovpivovs', because, as I'lut. dc dysopia [al. de vilioso
pudore (528 e.)] c. 1 says, it is λύπη κάτω βΚίπιιν ποι-
ούσα), prop, α downcast look expressive of sorrow; hence
shame, dejection, gloom, [A. V. heavinessl : Jas. iv. 9.
(Horn. II. 3, 51; 16, 498 etc.; Thuc. 7, 75; Joseph.
antt. 13, 16, 1 ; Plut. Cor. 20; [Pelop. 33, 3, and often ;
Dion. Hal., Char., etc.]; often in Philo.)*
κατ-ηχί'ω, -ώ : I aor. κατήχησα ; Pass., pres. κατηχούμαι ;
pf. κατήχημαι \ 1 aor. κατηχήθην ; nowhere met with in the
O. T. ; very rare in prof. auth. ; 1. prop, to sound
towards, sound down upon, resound : αρμονία κατηχύ τήί
θαλάττη!, Philostr. p. 791 [icon. 1, 1 9j ; to charm with re-
sounding sound, to fascinate, τινά μύΑου, Lcian. Jup.
trag. 39. 2. lo leach oralh/, to instruct: Lcian. asin.
§ 48 ; Philopatr. 1 7. In the N. T. only used by Luke
and Paul: τινά, 1 Co. xiv. 19; pass, (κ τοΟ νόμου, by
hearing the law, wont to be pidilicly read in the syna-
gogues, Ro. ii. 1 8 ; w. ace. of the thing, airot ae ττολλά κα-
τηχήσω των ηγνοονμίνων, Joseph, de vita sua § 65 fin. ; w.
ace. of a thing and of a pers., roO άΧηθοΐι! λόγου βράχια
κατήχησα! pf, Clem. hom. 1, 13; pass. w. ace. of the
thing: τήν oSov τοϋ κυρίου. Acts xviii. 25; τον λόγον. Gal.
vi. 6; hence some [(see Meyer in loc.)] resolve Lk. i. 4
thus : π€ρ\ των λόγων, ους κατηχήθης (see below). 3.
to inform hij word of moulh ; pass, to he orally informed :
foil, by ότι, Philo de leg. ad (iaium § 30 ; n-epi τίνος (gen.
of pers.), foil, by ότ», Acts .xxi. 21 ; w. .ace. of the thin•.;, Ziv
κατήχηνται π(ρΊ σοΰ i. e. τούτωκ, a κτλ. ibid. 24 {κατηχηθΰί
πιρ'ι των σνμβίβηκότων, [pseudo-] Plut. de fluviis [7, 2] ;
8, 1 ; 7, 1). To this construction the majority refer Lk.
i. 4, construing it thus: τήν άσφάλ. των λόγων, π(ρ\ ων
κατΐ7χί5>)ί [W. 16.ί(156); Β. § 143, 7 ; (see above)]. Cf.
(jdliKrl, Dissertatio de christianae catecheseos historia
(Lips. 1836) Pt. i. p. 1 sqq. ; Zezschwitz, System der christl.
Katechetik (Leipz. 1863) i. p. 17 sqq.; [and for eccL
usage, Suirer, Thes. ii. 69 sqq.; Soph. Lex. s. v.].*
κατ tSiav, see t£ios, 2.
κατ-ιόω, -ώ : pf. pass, κατϊωμαι ; (see ιός, 2) ; to rust over
[cf. κατά. III. 3], cover with rust : Jas. v. 3. (Epictet.
diss. 4, 6, 14; [Sir. xii. 11]•)*
κατ-Ητχΰω : impf. κατίσχυαν ; fut. κατισχύσω ; 1 aor
κατοικ€ω
841
χανσκ
snbjunc. 2 pers. plur. κατισχΰσηη (Lk. xxi. 36 TTrtxt.
AVIl) ; Sept. mostly for pin ; among Grk. writ. esp. by
Polyb., Diod., Dion. Π. ; prop, to he strong to another's
detriment, to prevail against ; to be superior in strength ;
to overpower: foil, by an inf., Lk. xxi. 36 TTrtxt. AVH
{_prevail (i. e. have full strength) to escape etc.] ; to over-
come, τιι /dr (Jer. XV. 18), Mt. xvi. 18 (meaning, 'not even
the gates of Hades — than which nothing was supposed
to be stronger — shall surpass the church in strength');
absol. to prevail (i. e. succeed, accomplish one's desire) :
Lk. xxiii. 23."
Kar-oiKc'id, -ώ ; 1 aor. κατωκησα ; [f r. Soph, and Hdt.
down] ; Sept. times uncounted for yd', more rarely for
JD'y, 1. intTan». to (Itvell, settle; a. prop. : foil, by
fV w. dat. of place, I.k. xiii. 4 [TrWIIom. if]; Acts i. 20;
.5 [T WII mrg. «s• (see below)] ; vii. 2, 4, 48 ; ix. 22 ; xi.
20; xiii. 27; xvii. 24 ; Ileb.xi. 9; Rev. .xiii. 12; foil, by
(is (a pregnant construction ; see els, C. 2 p. 186"), Mt. ii.
23; iv. 13 ; Acts vii. 4 ; ί'πί τήί y^r. Rev. iii. 10 ; vi. 10;
viii. 13; xi. 10; xiii. 8, 14 ; xiv. 6 Rec. ; xvii. 8, (Num.
xiii. 33; xiv. 14; xxxv. 32, 34); inl πάν το πρόσωπον
[παιη-ο! προσώπου L Τ Tr WH (cf. ί'πί, C. Ι. 1 a.)] τη! γη!,
Actsxvii.26; οπού. Rev. ii. 13; so that exfi must be added
mentally, Acts xxii. 1 2 ; demons taking possession of the
bodies of men are said κατοικίίκ «'/eel. Mt. xii. 45 ; Lk. xi.
26. b. metapli., ilivine powers, influences, etc., are
said KOToiKfiv fv Ttut (dat. of pers.), or tv τί] καρδία τιι/ο'γ,
to dwell in his soul, to pervade, prompt, govern it : ό
Bebi iv ημ'ιν, Barn. ep. 16,8; ό Χριστός, Eph. iii. 1 7 ; the
Holy Spirit, Jas. iv. 5 RG (Herm. past., mand. 5, 2; [sim.
5, 5 etc. ; cf. Harnack's reff. on mand. 3, 1]) ; το πλήρωμα
τη! θιότητος in Christ, Col. ii. 9, cf. i. 19 ; ή σοφία iv σώ-
ματι, Sap. i. 4 ; δικαιοσύνη is said to dwell where right-
eousness prevails, is practised, 2 Pet. iii. 13. 2.
trans, to dwell in, inhabit : with ace. of place, Acts i. 19 ;
ii.9, 14; iv. 16; ix.32, 35; xix. 10, 17; Rev. xii. 12 Rec. ;
xvii. 2 ; God is said to dwell in the temple, i. e. to be always
present for worshippers: Mt. xxiii. 21. [Comp. : iy-
KaToiKtu).^ *
[Syn. κοτοικεΓι', in the Sept. the ordinary renilerinf)^ of ^E/'
/o .«'W/f, rfice//, differs from irapoiKftv, the common represen-
tative of 1U to sojourn, as the permanent differs from the
transitory; e. g. Gen. xxxvii. I κατωκΐί δέ ^λακωβ ^r ττ} 7?)
ου τταρφκ-ησίν ό πατήρ αΰτοΰ, ivyri Χαναάν; Philodesacrif. At),
et Cain. § 10 ό yap rots 4-γκυκ\Ίοΐί μ6νοι$ 4παν4χων napoiKti
σοφίι, oil κατοικίΐ. Cf. Βρ. Lglitft. on Col. i. 19 and on Clem.
Horn'. 1 Cor. 1.]
κατ-οίκηο•ΐ5, -(ω!, ή, (κατοικίω), dwelling, abode : Mk. v.
3. (Gen. x. 30; Num. xv. 2, etc.; Thuc, Plat., Plut.) *
κατ-οικητήριον, -ov, to, (κατοικίω). an abode, a habita-
tion: Eph. ii. 22: Rev. xviii. 2. (.Sept.; Barn. ep. [6,
15] ; 16, 7. 8, and other eccl. writ.) '
KOT-oiKCa, -as. ή. (κατοικίω), dirilling, habitation : Acts
xvii. 26. (Sept.; Polyb. 2, 32, 4: Strab., Pint., ah)*
κατ-οικίζω; 1 aor. κατώκισα; fr. Ildt. down; Sept. for
a'Ertn; to cause to dwell, to send or bring into an abode:
to give a dwelling to : metaph. to πνημα, ο κατώκισ^ν iv
ήμίν, i. e. the Spirit which he placed within us, to pervade
smd prompt us (see κατοικί'ω, 1 b.), Jas. iv. 5 LTTrWIL*
KaroirrpC^u : (κατοπτρον a mirror), to show in a mirror,
to make to reflect, to mirror: κατοπτρίζων ό rfKios την ipiv.
Plut. mor. p. 894 f. [i. e. de plac. philos. 3, 5, 11]. Mid.
pres. κατστττρίζομαι ; to look at one's self in a mirror (Ar-
tem. oneir. 2, 7 ; Athen. 15 p. 687 c. ; Diog. Laert. 2, 33;
[7, 17]) ; to behold for one's self as in a mirror [W. 2.J4
(238); B. 103 sq. (167)] : τήκ δόξακ τοϋ κυρίου, the glory
of Christ (which we behold in the gospel as in a mirror
from which it is reflected), 2 Co. iii. 18. Plainlv so in
Philo, alleg. leg. iii. § 33 μΐ)8ί κατοπτρισαίμην iv άλλω τ,ν'ι
την σην Ιδίαν η iv σο\ τώ θ(ώ*
κατόρθωμα, τοΓ, τό, (κατορθάω to make upright, erect),
aright action, a successful achievement: plur. of whole-
some public measures or institutions. Acts xxiv. 2 (.i)
[RG; see διο'ρίωμα] ; (3 .Mace. iii. 23; Polyb., Diod.,
Strab., Joseph., Plut., Leian.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
251 ; [Win. 25].•
κάτω (fr. κατά), adv., [fr. Hom. down], compar. Karay-
τίρω; [cf. AV. 4 72 (440)]; 1. down, downwards:
Mt. iv. 6 ; Lk. iv. 9 ; Jn. viii. 6, 8; Acts xx. 9. 2.
below, beneath, [cf. W. u. s.] ; a. of place : iSIk. xiv.
66 ; Acts ii. 1 9 ; ίω! κάτω [Α. V. to the bottom], Mt. xxvii.
51 ; Mk. XV. 38, (Ezek. i. 27; viii. 2) ; τα κάτω, the parts
or regions that lie beneath (opp. to τα άνω, heaven), i. e.
the earth, Jn. viii. 23. b. of temporal succession: άπο
SieTois και κατωτίρω, from a child of two years and those
that were of a lower age [cf. W. 3 70 (347)], Mt. ii. 16 ;
από ίίκοσα€τονς κα\ κάτω. 1 Chr. xxvii. 23.*
κατώτερο;, -ίρα, -epuv, (compar. of κάτω, see άνώτ(ρος),
[Ilippocr., Theophr., Athen., al.], /o;cer: (ό Χριστοί) κα-
τίβη €1? τα κατώτΐμα μίρη της γης, E[)h. iv. 9, which many
understand of Christ's descent into Hades (τόκ τόπον τον
κάτω KoKovpevnv. Plat. Phaedop. 1 1 2 c), takingT^ry^t as a
partit. gen. (see ά&ης. 2). But the mention of this fact
is at variance with the connection. Paul is endeavoring
to show that the passage he has just before quoted, Ps.
Lxvii. (Ixviii.) 10, must be understood of Christ, not of
God, because ' an ascent into heaven ' necessarily presup-
poses a descent to earth (which was made by Christ in
the incarnation), whereas God does not leave his abode
in heaven. Accordingly τα κατώτ. της γη! denotes the
lower parts (f the universe, which the earth constitutes, —
Tijf yfis being a gen. of apposition; cf. W. § 59, 8a.;
Grimm. Institutio theol. dogmat. ed. 2, p. 355 Sijq.*
κατωτί'ρω, see κάτω, esp. 2 b.
Καΰδα. see Κλαυδτ?.
καϋμιο, -ros, τό, (καίω), heat: of painful and burning
heat. Rev. vii. 16; xvi. 9. (Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn,
down.)*
καυματίζω : 1 aor. inf. καυματίσαι ; 1 aor. pass, ίκανμα-
τίσθην ; (καΟμα) ; to burn with heat, to scorch : τινά, with
iv πυρί added. Rev. xvi. 8 ; pass., Mt. xiii. 6 ; Mk. iv. 6 ;
w. ail<iition of κανμα μίγα (see αγαπάω sub fin. for exx.
and reff.), to be tortured with intense heat. Rev. xvi. 9.
(Antonin. 7, 64; Epict. diss. 1, 6, 26; 3, 22, 52; of the
heat of fever, Plut. mor. p. 1 00 d. [de virt. et vit. 1 ],
691 e. [(piaest. conviv. vi. 2, 6].)*
κανακ, -ίωί, ψ (καίω), burning, burning up : ης το riXot
342
Κεδρών
fi'f κανσιν, the fate of which land (appointed it by God)
is, to be burned up (by fire and brimstone from heaven ;
cf. Deut. xxbc. 23), Heb. vi. 8 ; cf. Bleek ad loc. (Hdt.,
riat., Isocr., Phit., al. ; Sept.) *
καυσ-όω, -ύ: (καΟσοί); Ιο burn up, set βΓ€ to; pres. ptcp.
pass, καυσοίμινο!, 2 Pet. iii. 10, 12, [A. V. with fen-ent
heat]. (Else\vhere only [chielly ; see Soph. Lex. s. v.] in
Diosc. and Galen : to suffer from feverish burning, be
parched with fever.) *
κανσ-τηριαξω : pf. pass. ptcp. Κίκαυστηριασμίνοί, to burn
ill with a branding iron {rai Ίττπουί Χνκον, a figure of a wolf,
Strab. 5, 1, 9 p. 215) : 1 Tim. iv. 2 L ed. ster. Τ Tr Wll,
on which pass, see καυτηριάζω. (Not found elseivhere.) •
κανσων, -ωνα,ό; 1. iuivii/i^/icai of the sun: Mt.
XX. 12 ; l.k. xii. 55 ; Jas. i. 11, [al. refer all these pass, to
the next head] : (Is. xlix. 10; [Gen. xxxi. 40 Alex. ; cf.
Judith viii. 3] ; Sir.xviii. 16; Allien. 3 p. 73 b.). 2.
Euros, a very dry, hot, east wind, scorcliing and drying
up everything; for D'lp, Job xxvii. 21; Hos. xii. 1;
Sw/ios καύσων, Jer. xviii. 17; Ezek. xvii. 10; Hos. xiii.
15 ; πν€νμα καύσων, Jon. iv. 8, [cf. Hos. xii. 1] ; (on this
wind cf. Schleuitner, Thes. ad Sept. iii. p. 297; Win.
RAVB. [also BE. DD.] s. v. AVind). Many suppose it
to be referred to in Jas. i. 11 ; yet the evils there men-
tioned are ascribed not to the κανσων. but to the ηΚιος.'
καυτηριάζω: {καυτήριον [(cf. καίω)] a branding-iron);
to mark by brandint/, to brand : [pf. pass, ptcji.] κικαντψ
ριασμίνοι την 18ίαν συνιίδησιν, Ί. 6. κ(καυτηριασμ(νην ϊχοντα
την 18. συν. [cf. W. 230 (21ϋ)] (cf. καταφθ(ίρω), [branded
in their own conscience i. e.] whose souls are branded with
the marks of sin, i. e. who carry about with them the per-
petual consciousness of sin, 1 Tim. iv. 2 R G L ed. maj.,
see καυστηριάζω : [some (cf. R. V. mrg.) would give it
here the sense of seared, cf. Eph. iv. 19]. (In Ilippocr.
in a medical sense, to cauterize, remove bij cautery.) *
καυχάομαι, -ώμαι, 2 pers. sing, καυχάσαι (Ro. ii. 17, 23 ;
1 Co. iv. 7; see κατακαυχάομαι) ; fut. καυχησομαι; 1 aor.
ίκαυχησάμην; γί. κίκανχημαι; (καύ;^?) a boast) ; [fr. Find,
and Hdt. down] ; Sept. mostly for '7^'ΠΓΙΠ ; in the N. T.
often used by Paul [some 35 times; by Jas. twice] ; to
(jlnry (whether with reason or without) : absol., 1 Co. i.
31*; iv. 7; xiii. 3 L [ed. ster. AVH (see καίω)];, 2 Co.
X. [13], 17*; xi. 16, 18; xii. 1, 6, 11 Rec. ; Eph. ii. 9;
Jas. iv. 16 ; W (ace. of the thing [cf. W. 222 (209)]), to
glory (on account) nf a thing: 2 Co. i.\. 2 (Jfv καυχώμαι
vnip ΐιμών MaKfSofftK, which I boast of on your behalf
unto the Macedonians [B. § 133, 1]; cf. vii. 14, [and see
below]); 2 Co. xi. 30, (Prov. xxvii. 1 ; Lcian. ocyp. 120);
foil, by fV w. dat. of the obj. [W. § 33 d.; B. § 133, 23],
to glory in a thing, (by a usage foreign to class. Grk. ; but
the Lat. says glorior in alirjuo) : Ro. ii. 23 ; v. 3 ; 1 Co.
iii. 21 ; 2 Co. v. 12; x. 15 ; xi. 12 [cf. B. 105 (92)] ; .xii.
5, 9 ; Gal. vi. 13 sq. ; 2 Th. i. 4 R G ; Jas. i. 9, (Jer. ix.
23 sq. ; 1 Chr. xvi. 35) ; iv θ(ώ, iv τω θ(ω, in God, i. e.
the knowledge of God, intimacy with him, his favors, etc.
Ro. ii. 1 7 ; V. 1 1 , (i » Tolt ieolr, Theoph. adAutol.1,1,1);
iv κυρϊω, 1 Co. i. 31'; 2 Co. .x. 17'"; iv Χριστώ Ίι^σοΟ,
Phil. iii'. 3 ; foil, by im w. dat. of the obj. [cf. w'. § 33 d. ;
B. § 133, 23], Ro. V. 2 (Prov. x.xv. 14; Sir. xxx- 2:
Diod. xvi. 70) ; jrtpi thos, 2 Co. x. 8 ; eir τι, in regard
of, in reference to, 2 Co. x. 16 (Aristot. pol. 5, 10 p. 1311,
4). inip w. gen. of pers., to one's advantage, to the praise
of one, [on one's behalf] : 2 Co. vii. 14; xii. 5. ivunioy
ToO θ(οϋ, as though standing in his presence, 1 Co. i. 29
[cf. B. 173 (150). CoMP. : iv, κατα-καυχάομαι.']*
καύχημα, -τοί,τό, (καυχάομαι), very rare in prof. auth. ;
Sept. for nSnn praise, and jT^XSn ornament, beauty ;
several times in Sir. 1. t!iat oftvhich one glories or
can glory, matter or ground of glorying: Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co.
ix. 15 sq.; 2 Co. i. 14; PhU. ii. 16; το καύχημα ίχιιν «r
(αυτόν μόνον, his glorying confined to himself [ii. V. in
regard of him.^elf alone], Gal. vi. 4; τό κ- r^f i\ni&os, the
matter for glorying which hope gives, i. e. tlie hope, of
which we glory, Heb. iii. 6. 2. As -γΐννημα, 8ίωγμα,
θίλημα, ϊαμα, κήρυγμα (2 Tim. iv. 17). κλαΟμη, πλήρωμα,
φρόνημα, etc., are used for γίννησί!, δίωξα, βίΚησα, κτ\.
[cf. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 6], so also (ivhich H. A. AV. Meyer
persists in denying [as respects the New Testament
(see his note on Ro. iv. 2) ; so Ellicott and Bp. Lghtft.
on Gal. vi. 4 ; Liincm. on Heb. u. s.]) is καύχημα used
for καύχησίί (Pind. Isthm. 5, G5 [cf. Meyer on Phil. i. 26
note ; on the apparent use of nouns in μα in an active
sense see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 257 sq.]), a glorying,
boasting: iCo. v. 6; Phil. i. 26 ; ύττί'ρτιΐΌί (see καυ;(άο/χα(,
sub fin.), 2 Co. v. 12; i.x. 3.*
καύ\ησι$, -τωϊ, ή, (καυχάομαι), the act of glorying: Ro.
iii. 27 ; 2 Co. ix. 4 Rec. ; 2 Co. xi. 10, 17 ; Jas. iv. 16 ;
στίφανοί καυχησ(ωί, crown of which we can boast, 1 Th.
ii. 19; Ezek. xvi. 12; Prov. xvi. 31; Ιπίρ tivos, (on be-
half) of one [cf. καυχάομαι, sub fin.], 2 Co. vii. 4 ; viii. 24 ;
ini Tivos. before one, 2 Co. vii. 14 ; ίχω [την crit. edd.]
καύχησιν iv Χριστά Ίησοΰ, the glorying which I have I
ascribe to Christ, or I owe it to Christ that I am per-
mitted to glory (see iv, I. 6 b. p. 211*'), Ro. xv. 17 ; 1 Co.
XV. 31 ; that of which one glories, cause of glorying, 2 Co.
i. 12. (Sept. several times for DitiSJI ; [Diog. Laert. 10,
7 fin.] ; Philod. in Vol. Hercul. Oxfort. i. p. 16.) •
Καφαρναούμ, see Καπερναούμ.
KiTXpeai [T Wll Κ(νχρ. (cf. WH. App. p. 150)], -Zv,
al, CenchrecE or Kenchrece, a port of Corinth, about 60
[70; Strabo (as below)] stadia from the city, on the
eastern side of the isthmus, the emporium of its trade
with Asia (Strabo 8 p. 380): Acts xviii. 18; Ro. xvi. 1.
[It still retains the ancient name; cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v.;
Lewin, St. Paul, i. 299 sq.] *
Kc'Spos, -ου, η, [fr. Horn, down], a cedar, a well-known
tree, the wood of which is fragrant : χίίμαρροί τών κί-
τρων, Jn. xviii. 1 R Tr txt. WH (so also 2 S. xv. 23 ; 1 K.
XV. 13, [cf. ii. 37]) ; τοϋ (sic !) κάδρου, ibid. Tdf. ; but see
the foil, word.*
KcSpuv, ό [Β. 21 (19)], indecl. (in Joseph. Κ(δρών,
-ωνο! [see below]), Cedron [or Kidron], (Hebr. [i"'1"'
i. e. dark, turbid), the name of a [winter-] torrent, rising
near Jerusalem and flowing down through a valley of
the same name (having the Mt. of Olives on the E.) into
the Dead Sea : χ^ίμαρροί τοΰ Κ(δρών, Jn. .xviii. 1 G L Tr
κβιμαί
34S
κβνοφωνια
iiirg., ace. to the more correct reading fbut see WH.
App. ad loc] ; {χύμαρροι Kfdpiavos, Joseph, antt. 8, 1,
5 ; φάρα-γξ Κίδρώνοί, ib. 9, 7, 3 ; b. j. 5, 6, 1 ; φαράγγι
βαθ^ία . . . η KeSpotv ωνόμασται, ib. 5, 2, 3). [Β. D. s. v.
Kidron, cf. Cedron, 2 : Robinson, Phys. Geogr. of the
Holy Land, p. 96 sq.] *
κίΐμαι ; impf. 3 pers. sing. «iceiTo ; to lie ; 1. prop. :
of an infant, foil, by e'v w. dat. of place, Lk. ii. 12 [Tdf.
om. κ«μ.], 16 ; of one buried : όπου or oi, Mt. .\.xviu. 6 ;
Lk. x.xiii. 53; Jn. xi. 41 Rec. ; xx. 12; of things that
quietly cover some spot, Lk. xxiv. 12 [RGLbr.]; Jn.
XX. 5-7; xxi. 9 ; with tVi η added, 2 Co. iii. 15 ; (πάνω
Tivos (of a city situated on a hill), Mt. v. 14 ; also of
things put or set in any place, in ref. to which we often
use to stand : thus of vessels, Jn. ii. 6 ; xix. 29, {χίτραί
Λΐΐμΐνας, Xen. oec. 8, 19) ; of a throne, Rev. iv. 2 (Jer.
xxiv. 1 ; Horn. Π. 2, 777 ; Od. 17, 331) ; κΛσθαι jrpof τι,
to be brought near to a thing [see irpos, L 2 a.], ΛΙΐ. iii.
1 ; Lk. iii. 9 ; absol., of the site of a city, τετράγωνος
κείται, Rev. xxi. 16; of grain and other things laid up,
gathered together, Lk. xii. 19; of a foundation, 1 Co.
iii. 11. 2. metaph. a. to be (by God's intent)
set, i. e. destined, appointed: foil, by fir w. ace. indicating
the purpose, Lk. ii. 34 ; Phil. i. 1 7 ( 16) ; 1 Th. iii. 3. b.
as very often in prof. auth. (cf. Passow s. v. p. 1694'';
[L. and S. s. v. IV. 2]), of laws, to he made, laid down :
τινί, 1 Tim. i. 9. c. ό κόσμυ: oXos ev τω πονηρω κύται,
lies in the power of the evil one, i. e. is held in subjec-
tion by the devU, 1 Jn. v. 19. [Comp. : ανά-, σνν-αυά-,
άιιτί-, από-, c'jrt-, κατά-, παρά-, πΐρί-, πρό-κ(ίμαι•^ *
KctpCa, -as, ή, α band, either for a bed-girth (Schol. ad
Arstph. av. 817 Kcipia• ftSoj ζώνης €κ σκοινιών, παρ€οι-
κος Ιμάντι, ^ Ηίσμονσι τάς κλίνας, cf. Prov. vii. 16 ; [Plut.
Alcib. 16, 1]), or for tying up a corpse after it has been
swathed in linen : in the latter sense in Jn. xi. 44 ; [al.
take it here of the swat/iinf/s themselves].*
κείρω ; [ 1 aor. cxeipa ( Acts viii. 32 Τ WH mrg.)] ; 1 aor.
raid, (κίΐράμην ; fr. Horn, down ; to shear : a sheep. Acts
viii. 32 ([cf. above] fr. Is. liii. 7). M\d. to get οτ let be shorn
[Λν. §38, 2 b.; B. §135, 4]: την κ(φα\ήν. Acts wiii. IS;
absol. of shearing or cutting short the hair of the head,
1 Co. xi. 6 [cf. W. § 43, 1].•
KeCs, see Kis.
κέλευσμα, -ror, to, (κελεύω), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down, an order, command, spec, a slimulatinr/ cri/, either
that by which animals are roused and urged on by man,
as horses by charioteers, hounds by hunters, etc., or that
by which a signal is given to men, e. g. to rowers by the
master of a ship (Lcian. tjT. or catapl. c. 19), to sol-
diers by a commander (Thuc. 2, 92 ; Prov. xxiv. 62
(.xxx. 27)) : iv κί\(νσματι, with a loud summons, a trum-
pet-call, 1 Th. iv. 16.*
κελεύω ; impf. cKcKevov : 1 aor. ε'κεΆε υσα ; to command,
order : τινά, foil, by an aor. inf., Mt. xiv. 19, 28 ; Acts iv.
15; by the ace. with aor. inf.. Mt. xviii. 25; xxvii. 58
[R G L], 64 ; Lk. xviii. 40 : Acts v. 34 ; viii. 38 ; xxii. 30 ;
xxiii. 10; xxv. 6, 17; the ace. is wanting because evident
(r. the context, Mt. viii. 18; xiv. 9; [xxvii. 58 TWH
(Trinbr.)]; Acts xii. 19; xxi. 33; foil, by ace. with
pres. inf., Acts x-\i. 34 ; .xxii. 24 ; xxiii. 3, 35 ; xxiv. 8
RG; xxv. 21 ; x.xvii. 43; the ace. is wanting because
easily discernible fr. the context. Acts .xvi. 22 [cf. B. 201
(1 74) ; W. § 40, 3 d.] ; by a use not infreq. in Hom., but
somewhat rare in prose writ., with the dat. of a pers.
(Plat. rep. 3 p. 396 a.; Thuc. 1, 44; Diod. 19, 17: Jo-
seph, antt. 20, 6, 2; Tob. viii. 18; cf. Poppo on Xen.
Cyr. 1, 3, 9 var.), foil, by an inf., Mt. xv. 35 R G ; cf. B.
275 (236). κίλινσαιτός Tifor, at one's command. Acts
xxv. 23. [On the constr. of «λ., esp. with the pass. inf.
and ace, see B. § 141, 5 cf. p. 237 (204) note; also W.
336 (315), 332 (311).]*
[Syn. : κελεύει v, wapayy f \Kf iv, ί^τε'λλεσβαι, τάσ-
σ€ΐν (and its comp.): κελ. to command, designates verbal
orders, emanating ( usually ) from a superior ; TrapayyiKXai
to charge, etc., is used esp. of tlie order of a military com-
mander which is passed along tlie Une by his subordinates,
(Xen. CiT. 2, 4, 2) ; ^ντε'λλεσβαι to enjoin, is employed
esp. of those whose oifice or position invests them with
claims, and points rather to the contents of the command,
cf. our "instructions"; τάσσω lit. assign a post to, with a
suggestion of duties as connected therewith ; often used of a
military appointment (cf. τά^ιι) ; its compounds ίττπάσσαν
and προστάσσειν differ from 4ντ. in denoting fixed and abid-
ing obligations rather than specific or occasional instruc-
tions, duties arising from the office rather than emanating
from the personal will of a superior. Schmidt ch. 8.]
κενο8οξ(α, -as, ή. (κ(νό&οξος, q. v.), vain-glory, groundless
self-esteem, empty pride : Phil. ii. 3. (4 Mace. ii. IS ; vui.
18; Polyb., Plut., Lcian. ; [Philo demut. nom. § 15; leg.
ad Gaium § 16 ; etc.] ; eccl. writ. ; univ. a vain opinion,
error, .Sap. xiv. 14.) *
KfvoSo^os, -ov, (κεκόί, δό|α), glorying without reason, con-
ceited, rain-glorious, eager for empty glory : Gal. v. 26.
(Polyb., Diod. ; Antonin. 5, 1 ; [cf. Philo de trib. virt.
§ 2 fin.]; eccL writ.)'
κενόζ, -ή, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for Dp'l, p">., p">,
etc., empty ; 1. prop, of places, vessels, etc., which
contain nothing (Judg. vii. 16; Gen. xxxvii. 24); met-
aph. empty, vain ; devoid of truth : λόγοι, Ejjh. v. 6 (Ex. v.
9) ; άπατη. Col. ii. 8 ; κήρυγμα, jrioTif , 1 Co. xv. 14. 2.
of men, empty-handed ; without a gifl'- άποστε'λλειν and
(ξαποστίΚλιιν τινά Kevav (Gen. xxxi. 42; Deut. xv. 13 ;
xvi. 16). Mk. xii. 3 : Lk. i. 53 ; xx. lOsq. ; metaph. i/e.sii-
tule of spiritual wealth, of one who boasts of his faith as
a transcendent possession, yet is without the fruits of
faith, Jas. ii. 20. 3. metaph. of endeavors, labors,
acts, which result in nothing, vain, fruitless, without efi'ect :
η χάρις, 1 Co. xv. 10; κόττοί, ib. 58 : ή εϊσοδοί, 1 Th. ii. 1 ;
neut. plur. κενά, things that will not succeed. Acts iv. 25
(fr. Ps. ii. 1) ; «'s Kfvov, in fain, to no purpose, [cf. AV.
592 (551)] : 2 Co. vi. 1 ; Gal. ii. 2; Phil. ii. 16; 1 Th.
iii. 5, (Is. Ixv. 23 ; Jer. vi. 29, etc. ; Diod. 19, 9 ; Heliod.
10, 30). [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xlix.]*
κενοψωνΟα, -ας, η. (κ^νόφωνος uttering emptiness), (ya-
niloquium, Vulg. [ed. Clem, (in 2 Tim. ii. 16)]). empty
discussion, discussion of vain and useless matters, [A. V.
babbling']: 1 Tim. vi. 20 ; 2 Tim. u. 16. ([Dioscor. 1
prooem. p. 3, 1]; eccles. writ.) *
Κΐνοω
344
κΐρατι,ον
k€v4m, -ώ : [fut. κινώσω, 1 Co. ix. 1 5 L txt. Τ Tr WH] ;
1 aor. ΐκΐνωσα ; Pass., pf . κίκίνωμαι ; 1 aor. ΐκινώθην ;
(Kfvos) ; 1. Ό empty, make emplif : tavrov ϊκίνωσι,
BC. του fivai ίση β(ω or t^s μομφήί τον θ(ον, i. e. lie laid
aside eiiiiality witli or the form of God (said of Cbrist),
Phil. ii. 7 (see a fuller exposition of this passage in
μορφή). 2. to make void i. e. deprive of force, ren-
der vain, useless, of no effect: pass., Ro. iv. 14; 1 Co. i.
17. 3. to make void i. e. cause a thing to be seen to
be empty, hollow, false : to καύχημα, 1 Co. ix. 15 ; pass.
2 Co. ix. 3. (Twiec in Sept. viz. Jer. xiv. 2 ; xv. 9 ;
often in Attic writ.) *
Kt'vrpov, -ου, TO, {καηίω to prick) ; 1. a sling, as
that of bees (1 Mace. xiv. 1 i)), scorpions, locusts, Rev. ix.
10. Since animals wound by their sting and even cause
death, Paul in 1 Co. xv. 5.5 (after llos. xiii. 14 Sept.)
attributes to death, personified, a κίντρον, i. e. a deadly
weapon, and that κίντρον is said to be ή αμαρτία [56], be-
cause sin is death's cause and punishment [?] (Ro. v.
12). 2. as in the Grk. writ, an iron goad, for urg-
ing on oxen, horses and other beasts of burden ; hence
the proverb προί κίντρα λακτίζαν. Ιο kick against the
goad, i. e. to oiler vain and perilous or ruinous resist-
ance : Acts ix. 5 Rec. ; xxvi. 14 ; cf. Find. Pyth. 2, 1 73 ;
Aeschyl. [Ag. 1C24, cf.] Prom. 323 ; Eurip. Bacch. 795 ;
Tei-enl. Phorm. 1, 2, 28; Ammian. 18, 5.*
Κ€ντυρ6ων, -(ukos, o, a Lat. word, a centurion : Mk. xv.
V.\ 44 sq. [Polyb. 6, 24, 5.]»
[Ktvxpiat, sec Key;^pfai.]
Κίνώ;, adv., raiidij, in rain, [W. 4Π.", (431); Aristot.
on] ; Jas. iv. 5.*
κφα(α [WII κ(ρία (see their .\])]i. p. 151)], -05, ή.
(ice'/j(is), a Utile horn ; extremil;/, (i/icr, point; used by the
Grk. grammarians of the accents and diacriti<^■d ])oints.
In Mt. v. 18 [(where see Wetstein ; cf. also Edcrshi im,
Jesus the Messiah, i. 537 srj.)]; Lk. xvi. 17 of the little
lines, or projections, by which the Ilebr. letters in other
respects similar differ from each other, as π and Π, Τ and i,
3 and 3. [A.V. iiVi/e]; the meaning is. 'not even the mi-
nutest part of the law shall ()erish.' [i .\cschyl.,Thuc.,al.)]'
Kcpa|j.Evs, -ί'ωί, ό, {κ(ράννυμί), a poller : ^It. xxvii. 7, 1 ;
Ro. ix. 21. (Horn., lies., .Vrstph., Plat., Plut., al. ; Sept.
several times for "^ϊΐ".) '
Kepap.iKOs, -ή, -6v, {κίραμος) : 1. in class. Grk. of
or h/ldiiging to a potter: hence κ. yij, such as a potter
uses, llippoer. ; τ<χνη. Plat, polit. p. 288 a. 2. in
the Hible made of dag, earthen : Rev. ii. 27 (Dan. ii. 41),
for which the (j reeks use κιραμιοΐΐ!, -ά, -oiv, and Kfpapiot
[al. -/ifioi], cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 147; [W. 99 (94)].*
κ(ράμιον, -ου, TO, (neut. of the adj. Kcpapwt, see the
preceding word [al. make it a dimin. fr. κέραμος]), an
earthen vessel, a pot, jar; a jug or jdtclter : with ίδατοΓ
added, a Λvater-piteheΓ, Mk. xiv. 13; Lk. xxii. 10. (The-
ophr. cans, plant. 3, 4, 3 ; οϊνηυ, Jer. ,χΐϋ. (xxxv.) 5 ;
Xen. anab. 6, 1, 15 ; Dem. p. 934, 26 ; Polyb. 4, 56, 3;
«λαι'ου, .Joseph, antt. 8, 13, 2.)*
Kt'papios, -ου. ό. (κ(ράννυμι) ; 1. clay, potter's earth.
2. ani/lhing made of rlag, earthen ware. 3. spec. α
(roofing) tile (Thuc, Athen., Ildian., al.) ; the roo/ itself
( Arstph. f r. 1 29 d.) : so δ»ά των κιράμων, through the roof,
i. e. through the tloor in the roof to which a ladder or
stairway led up from the street (accordingly the Rabbins
distinguish two ways of entering a house, ' the way
through the door ' and ' the way through the roof [Lghtft.
Ilorae Ilebr. p. 601]; cf. Win. RWR. s. v. Dach; Keim
ii. p. 176 S(j. [Eng. trans, iii. 215; Edersheim, Jesus the
Messiah, i. 501 sq. ; Jewish Social Life, p. 93 S(i<].]), Lk.
V. 19. Mark (ii. 4) describes the occurrence differently
(see άποστί-γύζω), evidently led into error by misap]ire-
hending the words of Luke. [Hut, to say nothing of the
imi)robability of assuming Mark's narrative to be de-
pendent on Luke's, the alleged discrepance disappears
if Luke's language is taken literally, "through the
tiles" (see διό. A. I. 1); he says nothing of " the door
in the roof." On the various views that have been taken
of the details of the occurrence, see Ii. D. (esp. Am. ed.)
s. v. House; Dr. Jas. Morison, Com. on Mk. 1. c] •
Κ€ράννυμ.ι {κ( ραννύω) : 1 aor. €κ€ρασα ; pf. pass, κΐκίρα-
σμαι (lor I lie more com. κίκραμαι, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
582; Hum. Ausf. Sprchl. ii. p. 211; Kriigcr § 40 s. v.
i. p. 175; [Veitch s. v.]); [fr. Iloin. down]; 1. to
mix, mingle. 2. to mix rvine and water. 3. to
pour out for drinking : τινίτι, Rev. xviii. 6 [R.V. mingle];
pass.. Rev. xiv. 10; (so Bel and the Dragon 11 ; Anthol.
11, 137, 12). [COMP. : σιτ/-<( μάιη^υμι.']*
[Syn. κΐράνννμι, μί•γνυμι : iu strict Usage κ€ρ. denotes such a
mixing as coniliiues the ingredients into a new compound,
chemical mixture; /i!7i/. such a mixing as merely blends
or intermingles them promiscuously, mechanical mixture.]
K£'pas, -ατοί, phir. κίρατα, gen. -άτων {W. 65 (63) ; B.
15(13)), TO, [fr. Horn, down], Ilebr. ρ|5, a horn; a.
prop.: of animals. Rev. V. 6; xii. 3; xiii. 1,11; xvii. 3, 7,
12, 16. b. Since animals (esp. bulls) defend them-
selves with their horns, the horn with the Hebrews (and
other nations) is a symbol of strength and courage, and
is used as such in a variety of phrases (Ps. IxxxviiL
(Ixxxix.) 18; cxxxi. (cxxxii.) 17; cxlviii. 14; 1 S. ii.
10; Sir. xlvii. 5, 7, 11 ; 1 Mace. ii. 48, etc. ; cf. Gesenius,
Thes. iii. p. 1238; [B. D. s. v. Horn]); hence Kepat
σωτηρίας (of God, Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 3 ; 2 S. xxii. 3), i. (j.
a mighlii and valiant helper, the author of deliverance, of
the Messiah, Lk. i. 69. c. trop. a projecting extremity
in shape like a horn, a point, apex : as, of an altar. Rev.
ix. 13; (Ex. xxix. 12; Lev. iv. 7, 18; xvi. 18; Am. iii.
14: Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 27)."
Kcpanov, -ου, τό, (dimin. of κίραί) ; 1. a little
horn. 2. the name of the fruit of the Kcparka or
Ktparda [or -τία], the Ceralonia siliijua (Linn.) or carott-
tree (called also St. John's Bread, [from the notion tiiat
its pods, which resemble those of the 'locust', constitut^d
the food of the Baptist]). This fruit is shaped like a
horn and has a sweet taste ; it was [and is] used not
only in fattening swine, but as an article of food by the
lower classes: Lk.xv. 16 [A. V. husks]; cf. Win. RWB.
s. V. Johannisbrodbaum; [B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v.
Husks].•
κερΒαίνω
345
ιή]νσ(κ
KcpSatvw: [fut. «ρδήσω, Jas. iv. 13 Rec.•"'"'" LTTr
Wll; see also below j ; 1 aor. €<c(p5i;ffa (an Ionic form fr.
κίρδάω, which later writ, use for the earlier cKepSava, see
Lub. ad Phryn. p. 740; Bltm. Ausf. Sprchl. ii. p. 215;
W. 87 (83) ; [ Vnilch s. v.]), once 1 aor. subj. «ρδάνω (1
Co. ix. 21 L Τ Tr [but \VH (cf. also Grsb. note) read the
fut. «μδακώ, cf. B. 60 (53); § 139, 38]); I fut. pass.
κ^ρΗηθήσομαι (the subjunc. κιρδηθήσωιτται, 1 Pet. iii. 1
Κ ( j is a clerical error [cf. retf . s. v. καίω, init.], for which
LTTrAVII have restored κ^ρ^ηθησονται [cf. B. § 139,
38]); [fr. lies, down]; (fr. κίρΆος); In yain, acquire;
(Vulg. passim /utTi/ncio [also /uf/o, etc.]) ; a. prop.:
ToK κόσμου, Mt. -xvi. 26 ; Mk. viii. 36 ; Lk. i.\. 25 ; money,
Mt. .x.Kv. 16 [LTWII], 17, 20, 22; absol. to get gain,
Jas. iv. 13. b. metaph. o. with nouns signify-
ing loss, damage, injury, it is used of the gain arising
from shunning or escaping from the evil (where
we say to spare one's .tel/, he spnreil) : την ΰβριν ταίτην
jc. ζημ'ιαν. Acts .x.wii. 21 ; τό y( μιανθηναι τας χίΐρας icepSai-
veiv, to avoid the crime of fratricide, Joseph, antt. 2, 3,
2 ; ζημίαν, to escape a loss, Eur. Cycl. 312 ; other exx. in
Kijpke, Observv. ii. p. 139 sq. β. τινά, Ιο gain anij one
i. e. to win him over to the kingdom of God, which none
but the placable enter, Mt. xviii. 15 ; to gain one to faith
in Christ, 1 Pet. iii. 1 ; 1 Co. ix. 19-22; Χριστοί/, to gain
Christ's favor and fellowship, Phil. iii. 8. iiot found in
the O. T.*
KcpSos, -€09 (-oui), TO, gain, advantage: Phil. i. 21 (with
which cf. Ael. v. h. 4, 7 τοί^ κακοϊί ovhk το άποθανύν κίρ•
δοϊ) ; Tit. i. 11 ; plur. Phil. iii. 7. [From Horn, down.] *
[κίρίο, see κίραία.]
Κ(ρμα, -ΓΟΓ, τό, {κ(ίρω to cut into bits), small pieces of
money, small coin, change ; generally and collectively, το
κίρμα money: Jn. ii. 15, where Lmrg. Tr WII τα κίρματα;
(Arstph., Dem., Joseph., al.). Cf. the full exhibition of
the use of the word given by Fischer, De vitiis lexicorum
N. T. etc. p. 264 siiii•*
κερματΐ(Γτή$, -ov, 6, (κίρματίζω [to cut into small pieces,
to make small change]), a money-changer, moneg-brol:er:
Jn. ii. 14. In the court of the Gentiles [(see Upov, and
Etlersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 244 sq.)] in the temple
at Jerusalem were the seats of those who sold such ani-
mals for sacrifice as had been selected, examined, and
approved, together with incense, oil, and other things
needed in making offerings and in \vorship ; and the
magnitude of this traffic had introduced the banker's or
broker's business; [cf. BB.DD. s. v. Money-changers;
esp. Edersheim u. s. p. 367 sqq.]. (Nicet. annal. 7, 2 p.
266 ed. Bekk. ; Max. Tyr. diss. 2 p. 15 ed. Markland.) *
Κίφάλαιον, -ου, τό, (neut. of the adj. κΕφάλαιοΓ, belong-
ing to the head); 1. the chief οτ main point, the
principal thing, (Vulg. capitulum) : Heb. viii. 1 [cf. B.
154 (134)] ; (freq. so in Grk. writ. fr. Pind., Thuc. and
Plat. down). 2. the pecuniary sum total of a reck-
oning, amount, (Plut. Fab. 4) ; the principal, capital, as
distinguished fr. the interest (Plat. legg. 5, 742 c.) ; univ.
a sum of money, sum, (Vulg. swnma}: Acts xxii. 28 ; so
Lev. vi. 5 ; Num. v. 7 ; xxxi. 26 ; Joseph, antt. 1 2, 2, 3 ;
Artem. oneir. 1,17; see other e.xx. in Kypke, Observv.
ii. p. 116 ; [L. and S. s. v. 5 b.].•
κεφάλαιο», -£> : 1 aor. (κίφαλαίωσα [Τ WH ϊκίφάλίύχτα
(see below)] ; («φάλαιοι/); 1. Ιο bring under heads,
to sum up, to summarize, (Thuc, Aristot., al.). 2. in
an unusual sense, to smite or wound in the head : Mk. xii.
4. It is of no use to appeal to the analogy of the verb
γναθόω, which means eir yvaeovs τίτττω to smite on the
cheek, since κfφά\aίov is nowhere used of the head of the
body. Tdf. [WH] (after codd. X Β L) have adopted
ίκίφάΚίωσαν (fr. κίφάλιον, i. q. κεφάλι';, q. v.). But nei-
ther κβφαλιο'ω nor κίφάλίζω has yet been noted in any
Greek author. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 95. [CoMP. :
άνα-κ^φάλαίόω.Ί *
κεφαλή, -rjs, ή, Sept. for lysi ; the head, both of men:
Mt. V. 36 ; Mk. vi. 24 ; Lk. vii. 38, 44 [Rec], 46 ; Jn. xiii.
9 ; Acts xviii. 18; 1 Co. xi. 4 ; Rev. i. 14 ; iv. 4, and often ;
and of animals: Rev. ix. 7, 17, 19, etc.; on the phrases
κλίναν την κ., tnaipciv την κ., see κλίνω. 1 and ΐπαίρω ; on
the saying in Ro. xii. 20, see under άνθραξ. Since the
loss of the head destroys the life, κιφάΚή is used in
phrases relating to capital and extreme punishments:
so in TO αίμα υμών cTrt την κ• ίιμων (see αίμα, 2 a. p. IS**),
Acts xviii. 6, and similar jihrases in class. Grk.; see
Passow s. V. p. 1717•; Pape s. v. 3 ; [L. and S. s. v. L
3 and 4]. Metaph. anything supreme, chief, prominent ;
of persons, master, lord: tii/os, of a husband in relation
to his wife, 1 Co. xi. 3 ; Eph. v. 23 ; of Christ, the lord
of the husband, 1 Co. xi. 3 [cf. B. 124.sq. (109)] ; of the
church, Eph. iv. 15; v. 23; Col. ii. 19 [cf. B. § 143, 4 c.];
του σώματοΐ της {κκ\. Col. i. 18; πάσ'η! αρχής και ^ζονσίας.
Col. ii. 10 ; so Judg. .xi. 11 ; 2 8. xxii. 44, and in Byzant.
writ. of tilings: κ€φ. γωνίας, the corner-stone, see y<i>-
vla, a. [(From Horn, down.)]*
κεφαλιόω : iMk. xii. 4 Τ WH (approved also by Weiss,
Volkmar, al.), for κεφαλαιόω, q. v.
κίφαλίϊ, -I'Sof, ή, (dimin. of κιφαλή, formed after the
analogy of άμαξίς, πινακίς, etc. ; cf. Bitin. Ausf. Spr. ii.
p. 443 ; Kuhner § 330 Anm. 5, i. p. 708) ; 1. a little
head (Lat. capitellum, capitulum). 2. the highest part,
extremity or end of anything ; as the capital of a column,
1 K. vii. 9, 31 etc.; Geop. 14. 6, 6 ; hence the tips or
knobs (the umbilici of the Romans [or rather the cornua ;
see Gardlhausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 52 sq. ; Rich, Diet,
s. V. umbilicus]) of the wooden rod around which parch-
ments were rolled seem to have been called κ(φαί\ί8(ς, be-
cause they resembled little heads ; so that 3. the
Alexand. writ, transferred the name κίφαΧΐς to the roll
or volume itself: ev κεφαλι'δι βιβλίου, Heb. .χ. 7 (fr. Sept.
of Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 8 for ISD-nSjpa, as in Ezek. ii. 9,
and without βιβλίου, iii. 1-3 ; 2 Esdr. vi. 2 [cf. Birt, An-
tikes Buchwesen, (Berl. 1882), p. 116]), Itala: in votu-
mine libri, in the roll of the book [cf. W. 23 (22)]. The
different ojjinions are noticed bj' Bleek ad loc.*
κημόαι, -ώ : fut. κημώσω ; (κημός a muzzle) ; to stop the
mouth by a muzzle, to muzzle : βοϋν, 1 Co. ix. 9 Τ Tr
WHmrg. (Xen. r. eq. 5, 3) ; see φιμόω.*
κήνσοΐ, -o«, ό, the Lat. word census (among the Ro-
κητΓος
346
κιβωτός
mans, denoting a register and valuation of property in
accordance with which taxes ivere paid), in tlic X. T. (as
in Cod. Just. 4, 47) Ihe tax or tribute lecied on ind'wiiluals
and to be paid yearly (Ilesych. κηνσοί• ahot νομίσματα!,
(πικ(φά\αίον, our capitation or poll lax) : Mt. xvii. 25 ;
.\.\ii. 17; Mk. .\ii. 14; το νόμισμα τοΟ κήνσου, tlie coin
with wliifh tlie tax is paid, tribute money. .\lt. xxii. 19.*
κήιτ•05. -ov, 6, [thouglit to be allied with σκάτττω, Lat.
cayupus, etc.], fr. Horn, down, Sept. for njj, 7Mi, ]J ; a
garden: Lk. xiii. 19; Jn. xviii. 1, 26; xLx. 41. [BB. DD.
s. V. Garden.]*
κηπ -ovpos, -oO, 6, (κηπο! and ovpos), a keeper of a gar-
den, a gardener : Jn. xx. 15 [BB. DD. s. v. Garden].
(Plat., Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Epictet., al.) *
κηρίον, -ου, τά, (κημόί wax), fr. lies, and Ildt. down,
honeycomb : κηρίον μίΧίσσιον, a honeycomb (still contain-
inn- the honey), l.k. xxiv. 42 RG Trbr. (1 S. xiv. 27;
Prov. xvi. 24; xxiv. 13).*
κήρυγμα, -τογ,το, (κηρύσσω), \n Grk. writ.esp. Attic, ίλπί
which (i promulgated by a herald or public crier, a procla-
mation by herald ; in the N. T. the message or proclama-
tion by the heralds of God or Christ: thus the proc-
lamation of the necessity of repentance and reformation
made by the prophet Jonah [A. V. preaching'], to κήρυγμα
Ίωνά. Mt. xii. 41 ; Lk. xi. 32, (Jon. iii. 4) ; the announce-
ment of salvation procured by Christ and to be had
through him : absol., 1 Co. i. 21 ; Tit. i. 3 ; w. gen. of
the subj., made by one, 1 Co. ii. 4 ; xv. 14 ; w. gen. of the
obj. Ίησοϋ Χρίστου, concerning Jesus Christ, Ro. xvi. 25,
cf. Philippi ad loc. ; [ttjs αΙωνίου σωτηρία!, JMk. xvi. Wll
in (rejected) ' Shorter Conclusion '] ; the act of pubUsh-
ing, absol. 2 Tim. iv. 1 7 [but R. Λ'^. that the message might
be fully proclaimed ; see πληροφορίω, a.].*
κήρνξ, less correctly [yet so L WII] κήρυξ (on the ac-
cent see W. § 6, 1 c. ; [B. 13 (12)]; Li/>sius, Gramm.
Untersuch. p. 36 ; [Chandler § 622 ; Gbttling p. 254 scj. ;
Lob. Paralip. p. 411 ; W. Dindorf in Sleph. Thes. s. v.;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 101]), -υκο!, ό, (akin to γηρυ! a voice, a
sound, γηρύω to utter a sound, to speak ; [yet cf. Vanicek
p. 140]) ; com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; a herald, a
messenger vested with public authority, who conveyed the
official messages of kings, magistrates, princes, military
commanders, or who gave a public summons or demand,
and performed various other duties. In the O. T., Gen.
xli. 43 ; Dan. iii. 4 ; Sir. xx. 15. In the N. T. God's am-
bnssailor, and Ihe herald or proclaimer of the divine word :
Βικαιοσϋνη!, one who summoned to righteousness, of Noah,
2 Pet. ii. 5 ; used of the apostles, as the divine messen-
gers of the salvation procured by Christ and to be em-
braced through him, 1 Tim. ii. 7; 2 Tim. i. 11.*
κηρΐσ-σ-ω; impf. (κήρυσσον : fut. κηρύξω: 1 aor. €Κψ
ρυξα. [inf. κηρύξαι R G Tr WII, κηρΰξαι L Τ ; cf. Lipsius,
Gramm. Untersuch. p. 32 sqq. ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 101 ; W.
§ 6, 1 f. (see reif. s. v. κήρυξ)] : Pass., pres. κηρύσσομαι ;
\ a.oT. (κηρύ-)^θην\ I fut. κηρυχθησομαι; (κήρυξ, <\. v.); fr.
Hom. down ; Sept. for Kip ; to be a herald ; to officiate as
herald ; to proclaim after the manner of a herald ; always
with a suggestion of formality, gravity, and an authority
which must be listened to and obeyed ; a. univ.
to publish, proclaim openly : something which has been
done, Mk. vii. 36 ; τον Xayov, Mk. i. 45 (here joined with
&ιαφημίζ(ΐν) ; foil, by indir. disc, Mk. v. 20; Lk. viii. 39;
something which ought to be done, foil, by the inf. (cf.
W. 322 (302) ; [B. § 141, 2]), Ro. ii. 21 ; νΐωύσήν. the
authority and precepts of Moses, Acts xv. 21 ; πιρίτομήν,
the necessity of circumcision, Gal. v. 11. b. spec,
used of the jiublic proclamation of the gospel and mat-
ters pertaining to it, made by .John the Baptist, by Jesus,
by the apostles and other Christian teachers : absol., Alt.
xi. 1; Mk. i. 38; iii. 14; xvi. 20; Ro. x. 15; w. dat, of
the pers. to whom the proclamation is made, 1 Co. ix. 27 ;
1 Pet. iii. 19 ; fit [R «V w. dat.] τα! συνα-γωγάί (see els,
A. I. 5 b.; cf.W. 213(200)), Mk.i. 39; [Ll<. iv. 44 TTr
txt. WII] ; (0) (ο^ρισσων, Ro. X. 14 ; κτ/ρΰσσΗκ w. ace. of
the thing, Mt. x. 27 ; Lk. [iv. 19] ; xii. 3 ; τινίτι, Lk. iv.
18(19); TO eiayyi'Xioi/rijs/SuaiX., Mt. iv. 23 ; ix.35; Alk.
i. 14 (where G L br. Τ Tr WII το ti. τοΟ θ(θϋ) ; το dayy.
simply, Mk. .xvi. 15; Gal. ii. 2; τό eiayy. του 6eoi eh
Tiva! (see above), 1 Th. ii. 9 ; pass., Mt. xxiv. 14 ; xxvi.
1 3 ; Col. i. 23 ; with els πάντα τα ίθνη or els SKov τ. κόσμον
added, Mk. xiii. 10 ; xiv. 9 ; τον λογοι-, 2 Tim. iv. 2 ; to
ρήμα τη! ^τίστeωs, Ro. -x. 8 ; την βασιΧ. Toij Beoi, Lk. viii.
1 ; ix. 2 ; Acts xx. 25 [here G L Τ Tr WII om. τοίϊ Beoi] ;
xxviii. 31 ; βάπτισμα, the necessity of baptism, Mk. i. 4 ;
Lk. iii. 3 ; Acts x. 37 ; μeτάvotav και αφΐσιν αμαρτιών, by
public proclamation to exhort to rejientance ami promise
the pardon of sins, Lk. xxiv. 47; Iva μ^τανοώσιν [RG
μeτavoήσωσι] (see tfaJL 2 b.; [B. 237 (204)]), Jlk. vi. 12.
τινά τισι, to proclaim to persons one whom they are to
become acquainted with in order to learn what they ought
to do : Χριστόν. or το^Ίι/σοίν, -Acts viii. 5 ; xix. 13; Phil,
i. 15 ; 1 Co. i. 23 ; 2 Co. iv. 5 (where it is opp. to ίαυτον
κηρ. to proclaim one's own excellence and authority) ; 2
Co. xi. 4; pass., ό κηρυχθίΐ!, 1 Tim. iii. 16; with διά and
gen. of pers. added, 2 Co. i. 1 9 ; with the epexegetic addi-
tion, ότι oiiTos e'oTiv ό υίοΓ τ. Seoi, Acts ix. 20 ; ότι ίκ veKpSiv
ey^yepTai, 1 Co. xv. 12 ; τινί foU. by ότι. Acts x. 42 ; κηρ.
foil, by λίγων ivith direct disc, Mt. [iii. 1 L Τ WH] ; x. 7 ;
Mk. i. 7 ; κηρϋσσeιv κ. Xeyeiv foil, by direct disc, Mt. iii.
1 [RGTrbr.]; iv. 17; κ?;/), f'v (omitted in Rec.) φω»^
μ(γάΚη, foil, by direct disc, (of an angel as God's herald ),
Rev. V. 2 ; κηρ. with οίτωΓ added, 1 Co. xv. 1 1 . On this
word see Zezschwilz, Petri apost. de Christi ad inferos
descensu sententia. (Lips. 1857) p. 31 sqq.; [Campbell,
Dissert, on the Gospels, diss. vi. pt. v. CoMP. : προ-
κηρύσσω.] *
κήτοϊ, -for (-ουϊ), τό, a sea-monster, whale, huge f.fh,
(Horn., Aristot., al.) : Mt. xii. 40, fr. Jon. ii. 1 where Sept.
it^Tf ι μ(γα\ω for Snj y\.*
Κηφΰβ. -5 [Β. 20 (18)], <5, (Chald. K3'3 a rock), Cephas
(i. (|. ITfVpof [cf. B.D. (.\m. ed.) p. 2459]), the surname
of Simon the apostle : .Jn. i. 42 (43) ; 1 Co. i. 12 ; iii. 22 ;
ix. 5 ; XV. 5 ; Gal. ii. 9 ; and L Τ Tr WH also in Gal. i.
18; ii. 11, 14.*
κιβωτή$, -οϋ. ή, (κίβο! [cf. Siiidas 2094 c]), a wooden
chest, box, ([Hecatae. 368 (Miiller's Frag. i. p. 30), Si-
κιθάρα
347
Κλαι/δτ)
mon.], Arstph., Lysias, Athen., Ael., al.) : in the N. T.,
the ark of the covenant, in the temple at Jerusalem,
Heb. ix. 4 (Philo, Joseph.; Sept. very often for J1"'K) ; in
the heavenly temple, Rev. xi. 19 ; of Xoah's vessel, built
in the form of an ark, Mt. xxiv. 38 ; Lk. xvii. 27 ; Heb. xi.
7 ; : Pet. iii. 20, (4 Mace. xv. 31 ; Sept. for Π^Π).*
κιθάρα, -as, η, a harp [cf. Stainer, Music of the Bible, eh.
iv. ; B.D. s. v. Harp]: 1 Co. xiv. 7; Rev. v. 8; xiv. 2;
ToC Beoii, to which the praises of God are sung in heaven,
Rev. XV. 2; cf. W. § 36, 3 b. [From Horn. h. Merc,
Hdt. on.] *
κιθαρίζω ; pres. pass. ptcp. κίθαριζόμ(ΐιος ; ίο play upon
the harp [(see the preceding word)] : with iv rals κίθάραις
added, [Α.Λ'. harping with their harps], Rev. xiv. 2 ; το
κιθαριζόμ^νον, what is harped, 1 Co. xiv. 7. (Is. xxiii. 16 ;
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Π. 18, 570 down.) *
κιθαρ-ω$όΐ. -oO, o, {κιθάρα [q. v.], and ώδόί, contr. fr.
άοιέύί, a singer), a harper, one u-ho plays on the harp and
accompanies it with his voice : Rev. xiv. 2 ; xviii. 22.
([Hdt., Plat., al.], Diphil. in Athen. 6 p. 247 d.; Plut.
mor. 166 a. ; Ael. v. h. 4, 2 ; superl. (extended form)
KidapaoiSOTaTos, Arstph. vesp. 12 78. Varro de r. r. 2, 1,
3 " non omne«, qui habent citharam, sunt citharoedi.") *
Κιλικία, -as, ij, C'iUcia, a province of Asia Minor, bound-
ed on the X. by Cappadocia, Lycaonia and Isauria, on
the S. by the Jlediterranean, on the E. by Syria, and on
the W. by Pamphylia. Its capital, Tarsus, was the birth-
place of Paul : Acts vi. 9 ; xv. 23, 41 ; xxi. 39 ; -xxii. 3 ;
xxiii. 34 ; xxvii. 5; Gal. i. 21. [Cf. Conyheare and How-
son, St. Paid, i. 19 sqq. ; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 78 sq.]*
κινάμωμον, more correctly [so L Τ Tr WH] κιννάρωμον,
-ου, TO, Hebr. J1"3;p. [(see L. and S. s. v.)], cinnamon :
Rev. xviii. 13. (Hdt., Theophr., Strab., Diod., Joseph.,
al.; Sept.) Cf. ΤΠη. RWB. s. v. Zimmt; [B.D. s. v. Cin-
namon ; Alex.'s Kitto s. v. Kinnamon].*
κιν&υν€χίω ; impf. ΐκιν^ννςνον ; (κίΊ/δυΐΌ5) ; to he in jeop-
ardy, to be in danger, to be put in peril : Lk. viii. 23 ; 1
Co. XV. 30 ; TovTo to pjpos KivSvvfvft tls άπ(\(γμ6ν ίΚθύν,
this trade is in danger of coming into disrepute. Acts xix.
27 ; κιι/δ. (γκαλί'ισ-θαι, we are in danger of being accused,
ib. 40. (From [Pind.] and Hdt. down; Sept.)*
κίνδυνοι, -ου, ό, danger, peril : Ro. viii. 35 ; ίκ nvos,
prepared by one, Ifrom one], 2 Co. xi. 26 ; ibid, with a
gen. of the source from which the peril comes, [o/", cf.
' W. § 30, 2 a.] ; so Tijs θαλάσσης. Plat. Euthyd. p. 279 e. ;
de rep. i. p. 332 e. ; θαλασσών, Heliod. 2. 4, 65.*
κινί'ω, -ω ; fut. κινήσω : 1 aor. inf. κινησαι ; Pass., pres.
κινούμαι ; 1 aor. (κινήθην; (fr. κίω, poetic for IQ, ίίμι,
Curtius § 57 ; hence) 1. prop, to cause to go, i. e.
to move, set in motion, [fr. Hom. down] ; a. prop, in
pass. [cf. W. 252 (23 7)] to be moved, move : of that motion
which is evidence of life. Acts .xvii. 28 (Gen. vii. 21); Kive'iv
SaKTvXcu φορτία, to move burdens with a finger, Mt. .xxiii.
4 : την κ(φαλήν, to move to and fro [A.V. wagl, (expres-
sive of derision), Mt. xxvii. 39 ; ^Ik. xv. 29, (Sept. for
ύ»Ί iViD) Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 8; Job xvi. 4 ; Sir. xii. 18,
etc.) ; b. tn more from a place, to remove : τί eV τοΟ
τότΓου, Rev. ii. 5 ; eV τών τόπων, pass., Rev. vi. 14. 2.
Metaph. to move i. e. excite : στάσιν, a riot, disturbance,
Acts xxiv. 5 ([see στάσΐΓ, 2]; ταραχήν, Joseph, b.j. 2, 9,
4) ; τηνπόλιν, to throw into commotion, pass., Acts xxi. 30.
[CoMP. ; ^fTo-, avy-Kivtiu.'\ *
κίνησ -is, -(ως, ή, (κινίω), [fr. Plato on], α moving, agita-
tion : τον ίδατοΓ, Jn. v. 3 [R L].*
Kls (LTTrWII Keis [cf. WH. App. p. 155; Tdf.
Proleg. p. 84; B. 6 note', and see ti, t]), a, indecl., (U'p
[perh. 'a bow' (Gesen.)] fr. ϊΤίρ to lay snares), Kish, the
father of Saul, the first king of Israel : Acts xiiL 21.*
κίχρημι : 1 aor. act. impv. χρησον ; to lend : rwi τι, Lk.
xi. 5. (From Hdt. down.) [Syn. see δαν(ίζω, fin.]*
kXoSos, -oi;, 0, (κλάω) ; a. prop, a young, tender
shoot, broken ο if' for grafting. b. univ. α branch :
Mt. .xiii. 32; xxi. 8 ; .x.xiv. 32; Mk. iv. 32 ; xiii. 28 ; Lk.
xiii. 19 ; as the .Jewish patriarchs are likened to a root,
so their posterity are likened to branches, Ro. xi. 16-19,
21; cf. Sir. xxiii. 25 ; xl. 15; Menand. frag. ed. Meineke
p. 247 [frag. 182, vol. iv. 274 (Ber. 1841)]. (Tragg.,
Arstph., Theophr., Geop., al.) *
κλαίω; impf . Εκλοίοι/ ; fut. κληΰο-ω (Lk. vi. 25; Jn. xvi.
20 ; and Tr WHtxt. in Rev. xviii. 9, for κΚανσομαι, more
com. in Grk. writ., esp. the earlier, and foimd in Lev. x.
6 ; Joel ii. 1 7, and ace. to most edd. in Rev. xviii. 9 ; cf.
Kruger § 40 s. v., i. p. 1 75 sq. ; Kiihner § 343 s. v., i. p.
847 ; [\"eitch s. v.] ; B. 60 (53) ; [W. 87 (83)]) ; 1 aor.
ΐκΚανσα ; Sept. freq. for Π33 ; [from Hom. down] ; to
mourn, weep, lament; a. intrans. : Mk. xiv. 72; xvi.
10; Lk. vii. 13,38; Jn. xi. 31, 33; xx. 11, 13,15; Acts
ix. 39; xxi. 13; Rev. [v. 5] ; xviii. 15, 19; πολλά, for
which L Τ Tr WH πολύ. Rev. v. 4 ; πικρώς, Mt. xxvi. 75 ;
Lk. x.xii. 62 ; weeping as the sign of pain and grief for
the thing signified (i. e. for pain and grief), Lk. vi. 21,
25, (opp. to yiXai/) ; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. xii. 15, (opp. to
Xaipfiv) ; Phil. iii. 18 ; 1 Co. vii. 30 ; Jas. iv. 9 ; v. 1 ; of
those who mourn the dead : Mk. v. 38 sq. ; Lk. τϋ. 32 :
viii. 52 ; iVt τινι, over any one, Lk. xi.\. 41 R G (Sir. .vxii.
11) ; also joined with πινθίΊν, Rev. xviii. 11 R G L; κλ.
im Tiva, Lk. xLx. 41 L Τ Tr λΥΗ ; xxiii. 28 ; joined with
κόπτίσθαι foU. by tVi τίνα, Rev. xviii. 9 Τ Tr AVH. b.
trans, τιρά, to iveep for, mourn for, betcail, one [cf. B. § 131,
4; W. 32, ly.] : Mt. ii. 18, and Rec. in Rev. xviii. 9.*
[Stn. ίακρύω. κλαίω, οίύρομαι, βρην4ω, άλολό(,Ί»
(όλολύί,'α)), στ (νάζω: strictly, δ. denotes to shed tears,
weep silently ; κλ. to weep audibly, to cri/ as a child ; όδ. to give
verba 1 expression to grief, to lament ; θρ. to give formal
expression to grief, to sing a dirge ; άλ. ti_> irtul in oriental
style, to howl in a consecrated, semi-Uturgical fasliion ; στ(ν.
to express grief by inarticulate or semi-articulate sounds, to
groan. Cf. Schmidt chh. 26, 126.]
κλάσ-ιβ, -€ως, ή, (κλάω, q. v.), a breaking : τον άρτου, Lk.
xxiv. 35 ; Acts ii. 42. (Plat., Theophr., al.) *
κλάα-μα, -ros, to, (κλάω), β fragment, broken piece:
plur., of remnants of food, Mt. xiv. 20 ; xv. 37 ; Mk. vi.
43; viii. 8, 19 sq.; Lk.ix.l7; Jn.vi.l2sq. (Xen. e_i,-n.
10,5; Diod. 17, 13: Plut. Tib. Gr. 19; Anthol.; Sept.)•
ΚλαΐΒη (LTrWH ΚαΟδα [see WH. App. p. 160],
Τ Κλανδπ). -ης. ή. Clauda or Cauda the name of a small
island lying near Crete on the south, called by Ptolem.
ΚΧαυΒία
348
κΧηρονομέο)
3, 1 7, 1 1 KXaC8ot, by Pomp. Mela 2, 7 and Plin. h. n. 4,
20 (12), 61 Oaudo.i, [(now (lauilo-nesi or Clauda-nesay] :
Acts xxvii. 16.•
Κλαυ8(α, -at, η, Claudia, a Christian woman : 2 Tim.
iv.21. [Cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) 8. v., also re£f. s. v.
IIoi^Stjs.] *
KXavSios, -ου, 6, Claudius. 1. Tiberiiis Claudius
Drufu^ Xuro Germanicus, the Roman emperor, who
came into power A. D. 41, and was poisoned by his wife
A^rippina in the year 51 : Act.s .\i. 28; xviii. 2. 2.
CIdiidiux Li/sias, a Roman military tribune : Acts xxiii.
20 [sec B. U. Am. ed. s. v. Lysias].*
κλανθμόΐ, -oC, 0, (κλαίω) ; f Γ. Horn, down ; Sept. for 03 ;
u-eepirir/, Imnentalion : Mt. ii. 18; [viii. 12]; xiii. 42, 00;
x.xii. 13 ; x.\iv. 51 ; xxv. 30; Lk. xiii. 28; Acts xx. 37.*
κλάω; 1 aor. ϊκΧασα; Pass., [pres. ptcp. κλώμ(ΐΌ{, 1 Co.
xi. 24 RG (see beloiv)]; 1 aor. ίκ\άσθην (Ro. xi. 20 h
Tr); [fr. Horn, down] ; Inbreak: used in the N.T. of the
breaking of bread (see ootos, 1), Mt. xiv. 19; xv. 36;
xxvi. 26; Mk. viii. 6 ; xiv. 22 ; Lk. xxii. 19; [xxiv. 30];
Acts ii. 46 ; xx. 7, 11 ; xxvii. 35 ; 1 Co. x. 16; xi. 24 ;
with els Tivar added, a pregnant constr., equiv. to ' to
break and distribute among ' etc. (see fir, C. 1), Jlk. viii.
19; metaph. to σώμα, shattered, as it were, by a violent
death, 1 Co. xi. 24 R G. [Comp. : «-, κατα-κλάω.] *
κλ((ΐ, -hot, ace. κλίίδα and κΚύυ (l.k. xi. 52; Rev. iii.
7), aec. plur. xXfiSiir and k\(Is (Mt. xvi. 19 ; Rev. i.
18 ; cf. Kuhner § 130, i. p. 357 ; W. 65 (63), cf. B. 24
(22); [ΤΓ//. App. p. 157]), ή, [fr. Horn, down]; a ken.
Since the keeper of the kejs has the power to open and
to shut, the word icXfir is fig. used in tlie N. T. to denote
power and authority of various kinds [cf. B. D. s. v. Key],
viz. ToO φρίατος, to open or unlock the pit. Rev. ix. 1,
cf. 2; Trjs αβύσσου, to sliut. Rev. xx. 1, cf. 3; τοϋ θανά-
του κάί τοΰ α8ον, the power to bring back into life from
Hades and to leave tliere, Rev. i. 18; τής ■yi/aaiwf, the
ability and opportunity to obtain knowledge, Lk. xi. 52;
T^s βασι\(ία! των οίρανων (see βιισϊΚίία, 3 e. p. 9 7' sub
fin.), Mt. xvi. 19; τοΰ Δαυίδ, the power of David (who
is a type of the Messiah, the second David), i. e. of re-
ceiving into the Messiah's kingdom and of excluding
from it. Rev. iii. 7 (apparently after Is. xxii. 22, where
ή k\- ο'κου Δαυίδ is given to the steward of the royal
palace)."
κλίίω; fut. κ\(1σω. Rev. iii. 7 LTTrWH; I aor.
ίκ\€ΐσα ; Pass., pf. κίκΚιισμαι, ptcp. κ(κλfισμfvos ; 1 aor.
ί'κλίίσθην; llcbr. 1J0: [fr. Iloin. down] ; ίο shut, s/iul
up; prop.: την θνμαν, Mt. vi. 6 ; pass., Mt. xxv. 10; Lk.
xi. 7; plur., Jn. XX. 19, 20; Actsxxi. 30; a prison, pass.
Acts v. 23 ; πυλώι/αί, pass. Rev. xxi. 25 ; την άβυσσον,
Rev. XX. 3 G L Τ Tr WIL metaph. : τον οΐρανόν. i. e. to
cause the heavens to withhold rain, Lk. iv. 25 ; Rev. xi.
; τά a-n\ay\va ainov από tivos, to shut up compassion
so that it is like a thing inaccessible to one, to be devoid
of pity towards one [AV. § 60, 2 d., cf. B. 322 (277)], 1 .In.
iii. 17; την βασιΧ. τώμ ουρανών, to obstruct the entrance
into the kingdom of heaven, Mt. x.xiii. 13 (14) ; so used
that την βασ• τοϋ θίοϊι must be understood, Rev. iii. 7 ; r.
θύραν, sc. TTjs βασ. τ. Beoi, ibid. 8 ; cf. Bleek ad loo.
[Co.MP. : άπο-, (Κ-, κατά-, σνγ-κλίίω.] '
κλ€'μ)ΐ,α, -rof, τό, (κΚίπτω); a. thing stolen [.\ri»-
tot.]. b. i.ti. κλοπή the/l, i.e. the act committed IKur.,
Arstph., al.] : plur. Rev. ix. 21.*
KXcoiras [on tlie decl. cf. B. 20 (18)], (apparently contr.
fr. ΚλίάτΓοτροϊ, see Άντίπας [cf. Letronne in tlie ReMie
Archeolugiciue, 1844-45, i. p. 485 stiq.]), ό, Cleojxis, one
of Christ's disciples: Lk. xxiv. 18. [Cf. Bp. Li//i'fl.
Com. on Gal. p. 267 ; B. U. s. v.] *
kXc'os, -out, TO. (κλί'ω equiv. to καλ/ω) ; 1. rumor,
rejtnrt. 2. i/lory, praise: 1 I'et. ii. 20. (In both
senses com. in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down; for ^'O'd, Job
xxviii. 22.) •
κλί'ΐΓτηϊ, -ου, ό. (κλ/πτω), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 33J,
a thinf: Mt. vi.I9 sq. ; xxiv. 4.i; Lk. xii. 33, 39; .In. x.
1,10; 1 Co. vi. 10 ; 1 I'et. iv. 15 ; an embezzler, jiilferer,
Jn. xii. 6 ; Ζρχίσθαι or ηκ^ιν ώ; κΚ. tv ννκτί, i. (j. to come
unexpectedly, 1 Th. v. 2, 4 ; 2 Pet. iii. 10; Rev. iii. 3;
xvi. 15 ; the name is transferred to false teachers, wlm do
not care to instruct men, but abuse their conlidence fur
their own gain, .In. x. 8. [Syn. see Xt/arijs, fin.]*
κλί'ΐΓτω; fut. κλίψ-ω (Sept. also in Ex. x.\. 14 ; Lev. xix.
II ; Deut. V. 19, for κλίψομαι more com. [(?) cf. Veitch
s. V. ; Kiihner § 343 s. v., i. 848] in prof, auth.) ; 1 aor.
ίκλίψ•α ; [fr. Horn, down]; Sept. for 3Jj; a. to
sIkiI ; absol. to coinniit a theft: Mt. vi. 19 sq. ; ,xix. 18 ;
AXk. X. 19 ; Lk. xviii. 20 ; Jn. .\. 10 ; Ro. ii. 21 ; xiii. 9 ;
Eph. iv. 28. b. trans, to steal i. e. take aicay hi/
stealth : τινά, the dead body of one, Mt. xxvii. 64 ; xxviii.
13.*
κλήμα, -ατοί, τό, (fr. κλάω, q. v.), i. q. κ\ά8οι, a lender
and βexiL•le branch; spec, the shoot or branch of a vine, a
vine-sprout : Jn. xv. 2-6 (so Arstph. eccles. 1031 ; Aes-
chin. in Ctes. p. 11,21 ; Theophr. h. pi. 4, 13, 5 ; άμπ-Λου
κΚημα, Plat. rep. i. p. 353 a.; Sept., Ezek. xv. 2; x\ii.
6 si|. ; .loel i. 7).•
Κλήμηϊ [cf. B. 16 sq. (15)], -ίΐτο5, ό, Clement, a com-
panion of Paul and apparently a member of tlie climch
at I'hilippi: Phil. iv. 3. Ace. to the rather improbable
tradition of the catholic church, he is identical with that
Clement who was bislio]) of Rome towards the close of llie
first century ; [but see Bp. Lghlft. Com. on I'hil. 1. c.
' Detached Note ' ; Salmon in Diet, of Chris. Biogr. i.
555 sq.].*
κληρονομ(ω, -ώ ; fut. κληρονομήσω ; 1 aor. ('κληρονόμησα ;
p(. Κ(κληρονιΊμηκα; (,κληpovϋμΌS,^[^V.^, ci ■ οικονόμο! ) ', Se]lt.
for Sn; and much oftener for wy ; 1. to receive a
lot, receive by lot; esp. to receive apart of an inheritance,
receive as an inheritance, obtain by right of inheritance ; so,
particularly in the Attic orators, w. a gen. of the thing;
in later writ, not infreq. w. an ace. of the thing (cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 1 29 ; Slurz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 140 ; W
200 (188) ; [B. § 132, 8]) ; absol. to be an heir, to inherit
Gal. iv. 30 fr. Gen. xxi. 10. 2. univ. to receive the
portion assigned to one, receive an allotted portion, receive
as one's own or as a possession ; to become partaker of, to
obtain [cf. Eng. " inherit "], (as φήμην, Polyb. 1 8, 38
κΧηρονομια
349
κ\ησι<ι
(55), 8 ; την in ήσφύα Κξαν, 15, 22, 3) ; in bibl. Grk.
everywh. w. the ace. of the thing ; so very freq. in the
O. T. in the phrase κΚηρ. γην and την γή», of the occupa-
tion of the land of Canaan by the Israelites, as Lev. xx.
24; Deut. iv. 22, 26; vi. 1, etc. But as the Israelites
after taking possession of the land were harassed almost
perpetually by their hostile neighbors, and even driven
out of the country for a considerable period, it came to
pass that the phrase was transferred to denote the tran-
quil and stable possession of the holy land crowned with
all divine blessings, an experience which pious Israel-
ites were to expect under the Messiah: Ps. xxiv.
(xxv.) 13; xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 9, 11, 22, 29, 34 Alex.; Is.
l.x. 21 ; Tob. iv. 12; « Sturtpaf κΧημονομήσονσι την yijv,
Is. Ixi. 7; hence it became a formula denoting to partake
nf eternal saloalioti in the Messiah's kingdom: Mt. v. 5
(4) (fr. Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 11), where see Bleek. ζωην
αΐώνιον. Mt. xix. 29; Mk. x. 17; Lk. x. 25; xviii. 18; την
βασι\(ίαν, Mt. xxv. 34 ; βασι\(ίαν θ(θΰ, 1 Co. vi. 9 sq. ; xv.
50; Gal. V. 21; σωτημίαν, Ileb. i. 14; τάϊ enayyeXias^
Heb. vi. 12; άφβαρσίαν, 1 Co. xv. 50; ταϋτα [Rec. πάντα],
Rev. xxi. 7 ; όνομα, Heb. i. 4 ; την eiXoyiav, lleb. xii. 1 7 ;
1 Pet. iii. 9. [CoMP. : κατα-κλημοι^ομίω.^ '
κληρονο|ΐ(α, -as. ή, (κληρονόμος), Sept. time and again
for rrjn 1, several times for ΠϋΤ, ΠΕ^ιή, etc. ; 1.
an inheritance, properly received (or '.o be received) by
inheritance, (Isocr., Dem., Aristot.) : Mt. xxi. 38 ; Mk.
xii. 7; Lk. .xii. 13; xx. 14. 2. what is given to
one as a possession ([cf. Eng. " inheritance "] ; see $(Κψ
ρονομίω. 2) : bibavai τι τινι κληρονομίαν. Acts vii. 5; λαμ-
βάν(ΐν Tt €if κληρ. Ileb. xi. 8 [(cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 7, 14
p. 1 las'", 33)]. Agreeably to the O. T. usage, which em-
ploys nSnj now of the portion of the holy land allotted
to each of the several tribes (Josh. xiii. 23, 28, etc.), now
of the whole territory given to Israel for a possession
(Deut. iv. 38 ; χ v. 4, etc. — and nothing appeared to the
Israelites more desirable than the ijuiet, prosperous, per-
manent possession of this land, see κΚηρονομίω, 2), the
noun κληρονομιά, lifted to a loftier sense in the N. T., is
used to denote a. the eternal blessedness iti the con-
summated kingdom of God which is to be expected afier the
visible return of Christ : Gal. iii. 18 ; Col. iii. 24 (της κληρ.
gen. of appos. [W. § 59, 8 a.]); Heb. ix. 15 ; 1 Pet. i. 4 ;
ημών, destined for us, Eph. i. 14 ; τ-οΰ θ(οΰ, given by God,
1 8. b. the share tchich an individual tcill have in that
eternal blessedness: Acts xx. 32; Eph. v. 5.'
κληρο-νόμοΐ, -ου, ό, (κληρο!. and νίμομαί to possess), prop.
one who receives by lot ; hence 1. an heir Cin Grk.
writ. fr. Plat, down); a. prop.: Mt. xxi. 38; Mk.
xii. 7 ; Lk. XX. 14; Gal. iv. 1. b. in Messianic usage,
one who receives his allotted possession by right of sonship :
so of Christ, as κληρονόμος πάντων, all things being sub-
jected to his sway, Heb. i. 2; of Christians, as exalted
by faith to the dignity of sons of .Abraham and so of
sons of God, and hence to receive the blessings of (Jod's
kingdom promised to Abraham: absol., Ro. viii. 1 7; Gal.
iii. 29 ; with τοϋ Seov added, i. e. of God's possessions,
squiv. to της 6άξης (see 6άξα, III. 4 b.), Ro. viii. 17 ; βίοίι
βιά Χρίστου, by the favor of Christ (inasmuch as through
him we have obtained ή uioifoia),Gal.iv. 7 Rec, for which
L Τ Tr WH read δια θ(ού [.-^ee δω, Α. III. 1 ] (cf. C. F. A.
Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opuscc. p. 148 [who advocates
the Rec. as that reading in which the others prob. origi-
nated (but cf. Meyer in loc.; WH in loc.)]); τοϋ κό-
σμου, of government over the world, Ro. iv. 13 sq. ; ζωής
αιωνίου. Tit. iii. 7 ; της βασίΚίίας, Jas. ii. 5. 2. the
idea of inheritance having disappeared, one who has ac-
quired or obtained the portion allotted him : w. gen. of the
thing, Heb. vi. 17; xi. 7 ; τοϋ σκότους, used of the devil,
Ev. Nicod.c. 20 [orDescens. Chr. ad Inferos 4,1]. (.Sepl^
four times for CiV : Judg. xviii. 7 ; 2 S. xiv. 7 ; Jer. viii.
10; Mic. i. 15.)•
κλήρο$, -ου, ό, fr. Horn, down ; Sept. mostly for S"JU
and Γ\Ίρΐ ; a lot; i. e. 1. an oliject used in casting
or drawing lots, which was either a pebble, or a potsherd,
or a bit of wood, (hence κλήρος is to be derived fr. κλά»
[cf. Ellicott on Col. i. 12]) : Acts i. 2U (see below); βάΧ-
\fiv κληρ., Mt. xxvii. 3'> ; Mk. xv. 24 ; Lk. xxiii. 34 ; Jn.
xix. 24, (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19 ; Jon. i. 7, etc.) ; the lots of the
several persons concerned, inscribed with their names,
were thrown together into a vase, which was then shaken,
and he whose lot first fell out upon the ground was the
one chosen (Horn. II. 3, 316, 325; 7, 175, etc.; Liv. 23,
3 [but cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Lot]) ; hence ό κλήρος πίτττίΐ
(πι τίνα. Acts i. 26 (Ezek. xxiv. 6 ; Jon. i. 7). 2.
tvhat is obtained by lot, allotted portion : Xayx^avdv and
λαμβάνίΐν τον κληρον της διακονίας, a portion in Uae min-
istry common to the apostles, Acts i. 1 7, 25 R G ; ίστι
μοι κλήρος cv τικι, dat. of the thing. Acts viii. 21 ; like
κληρονομιά ((J. v.) it is used of the part which one will
have in eternal salvation, λαβιΊν TOf κ\. exToIr ί^γιασμίνοις,
among the sanctified, Acts xxvi. 18 (Sap. v. 5) ; of eter-
nal salvation it>clf, κληρης τών άγιων, i. e. the eternal sal-
vation which God has assigned to the saints. Col. i. 12
[where cf. Bp. Lghtft.]. of persons, oi κλήροι, those
whose care and oversight has been assigned to one [al-
lotted charge], used of Christian churches, the adminis-
tration of which falls to the lot of the presbyters : 1 Pet.
V. 3, cf. Acts xvii. 4 ; [for patristic usage see Soph. Lex.
s. v., cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 24G sq.].•
κληρόοι, -ώ : 1 aor. pass, (κληρώθην : (κλήρος) ; in class.
Grk. 1. to cast lots, determine by lot. 2. to
choose by lot: τινά [Hdt. 1, 94 ; al.]. 3. to allot, ail•
sign by lot : τινά τινι. one to another as a possession, Pind.
01. 8, 19. 4. once in the N. Ύ.,ίο make a κλήρος L
e. α heritage, private possession : τι»ά, pass. cV ω ίκληρύ-
θημ(ν [but Lchm. (κλήΰημίν] in whom lies the reason why
we were made the κλήρας τοϋ Sfoi (a designation trans-
ferred from the .lews in the O. T. to Christians, cf. .\dd.
to Esth. iii. 10 [iv. line 12 sq. (Tdf.)] and Fritzsche in
loc.; [cf. Deut. iv. 20; ix. 29]), the heritage of God
Eph. i. 11 [see Ellicott in loc.]. (In eccles. writ, it sig-
nifies to become a clergyman [see re£P. 8. v. «cX^/joj, fin.].)
[CoMP. : προσ-κληρόω.] •
κλή(Γΐ5, -(ως. ή. (κολ«'ω) ; 1. α calling, calling to,
[(Xen., Plat., al.)]. 2. α call, invitation : to a feaet
κ\ητόΐ{
350
κΧνΒωνίζομαι
(3 Mace. V. 14 ; Xen. symp. 1,7); in the N. T. every-
where in a technical sense, ihe divine invitation to embrace
salvation in the kingdom ofOod, which is made esp. tlirough
the preaching of the gospel : with gen. of the author, τον
βΐον, Eph. i. 18 ; α.μίταμ.ί\. . . . ι} κλ. roC Btov, God does
not repent of the invitation to salvation, which he de-
cided of old to give to the people of Israel, and which
he promised their fathers (i. e. the patriarchs), Ro. xi.
20 ; ij άνω [((. v. (a.)] κλ^σΐί τοϋ θ(θΰ ϊν Χριστώ, which
was made in hea\cn by Ciod on the ground of Christ,
Phil. iii. 14 ; also ή ίπονράνιοί κλησκ, Ileb. iii. 1 ; κΛ(Ίν
Tti/u κλήσίί, 2 Tim. i. 9 ; pass. Kph. iv. 1 ; άξιοϋν τίνα
κλήσιως is used of one whom God declares worthy of the
calling which he has commanded to be given him, and
therefore fit to obtain the blessings promised in the call,
2 Th. i. 11 ; w. gen. of the oljj., νμων, which ye have
shared in, Eph. iv. 4; 2 Pet. i. 10; what its character-
istics have been in your ease, as liaving no regard to
learning, riches, station, etc. 1 Co. i. "26 ; used somewhat
peculiarly, of the condition in which the calling finds
one, whether circumcised or uncircumcised, slave or
freeman, 1 Co. vii. 20.*
κλητόϊ, -ή, -όν, (καΚίω), [fr. Horn, down], called, invited,
(to a banquet, [1 K. i. 41, 49] ; 3 Mace. v. 14 ; Aeschin.
50, 1 ) ; in the N. T. a. invited {by God in the proc-
lamation of the gospel) to obtain eternal salvation in the
kingdom of God through Christ (see καλίω, 1 b. j3. [cf.
W. 35(34)]): Ro. viii. 2H; 1 Co. i. 24; Jude 1; κλιρτοι
κ. (κΚ(κτο\ κ. πιστοί, Rev. ,χνϋ. 14; κΧητοί and (kKcktoi
are distinguished (see (κλικτός, 1 a.) in Mt. xx. Hi [T
Wllom. Trbr. the cl.]; xxii. 14, a distinction which does
not agree with Paul's view (see καλ/ω, u. s. ; [ Weiss, Bibl.
Theol. § 88; Bp. Λί/λ(/?. Com. on Col. iii. 12]); κ\ητονΐησον
ΧμιστοΟ, gen. of possessor [W. 195 (183) ; B. § 132, 23],
devoted to Christ and united to him, Ro. i. 6 ; κλητοΊ άγιοι,
holy (or 'saints') by Ihe calling of God, Ro. i. 7 ; 1 Co.
i. 2. b. called to (the discharge of) some office :
kXjjtos απόστολοι, i. e. divinely selected and appointed
(see καλΐ'ω, u. s.), Ro. i. 1 ; 1 Co. i. 1 [L br. κλ.] ; cf.
Gal. i. 15.•
κλίβανος, -ου, 6, (for κρίβανο!, more com. in earlier [yet
κ\ίβ. in Ildt. 2, 92 (cf. Athen. 3 p. 110 c.)] and Attic
Grk. ; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 179; Passow s. v. κρίβανο: ;
[W. 22]) ; 1. a clibanus, an earthen vessel for
baking bread (Hebr. "Ί3Γ\, Ex. viii. 3 (vii. 29 Ilebr.) ;
Lev. ii. 4 ; xxvi. 26 ; Hos. vii. 4). It was broader at the
bottom than above at the orifice, and when sufliciently
heated bva fire kindled within, the dough was baked by
being spread upon the outside [but ace. to others, the
dough was placed inside and the fire or coals outside, the
vessel being often perforated with small holes that the
heat might the better penetrate; cf. Rich, Diet, of Grk.
and Rom. Antiq. s. v. clibanus; see Schol. on Arstph.
Acharn. 86 (iv. 2 p. 339, 20 sq. Dind.)]. 2. i. q.
ιττνόί, a furnace, an oven : so Mt. vi. 30 ; Lk. xii. 28.•
κλίμα or κλϊμα (on the accent cf. reff. s. v. κρίμα), -rot,
TO, (κ\Ίνω) ; 1. an inclination, slope, declivity : των
ορωκ, Polyb. 2, 16, 3; [al.]. spec. 2. Me [supposed]
sloping of the earth fr. the equator towards ihe poles, a
zone : Aristot., Dion. H., Plut., al.; Joseph, b. j. 5, 12,
2. 3. a tract of land, a region : Ro. xv. 23 ; 2 Co.
xi. 10 ; Gal. i. 21 ; (Polyb. 5, 44, 6; 7, 6, 1 ; Hdian. 2,
11, 8 [4 cd. Bekk.]; al.).•
κλινάριον, -ου, ro, (dimin. of κλίνη ; see γυναικάριαν), a
small beil, a couch: Acts v. 15 LTTrW'll. (Arstph.
frag. 33 d. ; Epict. diss. 3, 5, 13; Artem. oneir. 2, 57 ;
[cf. κλινίδιον, and Pollux as there referred to].)*
κλίνη, -ης, ή, (κλι'κω) ; fr. lidt. down ; Sept. for nUO
also for U'}^^ ; a bed : univ., Mk. vii. 30 ; Lk. .wii. 34 ;
a couch to recline on at meals, Mk. iv. 21 ; vii. 4 [T
AVlIom.]; Lk. viii. 16; a couch on which a sick man
is carried, Mt. ix. 2, 6 ; Lk. v. 18 ; plur. Acts v. 15 R G ;
/3άλλίΐν els κλίνην, to cast into a bed, i. e. to afllict with
disease, Rev. ii. 22.*
κλινίδιον, -ου, TO, (κλίνη), a small bed, a couch : Lk. v.
19, 24. (Diun. H. antt. 7, 68; Artem. oneir. 1, 2; An-
tonin. 10, 28; several times in Plut. ; [cf. Pollux 10, 7].) •
κλίνω; 1 aor. ίκλικι ; pf. «κλίκα ; 1. trans. a.
to incline, bow : την κ(φαλήν. of one dying, Jn. xix. 30 ;
τά πρόσίιηον els τ. γην, of the terrified, Lk. xxiv. 5. b.
i. q. to cause to fall back: παρίμβολάι, Lat. inclinare acies,
i. e. to turn to flight, Heb. xi. 34 (μάχην, Horn. Π. 14,
510; ΤμώοΓ, 5, 37; 'A;(aiout, Od. 9, 69). c. torecline:
την κe<paλήv, in a place for repose [A. V. lay one's head],
Mt. viii. 20 ; Lk. ix. 58. 2. intrans. to incline one's
self [ct B. 145 (127) ; W. § 38, 1] : of the declining day
[A. V. wear away, be far spent], Lk. ix. 12; xxiv. 29;
Jer. vi. 4 ; 5μα τώ κλΊναι το τρίτον pepos τη: vvktos, Polyb.
3, 93, 7 ; (γκλίναντο! τον ηλίου es eanepav, Arr. anab. 3,
4,2. [CoMP. : άι/α-, ί'κ-, κατά-, προσ-κλινω.] *
κλια-(α, -as. ή, (κλίνω) ; fr. Horn, down; prop, a place
for lying down or reclining; hence 1. ο /i«/, erect-
ed to pass the night in. 2. a tent. 3. any
thing to recline on ; a chair in which to lean back the
head, reclining-chair. 4. a company reclining; a
row or party of persons reclining at meal : so in plur., Lk.
ix. 14, on which cf. W. 229 (214) ; likewise in Joseph.
antt. 12, 2, 12; Plut. Sert. 26.*
κλοτΓή, -ijr, η, (κλέπτω), theft: plur. [cf. B. 77 (67);
W. 176 (166)], Mt. XV. 19; Mk. vii. 21 (22). [From Aes-
chyl. down.] '
κλύδων, -ωνος, 6, (κλίιζη, to wash against) ; fr. Horn,
down ; (1 dashing or surging wave, a surge, a violent agi-
tation of Ihe sea : τοΰ ύδατος, Lk. viii. 24; ttjs θαλάσσης,
Jas. i. 6 (Jon. i. 4, 12; Sap. xiv. 5).*
(Stn. kKoSuv, κνμα: κϋ/ιο α «'aw, snggestinff uninter-
rupted succession; κλύίων a billow, surge, su<;gestinfi size
and e X t e u s i ο n. So too in the fig. application of the words.
Schmidt ch. 56.]
κλυβωνίζομιαι, ptcp. κλvίωvιζ6μevos^, (κλυ'δωκ); lobe tossed
by Ihe waves ; metaph. to be agitated (like the waves)
menially [A. V. tossed to and fro] : with dat. of instrum.
ππντι ave'ptu Tijt διδασκαλίας, Eph. iv. 14 (cf. Jas. i. 6 ; oi
αδίκηι κλνδωνισθησονται κα\ άναπανσασθαι oii δυνησονται.
Is. l\'ii. 20 : 6 δήμος ταρασσόμ€νος και κλvδωvιζnμevoς
oi\fjaeTai φeϋyωv, Joseph, antt. 9, 11, 3; κλυδωvιζήμevos
Κλωπάζ
351
KOlVCoVcOO
έκ τον πόθου, Aristaenet. epp. 1, 26, p. 121 ed. Boisson-
ade [ep. 27, 14 ed. Abreschj;.*
Κλωττάϊ, -5 [Β 20 (18) ; W. § 8, 1], δ, (KilSn; appar.
identical witii Alphsus, see ΆΧφαΙοί, 2 [cf. Heinichen's
note on Euseb. h. e. 3, 11, 2]), Clopas (Vulg. \_Cleopas
andj Cleophas), the fatlier of the apostle James the less,
and husband of ilary the sister of the mother of Jesus :
Jn. xix. 25 (ή τοϋ Κλωπά sc. -γυνή [cf. W. 1 3 1 (1 25) note]).•
κνήθω : pres. pass, κνήθομαι ; (fr. κνάω, inf. κνάν and
Attic Kvrjv) ; to scratch, tickle, make to itch ; pass, to itch :
κνηθόμίνοι την άκοην (on the acc. cf. W. § 32, 5), i. e. de-
sirous of hearing something pleasant (Hesych. κνήθ- τ.
άκοην ζητοϋιητίΐ η άκονσαι <aff ή8ιινήν), 2 Tim. iv. 3.
(.Mid. τόχ δνον κνήθ^σθαι els τάί ά<άνβαί τα ίλκη, its sores,
Aristot. h. a. 9, 1 p. 609', 32 ; κνήι> Άττικοϊ, ici/ijitu/ Έλλι/-
Pft, Moeris p. 234; [cf. Veitch s. v. κι/άω'].)'
Kv(So$. -ου, ή, Cnidus or Gnidus, a peninsula [now Cape
Crio] and a city of the same name, on the coast of Caria :
Acts xxrii. 7 (1 Mace. xv. 23). [B. D. s. v. Cnidus ;
Leu'in, St. Paul, ii. 190.] *
κο8ράντη5, -ου [Β. 17 (16)], ό ; a Lat. word, quadrans
(i. e. the fourth part of an a.v) ; in the N. T. a coin equal
to one half the Attic chalcus or to two Xcirra (see Xfirrav) :
Mk. .\ii. 42; Mt. v. 26. The word is fully discussed by
Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 447 sqq. [A. V.^/ar-
thing; see BB. DD. s. v.]•
κοιλία, -as, ή, (κοίλοί hollow) ; Sept. for 1D3 the belly,
□•;••3 the bowels, 3lp the interior, the midst of a thing,
D7T1 the womb; the bell//: and 1. the whole belli/,
the entire cavity ; hence ή άνω and ή κάτω κοιλία, the upper
[i. e. the stomach^ and the lower belly are distinguished ;
very often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. 2. the
lower belli/, the alvine region, the receptacle of the ex-
crement (Plut. symp. 7, 1, 3 sub fin. fiwfp eis κοίλίαν
(χώρ€ΐ δια στομάχου πάν το πίνόμ€νον) : Mt. XV. 1 7 ; Mk.
vii. 19. 3. the r/ullet (hat. stomachuii) : Mt. xii. 40;
Lk. .XV. 16 [WH Trmrg. χομτασθϊίναι ϊκ etc.] ; 1 Co. vi.
13 ; Rev. x. 9 sq. ; hovKdav τη κοιλία, to be given up to
the pleasures of the palate, to gluttony, (see δουλ(ίω, 2
b.), Ro. xvi. 18; also &ν ό 6f6s ή κοιλία, Phil. iii. 19;
κοιλία! όρίξκ. Sir. xxiii. 6. 4. the womb, the place
where the fcEtus is conceived and nourished till birth :
Lk. i. 41 sq. 44; ii. 21 ; xi. 27 ; xxiii. 29 ; Jn. iii. 4,
(very often so in Sept. ; very rarely in j)rof. auth. ;
Epict. diss. 3, 22, 74 ; of the uterus of animals, ibid. 2,
16,43); (K (beginning from [see ex, IV. 1 ]) κοιλία{ μητρός,
Mt. xi.x. 12; Lk. i. 15; Acts iii. 2 ; xiv. 8; Gal. i. 15,
(for DK JP?•?, Ps. x.xi. (x.xii.) 11 ; Ixx. (Ixxi.) 6; Job i.
21 ; Is. xlix. 1 ; Judg. xvi. 1 7 [Vat. άπ-ό κ. μ. ; cf. W. 33
(32)]). 5. in imitation of the Hebr. [03, tropi-
callv, the innermost part of a man, the soul, heart, as the
seat of thought, feeling, choice, (Job xv. 35; x.xxii. 18
[Sept. γαστηρ] ; Prov. xviii. 8 Sept. ψνχη^ ; xx. 27, 30 :
xxvi. 22 [Sept. σπλάγχνα]; Ilab. iii. 16; Sir. xlx. 12; Ii.
21) : Jn. vii. 38.*
κοιμ,άω, -ω : Pass., pres. κοιμάομαι, κοιμώμαι ; pt. κ€-
κοίμημαι [cf. W. 274 (257)]; 1 aor. (κοιμήθην; 1 fut.
κοιίίτ'βησομαι ; iaki" to «ί;ιαι ; Curtius §45); to cause
to sleep, put to sleep, (Horn, et al.) ; metaph. to still, calm,
quiet, (Horn., Aeschyl., Plat.) ; I'ass. to sleep, fall asleep .
prop., Mt. xxviii. 13; Lk. xxii. 45; Jn. xi. 12; Acts
xii. 6 ; Sept. for 331?. metaph. and euphemistically i. q.
to die [cf. Eng. to fall aslee/)'] : Jn. xi. 1 1 ; Acts vii. 60 ;
xiii. 36; 1 Co. vii. 39; xi. 30; xv. 6, 51 [cf. W. 555
(517) ; B. 121 (106) note] ; 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; oi κοιμώμινοι,
κ(Κοιμημίνοι, κοιμηθίντί!, i. q. the dead : Mt. x.xvii. 52 ; 1
Co. XV. 20 ; 1 Til. iv. 13-15 ; with ev Χριστώ added (see
tv, I. 6 b. p. 211''), 1 Co. XV. 18; in the same sense Is.
xiv. 8 ; xliii. 17; 1 K. xi. 43 ; 2 Mace. .xii. 45 ; Horn. II.
11, 241 ; Soph. Electr. 509.*
κο(μησ-ΐ5, -€wf, ή, a reposing, taking rest : Jn. .xi. 13 [cf.
W. § 59, 8 a.]; of death. Sir. xlvi. 19; xlviii. 13; η
lying, reclining, Plat. conv. p. 183 a.*
Koivos, -η, -όν, (ir. ξΰν, συν, with ; hence esp. in Epic
ξυνός for (coiiiof, whence the Lat. cena [(?) ; seeVanifek
p. 1065]) ; 1. as in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod. (opp. 721)
down (opp. to iSios) common (i. e. belonging to several,
Lat. communis) : Acts ii. 44 ; iv. 32 ; κοινή πίατί!. Tit. i.
4 ; σωτηρία, Jude 3. 2. by a usage foreign to class.
Grk., common i. e. ordinary, belonging to the generality
(Lat. vulgaris) ; by the Jews opp. to ayios, η-γιασμίνος,
KaSapas; hence unhalloiced, Lat. pro/anus, levitically
unclean, (in class, (irk. βίβηλο!, q. v. 2) : Mk. vii. 2, 5
(where RLmrg. ά^ίπτοΐί) ; Ro. xiv. 14; Heb. x. 29;
Rev. xxi. 27 [Rec. κοινοϋν^, (1 Mace. i. 47 ; φαγιϊν κοινά,
ib. 62 ; κοινοί άνθρωποι, common people, pro/anum vulgus,
Joseph, antt. 12, 2, 14; oi τον κοινον βίον προηρημίνοι, i.
e. a life repugnant to the holy law, ibid. 13, 1, 1 ; οΰ yap
ως κοινον άρτυν ούδΐ ως κοινόν πόμα ταΟτα (i. e. the bread
and wine of the sacred supper) λαμβάνομ^ν, Jastia Mart,
apol. 1, 66; (oi Χριστιανοί) τράπ^ζαν κοινην παρατίθενται,
αλλ' οϋ κοινην, a table communis but not pro/anus. Ep. ad
Diogn. 5, on which cf. Otto's note) ; κοινον κάΊ [R G ξ]
άκάθαρτον. Acts χ. 1 4 ; κηιν. η άκάθ-, ib. χ. 28 ; .\i. 8, (κοινά
η ακάθαρτα ουκ (σθίομ(ν, Justin Mart. dial. c. Tr. c. 20).
[Cf. Trench § ci.] *
κοινόω, -ώ; 1 aor. inf. κοινώσαι [cf. W. 91 (86)] ; pf.
KfKoivaKa ; pf . pass. ptcp. κίκοινωμίνος ; (κοινός) ; 1.
in class. Grk. to make common. 2. in bibl. use (see
κοινός, 2), a. to make (levitically) unclean, render un-
hallowed, defile, profane (which the Grks. express by β(βψ
λόω, cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. ii. p. 24 note 33
[where he calls attention to Luke's accuracy in putting
κοινοΐιν into the mouth of Jews speaking to Jews (Acts
xxi. 28) and β(βηλοΰν when they address Felix (xxiv.
6)]) : Rev. xxi. 27 Rec. ; Mt. xv. 11, 18, 20 ; Mk. vii. 15,
18, 20, 23 ; pass. Heb. ix. 13 ; τί, Acts xxi. 28; γαστίρα
μιαροφαγία, 4 Mace. vii. 6. b. to declare or count un-
clean : Acts X. 15 (cf. 28) ; xi. 9; see δικαιόω, 3.*
κοινωνεω, -ω ; 1 a.OT. ^κοινώνησα', ^ί.κ€κοινώνηκα'. {koivqj-
νός) ; a. to come into communion or fellowshi/j, to
become a sharer, be made a partner : as in Grk. writ. w.
gen. of the thing, Heb. ii. 14 [(so Prov. i. 11 ; 2 Maec.
xiv. 25)] ; w. dat. of the thing (rarely so in Grk. writ.).
Ro. XV. 27; [1 Pet. iv. 13]. b. to enter into fellow-
ship, join one's self as an associate, make one's self a sharer
χΟΐνωνίΛ
852
κολάζοβ
or partner : »β in Grk. writ., w. dat. of the thin°;, 1 Tim.
V. 22 ; 2 Jn. 1 1 ; ταίί xpticut titoj, so to make anotlier's
necessities one's own as to relieve them [A. V. cummuni-
caling to the necessilii-x etc.], I^o. -xii. 13 ; w. dat. of |)ers.
foil, by €'is Tt (as in Plat. rep. .5 p. 453 a.), Phil. iv. 15 ;
foil, by e'l» w. dat. of the tiling which one shares with
another, Gal. vi. (J (κοοΌ,κι/σίΐΓ fv πασι τω πλησίον σον
και ουκ i'pe'is ίδια (ΐναι, Barnah. ej). 19, 8) ; cf. W. § 30,
8a.; [Β. § Κ!-', 8; 15p. I.ghtft. or EUicott on Gal. 1. c.
CoMP. : συγ-κοινωνίω.^ *
κοινωνία, -as, ή, (κοινωι /or), fcUnwxh'ip, association, com-
munilji, ciimiuHiiidn, joint participation, intercourse; in
the N. T. as in class. Ok. 1. the share u-hich one
has in am/lhin;/, jiartici/i'ition; w. gen. of the thinj in
wllich lie shares : πνίΰματοί, Phil, ii- 1 ; τοΟ άγιου -πικΰμα-
Tos, 2 Co. xiii. 13(14); των παθημάτων του Χριστού, I'hil.
iii. 10; τήί πίστίωί, Philem. 6 [cf. Bp. Lghtft.] ; τοϋ
αΐματο! τοϋ Χριστού, i. e. in tlie benefits of Christ's death,
1 Co. .\. Ill [cf. Meyer ad loc] ; του σώματο! τον Xp. in the
(mystical) body of Christ or the church, ibid.; r^f δια-
κονίας, 2 Co. viii. 4 ; τού μνστηρίον, Eph. iii. 9 Rec. fir
κοινωνίαν την υίού τοΰ 6(οϋ, to obtain fellowship in the
dignitv and blessings of the Son of (!od, 1 Co. i. 9, where
cf. Mever. 2. intercourse, felloicship, intimacy:
be^ia κοινωνίας, the right liand as the sign and pledge
of fellow.ship (in fulfilling the apostolic office). Gal. ii. 9
[where see Bp. Lghtft.] ; τίς κοιν. <^ωτΊ προς σκότος; what
in common has light with darkness? 2 Co. vi. 14 (n't ovv
κοινωνία προς 'Απόλλωνα τω μηδ^ν οίκΰον ίπιτ^τηδΐνκότι,
Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 14 fin. ; « 8c τις ίστι κοινωνία προς
flfout ήμΐν, Stob. serm. 2S [i. p. 87 ed. Gaisf.]) ; used of
the intimate bond of fellowship which unites Christians:
ai)Sol. Acts ii. 42; with fit τό (Ιαγγίλιον added, Phil. i.
•5 ; κοινωνίαν ΐχίΐν μίθ ημών, μΐτ αΚ\η\ων, 1 Jn. i. 3, 7 ;
of tlie fellowship of Christians with God and Christ, μττα
τού πατρός κ. μ^τα τού νιου αύτον, 1 Jn. i. 3, 6, (which fel-
lowship, ace. to John's teaching, consists in the fact that
Christians are partakers in common of the same mind as
God and Christ, and of the blessings arising therefrom).
By a use unknown to prof. auth. κοινωνία in the X. T.
denotes 3. a benefaction jointly contributed, a col-
lection, a contribution, as exhibiting an embodiment and
proof of fellowsliip (cf. Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. on Wisd.
viii. 18, p. 17G) : 2 Co. viii. 4 ; f"r τίνα, for the benefit of
one, 2 Co. ix. 13; ποκΊσθαι κοιν. (to make a contribu-
tion) fis τίνα, Ro. XV. 26 ; joined with (νποιία, Ileb. xiii.
16. [Cf. B. § 132, 8.]•
κοινωνικό;, -ή, -όν, (κοινωνία) ; 1. social, sociable,
ready and apt to form and maintain communion and fel-
lowship: Plat. defif.p.411 e.; Aristot. pol. 3, 13 [p. 12S3',
38; eth. Eudem. 8, 10 p. 1242*, 26 κοινωνικόν άνθρωπος
ζωον'] ; Polyb. 2, 44, 1 ; Antonin. 7, 52. 55 ; often in Plut. ;
πράξίΐς «coiv. actions having reference to human societ}',
Antonin. 4, 33 ; 5, 1. 2. inclined to make others
sharers in one's possessions, inclined to impart, free in giv-
ing, liberal, (Aristot. rhet. 2, 24, 2 [where, however, see
Cope]; Lclan. Tim. 56): 1 Tim. vi. 18.•
κοινωνοί, -η. -όν. (κοινοί), [as adj. Eur. Iph. Taur. 1173;
commonly as subst.J ; a. σ partner, associate, com-
rade, companion : 2 Co. viii. 23 ; (χ(ΐν τίνα κοινωνόν,
I'hilem. 1 7 ; (ΙμΊ κοινωνοί τινι, to be one's partner, Lk. v.
10 ; Tivot (gen. of pers.), to be the partner of one doing
something, Ileb. x. 33; τινόϊ t'v τώ αΊματι, to be one's
partner ia shedding the blood etc. Mt. xxiii. 30. b.
(I jitirlaler, sharer, in any thing; Λν. gen. of the thing:
των ηαθ ιματων, 2 Co. i. 7 ; t^s δόξης, 1 Pet. T. 1 ; ^fiac
φύσιως, 2 Pet. i. 4; τοϋ θυσιαστηρίου, of the altar (at
Jerusalem) on which sacrifices are offered, i. e. sharing
in tlie worship of the .lews, 1 Co. x. 18; των δαιμονίων,
partakers of (or with) demons, i. e. brought into fillow
ship with them, because they are the authors of the
heathen worship, ibid. 20; (t'v τω άφθάρτω κοινωνοί . . .
(V τοΙς φθαρτοις, joint partakers in that which is imper-
ishable ... in the blessings which perish, Barnab. ep.
19, 8; see κοινωνΐω, fin.).*
κοίτη, -ης, ή, (ΚΕΩ, ΚΕ1Ω, κ(ΐμαι, akin to κοιμάω) ; fl.
Ilom. Od. 19, 341 down; Sept. chiefly for 23ψΐρ, als6
for n^Dty etc. ; a. a place for lying down, restitig,
steeping in ; a bed, couch : (Ις την κοίτην (see f ϊμί, V. 2 a.)
ίίσίν, Lk. xi. 7. b. spec, the marriage-bed, as in the
Tragg. : τ. κοίτην pxaiveiv, of adultery (Joseph, antt. 2,
4, 5; Plut. de fluv. 8, 3), Ileb. xiii. 4. c. cohabita-
tion, whether lawful or unlawful (Lev. xv. 4 sq. 21-25,
etc.; Sap. iii. 13, 16; Eur. .Med. 152; Ale. 249): plur.
sexual intercourse (see π^ριπατίω, b. a.), Ro. xiii. 13 [A.V.
chambering'] ; by meton. of the cause for the effect we
have tlie peculiar expression κοίτην (χιιν ίκ τίνος, to have
conceived by a man, Ro. ix. 10 ; κοίτ?; σπίρματος. Lev. xv.
16 ; xxii. 4 ; xviii. 20, 23 [here κ. fls σπιρματισμόν] ; on
these phrases cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. ii. p. 291 sq.*
κοιτών, -ωνοί, ό, (fr. koi'tij ; cf. νυμφών etc.), a sleeping-
room, bed-chamber: 6 ίπ\ τού κοιτ. the officer who is over
the bed-chamber, the chamberlain. Acts xii. 20 (2 S. iv. 7 ;
Ex. viii. 3 ; 1 Esdr. iii. 3 ; the .-^tticists censure the word,
for which Attic writ, generally used δωμάτιον ; cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 252 sq.).*
κόκκινος, -jj, -ov, (fr. κόκκος a kernel, the grain or berry
of the ilex roccifera ; these berries are the clusters of
eggs of a female insect, tlie kermes [(cf. Eng. carmine,
crimson)], and when collected and pulverized produce a
red which was used in dyeing, Plin. h. n. 9,41, «5 ; 16,
8, 12; 24, 4), crimson, scarlet-colored: Mt. xxvii. 28;
Heb. ix. 19 ; Rev. xvii. 3. neut. as a subst. i. q. scarlet
cloth or clothing: Rev.xvii.4; xviii. 12, 16, (Gen. xxxviii.
28 ; Ex. XXV. 4 ; Lev. xiv. 4, 6 ; Josh. ii. 18 ; 2 8. i. 24 ;
2 Chr. ii. 7, 14; Plut. Fab. 15; φορύν κόκκινα, scarlet
robes, Epict. diss. 4, 11, 34 ; ev κοκκίνυις π(ριπατιϊν, 3, 22,
10). Cf. Win. RWB.s. v.Carmesin ; nosl.o/fm Schenkel
i. p. 501 sq. ; Kamphausen in Riehm p. 220; [B. D. s. v.
Colors, IL 3].•
KOKKOs, -ου, ό, [cf. Vanicek, Fremdworter etc. p. 26],
a grain: Mt. xiii. 31; xvii. 20; Mk. iv. 31; Lk. xiii.
1!) ; xvii. 6 ; Jn. xii. 24 ; 1 Co. xv. 37. [Horn. h. Cer^
Hdt., down.]*
KoXdj!» : pres. pass. ptcp. κο\αζόμ^νος ; 1 aor. mid. sub-
June• 8 pers. plur. κολάσωνται ; (κ6\ος lopped); in Grk
«Hi/va/ceuz
353
ΛόλτΓβ?
■wnc. 1. prop, to lop, prune, as trees, wings. 2.
U> chtcl; curb, restrain. 3. to chastise, correct, pun-
ish : so in the N. T. ; pass. 2 Pet. ii. 9, and Lclim. in 4 ;
mid. to cause to be punished (3 Mace. vii. 3) : Acts iv. 21 .*
κολακεία (Τ WH -κία [see I, ^]), -as, ή, (κο\ακ(ΰω),
flattery : 'Kayos icoXa(cei'as, flattering discourse, 1 Tli. ii. 5.
(I'lat., Dem., Tlieojihr., Joseph., Udian., al.) *
κόλαο-ις, -ίωί, ij, (κολάζω), correction, punishment, pen-
allij : Jit. x.w. 4C ; κολασιν ίχ^ι, brings with it or has con-
nected with it the thought of punishment, 1 Jn. iv. 18.
(Ezek. xiv. 3 sq., etc.; 2 Mace, iv, 38 ; 4 Mace. viii. 8;
Sap. xi. 14; xvi. 24, etc.; Plat., Aristot., Diod. 1, 77,
(9) ; 4, 44, (3) ; Ael. v. h. 7, 15 ; al.) *
|Syn. κ6\ασί$, τιμωρία: the noted definition of Aristotle
which distinguishes KOKaats from τιμωρία as that which (is
disciplinary and) has reference to him who suffers, ivhile the
latter (is penal and) has reference to the satisfaction of him
who inflicts, niav be found in his rhet. 1, 10, 17; cf. Cope,
Intr. to Arist. Ehet. p. 232. To much the same effect, Plato,
Protag. 324 a. sq., also deff. 416. But, as iu other cases,
usage (esp. the later) does not alwavs recognize the distinc-
tion ; see e. g. Philo de legat ad Gaiuui § 1 tin. ; frag, ex
Euseb. prep, evang. 8, 13 (Mang. ii. 641) ; de vita Movs. i. 16
fin. ; Pint, de sera num. vind. §§ 9, 11, etc. Plutarch (ibid.
§ 25 sub fin.) uses κολάζομαι of those undergoing the penalties
of the other world (cf. Just. JIart. 1 apol. 8 ; Clem. Kom.
2 Cor. 6, 7 ; Just. Mart. 1 apol. 43 ; 2 apol. 8 ; Test. xii. Patr.,
test. Reub. 5; test. Levi 4, etc.; Mart. Polyc. 2, 3; II, 2;
Ign. ad Rom. .5,3; Mart. Igu. vat. 5 etc.). See Trench, Sj-n.
§ vii.; McClellan, New Test. vol. i. marg. reff. on Mt. u. s. ;
LIurilett, Life and Death Eternal. Note G. ; C. F. Hudson,
Uebt and Grace, p. 188 sqq.; Schmidt ch. 167, 2 sq.]
ΚολασοΌεΰς, see Κολοσσοί it.
Κ.ολασ-(ΓαΙ. .see Κολοσσοί.
κολαφίζω ; 1 aor. €κολάφισα : pres. pass. κοΚαφίζομοί ;
(κολαφοί a fist, and this fr. κολάτττω to peck, strike) ; to
strike with the fist, i/ire one a blow tvith the fist (Terence,
cnlaphum infrinrjo, Quintil. col. duco"), [A. V. to buffet'] :
Tii/ii, Mt. xxvi. 67; Mk. xiv. 65; as a specific term for
a general, i. q. to maltreat, treat with violence and con-
tumely, 2 Co. xii. 7 ; pres. pass., 1 Co. iv. 1 1 ; 1 Pet. ii.
20. (Elsewhere only in eccl. writ.) The word is fully
discussed by Fischer, De vitiis lex.x. N. T. etc. p. 67
sqq. ; cf. Loll, ad Phryn. p. 1 75 sq.*
κολλάω, -ώ : Pass., pres. κολλώμαι ; 1 aor. (κοΧΚήθην ;
1 flit. κοΧΚηθήσομαι (Mt. xix. 5 LTTrAVII); {κ6\\α
gluten, glue) ; prop, to glue, glue to, glue together, cement,
fasten together; hence univ. to join or fasten firmly to-
gether; in the N. T. only the pass, is found, with reflex-
ive force, to join one's self to, cleave to; Sept. for p?'l :
ό κονιορτος 6 κοΧΚτιθ^Ίς ημίν, Lk. χ. 1 1 ; €Κθ\\ηθησαν αίιτηί
αϊ άμαρτίαι ηχρι τοΰ ovpauov. her sins were such a heap as
to reach even unto heaven (that is, came to the knowl-
edge of heaven). Rev. xviii. 5 GLTTr WII («ολλ. ή
ψνχη μου οπίσω σου, Ps. 1\ϋ. (Ixiii.) 9 , αϊ ayvotai ημών
νπ9ρην€γκαν (ως τον ουρανού, 1 Esdr. viii. 72 (74) ; ύβρις
τ( βίη τ( ουρανον ικ(ΐ, Horn. Od. ϊ:>, 329; 17, 565). of
persons, w. dat. of the thing, κοΧλήθηη τω αρμαη join
thyself to etc. Acts viii. 29 ; w. dat. of pers., to form an
intimate connection with, enter into the closest relations
23
with, unite one's self to, (so Barn. ep. c. 10, 3 sq. 5. 8 •,
also with μετά and gen. of pers., ibid. 10, 11 ; 19, 2. 6 ;
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 15, 1 ; 30, 3 ; 46, 2 [cf. Bp. Lghtft.'s
note], 4): τη γυναικί, Mt. .\i.\. 5 LTTrΛVII; tj πόρνη,
1 Co. vi. IG (Sir. .\ix. 2); τω κυρίω, 1 Co. vi. 17 (2 K.
xviii. 6 ; Sir. ii. 3) ; to join one's self to one as an asso-
ciate, keep company with. Acts v. 13 ; ix. 26 ; x. 28 ; to
follow one, be on his side. Acts xvii. 34 (2 S. xx. 2 ; 1
Maec. iii. 2; vi. 21) ; to join or attach one's self to a
master or patron, Lk. xv. 15 ; w. dat. of the thing, to
give one's self steadfastly to, labor for, [AV. cleave to]:
τώ άγαθω, Ro. xii. 9, ά-γαθω, κρίσίΐ biKaia, Barn. ep. 20, 2 ;
Tji ei'Koyia,so cleave to as to share, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
31, 1. (Aeschyl. Ag. 1566; Plat., Diod., Plut., al.)
[CoMP. : προσ-κολλάω.] •
κολλούριον (Τ Tr KoWvpiou, the more common form
in prof. auth. [cf. Lob. Pathol, proleg. p. 461 ; WH. A pp.
p. 152]), -ου, TO, (dimin. of κολΚΰρα, coarse bread of a
cylindrical shape, like that known in Westphalia as
Pumpernickel), Lat. collyrium [.\.V. eye-salve], a prepa-
ration shaped like a κολλύρα, composed of various mate-
rials and used as a remedy for tender eyelids (Hor.
sat. 1, .5, 30; Epict. diss. 2, 21, 20 ; 3, 21, 21 ; Cels. 6, 6,
7): Rev. iii. 18.•
κολλυβιστή;, -οϋ, 6, (fr. κόλΧυβο! i. q. a. a small coin,
cf. κολοβό! clipped; b. rate of exchange, premium), a
money-changer, banker: Mt. .\xi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Jn. ii.
15. Menand., Lys. in Poll. 7, 33, 170; ό /leV κ6\\υβοί
8όκιμον, το &c κοΧλυ9ιστης αδόκιμοι', Phryn. ed. Lob. p.
440. Cf. what was said under κ(ρματιστήί.'
κολλΰριον, see KoWoiptov.
κολοβόω, -ώ : 1 aor. «ολό,3ωσα ; Pass., 1 aor. c'koXo-
βώθην; 1 fut. κολο^ω6^σο/ιαί ; (fr. (coXo^nr lopped, mu-
tilated) ; to cut off (ταί χι'φαί. 2 S. iv. 1 2 ; tovs noSas,
Aristot. h. a. 1, 1 [p. 487, 24]; την piva, Diod. 1, 78);
to mutilate (Polyb. 1, 80, 13) ; hence in the N. T. of time,
(Vulg. brevio) to shorten, abridge, curtail : Mt. xxiv. 22 :
Mk. xiii. 20.•
Κολοσσαενΐ, and (so LTrWH) Ko\aaaaeus (see the
foil, word ; in Strabo and in Inscrr. Κολοσσι/ι/όί ), -i<ar, ό,
Vulg. Colossensis, Pliny Colossinus ; Colossian, a Colos-
sian ; in the heading [and the subscription (R Tr)] of
the Ep. to the Col.*
Κολοσσαί (R Τ WII, the classical form), and Κολασσαί
(R" L Tr, apparently the later popular form; [see WH.
Intr. § 423, and esp. Bp. Lghlfi. (jom. on Col. p. 16 sq.] ; cf.
W. p. 44 ; and on the plur. W. § 27, 3), -ων, al, Colossce,
anciently a large and flourishing city, but in Strabo's time
a πόλισμα [i. e. "small town" (Bp. Lghtft.)] of Phrygia
Major situated on the Lycus, not far from its junction
with the Jlaeander, and in the neighborhood of Laodicea
and Hierapolis (Hdt. 7, 30 ; Xeu. an. 1, 2, 6 ; Strab. 12,
8, 13 p. 576 ; Plin. h. n. 5, 41), together with which cities
it was destroyed by an earthquake [about] A. D. 66
([Euseb. chron. 01. 210]; Oros. 7, 7 [see esp. Bp. Lghtft.
u. s. p. 38]) : Col. i. 2. [See the full description, with
copious reff., by Bp. Lghtft. u. s. pp. 1-72.] *
κόλτΓΟ!, -ου. 6, (apparently akin to κοίλο; hollow, fyflk
κοΧυμβάω
354
κονιαοι
cf. Vanii'ek p. 179; L. and S. 8. v.]), Ilebr. ρ'Π; the
bosom (Lat. sinxts), i. e. as in the Grk. writ. fr. Horn,
down 1. the front of the body between the arms :
hence άνακ(1σθαι ίντω κόλπω twos, of the one who so re-
clines at table that his head covers the bosom as it were,
the chest, of the one next him [cf. B. D. s. v. Aleals], Jn.
xiii. 23. Hence the figurative expressions, iv rois κόλπου
(on the ])liir., which occurs as earlv as llom. II. 'J, 570,
cf. W. § 27, 3 ; [B. 24 (21)]) toC 'Μβρααμ flvai, to obtain
the seat next to Abraham, i. e. to be jjartaker of the same
blessedness as Abraham in paradise, Lk. xvi. 23 ; άποφί-
ρ€σθαι els τον κ. '\βρ- to be borne away to the enjoyment
of the same felicity with Abraham, ibid. 22 (οΰτω yap
naSovras — ace. to another reading Bavovras — Άβρααμ
(tai Ίσαακ καϊ Ίακωβ ίποΒίζονται tls TCiif KoKnovs αυτών, 4
Mace. xiii. 16; [see B. D. s. v. Abraham's bosom, and]
on the rabbin, phrase DHI^IX h'CI ΐρ'Π3, in Abraham's
bosom, to designate bliss in paradise, cf. Lighlfool, Ilor.
Hebr. et Talmud, p. 851 sqq.) ; 6 ων els τον κ- τον πατρόε,
lying (turned) unto the bosom of his father (God), i. e.
in the closest and most intimate relation to the Father,
Jn. i. 18 [W. 415 (387)] ; cf. Cic. ad div. 14, 4 iste vero
sit in sinu semper et complexu meo. 2. the bosom
oj a garment, i. e. the hollow formed by the upper fore-
part of a rather loose garment bound by a girdle, used
for keeping and carrying things [the fold or pocket ; cf.
B. D. s. V. Dress], (Ex. iv. 6 sq. ; Prov. vi. 27) ; so, figu-
ratively, μίτρον κάΚον Sidovai els τ. κ. Tivos, to repay one
liberally, Lk. vi. 38 (άττοδιδόι/ηι els τ. κ. Is. Ixv. 6 ; Jer.
xxxix. (xxxii.) 18). 3. a bay of the sea (cf. Ital.
golfo [Eng. gulf — which may be only the mod. repre-
sentatives of the Grk. word]) : Acts xxvii. 39.*
κολυμ,βάω, -ώ ; to dwe, to swim : Acts xxvii. 43. (Plat.
Prot. p. 350 a.; Lach. p. 193 c, and in later writ.)
[COMP. : (κ-κολυμβάω-Ί *
κολυμ,βήβρα, -as, ή. (κολυμβάω), a place for dicing, η swim-
ming-pool [A. V. simply pool] : Jn. ix. 7, and Rec. in 11 ;
a reservoir or pool used for bathing, Jn. v. 2, 4 [(ace. to
txt. of R L), 7]. (Plat. rep. 5 p. 453 d. ; Diod., Joseph.,
al. ; Sept., 2 K. xviii. 17; Neh. ii. 14; Nah. ii. 8.)*
κολώνια (R G Tr), κολωνία (L Τ WII KC [cf. Chandler
§ 95]), [Tdf. edd. 2, 7 -veia; see his note on Acts as be-
low, and cf. ft, i], -as, ή, (a Lat. word), a colony : in Acts
xvi. 12 the city of Philippi is so called, where Octavianus
had planted a Roman colony (cf. Dio Cass. 51,4; Digest.
50, tit. 15, 8). The exegetical difficulties of this pass,
are best removed, as Meyer shows, by connecting κοΧανΙα
closely with πρώτη ttoKis, the chief city, a [Roman] colony
(a colonial city) ; [but cf. Bp. Lghtfi. Com. on Philip,
p. 50 sq.].•
κομάω, -ώ ; (^κόμη) ; to let the hair grow, have long hair,
[cf. κόμη fin.] : 1 Co. xi. 14 sq. (In Grk. writ. fr. Horn.
down.) *
κόμη, -i>r, ή, [fr. Ilom. down], hair, head of hair : 1 Co.
XI. 15. [Ace. to Schmidt (21, 2) it differs fr. θρίξ (the
anatomical or physical term) by designating the hair as
an ornament (the notion of length being only sec-
ondary and suggested). Cf. B.D. s. v. Hair.] *
κομ(ΐω : 1 aor. ptcp. fem. κομίσασα ; Mid., pres. ptcp,
κομιζόμίνηι; 1 fut. (co/iiVo^ot (Eph. vi. 8 L Τ Tr W'll ;
Col. iii. 25 Ltxt. \VH) and Attic κομιοϋμαι (Col. iii. 25 Κ
GLmrg.TTr; [Eph. vi. 8 RG] ; 1 Pet. v. 4 ; cf. [WH.
App. p. 163 sq.]; B. 37 (33); [W. § 13, 1 c. ; Veitch
s. V.]), ptcp. κoμιuvμevos (2 Pet. ii. 13 [here Wll Trmrg.
άSικovμevoι^, see ά8ικ(ω, 2 b.]) ; 1 aor. ίκομισάμην [Β.
§ 135, 1] ; rare in Sept., but in Grk. writ. fr. Hoin. down
freq. in various senses ; 1. to care for, take care of,
provide for. 2. to take up or carry away in order
to care for and preserve. 3. univ. to carry away,
bear off. 4. to carry, hear, bring to : once so in the
N. T., viz. αλάβαστροι', Lk. vii. 37. Mid. (as often in
prof, auth.) to carry away for one's self; to carry off what
is one's own, to bring back; i. e. a. to receive, obtain :
την inayyeXlav, the promised blessing, Heb. x. 3G; xi. 39
[τάί inayy. L ; so Τ Tr \VH in xi. 13] ; σωτηρίαν yj /νχων,
1 Pet. i. !) ; ttjs δόζηs στίφανον, 1 Pet. v. 4 ; μισθον ahtKlas,
2 Pet. ii. 13 [see above], (τον Άξιον Tqs Svaae,-i(ias μισθύν,
2 Mace. viii. 33 ; δύξαν ϊσθλήν [al. καρτΓΐ'^ίται], Eur. Hij)p.
432; την άξίαν παρά θ(ΰ>ν. Plat. legg. 4 p. 718 a., and other
exx. elsewh.). b. to receive what was previously one'a
own, to get back, receive back, recover : το ipov συν τόκω,
Mt. XXV. 27; his son (of Abraham after he had con-
sented to sacrifice Isaac), Heb. xi. 19 (2 Mace. vii. 29;
τον ά8€\φ6ν άννβριστον, Philo de Josepho § 35 ; oi St παρ
ί\πίδas iauTois κ(κομισμίνοι, having received each oilier
back, been restored to each other, contrary to their expecta-
tions, of Abraham and Isaac after the sacrifice of the
latter had been prevented by God, Joseph, antt. 1, 13,
4; την άδ(\φήν, Eur. Iph. T. 1362; used of the recovery
of hostages, captives, etc., Thuc. 1, 113 ; Polyb. 1, 83, 8 ;
3, 51, 12 ; 3, 40, 10 ; the city and temple, 2 Mace. x. 1 ;
a citadel, a city, often in Polyb. ; την βaσ^\eίav, Arstph.
av. 549; την πατρώαν αρχήν, Jose]ih. antt. 13, 4, 1).
Since in the rewards and punishments of deeds, the
deeds themselves are as it were requited and so given
b.ack to their authors, the meaning is obvious when one
is said κoμίζeσθaι that which he has done, i. e. either the
reward or the punishment of the deed [W. C20 sq.
(576)]: 2Co. V. 10; Col. iii. 25; with τταρα κυρ/ου added,
Eph. vi. 8 ; ([άμαρτΐαν. Lev. xx. 1 7] ; (koittos, KaBias
eπoiησe. Kopie'iTai, Barn. ep. 4, 12). [CoMP. : eV, avy-
κομίζω-Ί '
κομψότΕρον, neut. compar. of the adj. κoμ^|fόs (fr. κομίω
to take care of, tend) neat, elegant, nice, fine; used ad-
verbially, more finely, belter : κομψότ. ίχω to be better, of
a convalescent, Jn. iv. 52 {όταν 6 larpos e'errri • κάμι/ΌΚ
txtis, Epict. diss. 3, 10, 13 ; so in Latin belle habere, Cic.
epp. ad div. 16, 15; [cf. Eng. 'he's doing nicely,' 'he 's
getting onfnely'; and] Germ, er befindet sich hilbsch;
es geht hilbsch mit ihm). The gloss, of Hesych. refers
to this pass. ; κομψότ(ρον • βeλτtώτepov, ί\αφρότ(ρον.*
Kovuio), -ώ : pf. pass. ptcp. KcKovtapevos] (fr. κονία,
which signifies not only ' dust ' but also ' lime ') ; to cover
with lime, plaster over, whitewash : τάφοι κeκovιaμivcι (the
Jews were accustomed to whitewash the entrances to
their sepulchres, as a warning against defilement by
κονιορτος
355
κορβαν
touching them [Β. D. s. τ. Burial, 1 fia. ; cf. Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, ii. 316 sqq.]), Mt. xxiii. 27; τοίχο!
KfKov. is applied to a hypocrite who conceals his malice
under an outward assumption of piety. Acts xxiii. 3.
(Dem., Aristot., Plut., al. ; for Ύύ, Deut. xxvii. 2, 4.) *
KoviopTOs, -oC, (5, (fr. κονία, and όρννμι to stir up) ; 1.
prop, raised dusi, flying dust, (Hdt., Plat., Polyb.,
al.). 2. univ. dust: Mt. x. 14; Lk. ix. 5 ; x. 11 ;
Acts xiii. 51 ; xxii. 23. (For pnX, E.x. ix. 9 ; Nah. i. 3 ;
for Λ3;•, Deut. ix. 21.)*
κοΊτάΙζω : 1 aor. ixcmaaa ; {κόποι) ; prop, to grow iceary
or tired ; hence to cease from violence, cease raging : ό
άνεμος (Hdt. 7, lf»l), Mt. xiv. 32; Mk. iv. 89; vi. 51.
(Gen. viii. 1 : .Jon. i. 1 1 scj. ; [cf. esp. Philo, somn. ii. 35].)*
KoireTOs, -ov, a, (fr. κόπτομαι, see κότττω), Sept. for
Π3ΡΡ ; Lat. planctus, i. e. lamentation with beating of the
breast as a sign of grief : κοπιτον TroieiaBai ίπί τινι. Acts
viii. 2 ; ini τίνα, Zech. xii. 10. (Eupolis in Bekker's an-
nott. ad Etym. Magn. p. 776; Dion. H. antt. 11, 31;
Plut. Fab. l'?.) *
κοττή, -ης, η, {κόπτω) ; 1. prop, several times in
Grk. writ, the act of cutting, a cut. 2. in bibl. Grk.
a cutting in pieces, slaughter : Heb. vii. 1 ; Gen. xiv. 17;
Deut. xxviii. 25 ; Josh. x. 20 ; Judith xv. 7.*
κοιηάω, -ώ, [3 pers. plur. κοπιοϋσιν (for -ωσιν), Mt. vi.
28 Tr ; cf. (ρωτάω, init.] ; 1 aor. (κοπίασα ; pf. κ(κοπΙακα
(2 pers. sing, κικοπίακα. Rev. ii. 3 LTTr WH, cf. [W.
§ 13, 2 c] ; B. 43 (3s) [and his trans, of ApoUon. Dysk. p.
54 n. ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123 ; WH. App. p. 16G ; Soph. Lex.
p. 39]) ; {κόποί, q. v.) ; 1. as in Arstph., Joseph.,
Plut., al., to grow weary, tired, exhausted, (with toil or
burdens or grief) : Mt. xi. 28 ; Rev. ii. 3 ; κίκοπιακίας ck
Τη! όδοιτΓορίαί. Jn. iv. 6 {inro ttjs όδοιπορίαί, Joseph, antt.
2,15,3; δραροΰιτακαΐ οΰ κοπιάσουσι, Is. xl. 31). 2.
in bibl. Grk. alone, to labor with wearisome effort, to toil
(Sept. for >'r, ); of bodily labor: absol., Mt. vi. 28;
Lk. V. 5; xii. 27 [not Tdf.]; Jn. iv. 38; Acts xx. 35;
I Co. iv. 12 ; Eph. iv. 28 ; 2 Tim. u. 6 [cf. W. 556 (517) ;
B. 390 (334)] ; W, upon a thing, Jn. iv. 38. of the toil-
some efforts of teachers in proclaiming and promot-
ing the kingdom of God and Christ : 1 Co. xv. 10 ; xvi.
16, (cf. Jn. iv. 38) ; foil, by ίυ w. dat. of the thing in
which one labors, iv λόγω κ- διδασκαλία, 1 Tim. v. 17; e»
νμΐν, among you, 1 Th. v. 12; ev κυρίω (see ev, I. 6 b. p.
211'" raid. [Lbr. the cl.]), Ro. xvi. 12; cU τίνα, for one,
for his benefit, Ro. xvi. 6 ; Gal. iv. 1 1 [cf. B. 242 (209) ;
W. 503 (4G9)] ; eh τοϋτο, lookins to this (viz. that piety
has the promise of life), I Tim. iv. 10; ds a. to which end,
Col. i. 29 ; eis Ktvov, in vain, Phil. ii. 16 {κ(νωί ίκοπίασα,
of the frustrated labor of the prophets. Is. xlix. 4).*
κόποΐ, -ου, ό, (κόπτω) ; 1. i• q- τά κόπταν, a beat-
ing. 2. i. q. KOTTfTor, a beating of the breast in grief,
sorrow, (Jer. Ii. 33 (xiv. 3)). 3. labor (so Sept. often
for Sn;•)' •• β• a• trouble (Aeschyl., Soi)h.) : κόπου!
παρίχαν rtvi, to cause one trouble, make work for him,
Mt. xxvi. 10; Mk. xiv. 6; Lk. xi. 7 ; Gal. vi. 17; κόπον
παρίχ. nvi, Lk. xviii. 5. b. intense labor united with
trouble, toil, (Eur., Arstph., al.) : univ., plur., 2 Co. vi. 5;
xi. 23 ; of manual labor, joined with μόχθο! [(see below)],
1 Th. ii. 9 ; iv κόπω κ. μόχθω, [toil and travail], 2 Co. xi.
27 (where L Τ Tr WII om.'eV) ; 2 Th. hi. 8 ; of the la-
borious eJui'ts of Christian virtue, 1 Co. xv. 58 ; Rev. ii.
2 ; plur. Rev. xiv. 13 ; 5 κόπο! της ά-γά-πης, the labor to
which love prompts, and which voluntarily assumes and
endures trouble and pains for the salvation of others, 1
Th. i. 3; Heb. vi. 10 Rec. ; of toil in teaching, Jn. iv.
38 (on which see eh, B. I. 3) ; 1 Th. iii. 5 ; of that which
such toil in teaching accomplishes, 1 Co. iii. 8 ; plur. 2
Co. X. 15 (cf. Sir. xiv. 15).*
[Sts. KOiros, μόχβοί,πόνο^: primarily and m general
classic usage, iroiOs gives prominence to the effort (work as
requiring force ) , xiiTostothe f atigue.^iixeos (chiefly poetic)
to the hardship. But in the N. T. πόνοί has passed over
(in three instances out of four) to the meaning pa/n (hence
it has no place in the 'new Jerusalem', Rev. xxi. 4) ; c£. the
deterioration in the case of the allied πονηροί, πΐνηι. Schmidt,
ch. 85; cf. Trench § cii. (who would trans ir. ' toil ', κ. 'wea-
riness ', μ. ' labor ').]
κοΊτρία [Chandler § 96], -a!, ή, i. q. ή κόπρο!, dung: Lk.
xiii. 8 Rec." ; xiv. 35 (34). (Job ii. 8 ; 1 S. ii. 8 ; Neh.
ii. 13 ; 1 Mace. ii. 62; [Strab., Poll., al.].) *
κόπριον, -ου, τό, i. q. ij κόπρο!, dung, manure : plur. Lk.
xiii. 8 [Rec." κοπρίαν']. (llevaclit. in Plut. mor. p. 669
[quaest. conviv. lib. iv. quaest. iv. § 3, 6] ; Strab. 16,
§ 26 p. 784 ; Epict. diss. 2, 4, 5 ; Plut. Pomp. c. 48 ; [Is.
v. 25; Jer. xxxii. 19 (xxv. 33); Sir. xxii. 2], and other
later writ.) *
κότΓτω : impf. 3 pers. plur. ΐκοτττον ; 1 aor. ptcp. κόψ-ΟΕ
(Mk. xi. 8 TTrtxt. AVH); Mid., impf. «οτττόμι;!' ; fut.
κόβομαι; 1 aor. iκo^|fάμηv■, [fr. Ilom. down]; to cul,
strtke, smite, (Sept. for Γ^2T^, n"i3, etc.) : τΐ από or ίκ
τινο!, to cut from, cul off, Mt. xxi. 8 ; Mk. xi. 8. Mid.
to beat one's breast for grief, Lat. plango [R. V. mourn} :
Mt. xi. 17; xxiv. 30, (Aeschyl. Pers. 683; Plat., al. ;
Sept. often so for 133) ; Tira, to mourn or bewail one
[cf. AV. § 32, 1 y.] : Lk. viii. 52 ; xxiii. 27. (Gen. xxiii. 2;
I S. XXV. l,etc.; Arstph. Lys. 396 : Anthol. 11, 135, 1) ;
iπi Tiva, Rev. i. 7 ; [xviii. 9 Τ Tr ΛΥΗ], (2 S. xi. 26) ; iπί
Tivi, Rev. xviii. 9 [R G L], cf. Zech. xii. 10. [Comp. : dva-,
άπο-, iK-, iv-, κατά-, προ-, προσκόπτω. Syn. cf. θρηνίω.] *
κόραξ, -ακοί, ό, « roren : Lk.xii. 24. [Fr. Hom. down.] *
κοράο-ιον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of κόρη), prop, a coUoq. word
used disparaginslv (like the Germ. Madel), a little girl
(in the epigr. attributed to Plato in Diog. Laert. 3, 33 ;
Lcian. as. 6) ; used by later ivrit. without disparagement
[W. 24 (23)], a girl, dam,^et, maiden : Mt. ix. 24 sq. ; xiv.
II ; Mk. V. 41 sq.; vi. 22, 28; (occasionally, as in Epic-
tet.' diss. 2, 1, 28; 3, 2, 8; 4, 10, 33; Sept. for n-^lJ ;
twice also for πη'τ., Joel iii. 3 (iv. 3) ; Zech. Λτϋ. 5 ; [Tob.
vi. 12: Judith xvi. 12; Esth. ii. 2]). The form and use
of the word are fully discussed in Lobeck ad Phryn. p.
73 sq . cf. Sturz, De dial, placed, etc. p. 42 sq.*
κορβάν Ι-βάν WH ; but see Tdf. Proleg. p. 102], in-
decl., and κορβανάς, ace. -άν [Β. 20 (18)], ό, (Hebr. ]2•}ρ^
i. e. an offering, Sept. every wh. Βωρον, a term which com-
prehends all kinds of sacrifices, the bloody as weO as the
bloodless); 1. κορβαν, a gift offered (or to be of-
Kfl
356
κόσμοι
fered) to God: Mk. vii. 11 (Joseph, antt. 4, 4, 4, of the
Nazirite?, oi κορβαν airovs ϋνιιμύσαιττα τω θ(ώ, δώμο» Se
τοντο σημαΐνΐΐ κατα'ΈΧ\ί}νιαν •γ\ώτταν\ cf. coiiti•. A[tion,
1, 22, 4; [BB.DD. s. v. Corbuii ; Ginsbunj in the liilile
Educator, i. 1 Jo]). 2. κορβανά:, -ά [see Β. u. s.],
Me sacred treasury : Mt. xxvii. ϋ [L nirg. Tr rarg. κορβαν'\
{τον Upov θησαυρόν, καλίίΓω if κορβαναί, Josejih. b. j. 2,
9,4).•
Kop< (in Joseph, antt. 4, 2, 2 sqq. with the Grk. ter-
minations -tou, η-, -ην), 6, (Ilebr. nip i. e. ice, hail), Ko-
Tnh ( Vulg. Core), a man who, with others, rebelled against
Moses (Num. xvi.) : Jmh; 11.*
Koptvw|jii; {κόροί satiet)•); to satiate, sale, salisf// : 1
aor. pass. ptcp. κορ^σθίντα, as in Grk. writ. fr. Horn,
down, w. gen. of the thing with wliich one is filled [B.
§ l.'i2, 19], τροφής, Acts xxvii. 38 ; trop. (pf.) κικορισμί-
yot (OTt, every wish is satisfied in the enjoyment of the
consummate Messianic blessedness, 1 Co. iv. 8.*
Κορίνθιο;, -ου, ό, α Corinthian, an inhnliilant of Corinth:
Acts xviii. 8 ; 2 Co. vi. U. [(Hdt., Xen., al.)]•
Κόρινθο?, -ου, ή, Corinth, the metropolis of Achaia
proper, situated on the isthmus of the Peloponnesus be-
twi-en the yEgean and Ionian Seas (hence called bimaris,
llor.car. 1, 7, 2; Ovid.metam. 5, 407), and having two
harbors, one of which called Cenchrcic (see Ktyxptai)
was the roadstead for ships from Asia, the other, called
Lechaeon or Lecha!um, for ships from Italy. It was utterly
destroyed by L. Mummius, the Roman consul, in the
Achaean war, B. c. 14i; ; but after the lapse of a century
it was rebuilt by Julius Caesar [b. c. 44]. It was emi-
nent in commerce and wealth, in literature and the arts,
especially the study of rhetoric and philosophy ; but it
was notorious also for luxury and moral corruption,
particularly the foul worship of Venus. Paul came I ο
the city in his second missionary journey, [c.] A. D. 53
or 54, and founded there a Christian church: Acts xviii.
1 ; xix. 1 ; 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co. i. 1, 23 ; 2 Tim. iv. 20. [BB.
DD. s. v.; Diet, of Geogr. s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 209
sqq.] *
Κορνήλιος, -oi), 0, a Lat. name, Cornelius, a Roman
centurion living at Caesarea, converted to Christianity
by Peter: Acts x. 1 sqq.*
Kopos, -ου, 6, (Ilebr. 13), α corns or cor [cf. Ezek. .\lv.
14], the largest Hebrew dry measure (i. e. for wheat,
meal, etc.); ace. to Josephus (antt. 15, 9, 2) equal to
ten Attic medimni, [but cf. B.D. s. v. AVeights and Meas-
ures sub fin. ; F. H. Cornier in the Bible Educator, iii.
10 sq.] : Lk. xvi. 7 [λ. V. measure]. (.Sept. [Lev. xxvii.
16; Num. .xi. 32]; 1 K. iv. 22 ; v. 11 ; 2 Chr. ii. 10;
[xxvii. 5].) •
κοσμί'ω, -<3; 3 pers. plur. impf. (κύσμουν; 1 aor. ('κό-
σμησα ; pf. pass, κικόσμημαι ; {κόσμος) ; 1. Ιο put
in order, arrange, make ready, prepare: τάςλαμπάΒας, put
in order [A. V. inm], Mt. xxv. 7 (δόρπ-οι-, Hom. Od. 7,
1 .! ; τράπιζαν, Xen. Cyr. 8, 2, 6 ; 6,11; Sept. Ezek. xxiii.
41 for γ>ί\. Sir. xxix. 26; προσφοράκ. Sir. 1. 14, and
other exx. elsewhere). 2. to ornament, adorn, (so
in Grk. writ. fr. Ilesiod down; Sept. several times for
m;;) ; prop. : υΐκο», in pass., Mt. xii. 44 ; Lk. xi. 2.'> ; τΑ
μνημύα, to decorate [A.V. i/arnlsh], .Mt. xxiii. 29 (τύφους,
Xen. mem. 2, 2, 13) ; τύ irpov λίθοις και άναθίμασι, in
pass. Lk. -xxi. 5 ; τους θ(μί\ίυυς του τίίχους λίθω Τίμίιρ,
Rev. xxi. 19; τίνά (with garments), νύμφην, pass. Rev.
xxi. 2 ; ίαυτάς tv τινι, 1 Tim. ii. 9 (on this pass, see κατα-
στολή, 2). nietaph. i. q. to embellish with honor, gain honor,
(Pind. nem. 6, 78 ; Thuc. 2, 42 ; κ(κοσμ. τή aptrg, Xen.
Cyr. 8, 1, 21) : ίαυτάς, foil, by a l)lcp. designating the act
by which the honor is gained, 1 Pet. iii. 5 ; την διδβ-
σκαλίαν iv πάσιν, in all things, Tit. ii. 10.*
κοσ-μικό;, -ή, -όν, (κόσμος), of or belonging Ιο the world
(Vulg. .<(iiru/aW.s) ; i.e. 1. relating to Ihe universe:
τουρανοΰ TouSf και τών κοσμικών πάντων, Aristot. phys. 2,
4 p. 1 96•, 25 ; opp. to ανθρώπινος, Lcian. paras. 1 1 ; κοσμχκη
δκίτα|ΐΓ, Plut. consul, ad ApoU. c. 34 p. 119e. 2.
earthly: το αγιον κοσμικόν, [its] earthly sanctuary [ll.V.
of this worlil~\, Ileb. ix. 1. 3. worldly, i. e. having
the character of this (present) corrupt age: a! κοσ/ιικαΐ
ΐπιθυμίαι. Tit. ii. 12 ; (so also in eccles. writ.).*
κόσμιο;, -ov, of three term, in class. Grk., cf. WH.
App. p. I.i7; W. § 11, 1; [B. 25 (22 sq.)], (κόσμος),
well-orranged, seemly, modest: 1 Ί im. ii. 9[\VIInirg.
-μίως] ; of a man living Λvitll decorum, a well-ordered
life, 1 Tim. iii. 2. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Lya.,
al.) [Cf. Trench § xcii.] *
f κο<Γμ(ω5, adv. {decently), fr. κόσμιος, q. v. : 1 Tim. ii.
9 \V1I mrg. (Arstph., Isocr., al.)*]
κοσ-μοκράτωρ, -ορός, ό, (κόσμος ami κρατάω), lord of the
ivorld, prince of lias agt : tlie devil an<l demons are called
in plur. oi κοσμοκράτορ^ς του σκότους του αιώνος [but crit.
edd. om. τ. αΐώχ.] τούτου [R. V. the world-rnlers of this
darkness], Eph. vi. 12; cf. 11 ; Jn. xii. 31 ; 2 Co. iv. 4;
see άρχων. (The word occurs in Orph. 8, 11 ; 11, 11 ;
ineccL writ, of Satan; in rabbin, writ. "lIDiplOtlp is used
both of human rulers and of the angel of death ; cf. liux-
lorf. Lex. talm. et rabb. p. 2006 [p. 996 ed. Fischer].)*
κόσ-μος, -ου, ό; 1. in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down,
an npl anil harmonious arrangement or constilulion, or-
der. 2. as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, ornament,
decoration, ailornment: (ν5ύσ(ως Ιματίων, 1 Pet. iii. 3
(Sir. vi. 30 ; xxi. 21 ; 2 Mace. ii. 2 : Sept. for NDY of
the arrangement of the stars, 'the heavenly hosts,' as
the ornament of the heavens, Gen. ii. 1 ; Deut. iv. 19;
xvii. 3 ; Is. xxiv. 21 ; xl. 26 ; besides occasionally for
"l;? ; twice for ΠΐΧ3η, Prov. xx. 29 ; Is. iii. 1 9). 3.
the world, i. e. the universe ((juem κόσμον Graeci nom-
ine ornamenti appellarunt, eum nos a perfecta absolu-
taque elegantia mun'/«7H, Plin. h. n. 2, 3; in which
sense Pvthagoras is said to have been the first to use the
word, Plut. de plac. philos. 2, 1, 1 p. 886 c; but ace. to
other accounts he used it of the heavens, Diog. L. 8, 48,
of which it is used several times also by other Grk. writ.
[see Mcnag. on Diog. Laert. 1. c. ; Benlley, Epp. of Phalar.
vol. i. 391 (Lond. 1836) ; M. Anton. 4, 27 and Gataker's
notes ; cf. L. and S. s. v. IV.]) : Acts xvii. 24 ; Ro. iv. 13
(where cf. Meyer, Tholuck, Philippi) ; 1 Co. iii. 22 ; viii.
4 ; Phil. ii. 1•') ; with a predominant notion of space, in
κόσμος
357
κόσμος
hyperbole, Jn. xxi. 25 ^Sap. vii. 17 ; ix. 3 ; 2 Mace. viii.
1 8 ; /rrifftv τ. κόσμον, Sap. xi. 1 8 ; 6 toC κόσμου κτίστηι,
2 Mace. vii. 23 ; 4 Mace. v. 25 (24) ; — a sense in which
it does not occur in tlie other O. Ϊ. boolcs, although there
is something akin to it in Prov. xvii. 6, on whicli see 8
ΒβΙοΛτ) ; in the phrases irp6 τοϋ τον κόσμον civoi, •Ιη. x\ii.
5 ; πττό καταβολής κόσμον [Mt. xiii. 35 Κ (τ ; χχν. 34 ; Lk.
xi. 50 ; Heb. iv. 3 ; ix. 26 ; Uev. xiii. 8 ; xvii. 8] and νμο
κατ. κόσμου [Jn. xvii. 24 ; Eph. i. 4; 1 Pet. i. 20j, (on
which see καταβο\ή, 2) ; άττΌ κτίσιαί κόσμου, Ro. i. 20 ;
απ άρχης κ. Mt. xxiv. 21 ; (on the om. of the art. cf. W.
p. 123 (117); B. § 124, 8 b. ; [cf EUicott on Gal. vi.
14]). 4. the circle of the earlh, the earth, (very rarely
so in Grk. writ, until after the age of the Ptolemies ; so
in Boeckh, Corp. inscrr. i. pp. 413 and 643, nos. 334 and
1306): Mk.xvi.l5; [Jn. xii. 25] ; iTim.vi. 7; βασιλεία
τον κόσμον. Rev. xi. 15 ; βασι\(ΐαι (plur.) τ. κόσμον, .Mt. iv.
8 (for wiiich I^k. iv, 5 της οίκονμίνης^ ; το φως τον κόσμου
τούτου, of the sun, Jn. .xi. 9 ; fv άλω τω κ., projjerly, ΛΙΐ.
xxvi. 13 ; hyperbolically, i. q. far and wide, in Λvidely sep-
arated places, Ro. i. 8; [so eV παντι τώ κόσμω. Col. i. 6] ;
ό roT-f κόσμος, 2 Pet. iii. 6 ; the earth witli its inhabitants:
ζην €v κύι.-μα>, opp. to tlie dead. Col. ii. 20 (λτ/στης ην κα\
κλίπτης iv τω κόσμω, \. e. among those living on eartli,
Ev. Nicod. 26). Hy a usage foreign to prof. anth. 5.
the inhabitants of the icurlil : θίατρυν ΐγινήθημιν τω κόσμω
και oyyEXots κ. άνθρώποις, 1 Co. iv. 9 [W. 127 (121)]; par-
ticularly the inhabitants of the earth, men, the human race
(first so in Sap. [e. g. x. 1]) : Mt. xiii. 38 ; xviii. 7 ; Mk.
xiy.9; Jn. i. 10, 29, [36 L in br.]; iii.l6sq.; vi. 33, 51 ;
viii. 26; xii.47; .xiii. 1 ; .xiv. 31 ; xvi. 28; xvii. 6, 21, 23;
Ro. iii. 6, 19; 1 Co. i. 27 sq. [cf. W. 189 (178)]; iv. 13; v.
10; xiv. 10; 2 Co. v. Ill; Jas. ii. 5 [cf. W. u. s.]; 1 Jn. ii. 2
[cf. W. 577 (536)]; άρχα'ιυς κόσμος, of the antediluvians,
2 Pet. ii. 5 ; γιννάσθΜ fif τ. κ• Jn. xvi. 21 ; ίρχ(σθαι f if τον
κόσμον (Jn. ix. 39) ami (!ς τ. κ- τοντον, to make its appear-
ance or come into existence among men, spoken of the
light which in Christ shone upon men, Jn. i. 9 ; iii. 19, cf.
xii. 46 ; of the Messiah, Jn. vi. 14 ; xi. 27 ; of Jesus as the
Messiah, Jn. ix. 39 ; xvi. 28 ; xviii. 37 ; 1 Tim. i. 15 ; also
(Ισίρχίσθαι «ί τ. κ. Ileb. χ. 5; of false teachers, 2 Jn.
7 (yet here L Τ Tr WIl ίξίρχ- fU τ. κ. ; [so all texts in
1 Jn. iv. 1]); to invade, of evils coming into existence
among men and beginning to exert their power: of sin
and death, Ro. v. 1 2 (of death. Sap. ii. 24 ; Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 3, 4 ; of idolatry. Sap. xiv. 14). άποστΐ\\(ΐν τινά
«Γ τ. <e., Jn. iii. 1 7 ; χ. 36; xvii. 18; 1 Jn. iv. 9; φωςτ.κ.,
Mt. V. 14 ; Jn. viii. 1 2 ; ix. 5 ; σωτηρ τ. κ-, Jn. iv. 42 ; 1
Jn. iv. 14, (σωτηρία τον κ. .Sap. vi. 26 (25) ; ίλπις τ. κ.
Sap. xiv. 6 ; πρωτόπΧαστος πατήρ τον κ-, of Adam, Sap.
χ. 1) ; στοιχύα τον κ. (see στοιχιΐην, 3 and 4) ; fv τω κόσμω,
among men, Jn. xvi. 33 ; xvii. 13 ; Eph. ii. 1 2 ; ίν κόσμω
(see W. 1 23 (Π 7)), 1 Tim. iii. 1 6 ; «rat eV τω κ., to dwell
among men, .in. i. 10; ix. 5; xvii. 11, 12 R(i; 1 Jn.
iv. 3 ; fivai iv κόσμω, to be present, Ro. v. 1 3 ; ίξί\β(Ίν
ίκ τοϋ κόσμου, to withdraw from human society and seek
an abode outside of it, 1 Co. v. 10; άναστρίήχσθαι iv τω
«., to behave one's self, 2 Co. i. 12; likewise «wii iv τώ
κ. τούτα. I Jn. iv. 1 7. used spec, of the Gentiles collec-
tively, Ro. xi. 12 (where it alternates with τα (θνη), 15;
[the two in combination : τα ίθνη τοΰ κόσμου, Lk. xii.
30]. hyperbolically or loosely i. q. the majority of men
in a place, the multitude or mass (as we say the public) :
Jn. vii. 4 ; xii. 19 [here Trmrg. adds όλοΓ in br.] ; xiv.
19, 22; xviii. 20. i. q. the entire number, άσ(βΰ>ν, 2 Pet.
ii. 5. 6. tlte ungodly multitude; the u-hole mass of
men alienated from God, and therefore hostile to the cause
of Christ [cf. W. 26]: Jn. vii. 7; .xiv. [17], 27; xv. 18
eq. ; xvi. S, 20, 33 ; xvii. 9, 14 sq. 25 ; 1 Co. i. 21 ; vi. 2;
xi. 32 ; 2 Co. vii. 10 ; Jas. i. 27 ; 1 Pet. v. 9 ; 2 Pet. i. 4;
ii. 20; 1 Jn. iii. 1, 13; iv. 5; v. 19; of the aggregate of
ungodly and Avicked men in O. T. times, Heb. xi. 38 ; in
Noah's time, ibid. 7 ; with οίτοΓ added, Eph. ii. 2 (on
which see αιών, 3 ) ; tivai ix τοΟ κ. and ix τοϋ κ• τούτον
(see (Ιμί, V. 3 d.), Jn. viii. 23; xv. 19; xvii. 14, 16;
1 .In. iv. i> ; \aXf~iv ix τοϋ κόσμον, to speak in accordance
with the world's character and mode of thinking, 1 Jn.
iv. 5; ό άρχων τον κ. τούτου, i. e. the devil, .Τη. xii. 31 ;
xiv. 30; xvi. 11 ; 6 iv τω χ. he that is operative in the
world (also of the devil), 1 Jn. iv. 4 ; το πν^ϊιμα τοΟ κ.
1 Co. ii. 12; ή σοφία τοΰ κ. τούτον, ibid. i. 20 [here
G L ΤΤγ λν^ΙΊ 0Π1. τοΰτ.]; iii. 19. [τα στοιχΰα τοΰ κό-
σμου, Gal. iv. 3 ; Col. ii. 8, 20, (see 5 above, and στοι-
Xfiov, 3 and 4).] 7. worldly affairs ; the aijijregate
of tilings earthly; the whole circle of earthly goods, endow-
ments, riches, advantages, pleasures, etc., which, although
hollow and frail and fleeting, stir desire, seduce from God
and are obstacles to the cause of Christ: Gal. vi. 14; 1
Jn. ii. 16 sq. ; iii. 17; €ivai ix τον κ., to be of earthly
origin and nature, Jn. xviii. 36; somewhat differently
in 1 Jn. ii. 16 (on ivhich see (Ιμί, V. 3 d.) ; Kfphalvfiv top
K- όλον, Mt. xvi. 26; Jlk. viii. 36 ; Lk. ix. 25; o! χρώμ(νοι
τω κ, τούτω [crit. txt. τον κόσμον. see χμωιμαι, 2], 1 Co.
vii. 31*; μ^ριμναν τα τον κ. 33 S(j. ; φιΚος and φιλία τον κ.
.las. iv. 4 ; αγαπάν τον κ. 1 Jn. ii. 15 ; νικάν τον κ., the in-
centives to sin proceeding from the world, 1 .In. v. 4 S(|. ;
the obstacles to God's cause, Jn. xvi. 33 ; [cf. ΛΛ'τω χάρις
χ. παρ(\θίτω 6 κόσμος οίτοί. Teaching of the Twelve
Apostles, c. 10]. 8. any aggregate or general col-
lection of particulars of any sort [cf. Eng. "a Avorld of
curses "(Shakspere), etc.]: ό κόσμος της αδικίας, the sum
of all iniquities, .Las. iii. 6 ; τοΰ πιστού όλος ό κόσμος των
χρημάτων, τοϋ δί απίστου oiSf όβολός (a statement due
to the Alex, translator), Prov. xvii. 6. Among the X. 'Γ.
writers no one uses κόσμος oftener than John ; it oceur.s
in Mark three times, in Luke's writings four times, and
in the Apocalypse three times. Cf. Kreiss, Sur le .■■ens
du mot κόσμος dans le N. T. (Strasb. 1837) ; DUaterdicrk
on 1 .Tn. ii. 15, pp. 247-259; Zezschwitz, Profangriicitiit
u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 21 sqq. ; Diestel in Herzog xvii.
p. 676 sq(|.; [Trench, Syn. § lix.]; on .Tohn's use of the
word cf. Reuss, Histoire de la th^ologie chretienne au
siecle apostolique, ii. p. 463 sqq. [i.e. livre vii. eh. viii.];
cf. his Johanneische Theologie, in the Beitrage zu den
theol. Wissenschaften, Fasc. i. p. 29 sqq.; [Westcott on
Jn. i. 10, '.\dditional Note'].*
Κούαρτος
358
κραταιοΰ»
Kotiapros, -ου, 4, (a Lat. name), Quartus, an unknown
Christian: Ro. xvi. 23.•
Ko5(ii, Tr txt. κοϊμ, Τ λνΐΐ κονμ, (the Hebr. 'Oip [impv.
fera. ; the other (niasc.) form niiist be regarded as hav-
ing become an inti'rjeetioii]), iirise: Mk. v. 41.'
κο«(Γτω8ία, -at [B. 17 (Ui)J, ή, (a Lat. word), (/iinrrf:
used of the Roman soldiers guarding the sepulchre of
Christ, Mt. xxvii. 65 sq. ; xxviii. 11. (Ev. Kic. c. 13.) *
κο«φ[ζω : imi)f. 3 pers. plur. ΐκοι'φιζον ; {κοΰφος light) ;
1. intrans. Ό be light (lies., Eur., Uio C). 2. fr.
Ilippocr. down generally trans, lo lighten : a ship, by
tluDwing the cargo overboard, Acts xxvii. 38. (Sept.
Jonah i. .5, and often in Polyb.) *
κόφινοβ, -ου, ό, α hask'et, wicker basket, [cf. B. D. s. v.
Basket]: Mt. xiv. 20; [xvi. H] ; Mk. vi. 43; [viii. 1!)];
Lk.ix.17; .In.vi.l3. (.Tiidg. vi. I'J; Ps. Lxx.x. (Ixxxi.)
7 ; Arstph. av. 1310; Xon. mem. 3, 8, 6 ; al.) *
κράββατοΐ (L Τ Tr AVI I κμά3αττοί; cod. Sin. κράβακτοί
[exc. in Acts v. 15; cf. KC. Nov. Test, ad fid. cod. Vat.
praef. p. Ixxxi. sq. ; Til/. Proleg. p. 80]), -ου, ό, (Lat.
grabatu.-<), a pallet, ramp bed, (a rather mean bed, hold-
ing only one person, called by the Greeks σκίμνονί,
σκιμπό^ιον) : Mk. ii. 4, 9, 11 sq. ; vi. 55; Jn. v. 8-Γ2 [in
12 Τ WII om. Tr br. the cl] ; Acts v. 15 ; ix. 33. Cf.
Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. l"5sq. ; Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 62; Volkmar, Marcus u. d. Synopse u.s.w. p. 131;
IMcClellan, New Testament etc. p. 106 ; W. 25].*
κρά^ω (with a long ; hence ptcp. κράζον. Gal. iv. 6 L Τ
TrWH [(where RG^pafw); cf. B.61 (53)]) ; impi. ίκρα-
ζοψ; fut. κ(κράξομαι (Lk. .xix. 40 RGLTrmrg.), and
κράξω (ibid. Τ WII Trtxt.), the former being more com.
in Grk. writ, and used by the Sept. (cf. Mic. iii. 4 ; .lob
xxxv. 1 2, etc. [but άνα-κράξομ,αι, Joel iii. 16 Alex. ; cf. W.
279 (262); esp. Β as below]); 1 aor. ίκραξα (once viz.
Acts xxiv. 21 TTrWII ϊκίκραξα, a reduplicated form
freq. in Sept. [e. g. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 6 ; Judg. iii. 15, 1
Mace. xi. 49, etc. ; see Λ^eitch s. v.] ; more com. in native
Grk. writ, is 2 aor. ίκραγονί" the simple expayov seems
not to occur in good Attic " (\^eitch s. v.)]) ; pf. κίκραγα,
with pres. force [W. 274 (258)] (Jn. i. 15); cf. Bllm.
Ausf. Si)r. ii. p. 223 ; B. 61 (53) ; Kiihner i. p. 851 ; [esp.
\'eitch s. v.] ; Sept. for p;v^ ρ;•ν, Nip, y^U ; [fr. Aes-
chyl. down] ; 1. jirop. [onoraatopoetic] tn crnal•
(Germ, krachzen), of the cry of the raven (Theophr.) ;
hence univ. In erg nut, erg alnu/l, rnciferatf : particularlv
of inarticulate cries, Mk. v. 5 ; ix. 26 ; xv. 39 [here Τ
WH om. Tr br. κρ.] ; Lk. ix. 39 ; Rev. xii. 2 ; άπο τον
φόβου, Mt. xiv. 26 ; with φωνή peyoKri added. Mt. xxvii.
50; Mk. i. 26 [here TTrWH φωκ^σαι/] ; Acts vii. 57;
Rev. X. 3 ; οπισθίν nvos, to cry after one, follow him up
with outcries, Mt. xv. 23 ; like Π;;; and ρ;•Υ (Gen. iv.
10; xviii. 20), i. q. tn erg or prng for vengeance, Jas. v.
4. 2. tocrgi.e. call nut alnuiJ,.<ipeal• with a loufl voice,
[Germ, laul rufen'] : τι. Acts xix. 32; xxiv. 21 ; foil, by
direct discourse, Mk. x. 48 ; xv. 14 ; Lk. xviii. 39 ; Jn.
xii. 13 R G ; Acts xix. 34 ; xxi. 28, 36 ; xxiii. 6 ; with
the addition φων^ μεγάλη foil, by direct disc., Mk. v. 7;
Acts vii. GO ; tV φωνή μ(γ. Rev. xiv. 15 ; κράζω λίγων, to
cry out saying, etc., Mt. viii. 29 ; xiv. 30 ; [xv. 22 (where
RGiKpai-yaffii/)] ; xx. 30sq.; .xxi. 9 ; xxvii. 23; Mk. iii.
11; xi. 9 [TTrWHora. Lbr. Xiy.]; Jn. .\ix. 12 [here
LTTr Wllt'icpauy.] ; Acts xvi. 17; xix. 28; Rev. xviii.
18 ; κράζω φωνΐ/ ptyaXg λίγων, Rev. vi. 10 ; vii. 10; xix.
17 [here Τ Wli br. ;uid ev]; κμάξα! «Xfyf, Mk. ix. 24;
κράζ(ΐν K. Xeyfii», Mt. ix. 27; xxi. 15; Mk. x. 47; Lk. iv.
41 R(r Trtxt. WII; Acts xiv. 14; of those who utter or
teach a tiling publicly and solemnly, Ro. ix. 27; KtKpayt
and ίκραξ( λίγων, foil, by direct disc, Jn. i. 15 ; vii. 37 ;
ίκραξ( διδάσκων κ. λίγων, Jn. vii. 28; ίκραζί κ• €ΐπ(ν, Jn.
xii. 41 ; of those who offer earnest, importunate, prayers
to God, foil, by direct disc, Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6, (often
so in O. T., as Job xxxv. 12; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 7;
commonly with wpos κύριον, προ! τον 6fov added, Judg.
X. 12 [Alex.]; Ps. iii. 5; cvi. (cvii.) 13, etc.). nvi, to
erg or call tn : Rev. vii. 2 ; xiv. 15, (cf. Ps. cxviii. (cxix.)
145; (Tepos np6s erepov. Is. vi. 3). [CoMP. : άνα-κράζω.
Syn. see βοάω, fin.] *
κραΐΊτάλη [WH κρίπάλη, see their App. p. 151], -ijs, }/,
(fr. ΚΡΑΣ the head, and πάλλω to toss about; so ex-
plained by (ialen and Clem. Alex. Paedag. 2, 2, 26 and
Phryn. in Bekker, Anecd. p. 45, 13 [cf. Vanicek p. 148]),
Lat. crapula (i. e. the giddiness and headache caused by
drinking wine to excess) : Lk. xxi. 34 [A. V. surfeiting ;
cf. Trench § Ixi.]. (Arstph. Acharn. 277; Alciphr. 3,
24 ; Plut. mor. p. 127 f. [de sanitate 11]; Lcian., Hdian.
2, 5, 1.)*
KpavCov, -ου, τό, (dimin. of the noun κράνον [i. e. κάρα ',
Curtius § 38]), a skull (A''ulg. calvaria) : Mt. xxvii. 33 ;
Mk. XV. 22; Lk. xxiii. 33; Jn. xix. 17; see Γολγοθά.
(Judg. ix. 53 ; 2 K. ix. 35 ; Hom. H. 8, 84; Pind., Eur.,
Plat., Lcian., Ildian.)'
KpdaircSov, -ου, το, in class. Grk. the extremity or promi-
nent part of a thing, edge, skirt, margin ; the fringe of a
garment ; in the N. T. for Hebr. Π'Ϊ'Χ, i. e. a little ap-
pendage hanging down from the edge of the mantle or
cloak, made of twisted wool ; a tassel, tufl : Mt. ix. 20 ;
xiv. 36 ; xxiii. 5 ; Mk. vi. 56 ; Lk. viii. 44. The Jews
had such appendages attached to their mantles to remind
them of the law, ace to Num. xv. 37 sq. Cf. Win. RWB.
s. V. Sawn; [B. D. s. v. Hem of Garment; Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, i. 624 ; esp. Ginsburg in Alex.'s Kitto
s. V. Fringes].•
κραταιός, -β, -όν, (κράτος), Sept. mostly for ρίΠ, mighlg:
η κρ. xeip τοϋ θ(ον, i. e. the power of God, 1 Pet. v. 6 ;
τον κυρίου. Bar. ii. 11 ; 1 Esdr. viii. 46 (4 7), 60 (61), and
often in Sept. (In earlier Grk. only poetic [Horn., al]
for the more com. κρατερός ; but later, used in prose also
[Plut., al.].) •
κραταιόω, -ώ : Pass., pres. impv. 2 pers. plur. κραταιονσθί
impf. 3 pers. sing, ίκραταιοϋτο; 1 aor. inf. κραταιωθήναι ;
(κράτο!) ; only bibl. and eccles., for the classic κρατϋνω ;
Sept. mostly for ptn ; in pass, several times for yaK ; to
strengthen, make sirnng, (Vulg. conforto [and in Eph.
iii. 16 conroboro']') ; Pass, to be made strong, to increase
in strength, to grow strong : pass, with dat. of respect,
■πνήματι, Lk. i. 80 ; ii. 40 [here G L Τ Tr WH om. irvev-
κρατεω
359
κρεμ,αννυμ,ι
ματι\ ; δύναμη, Eph. iii. 16, (cf. ισχίαν τοΐι σύμασι, Xen.
mem. 2, 7, 7) ; άνδρίζ(σθ(, κραταιονσθ(, Ί- e. show your-
selves brave [Α. V. be strong^, 1 Co. xvi. 13 (άν&ρίζ(σθ€
κ. κραταιοίσθω ή καρδία ίμων, Ps. χχχ. (xxxi.j 20; κρα-
ταιονσθ€ κ. yiveade fis άνδρας, 1 S. iv. 9 ; άνδρίζου κ- κρα-
ταιωθωμίν, 2 S. Χ. 12).*
κρατί'ω ; impf. 2 pers. plur. ϊκρατΛτί, Mk. xiv. 49 Tr
mrg. WHmrg.; iut. κρατήσω; 1 aor. (κράτησα; pf. inf .
κ(κρατηκίναι ; Pass., pres. κρατούμαι ; impf. ίκρατονμην ;
pf. 3 pers. plur. κίκράτηνταχ ; {κράτος [q. v.]) ; Sept.
chiefly for ptn, also for tns (to seize), etc. ; fr. Horn.
ιΙοΛνη ; 1. to have power, be powerful ; to be chief,
be master of, to rule : absol. for "^^-^, Esth. i. 1 ; 1 Esdr.
iv. 38 ; ό κρατών. Sap. xiv. 19; o'l κρατοϋνης, 2 ilacc. iv.
50 ; Tti/di, to be ruler of one, Prov. xvi. 32 ; xvii. 2, (for
^ΊΌΟ) ; Sap. iii. 8 ; never so in the N. T. 2. lo get
possession of; i. e. a. to become master of, to obtain :
της προβίσ^ας. Acts xxvii. 13 [(Diod. Sic. 16, 20; al.) cf.
B. 161 (140) ; on the tense, W. 334 (313)]. b. to take
hold of: της χιφός riror [cf. W. § 30, 8 d. ; B. u. s.], Mt.
ix. 25; Mk. i. 31; v. 41; ix. 27LTTrWH; Lk. viii.
54 ; τικά της χαράς, to take one by the hand, Mk. ix. 27
R G, cf. Matthiae § 331 ; τινά, to hold one fast in order
not to be sent away. Acts iii. 1 1, cf. Meyer ad loc. ; roit
πόδας Ttvoi, to embrace one's knees, Mt. xxviii. 9 ; trop.
Tuv λόγον, to lay hold of mentally [cf. our ' catch at ' ; but
al. refer this ex. to 3 b. below], Mk. ix. 10 (join πρ6ς
(αυτούς with σνζητοϋντ(ς). C. to lay hold of, take,
seize : τινά, to lay hands on one in order to get him into
one's power, Mt. xiv. 3; xviii. 28; xxi. 46; xxii. 6; xxvi.
4, 48, 50, 55, 57 ; Mk. iii. 21 ; vi. 17 ; xii. 12 ; xiv. 1, 44,
46, 49, 51; Acts xxiv. 6; Rev. xx. 2, (2 S. vi. 6; Ps.
cxxxvi. (c.xxxvii.) 9); τ/, Mt. xii. 11. 3. to hold;
i. e. a. to hold in the hand : τ\ iv Tg δίξιά. Rev. ii. 1
(t^ άριστ(ρά τον Άρτον, Plut. mor. p. 99 d.). b. to
hold fast, i. e. trop. not to discard or let go; to keep care-
fully and faithfully: b €χ(Τ(, €χ(ΐς. Rev. ii. 25; iii. 11; ro
όνομα μου, Rev. ii. 13 ; one's authority, την κ(φά\ήν, 1. e.
(Kelvov 5ς Εστικ ή κ(φά\ή, Christ, Col. ii. 19; την παρά-
δοσιν, Mk. vii. 3 sq. 8; τάί παραδάσίΐς, 2 Th. ii. 15; την
διδαχήν. Rev. ii. 14 sq. ; also with a gen. of the thing, of
blessings in which different individuals are participants :
της ομολογίας, Heb. iv. 14; t^s (λπίδος, Heb. vi. 18 [aL
refer this ex. to 2 above], (cf. 2 S. iii. 6). c. to con-
tinue to hold, to retain: of death continuing to hold one,
pass. Acts ii. 24; τάς αμαρτίας (opp. to άφίημι), to re-
tain sins, i. e. not to remit, Jn. xx. 23 ; to hold in check,
restrain: foil, by Ίνα μή. Rev. vii. 1 ; by τοϋ μή [W. 325
(305); Β. § 140, 16 /3.], Lk. xxiv. 16. On the constr.
of this verb with gen. and ace. cf. Matthiae § 359 sq. ;
W. § 30, 8 d.; B. 161 (140).*
κράτιστοϊ, -η, -ov, superl. of the adj. κρατΰς, (κράτος),
[fr. (Horn.) Find, down], mightiest, strongest, noblest, most
illustrious, best, most excellent : voc. κράτιστί used in ad-
dressing men of conspicuous rank or office. Acts xxiii.
26 ; xxiv. 3 ; xxvi. 25, (Otto, De ep. ad Diognetum etc.
Jena 1845, p. 79 sqq., and in his Epist. ad Diognet.
Leips. ed. p. 53 sq., has brought together exx. fr. later
writ.). Perhaps also it served simply to express friend-
ship in Lk. i. 3 (as in Theophr. char. 5 ; Dion. Hal. de
oratt. 1 ; Joseph, antt. 4, 6, 8), because in Acts i. 1 it is
omitted in addressing the same person. Cf. Grimm in
Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 50 sq.*
κράτοΐ, -ios (-ους), [fr. a root meaning 'to perfect,
complete' (Curtius § 72); fr. Horn, down], τ6, Hebr.
Ii' ; 1. force, strength. 2. power, might : το
κράτος της ισχύος αϋτοϋ, the might of his strength, Eph.
i. 19; vi. 10; της δόξης αϋτοϋ. Col. i. 11; κατά κράτος,
mightily, with great power, ηΰξανι, Acts xix. 20; meton.:
a mighty deed, a work of power : noifiv κρ. (cf. ttou'iv δύνα-
μης), Lk. i. 51. 3. dominion: in the doxologies,
1 Tim. vi. 16 ; 1 Pet. iv. 11 ; v. 11 ; Jude 25 ; Rev. i. 6 ;
V. 13 ; τινός (gen. of obj.), Heb. ii. 14 (τ6 ϋ^ρσίων κράτος
(χοντα, Hdt. 3, 69). [Syn. see δϋναμις, fin.] '
κρανγάζω ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ΐκραΰγαζον ; fut. κραυ-
γάσω; 1 aor. (κραύγασα; (κραυγή) ; to cry out, cry aloud,
(i. q. κράζω [see βοάω, fin., and below]) : Mt. xii. 19;
Acts xxii. 23 ; to shout, foil, by direct disc, Jn. xix. 15
and L Τ Tr WH in xii. 13 ; with λέγων added, to cry out
in these words, foil, by direct disc. : Jn. xviii. 40; xix. 6
(where Tom. λ(γοντ(ς), and LTTrWH also in 12;
κρανγάζίΐν κ. Xiydv, Lk. iv. 41 L Τ Tr mrg. ; κρανγάζ.
φωνί] μ(γάλ7], foil, by direct disc, Jn. xi. 43. nvl, to cry
out to, call to, one (see κράζω, 2 and fin.), foil, by direct disc.
Mt. XV. 22 R G. The word is rare in Grk. writ. : Dem.
p. 1258, 26 ; of the shouts in the theatres, Epict. diss. 3,
4,4; of a raven, ib. 3, 1, 37; Galen, al. ; first in a poetic
fragm. in Plat. rep. 10 p. 607 b. ; once in the O. T. viz.
2 Esdr. iii. 13. Cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 337.*
κρανγή, -^f, ή, [cf. κράζω ; on its class, use see Schmidt,
Sya. i. ch. 3 § 4 ; fr. Eur. down], Sept. for nDJjr, nPi'S,
n>'liy, Π>'ί"ΐΓ\, etc.; a crying, outcry, clamor: Mt. xxv.
6;' Lk. 1.42 TWHTrtxt.; Acts xxiu. 9; Eph.iv. 31,
and R G in Rev. xiv. 1 8 ; of the wailing of those in dis-
tress, Heb. V. 7 ; Rev. xxi. 4.*
κρία,ζ,τό, [cf. Lat. caro, cruor; Curtius § 74], plur. (tpc'a
(cf. W. 65 (63); [B. 15 (13)]); [fr. Horn, down]; Sept.
very often for Ιψ2 : (the) Jlesh (of a, sacrificed animal) :
Ro. xiv. 21 ; 1 Co. viii. 13.•
κρίίττων and (1 Co. vii. 38 ; Phil. i. 23 ; in other places
the reading varies between the two forms, esp. in 1 Co.
vii. 9 [here TTrWHLtxt. -n-] ; .xi. 17; Heb. vi. 9
[here and in the preced. pass. LTTrWH -σσ-; see
WH. App. p. 148 sq. ; cf. Σ, σ, s]) κράσσων, -όνος, neut.
-ov, (com par. of κρατϋς, see κράηστος, cf. Kiihner i. p. 436 ;
[B. 27 (24)]), [fr. Hom. down], better; i. e. a. 7nore
useful, more serviceable : 1 Co. xi. 1 7 ; xii. 31 R G ; Heb.
xi. 40 ; xii. 24 ; with ττολλώ μάλλον added, Phil. i. 23 [cf.
μάλλον, 1 b.]; κρι'ϊσσον (adv.) ποκΐκ, 1 Co. vii. 38; κρι'.τ-
τόν (στιν, it is more advantageous, foil, by an inf., 1 Co. vii.
9; 2 Pet. ii. 21, [cf. B. 217 (188); W. §41 a. 2 a]. b.
more excellent: Heb. i. 4; vi. 9; vii. 7, 19, 22; viii. 6;
ix. 23 ; X. 34 ; xi. 16, 35 ; κρ. (<m, foil, by an inf., 1 Pet.
iii. 17.*
κρ«μαμ,αι, see the foil. word.
Kpep,awv)u, also κριμανννω [" scarcely classic " (Veitch
κρΐπάΚΐ]
360
κ ρ ι
β. ν.)], κριμάω -α [" still later " (ibid.)], and (Sept. Job
xxvi. 7 and Byzant. writ.) κρίμάζω, (in the N. T. the
pres. does not occur) : 1 aor. (κμίμιιιτα ; 1 aor. pass, (xpc-
μάσθην; fr. Horn, down; St-jit. for nSri; to hang uji,
suspenti : τΐ ϊπί τι (Kec), ττ<ρί τι (LT'IrWlI), [(Ϊγ τι,
Tdf. edd. 2, 7], .\It. .wiii. (i ; τιι-ά fVi iiXov, Acts v. 30;
x. 311, (lien. xl. 19, 22; Deut. xxi. 22; Ksth. vi. 4, etc.) ;
simply ιψ(μασθ(ί{, of one crucified, Lk. xxiii. 39. Mid.
κρίμαμΜ (for κρ(μάννυμαι, cf. Bllm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 224) ;
intrans. to be suspinded, to hang: foil, by ϊκ with gen. of
the thing, Acts xxviii. 4 (see «, I. 3) ; tTrl ξϋλον, of one
hanging on a cross, Gal. iii. 13; trop. tv Tim, .Mt. xxii.
40, where the meaning is, all tiie Law and tlie Pro|)Iiets
(i. e. tlie teaching of the O. T. on moraHty) is summed
uj) in tlicse two |)recepts. [COMl». : (κ-κρίμαμαι.^*
[κρίττάλη, see κραιπάλη,^
κρημνό;, -oO, ό, (f r. κριμάννυμι), a sleep (place), a preci-
pice: Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v. 13; Lk. viii. 33. (2 Chr. x.w.
12 ; Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.)*
Κρήϊ, f>, |)hir. KprjTes, a Cretan, an inhabitant of tlie
island of Crete : Acts ii. 11 ; Tit. i. 12 [cf. Farrar, St.
Paul, ii. 534].•
Κρήο-κηί [of. B. 17 (!■"))], 6, Lat. Crescens, an un-
known man : 2 Tim. iv. 10.*
Κρήτη, -T)5, ή, Crete, tlie largest and most fertile island
of the Alediterranean archipelago or iEgean Sea, now
called Camii'a: Acts xxvii. 7, 12 sq. 21 ; Tit. i. 5. [Diet,
of (Jeog. or McC. and S. s. v.]•
κριθή, -ης, η, (in Grk. writ. [fr. Horn, down] only in
I)liir. αί κρίθιύ), Sept. for ni>'u', barley: Rev. vi. (i κριβηί
Κ(•,.κριθωι>1.νΎν\νΗ.•'
κρ(θινοΐ, -η, -ον. (κριθή), n/harlcfi, made nf barley : άρτοι
(2 Κ. iv.42,cf. Judg. vii. 13), Jn. vi. 9. 1 .Ί. [(Ilippon., al.)]*
κpCμα [GTWII] or κρΊμα [L Tr (more commonly)]
(on the accent cf. AV. p. 50; Lipstus, Grammat. Unter-
such. p. 40 sq. [who gives the preference to κρίμα, as do
Bttm. 73 (64) ; Cobet (N. T. ad fid. etc. p. 49 sq.) ;
Fritzsche{Rom. vol. i. 9G,107); al.; "videturi antiipiitati
Graecae, / Alexandrinae aetati placuisse," Tilf. Proleg.
to Sept. ed. 4 p. xxx.; on the accent in extant codd. see
Tdf. Troleg. p. 101 ; cf.esp. Lnberl; Paralip. p. 418]), -τογ,
TO, (fr. κρίνω, q. v. ; as κ\ΐμα fr. κλι'κω), [Aeschyl. down],
Sejjt. very often for ODC/p ; 1. a decree : jihir., τοϋ
Bfov, Ro. xi. 33 [al. here (with X. V.) judgments; cf.
Weiss in Meyer ad loc.] (Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 75). 2.
judgment; i. e. condemnation of wrong, the decision
(whether severe or milil) wliioh one passes on the faults
of others : κρίματί τιυι Kpivfiv, Sit. vii. 2. In a forensic
sense, the sentence of a j udge: with a gen. of the pun-
ishment to which one is sentenced, θάνατον, Lk. xxiv.
20; esp. the sentence of (Jod as judge: το κρίμα . . . ds
κατάκριμα, the judgment (in which God declared sin to
be punishable with de.atli) issued in condemnation, i. e.
was condemnation to all who sinned and therefore paid
the pen.-ilty of death Ilo. v. 16; esp. where the justice
of God in punishing is to be shown, κρίμα denotes
condemnatorg sentence, penal Judgment, sentence, 2 Pet.
ii. 3 : Jude 4 ; with gen. of the one who pronounces
judgment, τοΰ Scoi, Ro. ii. l; s<i. ; \αμ8άν{σθΜ κρίμα, Mt.
xxiii. 13 (14) Kec; Mk. xii. 40 ; Lk. x.x. 47; Ro. xiii.
2 ; .las. iii. 1 ; the one on whom God passes judgment is
said ίχ(ΐν κρίμα, 1 Tim. v. 1 2 ; βαστάζ(ΐν το κρίμα, Ιο bear
the force of the condemnatory judgment in suffering
jjunishment (see βαστάζω, 2), Gal. v. lU; κρίμα «Vfli'fi»
iavT^, so to eat as to incur the judgment or i)unishment
of (iod, 1 Co. xi. 29 ; ds κρίμα συνίρχ(σθαι, to incur the
condemnation of God, 34 ; flvoi iv τω αΙτώ κρίματι, to lie
under the same condemnation, pay the same jienalty,
Lk. xxiii. 40 ; with gen. of the one on whom condemna-
tion is passed, Ro. iii. 8 ; 1 Tim. iii. 6 ; Rev. xvii. 1. the
Judgment which is formed or passed: by God, through
what Christ accomplished on earth, els κρίμα t yii (it τ.
κόσμον τοΰτον ηλθον, where by way of explanation is added
Iva icrX. to this end, that etc. Jn. ix. 39 ; τό κρίμα άρχίται,
the execution of judgment as displayed in tlie inlliction
of punishment, 1 Pet. iv. 17; the last or β nat Judgment
is called τ6 κρ. τ6 μίλλον. Acts xxiv. 25; κρ. αιώνιον, eter-
nally in force, Ileb. vi. 2; the vindication of one's right,
Kpivttv TO κρίμιΐ Td'oi ίκ twos, to vindicate one's right by
taking vengeance or inflicting punishment on another,
Rev. xviii. 20 ([R. V. God hath Judged your Judgment on
//f-r], si'ii ix, I. 7) ; i. q. the power and business of Judging:
Kp. διδόναι nvl. Rev. xx. 4. 3. α matter to lie Judi-
cially ilecided, a lawsuit, a case in court : κρίματα ίχο»
μιτά τινοΫ, 1 Co. vi. 7.*
κρίνον, -ου, τό, α lily: Mt. vi. 28; Lk. xii. 27. [From
Ildt. down.]•
κρίνω; fut. κρίνοι; 1 aor. ΐκρινα; pf. ηκρικα; 3 pers.
sing, plupf., without augm.(W. § 12, 9; [B. 33 (29)]), xe-
κρίκίΐ (Acts XX. 16 G L TTr WH) ; Pass., pres. κρίνομαι;
imjif. (κρινόμην; |if. κίκριμαι; 1 aor. (κρίθην [cf. B. 52
(4.))]; 1 fut. κριθησομαι; Sept. for Π31^, and also for
jn and 3"); Lat. cerno, i. e. 1. to separate, put
asunder; to pick out, select, choose, (Horn., Hdt., AeschyL,
Soph., Xen., Plat., al. ; μ€τά νιανίσκων αρίστων Κ(κριμίνω9
[chosen, picked^, 2 Mace. .xiii. 15; κίκριμίνοι apxovrfs,
.Joseph, antt. 11,3, 10); hence 2. to upprm-e, es-
teem : ήμίραν παρ' ημίραν, one day above another, i. β.
to prefir [see τιαρά, IlL 2 b.], Ro. xiv. 5 (so τ1 irp6 tivos.
Plat. Phil. p. 57 e. ; τον'ΚττολΧω πρ6 Μαρσύον, rep. 3 p.
3119 e.); πάσαν ήμ. to esteem every day, i. e. hold it
sacred, ibid. 3. to be of opinion, deem, think: ορθωι
iKpivas, thou hast decided (judged) correctly, Lk. vii. 43 ;
foil, by an inf. Acts xv. 19 ; foil, by a direct quest. 1
Co. xi. 13; toCto, an etc. to be of opinion etc. 2 Co. v.
14; foil, by the ace. with inf. Acts xvi. \'>; τινά or rl
foil, by a predicate ace, κρίναν τίνα Λξιόν tivos, to judge
one (to be) worthy of a thing. Acts xiii. 46 ; 'tmcrro»
KpivfToi, Acts xxvi. 8. 4. to dclrrmine, rrsolre, de-
cree: Ti, 1 Co. vii. 37 (κρϊναί ri καΐ προβίσθαι, Polyb. 3,
6, 7 ; TO κριθίν, which one has determined on, one's re-
solve, 5, 52, G ; 9, 1 3, 7 ; τοΐί κριθΐΊσι ίμμίναν bei, Epict.
diss. 2, 15, 7 sqq.) ; δόγματα, pass, [the decrees that had
been ordained (cf. A. V.)], Acts xvi. 4; roCro κρίνατι,
foil, by an inf. preceded by the art. ro, Ro. xiv. 13 ; also
with (μαυτ^ added, for myself \. e. for my own benefit
κρίνω
361
Acpiatf
(lest I should prepare p-ief fo•• myself by being com-
pelled to grieve you), 2 Co. ii. 1 ; foil, by an inf., Acts x.x.
IG; .xxv. 25; iCo. ii. 2 GLTTrWH [(see below)];
V. 3; Tit. iii. 12. (1 Mace. -\i. 33; 3 Mace. i. 6; vi. 30;
Judith .\i. 13; Sap. viii. 9; Diod. 17, 95; Joseph, antt.
7, 1, 5; 12, 10, 4; 13, 6, 1); with τοΰ prefixed, 1 Co. ii.
2 Ilec. [(see above)] ; foil, by the ace. with inf. Acts .xxi.
25 (2 Mace. xi. 36) ; with τοΰ prefixed. Acts xxvii. 1 [cf.
B. § UO, 168.]; (κρ/ι/€ταί Tiw, it is one's pleasure, iV seems
good to one, 1 Esdr. vi. 20 (21) sq.; viii. 90 (92)). 5.
lojuilrje; a. to pronounce an opinion concerning rif/lit
and icrong; o. in a forensic sense [(differing from
βικάζ(ΐν, the official term, in giving prominence to the
intellectual process, the sifting and weighing of evi-
dence)], of a human judge : τινά, to give a decision re-
specting one, Jn. vii. 51 ; κατά τόκ νόμον, Jn. .xviii. 31 ;
Acts xxiii. 3 ; xxiv. 6 Rec. ; the substance of the de-
cision is added in an inf., Acts iii. 13 ; pass, to he judged,
Ϊ. e. summoned to trial that one's case mag be examined
and judgment passed upon it. Acts xxv. 10 ; xxvi. 6 ;
Ro. iii. 4 (fr. Ps. 1. (Ii.) 6 (4)) ; ntpi w. gen. of the thing.
Acts xxiii. 6 ; xxiv. 21 ; [x.xv. 20] ; with addition of fVt
and the gen. of the judge, before one, Acts x.xv. 9. Where
the context requires, used of a condemnatory judgment,
i. q. In condemn : simply. Acts xiii. 27. β. of the judg-
ment of God or of Jesus the Messiah, deciding between the
righteousness and the unrighteousness of men : absol., Jn.
V. 30; viii. 50 ; δίκαιοι!, 1 Pet. ii. 23 ; tv δικαιοσΰντ). Rev.
xix. 1 1 ; Tira, 1 Co. V. 13; pass. Jas. ii. 12; ζώντας κ. vixpois,
2 Tim. iv. 1 ; 1 Pet. iv. 5 ; ν(κροϋς, pass.. Rev. xi. 18 [B.
2G0 (224)] ; την oικoυμίvηv,t):\e inhabitants of the world,
Acts .xvii. 31 [cf. W. 389 (364)] ; τοκ κ6σμον, Ro. iii. 6 ;
τα κρυπτά των ανθρώπων, Ro. ii. 1 6 ; κρίνΐΐν το κρίμα Tivbs
€κ Tirar (see κρίμα, 2 sub fin.). Rev. xviii. 20, cf. vi. 10;
Kpiveiv κατά τά (κάστου fpynv. 1 Pet. i. 1 7 ; tovs νικροϋς
€K των -γίγραμμίνων cV τοις βιβλίοις κατά τά ΐργα αυτών,
pass.. Rev. χχ. 1 2 sq. ; with ace. of the substance of the
judgment, thou didst pronounce thii judgment, ταντα
(Kpivas, Rev. xvi. 5 ; contextually, used specifically of
the act of condemning and decreeing (or inflicting) pen-
altg on one: τινά, Jn. iii. 18; v. 22; xii. 47 sq. ; Acts
vii. 7 ; Ro. ii. 12 ; 1 Co. xi. 31 s^\. ; 2 Th. ii. 12 ; Heb.
X. 30; xiii. 4; 1 Pet, iv. 6 [cf. AV. 630 (585)] ; Jas. v.
9 (where Rec. κατακρ) ; Rev. xviii. 8 ; xix. 2, (Sap. xii.
10, 22); τον κόσμοΐί, op]), to σώζαν, Jn. iii. 17 ; xii. 47;
of the devil it is said ό ήρχιαν τοϋ κόσμου τούτου κίκριται,
because the victorious cause of Christ has rendered the
supreme wickedness of Satan evident to all, and put
an end to his power to dominate and destroy, Jn. xvi.
11. γ. of Christians as hereafter to sit with Christ
at the judgment : τον κήσμον, 1 Co. vi. 2 : άγγίΧους, ib.
3 [cf. oyyiXos, 2 sub fin.; yet see Meyer ed. Hainrici ad
U. cc.]. b. to pronounce judgment ; to subject to cen-
sure; of those who act the part of judges or arbiters in
the matters of common life, or pass judgment on the
deeds and words of others : univ. and without case, Jn.
viii. 16, 26 ; κατά τι, Jn. viii. 15 ; κατ όψιν, Jn. vii. 24 ;
tv κρίματί Tiw Kplvciv, Mt. vii. 2 ; Tira, pass, [with nom.
of pers.], Rom. iii. 7 ; ίκ τοϋ στόματος σον κρίνω σί, out
of thine own mouth (i. e. from what thou hast just said)
will I take the judgment that must be passed on thee,
Lk. xix. 22 ; τί, 1 Co. x. 15 ; pass. ib. 29 ; το δίκαιον, Lk.
.xii. 57 ; foil, by d, whether. Acts iv. 19 ; with ace. of the
substance of the judgment : τί i. e. κρίσιν τινά, 1 Co. iv.
5; κρίσιν Kpiveiv (Plat. rep. 2 p. 300 d.) δικαίαν [cf. B.
§ lol, 5], Jn. vii. 24 (αΚηθινην (c. δικαίαν, Tob. iii. 2;
κρίσ^ΐί αδίκου!, .Sus. 53) ; of the di^ciIllinary judgment
to which Christians subject the conduct of their fellows,
passing censure upon them as the facts require, 1 Co. v.
12 ; of those who judge severely (unfairly), finding fault
with this or that in others, Mt. vii. 1 ; Lk. vi. 3 7 ; Ro.
ii. 1 ; τινά, Ro. ii. 1, 3 ; xiv. 3 sq. 10, 13 ; foil, by tV with
dat. of the thing. Col. ii. 16 ; Ro. xiv. 22 ; hence i. q. to
condemn : Ro. ii. 27 ; Jas. iv. 11 sq. 6. Hebraisti-
cally i. q. to rule, govern ; to preside over tcith the poicer of
giving judicial decisions, because it was the prerogative
of kings and rulers to pass judgment : Mt. xix. 28 ; Lk.
xxii. 30, (τον \αόν, 2 Κ. χ v. 5 ; 1 Mace. L\. 73 ; Joseph,
antt. 5, 3, 3 ; οί κρίνοντα τ. γην, Ps. ii. 10; Sap. i. 1 ;
cf. Gesenius, Thes. iii. p. 1463 sq.). 7. Pass, and
mid. to contend together, of warriors and combatants
(Hom., Diod., al.); to dispute (Hdt. 3, 120; Arstph. nub.
66) ; in a forensic sense, to go to latv, have a suit at law:
with dat. of the pers. with whom [\V. § 31, 1 g.], Mt. v.
40 (Job ix. 3 ; xiii. 19 ; Eur. Med. 609) ; foil, by μ€τά
with gen. of the pers. with whom one goes to law, and
f'ni with gen. of the judge, 1 Co. vi. (1), 6. [CoMP. :
ava-, άπο-, άντ-αηο- (-/lat), δια-, tv-, ΐπι-, κατά-, συν-, ίπο-
(-μιιι). σνν- υπο-(-/χαι).] *
KpCo-is, -(ως, η. Sept. for ΓΙ, 3"» (a suit), but chiefly
for Dap'•?•. in Grk. writ. [(fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down)] 1. α separating, sundering, separation; a
trial, contest. 2. selection. 3. judgment ; i. e.
opinion or decision given concerning anything, esp. con-
cerning justice and injustice, right and wrong; a.
univ.: .In. viii. 16; 1 Tim. v. 24 (on which see ϊπακοΧου-
θίω) ; Jude 9 ; 2 Pet. ii. 1 1 ; κρίσιν κρίν€ΐν (see κρίνω, 5 b.),
.Jn. vii. 24. b. in a forensic sense, of the judgment
of God or of Jesusthe Messiah: univ., Jas. ii. 13;
2 Th. i. 5 ; Ileb. x. 27 ; plur., Rev. xvi. 7 ; xix. 2 ; of
the last judgment: Heb. ix. 27; ή ήμίρα κρίσιω: [Mt. χ.
15;xi. 22, 24; xii. 36; Mk. vi. 11 R L in br. ; 2 Pet. ii.
9; iii. 7] or tjjs κρίσ(ω! [1 .Τη. iv. 17], the day appointed
for the judgment, see fjpfpa, 3 ; (Ις κρίσιν μ(γά\η! ημίρας,
Jude 6 ; ή ώρα τη! κρίσιω! αϋτοΰ, i.e. τοΰ β(οΰ, Kev. xiv.
7; tv τη κρίσιι, at the time of the judgment, when the
judgment shall take place, Mt. xii. 41 sq. ; Lk. x. 14;
xi. 31 s(|. ; κρίσιν iroie'iv κατά πάντων, to execute judgment
against (i. e. to the destruction of) all. .Jude 15. spec.
sentence of condemnation, damnatory judgment, condem-
nation and punishment : Heb. x. 27 ; 2 Pet. ii. 4 ; with
gen. of the pers. condemned and punished. Rev. xviii.
10 ; ή κρίσΐ! αϋτοΰ ήρθη, the punishment appointed him
was taken away, i. e. was ended, Acts viii. 33 fr. Is. liii.
8 Sept.; wijrrfii' «r κρίσιν [R" fit ΰπόκρισινί, to become
liable to condemnation, Jas. v. 12; αϊώνιο! κρίσΐ!, eternal
Κρί'στΓοϊ
362
κρντΓτω
damnation, Mk. iii. 29 [Rcc] ; ή κρίσα τη{ yf/vw/r, the
judgment condemning one to Gelieiina, tlie jienalty of
Gehenna, i. e. to be suffered in hell, Mt. xxiii. 3.i. In
John's usage κρίσκ denotes a. tliat judgment
whieh Christ occasioned, in that wicked men rejected
the salvation he offered, and so of their own accord
brought upon themselves misery and punishment : αντη
(tTTtu ή κρίσΐϊ, ότι etc. judgment takes place by the en-
trance of the hght into the world and the hatred which
men have for this light, iii. 19; κρίσιν noif'iv, to execute
judgment, v. 27; ΐρχίαθαι ds κρ. to come into the state
of one condemned, ib. 24 ; κρ. τοϋ κόσμου τούτου, the
condemnatory sentence passed upon this world, in that
it is convicted of wickedness and its power broken, xii.
31 ; irepi κμίσίως, of judgment passed (see κρίνω, 5 a. β.
fin.), xvi. 8, 11. β. the last judgment, the damna-
tion of the wicked : άνάστασα κρίσ(ω!, followed by con-
demnation, V. 29 [cf. W. § 30, 2 β.]. y. both the
preceding notions are combined in v. 30 ; ή κρίσΐ! πάσα,
the whole business of judging [cf. W. 548 (510)], ib. 22.
Cf. Groos, Der Begrill der κρίσα bei Johannes (in tlie
Stud. u. Krit. for 18(58, pp. 244-273). 4. Like the
Chald. ayi (Dan. vii. 10, 26; cf. Germ. Gericht) i. i[.
the college nfjuilijes (a tribunal of seven men in the sev-
eral cities of Palestine; as distinguished from the San-
hedrin, which had its seat at Jerusalem [cf. Scliiirer,
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 23, ii. ; Edersheim, Jesus the Mes-
siah, ii. 287]) : Mt. v. 21 sq. (cf. Deut. xvi. 18; 2 Chr.
xix. 6 ; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 14 ; b. j. 2, 20, 5). 5.
Like the Hebr. ϋρ•!??•? (cf. Gesenius, Thes. iii. p. 1464''
[also Sept. in Gen. xviii. 19, 25; Is. v. 7; Ivi. 1; lix. 8;
Jer. xvii. 11 ; 1 Mace. vii. 18; and other pass, referred
to in Gesenius 1. c.]), rif/lit,Jn.ilice : Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi.
42; what shall have the force of right, anayyeWiiv rtvl,
Mt. xii. 18; a Just cause, Mt. .xii. 20 (on which see cV
βιάλλω, 1 g.).•
KpCd-iros, -ου, 6. Crispus, the ruler of a synagogue at
Corinth, Acts xviii. 8 ; baptized by Paul, 1 Co. i. 14.*
κριτήριον, -ου, τό, (fr. κριτήρ, i. q. κριτής) ; 1.
prop, the instrument or means of trijiny or judijing
anything; the rule hij which one judges, (Plat., Plut.,
al.). 2. the place ivhere juilgmenl is given; the tri-
bunal of a judge ; a bench of judges : plur., 1 Co. vi. 2 ;
Jas. ii. 6, (Sept. ; Plat., Polyb., Pint., al.). 3. in
an exceptional usage, the matter judged, thing to be de-
cided, suit, case : plur. 1 Co. vi. 4 [this sense is denied by
many ; cf. e. g. Meyer on vs. 2].*
κριτή?, -οϋ, ό, (κρίνω), [fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down],
Sept. chiefly for ΰ2ύ ; a judge ; 1. univ. one who
passes, or arrogates to himself, judgment on anything:
w. gen. of the object, Jas. iv. 11 ; w. gen. of quality (see
διαλογίσμόί, 1), Jas. ii. 4; in a forensic sense, of the one
who tries and decides a case [cf. δικαστής, fin.] : Mt. v.
25; Lk. xii. 14 LTTrWH, 58; [xviii. 2]; w. gen. of
quality [cf. B. § 132, 10; W. § 34, 3 b.], της ά&ικίας, Lk.
xviii. 6 ; w. gen. of the object (a thing), an arbiter. Acts
xviii. 15 ; of a Roman procurator administering justice.
Acts xxiv. 10; of God passing judgment on the charac-
ter and deeds of men, and rewarding accordingly, Heb.
xii. 23; Jas. iv. 12; alsoof Christ returning to sit in judg-
ment. Acts X. 42 ; 2 Tim. iv. 8 ; Jas. v. 9 ; in a peculiar
sense, of a person whose conduct is made the standard
for iudging another and convicting him of wron^ : w.
gen. of the object (a pers.), Mt. xii. 27; Lk. xi. 19. 2.
like the Hebr. 030, of the leaders or rulers of the Israel-
ites: Acts xiii. 20 (Judg. ii. 16, 18 sq. ; Ruth i. 1 ; Sir.
X. 1 Si[. 24, etc.).•
KpiTiKOs, -ή, -6v, (κρίνω), relating to judging, fit for judg-
ing, skilleil in judging, (Plat., Plut., Lcian., al.) : with
gen. of the obj., ΐνθυμησιων κ. fvvoiojv KapSlat, tracing
out and passing judgment on the thoughts of the mind,
Heb. iv. 1 2.•
κροΰω ; 1 aor. ptcp. κρούσης ; to I'noclc : την θύραν, to
knock at the door, Lk. xiii. 25; Acts xii. 13, (Arst])h.
eccles. 317, 990 ; Xen. symp. 1,11; Plat. Prot. p. 3 1 υ a. ;
314 d.; symp. 212 c.; but κόπτ^ιν την θύραν is better,
ace. to Phryn. with whom Lobeck agrees, p. 1 7 7 [cf.
Schmidt (eh. 113, 9), who makes Kcnrreiv to knock with
a heavy blow, κρού(ΐν to knock with the knuckles]) ;
without την θύραν [cf. W. 593 (552)], Mt. vii. 7 s(j. ;
Lk. xi. 9, 10; xii. 30; Acts xii. 16; Rev. iii. 20 (on which
see θύρα, c. f.).*
κρυτττή [so ir'^G L Τ Tr KC], (but some prefer to write
it κρύπτη [so WH, Meyer, Bleek, etc., Chandler § 183; cf.
Tdf. on Lk. as below]), -^r, ή, a crypt, covered way, vault,
cellar: fls κρυπτήν, Lk. xi. 33 (Athen. 5 (4), 205 a. equiv.
to κρυπτοί π(ριπατος p. 206; [Joseph, b. j. 5, 7, 4 fin.;
Strab. 17, 1, 37]; Sueton. Calig. 58; Juvenal 5, 106;
Vitruv. 6, 8 {:>) ; al.). Cf. Meyer ad 1. c. ; W. 238 (223).•
Kpuirros, -η, -όν, (κρύπτω), [fr. Horn, down], hidden, con-
cealed, secret : Mt. x. 26 ; Mk. iv. 22 ; Lk. viii. 1 7 ; xii. 2
[cf. W. 441 (410)]; ό κρντττος της καρδίας άνθρωπος, the
inner part of man, the soul, 1 Pet. iii. 4 ; nout., (v τω
κρυπτά), in secret, Mt. vi. 4, 6, 18 Rec. ; iv κρύπτω, pri-
vately, in secret, Jn. vii. 4, 10; xviii. 20; ό iv κρύπτω
'λου^αΊος, he who is a Jew inwardly, in soul and not in
circumcision alone, Ro. ii. 29 ; τα κρυπτά τοϋ σκότους,
[the hidden things of darkness i. e.] things co\ered by
darkness, 1 Co. iv. 5 ; τα κρ. των άνθρ. the things which
men conceal, Ro. ii. 16; τα κρ. της καρδίας, his secret
thoughts, feelings, desires, 1 Co. xiv. 25 ; τα κρ. της
αισχύνης (see αισχύνη, 1), 2 Co. iv. 2; eis κρυπτόν into
a secret place, Lk. xi. 33 in some edd. of Rec, but sec
κρυτΓτη.'
κρντΓτω : 1 aor. (Kpv\j/a ; Pass., pf . 3 pers. sing, κίκρυπται,
ptcp. κίκρνμμίνος: 2 aor. ϊκρύβην (so also in Sept., for the
earlier iκpύφηv, cf. Bitm. Ausf. S])r. i. p. 377 ; Fritzsche
on Mt. p. 212; [Veitch s. v.]); [cf. καλύπτω; fr. Horn,
down] ; Sept. for Κ-3ΠΠ, ■>•ηθΠ, |£)s, pa, 1Π3, Τ\Β3 ;
to hide, conceal ; a. prop. : τί, Mt. xiii. 44 and L Τ Tr
WIlinxxv.l8; pass., Heb. xi. 23 ; Rev. ii. 17; κρυβηναι
i. q. to be hid, escape notice, Mt. v. 14 ; 1 Tim. v. 25 ;
iκpύβη ((juietly withdrew [cf. W. § 38, 2 a.]) κ. iξη\θfv,
i. e. departed "secretly, Jn. viii. 59 [cf. W. 469 (437)];
κρύπτω τι iv with dat. of place, Mt. xxv. 25 ; pass. xiii.
44 ; K<Kp. iv τω θ^ω, is kept laid up with God in heaven,
κρυστα\\ίζω
363
κτίσμα
Col. iii. 3 ; τϊ fit η, Lk. xiii. 21 [R G L (ν(κρνψ(ΐ>^ ; f αυτόν
els with ace. of place, Rev. vi. 15; τίνα από προσώπου
Ttvof to covei• (and remove [cf. VV. § 30, 6 b. ; 66, 2 d.])
from the view of any one, i. e. to take away, rescue, from
the sight. Rev. vi. 10 ; ϊκρύβη άπ αυτών, withdrew from
them, Jn. .xii. 36 (in Grk. auth. generally κρ. τινά τι; of.
αποκρύπτω, b.). b. metaph. to conceal (that it may
not become known) : κικρυμμίνοί, clandestine, Jn. xLx.
38; t\ από tivos (gen. of pers.), Mt. xi. 25 LTTr WH ;
[Lk. xviii. 34] ; κίκρυμμίνα things hidden i. e. unknown,
used of God's saving counsels, Mt. xiii. 3 J ; άπ' οφθαλμών
tivos, Lk. xix. 42 [cf. B. § 146, 1 fin. CoMP. : άπο-, ev,
π^ρι-κρντΓτω.^ *
κρϊΐσ-ταλλίξω ; (κρύσταλλο?, q. v.) ; Ιο be of crystalline
brightness and transparency ; to shine like crystal : Rev.
xxi. 11. (Not found elsewhere.) *
κρΰ<Γταλλθ9, -ου. ό, (fr. κρύος ice ; hence prop, anything
congealed (cf. Lat. crusla) and transparent), [fr. Horn,
down], crystal : a kind of precious stone, Rev. iv. 6 ; xxii. 1 ;
[cf . B. D. s. V. Crystal. On its gend. cf . L. and S. s. v. II.] *
Kp υφαΐοϊ, -αι'α, -aloi', (κρύφα), hidden, secret: twice in
Mt. vi. 18 L Τ Tr Wn. (Jer. xxiii. 24 ; Sap. xvii. 3 ; in
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Find, down.) *
κρυφή [L WH -φτ) ; cf . όκη, init.], adv., {κρύπτω), secret-
ly, in secret: Eph. v. 12. (Find., Soph., Xen. ; Sept.) *
κτάομαι, -ωμαι\ fut. κτήσομαι (Lk. xxi. 19 LTrWH) ;
1 aor. ΐκτησάμψ ; [fr. Horn, down] ; Sept. for njp ; to
acquire, get or procure a thing yor one's self [cf. W. 260
(244)] ; (pf. κίκτημαι, to possess [cf. W. 274 (257) note] ;
not found in the N. T.) : τι, Mt. x. 9 ; Acts viii. 20 ; οσα
κτώμαι, all my income, Lk. xviii. 12; with gen. of price
added [W. 206 (194)], πολλοΟ, Acts xxii. 28 ; with «
and gen. of price (see ck, II. 4), Acts i. 18; το ί'αυτοϋ
σκίΰοί iv άγίοσμώ κ. τιμή, to procure for himself his own
Tessel (i. e. for tlie satisfaction ot the sexual passion ;
see σκίϋοί, 1) in sanctification and honor, i. e. to marry a
wife (opp. to the use of a harlot ; the words eV ay. κ- τιμή
are added to express completely the idea of marrying
in contrast with the baseness of procuring a harlot as
his ' vessel * ; cf. κτασθαι -γυναίκα, of marrying a wife,
Ruth iv. 10; Sir. xxxvi. 29 (xxxiii. 26); Xen. symp. 2,
1 0), 1 Th. iv. 4 ; Tat ψ-υχάί υμών, the true life of your souls,
your true lives, i. e. eternal life (cf. the opp. ζημιοϋσθαι
την ψ•, αίτοΰ under ζημιάω), Lk. xxi. 19; cf. Meyer ad
'loc. and W. p. 274 (257).*
κτήμα, -Tos, τή, (fr. κτάομαι, as χρήμα fr. χράομαι), a
possession : as in Grk. writers, of propert}•, lands, estates,
etc. Mt. xix. 22; Mk. x. 22; Acts ii. 45; v. 1.•
κτήνοϊ, -ουί, TO, (fr. κτάομαι; hence prop, a possession,
property, esp. in cattle) ; a beast, esp. a beast of burden :
Lk. X. 34 ; plur.. Acts x.xiii. 24 ; Rev. xviii. 13 ; it seems
to be used for quadrupeds as opp. to fishes and birds in
1 Co. XV. 39 ; so for Π9Π3, Gen. i. 25 sq. ; ii. 20. [Cf.
Horn. hymn. 30, 10; of swine in Folyb. 12, 4, 14.]*
κτήτωρ, -οροί, 6, {κτάομαι), a possessor: Acts iv. 34.
(Diod. excpt. p. 599, 17; Clem. Alex.; Byzant. writ.) *
κτίζω : 1 aor. ίκτισα ; pf . pass, ΐκτισμαι ; 1 aor. pass.
ίκτίαθην; Sept. chiefly for X"\3 ; prop, to make habitable,
to people, a place, region, island, (Horn., Hdt., Thuc,
Diod., al.) : hence to found, a city, colony, state, etc.
(Find, et sqq. ; 1 Esdr. iv. 53). In the Bible, to create:
of God creating the world, man, etc., Mk. xiii. 19; 1 Co.
xi. 9; Col. i. 16 [cf. W. 272 (255)]; iii. 10; Eph. iii. 9;
1 Tim. iv. 3 ; Rev. iy. 11 ; x. 6, (Deut. iv. 32 ; Eccl. xii.
1 ; often in O. T. Apocr., as Judith xiii. 18 ; Sap. ii. 23 ;
xi. 18 (17) ; 3 Mace. ii. 9 ; [Joseph, antt. 1, 1, 1 ; Fhilo
de decal. § 20]) ; absol. 6 «τι'σαΓ, the creator, Ro. i. 25 ;
[Mt. xix. 4 Tr WH]; i. q. to form, shape, i. e. (for sub-
stance) completely to change, to transform (of the moral
or η e w creation of the soul, as it is called), κτισθίντα
iv Χριστώ Ίησοϋ eVi cpyoif aya^ots, in intimate fellow-
ship with Christ constituted to do good works [see iπi,
B. 2 a. f.], Eph. ii. 10; Toit 8io €is ίνα καινον άνθρωπον,
ibid. 15; τον κτισθ^ντα κατά θ(όν, formed after God's like-
ness [see κατά, II. 3 c. δ.], Eph. iv. 24, (καρδίαν καθαρά»
κτίσον iv ipoi, Fs. 1. (Ii.) 12).*
κτίο -is, -(ω!, ή, (κτίζω), in Grk. writ, the act of founding,
establishing,buildiiig, etc. ; in the N. T. (Vulg. everywhere
creatura [yet Heb. ix. 11 creatio']) 1. the act of cre-
ating, creation : τοϋ κόσμου, Ro. i. 20. 2. i. q. κτίσμα,
creation i. e. thing created, [cf. W. 32] ; used a. of in-
dividual things and beings, α creature, a creation : Ro. i.
25 ; Heb. iv. 13 ; any created thing, Ro. viii. 39 ; after a
rabbin, usage (by wliich a man converted from idolatry
to Judaism was called ΤΤάΊΓ\ Π•Ί3 [cf. Schottgen, Horae
Hebr. i. 328, 70i sq.]), καιντ] κτίσις is used of a man regen-
erated through Christ, Gal. vi. 15 ; 2 Co. v. 1 7. b. col-
lectively, the sum or aggregate of created things: Rev. iii.
14 (on which see αρχή, 3 ; [ij κτίσΐί τ. ανθρώπων, Teach-
in" of the Twelve etc. c. 16]) ; όλη ή κτίσκ. Sap. xi.x. 6;
πάσα ή κτίσις, Judith xvi. 14; and without the art. (cf.
Grimm on 3 Mace. [ii. 2] p. 235 ; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as
below]), πάσα κτίσις. Col. i. 15; 3 Mace. ii. 2; Judith i.\.
12; σωτηβ πάσης κτίσεως. Acta Thomae p. 19 ed. Thilo
[§ 10 p. 198 ed. Tdf.], (.see πάϊ, I. 1 c.) ; άπ άρχης κτίσιως,
Mk. χ. G ; xiii. 1 9 ; 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; ol ταύτης rijt κτίσεως, not
of this order of created things, Heb. ix. 11; ace. to the
demands of the context, of some particular kind or class
of created things or beings : thus of the human race, πάσΐ}
TTj KT. Mk. xvi. 15 ; iv πάση (Rec. adds tj) κτίσει τΐ] im6
t!)v olp-, among men of every race. Col. i. 23 ; the aggre-
gate of irrational creatures, both animate and inanimate,
(what Ave call nature), Ro. viii. 19-21 (Sap. v. 17 (18);
xvi. 24) ; πάσα ij κτ. ibid. 22; where cf. Reiche, Philippi,
Meyer, Riickert, al., [Arnold in Bapt. Quart, for Apr.
1867, pp. 143-153]. 3. an institution, ordinance:
1 Pet. ii. 13; cf. Huther ad loc. [(Find., al.)]*
κτίσμα, -TO£, TO, (κτί^Ό)) ; thing founded ; created thing;
(Vulg. creatura) [A. V. creature~} : 1 Tim. iv. 4 ; Rev.
v. 13 ; viii. 9, (Sap. ix. 2 ; xiii. 5) ; contextually and met-
aph. KT. θ(οΰ, transformed by divine power to a moral
newness of soul, spoken of true Christians as created
anew by regeneration [al. take it here unrestrictedly],
Jas. i. 18 (see απαρχή, metaph. a. ; also κτί^ω sub fin.,
κτίσις, 2 a.) ; τά iv άρχη κτίσματα θ(οΰ, of the Israelites,
Sir. xxxvi. 20 (15). [(Strab., Dion. H.)]*
«TKTTijs'
364
Κ
υρήντ)
leriimis (on the accent of. W. § 6, 1 h. [cf. 94 (89) ; esp.
Chandler §§ 35, 3G]), -ου, 6, (icTifai), a founder \ a creator
[Aristot., I'liit., al.J: of (io(i, 1 i'et. iv. 19 [cf. W. 12J
(IIG)]; (Jmliili ix. 12; Sir. xxiv. 8: 2 .vlacc. i. 24, etc.).•
κυβ«ία Ι-βία Γ W'H ; see I, i],-af, ij. (fr. κυ^ίύω, anil this
fr. Ki^fjor a cube, a die). i/icr-/ilai/iii(/ ( Xen., I'lat., Aristot.,
ai.y ; Irop. ή κ. των άνθρ- the deception [Λ. \. sleir/hQ of
men, Kpu. iv. 1 1, because dice-pl.ayers sometimes cheated
and dofriiuded their fellow-players."
ιαιβ€'ρνη<Γΐ5, -ίωί, ή, {Kv^fpvaui [Lat. gubernare, to gov-
ern]), (i i/iirentin</, f/nrernmeiil : 1 Co. xii. 28 [al. would
take it tropically here, and render it icise counsils (1!.
V. mri^. ); so llesych. : κυβιρνήσα!• προνοητικοί (π^στψ
μαι κα\ φρόνησα! \ cf. Sclileusiier, Thesaur. in Sc[>t. s. v.,
and to the relT. below add Prov. .\i. 14; Job .x.x.wii. 12
Symm.]; (Prov. i. .j ; x.xiv. 6; Find., Plat., Plut., al.).'
κνβ€ρνήτη5, -ου, ό, {κυβ(ρνάω ['to steer'; see the pre-
ceding word]) ; fr. Horn, down ; steersman, helmsman,
sailing-masler; [A. V. master, ship-master']: Acts xxvii.
1 1 ; Rev. xviii. 17. (Ezek. xxvii. 8, 27 sq.) *
kvkXcvcii : 1 aor. «κύκλί υσα ; to go round (Strabo and
other later writ.); to encircle, encompass, snrroaml: την
jTapepSoKriv, Rev. xx. 9 (where R. (! Tr ίκύκ\ωσαν); [τιι/ά,
.In. X. 24 Trmrs. Wllrarg. ; (see 117/. App. ρ 171)].'
κνκλήθ€ν, (κϋκλοί [see κύκλω]), adv. round about, from
all sides all rouml : Rev. iv. 8 ; κυκλ. τιι/ογ. Rev. iv. 3 sq.,
and Rec. in v. 11. (Lys. p. 110, 40 [olea sacr. 28];
Qu. Smyrn. 5, 16; Nonn. Dion. 36, 325; Sept. often for
3'D30, 2'20 3'3p, and simply 2'23 ; many exx. fr. the
Apocr. are given in Wuhl, Clavis Apocryphorum etc.
s. v. ) •
κυκλόω, -ά> : 1 aor. ίκϋκΚωσα ; Pass., pres. ptcp. κυκΧηϋ-
ucvoc; 1 aor. ptcp. κυκΚωθάί ; (κϋκ\ος)\ Se|)t. chielly
for 330; 1. to go round, lead round, (Pind., Eur.,
Polyb., al.). 2. to surround, encircle, encompass : of
persons standui;; round, Tt>'a,Jn. x. 24 [Trmrg.AV'H mrg.
ΐκνκΧίνσαν (q. V.)] ; Acts xiv. 20 ; of besiegers (often so
in prof. auth. and in Sept.), Lk. xxi. 20 ; Ileb. xi. 3(J,
and R (i 'l"r in Rev. xx. 9. [CoMP. : π(ρι-κυκ\όω.^ *
κνκλω (dat. of the subst. κνκ\ος, a ring, circle [cf. Eng.
cycle]); fr. Horn, down; Sept. times without number
for 3'3p,also forD"3D"2 and 3'30 I'lD; in a circle, around,
round about, on all sides : Mk. iii. 34 ; vi. 6 ; oi κϋκ'Κωά-γροΙ,
the circumjacent country [see aypit, c], Mk. vi. 36 [here
WH (rejected) mrg. jives eyyiffra]; Lk. ix. 12; άπο
'Xepova. Km κύκΚω. and in the region around, Ro. xv. 1 9 ;
Tiras, around anything (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 5 ; Polyb. 4, 21,
9. al. ; Gen. xxxv. 5 ; Ex. vii. 24, etc.) : Rev. iv. 6 ; v.
II [here R icuicXnflfv] ; vii. 11.•
κνλΐίτμα, -τοί, τό. {κυ\1ω. q. v.). thing rolled: with
epexeget. gen. βαρβάρου, rolled (wallowed) mud or mire,
2 Pet. ii. 22 [R ϋ L Tr mrg.]. The great majority take
the word to mean ' wallowing-/)/ace ', as if it were the
same as κυΧίστρα, (Vulg. in volutabro luti). But just as
TO (ξϊραμα signifies the vomit, thing vomited, and not the
place of vomiting; so το κύ\ισμα denotes nothing else
than the thing rolled or wallowed. But see [the foil,
word, and] βόρβορο:'
κνλισ-μόί, -οΰ,ό, \.ι\. κϋΧισκ, α rolling, wallowing, (llii>-
piatr. p. 204, 4; [cf. Prov. ii. 18 Theod.]) : «t κυλισμ.
βορβόρου, to a rolling of itself in mud, [/o walloiring in
the mire], 2 Pet. ii. 22 Τ Tr Ixt. WIl. See the preceding
word.*
κυλίω : (for κυλάδω more com. in earlier writ.), to roll ;
Pass, inipf. 3 jicrs. sing. ϊκυΧίίτο; to be rolled, to icnllow:
Mk. ix. 20. ([Aristot. h. a. 5, 19, 18, etc. ; Dion. Hal. ;
Sept.]; Polyb. 26, 10, 16; Ael. n. a. 7, 33; Epict. di.ss.
4, 11, 29.) [CoMP. : ava-, άπο-, ίτροσκυλίω.]*
κυλλός, -ή, -όν, [akin to κύκλο;, κυλίω. Lat. circus, cur-
i'us etc. ; Curtius§81]: 1. crool:eil \ of the mem-
bers of the body (Hippocr., Arstph. av. 1379): as dis-
tinguished fr. χω\όί, it seems to be injured or disabled
in the hands [but doubted by many], Mt. xv. 30, 31
[but here Tr mrg. br. κυλ. and WII read it in mrg,
only]. 2. maimed, mutilated, (ols. Ilippocr. p. 805
[iii. p. 186 ed. Kuhn]) : Mt. xviii. 8 ; Mk.'ix. 43.*
κνμα, -Tor, τό, [fr. κυί'ω to swell ; Curtius § 79 ; fr. Hoin.
down J, a ware [cf. Eng. swell], esp. of the sea or of a lake:
Mt. viii. 24 ; xiv. 24; Mk. iv. 37; Acts xxvii. 41 [R G
Trtxt br.] ; κύματα όγρια, prop., .Sap. xiv. 1 ; with θαλάιτ-
στ/Γ added, of impulsive and restless men, tossed to and
fro by their raginj passions,. Judo 13. [Syn. cf. κλύδω».]*
κΰμβαλον, -ου, τό, (fr κίμβυς,ό. a hollow [cf. cup, cupola,
etc. ; Vanicek p. 164]), a cipnbal. i. e. a hollow basin of
brass, producing (when two are struck together) a musi-
cal sound [see B. D. s. v. Cymbal ; Stainer, Music of the
Bible, ch. ix.] : 1 Co. xiii. 1. (1 Chr. xiii. 8; xv. 16, 19,
28; Ps. cl. 5. Pind., Xen., Diod., Joseph., al.)•
κνμινον, -ου, τό, cumin (or cummin). Germ. KummeL,
(for ;•35, Ls. xxviii. 2.Ϊ, 27): Mt. xxiii. 23. (Theophr.,
Diosc, Pint., al.) ITristram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 443.] •
κυνάριον, •ου, τό, (dimin. of κνων, i. (j. κυνί^ιον, which
Phryn. prefers; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 1X0; cf. γυι-αικά-
piov), a little dog : Mt. xv. 26 sq. ; Mk. vii. 2 7 sq. (Xen.,
Plat., Theophr., Plut., al)*
Kvirpios, -ου, ό, a Ci/prian or Cypriote, i.e. a native or
an inhiibitiint of Cyprus: Acts iv. 36; xi. 20; xxi. 16,
(2 Mace. iv. 29). [(Hdt., al.)]•
Kvirpos, -ov, ή, Ci/prus, a very fertile and delightful
island of the Mediterranean, lying between Cilicia and
Syria: Acts xi. 19; xiii. 4 ; xv. 39 ; xxi. 3 ; xxvii. 4,
(1 JIacc. XV. 23; 2Macc. x. 13). [BB. DD.s. v.; Lewin,
St. Paul, i. 120 s<i(|.]•
κύΐΓτω: 1 aor. ptcp. Kuifras; (fr. κίβη the head [cf.
Vanicek p. 164; esp. Curtius, index s. v.]); fr. Horn,
down ; Sept. chiefly for ΊΊ7} ; to bow the head, bend for-
irard, stnnp doivn: Mk. i. 7; with κάτω added (.Vrstpli.
vcsp. 279), Jn. viii. 6, 8. [Co.MP. : ava-, πάρα-, σνγ-
κύτΓτω.] *
Κυρηναΐος, -ου. ό, (Κυρήνη, q. v.), a Cyrenman [Α. V.
(R. V. Acts vi. 9) Cyrenian], a native of Cyrene: Mt.
xxvii. 32; Mk. xv. 21; Lk. -x.xiii. 26 ; Actsvi. 9; xi. 20;
xiii. 1. [(Hdt., al.)]•
Κυρήνη, -τ/Γ, ή. Cyrene, a large and very flourishing city
of Libva Cvrenaica or Pentapolitana, about 11 Roman
miles from the sea. Among its inhabitants were greai
κ
νρήνιος
365
κύριος
numbers of Jews, whom Ptolemy I. had brought thither,
md invested with the rights of citizens : Acts ii. 10.
(BB.DD. s. V.]*
Κυρήνΐ05 (Lchm. Kvpivos [-pelras Tr mrg. WH mrg.
(pee ii, i)l), -ου, 6, Quirinl-i-lus (infull, Puhlius Sulpicius
Quirtnus [correctly Quirinius; see Woohey in Bib. Sacr.
for 1878, pp. 4ί9-513]), a Roman consul A. u. c. 742;
afterwards (not before the year 759^ governor of Syria
(where perhaps he may previously have been in com-
mand, 751-752). Wliile filling that office after Arche-
laus had been bani.slied and Juda;a had been reduced to
a province of Syria, lie made tlie enrolment mentioned
in Acts V. 37 (cf. Joseph, antt. 18, 1, 1). Therefore Luke
in his Gospel ii. 2 has made a mistake [yet see added
reff. below] in defining tlie time of this enrolment. For
in the last years of Herod the Great, not Quirinius but
Sentius Saturninus was governor of Syria. His suc-
cessor. A. u. c. 7.Ϊ0, was Quintilius Varus; and Quiri-
nius (who died in the year 774) succeeded Varus. Cf.
Win. RWB. s. vv. Quirinius and Schatzung; Strauss,
Die Halben u. die Ganzen (Berl. 18(J5) p. 70 sqq. ; Hil-
genfeld In the Zeitsclir. f. wissensch. Theologie for 1865,
Ό. 480 sqq. ; Keim i. 399 sq. [Eng. trans, ii. 115]; Scliurer,
iie Jtest. Zeitgeschichte, p. 161 s(i. ; Weizsiicker in Schen-
kel V. p. 23 sqq.; [Kei/, Com. iib. Mark. u. Luk. p. 213
sqq.; McClellan, New Testament etc., i. p. 392 sqq. ; and
Woohey in ΰ. D. Am. ed. s. v. Cyrenius, and at length
in Bib. Sacr. for Apr. 1870, p. 291 sqq.].'
Κυρία, -as, ή, Cyria, a Christian woman to whom the
second Ep. of John is addressed: 2 Jn. 1, 5, [G L Τ KC
(and WH mrg. in vs. 1)]. This prop, name is not un-
common in other writers also ; cf. Lilcke, Coram, iib. die
Brr. des Job. 3d ed. p. 444. [But R Tr al. κνρία, regard-
ing the word as an appellative, lady, (αί ywalKfi elBis
άπο τίσΟΌρςσκαίδξκα £των υπο των ανδρών κνρίαι καΧοΰι^
TU1, Epictet. enchir. 40). Cf. Westcott on 2 Jn. u. s.] *
icupiaKos, -ή, -6v, a bibl. and eccles. word [cf. W. § 34,
3 and Soph. Le.\. s. v.], ofov belonr/infj to the Lord ; 1.
i. q. the gen. of the author τοϋ κυρίου, thus κυριακον btinvov,
tlie supper instituted by tlie Lord, 1 Co. .\i. 20 ; Xoyta
κνριακά, the Lord's sayings, Pa])ias ap. Eus. li. e. 3, 39,
1 . 2. relating to the Lord, ή κυριακη ήμίρα, the day
devoted to the Lord, sacred to the niciiior\• of Christ's
resurrection, Rev. i. K.i [cf. 'κυριακη κυρίου', Teaching
14, 1 (where see Harnack) ; cf. B. D. s. v. Lord's Day ;
Bp. Lrjhfft. Ign. ad Magn. p. 129; Jliiller on Barn. ep. 15,
9] ; •γραφη\ κυρ. the writings concerning the Lord, i. e.
the Gospels, Clem. Alex., al. [Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.] •
κυρκίω ; fut. κνρΐίΰσω; 1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. sing.
κυρίίϋση; (^Kvpios); to be lord of, to rule over, hare do-
minion over : with gen. of the obj. [cf. B. 169 (147)], Lk.
xxii. 25 ; Ro. xiv. 9 ; 2 Co. i. 24 ; absol. oi κυρκίοντα,
supreme rulers, kings, 1 Tim. vi. 1 5 ; of things and forces
i. ([. to exercise influence upon, to have poirei over : \vith
<;en. of the obj., ό βάνατοί, Ro. vi. 9 : ή αμαρτία, 1 4 ; ό νόμοι,
Ro. vii. 1. (Xen., Aristot., Polyb., sqq. ; Sept. for ^pO
[etc.].) [COMP. : κατα-κνρκύω.'] '
icvpwf, -ou. ό, (prop, an adj. mJpiof -a. -n, also of two
term. ; prop. i. q. 6 ίχ^ων κΰροί, having power or author-
ity), [fr. Pind. down], he to whom a person or thing be-
longs, about which he has the power of deciding; master,
lord; used a. un'iv. of the possessor and disposer oj
a thing, the owner, (Sept. for ίΠΝ, hj,'2) : with gen. of
the thing, as τοϋ άμπίλώνος, Mt. xx. 8; x.\i. 40; Mk. xii.
9; Lk. XX. 15; toC θ(ρισμοϋ, Mt. ix. 38; Lk. x. 2; τήϊ
οικία?, the master, Mk. xiii. 35 (Judg. xix. 12) ; τοί) πώλου,
Lk. .xix. 33; τοϋ σαββάτου, possessed of tlie power to
determine what is suitable to the sabbath, and of releas-
ing himself and others from its obligations, Mt. xii. 8 ;
Mk. ii. 28 ; Lk. vi. 5. with gen. of a pers., one who has
control of the person, the master [A. V. lord} ; in the
household : δούλου, παιδίσκης, οικονόμου, ^It. χ. 24 ; Lk.
xii. 46 sq. ; xiv. 21 ; xvi. 3, 5; Acts xvi. 16, 19, etc. ; ab-
sol., opp. to oi δούλοι, Eph. vi. 5, 9 ; Col. iv. 1, etc.; in
the state, the sovereign, prince, chief: the Roman em-
peror [(on this use of κύριοι see at length Woolsey in
Bib. Sacr. for July 1861, pp. 595-608)], Acts xxv. 26 ;
once angels are called κύριοι, as those to whom, in the
administration of the universe, departments are in-
trusted by God (see ayyiXot, 2) : 1 Co. viii. 5. b.
κύριος is a title of honor, expressive of respect and rev-
erence, with which servants salute their master, Mt. xiii.
27 ; XXV. 20, 22 ; Lk. xiii. 8 ; xiv. 22, etc. ; the disciples
salute Jesus their teacher and master, Mt. viii. 25 ; xvi.
22; Lk. ix. 54; x. 17, 40; xi. 1 ; xxii. 33, 38; Jn. xi. 12;
xiii. 6, 9, 13 ; xxi. 15-1 7, 20 sq., etc., cf. xx. 13 ; Lk. .xxiv.
34; his followers salute .Jesus as the Messiah, whose
authority they acknowledge (by its repetition showing
their earnestness [cf. W. § 65, 5 a.]), κύρΐΐ, κι'ρΐί, Mt. vii.
21 ; and R G in Lk. .xiii. 25 ; employed, too, by a son in
addressing his father, Mt. xxi. 30 ; by citizens towards
magistrates, Mt. xxvii. 63 ; by any one who wishes to
honor a man of distinction, Mt. viii. 2, 6, 8; xv. 27; SIk.
vii. 28 ; Lk. v. 12 ; xiii. 25 ; Jn. iv. 11, 15, 19 ; v. 7 ; xiL
21; XX. 15; Acts ix. 5 ; xvi. 30; xxii. 8. c. this
title is given a. to God, the ruler of the universe
(so the Sept. for •:Ίκ, Πι'?», D'riSs, Γ\\ρ• and π; ; [the
term κύριο: is used of the gods from Pind. and Soph,
down, but " the address κύρκ, used in prayer to God,
though freq. in Epict. does not occur (so far as I am
aware) in any heathen writing before the apostolic
times; sometimes we find KUpif ό βίοι, and once (2, 7, 12)
he writes κύρκ ίλΐησον" (Bp. Lghtft. on Philip, p. 314
note ')]), — both with the art., ό κύριοι: Mt. i. 22 [RG];
V. 33; Mk. V. 19; Lk. i. 6, 9, 28, 46 ; Acts vii. 33 ; viii.
24; xi. 21; 2 Tim. i. 16, 18, [but see eXfor, 3]; Heb. viii.
2; Jas. iv. 15; v. 15; .Tude 5 [R G], etc. ; and without
the art. (cf. AV. 124 (1 18) ; B. 88 (77) sq.) : Mt. xxi. 9 :
xxvii. 10; Mk. xiii. 20; Lk. i. 17, 38, 58, 66; ii. 9, 23, 26,
39 ; Acts vii. 49 ; lleb. vii. 21 ; xii. G ; 1 Pet, i. 25 ; 2 Pet.
ii. 9 ; ,Jude [5 Τ Tr txt. WH txt.], 9 ; κύριοι τοϋ ουρανού
κ. τηι γηι, Mt, xi. 25 ; Lk. χ. 21 ; Acts xvii. 24 ; xvpiot
των κυρΐ€υόντων, 1 Tim. vi. 15; κύριοι 6 θ(όι, see Seat, 3
p. 288' [and below]; «cvptot ά ifof ό παντοκράτωρ. Rev.
iv. 8 ; κύριοι σαβαώθ, Ro. ix. 29 ; άγγ(λθΓ and ό oyyiXot
κυρίου, Mt. i. 20 ; ii. 13, 1 9 ; xxviii. 2 ; Lk. i. 1 1 ; ii. 9 ;
κνριο<;
366
κω\να>
Acts V. 19; viii. 2G ; xii. 7; πνήμα κνμιΌυ, Lk. iv. 18;
Acts viii. 39; with prepositions: ίπο (IvG add the art.)
Kvplovy Mt. 1. 22; ii. 15; ■πάρα κυρίου, Alt. .x.\i. 42 and
Mk. xii. 11, fr. Ps. cxvii. (c.wiii.) 23 ; παμα κυρίω, 2 I'et.
iii. 8. β. to the Messiah; and that αα. to
the Messiah regarded univ. : Lk. i. 43 ; ii. 1 1 ; Mt. xxi.
8; xxii. 45; Mk. xi. 3 ; xii. SG; Lk. xix. 34 ; xx. 44. ββ.
to Jesl'S as the Messiah, .since by his death he acquired
a special ownershij) in mankind, and after his resurrec-
tion was exalted to a partnershii) in the divine adminis-
tralion (this force of the word wlien ajiplied to Jesus
appears esp. in Acts x. 36 ; Ko. xiv. 8 ; 1 Co. vii. 22 ; viii.
(i ; Phil. ii. 9-11) : Eph. iv. 5 ; with the art. 6 κύρ., Mk.
xvi. 19sq.; Actsix. 1; Ro. xiv. 8; iCo. iv. 5; vi. 13sq.;
vii. 10, 12, 34 SI).; i.\. 5, 14; .\. 22; xi. 26 ; [.xvi. 22 G L
TTrWH]; Phil.iv.5; [2 Tim. iv. 22 TTr \VH] ; Heb.
ii. 3 (cf. 7 sqq.) ; .las. v. 7, etc. after his resurrection
Jesus is addressed by the title ό κΰρίός μου και ό θ(ός μου,
Jn. .\χ. 28. από του κυρ-, 1 Co. xi. 23 ; 2 Co. v. 6 ; προς
τον κ. 2 Co. V. 8; 6 κύριος Ίησοΰς, Acts i. 21 ; iv. 33 ; xvi.
31 ; XX. 35 ; 1 Co. xi. 23 ; [xvi. 23 Τ Tr WH] ; 2 Co. i.
14; [2 Tim. iv. 22 Lchm.] ; Rev. .xxii. 20 ; ό κύρ. Ίησ.
ΧριστΜ. 1 Co. xvi. 22[R; 23 R G L] ; 2 Co. xiii. 13 (14)
[VVIlbr. Xp.]; Eph. i. 2 ; 2 Tim. iv. 22 [R G], etc. ; ό
κύριος ήμων, 1 Tim. i. 14; 2 Tim. i. 8; lleb. vii. 14; 2 Pet.
iii. 15; Rev. xi. 15, etc. ; with Ιησούς added, [L Τ Tr
WH in 1 Th. iii. 11 and 13] ; Heb. xiii. 20 ; Rev. xxii. 21
[LTTr (yet without ήμ.)~\; so with Χριστοί, Ro. .xvi. 18
[G L Τ Tr WH] ; and Ιησούς Χριστάς, 1 Th. i. 3 [cf. B.
15.5(136)]; iii. 11 [RGJ, 13 [Rec.]; v. 23 ; 2 Th. ii. 1,
14, 16; iii. 6 [{ήμίν)]; 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co. i. 3; Gal. vi. 18
[WHbr. ημών]; Eph. i. 3; vi. 24; Ro. xvi. 24 [R G] ;
1 Tim. vi. 3, 14 ; I'hilem. 25 [T WHom. ημών] ; Phil. iv.
23 [G L Τ Tr AVH oui. ήμ•], etc. ; Ίησονς Χρίστος ό κύριος
ήμων, Ro. i. 4 ; and \ρ. Ίησ. 6 κύρ. (ημών), Col. ii. 6 ; Eph.
iii. 11 ; 1 Tim. i. 2; 2 Tim. i. 2 ; ό κύρ. κα\ ό σωτήρ, 2 Pet.
iii. 2 [cf. Β. 15.')(13i;)]; with Ίι^σοίτ Χριστοί added, 2 Pet.
iii. 18; without the art., simply κύριος: 1 Co. vii. 22, 25;
x. 21; xvi. 10; 2 Co. iii. 17; xii. 1 ; 2 Tim. ii. 24; Jas. v.
11 ; 2 Pet. iii. 10; leuotos κυρίων i. e. Supreme Lord (cf. W.
§ 36, 2; [B. § 123, 12]) : Rev. .xix. 16 (cf. in a. above;
of God, Deut. X. 1 7) ; Λvith prepositions : άπο κυρίου. Col.
iii. 24 ; κατά κύριον, i Co. xi. 1 7 ; προς κύριον, 2 Co. iii. 16 ;
συν κυρ. \ Th. iv. 17; ΰπο κυρ. 2 Th. ii. 13; on the phrase
iv κυρίω. freq. in Paul, and except in his writings found
only in Rev. xiv. 13, see (v, I. 6 b. p. 211'. The appel-
lation ό κύριοΕ, applied to Christ, passed over in Luke
and John even into historic narrative, where the words
and works of Jesus prior to his resurrection are related :
Lk. vii. 13 ; x. 1 ; xi. 39 ; xii. 42 ; xiii. 15 ; xvii. 5 sq. ;
xxii. 31 [RGLTrbr.]; Jn. iv. 1 [here TTrmrg. Ιη-
σούς] ; Ti. 23 ; xi. 2. There is nothing strange in the
appearance of the term in the narrative of occurrences
after his resurrection: Lk. xxiv. 34 ; Jn. xx. 2, 18, 20,
25 ; xxi. 7, 1 2. d. There are some who hold that
Paul (except in his quotations from the O. T. viz. Ro.
iv. 8; Lx. 28 sq.; xi. 34; 1 Co. i. 31; ii. 16: iii. 20; .x. 26 ;
2 Co. vi 17 sq.; x. 17; 2 Tim. ii. 19) uses the title κύριος
everywhere not of God, but of Christ. But, to omit
instances where the interpretation is doubtful, as 1 Co.
vii. 25 ; 2 Co. viii. 21 ; 1 Th. iv. 6 ; 2 Th. iii. 16 (ό Kvpiat
τής (Ιρήνης, cf. 6 Bfot της (ΐρήνης, 1 Th. v. 23 ; but most
of the blessings of Christianity are derived alike from
God and from Christ), it is better at least in the words
ίκάστω ως ό κύριος ξ^ωκΐν, 1 Co. iii. 5, to understand God
as referred to on account of what follows, esp. on ac-
count of the words κατά την χάριν του θ(οΰ την δυθΰσά»
ροι in vs. 10. On the other hand, κρινόμενοι ίπο τοϋ κυρ.
in 1 Co. xi. 32 must certainly, I think, be taken of
Christ, on account of x. 22, cf. 21. Cf. Gabler, Kiel'
nere theol. Schriften, Bd. i. p. 186 sqq. ; Winer, De sensi»
vocum κύριος et ό κύριος in actis et epistolis apostolonun.
Erlang. 1S28; Wesselus Scheffer, diss, theol. exhibena
disijuisitionem de vocis κύριος absolute positae in N. T.
usu. Lugd. 1846 (a monograph I have not seen) ; [Sluarl
in the Bib. Repos. for Oct. 1831 pp. 733-776; cf. Weiss,
Bibl. Theol. d. X. T. § 76 ; Cremer, Bibl.-theol. Lex. s. v.;
Ahbnl in the Journ. Soc. Bib. Lit. and Exeg. for .June
and Dec. 1881 p. 126 sqq., June and Dec. 1883 p. 101 sq
On the use of a capital initial, see WH. Intr. § 414].
The word does not occur in the [Ep. to Tit. (crit. edd.),
the] 1 Ep. of .John, [nor in the Second or the Third ; for
in 2 .Jn. 3 κυρίου is dropped by the critical editors. Syn.
see ^(σπότης, fin.].
κιιριότη?, -ijTos, ή, (6 κύριος), dominion, power, lordship ;
in the N. T. one who possesses dominion (see (ξουσία, 4 c.
β.; cf. Germ. Herrschafl, [or Milton's '^dominations"];
in Tac. ann. 13, 1 dominationes is equiv. to dominantes),
so used of angels (κύριοι, 1 Co. viii. 5 ; see κύριος, a. fin.) :
Eph. i. 21; 2 Pet. ii. 10; JudeS; plur. Col. i. 16. (Eccles.
[e. g. 'Teaching' c. 4] and Byzant. writ.)"
κυρόω, -ώ : 1 aor. inf. κυρώσαι ; pf. pass. ptcp. κεκνρω-
μίνος ; (κΰρος the head, that wliich is supreme, power,
iulluence, authority) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down ; to
male valid; to confirm publicly or solemnly, to ratify.
8ιαθήκην, pass. Gal. iii. 15; α-γάπην cXs τίνα, to make a
public decision that love be shown to a transgressor by
granting him pardon, 2 Co. ii. 8. [Comp. : προ-κυρόω.] *
κύων, κυνός ; in prof. auth. of the com. gend., in the
N. T. masc. ; Ilebr. 3^3; a dog; prop.: I^k. xvi. 21 ;
2 Pet. ii. 22 ; nietaph. (in various [but always reproach-
ful] senses; often so even in Horn.) a man of impure
mind, an impudent man, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. I. s.] :
Mt. vii. 6 ; Phil. iii. 2• Rev. xxii. 15, in which last pass,
others less probably understand sodomites (hke 0''3^3 in
Deut. x.xiii. 18(19)) [cf. B. D. s. v. Dog].*
κώλον, -ου, τό ; in (irk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down ; α mem-
ber of the body, particularly the more external and promi-
nent members, esp. the feet; in Sept. (Lev. xxvi. 30;
Num. xiv. 29, 32 sq. ; 1 S. xvii. 46 ; Is. Ixvi. 24) for -^i3
and □"IJS, a dead body, carcase, inasmuch as the mem-
bers of a corpse are loose and fall apart : so the plur. in
Heb. iii. 17 fr. Num. xiv. 29, 32, [A. V. carca-^es].'
κωλύω; irapf. 1 pers. plur. έκωλύομιν (Mk. ix. 38 TTr
txt. WH); 1 aor. ίκώλυσα ; Pass., pres. κωλύομαι; 1 aor.
ΐκωΧϋθην ; (fr. κόλοί, lopped, clipped ; prop, to cut off, cut
κώμη
367
Χάθρα
short, hence) to kinaer, prevent,forbid ; [fr. Find, down] ;
Sept. for kS3, twice (viz. 1 S. xxv. 26 ; 2 S. xiii. 13) for
;•:•ρ : τινά foil, by an inf. \\\ . § 65, 2 ^. ; cf. B. § 148, 13],
Mt. xix. 14 ; Lk. xxiii. 2; Atts xvi. 6 ; xxiv. 23 ; 1 Th.
ii. 1 6 ; Heb. vii. 23 ; τί κωΚϋα μ€ βαπτισθηναι ; what doth
liinder me from being (to be) baptized? Acts viii. 36 ;
the inf. is omitted, as being evident from what has gone
before, Mk. ix. 38 sq. ; x. 14 ; Lk. Lx. 49 ; xi. 52 ; xviii.
16 ; Acts xi. 17 ; Ro. i. 13 ; 3 Jn. 10 ; αυτόν is wanting,
because it has preceded, Lk. ix. 50 ; the ace. is wanting,
because easily supplied from the context, 1 Tim. iv. 3 ;
as often in Grk. writ., constr. w. τινά nvos, to keep one
from a thing, Acts xxvii. 43; with ace. of the thing, την
παραφρονίαν, Ιο restrain, check, 2 Pet. ii, 16; to XaXcii/
■γΚώσσαις, 1 Co. xiv. 39 ; τί, foil, by τοΟ μή, can any one
hinder the water (which offers itself), that these should
not be baptized? Acts x. 47 ; in imitation of the Hebr.
Κ^3 foil, by JD of the pars, and the ace. of the thing, to
withhold a thing from any one, i. e. to deny or refuse one
a thing: Lk. vi. 29 [B. § 132, 5] (jo μνημύον άπο σον.
Gen. xxiii. 6). [Comp. : διακωλύω.] *
κώμη, -ηί, η, (akin to κ(1μαι, κιιιμάω, prop, the common
sleeping-place to which laborers in the fields return ;
Curtius § 45 [related is Eng. homel), [fr. Hes., Hdt.
down], a village : Alt. i.\. 35 ; x. 11 ; Mk. xi. 2 ; Lk. v.
17; ix. 52 [here Tdf. πολιι/], and often in the Synopt.
Gospels; Jn. xi. 1, 30; with the name of the city near
which the villages lie and to whose municipality they
belong: Καισαρύας, Mk. viii. 27 (often so in Sept. for
mja with the name of a city ; cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p.
220* [B. D. s. V. Daughter, 7] ; also for '■ιχπ and ΠίΛχπ
with the name of a city) ; by meton. the inhabitants of
villages, Acts viii. 25 ; used also of a small town, as Beth-
saida, Mk. viii. 23, 26, cf. 22 ; Jn. i. 45 ; of Bethlehem,
Jn. vii. 42 ; for T;•, .Josh. x. 39 ; xv. 9 [Compl.] ; Is. xHi.
11. [B. D. s. V. Villages.]
κωμό-^ολι;, -eas, ή, a village approximating in size and
number of iyihabitants to a city, a village-city, a town
(Germ. Marhtflecken) : Mk. i. 38. (Strabo; [Josh,
xviii. 28 Aq., Theod. (Field)] ; often in the Byzant. writ,
of the middle ages.) *
κώμος, -ου, ό, (fr. κιΊμαι ; accordingly i. q. Germ. Ge•
lag; cf. Curtius § 45); fr. [llom. h. Merc, Theogn.]
Hdt. down ; a revel, carousal, i. e. in the Grk. writ. prop,
a nocturnal and riotous procession of half-drunken and
frolicsome fellows who after su]jper parade through the
streets with torches and music in honor of Bacchus or
some other deity, and sing and play before the houses
of their male and female friends ; hence used generally
of feasts and drinking-parties that are protracted till late
at night and indulge in revelry ; plur. Irevellingsl : Ro.
-xiii. 13 ; Gal. v. 21 ; 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Sap. xiv. 23 ; 2 Mace,
vi. 4.) [Trench § Ixi.] •
κώνωψ, -ωποΓ, ό, a gnat ([Aesch}l.], Hdt., Hippocr.
al.) ; of the wine-gnat or midge that is bred in (ferment
ing and) evaporating wine (Aristot. h. an. 5, 19 [p. 552'
5 ; cf. Bocharl, Hierozoicon, iii. 444 ; Buxtorf, Lex. talm.
etc. 927 (474" ed. Fischer)]) : Mt. .xxiii. 24.*
Kus, gen. Κώ, ή, Cos [A. V. Coos'] (now Stance or
Stanchio [which has arisen from a slurred pronuncia-
tion of f's ταν Κώ (mod. Grk.) like Stambul fr. cr τά»
πόλιν. (Hackett)]), a small island of the ^igean Sea,
over against the cities of Cnidus and Halicarnassus,
celebrated for its fertility and esp. for its abundance of
wine and corn: Acts xxi. 1, where for the Rec. Κώι»
Grsb. [foil, by subsequent editors] has restored Κώ, as
in 1 Mace. xv. 23 ; see Matthiae § 70 note 3 ; W. § 8,
2 a.; [B. 21 (19); WH. App. p. 157]. Cf. Kuester,
De Co insula, Hal. 1833; ["but the best description is
in Ross, Reisen nach Kos u. s. w. (Halle 1852) " (How-
son) ; cf. Lewin, St. Paid, ii. 96].*
Κωσάμ, ό, (fr. DDP to divine, [but cf. B. D.]), Cosam,
one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 28.*
κωφ09, -ή, -όν, (κότΓτω to beat, pound), blunted, dull;
prop. βίΚος, Horn. H. 11, 390; hence a. blunted
(or lamed) in tongue; dumb: Mt. ix. 32 sq. ; xii. 22;
XV. 30sq.; Lk. i. 22; xi. 14, (Hdt. et sqq. ; Sept. for D^K
Hab. ii. 18). b. blunted, dull, in hearing; deaf:
Mt. xi. 5; Mk. vii. 32, 37; ix. 25; Lk. vii. 22, (Horn,
h. Merc. 92; Aeschyl., Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept. for
W^n, Ex. iv. 11 ; Is. xliii. 8; Ps. x.xxvii. (xxxviii.) 14,
etc.).•
λαγχάνω : 2 aor. ΤΚαχον : 1. to obtain by lot (fr.
Horn, down) : with gen. of the thing, Lk. i. 9 [cf. B. 269
(231); W. 319 (299)]; to receive by divine allotment,
obtain : τί. Acts i. 1 7 ; 2 Pet. i. 1 ; on the constr. of this
verb w. gen. and ace. of the thing, see Matthiae § 328 ;
W. 200 (188); [cf. B. § 132, 8]. 2. to cast lots,
determine by lot, (Isocr. p. 144 b. ; Diod. 4, 63, [cf. ps.-
Dem. in Mid. p. 510, 26]) : nepl nvos, Jn. xix. 24.*
Αάξαροΐ, -ου, δ, (rabb. Iti'S, apparently the same as
iti^^S, whom God helps [cf. Philo, quis haeres §12]:
ace. to others, i. q. ITJ,' N^ without help), Lazarus ; 1.
an inhabitant of Bethany, beloved by Christ and raised
from the dead by him: Jn. xi. 1 sqq. 43; xii. 1 sq. 9 sq
17. 2. an imaginary person, extremely poor and
wretched : Lk. xvi. 20, 23-25.*
λάβρα [so RGTTr] (in Horn, 'λάθρτ;, fr. λανθάνω.
ΧαΐΧαψ
308
λαλΐα
λαθίΐν), and L [WII KC (see the latter's Praef. p. xii. and
s. V. fU^)] λάθμα (fr. \άθρο{, -a, -Of, cf. Passow [esp. L.
andS.js.v. ; W. 47; li. ti'J (til)), Άάν. secretly : Mt.
i 19; ii. 7; Jn. xi. 28; Acts xvi. 37. (From Horn,
down ; Sept.) *
λαΣλοψ ([L Τ Tr WII] not λαίλαψ [Grsb.], cf. W. § 6,
I e. ; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 37 sq.; [Chandler
§G20; Ttlf. Prolog, p. 101]), -an-ot, ij [masc. in «• Mk. iv.
37; cf. Thorn. Mag. ed. Uilschl p. -226, 4], a whirlwind,
lempesluous wind: 2 I'ct. ii. 1 7 ; \αιλαψ άνίμου (cf. Genu.
Sinrmicind \ άνεμος avu λαίλαττί πολλ»/, Horn. 11. 17, 57),
a violent attack of wind [Λ. V. " χίοπη of wind], a sijuall
[(see below)], Mk. iv. 37 ; Lk. viii. 2;). (Sept. Job .\.\I.
18; xxxviii. 1 ; Sap. v. 15, 24 ; Sir. xlviii. 9.) [Ace. to
Schmidt (ch. 55 J" 13), λ. is never a single gust, nor a
steadily blowing wind, however violent ; but a storm
breaking forth from black thunder-clouds in furious gusts,
with floods of rain, and throwing everything topsy-turvy ;
ace. to Aristot. du nmiid. 4 p. .'!:>5 •, 7 it is ' a whirlwind
revolving from below upwards.'] *
ΑΑΚΩ and λακιω, fva Χάσκω.
λακτίζω. <h: adv. Χάξ, with the heel); [fr. Horn, down];
lo /.«■/(, slrH-e wiili the heel: Acts xxvi. 14, and Rec. in
ix. 5; see κίντρον, 2.'
λαλ('ω, -ΰ; impf. 3 pers. sing. AdXti, plur. ίλάλουν;
flit, λαλήσω: 1 aor. ίΚάλησα; pf. λίλάλι;κα; Pass., pres.
λαλοΟμαι; |)f. λίλάλΐ)μαι; I M>r. ί\αΧήθηι>; 1 fut. λαλΐ)5ΐ)-
σομαι; [fr. Soph, down] ; found in bilil. (Irk. iiiuch more
f reif. than in prof, auth., in Sept. times without number for
13") or 13Ί, more rarely for TDSjt ; prop, to utter a sound
(cf. [onomatop. la-la, etc.] Germ, lallen), to emit a voice,
make one's self heard ; hence to utter or form words with
the mouth, to speak, having reference to the sound
and pronunciation of the Λvords and in general the
for m of what is uttered, while λί'γω refers to the
meaning and subs tanee of what is spoken; hence
λαλ^ΐκ is employed not only of men, esp. Λvhen chatting
and prattlinfi, but also of animals (of birds, Moseh. 3, 47 ;
of locusts, Theocr. 5, 34 ; λαλοΟσι μϊν, οΰ φράζουσι δί, of
dogs and apes, Plut. mor. ii. p. 909 a.), and so of inani-
mate things (as trees, Theocr. 27, 56 (57); of an echo,
Dio C. 74, 21, 14). Accordingly, everything Xfyo/ierai'
is also λαλού /iei'oi'. but not everything 'ΚάΚηύμΐνον is also
λίγόμίκοκ (Eu[>olis in Plut. Ale. 13 XaXfif aptcrros, aSvua-
τώτατος \(γ(ΐν) ; [the difference between the words is
evident ivhere they occur in proximity, e. g. Ro. iii. 19
οσα ό νομοκ Xeyti, τοίί cv τω νάμω λαλ^ΐ, and the very com.
€λά\ησ(ν . . . λίγων. Mt. xiii. 3, etc.]. Moreover, the
primary meaning of XoXcti/, to utter one's self, enables us
easily to understand its very frequent use in the sacred
writers to denote the utterances by which God indicates
or gives proof of his mind and will, whether immediately
or through the instrumentality of his messengers and
heralds. [Perhaps this use may account in part for the
fact that, though in classic Grk. λαλ. is the term for
light and familiar speech, and so assumes readily a dis-
paraging notion, in bibl. Grk. it is nearly if not quite free
from any such suggestion.] Cf. Dav. Schulz die Geis-
tesgaben der ersten Christen, p. 94 sqq. ; Tittmann de
Synonymis N. T. p. 79 sq.; Trench, Syn. § Ixxvi. ; [and
on class, usage Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1]. But let us look
at the N. T. usage in detail :
1. to utter a voice, emit a sound : of things inanimate,
as fipotrrnt. Rev. x. 4 ; with rat iaxnuv φωνάι added, each
thunder uttered its particular voice (the force and mean-
ing of which the prophet understood, cf. Jn. xii. 2S sq.),
ib. 3 ; σάλπιγγο! ληληύση! μ(τ' (μοϋ, λί'γωι» (Rec. λίγουσα)
foil, by direct disc. Rev. iv. 1 ; of the expiatory blood of
Christ, metaph. to crave the pardon of sins, Ileb. xii. 24 ;
of the murdered Abel, long since dead, i. q. to call for
vengeance (see Gen. iv. 10, and cf. κράζω, 1 fin.), Ileb.
xi. 4 ace. to the true reading λαλίΐ [GLTTrWlI; tlio
Rec. λαλοται must be taken as pass., in the exceptional
sense to lie talked of, lauded; see below, 5 fin. (πράγμα
κατ άγοραν λάΚοΰμίνον, Arstph. Thesm. 578, cf. iraiTit
αυτήν λαλοϋσ-ικ, Alciiihro frag. 5, ii. p. 222, 10 ed. NVag-
ner)]. 2. to speak; i.e. to use the tongue οτ the faculty
of speech; to utter articulate sounds: absoL 1 Co. xiv. II;
of the dumb, receiving the power of speech, Mt. ix. 33;
xii. 22; xv. 31; Lk. xi. 14; Rev. xiii. 15; (ι-ούϊ [T Tr \VH
om.])aXaXouf XaXfii/, Mk. vii.37; ίλάλ€ΐ 6ρθά>!, ih. Ά5 ; of a
dumbman,μιί Swapevus λαλήσαι, Lk. i. 20 (of idols, στόμα
ί;(ουσί κ- οΰ λάλήσουσι, Ps. c.xiii. 13 (cxv. 5) ; cxxxiv. 16 ;
cf. 3 Mace. iv. 16) ; to speak, i. e. not to be silent, opp. to
holding one's peace, λάλ» κ. ρ.ή σιωττήσηί, Acts xviiL
9; opp. to hearing, Jas. i. 19; opp. to the soul's in η er
experiences, 2 Co. iv. 13 fr. Ps. cxv. 1 (cxvi. 10); opp. to
ποΐ€Ϊι/ (as λόγο! to ίργου q. v. 3), Jas. ii. 12. 3. to
tfdk ; of the sound and outward form of speech r τη ίδίσ
διαλίκτω. Acts ii. 6 ; ίτίραα Koivais γλώσσακ, ib. 4; Mk.
xvi. 17 [here Tr txt. AVII txt. om. «cai».], from which the
simple γλώσσαΐϊ λαλίίκ, and the like, are to be distin-
guished, see γλωσσά, 2. 4. to utter, tell : with ace.
of the thing, 2 Co. xii. 4. 5. to use words in order
lo declare one's mind and disclose one's thoughts ; to speak:
absol., frt αυτού XaXoCrrot, Mt. xii. 46 ; xvii. 5; .xxvi. 47;
Mk. V. 35; xiv. 43; Lk. viii. 49; xxii. 47, 60; with the
advs. κακω!, καλώς, Jn. xviii. 23; is νήπίο! ίλάλουκ, 1 Co.
xiii. 1 1 ; it δράκωκ. Rev. xiii. 1 1 ; στόμα np'os στόμα, face
to face ((ierm. miindlich), 2 Jn. 12 (after the Ilebr. of
Num. xii. 8) ; «is atpa λαλ(Ίν, 1 Co. xiv. 9 ; « τοϋ τκρισ-
σίϋματος της Kap8las το στόμα λαλ(ΐ, out of the abundance
of the heart the mouth speaketh, se. so that it expresses
the soul's thoughts, Mt. xii. 34 ; Lk. vi. 45 ; « των ιδίων
XoXfic, to utter words in accordance with one's inner
character, Jn. viii. 44. with ace. of the thing: τίλαλήσω,
λαλήσητ(, etc., what I shall utter in speech, etc., Jn. xii.
50; Mt. X. 19; Mk. ix. 6 [here TTrWH άηοκριθήΐ;
.xiii. 11; Ti', anything, Mk. -xi. 23 L Τ Tr t.xt. λΥΗ ; Ro.
XV. 1 8 ; 1 Th. i. 8 ; ουκ οϊ8αμ€ν τι λαλίΐ, what he says,
i. e. what the words uttered by him mean [WR br. τί
λαλ.], Jn. xvi. 18 ; ταύτα, these words, Lk. xxiv. 36 ; Jn.
viii. 30; xvii. 1, 13 ; 1 Co. ix. 8; το λάλοίμ^νον, 1 Co.
xiv. 9 ; plur. Acts xvi. 14 (of the words of a teacher) ;
τον λίγον λάλοΰμ<νον, Mk. v. 36 [see B. 302 (259) note] ;
Xoymt, 1 Co. xiv. 19; ρήματα, Jn. viii. 20; Acts x. 44;
λαλίΰ)
S69
KaKux
παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 33; βλασφημίαί, -Mk. ii. 7 [LTTr
AVH βΧασφημίΐΥ-, Lk. v. 21 ; ρήματα βλάσφημα (ΐ$ τινα^
Acts νί, 11; ρήματα (Hec. adds βλάσφημα) κατά rifor,
Acts vi. 13; σκληρά κατά tivoSj Jude 15 ; υπέρογκα, ib. 16
(Dan. [Theodot.] xi. 36) ; τά μη δ(θντα, 1 Tim. v. 13 (ά
μη θ*μις, 2 Macc. .\ii. 14 ; fif τίνα τα μη καθήκοντα^ 3
Mace. iv. 16; [cf. \V. 480 (448)]); διιστραμμίνα. Acts
XX. 30; t6 ψ-ίϋδοΓ, .III. viii. 44; δόλον, 1 Pet. iii. 10 fr.
Ps. xxxiii. (xx.xiv.) 14 ; ά-γαθά, Mt. -xii. 34 ; σοφίαν, 1 Co.
ii. 6 sq. ; μυστήρια, ib. xiv. 2 ; foil, by οτι (eijuiv. to itfp\
τούτου, ότι etc. to speak of this, viz. that they knew him
[see on, I. 2 sub fin.]), Mk. i. 34 ; Lk. iv. 41 ; contrary
to classic usage, foil, by direct disc, Mk. xiv. 31 Ltxt.
Τ Tr WH ; Heb. v. 5 ; xi. 1 8, (but in these last two pass,
of the utterances of God); more correctly elsewhere
Λάλι^σβ Xiyaiv (in imitation of Hebr. -\OVh 13T [cf.
above (init.)]), foil, by direct disc: Mt. xiv. 27; xxiii.
1; xxviii. 18; Jn. viii. 12; Acts viii. 26; xxvi. 31;
xxviii. 25 ; Rev. xvii. 1 ; xxi. 9 ; λαλούσα κ. λίγουσα.
Rev. χ. 8. λαλώ with dat. of pers. lo speak to one, ad-
dress him (esp. of teachers) : Mt. xii. 46 ; xxiii. 1 ; Lk.
xxiv. 6; Jn. ix. 29; xv. 22; Acts vii. 38, 44; ix. 27;
xvi. 13; xxii. 9; xxiii. 9; Ro. vii. 1 ; 1 Co. iii. 1 ; xiv.
21, 28 ; 1 Th. ii. 16 ; Heb. i. 2 (1) ; of one commanding,
Mt. xxviii. 18; Mk. xvi. 19; to speak to, i. e. concerse
with, one [cf. B. § 133, 1] : Mt. xii. 46, [47 but WH mrg.
only]; Lk. i. 22; xxiv. 32; Jn. iv. 26; xii. 29; ίαυτο'ΐί
(dat. of pers.) ψάλμοϊί κ. C/iKoir (dat. of instrument),
Eph. V. 19 ; OL• λαλ(ϊι> τινι is used of one who does not
answer, Jn. xix. 10; to accost one, Jit. xiv. 27; λαλώ η
Tiw, to speak anything to any one, to speak lo one about
a thin// (of teaching): Mt. ix. 18; Jn. viii. 25 (on which
see αρχή, lb.); x. 6 ; xiv. 25 ; xv. 11 ; xviii. 20 sq. ; 2
Co. vii. 14; ρήματα, Jn. vi. 63; xiv. 10; Acts xiii. 42;
οίκοδομήν κ. παράκλησιν, things which tend to edify and
comfort the soul, 1 Co. xiv. 3; of one promuli/atinrj a
ihinfi to one, τον νόμον, pass. Heb. ix. 1 9 ; λαλώ ■προς τίνα,
to speak unto one: Lk. i. 19; [ii. 15 Lmrg. TWII];
Acts iv. 1; viii. 26; ix. 29; xxi. 39; xxvi. 14 [RG],
26, 31; Heb. v. 5, (Sk •^T\_, Gen. xxvii. 6; Ex. xxx. 11,
1 7, 22) ; λό•γθυγ npos τίνα, Lk. xxiv. 4 I ; (λάλησαν προς
αυτούς (ύαγγΐλίζόμΐνοι . . . Ίησοΰν, Acts .\i. 20; οσα hv
λαληστ] προς υμάς. Acts iii. 22; σοφίαν ί** τισιν, wisdom
among etc 1 Co. ii. 6 ; λαλ. μ(τά τίνος, to speak, converse,
with one [cf. B. § 133, 3] : Mk. vi. 50 ; Jn. iv. 27 ; ix. 37 ;
xiv. 30; Rev. i. 12; x. 8; xvii. 1; xxi. 9, 15; λαλΛν
αλήθ(ΐαν μ(τά etc. to show one's self a lover of truth in
conversation with others, Kph. iv. 25 [cf. EUicott];
λαλί'ιν π(ρΙ τίνος, concerninij a person or thinr/ : Lk. ii. 33 ;
ix. 11 ; Jn. vii. 13; viii. 26; xii. 41 ; Acts ii. 31 ; Heb.
ii. 5 ; iv. 8 ; with τιιί', dat. of pers., aihled, Lk. ii. 38 ;
Acts xxii. 10; τι ncpi τιι /ot. Acts .xxviii. 21 ; Lk. ii. 17;
iiV Tiva πιρί τίνος (gen. of the thing), to speak something
as respects a person concerning a thing, Heb. vii. 14
RG; (IS Ttva ntp'i w. gen. of pers., ibid. LTTr WIL
Many of the exx. already cited show that λαλίΐι/ is freq.
used in the N. T. of t e a c h e r s, — of .Jesus, the apostles,
and others. To those pass, may be added, Lk. v. 4 ; Jn.
i. 37 ; vii. 46 ; viii. 30, 38 ; xii. 50 ; Acts vi. 10; xi. 15 ;
xiv. 1, 9 ; xvi. 14 ; 1 Co. xiv. 34 sq. ; 2 Co. ii. 17 ; Col
iv. 3 ; 1 Th. ii. 4 ; 1 Pet. iv. 11; with ιταρρησίφ added,
Jn. vii. 26 ; xvi. 29 ; tVi ονόματι Ίησοϋ, Acts v. 40, cf.
iv. 1 7, see iVi, B. 2 a. j3. ; τω ονόματι κυρίου [where L Τ
Tr WH prefix c'v], of the prophets, Jas. v. 10 (see όνομα.
2 f.) ; Tivi (to one) iv παραβολαις, Mt. xiii. 3, 10, 13, 34 ;
cv παροιμίαις, Jn. xvi. 25 ; (ξ ίμαυτοΰ, to speak from my-
self (i. e. utter what I ray.self have thought out), Jn. xii.
49; άπ ϊμαυτοϋ (see από, IL 2 d. aa. p. 59'), Jn. vii. 1 7
S(j. ; xiv. 10; xvi. 13 ; (V t^s yrjs (see ίκ, Π. 2 sub fin.),
Jn, iii. 31 ; eV του κόσμου, 1 Jn. iv. 5 (see κόσμοι, 6) ; «V
ϋ(οϋ, prompted by divine influence, 2 Co. ii. 1 7 ; λαλ(ίρ
τον λόγον, to announce or preach the word of God or the
doctrine of salvation : Mk. viii. 32 ; Acts xiv. 25 [here
in Τ WH mrg. foil, by els τήν Πίργην; see fts, A. I. 5 b.] ;
xvi. 6 ; Phil. i. 14, etc. ; τον λόγ. τοϋ θ(οΰ. Acts iv. 29,
31 ; Tivi r. λόγον, Mk. ii. 2 ; Acts xi. 1 9 ; with παραβοΚαΙι
added, Mk. iv. 33 ; τινί τον λόγ. τοϋ κυρίου [WH txt.
ifoO], Acts xvi. 32 (Barn. ep. 19, 9) ; τινί τ. λόγ. τοΰ
θ(οϋ. Acts xiii. 46 ; Heb. xiii. 7 ; τα ρήματα τοΰ θ(οΰ, Jn.
iii. 34 ; τά ρήμ, τής ζωής. Acts ν. 20 ; προς τίνα το ιϋαγγ.
τον β(θν, 1 Th. ii. 2 ; λαλ<ΐν κ. διδάσκΐΐν τά π(ρι τοΰ ^Ιησον
[R G κυρίου], Acts xviii. 25 ; το μυστήριον τοΰ Χρίστου,
Col. iv. 3. λαλί ΐν is used of the Ο. Τ. prophets uttei^
ing their predictions: Lk. xxiv. 25; Acts iii. 24;
xxvi. 22 [cf. B. § 144, 20, and p. 301 (258)] ; 2 Pet. L
21; Jas. v. 10; of the declarations and prophetic an-
nouncements of God: Lk. i. 45, 55; Jn. ix. 29; Acts vii.
6 ; esp. in tlie Ep. to the Heb. : i. 1, 2 (1) ; iii. 5 ; iv. 8;
xi. 18 ; xii. 25 ; God, the Holy Spirit, Christ, are
said λάλ(ΐν ίν τιν» : Heb. i. 1, 2 (1); Mt. x. 20; 2 Co.
xiii. 3 ; δια στόματοΓ τινοΓ, Lk. i. 70 ; Acts iii. 21 ; δια
Ησαίου, Acts xxviii. 25 ; of the sayings of angels: Lk.
ii. 17, 20; Jn. xiL 29; Acts x. 7; xxiii. 9; x.xvii. 25;
the Holy Spirit is said λάλήσιιν what it will teach the
apostles, Jn. xvi. 13 ; ό νόμος as a manifestation of
God is said λαλ«ν Tifi Λνΐιαΐ it commands, Ro. iii. 19;
finally, even voices are said λαλίΐν. Acts x.xvi. 14
[RG] ; Rev. i. 12 ; x. 8. i. q. to make known by speak-
ing, lo speak oj, relate, with the implied idea of extolling:
Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. xiv. 9; Lk. xxiv. 36; Acts iv. 20;
[cf. Heb. xi. 4 Rec. (see 1 fin. above)]. 6. Since
λαλ»ν strictly denotes the act of one who utters words
with the living voice, when writers speak of them-
selves or are spoken of by others as λαλοΰι /rfr, they are
conceived of as present and addressing their readers
Avith the living voice, Ro. vii. 1 ; 1 Co. ix. 8 ; 2 Co. xi.
17, 23 ; xii. 19; Heb. ii. 5 ; vi. 9 ; 2 Pet. iii. 16, or λαλίΐ»•
is used in the sense of romninnthng, Heb. vii. 14. The
verb λαλ{ίν is not found in the Epp. to Gal. and 2 Thess.
[CoMP. : δια-, fV, κατά-, προσ-, συλ-λαλίω; cf. the cat-
alogue of comp. in Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1 § 60.]
λαλιά, -of, ή. (λιίλοί, cf. Btlm. Ausf. Sprchl. § 119
Anm. 21), in prof. auth. [fr. Arstph. down] loquacity,
talkativeness, talk (Germ. Gerede) [see λαλ/ω, init.] ; in
a good sense conversation ; in the N. T. 1. speech,
i.q..'iiori/: Jn. iv. 42. 2. dialect, mode of speech, pro•
Χαμά
870
\αμβάι>ω
nunciation, [W. 23]: Mk. xiv. 70 Rec; Mt. xxvi. 73;
speech which discloses the speaker's native country : hence
of the speech by which Christ may be recognized as hav-
ing come from heaven, Jn. viii. 43 [where cf. Meyer].*
λάμα [RG (on the accent see Tdf. Proleg. 102)] in
Mt. xxvii. 46 and λαμμί [RG] Mk. XV. 34, (the llebr.
word npS fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 1), whi/; in the former
pass. Lchm. reads \ημά, in the latter Xcfia, Tdf. λ(μά in
both, Tr WH λιμό in Mt. but λαμά in Mk. ; the form in
η OT e reproduces the Chald. SoS or noS ; on the re-
markable diversity of spelling in the codd. cf. Tdf. on
each pass., [WH on Mt. 1. c.], and Fritzsche on Mk. p.
693.•
λαμβάνω; impf. ίλάμβανοι•; fut. λήψομα», (LTTrWH
λήμιίτομαι, an Alexandrian form ; sec s. v. M, μ) ; 2 aor.
(λαβον (2 pers. plur. once [in Tdf. 7 after Β *] ίΚάβίΐτ(,
ι Jn. ii. 27; see reff. s. v. άπίρχομαι, init.), imjjv. λά;3ί
(Rev. X. 8 sq.), not \aβi (W. § 6, 1 a. ; B. 62 (54)) ;
pf. (ΐ\ηφα, 2 pers. (ΐ\ηφα{ [and fΐ\ηφes (Rev. xi. 17
WII; see κοπιάω) ; on the use of the pf. interchangeably
with an aor. (Rev. v. 7; viii. 5, etc.) cf. B. 197 (170) ;
AV. 272 (25 J) ; Jcbb in Vincent and Dickson's Mod.
Grk. 2ded. App. §§ 67, 68], ptcp. (ϊληφά)!; [Pass., pres.
ptcp. 'λαμβανόμ(Ρο! ; pf. 3 pers. sing. Λληπται, Jn. viii. 4
Wllmrg. (rejected section)]; Sept. hundreds of times
for np'^, very often for XUJ, also for ipS and several
times for tnx ; [fr. Ilom. down] ;
I. to take,'i. e. 1. to take with the hand, lay hold
of, any pers. or tiling in order to use it : absol., where
the context shows what is taken, Mt. xxvi. 26 ; Mk. xiv.
22 ; (τον) άρτον, Mt. xxvi. 26 ; Acts xxvii. 35 ; το βιβλΐον.
Rev. V. 7-9, [see B. and W. u. s.] ; μάχαφαν (grasp,
lay hand to), ^It. xxvi. 52, and in many other e.xx.
After a circumstantial style of description (see ai>-
ίστημι, II. 1 c.) in use from Horn, down (cf. Passow s. v.
C; [L. and S. s. v. I. 11]; :\Iatthiae § 558, Anm. 2; [W.
§ 65, 4 c.]), the ptcp. Χαβών with ace. of the object is
placed before an act. verb where it does not always seem
to us necessary to mention the act of taking (as λα^ώκ
Kvae χι'ψα [cf. our 'he took and kissed'], Hom. Od. 24,
398) : Mt. .xiii. 31, 33 ; xvii. 27; Mk. i.x. 3G ; Lk. xiii. 19,
21 ; Jn. xii. 3 ; Acts ii. 23 Rec. ; ix. 25 ; xvi. 3 ; λαβών το
αίμα • . . τον Xnov €ρράντισ€ (efjuiv. to τω ηιματι . . . τον
λ. ίρΡ-)> Ilcb. ix. 19 ; or the verb \αβ(1ν in a finite form
foil, by καΐ precedes, as ΓΚαβί τον Ίησοϋν και (μαστ!γωσ(ν,
Jn.xix.l; add,ib.40; xxi. 13; Rev.viii.5; alsoXa^cii»
Toi» άρτον . . . κα\ βα\(1ν etc., Mt. XV. 26; Mk. vii. 27;
ίΧαβον . . . rat (ποίησαν, Jn.. xix. 23. metaph., άφηρμην
(see the word, 2), Ro. vii. 8, 1 1 ; ΰπό8ίΐγμά Tims (gen.
of the thing) τίνα, to take one as an example of a thing,
for imitation, Jas. v. 10; to take in order to wear, τα
ιμάτια, i. e. to put on: Jn. xiii. 12 (ϊσθητα, ίπο8ήματα,
Hdt. 2, 37; 4, 78); μορφην δούλου, Phil. ii. 7. to lake
in the mouth : something to eat, Jn. xiii. 30 ; Acts ix. 19 ;
1 Tim. iv. 4, (cf. I.at. cibum capio, to lake food) ; to take
anything to drink, i. e. drink, swallow, vSap, Rev. xxii.
17 ; to drink, το o|or, Jn. xix. 30 ; οϋκ ίλαβί, he did not
take it, i. e. refused to drink it, Mk. xv. 23. to take
up a thing to he carried ; to take upon one's self: το»
σταυρόν αΰτοϋ, Mt. χ. 38 [L mrg. aprf] ; to take ti'ith one for
future use : Sprovs, Mt. xvi. 5, 7 ; λαμπάδα!, Mt. xxv. 1;
(λαιον μ(θ' (αντών, ibid. 3. 2. tu lake in order to carry
away: without the notion of violence, ras άσθ(ν(ία!, i. e.
to remove, take away, Mt. viii. 17; v/'iui the notion of
violence, to seize, lake away forcibly : Alt. v. 40 ; Rev. iii.
11 ; την (Ιρηνην ίκ [Rec. απο, (WH br. ««)] τ^γ y^r. Rev.
vi. 4. 3. to take what is one's own, to lake to one's
self, to }nake one's own; a. to ciaim, procure, for one's
self: Ti, Jn. iii. 27 (opp. to what is gi ven) ; ίαυτώ βασι-
Xcmi/, Lk. xix. 1 2 ; with ace. of the pers. to associate with
one's self as companion, attendant, etc. : λαβών τ. aneipav
(ρχιται. taking with him the band of soldiers (who:;'; aid
he might use) he comes, Jn. xviii. 3 (στρατον λα3'ι>ν
ίρχιται. Soph. Trach. 259) ; λαμβ. yvvaiKa, to take i. e.
marry a tcife, Mk. .xii. 19-22; Lk. xx. 28-31, ((Jen. iv.
19, etc. ; Xen. Cyr. 8, 4, 16 ; Eur. .\lc. 324 ; with ίαυτΰ
added, Gen. iv. 19; vi. 2, and often). b. of that
which when taken is not let go, like the Lat. capio, i. q.
to seize, lay hold of, apprehend : τινά, Alt. xxi. 35, 39 ;
Mk. .xii. 3, 8, and very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down ; trop τι, i. e. to get possession of, obtain, a thing,
Phil. iii. 12 [cf. W. 276 (259)] ; metaph., of affections
or evils seizing on a man (Lat. capio, orcupo) : τίνα ΐλα-
β(ν (κστασις, Lk. v. 26 ; φόβος, Lk. vii. IG (very often so
even in Horn., as τρόμος €λλαβ€ γνία, Π. 3, 34 ; μ( ^μ(ρος
ai/jfl, 3, 44G ; χόλος, 4, 23; Sept. Ex. xv. 15; Sa[). xi.
13 (12)) ; ττνίίιμα (i. e. a demon), Lk. ix. 39; πιφασμός,
1 Co. X. 13. c. to take by craft (our catch, used of
hunters, fisliermen, etc.) : oibiv, Lk. v. 5 ; trop. Ttva, to
circumvent one by fraud, 2 Co. xi. 20 ; with &ολφ added,
ib. xii. 16. d. to take to one's self lay hold upon, lake
possession of, i. 6. to appropriate to one's self: 4αυτω τη»
τιμήν, Heb. v. 4. e. Lat. capio, catch at, reach after,
strive to obtain : τι παρά τίνος (gen. of pers.), .In. v. 34,
41 ; alternating with ζητιΊν, ib. 44. f. to take a thing
due ace. to agreement or law, to collect, gather (tribute) :
τα δίδραχμα, Mt. xvii. 24 ; τίλη από tivos, ib. 25 ; δικάτας,
Ileb. vii. 8 sq. ; καρπούς, Alt. xxi. 34 ; πάρα των ytapyui»
άπο τοϋ καρπού, Mk. xii. 2. 4. to take i. e. to admit,
receive: τίνα ραπίσμασιν, Mk. xiv. 65 LTTrWII [cf.
I>at. verherihus aliquem accipere'], but see βάλλω, 1 ; τίνα
fi's τα ίδια, unto his own home [see Ιδιος, 1 b.], Jn. xix. 27 ;
fi'r υΐκίαν, 2 Jn. 10; fit το πλοΐον, Jn. vi. 21. to receive
what is offered ; not to refuse or reject : Ttra, one, in
order to obey him, Jn. i. 12; v. 43; xiii. 20; τ», prop.,
to receive, Mt. xxvii. 6 ; trop. : τον Xoyov, to admit or re-
ceive into the mind, Mt. xiii. 20; Mk. iv. 16, (for which
in Lk. viii. 1 3 δίδονται) ; την μαρτνρίαν, to believe the testi-
monv,.Tn. iii. 11,32 sq.; τη pή/lατύτι^of,.Jn. xii. 48; xvii. 8.
In imitation of the Hebr. I2"3D Ηψ) (on the various senses
of which in the O. T. cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 915 sq.),
■πρόσωπον λαμβάνω, to receive a person, give him access
to one's self, i. e. to regard any one's power, rank, external
circumstances, and on that account to do some injustice
orneglect something: used of partiality [A.V. to ac-
cept the person"], Lk. xx. 21 ; with ανθρώπου added, GaL
\αμβάνω
371
Λαοίί>
ϋ. 6, (Lev. xix. 15; Mai. ϋ. 9, etc. ; θαύμαζαν τό πρόσαητ-,
Deut. χ. 17; Job x.\.\ii. 22) ; [cf. Βρ. Lghtf t. on Gal. 1.
c.]. 5. to lake, i. q. to choose, select : nm « τίνων,
pass. Heb. v. 1. 6. To the signification to lake may
be referred that use, freq. in Grk. auth. also (cf. Passow
s. V. B. d. fin. ; [L. and S. II. 3]), by which λαμβάνιιν
joined to a subst. forms a periphrasis of the verb whose
idea is expressed by the subst. : λαμβ. αρχήν Ιο take be-
(jinninri, i. q. άρχομαι to begin, lleb. ii. 3 (Polyb. 1, 12, 9,
and often; Ael. v. h. 2, 28 ; 12, 53, and in other auth.) ;
\ήθην τινός, to forget, 2 Pet. i. 9 (Joseph, antt. 2, 6, 10;
9, 1 ; 4, 8, 44 ; Ael. v. h. 3, 18 sub fin. ; h. anim. 4, 35) ;
ίττήμνησίν Tivos, to be reminded of a thing, 2 Tim. i. 5 ;
Ttelpav Tivos, to prove anylhiny, i. e. either to make trial of:
ης sc. θαλάσσης, which they attempted to pass through,
Heb. -xi. 29 ; or to have trial of, to experience : also with
gen. of the thing, ib. 36, (in both senses often also in
class. Grk. ; see nt'ipa, and Bleek, Br. a. d. Heb. ii. 2 p.
811); συμβούλων λαμβ. Ιο lake counsel,!, q. σvμβoυ\fΰ-
€σθαι, to deliberate (a combination in imitation apparently
of the Lat. phrase consilium capere, although that sig-
nifies to form a plan, to resolve) : Mt. xii. 14 ; xxii. 15;
xxvii. 1, 7 ; xxviii. 12 ; θάρσος, to take, receive, courage.
Acts xxviii. 15 ; τό χάραγμα rivos, i. q. χαράσσομαι τ(, to
receive the mark of, i. e. let one's self be marked or
stamped with : Rev. .\iv. 9, 1 1 ; χ1.χ. 20 ; xx. 4.
II. to receive (what is given) ; to gain, get, obtain:
absol., opp. to αΙτ€Ϊν, Mt. vii. 8 ; Lk. xi. 10 ; Jn. xvi. 24 ;
opp. to StSavai, Acts XX. 35 ; Mt. x. 8 ; with ace. of the
thing, Mt. XX. 9 sq. ; Mk. x. 30 ; [Lk. xviii. 30 L txt.
WHtxt. Trmrg.]; Jn. vii. 39; Acts ii. 38; x. 43; Ro.
i. 5 ; V. II ; 1 Co. ii. 12 ; ix. 24 sq. ; 2 Co. xi. 4 ; Gal.
iii. 14; Heb. ix. 15; [xi. 13 R G, see eVnyycXta, 2 b. ;
cf. W. 237 (222)]; Jas. i. 12; v. 7 ; 1 Pet. iv. 10; Rev.
iv. 11 ; V. 12, and many other exx. ; μισθάν, Mt. x. 41;
Jn. iv. 36; 1 Co. iii. 8, 14 ; ίλ^ημοσννην. Acts iii. 3 ; ΐ\(ος,
Heb. iv. 16; τόποι» απολογία s, .\cts xxv. IG; την ΐπίσκο-
ηήν. Acts i. 20; 8ιάδοχον, Acts xxiv. 27 (successorem nc-
cijiio, Plin. ep. 9, 13) ; τό Ίκανον πάρα τίνος (gen. of pers.),
Acts xvii. 9 (see Ικανός, a. fin.) ; of punishments : κρίμα,
Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec; Mk. xii. 40 [cf. W. 183 (172)];
Lk. XX. 47 ; Jas. iii. 1 ; with dat. incommodi added, ίαυτω,
Ro. xiii. 2 (δΐκί)!/, Hdt. 1, 115; Eur. Baccli. 1312 ; ποινάς,
Eur. Tro. 360). οίκοδομήν, to receive edifying, i. q. οίκο-
ίομοϋμαι, 1 Co. xiv. 5; πιριτομί^ν, \. q. ττίριτίμνομαι, Jn. vii.
23; τΊ ϊκ τίνος [?J, Jn. i. 16; ίΚ άναστάσίως τονς ΐ•ΐκρονς,
substantially i. q. to receive, get liark. Ileb. xi. 35 [see ex,
II. 6] ; f<, a part of a thing [.«ee €/c, II. 0], Rev. xviii. 4 ;
t! παρά τίνος (gen. of pers.), [Lk. vi. 31 Τ Tr txt. WH] ;
Jn. X. 18; Acts ii. 33 ; iii. 5; xx. 21; xxvi. 10; Jas. i.
7; 1 Jn. iii. 22 RG; 2 Jn. 4; Rev. ii. 28 (27) ; aπό Tti-of
(gen. of pers.), 1 Jn. ii. 27: [iii. 22 LTTrWII]; on
the difference betw. παρά and από τίνος λαμβ. cf. W.
370 (347) note; [B. § 147, 5; yet see Bp. Lghtft. on
Gal. i. 12] ; υπό τίνος, 2 Co. xi. 24 ; ιτως ίίλι^φαί, hotc thou
hast received by instruction in the gospel, i. e. hast learned.
Rev. iii. 3. The verb λαμβάνω does not occur in the
Epp. to the Thess , Philera., Titus, nor in the Ep. of Jude.
[CoMP. : άνα^ ώτι-, σνν-αντι- (-μια), άπο-, (πι-, κατά-, μ^τα-,
πάρα-, σνν-τταρα-, προ-, προσ-, σνν-, (nivirfpl•-, νπα-Χαμβάνώ.
Syx. see δίχομαι, fin.]
Λάμεχ, ό, (Hebr. ^IpS), Lameck, the father of Noah
(Gen. V. 25 sqq.) : Lki ui. 36.*
λαμμά, see λαμά.
λαμητά?, -ά8ος, ή, (λάμπω, cf. our lamp), [fr. Aeschyl.
and Thuc. down], Sept. for T3S ; 1. a torch : Rev.
iv. 5 [where A. V. lamps'] ; viii. 10. 2. α lamp, the
flame of which is fed with oil : Mt. xxv. 1, 3 sq. 7 sq. ; Jn.
xviii. 3 ; Acts xx. 8. [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xlvi. ; Eders-
heini, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 455 sqq. ; Becker, Charicles,
Sc. ix. (Eng. trans, p. 153).]*
λομχρόϊ, -ά, -Of, (λάμπω) ; a. shining; brilliant:
αστήρ. Rev. xxii. 16 (Hom. Ή. 4, 77, etc.) ; clear, transpar-
ent, Rev. xxii. 1. b. splendid, magnificent, [A. V.
gorgeous, bright (see below)] : ΐσθής, Lk. xxiii. 11 ; Acts
X. 30; Jas. ii. 2 sq.; λίνον [LTrWH XWov], Rev. xv.
6 ; βίσσινος, xix. 8; neut. plur. splendid [(R. V. sumpt-
uous)] things, i. e. elegancies or luxuries in dress and
style. Rev. .xviii. 14. The word is sometimes used of
briUiant and glistening whiteness (hence λαμπρά τήβιννα,
toga Candida, Polyb. 10, 4, 8 ; 10, 5, 1) ; accordingly the
Vulg. in Acts x. 30; Jas. ii. 2; Rev. xv. 6 renders it by
candidus; and some interpreters, following the YuXg.
("indutum veste alba"), understand 'white apparel' to
be spoken of in Lk. xxiii. 11 [A. V. gorgeous; (see
above)]; cf. Keim iii. p. 380 note [Eng. trans, vi. 104].*
λαμπρότη?, -ητος, ή, brightness, brilliancy : τοΟ ήλΙου,
Acts xxvi. 13. [From Hdt. (metaph.) down.]*
λαμΐΓρώ5, adv., splendidly, magnificently: of sumptuous
Uving, Lk. xvi. 19. [From Aeschyl. down.]*
λάμπω; fut. λάμψ-ω (2 Co. iv. 6 Ltxt. TTrWH); 1
aor. (λαμψα; [fr. Hom. down] ; to shine : Mt. v. 15 sq. ;
xvii. 2 ; Lk. xvii. 24 ; Acts xii. 7 ; 2 Co. iv. 6. [CoMP.:
«<-, π^ρι-λάμπω.] *
λανθάνω (lengthened form of λήθω) : 2 aor. ΐλαθο»,
(whence Lat. latere) ; Sept. several times for dS> ;, etc.;
[fr. Hom. down] ; to be hidden : Mk. vii. 24 ; Lk. viii. 47 ;
Tifii, to be hidden from one. Acts xxvi. 26 ; 2 Pet. iii. 5
(on which see θίλω, 1 sub fin.), 8 ; ace. to the well-
known classic usage, joined in a finite form to a ptcp.
i. q. secretly, unawares, without knowing, (cf. Matthiae
§ 552 β.; Passow s. v. ii. p. 18'; [L. and S. s. v. A. 2];
W. § 54, 4 ; [B. § 144, 14]) : ίλαθον ξινίσαντις, have un-
awares entertained, Heb. xiii. 2. [Comp. : tic-, «πι-
(-μαΟ•]*
λαξίυτόϊ, -ή. -όν. (fr. λαξ(ΰω, and this fr. λάς a stone,
and ξίω to polish, hew), cul out of stone : μνήμα, Lk. xxiii.
53, and thence in Evang. Nicod. c. 11 fin.; (once in
Sept., Deut. iv. 49 ; Aquila in Num. xxi. 20; xxiii. 14;
Deut. .xxxiv. 1 : [.losh. xiii. 20]; nowhere in Grk. auth.).*
AaoSiKcCa \_-κία Τ WH (see I, t) ; R G L Tr accent
-8ίκ(ΐα, cf. Chandler § 104], -ας, ή, Laodicea, a city of
Phrygia, situated on the river Lycus not far from Co-
lossae. After having been successively called Diospolis
and Rhoas, it was named Laodicea in honor of Laodice,
the wife of Antiochus II. [b. c. 261-246]. It was de•
ΛαοΒ
iKfvi
372
λατρίΐιω
stroyed by an earthquake, a. d. 6G [or earlier, see Bp.
Lghtfi. Coin, on Col. and Pbilern. p. 38 sij.], together
with ColossiE and llierapolia (see ΚοΚοσσαΊ) ; and after-
wards rebuilt by Marcus Aurelius. It was the seat of a
Christian church: Col. ii. 1 ; iv. 13, 15 sq. [(on the 'Ep.
to (or ' from ') the Laodiceans ' see Bp. Lghtfl. Coin,
u. s. pp. 274-300)] ; Rev. i. 1 1 ; iii. 14, and in the [Rec]
subscription of the 1 Ep. to Tim. [See Bp. Lr/htfl. Com.
on Col. and rhileni. Intr. § 1 ; Forbiger, Hndbch. d.
alten Geogr. 2te Ausg. ii. 347 sq.]•
AooSiKcvs, -«'(OS, 0, a Laodicean, inhabitant of Laodicea :
Col. iv. 16, and Kcc. in Uev. iii. 14.*
Xciis, -oO, 0, [(cf. Curtius § .530)]; Sept. more tlian
fifteen hundred times for DJi; rarely for Ό and DsS;
[fr. llom. down]; pi-nple; 1. a people, tribe, nation,
all those who are of the same stock and language : univ.
of any people ; joined with γλώσσα, φυ\η, ΐθνοί. Rev. v.
!); vii. 9; .\. 11 ; xi. 9; .\iii. 7 [Hec. cm.] ; .\iv. 6; .wii. 1.5,
(see γλώσσα, 2) ; Trai^ft oi λαοί, Lk. ii. 31 ; Ro. .\v. 11 ;
esp. of the people of Israel : Mt. iv. 23 ; xiii. 15 ; Mk. vii.
6; Lk. ii. 10 ; .In. xi. 50 (where it alternates with ϊθνος) ;
xviii. 14; Acts iii. 23 ; Heb. ii. 17; vii. 11, etc. ; with
'laparfK added, .\cts iv. 10 ; distinguished fr. τοΪ£ (θνισιν,
Acts xxvi. 17, 23; Ro. xv. 10; the plur. \aoi Ισμαήλ
[R. V. the peoples of Is.^ seems to be used of the tribes
of the people (like D'3i', Gen. xlix. 10; Deut. xxxii. 8;
Is. iii. 13, etc.) in Acts iv. 27 (where the plur. was ap-
parently occasioned by Ps. ii. 1 in its reference to Christ,
cf. 25) ; oi πpfσβίτfpoι τοΐι λαού, Mt. xxi. 23 ; xxvi. 3,
47; xxvii. 1 ; ot γραμματείς toD λίΐοΟ, Alt. ii. 4; oi πρώτοι
ToO \αοΰ, Lk. xix. 47 ; το πρ{σβυτ(μιον τοΟ \αοϋ, Lk. xxii.
6t) ; άρχοντα τοΰ λαοΟ, .\cts iv. S. with a gen. of the
possessor, τοΰ ΰ(οϋ, αϋτοϋ, μοΰ (i. e. τοΰ θ(οϋ, llebr.
Π1'Π'_ D>', DTlSsn D;'), the people whom <Joil has chosen
for himself, selected as peculiarh) his own : Ileb. xi. 2,5;
Mt. ii. 6; Lk. 1. 68; vii. 16; without the art. Jude 5 (Sir.
xlvi. 7; Sap. xviii. 13) ; cf. W. § 19, 1 ; the name is trans-
ferred to the community of Christians, as that which
by the blessing of Christ has come to take the place of
the theocratic people of Israel, Ileb. iv. 9 ; Rev. xviii. 4 ;
particularly to a church of Christians gathered from
among the Gentiles, Acts xv. 14 ; Ro. ix. 25 sq. ; 1 Pet.
ii. 10; with elt περιποίησιν added, 1 Pet. ii. 9; περιου-
σίας, Tit. ii. 14, cf. Acts xviii. 10 ; Lk. i. 17. 6 λαός the
people (of Israel) is distinguished from its princes and
rulers [(1 Esdr. i. 10; v. 45; Judith viii. 9, 11 ; etc.)],
Mt. xxvi. 5 ; Mk. xi. 32 [here WH Tr mrg. read όχλος} ;
xiv. 2; Lk. xx. 19; xxii. 2; xxiii. 5; Acts v. 26, etc.; from
the priests, Heb. v. 3; vii. 5, 27. 2. indefinitely,
of a great part of the population gathered together anij-
where : Mt. xxvii. 2.5 ; Lk. i. 21 ; iii. 15; vii. 1, 29 ; viii.
47 ; ix. 13 ; xviii. 43, etc. ; to πλήθος τοΰ λαού, Lk. i. 10.
[The Gospels of Alk. and .Tn. use the word but three
times each. .Si'X. see 8ήμος, fin.]
λάρνγξ, -770s, 0, the throat (Etym. Magn. [557, 16]:
λάρνγξ piv hC oi λαλοϋμεν . . . φάρνγξ Se 81 oi έσθίομεν
*■ πίνομεν) : of the instrument or organ of speech (as
Ps. V. 10 ; Prov. viii. 7; Sir. vi. 5 (4)), Ro. iii. 13, where
the meaning is, their speech threatens and imprecate*
destruction to others. (Arstph., Eur., Aristot., Galen.
at. ; Sept. several times for ]<"\j ; oftener for :|Π, ilie
palate.) '
Λα<Γα(α, -ας, ή, (I>chm. Άλασσα, TrWH Αασία [see
WH. App. p. 160], Vulg. Thalassa), Lasa;a, Acts xxvii.
8, a city of Crete not mentioned by any ancient geograph-
ical or other writer. But this need not excite surprise,
since [jrobably it was one of the smaller and less impor-
tant among the ninety or a hundred cities of the island ;
cf. Kuinoel ad loc. [Its site was discovered in 1856,
some five miles to the E. of Fair Havens and close to
Cape Leonda ; see Smith, Voyage and Shipwr. of St. Paul,
(3d ed. p. 259 sq.) 4th ed. p. 262 sq.; Alford, Grk. Test,
vol. ii. Proleg. p. 27 sq.] *
λάβ-κω : 1 aor. ίλάκησα ; (cf. Bttm. Ausf. Sprchl. ii. p.
233; Kruger ii. 1, p. 134; Kiihner § 343, i. p. 858;
[Veitch s. v.] ; W. 88 (84)) ; 1. to crack, crackle,
crash : Horn., Hes., Tragg., Arstph. 2. to burst
asunder with a crack, crack open: Acts i. 18; S δράκων
φυσηθ(\ς (after having sucked up the poison) (λάκησ€
και άπίθανί και (ζεχυθη 6 ιος αντον και η χολή, Act.
Tliomae § 33, p. 219 ed. Tdf.•
λατομ€ω, -ώ : 1 aor. (λατόμησα ; pf. pass. ptcp. λβλατο-
μημινος; (fr. λατόμος a stone-cutter, and this fr. λάς a
stone, and τίμνω) ; to cut stones, to hew out stones : Mt.
xxvii. 60 ; Mk. xv. 46. (Sept. several times for 2ΪΠ ■
once for Π"13, Ex. xxi. 33 sq(|. ; Diod., [Dion. H., Strab.,
al. (cf. So/)h. Lex. s. v.)], Justin Mart.)*
XarpeCa, -at, ή, {λατριΰω, (]. V.) ; 1. in Grk. auth.
seroice rendered for hire; then any service or ministra-
tion (Tragg., Plut., Lcian.) ; the service of God: τον
Seov, Plat. apol. 23 b. ; καταφυγεΐν προς θΐων ΐνχάς τ€ κάί
λατριίας, ibid. Phaedr. p. 244 e. ; servitus religionis, quam
λατρίίαν Graeci vocant, .\ugust. civ. del 5, 15. 2.
in the (jrk. Bible, the service or worship of God ace. to
the requirements of the levilical law (Hebr. m^JJ. Ex. xii.
25 sq., etc.) : Ro. ix. 4; Heb. ix. 1, (1 Mace, ii^ 19, 22);
λατριίαν προσφίριιν τω θιω [to offer service to God] i. q.
βυσίαν προσφίρειν ch λατρεία•/ [to offer a sacrifice in
service], Jn. xvi. 2 ; επιτιλεΊν τας λατρείας, to perform the
sacred services (see επιτελίω, 1), spoken of the priests,
Heb. ix. 6 ; univ. of any worship of God, ή λογική λ. Ro.
xii. 1 [cf. W. § 59, 9 a.] ; (of the worship of idols, 1 Mace,
i. 43).•
λατρενω; !iit. λατρεύσω; 1 aor. ελάτρευσα; (λάτρις Λ
hireling, Lat. latro in Knn. and Plant. ; λάτρον hire) ;
in Grk. writ. a. to serve for hire; b. univ. to
serve, minister to, either gods or men, and used alike of
slaves and of freemen ; in the N. T. to render religious
sertHce or homage, to worshi/>,(HehT. Ί2}.', Deut. vi. 13;
X. 12; .losh. xxiv. 15); in a broad .=ense, λατρ. θεά: Mt.
iv. 10 and Lk. iv. 8, (after Deut. vi. 13); Acts vii. 7;
xxiv. 14; xxvii. 23; Heb. ix. 14; Rev. vii. 15; xxii. 3;
of the worship of idols. Acts vii. 42; Ro. i. 25, (Ex. xx.
5 ; xxiii. 24 ; Ezek. xx. 32). Phrases relating to the
manner of worshipping are these : θεώ [so R G] λατρεΰεα
πνεύματι (ilat. of instr.), with the spirit or soul, Phil. iii. 3,
Χαχοι/οί'
373
λ^7«
but LTTrWH have correctly restored ητίύ/ιατι θίοΰ,
i. e. prompted by, filled with, the Spirit of God, so that
the dat. of the pers. (τώ θ<ω) is suppressed ; tv τω ττνίϋ-
ματΊ μου fV τ^ (iayy-, in my spirit in delivering the glad
tidings, Ro. i. 9 ; τώ θ^ω iv καθαρή σννιι^ησα, 2 Tim. i. 3 ;
μίτά αιδοΰ; και tiXafidas or [so L Τ Tr WII] μίτ (ΰλαβ.
κ. 8iovs, Heb. xii. 28 ; tv όσιάτητι κ. δικαιοιτΰντ], Lk. i. 74 ;
(without the dat. ίίώ) νηστύαϋ κ. ht^afOi, Lk. li. 37;
Xarpcifiv, absol., to wors/iiji God [cf. W. 593 (552)], Acts
x.wi. 7. in the strict sense ; to perform sacred services,
to offer gifis, to worship God in the observance of the riles
instituted for his worship: absol., Heb. L\. 9; x. 2; spec.
of the priests, to officiate, to discharge the sacred office :
with a dat. of the sacred thing to which the service is
rendered, Heb. viii. 5; .\iii. 10. [(Eur., al.)]*
λάχανον. .ου, TO, (fr. \αχαίνω to dig ; hence herbs grown
on land cultivated by digging ; garden-herbs, as opp. to
wild plants); any potherb, vegetables: Mt. xiii. 32; Mk.
iv. 32; Lk. xi. 42; Ro. xiv. 2. (1 K. xx. (x.\i.) 2 ; Gen.
ix. 3 ; Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 2, etc. ; Arstph., Plat., Plut.,
al.)•
Αφβαΐοί, see Oatdaios.
λcγcώv and (so T, Tr [but not in ^h. xxvi. 53], WH
[see fin.], also Lchm. in Mk. v. 9, 15) Xrytii' (cf. 7\lf. ed.
7 Proleg. p. 1.; [esp. ed. 8 p. 8:3; B. 16 (15)]; so, too,
in inscrr. in Boeckh ; [Diod., Plut., al.]), -ώνος, ή, (a Lat.
word), a legion (a body of soldiers whose number differed
at different times, and in the time of Augustus seems to
have consisted of 6S2G men [i. e. 6100 foot, and 726
liorsL•]): .Mt. xxvi. 53; Mb. v. 9, 15; Lk. viii. 30 [here
WH' (ex errore) Xtyiwv (cf. Chandler § 593)].»
λΐγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and
pres. pass, are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. iXeyav, .In. xi.
5G Tdf. [cf. ΐχω, init.]) : I. in its earliest use in
Horn, to lay (like Lat. lega. Germ, legen ; cf. J. G. Mid-
ler in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 1 27 siiq. ; Curtius
§ 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep ; 1. to colled,
gather; to pick out. 2. to lag with, count with; to enu-
merate, recount, narrate, describe ; [cf. Eng. tale. Germ.
ziihlen']. H. to put word to word in speaking, join
\vords together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλίίι/, see
under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in II. 2, 222
[yet cf. Schmi,lt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S.
s. V. B. 11. 2] ; often in Pind., and by far the most com.
use in Attic ; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for
i^X; often also for DXJ (saying, dictum) ; very rarely for
">3"1 ; and so in N. T. 1. univ. a. absol. ίο. •./«αλ•;
Acts xiii. 15 ; xxiv. 10; to say, foil, by direct disc, Mt. ix.
34 ; xii. 44 ; xvi. 2 [here Tbr. WH reject the pass.] ; Mk.
iii. 30; Lk. V. 39[WHbr.thecl.]; Jn. i. 29, 38; [1 Co.
xii. 3 L Τ Tr AVH] ; .las. iv. 13, and very often ; the di-
rect discourse is preceded by ότι recitative, Mt. ix. 18 [T
om. ότι]; Mk. i. 15 [Tom. \VH br. Xry.]; ii. 12 [L and
WHbr. Xry.]; iii. 21 sq.; v. 28 ; vi. 14sq. 35; vii. 20; Lk.
i. 24; iv. 41; xvii. 10; Jn. vi. 14; vii. 12; viii. 33 ; ix. 9,
41 ; xvi. 17; Acts ii. 13; xi. 3; Heb. x. 8; Rev. iii. 17,
etc.; foil, by ace. with inf., Lk. xi. 18 ; xxiv. 23 ; Jn. xii.
29; Acts iv. 32; xxviii. 6, etc. ; folL by ότί, Lk. xxii. 70 ;
Jn. viii. 48; xviii. 37; 1 Tim. iv. 1, (for other exx. see
2 a. below); foil, by an indir. question, Mt. xxi. 27;
Mk. xi. 33; Lk. .xx. 8. b. The N. T. writers, par-
ticularly the historical, are accustomed to add the verb
\fytu> foil, by direct disc, to another verb which already
contains the idea of speaking, or which states an opin-
ion concerning some person or thing ; as το ρηθίν . . .
προφήτου \iyotn-oc, Mt. ii. 1 7 ; viii. 1 7 ; .xii. 1 7 ; xiii. 35 ;
κηρύσσων κ- [L Τ ΛΥΙΙ om. Tr br. και] \(γωυ, Mt. iii. 2;
κράζ(ΐν και Xtyitv, Mt. ix. 27; xxi. 15; Mk. x. 47; Lk.
iv. 41 [here L Τ Tr mrg. κραύγαζαν] ; Acts xiv. 15 ; ■προσ-
φων(1ν κ- \(y€iv, Mt, xi. 1 7 ; l.k. vii. 32 ; άπΐκρίθη και
Xt'yft, Mk. vii. 28; aivtiv τ. 6eov κ. \eyeiv, Lk. ii. 13;
■γογγΰζιιν κ. \eyeiv, Jn. vi. 42. to verbs of speaking,
judging, etc., and those which denote in general the
nature or the substance of the discourse reported,
the ptcp. λί'γωι/ is added (often so in Sept. for "iokS
[λν. 535 sq. (439). cf. 602 (560)]) foil, by direct disc. :
άπ(κ/ιβη Uywv, Mt. xxv. 9, 44 s({. ; Jlk. ix. 38 [T WH
om. λί^ωι/] ; Acts xv. 13; Rev. vii. 13, etc. (see αποκρί-
νομαι, 1 c.) ; fme λ., Mk. [viii. 28 Τ WII Tr mrg.]; xii.
2G ; Lk. XX. 2, (in Grk. writ, ΐφη Χίγων) ; ΆόΧησι \εγωι>
(see λαλώ, 5) ; ϊμαρτΰρησι, Jn. i. 32 ; KtKpaye λ- ib. 15 ;
(8ί8ασκ€ λ. Mt. V. 2; [ίβόησί or] άν(βόησ( λ., Mt. x.x\ii.
4ΰ; Lk. ix. 38; άνίκραξί λ-, Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 34 [T
\VH om. Tr br. λί'γ.] ; also after aheiv, Rev. v. 9 ; xv. 3 ;
a'lpdv [or eVa/p.] φωνήν, Lk. xvii. 13; Acts xiv. 11 ; βαχ/•
^ofeif, Mt. viii. 27; ix. 33 ; xxi. 20; nfter προφτμιίην,
Mt. XV. 7; yoyyi((iv, Mt. xx. 12; €Ϊπ(ν iv παμαβολαΐς,
Mt. xxii. 1 ; παμίθηκ€ παραβοΧήν, Mt. .xiii. 24; 8ΐ€μαρτύ•
ρατο, Heb. ii. 6 ; iπr]yyfKτaι, Ileb. xii. 26, and a great
many other exx. It is likewise added to verbs of every
kind which denote an act conjoined with speech; as
έφάνη, φαίνεται Xtyav, Mt. i. 20 ; ii. 13; προσ^κϋν^ι Xtyav,
Mt. viii. 2; ix. 18; .xiv. 33; xv. 25; add, Mt. viii. 3 ; ix.
29 ; xiv. 15 ; Mk. v. 35 ; Lk. i. 66 ; v. 8 ; viii. 38 ; .x. 1 7 ;
XV. 9; xviii. 3; xix. 18; Acts viii. 10, 18 sq. ; xii. 7;
xxvii. 23 sq. ; 1 Co. xi. 25, etc. On the other hand, the
verb λίγω in its finite forms is adiled to the participles
of other verbs : Mt. xxvii. 41 ; Mk. viii. 12 ; xiv. 45, 63,
67; XV. 35; Lk. vi. 20; Jn. i. 36; ix. 8; Acts ii. 13;
Ileb. viii. 8; άποκριθΛς Xiyti, Mk. viii. 29; ix. 5, 19; x.
24, 51 ; .xi. 22, 33 [L Tr mrg. br. Τ Tr WII om. άττ.] ; Lk.
iii. 11 ; xi. 45 ; xiii. 8, (nowhere so in Acts, nor in Mt.
nor in Jn.) ; κράξας Xfy«, Mk. v. 7 [Rec. ftn-e] ; ix. 24.
typafe λί'γων (ibS7 ΙΠΤ, 2 Κ. X. 6 ; 2 S. xi. 15, etc.),
he wrote in these words, or he wrote these words [A. V.
retains the idiom, he wrote saying (cf. e. below)] ; Lk.
L 63; 1 Mace. viii. 31; xi. 57; Joseph, antt. 11, 2.
2 ; 13, 4, 1 ; exx. fr. the Syriac are given by Gesenius in
Rosenmuller's Repertor. i. p. 135. ϊπ(μ•^ΐ or άπίστ(ϊΚ(
Xcyav, i. e. he ordered it to be said by a messenger : Mt.
xxii. 16; xxvii. 19; Lk. vii. llisq. ; xLx. 14; Jn. xi. 3;
Acts xiii. 15; xvi. 35, (see in (Ιπον, 3 b.) ; otherwise in
Mt. xxi. 37 ; Mk. xii. 6. c. ή φωνή Xeyovσa : Mt. iii.
17 ; xvii. 5 ; Lk. iii. 22 [G L Τ Tr WH om. Xry.] ; Rev.
vi. 6 ; X. 4, 8 ; xii. 10 ; xiv. 1 3, etc. Xiyeiv φωηι μeyά\τ|,
Rev. V. 12 ; viii. 13 ; cV φωνίί μ., ib. χίτ. 7, a. d. In
λΓ/ω
374
λέγω
accordance with the Ilebr. conception which regards
thought as internal speech (see ctTroc, S), we find Xtyeiv
fv ί'αυτώ, to sai/ within one's self, i. e. to lliinic icitk one's
self: Mt. iii. 9; L\. 21; Lk. iii. 8; €v τή καρδία αϋτοϋ,
Rev. xviii. 7. e. One is said to speak; λίγΕίν, not only
when he uses language orally, but also when lie ex-
presses himself in writing [(cf. b. sub fin.)]: 2 Co. vii.
3; viii.8; ix. 3, 4 ; xi. IG, 21 ; Γΐύΐ. iv. 11, and often in
Paul; so of the writers of the O. T. : Ko.x. 16,20; xi. 9;
XV. 12 ; Xe'yfi ή γμαφή. Ho. iv. 3 ; x. 11 ; xi. 2 ; Jas. ii. 23,
etc. ; and simply Xt'yij, sc. ή λίγουσα, i. e. ή γραφή (our il is
said): Ro.xv. 10, [11 I/l'rmrg.]; Gal. iii. Hi; Eph. iv.
8; v. 14; cf. W. 522 (486 sq.) and 588 (547) ; B. §12Π,
16; λ<'ν«, sc. ό β(6ς, 2 Co. vi. 2 ; Xeyfi Δαυίδ eu ψάλμω,
Acts ,\iii. 35 ; Xiyet ό if of, lleb. v. ti ; cV τώ Ώσηί, Κο.
ix. 25; eV'HXi'a, Ho. xi. 2; (v Δαυίδ, lleb. iv. 7; Xi'yfi
TO πν€νμα το aytoi». lleb. iii. 7 ; 6 νόμος Xeyft. 1 Co. xiv.
34; Ti, 1 Co. ix. 8; Ro. iii. 19. f. Xiyav is used of
every variety of speaking: as of inquiry, Mt. ix.
14; XV. 1 ; xvii. 25 ; xviii. 1 ; Mk. ii. 18; v. 30 sq. ; Lk.
iv. 22; vii. 20; Jn. vii. 11 ; ix. 10; xix. 10; Ro. x. 18
sq.; xi. 1, 11, etc.; foil, by fi interrog. [seeti, II. 2], Acts
xxi. 37; Xe'yti rtf, i q. one bids the question be asked,
Mk. xiv. 14; Lk. xxii. 11 ; of reply, Mt. xvii. 25; xx.
7; Mk. viii. 24 [Lmrg fin-ti/l ; Jn. i. 21 ; xviii. 17; of
acclaim, Rev.iv 8, 10; of exclamation. Rev. xviii.
10,16, of entreat y, Mt. XXV. 11 ; Lk. xiii. 25 ; i. q.
to set forth in language, make plain, Heb. v. 11. g.
Xeya> w. acc. of the thing, to say a thing : S, Lk. ix. 33 (i.
e. not knowing whether what he said was appropriate
or not) ; Lk. xxii. 60 ; to express in ivords, Philem. 21 ;
τούτο, Jn. viii. 6 ; xii. 33 ; τοιαϋτα, lleb. .xi. 14 ; ταϋτα,
Lk. viii. 8; xi. 27, 45; xiii. 17, Jn. v. 34; Acts xiv.
18; 1 Co. ix. 8; τάδί (referring to what follows), Acts
xxi. 11; Rev. ii. 1, 8, 12, 18, iii. 1, 7, 14; W, u-hat * Ro.
X. 8; xi. 4; Gal. iv. 30, 1 Co. xiv. 16; πολλά, Jn. xvi.
12; TaXfyojaeiO, Lk. xviii. 34 ; Acts xxviii. 24 : Heb. viii.
1 ; υπό TiiOf, Acts viii. 6; xiii. 45 [LTTrWlI ΧαΧου-
fiiVois] : x.xvii. 1 1 ; λίγω άλήθίίαν, Jn. viii. 45 sq. ; Ro.
ix. 1 ; 1 Tim. ii. 7 ; άληθΐ;, Jn. xix. 35 ; άνθρώπινον, Ro.
vi. 19; σϋ Xt'yfir, sc. αυτό, prop, thnu sayesi, i. e. thou
grantest u'hat thou askest, equiv. to it is just as thou sayest ;
to be sure, certainly, [seecHrof, 1 c] : Mt. xxvii. 11 ; Mk.
XV. 2; Lk. xxiii. 3, cf. xxii. 70; Jn. .xviii. 37, [(all these
pass. WH mrg. punctuate interrogatively)]; παραβολήν,
to put forth, Lk. xiv. 7 ; to αυτό, to profess one and the
same thing, 1 Co. i. 10 cf. 12. h with dat. of the
pers. to whom anything is said : foil, by direct discourse,
Mt. viii. 20; xiv. 4; xviii. 32; xix. 10 : Mk. ii. 17, 27;
vii. 9; viii. 1 ; Jn. i. 43 (44), ii. 10. and scores of other
exx. ; Xe'yfti/ τινί ■ κύρΐ€, κίιρκ, to salute any one as lord,
Mt. vii. 21 ; impv. λίγι μηι, Acts xxii. 27 (generally
(Ιπίμοι. ημίν) ; plur. Lk. x. 9 ; άμην λc'yω νμ'ιν, I solemnly
declare to you, (in the Gospels of Mt. Mk. and Lk.) ; for
which the Greek said fV όληθιίας λ/γω ύμΐν. Lk. iv. 25,
and λeyω νμιν αληθώς, ib. i.\. 27 ; in Jn. everywhere
[twenty-five times, and always uttered by Christ] άμην
dfiijii λί'γω σοι (ϋμίν), I most solemnly declare to thee
(you), i. 51 (52); iii. 11, etc.; with the force of aa
asseveration X«'ya τικί, without αμήν: Mt. xi. 22;
xii. 36; xxiii. 39; Lk. vii. 9, 2S; χ. 12; xii. 8; xvii. S4 ;
xviii. 8, 14 ; va'i λίγοι ϊιμϊν, Mt. xi. 9 ; Lk. vii. 26 ; xi. 51 ;
.xii. 5; λίγω σο», Lk. xii. 59. with a dat. of the thing,
in the sense of commanding (see 2 c. below), Mt.
xxi. 19; Lk. xvii. 6 ; in the sense of asking, i m ρ 1 ο Γ-
Ι η g, Lk. xxiii. 30: Rev. vi. 16. λίγω nvi τι, to tell a tiling
to one : Mt. x. 27 ; 2 Th. ii. 5 ; τήν άλιΊθιιαν, .Jn. xvi. 7 ;
μυστηριον, 1 Co. XV. 51; παραβο^ήν, Lk. .wiii. 1 ; of a
promise, Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6; i. (i- to unfold, ex-
plain, Mk. x. 32 ; foil, by indirect disc, Mt. xxi. 27 ; Mk.
xi. 33 ; Lk. xx. 8 ; nvi τίνα, to speak to one about one,
Jn. viii. 27; Phil. iii. 18. i. λίγω full, by preposi-
tions : irpat τνα, which denotes — either to one (etjuiv. to
the dat.) : foil, by direct disc, Mk. iv. 41 ; x. 26 ; Lk.
viii. 25; ix. 23; xvi. 1; Jn. ii. 3; iii. 4; iv. 15; vi. 5;
viii. 31; Acts ii. 7 [R G], 12: xxviii. 4, 17; foil, by ϋη
recitative, Lk. iv. 21 ; irpos τινά τι, Lk. xi. 53 RG L Tr
mrg. ; χ xiv 10 ; — or as respects one, in reference to one [cf.
B. § 133,3; W. §31.5; 405(378); Kruger § 48,7, 13;
Bleek on lleb. i. 7 : Aleyer on Ro. x. 21] : Lk. xii. 41 ;
lleb. i. 7, [al. add 8, 13; vii. 21]; μ(τά τίνος, to speak
with one, Jn. xi. 56 , jrfpi τίνος, of, concerning, one [cL
W. § 4 7, 4], Mt. x.xi. 45 ; Jn. i 47 (48) ; ii. 21 ; xi. 13 ;
xiii. 18, 22 ; Heb. ix. 5; irtpl τίνος, on, Lk. xxi. 5; τ\
π(ρί τίνος, .Τη. i. 22 ; i.x. 1 7 ; Acts viii. 34 ; Tit. ii. 8 ; τινι
ntpi τίνος, Mt. xi. 7 , Mk. i. 30; viii. 30 [Lchm. (ΐπωσινί ;
ττρός τίνα irtpi τίνος, Lk. \\\. 24 ; ίπίρ τίνος, to speak for,
on behalf of, one, to defend one. Acts xxvi. 1 [LTTr
Wll mrg. TTtpi] ; iVi τίνα, to speak in reference to, oj
[see ini. C. L 2 g. yy. ; B. § 147, 23], one, Heb. vii. 13 ;
fit Tiva (n βλάσφημων), against one, Lk. xxii. 65 ; in
speaking to have reference to one, speak with respect to
one, Acts ii. 25 [cf. W. 397 (371)] ; in speaking to refer
(a thing) to one, with regard to, Eph. v. 32 ; eh τον κόσμον,
to the world (see eir, A. I. 5 b.), Jn. viii. 26 [L Τ Tr Wll
Χαλώ]. k. with adverbs, or with phrases having ad-
verbial force : καλώί, ί•/ί//)/Λ/, Jn. viii. 48; xiii. 13; ωσαύ-
τως, Mk. xiv. 31 ; τ* κατά σνγγνωμην, ίπιταγήν, l)y Λvay of
advice [concession (see συγγνώμη)], by way of command,
1 Co. vii. 6 ; 2 Co. viii. 8 ; κατά ανθρωπον [see άνθρωπος,
1 c], Ro. iii. 5 ; Gal. iii. 15 ; 1 Co. ix. 8 ; Αυκαονιστί, Acts
xiv. 11. In conformity with the several contexts where
it is used, λίγω, like the Lat. dico, is 2. specifi-
cally a. i. q. to asseverate, affirm, aver, maintain :
foil, by an acc with inf.,Mt. xxii. 23 ; Mk. xii. 18 ; Lk.
XX. 41 ; xxiii. 2; xxiv. 23; Acts v. 36; viii. 9; xvii. 7;
xxviii. 6; Ro. xv. 8; 2 Tim. ii. 18; Rev. ii. 9; iii. 9;
with the included idea of insisting on,πfpιτfμv(σθaι{thaί
you must be [cf. W. § 44, 3 b. : B. § 141, 2]), Acts xv.
24 Rec ; with the simple inf. without a subject-acc, Lk.
xxiv. 23 ; Jas. ii. 14 ; 1 Jn. ii. 6, 9 ; foil, by ότι (where
the acc. with inf. might have been used), Mt. xvii. 10;
Mk. ix. 11; xii. 35; Lk. ix. 7; ,Tn. iv. 20; xii. 34; 1 Co.
XV. 12 ; Xe'yω Tici uri etc. to declare to one that etc. [cf. B.
§141,1]: Mt.iii.9; v.20,22; xii. 36; xiii. 17; xvii. 12;
xxi. 43 [WH mrg. om. ότι] : xxvi. 21 ; Mk. ix. 13 ; xiv. 18
\€ΐμμα
375
XetTovpyta
25, 30 ; Lk. iii. 8 ; χ. 12 ; xiii. 35 [Tr WH om. L br. Sn] ;
xiv. 24 ; xviii. 8 ; xix. 26, 40 [WII txt. om. Tr br. 5τι] ;
xxi. 3 ; xxii. 16, 37, etc.; Jn. iii. 11 ; v. 24 sq. ; viii. 34 ;
x. 7 [Tr λ\Ή om. L br. ort] ; xvi. 20 ; Gal. v. 2 ; λί'γω
τινά, ΟΤΙ, by familiar attraction [cf. W. § 66, 5 a.; B.
§ 151, 1] for λί'γω, οτι τις: Jn. viii. 54; ix. 19; x. 36
(where for νμ^Ις Xc'yere, οτι ούτος, ov . . , anttjTfike, βλα-
σφημά; the indirect discourse passes into the direct, and
βλασφημΐ'ις is put for βλασ-φημύ [Β. § 141,1]). b.
i. q. to leach : with dat. of pers. foU. by direct disc, 1 Co.
vii. 8, 12; τι rtw, Jn. xvi. 12; Acts i. 3 ; τοϋτο folh by
Sti, 1 Th. iv. 15. c. to exhort, advise; to command,
direct : with an ace. of the thing, Lk. vi. 46 ; λί'γουσι (sc.
αντά) κ. oil ποιοϋσιν, Mt. xxiii. 3; W τινι, Jlk. xiii. 37;
Jn. ii. 5 ; τινί foil, by an imperative, Mt. v. 44 ; Mk. ii.
11 ; Lk. vii. 14 ; xi. 9 ; xii. 4 ; xvi. 9 ; Jn. ii. 8 ; xiii. 29 ;
1 Co. vii. 12 ; λί'γω with an inf. of the thing to be done
or to be avoided [cf. AV. § 44, 3 b.; B. § 141, 2] : Mt.
V. 34, 39 ; Acts xxi. 4, 21 ; Ro. ii. 22 ; xii. 3 ; foil, by
ίνα. Acts xix. 4 ; ττ(ρί τίνος (gen. of the thing) foil, by
ίνα, 1 Jn. V. 16, (see Ίνα, U. 2 b.); foil, by μη with subjunc.
2 Co. xi. 16. in the sense of ask-ing, seeking, entreating :
with dat. of pers. foil, by an impv., 1 Co. x. 15 ; 2 Co.
vi. 13; foil, by an inf. [W. 316 (296 sq.) ; B. u. s.], Rev.
X. 9 [Rec. impv.]. χαίρων rtvl λί'γω, to give one a greet-
ing, bid him ivelcome, salute him, 2 .In. 10 sq. (see χαίρω,
fin.). d. to point out with words, intend, mean, mean
to say, (often so in Grk. writ. ; cf. Passow s. v. p. 30» ;
[L. and S. s. v. C. 10]) : rtra, Mk. xiv. 71 ; Jn. vi. 71 ;
τί, 1 Co. X. 29 ; TovTo foU. by direct disc. Gal. iii. 1 7 ;
toCto foil, by ότι, 1 Co. i. 12. e. to call by a name, to
call, name ; i. q. καλώ τιιό with ace of pred. : τί μ( 'Ktyfis
ayadov; Mk.x.18; Lk.xviu.l9; add, Mk. xii. 37; Jn.v.
18 ; XV. 15 ; Acts x. 28 ; [1 Co. xii. 3 RG] ; Rev. ii. 20 ;
pass, with predicate nom. : Mt. xiii. 55 ; 1 Co. viii. 5 ;
Eph. ii. 1 1 ; 2 Th. ii. 4 ; Heb. xi. 24 ; ό λίγόμίνος, with
pred. nom. he that is surnamed, Mt. i. 16 (so xxvii. 17) ;
X. 2; Jn. .\x. 24 ; Col. iv. 11 ; he that is named: Jit. ix.
9 ; xxvi. 3, 14 ; xxvii. 16 ; Mk. xv. 7 ; Lk. xxii. 47 ; Jn.
ix. 11 ; cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 31 sq. ; of things, places,
cities, etc. : το όνομα Xtyerai, Rev. vui. 1 1 ; ptcp. called,
Mt. ii. 23 ; xxvi. 36 ; xxvii. 33 ; Jn. iv. 5 ; xi. 54 ; xix.
13 ; Acts iii. 2; vi. 9 ; Ileb. ix. 3 ; with ίβραΐστί added,
Jn. xix. 13, 17; [cf. v. 2 Tdf.] ; applied to foreign words
translated into Greek, in the sense that is : Mt. xxvii.
3Λ ; Jn. iv. 25 ; xi. 16; xxi. 2; also & λϊγ^ται, Jn. xx. 16 ;
ό λίγεται ίρμηνίυόμινον [L TrWII μfθcpμ■^, Jn. i. 38 (39) ;
^κρμην. λί'γίται. Acts ix. 36. f. to speak' out, speak'
of, mention : τί, Eph. v. 12 (with which cf οκνώ κα'ι Xtytiv,
Plat. rep. 5 p. 465 c.) ; [Mk. vii. 36 Τ Tr txt. WII. On
the apparent eUipsis of λί'γω in 2 Co. ix. 6, cf. W. 596
sq. (555) ; B. 394 (338). CoMP. : άντι-, δια- (-μαι), eV,
(πι-, κατά-, πάρα- (-μαι),προ-, συλ-λί'γω; cf. the catalogue
of comp. in Schmidt, Syn. cli. 1, CO.]
λίΐμ.μα [WII λίμμα, see their App. p. 154 and cf. I, »],
-ΤΟΓ, TO, (λίίπω), a remnant: Ro. xi. 5. (Hdt. 1, 119;
Plut. de prefect, in virtut. c. 5 ; for jTiXC?, 2 K. xix. 4.) •
Xcws, -ίι'α, -tioi/. [(cf. Lat. /eii.<)], smooth, level: opp.
to τραχύς, of ways, Lk. iii. 5. (Is. xl. 4 Alex. ; Prov. u.
20 ; IS. xvii. 40 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
XcCiru; [2 aor. subj.3 pers. sing, λίττ^, Tit. iii. 13T\VH
mrg. ; pres. pass, λίίπομαι; fr. Hom. down]; 1.
trans, to leave, leave behind, forsake; pass, to be lefi be-
hind (prop, by one's rival in a race, hence), a. to
lag, be inferior: iv μη^^νΐ, Jas. i. 4 (Hdt. 7, 8, 1); [al.
associate this ex. with the two under b.]. b. to be
destitute of. to lack : with gen. of the thing, Jas. i. 5 ; ii.
15, (Soph., Plat., al.). 2. intrans. to be wanting o:
absent, to fail: XtlTiei τΐ τινι, Lk. xviii. 22; Tit. iii. 13,
(Polyb. 10, 18, 8; al.) ; τα λίίττοντα, the things that re-
main [so Justin Mart. apol. 1, 52, cf. 32; but al. are
tcantitig2. Tit. i. 5. [CoMP. : άπο-, δια-, eV, eVi-, κατά-,
iv -κατα-, nepi-, ύπο-λβίπω.] *
λίΐτουργί'ω, ptcp. λί4του/>γώΐ' ; 1 aor. inf. XeiTovpyrjaai;
(fr. λίΐτοι/ργόί, q. v.) ; 1. in Attic, esp. the orators,
to serve the state al one's own cost ; to assume an office
which must be administered at one's own expense; to dis-
charge a public office at one's own cost ; to render public
service to the state, (cf. Melanchthon in Apol. Confes.
August, p. 270 sq. [Corpus Reformat, ed. Bindseil (post
Bretschn.) vol. xxvii. p. 623, and F. Francke, Conf. Luth.,
Pt. i. p. 271 note (Lips. 1846)] ; Wolf, Dem. Lept. p.
Ixxxv. sqq. ; Bockh, Athen. Staatshaush. i. p. 480 S(jq. ;
Liihker, Reallex. des class. Alterth. [or Smith, Diet, of
Grk. and Rom. Antiq.] s. v. λίΐτουργία). 2. univ.
to do a service, perform a work ; Vulg. ministro, [A. V.
to ministerl ; a. of the priests and Levites who were
busied with the sacred rites in the tabernacle or the
temple (so Sept. often for niU' ; as Num. xviii. 2 ; Ex.
xxviii. 31,39; xxix. 30; Joel i. 9, etc. ; several times for
15|•, Num. iv. 37, 39 ; xvi. 9 ; xviii. 6 sq. ; add, Sir. iv. 14
[xiv. 15; 1. 14; Judith iv. 14]; 1 JIacc. x. 42; [Philo,
vit. Moys. iii. 18; cf. ύμΐν λίΐτουργοΰσι κ- airoX την \ci-
Tovpytav των ηροφητών κ• Βι^ασκάλων (of bishops and
deacons), Teacliingof the Twelve Apost. c. 15 (cf. Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 2 etc.)]) : Heb. x. 1 1. b. λ. τω κνρίω,
of Christians serving Christ, whether by prayer, or by
instructing others concerning the way of salvation, or in
some other way : Acts xiii. 2 ; cf. De Wette ad loc. c.
of those who aid others with their resources, and re-
lieve their poverty : τινι ev τινι, Ro. xv. 27, cf. Sir. x. 25.•
λίΐτουργία, -as, ή, (fr. XciTovpyew, q. v.) ; 1. prop.
a puhlic'office which a citizen undertakes to administer at
his own expense : Plat. Iegg.l2 p. 949 c; Lys. p. 163, 22;
Isocr. p. 391 d.; Theophr. Char. 20 (23), 5; 23 (29), 4,
and others. 2. univ. any service : of military ser-
vice, Polyb.; Diod. 1,63. 73; of the service of work-
men, c. 21 ; of that done to nature in the cohabitation
of man and wife, Aristot. oec. 1, 3 p. 1343S 20. 3. in
biblical Greek a. the service or ministry of the priests
relative to the prayers and sacrifces offered to God: Lk. i.
23 ; Heb. viii. 6 ; Lx. 21, (for Din;? , Xum. viii. 22 ; xvi. 9 ;
xviii. 4; 2 Chr. xx.xi. 2 ; Diod. 1,21; Joseph.; [Philo de
caritat. § 1 sub fin.; al. ; see Soph. Lex. s. v.]); hence
the phrase in Phil. ii. 1 7, explained s. v. θυν'ια, b. fin.
[(cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44)]. b. α
\€novpyiKO<;
87β
XevKO'i
gifi or benefaction, for the relief of the needy (see Xr«-
τονργίω, 2 c.): 2 Co. ix. 12; Phil. ii. 30.*
XwTovp^iKOs, -ή, -όν, (XdTovpyta), relating to the perform-
ance of service, employed in vimistering : σκήη, Num. iv.
[12], :i6, etc.; στολαί, Ι•'χ. .\xxi. 10, etc.; πνίΰματα, of
angels cxeoutiiii; (iod"s behests, Ilcb. i. 14 ; also αϊ λ«Γ.
τοΰ θ(οΰ ίυνάμαί, Ignat. ad Philad. 9 (longer recension) ;
TO vav τΐΚηθος Twc ayytKwv αντοΰ, πωί τω β(\ηματι αντον
λίΐτουργονσι παρ(στώτ(ί, Clem, lloni. I Cor. 34, 5, cf.
Dan. (Theodot.) vii. 10. (Not found in prof, auth.) *
λίΐτουργόϊ, -oC, o, (fr. ΕΡΓΩ i. e. ϊργύζομΜ, and unused
Xfi-ros i. c]. XijiVor equiv. to δτ^/ιόσιοί public, belonging to
the state (llcsych.), and this troni λ(ώί Attic for Xaot),
Sept. for iTlC/p (Piel ptcp. of n^iy) ; 1. a public
minister; a servant of the stale : τήΓ jroXfws, Inscrr. ; of
the lictors, Plut. Rom. 26 ; (it has not yet been found in
its primarj• and proper sense, of one who at Athens as-
sumes a public office to be administered at his own ex-
pense [cf. L. and S. s. v. I.] ; see Xfiroupye'o)). 2.
univ. a minUter, servant : so of military laborers, often
in Polyb. ; of the servants of a king, 1 K. x. 5; Sir. x. 2;
[of Joshua, Josh. i. 1 Alex.; univ. 2 S. xiii. 18 (cf. 17)];
of the servants of the priests, joined with ύπηρίται, Dion.
Hal. antt. 2, 73 ; των ayiaf, of the temple, i. e. one busied
with holy things, of a priest, Heb. viii. 2, cf. [Pliilo, alleg.
leg. iii. § 46]; N^eh. x. 39; Sir. vii. 30; των β(ων, of
heathen priests, Dion. H. 2, 22 cf. 73; Plut. mor. p.41 7 a.;
Ίι;σοϋ Χριστού, of Paul likening himself to a priest, Ro.
XV. 16; plur. roC θ(ον, tho.se by whom God administers
his affairs and executes his decrees : so of magistrates,
Ro. xiii. 6 ; of angels, Heb. i. 7 fr. Ps. ciii. (civ.) 4 [cf.
Philo de caritat. § 3] ; της χάριτοί τοΰ θιοϋ, those whose
ministry the grace of (iod made use of for proclaiming
to men the necessity of repentance, as Noah, Jonah :
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 8, 1 cf. c. 7 ; τον άπόστοΧον και λίί-
Tovpyhv νμων της xpftas μου, by whom ye have sent to
me those things which may minister to my needs, Phil,
ii. 25.•
[λίμα, see λαμά.]
λι'ντιον, -ου, TO, (a Lat. word, Unleuni), a linen cloth,
toiri Ί (Arr. perijjl. mar. rubr. 4) : of the loicel or apron,
which servants put on when about to work (Suet. Calig.
26), Jn. xiii. 4 sq. ; with which it was supposed the
nakedness of persons undergoing crucifixion was cov-
ered, Ev. Xicod. c. 10; cf. Thilo, Cod. Apocr. p. S82 sq.*
XcirCs, -ι'δοϊ, ή, (λίπω to strip off the rind or husk, to
peel, to scale), a scale: Acts L\. 18. (Sept. ; Aristot. al.
[cf. Hdt. 7, 61].)*
λί'ιτρα, -as, ή, (fr. the adj. \rrrpot, q. v.), Hebr. η;'"^ϊ,
lepras// [lit. morbid scaliness], a most offensive, annoy-
ing, dangerous, cutaneous disease, the virus of which
generally pervades the whole body ; common in Egvpt
and the East (Lev. xiii. sq.) : Mt. viii. 3; Mk. i. 42 ; Lk.
V. 12 sq. (Hdt., Theophr., Joseph., Plut., al.) [Cf. Orelli
in Herzog 2 s. v. Aussatz ; Greenhill in Bible Educator
tv. 76 sq. 1 74 sq. ; Ginshurg in Alex.'s Kitto s. v. ; Eders-
heim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 492 S( jq. ; McCl. and S. s. v.] *
Xnrpis, -oC, ό, (as if for XtTttoos, It. Xeiris, XtVot -«or,
TO, a scale, husk, bark) ; 1. in Grk. writ, scaly,
rough. 2. specifically, leprous, affected with leprosy,
(Sept. several times for i'">i'p and ^nx ; [Theophr.
c. p. 2, 6, 4] see \('πρα) : Mt. viii. 2 ; x. 8 ; xi. 5 ; Mk. L
40; Lk. iv. 27; vii. 22; xvii. 12; of one [(Simon)] who
had formerly been a leper, Mt. xxvi. 6 ; Mk. xiv. 3.*
X«imis, -η, -ύν, (λί'πω to strip off the bark, to peel),
thin; small; το Xarrov, a very small brass coin, equiv. to
the eighth part of an as, [A. V. a mite ; cf. Alex.'s Kitto
and B.D. s. v. ; cf. F. R. Conder in the Bible Educator,
iii. 179] : Mk. xii. 42 ; Lk. xii. 59; xxi. 2; (Alciphr. epp.
1, 9 adds κίρμα; Pollux, onom. 9, 6, sect. 92, suppUee
νόμισμα).'
Aevt and Arvts (T Tr (yet see below) WH \tvtU [but
Lchm. -ts; see «, t]), gen. Λίυί (TTr WIl AfVii)> ^c.
Αηιΐν (Τ WH AfvccV, so Tr exc. in Mk. ii. 14), [B. 21
(19); W. § 10, 1], 6, (Hebr. -iS a joining, fr. niS, of.
Gen. .xxix. 34), Levi ; 1. the third son of the patri-
arch Jacob by his wife Leah, the founder of the tribe of
Israelites which bears his name: Heb. vii. 5, 9 ; [Rev. viL
7]. 2. the son of Melchi, one of Christ's ancestors:
Lk. iii. 24. 3. the son of Simeon, also an ancestor
of Christ: Lk. iii. 29. 4. the son of Alphaeus, a col-
lector of customs [(.\. y. publican)'}: Mk. ii. 14 [here
Viii (rejected) mrg. Ίάκωβον (see their note ad loc., cf.
Weiss in Mey. on Mt. 7te Aufl. p. 2)] ; Lk. v. 27, 29 ;
ace. to com. opinion he is the same as Matthew the
apostle (Mt. ix. 9) ; but cf. Grimm in the Theol. Stud,
u. Krit. for 1870 p. 727 sqq. ; [their identity is denied
also by Nicholson on Matt. ix. 9 ; yet see Patritius, De
Evangcliis, 1. i. c. i. quaest. 1 ; Venables in Alex.'s Kitto,
s. V. Matthew; Meyer, Com. on Matt., Intr. § 1].*
ΛΓυϊτη? (Τ ^VH AeuftTTjs [so Tr exc. in Acts iv. 36 ; see
(ΐ,ι.'\),-ου,ό,α Levite; a. one of Levi's posterity. b.
in a narrower sense those were called Levites (Hebr.
"h Ί2, D"lS) who, not being of the race of Aaron, for
whom alone the priesthood was reserved, served as as-
sistants of the priests. It was their duty to keep the
sacred utensils and the temple clean, to provide the
sacred loaves, to open and shut the gates of the temple,
to sing sacred hymns in the temple, and do many other
things ; so Lk. x. 32 ; Jn. i. 1 9 ; Acts iv. 36 ; [(Plut. quaest.
conv. 1. iv. quaest. ύ, 5 ; Pliilo de vit. Moys. i. § 58). See
BB.DD. s. v. Levites ; Edersheim, The Temple, 2d ed-
p. 63 sqq.] *
AeutTiKOs [T WH AeveiT. ; see n, t], -ή, -6v, Levitical,
pertaining to the Levites: Heb. vii. 11. [Philo de vit.
Moys. iii. § 20.] *
뀫καίνω: 1 aor. ίΚήκανα [cf. W. § 13, 1 d.; B. 41
(35)]; (XfvKrfi); fr. Horn, down; Sept. for [-aSn ; to
whiten, make irhite : τί, Mk. ix. 3 ; Rev. vii. 14.*
[λίνκοβνσσινον : Rev. xLx. 14 WH mrg., aL βύσ-σινον
XevK. see in βύσσινο!.^
\evKi%, -ή, -όν, (Χήσσω to see, behold, look at; akin to
Lat. luceo. Germ, leuchlen; cf. Curtius p. 113 and § 87;
[Vaniiek p. 817]), Sept. for ]^h; 1. light, bright,
brilliant : τα Ιμάτια . . . XevKa u>s τ4 φώί, Alt. xvii. 2 ; esp.
bright or brilliant from whiteness, (dazzling) white:
λεωι»
377
λί^ά^ω
spoken of the garments of angels, and of those exalted
to the splendor of the heavenly state, Mk. xvi. 5 ; Lk.
ix. 29; Acts i. 10; Rev. iii. 5 ; iv. 4 ; vi. 11; vii. 9, 13;
xix. 14, (shining or white garments were worn on festive
and state occasions, Eccles. ix. s ; cf. Heindorf on Hor.
sat. 2, 2, 61) ; with ώσίϊ or ώί ό χιών added : Mk. ix. 3
RL; Mt. xxviii. 3, {ίπποι. XfVKOrepoi χιόνοί, Horn. Ή. 10,
437) ; c'x XevKois sc. Ιματίοκ (added in Rev. iii. 5 ; iv. 4),
Jn. XX. 12; Rev. iii. 4; cf. W. 591 (.^.oO) ; [B. 82(72)];
used of wliite garments as the sign of innocence and purity
of soul. Rev. iii. 18; of the heavenly throne, Rev. xx.
11. 2. (dead) while: Mt. v. 3G (opp. to μΐΚας)\
Rev. i. 14 ; ii. 17; iv. 4; vi. 2; xiv. 14 ; xix. 11 ; spoken
of the ivliitening color of ripening grain, Jn. iv. 35.*
λί'ων, -oiTot, 0, [fr. Horn, down], Sept. for '"iK, Π"";Χ,
T33 (a young lion), etc. ; alion; a. prop.: Ileb. xi.
33; iPet. V. 8; Rev. iv. 7; ix. 8, 17; x. 3; xiii. 2. b.
metaph. ΐρρΰσθην ϊκ στάματο! Xt'ovrot, I was rescued out
of the most imminent peril of death, 2 Tim. iv. 17 (the
fif. does not lie in the word lion alone, but in the whole
phrase) ; equiv. to a brave ami miijlilij hero : Rev. v. 5,
where there is allusion to Gen. xlix. 9 ; of. Nah. ii. 13.'
λήθη, -ijr, ή, (\ήθω to escape notice, \ηθομαι to forget),
[fr. Horn, dovin'], furgel/ulness : \ήθην Tjrar XajSeii/ (see
λαμβάνω, I. G), 2 Pet. i. 9.*
[λημά, see λαμά.^
ληνέε, -οΰ, ή, (also ό. Gen. χχχ. 38, 41 [cf. below]),
[Theocr., Diod., al.] ; 1. a tub- or trough-shaped
receptacle, vat, in which grajjes are trodden [A. V. wine-
pressl (Ilebr. r\;) : Rev. xiv. 20 ; xix. 15 ; την Χηνον . . .
τον μϊ-γαν (for R Tr mrg. την μι-γαΚην), Rev. xiv. 19 — a
variation in gender which (though not rare in Hebrew,
see Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 717) can hardly be matched in
Grk. writ. ; cf. W. 526 (490) and his Exeget. Studd. i. p.
153 sq. ; B. 81 (71). 2. i. q. ύπαλήνιου (Is. xvi. 10;
Mk. xii. 1) or προλήνιον (Is. v. 2), Hebr. 2p', the lower
vat, dug in the ground, into ivhich the must or new wine
flowed from the press : Mt. xxi. 33. Cf. Win. RWB.
8. V. Kelter; Roskoffia Schenkel iii. 513; [BB.DD. s.v.
AVinc-press].*
λήροϊ, -ου, ό, idle tall; nonsense : Lk. xxiv. 11. (4 Mace.
V. 10; Xen. an. 7, 7,41 ; Arstpli., al.; phir. joined with
παιδιαί, Plat. Protag. p. 347 d.; with φλυαρίαι, ib. Hipp,
maj. p. 304 b.)*
ληστήβ, -οϋ, ό, (for \ηΐστή! fr. λη'ζομαι, to plunder, and
this fr. Ion. and Epic Xijis, for which the Attics use λ«η,
booty), [fr. Soph, and Ildt. down], a rohher; a plun-
derer, freebooter, brigand : Alt. xxvi. 55 ; Alk. xiv. 48 ;
Lk. xxii. 52; Jn. x. 1 ; xviii. 40; plur., Mt. .x.xi. 13; xxvii.
38,44; Mk. xi. 17; xv. 27 ; Lk. x. 30, 3C ; xix. 46 ; Jn.
X. 8 ; 2 Co. xi. 26. [Xot to be confounded with κΚίπτης
thief, one who takes property by stealth, (although the
distinction is obscured in A. V.) ; cf. Trench § xliv.]*
λήψις (L Τ Tr WH λημψκ, see M, μ), -τωί, ij, (λαμβάνω,
Χήψομω), [fr. Soph, and Thuc. down], a receiving : Phil,
iv. 15, on which pass, see 8o<rir, 1.*
Xiav (in Horn, and Ion. λίην), [forXi-Xav, λάω to desire;
cf. Cur*,iu8 § 532], adv., greatly, exceedingly : Mt. ii. 16 ;
iv. 8 ; viii. 28 ; xxvii. 14 ; Mk. i. 35 ; ix. 8 , xvi. 2 ; Lk.
.xxiii. 8; 2 Tim. iv. 15 ; 2 Jn. 4 ; 3 Jn. 3 ; (2 Mace. xi. 1 ;
4 Mace. viii. 16 ; Tob. ix. 4, etc. ; for IKO, Gen. i. 31 ; iv.
5; 1 S. xi. 15); λίαν ex π^ρισσον, exceedingly beyond
measure, Mk. vi. 51 [Wll om. Tr br. ϊκπιρισ.']. See iiTep-
λίαν*
λίβανοΐ, -ου, ό, (more rarely ή [cf. Lob. u. i.]); 1.
the frankincense-tree (Pind., Hdt., Soph., Eur., Theophr.,
al.). 2. frankincense (Hebr. njiS ; Lev. ii. 1 sq.;
16 ; Is. Ix. 6, etc.) : Mt. ii. 11 ; Rev. xviii. 13 ; (Soph.,
Theophr., al.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 187; [Vanicek,
Fremdworter, s. v. On frankincense see esp. Birdwood
in the Bible Educator, i. 328 sqq. 374 sqq.] *
λιβανωτόϊ, -oO, ό, (λίβανος) ; 1. in prof. auth.
frankincense, the gum exuding « του λιβάνου, (1 Chr. i.x.
29; Hdt., Menand., Eur., Plat., Diod., lldian., al.). 2.
a censer (which in prof. auth. is ή λιβανωτί: [or rather
-τρίΓ. cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 255]) : Rev. viii. 3, 5.*
XipcpTivos, -ου, ό, a Lat. word, libertin us, i. e. either one
u-ho has been liberated from slavery, a freedman, or the son
of a freedman (as distinguished fr. ingenuus, i. e. the son
of a free man) : ή συναγωγή ή λργομίνη (οΓτών λιγομίνωψ
Tdf.) λιβίρτίνων, Actsvi. 9. Some suppose these Hber-
tini [A.V. Libertines'] to have been manumitted Roman
slaves, who having embraced Judaism had their syna-
gogue at Jerusalem ; and they gather as much from Tac.
Ann. 2, 85, where it is related that four thousand libertini,
infected with the Jewish superstition, were sent into Sar-
dinia. Others, owing to the names Κυρηναίων και 'AXf-
ξανΒρίων that follow, think that ageograjjhical mean-
ing is demanded for λιβ(ρτ., and suppose that Jews are
spoken of, the dwellers in L i b e r t u m, a city or region
of proconsular Africa. But the existence of a city or
resion called Libert um is a conjecture which has
nothing to rest on but the mention of a bishop with the
prefix " libertinensis " at the synod of Carthage A. D.
411. Others vr'ilh far greater probability appeal to Philo,
leg. ad Gaium § 23, and understand the word as denot-
ing Jews who had been made captives by the Romans
under Pompey but were afterwards set free; and who,
althoush they had fixed their abode at Rome, had built
at their own expense a synagogue at Jerusalem which
they frequented when in that city. The name Libertines
adhered to them to distingui.-ih them from the free-born
Jews who had subsequently taken up their residence at
Rome. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Libertiner; Hausralh in
Schenkel iv. 38 sq. ; [B. D. s. v. Libertines. Evidence
seems to have been discovered of the existence of a
" svnagogue of the libertines" at Pompeii ; cf. De Rossi,
Bullet, di Arch. Christ, for 1864, pp. 70, 92 sq.] •
Διβνη, -»)f, ή, Libya, a large region of northern Africa,
borderins on Egypt. In that portion of it which had
Cyrene for its capital and Λvas thence called Libya Cy-
renaica (ή irpos Κνρηνην Λιβύη, Joseph, antt. 16, 6, 1 ; η
A. η κατά Κυρήνην [q. v.]. Acts ii. 10) dwelt many Jews
(Joseph, antt. 14, 7, 2 ; 16, 6, 1 ; b. j. 7, U ; c. Apion.
2, 4 [where cf. MUUer's notes]) : Acts ii. 10.*
λιθά{ιι> ; 1 aor. ίΚίθασα ; 1 aor. pass, ίλιθάσθην. (λίθοί) \
Χίθιρος
878
\ίψ
to slone; i. e. a. lo ovenDhdm or hury with ntnnef.
Qapiilibus cooperio, Cic.) : τινά, of stoning, which was a
Jewish mode of punislunent, (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Steini-
gung; [B. D. s. v. Punishment, III. a. 1]) : Jn. x. 81-
83 (where λίθάζ(τ( and \ιθάζoμfv are used of tlie act of
beginning ; [ef. W. § 40, 2 a. ; B. 205 (Π8_)]) ; .In. xi. 8 ;
Ileb. xi. 3 7. b. In pelt one with stones, in order either
to wound or lo kill Jiini : Acts xiv. 19; pass., Acts v. 26
[cf. W..'i0.3(471); B.242(208)]; 2Co..\i.25. (Ari.stot.,
lOIyl)•, Strab. ; Xi^iftii' e'v Ai'floit, 2 S. xvi. 6.) [CoMP. :
κατα-\ίβύζω•^ *
λίθινοϊ, η, -ov, (λίθο!) ; fr. Find, down ; of stone : Jn.
ii. G ; 2 Co. iii. 3 ; Rev. ix. 20.*
λιθο-βολί'ω, -ώ ; impf. 3 pers. phir. f\tθoβόλoυv ; 1 aor.
t\iθofίόλησa ; Pass., pres. λιθοβολούμαι ; 1 fut. λιθοβολη-
ΰήσομαι ; (λιθοβάλοί, and this fr. λίθος and βάλλω [cf. \V.
102 (OC) ; 23, 2:j]) ; Sept. for hpD and DJT ; i. (p λιθάζω
(f\. v.), to stone; i. e. a. to kill hij stoninr/, to slone
(of a species of punisliracnt, see λιθάζω^ : τινά, Mt. .\xi.
3j ; xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34 ; Acts vii. 58 sq. ; pass., Jn.
viii. 5 ; Ileb. xii. 20. b. to pelt with stones : τινά,
Mk.xii. 4[Rec.]; Actsxiv.S. ([Diod. 17, 41, 8]; Plut.
mor. p. 1011 e.)*
λ£θο5, -ου, 6, Sept. for nx, [fr. Horn, down]; a stone:
of small stones, Mt. iv. 6 ; vii. 9 ; Lk. iii. S ; iv. [3], 11 ;
xi. 11 ; xxii. 41; ,7n. viii. 7; plur., Mt. iii. 9 ; iv. 3 ; Mk.
V. 5 ; Lk. iii. 8 ; xix. 40 ; Jn. viii. 59 ; x. 31 ; of a large
stone, Mt. xxvii. (JO, G6 ; xxviii. 2 ; Mk.xv.46; xvi. 3sq.;
Lk. xxiv. 2; Jn. xi. 38 sq. 41 ; xx. 1 ; of building stones,
Mt. xxi. 42, 44 [T ora. L WIl Tr mrg.br. the vs.] ; xxiv.
2; Mk.xii. 10; xiii. 1 sq. ; Lk. xix. 44; xx. 17sq. ; xxi.
5 sq. ; Acts iv. 1 1 ; 1 Pet. ii. 7 ; metaph. of Christ : λίθος
ακρογωνιαίος (q. v.), ΐκλικτός (cf. 2 Esdr. v. 8), ΓιτιμοΓ, 1
Pet. ii. 6 (Is. xxviii. IG) ; ζών (see ζάω, ILb.), 1 Pet. ii. 4 ;
λίθος προσκόμματος, one Λvhose words, acts, end, men (so
stumble at) take such offence at, that they reject him
and thus bring upon themselves ruin, ibid. 8 (7); Ro.
ix. 33 ; of Christians : λίθοι ζώντας, living stones (see
^άω, u. s.), of which the temple of God is built, 1 Pet. ii.
5 ; of the truths with which, as with building materials,
a teacher builds Christians up in Λvisdom, λίθοι τίμιοι,
costly stones, 1 Co. iii. 1 2. λίθος μνλικός, Mk. ix. 42 R G ;
Lk. xvii. 2 LTTrAVll, cf. Rev. xviii. 21. of precious
stones, gems : λίθ. τίμιος, Rev. xvii. 4 ; xviii. 1 2, 16 ; xxi.
11, 19, (2 S. xii. 30; lK.x.2,11); Wffir, Rev. iv. 3 ;
«νδίδυμίκοι λίθον (for ϋΟΎλίνον) καθαμόν, Rev. xv. 6
LTrtxt. Wn (Lzek. xxviii. 13 πάντα [or πάΐ'] λίθον
χρηστον evSidfaai; [see \VH. Intr. ad 1. c.]) ; but (against
the reading λίθαν) [cf. Scrivener, Plain Introduction etc.
p. 6odJ. spec, stones cut in a certain form : stone lab-
lets (engraved with letters), 2 Co. iii. 7 ; statues of idols,
Acts xvii. 29 (Deut. iv. 28; Kzek. xx. 32).•
λιβό-στρωτοϊ, -ov, (fr. λίθος and the verbal adj. στρωτός
fr. στρ^Λνννμι), sprewl { pored) iritk slones (νυμφ(Ίον, Soph.
Antig. 1204-5) ; το λιθ., substantively, a mosaic or tes-
sellated pavement : so of a place near the praetorium or
palace at Jerusalem, Jn. xix. 1 3 (see Ταββαθα) ; of places
in the outer courts of the temple, 2 Chr. vii. 3 : Joseph
b. j. 6, 1,8 and 3, 2; of an apartment whose pavement
consists of tessellated work, Kpict. diss. 4, 7, 37, cf. £stk.
i. 6; Suet. Jul. Caes. 46; Plin. h. n. 36, 60 cf. 64.*
λικμάω, -ώ : fut. λικμήσω ; (λικμόί a winnowing-van) ;
1. to trinnow, cleanse wrivj the chaff from (jrain by iriii-
nowiny, (Horn., Xen., Plut., al.; Sept.). 2. in a
sense unknown to prof, auth., lo scatter (opp. to σννάγω,
Jer. xxxi. (or xxxviii.) 10; add. Is. xvii. 13; Am. ix.
9). 3. to crush lo pieces, grind to powder : τινά, Mt.
xxi. 44 [R G L br. WII br.] ; Lk. xx. 18 ; cf. Dan. ii. 44
[Theodot.] ; Sap. xi. 19(18). [But in Dan. 1. c. it repre-
sents the Apliel of ^^0 fnem facere, and on Sap. 1. c. see
Grimm. Alany decline to follow the rendering of the
Vulg. {conterere, comminuere), but refer the e.xx. under
this head to the preceding.] *
λιμά, so Tdf. ed. 7, for λαμά, q. v.
λιμήν, -ίνος, ό, [allied with λίμνη, q. v. ; fr. Horn, down],
a harbor, liareii : Acts xxvii. 8, 12; see καλοί λιμίνις, p.
322'.•
λ(μνη, -ης, η, (fr. λ(ίβω to pour, pour out [cf. Curtius
§ 541]), [fr. Horn, down], a lake: λ. Τ^ννησαρίτ [q, v.],
Lk. v. 1 ; absol., of the same, Lk. v. 2 ; viii. 22 sq. 33 ;
Toi πυρός. Rev. xix. 20; xx. 10, 14 sq. ; καιομίνη πυρΊ,
Rev. xxi. 8.*
λιμόβ, -οϋ, 6, (and η in Doric and later writ. ; so L Τ
Tr WII in Lk. xv. 14; Acts xi. 28; so, too, in Is. viii.
21; 1 K. xviii. 2; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 188; [L. and S.
s. V. init. ; 1Γ//. App. p. 157"]; B. 12 (11) ; W. 63 (62)
[cf. 36], and 526 (490)) ; Sept. very often for 3;•-;; hun-
ger : Lk. XV. 1 7 ; Ro. viii. 35 ; iv λιμώ κ. δίψ -f ι, 2 Co. xi.
27 ; Xen. mem. 1, 4, 13 ; i. q. scarcity of harrest , famine :
Lk.iv. 25; xv. 14 ; Actsvii.ll; xi. 28 [cf. B. 81 (71)];
Rev. vi. 8 ; xviii. 8 ; λι/ιοί, famines in divers lands, Mk.
xiii. 8 ; λιμπΊ κ. λοιμοί, -Mt. xxiv. 7 [L Τ Tr txt. WII om.
»c. Xot/i.] ; Lk. xxi. 1 1 ; Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 9 ; the two
are joined in the sing, in lies. opp. 226; Ildt. 7, 171;
Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 19 ; Plut. de Is. et Osir. 47.*
λίνον (Treg. λ'ινον [so R G in Mt. as below], incorrect-
ly, for ( is short; [cf. Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p.
42]), -ου, T(5, Sept. several times for ΠΠί??!), in Grk. writ,
fr. Horn, down, /?ax : E.\. ix. 31 ; linen, as clothing, Rev.
XV. 6 R G Τ Tr mrg. ; the wick of a lamp, Mt. xii. 20, after
Is. xiii. 3.•
ACvos (not ΧΊνος [with R G Tr] ; see Passow [or L.
and S.] s. v. ; cf. Lipsius, Graram. Untersuch. p. 42), -ου,
ό, Linus, one of Paul's Christian associates ; ace. to eccl.
tradition bishop of the church at Rome (cf. Hase, Po-
lemik, ed. 3 p. 131 ; Lipsius, Chronologie d. rom. Bischofe,
p. 146 ; [Diet, of Chris. Biog. s. v.]) : 2 Tim. iv. 21.*
λιιι -apos, -ά, -όν, (λίπα [or rather, λίπος grease, akin to
άλfίφω])■, fr. Horn, down; fat: τα λιπαρά (joined with
τά λαμπρά, q. v.) things which pertain to a sumptuous
and delicate style of living [A. V. dainty], Rev. xviii.
14.•
λίτρα, -ας, η, a pound, a weight of twelve ounces : Jn.
xii.3; xix. 39. [Polyb. 22, 26, 19; Diod. 14, 116, 7; Plut.
Tib. et G. Grac. 2, 3 ; Joseph, antt. 14, 7, 1 ; al.]*
λίψ, λιβός, ό, (fr. λίίβω [to pouT forth], because it
Xoyc'a
379
λόγιοι;
brings moisture) ; 1. the SW. wind: Hdt. 2, 25 ;
Polyb. 10, 10, 3; al. 2. Ihe quarter of the heavens
whence the SW. wind blows : Acts xxvii. 12 [on which
see βλίπω, 3 and κατά, II. 1 c.] (Gen. xiii. 14 ; xx. 1 ;
Num. ii. 10; Deut. xxxiii. 23).*
λογία, -as, η, (fr. λί'γω to collect), (Vulg. collecta}, a col-
lecliiin : of money gathered for the relief of the poor, 1
Co. xvi. 1 sq. (Not found in prof. auth. [cf. W. 2.5].)*
λογίζομαι; impf.f'Xoytfo^iji'; 1 ΐίοτ.ίΚογισάμην, adepon.
verb with 1 aor. pass. (Χογίσθην and 1 fut. pass. \ογισθή-
ίτομαι; in bibl. Grk. also the pres. is used passively (in
prof. auth. the pres. ptcp. is once used so, in Hdt. 3, 95 ;
[cf. Veitch s. v. ; W. 259 (243) ; B. 52 (46)]) ; (Xoyos) ;
Sept. for 3!yn ; [a favorite word with the apostle Paul,
being used (exclusive of quotations) some 27 times in his
Epp., and only four times in the rest of the N. T.] ; 1.
(rationes conferre) to reckon, count, compute, calculate,
count ocer; hence a. to take into account, to make ac-
count of: τι rm, Ro. iv. 3, [4] ; metaph. to pass to one's
account, to impute, [A. V. reckon^ : τι, 1 Co. .xiii. 5; τικί
τι, 2 Tim. iv. 1 6 [A. V. lat/ to one's charge^ ; τινΧ δίκαιο-
σύνην, άμαρτίαν, Ro. iv. 6, [8 (yet here L mrg. Τ Tr WH
txt. read oi)] ; τά παραπτώματα. 2 Co. v. 19 ; in imitation
of the Hebr. h Tjnz, \ο-γίζ(ταί τι (or tw) fit Tt (equiv.
to ei'f TO or ώστε (ΐραί τι), <i thing is reckoned as or to be
something, i. e. as availing for or equivalent to something,
as having the like force and weight, (cf. Fritzsche on Rom.
vol. i. p. 137 ; [cf. AV. § 29, 3 Note a. ; 228 (214) ; B.
§ 131,7 Rem.]) : Ro. ii. 26 ; ix. 8 ; ds olbiv. Acts xi.x.
27; Is. xl. 17; Dan. [(Theodot.us)] iv. 32 ; Sap. iii. 17;
ix. 6; ij mVxir eij δικαιοσύνην, Ro. iv. 3, 5, 9-11, 22 sq.
24; Gal. iii. 6; Jas. ii. 23 ; Gen. xv. 6 ; Ps.cv. (cvi.) 31 ;
1 Mace. ii. 52. b. i. q. to number among, reckon with:
Tiva μΐτά τιι/ων, Mk. xv. 28 [yet G Τ WH om. Tr br. the
vs.] and Lk. xxii. 37, after Is. liii. 12, where Sept. iv
Toit άνί)μοΐί. c. to reckon or account, and treat accord-
ingly : Tiva ώί η, Ro. viii. 36 fr. Ps. xliii. (xliv.) 23 ; cf.
B. 151 (132); [W. 602 (560)]; [Ro. vi. 11 foil, by
ace. w. inf., but GLom. Trbr. the inf.; cf. W. 321
(302)]. 2. (in animo rationes conferre) to reckon
inwardly, count up or weigh the reasons, to deliberate, [A.
V. reaso7i'] : npos iavTois, one addressing himself to an-
other, Mk. xi. 31 R G (πρόί ίμαυτήι/, with myself, in my
mind. Plat. apol. p. 21 d.). 3. by reckoning up all the
reasons to gather OT infer ; i.e. a. to consider, lake ac-
count, weigh, meditate on : τι, a tiling, with a view to obtain-
ing it, Phil. iv. 8; foil, by οτι, Heb. xi. 19; [Jn. xi. 50
(Rec. δωλογ.)] ; τούτο foil, by ότι, 2 Co. x. 11. h. to
suppose, deem, judge : absol. 1 Co. xiii. 1 1 ; ώί \ογΙζομαι,
1 Pet. v. 12; τί, anything relative to the promotion of the
gospel, 2 Co. iii. 5; τΊ e's τίνα (as respects one) ίπίρ
(toOto) 5 etc. to think better of one than agrees with
what etc. [' account of one above that which * etc.], 2 Co.
xii. 6 ; foil, by ότι, Ro. viii. 1 8 ; toCto foil, by ότι, Ro. ii.
3 ; 2 Co. X. 7 ; foil, by an inf. belonging to the subject,
2 Co. xi. 5; foil, by an ace. with inf., I'o. iii. 28; xiv.
14 ; Phil. iii. 13 [cf. W. 321 (302)] ; τίνα ώί τίνα. to hold
[A. V. 'count'] one as, 2 Co. x. 2 [cf. W. 602 (560)] ;
with a preparatory οΰτωι preceding, 1 Co. iv. 1. c.
to determine, purpose, decide, [cf. American ' calculate '\
foil, by an inf. (Eur. Or. 555) : 2 Co. x. 2. [CoMP.:
ava-, δια-, πάρα-, συ\-\ογΙζομαι.^ *
λογικ05, -ή, -όν, (fr. Χόγος reason), [Tim. Locr., Dem.,
al.], rational (Vulg. rationabilis) ; agreeable to reason,
following reason, reasonable : λατρεία λογίκή, the worship
which is rendered by the reason or soul, [' spiritual '],
Ro. xii. 1 (XoyiKr) Koi αναίμακτο! προσφορά, of the offer-
ing which angels present to God, Test. xii. Patr. [test.
Levi § 3] p. 547 ed. Fabric. ; [cf. Athenag. suppl. pro
Christ. § 13 fin.]) ; τό \υγικ6ν γάλα, the milk which nour-
ishes the soul (see γάλα), 1 Pet. ii. 2 {λο-γικη τροφή, Eus.
h. e. 4, 23 fin.).*
λόγιον, -ου, τό, (dimin of λο'γοΓ [so Bleek (on Ileb. v.
12) et al. ; al. neut. of \oyios (Mey. on Ro. iii. 2)]), prop.
a little word (so Schol. ad Arstph. ran. 969 (973)), a briej
utterance, in prof. auth. a divine oracle (doubtless because
oracles were generally brief) ; Hdt., Thuc, Arstph.,
Eur. ; Polyb. 3, 1 1 2, 8 ; 8, 30, 6 ; Diod. 2, 14 ; Ael. v. h.
2, 41 ; of the Sibylline oracles, Diod. p. C02 [fr. 1. 34];
Plut. Fab. 4; in Sept. for •,ρη the breast-plate of the high
priest, which he wore when he consulted Jehovah, Ex.
xxviii. 15 ; xxix. 5, etc. ; [once for "'^N, of the words of
a man, Ps. xviii. (xix.) 15]; but chiefly for Π";•?Ν of
any utterance of God, whether precept or promise ; [cf.
Philo de congr. erud. grat. § 24 ; de prof ug. § 11 sub
fin.] ; of the prophecies of God in the O. T., Joseph,
b. j. 6, 5, 4 ; νόμου! και )ίόγια 6(σπισθίντα δια προφητών
και ΰμνου!, Philo vit. contempl. § 3 ; τό \όγιον τοί προ-
φήτου (Moses), vit. Moys. iii. 35, cf. [23, and] de praem.
et poen. § 1 init. ; τα 8('κα λόγια, the ten commandments
of God or the decalogue, in Philo, who wrote a special
treatise concerning them (0pp. ed. Mang. ii. p. 180
sqq. [ed. Richter iv. p. 246 sqq.]) ; [Constit. Apost. 2,
36 (p. 63, 7 ed. Lagarde)] ; Euseb. h. e. 2, 18. In the
N. T. spoken of the words or utterances of God : of the
contents of the Mosaic law. Acts vii. 38 ; with τοΰ 6(οϋ
or 6(οϋ added, of his commands in the Mosaic law and
his Messianic promises, Ro. iii. 2, cf. Philippi and Um-
breit ad loc. ; of the substance of the Christian religion,
Heb. V. 12 ; of the utterances of God through Christian
teachers, 1 Pet. iv. 11. (In eccl. writ, λόγια τοϋ κυρίου
is used ot Christ's precepts, by Polyc. ad Philipp. 7, 1 ;
κυριακά λόγια of the sayings and discourses of Christ
which are recorded in the Gospels, by Papias in Euseb.
h. e. 3, 39 ; Phot. c. 228 p. 248 [18 ed. Bekk.] ; [τά λόγια
τ. ifoC] of the words and admonitions of (iod in the
sacred Scriptures, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 53, 1 [where par-
allel with a'l if pal γραφαί^, cf. 62, 3 ; [and τα \όγ. simply,
like α'ιγραφαί, of the New T. in the Interpol, ep. of Ign.
ad Smyrn. 3]. Cf. Schwegler [(also Heinichen)], Index
iv. ad Eu.seb. h. e. s. v. λόγιον ; [esp. Soph. Le.x. s. v. and
Lghlft. in the Contemp. Rev. for Aug. 18Ϊ5, p. 399 sqq.
On the general use of the word cf. Bleek, Br. a. d. Hebr.
iii. pp. 114-117].)•
λόγιο;, -ov. (kcryoi), in class. Grk. 1. learned, a man
of letters, skilled in literature and the arts ; esp. versed
\χτγισμο<;
880
\oyo<{
in history and attliquitie.i. 2. skilled in speech, elo-
quent: 80 Acts xviii. 24 [which, however, al. refer to 1
(finding its explanation in tlic full. Swaros κτλ.)}. The
use of the word is fully exhibited hy l.dbcck ad Phryn.
p. 198. [(Hdt., Kur., al.)]*
λογισμό?, -oi), o, (Xoyi'fo^ai) ; 1. a rccioiiiiif/, com-
pulatiim. 2. a rcasuning: such as is hostile to the
Christian faith, 3 Co. x. 4 (5) [A. V. ima/iinationnj. 3.
It judijmeiit, decision : such as conscience passes, Ro. ii.
1.) [A. V. thoughts']. (Thuc, Xen., Plat., Dem., al. ;
Sept. for Π3ϋΠ0, as Prov. vi. 18; Jer. xi. 19; Ps. xxxii.
(xxxiii.) 10.)'•
λογομαχί'ω, -ω ; (fr. Χογομάχο!, and this f r. Xoyor and
μάχομαι); Ιο contend ahout words; contextually, la icrant/le
(dhjut eiiijili/ and trijiing matters: 2 Tim. ii. 14. (Not
found in prof, auth.) *
λογομαχ(α, -as, 17, (λογομαχία), dispute about words, war
of wurds, or about trivial ami empty things: plur. 1 Tim.
vi. 4. (Not found in prof, auth.) *
λόγοϊ, -ου, 6, (\ίγω), [fr. Horn, down], Sept. esp. for
13Ί, also for TJN anil nSp ; prop, a collecting, collection,
(see λίγω), — and that, as well of those things which
are put together in thought, as of those which, having
been thought i. e. gathered together in the mind, are
expressed in words. Accordingly, a twofold use of
the terra is to be distinguished : one which relates to
speaking, and one which relates to thinking.
I. As respects speech: 1. a word, yet not in
the grammatical sense (i. q. vocabulum, the mere name
of an object), but language, vox, i. e. a Λvord which, ut-
tered by the living voice, embodies a conception or
idea; (hence it differs from ρήμα and «wos [([, v.; cf.
also λαλ/ω, ad init.]) : Ileb. .xii. 19 ; άπηκριβτ^ναί λόγοι/,
Mt. x.xii. 4G ; tlnfiu λόγω, Mt. viii. 8 [Kec. \6yov (cf.
elirov, 3 a. fin.)] ; Lk. vii. 7 ; λαλησ-αι jreVrf , μυρίου!, λό-
yovi, 1 Co. xiv. 19 ; δώόναι Xoyoc (ϋσημον, to utter a dis-
tinct word, intelligible speech, 1 Co. xiv. 9 ; flneiv λόγον
κατά Tivos, to sjjcak a Λvord against, to the injury of, one,
Mt. xii. .'i2; also (ir τίνα, Lk. xii. 10; to drive out de-
mons λόγω, Mt. viii. Hi; (πίρωτάν TLva ev \oyois ΙκανοΙς.
Lk. xxiii. 9 ; of the words of a conversation, (ϊΐ'τι/3ιίλλ«ΐ'
λόγου?. Lk. xxiv. 1 7. 2. ivhat .wme one has said ;
a saying ; a. univ. : Mt. xix. 22 [T om.] ; Mk. v. 3G
[cf. B. 302 (259) note] ; vii. 29 ; Lk. i. 29 ; xx. 20 ; xxii.
61 [Trmrg. WII ρήματος']; Jn. ii. 22; iv. 39, 50; vi. 60;
vii. 36 ; xv. 20 ; xviii. 9 ; xix. 8 ; Acts vii. 29 ; ό \ayos
oJror, this (twofold) saying (of the people), Lk. vii. 17,
cf. 16; TO!/ ηΰτον λόγον (Ιπών, Mt. xxvi. 44; [Mk. xiv.
39] ; παγώίύαν τίνα ίν λόγω, in a word or saying wliich
they might elicit from him and turn into an accusation,
.Mt. xxii. 15 ; aypfvtiv τινίι λόγω, i. e. by propounding a
ipiestion, Mk. xii. i:i; plur., Lk. i. 20; Acts v. 5, 24;
with gen. of the contents : ό λ. inayyiKias, Ro. ix. 9 ;
ό λ. τηί όρκομωσίας, Heb. vii. 28; λ. τταρακλήσιως, Acts
xiii. 15; ό λ. rijs μαρτυρίαΐ. Rev. xii. 11 ; οί λ. t^s προ-
φητ(ία{. Rev. i. 3 [Tdf. τό:/ λ.] ; xxii. 6 sq. 10, 18; ό προ-
ψι;τικα; Xoyoc, the prophetic promise, collectively of the
sum of the O. T. prophecies, particularly the Messianic,
2 Pet. i. 1 9 ; of the sayings and statements of teachers;
oi λόγοι οίτοι, the sayings previously related, Mt. vii. 24
[here L Tr Wll br. τοότ.], 26 ; Lk. ix. 28 ; 01 λόγοι Tims,
the words, commands, counsels, promises, etc., of any
teacher, Mt. x. 14; xxiv. 3.'); .\Ik. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 44;
Jn. xiv. 24; Acts xx. 35; Xoyot αληθινοί, Ilev. xix. 9; xxi.
5 ; Ttitrroi, Rev. xxii. 6 ; Kfvol, Eph. v. 6 : πλαστοί, 2 Pet.
ii. 3 [cf. W. 217 (204)]; b. of the sayings of
(loil; a. i. (p decree, mandate, order: Ro. ix. 28;
with τον θ(οΰ added, 2 Pet. iii. 5, 7 [R" G Tr txt.] ; ό λ.
του θ(οϋ e'yfViTO itpos τίνα (a |)hrase freq. in the O. T.),
Jn. x. 35. β. of the moral precepts given by (iod in
the O. T. : Mk. vii. 13 ; [Mt. xv. 6 L Tr Wll txt.] ; Ro.
xiii. 9; Gal. v. 14, (cf. ot δί'κα λόγοι, [Ex. xxxiv. 28 ; Deut.
.X. 4 (cf. ρήματα, iv. 13); Philo, <|uis rer. div. lier. § 35 ;
de decalog. § 9] ; Joseph, antt. 3, 6, 5 [cf. 5, 5]). γ.
i. q. promise: 6 λ. τήί άκοης (equiv. to ό άκηυαθιί^), Ileb.
iv. 2 ; ό λ. ToO Bfoii, Ro. i.x. 6 ; plur. Ro. iii. 4 ; univ. a
divine declaration recorded in the O. T., Jn. xii. 38 ; xv.
25 ; 1 Co. XV. 54. δ. θιά λόγου 6(οϋ etc. through
prayer iii which the language of the O. T. is employed:
I Tim. iv. 5; cf. De Wette and lluther ad loc. €.
ό λόγοΕ τοϋ θιοϊι, as Π1Π' ^ίΐ often in the Ο. Τ. prophets,
an oracle or utterance by which God ilisctoses, to the proph-
ets or through the prophets, future events : used collec-
ti\ely of the sum of such utterances, Rev. i. 2, 9 ; cf.
Diisterdieck and Bleek ad 11. cc. o. what is de-
clared, a thought, declaration, aphorism, (Lat. .^ententia) :
ToK λόγοι/ τοϋτον (reference is made to what follows, so
that yap in vs. 12 is explicative), Mt. .xLx. 11 ; α dictum,
maxim or weighty saying: 1 Tim. i. 15 ; iii. 1 ; 2 Tim. ii.
II ; Tit. iii. 8 ; i. <j. proverb, Jn. iv. 37 (as sometimes in
class. (!rk., e. g. [Aeschyl. Sept. adv. Theb. 218]; ό πα-
λαιοί λόγοί, Plat. Phaedr. p. 240 c.; eonviv. p. 195 b. ;
legg. 6 p. 757 a.; Gorg. p. 499 c; verura est verbum
(juod raemoratur, uhi amici, ibi opes, Plaut. True. 4,4,32;
add, Ter. Andr. 2, 5, 15 ; al.). 3. discourse (Lat. ora-
tio); a. the act of speaking, speech: Acts xiv. 12; 2
Co. X. 10 ; Jas. iii. 2 ; Sia λο'γου, by word of mouth, Acts
XV. 27 ; opp. to δι* (πιστόλων, 2 Th. ii. 15 ; δια λόγου πολ-
λού, Acts XV. 32; λόγω πολλώ, Acts χ.χ. 2; πιρι οί πολΰί
ήμίν ό λόγοί, of whom we have many things to sa}•, Ileb.
V. 11 ; 6 λόγοΓ ίιμων, Mt. v. 37 ; Col. iv. 6 ; λ. κολακείας, 1
Th. ii. 5. λόγοΕ is distinguished from σοφία in 1 Co. ii.
1 ; fr. αναστροφή, 1 Tim. iv. 12; fr. δύναμις, 1 Co. iv. 19
sq.; 1 Th. i. 5; fr. «ργοι/, Ro. xv. 18; 2 Co. x. 11 ; Col.
iii. 17; fr. epyov κ. άλήθηα, 1 Jn. iii. 18 (see tpyov, 3
p. 248" hot.) ; oiBevos λόγου τίμιον, not worth mentioning
(λόγου άξιοι/, Ildt. 4, 28; cf. (ierm. der Rede werth), i. e.
a thing of no value. Acts xx. 24 Τ Tr WH (see Π. 2
below). b. I. <\. the faculty of speech: Eph. vi. 19;
skill and practice in speaking : Ιδιώτης τω λόγω αλλ' ού
TJ γι/ώσίΐ, 2 Co. xi. G ; δυνατοί e'v ίργω κ. λόγω, Lk. xxiv.
19 (SvSpas λόγω δυνατούι, Diod. 13, 101); λύγοί σοφία!
or γ>'ώσ€ωί, the art of speaking to the purpose about
things pertaining to wisdom or knowledge, 1 Co. xii.
8. CO kind (or style) of speaking : iv τταντι λόγω,
1 Co. i. 5 [A. V. utterance^. d. continuous speak-
λόγο9
381
Xoyo•;
in/j, discourse, such as in the N. T. is characteristic of
teachers: Lk. iv. 32, 36 ; Jn. iv. 41 ; Acts iv. 4 (cf.
iii. 12-26); xx. 7 ; iCo. i. 17; ii. 1; plur., ISIt. vii. 28; xix.
1 ; xxvi. 1 ; Lk. ix. 26 ; Acts ii. 40 ; Swaros iv 'Kayois κ.
ffryois αυτόν. Acts vii. 22. Hence, the thought uf the
.subject being uppermost, e. inslruclion: Col. iv.
3; Tit. ii. 8; 1 Pet. iii. 1 ; joined with ΜασκαΚία, 1 Tim.
V. 1 7 ; with a gen. of the teacher, Jn. v. 24 ; viii. U2 ; xv.
20; xvii. 20; Acts ii. 41 ; 1 Co. ii. 4; 2 Co. i. 18 (cf. 19);
6 Xiiyof S (μός, Jn. viii. 31,37, 43, 01 ; xiv. 23 ; τ'ιη λόγω,
witli what instruction, 1 Co. xv. 2 (where construe, ti
κατίχιτι, TiVi λόγω etc.; cf. B. §§ 139, 58; 151,20);
i. q. κήρυγμα, preaching, with gen. of the obj. : λ. άλι;-
Btiat. 2 Co. vi. 7 ; Jas. i. 18 ; 6 λ. T^f αΚηθιία!, Col. i. 5 ;
Eph. i. 13 ; 2 Tim. ii. 15 ; της καταΚΚαγής, 2 Co. v. 19 ; ό
λ. rrfs σωτηρία! ταύτης, concerning this salvation (i. e. the
saivatiun obtained through Christ) [cf. W. 237 (223); B.
162 (141)], Acts xiii. 26; ό λόγος της βασίΚ( las (τοϋ ΰ(οϋ).
Ml. xiii. 19; τον στανροΰ, 1 Co. i. 18; ό τής αρχής τον
Χριστοί λόγοΓ, the first instruction concerning Christ [cf.
13.150(136); W. 188(177)], Heb.vi.l. llonce 4.
in an objective sen.se, what is communicated by instruc-
tion, doctrine: univ. Acts χ viii. l.i; ό λόγ. αυτών, 2 Tim.
ii. 17; plur. ήμίτίροι λόγοι, 2 Tim. iv. l.j; vyiaivovrt!
\nyoi, 2 Tim. i. 13 ; ivith a gen. of obj. added, τοΟ κνρίον,
1 Tim. vi. 3 ; τής πίστεως, tlie doctrines of faitli [see
πίστις, 1 c. /3•], 1 Tim. iv. 6. specifically, the doctrine con-
iirning the attainment through Christ of salvation in the
l-ingdomofOod- simply, Mt. xiii. 20-23 ; Jlk. iv. 14-20;
\ iii. 32; xvi. 20; Lk. i. 2 ; viii. 12; Acts viii. 4; x. 44 ;
xi.lO; xiv.2j; xvii.ll; Gal.vi.6; Phil.i.l4; 1 Th. i.
6 ; 2 Tim. iv. 2 ; 1 Pet. ii. 8 ; τον λόγοκ, υν aniarfiXe τοΧς
etc. the doctrine which he commanded to be delivered
to etc. Acts X. 36 [but L WII txt.om. Tr br. Sv, cf. W.
§ 62,3fin.; B.§131,13]; τον λόγον d/toutti', Lk. viii. 15;
Jn. xiv. 24 ; Acts iv. 4 ; 1 Jn. ii. 7 ; λαλ«>/, Jn. xv. 3 (see
other e.xx. s. v. λαλ/ω, 5 sub fin.) ; άπαθί'ιν τω λ., 1 Pet.
ii. 8 ; iii. 1 ; 8ι8αχή πιστού λόγου, Tit. i. 9 ; with gen. of
the teacher: ό λ. αυτών. Acts ii. 41 ; with gen. of the
author : roO Seov, Lk. v. 1 ; viii. 11, 21 ; xi. 28 ; Jn. xvii.
6, 14 ; 1 Co. xiv. 3G; 2 Co. iv. 2; Col. i. 25; 2 Tim. ii. 9;
Tit. i. 3; ii. 5; lleb. xiii. 7; iJn. i. 10; ii. 5, 14 ; Rev.
vi. 9; XX. 4; very often in the Acts: iv. 29, 31 ; vi. 2, 7;
viii. 14 ; xi. 1 , 1 9 ; xii. 24 ; xiii. 5, 7, 44, 46 ; xvii. 1 3 ; xviii.
1 1 ; opp. to λ. ανθρώπων [Β. § 1•ό1, 14], 1 Th. ii. 13 ; λόγοι
ζών Beov, 1 Pet. i. 23; 6 λ. τοΟ κνρίον. Acts viii, 25 ; xiii.
48 [(WHtxt. Trrarg. 5foD)] sq.; .\v.3.js(i.; xix. 10, 20;
1 Th. i. 8; 2 Th. iii. 1 ; toC Χριστού, Col. iii. IG ; Rev. iii.
8 ; with gen. of apposition, τού fiayyfXiov, Acts xv. 7 ;
with gen. of the ol>j., τής χάριτος τοΰ BfoC, Acts xiv. 3 ;
XX. 32; 5ικαιοσννης (see δικαιοσνι/ι;, 1 a.), Heb. v. 13;
with gen. of quality, t^s ζωής, containing in itself the
true life and imparting it to men, Phil. ii. 16. 5.
ani/thing reported in speech ; a narration, narrative : of
a written narrative, a continuous account of things
done, Acts i. 1 (often so in (5rk. writ. fr. Hdt. down [cf.
L. and S. s. v. A. IV.J) ; a fictitious narrative, a slori/,
Mt. xxviii. 15, cf. 13. report (in a good sense) : ό λόγ.
the news concerning the success of the Christian cause,
Acts xi. 22; πιρί τίνος, Lk. v. 15; rumor, i. e. current
story, Jn. x-xi. 23 ; λόγο» (χιιν τιι/όί, to have the (unmer-
ited) reputation of any excellence. Col. ii. 23 (so λόγο»
i^et Tts foil, by an inf., Hdt. 5, 60 ; Plat. epin. p. 987 b.;
[see esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c. (cf. L. and S. s. v. A.
IIL 3)]). 6. matter under discussion, thing spoken
of, affair: Mt. xxi. 24 ; Mk. xi. 29 ; Lk. .\x. 3 ; Acts viii.
21 ; XV. 6, and often in Grk. writ. [L. and S. s. v. A.
VITL] ; a matter in dispute, case, suit at law, (as ιρτ in
Exod. xviii. 16; xxii. 8) : ίχίΐνΧύγον ττμός τίνα, to have
a ground of action against any one. Acts xix. 38, cf.
Kypke ad loc. ; ■παρασος λόγου πορνιίας ([cf. II. 6 below]
nut 1?T [-^i! '1?"73 or] "I?'?r3, Delilzsch), Mt. v. 32 ; [xix.
9 LWIImrg.]. 7. tiling spoken of or tailed ahoul;
event; deed, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down) : 8io-
φημίζίΐν Tiv λογοκ, to blazc abroad the occurrence, Jlk.
i. 45 ; plur. Lk. i. 4 (as often in the O. T. ; μ(τα tovs
λύγους τούτουΓ, 1 Macc. vii. 33).
II. Its use as respects the mind alone, Lat. ratio; L
e. 1. rea.fon, the mental faculty of thinking, medi-
tating, reasoning, calculating, etc. : once so in the phrase
ό λόγος τον θίοϋ, of the di\ ine mind, pervading and nnt-
iuT all things by its proper force, Heb. iv. 12. 2.
account, i. e. regard, consideration : λόγοι» noie'iaSai Tivot,
to have regard for, make accoimt of a thing, care for
a thing, Acts x.x. 24 RG (Job xxii. 4; Hdt. 1, 4. 18
etc.; Aeschvl. Prom. 231; Theocr. 3, 33; Dem., Joseph.,
Dion. H., pint., al. [cf. L. and S. s. v. B. II. 1]) ; also λό-
γο» ij^eiv rii/of, Actsl. c. Lchm. (Tob. vi. 16 (15)) [cf. I. S
a. above]. 3. account,i.e. reckoning, score : 8όσ(ως
κ. λήψεως (see δόσΐΓ, 1 ), Phil. iv. 1 5 [where cf . Bp. Lghtft.] ;
fis λόγον νμών. to your account, i. e. trop. to your advan-
tage, ib. 1 7 ; σνναίριιν λόγοκ (an expression not found in
Grk. auth.), to make a reckoning, settle accounts, Mt.
xviii. 23; xxv. 19. 4. account, i. e. answer or e.x-
planation in reference to judgment : λόγοι/ biSavai (as
often in (irk. auth.), to give or render an account, Ro.
xiv. 12 R G Τ WII L mrg. Tr mrg. : alsodn-oStSoi/oi, Heb.
xiii. 1 7 ; 1 Pet. iv. 5 ; with gen. of the thing, Lk. xvi. 2 ;
Acts xix. 40 [IK!]; wept tiios, Mt. xii. 36 ; [Acts xix. 40
LTTrWIl]: tim wept ί'αυτοΟ, Ro. xiv. 12 L txt. br. Tr
txt. ; atVfli'Tii'a λόγοι» irepi τίνος, 1 Pet. iii. IS (Plat, polit.
p. 285 e.). 5. relation : προς όν ήμ'ιν ό λόγος, with
whom as judge we stand in relation [A. V. have to do\
Heb. iv. 13; κατά λόγον, as is right. Justly, Acts xviii.
14 [A. V. reason ivouid (cf. Polyb. 1, 62, 4. 5 ; 5, 110,
10)], (πάρα λόγοι», unjustly, 2 Macc. iv. 36; 3 Macc. vii.
8). 6. reason, cause, ground : Ti'it λόγω, for what
reason? why? Acts x. 29 (ίκ τίνος λόγου; Aeschyl.
Choeph. 515; «f oiSevo! λόγου. Soph. Phil. 730; Ww
δικαι'ω λόγω (ττλ. ; Plat. Ciorg. p. 512 c.) ; παρ(κτος λόγου
πορνείας (Vulg. excepta fnrnicationis causa) is generally
referred to this head, Mt. v. 32; [xix. 9 L WHmrg.];
but since where λόγο? is used in this sense the gen. is not
added, it has seemed best to include this passage among
those mentioned in I. 6 above.
m. In several passages in the writinijs of John ά Xayot
\όyχη
38:
denotes the essential Word of God, i. e. the personal
(hypostatic) wisdom and power in union witli God, his
minister in tlie creation and government of the universe,
the cause of all the world's life both physical and ethical,
■wliich for the procurement of man's salvation put on hu-
man nature in the person of Jesus the Messiah and shone
forth conspicuously from his words and deeds : Jn. i. 1 ,
14 ; (1 Jn. v. 7 Rcc.) ; with rijs ζωής added (see ζωή. 2
a.), 1 Jn. i. 1; toC θ(οϋ, Kev. .\i.\. 13 (although the in-
terpretation which refers this passage to the hyjiostatic
Xoyos is disputed by some, as by Baur, Neulest. Theolo-
"ie p. 216 Sep). Respecting the combined Hebrew and
Greek elements out of ivhich this conception originated
among the Alexandrian Jews, see esp. Lucke, Com. iib.
d. Evang. des Johan. ed. 3, i. pp. 243-294 ; [cf. esp. B. D.
Am. ed. s. v. A\Ord (and for works which have appeared
subseipiently, see Weiss in Meyer on Jn. ed. 6 ; Schurer,
Neatest. Zeitgesch. § 34 II.) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Coh i. J 5 p.
143 sq. ; and for reff. to the use of the term in heathen,
Jewish, and Christian writ., see Soph. Lex. s. v. lOj.
λόγχη, -ης. ή; 1. the iron point or head of a
spear: Ildt. 1, .'rj; Xcn. an. 4, 7, 16, etc. 2. alance,
spear, (shaft armed with iron) : Jn. .xi.\. 34. (Sept. ;
Find., Tragg., sqip) '
XoiSopc'u, -ώ ; 1 aor. ίλοιδόρτ^ση ; pres. pass. ptcp. λοιδο-
ρουμ^νο!; (λϋΐδοροί) ; Ιυ reproach, rail αϊ, revile, heap
abuse upon: τινά, Jn. i.x. 28; Acts xxiii. 4; pass., 1 Co.
iv. 12 ; 1 Pet. ii. 23. (From Find, and Aeschyl. down ;
Sept. several times for y\.) [Comp. : axn-XoiSopcw.] *
XoiSopCa, -as, ή, {λοώορίω), railing, reviling : 1 Tim. v.
14 ; 1 Pet. iii. 9. (Sept. ; Arstph., Thuc., Xen., sqq.) *
XoiSopos, -ου, 6, a railer, reinler: 1 Co. v. 11 ; vi. 10.
(Prov. XXV. 24 ; Sir. xxiii. 8; Eur. [as adj.], Plut., al.) *
λοιμό;, -ov, a, [fr. Horn, down], pestilence; plur. a
pestilence in divers regions (see λιμός). Mt. xxi\'. 7 [R G
Tr mrg. br.] ; Lk. xxi. 1 1 ; metaj)]!., like the Lat. peslis
(Ter. Adelph. 2, 1, 3.5; Cic. Cat. 2, 1), a pestilent fellow,
pest, plague : Acts xxiv. 5 (so Dem. p. 794, 5 ; Aeh v. h.
14, 11 ; Prov. xxi. 24 ; plur., Ps. 1. 1 ; 1 Mace. xv. 21 ;
Svbpcs λοιμοί, 1 Mace. x. (il, cf. 1 S. x. 27 ; xxv. 17, etc.).*
λοιττός. -ή, -ήν, (λίΐ'ττω, λί'λοιπα), [fr. Pind. and Ildt.
down], Sept. for -\Γ\•, ΙΠύ, "^Νυ', left ; plur. the remain-
ing, the rest : with substantives, as oi λοιπό! απόστολοι.
Acts ii. 37 ; 1 Co. ix. ή ; add, Mt. xxv. 11 ; Ro. i. l.i ; 2
Co. xii. 13; Gal. ii. 13; Phil. iv. 3 ; 2 Pet. iii. 16; Rev.
viii. 13; absoL the rest of any number or cfes under con-
sideration: simply, Mt. X xii. G ; xxvii. 49 ; Mk. xvi. 13;
Lk. xxiv. 10; Acts xvii. 9 ; xxvii. 44 ; with a descrip-
tion added : ot λοιποί oi etc.. Acts xxviii. 9 ; 1 Th. iv.
'l3 ; Rev. ii. 24; o! λοιποί πάντα, 2 Co. xiii. 2 ; Phil. i.
l.i ; πάσι τοις λ. Lk. xxiv. 9 ; with a gen. : o! λοιποί τώΐ'
ανθρώπων. Rev. ix. 20 ; τοΰ σ-πΐρματος, ib. xii. 1 7 ; των
ν(κρων, ib. XX. 5 ; with a certain distinction and contrast,
the rest, who are not of the specified class or number : Lk.
viii. 10; xviii. 9; Acts v. 13; Ro. xi. 7 ; 1 Co. vii. 12;
1 Th. V. 6 ; 1 Tim. v. 20 ; Rev. xi. 13 ; xix. 21 ; τα λοιπά,
the rest, the things that remain : Mk. iv. 19 ; Lk. xii. 26 ;
1 Co. xi. 34 ; Rev. iii. 2. Xeut. sing, adverbially, το
λούω
λοιπο'ν what remains (Lat. quod superest), i. e. a.
hereafter, for the future, henceforth, (often so in Grk. writ,
fr. Pind. down) : Mk. xiv. 41 RT WII (but τί5 in br.);
Mt. xxvi. 4.") [WHom.Trbr.To]; 1 Co. vii. 29; Ileb. x.
13 ; and without the article, Mk. xiv. 41 (i L Tr [WH
(but see above)]; 2 Tim. iv. 8; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p.
706. ToC λοιποί, henceforth, in the future, Lj)h. vi. 10
LTTrWTI; Gal. vi. 17; Ildt. 2, 109; Arstph. p.ax
ltJ84; Xen. Cyr. 4,4, 10, oec. 10, 9; al ; cf. Jlerm. ad
Vig. p. 706 ; often also in full τοΰ λ. χρόνου. [Strict!}-, τά
λ. is ' for the fut.' τοΰ λ. 'in (the) fut.' ; το λ. may be used
for ToC λ., but not τοϋ λ. for το λ. ; cf. Meyer and Ellicott
onGaLu. s.; B.§§ 128, 2; 132,26; W. 463 (432).] b.
at last ; already : Acts xxvii. 20 (so in later usage, see
Passow or L. and S. s. v.). c. το λοιπόκ, drojiping the
notion of time, signifies for the rest, besides, moreover,
[A. V. oftcnfinally^. forming a transition to other things,
to which the attention of tlie liearer or reader is directed :
Eph. vi. 10 RG; Phil. iii. 1 ; iv. 8 ; 1 Th. iv. 1 Rec;
2 Th. iii. 1 ; ό δί λοιποί' has the same force in 1 Co. iv. 2
RG ; λοιπό.- in 1 Co. i. 10; iv. 2 LTTrWH; 1 Th. iv.
1 G L Τ Tr WH.
AovKOs, -5, 0, (contr. fr. Αουκανός; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on
Col. iv. 14], W. 103 (97) [cf. B. 20 (18); on the diverse
origin of contr. or abbrev. prop, names in of cf. Lobcck,,
Patholog. Proleg. p. 50G ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15]),
Luke, a Christian of Gentile origin, the companion of the
apostle Paul in preaching the gospel and on many of his
journeys (Acts xvi. 10-17; x.x. 5-15 ; xxi. 1-18; xxviii.
10-16) ; he was a physician, and ace. to the tradition of
the church from IrcnsEus [3, 14, 1 sq.] down, which has
been recently assailed with little success, the author of the
third canonical Gospel and of the .\cts of the Apostles :
Col. iv. 14; 2 Tim. iv. 11 ; Philem. 24.*
Λονκιος, -ου, ό, (a Lat. name), Lucius, of CjTene, a
prophet and teacher of the church at Antioch : Acts
xiii. 1 ; perhai)s the same Lucius that is mentioned in
Ro. xvi. 21.•
λουτρόν, -οΰ, τό, (λούω), fr. Horn, down (who uses
\oiTpov fr. the uncontr. form λοί'ω), a bathing, bath, i. e.
as well the act of bathing [a sense disputed by some
(cf. Ellicott on Eph. v. 26)], as the place ; used in the
N. T. and in eccles. writ, of baptism [for exx. see i'o/j//.
Lex.s. v.]: witliToC Cearos.iddcd, Eph. v. 26; της τταΚιγ-
yfVfaias, Tit. iii. 5.*
λούω : 1 aor. ΐλονσα : pf. pass. ptcp. 'Kf'Kovpevos and (in
Ileb. X. 23 Τ Wll) XeXovapivos, a later Greek form (cf.
Lobeck on Soph. Aj. p. 324 ; Steph. Thesaur. v. 397 c.;
cf. KUhner § 343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v., who cites Cant. v.
12 Vat.]); 1 aor. mid. ptcp. λoιIσάμf>Όs; fr. Horn, down;
Sept. for yrri ; to bathe, wash : prop. τινά. a dead person,
Acts ix. 37 ; τίνα άπο των πληγών, by washing to cleanse
from the blood of the wounds, Acts xvi. 33 [\V.372 (348),
cf. § 30, 6 a. ; B. 322 (27 7)] ; 6 λιλουμίνος, absol., he that
has bathed, Jn. xiii. 10 (on the meaning of the passage
see καθαρός, a. [and cf. Syn. below]) ; λίλ. τό σώμα,
with dat. of the instr., ί8ατι, Heb. x. 22 (23) ; mid. to
wash on^'s self [cf. W. § 38, 2 a.] : 2 Pet. ii. 22 ; trop.
AvSSa
883
Ανσανϊα^
Christ is described as ό λούσατ ifiar άπο των αμαρτιών
ημά>ν, i. e. wlio by suffering the bloody death of a vicari-
ous sacrifice cleansed us from the guilt of our sins, Rev.
i. 5 R G [al. λνσας (q. v. 2 fin.). COMP. : άπο-λούω•] *
[Syn. λούω, νίπτω, πλύνω: πλ. is used of things,
8sp. garments; λ. and v. of persons, — i/. of a part of tlie
body (hands, feet, face, eyes), λ. of the whole. All three
words occur in Lev. xv. 11. Cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xlv.]
ΔίδΒα, -ι,ί [Acts ix. 38 R G L, but -as Τ Tr WH ; see
WH. App. p. 156], {,, and Λι'δδα, -ων, τά ([LTTr\VH
in] Acts ix. 32, 35 ; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 1 16 ; B. 18 (16) sq.
[cf. λν. 61 (60)]); Hebr.l'7(l Chr. viii. 12; Ezraii.33;
Neh. xi. 35) ; Lijdda, a large Benjaraite [cf. 1 Chr. I. c]
town (Λύδδα κώμη, ττόλΕωΓ τοϋ μργίθου! οΰκ airoSiovaa,
Joseph, antt. 20, 6, 2), called also Diospolis under the
Roman empire, about nine [' eleven ' (Ordnance Survey p.
21)] miles distant from the Mediterranean; now Ludd:
Acts ix. 32, 35, 38. Cf. Robinson, Palestine ii. pp.
244-248; Arnold in Herzog viii. p. 627 sq. ; [BB. DD.
s. V.].•
AuSCa, -as, η, Lydia, a woman of Thyatira, a seller of
purple, converted by Paul to the Christian faith : Acts
xvi. 14, 40. The name was borne by other women also,
Ilorat. carm. 1,8; 3, 9.*
Λυκαονία, -as, η, Lycaonia, a region of Asia Minor,
situated between Pisidia, Cilicia, Cappadocia, Galatia
and Phrygia, whose chief cities were Lystra, Derbe and
Iconium [cf. reff. in Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 1]. Its in-
habitants spoke a peculiar and strange tongue the char-
acter of which cannot be determined : Acts xiv. 6. Cf.
Win. RWB. s. V. ; Lassen, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. morgenl.
Gesellsch. x. ('56) p. 378; [_Wrighl, Hittites ('84j p. 56].*
AvkoovuttC, (\νκαονίζω, to use the language of Lyca-
onia). adv., in the speech of Lycaonia: Acts .\iv. 11 (see
\vKaovia).*
Λυκία, -as, η, Lyria, a mountainous region of Asia
Minor, bounded by Pamphylia, Phrygia, Caria and the
Mediterranean: Acts xxvii. 5 (1 Mace. xv. 23). [B. D.
3. v. ; Diet, of Geogr. s. v. ; reff. in Bp. Lghtft. on Col.
p. 1.]•
X«Kos, -ou, 0, Hebr. 3S!, a wolf: Mt. x. 16 ; Lk. x. 3 ;
Jn. X. 12; applied figuratively to cruel, greedy, rapa-
cious, destructive men : Mt. vii. 15; Acts xx. 29; (used
trop. even in Ilom. H. 4, 471 ; 16, 156; in the O. T.,
Ezek. xxii. 27; Zeph. iii. 3; Jer. v. 6).*
λυμαίνομαι: impf. f'Xv^aiiO'fiiji/; dep. raid.; (λ u/iij injury,
ruin, contumely) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down; 1.
to affix a sligma to, to dishonor, spot, defle, (Ezek. xvi. 25 ;
Prov. xxiii. 8 ; 4 Mace, xviii. 8). 2. to treat shame-
fully or with injury, to ravage, devastate, ruin : ίΚυμαίνιτο
Την (κκλησίαν, said of Saul as the cruel and violent per-
secutor, [A. V. made havock of]. Acts viii. 3.*
λνίΓίω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ίλΰ-πησα ; pf. λ(\νπηκα ; Pass., pres.
λυποΟμαί; 1 aor. ίΧυπήθην; fut. Χι/πηθήσομαι; (λύτη;);
[fr. Hes. down]; to make sorroirful; to affect icith sad-
nes?, ca'jse grief; to Ihrotc into sorrow : τινά, 2 Co. ii. 2,
6 ; vii. 8 ; pass., Mt. xiv. 9 ; xvii. 23 ; xviii. 31 ; xix. 22 ;
Xvi 22; Mk.x. 22; xiv. 19; Jn. xvi. 20 ; xxi. 17; 2 Co.
iL 4 ; 1 Th. iv. 13 ; 1 Pet. i. 6 ; joined with ϋημονιΐν,
Mt. xxvi. 37 ; opp. to χαίρ€ΐν, 2 Co. vi. 10 ; κατά θιόν, in
a manner acceptable to God [cf. W. 402 (375)], 2 Co.
vii. 9,11; in a wider sense, to grieve, offend : τό ηηκϋμα
το ayiov, Eph. iv. 30 (see πνίϋμα, 4 a. fin.) ; to make one
uneasy, cause him a scruple, Ro. xiv. 15. [CoMP. : σνλ-
λυπε'ω. Syn. see θρηνίω, fin.] '
λύττη, -ης, ή, [fr. Aeschyl. and Udt. down^, sorrow, pain,
grief: of persons mourning, Jn. xvi. 6 ; 2 Co. ii. 7 ; opp.
to χαρά, Jn. xvi. 20 ; Heb. xii. 1 1 ; λΰττην ΐχω (see ϊχω,
I. 2 g. p. 267*), Jn. xvi. 21 sq. ; Phil. ii. 27 ; with addition
of από and gen. of pers., 2 Co. ii. 3 ; λ. μοί ΐστι, Ro. ίχ.
2 ; iv Χίπτ) ΐρχίσβαι, of one who on coming both saddens
and is made sad, 2 Co. ii. 1 (cf. λυπώ vpas, vs. 2 ; and
\ύιτην ίχω, vs. 3); άπο τή: λύττης, for sorrow. Lk. xxiL
45 ; eK λύπη!, with a sour, reluctant mind [A. V. grudg-
ingly^, (opp. to ιλαροί), 2 Co. ix. 7 ; ή κατά θ(6ν Χύιτη,
sorrow acceptable to God, 2 Co. vii. 10 (see λυπίω), and
η τοϋ κόσμου λι -mj, the usual sorrow of men at the loss of
their earthly possessions, ibid. ; objectively, annoyance,
affliction, (Hdt. 7, 152) : \ύπα! νποφΐρ(ΐν [R. V. griefs'\,
1 Pet. ii. 19.*
Avcravios, -ου, 6, Lysanias ; 1. the son of Ptolemy,
who from B. c. 40 on was governor of Chalcis at the foot
of Mount Lebanon, and was put to death B. c. 34 at the
instance of Cleopatra: Joseph, antt. 14, 7, 4 and 13, 3;
15,4, 1; b. j.l, 13, I,cf. b. j. 1, 9, 2. 2. a tetrarch
of Abilene (see ΆβίΚηνή), in the days of John the Bap-
tist and Jesus: Lk. iii. 1. Among the regions assigned
by the emperors Caligula and Claudius to Herod Agrippa
I. and Herod Agrippa IT., Josephtis mentions η Αυσανίου
ΤίτραρχΙα (antt. 18, 6, 10, cf. 20, 7, 1), βασιΧίία η τυΰ
Αυσανίου καλούμενη (b. j. 2, 11, 5), ^ΑβΙλα ή Α\υσανίον
(antt. 19, 5, 1); accordingly, some have supposed that
in these passages Lysanias the son of Ptolemy must be
meant, and that the region which he governed continued
to bear his name even after his death. Others (as Cred-
ner, Strauss, Gfrbrer, \\'eisse), denying that there ever
was a second Lysanias, contend that Luke was led into
error by that designation of Abilene (derived from Ly-
sanias and retained for a long time afterwards), so that
he imagined that Lysanias was tetrarch in the time of
Christ. This opinion, however, is directly opposed by
the fact that Josephus, in antt. 20, 7, 1 and b. j. 2, 12, 8,
expressly distinguishes Chalcis from the tetrarchy of
Lysanias ; nor is it probable that the region which Ly-
sanias the son of Ptolemy governed for only si.x years
took its name from him ever after. Therefore it is more
correct to conclude that in the passages of Josephus where
the tetrarchy of Lysanias is mentioned a second Ly-
sanias, perhaps the grandson of the former, must be
meant ; and that he is identical with the one spoken of
by Luke. Cf. Winer, RWB. s. v. .\bilene; Wieseler in
Herzog i. p. 64 sqq., [esp. in Beitrage zur richtig. Wiirdi-
gung d. Evang. u.s.w. pp. 196-204] ; Bleek, Synopt. Ei>•
klar. u. s. w. i. p. 154 sq.; Kneucker in Schenkel i. p. 26 sq.;
Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 19 Anh. 1 p. 313 [also in
Riehm s. τ. ; Robinson in Bib. Sacra for 1848, pp. 7." eaq.f
Λυσία*
384
\vtt
Kenan, La Dynastie des Lysanias d'Abilcne (in the Me-
moires de I'Acad. des inscrip. et belles-lettres fur 1870,
Tom. xxvi. P. 2, pp. 49-84) ; HB.DD. s. v.].•
Ανα-ίαί, -ov, 0, (^Claudius) Li/.iias, a Roman diiliarth
[A. V. 'chief captain'] : Acts .\.\iii. 2ii ; .\.\iv. 7 [Kec],
22. [15. 1). Am. ed. s. V.]•
λΰο•ΐ5, -ίωί, η, (λΰω), [fr. Horn, down], a loosing of any
bond, as that of marriage ; hence once in the N. T. of
divorce, 1 Co. vii. 27.*
λυσιτίλεω, -ω ; (fr. λυσιτϊλ^ί, and this fr. \νω to pay,
and τα τίλη [cf. reXos, 2]) ; [fr. Ildt. down] ; prop, to
pay the taxes ; to return expenses, hence to be useful, ad-
vantaijeous ; impers. \vaiTf\(i, it profits ; foil, by ij (see
ij, 3 f.), it is better : τινί foil, by ίϊ, Lk. xvii. 2.*
Ανσ-τρα, -as, η, and [in Acts xiv. 8 ; xvi. 2 ; 2 Tim. iii.
11] -<uv, τά. (see Λΰδδα), Lystra, a city of Lycaonia : Acts
xiv. β, 8, 21 ; xvi. 1 sq. ; 2 Tim. iii. 11. [Cf. reff. in
Bp. L-htft. on Col. p. 1.] •
λντρον, -ou, TO, (λύω), Sept. passim for 133^ '^^''ί, p"!^'
etc.; tlic price for redeeming, ransom (paid for sla\es,
Lev. xix. 20; for captives. Is. xiv. 13 ; for the ransom
of a life, Ex. xxi. 30; Num. xxxv. 31 stj.) ; αντ'ι πολλών,
to liberate many from the misery and penalty of their
sins, Mt. XX. 28 ; Alk. x. 45. (Find., Aeschyl., Xen.,
Plat., al.)•
λυτρόω, -ώ : Pass., 1 aor. ΐλντρωθην; Mid., pres. inf.
λυτροϋσβαι; 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. λυτρώσι;ται ; (λντρον,
q. V.) ; Sept. often for Skj and mi) ; 1. to release
on receipt of ransom: Plat. Theaet. p. 1C5 e. ; Diod. 19,
73; Sept., Num. xviii. 15, 1 7. 2. to redeem, liberate
by payment of ransom, [(Dem., a!.)], generally expressed
by the mid. ; univ. to liberate : τιι/α apyvpiio, and likewise
c'lc with the gen. of the thing; pass, ϊκ της ματαίας ανά-
στροφης, 1 Pet. i. 18 ; Mid. to cause to be released to one's
selflcl. VV. 254 (238)] by payment of the ransom, i. e. to
redeem ; univ. to delioer : in the Jewish theocratic sense,
t6v Ίσραηλ, viz. from evils of every kind, external and
internal, Lk. xxiv. 21 ; άπο πάσης ανομίας. Tit. ii. 14 [cf.
W. § 30, 6 a.]; τίνα (κ, spoken of God, Deut. -xiii. 5;
2 S. vii. 23; Hos. xiii. 14.*
λντρω(Γΐ5, -(ως, ή, (λυτρόω), α ransoming, redemption :
prop. αΙχμαΧώτων, Plut. Arat. 11 ; for nSxj, Lev. xxv.
[29], 48 ; univ. deliverance, redemption, in the theocratic
sense (see λντρο'ω, 2 [cf. Graec. Ven. Lev. xxv. 10, etc. ;
Ps. xlviii. (xhx.) 9]) : Lk. i. 68; ii. 38; specifically, re-
demption from the penally of sin: Heb. ix. 12. [(Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 12, 7; 'Teaching' 4', 6; etc.)]*
λυτρωτή5, -oi5, ό, (λυτρόω). redeemer; deliverer, liber-
ator: Acts vii. 35; [Sept. Lev. xxv. 31, 32; Philo de
sacrif. Ab. et Cain. § 37 sub fin.]; for Sxj, of God, Ps.
xviii. (xix.) 15 ; Ixxvii. (l.xxviii.) 35. Not found in prof,
auth.*
λυχνία, -as, η, a later Grk. word for the earUer \υχνίον,
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 313 sq. ; [Wetst. on Mt. v. 15 ; W.
24] ; Sept. for ΓΤ^ύΟ ; α (candlestick) lampstand, cande-
labrum: Mt.v. 15; Mk. iv. 21; Lk.viii. 16; [xi.33]; Heb.
ix. 2 ; the two eminent prophets who will precede Christ's
Teturn from heaven in glory are likened to ' candlesticks,'
Rev. xi. 4 [B. 81 (70); W. 536 (499)]; to the seven
' candlesticks ' (Ex. xxv. 37 [A. V. lamps ; cf. B. D. (esp.
Am. ed.) s. v. Candlestick]) also the seven more con-
spicuous churches of Asia are compared in Uev. i. 12 S(].
20 ; ii. 1 ; κινι'ιν την λυχνίαν τίΐ /os ((κκλησίας) tK τοϋ τύπου
αυτής, to move a church out of the place which it has
hitherto held among the churches; to take it out of the
number of churches, remove it altogether. Rev. ii. 5.•
λύχνο?, -ου, ό, Sept. for Ί:, [fr. Hom. down]; a lamp,
candle [?], that is placed on a stand or candlestick (Lat.
candelabrum), [cf. Trench, N. 1'. Syn. § xlvi. ; Becker,
Charicles, Sc. ix. (Eng. trans, p. 156 n. 5)] : Mt. v. 15 ;
Mk. iv. 21; [Lk. xi. 36]; xii. .•!5 ; Rev. x.xii. 5; φώ?
λύχνου, Rev. xviii. 23; opp. to φώϊ ηλίου, x.xii. 5 LTTr
Wll; άπτ(ΐν λϋχνον ([Lk. viii. 16; .xi. 33; .xv. 8], see
απτω, 1 ). 'Jo a " lauij) " are likened — the eye, ό λύχνος
τοϋ σώματος, 1. e. which shows the body which way to
move and turn, Mt. vi. 22 ; Lk. xi. 34 ; the prophecies of
the O. T., inasmuch as they afforded at least some knowl-
edge relative to the glorious return of Jesus from heaven
down even to the time ivhen by the Holy Spirit that same
light, like the day and the day-star, shone upon the hearts
of men, the light by which the prophets themselves had
been enlightened and which was necessary to the full per-
ception of the true meaning of their prophecies, 2 Pet.
i. 19; to the brightness of a lamp that cheers the be-
holders a teacher is compared, whom even those rejoiced
in who Λvere unwilling to comply with his demands, Jn.
v. 35 ; Christ, who will hereafter illumine his follow-
ers, the citizens of the heavenly kingdom, with his own
glory, Rev. xxi. 23."
λίω; impf. ίλυον, 1 aor. «λυσα; Pass., pres. λύομαι;
impf. (λυόμην ; ]if. 2 pers. sing. λ<λυσαι. I'tc]i. λιλυμίνος; 1
Άοτ.ίλύθην; 1 iut. λυθήσομαι ; fr. Horn, (luwu ; .Sept. sev-
eral times for ΠΠϋ to open, ΤΠΠ and Chald. ΧΊΕί (Dan.
iii. 25; v. 12) ; /o /oose; i.e. 1. to loose any person
(or thing) tied or fastened : prop, the bandages of the
feet, the shoes, Mk. i. 7; Lk. iii. 16; Jn. i. 27; Acts
[xiii. 25] ; vii. 33, (so for hp} to take off, Ex. iii. 5 ; Josh.
V. 15) ; πωλον (SfSf/ic'i/ov), Mt. xxi. 2; Mk. xi. 2, [3 L
mrg.], 4 sq. ; Lk. xix. 30 sq. 33 ; bad angels. Rev. ix.
14 sq. ; τόκ βοϋν άπο της φάτνης, Lk. xiii. Ιό; trop. of
husband and ivife joined together by the bond of matri-
mony, λ<λυσα( άπο γυναικός (opp. to dc'dftrac -γυναικί),
spoken of a single man, whether he has already had a
wife or has not yet married, 1 Co. vii. 27. 2. to loose
one bound, i. e. to unbind, release from bonds, set free :
one bound up (swathed in bandages), Jn. xi. 44 ; bound
ivith chains (a prisoner). Acts .xxii. 30 (where Rec. adds
άπο των δίσ/χώο ) ; hence i. q. to discharge from prison,
lit go. Acts xxiv. 26 Rec. (so as far back as Horn.); in
Apocalyptic vision of the devil (κ(κλίΐσμίνον). Rev. xx.
3 ; f/c της φυλακής αϋτοΰ, 7 ; metaph. to free (άπο 8(σμοΰ)
from the bondage of disease (one held by Satan) by
restoration to health, Lk. xiii. 16 ; to release one bound
by the chains of sin, tic των αμαρτιών. Rev. i. δ L Τ Tr
WH (see λούω fin. [cf. W. § 30, 6 a.]). 3. to loosen,
undo, dissolve, anything bound, tied, or compacted to-
λνω
385
μαΎΟ•;
gether : the seal of a book, Rev. v. 2, [5 Rec] ; trop.,
τον δίσ/ιόι> της -γΧώσση! τινόι, to remove an impediment
of s|ieech, restore speecli to a dumb man, Mk. vii. 35
(Justin, hist. 13, 7, 1 cui nonien Battos propter litujuue
ohliijalionem imt; ζ linguae noi/is soluiis loijui primum
ooopit) ; an assembly, i. e. lo disinixs, hreak up: την
συναγιογήν, pass., Acts xiii. 43 (ayopijv, Horn. II. 1, 30.5;
Od. 2, 257, etc.; Apoll. Rh. 1, 708; την στρατών, Xen.
Cyr. 6, 1, 2) ; of the bonds of death, Xinv ται CiSivas τον
θίΐνάτου, Acts ii. 24 (see ωδίν). Laws, as having bind-
ing force, are likened to bonds; hence Xifiv is i. q. lo
anmil, subvert; tu do away wilk ; to deprive of authoritij,
wliether by precejit or by act ■ ιντόΚήν, Mt. v. 19; τον
νόμον, Jn. vii. 23 ; το σάββατον, the commandment con-
cerning the sabbath, Jn. v. 18 ; την γραφήν, Jn. .\. 35 ; cf.
Kuinoel on Mt. v. 1 7 ; [on the singular reading λΰίΐ τον
Ίησονν, 1 Jn. iv. 3 Wll mrg. sceWe.ilcolt, Com. ad loc] ;
by a Chald. and Talmud, usage (equiv. to "\r\K, 6f1i3 [cf.
W. 32]), opp. to δί'ω (q. v. 2 c), to declare lawful: Mt.
.xvi. 19; xviii. 18, [but cf. Weixs in Meyer 7te Aufl. ad
11. cc.]. to loose what is compacted or built together,
to hreak up, demolixk, destroy : prop, in pass. eXxltro η
πρνμνα, was breaking to pieces. Acts x.wii. 41 ; ritv ναόν,
Jn.ii. 19; το ρΐσότηιχον του φρα-γμον,Έ,ρΥί. η.Ι-ί {τατΐίχη,
1 Esdr. i. 52 ; ■γίψυραν, Xen. an. 2, 4,17 sq.) ; to dissolve
sometliing coherent into parts, to destroy : pass., [τούτων
πάντων λυομ/ι/ωι/, 2 Pet. iii. 11]; τα (ττοιχ^ΐα {κανσονμίνα),
2 Pet. iii. 10; ουρανοί {πυροϋμιναι), ib. 12; raetaph. tu
overthrow, do away icilli : τα tpya τον διαβιίΚου, 1 Jn. iii.
8. [CoMP. : ava-, άπο-, Sia-, (κ-, ΐπι-, κατά-, τταρα-\ύω.^ *
Aiats [WH ΛωΐΓ], -ίδοΓ, ij, Lois, a Christian matron, the
grandmother of Timothy : 2 Tim. i. 5.*
Αώτ, 6, (ϋι*? a covering, veil), [indecl.; of. B.D.], Lot,
the son of Ilaran the brother of Abraham (Gen. xi. 27,
31 ; -xii. 4 sqq. ; xiii. 1 s(iq.; xiv. 12 sqq. ; xix- 1 sqq.):
Lk. xvii. 28 sq. 32 ; 2 Pet. ii. 7.•
Μ
fM, μ: on its (Alexandrian, cf. Slur::, De dial. Maced. et
Alex. p. 130 si).) retention in such forms as λ-Ζιμψομαι, ave-
\-ήμφθη, ττροσωίΓολήμιττηί, ανά\ημψΐ5, aud tlie like, see (tlie
several words in their places, and) W. 48 ; B. 62 (54) , esp.
Tdf. Proleg. p. 72; Ktienen and C'ufcci, Praef p. Ixx. ; Scriv-
ener, Collation etc. p. Iv. sq., and Introd. p. 14 ; Fntzsche, Rom.
Tol. i p. 110; on -μ- or -μμ- in pf. pass, ptcps. (e. g. ϊΐίστραμ-
μίνοί, τίρφ(ραμμ(νοί, etc., see each word in its place, and)
cf. ΙΓ//. App. p. 170 sq. ; on tlie droppiug of μ iu ίμπίττλημι,
ίμττιπράα, see the words.]
Μοάβ, 6, (Di'O to be small), Maath, one of Christ's
ancestors : Lk. iii. 26.*
ΜαγαΒάν, see the foil. word.
Μαγδαλά, a place on the western shore of the Lake of
Galilee, about three miles distant from Tiberias towards
the north; according to the not improbable conjecture
of Gesenius (Thesaur. i. p. 26 7) identical with SsS^S'lJO
(i. e. tower of God), a fortified city of the tribe of
Naphtali (Josh. xix. 38) ; in the Jerus. Talmud SlJO
{Miii/did or Miydal); now Medsckel or Medjdcl, a
wrctclied Mohammedan village with the ruins of an an-
cient tower (see Win. IIWB. s. v. ; Robinson, Palest, ii.
p. 396 sq.; Arnold iu llcrzog viii. p. 661 ; Kneucker in
Schenkel iv. p. 84; [Hackell in B.D. s. v.; Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, i. 571 sq.]) : Mt. xv. 39 RG, with
the var. reading (adopted by L TTr WH [cf. WH. App.
» ρ 7
p. 160]) Vlayahav, Vulg. Magedan, (Syr. 0|~ie) ; if
either of these forms was the one used by the Evangelist
it could very easily have been changed by the copyists
into the more familiar name MaySaXd.'
Μαγδαληνή, -ης, η, (Μαγδαλά, q. v.), Magdalene, a
ivoman of Magdala: Mt. xxvii. 56, 61 ; xxviii. 1 ; Mk.
XV. 40, 47; xvi. 1,9; Lk. viii. 2 ; xxiv. 10; Jn. xix. 25 ;
XX. 1,18.•
[Μογίδών (Rev. xvi. 16 WH), see Άρμαγίδών.]
μαγεία (ΤλλΤΙ μαγία, see I, t), -as, ή, (μάγοί, q. v.),
magic; p\ur. magic arts, sorceries: Acts viii. 11. (The•
ophr., Joseph., Plut., al.)•
μαγεύω; (μίΐ'γοϊ); to be a magician; to practise magical
arts : Acts viii. 9. (Eur. Iph. 1338 ; Plut. Artax. 3, 6,
and in other auth.) *
μαγΟα, see μαγ(ία.
μάγο5, -ου, ό, (llebr. JD, plur. D'JO; a word of Indo-
Germanic origin; cf. Oescnius, Tlies. ii. p. 766; /. G.
MUller in Ilerzog viii. p. G78 ; [ Vanilek, Fremdwdrter,
8. v.; but the word is now regarded by many as of Baby-
lonian origin; see Sc/irader, Keilinschriften u.s.w. 2te
Aufl. p. 417 sqq.]); fr. Soph, and Ildt. down; Sept.
Dan. ii. 2 and several times in Theodot. ad Dan. for
'"ΐψΧ; a magus; tlie name given by the Babylonians
(Chaldieans), Medes, Persians, and others, to the wise
men, teachers, priests, physicians, astrologers, seers, in-
terpreters of dreams, augurs, .soothsayers, sorcerers etc.;
cf. Win. RWB. s. v. ; J. G. Miiller in Herzog 1. c. pp.
675-685; Hollzmann in Schenkel iv. p. 84 sq.; [BB.DD.
s. V. i\Iagi]. In the N. T. the name is given 1.
to the oriental wise men (astrologers) who, having dis-
covered by the rising of a remarkable star [see αστήρ,
and cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Jlessiah, i. 209 sqcp] that
the Messiah had just been born, came to Jerusalem to
Ma'y(u'y
386
μ,ακραν
worship him: Mt. ii. 1, 7, 16. 2. to false prophets
and sorcerers: Acts xiii. G, 8, cf. viii. 9, 11.*
Μαγώγ, ό, see Γώγ.
Μα8ιάμ, ή, (Ilebr. J'TD [i. e. 'strife']), MUUan [in
A. V. (cd. 161 1) N. T. Madian'], prop, name of the ter-
ritory of the Midianites in Arabia; it took its name
from Midian, son of Abraham and Keturah (Gen. .x.w.
1 8(j.) : Acts vii. 29.*
lia^os, -οΰ, ό, the breaat: of a man, Rev. i. 13 Lchm.
[(see μαστός). From Ilom. do\vn.]*
μοθητίύω: 1 aor. (μαθήτιυσα; 1 aor. pass. (μαθητ(νθην\
(μαθητής) ; 1. intrans. τίνί, Ιο be the disciple of
one ; to follow his precepts and instruction: Mt. ,\xvii. 57
R G Wil mrg., cf. .In. xix. 38 (so Plut. mor. pp. 832 b.
(vit. Antiph. 1), 837 c. (vit. Isocr. 10) ; Jamblichus, vit.
Pythag. c. 23). 2. trans, (cf. W. p. 23 and § 38,
1 ; [B. § 131, 4]) to make a disciple; to teach, instruct:
Tiva, Mt. xxviii. 19 ; Acts xiv. 21 ; pass, with a dat. of
the pers. whose disciple one is made, Mt. xxvii. 57 L Τ
Tr WII txt. ; μαθητ€υθ(Ίς fls την βασί\(ίαρ των ovp. (see
γραμματινς, 3), Mt. xiii. 52 Rec, wliere long since the
more correct reading tjj βασ. των oip. was adopted, but
without changing the sense; [yet Lchm. inserts fi»].*
μαθητή;, -oC, ό, (μανθάνω), a learner, pupil, disciple :
Univ., opp. to διδάσκαλοί, Mt. x. 24 ; Lk. vi. 40 ; Tivor
one who follows one's teaching : Ιωάννου, Mt. ix. 14 ;
Lk. vii. 18 (19); Jn. iii. 25; των φαρισ., Mt. .x.xii. 16;
Mk. ii. 18; Lk. v. 33; ΜωΟσί'ωί , .In. ix. 28 ; of Jesus, —
in a wide sense, in the Gospels, those among the .Tews
who favored him, joined his party, became his adher-
ents ; Jn. vi. 66 ; vii. 3 ; xix. 38 ; οχΚυ! μαθητών αϋτοΰ,
Lk. vi. 17 ; οι /ί• αίτον ίκανοί, Lk. vii. 11 ; άπαν τό ττλήόοϊ
τών μαθ. Lk. xix. 37 ; but especially the twelve apostles :
Mt. X. 1 ; xi. 1 ; xii. 1 ; Mk. viii. 27 ; Lk. viii. 9 ; Jn. ii.
2; iii. 22, and very often; also simply oi μαθηταί, Mt.
xiii. 10; xiv. 19; Mk. x. 24 ; Lk. ix. 16; Jn. vi. 11 [Rec],
etc. ; in the Acts oi μαθηταί are all those who confess
Jesus as the Messiah, Christians : Acts vi. 1 sq. 7 ; ix. 1 9 ;
xi. 26, and of ten ; with τοϋ κυρίον added, Acts ix. 1. The
word is not found in the O. T., nor in the Epp. of the
N. T., nor in the Apocalypse ; in Grk. writ. fr. [Ildt.],
Arstph., Xen., Plato, down.
μαθήτρια, -as, ή, (a fem. form of μαθητής; cf. ψ•άλτ7)9,
ψάλτρια, etc., in Bltm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. iib), a female dis-
ciple ; i. q. α Christian woman : Acts ix. 36. (Diod. 2,
52; Diog. Laert. 4, 2; 8, 42.)*
[Μαβθαθίαβ, see ΜατταδίαΕ-]
Μαθθαίθ5, ίιίαθθάν, see Ματθαίος, Ματθάν.
Μαθθάτ, see Ματθάτ.
Μαθουσ-άλα, Τ WII Μαθονσα\ά [cf. Tdf Proleg. p.
103], ό, (nSp/ino man of a dart, fr. ino, construct form
of the imused nr? a man, and rhp a dart [cf. B. D. s.
V.]), Methuselah, the son of Enoch and grandfather of
Noah (Gen. v. 21) : Lk. iii. 37.•
Μαΐνάν (TTrWH i/iewa), indecl., (Lchm. Miwas,
gen. Mfvva),o, Menna or Menan, [A. V. (1611) Menam'],
the name of one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 31 [Lchm.
br. τον Μ.].•
μαίνομαι; [fr. Horn, down] ; to he mad, to rave : said of
one who so speaks that he seems not to be in his right
mind. Acts xii. 15; xxvi. 24; 1 Co. xiv. 23; opp. to
σωφροσύνης ρήματα άττοφθίγγΐσθαι. Acts .\.\vi. 25; joined
λυΙιΙι ^αιμόνίον ^χαν, Jii. χ. 20. [CoMP. : (μ-μαίνομοί-^ *
μακαρίζω; Attic fut. μακαριω [cf. Β. 37 (32)]; (μακά-
ριος) ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for "IDN ; to pronounce
blessed : τινά, Lk. i. 48 ; Jas. v. 1 1 (here Vulg. bealifico).*
μακάριος, -a, -ov, (poetic ^ιάκαρ), [fr. Pind., Plat, down],
blessed, happy: joined to names of God, 1 Tim. i. 1 1 ;
vi. 15 (cf. μάκαρ^ς θ(θί in Horn, and lies.) ; ίλπίς. Tit.
ii. 13; as a predicate. Acts xx. 35; 1 Pet. iii. 14; iv.
14 ; ηγούμαι τίνα μακ. Acts xxvi. 2 ; μακάρ• ίν τίΜ, .las. i.
25. In congratulations, the reason why one is to be
pronounced blessed is expressed by a noun or by a ptcp.
taking the place of the subject, μακάριος 6 etc. (Hebr.
"3 ^"^VH, Ps. i. 1 ; Deut. xxxiii. 29, etc.) blessed the man,
who etc. [W. 551 (512 sq.)] : Mt. v. 3-11 ; Lk. vi. 20-
22 ; Jn. xx. 29 ; Rev. i. 3 ; .\vi. 15 ; xix. 9 ; xx. 6 ; xxii.
14 ; by the addition to the noun of a ptcp. which takes
the place of a predicate, Lk. i. 45; x. 23; xi. 27 sq. ;
Rev. xiv. 13; foil, by 5s with a finite verb, Mt. xi. 6;
Lk. vii. 23 ; xiv. 15 ; Ro. iv. 7 sq. ; the subject noun in-
tervening, Lk. xii. 37, 43 ; xxiii. 29 ; Jas. i. 12 ; μακ. . . .
ΟΤΙ, Mt. xiii. Iii ; xvi. 17 ; Lk. xiv. 14; foil, by fav, Jn.
xiii. 17 ; 1 Co. vii. 40. [See Schmidt ch. 187, 7.]
μακαρισμός, -oi, 6, (μακαρίζω), declaration of blessed-
ness: Ro. iv. 9; Gal. iv. 15; Xtyeiv τ6ν μηκ. τίνος, to utter
a declaration of blesseilncss upon one, a fuller way of say-
ing μακαρίζ(ΐν τινά, to pronounce one blessed, Ro. iv. 6.
(Plat. rep. 9 p. 591 d. ; [Aristot. rhet. 1, 9, 34] ; Plut.
mor. p. 471 c. ; eccles. writ.) *
MaKeSovCa, -at, ή [on use of art. with cf. W. § 18, 5 a.
c], Macedonia, a country bounded on the S. by Thessaly
and Epirus, on the E. by Thrace and the ^-Egean Sea,
on the W. by Elyria, and on the N. by Dardania and
Moesia [cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.)] : Acts xvi. 9 sq. 12;
xviii. 5 ; xix. 21 sq. ; xx. 1, 3 ; Ro. xv. 26 ; 1 Co. xvi. 5 ;
2 Co. i. 16 ; ii. 13 ; vii. 5 ; viii. 1 ; xi. 9 ; Phil. iv. 15 ; 1
Th. i. 7 sq. ; iv. 10; 1 Tim. i. 3.»
Μακ€&ών, -όνος, ό, a Macedonian : Acts xvi. 9 [cf. B.
§ 123, 8 Rem.]; xix. 29; x.wii. 2; 2 Co. i.x. 2, 4.*
μάκ(λλον, -ου, τό, a Lat. word, maccllum [prob. akin to
μάχ-η; Vanicek p. 687 (cf. Plut. as below)], a place where
meat and other articles of food are sold, meat-market, pro-
vision-market, [A. V. shambles'] : 1 Co. x. 25. (Dio Cass.
61, \9τηνά•/οραντωνο•^ων,τό μάκίΧΚον; [Plut. ii. p. 277 d.
(quaest. Rom. 54)].) '
μακράν (prop. fem. ace. of the adj. μακρός, sc. ohov, a
long way [W. 230 (216); B. § 131, 12]), adv., Sept.
for pin"), [fr. Aeschyl. down]; far, a great way: absol.,
άπ/χί IK, Lk. .XV. 20 ; of the terminus to which, _/αΓ hence,
(ξαποστ(\ω σί. Acts xxii. 21 ; with από τίνος added, Mt.
viii. 30 ; Lk. vii. 6 [T om. άττό] ; .Τη. xxi. 8 ; τοκ θ(6ν . . .
ov μακράν από ίν6ς (κάστον ήμων υπάρχοντα, 1. 6. who is
near every one of us by his power and influence (so that
we have no need to seek the knowledge of him from with-
out), Acts xvii. 27; oi cU μακράν [cf. W. 415 (387)]
μακρ•
oOev
387
μαΚΚον
those that are afar off, the inhabitants of remote regions,
j. e. the Gentiles, Acts ii. 39, cf. Is. ii. 2 sqo. ; Zech. vi.
15. nietapb. οϋ μακράν ti άπο τηί βασ. του θ(οΰ, but little
is wanting for thy reception into the kingdom of God,
or thou art almost fit to be a citizen in the divine king-
dom, ^Ik. xii. 34 ; ot irore ovres μακμάν (opp. to oi eyyu?),
of lieathen (on the sense, see iyyis, 1 b.), Eph. ii. 13;
also oi μακράν, ib. 1 7.*
μακρόθεν, (μακρός), adv., esp. of later Grk. [Polyb.,
al. ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 93] ; Sept. for ρίΓΤΐΌ, ΡΙΠ";,
etc.; from afar, of ar : Mk. viii. 3 ; .\i. 13; Lk. xviii. 13;
xxii. 54; xxiii. 49; with the prep, από prefixed (cf. W.
422 (393) ; § G5, 2 ; B. 70 (62)) : Mt. x.xvi. 58 [here
Τ om. WH br. άπο] ; xxvii. 55 ; Mk. v. 6 ; xiv. 54 ; xv.
40; Lk. xvi. 23; Rev. xviii. 10, 15, 17 ; alsoLTTrAVH
in Mk. xi. 13 ; L Τ Trmrg. AVH in Lk. xxiii. 49 ; Τ Tr
WH in Mk. viii. 3, (Ps. cxxxvii. (cxxxviii.) 6 ; 2 K. xLx.
25 cod. .\lex. ; 2 Esdr. iii. 13).•
μακροθυμ,ί'ω, -ώ; 1 aor., impv. μακροθύμησυν, ptcp. μακρό-
θυμησας ; (tr. μακρόθνμοί, and this fr. μακρός and θυμός) ;
to be of a long spirit, not to lose heart; hence 1. to
persevere patiently and bravely (i. q. καρτιρω, so Plut. de
gen. Socr. c. 24 p. 593 f. ; Artem. oneir. 4, 1 1) in endur-
ing misfortunes and troubles: absol., Heb. vi. 15; Jas.
V. 8 ; with the addition of ϊως and a gen. of the desired
e\ent, ib. 7 ; witli ini and a dat. of the thing hoped for,
ibid. ; add, Sir. ii. 4. 2. to be patient in bearing the
offences and injuries of others; to be mild and slow in
avenging; to be long-suffering, slow to anger, slow to pun-
ish, (for f\K ^'"ΙΚΠ, to defer anger, Prov. xix. 11) : absol.
1 Co. xiii. 4 ; προς τίνα, 1 Th. v. 14 ; i-ni with dat. of pers-
(see ini, B. 2 a. δ.), Mt. xviii. 26, 29 [here L Tr with the
ace, so Tr in 26 ; see fVi, C. L 2 g. /3.] ; Sir. xviii. 11 ;
xxix. 8 ; hence spoken of God deferring the punishment
of sin : eis τίνα, towards one, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [here L Τ Tr
mrg. hia (q. v. B. II. 2 b. sub fin.)] ; ini with dat. of
pers., Lk. xviii. 7; in this dilhcult passage we shall nei-
ther preserve the constant usage of μακροθυμ^Ίν (see just
before) nor get a reasonable sense, unless we regard the
words cV' αΰτ-οΐί as negligently (see αντός, II. 6) referring
to the enemies of the ΐκΚικτών, and translate κα\ μακροθυ-
μων in αυτοΧς even though he is long-siffering, indulgent,
to them; — this negligence being occasioned by the cir-
cumstance that Luke seems to represent Jesus as speak-
ing with Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 22 (18) in mind, where in
αύτοίς must be referred to άν€'\(ημόνων. The reading [of
L Τ Tr WH] KOL μακροβνμύ in αυτοίς ; by which το μακρο-
θυμι'ιν is denied to God [cf. W. § 55, 7] cannot be ac-
cepted, because the preceding parable certainly demands
the notion of slowness on God's part in avenging the right ;
cf. De AVette ad loc. ; [but to this it is replied, that the
denial of actual delay is not inconsistent with the as-
sumption of ap])arent delay; cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss)
ad loc.].•
μακροθυμΟα, -ac. η. (μακρόθνμος \ci. μακροθνμΐω]), (Vulg.
longanimitax, etc.), i. e. 1. patience, endurance, con-
stancy, steadfastness, perseverance; esp. as shown in bear-
ing troubles and ills, (Plut. Luc. 32 sq. ; άνθρωηος S>v
μη5(ποτ( την ά\υπ!αν αΐτοΰ napa θ(ων, άλλα μακρηθυμίαν,
Menand. frag. 1 9, p. 203 ed. Meineke [vol. iv. p. 238
Frag, comic. Graec. (Berl. 1841)]) : Col. i. 11 ; 2 Tim.
iii. 10; Heb. vi. 12; Jas. v. 10; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64;
Barn. ep. 2, 2; [Is. Ivii. 15 ; Joseph, b. j. 6, 1, 5 ; cf. 1
Mace. viii. 4]. 2. patience, forbearance, long-suffer-
ing, slowness in avenging wrongs, (for D'iJK l|"iS, Jer. xv.
15) : Ro. ii. 4 ; ix. 22 ; 2 Co. vi. 6 ; Gal. v. 22 ; Eph. iv.
2; CoL iu. 12; 1 Tim. i. 16 [cf. B. 120 (105)]; 2 Tim.
iv. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 20; 2 Pet. iii. 15; (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
13, 1 ; Ignat. ad Eph. 3, 1).•
[iSvN. μακροβυμία, υπομονή (occur together ΟΓ in the
same context iu Col. ill; 2 Cor. \n 4, 6 ; 2 Tim. iii. 10; Jas. v.
10, 11 ; cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64 ; Ignat. ad Eph. 3, 1) • Bp.
Lghtft. remarks (on Col. 1. c), "The difference of meaning
is best seen in their opposites. While inro. is the temper
which does not easily succumb under suffering, μακ. is the
self-restraint which does not hastily retaliate a wrong. The
one is opposed to cowardice or despondency, the other to
wrath or revenge (Prov. xv. 18 ; xvi. 32) . . . This distinc-
tion, though it applies generally, is not true ivithout excep-
tion". . . ; cf. also his note on Col. iii. 12, and see (more at
length) Trench, N. Τ Syn. § liu.]
μακροθνμω;, adv., with longanimity (Vulg. longanimiter,
Heb. vi. 15), i. e. patiently : Acts xxvi. 3.•
μακρό;, -ά, -όν, [fr. Horn, down], long ; of place, remote,
distant, far off : ;(ώρα, Lk. xv. 13 ; xix. 12. of time, /on^,
lasting long : μακρά ηροσίΰχομαι, to pray long, make long
prayers, Mt. .x.xiii. 14 (13) Rec. ; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx.
47.•
μακρο-χρόνιο;, -ov, (μακρός and χρόνος), lit. 'long-timed'
(Lat. longaevus), long-lived : Eph. vi. 3. (Ex. xx. 12;
Deut. V. 16 ; very rare in prof, auth.) *
μαλακία, -ar, ή, (μαλακός) ; 1. prop, sofness [fr.
Hdt. down]. 2. in the N. T. (like aadivfia, αρρώ-
στια) infirmity, debility, bodily weakness, sickness, (Sept.
for ''7Π, disease, Deut. vii. 15 ; xxviii. 61 ; Is. xxxviii. 9,
etc.) ; joined with νόσος, Mt. iv. 23 ; ix. 35 ; x. 1.•
μαλακές, -t), -όν, soft : soft to the touch : Ιμάτια, Mt. .xi.
8 RGLbr. ; Lk. vii. 25, (Ιματίων πολυτ-ίλώκ κ. μαλακών,
Artem. oneir. 1, 78; ισθής, Horn. Od. 23, 290; Artem.
oneir. 2, 3 ; χιτών, Ilom. II. 2, 42) ; and simply τα μάΚακά,
soft raiment (see λίυκός, 1) : I\It. xi. 8 TTrWH. Like
the Lat. mollis, metaph. and in a bad sense: effeminate, of
a catamite, a male who submits his body to unnatural
lewdness, 1 Co. vi. 9 (Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 2 sub fin.;
[Diog. Laert. 7, 173 fin.]).*
Μαλ£λ£ήλ (Mfλ€λel7λ, Tdf.), 6, (SxS"7n•? praising God,
fr. SSnp and h»), Mahalateel [A. V. Maleleei], son of
Cainan : Lk. iii. 37.*
μάλιστα (superlative of the adv. μάλα), [fr. Horn, down],
adv., especially, chiefly, mast of all, above all: Acts xx.
38; x.xv. 26; Gal. vi. 10; PhU. iv. 22; 1 Tim. iv. 10;
v. 8, 17 ; 2 Tim. iv. 13; Tit. i. 10; Philem. 16 ; 2 Pet.
ii. 10; μάλιστα γνώστης, especially expert, thoroughly
well-informed. Acts xxvi. 3.•
μάλλον (compar. of μάλα, very, very much), [fr. Horn.
down], adv., more, to a greater degree ; rather ; L
added to verbs and adjectives, it denotes increase, a
μ5Χ\ον
388
μανθανω
greater quantity, a larger measure, a higher degree,
morf, more full;/, (Germ, in holiemn (irade, Maa.tse) ; a.
words defining the measure or size are joined to it in the
ablative (dat.) : πολλώ much, by far, Alk. x. 4H; Lit.
xviii. 39; Ro. v. 15, 17, (in both these verses the under-
lying thought is, the measure of salvation for which we
are in<lebted to Christ is far greater than that of the
ruin which came from Adam ; for the difference between
the consequences trai^eable to Adam and to Christ is not
only one of quality, but of quantity also ; cf. Uiirkcrl, Com.
on llom. vol. i. 281 sq. [al. (fr. Chrys. to Meyer and Godet)
content themselves here with a logical increase, _/ar
more cerlainlyy) ; 2 Co. iii. 9, 11 ; Phil. ii. 12 ; ττόσω Iiotc
much, Lk. xil. 24 ; Ro. .\i. 12 ; Philem. IG ; lleb. i.\. 14 ;
τοσούτω hy so much, 5σω by as jnitch, (sc. μάλλον), Heb.
X. 25. b. in comparison it often so stands tliat thmi
be/ore must be mentally added, [.\. V. ihe more, so much
Vie more'], as Mt. x.wii. 24 (μάλλοι/ θόρνβος ylverai [but al.
refer this to 2 b. a. below]) ; hk. v. 15 {^ιήρχιτο μάλλον) ;
Jn. V. 18 {μά\\ον {ζήτονν) ; xix. 8; Acts v. U ; ix. 22;
xxii. 2; 2 Co. vii. 7; 1 Th. iv. 1, 10; 2 Pet. i. 10; ΐη
μάλλον και μάλλον, Phil. i. 9 ; or the person or thing with
which the comparison is made is evident from what pre-
cedes, as Phil. iii. 4; it is added to comparatives, Mk.
vii. 36 ; 2 Co. vii. 13 ; ττολλώ μάλλον κρ(Ίσσον, Phil. i. 23 ;
see [AVetstein on Phil. 1. c] ; \V. § 35, 1 cf. 603 (5(;i);
[B. § 123, 11]; to verbs that have a comparative force,
μάλλον ίιαφί'ρί ii/ nvor, to be of much more value than one,
Alt. vi. 26. μάλλον ή, more than, Mt. xviii 13; μά λ/ιν
with gen., πάντων υμών, 1 Co. xiv. IK (Xen. mem. 3, 12,
1). joined to positive terms it forms a perijjhrasis for a
comparative [cf. VV. § 35, 2 a.], foil, by ή, as μακύμιον μ.
for μακηριώτίρον, .\cts xx. 35 ; add, 1 Co. i.\. 15 ; Gal. iv.
27; ίτολλω μάλλον άνα -yitaia, 1 Co. xii. 22; sometimes μάλ-
λον seems to be omitted before η; see under ij, 3 f. c.
μάλλον βί, whal moreover U of greater moment, [.\. V. yea
rather] : Ro. viii. 34 (2 Mace. vi. 23). 2. it marks
the preference of one thing above another, and is to be
rendered rather, sooner, (Germ, eher, vielmehr, lieber) ; a.
it denotes that whrch occurs more easily than something
else, and may be rendered sooner, (Germ, eher) : thus
ΐΓολλώ μάλλον in arguing from the less to the greater, Mt.
vi. 30 ; Ro. V. 9 sq. ; Heb. xii. 9 [here L Τ Tr WII no\i μ.] :
also πολύ [RG7roλλώ] μάλλον sc. oiie (κφ^υξόμΐθα. Ί e.
much more shall we not escape (cf. W. p. 63:J (.5s,s) note
[B. § 148, 3 b.]), or even cvSkov μισθαπο8ησίαν \ηψ-ήμ(θα
( Heb. ii. 2), or something similar (cf. .Matthiae § 634, 3),
Heb. xii. 25. πόσω μάλλον, Mt. vii. 11 ; x. 25; Lk. xii.
28; Ro. xi. 12, 24; Philem. 16. in a question, οί/ίάλλον;
(Lat. nonne potiusf) [do not . . . more], 1 Co. ix. 1 2. b.
it is opposed to something else and does away with
it; accordingly it may be rendered the rather (Germ.
vielmehr); o. after a preceding negative or prohibi-
tive .sentence : Mt. x. G, 28; XXV. 9; Mk. v. 26 ; Ro. xiv.
13; iTim. λΊ. 2; Heb. xii. 13; μάλλον 8/, Eph. iv. 28 ; v.
11. ουχί μάλλον; (nonne pntius ?) not rather etc.? 1 Co.
V. 2; vi. 7. p. so that μάλλον belongs to the thing
which is preferred, consequently to a noun, not to a
verb: Jn. iii. 19 (ijyujnjaai' μάλλον τό ff«c<5rot η τ6 φΣ>!,
i. e. when they ought to liave loved the light they (hated
it, and) loved the darkness, vs. 20) ; xii. 43 ; Acts iv.
19; v. 23 ; 2 Tim. iii. 4. that which it ojjposes and sets
aside must be learned from the context [cf. W. § 35, 4] :
.Mk. XV. 11 (sc. ^ Tov'Ii)(roCv) ; Phil. i. 12 (where the mean-
ing is, ' so far is the gospel from suffering any loss or dis-
advantage from my imprisonment, that the number of
di.sciples is increased in conse([uence of it '). γ. by
way of correction, μάλλον 8e', nay rather; to speak more
correctly: Gal. iv. 9 (.Joseph, antt. 15, 11, 3; Ael. v. h.
2, 13 and often in prof. auth. ; cf. Grimm, Exeg. Hdbcb.
on Sap. p. 17G sq.). c. it does not do away with that
with which it is in opposition, but marks what has the
preference: more williitf/ly, more readily, tooner
(( ierm. liehcr), θίΧω μάλλοι/ and «ύδοκώ μάλλον, to prefer,
1 Co. xiv. 5; 2 Co. v. 8, {βοΰλομαι μάλλον, Xen. Cyr. 1,
1,1); {ι;λονν, 1 Co. .xiv. 1 (μάλλον sc. ζη\οντ() ; χρωμαι,
1 Co. vii. 21.
Μάλχοβ (nV'? Grecized ; cf. Delitzsch in the Zeitschr.
f. Luth. Theol., 1876, p. 605), -ou, o, Malchus, a servant
of the high-priest : Jn. xviii. 10. [Cf. Hackelt in B. D.
s. v.] •
μάμμη, -ijt. η, 1. in the earlier Grk. writ, mother
(the name infants use in addressing their mother). 2.
ill tlie later writ. ([Pliilo], Joseph., Plut., App., Hdian.,
Arteui.) i. (j. τήθη, grandmother (see Loh. ad Phryn. pp.
l.!3-13.-> [cf. W. 25]): 2 Tim. i. 5 ; 4 Mace. xvi. 9.•
μαμωνάΐ ((! L Τ Tr AVII), incorrectly μαμμωνάί (Rec.
fin Mt.]),-a [B. 20 (IS) ; W. § 8, \],6, mammon (Chald.
NJIOK?, to be derived, apparently, fr. px; hence Wiai u
trusted in [cf. Buxtorf, Lex. cliald. talmud. et rabbin. coL
1217 sq. (esp. ed. Fischer p. 613 sij.) ; ace. to (Jeseniui
(Thesaur. i. 552) contr. fr. [i^p•? treasure (Gen. xliii. 23);
cf. B. D. s. V. ; Edersheim, Jesus the Alessiah, ii. 269]),
riches: Mt. vi. 24 and Lk. xvi. 13, (where it is personi-
fied and opposed to Goil; cf. Phil. ii!. 19) ; Lk. xvi. 9,
11. (" lucrum punice mammon dicitur," Augustine [do
serm. Dom. in monte, 1. ii. c. xiv. (§ 4 7)]; the Sept.
trans, the Hebr. nJ1■3^5 in Is. .\x.\iii. 6 θησαυροί, and in
Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 3 πλοΟτοΓ.) *
Μαναήν, S, (ΠΠ:3 consoler), Manaen, a certain prophet
in the church at Antioch: Acts xiii. 1. [See Hacketl
in B. D. s. v.]•
Μανασ•σ•ή5 [Trcg. Maw. in Rev.], gen. and ace. -η
[Β. 11) (17); AV. § 10, 1 ; but see WH. App. p. 159'],
0, (n^:"p causing to forget, fr. T\'.i} to forget), Manas•
seh; 1. the firstborn son of Joseph (Gen. xii. 51) :
Rev. vii. 6. 2. the son of Ilezekiah, king of Jadah
(2 K. xxi. 1-18) : Mt. i. 10.•
μανθάνω; 2 aor. ίμαθον; pf. ptcp. μίμαθηκώί; Sept.
forip'^; [fr. Horn, doivn] ; lo learn, be apprised ; a.
iiniv. : absol. to increase one's knowledge, 1 Tim. ii. II;
2 Tim. iii. 7 ; to be increased in knowledge, 1 Co. xiv.
31 ; τί, Ro. xvi. 17; 1 Co. xiv. 35; Phil. iv. 9; 2 Tim.
iii. 14 ; Rev. xiv. 3 ; in Jn. vii. 15 supply αυτά ; folL by
an indir. quest., Mt. ix. 13 ; Xpurrov, to be imbued with
the knowledge of Christ, Eph. iv. 20 ; τί foil, by ajro w.
μανία
389
Μα.
ψιαμ
gen. of the thing furnishing the instruction, Mt. xxiv. 32 ;
illt. xiii. 28; από w. gen. of the pers. teaching, Mt. xi.
■29 ; Col. i. 7 ; as in class. Grk. (cf. Kriiger § 68, 34, 1 ;
B. § 1-4 7, 5 [of. 167 (146) anil από, II. 1 d.]) ; foil, by
παρά w. gen. of pers. teaching, 2 Tim. iii. 14 cf. Jn. vi. 4.Ϊ;
foil, by eV w. dat. of pers., in one i. e. by his e.xaraple [see
eV, I. 3 b.], I Co. iv. G [cf. W. 5!I0 (548 sq.) ; B. 394 s,[.
(338)]. b. \. i\. I<i hcar,hc injormeil: foil, by ότι. Acts
xxiii. 27 ; r'l από rivos (gen. of pers.), Gal. iii. 2 [see από,
u. s. ]. c. to learn by use and practice ; [in the Pret.]
to he in the habit of, accustomed to : foil, by an inf., 1 Tim.
V. 4; Tit. iii. 14 ; Phil. iv. 11, (Aeschyl. Prom. 1068 ; Xen.
an. 3, 2, 25) ; ίμαθιν αφ' l>v (παθ( την ύπακοήν, Ileb. v. 8
[cf. \V. § 68, 1 and από, u. s.]. In the dilfieult passage
1 Tim. V. 13, neither d/jyai depends upon the verb μανθά-
κουσί (which would mean " they learn to be idle ", or
" learn idleness " ; so Bretschneider [Lex. s. v. 2 b.], and
W. 347 (325 sq.) ; [cf. Stallbaum's note and reff. on
Plato's Euthydemus p. 276 b.]), nor πιρκρχόμίνοι (" they
learn to go about from house to house," — so the majority
of interpreters; for, ace. to uniform Grk. usage, a ptcp.
joined to the verb μανθάναν and belonging to the subject
denotes ichal sort of a person one /earns or perceices him-
self to be, as ίίμαθιν ίγκυος ούσα, ".she perceived herself
to be with child," Hdt. 1,5); but μανθύραν must be taken
absolutely (see a. above) and emphatically, of what they
learn by going about from house to house and what it is
unseemly for them to know ; cf. Bengel ad loc, and B.
§ 144, 17; [so Wordsivorth in loc.]. [CoMP. : κατα-
μαυθάνω-~\ *
μανία, -as, ή, (μαίνπμαι), tnadness, frenzy: Acts x.xvi.
24. [From Theognis, Hdt., down.] *
μάννα, TO, indecl. ; [also] ή μάννα in Joseph, (antt. 3,
13, 1 [etc. ; ή μάννη,ΟτΆα. Sibyll. 7, 149]); .Sept. το ^i/ [also
TO μάννα. Num. xi. 7] for Hebr. ]0 (fr. the unused rjO^
e -
Ara.6. ijjO, to be kind, beneficent, to bestow liberally ;
ο
whence the subst. ^λΛ, prop, a gift [al. prefer the deriv.
given Ex. xvi. 15, 31 ; Jo.seph. antt. 3, 1,6. The \Tord
iiiannu is said to be found also in the olil Egyptian ; Ebers,
Durch (iosen u.s.w. p. 226 ; cf. "Speaker's Coumientary"
E\od. xvi. note]); manna (Vulg. in X. T. manna indecl. ;
in O. T. man; yet manna, gen. -fir, is used by Pliny [12,
14, 32, etc.] and Vegetius [Vet. 2, 39] of the grains of
certain plants) ; according to the accoimts of travellers
a very sweet dew-like juice, which in Arabia and other
oriental countries exudes from the leaves [ace. to others
only from the twigs and branches; cf. Robinson, Pal.
i. 115] of certain trees and shrubs, particularly in the
summer of rainy years. It hardens into little white
pellucid grains, and is collected before sunri.se by the in-
habitants of those countries and used as an article of food,
very sweet like honey. The Israelites in their journey
through the wilderness met with a great ipiantity of food
nf tliis kin<l ; and tradition, which the biblical writers
follow, regarded it as bread sent down in profusion from
heaven, and in various ways gave the occurrence the dig-
nity of an illustrious miracle (Ex. xvi. 12 eqq. ; Ps.
Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 24 ; civ. (cv.) 40 ; Sap. xvi. 20) ; cf.
Win. IIWB. s. V. >Ianna ; Knobel on Exod. p. 171 sqq.;
Furrer in Schenkel iv. 1U9 sip; \_Itobinson as above,
and p. 590 ; Tischendorf, Aus dem hell. Lande, p. 54 sqq.
(where on p. vi. an analysis of diff. species of natural
manna is given after Berthelot (Coraptes rendus heb-
dom. d. seances de I'acad. des sciences. Paris 1861, 2de
scmestre (3i) Sept.) p. 5S3 sqq.) ; esp. Ritter, Erdkunde
Pt. xiv. pp. 6G5-695 (Gage's trans, vol. i. pp. 271-292,
where a full list of reff. is given) ; esp. E. Renaud and
E. Lacour, De la manne du desert etc. (1881). Against
the identification of the natural raanna with the miracu-
lous, see BB.DD. s. v. ; esp. Riehm in his HWB. ; Car-
ruthers in the Bible Educator ii. 174 sqq.]. In the N. T.
mention is made of a. that manna with which the
Israelites of old ivere nourished : Jn. vi. 31, 49, and R
L in 58 ; b. that which was kept in tlie ark of the
covenant: Ileb. ix. 4 (Ex. .xvi. 33) ; c. thatwliich
in the symbolic language of Rev. ii. 17 is spoken of as
kept in the heavenly temjile for the food of angels and
the blessed; [see δίδωμι, Β. Γ. p. 146"].•
μαντ<νομαι ; (μάντί! [a seer ; allied to μανία, μαίνομαι J
cf. Curtius § 429]) ; fr. Horn, down ; to act as seer; de-
lirer an oracle, prophesi/, dicine : Acts xvi. 1 6 μαντινομίνη,
of a false prophetess [A. V. /«/ soolhsayinej']. Sept. for
DDp, to practise divination ; said of false prophets. [On
the heathen character of the suggestions and associa-
tions of the word, as distinguished fr. προφητίΰω, see
Trench, N. T. Syn. § vi.] *
μαραίνω : 1 fut. pass, μαρανθήσομαι ; fr. Ilom. II. 9,
212 ; 23, 228 on; to exlinyuiah (a flame, fire, light, etc.) ;
to render arid, make to waste away, cause to wither; pass.
to iclther, trill, dry tip (Sap. ii. 8 of roses ; Job xv. 30).
Trop. to waste away, consume away, perish, {νόσω, Eur.
Ale. 203 ; τω λιμω, .Joseph, b. j. 6, 5, 1) ; i. q. to have a
miserable end: Jas. i. 11, where the writer uses a fig.
suggested by what he had just said (10) ; [B. 52 (46)].•
μαρανοθά [so Lchm., but μαράν άθά 11 G Τ Tr WH], the
Chald. words r\i^Vi "^1?' '■ ^• ""'" Lord cometh or will
come : 1 Co. xvi. 22. [BB.DD. ; cf. Klostermann, Pro-
bleme etc. (1.S83) p. 220 sqq. ; Kautzsch, Gr. pp. 12, 1 74 ;
Nestle in Theol. Stud, aus Wurtem. 1884 p. 186 sqq.]•
μαργαρίτης, -ου, ό, a pearl : Mt. .xiii. 45 sq. ; 1 Tim. ii.
9; Rev. xvii. 4 ; .wiii. [12], 16; .xxi. 21 [hereLT WII
accent -ρίτω, R G Tr -ρίται (cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 101)] ;
Toiis μαργαρίτα! βάΧΚιιν ίμπρυσθίν χοίρα», a proverb, i. e.
to thrust the most sacred and precious teachings of the
gospel upon the most wicked and abandoned men (in-
competent as they are, through their hostility to the
gospel, to receive them), and thus to profane them, Mt.
vii. 6 (cf. Prov. iii. 15 sq. ; .Tob xxviii. IS sq.).•
Μάρθα, -at (Jn. xi. 1 [cf. B. 1 7 (15) ; WH. App. p. 156]),
4, (Chald. SniT mistress, Lat. domina), Martha, the sis-
ter of Lazarus of Bethany : Lk. x. 38, 40 sq. ; Jn. xi. 1,
ft, 19-39; xii. 2. [On the accent cf. Kautzsch p. 8.]*
Μαριάμ indecl., and Μαρία, -<is, ή, (D'^'VS Obstinacy,'
• rebelliousness ' ; the well-known prop, name of the sistef
Μάρκος
390
μαρτυρε(Λ
of Moses; in the Targuins D""n; ef. Delitzscli, Ze'iischr.
f. luth. Tlicol. for 1^7 7 p. 2 [Maria is a good Latin name
also]), yiurij. The women of this name menlioned in
the N. T. are the foil. 1. the mother of Jesus Christ,
the wife of Joseph; her name is written Mn/n'a [in an
oblique case] in Mt.i. 16, 18; ii. 11; Mk. vi. ,i; Lk. i.
41; Actsi. 14 [RGL]; Μαρωμ in Mt. xiii. 5.") ; Lk. i. 27,
30-56 [(in 38 Lmrg. Ma/ji'a)]; ii. 5, 16, 34; [Acts i. 14
TTrWll]; the reading varies between the two forms
in Mt. i. 20 [\VH txt. -piav] ; Lk. ii. 1 9 [L Τ Tr WII txt.
-pia\ : so where the other women of this name are men-
tioned, [see Tilf. Prok'g. p. 116, where it appears that
in his text the gen. is always (seven times) -plat; the
nom. in Mk. always (seven times) -ρία; that in Jn. -ριάμ
occurs eleven times, -p!a (or -ακ) only three times, etc. ;
for the facts respecting the Mss., see (Tdf. u. s. and)
WH. App. p. 156] ; cf. B. 17 (15). 2. Mary Mag-
dalene (a native of Magdala) : Mt. xxvii. 56, 61 ; xxviii.
1 ; Mk. XV. 40, 47; xvi. 1, 9; Lk. viii. 2; xxiv. 10; Jn.
xix. 25; x.x. 1, 11, 16, 18. 3. the mother of James
the less and Joses, the wife of Clopas (or Alphrens) and
sister of the mother of Jesus : Mt. xxvii. 56, 61 ; xxviii.
1; Mk. XV. 40, 47; xvi. 1; Lk. xxiv. 10; Jn. xix. 25
(see Ίάκωβη!, 2). Tlu're are some, indeed, who, think-
ing it improbable that there were two living sisters of
the name of Mary (t)ie common opinion), suppose that
not three but four women are enumerated in Jn. xix. 25,
and that these are distributed into two pairs so tliat η
α8(\φη της μητροί Ίησοΰ designates Salome, the wife of
Zebedee; so esj). IFicsc/er in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for
1840, p. 648 sq(i., [cf. Bp. Lghtft. com. on Gal., Dissert.
ii. esp. pp. 255 si[. 264] Λvith whom Liicke, Meyer, Ewald
and others agree ; in opp. to them cf. Grimm in Ersch
and Grubcr's Encykl. sect. 2 vol. xxii. p. 1 sq. In fact,
instances are not wanting among the Jews of two living
brothers of the same name, e. g. Onias, in Joseph, antt.
12, 5, 1 ; Herod, sons of Herod the Great, one by Mari-
amne, tlie other by Cleopatra of Jerusalem, Joseph, antt.
1 7, 1, 3 ; b. j. 1, 28, 4 ; [cf. B. D. s. v. Mary of Cleophas ;
Bp. Lghtft. u. s. p. 264]. 4. the sister of Lazarus
and Martha: Lk.x. 39,42; Jn. xi. 1-45; xii. 3. 5.
the mother of John Mark: Acts xii. 12. 6. a cer-
tain Christian woman mentioned in Ro. xvi. 6.*
MipKos, -ου. ό, Mark-, aec. to the tradition of the church
the autlior of the second canonical Gospel and identical
with the John Mark mentioned in the Acts (see Ιωάννης,
5). lie was the son of a certain Mary who dwelt at Je-
rusalem, was perhaps converted to Christianity by Peter
(Acts xii. 1 1 sq.), and for this reason called (I Pet. v. 13)
Peter's son. He was the cousin of Bai-nabas and the
companion of Paul in some of his apostolic travels : and
lastly was the associate of Peter also: Acts xii. 12, 25;
XT. 37, 39 ; Col. iv. 1 ; 2 Tim. iv. 1 1 ; Philem. 24 (23) ;
1 Pet V. 13, cf. Euseb. h. e. 2, 15 sq. ; 3, 39. Some, as
Grotius, [Tillewnnf, Hist. Eccl. ii. 89 sq. 503 sq. ; Palri-
lius, De Evangeliis 1. 1 , c. 2, quaest. 1 (cf. Colelerina. Patr.
Apost. i. 262 sq.)], Kienlen (in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843,
p. 423), contend that there were two Marks, one the
disciple and companion of Paul mentioned in the Acti
and Pauline Epp., the other the associate of Peter and
mentioned in 1 Pet. v. 13; [cf. Jas. Mariaon, Com. on
Mk. Intrud. § 4; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 10].•
μάρμαροϊ, -ου. ό, ή, (μαρμαίρω to sparkle, glisten) ; 1.
a x/une, rock; (lloin., Eur.). 2. marhic ([cf. Ep. Jer.
71], Theophr., Strabo, al.) : Rev. xviii. 12.*
μάρτυρ, -vpos, 6, see μάρτν!.
μαρτυράω, -ώ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ϊμαρτΰρουν, fut. μαρ-
τυρήσω ; I nor. ίμαρτΰρησα; p{. μιμαρτϋρηκα; Pass., pres.
μαρτνρονμαι', \ηι\^ΐ. ΐμαρτνροΰμην; \^ί. μίμαμτνρημαι', 1 aor.
(μαρτνρήθην; ίτ. [Simon., Pind.], Aeschyl., Ildt. down;
to he a witness, to bear witness, testify, i. e. to affirm lliat
one has seen or heard or experienced something, or that
(so in the X. T.) he knows it because taught by dirine
revelation or inspiration, (sometimes in the N. T. the
apostles are said paprvpt'tv, as those who had been eye-
and ear- witnesses of the extraordinary sayings, deeds
and sufferings of Jesus, which proved his Messiahship ;
so too Paul, as one to whom the risen Clirist had visibly
appeared; cf. Jn. xv. 27; xix. 35 ; xxi. 24 ; Acts xxiii.
11 ; 1 Co. XV. 15; 1 Jn. i. 2, cf. Actsi. 22 sq.; ii. 32; iii.
15; iv. 33; v. 32; x. 39, 41; xiii. 31 ; x.xvi. 16; [ef.
Westcott, (" Speaker's ") Com. on Jn., Introd. p. xlv.
sq.]) ; a. in general; absol. to give (not to keep
back) testimony: Jn. .xv. 27; Acts xxvi. 5; foil, by on
recitative and the orat. direct., Jn. iv. 39 ; also preceded
by λίγων, Jn. i. 32 ; μαρτνρΛν fls with an aec. of the place
into (unto) wliich the testimony (concerning Christ) is
borne. Acts x.xiii. 11 [see ds, A. I. 5b.]; μαρτυρώ, in-
serted parenthetically (W. § 62, 2), 2 Co. viii. 3; i. q.
to prove or confirm by testimony, 1 Jn. v. 6 sq. ; used of
Jesus, predicting what actually befell him, .In. xiii. 21 ;
of (iod, who himself testifies in the Scrijitures that a
thing is so (viz. as the author declares), foil, by the reci-
tative oTt, Ileb. vii. 1 7 R. μαρτ. foil, by Ttfp'i w. gen. of
a pers., to bear witness concerning one : Jn. i. 7 sq. ; ntpX
Toil ανθρώπου, concerning man, i. e. to tell what one has
himself learned about the nature, character, conduct, of
men, Jn. ii. 25 [see άνθρωπος, 1 a.] ; nfpi τινοί, foil, by
direct disc, Jn. i. 15 ; the Scriptures are said to testify
π€ρ\ Ίησοΰ. i. e. to declare things which make it evi-
dent that he Λvas truly sent by God, Jn. v. 39 ; God is said
to do the same, — through the Scriptures, ib. 37 cf. viii.
18 ; through the expiation wrought by the baptism and
death of Christ, and the Holy Spirit giving souls assur-
ance of this expiation, 1 Jn. v. 6-9 ; so John the Baptist,
as being a ' prophet ', Jn. v. 32 ; so the works which he
himself did, ib. 36 (there foil, by or») ; x. 25 ; so the
Holy Spirit, Jn. xv. 26; the apostles, 27; so Christ him-
self π(ρ\ ίαυτοΰ, Jn. v. 31 ; viii. 13 sq. 18. πιρί w. gen.
of the thing, Jn. xxi. 24 ; πιρΊ τοΰ κακοΰ, to bring for-
ward evidence to prove το κακόν, Jn. xviii. 23. with the
ace. of a cognate noun, μαρτυρίαν μαρτυρΛν πιρί w. a gen.
of the pers., Jn. v. 32; 1 Jn. v. 9 Rec. ; 10, (την αίτη»
μαρτυρίαν μαρτυριιν, Plat. Eryx. p. 399 b. ; την μαρτυρία»
αυτόν ην τη apfTjj μαρτυρΛ, Epict. diss. 4, 8, 32 [cf. ^V.
225 (211); Β. 148 (129)]): w. an ace. of the tiling,/*
μαρτυρεω
391
μαρτυρίου
testify a thing, bear witness to (of) anything: Jn. iii. 11,
82 ; supply αυτό in Jn. xix. 35 ; τινί τι, 1 Jn. i. 2 ; os
ίμαρτΰρησΐ ■ . ■ Χριστού, who has borne witness of (viz.
in tliis book, i. e. the Apocalypse) what God has spoken
and Jesus Christ testified (sc. concerning future events ;
see λόγοΓ, I. 2 b. €.), Rev. i. 2 ; ό μαρτύρων ταύτα he that
testifielh these things i. e. has caused them to be testified
by the prophet, his messenger, Rev. xxii. 20 ; ματνρήσαι
ύμϊν ταύτα ίπι [LTrmrg. AVH mrg. iv\ Tois (κκλησίαα, to
cause these things to be testified to you in the churches
or for, on account of, the churches, Rev. xxii. 16, —
unless eVt be dropped from the text and the passage
translated, to you, viz. the (seven) churches (of Asia
Minor), the prophet reverting again to i. 4 ; cf. De
Wette, Bleek, Diisterdieck, ad loc. ; [al., retaining eVi,
render it over, concerning, cf. x. 1 1 ; W. 393 (368) c. ; see
iVi, B. 2 f. j3. fin.], of testimony borne not in word but
by d e e d, in the phrase used of Christ μαρτύρων την koXijk
όμολο-γίαν, to witness the good confession, to attest the
truth of the (Christian) profession by his sufferings and
death, 1 Tim. vi. 13, where cf. llofmann. Pass.: Ro.
iii. 21 (a righteousness such as the Scriptures testify
that God ascribes to believers, cf. iv. 3). μαρτ. foil, by
on that, Jn. i. 34 [cf. W. 273 (256)]; [iv. 44]; .\ii. 17
[here R" Tr txt. WH ore] ; 1 Jn. iv. 14 ; πιρΐ w. gen. of
a pers. foil, by ότι, Jn. v. 36 ; vii. 7 ; κατά τιι /of, against
[so \V. 382 (357), ^ley., al. ; yet see κατά, I. 2 b.] one,
foil, by ότι, 1 Co. XV. 15. w. a dat. of the thing i. e.
for the benefit of, in the interests of, a thing [cf. B.
§ 133, 11] : Γ3 ά\ηθ(ϊα, Jn. v. 33 ; xviii. 37 ; σού τ^ uXij-
ifia (see αλήθεια, II.), to bear witness unto thy truth,
how great it is, 3 Jn. 3, 6 ; used of the testimony which
is given in deeds to promote some object: τω λόγω,
Acts xiv. 3 [T prefixes eTrt] ; with a dat. (of a thing)
incommodi : μαρτνρ('ίτ( (TTrWII μάρτνρίί ίστ€) τοις
tpyoii τώι/ πατίρων, by what ye are doing ye add to the
deeds of your fathers a testimony which proves that
those things were done by them, Lk. xi. 48. w. a dat.
of the person: to declare to one by testimony (by sug-
gestion, instruction), lieb. -x. 15; foil, by direct dis-
course, Rev. xxii. 18 GLTTrAVHj to testify to one
vJint lie wishes one to testify concerning him: Acts xxii. 5;
foil, by ότι, Mt. xxiii. 31 ; Jn. iii. 28 ; Ro. x. 2; Gal. iv.
15: Col. iv. 13; foil, by an ace. w. inf. Acts x. 43; to
give testimony in one's favor, to commend [W. § 31, 4 b. ;
B. as above] : Jn. iii. 26 ; Acts .xiii. 22 ; xv. 8 ; pass.
μαρτνροϋμαι witness is borne to me, it is witnessed oj me
(\V. § 39, 1 ; B. § 134, 4) : foil, by δτι, Heb. vii. 8 ; foil,
by on recitative and direct disc, fleb. vii. 17 L Τ Tr
WH ; foil, by an inf. belonging to the subject, Heb. xi.
4 sq. b. emphatically ; to utter honorable testimony,
give a good report: w. a dat. of the pers., Lk. iv. 22; tVi
Ti«, on account of, for a thing, Heb. xi. 4 [liere L Tr read
μαρ. (ιύ κτ\. τω θ^ω (but see the Comm.)] ; μ(μαρτνρηταί
Tti/t ίτπό τίνος, 3 Jn. 1 2 ; pass, μαρτνροϋμαι Ιο be borne
(good) witness to, to be well reported of, to have (good)
testimony borne to one, accredited, attested, of good report,
approved: Acts vi. 3 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 17, 1 sq. ; 18,
1 ; 19, 1 ; 47,4) ; foil, by iv w. a dat of the thing in
which the commended excellence appears, 1 Tim. v. 10;
Heb. xi. 2, (eVi τινι, for a thing, Athen. 1 p. 25 f. ; [yet
cf. W. 387 (3«2) note]) ; Μ titos, to have (honorable)
testimony borne to one through (by) a thing, Heb. xi.
39 ; ίπτό w. gen. of the pers. giving honorable testimony.
Acts X. 22; xvi. 2; x.xii. 12, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 38, 2;
44, 3 ; Ignat. ad Philad. c. 5, 2 cf. 11, 1 and ad Eph. 12,
2; Antonin. 7, 62) ; w. dat. of the pers. testifying (i. q.
υπό τίνος), Acts xxvi. 22 RG. c. Mid., ace. to a
false reading, to conjure, implore : 1 Th. ii. 1 2 (1 1), where
Τ Tr λ\Ή have rightly restored μαρτνρόμίνοι. [Comp. :
i -πι-, σνν-€πι-, κατά-, σνμ-μαρτνρίω.'] *
μαρτυρία, -as, ή, (μαρτυρίω, q. v.), [fr. Horn, down] ; 1.
a testifying : the olfice committed to the prophets of tes-
tifying concerning future events. Rev. xi. 7. 2.
what one testifies, testimony : univ. Jn. v. 34 ; in a legal
sense, of testimony before a judge : Lk. xxii. 71 ; Mk.
xiv. 56 ; w. gen. of the subj., ilk. xiv. 59 ; Jn. viii. 1 7 ;
1 Jn. V. 9 ; κατά τίνος, against one, Mk. .xiv. 55 ; in an
historical sense, of the testimony of an historian : Jn.
xL\. 35 ; xxi. 24 ; in an ethical sense, of testimony con-
cerning one's character: 3 Jn. 12; 1 Tim. iii. 7; Tit. i
13; in a predominantly dogmatic sense respecting mat-
ters relating to the truth of Christianity : of the testi-
mony establishing the Messiahship and the divinity of
Jesus (see μαρτυρίω, a.), given by — John the Bap-
tist: Jn. i. 7; v. 32; η μαρτ. τοΟ Ιωάννου, i. 19; Jesus
himself, w. a gen. of the subj., Jn. v. 31 ; viii. 13 sq. ;
God, in the prophecies of Scripture concerning Jesus
the Messiah, in the endowments conferred upon him,
in the works done by him, Jn. v. 36 ; through the Holy
Spirit, in the Christian's blessed consciousness of eternal
life and of reconciliation with God, obtained by baptism
[(cf. reff. s. V. βάτΓτισμα, 3)] and the expiatory death
of Christ, w. a subject, gen. τοΟ θ(ού, 1 .Jn. v. 9-11, cf. 6-8;
the apostles, σοΰ την μαρτ. nepi ίμού. Acts x.xii. 18
[W. 137 (130)]; the other followers of Christ: Rev.
vi. 9; w. a gen. of the subj. αυτών. Rev. xii. 11; w. a
gen. of the obj. 'ΐ>;σοί, ib. 17 ; xix. 10; xx. 4 {(χ€ΐν this
μαρτ. is to hold the testimony, to persevere steadfastly in
bearing it, Rev. vi. 9; xii. 17; xix. 10, [see ΐχω,Ι. 1 d.];
others, however, explain it ίο liave the duty of testifying
laid upon one's self) ; elsewhere the " testimony " of
Christ is that which he gives concerning divine things,
of which he alone has thorough knowledge, Jn. iii. 11,
32 sq. ; ή μαρτ. Ιησού, that testimony which he gave
concerning future events relating to the consummation
of the kinsdom of God, Rev. i. 2 (cf. xxii. 16, 20) : Sia
την μ. Ιησού Χριστού, to receive this testimony, ib. 9.*
|ΐαρτϋριον, -ου, τό, (μάρτνρ [cf μάρτυς^), [fr. Find.,
Hdt. down], Sept. for li'_^ rri;^, oftener for :\Mp_ (an or-
dinance, precept); most freq. for Ίi^^^2 (an assembly),
as though that came fr. IVJ to testify, whereas it is fr.
li'^ to appoint ; testimony ; a. w. a gen. of the
subj.: της συν(ΐ8ήσ€ως, 2 Co. i. 12; w. gen. of obj. : άπο-
SiSovai TO μ rijs άναστάσιως Ιησού, Acts iv. 33. b.
ToO Χριστοί, concerning Christ the Saviour [cf. W. § 30,
μΜρτυρομαί
392
ματαιο<ί
1 α.] : the proclamation of salvation by the apostles
is so called (for reasons given under μαρτυρίω, init.),
1 Co. i. 6 ; also τοΰ κυρίου ημών, "2 lim. i. 8 ; τοϋ tifov,
concerning God [W. u. s.], i. e. concerning what (iod
has done tlirou^ih Christ for the salvation of men, 1 Co.
ii. 1 [here WIl Ixt. μυστήριοι^Ί; w. the subject, gen. ημών,
givt'ii by us, 2 Ί h. i. 10. (is μαμτ. τών ^άΚηθησημίνων,
to give testimony concerning tho.se things wliich were
to be spoken (in the Messiah's time) i. e. concerning the
Christian revelation, Ileb. iii. Γ); cf. Delitzsch ad loc.
[al. refer it to the .Mosaic law (Num. .\ii. 7, csp. 8);
cf. Jliclim, Lehrbegriff d. lleb. i. 3Γ2]. c. (Ις /iii(>-
TvfHov auTu'is for a testiiiwni/ unto l/ifm, tliat tlicv may
have testimony, i. e. evidence, in proof of this or th.at ;
e. g. that a lc|)er has been cured, .Mt. viii. 4; Mli. i. 44;
Lk. V. 14 ; that persons may get knowledge of something
tlie knowledge of wliich will be for their benefit, .Mt. .\.
IS ; xxiv. 14 ; Mk. .\iii. 9 ; that they may have evidence
of their impurity, Mk. vi. 11 ; in the same case we find
tls μαρτ- iii avToit, for a testimony agahixl them [cf. eVi,
C. 1. 2 g. y. β^•], I'k. i.\. ■> ; άποβήσιται ύμ'ιν els μαμτ. it
will turn out to you as an opportunity of bearing testi-
mony concerning me and my cause, Lk. .\xi. 13; els μ-
νμ'ιυ ΐσται, it will serve as a proof of your Avickedness,
Jas. V. 3 ; by apposition to the ivhole preceding clause
(W. § .59, 9 a.), TO μαρτ. xaipois Ih'ioLs, that wliich (to wit,
that Christ gave him.self as a ransom) ivould be (the sub-
stance of) the testimony i. q. was to be testified (by the
apostles and the preachers of the gospel) in the times
fitted for it, 1 'I'iin. ii. 6 [where Lchm. oni. το μαρτ.'] ; cf.
the full e.xposition of this pass, in Frilzsche, Ep. ad Rom.
iii. p. 12 sijq. ή σκψη τοΟ μαρτυρίου, Acts vii. 44 ; Rev.
XV. 5; in .Sept. very often for Ί;•1Ώ-^ΠΝ (see above),
and occasionally for ηη>•Γΐ ^ΠΧ, as Ex. xxxviii. 2G ;
Lev. xxiv. 3, etc.*
μιαρτνρομ.αι (fr. μάρτυρ [cf. μάρτυ?]) ; 1. to cite a
vjitiie.'is, bring forward a witness, call to witness, (Tragg.,
Thuc., Plato, sqq.) ; to affirm bi/ appeal to God, to declare
solemnhj, protest : ταϋτα, Plat. Phil. p. 47 c. ; ort, Actsx.x.
26 ; Gal. v. 3. 2. to conjure, beseech as in God's
name, exhort .^olemnl// : tiki. Acts ,\xvi. 22 L Τ Tr WII ;
foil, by the ace. w. inf., Eph. iv. 17; els τό foil, by ace.
w. inf. [cf. B. § 140, 10, 3], 1 Th. ii. 12 (11) TTrVVII.
[Com I*.: dia-, προ-μαρτΰρομαί.]*
μ,άρτυς ( Aeolic μάρτυρ, a form not found in the N. T.;
[etymologically one who is mindful, heeds ; prob. allied
with Lat. memor, cf. Vanicek p. 1201 ; Curtius § 46G]),
-vpor, acc. -υρα, 0; plur. piprupfi, dat. plur. /χαρτυσι; Sept.
for Λ^; [lies., Simon., Theogn., al.] ; α witness (one who
avers, or can aver, what he himself has seen or heard or
knows by an_\• other means) ; a. in a legal sense :
Wt. xviii. 1(1 ; xxvi. 6.5; Mk. xiv. 63; Acts vi. 13; vii.
■^8; 2 Co. xiii. 1 ; 1 Tim. v. 19 ; Heb. x. 28. b. in
an historical sense: Acts x. 41 ; 1 Tim. vi. 12 ; [2 Tim.
ii. 2] ; one who is a spectator of anything, e. g. of a con-
test, Ileb. xii. 1 ; w. a gen. of the obj., Lk. xxiv. 48;
Acts i. 22; ii.32; iii. 15; v.32GLTTrWH; x. 39 ;
xxvi. 16 ; 1 Pet. v. 1 ; w. a gen. of the possessor 'one
who testifies for one *, Acts i. 8 L Τ Tr WH ; xiii. 31;»
a gen. of tlie possessor and of the obj.. Acts v. 32 Rec. ;
μάρτυρα eivai τινι, to lie a witness for one, serve him by
testiniuny. Acts i. 8 RG; xxii. 15; [Lk. xi. 4.S Ί' Tr
WII]. He is said to be a witness, to whose attestation
ap|ieal is made; hence the formulas ^upTus μον ίστιν ά
Seas, Ro. i. 9 ; Phil. i. 8 ; β(ί>ί μαρτύς, 1 Th. ii. 5 ; μάρτυρα
τον det>v eiriKaXovpxii, 2 Co. i. 23 ; iipeis μάρτυρ€5 κ. ό Oeos,
1 Th. ii. 10; tlie faithful interpreters of (iod's counsels
are called God's witnesses : Rev. xi. 3 ; Christ is reck-
oned among them. Rev. i. 5 ; iii. 14. c. in an ethi-
cal sense those are called papTupes Ίησοΰ, wlio after his
example have proved the strength and genuineness of
their faith in Christ by undergoing a violent death [cf
B. D. Am. ed. and Diet, of Cliris. Antiq. s. v. Alarty] :
Acts xxii. 20; Rev. ii. 13; .xvii. 6.*
μοσθόί, Doric for patrras (q- v.) : Rev. i. 1 3 Tdf. [" this
form seems to be Western" {Hort, App. p. 149)].
μ.α<Γσ-άομ.αι (R G) more correctly μασάομαι (LTTr
WII): impf. 3 pers. plur. ΐμασάντο; (Μ.\Ω, μάσσω, to
knead) ; to chew, consume, eat, derour, {Kpeas, Arstph.
Pint. 321 ; τα Seppara των Bupemv, .losepJi. b. j. 6, 3, 3 ;
ρίζas ξϋ\ωι>, Sept. ,ΤοΙ) xxx. 4, and other exx. in other
auth.) : epaawvTu Tat γλώσσαϊ αίτών, they gnawed their
tongues {for pain), Rev. xvi. 10."
μαστιγόω, -ώ, 3 pers. sing. μαστιγοΊ ; fut. μαστιγώσω ;
I ao\: e'μaστίγωσu^, (μάστιξ); fr. Ildt.down; Sept.cliielly
for T\2T^ ; to scourije ; prop. : τινά, ^It. x. 1 7 ; xx. 1 9 ; xxiii.
34 ; Mk. X. 34 ; Lk. xviii. 33 ; .In. xix. 1 ; [cf. B. D. s. v.
Scourging; Farrar, St. Paul, vol. i. excurs. xi.]. metaph.
of God as a father chastising and training men as chil-
dren by afflictions: Heb. xii. 6; cf. Jer. v. .'t ; Prov. iii.
12 ; .Indith viii. 27.*
μαστίζω; i. q. μαστιγόω, q. v.; τινά, Acts xxii. 25.
(Num. xxii. 25; Sap. v. II, and often in Horn.)*
μάστιξ, -tyos, ή, a ivhip, scourge, (for UW, 1 K. xii. 1 1,
14; Prov. xxvi. 3) : Acts xxii. 24; Heb. xi. 36; metaph.
α scourge, plague, i. e. a calamity, misfortune, esp. as sent
by God to discipline or punish (Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.)
33; with Δ(05 added, Horn. II. 12,37; 13,812; Beoii,
Aesclnl. sept. (i07): of distressing bodily diseases, Mk.
iii. 10; v. 29, 34; Lk. vii. 21 ; 2 Mace. ix. 11."
μαστόϊ, -oO, 0, (μάσσω to knead [more prob. akin to
μαδάω, Lat. mudidus, etc. ; cf. Vanicek p. 693 ; Curtius
§ 456]), fr. Soph., Hdt. down ; the breast (for -\Ό, Job iii.
12; Cant. i. 13, etc.); phir., the breasts (nipples) of a man,
Rev. i. 13 R G Tr WH [here Tdf. paaBo'is (cf. WH. App.
p. 149"), Lchm. μαζο'κ'] ; breasts of a woman, Lk. xi. 27 ;
xxiii. 29.•
[Ματαθ(θ5, see ΜατταΛ'αΕ.]
ματαιολο-γία, -as, ή, (ματαιολόγοί), vain lalh'ng, empty
talk; ( Vulg. r(inilo(juiiim) : 1 Tim. i. 6. (Plut. mor. p. 6 f. ;
Porphyr. de abstin. 4, 16.) *
ματαιολέγοΐ, -ου, ό, (ράταιοΓ and λίγω), an idle talker,
one who utters empty, sen.seless things : Tit. i. 10.*
μάταιος, -αία (1 Co. xv. 17; [1 Pet. i. 18]), -aiof, also
-ot,-oi/, (.Tas.i. 26; Tit. iii. 9), [cf. JF/i. App. p. 157; W.
§ 1 1, 1 ], (fr. μάτην), Sept. for San, HW, 313 (a lie), etc.;
ααταιοτη^
393
μα•χαιρα
as in prof. auth. (Lat. rnnus) r/eroiil of force, truth, suc-
cesa, result, [A.V. uniforml)• mini : iiniv. : ή θρησκύα, .las.
i. 26; useless, tii tin piir/msr, ή ττιστίί. 1 Co Χλ'. 1 '• : fool-
ish, διάΚογισμοί, 1 Co. iii. "-Ό ; ζητήσεις. Tit. iii. 9; given
to vain things ami luading away from salvation, ανα-
στροφή, 1 Pet. i. 18. τά μάταια, vain thhxjs, fwiitics, of
htatlien deities ami their worship ('73Π, ,Ier- ii. 5; x. 3 ;
S^nn ""inX 1\!\ ΐΓομ(ύ(σθαί ύπίσω τωι> ματ- 2 Κ. χνϋ.
1!> \ Π''73Γ3, ματαία, .Jer. viii. 19 ; τίδωλα, Dent. .\.\xii. 21 ;
Jer. xiv. 22) : Aets xiv. 15. [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xlix.] *
μοταιότη;, -ητος, ή, (μάταως, ([. v.), a purely bibl. and
eccles. «onl [(Polhix 1. υ c. 32 § 134)]; Sept. for Sdd
(often in Eccles.), also for Χ'ϋ, etc.; Γί/ίί////; a. irh/it
is deriii'l nf (rulli and a/ij>ropri(ileness: ίπίμογκα ματαιή-
τψ -os (gen. of quality), 2 Pet. ii. 18. b. jicrrerse-
7iess, dcjiraralitin : τοΰ vans, Eph. iv. 17. c. fraUtij,
want of VKpr: Ro. viii. 20.*
ματαιόω : (μάταιοί) ; 1 aor. pass, ΐματαιώβην ; to ntakc
empty, vain, foolish : (ματαιώθησαν (V Tots διάΚο'^ισμοϊς
αντων, were brought to folly in their thoughts, i. e. fell
into error, Ro i. 21. (2 K. xvii. 1,5; ,ler. ii. 5; 1 Chr.
xxi. 8; [etc.]; nowhere in (!rk. auth.)*
μάτην (accus. [cf. W. 230 (21 «) ; B. § 131 , 12] of μάτη,
i. q. ματία, a futile attempt, folly, fault), adv., fr. Pind.,
Aeschyl- down, in rain, fruitlessli/ : RIt. χ v. 9 and Jlk.
vii. 7, after Isa xxix. 13 Sept.*
Μοτβαΐοϊ (LTTrAVn ΜαθΟαΙος, cf. B. 8 (7); [ΤΓ//.
App. 159''; Scrivener, Introd. ch. viii. § 5 p. 562]), -ου
[Β. 18 (16)], ό, (commonly regarded as Ilebr. H'TO gift
of (iod, fr. |η•? and Π; ; but Π'ΓΙΟ is in Creek ΜατβιαΓ,
and the analogy of the names 'jn (fr. jn a festival) in
Greek 'Ayyaios, '31 ΖακχαΙο!, and others, as well as the
Syriac form of the name before us ■^L•^. [and its form
in the Talmud, viz. "iTD or "Xrio ; Sanhedrin 43* ; Meu-
schen, Ν Τ. ex Talm. illustr. p. 8] certainly lead us to
adopt the Aramaic form 'Γη, and to derive that from
the unused sing. nrD, a man, plur. Ό'ΓΟ ; hence i. q.
manly, cf. Grimm in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1870, p. 723
sqq.), Matthew, at first a collector of imposts, afterwards
an apostle of Jesus : ]Mt. ix. 9 sqq. (cf. Mk. ii. 14 ; Lk. v.
27sq<i.; seeA€ut.4); Mt.x.3; Mk.iii. 18; Lk.vi. 15; Acts
i. 13. Ace. to Papias(in Eu.seb. h.e. 3, 39) he wrote down
ίβραιδι 8ια\(κτω τα (κνριακα) λό -ym, i. e. the sai/inf/s of our
Lord ; this collection of discour.ses, perhaps already re-
touched by some one else and translated into Creek, the
author of our first canonical Cospel combined with ac-
counts of the acts and sufferings of Christ, and so it came
to pass that this Cospel was ascribed by the church to
Matthew as its author. [But this theory seems to be ren-
dered unnecessary by the fact that Xoyia had already-
come to denote "sacred oracles" i. ([. Itpa -γράμματα,
Joseph, b. j. 6, .5, 4, or Upal γραφαΐ, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
53, 1 ; see the added reff. s. v. λόγιοκ. Cf. Fisher, Super-
nal. Origin of Christianity, pp. 160-167; and reff. in
SclinJ, Hist, of the Christ. Church, i. 622 sq.; B!eel;
Einl. ins N. T. (ed. Mangold) p. 115 scp] •
Ματΐάν (Γ,Τ Tr \VH ΤΛαθάάν [see reff. s. v. Ματ^αΓοί]),
6, ('Γ\Ό a gift), Malthan, one of Christ's ancestors : Mt
i. 15.'•
Μοτβάτ (Tdf. Μαθθάθ, [see reff. s. v. Ματθαίο^), 6,
(ΓΓΙΟ, fr. l!}i), Matlhal; 1. one of Christ's ances-
tors, the son of Levi ; Lk. iii. 24. 2. one of the
ancestors of the man just spoken of: Lk. iii. 29 [here
TrAVlI ηαθβάτ (see as above)].*
Ματθία? (Τ Tr WII νΐαθθίαι [see reff. s. v. Mariaios]),
-a [yet cf. B. 18 (16)], ό, (see ΜατΑαίοί), Malthias, the
apostle who took the place of Judas Iscariot: Acts L
23, 26.*
Ματτοβά, ό, (see the j)receding names), MaltatJta, the
son of Nathan and grandson of David : Lk. iii. 31.*
Ματταθία5,-ου[Β. 18(16)], o,.l/((i/o////Vi.>i; 1. oneof
Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 25 [here Treg. Μαθβαθίου (cf.
reff. s. V. Ματθα'ια- init.)]. 2. one of the ancestors
of the man just mentioned : Lk. iii. 26 [Trmrg. Ματαθίου]'
μάχαιρα, gen. -as [so (with R (i) Lchm. in Lk. xxi. 24]
and-iyf, dat. -a [so (with R G) Lchm. in Lk. xxii. 49; Acts
xii. 2] and -i; (betw. which forms the codd. vary, cf. [Scriv-
ener, Collation, etc. p. Ivi.; Tilf. Proleg. p. 117; WH.
App. p. 156"]; AV. 62 (61); B. 11; Delitzsch on Heb. xL
34 p. .584 note), ή, (akin to μάχη and Lat. mactare); 1.
a Uir(je knife, used for killing animals and cutting up flesh:
Ilom., Pind., Hdt., al. ; hence (ien. xxii. 6, 10 ; Judg. xix-
29 Alex., for nS:3N0. 2. a small siroriJ, distinguished
fr. the large sword, the ρομφαία (Joseph, antt. 6, 9, 5 άπο-
τί'μκίΐ την κίφάλην τη ρομφαία τη tKtivov (Goliath's), μά-
χαιραν οίκ ΐχων alros), and curved, for a cutting stroke;
distinct also f r. ξίφος, a strair/hl sword, for thrusting, Xen.
r. eq. 12, 11, cf. Hell. 3, 3, 7; but the words are freq.
used interchangeably. In the N. T. univ. a sword (Sept.
often for 3ΐΠ) : as a weapon for making or repelling aa
attack, Mt. x.xvi. 47, 51, 52, [.05] ; Mk. xiv. 43, 47 sq. ;
Lk. x.xii. 36, 38, 49, 52 ; Jn. xviii. 10 sq. ; Acts xvi. 27;
Heb. xi. 37 ; Rev. vi. 4 ; xiii. 10, [14] ; by a Hebraism,
στόμα μαχαίρας, the edijc of the sword (3"ΐΠ "3, Gen. xxxiv.
26 ; Josh. viii. 24 ; 1 S. xiii. 22; Judg. iii. 16, etc. [but in
the Sept. the rendering <rr. ξίφους or στ. ρομφαίας is more
com.]) : Lk. xxi. 24 ; Heb. xi. 34 ; μάχαιρα δίστομος (see
δίστομος), Heb. iv. 12. of the 5Λνοπ1 as the instrument
of a magistrate or judge : death by the sword, Ro. viii.
35 ; avaipe'iv τίνα μηχαίρα. Acts xii. 2 ; την μ. φοριΐν, to
hear the sword, is used of him to whom the sword has been
committed, viz. to use when a malefactor is to be pun-
ished; hence i. q. to hare the power of life and death, Ro.
xiii. 4 (so ξίφος, ξίφη ΐχην, Philostr. vit. Apoll. 7, 16;
vit. sophist. 1, 25, 2 (3), cf. Dion Cass. 42, 27; and in
the Talmud the king u'ho bears the sword, of the Hebrew
kins). Meta])h. μάχ-, a weapon of war, is used for war,
or for quarrels and dissensions that destroy peace ; so in
the phrase /3aXfif μάχαφαν em την γην, to send war on
earth, Mt. x. 34 (for which Lk. xii. 51 says διαμ(ρισμόν) ;
ή μάχ. τοΰ ττνίΰματος, the sword with which the Spirit
subdues the impulses to sin and proves its own powei and
efficacy (which sword is said to be ρήμα θ(οϋ [cf. Β. 128
(112)]), Eph. vi. 17 [on the gen. in this pass. cf. Ellicott
or Meyer].*
μ'^χν
b94
μ€yai
μάχη, ijr, ij, [^μάχομαι ; fr. ITom. down], Sept. several
times for D"*, ΙΠΌ, etc. ; α Ji'jiil, comliat ; 1. of
those in arms, a battle. 2. of persons at variance,
disputants, etc., strife, contention ; a quarrel : 2 Co. vii.
5 ; 2 Tim. ii. 23 ; Jas. iv. 1 ; μάχαι νομίκαί, contentions
about the law. Tit. iii. 0.*
μάχομαι ; impf. 3 pers. i)hir. {'μάχοιτο ; [allied with μά-
χαιρα ; Curtius § 459 ; Vanitek p. G87 ; fr. I lorn, down] ;
Ιυ fiijltt : prop, of armed combatanls, or those who engage
in a hand-to-hand struggle, Acts vii. 2(i ; trop. of those
ΛνΙιο engage in a war of words, to quarrel, wrangle, dU•
jmte: 2 Tim. ii. 24; itpos άλλήλουί, Jn. vi. 52 [cf. W.
§ 31, 5; B. § 133, 8]; of those \vho contend at law
for property and privileges, Jas. iv. 2. [Comp. : δια-
μάχομαι. Syn. see πόλfμos, b.] *
μ«γ<ιλ-αυχ€'ω, -ώ ; (μίγιίλαυχοΓ, and this fr. μ(•^αΚα and
αίχΐω); to be granililo(/uenl; to boast i/reat tliini/s, to bear
one's selj loftilij in speech or action : η γλώσσα μ(γα}ίανχΰ
(LTTrAVll μεγάλα ανχ(1), Jas. iii. 5, ivliere it seems
to denote any kind of haughty language which wounds
and provokes others, and stirs up strife. (Aeschyl. Ag.
1528; Polyb. 12, 13, 10; 8, 23, 11; Diod. 15, 16, al. ;
mid. γνναϊκα προς θίοϋς ΐρίζονσαν και μ€γα\ανχονμ€νην,
Plat. rep. 3 p. 39ο d. ; for n^J, to e.xah one's self, carry
one's self haughtily, Ezek. xvi. 50 ; Zeph. iii. 1 1 ; add, 2
Jlace. XV. 32; Sir. xlviii. 18.)*
μ(γαλ€Ϊο$, -ei'a, -f ioi/. ίμί-γαί), magnifcent, excellent, splen-
tliil. tronderful, (Xen., Joseph., Artem., al.) ; absol. ^e-
yakua (ποκϊν τινι) to do great things for one (show him
conspicuous favors), Lk. i. 49 R G ; τα μ(γαΚΐΙα τοϋ β(ηϋ
(Vulg. magnalia del [A. V. the mighty works of God^),
i. e. the glorious perfections of God and his marvellous
doings (mS^J, Ps. Ixx. (lx-\i.) 19 ; Sir. xx.xiii. (xx.wi.)
10; xHi. 21), Acts ii. 11.*
(κ-γαλειότη;, -ητοί, ή, (fr. the preceding word), great-
ness, miiijiiifrence, (Athen. 4, 6 p. 130 fin.; for rCKSH,
Jer. xl. (xxxiii.) 9) ; the majesty of God, Lk. ix. 43 ; r^j
Άρτίμι&οί, Acts xix. 27 ; of the visible splendor of the
divine majesty as it appeared in the transfiguration of
Christ, 2 Pet. i. 16.*
μίγαλοΊτρίπήί, -«, gen. -ovs, (μϊγαί, and nptnfi it is be-
coming [see ττρ/πω]), befitting a great man, magnificent,
splen'iid ; full of majesty, majestic : 2 Pet. i. 1 7. (2 Mace.
viii. i.i ; XV. 13 ; 3 Mace. ii. 9 ; Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.) *
μΕγαλύν»; im\)i.cp(yaKvvop; Pass., [impf. 3 pers. sing.
i^ifyaXuffTo] ; 1 aor. inf. μίγαΧυνθηναι ; 1 fut. μ(γα\ννθή-
σομαι; (μίγαί); fr. [Ae.scliyl. and] Thuc. down ; .Sept.
mostly for '7"1jn ; 1. to male great, magnify, (Vulg.
magnifico) : riwi or τι, prop, of dimension, Mt. xxiii. 5
[here A.V. enlarge'] ; pass, to increase : of bodily stature,
ΐμ(γα\ίνθη το naiSapwv, 1 S. ii. 21 ; so in a figure, 2 Co.
X. 15, of Paul, that his apostolic efficiency among the
Corinthians may increase more and more and have more
abundant results [al. refer this to 2 ; see Mever (ed.
Heinrici) in loc.]. metaph. to make conspicuous : Lk. i.
58 (on which see «Xfor, 2 a.). 2. to deem or declare
great, i. e. to esteem highly, to extol, laud, celebrate: Lk. i.
46; Acts V. 13 ; x. 46 ; xix. 17, (often so in class. Grk.
also) ; pass. i. q. to get glory and praise : iv nm, in a
thing, I'liil. i. 20.*
fuyaXui,Ad\•., greatly: Phil. iv. 10. [Fr. Hom. down.]*
μ«γαλωα-ννη, -ijr, η, only in bibl. and eccl. writ. [c£
W. 26, 95 (90); B. 73, and see άγαθωίτϋνη], (μίγας), Sept.
for b"lj and ΤΤ?!!: ; majesty: of the majesty of (iod, Helx
i. 3 ; viii. 1 ; Jude 25, (so 2 S. vii. 23 ; Ps. cxliv. (c.xlv.)
3, 6 ; Sap. xviii. 24 ; Sir. ii. IS, and often).*
μΐγα;. μ(γύ\η. μίγα, [(related to Lat. magnus, magister,
Goth, maisf (ci. TO nkflarov). etc: Vanicek p. GK-i ; Cur-
tius § 4iJ2)], aic. μίγην. μ(γά)^ην. μί-γα \ plur. ^fyuXoi, -ai,
-a; comp μύζων. -ov. (ace. masc. and feni. μίιζονα, once
contr. μ(ίζω, Jn. v. 36 [R G Τ WH, but L Tr μείζων (cf.
Tdf. Proleg. p. 119)]; neut. plur. μύζονα, once contr.
μ(ίζω, .In. i. 50 (51)) and μ(ίζότ(ρος, 3 Jn. 4 (fr. the com-
par. μ(ίζων), a poet, conijiar., on which see the remark
([uoted under ίλα;(ΐστότίμοΓ, cf. Matthiae § 130; superL
μί-γιστος (found only in 2 Pet. i. 4) ; [fr. Hom. down] ;
Sept. for hyty, also for ^^-, great; 1. predi-
cated a. of the external form or sensible appearance
of things (or of persons) ; in particular, of space and its
dimensions, — as respects o. mass and weight:
>,Wof, Mt. xxvii. 60; Mk. xvi. 4; Rev. xviii. 21; apos,
Rev. viii. 8; αστήρ, ibid. 10; δράκω!/ Rev. xii. 3, 9; aeros,
ibid. 14 ; hhhpov, Lk. xiii. 1 9 [T WII om. L Tr br. /it'y.] ;
(tXaSot, Mk. iv. 32; Ιχθϋα, Jn. xxi. 11; β. compass
and extent; large, spacious: σκηνή ^μfίζωv), Heb. i.\.
11 ; avaymov [R άνώγίον, q. v.], Mk. xiv. 15 ; αποθήκη, Lk.
xii. 18; κάμινο!, Rev. ix. 2; πόλΐΓ, Rev. xi. 8; xvi. 19;
xvii. 18; xviii. 2, 16,18, 19; ποταμοί. Rev. ix. 14; xvi. 12;
θύρα, 1 Co. xvi. 9 ; 'ληνοί. Rev. xiv. 19 ; οθόνη. Acts x. 11 ;
xi. 5 ; χάσμα, Lk. xvi. 26 (2 S. xviii. 17). γ. meas-
ure and height : οΐκοδο/ιαι, Mk. xiii. 2 ; ^poi/or. Rev. xx.
11; /οηί7,μά;(αιρα, Rev. vi.4; as respects stature and age,
μικρη'ι xat μ(•/άλοι, small and great, young and old. Acts
viii. 10; xxvi. 22; Ileb. viii. 11; Rev. xi. 18; xiii. 16; xix.
5,18; XX. 12, (Gen. xLx. 11; 2K. xxiii. 2; 2 Chr. xxxiv.
30). [neut. sing, used adverbially : iv μ(γάλω, Acts xxvi.
29 LTTr WH (for R GtV πολλω, q. v. in πολνί, d.) in
great sc. degree. The apostle plays upon Agrippa's words
ev όλίγω (q. v.) in a little (time) thou wouldst fain etc. ... I
would to God that both in little and in great i. e. in all re-
spects etc. ; cf. the use of oXlyov κ. pcya or σμικρόν κ. ptya
(vet in negative sentences) to express totality; e. g.
Plat. Phileb. 21 e. ; Apol. 19c.; 21b.; 26 b.; but see d.
below.] b. of number and quantity, i. q. "u-
merous, large: dyi'Xi;, Mk. v. 11; abundant, πορισμός, 1
Tim.vi. 6; μισθαπο^οσ'ια, Heb. χ. 35. c. of age: β
μιίζων, the elder, Ro. ix. 12 after Gen.xxv. 23, (Σκιπίων 6
^c'yas.PoIyb. 18, 18(35), 9; 32, 12, 1). d. used of in-
tensity and its degrees : 8νναμις, Acts iv. 33 ; viii. 1 ;
neut. ev μιγάλω, with great effort. Acts xxvi. 29 LT Tr
WH [but see y- above] ; of the affections and emotions of
the mind: χαρά. Jit. ii. 10; xxviii. 8; Lk. ii. 10; xxi v. 52;
Acts XV. 3 ; φόβος, Jlk. iv. 41 ; Lk. ii. 9 ; viii. 37 ; Acts v.
5, 11 ; Rev. xi. 11 ; θνμής. Rev. xii. 12; Χΰττη, Ro. ix. 2;
ίκστασις, Mk. v. 42 (Gen. xxvii. 33); πίστις, Mt. xv. 28;
χάρις. Acts iv. 33; άyάπη, Jn. xv. 13. of natural events
μίΎα<;
390
μ€ΐ
θοΕεία
powerfully affecting the senses, i. q. violent, miglity, strong :
άκμος, Jn. vi. 18 ; Rev. vi 1 3 ; βροντή, Rev. xiv. 2 ; χάΧαζα,
Rev. xi. 19; xvi. 21 ; σfισμόs, Mt. viii. 24; xxviii. 2; Lk.
xxi. 11 ; Acts xvi. 26; Rev.vi. 12; xi. 13; xvi. 18; XalXa^jr,
Jlk.iv.ST; πτώσίί, Mt. vii. 2Γ. of other external things,
such as are perceived by h e a r i η g: κρα>τ/ή, Acts xxiii. 9 ;
Rev. xiv. 18 [R G] ; μίίζυν κράζ(ΐν, to cry out the louder,
Mt. XX. 31 ; φωνή. Mt. xxiv. ai [Torn, φ., WH only in
mrg.l ; xxvii. iti, 50 ; Lk. xxiii. 23 ; Jn. xi. 43 ; Acts viii.
7; Rev. i. 10; v. 2, 12; vi. 10; vii. 2, 10; viii. 13; x. 3 ;
xi. 12, 15; [xiv. 18 LTTr WH; xviii. 2 Rec], and else-
where ; γαλήνη, Mt. viii. 26 ; Mk. iv. 39. of objects of
sight which excite admiration and wonder : φώί, Mt.
iv. 16 ; σημίΐον, Mt. xxiv. 24 ; Lk. xxi. 11 ; Acts vi. 8 ;
viii. 13; Rev. xiii. 13; cpya. Rev. xv. 3; μύζω, μιίζονα
τοντων, greater things than these, i.e. more extraordinary,
more wonderful, Jn. i. 50 (51); v. 20; xiv. 12. of things
that are felt: κανμα. Rev. xvi. 9; nvperas, Lk. iv. 38;
of other things that distress : ανάγκη, Lk. xxi. 23 ; θλίψΐ!,
!Mt. x.xiv. 21 ; Acts vii. 11; Rev. ii. 22; vii. 14 ; διωγμοί•.
Acts viii. 1 ; λ:μόί, Lk. iv. 25 ; Acts xi. 28 ; πληγή, Rev.
xvi. 21. 2. predicated of r a η k, as belonging to a.
persons, eminent for ability, virtue, authority, power;
as God, and sacred personages: Of 6s, Tit. ii. 13 [(on which
see Prof. Abbot, Xote C. in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. etc.
i. p. 19, and cf. ϊπιφάν(ΐα)] ; Άρτιμις, Acts xix. 27 sq.
34 sq. ; άρχι^ρ^ύί, lleb. iv. 14; ποιμήν, Heb. xiii. 20:
προφήτη!, Lk. vii. 16 ; absol. o{ μίγάλοι, great men, lead-
ers, rulers, Mt. xx. 25 ; Mk. x. 42 ; univ. eminent, din-
tinguished : Mt. v. 19; xx. 26 ; Lk. i. 15, 32; Acts viii.
9. μύζων is used of those who surpass others — either
in nature and power, as God : Jn. x. 29 [here Τ Tr
WH txt. give the neut. (see below)] ; xiv. 28 ; Heb. vi.
13; 1 Jn. iv. 4 ; add, Jn. iv. 12 ; viii. 53 ; or in excel-
lence, w ο r t h, a u t h ο r i t y, etc. : Sit. xi. 1 1 ; xviii. 1 ;
xxiii. 11 ; Mk. ix. 34 ; Lk. vii. 28 ; ix. 46 ; xxii. 26 sq. ;
Jn. xiii. 16 ; xv. 20 ; 1 Co. xiv. 5 ; iura/ifi /lii'fovff, 2 Pet.
ii. 1 1 ; neut. μ(ϊζον, something higher, more exalted, more
majestic than the temple, to wit the august person of
Jesus the ^Messiah and his preeminent influence, Mt. xii.
C L Τ Tr WH ; [cf. Jn. x. 29 above] ; contextually i. q.
strict in condemning, of God, 1 Jn. iii. 20. b. t h i η gs
to be esteemed highly for their importance, i. q. Lat.
gravis ; <if great moment, of great tveight, important : (παγ-
γίΧματα, 2 Pet. i. 4 ; ΐντολή, Mt. xxii. 36, 38 ; μνστήριον,
Eph. V. 32; 1 Tim. iii. 16 ; αμαρτία, Jn. xix. 11 ; μ(ίζων
μαρτυρία, of greater proving power, Jn. v. 36 [see above
ad init.] ; 1 Jn. v. 9, {μαρτνρίαν μιΐζω κ. σαφίστίραν, Isocr.
Archid. § 32). μέγαί i. q. solemn, sacred, of festival days
[cf. Is. i. 13 Sept.] : ήμίρα, Jn. vii. 37 ; xix. 31 ; notable,
august, ήμίρα, of the day of the final judgment, Acts ii.
20; Jude 6; Rev. vi. 17; xvi. 14. neut. μίγα, a great
matter, thing of great moment• 1 Co. ix. 11 (Gen. xiv.
28; Is. xlix. 6) ; οϋ μίγα, 2 Co. xi. 15. c. a thing
to be highly esteemed for its excel lence, i. q. excel-
lent. 1 Co. xiii. 13 [cf. W. § 3.5, 1 ; B. § 123, 13]; τα
χαρίσματα τα μ€ίζονα (R G κρύττονα), 1 Co. xii. 31 L Τ
Tr λνΐΐ. 3 splendid, prepared on a grand scale.
stately : δοχή, Lk. v. 29 (Gen. xxi. 8) ; διϊπνον, Lk. xiv. 16 ;
Rev. xix. 17 [G L Τ Tr WH], (Uan. v. 1 [Theodot.]) ;
οικία, 2 Tim. ii. 20 (Jer. Iii. 13 ; [o«os], 2 Chr. ii. 5,
9). 4. neut. plur. μιγάΧα, great things: of God's
preeminent blessings, Lk. i. 49 L Τ Tr WH (see μιγα-
Xftor) ; of things which overstep the province of a
created being, proud (presumptuous) things, full of
arrogance, derogatory to the majesty of God : XoXelf μΐγ.
joined with βλασφημίας, Rev. xiii. 5 ; Dan. vii. 8, 11, 20 ;
hke μίγα (Ιπ(Ίν, Hom. Od. 3, 227 ; 16, 243; 22, 288.
μί€\εθο;, -out, to, (/li'yas), [fr. Hom. down], greatness :
Eph. i. 19.*
μεγιστάν, -avos, 6, (fr. μέγιστος, as vtav fr. νίος, ζννάν
fr. ξυνός), a later Grk. word (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 196),
once in sing. Sir. iv. 7 ; commonly in plur. oi μιγιστανα,
the grandees, magnates, nobles, chief men of a city or a
people, the associates or courtiers of a king, (Vulg.
principes) : Rev. vi. 15 ; της γης, xviii. 23; τοΰ Ήρώ8ου,
Mk. vi. 21. (Sept. for Ο'Τηχ, Jer. xiv. 3 ; Nah. ii. 6 ;
Zech. xi. 2; D'SilJ, Jon.iii. 7; Nah. iii. 10; j'^li-i, Dan.
Theodot. iv. 33, etc. ; D'Tty, Is. xx.xiv. 12; Jer. xxiv. 8,
etc.; 1 Mace. ix. 37; often in Sir. Manetho 4, 41 ; Jo-
seph., Artem. In Lat. megistaties, Tac. ann. 15, 27 ; Suet.
Calig. 5.)•
μί'-γκΓτοϊ, see μίγας. init.
μι£θ-<ρμην£ύω : Pass., 3 pers. sing, μίθίρμηνήΐται, ptep.
μιθ(ρμην(υόμ€νον ; to translate into the language of one with
whom I laish to communicate, to interpret : Mt. i. 23 ; Mk.
v. 41 ; xv. 22, 34; Jn. i. 38 (39) LTrWH, 41 (42);
Acts iv. 36 ; xiii. 8. (Polyb., Diod., Plut., [Sh•. prol. I.
19;al.].)'_
μί'βη, -η!, ή, (akin to μΐθυ, wine ; perh. any intoxicating
drink, Lat. temelum ; cf. Germ. Meth [piead^), intoxication ;
drunkenness : Lk. x.xi. 34 ; plur., Ro. xiii. 13 ; Gal. v. 21.
(Ilebr. iDy, intoxicating drink, Prov. xx. 1 ; Is. xxviii.
7; and [T'Jiy, intoxication, Ezek. xxiii. 32; xxxix. 19;
[Antipho], Xen., Plat., al.) [Cf. Trench § Ixi.] *
μ£θ-ίσ-Γημι and (in 1 Co. xiii. 2 R G WH [cf. Ιστημι])
μίθιστάνω ; 1 aor. μ€Τ(στησα ; 1 aor. pass. subj. μιτα-
σταβώ ; fr. Hom. down ; prop, to transpose, transfer,
remiice from one place to another : prop, of change of
situation or place, όρη, 1 Co. xiii. 2 (Isa. liv. 10) ; τίνα
etc Ti, Col. i. 13 ; τίνα [Τ Tr WIT add eV, so L in br.] της
οικονομίας, to remove from the office of steward, pass. Lk.
xvi. 4 (της χρ(ίης, 1 ^lacc. xi. 63) ; τινά ex τοΰ ζην, to re-
move from life, Diod. 2, 57, 5; 4, 55, 1 ; ivith ck toC ζήν
omitted, -Vets .xiii. 22 (in Grk. writ, also in the mid. and
in the intrans. tenses of the act. to depart from life, to
die, Eur. Ale. 21 ; Polyb. 32, 21,3; Heliod. 4, 14). met-
aph. τινά, without adjunct (cf. Germ, verriicken, [Eng.
perverty), i. e. to lead asiilc [A. X.lurn away] to other ten-
ets : Acts xix. 26 {την καρ8ίαν τοί λαοϋ. Josh. xiv. 8).'
μ(θ-οε(1α (Τ WH μ^θοδία, see I, ι,), -ας, ή, (fr. μ(θο&({ιω,
i. e. 1. to follow up or investigate by method and set-
tled plan ; 2. to follow craftily, frame devices, deceive :
Diod. 7,16; 2S.xix.27; [Ex. xxi. 13 Aq.; (mid.) Charit.
7, 6 p. 166. 21 ed. Reiske (1783) ; Polyb. 38, 4, 10]), a
noun occurring neither in the O, T. nor in prof, auth.
μ,εθοριον
396
μΐΚλΜ
cunning arts, ileceil, crajt, trickery, ή μ(9. rrji 7τ\άνης,
which ή πλάνη ii-es. Eph. iv. 14 ; τον &ιαβό\ου. plur. ib. vi.
11 [A. \ . wik.s. Cf. lip. Lt//,l/l. I'oljc. ad Phil. 7 p. t(18.] *
μίβ-Λριον, -ου, τό. (neiit. of adj. μ(θόριοί, -a, -o»; fr.
μίτά with, und ΰροί Λ boundary), (/ hrjrder, frontier : τα
μΐθόρίά Τίΐ'ος. the confines (of any hind or city), i. e. tlie
places adjacent to any region, the vicinity, ^Ji5. vii. ".'4
R G. (ThiK•., Xen., Hat., ah) *
μΐθύσ'κω : Pass., pres. μιθύσκομαι ; 1 aor. (μίθΰσθην ;
(fi./iidu, see μί'ίι;): fr. Ildt. down; Sept. for n;"', Τλγ^Τλ
(Kal Π'"'), and ί2Ό, Ιο intoxicate, make drunk; pass,
[cf. W. 252 (2.i")] to gel drunk, become intoxicated : Lk.
.\ϋ. 45 ; Jn. ii. 10; 1 Th. v. 7 [B. 62 (54)]; οΊνω [W.
217 (203)], E|)li. v. 18; «'< του olvov, Kev. xvii. 2 (see «,
II. 5) ; ToC vcKTapos, Plat. symp. p. 203 b. ; Lcian. dial,
deor. 6, 3 ; άπύ Tivos, .Sir. i. Iti; xxxv. 13.*
μ«θυ<Γ05, -νση, -υσον, in later Grk. also of two termi-
nations, (μίθυ. see μίθη), drunken, intoxicated: 1 Co.
V. 11 ; vi. 10. (Phryn. : μίθυσοί άι/ήρ. ονκ epeis, αλλά μι-
Θνστικος • γυναίκα 5f fpfis μίθνσον κα\ μίθύσην [Arstph.] ;
but Menand., I'iut., Lcian., Sext. Enipir., ah, [Sept. Prov.
xxiii. 21, etc. ; Sir. xix. 1, etc.] use it also of men; cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 151.)*
μκβνω (fr. μίθυ, see μ(θη) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for
nn and I3iy ; to be drunken : Mt. xxiv. 49 ; Acts ii. 1 5 ;
1 Co. xi. 21 ; 1 Th. v. 7 [cf. B. 62 (54)] ; « τοϋ αίματος
[see eV, II. 5 ; Tr mrg. τω αΐματι'\, of one who lias slied
blood profusely, Rev. xvii. 6 (Plin. h. n. 14, 28 (22)
ebriiis jam sanguine civium et tanto magis eum sitiens).•
|UL^OTcpos, -a, -o», see μίγαι, init.
μείζων, see peyas, init.
luXav, -avos, τό, see the foil. word.
μίλαϊ, -αικα, -αϊ/, gen.-acos, -ai'w/s, -araf, [fr. Horn, down],
Sept. several times for -\Γ\ψ, black : Rev. vi. 5, 12 ; opp.
to λ(νκό(, Mt. V. 36. Neut. το μίλαν, subst. black i/iA(Plat.
Phaedr. p. 276 c. ; Dem. p. 313, 1 1 ; Plut. mor. p. 841 e. ;
al.) : 2 Co. iii. 3 ; 2 Jn. 1 2 ; 3 Jn. 1 3 ; [cf. Gardlhausen,
Palaeographie, Buch i. Kap. 4 ; Edersheim, Jesus the
Messiah, ii. 270 sq.; B. D. s. v. AVriting, sub fin.]'
ΜΛίϋβ, gen. -ά [Β. 20 (17) sq.], (TTrU'H MAta,
indecl., [on the accent in codd. cf. Tdf. Proieg. p. lO.'i]),
0, (nS']'p abundance), Melea, one of king David's descend-
ants ': Lk. iii. 31.•
μΑ», 3 pers. sing. pres. of μ/λω used impers. ; impf.
(ptKfv ; ii is a care : τιυΐ, to one ; as in Grk. writ, with
nom. of the thing, ovhiv τούτων. Acts xviii. 1 7 ; with gen.
of the thing (as often in Attic), μη τών βοών μ(λ« τω
θίώ; 1 Co. ix. 9 [Β. § 132, 15; cf. W. 595 (554)] ; the
thing which is a care to one, or about which he is solicit-
ous, is evident from the context, 1 Co. vii. 21 ; nepl twos,
gen. of obj., to care about, have regard for, a pers. or a
thing : Mt. xxii. 16 ; Mk. xii. 14 ; Jn. x. 13 ; xii. 6 ; 1
Pet. V. 7,.(Hdt. C, 101 ; Xen. mem. 3, 6, 10; Cvt. 4, 5,
17; Hier. 9, 10; lMacc.xiv.43; Sap. xii. 13; Barnab.
ep. 1, 5; cf. W. § 30, 10 d.); foU. by Stj, Mk. iv. 38;
Lk. X. 40.*
[ΜΛ£λ€ήλ : Lk. iii. 37 Tdf., see Μαλ.]
luXcTow, -ώ : 1 aor. (μ^Χίτησα : (fr. μ(\ίτη care, prao
tice) ; esp. freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Soph, and Thuc. down ;
Se[)t. chiefly tor Π jH ; to care for, attend to carefultt/,
practise : τί, 1 Tim. iv. 15 [K. Y.be diligent in]; to medi-
tate i. q. to devise, contrive : Acts iv. 25 fr. Ps. ii. 1 ; u.sed
by the Greeks of the meditative pondering and tlie prac-
tice of orators and rhetoricians, as μ. τήκ άπολογι'αι» xmtp
ίαντών, Dem. p. 1129, 9 (cf. Passow s. v. d. [L. and S.
s. v. II. 2 and III. 4 b.]), whicli usage seems to have
been in the writer's mind in Mk. xiii. 1 1 [R Lbr. CoMP.;
προ-μ^λ^τάω].*
μίλι, -τοΓ, τό, Sept. for Oy^, [fr. Horn, down], honey :
Rev. X. 9 sq. ; aypiov (((. v.), Mt. iii. 4 ; Mk. i. b.*
μ(λΐ<Γ(Γΐ09, -α, -οκ, (fr. μ/λισσα a bee, as θαλάσσιο; fr.
θάΧιισσα ; μΐΧισσα is fr. μ^λι), of bees, made btj bees ; Lk.
XXIV. 42 [RGTrin br.]. (Not found elsewh. [cf. W.
24] ; μ(\ισσαιοί, -a, -ov is found in Xic. th. 61 1, in East,
μίλίσσίίοϊ) '
Μ€λίτη. -ijs, η, Melita, the name of an island ?n the
Mediterrai.eai., lying between Africa and Sicily, now
called Malta ; (this Sicuta Melila must not be confounded
with Melita Illijrica in the Adriatic, now called Meleda
[see B. D. s. v. Melita; .Smith, A'oyage and Shipwr. of
St. I'aul, Diss, ii.]): Acts xxviii. 1 [where WH Μ{λ«-ήι/7 ;
see their App. p. 160].'
[Μ€λιτήνη, see the preceding word.]
μίλλω ; fut. μίλλήσω (.Mt. x.xiv. 6 ; and LTTr WH
in 2 Pet. i. 12) ; imjif. (μάλλον [so all edd. in Lk. ix. 31
(exc. Τ WII) ; Jn. vi. 6, 71 (e.xc. liG) : vii. .19 (exc. T) ;
xi. 51 (exc. L Tr) ; Acts xxi. 27; Rev. iii. 2 (where R
pres.) ; x. 4 (e.xc. L Tr)] and ^μ^λλοκ [so all edd. in Lk.
vii.2; X. 1 (e.xc. R G) ; xix. 4 ; Jn.iv.47; xii. 33; xviiL
32 ; Acts xii. 6 (exc. R G L) ; xvi. 27 (exc. R G) ; xxviL
.■53 (exc. RGT); Ileb. .xi. 8 (exc. L) ; cf. reff. s. v.
βονλομαι, init. and Rutlierford's note on Babrius 7, 15],
In he about to do anything ; so 1. the ptcp., ό μΛ-
\ων, absol. : τα μίΚλοντα and τα Ιναττωτα are contrasted,
Ro. viii. 38 ; 1 Co. iii. 22 ; ti't το μίΧΚον, for the future,
hereafter, Lk. xiii. 9 [but see cis, A. II. 2 (where Grimm
supplies cTOf)]; 1 Tim. vi. 19; τάμίλλοΜ-α, things future,
things to come, i. e., ace. to the context, the more perfect
state of tilings which will exist in the aiiav μίΧΚων, CoL
ii. 17 ; with nouns, ό αΙων 6 μίΧΚων, Mt. xii. 32 ; Eph. L
21 ; η μ(λλ. ζωή, 1 Ί im. iv. S; ή οίκονμίνη ή μί'λλ. Heb.
ii. 5 ; η μ. οργή. Mt. iii. 7 ; τό κρίμα το μίλλον. Acts xxiv.
25 ; ΐΓολίί, Heb. xiii. 14 ; τα μί'λλοιτα αγαθά, Ileb. ix. 1 1
[but L Tr mrg. WII txt. γΐνομίνων'] ; X. 1 ; τοϋ μίλλοι/τοί
sc. Αδάμ, i.e. the Messiah, Ro.v. 14. 2. joined to an
infin. [cf.AV. 333sq. (313)• B.§140,2], a. tobeonthr
point of doing or suffering .'iomething: w. inf. present,
ημ(\\ηι eavTov avaiptlv. Acts xvi. 27 ; reXevrav, Lk. vii. 2 ;
άπο^ι^ίσκίίΐ', Jn. iv. 47; add, Lk.xxi. 7 ; Actsiii.3; xviii.
14 ; XX. 3 ; xxii. 26 ; xxiii. 27 ; w. inf. passive. Acts xxi.
27; xxvii. 33, etc. b. to intend, have in mind, think
to: w. inf. present, Mt.ii. 13 ; I>k. x. 1 ; xix. 4; Jn. vi. 6,
15; vii. 35; xii. 4 ; xiv. 22; Acts v. 35 ; xvii. 31; xx.
7,13; xxii. 26; xxvi. 2; xxvii. 30; Heb. viii. 5; [2 Pet.
i. 12 LTTr WII]; Rev. x.4; w. inf. aorist (a constr. cen-
sured by Phryn. p. 336, but authenticated more recently
/Αβλο?
397
/*ei«
by many exx. fr. the best writ. fr. Horn, down ; cf. W.
333 (313) sq. ; Loh. ad Pbryn. p. 745 sqq. ; [but see
Rutherford, New Pliryn. p. 420 sqq.]) : Acts xii. 6 LT
Wll; Rev. ii. 10 (βαΚ^Ιν RG); xii. 16; xii. 4; w. fut.
inf. ίσίοθαι, Acts xxiii. 30 RG. c. as in Grk. writ,
fr. Horn, down, of tliose things which will come to pass
(or which one will do or suffer) by tixed necessity or
divine appointment (Germ. .loUen [are to be, des-
tined to be, etc.]) ; w. pres. inf. active : Mt. xvi. 27 ; xvii.
12; XX. 22; Lk. ix.31; Jn.vi. 71 ; vii. 39; xi.51; xii. 33;
xviii. 32; Acts xx. 38 ; xxvi. 22, 23 ; Heb. i. 14 ; xi. 8 ;
Rev. ii. 10'; iii. 10; viii. 13, etc. ; Ήλίαί ύ μίλλων Ιμχι-
σθαι, Mt. xi. 14 ; 6 μίΧΚων λυτρο. τθαι, Lk. xxiv. 21 ; κρΊ-
κιν, 2 Tim. iv. 1 [AVIl niig. κρΊναι] ; w. pres. inf. passive :
Mt. xvii. 22 ; Mk. xiii. 4 ; Lk. ix. 44 ; xix. 1 1 ; x.\i. 36 ;
Acts xxvi. 22 ; Ro. iv. 24 ; 1 Th. iii. 4 ; Jas. ii. 1 2 ; Rev.
i. 19 [Tdf. •ν(νίσθαί\\ vi. 11 ; τ^ς μ(\\ονσης άΐΓοκα\υπτ€-
σθαι δόξηί, 1 Pet. v. 1 ; w. aor. inf. : την μίλΧουσαν &6ξαν
άποκαΚυφθηναί, Ro. viii. 18 ; την μ(\λουσαν ττίστιν άπο-
καλνφΰήναι, Cial. iii. 23 ; used also of those things which
wu infer from certain preceding events will of necessity
follow : w. inf. pres.. Acts xxviii. 6 ; Ro. viii. 13 ; w. inf.
fut., Acts xxvii. 10. d. in general, of what is sure to
happen: w. inf. pres., Mt. xxiv. 6 ; .In. vi. 71 ; 1 Tim. i.
16 ; Rev. .\ii. 5 ; xvii. 8 ; w. inf. fut. fafa6ai. Acts xi. 28 ;
xxiv. 15. e. to be always on the point of doing with-
out ever doing, i. e. to detail : τί μίΧλαί ; Acts xxii 16
(Aeschyl. Prom. 36; τί μ(λΚ(τ( ; Eur. Ilec. 1094 ; Lcian.
dial, niort. 10, 13, and often in prof. auth. ; 4 Mace. vi.
23; Lx. 1).
μ<λο9, -ouf , TO, [fr. Horn, down], α member, limb : prop.
a member of the human body, Ro. xii. 4; 1 Co. xii. 12,
14, 18-20, 25 sq. ; Jas. iii. 5; τα μ. τοΐι σώματος, 1 Co.
xii. 12, 22; μον, σοΰ, ήμων, νμων, Mt. ν. 29 sq. ; Γνο. vi.
13, 19; vii. 5, 23 ; Col. iii. 5 ; Jas. iii. 6 ; iv. 1 ; πόμνης
μίλη is said of bodies given up to criminal intercourse,
because they are as it were members belonging to the
harlot's body, 1 Co. vi. 15. Since Christians are closely
united by the bond of one and the same sjjirit both among
themselves and with Chiist as the head, their fellowship
is likened to the body, and indiviiiual Christians are
metaph. styled μίλη — now one of another, αλλήλων:
Ro. xii. 5; Ej)!]. iv. 25; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 46, 7, (cf.
Frilzsc/ie, Com. on Rom. iii. p. 45), — now of the mys-
tical body, i. e. the church : I Co. xii. 27 ; Eph. v. 30, [cf.
iv. 16 WH mrg.] ; τα σώματα of Christians are called
μίλη of Clirist, because the body is the abode of the spirit
of Christ and is consecrated to Christ's service, 1 Co.
vi. 15.*
Μίλχ( (Τ Τγ WH Μ(\χ(! ; see ti, .), 6, ("aSn my king),
Melchi; 1. one of Christ's ancestors: Ek.iii. 24. 2.
another of the same : ib. iii. 28.*
Μίλχισίδίκ (in Joseph, antt. 1, 10, 2 Μ(λχισ(8('κης,
-ου), ό, (ρ'ΐ>'""3'70 king of righteousness), Melc/iizedek;
king of Salem (see under 2αλήμ) and priest of the most
high God, who lived in the days of Abraham : Heb. v. 6,
10; vi. 20; vii. 1, 10 sq. 15, 17, 21 [RGL]; cf. Gen.
xiv. 18 eqq. ; Ps. cix. (ex.) 4. [Cf. B. D. s. v.] *
μ(μβράνα [Soph. Lex. -άι»α; cf. Chandler § 136], -«<
[B. 1 7 (15)], ή, Lat. membrana, i. e. jMrchmenI, first made
of dressed skins at Pergamum, whence its name : 2 Tim.
iv. 13 [Act. Barn. 6 fin. Cf. Birt, Antikes Buchwesen,
ch. ii. ; Gardthausen, Palaeographie, p. 39 sq.].*
μκ'μψομ,αι; 1 aor. (μ^μψάμην, in class. Grk. fr. Hesiod
(opp. 1 84) down : to blame, Jiiid fault : absol. Ro• ix. 19 ;
the thing found fault with being evident from what pre-
cedes, Mk. vii. 2 Rec. ; avTovt, Heb. viii. 8 L Τ Tr mrg.
WH txt., where R G Tr txt. Wll mrg. αΙτοΊς, which many
join with μιμφόμίνο! (for the person or thing blamed is
added by Grk. writ, now in the dat., now in the ace;
see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v., cf. Kriiger § 46, 7, 3) ;
but it is more correct to supply αυτήν, i. e. 6ιιιβήκην,
which the writer wishes to prove was not " faultless "
(cf. 7), and to join airoit with Xi'yft; [B. § 133, 9].*
μ£μ.ψ(μοιρο$, -ov, {μίμφομαι, and μοίρα fate, lot), conv
plaining of one's lot, querulous, discontented: Jude 16.
(Isocr. p. 234 c. [p. 387 ed. Lange] ; Aristot. h. a. 9, 1
[p. 608% 10] ; Theophr. char. 17, 1 ; Lcian. dial. deor.
20, 4 ; Pint, de ira cohib. c. 1 3.) •
μίν, a weakened form of μήν, and hence properly a
particle of affirmation: truhj, certainly, surely, irl••
deed, — its affirmative force being weakened, yet re-
tained most in Ionic, Epic, and Herodotus, and not
wholly lost in Attic and Hellenistic writers (μίν ' con-
firmative ' ; cf. 4 JIacc. xviii. 18). Owing to this its
oriirinal meaning it adds a certain force tn the terms
and phrases with which it is connected, and thus con-
trasts them with or distinguishes ther'. from others.
Accordingly it takes on the character of a concessive
and very often of a merely distinctive particle, which
stands related to a following 8e or other adversative con-
junction, either expressed or understood, and in a sen-
tence composed of several members is so placed as to
point out the first member, to which a second, marked by
an adversative particle, is added or opposed. It corre-
sponds to the Lat. quidem, indeed. Germ, zwar (i. e. prop.
zu Wahre, i. e. in Wahrheit [in trutW]) ; but often its force
cannot be reproduced. Its use in classic Greek is exhib-
ited by Devarius i. p. 122 sqc]., and Klotz on the same iL
2 p. 656 sq([.; Viger i p. 531 sqq., and Hermann on the
same p. 824 sq. ; al. ; Matthiae § 622 ; KUhner ii. p. 806
sqq. §§ 527 sqii.; p. 691 scjq.; § 503; [Jelf § 729, 1, 2;
§§ 764 sqq.]; Passow, and Pape, [and L. and S.] s. v.
I. Examples in which the particle μίν is foUoived in
another member by an adversative particle expressed.
Of these examples there are two kinds : 1. those
in which μίν has a concessive force, and Se (or άλλα) in-
troduces a restriction, correction, or amplification of
what has been said in the former member, indeed . . .
but, yet, on the other hand. Persons or things, or predi-
cations about either, are thus correlated : Mt. iii. 11, cf.
Mk. i. 8 (where TTrWHom.Lbr. μίν); Lk. ui. 16
(where the meaning is, ' I indeed baptize as well as he
who is to come after me, but his baptism is of greater
efficacy"; cf. Acts i. 5); Mt. ix. 37 and Lk. x. 2 (al-
though the harvest is great, yet the laborers are few) ;
μβν
by»
μα
Mt. χνϋ. 11 sq. (rightly indeed is it said that Elijah will
come and work tlie άποκατάστασκ, but he has already
corae to bring abou' this very thing); Mt. xx. 23; xxii.
8; xxiii. •2« ; Jn. xvi. •22; xix. 32sq. ; Acts xxi. 39 (al-
though I am a Jew, and not that Egyptian, yet etc.) ;
Acts xxii. 3 [R] ; Ko. li. 2.3 : vi. 1 1 ; 1 Co. i. 18 ; ix. 24 ;
xi. 14 sq.; xii. 20 [KG l>br.Trbr. Wllmrg.]; .\v. 51 [R
GLbr.J; 2Co.x.lO; Ileb. iii. 5 sij.; 1 I'et. i. 20, and
often, fif'i» and θί are added to articles and pronouns :
01 μΐν . . . oi θί, the one indeed . . . but the other (al-
though the latter, yet the former), Phil. i. 16 sq. [ace. to
crit. txt.] ; OS μίν ... 05 8e, the one indeed, but (yet)
the other etc. .Jude 22 sq. ; τινίς μίν . . . nvft St και, Phil,
i. 15; with conjunctions: tl μίν ουν, if indeed then, if
therefore . . . « 8e, but if, Acts xviii. 14 sq. R G ; xix.
3S sq. ; xxv. 1 1 L Τ Tr WH [W μίν ουν . . . nvi 8e, Ileb.
viii. 4 sq. (here R G «i μϊν yap)] ; ti μ^ν . . . viiv 8t, if
indeed (conceding or supposing this or that to be the
case) . . . but now, Ileb. xi. 15 ; καν μίν . . « δί fiyt.
Lk. .xiii. 9 ; μϊν yap . . . 8i, 1 Co. xi. 7 ; Ro. ii. 25 ; μϊν
ουν . . , if, Lk. iii. 18 ; fir μίν . . . th 8e, Heb. ix. 6 scj. ;
μ£ί> . . . αλλά, indeed . . . but, allliiiiti/h . . . yet, Ro. xiv.
20 ; 1 Co. xiv. 17 ; μίν . . . πλην, Lk. xxii. 22. [Cf. W.
443 (ϋΆ); Β. § 149, 12a.] 2. those in which μίν
loses its concessive force and serves only to distin-
guish, but 8e retains its adversative power : Lk.xi.48;
Acts xiii. 36 sq. ; xxiii. 8 [here WII txt. om. Tr br. μίν] ;
1 Co. i. 12, 23 , Phil. iii. 1 ; Ileb. vii. 8 ; άπο μΐν . . , in'i
hi, 2 Tim. iv. 4 ; ό μϊν ουν (Germ, er nun [he, then,"]) . . .
oi 8i, Acts .\xviii. 5 sq. ; os μίν ... or it, and one . . . and
another, 1 Co. xi. 21 ; oi μΐν . . . ό St (he, on the con-
trary), Ileb. vii. 20 S(J. 23 sq. ; (Ke'ivoi μίν ουν . . • ημίΐς
8e, 1 Co. ix. 25; el μϊν oSu . . . (1 8e, Acts xviii. 14 sq.
[RG]; xLx. 38; .\xv. 11 [LTTrWH]; and this ha])-
pens chiefly when what has already been included in the
>vords immediately preceding is separated into parts, so
that the adversative particle contrasts that which the
writer especially desires to contrast : ίκάστω . . . Toif μίν
ζητονσιν . . . Tots δί c^ (pLOfias etc. lio. ii. 6—8 ; ttSs . . .
(Kflvoi μιν . . . ημίΐς 8d etc. 1 Co. i.\. 25 ; add, Mt. .xxv.
14 sq. 33 ; Ro. v. IG ; xi. 22. 3. μϊν . . .84 serve only
to distribute a sentence intoclauses: both. ..and; not
oidy . . .but also ; as well . . .as: Jn. xvi. 9-1 1 ; Ro. viii.
1 7 ; Jude 8 ; πρώτον μίν . . . eneira 8ί, Heb. vii. 2; ο μϊν
. . . ο 8e . . . h 8t, some . . . some . . . some, Mt. xiii. 8 ;
[eitaoTos . . . ό μϊν . . . 6 8t, each . . . one . . . another,
1 Co. vii. 7 L Τ Tr WII] ; &ς μϊν . . . Ss Se, one . . . an-
other, Mt. x.xi. 35 ; Acts xvii. 32 ; 1 Co. vii. 7 [R G]; oi
μίν . . . άλλοι [L o2] 6e . . . ίτ(ρυί δί, Mt. xvi. 14 ; ω μ(ν
γαρ . . . άλλωδί . . . (τίρωδϊ [here TTrWHom. Lbr. St],
1 Co. xii. 8-10; & μίν . . . foil, by άλλα δί three times,
Mt. xiii. 4 sq. 7 sq. ; SKkoi μίν, άλλοι St, 1 Co. xv. 39 ;
τοϋτο μίν • . . τοντο δί, on the one hand . . . on the other;
partly , . . partly, Heb. x. 33, also found in prof. auth.
cf. W. 142 (135). μίν is followed by another particle :
ϊτΓίΐτα, Jn. xi. 6 ; 1 Co. xii. 28 ; Jas. iii. 1 7 ; κα\ νΰν, Acts
xxvi. 4, 6 ; τα νυν. Acts xvii. 30 ; πολύ [R G πολλώ]
(ώλλον, Heb. xii. 9.
H. Examples in which μίν is followed neither by 8i
nor by any other adversative particle (μίν ' solitarium ') ;
cf. W. 575 (534) sq. ; B. 365 (313) sq. These cxx. are
of various kinds; either 1. the antithesis is evi-
dent from the context; as, Col. ii. 23 ('have indeed a
sliow of wi.-idum', but are folly [cf. Bp. Lghtft. in loc.]) ;
ή μίν . . . σωτηρίαν, sc. but they themselves prevent their
own salvation, Ro. x. 1 ; τά μίν . . . Βυνάμισιν, sc. but ye
do not hold to my apostolic authority, 2 Co. xii. 12;
(Ίνθρωττοι μίν [L Τ Tr Wll om. /itV] . . . ομνύουσιν, sc. 6 8i
if OS καθ' f αυτού ΰμνϋίΐ, Ileb. vi. 16. Or 2. the
antithetic idea is brought out by a different turn of the
sentence : Acts xix. 4 [Kec], where the expected second
member, Ίησοϋί 8( ίστιν ό ι'ρχόμινος, is ivrapped up in
ToOr' foriv fi's τόν Ίησονν; Ro. xi. 13 ίφ' όσον μίν κτλ.•
where the antithesis παραζηλω δί κτλ. is contained in
(ΐπω! πηραζηλώσω; Ro. vii. 12 ό μίν νάμα κτλ., where
the thought of the second member, ' but sin misuses the
law,' is expressed in another form in 13 sqq. by an
anacoluthon, consisting of a change from the disjunctive
to a conjunctive construction (cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 839),
we find μίν . . . τί, .Vets xxvii. 21 ; μίν . . . και, 1 Th. ii.
18 ; in distributions or partitions, Mk. iv. 4-8 [here R G
μίν . . . δ( . . . και . . . και] \ Lk. viii. 5-8 ; or, finally, that
member in which 8i would regularly follow immediately
precedes {Herm. ad Vig. p. 839), Acts xxviii. 22 [yet
see Meyer ad loc. ; cf. B. § 149, 1 2 d.]. Or . 3. the
writer, in using μίν, perhaps had in mind a second mem-
ber to be introduced by 8ί, but was drawn away from
his intention by explanatory additions relating to the
first member: thus Acts iii. 13 [ΰν ipels μίν — Kec. om.
this μίν — etc., where ό θίος 8ί ήγειρ^ν ίκ νεκρών, cf. 15,
sliould have followed) ; esp. (as occasionally in class.
Grk. also) after πρώτον μίν : Ro. i. 8 ; iii. 2 ; 1 Co. xi.
18; τον μίν πρώτον λόγοκ κτλ. where the antithesis το*
δί 8evTfpov λόγον κτλ. ought to have followed. Acts i.
1. 4. μίν ουν [in Lk. xi. 28 TTr WH μινοΰν], Lat.
quidem ifjitur, [Eng. so then, now therefore, verily, etc.],
(where μίν is confirmatory of the matter in hand, and
ουν marks an inference or transition, cf. Klotz ad Devar.
ii. 2 p. 662 sq. ; \_Herm. A'ig. pp. 540 sq. 842; B. § 149,
16]): Acts i. 18; V. 41 ; xiii. 4; xvii. 30; xxiii. 22 ; xxvi.
9 ; 1 Co. vi. 4, 7 [here Τ om. Tr br. ουν] ; άλλα μίν ουν,
Phil. iii. 8 G L Tr ; « μίν ουν, Heb. vii. 11. 5. μίν
solitarium has a concessive and restrictive force, indeed,
verily, ((ierm. freilich), [cf. Klotz, Devar. ii. 2 p. 522 ; Har•
tung, Partikeln, ii. 404] : d μίν, 2 Co. xi. 4 ; μίν ουν note
then, (Germ, nun freilich), Ileb. ix. 1 [cf. B. u. s. On the
use of μίν ουν in the classics cf. Cope's note on Aristot.
rhet. 2, 9, 11.] 6. μ(νοϋνγ(, q. v. in its place.
III. .\s respects the Position of the particle: it
never stands at the beginning of a sentence, but yet as
near the beginning as possible; generally in the second
or third place, by preference between the article and
noun, [exx. in which it occupies the fourth place are
Acts iii. 21 ; 2 Co. x. I ; Col. ii. 23 ; Acts xiv. 12 Rec;
the fifth place, Eph. iv. 11 ; Ro. xvi. 19 RWHbr.; 1 Co.
ii. 15 Κ G ; (.In. .xvi. 22, see below)]; moreover, in the
Meuva
39.9
μερίζω
midst of a clause also it attaches itself to a word the
force of which is to be strengthened, as και i/itts oiv λύττηρ
μίν viv ίχ(τ( [but LT Tr WH . . . ουν viv μΐν λύττ.], Jn.
xvi. 22 ; ef. \V. §61,6. The word is not found in the
Rev. or in the Epp. of John.
Mtwd or Mc'vvas, see MaiVai/.
μ€ν-οϋν i. q. μίν ovv^ see μίν, II. 4 sq.
(ΐίν-οϋν-γ6 \_μ(νοΙν y( L Tr], (μΐν, oiv, ye), nay surely,
nay rather ; three times in answers by which what was
previously said is corrected (and standing at the begin-
ning of the clause, contrary to Attic usage where μίν
oiv is never so placed ; cf. Slurz, De dial. Mac. et Ale.\.
p. 203sq.; io6. ad Phryn. p. 342; [B. 370 sq. (318) ; W.
§ 61, 6]) : Lk. .\i. 2ϋ [where Τ Tr WH μινοΰν] ; Ro. ix.
20; X. 18; also Phil. iii. 8 [where LGTr fiei/ oiv, WH
μΐν ουν γε], and Nicet. ann. 21, 11. 415 [p. 851 ed.
Bekk.].*
μί'ν-τοι, (μίν, Toi), [Tr μΐν τοι in 2 Tim. ii. 19], a par-
ticle of affirmation, and hence also often of opposition
(on its various use in class. Grk. cf. Devar. p. 124 sq. and
Klotz's comments, vol. ii. 2 pp. 60 and 663 sqq. ; Herm.
ad Vig. p. 840 sq.), bul yet, nevertheless, howbeit : Jn. iv.
27 ; vii. 13 ; xx. 5 ; xxi. 4 ; 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; Jude 8 (the
connection of which vs. with what precedes is as follows :
'although these examples were set forth as warnings,
nevertheless ' etc.) ; όμως μίντοι, yet nevertheless, Jn. xii.
42 ; μίντοι, i. q. rather, Jas. ii. 8 (if ye do not have re-
spect ot persons, but rather observe the law of love,
with which προσωττοληψία is incompatible ; [^ij" however,
howbeit ij]).*
μ,( νω ; impf. ΐμινον; fut. μ(νώ\ 1 aor. ΐμίΐνα; plupf.
μ(μ(νήκ(ΐν without augm. (1 Jn. ii. 19 ; cf. (κβάλλω, [and
see Tdf- Proleg. p. 120 sq.]) ; [fr. Horn, down] ; Sept.
chiefly for 10>; and Dip, also for Π3Π, 3Ei', etc.; to re-
main, abide ; I. intransitively ; in reference 1.
to PLACE ; a. prop. i. q. Lat. commoror, to sojourn,
tarry : cv w. dat. of place, Lk. viii. 27 ; x. 7 ; Jn. vii. 9 ;
xi. 6 ; Acts XX. 15; xxvii. 31 ; xxviii. 30 [RGL]; 2
Tim. iv. 20; with adverbs of place: «icei, Mt. x. 11 ; Jn.
ii. 12; X. 40; [xi. 54 WHTrt.xt.]; iiSe, Mt. xxvi. 38;
Mk. xiv. 34 ; παρά τινι, with one, Jn. i. 39 (40) ; xiv. 25 ;
Acts xviii. 20 [R G] ; xxi. 7 ; σν» τινι, Lk. i. 56 ; καθ'
ίαυτον, dwell at his own house, Acts xxviii. 16, cf. 30.
i. q. tarry as a guest, lodye : ποΟ, Jn. i. 38 (39) ; iv w. dat.
of place, Lk. xix. 5 ; Acts i.\. 43 ; παρά τινι, in one's house.
Acts ix. 43 ; xviii. 3 ; ,xxi. 8 ; of tarrying for a night,
μ(τά τίνος, σνν τινι. Lk. χχίν. 29. i. q. Ιο be kept, to remain :
dead bodies «Vl τοΟ σταυρού, Jn. xLx. 31 ; to κ\ημα iv rg
άμηί\ω, Jn. xv. 4. b. tropically ; a. i. q. not to
depart, not to leave, to continue to be present : μ^τά nvos
(gen. of pers.), to maintain unbroken fellowship with
one, adhere to his party, 1 Jn. ii. 19 ; to be constantly
present to help one, of the Holy Spirit, Jn. xiv. 16 R G;
also παρά w. dat. of pers., Jn. xiv. 17; iπί τίνα, to put
forth constant influence upon one, of the Holy Spirit,
Jn. i. 32 sq. ; also of the wrath of God, ib. iii. 36 ; to
κάλυμμα «jrl r^ άναγνώσ-(ΐ. of that which continually pre-
vents the right understanding of what is read, 2 Co. iii.
14. In the mystic phraseology of John, God is said μίνια
in Christ, i. e. to dwell as it were within him, to be con-
tinually operative in him by his divine influence and en-
ergy. Jn. xiv. 10 ; Christians are said μevfιl> iv τω θ(ω, to
be rooted as it were in him, knit to him by the spirit they
have received from him, 1 Jn. ii. 6, 24, 27 ; iii. 6 ; hence
one is said μίν^ιν in Christ or in God, and conversely
Christ or God is said μίν(ΐν in one : Jn. vi. 56 ; xv. 4 sq. ;
1 Jn. iii. 24; iv. 13, 16 ; ό Bebi μίν(ΐ iv αυτω κ. airos it
τω θ(ω. 1 Jn. iv. 15; cf. Riickert, Abendniahl, p. 268 sq.
iLivei TL iv ipoi, something has established itself perma-
nently within my soul, and always exerts its power in
me : τά μίγματα μου, Jn. xv. 7 ; ό λόγος τον θξον, 1 Jn. ii.
14 ; ή χαρά ή ίμή (not joy Hi me i. e. of which I am the
object, but the joy with which I am filled), Jn. xv. 11
Rec. ; δ ηκοΙσατ(, 1 Jn. ii. 24 ; the Holy Spirit, Jn. ii. 1 7 ;
iii. 9 ; η άΚηθιια, 2 Jn. 2 ; love towards God, 1 Jn. iii. 17;
in the same sense one is said ίχ^ιν τι μίνον iv ίαυτω, as
τον \6yov τον 6eov, Jn. v. 38 ; ζωην αΐώνιον, 1 Jn. iii. 15.
i. q. to persevere ; ev τινι, of him who cleaves, holds fast,
to a thing: iv τω λόγω. Jn. viii. 31 ; iv ttj άγάπτ;, 1 Jn. iv.
16 ; iv πίστ€ΐ, 1 Tim. ii. Ιό ; iv οις {iv τοίτοις. α) ζμαθα,
2 Tim. iii. 14 ; iv ttj diSa^jj, 2 Jn. 9, (cV τω Ίον^αΐσμω, 2
^lacc. viii. 1) ; differently iv rfj άγάπτ] Ttraf, i. e. to keep
one's self always worthy of his love, Jn. xv. 9 sq. β.
to be held, or kept, continually : iv τω θανάτω, in the state
of death, 1 Jn. iii. 14 ; iv τη σκοτία, Jn. xii. 46 ; iv τω
φωτί, 1 Jn. ii. 10. 2. to time ; lo continue to be, i.e.
not to perish, to last, to endure : of persons, to survive, live,
(exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in Kypke, Observe, i. p. 415
sq.) : Phil. i. 25 [so iμμiveιv, Sir. xxxix. 11] ; with (Ις τον
αιώνα added, Jn. xii. 34 ; lleb. vii. 24 ; also of him Λvho
becomes partaker of the true and everlasting life, opp.
to παράγ(σβαι, 1 Jn. ii. 1 7 ; ίως άρτι, opp. to o'l κοιμηθίντ^ς,
1 Co. XV. 6 ; ολίγον. Rev. xvii. 10 ; ϋως ίρχομαι, Jn. xxi.
22 sq. ; of things, not to perish, to last, stand : of cities,
Mt. xi. 23 ; Heb. xiii. 14 ; of works, opp. to κατακαί^σθαι,
1 Co. iii. 14 ; of purposes, moral excellences, Ro. ix. 11 ;
1 Co. xiii. 13; Heb. xiii. 1; λόγος 6fov, 1 Pet. i. 23;
(where Rec. adds eis τ. αιώνα) ; of institutions, Heb. xii.
27. ό καρπός, Jn. xv. Ifi ; ΰπαρξις, Heb. -X. 34 ; αμαρτία,
Jn. i.x. 41 ; βρώσις, opp. to ή άπολλυμίνη. Jn. vi. 27 ; one's
δικαίοσύΐΊ; with iir τον αιώνα adiled, 2 Co. i.x. 9 ; το ρήμα
κυρίου, 1 Pet. i. 25. things which one does not part with
are said μ(ν(ΐν to him, i. e. to remain to him, be still in
(his) possession: Acts v. 4 (1 Mace. xv. 7). 3. to
STATE or condition; to remain as one is, not to become
another or different : with a predicate nom. μόνος, Jn.
xii. 24 ; άσαλ(ντος, Acts xxvii. 41 ; άγαμος, 1 Co. vii. 11 ;
πιστός, 2 Tim. ii. 13 ; ifpeif, Heb. vii. 3 ; with adΛ•eΓbs,
όντως, 1 Co. vii. 40 ; ώς κάγώ. ibid. 8 ; iv w. dat. of the
state, ibid. 20, 24. II. transitively ; Ttwi, to wait
for, await one [cf. B. § 131, 4] : .\cts xx. 23 ; with i» and
dat. of place added, ibid. 5. [Comp- : ava-, Dia-, iv-, ini-,
κατά-, πάρα-, σνν^παρα-, π(ρι•, προσ-, νπο-μξνω.'\
μερίζω: 1 aor. iμiρισa^, pf. μ(μίρικα (1 Co. vii. 17 Τ
Tr txt. WH txt.) ; Pass., pf. μ(μ(ρισμαι ; 1 aor. ίμ(ρΊ-
σθην\ Mid., 1 aor. inf. μ(ρίσασθαι: (fr. μΐρος, as μίλίζΐΒ
μέριμνα
4U0
μ€ρο^
ft. μίλοι) ; fr. Xen. down ; Sept. for pSn ; to divide ;
i. e. a. In separate into parl.t, cut intu pieces : pass.
fttyiipiarai 6 Xpta^Tos ; i. e. has Christ himself, whom ye
claim as yours, been hke yourselves divided into parts,
so that one has one part and another another part? 1
Co. i. 13 [L WII txt. punctuate so as to take it as an e.\-
clamatory declaration ; see ^leyer in loc] ; trop. μ(μ(-
ρισται ή yvvq και ή παρθίνοί, differ in their aims, follow
different interests, [A. V. there ts a difference between;
but L Tr W'H connect μιμ. with what precedes], 1 Co.
vii. 33 (34) ; to divide into parties, i. e. be split into fac-
tions (Polyb. 8, •23, 9 ) : καθ' ϊμαυτοΰ to be at variance with
one's self, to rebel [Λ. V. diiuiled] against one's self, Mt.
xii. 2J ; also e'lr' (μαυτόν, ib. 26 ; Mk. iii. 24-26. b.
to distribute : τί τισι, a thing among persons, Mk. vi. 41 ;
to bestow, impart : τινί, 1 Co. vii. 17; τί ««, Ro. xii. 3 ; 2
Co. X. 13; Ileb. vii. 2, (Sir. xlv. 20; Polyb. 11, 28, 9) ;
mid. μερίζομαι τι μιτά Tivof, to divide (for one's self) a
thing with one, Lk. xii. 13 (Uem. p. 913, 1). [Comp. :
δια-, (Τυμ-μ(ριζω•\ '
μ€'ριμνα, -ai, η, (fr. μςμίζίι), μ€ρίζομαί, to be drawn in
different directions, cf. [Eng. ' distraction ' and ' curae
quaemeumanimum divorse trahunt'] Ter. Andr. 1,5, 25;
Verg. Aen. 4, 285 sq. ; [but ace. to al. derived fr. a root
meaning to be thoughtful, and akin to μάρτ -js, memor,
etc.; cf. Vanicek p. 1201 ; Curtius § 46li ; Fick iv. 283;
see μάρτυ!]), care, anxiety: 1 Pet. v. 7 (fr. Ps. liv. (Iv.)
'23) ; Lk. viii. 14; xxi. 34 ; w. gen. of the obj., care to
be taken of, care for a thing, 2 Co. xi. 28 ; tjO aiCivos
(τούτου), anxiety about things pertaining to this earthly
life, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19. [(Horn. h. Merc), Hes.,
Pind., al.] •
μ€ριμ.νάω, -ώ ; fut. μερίμνησα ; 1 aor. subj. 2 pers. plur.
μ(ρίμνήσητ€ ; {μέριμνα); a. to be anxious; to be
troulAed with cares: absol., Mt. vi. 27, 31 ; Lk. xii. 25;
μη&(ν pep. be anxious about nothing, Pliil. iv. 6 ; with
dat. of the thing for the interests of which one is solicit-
ous [cf. W. § 31, 1 b.] : Tjj ψυχή, about sustaining life,
τω σώματι, Mt. vi. 25; Lk. xii. 22 ; πιρί Tivot, about a
thing, Mt. vi. 28 ; Lk. xii. 26 ; fit την αϋριον, for the
morrow, i. e. about what may be on the morrow, Mt. vi.
34; foil, by an indir. quest, πώς η τί, Mt. χ. 19; I^k. xii.
11 [here Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. WII br. η τί} ; joined with
τυρβάζ^σθοί (θορυβάζ.) foil, by nfp\ πολλά, Lk. X. 41 [WH
mrg. om.] b. to care for, look out for, (a, th'in^) ; to
seek to promote one's interests : τά ΐαντη!, Mt. vi. 34 Rec. ;
τα τοΰ κυρίου, 1 Co. vii. 32-34 ; τά τοΰ κόσμου, 1 Co. vii. 34 ;
{αυτί)!, Mt. vi. 34 L Τ Tr WII (a usage unknown to Grk.
writ., although they put a gen. after other verbs of carinr/
or providing/ for, as (■!τ^μfλe'tσβaι, φροντίζ€ΐν, npovof'iv, cf.
Kruger § 47, 11 ; W. 205 (193) ; B. § 133, 25) ; τα π(ρί
Tivos, Phil. ii. 20 ; Ίνα το αυτό imep αλλι^λωμ μΐριμνωσι τα
μίλη, that the members may have the same care one for
another, 1 Co. xii. 25. (Sept. for JXl, to be anxious, Ps.
xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 19; TJ"J to be disturbed, annoyed in
spirit, 2 S. vii. 10 ; 1 Chr. xvii. 9 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Xen.
and Soph, down.) [Co.MP. : προ-μιριμνάω.'}'
(icpCs, -t8oi, η, (see μίροί), Sept. chiefly for pSn, HpSn,
njo ; [fr. Antipho and Thuc. down] ; a part, i. q. \.
a part as distinct from the whole: (rijs) MaxcSovt'os, Acts
xvi. 12 [on Λvllich see Ilort in WH. App. ad loc.]. 2.
an assiipud /tart, a portion, share : Lk. x. 42 (see αγαθοί,
2) ; ΐστι /loi pip'is ptra tivos, I have a portion, i. e. fellow-
ship, ivith one, 2 Co. vi. 15. οίκ ΐστι μοί μ€ρΐ! η κληροί
(V Ttw, Ι have neither part nor lot, take no share, in a
thing. Acts viii. 21 ; ικανοϋν τίνα eis την μ(ρί8α TiM$r, to
make one fit to obtain a share in a thing [i. e. partit. gen. J
al. gen. of apposition], Col. i. 12.*
μερισμοί, -oC, 6, (μίρίζω), a division, partition, (Plat.,
Polyb., Strab., [al.]) ; 1. a ilistriliulion ; plur. dis-
tributions of various kinds : irveipaTos άγιου, gen. of the
obj., Ileb. ii. 4. 2. a separation: ά;(μι μ^ρκτμοΰ
^Ιτυχ!]! κ- ττνιϋματοί, which many take actively : ' up to the
dividing' i. e. so far as to cleave asunder or separate;
but it is not easy to understand what the dividing of the
'soul' is. Hence it is more correct, I think, and more
in accordance with the context, to take the Λvord pas-
sively (just as other verbal subst. ending in pas are used,
e. g. αγιασμό;, -nfipaapus), and translate even to the divi-
sion, etc., i. e. to that most hidden spot, the dividing line
between soul and spirit, where the one passes into the
other, Heb. iv. 12 ; [cf. Siegfried, Fhilo von Alex. u. s. w.
p. 325 sq.].*
μερισ-τήΐ, -oD, ό, (μερίζω), a divider: of an inheritance,
Lk. xii. 14. (Pollux [4, 176].)*
μ<'ρο5, -ους, τά, (peipopai to share, receive one's due por-
tion), [fr. Pind., Aeschyl., lidt. down], α /)nri; i.e. 1.
η pari due or assigned to one, (Germ, .■inthcil) : άφαιριΐν
TO μέρος Ttvot (gen. of pers.) από or ?κ rivus (gen. of the
thing). Rev. xxii. 19; ίχαν μίρος (v with ilat. of the thing.
Rev. XX. 6 ; μίρος ϊχ(ΐν μ(τά τίνος, (participation in the
same thing, i. e.) to have pan (fellowship) with one, Jn.
xiii. 8 ; hence, as sometimes in class. Grk. (Eur. Alt. 477
[474]), lol, dislini), assigned to one. Rev. xxi. 8; τιδΐναι
TO μέρος τινός μ(τά τίνων, to appoint one his lot with cer-
tain persons, Mt. .xxiv. 51 ; Lk. xii. 46. 2. one of
the constituent parts of a whole; a. univ. : in a con-
text where the whole and its parts are distinguished, Lk.
xi. 36; Jn.xix. 23; Rev. xvi. 19; w. a gen. of the whole,
Lk. .XV. 12 ; xxiv. 42 ; where it is evident from the con-
text of what whole it is a part, Acts v. 2 ; Eph. iv. 16 :
TO (V μέρος, sc. τοΰ συνιΒρίου, Acts .xxiii. 6 ; τοΰ μέρουί
των Φαρισαίων, of that part of the Sanhedrin which con-
sisted of Pharisees, Acts xxiii. 9 [not Lchm.] ; τα αίοη,
w. gen. of a province or country, the divisions or regions
ivhich make up the land or province, Mt. ii. 22 ; Acts iL
10; w. gen. of a city, the region belonging to a city,
country around it, Mt. xv. 21; xvi. 13; Mk. viii. 10;
τά άνωτ(ρικα μέρη, the upper districts (in tacit contrast
with τά κατώτιρα, and with them forming one whole),
Acts xix. 1 ; τά μέρη έκί'ινα, those regions (which are
parts of the country just mentioned, i. e. Macedonia), Acts
XX. 2 ; τά κατώτερα μέρη w. gen. of apposition, της yf r,
Eph. iv. 9 (on which see κατώτίροι) ; fir τά δί^ιά μέρη τοΰ
η-λοι'ου, i. e. into the parts (i. e. spots sc. of the lake) on
the right side of the ship, Jn. xxi. 6. Adverbial phrase•
μεσημβρία
401
μ€σο9
βι>ά μίροί (see ανά, 1), 1 Co. xiv. 27 ; κατο fupos, sever-
ally, part by part, in detail, Heb. ix. 5 [see κατά, II. 3
a. y•] ; ^/pos η (ace. absol.) in pari, pnrthj, 1 Co. .xi. 18
(Thuc. 2, 64; 4. 'M) ; Isocr. p. 426 d.) ; άπο μ^ρου!, in
part, i. e. somewhat, 2 Co. i. 14 ; in a measure, to some de-
gree, ib. ii. 5 ; [Ro. xv. 24] ; as respects a part, Ro. -xi. 25 ;
here and there, Ro. xv. 15; « μίρουν as respects indi-
vidual persons and things, severally, individually, 1 Co.
xii. 27; in part, partially, i. e. imperfectly, 1 Co. -xiii. 9,
12; TO CK μίρουί (opp. to το TtXtioj») [A. V. that which
is in part'\ imperfect (Luth. well, das Sliick-wcrl-'), ibid. 10.
[Green (Crit. Xote on 2 Co. i. 14) says "άπό μ. differs in
Paul's usage from tx μ. in that the latter is a contrasted
term in express opposition to the idea of a complete whole,
the other being useil simply without such aim"; cf.
Bnhdy. Syntax, p. 230 ; Meyer on 1 Co. xii. 27.] b.
any particular, Germ. Stiick; (where the writer means to
intimate that there are other matters, to be separated
from that which he has specified) : t'v τώ pJpei τούτω,
in this particular i. e. in reyard to this, in this respect,
1 Pet. iv. 16 R; 2 Co. iii. 10; ix. 3; w. a gen. of the thing.
Col. ii. 16 [where see Bp. Lghtft.] ; τοΰτο το μίρο!, sc.
rijs εργασίας ημών (branch of business). Acts .\i.x. 27,
cf. 2.-..•
μ<σ-ημβρία, -or, ή, (/if σοΓ and ήμίρα), fr. Hdt. down, mid-
day [on the omission of the art. cf. W. 121 (11.5)]; a.
(as respects time) noon : Acts xxii. 6. b. (as re-
spects locality) the south : Acts viii 26 [al. refer this also
to a.; see κατά, II. 2].*
μΐσ-ιτενω : I aor. ίμίσ'ιτίνσα ; (μισίτης [cf. W. p. 2S
e.]); 1. lo act as mediator, betiveen litigating or
covenanting parties ; trans, to accomplish something by
interposing heliceen two parties, to mediate, (with aec. of
the result) : την διύλυσικ, Polyb. 11, 34, 3 ; τάί (τυνθηκαι,
Diod. 19, 71 ; Dion. Hal. 9, 59 ; [cf. Philo de plant. Xoe,
ii. 2 fin.]. 2. as a μίσίτηι is a sponsor or surety (Jo-
seph, antt. 4, 6, 7 ταντα 6μννντ€ς fXfyoi• κα\ τον 6f6v μίσί-
την Ζ>ν ντησχνονντο ττοιονμΐνοι [cf. Philo de spec. legg. iii.
7 άοράτω δί πράγματι πάντως αόρατος μΐσιτ€ν(ΐ βίόί etc.]),
so μ(σιτ(ΰω comes to signify to pledge one's self, gire
surety: όρκω. lleb. vi. 17.'
(teo-irqs, -ου, ό. (μίσοί), one who intervenes between
two, either in order to make or restore peace and friend-
ship, or to form a compact, or for ratifying a covenant ;
a medium of communication, arbitrator, (Vulg. [and A. V.]
mediator): ό /χ€σίτ;;Γ [generic art. cf. λΥ. § 18, 1 sub fin.],
i. e. every mediator, whoever acts as mediator, ivos ουκ
ίστι, does not belong to one party but to two or more.
Gal. iii. 20. Used of Moses, as one who brought the
commands of God to the people of Israel and acted as
mediator with God on behalf of the people, ib. 19 (cf.
Deut. V. 5 ; hence he is called μισίτη! και Βιαλλακτης by
i'hilo also, vit. Moys. iii. § 19). Christ is called μια:
6fov K. ανθρώπων, since he interposed by his death and
restored the harmony between God and man which
human sin had broken, 1 Tim. ii. 5 ; also μfσ. διαθήκης,
Heb. viii. 6 ; ix. 15 ; xii. 24. (Polyb. 28, 1 5. .S ; Diod. 4,
S4; Philo de somn. i. § 22; Joseph, antt. 16, 2. 2; Plot.
de Is. et Os. 46 ; once in Sept., Job ix. 33.) Cf. Fischer,
De vitiis lexx. X. 'Γ. p. 351 sqq.*
(Μσ-0-νίκτιον, -ου, τό, (neut. of the adj. μεσονύκτιος in
Find, et al., fr. μίσος and νύξ, νυκτός), midnight : /ircro-
ννκτίου, at midnight [W. § 30, 11; B. § 132, 26], Mk.
xiii. 3.5 [here Τ Tr WH ace. ; cf. W. 230 (215 sq.) ; B.
§ 131, 11]; Lk. xi. 5; κατά το μ. about midnight. Acts
xvi. 25 ; μίχρι μ. until midnight, Acts xx. 7. (Sept. ;
Hippocr., Aristot., Diod., Strabo, Lcian., Plut.; cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 53, [W. p. 23 c.].) *
Μ6σ-οΐΓθταμ(α, -αϊ, ή, (fcm. of μεσοποτάμιος, -a, -ov, 8C.
χώρα ; fr. μίσος and ποταμός), Mesopotamia, the name,
not so nmch j)olitical as geographical (scarcely in use
before the time of Alexander the Great), of a region in
Asia, lying between the rivers Euphrates and Tigris
(whence it took its name ; cf. Arrian. anab. Alex. 7, 7 ;
Tac. ann. 6, 37; D;"}riJ DiX, Aram of the two rivers. Gen.
xxiv. 10), bounded on the N. by the range of Taurus
and on the S. by the Persian Gulf ; many Jews had
settled in it (Joseph, antt. 12, 3, 4) : Acts ii. 9 ; vii. 2.
[Cf. Socin in Encycl. Brit. ed. 9 s. v. ; Rawlinson, He-
rodotus, vol. i. Essay ix.] *
μί'σ-οϊ, -ij, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], middle, (Lat. medius,
-a, -um) ; 1. as an adjective : μ(σης νυκτός, at mid-
night, Mt. XXV. 6 ; μέσης ημέρας. Acts xxvi. 13 (acc. to
Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 53, 54, 465, the better writ, said μι-
σόν ημέρας, μισούσα ήμίρα, μεσημβρία) ; w. gen. : [e'lta-
θητο ό ΐίίτρος μίσος αυτών, l.k. xxii. 55 (R G L iv /ΐί'σω)] ;
μίσος υμών ΐστηκι [al. στήκ(ΐ], stands in the midst of
you, Jn. i. 2i;, ( Plat, de rep. 1 p. 330 b. ; polit. p. 303 a.) ;
('σχίσβη μίσον, (the veil) was rent in the midst, Lk. xxiii.
45 [W. 131 (124) note]; ί\άκησ€ μίσος. Acts i. 18;
((σταύρωσαν) μίσον τόχ Ίησοΰν, Jn. .xi.x. 18. 2. the
neut. TO μίσον or (without the art. in adverb, phrases,
as δια μίσου, iv μίσω, cf. W. 1 23 (1 1 7) ; [cf. B. § 1 25, 6])
μίσον is used as a substantive; Sept. for Ijin (constr.
state ^in), and i'^p.; the midst: άνά μίσον (see ανά, 1
[and added note below]) ; Sia μίσου (Tiro't), through the
midst (.\m. v. 1 7; Jer. xliv. (xxxvii.) 4) : αυτών, through
the midst of them, Lk. iv. 30; .In. viii. 59 [Rec] ; Σαμα•
ριίας, Lk. xvii. 11 [R G, but LTTrWH διά μίσον (see
δια, Β. I.) ; others take the phrase here in the sense of
beticeen (Xen. an. 1, 4, 4; Aristot. de anim. 2, 11 vol.
i. p. 423', 12; see L. and S. s. v. IIL 1 d.); cf. Meyer
ed. Weiss in loc. and added note below] ; tls τό μίσον,
into the midst, i. e., acc. to the context, either the mid-
dle of a room or the midst of those assembled in it:
Mk. iii. 3; xiv. GO Rec; Lk. iv. 35; v. 19; vi. 8; Jn.
XX. 19, 26; n'y μίσον (cf. Germ, miltenhin), Mk. xiv. 60
GLTTr WII; ίν τώ μίσω, in the middle of the apart-
ment or before the guests, Mt. xiv. 6 ; ev μίσω, in the
midst of the place spoken of. Jn. viii. 3, 9 ; in the middle
of the room, before all, .\cts iv. 7 ; w. gen. of place,
Rev. ii. 7 Rec. ; Lk. xxi. 21 ; (i. q. Germ, miltenauf) τηι
π\ατ(ίας, Rev. xxii. 2 [but see below] ; add, Lk. xxii. 55';
Acts xvii. 22 ; riyr θαΧάσσης, in the midst (of the surface
of) tlie sea, Alk. vi. 47; w. gen. plur. in the midsl of,
amongst : w. gen. of things, JIt. x. 16 ; Lk. viii 7 ; x.3;
μΐο οτονχον
402
μρτα
Rev. i. 13 ; ii. 1 ; w. gen. of pers., Mt. xviii. 2 ; Mk. ix.
36; Lk. ii. 16; x.xii. 55" [here Τ Tr WII fieVof ; seel
above]; x.xiv. 36 ; Acts i. 15; ii. '.'2; xxvii. 21 ; Rev. v.
6 \^Ί (see below); vi. 6]; trop. ev μίσω αύτων (!μι, I am
present with them by my divine ])uwer, Mt. .xviii. 20 ;
w. gen. of a collective noun, Phil. ii. 15 11 [see 3 below] ;
Heb. ii. 12; ΛvheΓe association or intercourse is the topic,
equiv. to anion ff, in intercourse with : Lk. xxii. 27; 1 Th.
ii. 7. i;i the 7nitlst of, i. e. in the space within, τοΰ θρόνου
(which must be conceived of as ha^•ing a semicircular
shape) : Rev. iv. 6 ; v. 6 ['?] where ef. De ^Vette and
Bleek ; [but De AVette's note on v. 6 runs " A nd I saw
between the throne anil the four liviny creatures and the
elders (i. e. in the vacant space between the throne and
the living creatures [on one side] and elders [on the
other side], accordingly nearest the throne " etc.) ; ava
μίσον in vii. 1 7 also he interprets in the same way ; fur-
ther see xxii. 2; cf. Kliefolh, Com. vol. ii. p. 40. For €v
μίσω in this sense see Xen. an. 2, 2, 3 ; 2, 4, 17. 21 ;
5, 2, 27, etc.; llab. lii. 2; άνίί μίσον I'olyb. 5, 55, 7; often
in Aristot. (see Bonitz's index s. v. μίσος) ; Num. .\vi.
48 ; Deut. v. 5 ; Josh. xxii. 25 ; Judg. xv. 4 ; 1 K. v. 12 ;
Ezek. xlvii. 18; xlviii. 22; cf. Gen. i. 4; see Meyer on
1 Co. vi. 5 ; cf. ανά, 1]. κατά μέσον της νυκτός, about
midnight. Acts x.xvii. 27 [see κατά, II. 2]. (κ τοΰ μίσου,
like the Lat. e medio, i. e. out of the way, out of sii/ht :
αίρω Tt, to take out of the way, to abolish. Col. ii. 14
[Plut. de curiositate 9 ; Is. Ivii. 2] ; γίνομαι c'k μέσου, to
be taken out of the way, to disappear, 2 Th. ii. 7 ; w.
gen. of pers., fit μϊσου τίνων, from the society or company
of, out from amonij: Mt. xiii. 49; Acts -xvii. 33; ,\xiii. 10;
1 Co. V. 2; 2 Co. vi. 17, (Ex. xxxi. 14; Xum. xiv. 44
Alex.). 3. the neut. μέσον is used adverbially with
a gen., in the midst q/" any thing : ην μέσον της θαλάσσης,
]\lt. -xiv. 24 [otherwise Trtxt. WH txt. ; yet cf. W. § 54,
6] ([so Exod. xiv. 27]; Τίων yap μέσον (ivai της ^ϊωνίης,
Hdt. 7, 170) ; γενεάς σκο\ιάς, Phil. ii. 15 LTTrWH (της
ημέρας, the middle of the day, Sus. 7 Theodot.); cf. B.
123 (107 sq.), [cf. 319 (274) ; W. as above].*
μκσότοιχον, -ου, τό, (μέσος, and τοίχος the wall of a
house), a partition-wall : το μ. τοΰ φραγμού (i. e. τονφραγ-
μον TOf μεσάτοιχον όντα [Α. V. the middle wall of parti-
tion ; W. § 59, 8 a.]), Eph. ii. 14. (Only once besides,
and that too in the masc. : τον της ηδονής κ. αρετής μεσά-
τοιχον, Eratosth. ap. Athen. 7 p. 281 d.) *
μίσουράνημα, -ror, τό, (fr. μεσουρανέω; the sun is said
μεσουρανε'ιν ίο he in mid-heaven, when it has reached the
meridian), mid-heaven, the hif/hcst point in the heavens,
which the sun occupies at noon, where what is done can be
seen and heard by all: Rev. viii. 13 (cf. Dusterdieck ad
loc.) ; xiv. 6 ; xix. 1 7. (Manetho, Plut., Sext. Emp.) *
μεσόω; (μέσος); Ιο be in the miildle, he midway: της
ίορτης μεσοΰσης [where a few codd. μεσαζούσης (νυκτός
μεσαζ. Sap. .xviii. 14)], when it was the midst of the
feast, tlie feast half-spent, Jn. vii. 14 (μεσούσης της
νυκτός, Ex. xii. 29; Judith xii. 5; της ημέρας, Nell. viii. 3
[Aid., Compl.]; in Crk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down ; θέρους μεσοϋντος, Thuc. 6, 30).*
Μίσσ-ίοϊ, -ου [cf. Β. IS (16)], ό, Messiah; Chald.
Xn'iyo, Ilebr. ΓΓί^"?» i• q• Grk. χριστός, q. v. : Jn. i. 41
(42); iv. 2J. Cf. Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth.
Theol., 1876, p. 603; \_Lagarde, Psalt. vers. Memphit.,
1875, p. vii. On the general subject see esp. Abbot's
sup[>lement to art. Messiah in B. D. Am. ed. and ro£E.
added by Oretli (cf. Schaff-Herzog) in Herzog 2 s. v. to
Oehler's art.] *
μ€€Γτ05, η, -Of, fr. Horn. [i. e. Epigr.] down, Sept. for
ithOtfull; w. gen. of the thing: prop., Jn. xix. 29; xxi.
11; Jas. iii. 8; trop. in reference to persons, whose
minds are as it were filled with thoughts and emotions,
either good or bad, Mt. xxiii. 28; llo. i. 29; xv. 14;
2 Pet. ii. 14; Jas. iii. 17, (Prov. vi. 34).*
μεστόω,-ώ; (μεστός); Ιο f II, f 11 full: γΧευκους μεμεστίύ-
μένος. Acts ii. 13. (Soph., Plat., Aristot., al. ; 3 Mace.
V. 1, 10.)•
μ€τά, [on its neglect of elision before proper names be-
ginning with a vowel, and before sundry other words (at
least in Tdf.'s text) see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95 ; cf. WH. Intr.
p. 146''; λν. § 5, 1 a. ; B. p. 10], a preposition, akin to
μέσος (as Germ. WiiV to Mitte, mitten) and hence prop, in
the 7nidst of, amid, denoting association, union, accom-
paniment ; [but some recent etymologists doubt its kinship
to μέσος ; some connect it rather with άμα. Germ, sammt,
cf. Curtius § 212; Vanicekp. 972]. It takes the gen. and
ace. (in the Grk. poets also the dat.). [On the distinc-
tion between μετά and συν, see σύν, init.]
I. with the Genitive (Se]>t. for ns, Oy, "ΜΊΚ, etc.),
among, with, [cf. W. 376 (352) sq.] ; 1. amid,
among ; a. prop. : μετά των νεκρών, among the dead,
Lk. x.xiv. 5 (μετά νεκρών κείσομαι, Eur. Hec. 209 ; θάψετε
με μετάτών πατέρων μου, (xen. xli.x. 29 Sept.; μετά ζώντων
είναι, to be among the living. Soph. Phil. 1312) ; Xo-yt-
ζεηθαι μετά ανόμων, to be reckoned, numbered, among
transgressors, Mk. xv. 28 [G Τ WH om. Tr br. the vs.]
and Lk. xxii. 37, fr. Is. liii. 12 (where Sept. iv άνόμοις) ;
μετά τέύν θηρίων είναι, Mk. i. 13 ; γογγυζειν μετ άλΧηλων,
Jn. vi. 43 ; σκηνή τοΰ θεοΰ μετά τ. ανθρώπων. Rev. xxi. 3 ;
add, Mt. xxiv. 51 ; .xxvi. 58; Mk. xiv. 54; Lk. xii. 46 ; .In.
xviii. 5, 18; Acts i. 26, etc. b. trop.: μετά 5ιογμών,
amid persecutions, Mk. x. 30 (μετά κινδύνων, amid perils,
Thuc. 1, 18); ήάγάπη με& ημών, love among us, mutual
love, 1 Jn. iv. 17 [al. understand μεθ' ημών here of the
sphere or abode, and connect it with the verb; cf. De
\Vette,orHuther,orWestcott,inloc.]. Hence used 2.
of association and companionship, with (Lat.
cum; Germ, mil, often also bei); a. after verbs of
going, coming, departing, remaining, etc., w.
the gen. of the associate or companion: Mt. xx. 20;
xxvi. 36 ; Mk. i. 29 ; iii. 7 ; xi. 1 1 ; xiv. 1 7 ; Lk. vi. 1 7 :
xiv. 31 ; Jn. iii. 22; xi. 54; Gal. ii. 1 ; Jesus the Mes-
siah it is said will come hereafter μετά των αγγέλων, Mt.
xvi. 27; Mk. viii. 38; 1 Th. iii. 13 ; 2 Th. i. 7 ; on the
other hand, w. the gen. of the pers. to whom one joins
himself as a companion : Mt. v. 41 ; Mk. v. 24 ; Lk. ii.
51 ; Rev. .xxii. 1 2 ; nyyfXoi μετ αυτοϋ, Mt. xxv. 31 ; μττά
τίνος, contextually i. q. with one as leader, Mt. xxv. 10;
μ€τα
403
μετά
xxvi. 47; Mk. xiv. 43; Acts vii. 45. πιριηατ^Ίν μιτά
Ttvo9, to associate with one as his follower and adherent,
Jn. vi. 66 ; ■γίνομιιι μ. nvos, to come into fellowship and
intercourse with, become associated with, one: Jlk. xvi.
10; Acts vii. 38; ix. 19; xx. 18. παραΚαμβάνίΐν τίνα
μίβ" f'auToD, to take with or to one's self as an attend-
ant or companion: Mt. xii. 45; xviii. 16; Mk. .xiv. 33;
Syety, 2 Tim. iv. 1 1 ; ΐχαν μ(& ίαντοϋ, to have with one's
self: τινά, Jit. xv. 30; xxvi. 11; Mk. ii. 19; xiv. 7;
Jn. xii. 8; τί, Mk. viii. 14; 'Καμβάναν, Mt. xxv. 3; άκο-
"KovSeLv μίτά nvos, see άκολονθίω, 1 and 2, [cf. W. 23S
sq. (219)]. b. f'l/ai μ(τά nvos is used in various
senses, o. prop, of those who associate with one and
accompany him wherever he goes : in ivhich sense the
disciples of Jesus are said to be (or to have been) with
him, Mk. iii. 14; Mt. .xxvi. 69, 71 ; Lk. xxii. 59, cf. Mk.
v. 18 ; with άπ άρχη! added, Jn. xv. 27 ; of those who at
a particular time associate with one or accompany him
anywhere, Mt. v. 25 ; Jn. iii. 26 ; vs.. 40 ; xii. 1 7 ; xx.
24, 26 ; 2 Tim. iv. 11 ; sometimes the ptcp. ων, οντά, etc.,
must be added mentally : Mt. xxvi. 51 ; Mk. ix. 8 ; Jn.
xviii. 26 ; oi (όντα) μιτά nvos, his attendants or com-
panions, Mt. xii. 4 ; Mk. ii. 25 ; Lk. vi. 3 ; Acts xx. 34 ;
sc. ovTfs, Tit. iii. 15. Jesus says that he is or has been
with his disciples, .Jn. .\iii. 33 ; xiv. 9 ; and that, to ad-
vise and help them, .Jn. xvi. 4 ; Jit. xvii. 1 7, (Mk. ix.
19 and Lk. ix. 41 itpos vpas), even as one whom they could
be said to have with them, Mt. ix. lo ; Lk. v. 34 ; just
as he in turn desires that his disciples may liereafter be
with himself, Jn. .xvii. 24. ships also are said /o be tvith
one who is travelling by vessel, i. e. to attend him, Mk.
iv. 36. β. trop. the phrase [ίο he ivilh, see b.] is used
of God, if he is present to guide and help one : Jn. iii. 2;
viii. 29; xvi. 32; Acts vii. 9; x. 3S; 2Co. xiii. 11; Phil,
iv. 9 ; with dvai omitted, Jit. i. 23 : Lk. i. 28 ; Ro. xv.
33 ; here belongs οσα ΐττοΐησίν ό Ofoi μ€τ αυτών sc. ων, by
being present with them by his divine assistance [cf. W.
376 (353); Green p. 21fi"], Acts .xiv. 27; .\v. 4, [cf. h.
below] ; and conversely, πλήρωσαν μ( tlφpuσϋvηs μιτα
Toi προσώπου σου sc. όντα, i. e. being in thy presence [yet
cf. W. 376 (352) note], Acts ii. 23 fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 11 ;
η χ(\ρ κυρίου is used as a substitute for God himself (by
a Hebraism [see χίίρ, sub fin.]) in Lk. i. 66 ; Acts xi. 21 ;
of Christ, who is to be present with his followers by his
divine power and aid: Mt. x.xviii. 20; Acts xviii. 10, (fii-
vdv μίτά is used of the Holy Spirit as a perpetual helper,
Jn. xiv. 16 R G) ; at the close of the Epistles, the writers
pray that there may be with the readers (i. e. always
present to help them) — ό flfof, 2 Co. xiii. 11 ; — ό (tu/jios,
2 Th. iii. 16 ; 2 Tim. iv. 22 ; — ή χάρΐϊ τοϋ κ. Ίησοΰ Χρ.
(where Ιστω must be supplied [cf . W. § 64, 2 b. ; B. § 1 29,
22]), Ro. .\vi. 20, 24 [R G] ; 1 Co. xvi. 23 ; 2 Co. xiii. IS
(14); Gal.vi.lS; Phil.iv.23; lTh.v.28; 2Th.iii.l8;
Philem. 25 ; Rev. xxii. 21 ; — ή χάρκ simply, Eph. vi. 24 ;
Col. iv. 18; iTim. vi. 21 (22); Tit. iii. 15; lleb. xiii. 25;
2 Jn. 3 ; — ή αγάπη μου, 1 Co. xvi. 24 ; the same phrase
is used also of truth, compared to a guide, 2 Jn. 2. γ.
opp. to flvai κατά rivoc, to be with one i. e. on one's side:
Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23, (and often in class. Grk.); simi-
larly μίναν μ€τά nvos, to side with one steadfastly, 1 .In.
ii. 19. c. with the gen. of the person who is another's
associate either in acting or in his experiences ; so after
verbs of eating, drinking, supping, etc. : Mt. viii. 11 ; ix.
11; xxiv. 49; xxvi. 18, 23, 29; Mk. xiv. 18, 20; Lk. v.
30; vii. 36; .xxii. 11, 15; .x.xiv.30; Jn.xiii.18; Gal. ii.
12; Rev. iii. 20, etc. ; ypnyop('iv,yh.xxvi.3S,40; χαίρίΐν,
κ\αί€ίν, Ro. xii. 15; (ΰφραίνισθαι, Ro. .xv. 10; παροικΰν,
lleb. xi. 9; Sov\fi(iv, Gal. iv. 2.3; βασι\€ί(ΐν, Rev. xx. 4,
6 ; ζην, Lk. ii. 3i: ; άποθνησκιιν, .Jn. .xi. 16 ; βαΚΚισθαι tit
Tijf yiyi». Rev. xii. 9; (tXr/poi/opfiv, Gal. iv. 30 ; auvayfiv, Tilt.
xii. 30 ; Lk. xi. 23, and other exx. d. with a gen. of the
pers. with whom one (of two) does anything mutually
or by turns : so after anvaipfiv Xoyov, to make a reckon-
ing, settle accounts, Mt. xviii. 23 ; xxv. 19 ; συνάγίσθαι,
Mt. xxviii. 1 2 ; Jn. xviii. 2 ; συμβοϋ\ιον iroiflv, Mk. iii. 6 ;
XaXfif (see λαλί'ω, 5) ; σνλλαλίίι/, Mt. .xvii. 3 ; Acts xxv,
1 2 ; poixfitiv, Rev. ii. 22 ; μοΧϋνισθαι, Rev. xiv. 4 ; nof^
vdeiv. Rev. xvii. 2; xviii. 3, 9 ; μιρίζομαι, Lk. xii. 13;
after verbs of disputing, waging Λvar, contend-
ing at law: ποΚιμύν, Rev. ii. 16; xii. 7 (where Rec.
κατά); xiii. 4; xvii. 14, (so for "3 D;• DnSj, 1 S. xvii. 33;
I K. xii. 24, a usage foreign to the native Greeks, who
say πο\(μ(Ίν τικι, also πp6s τίνα, ιπί nva. Ιο wage war
ayauist one ; but TroXepeiv μ€τά tivos, to wage war with one
as an ally, in conjunction with, Thuc. 1, 18 ; Xen. Hell.
7,1,27; [cf. B. § 133, 8; W. § 28, 1; 214 (201) ; 406
(379) note]); πόλίμον ποίίίΐ'. Rev. xi. 7; xii. 17; xiii.
7; xix. 19, (so in Lat. bellare cum etc. Cic. Verr. 2,4,33;
helium gerere, Cic. de divinat. 1, 46) ; ζήτησκ iyivrro, Jn.
iii. 25 ; ζητΰν, Jn. .xvi. 19 ; κρίνισθαι, κρίματα ΐχ^ιν, 1 Co.
vi. 6 sq. ; after verbs and phrases which indicate mutual
inclinations and pursuits, the entering into agreement
or relations with, etc. ; as (Ιρηνήαν, ιΐρήνην btuiKtiv, Ro.
xii. 18; 2Tim. ii. 22; Heb. xii. 14; φι'λοΓ, Lk. xxxiii.
12 ; συμφωνΰν, Mt. XX. 2 ; μ(ρ'ί( μ(τά nvos, 2 Co. vi. 15 ;
ίχ(ΐν μίρο!, Jn. xiii. 8 ; airyKaTuflfcrif, 2 Co. vi. 16 ; (toii/e-
vtav (χ(ίν, 1 Jn. i. 3, 6 sq. ; αίτια (see the word, 3), Mt.
xix. 10. e. of divers other associations of persons
or tilings; — where the action or condition expressed
by the verb refers to persons or things besides those
specified by the dat. or ace. (somewhat rare in Grk. auth.,
as ίσχυν rt και κάλλο; μ€τά iytctas \αμβάΐ'(ΐν, Plat. rep. 9,
p. 591 b. [ef. W. § 47, h.]) : «Xf (Rec. ilpov) τέ πα.διΌι-
μίτά yiapias, Mt. ii. 11; άνταποδονναι . . . ίμΐν . . . μ(6'
ημών, 2 Th. i. 6 sq. ; after ίκδί'χίσ^ιιι, 1 Co. xvi. 1 1 ; after
verbs of sending, Mt. xxii. 16; 2Co. viii. 18. άγάττη μ(τα
πί(rτeωs, Lph. vi. 23 ; f'v πι'οτίΐ . . . μίτά σωφpoσϋvηs, I
Tim. ii. 15; η (Ισίβιια μιτίι airapKeias, 1 Tim. vi. 6; in
this way the term which follows is associated as sec-
ondary with its predecessor as primary ; but when και
stands between them they are co-ordinated. Col. i.
II ; 1 Tim. i. 14. of mingling one thing with another,
μίγννμί Tc μ(τά nvos (in class, auth. ri rtw [cf. B. § 133,
8]) : Lk. xiii. 1 ; pass. Mt. xxvii. 34. f. with the gen.
of mental feelings desires and emotions, of bodily move-
ments, and of other acts which are so to speak the at•
μ€Τα
404
μίταΒίΒωμ*
tcndants of what is done or occurs : so tliat in this way
the charac te rist ic of the action or occurrence is de-
scribed, — ivliicli in most cases can be expressed by a
cognate adverb or ])articiple [cf. W. u. s.] : μ(τα alSois,
1 Tim. ii. 9; Ilcb. xii. 28 [Rec.]; αίσχίνηί, \M. xiv. 9 ;
ησνχίϋί, 2 Th. iii. 12; χαραι, Mt. xiii. '20; Ml<. iv. 16;
1Λ. viii. 13; X. 17; xxiv. 52; Phil. ii. 2:i ; 1 Th. i. 6 ;
Heb. X. 34 ; ττρηθνμίαί^ Acts xvii. 1 1 ; φόβου κ. τρόμου^ -
Co. vii. 15; Eph. vi. .'>; Phil. ii. 12; φόβου κ- χαράς, ^It.
x.x viii. 8 ; πραυτητοί κ• φόβου, 1 Pet. iii. 1 G ( 1 ό) ; παρρησίας,
Acts ii. 29; iv. 2'J, 31 ; xxviii. 31 ; Heb. iv. Kj ; (Ιχαρί-
στΊας, Acts xxiv. 3 ; Pliil. iv. 6 ; 1 Tim. iv. 3 sq. ; άλη-
θινης KapSias, Heb. x. '22; ταπ(ΐνοφροσίνης κτΚ., Eph. iv.
2; Acts XX. 19; opyr)!, Mk. iii. .5; elvo'iai, Eph. vi. 7 ;
βίας. Acts v. 2(i ; xxiv. 7 Rec. ; μιτίι δακρύων, Λνΐΐΐι tears,
Mk.i.x. 24 [RGWH (rejected) mrg.]; Ileb.v. 7; xii. 17,
(Plat. apol. p. 34 c); (ίρήνης. Acts xv. 33 ; Ileb. xi. „1 ;
ϊτηθισίως των χάρων, 1 Tim. iv. 14 [W. u. s.] ; φωνής μ(γά-
λης, Lk. xvii. 15 ; νηστιιων. Acts .xiv. 23 ; όρκου ur ορκωμο-
σίας, Mt. xiv. 7; xxvi. 72; Ileb. vii. 21 ; iopifjou, .Vets
xxiv. 18; παρακλήσ€ως, 2 Co. viii. 4; παρατηρήσ(ως, Lk.
xvii. 20; σπουΒης, Wk. vi. 2.5; Lk. i. 39; ϋβρ(ως κ. ζημίας.
Acts xxvii. 10; φαντασίας, xxv. 23; άφροϊι, I-,k. ix. 39; to
this head may be referred ptrci κουστωδίας, posting the
guard, Mt. xxvii. 6i) [so W. (1. c.) et al. (cf. Meyer ad loc.) ;
others ' in company with the guard ' ; cf. Jas. Morison ad
loc; Green p. 218]. g. after verbs of coming, depart-
ing, sending, with gen. of the thing Λνϊΐΐι wliich one is fur-
nished or equipped : μιτα δόξης κ. δυνάμεως, Mt. xxiv. 30 ;
Mk. xiii. 26; Lk. xxi. 27; ίξουσίας κ- ΐπιτροπής. Acts
xxvi. 1 2 ; μαχαιρών κ. ξύλων. .Mt. xxvi. 47, 55 ; Mk. xiv.
43, 48; Lk. xxii. 5.'; φανών κ. όπλων. .In. xviii. 3; μ(τα
σάλπιγγος, Mt. xxiv. 31 [cf. B. § 132, 10]. where an in-
strumental dat. might have been used [cf. W. §31,8 d.],
(ΐίτά βραχίονας ΰψηλοϋ (ξάγίΐν τινά. Acts xiii. 1 7. h.
in imitation of the Hebr. ; ίλίος ποίίίκ pera τίνος, to show
mercy toward one, and μ(-^αλύν(ΐν ίλ. μ. τ. to magnify,
show great, mercy toward one : see το ίλιος, 1. To this
head many refer όσα ΐποίησιν ό θ(ας μ(Τ αυτιών, Acts .xiv.
27 ; XV. 4, but see above, 2 b. β.
H. with the Accusative [\V.§ 49, f.]; 1. prop.
inin the miildle of, into the midst of, amonq, after verbs of
coming, bringing, moving; so esp. in Horn. 2. it
denotes (fol I oivin </ accom/taniment), sequence, i. e. the
onlcr in which one thing follows another ; a. in order
of Place; afer, behind, (so fr. Ilom. down); once in
the N. T. [W. u. s.] : Heb. ix. 3 (Judith ii. 4). b. in
order of Time; afer (.Sept. for inx, "ΐ^ΠΝ, γρ•^, etc.) :
μίβ" ήμίρας ΐξ. after six days (had passed), Mt. xvii. 1 ;
Mk. ix. 2 ; add, Mt. xxvi. 2 ; Mk. xiv. 1 ; Lk. i. 24 ; ii.
4 6, etc., ci.Frilzsche, Com. on .Alt. p. 22 sq. ; fier' ού ττολ-
λάί ημίρας, Lk. χ v. 13 ; pfri'i τινας ήμ.. Acts .\ν. 36 ; xxiv.
24 ; οΰ μ(τα πολλας ταύτας ήμίρας, not long after these
days [A. V. not ma:ii/ dwjis hence']. Acts i. 5, cf. De Wette
ad loc. and W. 161 (152); [B. § 127, 4]; μ. τρ(Χς μήνας.
Acts xxviii. 11; μ. (τη τρία. Gal. i. 18, etc.; μ. χρόνον
πολύν, Mt. XXV. 19 ; μ. τοσούτον χρ. Heb. iv. 7. added to
the names of events or achievements, and of festivals : μ.
την μίτοιΚ(σίαν Βαβ. Jit. i. 12; μ. την βλίψιν, Mt. xxiv.
29 ; Mk. xiii. 24 ; add, Mt. xxvii. 53 ; Acts x. 37 ; xx. 29 ;
2 Pet. i. 15; μ. την άνάγνωσιν, Acts xiii. 15; μ. μίαν κ.
δίυτί'ραι/ νουθ<σίαν. Tit. iii. 10; μ. το πάσχα. Acts xii. 4
cf. XX. 6 ; with the names of persons or things having the
notion of time associated with them : μ(τά τούτον, αυτόν,
etc., Acts V. 37 ; vii. 5 ; xiii. 25 ; xix. 4 ; μ. τον νόμον,
Heb. vii. 28 ; μfτa το ψωμίον, after the morsel was taken,
Jn. xiii. 27 [cf. B. § 14 7, 2i;] ; foil, by the neut. demonstr.
pron. [cf. W. 540 (503)] : μ(τα τούτο. .In. ii. 1 2 ; .xi. 7, 1 1 ;
.\i.x. 28; Ileb. ix. 27; [Rev. vii. 1 LTTrWIl]; μιτά
TaOTa[cf.W.162(153)], .Mk..\vi. 12; Lk.v.27; x. 1 ; xiL
4 [\V. u. s.]; xvii. 8; xviii. 4; Acts vii. 7; xiii. 20; xv.
16; xviii. 1 ; .Jn. iii. 22 ; v. 1, 14 ; vi. 1 ; vii. 1 ; xiii. 7;
xix. 38 ; xxi. 1 ; Heb. iv. 8 ; 1 Pet. i. 11 ; Rev. i. 19 ; iv.
1; vii. 1 [Rec], 9 ; ix. 12; xv. 5; xviii. 1 ; xix. 1 ; xx.
3, and very often in Grk. writ, it stands before the neut.
of adjectives of quantity, measure, and time: μ(τ' οΰ πολύ,
not long after [R. V. tiflcr no long lime], Acts xxvii. 14 ;
μίτα μικρόν, shortly after [A. V. after a little tchile], Mt.
xxvi. 73 ; Mk. xiv. 70 ; μιτα βραχύ, Lk. xxii. 58 ; also be-
fore infinitives with the neut. art. (Lat. postquam with a
finite verb, [cf. B. § 140, 11 ; W. § 44, 6]) ; — the aorist
inf.: Mt. x.wi. 32; .Mk. i. 14; xiv. 28; xvi. 19; Lk. xiL
5 ; xxii. 20 [WH reject the pass.] ; Acts i. 3 ; vii. 4 ; κ.
41 ; XV. 13 ; xx. 1 ; 1 Co. xi. 25 ; Heb. x. 26.
III. In COMPOSITION, μιτά denotes 1. associa-
tion, fellowshi]), participation, icilh : as in μfτaSι8όvaι,
μ(ταλαμβήνίΐν. μ(τfχfιv, μίτοχή. 2. exchange, trans-
fer, transmutation; ( Lat. iran.v, Germ, um): μ(ταλλάσσω,
μ(ταμί\ομαι [Prof. Griuun prob. means here μιτανοίω ; see
3 and in μίταμίλομαι], μετοικίζω, μίταμορφόω, etc. 3.
after: μίταμίλομαι. Cf. Viger. ed. Ilerm. p. 639.
(Μτα-βαίνω ; f ut. μιταβησομαι ; 2 aor. μ(τίβην, impv.
itfT,;/3,;fli and (in Mt. xvii. 20 LTTr WII) μ^τάβα (see
αναβαίνω, init.) ; pf. μιταβίβηκα; fr. Horn, down ; to pan.i
orcrfmm one place to another, to remove, depart : foil, by
από Λν. a gen. of tlie place, Mt. viii. 34 ; t| οικίας fir οΐκίαρ
[cf. W. § 52, 4. 10], Lk. X. 7 ; ΐκ τον κόσμου προς τόν πα-
τίρα, Jn. xiii. 1 ; (ντ(ύθ(ν, .In. vii. 3 ; eKtWev. .Mt. xi. 1 ;
xii.9; XV.29; Actsxviii.7; ΐντ(ύθ(ν[Ι.ΎΎΓ\νΐΙ ίνθ(ν]
(κ(Ί (for fKc'iaf [cf. W. § 54, 7 ; B. 71 (62)]), of a thing,
i. q. to be rcmoced, Mt. xvii. 20 ; metaph. (κ τού θανάτου
ίΐς την ζωήν, Jn. ν. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 14.•
μ€τα-βάλλω : prop. Ιο lum round; Ιο turn about; pass,
and mid. to turn one'.t self about, change or transform one's
self; trop. to change one's opinion ; [.Mid., pres. ptcp.]
μtτaβaλλόμtvoι [(2 aor. ptcp. βαλόμινοι Tr \VH)] eXfyoi»,
they changed their minds and said. Acts .xxviii. 6 (^fro-
βαλόμ(νος Xi'yf is, having changed your mind you say. Plat.
Gorg. 481 e. ; in the same sense, Thuc, Xen., Dem.).*
μΐ(τ-άγΐιΐ ; pres. pass, μιτάγομαι ; Ιο transfer, lead over,
(Polyb., Diod., al.) ; hence univ. lo direct [A. V. to turn
about] : .las. iii. 3 sq.*
μ€τα-δ(8ωμι; 2 aor. subj. μιταδω, impv. 3 pers. sing.
/ifxaSOTo), inf. μ(ταδοϋναι : [fr. Theogn., Ildt. down] ; ta
share a thing with any one [see μ(τά. III. 1], lo impart:
absol. ό MfTaSiSour, he that imparteth of his substance, Ro.
ιθίσιν
405
μετάνοια
χϋ. 8, cf. Fritzsche ad loc. ; rtW, Eph. iv. 28; nvl τι (a
eonstr. somewhat rare in Grk. autli. [Hdt. 9, 34 etc.],
with whom μίταδ. τινί τιιόγ is more common ; cf. Mat-
thiae ii. p. 7;)S ; [W. § 30, 7 b. ; B. § 132, 8]), Ro. i. 11 ;
1 Th. ii. 8 ; the ace. evident from the preceding conte.xt,
Lk. iii. 11.*
μίτά-θίσΐϊ, -ίωί, ή, (μ(τατίβημΐ) ; 1. a transfer : from
one place to another (Diod. 1, 23); Ttwos (gen. of obj.),
the translation of a person to heaven, lleb. .\i. 5. 2.
ckaiiye (of things instituted or establislied, as 'κρωσΰνηι,
νόμου): Ileb. vii. 12; των σαΚενομίνων, Heb. .\ϋ. 27.
(Time. .5, 29 ; Aristot., Plut.) *
μ{Τ-αίρω : 1 aor. μ(τηρα ; 1. trans, to Γιβ up and
remiire from one place to another, to transfer, (Eur.,
Theophr., al.). 2. in the X. T. intrans. (cf. W. § 38,
1 ; [K. § 130, 4]) to gi) away, depart, (Gerra. anflireclien) :
(Kcieev, y\t. xiii. 53 (Gen. xii. 9 Aq.) ; foil, by από w. gen.
of jilace, ^It. xix. 1.*
μίτο-καλί'ω, -ώ : Mid., 1 aor. μ€Τ€κα\€σάμην ; 1 fut. μ€τα'
κάλίσομαι; to cull from one place to tinol/ier, to suiniiwn,
(Hos. xi. 1 sc}. ; Plat. Ax. fin.) ; mid. to call to one's self,
Insendfur: τινά, Acts vii. 14; x. 32; xx. 17; xxiv. 25.*
(«τα-κινί'ω, -ω : to more from a place, to more away :
Deut. xxxii. .".0; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down ; Pass. pres.
ptcp. μίτακινοίιμΐνος ; trop. από τηζ ΐΚπί^ος, from the hope
which one holds, on which one rests, Col. i. 23.*
μ€τα-λαμβάνω ; impf. μίτΐλάμβανον ; 2 aor. inf. μετο'
\αβ('ίν, ptcp. μ(τα\αβών\ [see μρτά. III. 1 ; fr. Pind. and
Hdt. down] ; to he or to he made a partaker : gen. of the
thing, 2 Tim. ii. 6; Heb. vi. 7; xii. 10; τροφής, to par-
take of, take [some] food. Acts ji. 46 ; .xxvii. 33 sq. [in
34 Rec. π/)οσλα/3ίΐι/] ; w. ace. of the thing, to get, find (a
whole) : κιηράυ. Acts xxiv. 2.Ϊ ; on the eonstr. w. gen. and
ace. see Kriiger § 47, 15 ; cf. W. § 30, 8.*
(ΐ£τάληψΐ5 (LTTrWH -Χημψΐ! [see M, /i]), -icur, ή,
(μεταλαμβάνω), a taking, parlicipiilion, (Plat., Plut., al.) :
of the use of food, els μίτάλ. to be taken or received, 1
Tim. iv. 3.•
μκτ-αλλάβ-σ-ω : 1 aor. μ€τή\\αξα ; fr. Hdt. down ; [not
in Sept., yet nine times in 2 Mace; also 1 Esdr. i. 31];
to exchange, change, [cf. μιτά, ΠΙ. 2] : τ'ί ev τινι, one thing
with (for) another (on this eonstr. see άΚλάσσω), Ro. j.
25 ; Ti CIS Tt, one thing into another, Ro. i. 26.*
(κτα-μΑομαι ; impf. μ(τ(μ(Κ6μην ; Pass., 1 aor. μ(τ€μ(-
"Κηθην; ι int. μ(ταμ€\ηθησομαι; (f Γ. μί'λομαί, mid. of μίλω) ;
fr. Thuc down: Sept. for DP:; a depon. pass.; prop, it
is a care to one aferwards [see μ(τά. III. 2], i. e. it repents
one ; to repent one's self [in R. V. uniformly with this
reflexive rendering (e.xc. 2 Co. vii. 8, where rei/rei)]:
Mt. xxi. 29, 32; xxvii. 3; 2 Co. vii. 8; Heb. vii. 21 fr.
Ps. cix. (ex.) 4.•
[Svs. μ€ταμ€λομαι. μΐτανοίω: The distinctions SO
often laid down between these words, to the effect that the
former expresses a n.erely emotional chansre the latter a
change of choice, the former has reference to particu-
lars the latter to the entire life, the former signities
nothing but regret even though amounting to remorse,
the latter that reversal of moral purpose known as repent-
ance — seem hardly to be sustained by usage. But that
μίτανοίίΰ is the fuller antl nobler term, e.xjtressive of moral
action and issues, is indicated not only by its derivation, but
by the greater frequency of its use, by the fact that it is often
employed in tlie impv. (μtτoμf'λoμαl never), and by its con-
struction with αττά, iK, (cf. ή eis flfiv μίτάνοιο. Acts xx. 21).
Cf. Trench, NT. Syn. § Ixix. ; esp. O'ulalcer, Adv. Post, xxix ]
μετα-μορψόω, -ω : Pass., pres. μΐταμυρφοΰμαι ; 1 aor.
μίτεμορφώθη ; tn change into another form [cf. μ(τά, HI-
2], to transfigure, transform : μιτιμορφώθη, of Christ, his
appearance was changed [A. V. lie was transfigured^, i. 2.
was resplendent with a divine brightness, Mt. xvii. 2 ; Mk.
ix. 2 (for which I.,k. ix. 29 gives iyevcTo το tlhos του προσ-
ώπου αίτοϋ tT(pov) ; of Christians : την αΰτην (Ικύνα μ(τα-
μορφοΰμίθα, we are transformed into the same image (of
consummate excellence that shines in Christ), reproduce
the same image, 2 Co. iii. 18; on the simple ace. after
verbs of motion, change, division, cf. Bos, Ellips. (ed.
Schaefer), p. 679s(iq.; Matthiae § 4<i9 ; [Jelf § 636 obs.
2; cf. B. 190 (164); 396 (339); W. § 32, 5]; used of
the change of moral character for the better, Ro. xii. 2 ;
with which compare Sen. epp. 6 init., intelligo non emen-
dari me tantum, sed trunsfigurari. ([Diod. 4, 81 ; Plut.
de adulat. et amic. 7; al.]; T'hilo, vit. Moys. i. § 10 sub
fin. ; leg. ad Gaium § 13 ; Athcn. X p. 334 c. ; Ael. v. h.
I. 1 ; Lcian. as. 11.) [Sv.\. cf. μιτασχηματίζω.']*
μ€τα-νθ€ω, -ώ ; fut. μίτανοτισω : 1 aor. μΐτίνόησα ; f r.
[Antipho], Xen. down ; Sept. several times for Dnj ; to
chanqe one's ynind, i. e. to repent (to feel sorry that one
has done this or that, .Jon. iii. 9), of having offended
so^e one, Lk. xvii. 3 sq. ; with tVt τι« added (dat. of
the wrong, Hebr. hx'j Am. vii. 3 ; Joel ii. 13 ; Jon. iii.
10; iv. 2), of (on account of) something (so Lat. me
paenitet alicuius rei), 2 Co. xii. 21 ; used esp. of those
who, conscious of their sins and with manifest tokens
of sorrow, are intent on obtaining God's pardon ; to
repent (Lat. paenitentiam agere): μετανοώ ev σάκκκ^
ral σποδώ, clothed in sackcloth and besprinkled with
ashes, Mt. xi. 21 ; Lk. x. 13. to change one's mind for
the belter, heartily to amend with abhorrence of one's past
sins: Mt. iii. 2; iv. 17; Mk. i. 15, (cf. Mt. iii. 6 ΐξομο-
\ογοΰμ(νυι Tas αμαρτία! αυτών; ib. 8 and Lk. id. 8 καρπού{
αξίου! της uernvoias. i. e. conduct worthy of a heart
changed and abhorring sin) ; [Mt. xi. 20; Mk. vi. 12];
Lk. xiii. 3, 5; χ v. 7, 10; xvi. 30; Acts ii. 38; iii. 19 ;
xvii. 30 ; Rev. ii. 5, 16 ; iii. 3, 19 ; on the phrase μΐτανο(1»
fls TO κήρυγμα Tivos, Mt. .xii. 41 and Lk. xi. 32, see ti's, B.
II. 2 d. ; [W. 397 (371)]. Since το μιτανοΰν expresses
mental direction, the termini from which and to which
may be specified : άπά της κακίας, to withdraw or turn
one's soul from, etc. [cf. W. 622 (577); esp. B. 322
(277)], Acts viii. 22; «κ τίνος. Rev. ii. 21 sq.; Lx. 20 sq.;
xvi. 11 (see €K, L 6; [cf. B. 327 (281), and W. u. s.]);
μΐτανοίΐν κ. (πιστρέφ(ΐν fVi τον θ(6ν. Acts xxvi. 20 ; folL
by an inf. indicating purpose [\V. 318 (298)], Rev. xvi.
9. [Syn. see μ(ταμ(\ημαι.] *
μίτάνοια, -oi'as, ή, {μετανοίω), a change of mind: as it
appears in one who repents of a purpose he has formed
or of something he has done, Heb. xii. 17 on which see
ευρίσκω. 3 ([Thuc. 3, 36, 3] ; Polyb. 4, 66, 7 ; Plut. Peric
μεταξύ
406
/ιιετβχα»
C. 10; mor. p. 26 a.; τηι ά&(\φοκτονία{ μιτάνοια, Joseph,
antt. 13, 11, 3); esp. the cliaii<;e of mind of those who
have begun to ablior their errors and misdeeds, and
have determined to enter upon a better course of life,
80 that it embraces both a recognition of sin and sorrow
for it and hearty amendment, tlie tokens and effects of
which are good deeds (Lact. 6, 24, 6 would have it ren-
dered in Lat. by resipiscenlia), [A. V. repentance'] : l\It.
iii. 8, 11; Lk. iii. 8, [10 Lchm.] ; xv. 7; xxiv. 47; Acts
xxvi. 20 ; βάπτισμα μετανοίας, a baptism binding its sub-
jects to repentance [W. § 30, 2 β.], ]\Ik. i. 4 ; Lk. iii.
3; Acts xiii. 24; xix. 4; [17 ds (τοκ) 6(av μ(τ. Acts xx.
21, see μιτανοίω, fin.] ; διδύΐΌ» τινί μ(τύνοίαν, to give one
the ability to repent, or to cause Iiim to repent. Acts v.
31; xi. 18; 2Tim. ii. 25; τιχά ci'r ^frai'oiai' icnXeip, Lk. v.
32, and Rec. in Mt. ix. 13; Mk. ii. 17; άγαν, Uo. ii. 4
(Joseph, antt. 4, 6, 10 fin.) ; άνακηινίζιιν, Ileb. vi. 6 ; χω-
ρησαι fi'f μ(τάν. to come to the point of repenting, or be
brought to repentance, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [but see χωρίω, 1 fin.] ;
μ(τ. άπο ν(κρων ίργων, that change of mind by which we
turn from, desist from, etc. Heb. vi. 1 [B. 322 (277)];
used merely of the improved spiritual state re-
sulting from deep sorrow for sin, 2 Co. vii. 9 sq. (.Sir.
xliv. 16 ; Sap. xi. 24 (23) ; xii. 10, 19 ; Or. Man. 7 sq. [(cf.
Sept. ed. Tdf. Prolog, p. Ixii. sq.)] ; Pliilo, quod det. pot.
insid. § 26 init.; Antnnin. s, 10 ; [Cebes, tab. 10 fin.].) •
μ.(ταξν, (fr. μfτά and ξύν, i. q. συν), adv. ; 1. he-
tiveen (in the midxl, Horn. Jl. 1,156; Sap. xviii. 23), a.
adverbially of time, eV τω μιταξΰ. meanwhile, in the mean
time, cf. ev τω καθ(ξήί (see καθ(ξηί) : Jn. iv. 31 (Xen.
symp. 1, 14; with χρόνω added, Plat. rep. 5 p. 4.50 c. ;
Joseph, antt. 2, 7, 1 ; 6 μεταξύ χρόνος, Hdian. 3, S, 20
[lOed. Bekk.; cf. W. 592 sq. (551)]). b. like a prep.
w. a gen. [cf. W. 54, 6] : of place [fr. Hdt. 1, 6 down],
5It. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 51; xvi. 26 ; Acts .xii. 6; of par-
ties, Mt. xviii. 15; Acts xv. 9; Ro. ii. 15. 2. ace.
to a someivhat rare usage of later Grk. (Joseph, c. A p.
1, 21, 2 [(yet see Muller ad loc.)]; b. j. 5, 4, 2; Plut.
inst. Lac. 42; de discr. amici et adul. c. 22; Theoph.
ad Autol. 1, 8 and Otto in loc. ; [Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 2.
3 ; Barn. ep. 13, 5]), αββν, αβεηναΓάβ : τό μεταξύ σάββ.
the ne.xt (following) sabbath, Acts xiii. 42 [(where see
Meyer)].•
Ιίίτα.-^ίμ.•πω : 1 aor. pass. ptcp. μ(ταιτ(μφθ(1ς•. Mid.,
pres. ptcp. μΕταπί/ιττό/ΐΕΐΌί ; \ &or. μ(τ(πιμ^\τάμην; 1.
to send one αβετ another [see μ(τά, IIL 3 ; cf. Herm.
ad Vig. p. 639]. 2. like our to send after i. q. to
send for : μ(ταπίμή>θ(1ί, sent for. Acts x. 29*. Mid. to
send afer for one's self, rnwii to be sent for: Acts x. 5,
29'; xi. 13; [xx. 1 TTrWH]; xxiv. 24, 26; foU. by eir,
w. an ace. of place, Acts X. 22; xxv. 3. (Gen. xxvii. 45;
Num. xxiii. 7 ; 2 Mace. xv. 31 ; 4 Mace. xii. 3, 6 ; in prof,
auth. fr. Hdt. down.) *
|Μτα-<Γτρ^ψ<ι> : 1 aor. inf. μιταστρίψαι ; Pass., 2 aor.
impv. 3 pers. sing, μιταστραφήτω ; 2 f ut. μ(ταστραφησο-
μαι ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for 'IJijri ; to turn about, turn
around, [cf. μ(τά, III. 2] : τι t's η [to turn one thing
into another], pass., Acts ii. 20 (fr. Joel ii. 31); Jas.
iv. 9 [cf. B. 52 (46) ; (WII txt. μίτατρ/π-ω, q. v.)] ; i. q.
to pervert, corrupt, τι (Sir. xi. .il ; Aristot. rhet. 1, 16,
24 [cf. 30 and 3, 11, 6]) : Gal. i. 7.*
μ€τα.^τχηματΓξω : fut. μfτaσχημaτίσω [cf. B. 37 (32)];
1 aor. μ(τ( σχημάτισα'. Mid. pres. μετασχηματίζομαι', to
chan(/c the f (jure of, to transform, [see μετά, IIL 2J : τί,
Phil. iii. 21 [see below]; mid. foil, by tif τίνα, to trans-
form one's self into some one, to assume one's appearance,
2 Co. xi. 13 sq. ; foil, by ω: tis, so as to have the appear-
ance of someone, 2 Co. xi. 15; μιτασχηματίζω τι ds nva,
to shape one's discourse so as to transfer to one's self
what holds true of the whole class to which one belongs,
i. e. so as to illustrate by ivhat one says of himself what
holds true of all : 1 Co. iv. 6, where the meaning is, ' by
what I have said of myself and Apollos, I have shown
what liolds true of all Christian teachers.' (4 Mace.
ix. 22; Plat. legg. 10 p. 903 e. ; [Aristot. de caelo 3, 1
p. 298S 31, etc.]; Joseph, antt. 7, 10, 5; 8, 11, 1; Plut.
Ages. 14; def. orac. c. 30; [Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 11];
Sext. Empir. 10, p. 688 ed. Fabric, [p. 542, 23 ed.
Bekk.].)•
[Syx. μεταμορφόω, μετασχηματίζω: (cf. Phil. iii. 21)
" μετασχημ. wuiilil Iiere refer to the transient condition /iom
wliiuli, μεταμορφ. to the permanent state to which, the change
takes place. Abp. Trench [N. T. Syn. § Ixx.], however, sup-
poses that μετασχημ. is here preferred to μεταμορφ. as ex-
pressing ' transition but uo absolute solution of continuity ',
the spiritual body beiug developed from the natural, as the
butterfly from the caterpillar" (Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 'De-
tached Note ' p. 131). See μορψίι, fin.]
μ€τα-τ£θημι ; 1 aor. μετίθηκα ; pres. mid. μετατίθεμαι ; 1
aor. pass, μετετέθην ; to transpose (two things, one of \vhich
is put in place of the other, [see μ€τά, III. 2]) ; i. e. 1.
to transfer: τινά foil, by els w. ace. of place, pass., Acts
vii. 16; without mention of the place, it being well
known to the readers, Heb. xi. 5 (Gen. v. 24 ; Sir.
xliv. 16, cf. Sap. iv. 10). 2. to change (Hdt. 5, 68);
pass, of an office the mode of conferring which is
changed, Heb. vii. 12; ri eit τ(, to turn one thing into
another (τίνα (is τττηνην φΰσιν, Anth. 11, 367, 2) ; figura-
ti\ely, την . . ■ χάριν ft'r άσέλγειαν, to pervert the grace
of God to license, i. e. to seek from the grace of (iod
an argument in defence of licentiousness, Jude 4 [cf.
Huther in loc.]. 3. pass, or [more commonly] mid.,
to transfer one's self or suffer one's self to be transferred,
i. e. to go or pass over: από τιι/οί fts τί, to fall away or
desert from one person or thing to another. Gal. i. 6 (cf.
2 Mace. vii. 24; Polyb. 5, 111, 8; 26, 2, 6 ; Diod. 11,
4; [6 μεταθεμένοι, turncoat, Diog. Laert. 7, 166 cf. 37;
Athen. 7, 281 d.]).*
[μ6τα-τρ€'•π•ω : 2 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. μ(τατρα•
πήτω; Ιο turn about, fig. to transmute: Jas. iv. 9 WH txt.
From Hom. down; but "seems not to have been used
in Attic" (L. and S.).•]
μ«τ-ίΐΓ€ΐτο, adv., fr. Hom. down, aferwards, after that:
Heb. xii. 17. (Judith ix. 5 ; 3 Mace. iii. 24.) •
μίτ-ί'χω; 2 aor. μετέσχον; pf. μετεσχηκα', lO he 0Ϊ
become partaker ; to partake : της ίλπίδος αυτόν, of the
thing hoped for, 1 Co. ix. 10 Rec, but GLTTrWH
μ,ΐΤίωρίζω
407
μετριω<;
have rightly restored tV Λπίδι τοϋ μίτίχίΐν, in hope of
partaking (of the harvest) ; with a gen. of the thing
added, 1 Co. ix. 12; x. 21 ; Heb. ii. 14; φυλή: irepat, to
belong to another tribe, be of another tribe, Heb. vii.
13; sc. τήί τροφής, to partake of, eat, 1 Co. x. 30; ya-
λακτοΓ, to partake of, feed on, milk, Ileb. v. 13; ex τοϋ
(voi άρτου sc. Ti or nvoi (see ex, I. 2 b.), 1 Co. x. 17; cf.
B. § 132,8; [W. §§ 28, 1; 30,8 a.].•
μετ-εωρ(ζω: [pres. impv. pass. 2 pers. plur. μίτίωρί-
ζ(σθΐ; (see below)]; (fr. μετέωρος in mid-air, hiyli;
raised on high ; metaph. a. elated with hope, Diod. 13,
46 ; hfly, proud, Polyb. 3, 82, 2; 16, 21, 2 ; Sept. Is. v.
15. b. wavering in mind, unsteady, doubtful, in sus-
pense: Polyb. 24, 10, 11 ; Joseph, antt. 8, 8, 2; b. j. 4, 2,
5 ; Cic. ad Att. 5, 1 1, 5 ; 15, 14 ; hence μιτ^ωρίζω) ; 1.
prop, to raise on high (as ναΐιν ds το ntXayot, to put a,
ship [out to sea] up upon the deep, Lat. propellere in
allum, Philostr. v. Ap. G, 12, 3 [cf. Thuc. 8, 16, 2] ; το
ϊρυμα, to raise fortifications, Thuc. 4, 90) : ίαυτόν, of
birds, Ael. h. a. 11, 33; pass, μιτιωριζίσθαι η καπνίιν ή
κονιορτόν, Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 5 ; of the wind, άνΐμος ζηροί
μ(τ(ωρισθ('ί!, Arstph. nub. 404 ; and many other ex.x.
also in prof. auth. ; in Sept. cf. Mic. iv. 1 ; Ezek. .\. 16 ;
Obad. 4. 2. metaph. a. to lift up one's soul,
raise his spirits; to buoy up with hope; to inflate with
pride : Polyb. 26, 5, 4 ; 24, 3, 6 etc. ; joined with φυσαν,
Dem. p. 169, 23; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 35; [quis rer. div.
her. §§ 14, 54 ; cong. erud. grat. § 23] ; pass, to be elated ;
to take on airs, be puffed up with pride : Arstph. av. 1 44 7 ;
often in Polyb. ; Diod. 11, 32, 41 ; 16, 18 etc. ; Ps. cxxx.
(cxxxi.) 1 ; 2 Mace. vii. 34 ; with the addition of την
Siavoiav, V. 1 7. Hence μή μ(τ(α>ρΙζ(σθ(, Lk. -xii. 29, some
(following the Vulg. nolite in sublime tolli) think should
be interpreted, do not exalt yourselves, do not seek great
things, {Luth. fahret nicht hoch her) ; but this explanation
does not suit the preceding context. b. by a meta-
phor taken from ships that are tossed about on the deep
by winds and waves, to cause one to waver or fluctuate
in mind, Polyb. 5, 70, 10 ; to agitate or harass with cares;
to render anxious : Philo de monarch. § 6 ; Schol. ad
Soph. Oed. Tyr. 914 ; ad Eur. Or. 1537 ; hence Lk. xii.
29 agreeably to its connection is best explained, neither
be ye anxious, or and waver not between hope and fear
[A. V. neither be ye of doubtful mind (with mrg. Or, live
not in careful suspense)]. Kuinoel on Lk. 1. c. discusses
the word at length ; and numerous exx. from Philo are
given in Loesner, Observv. p. 115 sqq.*
IxcToiKecrta, -as, ή, (for the better form μιτοίκησίϊ, fr.
μ(τοικίω [cf. W. 24 (23)]), a removal from one abode to
another, esp. a forced removal: with the addition Ba-
βνΚωνο! (on this gen. cf. W. § 30, 2 a.) said of the Baby-
lonian exile, Jit. i. 11 sq. 17. (Sept. for vhl i. e. mi-
gration, esp. into captivity ; of the Babylonian exile, 2
K. xxiv. 16 ; 1 Chr. v. 22 ; Ezek. xii. II; for niSj, Obad.
20; Nah. iii. 10. Elsewh. only in Anthol. 7, 731, 6.) *
μίτ-οικίζω: fut. (Attic) μ(τοικιώ [cf. B. 37 (32); W.
§ 13, 1 c] ; 1 aor. μ^τώκισα ; to transfer settlers ; to cause
to remove into another land [see μ^τά, III. 2] : τινά foU. by
els w. ace. of place. Acts vii. 4 ; tneKtwa w. gen. of place
(Amos v. 27), Acts vii. 43. (Thuc. 1,12; Arstph., Aris-
tot., Philo, [Joseph, c. Ap. I, 19, 3], Plut., Ael.; Sept.
several times for nSjn.) '
μ£τοχή, -ης, ή, (μίτίχω), (Vulg. participatio) ; a sharing,
communion, fellowship : 2 Co. vi. 14. (Ps. cxxi. (cx-xii.)
3 ; Hdt., Anthol., Plut., al.) *
μ«'τοχθ5, -OK, (μ(Τ(^ω); 1. sharing in, partaking
of w. gen. of the thing [W. § 30, 8 a.] ; Heb. iii. 1 ; vi. 4 ;
xii. 8 ; Toil Χριστού, of his mind, and of the salvation pro-
cured by him, Ileb. iii. 14 ; cf. Bleek ad loc. 2. a
partner (in a work, office, dignity) : Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps.
xliv. (xlv.) 8) ; Lk. v. 7. (Hdt., Eur., Plat., Dem., al.) *
μ€τρ€ω, -ω ; 1 aor. ίμΐτρησα ; 1 fut. pass, μςτρηθήσομαι ;
{μίτρον) ; fr. Horn. Od. 3, 1 79 down ; Sept. several times
for Tio ; to measure; i. e. 1. to measure out or
otf, a. prop, any space or distance with a measurer's
reed or rule: τόκ ι/αόι», τήΐ'ανλήΐ', etc.. Rev. xi. 2; xxi. 15,
17 ; with τω κάΚάμω added. Rev. xxi. 16 ; ev αΙτω, i. e.
τώ καλά/χω. Rev. xi. 1. b. mulaph. to judge according
to any rule or standard, to estimate ; iv ω μίτρω μ(τρ(Ίτ(,
by what standard ye measure (others) [but the instru-
mental iv seems to point to a measure of capacity; cf.
W. 38s (363) ; B. § 133, 19. On the proverb see fur-
ther below], Mt. vii. 2 ; Mk. iv. 24 ; pass, to be judged,
estimated, ibid. ; μίτρίϊν ίαυτον iv ίαυτω, to measure one's
self by one's self, to derive from one's self the standard
by wlaich one estimates one's self, 2 Co. x. 12 [cf. W. § 31,
8 fin.]. 2. to measure to, mete out to, i. e. to give
by measure : in the proverb τω αντω μίτρω ω μξτρίΐτΐ
[or (so L Τ Tr WII) ω μίτρω μιτρ-Ί, i. e., dropping the
fig., ' in proportion to your own beneficence,' Lk. vi. 38.
[CoMP. : άντι-μίτρ£ω.~\ *
μ€τρητή5 [on tlie accent see Chandler § 51 sq.], -oC, ό,
(μ(τρίω), prop, a measurer, the name of a utensil known
as an amjjhora, which is a .species of measure used for
liquids and containing 72 sextarii or ξ/στοι [i. e. some-
what less than nine Eng. gallons ; see B. D. s. v. Weights
and Measures, sub fin. (p. 3507 Am. ed.)] (Hebr. ri3, 2
Chr. iv. 5): Jn. ii. 6. (Polyb. 2, 15, 1; Dem. p. 1045,
7 ; Aristot. h. a. 8, 9.) *
μ€τριοΐΓαθ€ω, -ώ ; ([cf. W. 101 (95)]; fr. μιτριοηαθής,
adhering to the true measure in one's passions or emo-
tions; (φη (viz. Aristotle) τον σοφον μή fivai μςν απαθή,
μετριοπαθή he, Diog. Laert. 5, 31 ; μετριοπάθεια, modera-
tion in passions or emotions, esp. anger and grief, is opp.
to the απάθεια of the Stoics ; fr. μέτριος and πάθος) ; 1. q.
μετρίως or κατά το μετρην πάσχω, to be affected moderately
or in due measure ; to preserve moderation in the passions,
esp. in anger or grief, (Philo de Abrah. § 44 ; de Josepho
§ 5 ; [Joseph, antt. 12, 3, 2; al.]) ; hence of one who is
not unduly disturbed by the errors, faults, sins, of others,
but bears with them gently ; like other verbs of emotion
(cf. Kriiger § 48, 8), witli adat. of the pers. toward whom
the feeling is exercised : Heb. v. 2 ; cf. the full discus-
sion by Bleek ad loc*
μ€τρ(ω$, (μέτριος), adv., [fr. Hdt. down] ; a. in
due measure. b. moderately: ου μετρίως, [Α. V.
μέτρο
408
#Μ|
swt a Utile], exceedingly, (Plut. Flam. 9, et al.), Acts
XX. 12.•
μ(τρον, -«υ, Τ($, Sept. chiefly for πηο, [cf. μίτΐ}ρ], mca.'i-
ure; \. aninflrwnenlformeasurinij; a. a vessel/or
receiving and delermininfj the quanlilij of thiny.<, whether
ilnj or Ιίψιιή: in proverb, disc, μβτρ(Ίν μίτρω, of the
measure of the benefits whicli oneeoiifiTson others, Lk. vi.
38 ; μίτβον ιτ€πι*σμίνον και σ€σηλ€νμ(ΐ>ον, fig. eiiuiv. to most
abundant requital, ibid. ; πληρούν τό pcrpov των πατίρων.
Ιο add what is wanting in order to fill u|) tlieir aneestors'
preseribed number of crimes, Mt. x.siii. 32 [see πληρόω,
Ί a.]; «V μί'τρου [A. V. hij mtitsure; see eV, V. 3J i. e.
sjiaritiijly, .In. iii. 34 (also tv μίτρω, Ezek. iv. 11). b.
a graduated ata [} f()rmeaxurinij,mcusuriti<j-rod : Rev..\.\i.
15 ; with ανθρώπου added [ifia/i's measure'], such as men
use, Rev. xxi. 1 7 ; bence in proverb, disc, the rule or stand-
ard of jwlgmeiU : Mt. vii. 2 ; Mk. iv. 24. 2. deter-
mined extent, portion measured off, measure or limit : with
a gen. of the thing received, Ro. xii. 3 ; 2 Co. x. 13;
[Eph. iv. 7] ; iv μίτρω, in proportion to the measure [cf.
W. § 4H, a. 3 b. and see {vipyfia; al. in due measure],
Epli. iv. 16; the rei^uired measure, the ilue,fil, measure :
T^t ^Xticiat, the proper i. e. ripe, full age [see ηΚικΙα, 1 c]
(of a man), Eph. iv. l.i (ηϋης, Ilom. II. 11, 22.5 ; Od. 11,
317; Solon 5, 52 [Poet. Min. Gr. (ed. Gaisford) iii. 1 35]).*
μ'τωίΓον, -ου, τ6, (μίτά, ώψ 'eye'), fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for ΠΪΟ, [Ut. the space heiioeen the eyes] the fore-
head: Rev. vii. 3; ix. 4 ; xiii. 16; xiv. 1, 9 ; xvii. 5 ; xx.
4 ; xxii. 4.*
μ«'χρι and μίχρίί (the latter never stands in the N. T.
before a consonant, but μΐχρι stands also before a vowel
in Lk. xvi. 16 Τ Tr WII ; see άχρι, init. ; and on the dis-
tinction betw. άχρι and μίχρι see άχρι, fin.), a particle
indicating the terminus ad quem: as far as, tiulo,
until; 1. it has the force of a ρ r e ρ ο s i t i ο η with
the gen. [(so even in Ilom.) W. § 54, 6], and is used a.
of time : Mt xui. 30 ROT WH mrg. ; Lk. xvi. 16 Τ Tr
WH ; Acts XX. 7 ; 1 Tim. vi. 14 ; Ileb. ix. 10; μ. θανά-
του, Pliil. ii. 30 ; μίχρι της σημΐρον sc. ημέρας, Mt. xi. 23 ;
xxviii. 15; μίχρι τίΚου!, Ileb. iii. 6 [here WlITrmrg.
br. the clause], 1 4 ; από . . . μίχρι, Acts χ. 30 ; Ro. v. ] 4 ;
fif'xpii of (see Sxpt, 1 d. ; [B. 230 (198) sq. ; AV. 29(i
(278 scj.)]) foil, by an aor. subjunc. having the force of a
fut. pf. in Lat. : Mk.xiii.30; Gab iv. 19 TTrWH. b.
of place : άπο . . μίχρι, Ro. χ v. 19. c. of measure
and degree : μ(χρι θανάτ•ιυ, so that he did not shrink even
from death, Phil. ii. 8 (2 Mace. xiii. 14 ; Plat, de rep. p.
361 c. fin.; μ. φόνου, Clem. hom. 1, 11); κακοπαθύν μ.
i(aui>v, 2 Tim. ii. 9 ; μίχρκ αίματος άντικ.ατίστητ(, Heb.
xii. 4. 2. with the force of a con j unction: tul,
foil, by the subj., Eph. iv. 13.*
μή, Sept. for "^x^ γν., |'X, a particle of negation, which
differs from ού (which is always an adverb) in that οϋ
denies the thing itself (or to speak technically, denies
simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively),
but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing
according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, pref-
erence, of some one (hence, as we say technically, in-
directly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction
holds also of the compounds oiSett, μηίίίς, ούκί'τι, μηκίτι,
etc. But μή is either an a d ν c r b of negation, nnt ( Lat.
nou, lie) ; or a conjunction, that . . . not, lest, (Lat.
ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. nuin) [i. e.
(generally) implying aneg. ans. ; in indir. quest. ifAe/Aer
not (suggesting ap])reliension)]. Cf. Ilenn. ad \'ig. § 267
p. 802 .S(iq. ; Mattld.ie § 608; Bttm. Gram. § 148 (cf.
Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqcp) ; Kiihner ii.
§§ 512 s(i. p. 739 s(iq. ; [.lelf §§ 738 sq.p] ; Rost § 135;
Win. §§ 55, 5G ; F. Frauke, De particulis negantibus.
(two Comm.) Rintel. 1832 sq. ; G. F. Gayler, Particu-
larum Graeci .«ermonis negativarum aceurata disputatio,
etc. Tub. 1H36 ; E. Priifer, De μή et ού iiarticulis epi-
tome. A'ratisl. 183i; ; [Gildersleeve in Am. Jour, of PhiloL
vol. i. no. i. p. 4.") scjq. ; Jebb in A'incent and Dickson's
Ildbk. to Mod. Grk. ed. 2, App. §§ 82 sqq.].
I. As a negative adverb; 1. univ. : ω μη πά-
pfOTi ταϋτα, where μή is used because reference is made
merely to the thought that there are those who lack these
things, 2 Pet. i. 9 ; ti μή ίώρακ€ν, which (in my opinion)
he hath not seen (because they are not visible). Col. ii. 18
[but here GT Tr AVll om.Lbr. μή; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad
loc. ; W. 480s(j. (448)] ; η8η κίκριται, ότι μή π(πίστ(υκ(ν, be-
cause he hath not heliered, represented by the wi-iter as the
thought τον κρίνοντος, <In. iii. 18 (differently in 1 Jn. v. 10,
where the faith denied is considered as something positive
and actual) ; & μή Sei, in the judgment of the writer. Tit.
i. 11. 2. in deliberative (juestions with the
subjunctive: δώμιν ή μή &ώμ(ν, Mk. xii. 14 (πάτίμον
βίαυ φωμ(ν ή μή φωμ(ν (Ιναι, Xen. mem. 1, 2, 45); μή
ποιήσωμ(ν τα κακά (for so it would have run had there
been no anaeoluthon; but Paul by the statement Λvhich
he interposes is drawn away from the construction with
which he began, and proceeds on ποιήσα>μ(ν κτλ., so that
these words depend on \iyfiv in the intervening statement
[W. 628(583); B. § 141, 3]), Ro. iii. 8. 3. in con-
ditional and final sentences (cf. W. § 55, 2; [B. 344
(296) S(iq.]) : iav μή, unless, if not, see e.xx. in (άν, I. 3 c.
€01» etc. KQt μή, Mk. xii. 19; ϊάν etc. St μή, .las. ii. 14 ; iav
τις "δη ■ • ■ μή ττρος θάνατον, 1 .In. v. 16; el μή, ti be μή,
el he μή-γ'. etc., see el. III. p. 171 sq. To this head be-
long the formulae that have &v or eav as a modifier (W.
§ 55, 3 e. ; [B. § 148, 4]), ος, ί'κττις, όσοι Sv or ϊανμή : iMt.
X. 14; xi. 6; Mk. vi. 11; x. 15; Lk. vii. 23 ; i.x. 5; xviii.
17; Rev.xiii.l5; Srai/etc.ical μή, Mk. xi. 23 ; Lk.x.lO;
6ς &v . . . μή iVl Topveta, Mt. xix. 9 G Τ Tr AVII txt. ; of
the same sort is παν πvevμa, ο μή όμολογίΐ, 1 •Τη. iv. 3. 'να
μΐ7,Μί.νϋ. 1; χνϋ. 27; Mk. iii. 9; Ro. xi. 25 ; G.-il.v.l7;
vi. 12, etc.; "iva . . . κα\ μή, ]\It. v. 29 sq.; Mk. iv. 12; .In.
vi. 50; xi. 50; 2 Co. iv. 7, etc. ; iva . . . μή, 2 Co. xiii. 10;
Xva 6 . . . μή, Jn. xii. 46 ; Iva (weakened ; see ίνα, II. 2)
μή : after διηστβλλομαι [here L WH txt. ίττιτιμαω], Mt
xvi. 20 ; TO θ/λημά eoTiv, "va μή, Jn. vi. 39 ; οϋτωι etc. ίνα
ό . . . μή, •Τη. iii. 16; παρακαΧω, Ίνα . . . και μή, 1 Co. i. 10;
δπωίμή. Mt. vi. 18; Acts xx. 16; iCo. i. 29; όπως oi . . ■
μτ), Lk. xvi. 26. 4. joined with the Infi nit ive(W.
§55, 4 f.; [B. §§140, 16; 148,6; cf. ProL Gildersleeve
μη
409
μη
U. S. ρ. 48sq.]); a. after verbsof saying, declaring,
denying, commanding, etc.: άποκριθήι/αι, Lk. xx. 7;
Ψ' αύτω κΐχρηματισμίνον μη iSeif, ίΙι^ιΙ If' slioulil not .«fc, Lk.
ii. 2fi ; χρηματισθέν7ΐςμηάνηκάμ^αί,ΛΙ\.•'ύ.\'Ζ'^ ωμοσ( (αυ-
Tolf) μη ίΙσ(\(νσ(σ6αι, llcb. iii. 18; after λί'γω, Mt. v. .54,
39; xxii.2.!; Mkxii.lS; Acts.\xi.4; xxiii. 8; Ro. ii. 22;
xii. 3 ; κηρύσσω, Ro. ii. 21 ; -γράφω, 1 Co. v. 9, 11 ; παραγ-
γί'λλω, Acts i. 4 ; iv.l8; v.2>S,40; 1 Co. vii. 10 sq. ; 1 Tim.
i. 3; vi. 17; παρακαλώ, Acts ix. 38 RG; xix. 31; 2Co. vi.
1 ; αιτούμαι, Kpli. iii. 13 ; διαμαρτύρομαι, 2 Tim. ii. 14 ; fv\o-
μαι, 2 Co. xiii. 7 ; παραιτούμαι, lleb. xii. 19[here WH txt.
GUI. μή ; cf. W. and R. as below] ; άξιω. Acts xv. 38 ; ί'πι-
/3οώ [L Τ Tr AVU ^οώ]. Acts xxv. 24 ; άντι\(γω{({. W. §(;5,
2/3.; [R. § 148, 13]), Lk. XX. 27 [TrWIl L mrg. Xf'yu>] ;
απιψνοϋμαι {([. v.), Lk. xxii. 34 ; also after verbs of d e c i d-
i π g : Lk. xxi. 14 ; κρίνω. Acts xv. 19 ; κρίνω τοΰτο, τ6 μή,
Ro. xiv. 13 ; 2 Co. ii. 1 ; θίΧω, Ro. xiii. 3 ; after verbs of
hindering, avoiding, etc.: ΐγκόπτω (Rec. άνακότττω)
τ.νά μή, Gal. V. 7 (cf. W. [and B. u. s.; also § 140, 16]) ;
ToC μή, thai . . . not, (Lat. ne), after κατίχω, Lk. iv. 42;
κρατούμαι, Lk. x.xiv. 16; κωλύω, Acts x. 47; καταπαύω,
Acts xiv. 18 ; η-αι'ω, 1 Pet. iii. 10 ; ϋποστίλΧομαι, Ads xx.
20, 27 ; προσίχω μή, Mt. vi. 1 ; hut τού μή is ailded also
to other expressions in the sense of Lat. ui m-, l/ml . . . mil :
Ro. vii. 3 ; οφθαλμοί τηύ μή βλίπΐΐν, 2ίτα του μή UKOVfiv,
Ro. xi. 8, 10. After clauses denoting necessity, ad-
vantage, power, fitness, μή is used with an inf.
specifying the tiling [B. § 148, 6], καΧόυ ίση μή, 1 Co. vii.
1 ; Gal.iv. 18 ; foil, by τι) μή, Ro. xiv. 21 ; αλυγυν μή. Acts
,χχν. 27; KpeiTTov ήν. 2 Pet. ii. 21 ; (ξουσία τοΟ [LTTr
WII cm. Tiw] μή ϊμ-γάζ(σθαι, a right to forbear working,
1 Co. i.x. 6 ; δίϊ, Acts xxvii. 21 ; ov δϋναμηι μή, ί Cfmnot
hul. Acts iv. 20 ; afivScKTOv crm τού μή, Lk. χ vii. 1 [cf.
avevbfKTos}. b. μή with an inf. which has the article
follows a preposition, to indicate the purpose or end : as,
τΓρόίτόμή, ίΛα/ . . . no/, 2 Co. iii. 13; iTh. ii. 9; 2 Th. iii.
8 ; (IS TO μή (Lat. in id . . ne), to the end (or intent) that
. . . not, Acts vii. 19 ; 1 Co. x. 6 ; 2 Co. iv. 4 ; foil, by an
ace. and inf., 2 Th. ii. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 7 ; διά τόμι;, because
. . . not, Mt. xiii. 5 sq. ; Mk. iv. 5 sq. ; Lk. viii. 6 ; Jas.
iv. 2 [cf. W. 482 (449)], (2 Mace. iv. 19). c. in other
expressions where an infin. ivith the art. is used substan-
tivelv : τω μή (dat. of the cause or reason [cf. W. § 44,
5; B. 264 (227)]), 2 Co. ii. 13 (12) ; in the aceus., το μή :
Ro. xiv. 1 3 ; 1 Co. iv. 6 [R G] ; 2 Co. ii. 1 ; x. 2 ; 1 Th. iv.
6, cf. 3. d. in sentences expressing consequence
or result: ώστε μή, χο thai . . . not, Mt. viii. 28 ; Mk. iii.
20 ; 1 Co. i. 7 ; 2 Co. iii. 7 ; 1 Th. i. 8. 5. μή is
joined with a Participle (W. § 55, 5 g. ; [B. § 148, 7;
see C. J. A'^aughan's Com. on Ro. ii. 14]), a. in sen-
tences expressing a command, exhortation, purpose, etc. :
Lk. iii. 1 1 ; Jn. ix. 39 ; Acts xv. 38 ; xx. 29 ; Ro. viii. 4 ; xiv.
3 ; 2 Co. xii. 21 ; Eph. v. 27 ; Phil. i. 28 ; ii. 4 [here Rec.
impv.]; iTh.iv. 5; 2Th. i. 8; iPet. ii. 16; Heb. vi. 1 ;
xiii. 1 7, etc. b. in general sentences, in Λvhich no defi-
nite person is meant but it is merely assumed that there
is some one of the character denoted by the participle : as
ό μή t>v /itT i'/ioi, he that i.< not on mi/ side, whoever he is,
or if there is any such person, Mt. xii. 30 ; Lk. xi. 23 ;
ό 8e μή ιτιστ(νων, whoever believeth not, Jn. iii. 18 ; o'l μή
όμολογοϋντα Ίησούν \p. if any do not confess, or belong
to the class that do not confess, 2 Jn. 7 ; add, Mt. x. 28 ;
Lk. vi. 49 ; xii. 21,47 sq. ; xxii. 36 ; Jn. v. 23 ; x. 1 ; xii.
48; xiv. 24; Ro. iv.5; v. 14; x.20; iCo. vii. 38; xi. 22;
2 Th. i. 8 ; Jas. ii. 1 3 ; 1 Jn. ii. 4, etc. ; παΓ ό μή. Mt. vii.
26; (ττάΐ'δ/ΐ'δροΐ'/χί, Mt. iii. 10; vii. 19); 1 Jn. iii. 10; 2
Jn. 9 ; 2 Th. ii. 12 [here L mrg. Τ Tr WII mrg. άπαντα
o'l μή etc.] ; μακάριο! ό μή, Jn. XX. 29 ; Ro. .xiv. 22. o.
where, indeed, a definite person or thing is referred to, but
in such a way that his (its) quality or action (indicated by
theparticiple)isdenied in thethought or judgment either
of the ivriter or of some other person [cf. esp. W. 484
(451)] : τά μήοντα, that are deemed as nothing, 1 Co. i. 28;
ωί μή λαβών, as if thou hadst not received, 1 Co. iv. 7 ; as
μή ίρχομίνου μον, as though I were not coming, 1 Co. iv.
18; ώί μή £φίκνοΰμ€νοι (is ύμά?, 2 Co. .\. 14; add, 1 Co.
vii. 29. fjSei . . . Tivfs (Ίσ'ινοΙ μή πιστεΰοντί! (ace. to the
opinion of 6 «δώί), Jn. vi. 64 ; the same holds true of
Acts XX. 29 ; τα μή βλ(πόμ(να (in the opinion of oi μή
σκοπούντα), 2 Co. iv. IS (on the other hand, in Heb. .xi.
1. ού βλεπόμ. actually invisible) ; τον μή γνόντα αμαρτία»
vnep ήμων ήμαρτίαν (ποΙησ(ν (μή γνόντα is said agreeably
to the judgment of ό ποιήσα!), 2 Co. v. 21 (τόκ oi γνόντα
would be equiv. to άγΐΌοΟιτα). in predictions, ivhere it
expresses the opinion of those who predict: ϊση σιωπών
κα\ μή δννάμ€νθ5 \α\ήσαι, Lk. i. 20; ίση τνφΧο! μή βλΐπων,
.\cts .xiii. 11. where the writer or speaker does not re-
gard the thing itself so much as the thought of the thing,
which he ivishes to remove from the mind of the reader
or hearer {Klntz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 666), — to be rendered
without etc. (Germ, nhne zu with inf.) [cf. B. § 148, 7 b.]:
(ξήλθι μή iπιστάμfvns, πού ίρχιται, Ileb. xi. 8 ; add, Mt.
-xxii. 12 ; Lk. xiii. 11 [(but cf. B. § 148, 7 c.)] ; Acts v.
7; XX. 22; Heb. ix. 9. where the participles have a con-
ditional, causal, or concessive force, and maybe
resolved into clauses introduced by if, on condition that,
etc. : θιρίσομίν μή (κλνόμ(νοι. Gal. vi. 9 ; μή ovTOs νόμου,
Ro. v. l.'i ; alfhouf/h: νόμον μή t\ovTfS, Ro. ii. 14; μή Siv
avTos ϋπο νήμον, 1 Co. ix. 20 [Rec. om.] ; we have both
the negative particles in ov αίκ fl8oT€s [or (ivith LTTr
WII) ϊδόι^ίΓ] ■ ■ ■ μή ύρώvτes, whom being ignorant of
(in person) [or (ace. to crit. txt.) not having seen] . . .
although now not seeing, 1 Pet. i. 8; al.so with the article ;
τά μή νόμον ίχοντα (Germ, die doch nicht haben, they that
have not, etc.), Ro. ii. 14 ; ό δί μή γevtάKoγoύμcvos, but he,
althout/h not etc. Heb. vii. G ; — or .lince, because, inasmuch
as: μή άσθινήσαί τή πίστ« ού [but G LTTr^^ Η om. οϋ;
cf. Β. § 148, 11] κατ(νόησ( το (αυτού σώμα ν(ν(κρωμ. (ουκ
άσθ(νήσας would l)e c(|uiv. to δυι/ητόί, slmir/), Ro. iv. 19 ;
πώs OVTOS γράμματα o'Se μή μίμαθηκω! ; since he has not
learned [W. 483 (450)], Jn. vii. 15; add, Mt. xviii. 25:
xxii. 25, 29; Lk. ii. 45; vii. 30; .xi. 24; .xii. 47; x.xiv.
23 ; Acts ix. 26 ; xvii. 6 ; xxi. 34 ; xxvii. 7 ; 2 Co. iii. 14 ;
v. 19; also with the article : i μή γινωσκων τον νόμον, since
it knoweth not the law, Jn. vii. 49 : add, Jude 5. d.
where (with the ptcp.) it can be resolved by (being) such
Μ
■410
μη
(a person) as not, of such a sort as not : μή ζητών τ6 (μαυτον
σνμφορον, 1 Co. χ. 33 ; add, Acts ix. 9 ; Gal. iv. 8. neiit.
plur. as subst. : τα μη όντα, Ro. iv. 17; τα μη σηΚ(υόμ(να,
Ileb. xii. "27 ; τα μη hiovra, 1 Tim. v. 13 ; τα μη καθήκοντα,
Ro. i. 28; 2 Mace. vi. 4, (on the other hand, in τά οίκ
ανήκοντα, Eph. v. 4 [wlierc L Τ Tr WII a ουκ ανήκίν~[, the
oLK coalesces with ανήκοντα and forms a single idea, un-
seemly, unlawful). 6. in independent sentences of
forbidding, deliorting, admonishing, desiring, etc., μή is
Prohibitive (cf. \V. § oG, 1), Lat. ne, noi; a. with
the 1 pers. plur. of the subjunc. present : μη ■γινώμ(θα
Κ€νή8οξοι, Gal. V. 26 ; add. Gal. vi. 9 ; 1 Th. v. 6 ; 1 Jn.
iii. 1» ; aorist : Jn. xix. 24 ; before the word depending
on the e.vhortation, 1 Co. v. 8. b. Avith a present im-
perative, generallv where one is bidden to cease from
something already begun, or repeated, or continued : Mt.
vi. 16, 19; vii. 1 ; xix. 6; Mk. ix. 39; χ iii. 11 ; Lk.vi. 30;
vii. 6, 13 ; viii. 49, 52 ; x. 4, 7, 20 ; Jn. ii. 16 ; v. 28, 45 ;
vi.43; vii. 24; xiv.1,27; xLx. 21 ; Actsx.l5; xi.9; xx.
10; Ro. vi. 12; xi. 18, 20; xii. 2 [here LTrmrg. AVU
mrg. give the inf.], 14; 1 Co. vi. 9 ; νϋ.5; 2Co. vi. 14, 17;
Gal. V. 1 ; vi. 7 ; Eph. iv. 30 ; Col. iii. 9, 19, 21 ; 1 Th. v.
19,2 Th. iii. 15 ; 1 Tim. iv. 14 ; v. 16, 19 ; Heb. .xii. 5 ;
xiii. 2; Jas. i. 7, 16; 1 Pet. iv. 12, 15 sq. ; Ijn. ii. 15; iii.
13 ; Rev. v. 5, and very often. c. with the third per-
son (nowhere in the N. T. with the second) of the aorist
impv. where the prohibition relates to something not to
be begun, and where things about to be done are forbid-
den : μή ίπιστρ(^άτω, Mt. xxiv. 18 ; Lk. xvii. Zl; μή κα-
ταβάτω, Mk. xiii. 15, and LTTrWII in Mt. xxiv. 17
(where R G badly καταβαινίτω) ; μή γνώτω, Mt. vi. 3 ;
•γ(νίσθω [but TTr W U γινίσθω^, Lk. xxii. 42; cf. Xen.
Cyr. 7, 5, 73 ; Aeschyl. Sept. c. Theb. 1036. d. as in
the more elegant Grk. writ, where future things are for-
bidden (cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 807), with the 2 pers. of the
aorist subjunctive: μή ίόξητ€, Mt. iii. 9 ; v. 17 ; μή φα-
βηθηί, Mt. i. 20 ; X. 26, 31 [here L Τ Tr WH pres. impv.
φοβύσθ(^, (alternating with the impv. pres. φοβύσθί in
Mt. X. 28 [G L Τ Tr]) ; μή άψτι. Col. ii. 21 ; μή άποστρα-
φής, Mt. v. 42 ; μή κτίισησθί, Mt. χ. 9 ; add, Mt. vi. 2, 7,
13,31; Mk. V. 7; x. 19; Lk. vi. 29 ; viii. 28 ; xiv.8; Jn.
iii. 7; Acts vii. 60; Ro. x. 6 ; iCo. xvi. 11; 2 Co. xi. 16;
2 Th. ii. 3, — [in the last three e.xx. with the third pers.,
contrary to W. 502 (4G7)] ; 1 Tim. v. 1 ; 2 Tim. i. 8 ; Rev.
vi. 6; X. Ί(μή γρανίτης, for ?μ(\\ον γράφίΐν precedes ; but
in Jn. xix. 21 μή -^ράφί is used, because I'ilate had already
written) ; Rev. xi. 2 ; xxii. 10, and very often. We have
the impv. pres. and the aor. subj . together in Lk. x. 4 ; Acts
xviii. 9. e. with the 2 pers. of the present subjunc. :
μή σκληρϋνητ€, Ileb. iii. 8, 15, (a rare constr. though not
wholly unknown to Grk. writ. [" more than doubtful " (L.
and S. s. v. A. 1.2)] ; see Delitzschon the latter passage,
and Schaefer ad Greg. Corinth, p. 1005 sq. ; \^Soph. Lex.
Β.ν.μή. Others regard the above exx. as subjunc. aorist;
cf.2K.ii.lO; Is.Ixiii.17; Jer.xvii.23; xlx. 15,etc.]). f.
with the optative, in wishes : in that freq. formula μή
ytvoiTo, far be it ! see γίνομαι, 2 a.; μή alrrois \αγισ6(ίη, 2
Tim. iv. 16 (Job xxvii. 5).
n. As a Conjunction, Lat. ne with the subjunc-
tive; 1. our that, that not or lest, (cf. W. § 56, 2;
[B. § 139, 48sq. ; Goodwin § 46]); after verbs of fear-
ing, caution, etc. a. with the subjunc. present,
where one fears lest something now exists and at the
same time indicates that he is ignorant whether it is so
or not (^Hermann on Soph. Aj. 272): eituTKonoivTts, μή
. . . ϊνοχλΐ], Ileb. xii. 15. b. with the subjunc. aorist,
of things which may occur immediately or very soon : pre-
ceded by an aor., iiXaSijftis (LT Tr WII φηβηθιΊς) μή 8uf
σττασ^ν. Acts xxiii. 10; by a pres. : φοβοΟ/ιαι, Acts xxvii.
17 ; β\ίπω, Mt. xxiv. 4; Mk. xiii. 5; Lk. xxi. 8; Acts
xiii. 40; 1 Co. x. 12; Gal. v. 15 ; Ileb. xii. 25; σκοπίω
(μαυτόν. Gal. vi. 1 [B. 243 (209) would refer this to 2 b.
below ; cf. (ioodwin p. 66] ; όράω, Mt. xviii. 10; 1 Th. v.
1 5 ; elliptically, όρα μή (sc. τοϋτο ηοιήση! [cf . W. § 64, 7 a.;
B. 395 (338)]): Rev. .xi.x. 10; xxii. 9. c. with the
indicative fut. (as being akin to the subjunc. [cf. gram,
reff. at the beginning]) : φυβυνμαι, μή ταπανώσα μ€ 6 θ€Ος
μου, 2 Co. xii. 20 sq. [L txt. Τ Tr] ; add, Col. ii. 8. 2.
in order that not (Lat. eo consilio ne) ; a. with the op-
tative : των στρατιωτών βηνΚή iyivfTO, iva τοΐ/ς ^ζσμώτας
άποκτίίνωσι, μή τα . . . Βιαφΰγοι, Acts χχνϋ. 42 Rec. (the
more elegant Greek to express the thought and purpose
of the soldiers ; but the best codd. read διαφνγη, which
G LTTrWII have adopted). b. with the subjunc-
tive aor. : preceded by the pres., Mk. xiii. 36 ; 2 Co. viii.
20 [cf. Goodwin § 43 Rem.] ; xii. 6 ; Col. ii. 4 (where
L Τ Tr Wll 'va μηΒύς for R G μή Tts [ — an oversight ;
in R G as well as in the recent crit. edd. the purpose is
expressed by an inserted ίνα]).
III. As an Interrogative particle it is used when
a negative answer is expected, Lat. num ; (W. § 57, 3 b. ;
[B. 248 (213)]); 1. in a direct question : Mt. vii.
9 sq. ; ix. 15; Mk. ii. 19; Lk. xvii. 9 ; Jn. iii. 4 ; iv. 12,
33; vi. 67; vii. 35, 51 sq. ; Acts vii. 28; Ro. iii. 3; ix.
20; lCo.i.l3; ix.Ssq.; x.22; Jas.ii.[l WH], 14; ui.l2,
etc. ; μη yap (see yap, L), Jn. vii. il; μή ουκ (where οίκ be-
longs to the verb, and μή is interrogative), Ro. x. 18 sq. ;
1 Co. ix. 4 sq. ; μή yap . . . οϋ, 1 Co. xi. 22. 2. in an
indirect question with the indicative (Germ, oh elwa,
ob wohl, whether possiht I/, whether perchance), where in ad-
monishing another we intimate that possibly the case is
as we fear [cf. B. § 139, 57 ; W. § 41 b. 4 a.] : Lk. xi.
35, cf. B. 243 (209) ; Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 334 sq. ; {Rid•
dell, Plato's Apol. Digest of Idioms §§ 137, 138].
rv. The particles ol μή in combination augment the
force of the negation, and signify not at all, in no wise,
by no means; (this formula arose from the fuller ex-
pressions oi beivov or hsos or φόβος, μή, wliich are still
found sometimes in Grk. auth., cf. Kiihner ii. § 516, 9
p. 773 sq. ; but so far was this origin of the phrase lost
sight of that οϋ μή is used even of things not at all to be
feared, but rather to be desired ; so in the N. T. in Mt.
V. 18, 26; xviii. 3; Lk. xviii. 17; xxii. 16 ; Jn.iv.48;xx.
25 ; 1 Th. V. 3); cf. Matthiae § 517; Kiihner ii. p. 775;
Bnhdy. p. 402 sqq. ; [Gildersleeve in the Amer. Jour, of
Philol. for 1882, p. 202 sq. ; Goodwin § 89] ; W. § 56, S;
αηγε
411
μηΒεϊ<!
fB. 211 (183) sq.]. 1. with the fut. indicative: oi
μη ΐσταί σοι τούτο, this shall never be unto thee, Mt. xvi.
22; add, Mt. xxvi. 35 ; Lk. xxii. 34 RGL; x. 19 (where
R" G Wli mrg. άΒικηστ]) : Jn. vi. 35 [here LTrmrg. ττίΐ-
νάσ(ΐ, and L Τ Tr WH διψήσα}; xiii. 38 R G; Mk. xiii.
31 TTrWH; Heb. x. 17 LTTrWH; in many pas-
sages enumerated by VV. 506 (472) ; [cf. B. 212 (183)],
the manuscripts vary between the indie, fut. and the
subjunc. aor. In a question, οϋ μη ηοιήσα την (κδίκησιν ;
Lk. xviii. 7 RG. 2. with the aor. subjunctive (the
use of which in the N. T. scarcely differs from that of
the fut.; cf. \V. § 56, 3; [B. § 139, 7]), in confident as-
sertions: — subjunc. of the 1 aor., Mt. xxiv. 2; Mk.
xiii. 2; Lk. vi. 37; Jn. xiii. 8; Heb. viii. 12; 1 Pet. ii. 6 ;
Rev. ii. 11; vii. 16; xviii. 21, 22, 23; xxi. 27,etc.; 1 aor.
mid. subj., Jn. viii. 52 (where Rec. γήσιται) ; thus these
X. T. exx. prove that Dawes made a great mistake in
denying (in his Miscellanea Critica, p. 221 sqq. [ed. (Th.
Kidd) 2, p. 408 sq.]) that the first aor. subjunc. is used
after oi μή; [cf. Goodwin in Transactions of Am. Philol.
Assoc, for 1869-70, pp. 46-55 ; L. and S. s. v. oi μη, 1.
lb.; B. § 139, 8]; — subjunc. of 2 aor., Mt. v. 18, 20,
26 ; Mk. X. 15 ; Lk. i. 15 ; .\ii. 59 ; Jn. x. 28 ; xi. 26 ; 1 Co.
viii. 13; Heb. xiii. 5; Rev. iii. 3 [RGLTrmrg. WHtxt.],
and often, in questions : with 1 aor., Lk. xviii. 7 L Τ
Tr λνΐΐ ; Rev. xv. 4 (in L Τ Tr AVH with the subj. aor.
and the fut.) ; with 2 aor., Jn. xviii. 11. in declarations
introduced by on: with 1 aor., 1 Th. iv. 15; with 2 aor.,
Mt. xxiv. 34 [here R G Τ om. δτι] ; xxvi. 29 [L Τ Tr AVH
cm. oTt]; Lk. xiii. 35 [TWHom. Lbr. or»]; .xxii. 16;
Jn. xi. 56 ; in relative clauses : with 1 aor., Mt. x\i. 28 ;
Mk. Lx. 1 ; Acts xiii. 41; Ro. iv. 8; with 2 aor., Lk. xviii.
30. 3. with the present subjunc. (as sometimes in
Grk. auth., cf. W. 507 (4 73)) : oiSe oi μή σ( (-γκαταΧί'ητω,
Heb. xiii. 5 Tdf. (for iyicaTaKina) Rec. et al.), [cf. B. 213
(184)]• ^ _
μήγί, ci Se μήγ€. see ye, 3 d.
μη$αμώ$, (adv. fr. μη8αμάί, and this fr. μη8(, and άμό;
some one [perh. aUied w. 5μα, q. v.]), [fr. Aeschyl., Hdt.
down], III/ no mea'ts, not at all : sc. τοΟτο yevoiTo, in re-
plies after an impv. [A. V. Not sol, Acts x. 14 ; xi. 8.
(Sept. for nrSn.) *
μ.η8ί', (^17, q. v., and if), [fr. Horn, down], a negative
disjunctive conjunction; [cf. W. § 55, 6; B. § 149,
13] ; 1. used in continuing a negation or prohibi-
tion, but not, and not, neither; preceded by μή, — either
so that the two negatives have one verb in common :
precedeii by μή with a participle, Mt. x.xii. 29; Mk. xii.
24 ; by μή w. a pres. subjunc, 1 Co. v. 8 [here Lmrg.
pres. indie] ; 1 Jn. iii. 18; by μή w. impv., Mt. vi. 25;
Lk. X. 4 ; xii. 22 ; xiv. 12 ; 1 Jn. ii. 15 ; by μή w. an aor.
subj. 2 pers. plur., Mt. x. 9 sq. ; by fit το μή, 2 Th. ii. 2
L Τ Tr \VH ; — or so that μη5ί has its own verb : pre-
ceded by OS ikv (&v) μή, Jit. x. 14; Mk. vi. 11 ; by Ίνα
μή, Jn. iv. 15; by όπως μή, I>k. xvi. 26 ; w. a ptcp. after
μή w. a ptcp., Lk. xii. 47 ; 2 Co. iv. 2; w. an impv. after
μή w. impv., Jn. xiv. 27; Ro. vi. 12 sq. ; Heb. xii. 5;
(iijSixi (πιτίθίί, foil, by μηϋ w. impv. 1 Tim. v. 22 ; w.
2 pers. of the aor. subj. after μή w. 2 pers. of the aor.
subj., Mt. vii. 6; xxiii. 9sq. ; Lk. xvii. 23; Col. ii. 21;
1 Pet. iii. 14 ; after μη8ί w. an aor. subj. Mk. viii. 26 [T
reads μή for the first μη8(, Τ WH Tr mrg. om. the sec-
ond clause] ; after μη^ίνα w. an aor. subj. Lk. iii. 14
[Tdf. repeats μη^ίνα] ; μηίί . . . μηδί w. 1 pers. plur. pres.
subj. 1 Co. X. 8 sq. [see below] ; παραγγίλλω foil, by μή
w. inf. . . . μη8ί w. inf., Acts iv. 18; 1 Tim. i. 4 ; vi. 17;
καλόν TO μή • . . ui/Sc with inf. Ro. xiv. 21 ; w. gen. absol.
after μήττω w. gen. absol. Ro. ix. 11 ; w. impv. after els
TO μή, 1 Co. X. 7 ; μηδέ is repeated several times in a neg-
ative e.xhortation after eh το μή in 1 Co. x. 7-1 0. 2.
not even (Lat. ne . . . quidem) : w. an inf. after ίγραψα,
1 Co. V. 11 ; after ware, Mk. ii. 2 ; iii. 20 (where R G Τ
badly μήτe [cf. W. 489 sq. (456) ; B. pp. 367, 369]) ; w.
a pres. impv., Eph. v. 3 ; 2 Th. iii. 10.
μηδίίϊ, μηδeμίa. μηδίν (and μηθίν. Acts xxvii. 33 L Τ
Tr WH, — a form not infreq. fr. Aristot. on [found as
early as B.C. 37S, cf. ^leisterhann, Gr. d. Att. Inschr. p.
73] ; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 181 sq. ; W. § 5, 1 d. U ; [B. 28
(25)]; Kiihner § 187, 1 vol. i. 487 sq.), (fr. μηδέ and eU),
[fr. Hom. down] ; it is used either in connection with a
noun, no, none, or absolutely, no one, not one, no man,
neut. nothing, and in the same constructions as μή; ac-
cordingly a. with an imperative : μηδeίί being
the person to whom something is forbidden, 1 Co. iii.
18,21; X. 24; Gal. vi. 17; Eph. v. 6; Col. ii. 18; 1 Tim.
iv. 12; Tit. ii. 15 ; Jas. i. 13 ; 1 Jn. iii. 7 ; neut. μηδέν,
sc. ea-Tco [A. V. have thou nothing to do with etc.], Mt.
xxvii. 19; μηδeίί in the dat. or the ace. depending on
the impv., Ro. xiii. 8 ; 1 Tim. v. 22 ; μηδίν (accusative),
Lk. iii. 13 ; ix. 3 ; μ. φοβοΟ, Rev. ii. 10 [here L Tr WH
txt. μή]. b. μηδels with the optative : once in
the N. T., :Mk. -xi. 14 (where Rec. ov8eis) [cf. W. 476
(443)]. c. with the 2 pers. of the aor. subjunc,
the μηδeίς depending on the verb; as, μηδevι eiTnjs, Mt.
viii. 4; xvii. 9 ; accus., Lk. iii. 14; x. 4; μι/δίκ (ace). Acts
xvi. 28 ; κατά μηδένα τρόπον, 2 Th. ii. 3. d. with the
particles ίνα and όπως (see μή, I. 3) : with ίνα, Mt. x^-i.
20; Mk. v. 43; \Λ. 8; vii. 36; ix. 9; Tit. iii. 13; Rev. iii.
11; with όπ-ω;. Acts viii. 24. e. with an infini-
tive ; eu with one that depends on another verb : —
as on παραγγέλλω, Lk. viii. 56 ; ix. 21 ; Acts x.xiii. 22 ;
δίίκνυμι. .\cts X. 2S ; διατάσσομαι, Acts x.xiv. 23 ; ava-
θ(ματίζω {'μαυτό». Acts .xxiii. 14; κρίνω (ace. w. inf.).
Acts -xxi. 25 Rec; (νχομαι. 2 Co. .xiii. 7; βοΰλομαι (ace.
w. inf.), 1 Tim. v. 14; ίπομιμνήσκω τινά, Tit. iii. 2, etc;
παρακαλώ τίνα foil, by to μή w. acc and inf., 1 Th. iii.
3 L (ed. ster.) Τ Tr WfL β. with an inf. depend-
ing on 8ia to: Acts x.xviii. 18; Heb. x. 2. f. with
a participle (see μή, L 5) ; in dat.. Acts xi. 19 : Ro. xii.
17; accus. μI;8f>'α,Jn. viii. 10; Actsix. 7; μι^δβ!». Acts iv.
21; xxvii. 33; iCo. x. 25. 27; 2Co. vi. 10; 2Th. iii. 11:
1 Tim. vi. 4 ; Tit. ii. 8 ; .Jas. i. 6 ; 3 Jn. 7 : μηδίμίαν προ-
σκοττήν, 2 Co. vi. 3 ; μηδ(μίαν πτάησιν, 1 Pet. iii. 6 ; μ>;δ€-
μιακ αΐτιαν. Acts xxviii. 1 8 ; άναβολήν μηδ. χχν. 1 7. g.
noteworthy are — μηδίΪ! with a gen.. Acts iv. 17; xxir.
23; μηδέν SC. τούτων. Rev. ii. 10 [RGTWHmrg.]; tV
μηΒέττ-οτί
412
μητΓΟΤί
μη6€νί, in nothi'ig, 1 Co. 1. 7 [but χαρίσματι is expressed
here] ; 2 Co. [vi. 3 (see h. below)] ; vii. 9; Phil. i. 28;
.las. i. 4. μηδίν eirai, to be nothing i. e. of no account,
opp. to etvai τί, Gal. vi. .'i (.Soph. Aj. 754 ; other ex.x. fr.
(irk. auth. see in Passow ii. j). 231''; [L. and S. s. v. II.;
cf. B. § 129, 5]) ; μηδ(ν (aec), nolhimj i. e. not til nil, in
no 'expect: Act? .\. L'O ; xi. 12, (I^eiau. dial. deor. 2, 4;
Tim. 43) ; as acrus. of the obj. after verbs of harm, loss,
damage, advantage, care, [cf. W. 227 (213); 13. § 131,
10]: as, β\άπτ(ΐν, Lk. iv. 35 [cf. \V. 4«3 (450)], ώφί-
ΧίΙσθαί, Mk. v. 2G ; νσημιΐν, 2 Co. xi. 5 ; μιριμναν, Phil.
iv. 6. h. examples of a d ο u bl e negation, by which
the denial is strengthened, where in Lat. i/nisr/nnm fol-
lows a negation (cf. W. § 55, 9 b.) : μηκίτι μη8(ί{, Mk.
xi. 14; Acts iv. 17; μη8(ν\ μη&ίν, Mk. i. 44 [Lorn. Tr
br. ^?;Se>'] ; Ko. .xiii. 8 ; μηδιμίαν iv μηδινί, 2 Co. vi. 3 ;
μη ■ ■ ■ (f μηΒ(ΐΊ, Phil. i. 2» , μη . . . μηδίν, 2 Co. xiii. 7 ;
μη . . . μηδ^μιαν, 1 Pet. iii. (ί : μή Ttff . . . κατά μηδίνα τρό-
πον, 2 Th. ii. 3.
μηΒίτΓΟΤί, (μι/δί and ποΓί), adv., iiener: 2 Tim. iii. 7.*
μηΒεττω, (μηδί and ττώ), adv., rial yet: Heb. xi. 7.'
Μή8ο8, -ου, ό, a Meile, a native or an inhabitant of
Media, a well-known region of Asia whose chief city was
Ecbatana [see B. D. s. v.]: Acts ii. 9. [Cf. B. D. and
Schaff-Herzog s. v. Media.] *
μηθί'ν, see μηδίΐς.
μηκΕτι, (fr. μή and fn), adv., employed in the same
constructions as μή; no longer; no more; not here-
after: a. with 3 pers. sing. 2 aor. subj. Mt. xxi. 19
RGTrtxt. with 2 pers. sing. Mk. ix. 25. b. with
1 pers. plur. pres. subj. Ro. xiv. 13. c. with a pres.
imperative : [Lk. viii. 49 L Τ Trtxt. WH] : Jn. v. 14 :
viii. 1 1 ; Eph. iv. 2S ; 1 Tim. v. 23. d. with the opta-
tive : Mk. .\i. 14. e. tm μηκίτι : 2 Co. v. 15 ; Eph. iv.
14. f. \vitli an infin. depending — on another verb :
on βοώ ((πιϋοω), Acts xxv. 24; on άπίίλω, Acts iv. 17;
on \(γω κ. μαρτΰρομαι, Eph. iv. 17; on f is το, 1 Pet. iv.
2; on ωστ€, Mk. i. 45 ; ii. 2; τοϋ μηκίτί δονΚίνΐίν, Ro. vi.
6. g. with a ptcp. : Acts xiii. 34 [cf. W. § 65, 10] ;
Ro. XV. 23; 1 Th. iii. 1. h. ol μηκίτι (see μή, IV.
2): with 2 aor. subj. Mt. xxi. 19 LTTrmrg. WII.*
μήκος, -fot (-our), to, fr. Hom. down ; Sept. very often
for ^IS : lcn(/lh : Rev. xxi. 16; το πΧάτοί κα\ μήκος και
βάθοί και ϋψος, language used in shadowing forth the
greatness, extent, and number of the blessings received
from Christ, Eph. iii. 18.•
μηκννα: (μήκος); fr. Ildt. and Pind. down; to malce
long, to lengt/un ; in the Bible twice of plants, i. q. to cauxe
to grow, tncreosf^ : ο €φντ€νσ€ κύριος και ν^τος (μήκννΐν
C^^r), Is. xliv. 14; hence Pass. [al. Mid.] pres. μηκύνο-
μαι; to grow tiji: Mk. iv. 27 [μηκΰνηται (Trmrg. -frai)].'
μηλωτή, -ής, ή. (fr. μήλον a sheep, also a goat; as καμη-
Χωτή ['camlet'] fr. κάμηλος [cf. Loh. Parali]). p. 332]),
α shecpshin: Heb. xi. 37, and thence in Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 17, 1. For jT^IX an outer robe, mantle, Sept. in
1 K. xLx. 13, 19; 2 K. ii. 8, 13 sq., doubtless because
tliese mantles were made of skins ; hence more closely
"yya ΓίΛ/ΙΚ, a mantle of hair, Zech. xiii. 4 (where Sept.
δίρρις τρίχινη). In the Byzant. writ. [ ApoU. Dysk. 191,
9] μηλωτή denotes a monk's garment.*
μήν, [(fr. Horn, down)], a particle of afBrmatioo,
rerih/, rcrla'inhj, truly, (Sap. vi. 25) ; η μήν, see under
ή fin.
μήν, gen. μηνός, ό, (w. Alex. ace. μήναν. Rev. xxii. 2
Lchm.; on which form see refP. under ciptnji/, fin.); [fr.
Hom. down] ; 1. a month : Lk. i. 24, 2ii, 3i;, 5G ; iv. 25 ;
Acts vii. 20; xviii. 11; xix. 8; xx. 3 ; xxviii. 11; Jas. v.
17; Rev. ix. 5, 10, 15; xi. 2; xiii. 5; xxii. 2. 2. the
time ofnev moon, new moon, (barbarous Lat. novilunium;
after the use of the Ilebr. ΰ;ΊΠ, which denotes both a
'month' and a 'new moon,' as in Num. xxviii. 11 ; xxi.x.
1) : Gal. iv. 10 [Bp. Lghtft. compares Is. Ixvi. 23] (the
first day of each month, -when the new moon appeared
was a festival among the Hebrews; cf. Lev. xxiii. 24
Num. xxviii. 11; Ps. Ixxx. (Ixxxi.) 4); [al. refer tht
passage to 1 (see Mey. ad loc.)].*
μηνύω [cf. Curtius § 429] : 1 aor. (μήνυσα: 1 aor. pass,
ptcp. fem. μηηθί'ισα; as in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. and Pind.
down ; 1. to disclose or make known something
secret ; in a forensic sense, to inform, report : foil, by jroO
(στίν, .In. xi. 57; τινί τι, pass., Acts xxiii. 30. 2.
univ. to declare, tell, make known ■ 1 Co. x. 28. 3.
to indicate, intimate : of a teacher ; foil, by ότι, Lk. xx.
37. [A. V. uniformly s/iouj.] •
μή ούκ, see μή. III. 1.
μήίΓΟτί, (fr. μή and ττοτί), [μή ποτ( (separately) L WH
(exc. Mt. xxv. !). see below) Tr (exc. 2 Tim. ii. 25)], dif-
fering from ovTToTf as μή does from οϋ ; [fr. Hom. down].
Accordingly it is 1. a particle of Negat ion; not
ever, never : (nc\ μήποτι Ισχύα, since it is never of force,
because the writer thinks that the very idea of its hav-
ing force is to be denied, Heb. ix. 17 [where WH txt. fiij
ToTf], on which see W. 480 (447), cf. B. 353 (304) ; but
others refer this passage to 3 a. below. 2. a pro-
hibitory Conjunction; lest ever, lest at any time, lest
hnply, (also written separately μή ποτ€ [(see init.), esp.
when the component parts retain each its distinctive
force; cf. Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 129 sq.; Ellemll,
Lex. .Soph. ii. 107. In the X. T. use of this particle the no-
tion of time usual to ποτί seems to recede before that of
contingency, lest perchance']), so that it refers to the pre-
ceding verb and indicates the purpose of the designated
action [W. § 56, 2]: w. a subj. pres. Lk. xii. 58; w. a
subj. aor., Mt. iv. 6 and Lk. iv. 11, fr. Ps. xc. (xci.) 12
(where Sept. for [3) : Mt. v. 25 [(cf. below)] ; vii. 6 [R
G] ; xiii. 15 and Acts xxviii. 27 (both from Is. vi. 10,
where Sept. for J3); Mt. xiii. 29 (ov sc. θ(λω); xv. 32;
xxvii.G4; >Ik.iv.i2; Lk.xiv.l2; with'i/a prefi.xed, ibid.
29; w. afut. i ndic. [see B. § 139, 7. cf. also p. 368 (315)
d.] • [Mt. vii. 6 L Τ Tr AVII ; (cf. v. 25)] ; Mk. xiv. 2 ;
[Lk. -xii. 58 L Τ Tr WH]. after verbs of fearing,
taking care, [W. u. s.; B. §139, 48]: w. subj. aor., —
so after ττροσίχω, to take heed, lest etc., Lk. xxi. 34 ; Heb.
ii. 1, (Sir. xi. 33) ; so that an antecedent φοβούμενοι or
προσίχοντα must be mentally supplied. Acts v. 39 ; μήττοη
ovK άρκίστι, lest perchance there be not enough (so that oi»
μηΤΓον
413
itirri
ipKecTj forms one idea, and φοβονμ(θα must be supplied
before μηποτί), Mt. xxv. 9 R Γ Wli mrg. ; but L Tr \VH
txt., together witli Meyer et al., have correctly restored
μηπστΐ (sc. τοϋτο γΕίΐσίω [W . § 64, 7 a.]) • ού μη apKf<rg,
i. e. not so ! there will in no wise he enouijii (see μι), I V. 2) ;
cf. Bornemann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843, p. 143 sq. ;
[but all the editors above named remove the punctua-
tion mark after μήπατι ; in Λvhich case it may be connect-
ed directly with the \vords which follow it and translated
(with R. V.) ' perarJ venture there will not be enough';
ci. B. § 148, 10, esp. p. 354 (3U4) note. For additional
exx. of /χήποτ€ in this sense (cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 10,
10 p. 1179», 24; with indie, ibid. pp. 1172% 33; 1173'
22, etc.), see Soph. Lex. s. v.; Bitm. in his trans, of Apoll.
Dysk., index s. v. ; (cf. L. and S. s. v. μη, Β. 9)]. after
φοβούμαι, w. pres. subjunc. Ileb. iv. 1 ; so that φοβού-
μενος must be supplied before it, Lk. xiv. 8. after βλίπειν
w. a fut. indie, [cf. W. § 5G, 2 b. a. ; B. 243 (209)], Heb.
iii. 12. 3. a particle of Interrogation accom-
panied with doubt (see μη. III.), whether ever, whether at
any time ; whether perchance, whether hapty, (Germ, dock
nicht elwa; nhiiichi etwa); a. in a direct question in-
troduced by tVfi, for, else, (see eVft, 2 sub fin.) : so ace. to
the not improbable interpretation of some [e. g. L WH
mrg., DeUtzsch] in Heb. ix. 1 7, see in 1 above. In the re-
maining X. T. passages so used that tlie inquirer, though
he doubts and expects a negative answer, yet is inclined
to believe what he doubtfully asks about ; thus, in a direct
question, in Jn. vii. 21). b. in indirect questions; a.
w. the optative (where the words are regarded as the
thought of some one [W. § 41 b. 4 c. ; B. § 139, Γ,Ο]): Lk.
iii. 15. [See /3.] β. w. the subjunctive: 2 Tim. ii. 25
[RGL (cf. B. 46 (40)); but TTrWIItxt, give the
optative], where μψτοτ( κτΚ. depend on the suppressed
idea bίakoyιζiμ(voς [cf. B. § 139, 62 fin.; AV. u. s.].'
μήίΓου [Τ Tr] or μή που [WH], that nowhere, lest any-
u>here,[lesl haply']: Actsxxvii. 29 Τ Tr WH. (Hom. et
al.)•
μήιτα [or μη ιτω, L Tr in Ro. ix. 11], {μή and πώ). [fr.
Hom. down], adv.; 1. not yet: in construction
with the ace. and inf., Heb. ix. 8 ; w. a ptcp., μήηω yip
•γ(ννηθ(ντΐύν, though they were not yet born, Ro. ix. 11,
where cf. Fritzsche. 2. lest in any way [?] : Acts
xxvii. 29 Lchm.*
μήπ(ι>9 [G T, or μή ιτωί L Tr WH], {μή and πώί), [fr.
Hom. down]; 1. a conjunction, lest in any way, lest
perchance; a. in final sentences, w. an aor. subj., pre-
ceded by a pres. 1 Co. ix. 27; preceded by an aor., 2
Co.u.7; ix.4. b. after verbs of feari η g, taking
heed: w. an aor. subj., — after βΧίπΐίν. 1 Co. viii. 9;
after φοβ(ϊσθαι. Acts xxvii. 29 R ; 2 Co. xi. 3 ; xii. 20;
w. a perf. indie, to indicate that what is feared has actu-
ally taken place [AV. § 56, 2 b. a.; B. 242 (209)], Gal.
iv. 11 ; w. an aor. subj., the idea of fearing being sup-
pressed, Ro. xi. 21 Rec. [B. § 148, 10; cf. W. 474
(442)]. 2. an interrogative particle, whether in
any way, whether hy any means : in an indirect question,
with an indie, present (of a thing still continuing) and
aorist (of a thing already done). Gal. ii. 2 (/ laid be/ort
them the gospel etc., sc. inquiring, whether haply etc. ; Paul
expects a negative answer, by which he wished his teach-
ing concerning Christ to be approved by the apostles at
Jerusalem, yet by no means because he himself had any
doubt about its soundness, but that his adversaries might
not misuse the authority of those apostles in assailing this
teaching, and thereby frustrate his past and present en-
deavors ; cf. Hofmann ad loc. [B. 353 (303). Others,
however, take τρ^χω as a s u b j u η c t i ν e, and render lest
haply I should he runninr/ etc. ; see W. 504 sq. (470), cf.
EUicott ad loc.]). w. the indicative (of a thing perhaps
already done, but which the writer wishes had not been
done) and the aor. subjunctive (of a thing future and
uncertain, which he desires God to avert) in one and the
same sen tence, 1 Th. iii. 5 (where μήπως depends on yvivai ;
cf. Schott, LUnemann, [EUicott], ad loc. ; [B. 353 (304) ;
W. 505 (470)]).•
μηρ6$, ~οϋ, ό, the thigh : Rev. xix. 16. (From Horn, down ;
Sept. for l\y_.)'
μ,ήτί, (μή and the enclitic re), [fr. Hom. down], a cop-
ulative conjunction of negation, neither, nor, (differing
fr. ovTf as μή does fr. oi. It differs fr. μη8( in that μη8ί
separates different things, but μήτ( those which are of the
same kind or which are parts of one whole ; cf. W. § 55,
6 ; [B. § 149, 13 b.]): μήτ( . . . μήτ(, neither . . . nor, hi.
vii. 33 [T fi^ . . . fiijSi] ; ix. 3 (five times) ; Acts xxiii
12, 21 ; xxvii. 20 ; Heb. vii. 3 ; (but in Eph. iv. 27 for
μή ■ ■ ■ μήτ( we must with L Τ Tr WH substitute μη . . .
μη8ί)• μη . . . μήτ€ . . . μήτ(, Mt. V. 34-36 (four times);
1 Tim. i. 7 ; Jas. v. 12 ; Rev. vii. 3 ; iua μή ■ . ■ μψ -t . . .
μήτ(. Rev. vii. 1 ; μηϋ ■ ■ ■ μήτ€ ■ . . μήτε. 2 Th. ii. 2 L Τ
Tr WH ; μή «ναι άνάστασιν, μη5ί SyyeXov (for that is
something other than άι/άστασίί). μήτ( ττν(ΰμα (because
angels belong to the genus πνεύματα), .\cts xxiii. 8 Β 6;
cf. W. 493 (459) ; [B. 367 (314) sq.].*
μήτηρ, gen. μητρός, dat. μητρί, acc. μητέρα, ή, [fr. Horn.
down ; fr. Skr. ma ' to measure ' ; but whether denoting
the ' moulder,' or the ' manager ' is debated ; cf. Vanicek
p. 657 ; Curtius § 472; (cf. μέτρον)'], Ilebr. DX, a mother^
prop. : Mt. i. 18; ii. 11, and often ; trop. of that which
is like a mother : Mt. xii. 49 sq. ; >Ik. iii. 35 ; Ja. xix.
27 ; Ro. xvi. 13, cf. 1 Tim. v. 2 ; a city is called ή μήτηρ
των πορνών, that produces and harbors the harlots. Rev.
xvii. 5 ; of a city where races of men [i. e. Christians]
originated, Gal. iv. 26 [here G Τ TrAVH om. L br.iravriiw
(on the origin of which cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. 11.
μήτι [so G Τ WH R (commonly), but μή nh (exc 1
Co. vi. 3) Tr (exc. Mt. xxvi. 22, 25 ; Mk. iv. 21)], (u?
and tl), whether al all, whether perchance, an interroga-
tive expecting a negative answer; in a direct question
(Germ, doch nicht etwa f [in Eng. generally untranslated•
cf. W. § 57, 3 b.; B. 248 (213)]) : Mt. vii. 16; xxvi. 22.
25; Mk. iv. 21 ; .xiv. 19 ; Lk. vi. 39 ; Jn. vii. 31 [RG]:
viii. 22; xviii. 35 ; xxi. 5 [here all texts μήπ (properly)];
Acts X. 47 ; 2 Co. xii. 18 ; Jas. iii. 11 ; μήτι Spa, 2 Co. I.
1 7 ; used by one asking doubtfully yet inclining to believe
what he asks about (see μήπυτε, 3 a.) : Mt. xiL ?3 : .Jn,
μητί'γί
414
μιμεομαΐ
iv. 29. tl μήτι, see fi, III. 10. /i^Tiye (or μηη ye) see in
its phice.•
μήτιγ£ [so GTWII; but μήτι γ€ RL, μή η ye Tr],
(fr. μή, τι, ye), to say nothlni/ of, not to mention, which
ace. to the context is either a. much less ; or b.
much more, much rather ; so once in the N. T., 1 Co. vi.
3. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 801 54.'
μ.ήτΐ5 [so R (; .In. iv. 33], more correctly μή tis ; 1•
prohibitive, let no one [cf. B. 31 (28)] : [v^. 1 aor. subj.
1 Co. xvi. 11]; w. 2 aor. subj. 2 Th. ii. 3. 2. inter-
roi'ative, (Lat. num ijuis ?) halh ani/one etc. : Jn. vii. 48 ;
[2'Co..xii. 17, cf. B.§ 151,7; W. 574 (534)]; wliere one
would gladlv believe what he asks about doubtfully (see
μήτι. sub fin.) : Jn. iv. 33.*
μήτρα, -ας, ή. (μήτη^ί), the womb: Lk. ii. 23 (on which
see Smratyco, 1 ) ; Ki). iv. 19. (Hdt., Plat., al. ; Sept. for
μ.ητραλω'α5 (alsii μί)Γραλοίαϊ), LTTrWlI [see WII.
App. p. 152] μητμολωας, -ου, 6, {μήτηρ. and άλοιάω to
thresh, smite), α malricide: 1 Tim. i. 9. (Aeschyl., Plat.,
Lcian., al.)*
μητρό-τΓολΐ5, -βωΕ, ή, (μήτηρ and πολίϊ), a metropolis,
chief city; in the spurious subscription 1 Tim. vi. (22)
fin. ; [in this sense fr. Xen. down].*
μ(α, see under fit.
μιοίνω; Pass., 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. plur. μιαι/ίώσΐ!»; pf. 3
pers. sing. μ(μίανται (unless it be better to take this form
as a plur.; cf. Kriiger § 33, 3 Anm. 9 ; Bttm. Gram. § 101
Anm. 7; Ausf. Spr. § 101 Anm. 13; B. 41 (36); [W.
§ 58, 6 b. 3.]), ptcp. μίμιασμίνο! (Tit. i. 15 R ϋ) and
μ(μιαμμίνθ! (ibid. LT Tr WH ; also Sap. vii. 25 ; Tob.
ii. 9 ; Joseph, b. j. 4, 5, 2 ed. Bekk. ; cf. Matthiae i. p.
415 ; Kriiger § 40 3. v. ; Loh. ad Phryn. p. 35; Otto on
Theophil. ad Autol. l,lp. 2sq. ; [Veitchs. v.]); fr. lioni.
down ; 1. to dye u'ith another color, to stain : cXt-
φαντα φοινίκι, Horn. II. 4, 141. 2. to ilejile, pollute,
sully, contaminate, soil, (Se[)t. often for Χ'3ϋ) : in a physi-
cal and amoral sense, σάρκα (of licentiousness), Jude8;
in a moral sense, τήν συνιίδησιν, τόν νουν, pass. Tit. i. 15;
absol. ίο defile with sin, pass. ibid, and in Heb. .\ii. 15 ; for
ίί'ϋΠΠ, Dent. xxiv. 6 (4) ; in a ritual sense, of men, pass.
Jn. xviii. 28 (Lev. xxii. 5, 8; Num. xix. 13, 20; Tob.
ii. 9).•
|Stn. μιαίνω, μολύκαι; ace. to Trench (N. T. Syn.
§ x.xxi.) μιαίνω to stain differs from μοΚύνω to smear not only
in its primary and outward sense, hut in the circumstance
that (like Hng. stain) it may be used in good part, while μο\.
admits of no worthy reference.]
μίασ-μα, -Tor, το, (μιαίνω), that which defiles [cf. καύ-
χημα, 2] ; defilement (Vulg. coinquinatio) : trop. μιάσματα
ToO κόσμου, vices the foulness of which contaminates one
in his intercourse with the ungodly mass of mankind,
2 Pet. ii. 20. (Tragg., Antiph., Dem., Polyb., Joseph.,
Plut. ; Sept., Lev. vii. 8 (18) ; Jer. xxxi.x. (xxxii.) 34 ;
Judith ix. 2 ; 1 Mace. xiii. 50.) •
μιαα-μήΐ, -oC, 6, (μιαίνω), the act of defilinci, defilement,
pollution: ΐπιθυμία μιασμοΟ, defiling lust [W. § 34, 3 b.],
2 Pet. ii. 10. (Sap. xiv. 2G•, 1 Mace, iv 43; Plut. mor.
p. 393 c. ; Test. xii. Patr. [test. Lev. \7; test. Bcnj. 8;
Graec. Ven. (passim) ; Ilerm. Past. sim. 5, 7, 2].) '
μίγμα or (so L T) μΊ-^μα, (on the accent cf. Lipsius,
Granim. Untersuch. pp. 32 and 34, [cf. W. § 6, 1 e. ;
κρίμα, init.]), -TOf, το', (μίγννμι), that which has been pro-
duced by mixing, a mixture : Jn. xix. 39 [WII txt. ίΧιγμα,
q. V.]. (Sir. xxxviii. 8 ; Aristot., Plut., al.) *
μίγνυμι and μΐα-γω : 1 aor. (μίζα; pf. pass. ptcp. μ(μιγ•
μίνο! fr. Hum. down; to mix, mingle: τι τινι, one thing
with another, Rev. viii. 7 Rcc; xv. 2; also τΊ tv τινι [cf.
B. § 133, 8], Rev. viii. 7 G L Τ Tr WII ; pfra tivos, with
a thing, Mt. xxvii. 34 ; Lk. xiii. 1 (on which see αίμα,
2 a.). [Syn. seeicepai/i»v/it, fin. Comp. : συν-ανα-μίγννμι.^'
μικρός, -ά, -όν, conipar. μικρότιροί, -tpa, -epov, [fr.
Horn, down], Sept. for JQp, JDp, t2;'0, small, little ;
used a. of size : Mt. xiii. 32 ; Mk. iv. 31 ; hence
of stature, τή ηλικία, Lk. xix. 3 ; of length, .Tas. iii. 5. b.
of space: neut. προιΧθων [προσ^ΧΘ. TTrMIImrg. in
Mt., TrWlImrg. in Mk. (see προσέρχομαι, a.)] μικρόν,
having gone forward a little, ΛΗ. xxvi. 39; Mk. .xiv. 35,
[cf. W. § 32, C; Β § 131, 11 sq.]. c. of age: less
by birth, younger, Mk. xv. 40 [al. take this of stat-
ure]; oi μικροί, the little ones, young children, Mt. xviii.
6,10,14; Mk.ix.42; άττό μικροί εωίμίγήλου [A. V./rom
the least to the greatest']. Acts viii. 10; Heb. viii. 11, (Jer.
vi. 13; xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34); μικρός Tf κα'ί μί-γας, [both
small and great] i. e. all, Acts xxvi. 22 ; plur.. Rev. xi.
IS; xiii. 1(1; xix. 5, IS; .xx. 12. d. of time, shf>rl,
brief: neuter — nom., ϊτι [or tTt om.] μικρόν (sc. ίσται)
και, (yet) a Utile icliile and etc. i. e. shortly (this shall come
to pass), Jn. xiv. 19; xvi. 16 sq. 19, [(cf. Ex. xvii. 4)],
fTi μικρόν όσον όσον (see όσος, a.); without καΐ, Ileb. χ.
37 (Is. x.xvi. 20) ; το μικρόν [Tr WII om. to], Jn. xvi. 18;
— μικρόν ace. (of duration), Jn. xiii. 33 (Job xxxvi. 2);
μικρόν χρόνον, Jn. vii. 33; xii. 35; Rev. vi. 11 ; xx. 3;
^fTii μικρόν, after a little while, Mt. xxvi. 73 ; Mk. xiv.
70, (-προ μικρόν. Sap. xv. .s). e. of quantity, i. e.
nundjer or amount : μικρά ζύμη, 1 Co. v. 6 ; (ial. v. 9 ;
of niunber, μικρόν ποίμνιον, Lk. xii. 32; of quantity,
μικρά δϋναμις. Rev. iii. 8 ; neut. μικρόν (τι), α little, 2 Co.
xi. 1,16. f. of rank or influence: Mt. x. 42; Lk.
ix. 48; xvii. 2; 6 μικρότερος iv τη βασιλεία των οίφ. he
that is inferior to the other citizens of the kingdom of
heaven in knowledge of the gospel [R. V. but little in
etc.; cf. W. 244 (229); B. § 123, 13], Mt. xi. 11; Lk.
vii. 2S,•
ΜΛητο5, -ου, ή, Miletus, a maritime city [now nearly
ten miles fr. the coast (cf. .\cts xx. 38)] of Caria or
Ionia, near the mouths of the ^Ia;ander and not far [c.
35 m. S.] from Ephesus. It was the mother of many
[some eighty] colonies, and the birth-place of Thales,
Anaximander, and other celebrated men : Acts xx. 15,
17; 2 Tim. iv. 20. [Lewin, St. Paid, ii. 90 sq.] •
μίλιον, -ου, TO, (a word of Lat. origin [cf. B. 18 (16)]),
a mile, among the Romans the distance of a thousand
paces or eight stadia, [somewhat less than our mile] :
Mt. V. 41. (Polyb., Strab., Plut.) *
μιμ(ομαι, -οϋμαι ; (/ii/i05 [an actor, mimic]) ; to imitate:
μιμητη<ι
415
Μιχαήλ
τινά, any one, 2 Th. iii. 7, 9; τί, Heb. xiii. 7; 3 Jn. 11.
[Find., Aeschyl., Hdt., al.] '
μιμ,ητήΐ, -οΰ, ό, an imitator : ■γίνομαι Ttw)r (gen• oi pers.),
1 Co. iv. 16; xi. I ; Eph. v. 1 ; 1 Th. i. 6; ii. 14; Heb. vi.
12; w. gen. of the thing, 1 Pet. iii. 13 Rec. (where LT
TrAVH ζηλωταΐ). [Plat, Isocr., al.]*
μιμνήσ-κω : (MNAQ [allied w. μ/κω. μακβάοω ; cf. Lat.
maneo, moneo, mentio, etc.; cf. Curtius § 4'29]) ; to remind:
Horn., Pind., Theogn., Eur., al. ; Pass, and Mid., pres.
μιμνήσκομαι (Ileb. ii. 6 ; xiii. 3 ; rare in Attic) ; 1 ao.•.
4μνησθην \ pf. μίμνημαι ; 1 fut. pass, in a mid. sense,
μνησθήσομαι (Ileb. x. 17 LTTrAVH); Sept. for iDf;
to be recalled or to return to one's mind, to remind one's
self of, to remember; ίμνήσθην, with a pass, signif. [cf.
B. 52 (46)], to be recalled to mind, to be remembered, had
in remembrance : ivamiov τίνος, before i. e. in the mind of
one (see ivairtov, 1 c), Acts x. 31 ; Rev. xvi. 19, (pas-
sively also in Ezek. xviii. 22 ; [Sir. xvi. 1 7 Rec.] ; and
άναμνησθηναι, Num. x. 9; Ps. cviii. (cix.) 16); — with a
mid. signif., foil, by a gen. of the thing [\V. § 30, 10 c],
to remember a thing : Mt. .xxvi. 75 ; Lk. xxiv. 8 ; Acts
xi. 16; 2 Pet. iii. 2 ; JudelT; μνησβηναι eXeovs, to call
to remembrance former love, Lk. i. 54 (cf. Ps. xxiv.
(xxv.) 6) ; Trjs ίιαθήκη:, Lk. i. 72 ((Jen. ix. 15 ; Ex. ii. 24;
1 Mace. iv. 10; 2 Mace. i. 2); μη μνησβηναι των αμαρτιών
Tivot, [Α. V. to remember no more'] i. e. to forgive, Heb.
viii. 12 ; x. 17, (after the Hebr. ; see Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 7;
Lxxviii. (Ixxix.) S ; Is. xliii. 25 ; and on the other hand,
to remember the sins of any one is said of one about to
punish them, Jer. xiv. 10; 1 Mace. v. 4; vi. 12); w. gen.
of a pers., to remember for good, remember and care
for : Lk. xxiii. 42 ; foil, by on, Mt. v. 23 ; xxvii. 63 ; Lk.
xvi. 25 ; Jn. ii. 17, 22; xii. 16 ; by as, Lk. xxiv. 6. pf.
μίμνημαι, in the sense of a present [cf. W. 274 (257)],
to be mindfid of: w. gen. of the thing, 2 Tim. i. 4 ; πάντα
μου μίμνησθί, in all things ye are mindful of me, 1 Co.
xi. 2 ; pres. μιμνησκομαι, w. gen. of the pers., to remem-
ber one in order to care for him, Heb. ii. 2 (fr. Ps. viii.
5) ; xiii. 3. [Comp. : ava-, in-ava-, νπο-μιμνησκω.'] *
μκΓί'ω, -ώ; impf. «yio-oi/f ; fut. /χισι^σω; 1 aor. ϊμίσησα;
pf. μ^μϊσηκα; Pass., pres. ptcp. μισοίμινος; pf. ptcp.
μ(μισημ4νο! (Rev. xviii. 2) ; Sept. for NJiy ; [fr. Hom.
down] ; to hate, pursue with hatred, detest ; pass, to be
haled, detested : τινά, Mt. v. 43 and Rec. in 44 ; xxiv. 10;
Lk. i. 71 ; vi. 22, 27 ; xix. 14 ; Jn. vii. 7 ; xv. 18 sq. 23-
25; xvii. 14; Tit. iii. 3 ; 1 Jn. ii. 9, [11] ; iii. 13, 15 : iv.
20; Rev. xvii. 16; pass., Mt. x. 22; xxiv. 9; [Mk. xiii.
13]; Lk. xxi. 17; τί: Jn. iii. 20; Ro. vii. 15; Eph. v. 29;
Heb. i. 9 ; Jude 23 ; Rev. ii. 6 and Rec. in 15 ; pass. ib.
"viii. 2. Not a few interpreters have attributed to
μισ(ϊν in Gen. xxix. 31 (cf. 30) ; Deut. xxi. 15 sq. ; Mt.
vi. 24; Lk. xiv. 26; xvi. 13; [Jn. xii. 25]; Ro. ix. 13,
the signification to love less, to postpone in love or esteem,
to slight, through oversight of the circumstance that 'the
Orientals, in accordance with their greater excitability,
are wont both to feel and to profess love and hale where
we Occidentals, with our cooler temperament, feel and
express nothing more than interest in, or disregard and
indifference to a thing'; Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. iL p.
304 ; cf. Rilckert, Magazin f. Exegese u. Theologie de*
N. T. p. 2 7 sqq.*
μ.ισ-θαΐΓοεα(Γ(α, -as, ή, {μισθοί and αττοδιδωμι ; cf. the
μισθοδοσία of the Grk. writ. [W. 24]), payment of wages
due, recompense : of reward, Heb. x. 35 ; xi. 26 ; of pun-
ishment, Heb. ii. 2. (Several times in ecdes. writ.)*
μισ-θ-οΐΓο-8ότη5, -ου, ό, (μισθο! and άποδίδωμί ; cf. the
μισθοδότης of the Grk. writ.), (Vulg. remunerator) ; one
u-ho pays wages, a rewarder: Heb. xi. 6. (Several tim^
in eccles. writ.) *
(tto-eios, -a, -ov, also of two terminations [cf. W. § 11 .
1], {μισθός), employed for hire, hired: as subst. [A. \.
hired servant], Lk. xv. 17, 19, [21 WH in br.], (Sept.
for T3U?, Lev. xxv. 50; Job vii. 1. Tob. v. 12; Sir.
vii. 20; xxxi. 27; xxxvii. 11. Anth. 6, 283, 3 ; Plut.).*
μισθό;, -οΰ, ό, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for "^DU, also for
m3ij"0, etc. ; 1. dues paid for work; wages, hire'.
Ro. iv. 4 {κατά οφίίλημα) ; in a prov., Lk. x. 7 and 1 Tim.
V. 18; Mt. XX. 8; Jas. v. 4; Jude 11 (on which see
«χί'ω, fin.) ; μισβόί αδικίας, wages obtained by iniquity,
Acts i. 18 ; 2 Pet. ii. 15, [cf. W. § 30, 1 a.]. 2. re-
ward: used — of the fruit naturally resulting from toils
and endeavors, Jn. iv. 36; 1 Co. ix. 18; — of divine
recompense : a. in both senses, rewards and pun-
ishments: Rev. xxii. 12. b. of the rewards which
God bestows, or will bestow, upon good deeds and en-
deavors (on the correct theory about which cf. Weiss,
Die Lelire Christi vom Lohn, in the Deutsche Zeitschr.
fur christi. Wissenschaft, 1853, p. 319 sqq.; Mchlhom,
d. Lohnbegr. Jesu, in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol.,
1876, p. 721 sqq. ; [cf. Beyer in Herzog xx. pp. 4-14]):
Mt. v. 12 ; vi. 2, 5, 16 ; x. 41 sq. ; Mk. ix. 41 ; Lk. vi. 23,
35; 1 Co. iii. 8, 14 ; 2Jn. 8; Rev. xi. 18; ΐχιιν μισθόν, to
have a reward, is used of those for whom a reward is
reserved by God, whom a divine reward awaits, Mu v.
46; 1 Co. ix. 17; with παρά τω ττατρΧ νμων iv τ. ονρ,
added, Mt. vi. 1. c. of punishments : μισθός ahiKias,
2 Pet. ii. 13; τής ivaaf'Mas, 2 Mace. viii. 33.*
μισβόο) : {μισθός) \ 1 aor. mid. ΐμισθωσάμην; to let out
for hire; to hire [cf. W. § 38, 3]: τινά, Mt. xx. 1, 7.
(Hdt., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al. ; Sept. for IDu, Deut
xxiii. 4 ; 2 Chr. xxiv. 12.) *
μίσθωμα, -τος, το, (μισθόω) ; 1. the price for which any-
thing is either let or hired (Hdt., Isocr., Dem., Ael., al. ;
of a harlot's hire, Hos. ii. 12; Deut. xxiii. 18; Mic. i. 7;
Prov. xix. 13 ; Ezek. xvi. 31-34, and in class. Grk. [cf.
Philo in Flac. § 16 fin.]). 2. that which is either let
or hired for a price, as a house, dwelling, lodging [(cf.
Β p. Lghtfi. Com. on Philip, p. 9 note *)] : Acts xxviiL
30.•
μισθωτοί, -οΰ, d, {μισθόω), one hired, a hireling; Mk. L
20; J n. X. 12 sq. (Arstph., Plat., Dem., al. ; Sept. for
T3b•.) *
Μιτυλήνη. -ης, η, Mitylene, the chief maritime town
of the island of Lesbos in the .ilgean : Acts xx. 14.
\^Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 84 sq.] *
Μιχαήλ, ό, (l^y-Z, i. e, 'who like God?'), Michael
μνα
416
μοι•χα\ίί
the name of an archangel, who was supposed to be the
guardian angel of the Israelites (Dan. xii. 1 ; x. 13, 21) :
.lude 9 ; Rev. xii. 7. [BB.DD. s. v.] '
μνό, -as, η, a word of Eastern origin [cf. Schroder, Keil-
inschriften u. 8. w. p. 143], Arab. ^^, Syr. ( t IVi .
Ilebr. np (fr. n:o to appoint, mark out, count, etc.),
Lat. 7tuna\ 1. in the O. T. a weight, and an imaginary
coin or money of account, Cijual to one hundred shekels:
1 K. X. 1 7, cf. 2 Chr. ix. l(j ; 2 Esdr. ii. (i9, (otherwise in
Ezek. xlv. 12 [cf. Bible Educator, index s. v. Maneh ;
Schrarler in Riehm s. v. Mine p. 1000 s(j.]). 2. In
Attic a weight and a sum of money cijual to one hun-
dred drachuiac (see δραχμή [and B. U. s. v. Pound; esp.
Schrwicr in Kiehni u. s.]) : Lk. xix. 13, 16, 18, 20, 24 sq.•
μνάομαι, sec μιμνήσκω.
Μνάσων, -avos, ό, (ΜΝΑί2), Miuison, a Christian of
Cyprus: Acts xxi. 16. (The name was com. also among
the Grks. ; [cf. Benseler's Pape's Eigennamen, s. v.].)*
μν(ία, -as, ή, (μιμνησκω), remembrance, mcmori/, mention :
fir'i πάσιι τή μν('ία υμών, as often as I remember you [lit.
'on all my rciiiinil)rance' etc. cf. W. § 18, 4], Phil. i. 3;
ιτοίίϊσθαι μνιίαΐ' rivi'is, to make mention of one, Ro. i. 9 ;
Eph.i.16; 1 Th.i.2; Philem.4, (Plat. Phaedr. p. 2.54 a.;
Diog. Laert. 8. 2, 6G ; Sept. Ps. ex. (cxi.) 4) ; μν. ίχαν
nvos, to be mindful of one, 1 Th. iii. 6 (Soph., Arstph.,
Eur., al.) ; άδίάλαπτιιν ίχι^ν την irtpi rivos μι /eiav, 2 Tim.
i. 3.•
μνήμα, -rot, ni, (μνάομαι. pf. pass, μέμνημαι); 1.
a )7ionumenl or miniornil to perpetuate the memory of any
person or thing (Ilom., I'lnd., Soi)h., al.). 2. a .•<c-
jiulchral monument (Hoin., Eur., Xen., Plat., al.). 3.
a sepulchre or tomb (receptacle where a dead body is de-
posited [cf. Eilersheini, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 3l6 sij.]) :
Mk. V. 3 G L Τ Tr Wll ; v. 5 ; [xv. 46 Τ WH] ; Lk. viii.
27 ; xxiii. 53 ; xxiv. 1 ; Acts li. 29 ; vii. 16 ; Rev. xi. 9,
(Joseph, antt. 7, 1,3; Sept. for 13p).•
μνημΕίον, -ου, TO J 1. anij visible object for preserr-
imj or recallinrj the memorij of an;/ person or thing ; η me-
morial, monument, (Aeschyl., Pinil., So])h., sqq.) ; in bibl.
Grk. so in Sap. x. 7 ; specifically, a se/julcliral monument :
οίκο&ομιΐν μνημίΐα, Lk. \i. 47 ; Joseph, antt. 13, 6, .5. 2.
in the Scriptures a sepulchre, tomb : Mt. xxiii. 29 ; xxvii.
52,60; xxviii.H; Mk.v.2; vi.29; Lk.xi.44; Jn.v.28;
xi. 17, 31, and often in the Gospels; Actsxiii. 29; Sept.
for tap. Gen. xxiii. 6, 9 , 1. 5; Is. xxii. 16, etc.
μνήμη, -T/f, ij,(/jrao^ai); a. memori/,remembrance; b.
mention : μνήμην ■ηοιΰσθαί Ttvot, to remember a thing, call
it to remembrance, 2 Pet. i. Ι.ϊ; the same expression oc-
ciirs in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down, but in the sense of Lat.
menlionem facere, to make mention of Ά thing.*
μνημονεύω ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ϊμνημόν^νον ; 1 aor. ίμνη-
μόνινσα ; (^μνήμων mindful) ; fr. Mdt. down ; Sept. for
101 ; 1. to he minilful of, to remember, to call to
•nind: absol. Mk. viii. 1 S ; titos, Lk. xvii. 32 ; Jn. xv. 20;
xvi. 4, 21 ; Acts xx. 35 ; 1 Th. i. 3 ; [Heb. xiii. 7] ; con-
textually i. q. to think of and feel /or a person or thing :
w. gen. of the thing, Col. iv. 18; των πτωχών, GaL ii. 10
(see μιανήσκω, fin.) ; w. an ace. of the obj. to hold in merit•
ory, keep in mind : τινά, 2 Tim. ii. 8; τί, Mt. xvi. 9; 1
Th. ii. 9 ; τα αδικήματα, of Goil as punishing them. Rev.
xviii. 5 (see μιμνήσκω). Cf. Matthiae § 347 Anin. 2; W.
p. 205 (193) ; [B. § 132, 14]. foil, by ότι. Acts xx. 31;
Eph. ii. II ; 2 Th. ii. 5 ; foil, by an indir. question, Rev.
ii. 5; iii. 3. 2. to make mention (if: tivos, Ileb. κί.
15 [but al. refer this to 1 above] (Plut. Them. 32; τί,
Plat, de rep. 4 p. 441 d.; legg. 4 p. 723 c); π^ρί tivos
(as μνασθαι in classic Grk., see Matthiae § 347 Anm. 1),
Heb. xi. 22; so in Lat. mcmini de alirjuo; cf. Ramsliurn,
T^at. Or. § 1 1 1 note 1 : f Harpers' Lat. Diet. s. v. memini,
I. 3 ; cf. Eng. remember about, etc.]. •
μνημόα-υνον, -ου, τό, {μνήμων), a memorial (jhal by which
the memori/ of any person or tiling is preserved), a remem-
brance : (is μνημήσννόν Ttvns, to perpetuate one's memory,
Mt. xxvi. 13 ; Mk. .\iv. 9 ; al ΊΓρη(τ€νχαί σον . . . άν^βησαι/
fts μνημ. (νώπιον τ. θιοΰ, (without the fig.) have become
known to God, so that he heeds and is about to help thee.
Acts X. 4. (Hdt., Arstph., Thuc, Plut., al. ; Sept. for
I^T, pi3!! also for Π"13Ι{<, i. e. that part of a sacrifice
which Avas burned on the altar together with the frank-
incense, that its fragrance might ascend to heaven and
commend the offerer to God's remembrance. Lev. ii. 9,
16 ; V. 1 2 ; Num. v. 26 ; hence (ύωδία ds μνημόσννον. Sir.
xlv. 16; and often in Siracid., 1 Mace, etc.)'
μνηστίύω; Pass., pf. ptcp. μ€μνηστ(νμίνος (RG) and
(•μνη<ττ(υμ(νο! (LTTrAVII) [cf. W. § 12, 10; Veitchs.
v.; 7V/. Proleg. p. 121]; 1 aor. ptcp. ^ii/TjffTfueiis ; (μνψ
OTot betrothed, espoused) ; fr. Iloin. down ; Sept. for
ΰ^ϋ ; τικά (γυναίκα), to woo her and ask her in marriage;
])ass. to be promised in marriage, be betrothed : TiVi, Mt. L
18; Lk. i. 27, ii. 5.•
μογγι-λάλθ5, (fr. ^oyyot[al. μογγάί, cf. Chandler § 366]
one who has a hoarse, hollow voice, and λάλοί), speaking
with a harsh or thick voice: Mk. vii. 32 Tdf. ed. 2, Tr txt. ;
but the common reading μογιλάλο! deserves the prefer-
ence; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. p. 302 sq. (Etym. Magn. [s.
v. ^aTTopiffiv].) '
μογι-λάλος [nn its accent cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 101], -ov,
(/inyis anil λύλοί), speaking with ilifficultij, [A. V. haring
an impediment in his speech]: Mk. vii. 32 [not Trtxt.].
(Aut. 8, 38; Schol. ad Lcian. Jov. trag. c. 27; Bekker,
Anecd. p. 100, 22 ; Sept. for Ο^Κ, dumb. Is. x.xxv. 6.)•
μό-γις, (/loyos toil), fr. Horn, down, hardly, with dijt-
culty: Lk. ix. 39 [yet WH Trmrg /ιόλίί, q. V.]. (3 Mace.
vii. 6.)•
μό8ιο5, -ου, ό, the Lat. modius, a dry measure holding
10 sextarii (or one sixth of the Attic medimnus; Corn.
Nep. Att. 2 [i. e. about a peck, A. V. bushel : cf. BB. DD.
s. V. Weights and Measures]) : Mt.v. 15; Mk. iv. 21; Lk.
xi. 33.*
μοιχαλί;, -ίδοΓ, ή, (μοιχός), a word unknown to the
earlier writ, but found in Plut., HeUod., al. ; see Lob. ad
Phryn.p. 452; [W.24]; Sept. for nax: (Ezek. xvi. 38;
xxiii. 45) and npKJO (Hos. iii. 1 ; Prov. xxiv. 55 (xxx,
20)); an adulteress; a. prop.: Ro. vii. 3 ; οφθάΧμΛΐ
μίστοι μοιχαλίδοί, eyes always on the watch for an adul-
μοιχ^αα
^ovcyyevrji;
teress, or from which aduUerous desire beams forth, 2
Pet. ii. 14. b. As tlie intimate alliance of God with
the people of Israel was likened to a marriage, those who
relapse into idolatry are said to commit adultery or play
(ΛβΛίΐΓίοί (Ezek. xvi. 15 sqii. ; xxiii. 43 sijii-, etc.) ; hence
μοιχαΚίί is fig. eijuiv. tojailhless to God, unclean, apostate :
Jas. iv. 4 [where cf. Alford] ; as an adj. (cf. Alatthiae
§ 429, 4), yii/io μοιχ. : Ml. xii. 39 ; xvi. 4 ; Mk. viii. 38.
[Cf. Clem. Alex, strom. vi. c. 16 § 14G p. 292, 5 ed. S)lb.] '
μοιχάω, -ώ : to have unlaivj'ul intercourse with anutlier's
ivife, to commit adultery with : τινά. in bibl. Grk. mid.
μηιχωμαι, to commit adultery : of the man, Mt. v. 32'' [yet
Wllbr.]; .xi.x. 9* [yet not WH mrg.], 9" [RGLTr
br. Wll mrg.] ; ϊπ αίτήν, commits the sin of adultery
against her (i. e. that has been put away), Mk. x. 11 ; of
the woman, Mt. v. 32* (where LTTr WII μοιχ(νθψαι.
for μοιχάσθαι) ; Mk. X. 12. (Sept. for nsp, .Jer. iii. S ; v.
7 ; ix. 2, etc. ; in Grk. writ. fig. in the active, with την
θάλασσαν, to usurp unlawful control over the sea, Xen.
Hell. 1, 6, 15; το \€χθίν, to falsify, corrupt, Ael. n. a.
7, 39.)*
μοιχβία, -at, ή, (μοιχ^ϋω), adultery : Jn. viii. 3 ; Gal. v.
19 Rec; plur. [W. § 27, 3 ; B. § 123, 2] : Mt. χ v. 19 ;
Mk. vii. 21. (Jer. xiii. 27; Hos. ii. 2; iv. 2 ; [Andoc,
Lys.], Plat., Aeschin., Lcian., al.) "
μοιχεύω ; fut. μοιχιύσω; 1 aor. (μηίχ(υσα; Pass., pres.
ptcp. μοιχινομίνη ; 1 aor. inf. μοιχ^υθήναι ; (^μοιχοί) ; fr.
Arstph. and Xen. down; Sept, for ^SJ; to commit adul-
tery; a. absol. (to be an adulterer) : Mt. v. 27 ; .\lx.
18; Mk. X. 19; Lk. xvi. 18; xviii. 20; Ro. ii. 22; xiii.
9; Jas. ii. 11. b. Ttva (γυναίκα), to commit adultery
Kith, have unlawful intercourse with another's wife : Mt.
V. 28 (Deut. V. IS; Lev. xx. 10; Arstph. av. 558 ; Plat.
rep. 2 p. 3ti0 b. ; Lcian. dial. deor. 6, 3 ; Aristaenet. epp.
1, 20; Aeschin. dial. Socr. 2, 14); pass, of the wife, to
suffer adulter;/, be debauched : Mt. v. 32" L Τ Tr WH ;
[xix. 9 AVH mrg.] ; Jn. viii. 4. By a Hebraism (see
μοιχαΧίί, b.) trop. μςτά rtvos (γυναίκας) μοιχΐύ^ιν is used
of those who at a woman's solicitation are drawn away
to idolatry, i. e. to the eating of tlimgs sacrificed to idols,
, Rev. ii. 22 ; cf. Jer. iii. 9, etc.*
μοιχό$, -oC, 0, an adulterer : Lk. xviii. 1 1 ; 1 Co. vi. 9 ;
Heb. xiii. 4. Hebraistically (see μοιχάλΐ!, b.) and fig.
faithless toward God, unijodly: Jas. iv. 4 RG. (Soph.,
Arstph., Xen., Plut., sqij. ; Sept.) '
μόλιβ, (/ιόλοΓ toil) ; an adv. used by post-Hom. writ, in-
discriminately with /xoyif ; a. with diffcully, hardly,
(cf. Sap ix. Ki, where μ€τα πόνου corresponds to it in the
parallel member) : [Lk. ix. 39 Tr mrg. WH (al. μόγις, q.
V.)] ; Acts xiv. 18 ; xxvii. 7 sq. 16 ; 1 Pet. iv. 18. b.
not easily, i. e. scarcely, very rareh' : Ro. v. 7.*
Μολόχ, ό, (Hebr. ^Sb, 03Ίη, also 03^•?; cf. Gesenius,
Thes. ii. p. 794 sq.), indecl., Moloch, name of the idol-
god of the Ammonites, to which human victims, particu-
larly young children, were offered in sacrifice. Ac-
cording to the description in the Jalkut ([Rashi (vulg.
Jarchi)] on Jer. vii. [31 j), its image was a hollow brazen
figure, with the head of an ox, and outstretched human
arms. It was heated red-hot by fire from within, and the
little ones placed in its arras to be slowly burned, while
to prevent their parents from hearing their dying cries
the sacrificing-priests beat drums (see yttwa) : Acts vii.
43 fr. Am. v. 26 Sept., ivhere Hebr. □33'7p, which ought
to have been translated βασίΚίως υμών, i. e. of your idol.
Cf. Win. RWB. s. V. Moloch ; J. G. Muller in Herzog
i.\. 714 sq. ; Men in Schenkel v. 194 sq. ; [BB.DD. s. v.
Molech, Moloch ; IK. Robertson Smith in Encyc. Brit. ed.
9, s. V. ; Baudissin, Jahve et Moloch etc. and esp. in
Herzog 2 vol. x. 168-178].*
μολύνω : 1 ai ir. act. ϊμήΧυνα ; Pass. pres. μολύνομαι ; 1
aoT. (μοΧύνθην; fr. Arstph. down ; lo pollute, stain, con-
taminate, dejile ; in the N. T. used only in symbolic and
fig. discourse : ουκ ('μόλυναν τα Ιμάτια αντων, of those who
have kept themselves jmre from the ilcfik-ment of sin.
Rev. iii. 4 (cf. Zech. iii. 3 S(|.) ; μ^τά τυναικώι/ ουκ ϊμο-
λύνβησαν, who have not soiled them.selves by fornication
and adidtery. Rev. xiv. 4 ; ή συνιίδησί! μολύνιται, of a
conscience reproached (defiled) by sin, 1 Co. viii. 7 (in-
explebili quodam laedendi proposito conscientiam pol-
luebat, Amm. jMarcell. 15, 2 ; opp. to καθαρά σνν^ϊΒησκ,
1 Tim. iii. 9 ; 2 Tim. i. 3 ; μολίίΐ'((κ την \}τυχήν, Sir. x.xi.
28 ; but see μιαίνω, 2). [Syn. see μιαίνω, fin.] *
μολνσ-μό$, -οϋ, 6. (μολύνω), defilement (Vulg. inquina-
mentwn) ; an action by »vhich anything is defiled : ivith
gen. of the thing defiled, σαρκόι και πνεύματος, 2 Co. vii.
1. (Jer.x.xiii. 15; 1 Esdr. viii. 80 ; 2 Mace. v. 27 ; Plut.
mor. p. 779 c.; [Joseph, c. Ap. 1,32, 2; 2, 24,5; etc.];
often in eccl. writ.) *
(""("■Φή! "is> i> (/^Μφο/Ό')? blame : ίχαν μομφην πρόί
τίνα, to have matter of complaint against any one, Col.
iii. 13. (Pind., Tragg., al.) *
μονή, -ης. ή, (μίνω), [fr. Hdt. down], a Staying, abiding,
dwelling, (iliode : Jn. .xiv. 2; μοιη)ν ποίί ΐν ( L Τ Tr WH
ποιΰσθαι, as in Thuc. 1, 131 ; Joseph, antt. 8, 13, 7; 13,
2, \), to make an (one's) abode, παρά rti/i metaph. of God
and Christ by their power and spirit exerting a most
blessed influence on the souls of beUevers, Jn. xiv. 23 ;
see ποιώ, 1 c*
μονογίνήί. -is, (μόνος and yevos), (Cic. unigena ; Vulg.
[in Lk. unicus, elsewh.] and in eccl. writ. unigenitu.<),
single of its kind, only, [A.V. only-begotten'] ; used of only
sons or daughters (viewed in relation to their parents),
lies, theog. 426, 448 ; Hdt. 7, 221 ; Plat. Critias 113 d.;
Joseph, antt. 1, 13, 1; 2, 7, 4 ; μονογίνίς τ(κνον πατρί,
Aeschyl. Ag. 898. So in the Scriptures : Heb. .xi. 1 7 ;
μονυγ€νή fivai Tivi (to be one's only son or daughter), Judg.
xi. 34 ; Tob. iii. 15; Lk. vii. 12; viii. 42; ix. 38 ; [cf.
Westcott on Epp. of Jn. p. 162 sqq.]. Hence the ex-
pression ό μονηγ. υ'ιος τηϋ θιοϋ and υΙος τοϋ θ(θΰ ό /ιοίΌν.,
Jn. iii. 16, 18; i. 18 [see below] ; 1 Jn. iv. 9 ; μονο-γ€νής
πάρα πατρός, Jn. i. 14 [some take this generally, owin•' to
the omission of the art. (cf. Green p. 48 sq.)], used of
Christ, denotes the only son of God or one who in the sense
in which he himself is the son of God has no brethren.
He is so spoken of by John not because ό λόγος which
was ΐνσαρκωθίίς in him was eternally generated by God
μονός
418
μορφό
the Father (the orthodox interpretation), or came forth
from the being of God just before the beginnin•; of the
world (Subordinationism), but because b^• the incarna-
tion (ϊνσάρκωσΐ!) of tlie λόγος in liim he is of nature
or essentially Son of God, and so in a very difTi^rent
sense from that in which men are made by him τίκνα τον
θ(ο{ι (Jn. i. 13). For since in the writings of John the
title ό v'lbt τον θ(θν is given only to the historic Christ
so called, neither the Logos alone, nor Jesus alone,
but ό Xdyof ό ίνσαρκωθ(ί! OT Jesus through the Xoyos
united with (iod, is ό μονογ. vibs τοϋ θ(ον. The reading
μονογίνηί ^fof (without the article before /xoKo-y.) in Jn.
i. 1«, — which is supported by no inconsiderable weight
of ancient testimony, received into the text by Tregelies,
and W'estcott and llort, defended with much learning
by Dr. llort (" On μονογινης Seas in Scripture and Tra-
dition " in his " Two Dissertations " Camb. and l>ond.
1876), and seems not improbable to Ilarnack (in the
TheoL Lit.-Zeit. for 1S76, p. 541 sqq.) [and Weiss (in
Meyer 6te Aull. ad loc.)], but is foreign to John's mode
of thought and speech (iii. 16, 18; 1 Jn. iv. 9), dissonant
ami harsh, — appears to owe its origin to a dogmatic zeal
which broke out soon after the early days of the church ;
[see articles on the reading by Prof. Abbot in the Bib.
Sacr. for Oct. 1861 and in the Unitarian Rev. for June
1875, (in the latter copious reff. to other discussions of
the same passage are given) ; see also Prof. Drummond
in the Theol. Rev. for Oct. 1871]. Further, see Grimm,
Kxgt. Hdbch. on Sap. p. 152 sq. ; [Westcott u. s.].*
|iivo;, -η,-ον, Sept. chiefly for 12^, [fr. Ilom. down] ; 1.
an adjective, alaue (without a companion) ; a. with
verbs : (ivai, (νμίσ<(σθαι, KaraXiirrfffiui, etc., Mt. -xiv. 23 ;
Mk. vi. 47 ; Lk. ix. 36 ; Jn. viii. 9 ; 1 Th. iii. 1 ; added to
the pronouns tya, airos, ov, etc.: Mt. xviii. 15; Mk. ix.
2 ; Lk. xxiv. 18 ; Ro. xi. 3 ; xvi. 4, etc. b. it is joined
with its noun to other verbs also, so that what is predi-
cated may be declared to apply to some one person alone
[cf. W. 131 (124) note]: Mt. iv. 10; Lk. iv. 8; xxiv.
1 2 [T om. L Tr br. WII reject the vs.] ; Jn. vi. 22 ; Ileb.
ix. 7 ; 2 Tim. iv. 1 1 ; with a neg. foil, by άλλα, Mt. iv. 4.
ύ μάνο! θ(0!, he who alone is God : Jn. v. 44 ; xvii. 3 ; Ro.
xvi. 27 ; ό μόνος 8(σπότης, Jude 4. οΰκ ■ . . d μη μόνοΐ :
Mt. xii. 4 ; xvii. 8 ; xxiv. 36 ; Lk. vi. 4 ; οϋδί'ΐΓ . . . tl μη
μόνο!, Phil. iv. 15. i. q. forsaken, destitute of help, Lk.
x. 40; Jn. viii. 16; xvi. 32, (Sap. x. 1). 2. Neut.
μόνον as adv., alone, only, vierely : added to the obj., Mt.
V. 47 ; X. 42 ; Acts xviii. 25 ; Gal. iii. 2 ; to the gen. Ro.
iii. 29 [here WH mrg. μόνα>ν'\ ; referring to an action ex-
pressed by a verb, Mt. Lx. 21 ; xiv. 36 ; Mk. v. 36; Lk.
viii. ,50; Acts viii. 16; 1 Co. xv. 19; Gal i. 23; ii. 10.
μόνον μή. Gal. V. 13 ; ού {μη) μόνον. Gal. iv. 18 ; Jas. i. 22 ;
ii. 24 ; foil, by αλλά. Acts xix. 26 [L άΧΚά και ; cf. W. 498
(464) ; B. 370 (317)] ; by άλλα πολλώ μάλλον, Phil. ii.
12 ; by άλλα και, Mt. .xxi. 21 ; Jn. v. 18 ; xi. 52 ; xii. 9 ;
xiii. 9; xvii. 20; Acts xix. 26 [Lchm. (see as above, esp.
B.)]; xxi. 13; xxvi. 29 ; xxvii. 10; Ro. i. 32 ; iv. 12, 16,
23; 2 Co. vii. 7, etc. ; ov μόνον &€, aWa καί : Acts xix. 27;
and often by Paul [cf. W. 583 (543)], Ro. v. 3, 1 1 ; vii:.
23 ; ix. 10; 2 Co. vii. 7; viii. 19 ; Phil. ii. 27 [here οΰ δί
μόνον etc.] ; 1 Tim. v. 13 ; [2 Tim. iv. 8. «ατά μάνας (so.
χώρας), see κατημόνας^.
(ΐον-όφθαλμο;, -ov, (μόνος, οφθαΚμός), (Vu\g. luscus, ML•
ix. 47), (lepriri-il of (inc ci/p, having one eye : Mt. xviii. 9 ;
Mk. ix. 47. (lldt., ApoUod., Strab., Diog. Laijrt., al. ;
\_Lol•. ad Phryn. p. 136; Bukk. Anecd. i. 280; Rulher•
ford. New Phryn. p. 209 ; W. 24].) •
μονόω, -ώ : {μόνος) ; fr. Ilom. down ; to make single or
solitary; to leave alone, forsake: pf. pass. ptcp. χήρα
μίμονωμίνη, i. e. without children, 1 Tim. v. 5, cf. 4.*
μορφή, -ήί, ή, [fr. root signifying 'to lay hold of ', 'seize'
(cfAjenn. Fussung); Fick, Pt. i. p. 174; Vanicek p. 719],
fr. Horn, down, the form hy iithirh a person or thing strikes
the vision ; the external a/>/>eanince : children are said to
reflect ψνχης rt και μορφής ομοιότητα (of their parents)»
4 Mace. XV. 3 (4) ; (φαν€μώθη (v ίτίρα μορφή. Mk.xvi.l2;
€V μορφή 6fov υπάρχων, Phil. ii. 6 ; μορφήν δοΰ\ον \αβών^
ibid. 7 ; — this whole passage (as I have shown more
fully in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1873, p. 33
sqq., with which compare the different view given by
Holsten in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol. for 1875, p. 449
sqq.) is to be explained as follows : ivho, although (for-
merly when he was λόγος ϊΊσαρκος) he bore the form (in
which he appeared to the inhabitants of heaven) of God
(the sovereign, opp. to μορφ. δούλου), yet did not think
that this equality with God was to be eagerly clung to or re-
tained (see άρπα-γμός, 2), hut emptied himself of it (see
κ(νόω, 1) .so as to assume the form of a servant, in that he
became like unto men (for angels also are δοϋλο» τοϋ
ifoO, Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 8 sq.) and was found in fashion
as a man. ((Jod pevei af\ άπλως iv τή αντοϋ μορφή. Plat.
de rep. 2 p. 381 c, and it is denied that God φαντόζισθαι
άλλοτε iv άΧλαις Ιδϊαις . . . κα'ι άλλάττοντα τό αίιτυϋ (ίδος
fts ΤΓολλαΓ μορφας . . . και T^t ίαντον ιδίας iKJiaivtiv, ρ.
380 d.; ηκιστ hv ττολλα^ μορφας ίσ;(;οι 6 6(ός, (). 381 b. ;
(νος σώματος οίσίαν μ(τασχηματίζ(ΐν κα'ι μ(τυχαράττ(ΐν els
πολυτρόπους μ,ορφάς, Ρΐιίΐυ leg. ad Gaium §11; ου yap
ω(τπΐρ το νόμισμα παράκημμα κα\ 6(ον μορφτι yivfTai. ibid.
§ 14 fin.; (iod ίργοις μΐν κ<η χάρισιν (ναργής και παντός
οϋτινοσοϊιν φανιρώτιρος, μορφήν Be κα\ μ(γ(θος ημ'ιν aφave•
στατος, Jo.scph. c. Αρ. 2, 22, 2.) *
(Syn. μορφ-Ιι. σχήμα: ace. to Βρ. Lghtft. (see the
thorough discussion in his ' Detached Note 'on Phil, ii.) and
Trench (N. T. Syn. § Ixx.), μορφ-ή form differs from σχνμα
figure, shiipe.ftshion, as tliat which is intrinsic and essential,
from that which is outward and accidental. So in the main
Bengel, Philippi, al., on Ko. xii. 2 ; but the distinction is re-
jected by many ; see Meyer and esp. Fritzsche in loc. Yet
the last-named commentator makes /ιορψί) Soihov in Phil. 1. c.
relate to the c ο m ρ 1 e t e form, or nature, of a .servant ; and
σχήμα to the e χ t er u al form, or human body.]
μορφόω, -ώ : 1 aor pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, μορφωθή :
[cf. μορφή, init.] ; to form : in fig. discourse άχρις [Τ Tr
λνΐΐ μίχρις, q. v. 1 a.] ου μορφωθή Χρίστος iv νμ'ιν, i. e.
literally, until a mind and life in complete harmony with
the mind and life of Christ shall have been formed in
you, Gal. iv. 19. (Arat. phaen. 375 ; Anth. 1, 33, 1; Sept
Is. xUv. 13.) [COMP. : μίτα-, συμ-μορφ6ω.1'
μορφωσι•;
419
μνρον
μύρφωσίί. -ίως. ή, (μορφάω) ; 1. α fanning, shap-
mg : των Βίνδρων, Theophr. c. pi 3, 7, 4. 2. fonn ;
i.e. a. the mere form, semblance: fiafjSfiai, 2 Tim.
iii. 5 . b. the form befitting the thing or truly express-
ing the fact, the very form: τηί γνώσιω! κ. ttjs αληίίίοΓ,
llo. ii. 20.•
μο(Γχο-•τΓοΐ€'ω, -ώ : 1 aor, €μοσχοποίησα ', (μόσχος and
τΓοίί'ω, [cf. W. 26]) ; to mate (an image of) a calf: Acts
vii. 41, for wlaich Ex. .xxxii. 4 (ποίησ( μόσχον. (Eccles.
writ.) *
μ<5ο-χο5, -ου, ό, [cf. Schmidt ch. 76, 12; Curtius p.
593] ; 1. β tender, juicy, shoot; a sprout, of a plant
or tree. 2. 6, ή, μ. offspring; a. of men [(cf. fig.
Eng. scion)^, a boy, a girl, esp. if fresh and delicate. b.
of animals, α !/oun^one. 3. acalf,abullocl;aheifer;
so everywhere in the Bible, and always masc. : Lk. xv.
23, 27, 30 ; Heb. ix. 12, 19 ; Rev. iv. 7; (Sept. chiefly
for 15 a bull, esp. a young bull; then for "103 cattle; for
ΊΙ'ι^ an ox or a cow; also for hlj,^ a calf). [(Eur. on.)]*
μουα-ικός, -ή, -όν, (μοϋσα [music, eloquence, etc.]) ; freq.
in Grk. writ. ; prop, devoted to and skilled in the arts
sacred to the muses; accomplished in the liberal arts;
specifically, skilled in music ; playing on musical instru-
ments; so Rev. xviii. 22 [R. V. minstrels'].''
μόχθο5, -ου, ό, hard and difficult labor, toil, travail;
hardship, distress: 2 Co. xi. 27; 1 Th. ii. 9 ; 2 Th. iii. 8;
see Kiwros, 3 b. (Hes. scut. 306 ; Find., Tragg., Xen., al. ;
Sept. chiefly for ^^>•.) [Syx. see Konos, fin.] *
^veXos, -oi, 6, (enclosed within, fr. μύω to close, shut),
marrow: Heb. iv. 12. (From Hom. down ; Sept. Job
xxi. 24.) •
μνίω, -ω : pf. pass, μ^μϋημαι ; (fr. μϋα> to close, shut
[(cf. Lat. muttts); Curtius § 478]); a. to initiate
into the mysteries (Hdt., Arstph., Plat., Plut., al. ; 3 Mace,
li. 30). b. univ. to leach fully, instruct; to accustom
ene to a thing; to give one an intimate acquaintance with
a thing : ev παιηΐ κ. ev πάσι μιμύημαι, to every condition
and to all the several circumstances of life have I be-
come wonted; I have been so disciplined by experience
that whatsoever be my lot I can endure, Phil. iv. 12;
[but others, instead of connecting (v παντί etc. here (as
object) with μ^μ. (a constr. apparently without prece-
dent; yet cf. LUnemann in W. § 28, 1) and taking the
infinitives that follow as explanatory of the cv παντί
etc., regard the latter phrase as stating the sphere
(see παΓ, II. 2 a.) and the infinitives as epe.xegetic (W.
§ 44, 1) : in everything and in all things have I learned
the secret both to be filled etc.].*
μΰθο$, -ου, ό, fr. Hom. down ; 1. a speech, word,
saying. 2. a narrative, story; a. a true narra-
tive, b. a fiction, a fable ; univ. an invention, false-
hood: 2 Pet. i. 16; the fictions of the Jewish theoso-
phists and Gnostics, esp. concerning the emanations and
orders of the seons, are cailed μΟΑοι [A. V. fables'] in
1 Tim. i. 4 ; iv. 7 ; 2 Tim. iv. 4 ; Tit. i. 14. [Cf. Trench
§ xc, and reff. s. v. yfveoKoyia.] '
μυκάομοα, -ωμοί ; (fr. μν or μϊι, the sound which a cow
^Lat. mugio']), to low, bellow, prop, of horned
cattle (Horn., Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., al.) ; (o roar, of a
lion, Rev. x. 3.*
μ»)κτηρ£ζω : {μνκτήρ the nose) ; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing.
μυκτηρίζίται; prop, to turn up the nose or sneer al; to
mock, deride : τινά, pass, ov μνκτηρίζίται, does not suffer
himself to be mocked, Gal. vi. 7. (For J;.;S, Job xxiL
19; Ps. Ixxix. (Ixxx.) 7; Jer. xx. 7; yKJ, Prov. i. 30 ; ni3,
Prov. XV. 20 ; [cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 39, 1 (and Harnack's
note)]. 1 Mace. vii. 34; [1 Esdr. i. 49]; Sext. Emp.
adv. math. i. 217 [p. 648, 11 ed. Bekk.].) [CoMP. : «V
μυκτηρίζω.] *
μυλικ05, -η, -όν, (μύλη a mill), belonging to a mill: Mk.
ix. 42 RG; Lk. xvii. 2 LTTr WH.*
μύλινοϊ, -i;, -01»; 1. made of mill-stones : Boeckh,
Inscrr. ii. p. 784, no. 3371, 4. 2. i. q. μυΧικόί (see
the preceding word) : Rev. xviii. 21 L WH.*
μΰλοΐ, -ου, ό, [(Lat. mola; Eng. mill, meal)]; 1.
a mill-stone [(Anthol. etc.)]: Rev. xviii. 21 [LWH μν-
λιΐΌί, q. v.] ; μύΧο! όνικόί, Mt. xviii. 6 ; Mk. ix. 42 L Τ
Tr AVH ; Lk. xvii. 2 Rec. ; a large mill consisted of two
stones, an upper and an under one; the "nether" stone
was stationary, but the upper one was turned by an ass,
whence the name μ. dvueos. 2. equiv. to μύλι;, a mill
[(Diod., Strab., Plut.)]: Mt. xxiv.41 LTTr WH : φωνή
μύλου, the noise made by a mill, Rev. xviii. 22.*
μνλών [not paroxytone; see Chandler § 596 cf. § 584],
-ωνος, ό, place where a mill runs ; mill-house : Mt. xxiv.
41 R G. (Eur., Thuc, Dem., Aristot., al.) *
Mvpa (LTTrWII Μύρρα (Tr pp- see P, p) [cf. Tdf.
on Acts as below and WH. App. p. 160]), -ων, τά, Myra,
a city on the coast [or rather, some two miles and a half
(20 stadia) distant from it] of Lycia, a maritime region
of Asia Minor between Carta and Pamphylia [B. D. s. v.
MjTa; Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 186 sq.] : Acts xxvii. 5.*
μυριάΐ, -aSot, ψ (μυρίοί), ffr. Hdt. down], Sept. for
Π33Τ and 13"); a. ten thousand: Acts xix. 19 (on
which pass, see άργνριον, 3 fin.). b. plur. with gen.
i. q. an innumerable multitude, an unlimited number, ([like
our myriads], the Lat. sexcenti. Germ. Tausend): Lk.
xii. 1 ; .Acts xxi. 20; Rev. v. 1 1 [not Rec".' ]; ix. 16 [here
L Τ δισμυριάδί 9, q. v.] ; used simply, of innumerable hosts
of angels: Heb. xii. 22 [here G LTr put a comma after
μυρίάσιν]; Jude 14; Deut. xxxiii. 2; Dan. vii. 10.*
μυρ(ζω : 1 aor. inf. μνρίσαι; (μίρον); fr. Hdt. down;
to anoint : Mk. xiv. S."
μυρ£θ5, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down]; 1. innumer-
able, countless, [A. V. ten thousaml]: 1 Co. iv. 15; xiv.
19. 2. with the accent drawn back (of. BUm. Ausf.
Sprchl. § 70 Anra. 15, vol. i. 278; Passow s. v. fin.; [L.
and S. s. V. III.]), μύριοι, -lat, -to, ten thousand : Mt. xviii.
24.*
μνρον, -ου, το, (the grammarians derive it fr. μυρω to
flow, accordingly a flowing juice, trickling sap ; but prob,
more correct to regard it as an oriental word akin to
μύρρα, Hebr. "I'D, "ΊΟ ; [pick (i. 836) connects it with r.
smar 'to smear', with Λνΐιϊοΐι A'anicek 1198 sq. associates
σμύρνα, μνρτος, etc.; cf. Curtius p. 7H]), ointment : Mt.
xxvi. 7, 9 Rec, 12; Mk. xiv. 3-5; Lk. vii. 37 sq. ; xjdiL
Ml
420
Μωσηι
S6 ; .In. xi. 2 ; xii. 3, 5 ; Rev. xviii. 13 ; distinguished fr.
cXatov [q. V. and see Trench, Syn. § xx.wiii.j, Lk. vii. 46.
([From Aeschyl., lldt. down] ; Sept. for jOiV fat, oil,
I'rov. xxvii. 9; for 310 pi?, Ps. cxxxii. (cxxxiii.) 2.)*
Μυσία, -as, ή. Mi/sia, a province of Asia Jlinor on tlie
shore of tlie ^Egean Sea, between LyJia and the Pro-
pontis ; it had among its cities Pergamum, Troas, and
Assos : .\cts xvi. 7 s(i.•
μιυστήριον, -ου, τό, {μύστης [one initiated ; fr. μυί'ω,
q. V.]), in class. Grk. α liidden thing, secret, mi/steri/:
μνστηριόν σου μη κατύττηί τω φίΚω, Menand. ; plur. gen-
erally mi/.iteriex, reliyioan secrets, confided only to the
initiated and not to be communicated by them to ordi-
nary mortals; [of. Λ". F. ILrmnnn, Gottesdienstl. Alter-
tliiimer der Griechen, § 32]. In the Scriptures 1.
a hliJtlen or secret thing, not ohcioiis to tlie understanding :
1 Co. xiii. 2; xiv. 2; (of the secret rites of the Gentiles,
Sap. xiv. 15, 23). 2. a hidden purpose or caiinsil;
secret will : of men, τηϋ βασιΧίω!, Tob. xii. 7,11: της
βον\ήί αϋτοΰ, .Judith ii. 2 ; of God : μυστήρια flfoO, the
secret counsels which govern God in dealing ivith the
righteous, which are hidden from ungodly and wicked
men but plain to the godly, Sap. ii. 22. In the N. T.,
God's plan of providing salvation for men through
Christ, which was once hidilen but now is revealed :
Ro. xvi. 25 ; 1 Co. ii. 7 (on this see ev, I. 5 f.) ; Eph. hi.
9 ; Col. i. 2G sq. ; with toC θ(\ήματος αϋτοΰ added, Eph.
i. 9 ; ToC ufov, which God formed. Col. ii. 2 ; [1 Co. ii. 1
Wlltxt.]; ToO Χριστοί, respecting Christ, Col. iv. 3 ; τοΰ
(ναγγ(\ίου, which is contained and announced in the
gospel, Ejih. vi. 19; (τιΧΐσθη το μυστ. τοΰ θιοϋ, said of
the consummation of this purpose, to be looked for when
Christ returns. Rev. .\. 7 ; τα μ. ttjs βασίΧιία! τά>ν οΐρ. or
τον θ(οΰ, the secret purposes relative to the kingdom of
God, Mt. xiii. 11 ; Mk. iv. 11 ; Lk. viii. 10; used of cer-
tain single events decreed by God having reference to
his kingdom or the salvation of men, Ro. xi. 25 ; 1 Co.
XV. 51 ; of God's purpose to bless the Gentiles also with
Balvation through Christ [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 26],
Eph. iii. 3 cf. δ ; with toC Χριστοί added, ibid. vs. 4 ; oiVo-
νόμοι μυστηρίων θίοΰ, the stewards of God's mysteries,
i. e. those intrusted with the announcement of (iod's
secret purposes to men, 1 Co. iv. 1 ; used generally, of
Christian truth as hidden from ungodly men : with the
addition of τήί πι'στίωί, της (ίσ(β(1ας, which faith and
godliness embrace and keep, 1 Tim. iii. 9, 16 ; ro μυστ.
της ανομίας the mystery ο/ lawlessness, the secret pur-
pose formed by lawlessness, seems to be a tacit antithesis
to God's saving purpose, 2 Th. ii. 7. 3. Like Xn
and TiD in rabbinic writers, it denotes the mystic or
hidden .sen-fg : of an O. T. saying, Eph. v. 32 ; of a
name, Rev. xvii. 5 ; of an image or form seen in a vision.
Rev. i. 20 ; xvii. 5 ; of a dream, Dan. (Theodot.) ii. 18 sip
27-30, where the Sept. so render l^. (The Vulg. trans-
lates the word sacramentum in Dan. ii. 18; iv. 6 ; Tob.
xii. 7 ; Sap. ii. 22 ; Eph. i. 9 ; iii. 3,9; v. 32 ; 1 Tim. iii.
16; Rev. i. 20.) [On the distinctive N. T. use of the
■word cf. Campbell, Dissertations on the Gospels, diss. ix.
pt. i. ; Kendrick in B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Mystery ; B[V
Lghtft. on Col. i. 26.] *
μυ-ωΐΓ&ζω ; (μϋωψ, and this fr. μίιίίν τους !mat to ebnt
the eyes) ; to see dimly, see only what is near : 2 Pet. i. 9
[some (cf. R. V. mrg.) would make it mean here closing
the eyes; cf. our Eng. bLink'\. (Aristot. problem. 31,
16, 2.5.)•
μώλωψ, -ωποΓ, ό, (Hesych. τραΰμα κα\ 6 (Κ πΧηγης
αίματωόης τόπος η και τά ί^(ρ)(όμΐνα των πληγών ΰδατα),
α liruise, wale, wound that trickles with blood : 1 Pet. ή.
24 f r. Is. liii. 6 [where A. V. stripes']. (Gen. iv. 23 ; Ex.
xxi. 25 ; Is. i. 6. Aristot., Plut., Anthol., al.) *
μωμάομαι, -ωμαι : 1 aor. mid. ίμωμησάμην ; 1 aor. pass.
ίμωμήθην; (μώμος, (\. V .) ; fr. llom. down ; to blame, βηά
fault with, mock at: 2 Co. vi. 3; viii. 20. (Prov. ix. 7;
Sap. .\. 14.) •
μώμοϊ, -ου, ό, [perh. akin to μΰω, Curtius § 478 ; ct
Vanicek p. 732], blemish, blot, disgrace; 1. cen-
sure. 2. insult : of men who are a disgrace to a
society, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [A. V. blemishes]. (From Horn,
down ; Sept. for an, of bodily defects and blemishes.
Lev. xxi. 16 sijq.; Deut. xv. 21; Cant. iv. 7; Dan. i. 4;
of a mental defect, fault. Sir. xx. 24 (23).) •
μωραίνω : 1 aor. ('μώρανα ; 1 aor. pass, ϊμωράνθην ;
(μωρός) ; 1. in class. Grk. to be foolish, to act fool-
ishly. 2. in bibl. Grk. a. to make foolish : pass.
Ro. i. 22 (Is. xix. 11 ; .ler. x. 14 ; 2 S. xxiv. 10) ; i. q. to
prove a person or thing to be foolish : την σοφίαν τοΰ
κόσμου, 1 Co. i. 20 (την βουΧήν αυτών. Is. .\liv. 25). b.
to make Jlat and tasteless: pass, of salt that has lost its
strength and flavor, Mt. v. 13; Lk. xiv. 34.•
μωρ(α, -u;, ή. (μωρός), first in Hdt. I, 146 [Soph., aLj,
foolishness: 1 Co. i. 1«, 21, 23; ii. 14; iii. 19, (Sir. xx.
31).•
μωρολο -yCa, -at, ή, (μωροΧόγος), (stultiloijuium, Plaut.,
Yul<^.), foolish talking: Eph. v. 4. (Aristot. h. a. 1, 1 1 ;
Plut. mor. p. 504 b.) [Cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xxxiv.] *
μωρός, -ά. -όν, [on the accent cf. W. 52 (51 ) ; Chandler
§§ 404, AOa],fooli.'ih : with τυφλός, Mt. xxiii. 1 7, 1 9 [here
TTr WII txt. om. Lbr. μωρ.~\ ; ro μωρον τοϋ θ(οΰ, an act
or appointment of God deemed foolish by men, 1 Co. i.
25; i. q. without learning or erudition, 1 Co. i. 27; UL
18; iv. 10; imprudent, without forethought or wisdom,
Mt. vii. 26 ; xxiii. 1 7, 19 [see above] ; x.xv. *? sq. 8 ; i. q.
empty, useless, ζητήσας, 2 Tim. ii. 23 ; Tit. iii. 9 ; m
imitation of the Hebr. S3: (cf. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 1 ; Job
ii. 10) i. (p impious, godless, (because such a man neglects
and despises what relates to salvation), Mt. v. 22 ; [some
take the word here as a Hebr. term (ΓΤ113 rebel) e.x-
pressive of condemnation ; cf. Num. xx. 10 ; Ps. Ixviii.
8 ; but see the Syriac ; Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad
loc. ; Levy, Neuhebriiisch. u. Chald. AVorterbuch s. v.
onn]. (.Sept. for ^2:, Deut. xxxii. 6; Is. x.xxii. 5 sq.;
for S'p3, Ps. xciii. (xciv.) 8. [Aeschyl., Soph., a!.])*
Μωο-ήΐ (constantly so in the text. Rec. [in Strabo
(16, 2, 35 ed. Meineke) ; Dan. ix. 10, 11, Sept.], and in
Philo [cf. his " Buch v. d. Weltschopf." ed. Muller p. 1 1 7
(but Richter in his ed. has adopted Μωϋσής)], after the
Μωσης
421
Ναζαρέτ
Hebr. form ΠΠΟ, which in Ex. ii. 1 is derived fr. nc?p to
draw out), and Μωϋσήϊ (soin the Sept. [see Tdf.'s
4th ed. Proleg. p. xlii.], Jo-sejihus [" in Josephus tlie
readings vary; in the Antiquities lie still adheres to the
classic form (Μωσης), which moreover is the common
form in his writings," Miiller's note on Joseph, c. Ap. 1,
31, 4. (Here, again, recent editors, as Bekker, adopt
Κωϋσης uniformly.) On the fluctuation of Mss. cf. Otto's
note on Justin ]\lart. apol. i. § 3-2 init.], and in the N. T.
ed. Tdf. ; — a word which signifies in Egyptian water-
saved, i. e. 'saved from water'; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. vol.
ii. p. 313; and esp. 6'esenius, Thesaur. ii. p. 824 ; Knobel
on E.K. ii. 10; [but its etymol. is still in dispute; many
recent Egyptologists connect it with mesu i. e. ' child ' ;
on the various interpretations of the name cf. MuUer on
Joseph, c. Ap. I. c. ; Slanle;/ in B. D. s. v. Moses ; Schenkel
in his BL. iv. 240 sq.]. From the remarks of Fritzsche,
Gesenius, etc., it is evident also that the word is a trisyl-
lable, and hence should not be written Μωνσης as it is
by L Tr AVH, for ωυ is a dii)hthong, as is plain from
lavrm, tuvto, Ionic for iaxrrov, ταΐτό; [cf• Lipsitis,
Gramm. Untersuch. p. 140]; add, W. p. 44; [B. 19
(17)]; Eirald, Gesch. des Volkes Israel ed. 3 p. 119
note), -iws, 6, Mo.se.i, (Itala and Vulg. Mot/ses), the
famous leader and legislator of the Israelites in their
migration from Egypt to Palestine. As respects its de-
clension, everywhere in the N. T. the gen. ends in -ίω(
(as if from the nominative Μωϋσίύι), in Sept. -η, as Num.
iv. 41, 45, 49, etc. dat. -η (as in Sept., cf. Ex. v. 20;
xii. 28; xxiv. 1; Lev. viii. 21, etc.) and -el (for the
Mss. and accordingly the editors vary between the
two [but TWII -J only in Acts vii. 44 (influenced by
the Sept. ?), Tr in Acts 1. c. and Mk. ix. 4, 5, ; L in Acts
\. c. and Ro. ix. 15 txt. ; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 119 ; \VH.
App. p. 158]), Mt. xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 4; Jn. v. 46; ix.
29; Acts vii. 44; Ro. ix. 15; 2 Tim. iii. 8. ace. -ην (as
in Sept.), Acts vi. 11 ; vii. 35; 1 Co. x. 2; Heb. iii. 3;
once -4a, Lk. xvi. 29 ; cf. [Tdf. and WH. u. s.] ; W. § 10,
1 ; B. u. 8. ; [Etym. Magn. 597, 8]. By meton. i. q. the
books of Moses: Lk. xvi. 29; x.xiv. 27; Acts xv. 21;
2 Co. iii. 15.
Ν
[Ν, V : y {ίφ(\κυστικ6ν), cf. W. § 5, 1 b. ; B. 9 (8) ; Tdf.
Proleg. p. 9" sq. ; WH. App. p. 146 sq. ; Thiersch, De Pentat.
vers. Alex. p. 84 sq. ; Scrivener, Plain Introd. etc. ch. viii.
§ 4 ; Collation of Cod. Sin p. liv. ; see s. vv. διίο, (ίκοσι, iras.
Its omission by the recent editors in the case of verbs (esp.
in 3 pers. sing.) is rare. In ΛΥΗ, for instance, (wliere "the
omissions are all deliberate and founded on evidence ") it is
wanting in the case of ίση live times only (Mt. vi. 25; Jn.
vi. 55ftis; Acts xviii. 10; Gal. iv. 2, — apparently without
principle) ; in Tdf. never ; see esp. Tdf. u. s. In the dat. plur.
of the .3d decl. the Mss. vary; see esp. Tdf. Proleg. p. 98 and
WH. App. p. 146 sq. On c appended toaccus. sing, in α or i;
(t)) see ipariv. On the neglect of assimilation, particularly in
compounds with σύν and 4v, see those prepp. and Tdf. Pro-
leg, p. 73 sq. ; WII. App. p. 149 ; cf. B. 8 ; W.48. On the
interchange of ν and vv in such words as αττοκτΐννω {αττο-
κτίνω). ΐκχνννω {εκχύνω). evaros {^vvaTos), 4vfvi)Kovra [ivve-
ν^κοντα), ivios (evveos), ^Ιωάννη5 {'Ιωάνηί), and the like, see
the several words.]
Ναασσ-ών, (jlU'nj [i. e. 'diviner', 'enchanter']), ό, in-
decl., Naasfoii [or N^aa.ihon, or (best) AVi/i.vAon], a man
mentioned in (Ex. vi 23; Num. i. 7; Ruth iv. 20) Mt.
I. 4 and Lk. iii. 32.*
Ναγγοί, (fr. riJ3 to shine), ό, indecl., (\''ulg. [Naggae,
and (so A. V.)] Nagge), Naggai, one of Christ's ances-
tors : Lk. iii. 25.•
Ναζαρ€τ [(so Rec." everywhere ; Lchm. also in Mk.
i. 9; Lk.ii. 39,51; iv. 16; Jn. i. 45 (46) sq.; Tdf. in Mk.
i. 9; Jn.i. 45(46) sq.; Tr txt. in Lk. i. 26 ; ii. 4 ; iv. 16;
Jn. i. 45 (46) sq. ; Tr mrg. in Mk. i. 9 ; Lk. ii. 39, 51 ;
and WII everywhere except in four pass, soon to be
mentioned), Na^apcO (so Rec."' ten times, Rec.'"^' six
times, Τ and Tr except in the pass, already gi\ en or about
to be given; LinMt. ii. 23; xxi. 1 1 (so AVH here) ; Lk. i.
26 ; Acts .\. 38 (so WII here)), Νο^αράθ (L in Mt. iv.
13 and Lk. ii. 4, after cod. Δ but with "little other at-
testation" (Ilort)), Ν αζαρά (Mt. iv. 13TTrWH; Lk.
iv. 16 TWII)], ή, indecl., (and τά Νά^αρα, Orig. and JuL
African, in Euseb. h. e. 1, 7, 14 ; cf. Keim, Jesu von Naz.
i. p. 319 sq. [Eng. trans, ii. p. 16] and ii. p. 421 sq. [Eng.
trans, iv. p. 108], who thinks Nazara preferable to the
other forms [but see WH. App. p. 160'; Tdf. Proleg. p.
120; Scrivener, Introd. eh. viii. § 5; Alford, Greek Test,
vol. i. Proleg. p. 97]), Nazareth, a town of lower (ialilee,
mentioned neither in the O. T., nor by .losephus, nor in
the Talmud (unless it is to be recognized in the appellation
1V1 ;5, given there to Jesus Christ). It was built upon
a hill, in a very lovely region (cf. Renan, Xie de .lesus,
14»• ed. p. 27 sq. [Wilbour's trans. (N. Y. 1865) p. 69
sq. ; see also Robinson, Researches, etc. ii. 336 sq.]), and
was distant from Jerusalem a three days' journey, from
Tiberias eight hours [or less] ; it was the home of Jesus
(Mt. xiii. 54; Mk. vi. 1) ; its present name is en Nazi•
rah, a town of from five to six thousand inhabitants (cf•
Ναζαρηνόί
422
Ναοΰμ
Baedeker, Palestine and Syria, p. 859): Mt. ii. 23; iv.
13; xxi. 11 ; Mk. i. 9; Lk. i. 26 ; ii. 4, 39, 51 ; iv. 16;
Jn. i. 45 (4G) scj. ; Acts x. 39. As respects the He-
brew form of the name, it is disputed whether it was
1SJ 'a sprout', '!*''oot ', (so, hesiik-s others, Henijslenberg,
Christol des A. Τ ii. l-.'4 si^. [Ivng. traus. ii. lOil sq.]; but
cf. Giexeler'in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1831, p. 5«.S sqO. or
rr^yj ' protectress', ' ^uard ', (cf. 2 K. xvii. 9 ; so lieim
u. s.) or n'lV: ' sentinel ' (so Delilzsch in the Zeitschr. f.
Luth. Theoi. for 1876, p. 401). or ni.i'J 'watch-tower*
(no Ε watd in the Getting, gclehrt. Anzeigen for 1867,
p. 1602 S(|.). For a further account of the town cf. Rob-
inson, as above, pp. 333-343 ; Tohler, Nazareth in Palas-
tina. Berl. 1S6S; [Hackett in B. D. s. v. Jsazareth].*
Ναζαρηνοί, -oC, 6. a Nazarene, of Nazareth, sprunf/from
Ν<ιζαη•ι/ι, a patrial name a])plied by the Jews to Jesus,
because he had lived at Xazareth with his parents from
his birth until he made his public appearance : Mk i. 24;
xiv. 67 ; xvi. 6 ; Lk. iv. 34 ; [xxiv. 19 L mrg. Ϊ Tr txt.
ΛΥΗ]; and L Τ Tr WII in Mk. x. 47.*
Ναζωραΐος, -ου, 6, i. q. Ναζαρηνο!, q. v. ; Jesus is so
called in Mt. ii. 23 [cf. Ii. D. s. v. Nazarene ; Bleek,
Synopt. Evang. ad loc] ; xxvi. 71; Mk. x. 47 RG; I^k.
xviii. 37 ; xxiv. 19 RG L txt. Trmrg. ; Jn. xviii. 5, 7; xix.
19; Actsii.22; iii. 6 ; iv 10; vi. 14 ; [ix. 5. L br.] ; xxii.
8 ; xxvi. 9. o! Να^ωραΐοι [.\. V. the ^'azarenes~\, followers
of ^Ιησοΐις ό Νίΐ^ωραίοί, was a name given to the Christians
by the Jews, Acts xxiv. 5.*
Ναθάν or (so L mrg. Τ WII) Ναίάμ, ό, (jn: [' given ' sc.
of God]), Nathan : a son of David the king (2 S. v. 14),
Lk. iii. 31.*
Ναθαναήλ, 6, (Sxjnj gift of God), Nathanael, an inti-
mate disci|)le of Jesus : Jn. i. 45—49 (46-50) ; xxi. 2.
He is commonly thought to be identical with Bartlmlo-
meu; because as in Jn. i. 45 (46) he is associated with
Philip, so in Mt. x. 3 ; Mk. iii. 18 ; Lk. vi. 14 B.artholo-
mew is ; Nathanael, on this supposition, was liis personal
name, and Biirlliolomew a title derived from his father
(see BupioAopoiot). But in Actsi. 13 Thomas is placed
between Philip and Bartholomew ; [see Β D. s. v. Na-
thaniel]. Sjidlh in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theologie,
1868, pp. 108 sq<j. 309 scjq. [again 1880, p. 78 sqq.]
acutely but vainly tries to prove that the name was formed
by the Fourth Kvangelist symbolically to designate ' the
disciple wliom Jesus loved (see Ιωάννης, 2).*
vot, a p.article of assertion or confirmation [akin to
νη ; cf. Donaldson, Cratylus § 189], fr. Hom. down, yea,
verily, truly, assuredly, even so : Mt. xi. 26 ; Lk. x. 21 ;
Philem. 20 ; Rev. i. 7 ; xvi. 7 ; xxii. 20 ; vai. λέγω ΰμϊν
κτλ., Mt. xi. 9 ; Lk. vii. 26 ; xi. 51 ; xii. 5 ; vai Xtyei το
jrveOfio, Rev. xiv. 13; it is responsive and confirmatory
of the substance of some cpiestion or statement : Mt. i.\.
28 ; xiii. 51 ; xv. 27; xvii. 25 ; xxi 16 ; Mk. vii. 28 ; Jn.
xi. 27 ; xxi. Ι.ϊ sq. ; Acts v. 8 (9) ; xxii. 27 ; Ro. iii. 29 ;
a repeated vai, most assuredly, [.-\.V. yea. .'/«(], expresses
emphatic assertion, ^It. λ'. 37; ήτω νμώντό vai vat, let your
vai be vai, i. e. let your allegation be true, Jas. v. 12 [B.
163 (142) ; W. 59 (58)] ; tivai or ylveadat vai καϊ οΰ, to
be or show one's self double-tongued, i. e. faithless, wavep
ing, false, 2 Co. i. 18 sq. ; ίνα παρ (μο\ το vcu να\ και τΑ οί
οΰ, that with me should be found both a solemn affirma-
tion and a most emphatic denial, i. e. that I so form my re-
solves as, at the dictate of pleasure or profit, not to carry
them out, ibid. 17[cf. W.460 (429)]; vat ίναϋτω yiyovrv,
in him what was promised has come to pass, ibid. 1 9 ;
€πσγγ€λύΐί ef αυτω το ναι sc. yfyovaatv, have been fulfilltMl, ,
have been confirmed by the event, ibid. 20 [cf. Meyer
ail loc.]. It is a particle of appeal or entreaty, like the
[Eng. yeal (Germ. /a) : with an imperative, vat ■ • . (τυλ-
λαμβάνυυ airaU, Phil. iv. 3 (where llec. has καί for ναι);
va'i ίμχου. Rev. .xxii. 20 Rec. ; so vai vai, Judith ix. 12.
[A classification of the uses of vai in the N. T. is given
by Ellicott on Pliil. iv. 3 ; cf. Green, ' Crit. Note ' on Mt.
xi. 26.] •
Ναιμάν, see ΝΕίμάκ.
Ναίν [WII NdiV, (cf. I, ι)], (f'S: a pasture; cf. Simonis,
Onomast. N. T. p. 115), ή, Nain, a town of Galilee, situ-
ated at the northern base of Little Ilermon; modern
Nein, a petty village inhabited by a very few families,
and not to be confounded with a village of the same name
beyond the Jordan (Joseph, b. j. 4, 9, 4): Lk. vii. 11.
[Cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 552 sq.] •
ναοί, -οϋ, ό, (ναΐω to dwell), Sept. for ιΤΓΙ, used of the
temple at Jerusalem, but only of the sacred edifice
(or sanctuary) itself, consisting of the Holy place and
the Holy of holies (in class. Grk. used of the sanctuary or
cell of a temple, where the image of the go 1 was placed,
called also δό /iot, σηκά{, which is to be distinguished from
TO Upov, the whole temple, the entire consecrated en-
closure; this distinction is observed also in the Bible;
see i€pov, p. 299•) : Mt. xxiii. 16 sq. 35; x.xvii. 40; Mk.
xiv. 58 ; XV. 29; Jn. ii. 19 sq.; Rev. xi. 2; nor need Mt.
xxvii. 5 be regarded as an exception, provided we sup-
pose that Judas in his desperation entered the Holy place,
which no one but the priests was allowed to enter [(note
the fi's (al. (v) of TTrAV'H)]. with ueov, τοϋ θ(οΰ,
added : Mt. xxvi. 61 ; 1 Co. iii. 17 ; 2 Co. vi. 16; 2 Th.
ii. 4 ; Rev. xi. 1 ; used specifically of the Holy place,
where the priests officiated : Lk. 1. 9, 21 sq.; of the Holy
of holies (see καταπέτασμα), Mt. xxvii. 51 ; Mk. xv. 38;
Lk. xxiii. 45. in the visions of the Revelation used of
the temple of the ' New .Jerusalem ' : Rev. iii. 12 ; vii. 1 5 ;
xi. 19; xiv. 15, 17 ; XV. 5 sq. 8; xvi. 1,17; of any temple
whatever prepared for the true God, Acts vii. 48 Rec. ;
xvii. 24. of miniature silver temples modelled after the
temple of Diana [i. e. Artemis (q. v.)] of Ephesus, Acts
xix. 24. ό Seas vaos αυτής eariv, takes the place of a tem-
ple in it. Rev. xxi. 22. metaph. of a company of Chris-
tians, a Christian church, ?s dwelt in by the Spirit of
God : 1 Co. iii. 16 ; 2 Co. vi. 16 ; Eph. ii. 21 ; for the same
reason, of the bodies of Christians, 1 Co. vi. 19. of the
body of Christ, ό vaht τοΟ σώματος αϋτοϋ (epexeget. gen.
[W. 531 (494)]), .In. ii. 21, and ace. to the Evangelist's
interpretation in 19 also. [(From Hom. on.)]*
Ναοΐμ, (Dinj consolation), ό, Nahum, a certain Is»
raelite, one of the ancestors of Christ : Lk. iii. 25.*
Ιρδος
423
veKpo^
vdpSos, -ου, η, (a Sanskrit word [cf. Fick as in Low
below]; Hebr. T^:, Cant. i. 12; iv. 13 sq.); a.
nard, the head or spike of a fragrant East Indian plant
belonging to the genus V a 1 e r i a η a, which yields a j nice
of delicious odor which the ancients used (either pure
or mixed) in the preparation of a most precious oint-
ment; hence b. nard oil οτ ointment ; so Mk. xiv.
3; Jn. xii. 3. Cf. Winer, RWB. s. v. iSlarde; RUetschi
in Ilerzog .x. p. 203 ; Furrer in Schenkel p. 286 sq. ;
[Low, Aramaische Pflanzennamen (Leip. 1881), § 316
p. 368 sq. ; Rui/le in Alex.'s Kitto s. v. Nerd; Birdwood
in the 'Bible Educator' ii. 152].*
Νάρκΐ(Γσο5, -ου, ό, Narcissux [i. e. ' daffodil '], a Roman
mentioned in Ro. xvi. 11, whom many interpreters with-
out good reason suppose to be the noted freedraan of the
emperor Claudius (Suet. Claud. 28 ; Tac. ann. 11,29 sq. ;
12,57 etc.) [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip, p. 175]; in op-
position to this opinion cf. Win. RWB. 8. v.; Rilelschi
in Ilerzog x. 202 sq. ; [B. D. s. v.].*
νανα-γίω, -ώ : 1 aor. ίναυάγησα ; (fr. vavayas ship-
wrecked ; and this fr. uait, and αγννμι to break) ; freq.
in Grk. writ, from Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, to suffer ship-
wreck: prop. 2 Co. xi. 25; metaph. πβρί την πίστι» (as
respects [A. V. concerning, see nepi, II. b.] the faith),
1 Tim. i. 19.•
ναϋ-κληρο$, -ου, 6, (vavs and κλήρος), fr. Hdt. [and Soph.]
down, a ship-owner, ship-masler, i. e. one who hires out his
vessel, or a portion of it, for purposes of transportation :
Acts -xxvii. 11.•
vavs, ace. vavv, η, (fr. νάω or νίω, to flow, float, swim),
β s^i/j, ies5i/ of considerable size: Acts xxvii. 41. (From
Horn, down; Sept. several times for 'JK and n"JX.) *
ναύτηϊ, -ου, ό, α sailor, seaman, mariner: Acta xxvii.
27, 30; Rev. xviii. 17. (From Horn, down.)•
Ναχώρ, ό, (il'nj fr. l^n to burn ; [Philo de cong. erud.
grat. § 9 N. ίρμηνιύίται φωτός άνάπαυσις; al. al. ; see B. D.
Am. ed. s. v.]), the indecl. prop, name, Nachor [or (more
com. but less accurately) Nahor'] (Gen. xi. 22), of one of
the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 34.*
veavias, -ou, 6, (It. veav, and this fr. νίος ; cf. ^ryiOTaf
[q. v.], ξννάν), fr. Horn, down ; Hebr. ^},'3 and "11Π3 ; a
young man : Acts xx. 9 ; xxiii. 1 7, and R (i in 18 [so here
WH txt.], 22 ; it is used as in Grk. writ., like the Lat. adu-
lesce.ns and the Hebr. I^'J (Gen. .xU. 1 2), of men between
twenty-four and forty years of age [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
213; Diog. Laert. 8, 10; other reff. in Steph. Thesaur.
s. vv. ν(ΰνις, i/fafiVicor] : Acts vii. 58.•
vcav(o-Kos, -ου. ό, (fr. vtav, see ν^ανίας ; on the endint^
-ίσκος, -ίσκη, which has dimin. force, as άνθρωπίσκος,
βασίλίσκος, τταώίσκη, etc., cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 443),
fr. Hdt. down ; Sept. chiefly for Ίΐπ3 and ty: ; a young
man, youth: Mt. xLx. 20, 22; Mk. xiv. 51*; xvi. 5; Lk.
vii. 14; Actsii. 17; [and LTTrWHin xxiii. 18 (here
WH mrg. only), 22] ; 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. ; like -t;'J (2 S. ii.
14 ; Gen. xiv. 24, etc. ; cf. Germ. Bursche, Knappe i. q.
Knabe, [cf. our colloquial "boys", "lads"]) used of a
young attendant or servant : so the plur. in Mk. xiv. 51
Kec. ; Acts v. 10.•
NeoiroXis, tat, ή, Neapolis, a maritime city of Mace-
donia, on the gulf of Strymon, having a port [of. Lewin,
St. Paul, i. 203 n.] and colonized by Chalcidians [see B. D.
s. V. Neapolis ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip., Introd. § iii.] :
Acts xvi. 11 [here Tdf. Ntav ποΚιν, WH Seav Πόλιν, Tr
Nfai» nSKiv ; cf. B. 74 ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 604 sq.]. (Strab.
7 p. 330; Plin. 4, (11) 18.)•
Νίίμάν and (so L Τ Tr M'H after the Sept. [see WH.
App. p. 159 sq.]) Ναιμάι-, ό (piJJ pleasantness), Naaman
(so Vulg. [also A'ema/i]), a commander ot the Syrian
armies (2 K. v. 1) : Lk. iv. 27.*
veKpos, -ά. -όν, (akin to the Lat. neco, nex [fr. a r. sig-
nifying ' to disappear ' etc. ; cf. Curtius § 93 ; Fick i. p.
123; Vanicek p. 422 sq.]), Sept. chiefly for n? ; dead,
i• e. 1. prop. a. one that has breathed his last,
lifeless: Mt. xxviii. 4 ; Mk. ix. 26 ; Lk. vii. 15; Acts v.
10; XX. 9 , xxviii. 6 ; Heb. xi. 35 ; Rev. i. 1 7 ; i^'i vfKpdis,
if men are dead (where death has occurred [see eVi, B.
2 a. t. p. 233' fin.]), Heb. ix. 1 7 ; eydpeiv νικροϋς, Mt. x. 8 ;
xi. 5; Lk. vii. 22; hyperbolically and proleptically i. q. as
ij already dead, sure to die, destined inevitably to die : τ&
σύμα, Ro. Λ'ΐϋ. 10 (το σώμα and το σωμάτιον φνσΐΐ νΐκρόν,
Epict. diss. 3, 10, 15 and 3, 22, 41 ; in which sense Luther
called the human body, although alive, einen alten Maden-
sack [cf. Shakspere's thou worms-meat ']) ; said of the
body of a dead man (so in Hom. often ; for nS^], a corpse,
Deut. xxviii. 26; Is. xxvi. 19; Jer vii. 33; ix. 22; xix.
7) : /irra τών ν(κρων, among the dead, i. e. the buried, Lk.
xxiv. 5 ; θάψαι τοϋϊ νεκρούς, Mt. viii. 22 ; Lk. ix. 60 ;
όστί'α veKpaiv, Mt. xxiii. 27 ; of the corpse of a murdered
man, αίμα ώς νικροΰ. Rev. xvi. 3 (for jnn, Ezek. xxxvii.
9 ; for "7^0, thrust through, slain, Ezek. ix. 7 ; xi. 6). b.
deceased, departed, one whose soul is in Hades : Rev. i. 18 ;
ii. 8 ; νικρος ην, was like one dead, as good as dead, Lk.
XV. 24, 32 ; plur., 1 Co. xv. 29 ; Rev. xiv. 13; iv Χριστά,
dead Christians (seeev, I. 6 b. p. 211''), 1 Th. iv. 16 ; very
often oi vfKpoi and ν(κρηί (without the art. ; see W. p. 123
(117) and cf. B. 89 (78) note) are used of the assembly
of the dead (see άνάστασις, 2 and tyeipw, 2) : 1 Pet. iv. 6 ;
Rev. xx. 5, 12 SI).; τ\ς άπο των νίκρών, one (returning)
from the dead, the world of spirits, Lk. xvi. 30 ; tit ν€κρών,
from the dead, occurs times too many to count (see άνά-
στασις. άνίστημι. eyeipia) : avayeiv τίνα ck v., Ro. X. 7; Heb.
xiii. 20 ; ζωη ex νικρων, life springing forth from death,
i. e. the return of the dead to life [see «, I. 5], Ro. xi.
1 5 ; πρωτότοκος ϊκ των vexp. who was the first that returned
to life from among the dead. Col. i. 18; also ττρωτότ. τών
v€Kp. Rev. i. 5 ; ζωοποιε'ιν τοίις v. Ro. iv 17 ; iyeipeiv TLva
από τών v. to rouse one to quit (the assembly of) the dead,
Mt. xiv. 2 ; xxvii. 64 ; xxviii. 7 ; xpivfiv ζώντας κ. ν(κρούς,
2 Tim. iv. 1 ; 1 Pet. iv. 5 ; κριτής ζώντων κ. νεκρών. Acts
χ. 42 ; ν€κρών κ. ζώντων Kvpifvfiv, Ro. xiv. 9. c. desti-
tute of life, wilhoiil life, inanimate (i. q. άψυχος) : τό σώμα
χωρΧς πνίΰματος vcKpov ϊστιν, Jas. ii. 26 ; οΰκ ?στιι> (ό) θ(ος
ικκρών άλλα ζώντων, God is the guardian God not of the
dead but of the living, Mt. xxii. 32; Mk. xii. 27; Lk. xx.
38. 2. trop. a. [spiritually dead i. e.] rfes/iiureo/
α life that recognizes and is devoted to God, because given
veKpo'o
424
vewKopot
up to trespasses and sins; indclife as respects doing rii/ht:
Jn. V. 2.7; Ro. vi. 13; Epli. v. 14; Rev. iii. 1; with Toit
ηαριιπτώμιισιν (dat. of cause [cf. W. 412 (384 sq.)]) added,
E|>h. ii. 1, 5; (v [but Ί" Tr Wfl ora. fV] rois παρατττ. Col.
ii. 13; in tlie pointed savin;; 3(f)€tTovs xficpoOt θάψαι tovs
iavTUv vtKpols, leave those who are inditlerent to the sal-
vation offered thtni in the gospel, to bury the bodies of
their own dead, Mt.viii. 22; I,k. i.\. liO. b. mu\. desti-
tute oj'fnrce or power, inactivi•, inoperative : rfi αμαρτία,
unaffected by the desire to sin [cf. \V. 210 (19^); 1^•
§ 133, \->], Ro. vi. 11 ; of things: Αμαρτία, Ro. vii. 8;
πίστκ, .las. ii. 1 7, 20 [R G], 2il ; (pya, powerless and fruit-
less (see €i>yov, 3 p. 248' bot.), Heb. vi. 1 ; L\. 14. [Cf.
θνητός, fin.]
νίκρόω, -ώ : 1 aor. impv. ικκρώσατί; pf. pass. ptcp.
ρινίκρωμίνο!', to make dead (Vulgate and Lat. Fathers
viiirlijico), to put to death, slay, τινά, prop., Anthol. a|ip.
313,5; pass. ««κρωμίκοΓ, hvperbolically, triirn out, of an
impotent old man, lleb. .\i. 12; also σώμα vcvfKp- Ro. iv.
19; equiv. to lo deprive 0/ power, destroy l/ie sirenr/lli oj:
τα μίλη, i. e. the evil desire lurking in the members (of
the body), Col. iii. 5. (τα δόγματα, Antonin. 7, 2 ; την
(ξιν, Plut. de primo frig. 21 ; [άνθρωπος, of obduracy,
Eiiictet. diss. 1, 5, 7].) '
ViKpuo-is, -ίωί, η, (vfκpόω) ; 1. prop, a pulling lo
death (Vulg. morlificatio in 2 Co. iv. 10), killing. 2.
i. q. TO ναφοΰσθαι, [the being put to death], with τοΰ
Ίησηΰ added, i. e. the (protracted) death [A. V. the
di/tiir/'j which .Jesus underwent in God's service [on the
gen. cf. W. 189 (1 78) no(e], Paul so styles the marks of
perpetual trials, misfortimes, hardships attended with
peril of death, evident in his body [cf. Meyer], 2 Co.
iv. 10. 3. 1. q. TO ν(ν(κρωμίΐΌν civai, Ihe dead state
[A. V. deadness"], utter sluggishness, (of bodily members
and organs, Galen) : Ro. iv. 19.*
ν€θ-μηνΙα, see νονμηνία.
vc'os, -a,-ov, [allied with Lat. norus, Germ, neu, Eng. new;
Curtius § 433], as in (irk. auth. fr. Horn, down, 1.
recently bom, young, youthful: Tit. ii. 4 (for "^i'J, Gen.
xx.xvii. 2 ; Ex. x.N.xiii. 11); οΓνοί w'os, recently made, Mt.
ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37-39 [but 39 WII in br.],
(Sir. ix. 10). 2. new. 1 Co. v. 7; Heb. xii. 24;
i q. born again, avBpamos (q. v. 1 f.). Col. iii. 10. [Syn.
see καινός, fin.] '
vtoo-o-os and (so TWH, see νοσσιά) νοσσάς, -ov, ό,
(κίΌϊ), a young (creature), young bird: Lk. ii. 24. The
form νοσσός appears in the Vat. txt. of the Sept. ; but
in cod. Ale.x. everywhere ι>ίοσσόί; cf. Sturz, De dial.
Maced. p. 1S5 sq. ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 206 sq. ; [cf. W.
24]. (In (irk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; Sept. often for J3,
of the young of animals, as Lev. xii. 6, 8 ; Job xxxviii.
41.)•
ν€6τη5, -ιμος, ή, (νιος), fr. Ilom. down; Sept. chiefly
for D""ii> J; youth, youthjul age: 1 Tim. iv. 12; tV vtorrf
ros μου, from my boyhood, from my youth, Mt. xix. 20
[R G] ; Mk. X. 20 ; Lk. xviii. 21 ; Acts .x.xvi. 4 ; Gen. viii.
21; Jobxxxi. 18, etc.*
νί6-φυτθ5, -ην, {viot and φύω), newly-planted (Job xiv.
9 ; Is. V. 7, etc.) ; trop. β new convert, neophyte, [A. V.
novice, i. e.j (one who has recently become a Christian):
1 Tim. iii. 6. (Eccles. writ.) •
Ν(ρων [by etymoh 'brave', 'bold*],-ωμoΓ, 6, Nero, the
well-known Roman emperor: 2 Tim. iv. 23 Rec. [i. e. in
tlie subscription].*
vtia; 1 aor. ptcp. ν(νσας; to give a nod; to signify by a
nod, [A. V. to beckon'l : τιχί, foil, by an inf. of what one
wishes to be done, Jn. xiii. 24; Acts xxiv. 10. (From
Horn, down ; Sept. Prov. iv. 25.) [Comp. : δια-, eV, tv-,
('πι-, κατα-ν^ΰω.'] *
ν€ψ<λη, -ης, η, (ν(φος), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. esp. for
Ui\, but also for 3j,; and ρΠΕ?; a cloud: [v. φωτιινή, Mt.
xvii. 5]; Mt. xxiv. 30; xxvi. G4; Mk. ix. 7; xiii. 26; xiv.
C2 ; Lk. ix. 34 sq. ; xii. 54 ; xxi. 27 ; Acts L 9 ; 1 Th. iv.
17; 2 Pet. ii. 17 [Rec.]; Jude 12; Rev. i. 7; x. 1; xi.
12; xiv. 14 Sijq. ; of that cloud in which Jehovah is said
(Ex. xiii. 21 sq., etc.) to have gone before the IsraeHtes
on their march through the wilderness, and which Paul
represents as spread over them (ύπο την νιφί^ην ησα»,
cf. Ps. civ. (cv.) 39 ; Sap. x. 1 7) : 1 Co. x. 1 sq. [Syn.
see ι/ίφοΓ.] *
Νίφβαλί(μ [and (so Τ edd. 2, 7, WH in Rev. vii. 6)
Τ<Ι(φθάλίμ: see WII. A pp. p. 155, and s. v. I, i], 6, ("Snsj,
i. e. ' my wrestling ' [cf. Gen. .xx.x. 8], or ace. to what
seems to be a more correct interpretation ' my crafti-
ness ' [cf. Joseph, antt. 1, 19, 8; Test. xii. Patr. test.
Neph. § 1], fr. Sna unused in Kal; cf. Ruetschi in Ilerzog
.X. p. 200 scp), Naphtali, the sixth son of the patriarch
Jacob, by Bilhah, Rachel's maid : Rev. vii. 6 ; by meton.
his posterity, the tribe of Naphtali, Mt. iv. 18, 15.*
ν('ψο$, -out, [allied with Lat. nubes, nebula, etc.], τό,
Sept. for 3>; and |:;•, a cloud; in the N- T. once trop.
a large, dense multitude, a throng: μαρτύρων, Heb. xii. 1
often so in prof, auth., as «φ. Λ'ρώων, πιζών, ψαρύν, κο-
λοίών, Horn. II. 4, 274 ; 16,66; 17,755; 2.J,133; άνθρώ-
πων, Ildt. 8, 109; στρονθων, Arstph. av. 578; ακριδών,
Diod. 3, 29; peditum equitumque nubes, Liv. 35, 49.*
I Syn. ν4φος, ν(φί\η: vt'^os is general, «ψίλτ; specific ;
the former denotes tlie great, shapeless collection of vapor
obscuring the heavens ; the latter designates particular and
definite masses of tlie same, suggesting form and limit. Cf.
Schmidt vol. i. ih. 36 |
vt^pii, -οΰ, 5, a kidney (Plat., Arstph.) ; plur. ike kid-
neys, the loins, as Sept. for m'Ss, used of the inmost
thoughts, feelings, purposes, of the soul : with the addi-
tion of καρδίας. Rev. ii. 23, with which cf. Ps. vii. 10;
Jer. xi. iO; xvii. 10; Sap. i. 6.*
ve(i>-Kdpos, -ου, «5, η, (veas or ναός, and κορίω to sweep ;
[questioned by some ; a hint of this deriv. is found in
Philo de sacerd. honor. § 6 (cf. veaKopia, de somniis 2,
42), and Hesvch. s. v. defines the word ό τον vabv κοσμών
Kopeiv yap τ6 aaipeiv ΤΚεγον (cf. s. v. σηκοκόρος ; so Etym.
.Ma^'n. 407, 27, cf. s. v. ν(ωκόρος) ; yet Suidas s. v. ico/Jif
p. 2157 c. says v. ου χ ό πάρων τ. ν. αλλ' 6 ΐπιμ(\ουμ(νοί
αυτόν (cf. S. νν. νίωκόρος, σηκοκάρος) ; hence some connect
the last half with root κορ. κο\, cf . Lat. euro, coloj) ; 1.
prop, one who sweeps and cleans a temple. 2. βηί
ν€ωτ€ρίκος
425
who has charge of a temple, lo keep and adorn it, a sac-
ristan : Xen. an. 5, 3, 6 ; Plat. legg. 6 p. 759 a. 3.
the worshipper of a deity (oCi i. e. the Israelites ό deos
iavra ν(ωκόρου^ rjytv through the wilderness, Joseph, b. j.
5, 9, 4) ; as appears from coins still extant, it was an
honorary title [temple-I.eeper or temple-warden (cf. 2
above)] of certain cities, esp. of Asia ilinor, in which
the special worship of some deity or even of some deified
human ruler had been established (cf. Stephanus, Thes. v.
p. 1472 sq.; [cf. B. D. s. v. worshipper J); so v. τη! Άμτϊ-
μιδο9, of Ephesus, Acts xix. 35 ; [see Bp. Lghtft. in Con-
temp. Rev. for 1878, p. 294 sq. ; Wood, Discoveries at
Ephesus (Lond. 1877), .\pp. passim].*
ν£ωτ£ρίκ09, -η, -of, (vftuTfpos, (j. v.), peculiar to the age
of ijoulh, youlhful: ίπιθυμίαι, 2 Tim. ii. 22. (3 Mace. iv.
8; Polyb. 10, 24, 7; Jo.-ej)!!. antt. IG, 11, 8.)*
vcUTcpos, -a, -ov, (compar. of «Or, q. v.), [fr. Horn,
down], younger; i. e. a. younger (than now), Jn.
xxi. 18. b. young, youthful, [A. V. younger (rela-
tively)]: 1 Tim. V. 11, 14; Tit. ii. 6; opp. to πρεσβύτε-
ροι, 1 Tim. V. 1 sq. ; 1 Pet. v. 5. c. [strictly] younger
by birth: Lk. xv. 12 sq. (4 Mace. xii. 1). d. an
attendant, servant, (see νεανίσκο!, fin.) : Acts v. G ; infe-
rior in rank; opp. to ό μείζων, Lk. xxii. 26.*
νή, a particle employed in affirmations and oaths,
(common in Attic), and joined to an ace. of the pers.
(for the most part, a divinity) or of the thing affirmed
or sworn by [B. § 149, 17]; by (Lat. per. Germ, bei) :
1 Co. XV. 31 (Gen. xlii. 15 sq.).•
νήθω; to spin: Mt. vi. 28 ; Lk. xii. 27. (Plat, polit.
p. 289 c. ; Anthol. ; for Πΐφ, Ex. xxxv. 25 sq.) *
νψηάΐω [cf. \V. 92 (87)]; (νήπιο!, q. v.) ; to be a babe
(infant): 1 Co. xiv. 20. (Hippocr. ; eccles. writ.)*
νήτηοί, -α, -οκ, (fr. νη, an insep. neg. prefix [Lat. ne-
/a.v. ne-qunm, ni-si, etc. cf. Curtius § 437], and error); as
in Grk. writers fr. Hom. down, a. an infant, little
child: Mt. xxi. IG (fr. Ps. viii. 3) ; 1 Co. xiii. 11 ; Sept.
esp. for '7'^li* and I'^ij.'• b. a minor, not of age : Gal.
iv. 1 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. c. metaph. childish,
untaught, unsLilled, (Sept. for 'Γ13, Ps. xviii. (xLx.) 8 ;
cxviii. (cxix.) 130; Prov. i. 32): Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21 ;
Ro. ii. 20; Gal. iv. 3; Eph. iv. 14; opp. to τέλειοι, the
more advanced in understanding and knowledge, Ileb.
v. 13 sq. (Philo de agric. § 2) ; νήπ- έν Χριστώ, in things
pertaining to Christ, 1 Co. iii. 1. In 1 Th. ii. 7 L λΥΠ
[cf. the latter's note ad loc] have hastily received νηπιοι
for the common reading ήτηοι."
Νηρίύϊ [(cf. Vanicek p. 1158)], -ίωι, 6, Nereus, a
Christian who lived at Rome : Ro. xvi. 15 [where Lmrg.
NTjpe'a»]•*
Νηρ( and (so Τ Tr WIT) ίίηρεί [see «, »], i, (fr. ij a
lam])), Neri, the grandfather of Zenibbabel : Lk. iii. 27.*
νησίον, -ου, το', (dimin. of νησο!), a small island: Acts
ixvii. IG [(.Strabo)].*
νή<Γ<«, -ov. ή, («ω to swim, prop. ' floating land '). Q»
island: Acts .xiii. 6; xxvii. 26; xxviii. 1, 7, 9, 11; Rev.
L 9 ; vi. 14 ; xvi. 20. (Sept. for 'K ; [fr. Hom. down].) *
ι^ΚΓΤίίο, -ar, ή, {ντστενω. q. v.), a fasting, fast, i. e. ab-
stinence from food, and a. voluntary, as a religione
exercise: of private fasting, Mt. xvii. 21 [TWHom. Tr
br. the vs.] ; Mk. ix. 29 [T \VH om. Tr mrg. br.] ; Lk. iL
37 ; Acts xiv. 23; 1 Co. vii. 5 Rec. of the public fast
prescribed by the Mosaic Law (Lev. xvi. 29 sqq. ; .xxiii
27 sqq. [BB.UD. s. v. Fasts, and for reff. to .Strab., Philo,
Joseph., Plut., see Sojih. Lex. s. v. 1]) and kept yearly
on the great day of atonement, the tenth of the month
Tisri : Acts xxvii. I) (the month Tisri comprises a part
of our September and October [cf. B.D. s. v. month (at
end)]; the fast, accordingly, occurred in the autumn, ή
χειμίριο! ωρα, when navigation was usually dangerous
on account of storms, as was the case with the voyage
referred to). b. a fasting to which one is driven by
want: 2 Co. vi. 5; xi. 27; (Ilippocr., Aristot., Philo,
Joseph., Pint., Ael., Athen., al. ; Sept. for Dli').*
νηστίύω ; f ut. νηστείσω ; 1 aor. [inf. νηστείσαι (Lk. v.
34 Τ WII Trtxt.)], l)tcp. νηστεύσα! ; (fr. v^ortt, q. v.) ;
to fast (Vulg. and eccles. writ, j'ejuno), i. e. to abstain as
a religious exercise from food and drink: either entirely,
if the fast lasted but a single day, Mt. vi. 16-18; Lx.
14 sq.; Mk. ii. 18-20; Lk. v. 33, [34, 3.5]; xviii. 12; Acts
.\. 30 Ii G ; xiii. 2, [3] ; or from customary and choice
nourishment, if it continued several days, Mt. iv. 2, cf.
xi. 18; νηστεύει συνέχω! και αρτον εσθιει μόνον μετά αΧα-
ΤΟ! κα'ι το ποτΰν αΐτοϋ ΰδωρ. Acta Thom. § 20. (Arstph.,
Plut. mor. p. 626 sq. ; Ael. v. h. 5, 20; [Joseph, c. Ap.
1, 34, 5 (where see Miiller)]; Sept. for Dli•.) *
νήστίϊ, ace. plur. νήστεί! and (so Tdf. [cf. Proleg. p-
118]) νήστί! (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 326; Fritzsche, Com.
on Mk. p. 796 sq.; cf. [WH. App. p. 157']; B. 26 (23)),
0, ή, (fr. vr] and εσθίω, see νηπιοί), fasting, not having
eaten: Mt. xv. 32; Mk. viii. 3. (llom., Aeschyl., Hip-
pocr., Arstph., al.) *
νηφάλ(θΐ (so Rec." in 1 Tim. iii. 2, 11. [where Rec.'"
-Xaior], after a later form) and νηφάλιο! [" alone well
attested" (Hort)], -ov, (in Grk. auth. generally of three
term.; Ιτ. νηφω), sober, temperate ; abstaining from wine,
either entirely (Joseph, antt. 3, 12, 2) or at least /rom its
immoderate use : 1 Tim. iii. 2, 1 1 ; Tit. ii. 2. (In prof,
auth., esp. Aeschyl. and Plut., of things free from all
infusion or addition of wine, as vessels, offerings, etc.)*
νήφω; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. [ilur. νή\Ι/ατε•, fr. Theogn.,
Soph., Xen. down ; lo be sober ; in the N. T. everywh.
trop. to be calm and collected in spirit ; to be temperate,
dispassionate, circumspect : 1 Th. v. 6, 8 ; 2 Tim. iv. 5 ;
1 Pet. i. 13; v. 8; eir τα! προσενχά!, unto (the offering
of) prayer, 1 Pet. iv. 7. [Syn. see aypimvia ; and on the
word see EUic. on Tim. 1. c. Comp. : ava-, έκ-νήφω.^*
Ntyep, ό, (a Lat. name ['black ']), Niger, surname of
the prophet Symeon : Acts xiii. 1.*
Νικόνωρ, r(i. e. ' conqueror ')],-opor, 6, Nicanor, of An-
tioch [?], one of the seven deacons of the church at Je-
rusalem: Acts vi. 5.•
νικάω, -ώ; pres. ptcp. dat. νικοϊιντι. Rev. ii. 7 Lchm. 17
LTTr, [yet all νικωνται in .xv. 2] (cf. ερωτάω, init.);
fut. ΐΊκιίσω; \ &οτ. ενϊκησα; γιί.νενίκηκα; (νίκη); [fr. Hom.
down] ; to conquer [A. V. overcome'\ ; a. absol. le
νίκη
426
V06C*
carry off the victory, come off victorious : of Christ, vic-
torious over all his foes, Rev. iii. 21 ; vi. 2 ; ΐνίκησί» . ■ ■
άνοΊξαι κτΚ. hath so cotKjuered that he now has the right
and power to open etc. llev. v. 5 ; of Christians, that hold
fast their faith even unto death against the power of their
foes, and their temptations and persecutions, Rev. ii. 7,
11, 17, 26; iii. 5, 12, 21; .\.\i. 7; w. «κ τοΟ fli;piou added,
to comiuer and thereby• free themselves from the power
of the beast [R. V. to come victorious from; of. W. 367
(.«4 sq.) I B. 147 (128)], Rev. xv. 2. when one is ar-
raigned or goes to law, to icin the case, maintain one's
cause, (so in the Attic orators ; also vtxav δίκην, Eur. El.
955) : Ro. iii. 4 (from Sept. of Ps. 1. (li.) 6). b. with
ace. of the obj. : τινά, by force, Lk. xi. 22 ; Rev. xi. 7 ;
xiii. 7 [L om. WH Tr mrg. br. the cl.] ; of Christ the
conciueror of his foes. Rev. xvii. 14 ; τον κόσμον, to deprive
it of power to harm, to subvert its influence, .In. xvi. 33 ;
νικαν Tiva or η is used of one who by Christian constancy
and courage keeps himself unharmed and spotless from
his adversary's devices, solicitations, assaults: tlie devil,
1 .In. ii. 13 sq. ; Rev. xii. 1 1 ; false teachers, I Jn. iv. 4 ; τον
κόσμον, ibid. v. 4 sq. νικάν το ττονημον iv τω ayaS^, by the
force which resides in goodness, i. e. in kindness, to cause
an enemy to repent of the wrong he has done one, Ro.
xii. 21 ; νικΰσθαι υπό τοϋ κακοϋ, to be disturbed by an in-
jury and driven to avenge it, ibid. [CoMP.: ύπΕρ-ι/«άω.] *
νίκη, -ης, ή, [fr. Horn, down], victory : 1 Jn. v. 4 [cf.
«Ίκοί ]. ■
Κικ68ημο$, (νίκη and δ^ /ios [i. e. 'conqueror of the
people '] ), -ου, ό, Xicodeynus, (rabbin. [iTlpJ), a member
of the Sanhedrin who took the part of Jesus : Jn. iii. 1,
4, 9 ; vii. 50 ; xix. 39.*
ΝικολοΙτη?, -ου, ό, a follower of Nicolaus, a Nicola' itan:
plur.. Rev. ii. 6, 15, — a name which, it can scarcely be
doubted, refers symbolically to the same persons who in
vs. 14 are charged with holding την διδαχην Βαλαάμ, i. e.
after the example of Balaam, casting a stumbling-block
before the church of God (Xum. xxiv. 1-3) by upholding
the liberty of eating things sacrificed unto idols as well
as of committing fornication ; for the Grk. name Νικό-
λαοΓ coincides with the Hebr. D^^Sa ace. to the interpre-
tation of the latter which regards it as signifying destruc-
tion of the people. See in Βαλαάμ; [cf. BB.DD. s. vv.
Nicolaitans, Nicolas ; also Comm. on Rev. 11. cc.].*
Νικόλαο;, -ου, ό, (νίκη and λαοί), Nicolaits [Α. V. Nico-
ids], a proselyte of Antioch and one of the seven deacons
of the church at Jerusalem : Acts vi. 5.*
Νικό•ΐΓολΐ5, -ews, ή, (city of victory), Nicopolis : Tit. iii.
1 2. There were many cities of this name — in Armenia,
Pontus, Cilicia, Epirus, Thrace ^ — wliich were generally
built, or had their name changed, by some conqueror to
commemorate a victory. The one mentioned above seems
to be that which Augustus founded on the promontory
of Epirus, in grateful commemoration of the victory
he won at Actium over Antony. The author of the
spurious subscription of the Epistle seems to have had
in mind the Thracian Nicopolis, founded by Trajan [(?)
cf. Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.] on the river Nestus (or
Nessua), since he calls it a city ' of Macedonia.' [B. D.
s. v.] •
vIkos, -our, TO, a later form i. q. νίκη (cf. Loh. ad Phryn.
p. 617; [B. 23 (20); AV. 24]), victory: 1 Co. xv. 55, 57,
(2 Mace. X. 38; [1 Esdr. iii. 9]) ; «f viicos, until he have
gained the victory, Mt. xii. 20 ; κατίπόθη ό θάνατο! fit
viKos, [A. V. death is sivallowed up in victory] i. e. utterly
van(iuished, 1 Co. xv. 54. (The Sept. sometimes trans-
late the llebr. nXjS i. e. to everlasiiiKj, forever, by «r
v'iKoi, 2 S. ii. 26 ; Job xxxvi. 7 ; Lam. v. 20 ; Am. i. 1 1 ; viii.
7, because nxj denotes also splendor, 1 Chr. xxix. 11, and
in Syriac victory.) '
Niveut, ή, Hebr. DU'j (supposed to be compounded of
J"J and nij, the abode of Ninus; [cf. Fried. Delitzsch as
below; Schrader as below, pp. 102, 572]), in the (irk.
and Rom. writ, ή Nti/oy [on the accent cf. Pape, Eigen-
namen, s. v.], Nineveh (Vulg. Ninive [so A. V. in Lk. as
below]), a great city, the capital of Assyria, built appar-
ently about B. c. 2000, on the eastern bank of the Tigris
opposite the modern city of Mosul. It was destroyed
[about] B. c. 606, and its ruins, containing invaluable
monuments of art and archaeology, began to be exca-
vated in recent times (from 1840 on), especially by the
labors of the Frenchman Botta and the Englishman Lay-
ard ; cf. Layard, Nineveh and its Remains, Lond. 1849,
2 vols. ; and his Discoveries in the Ruins of Nineveh
and Babylon, Lond. 1853; [also his art. in Smith's Diet,
of the Bible] ; H. J. C. Weissenbom, Ninive u. s. Gebiet
etc. 2 Pts. Erf. 1851-56; Tuch, De Nino urbe. Lips.
1844; Spiegel in Herzog x. pp. 361-381 ; [esp. Fried.
Delitzsch in Ilerzog 2 (cf. Schaff-Herzog) x. pp. 587-603 ;
Schrader, KeilinschrLften u. s. w. inde.x s. v. ; and in Kiehm
s. V. ; W. Robertson Smith in Encyc. Brit. s. v.] ; Hilziy
in Schenkel iv. 334 sqq. ; \_Ran-linson, Five Great Mon-
archies etc. ; Geo. Smith, Assyrian Discoveries, (Lond.
1875)]. In the N. T. once, viz. Lk. xi. 32 R G.*
[Νινίυίτη? RG (so Tr in Lk. .xi. 32), or] NiKcuiri/s [L
(so Tr in Lk. xi. 30)] or ΐiιvfvfiτηs Τ λ\Ή (so Tr in Mt.
xii. 41) [see ti, ι and Tdf. Proleg. p. 86; WH. A pp. p.
154''],-ου,ό. (NtKfui, q. v.), i. q. Nmor in Hdt. and Strabo;
a Ninevite, an inhabitant of Nineveh: Mt. xii. 41 ; Lk.
xi. 30, and L Τ Tr Wll in 32.'
νΐΊΓτήρ, -ηρος, ό, (νίπτω), a vessel for washing the hands
and feet, a basin : Jn. xiii. 5. (Eccles. writ.) *
νίπτω: (a later form for ι/ί^ω ; of. ioi. ad Phryn. p. 241
[Veitchs.v.l/l'fω; B. 63(55); \V.88(84)]); laor. m^a;
Mid., pres. νίτττομαι; 1 aor. ΐνι•\Ι/άμην; Sept. for ]'Π"^; to
wash : τινά, .In. xiii. 8 ; τοϋί naSas rivas, ibid. 5 sq. 8, 12,
14 ; 1 Tim. v. 10; mid. to wash one's .se//[cf. B. § 135,
5; W. § 38, 2 b.] : Jn. ix. 7, 11, 15; τάι xe'tpns, to wash
one's (own) hands, Mk. vii. 3 ; τους πό&ας, .In. xiii. 10
[T om. AVH br. τοίις π.] : viyjrai το πρόσωπον σον, Mt. vi.
1 7 ; νίπτονται τάς χίΐρας αυτών, Mt. xv. 2. [CoMP. : ατΓΟ-
νίπτω. Syn. see λούω. fin.] *
νοί'ω, -ω ; 1 Άοτ. (νόησα; [pres. pass. ptcp. (neut. plur.)
νοούμίνα] ; (νους) ; fr. Ilom. down ; Sept. for Γ^Π and
|Jl3rin, and for h'SpT) ; 1. to perceive with the mind,
to understand : absol., with the addition τή καρδία, Jn. xii.
νόημα
427
νομοί
40 (Is. xliv. 18) ; w. an ace. of the thing, Eph. iii. 4, 20 ;
1 Tim. i. 7 ; pass. : Ro. i. 20 ; foil, by an, Mt. xv. 17;
xvi. 11 ; Mk. vii. 18; foil, by ace. w. inf., Heb. xi. 3;
absol. i. q. to have understanding : Mt. xvi. 9 ; Mk. viii.
17. 2. to think upon, heed, ponder, consider : νοιίτω,
sc. let him attend to the events that oecur, which will show
the time to flee, Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; [similarly
voet ο (RG a) λί'γω, 2 Tim. ii. 7]. [CoMP. : ei-, κατά-,
μ€τα-, προ-, ύπο-νοί'ω.] *
νόημα, -ror, τό, fr. Horn, down ; 1. a mental per-
ception, thought. 2. spec, (an evil) purpose : αίχμα-
λωτίζίΐν πάν νόημα els την ΰπακοην τον Χρίστου, to cause
whoever is devising evU against Christ to desist from his
purpose and submit himself to Christ (as Paul sets him
forth), 2 Co. X. 5; plur. : 2 Co. ii. U (τοϋ δια;3όλου, Ignat.
ad Eph. [Interpol.] 14 ; τή? καρδίας αυτών ποί'ηράς. Bar.
ii. 8). 3. that which tliinks, Me mi'iirf : plur. (where
the minds of many are referred to), 2 Co. iii. 14 ; iv. 4,
and perh. [xi. 3] ; Phil. iv. 7, for here the word may mean
thoughts and purposes ; [others would so take it also in
all the exx. cited under this head (ef. καύχημα, 2)].*
νόθο;, ij. -ov, lUeyitimate, bastard, i. e. born, not in law-
ful wedlock, but of a concubine or female slave : Heb.
xii. 8; ef. Bleek ad loe. (Sap. iv. 3; from Hom. down.) *
νομή, -ής, ή, {νίμω to pasture), fr. Ilom. [i. e. batrach.]
down; i. pasturage, fodder, food: in fig. discourse
ΐύρησ€ί νομήυ, i. e. he shall not want the needful sup-
plies for the true life, Jn. x. 9 ; (Sept. for Τ[^.^Ώ, n';7")D,
nil). 2. trop. growth, increase, (Germ. Umsichfressen,
Umsichgreifen) : of evils spreading like a gangrene, 2
Tim. ii. 17 (of ulcers, νομην ποιείται ΙλκοΓ, Polyb. 1, 81, 6 ;
of a conflagration, to πνρ 'Καμβάν(ΐ νομψ, 11, 4 (5), 4 cf.
1, 48, 5; Joseph, b. j. 6, 2, 9).*
vo|iC^u; ΐοϊψί. ίνόμιζον; I Άοτ. ίνόμχσα; impf. pass. «Vo-
μιζόμην ; (νόμος) ; as in Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt.
down ; 1. to hold by custom or usage, own as a cus-
tom or usage ; to follow custom or usage ; pass, νομίζεται
it is the custom, it is the received usage : ov ίνομίζίτο πρόσ-
τυχη (ΐναι, where ace. to custom was a place of prayer,
Acts xvi. 13 [but LTTr AVIl read ου ίνομίζομ^ν προσ^υ-
χην elv. where ice supposed there was, etc.; cf. 2 below],
(2 Mace. xiv. 4). 2. to deem, think, suppose: foil.
by an inf., Acts viii. 20 ; 1 Co. vii. 36 ; foil, by an ace. w.
inf., Lk. ii. 44; Acts vii. 25; xiv. 19; xvi. [13 (see 1
above)], 27 ; xvu. 29 ; I Co. vii. 26 ; I Tim. vi. 5; foil,
by Sn, Mt. v. 1 7 ; x. 34 [W. § 56, 1 b.] ; xx. 10 ; Acts xxi.
29 ; ώς ίνομίζ(το, as was wont to be supposed, Lk. iii. 23.
[SvN. see fjyenpai, fin.] *
νομικό?, -η, -όν, (νόμος), pertaining to (the) latv (Plat.,
Aristot , al.) : μάχαι. Tit. iii. 9 ; ό νομικός, one learned in
the taw, in the N. T. an interpreter and teacher of the
Mosaic law [A. V. a lawyer ; ef. γραμματείς, 2] : Mt.
xxii. 35; Lk. x. 25; Tit. iii. 13; plur., Lk. vii. 30; xi.
45 sq. 52; xiv. 3.*
νομ(μω$, adv., (ro^i^of), lawfully, agreeably to the law,
properly : 1 Tim. i. 8 ; 2 Tim. ii. 5. (Thuc, Xen., Plat.,
al.)•
νόμκτμα,τος,τό,{νομίζω,ι\.ν.); 1. anything received
and sanctioned by usage or law (Tragg., Arstph.). 2.
money, (current) coin, [cf. our lawful money] : Mt. xxii.
19 (and in Grk. writ. fr. Eur. and Arstph. down).*
νομο-διδάο'καλοϊ. -ου, ό, ( νόμος and διδάσκαλοι, cf. €Ttp<^
διδάσκαλοί, 'κροδώάσκαλος, χοροδιδάσκαλος), α teacher and
interpreter of the law: among the Jews [ef. •γραμματ(νς,
2], Lk. v. 17; Acts v. 34; of those who among Chris-
tians also went about as champions and interpreters of
the Mosaic law, 1 Tim. i. 7. (Not found elsewh. [exc.
in eecl. writ.]) *
νομοθίσία, -ας, ή, (νόμος, τίβημι), late-giving, legislation :
Ro. ix. 4. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Philo, al.)*
νομοθΕΤ€'ω, -ώ : Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing, ν^νομοθίτηται ;
plupf. 3 pers. sing, ναιομοθίτητο (on the om. of the augm.
see \V. 72(70); B. 33(29)); (lOfiofleVijf); fr. [Lys.], Xen.
and Plat, down ; Sept. several times for n^in ; 1.
to enact laws ; pass, laws are enacted or prescribed for one,
to be legislated for, furnished with laws (often so in Plato ;
cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 391 [for e.\x.]) ; ό λαοί eV αντής
(R G eV αντί]) νίνομοθίτηται ( R G ν^νομοθίτητο) the people
received the Mosaic law established upon the foundation
of the priesthood, Ileb. vii. 11 [W. § 39,1 b.; cf. B. 337
(290); many refer this ex. (with the gen.) to time (A. V.
under it) ; see €πί, A. II., cf. B. 2 a. y.]. 2. to sanc-
tion by law, enact : τί, pass. Heb. viii. 6 [cf. W. and B.
u. s.].*
νομο-θί'τη5, -ου, ό. (νόμος and τίθημΐ), a lawgiver: Jas. iv.
12. ([Antipho, Thuc], Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., al. ;
Sept. Ps. i.K. 21.)*
νόμοϊ, -ου, ό, ( νίμω to divide, distribute, apportion), in
prof. auth. fr. Hes. down, anything established, anything
received by usage, a custom, usage, law ; in Sept. very often
for ΓΙιίΓ), also for ΠΡΠ, iV\, etc. In the N. T. a command,
law, and 1. oi any law whatsoever: δια ποιου
νόμου; Ro. iii. 27; νόμος ίικαιοσννης, a law or rule pro-
ducing a state approved of God, i. e. by the observance
of which we are approved of (iod, Ro. ix. 31, cf. Meyer
[see ed. ΤΓέώ»], Fritzsche, Phili[ipi ad loc. ; a precept or
hy unction : κατά νόμον ίντο^ης σαρκ- Heb. vii. 16 ; plur. of
the things prescribed by the divine will, Heb. viii. 10; x.
1 6 ; νόμος τοϋ νοός, the rule of action prescribed by reason,
Ro. vii. 23 ; the mention of the divine law causes those
things even which in opposition to this law impel to
action, and therefore seem to have the force of a law,
to be designated by the term νόμος, as ίτιρος νόμος iv toZs
μί\(σΙ μου, a different law from that which God has given,
i. e. the impulse to sin inherent in human nature, or 6
νόμοςτής αμαρτίας (gen. of author), Ro. vii. 23, 25; viii. 2,
also ό V. τοϋ θανάτου, emanating from the power of death,
Ro. viii. 2 ; with which is contrasted ό νόμος τοϋ πνινματος,
the impulse to (right) action emanating from the Spirit,
ibid. 2. of the Mosaic law, and referring, ace. to
the context, either to the ν ο 1 u m e of the law or to its
contents: w. the article, Mt. v. 18; xii. 5; xxii. 36; Lk.
ii. 27; x. 26 ; xvi. 17; Jn. i. 17,45 (46) ; vii. 51; viii. 17;
x. 34; XT. 25; Acts vi. 13; vii. 53 ; xviii. 13, 15; xxi.
20; xxiii. 3; Ro. ii. 13 [(bis) here LTTrWHom. art.
(also G in 13')], 15, 18, 20, 23^ 26 ; iv. 15•; vu. 1', 5, 14,
J'O/iOS"
428
POU<i
21 (on the right interpretation of tliis ditlicult passage
cf. Knapp, Scripta varii Argjiiinonli, ii. ]). 385 sc)!]. and
Fritzschc, Com. ail lloin. ii. [>. J7 ; [otliers take νόμ. here
generally, i. ij. CDiilrollin^ principle; see 1 above sub
lin. ami ef. \\. 557 (578) ; B. § l.")l, 15]) ; Ro. viii. 3 sip ;
1 Co. i.\. 8; .\v. 56; Gal. iii. 13, 24; Eph. ii. 15 (on
which pass, see hόyμa, 2) ; 1 Tim. i. 8 ; Ileb. vii. 1 9,
28; X, 1, etc.; with the addition of Μωϋσί'ωΓ, Lk. ii. 2"i ;
Jn. vii. 23 ; viii. 5 ; Acts .\iii. 38 (3i)) [here L Τ Tr Wll
cm. art.]; .\v. 5; .\xviii. 23 ; iCo. ix. 9; of .tu/jiou, Lk. ii.
39 ; of ToO β(ον. [.Mt. .\v. « Τ WW mrg.] ; Ko. vii. 22 ; viii.
7. κατή τον νύμιιν, ace. to the (standard or reipiirement
of tlie) law. Acts xxii. 12; Ileb. vii. 5; ix. 22. i/o/ius
without the art. (in the Epp. of Paul and James and
the Ep. to the Ileb.; cf. W. p. 123 (117); B. 89 (78);
[some interpri'ters contend that νόμος without the art.
denotes not the law of iMoses but law viewed as 'a prin-
ciple', 'abstract and universal'; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal.
ii. 19; also "Fresh Revision," etc. p. 99; Vaughan on
Ro. ii. 23; esp. Van Ilcngel on Ro. ii. 12; Giffiiril in
the Speaker's Cum. on Rum. p. 41 Si\i\. (cf. Cremer s. v.).
This distinction is contrary to usage (as exhibited e. g.
in Saj). xviii. 4 ; Sir. xix. 1 7 ; .xxi. 1 ! ; xxxi. 8 ; xxxii. 1 ;
XXXV. (xxxii.) 15, 24; xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 2, 3; 1 Mace. ii.
21 ; 4 Mace. vii. 7, and many other exx. in the Apocr. ;
see Wahl, Clavis Apocrr. s. v. p. 343), and to the con-
text in such Pauline pass, as the foil.: Ro. ii. 17, 25, 27;
vii. 1(7); xiii. 8, 10; Gal iii. 17, 18, 23, 24, (cf. Ro. ii.
12 and iii. 19; v. 13 and 14); etc. It .should be added,
perhaps, that neither the list of pass, with the art. nor
of those without it, as given by Prof, (jrimm, claims to be
complete]) : Ro. ii. 23% 25; iii. 31 ; iv. 15", v. 13 ; vii. 1»,
2•; X.4; xiii. 10; Gal. iii. 21°; v. 23; 1 Tim. i. 9; Ileb.
vii. 12, etc.; with the addition of κυρίον, Lk. ii. 23 [here
L has the art.], 24 [L Τ Tr WII add the art.] ; of θί<Λ, Ko.
vii. 25 ; of Μωϋσί'ωί, Ileb. x. 28 ; esp. after pre[)usitions,
as θια νόμου, Ko. ii. 12; iii. 20; Gal. ii. 21 ; χ^ωρ\ί νόμου,
without tlie co-operation of the law, Ro. iii. 21 ; destitute
or ignorant of the law, Ro. vii. 9; wlicre no law has been
prOmulged, Ro. vii. x ; ol ex νόμου, tliose who rule their
life by the law, Jews, Ro. iv. 14, IG [here all edd. have
the art.] ; o! eV νόμω, who are in the power of the law, i. e.
bound to it, Ru. iii. 19 [but all texts here fv τω v.} ; ύπο
νόμο», under dominion of the law, Ro. vi. 14 sq. ; Gal. iii.
-'• ; 'V. 4, 21 ; V. 18; ol ύπο νόμον, 1 Co. ix. 20; ίικαιοϋ-
πθαι (V νόμω, Gal. v. 4 ; epya νόμου (see epyov, sub fin.) ;
(V νόμω apapTUvfiv, unilrr Uiw i. e. with knowledge of the
law, Ro. ii. 12 (eijuiv. to ΐχοντις νόμον, cf. vs. 14) ; they
to whom the -Mosaic laiv has not been made known are
said νόμον μη ΐχ(ΐν. ibid. 14 ; ίαυτο'ις (Ισι νόμος, their natu-
ral knowledge of right takes the i)laceof the Jlosaic law,
ibid. ; νόμος ίρ-γων, the law demanding works, Ro. iii. 27 ;
Slit νόμου νόμω άπίθανον, by the law itself (when I became
convinced that by keeping it I could not attain to salva-
tion, cf. Ro. vii. 9-24) I became utterly estranged from
thelaw, Gal. ii. 19 [cf.W. 210(197); Π. § l:i3, 12]. κατά
νόμον. as respects the interpretation and observance of
the law. Phil. iii. 5. The observe nee of the Inw is
designated by the foil, phrases : πληρούν νόμο», Ro. xiii.
8 ; TO» V. Gal. v. 11 ; πληρούν τ6 δικαίωμα τοΰ νόμου, Ro.
viii. 4 ; φυλάσσ(ΐν (τον) v., .Acts xxi. 24 ; (ial. vi. I.'i ; τά
8ικαιώμ. τοΰ v. Ro. ii. 2U ; πράσσαν νόμον, Ro. ii. 25; TTotcIr
Tiiv v., Jn. vii. 1 9 ; Gal. v. 3 ; τηρύν, .Acts xv. 5, 24 [Uec] ;
Jas. ii. 10 ; τeλflι', Ro. ii. 27 (cf. -las. ii. 8) ; [on the other
hand, άκυροϋν τον νόμ. Mt. xv. ti Τ Wll mrg.]. 6 νόμος is
used of some particular ordinance of the Mosaic law in
Jn. xix. 7 ; Jas. ii. 8 ; with a gen. of the obj. added, τοΰ
ανδρός, the law enacted respecting the husband, i. e. bind-
ing the wife to her husband, Ro. vii. 2 where Rec.'^'Om.
τοΰ νόμ. (so 6 νόμος τοΰ πύσχα. Num. ix. 12; τοίϊ λΐπροΰ,
Lev. xiv. 2 ; other exx. are given in J'Vilzsclic, Ep. ad Rum.
ii. p. 9 ; cf. W. § 30, 2 β.). Although the Jews did not
make a distinction as we do between the moral, the
ceremonial, the civil, precepts of the law, but thought
that all should be honored and kept with the same con-
scientious and ])ious regard, )Ct in the N. T. not infre-
tpiently the law is so referred to as to show that the
speaker or writer has his eye on the ethical jiart of it
alone, as of primary importance and among Christians
also of perpetual validity, but does not care for the cere-
monial and civil portions, as being written for Jews
alone: thus in Gal. v. 14; Ko. xiii. 8, 10; ii. 26 sq.; vii.
21, 25 ; Mt. V. 18, and often ; τ<Ί τοΰ νόμου, the precepts,
moral requirements, of the law, Ro. ii. 14. In the Ep. of
James νόμος (without the article) designates only the
ethical jiortion of the Mosaic law, confirmed by the au-
thority of the Christian religion : ii. 9-11; iv. 11; in the
Ep. to the Ileb., on the other hand, the ceremonial
part of the law is the prominent idea. 3. of the
Christ iati retir/inii : νόμος πίστιωί, the law demanding
faith, Ro. iii. 27; τοΰ Χρίστου, the moral instruction given
by Christ, esp. the precept concerning love, ( iah vi. 2 ; τήΐ
ίλ(υθ£ρίας (see ίλίυθιρία, a.), Jas. i. 25 ; ii. 1 2 ; cf. ό καινοί
νόμος τοΰ κυρίου ημών ^Ιησοΰ Χρίστου, αν€υ ζυγοΰ ανάγκης
ων. Barn. ep. 2, 6 [see Ilarnack's note in loc.]. 4.
by metonymy 6 νόμος, the name of the more imi)ortant
part (i. e. the Pentateuch), is i)ut for llie entire collection of
the sacred honks of tlie 0. T. : Jn. vii. 49 ; x. 34 (Ps. Ixx.xi.
(Ixxxii.) fi); Jn. xii. 34(Ps.cix. (cx.)4 ; Dan. (Theodot.)
ii. 44; vii.l4); Jn. xv. 25 (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 19 ; IxviiL
(lxix.)15); Ro.iii.l9; 1 Co. xiv. 21 (Is. xxviii. 1 1 sq.; so
2 Mace. ii. 18, where cf. Grimm); ό νόμος κα'ι οίπροφηται,
Mt.xi. 13; Jn. i. 46 ; Actsxiii.15; xxiv.l4; xxviii. 23;
Ro. iii. 21, (2 Mace. xv. 9) ; i. q. the system of moraU
taught in the O. T., Mt. v. 1 7 ; vii. 12 ; xxii. 40 ; ό νόμ. (οί)
πμοφ. Kai ψαλμοί, the religious dispensation contained
in the (). T., Lk. xxiv. 44 (ό νόμος, οί προφ. κ. τα άλλα
πάτρια βιβλία, prol. to Sir.). Paul's doctrine cunrcrning
ό νόμος is exhibited by (besides others) irem-, Bibl. TheoL
§§ 71, 72; Pfleiilercr, Paulinismus, p. 69 sq. [Eng. trans, i.
p. 68 sq. ; A. Zahn, Das Gesetz Gottes nach d. Lehre u.
Erfahrungd. Apostel Paulus, Ilalle 1876 ; R. Tilinij, Die
Paulinische Lehre vom νόμος nach d. vier Hauptbriefen,
u.s.w. Dorpat, 1878]. νόμος does not occur in the foil. ?i.
T. bks.: Mk.,2Co.,COl.,Thes8.,SiTim.,Pet.,Jude,Ju., Eev
ν6ος> see νους.
νησΐω
429
νυμφίσ<:
νοσ^ω, -ώ ; (i/oVos) ; fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down ; to be
«cX•; metaph. of any ailment of the mind {άνηκίστψ
πυνημία νοσίΐν Αθηναίους, Xen. mem. 3, 5, 18 and many
<'ther exx. in Grk. aulli.) : Trepi τι, to be taken with such
an interest in a thing as amounts to a disease, to have
a morbid fondness for, 1 Tim. vi. 4 (n-tpl δόξαν, Plat. mor.
(). 546 d.).•
νόσημα, -rot, to, i/iseaxe, sickness : Jn. v. 4 Rec. Lchm.
(Tragg., Arstpli., Thuc, Xen., Plat., sqq.)*
voaos, -ou, ή, disease, sickness : Mt. iv. 23 ει|. ; viii. 1 7 ;
ix. 3.-) ; X. 1 ; Mk. i. 34 ; iii. 15 [R G L] ; Lk. iv. 40 ; vi.
18(17); vii. 21; ix. 1 ; Acts xix. 12. (Deut. vii. 15;
xxviii. 59; Ex. xv. 26, etc. [Horn., Hdt., al.])*
votrind, -or, η, (for κοσσίά, the earlier and more com-
mon form [of. \VH. App. p. 145], fr. ι/βοσσοΓ, q. v.), Sept.
for Jp; 1. a nesi nfbinls. 2. ahrnodofhirds:
Lk. xiii. 34 [but L txt. νοσσία, see the foil. word]. (Deut.
xxxii. 11 [Gen. vi. 14; Num. xxiv. 22; Prov. xvi. 16,
etc•.].) •
νοσσ-ίον, -ου, τό, (see νοσσιά), a brood of birds : Mt.
xxiii. 37 and Lihm. txt. in Lk. xiii. 34 [where al. νοσσιά,
eee the preced. word]. (Arstph., Aristot., Ael. ; for D'n'iSX
Pe. Ixxxiii. (Ixxxiv.) 4.) *
voccros, see ν€οσσός.
νοσφίζω : Mid., pres. ptcp. νοσφιζόμινος ; 1 aor. tvo•
σφισάμην; {νόσφι afar, apart); to set apart, separate,
dii'ide ; mid. to set apart or <eparale for one's self, i. e. to
purloin, embezzle, withdraw covertti/ and appropriate to
one's own lise: χρήματα, Xen. Oyr. 4, 2 42; Plut. Lucull.
37; Aristid. 4; μηδίν των ίκ της διαρπαγη!, Polyb. 10,
16, 6; χρυσώματα, 2 Mate. iv. 32; αλλότρια, Joseph,
antt. 4, 8, 29; absol. Tit. ii. 10; (τ1) από tiwos. Acts v.
2, 3 [here A. V. keep back^ ; Sept. Josh. vii. 1 ; « tikos.
Allien. 6 p. 234 a.»
vOTos, -ου, 6, the south wind; a. prop.: Lk. xii.
55; Acts xxvii. 13; xxviii. 13. b. the South (cf.
tioppat) ■■ Mt. xii. 42 ; Lk. xi. 31 ; xiii. 29; Rev. xxi. 13.
(From Ilom. down; Sept. chiefly for 3J.J, the southern
quarter, the South; and for αΐΐΉ, the southern (both)
wind and quarter; fj-ri, the same; D'lp, the eastern
(both) quarter and wind.) *
νουβίο-ία, -as, ή, (νουθ(τίω, q. V.) ; admonition, exhorta-
tion: Sap. xvi. G; 1 Co. x. 11 ; Tit. iii. 10; κυρίου, such
as belongs to the Lord (Christ) or proceeds from him,
Eph. vi. 4 [cf. W. 1S9 (17,s)]. (Arstph. ran. 1009;
Died. 15, 7; besides in Philo, .Joseph, and other recent
writ, for νουθίτησί! and νουθ(τία, forms more com. in the
earlier writ. cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 512; [W. 24].) [Cf.
Trench § xxxii.] '
νουθ€Τ(ω, -ώ ; (ναυθίτης, and this fr. νοϊΐί and τίθημι ;
hence prop. i. q. tv τώ νω τίθημι, lit. 'put in mind', Germ,
'an das Herz legen'); to admonish, warn, exhort: τινά.
Acts XX. 31 ; Ro. xv. 14 ; 1 Co. iv. 14 ; Col. i. 28; iii. 16 ;
iTh. V. 12, 14; 2Th. iii. 15. ([1 S. iii. 13] ; .lob iv. 3 ;
Sap. xi. 1 1 ; xii. 2 ; Tragg., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.) *
νουμην(α, and ace. to a rarer uncontr. form (cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 148 [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below; WH.
App. p. 145]) νίομηνία (so Ltxt. TrWH), ^ir, ή, (vtot.
μην a month), new-moon (Vulg. neomenia; barbarous
Lat. novilunium) : of the Jewish festival of the new
moon [BB.DD. s. v. iVero Moon^, Col. ii. 16. (Sept.
chiefly for ϋΐπ ; also for ΰΊΠ ΊΠΚ, Ex. xl. 2 ; and Viii
ΌΊΠ, Num. X. 10; x.xviii. 11 ; see μήν, 2. Pind., Arstpli- ,
Thuc, Xen., al.) *
vovvexias, (voii and ίχω [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 599]),
adv. iviselij,jirwlentlij, discreetly: Mk. xii. 34. ([Aristot.
rhet. Alex. 30 p. 1436'', 33 νουν^χωί κ. δικαίωί] ; Polyb.
1, 83, 3 νουν(χως κ. φρονίμω!', [2, 13, 1] ; 5, 88, 2 νουνεχώί
κ. πραγματικώί ', [al.].) *
VOVS (contr. fr. voos), ό, gen. root, dat. vot, (so in later
Grk. for the earlier forms νοϋ, νω, contr. fr. νόον, νόω ; cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 453; W. § 8,' 2 b. ; [B. 12 sq. (12)]),
ace. νουν (contr. fr. νόον), Sept. for 2'ί and aiS, [fr.
Ilom. down] ; ynimi (Germ. Sinn), i. e. 1. the mind,
comprising alike the faculties of perceiving and under-
standing and those of feeling, judging, determining;
hence spec. a. the intellective faculty, the under-
standing: Lk. xxiv. 45 (on which see διανοίγω, 2); PhiL
iv. 7 ; Rev. xiii. 18 ; xvii. 9 ; opp. to το πνίϋμα, the spirit
intensely roused and completely absorbed with divine
things, but destitute of clear ideas of them, 1 Co. xiv.
14 sq. 19 ; extiv tow νουν κυρίου [L txt., al. Χρίστου], to be
furnished with the understanding of Christ, 1 Co. ii.
16". b. reason (Germ, die Vernunft) in the nar-
rower sense, as the capacity for spiritual truth, the
higher powers of the soul, the faculty of perceiving divine
things, of recognizing goodness and of haling evil : Ro. i.
28 ; vii. 23 ; Eph. iv. 17 ; 1 Tim. vi. 5 ; 2 Tim. iii. 8 [cf.
W. 229 (215) ; Β § 134, 7] ; Tit. i. 15; opp. to ή σαρξ,
Ro. vii. 25 ; άναιχοϋσθαι τω πν^ύματι τοΰ voas, to be so
changed that the sjiirit which governs the mind is re-
newed, Eph. iv. 23 ; [cf. ή άνακαίνωσις τοΰ voos, Ro. xii.
2]. c. the power of considering and judging soberly,
calmly and impartially : 2 Th. ii. 2. 2. α particular
mode of thinking and judging : Ro. -xiv. 5 ; 1 Co. i. 10 ;
i. q. thoughts, feelings, purposes : τοΰ κυρίου (fr. Is. xl.
13), Ro. xi. 34; 1 Co. ii. 16'; i. q. desires, της σαρκόί.
Col. ii. IH [cf. Meyer ad loc.].*
Νυμφάβ, -5, 6, [peril, contr. fr. Νυμφό&ωρος ; cf. W.
102 sq. (97) ; on accent cf. Chandler § 32], ^ymphas, a
Christian inhabitant of Laodicea: Col. iv. 15 [LAVHTr
mrg. read ΐίύμφαν i. e. Nympha, the name of a woman ;
see esp. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc, and p. 256].•
νύμφη, -i;r, ή, (appar. allied w. Lat. nubo; Vanicek p.
429 sq.), Sept. for Π^3; 1. α betrothed woman, a
bride : Jn. iii. 29 ; Rev. χ viii. 23 ; xxi. 2, 9 ; xxii. 1 7. 2.
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, a recently married
woman, young wife; a young woman; hence in bibL and
eccl. Grk., like the Hebr. nS3 (which signifies both a
bride and a daughter-in-law [cf. W. 32]), π daughter-in-
law: Mt. X. 35; Lk. .xii. 53. (Mic vii. 6 ; Gen. xi. 31;
[xxxviii. 11]; Ruth i. 6, [etc]; also Joseph, antt. 5,
9,1.)•
ννμφίοΐ, -ου, ό, (νύμφη), a bridegroom: Mt. Lx. 15; xxv.
l,5sq. 10; Mk. ii. 19sq.; Lk. v. 34sq.; Jn. ii. 9; iii. 29;
Rev. xviii. 23. (From Hom. down ; Sept for [ΠΠ•) *
ννμφ(ί>ν
430
νυνι
νυμφών, -ωνο!, 6, (^ήμφη), the chamber containing the
bridal bed, the bride-chamlier : oi υΐοι τοΰ ιη;/χφώμο5 (see
vios, 2), of the friends o£ the bridegroom whose <hity it
was to provide and care for whatever pertained to the
Dridal chamber, i. e. whatever was needed for the due
celebration of the nuptials: Mt. ix. IS; Mk. ii. 19; Lk.
V. 34, ([W. 33 (32)]; Tob. vi. 13 (14), 16 (17); eccles.
writ. ; Heliod. 7, 8) ; the room in wliich the marriage cere-
monies are held: Mt. xxii. 10 Τ WH Trmrg.*
vSv, and iwvl (which see in its place), adv. now, Lat.
nunc, (Sept. for ΠΠ^' ; [fr. Horn, down]) ; 1. adv. of
Time, now, i. e. at the present time ; a. so used that
by the thing which is now said to be or to be done the
present time is opposed to past time : Jn. iv. 18 ; ix. 21 ;
Acts xvi. 37 ; xxiii. 21 ; Ro. xiii. 11; 2 Th. ii. 6 ; 2 Co.
vii. 9 ; xiii. 2; Phil. i. 30 ; ii. 12 ; iii. 18 ; Col. i. 24, etc. ;
freq. it denotes a somewhat extended portion of present
time as opp. to a former state of things : Lk. xvi. 25 ;
Acts vii. 4; Gal. i. 23 ; iii. 3; spec, the time since certain
persons received the Christian religion, Ro. v. 9, 11; vi.
19, 21 ; viii. 1 ; Gal. ii. 20 ; iv. 29 ; 1 Pet. ii. 10, 25 ; or
the time since man has had the blessing of the gospel,
as opp. to past times, i. q. in our times, our age : Acts vii.
52; Ro. .xvi. 26; 2 Co. vi. 2 ; Eph. iii. 5, 10; 2 Tim. i.
10; iPet. i. 12; iii. 21, [cf. ep. ad Diogn. 1]. b. opp.
to future time : Jn. xii. 27; xiii. 3(5 (opp. to ΰστιρον) ;
xvi. 22; Ro. .\i. 31 ; 1 Co. xvi. 12 ; viv κ. els πάι /ras tovs
αΐώναι, Jude 25 ; used to distinguish this present age,
preceding Christ's return, from the age which follows
that return: Lk. vi. 21,2o; Eph. ii. 2 ; Heb. ii. S; 2 Pet.
iii. 18 ; 1 Jn. ii. 28 ; with eV τώ καφω τούτω added, Mk.
X. 30. c. Sometimes viiv with the present is used of
what will occur forthwith or soon, Lk. ii. 29 ; Jn. xii. 31 ;
xvi. 5; xvii. 13; Acts xxvi. 17. with a preterite, of
what has Just been done, Mt. xxvi. 65 ; Jn. xxi. 10 ; or
very lately (hut now. Just noic, hyperbolically i. q. a short
time ago), mv ΐζήτονν σι λιθάσαι οι Ιουδαίοι, Jn. .xi. 8 ; cf.
Kypke ad loc. ; Vig. ed. i/ecm. p. 42,5 sq. with a future,
of those future things which are thought of as already
begun to be done, Jn. xii. 31 ; or of those which will be
done instantly. Acts xiii. 1 1 [here al. supply ΐστί ; \V. § 64,
2 a.] ; or soon, Acts xx. 22 [here nop. merely has inherent
f ut. force ; cf. B. § 1 3 7, 1 a.]. d. with the imperative
it often marks the proper or fit time for doing a thing :
JMt. xxvii. 42 sq. ; Mk. xv. 32 ; Jn. ii. 8. Hence it serves
to point an e.xhortation in aye vvv, come now : Jas. iv. 1 3 ;
V. 1, (where it is more correctly written aye vvv, cf. Pas-
sow ii. p. 3 72). e. with other particles, by which the
contrast in time is marked more precisely : καΊ νΰν, eren
now (now also), Jn. xi. 22 ; Phil. i. 20 ; and now, Jn. xvii.
5 ; Acts vii. 34 [cf. 2 below] ; x. 5 [W. § 43, 3 a.] ; xx.
25; xxii. 16; άλλα νΰν, Lk. xxii. 36; άλλα και νΰν, but
even now, Jn. xi. 22 [T Tr txt. WH om. L Tr mrg. br.
αλλά] ; €Ti viv, 1 Co. iii. 2 (3) [L WH br. en] ; vCv be
(see mvi below) but now, Jn. xvi. 5 ; .xvii. 13 ; Heb. ii. 8 ;
ΓΟτ€ ... νΰν hi. Gal. iv. 9 ; Ro. vi. 21 sq. [here wm Se] ;
Heb. xii. 26 ; ποτέ . . . νΰν be, Ro. xi. 30 [λΥΗ mrg. νυνί] ;
Eph. V. 8 ; 1 Pet. ii. 10 ; νΰν ηδη, now already, 1 Jn. iv. 3.
νΰν otv, now there/ore, Acts x. 33 ; .xv. 10 ; xvi. 36 ; xxiii.
15,((;en.xxvii. 8, 43; xxxi. 13,30 ; .xlv. 8; lMacc.x.71).
TO viv ίχον, see ίχω, 11. b. f. with the article ; a.
w. neut. ace. absol. of the article, τα viv, as rc.ipects the
present ; at present, now (in which sense it is written also
τανΰν [so Grsb. always, Rec. twice; classic edd. often
τανύν, cf. Γ(//. Proleg. p. 1 1 1 ; C/ionrf/er, Accent, § 826]):
Acts iv. 29; xvii. 30; xx. 32; xxvii. 22, (2 Mace. xv. 8;
often in class. Grk. ; also το νΰν, 1 Alacc. vii. 35 ; ix. 9 ;
cf. Kruger § 50, 5, 13; Bnhdy. p. 328; Bttm. Gram.
§ 125, 8 Anm. 8 (5)) ; tlie things that now are, lite present
tilings, Λ\\ιΧιύ\ i.x. 5; ace. absol. a.? respects the things now
taking place, equiv. to as respects the catie in hand. Acts v.
38. β. ό, ή, το viv, the present, joined to substantives :
as ό νΰν αιών, 1 Tim. vi. 1 7 ; 2 Tim. iv. 10; Tit. ii. 12 ;
itaipos, Ro. iii. 26 ; viii. 18; xi.5; [2 Co. viii. 14 (13)] ; η
νΰν*ΐ€ρουσα\ημ, Gal.iv. 25 ; ol viv ουρανοί, 2 Pet. iii. 7 ; μοΰ
της πρί)! υμάς νΰν (or νυνί) άπολογίατ. Acts .\χϋ. 1. γ
τό viv with prepositions ; άπο τοΰ νΰν (.Sept. for ΗΓΙ^ίΠ"),
from this time onward, [A. V, from hericejOrlh~\, Lk. i. 48 :
v. 10; xii. 52 ; xxii. 69; Acts xviii. 6 ; 2Co. v. 16; αχρί
τον νΰν, Ro. viii. 22 ; Phil. i. 5 ; ews τοΰ νΰν (Sept. for
nn>'. li'_)i M••• ^^^^• 21 ; Mk. xiii. 19. 2. Like our
now and the Lat. nunc, it stands in a conclusion or
sequence; as things now are, as the matter now stands ;
under these circumstances; in the present state of affairs \
since these things are so ; as it is : Lk. xi. 39 (νΰν i. e. since
ye are intent on observing the requirements of tradition ;
[but al. take viv here of time — a covert allusion to a
former and better state of things]) ; Col. i. 24 [al. of
time; cf. Mey., Bp. Lghtft., liUic. ad loc.]; κα\ viv, 1 Jn.
ii. 28 ; 2 Jn. 5 ; και viv Seipo, Acts vii. 34. viv de (and
mv\ Se see wvi), but now ; now however ; hut as it is ; (often
in class. Grk. ; cf. Vig. ed. Herm. p. 426 ; Matthiaeii. p.
1434 .sq.; Kuhner § 498, 2 [or ,Ielf § 719, 2]): 1 Co.
vii. 14 ; .Tas. iv. IG, and R (τ in Heb. ix. 26 ; esp. after a
conditional statement with el and the indie, preterite,
Lk. .xix. 42; Jn. viii. 40; ix. 41; xv. 22, 24; xviii. 36;
1 Co. xii. 20; [cf. B. § 151, 26]. In liev. viv does not
occur. [Syn. see ί'φτι.']
νυνί (νΰν with iota demonstr. [Kriiger § 25, 6, 4 s<j.;
Ivuhner § ISO, e. (Jelf § 160, e.) ; Bitm. Gram. § 80, 2]),
in .\ttic now, at this very moment (precisely now, neither
before nor after; Lat. nunc ipsum), and only of Time,
almost always with the pres., very rarely with the fut.
(cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 19). Not found in the N. T.
exc. in the writ, of Paul and in a few phaces in Acts and
the Ep. to the ileb. ; and it differs here in no respec»
from the simple νΰν; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 182; [W.
23] ; 1. of Time: with a pres. (.Job xxx. 9), Acts
xxiv. 13 L Τ Tr WH ; Ro. xv. 23, 25 ; 1 Co. xiii. 13 (SpTt
. . . Tore Se . . . vi/vt 8e') ; 2 Co. viii. 11, 22 ; Philem. 9, 11
(sc. όντα) ; with a perf. indicating continuance, Ro. iii.
21 [al. refer this to 2] ; with a preterite (Ps. xvi. (xvii.)
11), Ro. vi. 22 (opp. to ToTe) ; vii. 6 ; Eph. ii. 13 (opp.
to eV τω καφω e/ceiVo)) ; Col. i. 22 (21 ) [and iii. 8 ; also Ro.
xi. 30 WH mrg.], (opp. to πότe); Col. i. 26 [RGLmrg.;
cf. W. § 63 L 2 b.; P. 382 (328)] (opp. to άττο τών αΙώ^ων) ;
νύ^
431
ξβνίζα
with a fut., Job vii. 21 ; Bar. vi. 4 (Ep. Jer. 3) ; 2 Mace.
X. 10; Tijs irpos νμας ιη;:Ί an-oXo-yias, Actsxxii. 1. 2.
contrary to Grk. usage, in stating a conclusion (see
νϋν, 2), bul since the cane stands thus, [as it iV] : 1 Co. [v. 1 1
R G Τ L mrg.] ; xiv. 6 R G (i. e. since ό γλώσση λάΚών
without an interpretation cannot edify tlie cliurcii) ; bul
no'c (Germ, so aber), Heb. ix. 26 L Τ Tr WH ; after a
conditional statement with ei (see vvv, fin.), Ro. vii. 17;
1 Co. .xii. 18 [RGTWHmrg.]; xv. 20; lleb. viii. 6
[here L Tr mrg. Wll t-xt. yCi/], cf. 4 ; xi. 16 Rec, cf. 15 ;
[B. § 151, 26].*
νιξ, gen. wKTos, ή, [fr. a root meaning 'to disappear';
cf. Lat. nox, Germ, nacht, Eng. night; Curtius § 94], (Sept.
for "Th and Π^"'^), [fr. Horn, down], niyht : Mk. vi. 48 ;
Acts xvi. 33 ; xxiii. 23 ; Jn. xiii. 30 ; Rev. xxi. 25 ; xxii.
5 ; wa η νίίζ μη φαίιη] το τρίτον αΰτης, i. e. that the night
should want a third part of the light which the moon and
the stars give it, Rev. viii. 12 [al. understand this of the
want of the light etc. for a third part of the night's du-
ration] ; gen. mKr6s, by night [\V. § 30, 11 ; B. § 132,
26], Mt. ii. 14; xxviii. 13 ; Lk. ii. 8 [but note here the
article; some make τη! njuros depend on φυλακάί] ;
Jn. iii. 2 ; Acts ix. 25 ; 1 Th. v. 7 ; wktos και ήμίρα:, Mk.
V. 5 ; 1 Th. ii. 9 ; iii. 10 ; 1 Tim. v. 5, [where see Ellicott
on the order] ; ημέρας κ. νυκτός, Lk. χ viii. 7; Acts ix.
24; Rev. iv. 8 ; vii. 15; xii. 10, etc. ; μίσης vvktOs, at mid-
night, Mt. XXV. 6; in answer to the question when:
ταΰτΎ) τη νυκτί, this night, Lk. xii. 20 ; xvii. 34 ; Acts xxvii.
23 ; rfj νυκτΊ (κ^ίνη. Acts xii. 6 ; τΐ/ ΐπίοΰση v. Acts x.\iii.
11; in answer to the question how long: νύκτα κα\
ήμίραν, Lk. ii. 37; Acts xx. 31 ; xxvi. 7 ; differently in
Mk. iv. 27 (night and day, sc. applying himself to what
he is here said to be doing) ; τάς νύκτα!, during the nights,
every night, Lk. xxi. 37; νύκτας τ(σσαράκ. Mt. iv. 2;
Tpftr, ib. xii. 40 ; Sia της ννκτής. see διό, Α. Π. 1 b. ; δι* ό\ης
{της) νυκτός, the whole night through, all night, Lk. v. 5 ;
cv νυκτί, when he was asleep. Acts xviii. 9 ; {κλίτπ-ης) iv
νυκτί, 1 Th. V. 2, and Rec. in 2 Pet. iii. 10; iv rij νυκτί,
in (the course of) the night, Jn. xi. 10 ; iv ttj wkt\ ταύτη,
Mt. xxvi. 31, 34 ; Mk. xiv. 30 ; iv τη νυκτι η κτλ. 1 Co. xi.
23 ; κατά μίίτον της νυκτός, about midnight. Acts xxvii. 27.
Metaph. the time when ivork ceases, i.e. the time of death,
Jn. ix. 4 ; the time for deeds of sin and shame, the time
of moral stupidity and darkness, Ro. xiii. 12; the time
when the weary and also the drunken give themselves up
to slumber, put for torpor and sluggishness, 1 Th. v. 5.
ννσσω (-ττω) : 1 aor. ίνυξα ; to strike [?], pierce ; to
pierce through, transfix; often in Hom. of severe or even
deadly wounds given one ; as, τον μϊν (γχ(ϊ νύξ' . . . στν-
γ€ρ6ς δ' αρα μιν σκότος eiXe, II. 5, 45. 47 ; φθήσας αύτορ
cVeiiOS i^TTft κάτωθεν υπό τον βουβωνα 8όρατι καΐ παραχρήμα
δκργάζίται, Joseph, b. j. 3, 7, 35 ; so την ττΧ^υράν Χόγχη,
Jn. xix. 34, cf. xx. 25, 27. On the further use of the word
cf. Fritzsche, Rom. ii. p. 559. [Comp. : κατα-νύσσω.^ '
νυστάζω ; 1 aor. ivucrra^a ; (NYQ, cf. ν(ύω, vfvστάζω) ;
Sept. for QU ; 1. prop, to nod in sleep, to sleep,
(Hippocr., Arstph., Xen., Plato, al.); to be overcome or
oppressed with sleep ; to fall asleep, drop off to sleep, [(cf.
AViclif) to nap ii] : Mt. .xxv. 5 ; Sept. for D^iJ, Ps. Ixxv.
(Ixxvi.) 7. 2. like the Lat. dormito [cf. our to be
napping~\, trop. i. q. to be negligent, careless, (Plat., Pint.,
al.) : of a thing i. q. to linger, delag, 2 Pet. ii. 3.*
νυχθήμίρον, -ου, τό, {νύζ and ήμίρα), a night and a day,
the space of twenty-four hours : 2 Co. xi. 25. (Alex.
Aphr. ; Geopon.) Cf. Slurz, De dial. Mac. etc. p. 186;
\_Soph. Lex. s. v.; cf. W. 25].*
Nu€ (tiafo!, -ov, in Joseph, [antt. 1, 3, 1 sqq.]), ό, (ΠΙ
rest), Noah, the second father of the human race : Mt.
xxiv. 37 sq. ; Lk. iii. 36 ; xvii. 26 sq. ; Heb. xi. 7 ; 1 Pet.
iii. 20 ; 2 Pet. ii. 5.*
νωθρό?, -ά, -iv, (i. q. νωθής, fr. νη [cf. ντγπίος~\ and ωθίω
[to push; al. όθομαι to care about (cf. Vanicek p. 879)],
cf. viihvvo!, νώνυμος, fr. νη and 6&ύνη, όνομα), slow, slug•
gish, indolent, dull, languid : Heb. vi. 12 ; with a dat. of
reference [W. § 31, 6 a.; B. § 133, 21], toIs ακοαίς, of one
who apprehends with difficulty, Heb. v. 1 1 ; νωθρός και
παρίΐμίνος iv τοίί ΐργοις. Sir. iv. 29 ; νωθρός κ. παραμάνας
ipyOTq!. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 34, 1. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.,
Dion. Hal., Anthol., al.) [Syn. see αργός, fin.]*
vuTos. -ου, ό, [fr. root 'to bend,' 'curve,' akin to Lat.
natis; Ficki. 128; Υ anicek p. iiOl, the back ■. Ro. xi. 10
fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 24. (In Hom. ό νώτοί [" the gend.
of the sing, is undetermined in Hom. and Hes." (L. and
S.)], plur. τα νώτα; in Attic generally τό νωτον, very
rarely ό νώτοΓ ; plur. always τά νώτα; Sept. ό vcotos, plur.
oi ί-ώτοι; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 290 ; [Rutherford, Kew
Phryn. p. 351] ; Passow [L. and S.] s. v.)*
[I, on its occasional substitution for σ see 2, σ, £•]
ξ€ν£ο, -ας, ή, {ξίνιος, -α, -ον, and this fr. ξ(νος), fr. Hom.
down, hospitality, hospitable reception ; i.q.a lodging-place,
lodgings : Acts xxviii. 23 (i. q. το μίσθωμα in vs. 30 [but
this is doubtful ; the more prob. opinion receives the
preference s. v. ίδιοί, 1 a.]) ; Philem. 22. [See esp. Bp.
'oghtft. on Phil. p. 9, and on Philem. 1. c.]*
ξίνίζω ; 1 aor. (ξίνισα ; Pass., pres. ξινίζομαι ', 1 aor.
iξfVLσθηv; fr. Ilom.down; 1. to receive as a guest,
to entertain hospitably : τικά. Acts x. 23 ; xxviii. 7 ; Heb.
xiii. 2 ; pass, to be received hospitably ; to stay as a guest,
to lodge (be lodged): iveaSe, Acts x. 18; iv οικία τινός.
Acts χ. 32; παρά τι«, Acts χ. 6; xxi. 16 [cf. Β. 284 (244);
W. 214 (201)], and sundry codd. in 1 Co. xvi. 19 ; (Diod.
ξ€νοόο)^ίω
432
ξυρο
14,30. 2. to surprise or astonish by the strangeness
and novelty of a thiny (cf. Germ, hi'/remilen) : ξινίζηντά
Tiva. Acts xvii. 20 {ζίνίζιιυσα πμοσυψις καί καταπληκτική^
Polvb. ;i, 114,4; τον θ(6ν (ξίνιζί το πραττόμ(νον, Joseph,
antt. 1, 1, 4 ; ξινίζουσαι σνμφοραί, 2 Mace. i.\. G) ; pass.
Ιο be surpriseil, astonished at the novelty or stranr/eness of
η thing ; to think strange, be shocked : w. dat. of the thing
[W. § 31, 1 f.], 1 Pet. iv. 12 (Polyb. 1, 23, 5; 3,G8, 9);
iV w. <lat. of the thing [cf. B. § 13:5, 23], 1 Pet. iv. 4.*
ξίνοΒοχίω (for tlie earlier form ξ(ΐιοδοκ€ω in use fr. lldt.
iliiwn ; cf. Lol). acl Pliryn. p. 307), -ώ : 1 aor. ίξινοΒόχησα ;
(ξ(νο&όχος, i. c. ξ(νον! 8ίχόμ(νος) ; to receive and enlcrlain
hospilalili/,to be hiispi/able : iTini. v. 10. (Dio Cass. 78,
3; [Grace. Ven. Gen. xxvi. 17; eccl. writ.].)*
ξε'νοΐ, -ι;, -ov, fr. Ilom. down, niasc. a guest-friend (Lat.
hospes, [of parties bound by ties of liospitality]), i. e. 1.
a foreigner, stranger, (opp. to ΐπιχώριος. Plat. Phaedoc. 2
p. 59 b. ; Joseph, b. j. 5, 1, 3) ; a. prop. : I\It. xxv.
35, 38, 43 sq. ; xxvii. 7 ; 3 Jn. h ; ζίνοι κ. παριπίΒημοι f'n'i
της γη:, Ileb. xi. 13 ; οί imSqpivtnfs ξίνοι. Acts xvii. 21 ;
opp. to συμπολίτης, Eph. ii. I'J ; (Sept. for Π")Χ a travel-
ler, 2 S. xii. 4 cod. Alex. ; for "<;, Job xxxi. 32 ; sev-
eral times for 'IJJ)- [as adj. with] δαιμόνια, Acts xvii.
18. b. trop. o. alien (from a person or thing) ;
without knowledge of, without a share in : with a gen. of
the thing, των διαθηκών της fVayytXtat, Eph. ii. 12 [cf. W.
§ 30, 4, C] (toC λόγου, Soiih. O. T. 219). β. new, un-
heard of: διίαχαί, Ileb. xiii. 9 ; ξί'νο» τι, a strange, won-
derful thing, 1 Pet. iv. 12 (Aeschyl. Prom. 6S8 ; Diod.
ΰ, 15 and 52; al.). 2. one who rereires and enter-
tains another hospitably; ivilh whom he stays or lodges, a
host : ό ζίνοί μου, Κο. xvi. 23, Λvhere καί της εκκλησίας
όλης is added, i. e. either 'who receives hospitably all
the members of the church who cross his threshold,* or
' who kindly permits the church to worship in his house '
(Frilzsche).'
ξ€'<Γτη5, -ου. ό, (a corruption of the Lat. sextarius) ; 1.
(/ sexuirius, i. e. a vessel for measuring lirpiids, holding
about a pint (Josejjh. antt. 8, 2, 9 — see βάτος ; Ejiict.
diss. 1, 9, 33; 2, IC, 22; [Dioscor.], Galen and med.
writ.). 2. a tcooden pitcher or ewer (V'ulg. urceus
[A. y.pot'l) from which water or Avine is poured, whether
holding a sextarius or not : Mk. vii. 4, 8 [here Τ \VH
om. Tr br. the cl.]."
ξηρα(νω : 1 aor. ίξηρανα (Jas. i. 11); Pass., pres. ξηραί-
νομαι ; pf. 3 pers. sing, ίξήρανται (Mk. xi. 21), ptcp. ϊξψ
ραμμΐνος; 1 aor. (ξηράνθην; cf. Β. 41 (36); (fr. ξηρός, ([,
v.) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. chielly for 173" and ΐ:/"3ίΠ ; to
make dry, dry up, wither : act., τόχ χόρτον, Jas. i. 1 1 ; pass.
to become dry, to be dry, be withered [cf. B. 52 (45)] (Sept.
for wy) ■■ of plants, Mt. xiii. β ; xxi. 19 sq. ; Mk. iv. 6 ;
xi. 20 sq. ; Lk. viii. 6 ; Jn. xv. 6 ; [1 Pet. i. 24] ; of the
ripening of crops. Rev. xiv. 15 ; of fluids : ή πηγή, Mk.
V. 29 : TO ίθωρ, Rev. xvi. 12, (Gen. viii. 7 ; Is. xix. 5) ; of
members of the body, to waste away, pine away : Mk. ix.
IS ; (ξηραμμίνη χ(ΐρ, & withered hand, Mk. iii. 1, and R G
in 3.•
ξηρόϊ, -ά, -όν, fr. Ildt. down, dry: rh ξν\ον, Lk. xxiiL
31 (in a proverb, saying, ' if a good man is treated sO,
Λvhat will be done to the ivicked ? ' cf. Ps. i. 3 ; Ezek. xx.
47. Is. Ivi. 3 ; Ezek. xvii. 24) ; of members of the body
deprived of their natural juices, shrunk, wasted, withered:
as xelp, Mt. xii. 10 ; Mk. iii. 3 L Τ Tr WII ; Lk. vi. 6, 8 ;
men are spoken of as ξηροί, withered, Jn. v. 3. of the
land in distinction from water, ή ξηρά sc. γή (Sept. for
T\UT, Gen. i. 9 s([. ; Jon. i. 9 ; ii. 11, and often [VV. 18:
592 (550)]): Mt. xxiii. 15; Ileb. xi. 29 where L Τ Tr
WII addy^t.•
ξνλινο5, -ίνη, -ivov, (ξΰλον), fr. Pind. and Ildt. down,
wooden, made of wood: σκ€ύη, 2 Tim. ii. 20; neut. plur.
ίίδωλα, Rev. ix. 20 (flioi. Bar. vi. 30 [Ep. Jer. 29]).*
ξνλον, -ου, το, (fr. ξίιω to scrape, plane), fr. llom. down ;
Sept. for yi'_; 1. wood: univ. 1 Co. iii. 12; ξ. θνϊνορ,
liev. xviii. 1 2 ; that which is made of wood, as a beam from
which any one is suspended, a gibbet, a cross, [A. V. tree,
q. V. in B. D. Am. ed.], Acts v. 30 ; x. 39 ; xiii. 29 ; Gal.
iii. 13; 1 Pet. ii. 24, {]■}.<_, Gen. xL 19; Deut. xxi. 23;
Josh. X. 20 ; Esth. v. 14), — a use not found in the classics
[cf. L. and S. s. v. II. 4]. A log or timber with holes in
which the feet, hands, neck, of prisoners were inserted
and fastened with thongs (Gr. κόλον, ξυλοπ(8η, ποΙίοκάκη,
πο8οστράβη, Lat. nervus, by which the l^at. renders the
llebr. ΊΏ, a fetter, or shackle for the feet, Job [xiii. 27] ;
xxxiii. 11 ; cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. j). 458 sq([. ;
[B.D. s. V. Stocks]): Acts xvi. 24 (Ildt. 6, 75; 9, 37;
Arstph. eq. 3C7, 394, 705); a cudgel, slick, staff: plur.,
Mt. xxvi. 47, 55; Mk. .xiv. 43, 48 ; Lk. xxii. 52, (Ildt.
2, G3; 4,180; Dem. p. 645, 15 ; Polyb. 6, 37, 3 ; Joseph,
b. j. 2, 9, 4 ; Hdian. 7, 7, 4). 2. α tree : Lk. xxiii.
31 (Gen. i. 29 ; ii. 9; iii. 1 ; Is. xiv. 8, etc.) ; ξ. της ζωής,
see ζωή, 2 b. p. 274*.
[ξύν, older form of συν, retained occasionally in icmi-
poimds, as ξυμβαϊνω, 1 Pet. iv. 12 ed. Bezae ; see Meist«r-
hans § 49, 1 1 ; L. and S. 8. v. σίιν, init. ; and cf. 2, σ, s•}
ξυράω (a later form, fr. Diod. [I, 84] down, for ξυρ£ω,
which the earlier writ, used fr. Hdt. down; [W. 24; B.
63 (5.j) ; esp. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 53]), -ώ: pf. pass,
ptcp. (ξυρημίνος ; Mid., pres. inf. ξυράσθαι [for which
some would read (1 Co. xi. 6) ξΰρασθαι (1 aor. mid. inf.
ίτ.ξίρω) ; see WH. App. p. 166]; 1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers.
plur. ξυρήσωνται [but Τ Tr WH read the fut. -σονται] ;
(fr. ξνρόν a razor, and this fr. ξύω) ; Sept. for nbj ; '"
shear, shave : pass. 1 Co. xi. 5 ; mid. to get one's self shared,
ibid. vs. 6 ; 1 Co. xi. 6 ; with an ace. specifying the obj.
more precisely [cf. B. § 134, 7 ; W. § 32, 5] : την κεφαλήν.
Acts xxi. 24 (Sept. Num. vi. 9, 19 ; Lev. xxi. 5 ; rat
οφρΰας, Hdt. 2, 66 ; τό σώμα, 2, 37).*
us
ο
ό, r, τ<5, originally tos, τή, τό, (as is evident from the
forms τοί, ταί for οί, αϊ in Horn, and the Ionic writ.), cor-
responds to our definite article Ihe (Germ, der, die, dax),
which is properly a demonstrative pronoun, which we
Bee in its full force in Homer, and of which we find cer-
tain indubitable traces also in aU kinds of Greek prose,
and hence also in the X. T.
I. As a Demonstrative Pronoun; Lat. kic, haec,
hoc ; Germ, der, die, das, emphatic ; cf. W. § 1 7, 1 ; B.
101(89)s(i.; 1. in the words of the poet Aratus, roC
yap Koi yivos ΐσμίν, quoted by Paul in Acts xvii. 28. 2.
in prose, where it makes a partition or distributes into
parts : ό μίν . . . 6 de, thai . . . thin, the one . . . the other :
Mt. -xiii. 23 R G Tr [here the division is threefold] ; Gal.
iv. 23 [here h WH Tr rarg. br. (xt'i/] ; oi μίν . . . οί Se, Acts
xxviii. 24 ; Phil. i. 16 sq. ; oi fiex . . . ό Se. Heb. vii. 5 sq.
20 (21), 23 sq. ; roiis μίν . . . tovs Se, Mk. .\ii. 5 RG;
E[)li. iv. 11 ; oi μ^ν . . . άλλοι δί (Lchm. οί δί) . . . trfpoi
i(, Mt. xvi. 14 cf. Jn. vii. 12; Ttv/r foil, by oi δί. Acts
xvii. 18 ; OS (see 5s I.) μίν foil, by ό Si, Ro. xiv. 2 ; oi δί
stands as though oi μίν had preceded, Mt. .\xvi. 6 7 ; xxviii.
17. 3. in narration, when either two per.sons or
two parties are alternately placed in opposition to each
other and the discourse turns from one to the other; ό
Sf, but he, and he, (Germ, er alier) : Mt. ii. 14 ; iv. 4 ; xxi.
29 sq. ; Mk. i. 45 ; xii. 15 ; Lk. viii. 21, 30, 48 ; xxii. 10,
34 ; Jn. ix. 38, and very often ; plur., Mt. ii. 5, 9 ; iv. 20 ;
Mk. xii. 14 [RGLmrg.], 16 [Lbr. oi δί] ; Lk. vii. 4;
XX. 5, 12 ; xxii. 9, 38, 71 ; Acts iv. 21 ; xii. 15, and often ;
oi μίν ovv, in the Acts alone: i. 6; v. 41 ; xv. 3, 30 ; ό
μ(ν ουν, xxiii. 18; xxviii. 5.
Π. As the Definite or Prepositive Article (to
be distinguished from the postpositive article, — as
it is called when it has the force of a relative pro-
noun, like the (ierm. der, die, da.i, exx. of which use are
not found in the N. T.), whose use in the N. T. is e.\-
plained at length by W. §§ 18-20; B. 85 (74) sqq. ;
[Green p. 5 sqq.]. As in all languages the article serves
to distinguish things, persons, notions, more exactly, it
is prefixed 1. to substantives that have no mod-
ifier ; and a. those that designate a person or a
thing that is the only one of its kind ; the art. thus dis-
tinguishes the same from all other persons or things, as
ό ^toi, ο ovpams, η γη, η θάλασσα, ό Beos, ο λόγοί (•Ιη. i.
1 sq.), ο ΒίάβοΚοί, τ6 φως, η σκοτία, η ζωη, ό θάνατος,
etc. b. appellative names of persons and things defi-
nite enough in themselves, or made so by the context,
or sufficiently well-known from history ; thus, to the
names of virtues and vices, as ή δικαιοσύνη, η σοφία, η
&ίναμΐ!, ή άλήθίΐα, etc. ό ίοχόμινο!, the ivell-known per-
sonage who is to come, i. e. the Messiah, Mt. xi. 3 ; Lk. viL
19; ό προφήτης, the (promised and expected) prophet,
Jn. i. 21; vii. 40; ή σωτηρία, the salvation which all
good men hope for, i. e. the Messianic salvation; η
γραφή, etc. ; ή νίφίλη, the cloud (ivell known from the
O. T.), 1 Co. X. 1 sq. ; τούί άγγίΧους, Jas. ii. 25; τω
ΐκτρώματι, 1 Co. xv. S. to designations of eminent per-
sonages : ό uiof Toi θίοΰ, 6 mos roO ανθρώπου, (see νίός) ;
ό διδίίσκαλοΓ τοϋ Ισμαήλ, Jn. iii. 10 ; cf. Fritzsche on Mk.
p. 613. The article is applied to the repeated name of
a person or thing already mentioned or indicated, and
to which the reader is referred, as Toiit μάγους, Mt. ii. 7
cf. 1 ; oi ασκοί, Mt. ix. 17; oi δαίμον(ς, Mt. viii. 31 cf. 28;
την ovov και TOW πώλοι/, Mt. xxi. 7 cf. 2, and countless
otlier exx. Tlie article is used ^vith names of things
not yet spoken of, in order to show that definite things
are referred to, to be distinguished from others of the
same kind and easily to be known from the context ; as
τα βρϊφη, the babes belonging to the people of that
place, Lk. xviii. 15 ; άπο των δίνίρων, sc. which were
there, Mt. xxi. 8 ; τω 'κρΰ, to the priest whose duty it
will be to examine thee, when thou comest, Mt. viii. 4 ;
Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; to πλοίον, the ship which stood
ready to carry them over, Mt. viii. 23 [RGT, cf. 18];
ix. 1 [RG]; xiii. 2 [RG]; το όρος, the mountain near
the place in question (^der an Orl u. Slelle hefindliche
Berg) [but some commentators still regard το όρος as
used here generically or Ilebraistically like ή όριινή, the
mountain region or the highlands, in contrast with the
low country, (cf. Sept. Josh. xvii. 16; xx. 7; Gen.
xix. 17, 19, etc.) ; cf. Bp. Lghifi. ' Fresh Revision' etc.
p. 1 1 1 SC]. ; TKtfiVi, Matthiiusevangelium, p. 129 note; and
in ]\Ieyer's Mt. 7te Aufl.], Mt. v. 1 ; Mk. iii. 13; Lk.
ix. 28; Jn. vi. 3, 15. (1 Mace. ix. 38, 40) ; ή οικία, the
house in which (Jesus) was wont to lodge, Mt. ix. 10,
28 ; xiii. 36 ; xvii. 25 ; ΰπό τον μόδιον, sc. that is in the
house, Mt. V. 15 ; also eVl την \v)(viav, ibid. ; iV rg φάτνη,
in the manger of the stable of the house where they
were lodging, Lk. ii. 7 R G ; ό ίπαινος, the praise of
which he is worthy, 1 Co. iv. 5; so everywhere in the
doxologies : ή 8όξα, το κράτος, 1 Pet. iv. 11 ; Rev. v. 13,
etc. c. The article prefixed to the Plural often
either includes all and every one of those who by the
given name are distinguished from other things having
a different name, — as oi άστfpfς, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii
25 ; ai ά\ώπ(κ(ς, Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58, etc. ; — or de-
fines the class alone, and thus indicates that the whole
class is represented by the individuals mentioned, how-
ever many and whosoever they may be ; as in oi Φαρι-
^αΐοι. οί γραμματείς, οι τίΚωναι, οί άνθρωποι, people, the
484
multitude, (Germ, die Leule) ; oi άίτοί, Mt. xxiv. 28 ;
Toif κνσΐν, Mt. vii. 6. d. The article prefixed to the
Singular sometimes so defines only the class, that all and
every one of those who bear the name are brought to
mind ; thus, 6 άνθρωποι, Mt. xv. 1 1 ; ό (θνικί)! κ- τίλώΜ)£,
Mt. xviii. 1 7 ; ό (ργάτης, Lk. χ. 7 ; 1 Tim. v. 18 ; ό μ^σίτηί,
Gal. iii. 20 ; ό κΚηρονόμο!, Gal. iv. 1 ; ό SUaios, Ro. i. 1 7 ;
Heb. X. 38 ; τά σημύα τοΰ αποστόλου, the signs required
of any one who claims to be an apostle, 2 Co. xii. 12,
and other exx. e. The article is prefixed to the
nominative often put for the vocative in addresses [cf.
W. § 29, 2; B. § 129 a. 5]: χαίρι ό βασιλ(ϋς των Ίουδ.
(prop, σν 6 βασ•, thou who art the king), Jn. xix. 3 ; και, ό
Ίτατηρ, Mt. -xi. 2t! ; aye vvv oi πΧούσιοι, κ\αΰσατ€, Jas. v. 1 ;
ουρανί κα'ί ο! nyiot, Kev. xviii. 20; add, Mk. v. 41 ; x. 47 ;
Lk. xii. 32; xriii. 11, 13; Jn. viii. 10; xx. 28 ; Acts xiii.
41; Ro.viii.15; Eph. v. 14, 22, 25; vi.l,4sq.; Rev. xii.
12. f. The Greeks em])loy the article, where we
abstain from its use, before nouns denoting things that
pertain to him who is the subject of discourse : eine or
φησ'ι μ(γ'>λ;ι t;j φωντ]. Acts xiv. 10 [R G] ; xxvi. 24, (Prov.
xxvi. 25) ; yvvr) προσινχομίνη . . . άκατακαλντττω rff κ(-
φάλη. 1 Co. xi. 5 ; esp. in the expression exfiv Tt, when
the object and its adjective, or what is equivalent to an
adjective, denotes a part of the body or something else
which naturally belongs to any one (as in French, il a
les e'paules larijes); so, ϊχιιν την χιφα ξηράν, Mt. xii. 10
RG; Mk. iii. 1 ; το πρόσωπον ως άνθρωπου [(Rec. ΐΊνθρω•
πος^'], Rev. iv. 7; τά αισθητήρια γιγνμνασμίνα, Ileb. ν.
14 ; άπαράβατον την 'κρωσννην, Wvh. vii. 24 ; την κατοίκησιν
κτλ. ^Ik. ν. 3 ; την fip eavTovs άγάπην (κτινη, 1 Pet. iv, 8.
Cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 25. the gen. of a pers. pron.
αυτού, ίιμών, is added to the substantive : Mt. iii. 4 ; Mk.
viU. 1 7 ; Rev. ii. 1 8 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 2, cf. Eph. i. 1 8 ; cf. W.
§ 18, 2; [B. § 125,5]. g. Proper Names some-
times have the article and sometimes are anarthrous ; cf.
W. § 18, 5 and 6; B. § 124. 3 and 4; [Green p. 23
sq.] ; o. as respects names of Persons, the person
without the article is simply named, but with the article
is marked as either well known or as already mentioned;
thus we find Ίησοϋι and ό 'l^s-, ΠαΰλοΓ and ό ΠαΟλ., etc.
Πιλάτοί has the article everywhere in John's Gospel and
also in Mark's, if xv. 43 (in R G L) be excepted (but Τ
Tr AV Η insert the article there also) ; TiVos is every-
where anarthrous. Indeclinable names of persons
in the oblique cases almost always have the article,
unless the case is made evident by a preposition : τω
Ιωσήφ, Mk. xv. 45; τοκ Ίακωβ κα\ τονΉσαΰ, Heb. xi. 20,
and many other exx., esp. in the genealogies, Mt. i. 1
sqq. ; I-k. iii. 23 ; but wliere perspicuity does not require
the article, it is omitted also in the oblique cases, as των
υ'ιων Ιωσήφ, Heb. xi. 21 ; των υιών Έμμώρ, Acts vii. 16 ;
ό flfos Ισαάκ, Mt. xxii. 32; Acts vii. 32; όταν όψ-ηυθί
'Αβραάμ κ. Ισαάκ . . . και πάντας τονς προφήτας, Lk. xiii.
28. The article is commonly omitted with personal
proper names to which is added an apposition indicating
the race, country, office, rank, surname, or something
else, (cf. Matthiae § 274) ; let the foil, sufiice as exx. :
Αβραάμ 6 πατήρ ήμων, Jn. v'l'n. .56 ; Ro, iv. 1 ; Ίάκωβορ
τον τοΰ Ζϊ/3ίδαίου καΐ Ίωάννην τον ά^εΧφον αυτοΰ, Mt. iv.
21 ; Μαρία ή Μαγδαληνή. Mt. xxvii. 56, etc.; Ιωάννης ο
βαπτιστής, Mt. iii. 1 ; Ήρώδί/ϊ ο τετράρχης, Lk. ix. 7 ;
Ίησοϋς ό λίγο' /ifvos Χριστοί, Mt. i. 16; ΣαΰλοΓ δί ό Kcu
Παϋλοί SC. καλούμενο;. Acts xiii. 9 ; Σίμωνος τον λιπρον,
Alk. xiv. 3 ; Βαρτι'ραιο? ό τυφλοί, Mk, χ. 46 [R (ί] ; Ζαχα•
ρίην τοΰ άπολομίυηυ, Lk. xi. 51. But there are excej^
tions also to this usage : ό &€ 'Hpco8;jt ό τίτράρ;(ί)ί, Lk, UL
19; τον Σαοίλ, υ'ιον Kit, Acts xiii. 21; in the opening
of the Epistles : Παΰλοί άπ•ί5στολοί, Ro. i. 1 ; 1 Co. i.
1, etc. p. Proper names of countries and re-
gions have the article far more frequently than those
of cities and towns, for the reason that most names of
countries, being derived from adjectives, get the force of
substantives only by the addition of the article, as ή
Αχαΐα (but cf. 2 Co. ix. 2), ή Γαλατία, ή Γαλιλαια, ή Ιτα-
λία, ή 'Ιουδαία, ή Μακίδονι'α (but of. Ro. xv. 26 ; 1 Co. xvi,
5), etc. Only Αίγυπτος, if Acts vii. 11 LTTr WH be
excepted, is everywhere anarthrous. The names of
cities, esp. when joined to prepositions, particularly fv,
(ΐς and ί'κ, are without the article; but we find άπο (R G
ck) T^f 'ρώμης in Acts xviii. 2. γ. Names of rivers
and streams have the article in Mt. iii. 13; Mk. i, 5;
Lk. iv, 1 ; xiii. 4 ; Jn. i. 28 ; τοΰ KcSpiiv, Jn. xviii. 1 G L
Tr mrg. 2. The article is prefixed to substan-
tives expanded and more precisely defined by modi-
fiers; a. to nouns accompanied by a gen. of the
pronouns μον, σου, ημών, ίιμών, αυτοΰ, (αυτών, αυτών: Mt,
i. 21,25; v. 45 ; vi. 10-12; xii. 49 ; Mk. ix. 17; Lk. vi,
27; X, 7; xvi, 6 ; Acts .xi.x. 25 [LT Tr WII ijpiv] ; Ro.
iv. 19; vi. 6, and in numberless other places; it is rarely
omitted, as in Mt. xix, 28; Lk. i. 72; ii, 32; 2 Co. viii.
23; Jas. v, 20, etc.; cf. B. § 127, 27. b. The pos-
sessive pronouns ΐμός, σός, ήμίτίρος, νμίτιρος, joined to
substantives (if Jn, iv. 34 be excepted) always take the
article, and John generally puts them after the substan-
tive (ή κρίσις ή ('μή, Jn. v. 30 ; ό λόγος 6 σός, χνϋ. 17 ; ^
ΚΊΐι^ωνια ή ήμ(τίρα, 1 Jn. i. 3 ; ό καιρός ό νμίτιρος, Jn. vii,
6), very rarclv between the article and the substantive
(toIs f'poit ρήμασιν, Jn. v. 47; ή ϊμή &ι8αχή, vii. 16 ; την
σήν λαλιάν, iv. 42), yet this is always done by the other
N. T. writ., Mt. xviii. 20 ; Mk. viii. 38 ; Lk. ix, 26 ; Acts
xxiv. 6 [Rec,]; xxvi, 5; Ro, iii. 7, etc, c, AVhen
adjectives arc added to substantives, either the ad-
jective is placed between the article and the substantive,
— as to ίδιον φορτίον. Gal. vi. 5 ; ό αγαθός άνθρωπος, Mt.
xii, 35 ; τήν δικαίαν κρίσιν, Jn. vii. 24 ; ή άγαθη μίρις, Lk,
χ. 42; το ayiov πν(ΰμα, Lk. xii. 10; Acts i. 8 ; ή alwVMS
ζωή, Jn. χνϋ. 3, and many other ex.x.; — or the adjective
preceded by an article is placed after the substantive
with its article, as ro πνίΰμα το ayiov, Mk. iii. 29 ; Jn.
xiv, 26; Acts i, 16; Heb, id, 7; ix, 8 ; x. 15; ή ζωή η
αιώνιος, 1 Jn. i. 2 ; ii. 25 ; ό ποιμήν ό καλός, Jn. χ. 1 1 ; τήν
ττϋλην τήν σώηράν, Acts xii. 10, and other exx.; — very
rarely the adjective stands before a substantive which
has the article, as in Acts [xiv, 10 R G]; xxvi. 24; 1 Co,
Ki. 5, [cf. B. § 125, 5 ; W, § 20, 1 c.]. As to the adjeo
435
lives of quantity, oKos, πάί, πολύί, see each in its own
place. d. Wiiat has been said concerning adjec-
tives holds true also of all other limitations added to
substantives, as ή κατ €κ\ογην πρόθίσις, Ιίο. ix. 1 1 ; η
παρ' ίμοΰ 8ίαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; ό \όγο! ο του σταυρόν, 1 Co.
i. 18 ; ή (U Χβίστί,ν πίστκ. Col. ϋ. 5 ; on the other hand,
η ΊΓίστίί ΰμων η npos τον θ(όν, 1 Th. i. 8 ; τ^? ^ιακονία^ της
fis Tols ayi'ouf, 2 Co. viii. 4 ; see many other exx. of each
usage in \V. 131 (124) sqq. ; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e.
The noun has the article before it when a demonstra-
tive pronoun (jvrof, excivos) belonging to it either pre-
cedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, 6
άνθρωπος ούτος, Jn. ix. 24 [oiros ΰ άνθρ. L Tr mrg. WII] ;
Acts vi. 13 ; xxii. 26 ; ό λαοί ούτος, Mt. xv. 8 ; ό υιός σου
ούτος, Lk. XV. 30; plur. Lk. x.\iv. 17, and numberless
other exx. ; οντος 6 άνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30 ; οντος ό \αός,
Mk. vii. 6 [ο λ. οίτ. L \VH mrg.] ; oiroy ό υιός μου, Lk.
XV. 24 ; οίτος ό τίΚώνης, Lk. xviii. 11 [ό reX. οίτ. L mrg.];
οίτοί ό Aoyos, Jn. vii. 36 [ό λογ. oir. LTTrWH], and
many other e.x.x. on cxelxof, see cxfiiOs, 2 ; on αΙτΌς ό
etc., see αυτός (I. 1 b. etc.) ; on ό αυτός etc., see αυτός,
nL 3. The neuter article prefi.\ed to adjec-
tives changes them into substantives [cf. W. § 34, 2; B.
§ 12-i, 1] ; as, το ά-γαθόν, το κάΚόν (which see each in its
place) : to ϊλαττον, Heb. vii. 7 ; with a gen. added, το
γνωστόν τον θίοΰ, Ro. i. 1 9 ; το αδύνατον του νομού, Ro.
viii. 3 ; TO άσθινΐς του θ(θϋ, 1 Co. i. 25 ; αίτης, Heb. vii.
18 ; τα αόρατα τ. θίοΰ, Ro. i. 20 ; τα κρυπτά της αισχύνης,
2 Co. iv. 2, etc. 4. The article Λvith cardinal η u-
merals: elf one; 6 e?r the one (of two), see tis, 4 a.;
but difi'erently ό its in Ro. v. 15, 17, the (that) one. So
also oi δύο (our the twain), Mt. xLx. 5 ; o! deKa the (those)
ten, and ol evvea, Lk. xvii. 1 7 ; tKUvot ol δέκα (^και) οκτώ,
Lk. xiii. 4. 5. The article prefixed to partici-
ples a. gives them the force of substantives [W.
§§ 18, 3 ; 45, 7 ; B. §§ 129, 1 b. ; 144, 9] ; as, ό πfφάζωv,
Mt. iv. 3; 1 Th. iii. ο : ό βατττίζων, Mk. vi. 14 (for which
Mt. xiv. 2 ό βαπτιστής); ό σπείρων, Mt. xiii. 3; Lk. viii.
5; ό ολοθρήων, Heb. xi. 28; oi βαστάζοντας, Lk. vii. 14 ;
oi βόσκοντας, Λΐΐ. viii. 33; Mk. v. 14; oi ασθίοντες, the
eaters (convivae), Mt. xiv. 21 ; το όφαιλόμανον, Mt. xviii.
30, 34 ; τα υπάρχοντα (see υπάρχω, 2). b. the ptcp.
with the article must be resolved into he who [and a fin.
verb; cf. B. § 144, 9]: Mt. x. 40; Lk. vi. 29; xi. 23; .In.
XV. 23 ; 2 Co. i. 21 ; Phil. ii. 13, and very often, πάς ό
full, by a ptcp. [W. Ill (lOG)], Mt. v. 22; vii. 26; Lk. vi.
30 [T \VH om. L Tr mrg. br. art.] ; xi. 10 ; Ro. ii. 1 ; 1 Co.
xvi. 16 ; Gal. iii. 13, etc. ; μακάριος ό w. a ptcp., Mt. v. 4
(.5), 6, 10, etc.; oial ίμ'ιν υ'ι w. a ptcp., Lk. vi. 25; the
neut. TO with a ptcp. must be resolved into that wnich
[with a fin. verb], το γαννώμανον, Lk. i. 35 ; το γαγαννημί-
νον, Jn. iii. 6. c. the article with ptcp. is placed in
apposition : Mk. iii. 22 ; Acts xvii. 24 ; Eph. iii. 20 ; iv.
22, 24 ; 2 Tim. i. 14 ; 1 Pet. i. 21, etc. 6. The neut.
TO before infinitives a. gives them the force of
substantives (cf. B. 261 (225) sqq. [cf. W. § 44, 2 a. : 3 c.]);
as, TO καθίσαι, Mt. XX. 2.^ ; Mk. x. 40 ; ro θίΧαιν, Ro. vii.
18; 2Cu.viii.lO: to ττοι^σαί, το «TrtTtXiVat, 2 Co. viii. II,
and other exx. ; τούτο κρΊνατα • το μη τιθίναι κτλ. Ro. xiv.
13. On the infin. w. the art. depending on a preposi-
tion {αντ\ τοϋ, iv τω, eis τό, etc.), see under each prep, in
its place. b. ^luch more frequent in the N. T. than
in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ., esp. in the
writings of Luke and Paul (nowhere in John's Gospel
and Epistles), is the use of the gen. τοΰ w. an inf. (and
in the Sept. far more freq. than in the N. T.), which is
treated of at length by Fritzsche in an excursus at the
end of his Com. on Mt. p. 843 sqq. ; W. § 44, 4 ; B. 266
(228) sqq. The examples fall under the foil, classes :
ToO with an inf. is put a. after words which natu-
rally require a genitive (of a noun also) after them;
thus after άξιον, 1 Co. xvi. 4 ; ΐΚαχα, Lk. i. 9 (1 S. xiv. 47);
άξαποροϋμαι, 2 Co. i. 8. β. for the simple expletive
[i. e. ' complementary '] or (as it is commonly called)
epexegetical infin., which serves to fill out an incom-
plete idea expressed by a noun or a verb or a phrase,
(where in Germ, zu is commonly used) ; thus after προ-
θυμία, 2 Co. viii. 1 1 ; βραδαΐς, Lk. xxiv. 25 ; άλπϊς, Acts
xxvii. 20; 1 Co. ix. 10 [not Rec] ; άζήται (ίκαιρίαν, Lk.
xxii. 6 [not L mrg.] ; ό καφυς (sc. f στί) τοϋ άρξασθαι, to
begin, 1 Pet. iv. 1 7 (καιρόν ϊχαιν w. the simple inf. Heb.
xi. 15); Sibovai την αξονσίαν, Lk. χ. 19 {αξουσ'ιαν εχαιν
with simple inf., Jn. .xix. 10; 1 Co. ix. 4); όφαιλίται
άσμάν (eqidv. to ύφαίλομαν), Ro. viii. 12 (with inf. alone.
Gal. V. 3); ίτοιμον eivai, Acts .x.xiii. 15 (1 Mace. iii. 58;
V. 39; xiii. 37; with inf. alone, Lk. .xxii. 33); χραίαν
αχαιν, Heb. ν. 1 2 ; (δωκαν οφθαλμούς τοΰ μη βΧάπαιν κα\
2>τα τοϋ μη άκούαιν, that they should not see . . . that they
should not hear [cf. B. 26 7 (230)]. Ro. xi. 8 (άχαιν ώτα
elsewh. always with a simple inf.; see ους, 2); (πλ',σΰη
ό χρόνος τοΰ τ(Κ(ΐν αυτήν, at which .«he shoidd be deliv-
ered [cf. B. 1. c], Lk. i. 57 ; ΐπλήσθ- ήμάραι . . . τοΰ πιρι-
ταμαιν αυτόν, that they should circumcise him [cf. B. 1. c],
Lk. ii. 21 ; after άνάνδακτόν ϊστιν, Lk. xvii. 1 [soB. § 140,
15; (W. 328 (308) otherwise)]; quite unusually after
iyiviTo [cf. B. § 140, 16 δ.; AV. 1. c], Acts x. 25 [Rec.
om. art.]. γ. after verbs of deciding, entreat-
ing, exhorting, commanding, etc. : after κρίναιν
(see κρίνω, 4) ; iyivfTO γνώμη {^μης Τ Tr WH (see γίνομαι,
5 e. a.)]. Acts xx. 3 ; το πρόσωπον (στήριξαν, Lk. ix. 51 ;
συντίθασθαι. Acts xxiii. 20 (with inf. alone, Lk. xxii. 5) ;
προσαύχασθαι, Jas. v. 17; παρακάΚα'ιν, Acts xxi. 12; iv
TfWf σθαι, Lk. iv. 10; iπιστi\\fιv, Acts xv. 20 (with inf.
alone, xxi. 25 [R G T, but L Tr txt. λΥΗ here άττοστΛ. ; Β.
270 (232)]); καταναύαιν, Lk. v. 7. S. after verbs of
hindering, restraining, removing, (wldch natu-
rally require the genitive), and according to the well-
known pleonasm with μή before the inf. [see μή, I. 4 a. ;
B. §148, 13; AV. 325(305)]; thus, after κατί'χω τίΐ-ά, Lk.
iv. 42 ; κρατούμαι, Lk. .xxiv. 16 ; κωΧΰω, Acts x. 47 ; ύπο-
στίλλομαι. Acts x.x. 20, 27; παύω, 1 Pet. iii. 10; κατα-
παύω, Acts xiv. 18 ; without μή before the inf. after
iγκό7Γτoμa^, Ro. XV. 22. c. τοΰ with an inf. is added
as a somewhat loose epexegesis : Lk. xxi. 22 ; Acts i.x.
15 ; .xiii. 47 ; Phil. iii. 21 ; (ίς άκαθαρσίαν τοΰ άτιμάζισθαι
τα σώματα αυτών, to the uncleanness of their bodies' be-
436
ing dishonored, Ro. i. 24 [cf. B. § 140, 14]; W. 325
(305) 6q. J. it takes the ])lace of an entire final
ilause, in on/er/Aai [W. §44, 4 b. ; B. §140, 17]; esp.
after verbs implying motion: Mt.ii. 13; iii. 13; xiii. 3;
xxiv. 45 ; Mk. iv. 3 (where L 'Γ WH om. Tr br. τοΰ) ; Lk.
i. 77, 71i; ii. 24, 27; v. 1 [R G L txt. Trmrg.]; viii. 5 ;
xii. 42 (here Lorn. Trbr. ToO) ; xxii. 31 ; xxiv. 29; Acts
iii. 2; xx. 30; xxvi. 18; Ro. vi. 6; xi. 10; Gal. iii. 10;
Pliil. iii. 10; Ileb. x. 7, 9 ; xi. 5. η. used of result,
.so ihnt : Acts vii. 19 ; Ro. vii. 3 ; after ποιώ, to cause ihal,
make to, Acts iii. 12; [cf. \V. 326 (306); B. § 140,
16 8.]. 7. The article with adverbs [B. § 125,
10 sq. ; W. § 18, 3], a. gives them the force of sub-
stantives ; as, TO πίραν, the region beyond ; τα άνω, τα
κάτω, το νυν, τα 'ίμημοσθΐν, τα οπίσω, etc. ; see these
words in their proper places. b. is used when they
stand adjectively, as η ϊίνω ^Ι^ρουσαλημ, 6 τότε κόσμος, ό
ΐσω άνθρωπος, ό νΰν αιών, etc., on which see these several
words. c. tlie neut. τό is used in the ace. absol., esp.
in specifications of time: both with adverbs of time, το
πάλιν, 2 Co. xiii. 2 ; τά νΰν or τανϋν, and with neuter ad-
jectives used adverbially, as το \οιπόν, το ιτρότ(ρον (Jn.
vi. 62; Gal. iv. l.'i); το πρώτον (•Ιη. χ. 40; xii. 16; xix.
39); το πλείστον (1 Co. xiv. 27); see these words them-
selves. 8. The article before preposition s with
their cases is very often so used that ων, uvrtt, οντά,
must be supplied in thought [cf. B. § 1 2.'), 9 ; W. § 18, 3] ;
thus, o! άπο ΊταΚίας, από θ(σσαλονίκη!. Acts xvii. 13;
Heb. xiii. 24 [cf. W. § 66, 6] ; ό ΐν nw, Mt. vi. 9 ; Ro.
viii. 1 ; neut. τά προς, Mk. ii. 2 ; o! ex τίνος, Ro. ii. 8 ; iv.
14, 16; Phil. iv. 22 etc.; o'l παρά tii/os, Mk. iii. 21 (see
παρά, I. e.). τά nep'i Tti/of, Lk. xxiv. 19 ; Acts xxiv. 10 ;
Phil. i. 27; [add, τά (TTrWII το) π(ρ\ ΐμοϋ, Lk. xxii.
37], etc. (see π(ρι, I. b. β.) ; τά ntpl τίνα, Phil. ii. 23 [see
vtpl, II. b.] ; oi μ(τά τίνος, those with one, his compan-
ions, Mt. xii. 3 ; oi πιρΊ τίνα, and many other exx. which
are given under the several prepositions, the neut. τό
in the ace. absol. in adverbial expressions [cf. W. 230
(216); B. §§ 125, 12; 131, 9] : τό καθ' ήμίραν, daily, da;/
bi/ da:/, Lk. xi. 3; xix. 47; Acts xvii. 11 [RG WHbr.];
TO καθόλου, at all, Acts iv. 18 [LTWIIom. τί5]; besides,
in TO κατά σάρκα, as respects human origin, Ro. ix. 5 [on
the force of the art. here see Al/hol in Journ. Soo. Bibl.
Lit. etc. for 1883, p. 108]; τά κατ epe, as respects what
relates to me, my state, my affairs. Col. iv. 7 ; Eph. vi.
21 ; TO (ξ υμών, as far as depends on you, Ro. xii. 18;
TO ί'φ' ύμ'ιν, as far as respects you, if I regard you, Ro.
xvi. 19 RG; τά προς (τον) Oeov, acc. absol., as respects
the things pertaining to (lod, i. e. in things pertaining
to God, Ro. XV. 1 7 ; Ileb. ii. 17 ; v. 1, (ifpfi τά προς τοΰί
6(θυς, στρατηγώ be τά προς τους ανθρώπους, Xen. resp.
Laced. 13, 11 ; cf. Frilzsrhr. Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 262 sq.) ;
TO ίκ μίρους sc. δν, that which has been granted us in
part, that which is imperfect, 1 Co. xiii. 10. 9.
The article, in all genders, when placed before the geni-
tive of substantives indicates kinship, affinity, or some
kind of connection, association or fellowship, or in gen-
eral that which in some way pertains to a person or thing
[cf. W. § 30, 3 ; B. § 125, 7] ; a. the masc. and the
fem. article ; ^Ιάκωβος ό τον Ζίβΐ8αίου, 6 τον "Αλφα/ου,
the son, Mt. .χ. 2 (3), 3; M.ipi'u ή τοΰ Ιακώβου, the
mother. Mk. xvi. 1 [Tom. Trbr. τοΰ]; Lk. xxiv. 10 [L
TTrAVlIj; Έμμορ τοΟ 2υ;(£'μ, of llamor, the father of
Shechcm, Acts vii. 16 RG; ij τοϋ Ούριου, the Λvife, Mt.
i. 6 ; o'l Χλόης, either the kinsfolk, or friends, or domes-
tics, or ivork-people, or slaves, of Chloe, 1 Co. i. 11 ; also
oi ^Αριστοβούλου, ol Ναρκίσσου, Ro. xvi. 10 sq.; ol τού
Χριστού, the followers of Christ [A. V. they that are
Christ's], 1 Co. XV. 23 G L Τ Tr ^VH ; Gal. v. 24 ; oi τών
Φαρισαίων, the disciples of the Pharisees, Mk. ii. 18' Rec,
18'' R G L ; Καισαρίία ή Φιλίππου, the city of Philip, Mk.
viii. 27. b. TO and τά τίνος : as τά τοΰ θ(οϋ, the cause
or interests, the |)urposes, of God, opp. to τά τών ανθρώ-
πων, Mt. xvi. 23 ; Mk. viii. 33 ; in the same sense τά τοΰ
κυρίου, oiip. to τά τοϋ κόσμου, 1 Co. λ ii. 32-34 ; τά της
σαρκός, τά τοΰ πνεύματος, Ro. viii. 5 ; τά υμών, your pos-
sessions, 2 Co. xii. 14; ζητιΐν τό or τά τίνος, 1 Co. χ. 24;
.xiii. 5; Phil. ii. 21; τά τής (ίρήνης, της οικοδομής, which
make for, Ro. xiv. 19; τά t^s άσθfv(iaς μου, which per-
tain to my \veakness, 2 Co. xi. 30 ; τά KaiVa/)os, T«k
ToO θ(οΰ, due to Ca;sar, due to (iod, Mt. xxii. 21 ; Mk.
xii. 1 7 ; Lk. xx. 25 ; τά τοϋ νηπίου, the things wont
to be thought, said, done, by a child, 1 Co. xiii. 1 1 ; τά
τίνος, the house of one (τά Αΰκωνος, Theocr. 2, 76 ; [fit
τά τοΰ οδίλφοΟ, Lysias c. Eratostli. § 12 p. 195]; cf. iv
τοις πατρικοΊς, in her father's house. Sir. xiii. 10; [Chry-
sost. hom. Hi. (on Gen. xxvi. 16), vol. iv. pt. ii. coL
458 ed. Migne ; Gen. xii. 51 ; Esth. vii. 9, (Ilebr. n'3) ;
.lob xviii. 19 (Ilebr. IIJ"?)]) ; with the name of a deity,
the tcm/ue (τά τού Αιός, .Joseph, c. Αρ. 1, 18, 2; also τά
ToO Διός, Lycurg. adv. Leocr. p. 231 [(orat. Att. p. 167,
15)]), Lk. ii. 49 (see other exx. in Loh. ad Phryn. p. 100).
τά ToO νόμου, the precepts of the (Mosaic) law, Ro. ii.
14 ; TO της παροιμίας, the (saying) of (that which is said
in) the proverb, 2 Pet. ii. 22; τά τών ^αιμονιζομίνων,
what the possessed had done and experienced, Mt. viiL
33; TO τής συκής, what has been done to the fig-tree, Mt.
xxi. 21. 10. The neuter τό is put a. before
entire sentences, and sums them up into one conception
[B. § 125, 13 ; W. 109 (103 sq.)] : tmev αιτώ τό ΕΪ δύνα-
σαι πιστίϋσαι, said to him this: 'If thou canst believe',
Mk. ix. 23 [but L Τ Tr WII τό ΕΪ 8ΰνη ' If thou canst! '];
cf. Blcek ad loc. ; [Riddell, The Apology etc. Digest of
Idioms § 19 γ.], before the sayings and precepts of the
O. T. fpioted in the New : τό Οΰ φονιϋσίΐς, the precept,
'Thou shalt not kill', Mt. xix. 18; add, Lk. xxii. 37
(where Lchm. ort for τό) ; Ro. xiii. 9 ; [1 Co. iv. C LT
TrWII]; Gal. v. 14. before indir. questions : to n't etc.,
TO Ti' etc., TO πώς etc., Lk. i. 62 ; ix. 46 ; xix. 48 ; xxii. 2,
4, 23 sq.; Acts iv. 21 ; xxii. 30; Ro. viii. 26; 1 Th. iv. 1 ;
cf. Matthiae § 280; Kruger § 50, 6, 10; Passow ii.
p. 395' ; [L. and .S. s. v. B. L 3 sq.]. b. before single
words vrluch are explained as parts of some discourse
or statement [reff. as above] : τό'Άγαρ, the name*Ayap,
Gal. iv. 25 [T L txt. AVII rarg.om. Trbr. "Aya/j]; τ*
' άνίβη ', this word άνίβη, Eph. iv. 9, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on
o^hoTjKOvia
437
oh6<i
GaL L c.]; to 'm άπαξ', Heb. xiL 27; cf. Matthiae ii.
p. 731 sq. 11. We find the unusual expression ή
ol(d (apparently because the interjection was to the
writer a substitute for the term ij ιτΧψ/ή or ή ίλίψΐΓ [W.
179 (169)]), misery, calamity, [A. V. Ilie IKoe], in Kev.
ix. 12; xi. 14.
m. Since it is the business, not of the lexicographer,
but of the grammarian, to exhibit the instances in iThich
tlie article is omitted in the N. T. where according to the
laws of our language it would have been expected, we
refer those interested in this matter to the Grammars of
Winer (§ 19) and Alex. Buttmann (§ 124, 8) [cf. also
(jreen ch. ii. § iii. ; Middlelon, Tlie Doctrine of the Greek
Article (ed. Rose) pp. 41 sqq., 94 sq. ; and, particularly
with reference to Granville Sharp's doctrine (Remarks
on the uses of the Def. Art. in the Grk. Text of the X. T.,
3d ed. 1803), a tract by C. Wiitstanleij (A Vindication
etc.) repubhshed at Cambr. 1819], and only add the foil,
remarks : 1. More or less frequently the art. is
wanting before appellatives of persons or things of which
only one of the kind exists, so that the art. is not needed
to distinguish the individual from others of the same
kind, as ^to?, y^, 6e6i, Χριστό?, πνζΰμα aytou, ζωη αιώνιος,
ΰάνατο!, vexpot (of the whole assembly of the dead [see
ffxpos, 1 b. p. 423'']) ; and also of those persons and
things which the connection of discourse clearly shows
to be well-defined, as νόμος (the Mosaic law [see νόμος,
2 p. 428°]), icipws, πατήρ, vios, άνήρ (liusband), γυνή
(wife), etc. 2. Prepositions which with their cases
designate a state and condition, or a place, or a mode
of acting, usually have an anarthrous noun after them;
as, fii φυΧακήν, iv φυλακτι. (It άίρα, ck πίστιως, κατά
σάρκα, eV ίλτΓΐ'δι, παρ (Χπίδα, άπ αγοράς, απ άγροΰ, tv
άγρώ, €ίς ό8ον, iv ημίραις Ήρώδου, (Ις ήμίραν άττολντρώ-
σ(ως, and numberless other examples.
όγΒοήκοντα, eiyhly: Lk. ii. 37; xvi. 7. [(Thuc, al.)] *
o^Soos: -η, -01/, [fr. Hom. down], ike eighth : Lk. i. 59 ;
Acts vii. 8 ; Rev. xvii. 1 1 ; xxi. 20 ; one who has seven
other companions, who with others is the eighth, 2 Pet. ii.
5 ; so δίκατοΓ, with nine others, 2 Mace. v. 27 ; cf. Matthiae
§ 469, 9 ; Viger. ed. Herm. p. 72 sq. and 720 sq. ; W. § 37,
2; [B. 30 (26)].*
o^Kos, -ov, 6, (apparently fr. ΕΓΚ12, ίνίγκΛν, i. q. φόρτος,
see Buttmann, Lexil. i. 288 Sijq. [Fishlake's trans, p.
151 sq.], whatever is prominent, protuherance, huik; maxs,
hence), ο burden, iveight, encumbrance: Heb. xii. 1. (In
many other uses in Grk. writ, of all ages.) •
[Srti. SyKos, βάρος, φορτ tor: 0. refers to weight, ο. to
bulk-, and either may be oppressive (contra Tittmann) ; β "
load in so far as it is heavy, <poprlov a burden in so far as it
is borne; hence the φορτ. may be eitlier ' heavy' (Mt. xxiii.
4 ; Sir. xxi. 16), or 'hglit' (Mt. xi. 30).]
5Si, ήδί, τόδί, (fr. the old demonstr. pron. 6, ή, τό, and
the enclit. 5e), [fr. Hom. down], this one her<', Lat. hicce,
kaecce, hocce ; a. it refers to what precedes : Lk. x.
89 and Rec. in xvi. 25 ; raht πάντα, 2 Co. xii. 19 Grsb. ;
to what follows : neut. plur. rdSf , these (viz. the following')
things, as follows, thus, introducing words spoken, Acts
XV. 23RG; τόδί Xry« etc., Acts xxi. 11 ; Rev. ii. 1,8,12,
18 ; iii. 1, 7, 14. b. (Ις τήχδί την πόλικ, [where we say
into this or that citg] (the writer not knowing what par-
ticular city the speakers he introduces would name), Jas.
iv. 13 (cf. W. 162 (153), who adduces as similar τήνί*
την ήμίραν, Plut. symp. 1, 6, 1 ; [but see Liinemann's ad-
dition to Win. and esp. B. § 127, 2]).•
όδίύω; (ό&ός) ; to travel, journeg: Lk. x. 83. (Hom.
n. 11, 569 ; Xen. an. 7, 8, 8 ; Joseph, antt. 19, 4, 2 ; b. j.
3, 6,3; Hdian. 7, 3, 9 [4 ed. Bekk.]; Plut., al.; Tob. vi.
6.) [COMP. : St-, σνν-ο8(ϋω.~\ '
όδηΎ<ω, -ω ; fut. οδηγήσω ; 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing.
οΒηγηστ) ; {ό8ηγός, q. V.) ; Sept. chiefly for nnj, also for
ΤΊΊΠ, τ'7ίΠ, etc. ; a. prop, to be a guide, lead on
one's way, to guide : τινά, Mt. xv. 14 ; Lk. vi. 39 ; nva fir/
T(, Rev. vii. 17; (Aesdiyl., Eur., Diod., Alciphr., Babr.,
al.). b. trop. to be a guide or teacher; to give guid-
ance to: τινά, Acts viii. 31 (Plut. mor. 954 b.) ; «s τή»
άλήθααν. .Τη. xvi. 13 [I! G L Tr WH txt. (see below)]
{οδήγησαν /le eVl τήν άΚήθ^ιήν σου και δίδαξαν μ€, Ps. xxiv.
(χχν.) 5 [foil, by eir and προς in " Teaching of the
Apostles " ch. 3]) ; foil, by ev w. dat. of the thing in which
one tnves guidance, instruction or assistance to another,
(V TJj άΧηθ(ία, Jn. xvi. 13 Τ WH mrg. [see above] (οδή-
γησαν pf iv τη όδω σου κ. πορΐνσομαι iv Tg άληθίία σου, Ps.
Ixxxv. (Ixxxvi.) 11 ; cf. Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 35; Sap. Ix. 11 ;
X. 17).•
όδηγόϊ, -οΰ, ό, (όδο'ϊ and ήγίομαι ', cf. ^ορηγός^, a leader
of the icag, a guide; a. prop.: Acts i. 16 (Polyb. 5,
5, 15 ; Pint. Alex. 27 ; 1 Mace. iv. 2 ; 2 Mace. v. 15). b.
in fig. and sententious discourse όδ. τυφλώΐ', ΐ. e. like one
who is literally so called, namely a teacher of the ignorant
and inexperienced, Ro. ii. 19 ; plur. όδ• τυφλοί τυφΧων, i. e.
like blind guides in the literal sense, in that, while them-
selves destitute of a knowledge of the truth, they offer
themselves to others as teachers, Mt. χ v. 14 ; .xxiii. 16, 24.•
oSoiuopcu, -ώ ; (οδοιπόρος a wayfarer, traveller) ; to
travel, journeg : Acts x. 9. (Ildt., Soph., Xen., Ael. τ.
h. 10, 4; Hdian. 7, 9, 1, al.) •
oSomopCa, -as, ή, {οδοιπόρος), a Journey, Journeying : Jn.
iv. 6; 2Co. xi. 2G. (Sap. xiii. 18 ; xviii. 8; I Mace. vi. 41;
Hdt., Xen., Diod. 5, 29; Hdian. al.)•
<58ο-ΐΓοΐ€ω, -ώ ; in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down, to make a
road; to level, make passable, smooth, open, a way; and
so also in the Sept. : ΰιδοποίησ€ τρίβον τη όργη αϋτοΰ, for "
D*??, Ps. Ixxvii. (Lxxviii.) 50; for SSp, to construct a level
way by casting up an embankment. Job xxx. 12; Ps. IxviL
(Ixviii.) 5; for HJD, Ps. LxxLx. (Ixxx.) 10; for "l-iT Π33,
Is. Ixii. 10; — and so, at least apparently, in Mk. ii. 23
L Tr mrg. AVH mrg. [see παύω, 1. 1 a. and c] (with οδό»
added, Xen. anab. 4, 8, 8).*
o8<Ss, -oC, ή. [appar. fr. r. ΕΔ to go (Lat. adire, accedere),
allied w. Lat. solum; Curtius § 281]; Sept. numberless
times for "γΠ, less frequently for ITIS ; [fr. Hom. down] ;
a way; 1. prop. a. a travelled way, road;
Mt. ii. 12 ; vii. 13 sq. ; xiii. 4, 1 9 ; Mk. iv. 4, 15 ; x. 46 ;
Lk. viii. 5, 12; x. SI; xviii. 35; xix. 36; Acts viii. 26;
' ix. 17 ; Jas. ii. 25, etc.; κατά την όδόν (as ye pass along
ο8ός
438
6ζω
the way [see κατά, Π. 1 a.]) by the way, on the way, Lk.
X. 4; Acts viii. 36; xxv. 3; xxvi. 13; σαββάτου όδόί,
[Α. V. α sabbalh-day's journey'\ the distance that one is
allowed to travel on the sabbath, Acts i. 1 'i (see σάββατον,
1 a.), ή oSor with a gen. of tlie object, the way leading
to a place (the Hebr. :|-n also is construed with a gen.,
cf. GV.spHiUS Lehrgeb. p. 07G [Gr. §112, 2; cf. W. § 30,
2]) : ίθνών, Mt. X. 5 ; των uyiuiv into the holy [ilace, lleb.
ix.8, cf. X. 20, where the grace of God is symbolized by
a way, cf. ζάω, II. b., (τοΟ |ιίλου. Gen. iii. 24 ; Αϊγύτττου
. . . Άσσυρι'ωκ, Jer. ii. 18; yrjs ΦιΚιστκίμ, Ex. xiii. 17;
του Sira, .Judith v. 14 ; Lat. via mortis, Tibull. 1, 10, 4 ; cf.
KUhner ii. p. 286, 4). in imitation of the llebr. 'Ijll, the
ace. of which takes on almost the nature of a preposition,
in the «Yiy /«, liiirar<h, (cf. Gtsenius, Tlies. i. p. 352'), vie
find ohov θαΚάσσηί in Mt. iv. 15 fr. Is. viii. 23 (ix. 1), (so
ohov [τήϊ θαΚάιταη!, 1 Κ. xviii. 43] ; yTjs αΰτωρ, 1 Κ. viii.
48; 2 Chr. vi. 3S ; ohoir 8υσμών ήλιου, Dent. xi. 30 ; more-
over, once with the ace, oSov θάλασσαν ίρυθράν. Num.
xiv. 25 ; [Deut. ii. 1] ; cf. Thiersch, De Alex. Pentateuchi
versione, p. 145 sq. ; [B. § 131, 12]). with a gen. of the
subject, the way in which one icalL's: ev tois όδοΐς αυτών,
Ro. iii. 16 ; ίτοιμάζαν την ό86ν των βασίΧίων, Rev. xvi.
12; in metapli. phrases, κατ€υθΰν€ΐν την ό8ύν tlvos, to re-
move the hindrances to the journey, 1 Th. iii. 11 ; t'rot-
μάζΐίν (and ΐυθΰνΐΐν, Jn. i. 23 ; κατασκξνάζξΐν, ^It. xi. 10;
Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27) την ibov τοΰ κυρίου, see ίτοιμάζω.
b. a traveller's way, journey, travelling : ev Tjj όδώ, on the
journey, on the road, Mt. v. 25 ; xv. 32 ; xx. 1 7 ; Mk. viii.
27 ; ix. 33 ; x. 32, 52 ; Lk. xii. 58 ; xxiv. 32, 35 ; Acts ix.
27 ; c'l όδοΐι, from a journey, Lk. xi. 6 ; aipeiv or κτασθαί
τι fls idov, Mt. X. 10; Alk. vi. 8, and els την όδο'ν, Lk. ix.
3 ; nopevopat την όδάν, to make a journey (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2,
22), w. αϋτοΰ added [A. V. lo go on one's way'], to con-
tinue the journey undertaken. Acts viii. 39 ; ados ήμίρας,
a journey requiring a (single) day for its completion,
used also, like our a day's journey, as a measure of dis-
tance, Lk. ii. 44 (Gen. xxx. 36; xxxi. 23; E.\. iii. 18;
Judith ii. 21 ; 1 Alacc. v. 24 ; vii. 45 ; άπίχ^ιν πάμπολλων
ήμερων όδόν, Xen. Cyr. 1, 1, 3, cf. Ildt. 4, 101 [W. 188
(177)]) ; on the phrase όδον ποιβίν, Mk. ii. 23 see ποκ'ω,
I. 1 a. and c. 2. Metaph. a. according to the
familiar fig. of speech, esp. freq. in llebr. [cf. W. 32] and
not unknown to the Greeks, by which an action is
■ spoken of as a proceeding (cf. the Germ. Wandel), oSos
denotes α course ot conduct, α way (i. e. manner) of think-
ing, feeling, deciding : a person is said όδον Sfixvivai τινί,
who shows him how to obtain a thing, what helps he
must use, 1 Co. xii. 31 ; with a gen. of the obj., i. e. of
the thing to be obtained, (Ιρήνης, Ro. iii. 1 7 ; ζωη^. Acts
ii. 28 ; σωτηρίας. Acts xvi. 1 7 ; with a gen. of tlie subj., της
δικαιοσύνης, the way which ή δικαιοσ. points out and which
is wont to characterize ή δικ-, so in Mt. xxi. 32 (on which
see δικαιοσύνη, 1 b. p. 149* hot.); used of the Christian
religion, 2 Pet. ii. 21 ; likewise της άληθιίας, ibid. 2 ; with
gen. of the person deciding and acting, Jas. v. 20 ; τοΰ
Κάϊν, Jude 11 ; τοΰ Βαλαάμ, 2 Pet. ii. 15; ev πάσαις ταΐς
όδοίς αίτοϋ, in all his purposes and actions, Jas. i. 8; τάς
όδοΰς μου ev Χριστφ, the methods which I as Christ's min-
ister and apostle follow in the discharge of my office, 1 Co.
iv. 1 7 ; those are said πopfΰeσ6aιτάiς όδοϊς αυτών [ίο walk
in their own ways] who take the course which pleases them,
even though it be a perverse one. Acts xiv. 16 [on the dat
see7Γopfυω, subfin.]; a'l όδοιτοΰ θεοΰ or κυρίου, the ])ur poses
and ordinances of God, his ways of dealing with men,
Acts xiii. 10 ; Ko. xi. 33; Rev. xv. 3, (Ilos. xiv. 9 ; Ps.
xciv. (xcv.) 10; cxhv. (cxlv.) 17; Sir. χχχίχ. 24; Tob.
iii. 2, etc.). ή όδος τοΰ 6ιοϋ, the course of thought, feel-
ing, action, prescribed and approved by God : Mt. xxii.
16 ; Mk. xii. 14 ; Lk. xx. 21 ; used of the Christian re-
ligion. Acts xviii. 26 ; also ή 6. τοΰ κυρίου, ibid. 25 ; 6fi<5f
used generally of a method of knowing and worshipping
God, Acts xxii. 4 ; xxiv. 14; η οδός simply, of the Chris-
tian religion [cf. B. 163 (142)], Acts ix. 2; xix. 9, 23;
xxiv. 22. b. in the saying of Christ, e-j /ώ fi'^i ή δδός 1
am the icay by which one passes, i. e. with whom all who
seek approach to God must enter into closest fellowship,
Jn. xiv. 6. [On the omission of οδός in certain formulas
and phrases (Lk. v. 19 ; xix. 4), see W. 590 (549) sq. ; B.
§ 123, 8 ; Bos, Ellipses etc. (ed. Schaefer) p. 331 sq.]
oSois, [ace. to Etym. Magn. 615, 21 (Pollux 6, 38) fr.
e&w, Lat. edere, etc., cf. Curtius § 289 ; al. fr. root da to
divide, cf. δαίω, δάκνω; (Lat. dens); Fick L p. 100],
-owTos, <5, fr. Horn, down; Sept. for yiy; a toolh: Mt. v,
38 ; Mk. ix. 18 ; Acts vii. 54 ; plur. Rev. Lx. 8 ό βρν^μ^ί
των οδόντων, see βρνγμός*
όδυνάω, -ώ : pres. indie, pass, οδυνώμαι ; prcs. ind. mid.
2 pers. sin•;, όδυνάσαι (see κατακαυχάομαι), ptcp. όδυνώμί•
νος ; (οδύνη) ; to cause intense pain ; pass, lo he in anguish,
be torinenlcd : Lk. xvi. 24 sq. ; mid. to torment or distress
one's self, [.\. V. to sorrow], Lk. ii. 48; eVi τινι, Actsxx.
38. (Arstph., Soph., Eur., Plat., al. ; Sept.)*
ο8ννη, [peril, allied w. ίδω ; consuming grief ; cf. Lat.
curae edaces'], -ης, ή, pain, sorrow : Ko. Lx. 2 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1 0.
(From Hom. down ; Sept.) *
ό8νρμ.ύ5, -ov, 0, (οδύρομαι to wail, lament, [see κλαίω,
fin.]), a wailing, lamentation, mourning: Mt. ii. 18 (fr.
Jer. x.xxviii. (.\xxi.) 15 for D'lnpri); 2 Co. vii. 7. (2
Mace. xi. 6 ; Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., Joseph., Plut., Ael.
V. h. 14, 22.)•
Όζίας (LTTrWH 'Oζeίaς [cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 84;
WII. App. p. 155, and see et, i\), -ου [but cf. B. 18 (16)],
0, (n'ti' and in'Ti' strength of Jehovah, or my strength
is Jehovah), Ozias or Uzziah, son of Amaziah, king of
Judah, [c] B. C. 811-759 (2 K. xv. 30 sqq.) : Mt. i. 8 sq.,
where the Evangelist ought to have preserved this order :
Ίωράμ. Όχοζίας, 'ϊωάς, Άμαζίας, Όζίας. He seems
therefore to have confounded Όχοζίας and Όζίας; see
another example of [apparent] confusion under '^χονίας.
[But Matthew has simply omitted three links; such
omissions were not uncommon, cf. e. g. 1 Chr. vi. 3 sqq.
and Ezra vii. 1 sqq. See the commentators.] *
όξω; [fr. root όδ, cf. Lat. and Eng. odor etc.; Curtius
§ 288] ; fr. Hom. down ; to give out an odor (either good
or bad), to smell, emit a smell : of a decaying corpse, Jn.
xi. 39; cf. Ex. viii. 14.•
ο ο εν
439
οίκοΒομέω
οβ€ν, (fr. the rel. pron. 5 and the enclitic Oev wliich de-
notes motion from a place), [fr. Horn, down], adv., from
which ; whence ; it is used a. of the place from which :
Mt. xii. 44 ; Lk. xi. 24 ; Acts xiv. 26 ; xxviii. 13 ; by at-
traction for «elifi' όπου etc., Mt. xxv. 24, 26 ; cf. B. § 143,
12; [W. 159 (IJO)]. b. of the source from which a
thing is known, yrorti which, whereby: 1 Jn. ii. 18. c.
of the cause from which, ybr which reason, wherefore, on
which account, [A. V. whereupon (in the first two in-
stances)] : Mt. xiv. 7; Acts xxvi. 19; Heb. ii. 17; iii.
1 ; vii. 25 ; viii. 3 ; ix. 18 ; xi. 19 ; often in the last three
books of Mace*
οθόνη, -ης, ή, [fr. Hom. down] ; a. linen [i. e. fine
white linen for women's clothing; cf. Vanicek, Fremd-
wbrter, s. v.]. b. linen cloth (sheet or sail) ; so Acts
X. 1 1 ; xi. 5.•
όθόνιον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of οθόνη, q. v.), a piece of linen,
small linen cloth: plur. strips of linen cloth for swathing
the dead, Lk. xxiv. 12 [Tom. L Tr br. WH reject the
vs.] ; Jn. xix. 40 ; xx. 5-7. (In Grk. writ, of ships' sails
made of Unen, bandages for wounds, and other articles ;
Sept. for ί"ΊΟ, Judg. xiv. 13 ; for ΠΠϋ/ϊΙ or nu?i3, Hos. ii.
5(7), 9(11>)*
olSa, see Είδω, Π. p. 1 74.
ο1κειακό$, -ή, -όν, see οικιακό';.
oUeCos, -α, -ον, (οΐκοί), fr. lies, down, belonging to a
house or family, domestic, intimate : belonging to one's
household, related by blood, kindred, 1 Tim. v. 8 ; οϊκύοι
τοϋ Oeoi, belonging to God's household, i. e. to the theoc-
racy, Eph. ii. 19; in a wider sense, with a gen. of the
thing, belonging to, devoted to, adherents of a thing, o! oiKeiot
T^t πίστίωί, professors of the (Christian) faith. Gal. vi.
10 [butal. associate this pass, with that fr. Eph. as above;
see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc] ; so οίκ. φιλοσοφίας, Strab. 1 p.
13 b. [1, 17 ed. Sieben.] ; ■γιω-^ραφίας, p. 2) a. [1, 34 ed.
Sieben.] ; ολιγαρχίας, Diod. 13, 91 ; τυραννίδας, 19, 70.
(Sept. for ~\Kp related by blood; Ί\Ί, 1 S. x. 14 sqq. ;
rr^Ki?, consanguinity, Lev. xviii. 1 7 ; οίκ. τον σπίρματος
for -\;;;3, Is. Iviii. 7.) *
otKCTCia [al. -eta, cf. Chandler § 99 sqq.], -ας, ή, (υικίτης,
q. v.), household i. e. body of servants (INIacrob., Appul.
famulitium. Germ. Dienerschafi) : Mt. xxiv. 45 L Τ Tr
WIL (Strab., Lcian., Inscrr. ; plur. Joseph, antt. 12, 2,
3•)\
ο[κ6τη5, -ου, ό, (οίκί'ω), fr. [Aeschyl. and] Ildt. down,
Lat. domesticus, i. e. one who lives in the same house with
another, spoken of all who are under the authority of
one and the same householder. Sir. iv. 30; vi. 11, esp.
a servant, domestic ; so in Lk. xvi. 13 ; Acts x. 7 ; Ro. xiv.
4 ; 1 Pet. ii. 18 ; Sept. for 13 i'. See more fully on the
word, Meyer on Rom. I. c. [where he remarks that οίκ.
is a more restricted term than δοΰλοί, designating a
AoHse-servant, one holding closer relations to the f.nniily
than other slaves ; cf. διάκονος fin., Schmidt ch. 162.] *
oIkcu, -ώ ; {οίκος^ ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for 2'd\, a few
times for pty ; Lat. habito, [trans.] to dwell m: τι (Hdt.
and often in Attic), 1 Tim. vi. IG; [intrans. to dwell],
μ(τα τίνος, with one (of the husband and wife), 1 Co. vii.
1 2 sq. ; trop. ev Ttw, to be fixed and operative in one's
soul : of sin, Ro. vii. 1 7 sq. 20 ; of the Holy Spirit, Ro.
viii. [9], 11 ; 1 Co. iii. 16. [CoMP. : iv-, κατ-, ίνκατ-,
παρ-, ntpt-, συν-οικίω.] '
οϊκημα, -ros, τό, fr. [Find, and] Hdt. down, a dwelling-
place, habitation ; euphemistically a prison, [R. V. cell],
Acts xii. 7, as in Thuc. 4, 47 sq. ; Dem., Lcian. Tox. 29 ;
Plut. Agis 19 ; Ael. v. h. 6, 1.*
οίκητήριον, -ου, τό. (οίκητήρ), a dwelling-place, habita-
tion : Jude 6 ; of the body as the dwelling-place of the
spirit, 2 Co. v. 2 (2 Mace. xi. 2 ; 3 Mace. ii. 15 ; [Joseph.
c. Ap. 1, 20, 7] ; Eur., Plut., Ceb. tab. 17).*
oU£a, -ας, η, (οΓκογ), Sept. for n"3, [fr. Hdt. down], a
house; a. prop, an inhabited edifice, a dwelling : Mt.
ii. 11 ; vii. 24-27 ; Mk. i. 29; Lk. xv. 8; Jn. xii. 3 ; Acts
iv. 34 ; 1 Co. xi. 22 ; 2 Tim. ii. 20, and often ; οϊ iv τή οικία
sc. οντ^ς, JNIt. V. 15; οί ix της οικίας with gen. of pers.,
Phil. iv. 22 ; η οικία τοϋ {πατρός μου) θΐον, i. e. heaven,
Jn. xiv. 2 ; of the body as the habitation of the soul, 2
Co. V. 1. b. the inmates of a house, the family : Mt. xii.
25 ; ή οικία τινός, the household, the family of any one,
Jn. iv. 53 ; 1 Co. xvi. 15 [cf. W. § 58, 4 ; B. § 129, 8 a.];
univ. for persons dwelling in the house, Mt. x. 13. c.
property, wealth, goods, [cf. Lat. res familiaris]: τινός, JNIt.
xxiii. 14 (13) Rec. [cf. Wetst. ad loc.]; iMk. xii. 40; Lk.
XX. 47 ; so οίκος in Hom. (as Od. 2, 237 κατί'δουσι βιαίως
οίκον Όδυσσηος, cf. 4, 318), in Ildt. 3, 53 and in Attic;
Hebr. jT3, Gen. xlv. 18 (Sept. τά υπάρχοντα) ; Esth. viii.
1 (Sept. ίσα ίπηρχ^ν). Not found in Rev. [Syn. see
οϊκος, fin.]
οικιακό; (in prof. auth. and in some N. T. codd. also
oiKftaKOf [cf. ei, i] fr. οΐκος), -οϋ, ό, (οικία), one belonging to
the house (Lat. domesticus), one under the control of the
master of a house, whether a son, or a servant: Mt. x.
36; opp. to ό οίκο&^σπάτης, ib. 25. (Plut. Cic. 20.)*
oiKO-Sto-iroTeu, -ά> ; (οικο&(σ-πότης) ; to be master (or head)
of a house; to rule a househoUl, manage family affairs: 1
Tim. V. 14. (A later Grk. word ; see Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 373.)*
oiKO-Seu-irorqs, -ou, ό, (οίκος, δ(σπότης), master of a house,
householder: ilt. x. 25; xiii. 27; xx. 11; xxiv. 43 ; Mk.
xiv. 14 ; Lk. xii. 39 ; xiii. 25 ; xiv. 21 ; άνθρωπος οίκοδ. (see
άνθρωπος, 4 a.), Mt. ,\iii. 52 ; xx. 1 ; xxi. 33 ; oίκoδfσπ■ τί^ς
οικίας, Lk. xxii. 11, on this pleonasm cf. Borncmnnn, Schol.
ad loc. ; W. § G5, 2. (Alexis, a comic poet of the IV. cent.
B. c. ap. Poll. 10, 4, 21 ; Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 11, 3 ; Plut.
quaest. Rom. 30; Ignat. ad Eph. 6. Loh. ad Phryn. p.
373 shows that the earUer Greeks said οίκου or οικίας
δεσπότης.) *
οίκοδομ€ω, -ώ; impf. ωκοδόμουΐ'; f ut. οίκοδο/ζτ;(Τω ; 1 aor.
ωκοδόμησα [οίκ. Tr WH in Acts vii. 47 ; see Tdf. ad loc. ;
Proleg. p. 120 ; WH. App. p. 161 ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 153 ;
W. § 12, 4; B. 34 (30)]; Pass., [pres. οίκοδομοΟμαι (inf.
-μ(ίσθαι, Lk. vi. 48 Treg.) ; pf. inf. οικο8ομήσθαι (Lk. vi.
48 Τ WH)] ; plupf. 3 pers. sing. ώκοδάμηΓΟ ; 1 aor. ωκοδο-
μήθην [οίκ. Τ WH in Jn. ii. 20] ; 1 fut. οίκοδομηθήσομαι ;
(οΙκοΒόμος, q. V.) ; fr. Hdt. down ; Sept. for nj3 ; to build
a house, erect a building ; a. prop. a. to build (up
οικοδομή
440
οικονόμος
from the foundation) : absol, Lk. xi. 48 GT \VH Trtxt. ;
xiv. 30 ; xvii. 28 ; οί οίκο8ομοΰντ(ί, subst., the huitder.i [cf.
W.§45,7; B. § 144, U]. Mt. xxi. 42; Mk.xii. 10; Lk.
XX. 1 7 ; Acts iv. 1 1 Rec. ; 1 Pet. ii. 7, fr. Vs. cxvii. (cxviii.)
22 ; eV άλλότμιον 6f^i\wv, to build upon a foundation
laid by others, i. e. (ivitliout a fig.) to carry on instruction
begun by others, Ro> xv. 20; υΙκο&ομ€Ίν rt, Gal. ii. 18;
nipyov, Mt. xxi. 33 ; Mk. xii. 1 ; Lk. xiv. 28; άποθήκαί,
Lk. xii. 18 ; vaou, Mk. xiv. 58 ; pa.ss. .In. ii. 20 [on the aor.
cf. 2 Esdr. V. 16] ; οΊκον, pass., 1 Pet. ii. 5 ([here Τ tVotic.],
cf. W. 603 (5111), and add otKovpyf'iv τα κατά τον οίκον,
Clem. l!ora. 1 Cor. 1,3); [oiVm.-, Lk. vi. 48 (cf. W.l.c.)];
σνναγωγην or οΙκόν τινι, for the use of or in honor of one,
Lk. vii. .j; Acts vii. 47, 4!), (Gen. viii. 20; Ezek. xvi. 24) ;
oUiav ϊπί τι, Mt. vii. 24, 26 ; Lk. vi. 49 ; πόλικ cV" όρουί,
Lk. iv. 29. p. contextually i. q. to realore by buililinr/, in
rebuild, repair : τι, Mt. xxiii. 29 ; xxvi. 61 ; xxvii. 40 ; Mk.
XV. 29; Lk. xi. 47 and R [L br. Tr mrg.] in 48. b.
metaph. a. i. q. to found : «Vl ταίιτη τη πίτρα οικοδομήσω
μου την (κκλησίαν, Ί. ϋ. by reason of the strength of thy
faith thou shall be my principal support in the establish-
ment of my church, Mt. xvi. 18. β. Since both a Chris-
tian church and ind i ν id ual Christians are likened
to a building or temple in which God or the Holy Spirit
dwells (1 Co. iii. 9, 16 sqq. ; 2 Co. vi. 16; Eph. ii. 21). the
erection of which temple will not be completely finished till
the return of Christ from heaven, those \vho, by action,
instruction, exhortation, comfort, promote the Christian
wisdom of others and help them to live a correspondent
life are regarded as takin'.; part in the erection of that
building, and hence are said οίκοδομύν, i. e. (dropping the
fig.) In promote ijrowth in Chrislidii iijisdoin,affeclion, r/rare,
virtue, holinexx, blessedness : absol.. Acts x.x. 32 LTTr
Wll ; 1 Co. viii. 1 ; x. 23; τινά, xiv. 4 ; 1 Th. v. 11 ; ])ass.
to groio in wisdom, piety, etc.. Acts ix. 31 ; 1 Co. xiv. 1 7 ;
nniv. to gioe one strength and courage, dispose to : ctr την
η-ίστιν, Polyc. ad. Philip. 3, 2 [yet here to be built up into
(in) etc.] ; even to do what is wrong [A. V. embolden'],
fls TO τα (ΐΒωλύθντα eaOldv, 1 Co. viii. 10 [cf. W. § 39, 3
N. 3]. This metaphorical use of the verb Paul, in the
opinion of Frilzsche (Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 205 si\.), did not
derive from the fig. of building a temple, but from the
O. T., where " nj3 and D^n with an ace. of the pers. (/o
build one up and to pull one down) denote to bless and to
ruin, to prosper and to injure, any one"; cf. Ps. xxvii.
(xxviii.) 5 ; .ler. xxiv. 6 ; xL (x.xxiii.) 7. [Co»lP. : av,
eV-, συν-οικηδομΐω.] "
οΙκα-&ομ.ή, -Γ(ί, ή, (oiKos, and ϋμω to build), a later Grk.
word, condemned by Phryn., yet used by Aristot.,
Theophr., [(but both these thought to be doubtful)],
Diod. (1, 46), Philo (vit. Moys. i. § 40 ; de monarch.
ii. § 2), Joseph., Plut., Sept., and many others, for oiVo-
ϋόμημα and οίκοδόμησί! ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 487 sqq.
cf. p. 421; [W. 24]; 1. (the act of) building, build-
ing up, i. q. TO οΙκο8ομ(ΐν ; as, τών τίΐχϊων, 1 Mace. xvi.
23; τον οϊκου τοϋ θ(οΰ, 1 Chr. xxvi. 27; in the X. T.
metaph., edifying, edifcalion, i. e. the act of one who
promotes another's growth in Christian wisdom, pielf/.
holiness, happiness, (see οίκοίομίω, b. β. [cf. W. 35 (34)]) !
Ro. xiv. 19 ; XV. 2 ; [1 Co. xiv. 26] ; 2 Co. x. 8 [see be-
low] ; xiii. 10; Eph. iv. 29; with a gen. of the person
whose growth is furtlicrcd, υμών. 2 Co. xii. 19, [cf. x. 8];
ί'αυτοΟ [Tdf. αίτοΰ], ICpll. iv. 1 6 ; τοϋ σώματα! τοΰ Χρίστου•
ibid. 1 2 : t^s (<κλησία!• 1 Co. xiv. 1 2 ; i. <[. το οίκοίομοϋ»,
what contributes to edification, or augments wisdom, etc.
λαλ^ΐν, \αβ€Ίν, οικο8ομήν, 1 Co. xiv. 3, 5. 2. i. q.
οικοδόμημα, n hiiildiiig (i. e. thing built, edifice) : Mk. xiii.
1 s(j.; τοΰ 'κροϋ, .Mt. xxiv. I ; u.sed of the heavenly body,
the abode of the soul after death, 2 Co. v. 1 ; trop. of
a body of Christians, a Christian church, (see οίκο&ομίω,
h. β.), Eph. ii. 21 [cf. ττογ, I. 1 c.]; with a gen. of the
owner or occupant, Ofou, 1 Co. iii. 9.*
olKoSop.Ca, -at, ή, (οίκοδημίω), (the act of) building,
erection, (Time, Plat., I'olyb., Plut., Lcian., etc. ; but
never in the Sept.) ; metaph. οίκοδομίαν deoi την «V
πίστ(ΐ, the increase which (!od desires in faith (see
οικοδομή), 1 Tim. i. 4 Rec. '"^ '''; but see οικονομία. Not
infrei]. oiVov. and οίκοδ. are confounded in the Mss. ; see
Grimm on 4 Mace. p. 365, cf. llilgenfeld. Barn, epist.
p. 28; [jrOrcilte, Chariton 8, 1 p. 599].•
οίκο-δόμοΐ, -ov, 6, (oixof, δίμω to builil ; cf. οικονόμο;),
a builder, an architect: Acts iv. 11 I.,TTrWH. (Ildt.,
Xen., Plat., Plut., al. ; Sept.) •
oIkovo|u'u, -ΰ ; (οικονύμοί); to be a Steward ; to manage
the affairs of a household: absol. Lk. xvi. 2. (Univ. to
manage, dispense, order, regulate : Soph., Xen., Plat.,
Polyb., .loseph., Plut., al. ; 2 JIacc. iii. 14.) *
οικονομία, -ας, ή, (οίκονομίω), fr. Xen. and Plat, down,
the miiniKjcment (fa hou.tehold or <f household affairs',
specifically, the management, oversight, administration, oj
others' property ; the office of a manager or orerseer, stew-
ardship: Lk. xvi. 2-4; hence the word is tr.tnsferred
by Paul in a theocratic sense to the office (duty) in-
trusted to him by God (the lord and master) of proclaim-
ing to men the blessings of the gospel, 1 Co. ix. 1 7 ; ή
οικονομία τοϋ 0(οϋ, the office of administrator (steivardship)
intrusted by God, Col. i. 25. univ. administration, dit-
jtensation, which in a theocratic sense is ascribed to
God himself as providing for man's salvation : aiTivts
. . . η οίκονομίαν θ(οϋ την (v πίστ(ΐ, which furnish matter
for disputes rather than the (knowledge of the) dispen-
sation of the things by which (iod has provided for and
prepared salvation, which salvation must be embraced
by faith, 1 Tim. i. 4 LTTrW'H ; ην προίθιτο . . . καιρών,
which good-will he purposed to show with a view to
(that) dispensation (of his) by which the times (sc. of
infancy and immaturity cf. (ial. iv. 1-4) were to be ful-
filled, Eph. i. 9 sq. ; ή οίκ. τη! χάριτος τοϋ θ(οϋ της δοθ€ΐ•
σης μοί, that dispensation (or arrangement) by which
the grace of God was granted me, Eph. iii. 2 ; ή οίκ. τοΰ
μυστηρίου, the dispensation by ivhich he carried out his
secret purpose, Eph. iii. 9 G L Τ Tr WH.*
οΙκονόμος, -ου. ό, (o'icor, νίμω [' to dispense, manage '] ;
Hesych. ό τάκ οίκον νίμόμινος), the manager ο/ a house-
hold or of howtehold affairs; esp. a steward, manager,
superintendent^ (whether free-born, or, as was usually
οίκος
441
Οίκουμ,ΐνη
the case, a freed-man or slave) to whom the head of
the house or proprietor has intrusted the management
of his affairs, the care of receipts and expenditures, and
the duty of deaUng out the proper portion to every ser-
vant and even to the children not yet of age : Lk. xii.
42 ; 1 Co. iv. 2 ; Gal. iv. 2 ; the manager of a farm or
landeil estate, an overseer, [A. V. stewarriy. Lk. xvi. 1,
.3, 8 ; ό o!ic. TTJs πολίωί, the superintendent of the city's
^nances, the treasurer of the city (Vulg. arcarius civitatix) :
Ro. xvi. 23 (of the treasurers or quaestors of kings,
Esth. viii. 9; 1 Esdr. iv. 49; Joseph, antt. 12, 4, 7; 11,
6, 12, 8, 6, 4). Metaph. the apostles and other Chris-
tian teachers (see οικονομία} are called oik. μυστηρίων τοΰ
6eoi, as those to whom the counsels of God have been
committed to be made known to men : 1 Co. iv. 1 ; a
bishop (or overseer) is called οίκονήμο! θ^ον, of God as
the head and master of the Christian theocracy [see
οίκοί, 2], Tit. i. 7 ; and any and every Christian who
rightly uses the gifts intrusted to him by God for the
good of his brethren, belongs to the class called καλοί
οικονόμοι ποικίλη! χάριτο! θ(ον, 1 Pet. iv. 10. (Aeschyl.,
Xen., Plat., Aristot., al. ; for r\''2-^y_ Sept. 1 K. iv. 6 ; xvi.
9. etc.) *
oIkos, -ου, ό, [cf. Lat. vicus, Eng. ending -wich ; Cur-
tius § 95], fr. Horn, down; Sept. in numberless places
for iT3, also for hyVi a palace, SnS a tent, etc. ; 1.
a house; a. strictly, on ίη/ίαδίίβίί /iouse [differing thus
fr. δομοί the building] : Acts ii. 2; xix. 16 ; τινόί, Sit. ix.
6s.j. ; Mk. ii. 11; v. 38 ; Lk. i. 23, 40, 56 ; viii. 39, 41,
etc. ; ίρχισθαι fis οίκον, to come into a house {domum
venire), Mk. iii. 20 (19) ; (It του οίκον, into the (i. e. his
or their) house, home, Lk. vii. 10; xv. 6; iv τω οίκω, in
the (her) house, Jn. xi. 20 ; iv ο'ίκω, at home, 1 Co. .xi.
34 ; xiv. 35; oi fi'f τον οϊκον (see tif, C. 2), Lk. i,x. CI ;
κατ οίκον, opp. to iv τω Upta, in a household assembly,
in private, [K.\.at home; see κατά, Π. 1 d.]. Acts ii. 46;
V. 42; κατ oIkovs, opp. to δημοσία, in private houses,
[A. V.from house to house; sec κατά, Π. 3 a.]. Acts xx.
20 ; κατά tovs οίκους ίΐσττορ^νόμΐνος, entering house after
house. Acts viii. 3 ; ή κατ οΐκόν tivos €κκ\ησία, see iκκXη-
σία, 4 b. aa. b. any building tvhatever ; ipiropiov, Jn.
ii. 16 ; ττροσίνχη:, Sit. xxi. 13 ; Mk. xi. 1 7 ; Lk. xix. 46 ;
ToO βασιλέως, τοΰ άρχΐίρ(ως, the palace of etc.. Jit. xi. 8 ;
Lk. xxii. 54 [here Τ Tr WH οΙκία'\ ; τοΟ θ(οϋ, the house
where God was regarded as present, — of the tabernacle,
Mt. xii. 4 ; Mk. ii. 26 ; Lk. vi. 4 ; of the temple at Jerusa-
lem, Mt. xxi. 13 ; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix.46; Jn. ii. 16 sq.,
(Is. Ivi. 5, 7); cf. Lk. xi. 51 ; Acts vii. 47, 43 ; of the heav-
enly sanctuary, Heb. x. 21 {oIkos ayios ifoC, of heaven,
Deut. xxvi. 15; Bar. ii. 16); a body of Christians (a
church), as pervaded by the Spirit and power of God, is
called ouco? τη-ευμαηκοΈ, 1 Pet. ii. 5. c. any dwelling-
place : of the human body as the abode of demons that
possess it, Mt. xii. 44 ; Lk. xi. 24 ; (used in Grk. auth. also
of tents and huts, and later, of the nests, stalls, lairs, of
animals), univ. the place where one has fixed his resi-
dence, one's settled abode, domicile : oucoi νμων, of the city
of Jerusalem, Mt. xxiii. 38 ; Lk. xiii. 35. 2. by me-
ton. the inmates of a house, all the persons forming one
family, a household : Lk. .x. 5 ; xi. 1 7 [al. refer tliis to 1,
and take eVt either locally (see (π-ι, C. I. 1), or of succes-
sion (see inl, C. I. 2 c.)] ; xi.\. 9 ; Acts vii. 10; x. 2; xi.
14; xvi. 31; xviii. 8; iCo. i. 16; 1 Tim. iii. 4 sq. ; v. 4;
2 Tim. i. 16; iv. 19; Heb. xi. 7; plur., 1 Tim. iii. 12;
Tit. i. 11, (so also Gen. vii. 1; .xlvii. 12, and often in
Grk. auth.); metaph. and in a theocratic sense <5 oi/tor
ToO ifoO, the family of God, of the Christian church,
1 Tim. iii. 1 5 ; 1 Pet. iv. 1 7 ; of the church of the Old and
New Testament, Heb. iii. 2, 5 sq. (Num. xii. 7). 3.
stock; race, descendants of one, [A. V. housed : 6 οΓκογ
Δαυίδ, Lk. i. 27, 69; ii. 4, (1 K. xii. 16); οΐκ. Ισραήλ,
Mt. X. 6 ; XV. 24 ; Lk. i. 33 ; Acts ii. 36 ; vii. 42 ; [(ό οΓκ.
^Ιακώβ), 46 L Τ Tr mrg.] ; Heb. viii. 8, 10, (Jer. xxxviii.
(xxxi.)31; Ex. vi. 14; xii. 3 ; xix. 3 ; 1 S. ii. 30 ; [cf. 6
σ(βαστ6ς oIkos, Philo in Flac. § 4]). The word is not
found in the Apocalj'pse.
[SvN. o'lKos, οικία: in Attic (and esp. legal) usage,
uTkos denotes one's household estahlishment , one's entire prop-
ert'i, οΙκία, the dwelling itself; and in prose oIkos is not used
in tlie sense of οικία. In the sense of fa mill/ οΙκοί and οΙκία
are alike employed; Schmidt vol. ii. ch. 80. In relation to
distiuctious (real or supposed) betw. oIkos and οικία the foil,
pass, are of interest (cf. Valckenaer on Ildt. 7, 224) : Xen.
oecon. 1, 5 oIkos δ€ δτϊ τί hoKtl τιμίν (Ίναι; Spa oTrtp οικία,
^ κοί οσο Tis ΐξω rfji οικίας κέκτηται, νάντα τοΰ οίκου
ταΰτά ΐστιν . . . τταντα τοΰ οίκου ΐίναι οσα τις κέκτηται.
Aristot. polit. 1, 2 p. 12.')2''. 9 si|(|. 4κ μ^ν ουν τούτων των δύο
κοινωνιών (viz. of a man with wife and servant) οικία ττράιτη,
και ορθώς Ήσίο5υς €?7Γ6 ποιήσαχ " οίκον μ^ν πρώτιστα -γυναικά
Tf βοΰν τ' αροτΊίρα • "... η μΐν ουν eis ιτασαν τιμίραν συνΐστ-η-
κυία κοινωνία κατά φνσιν οϊκός 4στιν. ibid. .3 ρ. 12.5.*i'', 2 sq<(.
πασά πόλις 4ξ οικιών σΰη/κΐΐται• οικίας Si μέρη. €ξ ων αύθις οικία
συνίσταται • οικία δέ τί'λειοί εκ 5ού\ων κ. ΐΧΐυθίρων. . . . πρώτα
δέ καΐ ελάχιστα μέρη οικίας ^ίσιτότης κ 5ονΚος κ. ττ6σις κ.
ίιΧοχος κ πατήρ κ. τέκνα etc. Pint, dc audiend. poetis § (j καΐ
yap Οϊκόν itotc μέν τ^ν οίκίαν καΚονσιν, " οίκον es ΐι^όροϊ.ον " •
iroTe δε την ουσίαν, *' 4σθί(ται μοι οίκος"' (see οικία, c.)
Hesych. Lex. s. v. οικία- οίκοι s. v. οίκος• ο\ί•/η οικία
. . . και μέρος τι της οικίας . . . κοί τα €v τη οικία. In tlie
Ν. Τ., although the words appear at times to be used with
some discriminatiou (e. g. Lk. x. 5, 6, 7 ; Acts χλΊ. 31, 32, 34 ;
cf. Jn. xiv. 2), yet other pass, seem to show that no distinc-
tion can be insisted upon : e. g. Mt. ix. 23; Mk.v.38; Lk. vii.
36,37; Acts X. 17, (22, 32); xvii. 5 ; xix. 16; xxi. 8 ; xi. II,
12, 13; xvi. 15; (1 Co. i. 16; xvi. 15).]
οΙκουμενη, -ης, ή, (fem. of the pres. pass. ptcp. fr. οικέω,
[sc. γη ; cf. W. § 64, 5 ; B. § 1 23, 8]) ; 1. the inhab-
ited earth ; a. in Grk. writ, often the portion of the
earth inhabited by the Greeks, in distinction from the hinds
of the barbarians, cf. Passow ii. p. 415" ; [L. and S. s. v.
I.]. b. in the Grk. auth. who wrote about Roman
affairs, (like the Lat. orbis terrarum) i. q. the Roman em-
pire : so πάσα ή οΐκ. contextually i. q. all the subjects of
this empire, Lk. ii. 1. c. the whole inhabited earth,
the world, (so in [Hyperid. Eux. 42 ("probably" L. and
S.)] Sept. for h^Pi and yiN) : Lk. iv. 5 ; xxi. 26 ; Acts
xxiv. 5 ; Ro. x. 18 ; Rev. xvi. 14 ; Heb. i. 6, (πάσο ή οΐκ.
.Joseph, b. j. 7, 3, 3) ; όλη η ocV., Mt. xxiv. 14 ; Acts xi.
28, (in the same sense Joseph, antt. 8, 1 3, 4 πάσα η ot». ;
oiicovpyo';
442
Οκταημ€ρο<ί
cf. Bleek, Erklar. d. drei ersten Evr. i. p. 68) ; by meton.
the inhabitants of the earth, men : Acts xvii. (J, 31 (I's. ix.
9); xix. 27; ij o«. όλι;, all mankind, Rev. iii. lU; xii.
i». 2. the universe, the worlil : Sap. i. 7 (alternating
there with τα πάντα) ; ή οίκ- ή /«'λλουσα, that consum-
mate state of all things which will exist after Christ's
return from heaven, lieb. ii. 5 (where the >vord alter-
nates with πάντα and τά πάιη-α, vs. 8, which there is taken
ill an absolute sense).*
oiKovp'yos, -Of, (oiiiof, ΕΡΓΩ [cf. epyov], cf. άμπ(\ουργο!,
yfuipyot, etc.), airin<j for the house, workinij at limnc : 'lit.
ii. .5 l.,TTr WH; see the foil. word. Not found else-
where.*
οίκ-ουρός, -oC. 0, i), (o'icor, and oJpor a keeper; see
iuf>u)(jdr and κτιπουρός) ; a. prop, the (watch or)
k<:i-/>er of a house (Soph., Eur., Arstph., Pans., Plut.,
al.). b. trop. kee/iing at home and taking care of
hotisehold affairs, domestic: Tit. ii. 5 RG; cf. Frilzsrhe,
De conform.atione N. T. critica etc. p. 29; [W. 100 si).
(95)]; (.\escli.vl. Ag. 1626 ; Eur. Hec 1277; σώφρονα!,
οίκονρηνί και φιΧάνίρους, Philo de exsecr. § 4).'
οΙκτ((ρω; fut. (as if fr. οίκτιφίω, a form which does
not exist) as in the Sept. οίκταρησω, for the earlier
οϊκταρώ, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 741 ; [Veitch s. v.; \V.
8S (84); B. 64 (56)]; (fr. olerot pity, and this fr. the
interjection oi', oh .') ; to pity, have compassion on : Ttra,
Ro. ix. 1.5 (fr. Ex. xxxiii. 19. Hom., Tragg., Arstph.,
Xen., Plat., Dem., Lcian., Plut., Ael. ; Sept. for μπ and
□n">). [Syx. see ί'λίί'ω, fin.]*
olKTipiuSs, -oil, i, {olκτfίpω), Sept. for 0"3Π'^ (the vis-
cera, which were thought to be the seat of compassion
[see σπΧάγχνον, b.]), compassion, pity, mercy : σπλάγχνα
οίκτφμοϋ (Rec. οίκτιρμων), bowels in which compassion
resides, a heart of compassion. Col. iii. 12; in the Script-
ures mostly plural (conformably to the Hebr. Ο'ρΠ"^),
emotions, lonf/iiii/s, manifestations of pity, [Eng. compas-
sions'] (cf. Frit:sche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 5 sqq. ; [W. 176
(166); B. 77 (67)]), toC ftoO, Ro. xii. 1 ; Ileb. x. 28;
ό πατήρ των oIkt. (gen. of quality [cf. B. § 132, 10; W.
237 (222)]), the father of mercies i. e. most merciful,
2 Co. i. 3; joined with σπλάγχνα, Phil. ii. 1. (Pind.
Pyth. 1, 164.) [Syn. see fXe/a, fin.]*
οίκτίρι^ων, -ov, gen. -όνος, {οΙκτ€ίρω), merciful: Lk. vi.
3';; .las. v. 11. (Theocr. 15, 75; Anth. 7, 359, 1 [Epigr.
Anth. Pal. Append. 223, 5] ; Sept. for Dini..) [" In
classic Grk. only a poetic term for the more common
ίΧιήμων." Schmidt iii. p. 5S0.] *
οΐμαι, see οΐομαι.
οίνο^ιτότηϊ, -ου, ό, (oivos, and πότη! a drinker), a ivine-
bibher, given to wine: Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34. (Prov.
xxiii. 20; Polyb. 20, 8, 2; Anacr. frag. 98; Anthol. 7,
28, 2.) *
olvos, -ov, 0, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for t", also for
CJl'TJI (must, new wine), "ipn, etc. ; wine; a. prop.:
Mt. i.x. 17; [xxvii. 34 L txt. Τ Tr WH] ; Mk. xv. 23;
Lk. i. 15; .Tn. ii. 3 ; Ro. xiv. 21; Eph. v. 18; 1 Tim. v.
23 ; Rev. xvii. 2, etc. ; οΐνω προσίχιιν, 1 Tim. iii. 8 ; 8ow-
Xfi/fW, Tit. ii. 3. b. metaph. ; oivo! τον θυαον ('see
θυμοί, 2), fiery wine, which Ciod in his wrath is repre-
senleil as mixing and giving to those whom he is about
to punish by their own folly and madness. Rev. xiv. 10;
xvi. 19 ; xix. 15 ; with τη! itopvflai added [cf. \V. § 30,
3 N. 1 ; B. 155 (136)], a looe-potion as it were, wine excit-
ing to fornication, which he is said to give who entices
others to idolatry, Rev. xiv. 8; xviii. 3 [here Lom. Tr
WII br. οΓν.], and he is said to be drunk with who suffers
himself to be enticed. Rev. xvii. 2. c. by meton.
i. q. a riiif : Rev. vi. 6.
οίνοψλυγία, -a!, ή, (οΐυοφλνγΐω, and this fr. οι'νάφλυ^,
which is compounded of otvo! and φΧνω, to bubble up,
overflow), ilrunkcnness, [A. V. ivine-l/ibbing'] : 1 Pet. iv.
3. (Xen. oec. 1, 22 ; Aristot. eth. Nic. 3, 5, 15 ; Polyb.
2, 19, 4 ; Philo, vita Moys. iii. § 22 [for other exx. see
Siegfried, Philo etc. p. 102] ; Ael. v. h. 8, 14.) [Cf.
Trench § Ixi.] *
οΕομαι, contr. o'/iat ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to suppose,
think: foil, by an ace. w. inf. Jn. xxi. 25 [Tom. vs.];
by the inf. alone, where the subj. and the obj. are the
same, Phil. i. 16 (17); by on, Jas. i. 7. [Syn. see
ηγίομαί, fin.] *
olos, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], relat. pron. (correlative
to the demonstr. Tolot and Toioirros), what sort of, what
manner of, such as (Lat. rjitalis) : οίος . . . τοιοΰτοΓ, 1 Co.
XV. 48 ; 2 Co. x. 11 ; τον αντον . . . οίον, Phil. i. 30 ; with
the pron. τοιοΟτογ suppressed, Mt. xxiv. 21 ; Mk. ix. 3 ;
xiii. 19 [here however the antecedent demonstr. is merely
attracted into the relat. clause or perhaps repeated for
rhetorical emphasis, cf. B. § 143, 8 ; W. 148 (140) ; see
toioOtos, b.] ; 2 Co. xii. 20 ; 2 Tim. iii. 11 ; Rev. xvi. 18 ;
οίωΒηποτοΰν νοσήματι, of what kind of disease soever, Jn.
V. 4 Lchm. [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 373 sq.] ; in indir.
quest., Lk. i.\. 55 [Rec.]; 1 Th. i. 5. ονχ olov Si οτι «-
πίτΓτωκΐν, concisely for ov to'lov ioTiv oiov on €κπ. but the
thinr/ (state of the case) is not such as this, that the word
of God hath fallen to the ground, i. e. the word of God
hath by no means come to nought [A. V. bict not as though
the word of God hath etc.], Ro. ix. 6 ; cf. W. § 64 I. 6 ;
B. § 150, 1 Rem.*
οΙοσ-δητΓοτοΰν, .In. v. 4 Lchm., see olos.
οϋσω, see φίρω.
oKvc'ci). -ώ : 1 aor. ωκνησα ; (οκνος [perh. aUied w. the
frequent, cunc-tari (cf. Curtiiis p. 708)] delay) ; fr. Hom.
down; to feel loath, Co be slow; to delay, hesitate: foil, by
an inf. Acts ix. 38. (Num. xxii. 16 ; Judg. xviii. 9, etc.) *
οκνηροί, -ά, -όν, {όκνίω), sluggish, slothful, backward:
Mt. XXV. 26 ; with a dat of respect [cf. W. § 31, 6 a. ;
B. § 133, 21], Ro. xii. 11 ; οΰκ οκνηρόν μοί «στι, foil, by
an inf., is not irksome to me, I am not reluctant, Phil. iii. 1
[cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. (Pind., Soph., Thuc, Dem.,
Theocr., etc.; Sept. for '7x1;.) *
όκταήμκρο;, -ov, (οκτώ, ήμίρα), eight days old; passing
the eighth day : π^ριτομί) [cf. W. § 31, 6 a. ; B. § 133, 21 ;
but Rec. -μήΐ οκταήμ(ρο!. circumcised on the eighth day,
Phil. iii. 5; see τ^ταρταίο!: ['the word denotes prop,
not interval but duration' (see Bp. Lghtft. onPhiL
1. 0.1. Graec. Ven. Gen. xvii. 12; eccl. writ.].*
443
oKo<s
οκτώ, eight : Lk. ii. 21 ; Jn. xx. 26 ; Acts ix. 33, etc.
[(From Horn, on.)]
6\(9ρ(ύω (Lchm. in Heb. xi. 28), see οΧοθρινω.
όλί'θριοί, -ov, (in prof. auth. also of three term., as in
Sap. xviii. 15), (oKedpot), fr. [Horn.], Hdt. down, de-
struclire, deadly : ϋκην, 2 Th. i. 9 Lchm. t.xt.*
όλίθροδ, -ov, (οΚλνμι to destroy [perh. (όλννμι) allied
to Lat. vulnus']),{T. Horn, down, ruin, destruction, death:
1 Th. V. 3 ; 1 Tim. vi. 9 ; fit oKfOpov τη: σαρκόι, fur the
dextrurlion nf the flesh, said of the e.\ternal ills and
troubles by which the lusts of the flesh are subdued and
destroyed, 1 Co. v. 5 [see παραδίδωμι, 2] ; i. q. the loss
of a life of blessedness after death, future misery, αίώι /ios
(as 4 Mace x. 15) : 2 Th. i. 9 [where L txt. οΚίθριον,
q. v.], cf. Sap. i. 12.»
όλιγοίΓίστία, -as, η, littleness nf faith, little faith : Mt.
xvii. 20 L Τ Tr WH, for R G απιστία. (Several times
in eccles. and Byzant. writ.) *
όλιγό^ιη<ΓΤ05, -ου, ό. ή, (όλι -yof and πίστίί), of little faith ,
truslinij too Utile : Mt. vi. 30 ; viii. 26 : .xiv. 31; xvi. 8;
Lk. xii. 28. (Not found in prof, auth.) *
όλίγο5, -i;, -ov, [on its occasional aspiration (όλ.) see
WH. App. p. 143; Tdf. Proleg;. pp. 91, 106; Scrivener,
Introd. p. 565, and reff. s. v. ov init.], Sept. for Di'O, [fr.
Horn, down], little, small, few, of number, multitude,
quantity, or size: joined to nouns [cf. W. § 20, 1 b. note;
B. § 125, 6], Mt. ix. 37 ; xv. 34 ; Mk. vi. 5 ; viii. 7 ; Lk.
x. 2 ; xii. 48 (oXiyas sc. πλτ,-χιίί [cf. B. § 134, 6 ; W. § 32,
5, esp. § 64,4], opp. Ιοπολλαι. 47): Actsxix.24; 1 Tim.
v. 23; Heb. xii. 10; Jas. iii. 5 RG ; 1 Pet. iii. 20 R G;
Rev. iii. 4 ; of time, short : χρόνο:. Acts xiv. 28 ; καιροί.
Rev. xii. 12; of degree or intensity, /ί'(//i^ .«/ί7Λί : τάραχοι.
Acts xii. 18; xix. 23; στάσκ, xv. 2; χειρών, xxvii. 20.
plur. w. a partitive gen. : γυναικών. Acts xvii. 4 ; ανδρών,
ib. 12. ολίγοι, absol. : Mt. vii. 14 ; xx. 16 ; [T WH om.
Trbr. the cl.] ; xxii. 14 ; Lk. xiii. 23 ; 1 Pet. iii. 20 L Τ
Tr WH ; neut. sing. : Lk. vii. 47 ; τό όλι'γοι/, 2 Co. viii.
15: προ! ολίγον ωφ(\ιροί, profitable for little (hat. parum
vtilis); [cf. W. 213 (200); some, /or a little (sc. time);
see below], 1 Tira. iv. 8 ; ev ολίγω, in few words [cf.
Shakspere's in a /e'c], i. e. in brief, hriefltj (γράφ(ΐν),
Eph. iii. 3 ; easily, without much effort, Acts xxvi. 28 sq.
on other but incorrect interpretations of this phrase cf.
Meyer ad loc. [see ρίγηί, 1 a. y.] ; ττροί ολίγοι•, for a little
time, Jas. iv. 14 ; simply όλιγοκ, adverbially : of time, a
short lime, a {little) while, Mk. vi. 31 ; 1 Pet. i. 6; v. 10;
Rev. xvii. 10 ; of space, a little (further), Mk. i. 19 ; Lk.
V. 3. plur. όλι'γα, a few things : [Lk. x. 41 WH] ; Rev.
ii. 14, 20 [Rec•.]; iV ολι'γα ([see init. and] eVi, C. L 2 e.),
Mt. xxv. 21, 23; δι' ολίγων, briefly, in few words, γρά-
φων, 1 Pet. V. 12 [see 8ιά, A. ΙΠ. 3] (ρηθηναι. Plat. Phil,
p. 31 d.; legg. 6 p. 778 c.).•
όλιγάψνχοΐ, -OK, (όλίγοΓ, ^τυχη), faint-hearted: 1 Th. v.
14. (Prov. xiv. 29; xviii. 14; Is. Ivii. 15, etc.; Artera.
oneir. 3, 5.) *
όλιγωρεω, -ώ; (όλιγωροΓ, and this fr. o\lyos and S>pa
care) ; to care little for, regard lightly, make small account
of: rn«t (see Matthiae § 348; [W. § 30, 10 d.]), Heb.
xii. 5 fr. Prov. iii. 11. (Thuc, Xen., Plat., Dem., Aris-
tot., Philo, .Joseph., al.) *
oXC-ycDi, {ολίγος), adv., a little, scarcely, [R. Y. Just (es-
caping)] : 2 Pet. ii. 18 G L Τ Tr WH [for Rec. όντωίΐ
(Anthol. 12, 205, 1 ; [Is. x. 7 Aq.].) *
()λοθρ€υτή5 [Rec. όλ.], -οϋ, 6, {ολοθρήω, q. v.), a de-
stroyer ; found only in 1 Co. x. 10.•
ολοθρ<νω and, ace. to a preferable form, 6λ(6ρ(ύω
(Lchm.; see Bleeh, Hebr.-Br. ii. 2 p. 809; cf. Delitzsch,
Com. on Heb. as below ; \_Tdf. Proleg. p. 81 ; WH. App.
p. 152]); {Άλίθρος); an Ale.x. word [W. 92 (t^8)]; to
destroy: τίκά, Heb. xi. 28. (Ex. xii. 23,; Josh. iii. 10;
vii. 25 ; Jer. ii. 30 ; Hag. ii. 22, etc. ; [Philo, alleg. ii.
9].) [COMP. : €ξ-ολοθρ€ίω.γ
ολοκαύτωμα, -ros, τό, (όλοκαυτόω to burn whole, Xen.
Cyr. 8, 3, 24; Joseph, antt. 1, 13, 1 ; and this fr. όλοί
and KavTos, for καυστόί, verbal adj. fr. καίω, cf. Loh. ad
Phryn. p. 524; [W. 33]), a whole burnt offering (Lat.
holocaustum), i. e. a victim the whole (and not like other
victims only a part) of which is burned : Mk. xii. 33 ;
Heb. x. 6, 8. (Sept. esp. for nSi' ; also for nUii, Ex.
XXX. 20; Lev. v. 12; xxiii. 8, 25, 27; 1 Mace. i. 45;
2 Mace. ii. 10; not found in prof. auth. [exc. Philo da
sacr. Ab. et Cain. § 33] ; Joseph, antt. 3, 9, 1 and 9, 7,
4 says όλοκαύτωσίί.)*
ολοκληρία, -as. 17, {ολόκληρο!, q. v.), Lat. integritas;
used of an unimpaired condition of body, in which all
its members are healthy and fit for use ; Vulg. Integra
sanitas [A. V. perfect soundness"]: Acts iii. 16 (joined
with iiyifia, Plut. mor. p. 1063 f. ; with τοΰ σώματος
added, ibid. p. 1047 e.; cf. Diog. Laert. 7, 107; corporis
integritas, i. q. health, in Cic. de fin. 5, 14, 40; Sept. for
Dhn, Is. i. 6).•
όλό-κληροβ, -OK, {ολο! and κληρο!, prop, all that has
fallen by lot), complete in all its parts, in no part wanting
or unsound, complete, entire, whole : λίθοι, untouched by
a tool, Deut. xxvii. 6 ; Josh. ix. 4 (viii. 31) ; 1 Mace. iv.
47; of a body without blemish or defect, whether of
a priest or of a victim, Philo de vict. § 12; Joseph, antt.
3, 12, 2 [(cf. Havercamp's Joseph, ii. p. 321)]. Ethi-
cally, /ree /rom sin, faultless, [R. V. entire'] : 1 Th. v. 23 ;
plur., connected with τϊλιιοι and with the addition of
iv μη$(νι λf iffofifKoi, Jas. i. 4 ; complete in all respects, con-
summate, δικαιοσύνη. Sap. xv. 3 ; (Ισίβ(ΐα, 4 Mace. xv.
17. (Plat., Polyb., Lcian., Epict., al. ; Sept. for ohu,
Deut. xxvii. 6 ; D'pn, Lev. xxiii. 15; Ezek. xv. 5.)•
[Stn. ολόκληρο!, τ€λ6ΐο$ (cf. Trench § xxii.): 'in
the ό\6κ\Ύΐρο5 no grace wliich ought to be in a Christian
man is deficient ; in the τίλαο; no grace is merely in its
weak imperfect beginnings, but all have reached a certain
ripeness and maturity.']
ολολύζω; an onomatopoetic verb (cf. the similar οΐμώ-
ζίΐν, αΐάζίΐν, άλαλά^ίίΐ', πιπίζίΐν. κοκκΰζ€ΐν, TifetK. Com-
pare the Germ. term, -zen, as in grunzen, kriichzen, ach-
zen). to howl, wail, lament : Jas. v. 1. (In Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down of a loud cry, whether of joy or of grief;
Sept. tor S'S-n.) [Syn. cf. κλαία, fin.] •
ολο5, 1), -ov, Sept. for '73, [fr. Pind. (Horn.") down],
6XoTe\t}<:
444
ομνύω
whole, (all) : with an anarthrous subst. five [six] times
in the X. T., viz. oKov άνθ))ω-πον, Jn. vil. Ti ; iviavTov
o\ov. Acts xi. Jli ; οΚη Ίί,ιαυσαλι'ιμ, xxi. ;fl ; SicruiK ΰλην,
xxviii. .iO ; ολουΓ oiicous, Tit. i. 11; [to wliich add, St'
ο\η! vvKTos, l^lv. V. 5 l/l'Tr WII]. usually placed before
a substantive which has the article: όλ;; ή Γαλιλαία, Mt.
iv. 23 ; όλη ή Συμία, 24 : καθ' όλην την πάλιν, Lk. viii.
39 ; όλον το σώμα, Mt. ν. 2» sij. ; vi. 22. sq. ; Lk. xi. 34 ;
1 Co. xii. 17; .Jas. iii. 2, etc.; [όλη ή ίκκλησία, Ho. xvi.
23 LTTr Wll]; όλην τ. ήμίραν, Mt. XX. G; Ko. viii. 3G;
όλος ό νόμοί, Mt. xxii. 4i); Gal. v. 3; .Fas. ii. 10; iv όλη
Tj καρδία σου, Mt. .\xii. 37; (ξ όλη! τ. Knp&ias συν, Mk.
xii 30, and many other exx. it is placed after a sub-
stantive which has the article [W. 131 (124) note; B.
§ 125, 6] : ή πό\κ όλη, Mk. i. 33 ; Acts xix. 29 [Rec.] ;
xxi. 30 — (the distinction which KrUger§50, 11,7 makes,
viz. that ή όλη πύλΐΓ denotes the whole city as opp. to
its parts, but that όλη ή πύλιι and ή πόλις ή όλη denotes
the whole city in opp. toother ideas, as the country, the
fields, etc., does not hold good at least for the N. T.,
where even in ij πόλΐΓ όλη the city is opposed only to its
parts); add the foil, exx.: Mt. xvi. 26; xxvi. 59; Lk.
i.\. 25; xi. 30"; Jn. iv. 53; Ro. xvi. 23 [RG]; 1 Jn. v.
19 ; Rev. iii. 10 ; vi. 12 G L Τ Tr \VH ; xii. 9 ; xvi. 14.
It is subjoined to an adjective or a verb to show that
the idea expressed by the adj. or verb belongs to the
whole person or thing under consideration : Mt. xiii. 33 ;
Lk. xi. 36"; xiii. 21 ; Jn. ix. 34; xiii. 10, (Xen. mem. 2,
6, 28). Neut. τοίτο Se όλον, Mt. i. 22 ; xxi. 4 (where
(i L Τ Tr WII uni. όλον); xxvi. 5(j ; Si όλου. through-
out, Jn. xix. 2.i.
όλοτ€λή$, -if, (όλο:, TtXor), perfect, complete in all re-
spects: 1 Th. V. 23. (Plut. plac. philos. 5, 21 ; [Field,
Ilexapla, Lev. vi. 23; Ps. 1. 21]; eccles. writ.) '
'Ολυμπά; [peril, contr. fr. Όλυμπιό^ωρος, W. 103 (97) ;
c£. Fick; (Jr. Personennamen, pp. 1J3 sip 201], -a, [15. 20
(18)], 0, ϋΐιιιη/ιιιχ, a certain Christian: llo. xvi. 15.*
όλυνθοϊ, -on, 0, OH unripe firj (Lat. «//vjssii.s), ivhich grows
during the winter, yet does not come to maturity but falls
off in the spring [cf. B. D. s. V. Fig] : Rev. vi. 13. (lies,
fr. 14; lldt. 1, 193; Dioscorid. 1, 185; Theophr. cans,
plant. 5,9, 12; Sept. cant. ii. 13.) *
ίίλωί, (όλοΕ), adv., wholbi, altogether, (Lat. omnino),
[with a neg. at all} : Mt. v. 34 (with which compare Xen.
mem. 1, 2, 35); 1 Co. v. 1 [R. V. actually y, vi. 7; xv.
29. [(Plat., Isocr., al.)] •
όμβρος, -ου, ό, (Lat. imber) a shower, i. e. a violent rain,
accompanied by high wind with thunder and lightning:
Lk. xii. 51. (Ueut. xxxii. 2 ; Sap. xvi. IG; in (irk. ivrit.
fr. Iloin. down.) *
όμίίρομαι [or όμ., see below] i. (j. ίμ^Ιρομαι ; to desire,
long for, yearn afler, [A. V. to he affectionately desirous] :
Tivoc, 1 Th. ii. 8 GLTTr \VU [but the last read όμ., cf.
their App. p. 144 and Loh. Pathol. Element, i. 72], on
the authority of all the uncial and many cursive Mss., for
Rec. Ίμίΐρόμίνοι. The Avord is unknoivn to the Grk. writ.,
but the commentators adioc. recognize it, as do Ilesychius,
Phavorinus, and Photius. and interpret it by ϊπιθυμίϊν. It
is found in Ps. Ixii. 2 Symm., and ace. to some Mss. in Job
iii. 21. .\cc. to the conjecture of Frit:sclii', Cora, on Mk.
p. 792, it is composed of όμοϋ and ttpdv, just as Phiilius
[p. 331, 8 ed. Porson] explains it ομού ήμμύσθαι [so Theo-
l)hylaet (cf. Tdf.'s note)]. But there is this objection,
that all the verbs compounded with όμοϋ govern the da-
tive, not the genitive. Since Nicander, ther. vs. 402,
uses μfίpoμatfoΓ Ίμάρομαι, some suppose that the original
form is μύρομαι, to which, after the analogy of κίλλω and
ϋ«λλω, cither Ί or ό is for euphony prefixed in Ίμύρ. and
όμ^Ιρ. But as Ίμίίρομαι is derived from Ίμιρος, we must
suppose that Xicauder drojiped the syllable i to suit the
metre. Accordingly όμίίρισθαι seems not to differ at all
from Ίμίίρισΰαι, and its form must be attributed to a vul-
gar jjronuuciation. Cf. [WJi. App. p. 152]; W. 101
(95) ; [B. G4 (56) ; Ellic. on 1 Th. 1. c. ; (iCuenen and
Cohet, N. T. Vat. p. ciii.)].*
όμιλ€α>. -ά>; im|)f. ώμίλουν; 1 aor. ptcp. ό/ιιλί^σαΓ ; (βμι-
λοί, q. v.); freq. in (irk. writ. fr. Horn, down; to he in
company with ; to asssnciate tcilh ; to stay with ; hence to
converse tvith, tali• with : τινί, with one (Dan. i. 19), Acts
-xxiv. 26 ; sc. aiTo'is, Acts xx. 11 [so A. V. talked], unless
one prefer to render it when he had stayed in their com•
party ; irpos τίνα, Lk. xxiv. 14 (Xen. mem. 4, 3, 2 ; Joseph,
antt. 11,6, 11; [cf. W. 212s(i. (200); B. §133, 8]); eV τω
ί)μιλ(Ίν αντηνί S.C. άλληλοί!, ibid. 15. [CoMP. : συν-ομιλίω.]'
ομιλία, -at, J], (όμίλυς), companionship, intercourse, com-
munion : 1 Co. XV. 33, on which see ηθοί- (Tragg., Ar-
stph., Xen., Plat., and sqq.) *
ομιλο$, -ου, ό, {ομάς, όμοϋ, and Γλι; a crowd, band, [Cur-
tius § GOO; Vanicek p. X97; but Fick iii. 723 fr. root tnil
' to be associated,' ' to love']), fr. Horn, down, a multitude
of men gathered together, a crowd, throng : Rev. .xviii. 17
Rec*
όμ(χλη, -ijr, ij, (in Ilom. όμί)(λη, fr. όμιχίω to make
water), a mist, fog : 2 Pet. ii. 17 G L Τ Tr WII. (Am.
iv. 13; Joel ii. 2; Sir. xxiv. 3; Sap. ii. 4.)*
Ομμα, -TOf, TO, (f Γ. ότττομαι [see 6ράω~\, pf. Ζίμμαι), fr. Horn.
down, on eye: plur., Mt. xx. 34 LTTr WII; Mk. viii
23. (Sept. for γΐ\, Prov. vi. 4 ; vii. 2 ; x. 26.) *
όμννω (Mt. xxiii. 20s(|. ; xxvi. 74 ; Ileb. vi. 16 ; Jas. v.
12 ; [W. 24]) and όμνυμι {ΰμνϋναι, Mk. xiv. 71 G L Τ Tr
WII [cf. B.45 (39)]) form their tenses fr. OMOQ; hence
1 aor. ώ/χοσα; Sept. for i'SOT ; to swear; to affirm, prom-
ise, threaten, with an oath : absol., foil, by direct discourse,
Mt. xxvi. 74 ; Mk. xiv. 71 : Ileb. vii. 21 ; foil, by «', Heb.
iii. 11; iv. 3; see«, I. 5. ό/χν. όρκοι/ (often so in (irk. writ,
fr. Ilom. down [W. 226 (212)]) ττρός τίνα, to one (Horn.
Od. 14, 331; 19, 288), Lk. i. 73 ; d/ifw iv with dat. of the
person to whom one promises or threatens something
with an oath : foil, by direct disc. Mk. vi. 23 ; by an inf.
[W. 331 (311)], Heb. iii. 18; with ορκω added. Acts ii. 30
[W. 603 (56 1 )] ; τινί τι, Acts vii. 1 7 [Rec. i. e. gen. by at-
traction ; cf. B. § 143, 8; W. § 24, 1]. that by which one
swears is indicated by an ace, τιι-ίί or τι (so in class. Grk.
fr. Horn, down [cf. W. § 32, 1 b. y. ; B. 147 (128)]), in
swearing to call a person or thing as witness, to invoke,
swear hy, (Is. Ixv. 16 ; Joseph, antt. 5, 1, 2 ; 7, 14, 5) ; τβ»
όμοθυμαΖον
445
ομ.οια>θΉ
οίρανόν, την yfjii, Jas. v. 1 2 ; with prepositions [cf. B. u. s.] :
κατά Ttvo£ (see κατά, I. 2 a.), Ileb. vi. 13, 16, (Gen. xxii.
16; xxxi. 04; 1 S. xxviii. 10 [Com p.]; Is. xlv. 23; Ixii. 8;
Am. iv. 2 ; Dem. p. 553, 1 7 ; 553, 26 [al. άπομ.^, etc. ;
κατά πάντων ωμνυ( θ(ών. Long. past. 4, IG) ; in imitation
of tlie Hebr. ;'2JJ foil, by 3, ΐν Τίνι. is used [W. 389
(364); B. I. c. ; see iV, I. 8 b.] : Mt. v.34,36; xxiii. 16, 18,
20-22; Rev. X. 6 ; fls τί, witli the mind directed unto
[W. 397 (371) ; B. as above ; see tU, B. II. i a.], Mt. v. 35.*
όμοθυμαεον (fr. ομόθυμο!, and this fr. όμύί and βνμΟ!\
on advs. in-3oi/ [chieliy derived fr. nouns, and designating
form or structure] as γνωμηδόν, ροιζηδόν, etc., cf. Bum.
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 452), with one miniJ, υ /one accord, (Vulg.
unanimiter [etc.]) : Ko. xv. 6 ; Acts i. 14; ii. 46; iv. 24;
vii. 57 ; viii. 6 ; xii. 20 ; xv. 25 ; xviii. 1 2 ; xix. 29, and R G
in ii. 1, (Arst])h., Xen., Dem., Philo, Joseph., Hdian.,
Sept. Lam. ii. 8 ; Job xvii. Ki ; Xum. xxiv. 24, etc.) ; with
&7ravT(s [L Τ WH jran-fs] (Arstph. pax 484, and often in
class. Grk.), Acts v. 12 [cf. ii. 1 above].*
όμοιάΙζω; (όμοίΟ!, [cf. W. 25]); ίο be like: Mt. .xxiii.
27 LTr txt. Wll mrg. ; Mk. xiv. 70 Rec. where see Fritz-
eche p. 658 sq. ; [on the dat. cf . ^V. § 3 1 , 1 h. j. Not found
elsewhere. [Co.MP. : πap-oμo^άζω■^*
ό)ΐοι.οπαθή$, -is, (όμοιο;, πάσχω), suffering the like with
another, of like feelings or affeclion.t: τινί, Acts xiv. 15 ;
Jas. v. 17. (Plat. rep. 3, 409 b., Tim. 45 c. ; Theophr.
h. pi. 5, 8 (7, 2) ; Philo, conf. ling. § 3 ; 4 Mace. xii. 13 ;
yij, i. e. trodden alike by all. Sap. vii. 3 ; see exx. fr. eccles.
writ. [viz. Ignat. (Interpol.) ad Trail. 10; Euseb. h. e. 1,
2, 1, (both of the incarnate Logos)] in Grimm on4 Mace,
p. 344.)•
δμοιοί (on the accent cf. [Chandler §§ 384, 385] ; W.
52 (51); Bum. Ausf. Spr. § 11 Anm. 9), -οία, -oio», also
of two term, (once in the N. T., Rev. iv. 3 R" G L Τ Tr
WH; cf. \V. §11, 1; [B. 26 (23)]), (fr.o^oi [akin to άμα
(q. v.), Lat. similii, Eng. same, etc.]), [fr. Horn, down],
like, similar, resembling: a. /I'te i. e. resembling : τινί,
in form or look, Jn. Lx. 9; Rev. i. 13, 15; ii. 18; iv.
6 sq. ; ix. 7, 10 [but here Tr txt. AVH mrg. όμοιοιι], 19 ;
xi. 1 ; xiii. 2, 11 ; xiv. 14 [but here Τ WH w. the ace us.
(for dat.)] ; xvi. 13 Rec. ; opaaet, in appearance. Rev.
iv. 3 ; in nature. Acts xvii. 29 ; (!al. v. 21 ; Rev. xxi. 11,18;
in nature and condition, 1 .In. iii. 2 ; in mode of thinking,
feeling, acting, Mt. xi. 16; xiii. 52; Lk. vi. 47-49; vii.
31 sq.; xii. 36, and LWHTrtxt. (see below) in Jn. viii.
55 ; i. q. 7nni/ be compared to a thing, so in parables : Mt.
xiii. 31, 33, 44 sq. 47; xx. 1 ; Lk. xiii. 18 sq. 21. b.
like i.e. corresponding or equiv. to, the same as: ομοιον
τούτοΐί τρόπον, Jude 7 ; equal in strength, Rev. xiii. 4 ; in
power and attractions, Rev. xviii. 18 ; in authority, Mt.
xxii. 39 ; Mk. xii. 31 [here Τ WH om. Tr mrg. br. όμ.'] ;
in mind and character, twos (cf. W. 195 (183), [cf. § 28,
2] ; B. § 132, 24), Jn. viii. 55 R G Τ Trmrg. (see above).*
e)iou>rqs, -ητοί, ή, (όμοιοι), likeness : καθ" ομοιότητα, in
like manner, Heb. iv. 15 [cf. W. 143 (13G)] ; κατά την
ομοιότητα (Μί\χισ(5(κ), after the likeness, Heb. vii. 15.
(Gen. i. 11; 4 Mace. xv. 4 (3); Plat., .\ristot., Isocr.,
Polyb., Philo, Plut.) •
όμοιοω, -ω : fut. ομοιώσω ; Pass., 1 aor. ώμοιώθην, and
without augm. όμοιώβΐ)!' (once Ko. ix. 29 L mrg. Τ edd-
2, 7, [but see WH. App. p. 161] ; cf. B. 34 (30) ; Sturz,
De dial. Maced. etc. p. 1 24 ; [cf.] L/>b. ad Phryn. p. 153) ;
I fut. όμοιωθησομαι; (ό /ioiot); fr. [Hom. and] Hdt. down;
Sept. esp. for Π31; a. to make like: τικά τινι; pass, to
be or to become like to one : Alt. vi. 8 ; Acts xiv. 1 1 ; Heb.
ii. 1 7 ; ωμοιώθη η βασιλ. των oip-, was made like, took the
likeness of, (aor. of the time when the Messiah appeared),
'Sit. xiii. 24 ; xviii. 23 ; xxii. 2 ; 6μηιωθήσ(τ:ιι (fut. of the
time of the last judgment), Mt. xxv. 1 ; it τι, to be made
Uke and thus to become as a thing [i. e. a blending of
two thoughts ; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. iv. 31 ; B. § 133, 10 ;
W. § 65, 1 a.], Ro. ix. 29 (3 n^^J Ezek. xxxii. 2). b.
to liken, compare : τίΐ/ά τινι, or τί rtw, Mt. λ ii. 24 [R G
(see below)]; xi. 16; .Mk. iv. 30 R L txt.Tr mrg. ; Lk.
vii. 31 ; xiii. 18, 20 ; pass. Mt. vii. [24 L Τ WH Trtxt.],
26 ; to illustrate by comparison, πώί όμοιώσωμιν την βασ.
τοϋ θ(ον, Mk. iv. 30 Τ WH Tr txt. L mrg. [CoMP. : αφ-
ομοιόω.'] *
ομοίωμα, -rof, τ<5, (όμοιο'ω), Sept. for nj^Jl, ΠηΉ, C^X^
n"J3Jl; prop, that which has been made after the likeness
of something, hence a. a figure, image, likeness,
representation : Ps. cv. (cvi.) 20 ; 1 Mace. iii. 48 ; of the
image or shape of things seen in a vision. Rev. Lx. 7 [cf.
W. 604 (562)] (Ezek. i. 5, 26, 28, etc. Plato, in Farmen.
p. 132 d., calls finite things ομοιώματα, likenesses as it
were, in which τα παραπήγματα, i. e. a'l ιδίαι or τα (187,
are expressed). b. likeness i. e. resemblance (inas-
much as that appears in an image or figure), freq. such
as amounts well-nigh to equality or identity: ruxit, Ro. vi.
5 ; viii. 3 (on which see σαρξ, 3 fin. [cf. Weiss, BibL
Theol. etc. §§ 69 c. note, 78 c. note]) ; Phil. u. 7 (see
μορφή); (Ικόνος, a likeness expressed by an image, i. e.
an image like, Ro. i. 23 ; eVt τω όμοιώματι της παραβάσκΐο^
Αδάμ, in the same manner in which .\dam transgressed
a command of God [see iV/, B. 2 a. η.], Ro. v. 14. Cf.
the different views of this word set forth by Holsten,
Zum Evangel, des Paulus u. Petrus, p. 437 sqq. and [esp.
for exx.] in the Jahrbiich. f. protest. Theol. for 1875, p.
451 sqq., and by Zeller, Zeitsihr. f. wissensch. Theol. for
1870, p. 301 fii<[. [Syx. cf. f'lKwv. fin. : Schmidt ch. 191.]•
όμ.ο£ω5, (όμοίοί), adv., [fr. Pind., Hdt. down], likewise,
equally, in the same way: Mk.iv. 16 (Trmrg. br.όμ.) ; Lie.
iii. 11; x. 37; xiii. 3 L Τ Tr WH ; SRGLTrmrg.;
xvi. 25 ; xvii. 31 •- Jn. v. 19 ; xxi. 13 ; 1 Pet. iii. 1, 7; v. 5;
Heb. ix. 21; Rev. ii. 15 (for Rec. i μισώ); viiL 12;
όμοίωί καΐ, Mt. xxii. 26 ; xxvi. 35 ; Mk. .\v. 31 [here Rec
όμ. δί καί ] ; Lk. V. 33 ; xvii. 28 R G L ; x.xii. 36 ; Jn. vi.
I I ; 1 Co. vii. 22 R G ; ομοίως μίντοι καί, Jude 8 ; όμοίακ
δί καί, Mt. xxvii. 41 R G (where Τ om. L br. He και, Tr
br. de, WH om. 8e and br. καί) ; Lk. v. 10 ; x. 32 ; 1 Col
vii. 3 (where L br. 8e), 4; Jas. ii. 25; and correctly
restored by L Tr mrg. in Ro. i. 27, for R Τ Tr txt. WH
ομοίως τ( καί ; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 77 ; [AV. 571 (531);
B. § 149, 8] ; ομοίως preceded by καθώς, Lk. vi. 31.•
όμοΙω<Γΐ5, -tiiJt, ij. (ομοιόω ) ; 1. α making like '.
opp. to άλλοίωσι;. Plat. rep. 5, 454 C. 2. liieneMi
OfjLoKcrfew
446
όναώι.σμό';
(Plat., Aristot., Theophr.) : Kaff όμοίωσιν flfoi, after the
likeness of God, Jas. iii. 9 fr. Gen. i. Ίύ. [Cf. Trench
§ XV.] •
όμολογ(ω, -<>> > itnpf. ώ^λόγοιικ; fut. ομολογήσω; 1 aor.
αμολήγησα; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. ofioXoyf ίται ; (fr. όμο-
λογοί, and this fr. όμάν and λίγω) ; fr. [Soph, andj Hdt.
down ; 1. prop, to say the same thing as another,
i. e. lo agree with, assent, both absol. and w. a dat. of the
pers. ; often so in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down ; hence 2.
univ. 10 cnticeile ; i. e. a. 7wt to re/use, i. e. to promise :
Tw'i τήν enayyfXiav, Acts vii. 17 LTTr WH [here R. V.
vourltsa/t]; full, hy an object, inf., Mt. .\iv. 7 (Plat., Dem.,
Plut., al.). b. not lo dimij, \. e. lo confess; declare:
joined w. ουκ αριχίσθαι, foil, by direct disc, with recitative
ότι, Jn. i. 20; foil, hy on, Ileb. xi. 13 ; τινί τι, ότι, Acts
xxiv. 14 ; ίο confess, i. e. to admit or declare one's self
guilty of what one is accused of : ras αμαρτία!, 1 Jn. i. 9
(Sir. iv. 26). 3. to profess (the ditf. betw. the Lat.
profteor [' to declare openly and voluntarily'] and
con/r'ieor [' to declare fully,' implying the yielding or
change of one's conviction ; cf. professio fidei, confes-
sio peccatorum] is e.xhibited in Cic. pro Sest. 51, 109),
i. e. to declare openly, speak out freely, [A. V. generally
confess; on its constr. see B. § 133, 7] : [foil, by an
inf., ii'Se'rai βίόι/, Tit. i. 16]; rm [cf. B. u. s. ; W. §31, If.]
foil, by direct disc, with ϋτι recitative, Mt. vii. 23 ; one
is said o/ioXoyf ix that of which he is convinced and which
he holds to be true (hence όμ. is disting. fr. mcrrfieiv in
Jn. xii. 42; Ro. x. 9 sq.) : pass, absol., with στόματι (dat.
of instrum.) added, Ro. x. 10 ; ri, Acts xxiii. t! ; nm with
a predicate ace. [B. u. s.], αίτόν Χμιστόν. Jn. ix. 22; κϋ-
pioK (pred. ace.) Ίι;σοΟΐ', Ro. x. 9 [here WII το ρήμα . . .
ότι κύριος etc., L mrg. Tr rarg. simply οτί etc. ; again with
ότι in 1 Jn. iv. 15] ; 'liyoOUi/ Xp. iv σαρκϊ ί\ηλυθότα [Tr
mrg. WH mrg. (Χη\νθ€ναι'], 1 Jn. iv. 2 and Rec. also in
3 [see below] ; (ρ)^όμ(υον iv σαρκΊ, 2 Jn. 7, [cf. B. u. s. ;
W. 346 (324)]; τινά, to profess one's self the worshipper
of one, 1 Jn. iv. 3 [here WII mrg. Xiei, cf. Weslcott. Epp.
of Jn. p. 156 sqq.] and G L Τ Tr WII in ii. 23 ; iv with
a dat. of the pers. (see iv, I. 8 c.), Alt. x. 32 ; Lk. xii. 8 ;
wiih cognate ace. giving the substance of the profession
[cf. B. § 131, 5; W. § 32, 2], όμολογίαν, 1 Tim. vi. 12 (also
full, by nep'i Timt, Philo de raut. nom. § 8) ; ro όνημά Tiros,
to declare the name (written in the book of life) to be
the name of a follower of me. Rev. iii. 5 G L Τ Tr
λ\ Η• 4. Ace. to a usage unknown to Grk. writ, to
praise, celebrate, (see (ξομοΧογίω. 2 ; [Β. § 133, 7]) : τιι/ί,
Ileb. xiii. 15. [Co.MI•. : άνθ-{.-μαι), (ξ-ομοΧογίω.] '
ομολογία, -ας, ή, {όμοΧογίω, ({. ν. [cf. W. 35 (34)]), in
the Ν. τ. profession [R. V. uniformly c ο nfession^ ; a.
subjectively: fip;^-ifH£a nji; ύμολ. ήμων. i. e. « lioin we pro-
fess (to be ours), Ileb. iii. 1 [butal. refer this to b.]. b.
objectively, y)ro/e.s.siOji [confession] i.e. what one professes
[confesses] : Heb. iv. 14 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1 2 (see όμολογίω, 3) ;
13 (see μαμτνρίω, a. p. 391") ; της (Χπί8ος. the substance
of our profession, which we embrace with hope, Ileb. x.
23 ; fif TO fiayyfXiov τοϋ Χρίστου, relative to the gospel,
2 Co. ix. 13 (translate, ybr the obedience ye render to what
ye profess concerning the gospel; cf. ή fit τον τβΟ θιοϋ
Χριστον ομολογία, Justin Μ. dial. c. Try ph. c. 47, — a con-
str. occasioned perhaps by ή (ίς τί>ν Χριστϋν ττίστις, Col. ii.
5; [cf. W. 381 (357)]). [(Hdt., Plat., al.)] •
όμολο-γουμί'νως, (όμολογίω), adv., by consent of all, con-
fessedly, irilhoul coiilrorersy : 1 Tim. iii. 16. (4 Mace,
vi. 31 ; vii. 16 ; xvi. 1 ; in prof. auth. fr. 'J'huc, Xen., Plat,
down ; \vith imo πάντων added, Isocr. paneg. § 33, where
see Baiter's note.)*
όμότίχνοϊ, -υν, (όμός and τ(χνη), practising the same
trade or craft, of the same trnile: Acts xviii. 3. (Ildt. 2,
89 ; Plat.. Dem., Jose|)h., Lcian., al.) •
όμον, {όμύς). [fr. Horn, down], adv., together: .In. iv.
36 ; .\x. 4 ; ttrai όμοϋ, of persons assenibleil together.
Acts ii. 1 L Τ Tr WII ; xx. 18 Lchm. ; Jn. x.\i. 2. [Syn.
see άμα, fin.] *
όμόω. see ομνύω.
όμόφρων, -ov, (όμός, φρήν'), of one mind, [A. V. like
viindt'il], ronrnrilani : 1 Pet. iii. 8. (Ilom., lies., Pind.,
Arstph., Anthol., Plut., al.)*
ομ(ι>ΐ. (όμο'ί), fr. Hom. down, yet; it occurs twice in
the N. T. out of its usual position [cf. W. § 61, 5 f . ; B.
§ 144, 23]. viz. in 1 Co. xiv. 7, where resolve thus: τα
αψνχα, καίιτ(ρ φωνην διδόιτα, ομω;, (άν διαστολών . . . πως
κτλ. instruments without life, although giving forth a
sound, yet, unless they give a distinction in the sounds,
how shall it be known etc., Friizsche, Conject. spec. i.
p. 52; cf. Meyer ad loc. ; [W. 344 (323)]; again, όμα>Γ
άνθρωπου . . . ον^Ας ά6ίτ(ΐ for άνθρωπου κίκυρ. 8ιαθήκην,
Kaintp ανθρώπου ουσαν, ομω? oCofij κτΧ. a man's estai>-
lished civenant, though it be but a man's, yet no one
etc. Gal. iii. 15; όμως μί'ιτοί, but yet, nevertheless, [cf.
W. 444 (413)], Jn. xii. 42.*
ό'ναρ, TO, (an indecl. noun, used only in the nom. and
ace. sing. ; the other cases are taken from όν(ιρός), [fr.
Hom. down], ο dream: κατ όναρ, in a dream, Mt. i. 20;
ii. 12 sq. 19, 22; xxvii. 19, — a later Greek phrase, for
which Attic writ, used όναρ without κατά [q. v. II. 2] ;
see Lob. ad Phryu. p. 422 sqq.; \_Photius, Lex. p. 149,
25 sq.].•
όνάριον, -ov, TO, (dimin. of όνος; cf. [W. 24 and] yv
ναικάριον), a little ass: Jn. xii. 14. (Machon ap. Athen.
13 p. oSl'c. ; [Epictet. diss. 2, 24, 18].)*
ον(ΐ8£ζω ; impf. ώΐ'βίδι^οΐ' ; 1 aor. ώνί ι'δισα ; pres. pass.
ον(ώίζ'ψαι: (ο«ιδοί, q• v.) ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. esp.
for ητΐ ; In reproach, upbraid, revile; [on its constr. cf.
W. § 32, 1 b. /3. ; B. § 133, 9] : of deserved reproach, τινά,
foil, by on, Mt. xi. 20; W (the fault) τίνος, foil, by ότι,
.Mk. xvi. 14. of unjust reproach, to revile : τίΐ/ά, Mt. v. H ;
Mk. XV. 32 ; Lk. vi. 22 ; Ro. xv. 3 fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 10;
pass. 1 Pet. iv. 14 ; foil, by ότι, 1 Tim. iv. 10 R G Tr mrg
WII mrg. ; το αυτό ωνύδιζον αυτόν (Rec. αΐιτω), Mt. xxvii.
44 (see αϋτόί. III. 1). to upbraid, cast (favors received)
in one's teeth : absol. Jas. i. 5 ; μ(τα τό δούναι μη όνιίδιζί,
Sir. xii. 22, cf. xx. 14 ; τιν\ σωτηρίαν, deliverance obtained
by us for one, Polyb. 9, 31, 4."
ον(ΐ8ΐ(Γμό$, -οΰ, ό, (oxftSi'ftt)), [cf. W. 24], a reproach
Ro. XV. 3 : 1 Tim. iii. 7 ; Ileb. x. 33 ; ό οναδισμος τοϋ Xpi-
OV€i'
δθ9
447
όνομα
trroO i. e. such as Christ suffered (for the cause of God,
from its enemies), Heb. xi. 26 ; xiii. 13 ; cf. \V. 189 (178).
(Plut. Artax. 22 ; [Dion. Hal.] ; Sept. chiefly for Π3")π.) *
oveiSos, -ovs, TO, (fr. άνομοι to blame, to revile), fr. Horn,
down, reproach ; i. q. shame : Lk. i. 25. (Sept. cliiefly for
riD'in ; three times for n's'pj disgrace. Is. xxx. 3 ; Mich,
ii. 6; Prov. xviii. 13.)*
Όνήσ-ιμΌϊ, -ov, 6, (i. e. profitable, helpful; fr. όνησκ
profit), Onesimus, a Christian, the slave of Philemon :
Philem. 10 ; Col. iv. 9. [Cf. Bp. Lghlfl. Com. Intr. § 4 ;
Hackett in B. D.] •
Όνησίφορο8, -ου, ό, [i. e. ' profit-bringer '], Onesiphorus,
the name of a certain Christian : 2 Tim. i. 16 ; iv. 19."
ονικός, -η, -όν, (oi/oy), of or for an o.s'.s• : μίιΧος ονίκός i. e.
turned by an ass (see μύλος, 1), Alk. i.\. 42 L Τ Tr WH ;
Lk. xvii. 2 Rec. ; Mt. xviii. 6. Not found elsewhere.*
όνίνημ,ι : fr. Horn, down ; to be useful, to profit, help,
(Lat.yuco); Mid., pres. ονίναμαι; 2 aor. ωνήμην (and later
ωνάμην, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 12 sq. ; Kiihner § 343 s. v.,
i. p. 880 ; [Veitch s. v.]), optat. δναίμην ; to receive profit
or ailrantage, be helped [or hare joy, (Lat. Juvor )] : τινός,
of one, Philem. 20 [see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. (Elsewh.
in the .Scriptures only in Sir. xxx. 2.) *
όνομα, -τος, τό, (NOM [others ΓΝΟ ; see Vanicek p.
1239], cf. Lat. nomen [Eng. name'], with prefixed ο [but
see Curtius § 44G]), Sept. for Dt?, [fr. Horn, down], the
name by which a person or a thing is called, and dis-
tinguished from others ; 1. univ. : of prop, names,
Mk. iii. 16 ; vi. 14 ; Acts xiii. 8, etc. ; των άποστοΚων τα
ονόματα, Mt. χ. 2 ; Rev. xxi. 14 ; άνθρωπος or άνημ ώ όνομα,
πολίί fi όν. , SC. ην, named, foil, by the name in the nom.
[cf. B. § 129, 20, 3] : Lk. i. 26 sq. ; ii. 25 ; viii. 41 ; xxiv.
13, 18; Acts xiii. 6, (Xen. mem. 3, 11, 1) ; oS [L ω] το
όνομα, ^Ik. xiv. 32; κα\ τό ov. αυτόν, αντης, etc., Lk. i. 5, 27;
ϋνομααϋτω sc. ην οτ 4στΊν [Β. U.S.],. In. i.6; iii. 1 ; xviii. 10;
Rev. vi. 8 ; ονόματι, foil, by the name [cf. B. § 129 a.
3 ; W. 182 (171)], Mt. xxvii. 32 ; Mk. v. 22 ; Lk. i. 5 ; x.
38; xvi. 20; xxiii. 50; Acts v. 1,31; viii. 9 ; ix. 10-12, 33,
36; X. 1 ; xi. 28; xii. 13; xvi. 1, 14; xvii. 34; xviii. 2, 7,
24 ; xix. 24 ; xx. 9 ; xxi. 10 ; xxvii. 1 ; xxviii. 7 ; Rev. ix.
11, (Xen. anab. 1, 4, 11) ; τοϋκομα (i. e. το όνομα), ace.
absol.[B.§ 131,12; cf. AV. 230 (216)], i.e. by name, Mt.
xxvii. 57 ; όνομα μοι sc. ΐστίν, my name is, Mk. v. 9; Lk.
viii. 30, {Ουτις ίμοίγ'όνομα, Hom. Od. 9, 36G) ; ϊχιιν όνομα,
foil, by the name in the nom.. Rev. ix. 1 1 ; καΚύν τό όνομα
Τίνος, foil, by the ace. of the name, see καλε'ω, 2 a. ; καλιΐν
Tiva ονόματι τινι, Lk. i. 61 ; ονόματι κιιΚούμίνος, Lk. xix. 2;
Ka\flv Tiva fVl τώ όν. Lk. i. 59 (see tVi, B. 2 a. η. p. 233') ;
icar* όνομα (see κατά, II. 3 a. y. p. 32S*) ; τα ονόματα νμων
(•γράφη [(vyiypanTai Τ WH Tr] ev τοΙς οΙρανοΊς, your
names have been enrolled by God in the register of the
citizens of the kingdom of heaven, Lk. x. 20 : το ίνομά
Tivos {(γράφη) iv βίβΧω {τω βιβλίω) ζωής, Phil. iv. 3 ;
Rev. xiii. 8 ; (VI το βιβλίον τής ζ. Rev. xvii. 8 ; (κβά\\(ΐν
(q. γ. 1 h.) το όνομα τινης ως πονηρόν, since the wicked-
ness of the man is called to mind by his name, Lk. vi.
22 ; (ΐτικάλ^Ισθαι το όνομα τον κυρίου, see « ττίκαλ/ω, 5 ; ΐπι-
Κ€κ\ηται τϋ ονομά TIVOS ίττί τίνα, see ΐπικ. 2 ; ονόματα (όνομα)
βλασφημίας Ί. q. βλάσφημα (-μον) [cf. W. § 34, 3 b.; Β.
§ 132, 10], names by which God is blasphemed, his maj-
esty assailed. Rev. xiii. 1 ; xvii. 3 [R G Tr, see γί'μω]. so
used that the name is opp. to the reality: όνομα ίχΐκ,
ότι ζης, και νεκρός (ϊ, tliou art said [Α. V. hast a name] to
live. Rev. iii. 1 (όνομα fL\€V, ως (π Άθηνας eXavvei, Ildt.
7, 138). i. q. title : nepi ονομάτων, about titles (as of the
Messiah), Acts xviii. 15; κ\ηρονομ(Ίν όνομα, Heb. i. 4;
χαρίζίσθαί Tiw όνομα τι, Phil. ii. 9 (here the title ό κύριοι
is meant [but crit. txts. read το όνομα etc., which many
take either strictly or absolutely ; cf. Meyer and Bp.
Lghtft. ad loc. (see below just before 3)]) ; spec, a title
of honor and authority, Eph. i. 21 [but see Meyer]; ίν
τώ ονόματι Ίησον, in devout recognition of the title con-
ferred on him by God (i. e. the title ό κύριος), Phil. ii. 10
[but the interp. of όνομα here follows that of όνομα in
vs. 9 above; see Meyer and Bp. Lghtft., and cf. W. 390
(365)]. 2. By a usage chiefly Hebraistic the name
is used for everytliing which the name covers, everything
the thought or feeling of which is roused in the mind by
mentioning, hearing, remembering, the name, i. e. for
one's rank; authority, interests, pleasure, command, excel-
lences, deeds, etc. ; thus, fir όνομα προφήτου, out of regard
for [see fir, B. II. 2 d.] the nanie of prophet which he
bears, i. q. because he is a ])rophet, Mt. x. 41 ; βατττίζίΐρ
Tiva fir όνομα TtiOt, by baptism to bind any one to recog-
nize and publicly acknowledge the dignity and authority
of one [cf. βαπτίζω, II. b. (aa.)], Mt. xxviii. 19; Acts viii.
IG ; xix. 5 ; 1 Co.i. 13, 15. to do a thing Ινόνόματί tivos,
i. e. by one's command and authority, acting on his behalf,
promoting liis cause, [cf. W. 390 (365) ; B. § 147, 10] ; as,
ό ΐρχόμ^νος (V ονόματι κνρίου (fr. Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 26),
of the Messiah, Mt. xxi. 9 ; xxiii. 39 ; :Mk. xi. 9; Lk. xiii.
35 ; xix. 38 ; Jn. xii. IS ', ev τω ονόματι τον πατρός μου, Jn.
V. 43 ; χ. 25 ; iv τω ονόματι τω ίδίω, of his own free-will
and authority, Jn. v. 43 ; to do a thing iv τώ ov. of Jesus,
Acts X. 48 ; 1 Co. v. 4 ; 2 Th. iii. 6 : and L Τ Tr WH in
Jas. V. 10 [but surely κ. here denotes God ; cf. 2 f. below].
Ace. to a very freq. usage in the O. T. (cf. ΠΙΠ' O'Ci), the
name of God in the X. T. is used for all those qualities
which to his worshippers are summed up in that name,
and by which God makes himself known to men ; it is
therefore equiv. to his dirinity, Lat. numen, (not his na-
ture or essence as it is in itself), the dirine majesty and
perfections, so far forth as these are apprehended, named,
magnified, (cf. Winer, Lex. Hebr. et Chald. p. 993 ; Oeh•
ler in Herzog x. p. 196 sqq. ; Wittichen in Schenkel iv.
p. 282 sqq.); so in the phrases ayiov το όνομα αΰτοϋ sc.
iστίv. Lk. i. 49 ; άγιάζίΐν το όν. τοΰ θ(ού, Mt. vi. 9 ; Lk. xi.
2 ; όμολογ€Ϊν τώ όν. αντοΰ, Heb. xiii. 15 ; ψάλλΐΐν, Ro. χν.
9 ; δοξάζ^ιν, .Τη. χϋ. 28 ; [Rev. χν. 4] ; φαν(ροίν, γνωρί-
ζ^ιν, Jn. xvii. 6, 26; φοβ(Ίσθαι τό όν. τοΟ ^foC, Rev. xi. 18 ;
XV. 4 [G LT Tr WH]; SiayyiXXfiv, Ro. ix. 17 ; άπαγγιλ•
λ(ΐν, Heb. ii. 1 2 ; βλάσφημων, Ro. ii. 24 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1 ; Rev.
xiii. 6 ; .\vi. 9 ; uyamjv iv&fίκvυσθaι tisTO όν. τοΰ θ(οϋ, Heb.
vi. 10; τηρησον αντονς iv τω ονόματι σου, ω (by attraction
for ο [cf. Β. § 143, 8 p. 286 ; W. § 24, 1 ; Rec. incorrectly
out]) &ίδωκάς μοι, keep them consecrated and united to
ονοβα
448
Οντων
tLv name (character), which thou didst commit to me to
declare and manifest (of. vs. (> ), .In. xvii. 1 1 ; [cf. iirip τοΟ
ά-γΐυυ ονόματος σου, ην κατ^σκηνωσας €v τάϊς καρ^ίαις ημών,
'Teaching' etc. ch. 10, 2]. After the analogy of the pre-
ceding expression, the name n/Clirisl (Ίησοϋ, Ίησοϋ Χρίσ-
του, ToC κυρίου Ίΐ)σ., του κνρίου ήμων, etc.) is used in the
Ν. Γ. of all those tilings which, in hearing or recalling that
name, we are biihlen to recognize in Jesus and to profess,
accordingly, of liia Me.i.tiunic ilif/nitij, dicine aul/iorily,
memorable sufi'erings, in a word l/ie /luculiar serficc^ ami
blessinf/x con/erred hi/ him on men, so far forth as tliese
are believed, confessed, commemorated, [cf. Westcott on
tlie Kpp. of .In. p. 232] : hence the phrases (iaγγf\ίζ(-
σθαι τα nep'i τοϊι υν. Ί. Χμ. Acts viii. 12 ; ptyaXi'vav τό Sv.
Acts xix. I 7 ; τώ ονόμ [liec. «V r. oi/.] αϋτοϋ (Κπίζαν, Mt.
xii. 21 [B. 176 (l.");i)] ; πιστ(ύ(ΐν, 1 .In. iii. 2:i ; πιστ. «r
TO όν., .In. i. 12; ii. 23; iii. 18; I .In. v. 13' [Rec, 13*•];
ττϊστκ τοΰ uv. Acts iii. 16 ; ό ΰνομίιζων το όνομα κυρίον, wlio-
ever nameth the name of the Lord sc. as liis Lord (see
ονομάζω, a.), 2 Tim. ii. 1!»; κρατ€ΐν, to hold fast i. e. per-
severe in professing. Rev. ii. 13; ουκ apve'iaSai, Rev. iii.
8 ; TO όν. 'ΐϊ;σοϋ t vSu^dferat ev νμϊν, 2 Th. i. 1 2 ; βαστάζ€ΐν
τό όν. (νώτΐΐον ίθνών (>ee βαστάζω, 3), Acts ix. 15; to do
or to suffer anything «πϊ τώ ϋνύματι Xp. see ϊπί, Β. 2 a. β.
p. 232''. The phrase i'l- τω ονόματι Xp. is used in various
senses: a. hy the command and aulhorily of Chri.il:
see exx. just above. b. in the use of Iha name of Christ
i.e. the power of his name being invoked for assistance,
Mk. ix. 38 R"' L Τ Tr Wll (see f. below) ; Lk. x. 17;
Acts iii. 6 ; iv. 10 ; xvi. 18 ; Jas. v. 14 ; univ. ίνποίω ονόμα-
τι (ποίήσατί τούτο; Acts iv. 7. c. through the power
of Christ's name, pervading and governing their souls,
ilk. xvi. 1 7. d. in acknnwledfjinij, emhracing, prn/ess-
in<i,the name of Christ : σωθήναι. Acts iv. 12; 8ικαιωθηναι,
1 Co. vi. 11 ; ζωηνίχ(ΐν,•]η. xx. 31 ; in /irofissiny and pro-
claiming the name if Christ, παρρησιάζισθαί. Acts ix. 27,
28 (29). e. reh/ing or resting on the name of Christ,
rooted (so to speak) in his name, i. e. mindful of Christ:
iroiiiv Tt, Col. iii. 1 7 ; (ΰχαριστϋν, Eph. v. 20 ; αχτΛν τι, i. e.
(for substance) to wsk a thing, us prompted hi/ the mind of
Christ and in reliance on the bond which unites us to him,
Jn. xiv. 13 sq.; xv. 16 ; xvi. 24, [26], and RGLin 23;
cf. Ebrard, Gebet im Namen .lesu, in Herzog iv. 692 sfiq.
G od is said to do a thing iv 6v. Xp. regardful of the name
ofChri.<t, i. e. moved by the name of Christ, for Christ's
sake, διδόναι the thing asked, .In. xvi. 23TTr\VII ; ntp-
TTdv t6 TTVtvpa to ay. *In. xiv, 26. f. tv ονόματι Χρίστου,
[Α. v. for the name of CAwi] (Germ, auf Grand Namens
Christi), i. e. because one calls himself or is called by the
name of Christ: 6ν(ί&1ζ(σθαι, 1 Pet. iv. 14 (equiv. to i>s
Χριστιανοί, 16). The simple dat. τω 6v. Xp. signifies by
the power of Christ's name, pervading and prompting
souls, Mt. vii. 22 ; so also τώ ονόματι τοΰ κυρίου (i. e. of
God) λαΧιϊν, of the prophets, Jas. v. 10 RG ; τω of. σου,
by uttering thy name as a spell, Mk. ix. 38 R«i>" G (see
b. above), tit to όνομα τον Χριστοΐι συνάγ(σθιιι is used of
those who come together to deliberate concerning any
matter relating to Christ's cause, (Germ, auf den Na-
men), with the mind directed unto, having regard unto,
his name, Mt. xviii. 20. tvfKtv τοΰ όν. [Α. V. for mf
name's sakej, i. e. on account of professing my name, Mt.
xix. 29 ; also δια τΑ Sv. μου, αΰτοϋ, etc. : Sit. χ. 22 ; xxiv.
9; Mk. xiii. 13; Lk. xxi. 17; ,ln. xv. 21 ; 1 Jn. ii. 12; Rev.
ii. 3. δια τοΰ όν. τοΰ κυρ. irapoKoiKeiv τίνα, to beseech one
by employing Christ's name as a motive or incentive [cf.
λν. 381 (3.57)], 1 Co. i. 10; by embracing and avowiiiw
his name, ΰφισιν Αμαρτιών Xafidv, Acts x. 43. ύπίρ τοΰ όν.
αϋτοϋ, \.ί[. for defending,spreading, strengthening, the au-
thority of Christ, Acts v. 41 (see below) ; ix. 16 ; χ v. 26;
xxi. 1 3 ; Ilo. i. 5 ; 3 Jn. 7 ; — [but ace. to the better txts.
in Acts V. 41 ; 3 Jn. 7, τό όνομα is used absolutely, the
Name, sc. κυρίου, of the Lord .lesus ; so cod. Vat. .las. v.
14; cf. Lev. xxiv. 11, 16; Bp. Lghtft. on Ignat. ad
Eph. 3, 1 ; B. 163 (142) note; W. 594 (553). So Up.
Lghtft. in Phil. ii. 9 ; (see 1 above)], npos τό όνομα Ιησού
τοΰ Ναζ. (vavTia πμάξαι. Acts xxvi. 9. 3. In imita-
tion of the Ilebr. nnc/ (Xum. i. 2, 18, 20; iii. 40, 43;
xxvi. 53), the plur. ονόματα is used i.ij. persons reckoned
upby name: Actsi.ld; Rev.iii.4; .\i. 13. 4. Like
the I.at. nomen, i. q. the cause or reason named : iv τω ονό-
ματι τούτω, in this cause, i. e. on this account, sc. because
he suffers as a Christian, 1 Pet. iv. IG L Τ Tr WII [aL
more simply take όν. here as referring to Χριστιανοί ])re•
ceding] ; iv ονόματι, Srt (as in Syriac ? |'vi 4 o) Χριστοβ
ί'στί, in this name, i. e. for this reason, because ye are
Christ's (disciples), Mk. ix. 41.
ονομάζω ; 1 aor. ώνόμασα ; Pass., pres. ο'ΐΌμά^ομαι ; 1
aor. ώνομάσθην; (όνο /ia); fr. Ilom. down; to name [cf.
W. 615 (572)]; a. το όνομα. Ιο name i. e. to utter:
pass. Eph. i. 21 ; τοΰ κυρίου [Rec. Χρίστου], the name of
the Lord (Christ) sc. as his Lord, 2 Tim. ii. 19 (.Sept.
for Π1Π" Οψ Τ3ΙΠ, to make mention of the name if.hhn•
vah in praise, said of his worshippers. Is. xxvi. 13 ; Am-
vi. 10) ; TO όι-ομα Ίησοϋ ini τίνα. Acts xix. 13, see ini,
C. I. 1 c. p. 234" mid. b. τινά, with a proper or an
appellative name as pred. ace, to name, i. e. gire name
to, one : Lk. vi. 13 sq. ; pass, to be named, i. e. hear the
name of, 1 Co. v. 1 1 ; t <c w. gen. of the one from whom
the received name is derived, Eph. iii. 15 (Horn. II. 10,
68; Xen. mem. 4, 5, 12). c. τιι/ά or τι, to utter the
name of a person or thing: όπου ωνομάσ&η Χριστός, of
the lands into which the knowledge of Christ h,as been
carried, Ro. χ v. 20 (1 Mace. iii. 9) ; ονομάζ(σθαι of thing»
which are called by their own name because they are
present or exist (as opp. to those ivhich are unheard
of), 1 Co. v. 1 Rec. ; Eph. v. 3. [Comp. : €π-ονομάζω.^ *
fives, -ου, ό, ή, [fr. Ilom. down], Sept. for Ticn and
?1,•ιΚ, an ass : Lk. xiv. 5 Rec. ; Mt. xxi. 5 ; Jn. xii. 15 ; —
ό, Lk. xiii. 15; ή, Mt. xxi. 2, 7.•
ίντωί (fr. Sv; on advs. formed fr. ptcps. cf. Bttm. Ausf.
Spr. § 115 a. Anra. 3; Kuhner § 335 Anm. 2), adv.,
truly, in reality, in point of fact, as opp. to what is pre.
tended, fictitious, false, conjectural : Mk. xi. 32 [see
ΐχω, I. 1 f.] ; Lk. xxiii. 47 ; xxiv. 34 ; Jn. viii. 36 ; 1 Co.
xiv. 25; Gal. iii. 21 and Rec. in 2 Pet. ii. 18; ό, η, τΑ
βξο<;
449
ΟΤΓΟβ
ί>η-ω{ foil, by a noun, that which is truly etc., that tchich
is indeed, {τα ovrms άγαθα η καλά, Plat. Phaedr. p.
200 a. ; την ΰιτως και άληθω! φιλΐαν, Plat. Clit. p. 409 e. ;
οι όιηως βασι\{ΐς, Joseph, antt. 15, .'i, 5) ; as ή όντωι (Rec.
aliiivios) ζωή, 1 Tim. vi. 19; ij όντως χήρα, a widow that
is a widow indeed, not improperly called a widow (as
παμβίνο! ή λίγομίνη χήρα, i. e. a virgin that has taken
a vow of celibacy, in Igu- ad Smyrn. 13 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. in
loc] ; cf. Baur, Die sogen. Pastoralbriefe, p. 46 sqq.),
1 Tim. V. 3, 5, 16. (Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq. ;
Sept. for DJtJX, Num. xxii. 37; for px, Jer. iii. 23; for
^S. Jer. X. I'g.)*
ό|ο5, -fos (-ous), TO, (οξύί), vinegar (Aeschyl., llip-
pocr., Arstph., Xen., sqq.; for Ί"3Π, Ruth ii. 14; Num.
vi. 3, etc.) ; used in the N. T. for Lat. po.<ca, i. e. the
mi.xture of sour wine or vinegar and water Λvhich the
Roman soldiers were accustomed to drink : Mt. .xxvii.
34 KLmrg., 48; Mk. .w. 36; Lk. x.\iii. 36; Jn. sLx.
29 sq.*
o|vs, -fia, -V, [allied w. Lat. acer, acua, etc. ; cf. Curtius
§ 2j ; 1. sharp (fr. Horn, down) : ρομφαία, Βμίπα-
νον, Rev. ΐ. 16; ii. 12; xiv. 14, 17 sq. ; xix. 15, (Is. v.
28 ; Ps. Ivi. (Ivii.) 5). 2. sicifl, f/uick, (so fr. Hdt.
5, 9 down ; cf. ωκϋί fleet) : Ro. iii. 15 (Am. ii. 15 ; Prov.
xxii. 29).-
όττή, -ής. ή, (perh. fr. οψ [root δπ (see όράω) ; cf. Car-
tins § 627]), prop, thirnif/h n-hirh one can see (Pollux [2,
53 p. 179] οπή, δι rjs ίστιν ISflv, cf. Germ. Luke, Loch
[?]), an opening, aperture, (used of a wiiuhi/r. Cant. v.
4) : of fissures in the earth, Jas. iii. 11 (Ex. xxxiii. 22) ;
of caves in rocks or mountains, Ileb. xi. 38 [here R. Λ^.
holes} ; Obad. 3. (Of various other kinds of holes and
openings, in Arstph., Aristot., al.) *
6m,<r9(V, (see οπίσω), adv. of place, yrom behind, on the
back, behind, after: Mt. ix. 20; Mk. v. 27; Lk. viii. 44;
Rev. iv. 6; v. 1 (on which see γράφω, 3). As a prepo-
sition it is joined with the gen. (like ίμπροσθ^ν, ΐξωθ(ν,
etc. [W. § 54, 6 ; B. § 146, 1]) : Mt. xv. 23 ; Lk. xxiii.
26; [Rev. i. 10 WH rarg.]. (From Ilom. down; Sept.
for '"^ΠΝ, sometimes for ijnx.) *
όπΐσ-ω, ([perh.] fr. ή Snis ; and this fr. «τω, ίπομαι, to
follow [but cf. Vanicek p. 530]), adv. of place and time,
fr. Horn, down; Sept. for inS. ΙΙΠΚ and esp. for •ΙΠΝ ;
(at the) back, behind, afler; 1. adverbially of
place: foravai, Lk. vii. 38; 4πιστρί•^αι οπίσω, back,
Mt. xxiv. 18 (ΰποστρίφα,ν οπίσω, Joseph, antt. 6, I, 3);
τα οπίσω, the things that are behind, Phil. iii. 13 (14);
its τα οπίσω απίρχΐσθαι, to go backward, Vulg. abire re-
trorsum, Jn. xviii. 6 ; to return home, of those who grow
recreant to Christ's teaching and cease to follow him,
Jn. vi. 06 ; στρίφισθαι, to turn one's self back, Jn. xx.
14; ΐπιστρίφα,ν, to return back to places left, Mk. xiii.
16 ; Lk. .wii. 31 ; νποστρίψαι (Ις τα οπίσω, trop., of those
who return to the manner of thinking and living already
abandoned, 2 Pet. ii. 21 Lchm. ; ^XcVfiv (Vulg. [axpicere
or] respicere retro [A. V. to look back]), Lk. ix. 62. 2.
By a usage unknown to Grk. auth., as a prep, with the
gen. [λν. § 54, 6; Β. § 146, 1]; a. of place: Rev.
i. 10 [Wllmrg. όπισθινί; xii. 15, (Num. xxv. 8; Cant.
ii. 9) ; in phrases resembhng the Ilebr. [cf. W. 30; B.
u. s. and 172 (150)] : οπίσω tivos ίρχίσθαι to follow any
one as a guide, to be his disciple or follower. Jit. xvi.
24 ; Lk. ix. 23 ; ilk. viii. 34 R L Tr mrg. WH; [cf. Lk.
xiv. 27]; also άκο\ονθ(Ίν. Mk. viii. 34 GTTrtxt. ; Mt.
X. 38, (see άκολουθ^ω, 2 lin.) ; ποραίκσθαι, to join one's
self to one as an attendant and follower, Lk. xxi. 8 (Sir.
xlvi. 10); to seek something one lusts after, 2 Pet. ii.
10 [cf. W. 594 (55.3); B. 184 (160)]; απέρχομαι οπίσω
Tivos, to go off in order to follow one, to join one's party,
Mk. i. 20 ; Jn. xii. 1 9 ; to run after a thing which one
lusts for [cf. B. u. s.], iVepas σαρκός, Jude 7 ; SfCri οπίσω
μου (see Sfi>rf, 1), Mt. iv. 19; Mk. i. 1 7 ; άποστίλλαν
Τίνα οπίσω τινός, Lk. .\ix. 14 ; άφιστάναι, άποσπάν Ttva
οπίσω αίτον, to draw one away to (join) his Jiarty, Act»
V. 37; XX. 30; (κτρίπισθαι, to turn out of the right path,
turn aside from rectitude, 1 Tim. v. 15 ; by a pregnant
construction, after θαύμαζαν, to wonder after i. e. to be
drawn away by admiration to follow one [B. 185 (160
sq.)]. Rev. xiii. 3 (πάς ό λαϊις ίξίστη οπίσω αϋτον, 1 S.
.xiii. 7) ; imayt οπίσω μου, [Α. V. get thee behind me], out
of my sight: Lk. iv. 8 RLbr. ; Mt. iv. 10 [GLbr.];
xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. b. of time, after: ίρχ(σθαι
οπίσω τινός, to make his public a[)pearance after (sub-
sequently to) one, Mt. iii. 11; Mk. i. 7; Jn. i. 15, 27,
30, (οπίσω τοϋ σαββάτου, Neh. xiii. 19).*
όιτλίζω: [I aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. όπΧίσασθί];
(δπλον); fr. Hom. down; to arm, furni-h with arms;
univ. to provide ; mid. ri, to furnish one's self with a thing
(as with arms) ; metaph. την αυτήν ΐννοιαν άπ\ίσασθ(,
[Α. V. arm yourselves with i. e.] take on the same mind,
1 Pet. iv. 1 (θράσος. Soph. Electr. 995). [Co.MP. : καθ-
οπ\ίζω.~\ *
διτλον [allied to ϊπω, Lat. sequor, socius, etc. ; Curtius
§ 621], -ου, TO, as in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down, any tool
or implement for preparing a thing, (like the Lat. anna) ;
hence 1. plur. arm.i used in Avarfare, weapons:
Jn. xviii. 3 ; 2 Co. x. 4 ; metaph. r^s δικαιοσύνης, which
ή δικ. furnishes, 2 Co. vi. 7 ; τοΰ φωτός, adapted to the
light, such as light demands, Ro. xiii. 1 2 [here L mrg.
epya}. 2. an instrument : όπλα αδικίας, for commit-
ting unrighteousness, opp. to όπλα δικαιοσύνης, for prac-
tising righteousness, Ro. vi. 13.*
όποΐο9, -οία, -οΐοΐ', (ποίος w. the rel. ό), [fr. Hom. down],
of what sort or quality, what manner of: 1 Co. iii. 13:
Gal. ii. 6 ; 1 Th. i. 9 ; Jas. i. 24 ; preceded by τοιούτος.
[such as']. Acts xxvi. 29.*
oirOTt, (πότε w. the rel. ό), [fr. Horn, down], when [cf.
B. § 139, 34 ; W. § 41 b. 3] : Lk. vi. 3 R G Τ (where L
Tr WH 5τ€).•
οίΓου, (from iroC and the reL 6), [from Hom. down],
where; 1. adv. of place, a. in which place,
where; a. in relative sentences with the Indicar
tive it is used to refer to a preceding noun of place;
as, c'iri της γης, οπού etc. Mt. vi. 19 ; add, ib. 20 ; xiii. 5 :
xxviii. 6; Mk. vi. 55; ix. 44, 46, [which verses TAVII
om. Tr br.J, 48 ; Lk. xii. 33 ; Jn. i. 28 ; iv. 20, 46 : vi. 23 ;
οπτανω
450
'6
7Γα>ί
νϋ. 42: χ. 40; λϊ. ;iO; χϋ. 1 ; xviii. 1, 20; xix. IS, 20, 41 ;
XX. 12; Acts xvii. 1 ; Kev. xi. 8; xx. 10. it refers to
€K(l or (κ(1σ( to be ineutallj• supplied in what precedes
or follows ; Mt. xxv. 24, 2ti ; Alk. ii. 4 ; iv. 15 ; v. 40 ;
xiii. 14 ; Jn. iii. 8; vi. 62; vii. 34 ; xi. 32; xiv. 3 ; xvii.
24; XX. 19; Ro. .w. 20; Heb. ix. IG; .\. 18; Rev. ii. 13.
it refers to ίκΰ expressed in what follows: Mt. vi. 21 ;
Lk. xii. 84; xvii. 37; Jn. xii. 2(j ; Jas. iii. 16. in imit;ir
lion of the Ilebr. Οϋί-ισΚ (Gen. xiii. 3; Eccl. ix. 10,
etc.) : ότΓου i'xfi, Kev. xii. (> [G Τ Tr AVH], 14, (see «'«ι,
a.) ; όπου . . . «V αυτών, Rev. .xvii. 9. όττου also refers
to men, so that it is equiv. to tvilh (ainoiiy) whom, in
whose house : Mt. xxvi. 57 ; [add, Rev. ii. 13; cf . \V. § ")4,
7 fin.]; in which slale (viz. of the renewed man). Col. iii.
11. it is loosely connected with the thought to which
it refers, so that it is equiv. to wherein [A. V. ivhercas'],
2 Pet. ii. 11 (in the same sense in indir. quest., Xen.
mem. 3, 5, 1). όπου άν, wherever, — with impf. indie,
(see άν, II. 1), Mk. vi. 56 [Tdf. eaf] ; with aor. sub-
junc. (I.at. fut. pf.), Mk. i.\. 18 (where LTTrWII ίττου
eai>) ; ^Ik. xiv. 9 [here too Τ WII οπ. fav] ; also ότΓου f'av
(see eaf, II.), Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. vi. 10; xiv. 14", (in
both which last pass. L Tr όττου Sv) ; with subj. pres.
Mt. xxiv. 28. β. in indir. (juestions [yet cf. W. § 57,
2 fin.], with subjunc. aor.: Mk. xiv. 14""; Lk. xxii.
11. b. joined to verbs signifying motion into a
place instead of οττοι, imo which place, whilher, (see
cKfl, b.) : foil, by the indie, Jn. viii. 21 sq. ; xiii. 33, 36 ;
.xiv. 4 ; xxi. 18 ; [Jas. iii. 4 Τ Tr WH (see below)] ; όττου
Sv, where(ichither)soever, w. indie, pres.. Rev. xiv. 4 L
Tr WII [cf. below], cf. B. § 139, 30; with subjunc. pres.,
Lk. ix. 57 R G Τ WII [al. όπ. ϊάν, see below] ; Jas. iii. 4
[RGL]; Rev. xiv. 4 RGT (see above); όττου iav, w.
subjunc. pres., Mt. viii. 19, and L Tr in Lk. ix. 57. 2.
It gets tlie force of a conditional particle if {in case
thai, insofar as, [A. V. whereas (cf. 2 Pet. ii. 1 1 above)]) :
1 Co. iii. 3 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 43, 1, and often in Grk.
writ. ; cf. (!rimm on 4 Mace. ii. 14 ; Meyer on 1 Co. iii.
3; [Muller on B.arn. ep. 16, 6]).*
όΐΓτάνω (ΟΠΤΩ) : to look al, behold; mid. pres. ptcp.
oTTTavofif coi ; to allow one's self to lie seen, to appear: rtvl.
Acts i. 3. (1 K. viii. 8 ; Tob. .xii. 19 ; [Graec. Ven. Ex.
xxxiv. 24].) "
oirrao-Co, -as, ή, (όιττάζω) ; 1. the act of exhibiting
one's self to view : οπτασίαι κυρίου, 2 Co. xii. 1 [Λ. V.
vLiions; cf. Meyer ad loc] (tV ημιμαΐ! οπτασίας μου. Add.
to Esth. iv. 1. 44 (13) ; [cf. .Mai. iii. 2] ; ηλιο! iv οπτασία,
coming into view, Sir. xliii. 2). 2. a sii/hl, a vision,
an appearance preuented to one whether asleep or
awake : ovpavios όπτ. Acts x.xvi. 1 9 ; ίωρακίναί οπτασίαν,
Lk. i. 22 ; Λν. gen. of appos. ayyi\u>v, Lk. xxiv. 23. A
later form for 0>|λ« [cf. W. 24], Anthol. 6, 210, 6; for
nsi•?, Dan. [Theodot.] Lx. 23 ; x. 1, 7 sq.*
oiTTOs, -ή, -όν, (ότττα'ω [to roast, cook]), cooked, broiled:
Lk. xxiv. 42. (Ex. xii. 8, 9 ; in class. Grk. f r. Horn,
down.) *
6ima, see οράύα.
όπώρα, -as, ί), (derived by some fr. oirir [cf. ottiVo)],
ϊπομαι, and &pa', hence, the time that follows the άρα
[Curtius § 522]; by others fr. oiros [cf. our sap] juice,
and &pa, i. e. the time of juicy fruits, the time when
fruits become ripe), fr. Ilom. down ; 1. the season
which succeeds θιμο!, from the risiny of Sirius to that of
Arclurus, i. e. late summer, early autumn, our dog-days
(the year being divided into seven seasons as follows;
(αμ, θίροί, όπώρα, φθινόπωρον, σπομητο!, χαμών, φυτα-
λιά). 2. ripe fruits (of trees) : σοΰ της ϊπιθυμία!
τήι ψυχή! for 2)1/ ή >^τυχή σου ΐπιθυμίΐ. Rev. xviii. 14.
(Jer. xlvii. (xl.) 10, and often in Grk. writ.)*
oirus, (fr. πώς and the relat. o), with the indicative, a
relat. adverb but, like the Lat. uf, assuming also the
nature of a conjunction [cf. W. 449 (418 S(j.)]. I.
As an Adverb; as, in tvhat manner, how; once so in
the N. T. in an indir. question, with the indie. : οΐικ
ΐγνως, όπως κτλ. Lk. xxiv. 20, where cf. Bornemann,
Scholia etc. II. A Conjunction, Lat. ul, an-
swering to the Germ, dass, that; in class. Grk. with the
optat., and subjunc, and fut. indie. ; cf. esp. Klotz ad
Devar. ii. 2 p. 681 Sijq. But the distinction observed
between these constructions by the more elegant Grk.
writ, is quite neglected in the N. T., and if we except
Mt. xxvi. 59 LTTr (όττωί θανατώσουσιν), [1 Co. i. 29
Ree.•'^], only the subjunctive follows this particle (for
in Mk. V. i?3, for όπως . . . ζησ^ται, L txt. Τ Tr WII have
correctly restored Ίνα . . . ζησ;/) ; cf. W. 289 (271) ; B.
233 (201) Sep ; [214 (185)]. 1. It denotes the pur-
pose or end, in order that; icilh the design or to the
end that; that; a. without όι/, — after the present,
Mt. vi. 2, 16; Philem. 6; Ileb. ix. 15; after ΐστί to be
supplied, 1 Pet. ii. 9; after the perfect, Acts i.\. 17;
Heb. ii. 9 ; όττωϊ μή, Lk. xvi. 26 ; after the imper-
fect, Mt. xxvi. 59 [R G (see above)]; Acts i.\. 24;
after the aorist. Acts ix. 2, 12; xxv. 26; Ro. ix. 17;
Gal. i. 4 ; όττωί μή. Acts xx. 16; 1 Co. i. 29 ; after the
pluperfect, Jn. xi. 57 ; after tlie f utu re, Mt. xxiii.
35; and Rec. in Acts x.\iv. 26; after an aor. sub-
junc. by which something is asked for, Mk. v. 23 Rec.;
after imperatives, ^It. ii. 8; v. 16,45; vi. 4; Acts
xxiii. 15, 23; 2 Co. viii. 11; όπως μή, Mt. vi. 18; after
clauses with ίνα and the aor. subjunc, Lk. .xvi. 28 ; 2 Co.
viii. 14; 2 Th. i. 12. Noteworthy is the phrase όπως
πληρωθί], i. e. that ace. to God's purpose it might be
brought to jians or might he proved bij the event, of O. T.
prophecies and types (see Iva, II. 3 fin.): Mt. ii. 23;
viii. 17; xii. 1 7 (where L Τ Tr WII Iva) ; xiii. 85. b.
όττωί άν, that, if it he possible, Mt. vi. 5 R G; that, if what
I have Just .mid shall come to pass, Lk. ii. 35 ; Acts iii.
20(19) [R. V. i/ia/.TO]; XV. 17; Ro. iii. 4 [B. 234 (201)] ;
exx. fr. the Sept. are given in W. § 42, 6. 2. As
in the Grk. writ, also (cf. W. 338 (317); [B. § 139, 41]),
όπως with the subjunctive is used after verbs of pray-
ing, entreating, asking, exhorting, to denote
what one wishes to be done : Mt. viii. 34 [here L Γιό] ;
i.\. 38; Lk. vii. 3; x. 2; xi. 37; Acts viii. 15, 24; ix. 2;
xxiii. 20; xxv. 3; Jas. v. 16; after a verb of delibei*
ating: Mt. xii. 14; xxii. 15; Mk. iii. 6, (fr. which eix^
όραμα
451
οραω
it is easy to see how tne use noted in Π. arises from
the original adverbial force of the particle ; for σνμβούλ.
(XaSov, οττωΓ άπολίσοίσίν αυτόν, they took counsel to de-
stroy him is eijuiv. to how they might destroy him, and
also to to this end that they might destroy him ; cf. Kiihner
§ 552 Anm. 3, ii. p. S92).*
ορα[ΐα, -Tos, τό, {οράω), that which is seen, a sight, spec-
tacle : Acts vii. 31 ; Mt. xvii. 9 ; a sight divinely granted
in an ecstasy or in sleep, a vision, Acts x. 17, 19; 8i' ορά-
ματος. Acts xviii. 9 ; iu όράματι. Acts ix. 10, 12 [HG] ;
X. 3 ; όραμα βλeπfιu, Acts xii. 9 ; Ideiv, Acts xi. 5 ; xvi.
10. (Xen., Aristot., Plut., Ael. v. h. 2, 3 [al. «'κών] ;
Sept. several times for ΠΚ'ΐΟ, ]i;n, Chald. Xitn etc.; see
οτΓτασί'α.) *
opcuris. -(ως, ή, (όράω) ; 1. the act of seeing : ομ-
μάτων χρήσις (Is ορασιν. Sap. .\v. 15; the sense of sight,
Aristot. de anima 3, 2; Diod. 1, 59; Plut. mor. p. 440 sq. ;
plur. the eyes, (κκάπτιιν τάς όρύαιις, Diod. 2, 6. 2.
appearance, visible form : Rev. iv. 3 (Num. xxiv. 4 ; Ezek.
i. 5, 26, 28 ; Sir. xli. 20, etc.). 3. a vision, i. e. an
appearance divinely granted in an ecstasy: Rev. ix. 17;
όράσας οψονται, Acts ii. 17 fr. Joel ii. 28. (Sept. chiefly
fur nS"'•? and ;i;n.) '
oparos, -η, -όν. (όράω), visihle, open to view. neut. plur.
substaatively, Col. i. 16. (Xen., Plat., Theocr., Philo;
Sept.)•
όράω, -ω \ impf. 3 pers. plur. ίώρων (Jn. vi. 2, where
L Tr WH (θ(ώρονν) ; pf. έώρακα and (T Wll in Col. ii. 1,
18; [1 Co. ix. 1]; Tdf. ed. 7 also in .In. ix. 37 ; xv. 24; xx.
25; 1 Jn. iii. 6 ; iv. 20; 3 Jn. 11) ίόρακα (on which form
cf. {WH. App. p. 161 ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; Steph. The-
saur. s. V. 2139 d.] ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 325; [B. 64
(56) ; Veitch s. v.]), [2 pers. sing. -κ(ς (Jn. viii. 57 Tr
mrg.) see κοττιάω, init.], 3 pers. plur. (ωράκασιν (and -καν
in C(j1. ii. 1 L Tr λΥΗ ; Lk. Lx. 3ii Τ Tr WH ; see γίνο-
μαι, init.) : plupf. 3 pers. sing, «ωριίκίΐ (Acts vii. 44) ; fut.
όψομαι (fr. ΟΠΤΩ), 2 pers. sing, όψη (cf. Bilm. Ausf.
Spr. i. p. 347 sq. ; Kiihner § 21 1, 3, i. p. 530), Mt. xxvii.
4 ; Jn. i. 50 (51) ; xi. 40 ; but L Τ Tr WH [G also in Jn.
i. 50 (51)] have restored όψη (cf. W. § 13, 2; B. 42 sq.
(37)), 2 pers. plur. όψ(σθ€, Jn. i. 39 (40) Τ Tr WH, etc.;
Pass., 1 aor. ωφθην, fut. όφθησομαι ; 1 aor. mid. subjunc.
2 pers. plur. όψησθί (Lk. xiii. 2s [R G L WH txt. Tr
mrg.]) fr. a Byzant. form ώψάμην (see Lob. ad Phryn. p.
734, cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 258 scj. ; [\'eitch s. v.]) ; Sept.
for πΧ"; and Π!Π ; [fr. Horn, down] ; το see, i. e. 1.
to see with the eyes : τίνα όράν, ίωρακίναι, Lk. .\vi. 23 ; Jn.
viii. 57 ; xiv. 7, 9 ; xx. 18, 25, 29 ; 1 Co. ix. 1, etc. ; fut.
οψομαι, Mt. xxviii. 7, 10 ; Mk. xvi. 7 ; Rev. i. 7, etc. ; τον
θ(όν, 1 Jn. iv. 20 ; άόρατον ώς όρων, Heb. xi. 27 ; with a
ptcp. added as a predicate [B. 301 (258) ; W. § 45, 4],
Mt. xxiv. 30 ; ^Ik. xiii. 26 ; xiv. 62 ; Lk. xxi. 27 ; Jn. i.
51 (52) ; ίωρακίναι or όψ(σθαι τό πρόσωπον τίνος. Col. ii.
1 ; Acts XX. 25 ; ο (which divine majesty, i. e. τοΐι Btluv
λογού) Ιωράκαμΐν τοις οφθαλμοΊς ημών (on this addition cf.
W. 607 (564) ; [B. 3'J>i (341)]), 1 Jn. i. 1 ; όψ^σθαί τίνα
'. e. come to see, visit, one, Heb. xiii. 23 ; ίωρακίναι Christ,
L e. to have seen him exhibiting proofs of his divinity
and Messiahship, Jn. vi. 36 ; ix. 37 ; xv. 24 ; όράν and
όψ(σθαί with an ace. of the thing, Lk. xxiii. 49 ; Jn. i. 50
(51) ; iv. 45 ; vi. 2 [L Tr WH (θΐώραυν'] ; xix. 35 ; Acts
ii. 1 7 ; vii. 44 ; Rev. xviii. 18 [Rec], etc. ; [e'px• κ. όψ(σθ(
(sc. ποΟ μίνω), Jn. i. 40 (39) Τ Tr WH ; cf. B. ::!90 (250)] ;
οψτ] την δήξαν του θεον, the glory of God displayed in a
miracle, Jn. xi. 40. metaph. 5ψ(σθαι τόι/ deav, τον κύριον,
to be admitted into intimate and blessed fellowship with
God in his future kingdom, Mt. v. 8; Heb. xii. 14 ; also
TO πρόσωπον τοΰ θ(οϋ. Rev. .\xii. 4 — (a fig. borrowed
from those privileged to see and associate with kings ;
see βλίπω, 1 b. β.) ; οίκ fiSos Beov 4ωράκατ(, trop. i. q. his
divine majesty as he discloses it in the Scriptures ye
have not recognized, Jn. v. 37 ; cf. ΛleyeΓ ad loc. 2.
to see icilh the m i η d, to perceive, know : absol. Ro. .xv. 21 ;
τινά foil, by a ptcp. in the ace. [B. § 144, 15 b. ; W. § 45, 4],
Acts viii. 23 ; τί. Col. ii. 18 ; with a ptcp. added, Heb. ii.
8; foil, by on, Jas. ii. 24 ; to look at or upon, observe, give
attention to : (ϊς τίνα, Jn. xix. 37 (Soph. El. 925 ; Xen. Cyr.
4, 1, 20 ; iis Ti, Solon in Diog. Laert. 1, 52) ; ίωρακίναι
παρά τω πατρί, to have learned from [see παρά, Π. b.] the
father (a metaphorical expression borrowed fr. sons, who
learn what they see their fathers doing^, Jn. viii. 38
(twice in Rec. ; once in L Τ Tr WH) ; Christ is said to
deliver to men a ίώμακ^ν, the things which he has seen,
i. e. which he learned in his heavenly state with God be-
fore the incarnation, i. e. things divine, the counsels of
God, Jn. iii. 11, 32 ; ίωρακίναι θ(άν, to know God's will,
3 Jn. 11 ; from the intercourse and influence of Christ
to have come to see (know) God's majesty, saving pur-
poses, and will [cf. W. 273 (257)], Jn. xiv. 7, 9 ; in an
emphatic sense, of Christ, who has an immediate and
perfect knowledge of God without being taught by an-
other, Jn. i. 18 ; ^-i. 46 ; όψισθαι θ(όν καθώς tcrrii', of the
knowledge of God that may be looked for in his future
kingdom, 1 Jn. iii. 2 ; όψισθαι Christ, is used in refer-
ence to the apostles, about to perceive his invisible pres-
ence among them by his influence upon their souls
through the Holy Spirit, Jn. xvi. 16 sq. 19; Christ is
said όψ(σθαι the apostles, i. e. will have knowledge of
them, ibid. 22. 3. to see i. e. to become acquainted
ivilh by experience, to experience : ζωήν, i. q. to become a
partaker of, Jn. iii. 36 ; ημίραν, (cf. Germ, erleben ; see
€Ϊδω, I. 5), Lk. xvii. 22 (Soph. O. R. 831). 4. to see
to, look to; i. e. a. i. q. to lake heed, beware, [see esp.
B. § 139, 49; cf. W. 503 (469)] : Spa μή, with aor. sub-
junc, see that . . . not, take heed lest, Mt. viii. 4 ; xviii. 10;
Mk. i. 44; 1 Th. v. 15; supply roOro ποίησης in Rev. xix.
10 ; xxii. 9, [W. 601 (558) ; B. 395 (338)], (Xen. Cyr. 3,
1, 27, where see Poppo; Soph. Philoct. 30, 519; El.
1003) ; foil, by an impv., Mt. ix. 30 ; xxiv. 6 ; όράτΐ και
προσίχ€Τ€ από, Mt. .\vi. 6 ; όρατΐ, β\ίπ€Τ( από, Mk. viii.
15 : όράτ(. κα\ φυ\άσσίσθ( από, Lk. .\ϋ. 15 ; όρο, τι μί\•
Xf if ποκ'ιν. i. q. weigh well. Acts xxii. 26 Rec. {opa τί πο>(ί;,
Soph. Philoct. 589). b. i. q. to care /or, pay heed to:
σν όψη [R G όψίΐ (see above)], see thou to it, that will
be thy concern, [cf. W. § 40, 6], Mt. xxvii. 4; plur., 24 ;
Acts xviii. 15, (Epict. diss. 2, 5, 30; 4, 6, 11 sq. ; [An•
foyr/
452
ορθοτΓοΒέω
tonin. η, 25 (and Gataker ad loc.)]). 5. Pass. 1
*i)r. ώφ&ην, I teas seen, showed ini/self, appeared [cf. B. 52
(40)] : Lk. ix. 31 ; Λ¥ΐΐ1ι dat. of pers. (cf. B. u. s., [also
§134,2; cf. W. §31, 10]): of angels, Lk. i. 11 ; xxii. 43
[L• br. WIl reject the pass.] ; Acts vii. 30, 35, (Ex. iii.
2); of (iod. Acts vii. 2 (Gen. xii. 7; xvii. 1); of the
dead, Mt. xvii. 3 : Mk. ix. 4, cf. I.k. ix. 31 ; of Jesus after
his resurrection, Lk. xxiv. 34 ; Acts ix. 17; xiii. 31 ; xxvi.
16 ; 1 Co. XV. 5-8: 1 Tim. iii. 16 ; of Jesus hereafter to
return, Ileb. ix. 28 ; of visions during sleep or ecstasy,
Acts xvi. 9; Rev. xi. 19; xii. 1, 3; in the sense of com-
ini/ iifiDit unexpecledl//. Acts ii. 3; vii. 26. fut. pass. i>ii
όφθίισομαϊ σοι, on account of whicli I will appear unto
tlice, .Acts xxvi. 16 ; on this pass, see W. § 39, 3 N. 1 ,
cf. B. 287 (247). [ComR: άφ-. καθ-, π(>ο-ηράω.]
|SvN. iQDLV. β\ίττίΐι>, both iltMiote tlic physical act: 6p.
in ijciieral. βλ. the siuffle look; 6p frivos prumineiiue to the
discerning mind, βλ. to the partii'ular uidoiI or point. When
the physical! side recedes. 6p. denotes perception in general
(as resulting principally from vision), the prominence iu the
word of the mental element being indicated liv the constr. of
the ace. w. inf. (in contrast witli that of the ptcp. required
w. βλίνΕΐΐ"), anil liy the absol. Spis; βκίν. on the other hand,
when its physical side recedes, gets a purely outward sense,
took (i. e. open, incline) towards, Lat. spectare, vergere.
Schmidt ch. xi. Cf. θ(αρίω, σκοττίω, cfSiv, I. fin.]
οργή, -ήϊ, ή, (fr. 6pyau> to teem, denoting an internal
motion, csp. that of plants and fruits swelling with juice
[fortius § 152]; cf. ijat. turgere alicui for irasci alirui
in I'laut. Cas. 2, 5, 17; Most. 3, 2, 10; cf. Germ, artf,
Aergcr), in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down llie natural dis-
poskion, temper, character; movement or agitation of snul,
imptdse, desire, ang violent emotion, but esp. (and chiclly
in Attic) anger. In bibl. Grk. anger, wrath, indigna-
tion, (on the distinction between it and θυμός, see θυμός,
1) : Eph. iv. 31 ; Col. iii. 8 ; Jas. i. 1 i) sij. ; per οργής, in-
dignant, [A. V. with anger^, Mk. iii. 5 ; χωρ\ς οργής, 1
Tim. ii. 8 ; anger exhibited in punishing, hence used for
the punishment itself (Deni. or. in Mid. §43): of the
punishments inflicted by magistrates, Ro. xiii. 4 ; δια τήν
όργήν, i. e. because disobedience is visited with puni^ll-
ment, ib. 5. The οργή attributed to God in the X. T. is
that in God whicli stands opposed to man's disobedience,
obduracy (esp. in resisting the gospel) and sin, and man-
ifests itself in punishing the same : Jn. iii. 36 ; Ro. i. 18 ;
iv. 15; i.x. 22'; Heb.iii.ll; iv. 3 ; Rev. .\iv. 10 ; xvi.19;
xix. 15; absol. ή οργή, Ro. xii. 19 [cf. W. 594 (553)];
σκ^ϋη οργής, vessels into which wrath will be poured (at
the last day), explained by the addition κατηρτισμίνα Λς
άπώλ€<αι>, Ro. ix. 22'' ; ή μί\\ουσα οργή, which at the
last day will be exhibited in penalties, Mt. iii. 7 ; I.k.
iii. 7, [al. understand in these two pass, the (national)
judgments im med lately impe nd ing to be referred
to — at least primarily] ; also ή οργή ή ίρχομίνη, 1 Th.
i. 10; ήμϊρα οργής, the day on which the wrath of God
will be made manifest in the punishment of the wicked
[cf. W. § 30, 2 a.], Ro. ii. 5 ; and ή ήμϊρα ή μΐγάλη της
οργής αύτοΰ (Rev. vi. 17; see ήμίρα, 3 ad fin.); ΐρχ^ται
9 °pyh '■"" ^'"^ '"^ Tiya, the wrath of God Cometh upon
one in the infliction of penalty [cf. W. § 40, 2 a.], Eph.
V. 6 ; Col. iii. 6 [T Tr W'll ora. L br. «W etc.]; ίφθασι
[-Kfv L txt. \VH mrg.] tV αυτούς ή οργή, 1 Th. ii. 16;
so ή οργή passes over into the notion of retribution and
punishment, Lk. xxi. 23; Ro. [ii. 8]; iii. 5; v. 9 ; Rev.
xi. 18; T€Kt>a οργής, men exposed to divine punishment,
Eph. ii. 3 ; fis όργήν, unto wrath, i. e. to undergo pun-
ishment in misery, 1 Th. v. 9. οργή is attributed to
Christ also when he comes as Messianic judge. Rev. vi.
16. (Sept. for Π")3;*, wrath, outburst of anger, D>'I, ΠΌΠ
;ΐ-ιπ, ηνρ, etc. ; but chiefly for ηκ.) Cf. Ferd. Weber,
Vom Zorne (Jottes. Eriang. 1862; lUtscld, Die christL
Lehre v. d. Rechtfertigung u. Versohnung, ii. p. 1 18 sipp*
όρ-γίζω : Pass., jires. οργίζομαι ; 1 aor. ωργίσθην; {οργή) ;
fr. Sojjh., Eur., and Ί hue. down ; to procoke, arouse to
anger ; pass, to be provoked to anger, be angrtf, be wroth,
(.Sept. for Π7Π, ηγρ, also for ηχ ΓΤΐΠ etc.) : absol., Mt.
xviii. 34; x.xii. 7; Lk. xiv. 21 ; xv. 28; Eph. iv. 26 [B.
290 (250); cf. W. §§ 43, 2; 55, 7]; Rev. xi. 18; rwi,
Mt. v. 22; iVi Tivi. Rev. xii. 17 [Lom. (Vi] as in 1 K. xi.
9 ; [Andoc. 5, 10] ; Isocr. p. 230 c. ; [cf. W. 232 (218)].
[CoMP. : ■παρ-οργίζω.'] '
όργίλοε, -η, -ov, [οργή), prone to anger, irascible, [A. V.
soon angry] : Tit. i. 7. (Prov. xxii. 24; xxLx. 22; Xen.
de re equ. 9, 7; Plat. [e. g. de rep. 411 b.]; Aristot. [e.g.
eth. Nic. 2, 7, 10]; al.) •
όργυιά, -ας, ή, {ορίγω to Stretch out), the distance
across the breast from the tip of one middle finger to
the tip of the other when the arms are outstretched;
five or six feet, a fathom: Acta xxvii. 28. (Horn., Udt.,
Xen., al.) •
iptyo) : (cf. Lat. rego. Germ, recken, strecken, reichen,
[Eng. reach; Curtius § 153]); fr. Ilom. down; to stretch
forth, as χ^Ιρα, Ilom. II. 15, 371, etc. ; pres. mid. [cf. W.
p. 252 (237) note], to stretch one's self out in order to
touch or to grasp something, to reach after or desire some-
thing: with a gen. of the thing, 1 Tim. iii. 1 ; Ileb. xi.
16; φϊΚαργνρίας, to give one's self up to the love of
money (not (juite accurately since φίΚαργ. is itself the
οριξις; [cf. Ellicott ad loc.]), 1 Tim. vi. 10.•
opeivos, -ή, -όν, (όρος), mountainous, hilly; ή όρ(ΐνή [\VH
όρινή, see I, ί] sc. χώρα [cf. W. 591 (550)] (which is
added in Hdt. 1, 110; Xen. CjT. 1, 3, 3), the mountain-
district, hill-country : Lk. i. 39, 65, (Aristot. h. a. 5, 28,
4; Sept. for 1Π, Gen. xiv. 10; Deut. xi. 11; Josh. ii.
16, etc.).*
opc^is, -ίωί, ή, (ορίγομαι, q. v.), desire, longing, craving,
for; eager desire, lust, appetite: of lust, Ro. i. 27. It is
used both in a good and a bad sense, as well of natural
and lawful and even of proper cravings (of the appetite
for food. Sap. xvi. 2 sq. ; Pint. mor. p. 635 c. ; al. ; fVi-
στήμης. Plat, de fin. p. 414 b.), as also of corrupt and
unlawful desires, Sir. xviii. 30; xxiii. 6; άΚογοι and λο-
γιστικοΊ 6ρίξ(ΐς are contrasted in Aristot. rhet. 1, 10, 7.
[Cf. Trench § Ixxxvii.] *
<>ρθο-ΐΓο8ίω, -ώ; (ορθόιηνς with straight feet, going
straight ; and this fr. ορθός and iroir) ; to walk in a
ilraight course; metaph. to act uprightly. Gal. ii. 14 [cf.
ίρθΟ<!
453
ορμημα
epos, I. 3 f.]. Not found elsewhere; [cf. AV. 26; 102
opSos, -17, -όν, (0P£2, opTO/it [to stir up, set in motion ;
ace. to al. fr. r. to lilt up; cf. Fick iii. p. 775 ; Vanicek
p. 928; Ciirtius p. 348]), straight, erect; 1. e. a.
upright: άνάστηθι. Acts .\iv. 10; so with στήναί in 1 Esdr.
i.\. 46, and in Grk. writ., esp. IIoui. b. opp. to
σκοΚίός, straight i. e. not crooked : τροχιαί, Ileb. xii. 13
(for My•^, Prov. xii. 15 etc. ; [Find., Tlieogn., al.]).*
όρθοτομιεω, -ώ ; (ορθοτόμοί cutting straight, and this fr.
ορθύι and τίμνω) ; 1• to cut straight : ras ό&οΰς, to
cut straight ways, i. e. to proceed by straight paths,
hold a straight course, equiv. to to do right (for '\ψ'),
Prov. iii. 6 ; xi. 5, {viam secure, Verg. Aen. t!, 899). 2.
dropping the idea of cutting, to make straight and smooth ;
Vulg. recte tracto, to handle aright : τόι/ λόγοι» r^s άλι;-
edas, i. e. to teach the truth correctly and directly,
2 Tim. ii. 15; τον αΚηθή Xoyoi», Eustath. opuscc. p. 115,
41. (Not found elsewhere [e.\c. in eccles. writ. (W. 26) ;
e. g. constt. apost. 7, 31 Iv τ. τοϋ κυρίου δόγ/ιασίν; cf.
Suicer ii. 508 sq.]. Cf. καινοτομίω, to cut new veins in
mining; dropping the notion of cutting, to make some-
thing new, introduce new things, make innovations or
changes, etc.) *
όρθρ(ζω: 3 pers. sing, inipf. ωρθριζ(ν; (SpSpos); not
found in prof. auth. ([cf. W. 26; 33; 91 (87)]; Moeris
[p. 272 ed. Pierson] όρθρίΰ€ΐ αττ«κώί, ορθρίζ^ι ίΚΚηνικω!) ;
Sept. often for 0'3ϋΠ ; (cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. iv. 52
and on Sap. vi. 14); to rise early in the morning: npas
nva, to rise early in the morning in order to betake one's
self to one, to resort to one early in the morning, (Vulg.
manico ad alifjueni), Lk. xxi. 38, where see Aleyer.*
opOpivos, -ή, -01/, (fr. όρθρο! ; cf. fipfpivAs, ίσπίρίνο!,
όπωρινόί, πρωινός), a poetic [Anth.] and later form for
όρθριο! (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 51 ; Sturz, De dial.
Maced. et Alex. p. 186; [AV. 25]), early: Rev. xxii. 16
Rec. ; Lk. xxiv. 22 L Τ Tr WH. (Hos. vi. 4 ; Sap. xi.
23 (22).)•
όρθριος,-α, -ov, (fr. Spdpos, q• v. ; cf. ό^ιοΐ,πρώϊος) , early ',
rising at the first daicn or rtrg early in the morning : Lk.
xxiv. 22 R G (Job xxix. 7 ; 3 Mace. v. 10, 23). Cf. the
preced. word. [Horn. (h. Merc. 143), Theogn., al.] *
opSpos, -oil, 6, (fr. OPQ, ορνυμι to stir up, rouse ; cf.
L;U. orior, ortus), fr. Hes. down ; Sept. for ΙΠϋ dawn,
and several times for Ίρ3 ; daybreak, dawn : όρθρου βα-
Beoi or βαθίως (see βαθέως and βαθΐ)! [on the gen. cf. W.
§ 30, 11 ; B. § 132, 26]), at early dawn, Lk. xxiv. 1 ;
όρθρου, at daybreak, at dawn, early in the morning, .Jn.
viii. 2 (Hes. opp. 575 ; Sept. Jer. .xxv. 4; x.xxiii. (xxvi.)
5, etc.); ίτΓο τον ομθρον. Acts v. 21 (Dio Cass. 76, 17).*
<ip6us, (ppeos). adv., rightly : Mk. vii. 35 ; Lk. vii. 43 ;
X. 28; .\x. 21. [Aeschyl. and Hdt. down.] '
όρ(ζω; 1 aor. ωρισα; Pass., pf. ptcp. ωρισμίνος; 1 aor.
ptcp. 6ρισθ(Ίί; (fr. opor a boundary, limit) ; fr. [Aeschyl.
and] Ildt. down ; to define : i e. 1. to mark out the
boundaries or limits (of any place or thing) : Hdt., Xen.,
Thuc, al.; Num. .x.xxiv. 6 ; Josh. xiii. 27. 2. to de-
termine, appoint : with an ace. of the thing, ήμίραν, Heb.
iv. 7 ; Kaipous, Acts xvii. 26, (numerous e.xx. fr. Grk.
auth. are given in Bleek, Hebr.-Br. ii. 1 p. 538 sq.);
pass, ώρισμίνοί, ' determinate,' settled. Acts ii. 23 ; ri
ώρισμ. that which hath been determined, ace. to appointment,
decree, Lk. xxii. 22; with an ace. of pers. Acts xvii. 31
(J by attraction for όι> [W. § 24, 1 ; B. § 143, 8]) ; pass,
with a pred. nom. Ro. i. 4 (for although Christ was the
Son of God before his resurrection, yet he was openly
appointed [ A.V. declared^ such among men by this tran-
scendent and crowning event) ; ορίζω, to ordain, determine,
appoint. Acts x. 42 ; foil, by an inf. Acts xi. 29 (Soph. fr.
19d. [i. e. Aegeus (539), viii. p. 8 ed. Brunck]). [CoMP. :
άφ-, άπο-ϋι-, προ-ορίζω.^'
[opivis, see opeii/oj.]
ό'ριον, -ου, TO, (fr. opor [boundary]), [fr. Soph, down],
a bound, limit, in the N. T. always in plur. (like Lat.
fines) boundaries, [R. V. borders'], i. q. region, district, land,
territory: Mt. ii. 16; iv. 13; viii. 34 ; xv. 22, 39; xix. 1 ;
Mk. V. 17 ; vii. 24 L Τ TrAVH, 31 ; x. 1 ; Acts xiu. 50.
(Sept. very often for Sl3J ; several times for nSoj.) '
ορκίζω ; (opKos) ; 1. to force to take an oath, to
administer an oath to: Xen. conviv. 4, 10; Dem., Polyb.;
cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 361. 2. to adjure, (solemnly
implore), with tivo ace. of pers., viz. of the one who is
adjured and of the one by whom he is adjured (cf. Mat-
thiae § 413, 10; [B. 147 (128)]) : 1 Th. v. 27 RG (see
(νορκίζω) ; Mk. v. 7 ; Acts xix. 13. (Sept. for ;'.'3ψη,
Ttm foil, by κατά w. gen., 1 K. ii. (iii.) 42 ; 2 Chr. xxxvi.
13 ; tv, Neh. xiii. 2.i.) [Co.^lP. : ev-, (ξ-ορκίζω.] *
opKos, -ου, ό, (fr. ίργω, dpyai ; i. q. tpKos an enclosure,
confinement ; hence Lat. orcus), [fr. Hom. down], Sept.
for nj;%2O, an oath : Mt. xiv. 7, 9 ; xxvi. 72; Mk. vi. 26;
Lk. L '73 [W. 628 (583) ; B. § 144, 13] ; Acts ii. 30 [W.
226 (212); 603 (561)]; Heb. vi. 16 sq.; Jas. v. 12; by
meton. that which has been pledged or promised with an
oath ; plur. vows, Mt. v. 33 [(cf. AViinsche ad loc.)].*
όρκωμ,οσ-Ια, -at, 17. (όρκωμοτ€α> [όρκοί and όμνυμι] ; cf.
άπωμοσία, άντωμοσία), ajfirmatiun made on oath, the tak-
ing of an oath, (in oath: Heb. vii. 20 (21), 21, 28. (Ezek.
xvii. 18 ; 1 Esdr. viii. 90 (92) ; Joseph, antt. 16, 6, 2. Cf.
Delitzsch, Cora, on Heb. 1. c.)*
ορμάω, -ω : 1 Άοτ. ωρμησα; (ίτ. ορμή); 1. trans.
to set in rapid motion, stir up, incite, urge on; so fr. Horn,
down. 2. intrans. to .^tart forward impetuously, to
rush, (so fr. Hom. down) : eir τι, Mt. viii. 32 ; Mk. v. 13 ;
Lk. viii. 33 ; Acts xL\. 29; en-i τίνα. Acts vii. 57.*
ορμή. -ijy, 17, [fr. r. sar to go. How; Fick i. p. 227 ; Cur-
tius § 502], fr. Hom. down, a violent motion, impulse : Jas.
iii. 4 ; a hostile movement, onset, assault. Acts .xiv. 5 [cf.
Trench § Ixxxvii.].*
δρμ,ημα, -τοί, τό, (ορμάω), a ru-di, impulse : Rev. xviii.
21 [here A. V. violence']. (For TTJii;, outburst of wrath,
Am. i. 11 ; Hab. iii. 8, cf. St7(/eu.s-ner,Thesaur. iv. p. 123 ;
an enterprise, venture, Hom. Π. 2, 356, 590, although in-
terpreters differ about its meaning there [cf. Ebeling,
Lex. Hom. or L. and S. s. v.] ; that to which one is impelled
or hurried away by impulse, [rather, incitement, stimulus'^
Plut. mor. [de virt. mor. § 12] p. 452c.)*
opueof
4Γ)4
OS
opviov, -ou, TO. oftiVi/: Rev. xviii. 2; xi.\. 17,21. (Sept.;
Iloni., Tliiic, Xeu., I'lat., .losei)!!. antt. 3, 1, 5.)*
ορνιξ [.so codd. X DJ, i. ij. opvis (n. v.) : Lk. xiii. .34 Tdf.
The num. is not found in prof, writ., but the trisyllabic
forms ορι>ίχο!, όρνιχι for opviOos, etc., are used in Doric ;
[I'liotius (cd. I'orson, p. 348, 2'2) Ίω«5 ομνιξ . . . και
ΔωρίΕΪΓ ομι/ι|. Cf. Curtius p. 495]."
o'pvis. -ιθιιί. ό, ή. (ΟΡΏ, ϋμνυμι [see ipSpos]) ; 1. a
binl : so fr. 1 loni. down. 2. spec. « cod; a hen : Mt.
xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34 [Tdf. ο/)ιί|, q- v.]; (so Aeschyl.
Eum. 8uG ; Xen. an. 4, 5, 25; Theocr., Polyb. 12, 20, 1 ;
[al.:).•
όροϋατία, -as, η, (fr. όροθίτης ; and tliis fr. opos [a boun-
dary ; see Spiov], and τίθημι) ; a. prop, a selling of
bouiiilaries, laijint/ down ΙίιηίΙ.•<. b. a definile limil ;
plur. bounds, Acts xvii. 2G. (Eccl. writ. ; [W. 25].) '
opos, -oi;f, TO, (OPQ, όρνυμι [i. e. a rising; see όρθρο:]),
[f]•. ΙΙϋπι. down], Sci)t. for in, a mountain: Mt. v. 14;
Lk. iii. 5; Uev. vi. 14, and often; το opos, the moun-
tain nearest the place spoken of, the mountain near by
[but see 0, II. 1 b.], Mt. v. 1 ; Mk.iii. 13 ; Lk. ix. 28; Jn.
vi. 3, 15; ])lur. ό/)ΐ), Mt.xviii. 12; xxiv. 16; Mk. v. 5 ; Rev.
vi. IG, etc. ; gen. plur. ορίων (on this uncontracted form,
used also in Attic, cf. Ultm. CIram. § 49 note 3 ; W. § 9,
2 c.; [B. 14 (13); Dindoif in Fleckeisen's Jahrb. for
1KG9 p. 83]), Rev. vi. 1.") ; 5ρη μ(θιστάν(ΐν a i)rovcrb. phrase,
used also by rabbin, writ., Ιυ rcimive mounlains, i. e. lo
accomplish mosi iliJficuU, stupendous, incrcdilde things: 1
Co. xiii. 2, cf. Mt. xvii. 20 ; xxi. 21 ; Mk. xi. 23.
όρϋσ-σω : 1 aor. ωρυξα: fr. Hum. down; Sept. for tun,
n^r, etc. : to dig: to make τι by dig;.;ing, Mk. xii. 1 ; τι
fv τ:ι>ί, Mt. x.xi. 3.5 ; i. (p to make a pit, tv τη y!j, Mt. xxv.
18 [here TTr WII 6p. -γήνΐ. [CoMP.: δι-, ΐξ-ορύσσω.]*
ορφον05, -η,-όν, (0ΡΦ02, Lat. orbus; [Curtius § 404]),
fr. Horn. Od. 20, «.S down, Sept. for Din;; benj'l (of a
father, of parents), .las. i. 27 [X-Y. fatherless] ; of those
bereft of a teacher, guide, guardian, Jn. .\iv. 18 (Lam.
V. 3).•
όρχε'ομαι, -οϊμαι : 1 aor. ωρχησάμην ; (fr. χορό:, by trans-
position op;(of ; cf. άρπω, άμπάζω, and Lat. rapio, μορφή
and \λΙ. forma; [but these supposed transpositions are
extremely doubtful, cf. Curtius § 189; Tick iv. 207, 167.
Some connect ορχίομαι with r. argh 'to put in rapid mo-
tion'; cf. Vanicek i>. όϋ]); to dance : Mt. xi. 17; xiv. 6;
Mk. vi. 22 ; Lk. vii. 32. (From II om. down ; Sept. for
^p■;, 1 Chr. XV. 29; Ecdus. iii. 4; 2 S. vi. 21.)*
o's, ij, o, the postpositive article, which has the force of
I. a demonstrative pronoun, this, that, (Lat. hie,
haec, hoc ; Germ, emjihat. der, die, das) ; in the N. T. only
in the foil, instances : os hi, but he (Germ, er aber), Jn. v.
11 LTrAVII;[Mk.xv.23TTrtxt.WII; cf.B.§126,2];
in distributions and distinctions : Sr μϊν . . . os he, this
. . . that, one . . . another, the one . . . Ike other, Mt. x.xi. 35 ;
xxii. 5 L Τ Tr WII ; xxv. 15 ; Lk. xxiii. 33 ; Acts xxvii.
44; Ro. .xiv. 5; 1 Co. vii. 7 RG; xi. 21 ; 2Co. ii. 16; .Jude
22; ό μίν . . . ο hi, the one . . . the other, Ro. ix. 21 ; [S μΐν
. . . ό hi . ■ ■ ο hi, some . . . some . . . some, Mt. xiii. 23 L
Τ WH] ; & he ■ . ■ ό he ■ ■ ■ ό he, some . . . some . . . some,
ΛΙί. xiii. 8 ; ω (masc.) μίν ■ ■ ■ πλλω (8f ) . . . «τί'ρω hi [but
LTTrWHom. this δί] κτλ. 1 Co. xii. 8-10; δ μί» . . .άλλο
Sf [L txt. Τ Tr WII «α'κϊλλο], Mk. iv. 4 ; with a variation
of the construction al.so in the foil. pass. : ό μίν . . . κα\
cTepov, Lk. viii. 5 ; ots μίν with the omission of oCs hi by
anacoluthon, 1 Co. xii. 28 ; 6y μίν . . . 6 he άσ^ίκύκ etc.
one man . . . but he that is iveak etc. Ilo. xiv. 2. On this
use of the pronoun, chiefly by later writers from De-
mosth. down, cf. Matthiae § 289 Anni. 7 ; Kiihner § 518,
4 b. ii. p. 780; [Jelf § SUi, 3 b.] ; Bilni. (iram. § 1 26, 3 ;
B. 101 (89) ; λν. 105 (100); Fritzsche on .\Ik. p. 507.
II. a relative pronoun who, which, what; 1.
in the common constr., ace. to which the relative
agrees as respects its gender with the noun or pron.
which is its antecedent, but as respects case is governed
by its own verb, or by a substantive, or by a preposition :
ό αστήρ ov eihov, Mt. ii. 9 ; ό . . Ίουδαίοί, οϋ 6 eiraivos κτ\.
Ro. ii. 29 ; oiiros irepi ov eyia άκονω τοιαύτα, Lk. i.\. 9 ; αττό
της ήμίρα:, αφ' rjs. Acts .XX. 18; Oebs hi' ού, ('ξ ου, 1 Co. viii.
G, and numberless other ex.x. it refers to a more remote
noun in 1 Co. i. 8, where the antecedent of or is not the
nearest noun Ί7;σοϋ Χριστοί, but τω Beiu in 4 ; yet cf. \V.
157 (149); as in this passage, so very often elsewhere
the relative is the subject of its own clause : άνήρ as etc.
Jas. i. 12 ; nas or, Lk. xiv. 33 ; ohhe'is os, Mk. x. 29 ; Lk.
xviii. 29, and many other exx. 2. in constructions
peculiar in some respect ; a. the gender of the rel-
ative is sometimes made to conform to that of the follow-
ing noun: τήs ανΚή:, ο ΐστι πραιτώριον, Mk. χν. 16 ; λα/χ-
TTUhcs, a ίίσι (ί^ ίστιν) τα πν(νματα, liev. iv. 5 [LT WII];
σπίρματι, of ΐστι Xpiaras, (ial. iii. 16 ; add, Eph. i. 14 [L
WII txt. Tr mrg. 5] ; vi. 1 7 ; 1 Tim. iii. 15 ; Rev. v. 8 [T
WH rarg. 5] ; cf. Ilerm. ad Vig. p. 708 ; Matthiae § 440
p. 989 sq. ; \V. § 24, 3 ; B. § 143, 3. b. in construc-
tions ad sensum [cf. B. § 143, 4] ; a. the plural of
the relative is used after collective nouns in tht sing. [cf.
W. §21,3; B. u. s.] : πλήθος πολύ, οΊ ήλθον, Lk. vi. 17;
παν το πρΐσβυτίριον, παρ' hv, .Vets .xxii. 5 ; yeveas, ev ois,
Phil. ii. 1 5. p. κατά πάσαν ττολιΐ', ev ais, .\cts xv. 36 ;
ταΰτην hevTepav νμ'ιν γράφω €πιστο\ην, ev αις (because the
preceding context conveys the idea of two Epistles),
2 Pet. iii. 1. γ. the gender of the relative is conformed
not to the grammatical but to the natural gender of
its antecedent [cf. W. §21,2; B. u. s.] : παΜριον of, Jn.
vi. 9 L TTr WII; θηρίον of, of Nero, as antichrist, Rev.
xiii. 14 LTTrWH; «φαλ^ of. of Christ, Col. ii. 19; [add
μυστήριον of etc. 1 Tim. iii. 16 G L Τ Tr WII ; cf. B. u. s. ;
λν. 588 sq. (•')47)] ; σκeϋη (of men) out, Ro. ix. 24; ΐθνη
o1. Acts .XV. 1 7 ; .x.xvi. 1 7 ; τίκνα, reKvia oi, .In. i. 13; Gal. iv.
19; 2 Jn. 1, (Eur. suppl. 12) ; τίκνον os, Philem. 10. c.
In attractions [B.§ 143, 8; W. §§ 24, 1 ; 66, 4sqq.];
o. the accusative of the rel. pron. depending on a trans,
verb is changed by attr.action into the oblique case of its
antecedent: «nVfrnt ris exTioev 6 Oeos, Mk. xiii. 19 [RG];
ToC ρήματοΓ οί emev, Mk. xiv. 72 [Rec.] ; add, .In. iv. 14 ;
vii. 31, 39 [but Tr mrg. WH mrg. o]; xv. 20; xxi. 10;
Actsiii. 21, 25; vii. 17, 45; ix. 36 ; x. 39 ; xxii. 10; Ro.
XV. 18 ; 1 Co. vi. 19 ; 2 Co. i. 6 ; x. 8, 13 ; Eph. i. 8 ; Tit
ος
455
ος
iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; Lx. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 Jn. iii.
24 ; Jude Ιό ; for other exx. see below ; eV ωρα ji oi γιρώ•
σκ(ΐ, Mt. xxiv. 50; rg τταραδύσα g τταρίδώκατί , Mk. vii. 13 ;
add, Lk. ii. 20 ; v. 9; ix. 43 ; xii. 4ti ; xxiv. 25 ; Jn. xvii. 5 ;
Actsii. 22; xvii. 31 ; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev.
xviii. 6 ; cf. W. § 24, 1 ; [B. as above]. Rarely attrac-
tion occurs where the verb governs the dative [but see
below] : thus, Karefatnt ov eVtoreuaf θ€θΰ for κατίναντι
ΰίον, ώ eViOTfuffc (see καηναντί). Ro. iv. 17; φωνής, ης
(κμαξα {{or η [al ijv, cf. W. 164 (154 Sij.) B. 287 (247)]),
Acts .xxiv. 21, cf. Is. vi. 4; {rjyero δϊ και των ίαυτοΰ Te
πιστών, ois ηδ€το και Ζ>ν ηπίστξΐ ττολλοι/ί, for και πολΧοϋς
τοίιτων, οΐς ήπίστα, Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 3!) ; lav eyi> ϊνητνχηκα
oiSeit, for ouScir τούτων, off evTCT. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 a. ;
Protag. p. 361 e. ; de rep. 7 p. 531 e. ; παρ' Siv βοηθ(Ις, oi-
Sfpiav \ήψ€ΐ χάριν, for παρά τούτων, uiy κτ\. Aeschin. f.
leg. p. 43 (117) ; cf. Frilzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 237 ;
[B. § 143, 11 ; Λ\'. 163 (154) sq.; but others refuse to
recognize this rare species of attraction in the N. Ϊ. ; cf.
Jleyer on Eph. i. 8]). The foil, expressions, however,
can hardly be brought under this construction : τής χάρι-
τος ης €χαρίτωσ(ν (as if for ^), Eph. i. 6 L Τ Tr WII ; της
κλήσιως, ης ϊκΚήβητί, Eph. Iv. 1 ; δια της παρακΚήσΐως ής
παρακάΚοΰμίθα, 2 Co. i. 4, but must be e.xplained agree-
ably to such phrases as χάριν χαριτοΰν, κλησιν κά\(ΐν, etc.,
[(i. e. accus. of kindred abstract subst. ; cf. W. § 32, 2 ; B.
§ 131, 5)] ; cf. W. [and B. u. s.J. β. The noun to which
the relative refers is so conformed to the case of the relar
live clause that either αα. it is itself incorporated
into the relative construction, but without the article [B.
§143,7; W.§24,2b.]: ov ΐγω άπ(κ€φάΚισα Ίωοιτνην, ούτος
ήγίρθη, for Ιωάννης, όν κτλ. Mk. vi. 16 ; add, Lk. xxiv. 1 ;
Philem.lO; Ro. vi. 17; ςίς ην οίκίαν, €Κ£Ϊ,\.(\. evTjj οΙκία, €ίς
ην, Lk. ix. 4 ; or ββ. it is placed before the rela-
tive clause, either with or without the article [\V. § 24,
2 a. ; B. § 144, 13] : τον αρτον ov κλώμίν, ουχί κοινωνία τον
σώματος, 1 Co. Χ. 16 ; Χίθον ον αποδοκίμασαν οί οίκο^ομοϋν-
τ(ς, ούτος ϊγίνηθη (for ό λίθος, δί »£τλ.), Mt. .xxi. 42 ; Mk.
xii. 10; Lk. XX. 17 ; 1 Pet. ii. 7. γ. Attraction in the
phrases άχρι ης ημίρας for άχρι τηί ήμίρας, § [W. § 24, 1
fin.] : Mt. xxiv. 38 ; Lk. i. 20 ; xvii. 27 ; Acts i. 2; αφ'
ης ήμίρας for άπο της ημίρας, g. Col. i. 6, 9 ; hv τρόπον, as,
just as, for τοντον το» τρόποι» Sv or ω, Mt. xxiii. 3 7 ; Lk. xiii.
34 ; Acts vii. 28 ; [preceded or] foil, by οΰτως. Acts i. 11 ;
2 Tim. iii. 8. δ. A noun common to both the principal
clause and the relative is placed in the relative clause
after the relative pron. [W. 165 (156)]: e'v ω κρίμαη
KpivfTe, κριθτ)σ(σθο, for κριθ. iv τω κρίματι, iv ω κρίν€Τ(,
Mt. vii. 2 ; xxiv. 44 ; Mk. iv. 24 ; Lk. xii. 40, etc. 3.
The Neutero a. refers to nouns of the masculine
and the feminine gender, and to plurals, when that which
is denoted by these nouns is regarded as a thing [cf.
B. § 129, 6]: λίΤΓτα δύο, ο ίστι κοδράντης, Mk. xii. 42;
ά•γάπην, ο ccm σύνδΐσμος,ΟοΧ. iii. 14 L Γ Tr WH ; άρτους,
5 etc. Mt. xii. 4 L txt. Τ Tr λ\11. b. is used in the
phrases [B. u. s.] — ο eVTt», ichich {term) signifies: Boa-
vfpyis ο ioTiv υιοί βρ. Mk. iii. 1 7 : add, v. 41 ; vii. 11, 34;
Heb. vii. 2; ο fWi μοθορμηνινόμινον, and the like: Mt. i
i. 23; Mk.xv. 34; Jn. i. 38 (39), 41 (42) sq.; Lx. 7; xx.
16. c. refers to a whole sentence [B. u. s.] : toCtop
άνίστησ€ν 6 θ(άς, ov . . . ΐσμίν μάρτνρίί, Acts ii. 32 ; iii.
15 ; περί ου ... ό λόγος, Heb. v. 11 ; 6 και εποίησαν (and
the Uke), Acts xi. 30; GaL ii. 10; Col. i. 29; ο {which
thing viz. that I write a new commandment [cf. B. § 143,
3]) ianv αληθίς, 1 Jn. ii. 8 ; ο (sc. to have one's lot as-
signed in the lake of fire) iarwo θάνατος 6 δ(ϋτ(ρος, Rev.
xxi. 8. 4. By an idiom to be met with from Horn.
down, in the second of two coordinate clauses a pro-
noun of the third person takes the place of the relative
(cf. Passow ii. p. 552''; [L. and S. s. v. B. IV. 1]; B. § 143,
6 ; [W. 149 (141)]) : ος ίσται (πι τοΰ δώματος και τα σκ(ύη
αυτού iv ttj οικία μη καταβάτω, Lk. .xvii. 31 ; εξ ου τα πάντα
καΊ ήμ(Ίς (1ς αυτόν, 1 Co. viii. 6. 5. Sometimes, by a
usage esp. Hebraistic, an oblique case of the pronoun
αυτός is introduced into the relative clause redundantly ;
as, ης TO θυγάτριον αύτης. Mk. vii. 25 ; see αυτός, II. 5. 6.
The relative pron. very often so includes the demonstra-
tive ούτος or cKe'ivos that for the sake of perspicuity a
demons, pron. must be in thought supplied, either in
the clause preceding the relative clause or in that which
follows it [W. § 23, 2 ; B. § 127, 5]. The foU. examples
may suiiice : a. a demons, jjron. must be added in
thought in the preceding clause : οΐς ήτοίμασται, for
τούτοις δοθήσ€ται, οΐς ήτ. Mt. XX. 23; διΊξαι (sc. ταύτα),
ά δίί -γΐνίσθαι, Rev. i. 1 ; χχϋ. 6 ; ω for (κύνος ω, Lk. vii.
43, 47 ; ου for τούτω ου, Ro. χ. 14 ; with the attraction of
S}v for τούτων a, Lk. Lx. 36 ; Ro. xv. 18 ; S)v for ταΰτ,ι S>v,
Mt. vi. 8; with a prep, intervening, ίμαθ(ν άφ' Siv (for
από τούτωι» a) ΐπαθεν, Heb. V. 8. b. a demons, pron.
must be supplied in the subsequent clause : Mt. x. 38;
Mk. ix. 40 ; Lk. iv. 6 ; ix. 50 ; Jn. xix. 22 ; Ro. ii. 1, and
often. 7. Sometimes the purpose and end is e.x-
pressed in the form of a relative clause (cf. the Lat. ijui
for ul is) : άποστίλλω ayyeKov, ος (for which Lchm. in Mt.
has και) κατασκευάσει, who shall etc. i. q. that he ma;/ etc.,
Alt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; [1 Co. ii. 16]; so also in
Grk. auth., cf. Passow s. v. VIII. vol. ii. p. 553 ; [L. and
S. s. V. B. IV. 4] ; Mattliiae§481,d.; [Kuhner§563, 3 b.;
Jelf§836, 4; B. §139, 32]; — or the cause: Si» παρα-
δέχεται, because he acknowledges him as his own, Heb.
.\ii. 6 ; — or the relative stands Λvhere ώστε might be used
(cf. Matthiae § 479 a.; Kriiger § 51, 13, 10; [KUhner
§ 563, 3 e.] ; Passow s. v. VIII. 2, iL p. 553" ; [L. and S.
u. s.]) : Lk. v. 21 ; vii. 49. 8. For the interrog. τίς,
τί, in indirect questions (cf. Ellendt, Lex. Soph. ii. 372;
[cf. B. § 139, 58]) : οϋκ ΐχω ο παραθήσω, Lk. xi. 6; by a
later Grk. usage, in a direct quest, (cf. W. §24, 4; B.
§ 139, 59) : εφ' ο (or Rec. iφ' ω) πάρει, Mt. xxvL SO (on
which [and the more than doubtful use of or in direct
quest.] see επί, Β. 2 a. ζ. p. 233'' and C. I. 2 g. γ. aa. p.
235"). 9. Joined to a preposition it forms a
periphrasis for a conjunction [B. 105 (92)] : avff tuv, for
avTi τούτων ότι, — because, Lk. i. 20 ; xi.x. 44 ; Acts xii. 23 ;
2 Th. ii. 10; for which reason, wherefore, Lk. xii. 3 (see
αντί, 2 d.) ; εφ' ω, for that, since (see ε'πί, Β. 2 a. 8- p. 233');
άφ' ov, (from the tiise that), when, since, Lk. xiii. 25
οσάκις
45ϋ
Οσο?
xxiv. 21, [see από, Ι. 4 b. ρ. 58'] ; άχρκ ου, see ίίχρι, 1 ι1. ;
*Ί οί, H-Aence, Phil. iii. 20 cf. \V. § 21 , 3 ; [Β. § 14.i, 4 ;i.] ;
ίωί ov, utilit (see ίως, II. 1 b. a. p. 2G8''); also μίχρίί οί,
Mk. xiii. 30; iv ω, ίΐ'/ϋ/ί, Mk. ii. 19; I>k. v. 34 ; .In. v. 7;
fv olt, meanwhile, Lk. xii. 1; [cf. fv, I. 8 e.]. 10.
With i>articles: os άν and or ϊάν, wlio.ioever, if any one
erer, see Sv, II. 2 and eai', II. p. 163*; oJ taj/, whereso-
ever (ti'hilhersoei-er) with subjiinc, 1 Co. xvi. 6 [cf. B. lOJ
(92)]. Of y(, see yi, 2. os rat, «■/(« a/.vo, Λβ ϋ'λο, (cf.
Klolz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 63G) : Mk. iii. 19 ; Lk. vi. 13 .sq. ;
X. 39 [here Wll br. η] ; .In. xxi. 20; Acts i. 11 ; vii. 45 ;
X. 39 [Uec. om. και']; xii. 4; xiii. 22 ; xxiv. 6 ; Ro. v. 2; 1
Co. xi. 23 ; 2 Co. iii. G ; Gal. ii. 10; Ileb. i. 2, etc. ; Ss και
αΰτόί, >rho aiso himselj, who as welt as others: Mt. xxvii.
57. OS 8ήποτ(, whosoerer,. Jn. y. iKec; όσπιρ [^or ός irtp
L Tr txt.], who especiallij, the very one ivho (cf. Klolz ad
Devar. ii. 2 p. 724) : Mk. xv. 6 [but here Τ WH Tr mrg.
now read δν παρ?;τοΰντο, q. V.]. 11. The genitive of,
used absolutely [cf. W. 590 (549) note; Jelf § 522, Obs. 1],
be>;omes an adverb (first so in Attic writ., cf. Passow II.
p. 54G•; [Sleisterhans §50, 1]); a. tehere (Lat.
nhi): Mt. ii. 9; xviii. 20; Lk. iv. 16sq. ; xxiii. 53; Acts
i. 13; xii. 12; xvi. 13; xx. 6 [T Tr mrg. οττου] ; xxv. 10;
xxviii. 14; Ro. iv. 15; ix. 26; 2 Co. iii. 17; Col. iii. 1;
Ileb. iii. 9; Rev. xvii. 15; after verbs denoting motion
(.-iee «fl, b. ; όπου, 1 b.) it can be rendered whither [cf.
W. § 54, 7 ; B. 71 (62)], Mt. xxviii. 16 ; Lk. x. 1 ; xxiv.
28 ; 1 Co. xvi. 6. b. when (like Lat. uhi i. q. eo
tempore quo, quom) : Ro. v. 20 (Eur. Iph. Taur. 320),
[but .al. take ο J in Ro. I.e. locally].
όσ-άκΐΐ, (όσοί), relative adv., as ofen as; with the ad-
dition of 'iv, as often soever as, 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. [RG; cf.
W. S42, 5 a.; B. § 139, 34]; also of iav, [LTTrWH
in 1 Co. 1. c] ; Rev. xL 6. [(Lys., Plat., al.)] '
όσ-γί, for or ye, see ye, 2.
oo-ios, -a, -Dv, and once (1 Tim. ii. 8) of two termina-
tions (as in Plato, Icgg. 8 p. 831 d. ; Dion. Hal. antt. 5,
71 fin.; cf. W. § 11, 1; B. 26 (23); the fern, occurs in
the N. T. only in the passage cited) ; fr. .\eschyl. and
Hdt. down ; Sept. chiefly for τρπ (cf. Grimm, Exgt.
Hdbch. on Sap. p. 81 [and reff. s. v. ayiof, fin.]) ; un-
(h'filed hij sin, free from wichedness, religioiisli/ ohservinq
every moral ohlifjalinn, pure, holy, pious, (Plato, Gorg.
p. 507 b. nefH pev ανθρώπους τά προιτηκυντα πράττων
8ΐκαι άν πράττοι,π(ρ\ 8e eeoit όσια. The distinction
between dUuLos and οσιοΓ is given in the same way by
Polyb. 23, 10, 8; Schol. ad Eurip. Hec. 788; Chari't. 1,
10 ; [for other exx. see Trench § Ixxxviii. ; Wetstein on
Eph. iv. 24 ; but on its applicability to N. T. usage see
Trench u. s. ; indeed Plato elsewh. (Euthyphro p. 12e.)
makes δίκαιος the generic and Saios the specific
term]) ; of men : Tit. i. 8; Ileb. vii. 26; oi όσιοι τον 0€οΰ,
■the pious towards God, G nil's pious worshippers, (Sap.
iv. 15 and often in the Psalms); so in a peculiar and
pre-eminent sense of the Messiah [A. V. thy Holy One] :
Acts ii. 27; xiii. 35, after Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10; xe'ipes (Aes-
chyl. cho. 378; Soph. O. C. 470), 1 Tim. ii. 8. of God,
holy: Rev. xv. 4; xvi. 5, (also in prof. auth. occasion-
ally of the gods; Orph. Arg. 27; hymn. 77, 2; of God
in Deut. xxxii. 4 for ιψ'•, Ps. cxliv. (c.xlv.) 1 7 for τρπ
cf. Sap. V. 19); τά όσια Aiwt8. the holy things (of God)
promised to David, i. e. the ^Messianic blessings, Acts
xiii. 34 fr. Is. Iv. 3.•
όιηότηϊ, -ητος, η, (βσιος), piety towards God, fidelity in
ohserriny the. ohllr/alions of piety, holiness : joined with
Βικαιοσϋνη (see όσιοί [and δικαιοσύνη, 1 b.]) : Lk. i. 75 ;
Eph. iv. 24 ; Sap. ix. 3 ; Clem. Honi. 1 Cor. 48, 4. (Xen.,
Plat., Isocr., al.; Sept. for ID', Duut. ix. 5 ; for Oil, 1 K. ix.
4.) [Meinke in St. u. Krit. "84 p. 743 ; Schmidt ch. 181.] •
oaCids, (offtor), [fr. Eur. down], .adv., yjiOi/s/y, holily:
joined with δικαίως, 1 Th. ii. 10 {ayviis κάί όσίως κ, ίι-
καϊως, Theoph. ad Autol. 1, 7).*
ό<Γμ.ή, -ης, ή, (όζω [q. ν.]), α smell, odor: Jn. xii. 3;
2Co.ii.l4; θανάτου (LT Tr WII « ίαν.), such an odor
as is emitted b}- death (i. e. by a deadly, pestiferous
thing, a dead body), and itself causes death, 2 Co. ii.
16; ζωη! (or c'k ζωής) such as is diffused (or emitted) by
life, and itself imparts life, ibid. [A. V. both times
savorl; όσμη ίύωδι'ϋΓ. Kph. v. 2; Phil. iv. 18; see fio»-
δ/α, b. (Tragg., Thuc., Xen., Plat., al.; in llom. όδμή;
Sept. for Π"\.) *
oiros, -η, -ov, [fr. Ilom. down], a relative adj. corre-
sponding to the demon, τοσοϋτυς either expressed or un-
derstood, Lsit. ijuanl us, -a, -uin; used a. of space
[a.< yreat a.s] : το μήκος αϋτης (Rec. adds τοσούτον eariv)
οσην και [GTTrWHom. και] το πλάτος. Rev. xxi. 16;
of time \_as lony as] : irf> όσον χρόνον, for so long lime
lis, so lony as, Ro. vii. 1 ; 1 Co. vii. 39 ; Gal. iv. 1 ; also
without a prep., όσοιι χρόνον, .Mk. ii. 19 ; neut. eφ' όσον,
IIS long as, Mt. ix. 15; 2 Pet. i. 13, (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 25) ;
en μικρόν όσον όσον, yet a Utile how very, how very, (Vulg.
modirum \idi]quiintulum), i. e. yet a very little while, Ileb.
X. 37 (Is. xxvi. 20; of a very little thing, Arstph. vesp.
213; cf. flerm. ad Vig. p. 726 no. 93; \V. 247 (231)
note; B. § 150, 2). b. of abundance and mul-
titude; how many, as many as; how much, as much as:
neut. όσον, .In. vi. 1 1 ; plur. όσοι, as- many (men) as, all
who, Mt. .xiv. 36 ; Mk. iii. 10; Acts iv. G, 34 ; xiii. 48 ;
Ro. ii. 12; vi. 3; Gal. iii. 10, 27; Phil. iii. 15; 1 Tim. vi.
1 ; Rev. ii. 24 ; οσαι eVayyfXiut, 2 Co. i. 20 ; όοα Ιμάτια,
Acts ix. 39 ; neut. plur., absol. [A. V. often tvhntsocver],
Mt. xvii. 12 ; Mk. x. 21 ; Lk. xi. 8 ; xii. 3 ; Ro. iii. 19 ; xv.
4; JudelO; Rev. i. 2. navres όσοι, [α// as many as],
Mt. xxii. 10 [here Τ WH π- οίς]; Lk. iv. 40; Jn. x. 8;
Acts V. 36 sq. ; neut. πάντα όσα [aW things whatsoever, all
that], Mt. xiii. 46 ; xviii. 25 ; xxviii. 20 ; Mk. xii. 44 ; Lk.
xviii. 22 ; Jn. iv. 29 [T AVH Tr mrg. π. S], 39 [T WH Tr
txt. π. a] ; τΓολλα όσα, Jn. xxi. 25 R G, (Hom. II. 22, 380;
Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 3). oooi . . . oirot, Ro. viii. 14; όσα
. . . ταϊτα, Phil. iv. 8; όσα . ■ ■ e'v τούτοις, Jude 10; όσοι
. . . αυτοί, .In. i. 12: Gal. vi. 16. όσοι Sv or eav, how many
soever, as many soever as [cf. AV. § 42, 3] ; foil, by an
indie, pret. (see 3v, II. 1), Mk. vi. 56 ; by an indie, pres.
Rev. iii. 19; by a subjunc. aor., Mt. xxii. 9; Mk. iii. 28;
vi. 1 1 ; Lk. ix. 5 [Rec.] ; Acts ii. 39 [here Lchm. ους Sv] ;
Rev. xiii. 15 j όσα Sv, Mt. xviii. 18; ,Tn. xi. 22; xvi. 13
οσίΓΐρ
457
οσφν-ί
[RG]; πάντα όσα αν, all Ihinga trhatsoevcr : foil, by sub-
juno. pres. Mt. vii. 12; by subjunc. aor., Mt. xxi. 22;
xxiii. 3 ; Acts iii. 22. όσα in indirect disc. ; how many
tilings : Lk. ix. 10 ; Acts L\. 16 ; xv. 12 ; 2 Tim. i. 18. c.
of importance: οσα, how great things, i. e. how ex-
traordinary, in indir. disc, Mk. iii. 8 [Lmrg. S] ; v.
19 sq. ; Lk. viii. 39 ; Acts xiv. 27 ; xv. 4, [al. take it of
number in tliese last two exx. how many ; cf . b. above] ;
how great (i. e. bitter), κακά, Acts ix. 13. d. of
measure and degree, in comparative sentences, ace.
neut. όσον . . . μάλλον τκμισσότ^ρον, the more . . . so much
the more a great deal (A. V.), Mk. vii. 3G ; καθ' όσον
with a compar., by so much as witli the compar. Ileb. iii.
3; καθ' όσον . . . κατά τοσούτον [τοσούτο LTTrWII],
Ileb. vii. 20, 22; καθ" όσον (iniisiiitirh) as foil, by οϋτως,
Heb. ix. 27; τοσούτω with a compar. foil, by όσω with
a compar., by so much . . . as, Heb. i. 4 (Xen. mem. 1,
4, 40 ; Cyr. 7, 5, 5 sip) ; without τοπ-ούτω, Ileb. viii. 6
[Λ. V. hy how m«i,7i]; τοσούτο» μάλλον, όσω (without
μάλλον), Ileb. χ. 25 ; όσα . . . τοσούτον, how much . . . so
much, Kev. xviii. 7; (φ' όσον, for as much as, in so Jar
as, ivithout i'lrl τοσούτο, ^It. .\xv. 40, 45; Ro. xi. 13.
οσπ(ρ, ijntp, orrtp, see or, ij, S, 10.
όστί'ον, contr. όστονν, gen. -oC, to, [akin to Lat. os,
ossis: Curtius § 213, cf. p. 41], « //oiie : Jn.xix.36; plur.
όστί'α, Lk. .xxiv. 39 ; gen. οστίων, (on these uncontr.
forms cf. [WH. App. p. l.'J7]; W . § 8, 2 d. ; [B. p. 13
(12)]), Mt. xxiii. 27; Eph. v. 30 [RGTrmrg.br.]; Heb.
xi. 22. (From Ilom. down ; Sept. very often for DX;?.) *
ooTis, ijTts, δ,τι (separated by a hypodiastole [comma],
to distinguish it from ότι; but L Τ Tr write ο τι, without
a hypodiastole [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. Ill], leaving a little
epace between ο and τι; [WH οτι] ; cf. W. 46 (45 scp);
\^Lij>sius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 118 sq.; WH. Intr.
§ ^"'D' S^"• ούτινος (but of the oblique cases only the
ace. neut. ο,τί and the gen. ότου, in the phrase ϊω! ότου,
are found in the N. T.), [fr. Horn, down], comp. of ot
and T(£, hence prop, any one who ; i. e. 1. whoever,
every one who: όστις simply, in the sing, chiefly at the
beginning of a sentence in general propositions, esp. in
Matt. ; ΛΤ. an indie, pres., Mt. xiii. 12 (twice) ; Mk. viii.
34 (where L Tr WH «i tis) ; Lk. xiv. 27 ; neut. Mt. xviii.
28 Rec; w. a fut., Mt. v. 39 [RGTrmrg.], 41 ; xxiii.
1 2, etc. ; Jas. ii. 10 R (i ; plur. oiTives, whosoever (all those
who) : w. indie, pres., Mk. iv. 20 ; Lk. viii. 15 ; Gal. v. 4 ;
w. indie, aor.. Rev. i. 7 ; ii. 24 ; xx. 4 ; πάς όστκ, w. indie,
pres. Mt. vii. 24; w. fut. Mt. x. 32; δστίΓ w. subjunc.
(where άν is wanting very rarely [cf. AV. § 42, 3 (esp.
fin.); B. § 139, 31]) aor. (having the force of the fut.
pf. in Lat.), Mt. xviii. 4 Rec; Jas. ii. 10 LTTrWH.
όστις άν w. subjunc. aor. (Lat. fut. pf.), Mt. x. 33 [RG
T]; xii. 50; w. subjunc pres. Gal. v. 10 [toi/TTrWH];
neut. w. subjunc. aor., Lk. x. 35; Jn. xiv. 13 [Trmrg.
WH mrg. pres. subjunc.]; xv. 16 [Tr nirg. WH mrg.
pres. subjunc] ; with subjunc. pres., Jn. ii. 5 ; 1 Co. .xvi.
2 [Tr WH eav; WH mrg. aor. subjunc] ; ό (άν τι for ό,τι
άν w. subjunc. aor. Eph. vi. 8 [R (ί] ; πάν ο,τι άν or ΐάν
w. subjunc. pres., Col. iii. 17, 23 [Rec. ; cf. B. § 139, 19 ;
W. §42, 3]. 2. it refers to a single person or thing,
but so that regard is had to a general notion or
class to which this individual person or thing belongs,
and thus it indicates quality: one who, such a one as,
of such a nature that, (cf. Kuhner § 554 Anm. 1, ii. p.
905 ; [Jelf § 816, 5] ; Lucke on 1 Jn. i. 2, p. 210 sq.):
ηγονμίνος, όστίί ηοιμανιΐ, Mt. ii. 6 ; add, Jit. vii. 26 ; xiiL
52 ; xvi. 28 ; xx. 1 ; xxv. 1 ; Mk. xv. 7 ; Lk. ii. 10 ; vii.
37; viii. 3 ; Jn. viii. 25; xxi. 25 [Tdf. om. the vs.] ; Acts
xi. 28; xvi. 12; xxiv. 1; Ro. xi. 4; 1 Co. v. 1 ; vii. 13
[Tdf. eiTis]; Gal. iv. 24, 26 ; v. 19; Phil. ii. 20; Col. ii.
23 ; 2 Tim. i. 5 ; Heb. ii. 3 ; viii. 5 ; x. 1 1 ; xii. 5 ; Jas. iv.
14 ; 1 Jn. i. 2 ; Rev. i. 12 ; ix. 4; xvii. 12 ; ό vaos τοϋ θ^οϋ
άγιος ίστιν, οίτινίς toTe νμ€ΐς (where οιτινΐς makes refer-
ence to ayioi) and such are ye, 1 Co. iii. 1 7 [some refer it
to foot]. 3. Akin to the last usage is that whereby
it serves to give a reason, such as equiv. to seeing
that he, inasmuch as he: Ro. xvi. 12 [here Lchm. br. the
cl.] ; Eph. iii. 13 ; [Col. iii. 5] ; Heb. viii. 6 ; plur., Mt. vii.
15; Acts X. 47; xvii. 11; Ro. i. 25, 32 ; ii. 15; vi. 2 ; i.x.
4; xvi. 7; 2 Co. viii. 10; [Phil. iv. 3 (where see Bp.
Lghtft.)] ; 1 Tim. i. 4 ; Tit. i. 1 1 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 1. 4.
Ace. to a later Greek usage it is put for the interroga-
tive Ti's in direct questions (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 57 ;
Lachmann, larger ed., vol. i. p. xliii; B. 253 (218); cf.
W. 16 7 (158)); thus in the N. T. the neut. 5, τι stands
for τί i. q. δώ τι in Mk. ii. 16 Τ Tr WH [cf. 7 WH mrg.] ;
ix. 11, 28, (Jer. ii. 36 ; 1 Chr. xvii. 6 — for which in the
parallel, 2 S. vii. 7, tva τί appears; Barnab. ep. 7, 9
[(where see MiiUer) ; cf. 7W/. Proleg. p. 125; Evang.
Nicod. pars i. A. xiv. 3 p. 245 and note ; cf. also Soph.
Lex. s. V. 4]) ; many interpreters bring in Jn. viii. 25
here; but respecting it see άμχή, 1 b. 5. It differs
scarcely at all from the simple relative or (cf. Mattliiae
p. 1073; B. § 127, 18; [Kriiger § 51, 8 ; Ellicott on Gal.
iv. 24 ; cf. Jcbb in Vincent and Dickson's lldbk. to
Modern Greek, App. § 24]; but cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche
in Fritzschiorum opuscc. p. 182 s()., who stoutly denies
it): Lk. ii. 4 ; ix. 30 ; Acts xvii. 10; xxiii. 14 ; xxviii.
18; Eph. i. 23. 6. fus ότου, on which see «ωι, XL
1 b. β. p. 268'• mid.
ό(Γτράκινο$, -IJ, -OK, (όστρακον baked clay), tnade of
clay, earthen : σκ(ύη οστράκινα, 2 Tim. ii. 20 ; with the
added suggestion of frailty, 2 Co. iv. 7. (Jer. xix. 1,11;
xxxix. (xxxii.) 14; Is. xxx. 14, etc. ; Hippocr., AnthoL,
[al.].)*
οσφρησίί, -€ωί, η, (οσφραίνομαι [to smell]), the sense of
smell, smelling: 1 Co. xii. IT. (Plat. Phaedo p. Ill b.
[(yet cf. Stallbaum ad loc.)]; Aristot., Tlieophr.)'
οσφύ? [or -ψθ5, so R Tr in Eph. vi. 14 ; G in Mt. iiL 4;
cf. Chandler §§ 658, 659 ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 101], -Cos, ή, fr.
Aeschyl. and Ildt. down; 1. the hip (loin), as that
part of the body where the ζώνη was worn (Sept. for
D'jrn): Sit. iii. 4 ; Mk. i. 6 ; hence π(ριζώνννσθαι tos
όσφίας, to gird, gird about, the loins, Lk. xii. 35 ; Eph.
vi. 14 ; and άναζώνν. τάς όσφ. [to gird up the loins], 1 Pet.
i. 1 3 : on the meaning of these metaph. phrases see am-
ζώννυμι. 2. a loin, Sept. several times for Ο'ΧτΠ,
458
ΟΤΙ
the (two) loinx, where the Hebrews tlionght the gener:»-
tive power {semen) resided [?] ; hence καρη-όί της ΰσφίο!,
fruit of the loins, offspring. Acts ii. 30 (see καρποί,
1 fin.) ; (ξίρχ(σθαι ck r^t οσφΰος τιι/όί, to come forth out
of one's loins i. e. derive one's origin or descent from
one, Ileb. vii. 5 (see (ξίρχομαί, 2 b.) ; «n fV ry οσφίϊ
TiKor, to be yet in the loins of some one (an ancestor),
Ileb. vii. 10.•
δταν, a particle of time, comp. of ore and άν, at the time
that, wlienerer, (Germ, dann waiin; u-ann irijenil); used
of things which one assumes will really occur, but
tlie time of whose occurrence he does not definitely fi.\
(in prof. auth. often also of things which one assumes
can occur, but wliether they really will or not he does
not know; hence like our in con? IImI, as in Plato, I'rot.
p. 300 b. ; PhaeJr. p. 256 e.; Phaedo p. 68 d.) ; [cf. W.
§42,5; B.§139,33J; a. with the subjunctive
present: Mt. vi. 2, 5; x. 23 ; Alk. .xiii. 11 [here Rec.
aor.] ; .\iv. 7; Lk. .\i. 36; xii. 11 ; xiv. 12 sq. ; xxi. 7;
.In. vii. 27; xvi. 21 ; Acts xxiii. 35; 1 Co. iii. 4; 2 Co.
xiii. 9; 1 Jn. v. 2; Rev. x. 7; xviii. 9; preceded by a
specification of time : etoy τη! ήμίρα! cKfimjs, όταν etc.,
Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; foil, by roVe, 1 Th. v. 3; 1 Co.
XV. 28 ; i. q. as ojten as, of customary action, Mt. xv. 2 ;
Jn. viii. 44 ; Ro. ii. 14 ; al the time when i. q. as long as,
Lk. xi. 34; Jn. ix. 5. b. with the subjunctive
aorist: i. q. the Lat. quando acciderit, ut w. subjunc.
pres., Mt. v. 11 ; xii. 43; xiii. 32; xxiii. 15; xxiv. 32;
Uk. iv. 15 sq. 29 [R G], 31 sq. ; xiii. 28 ; Lk. vi. 22, 26 ;
viii. 13 ; xi. 24 ; xii. 54 sq. ; xxi. 30; Jn. ii. 10; x. 4 ; xvi.
21 ; 1 Tim. v. 11 [here Lmrg. fut.] ; Rev. ix. 5. i. q.
quando w. fut. pf., Mt. xix. 28; xxi. 40; Mk. viii. 38;
ix. 9 ; xii. 23 [G Tr \VH om. L br. the cl.], 25 ; Lk. ix.
26; xvi. 4, 9; xvii. 10; Jn. iv. 25; vii. 31 ; .xiii. 19; xiv.
29; XV. 26; xvi. 4, 13, 21; xxi. 18; Acts xxiii. 35 ; xxiv.
22; Ro. xi. 27; 1 Co. xv. 24 [here LTTrAVH pres.], 27
(where the meaning is, ' when he .shall have said that
the νπόταξίί predicted in the Psalm is now accom-
plished'; cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; xvi. 2 sq. 5, 12; 2 Co. x.
6; Cohiv.l6; 1 Jn. ii. 28 [LTTr WU e'oi']; 2Th.i.lO;
Ileb. i. 6 (on which see (ΐσάγω, 1); Rev. xi. 7; xii. 4;
xvii. 10; xx. 7. foil, by ruVf, Mt. ix. 15; x.xiv. 15; xxv.
31 ; Mk. ii. 20; xiii. 14; Lk. v. 35; x.\i. 20; Jn. viii. 28;
1 Co. xiii. 10 [G L Τ Tr WH om. τότ(] ; xv. 28, 54 ; Col.
iii. 4. c. Ace. to the usage of later authors, a
usage, however, not altogether unknown to the more
elegant writers (W. 309 (289 sq.) ; B. 222 (192) sq. ;
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 124 sq. ; WH. App. p. 171 ; for exx.
additional to these given by W. and B. u. s. see Snph.
Lex. s. V. ; cf. Jebh in Vincent and Dickson's Hdbk. to
Mod. Grk., App. § 78]), with the indicative; o.
future : when, [Mt v. 1 1 Tdf ] ; Lk. xiii. 28 Τ Tr txt. WH
mrg. ; [1 Tim. v. 11 L mrg.] ; as οββη as. Rev. iv. 9 (cf.
Bleek ad loc). β. present: Mk. .\i. 25 LTTr
Wll; xiii. 7 Trtxt. ; [Lk. xi. 2 Tr mrg.]. γ. very
rarely indeed, with the imperfect: as ofien as, ^lohen-
soever'], όταν ΐθιώρουν, Mk. iii. II (Gen. xxxviii. 9; Ex.
xvii. 11 ; 1 S. xvii. 34 ; see άν, II. 1). S. As in Byz-
antine auth. i. (J. oTf, when, with the indie, aorist: οτα»
ηνοίξιν. Rev. viii. 1 L Τ Tr WII ; [add όταν όψί ί'γί'κίτο,
Mk. xi. 19 TTrt.\t.WII, cf. B. 223 (193); but ah take
this of customary action, whetiever evening came (i. e.
ei-erij evening, R. V.)]. 5ταν does not occur in the Epp.
of Peter and .lude.
ore, a particle of time, [fr. Horn, down], when ; 1.
with the Indicative [W. 296 (27>;) scj,] ; indie, pres-
ent (of something certain and customary, see Herm. ad
Vig. p. 913 sij.), while : Jn. ix. 4 ; Ileb. ix. 17; w. an his-
torical pres. Mk. xi. 1. w. the imperfect (of a thing
done on occasion or customary): Mk. xiv. 12; xv. 41 ;
Mk. vi. 21 RG; Jn. x.\i. 18; Acts xii. 6; x.xii. 20; Ro. vi.
20 ; vii. 5 ; 1 Co. xiii. 1 1 ; Gal. iv. 3 ; Col. iii. 7 ; 1 Th. iii.
4; 2 Th. iii. 10 ; 1 Pet. iii. 20. w. an indie, aorist, Lat.
quom w. plupf. (W. § 40, 5 ; [B. § 137, 6]): Mt. ix. 25;
xiii. 2ΰ, 48; xvii. 25 [II G]; xxi. 34; Mk. i. 32; iv. 10;
viii. 19; XV. 20; Lk. ii. 21 sq. 42; iv. 25; vi. [3 L Τ WH],
13; xxii. 14; xxiii. 33; Jn. i. 19; ii. 22; iv. 45 [where
Tdf. as], etc. ; Acts i. 13 ; viii. 12, 39 ; xi. 2 ; xxi. 5, 35 ;
xxvii. 39 ; xxviii. 16 ; Ro. xiii. 11 (" than when we gave
in our allegiance to Christ;" Lat. quom Christo nomen
dedissemus, [R. V. than ivhen we first believed^) ; Gal. i.
15; ii. 11,12, 14; iv. 4; Phil iv. 15; Heb. vii. 10; Rev.
i. 17; vi. 3, 5, 7, 9, 12 ; viii. 1, etc. ; so also Mt. xii. 3 ;
Mk. ii. 25 ; (Jn. xii. 41 R Tr mrg. ότί fiStv, when it had
presented itself to his sight [but best texts δτι : because
he saw etc.]). iyivfTo, otc mXtafv, a common phrase
in Mt., viz. vii. 28 ; xi. 1; xiii. 53; xix. 1 ; xxvi. 1. otc
. . . Tore, Mt. xxi. 1 ; Jn. xii. 16. w. the indie, perfect,
since [R. V. now that I am become], 1 Co. xiii. 11 ; w.
the indie, future: Lk. xvii. 22; Jn. iv. 21, 23; v. 25;
.xvi. 25; Ro. ii. 16 [R G Τ Tr txt. WII mrg.] (Avhere
Lchm. ή [ah al.]) ; 2 Tim. iv. 3. 2. with the aor.
Subjunctive: ΐωί αν ηξη, oTe fiVrjre (where όταν
might have been expected), until the time have come,
when ye have said, Lk. xiii. 35 [RG (cf. Trbr.)]; cf.
Matthiae ii. p. 1196 sq. ; Bornemann, Scholia in Lucae
evang. p. 92; W. 298 (279); [Bnhdy. p. 400 ; cf. B. 231
sq.^(199)l•
0, re, η, Tf , to, Tf, see Te 2 a.
oTi [properly neut. of όστις], a conjunction [fr. Horn.
down], (Lat. quod [cf. W. § 53, 8 b. ; B. § 139, 51 ; § 149,
3]), marking
1. the substance or contents (of a statement),
lh<it\ 1. joined to verbs of saying and declaring
(where the ace. and infin. is used in Lat.) : avayyiWeiv,
Acts xiv. 27 ; διηγ€ΐσθαι, Acts ix. 27 ; flnetv, Mt. xvi. 20 ;
xxviii. 7, 13 ; Jn. vii. 42 ; xvi. 15 ; 1 Co. i. 15 ; Xeyfiv, Mt.
iii. 9; viii. 11 ; Mk. iii. 28; Lk. xv. 7; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. iv.
9 [T Tr WH om. L br. on] ; i.x. 2, and very often ; προ-
(ΐρηκίναί, 2 Co. vii. 3 ; before the οτι in Acts xiv. 22 sup-
I)ly Xi'yoi/T-ff, contained in the preceding παρακάΚοΰντ({
[cf. Β. §151, 11]; STiafterypa0fii/, 1 Co. ix. 10; 1 Jn. ii.
12-14 ; μαρτνριΊν, Mt. xxiii. 31 ; .In. i. 34 ; iii. 28 ; iv. 44;
opoXoyelv, Heb. xi. 13; Sfixvufiv, Mt. xvi. 21 ; δηΧοϋν. 1
Co. i. 11; δίδασκαν, 1 Co. xi. 14. after f^0«vif€H', Heb.
xi. 14 ; δηλον (eVWi/), 1 Co. xv. 27 ; Gah iii. 1 1 ; 1 Tim. vi
459
7 (where L Τ Tr WH om. 8ή\οιι [and then ort simply
introduces the reason, because (B. 358 (308) to the con-
trary)]) ; φανιροϋμαι (for φανιρον y'lverai wept (μοΰ), 2 Co.
iii. 3 ; Ijn.ii. 19. It is added — to verbs of swearing,
and to forms of oatli and affirmation: όμννμί, Kev.
X. 0; ζώ eyw (see ^άω, I. 1 p. 270"), Ro. xiv. 11; μάρτυρα
τόι/ θίον (ViKaXoipai, 2 Co. i. 23 ; πιιττο! 6 Of as, 2 Co. i. 18;
eaTLv άΧήθαα Χρίστου iv €μοί, 2 Co. -xi. 10 ; idoii ενώπιον
τοϋ θ(οΰ. Gal. i. 20 ; cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. p. 242
scj.; [W. §53, 9; B. 394 (338)]; — to verbs of perceiv-
ing, knowing, remembering, etc. : άκοϊκιν, Jn. xiv.
28 ; βλίπην, 2 Co. vii. 8 ; Heb. iii. 1 9 ; Jas. ii. 22 ; θ(ασθαι,
Jn. vi. 5 ; -γινώσκαν, Mt. xxi. 45 ; Lk. x. 1 1 ; Jn. iv. 53 ; 2
Co. .xiii. 6 ; 1 Jn. ii. 5, etc. ; after τοντο, Ro. vi. 6 ; eiSevat,
:\It. vi. 32; xxii. 16; Mk. ii. 10; Lk. ii. 49; Jn. iv. 42; ix.
20, 24 sq. ; Ro. ii. 2 ; vi. 9 ; Phil. iv. 15 S([., and very often ;
■γνωστόν iaTiv, Acts xxviii. 28 ; (πι•γΐνώσκ(ΐν, Mk. ii. 8 ;
Lk. i. 22; Acts iv. 13 ; ϊπίστασθαι, Acts xv. 7 ; voetv, Mt.
XV. 17; 6pav, Jas. ii. 24; καταλάμβαναν, Acts iv. 13; x.
34; συνΐ(ναι, Mt. xvi. 12; ayvoeiv, Ro. i. 13; ii. 4 ; vi. 3,
etc. ; άναγινώσκ(ΐν, Mt. xii. 5 ; xix. 4 ; μνημου(ΰ(ΐν. Jn. xvi.
4 ; μνησθήναι, Mt. V. 23 ; Jn. ii. 22 ; ύπομιμνήσκ(ΐν, Jude
5; — to verbs of thinking, believing, judging,
hoping: λογίζίσθαι, Jn. xi. 50 L Τ Tr Wli ; after τοϋτο,
Ro. ii. 3 ; 2 Co. x. 1 1 ; νόμιζαν, Mt. v. 17; οΐμαι, Jas. i. 7 ;
πίπασμαι, Ro. viii. 38; xiv. 14; xv. 14 ; 2 Tim. i. 5, 12;
nenoidivai, Lk. xviii. 9 ; 2 Co. ii. 3 ; Phil. ii. 24 ; Gal. v. 10 ;
2 Th. iii. 4; Heb. xiii. 18; maTfieiv, Mt. ix. 28; Mk. xi.
23 ; Ro. X. 9 ; νπολαμβάναν, Lk. vii. 43 ; Sokuv, Mt. vi. 7 ;
xxvi. 53 ; Jn. xx. 15 ; ίλπίζαν, Lk. xxiv. 21 ; 2 Co. xiii. 6 ;
Kpiveiv τοΰτο oTi, 2 Co. v. 14 (15) ; — to verbs of emotion
(where in Lat. now the ace. and inf. is used, now quod) :
θανμάζΐΐν, Lk. xi. 38 ; χαίραν, Jn. xiv. 28 ; 2 Co. vii. 9, 16 ;
Phil. iv. 10 ; 2 Jn. 4 ; cV τοΰτω, on, Lk. x. 20 ; σνγχαίρ(ΐν,
Lk. XV. 6, 9 ; μίλ^ι μοι (σοι, αΰτω), Mk. iv. 38 ; Lk. χ. 40 ;
— to verbs of praising, thanking, blaming, (where
the Lat. uses quod) : inatvelv, Lk. xvi. 8 ; 1 Co. xi. 2, 17;
(ξυμοΧογάσθαί, Mt. xi. 25 ; Lk. .\. 21 ; (ΰχαριστάν, Lk.
xviii. 11 ; χάρι^ τωθΐω, Ro. vi. 17 ; χάριν ξχω τιν'ι, 1 Tim.
i. 12; ΐχω κατά τίνος, οτί etc. Rev. ii. 4 ; (χω τοντο οτι, Ι
■have this (which is praiseworthy) that, Rev. ii. 6 ; add,
Jn. vii. 23 [but here on is causal; cf. W. § 53, 8b.];
1 Co. vi. 7 ; — to the verb dvai, when that precedes with
a demons, pron., in order to define more exactly what a
thing is or wherein it may be seen : αΖτη ίστιν on (I^at.
quill/), Jn. iii. 19 ; eV τούτω οτι, 1 Jn. iii. 16 ; iv. 9 sq. 13,
etc. ; nepl τούτον οτι, Jn. xvi. 19 ; οΰχ οίον 8e on (see oios),
Ro. ix. 6 ; — to the verbs ylveaSai and e'rai with an in-
terrog. pron., as η γΕγοι/Εΐ/ οτι etc., ivhat has come to pass
Ihiil ? our how comes it that? Jn. xiv. 22; ri [Lmrg. n't]
ίστιν ανθρωτΐοί, on, Heb. ii. 6 fr. Ps. viii. 5. τι'γ ό Xiiyof
ovTos (sc. (στίν), οτι, Lk. iv. 36 ; ττοταπός (στιν ούτος, οτι,
Mt. viii. 27; τίί ή ΒιΒαχη αΰτη. on, i\[k. i. 27 Rec. ; add
Mk. iv. 41. 2. in elliptical formulas (B. 358
(307) ; [W. 585 (544) note]) : η 5τι etc., i. q. η ΐστιν ότι,
[Α. V. how is it thaf], wherefore ? Mk. ii. 16 R G L [al. om.
η ; cf. 5 below, and see Strrif, 4] ; Lk. ii. 49 ; Acts v. 4,
9. οΰχ οτι for oi \(yω on, our not that, not as though, cf.
B. §150, 1; [W. 597 (555)]; thus, Jn. vi. 46 ; vii. 22 ; 2
Co. i. 24 ; iii. 5 ; PhU. iii. 12 ; iv. 11. on is used for ci's
(Keivo ότι (/η reference to the fact that [Eng. seeing that, in
that]) : thus in Jn. ii. 18 ; [Meyer (see his note on 1 Co.
i. 20) would add many other exx., among them Jn. ix. 1 7
(see below)] ; for ev τούτω ότι, Ro. v. 8 ; for vep'i τούτου
ότι, concerning litis, that : so after \a\eiv, Mk. i. 34 ; Lk. iv.
41 [al. take on in these exx. and those after StaXoy- wliich
follow in a causal sense; cf. W. as below (EUicott on
2 Thess. iii. 7)] ; after Xiytiv, Jn. ix. 1 7 [see above] ; after
8ιa'^.oyίζ(σθaι, Mt. xvi. 8; Mk.viii. 17, (after απόστελλαν
(πιστολάς, 1 Macc. xii. 7). See exx. fr. classic authors in
Fritzsche on Mt. p. 248 sq. ; [Meyer, u. s. ; cf. W. § S3,
8b.]. 3. Noteworthy is the attraction, not un-
common, by which the noun that ΛνουΗ naturally be the
subject of the subjoined clause, is attracted by the verb
of the principal clause and becomes its object [cf. ^V.
§ GG, 5 ; Β § lol, 1 a.] ; as, oidare την οΙκΊαν ^τίφανά, ότι
€στϊν απαρχή, for οΓδατ€, ότι ή οικία Στ. κτ\., 1 Co. xvi. 15 ;
also after elSivai and Ιδάν, Mk. xii. 34 ; 1 Th. ii. 1 ; so
after other verbs of knowing, declaring, etc. : Mt.
XXV. 24 ; Jn. ix. 8 ; Acts iii. 10 ; ix. 20 ; 1 Co. iii. 20 ; 2 Th.
ii. 4 ; Rev. xvii. 8, etc. ; ov i/xet? Xt'yfre ότι θεός υμών
(στι, for π(ρ\ ov (cf. Lk. xxi. 5) υμάς Xe'yere ort, .Jn. Λ'ϋΐ.
54. 4. As respects cons true tion, on is joined
in the N. T. a. to the indicative even where the
opinion of another is introduced, and therefore accord-
ing to class, usage the optative should have been used ;
as, όκστΐίλατο . . . ϊνα μηδενι Είττωσί!/, on αυτός (στιν 6
Χριστός, Mt. xvi. 20; add, 21 ; iv. 12 ; xx. 30, etc. b.
to that subjunctive after οΰ μή which differs scarcely
at all from the future (see μή, IV. 2 p. 411' ; [cf. W. 508
(473)]): Mt. V. 20; xxvi. 29 [RG; al. om. on]; ^Ik. xiv.
25 ; Lk. xxi. 32 ; ,Tn. xi. 56 (where before on supply δο-
KfiTf, borrowed from the preceding δοκίί) ; but in Ro. iii.
8 on before ποιήσωμ(ν (hortatory subjunc. [cf. W. § 41 a.
4 a.; B. 245 (211)]) is recitative [see 5 below], depend-
ing on \iyoυσι [W. 628 (583) ; B. § 141, 3]. c. to
the infinitive, by a mingling of two constructions,
common even in classic Grk., according to which the
writer beginning the construction with on falls into the
construction of the ace. with inf.: Acts xxvii. 10; cf.
W. 339 (318) X. 2; [§63, 2c.; B. 383 (328)]. On the
anacoluthon found in 1 Co. xii. 2, ace. to the reading on
ore (which appears in cod. Sin. also [and is adopted by
Lbr.TTrWH (yet cf. their note)]), cf. B. 383 (328)
sq. 5. on is placed before direct discourse ('re-
citative 'on) [B. §139, 51; λν.§05, 3 c.; § 60, 9 (and
Moulton's note)] : Mt. ii. 23 [?] ; vii. 23 ; xvi. 7 ; xxi. 16 ;
xxvi. 72, 74; xxviL 43; Mk. [ii. 16 TTrWH (see 2
above) ; but see όστις, 4]; vi. 23 ; xii. 19 [cf. B. 237
(204)] ; Lk. i. 61 ; ii. 23 ; iv. 43 ; xv. 27 ; Jn. i. 20 ; iv.
17; XV. 25; xvi. 17; Acts xv. 1 ; Heb. xi. 18 ; 1 Jn. iv.
20 ; Rev. iii. 1 7, etc. ; most frequently after λeyω, q. v.
II. 1 a., p. 373* hot. [Noteworthy is 2 Thess. iii. 10, cf.
B. § 139, 53.]
II. the reason why anything is said to be or to be
done, because, since, for that, for, (a causal conjunc. ; Lat.
ου
460
quoti, quia, quom, nam) ; [on the diff. botw. it anil yap
cf. Wcstcott, Epp. of Jn. p. 70] ; a. it is added to
a speaker's words to show what ground he gives for his
opinion; as, μακάμιο; etc. ότι, ΛΙΐ. v. 4—12; xiii. 1β;
Llv. vi. 20 Sij. ; xiv. 14 ; after ovai, Mt. .\i. 21 ; xxiii. IS-
IS, 23, 25, 27, 2!) : Lk. vi. 24 scj. ; x. 13 ; xi. 42-44, 4«,
52; Jiide 11 ; cf. furtlier, Mt. vii. 13; xvii. 15; xxv. 8;
Mk. V. 9 ; ix. 3,S [(i Tr mrg. om. Trtxt. br. the cl.] ; Lk.
vii.47; xxiii. 40; Jn. i. 30 ; v.27; ix.l6; xvi.9-11,11,
1(> [T Tr W'H om. L br. cl.] ; Acts i. 5, and often ; — or is
added by the narrator, to give the reason for his own
opinion: ^It. ii. IS; ix. 36 ; Mk. iii. 30; vi. 34 ; .In. ii.
25; Acts i. 17; — or, in general, by a teacher, and often
in such a way that it relates to his entire statement or
views: .Mt. v. 45; I .In. iv. 18; 2 .In. 7; Kev. iii. 10. b.
ότι makes reference to some word or words that precede
or immediately follow it [cf. W. § 23, 5; § 53, 8 b. ; U.
§127,6]; as, διά τοίτο, Jn. viii. 47; x. 17; xii. 3!); 1 .In.
iii. 1, etc. δίάτί; Ro.ix.32; 2Co.xi.ll. χάριν τίνοί ;
1 Jn. iii. 12. οΖτωί, Rev. iii. 16. iv τούτω, 1 .In. iii. 20.
ότι in the protasis, Jn. i. 50 (51) ; xx. 29. It is followed
by bia toCto, Jn. χ v. 19. oi\ oTt . . . αλλ' ότι, not be-
causi' . . . but because, Jn. vi. 2(); xii. 6.
III. On the combination ώί on see i>s, I. 3.
[ότι interrog., i. e. o, τ» or δ «, see ocrns, 4 (and ad
init.).]
ότου, see oortt ad init.
oi, see os, ^, o, Π. 11.
οΰ before a consonant, ουκ before a vowel with a
smooth breathing, and οϋχ before an aspirated vowel ;
but sometimes in the best codd. ού;^ occurs even before
a smooth breathing; accordingly LTWIlmrg. have
adopted oi\ thni. Acts ii. 7 ; L Γ υυχ Ίοι/δαϊκώί, Gal. ii.
14 (see WII. Inlrod. § 409) ; L οΐχ ολίγο?, Acts xix. 23;
οίχ ηγάπησαν, Rev. .\ii. 11 ; and contrariwise ουκ before
an aspirate, as ουκ (<mjKfv, .Jn. viii. 44 T; [oix (vfKfv,
2 Co. vii. 12 T] ; (οϋκ fipov, Lk. xxiv. Ά ; [ούκ ϋπάρχιι.
Acts iii. 6] in cod. S [also C * ; cf. cod. Alex, in 1 Esdr.
iv. 2, 12; Job xix. 16; xxxviii. 11, 26]); cf. W. § 5, 1 d.
14; B. 7 ; \_A. v. Sckiilz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1S75,
pp. 54-58 ; Sophocles, Hist, of Grk. Alphab., Isted. 1848,
p. 64 S([. (on the breathing) ; Ti/f. Sept.. ed. 4, Proleg.
pp. xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation etc., 2d ed., p. Iv.
no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. .\lvii. no. 11 (cf. p. xlii. no. 5);
Kuenen am! Cuhcl, N. T. etc. p. Ixxxvii. sq. ; Tdf. Proleg.
p. SO Sep; Wn. Intr. §§ 405 sqq., and App. p. 143 sip] ;
Sept. for xS, J"X, ΓΧ; a particle of negation, not (how
it differs fr. μή has been explained in μή, ad init.) ; it is
used 1. absol. and accented, oi", nny, no, [W. 476
(444)]: in answers, ό fit φησιν oS, Mt. xiii. 29; ane-
κρίθη ■ οϋ, .In. i. 21 ; [xxi. 5], cf . vii. 1 2 ; repeated, o5 oC,
it strengthens the negation, nai/, nn>i, by no means, Mt.
V. 37 ; ήτω ΰμων το o5 οΰ, let your denial be truthful, .las.
V. 12; on 2 Co. i. 17-19, see vai 2. It is joined to
other words, — to a finite verb, simply to deny that
what is declared in the verb applies to the subject of
the sentence : Mt. i. 25 (ονκ ΐγΙνωσκ€ν αυτήν) ; Mk. iii.
Ϊ5; Lk. vi. 43; Jn. x. 28; Acts vii. 5; Ro. i. 16, and
times without number. It has the same force when
conjoined to participles: as ούκ aepa δί'ρων, 1 Co. ix.
26 ; oiiK ovTos αΰτω τίκνου, at the time when he had no
child. Acts vii. 5 (^μή Svtos would be, although he had no
child) ; add, Ro. viii. 20 ; 1 Co. iv. 14 ; 2 Co. iv. 8; GaL
iv.8,27; Col.ii. 19; PhiLiii.3; IIeb.xi.85; lPet.i.8;
ό . . • ουκ tiv ποιμην, Jn. χ. 12 (where ace. to class, usage
μή must have been emi)luyed, because such a jicr.son is
imagined as is not a shejilierd ; [cf. B. 351 (301) and
μή, I. 5 b.]). in relative sentences: «σικ . . . τικίτ οι οΰ
marevovaiv, Jn. vi. Gi; add, Mt. x. 38; xii. 2; Lk. vi. 2;
Ro. XV. 21 ; Gal. iii. 10, etc. ; οίκ ΐστιν or and oi&iv «στι»
3 foil, by a fut. : Mt. x. 26 ; Lk. viii. 17; xii. 2 ; Wr ίστιν,
OS ov foil, by a pres. indie. : Acts xix. 35 ; 1 leb. xii. 7 ; cf.
W. 4S1 (44.S); B. 355 (.'iOS) ; in statements introduced
by oTi after verbs of understanding, perceiving, saying,
etc. : .In. v. 42 ; viii. 55, etc. ; on ουκ (where οϋκ is pleo-
nastic) after apvf'iaeai, 1 Jn. ii. 22 ; cf. B. § 14H, 13 ; [W.
§65,2/3.]; — loan infiii., where μή might have been ex-
pected: Tiff «n xpda Κίΐτά την τάζιν Μΐλχκτ. fTfpov oat'
Ιστασθαι Upia κα\ οΰ κατά Tt'jV τύξιν Άαρων "Κί-^ισθαι, Ileb.
vii. 11 (where the dilli<ulty is hardly removed by saying
[e. g. Λvith W. 482 (44;i)] that oi belongs only to κατά τήψ
τάξιν Άαρ-, not to the infiu.). it serves to deny other
parts of statements : οίκ iv σοφία Xuyov, 1 Co. i. 17 ; ov
pi\avi, οίκ iv πλιι^ί \ιθιναις, 2 Co. iii. 3, and many other
ex.\.; — to deny the object, tXtos (R(i ΐ^ιην) ΘΆ,ω, οΰ
θυιτίαν, Mt. ix. 13; xii. 7; οϊκ ipc Sixfrat, IMk. ix. 37. It
blends Λvith the term to which it is prefixed into a single
and that an affirmative idea [W. 476 (444); cf. B. 347
(298)] ; as, ουκ iau>, to prerent, hinder. Acts xvi. 7 ; xix.
30, (cf., on this i)lirase, Hcrin. ad Vig. ]). 887 si\.) ; owe
?χω, to be piior, Mt. xiii. 1 2 ; Mk. iv. 25, (see ϊχω, I. 2 a.
J). 266"') ; τα ουκ ανήκοντα [or α ουκ άνηκΐν, L 'Γ Tr WH],
uiisri'inti/, dishonorable, Eph. v. 4 (sec μή, I. 5 d. fin. p.
410•; [cf. B. § 148, 7 a. ; W. 486 (452)]); often so as to
form c litotes; as, οϋκ ayvo(a>, to know well, 2 Co. ii. 11
(Sap. xii. 10) ; οϋκ ολίγο», not a few, i. e. very many, Acte
xvii. 4, 12; xix. 23 s(p ; xv. 2; xiv. 28 ; xxvii. 20 ; oi
π-ολλαΐ ήμίραι, a few days, Lk. χ v. 13 ; Jn. ii. 12 ; Acts L
5 ; οϋ πολύ, Acts .\xvii. 14 ; οϋ μιτρίωί. Acts xx. 12 ; οΰ«
ίίσημο!, not undistinguished [A. V. no mean etc.], Acts
.\xi. 39 ; οίκ (Κ μ(τρου, Jn. iii. 34. it serves to limit the
term to which it is joined : οϋ πάντω!, not utior/clher, not
entirelfi (see ttw'tws. c. /S ) ; οϋ πάί, not any and erery one,
Mt. vii. 21 ; plur. οϋ πάντα, not all, Mt. xix. 11 ; Ro. ix.
6; X. 16; οΰ ηασα σαρξ, not every kind of flesh, 1 Co. χ v.
39 ; οΰ iraiTt τω λπώ, not to all the people. Acts x. 41 ;
on the other hand, when οΰ is joined to the verb, ττάι
. . . οι must be rendered nc one, no, (as in Hebrew, now
Sd . . . nS, now ii^ . . .h2. cf. Winer, Lex. Hebr. et
Chald. p. 513 scp) : Lk. 1.37; Eph. v. 5 ; 1 Jn. ii. 21;
Rev. xxii. 3 ; πάσα σαρξ . . . οΰ w. a verb, no Jlesh, no
mortal, Mt. xxiv. '^ ; Mk. xiii. 20; Ro. iii. 20 ; GaL iL
16; ef. W. §26, 1; [B. 121 (106)]. Joined to a noun
it denies and annuls the idea of the noun ; as, τ6ν oi
λαό», a people that is not a people (Germ, ein Nichtrolk,
a no-people), Ro. ix. 25, cf. 1 Pet. ii. 10; ίπ' οϋκ idvei.
461
ovBe
[R. V. with that which is no nation'], Ro. x. 19 (so Dj; nS;
Ss 50, a no-god, Deut. xxxii. 21 ; yj; sS, η nnl-wood, Is.
X. 15; ουκ apxKpeis, 2 Mace. iv. 13; ή ού δ'άλυσίί, Thuc.
1, 137, 4 ; 17 οϋ π(ριτ(ΐχισί! 3, 9."), 2; ή ουκ (ξουσία 5, 50,
3; δι' άπαροσίναν . . . κουκ anoSf ιξιν, Eur. ΙΙίρροΙ. 196,
and other ex.\. in Grk. writ. ; non sutor. Hot. sat. 2, 3,
106; iio7icor/)us,Cic.acad. 1,39 fin.); cf. W. 476 (444);
[B. § 148, 9]; ή ουκ η-γαττημίνη, Ro. ix. 2-5; οί οίκ η\€η-
fteVot, 1 Pet. ii. 10. 3. followed by another nega-
tive, a. it strengthens the negation : ού κρίνω oiSeva,
Jn. viii. 1.5; add, Mk. v. 37; 2 Co. .\i. 9 (8); oi οΙκ ην
οιδίπ-ω oiSfis κ^ίμ(νο!, Lk. xxiii. .")3 [see ούδί'πω] ; οΰκ ■ ■ •
oiSev, nothing at all, Lk. iv. 2 ; Jn. vi. 63 ; xi. 49 ; xii. 19 ;
XV. 5 ; οΰ μίΚ(ΐ σοι ntpl oiSfvot, Mt. xxii. 1 6 ; οΰκ . . . οΰκίτι.
Acts viii. 39 ; cf. Matthiae § 609, 3 ; Kiihner ii. § .51 6 ; VV.
§ 55, 9 b.; [B. § 148, 11]. b. as in Latin, it changes
a negation into an affirmation (cf. Matthiae § 609, 2;
Klolz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 695 sq. ; AV. § 55, 9 a.; B. § 148,
12); οΰ πάρα τοΰτο ουκ ΐστιν «κ τοϋ σώματοί, not on this
account is it not of the body, i. e. it belongs to the body,
does not cease to be of the body, 1 Co. xii. 15 ; οΰ δυνά-
μ(θα a ίϊδομ(ν και ηκούσαμ(ν μη XaXfii/, !ve are unable not
to speak [A.V. we cannot but speak]. Acts iv. 20. 4.
It is used in disjunctive statements where one
thing is denied tiiat another may be established [\V.
§ 55, 8; cf. B. 356 (306)] : οΰκ . . . αλλά, Lk. viii. 52;
xxiv. 6 [WH reject the cl.] ; Jn. i. 33; vii. 10, 12, 16;
viii. 49; Acts x. 41; Ro. viii. 20; iCo. xv. 10; 2 Co. iii.
.! ; viii. 5 ; Heb. ii. 16, etc. ; see άλλα, II. 1 ; oi';^ Ίνα . . .
αλλ* 'να, Jn. iii. 1 7 ; ουχ Ίνα . . . άλλα, Jn. vi. 38 ; οΰ μόνον
. . . άλλα και, see άλλα, II. 1 and μόνος. 2 ; ουκ . . . ft μή,
see «, III. 8 c. ρ. 171'; οΰ μη w. subjunc. aor. foil, by
(I μη, Rev. xxi. 27 [see cl as above, β.]. 5. It is
joined to other particles: οΰ μη, not at all, by no means,
.'surely not, in no wise, see μή, IV. ; οΰ μηκίτι w. aor. sub-
junc. Mt. xxi. 19 LTTrmrg. WH. μη οϋ, ivliere μή is
interrog. (Lat. nuyn) and οΰ negative [cf. B. 248 (214),
354(304); W.5n(476)]: Ro.x.l8s(|.; lCo.ix.4sq.;
xi. 22. tl oi, see ft, III. 11 p. 172\ οΰ γαρ (see γάρ, I.
p. ΙΟΘ'), Acts xvi. 37. 6. As in Ilebr. sS w. impf.,
80 in bibl. Grk. οΰ w. 2 pers. fut. is used in emphatic
prohibition (in prof. auth. it is milder; cf. W. §43,
5 c.; also 501 sq. (467); [B. §139, 64]; Fritzsche on Mt.
p. 259 sq. [cf. p. 252 sq.] tliinks otherwise, but not cor-
rectly) : Mt. vi. 5 ; and besides in the moral precepts
of the O. T., Mt. iv. 7 ; xix. 18 ; Lk. iv. 12 ; Acts xxiii.
5; Ro. vii. 7 ; xiii. 9. 7. oi is used interrogar
tively — when an affirmative answer is expected (Lat.
nonne; [\V. § 57, 3 a. ; B. 247 (213)]) : Mt. vi. 26, 30;
xvii. 24; Mk. iv. 21 ; xii. 24; Lk. xi. 40; Jn. iv. 35; vii.
25 : Acts ix. 21 ; Ro. ix. 21 ; 1 Co. ix. 1, 6 sq. 1 2 ; Jas. ii.
4. and often ; οΰκ οΊδατ( κτλ. ; and tlie like, see €Ϊδω, II.
1 p. 174»; άλλ' οΰ, Heb. iii. 16 (see άλλα, I. 10 p. 28») ;
οΰκ άποκρίνη oiSiv; answerest thou nothing at all? Mk.
xiv. 60; XV. 4 ; — where an exclamation of reproach or
wonder, which denies directly, may take the place of a
negative question: Mk. iv. 13, 38; Lk. xvii. 18; Acts
xiii. 10 [cf. B. § 139, 65]; xxi. 38 (on which see Spa, 1);
cf. W. u. s. ; oi μή πιω σΰτό; shall I not drink it? Jn.
.xviii. 11 ; cf. W. p. 512 (477) ; [cf. B. § 139, 2].
οΰά, Tdf. οΰ5 [see Proleg. p. 101 ; cf. Chandler § 892],
ah.' ha.' an interjection of wonder and amazement:
Epict. diss. 3, 22, 34 ; 3, 23, 24 ; Dio Cass. 63, 20 ; called
out by the overthrow of a boastful adversary, Mk. xv. 29.*
oial, an interjection of grief or of denunciation ; Sept.
chiefly for "in and 'is ; alas .' icoe .' with a dat of pers.
added, Mt. xi. 21; xviii. 7; xxiii. 13-16, 23, 2.5, 27, 29;
.xxiv. 19 ; xxvi. 24 ; Mk. xiii. 1 7 ; xiv. 21 ; Lk. vi. 24-26 ;
X. 13 ; xi. 42-44, 46 sq. 52; xxi. 23 ; xxii. 22; Jude 11 ;
Rev. xii. 12 R G L ed. min. [see below], (Num. xxi. 29 ;
Is. iii. 9, and often in Sept.) ; thrice repeated, and folL
by a dat., Rev. viii. 13 R G L WH mrg. [see below] ; the
dat. is omitted in Lk. xvii. 1 ; twice repeated and foil,
by a nom. in ])lace of a voc. Rev. xviii. 10, 16, 19, (Is. i.
24; V. 8-22; Ilab. ii. 6, 12, etc.) ; e.xceptionally, with an
ace. of the pers., in Rev. viii. 13 Τ Tr WH txt., and xii.
12 L Τ Tr WH; this accus., I think, must be regarded
eitlier as an ace. of e.xclamation (cf. Matthiae § 410), or
as an imitation of the constr. of the ace. after verbs of
injuring, (B. § 131, 14 judges otherwise); with the ad-
dition of ΰπό and a gen. of the evil the infliction of which
is deplored [cf. B. 322 (277) ; W. 37: (348)], Mt. xviii. 7;
also of €K, Rev. viii. 13. Asasubstantive, 17 οιΐαί (the
writer seems to have been led to use the fem. by the
similarity of ή θλίψα or ή ταλαιπωρία; cf. W. 179 (169))
woe, calamity: Rev. ix. 12; xi. 14; δΰο οΰαι, Rev. ix. 12,
(ουαΐ €π\ ούαί ίσται, Ezek. vii. 26 ; οΰαι ημάς Χήψζται,
Evang. Nicod. c. 21 [Pars ii. v. 1 (ed. Tdf.)]) ; so also
in the phrase ούαί μοί eVriK icoe is unto me, i. e. divine
penalty threatens me, 1 Co. ix. 16, cf. IIos. ix. 12; [Jer. vi.
4]; Epict. diss. 3, 19, 1, (frequent in eccles. writ.).*
οϋδαμώβ (fr. ουδαμός, not even one ; and this fr. ούϋ and
άμός [allied perh. w. άμα; cf. Vanicck p. 972; Curtius
§ 600]), adv., fr. Hdt. [and Aeschyl.] down, by no means,
in no irise : Mt. ii. C.*
ovSe, [fr. Horn, down], a neg. disjunctive conjunction,
compounded of ού and δ€, and therefore prop. i. q. but
not ; generally, howex er, its oppositive force being lost,
it serves to continue a negation. [On the elision of e
when the next word begins with a vowel (observed by
Tdf. in eight instances, neglected in fifty-eight), see Tilf.
Proleg. p. 96 ; cf. WH. App. p. 146 ; W. § 5, 1 a. ; B. p.
10 sq.] It signifies 1. and not, continuing a nega-
tion, yet differently from oCre ; for the latter connects
parts or members of the same thing, since tc is adjunc-
tive like the Lat. r/ue ; but oiSe places side by side things
that are equal and mutually exclude each other [(?).
There appears to be some mistake here in what is said
about 'mutual exclusion' (cf. W. § 55, 6) : οϋδί, like δ(,
always makes reference to something preceding; oCre
to what follows also; the connection of clauses nega-
tived by ouTf is close and internal, so that they are mu-
tually complementary and combine into a unity, whereas
clauses negatived by oiSe follow one another much more
loosely, often almost by accident as it were ; see W. 1. c,
and esp. the quotations there given from Benfey and
ov^ek
462
ovKen
Klotz.] It differs from μη&ί as ov does from μή [q. v. ad
init.] ; after ov, where each has its own verb : Mt. v. 15 ;
vi. 28 ; Mk. iv. -22 ; Lk. vi. 44 ; Acts ii. 27 ; ix. 9 ; xvu. 24
6(1. ; Gal. i. 1 7 ; iv. 14 ; ουκ ο'δα οΟδε ίπϊσταμαι, Mk. xiv. G8
KG Lmrg. [al. oCre . . . ovrf] (Cic. pro Kosc. Am. 43
"non novi ne(iue scio") ; cf. W. 4^0 (450) c; [B. 3U7
(315) note] ; ou . . . οϋδί ■ . ■ ούδί, nut . . . nor . . . nor, Mt.
vi. 2G ; οΰδ£Ϊ£ . . . oOfie . . . oiBe . . . oiSi, Kev. v. 3 [R G;
cf. B. 367 (315) ; W. 491 (457)]; οΰ . . . ούΒί foil, by a
' fut. . . . ούδΐ μή foil, by subjunc. aor. . . . ov8i, Kev. vii.
IB. ow . . . οΰδί, the same verb being common to both:
Mt.x. 24 ; XXV. 13 ; Lk. vi. 43 ; viii. 17 [cf. AV.300 (281) ;
B. 355 (305) cf. § 139, 7] ; Jn. vi. 24 ; xiii. 16 ; Acts viii.
21 ; xvi. 21 ; xxiv. 18 ; Ro. ii. 28; ix. IC ; Gal. i. 1 ; iii. 28 ;
1 Th. V. 5; 1 Tim. ii. 12; Rev. xxi. 23. preceded by
οΰπω, )ilk. viii. 17; — by oCSeis, Mt. ix. 17; — by Ίνα μή,
which is foil, by ovSi . . . οΰδ(, where μη&( . . . μη&ί might
have been expected (cf. B. § 148, 8 ; [W. 474 (442)]) :
Rev. ix. 4. ουδέ γάρ, for neither, Jn. viii. 42 ; Ro. viii.
7. 2. afco noi [A. V. generally neii/ier] : Mt. vi. 15;
xxi. 27 ; XXV. 45 ; Mk. xi. 26 [R L]; Lk. xvi. 31 ; Jn. xv.
4; Ro.iv. 15 ; xi. 21 ; 1 Co. xv. 13, 16 ; Gal. i. 12 (οΰδί
yap (γώ [cL B. 367 (315) note ; 492 (458)]) ; Ileb. viii. 4,
etc. ; αλλ' ούδί, Lk. xxiii. 15; η οΰδί, in a question, or
doth not even etc. ? 1 Co. xi. 14 Rec. ; the simple oiihe,
nuni ne quiilem (have ye not even etc.) in a question
where a negative answer is assumed (see ou, 7) : Mk. xii.
10 ; Lk. vi. 3 ; xxiii. 40 ; and G L Τ Tr WII in 1 Co. xi.
14. 3. not even [B. 369 (316)]: Mt. vi. 29; viii.
10 ; Mk. vi. 31 ; Lk. vii. 9 ; xii. 27; Jn. xxi. 25 [Tdf. om.
the vs.] ; 1 Co. v. 1 ; xiv. 21 ; ουδέ ftr [W. 173 (1G3) ; B.
§ 127, 32], Acts iv. 32 ; Ro. iii. 10 ; 1 Co. vi. 5 [L Τ Tr
WH ούδ«ν] ; οϋδε ίΐ-, Jn. i. 3 ; αλλ' οίδ/, Acts xix. 2 ; 1
Co. iii. 2 (Rec. αλλ' oiVf) ; iv. 3 ; Gal. ii. 3. in a double
negative for the sake of emphasis, ουκ . . . oiSf [B. 369
(316); W. 500 (465)]: Mt. xxvii. 14; Lk. xviii. 13; Acts
vii. 5.
ov8e($, oi8epia (the fern, only in these pass. : Mk. vi.
5 ; Lk. iv. 26 ; Jn. xvi. 29 ; xviii. 38 ; xix. 4 ; Acts x.xv.
18 ; xxvii. 22 ; Phil. iv. 15 ; 1 Jn. i. 5, and Rec. in Jas. iii.
12), oibfv (and, ace. to a pronunciation not infreq. fr.
Aristot. and Theophr. down, oideU, οΐθίν : 1 Co. xiii. 2
R" L Τ Tr WII ; Acts xix. 27 L Τ Tr WH ; 2 Co. xi. 8
(9)LTTrWII; Lk. xxii. 35 TTrWH; xxiii. 14TTr
WH ; Acts XV. 9 Τ Tr AVH txt, ; Acts xxvi. 26 Τ WH
Tr br. ; 1 Co. xiii. 3 Tdf.; see μη^ιί: init. and Gbttling
on .\ristot. pol. p. 278 ; [Meisterhans, Grammatik d. At•
tisch. Inschriften, § 20, 5 ; see L. and S. a. v. oiedt; cf.
Lob. Pathul. Elem. ii. 344] ; Bitm. Ausf. Spr. § 70 Anm.
''), (fr. ούδί and ets), [fr. Hom. down], anil not one, no
one, none, no ; it differs from μι/δεί? as ov does from μή
[q. V. ad init.]; 1. with nouns; masc, Lk. iv. 24;
xvi. 13; 1 Co. viii. 4; oiSeis άλλος, Jn. xv. 24; ουδεμία
in the passages given above ; neut., Lk. xxiii. 4 ; Jn. x.
41 ; Acts xvii. 21 ; xxiii. 9 ; xxviii. 5 ; Ro. viii. 1 ; xiv. 14 ;
Gal. V. 10, etc. 2. absolutely : οΰδίίϊ, Mt. vi. 24;
ix. 16 ; Mk. iii. 27 ; v. 4 ; vii. 24 ; Lk. i. 61 ; v. 89 [WH
in br.] ; vii. 28; Jn. i. 18; iv. 27; Acts xviii. 10; xxv. 11 ;
Ro. xiv. 7, and very often, with a partitive gen. : Lk.
iv. 26 ; xiv. 24 ; Jn. xiii. 28 ; Acts v. 13 ; 1 Co. i. 14 ; ii.
8; lTim.vi.16. ούδίϊί ίί μή, Mt. xix. 1 7 Rec. ; xvii. 8;
Mk. X. 18 ; Lk. xviii. 19 ; Jn. iii. 13 ; 1 Co. xii. 3 ; Rev.
xix. 12, etc. ; eav μή,^η. iii. 2 ; vi. 44, 65. ούκ . . . oiSf it
(sceou, 3 a.), Mt. xxii. 16; Mk.v.37; vi.5;xii.l4; Lk.
viii. 43 ; Jn. viii. 15 ; xviii. 9, 31 ; Acts iv. 12; 2 Co. xi.
9 (8) ; ovKe'ri . . . οΰδίίί, Mk. ix. 8; ούδέττω . . . oidfis, I.k.
xxiii. 53 [Tdf. oi&f\s . . . ούδέπω ; L Tr WH οίδίΐί οίττω] ;
Jn. xix. 41 ; Acts viii. 16 [L Τ Tr WII] ; oMfls . . . ονκίτι,
Mk. xii. 34; Rev. xviii. 11. neut. οϋδίΐ», nothing, Mt. x.
26 [cf. λν. 300 (281); Β. 355 (305)]; xvii. 20; xxvi. 62;
xxvii. 12, and very often; with a partitive gen., Lk. ix.
36; xviii. 34; Acts .xviii. 17; 1 Co. ix. 15; xiv. 10 [RG];
oi8(V (l μή, Mt. V. 13; xxi. 19; Mk. ix. 29; xi. 13; μή
Tivos; with the answer oCSfvoi, Lk. xxii. 35; υυδίν ίκτάς
w. gen.. Acts xxvi. 22 ; oiBei/ μοι διαφίρα. Gal. ii. 6 ; it
follows another negative, thereby strengthening the ne-
gation (see oiJ, 3 a.) : Mk. xv. 4 sq. ; xvi. 8 ; Lk. iv. 2 ; ix.
36; .x.x. 40; Jn. iii. 27; v. 19, 30; ix. 33; xi. 49; xiv.
30; Acts xxvi. 26 [Lchm. om.] ; 1 Co. viii. 2 [R G] ; ix.
15 [G L Τ Tr AVII] ; οΰδίν ov μή w. aor. subjunc. Lk. x.
19 [R" G WH mrg. ; see μή, IV. 2]. ovSiv, absoL, nofh-
iru/ whatever, not at all, in no wise, [cf. B. § 131, 10] : dSi-
Kflf (see άδι«'ω, 2 b.). Acts xxv. 10; Gal. iv. 12 ; οϋδϊν
διαφί/^βίν TLvos, Gal. iv. 1 ; νστΐρΐΐν, 2 Co. xii. 1 1 ; ωφ(\(1ν,
Jn. vi. 63 ; 1 Co. xiii. 3. ovbiv ΐστιν, it is nothing, of no
importance, etc. [cf. B. § 129, 5] : Mt. xxiii. 16, 18 ; Jn.
viii. 54 ; 1 Co. vii. 19 ; with a gen., none of these things
is true. Acts xxi. 24 ; xxv. 1 1 ; oiMv (Ιμι, I am nothing,
of no account : 1 Co. xiii. 2 ; 2 Co. xii. 11, (see exx. fr. Grk.
auth. in Passow s. v. 2; [L. and S. s.v. IL 2 ; Meyer on 1
Co. 1. C.]); fif oHiv λογισθήναι (see λογίζομαι, 1 a.). Acts
xi.x. 27 ; (Is oidiv γίνιυθαι, to come to nought. Acts v. 36
[W. § 29, 3 a. ; c'c ού&(νί, in no respect, in nothing, Phil.
:. 20 (cf. μηδιίϋ, g.)].
ovSe'iroxe. adv., denying absolutely and objectively, (fr.
oiSc and ποτ(, prop, not ever), [fr. Hom. down], never
Mt. vii. 23; ix. 33 ; xxvi. 33; Mk. ii. 12; [Lk. xv. 29
(bis)]•; .In. vii. 46; Acts x. 14; xi. 8 ; xiv. 8; 1 Co. xiii.
8; Ileb. X. 1, 11. interrogatively, did ye never, etc.:
Mt. xxi. 16, 42; Mk. ii. 25."
ούΒί'-π-ω, adv., simjily negative, (fr. οΰδί and the enclitic
πώ), [fr. Aeschyl. down], tiot yet, not as yet : Jn. vii. 39
(where L Tr WH ού'πω) ; xx. 9. οϋδέττω ούδίΐί, never
any one [A. Y. never man yet^, Jn. xix. 41 ; [οΰδέπω . . .
ί'ττ' oiSfvl, as yet ... upon none. Acts viii. 16LTTr
WH] ; ovK . . . ούδί'πω ούδ^ΐΓ (see οΰ, 3 a.), Lk. xxiii. 53 [L
Tr WH ουκ . . . οΰδείί ονπω ; Tdf. ουκ . . . oidfis οΰδί'πω] ;
οΰδί'ττω oCSfV (L Τ Tr WII simply οΰ?τω) not yet (any-
thing), 1 Co. viii. 2.*
ou6c(s, ονθίν, see oiSels, init.
ovKCTi [also ivritten separately by Rec* (generally),
Tr (nine times in .Jn.), Tdf. (in Pliilem. 16)], (ουκ, trt),
an adv. which denies simply, and thus differs from μηκίτι
(q. v.), no longer, no more, no further : Mt. xix. 6; Mk.
x. 8: Lk.xv. 19, 21; Jn. iv. 42; vi. 66 ; Acts xx. 25, 38 ;
Ro. vi. 9; xiv. 15; 2 Co. v. 16; Gal. iii. 25; iv. 7; Eph.
ουκουν
463
ουν
ii. 19 ; Philen. 16 ; Heb. χ. 18, 26, etc. ; ουκίη ηΧθον, I
came not again [R. V. I forebore to come], 2 Co. i. 23.
with anotlier neg. particle in order to strengthen the ne-
gation : ot)5e . . . ούκίτι, Mt. xxii. 46 ; οϋκ . . . ούκ€Τΐ, Acts
TUi. 39; ouSf'is ■ ■ ■ ούκίτι, Mk. xii. 34; Rev. xviii. 11 ;
οιϊκίΓΐ . . . ouSeV, Mk. vii. 12; .w. 5 ; Lk. -xx. 40; οϋκίτι
. . . οϋ8(ρα, Mk. ix. 8 ; ou/ttVi οϋ μή, Mk. xiv. 25 ; Lk. x.xii.
16 [U'H om. L Tr br. ούκίτί] ; Rev. xviii. 14 [Tr cm.] ;
oi&i . ■ . oUKfTi oi)5ei's, Mk. v. 3 LTWHTrtxt. ούκίτι
is used logically [cf. W. §65, 10] ; as, οΰκίτι €γώ ior it
cannot now be said ότι ΐγώ etc., Ro. vii. 17, 20 ; ual. ii.
20; add, Ro. xi. 6; Gal. iii. 18. [(Horn., Hes., Hdt., al.)]
ovKoiv, (fr. ουκ and oiv), adv., not therefore ; and since
a speaker often introduces in this way his own opinion
[see Kruger as below], the particle is used afBrmatively,
therefore, then, the force of the negative disappearing.
Hence the saying of Pilate οΰκοϊιυ βασίλ(ΰ{ fi σΰ must
be taken affirmatively : then (since thou speakest of thy
βασιλεία) thou art a king! (Germ, also bist du doch ein
Koniij .'), Jn. xviii. 37 [cf. B. 249 (214)] ; but it is better
to write ονκουν, so that Pilate, arguing from the words
of Christ, asks, not without irony, art thou, not a king
then f or in any case, thou art a king, art thou not ? cf. W.
512 (477). The difference between οικούν and οϋκουν is
differently stated by different writers ; cf. Herm. ad Vig.
p. 792 sqq. ; Kriiger § 69, 51, 1 and 2 ; KUhner § 508, 5
ii. p. 715 sqq., also the 3d excurs. appended to his ed. of
Xen. memor. ; \_Baumlein, Partikeln, pp. 191-198].*
ού μή, see μή, IV.
οΰν a conj. indicating that something follows from an-
other necessarily ; [al. regard the primary force of the
particle as confirmatory or continuative, rather than
illative ; cf. Passow, or L. and S. s. v. ; Kiihner § 508, 1 ii.
p. 707 sqq. ; Baumlein p. 1 73 sqq. ; Kruger § 69, 52 ; Don-
aldson p. 571 ; Rost in a program " Ueber Ableitung "
u. s. w. p. 2 ; Klotz p. 717 ; Hartung ii. 4]. Hence it is
used in drawing a conclusion and in connecting sen-
tences together logically, then, therefore, acconlinglt/,
consequently, these things being so, [(Klotz, Rost,al., have
■wished to derive the word fr. the neut. ptcp. ov (cf.
όντως) ; but see Baumlein or Kiihner u. s.) ; cf. W. § 53,
8] : Mt. iii. 10 ; x. 32 (since persecutions are not to be
dreaded, and consequently furnish no excuse for denyinn-
me [cf. W. 455 (424)]) ; Mt. xviii. 4 ; Lk. iii. 9 ; xvi." 2?!
Jn. viii. 38 (jcat νμβις ουν, and ye accordingly, i. e. * since,
as is plain from my case, sons follow the example of their
fatliers'; Jesus says this in sorrowful irony [W. 455
(424)]) ; Acts i. 21 (since the office of the traitor Judas
must be conferred on another) ; Ro. v. 9 ; vi. 4 ; xiii. 10;
1 Co. iv. 16 (since I hold a father's place among you) ; 2
Co. v. 20 ; Jas. iv. 1 7, and many other exx. As respects
details, notice that it stands a. in exhortations
(to show what ought now to be done by reason of what
has been said), i. q. wherefore, [our transitional there-
fore]: Mt. iii. 8; v. 48; ix. 38; Lk. xi. 35; x.xi. 14, 36
[R G L mrg. Tr mrg.] ; Acts iii. 19; xiii. 40; Ro. vi. 12;
xiv. 13 ; 1 Co. xvi. 11 ; 2 Co. viii. 24 ; Eph. v. 1 ; vi. 14;
Phil. ii. 29 ; Col. ii. 16 ; 2 Tim. i. 8 ; Heb. iv. 1, 11 ; x.
35 ; Jas. iv. 7 ; v. 7 ; 1 Pet. iv. 7 ; v. 6 ; Rev. i. 19 [G L
Τ Tr AVH] ; iii. 3, 19, and often ; νϋν ουν, now therefore,
Acts xvi. 36. b. in questions, then, therefore,
(Lat. igitur) ; a. when the question is, what follows
or seems to follow from what has been said : Mt. .xxii.
28; .xxvii. 22 [W. 455 (424)]; Mk. .\v. 12; Lk. iii. 10;
x.x. 15, 33; Jn. viii. 5; τί ουν ίροϋμ(υ; Ro. vi. 1 ; vii. 7;
i.x. 14 ; Ti ουν φημί; 1 Co. χ. 19 ; τί ουν; what then f i. e.
how then does the matter stand? [cf. W. § 64, 2 a.], Jn.
i. 21 [here \VH mrg. punct. τί ουν σϋ ;] Ro. iii. 9 ; vi. 1 5 ;
xi. 7 ; also τί olu iuTiv ; \_ichat is it then ?] Acts .xxi. 22;
1 Co. xiv. 15, 26. β. when it is asked, whether
this or that follows from what has just been said : Mt.
.xiii. 28 ; Lk. xxii. 70 ; Jn. xviii. 39; Ro. iii. 31 ; Gal. iii.
21. γ. when it is asked, how something which is true
or regarded as true, or what some one does, can be rec-
onciled with what has been previously said or done: Mt.
xii. 26; xiii. 27; xvii. 10 (where the thought is, -thou
commandest us to tell no one about this vision we have
had of Elijah; what relation then to this vision has the
doctrine of the scribes concerning the coming of Elijah?
Is not this doctrine confirmed by the vision?') ; Mt. xLx.
7 ; xxvi. 54 ; Lk. xx. 1 7 ; Jn. iv. 1 1 [Tdf. om. ουν] ; Acts
XV. 10 (νϋν ουν, norc therefore, i. e. at this time, therefore,
when God makes known his will so plainly) ; Acts xix.
3 ; Ro. iv. 1 (where the meaning is, ' If everything de-
pends on foith, what shall we say that Abraham gained
by outward things, i. e. by works ? ' [but note the crit.
texts]); 1 Co. vi. 15; Gal. iii. 5. 8. in general, it
serves simply to subjoin questions suggested by what
has just been said : Ro. iii. 27 ; iv. 9 sq. ; vi. 21 ; xi. 11 ;
1 Co. iii. 5, etc. c. in epanalepsis, i. e. it serves
to resume a thought or narrative interrupted by inter-
vening matter (Matthiae ii. p. 1497 ; [W. 444 (414)]),
hke Lat. igitur, inquam, our as was said, say I, to pro-
ceed, etc. : Mk. iii. 31 [R G] (cf. 21) ; Lk. iii. 7 (cf. 3) ;
Jn. iv. 45 (cf. 43) ; vi. 24 (cf. 22) ; 1 Co. viii. 4 ; xi. 20
(cf. 18) ; add, ilk. xvi. 19 [Tr mrg. br. ουν] ; Acts viii.
25 ; xii. 5 ; xiii. 4 ; xv. 3, 30 ; xxiii. 31 ; xxv. 1 ; xx%'iii. 5.
It is used also when one passes at length to a subject
about which he had previously intimated an intention to
speak : Acts xxvi. 4, 9. d. it serves to gather up
summarily what has already been said, or even what
cannot be narrated at length: Mt. i. 17; vii. 24 (where
no reference is made to what has just before been said
[?], but all the moral precepts of the Serm. on the Mount
are summed up in a single rule common to all) ; Lk. iii.
18 ; Jn. XX. 30; Acts xxvi. 22. e. it serves to adapt
examples and comparisons to the case in hand : Jn. iii.
29; xvi. 22; — or to add examples to illustrate the sub-
ject under consideration: Ro. xii. 20 Rec. f. In
historical discourse it serves to make the transition
from one thing to another, and to connect the several
parts and portions of the narrative, since the new occur-
rences spring from or are occasioned by what precedes
[cf. W. § 60, 3] : Lk. vi. 9 R G ; numberless times so in
John, as i. 22 [Lchm. om.] ; ii. 18 ; iv. 9 [Tdf. om.] ; vi. 60,
6 7 ; vii. 6 [G Τ om.], 25. 2s, 33, 35, 40 ; viii. 13, 19, 22, 25,
4(]4
ovpavot
31,57; ix. 7 8q. 10, 16; xi. 12, 16, 21, 32, 36; xii. 1-4; xiii.
12; xvi. 17, 22; xviii. 7,11 sq. 16, 27-29; xix. 20-24, 32, 38,
40 ; xxi. 5-7, etc. g. witli other conjunctions : όρα
ουν, so then, Lat. hinc igitur, in Paul ; see Spa, 5. ei oiv, if
then (where wliat has just been said and proved is carried
over to [irove something else), see el, III. 12 ; [« μίν olv,
see μίν, II. 4 J), ays'•], (ire oiv . . . (tre, ir/ielber then . . .
or: 1 Co. x. 31; xv. 11. tVti oiv, since then: Heb. ii.
14 ; iv. 6 ; for which also a participle is put with oiv, as
Acts ii. 30 ; xv. 2 [T Tr WH δί] ; xvii. 29 ; xix. 36 ; xxv.
17; xxvi. 22; Ko. v. 1 ; xv. 28; 2 Co. iii. 12; v. 11 ; vii. 1 ;
Heb. iv. 14 ; x. 10 ; 1 Pet. iv. 1 ; 2 Pet. iii. 11 [WH Tr
mrg. oZriat]. iav oiv, if then ever, in case then, or rather,
Ihcrefiirc if, tlmnftirn in case, (for in this formula, oiv, al-
though placed in the protasis, yet belongs more to the
apodosis, since it shows what will necessarily follow from
what precedes if the condition introduced l)y tav shall
ever take place) : Mt. v. 23 [cf. W. 455 (424)] ; vi. 22
[here Tdf. om. ουκ] ; xxiv. 26 ; Lk. iv. 7 ; Jn. vi. 62 ; viii.
36 ; Ro. ii. 26 ; 1 Co. xiv. 1 1, 23 ; 2 Tim. ii. 21 ; tav oiv
μη. Rev. iii. 3 ; so also όταν oiv, when therefore : Mt. vi. 2 ;
xxi. 40; xxiv. 15, and RG in Lk. xi. 34. ότί oiv, when
(or afer) therefore, so when: Jn. xiii. 12, 31 [(30)
Rec.•'"•'' LTTr WH]; xix. 30 ; xxi. 15; i.ti- hence it
came to pass that, when etc., Jn. ii. 22 ; xix. 6, H. ά,ς oiv,
when (or after) therefore: Jn. iv. 1, 40; xi. 6; xviii. 6;
XX. 1 1 ; xxi. 9 ; at oiv, as therefore. Col. ii. 6. ωσπιρ oiv,
Mt. xiii. 40. μίν oiv, foil, by &i [cf. B. § 149, 16], Mk.
xvi. 1 9 [Tr mrg. br. οίκ] ; Jn. xi.x. 25 ; Acts i. 6 ; viii. 4,
25; 1 Co. ix. 25, etc.; without an adversative conjunc.
following, see μίν, II. 4. vvv oiv, see above under a., and
b. γ. h. As to position, it is never the first word
in the sentence, but generally the second, sometimes the
third, [sometimes even the fourth, W. §61,6]; as,
[Trept της βρώσεως ουν etc. 1 Co. viii. 4] ; υί μ€ν oiv, Acts
ii. 41, and often ; π-υλλά μϊν oiv, Jn. xx. 30. i. John
uses this particle in his (jospel far more frequently
[(more than two hunch'ed times in all)] than the other
N. T. writers; in his Epistles only in tlie foil, passages:
1 Jn. ii. 24 (where G L Τ Tr WH have expunged it) ; iv.
1.") Lchm. ; 3 Jn. 8. [(From Horn, down.)]
oviro), (fr. ot! and the enclitic ττώ), adv., [fr. Hom.
down], (differing fr. μηπω, as oi does fr. μή [q. v. ad
\mt.]),not !/el; a. in a negation : Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk.
xiii. 7 ; Jn. ii. 4 ; iii. 24 ; vi. 1 7 L txt. Τ Tr WH ; vii. 6, 8»
RL Wlltxt., 8*, 30,39; viii. 20, 57; xi. 30; xx. 17; 1
Co. iii. 2 ; Heb. ii. 8 ; xii. 4 ; 1 Jn. iii. 2 ; Rev. xvii. 10,
1 2 (where Lchm. ούκ) ; oidelr οΰπω, no one ever yet (see
oiSet'r, 2, and cf. oi, 3 a.), Mk. xi. 2 L Τ Tr WH ; Lk.
xxiii. 53 L Tr WH ; Acts viii. 16 Rec. b. in ques-
tions, nondumne 1 do ye not yet etc. : Mt. xv. 1 7 R G ;
xvi. 9; Mk. iv. 40 L Tr WH; viii. 17, [21 L txt. Τ Tr
WII].•
ovpd, -5s, ή, α tail : Rev. ix. 10, 1 9 ; xii. 4. (From Hom.
down; Sept. several times for 3Ji.) *
ovpavios, -ov, in class. Grk. generally of three term.
[ W. § 1 1, 1 ; B. 25 (23)], (pvpavot), heavenly, i. e. a.
(Iwelling in heaven : & πατήρ 6 ovp., Mt. vi. 14, 26, 32 ; xv.
13; besides L Τ Tr WII in v. 48; xviii. 35; xxiii. 9;
στρατιά oip. Lk. ii. 13 (where Tr txt. WII mrg. oipa-
νοϋ). b. coming from heaven : οπτασία ovp. Acts
xxvi. 19. (Hom. in Cer. 55; Pind., Tragg., Arstph.,
al.)•
ονρανόθ<ν, (^oipavos), adv., from heaven: Acts xiv. 17;
xxvi. 13. (Horn., lies., Orph., 4 Maoc. iv. 10.) Cf. Lnh.
ad Phryn. p. 93 sq.*
ovpavos, -ov, a, [fr. a root meaning ' to cover,' ' encom-
pass'; cf. Vanicek p. 895 ; Curtius §509], Aeawen ; and,
in imitation of the Hebr. 0\ϋψ (i. e. prop, the heights
above, the upper regions), ονρανοί,-ων, oi, the heavens [W.
§27,3; B. 24 (21)], (on the use and the omission of the
art. cf. W. 121 (115)), i. e. 1. the vaulted expanse
if the sky icith all the things visible in it ; a. gener-
ally : as opp. to the earth, Heb. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 5, 10,
12 ; ό oip. «c. ή γή, \Jieaveti and eurthi i. q. the universe, the
world, (ace. to the primitive Hebrew manner of speaking,
inasmuch as they had neither the conception nor the
name of the universe, Gen. i. 1 ; xiv. 19 ; Tob. vii. 1 7 (IH) ;
1 Mace. ii. 37, etc.) : Mt. v. 18; xi. 25 ; xxiv. 35;Mk. xiii.
31 ; Lk. X. 21; xvi. 17; xxi. 33 ; Acts iv. 24 ; xiv. 15; xvii.
24 ; Re V. X. 6 ; xi v. 7 ; xx. 1 1 . The ancients conceived of
the expanded sky as an arch or vault the outmost edge of
which touched the extreme limits of the earth [see B. D.
s. v. Firmament, cf. Heaven] ; hence such expressions as
ατΓ* άκρων ονρανων €ως άκρων αντων, Mt. xxiv. 31 ; απ*
άκρου yijs (ως άκρου ονρανον, Mk. xiii. 27; νπο τον ουρανόν
(D'pon ηΠΓΐ, Eccl. i. 13 ; ii. 3, etc.), under heaven, i. e.
on earth. Acts ii. 5 ; iv. 12 ; Col. i. 23 ; «κ της (sc. χώρας,
cf. W. 591 (550) ; [B. 82 (71 sq.)]) Ιπ' [here LTTr WH
νπΐί τον ουρ.~\ ονρανον (Ις την ίιπ* ουρανόν, out of the one part
under the heaven unto the other /inrt under heaven i. e. from
one quarter of the earth to the other, Lk. xvii. 24 ; as by
this form of expression the greatest longitudinal distance
is described, so to one looking up from the earth heaven
stands as the extreme measure of altitude ; hence, κολ-
λασβαι άχρι τοΰ ουρανού, Kev. xviii. 5 [L Τ Tr WH] (on
which see κολλάω) ; νψωθήναι ΐως τοΰ οϋρανοΰ, metaph. of
a city that has reached the acme, zenith, of glory and
prosperity, Mt. .\i. 23; Lk. x. 15, (κλίος ονρανον ικ(ΐ, Ηυιη.
II. Η, 192; Od. 19, 108; προς ηνρανον βίβάζαν τινά, Soph.
Ο. C. 382 (381); exx. of similar expressions fr. other
writ, are given in Kyple, Observv. i. p. 62) ; καινοί ουρανοί
(κα\•γη καική), better heavens which will take the place of
the present after the renovation of all things, 2 Pet. iii.
13; Rev. xxi. 1 ; oi mv ουρανοί, the heavens which now
are, and which will one day be burnt up, 2 Pet. iii. 7 ; also
6 πρώτος ονρανός. Rev. xxi. 1, cf. Heb. xii. 26. But the
heavens are also likened in poetic speech to an expanded
curtain or canopy (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 2; Is. xl. 22), and to
an imroUed scroll ; hence, ί\ίσσ(ΐν [Τ Tr mrg. αΚΚάσσίΐν]
τονς oip. ώς π(ριβό\αιον, Heb. i. 12 (fr. Sept. of Ps. ci.
(cii.) 26 cod. Alex.) ; και 6 ovp. άπ(χωρίνθη ώς βιβλίο»
(Χισσόμ(νον[οΓ fΊ\ισσ.'],Rev.^■Ί.'li. b. the aerial
heavens or sky, the region where the clouds and tempests
gather, and where thunder and lightning are produced :
6 oip. πυρράζίΐ, Mt. xvi. 2 [T br. WH reject the pass.] i
ουρανο<;
465
OV>i
στνγνάζων, ib. 3 [see last ref.] ; verov fbuKf, Jas. v. 18;
add Lk. ix. 54 ; xvii. 29 ; Acts ix. 3 xxii. 6 ; Rev. xiii. 1 3 ;
xvi. 21 ; XX. 9 ; σημΛον ex or από τοϋ οίμ., Mt. .\vi. 1 ; Mk.
viii. 11 ; Lk. xi. Hi ; xxi. 11 ; τίρατα iv τώ olp. Acts ii.
19 ; κΚ(ΐ(ΐν rov οΐρανάν, to keep the rain in the sky, hin-
di;r it from falling; on the earth, Lk. iv. 25 ; Rev. xi. 6,
(σννΐχίίν TOW olp. for D'OuH tVi') Deut. xi. 1 7 ; 2 Chr.
vi. 2ti ; vii. 13 ; άνίχΐΐν τον οϋρ. Sir. xlviii. 3) ; αί ν(φί\αι
τοϋ oip; Mt. xxiv. 30; .\.\vi. 64 ; Jlk. xiv. (J2 ; το πρόσω-
πον τοϋ oip., Mt. xvi. 3 [T br. ^VII reject the pass.] ; Lk.
xii. SG ; τα Trereiva τ. ovp. (gen. of place), that fly in the
air (Gen. i. 26; I's. viii. 9; Bar. iii. 17; Judith xi. 7),
Mt. vi. 26 ; viii. 20; xiii. 32 ; Mk. iv. 32 ; Lk. viii. 5; ix.
58; xiii. 19; Acts x. 12. These heavens are opened by
being cleft asunder, and from the upper heavens, or
abode of heavenly beings, come down upon earth — now
the Holy Spirit, Mt. iii. 16 ; Mk. i. 10; Lk. iii. 21 stp; Jn.
i. 32; now angels, .In. i. 51 (52); and now in vision ap-
pear to human sight some of the things ivitliin the high-
est heaven. Acts vii. 55; x. 11, 16 ; through the aerial
heavens sound voices, which are uttere<l in the lieavenly
abode : Mt. iu. 1 7 ; Mk. i. 1 1 ; Lk. iii. 22 ; Jn. xii. 28 ; 2
Pet. i. 18. c. the sidereal or starry heacens:
τα άστρα τοϋ olp. Heb. xi. 12 (Deut. i. 10; x. 22; Eur.
Phoen. 1) ; oi αστέρα τ. olp., Mk. xiii. 25 ; Rev. vi. 13;
xii. 4, (Is. xiii. 10; xiv. 13); αί &υνύμ(α των olp. the
heavenly forces (hosts), i. e. the stars [al. take δυν. in this
phrase in a general sense (see Suvapie, !.) of the powers
which uphold and regulate the heavens] : Mt. xxiv. 29 ;
Lk. xxi. 26; αί eV Toif oip. Mk. xiii. 25, (Hebr. K^i'
D'.^'^ri, Ueut. xvii. 3; Jer. xxxiii. 22; Zeph. i. 5) ; so ή
στ()ατιά τοΰοίρακοϋ, Acts vii. 42. 2. the region above
the sidereal heavens, the seal of an order of things eternal
and consummately perfect, ichere God divills and the other
heavenly beings : this heaven Paul, in 2 Co. xii. 2, seems
to designate by the name of ό τρίτοι olp., but certainly
not the third of the seven distinct heavens described by
the author of the Test. xii. Patr., Levi § 3, and b}• the
Rabbins [(cf. Wetstein ad loc. ; Hahn, Thcol. d. N. T. i.
247 sq.; Drummond, Jewish Jlessiah, ch. xv.)]; cf. De
W'ette ad loc. Several distinct heavens are sjjoken of
also in Eph. iv. 10 {υπεράνω πάντων των oip.) ; cf. lleb.
vii. 26, if it be not preferable here to understand the nu-
merous regions or parts of the one and the same heaven
Avhere God dwells as referred to. The highest heaven
is the dwelling-place of God : Mt. v. 34 ; xxiii. 22 ; Acts
vii. 49 ; Rev. iv. 1 sqq., (Ps. x. (xi.) 4 ; cxiii. 24 (cxv. 16
sq.)); hence Beos τοϋ oip.. Rev. xi. 13; xvi. 11, (Gen.
xxiv. 3); ό fv (toIs) ϋΰρ., Mt. V. 16, 45 ; vi. 1,9; vii. 21 ;
X. 33; xii. 50 ; xvi. 1 7 ; xviii. 10 [here L WH mrg. (V τώ
ούρανώ in br.], 14, 19; Mk. xi. 25 stp, etc. From this
heaven the irvfip.a ay. is sent down, 1 Pet. i. 1 2 and the
pass, already cited [cf. 1 b. sub fin.] ; and Christ is said
to have come, Jn. iii. 13, 31 ; vi. 38, 41 S(|.; 1 Co. xv. 47 ;
it is the abode of the angels,"Mt. xxiv. 36 ; xxii. 30 ; xviii.
10; xxviii. 2; Mk. xii. 25; xiii. 32; Lk. ii. 15; xxii. 43
[Lbr. WH reject the pass.] ; Gal. i. 8 ; 1 Co. viii. 5 ; Eph.
iii. 15; Heb. xii. 22; Rev. x. 1 ; xii. 7; xviii. 1 ; xix. 14,
(Gen. xxi. 1 7 ; xxii. 11); τα (v tois ovpavois κα\ τα eVt της
yrji, the things and beings in the heavens (i. e. angels)
and on the earth, Eph. i. 10; Col. i. 16, 20; γίνεται το
θίΚημα τοϋ Beov iv ούρανώ, i. e. by the inhabitants of
heaven, ^It. vi. 10; χαρά ϊσται iv τω ovp., God and the
angels Λνϊΐΐ rejoice, Lk. xv. 7. this heaven is the abode
to which Christ ascended after his resurrection, Mk.
xvi. 19 ; Lk. xxiv. 51 [T om. WH reject the cl.] ; Acts i.
lOsq. ; ii. 34 ; iii. 21 ; Ro. x. 6 : [Eph. i. 20 Lchm. txt.] ; 1
Pet. iii. 22 ; Heb. i. 4 (ev ύψΐ)λοί$•) ; viii. 1 ; ix. 24 ; Rev.
iv. 2, and from which he will hereafter return, 1 Th. i.
10; iv. 16; 2 Th. i. 7; into heaven have already been
received the souls {πν(ίματα) both of the O. T. saints
and of departed Christians, Heb. xii. 23 (see απογράφω,
h. fin.), and heaven is appointed as the future abode of
those who, raised from the dead and clothed with supe-
rior bodies, shall become partakers of the heavenly king-
dom, 2 Co. V. 1, and enjoy the reward of proved virtue,
Mt. V. 12; Lk. vi. 23 ; hence eternal blessings are called
θησαυροί iv ούρανω, Mt. vi. 20 ; Lk. xii. 33, and those on
whom (iod has conferred eternal salvation are said ΐχ(ΐν
θησανρον iy ούρανω (,-νοις), Mt. xi.\. 21 ; Mk. X. 21 ; Lk.
xviii. 22, cf. Heb. x. 34 [RG] ; or the salvation awaiting
them is said to be laid up for them in heaven, Col. i. 5 ;
1 Pet. i. 4 ; or their names are said to have been written
in heaven, Lk. x. 20 ; moreover, Christ, appointed by
(jod the leader and lord of the citizens of the divine
kingdom, is said to have all power in heaven and on
earth, Mt. xxviii. 18 ; finally, the seer of the Apocalypse
expects a new Jerusalem to come down out of heaven as
the metropolis of the perfectly established Messianic
kingdom, Rev. iii. 12 ; xxi. 2, 10. By meton. ό ovpavos is
put for the inhabitants of heaven : (ΰφραίνου ουρανί. Rev.
xviii. 20, cf. xii. 12, (Ps. xcv. (xcvi.) 11 ; Is. xliv. 23 ; Job
XV. 15) ; in particular for Goil (Dan. iv. 23, and often by
the Rabbins, influenced by an o\er-scrupulous reverence
for the names of God himself; cf. Schiirer in the Jahrbb.
f. protest. Thcol., 1876, p. 178 sq. ; [Keil, as below]):
άμαρτάναν fls τον οϋρ., Lk. xv. 18, 21 ; eK τον οΰρ., i. q. by
God, Jn. iii. 27 ; i^ οϋρ-, of divine authority, Mt. xxi. 25 ;
Mk. xi. 30 ; Lk. xx. 4 ; ίναντίον τοϋ ούρανοϋ, 1 Macc. iii.
18 (where the toC θ(οϋ before τοϋ oip. .seems question-
able) ; (K τοϋ οϋρ. ή ίσχίί, ib. 1 9 ; ή ίξ ovp. βοήθιιη, xii.
15; xvi. 3, cf. iii. 50-53, 69; iv. 10, 24, 30, 40,55 ; v. 31 ;
vii. 37, 41 ; ix. 46 ; cf. Keil, Comm. iib. d. Biich. d. Macc.
p. 20. On the phrase ή βασι\(1η των oip. nnd its meaning,
see βασι\(ία, 3 ; [Cremer s. v. βασ. ; Edersheim i. 265].
Οΰρβανόϊ, -οϋ, ό, [a Lat. name ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on
Philip, p. 174], Urhanm,a certain Christian : Ro. xvi. 9.*
Ouptas, -ου [Β. 1 7 sq. (16) no. 8], 6, (Π^^ϊΝ light of Je-
hovah [or, my light is Jehovah]), ί/π«Λ, the husband of
Bathsheba the mother of Solomon by David : Mt. i. 6.*
ous. gen. ojTOs, plur. ωτα, dat. ώσίν, τό, [cf. Lat. auris,
aiisculto, atulio, etc.; akin to άιω, αισθάνομαι; cf. Curtius
§619; Vanicek p. 67]; fr. Horn, down; Hebr. [tS; the
ear; 1. prop.: Mt, xiii. 16; Mk.vii. 33; Lk. xxii.
50; 1 Co. ii. 9; xii. 16 ; 2>τά tivos els δίησιν, to hear sup-
plication, 1 Pet. iii. 12; ή γραφή π\ηροϊται iv to'is ωσι
ονσια
466
ουτοί
Tiroy, while present and hearing, Lk. iv. 21 (Bar. i. S
s(j.) ; those unwilling to hear a thing are said συνίχαν
[([. V. 2 a.] τά !)τα. Ιο slop their ears, Acts vii. 57 ; ηκοϋσθη
τι (Is τά Σ)τά Tivos, something was heard hj•, came to the
knowledge of [Λ. V. came lo (he ears oJ"\ one, Acts xi. 22 ;
likewise (Ισίρχίσθαι, Jas. v. 4 ; γίικσθαι, to come unto the
ears of one, Lk. i. 44 ; aKovfiv els το ois, to hear [A. V.
in the ear i. e.] in familiar converse, privately, Mt. x. 27
(fit oSs often so in class. (!rk. ; cf. Passow [L. and S.]
s. V. 1) ; alsoTTpof τό oir λαλίΐν, Lk. xii. 3. 2. met-
aph. i. q. tite facullij of perce'iviny with the mind, the fac-
ulty of underslandintj and k'nowintj : Mt. xiii. IG ; ό (χων
(or ίί Τ1Γ ίχ(ΐ) ίτα (or uvs. in Rev.) [sometimes (esp. in
Mk. and Lk.) with άκουαν added ; cf. B. § 140, 3] άκουίτω,
whoever has the facultv of attending and understanding,
let him use it, Mt. xi. 1.5 ; xiii. 9, 43; Mk. iv. 9, 23; vii.
16 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.] ; Lk. viii. 8 ; xiv. 35 (34) ;
Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6, 13, 22; .xiii. 9; τοΪ5 ώσΐ βα-
pews aKoitiv, to be slow to understand or obey [A. V.
their ears are dull, ofhearinr/'], ΛΙΐ. .xiii. 15 ; Acts xxviii.
27, (fr. Is. vi. 10) ; ωτα ίχοντίΐ ουκ άκούίτί, Mk. viii. 18;
&τα τοϋ μη άκούΕΐι/, [ffir.f that th< >/ shoulil not hear; cf. B.
267 (230)], Ro. xi. 8 ; β(σθ( τ. Xoyous Tourouf (is τα Ζ>τα,
[Α. V. let these words sink into your ears i.e.] take them
into your memory and hold them there, Lk. ix. 44 ; ane-
ρίτμητο! Tols ωσίν (see άπ(pίτμητos}, Acts vii. 51.*
ovcrCa, -as, η, (fr. ων, ούσα, 5v, the ptcp. of (ΐμι ), tahat
one has, i. e. properly, possessions, estate, [ A.V. subslancej :
Lk. XV. 12 sq. (Tob. xiv. 13; lldt. 1, 92; Xen., Plat.,
Attic oratt., al.) *
ovTe, (ov and τΐ), an adjunctive negative conj., [fr.
Hom. down], (differing fr. μήτ( as oi) does f r. μή [(). v. ad
init.], and fr. oiJSe' as μητ( does fr. μη8(; see μήτ( and
οΰδί ), neither ; and not. 1. Examples in which ovre
stands singly : a. oi3 . . ■ oCre, Rev. .xii. 8 Rec. (where
G L Τ Tr WH oOSc) ; xx. 4 R G (where L Τ Tr AVH
ov5() ; ouSflff a^LOS (νρίθη άνο\^αι το βιβΧίου ovre β\(π€ΐν
αυτά, Rev. v. 4 ; cf. W.4I)1 (457) ; Β. 3<;7 (315) ; ού . . .
οϋ8ί . . . οΰτ€, 1 Th. ii. 3 R G (where L Τ Tr WH more
correctly οΰδ/) [W. 493 (459) ; B. 368 (315)]; oOSe . . .
oi/Te (so that ovre answers only to the οϋ in oiSe), Gal. i.
12RGTWHtxt.[W.492(45S); B. 366 (314)]. b.
οΰτ€ . . . και, like Lat. neque ... et, neither . . . and: Jn. iv.
11 ; 3 Jn. 10, (Eur. Iph. T. 591 ; but the more common
Grk. usage was oi . . . τί, cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p.
714; Passow s. v. B. 2; [L. and S. s. v. Π. 4] ; W. § 55,
7; [B. § 149, 13 c.]). c. By a solecism οϋτ( is put
for οΰδί, not . . . even : 1 Co. iii. 2 Rec. (where (ί L Τ Tr
WH oiSe') [W. 493 (459) ; B. 367(315); §149, 13 f.];
Mk. V. 3 R G (where L Τ Tr WH have restored ούδί
[W. 490 (456) ; B. u. s.]) ; Lk. xii. 26 R G (where L Τ
Tr WH oi8( [W. u. s. and 478 (445); B. 347 (298)]) ;
aSre μ(τ(νάησαν, Rev. ix. 20 R L Tr (where G AVH txt.
oi, Τ ούδί not . . . even ; WH rar<;. ουτ( or oi&( [cf. B. 36 7
(315)]) ; after the question μη δύναται . . . σύκα; follows
ουτ€ άλυκον y\vKv ηοιησαι ν8ωρ, Jas. iii. 1 2 G L Τ Tr λΥΙΙ
(as though oCt( δύναται . . . σϋκα had previously been in
the writer's mind [cf. AV. 493 (459) ; B. u. s.]). 2.
used twice or more, neither . . . nor, (Lat. nee . . . nee ;
ncfjue . . . neque) : Mt. vi. 20 ; xxii. 30 ; Mk. xii. 25 ; [xiv.
68 L txt. Τ Tr WH] ; Lk. xiv. 35 (34) ; Jn. iv. 21 ; v.
37 ; viii. 19 ; ix. 3 ; Acts xv. 10; .\ix. 37; xxv. 8; xxviii.
21 ; Ro. viii. 38 sq. (where oUre occurs ten times) ; 1 Co.
iii. 7 ; vi. 9 sq. (ούτί eight times [yet Τ WH Tr mrg. the
eighth time οϋ]) ; xi. 1 1 ; Gal. v. 6 : vi. 1 5 ; 1 Th. ii. 6 ;
Rev. iii. 15 sq. ; ix. 20; xxi. 4 ; oSrf . . . oSrt . . . oid(
(Germ, auch nicht, also not), L Tr WH in Lk. xx. 35 scp,
and L Τ Tr mrg. WH in Acts xxiv. 12 sq. ; cf. W. 491
(457 sq.) ; B. 368 (315) note.
ouTos, αϋτη, τοΰτο, demonstrative pron. [cf. Curtius p.
543], Hebr. nt, nt<i, this; used
I. absolutely. 1. a. this one, visibly present
here: Mt. iii. 17; xvii. 5; Mk. ix. 7; Lk. vii. 44 sq. ; ix.
35; 2Pet. i. 17. Mt. ix. 3 ; xxi. 38 ; Mk. xiv. 69 ; Lk.
ii. 34; xxiii. 2; Jn. i. 15, 30; vii. 25 ; ix. 8sq. 19; xviii.
21,30; xxi. 21; Acts ii. 15; iv. 10; ix. 21 ; according to
the nature and character of the person or thing men-
tioned, it is used with a suggestion — either of con-
tempt, as Mt. xiii. 55 sq. ; Mk. vi. 2 sq. : Lk. v. 21 ; vii.
39,49; Jn.vi. 42,52; vii. 15; or of admiration, Mt.
xxi. 11; Acts ix. 21; cf. IFo/i/, Clavis apocryphor. V. T.
p. 370'. b. it refers to a subject immediately pre-
ceding, the one Just named: Lk. i. 32; ii. 37 [RGL];
Jn. i. 2 ; vi. 71 ; 2 Tim. iii. 6, 8, etc. ; at the beginning of
a narrative about one already mentioned, Mt. iii. 3 ; Lk.
xvi. 1 ; Jn. i. 41 (42) ; iii. 2 ; .xii. 21 ; x.xi. 21 ; Acts vii.
19; xxi. 24. this one just mentioned and no other: Jn.
ix. 9 ; Acts iv. 10 ((v τούτω) ; ix. 20 ; 1 Jn. v. 6 ; such as
I have Just described, 2 Tim. iii. 5 ; 2 Pet. ii. 17. «al
oiTot, this one just mentioned also, i. e. as well as the
rest, Lk. xx. 30 RGL; Heb. viii. 3. και τούτον, and
him too, and him inileed, 1 Co. ii. 2. c. it refers to
the leading subject of a sentence although in position
more remote (W. § 23, 1 ; [B. § 127, 3]) : Acts iv. 11 ;
vii. 19; viii. 26 (on which see Τάζα sub fin.) ; 1 Jn. v. 20
(where ovtos is referred by [many] orthodox interpre-
ters incorrectly [(see Alford ad loc. ; W. and B. 11. cc.)]
to the immediately preceding subject, Christ) ; 2 Jn.
7. d. it refers to what follows ; oJTor, αύτη iari, in
this appears . . . that etc. ; on this depends . . . that etc. :
foil, by OTi, as αύτη itrriv ή (παγγ(\ία, on, 1 Jn. i. 5 ; add,
V. 11,14; — by tva, Jn. XV. 12; 1 Jn. iii. 11,23; v. 3; 2 Jn.
6 ; τοντό etrri το (pyov, το θίΚημα τού θ(ού, ίνα, Jn. vi. 29,
39 sq. e. it serves to repeat the subject with em-
phasis : οΰ navTes ol (ξ Ίσραηλ, ούτοι Ισραήλ, Ro. ix. 6 ;
add, ib. 8; ii. 14 [Lmrg. oi τοιοΟτοι] ; vii. 10; Gal. iii. 7;
it refers, not without s[)ecial force, to a description given
by a participle or by the relative of, oortr ; which de-
scription either follows, as Mk. iv. 16, 18; Lk. viii. 15,
21 ; ix. 9; Jn. xi. 37; foil, by a relative sentence, Jn. i.
1 5 ; 1 Pet. v. 12; — or precedes : in the form of a parti-
ciple, Mt. X. 22 ; xiii. 20, 22 sq. ; xxiv. 13 ; xxvi. 23 ; Mk.
xii. 40 ; Lk. ix. 48 (ό . . . υπάρχων, ovtos) ', Jn. vi. 46 ;
vii. 18; xv. 5 ; 2 Jn. 9 ; Acts xvii. 7; (and R G in Rev.
iii. 5) ; or of the relative or, Mt. v. 19 ; Mk. iii. 35 ; Lk.
ix. 24, 26 ; Jn. I 33 [here L mrg. αύτόί] ; iii. 26 ; v. 38
ουτο<ί
467
οντοί
Ro. viii. 30 ; 1 Co. vii. 20 ; Ileb. xiii. 11; Ijn. ii. 5 ; 2 Pet.
ii. 19; in the neut., Jn. viii. 26; Ro. vii. 16 1 Co. vii. 24;
Phil. iv. 9 ; 2 Tim. ii. 2 ; or of a preceding ocrrts, Mt.
xviii. 4 ; in the neut. Phil. iii. 7. όσοι • . . ούτοι, Ro. viii.
14; Gal. vi. 12; also preceded by £? T(f, 1 Co. iii. 17
[here Lchm. airas] ; viii. 3 ; Jas. i. 23 ; iii. 2 ; by eav τι:,
Jn. i.\. 31 ; cf. W. § 23, 4. f. with αυτός aane.\ed,
this man liimself, Acts x\v. 25; plur, these themselves,
Actsxxiv. 15, 20; on the neut. see below, 2 a. b. etc. g.
As the relat. and interrog. pron. so also the demonstra-
tive, when it is the subject, conforms in gender and
number to the noun in the predicate : ο5τοί ίίσιν οί υίοΐ
T^f βασ. Mt. xiii. 3S ; add, Mk. iv. 15 sq. 18 ; αΰτη ϊστίν
ή μ(γά\η cVroXij, Mt. χ.κϋ. 38 ; ovTos ϊστιν ό πλάνοι (Germ.
diese siml), 2 Jn. 7. 2. The neuter τοϋτο a.
refers to what precedes : Lk. v. 6 ; Jn. vi. 61 ; Acts xix.
1 7 ; τοϋτο (Ιπών and the like, Lk. xxiv. 40 [T om. Tr br.
WH reject the vs.]; Jn. iv. 18; viii. 6 ; xii. 33 ; xviii.
38 ; δια τοϋτο, see θιά, Β. II. 2 a. ; ett τοϋτο, see els, B. II.
Ά c. β.; αΐτο τοϋτο, for this very cause, 2 Pet. i. 5 [Lchm.
αυτοί] ; cf. Matthiae § 470, 7 ; Passow s. v. C. 1 a. fin. ;
[L. and S. s. V. C. IX. 1 fin. ; W. § 21, 3 note 2 ; Kuhner
§ 410 Anm. 6] ; μ^τά τοϋτο, see μ(τά, II. 2 b. ck τούτον,
for this reason [see Ik, II. 8], Jn. vi. 66; xix. 12; from
this, i. e. hereby, by this note, 1 Jn. iv. 6 [cf. Westcott ad
loc.]. eV τοντω, for this cause, Jn. xvi. 30 ; Acts xxiv.
16 ; hereby, by this token, 1 Jn. iii. 19. em τούτω, in the
meanwhile, while this was going on [but see tVi, B. 2 e.
fin. p. 234'], Jn. iv. 27. τούτου χάριν, Eph. iii. 14. plur.
ταύτα, Jn. vii. 4 (these so great, so wonderful, things);
μeτά ταϋτα, see μιτά, U. 2 b. κατά ταϋτα, in this same
manner, Rec. in Lk. vi. 23, and xvii. 30, [al. τα αντά or
ταύτα], it refers to the substance of the preceding dis-
course: Lk. viii. 8; xi. 27; xxiv. 26 ; Jn. v. 34; xv. 11; xxi.
24, and very often, καθώς . . . ταϋτα, Jn. viii. 28. b.
it prepares the reader or hearer and renders him atten-
tive to what follows, which thus gets special weight (W.
§ 23, 5) ; 1 Jn. iv. 2 ; αντο τοϋτο οτί, Phil. i. 6 ; τοΰτο λί'γω
foil, by direct discourse. Gal. iii. 1 7 [see \eyω, II. 2 d.].
it is prefixed to sentences introduced by the particles
OTt, Ίνα, etc. : τοϋτο λ/γω or φημί foil, by ότι, 1 Co. 1. 12
[(see λeγω u. s.); 1 Co. vii. 29]; xv. 50; γινώσκίΐ! τοΰτο
foil, by 5ti, Ro. vi. 6 ; 2 Tim. iii. 1 ; 2 Pet. i. 20 ; iii. 3 ;
λογιΧίσίαι τοϋτο οτι, Ro. ii. 3 ; after όμολογΰν. Acts .x.\iv.
14 ; after (Ιδώς, 1 Tim. i. 9 ; ev τούτω ότι, 1 Jn. iii. 16, 24 ;
iv. 9 sq. ; τοϋτο. Ίνα, Lk. i. 43; ei? τοϋτο, "iva. Acts ix. 21 ;
Ro. xiv. 9 ; 2 Co. ii. 9 ; 1 Pet. iii. 9 ; iv. 6 ; 1 Jn. iii. 8 ; διό
τοΰτο, Ίνα, 2 Co. xiii. 10; 1 Tim. i. 16; Philem. 15 ; τούτων
(on this neut. plur. referring to a single object see W.
162 (153); [cf. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, § 41]), Iva, 3
Jn. 4 ; iv τούτω, eav, 1 Jn. ii, 3 ; όταν, 1 Jn. v. 2 ; τοϋτο
αυτό. Ινα, on this very account, that (see a. above [but oth-
ers take it here as ace. of obj,; see Meyer ad loc. (for
instances of αύτο τοϋτο see Β. § 127, 12)]), 2 Co. ii. 3;
els αυτί) τοϋτο, ίνα, Ei)h. \i. 22 ; Col. iv. 8 ; οπα;?, Ro. ix.
1 7. In the same manner τοϋτο is put before an infin.
with Tc5 for the sake of emphasis [W. § 23, 5 ; B. § 140,
7, 9, etc.] : 2 Co, ii. 1 ; before a simple infin. 1 Co. vii. 37
[here R G prefix toC to the inf.] ; before an ace, and inf.
Eph. iv. 17; before nouns, as τούτο eC^opai, την υμών
κατάρτισιν, 2 Co. xiii. 9, cf. 1 Jn. iii. 24 ; v. 4. c. κα'ι
τοΰτο, and this, and that too, and indeed, especially : Ro.
xiii. 11 ; 1 Co. vi. 6, L Τ Tr WH also in 8 ; Eph. ii. 8 ;
καΐ ταϋτα, and that too, 1 Co. vi. 8 Rec. ; Heb. xi. 12 ; (so
και ταϋτα also in class. Grk. ; cf. Devar. ed. Klotz i. p. 108 ;
Viger.ed. Herm. p. 17C sq.; JSIatthiae § 470, 6). d.
ταϋτα, of this sort, such, spoken contemptuously of men,
1 Co. vi. 11 (cf. Soph. O. R. 1329 ; Thuc. 6, 77; Liv. 30,
30; cf. Bnhdy. p. 281 ; [W. 162 (153)]). e. τοΰτο
μev . . . τοΰτο Se, partly . . . partly, Heb. x. 33 (for exx.
fr. Grk, auth. see W. 142 (135) ; Matthiae ii. § 288
Anm. 2; [Kuhner § 527 Anm. 2]). f. tout eoTiv,
see «>ί, II. 3 p. 1 76'.
II. Joined to nouns it is used like an adjective ; a.
so that the article stands between the demonstrative and
the noun, oCtos o, αΰτη ή, τοϋτο τό, [cf, W. § 23 fin. ; Β.
§ 127, 29] : Mt. xii. 32 ; xvi, 18 ; xvii. 21 [T WU om. Tr
br. the vs.] ; xx. 12 ; xxvi. 29 ; Mk. ix. 29 ; Lk. vii. 44 ; x.
36 ; xiv. 30 ; xv. 24 ; Jn. iv. 15 ; vii. 46 [L WH om. Tr
br. the cl.] ; viii. 20 ; x. 6 ; xi. 47 ; xii. 5 ; Acts i. 1 1 ; Ro.
xi. 24; iTim.i. 18; Heb. vii. 1 ; viii. 10; [Ijn. iv. 21];
Rev. xix. 9 ; xx. 14 ; xxi. 5 ; xxii. 6, etc. ; τοΰτο το παιδίον,
such a little child as ye see here, Lk. ix. 48 ; cf. Borne-
mann ad loc, [who takes τοΰτο thus as representing the
class, 'this and the like;' but cf. ^leyer (ed. TFeiss) ad
loc], b. so that the noun stands between the arti-
cle and the demonstrative [cf. W. 548 (510)] ; as, οί λι'^οι
oJtoi, the stones which ye see lying near, Mt. iii. 9; iv.
3 ; add, Mt. v. 19 ; vii. 24 [L Tr WH br. toutoue], 26, 28 ;
ix. 26 [Tr mrg. WH mrg. αύτι> ] ; χ. 23, etc. ; Mk. xii. 1 6 ;
xiii, 30; Lk. xi. 31 ; xxiii. 47; Jn. iv. 13, 21; vii. 49; .xi. 9;
xviii. 29 ; Acts vi. 13 ; .xix. 26 ; Ro. xv. 28 ; 1 Co. i. 20 ;
ii, 6 ; ,xi. 26 ; 2 Co. iv. 1, 7 ; viii. 6 ; xi. 10 ; xii. 13 ; Eph.
iii. 8; v. 32 ; 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; Rev. ii. 24, and very often —
(which constr. is far more freq. with Paul than the other
[see W. u. s.]) ; it is added to a noun which has another
adjective, η χημα ή ΤΓτωχη αΰτη, Lk. xxi. 3 ; ηάντα τα
ρήματα ταϋτα, Lk, ii. 19, 51 [(Τ WH L mrg. om. Ltxt. Tr
mrg. br. ταϋτα) ; άπο t^s γίΐ/ίάί ttjs σκοΧιάς ταύτης. Acts
ii. 40]. c. Passages in which the reading varies
between ovtos 6 and ό . . . οίτο£ : viz. ovtos 6, Mk. xiv.
30 L txt, Τ Tr WH ; .In. iv. 20 R L mrg. ; Jn. vi. 60 R G;
Jn. vii. 36 R G ; Jn. ix. 24 L WH Tr mrg. ; Jn. xxi. 23
L Τ Tr WH. ό . . . ouTos, Mk. xiv. 30 R G L mrg. ; Jn.
iv. 20 G Ltxt. TTr WH ; Jn. vi, 60 L TTrWH; Jn. vii.
36LTTrWII; Jn. ix. 24 G Τ Tr t.xt. ; Jn. xxi. 23 RG;
etc. d. with anarthrous nouns, esp. numerical
specifications [W. § 37, 5 N. 1] : τρίτον τοϋτο, this third
time, 2 Co, xiii. 1 ; τοΰτο τρίτον, .In. xxi. 14, (Judg. xvi.
15; 8€ύτ€ρον τοϋτο. Gen. x.xvii, 36; τούτο δίκατον, Num.
xiv. 22 ; τέταρτον τοϋτο, Ildt. 5, 76). [The passages which
follow, although introduced here by Prof. Grimm, are
(with the exception of Acts i. 5) clearly instances of the
predicative use of οίτοϊ ; cf. W. 110 (105) note; B.
§ 127, 31 ; Rost § 98, 3 A. c. a. sq.] : τοΰτο πάλιν Seύτepov
OTjpe^ov ΐποΙησ€ν, Jn. iv, 54 ; τρίτην ταύτην ημ€ραν ayei,
οντω
468
this is the third day that Israel is passing [but see Sya,
3], Lk. xxiv. 21 («ίμα» τριακοστην ταίτην ήμίμαν, this is
now the thirtieth day that I He (unburied), Lcian. dial,
mort. 13, 3) ; ou μ(τά πολλάί ταύτας ήμΐρας (see μιτά, II.
2 b. [W. Kil (1^2) ; 15. § 127, 4]), Acts i. 5; olros μην
fKTot (trr'iv αύτη, ibis is tbe sixth iiiontli with her etc. I^k.
i. 3C ; αΖτη άπογμαφη πμώτη tyivtTO, Lk. ii. 2 L ( Γ) I r
Wll ; ταντην (ποίηα(ν αμχην των σημιίων, .In. ii. 11 L I
Τι• Wll.
οίίτω and oSjtws (formerly in printed editions ηΖτω
appeared before a consonant, οίτωί before a vowel ; but
[recent critical editors, following the best Mss. ("cod.
Sin. has -τω but fourteen times in the N. T." Scriiiener,
Collation etc. p. liv.; cf. his Introduction etc. p. 561),
have restored oCtms; viz. Treg. uniformly, 205 times;
Tdf. 203 times, 4 times -τω ; Lchm. 1^6 times, 7 times -τω
(all before a consonant); WII 19G times, 10 times -τω
(all before a consonant) ; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 37 ; 117/.
App. p. 146 sq.] ; cf. W. § 5, 1 b. ; B. 9 ; [Lob. Pathol.
Elementa ii. 213 sqq.] ; cf. Kriiger § 11, 12, 1 ; Kuhner
§ 72, 3 a.), adv., (fr. οίτοϊ), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for
p, ίίΐ this manner, thus, so ; 1. by virtue of its na-
tive demonstrative force it refers to what precedes ; in
the manner spoken of; in the tvni/ described ; in the way
it was done; in this manner; in such a manner; thus, so:
Mt. vi. 30; xi. 26; xvii. 12; xix. 8; Mk. xiv. 59 ; Lk. i.
25 ; ii. 48 ; xii. 28 ; llo. xi. 5 ; 1 Co. viii. 12 ; xv. 1 1 ; Ileb.
vi. 9; [2 Pet. iii. 11 WII Tr mrg.] ; ονχ οΰτωι ϊσται [L
Tr AVII ί'στίν (so also Τ in Mk.)] t'v ύμ'ιν, it will not be
so among you (I hope), Mt. xx. 26 ; Mk. x. 43; ίμύί ονχ
οίτωΓ sc. (σ(σ6(, Lk. xxii. 26 ; eav άφωμιν αΐτον ούτω! sc.
jroioCi /τα, thus as he has done hitherto [see άφίημι, 2 b.],
Jn. xi. 48; it refers to similitudes and comparisons, and
serves to adapt them to the case in hand, Mt. v. 16 {even
so, i. e. as the lamp on the lamp-stand) ; Mt. xii. 45 ; xiii.
49; xviii. 14; xx. 16; Lk. xii. 21 [AV'Il br. the vs.] ; xv.
7, 10 ; Jn. iii. 8 ; 1 Co. ix. 24 ; likewise οΰτως «at, Mt. xvii.
12 ; xviii. 35 ; xxiv. 33 ; Mk. xiii. 29 ; Lk. xvii. 10. οίτωΓ
t^tiv, to be so (Lat. sic or ita se habere) : Acts vii. 1 ; xii.
15; xvii. 11; xxiv. 9. it serves to resume participles
(Joseph, antt. 8, 11, 1 ; b. j.2, 8, 5; see exx. fr. (!rk. auth.
in Passow s. v. 1 h. ; [L. and S. s. v. I. 7]) : Acts xx. 1 1 ;
xxvii. 1 7 ; but .In. iv. 6 must not [Λvith W. § 65, 9 fin. ; B.
§ 144, 21] be referred to this head, see Meyer [and 5 d.
below] ; on Rev. iii. 5, .«ee 5 c. below, it takes the place
of an explanatory participial clause, i. q. matters being
thus arroni/ed, under these circumstances, in such a con-
dition of things, [B. § 149, 1 ; cf. W. § CO, 5] : Ro. v. 12
(this connection between sin and death being established
[but this explanation of the οίΐτωί appears to be too gen-
eral (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]); lleb. vi. 15 (i.e. since God
had pledged the promise by an oath) ; i. q. things having
been thus settled, this having been done, then : Mt. xi. 26 ;
Acts vii. 8 ; xxviii. 14 ; 1 Co. xiv. 25 ; 1 Th. iv. 1 7 ; 2 Pet.
i. 11 ; cf. Fritzsche, Com. ad Rom. i. p. 298. Closely
related to this use is that of οϋτως (like Lat. ita for itnque,
iqitur) in the sense of conseijuently [cf. Eng. so at the
beginning of a sentence] : Mt. vii. 1 7 ; Ro. i. 15 ; vi. 1 1 ;
Rev. iii. 16, ([cf. Fritzsche on Mt. [>. 220]; Passow s. v.
2; [L. and S. s. v. II.]). 2. it prepares the way
for what follows : Mt. vi. 9 ; Lk. xix. 31 ; Jn. xxi. 1 ; oCrut
ην, was arranged thus, was on this wise, [λ\^ 465 (434) ;
B. § 1 29, 1 1 ], Mt. i. 1 8 ; οΰτω! ί'στΊ τό θί\ημα τοί θίοΰ foil,
by an infin., so is the will of God, that, 1 Pet. ii. 15. be-
fore language quoted from the O. T. : Mt. ii. 5 ; Acts vii.
6; xiii. 34, 47; I Co. xv. 45; lleb. iv. 4. 3. with
adjectives, so [Lat. tam, marking degree of intensity] :
lleb. xii. 21 ; Rev. xvi. 18; postpositive, τί SfiXoi «στ»
οίτωΓ; Mk. iv. 40 [L Tr WII om.] ; in the same sense
with adverbs, Gal. i. 6 ; or with verbs, .so greatly, 1 Jn.
iv. 11 ; ούτω; . . . ώστί, Jn. iii. 16. oiStiroTf (φάνη οντωι,
it was never seen in such fashion, i. e. such an extraor-
dinary sight, Mt. i.x. 33 (ΐφάνη must be taken imperson-
ally ; cf. lilcek, Synopt. Erklar. i. p. 406 [or Meyer ad
loc.]) ; oiStTroTf οΰτωι tiSopfv, we never saw it so, i. e.
with such astonishment, Mk. ii. 12. 4. οϋτωι or
οΰτωΓ και in comparison stands antithetic to an adverb
or a relative pron. [W. § 53,5 ; cf. B. 362 (311) c] : κα-
ΰάπιρ . . .οίτωί, Ro. xii. 4 sq. ; 1 Co. xii. 12; 2 Co. viii.
11 ; καθω! ■ ■ ■ οΰτως, Lk. xi. SO ; xvii. 26 ; Jn. iii. 14 ;
xii. 50 ; xiv. 31 ; xv. 4 ; 2 Co. i. 5 ; x. 7 ; 1 Th. ii. 4 ; Heb.
v. 3 ; οίτωϊ . . . καθώς, Lk. xxiv. 24 ; Ro. xi. 26 ; J'hil. iii.
17; ίύί . . . οϋτωί, Acts viii. 32; xxiii. 11 ; Ro. v. 15, 18;
1 Co. vii. 1 7 ; 2 Co. vii. 14 ; 1 Th. ii. 8 ; v. 2 ; ούτως . . . ens,
Mk. iv. 26 ; Jn. vii. 46 [L WII om. Tr br. the el.] ; 1 Co.
iii. 15 ; iv. 1 ; ix. 26 ; Eph. v. 28 ; Jas. ii. 1 2 ; οΖτως tot . ■ ■
μη i)S, 2 Co. ix. 5 [G L Τ Tr λνΐΐ] ; ωσπ(ρ ■ . ■ οίτωί, Mt.
xii. 40; xiii. 40; xxiv. 27, 37, 39; Lk. xvii. 24 ; Jn. v.
21,26; Ro. v. 12, 19,21; vi. 4; xi. 31 ; 1 Co. xi. 12; xv.
22 ; xvi. 1 ; 2 Co. i. 7 R G ; Gal. iv. 29 ; Eph. v. 24 R G;
after καθ' όσον, lleb. i.\. 27 sq.; όντως . . . ov τρόπον, Acta
i. 11 ; x.xvii. 25; hv τρόπον . . ■ όντως, 2 Tim. iii. 8 (Is. Iii.
14) ; κατά την odov ην λί'γουσιΐ' atptaiv οντω κτ\. after the
Way (i. e. as it re(|uires [cf. όδύί, 2 a. fin.]) so etc. Acts
xxiv. 14. 5. Further, the foil, special uses deserve
notice : a. (ίχιι) os [better ό] μϊν οίτωί or [better
ό] δ€ οίτωί, one after this manner, another after that, i. e.
different men in different ways, 1 Co. vii. 7 (ιτοτί μΐν
οίτωί (cat ποτί οίτωί φάγιται ή μάχαιρα, 2 S. xi. 25). b.
οίτωί, in the manner known to all, i. e. ace. to the context,
so shamefully, 1 Co. v. 3. c. in that state in which
one f tills one's self such as one is, [cf. W. 46.i (434)] ; τί
μ( ίττοίησας οϋτως, Ro. ix. 20 ; οίτωί dvai, μίνίΐν, of those
λυΙιο remain unmarried, 1 Co. vii. 26, 40 ; ό νικών όντως
τ!(ριβαΚ(Ίται viz. as (i. e. because he is) victor [al. in the
manner described in vs. 4], Rev. iii. 5 L Τ Tr WH. d.
thus forthwith, i. e. without hesitation [cf. Eng. off-hand,
without ceremony, and the colloquial right, just'] : Jn. iv.
6 ; cf. Passow s. v. 4 ; [L. and S. s. v. IV. ; see 1 above ;
add Jn. xiii. 25 Τ WII Tr br. (cf. Green, Crit. Notes
ad loc.)] e. in questions (Lat. sicine ?) [Eng. ex-
clamatory so then, what'] : Mk. vii. 18 (Germ, sonach) [al.
take οίτωί here as expressive of degree. In Mt. xxvi.
40, however, many give it the sense spoken of ; cf. too 1
Co. vi. 5] ; οίτωί άποκρίνΐ) ; i. e. so impudently, .In. xviii.
22 ; with an adjective, so (very), (ial. iii. 3. [But these
<"α
469
όφθαΧμοΒουΚΐία
exx., although classed together by Fritzsche also (Com.
on Mark p. 150 sq.), seem to be capable of discrimination.
The passage from Gal., for instance, does not seem to
differ essentially from examples under 3 above.] f.
In class. Grk. ovtws often, after a conditional, concessive,
or temporal protasis, introduces the apodosis (cf. Passow
8. V. 1 h. ; [L. and S. s. v. I. 7]). 1 Th. iv. 14 and Rev.
xi. 5 have been referred to this head ; B. 357(307); [cf.
W. § 60, 5 (esp. a.)]. But questionably; for in the first
passage οίτωϊ may also be taken as eijuiv. to under these
circiwislances, i. e. if we believe what I have said [better
cf. VV. u. 5.] ; in the second passage ούτως denotes in the
manner spoken of, i. e. by fire proceeding out of their
mouth.
οΰχ, see οΰ.
ουχί, i. q. oil, not, but stronger [cf. wvi ad init.] ; a.
in simple negative sentences, hi/ no ineiinx, not at all,
[A. V. noli ■ ■^^• ^'ϋ• •0 sq.; -xiv. 22; 1 Co. v. 2; vi. 1 ;
foil, by ά\\ά, 1 Co. x. 29 ; 2 Co. x. 13 (L Τ Tr WH οίκ) ;
in denials or contradictions [A. V. nay; not sol, Lk. i.
60; xii. 51 ; xiii. 3, 5 ; xvi. 30 ; Ro. iii. 27. b. in a
question, Lat. nonne f (asking what no one denies to be
true): Mt. v. 46sq.; x. 29 ; xiii. 27; xx. 13; Lk. vi. 39;
xvii. 17[LTr\VHoux]; .xxiv. 26; Jn. xi. 9; Acts ii. 7
TrWHtxt.; Ro. ii. 26 (LTTr Wll οίχ); 1 Co. i. 20;
Heb. i. 14, etc.; (Sept. for xSn, Gen. xl. 8; Judg. iv.
6) ; αλλ' ουχί, will he not rather, Lk. xvii. 8.
όφ6ΐλ6'τη5, -ου, 6, (οφ(ί\ω), one idio owes another, a
dehtiir : prop, of one who owes another money (Plat,
legg. 5, 736 d. ; Plut. ; al.) ; with a gen. of the sum due,
Mt. .xviii. 24. Metaph. a. one held hij some ohlif/a-
tion, bound to some duti/ : οφΕΐλ/ττ)ί (Ιμί, i. q. ΰφ(ί\ω, foil.
by an inf., Gal. v. 3 (Soph. Aj. 590) ; 6φ(ΐ\. (Ιμί rivos,
to be one's debtor i. e. under obligations of gratitude to
him for favors received, Ro. xv. 27; τιι/ι (dat. commodi),
to be under obligation to do sometliing for some one,
Ro. i. 14; viii. 12. b. one who has not yet made
amends to one whom he has injured: Mt. vi. 12; in imi-
tation of the Chald. TT\, one who owes God penalty or
of whom God can demand punishment as something due,
i. e. a sinner, Lk. xiii. 4.*
<>ψ€ΐλή, -^f, η, (οφίίλω), that which is owed; prop, a
debt: Mt. xviii. 32; metaph. plur. dues: Ro. xiii. 7;
epec. of conjugal duty [R. V. her due"], 1 Co. vii. 3 G L
Τ Tr WH. Found neither in the Grk. O. T. nor in
prof. auth. ; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 90.*
(>φ<ίλημ.α, -Tor, τ6, (οφ(ΐ\ω), that which is owed; a.
prop, that which is Justly or lef/aUy due, a debt ; so for
ηκψ-^, Deut. xxiv. 12 (10) ; άφύναι. 1 Mace. xv. 8 ; άπο-
Tii/ftc, Plat. legg. 4 p. 717 b.; άπΌδιδόναι, Aristot. eth.
Nic. 9, 2, 5 [p. 1165*, 3]. κατά ί^φ(ί\ημα, as of debt, Ro.
iv. 4. b. in imitation of the Chald. 31Π or K3in
(which denotes both debt and ,«i)i), metaph. offence, sin,
(see 6φ(ί\ίτηί. b.) ; hence, άφιίναι τικ! τα οφ(ί\. αυτόν, tc
remit the penalty of one's sins, to forgive them, (Chald.
I'ain pin), iMt. vi. 12. [Cf. Λν. 30, 32, 33.]*
όφ£(λω; \mp(. ωφfι\ov^, pres. pass. ptcp. οφαΧόμινο!',
fr. Hom. down ; to owe ; a. prop, to owe money, be
in debt for: τινί τι, Mt. xviii. 28; Lk. xvi. 5; without a
dat., Mt. xviii. 28; Lk. vii. 41 ; -xvi. 7; Philem. 18; τά
οφίϊΚόμ^νον, that which is due, the debt, Mt. .xviii. 30 ;
αϋτω (which L Tr WH om.), that due to him, ib. 34. b.
metaph. : τι, pass, την eCvoiap οφαΧομϊνην, the good-will
due [A. (not R.) V. due benecolenre~\, 1 Co. vii. 3 Rec. ;
μηhev\ μη$ίν όφ(ίλ(τ( (here όφίίλίτί, on account of what
precedes and what follows, must be taken in its broadest
sense, both literal and tropical), et μη το αλλήλους αγα-
πάν, owe no one anythinrj except to love one another, be-
cause we must never cease loving and the debt of love
can never be paid, Ro. .xiii. 8. absol. to be a debtor, be
bound : Mt. x.xiii. 16, 18 ; foil, by an inf. to be under obli-
gation, bound by duly or necessity, to do something; it be-
hoves one; one ought; used thus of a necessity imposed
either by law and duty, or by reason, or by the times, or
by the nature of the matter under consideration [ace. to
AVestcott (Epp. of Jn. p. 5), Cremer, al., denoting obli-
gation in its s])ecial and jjersonal aspects] : Lk. xvii. 10 ;
Jn. xiii. 14 ; xix. 7 (όφ(ιλ{» anodave'iv, he ought to die) ;
Acts xvii. 29 ; Ro. xv. 1, 27 ; 1 Co. v. 10 ; [vii. 36 (A. V.
need so requireth)'] ; ix. 10 ; xi. 7, 10 ; 2 Co. .xii. 14 ; Eph.
V. 28; 2 Th. i. 3; ii. 13; Heb. ii. 17; v. 3, 12; iJn. ii. 6 ;
iii. 16 ; iv. 11 ; 3 Jn. 8 ; ωφαλον σννίστασθαι, I ought to
have been commended, i. e. I can demand commenda-
tion, 2 Co. xii. 11. c. after the Chaldee (see όφίΐλί-
της, b., οφύλημα, b.), 6φ(ΐλω τινί, to have wronged one
and not yet made amends to him [A. V. indebted}, Lk.
xi. 4. [CoMP. : προσ-οφί ι'λω.] *
οψελον (for ώ0(λοι/, without theaugm., 2 aor. οίοφιίλω;
in earlier Grk. viiui an inf., as ωφ^λον Bavtiv, I ought to
have died, expressive of a wish, i. q. would that I were
dead; in later Grk. it assumes the nature of an inter-
jection, to be rendered) would that, where one wishes
that a thing had happened Avhich has not happened, or
that a thing be done which probably will not be done
[cf. W. 301 sq. (283); B. § 150, 5]: with an optative
pres. Rev. iii. 15 Rec; with an indicative impf., Rev.
ibid. GLTTrWH; 2 Co. xi. 1, (Epict. diss. 2, 18, 15;
Ignat. ad Srayrn. c. 12); with an indie, aorist, 1 Co. iv.
8 (Ps. cxviii. (cxi.x.) 5; Sφtλov άπιθάνομίν, Ex. xvi. 3;
Num. xiv. 2 ; xx. 3) ; with the future. Gal. v. 12 (Lcian.
soloec. [or Pseudosoph.] 1, where this construction is
classed as a solecism). Cf. Passow ii. p. 603'; [L. and
S. s. V. όφίΐ'λω, Π. 3].•
όφίλοϊ, -out, TO, (όφί'λλω to increase), ad vantage, profit:
1 Co. XV. 32; Jas. ii. 14, 16. (From Hom. down; Sept.
Job XV. 3.) •
όφθαλμο-δουλεία [Τ WH -λία ; see I, c], -as, ή, (όφθαλ-
μόδουλος, Constit. apost. [4, 12, Coteler. Patr. Apost.] i.
p. 299»; and this fr. οφθαλμός and δούλοι), [A. V. eye-
service i. e.] service performed [only] under the master's
eye (μή κατ οφθαλμο8., τουτί'στί μη μόνον παρόντων τωο
δϊστΓοτών και όρώντων, αλλά κα\ απόντων, Theophyl. on
Eph. vi β ; " for the master's eye usually stimulates to
greater diligence; his absence, on the other hand, ren-
ders sluggish." H. Stephanus) : Eph. vi. 6 ; Col. iii. 22.
Not found elsewhere; [cf. W. 100 (9i\^ *
οφθαΧμόν
470
όχλο?
όφθολμόϊ, -οϋ, ό, [fr. Γ. ότΓ to see ; allied to όψ•ΐΓ , όι/^ο-
μαι, etc.; Curtius § 627], Sept. for yy, [fr. Horn, down],
the eye : Mt. v. 38 ; vi. 22 ; Mk. ix. 47 ; Lk. xi. 34 ; Jn.
ix. 6 ; 1 Co. xii. 16 ; Rev. vii. 1 7 ; xxi. i, and often ; ριττη
όφθαϊίμοΰ, 1 Co. XV. ό2; οί οφθαλμοί μου (ώον (see the
remark in γλώσσα, 1), Lk. ii. 3u; of. iv. 20; x. 23 : Mt.
.xiii. 16 ; 1 Co. ii. ; Rev. i. 7 ; [άνίβλιψαν οί οφθαλμοί
Mt. XX. 34 RG]; ISuv toU ύφθ.. .Mt. xiii. 1.5; .In. xii. 40;
Acts xxviii. 27 ; όράν τοϊγ όφθ. (see όράω, 1), 1 Jn. ι. 1 ;
ή ΐπιθνμία των όφθ. desire excited by seeing, 1 Jn. ii. 16.
Since the eye is the index of the raind, the foil, phrases
have arisen : 6φθ. σου πονηροί ϊστιν, i. e. thou art envious,
Mt. XX. 15; οφθ. πομΐ)ρΟ£^ env>', Mj5.:\ii^22 (|•;» ;?Ί, an
envious man, Prov. xxiii. 6 ; xxviii. 22 ; cT. Sir. xxxiv.
13; -ynxa IJ'i' n;•";, thine eye is evil toward thy
brother, i. e. tliou enviest [grudgest] thy brother, Deut.
XV. 9; οφθ- πονηροί φθονιρο! eV άρτω, Sir. xiv. 10; μη
φθονισάτω σου ό όφθ. Tob. iv. 7 ; the opposite, άγαθο!
οφθαλμό!, is used of a willing mind, Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.)
10, 12) ; on the other hand, οφθαλμό! πονηρό! in Mt. vi.
23 is a diseased, disordered eye, just as we say a bad eye,
a had Jinrjer [see πονηροί, 2 a. (where Lk. xi. 34)]. κρα-
Teli» Tov! όφθ. Toil μή κτλ. [Α. V. Ιο hold the eyes i. e.]
to prevent one from recognizing another, Lk. xxiv. 16;
νπολαμβάνω τίνα άπο των όφθ. τινοί, by receiving one to
witlidraw him from another's sight [A. V. received him
out of their sight']. Acts i. 9. Metaph. of the eyes of the
mind, the faculty of knowing : ΐκρΰβη άπο των όφθ. σου,
hid from thine eyes, i. e. concealed from thee [cf. B. 320
(274)], Lk. xix. 42 ; StSovat τινι όφθαλμουί τοϋ μη βλίπίΐν,
to cause one to be slow to understand, Ro. xi. 8 [cf. B.
2G7 (230)]; τνφλοΐιν rovif όφθ. Tiraf, Jn. xii. 40; 1 Jn.
ii. 11 ; σκοτίζονται o'l όφθ. Ro. xi. 10; πιφωτισμϊνοι οφθαλ-
μοί τήί 8ίανοία! [cf. Β. § 145, G], Eph. i. IS Rec. ; t^s
καρ8ία! (as in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 3(5, 2), ibid. G L Τ Tr
Wil ; iv όφθαλμοΊί Tixos ("3 -n'? [cf. B. § 146, 1 fin.]),
in the judgment [cf. our uieio] of one, Mt. xxi. 42 ; Mk.
xii. 1 1 ; ουκ ϊστι τι απίναντι των όφθ. τινοί, to neglect a
thing (cf. our leave, put, out of sight), Ro. iii. 18; γυμνόν
ίστί τι Tolf όφθ. TITOS (see γυμνοί. 2 a.), Heb. iv. 13 ; οί
όφθ. ToC κυρίου en'i δικαίου! (sc. <Vi- [or άπο-] βλίπουσιν,
which is added in Ps. x. (xi.) 4), are (fi.xed) upon the
righteous, i. e. the Lord looks after, provides for tliem,
1 Pet. iii. 12. Other phrases in which οφθαλμοί occurs
may be found under ανοίγω p. 48'', άπλοϋί, διανοίγω 1,
(ξορύσσω 1, ίπαίρω p. 228*, καμμύω, μοιχάλΐί a., προγρά-
φω 2.
όφΐί, -(ω?, ό, [perh. named fr. its sight; cf. δράκων,
in it., and see Curtius as s. v. όφθαλμόίΐ ; fr. Hom. E. 12,
208 down ; Sept. mostly for Uinj ; a snai'e, serpent : Mt.
vii. 10; Mk. xvi. 18; Lk. x. 19';'xi. 11 ; Jn. iii. 14; 1 Co.
X. 9 ; Rev. ix. 19; with the ancients the serpent was an
emblem of cunning and wisdom, 2 Co. xi. 3,cf. Gen. iii.
1 ; hence, φρόνιμοι is οί όφ(ΐί, Mt. χ. 16 [here WH mrg.
ό όφ«] ; hence, crafty hypocrites are called όφίΐί, Mt.
xxiii. 33. The serpent narrated to have deceived Eve
(see Gen. u. s.) was regarded by the later Jews as the
devil (Sap. ii. 23 sq. cf. 4 Mace, xviii. 8) ; hence he is
called ό 5φΐ! ό άρχαΐυί, ό όφΐί. Rev. xii. 9, 14 S(j. ; χχ.
2 ; see [Grimm on Sap. u. s. ; Fr. Lenormant, Beginnings
of History etc. ch. ii. p. 109 sq., and] δράκων.'
όφρύΐ, -ΰοί, η, 1. the eyebrow, so fr. Horn. down.
2. any prominence or projection ; as [Eng. tlie brow] of
a mountain (so the Lat. supercitium, A'erg. georg. I,
108; Hirt. bell. afr. 58 ; Liv. 27, 18; 34,29): Lk. iv. 29
(Hom. n. 20, 151; often in Polyb., Plut., al.).*
[oxcTo's, -oC, 0, 1. a u-aler-pipe, duct. 2. the
intestinal canal: Mk. vii. 19 WH (rejected) mrg. (al.
άφίδρών).*]
όχλί'ω, -ώ : pres. pass. ptcp. όχλούμ(νο! ; (όχΚοί) ; prop.
to excite a mob against one; [in Horn. (II. 21, 261) to dis-
turb,roll away] ; univ. to trouble, molest, {τινά, Ildt. 5, 41 ;
Aeschyl., al.); absol. to be in confusion, in an uproar, (3
Mace. v. 41); pass, to be vexed, molesteil, troubled: by
demons, Lk. vi. is R G L (where Τ Tr AVH «ι-οχλ., — the
like variation of text in Hdian. 6,3,4); Acts v. 16;
Tob. vi. 8 (7) ; Acta Thomae § 12. [Comp. : tV, παρ-
^ν-οχλεω.] *
όχλο-ίΓΟίίω, -ά> : 1 aor. ptcp. ό;(λθ7Γθ»ήσαΓ ; (βχ\ο!, ποιίω) ;
to colled a crowil, gather the people together: Acts xvii. 5.
Not found elsewhere.*
όχλοϊ, -ου, ό, in the X. Τ. only in the historical bks.
and five times in the Rev. ; as in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and
Aeschyl. down, a crowd, i. e. 1. a casual collec-
tion of people ; a multitude of men who have flocked to-
gether in some place, a throng : Mt. ix. 23, 25 ; xv. 1 0, etc. ;
Mk. ii. 4 ; iii. 9, and often ; Lk. v. 1, 1 9 ; vii. 9, etc. ; Jn.
V. 13; vi. 22, 24; vii. 20, 32, 49, etc. ; Acts xiv. 14; xvii.
8 ; xxi. 34 ; tW «V toC όχλου. Lk. .xi. 27 ; xii. 13 ; or an»
τοϋ όχλου, xix. 39 ; ix. 38 ; άπο (for i. e. on account of
[cf. άττό, Π. 2 b.]) T. όχλου, Lk. xix. 3; ή βία τ. όχλου,
Acts xxi. 35 ; πολϋί όχλοί and much oftener όχλοί πολύί,
Mt.xiv. 14; XX. 29; xxvi,47; Mk. v.21,24; vi. 34 ; ix. 14;
xiv. 43 [here Τ Tr WH om. L Tr mrg. br. πολ.] ; Lk. vii.
11 ; viii. 4 ; ix. 37; Jn. vi. 2, 5 ; xii. 12 [but here Trmrg.
br. ΛΥΗ prefix 6 : cf. B. 91 (80)] ; Rev. xix. 1, 6 ; with
the art. ό πολϋί όχλ., the great multitude present, Mk. xii.
37 ; [ό όχλοί πολϋί (the noun forming with the adj. a sin-
gle composite term, like our) Ihe common people, Jn. xii. 9
Τ WH Tr mrg. ; cf. B. u. s. ; some would give the phrase
the s.ame sense in Mk. 1. c] : πάμπολυί, Mk. viii. 1 [Rec] ;
ικανοί, Mk. X. 46 ; Lk. vii. 1 _' : Acts xi. 24, 26 ; xix. 26 ; 6
πλείστοι όχλ. [the most part of the multitude], Mt. xxi. 8 ;
πas• ό 3χλ., Mt. xiii. 2 ; Mk.ii. 13; iv. 1 ; vii. 14 [Rec.]; i.x.
15 ; xi. 18 ; Lk. xiii. 1 " ; Acts xxi. 27 ; όχλ. τοσοΟτοΓ, Mt.
XV. 33 ; al μυριάδα τοϋ όχλ. Lk. xii. 1 ; οϋ μ(τα όχλου, not
having a crowd with me, Acts xxiv. 18 ; άτιρ όχλου, in the
absence of the multitude [(see artp)], Lk. xxii. 6. plur.
oi όχλοι, very often in Mt. and Lk., as Mt. v. 1 ; vii. 28;
ix. 8, 33, 36 ; xi. 7 ; xii. 46 ; xiii. 34, 36, etc. ; Lk. iii. 7,
10 ; iv. 42 ; v. 3 ; viii. 42, 45 ; ix. 11 ; xi. 14, etc. ; Acts
viii. 6 ; xiii. 45 ; xiv. 11,13, 1 8 sq. ; xvii. 1 3 ; once in Jn.
vii. 12 [where Tdf. the sing.] ; in Mk. only vi. 33 Rec.;
and without the art. Mk. x. 1 ; όχλοι πολλοί, Mt. iv. 25 ;
viii. 1 ; xii. 15 [R G] ; xiii. 2 ; χ v. 30 ; xix. 2 ; Lk. v. 15 ;
xiv. 25 ; πάντα οί όχλοι, Mt. xii. 23. 2. the multi-
οχυρωμα
471
οψώνίορ
tude i. e. the common people, opp. to the rulers and lead-
ing men : Mt. xiv. 5 ; xxi. 26 ; Mk. xii. 12 ; [Jn. vii. 12'
(provided the plur. is retained in the first part of the
vs.)] ; with contempt, ike ignorant multitude, the populace,
Jn. vii. 49 ; ϊπισΰστασκ όχλου, a riot, a mob, Acts xxiv.
12 f L Τ Tr WII ΐπίστασι: (q. v.) &χ.]. 3. univ. a
multitude : with a gen. of the class, as τ(Κα>νων, Lk. v. 29 ;
μαθητών, Lk. vi. 17; ονομάτων (see ονημα,Ά), Acts i. 10;
των ίίρίων. Acts vi. 7 ; the plur. όχ\οι, joined with λαο»
and (θνη, in Rev. xvii. 15 seems to designate troops of
men assembled together without order. (Sept. chiefly
for iinn.)
όχύρωμο, -tos, to, {οχυρόω [to make strong, to fortify]) ;
1. prop, a ca.-<tle, sironr/hold, fortress, fastness, Sept. for
1X30, etc. ; very often in 1 and 2 Alacc. ; Xen. Hellen.
3, 2, 3. 2. trop. anything on which one relies : κα-
θύ\( το οχυρωμα, ΐφ' ω €πίποίθ(ΐταν, Prov. xxi. 22 ; ο;^ύ-
ρωμα όσιου φόβος κυρίου, Prov. χ. 29 ; in 2 Co. χ. 4 of
the arguments and reasonings by which a disputant en-
deavors to fortify his opinion and defend it against his
opponent.*
όψάριον, -ου, τό, (dimin. fr. όψον [cf. Curtius § 630]
i. e. whatever is eaten with bread, esp. food boiled or
roasted ; hence specifically), ^'sA : Jn. vi. 9,11; xxi. 9 scj.
13. (Comic, ap. Athen. 9, c. 35 p. 3.S5 e. ; Lcian.,Geop.
[cf. Wetstein on Ju. vi. 9] ; see γυναικάρίον, fin. [W. 23
(:^2)]•)*
όψ£, (apparently fr. Skis ; see οπίσω, init.), adv. of time,
after a long time, long after, late ; a. esp. late in the
day (sc. τήί ημίρας, which is often added, as Thuc. 4, 93 ;
Xen. Hellen. 2, 1, 23), i. e. at evening (Hom., Thuc,
Plat., al. ; for 3ΐχ•. η>•_, Gen. xxiv. 11): Mk. xi. [11 Τ
Tr mrg.WII txt. (cf. Plut. Alex. 16, 1)], 19 ; xiii. 35. b.
with a gen. [W. § 54, 6], όψέ σαββάτων, the sabbath having
just passed, afer the sabbath, i. e. at the early dawn of the
first day of the week — (an interpretation absolutely
demanded by the added specification τη ίττίφωσκ. κτλ.),
Mt. x.xviii. 1 cf. Mk. .Kvi. 1 (οψί των βασιΚίω! χρόνων,
long after the times of the king, Plut. Num. 1 ; οψί
μυστηρίων, the mysteries being over, Philostr. vit. Apoll.
4, 18); [but an e.\amination of the instances just cited
(and others) will show that they fail to sustain the ren-
dering afer (although it is recognized by Passow, Pape,
Schenkl, and other lexicographers) ; όψ•ί' foil, by a gen.
seems always to be partitive,denoting late in the peri-
od specified by the gen. (and consequently still belong-
ing to it), cf. B. § 132, 7 Rem.; Kuhner §414, 5 c. β.
Hence in Mt. 1. c. ^late on the sabbath']. Keim iii.
p. 552 sq. [Eng. trans, vi. 303 sq.] endeavors to relieve
the passage differently [by adopting the Vulg. vesptre
sabbati, on the evening of the sabbath'], but without suc-
cess. [(Cf. Keil, Com. iiber Matth. ad loc.)] *
όψιμοι. -o», {6ψ(), late, latter, (Hom. II. 2, 325 ; ό^ιμό
τατοί στιόρο!, Xen. oec. 17, 4 sq. ; «V toIs όιΙ^ίμοι; τών νδά
των, of the time of subsidence of the waters of the Nile,
Diod. 1,10; [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 51 sq.]) : Sifr. v(tos, the
latter or vernal rain, which falls chiefly in the months of
March and April just before the harvest (opp. to the
autumnal or πρώιμος [cf. B. D. s. v. Rain]), Jas. v. 7 [but
L Τ Tr WII om. ύιτόν. cod. Sin. and a few other authori-
ties substitute καρπόν] ; Sept. for uiplO, Deut. xi. 14 i
Jer. V. 24 ; Hos. vi. 3 ; Joel ii. 23 ; Zech. x. 1.•
όψιο$, -a, -ov, (όψί), late; 1. as an adjective
([Pind.,] Thuc, Dem., Aristot., Theophr., al. ; \^Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 51 sq.]) : ή ωρα, Mk. xi. 1 1 [but Τ Tr mrg. WH
txt. ό\/^, q. v.] (όψία cV νυκτί, Pind. Isthm. 4, 59). 2.
contrary to the usage of prof. auth. η όψία as a subst.
(sc ωρα [cf. W. 591 sq. (550); B. 82 (71)]), evening:
i. e. either from our three to six o'clock p. M., Mt. viii.
16; xiv. 15; xxvii. 57; Mk. iv. 35; or from our six o'clock
p. M. to the beginning of night, Alt. xiv. 23 ; xvi. 2
[here Τ br. WH reject the pass.] ; xx. 8 ; xxvi. 20 ; Mk.
i.32; vi.47; xiv.l7; xv.42; Jn. vi. 1 6 ; xx. 1 9, (hence
D"3''i'n Γ2, between the two evenings, Ex. xii. 6 ; .\vi
12; xxix. 39 [cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. p. 1064 sq. (and
addit. et emend, p. 106); B. D. s. v. Day]). Besides
only in Judith xiii. 1.*
όψΐ5, -ίωί, ή, (ΟΠΤΩ, όψομβι [cf. οφθαΚμ6ί\), fr. Hom.
down ; Sept. chiefly for ΠΧ"}•? ; 1. seeing, sight. 2.
face, countenance: Jn. xi. 44; Rev. i. 16. 3. the
outicard appearance, look, [many lexicographers give
this neuter and objective sense precedence] : Kptvetv κατ
όψιν, Jn. vii. 24.•
όψώνιον, -ου, τό, (f r. Sil^ov — on which see όψάριον, init.
— and ωνίομαι to buy), a later Grk. word (cf. Slurz, De
dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 187 ; Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 418),
prop, whatever is bought to be eaten with bread, as fish,
flesh, and the like (see οψάριον). And as corn, meat,
fruits, salt, were given to soldiers instead of pay (Caes.
b. g. 1, 23, 1 ; Polyb. 1, 66 sq. ; 3, 13, 8), όψώνιον began
to signify 1• univ. a soldier's pay, allowance,
{Polyb. 6, 39, 12; Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 36), more com-
monly in the plur. [W. 176 (166); B. 24 (21)] όψώνια,
prop, that part of a soldier's support given in place of
pay [L e. rations] and the money in which he is paid
(Polyb. 1, 67, 1 ; 6, 39, 15; 1 IMacc iii. 28; xiv. 32 ; I
Esdr. iv. 56 ; Joseph, antt. 12, 2, 3) : Lk. iii. 14; 1 Co.
ix. 7 [cf. W. § 31, 7 d.]. 2. metaph. wages: sing.
2 Ca 20. 8 ; τήϊ άμαρτίαί, the hire that sin pays, Bo. vi
23.•
472
ΓΙ
ττα/γιΒεύω
ira-yiSevu: 1 aor. subj. 3d pers. plur. πα-γΛίΰσωσιν;
(παγιΈ, q. v.) ; a word unknown to tlie Greeks ; ίο en-
snare, entrap : birds, Eccl. ix. 1 2 ; metapli., τίνα iv λόγω,
of the attempt to elicit from one some remark which can
be turned into an accusation against him, Mt. xxii. 15.
([toIs \ayuis, Prov. vi. 2 Graec. Venet. ; of. also Deut.
vii. 25 ; xii. 30 in the same] ; 1 S. xxviii. 9.) *
τΓογίϊ, -ίδοΓ, ή, (fr. πηγνυμι to make fast, 2 aor. fffuyoK ;
prop, that which holds fast [cf. Anth. Pal. 6, 5]), Sept.
for riD, ΠΗ^, typ.l'O, etc. ; β snare, trap, noose ; a.
prop, of snares in which birds are entangled and
caught, Prov. vi. 5 ; vii. 23 ; Ps. xc. (xci.) 3 ; cxxiii.
(cxxiv.) 7 ; nayi8a! ίστάναι, Arstph. av. 527 ; hence ώί
irayli, as a snare, i. e. unexpectedly, suddenly, because
birds and beasts are caught unawares, Lk. xxi. 35. b.
trop. a snare, i. e. whatever brings peril, loss, destruction :
of a sudden and unexpected deadly peril, Ro. xi. 9 fr.
Ps. Lwiii. (Ixix.) 23 ; of the allurements and -seductions
of sin, (μπίητ€ΐν fls τηψασμον κ. παγίδα, 1 Tim. vi. 9 {('μπΐ-
jTTft eis παγίδα αμαρτωλός, Prov. xii. 1 3, cf. xxix. 6 ; joined
with σκάνδαλον, Sap. xiv. II); toC διάβολου, the allure-
ments to sin by which the devil holds one bound, 2 Tim.
ii. 26 ; 1 Tim. iii. 7. (In Grk. writ, also of the snares
of love.) *
ιτάθημα, -τοΓ, τά, (fr. παθήρ, πάσχω, as μάθημα fr. μα-
θ(ίν), It. [Soph.,] Ildt. down; 1. tltat witic/i one
suffers or has suffered; a. externally, a suffering,
misfortune, calamiti), evil, affliction•, plur., Ro. viii. 18;
2Co. i. 6sq. ; Col. i. 24 ; 2Tim. iii. 11; lleb. ii. 10; x.
32; 1 Pet. v. 9 ; τά fU Χριστοί/, that should subsequently
come unto Christ [W. 193 (182)], 1 Pet. i. 11; roi
Χρίστου, which Christ endured, 1 Pet. v. 1 ; also the
afllictions which Christians must undergo in behalf of
the same cause for which Christ patiently endured, are
called παθήματα τοϋ Χριστού [W. 189 (178) note], 2 Co.
i. 5; Phil. iii. 10; 1 Pet. iv. 13. b. of an inward
state, an affection, passion : Gal. v. 24 ; τώι» αμαρτιών,
that lead to sins, Ro. vii. 5. 2. i. q. το πάσχfw (see
καύχημα, 2), an enduring, undergoing, suj'ering, (so the
plur. in Arstph. thesra. 199) : θάνατον, gen. of the obj.,
Heb. ii. 9. [Syn. cf. πάθος, init.] •
ιταθητίϊ, -η, -άν, {πάσχω, παθί'ιν) ; 1. passible (Lat.
patibilis, Cic. de nat. dcor. 3, 12, 29), endued with the
capacity of suffering, capable of feeling; often in Plut., as
ηαθητον σώμα. 2. subject to the necessity of suffer-
ing, destined to ■■suffer, (Vulg. passibilis) : Acts xxvi. 23
(with the thought here respecting Christ as ποθητός
eompare the similar language of .Justin Mart. dial. c. Tr.
ec. 36, 39, 52, 68, 76, 89) ; cf. W. 97 (92) ; [B. 42 (37)];
(bo in eccl. writ, also, cf. Otto's Justin, Grk. index s. v. ;
iraiSapiop
Christ is said to be παθητίς and άπαθης in Ignat. ad Eph.
7, 2 ; ad Polyc. 3, 2).*
ιταβοϊ, -ους, τό, (παθΛν, πάσχω), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down ; i. (j. πάθημα ((J. v.; [the latter differs fr. πάθος (if
at all) only iu being the more individualizing and con-
crete term; cf. .Schmidt, Syn. ch. 24 § 11]); 1.
whatever befalls one, whether it be sad or joyous ; spec.
a calamity, mishap, evil, affliction. 2. a feeling which
the mind suffers, an affection of the mind, emotion, pas-
sion ; passionate desire ; used by the (ireeks in either a
good or a bad sense (cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 2, 4 [cf. Cope,
Introd. to Aristotle's Rhet. p. 133 sqq. ; and his note on
rhet. 2, 22, 16]). In the N. T. in a bad sense, depraved
passion : Col. iii. 5 ; πάθη ατιμίας, vile pas.iions, Ro. i. 26
(see ατιμία) ; iv πάθ(ΐ επιθυμίας, [in the passion of lust],
gen. of apposit. [W. § 59, 8 a.], 1 Th. iv. 5.•
[Syn. πάθος, ίτιβυμία: ir. presents the passive, {π. the
active side of a vice ; iir. is more comprehensive in meaning
than IT. ; (π. is (evil) desire, π. ungovernable desire. Cf.
Trench § Ixxxvii. ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 5.]
iraiSaYu-yos, -oC, 6, (fr. παις, and αγωγός a leader, es-
cort), fr. lldt. 8, 75 down; a tutor (Lat. paedagogus)
i. e. a guide and guardian of boys. Among the Greeks
and Romans the name was applied to trustworthy slaves
who were charged with the duty of supervising the life
and morals of boys belonging to the better class. The
boys v/ere not allowed so much as to step out of the
house without them before arriving at the age of man-
hood; cf. Fischers, v. in index i. to Aeschin. dial. Socr.;
Hermann, Griech. Privatalterthiimer, §84, 15 sqq.;
[Smith, Diet, of Grk. and Rom. Anticp s. v. ; Becker,
Charicles (Eng. trans. 4th ed.), p. 226 sq.]. They are
distinguished from o! διδάσκαλοι: Xen. de rep. Lac. 3, 2;
Plat. Lys. p. 208 c. ; Diog. Laert. 3, 92. The name car-
ries with it an idea of severity (as of a stern censor
and enforcer of morals) in 1 Co. iv. 15, where the
father is distinguished from the tutor as one whose
discipline is usually milder, and in Gal. iii. 24 sq. where
the Mosaic law is likened to a tutor because it arouses
the consciousness of sin, and is called παιδαγωγός tit
Χριστόν, i. e. preparing the soul for Christ, because those
wlio have learned by experience with the law that they
are not and cannot be commended to God by their
works, welcome the more eagerly the hope of salvation
offered them through the death and resurrection of
Christ, the Son of God.*
iraiSapiop, -an, n$, (dimin. of καις, see γνναικάριον), a
little boy, a lad: Mt. xi. 1 6 Rec. ; Jn. vi. 9. (Arstph.,
Xen., Plat., son. : Sept. very often for "i;•:, also for nV.•
Traioeia
473
ττακ
[παιδάριον of an adult youth, Tob. vi. 2, etc. (cf. 1 1 sq.)].)
[Syn. see iraiy, fin.]*
iraiScCa (Tdf. -ία; [see 1, t]), -as, η. (παιδίύω), Sept.
for "iOn ; 1. the whole Iraininy and education of
chddren (which relates to the cultivation of mind and
morals, and employs for this purpose now commands
and admonitions, now reproof and punishment) : Eph.
vi. 4 [cf. W. 388 (363) note] ; (in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl.
on, it includes also the care and training of the body.)
[See esp. Trench, Syn. § .x.x.xii. ; cf. Jowett's Plato, in-
de.x 8. V. Education]. 2. whatever in adults al.io
cultivates the soul, esp. by correcting mislak-es and curbini/
ike passions ; hence a. instruction which aims at the
increase of virtue: 2 Tim. iii. 16. b. ace. to bibl.
usa^e chastisement, chasteninr/, (of the evils with which
God visits men for their amendment) : Heb. .\ii. 5 (Prov.
iii. U), 7 sq. [see νπομίνω, 2 b.], 11 ; (Prov. xv. 5, and
often in the O. T. ; cf. Grimm, Exgt. Ildbch. on Sap.
p. 51 ; [cf. (Plat.) defin. naihtia• 8νναμις θίραττίυτικη
ψνχήίΐ)*
ιταιδίυτήβ, -oC, ό, (πα(δ{ΐ5ω) ; 1. an instructor, pre-
ceptor, teacher: Ro. ii. 20 (Sir. xxxvii. 19 ; 4 Mace. v. 34 ;
Plat. legg. 7 p. 8 1 1 d., etc. ; Plut. Lycurg. c. 1 2, etc. ; Diog.
Laert. 7, 7). 2. α ckastiser: Heb. xii. 9 (Hos. v. 2;
Psalt. Sal. 8, 35).*
παιΕίνω; impf. ijrai8(vov; 1 aor. ptcp. iraiSfiaas; Pass.,
pres. παιδιϋομαι; 1 aor. €7ταώ(ίθην; pf. ptop. nenaiSfv-
ftiVos; (παις); Sept for τρ" ; 1. as in class. Grk.
prop, to train children : τινά with a dat. of the thing in
which one is instructed, in pass., σοφία [W. "227 (213) n.],
Acts vii. 22 R G L WH [cf. B. § 134, 6] (γράμμασιν,
Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 4 fin.) ; eV σοφία, ibid. Τ Tr ; τίνα «ατά
άκρίβίίαν, in pass.. Acts xxii. 3. Pass, to be instructed or
tauijhl, to learn : foil, by an inf., 1 Tim. i. 20 ; to cause
one to learn: foil, by ίνα. Tit. ii. 12. 2. to chas-
tise; a. to chastise OT castigate ivith words, to cor-
rect : of those who are moulding the character of others
by reproof and admonition, 2 Tim. ii. 25 (τινά naiSfifiv
και ρυθμίζίΐν λόγω, Ael. v. h. 1, 34). b. in bibl. and
eccl. use employed of God, to chasten by the infliction of
evils and calamities [cf. W. § 2, 1 b.] : 1 Co. xi. 32; 2 Co.
vi. 9; Heb. xii. 6; Rev. iii. 19, (Prov. xix. 18; xxix. 17;
Sap. iii. 5 ; xi. 10 (9) ; 2 Mace. vi. 16 ; x. 4). c. to
chastise with blows, to scourge : of a father punishing a
son, Heb. xii. 7, [10]; of a judge ordering one to be
scourged, Lk. .xxiii. 16, 22, [(Deut. -xxii. 18)].*
TraiSio9ev, (παιδίον), adv., from cIiildhood,frotn a child,
(a later word, for which the earlier writ, used « n-aiSu'y,
Xen. Cyr. 5, 1, 2 ; or « παώίου, mem. 2, 2, 8 ; or c'k παι-
διών, oec. 3, 10 ; [cf. W. 26 (25) ; 463 (431)]) : Mk. ix.
21, where L Τ Tr WH eV παώιάθιν [cf. Win. §65,2].
(Synes. de provid. p. 91 b. ; Joann. Zonar. 4, 184 a.).*
vaiSCov, -ου, τό, (dimin. of πα'ις), [fr. Hdt. down], Sept.
for fjp, l;rj, ]3, etc. ; a young child, a little hoy, η little
girl ; plur. τα παιδία, infants ; children ; little ones. In
sing. : univ., of an infant just born, Jn. xvi. 21 ; of α
(male) child recently born, Mt. ii. 8 sq. 11, 13, 14, 20 sq.;
Lk. i. 59, 66, 76, 80 ; ii. 1 7, 21 [Rec], 27, 40 ; Heb. xi. 23 ;
of a more advanced child, Mt. xviii. 2, 4 sq. ; Mk. ix. 3G
sq. ; [.X. 15]; Lk. ix. 47sq. ; [Lk. xviii. 1 7] ; of a mature
child, Mk. ix. 24 ; τινάί, the son of some one, Jn. iv. 49 ; of
a girl, Mk. v. 39-41 ; [vii. 30 L txt. Τ Tr WH]. In plur.
of (partly grown) children : Mt. xi. 16 G L Τ Tr WH ;
xiv. 21 ; XV. 38 ; xviii. 3 ; xix. 13 sq. ; Mk. vii. 28 : x. 13
sqq. ; Lk. vii. 32 ; xviii. 16 ; [Heb. ii. 14] ; titos, of some
one, Lk. xi. 7, cf. Heb. ii. 13. Metaph. παιδία Ta'is φρ^σί,
children (i. e. like children) where the use of the mind is
required, 1 Co. xiv. 20 ; in affectionate address, i. q. Lat.
carissimi [A. V. chililren'\,,)n. xxi. 5; 1 Jn.ii. 14 (13), 18;
[iii. 7 WH mrg. Syn. see παί?, fin.]•
■π•αι8(σκη, -ηί, η, (fem. of τταιδίσκο!, a young boy or
slave ; a dimin. of παΪΓ, see ν(ανίσκοί) ; 1. a young
girl, damsel, (Xen., Menand., Polyb., Plut., Lcian. ; Sept.
Ruth iv. 12). 2. α maidservant, a young female
slave; cf. Germ. Madchen [our maid'\ for a young fe-
male-servant (Hdt. 1, 93; Lys., Dem., al.) : Lk. xii. 45;
Acts xvi. 16; opp. to η ίΚίυθίρα. Gal. iv. 22 sq. 30
sq. ; spec, of the maid-servant who had charge of the
door: JMt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 66, 69; Lk. xxii. 56; Acts
xii. 13 ; ή TT- ή θυρωρός, Jn. xviii. 17 ; (also in the Sept.
of a female slave, often for iTDX, ΠΠϊϋϊ). Cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 239. [Syn. see παίί, fin.] *
■παΰ,ω; fr. Horn, down; prop, to play like a child;
then univ. to play, sport. Jest ; to give way to hilarity, esp.
by joking, singing, dancing; so in 1 Co. x. 7, after Ex.
xxxii. 6 where it stands for ρπϊ, as in Gen. xxi. 9; xxvi.
8 ; Judg. xvi. 25 ; also in the Sept. for pnty. [Comp. :
ί'^ι-παί^ω.] *
■irats, gen. παιδάς, ό, ή, fr. Hom. down ; in the N. T. only
in the Gospels and Acts ; 1. a child, boy or girl ;
Sept. for ί;,'3 and TTJi'^. (Gen. xxiv. 28 ; Deut. xxii. 15,
etc.) : ό παΪΓ, Mt. xvii. 18; Lk. ii. 43; ix. 42; Acts .\x.
12 ; ij παίί, Lk. viii. 51, 54 ; plur. infants, children, Jit. ii.
16 ; xxi. 15 ; όππίί nvos, the son of one, Jn. iv. 51. 2.
(Like the Lat. puer, i. q.) servant, slave, (Aeschyl. cho-
eph. 652 ; Arstph. nub. 18, 132; Xen. mem. 3, 13, 6 ;
symp. 1, 11; 2, 23; Plat. Charm, p. 155 a.; Protag. p.
310 c. and often; Diod. 17, 76; al. ; so Sept. times with-
out number for 13^' [cf. W. p. 30, no. 3] ; cf. the similar
use of Germ. Bursch, [French gari;on, Eng. boy']) : Jit.
viii. 6, 8, 13 ; Lk. vii. 7 cf. 10; xii. 4o ; xv. 26. an attend-
ant, servant, spec, a king's attendant, minister : Mt. xiv.
2 (Diod. xvii. 36 ; hardly so in the earlier Grk. writ. ;
Gen. xii. 37 sq.; 1 S. xvi. 15-17; xviii. 22, 26; Dan. ii.
7 ; 1 JIacc. i. 6, 8 ; 1 Esdr. ii. 16 ; v. 33, 35) ; hence, in
imitation of the Hebr. Π1Π' 15;•, πα'ις τοΐι θ(οΰ is used of
a devout worshipper of God, one ivho fulfils God's will,
(Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) IS; cxii. (cxiii.) 1 ; Sap. ii. 13, etc.) ;
thus, the people of Israel, Lk. i. 54 (Is. xii. 8; xlii. 19;
xliv. 1 sq. 21, etc.) ; David, Lk. i. 69; Acts iv. 25, (Ps.
xvii. (xviii.) 1 ; xxxv. (xxxvi.) 1 [Aid., Compl.], etc.) ;
likewise any upright and godly man whose agency God
employs in executing his purposes ; thus in the N. T. Jestu
the Messiah : Mt. xii. 18 (fr. Is. xlii. 1) ; Acts iii. 13, 26 ;
iv. 27, 30, [cf. Harnack on Barn. ep. 6, 1 and Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 2] ; in the O. T. also Moses, Neh. i. 7 sq. j
474
iraXiyyeveiTia
the prophets, 1 Esdr. viii. 79 (81); Bar. ii. 20, 24; and
others.•
[Syn. ira's, iraiSapiov,iTaiSlov, τταιίΐσκη,τ^κνοί':
The Kraminarian Aristophanes is (luoteil b_v Amiiionius (s. v.
y4pa>v) as (lefininj; thus : ΐΓοιβίοι/, τίι τριφόμα/ον uvb ηβη-
vov' TratSap tof 54, rb iiS-q π^ριττατυνί' και ttjs \e'|e£ijs άι/τί-
χόμ^νοι/• τταίίίσκο! δ", ό iv τγ 4χομ4ντι ήΚικία- π ο is δ' 6
Siaruf Ι-^κυκΚίων μαβ-ημάτα/ν Βυνάμίνο! tevai. Γΐύΐο (Λ(: muiul.
o|iif. §3G) ([uotes the physician Hippocrates as follows: eV
ανθρώπου φύσα ΐτττά ί'ισιν upai κ.τ λ.• παιδ /uc/ueV eVriv δχρί!
ίπτά ΐτών, !ιί6ι/ταν ί'κβολΓ;? ■ Ttus ii &χρί yayiis ϊκφΰσ(ω5, ei's
τα 6is €ΐΓτό• μΐίράκίον Si ίχρι yevelou λαχνώσεω!, e'j τά Tpls
4ΐΓτό. etc. AccoriliufT to iSchmidt, iraiSiov denotes exclusive-
ly a little child ; TraiSapiov a cliild up to its first school years ;
xois a child of any age ; (7Γαιδίσκο5 and) ταιΒίσκη, in which
relerence to descent quite disappears, cover the years of late
childhood aud early youth. But usajre is untrammelled :
fiuni a child isexpressed either liy e(c ποιδο5 (most frequently),
or 4k παιδιού, or 4κ (άπίι) παιδορίου. ttols and T6K»/oi'ilenote a
child alike as respects descent and age, reference to the latter
being more prominent in tlie former word, to descent in
TfKiOv ; but the period irair covers is not sharply defined ;
and, in classic usage as in modern, youthful designations
cleave to the female sex longer than to the male. See
Schmidt ch. 69 ; Uuhne in Luthardt's Zeitschrift u. s. w. for
1882, p. STsqq.]
iraCu) : 1 aor. ίπαισα ; from Aeschyh and Hdt. down ;
Sept. mostly for Π3Π ; to stride, smile : with the fists,
Mt. xxvi. 68 [of. ραπίζω, 2] ; Lk. xxii. 64 ; with a sword,
Mk. xiv. 47: Jn. xviii. 10; to sting (to strike or wound
with a sting), Rev. ix. 5.*
Πακατιανή, -ήί, ή, Pacatiana (Phrygia). In the fourtli
century after Christ, Phrygia was divided into Phrygia
Salutarisand Phrygia Pacatiana [later, Capatiana]; Lao-
dicea was the metropolis of the latter : 1 Tim. vi. 22 (in
the spurious subscription). [Cf. Forbiger, Hndbch. d.
alt. Geogr. 2te Ausg. ii. 338, 347 sq. ; Bp. Lghtft. on
Col., Introd. (esp. pp. 19, 69 sq.).]*
•π-άλαι, adv. of time, fr. Horn, down ; 1. of old :
Heb. i. 1 ; (as ad].) former, 2 Pet. i. 9. [ττάλπι properly
designates the past not like πριν and nportpov rela-
tively, i. e. with a reference, more or less explicit, to
some other time (whether past, pres., or fut.), but sim-
ply and absolutely.] 2. long ago: Mt. xi. 21;
Lk. X. 13 ; Jude 4 ; so also of time just past, Mk. xv. 44
[ A. V. any whiW] (where L Tr txt. WH txt. η^η) \ 2 Co.
xii. 1 9 L Τ Tr AVH [R. V. all this time], (so in Hom. Od.
21), 293; Joseph, antt. 14, 15, 4).•
παλαιός, -ά, -όΐ', (πάλαι, q. v.). fr. Hom. down ; 1.
old, ancient, (Sept. several times for [H; and ρ'ΓίχΟ :
olvos naXatos (opp. to vios), Lk. v. 39 [but WH in br.]
(Hom. Od. 2, 340; Sir. ix. 10); 8ιαθήκη, 2 Co. iii. 14;
eirroXr) (opp. to καινή), given long since, 1 Jn. ii. 7 ; ζύμη
(opp. to KcOv φίιρ.), 1 Co. V. 7 sq. ; neut. plur. παλαιά (opp.
to καινά), old things, Mt. xiii. 52 (which seems to allude to
such articles of food as are fit for use only after having
been kept some time [al. consider clothing, jewels, etc.,
as referred to ; cf. θησαυρός, 1 c] ; dropping the fig., old
and new commamlments ; cf. Sir. xxiv. 23; Heb. v. 12
sqq.) ; δ παλαιός ημών άνθρωπος (opp. to ό νιος), our old
man, i. e. we, as we were before our mode of thought,
feeling, action, had been changed, Ro. vi. 6 ; Eph. iv. 22 ;
[Col. iii. 9]. 2. no longer new, worn hi/ use, the
ivorse for wear, old, (for π'73, Josh. ix. 10 (4) sq.) :
ιμάτιον, ασκός, Mt. ix. 16 sq. ; Mk. ii. 21 sq. ; Lk. v. 39
sq. [Syn. see αρχαίος, fin.] *
ΊΓολαιότηϊ, -iJTof, ή, (πα\αιός), oldness: γράμματος, the
old state of life controlled by ' the letter ' of the law, Ro.
vii. 6 ; see καινότης, and γράμμα, 2 c. ([Eur.], Plat., Aes-
chin.. Die Cass. 72, 8.) *
■π-αλαιόω, -ώ : pf. 7!(πα\αίωκα ; Pass., pres. ptcp. παΚαι•
οίμίνος ; fut. παλαιωθήπ ομαι ; (παλαιοί) ; a. to make
ancient or old, Sept. for Π^3; pass, to become old, to be
worn out, Sept. for nS3, ΌΙ}^ : of things worn out by
time and use, as βάλάντιον, Lk. xii. 33 ; Ίμάτιον, Heb. i. 11
(Ps. ci. (cii.) 27; Deut. xxi.x. 5; Josh. ix. 19 (13) ; Neh.
ix. 21 ; Is. 1. 9 ; Ii. 6 ; Sir. xiv. 1 7). pass, το παλαίουμε•
νον, that which is becoming old, Heb. viii. 13 (Plat. symp.
p. 208 b. ; Tim. p. 59 c). b. lo declare a thing to be
old and so about to be abrogated: Heb. viii. 13 [see γψ
ράσκω, fin.].*
■π-άλη, -ης, ή, (fr. πάλλω to vibrate, shake), fr. Hom.
down, ivrestling (a contest between two in which each
endeavors to throw the other, and whicli is decided when
the victor is able θλίβαν κα'ι κατίχιιν liis i)rostiate antag-
onist, i. e. hold him doivn with his hand upon his neck ;
cf. Plat. legg. 7 p. 796 ; Aristot. rhet. 1, 5, 14 p. 1361",
24 ; Heliod. aethiop. 10, 31 ; [cf. Krause, Gymn. u. Agon,
d. Griech. i. 1 p. 400 sqq.; Guhl and Koner p. 219 sq. ;
Diet, of Antiq. s. v. luct(i]) ; the term is transferred to
the struggle of Christians with the powers of evil : Eph.
vi. 12.*
ΐΓαλιγγίνΕο-Οα (Τ λΥΗ παλιι^^^. [cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 77
bot.]), -as, η, (πάλιν and γίν^σις), prop, ncio birth, repro-
duction, reneical, re-crealion, (see Halm on Cic. pro Sest.
§ 140), Vulg. and Augustine regeneratio ; hence, moral
renovation, regeneration, the production of a new life con-
secrated to God, a radical change of mind for the better,
(effected in baptism [cf. reff. s. v. βάπτισμα, 3]) : Tit.
iii. 5 [cf. the Comm. ad loc. (esp. Holtzmann, where see
p. 172 sq. for reff.); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. esp. §§ 84, 108;
cf. Suicer, Thes. s. v.]. Commonly, however, the word
denotes the restoration of a thing lo its pristine state, its
renovation, as the renewal or restoration of life after
death, Philo leg. ad Gaium § 41 ; de cherub. § 32 ; [de
poster. Cain. § 36] ; Long. past. 3, 4 (2) (παΧιγγ. iV θανά-
του) ; Lcian. encom. muscae 7 ; Schol. ad Soijh. Elec. 62
(ΤΙυθαγόρας π^ρΊ πα\ιγγ€ν€σίας €T€paT€veTo) ; Plut. mor.
p. 998 c. [i. e. de esu earn. ii. 4. 4] (Sn χρώνται κοινοϊς al
yj^vxa\ σώμασιν iv τοις πα\ιγγζν€σΙαις [cf. ibid. i. 7, 5 ;
also de Is. et Osir. 72 ; de Ei ap. Del])!!. 9 ; etc.]) ; the
renovation of the earth after the deluge, Philo de vita
Moys. ii. §12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 9, 4 ; the renewal of
tlie world to take place after its destruction by fire, as
the Stoics taught, Philo [de incorrupt, mundi §§ 3, 14,
17]; de mund. §15; Antonin. 11, 1 [(cf. Gataker ad
loc.) ; Zeller, Philos. d. Griech. iii. p. 138] ; that signal
and glorious change of all things (in heaven and earth)
πάΧιν
•475
ττανοικι
for the better, that restoration of (he primal and perfect
condition of things which existed before the fall of our
first parents, which the Jews looked for in connection
with the advent of the Messiah, and which the primi-
tive Christians expected in connection with the visible
return of Jesus from heaven : Mt. xix. 28 (where the
Syriac correctly I-^i-m f^^*^^, in the new age or
world) ; cf. Berlholdl, Christologia Judaeorum, p. 214 sq. ;
Gfrorer, Jahrhundert des Heils, ii. p. 272 sqq. ; \_Schurer,
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29, 9; Weber, Altsynagog. Palast.
Theol. § 89]. (Further, the word is used of Cicero's
restoration to rank and fortune on his recall from exile,
Cic. ad Att. 6,6; of the restoration of the Jewish nation
after the exile, παλ. narpiSos, Joseph, antt. 1 1 , 3, 9 ; of the
recovery of knowledge by recollection, παλιγγ. rrjs yva>-
σίώϊ iWiK ij ανάμνηαΐί, Olympiodor. quoted by Cousin in
the Journal des Savans for 1834, p. 488.) [Cf. Trench
§ xviii. ; Cremer 3te Aufl. s. v.] *
τάλιν, adv., fr. Horn, down ; 1. anew, again, [but
the primary meaning seems to be baci:; cf. (among oth-
ers) Ellendt, Lex. Soph. s. v.ii. p. 48ό]; a. joined
to verbs of all sorts, it denotes renewal or repetition
of the action : Mt. iv. 8 ; xx. 5 ; xxi. 36 ; xxii. 1, 4 ; Mk.
ii. 13; iii. 20 ; Lk. x.xiii. 20 ; Jn. i. 35; iv. 13 ; viu. 2, 8, 12,
21 ; ix. 15, 1 7 ; X. 19 ; Acts xvii. 32 ; xxvii. 28 ; Ro. xi. 23 ;
1 Co. vii. 5 ; 2 Co. xi. 16 ; Gal. i. 9 ; ii. 18 ; iv. 19 ; 2 Tet.
ii. 20 ; Phil. ii. 28 ; iv. 4 ; Heb. i. 6 (where παΚιν is tacitly
opposed to the time when God first brought his Son into
the world, i. e. to the time of Jesus' former life on earth) ;
Heb. v. 12 ; vi. 1,6; Jas. v. 18; Rev. x. 8, 11 ; πάλιν μικρόν
so. ίσται, Jn. xvi. 16 sq. 19 ; us το πάλιν, again (cf. Germ.
zum wicderholten Male; [see ds, A. II. 2 fin.]), 2 Co. xiii.
2 ; with verbs of going, coming, departing, returning,
where again combines with the notion of back ; thus with
άγωμιν, Jn. xi. 7 ; <ii/a;(<Bpeii', Jn. vi. 15 [where Tdf. (^eiyei
and Grsb. om. πάλικ], (if. ib. 3) ; άπίρχ(σθαι, Jn. iv. 3; x.
40; XX. 10; ^σίρχίσθαι, Mk. ii. 1; iii. 1 ; Jn. xviii. 33;
xix. 9 ; (ξίρχισθαι, Mk. vii. 31 ; ϊρχίσθαι, Jn. iv. 46 ; xiv.
3; 2Co.i. 16 ; xii.21 [cf. W. 554 (515) n. ; B.§145,2a.];
νπά-γίΐν, Jn. xi. 8; άνακάμπτ^ιν. Acts .xviii. 21 ; hianfpciv,
Mk. V. 21 ; ΰποσ-τρίφαν. Gal. i. 17; ή epq παρουσία πάλιν
πρΟ! υμάς, my presence with you again, i. e. my return to
you, Phil. i. 26 [cf. B. § 125, 2] ; also with verbs of tak-
ing, Jn. X. 17sq. ; Acts x. 16 Rec. ; xi. 10. b. with
other parts of the sentence : πάλιν (Ις φόβον, Ro. viii. 15 ;
πάλιν (νλΰπ<], 2 Co. ii. 1. c. πάλιν is explained by
the addition of more precise specifications of time [cf.
Λν. 604 (562)] : πάλιν tic τρίτου, Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Tr mrg.
br. (K rp-l ; €κ 8(υτ(ρον, Mt. xxvi. 42 ; Acts x. 15; πάλιν
Seurepov, Jn. iv. 54 ; xxi. 16 ; πάλιν άνωθεν, again, anew,
[R. V. bach again (yet cf. Mey. ad loc.;]. Gal. iv. 9 (Sap.
xix. 6 ; πάλιν c| άρχης, Arstph. Plut. 866 ; Plat. Eut. p.
1 1 b. and 15 c.; Isoc. areiop. 6 p. 338 [p. 220 ed. Lange] ;
cf. W. U.S.). 2. again.'i.e.fttrlher, moreover, (-where
the subject remains the same and a repetition of the action
or condition is indicated) : Mt. v. 33 (πάλιν ήκονσατί) ;
xiii. 44 (where Τ Tr WH om. L br. πάλιν), 45, 47 ; xix.
24 ; Lk. xiii. 20 ; Jn. x. 7 [not Tdf.] ; esp. where to O. T.
passages already quoted others are added : Mt. iv. 7 ;
Jn. -xii. 39; xix. 37; Ro. xv. 10-12; 1 Co. iii. 20; Heb.
i. 5 ; ii. 13 ; iv. 5 ; x. 30 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 15, 3 sq. and
often in Philo ; cf . Bleek; Br. a. d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 1 OS. 3.
in turn, on Ike other hand : Lk. vi. 43 Τ WH L br. Tr br. ;
1 Co. xii. 21 ; 2 Co. X. 7 ; 1 Jn. ii. 8, (Sap. xiii. 8 ; xvi. 23 ;
2 ]Macc. XV. 39; see exx. fr. prof. auth. in Pape s. v. 2 ;
Passow s. v. 3 ; [Ellendt u. s. (ad init.) ; L. and S. s. v.
lU. ; but many (e. g. Fritzsche and Meyer on Mt. iv. 7)
refuse to recognize this sense in the N. T.]). John uses
πάλιν in his Gospel far more freq. than the other N. T.
writ., in his Epp. but once; Luke two or three times;
the author of the Rev. twice.
iroXiv^cvto-ia, see πaλιγγfvfσla.
•π-αμττληθίί (Τ WH πανπλ. [cf. WH. App. p. 150]),
adv., (fr. the adj. παμπληθί^ς, which is fr. πάί and πληθοί),
with the whole multitude, all together, one and all : Lk.
xxiii. 18 (Dio Cass. 75, 9, 1). [Cf. W. § 16, 4 B. a.] *
•π-άμπολυϊ, παμπόλλη, πάμπολυ. (πά: and πολνι), very
great : Mk. viii. 1 Rec. [where LT Tr WH τΓαλιν τΓολλοΟ].
(Arstph., Plat., Plut., [al.].) *
Παμφυλία, -as, ή, Pamphylia, a province of Asia ]Minor,
bounded on the E. by Cilicia, on the W. by Lycia and
Phrygia Minor, on the N. by Galatia and Cappadocia,
and on the S. by the Mediterranean Sea (there called
the Sea [or Gulf] of Pamphylia [now of Adalia]) : Acts
ii. 10 ; xiii. 13; xiv. 24; xv. 38; xxvii. 5. [^Conijheare
and Howson, St. Paul, ch. viii. ; Lewin, St. Paul, index
s. V. ; Diet, of Geogr. s. v.] *
iravSoKcvs, see παν^οχ^νί.
Ίταν-δοκίον, see παν^οχΰον*
ΐΓαν-8οχ£ϊον (-Βοκίον, Tdf. [cf. his note on Lk. x. 34, and
Hesych. s. v.]), -ου, τό, (fr. παν8οχ(ϋ5, q. v.), an inn, a
public house for the reception of strangers (modern
caravansary, khan, manzil) : Lk. x. 34. (Polyb. 2, 15,
5; Plut. de sanit. tuenda c. 14 ; Epict. enchirid. c. 11 ;
but the Attic form παι/δοκίίον is used by Arstph. ran.
550; Theophr. char. U (20), 2; Plut. Crass. 22; Pa-
laeph. fab. 46 ; Ael. v.h. 14, 14 ; Polyaen. 4, 2, 3 ; Epict.
diss. 2, 23. 36 sqq.; 4, 5, 15; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 307.)•
τταν-Βοχίύϊ, -ίωs, 6, (πάs and 8(χομαι [hence lit. 'one who
receives all comers ']), for the earlier and more elegant
ττανδοκίνΕ (so Tdf. ; [cf. W. 25 note]), an inn-keeper, host :
Lk. x. 35. (Polyb. 2, 15, 6 ; Plut. de sanit. tuenda
c. 14.)*
ιτανήγυρίξ, -fωs, η, (fr. πάs and ayuptj fr. ayelpa). It.
Hdt. and Pind. down ; a. a festal gathering of the
ichole people to celebrate public games or other solemni-
ties, b. univ. a public festal assembly ; so in Heb.
xii. 22 (23) where the word is to be connected with
ά7γ£λων[50 GL Tr (Tdf.) ; yet see the Comm.]. (Sept.
for Ίί'ή, Ezek. xlvi. 11 ; Hos. ii. 11 (13) ; Lx. 5 ; n^:S}!^
Am. v. 21.) [Cf. Trench § i.]*
■iravoiKC [so R G L Tr] and πανοικιΐ (Τ [ WH ; see WH.
App. p. 154 and cf. fi, i]), on this diiTerence in writing cf.
Λν. 43 sq. ; B. 73 (64), {πάs and ohos: a form rejected
by the Atticists for πανοικία, πανοικισία, πανηικησία, [cf. W.
ναροττΧία
476
wapa
■26 (25) ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 514 sq.]), with all (his) house,
wilk (his) iclinle family : Acts xvi. 34. (Plat. Eryx. p.
392 c.; Aeschin. dial. 2, 1 ; Philo de Joseph. §42; de
vita Moys. i. 2 ; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 42 ; 5, 1, 2 ; 3 Mace,
iii. 27 where Fritzsche -κία.) *
πανοΐΓλ(α, -at, ή. (fr. waiOTrXot wholly armed, in full
armor; ami this fr. ηάς and ϋπλον),/ηΙΙ armor, complete
armor, (i. e. a shield, .sword, lance, helmet, greaves, and
breastplate, [cf. Potyb. G, 23, 2s(iq.]) ; Lk. .\i. 22; θίού,
which (iod supplied [W. 18!) (178)], Eph. vi. 11, 13,
where the spiritu.al helps needed for overcoming the
temptations of the devil are so called. (Ildt., Plat.,
Isocr., Polyb., Joseph., Sept. ; trop. of the various appli-
ances at God's command for punishing. Sap. v. 18.)*
iravovp^Ca, -as, ij, (navovpyns. Γρ v.), craftiness, cunning:
Lk. XX. 23; 2 Co. iv. 2; xi. 3; Eph. iv. 14; contextually
i. f|. a specious or false tuisdom, 1 Co. iii. 1!•. ( ^eschyl..
Soph., Arstph., Xen., Plat., Lcian., Ael., al. ; πασά τ( ini-
στημη χωριζομίνη δικαιοσύνης και της α\\ης άρ(της πανονμ-
y'la oil σοφία φαίν(ται. Plat. Menex. p. 247 a. for iTpi;"
in a good sense, prurience, skill, in underlaLinr/ and carry-
ing on a£airs, Prov. i. 4 ; viii. 5 ; Sir. x.xxi. (.xx.xiv. 11)
10.)•
iravovpYos, -ok, (πάί and ΕΡΓΩ i. q. (ργύζομαι ; on the
accent, see κακούργος), Sept. for Dn;• ; skilful, clever,
i. e. 1. in a good sense, _^/ to undertake and accom-
plish anything, dexterous; irise, sagacious, skilful, (Aris-
tot., Polyb., Pint., al. ; Sept. Prov. xiii. 1 ; xxviii. 2).
But far more frecp 2. in a bad sense, crafy, cun-
ning, knauish, treacherous, deceitful, (Tragg., Arstph.,
Plat., Plut., al.; Sept.; Sir. vi. 32 (31) [but here in a good
sense]; xxi. 12, etc.): 2 Co. xii. 16.*
■π-αντΓληβίΙ, see παμιτΚηθίΊ.
ιτανταχή or παιηαχη (L Tr WII ; see (Ικη). adv., every-
where : Acts x.xi. 28 L Τ Tr ΛΛΉ, for πανταχού, — a varia-
tion often met with also in the JIss. of prof. auth. [From
Hdt. down; cf. Meuterhans, Gr. d. Att. Inschr. p. 64.] *
ττανταχόθίν, adv., from nil sides, from ecery quarter :
Mk. i. 45 Ilec. [Hdt., Thuc, Plat.^ al.] *
ΐΓονταχοΰ, adv., everywhere : Mk. i. 28 Τ WH Tr br. ;
xvi. 20 ; Lk. ix. 6 ; Acts xvii. 30 ; xxi. 28 Rec. ; xxiv.
3 ; xxviii. 22 ; 1 Co. iv. 1 7. [Soph., Thuc., Plat., al.] *
παντελήϊ, -c'r, (πηί and τίΚος), all-complete, perfect,
(Aeschyl., .Soph., Pl.at., Diod., Plut., al. ; 3 Mace. vii. 16) ;
(ΐς TO τται/τίλί'ί (prop, unto completeness [W. §51, 1 c.])
completely, perfectly, utterly : Lk. xiii. 1 1 ; Heb. vii. 25,
(Philo leg. ad Gaium 21 ; Joseph, antt. 1, 18, 5; 3, 11,
3 and 1 2, 1 ; 6, 2, 3 ; 7, 1 3, 3 ; Ael. v. h. 7, 2 ; n. a. 1 7,
27).*
ττάντη (R G L Tr WII ττάντη, see reff. s. v. fiKrf), (πα?),
adv., fr. Horn, down, everywhere ; wholly, in all respects,
in every way : Acts xxiv. 3.*
Ίτάντοβίν, (πάς), adv., fr. Horn. down, from all sides,
from every Quarter : Mk. i. 45 L Τ WII Tr [but the last
named here παρτιΊΘ(ν: cf. Chandler §842]; Lk. xix.
43; Jn. xviii. 20 Rec.''"'-'^ Heb. ix. 4.*
παντοκράτωρ, -ορός, 6, (πάς and κpaτfω), he who holds
tway over all things; the ruler of all ; almighty: of God,
2 Co. vi. 18 (fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 55) ; Rev. i. 8; iv.
8; xi. 17 ; xv. 3; xvi. 7, 14; xix. 6, 15; xxi. 22. (Sept.
for ηΐΚ3ϊ in the phrase ΠΙΧΙΪ ΠίΓΓ or ηίΝ3Χ "ΓΙ'^Κ Je-
hovah or God of hosts ; also for -ia ; Sap. vii. 25 ; Sir.
xiii. 17: L 14 ; often in Ju<lith and 2 and 3 Mace. ; An-
thol. Gr. iv. p. 151 ed. Jacobs; Inscrr. ; eccles. writ,
[e. g. Teaching etc. 10,3; cf. Ilarnack's notes on Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. init. and the Symb. Rom. (Patr. apost. opp.
i. 2 p. l.'U )].)_•
iravTOTe, (πάς), adv., (for which the Atticists tell us
that the better (irk. writ, used (κάστοτι: cf• Sturz, De
dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 187 scp ; [\V. 26 (25)]), at all
times, always, ever: Mt. xxvi. 11 ; Mk. xiv. 7; Lk. xv.
31 ; xviii. 1 ; Jn. vi. 34 ; vii. 6 ; viii. 29 ; xi. 42 ; xii. 8 ;
xviii. 20' [20"' Rec.•'] ; Ro. i. 10 (9) ; 1 Co. i. 4 ; xv. 58 ;
2 Co. ii. 14 ; iv. 10 ; v. 6 ; [vii. 14 L mrg.] ; ix. 8 ; Gal.
iv. 18; Eph. v. 20 ; Phil. i. 4, 20 ; [iv. 4] ; Col. i. 3 ; iv.
6, [12]; 1 Th. i. 2; ii. 16; [iii. 6] ; iv. 17; [v. 15, 16]; 2
Th. i. 3, 11 ; ii. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 7; Philera. 4 ; Heb. vii.
2.5. (.Sap.xi. 22(21); xix. 17 (18) ; Joseph., Dion. Hal.,
Plut., Hdian. 3, 9, 13 [(7ed. Bekk.)]; Artem. oneir. 4
20 ; Athen., Diog. Laert.) *
irivrot, (from πάς), adv., altogether (Latin omnino),
i. e. a. in any and every way, by all means : 1 Co.
ix. 22 (so fr. Hdt. down). b. doubtless, surely, cer-
tainly : Lk.iv. 23; Acts .xviii. 21 [Rec.]; xxi. 22; xxviii.
4; 1 Co. ix. 10, (Tob. xiv. 8 ; Ael. v. h. 1, 32; by Plato
in answers [cf. our colloquial by all means~\). c.
with the negative οΰ. α. where οΰ is postpositive, in
no wise, not at idl : 1 Co. xvi. 1 2 (often so as far back a.s
Hom.). β. when the negative precedes, the force of
the adverb is restricted : οϋ πάντως, not entirely, not al-
together, 1 Co. V. 10; 710/ ί« all things, not in all respects,
Ro. iii. 9 ; (rarely i. q. πάντως oi, as in Ep. ad Diogn. 9
* God οΰ πάντως (φη^όμίνος τοις άμηρτημασιν ήμων.' J^ike-
wise oiiSev πάντως in Ildt. 5, 34. But in Theogn. 305 ed.
Bekk. Oi κακο\ ov πάντως κακοί ΐκ γαστρος γΐγήνασι κτ\. is
best translated not wholly, not entirely. Cf. W. 554
(515) sq. ; B. 389 (334) Si]. [on whose interpretation of
Ro. 1. c, although it is that now generally adopted, see
Weiss in Meyer 6te Aufl.]).*
Ίταρά, [it neglects elision before prop, names begin
ning with a vowel, and (at least in Tdf.'s text) before
some other words ; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95. cf. W. § 5, 1 a.;
B. 10], a preposition indicating close proximity,
with various modifications corresponding to the various
cases with which it is joined ; cf. A'iger. ed. Herm. p.
643 sqq.; Matthiae § 588 ; Bnhdy. p. 255 sqq. ; KUhner
§ 440 ; Kruger § 68, 34-36. It is joined
I. with the Genitive ; and as in Grk. prose writ,
always with the gen. of a person, to denote that a
thing proceeds from the side or the vicinity of one, or
from one's sphere of power, or from one's wealth or
store, Lat. a, ab ; Germ, von . . . her, von neben ; French
de chez ; [Eng. from beside, from"] ; Sept. for '3Β1Ό, Ί'Ό,
SxKti (1 S. xvii. 30) ; cf. W. 364 (342) sq. a. prop-
erly, with a suggestion of union of place or of residence,
after verbs of coming, departing, setting out.
πάρα
477
ΊΓορα
etc. (cf. French venir^ partir de chez quelqu'un) : Mk. xiv.
43 ; Lk. viii. 49 [here Lehm. άπό] ; Jn. xv. 26 ; xvi. 27 ;
xvii. 8 ; [παρ' ης (κβίβλή<ίΐ ίητα δαιμόνια, Mk. xvi. 9 LTr
txt. Wil] ; elvai παμα Beoi, of Christ, to be sent from God,
Jn. ix. 16, 33; to be sprang from God (by the nature of
the Xoyos), vi. 46 ; vii. 29 (where for the sake of the con-
text κάκίΐνός μ€ <ϊπ/στ( iXfv [Tdf. άττίστ-αλκίκ] is added) ;
/loiO-yf i/ous τταμά πατρός sc. ovtos, Jn. i. 14 ; «στί tl παρά
Tims, is given lii/ one, Jn. xvii. 7 [cf. d. below]. b.
joined to passive verbs, παρά makes one the author, the
giver, etc. [W. 3G5 (343); B. § 134, 1]; so after άπο-
στ(\\(σθαι, Jn. i. 6 (the expression originates in the
tact that one who is sent is conceived of as having been
at the time with tlie sender, so that he could be selected
or commissioned from among a number and then sent
off); yivtadai, Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 11 {πάρα κυρίον,
from the Lord, by divine agency or by the power at
God's command) ; akin to which is ούκ ίίδuι'αΓι7σfl πάρα
του θ(οϋ πάν ρήμα, Lk. i. 37 L mrg. Τ Tr WH [see άδυνα-
τίω, b.] ; ΧαΧύσθαι, Lk. i. 45 (not υπό, because God had
not spoken in person, but by an angel) ; κατη-^ηριΊσβαι,
Acts xxii. 30 Rec. (not υπό [yet so L Ϊ Tr WUj because
Paul had not yet been formally accused by the Jews, but
the tribune inferred from the tumult that the Jews ac-
cused him of some crime), c. after verbs of seek-
ing, asking, taking, receiving, buying, [cf. W.
370 (347) n. ; B. § 147, 5 ; yet see Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i.
12] ; as, αιτώ, αΐτοϋμαί, Mt. xx. 20 (where L Tr txt. WII
txt. άπ' αύτοϋ) ; Jn. iv. 9 ; Acts iii. 2 ; ix. 2 ; Jas. i. 5 ; 1 Jn.
V. 15 (where L Τ Tr AVH άττ' αύτοϋ) ; ζήτω, Mk. viii. 11 ;
Lk. xi. 16 ; xii. 48; λαμβάνω, Mk. xii. 2 ; Jn. v. 34, 41,
44; X. 18; Acts ii. 33 ; iii. 5 ; xvii. 9 ; xx. 24 ; xxvi. 10;
Jas. i. 7; 2Pet.i. 17; 1 Jn. iii. 22 (LTTrWHarr" αύτοΟ);
2 Jn. 4 ; Rev. ii. 28 (27) ; παραλαμβάνω. Gal. i. 1 2 ; 1 Th.
ii. 13; iv. 1; απολαμβάνω, Lk. vi. 34 R G L Tr mrg. ;
κομίζομαι, Eph. vi. K; yiverat μοί Tl, Mt. xviii. 19; δίχο-
μαι. Acts xxii. 5 ; Phil. iv. 18 ; ίχω. Acts ix. 14 ; ωνίομαι.
Acts vii. 1 6 ; ά-γοράζπμαι. Rev. iii. 1 8 ; also after άρτον
φα-^ί'ιν (sc. δοθϊντα), 2 Th. iii. 8; dpe'iv eXfor, 2 Tim. i.
18; co-Tat χάρις, 2 Jn. 3. after verbs of bearing, as-
certaining, learning, making inquiry; as, άκονω
Tt, Jn. i. 40 (41); vi. 45 sq. ; vii. 51 ; viii. 26,40; xv. 15;
Acts X. 22 ; xxviii. 22 ; 2 Tim. i. 13 ; ii. 2 ; πυνθάνημαι,
Mt. ii. 4; Jn. iv. 52 ; άκριβώ, Mt. li. 16 ; ίπιγιυωσκω. Acts
xxiv. 8; μανθάνω, 2 Tim. iii. 14. d. in phrases in
which things are said (ivai or (ξ(ρχ(σθαι from one :
Lk. ii. 1 ; vi. 19 ; Jn. xvii. 7 [see a. above]. e. ό,
ή, το παρά τίνος [see ό, IL 8 ; cf. Β. § 125, 9 ; W. § 18,
3] ; α. absol. : οί παρ αϋτοϋ, those of one's family,
i. e. his kinsmen, relations, Mk. iii. 21 (Sus. 33 ; one's de-
scendants [yet here Vulg. qui cum eo erant"], 1 Mace. xiii.
52; [Joseph, antt. 1, 10, 5]); cf. Fritzsche ad loc. p.
101 ; [Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc.]; τα παρά τίνος,
what one has beside him, and so at his service, i. e. one's
means, resources, Mk. v. 26 ; τα παρά τίνων, sc. οντά, i. e.
SoBevra, Lk. x. 7 ; Phil. iv. 18 ; [cf. W. 366 (343) ; Joseph,
antt. 8, 6, 6 ; b. j. 2, 8. 4 ; etc.]. β. where it refers
to a preceding noun : ή (ξουσία ή παρά τίνος, sc. received.
Acts xxvi. 12 [R G] ; (πικουρίας της παρά (L Τ Tr WH
άπο) τοϋ θ(οϋ. Acts xxvi. 22 (ij παμά τίνος eivota, Xen.
mem. 2, 2, 12); ήπαρ' (μοϋ διαθήκη, of which I am the
author, Ro. xi. 27 [cf. W. 193 (1S2)].
II. with the Dative, παρά indicates that something ia
or is done either in the immediate vicinity of some one,
or (metaph.) in his mind, near by, beside, in the power of,
in the presence of, with, Sept. for ^ΪΧ (1 Κ. xx. (xxi.) 1;
Prov. viii. 30), T3 (Gen. xliv. 16 sq. ; Num. xxxi. 49),
'ri'3 (see b. below) ; cf. W. §48, d. p. 394 sq. (369) ; [B.
339 (291 sq.)]. a. near, by: (Ίστήκιισαν παρά τω
στανρω, Jn. xix. 25 (this is the only pass, in the N. T.
where παρά is joined with a dat. of the thing, in all
others Λvith a dat. of the person), after a verb of mo-
tion, to indicate the rest which follows the motion [cf. B.
339 (292)], ίστησιν αυτό παρ' ίαυτω, Lk. ix. 47. b.
will), i. e. iii one's house ; in one's town ; in one's society :
ξ(νίζ(σθαι [q. v.]. Acts x. 6; xxi. 16; μίν^ιν, of guests
or lodgers, Jn. i. 39 (40) ; iv. 40 ; xiv. 17, 25 , Acts ix.
43 ; xviii. 3, 20 [R G] ; xxi. 7 sq. ; ΐπιμίν^ιν, Acts xxviii.
14 L Τ Tr WH ; «eaTaXuetv, Lk. xix. 7 (Dem. de corona
§ 82 [cf. B. 339 (292)]) ; άριστάν, Lk. xi. 37 ; άπολίΐ'π»»
Tl, 2 Tim. iv. 13 ; παρά τω θιώ, dwelling with (iod, Jn.
viii. 38 ; i. q. in heaven, Jn. xvii. 5 ; μισθϋν ίχίΐν, to have
a reward laid up with God in heaven, Mt. vi. 1 ; ti/pcir
χάριν (there where God is, i. e. God's favor [cf. W. 365
(343)]), Lk. i. 30 ; a pers. is also said to have χάρις παρά
one with whom he is acceptable, Lk. ii. 52 , toCto χάρΐί
πηρά θ(ω, this is acceptable with God, pleasing to him,
1 Pet. ii. 20 (for •Γ;τ2, Ex. xxxiii. 12, 16 ; Num. xj. 15) ;
παρά θ(ω, in fellowship with God (of those who have
embraced the Christian religion and turned to God from
whom they had before been estranged), 1 Co. vii. 24 ;
παρά κυρίω (in heaven), before the Lord as judge, 2 Pet.
ii. 11 [G Lom. and Tr WII br. the phrase] ; παρ' ίμιν,
in your city, in your church. Col. iv. 16 ; w. a dat. plur.
i. q. (7»iOH(7, Mt. xxii. 25; xxviii. 15; Rev. ii. 13: παρ'
ίαυτω, at his home, 1 Co. .xvi. 2. c. παρ' (L Tr WH
txt. fV) Ιαυτώ, icilh one's setf'i. e. in one's own mind, δια•
λογ!ζ(σθαι, Mt. xxi. 25. d. a thing is said to be or
not to be παρά τινι, icith one, a. which belongs to his
nature and character, or is in accordance ivith his prac-
tice or the reverse ; as, μή άδκία παρά τω θιω ; Ro. ix. 14 ;
add, Ro. ii. 1 1 ; 2 Co. i. 1 7 ; Eph. vi. 9 ; Jas. i. 1 7. β.
which is or is not within one's power : Mt. xix. 26 ; Mk.
X. 27 ; Lk. xviii. 27, cf. i. 37 R G L txt. e. παρά τινι,
with one i. e. in his Judgment, he being judge, (so in Hdt.
and the Attic writ. ; cf. Passow s. v. IL 2, vol. ii. p. 667 ;
[L. and S. s. v. B. IL 3]) : παρά τω Λώ, Ro. ii. 13 ; 1 Co.
iii. 19; Gal. iii. 11 ; 2 Th. i. 6 ; Jas. 1. 27 ; 1 Pet. ii. 4 ; 2
Pet. iii. 8 [π. κυρίω] ; φρόνιμον tivai παρ' ίαυτω, [Α. V. in
one's own conceit], Wo. xi. 25 (where Trtxt. WH txt. ev) ;
xii. 16.
III. with an Accusative; Sept. for SxS, Ύ Sj?,
15;•3 (Josh. vii. 7 ; xxii. 7) ; cf. W. § 49 g. p. 403 (377)
sq. ; [B. 339 (292)] ; 1. prop, of place, at, by, near,
by the side of beside, along ; so with verbs of motion :
πίριπατΐϊν παρά την θάλασσαν (Plat. Gorg. p. 511 e.), Mt.
τταρα
478
■ΐΓαραβασι<{
iv. 18; Mk. i. 16 [here LTTrWII παράγω]; πίττταν,
ΛΙί. xiii. 4 ; Mk. iv. 4 ; Lk. viii. 5, 41 ; xvii. 16 ; Acts v.
10 (where L Τ Tr WH πρόί) ; σπαρψαι, Mt. xiii. 19;
ρίπταν, Mt. XV. 30; τιθίναι, Aots iv. 35, 3 7 [licre Tdf.
ττμοί] ; V. 2 ; άποτιθίναι Acts vii. 58 ; ίρχ{σθαι, (ξϊρχίσθαι,
Mt. XV. 29; Mk. ii. 13 [liere Tdf. fif] ; Acts xvi. 13 ; ot
παρά την 6dov, .«c. Teaames, Mk. iv. 15, ct. 4 ; Lk. viii. 1 2,
of. 5. witli verbs of rest ■ καί^σ^αι, Mt. xiii. 1 ; xx. 30;
Lk. viii. 35 ; witli (Imi, i\Ik. v. 21 ; Acts x. β. witl• verbs
ilenotiti'^ the business in wliich one is engaged, as παι5(ύ-
fKv in pass., Acts xxii. 3 [so G L Τ Tr WII punctuate] ;
8iSii(T/ifii/, Mk. iv. 1. without a verb, in specifications of
place, Acts x. 32; Heb. xi. 12. 2. beside, l>ei/ond,
i. e. metaph. a. i. q. contrary lo : πάρα την 8ί8αχην, Ιίο.
xvi. 17 ; παρ' Λπίδα, lit. beyond hope, i e where the laws
and course of nature left no room for hope, hence i. tj.
withnul [A. V. af/atnst'] hope, Ro. iv. 18 (in prof, auth.,
of things ivhich happen against hope, beyond one's ex-
pectation, cf. Fassow s. v. IIL 3, vol. ii. p. 669''; Dion.
Hal. antt. 6, 25) ; παρΰ τον νόμον, contrary to tlio law,
Acts xviii. 13 (πάρα tovs vd/tour, opp. to κατά τοΰί vopovs,
Xen. mem. 1,1,18); παρ' S, contrary to that which, i. e.
at variance with that \vhicli, Gal. i. 8 sq. ; παρά φίσιν
Ro. i. 26 ; xi. 24, (Thuc. 6, 17 ; Plat. rep. 5 p. 4(16 d.) ;
after άλλο?, other than, different from, 1 Co. iii. 11 (see
e.Kx. fr. prof. auth. in Passovv s. v. IIL 3 fin. vol. ii. p.
670»); παρά τον κτίσαντα, omitting or passing by the
Creator, Ro. i. 25, where others explain it before (above)
the Creator, rather than the Creator, agreeably indeed to
the use of the prep, in Grk. writ. (cf. Ast, Le.K. Plat. iii.
p. 28 [cf. Hidden, Platonic Idioms, § 165 β. ; L. and S.
s. v. C. L 5 d.]), but not to the thought of the passage.
except, save, i. q. //" .'/"" subtract from a given sum, less:
TfaaapOKovra παρά μίαν, one (stripe) excepted, 2 Co. xi.
24 (τΐσσηρύκοντα (των παρά τριάκοντα ημέρας, Joseph,
antt. 4, 8, 1 ; παρά neVre vaiis, five shijis being deducted,
Thuc. 8, 29; [παρ' uXiyas ψήφους, Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 37,
3] ; see other exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Bnhdy. p. 258 ; [W.
u. s. ; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. 3]). b. above, beyond:
παρά Kaiphv ηΚικΙας, Heb. xi. 11 ; παρ' ο δβΐ (Pint. mor.
p. 83 f. [de profect. in virt. § 13]), Ro. xii. 3 ; i. (|. more
than : άμαρτωΧοΙ πηρά πάντας, Lk. xiii. 2 ; ξχρισί σ( ΐλαιον
παρά τους μ(τ. more copiously than [Α. V. «//«γγ] thy
fellows, Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 8 ; ΰψοϋν τίνα παρά
τίνα. Sir. χν. 5) ; κρ'ιναν ήμίρανπαρ' ήμίραν, to prefer one
day to another (see κρίνω, 2), Ro. xiv. 5. Hence it is
joined to comparatives: πλίον παρά τ. Lk. iii. 13; fita-
φυρώτιρονπαρ' αίιτοΰς όνομα, Heb. i. 4 ; add, iii. 3 ; ix. 23 ;
xi. 4 ; xii. 24 ; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in W. § 35, 2 b. [and
as above]. ϊΧαττοϋν τίνα παρά τ., to make one inferior
to another, Ileb. ii. 7, Π. 3. on account of (ci. Lat.
propter i. q. ob) : παρά τηΰτο, for this reason, therefore,
1 Co. xii. 15 sq. ; cf. \V. § 4!) g. c.
IV. In Composition παρά denotes 1. situation
or motion either from the side of, or to the side of ; near,
beside, by, to : παραθαλάσσιος, παράλιος, παροικίω, παρακο-
\ηυθ€ω, παραλαμβάνω, παραλΐγομαι, παραπλίω, παρά-γω ;
of what is done secretly or by stealth, as παριισίρχομαι.
ναρ^ισάγω, ηαρίΐσ^ΰω: cf. [the several words and] Fritz•
sche. Com. on Kom. vol. i. p. 346. by the side of i. e.
ready, present, at hand, (παρά τινι) : πάραμι, παρουσία,
παρίχω, etc. 2. violation, neglect, aberration, [cf.
our beyond or aside i. q. amiss] : παραβαίνω, παραβάτης,
παρανομίω, παρακουω, παριημι, πάρ^σις, παραλογίζομαι,
παρά^οζος, παραφρονία, etc. 3. like the Germ, an
(in anreizen, antreiben, etc.) : παραζηλόω, παραπικραίν(ο,
παροξύνω, παμοργίζω. [Cf. Vig. ed. llerm. p. 650 sq.J
■π-αρα-βαίνω ; 2 aor. παρΐβην; prop, to go by the side o)
(in Hum. twice παρβφαώς of one who stands by anoth-
er's side in a war-chariot, II. 11, 522 ; 13, 708 [but here
of men on foot] ); lo go past or to pass over without touch-
ing a thing ; trop. to overstep, neglect, violate, transgress,
w. an ace. of the thing (often so in prof. auth. fr. Aes-
chyl. down [cf. παρά, IV. 1 and 2]) : την παρά5οσιν, Mt.
XV. 2 ; την ΐντοΧήν τον θΐον. ibid. 3 ; 6 παραβαίνων, he that
transgresseth, oversteppeth, i. e. who does not hold to
the true doctrine, opp. to μίνίΐν iv τη 8ι8αχη, 2 Jn. 9 11 G
[where L TTr WII ό προάγων ((J. v.)] (so ot παράβαιναν•
τις, transgressors of the law. Sir. xl. 14 [cf. Joseph, c.
Ap. 2, 18, 2; 29,4; 30,1]); (τήν8ιαθήκην,,Τθί'\ί.\ΊΊ. 11,
1 5 ; Ezek. xvi. 59, and often ; το ρήμα κυρίου. Num. xiv.
41 ; 1 S. XV. 24, etc. ; τάς συνθήκας, I'olyb. 7, 5, 1 ; Joseph,
antt. 4. 6, 5; Ael. v. h. 10, 2; besides, παραβ. Βίκην, τον
νήμον, Tois όρκους, τιίστιν, etc., in Grk. writ.), in imita-
tion of the Hebr. ΊΐΟ foil, by [p, we find παραβ. ίκ τίνος
and από τίνος, so to go past as to turn aside from, i. e. to
depart, leave, be turned from : c'k τής όδοΟ, Ex. xxxii. 8;
Deut. ix. 12; άπο των ϊντοΧων, Deut. xvii. 20; άπί) τω»
λόγων, Deut. xxviii. 14 cod. Alex.; once so in the N. T. :
fK (L Τ Tr WII άπο) τής αποστολής, of one who abandons
his trust, [R. V. fell away]. Acts i. 25. (In the Sept.
also for 13;', Τ3Π to break, ΠφΠ to deviate, turn aside.)
[Syn. : παραβαίνων to overstep, παραπορίίισθαι to jirnceed
by the side of παρίρχ(σθαι to go past.] *
παρα-βάλλω: 2 aor. παρίβαλον; 1. tn throiv be-
fore, cast to, [cf. παρά, IV. 1], (Ilom., Plat., Polyb., Dio
Cass., al. ; as fodder to horses, Horn. II. 8, 504). 2.
to put one thing by the side of another for the sake of
comparison, to compare, liken, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Polyb.,
Joseph., Hdian.): την βασιλύαν του θιοϋ tv παραβολή,
to portray the kingdom of God (in), by the use of, a
simiUtude, Mk. iv. 30 R G L mrg. Tr mrg. [cf. B. § 133,
22]. 3. rellexively, lo put one's self, betake one's
self into a place or to a person (Plat., Polyb., Pint.,
Diog. Laiirt.); of seamen (Ildt. 7, 179 ; Dem. p. 163, 4;
itf Πηηόλου?, Joseph, antt. 18, 6, 4), ci's Σάμοκ, Acts xx.
15 [/;«/ in at (R. v. touched at)]. For another use of
this verb in Grk. writ, see παραβολιΰομαι.'
•ΐΓορά-βασ -is, -(ως ή, (παραβαίνω, q. v.), prop, a going
over; metaiih.a disregarding, violating; \ u\%. praevarica-
lio, and once (Gal. iii. 19) Irnnsgressio ; [A. V. Irnnsgres•
,ήοη] : w. a gen. of the object, των όρκων, 2 Mace. xv. 10;
των 5ικαίων, Plut. compar. Ages, and Pomp. 1 ; τοΰ νόμου,
of the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 23 (Joseph, antt. 1 8, 8, 2) ; ab-
solutely, the breach of a definite, promulgated, ratified
law: Ro. v. 14; 1 Tim. ii. 14, (but αμαρτία is wrong-do-
77 αραβάτης
479
τταραΎΐνομαι
ino• which even a man ignorant of the law may be guilty
of [cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § Ixvi.]) ; των παραβ. χάριν, ίο
create transgressions, i. e. that sins might talce on the
character of transgressions, and thereby the conscious-
ness of sin be intensified and the desire for redemption
be aroused, Gal. iii. 19 ; used of the transgression of the
Mosaic law, Ro. iv. 15 ; Heb. ii. 2 ; ix. 15 ; Ps. c. (ci.)
3 ; w. a gon. of the subj., των άδίκωκ, Sap. xiv. 31.*
Ίταρα-βάτη?, -ου, ό, (^παραβαίνω [cf. W. 26]), α trans-
gressor (Vulg. praevaricator, transgressor) : νόμου, a lam-
breaker (Plaut. legirupa), Ro. ii. 25, 27; Jas. ii. 11;
absol., Gal. ii. 18; Jas. ii. 9. [Aeschyl. {παρβάτηί);
Graec. Ven. Deut. .xxi. 18, 20.] *
παρα-βιάξομαι : 1 aor. παρ(βιασάμην ; depon. verb, to
employ force contrary to nature and right [cf. παρά, IV. 2],
to compel by employing force (Polyb. 26, 1,3): τινά, to
constrain one by entreaties, Lk. xxiv. 29 ; Acts xvi. IS ;
so Sept. in Gen. xi.x. 9 ; 1 S. xxviii. 23, etc.*
-ιταραβολ£ΰο|χαι : 1 aor. mid. ptcp. παραβο\€ν(τάμ€νος ',
to be παράβολο! i. e. one who rashty exposes himself to dan-
gers, lo be venturesome, reckless, (cf. W. 93 (88) ; Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 67) ; recklessly to expose one's self to dan-
ger : with a dat. of respect, τη ψυχή, as respects life ;
hence, to expose one's life boldly, jeopard life, hazard life,
Phil. ii. 30 G L TTr WH for the παραβου\(υσάμ. of Rec. ;
en the difference between these readings cf. Gabler,
Kleinere theol. Schriften, i. p. 176s<i(i. This verb is
not found in the Grk. writ., who say ηαραβάΧΚίσθαι, now
absol. to expose one's self lo danger (sec Passow s. v.
παραβάλλω, 2 ; L. and S. ib. II.), now with an ace. of the
thing [ίο risk, stake"], as ψυχην, Horn. II. 9, 322 ; σώμα
και ψυχήν, 2 Macc. xiv. 38 (see other exx. in Passow
[and L. and S.] 1. c.) ; now w. a dat. of reference, rais
ψυχα^ς, Diod. 3, 35 ; τ^ {μαυτοϋ κ(φαλη, άργυρίω, Phryn.
ed. Lob. p. 238; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. 1. c'.].*
Ίταραβολή, -ης, ή, {παραβάλλω, ({. v.), Sept. for 7ty^ ;
1. a placing of one thing by the side of another, juxta-
position, as of ships in battle, Polyb. 15, 2, 13 ; Diod. 14,
60. 2. metaph. a comparing, comparison of one
thing with another, likeness, similitude, (Plat., Isocr.,
Polyb., Plut.) : univ., Mt. xxiv. 32 ; Mk. xiii. 28 ; an
example by which a doctrine or precept is illustrated,
Mk. iii. 23 ; Lk. xiv. 7 ; a thing serving as a figure of
something else, Heb. ix. 9 ; this meaning also very many
interpreters give the word in Heb. xi. 1 9, but see 5 be-
low ; spec, a narrative, fctilious but agreeable to the
laws and usages of human life, by which either the duties
of men or the things of God, particularly the nature and
history of God's kingdom, are figuratirely portrayed [cf.
B. D. s. vv. Fable, Parable, (and reff. there ; add Aristot.
rhet. 2, 20, 2 sqq. and Cope's notes)] : Mt. xiii. 3, 10, 13,
24, 31, 33-35, 53 ; -xxi. 33, 45 ; [xxii. 1] ; Mk. iv. 2, 10,
[11], 13, 30, 33 sq. ; [vii. 17] ; xii. 1, [12]; Lk. viii. 4,
9-11 ; xii. 16, 41 ; xiii. 6 ; xiv. 7 ; xv. 3 ; xviii. 1,9; xix.
11 ; XX. 9, 19 ; xxi. 29 ; with a gen. of the pers. or thing
to which the contents of the parable refer [W. § 30,
i a.]: του σπείροντος, Mt. xiii. 18; των ζιζανίων, ib. 36;
την βασι.λ(ίαν τον θ(οϋ (ν παραβολή τιθίναι (lit. to set forth
the kingdom of God in a parable}, to illustrate (the na-
ture and history of) the kingdom of God by the use of a
parable, Mk. iv. 30 L txt. Τ Trtxt. WH. 3. a pithy
and instructive saying, involving some likeness or compar-
ison and having preceptive or admonitory force ; an
aphorism, a maxim : Lk. v. 36 ; vi. 39; Mt. xv. IS, (Prov.
i. 6; Eccl. i. 17; Sir. iii. 29 (27); xiii. 26 (25), etc.).
Since sayings of this kind often pass into proverbs,
παραβολή is 4. a proverb: Lk. iv. 23 (1 S. x. 12;
Ezek. xii. 22 sq. ; xviii. 2 sq.). 5. an act by which
one exposes himself or his possessions to danger, a ven-
ture, risk, (in which sense the plur. seems to be used by
Plut. Arat. 22 : δώ πολλών ίλιγμών και παράβολων πιραί-
vovret προς τα τύχος [cf. Diod. Sic. frag. lib. xxx. 9, 2 ;
also var. in Thuc. 1, 131, 2 (and Poppo ad loc.)]) ; iv
παραβολή, in risking him, i. e. at the very moment when
he exposed his son to mortal peril (see πηραβολ(ίομαι),
Heb. xi. 19 (Ilesych. ex παραβολής• eic παρακινδυυ(ϋμα•
Tos) ; others with less probability explain it, in a figure,
i. e. as a figure, either of the future general resurrection
of all men, or of Christ offered up to God and raised
again from the dead ; others otherwise.*
ιταρα-βουλίνομαι : 1 aor. ptcp. παροβουλιυσάμίνος ; to
consult amiss [see παρά, IV. 2] : w. a dat. of the thing,
Phil. ii. 30 Rec. Not found in prof. auth. See παροτ
βυλεΰομαι."
•ΐΓαρ-αγγ€λ£α, -ας, ή, (παραγγίλλω), prop, announcement,
a proclaiming or giving a message to ; hence a charge,
command: Acts xvi. 24 ; a prohibition. Acts v. 28 ; used
of the Christian doctrine relative to right living, 1 Tim.
i. 5; of particular directions relative to the same, 18;
plur. in 1 Th. iv. 2. (Of a military order in Xen., Polyb. ;
of instruction, Aristot. eth. Nic. 2, 2 p. 1104', 7 ; Diod.
exc. p. 512, 19 [i. e. frag. lib. xxvi. 1, 1].)*
■ΐΓορ-αγγίλλω ; impf. παρήγγελλον ; 1 aor. παρήγγειλα ;
{παρά and ά-^•/(λλω) \ fr. Aescliyl. and Hdt. down ; 1.
prop, tn transmit a message along from one lo another
[(cf. παρά, IV. 1)], to declare, announce. 2. lo com-
mand, order, charge: w. dat. of the pers. 1 Th. iv. 11 [cf.
Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) ' Shorter Conclusion "] ; foil, by
λέγων and direct disc. Mt. x. 5; foil, by an inf. aor.,
Mt. XV. 35 L Τ Tr WH ; Mk. viii. 6 ; Lk. viii. 29 ; Acts
X. 42 ; xvi. 1 8 ; with μή inserted, Lk. v. 14 ; viii. 56 ; Acts
xxiii. 22 ; 1 Co. vii. 10 [here Lchm. inf. pres.] ; foil, by an
inf. pres.. Acts xvi. 23 ; xvii. 30 [here Τ Tr mrg. WH have
άπαγγ.] ; 2 Th. iii. 6 ; with μή inserted, Lk. ix. 21 [G L
Τ Tr WH] ; Acts i. 4 ; iv. 18 ; v. 28 {παραγγελία παραγ-
γίλλειν, to charge strictly, W. §54, 3 ; B. 184 (1S9 sq.)),
40 ; 1 Tim. i. 3 ; vi. 1 7 ; τινί τι, 2 Th. iii. 4 [but Τ Tr WH
ora. Lbr. the dat.]; τοΰτο foil, by 5τι, 2 Th. iii. 10; nvi
foil, by ace. and inf., [Acts xxiii. 30 L Τ Tr rarg.] ; 2
Th. iii. 6 ; 1 Titn. vi. 13 [here Tdf. om. dat.] ; foil, by an
inf. alone. Acts xv. 5 ; by ίνα (see ίνα, II. 2 b.), Mk. vi.
8 ; 2 Th. iii. 1 2 ; with an ace. of the thing alone, 1 Co. xi.
17; 1 Tim. iv. 11 ; v. 7. [Syn. see κfλflJω, fin.]*
ιταρα-γίνομαι ; impf. 3 pers. plur. παρεγίνοντο (Jn. iii.
23) ; 2 aor. παρεγενάμην; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for X13;
(prop, to become near, to place one's self by the side of,
TTapayw
480
τταραΒί^ωμι
hence) to be present, to come near, approach : absol., Mt.
iii. 1 [but in ed. 1 Prof. Grimm (more appropriately) asso-
ciates this with Heb. ix. U ; Lk. xii. 51 below] . Lk. [xiv.
21] ; xix. 16 ; .In. iii. 23 ; Acts v. 21 sq. 25 ; ix. 89 ; x. 32
[11 G Tr mrg. br.], ;i3 ; .xi. 23 ; xiv. 27 ; xvii. 10 ; xviii. 27 ;
xxi. 18 ; xxiii. Ifi, 3.Ϊ ; xxiv. 1 7, 24 ; xxv. 7 ; xxviii. 21 ; 1
Co. xvi. 3 ; foil, by από w. gen. of place and fif w. ace. of
place, Mt. ii. 1 ; Acts xiii. 14 ; by από with gen. of place
and iVi w. ace. of place and πρό: w. ace. of pers. Mt. iii.
13 ; by παρά w. gen. of pers. (i. e. sent by one [cf. \V. 3i;5
(342)]), Mk. xiv. 43; by τΓρόί Ttra, Lk. vii.4, 20; viii. 19;
Acts XX. 18 ; npos τίνα « w. gen. of place, Lk. xi. 6 ; by
«s w. ace. of place, .In. viii. 2 ; Acts ix. 26 (here Lchm.
cV) ; XV. 4 ; by tπί τίνα {lujainst, see cVi, C.I. 2 g. y. ββ. ),
Lk. xxii. 52 [Tilf. πρόί]. i. q. to come forth, make one's
public appearancf, of teachers : of the Messiah, absol.
Heb. ix. 1 1 ; foil, by an inf. denoting the purpose, Lk. xii.
51 ; [of John the Baptist, Mt. iii. 1 (see above)], i. q.
to be present with help [H. V. to take one's partj, w. a
dat. of the pers. 2 Tim. iv. 16 LTTrWH. [Comp.:
κτνμ-παραγίνομαι.Ί *
παρ-άγω ; inipf. παρηγον (.In. viii. 59 Rec.) ; pres. pass.
3 pers. sing, παράγεται : fr. [Archil., Theogn.], Find, and
Hdt. down; Sept. several times for Ί5;Τ in Kal and
Hiphil ; 1. trans, [(cf. παρά, IV.)] ; a. to lead
past, lead by. b. to lead aside, miilead; to lead
awaii. C. to lead to; to lead forth, bring forward.
2. intrans. (see ayo), 4) ; a. to pass by, go past: Mt.
XX. 30 ; Mk. ii. 14 ; xv. 21 ; [Lk. xviii. 39 L mrg.] ; foil,
bv παρά w. an ace. of place, Mk. i. 1 6 L Τ Tr WH (by
κατά w. ace. of place, 3 Mace. vi. 16; θ(ωρονντ(ς παρά-
γουσαν την δΰναμιν, Polyb. 5, 18, 4). b. Ιο depart,
go away. Jn. viii. 59 Rec. ; i.\. 1 ; ίκύθ^ν, Mt. ix. 9, 27.
[AI. adhere to the meaning pass by in all these pass.]
Metaph. to pass away, i/isappeur : 1 Co. vii. 31 (Ps. cxliii.
(cxliv.) 5) ; in the passive in the same sense, 1 .Jn. ii.
«, 17.•
ΐΓαρα'δΐΐ'γματΙζω ; I aor. inf. παρα$€ΐγματίσαι ; (παρά-
8(ΐγμα [(fr. 8f^κvυμt)1 an example ; also an example in
the sense of a warning [cf. Schmidt ch. 128]); to set
forth as ati example, make an example of; in a bad sense,
to hold up to infamy ; to expose to public disgracf : τινά,
Mt. 1. 19 R G ; Heb. vi. 6 [A. V. put to open shame].
(Num. XXV. 4 ; Jer. xiii. 22 ; Ezek. xxviii. 1 7 ; [Dan. ii. 5
Sept.] ; Add. to Esth. iv. 8 [36] ; Evang. .lac. c. 20 ; often
in Polyb.; Pint, de curios. 10; Euseb. quaest. ad Steph.
1, 3 (iv. 8S4 d. ed. Migne).) [Cf. Schmidt ch. 128.] *
irapaScuros, -ov, S, (thought by most to be of Persian
origin, by others of Armenian, cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii.
p. 1 1 24 ; [B. I>. 8. v. ; esp. Fried. Delilzsch, Wo lag das
Paradies? Leipzig 1881, pp. 95-97; of. Max Muller,
Selected Essays, i. 1 29 sq.]), 1. amflng the Persians
a grand enclosure or preserve, hunting-ground, park,
shady and well-watered, in which wild animals were
kept for the hunt ; it was enclosed by walls and furnished
with towers for the hunters: Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 14; [1, 4,
5] ; 8, 1, 38 ■ oec. 4, 13 and 14 ; anab. 1, 2, 7. 9 ; Theo-
phr. h. pi. 5, 8, 1 ; Diod. 16, 41 ; 14, 80; Plut. Artax.
25, cf. Curt. 8, 1, 11. 2. univ. a garden, pleasure-
ground; grove, park: Lcian. v. h. 2, 23; Ael. v. h. 1, 33;
Joseph, antt. 7, 14,4; 8,7,3; 9,10, 4; 10, 3, 2 and 11,
1 ; b. j. 6, 1, 1 ; [c. Apion. 1, 19, 9 (where cf. .1/ii//er)];
Sus. 4, 7, 15, etc.; Sir. x.xiv. 30; and so it passed into
the Hebr. language, Dl")?, Neh. ii. 8 ; Eecl. ii. 5 ; Cant,
iv. 13; besides in Sept. mostly for M; thus for that de-
lightful region, 'the garden of Eden,' in which our first
parents dwell before the fall : Gen. ii. 8 sqq. ; iii. 1
S(iq. 3. that part of Hades ichirh teas thought by
the later Jews to be the abode of the souls of the pious
until the resurrection: Lk. xxiii. 43, cf. xvi. 23 sqq. Hut
some [e.g. Dillmann (as below p. 379)] understand that
pas.sage of the heavenly paradise. 4. an upper
region in the heavens : 2 Co. xii. 4 (where some maintain,
others deny, that the term is equiv. to ό τρίτα oipavot
in vs. 2) : with the .addition of τοΟ θ(οϋ, gen. of possessor,
the abode of God and heavenly beings, to Avhieh true
Christians ivill be taken after death, Rev. ii. 7 (cf. Gen.
xiii. 10; Ezek. xxviii. 13; xxxi. 8). According to the
opinion of many of the church Fathers, the paradise in
ivhich our first parents dwelt before the fall still exists,
neither on earth nor in the heavens, but .above and be-
yond the world; cf. Thilo, Cod. apocr. Nov. Test., on
Evang. Nicod. c. xxv. p. 748 sqq. ; and Bleck thinks that
the word ought to be taken in this sense in Rev. ii. 7.
Cf. Dillmann s. v. Paradies in Schenkel iv. 377 sqq. ;
also Hitgenfeld, Die Clement. Recogn. und Ilom. p. 87
sq. ; Klopper on 2 Co. xii. 2-4, p. 507 sqq. [((ibttingen,
1869). See also B. D. s. v. ; McC. and S. s. v. ; Hamburg-
er, Real-Encyclopudie, Abtheil. ii. s. v.] *
ΐΓαρα-δ(χομ.αι ; fut. 3 pers. plur. παρα^ϊζονταί; depon.
mid., but in bilil. and eccles. Grk. w. 1 aor. pass, παρί-
8€χθην (Acts XV. 4 LTTrWII; 2 Mace. iv. 22; [cf. B.
^I (44)]) ; 1. in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down, jirop.
to receive, take up, take upon one's self. Hence 2.
to admit i. e. not to reject, to accept, receive : τοκ λόγοι»,
Mk. iv. 20 ; ίθη, .Vets xvi. 21 ; την μαρτνρίαν. Acts xxiL
18 ; κατηγυρίαν, 1 Tim. v. 19, (τάί δοκίμου! δράχμα!, Epict.
diss. 1,7, 6) ; τινά, of a son, to acknowledge as one's own
[A. V. receive/h], Ileb. xii. 6 (after Prov. iii. 12, wliere
for ΠΧ1) ; of a delegate or messenger, to give due re-
ception to, Acts XV. 4 L Τ Tr WH. [Cf. δίχομαι. fin.] •
irapo-Sia -τριβή, -ψ. η, useless occupation, empty iusi'ne.vi,
misemployment (see παρά, IV. 2) : 1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec. [cf.
W. 102 (96)], see ίιαπαρατριβή. Not found elsewhere;
[cf. παραΒιατνπόω in Justinian (iu Koumanoudes, Af'|<tf
άθησανρ. s. v.)].*
Ίταρα-δίδωμι, subjunc. 3 pers. sing, παραίώω (1 Co. xv.
24 [L mrg. Tr mrg. WH, cod. Sin., etc.]) and παραδίδοί
(ibid. Ltxt.TTrtxt. ; cf. B.46 (40) [and &ί5ωμι, init.]) ;
impf. 3 pers. sing, παριδίδου (Acts viii. 3 ; 1 Pet. ii. 23),
plur. πapfδίδoυv (Acts xvi. 4 RG; xxvii. 1) and παρ(-
δίδοσαν (Acts xvi. 4 L Τ Tr WH ; cf. ΛΥ. § 1 4, 1 c. ; B. 4:.
(39)); fut. παραδώσω ; 1 aor. παρί'δωκα ; 2 nor, παρϊδων,
subjunc. 3 pers. sing, παραδω and several times τταοαδοί
(so L Τ Tr WH in Mk. iv. 29 ; xiv. 10, 1 1 ; Jn. xiii. 2 ;
see δίδωμι, init.); pf. ptcp. παραδ(δωκωί (Acts xv. 26);
'Π'αραΒίΒωμι
481
ΤΓαρα8οσι<;
plupf. 3 pers. plur. without augm. παραδίίώκίΐσαν (Mk.
XV. 10; W. §12, 9; [B. 33 (29); V,//. I'roleg. p. 120
sq.]) ! Pass., pres. τταραδίδο/ιαι ; iiupf. 3 pers. sing, napt-
SiSfTo (1 Co. .xi. 23 L Τ Tr Wll for R G παριδίδυτο, see
άποδίδωμι) ; pf. 3 pers. sing. irapaStSorai (Ll<. iv. C),
ptcp. TTapnSeSopems, Acts xiv. 26 ; 1 aor. παριδόθην,
1 f ut. τιαραδοθήσομαι ; fr. Find, and lldt. down ; Sept.
mostly for jnp ; lo gice over; 1. prop, to ij'we
iulu the hands (of another). 2. to give over into
(one's) power or use: τινί τι, to deliver to one something
to keep, use, take care of, manage, Mt. xi. 27 ; Lk. iv. 6
[cf. W. 271 (254)]; x. 22; τα υπάρχοντα, τάλαντα, Mt.
XXV. 14, 20, 22 ; την βασι\(1αν, 1 Co. χν. 24 ; το πνιϋμα
8C. τώ 6(ώ, Jn. xix. 30 ; το σώμα, ΐνα etc., to be burned,
1 Co. xiii. 3 ; τιι/ά, to deliver one u/i to custody, to be judged,
condemned, punished, scourged, tormented, put to death,
(often thus in prof, auth.) : τινά, absol., so that to he put
in prison must be su|)plied, Mt. iv. 12 ; Mk. i. 14 ; τηρου-
μίνους, who are kept, 2 Pet. ii. 4 [G TTr Wll ; but R
τ(τηρημΐνονς, I-< κολαζομίνυυς τηρ(ΐν~\ ; to be put to death
(cf. Germ, dahingehen), Ro. iv. 25 ; with the addition of
νπίρ Tivos, for one's salvation, Ro. viii. 32; τινά τινι, Mt.
V. 25; xviii. 34 ; xx. 18 ; xxvii. 2; Jlk. xv. 1 ; Lk. xii. 58 ;
XX. 20 ; Jn. xviii. 30, 35 sq. ; xix. 1 1 etc. ; Acts xxvii. 1 ;
xxviii. 16 Rec; τώ θ^ληματι αυτών, to do their pleasure
with, Lk. xxiii. 25; τινά τινι, foil, by Ίνα, Jn. xix. 16;
with an inf. of purpose, φυλάσσ^ιν αυτόν, to guard him.
Acts xii. 4 ; without the dat., ]Mt. x. 19 ; xxiv. 10 ; xxvii.
18; Mk. xiii. 11 ; xv. 10; Acts iii. 13 ; foil. In- iva, Mt.
xxvii. 26; Mk. xv. 15; τινά els το σταυρωθηναι, Mt. xxvi. 2
{σταυρού θανάτω. Εν. Nicod. c. 26) ; fti χ(1ράς tikos, i.e.
into one's power, Mt. .wii. 22; .xxvi. 45; Mk. ix. 31 ;
xiv. 41 ; Lk. ix. 44 ; xxiv. 7 ; Acts xxi. 11 ; xxviii. 17,
(Jer. xxxiii. (xxvi.) 24 ; xxxix. (xxxii.) 4) ; eit συνίδρια,
to councils [see συνίδριον, 2 b.] (ναραδιδόναι involving
also the idea of conducting), Mt. x. 1 7 ; Mk. xiii. 9 ; ds
σνναγωγάς, Lk. xxi. 1 2 ; (Ις θλιψιν, Mt. xxiv. 9 ; els φυ\α-
(cTjv, Acts viii. 3 ; dt φυλακής. Acts xxii. 4 ; ds θάνατην,
Mt. X. 21 ; Mk. xiii. 12; 2 Co. iv. 11 ; fir κρίμα θανάτου,
Lk. xxiv. 20 ; την σάρκα els καταφθοράν, of C'lirist under-
going death. Barn. ep. 5, 1 ; παραδίδομαι ίαυτίιν ύπίρ tivos,
to give one's self up for, give one's self to deatli for, to
undergo death for (the salvation of) one, Gal. ii. 20 ;
Eph. V. 25 ; with the addition of τώ θ(ώ and a pred. ace,
Eph. V. 2 ; την ^Ι^υχην ξαυτοΰ νπΐρ του οΐ'ΐΊματος 'ΐί;σοΰ
Χρίστου, to jeopard life to magnify and make known the
name of Jesus Christ, Acts xv. 26. Meta|)h. expres-
sions : Ttra τω Σατανά, to deliver one into the power of
Satan to be harassed and tormented with evils, 1 Tim.
i. 20 ; with the addition of ds όΧ^θρον σapκάs (see SXf-
epos), 1 Co. V. 5 (the phrase seems to have originated
from the Jewish formulas of excommunication [yet see
Meyer (ed. lleinriri) ad loc. (cf. B. I), s. vv. Ilymenaeus
II., Excommunication II.)], because a person banished
from the tlieocratic assembly was regarded as deprived
of the protection of (iod and delivered up to the power
of the devil), τινά ds άκαθαρσίαν, to cause one to be-
come unclean, Ro. i. 24 ; cf. Fritzsche, Riickert, and
others ad loc. [in this ex. and several that follow A. V.
renders to give u/i] ; ds πά6η UTiplas, to make one a slave
of vile passions, ib. 26 ; fir άδόκιμυΐ' νουν, to cause one to
follow his own corrupt mind. — full, by an inf. of purpose
[or epexegetic inf. (.Meyer)], ib. 26 ; ίαυτόν Tjj aatXyda,
to make one's self the slave of lasciviousness, Eph. iv.
19 ; τικα λατρ(ΰ(ΐν, to cause one to worship, Acts vii. 42.
to deliver up treuche ro uslg, i.e. by betrayal to cause
one to be taken : τινά τινι, of Judas betraying Jesus, Mt.
x.xvi. 15 ; Mk. xiv. 10 ; Lk. xxii. 4, 6 ; without the dat.,
Mt. x.wi. 16, 21, 23, 25; Mk. xiv. II, 18; Lk. xxii. 21,
48 ; Jn. vi. 64, 71 ; xii. 4 ; in the pass., Mk. xiv. 21 ; Lk.
xxii. 22; 1 Co. xi. 23 ; pres. ptcp. ό napaSiSois αυτόν, of
him as plotting the betrayal (cf. B. § 144, 11, 3) : Mt.
xxvi. 25, 46, 48 ; Mk. xiv. 42, 44 ; Jn. xiii. 11 ; xviii. 2,
5. to deliver one to be taught, moulded, etc. : t's «, in
pass., Ro. vi. 1 7 (to be resolved thus, ίπηκ. τώ τίπω etc•
fir of παρ(5όθητ( [W. § 24, 2 b.]). 3. i. q. lo com-
mit, to commend : τινά rrj χάριτι τ. θ(οϋ, in pass.. Acts xiv.
26 ; XV. 40 ; παρίδιδου τώ κρίνοντι δικαίως, sc. τά €αυτοϋ,
his cause (Β. 145 (127) note- [cf. W. 590 (549)]), 1 Pet.
ii. 23. 4. to deliver verhallg : commands, rites, Mk.
vii. 13; Acts vi. 14 ; 1 Co. xi. 2; 2 Pet. ii. 21 (here in
pass.) ; πίστιν, the tenets [see πίστκ, 1 e. /3.], in pass.,
Jude 3 ; φυλάσσιιν τά δόγματα, the decrees to keep, Act»
xvi. 4; to deliver Itij narrating, to report, i. e. to perpetu-
ate the knowledge of events by narrating them, Lk. i. 2;
1 Co. xi. 23 ; xv. 3, (see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Fassow
[or L. and S.] s. v. 4). 5. to permit, allow : absol.
όταν παραδώ or π-αραδοϊ ό καρπός, when the fruit will allow,
i. e. when its ripeness permits, Mk. iv. 29 (so T^r iopas
παραδιδοίσης, Folyb. 22, 24, 9 ; for other exx. see Fassow
s. v. 3 [L. and S. s. v. II. ; others take the word in Mk. 1. c.
intransitively, in a quasi-reflexive sense, gives itself up,
presents itself, cf. W. 251 (236); B. 145 (127)]).
irapaSolos, -oi', (παρά contrary to [see παρά, IV. 2], and
δόξα opinion ; hence i. q. ό παρά την δόξαν ων), unex-
pected, uncommon, incredible, wonderful : neut. plur. Lk.
v. 26 [A. V. strange things, cf. Trench § xci. fin.]. (Ju-
dith xiii. 1 3 ; Sap. v. 2, etc. ; Sir. xliii. 25 ; 2 Mace. ix. 24 ;
4 Mace. ii. 14 ; Xen., Flat., Polyb., Ael. v. h. 4, 25 ; Lcian.
dial. deor. 20, 7 ; 9, 2 ; Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 10, 2 ; Hdian. 1,
1, 5 [(4 Bekk.)].) *
Trapa-Soirts, -ewr, ή, (παραδίδωμι), a giving over, giving
up; i. e. 1. the net of giving up, the surrender: of
cities, Folyb. 9, 25, 5 ; .Joseph, b. j. 1, 8, 6 ; χρημάτων, Ar-
istot. pol. 5, 7, 11 p. 1309', 10. 2. a giving over
which is done by word of mouth or in writing, i. e. tradi-
tion by instruction, narrative, precept, etc. (see παρα-
δίδωμι, 4) ; hence i. q. instruction, Epict. diss. 2, 23, 40;
joined with διδασκαλία. Flat. legg. 7 p. 803 a. objec-
tively, ivhat is delivered, the substance of the leaching: so
of Paul's teaching, 2 Th. iii. 6 ; in plur. of the particular
injunctions of Paul's instruction, 1 Co. xi. 2 ; 2 Th. ii.
IS. used in the sing, of a written narrative, Joseph,
c. .\p. 1, 9, 2 ; 10, 2 ; again, of the body of precepts, esp.
ritual, which in the opinion of the later .Tews were orally
delivered by Moses and orally transmitted in unbroken
ΊταραζηΧοω
482
TrapaKoKko)
succession to subsequent generations, which precepts,
both illustrating and expanding the written law, as thev
did, were to be obeyed with equal revei-ence (Joseph,
antt. 13, 10, 6 distinguishes between τα eV παραθόσίωί
των πατίρων and τα -γίγμαμμίνα, i. e. τα fv to'is ΜωΟσίωΕ
νόμοι; ■γ(γραμμίι>α ra/it/ju) ; Λΐΐ. XV. 2 sq. G ; Λίκ. vii. 3,
5,9, l:i; with των άνθμύιπων added, as opp. to the
divine teachings, .Mk. vii. 8; Col. ii. 8 [ivhere see Bp.
Lghtft.]; πατρικοί nupaSoaets, precepts received from
the fathers, whether handed down in the O. T. books
or orally, Cal. i. U [(al. restrict the word here to the
extra-biblical traditions; ef. Meyer or Bp. Lghtft. ad
loc). Cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Tradition.] *
■π-αρα-ζηλόω, -ώ; (ui. ■παραζηλώσω ; 1 aor. τταρί^ι^λωσα ;
to jirocoke to ζηΚο; [see παρά, IV. 3] ; a. to pro-
voke lo jealousy or ricalnj : τινά, Ro. xi. 11, 14, (1 K. xiv.
22 i Sir. xxx. 3) ; firl τινι (see tVi, B. 2 a. δ. fin.), Ro. x.
19 (Deut. xxxii. 21). b. lo provoke to anger : 1 Co.
x. 22 [on this see Prof, llort in 11'//. App. p. 167] (Ps.
xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 1, 7 sq.).*
ιταρα-θοιλάσσιοϊ, -α, -ov, (^παρά and θάλασσα), be.iide
the sea, bn the sea : Mt. iv. 13. (Sept. ; lldt., Xen.,
Thuc., Polyb., Diod., al.) *
ιταρα-βίωρίω, -ω : impf. pass. 3 pers. plur. παρ(θ(ω-
poiivTo ; 1. (-παρά i. (J. hi/ the side of [see ηαρά, IV.
i]) to examine thiiu/s placed beside each other, to com-
pare, (Xen., Plut., Lcian.). 2. (παρά i. q. over, be-
yond, [Lat. praeter ; see παρά, IV. 2]) to overlook, neglect :
Acts vi. 1 (Dem. p. 1414, 22 ; Diod., Dion. Hal., al.).*
τταρα-θήκη, -i;t, ή, (παρατίθημι, q. v.), a deposit, a trust
or thing consigned to one's faithful keeping, (Vulg. de-
positum) : used of the correct knowledge and pure doc-
trine of the gos])el, to be held firmly and faithfully, and
to be conscientiously delivered unto others : 2 Tim. i. 1 2
(μοϋ possess, gen. [Mf trust committed unto me; Rec."^'"^"*'
reads here παρακαταθήκη, q-v-l) ; d LTTrWH in 1 Tim.
vi. 20 and 2 Tim. i. 14, (Lev. vi. 2, 4 ; 2 Mace. iii. 10, 15 ;
Hdt. 9, 45 ; [al.]). In the Grk. writ, παρακαταθήκη (q. v.)
is more common; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 312; W. 102
(9G).•
παρ-αιν<ω, -ώ; irapf. 3 pers. sing, παρήν^ί ; to exhort,
admonish : with the addition of λίγων foil, by direct dis-
course. Acts xxvii. 9 ; τινά (in class. Grk. more com-
monly TiW [W. 223 (209) ; B. § 133, 9]), foD. by an inf.
Acts'xxvii. 22 [B. §§ 140, 1 ; 141, 2]. (From Hdt. and
Pind. down ; 2 Mace. vii. 25 sq. ; 3 Mace. v. 1 7.) *
ΐΓαρ-αιτ(Όμαι, -οϋμαι, impv. pres. παραιτοϋ ; [impf. 3
pers. plur. παρητοϋντο, Mk. xv. 6 Τ WH Tr mrg., where
al. όνπ€ρ tJtovvto (q. v.)] ; 1 aor. παρτ]τησάμην : pf. pass,
ptcp. παρ')Γημίνος with a pass, signif. ; fr. Aesehyl. and
Pind. down ; 1. prop.ioa.s^'a/on//.si'rfe (παρά [IV. 1]),
beg to have near one; to obtain by entreaty ; to beg from, to
ask for, supplicate : [Mk. xv. 6 (see above)]. 2. to
avert (παρά asiile [see παρά, IV. 1]) by entreaty or seek
to avert, to deprecate; a. prop. foil, by μή and ace.
w. inf. [to intreat that . . . noi], Heb. xii. 19 (Thuc. 5,
63) ; cf. W. 604 (.i61) ; [B. § 148, 13]. b. i.q. to re-
fuse, decline : το άποθαν(ϊν, Acts xxv. 11 (θαν(ΐν ην παραι-
τούμαι, Joseph, de vita sua 29). c. i. (\. to shun,
avoid : τι, 1 Tim. iv. 7 ; 2 Tim. ii. 25 ; τινά, 1 Tim. v. 11 ;
Tit. iii. 10; i.q. to refuse, reject, Heb. xii. 25. d. to
avert displeasure by entreaty, i. e. to beg pardon, crave in-
dulgence, to excuse : ίχ^ μι παρτ^τημίνον (see (χω, I. 1 f.),
Lk. xiv. 18 sq. (of one excusing himself for not accept-
ing an invitation to a feast, Joseph, antt. 7, 8, 2).*
ιταρα-καθί'ίομιοι : to sit dotvn beside [παρά, IV. 1], seat
one's self, (Xen., Plat., al.) ; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. παρακηΑί-
σθίΐ! (Joseph, antt. 6, 1 1, 9) ; πρΟ! τι, Lk. χ. 39 Τ Tr W'll
[cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 269].*
παρα-καθ(ζω: 1 aor. ptcp. fern, παρακαθίσασα, to make
to sit down beside [(παρά, IV. 1)] ; Ιο set beside, place
near ; intrans. to sit down beside : παρά τι, Lk. χ. 39 R G
L [but L mrg. πρόί] (Sept. Job ii. 13 ; Plut. Marius 1 7 ;
Cleom. 37 ; in this sense the mid. is more com. in the
Grk. writ.).*
τταρα-καλίω, -ώ ; impf. 3 pers. sing. παρ(κάλ(ΐ, 1 and 3
pers. |)lur. παρίκάλουι/ ; 1 aor. παρικάλισα ; Pass., pres.
παρακαλούμαι; ]>ί.παρακ(κλημαι; 1 nor. παρ(κλήθην ] 1 fut.
παρακληθήσομαι ; fr. Aesehyl. and Hdt. down ; I.
as in Grk. writ, to call to one's side, call for, summon : τινά,
w. an inf. indicating the purpose. Acts xxviii. 20 [al.
(less naturally) refer this to II. 2, making the ace. the
subj. of the inf.]. II. to address, speak to, (call to,
call on), wliieh may be done in the way of exhortation,
entreaty, comfort, instruction, etc. ; hence result a varie-
ty of senses, on which see Knapp, Scripta varii arg. ed. 2
p. 1 1 7 sqq. ; ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 32 sq. 1.
as in Grk. auth., to admonish, exhort: ab.sol., Lk. iii. 18;
[Acts XX. 1 (RGom.)] : Ro. xii. 8; 2 Tim. iv. 2; Heb.
X. 25 ; 1 Pet. v. 12; foil, by direct disc. 2 Co. v. 20 ; foil.
by λίγων w. direct disc. Acts ii. 40 ; foil, by an inf. where
in Lat. ul, 1 Tim. ii. 1 ; τινά. Acts xv. 32 ; xvi. 40; 2 Co.
X. 1; 1 Th. ii. 12 (11); v. 11; 1 Tim. v. 1; Heb. iii. 13;
τινά λόγω πολλω. Acts xx. 2 ; τινά foil, by direct disc, 1
Co. iv. 16 ; 1 Th. V. 14 ; Heb. xiii. 22 [here L WIl mrg.
inf.] ; 1 Pet. v. 1 sq. ; τινά foil, by an inf. where in Lat.
ut [cf. B. §§ 140, 1 ; 141,2; "W. 332 (311) ; 335 (315) n.]:
inf. pres., Acts xi. 23 ; xiv. 22 ; Phil, iv 2 ; 1 Th. iv.
10 ; Tit. ii. 6 ; 1 Pet. ii. 11 (here Lehm. adds υμάς to the
inf., and AVH mrg. with codd. ACL etc. read άπίχ^σθ^) ;
Jude 3 ; inf. aor.. Acts xxvii. 33 sq. ; Ro. xii. 1 ; xv.
30 ; 2 Co. ii. 8 ; vi. 1 ; Eph. iv. 1 ; 1 Tim. i. 3 ; Heb. xiii.
19 ; τινά foil, by "iva w. subjunc. [cf. B. § 139, 42 ; \\. 335
U.S.], 1 Co. i. 10; xvi. 15 sq.; 2 Co. viii. 6; 1 Th. iv. 1;
2 Th. iii. 12; to enjoin a thing by exhortation [cf. B.
§ 141, 2], 1 Tim. vi. 2 ; Tit. ii. 15. 2. to beg, entreat,
beseech, (Joseph, antt. 6, 7, 4 ; [11, 8, 5] ; often in Epict.
cf. Schweighauser,\naey. graecit. Epict. p. 411; Plut.
apophth. regum, Mor. ii. p. 30 ed. Tauchn. [vi. G95 ed.
Reiske ; exx. fr. Polyb., Diod., Philo, al., in Soph. Lex.
s. V.]; not thus in the earlier Grk. auth. exc. where the
gods are called on for aid, in the expressions. παρακαΚΛν
0fois, so θ€Ον in Joseph, antt. 6, 2, 2 and 7, 4 ; [cf. W.
22]) : [absol., Philem. 9 (yet see the Comm. ad loc.)] ;
τίνα', Mt. viii. 5 ; xviii. 32 ; xxvi. 53 ; Mk. i. 40 ; Acts xvi.
9 ; 2 Co. xii. 18 ; πολλά, much, Mk. v. 23 ; τινά ntpi nvos.
τταρακαΚύτΓτω
483
•καρακοη
Philem. 1 ; foil, by direct disc. Acts ix. 38 L Τ Tr WH ;
with λ/γωι/ added and direct disc, Mt. xviii. 29 ; Mk. v.
12; [Lk. vii.4 (Tdf. ηρώτων)^: without the ace. Actsxvi.
15 ; Ttra foU. by an inf. [\V. and B. u. s.], Mk. v. 1 7 ; Lk.
viii. 41 ; Acts viii. 31 ; .\i.\. 31 ; .\.\viii. 14, (1 Maec. i.\.
30) ; τινά foU. by όπως, Mt. viii. 34 [here Lchm. Ίνα (see
above)] ; Acts xsv. 2, (4 Mace. iv. 1 1 ; Plut. Demetr. c.
38); Tu-ofoll. by?>'a[W.§44, 8 a.; B. § 139,42], Mt. xiv.
36 ; Alk. v. 18 ; vi. 56 ; vii. 32 ; viii. 22 ; Lk. viii. 31 sq. ;
[2 Co. i.x. 5] ; τινά ΰπί'ρ twos. Ίνα, 2 Co. xii. 8 ; ττοΧΚα
(much) Τίνα, Ίνα, Mk. v. 10 ; 1 Co. xvi. 12; foil, by τον μή
w. inf. [B. § 140, 16 δ. ; W. 325 (305)], Acts xxi. 12 ; by
an inf. Acts Lx. 38 R G ; by an ace. w. inf.. Acts xiii. 42 ;
xxiv. 4; [Ro. xvi. 17]. to strive to appease by entreaty:
absol. 1 Co. iv. 13; τινά, Lk. xv. 28; Acts xvi. 39, (2
Mace. xiii. 23). 3. to console, to encourage and
strengthen by consolation, to comfort, (Sept. for onj ; very
rarely so in Grk. auth., as Plut. 0th. 16) : absol. 2 Co. ii.
7 ; τινά, 2 Co. i. 6 ; vii. 6 sq. ; iv w. a dat. of the thing with
which one comforts another, 1 Th. iv. 18; τίνα 8ιά τταρα-
κΧήσ^ως, 2 Co. i. 4 ; w. an ace. of the contents, 8ιά rijs
τταρακΧ. ης (for ην, see of, rj, o, II. 2 e. a.) παρακαΚονμΐθα,
ibid. ; in pass, to receive consolation, be comforted, Mt. ii.
18; 2 Co. xiii. 11 ; fVi τινι over (in) a thing [see eVi, B.
2 a. 8.], 2 Co. i. 4 ; of the consolation (comfort) given not
in words but by the experience of a happier lot or by a
happy issue, i. q. to refresh, cheer : pass., Λίΐ. v. 4 (5) ;
Lk. xvi. 25 ; Acts xx. 12 ; 2 Co. vii. 13 (where a full stop
must be put after παρακ(κλήμ.) ; ?v τινι, by the help of a
thing, 2 Co. vii. 6 sq. ; «ττί τινι, 1 Th. iii. 7 ; with (iv) παρα-
κλήσίΐ added, 2 Co. vii. 7. 4. to encourage, strength-
en, [i. e. in the language of A. V. comfort (see Wright,
Bible Word-Book, 2d ed., s. v.)], (in faith, piety, hope) :
ras καρϋας, your hearts, Eph. vi. 22 ; Col. ii. 2 ; iv.
8; 2 Th. ii. 17, (also χείρας aaueveis. Job iv. 3 for pin ;
■γόνατα ηαράΚ(\υμ(να, Is. xxxv. 3 sq. [see the Ilebr.] for
ysx). 5. it combines the ideas of exhorting and
comforting and encouraging in Ro. xii. 8; 1 Co. xiv. 31 ; 1
Th. iii. 2. 6. to instruct, leach : iv tji 5ι8ασκαλία,
Tit. i. 9. [CoMP. : σνμ^αρακαλίω.~\ *
ΐΓορα-κολΐΐΓτω : to cover over, cover up, hide, conceal :
trop. ην 7ταρακ(κα\νμμίνον απ αντων (\it was concealed
from them], a Hebraism, on which see in άποκρνπτω, b.),
Lk. ix. 45 (Ezek. xxii. 26 ; Plat., Plut., al.).*
ΐΓαρα.-κατα.ΐήκη, -ης, ή, (παρακατατίθημι), a deposit, a
trust: soRec. inl Tim.vi. 20; 2 Tim. i. 14; [Rec.«'= les» in
2 Tim. i. 12 also]. (Hdt., Thue., Xen., Aristot. eth. Nic.
5, 8, 5 p. 1135," 4 ; Polyb., Diod. 15, 76; Joseph, antt.
4, 8, 38 ; Aeh v. h. 4, 1) ; see παραθήκη above.*
Ίταρά-κειμιαι ; (παρά and κ(Ίμαι) ; to lie beside [ηαρά, TV.
1], to be near (fr. Horn, down); to be present, at hand:
Ro. vii. 18 (where see Meyer), 21.*
ΐΓαρά-κλησ-ΐ5, -(ως, ή, (παρακά\ίω, q. V.) ; 1. prop,
α calling near, summons, (esp. for help, Thuc. 4, 61 ;
Dem. p. 275, 20). 2. imploration, supplication, en-
treaty: 2 Co. viii. 4 (Strab. 13 p. 581 ; Joseph, antt. 3,
1,5; [c. Ap. 2, 23, 3 ττ. προς τιιν θ(6ν €στω] ; λόγοι παρα-
κλήσίως, words of appeal, containing entreaties, 1 Maec.
X. 24). 3. exhortation, admonition, encouragement:
Acts XV. 31 [al. refer this to 4] ; 1 Co. xiv. 8 ; 2 Co.
viii. 17; Phil. ii. 1 ; 1 Tim. iv. 13 ; Heb. xii. 5; Xoyos
της παρακ\ήσ(ως, Heb. xiii. 22, (2 Macc. vii. 24; xv. 9
(11); Plat. def. 415 e.; Thue. 8, 92; Aeschin., Polyb.,
al.). 4. consolation, comfort, solace : 2 Co. i. 4-7 ;
Heb. vi. 18; [add. Acts ix. 31 ; 2 Thess. ii. 16], (Jer.
xvi. 7; Hos. xiii. 14; [Job xxi. 2; Nab. iii. 7]; Phalar.
ep. 97 init.) ; τών γράφων, afforded by the contents of the
Scriptures, Ro. xv. 4 [\V. 189 (178)] ; θιός της παρακλ.,
God the author and bestower of comfort, Ro. xv. 5 : 2
Co. i. 3 ; solace or cheer which comes from a happy lot
or a prosperous state of things, Lk. vi. 24 ; 2 Co. vii. 4,
7, 13 [cf. W. 393 (368)]; Philem. 7; by melon, that
tchich affords comfort or refreshment; thus of the Messi-
anic salvation, Lk. ii. 25 (so the Rabbins call the Mes-
siah the consoler, the comforter, κατ (ξοχην, ΟΠ;ρ [cf.
Wunsche, Neue Beitrage u. s. w. ad loc. ; Schottgen,
Horae Hebr. etc. ii. 18]). 5. univ. persuasive dis-
course, stirring address, — instructive, admonitory, consol-
atory; powerful hortatory discourse: Ro. xii. 8; Xoyor
παρακλήσιως [A. V. word of exhortation]. Acts xiii. 15 ;
νιος παρ. [a son of exhortation], a man gifted in teaching,
admonishing, consoling. Acts iv. 36 ; used of the apostles'
instruction or preaching, 1 Th. ii. 3.*
ΐΓοφά-κλητοβ, -οι/, ό, (παρακάΚίω), prop, summoned, called
to one's side, esp. called to one's aid ; hence 1. one
who pleads another's cause before a judge, a pleader,
counsel for defence, legal assistant ; an advocate : Dem. p.
341, 11 ; Diog. Laert. 4, 50, cf. DioCass. 46, 20. 2.
univ. one who pleads another's cause with one, an inter-
cessor: Philo, de mund. opif. §59; de Josepho § 40 ; in
Flaccum §§ 3 and 4 ; so of Christ, in his exaltation at God's
right hand, pleading with God the Father for the pardon
of our sins, 1 Jn. ii. 1 (in the same sense, of the divine
Logos in Philo, vita Moys. iii. § 14). 3. in the widest
sense, a hel/jcr, succorer, aider, a.'^sistant ; so of the Holy
Spirit destined to take the place of Christ with the apos-
tles (after his ascension to the Father), to lead them to
a deeper knowledge of gospel truth, and to give them the
divine strength needed to enable them to undergo trials
and persecutions on behalf of the divine kingdom : Jn.
xiv. 16, 26; xv. 26; xvi. 7, cf. Mt. x. 19sq. ; Mk. .xiii.
11 ; Lk. xii. 11 sq. (Philo de mund. opif. § 6 init. says
that God in creating the world had no need of a παρά-
κλητος, an adviser, counsellor, helper. The Targums and
Talmud borrow the Greek words O'Sp^i) and SD'^^p"!?
and use them of any intercessor, defender, or advocate;
cf. Buxtorf Lex. falm. p. 1843 [(ed. Fischer p. 916)];
so Tarj. on Job xxxiii. 23 for I'-S-p ^xSo, i• e. an angel
that pleads man's cause with God ; [cf. πλουσίων παρά-
κλΐ)τοι in ' Teaching ' etc. 5 sub fin. ; Barn. ep. 20, 2 ;
Constitt. apost. 7, 18]). Cf. Knapp, Seripta varii Argu-
ment!, p. 124 sqq. ; DUsterdieck on 1 Jn. ii. 1, p. 147 sqq. ;
[ Wathins, Excursus G, in EUicott's N. T. Com. for Eng.
Readers ; Westcott in the " Speaker's Com." Additional
Note on Jn. xiv. 16 ; Schaff in Lange ibid.].*
Ίταρ-ακοή, -ης, ή, (παρά Lat. praeter [see παρά, TV.
"ΤταρακοΧουθΐω
484
irapaXvu
2]) ; 1. prop, a hearing amiss (Plat. epp. 7 p. 34 1
b.). 2. [^unwitlingjiess to hear i. e.] diii)beilience :
Ro. V. 1 9 ; 2 Co. .\. « ; Heb. ii. 2. [Cf. Trench § Ixvi.] •
παρ-ακολουθ('ω, -ώ ; f ut. παρακολουθήσω ; 1 aor. παρηκο-
Κοΰβησα (1 Tim. iv. (i L inr<;. WII mrg. ; 2 Tim. iii. 10 L
Τ Tr Wll t.\t.) ; pf. παρηκολούθηκα ; 1. to /oltuw
after ; so to follow one as to be always at his siile [see
παρά, IV. 1] ; to follow close, accompany, (so fr. Arstph.
and Xen. down). 2. metaph. a. lo be always
present, to attend one whcrei-cr he (joes : nvi, Mk. xvi.
17 [where Tr Wll t.\t. ακοΚουθ-, q. v.]. b. to follow
up a thing in mind so as to attain to the knowledge of it, i. e.
to understand, [cf. our follow a matter tip, trace its course,
etc.] ; to examine thoroughly, investigate : πάσιν (i. e. πράγ-
μασιν), all things that have taken place, Lk. i. 3 (very
often so in Grk. auth., as Dem. pro cor. c. 53 [p. 285,
23]). c. to follow faithfully sc. a standard or rule, to
conform one's self to : with a dat. of the thing, 1 Tim. iv.
6; 2 Tim. iii. 10, (i Mace. ix. 27). Cf. the full discus-
sion of this word by Grimm in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche
Theol. for 1871, p. 46sq.•
παρκικούω : 1 aor. τταρήκουσα ; 1. to hear aside
i. e. casually or cai-elesxly or amiss [see παρά, IV. 2]
(often so in class. Grk. ; on the freq. use of this verb by
Philo see Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. s. w. (1875) p.
106). 2. lo be unwilling to hear, i. e. on hearing to
neglect, to pay no heed to, (w. a gen. of the pers., Polyb.
2, 8, 3; 3, 15, 2) ; contrary to Grk. usage [but cf. Plut.
Philop. § 16, 1 και παρώι'ιν τι κ. παρακοϊσαι των άμαρτα-
νομίνων, <ie curios. § 1 4 π€ΐρώ και των ιδίων tvia παριικονσαί
ποτ€ κ. παρώίΐν], w. an accus., τον λόγον, Ilk. v. 36 Γ WII
Tr t.\t. [al. ^overhearing the word as it was being
spoken '; cf. B. 302 (259)] ; to refuse to hear, pay no re-
gard to, disobey : τινός, what one says, Mt. xviii. 1 7 (Tob.
iii. 4; τά ΰπο τοΟ βασίΧίως Xeyo'fiixa, Esth. iii. 3).*
ιταρα-κίΐΓτω : 1 aor. παμίκυψα ; to stoop to [cf. παρά, TV.
1] α thing in order to look at it; lo look at with head
bowed forwards \ to look into with the body bent; to stoop
and look into: Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. λΥΗ reject
the vs.] ; .In. xx. 5 ; fit το μνημϋον,^η. xx. 11 ; metaph.
to look carefully into, inspect curiously, tlj τι, of one who
would become acquainted with something, Jas. i. 25 ; 1
Pet. i. 12. (Arstph., Theocr., Philo, Dio Cass., Plut.,
al. ; Sept.)•
παρα-λαμ,βάνω ; f ut. παρίΐλίψομαι, in L Τ Tr WH -\ήμι\τα-
μαι (.In. xiv. 3 ; see Μ,μ); 2 aor. παρΓΚαβον, 3 pers. plur.
πα;]('\άβοσαν (2 Th. iii. 6 G Τ L mrg. Tr mrg. WH mrg. ;
cf. δολιόω [yet see WH. App. p. IfiS]) ; Pass., pres. παρα-
λαμβάνομαι ; 1 fut. παραληφθήσομαι, in L Τ Tr WII -λημ-
φθήσομαι(9ββΜ,μ; Lk. xvii. 34-36) fr. Hdt.down: Sept.
for np.S ; 1. to take to [cf. ΤΓαρά, IV. 1], to take irith
one's self, to Join lo one's self: τινά, an associate, a com-
panion, Mt. xvii. 1 ; xxvi. 37 ; Mk. iv. 36 ; v. 40 ; ix. 2 :
X. 32; Lk. ix. 10, 28; xi. 26; xviii. 31 ; Acts xv. 39; in
pass., Mt. xxiv. 40, 41 ; Lk. xvii. 34-36 ; one to be led
off as a prisoner, Jn. xix. 16; Acts xxiii. 18; to take
with one in order to carry away, Mt. ii. 13 sq. 20 sq.;
riva μιθ' iavTov, Mt. xii. 45; xviii. 16; Mk. xiv. S3;
παραΚαμβάν(ΐν γυναίκα, to take one's betrothed to hi»
home, Alt. i. 20, 24 ; τιχά foil, by tU w. an ace. of place,
to take [and bring, cf. W. §66, 2 d.] one witli one into
a place, Mt. iv. 5, 8 ; xxvii. 27; rivh κατ idiav, Mt. xx.
1 7 ; mid. with προς ίμαυτόν, to my companionship,
where I myself dwell. .In. xiv. 3. The ptcp. is [)refixed
to other act. verbs to describe the action more in detail.
Acts xvi. 33 ; xxi. 24, 26, 32 [here L WII mrg. \αβών\
Metaph. i. q. lo accept or acknowledge one to be such
as he jirofpsses lo be ; not to reject, not lo withhold obedi-
ence: rtvo, Jn. i. 11. 2. to receive something trans-
mitted ; a. prop. : παραλ. διακονία», an office to be dis-
charged. Col. iv. 17; βασίΚ(Ίαν, Heb. xii. 28, (so for the
Chald. Sap in Dan. v. 31 ; vii. 18, Theodot. ; Ildt. 2,
120; [Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 20, 5 (where see MUller)] ; τή»
αρχήν. Plat., Polyb., Plut.). b. to receive with the
mind ; by oral transmission : τι foil, by από w. a gen.
of the author from whom the tradition proceeds, 1 Co.
xi. 23 (on wliich cf. I'aret in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche
Theol. for 1858, Bd. iii. p. 48 sqq. ; [see reff. in από, II. 2
d. aa.]); by the narration of others, by the instruction
of teachers (used of disciples) : [τοκ Χρ. Ί• τον κΰριον,
Col. ii. 6] ; τι, 1 Co. xv. 1, 3 ; (ial. i. 9 ; Phil. iv. 9 ; [τί
foil, by an infin., Mk. vii. 4] ; τι παρά τινοι [see reff. s. v.
παρά, I. c]. Gal. i. 12 ; 1 Th. ii. 13 ; 2 Th. iii. 6 ; παρά
τίνος, καθώς ... το πως 8(1 etc. 1 Th. iv. 1, (σοφίαν παρά
τίνος, Plat. Lach. p. 197 d.; Euthyd. p. 304 c.). [Comp. :
σνμ-7ταρα\ίΐμβάνω.~\ *
ΐΓαρα-λίγο|χαι ; [^παρ(\€γόμην2 ; (παρά beside, and Xt'yoi
to lay) ; Vulg. in Acts xxvii. 8 lego, i. e. to sail past, coast
along: τήκ Κρήτην, Acts xxvii. 8 [here some, referring
αυτήν to Σαλμώνην, render work past, weatherl, 13, (την
Ίταλίαν, Diod. 13, 3 ; γήν, 14, 55 ; [Strabo] ; Lat. legere
Oram).'
παρ-άλιοΐ, -ov, also of three term. [cf. W. § 11, 1],
(παρά and άλς), by the sea, maritime : ή παράλιι.ς, sc.
χώρα, the sea-coast, Lk. vi. 17 (Polyb. 3, 39, 3 ; Diod. 8,
15, 41; .Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 12; Sept. Deut. xxxiii. 19;
and the fcm. form ή παραλία in Deut. i. 7 ; Josh. ix. 1 ;
Judith i. 7 ; iii. 6 ; v. 2, 23 ; vii. 8 ; 1 Mace. xi. 8 ; xv. 38 ;
Hdt. 7, ISO ; often in Polyb.; Joseph, antt. 12, 7, 1).•
■παρ-αλλαγή, -ής, ή, (παραλλάσσω), variation, change :
Jas. i. 17. (Aeschyl., Plat., Polyb., al.)'
τΓορα-λονίζομαι ; (see πήρα', IV. 2) ; a. lo reckon
wrong, mismnnt: Dem. p. 822, 25; 1037, 15. b. to
cheat by false reckoning (.\eschin., Aristot.) ; lo deceive
b>/ false reasoning (joined to (ξαπατάν, Epict. diss. 2, 20,
7) ; hence c. univ. to deceive, delude, circumvent:
τινά. Col. ii. 4 ; Jas. i. 22, (Sept. several times for ΠΏ"!).*
wapaAuTiKOs, -ή, -όν. (fr. παραλύω, q. v.), paralytic, i. e.
suffering from the relaxing of the nerves of one side;
univ. disabled, weak of limb, [A. V. palsied, sick of the
palsy'] : Mt. iv. 24 ; viii. 6 ; ix. 2, 6 ; Mk. ii. 3-5, 9 ; and
L WII mrg. in Lk. v. 24. [Cf. Riehm, HWB. s. v.
Krankheiten, 5 ; B. D. Am. ed. p. 1866".] *
παρα-λνω : [pf. pass. ptcp. παραλίλυμ(νος'\ ; prop, to
loose on one side or from the side [cf . παρά, IV. 1 ] ; Ut
loose or part things placed side by side ; lo loosen, dissolve,
τταραμΐνω
485
Ίταραρρΐω
hence, to weaken, enfeeble : τταράΚΛυμίνο!, suffering from
the relaxing ofihe nerves, unstrung, weak o/limb, \^palsie<J],
Lk. V. 18, 24 ([not L WH mrg.] see παραλυτικό!) ; Acts
▼iii. 7; ix. 33; παραλ(\. γοκατα, i. e. tottering, weakened,
feeble knees, Heb. xii. 12; Is. xxxv. 3; Sir. xxv. 23;
Xfipfs παραλίλ. Ezek. vii. 27 ; Jer. vi. 24 ; [xxvii. (I.) lo,
43J ; irapfXvomo at 8(ξίαί, of combatants, Joseph, b. j. 3,
8, 6 ; ηαρίλΰΰη κ• οΐικ ΐδΰνατο ?τι λαλησαι \όγον, 1 Mace.
ΐχ. 55, where cf. Grimm ; σωματίκτ) hwapfi παραΚιλ.
Polyb. 32, 23, 1 ; rait ,σωμασι κα\ ran ψνχαΊι, id. 20, 10,
9.*
ναρα-μΐνα ; fut. παραμένω ; 1 aor. ptcp. παραμάνας ; fr.
Ποιη. down; Ιο remain beside, continue always near, [cf.
■παρά, IV. 1] : Heb. vii. 23 ; opp. to άπ(\η\ν6(ναι, Jas. i.
25 {and continues to do so, not departing till all stains
are washed away, cf. vs. 24) ; with one, -npot τίνα, 1 Co.
xvi. 6 ; Tiw (as often in Grk. auth.), to survive, remain
alive (Hdt. 1, 30), Phil. i. 25 L Τ Tr WH [where Bp.
Lghtft. : " παραμένω is relative, while μ(νω is absolute."
CoMP. : σνμ-τταραμίνω.^ *
παρα-μυθε'ομ,αι, -οϋμαι ; 1 aor. παριμυβησάμην ; fr. Horn,
down ; to speak lo, address one, whether by way of ad-
monition and incentive, or to calm and console; hence i. q.
to encourage, console : τινά, Jn. xi. 31 ; 1 Th. ii. 12 (11) ;
T. 14 ; τινά π€ρί tivos, Jn. xi. 19.*
ΐΓοραμυβία, -as, ή, (παραμνθίομαί), in class. Grk. any
address, whether made for the purpose of persuading,
or of arousing and stimulating, or of calming and consol-
ing ; once in the N. T., like the Lat. allocutio (Sen. ad
Marc. 1 ; ad Helv. 1), i. q. consolation, comfort : 1 Co. xiv.
3. (So Plat. Ax. p. 365 a.; Aeschin. dial. Socr. 3, 3;
Joseph, b. j. 3, 7, 15 ; Lcian. dial. mort. 1-5, 3 ; Ael. v. h.
12, 1 fin.)•
παραμϋθιον, -ου, τό, {παραμνθίομαί), persuasive address :
Phil. ii. 1. (consolation. Sap. iii. 18 and often in Grk.
writ. [fr. Soph., Thuc, Plat, on].) '
παρανομκ'ω, -ω ; to be a, παράνομο!, to act contrary to law,
to break the law : Acts xxiii. 3. (Sept. ; Thuc, Xen.,
Plat., s.,.,.) •
παρανομία, -as, ή, {πapάvoμos [fr. παρά (q. v. IV. 2) and
κο'μοί]), breach of law, transgression, ivickedness : 2 Pet.
ii. 16. (Thuc, Plat., Dem., al. ; Sept.) *
Ίταρα-ττικραίνω : 1 aor. παρατίκμανα ; (see παρά, IV. 3) ;
Sept. chii'tly for Π^Ο, ΐΤ^ΏΠ, to be rebellious, contuma-
cious, refractory; also for IID, Ο'^'^Π, etc.; to provoke,
exasperate ; to rouse to indignation : absol. (yet so that
God is thought of as the one provoked), Heb. iii. 16,
as in Ps. cv. (cvi.) 7; Ixv. (Ixvi.) 7; Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 7;
Ezek. ii. 5-8 ; with τον deov added, Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 29 ;
Ii. (xUv.) 3, 8; Ps. v. 11 ; Ezek. xx. 21. and often ; in pass..
Lam. i. 20 ; joined with οργίζ(σθαι. Philo de alleg. legg.
iii. § 38 ; w. πληροίσθαι opyrjs δικαιατ, vita Moys. i. § 55
[al. πάνν πικρ.~\ ; παμαπικραΐνΐΐν κ. πapopyίζ€lv, de somn.
ϋ § 26.•
παρα.Ίηκρα(Γ|ΐόΐ, -οΰ, ό, {παραπικραίνω), provocation : ί»
τω παραττικρασμώ, when they provoked (angered) me by
rebelliousness, Heb. iii. 8, 15, fr. Ps. xciv. (.\cv.) 8 (where
Sept. for Π3•ιη) ; cf. Num. xvi.•
ιταρα-ιτίπτω : 2 aor. ptcp. παραπισών ; prop, to fall be-
side a pars, or thing; to slip aside; hence to deviate from
the right path, turn aside, wander : τήί όδον, Polyb. 3, 54,
5 ; metaph. τή: άληθ(ία5, Polyb. 12, 12 (7), 2 [(here ed.
Didot άντίχηται) ; τοϊι καθήκοντα!, 8, 13, 8j ; i. q. to err,
Polyb. 1 8, 1 y, 6 ; cv τινι, Xen. Hell. 1 , 6, 4. In the Scrip-
tures, to fall away (from the true faith) : from the wor-
ship of Jehovah, Ezek. xiv. 13 ; xv. 8 (for SjJD) ; from
Christianity, Heb. vi. 6.*
παρα-πλ^'ω : 1 aor. inf. παραπΧίΰσαι ; lo sail by, sail past,
[παρά, IV. 1] : w. an ace of place. Acts xx. 16. (Thuc
2, 25 ; Xen. anab. 6, 2, 1 ; Hell. 1, 3, 3 ; Plat. Phaedr. p.
259 a.) •
ΐΓαρα-ιτλήσ-ιον, (neut. of the adj. παραπλήσιοι), adv^
near lo, almost to : ήσθίνησ^ παραπΧ. βανάτω [cf. W. § 54,
6], Phil. ii. 27. (Thuc. 7, 19; in like manner, Polyb.)•
ΐΓαρο-Ίτλησ-ίωί, adv., (παραπλήσιο!, see παραπλήσιοι»),
similarly, in like manner, in the same way : Heb. ii. 14
(where it is equiv. to κατά πάιτα vs. 1 7, and hence is used
of a similarity which amounts to equality, as in the
phrase άγωνίζ(σθαι παραπλ. to fight with equal advan-
tage, aequo Marie, Hdt. 1, 77 ; so tootheadj., σί δί άνθρα•
πο! ων παραπλήσιο! τοί! αΚΧοί!. πλην yc 8ή ότι πολνπράγμωρ
και άτάσθαλο! κτλ. the words in which an oriental sage
endeavors to tame the pride of Alexander the Great,
Arr. exp. Alex. 7, 1, 9 (6)).'
ιταρα^^ορΕύομαι ; impf. παρ(πορ€υόμηρ ; fr. Aristot. and
Polyb. down ; Sept. for η^;; ; to proceed at the side, go
past, pass by : Mt. xxvii. 39; Mk. xi. 20; xv. 29 ; διάτων
σπορίμων, to go along through the grain-fields so that he
had the grain on either side of him as he walked [see
ποι/ω, I. 1 a. and c], Mk. ii. 23 RGTWIImrg.; δια
TTJs Γαλιλαία!,ΧηΙξ. praelergredi Galilaeam, i.e." obiter
profcisci per Galilaeam," i. e. ^they passed right along
through, intent on finishing the journey, and not stopping
to receive hospitality or to instruct the people' (Fritz-
sche), Mk. ix. 30 [but Ltxt. Trtxt. WH txt. eVo/jf ΰοιτο] ;
δια των ορίων, Deut. ii. 4. [Syn. cf. παραβαίνω, fin.] *
παράτπτωμ,α, -ror, 'a, (παραπίπτω, q• v.) ; 1. prop.
a fall beside or near something ; but nowhere found in
this sense. 2. trop. a lapse or deviation from truth
and uprightness ; a sin, misdeed, [R. V. trespass, 'differ-
ing from αμάρτημα (q. v.) in figure not in force'
(Fritzsche) ; cf. Trench § Ixvi.] : Mt. vi. 14, [15' G Τ om.
AVHbr.], 15"; .xviii. 35 Rec ; Mk. xi. 25, 26 RG L; Ra
iv. 25; V. 15-18, 20 ; xi. U sq. ; 2 Co. v. 19 ; Gal. vi. 1 ;
Eph. i. 7 ; ii. 1 , 5 ; Col. ii. 1 3 ; Jas. v. 1 6 (where L Τ Tr
ΛΥΗ αμαρτία!). (Polyb. 9, 10, 6; Sap. iii. 13; x. 1 ;
Sept. several times for ^j,\^, h)J,\, i'!??i etc.; of liter-
ary faults, Longin. 36, 2.) *
irapa-pp€'ii> ; (παρά and ρίω) ; fr. Soph., Xen., and Plat,
down ; lo floiv past (παραρρύον ΰδωρ. Is. xUv. 4), lo glide
by : μήποτ€ παραρρνωμιν (2 aor. pass, subjunc ; cf. Btlm.
Ausf . Spr. ii. p. 2>i 7 ; [ Veitch s. v. ρίω ; WH. App. p. 1 70] ;
but L Τ Tr WH παραρυωμ^ν ; see P, p), lest we be carried
past,pass by, [R. V. drif away from them] (missing the
thing), i. e. lest the salvation which the things heard
show us how to obtain slip away from us, Heb. ii. 1. In
τταρασημος
486
τταραφρονία
Grk. auth. παμραρΛ μοΊ τι, α thing escapes me, Soph.
Philoct. 653; trop. .■iliji.i J'rom mi/ mind. Plat. legg. 6 p.
781 a. ; in tlie sense of uvijUcI, μη nappapvgs, τήρησαν Se
ΐμήν βονλήν, Prov. iii. 21.'
τταράσ-ημοβ, -ov, (παρά [(J. v. IV. 2], and σήμα [a mark]) ;
1. marked fiilselij, spurious, counterfeit; as coin. 2.
marked beside or on the mart/in ; so of noteworthy words,
which the reader of a book marks on the margin;
hence 3. univ. twteil, marked, conspicuous, remark-
able, (of persons, in a l)ad si'nse, notorious) ; marked with
a si(/n : eV πλοι'ω παρασήμω Αιοσκυϋροί!, in a sliip marked
with the image or figure of the Dioscuri, Acts x.wiii. 11
[if. R. 1). s. V. Castor and Pollux].•
•ΐΓαρα-<ΓΚί«ό'ζω ; pf. pass, πapeσι<fίaσμaι ; fut. mid. παρα-
σκ(υΰσομαι; fr. lldt. down; to make ready, prepare : sc.
TO Sfimmv {adaQil in Hdt. 9, 82; Athen. 4, 15 p. 138),
Acts X. 10 (συμπασών, lldt. 9, 15; 2 Mace. ii. 27). Mid.
to make one's self read;/, to pre/tare one's self, [cf. W. § 38,
2 a.]: fir πόλιμον, 1 Co. xiv. 8 (Jer. x.wii. (1.) 42; fit
μάχην, els ναυμαχίαν, etc., in Xen.). Pf. pass, in mid.
sense, to have prepared one's self, to be prepared or ready,
2 Co. ix. 2s(i. (see Matthiae §493).•
ΊΓαρα-σ-κίυή, -^t, ή, fr. Hdt. down ; 1. a making
ready, preparation, equipping. 2. that which is pre-
pared, equipment. 3. in the N.T. in a Jewish sense,
the day of /^reparation, i.e. the day on which the Jews
made the necessary preparation to celebrate a sabbath
or a feast ; Mt. xxvii. 62 ; Mk. xv. 42 ; Lk. xxiii. 54 ; Jn.
xix. 31, (Joseph, antt. IG, 6, 2) ; with a gen. of the obj.,
ToD πάσχα [aor. toW. 189 (177 sij.) a possess, gen.], Jn.
xix. 14 (cf. Ruckcrt, Abemlmahl, p. 31 sq.) ; w. a gen.
of the subj., των Ιουδαίων, ibid. 42. Cf. Bleek, Beitrage
zur Evangelienkritik, p. 114 sqq. ; [on later usage cf.
' Teaching * 8, 1 (and Ilarnack's note) ; Mart. Polyc. 7,
1 (and Zahn's note) ; Sni>h. Lex. s. v. 3].*
τταρα-τίίνω : 1 aor. wapeVf ινα ; fr. Hdt. down ; to extend
beside, to stretch out lengthwise, to extend ; to prolong : τον
λϋγοίΊ his discourse, Acts xx. 7 (Xoyour, Aristot. poet. 17,
5 p. U.-).-/, 2 ; μίθην, 9, 4 p. 1451^ 38).»
ΐΓορο-τηρί'ω, -ώ : impf. 3 pers. ρ\ιιτ. παριτήρουν ; 1 aor.
παριτήρησα; Mid., pres. ■παρατηρούμαι; irapf. 3 pers. plur.
παρ(τηροΐιντο ; prop, to stand beside and watch [cf. παρά,
IV. 1]; '0 tcatch assiduously, observe carefully; a.
to iratch, attend to, with the eyes : τα ex του οΐρανοΰ γι-
■γνήμινα, of auguries, Dio Cass. 38, 13; τινά, one, to see
what he is going to do (Xen. mem. 3, 14, 4) ; contextu-
ally in a bad sense, to watch insidiously, Lk. xx. 20 [Tr
mrg. άποχωρι/σαιτΕί] (joined with evfSpfidv, Polyb. 17,
3,2); τινά (Polyb. 11,9, 9; Sept. Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 12;
Sus. 16) foil, by the interrog. fl, Mk. iii. 2 R G Τ WH Tr
txt. ; Lk. vi. 7 Rec. ; mid. to watch for one's self: Mk. iii.
2 L Tr mrg. ; Lk. vi. 7 L Τ Tr AVH, [(in both pass. foil,
by interrog. ίί)] ; Lk. xiv. 1 ; active w. an ace. of place
(Polyb. 1, 29, 4) : τάί ττύΧαί [foil, by 5πως, cf. B. 237
(205)], Acts ix. 24 RG, where L Τ Tr AVE give mid.
παριτηροϋντο. b. to observe i. q. to keep scrupulously ;
to neglect nothing requisite to the religious ohserrnnre of:
i3Soiiabas, Joseph, antt. 3, 5, 5 ; [την των σαββ. ήμίραν,
id. 14, 10, 25] ; mid. {for one's self, i. 6. for one's salva-
tion'), ήμίραί, μήνας, καιρούς, Gal. iv. 10 (οσα προστάττοΐΐ-
σιν at νύμαι, Uio Cass. 53, 10 ; [τα ei's βρώσιν oi wyo/ii-
σμίνα, Joseph. C. Ap. 2, 39, 2]).*
ΐΓαρα-τήρησ -is, -ίωί, ή, {παρατηρίω), observation ([Polyb.
l(i, 22, 8], Diod., Joseph., Antonin., Plut., al.) : μιτάπαρα-
τηρήσεως, in such a manner that it can bo watched with
the eyes, i. e. in a visible manner, Lk. xvii. 20.•
τταρα-τίθημι ; fut. παραθήσω ; 1 aor. τταρίθηκα ; 2 aor.
suljjiinc. 3 pers. plur. παραθώσιν, infin. παραθάναι (Mk.
viii. 7 R (j) ; Pass., pres. ptcp. τταρατιθίμίνος ; 1 aor. infin.
ΤΓαρατ(θήναί (Mk. viii. 7 Lchm.) ; Mid., pres.παpατ^δfpαι;
fut. παραθήσαμαι; 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. τταρίθιντο, inqiv.
παρύθαυ (2 Tim. ii. 2) ; fr. Horn, down; Sept. chiefly for
Dlu ; 1. to place beside, place near [cf. παρά, IV. 1]
OT set before: τινί Ti, as a. food: Mk. vi. 41; viii.
6 sq. ; Lk. ix. 16 ; xi. 6 ; τράπιζαν a table, i. e. food placed
on a table. Acts .xvi. 34 (Kp. ad Diogn. 5, 7) ; τα παρα-
τιθ(μ(να ύμίν, [Α.Υ. such things as are set before you^, of
food, Lk. x. 8 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1, 30) ; sing. 1 Co. x. 27. b.
to set before (one) in teaching (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 14 ; Sept.
Ex. xix. 7) : rivi παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 24, 31. Mid. to set
forth {from one's self), to explain : foil, by ότι. Acts xvii.
3. 2. Mid. to jilace down {from one's self or for
one's self) with any one, to deposit ; to intrust, commit to
one's charge, (Xen. respub. Athen. 2, 16 ; Polyb. 33, 12,
3 ; Plut. Num. 9 ; Tob. iv. 1) : τι τινι, a thing to one to
be cared for, Lk. xii. 48 ; a thing to be religiously kept
and taught to others, 1 Tim. i. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 2; τινά
Tiw, to commend one to another for protection, safety,
etc.. Acts xiv. 23 ; x.x. 32, (Diod. 17, 23) ; τάς ^υχάς to
God, 1 Pet. iv. 19; το πν^ϋμά μου els xeipas Beaii, Lk.
xxiii. 46 ; Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 6.*
■ΐΓορα-τνγχάνω ; fr. Hom. (IL 11, 74) down; to chance
to be by [cf. παρά, IV. 1], to happen to be present, to meet
by chance: Acts .xvii. 17.*
ΐΓαρ-αντ£κα [cf. B. §146, 4], adv., for the moment: 2
Co. iv. 17. (Tragg., Xen., Plat., sqq.)'
παρα-ψ(ρω : [1 aor. inf. napeveyKai (Lk. xxii. 42 Tdf.,
cf. Veitch p. 609)] ; 2 aor. inf. πapeveγκeίv (Lk. xxii. 42
RG), impv. πapevtyκe [(ibid. L Tr WH) ; pres. pass.
παραφίρομαι ; see reff. s. v. φ/ρω] ; 1. to bear to
[cf. παρά, IV. 1], bring to, put before : of food (Hdt.,
Xen., al.). 2. to lead aside [cf. παρά, IV. 2] from
the right course or path, to carry away: Jude 12 [R.V.
carried along'] (where Kec■πepιφtp.) ; from the truth,
Hob. xiii. 9 where Rec. πepιφtp■, (Plat. Phaedr. p.
265 b. ; Plut. Timol. 6 ; Antonin. 4, 43 ; Ildian. 8, 4, 7
[4 ed. Bekk.]). 3. to carry past, lead past, i. e. to
cause to pass by, to remove : τι άπα τινας, Mk. xiv. 36 ;
Lk. xxii. 42.•
Ίταρα-φρονίω, -ώ ; (παράφρων [fr. παρά (q. V. TV. 2) and
φρήν, ' beside one's wits ']) ; to be beside one's self, out oj
one's senses, void of understanding, insane: 2 Co. xi. 23.
(From Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; once in Sept., Zech.
vii. 11.)•
'ΤΓαρα-ψρον£α, -as, η, {παράφρων [see the preceding
word]), madness, insanity: 2 Pet. ii. 16. The Grk. writ
τταραχειμάξω
487
Ίταρβμβόλή
use not this word but παραφροσννη [cf. W. 24 ; 95
(90)].•
ιταρα-χΗμάζω : fut. παραχαμάσω ; 1 aor. inf. ηαραχα-
μάσαι ; pf. ptcp. παρακ^χαμακω! ; to winter, pass the win-
ter, with one or at a place : Acts xxvii. 12 ; 1 Co. xvi. 6 ;
eV TTJ νήσω. Acts xxviii. 11 ; c«i, Tit. iii. 12. (Dem. p.
909, 15 ; 'Polyb. 2, 64, 1 ; Diod. 19, 34; Plut. Sertor. 3;
Dio Cass. 40, 4.) •
τταρα-χίΐμαο-ία, -as, ή, {τίαραχαμάζω), a passing the
winter, wintering : Acts xxvii. 1 2. (Polyb. 3, 34, 6 ; [3,
35, 1]; Diod. 19, 68.)•
τταρο-χρήμα, (prop. i. q. irapa το χρήμα; cf. OUT on the
spot), fr. Hdt. down ; immediately, forthwith, instantly :
Mt. xxi. 19sq. ; Lk. i. 64; iv. 39 ; v. 25; viii. 44,47, 55 ;
xiii. 13; xviii. 43 ; xix. 11; x.xii. 60 ; Acts iii. 7; v. 10;
ix. 18 Rec. ; xii. 23 ; xiii. 11 ; xvi. 26 [ WH br. παραχρ.],
33. (Sap. xviii. 17; 2 Mace. iv. 34, 38, etc.; Sept. for
Ditilp, Num. vi. 9 ; xii. 4; Is. xxix. 5 ; xxx. 13.) *
irdpSaXis, -f ωί, ή, fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for ipj ; a
pard, panther, leopard ; a very fierce Asiatic and African
animal, having a tawny skin marked with large black
spots [cf. Tristram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 1 1 1 sqq. ; BB. DD.
s. v.] : Rev. xiii. 2.*
trap-f8p<vu ; (fr. trap-ehpos, sitting beside [cf. παρά,
TV. 1]) ; to sit beside, attend constantly, (Lat. assidere},
(Eur., Polyb., Diod., al.) : τω θυσιαστηρίω, to perform
the duties pertaining to the offering of sacrifices and in-
cense, [to wait upon'], X Co. ix. 13 LTTr WH (for Kec.
προσίδρ.).*
ιτάρ-ίίμι ; impf. 3 pers. pi. παρήσαν ; fut. 3 pers. sing.
■παρίσταί (Rev. xvii. 8 L Τ [n ο t (as G Tr WH Alf ., al.)
πάρίΟΎαι ; see Bttm. Ausf. Spr. § 108, Anm. 20 ; Chandler
§803]) ; {παρά near, by, [see παρά, IV. 1 fin.] and «μί) ;
Sept. chiefly for }<ΐ3 ; as in Grk. auth. fr. Horn, down
a. to be by, be at hand, to have arrived, to be present: of
persons, Lk. xiii. 1 ; Jn. xi. 28 ; Acts x. 21 ; Rev. xvii. 8 ;
παρών, present (opp. to απών), 1 Co. v. 3 ; 2 Co. x. 2, 11 ;
xiii. 2, 10 ; eVi Ttxos, before one (a judge). Acts xxiv. 1 9 ;
cVi Tivi, for (to do) something, Mt. xxvi. 50 Rec. ; ΐπί τι,
ibid. G L TTr WH (on which see ΐπί, Β. 2 a. ζ.); ίνώ-
πιον θ(οϋ, in the sight of God, Acts x. 33 [not Tr mrg.] ;
evOaSe, ib. xvii. 6 ; προς riva, with one, Acts xii. 20 ; 2 Co.
xi. 9 (8); Gal. iv. 18, 20. of time: ό καφος πάρεστιρ,
Jn. vii. 6 ; τοπαρόν, the present, Heb. xii. 11 (3 Mace. v.
17; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. 2 b.; [L. and
S. ?. V. II. ; Soph. Lex. s. v. b.]). of other things : τοΰ eiay-
yf\!ov ToC παρόντα (Is ipis, which is come unto (and so
is present among) you. Col. i. 6 (foil, by fir w. an ace. of
place, 1 Mace. xi. 63, and often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt.
down ; see €is, C. 2). b. to be ready, in store, at com-
mand : ή παρούσα αΚήθαα, the truth which ye now hold,
so that there is no need of words to call it to your re-
membrance, 2 Pet. i. 12; {μή) napeariv τινί τι, ibid. 9
[A. V. lackethl, and Lchm. in 8 also [where al. υπάρ-
χοντα], (Sap. xi. 22 (21), and often in class. Grk. fr. Hom.
down ; cf. Passow u. s. ; [L. and S. u. s.]) ; τά παρόντα,
possessions, property, [A. V. .«hcA things as ye have (cf.
our ' what one has by him ')], Heb. xiii. 5 (ois τά παρόντα
άρκίΐ, ήκιστα των αλλότριων optyovrai, Xen. symp. 4, 42).
[CoMP. : στ/μ-πάρΕ tpt.] *
τταρ-ίκτ-άγω : fut. παρΐΐσάξω; (see παρά, IV. 1) ; ίο in-
troduce or bring in secretly or craftily : alptcets άπωλfίas,
2 Pet. ii. 1. In the same sense of heretics : ΐκαστοι ίδιω?
κα'ιίτίρω! Ιδίανδόξανπαρ€ΐσηγά•γοσαν, Hegesipp. ap. Euseb.
h. e. 4, 22, 5 ; δοκοϋσι παρ(ΐσα-γ€ίν τά άρρητα αντων . . .
μυστήρια, Orig. philos. [i. q. Hippol. refut. omn. haeres.]
5, 1 7 fin. ; of Marcion, νομίζων καινόν τι παρ(ΐσάγ(ΐν, ibid.
7, 29 init. ; — passages noted by Hilgenfeld, Zeitschr. f.
wissensch. Theol. 1860, p. 125 sq. (oi προδόται tovs στρα-
Tiarras πap€ισayayόvτ€s evTos των Τ€ΐχών Kvpiovs τήζ πο'λίω?
(ποίησαν, Diod. 12, 41 [cf. Polyb. 1, 18, 3 ; 2, 7, 8]. In
other senses in other prof, auth.) *
ΐΓαρ-ί£σ-ακτο5, -ov, (παρ^ισάγω), secretly οτ surreptitiously
brought in ; [A. V. privily brought in] ; one who has stolen
in (Ynlg. subintroductus): Gal. ii. 4; cl, C. F. A, Fritz-
sche in Fritzschiorum opuscc. p. 181 sq.*
ΐΓαρ-ίΐ(Γ-δύω or παρ(ΐσ8ΰνω : 1 aor. παρΕίσί'δυσα [ace. to
class, usage trans., cf. δίνω ; (see below)] ; to enter se-
cretly, slip in stealthily ; to steal in ; [A. V. creep in un-
awares] : Jude 4 [here WH παρ(ΐσ(δΰησαν, 3 pers. plur.
2 aor. pass, (with mid. or intrans. force) ; see their App.
p. 1 70, and cf. B. 50 (49 ) ; A'eitch s. v. δύω, fin.] ; cf. the
expressions παρ^ίσδυσιν πλάvηs ποκΐν, Barn. ep. 2, 10;
exeiv, ibid. 4, 9. (Hijjpocr., Hdian. 1, 6, 2 ; 7, 9, 18 [8 ed.
Bekk.; Philo de spec. legg. § 15] ; Plut., Galen, al.) *
ΐΓαρ-ίΐσ•-ί'ρχομαι : 2 aor. παρ(ΐσήλβον ; X. to come
in secretly or by stealth [cf. παρά, IV. 1], to creep or steal
in, (Vulg. subintroeo) : Gal. ii. 4 (Polyb. 1, 7, 3 ; 1, 8, 4 ;
[esp.] 2, 55, 3 ; Philo de opif. mund. § 52 ; de Abrah.
§ 19, etc. ; Plut. Poplic. 1 7 ; Clem, homil. 2, 23). 2.
to enter in addition, come in besides, (Vulg. subinlro^ : Ro.
V. 20, cf. 1 2.*
χορ-ίΐσ-φί'ρω : 1 aor. παρ(ΐσήν€γκα ', a. to bring in
besides {Oem., a.\.). b. to contribute besides to some-
thing: σπονδήν, 2 Pet. i. 5 [R. V. adding on your part].'
xop-€KTOs (for which the Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down use
Trapt'ic, παρίξ) ; 1. prep. w. gen. [cf. W. § 54, 6], ex-
cept; tvith the exception of (a thing, expressed by the
gen.): Mt. v. 32; xix. 9 LWH mrg. ; Acts .xxvi. 29,
( Deut. i. 36 Aq. ; Test. xii. Patr. p. 631 ; ['Teaching ' 0,
§1]; Geop. 13, 15, 7). 2. aav. besides : τά Trapexros
sc. yivopfva, the things that occur besides or in addition,
2Co. xi. 28 [cf. our 'extra matters'; al. the things that
I omit ; but see Meyer].*
Ίταρ-εμ-βάλλω : fut. παρεμβάλω ; fr. Arstph. and Dem.
down; 1. to cast in by the side of or besides [ci. παρά,
TV. 1], to insert, interpose ; to bring back into line. 2.
from Polyb. on, in military usage, to assign to soldiers α
place, whether in camp or in line of battle, to draw up in
line, to encamp (often in 1 Mace, and in Sept. where for
n:n) : Tiv\ χάρακα, to cast up a bank about a city, Lk. xix.
43 L mrg. Τ WH txt.*
ΐΓαρ-«μ-βολή, -ήs, ή, (fr. παρίμ(3άλλω, q. v.) ; 1. m•
terpolation, insertion (into a discourse of matters foreign
to the subject in hand, Aeschin.). 2. IntheMaced.
dialect (cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. et Alex- p. 30 ; Loh.
■7Γαρενοχ\€ω
488
ΊταρηΎορια
ad Pliryn. p. 377 ; [W. 22]) an encampment (Polyb.,
Diod., Joseph., I'lut.) ; a. the camp of the Israel-
ites in the tle.icii (an enclosure within which their tents
were pitched), Ex. x.xix. 14; xix. 17; xxxii. 17; hence
in Heb. xiii. 11 used for lite city of Jerusalem, inasmuch
as tliat was to the Israelites what formerly the encanii)-
ment had been in the desert ; of the xacred con;/re</atiim
or aisemlilij of Israel, as that had been gathered formerly
in camps in the wilderness, ib. 13. b. the bar-
racks of the Roman solilicrs, \i\m\\ at .Jerusalem were in
the castle Antonia : Acts xxi. 34, 37 ; xxii. 24 ; xxiii. 10,
16, 32. 3. a/1 army in line of battle : Ileb. xi. 34;
Rev. XX. 9 [here A. V. campl, (Ex. xiv. 19, 20 ; Judg. iv.
16 ; viii. 11; 1 S. xiv. 16 ; very often in Polyb. ; Ael. v. h.
14, 46). Often in Sept. for Π:ππ, which .signifies both
camp and army; freq. in both senses in 1 Mace.; of.
Grimm on 1 Mace. iii. 3."
Ίταρ-Εν-οχλίω, -ώ ; (see (νοχΚίω) ; to cause trouble in a
matter (■παρά equiv. to παρά τιη ιτράγματι). Ιο trouble,
annoy: τινί. Acts xv. 19. (Sept.; Polyb., Diod., Plut.,
E]jict., I. clan., al.) *
ιταρ-€π(δημο$, •ον, (.«ee (πιδημίω), prop, one who comes
from a foreign country into a city or land to reside there
by the side of the natives ; hence stranger ; sojourning in a
strange place, a foreigner, (Polyb. 32, 22, 4 ; Athen. 5
p. 1 96 a.) ; in the N. T. metaph. in ref. to heaven as the
native country, one who sojourns on earth : so of Chris-
tians, 1 Pet. i. 1 ; joined with πάροικοι, 1 Pet. ii. 11, cf.
i. 1 7, (Christians narpiHas οίκοϋσιν 18ίαί, αλλ' ώς πάροικοι •
μίΤ€χον(Τΐ πάντων ως πο\7ται, και πάνθ ίιπομΐΐΌνσιν ως
^e'lOC πάσα ζίνη πατρίς iariv αΐτων, και πάσα πατρΊς ζίνη,
Ερ. ad Diogn. c. 5) ; of the patriarchs, ξ/νοι κ- παρ(πΊ&ημοι
cVl Tr]tyr)s, Heb. xi. 13 (Gen. xxiii. 4 ; Ps. xxxviii.(xxxix.)
13 ; παρ^πώημία t'is eVriv ό βίος, Aeschin. dial. Socr. 3, 3,
where see Fischer).*
ΐΓαρ-€'ρχομαι ; f ut. παρ(\ίνσημαί ; pf. παρΛήλυβα ; 2 aor.
παρήλιοι/, 3 pers. impv. παριλθάτω (Mt. .\.\vi. 39 L Τ Tr
WH ; see απέρχομαι, inil.) ; fr. Ilom. down ; Sept. mostly
for ^5;r ; 1. (παρά past [cf. παρά, IV. 1]) to go past,
passby; a. prop. a. of persons moving forward :
to pass by, absol. Lk. xviii. 37 ; τινά, to go past one, Mk.
vi. 48 ; w. an ace. of place. Acts xvi. 8 (Hom. II. 8, 239 ;
Xen. an. 4, 2, 12; Plat. Ale. 1 p. 123 b.) ; δια τής oSoC
eKeimji. Mt. viii. 28. β. of time: Mt. xiv. 15 ; ό παρ(-
'Κη'Κυθως χρόνος [.\. V^. the lime pastl, 1 Pet. iv. 3, (Soph.,
Isocr., Xen., Plat., Dem., al.) ; of an act continuin'.; for
a time [viz. the Fast], Acts xxvii. 9. (τά παρελθόντα
and τά (πιόντα are distinguished in Ael. v. h. 14, 6.) b.
metaph. a. to pass away, perish : <as άνθος, .las. i. 1 ;
ό οΐρανός, Mt. v. 18 ; xxiv. 35 ; Mk. xiii. 31 ; Lk. xvi. 1 7 ;
xxi. 33; 2 Pet. iii. 10; Rev. xxi. 1 Rec. ; ή ycvfa αΖτη,
Mt. xxiv. 34 ; Mk. xiii. 30 sq. ; Lk. xxi. 32 ; oi Xo'yot ρου,
Mt. xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 31 ; Lk. xxi. 33; τά αρχαία πα-
ρηΚθ(ν, 2 Co. V. 1 7, (Ps. xxxvi. (.xxxvii.) 36 ; Dan. vii. 14
Theodot. ; Sap. ii. 4 ; v. 9; Dem. p. 291, 12 ; Theocr. 27,
8). Here belongs also Mt. v. 18 ('not even the small-
est part shall pass aw.ay from the law,' i. e. so as no longer
to belong to it). β. to pass by (pass over)^, i. e. to neg-
lect, omit, (transgress) : w. an ace. of the thing, Lk. xi.
42 ; XV. 29, (Deut. xvii. 2 ; .Jer. xli. (xxxiv.) 18 ; .Judith
xi. 10 ; 1 Mace. ii. 22 ; Διόί νουν, lies, theog. t>13 ; νόμον,
Lys. p. UI7, 52; Dem. p. 977, 14). γ. to be led by, to
be carried past, be acerted : από τικογ, from one i. e. so
as not to hit, not to appear to, (2 Chr. ix. 2) ; παριλθάτ»
άπ' f'poC TO ποτηριυν, Mt. xxvi. 39 ; παριλθι'ιν, 42 [here G
Τ Tr WH oni. I, br. άπ' ίροΟ] ; άπ' αυτοί ij ωρα, Mk. xiv.
35. 2. (παρά to [cf. παρά, IV. 1]) Ιο come 7iear,
come forward, arrive: l.k. xii. 37; xvii. 7; Acts xxiv.
7 Kec. (and in (Jrk. autli. fr. Acsehyl. and Ildt. down).
[Syn. see παραβαίνω, fin. CoMP. άντι-παρίρχομακ.^ '
wdpco-is, -(ως, ή, (παρίημι, q. v.), pretermission, passing
over, letting pass, neglecting, disregarding : δια την πάρισι»
. . . άνοχ^ Toil θ(οΰ, because God had patiently let pass
the sins committed previously (to the expiatory death of
Christ), i. e. had tolerated, had not punished (and so
man's conception of his holiness wa.s in danger of be-
coming dim, if not extinct), Ro. iii. 20, where cf. Fritz-
sche ; [Trench § xxxiii. (Hippocr., Dion. Hal., al.)].*
παρ-ίχω ; ini|)f. παρύχον, 3 pers. plur. παρΰχαν (Acts
xxviii. 2 L Τ Tr WH ; see ίχω, init., and άπίρχημαι, iiiit.) ;
fut. 3 pers. sing, παρίξ^ι (Lk. vii. 4 RG ; see below); 2
aor. 3 pers. plur. παρίσχον, ptcp. παράσχων ; Mid., [jires.
παρίχομαι]; impf. παριιχόμην; fut. 2 pers. sing, παρίξη
(Lk. vii. 4 L Τ Tr WH) ; fr. Horn, down ; Plautus's jn-ae-
hiheo i. e. praebeo (Lat. prae fr. the (irk. παραί [but see
Curtius §§ 346, 380 (cf. παρά, IV. 1 fin.)]) ; i. e. fi.
to reach forth, offer: τι τινι, Lk. vi. 29. b. to show,
a [ford, sti/)j)ly: τινι ήσυχίαν. Acts .xxii. 2; φιΧανβρωπίαν,
Acts xxviii. 2 ; πάντα, 1 Tim. vi. 1 7. c. to be the
author of, or to cause one to have ; to give, bring, cause,
one something — either unfavorable: κόπους. Jit. xxvi.
10; Mk. xiv. 6; Lk. xi. 7; xviii. 5; Gal. vi. 17 (παρ.
πόνον, Sir. xxix. 4 ; άγόινα. Is. vii. 13 ; πράγματα, very often
fr. Ildt. down ; also όχλον, see Passow s. v. όχλος, 3 ; [L.
and S. s. v. II.]) ; — or favorable : (ρ-γασίαν. Acts xvi. 16,
and Lchm. in xix. 24 ; πϊστιν, [A. V. to give assurarice'].
Acts xvii. 31, on which phrase cf. Fischer, De viliis lexic.
N. T. pj). 37-39 ; i. q. to occasion (ζητήσίΐς, see οΐκοΐΌρια),
1 Tim. i. 4. Mid. 1. to offer, show, οτ present one's
self: with ίαντόν added (λΥ. § 38, 6 ; [Β. § 135, 6]), w.
an ace. of the predicate, τύπον, a pattern, Tit. ii. 7; παρά-
δειγμα . . . ToiofSe favTov παρείχετο, Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 39;
[.Joseph, e. Ap. 2, 15, 4] ; in the act., Plut. puer. educ. c.
■-Ό init. 2. to exhibit or offer on one's oivn pari: το
δίκαιον το'ις δοίλοις. Col. iv. 1 ; to render or afford from
one's own resources or by one's own power : τικί τι, Lk.
vii. 4 (where if we read, with Rec, παρέξει, it must be
taken as the 3d pers. sing, of the fut. act. [in oj)p. to W.
§ 13, 2 a.], the elders being introduced as talking among
themselves ; but undoubtedly the reading παρέξη should
be restored [see above ad init.], and the elders are ad-
dressing Jesus ; cf. Meyer ad loc. ; [and on the construc-
tion, cf. B. § 139, 32]). On the mid. of this verb, cf.
Kruger § 52, 8, 2 ; W. § 38, 5 end ; [EUic. and Lghtft. on
Col."!, s'.].•
Ίταρηγορία, -at, ij, (παρηγορεω [^to address]), prop, an
ταρθενία
489
ναροικεω
ctddressing, address ; i. e. a. exhortation (4 Mace.
T. Π ; vi. 1 ; Apoll. Rh. 2, 1281). b. comfort, solace,
relief, alleviation, consolation : Col. iv. 11 [where see Bp.
Lghtft.]. (Aeschjl. Ag. yS; Pliilo, q. deus imuiort. § 14;
de somn. i. § 18; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 3 ; often in Plut. ;
Hierocl.) *
ΐΓαρθ€ν(α, -as, ή. (παρθίνα), virginity : Lk. ii. 36. (Jer.
iii. 4 ; Pind., Aeschyl., Eur., Diod., I'lut., Hdian., al. [cf.
Field, Otiiiiu Norv. pars iii. ad luc.].) *
•ΐΓορθί'νοί, -ου, ή, 1. a virgin : Mt. i. 23 (fr. Is.
vii. 14); xxv. 1, 7, 11; Lk.i.27; Acts.\.\i.9; 1 Co. vii.
25, 28, 33(34), (fr. Horn, down; Sept. clxie% for n'7ina,
several times for nii'i ; twice for ΠΟ^^' i. e. either a
marriageable maiden, or a goung (married) woman. Gen.
x.xiv. 43 ; Is. vii. 14, on which (last) word cf., besides
Gesenius, Tlies. p. 1037, Credner, Beitrage. u.s.w. ii. p.
197 sijii. ; παρθίνο! of a young bride, newly married λτο-
man, Horn. II. 2, 514) ; η παρθ- rivos, one's marriageable
daughter, 1 Co. vii. 36 sqq. ; παρθ. άγρή, a pure virgin,
2 Co. xi. 2. 2. a man who has abstained from all
uncleanness and whoredom attendant on idolatry, and so
has kept his chastity : Rev. .\iv. 4, where see De Wette.
In eccl. writ, one ivho has never had commerce with women ;
so of Joseph, in Fabricius, Cod. pseudepigr. Vet. Test. ii.
pp. 92, 98; of Abel and Melchizedek, in Suidas [10 a.
and 2450 b.] ; esp. of the apostle John, as in Nonnus,
metaph. ev. Joann. 19, 140 (Jn. xi.x. 26), ήνίδ^ napeivou
via.
Πάρθοι, -ου, 6, a Parthian, an inhabitant of Parthia, a
district of .^sia, bounded on the N. by Ilyrcania, on the
E. by Ariana, on the S. by Carmania ueserta, on the W.
by Media ; plur. in Acts ii. 9 of the Jewish residents of
Parthia. [B. D. s. v. Parthians ; Geo. Rawlinson, Sixth
Great Oriental Monarchy, etc. (Lond. 1873).]*
παρ-ίημι : 2 aor. inf. napdvai (Lk. xi. 42 L Τ Tr WH) ;
pf. pass. ptcp. napapivoi ; f r. Horn, down ; 1. to let
pass ; to pass by, neglect, (very often in Grk. writ. fr.
Find., Aeschyl., Hdt. down), to disregard, omit : ri, Lk.
xi. 42 [R G άφ(('και] (αμαρτήματα. Ιο pass over, let go un-
punished. Sir. xxiii. 2 ; [τιμωρίαν, Lycurg. 148, 41]). 2.
lo relax, loosen, let go, [see παρά, IV. 2], (e. g. a bow) ;
pf. pass. ptcp. παρίΐμίνος, relaxed, urutrung, weakened,
exhausted, (Eur., Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) : χ«ρβΓ, Heb. xii.
12; Sir. ii. 13; xxv. 23, cf. Zeph. iii. 16; Jer. iv. 31 ;
dpyoi και παριψίνοι «πι ίργον αγαθόν, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
34, 4 cf. 1. Cf. παραλύω.'
ιταρ-ΐίΓτανω, see παρίστημι.
Ίταρ-ίσ-τημι and (in later writ., and in the N. T. in Ro.
VI. 13, 16) παριστάνω; fut. παραστήσω', 1 aor. irapt σττ^σα ;
2 aor. παρίστην ; pf. παρίστηκα, ptcp. παριστηκώί and
jrapfo-Tcis; plupf. 3 pers. plur. παραστήκασαν (Acts i. 10
[W II παρίΓΓτ. ; see Ίστημι, init.]) ; 1 fut. mid. παραστψ
σομαι; fr. Horn. down. 1. The pres., impf., fut.
and 1 aor. act. have a transitive sense (Sept. chiefly for
''''?J?,n)> a. to place beside or near [παρά, IV. 1];
to set at hand ; to present ; to proffer ; to provide: κτήνη.
Acts xxiii. 24 {σκάφη, 2 Mace. xii. 3) ; τικά or τί τινι,
to place a person or thing at one's disposal, Mt. xxvi.
53 ; to present a person for another to see and question,
Acts xxiii. 33 ; to present or show, τινά or τί with an ace.
of the quality which the person or thing exliibits : oU
παρίστησ(ν f αυτόν ζώντα. Acts i. 3 ; add, Ro. vi. 13, 16,
19 ; 2 Co. xi. 2 ; Eph. v. 27 ; 2 Tim. ii. 15, ("te vegetnm
nobis in Graecia siste," Cic. ad Att. 10, 16, 6) ; τιχά with
a pred. ace. full, by κατινώπιύν tivos. Col. i. 22 ; ίαυτον &s
[ώσίΐ] Tira τινι, Ιίο. vi. 13 ; to bring, lead to, in the sense
of presenting, without a dat. : Acts ix. 41 ; Col. i. 28.
of sacrifices or of things consecrated to God : τα σώματα
υμών θυσίαν . . . το> θιω, Ro. .xii. 1 (so also in prof. auth. :
Polyb. 16, 25, 7; Joseph, antt. 4, 6, 4 ; Lcian. deor. conciL
13 ; Lat. admoveo, Verg. Aen. 12, 171 ; si.fto, Stat. Theb.
4, 445) ; τινά (a first-born) τω κυρίω, Lk. ii. 22 ; lo bring
to, bring near, metaphorically, i. e. to bring into one's fel-
lowship or intimacy : τίνα τω θ(ω, 1 Co. viii. 8 ; sc. τω θ(ω,
2 Co. iv. 14. b. to present (show) by argument, to
prove: τί. Acts xxiv. 13 (Epict. diss. 2, 23, 47; foil, by
πώί, id. 2, 26, 4 ; tiw ti, Xen. oec. 13, 1 ; Ttw, ότι, Jo-
seph, antt. 4, 3, 2 ; de vita sua § 6). 2. Mid. and
pf., plupf., 2 aor. act., in an intransitive sense (Sept.
chiefly for Ίί?;;, also for 3Xj), to stand beside, stand by
or near, lo be al hand, be present ; a. univ. to stand
by : Tiv'i, lo stand beside one. Acts i. 10 ; ix. 39 ; xxiii. 2 ;
x.xvii. 23; 6 παριστηκώς, a bystander, Mk. xiv. 47, 69
[here TTrWII παρί στώσιν] ; .xv. 35 [here Tdf. παρβ-
στώτων, WH mrg. (στηκότων\ 39; Jn. xviii. 22 [L mrg.
Tr mrg. παρεσ-τώτωι/] ; ό παρ«στώι, Mk. xiv. 70 ; Jn. xix.
26 [here anarthrous]. b. to appear: w. a pred.
nom. foil, by ϊνώπιόν tivos. Acts iv. 10 [A. V. stand here'] ;
before a judge, Καίσαρι, Acts xxvii. 24 ; mid. τώ βήματι
τοϋ θ(οΰ [R G Χρίστου], Ro. xiv. 10. c. to be at
hand, stand ready : of assailants, absol. Acts iv. 26 [A. V.
stood u/)] (fr. Ps. ii. 2) ; to be at hand for service, of ser^
vants in attendance on their master (Lat. appareo), τιιά,
Esth. iv. 5 ; (νώπιόν Tiras, 1 K. x. 8 ; ίνώπιον του θ(οϋ, of
a presence-angel [A. V. that stand in the presence of
God], Lk. i. 19, ef. Rev. viii. 2; absol. oi wapcaruyres,
them that stood by, Lk. xix. 24 ; with αΰτω added (viz.
the high-priest), Acts xxiii. 2, 4. d. to stand by to
help, lo succor, (Germ, beistehen) : rati, Ro. xvi. 2 ; 2 Tim.
iv. 17, (Horn. II. 10, 290; lies. th. 439; Arstph. vesp.
1388; Xen.; Dem. p. 366, 20; 1120, 26, and in other au-
thors), e. to be present; to have come: of time, Mk.
iv. 29.•
Παρμένος [prob. contr. fr. Παρ /xf «'Sijs ' steadfast ' ; cf. W.
103 (97)], ace. -iv [cf. B. 20 (18)], ό, Parmenas, one of
the seven " deacons " of the primitive church at Jerusa-
lem ; Acts vi. 5.•
irap-oSof. -ου, ή, (παρά, near by ; oSor), a passing by or
passage : ev παρο'δω, in passing, [A. V. by the way], 1 Co.
xvi. 7. (Thuc. 1, 126; v. 4; Polyb. 5, 68, 8; Cic. ad
Att. 5, 20, 2 ; Lcian. dial. deor. 24, 2.) *
irap-otKcm, -ω; 1 aor. παρωκησα ; 1. prop, to dwell
beside (one) or in one's neighborhood [παρά, IV. 1] ; to live
near; (Xen., Thuc, Isocr., al.). 2. in the Scrip-
tures to be or dwell in a place as a stranger, to sojourn,
(Sept. for "ilj, several times also for 1ψ\ and ρσ) : folL
■παροικία
490
by (V w. a dat. of place, Lk. xxiv. 18 R L (Gen. xx. 1 ;
xxi. 34 ; xxvi. 3 ; Ex. xii. 40 cod. Alex. ; Lev. xviii.
3 [Aid.], etc.); w. an ace. of_pIace, ibid. GTTrWII
(Gen. xvii. 8; Ex. vi. 4) ; els w. ace. of |)lace (in pregn.
constr. ; see tU, C. i), Ileb. xi. 9. (Mutaiili. and absol.
to dwell on the earth, I'hilo de cherub. § 34 [cf. Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 1 and Lglitft. and llariiaik ad loc. ; Holtz-
maiui, Kill!, ins X. T. j). 484 sq. Sy.v. soe κατοϋίί'ω.].) *
παρ-οικία, -as, ή, (παροικίω, q. v.), abibl. and eccl. word,
a dwelling near or with one ; hence a sojourning, dwelling
in a strange land: prop. Acts xiii. 17 (2 Esdr. viii. 35;
Ps. cxix. (cxx.) 5 ; Sap. xix. 10 ; Prol. of Sir. 21 ; cf. Fritz-
sche on Judith v. 9). !Metaph. the life of man here on
earth, likened to a sojourning : 1 Pet. i. 1 7 (Gen. xlvii.
9) ; see παριπίδημος [and reff. under τταροικί'ω].*
πάρ -oiKos, -ov, (παρά and oiKos) ', 1. in class. Grk.
dwelling near, neighboring. 2. in the Scriptures a
stranger, foreigner, one who lives in a place without the
right of citizenship ; [R. V. sojourner'] ; Sept. for 1J and
2ψ\Β (see ναροικίω 2, and παροικία, [and cf. Schmidt, Sjn.
43, 5 ; L. and S. s. v.]) : foil, by iv w. dat. of place, Acts
vii. 6, 29 ; metaph. without citizenship in God's kinr/dom :
joined with le'voi and opp. to συμπολίτης, Eph. ii. 19
(μόνος Kvpws ό 5eof πολίτης ΐστί, πάρηικον hi κα\ inljKvTuv
το -γ^νητον ΰπαν, Philo de cherub. § 34 [cf. ilangey i. IGl
note]) ; one who lives on earth as a stranger, a sojourner
on the earth : joined with παρεπίδημος (q. v.), of Chris-
tians, whose fatherland is heaven, 1 Pet. ii. 1 1. [Cf. Ep.
ad Diognet. § 5, 5.] *
παροιμία, -ας, ή, (παρά by, aside from [cf. παρά, IV. 2],
and οΖμο; way), prop, a sai/ing out oj' the usual course or
deviating from the usual manner of speaking [cf. Suidas
654, 15; but Hesych. s. v. et al. 'a saying heard by the
wayside' {παρά, IV. 1), i. e. a current or trite saying, prov-
erb ; cf. Curtius §611 ; Steph. Thes. s. v.], hence 1.
a clever and sententious saying, a proverb, (Aeschyl. Ao•.
264 ; Soph., Plat., Aristot., Plut., al. ; exx. fr. Philo are
given by Hilgenfeld, Die Evangelien, p. 292 sq. [as de
ebriet. § 20 ; de Abr. § 40 ; de vit. Moys. i. § 28 ; ii. § 5 ;
de exsecrat. § 6] ; for ^Κ/Ώ in Prov. i. 1 ; xxv. 1 cod.
Alex. ; Sir. vi. 35, etc.) : το της παροιμίας, what is in the
proverb (Lcian. dial. mort. 6, 2 ; 8, 1), 2Pet.ii. 22. 2.
any dark saying which shadows forth some didactic truth,
esp. a symbolic or β gurative saying : παροιμίαν Xeyftv, .In.
xvi. 29 ; f'l/ παροιμίαις Χαλΰν, ibid. 25 ; speech or discourse
in which a thing is illustrated by the use of similes and
comparisons ; an allegory, i. e. extended and elaborate
' metaphor : Jn. x. 6.*
■irap-oivos, -ov, a later Grk. word for the earlier παρ-
οίνιος, (παρά [q. v. IV. 1] and οΓιόγ, one who sits long at
his wine), given to wine, drunken : 1 Tim. iii. 3 ; Tit. i.
7; [al. give it the secondary sense, 'quarrelsome over
wine'; hence, brawling, abusive"].*
παρ-«(χομαι : pf. ptcp. παρωχημένος ; to go by, pass by :
as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. II. 10, 252 down, of time, Acts
xiv. Ii3.•
ιταρ-ομοιάζω; (fr. παρόμοιος, and this fr. παρά [q. v. IV.
1 (?)] and όμοιοί) ; to be tike ; to be not unlike : Mt. xxiii.
τταρονσια
(Several times also in eccl.
27 RGTTrmrg. WII txt
writ.)•
'π'αρ.<}μοιο;, -ov, (also of three term, [see o/ioiot, init.]),
like : Mk. vii. 8 [T WII om. Trbr. the cl.], 13. (Ildt.,
Thuc, Xen., Dem., I'olyb., Diod., al.) *
■παρ-οξΰνω : prop, to make sharp, to sharpen, [παρά, IV.
3] : την μάχαφαν, Deut. xxxii. 41. Metaph. (so always
in prof. auth. fr. Eur., Thuc, Xen., down), a. to
stimulate, spur on, urge, {προς τι, ΐπί τι). b. to irri-
tate, provoke, rouse to anger; Pass., pres. παροξύνομαι;
impf. παρωξυι/ό/«;ί': Acts xvii. 16; 1 Co. xiii. 5. Sejit.
chieliy for yHi to scorn, despise ; besides for 0^l'Dr^ to
provoke, make angry, Deut. ix. 18 ; Ps. cv. (cvi.) 29; Is.
Ixv. 3 ; for ^'SPH to exasperate, Deut. ix. 7, 22, etc. ; pass,
for Π";π to burn with anger, Ilos. viii. 5 ; Zech. x. 3, and
for other verbs.*
•π•αροξυσμ05, -οϋ, 6, (παροξύνω, q. V.) ; 1. an incit-
ing, incilciaent : tU παρ. αγάπης [Α. V. to provoke unto
love], Heb. x. 24. 2. irritation, [R. V. contention] :
Acts XV. 39 ; Sept. twice for f|>'p, violent anger, passion,
Deut. xxix. 28; Jer. xxxbc. (xxxii.) 37 ; Dem. p. 1105,
24.•
ιταρ-οργίϊω; Attic fut. [cf. Β. 37 (32) ; TF/f. App. 163]
παροργιω ; to rouse to wrath, to provoke, exasjierale, anger,
[cf. παρά, IV. 3] : Ro. x. 19 ; Eph. vi. 4 ; and Lchni. in
Col. iii. 21. (Dem. p. 805, 19; Philo de somn. ii. §26;
Sept. chiefly for D'ipn.) *
•π-αρ-οργισμόϊ, -οϋ, 6, (παροργίζω), indignation, exasper-
ation, wrath : Eph. iv. 26. (1 K. xv. 30; 2 K. xxiii. 26;
Neh. ix. 18 ; [Jer. xxi. 5 Alex.] ; not found in prof, auth.)
[Syn. cf. Trench § xxxvii.] *
ιταρ-οτρύνω : 1 aor. παρώτρννα; [ότρΰνω to stir up (cf.
παρά, IV. 3)] ; to incite, stir up : τινά. Acts xiii. 50. (Pind.
01. 3, 68; Joseph, antt. 7, 6, 1 ; Lcian. deor. concil. 4.) *
τταρ-ουσία, -ας, η. (παρών, -οϊ/σα, -όν, fr. πάρίίμι q. v.),
in Grk. auth. fr. the Tragg., Thuc, I'lat., down; not
found in Sept.; 1. presence: 1 Co. xvi. 17; 2 Co.
X. 10 ; opp. to απουσία, Phd. ii. 12 (2 Mace. xv. 21 ; [Ar-
istot. phys. 2, 3 p. 195*, 14; metaphys. 4, 2 p. 1013', 14;
meteor. 4, 5 p. 382', 33 etc.]). 2. the presence of
one coming, hence the coming, arrival, advent, ([yo\yh.
3,41,1.8]; Judith X. 18; 2 Mace. viii. 12; [llerm. sim.
5, 5, 3]) : 2 Co. vii. 6 sq. ; 2 Th. ii. 9 (cf. 8 άποκαλυφθί^σί-
ται) ; ή . . . πάλιν προς τίνα, of a return, Phil. i. 26. In
the N. T. esp. of the advent, i. e. the future, visible, relurnl
from heaven of Jesus, the Messiah, to raise the dead, I
hold the last judgment, and set up formally and glorious-
ly the kingdom of God : Mt. xxiv. 3; ή παρ. τοϋ ν'ιοΐι τυύ
ανθρώπου, [27], 37, 39 ; τοΟ κυρίου, 1 Th. iii. 13; iv. 15; v.
23 ; 2 Th. ii. 1 ; Jas. v. 7 sq. ; 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; Χριστοί; 2 Pet.
i. 16; airoO, 1 Co. XV. 23; [lTh.ii.l9]; 2 Th. ii. 8 ; 2
Pet. iii. 4 ; [1 Jn. ii. 28] ; της του SeoO ήμίρας, 2 Pet. iii. 12.
It is called in eccles. writ, η hevripa παρουσία, Εν. Nicod.
c. 22 fin.; Justin, apol. 1, 52 [where see Otto's note];
dial. c. Tr. cc. 40, 110, 121 ; and is opp. to ή πρώτη παρ.
which took place in the incarnation, birth, and earthly
career of Clirist, Justin, dial. c. Tr. cc. 62, 121, cf. 14, 32,
49, etc. ; [cf. Ignat. ad Phil. 9 (and Lghtft.)] ; see eXtuiris.'
frapoyjri'i
491
ΪΓΟ?
irap-o+Cs, -iSos, ή, (παρά [q. v. IV. 1], and όψον, on
which see οψάριον) ; 1. a side-dish, a dish of dain-
ties or choice food suited not so much to satisfy as to gratify
the appetite ; a side-accompaniment of the more solid food ;
hence i. q. παρό-^ημα; so in Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 4 and many
Attic>vrit. in Athen. 9p.367d. sq. 2. the dish itself
in wh ich the delicacies are served up : Mt. xxiii. 25, 26 [here
Τ om. WH br. παροψ-.Ί ; Artem. oneir. 1, 74 ; Alciphr. 3,
20 ; Plut. de vitand. acre alien. § 2. This latter use of
the word is condemned by the Atticists ; of. Slurz, Lex.
Xen. iii. 4C3 sq. ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 176 ; [Rutherford,
New rhryn. p. 265 sq.] ; Poppo on Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 4.•
Ίταρρησ-ία, -ut, ij, (παν and prjais ', of. άρρησία silence,
κατάρρησί! accusation, ηρόρρησις prediction) ; 1.
freedom in speaking, unreservedness in speech, (Eur.,
Plat., Dem., al.) : ή π. τιι/ογ. Acts iv. 13; χρησθαι παρ-
ρησία, 2 Co. iii. 1 2 ; παρρησία adverbially, — freely : XaXeix,
Jn. vii. 13, 26 ; xviii. 20 ; — openly, frankly, i. e. without
concealment: Mk. viii. 32; Jn. xi. 14; — without ambi-
guity or circumlocution : erne ήμϊν παρρησία (Philem. ed.
Meineke p. 405), Jn. x. 24; — without the use of figures
and comparisons, opp. to e'c napotpiait ; Jn. xvi. 25, and
R G in 29 (where L Τ Tr \VH ei> παρρησία) ; ίν παρρησία,
freely, Eph. vi. 19 ; peril παρρησίας, Actsx.wiii. 31 ; eiVeiv,
Acts ii. 29; XaXfii», Acts iv. 29, 31. 2. free and
fearless confidence, cheerful courage, boldness, assurance,
(1 Mace. iv. 18 ; Sap. v. 1 ; Joseph, antt. 9, 10, 4 ; 15, 2,
7; [ct. W. 23]) : Phil. i. 20 (opp. to αίσχίνισθαι, cf. Wie-
singer ad loc.) ; (v πίστα, resting on, 1 Tim. iii. 13, cf.
Ilulher ad loc; exftv παρρησίαν etr τι, Heb. x. 19 ; πολλή
pot ϋστί) παρρ. προς ίιμάί, 2 Co. vii. 4 ; of the confidence
impelling one to do something, ϊχαν παρρ. with an infin.
of the thing to be done, Philem. 8 [Test. xii. Patr., test.
Rub. 4] ; of the undoubting confidence of Christians rela-
tive to their fellowship with God, Eph. iii. 1 1 ; Heb. iii.
6; X. 35 ; ptrti παρρησίας, Heb. iv. 16 ; (\eiv παρρησίαν,
oi)p. to αισχννίσθαί to be covered with shame, 1 Jn. ii.
28; before the judge, 1 Jn. iv. 17; with προς τον θ(άν
added, 1 Jn. iii. 21 ; v. 14. 3. the deportment by
which one becomes conspicuous or secures publicity (Philo
de victim, offer. §12): iv παρρησία, before the public, in
view of all, Jn. vii. 4 (opp. to ev τω κρυπτά) ; xi. 54 [with-
out fV] ; Col. ii. 15 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.].*
παρρησ-ιάζομαι ; impf. ('παρρησιαζόμην ; 1 aor. ίπαρρη-
σιασάμην ; {παρρησία, q. v.) ; a depon. verb ; Vulg. chiefly
fiducialiter ago ; to bear one's self boldly or confident-
ly ; 1. to use freedom in speaking, be free-spoken ; to
speak freely {[A. Y.boldlyl): Acts xviii. 26 ; xix. 8; iv
τω ύνόματι τοΰ 'ίησοΰ, relying on the name of Jesus, Acts
ix. 27, 2•*^ (29) ; alsotVi τώκυριω, Acts xiv. 3. 2. to
grow confident, have boldne.'i.f, shore assurance, assume a
bold hearing : (Ιπύν, Acts xiii. 46 [R. V. spake out boldly] ;
λαλίΓκ, Acts xxvi. 26 ; παρρησ. ΐντινι, in reliance on one
to take courage, foil, by an inf. of the thing to be done :
\αΚήσαι, Eph. vi. 20 ; 1 Th. ii. 2. (Xen., Dem., Aeschin.,
Polyb., Philo, Plut, al. ; Sept.; Sir. vi. 11.)•
■nan, πάσα, πάν. gen. παντάς, πάσης, παντός, [dat. plur.
Lchm. π'ασι ten times, -σιν seventy-two times ; Tdf. -σ•
five times (see Proleg. p. 98 sq.), -σιν seventy-seven times ;
Treg. -σιν eighty-two times ; WH -at fourteen times, -viv
sixty-eight times; seeN, ν {ίφ(\κυστικόν)'\,'Ά(ί^τ.^2, [fr.
Hom. down], all, every ; it is used
I. adjectively, and 1. with anarthrous
nouns ; a. any, every one (sc. of the class denoted
by the noun annexed to πάς) ; with the Singular ; as
πάν hiv&pov, Mt. iii. 10; πάσα θυσία, Mk. ix. 49 [T WH
Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. the cl.] ; add, IMt. v. 1 1 ; xv. 13 ;
Lk. iv. 37; Jn. ii. 10; xv. 2 ; Acts ii. 43 ; v.42; Ro. xiv.
11; 1 Co. iv. 17; Rev. xviii. 17, and very often; πάσα
ψυχή ανθρώπου, Ro. ii. 9 (πάσα άνθρ. ψυχή, Plat. Phaedr.
p. 249 e.) ; πάσα συν(ί5ησις ανθρώπων, 2 Co. iv. 2 ; πάς
λ(•/όμ(νος θ(ός, 2 Th. ii. 4 ; πάς ayiot iv Χριστώ, Phil. iv.
21 sqq. with the Plural, all or any that are of the class
indicated by the noun : as πάντ(ς άνθρωποι. Acts xxii. 15;
Ro. V. 12, 18; xii. 17 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 7; xv. 19; πάντα
ayioi, Ro. xvi. 15 ; πάντες ayyeXoi θίον, Heb. i. 6; πάντα
[L Τ Tr WH τά] ΐθνη. Rev. xiv. 8 ; on the phrase πάσα
σαρξ, see σαρξ, 3. b. any and every, of every kind,
[A. V. often all manner of~\ : πάσα νόσος καΊ μαλακία, Mt.
iv. 23 ; ix. 35 ; χ. 1 ; ιυΧσγία, blessings of every kind, Eph.
i. 3 ; so esp. with nouns designating virtues or vices, emo-
tions, character, condition, to indicate every mode in
which such virtue, vice or emotion manifests itself, or
any object whatever to which the idea expressed by the
noun belongs : — thus, πάσα iλπίς, Acts xxvii. 20 ; σοφία,
Acts vii. 22 ; Col. i. 28 ; γνώσις, Ro. xv. 14 ; ά&ικία, άσί(ίιια,
etc., Ro. i. 18,29; 2Co.x. 6; Eph. iv. 19, 31 ; v. 3; σπονδή,
2 Co. viii. 7 ; 2 Pet. i. 5 ; iπιθυμίa, Ro. vii. 8 ; χαρά, Ro.
XV. 13; αυτάρκεια, 2 Co. i.\. 8; iv παντΧ λόγω κ- γνώσ€ΐ,
1 Co. i. 5 ; σοφία κ. φρονησ(ΐ etc. Eph. i. 8 ; iv π. άγαθα>'
σύντ) κ- δικαιοσΰντ;, κ- άληθ(ία, Eph. ν. 9 ; αΙσθήσ(ΐ, Phil. i.
9; υπομονή, βλίψις. etc., 2 Co. i. 4 ; xii. 12 ; add. Col. i.
9-11 ;iii. 16; 2 Th. i. 11 ; ii. 9 ; 1 Tim. i. 15; v. 2; vi. 1;
2 Tim. iv. 2; Tit. ii. 15 (on ivhieh see iπιτayή)^, iii. 2;
Jas. i. 21 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 ; v. 10 ; πάσο δικαιοσύνη, i. e. ό άνη
Βίκαιον, Mt. iii. 15; πάν θίΧημα τοΟ θ(οϋ, everything God
wills, Col. iv. 12; πάσα υποταγή, obedience in all things,
1 Tim. ii. 11; πάση συν(ΐδησ(ΐ άγηθη, consciousness of
rectitude in all things. Acts xxiii. 1 ; — or it signifies the
highest degree, the maximum, of the thing which the noun
denotes [cf. W. 110 (105 sq.); Ellicott on Eph. i. 8 ;
Meyer on Phil. i. 20; Kriiger § 50, 11, 9 and 10] : as
μ(τά πάσης παρρησίας. Acts iv. 29; -xxviii. 31 ; fifra ττάσ.
ταπίΐνοφροσύνης. Acts xx. 1 9 ; προθυμίας. Acts xvii. 1 1 ;
χαράς, Phil. ii. 29, cf. Jas. i. 2 ; iv πάση άσφa\fίa, Acts
V. 23 ; iv παντί φόβω, 1 Pet. ii. 18; πάσα iζoυσia, Mt.
xxviii. 18, (πάν jfpOTor, Soph. Phil. 142). c. the
whole (all, Lat. tolus) : so before proper names of coun-
tries, cities, nations ; as, πάσα Ιεροσόλυμα, Mt. ii. 3 ; πάς
Ισραήλ, Ro. xi. 26; before collective terms, as πάς οίκος
Ισραήλ, Acts ii. 36 ; πάση κτίσις (see κτίσις, 2 b.) ; πάσα
γραφή (nearly equiv. to the όσα προίγράφη in Ro. xv. 4),
2 Tim. iii. 16 (cf. Rothe, Zur Dogmatik, p. 181) ; πάσα
γερουσία υιών Ισραήλ, Ex. xii. 21 ; πάς ιτπτος Φαραώ, Ex.
xiv. 23 ; πάν Βίκαιον (θνος. Add. to Esth. i. 9 ; by a some-
what rare usage before other substantives also, as [πά»
τταϊ
492
τται?
πρόσωπον τήι yijs, Acts xvii. 26LTTrWH]; πάσα
οίϊοδο/ιιί, Ε|)1ι. ϋ. 21 G L Τ'Γγ \νΐΙ, of. Harless ad loc.
p. 2u2 [ul. I'liiil no necessity here for resorting to this ex-
ceptional use, but render (with R. V.) each several builii-
int/ (cf. Meyer)]; παν τΐμινοι, 3 Mace. i. 13 (where see
Grimm) ; Havkov ■ . . as ev πάστ] (πίστοΚτ) μνημονινα νμωυ,
Tgnat. ad Ejih. 12 [(vet of. Bp. Lghtft.)] ; cf. Passow
s.v.w5f,2; [L.andS.'s.v. A.ir.]; \V.§18,4; [B.§127,
29] ; Kruger § 50, 1 1, 8 to 1 1 ; Kiiliner ii. 545 sq. 2.
with nouns wliich have the article, all the, the ichofe, (see
c. just above) : — witli tlie Singuhir ; as, πάσα ή aytXij,
Ike whole herd, Mt. viii. 32 ; jrat ό όχΚοί, Mt. .xiii. 2 ; jrus
6 κόσμος, Ro. iii. 19 ; Col. i. 6 ; πάσα ή πάλι? (i. e. all its
inhabitants), Mt. viii. 34; x.xi. 10, etc. ; πάσα η 'Ιουδαίο,
Mt. iii. 5 ; add, Mt. .xxvii. 25 ; Mk. v. 33 ; Lk. i. 10 ; Acts
vii. 14; x. 2 ; xx. 2S; xxii. 5; Ro. iv. 16 ; ix. 17 ; 1 Co.
xiii. 2 (πίστιν κα\ γνώσιν in their whole compass and ex-
tent) ; Eph. iv. IG; Col. i. 19; ii. 9, 19; Phil. i. 3 ; lleb.
ii. 15; Rev.v. 6, etc. ; the difference between πάσα ή dXi^tt
[all] and πάσα ίλίψΐΓ [«".v] appears in 2 Co. i. 4. πάί
6 Χαοΐ ο ντο ς, Lk. ix. 13 ; πάσαν την ό Ρ(ί\ην t κ^ίνην, ΛΙί.
χ viii. 32; πά: placed after the nuun has the force of a
predicate: την κρίσιν πάσαν δί'8ω«, the jwlrjment lie halh
given tvhnll;/ [cf. W. 54S (510)], Jn. v. 22; την (ξουσίαν
. . . πάσαν ποίίΐ. Rev. xiii. 12 ; it is placed between the
article and noun [B. § 127, 29; W. 549 (510)], as τον
πάντα χμόνον, i.e. ahva'/s. Acts xx. 18; add, Gal. v. 14;
1 Tim. i. IG [here L TTr WllSirar] ; —with a Plural,
all (/he lolaliti/ of the persons or things designated by the
noun) : πάντας Toic άρχίίμίΐί, Mt. ii. 4 ; add, Mt. iv. 8 ;
xi. 13; Mk. iv. 13; vi. 33; Lk. i. 6, 4S; Actsx. 12, 43;
Ro. i. 5 ; XV. 1 1 ; 1 Co. xii. 26 ; xv. 25 ; 2 Co. viii. 1 8, and
very often; with a demonstr. pron. added, Mt. xxv. 7;
Lk. ii. 19, 51 [here Τ WH om. L Tr mrg. br. the pron.] ;
πάντα is placed after the noun : τάτ naXus πάσας, the cities
all (of them) [cf. W. u. s.], Mt. ix. 35 ; Acts viii. 40 ; add,
Mt. X. 30 ; Lk. vii. 35 [here L Tr AVH txt. πάντων των
etc.]; xii. 7; Acts viii. 40; xvi. 26 ; Ro. xii. 4 ; 1 Co. vii.
17; X. 1; xiii.2; xv. 7; xvi. 20; 2 Co. xiii. 2, 12 (13);
Phil. i. 13; 1 Th. v. 26 ; 2 Tim. iv. 21 [WH br.».] ; Rev.
viii. 3 ; oi πάντις foil, by a noun. Acts xix. 7 ; xxvii. 37;
Tois κατά τα ΐθνη πάντατ ΊουδαίουΓ, Acts x.xi. 21 [here L
om. Tr br. τγ.].
II. without a substantive ; 1. masc. and fem.
ever;/ one, any one : in the singular, without anv addition,
Mk. ix. 49 ; Lk. xvi. 16 ; Heb. ii. 9 ; foil, by a rel. pron.,
πάς Βστις, Mt. vii. 24; x. 32; πάς or, Mt. xix. 29 [LTTr
Αλ'ΙΙ όστις] ; Gal. iii. 10; πάς or Sv (eav Tr AVH), whoso-
ever. Acts ii. 21 ; jr5r ϊξ ίμών ός, Lk. xiv. 33 ; with a
ptcp. which has not the article [λν. Ill (106)]: παντίις
άκηί'οντης (if any one heareth, whoever he is),Mt. xiii. 19;
παντΧ otpeiKovTi ήμ'ιν, every one owing (if he owe) us any-
thing, unless όφιίλοντι is to be taken substantively, every
debtor of ours, Lk. xi. 4 ; with a ptcp. which has the ar-
ticle and takes the place of a relative clause [W. u. s.] :
jrSt ό οργιζόμίνος, every one that is angry, Mt. v. 22 ; add,
Mt. vii. 8; Lk. vi.47; .Tn. iii. 8,20; vi.45; Actsx. 43 sq.;
xiii. 30 ; Ro. i. 16 ; ii. 10 ; xii. 8 ; 1 Co. ix. 25 ; xvi. 16 ;
Gal. iii. 13 ; 1 Jn. ii. 28 ; iii. 3 sq. 6, etc. Plural πάντ(ς,
without any addition, all men : Mt. x. 22; Mk. xiii. 13;
Lk. .x.x. 38; x.xi. 17; Jn.i. 7; iii. 31' [in 31' G Τ VVIl mrg.
om. the cl.J ; V. 23 ; vi.45; xii. 32 ; Acts xvii. 25 ; Ro. x.
12; 1 Co. ix. 19; 2 Co. v. 14 (15); Eph. iii. 9 [ht-'re Τ
WH txt.om. L br. π.] ; of a certain definite whole : all
(the people), Mt. xxi. 26 ; all (we wlio hold more liberal
views), 1 Co. viii. 1 ; all (the members of the church),
ibid. 7 ; by hyperbole i. (\. the great majority, the mul-
titude, Jn. iii. 26 ; all (just before mentioned), Mt. xiv.
20; xxii. 27 sq. ; xxvii. 22; Mk. i. 27 [here TTrWH
άπavτfs], 37 ; vi. 39,42; [xi. 32 Lchm.] ; Lk. i. 63; iv. 15;
Jn. ii. 15, 24, and very often; [all (about to be men-
tioned), διά πάντων sc. των αγίων (as is shown by the folL
κα! κτλ.), Acts ix. 32]. oi πάντις, all taken together, all
collectively, [cf. W. 116 (110)]: of all men, Ro. xi. 32;
of a certain definite whole, Pliil. ii. 21 ; with the 1 pere.
plur. of the verb, 1 Co. X. 1 7 ; Eph. iv. 13; with a definite
number, in all [cf. B. § 127, 29] : ήσαν Se oi πάντ(ς avSptt
ώσίΐ SeKaSoo (or δώδίκα). Acts xi.x. 7 ; ημιθα al πάσα»
ψνχα\ Ηιακόσιαι (tib<tpijKovTa f^. Acts xxvii. 37, («V* avdpat
Tovs πάντας Sco, .ludith iv. 7 ; ΐγίνοντο oi πάντ(ς ώς τίτρα-
κόσιοι, Joseph, antt. 6, 12, 3; toUc πάντας eif ^ισχ^ιλίους,
id. 4, 7, 1 ; ώς fivai τάς πάσας δί'κα, Ael. v. h. 12, .'15 ; see
other exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. πάς, 5 b. ; [L. and
S. s. V. C] ; " reliuiiuitur ergo, ut omnia triii genera sint
causaruin," Cic. de invent. 1, 9) ; oi πάντ(ς, all those I
have spoken of, I Co. ix. 22; 2 Co. v. 14 (15). πάvτtt
όσοι, all as manyas, Mt. xxii. 10 ; Lk. iv. 40 [here Tr mrg.
WH txt. ατΓ.]; Jn. x.8 ; Acts v. 36 sq.; πάιτί s oi w. a ptcp.,
all (they) that : Mt. iv. 24 ; .Mk. i. 32 ; Lk. ii. 18, 38 ; Acts
ii. 44; iv. IG; Ro. i. 7 ; x. 12 ; 1 Co. i. 2 ; 2 Co. i. 1 ; Eph.
vi. 24; iTh. i. 7; 2 Th. i. 10; Heb. iii. 16; 2Jn. 1 ; Rev.
xiii. 8; xviii. 19, 24, and often. πάντ(ς o'l sc. oiTis : Mt.
v. 15 ; Lk. v. 9 ; Jn. v. 2S ; Acts ii. 39 ; v. 1 7 ; xvi. 32 ; Ro.
ix. 6 ; 2 Tim. i. 15 ; 1 Pet. v. 14, etc. πάντα with pei^
sonal and demonst. pronouns [compare W. 548 (510)] :
ήμίΐς πάντ(ς, Jn. i. 16; Ro. viii. 32 ; 2 Co. iii. 18 ; Eph. iL
3 ; πάντ(ς ημ(Ίς, Acts ii. 32 ; x. 33 ; xxvi. 14 ; xxviii. 2 ; Ro.
iv. 16 ; oi πάντις ήμ<ΐς, 2 Co. v. 10 ; ΰμ€ΐς πάντες, Acts xx.
25; πάντες ΰμ(Ίς, Mt. xxiii. 8 ; xxvi. 31 ; Lk. ix. 48; Acts
xxii. 3 ; Ro. xv. 33 ; 2 Co. vii. 15 ; [Gal. iii. 28 R G L
WH] ; Phil. i. 4, 7 sq. ; 1 Th. i. 2 ; 2 Th. iii. 16, 18 ; Tit.
iii. 15 ; Heb. xiii. 25, etc.; αίτο! πάντ(ς, 1 Co. xv. 10 ; ππντ(ς
αίτοί, Acts iv. 33 ; xix. 1 7 ; .x.x. 36 ; oirot πάντ€ς, .\cts i.
14; .xvii. 7; Heb. xi. 13, 39 ; rrai^it [L Τ απ•] οίτ-οι, Acts
ii. 7 ; oi δε πάντα, and they all, Mk. xiv. 64. 2.
Neuter πάν, everything, (anything) whatsoever ; a.
in the Sing. : πάν τά, foil, by a ptcp. [on the neut. in a con-
crete and collective sense cf. B. § 128, 1], 1 Co. x. 25, 27;
Eph. v. 13 ; 1 Jn. v. 4 ; πάν τό sc. όν, 1 Jn. ii. 16 ; πάν ο,
Ro. xiv. 23; Jn. vi. 37, 39, [R. V. all that']; Jn. xvii. 2:
πάν S, Ti άν or cok, whatsoever. Col. iii. 1 7, and Rec. in 23.
Joined to prepositions it forms adverbial phrases : διΛ
παντός or &ιαπαντός, always, perpetually, see διά, A. Π. 1
a. ; ev παντί, either in every condition, or in every matter,
Phil. iv. 6; 1 Th. v. 18; in everything, in every way, on
every side, in every particular or relation, 2 Co. iv. 8 ; vii
ττας
493
ΐΓασ•)(α
5, 11, 16; xi. 6,9; Eph. v. 24; τΑουτίζ^σθαι, 1 Co. i. 5;
[nepuiaddv], 2 Co. viii. 7 ; iv τταντΊ και ΐν πάσιν (see
μνίω. b.), Phil. iv. 1 2. b. Plural πάντα (without the
article [cf. W. 116(110); Matthiae § 43»]) ull thinys ; o.
of a certain definite totality or sum of things, the con-
text shewing what things are meant : Mk. iv. 34 ; vi. 30;
Lk. i. 3 ; [v. 28 L Τ Tr WH] ; Jn. iv. 25 [here Τ Tr WH
απ.'] \ Ro. viii. 2^ ; 2 Co. vi. 10; Gal. iv. 1 ; Phil. ii. 14 ;
1 Th. V. 21 ; 2 Tim. ii. 10 ; Tit. i. 15 ; 1 Jn. ii. 27 ; ηάντα
υμών, all ye do with one another, 1 Co. xvi. 14 ; πάντα
γίν(σθιιί πάσιν, [Α. V. Ιο become (Μ thinijs to all men], i. e.
to adapt one's self in all ways to the needs of all, 1 Co.
ix. 22 L Τ Tr WH (Rec. τα πάντα ι. e. in all the ways pos-
sible or necessary); cf. Kypke, Obs. ii. p. 21.5 sq. β.
accusative πάντα [adverbially], wholli/, allogelher, in all
uxiy.t, in all thingf:, in all rexpects: Acts xx. 35; 1 Co. ix.
25; X. 33; xi. 2; cf. Matthiae § 425, 5; Passow ii. p. 764*;
[L• and S. s. v. D. II. 4]. γ. πάντα, in an absolute
sense, all things that exist, all created things : Jn. i. 3 ;
I Co. ii. 10 ; XV. 27 ; Heb. ii. 8 (and L Τ Tr WH in iii.
4) ; Eph. i. 22 ; Col. i. 1 7 ; 1 Pet. iv. 7 ; Rev. xxi. 5 ; (in
Ro. ix. 5 πάντων is more fitly taken as gen. masc. [but
see the Coram, ad loc.]). ποία ΐστΊν ίντοΚη πρώτη πάντων
(gen. neut. ; Rec. ττασώι/), what coramandnient is first of
all (things), Mk. xii. 28 {ίφασκί λίγων κορυΒον πάντων
πρώτην όρνιθα γ(νίσθαι,προτίραν τηί yrjs, Arstph. av. 4 72;
τάί πόλ^ΐί . . . €λ€νθ€ρονν και πάντων μάλιστα Αντανδρον,
Thuc.4,52; of. W.§27,(j; [Β.§150,6; Green p. 109];
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 538). S. with the article [cf.refF.
in b. above], τα πάντα; οα. in an absolute sense, all
things collectively, the totality of created things, the uni-
verse of things : Ro. xi. 36 ; 1 Co. viii. 6 ; Eph. iii. 9 ; iv.
10; Phil. iii. 21 ; Col. i. 16 sq.; Heb. i. 3 ; ii. 10; Rev. iv.
I I ; τα πάντα ev πάσι πληροϋσθαι, to fill the universe of
things in all places, Eph. i. 23 [Rec. om. τά; but al. take
(V jr. here modally (see Θ. below), al. instrum en-
tally (see Meyer ad loc.)]. ββ. in a relative sense:
Mk. iv. 11 [Tdf. om. τά] (the whole substance of saving
teaching) ; Acts xvii. 25 [not Rec."] (all the necessities
of life) ; Ro. viii. 32 (all the things that he can give for
our benefit) ; all intelligent beings [al. include things ma-
terial also], Eph. i. 10 ; Col. i. 20 ; it serves by its univer-
sality to designate every class of men, all mankind, [cf . W.
§ 27, 5; B. § 128, 1], Oal. iii. 22 (cf. Ro. xi. 32) ; 1 Tim.
vi. 1.3 ; eivai τά [Τ AVH om. τα] πάντα, to avail for, be a
substitute for, to possess supreme authority, κα\ iv πάσιν
(i. e. either with all men or in the minds of all [al. take
πάσιν as neut., cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]). Col. iii. 11 ; Ίνα
5 ό Sfos τα [L Tr WH om. τά] πάντα ev πάσιν [neut. ace.
to Grimm (as below)], i. e. that God may rule supreme by
his spiritual power working within all, ' may be the im-
manent and controlUng principle of life,' 1 Co. xv. 28,
(so in prof. auth. πάντα or άπαντα without the article :
τΓαιτα ην (V τοΐσι ΒαβυλωνΙοισι Ζώπυρος, Ildt. 3, 157; cf.
Ilerm. ad Vig. p. 727 ; other exx. fr. prof. auth. are given
in Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 230 sq. ; Palairet, Observv. p.
407 ; cf. Grimm in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for
1873, p. 394 sqq.) ; accns. [adverbially, cf. /3. above] τα
πάντα, in all the parts [in which we grow (Meyer)], in aB
respects, Eph. iv. 15. The Article in τά πάντα refers —
in 1 Co. xi. 1 2 to the things before mentioned (husband
and wife, and their mutual dependence) ; in 2 Co. iv. 15
to 'all the things that befall me'; in 1 Co. xv. 27 sq.;
Phil. iii. 8, to the preceding πάντα ; in Col. iii. 8 τά πάντα
serves to sum up what follows [W. 107 (102)]. c.
ττάντα τά foil, by a ptcp. (see πάί, πάντες, Π. 1 above) :
Mt. xviii. 31 ; Lk. xii. 44 ; xvii. 10; xviii. 31 ; xxi. 22;
xxiv. 44; Jn. xviii. 4; Acts x. 33 ; xxiv. 14; Gal. iii. 10;
τά πάντα w. ptcp., Lk. ix. 7; Eph. v. 13; jrai^a τά sc. όντα
(see πΰί, [πάν], πάντα, II. 1 and 2 above), Mt. xxiiL 20;
Acts i V. 24 ; xiv. 15; .xvii. 24 ; πάντα τά ί)8ί , sc. όντα. Col.
iv. 9 ; τά κατ ipi, ibid. 7 [see κατά, II. 3 b.]. ξ. πάντα
and τά ττάι^α with pronouns : τα (μα πάντα, Jn. xvii. 10 ;
πάντα τά (μά, Lk. χ ν. 31 ; ταίτα ττάπ-α, these things all taken
%eiAer[AV.548(510); Fritzsche on Mt. xxiv. 33,34; cf.
Bornemann on Lk. .\xi. 36 ; Lobeck, Paralip. p. 65] : Mt.
iv. 9; vi.33; xiii. 34, 51; Lk.xii.30; xvi. 14; x.xi.36 [τγ.γ.
Lmrg.]; .xxiv. 9 [Tdf. π- τ.]; Acts vii. 50; Ro. viii. 37;
2 Pet. iii. 1 1 ; πάντα ταύτα, all these things [reff. as above] :
Mt. vi. 32 ; xxiv. 8, 33 [T Tr txt. τ. π.], 34 [Trmrg. τ. ττ.] ;
Lk. vii. 1 8 ; Acts xxiv. 8 ; 1 Co. xii. 11; Col. iii. 1 4 ; 1 Th.
iv. 6 ; the reading varies also between π. τ. and τ. π- in Mt.
-xix. 20 ; .xxiii. 36 ; xxiv. 2 ; πάντα τά συμβ(βηκότα ταϋτα,
Lk.xxiv. 14; πάνταά, Jn.iv. [29 Τ λΥΗ Trmrg. (see next
head)] ; iv. 45 [here L Tr WH όσα (see next head)]; v.
20; Acts X. 39; xiii. 39. η. πάιτα όσα: Mt. vii. 12;
xiii. 46; xviii. 25; xxviii. 20; Mk. xii. 44 : Jn. iv. 29 [see ζ.
above], 45 LTrWH; x.41; .xvi.l5; xvii. 7 ; Acts iii. 22 ;
π. όσα άν (or ίάν), Mt. xxi. 22; xxiii. 3 ; Mk. xi. 24 [G L
TTr WHom.nv]; Acts iii. 22. β. ττάι^α with prepo-
sitions forms adverbial phrases : προ πάντων, be/ore or
above all things [see πρό, c], Jas. v. 1 2 ; 1 Pet. iv. 8. (But
π(ρι πάντων, 3 Jn. 2, must not be referred to this bead,
as though it signified above all things; it is rather as
respects all things, and depends on εύχομαι [apparently a
mistake for (ίοΒοϋσθαι; yet see πιρί, I. c. a.], cf. LUcke
ad loc, 2d ed. p. 370 [3d ed. p. 462 sq. ; Westcott ad
loc] ; W. 373 (350)). [on Sia πάντων. Acts ix. 32, see
1 above.] tv πάσιν, in all things, in all ways, altogether :
1 Tim. iii. 11 ; iv. 15 [Rec] ; 2 Tim. iL 7; iv. 5; Tit. ii.
9 ; Heb. xiii. 4, 1 8 ; 1 Pet. iv. 1 1, [see also 2 a. fin. above] ;
iVi πάσιν, see «πι, Β. 2 d. p. 233'. κατά πάντα, in all re-
spects: Acts xvii. 22; Col. iii. 20, 22 ; Heb. ii. 17 ; iv. 15.
in. with negatives; 1. οΰ πάί, iwt every
one. 2. πάν ου (where οί belongs to the verb), no
one, none, see οΰ, 2 p. 460'; πάί μή (so that μή must be
joined to the verb), no one, none, in final sentences, Jn.
iii. 15 sq.; vi. 39 ; xii. 46 ; iCo. i. 29; w. an impv. Eph.
iv. 29 (1 Mace. V. 42); πάι . . . ου μήν. the aor. subjunc.
(see μη, IV. 2), Rev. xviii. 22.
iiwxo, TO, (Chald. Knp3, Heb. Π03, fr. n?3 to pass
over, to pass over by sparing; the Sept. also constant-
ly use the Chald. form πάσχα, except in 2 Chron. [and
Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 8] where it is φασίκ ; Josephus has
φάσ•κα,antt. 5,1,4; 14,2,1; 17,9,3; b.j. 2, 1,3), an inde-
clinable noun [W. § 10, 2] ; prop, a passing over ; 1.
τχω
494
Ίτατηρ
the paschal sacrifice (which was accustomed to be offered
for the people's deliverance of old from Eg_vi>l), or 2.
the paschal lamb, i. e. the lamb which the Israelites were
accustomed to slay and eat on the fourteenth day of the
month Nisan (the first month of their year) in memory
of that day on which their fathers, preparing to depart
from Egypt, were bidden by God to slay and eat a lamb,
and to sprinkle their door-posts with its blood, that the
destroying angel, seeing the blood, might pass over their
dweUings (Ex. xii. sq. ; Num. ix. ; Deut. xvi.) : iufii/ το π.
(ΠΡνΙΠ any*), Mk. xiv. 12; Lk. xxii. 7, (Ex. xii. 21);
Christ crucified is likened to the slain paschal lamb, 1 Co.
V. 7 ; φαγιΐν το π., Mt. xxvi. 17 ; Mk. xiv. 12, 14 ; Lk.
xxii. 11, 15; Jn. xviii. 28; Πρ3Π hjVi, 2 Chr. xxx. 17
sq. 3. the paschal supper: ίτοιμάζαν τά jr., Mt.
xxvi. 19; Mk. xiv. 16 ; Lk. xxii. 8, 1.3 : ποκ'ιν to π. to cel-
ebrate the paschal meal, Mt. xxvi. 18. 4. the pas-
chal festival, the feast of Passover, extending from the
fourteenth to the twentieth day of the month Nisan : Mt.
xxvi. 2; Mk. xiv. 1 ; Lk. ii. 41 ; x.xii. 1 ; Jn. ii. 13, 23 ;
vi. 4; xi. 55 ; xii. 1 ; xiii. 1 ; xviii. 39; xix. 14 ; Acts xii.
4 ; iTiffoiTjicf TO TT. he instituted the Passover (of Moses), Heb.
xi. 28 [cf. W. 272 (256); B. 197 (170)] ; γί«ται τ6 π.
the Passover is celebrated [R. V. Cometh^, Mt. xxvi. 2.
[See BB.DD. s. v. Passover; DiUmann in Sehenkel iv.
p. 392 sqq.; and on the question of the relation of the
"Last Supper" to the Jewish Passover, see (in addition
to reff. in BB.DD. u. s.) Kirchner, die Jiidische Passah-
feier u. Jesu letztes Mahl. Gotha, 1870 ; Keil, Com. uber
Matth. pp. 513-528; J. B. McClellan, The N. T. etc. i.
pp. 473—494 ; but esp. Schiirer, Ueber φαγιίν το πάσχα,
akademische Festschrift (Giessen, 1883).] •
ττάσ-χο); 2 aor. ίπαθον ; \Λ.τΐ(πυνθα (Lk. xiii. 2; Heb.
ii. 18); fr. Hom. down; to be affected or have been af-
fected, to feel, have a sensible experience, to undert/o ; it
is a vox media — used in either a good or a bad sense;
as, οσα 7Γ€πόΐ'θασί και οσα avrols eyevfTo, of perils and de-
liverance from them, Esth. ix. 26 (for ΠΧτ) ; hence
κακω! πύσχαν. Ιο suffer sadly, be in bad plight, of a sick
person, Mt. xvii. 1 5 where L Tr txt. WII txt. κ. ?χίΐν (on
the other hand, eS πάσχ€ΐν, to be well off, in good case,
often in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down). 1. in a bad
sense, of misfortunes, to suffer, to undergo evils, to be
afflicted, (so everywhere in Horn, and Hes. ; also in the
other Grk. writ, where it is used absol.) : absol., Lk.
xxii. 15 ; .xxiv. 46 ; Acts i. 3; iii. 18; xvii. 3 ; 1 Co. xii.
26 ; Heb. ii. 18 ; ix. 26 ; 1 Pet. ii. 19 sq. 23 ; iii. 1 7 ; iv.
15, 19 ; Heb. xiii. 12 ; 6\iyov, a little while, 1 Pet. v. 10;
πάσχειντι, Mt. xxvii. 19 ; Mk. ix. 12 ; Lk. xiii. 2 ; [xxiv.
26] ; Acts xxviiL 5 ; 2 Tim. i. 12 ; [Heb. v. 8 cf. W. 166
(156) a. ; B. § 143, 10] ; Rev. ii. 10 ; παθήματα πάσχον,
2 Co. i. 6; tI aff({ w. gen. of pers., Mt. xvi. 21 ; Lk. ix. 22;
xvii 25; πάσχ. νπό w. gen. of pers. Mt. xvii. 12; τΐ
ίπό τΐί«0Γ, Mk. V. 26; 1 Th. ii. 14; πάσχ. νττίρ τινοί, in
behalf of a pers. or thing. Acts Lx. 16 ; Phil. i. 29 ; 2 Tli.
i. 5 ; with the addition of a dat. of reference or respect
[cf. W. § 81, 6], σαρκί, 1 Pet. iv. 1': iv σαρκί, ibid.' [yet
G L Τ Tr WH om. c„ ; cf. W. 412 (384)] ; πάσχ. πιρί w.
gon. of the thing and xmip w. gen. of pers. 1 Pet. iii. 18
[UGWIImrg.; cf. W.373 (349) ; 383 (358) note] : ττασχ.
δίά ^ίκαιοσίνην, 1 Pet. iii. 14. 2. in a good sense, of
pleasant experiences ; but nowhere so unless either the
adv. fv or an ace. of the thing be added {ίπομυησαι, ΰσα
παθόντζ^ f^ αντον (i. e. θίον) και πηλίκων fi/fpytataiv μ€τα-
λαβύντα αχάριστοι πρΰ: αντου γίνοιντο, Joseph, antt. 3, 15,
1 ; exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given in Passow s. v. II. 5 ;
[L. and S. s. v. II. 2]) : Gal. iii. 4, on which see γί, 3 c.
[CoMP. : προ-, συμ^πάσχω.^ '
Πάταρα, -άρωυ, τά, [cf. W. 176 (166)], Ρα /ara, a mar»
time city of Lycia, celebrated for an oracle of Apollo :
Actsxxi. 1. [B. D. s. V. Patara; Lercin, St. Paul, ii. 99s(i.]•
irareurcru) : fut. πατάξω; 1 aor. ΐπάταξα; Sept. times
without number for r\27] (Iliphil of TtD}, unused in Kal),
also for f]:j, etc.; (in Hom. intrans. to beat, of the heart;
fr. Arstph., .Soph., Plat., al. on used transitively) ; 1.
to strike gently : τί (as a part or a member of the body),
Acts xii. 7. 2. to strike, smite: absol., iv μαχαίρα,
with the sword, Lk. x.xii. 49 ; τινά, Mt. .xxvi. 51 ; Lk. xxii.
50. by a use solely biblical, to afflict; to visit with evils,
etc. : as with a deadly disease, τινά. Acts xii. 23 ; τινά iv
w. dat. of the thing, Rev. xi. 6 (iLTTrWH; xix. 15,
(Gen. viii. 21 ; Num. xiv. 12; Ex. xii. 23, etc.). 3.
by a use solely biblical, to smile down, cut down, to kill,
slay : τινά,^Ιί. xxvi. 31 and Mk. xiv. 27, (aft«rZech. xiii.
7) ; Acts vii. 24."
ιτατί'ω, -ώ; fut. πατήσω: Pass., pres. ptop. πaτoίμfvoί;
1 aor. iπaτήθψ ; f r. Pind., Aeschyl., Soph., Plat, down ;
Sept. for ^ΊΊ, etc. ; to tread, i. e. a. to trample, crush
with the feet: την ληνόν, Rev. xiv. 20 ; xix. 15, (Judg. ix.
27; Neh.xiii. 15; Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.)33; Lam.i.l5). b.
to advance by setting font ujjun, Iread upon : iπάvω οφ<ων
κάί σκορπιών και in'i πάσαν την 8ίιναμιν τοί ΐχθροϋ, to en-
counter successfully the greatest perils from the machina-
tions and persecutions with which Satan would fain thwart
the preaching of the gospel, Lk. x. 19 (cf. Ps. xc. (xoi.)
13). c. to tread under foot, trample on, i. e. treat with
insult and contempt : to desecrate the holy city by devas-
tation and outrage, Lk. xxi. 24 ; Rev. xi. 2, (fr. Dan.
viii. 13); see καταττατί'ω. [CoMP. : κατά-, πιρι-, €μ-π(ρι-
πατ/ω] *
ιτατήρ [fr. Γ. pa ; lit. nourisher, protector, upholder ;
(Curtius § 348)], πατρόι, -τρΐ, -τίρα, voc. πάτ^ρ [for which
the nom. ό πατήρ is five times used, and (anarthrous)
πατήρ in Jn. xvii. 21 Τ Tr AVH, 24 and 25 L Τ Tr WII ;
cf. B. § 129, 5; W. § 29, 2 ; WH. App. p. 158], plur.
πατίρα, πατίρων, πατράσι (Heb. i. 1), πατίρας, 6. [fr. Hom.
down], Sept. for 3St, a father; 1. prop., i. q. gener-
ator or male ancestor, and either a. the nearest
ancestor: Mt. ii. 22; iv. 21 sq. ; viii. 21 ; Lk. i. 17; Jn.
iv. 53 ; Acts vii. 14 ; 1 Co. v. 1, etc. ; οί πατίρα της σαρκός,
fathers of the corporeal nature, natural fathers, (opp. to
6 πατήρ των πτκνμάτων), Heb. xii. 9; plur. of hoth par-
ents, Heb. xi. 23 (not infreq. in prof, auth., cf. Delitzsch
ad loc.) ; or b. a more remote ancestor, the founder
of a race or tribe, progenitor of a people, forefather : so
Abraham is called, Mt. iii. 9 ; Lk. i. 73 ; xvi. 24 ; Jn. viiL
Ίτατηρ
Trarpta
39, 6& ; Acts vii. 2 ; Ro. iv. 1 Rec, 1 7 sq., etc. ; Isaac, Ro.
ix. 10; Jacob, Jn. iv. 12; David, Mk. xi. 10; Lk. i. 32;
plur. fathers i. e. ancestors, forefathers, Mt. xxiii. 30, 32 ;
Lk. vi. 23, 26 ; xi. 47 sq. ; Jn. iv. 20 ; vi. 31 ; Acts iii. 13,
25; 1 Co. X. 1, etc., and often in Grk. writ. fr. Horn,
down; so too Γ(13Χ, 1 Κ. viii. 21 ; Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 5 etc. ; in
the stricter sense of the founders of a race, Jn. vii. 22 ;
Ro. ix. 5 ; xi. 28. o. i. q. one advanced in years, a
senior: 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. 2. metaph. ; a. the origi-
nator and transmitter of anything : πατήρ ■ηιριτομηί, Ro.
iv. 12 ; the author of a family or society of persons ani-
mated by tlie same spirit as himself : so ττ. πάντων τών
πιστεύονταν, Ro. iv. 11, cf. 12, 16, (1 Mace. ii. 54) ; one
who has infused liis own spirit into others, who actuates
and governs their minds, Jn. viii. 38,41 sq. 44 ; the plirase
€K πατρός tikos elvai is used of one who shows himself as
like another in spirit and purpose as though he had in-
herited his nature from him, ibid. 44. b. one who
stands in a father's place, and looks after another in a
paternal way: 1 Co. iv. 15. c. a title of honor [cf.
Sophocles, Lex. s. v.], applied to a. teachers, as those
to whom pupils trace back the knowledge and training
they have received : Mt. xxiii. 9 (of prophets, 2 K.
ii. 12; vi. 21). β. the members of the Sanhedrin,
whose prerogative it was, by virtue of the wisdom and
experience in which they excelled, to take charge of the
interests of others : Acts vii. 2 ; xxii. 1 ; cf. Gesenius,
Thesaur. i. p. 7*. 3. God is called the Father, a.
των φώτων, [Α. V. of lights i. e.] of the stars, the heaven-
ly luminaries, because he is their creator, upholder, ruler,
Jas. i. 17. b. of all rational and intelligent beings,
whether angels or men, because he is their creator, pre-
server, guardian and protector: Eph. iii. 14 sq. GLT
Tr WH ; τών πνευμάτων, of spiritual beings, Heb. xii. 9 ;
and, for the same reason, of all men (πατήρ τοΰ παντός
ανθρώπων γίνου!, Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 24) : so in the Syn-
optic Gospels, esp. Matthew, Mt. vi. 4, 8, 15; xxiv. 36 ;
Lk. vi. 36 ; xi. 2 ; xii. 30, 32 ; Jn. iv. 21, 23 ; Jas. iii. 9 ;
ό πατήρ ό iv (τοϊε) oipavoU, the Father in heaven, Mt. v.
16, 4.5, 48 , vi. 1, 9 ; vii. 11, 21 ; xviii. 14 ; Mk. xi. 25, 26
RGL; Lk.xi. 13[ί^ούραΐΌθ; cf. Β. § 151, 2 a. ; W. § 66,
6] ; ό πατ. δ ουράνιος, the heavenly Father, Mt. vi. 14, 26,
32; XV. 13. c. o/" C/iris/i'aiis, as tho.se who through
Christ have been exalted to a specially close and inti-
mate relationship with God, and who no longer dread
him as the stern judge of sinners, but revere him as their
reconciled and loving Father. This conception, com-
mon in the N. T. Epistles, shines forth with especial
brightness in Ro. viii. 15 ; Gal. iv. 6 ; in John's use of the
term it seems to include the additional idea of one who
by the power of his Spirit, operative in the gospel, has be-
gotten them anew to a life of lioliness (see γεννάω, 2 d.) :
absol., 2 Co. vi. 18; Eph. ii. 18; 1 .In. ii. 1, 14 (13), 16;
iii. 1 ; θ(ος κ- πατήρ πάντων, of all Christians, Eph. iv. 6 ;
with the addition of a gen. of quality [W. § 34, 3 b.; B.
§ 132, 10], • πατ. τών οίκτψμών, 2 Co. i. 3 ; της 8όξης, Eph.
j. 17; on the phrases ό βεος κ. πατήρ ημών, θ(6ς πατήρ,
etc., see βιός, 3 ρ. 288*. d. the Father of Jesus Christ,
as one whom God has united to himself in the closest
bond of love and intimacy, made acquainted with his
purposes, appointed to explain and carry out among men
the plan of salvation, and (as appears from the teaching
of John) made to share also in his own divine nature ;
he is so called, a. by Jesus himself : simply ό πατήρ
(opp. to ό υίΟ£), Mt. xi. 25-27; Lk. x. 21 sq. ; Jn. v. 20-
23, 26, 36 sq. ; x. 15, 30, etc.; ό πατήρ μου, ^It. xi. 27;
XXV. 34 ; xxvi. 53 ; Lk. x. 22 ; Jn. v. 1 7 ; viii. 1 9, 49 ; x.
18, 32, and often in John's Gospel ; Rev. ii. 28 (27) ; iii.
5, 21 ; with ό iv τοις ουρανοίς added, Mt. vii. 11, 21 ; x.
32sq.; xii. 50 ; xvi. 17; xviii.10,19; ό ουράνιος, Mt. xv.
13 ; ό iπoυpάvιoς, Mt. xviii. 35 Rec. β. by the apostles :
Ro. XV. 6 ; 2 Co. i. 3 ; xi. 31 ; Eph. i. 3 ; iii. 14 Rec. ; Col.
i. 3; Heb. i. 5 ; 1 Pet. i. 3; Rev. i. 6. See [Tholuck
(Bergrede Christi) on Mt. vi. 9 ; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d.
N. T., Index s. v. Vater; C. Wittichen, Die Idee Gottes
als d. Vaters, (Gbttingen, 1865); Westcott, Epp. of St.
John, pp. 27-34, and] below in υίός and τίκνον.
Πάτμος, -ου, ή, Patmos, a small and rocky island in the»
.S^gean Sea, reckoned as one of the Sporades (Thuc. 3,
33 ; Strab. 10 p. 488 ; Plin. h. n. 4, 23) ; now called Patmo
or [chiefly "in the middle ages" (Howson)] Palmosa and
havinc from four to five thousand Christian inhabitants
(cf. Schubert, Reise in das Morgenland, Th. iii. pp. 425-
443 ; Bleek, Vorless. iib. die Apokalypse, p. 157 ; Kneucker
in Schenkel iv. p. 403 sq. ; [BB. DD. s. v.]). In it John,
tlie author of the Apocalypse, says the revelations were
made to him of the approaching consummation of God'e
kingdom : Rev. i. 9. It has been held by the church,
ever since the time of [Just. Mart. (dial. c. Try ph. § 81
p. 308 a. cf. Euseb. h. e. 4, 18, 8; see Charteris, Canon-
ieity, ch. xxxiv. and note) and] Iren. adv.haer. 5, 30, that
this John is the Apostle ; see Ιωάννης, 2 and 6.*
•π-ατραλωαί (Attic πατραΚοίας, Arstiih., Plat., Dem. p.
732, 14; Aristot., Lcian.), L Τ Tr WH πατρολωαϊ (see
μητραΚώας). -ου, ό, a parricide : 1 Tim. i. 9.*
ιτατριά, -άς, ή, (fr. πατήρ) ; 1. lineage running hack
to some progenitor, ancestry. Hdt. 2, 143 ; 3,75. 2.
a race or tribe, i. e. α group of families, all those who in a
given people lay claim to a common origin : flal αυτιών
(Βαβυλωνίων) πατριαϊ τρύς, Hdt. 1, 200. The Israelites
were distributed into (twelve) m'Dp, φυλαί, tribes, de-
scended from the twelve sons of Jacob; these were
divided into ηίΠ3ψρ, πατριοί, deriving their descent
from the several sons of Jacob's sons; and these in turn
were divided into ΠύΚΠ Π'3, οίκοι, houses (οτ families) ;
cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p'. 193 ; iii. p. 1463; Win. RWB.
s. V. St'amme ; \_Keil, Archaeol. § 140] ; hence f| οίκου
καΐ πατριός Δαυίδ, i. e. belonging not only to the same
'house' (πατριά) as David, but to the very 'family' of
David, descended from David himself, Lk. ii. 4 (αΰται αί
πατρια\ τών νίών Συμ(ών, Ex. vi. 15 ; ό άνηρ αντης Μανασσης
της φυΧής αίτης και της πατριός αυτής, .Judith viii. 2; τών
φυ\ών κατά πάτριας αυτών, Num. i. 16; οίκοι πατριών, Ex.
xii. 3 ; Num. i. 2, and often; add, Joseph, antt. 6, 4, 1 ;
7, 14, 7; 11, 3, 10). 3. family in a wider sense,
i. q. nation, people : Acts iii. 25 (1 Chr. xvi. 28: Ps. xxi.
<^ατριαρ•χτ)<;
496
(xxii.) 28) ; πήσα πάτρια iv oipavoU (i. e. every order of
anaccls) KaicVly^s, Eph. iii. Ιϋ.'
ιτατριάρχηί, -ου, ό, (πατριό and άρχω : Bee ίκατοντάρχης),
a Hellenistic word [\V. 2ϋ], α patriarch, founder of a
tribe, pru//eiiilor: used of David, Acts ii. 29; of the
twelve sons of Jacob, founders of the several tribes of
Israel, Acts vii. 8 sij. ; of Abraham, Ileb. vii. 4 ; of the
same and Isaac and Jacob, 4 Mace. vii. 19; xvi. 25;
used for ηΐ35*Π ΐ/Η\ 1 Clir. xxiv. 31 [but the te.\t here
is uncertain]; for Ώ'ύ2ψ Ίΰ, 1 Chr. xxvii. 22; for
ni'Slin -\ΰ, 2 Chr. xxiii. 20.*
irarpiKOs, -ή, -όν, (πατήρ), paternal, ancestral, i. q. handed
down by or received from one's fathers : Gal. i. 14.
(Thuc, Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept.) [Syn. see πατρώος,
(in.]•
iraTpis, -ίδοί, ή, {πατήρ), one's native country; a.
as in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down, one's father-land, one's
(own) country : Jn. iv. 44 fcf. γάρ, Π. 1] ; i. q. a fi.xed
abode (home [R. V. a country of their own'], opp. to the
land where one παρίπιδι/ίχίΐ), Ileb. xi. 14. b. one's
naliie (own) place i. e. city : Mt. xiii. 54, 57 ; Mk. vi. 1,
4 ; Lk. iv. 23, [24] ; so Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 36 (ίστι St'
μοι Ίίροσόλυμα πατρίς) \ Joseph, antt. 10, 7, 3 ; U, 4, 6 ; φ
πατρ'ί! ή ΆκυΧηΐα ην, Hdian. S, 3, 2 (1 ed. Bekk.).*
Πατρόβα? [al. -βάς, as contr. fr. πατρόβιος; cf. B. D.
s. V. ; Bp. Lshtft. on Philip, p. 176 sq. ; Chandler § 32],
ace. -av [cf. B. 19 (17) sq. ; W. § 8, 1], Palrobas, a cer-
tain Christian : Ro. xvi. 14.*
-ιτατρολωαϊ, see πατραλωας-
•ΐΓατρο.ιταρά-8οτο5, -ov, (πατήρ and τταραΒίδωμι), handed
down from one's fathers or ancestors : 1 Pet. i. 18 [B. 91
(79)]. (Diod. 4, 8; 15, 74; 17, 4; Dion. Hal. antt. 5,
48; Theophil. ad Autol. 2, 34 ; Euseb. h. e. 4, 23, 10;
10,4, 16.)*
irarpuos (poetic and Ionic πατρώΧος), -α, -ov, (πατήρ),
fr. Horn, down, descending from father to son or from
ancestors to their posterity as it were by right of inherit-
ance ; received from the fathers : νόμος. Acts .xxii. 3 (2
Mace. vi. 1 ; Ael. v. h. 6, 10) ; θ(ός. Acts xxiv. 14 (4 Mace,
xii. 19; and often in (jrk. writ. Oeoi πατρ., ZeCs πατρ.
etc.); τα ΐθη τα π. Acts xxviii. 17 (.Justin dial. c. Tr.
c. 63; πατρ. ΐθος, Ael. v.h. 7, 19 var.).*
[Syn. πατρώο $, ττατ piKOs : on the distinction of the
grammarians (see I'hotius, Suidas, Ammouius, etc. s. vv.)
ace. to which irarpwos is used of property descending from
father to son, νατρικόί of persons in friendship or feud,
etc, see Eitendl, Lex. Soph ii. p. 5.30 sq. ; L. and S. s. V.
ττατρφο5 ; Schmidt ch. 154.]
Παύλος, -ου, ό, (a Lat. prop, name, Piiuliis^, Paid.
Two persons of this name are mentioned in the N. T.,
viz. 1. Sergius Paubjs, a Roman propraetor [pro-
consul ; cf. Sepyior, and B. D. s. v. Sergius Paulus], con-
verted to Christ by the agency of the apostle Paul:
Acts xiii. 7. 2. the apostle Paul, whose Hebrew
name was Saul (see Σαοιίλ, 2aCXor). He was born at
Tarsus in Cilicia (Acts ix. 11 ; xxi. 39 ; xxii. 3) of Jew-
ish parents (Phil. iii. 5). His father was a Pharisee
(Acts xxiii. 6) and a Roman citizen ; hence he himself
was a Roman citizen by birth (Acts xxii. 28 ; xvi. 37)
He was endowed with remarkable gifts, both moral and
intellectual. lie learned the trade of a σκηνοποιύς (q. v.).
Brought to Jerusalem in early youth, he was tliorouglily
indoctrinated in the Jewish theology by tlie Pharisee
(Jamaliel (Acts xxii. S; v. 34). At first he attacked
and persecuted the Christians most fiercidy ; at length,
on his way to Damascus, he was suddenly converted to
Christ by a miracle, and became an indefatigable and
undaunted preacher of Christ and the founder of many
Christian churches. And not only by liis unwearied la-
bors did he establish a claim to the undying esteem of
tlie friends of Christianity, but also by the fact, which
appears from his immortal Epistles, that he caught per-
fectly the mind of his heavenly Master and taught most
unequivocally that salvation was designed by God for all
men who repose aliving faith in Jesus Christ, and
that bondage to the Mosaic law is wholly incompatible
with the sjjiritual Uberty of which Christ is the author.
By his zeal and doctrine he drew upon himself the
deadly hatred of the Jews, who at Jerusalem in the year
57 [or 5H ace. to the more common opinion ; yet see the
chronological table in Meyer (or Lange) on Acts ; Farrar,
St. Paul, ii. excurs. x.] brought about his imprisonment;
and as a captive he was carried first to Cajsarea in Pal-
estine, and two years later to Rome, where he suffered
martyrdom (in the year 64). For the number of thos9
daily grows smaller who venture to defend the ecclesi
astical tradition for which Eusebius is responsible (h. e.
2, 22, 2) [but of which traces seem to be found in Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 7 ; can. Murator. (cf. Westcott, Canon,
5th ed. p. 521 sq.)], according to which Paul, released
from this imprisonment, is said to have preached in
Spain and Asia Minor ; and subsequently, imprisoned a
second time, to have been at length put to death at Home
in the year 67 or 68, while Nero was still emperor. [On
this point cf. Meyer on Ro., Introd. § 1 ; Harnack on
Clem. Rom. 1. c. ; Lghtft. ibid. p. 49 sq.; Hollzmann, Die
Pastoralbriefe, Einl. ch. iv. p. 37 sqq.; reff. in Heini-
chen's note on Euseb. h. e. as above ; v. Hofmann, Die
heilige Schrift Neuen Testaments. 5ter Theil p. 4 sijq. ;
Farrar, St. Paul, vol. ii. excurs. viii. ; Schaff, Hist, of
Apostolic Christ. (1882) p. 331 sq.] Paul is mentioned
in the N. T. not only in the Acts and in the Epp. from his
pen, but also in 2 Pet. iii. 15. [For bibliog. reff. respect-
ing his life and its debatable points see the art. Paulus by
Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2 vol. xi. pp. 356-
389.]
παύω: 1 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing, παυσάτω (1 Pet. iii.
10); Mid., pres. παύομαι; impf. ΐπαυόμην; fut. παίσομαι
(see αναπαύω and ίπαναπαύω [and on the forms παήναι etc.
cf. further Hilgenfeld, Hermae Pastor, ed. alt. proleg. p.
xviii. note, also his ed. of the ' Teaching ' 4, 2 note (p. 9 7)]) ;
pf. πίπαυμαι ; 1 aor. ίπαυσάμην ; f r. Horn, down ; to make
to cease or desist : τ\ or τίνα από τίνος, to restrain [A. V.
refrain'] a thing or a person from something, 1 Pet. iii. 10,
fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14 ; cf. W. § 30, 6 ; [(cf. 326
(305)) ; B. § 132, 5]. Mid. Sept. for Snn, n'73, n3W,
Πάφοι;
497
ΐΓ€ίθα
otc. to cease, leave off, [cf. W. 253 (238)] : Lk. viii. 24 ;
Acts XX. 1 ; 1 Co. xiii. 8 ; the action or state desisted
from is indicated by the addition of a pres. ptcp. (cf.
Matthiae § 551 d. ; Passow s. v. II. 3 ; [L. and S. I. 4] ;
W. §45,4; [B. § 144, 15]): ϊπαίσατο'ΚαΚων, Lk. V. 4 (Gen.
xviii. 33 ; Num. xvi. 31 ; Deut. xx. 9) ; add, Acts v. 42 ;
vi. 13; xiii. 10; xx. 31 ; xxi. 32; Eph. i. 16; Col. i. 9;
lleb. X. 2; the ptcp. is wanting, as being evident fr. tlie
context, Lk. xi. 1. Pass. [cf. W. § 39, 3 and N. 3] πίπαν
ται αμαρτίας, hath got release [A. V. hath cedfed] from sin,
i. e. is no longer stirred by its incitements and seduc-
tions, 1 Pet. iv. 1 ; cf. Ki/pke, Observv. ad loc, and W.
0. s.; [B. § 132, 5 ; but AV^H txt. άμαρτίαΐΐ, dat., unto sins.
CoMP. : ava-, ίπ-ανα-, συν-ανα- (-μαι), κατά- παύω].*
Πάφο; [perh. fr. r. meaning ' to cozen ' ; cf. Pape, Ei-
gennamen, s. v.], -ου, ή, Paphos [now Βαβα"], a maritime
city on the island of Cyprus, with a harbor. It was the
residence of the Roman proconsul. "Old Paphos" [now
KukUa'], formerly noted for the worship and shrine of
Venus [Aphrodite], lay some 7 miles or more S. E. of it
(Mela 2, 7; Plin. h. n. 5, 31. 35 ; Tac. hist. 2, 2) : Acts
xiii. 6, 13. \_Lewin, St. Paul, i. 120 sqq.] *
Ίταχννω: 1 aor. pass, ίπαχΰνθην; (fr. τταχϋς [thick,
etout] ; cf. βραδύνω ; ταχύνω) ; to make thick; to viake fat,
fatten: τα σώματα. Plat. Gorg. p. 518 c. ; βοϋν, de rep. p.
343 b.; "ιππον, Xen. oec. 12, 20. Aletaph. to make stupid
(Jo render the soul dull or callous) : τας \Ι/υχάς, Plut. mor. p.
995 d. [i. e. de esu earn. 1, 6, 3] ; vovv, Philostr. vit. ApoU.
1, 8; παχ^Ϊ! Tas Siavoias, Ildian. 2, 9, 15 [11 ed. Bekk.];
την didvoiav, Ael. V. h. 13, 15 (hat. piny ue ingenium) [cf.
W. 18]; (παχύνθη ή καρ8ία (Vulg. incrassatum est cor
[A. V. their heart is waxed gross']) : Mt. xiii. 15 ; Acts
xxviii. 27, after Is. vi. 10 (for aS JOiyn).*
ΐΓί8η, -ijf, ή, (fr. n-ifa the foot, instep), a fetter, shackle
for the feet: Mk. v. 4; Lk. viii. 29. (From Horn, down ;
Sept.) *
inSivos, -ή, -όυ, (jrfSiox [a plain], neSov [the ground]),
level, plain : Lk. vi. 1 7. (Xen., Polyb., Plut., Dio Cass.,
al. ; Sept.) *
irc^evcii; (πιζύς, q. v.) ; to travel on font (not on horse-
back or in a carriage), or (if opp. to going by sea) by
land: Acts xx. 13. (Xen., Isocr., Polyb., Strab., al.) *
■n-i^g (dat. fem. fr. Trefot, q. v. ; cf. Matthiae § 400), on
foot or (if opp. to going by sea) hij land: Mt. xiv. 13
R G Tr L txt. WII t.\t. ; Mk. vi. 33. (Hdt., Thuc, Xen.,
Dem., al.) *
ΐΓίζόϊ, -ή -όν, [we'fa; see π/δτ;], fr. Horn, down; 1.
on foot (as opp. to riding). 2. bi/ land (as opp. to
going by sea): ήκολούθησαν ττίζοί, Mt. xiv. 13 Τ L mrg.
WH mrg. (so cod. Sin. also) for R G wffi,, [cf. W. § 54,
2; B. § 123, 9]. (Sept. for 'Sjt and Sji3.)•
ΐΓίίθαρχί'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ptcp. πειθάρχησα! ; (ηίίβαρχοί;
and this fr. πιίθημαι and άρχη) ; to oliey (a ruler or a
superior) : θιω. Acts v. 29, 32 ; magistrates, Tit. iii. 1
[al. take it here absol. to be obedient] ; τώ λόγω τη9
ίικαιοσύνης, Polyc. ad Philipp. 9, 1 ; [A. V. to hearken tn]
one advising something, .\cts xxvii. 21. (Soph., Xen.,
Polyb., Diod.. Joseph., Plut., al. ; on the very freq. use
of the verb by Philo see Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. s.
w. p. 43 [esp. p. 108].)*
π(ΐθο5 [WH πιθός; see I, »], -ή, -άν, (fr. irfWa, like
φβίδόϊ fr. φείδομαι [cf.W. 96 (91)]), persuasive : {v παθοίί
\6yoLs, 1 Co. ii. 4 [cf. B. 73]. Not found elsewhere [W.
24]. The (irks, say πιθανοί ; as πιθανοϊ \iyot, Joseph,
antt. 8, 9, and often in Grk. auth. See Passow s. v.
πιθανός, 1 e. ; [L. and S. ibid. I. 2 ; WH. App. p. 153].*
Πίΐθώ, -ovs, ή, 1. Peilho, prop, name of a goddess,
lit. Persuasion ; Lat. Suada or Suadela. 2. per-
suasive power, persuasion : 1 Co. ii. 4 fv π£«5οϊ — ace. to
certain inferior authorities. [On the word, see Miiller's
note on Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 21, 3. (Hes., Hdt., al.)] *
■mlQat [(fr. r. meaning 'to bind'; allied w. πΊστκ, fides,
foedus.etc.; C'urtius§327; VaniCek p. 592)]; impf. ijrci-
θον; fut. ΐΓίΐ'σω; 1 aor. ?π•{ίσα; 2 ρί.πίποιθα; plupf. eVt-
ποΙΘ(ΐν (Lk. xi. 22); Pass, [or Mid., pres. πείθομαι; impf.
(πειθόμην]; pf. πίπεισμαι; I aor. ('πήσθην; 1 fut. πααΰψ
σομαι (Lk. xvi. 31) ; fr. Horn, down; 1. Active; a.
to persuade, i. e. to induce one by words to believe:
absol. πείσας μετίστησεν ίκανον 5χ\ον, Acts χΐχ. 26 ; τί, to
cause belief in a thing (which one sets forth). Acts xix.
8 RGT [cf. B. 150 (131) n.] (Soph. O. C. 1442); ntfd
w. gen. of the thing, ibid. L Tr WH ; tjco, one. Acts
xviii. 4 ; τινά τι, one of a thing. Acts xxviii. 23 Rec
(Hdt. 1, 11)3 ; Plat. apol. p. 37 a., and elsewhere ; [cf. B.
U.S.]) ; τιι/ά περί Tivos, concerning a thing, ibid. G LT
Tr WH. b. as in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down, w. an
ace. of a pers., to make friends of, win one's favor, gain
one's good-will. Acts xii. 20 ; or to seek to win one, strive
to please one, 2 Co. v. 11 ; Gal. i. 10; to conciliate by per-
suasion, Mt. xxviii. 14 [here Τ WH om. Tr br. αυτό»];
Acts xiv. 19 ; i. q. /o tranquillize [A. V. assure], τας καρ•
δι'αί ημών, 1 Jn. iii. 1 9. c. to persuade unto i. e. move
or induce one b// persuasion to do something : τικά foil, by
an inf. [B. § 139, 46], Acts xiii. 43 ; xxvi. 28, (Xen. an.
1,3,19; Polyb. 4, C4, 2 ; Diod.11,15; 1 2, 39 ; Joseph.
antt. 8, 10, 3); τινά foil, by ίνα [cf. W. 338 (317); B.
§ 139, 46], Mt. xxvii. 20 [Plut. apoph. Alex. 21]. 2.
Passive and Middle [cf. W. 253 (238)]; a. to be
persuaded, to suffer one's self to be persuaded ; to be in-
duced to believe: absol., Lk. xvi. 31; Acts xvii. 4; to
have faith, Heb. xi. 13 Rec; tiki, in a thing. Acts xxviii.
24 ; to believe, sc. ότι, Heb. xiii. 18 LTTrAVlI. πίπει-
σμαΐ τι [on the neut. ace. cf. B. § 131, 10] περί τίκοί
(gen. of pers.), to be persuaded (of) a thing concerning a
person, Heb. vi. 9 [A. V. we are persuaded better thitigs
of you, etc.] ; πεπεισμένος ειμί, to have persuaded one's
self, and πείθομαι, to believe, [cf. Eng. to be persuaded],
foil, by ace. w. inf., Lk. xx. 6 ; Acts xxvi. 26 ; πεπεισμαι
ΟΤΙ, Ro. viii. 38 ; 2 Tim. i. 5, 1 2 ; with εν κνρίω added (see
έν, I. 6 b.), Ro. xiv. 14 ; περί τίνος ότι, Ro. .\v. 14. b.
to listen to, obey, yield to, comply with : τινί, one, Acts v.
36 sq. 39 (40) ; xxiii. 21 ; xxvii. 11 ; Ro. ii. 8 ; Gal. iii. 1
Rec; V. 7; Heb. xiii. 17; Jas. iii. 3. 3. 2 pf. irt•
ποιθα (Sept. mostly for Πί33, also for Π3Π, \j.'d} Niphal
of the unused ]ϊ.]ψ), intrans. to trust, have confidence, be
confident : foil, by ace. w. inf., Ro. ii. 19 ; by Srt, Heb.
ίΤείλατο?
498
ττειρασμος
xiii. 18 Rec. ; by 5rt with a preparatory αϋτο τοϋτο [W.
§ 2.'t, 5], Phil. i. () ; τοϋτο wfwoitos ο'δα Srt, ibid. '25 ; πί-
νοίθα w. a dat. of the pers. or thti tiling in wliioli the confi-
dence reposes (so in class. Grk. [on its constr. in the N. T.
see B. § 133, 5 ; W. 214 (201) ; § 33, d.]) : Phil. i. 14 ;
Philem. 21, (2 K. .wiii. 20 ; Prov. xiv. 16 ; .xxviii. 26 ; Is.
xxviii. 17; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 24; Sap. xiv. 29) ; {αντω
foil, by an inf. 2 Co. x. 7 ; ev Tim, to trust in, put confi-
dence in a pers. or thing [cf. B. u. s.], Phil. iii. 3, 4 ; iv
κνρίω foil, by ότι, Phil. ii. 24 ; tVi τιι/ι, Mt. xxvii. 43 L
txt. WH nirg. ; Mk. x. 24 [where Τ \VH om. Tr mrg. br.
the cl.] ; Lk. xi. 22 ; xviii. 9 ; 2 Co. i. 9 ; Heb. ii. 13, (and
very often in Sept., as Deut. xxviii. 52 ; 2 Chr. xiv. 1 1 ;
Ps.ii. 13; Prov. iii. 5 ; Is. viii. 17; xxxi. 1); eVi rtra, Mt.
xxvii. 43 where L txt. WH mrg. tVi w. dat. (Is. xxxvi.
5 ; Ilab. ii. 18 ; 2 Chr. xvi. 7 sq., etc.) ; tni rtra foil, by
Sri, 2 Co. ii. 3 ; 2 Th. iii. 4 ; tis τίνα foil, by on. Gal. v.
10. [COMP. : άνα-νύθω.Ι*
Π<ιλάτοΐ, see Πιλάτ-οί [and cf. ft, t].
Treivaw, -ώ, inf. nfiuav (Phil. iv. 12) ; fut. ττίΐνάσω (Lk.
vi. 25; Rev. vii. 16); 1 aor. indvaaa, — for the earlier
forms πανην, πιινήσω, ίπιίνησα ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 61
and 204 ; W. § 13, 3 b. ; [B. 37 (32) ; 44 (38)]; see also
&ιψάω ; (fr. π(Ίνα hunger ; [see ■πίνηί'\) ; fr. Horn, down ;
Sept. for Si'"! ; to hunger, be hunijrij; a. prop.:
Mt. iv. 2 ; xii.'l, 3 ; xxi. 18 ; xxv. 35, 37, 42, 44 ; Mk. ii.
25 ; .xi. 12; Lk. iv. 2; vi. 3, 25 ; i. q. to suffer want, Ro.
xii. 20; 1 Co. xi. 21, 34 ; to be needy, Lk. i. 53 ; vi. 21 ;
Phil. iv. 12 ; in this same sense it is joined with 8ιψαν,
1 Co. iv. 1 1 ; in figurative disc, oi ncivau κ. οί διψάν is
used to describe the condition of one who is in need of
nothing requisite for his real (spiritual) life and salva-
tion, Jn. vi. 35; Rev. vii. 16. b. metaph. to crace
ardently, to seek luith eager desire : w. ace. of the thing,
την 8ικαιοσΰνην, Mt. v. 6 (in the better Grk. auth. w. a
gen., as χρημάτων, Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 39 ; συμμάχων, 7, 5, 50 ;
(■παίνον, oec. 13, 9 ; cf. W. § 30, 10, b. fin. ; [B. § 131, 4] ;
Kuinoel on Mt. v. G, and see διψ-άω, 2).*
ιτίίρα, -as, η, (πίΐ/ιάω), fr. Aeschyl. down, a trial, experi-
ment, attempt : πίΐ/^αν \αμβάΜΐν tivos, i. q. to attempt a
thing, to male trial of a thing or a person, (a phrase com-
mon in prof. auth. ; cf. Xen. mem. 1,4, 18; Cyr.3,3,38;
see other exx. in Sturz, Lex. Xenoph. iii. p. 488 ; Plat.
Protag. p. 342 a. ; Gorg. p. 448 a. ; Joseph, antt. 8, 6, 5 ;
Ael. V. h. 12, 22; often in Polyb., cf. Schweighauser, Lex.
Polyb. p. 460 ; Sept. Deut. xxviii. 56 ; [other exx. in
Bleck on Heb. 1. e. ; Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 146]),
βάΚάπση!, to try ^vhether the sea can be crossed dry-shod
like the land, Ileb. xi. 29 ; to have trial of a thing, i. e.
to experience, learn to know by experience, μαστί-γων, Heb.
xi. 36 (often in Polyb. ; r^s npovolas, Joseph, antt. 2,
5, 1).•
■π-ίΐράξω (a form found several times in Horn, and ApoU.
Rhod. and later prose, for πιψάω [which see in Veitch]
more com. in the other Grk. writ.) ; impf. ϊπίίραζον ; 1
aor. ίΤΓίίρασα; Pass., pres. πίφή^ομαι ; 1 aor. ίπίΐρίίσ^ΐ)^;
pf. ptcp. π(π(ΐρασμίνοί (Heb. iv. 15; see παράω, 1); 1
^r. mid. 2 pers. sing, ίπιφάσω (Rev. ii. 2 Rec.) ; Sept.
for nD3 ; to try, i. e. 1. to try whether a thing can
be done ; to attempt, endeavor : with an inf.. Acts ix. 26
L Ϊ TrWH ; xvi. 7; xxiv. 6. 2. to try, make trial
of, test : τινά, for the purjjose of ascertaining his quality,
or what he thinks, or how he will behave himself ; a.
in a good sense : Mt. xxii. 35 [al. refer this to b.] ; Jn.
vi. 6 ; [2 Co. xiii. 5] ; Rev. ii. 2. b. in a bad sense:
to test one maliciously, craftily to put to the proof his
feelings or judgment, Mt. xvi. 1 ; xix. 3 ; xxii. 18, 35 ; Mk.
viii. 11; x. 2; xii. 15; Lk. xi. 16; xx. 23 (where G Τ WII
Tr txt. om. Tr mrg. br. the words ri μ( π(ΐράζ(τ() ; Jn.
viii. 6. c. to try or test one's faith, virtue, charac-
ter, by enticement to sin ; hence ace. to the context i. q.
to solicit to sin, to tempt : Jas. i. 13 sq. ; Gal. vi. 1 ; Rev.
ii. 10; of the temptations of the devil, Mt.iv. 1,3; Mk.
i. 13 ; Lk. iv. 2; 1 Co. vii. 5 ; 1 Th. iii. 5 ; hence, ό πκρά-
ζων, subst., Vulg. tentator, etc., the tempter : Mt. iv. 3 ; 1 Th.
iii. 5. d. After the O. T. usage a. of God;
to inflict evils upon one in order to prove his character
and the steadfastness of his faith : 1 Co. x. 13; Heb. ii. 18;
iv. 15 [see παράω]; xi. 17, 37 [where see WH. App.] ;
Rev. iii. 10, (Gen. xxii. 1 ; Ex. xx. 20 ; Deut. viii. 2 ; Sap.
iii. 5; xi. 10(9); Judith viii. 25 sq.). β. Men are
said πιιράζ^ιν το» Ofov, — by exhibitions of distrust, as
though they Λvished to try whether he is not justly dis-
trusted ; by impious or wicked conduct to test God's
justice and patience, and to challenge him, as it were,
to give proof of his perfections : Acts xv. 10 ; Heb. iii. 9
RG, (E.\. xvii. 2, 7; Num. xiv. 22; Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.)
41, 56; cv. (cvi.) 14, etc.; cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdb. on Sap.
p. 49) ; sc. τον Χριστοί/ [L Τ Tr txt. WH τ. κΰριον^, 1 Co.
X. 9 [but L mrg. Τ λ\ΤΙ mrg. ΐξιπίίρασαν^ ; το ττνίΰμα
κυρίου. Acts v. 9 ; absol. πίΐράζ(ΐν iv δοκιμπσι'α (see δοκιμα-
σία), I leb. iii. 9 L Τ Tr WH. [On πfipάζω (as compared
with δοκιμάζω), see Trench § Ixxiv.; cf. Cremer s. v.
CoMi". : e'/i-TTfipafw.] *
πειρασμός, -οϋ, ό, (πειράζω, q. v.), Sept. for HBD, an ex-
periment, attempt, trial, proving; (Vulg. tentatio); a.
univ. trial, proving : Sir. xxvii. 5, 7 ; τον παρασμον υμών
iv Tji σαρκί μου, the trial made of you by my bodily con-
dition, since this condition served to test the love of the
Galatians towards Paul, Gal. iv. 14 L Τ TrWH [cf. b.
below, and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. b. spec, the trial
of man's fidelity, integrity, virtue, constancy, etc. : 1 Pet.
iv. 12 ; also an enticement to sin, temptation, whether aris-
ing from the desires or from outward circumstances,
Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. x. 13; νπομίνΐίν π(φασμόν,•ΐ3^.\. 12;
an internal temptation to sin, 1 Tim. vi. 9 ; of the tem])-
tation by which the devil sought to divert Jesus the
Messiah from his divine errand, Lk. iv. 13 ; of a condi-
tion of things, or a mental state, by which we are enticed
to sin, or to a lapse from faith and holiness: in the
phrases (Ισφίρίΐν τινά els π«ρ•, ^It. vi. 13 ; Lk. .xi. 4 ; ίΐσ-
(ρχισθαι fit π., Mt. xxvi. 41 ; Mk. xiv. 38 [here Τ WII
(ρχ-Ί ; Lk. xxii. 40, 46 ; adversity, affliction, trouble, [cf.
our trial'], sent by God and serving to test or prove one's
faith, holiness, character : ])lur., Lk. xxii. 28 ; Acts xx.
1 9 ; Jas. i. 2 ; 1 Pet. i. 6 ; τον πίΐρ. μου τον iv Tg σαρκί μον.
ττειραω
499
Trevi??
vuy temptation arising from my bodily infirmity, Gal. iv.
t4 Rec. [but see a. above] ; ωμα τοϋ πειρασμού, Rev. iii.
10; cK rr. ρΰ^σθαι, 2 Pet. ii. 9, (Deut. vii. 19; xxix. 3;
Sir. ii. 1 ; vi. 7 ; .xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 1 ; 1 Mace. ii. 52). c.
' tp-mplalion ' (i. e. Iriat) of God by men, i. e. rebellion
against God, by which his ρολνβΓ and justice are, as it
were, put to the proof and cliallenged to show them-
selves : Heb. iii. 8 (Deut. vi. IG ; ix. 22 ; Ps. xciv. (xcv.)
8). Of. F-ied. B. Koeater, Die bibl. Lelire von der Ver-
Buchiing. Gothii, 1859. (The word has not yet been
found in prof. auth. exc. Diosc. praef. 1 : rohs tin παθών
jr. experiments made on diseases.) *
ΐΓίΐράω : impf. mid. 3 pers. (sing, and plur), ίττίΐράτο,
infipiivTO ; pf. pass. ptcp. πιπ^φαμΐνο! (see below) ; com.
in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; lo Iry ; i. e. 1. to make
a trial, to attempt, [A. V. to assay'], foil, by an infin. ;
often so fr. Hom. down ; also so in the mid. in Acts ix. 26
R G; xxvi. 21, (Xen. symp. 4, 7 ; Cyr. 1, 4, 5, etc.; often
in Polyb.; Ael v. h. 1,34; 2Macc. ii. 23; 3 Mace. i. 25;
4 Mace. xii. 2, etc.); hence πιπ^ιραμίνοί taught by trial, ex-
perienced, lleb. iv. 15 in certain codd. and edd. ([Rec."],
Tdf. formerly) [see below, and cf. τκφάζω, d. a.]. 2.
In post- Hom. usage with the ace. of a pers. to test, make
trial of one, put him to the proof : his mind, sentiments,
temper, Plut. Brut. 10; in particular, to attempt to in-
duce one to commit some (esp. a carnal) crime; cf.
Passow s. V. 3 a. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. IV. 2]. Hence
πιπαραμίνος in Heb. iv. 15 (see 1 above) is explained
by some [cf. W. § 15 Note ad fin], tempted to sin ; but
the Pass, in this sense is not found in Grk. writ. ; see
Delitzsch ad loc*
ΐΓ£ΐσ•μονή, -ης, η, (π(ίθω, q. V. ; like π\η(τμονη), persua-
sion : in an active sense [yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. as
below] and contextually, treacherous or deceptive persua-
sion. Gal. V. 8 [cf. AV. § 68, 1 fin.]. (Found besides in
Ignat. ad Rom. 3, 3 longer recens. ; Justin apol. 1, 53
init. ; [IrenEeus 4, 33, 7] ; Epiph. 30, 21 ; Chrysost. on
1 Th. i. 3; Apollon. Dys. syntax p. 195, 10 [299, 17];
Eustath. on Hom. II. a.', p. 21, 46 vs. 22 ; 99, 45 vs. 442 ;
c'. p. 637, 5 vs. 131 ; and Od. χ', p. 785, 22 vs. 285.)•
■π-ίλαγοϊ, -ovs, το, [by some (e. g. Lob. Pathol. Proleg.
p. 305) connected with πλάξ, i. e. the 'flat' expanse (cf.
Lat. aequor) ; but by Curtius § 367 et al. (cf. Vanicek
p. 515) with πλΐ7σσω, i. e. the ' beating* waves (cf. our
' plash ')], fr. Hom. down ; a. prop, the sea i. e. the
high sea, the deep, (where ships sail; accordingly but a
part of the sea, θάλασσα, Aristot. Probl. sect. 23 quaest.
8 [p. 931', 14 sq.] eV τω \tμ(V^ ο\Ιγη (στ\ν η θαΚασσα, ϊν
hi τώ πfλάyft βηθ(\α. Hence) το ττίλα-γος της θαλάσσης,
aequor maris, [Α. V. the depth of the sea ; cf. Trench
§ xiii.], Mt. xviii. 6 (so too Apollon. Rhod. 2, 608 ; rt-
λαγος alyaias αλός, Eur. Tro. 88; Hesych. πίλαγος• . . .
βυθός, TTAOTof θαλάσσης- Cf. W. 611 (568); [Trench
u. s.]). b. univ. the sea : το πίλ. τό κατά την Κιλικίαν,
Acts .\xvli. 5 (see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. πί-
Xa^vr, 1 ; [L. and S. s. v. I.]).*
ΐΓ€λίκ(ζω : pf. pass. ptcp. 7Τ€π(λ(κισμίνος ; (ηίλ(κνς, an
axe or two-edged hatchet) ; to cui ojf with an axe, to
behead : τινά, Rev. xx. 4. (Polyb., Diod., Strab., Joseph,
antt. 20, 5, 4 ; Plut. Ant. 36 ; [cf. W. 26 (25)].) •
ΐΓ€μΐΓΓθ5, -η, -αν, [it. Horn, down], fifth : Rev. vi. 9 ; ix.
1; .xvi. 10; -xxi. 20.*
τΓίμπω ; fut. πίμψω ; 1 aor. ?πΕμψ•α [on its epistolary
use (for the pres. or the pf.) see W. 278 (261); B. 198
(172): Bd. Lghtft. on Phih ii. (25), 28; Philem. 11];
Pass., pres. πΐμπομαι; 1 aor. ϊπίμφθην (Lk. vii. 10) ; fr.
Hom. down ; Sept. for nSttf; to send : τινά, absol., one
to do something, Wt. xxii. 7 ; Lk. vii. 19 ; xvi. 24 ; Jn. i.
22; vii. 18; xiii. 16, 20; xx. 21 [Treg. mrg. άποστί'λλ.] ;
2 Co. ix. 3; Phil. ii. 23, 28, etc. ; τινά or ηνάς is omitted
where the ptcp. is joined to another finite verb, as ηίμψαι
άπ(Κ(φάλισ( τον Ίωάννην, he sent (a deputy) and be-
headed John, Mt. xiv. 10; add, Acts xix. 31 ; xxiii. 30,
(for other exx. see άποστίλλω, 1 d.) ; in imitation of the
Ilebr. "3 T3 nSi^ (iS.xvi. 20; 2S.xi. 14; xii. 25; 1 K.
ii. 25) we find πΐμψας δια τών μαθητών αΐτοΰ, he sent by
his disciples (unless with Fritz&ilie, and Bornemann,
Schol. in Luc. p. Ixv., one prefer to take πίμψας absol.
and to connect δια τ. μαθ. with the fell, (mev [so Mey.,
but see (7te Aufl. ed. Weiss), Keil, De Wette, al.]), Mt.
xi. 2 L Τ Tr WH, (so άποστ(ίλας διό τοί dyycXoi;, Rev.
i. 1). Teachers who come forward by God's command
and with his authority are said to be (or to have been)
sent by God : as, John the Baptist, Jn. i. 33 ; Jesus, Jn.
iv. 34; V. 23 sq. 30, 37 ; vi. 38-40, 44 ; vii. 16, 28, etc.;
Ro. viii. 3 ; the Holy Spirit, rhetorically personified, Jn.
xiv. 26 ; XV. 26 ; xvi. 7. Ttra, w. dat. of the pers. to whom
one is sent : 1 Co. iv. 1 7 ; Phil. ii. 1 9 ; τινά τιι»ι παρά τίνος
(prop, to send one to one from one's abode [see παρά, I.
a.]), Jn. XV. 26 ; προς τίνα, Lk. iv. 26 ; Jn. xvi. 7 ; Acts x.
33 ; XV. 25 ; xxiii. 30 ; [xxv. 21 R G] ; Eph. vi. 22 ; Phil,
ii. 25 ; Col. iv. 8 ; Tit. iii. 12 ; with the ptcp. λίγων added
(Hebr. "ΐαχ"? r\hv. Gen. xxxviil. 2i; 2 S. xiv. 32, etc.),
said by messenger (Germ. Hess sagen), Lk. vii. 6, 19;
τινά eh w. an ace. of place, !Mt. ii. 8 ; Lk. xv. 1 5 ; xvi. 2 7 ;
Acts X. 5 ; the end, for which one is sent is indicated —
by the prep. (Ις, Eph. vi. 22 ; Col. iv. 8 ; 1 Pet. ii. 14 ;
by an infin., Jn. i. 33 ; 1 Co. xvi. 3; Rev. xxii. 16. Of
thin" s, τί Tiw, a. to bid a thing to be carried to
one: Rev. xi. 10; with ek and an ace. of place added,
Rev. i. 1 1 ; ds w. an ace. indicating the purpose. Acts xi.
29; Phil.iv.l6[hereLchm.br.eir,cf.B.329(283)]. b.
to send (thrust or insert) a thing into another : Rev. xiv.
15, 18, (Ael. hist. an. 12,5); τινιτίίίί tow. an inf., 2 Th-
ii. 11. [CoMP. : ava-, tV, μ(τα-, προ-, συμ- πϊμπω.]
ISyn. : π € μπω, αποστέλλω: πί^ιτω is the general term
(liiffering from Ίημι in directing attention not to the exit
but to the advent); it may even imply accompauimeut
(.as when the sender is God). αποστ4\\ω includes a refer-
ence to equipment, and suggi-!>ts official or authoritative send-
ing. Cf. Schmidt ch. 104; Westcott on Ju. xx. 21, 'Addi-
tional Note'; also 'Additional Note' ou 1 Jn. iii. 5.)
τΓί'νηϊ, -ητος, 6, (πίνομαι to work for one's living; the
Lat. penuria and Grk. πανάω are akin to it [cf. A'anicek
p. 1164]; hence πίνης i. q. ίκ πόνον κα\ ϊν(ρ•γ(ϊας το ζη*
(χων, Etym. Magn.), poor: 2 Co. ix. 9. (From Soph, and
Hdt. down ; Sept. for p'3K, "Ji^, S^., U"^, etc.) "
revd'
epc
500
Π,
ερΎαμος
ISrN.irev»)!, τταχό$: "τί'η)$ occurs but once in the N.T.,
and then in a quotation fr. the Old, wliile πταχό! occurs
between thirty and forty times. . . . Tlie irtVTjs may be so poor
that he earns his bread by daily labor; the irTaixds that he
only obtains his living by begging." Trench § xxxvi. ; cf.
Schmidt ch. 85, 4 ; ch. 186.]
irtvOcpd, Ss, η, (fem. of fffvflfpos, q. v.), α molher-in-iaw,
a wife's molhei•: Mt. viii. 14; x. 35; Mk. i. :ίΟ ; Lk. iv.
38 ; xii. 53. (Dem., I'lut., Lcian., al. ; Sept. for ηίΟΠ•) *
■ir(v6(pa%,-ov,o,afalher-in-laip,!i wife's father: .In. xviii.
13. (Horn., Soph., Eurip., Plut., al. ; Sept. [for on,
ion].)•
■πΐνβίω, -ώ ; fut. πίνθήσω: 1 aor. ϊπίνθησα; (πίνβοί) ;
fr. Horn, down ; Sept. chielly for ^DX ; lo mourn ; a.
intrans. : Mt. v. 4 (•Ί ) : ix. 15 ; I Co. v. 2 ; πινθι^ν <■ κΧηίαν,
Mk. xvi. 10 : Lk. vi. 25 ; Jas. iv. 9 ; Rev. xviii. 15, 19; «πί
Tiw, over one, Rev. xviii. II R G L (Is. Ixvi. 10), (πί
TtM, ibid. TTrWII (2 S. xiii. 37; 2 Chr. xxxv. 24,
etc.). b. trans. /o mourn /or, /ameni, one: 2 Co. xii.
21 [cf. W. 635 sq. (590); B. § 131,4. Syn. see θρηνίω,
fin.]•
irtvflos, -our, TO, (πίνθω [(?) ; akin, rather, to iro^oc, πίνο-
μαι (νί.π(νης) ; see Curtius p. 53; Vanicek p. 1105]), fr.
Horn, down, Sept. for ^iX, mourning : Jas. iv. 9 ; Rev.
xviii. 7 sq. ; xxi. 4.*
irtvixpos, -a, -ov, (fr. πίνομαι, see πίνης), needy, poor :
Lk. x.xi. 2. (Occasionally in Grk. auth. fr. Horn. Od. 3,
348 down ; for "J^» in Ex. xxii. 25 ; for Si in Prov. xxix.
irevTOKis, adv.,^!>e times: 2 Co. xi. 24. [From Find.,
Aeschyl., down.] *
ΐΓΕντακκΓ-χΙλιοι. -αϊ, -σ, five times a thousand, βυε thou-
sand: Mt. xiv. 21; xvi. 9; Mk. vi. 44 ; viii. 19; Lk. ix.
14 ; Jn. vi. 10. [Hdt., Plat., al.]•
ΐΓ6ντακόσ•ιοι,-αι, -a, fice hundred: Lk. vii. 41 ; I Co. -xv.
6. [From Horn, (-τηκ-) down.] •
ire'vTt, oi, αϊ, τά, βνε : Mt. xiv. 1 7, and often. [From
Ilom. down.]
irevTc-Kcu-StKaTos, -i;, -ov, thefifieenth : Lk. iii. 1. [Diod.,
Plut., al.]•
■ΐΓ€ντήκονΓα, oi. al, τά, ./?/?.'/ : Lk. vii. 4 1 ; xvi. 6 ; Jn. viii.
57; xxi. 11 [RG η-ίπ-τ^κοι/τατριών (as one word)]; Acts
xiii. 20; ava π(ντήκ. hij fflie.i [see άνά, 2], Mk. vi. 40
[here L Τ Tr WII κατά π. ; see κατά, II. 3 a. y.] ; Lk. ix.
14. [From Ilom. down.]*
TTit^Koo-H), -rjs, ή, (sc. ημΐρα \ fem. of netmjKOcrros fifti-
eth), [fr. Plat, down.], Pentecost (prop, the fiftieth day
after the Passover, Tob. ii. 1 ; 2 Mace. xii. 32; [Philo de
septen. § 21 ; de decal. § 30; cf. W. 26]), the second of
the three great Jewish festivals ; celebrated at Jerusa-
lem yearly, the seventh week after the Passover, in
grateful recognition of the completed harvest (Ex.
xxiii. 16 ; Lev. xxiii. 15 sq. ; Deut. xvi. 9) : Acts ii. 1 ;
XX. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 8, (Joseph, antt. 3, 10, 6; [14, 13,
4 ; etc.]). [BB. DD. (esp. G'msburg in Alex.'s Kitto)
s. v. Pentecost; Hamburger, Real-Encvcl. i. s. v. Wochen-
fest ; Edersheim, The Temple, ch. xiii.] *
•ΐΓϊτΓθ(βη<ηϊ, -ίωί, η, (πιίβω, 2 pf. πίποιθα). trust, confi-
dence [R. v.], reliance : 2 Co. i. 15 ; iii. 4 ; x. 2 ; Eph. liL
1 2 ; fit Tiva, 2 Co. viii. 22 ; ίν tiw, Phil. iii. 4. (I'hilo de
nobilit. § 7 ; Joseph, antt. 1,3, 1 ; 3, 2, 2 ; 10, 1, 4 ; [11,
7, 1 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 2, 3]; Zosim., Sext. Emp., al. ;
Sept. once for !1ΠΒ3, 2 Κ. xviii. 19.) The word is con-
demned by the Atticists ; cf. Loli. ad Phryn. p. 2!i5.•
ΐΓί'ρ, an enclitic particle, akin to the pre]), itepi [Hcrm.
de part, t'v, p. 6; Curtius §359; cf. Lob. Pathol. Elcmcn-
ta, i. 290 ; al. (connect it directly with πίμαν, etc., and)
give ' throughly * as its fundamental meaning ; cf.
Baumlein, Partikeln, p. 198], showing that the idea of
the word to which it is annexed must be taken in its
fullest extent ; it corresponds to the Lat. circiter, cunque,
(ierm. ttoch so sehr, immerhin, rvenigslens, ja; [Eng. how•
evi'r much, very much, altogether, indeed']•, cf. Hermann
ad Vig. p. 79 1 , Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 722 sqq. ; [Donald-
son, New Crat. § 1 78 fin.]. In the N. T. it is affixed to
the pron. of and to sundry particles, see Stantp, (άνπ€ρ,
(irttp, indTTCp, (η(ΐ&ήπ(ρ, ήπ(ρ, καθάττιρ, καϊπιρ, όσπ(ρ,
&σπ€ρ. [(From Horn, down.)]
7cpaiTcpci>. (fr. ncpa'iTcpoi, com par. of ttipa), adv., fr.
Aeschyl. Λονιη, further, l>ei/ond, besides: Acts xix. 39 L
Tr WII. for KGirepi ireprnv. With tliis compare oiSiv
ζητήσ(τ( 7τ(ραιτ<ρω, Plat. Phaedo c. 56 fin. p. 107 b.•
irt'pav, Ionic and Epic ττϊρην, adv., fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for 15>' ; bei/ond, on the other side ; a. το
nfpav, the region beyond, the opposite shore: Mt. viii.
18, 28; xiv. 22; xvi. 5; Mk. iv. 35 ; v. 21 ; vi. 45; viii.
13. b. joined (like a prep.) with a gen. [W. § 54,
6] : nipav r^s θαΚ. Jn. vi. 22, 25 ; ntpav τον Ιορδανού, Mt.
iv. 15; xi.\.l; [Mk. x. iLTTrWH]; Jn.i.28; iii. 26 ;
with verbs of going it marks direction towards a place
[over, beyond], Jn. vi. 1, 1 7 ; x. 40 ; xviii. 1 ; of the place
whence, [Mt. iv. 25] ; Mk. iii. 8. το nipav της θα^άσση!,
Mk. V. 1 ; [τοϋ Ίορδάνον, Mk. χ. 1 R G] ; της λίμνης. Lk.
viii. 22, (τοϋ ττοτα^ιοΟ, Xen. an. 3, 5, 2). [See Sophocles,
Lex. s. v.] •
irc'pas, -ατο£, τό, (πίρα beyond), fr. Aeschyl. down, ex-
Iremiti/, bound, end, [see Tf'Xor, 1 a. init.] ; a. of a
portion of space (bouridary, frontier) : ττίρατα τη! yfjs,
[the ends of the earth], i. q. the remotest lands, Mt. xii.
42 ; Lk. xi. 31, (Hom. II. 8, 478 [πίΓραρ]; Thuc. I, «9 ;
Xen. Ages. 9, 4 ; Sept. for I'^ti 'DSN [W. 30]) ; also τΐμ
οίκουμίνης, Ro. X. 18 (Ps. Ixxi. (Ixxii.) 8). b. of a
thing extending through a period of time (termination) :
avriKoyiai, Heb. vi. 16 {των κακών, Aeschyl. Pers. 632;
Jose[)h. b. j. 7, 5, 6, and other exx. in other writ.).*
Πέργαμος [perh. -μον, τό, (the gend. in the N. T. is in-
determinate; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 421 sq.; Pape, Eigen-
namen, s. vv. )], -ου, ή, Pergamus [or Pergamum, (cf.
Curtius §413)], a city of Mysia Major in Asia Minor,
the seat of the dynasties of Attalus and Eumenes, cele-
brated for the temple of Aesculapius, and the invention
[(?) cf. Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 39 sq. ; Bin,
Antikes Buchwesen, ch. ii.] and manufacture of parch-
ment. The river Selinus flowed through it and the
Cetius ran past it (Strab. 13 p. 623 ; Plin. 5, 30 (33) ; 13,
11 (21); Tac. ann. 3, 63). It was the birthplace of the
Hepyq
501
trepi,
physician Galen, and had a great royal library. ^Slod-
ern Berghama. There was a Christian church there :
Rev. i. 11; ii. 12.•
Περγη, -tjs, ή, [cf. the preceding word], Perge or Perga,
a town of Pamphylia, on the river Cestrus about seven
miles (sixty stadia) from the sea. On a hill near the
town was tlie temple of Diana [i. e. Artemis] (Strab. 14
p. 667; Mel. 1, 14; Liv. 38, 37) : Acts .xiii. 13 sq.; .\iv.
25. [BB. DD. ; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 134 sq.] *
irepC, (akin to irepa, ττίραν; [Curtius §359]), prep.,
joined in the N. T. with the gen. and the ace. (in class.
Grk. also with the dat.), and indicating that the person
or thiniT relative to which an act or state is predicated
is as it were encompassed by this act or state ; Lat. cir-
cum, circa; around, about.
I. with the Gexitive it denotes that around which
an act or state revolves ; about, concerning, as touching,
etc., (Lat. de, quod altinet ad, causa w. a gen., propter)
[cf. W. 372 sq. (349)]. a. about, concerning, (Lat.
de ; in later Lat. also circa) : after verbs of speaking,
teaching, writing, etc., see under άυαγγίΧλω, άπαγ-
yf λλω, άποΧογοΰμαι, 'γογγνζω* γράφω. δηΧήω. διαβίβαίον-
μαι, ^tayvωρtζω, διαΧίγομιιι, διδάσκω. διηΎονμαι (Ileb. xi.
32), 8ίηγησις. απόν and ττρούπον, €π€ρωτάω and ίρωτάω,
κατη)^(ω, λαλίω, Χίγω, \ayotf αΐτίω, Χίγγον αΤΓοδι'δωμι, Xoyoy
δίδωμι, μαρτνρίω, μν(ΐα, μνημονεύω. TrpoKorayye λλω, ττρο-
φητ€νω, ντΐομιμνησκω, \μηματίζομαι. ηχο5. φ^μ^. etc. ;
after verbs of hearing, knowing, ascertaining,
inquiring, see under άκοΰω, γινώσκω, ΙττΙσταμαι, ciSov,
«ζίτάζω, ζητίω, (κζηηω, ίπιζητΐω, ζηττ^μα, πννθάνομαι, etc. ;
after verbs of thinkint;, deciding, supposing,
doubting, etc.; see under διαλογίζομαι, ίνθυμίομαι, πί-
•Β€ΐσμαι, πιστίνω, διαπομίω, ΐλ^γχω, etc. b. as re-
.spert-r [A. V. often {as) touching']; o. with verbs,
to indicate that what is expressed by the verb (or verbal
noun) holds so far forth as some person or thing is con-
cerned ; with regard to, in reference to : Acts xxviii. 21 ;
Heb. xi. 20 ; η irtpX σου μνΐία, 2 Tim. i. 3 ; {ζουσίαν c)(€tv,
1 Co. vii. 37; ΐπιταγην ΐχξΐν, ibid. 25; see cWeXXo/xat,
€ντο\η, ΊταρακαΧίω, παραμνθ€ομαι, -ιτρόφασις, €κδίΚ0ί, λαγ-
χάνω to cast lots. β. with the neut. plur. [and sing.]
of the article, τα π(ρί τιι/οί the things concerning a person
OT thing, i. e. wiiat relates to, can be said about, etc. : τα
wepi της βασίΚίίαί ταΰ θ(θΰ. Acts ΐ. 3; viii. 12 [Rec] ;
xix. 8 [here LTrWHom. τά] ; τα -nfpX TJjs όδοΰ. Acts
ixiv. 22 ; with the gen. of a pers. one's affairs, his con-
dition or state : Acts x.xviii. 15; Eph. vi. 22 ; Phil. i. 27;
ii. 19 sq. ; Col. iv. 8 ; in a forensic sense, one's cause or
case. Acts xxiv. 10 ; τα πιρί Ίησοϋ (or τοΰ κυρίου), [ίλβ
(rumors) about .Tesus (as a worker of miracles), Jlk. v.
27 Τ Tr mrg. br. WH] ; the things (necessary to be known
and believed) concerning Jesus, Acts xviii. 25 ; xxiii. 1 1 ;
xxviii. 23 Rec, 31 ; the thinffs that befell .Tesus, his death,
Lk. xxiv. 19 ; the things in the O. T. relative to him, the
prophecies concerning him. ibid. 27; the career, death,
appointed him by God, Lk. xxii. 37 [here Τ Tr WII ri
etc.]. γ. itfpi Tii/of, absol., at the beginning of sen-
tences, concerning, as to: 1 Co. vii. 1 ; viii. 1 ; xvi. 1,12;
but in other places it is more properly taken with the
foil, verb, Alt. xxii. 31 ; xxiv. 36; Mk. xii. 26; 1 Co.
vii. 25 ; viii. 1, 4 ; xii. 1 ; 1 Th. iv. 9 ; v. 1 ; cf. W. 373
(350). c. on account o/; a. of the sub ject-
matter, which at the same time occasions the action
expressed by the verb : so after verbs of accusing, see
f γκαλί'ω, κατηγορία), κρίνω τίνα ιτ(ρί τιι /of, etc. ; after verbs
expressing e motion, see θαυμάζω, άγανακτίω. καυχάομαι,
σ•η\αγχ^νίζομαι, €ν\αμιστ€ω, (νχαριστία, αΐνίω. pt\(i μοι,
μεριμνάω; also after ΐυχομαι, 3 Jn. 2, see πάί, II. 2 b.
3. β. of the cause for (on account of) which a
thing is done, or of that which gave occasion for the
action or occurrence : Mk. i. 44 ; Lk. v. 14 ; Jn. x. 33,
(wfpt τήί βλασφημίας Xa/3erf αίτό». Εν. Nic. C. 4, p. 546
ed. Thilo [p. 221 ed. Tdf.]) ; Acts xv. 2; xix. 23; x.w.
15, IS, 24; Col. ii. 1 [RG]. γ. on account of, i. e.
for, for the benefit or advantage of: Mt. x.xvi. 28; Mk.
xiv. 24 R G ; Lk. iv. 38 ; Jn. xvi. 26 ; xvii. 9, 20 ; Heb,
v. 3 ; xi. 40 ; wfpi and ίπίρ alternate in Eph. vi. 18 sq. [cf.
\\\ 383 (358) n. also § 50, 3 ; B. § 147, 21. 22 ; AVieseler,
Meyer, Bp. Lghtft., Ellic. on Gal. i. 4]. S. irepi is
used of the design or purpose for removing something
or taking it away : jrcpl αμαρτίας, to destroy sin, Ro. viiL
3 ; διδόι^αι «αυτοί/ jrfpt των αμαρτιών, to expiate, atone
for, sins. Gal. i. 4 (where R WH txt. Inip [see as in y.
above, and cf. imtp, I. 6]); also to ofi'er sacrifices, and
simply sacrifices, wfpl αμαρτιών, Heb. v. 3 [R G inrep ; see
u. S.] ; X. 18, 26 : nepl αμαρτιών ίπαβί [άπέΑαΐ'ίΐ'], 1 Pet. iiL
18 ; irfpl αμαρτίας sc. θυσίαι, sacrifices for sin, expia-
tory sacrifices, Heb. x. 6 (fr. Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7 ; cf. Xum.
viii. 8 ; see αμαρτία, 3 ; τά πίρι της άμ. Lev. vi. 25 ; το
jTf pi τ. ά. Lev. xiv. 1 9) ; ιλασμος π(ρι τ. αμαρτιών, 1 Jn.
ii. 2; iv. 10.
Π. with the Accusative (W. 406 (379)) ; a.
of Place; about, around: as, about parts of the body,
Mt. iii. 4 ; [xviii. 6 L Τ Tr WH] ; Mk. i. 6 ; ix. 42 ; Lk.
xvii. 2 ; Rev. xv. 6. about jjlaces : Lk. xiii. 8 ; Acts xxii.
6 ; .Tude 7 ; τα Trfpi τόκ τόπον fKf'ivov, the neighborhood of
that place, Acts xxviii. 7 ; ol nep! w. an ace. of place,
those dwelling about a place or in its vicinity, Mk. iiL
8 [T Tr WH om. L br. o!]. oi nfpi τίνα, those about one
i. e. with him, his companions, associates, friends, etc.,
Mk. iv. 10; Lk. xxii. 49 ; [add, Mk. xvi. WH (rejected)
" Shorter Conclusion "] ; ace. to Grk. idiom oi π(ρΊ το»
Παι'λοκ, Paul and his companions (Germ, die Paulusge-
sellschaf) [cf. W. 40G (379) ; B. § 125, 8], Acts xiii. 13 ;
ace. to a later Grk. usage αί π€ρ\ MapSav denotes Martha
herself, Jn. xi. 19 (although others [e. g. Meyer, Weiss,
Keil, Godet, al.] understand by it Martha and her at-
tendants or domestics ; but L Tr WH read jrpot την (for
Tat π€ρΊ) Μάρθαν) ; cf. Matthiae § 583, 2 ; Bnhdy. p. 263 ;
Kiihner ii. p. 230 sq. ; [W. and B. u. s.]. in phrases the
underlying notion of which is that of revolving
about something: of persons engaged in any occupa-
tion, oi TTfpl τα τοιαύτα ΐργάται [Α. V. the workmen of like
occupation], .Vets xix. 25 ; πιρισπάσθαι, τνρβάζ^σθαι nepi
τι, Lk. χ. 40, 41 [but here L Τ Tr WH txt. θορυβάζη q• v.
(and λΥΗ mrg. om. jripl πολλά)], (ntpX την γίωργίαν γίντ
Trepiayw
502
•ΐΓ€ρΐ€χω
σθαι, - Mace. xii. 1). b. as ίο, in reference to, con-
cerning : so after αδόκιμο;, 2 Tim. iii. 8 ; άστορ^ίΐκ, 1 Tim.
vi. 21 ; 2 Tim. ii. l.S ; vavayuv, 1 Tim. i. 19 ; ροσ£ΐν, 1 Tim.
vi. 4 ; TTfpt πάντα iavroi* ττιιρΐχ^σΒαί τνπον, Tit. ii. 7 ; τα
TTfpi i'fif, tlie state of my affairs, I'liil. ii. 23 ; al -ntpi τα
λοιπά ('πίθυμίαι, i\Ik. iv. 1 1) (αϊ π€μ\ το σώμα ϊπιθνμίαι, Λγ-
istot. rliet. 2, 12, 3; τα irepi ■^υχΙ}ν κ• σώμα ά-γαθά, eth.
Nic. 1,8); cf. AV. §30,3Ν. 5; [Β.§12ό, 9]. ο. of
Time; in a somewliat indefinite specification of time,
about, near : πιρΊ τμίτην Sipav, ΛΙΙ. xx. 8 ; add, 5 sq. 9 ;
xxvii. 4C ; Mk. vi. 4» ; Acts x. [3 L Τ Tr WH], 9 ; xxii. 6.
III. in Composition Trepi in the X. T. signifies 1.
ifi a circuit, round about, all around, as πίριάγω, irfpi-
βαΚΚω, πΐμιηστράπτω, π€ρίκ€ΐμαι, ττερίοικίω, etc., etc. 2.
Ιί'-ίμιηιΙ (because tliat ivliich surrounds a tiling does not
belong to the thing itself but is be^-ond it) : nepUpyot,
ιτίρί€ργάζομαί, ΤΓίριλβιττω, ττ^ριμίνω, ττίριονσιος, ττΐρισσόζ,
πίρισσίύω. 3. tlirour/h [(?) — intensive, rather
(cf. ττιριάπτω, 2)] : ττ(ριπ(ίρω.
irepi -άγω; impf. nepirjyov ; ίν. Ildt. down; 1.
trans. a. to lead around [cf. πιρί, III. 1]. b.
i. <j. to lead about trilh one's self: τινά (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2,
28; Tpf'is πα'ώαί άκολοίβονς, Dem. p. 938, IG), 1 Co. i.\.
5. 2. intrans. to fjo about, u-alk about, (Ceb. tab. c.
6) : absol. Acts xiii. 1 1 ; with an ace. of place (depend-
ing on the prep, in compos., cf. JNIattliiae § 426 ; [B. 144,
(12G) ; AV. § 52, 2 c. ; 432 (402)]), Mt. iv. 23 [R G; (ah
read the dat. with or without tV)] ; ix. 35 ; x.xiii. 15 ;
IVIk. vi. C*
π£ρι-αιρ€ω, -ω : 2 aor. inf. irepifKtiv, [ptcp. plur. 7re/)i-
fkovres ; Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. Treptaipeirai] ; impf. 3
pers. sing, πίρι.ι/ρίίτο ; fr. Ilom. down; Sept. chiefly for
TDri; a. to take aicay tliat wliich surrounds OT en-
velops a thing [cf. Ttepl, III. 1]: το καΚυμμα, jiass., 2 Co.
iii. 16 (πορφίραν, 2 Mace. iv. 38 ; τόι» δακτν\ίον, Gen. xli.
42; Joseph, autt. 19, 2, 3) ; αγκύρας, the anchors from
both sides of the ship, [R. V. casting oJjT], Acts xxvii.
40 ; [2 aor. ptcp., absol., in a nautical sense, to cast loose,
Actsxxviii. 13 WII (al. trepiiKeovTes)']. b. metaph.
to take aicaij altogether or entirely : tos αμαρτίας (with
whicli one is, as it were, enveloped), the guilt of sin, i. e.
to expiate perfectly, Heb. x. 11 ; την ίΚπίδα, pass., Acts
xxvii. 20.*
•ΐΓ£ρΐΗί•ΐΓτω : 1 aor. ptcp. ττίριάψαι ; [f Γ. Pind. down] ;
1. to bind or tie around, to put around, [Trfpi, III. I];
to hang upon, attach to. 2. to kindle afire around
[or thoroughly ; see πίρικρίτττω, TttpiKakiirrta, ττίρκρατης,
TTfpiKviros, etc.] (Phalar. ep. 5, p. 28) : Lk. xxii. 55 Γ WH
Tr txt.•
•π'€ρι-α<ΓτράΐΓτω : 1 aor. 7Γ€ρίηστραψα [R'^'' L• πίρίίστρ.
(see B. 34 scp (30) and Tdf.'s note)], to Jlash around,
shine about, [yrepi. III. 1] : τικά. Acts ix. 3 ; irfpi τίνα, Acts
xxii. 6. ([4 Mace. iv. 10] ; eccl. and Byzant. writ.) *
'π'€ρι-βάλλω : fut. ττίριβαΚω ; 2 aor. π(ρύβαΚην•, pf. pass,
ptcp. π(ριβ(β\ημίνοί ; 2 aor. mid. πίρκβαλόμην ; 2 fut.
mid. πίριβαλοϋμαι ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. chiefly for
T\D2 to cover, cover up ; also for iVsS to clothe, and r\a}f
to veil ; to throw around, to put round ; a woXfi
χάρακα, to surround a city with a bank (palisade), Lk.
xix. 43 ([R G Tr L txt. WII mrg.] ; see παρ(μβάλ\ω,
2). b. of garments, τινά, to clothe one : Mt. xxv. 36,
38, 43 ; τινά τι. Ιο put a thing on one, to clothe one tcith a
thing [B. 149 (130) ; W. § 32, 4 a.] : Lk. xxiii. 11 [here
Τ WII om. L Tr br. ace. of pers.] ; Jn. xL\. 2 ; pass., Mk.
xiv. 51 ; xvi. 5 ; Rev. vii. 9, 13 ; x. I ; xi. 3 ; xii. 1 ; xvii.
4 (where Ree. has dat. of the thing ; [so iv. 4 L WH
txt., but ah eV w. dat. of thing]); xviii. 16; xix. 13;
Mid. to put on or clothe one's self: absol. Rev. iii. 18; w.
ace. of the thing [cf. B. § 135, 2], Mt. vi. 31 ; Acts xii.
8; passively, — in 2 aor., Mt. vi. 29; Lk. xii. 27; in 2
aor. w. ace. of the thing, Rev. iii. 18 ; xix. 8; in 2 fut.
with fv Tivi [B. u. s. ; see (v, I. 5 b. p. 210'], Rev. iii. 5.*
■π-Ερι-βλί-ιτω : impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. π(ρΐ(βλίπ(το ; 1
aor. jitcp. π{ρι/3λΓψ•ά/ίίΐΌΓ; to look around. In the N. T.
only in the mid. (jo look round about one's self) : absol.,
Mk. ix. 8 ; x. 23 ; foU. by an inf. of purpose, Mk. v. 32 ;
τινά, to look round on one (i. e. to look for one's self at
one near by), Mk. iii. 5, 34; Lk. vi. 10; t's τινας. Εν.
Nic. e. 4; TraVa, Jlk. xi. 11. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., al. ;
Sept.) •
irtpi -βίλοιον, -ου, τό, (τκριβάίΚΚω), prop, a covering
thrown around, a wrapper; in the N. T. 1. a man-
tle: Ileb. i. 12 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 27 ; Ezek. xvi. 13; xxvii. 7 ;
Is. lix. 17 ; π^ριβ. βασίΚικόν and πιριβ. ϊκ πορφύρας, Pa-
laeph. 52, 4). 2. a ceil [A.V. a covering] : 1 Co. xi.
15. [(From Eur. down.)]•
mpi-tta : plupf. pass. 3 pers. sing, ji-fpif 8t8f το ; [fr. Hdt.
down] ; to bind aromid, tie over, [cf. nepi, III. 1] : τινά
Tiw, .In. xi. 44. (Sept. Job xii. 18 ; Plut. mor. p. 825 e.
[i. c. praecepta ger. reipub. 82, 21 ; Aristot. h. a. 9, 39
p. 623% 14].) •
ircpi-Sp€'p,u, see ηιριτρίχω.
•π•ίρι-€ργάζομ,αι ; (see πίρί, ΙΠ. 2) ; to bustle about use•
lessly, to busy one's self about trijling, needless, useless mat-
ters, (Sir. iii. 23 ; Hdt. 3, 46; Plat. apol. p. 19b.; al.) :
used apparently of a person officiously inijuisitive about
others' affairs [A. V. to be a busybody], 2 Th. iii. 11, as in
Dem. p. 150, 24 [cf. p. 805, 4 etc.].*
■irtptcpYos, -ov, (πίρι and epyov, see nepi. III. 2), busy
about trijles and neglectful of important matters, esp. busy
about other folks' affairs, a busybody : 1 Tim. v. 13 (often
so in prof. auth. fr. Xen. mem. 1, 3, 1 ; πιρ- κα\ πολνπράγ-
μων, Epict. diss. 3, 1, 21) ; of things: τα ntplepya, imper-
tinent and superfluous, of magic [A. V. curious] arts,
Acts xix. 19 (so Ttepiepyot practising magic, Aristaen.
epp. 2, 18, 2 [cf. Plut. Alex. 2, 5]) ; cf. Kypke, Observv.
and Kuinoel, Com. ad loc*
•π•6ρι-€ρχομ.αι ; 2 aor. π(ριηΚθον\ It. Hdt. down; logo
about: of strollers. Acts xix. 13 ; of wanderers, Heb. xi.
37; of navigators (making a circuit), .\cts xxviii. 13
[here WH nepifKovT€s, see πβριαιρίω, a.] ; Tat otxiac, to
go about from house to house, 1 Tim. v. 13.*
■η-ίρι-ίχω ; 2 aor. πίρύσχον ; fr. Hom. down ; in the
"Ν.Ύ. to surround, encompass; i.e. a. to contain.
of the subject-matter, contents, of a writing (η βίβλοι
Tttpiixfi τάί n-pa|fif. Diod. 2, 1 ; [Joseph, c. Ap. (1, 1);
ΊΓΐρι,ζωννύω
503
ττΐριμενω
1, 8, 2 ; 2, 4, 1 ; 2, 38, 1]), ίπιστοΚην π(ρίίχονσαν τον τύπον
τούτον, a letter οΓ which this is a sample, or a letter
written after this form [cf . τύπος, 3], Acts xxiii. 25 [L Τ Tr
WII ϊχηυσαν (cf. Grimm on 1 Mace, as below)] (τόι» τρό-
πον τούτον, 1 Mace. xv. 2 ; 2 Mace. .xi. 16) ; intrans. [B.
§129, 17 n.; 144(126) n.] : π(ριίχ(ΐ fv {tjj) ypat^fj, it is
contained in (holy) scripture, 1 Pet. ii. 6 KGTTr WH;
absol., π(ρίίχ(ΐ η -γραφή (our runs), foil, by direct disc,
ibid Lchra. ; likewise ό νόμος ύμων ηιριίχιι. Εν. Nicod.
c. 4 ; with adverbs : πιριίχα,ν οΰτως, 2 Mace. ix. 18 ; xi.
22 ; καθώς π^ρύχίΐ βίβλος "Ενωχ, Test. xii. Patr., test.
Levi 10; ά>ς ή παράΒοσις πιριίχ^ι, Euseb. h. e. 3, 1; see
Grimm on 1 Mace. xi. 29. b. i. q. to lake possessioti
of, to seize : τινά, Lk. v. 9 (2 Mace. iv. 16 ; Joseph, b. j. 4,
10, 1).•
ΐΓίρι-ϊωνννω, or -ζώνννμι : Mid., 1 fut. πίριζώσομαι ; 1
aor. inipv. πίρΊζωσαι, ptcp. πιριζωσάμ^νος ; [)f. pass. ptcp.
π(ρί(ζωσμίνος; to gird around [nfpi. III. I]; to fasten
f/arments with a girdle : την οσφύν, to fasten one's cloth-
ing about the loins with a girdle (Jer. i. 17), pass., Lk.
xii. 35. ^lid. to gird one's self : absol., Lk. xii. 37 ; xvii.
8 ; Acts xii. 8 Bee. ; την ΰσφύν ίν άΚηθ^ία, with truth as
a girdle, figuratively i. q. to equip one's self Λv^th knowl-
edge of the truth, Eph. vi. 14 ; with an ace. of the thing
with which one girds himself (often so in Sept., as σάκ-
K.OV, Jer. iv. 8 ; vi. 26 ; Lam. ii. 1 ; στολήν 8όξης, Sir. xlv.
7 ; and in trop. expressions, δυναμιν, (ϋφροσΰνην, 1 S.
ii. 4 ; Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 33 ; [B. § 135, 2J) : προς τοΊς μα-
στο'ις ζώνην, Rev. i. 13; ζώνας πfp^ τα στήθη, Rev. χν. 6.
(Arstph., Polyb., Pans., Plut., al. ; Sept. for Ijn and
ΊϊΧ.) Cf. άυαζϋΐνιηίμί*
irepi-eco-is, -ίωί, ή, (πιριτίθημι), the act of putting around
[nepi, in. 1], (Yu\g. circumdalio, [A.V.wearing])•.πcpιθe-
σιως χρυσίων κόσμοΓ , the adornment consisting of the gold-
en ornaments wont to be placed around the head or the
body, 1 Pet. iii. 3. ([ Arr. 7, 22], Galen, Sext. Empir., al.) •
■7Γ€ρι-ί<Γτημι : 2 Άοτ. π(ρύστην; pf. ptcp. πίρίΕστώί; pres.
mid. impv. 2 pers. sing, πιρΰστασο (on which form see
W. § 14, 1 e.; [B.47 (40), who both call it passive (but
see Veitch p. 340)]) ; 1. in the pres., impf., fut,
1 aor., active, to place around (one). 2. in the perf.,
phipf., 2 aor. act., and the tenses of the mid., to stand
around: Jn. xi. 42; Acts xxv. 7 [in LTTrWH w. an
ace. ; cf. W. § 52, 4, 1 2]. Mid. to turn one's self about sc.
for the purpose of avoiding something,\\ence to avoid, shun,
(Joseph, antt. 4, 6, 12; 10, 10, 4; b. j. 2, 8, 6; Antonin.
3,4; Artem. oneir. 4, 59; Athen. 15 p. 675 e.; Diog.
Laert. 9, 14; Jambl. vit. Pyth. 31 [p. 392 ed. Kiessl.] ;
Sext. Empir. ; joined with φ^ύ-γαν, Joseph, antt. 1, 1, 4 ;
with €κτρίπ(σθαί, Lcian. Hermot. § 80 ; Hesvch. περι-
ιστασο • άπόφ(\τγ(, άνάτριπ^ ; [cf. further, D'Orville's
Cliariton, ed. Reiske, p. 282]; this use of the verb is
censured by Lcian. soloec. 5) : in the N. T. so with an
ace. of the thing [cf. W. 1. c], 2 Tim. ii. 16 ; Tit. iii. 9.•
π(ρι-κάθαρμα, -rof, τό, (π(ρικαθα!ρω, to cleanse on all
sides [πιρί. III. 1]), off-scouring, refuse: plur. τα nepiK.
roO κόσμου [A. V. the filth of the world~\, metaph. the most
abject and despicable men, 1 Co. iv. 13. (Epict. diss. 3,
22, 78; purgamenta urbis, Curt. 8, 5, 8 ; 10, 2, 7; [see
Wetstein on 1 Co. 1. c] ; Sept. once for ^23, the price
of expiation or redemption, Prov. xxi. 18, because the
Grks. used to apply the term καθάρματα to victims sacri-
ficed to make expiation for the people, and even to crim-
inals who were maintained at the public expense, that
on the outbreak of a pestilence or other calamity they
might be offered as sacrifices to make expiation for the
state.) *
ΐΓ€ρι-καθ-£ζω : 1 aor. ptcp. πιρικαθίσας ; 1. in class.
Grk. trans, to bid or 7iiake to sit around, to invest, besiege,
a city, a fortress. 2. intrans. to sit around, be seated
around ; so in Lk. xxii. 55 Lchm. txt.•
irepi -καλνΐΓτω ; 1 aor. ptcp. π(ρικαλύψας ; pf. pass. ptcp.
πιρικίκαΚυμμίνο! ; fr. Hom. down ; to cover all around
\π(ρί. III. 1], to cover up, cover over: to πρόσωπον, Mk.
xiv. 65 ; Lk. xxii. 64 [A. V. blindfold] ; τι χρυσίω, Heb.
ix. 4 (Ex. xxviii. 20).*
u<pC-Kci)iai ; (ττίρί and κ^ΐμαι) ; fr. Hom. down ; 1.
to lie around [cf. π(ρί, III. 1] : ntpi [cf. W. § 52, 4, 12]
Ti, [A. V. were hanged, Mk. ix. 42] ; Lk. xvii. 2 ; ΐχοντα
πίρικίίμίνον ήμ'ιν νίφος, [Α. V. are compassed about tvith
a cloud etc.], Heb. xii. 1. 2. passively [cf. B. 50
(44)], to be compassed with, have round one, [with ace. ;
cf. AV. §32, 5; B. §134, 7]: άλνσιν. Acts x.xviii. 20 (Sc
σμά, 4 Mace. xii. 3); άσθίνααν, infirmity cleaves to me,
Heb. V. 2 {ΐιβριν, Theocr. 23, 14 ; άμαϋρωσιν, νίφος, Clem.
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 6).*
π(ρι-κ€ψαλαία, -ας, ή, (π(ρί and κίφαλή), a helmet : 1 Th.
V. 8; ToO σωτηρίου (fr. Is. lix. 17), i.e. dropping the fig.,
the protection of soul which consists in (the hope of)
salvation, Eph. vi. 1 7. (Polyb. ; Sept. for i'5i3.) *
ΊΓίρι-κρατήϊ, -f Γ, (κράτος), τινός, having full power over a
thing : \_π(ρικ- -/(νίσθαι της σκάφης, to secure]. Acts xxvii.
16. (Sus. 39 cod. Alex. ; eccl. writ.) *
ΐΓίρι-κρΐτΓτω : 2 aor. π(ρΐ(κρυβον (on this form cf. Bttm.
Ausf. Spr. i. p. 400 sq. ; ii. p. 226 ; [ WH. App. p. 1 70 ;
al. make it (in Lk. as below) a late im perfect; cf. B.
40 (35) ; Soph. Lex. s. v. κρύβω ; Veitch s. v. κρύτΓτω]) ;
to conceal on all sides or entirely, to hide : εαυτόν, to keep
one's self at home, Lk. i. 24. (Lcian., Diog. Laert.,
al.)•
τΓίρι-κνκλίω, -ώ : fut. π€ρικυκ\ώσω ; to encircle, compass
about: of a city (besieged), Lk. xix. 43. (Arstph. av.
346 ; Xen. an. 6, 1 (3), 1 1 ; Aristot. h. a. 4, 8 [p. 533', 11] ;
Lcian., al. ; Sept. for 330•) *
π£ρι-λάμπω: 1 slot. π(ρΐ€λαμψα', to shine around : τινά,
Lk. ii. 9; Acts xxvi. 13. (Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.)'
•ΐΓ£ρι-λ€{ΐΓω : pres. pass. ptcp. πep^Kf^πόμfvot (cf. π(ρί,
ΠΙ. 2); to leave oi^er; pass, to remain over, to survive:
1 Th. iv. 15, 17. (Arstph., Plat., Eur., Polyb., Hdian. ;
2 Mace. i. 31.) •
irepC-XuTTOs, -ov, (π(ρΙ and λίτπ;, and so prop, 'encom-
passed with grief ' [cf. πιρί, ΠΙ. 3]), very sad, exceedingly
sorrowful: Mt. xxvi. 38 : Mk. vi. 26 ; xiv. 34 ; Lk. xviii.
23, 24 [where Τ WH om. Tr br. the cl.]. (Ps. xii. (xUi.)
6, 12 ; 1 Esdr. viii. 69 ; Isocr., Aristot., al.) •
ΐΓίρι-μ,ί'νω : (πιρί further [cf. πιρΊ,ΤΐΙ. 2]); to wait for:
ττέρίξ
504
ν€ρΐ7Γοίησί<;
τί, Actsi. 4. (Gen. xlix. 18 ; Sap. viii. 12 ; Arstph., Thuc,
Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
ιτί'ριξ [on the foniuitive or strengthenin•; ξ cf. Lob.
Faralip. p. 131], adv., fr. Aeschyl. down, rttuml about:
αί πίριξ naXfit, the cities round abuul, the circumjacent
cities. Acts v. IG.•
π(ρι-οιΚΕω, -ώ ; to dwell round about : τινά [cf. \V. § δ2,
4, 12], to bo one's neighbor, Lk. i. (io. (lldt., Arstph.,
Xen., Lys., Plut.) *
irepC-oiKos, -OK, {ntpi and οίκος), dwelling around, a
neiiihhor : Lk. i. 58. (Gen. xi.\. 2» ; Deut. i. 7 ; Jer. xxx.
(xHx.) .■) ; Ildt., Thuc., Xen., Isocr., al.) *
πΕριοΰ(Γΐο5, -01', (fr. 7TfpL(ov, πί^ίΐοϋσα, ptcp. of the verb
π€ρί(ΐμι, to be over and above — see ΐπιούσίος ; hence
■ntpiovaia, abundance, plenty ; riches, wealth, property),
that which is one's own, belongs to one's possessions : Xuof
πιριούσιος, a people selected by God from the other nations
/or Itis own possession. Tit. ii. 14 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64 ;
in Sept. for nSjD D;•., (Ex. xix. S) ; Deut. vii. 6 ; xiv. 2 ;
xxvi. 18. [Cf. Bp. Lghlft. ' Fresh Revision' etc. App.
ii.]•
ΐΓίριοχή, -ψ, η, (nfpifxa, ([. v.) ; 1. an encompass-
inr/, roin/tass, circuit, (Theophr., Diod., Plut., al.). 2.
that which is contained; spec, i/ie contents of any writing,
.\cts viii. 32 (Cic. ad Attic. 13, 25; Stob. eclog. ethic, p.
Iti4 [ii. p. 541 ed. (iaisford]) [but A. V. place i.e. pas-
sage ; cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].*
irtpi-iraTio», -ώ; impf. 2 pers. sing, irfpifnartis, 3 pers.
π(ρΐ(πάτ(ΐ,]>\ηΓ.π(ρΐ(πάτουι>\ fat. irf ριπατήσω; 1 aor. nepi-
(πάτησα; phipf. .'i jicrs. sing. TrfptcnfvarrfKei (Acts xiv. 8
HeC"), and without the augm. (cf. W. § 12, 9 ; [B. 33
(2ϋ)]) πίριπ-ίίτατήχίΐ (ibid. Rec." Grsb.) ; Sept. for ΙΙ^Π;
to walk; [wali: about A. V. 1 Pet. v. 8]; a. prop,
(as in Arstph., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Joseph., Ael., al.) : ab-
sol., Mt. ix. 5; xi. 5; xv. 31 ; Mk. ii. 9 [Tdf. Cjrayf ] ; v. 42;
viii. 24; xvi. 12; Lk. v. 23; vii. 22; xxiv. 17; Jn. i. 36; v.
8 sq. 1 1 sq. ; xi. 9 sq. ; Acts iii. 6, 8 sq. 12 ; xiv. 8, 10 ; 1
Pet. V. 8 ; Rev. ix. 20 ; i. q. to make one's toaij, make prog-
ress, in fig. disc, equiv. to to make a due use of opportu-
nities, Jn. xii. 35". Λνΐΐΐι additions : π(ριπ. γυμνής. Rev.
xvi. 15 ; ίτίάνω (riWit), Lk. .xi. 44 ; διά w. gen. of the thing.
Rev. xxi. 24 [G L Τ Tr AVH] ; iv w. dat. of place, i.q.
to frequent, stai/ in, a place, Mk. xi. 27 ; Jn. vii. 1 ; x. 23 ;
Rev. ii. 1 ; ΐν τισι, among persons, Jn. xi. 54 ; [π. oirou
^fliXff, of personal liberty, Jn. xxi. 18]; metaph. ev tj
σκοτία, to be subject to error and sin, Jn. viii. 1 2 ; xii.
35"; 1 Jn. i. 6 sq. ; ii. 11; «w with dat. of the garment
one is clothed in, ilk. xii. 38; Lk. xx. 46 ; Rev. iii. 4, (tv
KOKKivots, Epict. diss. 3, 22, 10) ; fVl r^f θαλάσσης, [Mt.
xiv. 25 RG; 26 LTTrWlI; Mk. vi. 4S, 40], see cTri,
A. I. 1 a. and 2 a. ; iVt την θάλ-, ίπι τα ΰδητα, [Mt. xiv. 2ο
LTTr Wn, 26 RG, 29], see eVi, C. L 1 a. ; ^παρίι την
θάλασσαν, .Mt. iv. 18; Mk. i. 16 Rec, see παρά, 1Π. 1];
μfτά Tivot, to associate with one, to be one's companion,
used of one's followers and votaries, Jn. vi. 66 ; Rev. iii.
4. b. Hebraistically, lo live [cf. W. 32 ; com. in Paul
and John, but not found in James or in Peter (cf. ανα-
στρέφω 3 b.. αναστροφή)^, i. e. a. to regulate one's
life, to conduct one's self (cf. oSot, 2 a., πορεύω, h. γ.) :
άξίως τινός, Eph. iv. 1 ; Col. i. 1 ; 1 Tlr. ii. 1 2 ; fiσχημύvως,
Ro. .\iii. 13 ; 1 Th. iv. 12; ακριβώς, Eph. v. 15 ; ατάκτως,
2 'J'h.iii. 6, 1 1 ; is or καθώς rir, Eph. iv. 17; v. 8, 15 ; oJrtu
π. καθώς, Phil. iii. 1 7 ; Ικαθώς π- οϋτω π. 1 Jn. ii. 6 (L Tr
txt. Wll om. ούτω)] ; πώς, καθώς, I Th. iv. 1 ; oGriat, ώς,
1 Co. vii. 17 ; so that a nom. of (luality must be sought
from what follows, ΐχθρυι τού σταυρού του Χριστού, I'hil.
iii. 18. >vith a dat. of the thing to which the life is given
or consecrated : κώμοις, μίθαις, etc., Ro. xiii. 13, cf. Fritz-
sche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 140 sq.; w. a dat. of the standard
ace. to which one governs his life [cf. Fritzsche u. s. p.
142 ; also B. § 133, 22 b. ; W. 219 (20,5)] : Acts xxi. 21 ;
Gal. v. 16 ; 2 Co. xii. 18 ; foil, by e'l/ w. a dat. denoting
either the state in which one is living, or the virtue or
vice to which he is given [cf. ev, 1. 5 e. p. 210b bot.] : Ro.
vi. 4; 2 Co. iv. 2; Eph. ii. 2, 10; i v. 17; v. 2; Col. iii. 7;
iv. 5 ; 2 Jn. 4, 6 ; 3 Jn. 3 sq. ; iv βρώμασι, of those who
have fellowship in the sacrificial feasts, Heb. xiii. 9 ; £»
Χριστώ [see ev, I. 6 b.], to live a life conformed to the
union entered into with Christ, Col. ii. 6 ; κατά w. an ace.
of the pers. or thing furnishing the standard of living,
[Mk. vii. 5]; 2 Jn. 6 ; κατά άνθρωπον, 1 Co. iii. 3 ; κατά
σάρκα, Ro. viii. 1 Rec, 4; xiv. 15; 2 Co. x. 2. β.
i. <j. to pass (one's) life : iv σαρκΊ. in the body, 2 Co. x.
3 ; δια πίστιως (see bia, A. L 2), 2 Co. v. 7. [Comp. : iμ-
•π(ρΐ7ΐατ€ω.~\ *
ΊΓΕρι-ΊΓΕίρω : 1 aor. π(ρΐ(π(ΐρα ; to pierce through [see
nfpi, in. 3] : τινά ξΙφ(σι, δόρατι, etc, Diod., Joseph.,
Plut., Lcian., al. ; metaph. ύιυτόν . . ■ 68ΰναις, to torture
one's soul with sorrows, 1 Tim. vi. 10 (άνηκίστοις κακο'ις,
Philo in Flacc. § 1).*
iripi-iriirro» : 2 aor. irepitirtaov ; fr. Ililt. down ; so to
fall into as lo be encom/jussed hi/ [cf. ττιρί. III. 1]: Xiy-
σταις, among robbers, Lk. x. 30 ; το'ις πιιρασμοίς, Jas. i. 2,
(αίκίαΐί, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 51, 2; θανάτω, Dan. ii. 9;
Diod. 1, 77; νόσω, Joseph, antt. 15, 7, 7; συμφορά, ibid.
1, 1, 4; τοΊς Seivoh, Aesop 79 (110 ed. Ilalm) ; ψ(υ8('σι
κ. άσφίσι ^όγμασιν, Orig. in Joann. t. ii. § 2 ; numerous
other exx. in Passow s. v. 1. c. [L. and S. s. v. II. 3] ; to
which add, 2 I\Iacc. vi. 13 ; x. 4 ; Polyb. 1, 37, 1 and 9) ;
ii'r τ&πην τινά, upon a certain place. Acts xxvii. 41.*
■ircpi-irow'w, -ώ : Mid., pres. τκριποιούμαι; 1 aor. ntpi-
(ττοιησάμην ; (see jrf/Ji, III. 2) ; fr. Ildt. down ; to make
to remain over; to reserve, lo leave or keep safe, lai/ by;
mid. to make lo remain for one's self, i. e. 1. to
preserve for one's self (Sept. for Π'ΠΠ) : την ψυχήν, life,
Lk. xvii. 33 Τ Tr WH (τάς ψυχάς,' Xeo. Cyr. 4, 4, 10).
2. lo qet for one's self, purchase : τί. Acts xx. 28 (Is.
xliii. 21 ; bCvapiv, Thuc. 1, 9; Xen. mem. 2, 7, 3); η
ίμαυτω, gain for myself (W. § 38, 6), 1 Tim. iii. 13 (1
Mace. vi. 44 ; Xen. an. 5, 6, 17).•
ΐΓίρι-ΐΓθΙη<Γΐ5, -βωί, ^, (π(ριποΐί'ω); 1. a preserving,
preservation : (Ις πιριποίησιν ψυχής, to the preserving of
the soul, sc. that it may be made partaker of eternal sal-
vation [A. V. unto the saving of the souQ, Heb. x. 39
(Plat. deff. p. 415 c). 2. possession, one's oivn prop-
erly : 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Is. xliii. 20 sq.) ; Eph. i. 14 (on this
π€ριρραινω
5ΰ£
ΊΓερισσο<;
pass, see άποΚΰτρωσί^, 2 ) • 3. an oblaining : with a
gen. of the thing to be obtained, 1 Th. v. 9 ; 2 Th. ii. 14.*
■ircpi-ppaCvu (Tdf. wf/jtp., with onep; see P, p) : pf. pass,
ptcp. π^ρφιραμμίνο! (.of. M, μ) ; {irtpi and ραίνω to sprin-
kle) ; to χρι-ίηίίυ (iround, besprinkle . ϊμάηον, pass., Kev.
xix. 13 Tdf. [al. βιβαμμίνον (exc. WIl (κραντισμίνον, see
ραντίζω, and their App. ad loc.)]. (Ar.slph., Meiiand.,
Philo, IMiit., al.; Sept.)*
ΐΓίρι-ρρήγνυμι (L Τ Tr WH Treptp-, with one ρ ; see the
preceding word) : 1 aor. ptcp. plur. τκρψρηξαντα; (π(ρί
and ρηγνυμι) ; Ιο break off on all sides, break off all
round, [cf. isepl. III. I] : τό Ίμάτιον, to rend or tear off all
around, Acts xvi. 22. So of garments also in 2 Mace,
iv. 38 and often in prof. auth. ; Aeschyl. sept. 329 ; Dem.
p. 403, 3 ; Polyb. 15, 33, 4 ; Diod. 1 7, 3 J.*
τΓίρι-βττάω, -ώ : impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. neputrrOTo ; fr.
Xen. down ; to draw around {nfpi, III. 1], to draw away,
distract ; pass, metaph., to be driven about mentally, to be
distracted : n€pi τ», i. e. to be over-occupied, too busy,
about a Iking, Lk. x. 40 [A. V. cuynbered} ; in the same
sense with τί] Siavoia added, Polyb. 3, 105, 1 ; 4, 10,
3 ; Diod. 1 , 74 ; τηρισπάν τον apyov 8ημον irepl τάϊ ίξω
στρατ(ία!, Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 43 ; pass, to be distracted
with cares, to be troubled, distressed, [cf. W. 23], for PIJJ?,
Eccl. i. 13; iii. 10.»
ircpKTcriia, -as, ή. (π(ρίσσ(ΰω, q. v.) ; 1. abun-
dance : τη! χάριτοί, Ro. v. 1 7 ; της χαρά!, 2 Co. viii. 2 ; tit
nepiaaeiav, adverbially, superabundantly, superfluously,
[A. V. out of measure'], 2 Co. x. 15, {Boeckh, Corp. in-
scrr. i. p. 668, no. 1378, 6; Byzant. ivrit.). 2. su-
periority ; preference, pre-eminence : "^i^Y, Eccl. vi. 8 ; for
;nr\", Eccl. ii. 13; x. 10. 3. gain, profit: for
ΙΠιΤ, Eccl. i. 3; ii. 11 ; iii. 9, etc. 4. residue, re-
mains : KoKias, the wickedness remaining over in the
Christian from his state jirior to conversion, Jas. i. 21,
see TTfplaaevpa, 2 ; [al. adliere in this pass, to the mean-
ing which the word bears elsewhere in the N. T. viz.
' excess ', ' superabundance,' (A. V. superfluity)].*
π(ρΟ(Γ(Γ€νμα, -ros, τό, (πίρισσβύω) ; 1. abundance,
in which one delights; opp. to ύστίρημα, 2 Co. viii. 14
(13), 14 ; trop. of tliat Λvhich fills the heart, Mt. xii. 34 ;
Lk. vi. 45, (Eratosth., Plut.). 2. ichat is left over,
residue, remains: phir. Mk. viii. 8.*
Ίτερισ-σ-εΰω ; impf. ίπ(ρ!σσ(υον (Acts xvi. 5) ; fut. inf.
πfp^σσfύσίιl' (Phil. iv. 12 Rec.''") ; 1 aor. fVepiVaf υσα ;
Pass., pres. πίρισσίύυμαι (Lk. xv. 17, see below) ; 1 fut.
3 pers. sing. πίρ»σσίυ6ήσεται ; (πίρίσσοΓ, q. v.) ; 1.
intrans. and prop, to exceed a fixed number or measure;
to be over arid above a certain number or measure : μύριοι
flaiv αριθμόν . . . tTs 8e irtpiaatiti, Hes. fr. 14, 4 [clxix.
(187), ed. Gdttling] ; hence a. to be over, to remain :
Jn. vi. 12; το π^ρισσ^νον των κλασμάτων, i. q. τα nepia-
σΐνοντα κλάσματα, Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; τνίρισσίΰΐΐμοι τι,
Jn. vi. 1 3 (Tob. iv. 1 6) ; το τΐ€ρισσ(νσάντινι, what remained
over to one, Lk. ix. 1 7. b. to exist or be al hand
in abundance : Ttw, Lk. xii. 15 ; τά trtpurvtvov ran, one's
abundance, wealth, [(R. V. superfluity) ; opp. to v<rrt-
Diffis], ^Ik. xii. 44 ; opp. to ίστίρημα, Lk. xxi. 4 ; to be
(?rea( (abundant), 2 Co. i. 5'; Lx. 12; Phil. i. 26; ntpur-
aevei rt els riva, a thing comes in abundance, or overflou:•,,
unto one ; something falls to the lot of one in large meas-
ure : Ro. v. 15; 2 Co. i. 5"; ττ^ρισσ^νω (is Tt, to reilound
unto, turn out abundantly fur, a tiling, 2 Co. viii. 2 ; ή
άλϊ]θζΐα του θ€θΰ ΐν τω ΐμω ^ίνσματι ίπ€ρίσσενσ€ν eii την
&όξαν αΰτοϋ, 1. e. by my lie it came to pass that God's
veracity became the more conspicuous, and becoming
thus more thoroughly known increased his glory, Ro.
iii. 7 ; to be increased, τώ αριθμώ. Acts xvi. 5. c. lu
abound, overflow, i.e. a. to be abundantly furnished
with, to have in abundance, abound in (a thing) : absol.
[A. v. to abound], to he in affluence, Phil. iv. 18; op]),
to νστίράσθαι, ib. 12; in spiritual gifts, 1 Co. xiv. 12;
with a gen. of the thing in which one abounds (W. § 30,
8 b. ; [cf. B. § 1 32, 1 2]) : ίρτων, Lk. .xv. 1 7 R G L Τ Tr
mrg. β. to be pre-eminent, to excel,\cl.^.^\S2,i2]:
absol. 1 Co. viii. 8 ; foil, by fv w. a dat. of the virtues or
the actions in which one excels [B. § 132, 12], Ro.
XV. 13 ; 1 Co. xv. 58 ; 2 Co. iii. 9 [here L Τ Tr WH om.
iv] ; viii. 7 ; Col. ii. 7 ; π(ρισσ. μάλλον, to excel still more,
to increase in excellence, 1 Th. iv. 1 , 1 ; μάλλον κ. μάλλον
πιρισσ, Phil. i. 9 ; ■π^ρισσ. ττλΛον, to excel more than [A. V.
exceed; cf. B. § 132, 20 and 22], Mt. v. 20, (πιρισσ. νπίρ
τίνα, 1 Mace. iii. 30 ; τί tTrfpiaaevaev ό άνθρωπος παρά το
KTijvos; Eccl. iii. 19). 2. by later Greek usage
transitively [cf. W. p. 23 ; § 38,1], to make to abound,
i.e. a. to furnish one richly so that he has abun-
dance : pass., Mt. xiii. 12 ; xxv. 29 ; w. gen. of the thing
with which one is furnished, pass. Lk. xv. 1 7 WH Tr txt. ;
rl ets Tiva, to make a thing to abound unto one, to confer a
thing abundantly upon one, 2 Co. ix. 8 ; Eph. i. 8. b.
to make abundant or excellent: τί, 2 Co. iv. 15; to cause
one to excel : τινά, w. a dat. of the thing, 1 Th. iii. 1 2. (tos
άψας, to extend the hours beyond the prescribed time,
Athen. 2 p. 42 b.) [CoMP. : νπ(ρ^(ρισσ€ίω.]*
ΐΓίρισσίϊ, -η, -όν, (fr. πίρι, (ρ ν. III. 2), fr. lies, down,
Sept. for "1Γ}1\ 1Π', etc.; exceeding some number or meas-
ure οτ rank or need ; 1. over and above, more than
is necessary, superadded : το π. τούτων, what is added to
[A. v. more than ; cf. B. § 132, 21 Rem.] these, Mt. v. 37 :
cK περισσού, exceedingly, beyond measure, Mk. vi. 51
[WIl om. Tr br. ex π. ] ; xiv. 31 Rec. ; vvep ΐκ περισσοί
(written as one word ύπ(ρ(κπ(ρισσοΰ [q. v.]), exceeding
abundantly, supremely, Eph. iii. 20 [cf. B. u. s.] ; 1 Th.
iii. 10; v. 13 [R G WH txt.]; πιρισσόν μοί e'oru', it is
superfluous for me, 2 Co. ix. 1 ; πιρισσοι• ί^ίί», to have
abundance, Jn. x. 10 (oc μίν . . . ιτΐρισσά €χονσιν, οι dk
oiSe τά άνα-γκαΐα δύνανται πορίζ(σθαι, Xen. oec. 20, 1 ) ;
neut. compar. π(ρισσότ€ρόν τι, something further, more,
Lk. xii. 4 ( L Tr mrg. πιρισσόν) ; π(ρισσότ. the more. ibid.
48; [πιρισσήτίρον πάντων etc. much more than all etc.
Mk. xii. 33 Τ Tr txt. WH] ; adverbially, somewhat more
[R. V. somewhat abundantly], 2 Co. x. 8 ; (Vulg. abun-
dantius [A.V. more abundantly]) i. e. more plainly, lleb.
vi. 17; μάλλοί' π(ρισσότ€ρον, much more, Mk. vii. 36 ;
ττ(ρισσότ(ρον πάντων, more [abundantly] than all, 1 Co.
XV. 10 ; with an adj. it forms a periphrasis for the com-
ττερισσοτερω?
506
•περιφέρω
par. ιτίρισσήτίρον κατάΖηΚον, more [abundantly] evident,
ileb. vii. Ιό [cf. W. §35, 1]. 2. superior, extraor-
dinary, surpassing, uncommon : Mt. v. 47 [A. V. more
than others] ; τΰ 7τ(ρισσόι/, as subst., pre-eminence, sttpe-
riorily, adranttif/e, Κυ. iii. 1 ; compar. πιρισσότίρα, more
eminent, more remurkahle, (oix «σι; π(ρισσάτ(ρος, Gen.
xlix. 3 Symm.; ntpiTTUTtpos φρόνησα, Pint. nior. p. 57 f.
do adulalore etc. 14): Mt. .\i. 9; Lk. vii. 26, although
in each pass. nfpiaaUT(pov can also be taken as neut.
' (something) more excellent (Viug. pluf [R. V. ;ni/<7i mure
than etc.]); with substantives : π(ρίσσότ(ρον κρίμα, i-e.
a severer, heavier judgment, Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) llec. ;
■ Mk. .xii. 40 ; Lk. xx. 47 ; τιμή, greater honor, more [abun-
dant] honor, 1 Co. xii. 23", [24 ; (Ισχημοσύνη, ibid. 23''] ;
\ίττη. 2 Co. ii. 7.•
τΓ£ρΐ(Γσ•οτ€ρω5, adv., (fr. πιρίσσΣί!, q. v.), [cf. W. § 11,
2 c.; B. (i9(61)]; 1. prop, («ore aiunrfan//^ (so in
Diod. 13, 108 ; Athen. 5 p. 192 f.); in the N. T. more,
in a greater degree; more earnestlij, more exceedingly, [cf.
W. 243 (228)] : Mk. xv. 14 Rec. ; 2 Co. vii. 15; xi. 23;
Gal. i. 14; Phih i. 14 ; iTh. ii. 17; Heb. ii. 1 ; xiii. 19;
opp. to ήττον, 2 Co. xii. 15 ; ττιρισσοτίρωί μαΚΚον, much
more, [R.V. the more exceedini/lyl, 2 Co. vii. 13. 2.
especially, above others, [Λ. \ . more abundantly'] : 2 Co.
i. 12; ii. 4.»
π(ρΐ(Γσώ$, {πfpισσ6ί, q. v.), adv., beyond measure, ex-
traordinarily (Eur.; i.q. magnificently, Polyb., Athen.);
i. q. greatly, exceedingly : ίκττΚήσσισθαι, Mk. x. 26 ; κράζιιν,
Mt. xxvii. 23 and G L Τ Tr WII in Mk. xv. 14 ; ίμμαΐνι-
σθαι, Acts xxvi. 11.*
■π-ίριστίρά, -άί, ή, Hebr. njl', a dove : Mt. iii. 16 ; x. 16 ;
xxi. 12; Mk. i. 10; xi. 15 ; Lk. ii. 24 ; iii. 22 ; Jn. i. 32;
ii. 14, 16. [From lldt. down.]"
ΐΓ€ρι-τ€μνω (Ion. π(ρίτάμνω) ; 2 aor. TtepuTtpov, Pass.,
pres. πίριτϊμνομαι ; pf. ptcp. ιτ(ριτ(τμημ(νος ', 1 aor. nepi-
€τμήθην; [fr. lies, down]; Sept. chiefly for h\0 ; to cut
around [cf. nepl. III. 1] : τινά. Ιο circumcise, cut off one's
prepuce (used of that well-known rite by which not only
the male children of the Israelites, on the eighth day
after birth, but subsequently also ' proselytes of right-
eousness ' were consecrated to Jehovah and introduced
into the number of his people ; [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Cir-
cumcision ; Oehler's O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) §§ 87, 88;
Mailer, Barnabasbrief, p. 227 sq.]), Lk. i. 59; ii. 21 ; Jn.
vii. 22 ; Acts vii. 8 ; xv. 5 ; xvi. 3 ; xxi. 21 ; of the same
rite, Diod. I, 28 ; pass, and mid. to get one's self circum-
cised, present one's self to be circumcised, receive circum-
cision [cf. W. § 38, 3] : Acts xv. 1, 24 Rec. ; 1 Co. vii. 18 ;
Gal. ii. 3 ; v. 2 sq. ; vi. 1 2 sq. ; with τα alhoia added, Hdt.
2, 36 and 104 ; Joseph, antt. 1, 10, 5 ; c. Ap. 1, 22. Since
by the rite of circumcision a man was separated from
the unclean world and dedicated to God, the verb is
transferred to denote the extinguishing of lusts and the
removal of sins, Col. ii. 11, cf. Jer. iv. 4 ; Deut. x. 16, and
eccl. writ, [see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iii. 3].*
•irepi -τίβημ,ι, 3 pers. plur. π(ριτίθίασιν (^Mk. xv. 17 ; see
reff. in (πιτΐθημι) ; 1 aor. ττίρύθηκα ; 2 aor. ptcp. π€ριθίκ,
TTtpifliVrft ; fr. Horn, down ; a. prop, to place
around, set about, [cf. nfpt, IlL 1] : tji-i ti, as φρα•γμαν τώ
άμπ(\ά>νι, Mt. -x.xi. 33 ; Mk. xii. 1 ; to put a garnnMit on
one, Mt. xxvii. 28 ; στίφακοκ, put on (encircle one's head
with) a crown, Mk. xv. 17 (Sir. vi. 31 ; Plat. Alcib. 2
p. 151 a.) ; τι τιιί, Ιο put or bind one thing around anoth-
er, Mt. xxvii. 48 ; Mk. xv. 36 ; Jn. xix. 29. b. trop.
Ttvl Ti, lo present, bestow, confer, a thing upon one (so in
class. Grk. fr. Hdt. down, as fKtvdfpiav, lldt. 3, 142;
ba^av, Uem. p. 1417, 3 ; see Passow ii. p. 881 sq.; [L. and
S. s. V. II.] ; TO όνομα. Sap. xiv. 21 ; Thuc. 4, 87) : τιμήν,
1 Co. xii. 23 ; Kslh. i. 20.*
ΊΓίρι-τομή, -ης, ή, (τκριτίμναι), circumcision (on which
see π(ριτ(μνω) ; a. prop. a. the act or rite oj
circumcision : Jn. vii. 22 sq. ; Acts vii. 8 ; Ro. iv. 1 1 ; GaL
V. 11 ; Phil. iii. 5 ; oi c'k τήί π(ριτ. (see (κ, II. 7), the cir-
cumcised, they of the circumcision, used of Jews, Ko.
iv. 12; of Christians gathered from among the .Jews,
Acts xi. 2 ; Gal. ii. 12 ; Tit. i. 10 ; oi oi/res « irtpiT. Col.
iv. 11. β. the state of circumcision, the being cir-
cumcised : Ro. ii. 25-28; iii. 1 ; 1 Co. vii. 19 ; Gal. v. 6;
vi. 15 ; Col. iii. 11 ; ev jrepiTopjj ων, circumcised, Ro. iv.
10. γ. by meton. 'the circumcision' tor oi πιριτμψ
6fVTtt the circumcised, i. e. Jews : Ro. iii. 30 ; iv. 9, 12;
XV. 8; Gal. ii. 7-9; Eph. ii. 11 ; oi eV πιριτομψ πιστοί.
Christian converts from among the Jews, Jewish Chris-
tians, Acts X. 45. b. metaph. a. of Chris-
tians : (ήμ«5 (σμ(ν) ή π^ριτομή, sejiarated from the un-
clean multitude and truly consecrated to God, Phil. iii.
3 [(where see Bp. Lghtft.)]. β. ή πιριτομη άχ(ΐρο-
ΤΓοίητο!, the extinction of the passions and the removal
of spiritual impurity (see ntpirepva, fin.). Col. ii. 11*; 7
π(ριτομη KapSias in Ro. ii. 29 denotes the same thing ;
■jTfpiT. Χρίστου, of which Christ is the author, Col. ii. 11'.
(The noun irtpiTop^ occurs three times in the O. T., viz.
Gen. xvii. 13 ; Jer. xi. 16 ; for π'^ϊΟ, Ex. iv. 26 ; besides
in Philo, whose tract nep'i ■πίριταμης is found in Mangey's
ed. ii. pp. 210-212 [Richter's ed. iv. pp. 282-284] ; Jc
seph. antt. 1, 10,5; [13, 11 fin.; c. Ap. 2, 13, 1.6]; plur.,
antt. 1, 12, 2.)•
ΐΓ€ρι-τρ€ΐΓω ; to turn about \ττ(ρΊ, III. 1], to turn; to
transfer or change by turning : τι or τινά iis τι, a pers. or
thing 1)1/0 some stale ; once so in the N. T. viz. σί elt
μανίαν nepirpend, is turning thee mad. Acts xxvi. 24 ;
Toiir παρόντας fie χαραν πepιeστpfψf, .Joseph, antt. 9, 4, 4;
TO θύον ei'r οργην πιρίτραπίν, 2, 14, 1. In various other
uses in Grk. auth. [fr. Lys. and Plat, on].*
■ΐΓίρι-τρίχω : 2 aor. [πίρύ&ραμον Τ Tr WII], ptcp. π€ρι•
SpapovTfs [RGL]; fr. [Hom.], Theogn., Xen., Plat,
down ; to run around, run round about : with an ace. of
place, Mk. vi. 55. (Sept. twice for aw, Jer. v. 1 ; Am.
viii. 12.)•
ii-epi-<J)€'p<i) ; pres. pass, π^ριφίρομαι ; fr. Hdt. down ; to
carry round : to bear about everywhere with one, τί,
2 Co. iv. 10; to carry hither and thither, tovs κακωί
?Yoi/Tat, Mk. vi. 55 (where the Evangelist wishes us to
conceive of the sick as brought to Jesus while he is
travelling about and visiting different places) ; pass, to
be driven ^A- V. carried^ about : παντ'ι άνίμφ τη( δι6ασκα-
Τ€ρΐφρθ
507
Πέτρος
λίαί, i. e. in doubt and hesitation to be led away now to
tliis opinion, now to that, Ejjh. iv. 14. In Heb. xiii. 9
and Jude 12 for πιριφίρ. editors from Griesbach on Lave
restored παραφίρ.'
ΐΓίρι-φρονί'ω, -ώ ; 1. to consider or examine on all
sidei [irfpi, III• 1], i. e. carefully, thoroughly, (Arstph.
nub. 741). 2. (fr. nepi, beyond, III. 2), to set one's
self in thought beyond {exalt one's self in thought above) a
pers. or thing ; to contemn, despise : nvos (cf. KUhner
§ 419, 1 b. vol. ii. p. 3-'ό), Tit. ii. 15 (4 Mace. vi. 9 ; vii.
It) ; xiv. 1 ; Plut., al. ; τοΟ ζην, Plat. A.\. p. 372 ; Aeschin.
dial. Socr. 3, 22).*
ircp(-x<i>pos, -ov, (nepi and χώρυι), lying round about,
neighlioring, (Plut., Aelian., Uio Cass.) ; in the Scrip-
tures ή π(ρίχωροί, sc. γη, the region round about [q. v. in
B. D.J : Mt. .\iv. 35 ; Mk. i. 28 ; vi. 55 [R G L t.xt.] ; Lk.
iii. 3 ; iv. 14, 37 ; vii. 17; viii. 37 ; Acts .xiv. 6, (Gen. xix.
17; Deut. iii. 13, etc. ; τηι γη! rijs πιριχώρου. Gen. xix.
28 cod. Alex.) ; ή '"(ρϊχ• τοΰ Ιορδανού, Lk. iii. 3 (Gen. xiii.
10 sq. ; for Π^Π "<33, the region of the Jordan [cf. B. D.
u. s.]) ; by nieton. for its inhabitants : Mt. iii. 5. (το
π€ρίχωρον and τα περίχωρα, Deut. iii. 4 ; 1 Chr. v. 16 ; 2
Chr. iv. 17, etc.)*
π£ρί-4'ημια, -tos, to, (fr. πίριι/'άω ' to wipe off all round';
and this fr. nepi [q. v. III. 1], and ψάω ' to wipe,' ' rub '),
prop, what is wiped οβ'; dirt rubbed off; offscouring,
scrapings: 1 Co. iv. 13, used in the same sense as Trepi-
κάθαρμα, q. V. Suidas and other Greek lexicographers
s. V. relate that the Athenians, in order to avert public
calamities, yearly threw a criminal into the sea as an
offering to Poseidon ; hence αργυρίου . . . π€ρίψημα τοΰ
naidiov ήμων γένοιτο, (as if to say) let it become an expi-
atory offering, a ransom, for our cliild, i. e. in comparison
with the saving of our son's life let it be to us a despi-
cable and worthless thing, Tob. v. 18 (where see Fritz-
sche ; [cf. also Miiller on Barn. ep. 4, 9]). It is used
of a man who in behalf of religion undergoes dire
trials for the salvation of others, Ignat. ad Eph. 8, 1 ;
18, 1 ; [see Bp. Lghtft.'s note on the former passage].*
ircpirepevo)jiai ; (to be Ttipnfpos, i. e. vain-glorious, brag-
gart, Polyb. 32, 6, 5 ; 40, 6, 2 ; Epict. diss. 3, 2, 14) ; to
boast one's se//'[A. V. raitnt one's self] : 1 Co. xiii. 4 (An-
tonin. 5, 5 ; the comjioimd ϊμπιρπ^μ^ύ^πθαι is used of
self-display, employing rhetorical embellishments in ex-
tolling one's self excessively, in Cic. ad Attic. 1, 14.
Hesych. nepnfpderaL• κατ(παίρ(ται) ; cf. Osiander [or
Wetstein] on 1 Co. 1. c. [Gataker on Marc. Antonin. 5,
. 5 p. 143].*
Ilepo-Cs [lit. 'a Persian woman '], ή, ace. -/δα, Persis, a
Christian woman : Ro. xvi. 12.*
irepuo-i, (fr. nepas), adv., last year; the year just past :
άπί) πέρυσι, for a year past, a year ago, [W. 422 (393)],
2 Co. viii. 10 ; ix. 2. ([Simon.], Arstph., Plat., Plut.,
Lcian.) *
π(τάομ.αι, -Σιμαι; a doubtful later Grk. form for the
earlier πέτομαι (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 581 ; Bttm. Ausf.
Spr. ii. p. 271 gq.; cf. W. 88 (84); [B. 65 (58) ; Veitch
β. V.]) : loβy : in the N. T. found only in pres. ptcp. nt-
τώμινος, Rec. in Rev. iv. 7; viii. 13; xiv. 6; xix. 17,
where since Griesbach weTO/ierat has been restored.*
wiTiivos, -ly, -OK, (Attic for πίτηνός, fr. πίτομαι), flying,
winged ; in the N. T. found only in neut. plur. πττΓΐΐ'ά
and τα πίτ(««<ά, as suhst., flying or winged animals, birds :
Mt. xiii. 4 ; Mk. iv. 4 [G L Τ Tr AVH] ; Lk. xii. 24 ; Ro. i.
23 ; Jas. iii. 7 ; τα πβτ. τον ουρανού (Sept. for D'Dtyn ηΐ|' ■
see ουρανοί, 1 b.), the birds of heaven, i. e. flying in the
heavens (air), Mt. vi. 26; viii. 20; xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 4
[Rec], 32; Lk. viii. 5 ; ix. 58 ; xiii. 19; Acts x. 12 [here
L Τ Tr Wll om. τ<ί] ; .xi. 6. [(Theogn., Hdt., al.)]*
ττίτομαι ; [fr. Horn, down] ; Sept. for ciij; ; to fly : Rev.
iv. 7; viii. 13; xii. 14; xiv. 6; xix. 17; see ττίτάο/ιαί.*
■ΊΓί'τρο, -as, ή, f r. Horn, down ; Sept. for y'^O and Ίΐϊ ;
α rock, ledge, cliff; a. prop. : Mt. vii. 24 sq. ; xxvii.
51, 60 ; Mk. XV. 46 ; Lk. vi. 48 ; 1 Co. x. 4 (on which see
πνευματικός, 3 a.) ; a projecting rock, crag, Rev. vi. 15sq.;
rocky ground, Lk. viii. 6,13. b. a rock; large stone :
Ro. ix. 33 ; 1 Pet. ii. 8 (7). c. metaph. a man like
a rock, by reason of his flrmness and strength of soul :
Mt. xvi. 18 [some interpp. regard the distinction (gen-
erally observed in classic Greek ; see the Comra. and cf.
Sctimidt, Syn. ch. 51, §§ 4-6) between πέτρα, the massive
living rock, and πίτρος, a detached but large fragment,
as important for the correct understanding of this pas-
sage ; others explain the different genders here as due
first to the personal then to the material reference.
Cf. Meyer, Keil, al. ; Green, Crit. Note on Jn. i. 43].*
UcTpos, -ου, ό, (an appellative prop, name, signifying
' a stone,' ' a rock,' ' a ledge' or ' cliff ' ; used metaph. of a
soul hard and unyielding, and so resembling a rock,
Soph. O. R. 334 ; Eur. Med. 28; Here. fur. 1397; answer-
ing to the Chald. Κι^φάί, q. v., Jn. i. 42 (43)), Peter, the
surname of the apostle Simon. He was a native of
Bethsaida, a town of Galilee, the son of a fisherman (see
Ιωάννη!, 3, and Ίωνάί, 2), and dwelt with his Λvife at
Capernaum, Mt. viii. 14 ; JMk. i. 30 ; Lk. iv. 38, cf. 1 Co.
ix. 5. He had a brother Andrew, with whom he fol-
lowed the occupation of a fisherman, Mt. iv. 18 ; Mk. i.
16 ; Lk. V. 3. Both were received by Jesus as his com-
panions, Mt. iv. 19; Mk. i. 1 7 ; Lk. v. 10; Jn. i. 40-42
(41-43) ; and Simon, whose pre-eminent courage and
firmness he discerned and especially relied on for the fu-
ture establishment of the kingdom of God, he honored
with the name of Peter, Jn. i. 42 (43) ; ^It. xvi. 18 ; Mk.
iii. 1 6. Excelling in vigor of mind, eagerness to learn,
and love for Jesus, he enjoyed, together with James and
John the sons of Zebedee, the special favor and intima-
cy of his divine Master. After having for some time
presided, in connection with John and James the brother
of our Lord [see Ίάκωβοί, 3], over the affairs of the
Christians at Jerusalem, he seems to have gone abroad
to preach the gospel especially to Jews (Gal. ii. 9 ; 1 Co.
ix. 5 ; 1 Pet. v. 13 ; Papias in Euseb. 3, 39, 15; for Papias
states that Peter employed Mark as 'interpreter' (έρμψ
(Όττήί), an aid of which he had no need except beyond
the borders of Palestine, especially among those who
spoke Latin [but on the disputed meaning of the word
7Γ€τρώ8η<;
508
ΊΓίκραινι»
'interpreter' here, sec Morison, Com. on Mk., ed. 2, In-
trod. p. xxix. sifi].]). But just as, on the night of the
betrayal, Peter pro» ed so far faithless to himself as thrice
to deny that he was a follower of Jesus, so also some
time afterwards at Antioth he made greater conces-
sions to the rigorous Jewish Christians than (Christian
liberty permitted; accordingly he was rebuked by Paul
for his weakness and ' dissimulation ' (ΐιπύκρίσΐί), Gal.
ii. 1 1 SiY\. Nevertheless, in the patristic age Jewish
Christians did not hesitate to claim the authority of
Peter and of James the brother of the Lord in defence
of their narrow views and practices. This is not the
place to relate and refute the ecclesiastical traditions
concerning Peter's being the founder of the church at
Rome and bishop of it for twenty-five years and more ;
the discussion of theia may be found in Hase, Protes-
tant. Polemik gegen die rom.-kathol. Kirche, ed. 4, p.
123 sqcp ; [cf. Sclutff, Church History, 1882, voL i. §§ 2.5,
26 ; S'lejlerl in Ilerzog ed. 2, vol. .\i. p. 524 sqq., and (for
reff.) p. 537 sc|.]. This one thing seems to be evident
from Jn. xxi. ISsqq., that Peter suffered death by cru-
cifixion [cf. Keil ail loc. ; others doubt whether Christ's
words contain anything more than a general prediction
of martyrdom]. Κ he was crucified at Rome, it must
have been several years after the death of Paul. [Cf.
BB. DD. and reff. u. s.] He is called in the N. T., at
one time, simply Σίμων (once Συμεών, Acts xv. 14), and
(and that, too, most frequently [see B. D. s. v. Peter, sub
fin. (p. 2459 Am. ed.)]), Uirpos and Κι/φάϊ (q. v.), then
again 2ίμων IlfVpot, Mt. xvi. 16 ; Lk. v. 8 ; Jn. [i. 42 (43)] ;
vi. [8], 68; xiii. 6, 9, 24, [36] ; xviii. 10, 15, 25 ; xx. 2, 6 ;
xxi. 2 sq. 7, 11, 15 ; once 2υμ€ώι/ Πί'τροί (2 Pet. i. 1 where
L Wll txt. Σίμων) ; Σίμων ό Xeyo/ifKos ΠίτροΓ, Mt. iv. 18 ;
X. 2 ; Σίμων ό ΐπικάλούμΐνος Ώίτρος^ Acts χ. 18 ; xi. 13 ;
Σίμων ος ίπικαλ(ϊται Iltrpoff, .\cts χ. 5, 32.
τΓίτρώΒηϊ, -ff, (fr. πίτρα and ίΐδοΓ ; hence prop. ' rock-
like,' • having the appearance of rock '), rocky, slony : το
irerpoiSes and τά π(τρώ8η, of ground full of rocks, Mt. xiii.
5, 20 ; Mk. iv. 5, 16. (Soph., Plat., Aristot., Diod. 3, 45
(44), Plut., al.) •
Ίτήγανον, -ου, τό, [thought to be fr. ττήγνυμι to make
solid, on account of its thick, fleshy leaves; cf. Λ'^anicek
p. 457], rue : Lk. xi. 42. (Theophr. hist, plant. 1, 3, 4 ;
Dioscorid. 3, 45 (52) ; Plut., al.) [K O.s.v.; Tri.tlram,
Nat. Hist. etc. p. 478 ; Carruthers in the " Bible Educa-
tor," iii. 216 sq.]•
ιτηγή, -rjs, ή, fr. Horn, down, Sept. chiefly for l'i|0, Γχ,
llp"3 ; a fountain, spring: Jas. iii. 11, and Rec. in 12;
2 Pet. ii. 17; ϋδατοϊ Λλο/ΐΕκου, Jn. iv. 14; των υδάτων.
Rev. viii. 10; xiv. 7; xvi. 4; of a well fed by a spring,
Jn. iv. 6. ζωη! mjyat ΙΒάτων, Rev. vii. 17; ή π• τ. vSaros
rijf ζωηί. Rev. xxi. i\, (on both pass, see in ζωή, p. 274') ;
ή π. ToC αΐματο!, a flow of blood, Mk. v. 29.*
ιτήγνυμι : 1 aor. ίιτηξα ; fr. Horn, down ; to make fast,
to fix ; to fasten together, to builil by fastening together :
σκηνην, Heb. viii. 2 [A. V. pitched. CoMP. : προσ-πή-
γνυμι.Ί *
ΐΓη8^>ον, -ου, τό, (fr. ττηϋόν the blade of an oar, an
oar), fr. Ilom. down, a ship's rudder: Acts xxvii. 40 [on
tlie plur. see Smith, Voy. and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 4th
ed., p. 183 sqq. ; B. D. s. v. Ship (2); cf. Graser, Das
Seewesen des .\lterthums, in the Philologus for 1865,
p. 266 s(j.] ; Jas. iii. 4.*
τΓηλ(κοβ, -η, -υν, (fr. ηλίξ [?]), interrog., how great, how
large : in a material reference (denoting geometrical
magnitude as disling. fr. arithmetical, πόσοί) (Plat. Meno
p.82d.; p.83e.; I'tol. 1, 3, 3 ; Zech. ii. 2, [6J), (lal. vi.
11, where cf. Winer, lliickert, Hilgcnfeld, [llackett in
B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Epistle ; but see B]). Lghtft. or Meyer],
in an ethical reference, i. q. how distinguished, Heb. vii.
4.•
ιτηλόϊ, -oC, ό, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; a.
c/a^, which the potter uses (Is. xxix. 16; xli. 25; Nah.
iii. 14) : Ro. ix. 21. b. i. q. murf [we t 'clay '] : Jo•
i.K. 6, 11, Hscj.•
•πήρα, -ας, ή, a wallet (a leathern sack, in which travel-
lers and shepherds carried their provisions) [A. V. scrip
(q. v. in B.D.)] : Mt. x. 10 ; Mk. vi. 8 ; Lk. ix. 3 ; x. 4;
xxii. 35 sq. (Hom., Arstph., Joseph., Plut., Hdian.,
Lcian., al. ; with τώνβρωμάτων added, Judith xiii. 10.)*
iriixiis• gen. πήχ^ως (ncit found in the N. T.), gen. plur.
πηχών contr. fr. Ionic πηχίων (Jn. xxi. 8; Rev. xxi. 17;
1 K. vii. 3 (15), 39 (2) ; Esth. vii. 9 ; Ezek. xl. 5) ace. to
later usage, for the earlier and Attic πήχίω», which is
common in the Sept. (cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 245 sq. ; [ [VH.
App. p. 157] ; W. § 9, 2 e.), ό, the fore-rtrm i. e. that part
of the arm between the hand and the elbow-joint (Horn.
Od. 1 7, 38 ; II. 2 1 , 1 66, etc.) ; hence a cubit, (ell, Lat. ulna),
a measure of length efpial to the distance from the joint
of the elbow to the tip of the middle finger [i. e. about
one foot and a half, but its precise length varied and is
disputed; see B. D. s. v. AVeights and Measures, II. 1]:
Mt. vi. 27 ; Lk. xii. 25, [on these pass. cf. ηλικία, 1 a.] ;
Jn. xxi. 8; Rev. xxi. 17. (Sept. very often for ΠΐΧ•)*
τηάΧ,ω (Doric for πύζω, cf. B. 66 (58)) : 1 aor. (ττίασα;
1 aor. pass, (ττιάσθην; 1. to lay hold of: τίνα τήί
Xeipos, Acts iii. 7 [Theocr. 4, 35]. 2. to take, cap-
ture: fishes, Jn. xxi. 3, 10; βηρίον, pass., Rev. xix. 20,
(Cant. ii. 15). to take i. e. apprehend: a man, in order
to imprison him, Jn. vii. 30, 32, 44; viii. 20; x. 39; xi.
57; Acts xii. 4; 2 Co. xi. 32. [Comp. : ίπο-πιόίω.] *
ΐΓΐίζω : pf. pass. ptcp. π^πκσμίνοί ; fr. Hom. down ; to
press, press together: Lk. vi. .Ss. Sept. once for ^Ίη, Mic.
vi. 15.•
ιηθαναλογΟα, -ας, ή, (f r. πιθανολάγος ; and this fr. πιθανοί,
on which see wft^os, and λόγος), speech adapted to per-
suade, discourse in which probable arguments are ad-
duced ; once so in class. Grk., viz. Plat. Theaet. p. 162 e. ;
in a bad sense, persuasiveness of speech, specious dis-
course leading others into error : Col. ii. 4, and several
times in eccl. writers.*
[iriOos, see παθός and cf. I, u]
τηκροίνω : f ut. πικρανώ ; Pass., pres. πικραίνομαι ; 1 aor.
€πικράνθην; (πικρός, q. v.) ; 1. prop, to make bitter:
τά vSara, pass.. Rev. viii. H; τήκ κοιλίαΐ', to produce
a bitter taste in the stomach (Vulg. nmarico). Rev. χ.
πικρία
509
Ίτίναξ
9 sq. 2. trop. to embitter, exasperate, i. e. render
angry, indignant ; pass, to be embittered, irritated, (Plat.,
Dem., al.) : npas τίνα, Col. iii. 19 (Athen. 6 p. 242 c. ; «Vi
Tiva, E.\. xvi. 20 ; Jer. xliv. (x.\xvii.) 15; 1 Esdr. iv. 31 ;
[ill Tin, Ruth i. 20]) ; conte.xtually i. q. to visit with bitter-
ness, to grieve, (deal bitterly with), Job xxvii. 2 ; 1 Mace,
iii. 7. [CoMP. : ηαρα-^ικραίνω•^ *
TiKpCa, -as, jj, (πικροί), bitterness : χολή πικρία!, i. q.
χολή πικρά [\V. 34, 3 b.; B. § 132, 10], hitter gall, i. q.
extreme wickedness. Acts viii. 23 ; ρίζα πικρίας [reff. as
above], α bitter root, and so producing bitter fruit, Ileb.
xii. 15 (fr. Deut. xxix. 18 cod. Alex.), cf. Bleek ad loc. ;
metaph. hilleniess, i. e. bitter hatred, Eph. iv. 31 ; of
speech, Ro. iii. 14 after Ps. ix. 2•* (x. 7). (In various
uses in Sept., [Dem., Aristot.], Theophr., Polvb., Plut.,
al.)•
ιηκρόΐ, -ά, -01», [fr. r. meaning ' to cut,' ♦ prick ' ; Yanicek
534; Curtius § 100; Fick i. 145], fr. Horn, down, Sept.
for Tp ; bitter: prop. .las. iii. 11 (opp. to τό γλυκύ);
metaph. harsh, virulent, Jas. iii. 14.*
iriKpus, adv., [fr. Aescliyl. down], bitterly : metaph.
(κ\αυσ(, i. e. with poignant grief, Mt. xxvi. 75 ; Lk. xxii.
62 [here WH br. the cl.] ; cf. πικρον dUKpvov, Horn. Od.
4, 153.»
Πιλάτοϊ, [L] Tr better Πίλάτοί ([on the accent in
codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103 ; cf. Chandler § 326 ; B.
p. G n.] ; W. § 6, 1 m.), Ϊ WH incorrectly neiXiroc [but
see Tdf. Proleg. p. 84 sq. ; WH. App. p. 155 ; and cf. fi,
«], (a Lat. name, i.q. 'armed with a pilum or javelin,' like
Torqiialus i. q. 'adorned with the collar or neck-chain';
[so generally ; but some would contract it from pdealus
i. e. ' wearing the felt cap * (pileus), the badge of a manu-
mitted slave ; cf. Leyrer in Herzog as below ; Plumptre
in B. D. s. V. Pilate (note)]), -ου, ό [on the use of the art.
witli the name cf. VV. 113 (107) n.], Pontius Pilate, the
fifth procurator of the Roman emperor in Judtea and
Samaria (having had as predecessors Coponius, Marcus
Ambivius, Annius Rufus, and Valerius Gratus). [Some
writ. (e.g. BB. DD. s. v.) call Pilate the sixth procura-
tor, reckoning Sabinus as the first, he having had
charge for a time, during the absence of Archelaus at
Rome, shortly after the death of Herod; cf. Joseph,
antt. 1 7, 9, 3.] He was sent into Judaea in the year
26 A. D., and remained in office ten years ; (cf. Keim,
Jesus von Naz. iii. p. 485 sq. [Eng. trans, vi. 226 sq.]).
Although lie saw that Jesus was innocent, yet, fearin"
that the Jews would bring an accusation against him be-
fore Caesar for the wrongs he had done them, and dread-
ing the emperor's displeasure, he delivered up Jesus to
their blood-thirsty demands and ordered him to be cru-
cified. At length, in consequence of his having ordered
the slaughter of the Samaritans assembled at Mt. Geri-
zim, Vitellius, the governor of Syria and father of the Vi-
tellius who was afterwards emperor, removed him from
office and ordered him to go to Rome and answer their
accusations; but before his arrival Tiberius died. Cf.
Joseph, antt. 18, 2-4 and ch. 6. 5 ; b. j. 2, 9, 2 and 4 ; Philo,
leg. ad Gaium § 38 ; Tac. ann. 15, 44. Eusebius (h. e. 2,
7, and Chron. ad ann. T. Gaii) reports that he died by hit
own hand. Various stories about his death are related
in the Evangelia apocr. ed. Tischendorf p. 426 sqq.
[Eng. trans, p. 231 sq(j.]. He is mentioned in the N.T.
in ΛΙΐ. xxvii. 2 sqq. ; Mk. xv. 1 sqq. ; Lk. iii. 1 ; xiiL 1 ;
xxiii. 1 sqq. ; Jn. xviii. 29 sqq. ; xix. 1 sqq. ; Acts iii. 13 ;
iv. 27 ; xiii. 28; 1 Tim. vi. 13. A full account of him ie
given in Win, RWB. s. v. Pilatus ; [BB. DD. ibid.] ;
Ewald, Geschichte Christus ' u. seiner Zeit, ed. 3 p. 82
sqq. ; Legrtr in Herzog xi. p. 663 sqq. [ed. 2 p. 685 sqq.];
Renan, Vie de Jesus, 14iue ed. p. 413 sqq. [Eng. trans.
(ίί. Υ. 1S65) p. 333 sqq.]; Klopper in Schenkel iv. p.
581 sq. ; iY/iUre;•, Neutest. Zeitge.«ch. §17c. p. 252 sqq. ;
[ Warneck, Pont. Pilatus u.s.w. (pp. 210. Gotha, 1867)].*
ττίμπλημι (a lengthened form of the theme ΠΛΕΩ,
whence πλί'οί, πλήρης [cf. Curtius § SOO]) : 1 aor. ίπΧησα;
Pass., 1 f ut. πλησθήσ-ομαι ; 1 aor. ('πλήσθην ; fr. Hom. on ;
Sept. for W]T2, also for >'."3ϋΠ (to satiate) and pass. ΐ'2ΰ
(to be full) ; ΊοβίΙ : τι, Lk.' v. 7 ; τί tivos [W. § 30, 8 b.j,
a thing with something, Mt. xxvii. 48 ; [Jn. xix. 29
RG]; in pass., Mt. xxii. 10; Acts xi.x. 29 ; [« τήϊ όσ/ιί}?,
Jn. xii. 3 Tr mrg. ; cf. W. u. s. note ; B. § 132, 12]. what
wholly takes possession of the mind is said to βΙΙ it :
pass, φόβου, Lk. v. 26 ; βόμβου!, Acts iii. 10 ; avotas, Lk.
vi. 11; ζήλυυ. Acts v. 1 7 ; xiii. 45 ; θυμοΰ, Lk. iv. 28 ; Acts
iii. 10; πν(ί•ματο! άγιου, Lk. i. 15, 41, 67 ; Acts ii. 4; iv.
8,31 ; ix. 17 ; xiii. 9. prophecies are said πλησθηναι,
i. e. to come to pass, to be confirmed by the event, Lk. xxi.
22GLTTr WH (for Rec. πληρωθψαι). time is said
π\η(τθϊ\ναι, to be fulfilled or completed, i. e. finished,
elapsed, Lk. i. 23, 57 [W. 324 (304) ; B. 267 (230)]; iL
6, 21 sq.; so kS?^ Job xv. 32; and «So to (ful-) fill the
time, i. e. lo complete, fill up. Gen. xxix. 27 ; Job xxxix. 2.
[CoMP. : ίμ-πίπ'Κημι-'] '
Ίημιτράω (for the more common πΐμπμημι [cf. Curtius
§ 378, Vanicek p. 510 sij.]) : [pres. inf. pass. πιμπράσβαι ;
but R G L Tr WH πίμπρασθαι fr. the form πίμπρημι (Tdf.
(μττιπράσθαι, q. v.)] ; in ( !rk. writ. fr. Hom. [(yet only the
aor. fr. πρήίω)] down ; ίο Wow, ίο iuni, [on the connection
betw. these meanings cf . Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. πρήθω] ;
in the Scriptures four times to cause to swell, to render
tumid, [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.] : γαστίρα, Num. v. 22 ; pass, to
swell, become swollen, of parts of the body. Num. v. 21,27:
Acts xxviii. 6 (see above and in ΐμπιπράω). [CoMP. ίμ-
7ΓΙ-7Γρίίω.] *
ΊΓίνακίδιον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of πινάκι!, -iios), [Aristot.,
al.] ; a. a i^maU tablet. b. spec, a tmiiing-tab-
let: Lk. i. 63 [Tr mrg. πινακϊΒα; see the folL word];
Epict. diss. 3, 22, 74.•
[irivoKts. -ΐ8ο!, ή, i.q. wivoKidiop (q. v.) : Lk. i. 63 Trmrg.
(Epict., Plut., Artem., al.)*]
ίτίναξ, -ακο!, 6, (com. thought to be fr. ΠΙΝ02 a pine,
and so prop. 'a pine-board'; ace. to the conjecture of
Buttmann, Ausf. Spr. i. 74 n., fr. ιινάξ for ν\άξ [i. e.
anything broad and fiat (cf. Eng. planky] with ι in-
serted, as in πινυτο! for πνυτο! [ace. to Fick i. 146 fr.
Skr. pinaka, a stick, staff]), fr. Hom. down ; 1. a
board, a tablet. 2. a dish, plate, platter : Mt. xiv. 8,
510
1 1 ; Mk. vi. 25, [27 Lchm. br.], 28 ; Lk. xi. 39 ; Horn. Od.
1, 111 ; It), 49; al.*
iriva; impf. enivov, fut. πίομαι [of. W. 90 sq. (KG)], 2
pers. sing, πίίσαί (Lk. .xvii. 8 [(see reff. in κατακαυχάο-
μαι)]) ; pf. 3 pers. sing. (Rev. xviii. 3) πίπωκί 11 G, but
L Τ WII mrg. plur. -καν, for Λτΐιίΰΐι L ed. ster. Tr txt.
ΛνΐΙ t.\t. read πίπτωκαν (see -γΊνομαϊ) ; 2 aor. tviov, impv.
Trie (l.k. .xii. 19), inf. mf'iv ([Alt. xx. 22; .\xvii. 34 (not
Tdf.); Mk. X. 3.s] ; Acts xxiii. 12 [not AVH], 21 ; Ro.
xiv. 21 [not Wil], etc.), and in colloquial form πΐχ (Lchm.
in .In. iv. 9 ; Rev. xvi. β), and π^Ιυ (Τ Tr Wll in Jn. iv.
7, 9 sq.; Τ WH in 1 Co. i.x. 4 ; x. 7; Rev. xvi. 6 ; Tin Mt.
xxvii. 34 (bis); WW in Acts xxiii. 12, 21 ; Ro. xiv. 21,
and often among the var. of the codd.) — on these forms
see [esp. WH. App. p. 1 70] ; Frilzsche, De conforraatione
N. T. critica etc. p. 27 sq. ; B. 66 (58) sq. ; [Curlius, Das
Verbiim, ii. 103]; Sept. for ΠΠΕ/; [fr. Horn, down]; to
drink: absol., Lk. xii. 19; Jn. iv. 7, 10; 1 Co. xi. 25;
figuratively, to receive into the soul what serves to re-
fresh, strengthen, nourish it unto life eternal, .In. vii. 37 ;
on the various uses of the phrase eauUiv κ. niveiv see in
(σθίω, a. ; τρώγαν κ- πίιχιν, of those living in fancied
security, Mt. xxiv. .'J8 ; ττίνω with an ace. of the thing, to
drink a thing [cf. W. 198 (187) n.], Mt. vi. 25 [G Tom.
AVIIbr. thecl.], 31 ; xxvi. 29; Mk. .xiv. 25 ; xvi. 18; Rev.
xvi. 6 ; to use a thing for drink, Lk. i. 15 ; xii. 29 ; Ro.
xiv. 21 ; 1 Co. x. 4 [cf. W. § 40, 3 b.] ; το αίμα of Christ,
see αίμα, fin. ; ro ποτημιον i. e. what is in the cup, 1 Co. x.
21 ; xi. 27, etc. (see ποτήριον, a.), ή γη is said nivdv τον
vfTOv, to suck in, absorb, imbibe, Heb. vi. 7 (Deut. xi. 1 1 ;
Ildt. 3, 117; 4, 198; Verg. eel. 3, 111 sat prata bibe-
runt). πίνω e/c w. a gen. of the vessel out of which
one drinks, ex τον ποτηριού, Alt. xxvi. 27 ; Mk. xiv. 23 ;
1 Co. X. 4 [cf. above]; xi. 28, (.\rstph.eqq. 12S9) ; ck w.
a gen. denoting the drink of which as a supply one
drinks, Mt. xxvi. 29 ; Mk. xiv. 25 ; ex τοΰ ϋίατος, Jn. iv.
13 SI). ; cK τοΰ o'mv (or θυμοϋ). Rev. xiv. 10 ; xviii. 3 [L
om. Tr WII br. τοΰ οΓι/ου] ; από w. a gen. of the drink,
Lk. xxii. 18. [Cf. B. § 132, 7 ; W. 199 (187). Co.mp. :
κατά-, συμ-πίνω.]
ΐΓΐότηϊ, ητοί, ή, (πίων !a.t), fa In ex ί! : Ro. xi. 1 7. (Aris-
tot., Tlieophr., al. ; Sept. for It? 1 .) *
πιπραακω : impf. Ιπ'ιπρασκον ; pf. πίπρακα \ Pass., pres.
ptcp. ττίπ-ρασκόμί i/of ; pf. \iti;^. πιπραμϊνος; 1 aor. (ττρά-
θην ; (fr. π(ράα> to cross, to transport to a distant land) ;
fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down ; Sept. for 153 ; to sell : τί,
\It. xiii. 46 [on the use of the pf., cf. Soph. Glossary etc.
Tntrod. § 82, 4] ; Acts ii. 45 ; iv. 34 ; v. 4 ; w. gen. of price,
Mt. xxvi. 9 ; Mk. xiv. 5 ; Jn. xii. 5, (Deut. xxi. 14) ; τινά,
one into slavery, Mt. xviii. 25 ; hence metaph. π^πραμί-
νοί ίπ!> την άμηρτίαν, [Α. V. sold under sin'] i. e. entirely
under the control of the love of sinning, Ro. vii. 14
{€πράβησαντο\3 ποιησαι TO πονηρον, 2 Κ. xvii. 17; 1 Alacc.
i. 15, cf. 1 K. XX. (xxi.) 2:> : w. a dat. of the master to
whom one is sold as a slave. Lev. xxv. 39 ; Deut. .xv. 1 2 ;
xxviii. 68 ; Bar. iv. 6 ; Soph. Trach. 252 ; ίαυτόν tiw, of
one bribed to give himself up wholly to another's will,
τώ Φιλίιτπω, Dem. p. 148, 8).*
irCirrw ; [impf. 'πιιττοι/ (Mk. xiv. 35 Τ Tr mrg. WH)] ;
fut. π(σονμαί ; 2 aor. (πισον and ace. to the Ale.x. form
(received everywhere by Lchm. [exc. Lk. xxiii. 30],
Tdf. [exc. Rev. vi. 16], Tr [exc. ibid.], WII ; and also
usedby RGin Rev.i.17; V. 14; vi. 13; xi.l6; xvii. 10)
ΙτΓβσα (cf. [ WII. App. p. 164 ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123] ; Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 724 sq. ; Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 277 sq., and
see άπίρχομαι init.) ; pf. πίπτωκα, 2 pers. sing, -kis (Rev.
ii. 5 Τ WH; see κοπιάω), 3 pers. plur. -καΐ' (Rev. xviii.
3, L ed. ster. Tr txt. WII txt.; see γίνομαι) ; (fr. ΠΕΤΩ,
as τίκτω fr. ΊΈΚΩ [cf. Curlius; Etymol. §214; Ver-
bum, ii. p. 398]) ; fr. Horn, down; Sept. chielly for Ssj •
to fall ; used 1. of descent from a higher place
to a lower ; a. prop, to fall (either from or upon,
i. q. Lat. incido, deciilo) : ϊπί w. ace. of place, Alt. x. 29 ;
xiii. 5, [7], 8 ; xxi. 44 [T om. L WII Tr mrg. br. the vs.] ;
Mk. iv. 5; Lk. viii. G [here TTrWlI καταπ•.], 8 Rec;
Rev. viii. 10 ; ftr τι (of the thing that is entered ; into),
Mt. XV. 14 ; xvii. 15 ; Mk. iv. 7 [I, mrg. eVi] sq. ; Lk. vi.
3;) R (i L mrg. (but L txt. Τ Tr AVH (μπίπτ.) ; viii. 8 G L
TTrWH, [14; xiv. SLTTrWH]; Jn. xii. 24; ti'r
(upon) την γην, Rev. vi. 13 ; i.x. 1 ; iv μίσω, w. gen. of the
thing, Lk. viii. 7 ; πάρα την όδόν, Mt. xiii. 4 ; Mk. iv. 4 ;
Lk. viii. 5 ; to fall from or ilown : foil, by arto w. gen. of
place, Mt. xv. 27 ; xxiv. 29 [here Tdf. «; Lk. xvi. 21] ;
Acts XX. 9 ; foil, by ϊκ w. gen. of place, [Mk. xiii. 25 L Τ
Tr WH] ; Rev. viii. 10; ix. 1 ; i. ([. to be thrust down, Lk.
X. 18. b. metaph. : ου πίπτα ιπί τίνα 6 ^λιοί, i. e.
the heat of the sun does not strike upon them or in-
commode them, Rev. vii. 16; [a;(Xit <c. σκότος. Acts xiii.
11 L Τ Tr WII] ; ό κλήρος πίπτιι ϊπί τίνα, the lot falls
upon one. Acts i. 26 ; φόβος πίπτίΐ ΐπί τίνα, falls upon or
seizes one, [Acts xix. 17 L Tr] ; Rev. xi. 11 Rec; [to
πνινμα TO άγιον. Acts x. 44 Lchm.] ; πίπτω ΰπο κρίσιν, to
fall under judgment, come under condemnation, .lames v.
12 [where Rec." fit ύπόκμισιν]. 2. of descent from
an erect to a prostrate position (Lat. labor, ruo; prolabor,
prociilo; coll(d)or, etc.); a. properly; a. to fall
doirn: cVt λίθαν, Lk. XX. 18; λίθος πίτττιι ('πι τίνα, Mt.
xxi. 44 [Tom. L WH Tr mrg. br. the vs.] ; Lk. .xx. 18;
TO ορός ('πι τίνα, Lk. xxiii. 30; Rev. vi. 16. β. to be
prostrated, fall prostrate; of those overcome by terror
or astonishment or grief : χαμαί, Jn. xviii. 6 ; iis το ίδαφος,
Acts xxii. 7 ; «V'l την γήν. Acts ix. 4 ; [tVi πρόσωπον,
Mt. xvii. 6]; or under the attack of an evil spirit: ΐπϊ
της -γης. Mk. ix. 20; or falling dead suddenly : προς τοΰί
πόίίΐΓ τνός ό>ς νικρός. Rev. i. 1 7 ; πισωκ (ξ(\1τυξ(. Acts ν.
5; πίπτ. παρά (LTTr W11 προς) τυνς πόδας τινός, ibid. 10;
absol. 1 Co. χ. 8 ; στόματι μαχαίρας, Lk. xxi. 24 ; absol. of
the dismemberment of corpses by decay, Heb. iii. 1 7 ( Xum.
xiv. 29, 32). γ. to prostrate one's self, used now of
suppliants, now of persons rendering homage or worship
to one : tVi τής γής, Mk. xiv. 35 ; ptcp. with προσκυνιΐν, as
finite verb, Mt. ii. 1 1 ; iv. 9 ; xviii. 26 ; πίπταν κ. προσ-
Kvvf'iv, Rev. V. 14; xix. 4; (π(σαπροσκυνησαι. Rev. xxii. 8;
πίπτ. (Ίς Tois πόδιις (αίτοϋ). Mt. xviii. 2:i Rec; ei'r [T Tr
WHwpos] T. πόδας τιιό'γ, Jn. xi. 32; προς τ. πόδας τινός,
Mk. ν. 22 ; Ιπαρα τους πόδαςτινός, Lk. viii. 41] ; (μπροσθα
ΙΓκτιΒίΛ
511
ττιστενω
ιω¥ jroSSiv T»i/ot, Rev. xix. 10; ίνάπιόν rtvor, Rev. iv. 10;
V. 8 •, iVi πρόσωπον, Mt. xxvi. 39 ; Lk. v. 12 ; fVl πράσ-
tonov παρά tovs πόδαϊ tipos, Lk. xvii. 16 ; πισων cVl Toir
TToSav προσίκύνησι, Acts x. 25 ; ττίσώ» «Vl πρόσωπον προσ-
κύνησα, 1 Co. xiv. 25 ; cVl τα πρόσωπα και προσκυκΕΐκ,
Rev. vii. 11 [tVl πρόσωπον Kec] ; xi. 16. δ. to fall
out, fall from : tfpi| t « τ-^γ κεφαλής ιτεσΐΐται, i. q. shall
perish, be lost, Acts xxvii. 34 Kec. €. to fall down,
fall in ruin : of buildings, walls, etc., Mt. vii. 25, [27] ;
Lk. vi. 49 (whereTTrWH σννίπ(σ()•, Heb. -xi. 30;
oIkos iV οίκον πίπτει, Lk. xi. 1 7 [see ί'πί, C. I. 2 c] ; πυρ-
yoi fVi τίνα, Lk. xiii. 4 ; σκηνή η π€πτωκυ1α, the tabernacle
that has fallen down, a fig. description of the family of
David and the theocracy as reduced to extreme decay
[cf. σκηνή, fin.], Acts xv. 16. of a city : ίπ^σί, i. e. has
been overthrown, destroyed. Rev. xi. 13 ; xiv. 8 ; xvi. 19 ;
xviii. 2, (Jer. xxviii. (li.) 8). b. metaph. o.
to be cast down from a stale of prosperity : πόθιν πίπτωκας,
from what a height of Christian knowledge and attain-
ment thou hast declined, Rev. ii. 5 G L Τ Tr WH (see
above ad init.). β. to fall from a state of upright-
ness, i. e. to sin: opp. to ίστάναι, 1 Co. x. 12; opp. to
στήκ(ΐν, w. a dat. of the pers. whose interests suffer by
the sinning [cf. W. § 31, 1 k.], Ro. xiv. 4 ; to fall into a
State of wickedness, Rev. xviii. 3 L ed. ster. Tr WH txt.
[see πίνω]. γ. to perish, i. e. to come to an end, dis-
appear, cease : of virtues, 1 Co. xiii. 8 L Τ Tr WH [R. V.
faiQ ; lo lose authority, no longer have force, of sayings,
precepts, etc., Lk. xvi. 1 7 (ωστ( οΰ χαμαΐ πισί'ιται ο τι αν
tinrjt, Plat. Euthyphr. §17; irrita cadunt promissa, Liv.
2, 31). i. q. to be removed from power by death, Rev. xvii.
10; to fail of participating in, miss a share in, the Mes-
sianic salvation, Ro. xi. 11, [22] ; Heb. iv. 11 [(yet see
€1», I. 5 f.)• CoMP. : ava-, άντί-, άπο-, (Κ-, iv-, ini-, κατά-,
πάρα-, π(μι-, προσ-, συμ- πίπτω.] *
Πισ -iSCa, -as, ή, Pisidia, a region of Asia Minor, bounded
by Pamphylia and the Pamphylian Sea, Phrygia, and
Lycaonia: Acts xiii. 14 RG; .xiv. 24. [B. D. s. v. Pisi-
dia.] •
nio-CSios, -a, -ov, i. q. Πισώικύς, belonging to Pisidia :
Αντιόχεια ή Πισ-ιδία, i.e. taking its name from Pisidia
(see Άι/τιοχ«α, 2) : Acts xiii. 14 L Τ Tr WH.*
τη,στίίω ; irapf. (πίστινον; fut. πιστ(ίσω\ 1 aor. ί'πί-
στευσα: \)(- π(π1στ(υκα\ plupf. (without augm., cf. W.
§12, 9; [B. .'i3 (29)]) π^πιστ^Ικίΐν (Acts xiv. 23);
Pass., pf. πεττίστίυμαι ; 1 aor. ϊπιστ^ύθην; (πιστόϊ); Sept.
for i'OXri ; in class. Grk. fr. Aeschyl., .Soph., Eur., Thuc.
down; to believe, i.e. 1. intrans. to think lo be
true; to be persuaded of; lo credit, place confidence
in ; a. univ. : the thing believed being evident
from the preceding context, Mt. xxiv. 23, [2C] ; Mk. xiii.
21 ; 1 Co. xi. 18 ; w. an ace. of the thing. Acts xiii. 41
(LTTrWII 5 for Rec. ω) ; lo credit, have confidence,
foil, by ότι. Acts ix. 26 ; τικί, to believe one's words, Mk.
xvi. 13 sq. ; 1 .In. iv. 1 ; τικΐ ort, Jn. iv. 21 ; τώ ^(ihti, 2 Th.
ii. 11 ; ίΤίρίτιΐΌΓ, ότι, .Jn. ix. 18. b. spec, in a moral
•nd religious reference, πιστινίίν is used in the N. T. of
«fe* eonviction and trust to which a man is impelled by a
certain inner and higher prerogative and taw of his soid:
thus it stands a. absol. to trust in Jesus or in God
as able to aid either in obtaining or in doing somethino• :
Mt. viii. 1 3 ; xxi. 22 ; Mk. v. 36 ; ix. 23 sq. ; Lk. viii. 50 ;
Jn. xi. 40 ; foil, by 5τι, Mt. ix. 28 ; Mk. xi. 23 ; [Heb. xi.
6] ; τώ λόγω, ω (όν) tmfv ό Ίησου!, Jn. iv. 50. β.
of the credence given to God's messengers and their words,
w. a dat. of the person or thing: Μωίσεΐ, Jn. v. 46. to
the prophets, Jn. xii. 38; Acts xxiv. 14; xxvi. 27; Ro.
X. 16 ; cVi πάσίν oh (λάλησαν ο! προφήται, to place reli-
ance on etc. Lk. .xxiv. 25. to an angel, Lk. i. 20; foil,
by ότι, ibid. 4S. to John the Baptist, Mt. xxi. 25
(26), 32; Mk. xi. 31; Lk. xx. 5. to Christ's words,
Jn. iii. 12; v. 38, 46sq.; vi. 30; viii. 45 sq.; x. [37], 38•;
ToZf fpyoisoi Christ, ibid. 38'. to the teachings of e ν a n-
gelists and apostles. Acts viii. 12; τ^ άληθίΐα, 2 Th.
ii. 12; ίπιστίύθη το μαρτύρων, the testimony was believed,
2Th.i. 10 [cf. W. §39, 1 a. ; B. 175 (152)]; τ^γραφά, Jn.
ii. 22. iv τω fiayyfXiu, to put faith in the gospel, Mk.
i. 15 [B. 174 (151 sq.)'; cf. W. 213 (200 sq.)] (Ignat. ad
Philad. 8, 2 [(but see Zahn's note) ; cf. Jn. iii. 15 in y. be-
low]), γ. used especially of the f ai th by which a
man embraces Jesus, i.e. a conviction, full of joyful
trust, that Jesus is lite Messiah — the divinely appointed
author of eternal salvation in the kingdom of God, con-
joined tcith obedience lo Christ: πιστ. τον vlov τοΰ βιοϋ
(ΐναι Ίησοϋν Χριστόν, Acts viii. 37 Rec; (πιστ(1θη (was
believed on [cf. AV. § 39, la.; B. 175 (152)]) iv κόσμω,
1 Tim. iii. 16. the phrase πιστηΐ(ΐν dt τοκ Ίησοϋν, eii τ.
v\ov τον 6eo\), etc., is very common ; prop, lo have a faith
directed unto, believing or in faith to give one's self up lo,
Jesus, etc. (cf. W. 213 (200 sq.) ; [B. 174 (151)]) : Mt.
xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42 [RGLTrtxt.]; Jn. ii. 11; iii. 15
RG, 16, 18, 36; vi. 29, 35,40,47 [RGL]; vii. 5, [38],
39,48; viii. 30 ; ix. 35 sq. ; x. 42 ; xi. 25 sq. 45, 48 ; ,xiL
11,37, 42, 44, [46]; .xiv.1,12; xvi. 9 ; xvii. 20; Acts x.
43; xix. 4; Ro. x. 14; Galii. 16; Phil i. 29; 1 Jn. v. 10;
1 Pet. i. 8 ; €ty το φως, Jn. xii. 36 ; ft? το όνομα αντον, Jn.
i. 12; ii. 23; iiL 18; l,Tn.v.l3; τω όκο'μ. αύτοϋ, to com-
mit one's self trustfully to the name (see όνομα, 2 p. 448*),
1 Jn. iii. 23 ; iπ' αυτόν, (πι τον κΰριον, to have a faith di-
rected towards, etc. (see iπί, C. I. 2 g. a. p. 235"' [cf. W.
and B. u. s., also B. § 147, 25]) : Mt. xxvii. 42 Τ Tr t.xt.
WH ; Jn. iii. 1 5 L txt. ; Acts ix. 42 ; xi. 1 7 ; xvi. 31 ; xxii.
19, [(cf. Sap. xii. 2)] ; <'π' αϋτώ, to build one's faith on,
to place one's faith upon, [see fVt, B. 2 a. γ. p. 233' ; B.
U.S.]: Ro. ix. 33; x. 11; 1 Tim. i. 16; 1 Pet. ii. 6; iv
αΙτώ, to put faith in him, Jn. iii. 15 [L mrg. ; cf. Τ Tr
WH also (who prob. connect iv αυτω with the foil, ΐχτ] ;
cf. Westcott, Com. ad loc, Meyer, al.)] (cf. Jer. xii. 6;
Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 22, where πιστ. tv τινι means to put
confidence in one, to trust one; [cf. Mk. i. 15 above,
β. fin.]) ; iv τοΰτω πιστ(ίομ€», on this rests our faith
[A.V. δ// this tve believe^, Jn. xvi. 30; with the simple
dative, τώ κνρίω, to (yield faith to) believe [cf. B. 1 73
(151)]: Mt. xxvii. 42 RG L Trmrg.; Acts v. 14; xviii.
8 ; supply τούτω before oj in Ro. x. 14 ; lo trust in Christ
[Godl, 2 Tim. i. 12 ; δια τινοΐ, through one's agency to
512
-TTunii
be brought to faith, Jn. i. 7 ; I Co. iii. 5 ; διά Ίησοϋ tit
β(όν, 1 Pet. i. 21 II G Tr mrg. ; δια της χάριτος. Acts xviii.
27 ; hia τοΰ λσ/ου αΰτώι» (is ('μί, tin. xvii. 20 ; διό τι, Jn.
iv. 3y, [41], 42 ; xiv. 11. n-KTrcum foil, by Srt with a sen-
tence in which either the nature and dignity of Clirist
or his blessings are set forth : Jn. vi. G9 ; vUi. 24 ; x. 3S'
RG; xi. 27, [42]; xiii. 19; [xiv. 10]; .\vi. 27, 30; .xvii.
8, 21 ; 1 Jn.v. 1, 5: Ko. vi. 8; 1 Th. iv. 14 ; μοι mi, Jn.
xiv. 11 ; Ti, Jn. xi. 26; ττιστίίω σωθηναι. Acts .xv. 11 ;
the simple ηιστ^ϋιιν is used eniphatically, of those who
acknowledge Jesus as the saviour and devote theniselves
to him : Mk. xv. 32 [here L adds αύτ-5] ; Lk. viii. 1 2 sq. ;
x.\ii. 67; Jn. i. 50 (.'5 1 ) ; iii. 18; iv. 42, 48,53; v. 44 ; vi.
36, 64; ix. 38; x. 25 sq. ; .xii. 39, 47 Rec. ; xvi. 30; xx.
31 ; Acts V. 14 ; [xiii. 39] ; xv. 5 ; xviii. 8 ; [xxi. 25] ; Ro.
i. 16; iii. 22: iv. 11; .x. 4; xv. 13; 2Co. iv. 13; Eph. i.
13, [19]; 2 Th. i. 10; Ileb. iv. 3; with ίξ ό\ης καρδίας
added. Acts viii. 37 Rec. ; w. a dat. of instr. καρδία, Ιίο.
χ. 10; ptcp. pres. o'l πιστιύοντα, as subst. : Acts ii. 44 ;
Ro. iii. 22; 1 Co. i. 21 ; Gal. iii. 22 ; [Eph. i. 19]; 1 Th.
i. 7; ii. 10, 13 ; 2 Th. i. 10 Rec.; 1 Pet. ii. 7; i. q. who
are on the point of believing, 1 Co. xiv. 22, cf. 24 S(j. ; aor.
ίπίστίνσα (marking entrance into a state; see|3ασιλfΓω,
fin.), / became a believer, a Christian, [A. V. believed] :
Actsiv. 4; viii. 13; xiii. 12,48; xiv. 1 ; xv. 7 ; xvii. 12,
34; Ro. xiii. 11 ; 1 Co. iii. 5; xv. 2, 11 ; with the addi-
tion of eVi τον κύμιον (see above). Acts ix. 42 ; ptcp. πι-
rrrdaat, Acts xi. 21; xix. 2; ό τηστ(νσας, Mk. .xvi. 16;
plur., ibid. 1 7 ; Actsiv.32; ο'ιπίπιστ^υκύτα, they that have
believed (have become believeni) : Acts xix. 18; xxi. 20;
[on (John's use of) the tenses of πιστεύω see Westcott on
1 Jn.iii. 23]. It must be borne in mind, that in Paul's
conception of το τηστίΰιιν (Ις Χριστοί», the prominent ele-
ment is the grace of God towards sinners as manifested
and pledged (and to be laid hold of by faith) in Jesus,
particularly in his death and resurrection, as ap-
pears esp. in Ro. iii. 25 ; iv. 24 ; x. 9 ; 1 Th. iv. 14 ; but
in John's conception, it is the metaphysical relationship
of Christ with (jod and close ethical intimacy with him,
as well as the true ' life ' to be derived from Christ as
its source; cf. Rilckert,\i3,s Abendmahl, p. 251. More-
over, moTfieiv is used by John of various degrees of
faith, from its first beginnings, its incipient stirring with-
in the soul, up to the fullest assurance, .Jn. ii. 23 (cf. 24) ;
viii. 31 ; of a faith which does not yet recognize Jesus
as the Messiah, but as a prophet very like the Messiah,
Jn. vii. 31 ; and to signify that one's faith is preserved,
strengthened, increased, raised to the level which it
ought to reach, xi. 15 ; xiii. 19 ; xiv. 29 ; xix. 35 ; xx. 31 ;
1 Jn. V. 13'' Rec; [cf. reff. s. v. ηίστκ, fin.]. -jna-Tevfiv
is applied also to the faith by which one is persuaded
that Jesus was raised from the dead, inasmuch as by
that fact God declared him to be his Son and the >Ies-
siah : Jn. xx. 8, 25, 29 ; (ντη καρδία πιστ. οτι 6 θ(6ς αντον
ijytipev Ικ νικρων, Ro. χ. 9 [cf. Β. § 133, 19]. Since ace.
to the conception of Christian faith Christ alone is the
author of salvation, ό πιστ(ΰων repudiates all the various
things which aside from Christ are commended as means
of salvation (such e. g. as abstinence from flesh and
wine), .and understands that all things are lawful to him
which do not lead him away from Christ ; hence πιστιϋίί
{τις) φαγύν πάντα, hath faith to eat all things or so that
he eats all things, Ro. xiv. 2; cf. RUckert ad loo.; [\V.
§ 44, 3 b. ; per contra B. 273 sq. (235)]. S. πιστί ifw
used in ref. to God has various senses: aa. it de-
notes the mere acknowledgment of his existence : ότι ό
θιος (ΐς fOTiv, Jas. ii. 19; acknowledgment joined to ai>-
proi)riate trust, absol. Jude 5 ; ils Oeov, .In. xii. 44 ; xiv. 1 ;
1.(1• to believe and embrace what God has made ki\uuii
either through Christ or concerning Christ τω
θ(ώ, Jn. v. 24 ; Acts xvi. 34 ; Tit. iii. 8 ; 1 Jn. v. 10 ; en'i
τόν Ofov, Ro. iv. 5 ; την άγάπην, ην ()(fi ά θ(ός, 1 Jn. iv. 16;
ΐΐς την μαρτνρίαυ, ην κτλ., 1 Jn. ν. 10. ββ. to trust :
τψ θιω, God promising a thing, Ro. iv. 3, 17 (on which
see κατίναντι) : Gal. iii. 6 ; [.Jas. ii. 23] ; absol. Ro. iv.
18 ; foil, by ότι. Acts xxvii. 25. c. πιστ. is used in
an ethical sense, of confidence in the goodness of men:
η αγάπη ιτιστ€ν€ΐ πάντα, 1 Co. xiii. 7. τό TriOTfufti/ is
opp. to ISfiv. Jn. XX. 29 ; to όμάν, ibid, and 1 Pet. i. 8,
(Theoph. ad Autol. 1, 7 fin.), cf. 2 Co. v. 7 ; to dioKpivt•
σθαι. Ro. iv. 1 9 sq. ; xiv. 1, 23, cf. Jas. i. 6 , to o/ioXoyti»,
Ro. X. 9. 2. transitively, τινι τι, to intrust a thing
to one, i. e. to his fidelity : Lk. xvi. 1 1 ; ίαντόν τινι, Jn. iL
24 ; pass. πιστ(ίομαί τι, to be intrusted with a th iny : Ro.
iii. 2 ; 1 Co. ix. 1 7 ; Gal. ii. 7 ; 1 Th. ii. 4 ; 1 Tim. i. 11 ;
Tit. i. 3, (Ignat. ad Philad. 9; exx. fr. prof. auth. are
given in AV, § 39, 1 a.). On the grammat. constr. of the
word cf. B. § 133, 4 [and the summaries in EUicott on
1 Tim. i. 16 ; Vaughan on Ro. iv. 5; Cremer s. v.]. It
does not occur in the Rev., nor in Philem., 2 Pet., 2 and
3 Jn. [Cf. the reEF. s. v. πι'στίί, fin.]•
ΐΓίο-ηκόβ, -ή. -όν, {πιστός), pertaining to belief; a.
having the power of persuading, sk'H/ul in producing be-
lief: Plat. Gorg. p. 455 a. b. trusty, faithful, that
can be relied on : γυνή πιστ. κα\ οίκουρος και πιιβομίνη τω
άνδρί, Artem. oneir. 2, 32 ; often so in Cedrenus [also (of
persons) in Epiph., Jn. Mosch., Sophron. ; cf. Soph. Le.x.
s. v.] ; of commodities i. q. δόκιμοι, genuine, pure, un-
adulterated : so νάρδος πιστική [but A. V. spike- (i. e.
spiked) nard, after the nardi spicati of the Vulg. (in
Mk.)], Mk. xiv. 3 ; Jn. xii. 3, (for nard was often adul-
terated; see Plin. h. n. 12,26 ; Diosc. de mater, med. 1, (J
and 7) ; hence metaph. το πιστικον της καινής διαθήκης
κράμα, Euseb. demonstr. evang. 9, 8 [p. 439 d.]. Cf. the
full discussion of this word in Fritzsche on Mk. p. 596
sqq. ; LUcke on Jn. xii. 3 p. 494 sqq. ; W. 97 (92) sq. ;
[esp. Dr. Jas. Morison on Mk. 1. c.].*
irtoTis, -(ως, ή. {π(ίθω [q. v.]), fr. [Hes., Theogn., Pind.],
Aeschyl., Hdt. down ; Sept. for njns, several times for
ΠΠΧ and nO'Dti; faith; i. e. 1. conviction of the
truth of anything, belief, (Plat., Polyb., Joseph., Plut.;
θαυμάσια και μ(ίζω πίστεως, Diod. 1, 86) ; in the Ν. Τ. of
a conviction or belief respecting man's relationship to God
and divine things, generally with the included idea of
trust and holy fervor born of faith and conjoined with W.
Heb. xi. 1 (where ττ/στίΓ is called (\πιζημίνων vrroaraatSt
wuTTK
513
τίστι^
πραγμάτων ίλιγχο! οΰ βΧιπομίνων) ; ορρ. to ctSoc, 2 Co.
V. 7 ; joined with άγάττη and ίΚπίί, 1 Co. xiii. 13. a.
when it relates to God, πίστκ is the conviction that God
exists and is the creator and ruier of all things, the pro-
vider and beslower of eternal salvation through Christ :
Heb. xi. 6 ; xii. 2 ; xiii. 7 ; πίστις tVi θ(ΰν, Ileb. vi. 1 ; ή
ηίστις νμών ή itpos τίιν θίόν, by ivliich ye turned to God,
1 Th. i. 8 ; την π. υμών κ. ίλττίδα fit θ(όι>, directed unto
God, 1 Pet. i. 21 ; with a gen. of the object [faith i'/i]
(τώχ β(ών, Eur. Med. 414 ; τον 6tov, Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 16,
5 ; cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdbch.on Sap. vi. 1 7 sq. p. 132 ; [cf.
Meyer on Uo. iii. 22; also Mey., EUic, Bp. Lghtft. on Col.
as below, W. 186 (175)]) ; η π. ttjs cvepyeiat τοϋ θ(θϋ
ToC iyeipavTos αυτόν (Christ) iiTTUiv vfKpQiv, Col. ii. 12;
dm πίίττίωί, by the lielp of faith, Ileb. .\i. .'i3, 3!) ; κατά
πίστιν, i. q. mardovTei, Heb. .\i. 13; πίστα, dat. of means
or of mode bg failli or bg believing, prompted, actuated, bg
faith, Heb. .xi. 3 sq. 7-9, 17, 20-24, 27-29, 31; dat. of
cause, because of faith, Heb. xi. 5, 11, 30. b. in
reference to Christ, it denotes a strong and welcome
conviction OT belief that Jesus is the Messiah, through whom
we obtain eternal salvation in the kingdom of God (on this
see more at length in πιστΕύω, 1 b. γ.) : ο. univ. :
w. gen. of the object (see above, in a.), Ίι;σοϋ Χοιστοϋ,
Ro. iii. 22; Gal. ii. 16; iii. 22; Eph. iii. 12; ΊησοΙ. Rev.
xiv. 12; Χριστοϊι, I'Uil. iii. 'J: τοϋ νΐηϋ τοΟ θ(οϋ, (ial. ii.
20 ; τοϊ) κυρίου ημών Ίησοΰ Χρίστου, .las. ii. 1 ; μοϋ (i. e.
in Christ), Rev. ii. 13, (certainly we must reject the in-
terpretation, /hiVA in God of which Jesus Christ is the
author, advocated by Van Hengel, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 314
sqq., and H. P. Berlage, Dis(iuisitio de formulae Paulinae
πίστίΓ 'Ii;<7oO Χρίστου signific.atione. Lugd. Bat. 18.")6) ;
τοϋ (ϋαγγ(\ίου, Phil. i. 27; ά\ηθfίas, 2 Th. ii. 13. with
Prepositions; «f (toward [cf. els• B. Π. 2 a.]) τον κύριον
ημών ^Ιησοϋν, Acts χχ. 21 ; els Χριστόν• Acts .xxiv. 24 ;
x.xvi. l.*^ ; η cts Χριστον ιτίστις υμών. Col. ii. 5; [πίστιν
ίχαν fif €μί, Mk. ix. 42 Tr mrg.] ; προ: τ6ν κύρ. Philem.
5 [L Tr WH fir] ([see προΈ, Lie; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad
loc.] ; unless here we prefer to render πίστιν fdeiilg [see
2, below] ; cf. Meyer ad loc. and W. § 50, 2) ; π. ή ev Χρ.
Ίησοϋ, reposed in Christ Jesus, 1 Tim. iii. 13 ; 2 Tim. iii.
15 ; η π. νμών (ν Χρ. ^\ησ. Col. i. 4 ; η κατά τίνα (see κατά,
II. 1 e.) πίστα ΐντω κνρίω, Eph. i. 15 ; tv τω αίματι αντοϋ,
Ro. iii. 25 [yet cf. Aleyer]. πίστις [cf. W. l.'O (1 14)]
and ή πίστίί simply : Lk. xviii. 8; Acts xiii. 8 ; xiv. 22,
27; XV. 9; xvii. 31 ; Ro. [iii. 27 (on which see κόμοΓ,
3)], 31 ; iv. 14 ; v. 2 [L Tr WH br. τχ, πίστ({] ; ix. 32 ; χ.
8, 17; xii. 3, 6; 1 Co. [.xii. 9 (here of a charism)];
xvi. 13 ; 2 Co. iv. 13; [viii. 7] ; x. 15; Gal. iii. 14, 23, 25
sq.; ν.ό; vi.lO; Eph.ii.8; iii.l7; iv.5; vi.l6; 2 Th.
i. 4 ; 1 Tim. i. 2, 4 (on the latter pass, see οικονομία),
19 ; ii. 7 (on which see άλήβιια. I. 2 c.); iii. 9; iv. 1, 6;
V. 8; vi. 10,12,21 ; 2 Tim. i. 5; ii. 18; iii. 8, 10; iv. 7;
Tit. i. 1, 4, 13 ; ii. 2 ; iii. 15 ; Jas. ii. 5 ; 1 Pet. i. 5 ; 2 Pet.
i. 1, 5. with a gen. of the subject: Lk. xxii. 32 ; Ro. i.
8, 12 ; 1 Co. ii. 5 ; xv. 14, 17 ; 2 Co. i. 24 ; Phil. i. 25 ; ii.
17; 1 Th. iii. 2, .0-7, 10; 2 Th. i. 3; iii. 2; Philem. 6;
Jas. i. 3 ; 1 Pet. i. 7, 9 [here WH om. gen.] ; 1 Jn. v. 4 ;
33
Rev. xiii. 10 ; πΧήρηί πίστιω! κ- πναίματο!. Acts vi. 5;
πνεϋματο! κ- πίστ(ως, Acts -xi. 24 ; πίστεως κ- &vvάμ(ωt,
Acts vi. 8 Rec. ; tj πίστα ίστηκϊναι, Ro. xi. 20 ; 2 Co. i.
24 ; iv rj πίστα στήκαν, 1 Co. xvi. 13 ; avcu, 2 Co. xiii. 5;
μίνΐίν, 1 Tim. ii. 1 ϋ ; ϊμμίνιιν rg π. Acts xiv. 22 ; ΐπιμ*•
vav, Col. i. 23 ; aTtpfus tj π. 1 Pet. v. 9 ; στ(ρ(οϋμαι r^ π.
Acts xvi. 5 ; β€ίίαιοι.μαι iv [L Τ Tr WH om. cVj rj π. Col.
ii. 7. Sinue faith is a power that seizes upon the soul,
one who yields himself to it is said ύπακοναν ttj πίστα.
Acts vi. 7 ; hence ίιπακοη τηί πίστεως, obedience ren-
dered to faith [W. 186 (175)], Ro. i. 5; xvi. 26 ; ό «
πίστ€ωί sc. ων, depending on faith, i. q. ό iriaTeuiDK [see
«, II. 7], Ro. iii. 2iJ ; plur.. Gal. iii. 7, 9 ; ό ϊκ πίστιωί
Ά3ραάμ, he who has the same faith as Abraham, Ro. iv.
16 ; (K πίστιωί firat, to be related, akin to, faith [cf. «,
U.S.], Gal. iii. 12. ϋΐκαιος ix πίστ(ως, Ro. i. 17; Gal.
iii. 11 ; δικαιοσίνη η iK πίστ. ΙΙυ. ix. 3'.> ; η ίκ πίστ. due.
Ro. χ. 6 ; δικαιοσ- ix πίστιως tis πίστιν, sjiringing from
faith (and availing) to (arouse) faith (in those who as
yet have it not), Ro. i. 17; δικαιοσύνη η δια πίστίωί
Χρίστου, ... ή ί κ β(οϋ δικ• «Vi rij πίστα, Phil. iii. 9 ; pass.
δικαιονσθαι ffiVrft, Ro. iii. 28 ; δικαιαϋν τίνα δια ττίστίωι
Χριστον, Gal. ii. 16: δια τ. πίστ^ωί, ϋο. iii. 30; δικ. τίνα
iK πίστίωί. ibid. ; Gal. iii. 8 ; pass., Ro. v. 1 ; Gal. iii. 24 ;
(ναγγ(λίζομαι την πίστιν, to proclaim the glad tidings
of faith in Christ, Gal. i. 23 ; άκοη πίστ(ως, instruction
concerning the necessity of f.iith [see ακοή, 3 a.], Gal. iii.
2, 5 ; ή πι'στίϊ is joined with η αγάπη: 1 Th. iii. 6 ; v.
8; 1 Tim. i. 14; ii. 15; iv. 12; vi. 11 ; 2Tim.ii. 22; with
a subj. gen. Rev. ii. 19; πίστκ δι αγάπη! ivtpyovμivη,
Gal. V. 6 ; αγάπη μΐτα πίστεως, Ej)h. vi. 23 : αγάπη iK π'ι•
στ€ω! ανυπόκριτου, 1 Ί im. i. 5 ; πίστις και άγήττη ή iv Χρι-
στώ ^Ιησοϋ, 2 Tim. i. 13 ; φιΧάν τίνα iv πίστ^ι, Tit. iii. 15
(where see De Wette) ; ΐργον πίστιω; (cf. 'ργον, 3 p.
248'' near bot.), 1 Th. i. 3 , 2 Th. i. 11. β. in an
ethical sense, persuasion or conviction (which springs
from faith in Christ as the sole author of salvation ; cf.
πιστίνω, 1 b. γ. fin.) concerning things lawful for a Chris-
tian : Ro. xiv. 1, 23 ; πίστιν ΐχαν, ibid. 22. c. univ.
the religious belief of Christians ; a. subjectively;
Eph. iv. 13, where cf. Meyer; in the sense of a mere
acknowledgment of divine things and of the claims of
Christianity, Jas. ii. 14. 17 sq. 20, 22, 24, 26. β. ob-
jectively, the suhsfanre of Christian faith or what is be-
lieved by Christians : ή παραδοθίΐσα π. Jude 3 ; ή άγιωτάτι;
υμών πίστκ, ib. 20. There are some who think this
meaning of the word is to be recognized also in 1 Tim.
i. 4, 19 ; ii. 7 : iii. 9 ; iv. 1, 6 ; v. 8 ; vi. 10, 21, (cf. Pflei-
derer, Paulinismus p. 468 [Eng. trans, ii. p. 200]) ; but
Weiss (Bibl. Theol. d. X. T. § 107 a. note) correctly ob-
jects, " πίστιί is rather the form in which the truth (as
the substance of right doctrine) is subjectively appro-
priated " ; [cf. Meyer on Ro. i. 5 (and Prof. Dwight's
additional note) ; EUicott on Gal. i. 23 ; Bp. Lghtft. on
Gal. p. 157]. d. with the predominant idea of
trust (or con^ifence) whether in God or in Christ, spring-
ing from faith in the same: Mt. viii. 10; xv. 28; Lk. vii
9, 50 ; xvii. 5 ; Heb. ix. 28 Lchm. ed. ster. ; x. 22 ; Jis.
TTiTTOS"
514
ττλάίίΐ?
i. 6; with a gen. of the subject: Mt. ix. 2, 22, 29; xv.
28; ilk. ii. 5; v. 34; x.S2; [Lk. v. 20]; viii. 25,48; xvii.
19 ; xviii 42 ; w. a gen. of the object in wliich trust is
placed: τοϋ ονόματος αυτόν. Acts iii. 16; πίστιν ΐχ(ΐν,
[.Mt. xvii. 20]; .\.\i. 21; Mk. iv. 40; Lk. xvii. C; πάσαν
την πίστιν, (' all the faith ' that can be thought of), 1 Co.
xiii. 2 ; ίχ(ΐν πι'στιν θ(ον, to trust in God, Mk. xi. 22 ; ίχ(ΐν
τιίστιν τοϋ σωδίϊΐ'αι, to be healed (see Fritzsche on Alt. |).
843 sq. ; [cf. \V. § 44, 4 a. ; B. 268 (230)]), Acts xiv. 9 ;
ij dtavTOv π., awakened through him. Acts iii. 16 ; (υχη
της πίσΓίωΕ, that proceeds from faith, Jas. v. 15 ; of trust
in the promises of God, Ro. iv. 9, 16, 19 sq.; Ileb. iv. 2;
vi. 12 ; X. .'i8 ,sq. ; w. a gen. of the subject, Ro. iv. 5, 12 ;
π'ιστιι eVi θ^όν, faitli whicli relies on God who grants the
forgiveness of sins to the penitent [see cVi, C. I. 2 g. a],
Heb. vi. 1; δικωοσύνη Trjs ^τίστfωs [cf. AV. 186 (175)],
Ro.iv. 11,13; ή κατά ττίστιν δικαιοσύνη, ΐΙ&\}.χΊ. 7. 2.
fidelity, faithfulness, ι. e. the character of one who can be
relied on : Mt. xxiii. 23 ; Gal. v. 22; Philem. 5 (? see above
in b. a.); Tit. ii. 10. of one who keeps his promises: ή
ιτίστίϊ ToC 6foii, subj. gen., Ro. iii. 3. objectively, ^j/iV/^/erf
faith (often so in Attic writ. fr. Aeschyl. down) : άθ^τίΐν
(see άθιτίω, a.) την πίστιν, 1 Tim. v. 12. Cf. especially
Koolhaas, Diss, philol. I. et II. de vario usu et construc-
tione vocum πίστίΓ, ntaros et πιστ(ϋ(ΐν in N. T. (Traj. ad
Rhen. 1733, 4to.) ; Dav. Schuh, Was heisst Glauben,
etc. (Leipz. 1830), p. 62 sqq. ; Riickert, Com. ub. d. Rom.,
2d ed., i. p. 51 sqq.; Ltilz, Bibl. Dogmatik, p. 312 sqq.;
Ilulher, Ueber ζωή u. τηστ(ύ(ΐυ im N. T., in the .Tahrbb.
f. deutsch. Theol. for 1N72, pp. 1-33; [Bp. Lghlfi. Com.
on Gal. p. 154 sqq.]. On Paul's conception of πίσης.
cf. Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 94 scjq. ;
Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. N. T., § 82 c. d. (cf. the index s. v.
Glaube); P/?eiWerer, Paulinismus, p. 162 sqq. [Eng. trans,
i. p. 1 6 1 sqq. ; Schnedermann, De fidei notione ethica Pau-
lina. (Lips. 1880)]. On the idea of faith in the Ep. to
the Hebrews see Riehm, Lehrbegr. des llebr.-Br. p.
700 sqq. ; Ti^eiss, as above § 1 25 b. c. On John's con-
ception, see Reuss, die Johann. Theol. § 10 in the Bei-
trage zu d. theol. Wissensch. i. p. 56 sqq. [cf. his Histoire
de la Theol. Chretienne, etc., 3me ed., ii. p. 508 sqq. (Eng.
trans, ii. 455 sqq.)] ; Weiss, as above § 149, and the
same author's Johann. Lehrbegriff, p. 18 sqq.*
irtoTOs, -ή, -όν, (w(l6<i> [q. v.]), [fr. Horn, down], Sept.
mostly for JOS J ; 1. trusty, faithful; of persons
who show themselves faithful in the transaction of busi-
ness, the execution of commands, or the discharge of
official duties : SoiXnr, Mt. xxiv. 45 ; xxv. 21, 23 ; οικονό-
μος, Lk. xii. 42 ; 1 Co. iv. 2 ; διάκανος. Eph. vi. 21 ; Col.
i. 7 ; iv. 7 ; άρχκρίϋς, Heb. ii. 17 ; iii. 2 ; of God, abid-
ing by his promises, 1 Co. i. 9; x. 13 ; 2 Co. i. 18 ; 1 Th.
V. 24 ; 2 Th. iii. 3; Heb. x. 23; xi. 11 ; 2 Tim. ii. 13;
1 Jn. i. 9 ; 1 Pet. iv. 19 ; add, 1 Co. iv. 17; Col. iv. 9 ;
1 Tim. i. 12; Heb. iii. 5; 1 Pet. v. 12; πιστία ev τιυι,
in a thing, Lk. xvi. 10-12; .xix. 17; 1 Tim. iii. 11 ; im
Tt, Mt. xxv. 23; ά-χρι θανάτου. Rev. ii. 10. one who kept
his plighted faith. Rev. ii. 13; worthy of trust ; that can
he relied on : 1 Co. vii. 25 ; 2 Tim. ii. 2 ; Christ is called
μάρτν! 6 Ttitrrot, Rev. i. 5 ; with κα\ αΚηθινός added,
Rev. iii. 14 ; [cf. xix. 11]. of things, that can he relied
on: 6 λόγοϊ, 1 Tim. iii. 1 ; 2 Tim. ii. 11 ; Tit. i. 9; [iii.
8; oCtoi oi λόγοι, Rev. xxi. 5 ; xxii. 6]; Avith ττάσης απο-
δοχής άξιος added, 1 Tim. i. 15; iv. 9; τα όσια Δαυίδ
τα πιστά (see όσιος, fin.). Acts xiii. 34. 2. easili/
pirsuaded; beliering, confiding, trusting, (Theogn., Ao-
schyl.. Soph., Plat., al.) ; in the N. T. one who trusts in
God's promises. Gal. iii. 9 ; is convinced that .Jesus has
been raised from the dead, opp. to άπιστος, Jn. xx. 27;
one who has become convinced that Jestis is the Messiah
and the author of salvation (opp. to άπίστοΓ, see πιστίύω,
1 b. γ. and πίστις, 1 b.), [a believer'] : Acts xvi. 1 ; 2 Co.
vi. 15 ; 1 Tim. v. 16 ; with the addition of τω κνρίω, (hit.
of the pers. in whom faith or trust is reposed, Acts xvi.
15 ; plur. in Col. i. 2 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.] ; 1 Tim. iv.
10 ; vi. 2 ; Tit. i. 6 ; Kev. xvii. 14 ; oi πιστοί, substantively
[see Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. p. 157], Acts x. 45; 1 Tim. iv.
3, 12; with tv Χριστώ Ίησοΰ added [cf. B. 174 (152)],
Eph. i. 1 ; ei's θ^όν κτλ. 1 Pet. i. 21 L Τ Tr txt. WU ; πι-
στον ποΐ(ΐν τι, to do something harmonizing with (Chris-
tian) faith, [R. V. a faithful work], 3 Jn. 5.•
ΐΓίστόω, -ώ : 1 aor. pass, ΐπιστώθην ; (πιστός) ; 1.
to make faithful, render trustworthy, το ρήμα, 1 Κ. i. 36;
τίνα ορκοις. Time. 4, 88 ; univ. to make firm, establish, 1
Chr. xvii. 14. 2. Pass. (Sept. in various senses for
tDNJ) and mid. to be firmly persuaded of; to be assured
of: τι (Opp. cyn. 3, 355. 417 ; Lcian. philo[)s. 5), 2 Tim.
iii. 14; liesych. ΐπιστώθη ■ (πιίσθη, ΐπληροφορήθη. (In
various other senses in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down.) •
Ίτλονάω, -ώ ; fut. πλανήσω ; 1 aor. (πλάνησα ; Pass., pres.
πλανωμαι; ]if. π(πλάνημαι; 1 nor. ΐπλανήθην; (πλάνη); fr.
Aeschyl. and lldt. down; Sept. for Π;'ΓΙΠ ; to cause to
stray, to lead astray, lead aside from the right way ; a.
prop. ; in pass., Sept. chiefly for Π>;ΓΙ, to go astray, wan-
der,roam about, (first so in Hom. II. 23,321): Mt. xviii.
12 sq.; 1 Pet. ii. 25 (fr. Is. Uii. 6, cf. Ex. xxiii. 4 ; Ps.
cxviii. (cxix.) 176); Heb. xi. 38. b. metaph. to lead
away from the truth, to lead into error, to deceive : τινά,
Mt. x.xiv. 4, 5, 11, 24 ; Mk. xiii. 5, 6; Jn. vii. 12; 1 Jn.
ii. 26; iii. 7; 2 Tim. iii. 13»; Rev. ii. 20 GL Τ TrAVH ;
xii. 9; xiii. 14; xix. 20; xx. 3, 8, 10; 4αυτόν, 1 Jn. i. 8;
pass, tn be led into error, [R.V. be led a.'itray] : Lk. xxi. 8 ;
Jn. vii. 47 ; Rev. ii. 20 Rec. ; to err, Mt. xxii. 29 ; Mk. xii.
24, 27 ; μη πλανάσθί, 1 Co. vi. 9 ; xv. 33 ; Gal. vi. 7 ; Jas.
i. 16 ; esp. through ignorance to be led aside from the
path of virtue, to go a.'itray, sin : Tit. iii. 3 ; Heb. v. 2 ; tj
κάρδια, Heb. iii. 10; άττο της άληθ(ίας, Jas. v. 19; to wan-
der orfall away from the true faith, of heretics, 2 Tim. iii.
13' ; 2 Pet. ii. 15 ; to be led away into error and sin, Rev.
xviii. 23. [CoMP. : αποπλανάω.] *
ιτλάνη, -ης, ή, a wandering, a straying about, whereby
one, led astray from the right way, roams hither i-nd
thither (Aeschyl., [Hdt.], Eur., Plat., Dem., al.). In the
N. T. metaph. mental straying, i. e. error, wrong opinion
relative to morals or religion : Eph. iv. 14; 1 Th. ii. 3 ;
2 Th. ii. 11 ; 2 Pet. ii. 18; iii. 17; 1 Jn. iv. 6; Jude 11
(on which [cf. W. 189 (177) and] see (κχίω, b. fin.) ! er-
ΊτΧάνη'ί
615
ττλειωιι
ror which shows itself in action, a wrong mode of acting :
Ro. i. 27 ; πλάνη όδοΟ rivos, [R. V. error of one's way
i. B.] the wrong manner of life which one follows, Jas. v.
20 (πλάνη ζωής, Sap. i. 12) ; as sometimes llie I^iat. error,
i. q. thai which leads into error, deceit, fraud: Mt. xxvii.
64.*
[ιτλάνηϊ, -ητο!, 6, see πλανήτη!.^ ,
ιτλανήτηβ, -ου, ό, (ττλαι/άω), α wanderer: άσπρα πλανη-
ται, wandering slarf: (Aristot., Pint., al.), Jude 13 [where
\VH mrg. αστ. πλανήτες (Xen. mem. 4, 7, 5)]; see αστήρ,
fin.•
irXdvos, -ov, wandering, roving ; trans, and trop. mis-
leading, leading into error : πνεύματα πλάνα, 1 Tim. iv. 1
(πλάι/οι άνθρωποι, Joseph, b. j. -', 13, 4). ό πλάΐΌί
substantively (Cic. aX. planus), a,^ we say, α vagabond,
'tramp,' impostor, (Diod., Atlien., al.); hence univ. a
corrupter, deceiver, ( Vulg. sednclor) : Mt. .xxvii. 63 ; 2 Co.
vi. 8 ; 2 Jn. 7. [Cf. ό «οσμοττλάι/οΓ, ' Teaching ' etc. 16,
4-]•
ιτλάξ, -α /cos, ή, [(akin to πλάτος, etc. ; Fick iv. 161)], α
flat thing, broad tablet, plane, levelsurface (as of the sea),
(ef. our plate), (Find., Tragg., al. ; Sept. for niS) : ai
π\άκ(<ί τήί διαθήκης (see διαθήκη, 2 p. 136'"), Heb. ix. 4 ;
οϋκ iv πλαξι λιθίναις (tables of stone, such as those on
which the law of Moses was written), άλλ' ev πλαξϊ καρ-
δίας σαρκΐναις, 2 Co. iii. 3.*
πλάσ-μα, -ror, τό, (πλάσσω), what has been moulded or
/bnijerf, as f rom wax (Plat. Theaet. p. 1 97 d. and p. 200b.);
the thing formed by a potter, earthen vessel, (Vulg.fgmen-
tum) : Ro. ix. 20 (with πηλοϋ added, Arstph. av. 686).*
ιτλάσ-ο-ω : 1 aor. ptcp. 7Γλάσα9 ; 1 aor. pass, ίπλάσθην ;
[(perh. akin to πλατύ?; Curtius § 367 b)] ; fr. lies, down;
Sept. chiefly for Ιϊ' ; to form, mould, (prop, something
from clay, wax, etc.) ; used of a potter, Ro. ix. 20 ; of
God as Creator (Gen. ii. 7 sq. 19 etc.), pass. 1 Tim. ii. 13.*
Ίτλασ-ΓόΒ, -ή, -όν, (πλάσσω) ; 1. prop, moulded,
formed, as from clay, wax, stone, (lies.. Plat., Aristot.,
Plut., al.). 2. trop. feigned : 2 Pet. ii. 3 ([Hdt. 1,
68], Eur., Xen., Lcian., al.).*
irXarcIo, -or, ή, (fem. of the adj. πλατύς, sc. oSos [cf.
W. 590 (549)]), a broad way, α street: Mt. vi. 5; xii.
19; Lk. X. 10; xiii. 26; xiv. 21; Acts v. 15; Rev. xi.
8 ; xxi. 21 ; xxii. 2. (Eur., Pint., al. ; in Sept. chiefly for
3m.)•
ιτλάτοί, -ovt, TO, [(cf. πλάξ), fr. Ildt. down], breadth :
Eph. iii. 18 (on which see μήκος) ; Rev. xxi. 16 ; carry-
ing with it the suggestion of great extent, τ^ yffs, opp.
to the ends or corners of the earth. Rev. xx. 9 ; (for
3πΤ3, IIab.i. 6).*
■πλατύνω; Pass., pf. 3 pers. sins;, πιπλάτυνται (see μι-
αίνω); ι aor. €πλατΰνθην•, (πλατύς): to make broad, to
enlarge: τί, Mt. xxiii. 5 ; η καρδία ημών π€πλάτννται, our
heart expands itself sc. to receive you into it, i. e. to
welcome and embrace you in love, 2 Co. vi. 1 1 (πλατυ^ιν
την KapSlav for 3'? 3'Π"1Π, to open the heart sc. to in-
struction, Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 32 [cf. W. 30]) ; πλατύνθητι
κα\ ύμί'ϊς, be ye also enlarged in heart, viz. to receive me
therein, ibid. 1 3. (Xen., Plut, Anthol., al.) *
ιτλατΰϊ, -eia, -ύ, [cf. Lat. planus, latus ; Curtius § 367 b;
Vanicek p. 552], fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times for
αΠ";, broad: Mt. vii. 13.*
πλέγμα, -ros, τό, (πλέκω), what is woven, plaited, or twisted
together; a web, plait, braid: used thus of a net, Xen.
Cyr. 1, 6, 28 ; of a basket, Eur., Plat. ; πλέγμα βύβλινον,
in which the infant Moses was laid, Joseph, antt. 2, 9, 4 ;
by other writ, in other senses, braided hair ( Vulg. crines
torli, ringlets, curls) : 1 Tim. ii. 9 (cf. 1 Pet. iii. 3).•
πλ£ΐο-Γθ9, -η, -ov, (superl. of πολύς), most : plur. Mt. xi.
20 ; [όχλος πλΰστος, a very great multitude, Mk. iv. 1 Τ
Tr Wfi] ; ό πλείστος όχλος, the most part of the multi-
tude, Mt. xxi. 8 (Time. 7, 78; Plat. rep. 3 p. 397 d. ;
λαός, Hom. II. 16, 377); ro πλύστον, adverbially, at the
most, 1 Co. xiv. 27.*
πλβίων, -όνος, ό, ή, neut. πλεΐον [eighteen times] and (in
Lk. iii. 13; [Jn. xxi. 15 LT Tr WH] ; Acts xv. 28) πλί'ορ
(cf. [ WH. App. p. 151] ; Matthiae i. p. 333 ; Kruger § 23,
7, 4 ; KUhner § 156, 3 ; Passow s. v. πολύς, Β. 1 ; [L. and
S. s. V. B.]), plur. πλείονες and contr. πλ«'ουί, ace. πλύ-
ονας and contr. πλείους (which forms are used indiscrim-
inately in the N. T.), neut. πλβίονα and (L Τ Tr WII in
Mt. xxvi. 53 ; LTin Lk. xxi. 3) contr. πλ^'ω; (compar.
of τΓολύί) ; more, i.e. 1. greater in quantity: the
object with which the comparison is made being added
in the genitive, as πλείονας των πρώτων, more in number
than the first, Mt. xxi. 36 ; πλείον (or πλείω) πάντων,
more than all, Mk. xii. 43 ; Lk. xxi. 3 ; πλείονα . . . τούτων,
more than these, .In. vii. 31 [here L Τ Tr WH om. the
gen. (see below)]; πλείονα τών πρώτων, more than the
first. Rev. ii. 19 ; πλείον τούτωΐ', more than these, Jn. xxi.
15 ; [πλείονα τιμήν εχειν τοΟ οίκον, Heb. iii. 3" (cf. W. 190
(178), 240 (225))] ; περισσεύειν πλ«ον, more than, foil, by
a gen. [A. V. exceed~\, Mt. v. 20. πλείονες (πλείους) ή,
Mt. xxvi. 53 R G [L πλίίω (br. ή)} ; Jn. iv. 1 [Tr mrg. om.
WHbr. ^] πλείον ή, more than, Lk. ix. 13; πλίον πλην
w. a gen. Acts xv. 28; πλέον παρά [ττ or τίνα (see παρά,
in. 2 b.)], Lk. iii. 13; [Heb. iii. 3'] ; ^ is omitted before
numerals without change of construction : ε'τών ην πλειό-
νων τεσσαράκοντα ό άνθρωπος, Acts iv. 22 ; οΰ πλείους είσίν
μοι ήμέραι δεκαδύο. Acts xxiv. 1 1 (here Rec. inserts η) ;
ημέρας ου πλείους οκτώ η δέκα (Rec. πλείους η δέκα). Acts
XXV. 6; add, Acts xxiii. 13, 21 ; as in (!rk. writ, after
a neuter: πλίίω [Lchm. ^inbr.] δώδεκαλεγεώνας, Mt..\xvi.
53[TTrAVH(butTλfy^ώι'ω:')], (πλαν — Attic for πλίΓοι-
— εξακόσιους, Arstph. av. 1251 ; ετη γεγονώς πλείω έβδομη-
κοντα. Plat. apol. Socr. p. 1 7 d. ; see ij, 3 a. ; on the omis-
sion of quam in Latin after plus and amptius, cf. Rams-
horn, Lat. Gram. p. 491 ; \_Rohy, I^t. Gram. § 1273]).
the objects with which the comparison is made are not
added because easily supplied from the context: Jn.
iv. 41; [vii. 31 (see above)]; xv. 2; Heb. vii. 23; τό
πλείον, the more (viz. the greater debt mentioned), Lk.
vii. 43 ; πλείον, adverbially, more, i. e. more earnestly,
Lk. vii. 42; ί'πί πλείον, more tcridely, further, διανέμεσθαι.
Acts iv. 17; [cf. xx. 9 WH mrg. (see below)]; προκόπτειν,
2 Tim. iii. 9 ; f πϊ πλείον ασεβείας, 2 Tim. ii. 16; έπ\ πλείον,
longer (than proper). Acts xx. 9 [not WH mrg. (see
TTA-e/iw
516
•7Γ\ήκτηί
above)] ; xxiv. 4 ; plural TrXfiora, more, 1. e. a larger re-
ward, Mt. XX. 10 [but L Tr Wll jrXiioi/] ; without com-
parison, used of an indefinite number, with a subst. : Acts
ii. 40; xiii. 31; xviii. -ii); xxi. 10; xxiv. 17; xxv. 14;
xxvii. 20 ; xxviii. 23 ; iiiut. π(ρί πλαόνων [Α. V. of maiitj
tliin;/.t], \.k. xi. 53 ; with thearticle οι nXfioves (n\(lovs),
the more part, verij many: Actsxix. 32; xxvii. 12; 1 Co.
ix. 19; x. 5; xv. ti ; 2 Co. ii. G ; iv. 15 ; ix. 2; Phtl. i.
14. 2. grealfir in qualit y,siiperior,more excellent:
foil, by the gen. of comparison, Mt. vi. 25 ; xii. 41, 42 ;
Mk. xii. 33 [here Τ W'H Trtxt. nepiaaorfpov]; Lk. xi.
31, 32; .\ii. 23 ; [irXeiova θυσίαν . . . παρά Κάϊν, Heb. xi-
4 (see παρά, u. s.). From IIi)m. down.] '
■π•λ€'κω : 1 aor. ptcp. πλίξαντα; [(cf. Curtius § 103 ;
Vanicek p. 511))]; fr. Horn, down ; to plait, braid, weave
together : πλίξαντα στΐφανον, Mt. xxvii. 29 ; Mk. xv. 17 ;
Jn. xi;:. 2. [Comp. : ίμ-πλί'κω.] *
ιτλίον, see ιτΧίΐων.
πλεονάζω; I aor. inXeovaaa; (πλί'οκ) ; Sept. for Π"1^'_
and npi ; 1. intrans. : use<l of one possessing, to
superabound [A. V. to have ooerl, 2 Co. viii. 15. of things,
to exist in abundance [^.Y. be multiplied^, 2 Co. iv. 15;
to increase, be augmented, Ro. v. 20; vi. 1; 2 Th. i. 3;
Phil. iv. 1 7 ; 2 Pet. i. 8. 2. trans, to make to increase :
τινά Tivi, one in a thing, 1 Th. iii. 1 2 ; for Π31Π, Num.
xxvi. 54; Ps. Ixx. (Ixxi.) 21; add 1 Maoc. iv. 35. By
prof. writ. [(fr. Hippocr. on)] in various other senses.
[COMP. : vittp πλίοι/άίω.] *
ΐΓλεον£Κτ€'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ΐπΧίονίκτησα ; 1 aor. pass. subj.
1 pers. plur. ιτΚίονξκττ^θίύμίν', {πΧ^ονίκτης) ; 1. in-
trans. to have more, or a greater part or share : Thuc,
Xen., Plut., al. ; to be superior, excel, surpass, hare an
ailvantage over, τικόί (gen. of pers.) Ttet (dat. of thing) :
Xen., Plat., Isocr., Dem., al. 2. trans, to gain or
lake advantage of another, to overreach: [Ildt. 8, 112],
Plat., Diod., Dion. Hal., Dio Cass., al. ; and so in the N. T.
in 2 Co. vii. 2 ; xii. 1 7, 18 ; 1 Th. iv. 6 (see πράγμα, b.) ;
pass. [cf. B. § 132, 22] νπό tivos, 2 Co. ii. 11 (10).•
irXtoveKTqs, -ου, ό, (πλί'οι» and χω^ ; 1. one eager
to have more, esp. what belongs to others ([Thuc. 1, 40,
1 (cf. Hdt. 7, 15S)] ; Xen. mem. 1, 5, 3) ; 2. greedy
of gain, covetous : I Co. v. 10, 1 1 ; vi. 10 ; Eph. v. 5 ; Sir.
xiv. 9.*
Ίτλεονεξία, -as, η, (πΧίονίκτης, q. v.), greedy desire to have
more, cocetuusness, avarice: Lk. xii. 15; Ro. i. 29 ; Eph.
iv. 19; v. 3 ; Col. iii. 5 ; 1 Th. ii. 5 ; 2 Pet. ii. 3, [on the
cm. of the art. in the last two pass. cf. W. 120 (114)], 14;
tas [Rec. ώστΓίρ] π\(ον(ξίαν, [as a matter of covetousness^,
i. e. a gift which betrays the giver's covetousness, 2 Co.
ix. 5 [here R. V. txt. extortion'] ; plur. various modes in
which covetousness shows itself, covetings [cf. W. § 27,
3; B. 77 (67)], Mk. vii. 22. (In the same and various
other senses by prof. writ. fr. Hdt. and Thuc. down.)
l^Trench, N. T. Syn. § xxiv., and (in partial correction)
Bp. Lghtft. Cora, on Col. iii. 5.]*
πλευρά, -as, ή, fr. Hom. (who always uses the plur.)
down; the side of the body : Jn. xix. 34 ; xx. 20, 25, 27 ;
Acts xii. 7.*
ΠΑΕΩ, .see πΐμπΧημι.
ιτλεω ; impf. 1 pers. plur. ϊπ\ίομ€ν : [aUied w. πλυν»,
hat. pluo,^uo, OUT βοαΙ,βοα\ etc.; Curtius § 369]; fr.
llom. down ; to sail, navigate, travel by ship: Lk. viii. 23;
Acts xxvii. 24 ; foil, by els with an ace. of place, Acts
xxi. 3 ; xxvii. 6 ; cVi τιίττοί'. Rev. xviii. 1 7 G L Τ Tr VVH ;
by a use common only to the poets (cf. Matthiae § 409,
4a.; Kuhnerii.§409,6; [Jelf §559; W. 224 (210)]), with
a simple ace. indicating the direction : Acts xxvii. 2 (Eur.
Med. vs. 7), where L Τ Tr WH add cis. [CoMP. : άπο-,
δια-, €Κ-, κατά-, πάρα-, ΰτΓΟ-ΤΓλί'α).] *
πληγή, -^ί,.ή, (πλήσσω), fr. Hom. down ; Sept. chiefly for
Π30, also for nsJO ; 1. a blow, stripe : plur., Lk. x.
30; xii. 48; Acts xvi. 23,33; 2 Co. vi.5; xi. 23; aivound:
η πλτιγη τοΰ θανάτου, deadly wound [R. V. death-stroke],
Rev. xiii. 3, 12 ; της μαχαίρας, wound made by a sword
[sword-stroke]. Rev. xiii. 14. [On its idiomatic omis-
sion (Lk. xu.4 7,etc.)cf.B. 82(72); W.§64, 4.] 2.
a public calamity, heavy affliction, [cf. ILug. plague], (now
tormenting now destroying the bodies of men, and sent
by God as a punishment) : Rev. ix. 18 [Rec. om.], 20 ; xL
6; XV. 1, 6, 8; xvi. 9, [21]; xviii. 4,8; xxi. 9; x.\ii. 18.
[Cf. πλ. Alas. Soph. Aj. 137 (cf. 279) ; al.] *
πλήθοϊ. -ovs, TO, (ΠΛΕΩ), fr. llom. down ; Sept. chiefly
for 21, often for [ΙΟΠ ; a multitude, i.e. a. α great
number, sc. of men or things : Acts x.xi. 22 [not Tr WH] ;
Heb. xi. 1 2 [cf. W. 1 20 (1 14) n.] ; with πολύ added, Mk.
iii. 7, 8 ; πλήθος with a gen., Lk. ii. 1 3 ; Jn. xxi. 6 ; Acts
V. 14 ; xxviii. 3 [A. V. bundle (L Τ Tr WH add n)] ; 'las.
V. 20 ; 1 Pet. iv. 8 ; πολύ πλήθος and πλήθο! πο\ϋ [cf.W.
§ 59, 2] with a gen., Lk. v. 6 ; vi. 17; xxiii. 27 ; Jn. v. 3
[here L br. G Τ Tr WH om. jroXiJ] ; Acts xiv. 1 ; xviL
4. b. with the article, the whole number, the whole
multitude ; the assetidjlage : Acts xv. 30 ; x.xiii. 7 ; τοΰ λαοϋ.
Acts xxi. 36 ; πάν ro πλήθος. Acts xv. 12 ; with a gen,
Lk. i. 10; [viii. 37 (της π(ριχωρου) ; xix. 37]; x.xiii. 1;
Acts [iv. 32] ; v. 16 ; [vi. 2, 5] ; xxv. 24 ; the multitude
of people. Acts ii. 6 ; sLx. 9 ; with τής πολίωι added.
Acts xiv. 4.*
πληθύνω; fut. πληθύνω; 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing, πληθν•
ναι (2 Co. ix. 10 Rec.) ; Pass., impf. (πληθυνόμην ; 1 aor.
(πληθύνθην ; (fr. πληθϋs fulness) ; Aeschyl., Aristot.,
Hdian., Geop. ; Sept. very often for Π^"!, na"!, na'in,
sometimes for asi ; 1. trans, to increase, to multi-
ply: 2 Co. ix. 10; Heb. vi. 14 (fr. Gen. xxii. 17) ; pass.
to be increased, (be multiplied) multiply: Mt. xxiv. 12;
Acts vi. 7; vii. 17; ix. 31 ; xii. 24; τινί, [A. V.fie multi-
plied to one i. e.] be richly allotted to, 1 Pet. i. 2 ; 2 Pet.
i. 2; Jude 2, (Dan. iii. 31 (98); Dan. vi. 25 Theodot.;
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1 inscr. [also Mart. Polyc. inscr.,
Constt. Apost. inscr.]). 2. intrans. to be increased,
to multiply: Acts vi. 1.*
πλήβω, see πίμπλημι-
πλήκτηϊ, -ου, ό, (πλήσσω), (Vulgate /)ercuiSor), [Α. V.
striker], bruiser, ready tvith a blow ; a pugnacious, cotk•
tentious, quarrelsome person: 1 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. L 7.
(Plut. Marcell. 1; Pyrrh. 30; Crass. 9 ; Fab 19; Diog^
Laert. 6, 38 ; al.) •
ττΧημμνρα
517
ττΧηρόω
πλημμύρα [so all edd.] (or πΧημίρα [if. Bitm. Ausf.
Spr. § 7 Anm. 17 note; Lob. Rheinat. p. -'04]) [better ac-
cented as proparoxytone; Chandler §100], -or and (so
GTTr WH) -ηί (see μάχαιρα), ή, (fr. πλήμμη or νλήμη
i. e. ιτλήσμη [fr. π\ήβω, πίμπλημι, i\. V.]), α //ow/, whether
of llie sea or of a rii-er : Lk. vi. 48. (Job xl. 18 ; [Dion.
Hal. antt. 1, 71]; Joseph, antt. 2, 10,2; Pint., Sext. Emp. ;
with ποταμών added, Philo de opif. mund. § 19; [cf. de
vita Moys. i. § 36 ; iii. § 24 ; de Abrah. § 1 9 ; de leg. alleg.
i. §13].)•
ιτλήν, adv., (fr. πλίον 'more' [Curtius §37.5; Loh. Path.
Element, i. 143 ; ii. 93 (cf. Bp. Lghtft. on PhU. iii. 16)] ;
hence prop, beyond, besides, furihei•) ; it stands 1.
adverbially, at the beginning of a sentence, serving
eitlier to restrict, or to unfold and expand what has pre-
ceded : vioreover, besides, so that, according to the re-
quirements of the context, it may also be rendered but,
nevertheless ; [howbeit ; cf. B. § 140, 2] : Mt. xi. 22, 24 ; xviii.
7; xxvi. 39, 64; Lit. vi. 24, 35 ; x. 11,14, 20; xi. 41 ; xii.
31 ; xiii. 33 ; xvii. 1 L Tr txt. WH ; xviii. 8 ; xix. 27 ; xxii.
21,22,42; xxiii. 28 ; 1 Co. xi. 11 ; Eph. v. 33 ; Phil. i. 18
[R G (see Ellicott)] ; iii. 16 ; iv. 14 ; Rev. ii. 25 ; νΧψ ότι,
except that, save that, (exx. fr. class, (irk. are given by
Passow s. V. II. 1 e. ; [L. and S. s. v. B. II. 4]) : Acts xx.
23 [(W. 508 (473) ; Phil. i. 18 L Τ Tr AVH (R. V. only
//io/)]. 2. as a preposition, with the gen. (first so
by Hom.Od. 8, 207; [cf. W. § 5i,^),besides,except,but:
Ilk. xii. 32 ; .In. viii. 10 ; Acts viii. I ; xv. 28 ; xxvii. 22.
Cf. Khtz ad Devar. II. 2 p. 724 sq.*
ιτλήρηϊ, -ef, (ΠΛΕΩ), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Sept.
chiefly for S"»"? ; a. full, i. e. filled up (as opp. to
empty): of hollow vessels, Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; Mk. vi.
43 [li G L] ; with a gen. of the thing, Mk. viii. 19 ; of
a surface, covered in every part : Χίπρας. Lk. v. 12; of
the soul, thoroughly permeated irilh : πικύματος άγιου, Lk.
iv. 1 ; Acts vi. 3 ; vii. 55; xi. 24 ; πίστεως. Acts vi. 5 ; χάρι-
τος, Acts vi. 8 [Rec. ττ/στρω?] ; χάριτος και άΧηθΐίας, .Jn.
i. 14; δόλου. Acts xiii. 10 (,Ter. v. 2 7); θυμον. Acts xix.
28 ; abounding in, ΐργων αγαθών. Acts ix. 36. b.
full i. e. complete ; lack-in g nothing, perfect, (so the Sept.
sometimes for Ώΐψ; σιλήνη πλήρης, Sir. 1. 6, cf. Hdt. 6,
106) : μισθός, 2 Jn. 8 (Ruth ii. 12) ; σ'ιτος, a full grain of
corn (one completely filling the folliile or hull contain-
ing it), Mk. iv. 28.*
ιτληρο-φορίω, -ώ : [1 aor. impv. πλι^ροφόρι^σον, inf. ττλι^ρο-
φορήσαι (Ro. XV. 13 L mrg.) ; Pass., prcs. impv. πληροφο-
ρ€ίσθω; pf. ptcp. π(πληροφορημίνος ; 1 aor. ptcp. πλι^ρο-
φορηθ(ίς']; (fr. the unused adj. π\ηροφόρος, and this fr.
TiAijpijf and φίρω) ; to bear or bring full, to make full; a.
/() cause a thing to be shown to the full: τήν &ιακονίαν, i.e. to
fulfil the ministry in every respect, 2 Tim. iv. 5 (ef. πλη-
ρούν την διακονίαν. Acts xii. 25) ; also το κήρυγμα, ibid.
1 7. b. t<j carry through to the end, accomplish : πράγ-
ματα πιπληροφορημίνα, things that have been accomplished,
(Itala and Vulg. completae), Lk. i. 1 (cf. at ϊπληρώθη ταύτα,
Acts xix. 21 ) [cf. Meyer ed. IFi'/.s•.'; ad loc.]. c. τινά,
to fill one with any thought, conviction, or inclination : [Ro.
XV. 13 L mrg. (foil, by tV w. dat. of thing) ; al. πΧηρόω,
q. v. 1] ; hence to make one certain, to persuade, convince,
one (πολλοΐϊ ουν λόγοίί κα\ ορκοις πλημοφορήσαντα Mryd-
βυζον, extr. fr. Ctes. in Phot. p. 41, 29 [(ed. Bekk.) ; but
on this pass, see Bp. Lghtft. as below]) ; pass, to be per-
suaded, Ro. xiv. 5 ; πληροφορηθίίς, persuaded, fully con-
vinced or assured, Ro. iv. 21 ; also π^ηΧηροφορημίνοι, Col.
iv. 12 L Τ Tr WH ; oi απόστολοι . . . πληροφορηθίντις dta
της αναστάσεως τοϊι κυρίου Ί. Χρ. κα\ πιστωθίντα iv τώ
λόγω του θίοϋ, Clem. Horn. 1 Cor. 42, 3 ; freq. so in eccl.
writ. ; to render inclined or bent on, ίπληροφορήθη καρδία
. . . τον ποιησαι τΰ πονηρόν, Eccl. viii. 11, [cf. Test. xii.
Patr., test. Gad 2]. The word is treated of fully by
Bleek, Brief an d. Ileb. ii. 2 p. 233 sqq. ; Grimm in the
Jahrbb. f. Deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 38 sqq.; [Bp.
Lghtft. Com. on Col. iv. 12. Cf. also Soph. Lex. s. v.]*
πληροφορία, -ας, ή, (πληροφορίω, q. v.), fulness, abun-
dance : πίστεως, Ileb. x. 22 ; της (λπίδος, Ileb. vi. 11 ; της
συνέσεως, Col. ii. 2 ; full assurance, most certain confi-
dence, (see πληροφορέω, c. [al. give it the same meaning
in one or other of the preceding ])ass. also: cf. Bp. Lghtft.
on Col. 1. c.]), 1 Th. i. 5. (Not found elsewh. exc. in eccl.
writ. [cf. W. 25].) *
πληρόω -ώ, (inf. -ρουν Lk. ix. 31, see WH. App. p. 166) ;
impf. 3 pers. sing, επλήρου; fut. πληρώσω; 1 aor. {'πλή-
ρωσα ; pf. πεπλήρωκα ; Pass., pres. πληροΐμαι; impf.
επληρούμην : pf. πεπλήρωμαι'. 1 aor. επληρώβην; 1 fut. πλι;-
ρωθήσομαι: fut. mid. πλι;ρώσο/χαι (once, Uev. vi. 11 Rec);
(fr. ΠΛΗΡ02 equiv. to πλήρης) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down ; .Sept. for N7"D ; 1. to make full, to fill, to fill
up : την σαγήνην. pass. Mt. xiii. 48 ; i. (j. to fill to the full,
πασαν χρείαν, Phil. iv. 19 ; ίο cause to abound, to furnish
or supply liberally : πεπλήρωμαι, I abound, I am liberally
supplied, so. with what is necessary for subsistence, Phil,
iv. 18; Ilebraistically, witli the accus. of the thing in
which one abounds [cf. B. § 134, 7 ; W. § 32, 5] : of spir-
itual possessions, Phil. i. 11 (where Rec. has καρπών);
Col. i. 9, (ενίπλησα αυτοί» πνενμα σοφίας. Ex. xxxi. 3;
xxxv. 31): i. q. to food, ή οΙκια επληρώθη [Tr mrg.
επλήσθη] ex της οσμής, Jn. xii. 3 (see εκ, II. 5); ήχος
επλήρωσε τοι/ οίκοί'. Acts ii. 2 ; with a gen. of the thing,
την Ιερουσαλήμ της Μαχής, Acts V. 28 (Liban. epp. 721
πάσας — \. e. πόλεις — ενίπλησας των υπέρ ημών λόγων;
Justin, hist. 11, 7 Phrygianireligionibus implcvit); τινά,
i. q. to fill, diffuse throughout one's soul: with a gen. of the
thing, Lk. ii. 40 R G L txt. Τ Tr mrg. (see below) ; Acts
ii. 28; pass., Acts xiii. 52 ; Ro. xv. 13 [where L mrg. πλι;-
ροφορέω, q. V. inc.]. 14 ; 2 Tim. i. 4: w. a dat. of the thing
(cf. W. § 31, 7), pass., [Lk. ii. 40 L mrg. Tr txt. WH] ;
Ro. i. 29 ; 2 Co. vii. 4 ; foil, by εν w. a dat. of the instru-
ment : εν πνείιματι, Eph. v. 18 ; έν παντΊ θελήματί θεοΰ,
with everything which God wills (used of those who
will nothing but what God wills). Col. iv. 12 RG [but
see πληροφορέω, c] : πληρούν τήν καρ&ίαν τινός, to per-
vade, take possession of, one's heart, Jn. xvi. 6 ; Acts v.
3 ; Christians are said πληροΐσθαι, simply, as those who
are pervaded (i. e. richly furnished) with the power and
gifts of the Holy Spirit : εν αΰτω, rooted as it were in
Christ, i. e. by virtue of the intimate relationship en•
7Γ\ηροω
518
irXrfaiov
tered into with liim, Col. ii. 10 [cf. e'v, I. 6 b.] ; els παν το
πλήρωμα τοΰ ueuv (iee πλήρωμα, 1), Eph. iii. 19 [not \V II
mrg.] ; Christ, exalted to share in the divine adminis-
tration, is said πληρούν τα πάντα, to fill (pervade) the
universe with his presence, power, activity, Eph. iv. 10;
also πΧηροϋσθαι (mid. for ΙιΊιιιμΙ/, i. e. to execute his
counsels [cf. \V. "i-jS (242) ; K. § 134, 7]) τα πάντα iv πά-
σιν, all things in all i)laccs, Eph. i. 23 (μή οίχΐ τον υΰρα-
νον κα\ την -γην e'yo) πληρώ, Xf'yct κύριοι, Jer. xxiii. 24 ;
Grimm, Exeget. Ildbch. on Sap. i. 7 p. 55, cites exx. fr.
I'hilo and others ; [(but ev πάσιν here is variously under-
stood ; see πάί, II. 2 b. δ. aa. and the Comm.)]). 2.
to render full, i. e. to romplele ; a. prop, to Jill up
to the top : πάσαν φάραγγα, Lk. iii. 5 ; so that nothing
shall be wanting to full measure, fill to the brim, το
μίτρον (q. v. 1 a.), Mt. xxiii. 32. b. to perfect, con-
summate; o. a number: ϊως πληρωθωσι κα\ ol συν-
δουλοι, until the number of their comrades also shall have
been made complete. Rev. vi. 11 L WH txt.,cf. Duster-
dieck ad loc. [see y. below], by a Hebraism (see πϊμ-
πλημι, fin.) time is said πληροϋσθαι, πίπληρωμίνος, either
when a period of time that was to elapse has passed, or
when a definite time is at hand : Mk. i. 15 ; Lk. xxi. 24 ;
Jn. vii. 8 ; Acts vii. 23, 30 ; ix. 23 ; xxiv. 27, (Gen. xxv.
24; xxix. 21; Lev. viii. 33; xii. 4; xxv. 30; Num. vi. 5;
Joseph, antt. 4,4, 6 ; 6, 4, 1 ; πληρούν τον τίλ.(ον iviavTov,
Plat. Tim. p. 39 d. ; toUs χρόνονς, legg. 9 p. 866 a.). β.
to make complete in every particular; to render perfect :
πάσαν eiSoxiav κτλ. 2 Th. i. 1 1 ; την χαράν, Phil. ii. 2 ; pass.,
Jn. iii. 29; xv. 11 ; xvi. 24; xvii. 13; 1 Jn. i. 4 ; 2 Jn. 12;
τα epya, pass. Rev. iii. 2 ; την νπακοήν, to cause all to obey,
pass. 2 Co. X. 6 ; TO πάσχα. Lk. xxii. 16 (Jesus speaks
here allegorically : until perfect deliverance and blessed-
ness be celebrated in the heavenly state). 7. to
carry through to the end, to accomplish, carry out, (some
undertaking) : πάντα τα ρήματα. Lk. vii. 1 ; την διακονίαν.
Acts xii. 25 ; Col. iv. 1 7 ; το ΐργον, Acts xiv. 26 ; τον
δρόμοι/. Acts xiii. 25; sc. τον hpopov. Rev. vi. 11 ace. to
the reading πληρώσωσι (G Τ Tr WH mrg.) or πλι^ρώ-
σονται (Rec.) [see α. above] ; ώϊ ίπληρώθη ταύτα, when
these things were ended, Acts xix. 21. Here belongs
also πληρούν το (ϋαγγίλίον, to cause to be everywhere
known, acknowleil'^eil, embraced, [A. V. / hnce fully
preached^ Ro. xv. 19 ; in the same sense τον Xo'yot» τοΟ
θίοΰ. Col. i. 2"). c. to carry into effect, briny to reali-
zation, realize ; a. of matters of duty, to perforin,
execute : τον υόμον, Ro. xiii. 8 ; Gal. v. 14 ; το δικαίωμα
τοΰ νόμου, pass., iv ήμ'ιν, among us, Ro. viii. 4 ; πάσαν
δικαιοσννην, Mt. iii. 15 ((Ισ€β€ΐαν, 4 Macc. xii. 15); τήν
ίξοδον (as something appointed ami prescribed by Goil),
Lk. ix. 31. β. of sayings, promises, prophecies, to
bring to pass, ratify, ncromplish ; so in the phrases 'va or
όπωί πληρωθ;] ή -γραφή, το ρηθϊν. etc. (cf. Knapp, Scripta
var. Arg. p. 533 S(|.) : Mt. i. 22 ; ii. 15, 17, 23 ; iv. 14 ;
viii. 17; xii. 17; xiii. 35; xxi. 4; xxvi. 54, 56; xxvii. 9, 35
Rec. ; Mk. xiv. 49 ; xv. 28 (which vs. G Τ WH om. Trbr.) ;
Lk. i. 20 ; iv. 21 ; xxi. 22 Rec. ; xxiv. 44 ; Jn. xii. 38 ; xiii.
18; XV. 25; xvii. 12; xviii. Ii, 32 ; xix. 24, 36 ; Acts i. 16;
iii. 18; xiii. 27; Jas. ii. 23, (1 K. ii. 27; 2 Chr. xxxvi.
22). γ. universally and absolutely, to fuljit, i. e. to
cause God's will (as made known in the law) to he oheyed
as it should be, and God's promises (given through the
I)rophets) to receive fulfilment : Mt. v. 1 7 ; cf. Weiss,
Das Matthausevang. u.s.w. p. 146 sq. [CoMP. : ava-,
avT-ava-, προσ-ανα-, ck-, συμ-πληρόω.^ '
ιτλήρωμ-α, -Tos, τό, {πληρύω), Sept. for Ν^Π ; 1.
etyinologically it has a passive sense, that which is (or
lias been) filed; very rarely so in class. Grk. : a ship, in-
asmuch as it is filled (i. e. manned) with sailors, rowers,
and soldiers ; από δύο πληρωμάτων (μήχοντο, Lcian. ver.
hist. 2, 37 ; πίντι ΰχυν πληρώματα, ibid. 38. In the Ν. Τ.
the body of believers, as that which is filled with the
presence, power, agency, riches of God and of Christ:
ToO Χριστοϊι, Eph. iv. 13 (see ηλικία, 1 c. [cf. W. § 30, 3
N. 1 ; B. 155 (136)]) ; i. 23 ; ds πάν το πλήρωμα τοΟ θιοΰ,
that ye may become a body wholly filled aiul Hooded by
(iod, Eph. iii. 19 [but WH mrg. reads πληρωθη πάν το
πλ.]. 2. that ichich fills or rcith which a thing is
filed: so very frequently in class. Grk. fr. Ildt. down;
esp. of those things with which ships are filled, freight
and merchandise, sailors, oarsmen, soldiers, [cf. our
'complement' (yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. as below p. 258 sq.)],
(of the animals filling Noah's ark, Philo de vit. Moys. ii.
§12) ; πλήρωμα πόλίως, the inhabitants or population fill-
ing a city, Plat, de rep. 2 p. 371 e. ; Aristot. polit. 3, 13
p. 1284•, 5 ; 4, 4 p. 129Γ, 1 7 ; al. So in the N. T. ή -γή κα\
το πλήρωμα αυτής, whatever fills the earth or is contained
in it, 1 Co. X. 26, 28 Rec. (Ps. xxiii. (xxiv.) 1 ; xlix. (1.)
12 ; Jer. viii. 16 ; Ezek. xii. 19, etc. ; το πλήρωμα τήίβιιλάσ-
σης, Ps. xcv. (xcvi.) 11 ; 1 Chr. xvi. 32) ; κοφίνων πληρώ-
ματα, those things with which the baskets were filled,
[baskelfuls'], Mk. vi. 43 Τ Tr WH [on this pass. cf. Bp.
Lghtft. as below p. 260] ; also σπνρί&ων πληρώματα, Mk.
viii. 20; the filing (Lat. complementum) by which a gap
is filled up, Mt. ix. 16 ; Mk. ii. 21 ; that by which a loss is
repaired, spoken of the reception of all the Jews into
the kingdom of God (see ηττημα, 1), Ro. xi. 12. Of
time (see πληρόω, 2 b. a.), that portion of time by which
a longer antecedent period is completed ; hence complete-
ness, fidness, of time: toC χρόνου. Gal. iv. 4; των καιρών,
Eph. i. 10 (on which see οικονομία). 3. fnlmss,
abundance : Jn. i. 16 ; Col. i. 19 ; ii. 9 ; full number, Ro.
xi. 25. 4. i. q. πλήρωσκ (see καύχημα, 2), i. e. a
fulfilling, keeping : τοϋ νόμου (see πληρόω, 2 c. α.), Ro. xiii.
10. For a full discussion of this word see Fritzsche, Ep.
ad Rom. ii. p. 469 sqq. ; [esp. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Col.
p. 257 sqq.].*
ττλησίον, (neut. of the adj. πλησ'ιο!, -a, -ov), adv., fr.
Horn, down, near: with a gen. of place [cf. W. § 54, 6],
Jn. iv. 5 ; with the article, ό πλησίον sc. ων [cf. Β. § 1 25,
10; W. 24] (Sept. very often for i'l ; sometimes for
ri'Pi;), prop. Lat. proximus (so Vulg. in the N. T.), a
neighbor ; i. e. a. friend : Mt. v. 43. b. any
other person, and where two are concerned the other (thy
fellow-man, thy neighbor) i. e., ace. to the O. T. and
Jewish conception, a member of the Hebrew race and
ΊτΧησμονή
519
ΊτΧννω
commonwealth : Acts vii. 27; and Rec. in Heb. viii. 11 ;
ace. to the teaching of Christ, any other man irrespec-
tive of race or rehgion with whom we live or whom we
chance to meet (which idea is clearly brought out in the
parable Lk. x. 25-37): Mt. xix. 19; xxii. 39 ; Mk. xii.
31, 33; Lk. x. 27; Ro. xiii. 9, 10; [xv. 2]; Gal. v. 14;
Eph. iv. 25 ; Jas. ii. 8 and L Τ Tr WII in iv. 12 ; πλησίον
flvai TWOS, to be near one [one's neighbor], i. e. in a pass.
sense, worthy to be regarded as a friend and companion,
Lk. X. 29 ; actively, to perform the offices of a friend
and companion, ibid. 36; [on the om. of the art. in the
last two e.x.x. see B. § 129, 11 ; W. § 19 fin.].*
•π-λησ-μ,ονή, -ης. ή, (πίμπλημί [cf. W. 94 (89)]), reple-
tion, satiety, (Vulg. saliiritas) : προ! πληυμονην σαρκός, for
the satisfying of the flesh, to satiate the desires of the
flesh (see σαρξ, 4), Col. ii. 23, ct. ileyer ad loc. ; [others
(including R. V.) render the phrase against (i. e. for the
remedy of) the indulgence of the flesh ; see Bp. Lghtft.
ad loc, and πρόί, L 1 c.]. (Arstph., Eur., Xen., Plato,
Plut., .αϊ. ; Sept.) *
•π-λήσ-σ-ω [cf. πΑτ/^/ή, (πΛαγοί), hat. plango, plaga; Cur-
tius § 367] : 2 aor. pass, (ττληγην ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept.
for Tf^T} (see πατάσσω, init.); to strik'e, to smite: pass,
(of the heavenly bodies smitten by God that they may
be deprived of light and shrouded in darkness), Rev.
viii. 12. [COMP. : tV, tW πλάσσω.]*
πλοιάριον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of π-λοίον ; see γνναικάριον,
fin.), a small vessel, a boat : Mk. iii. 9 ; iv. 36 Rec. ; Lk.
V. 2 L mrg. Τ Tr mrg. WH mrg. ; Jn. vi. [22•], 22" Rec,
23 [where L Tr mrg. WH πλοία], 24 L Τ Tr WH ; xxi. 8.
[Cf. B. D. s. V. Ship (13).] (Arstph., Xen., Diod., al.) *
•π-λοΐον, -ου, τό, (πλβ'ω), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. chiefly for
n;j5«, a ship : Mt. iv. 21, 22 ; Mk. i. 19 ; Lk. v. 2 [R G L
txt. Tr txt. WH txt.] ; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xx. 13, and often
in the historical bks. of the N. T. ; Jas. iii. 4 ; Rev. viii.
9 ; xviii. 19. [BB. DD. s. v. Ship.]
irXoos -oGs, gen. -όου -οϋ, and in later writ, πλοόί (Acts
xxvii. 9 ; Arr. peripl. erythr. p. 176 § 61 ; see νους [and
cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 173 sq.]), (πλίω), fr. Horn. Od. 3,
169 down; voyage : Acts xxi. 7 ; xxvii. 9, 10, (Sap. xiv.
1)•*
■ιτλούσ-ιοϊ, -α, -οι», (πλοΰτοί), fr. Hes. opp. 22 down, Sept.
for ΤΠ>', rich ; a. proj). wealthy, abounding in tna-
terial resources: Mt. xxvii. 57; Lk. xii. 16; xiv. 12; xvi.
1, 19; xviii. 23 ; xix. 2; ό πλούσιος, substantively, Lk.
xvi. 21, 22; Jas. i. 10, 11 ; oi πλούσιοι, Lk. vi. 24; xxi. 1 ;
1 Tim. vi. 1 7 ; Jas. ii. 6 ; v. 1 ; Rev. vi. 15 ; xiii. 16 ; πλού-
σιοί, without the art., a rich man, Mt. xix. 23, 24 ; Mk. x.
25; xii. 41 ; Lk. xviii. 25. b. metaph. and univ.
abounding, abundantly supplied : foil, by «V w. a dat. of
the thing in which one abounds (cf. W. § 30, 8 b. note),
fv e\eet, Eph. ii. 4 ; iv πίστ(ΐ, .Jas. ii. 5 ; absol. abounding
{rich) in Christian virtues and eternal possessions. Rev.
ii. 9 ; iii. 1 7, on which see Diisterdieck. (πτώχ^νσι πλού-
σιος ων, of Christ, ' although as the άσαρκος λό-γος he for-
merly abounded in the riches of a heavenly condition, by
assuming human nature he entered into a state of (earth-
ly) poverty,' 2 Co. viii. 9.*
πλουσ-(<ι>ϊ, adv., [fr. Hdt. down], abundantly, richly.
Col. iii. 16 ; 1 Tim. vi. 17 ; Tit. iii. 6 ; 2 Pet. i. 11.•
Ίτλοντίω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ίπλούτησα ; pf . πίπλουττ;κα ; (πλοΰ-
τος) ; fr. Hes. down ; Sept. sometimes for "^'O^; a.
to be rich, to haoe abundance : prop, of outward possessions,
absol., Lk. i. 53 ; 1 Tim. vi. 9 ; 1 aor. / have been made
rich, have become rich, have gotten riches (on this use of
the aorist see βασϊΚ(\>ω, fin.), από τίνος. Rev. xviii. 15
(Sir. xi. 18; [cf. από, IL 2 a.]) ; also ex τίνος (see eV, II. 5),
Rev. xviii. 3,19; ew rtw (cf. W. § 30, 8 b. note ; the Greeks
say πλουτίίν τίΐ/οί, or τινι, or τι), 1 Tim. vi. 18. b.
metaph. to be richly supplied : πλούτων {ΐς πάντας, is afflu-
ent in resources so that he can give the blessings of sal-
vation unto all, Ro. x. 1 2 ; πλοντίίΐ' (Ις θ(6ν (see (ΐς, Β.
Π. 2 b. α.), Lk. xii. 21 ; aor. (πλούτησα, absolutely, /
became rich, i. e. obtained the eternal spiritual posses-
sions : 1 Co. iv. 8; 2 Co. viii. 9; Rev. iii. 18; π(πλον-
τηκα, I have gotten riches. Rev. iii. 1 7.*
πλουτίζω ; Pass., pres. ptcp. πλοντιζόμινος ; 1 aor. ίπλον
τίσθην; (πλοΟτοί) ; to make rich, to enrich: τινά, pass.
2 Co. ix. 11 ; used of spiritual riches : τινά, 2 Co. vi. 10 ;
(V with a dat. of the thing (see πλουτί'ω,α.), pass., to be
richly furnished, 1 Co. i. 5. ( Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plut. ;
Sept. for i"i:;rn.) *
πλοΰτοε, -ου, ό, and (ace. to L Τ Tr WH in 2 Co. viii. 2 ;
Eph. i. 7 : ii. 7 ; iii. 8, 16 ; Phil. iv. 19 ; Col. i. 27 ; ii. 2,
but only in the nom. and ace; cf. \_Tdf. Proleg. p. 118 ;
WH. App. p. 158] ; W. 65 (64) ; B. 22 sq. (20)) το πλοίτοΓ,
(apparently i. q. πλίοτοί, fr. πλίος full [ci. πίμπλημι]),
fr. Hom. down, Sept. for Tiy;•, and also for [ΐοπ a mul-
titude, '7'Π, ]1Π; riches, icealth; a. prop, and absoh
abundance of external possessions: Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv.
19 ; Lk. viii. 14 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1 7 ; Jas. v. 2 ; Rev. xviii. 1 7
(16). b. univ. fulness, abuttdance, plenitude : with
a gen. of the excellence in which one abounds, as της
χρηστότητας, Ro. ϋ.4 ; ix. 23 ; 2 Co. viii. 2 ; Eph. i. 7, 18 ;
ii. 7; iii. 16; Col. i. 27; ii. 2. the πλοϋτοϊ of God is
extolled, i. e. the fulness of his perfections, — of which
two are mentioned, viz. σοφία and γνώσις, Ro. xi. 33 (for
σοφίας κα'ι γνώσ«ύς here depend on βάθος, not on πλούτου
[cf. B. 1.3.5 (13.5) ; W. § 30, 3 N. 1]); the fulness of all
things in store for God's uses, Phil. iv. 19; in the same
sense πλοί)τοΓ is attributed to Christ, e.xalted at the
rio-ht hand of God, Rev. v. 1 2 ; in a more restricted sense,
πλοϋτοί τοϋ Χριστού is used of the fulness of the things
pertaining to salvation with which Christ is able to en-
rich others, Eph. iii. 8. c. univ. i. q. α good [(to
point an antithesis)] : Heb. xi. 26 ; i. q. that with which
one is enriched, with a gen. of the person enriched, used
of Christian salvation, Ro. xi. 12.*
πλύνω; impf . ^πλυνον ; 1 aor. ίπλυνα ; [(cf. πλί'ω)]; fr.
Hom. down ; Sejit. for D33 and ]'Π"1 ; to wash : τα &ίκτνα,
Lk. V. 2 LTTr WII[(TWH mrg..ii-; see αποπλέω)];
used fr. Hom. down esp. in ref. to clothing (Gen. xlix.
11 ; Ex. xix. 10, 14 ; Lev. xiii. 6, 34, etc.) ; hence figura-
tively πλνν(ΐν τάς στολάς αυτών iv τω αΧματι τοΰ άρνίον is
used of those who by faith so appropriate the results of
Christ's expiation as to be regarded by God as pure and
•πνεύμα
520
•πνεύμα
einless, Rev. vii. 14, and L Τ Tr WH in xxii. 14 ; cf.
Ps. 1. (li.) 4, 9. [CoMP. : άπο-ηΚννω. Syn. see λονω,
fin.]•
πν(νμα -tos, to, (πνί'ω), Grk. writ, f r. Aescbyl. and Ildt.
down; llcbr. T\\^, Lat. spirilux; i. e.
1. a iiiorcninil of air, (gentle) Wa.v/; a. of tlie
wind : άνίμων πικνματα, Hdt. 7, 16, 1; Pans. 5, 25 ; lieiice
tlm tt'Hii/ itself, .)n. iii. 8; plur. Ileb. i. 7, (1 K.xviii. 4.i;
xix. 11 ; Job i. 19; Ps. ciii. (.civ.) 4, etc.; often in Grk.
writ.). b. breath of the nostrils or mouth, often in
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down : πνίϋμα τοϋ στόματοί, 2 Th.
U. 8 (Ps. .\xxii. (xxxiii.) 6, cf. Is. xi. 4) ; πν- ζωής, Ihe
breath of life, Rev. xi. 11 (Gen. vi. 17, cf. πνοή ζωηί, ii.
7). [πν^ΰμα and πνοή seem to have been in the main
coincident terms; but πνοή became the more poetical.
Both retain a suggestion of their evident et}'mology.
Even in class, (irk. πν(ΰμα became as frefp and as wide
in its application as άν(μος. (Schmidt ch. o5, 7 ; Trench
§lxxiii.)]
2. the spirit, i.e. the vital principle by ivhich the bod;/ is
animated [(Aristot., Polyb., Plut., al.; see below)]: Lk.
viii. 5.j; xxiii. 46; Jn. xix. 30 ; Acts vii. .59 ; Rev. xiii. 15
[here R.V. breath} ; άφύναι τό πνιϋμα, to breathe out the
s])irit, to expire, Mt. xxvii. 50 cf. Sir. xxxviii. 23; Sap.
xvi. 14 (Grk. writ, said άφύναι τήν ψυχή ν, as Gen. xxxv.
18, see άφίημι, 1 b. and Ki/pke, Observv. i. p. 140; but we
also find άφύναι πνινμα θανασίμω σφαγή, Eur. Hec. 571 ) ;
σώμα χ<ύμί5 ττνΐύματοί νΐκμόν ίστίν, Jas. ii. 26 ; το πνενμά
ίστι το ζωυποιοΰν, ή σαρζ ουκ οιφ(\ίΐ ovSev, the spirit is
that which animates and gives life, the body is of no
profit (for the spirit imparts life to it, not the body in
turn to the spirit; cf. Chr.Frid. Fritzsche, Nova opuscc.
p. 239), Jn. vi. 63. the rational sjiiril, the power by
which a human being feels, thinh, wills, ilicides; the soul:
TO πνεύμα του άνθ(ίωπου το ev αύτώ, 1 Co. ii. 11 ; opp. to
σαρξ (([. V. [esp. 2 a.]), Mt. xxvi. 41 ; Jlk. xiv. 38 ; 1 Co.
v. 5; 2 Co. vii. 1 ; Col. ii. 5 ; opp. to το σώ/ία, Ro. viii. 10;
1 Co. vi. 1 7, 20 Rec. ; vii. 34 ; 1 Pet. iv. 6. Although for
the most part the words πνιΰμα and ψυχή are used indis-
criminately and so σώμα and ψυχή put in contrast (but
never by Paul ; see ψυχή, esp. 2). there is also recognized
a threefold distinctit)U, το πνΐνμα κα\ ή ψυχή κα\ το σώμα,
1 Th. ν. 23, ace. to ivhich το ττν^ϋμα is the rational part
of man, the power of perceiving and grasping divine
and eternal things, and upon which the Spirit of (iod
exerts its influence ; (πvfΰμa, says Luther, " is the high-
est and noblest part of man, ivhich qualifies him to
lay hold of incomprehensible, invisible, eternal things;
in short, it is the house where Faith and (Jod's word are
at home" [see reff. at end]) : άχρι μιρισμοϋ ψυχή! και
πνΐύματοζ (see μερισμός, 2), Heb. iv. 12; cV evi πνίΰματι,
μια. ψυχή, Phil. i. 27 (wliere instead of μιά ψυχή Paul
ace. to his mode of speaking elsewhere wouM have said
more appropriately μια καρΒία). το πνίΰμά tiios, Mk. ii.
8 ; viii. 12 ; Lk. i. 47 ; Acts xvii. 16 ; Ro. i. 9 ; viii. 16 ;
lCo.v.4; xvi. 18; 2Co.ii. 13; vii. 13; GaLvi. 18; [Phil
iv. 23 L Τ Tr WH] ; Philem. 25 ; 2 Tim. iv. 22 ; ά uds
tS»v πνΐυμάτων (for which Rec. has ayluv^ των προφητών,
who incites and directs the souls of the prophets. Rev.
xxii. 6, where cf. DUsterdieck. the dative τω πνιΰματι
is used to denote the seat (locality) where one does or
suffers something, like our in spirit : (πιγινώσκ(ΐν, Mk. ii.
8; avaarfvaCdv, .Mk. viii. 12; (μβριμάσθαι, Jn. xi. 33;
ταράσσιαθαι, Jn. xiii. 21 ; fefti/, Acts xviii. 25 ; Ro. xii.
11; άγαλλιάσθαι, Lk. .\. 21 (but L Τ Tr WH here add
άγίω) ; dat. of respect : 1 Co. v. 3 ; Col. ii. 5 ; 1 Pet. iv.
6 ; κραταιυϋσθαι, Lk. i. SO ; ii. 40 Rec. ; αγιον civai, 1 Co.
vii. 34 ; fcoojroiijdet't, 1 Pet. iii. 18 ; ζην, 1 Pet. iv. 6 ; πτω-
χοί, Mt. V. 3 ; dat. of instrument, fieif^t'cof, Acts xx. 22 ;
συνίχίσθαι, xviii. 5 Rec. ; θ(ω Xarpfifiv, Phil. iii. 3 R G ;
dat. of advantage: άνισιν τω πνιΰματί μου, 2 Co. ii. 13
(12) ; (V τώ πνΐύματι, is used of the instrument, 1 Co. vi.
20 Rec. [it is surely better to take ev τ. π- here locally,
of the 'sphere' (W. 386 (362), cf. vs. 19)] ; also iv πν>ίμα-
τι, nearly i. q. πvtυμaτικώs [but see W. § 51, 1 e. note], Jn.
iv. 23 ; of the seat of an action, tV τώ πνίΰμητί μου, Ro. i.
9 ; τιθίναι iv τω πν., to propose to one's self, purpose in
spirit, foil, by the infin. Acts xix. 21. πν(ΰματα προφη-
τών, ace. to the context the souls (spirits) of the prophets
moved by the Spirit of God, 1 Co. xiv. 32 ; in a pecu-
liar sense πνιϋμα is used of a soul thoroughly roused by
the Holy Sjjirit and wholly intent on divine things, yet
destitute of distinct self-consciousness and clear under-
standing ; thus in the phrases τό πν(ϋμά μου προσιΰχιταί,
opp. to 6 νους μου, 1 Co. xiv. 14 ; πνίνματι XaXelv μυστή-
ρια, ibid. 2 ; προσ(ύχ(σθαι, ψάλλίΐν, cvXoye'iv, τω πν., as
opp. to τώ vot, ibid. 15, 16.
3. a spirit, i. e. a simple essence, devoid of all or at least
all gros.ser matter, and pos.iessed of the power of knowing,
desiring, deciding, and acting ; a. generically : Lk.
xxiv. 37 ; Acts xxiii. 8 (on which see μήτ(, fin.) ; ibid. 9 ;
πνίΰμα σάρκα και οστία οίικ ?χίΐ, Lk. χ,χίν. 39 ; πνεύμα
ζωοποιοΰν, [α life-giving spirit}, spoken of Christ as raised
from the dead, 1 Co. xv. 45 ; πνιϋμα ό θ(ός {God is spirit
essentially), Jn. iv. 24; πατήρ των πνιυμάτων, of God,
Heb. xii. 9, where the term comprises both the spirits of
men and of angels. b. a human soul thai has left the
body [(Babr. 122, 8)] : plur. (Lat. manes), Heb. xii. 23;
I Pet. iii. 19. c. α spirit higher than man but lower
than Cod, i. e. an angel : plur. Heb. i. 14 ; used of demons,
or evil spirits, who were conceived of as inhabiting the
bodies of men : [Mk. ix. 20] ; Lk. ix. 39; Acts xvi. 18 ;
plur., Mt. viii. 16; .xii. 45; Lk. x. 20; xi. 26; πνεύμα
πύθωνο! or πύθωνα. Acts xvi. 16 ; πνεύματα δαιμονίων.
Rev. xvi. 14 ; πνιϋμα δαιμονίου ακαθάρτου, Lk. iv. 33 (see
δαιμόνιοι/, 2) ; πνεύμα άσθ(ν(ίαί, causing infirmity, Lk. xiii.
II ; πνίϊιμα άκάθαρτον, Mt. χ. 1 ; xii. 43; Mk. i. 23, 26,
27; iii. 11, 30; v. 2,8, 13; vi. 7; vii. 25 ; ix. 25; Lk. iv. 36 ;
vi. 18; viii. 29; ix. 42; xi. 24, 2(;; Actsv. 16; viii. 7; Rev.
xvi. 13; xviii. 2; 0X0X01-, κωφόν (for the Jews held that
the same evils with which the men were afllicted affected
the demons also that had taken possession of them [cf.
Wetstein, N. T. i. 279 sqq. ; Edersheim, Jesus the Mes-
siah, App. xvi. ; see δαιμονίζομαι etc. and reff.]), Mk. ix.
17, 25 ; πονηρόν, Lk. vii. 21 ; viii. 2 ; Acts xix. 12, 13, 15,
16, [(cf. Judg. ix. 23 ; 1 S. xvi. 14 ; xix. 9, etc.)]. d.
ττνίνμα
521
Ίτνευμα
the spiritual nature of Christ, higher than the highest an-
gels, close to God and inost intimately united to him (in
doctrinal phraseology the dioine nature of Christ) : 1 Tim.
iii. 16; with the addition of άγιωσννη! (on which see
άγιωστινη. 1 [vet cf. 4 a. below] ), Ro. i. 4 [but see JMeyer
ad loc, Ellicott on 1 Tim. 1. c] ; it is called πνιϋμα αϊώ-
wo», in tacit contrast with the perishable ψυχαί of sacri-
ficial animals, in Ileb. i.\. 14, where cf. Delitzsch [and
esp. Kurtz].
4. The Scriptures also ascribe a πι/Λμα to God, i. e.
God's power and agencji, — distinguishable in thought (or
modalislice, as they say in teclinical speech) from God's
essence in itself considered, — manifest in the course of
affairs, and by its influence upon souls productive in the
theocratic body (the church) of all the higher spiritual gifts
and blessings ; [cf. the resemblances and differences in
Philo's use of to ^eiov ηνιϋμα, e. g. de gigant. § 1 2 (cf. § 5
sq.) ; quis rer. div. § 53 ; de mund. opif. § 46, etc.]. a.
This ττνιίιμα is called in the O. T. D'H^K Πη, n\7T πη ;
in the X. T. ττνξΰμα aytovy το ayiov ττνίΰμα, ro πνίνμα το
Syiou (first so in .Sap. i. δ ; ix. 1 7 ; for \y,p Π1"ΐ, in Ps. 1.
(li.) 13, Is. l.\iii. 10, 11, the Sept. renders by πνήμα dyiw-
σίνης), i. e. the Holy Spirit (august, full of majesty, adora-
ble, utterly opposed to all impurity) : Mt. i. 18, 20 ; iii.
11 ; xii. 32 ; x.wiii. 19 ; Mk. i. 8; iii. 29 ; xii. 36 ; xiii. 11 ;
Lk. i. 15, 35 ; ii. 25, 26 ; iii. 16, 22 ; iv. 1 ; .xi. 13 ; xii. 10,
12 ; Jn. i. 33 ; vii. 39 [L Τ WH om. Tr br. Sy.] ; xiv. 26;
%\. 22 ; Acts i. 2, 5, 8, 16 ; ii. 33, 38 ; iv. 25 L Τ Tr WH ;
V. 3, 32; viii. ]8[LTWnom.Trbr.TOay.], 19; ix. 31 ; x.
38, 44, 45,47; xi. 15, 16, 24; .xiii. 2,4, 9,52; xv. 8, 28 ;
xvi. 6 ; xix. 6 ; xx. 28 ; Ro. ix. 1 ; xiv. 17; xv. 13, 16, 19
[L Tr WH in br.] ; 1 Co. vi. 19 ; xii. 3 ; 2 Co. vi. 6 ; xiii.
13 (14) ; Eph. i. 13 ; 1 Th. i. 5, 6 ; 2 Tim. i. 14 ; Tit. ui.
5 : Heb. ii. 4 ; vi. 4 ; ix. 8 ; 1 Jn. v. 7 Rec. ; Jude 20 ; oth-
er e.xx. will be given below in the phrases ; (on the use
and the omission of the art., see Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom.
ii. p. 105 [in opposition to llarless (on Eph. ii. 22) et al. :
cf. also Meyer on Gal. v. 16; Ellicott on Gal. v. 5 ; AV.
122 (116) ; B. 89 (78)]) ; το ην. το ayiov τοΟ θ(οί, Eph.
iv. 30 ; 1 Th. iv. 8 ; ττνινμα θ(οϋ, Ro. viii. 9, 14; to toC
Ofoi ιτνΐνμα, 1 Pet. iv. 14 ; {το) ττνΐΰμα (του) θίοΐι, ΛΙΐ. iii.
16; .\ii. 18, 28; 1 Co. ii. 14 ; iii. 16; Eph. iii. 16; 1 Jn.
iv. 2 ; TO πν, τον Bcov ημάν, 1 Co. vi. 1 1 ; to nv. του πατρός,
Mt. X. 20 ; πν. θίοϋ fiajn-os, 2 Co. iii. 3 ; ro nv. του tyfipav-
ΤΟΓ Ίησοϊν, Ro. viii. 11 ; το τγκ. to ίκ θ<οϋ (emanating
from God and imparted unto men), 1 Co. ii. 12; τηκϋμα
and TO πν. του κυρίου, i. e. of God, Lk. iv. 18 ; Acts v. 9
(cf. vs. 4 ) ; Λ iii. 39 ; κυρίου, i. e. of Christ, 2 Co. iii. 1 7,
18 [cf. B. 343 (295)]; τό πν(ϋμα 'ϊησον. since the same
Spirit in a peculiar manner dwelt in Jesus, Acts xvi.
7 (where Rec. om. 'lijaoO); Χριστοί, Ro. viii. 9; *Ιΐ7σοϋ
Χρίστου, Phil. i. 19; το ίν τινι (in one's soul [not WH
mrg.]) πνίϋμα Χριστού, 1 Pet. i. 11 ; το πν. τοΰ νΙοϋ τοΰ
ίίοϋ. Gal. iv. 6 ; simply ro πνήιμα or πνιϋμα : Mt. iv. 1 ;
xii. 31, 32 ; xxii. 43 ; Mk. i. 10, 12 ; Lk. iv. 1,14; Jn. i.
32, 33 ; iii. 6, 8, 34 ; vii. 39 ; Acts ii. 4 ; viii. 29 ; x. 19 ;
xi. 12, 28; xxi. 4 ; Ro. viii. 6, 16, 23, 26, 27 ; xv.30; 1 Co.
ii. 4, 10, 13 (where Rec. adds αγίου) ; xii. 4, 7, 8 ; 2 Co.
i. 22; iii. 6,8; V. 5; Gal. iii. 3, 5, 14 ; iv. 29; v. δ, 17, 22,
25 ; Eph. iv. 3 ; v. 9 Rec. ; vi. 1 7 ; Phil. ii. 1 ; 2 Th. ii.
13 ; 1 Tim. iv. 1 ; Jas. iv. 5 ; 1 Pet. i. 22 Rec. ; 1 Jn. iii.
24 ; V. 6, 8 ; Rev. xxii. 17. Among the beneficent and
very varied operations and effects ascribed to this
Spirit in the N. T., the foil, are prominent : by it the
man Jesus was begotten in the womb of the virgin Marv
(ilt. i. 18, 20 ; Lk. i. 3.')), and at his baptism by John il
is said to have descended upon Jesus (Mt. iii. 16 ; Mk. i.
10 ; Lk. iii. 22), so that he was perpetually (μίνον eV
αυτόν) filled with it (Jn. i. 32, 33. cf. iii. 34 ; Mt. xii. 2Χ;
Acts x. 38) ; hence to its prompting and aid the acts and
words of Christ are traced, Mt. iv. 1 ; .xii. 28; Mk. i. 12 ;
Lk. iv. 1, 14. After Christ's resurrection it was im-
parted also to the apostles, Jn. xx. 22 ; Acts ii. Sub-
sequently other followers of Christ are related to have
received it through faith (Gal. iii. 2), or by the instru-
mentality of baptism (.\cts ii. 38 ; 1 Co. xii. 13) and the
laying on of hands (Acts xix. 5, 6), although its recep-
tion was in no wise connected with baptism by any mag-
ical bond. Acts viii. 12, 15; .x. 44 sqq. To its agency
are referred all the blessings of the Christian religion,
such as regeneration wrought in baptism (Jn. iii. 5, 6, 8 ;
Tit. iii. 5, [but see the commentators on the passages, and
refp. s. V. βάπτισμα, 3]) ; all sanctification (1 Co. vi. 11 ;
hence αγιασμός πνιϋματο!, 2 Th. ii. 1 3 ; 1 Pet. i. 2) ; the
power of suppressing evil desires and practising holi-
ness (Ro. viii. 2sqq. ; Gal. v. 16 sqq. 22 ; 1 Pet. i. 22 [Rec],
etc.) ; fortitude to undergo with patience all persecu-
tions, losses, trials, for Christ's sake (Mt. x. 20; Lk. xii.
11,12; Ro. viii. 26) ; the knowledge of evangelical truth
(Jn. xiv. 1 7, 26 ; xv. 26 ; xvi. 12, 13 ; 1 Co. ii. 6-16 ; Eph.
iii. 5), — hence it is called ττνίϋμα της άΧηβιίας (Jn. 11. cc. ;
1 Jn. iv. 6), πν^ΰμα σοφίας κα\ άποκαλύψ(ως (Eph. i. 17) ;
the sure and joyful hojie of a future resurrection, and
of eternal blessedness (Ro. v. 5 ; viii 11 ; 2 Co. i. 22 ; v.
5; Eph. i. 13 sq.) ; for the Holy Spirit is the seal and
pledge of citizenship in the kingdom of God, 2 Co. i. 22;
Eph. i. 1 3. He is present to teach, guide, prompt, restrain,
those Christians whose agency God employs in carrying
out his counsels : Acts viii. 29, 39 ; x. 19 ; .\i. 12 ; xiii. 2,
4 ; XV. 28 ; xvi. 6, 7 ; xx. 28. He is the author of char-
isms or special "gifts" (1 Co. xii. 7 sqq.; see ;ι;αρισρα),
prominent among which is the power of prophesy-
ing: τά ΐρχόμΐνα dyayyfXft, Jn. xvi. 13; hence ro πν€νμα
της προφητείας (Rev. xix. 10) ; and his efficiency in the
prophets is called ro πνιΰμα simply (1 Th. v. 19), and
their utterances are introduced with these formulas:
roSe Xi'yet το πνεύμα το άγιον. Acts xxi. 1 1 : το πνεύμα
λίγ«, 1 Tim. iv. 1; Rev. xiv. 13; with raif ΐκκλησίαις
added. Rev. ii. 7, 1 1. 1 7, 29 ; iii. 6, 13, 22. Since the Holy
Spirit by his inspiration was the author also of the O.T.
Scriptures (2 Pet. i. 21 ; 2 Tim. iii. 16), his utterances
are cited in the foil, terms : Xe'yci or μαρτυρεί το πνεύμα
το Sytov, Heb. iii. 7; χ. 15; ro wv. το ay. εΚάλησε iia
Ήσαίου. Acts xxviii. 25, cf. i. 16. From among the
great number of other phrases referring to the Holy
Spirit the following seem to be noteworthy here: God
ιτνβνμα
522
ΤΓΐ'βυμα
is said δώόναι τινί το πν. το άγ-, Lk. xi. 13; Acts χν. 8;
pass. Κυ. V. ο ; more jirccisolv, ck toO πνιόματο! αϋτοΰ, i.e.
a portion from his S|)iril'.s fiiliioss [15. § l.ij, 7; \\'. 366
(343)], 1 Jii. iv. 13; or (κχΰν άπο τοί πικΰματο! αΰτοΰ.
Acts ii. 17, 18, (for its entire fulness Christ alone re-
ceives, Jn. iii. 34); men are said, 'Καμβάναν πν. ay., .Jn.
.\x. 22; Acts viii. 15, 17, 19 ; xix. 2 ; orτoπι'. το &γ. Acts
X. 47; or το πν. το «κ ΛοΟ, 1 Co. ii. 12; or το πΐΊνμα, (ial.
iii. 2, cf. Ilo. viii. 1ϋ ; πν. θίοΰ ϊχαν, 1 Co. vii. 40 ; πνιΰμα
μη €χΐίν, flude \9 ; πλημονσθαί πνΐύματος άγ/ου, Acts \iii.
52; iv πν(ΰματί, \ί\>\\.\. IS; ηΧησθηναι, πλησθησισθαι,
7Γΐ/ίΐ;μαΓ05 (iyiou, Lk. i. 15, 41, 67; Actsii.4; iv. 8, 31 ; ix.
17; xiii. 9; πνίύματο! άγιου nXijpiji, Acts vi. 5 ; vii. 55 ;
xi. 24; π\ήρ(ΐ( πνιΰματο! (Hec. adds άγιου) και σοφία;,
Acts vi. 3 ; πνίύματι and πν^ύματι θ(υϋ αγισΰαι, to he le<l
by the Holy S|)irit, Ro. viii. 14 ; Gal. v. is ; φίμισθαι ύπο
πν. άγ. 2 Pet. i. 21; the Spirit is said to dwell in the
minds of Christians, Ro. viii. 9, 11 ; 1 Co. iii. 16; vi. I!);
2 Tim. i. 14 ; .las. iv. 5, (other expressions may be found
under βαπτίζω, II. b. bb. ; γ(ννάω, 1 fin. and 2 d. ; ίκχίω b. ;
χρίω, a.) ; γίν(σθιιι iv πνιΰματι, to come to be in the Spirit,
under the power of the Spirit, i. e. in a state of inspira-
tion or ecstasy. Rev. i. 10 ; iv. 2. Dative πνίύματι, by the
power and aid of the Spirit, the Spirit prompting, Ro.
viii. 13 ; Gal. v. 5 ; τω πν. τω άγίω. Lk. χ. 21 L Tr UTl ;
πνιύματι άγίω, 1 Pet. i. 12 (where RG ThavefV πν. άγ.) ;
πνίύματί θ€ον, Phil. iii. 3 L Τ 'IV WII ; also iv πν^υματι,
K|)h. ii. 22 ; iii. 5 (where iv πνιΰματι must be joined to
απ(<αλΰφθη) ; iv πνιΰματι, in the power of the Spirit,
possessed and moved by the Spirit, Mt. xxii. 43 ; Rev.
xvii. 3; xxi. 10; also iv τω πνίύματι. Lk. ii. 27; iv. 1 ;
iv τω πν. τω άγ. Lk. χ. 21 Tdf. ; iv ττ/ δυνάμα τοϊι πν. Lk. iv.
14 ; iv τω πνινματι τω άγ. (Ιπύν, JMk. .\ϋ. 36; iv πνήματι
(άγ.) προσ(ύχ(σθαι, Epb. vi. 18; Jude 20; eV πν. Oetw
\a\fiv, 1 Co. xii. 3 ; αγάπη iv πνήματι, love which the
Spirit begets. Cob i. 8 ; π(ρίτομη iv πν., effected by the
Holy Spirit, opp. to γράμματι, the ])rescription of the
Λvritten law, Ro. ii. 29 ; τύπος γίνου των πιστών iv πν., in
the way in which yon are governed by the Spirit, 1 Tim.
iv. 12 Rec; [tV ίν\ πνιύματι, Eph. ii. 18]; ή ίνότης τοΐι
πνήματος, effected by the Spirit, Eph. iv. 3 ; καινότη; τοΰ
πν. Ro. vii. 6. το πνιΰμα is opp. to ή σαρξ i. e. human
nature left to itself and without the controlling influence
of God's Spirit, subject to error and sin, (!al. v. 17, 19,
22 ; [vi. 8] ; Ro. viii. 6 ; so in the jihrases πιριπατίΐν κατά
πν(ΰμα (opp. to κατά σάρκα), 1Ϊ0. viii. 1 Rec, 4 ; οί κατά
πνήμα sc. οντά (opp. to οί κητά σάρκα όντα), those who
bear the nature of the Spirit (i. e. o'l πν(υματικοί), ib.
5 ; iv πνιύματι fwai (opp. to iv σαρκί), to be under the
power of the Spirit, to be guided by the Spirit, ib. 9 ;
πνίϋματι (dat. of 'norm'; [cf. B. § 133, 22 b. ; W. 219
(205)]) πιριπατύν (opp. to iπιθυμίav σαρκός Te\('iv), Gal.
V. 16. The Holy S|)irit is a δνι/α /xir, and is expressly
so called in Lk. xxiv. 49, and δύναμις ύψιστου, Lk. i. 35 ;
but we find also πνιϋμα (or πν. άγ.) κα\ 8ύναμις, Acts χ.
38 ; 1 Co. ii. 4 ; and η δΰνημις τον πνεύματος, Lk. iv. 14,
where πνΛμα is regarded as the essence, and ίύναμις its
efBcacy ; but in 1 Th. i. 5 iv πνιύματι άγίω is epexegetical
of iv δυνάμιι. In some pass, the Holy Sj)irit is rhetori-
cally represented as a Person [(cf. reff. below)] : Mt.
xxviii.19; Jn. xiv. 16s(i. 26; xv. 26; xvi. 13-15 (in which
pass. fr. Jn. the personification was suggested by the fact
that the Holy Spirit was about to assume with the apos-
tles the place of a person, namely of Christ) ; το πν., καθώς
βούλιται, 1 Co. xii. 11 ; what any one through the help
of the Holy Spirit has come to understand or decide upon
is said to have been spoken to him by the Holy Spirit:
(ϊπ( TO πν(ΰμά τινι. Acts viii. 29 ; x. 19; xi. 12; xiii. 4 ; το
πν. το άγ. διαμαρτύρεται μοι. Acts χχ. 23. το πν. το άγ.
(θ€το (πισκόπους, i. e. not only rendered them fit to dis-
charge the olHce of bishop, but also exercised such an in-
fluence in their election (xiv. 23) that none except fit per-
sons were chosen to the oflice, Acts xx. 28 ; το πνίΰμα
υπ(ρ(ντυγχάν(ΐ στιναγμοίς άλαλήτοις in Ro. viii. 26 means,
as the Avhole context shows, nothing other than this: 'al-
though we have no very definite conception of what we
desire (ri προσιυξώμεθα), and cannot state it in fit lan-
guage (καβίι Sfi) in our jirayer but only disclose it by in-
articulate groanings, yet God receives these groanings
as acceiitable prayers inasmuch as they come from a soul
full of the Holy Spirit.' Those who strive against the
sanctifying impulses of the Holy Spirit are said άντιπί-
πτ(ΐν τω πν. τω άγ. Acts vii. 51 ; ivυβpίζeιv το πν. της χάρι-
τος, Ileb. .χ. 29. πιιράζςιν το πν. τοΰ κυρίου is ap])tied to
those who by falsehood would discover Λvhether men full
of the Holy Spirit can be deceived, Acts v. 9 ; by anthro-
popathism those who disregard decency in their speech
are said λυπιΐν το πν. το άγ., since by that they arc taught
how they ought to talk, Eph. iv. 30 (παροξύνιιν το πν. Is.
Ixiii. 10; παραπικραίν(ΐν, Ps. cv. (cvi.) 33). Cf. Grimm,
Institutio theologiae dogmaticae, §131; [T'Fei'.s-.s•, Bibl.
Theol. § 155 (and Index s. v. '(Jeist Gottes,' 'Spirit of
God'); Kahnis, Lehre vom Heil. Geiste; Frilz.tche, Nova
opuscc. acad. p. 278 sq(]. ; B. D. s. v. Spirit the Holy;
Sirele in Diet, of Christ. Biog. s. v. Holy Ghost]. b.
τα (πτά πνεύματα τοΰ θ(οΰ, Rev. [iii. 1 (where Rec." ora.
eTTTO)] ; iv. 5 ; V. 6 [here L om. WH br. ί'τττά], which are
said to be ivώπιov τοΰ θρόνου τοΰ θ(οΰ (i. 4) are not seven
angels, but one and the same divine Spirit manifesting
itself in seven energies or operations (which are rhetori-
cally personified, Zech. iii. 9 ; iv. 6, 10) ; cf. Dusterdieck
on Rev. i. 4 ; \_Trench, Epp. to the Seven Churches, ed. 3
p. 7 sq.]. c. by meton. πνεύμα is used of a. one
in whom a spirit (πνεύμα) i.s- manifcsl or emlioilied; hence
i. q. actuated hy a spirit, whetlier dirine or deinoniacul ; one
trho either is Irubj moved hy God's Spirit or falsely boasts
that he is : 2 Th. ii. 2 ; 1 Jn. iv. 2, 3 ; hence διακρίσεις
πνευμάτων, 1 Co. xii. \0; μη παντι πνενματι πιστεύετε, 1 Jn.
iv. 1 ; δοκιμάζετε τα πνεύματα, ει iK τοΰ θεον iστίv, ibid. ;
πνεύματα πλάΐ'α joined with διδασκαλίαι δαιμονίων, 1 Tim.
iv. 1. But in the truest and highest sense it is said ό
κύριος το πνεΰμά iariv. he in whom the entire fulness of
the Spirit dwells, and from whom that fulness is diffused
through the body of Christian believers, 2 Co. iii. 1 7. β.
the plur. πνεύματα denotes the various modes and gifts
by which the Holy Spirit shows itself operative in those
ητνΐυμα
523
ττνενματικωι
in whom it awells (such as το πνιΰμα τ^γ προφητίία!, τήί
σοφίας, etc.), 1 Co. xiv. 12.
5. univ. the disposition or influence which fills and gov-
erns the soul of any one; the efficient source of any power,
affection, emotion, desire, etc. : τω αύτώ πιχνματι πιρκπα-
τήσαμιν, 2 Co. xii. 18 ; ϊν πι>€νματι Ήλιου, in the same
spirit ivith which Ehjah was filled of old, Lk. i. 17;
τα ρήματα . . . πν^ϊ/μά ίστιν, e.xhale a spirit (and fill be-
lievers with it), .In. vi. 63 ; οίου πν(ίματΟ! cirre νμή:,
[ivhat manner of spirit ye are o/"] viz. a divine spirit,
that I have imparted unto you, Lk. ix. 5.5 [Rec. ; (cf.
B. § 132, 11 I. ; W. § 30, 5)] ; τω πνιίματι, ω eXaXet,
Acts vi. 10, where see ^leyer; πραύ και ήσίχιον πνιϋμα,
1 Pet. iii. 4 ; πνίϋμα πραότητο!, such as belongs to the
meek, 1 Co. iv. 21 ; Gal. vi. 1 ; το πν. τήι προφητιίας, such
as characterizes prophecy and by which the prophets
are governed. Rev. .xix. 10; τη! άλι /ifias, σοφία! και άπο-
καλΰψΐω!, see above p. 521' mid. (Is. xi. 2; Deut. xxxiv. 9;
Sap. vii. 7) ; τη! πίστ(ωι, 2 Co. iv. 1 3 ; τ^ί υΐο^Εσιαί, such
as belongs to sons, Ro. viii. 15; t^s ζωη! fV Χριστώ, of
the life which one gets in fellowship with Christ, ibid. 2 ;
Βννάμΐω! καΐ ayamj! και σωφρονισμού, 2 Tim. i. 7 ; ev πν^νμα
eivat Λvith Christ, i. q. to be filled with the same spirit as
Christ and by the bond of that spirit to be intimately
united to Christ, 1 Co. vi. 17 ; tv cVi πνίίματι, by the re-
ce])tion of one Spirit's efficiency, 1 Co. xii. 13; e?s Iv
■πν^ϋμα, so as to be united into one body filled with one
Spirit, ibid. R G ; Ix πνήμα ποτΐζισθαι, \_7nade to drink
of i. e.] imbued with one .Spirit, ibid. L Τ Tr WH [see
ποτίζω]; iv σώμα κα\ ίν ■πν(ϋμα, one (social) body filled
and animated by one spirit, Eph. iv. 4 ; — in all these
pass, although the language is general, yet it is clear
from the context that the writer means a spirit begotten
of the Holy Spirit or even identical with that Spirit [(cf.
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 46, 6; Herm. sim. 9, 13. 18; Ignat. ad
Magn. 7)]. In opposition to the divine Spirit stand,
TO τίνίΰμα το evepyovv 4v to'h vtoir τη! άπΐΐθίία! (a spirit
that comes from the devil), Eph. ii. 2 ; also το ττν^νμα τοΰ
κόσμου, the spirit that actuates the unholy multitude,
1 Co. ii. 12 ; 8ov\fia!, such as characterizes and governs
slaves, Ro. viii. 15 ; κατανίξ^ω!, Ro. xi. 8 ; Sf iKia!, 2 Tim.
i. 7; τη! 7r\ainji, 1 Jn. iv. 6 (π\ανησ€ω!. Is. xix. 14 ; nop-
V€ia!, Hos. iv. 12; v. 4) ; το τού αντίχριστου sc. πνίνμα,
ι Jn. iv. 3 ; ίτιρον ττνιϋμα \aμβάvfιv, i. e. different from
the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. xi. 4 ; το πν. τοΰ νοόί, the govern-
ing spirit of the mind, Eph. iv. 23. Cf. Ackermann,
Beitrage zur theol. Wiirdigung u. Abwagung der Begriffe
πν(νμα, rais, u. Geist, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for
1S39, p. 873 sqq. ; Biichsenschtilz, La doctrine de I'Esprit
de Dieu selon I'ancien et nouveau testament. Strasb.
1840; Chr. Fr. Fritzsche, De Spiritu Sancto commenta-
tio exegetica et dogmatica, 4 Pts. Ilal. 1840 sq., included
in his Nova opuscula academica (Turici, lS4G)p. 233 sqq. ;
KahnL<!, Die Lehre v. heil. Geist. Ft. i. (Halle, 1847) ; an
anonymous publication [by Prince Ludwig Solms Lich,
entitled] Die biblische Bedeutung des Wortes Geist.
(Giessen, 1862) ; H. H. Wendt, Die Begriffe Fleisch u.
Geist im bibl. Sprachgebrauch. (Gotha, 1878) ; ICremer
in Herzog ed. 2, s. v. Geist des Menschen ; G. L. Hahn,
Theol. d. N. Test. i. § 149 sqq. ; J. Laidlaw, The Bible
Doctrine of JIan. (Cunningham Lects., 7th Series, 1880);
Dickson, St. Paul's use of the terms Flesh and Spirit.
(Glasgow, 1883) ; and reff. in B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) and
Diet, of Christ. Biog., as above, 4 a. fin.]*
•irv€D(iaTiKOs, -ή, -όν, (πν(ΰμα), spiritual (Vulg. spiritalis);
in the N. T. 1. relating to the human spirit, or
rational soul, as the part of man which is akin to God
and serves as his instrument or organ, opp. to ή ψυχή
(see πν(νμα, 2) : hence το πν(υματικόν, that which pos-
sesses the nature of the rational soul, opp. to το ψυχικόν,
1 Co. XV. 4G [cf. W. 592 (551)]; σώμα πνίνματικόν, the
body which is animated and controlled only by the ra-
tional soul and by means of which the rational life, or
life of the ττνίϋμα, is lived ; opp. to σώμα yj /υχικόν, verse
44. 2. belonging to a spirit, or a being higher
than man but inferior to God (see πνίΰμα, 3 c.) : τα πνευ-
ματικά (i. e. spiritual beings or powers, [R. V. spiritual
hosts], cf. W. 239 (224)) τη! πονηρία! (gen. of quality),
i. e. wicked spirits, Eph. vi. 1 2. 3. belonging to the
Divine Spirit; a. in reference to things;
emanating from the Divine Spirit, or exhibiting its effects
and so its character : χάρισμα, Ro. i. 1 1 ; fiXoyta, Eph. i.
3 ; σοφία κα\ σννΐσις πνευματική (opp. to σοφία σαρκική. 2
Co. i. 12; \ΐΛυχικη, .las. iii. 15), Col. i. 9; ωδαί, divinely
inspired, and so redolent of the Holy Spirit, Col. iii. 16;
[Eph. V. 19 Lchm. br.] ; ό νόμο! (opp. to a σάρκινο! man),
Ro. vii. 14 ; θυσίαι, tropically, the acts of a life dedicated
to God and approved by him, due to the influence of the
Holy Spirit (tacitly opp. to the sacrifices of an external
worship), 1 Pet. ii. 5 ; i. q. produced by the sole power of
God himself without natural instrumentality, supernatural,
βρωμά, πόμα, πίτρα, 1 Co. χ. 3, 4, [(cf. ' Teaching ' etc. 10,
3)] ; ττνευματικά, thoughts, opinions, precepts, maxims,
ascribable to the Holy Spirit working in the soul, 1 Co.
ii. 13 (on which see συ-γκρίνω. 1) ; τα πνευματικά, spiritual
gifts, — of the endowments called χαρίσματα (see χάρι-
σμα), 1 Co. xii. 1 ; xiv. 1 ; univ. the spiritual or heavenly
blessings of the gospel, opp. to τα σαρκικά, Ro. xv. 27 ; [1
Co. ix. 11]. b. in reference to persons; one who
L<! filled with and governed by the Spirit of God : 1 Co. ii.
15 (cf. 10-13,16); [iii. 1]; xiv. 37; Gal. vi. 1 ; οΓκογ
πνευματικό!, of a body of Christians (see ο'κογ, 1 b. fin.),
1 Pet. ii. 5. (The word is not found in the O. T. [cf.
W. § 34, 3]. In prof. writ. fr. Aristot. down it means
pertaining to the wind or breath ; windy, exposed to the
wind ; blowing ; [but Snph. Lex. s. v. cites πν. ουσία, Cleo-
med. 1, 8 p. 46 ; το πν. το πάντων τούτων αίτιον. Strab. 1,
3, 5 ρ. 78, lOed. Kramer ; and we find it opp. to σωματικόν
in Plut. mor. p. 129 c. (de sanitate praecepta 14) ; cf. An•
thol. Pal. 8, 76. 175].)•
ιπ'€υματικώ5, adv., spiritually, (Vulg. spiritaliter') : i. e.
by the aid of the Holy Spirit, 1 Co. ii. [13 WH mrg.], 14;
in a sense apprehended only by the aid of the Divine
Spirit, i. e. in a hidden or mystical sense. Rev. xi. 8. Its
opposite σαρκικά)! in the sense of literally is used by Jus-
tin Mart. dial. c. Tryph. c. 14 p. 231 d.*
1r^eω
524
voie»
irvt'u; 1 aor «πκυσα; fr. Hum. down; lo breuihe, lo
blow : of the wind, Mt. vii. -25, 27 ; Lk. xii. 55 ; Jn. iii.
8; vi. 18; Kev. vii. 1 ; ry jiTeouoj sc. aCpti (cf. W. 591
(550); [B. 8'.' (72)]), Acts χ,\νϋ.40. [CoMP. : tV, «V-,
ύϊΓΟ• πνί'ω.] *
Ίτνίγω : imjif. ίπΐ'ίγον ; 1 aor. ίπνιξα ; impf. pass. 3 pers.
plur. iVwiyoiTi) ; a. /of/ioitt, .s^raniz/e : used of thorns
crowd. n;4 down tlie seed sown in a field and hindering
its Krowtli, Mt. xiii. 7 Τ WIl mrg. ; in the pa.ss. of per-
isliing by drowning (Xen. anab. 5, 7, 25 ; cf. Joseph, antt.
10, 7, 5), Mlc. V. 13. b. to wring one's neck; Ihrollle,
[A. V. lo lake one by the throat} : Mt. xviii. 2S. [Comp. :
άππ; fVt-, συμ.- πνίγω•] *
irviKTOs, -ή, -of, {πνίγω), suffocated, simni/ler! : to Wi-
κτόν, [what is slrant/lcil, i. e.] an animal deprived of life
without shedding its blood. Acts xv. 20, 29 ; x.\i. 25.
[(Several times in Athen. and other later writ., chielly
of cookery ; cf. our " smothered " as a culinary terra.) J *
•πνοή, -η!, η, (Ώ-χί'ω), fr. Horn, down, Sept. for n^E/j;
1. breath, the breath of life : Acts xvii. 25 (fJen. ii. 7;
Prov. xxiv. 12; Sir. xxx. 29 (21); 2 Mace. iii. 31; vii.
9). 2. wind: Acts ii. 2 (Job xxxvii. 9). [Cf.
πνΐϋμα-, 1 b.] *
ιτοΒήρηί, -it, ace. -ρην, Lchm. ed. ster. Tdf. ed. 7 in Rev.
i. 13 ; see άμσην, (πούί, and άρω ' to join together,' 'fas-
ten'), reacJiiiKj to the feel (Aesehyl., Eur., Xen., Pint.,
al.) : ό πο8ηρης (sc. χιτώκ, Ex. xxv. G ; .xxviii. 4 : .xxxv.
8; Ezek. ix. 3) or ήπο8ημης (sc. (σθήί), a garment reaching
lo the anlies, coining down lo the feel, llev.i. 13 (Sir. x.xvii.
Κ ; xlv. 8 ; χιτων ποδηρη!, Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 2 ; Pans. 5, 19,
fi ; Ιπο8ΰτη! ΤΓοδ. Ex. xxviii. 27 ; ?ι/8υμα ποδ- Sup. xviii.
24 : [Joseph, b. j. 5, 5, 7]). [Cf. Trench § 1. sub fin.] *
ττόβίν, adv., [fr. Ilom. down], ivhence ; a. of
\>hu:e, from what place: Mt. xv. 33; Lk. xiii. 25. 27; Jn.
iii. 8; vi. 5; viii. 14; ix. 29, 30; xi.x. 9; Rev. vii. 13;
from what condition, Ή,6ν. ii. 5. b. of origin or
source, i. q. from what author or giver : Mt. xiii. [27], 54,
56 ; xxi. 25 ; Mk. vi. 2 ; Lk. xx. 7 ; Jn. ii. 9 ; .las. iv. 1 ;
from what parentage, Jn. vii. 27 sq. (cf. vi. 42), see Mej'er
ad loc. c. of cause, how is it that f how can it be that ?
Mk. viii. 4; xii. 37; Lk. i. 43; ,In. i. 48 (49); iv. 11.*
irota, -as, ψ [cf. Curtius § 3S7], herbage, grass : ace. to
some interpreters found in Jas. iv. 14 ; but ττοία there is
more correctly taken as the fem. of the adj. ποΐοί (q. v.),
of what sort. (Jer. ii. 22; Mai. iii. 2; in Grk. writ. fr.
Horn, down.) *
iroif'u, -ά; impf. 3 pers. sing. cVroiVc, plur. 2 pers. eVot-
fiTt, 3 pers. eVoioui»; fut. ποιήσω; 1 aor. (ποίησα, 3 ])ers.
|)Iur. optat. ποι.ήσ€ίαν (Lk. vi. 11 RG; cf. W. §13, 2d.;
[B. 42(37)]) and TTOifiaaKu (ibid. LTTrWII [see \VH.
.\pp. p. 167]); pf. ητιποίηκα; plpf. πίποιηκαν without
augra. (Mk. XV. 7; see W. § 12, 9; B. 33 (29)); Mid.,
pres. ποωΟμα» ; impf. tVoiou/iiji/; fut. ποιήσο/ωκ ; 1 aor. tVot-
ησάμην; pf. pass. ptcp. πίποιτ)μίΐΌΓ (Heb. xii. 27); fr.
Horn, down; Ilebr. nij?;?; Lat. yacio, i.e.
I. to make (Lat. efficio), 1. ri; a. with the
names of the things made, to produce, construct, form,
fashion, etc. : άνθρακιάν, .Jn. xviii. 18 ; (Ικηνα, Rev. xiii.
H ; ιμάτια, .Vets IK. 39; ναούϊ, .\cts xix. 24 ; σκηνάς, Mt
xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 5; Lk. ix. 33; rwrout. Acts vii. 43; πηΚύν,
Jn. ix. 11, 14; νΚάσμα, Ro. ix. 20; ace. to some inter-
preters (also \X. 256 n.' (240 n.')) όδόχ trouXv, lo make a
path, Mk. ii. 23 R G Τ Tr txt. WII txt. (so that the mean-
ing i.s, that the disciples of Christ made a path for them-
selves through the standing grain by plucking the heads;
see όδοπυκ'ω, fin. If we adopt this interpretation, we
must take the ground that Mark does not give us the
true account of the matter, but has sadly corrupted the
narrative received from others ; [those who do accept
it, however, not only lay stress on the almost unvarying
lexical usage, but call attention to the fact that the other
interpretation (see below) finds the leading idea ex-
pressed in the participle — an idiom apparently foreign
to the N. T. (see W. 353 (331)), and to the additional
circiunslance that Mk. introduces the phrase after hav-
ing already ex pressed the idea of 'going', and ex-
pressed it by substantially the same word {napanopfif
σθοί) which Matthew (xii. 1) and Luke (vi. 1) employ
and regard as of itself sulficient. On the interpretation
of the pass., the alleged ' sad corruption,' etc., see Jas.
Morison, Com. on Mk. 2d ed. p. 57 sq. ; on the other side,
H'ciVs, Marcusevangelium, p. 100]. But see just below,
under c). to create, to produce : of God, as the author
of all things, τί or Tiwi, Mt. xix. 4 : Mk. x. 6 ; Lk. xi. 40;
Heb. i. 2 ; Acts iv. 24 ; vii. 50 ; xvii. 24 ; Rev. xiv. 7 ; pass.
Ileb. xii. 27, (Sap. i. 13 ; ix. 9; 2 JLicc. vii. 28, and often
in the O.T. Apocrypha; for nij;^• in Gen. i. 7, 16, 25, etc.;
for N•;! in Gen. i. 21, 27 ; v. 1, etc. ; also in Grk. writ. :
yiiioi ανθρώπων, Hes. op. 109, etc. ; absol. ό ποιών, the crea-
tor, rial. Tim. p. 76 c); here belongs also Heb. iii. 2, on
which sec Bleek and Liinemann [(cf. below, 2 c. /3)]•
In imitation of the Ilebr. Π!^^; (cf. Winer ['.s- Simonis (4th
ed. 1828)], Lex. Ilebr. et Chald. p. 754 ; Clesenius, Thes.
ii. p. 1074 sq.) absol. of men, to labor, lo do work, Mt. xx.
12 (Rutli ii. 19) ; i. q. /o be operative, exercise activity.
Rev. xiii. 5 Rnoiei». LTTrWII [cf. Dan. xi. 28; but aL
render ποίίίκ in both these exx. spend, continue, in ref.
to time ; see II. d. below]. b. joined to nouns de-
noting a state or condition, it signifies to be the au-
thor of. localise : σκάνδαλα. Ro. xvi. 17 ; (ΐρήνην (to be the
author of harmony), Eph. ii. 15 ; Jas. iii. 18 ; ίπισίστασι»
[L Τ Tr WH ί-πίπτασιν']. Acts xxiv. 12 ; σνστροφήν. Acts
xxiii. 12; ποιώτινί Tt, to bring, afford, a tiling to one, Lk.
i. 68 ; Acts xv. 3, (so .also (irk. writ., as Xen. mem. 3,
10, 8 [cf. L. and S. s.v. A. II. la.]). c. joined to
nouns involving the idea of action (or of something
which is accomplished by action), so as to form a peri-
phrasis for the verb cognate to the substantive, and thus
to express the idea of the verb more forcibly, — in which
species of periphrasis the Grks. more commonly use the
middle (see 3 below, and W. 2.i6 (240) ; [B. § 135, 5]):
μονην ποιώ παρά τινι, Jn. xiv. 23 (where L Τ Tr λ\ΊΙ ποιψ
σόμιθα ; cf. Thuc. 1, 131) ; όδόκ, to make one's way, go,
Mk. ii. 23 (where render as follows : they began, as theg
went, to pluck the ears; cf. ποιζσ<^ι όδόκ αντοϋ, Judg. xvu.
8 ; the Greeks say iiov πoιfΊσβaι, Hdt. 7, 42; see above,
votea
525
ander a.); ηολίμαν, Rev. xiii. 5 Rec.''"; with the addi-
tion of μ(τά TWOS (i. q- ffoXf^eif), Rev. xi. 7 ; xii. 1 7 ; xiii.
7 [here L cm. Wli Tr mrg. br. tlie cl.] ; xix. 1 9, (see /xera,
I. 2 d. p. 403'") ; (ΐώίκησιν, Lk. xviii. 7, 8 ; rm, Acts vii.
24, (Mic. V. 15) ; ivibpav, i. q. «wSpfuw, to make an am-
bush, lay wait. Acts xxv. 3 ; συμβούΧιον, i. q. σνμβονλίΰο-
fidi, to hold a consultation, deliberate, Mk. iii. 6 [R G
TTrmrg. AVII mrg.] ; xv. 1 [here Τ WH mrg. σνμβ.
(Τοιμάσαιττΐς~\ ; σννωμοσίαν, i. q. σννόμνυμι. Acts xxiii. 1 3
(where \^Ύ Ύτ\\' \l τιοιησάμ^νοιίοτ \\.ec.■rrfπo^ηκότfs■, see
in 3 below) ; κρίσιν-, to e.xecute judgment, Jn. v. 27 ; Jude
15. To this head may be referred nouns by which the
mode or kind of action is more precisely defined ; as
iuTOfifif, ϋναμιν, ποκϊν, ^It. vii. 22 ; xiii. 58 ; Mk. vi. 5 ;
Acts xix. 11 ; την ΐξουσιαν tivos. Rev. .xiii. 12; efyov (a
notable work), tpya, of Jesus, Jn. v. 36, vii. 3, 21 ; x. 25 ;
xiv. 10, 12 ; xv. 24 ; κράτο!, Lk. i. 51 ; σημιϊα, τίρατα και
σημΰα, [Mk. xiii. 22 Tdf.] ; Jn. ii. 23 ; iii. 2 ; iv. 54 ; vi.
2,14,30; vii.31; i.x.l6; x.41; xi.47; xii. 18,37; xx.
30; Acts ii. 22; vi. 8 ; vii. 36; viii. 6 ; xv. 12; Rev. xiii.
13, 14 ; xvi. 14; xix. 20; θαυμάσια, Mt. xxi. 15; όσα cnoUi,
{ποίησαν, etc., Mk. iii. 8; vi. 30; Lk. ix. 10; in other
phrases it is used of marvellous works, Mt. ix. 28 ; Lk.
iv. 23 ; Jn. iv. 45 ; vii. 4 ; xi. 45, 46 ; xxi. 25 [not Tdf.] ;
Acts X. 39; xiv. 11 ; xxi. 19; etc. d. i. q. to make
ready, to prepare : άριστον, Lk. xiv. 12; iflnvov, Mk. vL
21 ; Lk. xiv. 16 ; Jn. xii. 2, {he'mvov Έοιύσθαι, Xen. Cyr.
3, 3, 25) ; 5οχήν, Lk. v. 29; xiv. 13, (Gen. x.xi. 8) ; γάμουϊ,
Mt. xxii. 2 (-/άμον, Tob. viii. 19). e. of things ef-
fected by generative force, to produce, bear, shoot forth :
of trees, vines, grass, etc., κλάδους, Mk. iv. 32; κάμπου!,
Mt. iii. 8, etc., see καρπός, 1 and 2 a. (Gen. i. 1 1 , 1 2 ; Aris-
tot. de plant. [1, 4 p. «19', 31] ; 2, 10 [829", 41] ; Theophr.
de caus. plant. 4, 11 [(?)]) ; eXamr, Jas. iii. 12 (τον οϊνον,
of the vine, Joseph, antt. 11, 3, 5) ; of a fountain yield-
ing water, ibid. f. ποιώ ϊμαυτώ τι, to acquire, to
proride a thin η for one's >:elf(i. e. for one's use) : βαλάντια,
Lk. xii. 33 ; φίλους, Lk. xvi. 9 ; without a dative, to gain :
of tradesmen (like our colloq. to mai-e something), Mt.
XXV. 16 [L Tr WH Ϊκίρ8ησ(ν'] ; Lk. xix. 18, (Polyb. 2, 62,
12; pecuniam maximamyiic-ere, Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 6). 2.
With additions to the accusative which define or limit
the idea of making : a. τι ίκ tivos (gen. of mate-
rial), to make a thing out of something, Jn. ii. 15; ix.
6 ; Ro. ix. 21 ; κατά τι, according to the pattern of a
thing [see κατά, IL 3 c. a]. Acts vii. 44. with the addi-
tion, to the ace. of the thing, of an adjective with which
the verb so blends that, taken with the adj., it may be
changed into the verb coinate to the adj. : dSdas itoi-
elv (ras τρίβους), i. q. eieivctv, Mt. iii. 3; Mk. i. 3 ; Lk.
iii. 4 ; τρίχα \(υκ<)ν η μίλαιναν, i. ([. \eυκa^vfιv, μίΧαίναν,
Mt. V. 36; add, Acts vii. 19; Heb. xii. 13; Rev. xxi.
5. b. TO Ικανήν Tiw : see 'iKavos, a. c. ποκΐν
Tiva with an accus. of the predicate, a. to (make i. e.)
render one anything: τίνα ίσον τινί, Mt. xx. 12; τίνα
δήλοι», Mt. x.xvi. 73 ; add, Mt. xii. 16 ; xxviii. 14 ; Mk. iii.
12; Jn.v.ll, 15; vii. 23; xvi. 2 ; Ro. ix. 28[RG,Trmrg.
in br.]; Heb. i. 7; Rev. xii. 15; rivas <iA«eir. to make
them fit (qualify them) for fishing, Mt. iv. 19; [iroi»»
ταϋτα γνωστά άπ' aiUvos, Acts xv. 1 7 sq. G Τ Tr WH (see
γνωστός, and cf. IL a. below)]; τα άμφότιρα ίν, to make
the two different things one, Eph. ii. 14 ; to change one
thing into another, Mt. .xxi. 13 ; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix. 46 ;
Jn. ii. 16 ; iv. 46 ; 1 Co. vi. 15. β. to (make i.e.) consti-
tute or appoint one anything: τινά κϋριον, Acts ii. 36 ; Rev.
V. 10; to this sense some interpreters would refer Heb. iii.
2 also, where after τω ποιήσαντι αυτόν they supply from the
preceding conte.xt τόΐ' άπύστ6\ον κα\ άρχκρία κτλ. ; but it
is more correct to take ποκίν here in the sense of create
(see 1 a. above) ; τινά, ϊνα Λϊith the subjunc. to appoint or
ordain one that etc. Mk. iii. 14. γ. to (make i. e.)
declare one anything: Jn. v. 18; viii. 53; x. 33; .\ix. 7,
12 ; 1 Jn. i. 10 ; v. 10 ; τί with an ace. of the pred. Mt.
xii. 33 (on which see Meyer). d. with adverbs :
καλωΓ η-οιώ τ», Mk. vii. 37 [A. V. rfo] ; τίκά ίξω, to put one
forth, to lead him out (Germ, hinausthun), Acts v. 34 (Xen.
Cyr. 4, 1, 3). e. ποιώ τίνα with an infin. to make one
do a thing, Mk. viii. 25 [R G L Tr mrg.] ; Lk. v. 34 ; Jn.
vi. 10; Acts xvii. 26; or become something, Mk. i. 17;
τινά foil, by ToC with an infin. to cause one to etc. Acts
iii. 12 [W. 326 (306) ; B. § 140, 16 δ.] ; also foil, by tra
[B. §139, 43; W. § 44, 8 b. fin.], Jn. xi. 37 ; Col.iv. 16;
Rev. xiii. 15 (here Τ om. WH br. ha) ; iii. 9; xiii. 12, 16 ;
[other exx. in Soph. Lex. s. v. 8]. 3. As the active
ποκΐν (see 1 c. above), so also the middle ποκίσβαι, joined
to accusatives of abstract nouns forms a periphrasis for
the verb cognate to the substantive ; and then, while
ποκΐν signifies to be the author of a thing (to cause, bring
about, as ποκΊν πό\(μον, (Ιρήνην), ποιΰσθαι denotes an
action which pertains in some way to the actor (for
one's self among themselves, etc., as σπ-ονδά?, (Ιρήνην πο»-
(Ίσθαι), or which is done by one with his own resources
([the ' dynamic ' or ' subjective ' mid.], as πολιμον ποκι-
σθαι [to make, carry on, war] ; cf. Passow s. v. L 2 a. ii.
p. 974 sq. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. IL 4] ; KrQger § 52, 8, 1 ;
Blume ad Lycurg. p. 55 ; [W. § 38, 5 n. ; B. § 135, 5] ;
although this distinction is not always observed even by
the Greeks) : ποκΊσθαι μονήν, [make our abode], Jn. xiv.
23 L Τ Tr WH, (see 1 c. above) ; συνωμοσίαν (Hdian. 7,
4, 7 [3 ed. Bekk.] ; Polyb. 1, 70, 6 ; 6, 13, 4 ; in the second
instance Polyb. might more fitly have said ποίΕί»), Acts
xxiii. 13 L Τ Tr WH, see 1 c. above ; λόγον, to compose
a narrative. Acts i. 1 ; to make account of, regard, (see
λο'γοΓ, IL 2 [and cf. L 3 a.]), Acts xx. 24 [TTr WH,
λόγου]: άναβοΧήν (see αΐΌ^ολτ;), Acts x.w. 17; (κβολήν
(see eV-ioAij, b.), Acts xxvii. 18; κοπιτόν (i. ([. KOTrrouai), Acts
viii. 2 [here LTTrWH give the active, cf. B. §135,
5 n.] ; πορίίαν (i. q. πορ(ύομηι), Lk. xiii. 22 (Xen. Cyr. 5,
2, 31 ; anab. 5, 6, 11 ; Joseph, vit. §§ 11 and 52; Plut.
de solert. anim. p. 971 e. ; 2 Mace. iii. 8; xii. 10) ; κοινω-
νίαν, to make a contribution among themselves and from
their own means, Ro. xv. 26; σπου^ήν, Jude 3 (Hdt. 1,
4 : 9, 8 ; Plat. legg. 1 p. 628 e. ; Polyb. 1, 46, 2 and often ;
Diod. 1, 75 ; Plut. puer. educ. 7, 13 ; al.) ; αΰ^σικ (i. q-
αυξάνομαι), to make increase, Eph. iv. 16 ; Βίησιν, δΐήσ(ΐί,
i. q. 6(ομαι, to make supplication, Lk. v. 33 ; Phil. i. 4 ;
526
1 Tim. ii. 1 ; μν(ίαν(ι\.ν.) ; ^nj/iiji-Cq.v.inb.), 2Pet. i. 15;
npomiav (i. ({■ προνοούμαι), to have regard for, care for,
make provision for, nvas, Ho. .\iii. 14 (Isocr. paneg. §§2
ami 136 [pp. 52 and 93 ed. Lange] ; Dem. p. 1163, 19;
1429, 8; Polyb. 4, 6, 11 ; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 46; Joseph.
b.j.4, 5, 2; antt. 5, 7,9; c. Ap. 1,2,3; Ael. v. h. 12, .^6;
al. ; cf. Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 187) ; καθαρισμόν, Heb. i. 3
(Job vii. 21) ; βίβαιον ■ποκΊσθα'ι τι, i. q. βφαιοΰν, 2 Pet.
i. 10.
II. to do (Lat. ago), i. e. to follow some method in
expressing by deeds the feelings and thoughts of the
mind; a. univ., with ailverbs describing the mode
of action: καλώ£, to act rightly, do well, Mt. xii. 12; 1 Co.
vii. 37, 38 ; Jas. ii. 19 ; καλώ? voie'iv foil, by a partici|)le
[cf. B. § 144, 15a.; W. §45, 4 a.], Acts x. 33 ; Phil. iv.
14 ; 2 Pet. i. 19 ; 3 Jn. 6, (exx. fr. Grk. writ, are given
by Passow s. v. II. 1 b. vol. ii. p. 977* ; [L. and S. s. v. B.
I. 3]) ; Kpf'iaaov, 1 Co. vii. 38 ; φρηνίμως, Lk. xvi. 8; ούτω
(oJrajc), Mt. V. 47 [RG] ; xxiv. 46; Lk. ix. 15; xii. 43;
Jn. xiv. 31 ; Acts xii. 8 ; 1 Co. xvi. 1 ; Jas. ii. 12; ώς,
καθώς, Alt. i. 24 ; xxi. 6 ; xxvi. 19 ; xxviii. 15 ; Lk. ix. 54
[T Tr txt. WH cm. Tr mrg. br. the cl.] ; 1 Th. v. Π ;
ωστΓϊρ, Mt. vi. 2 ; όμοιω;, Lk. iii. 11; x. 37 ; ωσαύτως. Mt.
XX. 5. κατά Tt, Mt. xxiii. 3 ; Lk. ii. 27 ; προς τι, to do ac-
cording to a thing [see πρόί, I. 3 £.], Lk. xii. 47. with
a ptcp. indicating the mode of acting, άγνοών ίποΊησα, I
acted [A. V. did iV] ignorantly, 1 Tim. i. 13. with the
accus. of a thing, and that the accus. of a pronoun :
with τί indef. 1 Co. x. 31 ; with W interrog., Mt. xii. 3;
Mk. ii. 25; xi. 3 [not Lchm. rarg.]; Lk. iii. 12, 14; vi. 2;
Χ.25; xvi. 3, 4; xviii.18; Jn. vii. 51 ; xi.47,etc.; with
a ptcp. added, τί iroifiTf λύοντα ; ί• q. δια τί \vfTf; Mk.
xi. 5; τί πο'.ίΐτΕ κ\αίοντ(!; Acts xxi. 13; but differently
τί ποιήσουσι κτλ. ; i. e. what must be thought of the con-
duct of those who receive baptism ? Will they not seem
to act foolishly ? 1 Co. xv. 29. τί π(ρισσόν, Mt. v. 4 7 ;
with the relative 5, Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. xiv. 9 ; Lk. vi. 3;
Jn. xiii. 7 ; 2 Co. xi. 12, etc. ; τούτο, i. e. what has just
been said, Mt. xiii. 28: Mk. v. 32; Lk. v. 6; x.xii. 19
[(WHreject the pass.)]; Ro. vii. 20; 1 Co. xi. 25; 1 Tim.
iv. 16; Heb. vi. 3; vii. 27, etc.; τοΟτο to be supplied, Lk.
vi. 10 ; αίτο τοΰτο. Gal. ii. 10; ταΟτα, Mt. xxiii. 23; Gal.
v. 17; 2 Pet. i. 10 ; [ταΟτα foil, by a pred. adj. Acts xv.
17sq. GTTrWII (ace. to one construction; cf. R. V.
mrcr., see I. 2 c. a. above, and cf. γνωστός)^ ; αυτά, Ro. ii. 3 ;
Gal. iii. 10. With nouns which denote a command,
or some rule of action, ποιώ signifies to carry out, to
execute ; as, τον νόμον, in class, (irk. to mal-e a law, Lat.
legem f err e,oi legislators; but in bibl. Grk. to do the
law, meet its demands, legi satisfacere, Jn. vii. 19; Gal.
V. 3, (Josh. xxii. 5; 1 Chron. xxii. 12; Π-;ΐΓ\Π ηϋ;Τ, 2
Chron. xiv. 3 (4)) ; τα τοΰ ΐΌ'μου, the things which the law
commands, Ro. ii. 14 ; tos cvroXas, Mt. v. 19 ; 1 Jn. v. 2 L
Τ Tr WH ; Rev. xxii. 14 R G ; τό θίΚημα toC flfoC, Mt. vii.
21 ; xii. 50 ; Mk. iii. 35; Jn. iv. 34 ; vi. 38 ; vii. 1 7 ; ix. 31 ;
Eph. vi. 6 ; Ileb. xiii. 21 ; τα θ(\ήματα της σαρκός, Eph. ii.
3 ; τας ίπιθυμίας τινός, Jn. viii. 44 ; την γνώμην τινός. Rev.
χνϋ. 1 7 ; μίαν γνώμην, to follow one and the same mind
(purpose) in acting, ibid. RGTTrWH; rbv λόγοκ τοΟ
θ(οΰ, Lk. viii. 21 ; τους λόγους τινός, Mt. vii. 24, 26; I>k. vi.
47, 49 ; 5 or ο or 5, τι etc. λίγ(ΐ τις, Mt. xxiii. 3 ; Lk. vi.
46 ; Jn. ii. 5 ; Acts xxi. 23 ; A παραγγίλλιι τις, 2 Th. iii. 4 ;
την ηρόθ(σιν, Eph. iii. 11 ; τα 6ιαταχθ(ντα, Lk. xvii. 10 {το
προαταχβίν, .So|)h. Phil. 1010) ; ο αΐτύ Tit, Jn. xiv. 13 sq.;
Eph. iii. 20 ; ο ίντίλλ^ταί τΐ9, Jn. xv. 14 ; τα 'θη. Acts
xvi. 21. With nouns describing a plan or course of
action, to perform, accomplish : ipya. Tit. iii. 5; ποια»
τα ipya τινός, to do the same works as another, •Τη. viii.
39,41 ; τα ττρώτα fpya. Rev. ii. 5; τα fpya τοί) 6(οΰ, de-
livered by (jod to be performed, Jn. x. 37 S(j. ; το tpyov,
work committed to me by God, Jn. xvii. 4 ; το Ipyov
(vayyfKioToi. to perform what the relations and duties
of an evangelist demand, 2 Tim. iv. 5 ; tpyov τι, to com-
mit an evil deed, 1 Co. v. 2 [T WHTrmrg. ττράξας']•,
plur. 3 Jn. 10; ayaBov, to do good, Mt. xix. 16; [Mk. iii.
4 Tdf.] ; 1 Pet. iii. 1 1 ; το αγαθόν, Ro. xiii. 3 ; ό iav τι
αγαθόν, Eph. vi. 8 ; τα αγαθά, Jn. v. 29 ; τό καλόν, Ro. vii.
21 ; 2 Co. xiii. 7 ; Gal. vi. 9 ; Jas. iv. 1 7 ; τα άρ(στα τω θ(ώ,
Jn. viii. 29 ; το άριστον ίρώτζιον τον θΐοϋ, Ileb. xiii. 21 ;
1 .In. iii. 22 ; τί πιστόν. to perform something worthy of
a Christian [see πιστός, tin.], 3 Jn. 5 ; την 8ικαιοσννην,
Mt. vi. 1 (for Rec. (λ(ημοσΰνην) ; 1 Jn. ii. 29; iii. 7, 10
[not Lchm. ; Rev. xxii. 11 G L Τ Tr WH] ; την άλήθιιαν
(to act uprightly ; see άληθίΐα, I. 2 c), Jn. iii. 21 ; 1 .In.
i. 6 ; χρηστότητα, Ro. iii. 1 2 ; ΐλιος, to show one's self
merciful, .Jas. ii. 13; with μ€τά τίνος added (see iXeor,
-ους, 1 and 2 b.), Lk. i. 72 ; x. 37 ; ίλίημοσύνην, Mt. vi. 2
s(j. ; plur.. Acts ix. 36 ; x. 2 (see ίλιημοσννη, 1 and 2). to
commit : την άμαρτΐαν, Jn. viii. 34 ; 1 Jn. iii. 4, 8 ; άμαρ-
τ'ιαν, 2 Co. xi. 7 ; Jas. v. 15 ; 1 Pet. ii. 22 ; 1 Jn. iii. 9 ; την
άνομίαν, Mt. xiii. 41 ; αμάρτημα, 1 Co. vi. 18 ; τα μη καθή-
κοντα, Ro. i. 28 ; ό ουκ ϊξιστιν, Mt. xii. 2 ; Mk. ii. 24 ; άξια
πληγών, Lk. xii. 48 ; βδίλυγμα. Rev. xxi. 27 ; φόνον. Mk.
XV. 7 ; ψ(ΰ8ος. Rev. xxi. 27 ; xxii. 15 ; κακόν, Mt. xxvii.
23 ; Mk. XV. 14 ; Lk. xxiii. 22 ; 2 Co. xiii. 7 ; το κακόν, Ro.
xiii. 4 ; phir. κακά, 1 Pet. iii. 12 ; τα κακά, Ro. iii. 8. b.
ποιιΐν τι with the case of a person added ; a. w. an
accus. of the person: τί ποιήσω Ίησοϋν; what shall I
do unto .lesus? Mt. xxvii. 22; Mk. xv. 12: cf. W. 222
(208); [B. §131, 6; Kuhner §411, 5] ; Matthiae § 415,
1 a. j3. ; also with an adverb, fv ποιώ τίνα, to do well i. e.
show one's self good (kind) to one [see el, sub fin.], Mk.
xiv. 7 R G ; also καλώς ποιώ, Mt. V. 44 Rec. β. w.
a dative of the person, to do (a thing) unto one (to his
advantage or disadvantage), rarely so in Grk. writ. [cf.
AV. and Β u. s. ; Kiihner u. s. Anm. 6] : Mt. vii. 1 2 ; xviii.
35 ; XX. 32 ; xxi. 40 ; xxv. 40, 45 ; Mk. v. 19, 20 ; .x. 51 ;
Lk. i. 49; vi. 11 ; viii. 39 ; xviii. 41; xx. 15; Jn. ix. 26;
xii. 16; xiii. 12; Acts iv. 16; also with an adverb :
καθώς, Mk. XV. 8 ; Lk. vi. 31 ; Jn. xiii. 15 ; ομοίως, Lk. vi.
31 ; οΰτωΓ, Lk. i. 25 ; ii. 48 ; ώσαΰτως, Mt. xxi. 36 ; καλώί
TTOtfit/ Tivi, Lk. vi. 27 ; ev, ^Ik. xiv. 7 L Tr WH ; κακά tiw,
to do evil to one. Acts ix. 13 ; τί, what (sc. κακόν), Ileb. xiii.
6 [ace. to punctuation of GLTTrWH] ; ταΟτα πάιπ-α, all
these evils, .In. xv. 21 R G L mrg. ; ποκΊν τινι κατά τα αυ-
τά [LTTrWH (Rec. ταΟτα)], in the same manner, Lk.
τΓοιημα
527
TToXe/tet»
vi. 23, 26. γ. nou'iv τι with the more remote object
added by means of a preposition : e» Ttvt (Germ, an
einem), to do to one, Mt. .wii. 1 2 ; Lk. .\.\iii. 31 [here A. V.
'in the green tree,' etc.] ; also eU nva, unto one, Jn. xv.
21 L t.\t. Τ Tr WH. c. God is said ποιησαί τι μ€τά
Ttfos, when present with and aiding [see μ(τά, I. 2 b. 0],
Acts xiv. 27 ; xv. 4. d. with designations of time
[B. § 131, 1], to pass, spend : χρύι/ον, Acts xv. 33 ; xviii.
23 ; μηναί rpet j, Acts .\x. 3 ; ννχθημερον, 2 Co. xi. 25 ; eviav
τον or iviavTov ίνα, .las. iv. 13, (Tub. x. 7; Joseph, antt. 6,
1, 4 fin. ; Stallbaum on Plato, Phileb. p. 50 c, gives exx.
fr. Grlc. writ, [and reif. ; of. also Soph. Lex. s. v. 9] ; in the
same sense Π^ί;.^ in Eccl. vi. 12 (vii. 1); and the Lat.
facere : Cic. ad Att. 5, 20 Apameae quinque dies morati,
. . . Iconii decern fecimus; Seneca, epp. 66 [1. 7, ep. 4, ed.
Haase], quamvis autem paucissimos unayeceri'mu.s dies) ;
some interpreters bring in here also Mt. .xx. 12 and Rev.
xiii. 5 Rec.'""'''*• LTTrWIl; but on these pass, see
I. 1 a. above. e. like the Lat. ago i. q. to celebrate,
keep, with the accus. of a noun designating a feast : το
πάσχα, Mt. x.wi. 18 (Josh. v. 10; but in Heb. xi. 28 the
language denotes to make ready, and so at the same time
lo institute, the celebration of the passover ; Germ, ver-
anstalten); την ίορτην, Acts xviii. 21 Rec. f. i. q.
(La,t. perficio) to perform: as opposed to \eyeiv,Mt. xxiii.
3 ; touiKfiv, 2 Co. viii. 10 sq. ; to a promise, 1 Th. v. 24.
[CoMP. : trepi-, προσ- ποίί'ω.]
[Syn. ποίΐΐν, π ράσσ €tv: roug;hly speakinjj^, ττ. may be
said to answer to tlie Lat. facere or the Englisli do, ττρ. to
arjere or Eng. practise ; π. to designate performance, irp- in-
tended, earnest, habitual, performance ; π. to denote merely
productive action, ττρ. definitely directed action ; π. to point
to an actual result, ττρ. to the scope and character of the result.
*' In Attic in certain connection.s the difference between them
is great, in others hardly perceptible" {.Schmidt] ; see his
Syn. ch. 23,esp. § U ; cl.Trench, N. T. Syn. § xcvi. ; Green,
'Grit. Note 'on Jn. v. 29; (cf. τράσσω, iuit. and 2). The
words are associated in Jn. iii. 20, 21 ; v. 29 ; Acts xxvi. 9,
10 ; P.O. i. 32 ; ii. 3 ; vii. 15 sqf|. ; xiii. 4, etc.]
ΊΓοίημια, tos, to, (ποίί'ω), that loliich has been made ;
a work : of the works of God as creator, Ro. i. 20 ; those
KTiauevres by God eVi epyois άγαθοΐς are spoken of as
7Γοί/;/χα τον θ(οϋ [Α. V. his workmanship'], Eph. ii. 10.
(lldt., Plat., al. ; Sept. chiefly for Πί?;;•?.)*
ΐΓοΙησ-ΐί, -ίωί, η, (ποιίω) ; 1. α making (Hdt. 3,
22 ; Thuc. 3, 2 ; Plat., Dem., al. ; Sept. several times for
iT-?!!,"?)- 2. a iloing or performing: iv ttj ττοιήσίΐ
αίτοϋ [m his doing, i. e.] in the obedience he renders to
the law, Jas. i. 25; add Sir. xix. 20 (18).*
τΓΟίητήϊ, -οΰ, ό, (ΐΓοι/ω) ; 1. a maker, producer, au-
thor, (Xen., Plat., al.). 2. a doer, performer, (Vulg.
factor) : τοϋ νόμου, one who obeys or fulfils the law,
Ro. ii. 13 ; Jas. iv. 1 1 ; 1 Mace. ii. 67, (see πούω, Π. a.) ;
ίργου, Jas. i. 25; λόγου, Jas. i. 22, 23. 3. a poet:
Acts xvii. 28 ([Hdt. 2, 53, etc.], Aristoph., Xen., Plat.,
Plut., al.).•
toikIXos, -i;, -ok, fr. Horn, down, various i. e. a.
of divers colors, variegated : Sejjt. b. Ί. q. of divers
sorts : Mt. iv. 24 ; Mk. i. 34 ; Lk. iv. 40 ; 2 Tim. iii! 6 ; Tit.
iii. 3; Heb. ii. 4 ; xiii. 9 ; Jas. i. 2; 1 Pet. i. 6; iv. 10,
[(A. V. in the last two exx. manifold)'].*
ποιμαίνω ; fut. ποιμανά; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. n-oi-
μάνατ( (1 Pet. v. 2) ; {ποιμήν, q. v.) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept.
for T^},\1 ; to feed, to tend aflock, keep sheep ; a. prop. :
Lk. xvii. 7 ; ποίμνην, 1 Co. ix. 7. b. trop. a.
to rule, govern : of rulers, τινά, Mt. ii. 6 ; Rev. ii. 27 ; xii.
5; xix. 15, (2S. V. 2; Mic. v. 6 (5' ; vii. 14, etc.; [cf. ΛΥ.
17]), (see ποιμήν, b. fin.); of the overseers (pastors) of
the church, Jn. .xxi. 16 ; Acts .\x. 28 ; 1 Pet. v. 2. β.
to furnish pasturage or food ; to nourish : ίαυτόν, to cher-
ish one's body, to serve the body, Jude 12; to supply
the requisites for the soul's needs [R. V. shall be their
shepherd]. Rev. vii. 1 7. [Syn. see βόα-κω, fin.] '
τΓοιμήν, -ίνοί, δ, (akin to the noun τΓοία, q. v. ; [or fr. r.
meaning ' to protect ' ; cf. Curtius§372; Fick i. 132]),
fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for nj,'^, a herdsman, esp. a shep-
herd; a. prop.: Mt. ix. 36 ; xxv. 32; xxvi. 31;
Mk. vi. 34; xiv. 27; Lk. ii. 8, 15, 18, 20; Jn. .x. 2, 12; in
the parable, he to whose care and control others have
committed themselves, and whose precepts they follow,
Jn. X. 11, 14. b. metaph. the presiding officer, mana-
ger, director, of any assembly : so of Christ the Head of
the church, Jn. x. 16 ; 1 Pet. ii. 25 ; Heb. xiii. 20, (of the
Jewish Messiah, Ezek. xxxiv. 23) ; of the overseers of
the Christian assemblies [A. V. pastors], Eph. iv. 11 ; cf.
Ritschl, Entstehung der altkathol. Kirche, ed. 2, p. 350
sq. ; [Hatch, Bampton Lects. for 1880, p. 123 sq.]. (Of
kings and princes we find ποιμίν^ς λαών in Hom. and
Hes.)*
ΐΓοίμνη, -ηί, ή, (contr. fr. ποιμ£'η; ; sec ποιμήν), [fr. Horn.
(Od. 9, 122) on], a flock (esp.) of sheep : Mt. xxvi. 31 ;
Lk. ii. 8 ; 1 Co. ix. 7 ; trop. [of Christ's flock i. e.] the body
of those who follow Jesus as their guide and keeper, Jn.
X. 16.*
ΐΓοίμνιον, -ου, το', (contr. fr. ποιμίνιον, i. q. ποίμνη, see
ποιμήν; [on the accent cf. W. 52; Chandler §343 b.]),
a flock (esp.) of sheep: so of a group of Christ's disci-
ples, Lk. xii. 32 ; of bodies of Christians (churches) pre-
sided over by elders [cf. reff. s. v. ποιμήν, b.]. Acts x.x.
28, 29 ; 1 Pet. v. 3 ; with a possessive gen. added, toC
θίοϋ, 1 Pet. v. 2, as in Jer. xiii. 17 ; τοϋ Χρίστου, Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 16, 1 ; 44, 3; 54, 2; 57, 2. (Hdt., Soph.,
Eur., Plat., Lcian., al. ; Sept. chiefly for Ti;» and [NS .) *
irotos, -a, -ov, (interrog. pron., corresponding to the rel.
oTot and the demonstr. Tolot), [fr. Hom. down], of what
sort or nature (Lat. qualis) : absol. neutr. plur. in a di-
rect question, Lk. x.xiv. 19 ; with substantives, in direct
questions: Mt. xix. 18; xxi. 23 ; xxii. 36 ; Mk. xi. 28;
Lk. vi. 32-34 ; Jn. x. 32 ; Acts iv. 7 ; vii. 49 ; Ro. iii. 27 ;
1 Co. XV. 35; Jas. iv. 14; 1 Pet. ii. 20; in indirect dis-
course : Mt. xxi. 24, 27 ; xxiv. 43 ; Mk. xi. 29, 33 ; Lk. xii.
39; Jn. xii. 33; xviii. 32 ; xxi. 19; Acts xxiii. 34 ; Rev.
iii. 3 ; els τίνα ή ποίυν κηιρόν, 1 Pet. i. 1 1 ; ποίας (Rec. δια
ποίας) sc. όδοΟ. Lk. v. 1 9 ; cf . W. § 30, 11 ; [(also § 64, 5) ;
B. §§ 123, 8 ; 132, 2G; cf. Tob. x. 7].
πολ€μίω, -ώ; fut. πολιμήσω; 1 aor. ίπολίμησα; (π-όλί•
μοί) ; [fr. Soph, and Hdt. down] ; Sept. chiefly for οπ'?^;
ΤΓθ\€μΛ<!
528
ΐΓΟΚίτη^
Ό war, carry on war; Ιο fight : Rev. xix. 11 ; μΐτά rivot
(on which constr. see μίτά, I. 2 d. p. 403''), Rev. ii. 16 ;
xii. 7 (where Rec. κατά ; [cf. on this vs. B. § 140, 14 and
8. V. /ΐ€τά as above]) ; xiii. 4 ; xvii. 14 ; i. q. to wrangle,
quarrel, Jas. iv. 2.*
ΐΓ6λ(μο$, -ου, ό, (fr. ΠΕ.\ίΙ, πολ('ω, to turn, to range
about, whence Lat. pello, helium ; [but cf. Fick i. 671 ;
Vanicek 513]), [fr. Horn, down], Sept. for πρπ'73 ; 1.
prop. a. war : Mt. xxiv. 6 ; Mk. xiii. 7 ; Lk. xiv.
81; xxi. 9 ; Heb. xi. 34 ; in imitation of the Hebr. Π!?>;
nonSp foil, by nx or D;• (Cen. xiv. 2 ; Deut. xx. 12, 20),
voK. nou'iv μετά rivos, Hev. xi. 7 ; xii. 1 7 ; xiii. 7 [here L om.
WHTrnirg.br. the cl.]; xix. 19, [cf. ^fra,I. 2d.]. b.
a fight, a battle, [more precisely μάχη ; " in Horn, (where
n. 7, 1 74 it is used even of single combat) and Hes. the
sense of battle prevails ; in Attic that of tvar" (L. and S.
s. V.) ; cf. Trench §I.xx.xvi. and (in partial modification)
Schmidt eh. 138, 5 and 6] : 1 Co. xiv. 8 ; Ileb. xi. 34 ; Rev.
ix. 7, 9 ; xii. 7 ; xvi. 14 ; xx. 8. 2. a lUspute, strife,
quarrel: πόλίμοι και μάχαι, Jas. iv. 1 (Soph. El. 219;
Plat. rhae<lo p. 66 c.).•
ιτόλΐί, -(ωί, η, (πίλομαι, to dwell [or rather denoting
originally ' fulness,' ' throng ' ; allied with Lat. pleo, plehs,
etc.; cf. Curtius p. 79 and §374; Vanicek p. 499; (oth-
erwise Fick i. 138)]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. chiefly for
Ti', besides for n"")p, Ί};}ύ (gate), etc., a city; a.
univ. : Mt. ii. 23 ; Mk. i. 45 ; Lk. iv. 29 ; Jn. xi. 54 ; Acts
v. 16, and very often in the historical bks. of the N. T. ;
Kara την ποΚιν, through the city [A. V. in ; see κατά, II.
1 a.], Acts x.\iv. 1 2 ; κατά ττόλιΐ'. κατά πόλ«Γ, see κατά, Π.
3a.a.p.328*; ορρ. to κώμικ, .Mt. ix. 35; χ. 11 ; Lk. viii.
1 ; -xiii. 22; to κώμαι και άγμοί, Mk. vi. 56; ή ίδια ττόλΐΓ,
see iStos, 1 b. p. 297*; πολις with the gen. of a pers.
one's native city, Lk. ii. 4,11; .In. i. 44 (45) ; οτ the city in
which one lives, Jit. xxii. 7 ; Lk. iv. 29 ; x. 1 1 ; Acts xvi.
20; Rev. xvi. 19; Jerusalem is called, on account of
the temple erected there, no\it roCf μίγάλου βασίΚίω^,
i. e. in which the great King of Israel, Jehovah, has liis
abode, Jit. v. 35; Ps. xlvii. (.xlviii.) 2, cf. Tob. xiii. 15;
also άγια πάλΐί (see aytor, 1 a. p. 7') and η ηγαττημίι^, the
beloved of God, Rev. .\x. 9. with the gen. of a gentile
noun : Λαμασκηνών, 2 Co. xi. 32 ; Έφ^σίων, Acts xix.
35 ; των Ιουδαίων, Lk. xxiii. 51 ; τοϋ Ισραήλ, Mt. χ. 23 ;
Σαμαρειτών, Mt. χ. 5 ; with the gen. of a region : t^s
Γαλιλαίο;, Lk. i. 26 ; iv. 31 ; 'lovSa, of the tribe of Judah,
Lk. i. 39 ; Λυκαονία;, Acts xiv. 6 ; Κιλικία;, Acts xxi. 39 ;
TTJa Έαμαριία!, Jn. iv. 5 ; Acts λάϋ. 5. As in class. Grk.
the proper name of the city is added, — either in the
nom. case, as πόλι? Ίότητη, Acts xi. 5 ; or in the gen., as
ίτόλΐΓ Σοδόμων, Γομόρρας, 2 Pet. ii. 6 ; θυατείρων. Acts
xvi. 14. b. used of the heavenly Jerusalem (see
'ΐΓροσόλυμα, 2), i. e. a. the abode of the blessed, in
heaven: Ileb. ,\i. 10, 16; with θεοϋ ^ώιτοί added, Ileb.
xii. 22; ή μίλλουσα πόλΐί, Ileb. xiii. 14. β. in the
visions of the Apocalypse it is used of the visible capital
of the heavenly kingdom, to come down to earth after
the renovation of the world : Rev. iii. 12 ; xxi. 14 sqq. ;
xxii. 14 ; ή itoktr η &γία. Rev. xxii. 19 ; with Ιερουσαλήμ
καινή added, Rev. xxi. 2. c. irSXts by meton. for
the inhabitants : Mt. viii. 34; Acts xiv. 21 ; ττάσα ή πόλ»,
Mt. xxi. 10 ; Acts xiii. 44 ; ή πάλίΐ όλη, Mk. i. 33 ; Acta
xxi. 30; πόλΐί μ(ρισθ(Ίσα καθ' έαντής, Mt. xii. 25.
•π•ολιτάρ)ςη5, -ου, ό, (i. e. ό άρχων των πολιτών ; see ί'κα-
τοντάρχης), α ruler of a city or citizens : Acts xvii. 6, 8.
(Boec/ch, Corp. inscrr. Grace, ii. p. 52 sq. no. 1967 [cf.
Boeckh's note, and Tiif Proleg. p. 86 note^] ; in Grk.
writ. τΓολίαρχοί was more common.) *
1roλιτί(o^ -as, ή, (πολιτήω) ; 1. the administration
of civil affairs (Xen. mem. 3, 9, 15 ; Arstph., Aeschin.,
Dem., [al.]). 2. α sin/e, com/nonwea/M, (2 Mace. iv.
11; viii. 17; xiii. 14; Xen., Plat., Thuc, [ah]): with
a gen. of the possessor, roO Ισραήλ, spoken of the theo-
cratic or divine commonwealth, Eph. ii. 12. 3.
citizenship, the rights of a citizen, [some make this sense
the primary one] : Acts xxii. 28 (3 Mace. iii. 21, 23 ; Hdt.
9,34; Xen. Hell. 1, 1,26; 1, 2, 10 ; [4, 4, 6, etc.]; Dem..
Polyb., Diod., Joseph., al.).*
ΐΓολ(τΓυμα, -roc, τό, (ττολιτίΰω), in Grk. writ. fr. Plat,
down ; 1. the ailmin'islration of civil affairs or of a
commonwealth [R. V. txt. (Phil, as below) citizenship'\.
2. the constitution of a commonwealth, form of govern-
ment and the laws by which it is administered. 3. a
state, commonwealth [so R. V. mrg.] ; ημών, the common-
wealth whose citizens we are (see πόλυ, b.), Pliil. ui. 20,
cf. Jleyer and AViesinger ail loc. ; of Christians it is said
«Vi γη! Βιατρίβουσιν, άλΧ' iv οίρανω πολιτεύονται, Epist.
ad Diogn. c. 5 ; (τών σοφών yl/v\a\) πατρίδα μεν τον ονρά-
νιον χωρον, εν ώ πoλ(τelJOrται, ξίναν δε τον περίγειον εν ω
παρωκησαν νομίζονσαι, Philo de conf us. ling. §17; [yvvniKfS
... τω Trjt άρετη! ε'γγεγραμμίναι ττολιτεύματι, de agriculU
§ 17 fin. Cf. esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. c.].•
ΐΓολιτίΰω : Mid. [cf. M'. 260 (244)], pres. impv. 2 pers.
plur. ττολιτεΰεσθε ; pf. πίπoλίτfυμαt ; (πολ'ιτηί) ; X.
to be a citizen (Thuc, Xen., Lys., Polyb., al.). 2.
to administer civil affairs, manage the state, (Thuc,
Xen.). 3. to make or create a citizen (Oiod. 11.72)•,
Middle a. to be a citizen ; so in the passages fr.
Philo and the Ep. ad Diogn. cited in πολίτευμα, 3. b.
to behave as a citizen; to avail one's self of or recognize
the laws ; so fr. Thuc down ; in Hellenist, writ, to con-
duct one's self as pledged to some law of life : άξίω! τοϋ
ευαγγελίου, Phil. i. 27 [R. V. txt. let your manrier of life
be worthy o/etc] ; άξ. τοΰ Χρίστου, Polyc. ad Philip. 5, 2;
αξ. τοΰ θεοΰ, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 21, 1 ; δσίως, ibid. 6, 1 ;
κατά t6 καθήκον τω Χριστώ, ibid. 3, 4 ; μετά φόβου κ- αγά-
πη;, ibid. 51,2; ε'ννόμως, Justin, dial. c. Tr. c 07 ; ήρξάμην
πολιτεΰεσθαι Tjj Φαρισαίων αίρίσει κατακολουθων, Joseph,
vit. 2; other phrases are cited by Grimm on 2 Mace. vi.
1 ; τώ θεώ, to live in accordance with the laws of God,
Acts xxiii. 1 [A. V. / have lived etc.].*
iroX(TT]s, -ου, ό, (πόλις), fr. Hom. down, a citizen;
i. e. a. the inhabitant of any city or country: ιτδΚεακ,
Acts xxi. 39 ; τήί χώρας εκείνης, Lk. xv. 15. b. the
associate of another in citizenship, L e. α feUow-citizen,
felloto-countryman, (Plat. apol. p. 3 7 c. ; aL) : with the
gen. of a person, Lk. xix. 14 ; Heb. viii. II (where Rec.
TToWaKK
529
ΤΓολυς
lias τον πλησίον) fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34, where it is
used for y-\_, as in Prov. xi. 9, 12; xxiv. 43 (28).•
πολλάκι$, (fr. πολίί, πολλά), adv., [fr. Horn, down],
ojten, frequent! !/ : Mt. xvii. 15; Mk. v.4; ix. 22; Jn. xviii.
2; Acts xxvi. 11 ; Ro. i. 13 ; χ v. 22 L Trmrg. ; 2 Co. viii.
22 ; xi. 23, 26 sq. ; Pliil. iii. 18 ; 2 Tim. i. 16 ; Heb. vi. 7 ;
Lx. 25 sq. ; x. 11.*
ΐΓολλαττλασ-ίων, -ov, %iin. -ovot, (noKis), manifold, much
more : Mt. xix. 29 L Τ Tr Wll ; Lk. xviii. 30. (Polyb.,
Pint., al.; [cf. B. 30 (27)].)*
τΓολυ-ίΐστΓλαγχνοϊ, -ov, (πολύ and eCanXayxvos), very
lender-hearltd, extremely full of pity : so a few minusc.
Mss. in Jas. V. 11, where al.πoλiίσπλαyχI'of,q. v. (Eccles.
and Byzant. writ.) *
πολυλογία, -as, 17, (πολυλόγοί), much speaking, (Plaut.,
Vulj;., mulliloipdum) : Mt. vi. 7. (Prov.x. 19; Xen. Cyr.
1, 4, 3; Plat. legg. 1 p. 641 e. ; Aristot. poht. 4, 10 [p.
1295% 2]; Plut. educ. puer. 8, 10.)•
πολυμίρώ5, (πολυμ€/)ΐ)ί), by many portions : joined with
νοΚντρόπως, at many times (Vulg. multifariam [or-ne]),
and in many ways, Ueb. i. 1. (Joseph, antt. 8, 3, 9 [var. ;
Plut. mor. p. 537 d., i. e. de invid. et od. 5] ; oiSfv SeiT^t
Μθ\υμίροϋς ταύτης και ηοΧυτράπυν μοι'σηί τ( κα\ αρμονίας.
Max. Tyr. diss. 37 p. 363; [cf. \V. 463 (43I)J.) *
πολ\ι-πο(κιλθ5, -ov, {πολύς and ποικίλος) ; 1. muck-
wariegated ; marked with a great variety of colors : of cloth
or a painting ; φάρια, Eur. Iph. T. 1149; στίφανον πολυ-
ιοϊκιλον άνθίων, Eubul. ap Athen. 15 p. 679 d. 2.
much varied, manifold : σοφία τοΟ θ(οΰ. manifesting itself
in a great variety of forms, Eph. iii. 1 ; Theophil. ad
Autol. 1, 6 ; οργή. Orac. Sibyll. 8, 120 ; λόγος, Orph. hymn.
61, 4, and by other writ, with otlier nouns.'
πολύϊ, πολλή (fr. an older form πολλοί, found in Horn.,
Hes., Pind.), πολύ; [(cf. Curtius § 375)]; Sept. chiefly for
31 ; much ; used a. of multitude, number, etc.,
many, numerous, great : αριθμός, Acts xi. 21 ; λαό;. Acts
xviii. 10; όχλος, Mk. v. 24; vi. 34 ; [viii. 1 LT Tr WH] ;
Lk. vii. 1 1 ; viii. 4 ; Jn. vi. 2, 5 ; Rev. vii. 9 ; xix. 6, etc. ;
πλήθος, Mk. iii. 7 sq. ; Lk. v. 6 ; Acts xiv. 1, etc. ; i. q.
abundant, plenteous [.Α.. V. often mura], καρπός, Jn. xii.
24 ; XV. 5, 8; θ(ρισμός, (the harvest to be gathered), Mt.
ix. 37 ; Lk. x. 2 ; γη, Mt. xiii. 5; >Ik. iv. 5 ; χόρτος, Jn.
vi. 10; οίνος, 1 Tim. iii. S; plur. πολλοί τιλώναι, Mt. ix.
10; Mk. ii. 15; πολλοί προφ^ται, Mt. xiii. I 7 ; Lk. x. 24 ;
σοφοί, 1 Co. i. 26 ; πατίρΐς, 1 Co. iv. 15 ; ^ννάμίΐς, Mt. vii.
22; xiii. 58, etc.; όχλοι, Mt. iv. 25; viii. 1; xii. 15 [but
here L Τ WH om. Tr br. 5;^.] ; Lk. v. 15, etc. ; 6αιμόνια,
Mk. i. 34 ; and in many other exx. ; with participles used
substantively, Mt. viii. 16 ; 1 Co. xvi. 9, etc. ; with the
article prefixed : a'l άμαρτιαι αυτής a'l πολλοί, her sins
which are many, Lk. vii. 47; τα πολλά γράμματα, the great
Jearning with which I see that you are furnished, Acts
\xvi. 24 ; ό πολύς όχλος, the great multitude of common
people present, Mk. xii. 37 [cf. ό όχλ. πολνς, Jn. xii. 9 Τ
Tr mrg. WH ; see όχλος, 1 ]. Plur. masc. πολλοί, absol.
and without the art., many, a large part of mankind :
πoλλoίsiraply,Mt. vii. 13, 22; xx. 28; xxvi. 28; Mk. ii. 2;
iii. 10 ; x. 45 ; xiv. 24 ; Lk. i. 1, 14 ; Heb. ix. 28, and very
84
often ; opp. to ολίγοι, Mt. xx. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. the
cl.] ; fTfpot πολλοί. Acts xv. 35; άλλαι πολλοί, Mk. xv. 41 ;
(Ttpai πολλοί, Lk. viii. 3 ; πολλοί foil, by a partit. gen.,
as των Φαρισαίων, Mt. iii. 7 ; add, Lk. i. 16 ; Jn. xii. 11 ;
Acts iv. 4 ; xiii. 43 ; 2 Co. xii. 21 ; Rev. viii. 11, etc. ; foil.
by f <c with a gen. of class, as πολλοί ϊκ των μα0ι;τών αΰτον,
Jn. vi. 60; add, vii. 31, 40 ; χ. 20 ; xi. 19, 45; Acts xvii.
12 ; πολλοί ck της πόλιως, Jn. iv. 39. with the article
prefixed, oi πολλοί, the many [cf. W. 110 (105)] : those
contrasted with ό fts (i. e. both with Adam and with
Christ), ace. to the context equiv. to the rest of man-
kind, Ro. V. 15, 19, cf. 12, 18; we the (i.e. who are) many,
Ro. xii. 5 ; 1 Co. x. 17 ; the many whom ye know, 2 Co.
ii. 17; the many i. e. the most part, the majority, Mt. xxiv.
12;lCo. X. 33. b. with nouns denoting an action, an
emotion, a state, which can be said to have as it were
measure, weight, force, intensity, size, continuance, or
repetition, much i. q. great, strong, intense, large: αγάπη,
Eph. ii. 4; όδΰι/ι;, 1 Tim. vi. 10; θρήνος, κλαυθμός, οΒυρμός,
Mt. ii. 18; ;(apa[Rec."xapir], Philem. 7 ; t πιίυ/ιία, 1 Th. ii.
17 ; μακροθυμία, Ro. ix. 22 ; ίλ(ος, 1 Pet. i. 3; γογγνσμός,
Jn. vii. 1 2 ; τρόμος, 1 Co. ii. 3 ; πο'ΐΌΓ [Rec. ίήλοΕ], Col. iv.
13 ; άγων, 1 Th. ii. 2 ; ήθλησις, Heb. x. 32 ; ίλίψ•ΐ5, 2 Co. ii.
4 ; 1 Th. i. 6 ; καύχησις, 2 Co. vii. 4 ; πιποίθησις, 2 Co. viii.
22 ; πληροφορία, 1 Th. i. 5 ; παρρησία, 2 Co. iii. 12 ; vii.
4 ; 1 Tim. iii. 13 ; Philem. 8 ; παράκλησις, 2 Co. viii. 4 ;
σνζήτησις [Τ WO Tr txt. ζήτησις]. Acts xv. 7 ; xxviii. 29
[Rec.]; στάσις. Acts xxiii. 10; ασιτία. Acts xxvii. 21;
jSia, Acts xxiv. 7 [Rec] ; διακονία, Lk. x. 40 ; σιγή, deep
silence. Acts xxi. 40 (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1, 25) ; φαντασία. Acts
XXV. 23 ; ίύναμις κα'ι δόξα, Mt. xxiv. 30 ; Lk. xxi. 27 ; μι-
σθός, Mt. V. 12 ; Lk. vi. 23, 35 ; €!ρήνη. Acts xxiv. 2 (3) ;
πίρϊ ου πολύς ήμ'ιν 6 λόγος, about which [but see λόγοι, I. 3
a.] we have much (in readiness) to say, Heb. v. 11 (πυλϋρ
λόγοι/ ποκΊσθαι π(ρί τιΐΌΓ, Plat. Phaedo p. 1 15 d. ; cf. Ast,
Lex. Plat. iii. p. H^^). c. of time, ?nucA, ion^: πολνι»
χρόνον, Jn. V. 6; μίτα χρόνον πολύν, Mt. χ.\ν. 19; ωρα
πολλή, much time (i. e. a large part of the day) is spent
[see ωρα, 2], 5Ik. vi. 35 ; ώρας πολλοί γ(νυμίνης [Tdf.
γικομ.], of a late hour of the day, ibid, (so πολλής ώρας,
Polyb. 5, 8, 3 ; ("πΐ πυλλήν ωραν, Joseph, antt. 8,4,4; ΐμά-
χοντο . . . άχρι πολλής ώρας, Dion. Hal. 2, 54) ; πολλοΐί
χρόνοις, for a long time, Lk. viii. 29 (οΰ πολλώ χρόνω,
Hdian. 1, 6,24 [8 ed. Bekk.] ; χρόνοις πολλοΪΓ ύστιρον,
Plut. Thes. 6 ; [see χρόνος, sub fin.]) ; (ΐς ΐτη πολλά, Lk.
xii. 19 ; (fK or) άπό πολλών (τών. Acts xxiv. 10; Ro. xv.
23 [here WH Trtxt. άπό ίκαι/ώκ tV.] ; ί'πΐ πολΰ, (for) a
long time. Acts xxviii. 6 ; μ(τ ου πολύ, not long after
[see μ(τά, IL 2 b.]. Acts xxvii. 14. d. Xeut. sing.
πολύ, much, substantively, i. q. many things: Lk. xii. 48;
much, adverbially, of the mode and degree of an action:
ήγάπησ€, Lk. vii. 47 ; πλανάσθ€, Mk. xii. 27 ; sc. ώφίλίϊ,
Ro. iii. 2. πολλού as a gen. of price (fr. Hom. down ; cf.
Passow s. V. IV. b. vol. ii. p. 1013* ; [cf. W. 206 (194)]) :
πραθήναι, for much, Mt. xxvi. 9. tV πολλώ. in (adminis-
tering) much (i. e. many things), Lk. xvi. 10 ; with great
labor, great effort. Acts xxvi. 29 (where LT TrWH <»
μεγάλω [see μ€γας, 1 a. -y.]). with a eompar. [cf. W.
ττοΚυσίΓΚατ^χνο'!
530
trovqpo<i
§ 3ό, I ] : τΓολϋ tmoviatoTcpov, 2 Co. viii. 22 (in Grk. writ,
fr. Horn, down) ; πολλώ nKfiovt. many more, Jn. iv. 41 ;
πολλω [or πολί^] μαΚΧον, see μάλλον, 1 a. sq. witli the
article, το πολύ, (ieriii. i/as Viele (opp. to το ολίγοι»), 2
Co. viii. 15 [if. Β. 395 (338); λΥ. 589 (548)]. Plural
πολλά α. many things ; as, Μάσκ^ιν, 'KdktXv, Mt.
xiii. 3 ; Mk. iv. 2 ; vi. 34 ; Jn. viii. 2ti ; xiv. 30 ; παθιΊν, Mt.
xvi. 21 ; Mk. v. 2(i; ix. 12; Lk. ix. 22, etc., and often in
Grk. writ. fr. Find. Ol. 13, 90 down ; iroie'iv, Mk. vi. 20
[T Tr mrg. WII απορίΓν] ; πράξαι, Acts xxvi. 9 ; add as
Other e.\x., Mt. xxv. 21, 23; Mk. xii. 41 ; xv. 3 ; Jn. xvi.
12; 2 Co. viii. 22; 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 13 ; πολλά και άλλα, Jn.
XX. 30. [On the Grk. (and Lat.) usage which treats the
notion of multitude not as something e.xternal to a thing
and consisting merely in a comparison of it with other
things, but as an attribute inhering in the thing itself,
and hence capable of being co-ordinated with another
attributive word by means of καί (q. v. I. 3), see Kiihner
§ 523, I (or on Xen. mem. 1, 2. 24) ; Bdumlein, Partikcln,
p. 146 ; Kruger §69, 32, 3 ; Loh. Paral. p. GO ; Herm. ad
Vig. p.835;W.§o9, 3fin.; B. 362 sq. (311). Cf. Passow
8. v. I. 3 a. ; L. and S. s. v. II. 2.] β. adverbially
[cf. W. 463 (432) ; B. § 1 28, 2], much : Mk. [vi. 20 Τ Tr
mrg. (?) WH (see άπορί'ω)] ; ix. 26 ; Ro. xvi. 6, 12 [L br.
the cl.] ; in many ways, Jas. iii. 2 ; icith many tvorrls,
[R. V. muchl, with verbs of saying; as, κηρΰσσιιν, πάρα-
KoKe'iv, etc., Mk. i. 45 ; iii. 12 ; v. 10, 23, 43 ; 1 Co. xvi.
12; many limes, often, repeateilly: Mt. ix. 14 [RGTr
WH mrg.] (and often in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; cf.
Passow s. v. V. 1 a. vol. ii. p. 1013"; [L. and S. III. a.];
Stallbaum on Plat. Phaedo p. 61 c.) ; with the art. τά
πολλά, yor the most part, [R. V. these many times'] (Vulg.
plurimum), Ro. xv. 22 [LTrmrg. πολλάκκ] (ex.x. fr. Grk.
writ, are given by Passow 1. c, [L. and S. I. c], and by
Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 281).
ΐΓολίσ-ιτλαγχνοί, -ov, (πολΰί, and σπ\ά•γχνον q. v.), full of
pity, rery kiml : .las. v. 11; Ilebr. Ίρπ 3i_, in the Sept.
vo\vf\(os- (Theod. Stud. p. 615.)*
■τΓολ\)τ£λή5, -i's, (πολΰί, and τί'λοΓ cost), [from Ildt.
down], precious ; a. requirinr; great outlay, very
costly : Mk. xiv. 3 ; 1 Tim. ii. 9. (Thuc. et sqq. ; Sept.)
b. excellent, of surpassing value, [A. V. of great price] :
I Pet. iii. 4. [(Plat., al.)] *
ΊΓολύτιμοϊ, -οι>,{ποΚν!,τίμη), very valuable,of great price:
Mt. xiii. 46; xxvi. 7 LTTrmrg. ; Jn. xii. 3; compar.
TtoKvTipOTepov, 1 Pet. i. 7, where Rec. πολύ τιμιώτιρον.
(Plut. Pomp. 5; Ildian. 1, 17,5[3ed. Bekk.] ; Anthol.,
al.)•
πολντρίιτωϊ, (fr. πολΰτροποΓ, in use in various senses fr.
Horn, down), adv., in many rtianners : Ileb. i. 1 [(Philo
de incor. mund. § 24)] ; see ποΚυμιρως'
Ίτόμο (.\ttic πώμα; [cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 425]), -Tdt, to,
(πίνω, πίπομαι), drink: 1 Co. X. 4 ; Heb. ix. 10.*
ΊΓονηρία, -at, ή, (πονηρο!), [fr. Soph, down], Sept. for
^?Ί and 7\1'1, depravity, iniquity, wickedness [(so A. V.
almost uniformly)], malice : Mt. xxii. 18 ; Lk. xi. 39; Ro.
i. 29 ; 1 Co. V. 8 ; Eph. vi. 1 2 ; plur. al πονηρίαι [cf. W.
§ 27, 3; B. § 123, 2; R. V. wickednesses'], evil purposes
and desires, Mk. vii. 22 ; wicked ways [A. V. iniquities'^,
Acts iii. 26. [Syn. see κακία, fin.] *
ΐΓονηρίβ (on the accent cf. Lah. ad Phryn. p. 389;
Goltling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 304 sq. ; [Chandler §§ 404,
405] ; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 26). -a, -ov ; com-
par. ττονηρότ(ρο! (Mt. xii. 45 ; Lk. xi. 26 ) ; (ποκί'ω, novos) ;
fr. lies., [liom. (ep. 15, 20), Theog.] down ; Sept. often
for J?"5 ; 1. full of labors, annoyances, hardships ;
a. pressed and harassed by labors ; thus Hercules is called
πονηρότατο! και άριστα, Hes. frag. 43, 5. b. bring-
ing toils, annoyances, perils : (καιρό:. Sir. Ii. 12); ήμΐρα
πονηρά, of a time full of peril to Christian faith and stead-
fastness, Eph. V. 16; vi. 13, (so in the plur. ήμίμαι πον.
Barn. ep. 2, 1) ; causing pain and trouble [A. V. griev-
ous'], (Xkos, Rev. xvi. 2. 2. had, of a bad nature or
condition ; a. in a physical sense : οφθαλμό:, dis-
eased or blind, Mt. vi. 23 ; Lk. xi. 34, {πονηρία οφθαλμών.
Plat. Hipp. min. p. 374 d. ; the Greeks use πονηρά): (χιιν
or διακί'ισθαι of the sick ; cV γενετής πονηρούς νγιεις πε-
wotr/Kc'i/ai, Justin apol. 1, 22 [(cf. Otto's note) ; al. take πον.
in Mt.and Lk.u.s. ethically; cf.b. and Meyer on Mt.]);
καρπός, Mt. vii. 1 7 sq. b. in an ethical sense, evil,
tcirkeil, bad, etc. [" this use of the word is due to its as-
sociation with the working (largely the servile) class;
not that contempt for labor is thereby expressed, for
such words as εργάτης, δραστηρ, and the like, do not take
on this evil sense, which connected itself only with a
word expressive of unintermitted toil and carrying no
suggestion of results" (cf. Schmidt ch. 85, §1); see
κακία, fin.] ; of persons: Mt. vii. 11 ; xii. 34sq.; xviii. 32;
XXV. 26 ; Lk. vi. 45 ; xi. 1 3 ; xix. 22 ; Acts xvii. 5 ; 2 Th. iii.
2; 2 Tim. iii. 13; yt xea πον-, Mt. xii. 39,45; xvi. 4; Lk. xi.
29 ; πνεϋμα πονηρόν, an evil spirit (see πνεϋμα, 3 c.), Mt.
xii. 45; Lk. vii. 21 ; viii. 2; xi. 26; Acts xix. 12 sq. 15
sq. ; substantively oi πονηροί, the wicked, bad men,
opp. to 01 hiKaioi, Mt. xiii. 49; πονηροί κα'ι αγαθοί, Mt. v.
45 ; xxii. 10 ; αχάριστοι κ. πονηροί, Lk. vi. 35 ; τον πονηρόν,
the wicked man, i. e. the evil-doer spoken of, 1 Co. v. 13;
τω πηνηρώ, the evil man, who injures you, Mt. v. 39. 6
πονηρός is used pre-eminently of the devil, the evil one :
Mt. v. 37; vi. 13; xiii. 19, 38; Lk. xi. 4 R L ; .Jn. xvii.
15; 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. ; iii. 12; v. 18 sq. (on which see κε'ϊμαι,
2 c.) ; Eph. vi. 16. of things : αιών, Gal. i. 4 ; όνομα (q• v.
1 p. 447" bot.), Lk. vi. 22; ρα8ιούργημα. Acts xviii. 14;
the heart as a storehouse out of which a man brings forth
πονηρά words is called θησαυρός πονηρός, Mt. xii. 35 ; Lk.
vi. 45 ; σννείδησις πονηρά, a soul conscious of wickedness,
[conscious wickedness ; see συν(ίδησις,\). sub fin.], Heb. x.
22 ; Kapbia πονηρά απιστίας, an evil heart such as is re-
vealed in distrusting [cf. B. § 132, 24 ; W. § 30, 4], Heb.
iii. 12; οφθαλμός (q. v.), Mt. xx. 15; Mk. vii. 22; δια-
λογισμοί, 'Sit. XV. 19 ; ,Jas. ii. 4 ; Ιπόνοιαι, 1 Tim. vi. 4 ;
κανχησις, Jas. iv. 16; ρήμα, a reproach, Mt. v. 11 [RG;
al. om. p.] : λόγοι, 3 Jn. 10 ; ίργα, Jn. iii. 19 ; vii. 7 ; 1 Jn.
iii. 12; 2 Jn. 11 ; Col. i. 21 ; ίργον, (ace. to the context)
wrong committed against me, 2 Tim. iv. 18 ; αίτια, charge
of crime, Acts xxv. 1 8 L Τ Tr mrg. WH mrg. The neuter
πονηρόν, and το πονηρόν, substantively, evil, that which is
ΐΓοίΌς
531
TTopveia
wicked : ei8os πονηρού (see (l8ot, 2 ; [al. take πον. here as
an adj., and bring the ex. under iiSos, 1 (R. V. rarg. ap-
pearance of evil)']), 1 Th. v. 22; 2 Th. iii. 3 (where τυϋ
πονηρού is held by many to be the gen. of the masc. ό πο-
νηρός, but of. Liinemann ad loc.) ; [τι πονηράν, Acts xxviii.
2 1 J ; opp. to TO ά-γαθήν, Lk. vi. 45 ; Ro. xii. 9 ; plur. [VV.
§ 34, 2], Mt. ix. 4 ; Lk. iii. 19 ; wicked deeds, Acts xxv.
18 Tr txt. WH txt. ; ταϋτα τα πονηρά, these evil things i. e.
the vices just enumerated, Mk. vii. 23.'
irovos, -ου, 6, {πίνομαι [see πίνηϊ]), fr. Ilom. down, Sept.
for hoy, i''J", etc., labor, tod; 1. i. q. great trouble,
intense desire: ίπίρ tivos (gen. of pers.). Col. iv. 13
(where Rec. has ζηλον [ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]). 2.
pain: Rev. xvi. 10 sq.; xxi. 4. [Syn. see koitos, fin.] *
Ποντικό?, -ij, -Of, (navTos, q. v.), belonging to Pontus,
horn in Pontus : Acts xviii. 2. [(Hdt., al.)] *
IIovTios, -ου, 6, Pontius (a Roman name), the prae-
nomen of Pilate, procurator of Judaia (see Πιλάτο?) ;
Mt. xxvii. 2 [R G L] ; Lk. iii. 1 ; Acts iv. 27 ; 1 Tim. vi.
13.•
IlivTos, -ou, 0, Pontus, a region of eastern Asia Minor,
bounded by the Euxine Sea [fr. which circumstance it
took its name], Armenia, Cappadocia, Galatia, Paphla-
gonia, [BB. DD. s. v.; Ed. Mei/er, Gesch. d. Konigreiches
Pontes (Leip. 1879)] : Acts ii. 9 ; 1 Pet. i. 1.*
Πόιτλιοϊ, -ου, ό, Publius (a Roman name), the name of
a chief magistrate [(Grk. 6 πρώτοι) but see Dr.WooIsey's
addition to the art. 'Publius' in B. D. (Am. ed.)] of the
island of Melita ; nothing more is known of liim : Acts
xxviii. 7, 8.*
iropeCa, -as, ή, (πορήω), fr. Aeschyl. down ; Sept. for
riD'Sn; a journey: Lk. xiii. 22 (see jroif'ia, L 3) ; Hebra^
istically (see ohas, 2 a.), α going i. e. purpose, pursuit, un-
dertaking : Jas. i. 11.*
πορ(ΰω : to lead over, carry over, transfer, (Pind., Soph.,
Thuc, Plat., al.); Mid. (fr. Ildt. down), pres. πορεύομαι;
ΐηίρΐ. €πορ€υόμην', int. πορ^υσομαι: pf. ptcp. ττίπορευμενο? ;
1 aor. subjunc. 1 pers. plur. πορ^υσώμιθα (.las. iv. 13
Rec." Grsb.) ; 1 aor. pass. (πορ(ΰθην; (πόρος a ford, [cf.
Eng. pore i. e. passage through ; Curtius § 356 ; Vanicek
p. 479]) ; Sept. often for fl7^, ^^|ΠηΠ, ■7\h\ ; prop, to lead
one's self across ; i. e. to take o/ie's way, betake one's self,
set out, depart ; a. prop. : την ό8όν μου, to pursue
the journey on which one has entered, continue one's
journey, [A. V. go on one's ivay]. Acts viii. 39; πορ. foil,
by από w. a gen. of place, to depart from, Mt. xxiv. 1
[R G] ; από w. a gen. of the pers., Mt. xxv. 41 ; Lk. iv.
42 ; iKcidev, Mt. xix. 15 ; evrddev, Lk. xiii. 31 ; foil, by
els w. an ace. of place, to go, depart, to some place : Mt.
ii. 20 ; xvii. 27 ; Mk. xvi. 12 ; Lk. i. 39; ii. 41 ; xxii. 39 ;
xxiv. 13 ; .In. vii. 35 ; viii. 1 ; Acts i. 11, 25 ; xx. 1 ; Ro.
XV. 24 sq.; Jas. iv. 13, etc.; w. an ace. denoting the
state : tls (ΐρήνην, Lk. vii. 50 ; viii. 48, (also ev (Ιρήνη,
Acts xvi. 36 ; see (Ιρήνη, 3) ; fis θάνατον, Lk. xxii. 33 ;
foil, by ('πι w. an ace. of place, Mt. xxii. 9 ; Acts viii. 26 ;
ix. 11 ; fjri w. the ace. of a pers. Acts xxv. 12 ; ΐως with
a gen. of place. Acts xxiii. 23 ; πον [q. v.] for ποί, .Τη.
vii. 35 ; ου [seeSs, II. 11 a.] for όττοι, Lk. xxiv. 28; 1 Co.
xvi. 6 ; jrpo'r w. the ace. of a pers., Mt. xxv. 9 ; xxvi. 14 ;
Lk. xi. 5; xv. 18; xvi. 30; Jn. xiv. 12, 28; xvi. 28; xx.
1 7 ; Acts xxvii. 3 ; xxviii. 26 ; κατά την obav. Acts viii.
36 ; 8ιά w. a gen. of place, Mt. xii. 1 ; [Mk. ix. 30 L txt
Tr txt. WH txt.] ; the purpose of the journey is indi-
cated by an infinitive : Mt. xxviii. 8 (9) Rec. ; Lk. ii. 3 ;
xiv. 19, 31 ; Jn. xiv. 2 ; by the prep, ΐπί ivith an ace. [cf.
f'm', C. I. 1 f.], Lk. XV. 4 ; foil, by tra, Jn. xi. 11; by σύ»
w. a dat. of the attendance, Lk. vii. 6 ; Acts x. 20 ; xxvi.
13 ; 1 Co. xvi. 4 ; ΐμπροσθίν twos, to go before one, Jn.
x. 4. absol. i. <j. to depart, gu one's way : Mt. ii. 9 ; viii.
9 ; xi. 7 ; xxviii. 1 1 ; Lk. vii. 8 ; xvii. 1 9 ; Jn. iv. 50 ; viii.
11 ; xiv. 3; Acts v. 20; viii. 27; xxi. 5; xxii. 21, etc.;
i.i\.tobeon one's way, to journey: [Lk. viii. 42LTrmrg.];
ix. 57 ; x. 38 ; xiii. 33 ; Acts ix. 3 ; xxii. 6. to enter upon
ajourney; ίο ^o to do something : 1 Co. x. 27; Lk. x. 37.
In accordance with the oriental fashion of describing
an action circumstantially, the ptcp. πορίυόμινος or πο-
pfudeis is placed before a finite verb which designates
some other action (cf. άνίστημι, II. 1 c. and ϊρχομαι,
I. 1 a. a. p. 250» bot.) : Mt. ii. 8 ; ix. 13 (on which cf. the
rabbin, phrase ibSl V.'i [cf. Schoettgen or Wetstein ad
loc.]) ; xi. 4; xxvii. 66 ; xxviii. 7 ; Lk. vii. 22; ix. 13, 52;
xiii. 32; xiv. 10; xv. 15; xvii. 14; xxii. 8; 1 Pet. iii.
19. b. By a Hebraism, metaphorically, a. to
depart from life : Lk. xxii. 22 ; so '^Sri, Gen. xv. 2 ; Ps.
xxxix. 14. β. οπίσω τινός, to follow one, i.e. become
his adherent [cf. B. 184 (160)] : Lk. xxi. 8 (Judg. ii. 12 ;
1 K. xi. 10; Sir. xlvi. 10) ; to seek [cf. Eng. run afterj
any thing, 2 Pet. ii. 10. γ. to lead or order one's life
(see π^ριπατίω, b. a. and ohos, 2 a.) ; foil, by iv with a dat.
of the thing to which one's life is given up : ev aaeXydais,
1 Pet. iv. 3 ; ev ταΐς ϊντοΧαΙς του κυρίου, Lk. i. 6 ; κατά τάς
ίπιθυμίας, 2 Pet. iii. 3 ; Jude 16, 18; τα'ις όδοΐί μου, dat. of
place, [to walk in one's own w.ays], to follow one's moral
preferences. Acts xiv. 16 ; τη όδω τίνος, to imitate one,
to follow his ways, Jude 11 ; τω φόβω τοΰ κυρίου. Acts
ix. 31 ; see W. § 31, 9 ; B. § 133, 22 b.; ϋιτο μepιμvώv, to
lead a life subject to cares, Lk. viii. 14, cf. Bornemann
ad loc. ; [Meyer ed. Weiss ad loc. ; yet see ΰπό, I. 2 a. ; W.
369 (346) note; B. §147,29; VL.\ .as they go on their way
they are choked with cares, etc. Coup. : Sia-, ela- (-μαι),
ίκ- (-μαι), ev- (-^loi), ίπι- (-μαι), πάρα- (-μαι), προ-, προσ-
(-μαι), συν- (-μαι). SvN. see ίρχομαι, fin.]
πορθί'ω : impi. (πορθούν ; 1 aor. ptcp. πopθησas ; (πίρθω,
πίπορθα, to Lay waste) ; fr. Hom. down ; to destroy,
to overthrow, [R. V. uniformly to make havockl: τινά.
Acts ix. 21; την ΐκκλησίαν. Gal. i. 13; την πίστιν, ibid.
23.*
iropur\Lis, -οΰ, ό, (πορίζω to cause a thing to get on well,
to carry forward, to convey, to acquire ; mid. to bring
about or procure for one's self, to gain ; fr. πόρος [cf.
πopeύω]) ; a. acquisition, gain, (Sap. xiii. 19; xiv.
2; Polyb., .loseph., Plut.). b. a source of gain: I
Tim. vi. 5 sq. (Plut. Cat. Maj. 25 ; [Test. xii. Patr., test
Is. §4]).*
Πόρκιοΐ, see Φηστος.
iropvcCa, -as, ή, (πopveΰω), Sept. for ΠυΐΓΙ, HUT, ti'JIJJ,
iropvevt»
532
ΤΓΟτατΓϋΝ,
fornication (WiAg. fomicalio [and (Rev. xix. ΐ) prostitur
/ίο]) ; used a. prop, of illicit se.xual intercourse in
general (Dem. 403, 27; 433, 25) : Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi.
25, (that this meaning must be adopted in these passages
will surprise no one who has learned from 1 Co. vi. 12
s(j<j. how leniently converts from among the heathen re-
garded this vice and how lightly they indulged in it; ac-
cordingly, all other interpretations of the term, such as
of marriages witliin the prohibited degrees and the like,
are to be rejected) ; Ilo. i. 29 Rec. ; 1 Co. v. 1 ; vi. 13, 18 ;
vii. 2 ; 2 Co. xii. 21 ; Eph. v. 3 ; Col. iii. 5 ; 1 Th. iv. 3 ;
Rev. ix. 21 ; it is distinguished from μοιχεία in Mt. xv.
19; Mk. vii. 21 ; and Gal. v. 19 Rec; used of adultery
[(cf. Hos. ii. 2 (4), etc.)], Mt. v. 32 ; xix. 9. b. In
accordance witli a form of speech common in the O. T.
and among the Jews which represents the close rela-
tionship existing between Jehovah and his people under
the figure of a marriage (cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 422*
sq.), TTopveia is used metaphorically of the worship of
idols : Rev. xiv. 8 ; xvii. 2, 4 ; xviii. 3 ; .xi.x. 2 ; ημιΐς ex
vopvdai ov -γίγιννημιθα (we are not of a people given to
idolatry), eua ττατίρα (^ομίν τον Bcov, Jn. viii. 41 (^adeos μίν
6 ayovoiy ιτο\νθ(ος Si ά fV πόρνης^ τνφλωττων irepi τον
άΧηθί) πατέρα και δια τούτο ττ ο λ λ ο ί» f άνθ^ ίνος yovets αΐνιτ-
τόμινο!, I'hilo de mig. Abr. §12; τίκνα TTopvdas, of idol-
aters, Hos. i. 2 ; [but in Jn. 1. c. others understand phy-
sical descent to be spoken of (cf. lleyer)]) ; of the de-
filement of idolatry, as incurred by eating the sacrifices
• offered to idols. Rev. ii. 21.*
πορνβνω ; 1 aor. (ττορνΐνσα ; (ττόρι/οΓ, ττορνη q. v.) ; Sept.
for n:j ; in Grk. writ. ([Ildt.], Dem., Aeschin., Dio Cass.,
Lcian., al.) 1. to prostitute one's body to the lust of
another. In the Scriptures 2. to give one's self to
unlatvful sexual intercourse ; to commit fornication (Vulg.
fornicor): 1 Co. vi. 18; x. 8; Rev. ii. 14, 20; [Mk. x. 19
WH (rejected) mrg.]. 3. by a Hebraism (see iropvfta,
b.) metaph. to be given to idolatry, to worship idols : 1 Chr.
T. 25 ; Ps. Ix.xii. (Ixxiii.) 27 ; Jer. iii. 6 ; Ezek. xxiii. 19 ;
Hos. ix. 1, etc. ; μιτά nvos, to permit one's self to be
draum away by another into idolatry, Rev. xvii. 2 ; xviii.
3, 9. [CoMP. : iV-jTopwfilu).] *
"^P'^» ""/Si 4. (fr. πίράω, ττίρνημι, to sell ; Curtius § 3.58),
properly a woman who sells her bndy for sexual uses [cf.
Xen. mem. 1, 6, 13], Sept. for njll ; 1. prop, a pros-
titute, a harlot, one who yields herself to defilement for
the sake of gain, (Arstph., Dem., al.) ; in the N. T.
nniv. any woman indulging in unlawful sexual intercourse,
Khether for gain or for lust: Mt. xxi. 31 sq. ; Lk. xv. 30;
1 Co. vi. 15 sq. ; Heb. xi. 31 ; Jas. ii. 25. 2. Heb-
raistically (see πορνΰπ, b. and πορνήω, 3), metaph. an
idolatress; so of 'Babylon ' i. e. Rome, the chief seat
of idolatry: Rev. xvii. 1, 5, 15 sq.; xix. 2.*
«iSpvos, -ou, 0, (for the etym. see πόρνη), a man who
prostitutes his body to another's lust for hire, a male pros-
titute, ([Arstph.], Xen., Dem., Aeschin., Lcian.); univ.
a man who indulges in unlawful sexual intercourse, a for-
nicator, (Vn\g. fornicator, fornicarius, [Rev. xxii. 15 im-
pudicus']) : 1 Co. v. 9-1 1 ; vi. 9 ; Eph. v. 5 ; 1 Tim. i. 10 ;
lleb. xii. 16 ; xiii. 4 ; Rev. xxi. 8 ; xxii. 15. (Sir. xxlii.
16 sq.)•
ιτόρρω, [(allied w. πρό, Curtius § 380)], adv., [fr. Plat.,
Xen. down],/ar, at a distance, a great way off: Mt. xv.
8; Alk. vii. 6; Lk. xiv. 32 [cf. W. §54, 2 a. ; B. §129, 11];
conipar. πορρωτίρω, in L Tr WII πορρωτιρον [(Polyb.,
al)}, further: Lk. xxiv. 28.•
Ίτόρρωθ^ν, (πόρρω), adv., [fr. Plat, on}, from afar, afar
off: Lk. xvii. 12 ; Heb. xi. 13 ; Sept. chiefly for ρίΓΤ^Ο.•
ΊΓορφύρα, -as, ή, Sept. for [OJ^X ; 1. the purple-
fish, a species of shell-fish or mussel : [Aeschyl., Soph.],
Isocr., Aristot., al. ; add 1 Mace. iv. 23, on which see
Grimm ; [cf. B. D. s. v. Colors 1]. 2. α fabric col-
ored with the purple dye, a garment made from purple
cloth, (so fr. Aeschyl. down) : Mk. xv. 17, 20 ; Lk. xvi.
19; Rev. xvii. 4 Rec; xviii. 12.•
τΓορψνρ^οΐ, -α, -OK, in Attic and in the N. T. contr. -ovt,
•ά, -oOi', (πορφύρα), fr. Hom. down, purple, dyed in pur-
ple, made of a purple fabric : Jn. xix. 2, 5 ; πορφυροΰν sc.
evSvpa ([B. 82 (72)] ; cf. W. p. 591 (550)), Rev. xvii. 4
[G L Τ Tr WH] ; xviii. 16.*
πορψυρόιτωλις, -idos, η, (πορφύρα and 7Γα>λ«ω), α female
seller of purple or of fabrics dyed in purple (Vulg. pur-
puraria) : Acts xvi. 14. (Phot., Suid., al.) *
ΐΓοσ-άκΐί, (πόσος), adv., how often : Mt. xviii. 21 ; x.xuL
37 ; Lk. xiii. 34. [(Plat, ep., Aristot., al.)]•
iroo-is, -ίωί, ή, (πίνω), fr. Horn, down, a drinking, drink:
Jn. vi. 55; Ro. xiv. 17; Col. ii. 16, (see βρώσΐ!).*
itoa-os, -η, -ov, [(cf. Curtius § 631), fr. Aeschyl. down,
Ι,ίΛ. quarilus}, how great : Mt. vi. 23; 2Co. vii. II; πόσοι
χρόνος, how great (a space) i. e. how long time, Mk. i.\.
21 ; neut. how much, Lk. xvi. 5, 7; πάσω, (by) how much,
Mt. xii. 1 2 ; πόσω μάλλον, Mt. vii. 11; x. 25 ; Lk. xi. I .'i ;
xii. 24, 28 ; Ro. xi. 12, 24 ; Philem. 16 ; Heb. ix. 14 ; πόσω
χιΐρονος τιμωρίας, Heb. .\. 29 ; plur. how many : with
nouns, Mt. xv. 34 ; xvi. 9 sq. ; Mk. vi. 38 ; viii. 4, 1 9 sq. ;
Lk. XV. 1 7 ; Acts xxi. 20 ; πόσα, how grave, Mt. xxvii. 1 3 ;
Mk. XV. 4.•
ΐΓοτομόϊ, -oC, 0, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for "inj and "IN",
a stream, a river : Mt. iii. 6 L Τ Tr AVH ; Mk. i. 5 ; Acts
xvi. 13; 2 Co. xi. 26 [W. § 30, 2 a.]; Rev. viii. 10; ix. 14;
xii. 15; xvi. 4, 12; xxii. Isq. ; i.q. α /orrcni, Mt. vii. 25,
27; Lk. vi. 48 sq. ; Rev. xii. 15 sq. ; plur. figuratively
i. q. the greatest abundance [cf. coUoq. Eng. " streams,"
" floods "], Jn. vii. 38.•
ΐΓΟταμο-φόρητοϊ, -ου, ό, (ποταμός and φορίω ; like avf-
μοφόρητος [cf. W. 100 (94)]), carried aicay by a stream
(i. e. whelmed, drowned in the waters) : Rev. xii. la.
Besides only in Hesych. s. v. άπόιρσί.'
iroToiros ([in Dion. Hal., Joseph., Philo, al.] for the
older πο&απός [cf. Lob. Phryn. p. 56 sq.; Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 129; AV. 24; Curtius p. 537, 5th ed.] ;
ace. to the Grk. grammarians i. q. ix ποίου ίαπίδου, from
what region ; ace. to the conjecture of others i. q. tfoC άπί
[( Buttmann, Lexil. i. 126, compares the Germ, wovon)],
the δ being inserted for the sake of euphony, as in the
Lat. prodire, proOesse; cf. Fritzsche on Mark p. 5.'J4
sq. [«till others regard -δαπ6Γ merely as an ending ; cf
•jTOTe
533
Πούδη^;
Apollon. Dysk., ed. Buttmann, index s. v.]), -ή, -ύν ; 1.
from, what country, race, or tribe ? so fr. Aeschyl. down.
2. from Demosth. down also i. q. τγοΙογ, of what sort or
qualilii ? [what manner of?~\ : absol. of persons, Mt. viii.
27; 2 Pet. iii. 11 ; with a pers. noun, Lk. vii. 39 ; w. names
of things, Mk. xiii. 1 ; Lk. i. 29; 1 .In. iii. 1.*
■1ΓΟΤ6, [Curtius §631], direct interrog. adv., fr. Horn,
down, when f at what time ? Mt. χ.κν. 3 7-39, 44 ; Lk. xxi.
7 ; Jn. vi. 25 ; loosely used (as sometimes even by Attic
writ.) for the relative όπότι in indirect questions (\V.
510(475)): Mt. xxiv. 3; Mk. xiii. 4, 33, 35 ; Lk. .\ii. 36;
xvii. 20. f ωί πότ€, how long ? in direct (juestions [cf. W.
§ 54, 6 fin. ; B. § 146, 4] : Mt. xvii. 1 7 ; Mk. ix. 19 ; Lk. ix.
41 ; Jn. .X. 24; Rev. vi. 10.*
ΐΓοτί, an enclitic particle, fr. Horn, down ; 1.
once,i. e. at some time or other, former! i^, aforetime ; a.
of the Past : Jn. ix. 13 ; Ro. vii. 9 ; xi. 30 ; Gal. i. 13, 23
[cf. W. §45, 7]; Eph. ii. 2sq. 11, 13; v. 8 ; Col. i. 21 ; iii.
7 ; 1 Th. ii. 5 ; Tit. iii. 3 ; Philem. 11 ; 1 Pet. ii. 10 ; iii.
5, 20; η8η iron, now at length, Phil. iv. 10. b. of the
Future: Lk. xxii. 32; ^δι; nore, now at length, Ro. i.
10. 2. ever: after a negative, oiSels nore, Eph. v.
29 [B. 202 (175)] ; ov . ■ . nori, 2 Pet. i. 21 ; μή nore
(see μήτΓοτί) ; after ου μη with the aor. subjunc. 2 Pet.
i. 10 ; in a question, tis ποτί, 1 Co. ix. 7 ; Heb. i. 5, 13 ;
ino'ioi wore, whatsoever. Gal. ii. 6 [but some would render
TTOTf heT6 formerly, once ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].*
iniTepos, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], which of ttvo ; πότ€-
pov . . . ij, utrum . . . an, whether . . . or, [W. § 57, 1 b. ;
B. 230 (215)]: Jn. vii. 17.•
ΊΓΟτήριον, -ov, TO, (dimin. of ποτήρ), a cup, a drinking
vessel; a. prop.: Mt. xxiii. 25 sq. ; xxvi. 27; Mk.
vii. 4, 8 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.] ; xiv. 23 ; Lk. xi. 39 ;
xxii. 17, 20; 1 Co. xi. 25; Rev. xvii. 4; mvew ex τον
πατηρίου, 1 Co. .xi. 28 ; το ποτήριον Trjs (υλογίας (see ei-
λογία, 4), 1 Co. X. 16 ; with a gen. of the thing with
which the cup is filled : ψνχρον, Mt. x. 42; iJSaTor, Mk.
ix. 41 ; by meton. of the container for the contained,
the contents of the cup, what is offered to be drunk,
Lk. x.xii. 20' [(WH reject the pass.) cf. AVin. 635 (5S9)
sq.] ; 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. ; τά ηοτήριόν tivos, gen. of the pers.
giving the entertainment (cf. Rilckert, Abendraahl, p.
217 sq.) : irivfiv. 1 Co. x. 21 [cf. AV. 189 (178)] ; xi. 27
[cf. W. 441 (410)]. b. By a figure common to
Hebrew, Arabic, Syriac, and not unknown to Latin
writers, one's lot or e.xperience, whether joyous or
adverse, divine appointments, whether favorable
or unfavorable, are likened to a cup which God presents
one to drink [cf. W. 32] : so of prosperity, Ps. .xv. (xvi.)
5 ; xxii. (xxiii.) 5; cxv. (cxvi.) 13; of adversity, Ps. x.
(xi.) 6 ; Ixxiv. (Ixxv.) 9 ; Is. Ii. 1 7, 22. In the N. T. of
the bitter lot (the sufferings) of Christ : Mt. xxvi. 39,
42 Rec. ; Mk. xiv. 36 ; Lk. xxii. 42 ; Jn. xviii. 1 1 ; nlvew
TO HOT. μου or 6 f'yoi ττίρω, to undergo the same calamities
which I undergo, Mt. xx. 22, 23; Mk. x. 38, 39, (Plant.
Cas. 5, 2, 53 (50) ut senex hoc eodem poculo quod ego
bibi biberet, i. e. that he might be treated as harshly as
I was) ; used of the divine penalties : Rev. xiv. 10 ; xvi.
19 ; xviii. 6. ([Alcaeus, Sappho], Udt., Ctes., Arstph.,
Lcian., al. ; Sept. for 013•) *
ττοτΰ,ω ; impf. (πότιζαν ; 1 aor. (πότισα ; pf. π(πότικα
(Rev. xiv. 8) ; 1 aor. pass, (ποτίσθην ; (τγοτογ) ; fr. [Hip-
pocr.], Xen., Plat, down ; Sept. for 7]pvr[ ; to give to
drink, to furnish drink, (Vulg. in 1 Co. xii. 13 and Rev.
xiv. 8 poto [but in Rev. 1. c. Tdf. gives potiono ; A. V. to
make to drink]): τινά, Mt. xxv. 35, 37, 42 ; xxvii. 48 ; Mk.
XV. 36; Lk. xiii. 15 ; Ro. .\ii. 20 ; τινά τι, to offer one
anything to drink (W. § 32, 4 a. ; [B. § 131, 6]) : Mt. x.
42 ; Mk. ix. 41, and often in the Sept. ; in fig. discourse
7Γ. Tivis γάλα, to give one teaching easy to be apprehended,
1 Co. iii. 2 (where by zeugma oi βρώμα is added ; [cf.
W. § 66, 2 e. ; B. § 151, 30 ; A. V. / have fed you with
milk, etc.]) ; τίνα ix τοΟ υΐνην. Rev. xiv. 8 (see olvos, b.
and θυμοί, 2); i. q. to water, irrigate, ( plants, fields, etc.) :
1 Co. iii. 6-8 (Xen. symp. 2, 25; Lcian., Athen., Geop.,
[Strab., Philo] ; Sept. [Gen. xiii. 10]; Ezek. xvii. 7);
metaph. to imbue, saturate, tiw, one's mind, w. the addi-
tion of an accus. of the thing, iv πν(ΰμα, in pass., 1 Co.
xii. 13 L Τ Tr WH [W. § 32, 5 ; B. § 134, 5] ; ei'r iVjri/fO/xa,
that we might be united into one body which is imbued
with one spirit, ibid. R G, {τίνα ιτνίϋματι κατανύξίως, Is-
xxix. 10 [cf. Sir. χ v. 3]).•
Ποτίολοι, -ων, Oi, Puleoli, a city of Campania in Italy,
situated on the Bay of Naples, now called Pozzuoli :
Acts xxviii. 13. [Cf. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 218 sqq.; Smith,
Diet, of Geog. s. v.] *
irOTos, -ου, 6. (ΠΟΩ [cf. ττίνω]), a drinking, carousing :
1 Pet. iv. 3. (Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., Plut., Ael., al. ;
Sept. for ππψρ.) •
iroO, [cf. Curtius § 631], an interrog. adv., fr. Horn.
down, Sept. for Π'Χ, njK, "X, where ? in what place ? a.
in direct questions : Mt. ii. 2 ; xxvi. 17 ; Mk. xiv. 12, 14 ;
Lk. xvii. 17, 37; xxii. 9, 11 ; Jn. i. 38 (39); vii. 11; viii.
10, 19; ix. 12; xi. 34; ποΟ «σηι» [(«στ. sometimes unex-
pressed)], in questions indicating that a person or thing
is gone, or cannot be found, is equiv. to it is nowhere,
does not exist: Lk. viii. 25; Ro. iii. 27; 1 Co. i. 20; xii.
17, 19; XV. 55; Gal. iv. 15LTTrWH; 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; πο5
φαν(1ται, [Α. V. where shall . . . appear] i. q. there will be
no place for him, 1 Pet. iv. 18. b. in indirect ques-
tions, for the relative όπου [cf. W. §57, 2 fin.] : foil, by
the indie, Mt. ii. 4 ; ITk. xv. 47 ; Jn. i. 39 (40) ; xi. 57;
XX. 2, 13, 15 ; Eev. ii. 13 [cf. W. 613 (569)] ; foU. by the
subjunc, Mt. viii. 20 ; Lk. ix. 58 ; xii. 17. c. joined
to verbs of going or coming, for Ttot in direct quest, [cf.
our colloq. where for whither ; see W. t^ 54, 7 ; B. 71
(62)] : Jn. vii. 35 [cf. W. 300 (281) ; B. 358 (307)] ; xiii.
36 ; xvi. 5 ; in iudir. question, foil, by the indie: Jn. iii.
8; λάϋ. 14; xii. 35 ; xiv. 5 ; Heb. xi. 8 ; 1. Jn. ii. 11.*
ΐΓού, an encliti.: particle, fr. Hom. down ; 1.
somewhere : Heb. ii. 6 ; iv. 4. 2. it has a limiting
force, nearly; with numerals somewhere about, about,
(Hdt. 1,119; 7,22; Paus.8,11,2; Hdi.in. 7, 5, 3 [2 ed.
Bekk.]; Ael. v. h. 13, 4 ; al.) : Ro. iv. 19.•
Πον8η5. [Β. 17 (15)], Puilens, proper name of a Chris-
tian mentioned in 2 Tim. iv. 21. Cf. Lipsius, Chronolo•
TTOVS
534
7Γραο<;
gie d. roinisch. Bischofe (1869) p. 146; [B. D. s. v., also
(Am. ed.) s. v. Claudia; Bib. Sacr. for 1875, p. 174 sijci- ;
Plumpire in the ' Bible Educator ' iii. 245 and in Klli-
cott's ' New Test. Com.' ii. p. IHBscj.].*
■irovs (not nois, see Loh. ad Phryn. p. 7G5 ; Golllin;/,
Accentl. p. 244 ; [^Chandler, Grk. Accentuation, § 5GG];
W. § 6, Id.; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 48), ττοδοΓ, ό,
[allied w. ttc'Soi/, πίζα, Lat. pes, etc.; Curtius § 291 ; Van-
iiik p. 473], dat. plur. ττοσίν, fr. Horn, down, llebr. Sji ;
afoot, both of men and of beasts: Mt. iv. 6 ; vii. 6; xxii.
13; Mk. ix. 45; Lk. i. 79; Jn. xi. 44; Acts vii. 5 ; 1 Co.
xii. 15; Rev. x. 2, and often. From the oriental prac-
tice of placing the foot upon the vancjuished (Josh. x.
24), come the foil, expressions : ίπο rovt πόδας αυντρΊιίαν
(([. V.) rira, Ro. xvi. 20; υπότασσαν τινά, 1 Co. .\v. 27;
Kph. i. 22 ; lleb. ii. 8 ; τιθΐναι, 1 Co. xv. 25 ; τιθίναι τίνα
νποκάτω των πο8ων, Mt. x,\ii. 44 L Τ Tr AVIi ; υποττόδιον
των ποδών, Mt. xxii. 44 R G; Mk. xii. 36 [here WH ίπο-
κύτωτ. 7Γ.]; Lk. XX. 43; Acts ii. 35; Ileb. i. 13; x. 13 ; dis-
ciples listening to their teacher's instruction are said πάρα
(or προς) τούί πόδαί τίνος καθησθαι or παρακαθίσαι, Lk. χ.
SO; Acts xxii. 3, cf. Lk. viii. 35; to lay a thing παρά (or
προς) τους πόδας τίνός is used of those who consign it to his
pmver and care, Mt. xv. 30; Actsiv. 35, 37; v. 2; vii. 58.
In saluting, paying homage, supplicating, etc., persons
are said προς τους πόδας τινός πίπτΐίν or προσπίπτίίν : ]\lk.
v. 22; vii. 25; Lk. viii. 41 ; xvii. 16 παρά]; Rev. i. 17;
eh τους π- riraf, Mt. xviii. 29 [Rec] ; Jn. xi. 32 [here Τ
Tr WI I TTpo?] ; πίπταν (μττροσθ^ν τ. ποδών τίνος. Rev. xix.
10; προσκνν€'ϊν (μπροσθ^ν (or ΐνώπιον) των ποδών τίνος,
Rev. iii. 9 ; xxii. 8 ; πίπτ. ί'ττι τούί π. Acts χ. 25. By a
poetic usage that member of the body which is the chief
organ or instrument in any given action is put for the
man himself (see γλώσσα, 1 ) ; thus oi πόδ(ς τινός is used
for the man in motion : Lk. i. 79 (Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 101) ;
Acts V. 9; Ro. iii. 15; x. 15 ; Ileb. xii. 13.
πράγμα, -τοΓ, τό, (πράσσω), Ιτ. [Pind.], Aeschyl., Hdt.
down, Sept. chiefly for ΊΠΤ ; a. that tchlch /id.•.• been
done, a deed, an accomplished fact : Lk. i. 1 ; Acts v. 4 ;
2Co. vii. 11; Ileb. vi. 18. b. what is doing or bcin//
accomplished : Jas. iii. 16 ; spec, business (commercial
transaction), 1 Th. iv. 6 [so W. 115 (109); al. refer this
example to c. and render in the matter (spoken of, or con-
ventionally understood; cf. Green, Gram. p. 26 sq.)]. c.
a matter (in question), affair : Mt. xviii. 19 ; Ro. xvi. 2 ;
spec, in a forensic sense, a matter at late, case, suit, (Xen.
mem. 2, 9, 1 ; Dem. 1120, 26 ; Joseph, antt. 14, 10, 17) :
πράγμα ίχ(ΐν προς τίνα, [Λ. V. having a matter against,
etc.], 1 Co. vi. 1. d. tliot irliirh is or exists, a
thing: Ileb. x. 1 ; πράγματα ov βλ(πόμ(να, Ileb. xi. 1 [see
Λπι^ω].*,
πραγμιατ^α [Τ WII τία ; see I, ι], -ας, ή, {πραγματιϋο-
μαϊ), prosecution of any affair ; business, occnpation :
plur. with the addition of τοϋ βίου, pursuits and occupa-
tions pertaining to civil life, opp. to warfare [A. V. the
affairs o/this /i/e], 2 Tim. ii. 4. (In the same and other
senses in Grk. writ. fr. [Hippocr.], Xen., Plato down.)*
ΊΓραγμ,ατενομαι : 1 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. πραγ-
ματ(ΰσασθ(; {πράγμα) ; in Grk. prose writ. fr. Hdt. down ;
to be occupied in ani/lhiiig; to carry on a business; spec.
to carry on the business of a banker or trader (Plut. SuU.
17; Cat. min. 59) : Lk. xix. 13 [here WH txt. reads the
infinitive (see their Intr. § 404) ; R. V. t7-ade. Comp. :
δΐίΐ- πραγματεύομαι.^ *
Ίτραιτώριον, -ου, τό, a Lat. word, praetorium (neut. of
the adj. praetorius used substantiiely) ; the word de-
notes 1. ' head-cjuarters ' in a Roman cam]), the
tent of the commander-in-chief. 2. the palace in
which the governor or procurator of a province resided,
to which use the Romans were accustomed to appropri-
ate the palaces already existing, and formerly dwelt in
by the kings or princes (at Syracuse " ilia domus prae-
toria, quae regis Ilieronis fuit," Cic. Verr. ii. 5, 12, 30);
at Jerusalem it was that magnificent palace which Her-
od the Great had built for himself, and which the Ro-
man procurators seem to have occupied whenever they
came from Ctesarea to Jerusalem to tran.saet public
business: Mt. xxvii. 27; l\Ik. xv. 16; Jn. xviii. 28, 33;
xix. 9 ; cf. Philo, leg. ad Gaium, § 38 ; Joseph, b. j. 2, 14,
8 ; also the one at Cssarea, Acts xxiii. 35. Cf. Keiin
iii. p. 359 sq. [Eng. trans, vi. p. 79 ; B. D. s. v. Praeto-
rium]. 3. the camp of praetorian soldiers estab-
lished by Tiberius (Suet. 37) : Phil. i. 13. Cf. Win.
RWB. s. v. Richthaus ; [Bp. Lghtft. (Com. on Philip,
p. 99 sqq.) rejects, as destitute of evidence, the various
attempts to give a local sense to the word in Phil. 1. c,
and vindicates the meaning /ji-oeion'oii guard (so R.V.)].*
πράκτωρ, -ορός, ό, (πράσσω) ; 1. one who does
anything, a doer, (Soph.). 2. one who does the work
of inflicting punishment or taking vengeance ; esp. the
avenger of a murder (Aeschyl., Soph.) ; the exactor of a
pecuniary fne ([Antipho], Dem., al.) ; an officer of Jus-
tice of the lower order whose business it is to inflict punish-
ment : Lk. xii. 58.*
Ίτράξυ, -(ως, η, {πράσσω), fr. Horn, down; a. a
doing, a mode of acting ; a deed, act, transaction : univ.
πράξεις των αποστόλων (Grsb. ; Rec. inserts αγίων, L Tr
WH om. των, Tdf. has simply πράξ(ΐς), the doings <f (i. e.
things done by) the apostles, in the inscription of the Acts ;
sing, in an ethical sense : both good and bad, Mt. xvi.
27; in a bad sense, i. q. wicked deed, crime, Lk. xxiii.
51 ; plur. tcicked doings (cf. our practices i. e. trickery;
often so by Polyb.) : Acts xix. 18; Ro. viii. 13 ; Col. iii.
9 ; (with κακή added, as Ev. Nicod. 1 Ιησούς έθιράπευσε
fiai/iofifoftfi/ouf από πράξεων κακών). b. α thing to
be done, busi7iess, [A. V. oj/ice], (Xen. mem. 2, 1, 6) : Ro.
xii. 4.•
πράο; (so R G in Mt. xi. 29 ; on the iota subscr. cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 403 sq. ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. § 64, 2 i. p. 255 ;
[Lipsitts, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 7 .sq. ; cf. W. § 5, 4 d. and
p. 45 (44)]) or πράος, -a, -ov, and πραιίς (L Τ Tr WH, so
RGin Mt.xxi.5 (4); [cLTdf Proleg. p. 82]),-(Mz,-t),gen.
πραίως Τ Tr WH for the common form πραέος (so Lchm. ;
πραί'οΓ R G), see βαθίως [cf. B. 26 (23)], [)lur. πραύς L
Τ Tr WH, πραε'ις R G ; fr. Hom. down : gentle, mild, meek:
Mt. V. 5 (4) ; xi. 29; xxi. 5 ; 1 Pet. iii. 4; Sept. several
■τΓραοτης
535
ττρεσβϋτΐρο'ϊ
times for 1J;? and ■3^\ [Cf. Schmidt ch. 98, 2; Trench
§ xlii. ; Clem. Alex, strom. 4, 6, 36.] *
■π-ραότηβ (Kec. and Grsb. [exc. in Jas. i. 21 ; iii. 13 ; 1
Pet. iii. 15] ; see the preceding word), πραότης (so Lchm.),
and ace. to a later form ττραΰτη! (so Κ and G, but with t
subscr. under the a, in Jas. 1. 21 ; iii. 13 ; 1 Pet. iii. 15 ;
i,chm. everywhere exc. in Gal. vi. 1 ; Eph. iv. 2 ; Treg.
everywhere [exc. in 2 Co. x. 1 ; Gal. v. 23 (22) ; vi. 1 ; Eph.
iv. 2], TWH everywhere; cf. B. 26 (23) sq.), -ijtos, ή, gen-
tleness, mildness, meekness : 1 Co. iv. 21 ■ 2 Co. x. 1 ; Gal.
V. 23 (22) ; vi. 1 ; Col. iii. 12 ; Eph. iv. 2 ; 1 Tim. vi. 11 li;
2 Tim. ii. 25 ; Tit. iii. 2 ; Jas. i. 2 1 ; iii. 1 3 ; 1 Pet. iii. 1 6
(15). (Xen., Plato, Isocr., Aristot., Diod., Joseph., al. ;
for nu>t. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 4.) [Syn. see (vifUda, fin. ;
Trench (as there referred to, but esp.) § xlii. ; Bp. Lghtf t.
on Col. iii. 13.]•
•π-ρασιά, -as, ή, a plot off/round, a garden-bed, Horn. Od.
7, 127; 24, 247; Theophr. hist, jilant. 4, 4, 3; Nicand.,
Diosc, al. ; Sir. .xxiv. 31; άνίπ^σον πρασιαι πρασιαί (a
Hebraism), i.e. they reclined in ranks or divisions, so
that the several ranks formed, as it were, separate
plots, Mk. vi. 40; cf. Gesemus, Lehrgeb. p. 669 ; [llebr.
Gram. §106, 4; B. 30(27); W. 464 (432) also] § 37, 3 ;
(where add f r. the O. T. σννηγαγον αυτούς θημωιήας θημω-
νίας, Ex. viii. 14).*
■π-ράσ-σ-ω and (once viz. Acts xvii. 7 RCi) πράττω; fiit.
τΓμάξω ; 1 aor. ίπραξα] pf. πίπραχα; pf. pass. ptcp. nfnpay-
pems; fr. Hom. down; Sept. several times for TWj,' and
'7;'3 ; to do, pi-actise, effect, i^at. agere, (but noulv to make,
hat. Jacere; [see ποκ'ω, fin.]) ; i.e. 1. to exercise,
practise, be busy with, carry on : τα neplepya, Acts .xi.x. 1 9 ;
τα ihta, to mind one's Ολνη affairs, 1 Th. iv. 1 1 (ja ίαυτοϋ,
[Soph. Electr. 678] ; Xen. mem. 2, 9, 1 ; Plat. Phaedr. p.
24 7 a.; Dem. p. 150, 21; al.); used of performing the
duties of an office, 1 Co. i.x. 1 7. to undertake to do, μη&ίν
irpon-ere's, Actsxix. 36. 2. to accomplish, to perform:
π(πραγμ(νον ίστίν, has been accomplished, has taken
place. Acts .xxvi. 26 ; elrf ayaSov, flVf κακοί/. 2 Co. v. 10;
ayaSov η φαΰΚον (κακόν), Ro. ix. 11 (δίκαια η άθικα, Plat.
a])ol. p. 28 b.) ; a|tu Trjs ptravoias fpya. Acts xxvi. 20 ;
add, Ro. vii. 15, 19; Phil. iv. 9 ; νόμον, to do i. e. keep the
law, Ro. ii. 25 ; of unworthy acts, to commit, perpetrate,
(less freq. so in Grk. writ., as πολλά και ανόσια, Xen.
symp. 8, 22 ; with them ποίύν [(see Schmidt, Syn. ch. 23,
11, 3; L. and S. s. v. B.)] is more com. in reference to
bad conduct ; hence tovs ('πιαταμίνου! μίν ά Set πράτταν,
ποιοϋντα! 8e ταναντία, Xen. mem. 3, 9, 4), Acts .xxvi. 9;
2 Co. xii. 21 ; το epyov τοϋτη, this (criminal) deed, 1 Co.
v. 2 Τ WHTrmrg. ; add, Lk. xxii. 23; Acts iii. 17; v.
35 ; Ro. vii. 19 ; τά τοιαΟτα, such nameless iniijuities, Ro.
i. 32 (where τιοκΊν and npaaaetv are used indiscriminately
[but cf. Meyer]) ; ii. 1-3 ; Gal. v. 21 ; φαΟλα, Jn. iii. 20 ;
V. 29; Ti άξιον θανάτου, Lk. xxiii. 15 ; Acts xxv. 11, 25;
xxvi. 31 ; TO κακόν, Ro. vii. 1 9 ; xiii. 4 ; άτοπον, Lk. xxiii. 41 ;
tI Tivi κακόν, to bring evil upon one, Acts xvi. 28. 3.
to manage public affairs, transact public business, (Xen.,
Dem., Plut.); fr. this use has come a sense met with fr.
Find., Aeschyl., Hdt. down, viz. to exact tribute, revenue,
debts: Lk. iii. 13 [here R. V. extort'\; το apyipiov, Lk.
xix. 23, (so age7-e in Lat., cf. the commentators on Suet.
\'esp. 1 ; [cf. λν. § 42, 1 a.]). 4. intrans. to act (see
ev p. 256*) : άπίναντί τινοί, contrary to a thing. Acts xvii.
7. 5. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down reflexively, me
habere : τι πράσσω, how I do, the state of my affairs,
Eph. vi. 21 ; d πράξίτι (see ev), Acts xv. 29 [cf. B. 300
(258)]. ^
ΐΓροϋιτάθίΐα (-θία Τ WH ; see I, i), -as, η, (πραϋπαθής
[(πάσ;(ω)]), miUlncss of disposition, gentleness of spirit,
meekness, (i. q. πραντης) : 1 Tim. vi. 1 1 L Τ Tr WH. (Philo
de Abrah. § 37 ; Ignat. ad Trail. 8, 1.) •
πραν;, see πράο:•
Ίτραΰτηδ, see πραότης.
Ίτρίττω ; impf. 3 pers. sing. ?πρ£πί ; 1. to stand out,
to be conspicuous, to be eminent; so fr. Hom. II. 12, 104
down. 2. to be becoming, seemly, ft, (fr. Find.,
Aeschyl., Hdt. down) : πρίπιι τινί with a subject nom.
Heb. vii. 26 (Ps. xx.xii. (xxxiii.) 1); ό or ά πρίπ-«, which
becometh, befitteth, 1 Tim. ii. 10; Tit. ii. 1 ; impers. κα-
θώς πρίπιι Ttw, E|)h. v. 3 ; πρίπον (στίν foil, by the inf.,
Mt. iii. 15 ; Heb. ii. 10; foil, by an ace. with the inf. 1 Co.
xi. 13. On its constr. cf. Bttm. § 142, 2.*
πρ<σ-β(ία, -ας, η, {πρ(σ0(ΰω) ; 1. age, dignity, right
oflhefrst born : Aeschyl. Pers. 4 ; Plat, de rep. 6 p. 509
b. ; Paus. 3, 1, 4 ; 3, 3, 8. 2. the business wont to
be intrusted to elders, spec, the office of an ambassador,
an embassy, (Arstph., Xen., Plat.) ; abstr. for the con-
crete, an ambassage i. e. ambassadors, Lk. xiv. 32 ; xix.
14.*
ΐΓρ£σ-β«νω; {πρίσβυς an old man, an elder, [Curtius p.
479; Vanicek p. 186]); 1. to be older, prior by
birth or in age, ([Soph.], Hdt. and sqq.). 2. to be
an ambassador, act as an ambassador : 2 Co. v. 20 ; Eph.
vi. 20, ([Hdt. 5, 93init.], Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq.).*
irpco-pvre'piov, -ov, to, {πρ^σβΰτ^ρος, q. v.), body of elders,
presbytery, senate, council : of the Jewish elders (see avy•
eSpiov, 2), Lk. xxii. 66 ; Acts xxii. 5 ; [cf. Dan. Theod.
init. 50] ; of the elders of any body (church) of Chris-
tians, 1 Tim. iv. 14 (eccl. writ. [cf. reff. s. v. πρ^σβίτιρος,
2 b.]).•
ΐΓρ€σ-βΰτίρο5, -α, -ov, (compar. of πρίσβυς), [fr. Hom.
down], eWer ; used 1. of age; a. where two
persons are spoken of, the elder: 6 vlos 6 πρισβ- (Ael.
V. h. 9, 42), Lk. .xv. 25. b. univ. advanced in life,
an elder, a senior : opp. to νιανίσκοι, Acts ii. 1 7 ; opp. to
ν€ώτ(ρος, 1 Tim. v. 1 sq., (Gen. xviii. 11 sq.; Sap. viii. 10;
Sir. vi. 34 (33) ; vii. 14 ; 2 Mace. viii. 30). oi πρισβύ-
Tfpoi, [A.V. //ic elders'], forefathers, Heb. xi. 2; παράδοσις
(q. V.) των πρισβ; received from the fathers, Mt. xv. 2 ;
i\Ik. vii. 3, 5. 2. a term of rank or office; as such
borne by, a. among the Jews, o. members of
the great council or Sanhedrin (because in early times
the rulers of the people, judges, etc., were selected from
the elderly men) : Mt. xvi. 21 ; xxvi. 47, 57, 59 Rec. ;
xxvii. 3, 12, 20, 41; xxviii. 12; Mk. viii. 31; xi. 27; .xiv.
43, 53 ; XV. 1 ; Lk. ix. 22 ; xx. 1 ; xxii. 52 ; Jn. viii. 9 ; Acts
iv. 5, 23 ; vi. 12 ; xxiii. 14 ; xxiv. 1 ; with the addition of
Ίτρβσβύτης
53t>
irpo
ToO Ίσραηλ, Acts iv. 8 Κ (ί ; uf των 'lovSaia/v, Acts xxv.
lo ; of ToO \aov, Mt. xxi. 23 ; xxvi. 3 ; xxvii. 1. β.
tliose who in the separate cities managed public affairs
and administered justice : Lk. vii. 3. [Cf. BB. DD. s. v.
Elder.] b. among Christians, those who presided
over the assemblies (or churches) : Acts xi. 30 ; xiv. 23 ; χ v.
2, 4, 6, 22 sq. ; xvi. 4 ; xxi. 18 ; 1 Tim. v. 1 7, 1 9 ; Tit. i. 5 ;
2 Jn. 1 ; 3 Jn. 1 ; 1 Pet. v. 1,5; witli Trjs (κκλησίας added,
Acts XX. 17 ; Jas. v. 14. That they did nut diller at all
from the (ΐττίσ-κοποι) bishops or overseers (as is
acknowledged also by Jerome on Tit. i. 5 [cf. Bp. Lghlft.
Com. (in riiil. pp. 98 sij. 229 sq.]) is evident from the
fact that the two words are used indiseriminately. Acts
XX. 17, 2S ; Tit. i. 5, 7, and that the duty of presbyters
is described by the terms (πισκοπΛν, 1 Pet. v. 1 S(j., and
ίπισκοπί), Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 1 ; accordingly only-
two ecclesiastical officers, oi ί'πίσκοποι and oi διάκονοι,
are distinguished in Phil. i. 1 ; 1 Tim. iii. 1, 8. The title
ίπίσκοποί denotes the function, πρισβύτιμοι the d i g-
n i ty ; the former was borrowed from Greek institutions,
the latter from the Jewish; cf. [Bp. Lghtft., as above,
pp. 95 sqq. 191 sq(|.] ; Ritschl, Die Entstehung der altka-
thol. Kirche, ed. 2 p. 350 sqq. ; Hase, Protest. Polemik,
ed. 4 p. 98 sqq. ; [Hatch, Bampton Lects. for 1 880, Lect.
iii. and Harnack's Analecten appended to the Germ,
trans, of the same (p. 229sq(].) ; also Harnack's note on
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 3 (cf. reff. at 44 init.), and Hatch in
Diet, of Christ. Antiq. s. v. Priest. Cf. «ττίσκοπ-οί.]. c.
the twentij-four members of the heavenlij Saiihedrin or
court, seated on thrones around the throne of (Jod : Rev.
iv. 4, 10; V. 5,6,8, 11, 14; vii. 11,1:!; xi. Hi; xiv. 3; xix. 4.*
ιτρίσ-βύτηϊ, -ου, ό, (πρίσβυ! [see πp(σ,ifΰω^), an old man,
an aged man : Lk. i. 18 ; Tit. ii. 2 ; Philem. 9 [here many
(cf. R. V. mrg.) regard the word as a substitute for
νρισβ^ντής, ambassador ; see Bp. Lghtfi. Cora, ad loc. ;
WH. App. ad loc. ; and add to the exx. of the inter-
change rrpf σβ ί υ Tepoit in Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus,
App., Inscr. fr. the Great Theatre p. 24 (col. 5, 1. 72)].
(Aescliyl., Eur., Xen., Plat., al. ; Sept. for Jpf.)*
ΐΓρ«σ•βΰτΐ9, -tSot, ή, (fern, oi πρισβύτης), an aged woman :
Tit. ii. 3. (Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., Diod., Plut., Hdian. 5,
3, 6 (:ied. Bekk.).)•
ιτρηνή?, -€Γ, [allied w. προ; Vanicek p. 484], Lat. pro-
nus, headlong: Acts i. 18. (Sap. iv. 19; 3 Mace. v. 43;
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, but in Attic more com.
νρανηί, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 431 ; [W. 22].) *
πρίζω {οτπρϊω, q. v.) : 1 aor. pass. fVptVeTji/ : to saw, lo
cut in two with a saw : Heb. xi. 3 7. To be ' sawn asunder '
was a kind of punishment among the Hebrews (2 S. xii.
31; 1 Chr. xx. 3), which according to ancient tradition
was inflicted on the prophet Isaiah ; cf. Win. RWB. s. v.
Sage; Roskoff in Schenkel v. 135; [B. D. s. v. Saw].
(Am. i. 3; Sus. 59 ; Plat. Theag. p. 124 b. and freq. in
later writ.) *
irptv, [(acc. to Curtius §380 compar. προ- tov, προ -iv,
πριν)], as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down 1. an adv.
previously, formerly, [cf. παΚαι, 1 ] : 3 Mace. v. 28 ; vi. 4, 31 ;
but never so in the N. T. 2. with the force of a
conjunction, before, before that: with an acc. and aor.
infin. of things past [cf. W. § 44, 6 fin. ; B. § 142, 3] ; πρϊ»
Άβρααμ yfviadai, before Abraham existed, came into be-
ing, Jn. viii. 58 ; also πρΊν ή (cf. Meyer on Mt. i. 18), Mt.
1.18; [Actsvii.2]; with an aor. inf. having the force of
the Lat. fut. perf., of things future [cf. W. 332 (31:)]:
ttp'iv αΚίκτορα φωνησαι, before the cock shall have crowed,
Mt. xxvi. 34, 75 ; Mk. xiv. 72; Lk. xxii. 61; add.Jn. iv.
49 ; xiv. 29 ; also πρ\ν ij, Mk. xiv. 30 ; Acts ii. 20 (where
L Τ Tr WII txt. om. η) ; πρΙν ή•, preceded by a negative
sentence [B. § 139, 35], with the aor. subjunc. having
the force of a fut. pf. in Lat. [B. 231 (199)], Lk. ii. 26
[RG L Τ Tr uirg., but WII br. ^], and R G in Lk. xxii.
34 ; 7rp\v η, foil, by the optat. of a thing as entertained
in thought. Acts xxv. 16 [W. 297 (279) ; B. 230 (198)].
Cf. Mattliiae § 522, 2 p. 1201 sq. ; Bllm. (iram. § 139, 41 ;
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 726 sqij. ; W. [and B.] as above.*
Upla-Ko,, ή, [acc. -av], Prisca (a Lat. name [lit. 'an-
cient']), a Christian woman, wife of Aquila (concern-
ing whom see Άκίλαί) : Ro. xvi. 3 G L Τ Tr WH ; 1 Co.
xvi. 19 Led. ster. TTrWH; 2Tim.iv.l9. She is also
called by the dimin. name Πρισκιλλα [better (with all
edd.) Πρισκιλλα, see Chandler § 1J2; Etymol. Magn.
19, 50 S(j.] (cf. Livia, Livilla; Drusa, Drusilla ; Qiiinta,
Quintilla; Secunda, Secundilla) : Acts xviii. 2, 18, 26 ;
besides, Ro. xvi. 3 Rec. ; 1 Co. xvi. 19 KGL.*
Πρίο-κιλλα, see the preceding word.
irpCu, see πρίζω. [CoMP. : δια- πρίω.^
πρό, a prep. foil, by the Genitive, (Lat. pro), [fr. Horn,
down], Sept. chiefly for 'iD^, before ; used a. of
Place: ττρο τώι/ θυρών, της θύρας, etc.. Acts v. 23 R(; ;
xii. 6, 14 ; xiv. 13 ; Jas. v. 9 ; by a Hebraism, προ προσώ-
που with the gen. of a pers. before (the face of) one (who
isfollowing)[B. 319 (274)]: Mt..xi. 10; Rlk. i. 2 ; Lk. i.
76 ; vii. 27; ix. 52 ; x. 1, (.Mai. iii. 1 ; Zech. xiv. 20; Deut.
iii. 18). b. of Time: προ τούτων τών ημ€ρών. Acts
V. 36 ; xxi. 38 ; [προ τοϊι πάσχα, .In. xi. 55] ; acc. to a later
Greek idiom, προ (ξ ήμιρών τον πάσχα, prop, before six
days reckoning from the Passover, which is equiv. to ίξ
ημίραί προ τοϋ πάσχα, on the sixth day before the Pas-
sover, Jn. xii. 1 (προ δύο (τών του σ€ΐσμον, Am. i. 1 ; Trpi
μιαϊ ημίρας της Μαρ^οχαίκης ημίρας, 2 Alacc. XV. 36 ; exx.
fr. prof. writ, are cited by W. 55 7 (518) ; [cf. B. § 131,
11]; fr. eccles. writ, by Hilgenfeld, Die Evangelien etc.
pp. 298, 302; also his Paschastreit der alten Kirche, p.221
sq. ; [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. ττρό, 1 and 2]) ; [προ rrjs ίορτης,
Jn. xiii. 1] ; rrpd καιροϋ, Mt. viii. 29 ; 1 Co. iv. 5; των αιώ-
νων, 1 Co. ii. 7 ; παντός του αΙώνος, Jude 25 L Τ Tr \\'H ;
(τών 8(κατισσ. [fourteen years a//o], 2 Co. xii. 2 ; add, 2
Tim. i. 9 ; iv. 21 ; Tit. i. 2 ; τοϋ αρίστου, Lk. xi. 38; κατα-
κλυσμοί, Mt. xxiv. 38; προ της μιταθίσίως, Heb. xi. 5;
προ καταβολής κόσμου, Jn. xvii. 24 ; Ejih. i. 4 ; 1 Pet. i.
20 ; προ πάντων, [)rior to all created things. Col. i. 1 7 ;
[προ ΓοΰΓων πάντων (Rec. άπάντ.), Lk. xxi. 12]; by a
Hebraism, προ προσώπου with the gen. of a thing is used
of time for the simple προ (W. §65, 4 b.; [B.319 (274)]),
Acts xiii. 24 [(lit. before the face of his entering in)],
πρό Λνΐΐΐι the gen. of a pers. : Jn. v. 7 ; x. 8 [not Tdf.] ;
irpowyw
537
Ίτρόβατον
\\o. xvi. 7 ; οί πρό tivos, those that existed before one,
Mt. V. 12 ; with a pred. nom. added, Gal. i. 17. πρό with
the gen. of an infin. that has the art., Lat. ante quam
{before, before that) foil, by a fin. verb [B. § 140, 11 ; W.
329 (309)] : Mt. vi. 8 ; Lk. ii. 21 ; xxii. 15 ; Jn. i. 48 (49) ;
xiii. 19 ; xvii. 5 ; Acts xxiii. 15 ; Gal. ii. 12 ; iii. 23. c.
of superiority or pre-eminence [W. 372 (349)] :
npo ηάντων, above all things. Jas. v. 1 2 ; 1 Pet. iv. 8. d.
In Composition, πρό marks o. place: προαΰ-
\iov ; motion forward ( Lat. porro), προβαίνω, πρυβάλΧω,
etc. ; before another who follows, in udeance, προάγω, πρό-
hpopot, προπίμπω, προτρίχω, etc. ; in public view, openly,
npoSq\os, πράκ^ίμαι. β. time : before this, previously,
προαραρτάνω ; in reference to the time of an occurrence,
beforehanil, in advance, προβλίπω, πμογίνώσκω, προθι-
σμιοί, προορίζω, etc. γ. superiority or preference :
προαψίομαι. [Cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 6J8.] *
ιτρο-άγιβ ; impf. προηγορ ; fut. προάξω ; 2 aor. προήγαγαν;
fr. Hdt. down ; 1. trans, to lead fonrard, lead
forth : τινά, one from a place in which he has lain hidden
from view, — as from prison, !ξω. Acts xvi. 30 ; [from
Jason's house. Acts .xvii. 5 L Τ Tr WH] ; in a forensic
sense, to bring one forth to trial. Acts xii. 6 [WH t.xt.
προσαγαγ^ΊνΙ ; with addition of (πι and the gen. of the
pers. about to examine into the case, before whom the
hearing is to be had, Acts xxv. 2(5 (ei's την δίκην, Joseph,
b. j. 1, 27, 2 ; (Is ίκκΚησίαν roit «V αίτια yfvopivovi, antt.
16, 11, 7). 2. intrans. (see άγω, 4 [and cf. πρό, d.
a.]), a. to go before : Lk. xviii. 39 [L mrg. παράγ-Ί ;
opp. to άκολουθίω, Mt. xxi. 9 R G ; Mk. xi. 9 ; foil, by iir
with an ace. of place, Mt. xiv. 22 ; Mk. vi. 4^> ; els κρίσιν,
1 Tim. V. 24 (on which pass, see ΐπακο\ονβίω) ; ptcp.
προάγων, preceding i. e. prior in point of time, previous,
1 Tim. i. 18 [see προφητίία fin., and s. v. cVt, C. I. 2 g. γ.
yy. (but R. V. mrg. led the way to, etc.)] ; Ileb. vii. 18.
τινά, to precede one, Mt. ii. 9; Mk. x. 32; and LTTr
WH in Mt. xxi. 9, [cf. Joseph, b. j. 6, 1, 6 ; B. § 130, 4] ;
foil, by fls with an ace. of place, Mt. xxvi. 32 ; xxviii. 7 ;
Mk. xiv. 28 ; xvi. 7 ; τίνα fls την βασί\(ίαν τοϋ θ(ον, to
take precedence of one in entering into the kingdom of
God, Mt. xxi. 31 [cf. B. 204 (177)]. b. to proceed,
go forward : in a bad sense, to go further than is right or
proper, i.q. μη piveiv iv τη 8ι8αχη, to transgress the limits
of true doctrine [cf. our coUoq. ' advanced ' (views, etc.)
in a disparaging sense], 2 Jn. 9 L Τ Tr WH [but R. V.
mrg. taketh the lead'].*
προ-αιρεω, -ώ : by prose writ. fr. Hdt. [rather, fr. Thuc.
8, 90 fin. (in poetry, fr. Arstph. Thesm. 419)] down, to
bring forward, bring forth from one's stores; IMid. to bring
forth for one's self, to choose for one's self before another
i. e. to prefer; to purpose : Kadiis προαφ(ίτηι (L Τ Tr WH
the pf. προήρηται) rfj καρδία, 2 Co. ix. 7.*
ττρο-αιτιάομαι, -ωμαι ■ 1 aor. 1 pers. plur. προητιασάμ(θα ;
to bring a charge against previously (i. e. in what has pre-
viously been said) : τινά foil, by an infin. indicating the
charge, Ro. iii. 9 ; where the prefix προ- makes refer-
ence to i. 18-31 ; ii. 1-5, 17-29. Not found elsewhere.*
Vpo-OKOVM: 1 »or. 2 pers. plur. προηκονσατ(; to hear
before : την ίΧπϋα, the hoped for salvation, before its
realization. Col. i. 5 [where cf . Bp. Lghtf t.]. (Hdt., Xen.,
Plat., Dem., al.) •
Ίτρο-αμαρτάνω : pf. ptcp. προημαρτηκω! ; to sin before :
oi πμoημapΓηκότ€s, of those who before receiving baptism
had been guilty of the vices especially common among
the Gentiles, 2 Co. xii. 21 ; xiii. 2 ; in this same sense also
in Justin Martyr, apol. i. c. 61 ; Clem. Al. strom. 4, 12;
cf. Lucke, Conjectanea Exeget. I. ((iotting. 1837) p. 14
sqq. [but on the ref. of the προ- see Meyer on 2 Co. 11. cc.
(R. V. heretofore)']. (Hdian. 3, 14, 18 [14 ed. Bekk.] ;
eccl. writ.) *
ττρο-ανλιον, -ου. τό, (πρό and αυΚη), fore-court, porch :
Mk.xiv. 68 [(cf. Pollux 1, 8, 77 and see ανΚή, 2)].•
Ίτρο-βαίνω : pf. ptcp. προβ(βηκά5 ; 2 aor. ptcp. πρόβα! ;
fr. Horn, down ; to go forwards, go on, [cf. πρό, d. a.] :
prop, on foot, lit. iv. 21 ; Mk. i. 19 ; trop. iv rats ημίρακ
πμοβίβηκώί, advanced in age, Lk. i. 7, 18; ii. 36, (see
ήμίρα, fin. ; την ηΧικίαν, 2 Mace. iv. 40 ; vi. 18 ; Hdian. 2,
7, 7 [5 ed. Bekk.]; τη ηλικία, Lys. p. 169, 37; [Diod. 12,
18] ; Ta'is ήλικι'αΐΓ. Diud. 13, κίΐ ; [cf. L. and S. s. v. I. 2]).•
Ίτρο-βάλλω ; 2 aor. πρθ(βαΚον ; fr. Hom. down ; to throw
forward [cf. πρό, d. a.] ; of trees, to shoot forth, put out,
sc. leaves; to germinate, [cf. B. § 130, 4; W. 593 (552)]
(with καρπόν added, Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 19 ; Epict. 1, 15,
7) : Lk. xxi. 30 ; to push forward, thrust forward, put
forward : τινά. Acts xix. 33.*
τ-ροβατικόϊ, -ή, -όν, (πρόβατον), pertaining Ιο sheep: f
προβατική, sc. τήλη (which is added in Neh. iii. 1, 32 ; xii.
39, for |ΚΪΓΙ "il'Ei), the sheep-gate, Jn. v. 2 [(W. 592
(551) ; B. § 123, 8) ; but some (as Meyer, Weiss, Milligan
and Moulton, cf. Treg. mrg. and see Tdf.'s note ad loc.)
would connect προβ. with the immediately following
κοΚνμβήθρα (pointed as a dat.) ; see Tdf. u. s. ; WH. App.
ad loc. On the sup[)0sed locality see B. D. s. v. Sheep
Gate (Sheep-Market)].*
Ίτροβάτιον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of the foil, word), a little
sheep: Jn. xxi. [16 Τ Tr mrg. ΛΑΊΙ t.xt.], 17 Τ Tr WH
txt. (Hippocr., Arstph., Plat.) *
ιτρό-βατον, -ου, τό, (f r. προβαίνω, prop. ' that which walks
forward'), fr. Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for [NV, then for
Πί;', sometimes for ^23 and 2ΰ2 (a lamb), prop, any
four-footed, tame animal accustomed to graze, small cattle
(opp. to large cattle, horses, etc.), most com. a sheep or
a goat ; but esp. a sheep, and so always in the N. T. : Mt.
vii. 15; X. 16; xii. 11 sq.; Mk. vi. 34 ; Lk. xv. 4, 6 ; Jn. iL
14 sq. ; X. 1-4, 11 sq. ; Acts viii. 32 (fr. Is. liii. 7) ; 1 Pet.
ii. 25 ; Rev. xviii. 1 3 ; πρόβατα σφαγή5, sheep destined
for the slaughter, Ro. viii. 36. metaph. πρόβατα, sheep,
is used of the followers of any master : Mt. xxvi. 31 and
Mk. xiv. 27, (fr. Zech. xiii. 7) ; of mankind, who as need-
inf salvation obey the injunctions of him who provides
it and leads them to it ; so of the followers of Christ :
Jn. X. 7 sq. 15 sq. 26 sq. ; xxi. 16 [R G LTrtxt. WH mrg.],
17 [R G L WH mrg.] ; Heb. xiii. 20 ; τά πρόβατα άπο-
λωλότα (see άποΚΧνμι, fin.), Mt. χ. 6 ; xv. 24 ; τά πράβ.
in distinction from τα ipίφιa, are good men as distin-
guished fr. bad, Mt. xxv. 33.
ττρο^ιβάζω
538
ττροεναρ^^ομα•.
προ-βιβάζω : 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. πρηίβίβασαν ; 1 aor.
pass. plcj). ίΐΊΐι.πμο^ί/3ασί«σα; 1. prup. /ο cau^e to
go forward, to lead forward, to hrintf forward, drag for-
ward : Acts xix. 3;i II G [(fr. Soph, tlown)]. 2.
metaph. i. q. πμοτρίπω, to incite, instigate, urge forward,
set on; to induce hy persuasion: Mt. xiv. 8 («is rt, Xen.
mem. 1, 5, 1 ; Plat. Prot. p. 328 b. ; [in Deut. vi. 7 Sept.
with an accus. of the thing (and of the pers.) i. q. to
teach]).'
•π-ρο-βλί'ίΓω : to foresee (Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 13; Dion.
II;ii. antt. ll.-iO); 1 aor. raid. \Λ<:[ί. προβλ(ψάμ(νο!; to
prnvide: τι wepi rivos, Heb. xi. 40 [W. § 3i<, ϋ ; Β. 194
(167)].•
προ-γΐνομαι : pf. ptcp. npoyeyovati ; to become or arise
before, happen before, (so fr. lldt. down [in Horn. (II. 18,
525) to come forward into view]) : προγ(γονάτα αμαρτή-
ματα, sins previously committed, Ro. iii. 25.•
ττρο-γινώσ-κω ; 2 aor. 3 pers. sing, προί-γνω ; pf. pass,
ptcp. προΐγνωσμΐνης ; to hare knoirledqe tf lif'forehand ;
,0 foreknow : sc. ταϋτα, 2 Pet. iii. 1 7, cf. 14, IG ; Ttfci, Acts
xxvi. 5 ; oif προίγνω, whom he ((!od) foreknew, sc. that
they would love him, or (with reference to what follows)
whom he foreknew to be fit to be conformed to the like-
ness of his Son, Ro. viii. 29 (των ds αίτον [Χριστον]
πιστ(ύ(ΐν ■ηρο(•/νωσμ(νων, Justin Μ. dial. c. Tr. c. 42;
ιτρο-γινωσκα [ό ^eoff] rtiO? 4κ μΐτανοΐας σωθήσ€(Γθαι /χελ-
λοι/τα£, id. apol. i. 28) ; of προίγνω, whose character he
clearly saw beforehand, Ro. xi. [1 Lchm. in br.], 2,
(against those who in the preceding passages fr. Ro.
explain προγινώσκΕΐΐ' as meaning to predestinate, cf.
Meyer, I'hilippi, Van Hengel) ; προ(•γνωσμίνου, sc. ίπό
ToO β(οϋ (foreknown by God, although not yet ' made
manifest' to men), 1 Pet. i. 20. (Sap. vi. 14; viii. 8;
xvili. 6 ; Eur., Xen., Plat., Hdian., Philostr., al.) *
•ΐΓρό-γνωσ -is, -ews, ή, (προγινώσκω) ; 1. foreknowl-
edge : .Itiilith ix. 6 ; xi. 1 !), (Plut., Lcian., Hdian.). 2.
foretlioughl, pre-arrangement, (see προβΧίπω) : 1 Pet. i. 2;
Acts ii. 23, [but cf. προγινώσκω, and see Mey. on Acts I.e.].•
ΐΓρό-•γονο5, -ου, 0, (npoytvopat), liorn before, older: Horn.
Od. 9, 221 ; plur. anceslorn, Lat. mnjores, (often so by
Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down) : atro προγόνων, in tlie spirit
and after the manner received from (ray) forefathers
[cf. από, II. 2 d. aa. p. 59' bot.], 2 Tim. i. 3 ; used of a
mother, grandparents, and (if such survive) great-grand-
parents, 1 Tim. V. 4 [Λ. V. parents'] (of surviving ances-
tors also in Pl.ato, legg. 11 p. 932 init.).*
ιτρο-γράφω ; 1 aor. npneypa\jfa; 2 aor. pass, προεγράφην;
pf. pass. ptcp. προγ(γραμμ(ΐ/ος: 1. to write before
(of time) : Ro. xv. 4" R G L txt. Τ Tr Wll, 4'• Rec. ; Eph.
111. 3 ; oi πάλαι προγ€γραμμ. {Ις τούτο ro κρίμα, of old set
forth or designated beforehand (in the Scriptures of the
O. T. and the prophecies of Enoch) unto this condemna-
tion, Jude 4. 2. to depict or porlrag openh/ [d. πρό,
d- a. J : οις κατ οφθα\μους ^Ιησονς Χριστοζ ττρο^γράφη iv
νμ'ιν [but iv νμ. is dropped by G L Τ Tr WH] Ιστανρωμ^
νος, before whose eyes was portrayed the picture of Jesus
Christ crucified (the attentive contemplation of which
picture ought to have been a preventive against that
bewitchment), i.e. who were taught most defiiiilely and
plainly concerning the meritorious ellicacy of the deatli
of Christ, Gal. iii. 1. Since the simple γράφαν is often
used of painters, and πρόγραφαν certainly signilies
al.so to write before the eyes of all who can read (Pint,
uemetr. 46 fin. προγράφ(ΐ nr αΰτοΰ πρϋ Ttjs σκηνής τ/}»
ToO ΟίδιποδοΓ ap}^i]v), I see no reason why πρόγραφαν
may not mean to depict {paint, porlrai/) before the eyes;
[Κ.ν. openly set forth]. Cf. Ilofmann ad loc. [I'Orrar,
St. Paul, ch. xxiv., vol. i. 470 note; al. adhere to the
meaning to placard, write up publicly, see Bp. Lghtft. ad
loc. ; al. al. ; see .Meyer].*
■πρό-δηλοϊ, -ov, (ττρό [d. a. and] δ^λοί), openly evident,
known to all, manifest : 1 Tim. v. 24 sq. ; neut. foil, by ότι,
Heb. vii. 14. [(From Soph, and Hdt. down.)] *
προ-δίδωμι : 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. προ(δωκ(ν; 1. to
give before, give first : Ro. xi. 35 (Xen., Polyb., Aris-
tot.). 2. to betray: Aeschyl., Hdt., Eur., Plat., al. ;
την πατρίδα. 4 Mace. iv. 1.*
irpo-SoiT)s, -ou, 0, (προδίδω/χι, 2), a betrayer, traitor: Lk.
vi. 16; Acts vii. .52; 2 Tim. iii. 4. (From [Aeschyl.], Hdt.
down; 2 Mace. v. 15; 3 Mace. iii. 24.)•
irpo-Spop.os, -ou, 0, ή, (προτρϊχω, προΒραμΰν), a forerun-
ner (esp. one who is sent before to take observations or
act as spy, a scout, a light-armed soldier; Aeschyl., Hdt.,
Thuc, Polyb., Diod., Plut., al. ; cf. Sap. xii. 8) ; one who
comes in advance to a place whither the rest are to follow:
Heb. vi. 20.•
προ-<ΐ8ον, [fr. Hom. down], 2 aor. of the verb προοράω,
to foresee: Acts ii. 31 [(here WH προιδώ»» without diaer-
esis; cf. I, t fin.)] ; Gal. iii. 8.*
irpo-ilwov [2 aor. act. fr. an unused pres. (see tinov,
init.)], 1 pers. plur. πpofίπoμ(V (1 Th. iv. 6 Grsb.), rpo-
(ίπαμ(ν (ibid. RLTTrWH [see IF//. App. p. 164]);
ρΐ-προίίρηκα; pf. pass, προίίρημαι (see «ποκ, p. 181* top) ;
fr. Horn, [(by tmesis) ; Hdt. and Plat.] down; to say be-
fore ; i. e. a. to say in what precedes, to say above :
foil, by OTi, 2 Co. vii. 3 ; foil, by direct disc, [Heb. iv. 7
L Τ Tr WH txt.] ; X. 15 [Rec.]. b. to say before
i. e. heretofore, formerly : foil, by ότι, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Gal.
V. 21 ; foil, by direct disc., Gal. i. 9; [Heb. iv. 7 WH
mrg.] ; καθώς προ('ίπαμ(ν ΰμΐν, 1 Th. iv. 6 ; [in the pas-
sages under this head (exe. f!al. i. 9) some would give
προ- the sense of openly, plainly, (cf. R. V. mrg.)]. c.
to say beforehand i.e. before the event; so used in ref. to
prophecies : τι, Acts i. 1 6 ; τα ρήματα τα προ€ΐρημίνα νπο
Tivos, Jude 1 7 ; 2 Pet. iii. 2 ; προΐίρηκα νμ'ιν πάντα, Mk.
xiii. 23 ; sc. αϊτό, Mt. xxiv. 25 ; foil, by direct discourse,
Ro. ix. 29.•
προ-€Ϊρηκα, see προΐίπον.
■προ-ίλτΓίζω : pf. ptcp. ace. plur. προι^λπικόταί ; to hope
before : tv τινι, to repose hope in a person or thing before
the event confirms it, Eph. i. 1 2. (Posidipp. ap. Athen.
9 p. 377 c., Dexipp., Greg. Nyss.) *
Trpo-cv-apxo^ai : 1 iior. προ€νηρζάμην; to make a begin-
ning before : 2 Co. viii. 6 ; τι, ib. 10 [here al. render 'to
make a beginning before others,' ' to be the first to make a
beginning,' fcf. Meyer ad loc.)]. Not found elsewhere.'
77 ^οετταγγελλω
539
ττροιστημι
'ΓΓρο-€'ΐΓ-αγγ€λλω : 1 aor. mid. 7Γρο€7Γηγγ€ΐ\άμ.ην ; pf. ptcp.
τρυ(πηγγ(\μ(νος ; to announce he/ore (DioCass.); mid.
to promise before : τί, Ro. i. 2, and L Τ Tr WH in 2 Co. ix.
5, ([Arr. 6, 27, 1] ; Dio Cass. 42, 32 ; 46, 40).•
ττρο-ί'ρχομαι. : impf. προημχήμην; flit, προίλίίσομαι ; 2
aor. προήλ^οκ; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to go forward, yo
on : μικράν, a little, Mt. xxvi. 39 [here Τ Tr WH mrg.
προσιλθών (q. v. in a.)] ; Mk. xiv. 35 [Tr WH mrg. προσ-
(λθ.\ ; w. an ace. of tlie way, Acts xii. 10 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4,
18 ; Plato, rep. 1 p. 328 e. ; 10 p. 616 b.). 2. to go
he/ore; i.e. a. to (/o &i?/ore,/)i-ecerfe, (locally; Germ.
vorangehen) : ΐνώπιόν τίνος, Lk. i. 17 [^{(μπροσθ^ν tivos.
Gen. xxxiii. 3), WH mrg. νροσΐρχ. q. v. in a.] ; tivos, to
precede one, Lk. xxii. 47 Rec. [(Judith ii. 19)]; τινά,
ibid. G I., Τ Tr WH (not soconstrued in prof. writ. ; cf. B.
144 (126); Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 70; [W. § 52,
4, 13]; but in Lat. we find anlecedere, anteire, praeire,
aliquem, and in Grk. writ, ■προθΰ.ν τίνα; see προηγίομαι) ;
to outgo, outstrip, {hat. praecurrere, antecertere aliquem;
for which the Greeks say φθΰνΐΐν τινά), Mk. vi. 33. b.
to go before, i.e. (set out) in advance of another (Germ.
vorauf!gehen) : Acts xx. 5 [Tr WH txt. προσ(\6.] ; eis
[L Tr προς] ίμάϊ, unto (as far as to) ijou, 2 Co. ix. 5 ; iVi
TO πλοίο•/, to the ship, Acts x.x. 13 [Tr WH mrg. προσ-
eXAiiTff].•
'η:ρο-€τοιμάζω : 1 aor. προητοΐμασα ; to prepare before, to
make ready beforehand : a προητοίμασιν tU 8όξαν, i. e. for
whom he appointed glory beforehand (i. e. from eter-
nity), and accordingly rendered them fit to receive it,
Ro. i.x. 23 ; to prepare beforehand in mind and purpose,
i. e. to decree, Eph. ii. 10, where οΐς stands by attraction
for 5 [cf. W. 149 (141) ; B. § 143, 8]. (Is. x.xviii. 24 ;
Sap. ix. 8 ; Hdt., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Geop., al.) *
ΐΓρο-ί«αγγ€λίζομοι : 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. ιτρο(υηγγ(\ίσατο;
to announce or promise glad tidings heforeliand (viz. be-
fore the event by which the promise is made good) : Gal.
iii. 8. (Philo de opif . mund. § 9 ; mutat. nom. § 29 ; By-
zant. writ.) *
ιτρο-ί'χω [(fr. Hom. down)] : pres. mid. 1 pers. plur. irpo-
ίχόμίθα ; to have before or in advance of another, to have
pre-eminence over another, to excel, to surpass ; often so
in prof. auth. fr. [Soph, and] Hdt. down ; mid. to excel to
one's advantage (cf. KUhner § 375, 1) ; to surpass in ex-
cellences which can be passed to one's credit : Ro. iii. 9 ;
it does not make against this force of the middle in the
present passage that the use is nowhere else met with,
nor is there any objection to an interpretation which has
commended itself to a great many and which the con-
text plainly demands. [But on this difScult word see
esp. Jas. Morison, Crit. Expos, of the Third Chap, of
Rom. p. 93 sqq. ; Gifford in the ' Speaker's Com.' p. 96;
W. § 38, 6 ; § 39 fin., cf. p. 554 (516).] *
•π•ρ<Μΐ|•γ€Όμαι., -οϋμαι; to go before and show the way, to
go before and lead, to go before as leader, (Hdt. 2, 48 ;
often in Xen.; besides in Arstph., Polyb., Plut., Sept.,
al.) : TJi τιμτι άΧΚηΚου! προηγηνμα'οι, one going before
another as an example of (Inference [A. V. in honor pre-
ferring one another (on the dat. cf. W. § 31, 6 a.)], Ro.
xii. 10. The Grk. writ, connect this verb now with the
dat. (Arstph. Plut. 1195; Polyb. 6, 53, 8; etc.), now with
the gen. (Diod. 1, 87) ; see ττροίρχομαι, 2 a.*
Ίτρό-θίσ-ΐϊ, -€Mf, ή, (προτίθημι) ; 1. the setting forth
of a thing, placing of it in view, (Plat., Dem., Plut.) ; ol
άρτοι τηί τΓροθίσ(ωί (Vulg. panes propositionis), the shoto-
bread, Sept. for D'JSn DPlS (Ex. xxxv. 13; xxxix. 18
(xxxviii. 36) ; 1 K. vii. 48 (34)), and no-ii'Sn unh (1
Chr. ix. 32 ; xxiii. 29) ; twelve loaves of wheaten bread,
corresponding to the number of the tribes of Israel,
which loaves were offered to God every Sabbath, and,
separated into two rows, lay for seven days upon a
table placed in the sanctuary or anterior portion of
the tabernacle, and afterwards of the temple (cf. Winer,
RWB. s. v. Schaubrode ; Roskojf in Schenkel v. p. 213
sq.; \_Edersheim, The Temple, ch. ix. p. 152 sqq. ; BB.
DD.]) : Mt. xii. 4 ; Mk. ii. 26 ; Lk. vi. 4, (οι άρτοι τοΰ προσ-
ώπου, sc. ΰ(οΰ, Neh. χ. 33 ; άρτοι ίΐ/ώπιοι, Ex. χχν. 29) ;
ή πρόθ(σις των άρτων, (the rite of) the setting forth of
the loaves, Heb. ix. 2. 2. a purpose (2 Mace. iii. 8;
[Aristot.], Polyb., Diod., Plut.) : Acts xxvii. 13; Ro. viii.
28; ix. 11 ; Eph. i. 11; iii. 11 ; 2 Tim. i. 9; iii. 10; τη
προθίσει rijt καρδίας, with purpose of heart, Acts xi.
23.*
προ-θεσ-μιοΐ, -α, -ov, {προ [q. v. in d. ;3.] and θεσμός fi.xed,
appointed), set beforehand, appointed or determined be-
forehand, pre-arranged, (Lcian. Nigr. 27) ; ή προθεσμία,
sc. ήμίρα, the day previously appointed ; univ. the pre-ap-
pointed time : Gal. iv. 2. (Lys., Plat., Dem., Aeschin.,
Diod., Philo — cf. Siegfried, Philo p. 113, Joseph., Plut.,
al. ; eccles. writ. ; cf. Kypke and HiUjenfeld on Gal.
1. c.) *
ιτροθιιμία, -ar, ή, {πρόθυμος), fr. Hom. down ; 1.
zeal, spirit, eagerness ; 2. inclination ; readiness of
mind : so Acts xvii. 11 ; 2 Co. viii. 11 sq. 19 ; ix. 2.*
ττρόθυμοϊ, -ov, {πρό and θυμός), fr. [Soph, and] Hdt.
down, ready, viilling: Mt. xxvi. 41 ; Mk. xiv. 38; neut. το
πρόθυμον, i. q. ή προθυμία : Ro. i. 15, as in Thuc. 3, 82 ;
Plat. legg. 9 p. 859 b.; Eur. Med. vs. 178; Joseph, antt.
4, 8, 13; Hdian. 8, 3, 15 [6 ed. Bekk.] (on which cf.
Irmisch) ; 3 Mace. v. 26.*
τροθνμωϊ, adv., fr. Hdt. and Aeschyl. down, willingly,
with alacrity : 1 Pet. v. 2.*
ιτρόΐμο;, see πρώιμος.
ιτρο-Ισ-τημι : 2 aor. inf. προστηναι ', pf . ptcp. προίστώς ;
pres. mid. προισταμαι ; fr. Hom. II. 4, 156 down ; 1.
in the trans, tenses to set or place before ; to set over. 2.
in the pf. plpf. and 2 aor. act. and in the pres. and impf.
mid. a. to be over, to superintend, preside over, [A.V.
ridel, (^° ί""• Hdt. down) : 1 Tim. v. 17; with a gen. of
the pers. or thing over which one presides, 1 Th. v. 1 2 ;
1 Tim. iii. 4 sq. 12. b. to be a protector or guar-
dian ; to give aid, (Eur., Dem., Aeschin., Polyb.) : Ro.
xii. 8 [(al. with A.V. to rule ; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. ; Stuart,
Com. excurs. xii.)]. c. to care for, give attention to .
w. a gen. of the thing, καΧών ίργων. Tit. iii. 8, 14 ; for
exx. fr. prof. writ, see Kypke and Losner; [some (cf. R.V.
mrg.3 would render these two exx. profess honest occu
τροκαΧΐω
540
Ίτροοραω
potions (see tf>yov. ! ) ; lull cf. ίμγον. 3 p. 248"• mid. and
Field, Otiura Norv. pars iii. ail 1. c.].*
προ-καλ€'ω, -ω : pres. mid. ptcp. ιτροκαΧοΰμτνο^ ', to call
forth [cf. προ, d. a.] ; Mid. to call forth to one's self, esp.
to challenge to a combat or contest with one ; often so fr.
Horn, down ; hence to provoke, to irritate : (ial. v. 26 [(«t
ωμότητα κ. όργήν, Ildian. 7, 1, 11, 4 ed. Bekk.)].*
ιτρο-κατ-αγγίλλω : 1 aor. πμοκατηγγίΐλα ; pf. pass. ptcp.
πρηκατηγγίλμ^νοί \ to announce In /' rehiin.il (tliat a thing
will be) : of prophecies, — foil, bv an ate. with inf. Acts
iii. 18 ; W, .\cts iii. 24 Kec. ; πίρί tivos, Acts vii. 52. To
pre-announce in the sense of to promise : τί, pass. 2 Co. ix.
5 Hec. (Josepli. antt. I, 12, 3; 2, 9, 4 ; eccles. writ.) *
Ίτρο-κατ-αρτίζω : 1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. plur. προκαταρ-
τΐσωσι; to prepare [A. V. make «/)] beforehand : τί, 2 Co.
i\. 5. (Hippocr. ; eccles. writ.) *
ιτρά-καμαι ; (προ [ij. v. d. α•] and κf^μaί) ; fr. Horn,
down ; 1. prop, to lie or be placed before (a person
or thing), or in front (often so in Grk. writ.). 2.
to be set before, i. e. a. to lie placed before the e)/es,
to tie in sight ; to stand forth : with a pred. nom., δύγμα,
as an e.xample, Jude 7 (καλό» ίηό&(ΐγμά σοι πρόκίΐται, Jo-
.seph. b. j. 6, 2, 1). b. i. ([. to be appointed, destined:
προκαμίνη t λπίί, the hope open to us, offered, given, Heb.
vi. I s ; used of those things which by any appointment
are destined to be done, borne, or attained by any one ;
so προκί'ίμ^νο^ ayiuv, Ileb. xii. 1 ; προκίΐμ. χαρά, tlie des-
tined joy (see αντί, 2 b.), ibid. 2 (the phrase τά ίβ\α προ-
κίΊσθαι occurs often in prof. writ. fr. Ildt. down ; cf.
Bleek; Br. an die Heb. ii. 2 p. 268 sqq.). c. to be
there, be present, be at hand, (so that it can become actual
or available) : 2 Co. viii. 12.*
ιτρο-κηρύσ-σ-ω : 1 aor. ptcp. προκήρυξα! ; pf• pass. ptcp.
νροκίκηρυγμίνος ; 1. to announce or proclaim bij
herald beforehand (Xen. resp. Lac. II, 2 ; Isae. p. 60, 2 ;
Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.). 2. univ. to announce
beforehand (of the herald himself. Soph. El. 684) : Ίι;-
σοΰν Χριστό», i. e. his advent, works, and sufferings, pass.
Acts iii. 20 Hec. ; τί, Acts .xiii. 24 (Ίίριμία! τα peWovra
rij πόλ« Sftra προ(κήρνξ(ν, Joseph, antt. 10, 5, 1).*
■π-ρο-κοττή, -ηί, η, (ττροκότττω, q. v.), progress, advance-
ment: Phil. i. 12, 2ύ; 1 Tim. iv. 15. (Polyb., Diod., Jo-
seph., Philo, al. ; rejected by the Atticists, cf. Phrynich.
ed. Lob. p. 85 ; [Sir. 11. 1 7 ; 2 Mace. viii. 8].) *
•«•ρο-κό-πτω : inipf. προίκοτττον; fut. προκόψω', 1 aor.
προ(κοψα ; to beat forward ; 1. to lengthen out by
hammering (as a smith forges metals) ; metaph. to promote,
forward, further: Hdt., Eur., Thuc, Xen., al. 2.
fr. Polyb. on intransitively [cf. B. 145 (127); W. 251
(236)], to go forward, advance, proceed; of time: η νυξ
vpofKoYfv, the night is advanced [A. V. is far spent"], (<lay
is at hand), P.o. xiii. 12 (Joseph, b. j. 4, 4, 6; [προκο-
■πτοϋσηί τηί ωραί] Charit. 2, 3, 3 [p. 38, 1 ed. Reiske ; τά
τήϊ vvKTOs, ib. 2, 3, 4] ; ή ημϊρα πρηκότΓτα. Just. Mart,
dial. c. Tryph. p. 277 d. ; Lat. procedere is used in the
same way, Livy 28, 15 ; Sallust. Jug. 21, 52, 109). met-
aph. to increase, make progress : with a dat. of the thing
in which one grows, Lk. ii. 52 [not Tdf.] (Diod. 11,87);
iV with a dat. of the thing, ibid. Tdf.; Oal. i. 14, (Diod.
[excerpt, de virt. et vitiisj p. 554, 6!); Antonin. 1, 17);
ί'πϊ nXflof, further, 2 Tim. iii. 9 (Diod. 14, 9«) ; «Vi n-Xfio»
άσίβιίαί, 2 Tim. ii. 16 ; (Vi to χίΐρον, will grow worse,
i. e. will make progress in wickedness, 2 Tim. iii. 13
(των Ίιροσολυμων πάθη προύκοπτί «αό* ημίραν iVi τβ
\eipov, Joseph, b. j. C, 1, 1).*
ττρό-κριμα, -Tor, τό, (προ and κρίμα), an opinion fanned
before the facts are known, a pre-judgment, a prejudice,
( Vulg. praejudicium) : 1 'I'im. v. 21 (anonym, in Suidas
s. v.; [Athan. apol. c. Arian. 25 (i. 288 a. ed. Migne);
Justinian cod. 10, 11, 8, § t']).•
Ίτρο-κυρόω, -ώ : pf. pass. ptcp. προκ(κυρωμίνοί ; to sanc-
tion, ratify, or establish beforehand : (Ial. iii. 1 7. ([Euselx
praep. evang. 10, 4 (ii. p. 70, 3 ed. Ileinichen)] ; Byzant.
writ.)•
Ίτρο-λαμβάνω ; 2 aor. προίΚαβον ; 1 aor. pass, subjunc
3 pers. sing, προληφθη ΙΛημφθη Ij T Tr WH ; see s. τ.
Μ, /ι] ; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to take before : τι, 1 Co.
xi. 21. 2. to anticipate, to forestall: προ(\αβ( μνρί-
σαι, she has anticipated the anointing, [Λα/Α anointed
beforehand'^, Mk. xiv. 8 ; cf. Meyer ad loc. ; W. § 54,
4. 3. to take one by forestalling (him i. e. before he
can flee or conceal his crime), i. e. surprise, delect, (Sap.
.xvii. 16) : τίνα iv παρατττώματι, pass. Gal. vi. 1 ; cf. Winer,
Ep. ad Gal. 1. c.•
irpo -λί'γω ; impf . προίΧίγον ; to say beforehand, to pre-
dict, (so fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down) : 2 Co. xiii. 2 ; GaL
v. 21 ; 1 Th. iii. 4 ; [some (see R. V. mrg.) would give
προ- the sense of plainly in all these exx. ; cf. L. and S.
s. V. II. 2, and see πρό, d. a. fin.].*
ιτρο-μαρτνροροι ; 1. antetestor (in the old lexi-
cons). 2. to testify beforehand, i. e. to make known
by prediction : 1 Pet. i. 11 ; so also [Basil. Seleuc. 32 a.
(Migne vol. Ixxxv.) and] by Theodorus Metochita (e. 75,
misc. p. 504) — a writ, of the fourteenth century.*
ΊΓρο-μίλίτάω, -ώ ; to meditate beforehand: Lk. xxi. 14
(Arstph., Xen., Plato).*
Ίτρο-μίριμνάω ; to be anxious beforehand: Mk. xiii. 11
(Clem. Alex. Strom. 4, 9, 72 ; [Hippol. ref. haer. 6, 52 |
p. 330, 69; 8, 15 p. 432, 3]).*
■>Γρο-νο€ω, -ώ; pres. mid. προνοούμαι; fr. Hom. down;
1. ίο perceive before, foresee. 2. to provide, think
of beforehand: τινός (see Matthiae §348, vol. ii. p. 821
[but cf. §379 p. 862]; Kuhner §419, 1 b. ii. p. 325 ; [.'elf
§496]; AV. §30, 10 c.), to provide for one, 1 Tim. v. 8
(where Τ Tr txt. AVH mrg. προνοΛται) ; πιρι Ttfos, Sa[).
vi. 8. Mid. with an ace. of the thing, i. q. to lake thought
for, care for a thing: Ro. xii. 17 ; 2 Co. viii. 21 (where
L Τ Tr WH have adopted προνοοϋμ(ν).*
irp<5voia, -ας, η, (πρόνοος), fr. [Aeschyl., Soph.], Hdt.
down, forethought, provident care : Acts xxiv. 2 (3) [A.V.
providence] ; ποίοΟ/ίαι πρόνοιάν τίνος, to make provision for
a thing (see ποιίω, I. 3 p. 526* top), Ro. xiii. 14.*
ιτρο-οράω, -ω; pf. ptcp. ττροίωροκώί ; impf. mid. (.Acts
ii. 25) προωρώμην, and without augm. (see όμοιόω, init.)
προορώμην L Τ Tr WH; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to see -
before (whether as respects place or time) : τικό, Acts
■προορίζω
b41
ττροϊ
xxi. 29. 2. Mid. (rare use) to keep he/ore one's eyes :
metaph. ηνά, with ίνώττιόν μου added, to be mindful of
onf always. Acts ii. 23 fr. Ps. xv. (.wi.) 8.*
ιτρο-ορίζω : 1 aor. προώρισα ; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. προορι-
σθίντα ; to predetermine, decide beforehand, Vulg. [e.xc.
in Acts] praedestino, [R. V. to foreordain] : in the N. T.
of God decreeing from eternity, foil, by an ace. with the
inf. Acts iv. 28 ; τί, with the addition of πρό τών αιώνων,
1 Co. ii. 7; Tied, with a pred. ace, to foreordain, appoint
beforehand, Ro. viii. 29 si\. ; τίνα tls τι, one to obtain a
thing. Eph i. 5 ; προορισθίντίς sc. κληρωβηναι, Eph. i. 11.
(lleliod. and eccl. Avrit. [Ignat. ad ICph. tit.]) '
■π-ρο-ΐΓάίτχω : 2 aor. ptcp. προπαθόντ€ς ; (ο suffer before :
1 Th. ii. 2. (Hdt., Soph., Thuc, Plat., al.) *
ΊΓρο-ιτάτωρ, -opos. 6, (πατήρ), a fore father, founder of a
family or nalwn : llo. iv. 1 L TTr AVH. (Pind., Hdt.,
Soph., Eur., Plat., Dio Cass. 44, 37; Lcian., al. ; Plut.
consol ad ApoU.c 10; Joseph, antt. 4, 2, 4 ; b.j.5,9,4,
Ev. Xicod. 21. 24. 25 sq.; eccl. writ.)*
ΐΓρ<ΗΐΓί'μΐΓω ; impf. προ(π(μπον ; 1 aor. act. wpoi-nepij/a ;
1 aor. pa.ss. ιιρο(π€μφθην: fr. Horn, down ; 1. to send
befiire. 2. to setid forward, bring on the icay, ac-
company or escort: rtva, 1 Co. .\vi. 6, 11, [al. associate
these exx. with the group at the close] ; with («ΐ (for
tKe'iiTf) added, Ro. xv. 24; fir with an ace, of place. Acts
XX. 3S ; 2 Co. i. 16 [here R. V. set forward (see below)] ;
«wf e|ai TJjr πόλ(ως, Acts xxi. 5. to set one forward, fit
him out with the requisites for his journey: Acts xv. 3
[al. associate this ex. with the preceding]; Tit. iii. 13;
3 Jn. 6 ; 1 Mace. xii. 4, cf. 1 Esdr. iv. 47.*
irpcrriT^s, -is, (πρό and πίτω i. e. πίπτω) ; 1. fall-
in/j forwards, headlong, sloping, precipitous : Pind. Nem.
6, 107; Xen. r. eq. 1, 8; al. 2. precipitate, rash,
reckless : Acts xix. 36 ; 2 Tim. iii. 4, (Prov. x. 14 ; xiii.
3 ; Sir. ix. 18 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 1 ; and often in Grk.
writ.).*
προ-πορ€νω; 1 fut. mid. ΐΓροπορ(νσομαι', to send before,
to make to precede, (Ael. nat. an. 10, 22 [var.]) ; mid. to
go before, to precede, [see πρό, d. a.] : rivas (on which gen.
see AV. § .52, 2 c), to go before one, of a leader, Acts vii.
40; npo πρόσωπον tivos (after the Ilebr., Ex. xxxii. 34;
Ueut. iii. 18 ; ix. 3), of a messenger or a herald, TA. i. 76 ;
(of the van of an army, 1 Mace. ix. 11 ; Xen. Cyr. 4, 2,
23; Polyb.). [Ct ίρχομαι, dn.y
irpis, a preposition, i. q. Epic προτϊ, from πρό and the
adverbial suffix τι, (cf. the German ror . . . hin [Curtius
§:lSiJ); it is joined
I. with the Accusative, to, towards, Lat. ad, denot-
ing direction towards a thing, or position and state
looking towards a thing (AV. §49h. p. 404 (378)): it is
used 1. of the goal or limit towards which a
movement is directed : προς τίνα or τι, a. prop,
after verbs of going, departing, running, com-
ing, etc. : άγω, Jn. xi. 15 ; αναβαίνω. Mk. vi. .51 ; Jn. xx.
17; Acts XV. 2; ανακάμπτω, Mt. ii. 12; Acts xviii. 21 ;
ανίρ-χομαι. Gal. i. 1 7 [1, Tr mrg. άττίρ;^.]; απέρχομαι, yix.
ψ xiv. 25 [Rec] ; Mk. iii. 13, etc. ; προς ίαντόν, to his house,
I-k. xxiv. 12 [Tom. LTrbr. WH rejectthe vs.; Tr reads
πρ. αυτόν ; some connect the phrase w. θαυμάζω* (see 2 b.
below)] ; Jn. .xx. 10 [T TrauroOt, WH αύτ. (cf. s. v. αΰτοΰ
sub fin.)] ; ylveaOai προς τίνα, to come to one, 1 Co. ii. 3 ;
xvi. 10; διαπίράω, Lk. xvi. 26 ; ΐγγίζω, Mk. xi. 1 ; Lk. xix.
29 ; ίΐσίρχομαι, Mk. vi. 25 ; Lk. i. 28 ; Acts x. 3 ; [προς τ.
Αν8ίαν, into the house of L. Acts xvi. 40 (Rec. fir)];
etc. ; Rev. iii. 20 ; (Ισπορ(ίομαι, Acts xxviii. 30 ; emropd-
ομαι, Mt. iii. 5 ; Mk. i. 5 ; ίξίρχομαι, Jn. xviii. 29, 38 ; 2 Co.
viii. 17; Heb. xiii. 13; ΐπιστρίφω, to turn (one's self),
Acts ΪΧ. 40 ; 2 Co. iii. 16 ; 1 Th. i. 9 ; ίπισυνά•γ(σβαι, Mk.
i. 33 ; ίρχομαι, Mt. iii. 14 ; vii. 15, and often ; ΐ)κω, Jn. vi.
37; Acts xxviii. 23 [Rec.]; καταβαίνω, Acts x. 21 ; xiv.
11 ; Rev. xii. 12; μιταβαίνω, -T η xiii. 1 ; όρθρίζω, Lk. xxi.
38; παραγίνομαι, Mt. iii. 13; Lk. vii. 4, 20; viii. 19; xi.
6 ; [xxii. 52 Tdf.] ; πορίίομαι, Mt. x. 6 ; Lk. xi. 5 ; Jn. xiv.
12, etc. ; σννάγ(σθαι, Mt. xiii. 2; xxvii. 62 ; ilk. iv. 1 ; vi.
30; vii. 1 ; συντρίχ^ιν. Acts iii. 11 ; υπάγω, Mt. xxvi. 18 ;
Mk. V. 19 ; Jn. vii. 33 ; .xiii. 3 ; xvi. 5, 10. 16 [T Tr WH
om. L br. the cl.], 17 ; κατ^υθίνιιν την oSov, 1 Th. iii. 11 ;
also after [kindred] nouns : f ίσοδοΓ, 1 Th. i. 9 ; ii. 1 ; προσ-
αγωγή, Eph. ii. 18. after verbs of moving, lead-
ing, sending, drawing, bringing, directing:
5y<a, Mk. xi. 7[RL]; Lk.xviii.40; Jn. i.42 (43) ; [xviii.
13 L TTr WH]; Acts ix. 27, etc.; απάγω, Mt. xxvi. 57
[R. V. to the house of C. (cf. Acts xvi. 40 above)] ; Mk,
xiv. 53 ; Jn. xviii. 13 [RG]; Acts xxiii. 17 ; 1 Co. xii.
2 ; [ΐξάγω (ως προς (see ίως, II. 2 c), Lk. xxiv. 50 L txt.
TTrWH]; κατασΰρω, Lk. xii. 58; αρπάζω. Rev. xii. 5;
ίΧκύω, Jn. xii. 32 ; παραλαμβάνω, Jn. xiv. 3 ; φίρω, Mk. i.
32; ix. 17, 19, 20; [xi. 7 TTrWH]; π/μπω. Lk. vii. 6
[not Τ AVH], 19 ; Acts xxv. 21 [L Τ Tr WH άναπ-]. etc.
(seeπίVτω) : άναπίμπω. Lk. xxiii. 7, 15 ; άποστίλλω, Mt.
xxiii. 34, etc. (see άττοστίλλω, 1 b. and d.) ; στριφομαι,
Lk. vii. 44; .xxiii. 28. af ter verbs of f a 1 1 i η g : πιπ-τί ii-
προ! τοΰϊ πόδοί τιι•ΟΓ, Mk. v. 22 ; vii. 25 ; [Acts v. 10 L Τ
TrWH]: Rev. i. 17. after other verbs and substan-
tives with which the idea of direction is connected : as
€πιστο\ή προς τι•>α. Acts ix. 2; xxii. 5; 2 Co. iii. 1 : ίντολη.
Acts xvii. 1.5 ; άvάheιξtt, Lk. i. 80 ; κάμπτω τα γόνατα, Eph
iii. 14; ΐκπιτάνννμι τας χι'ψα!, Ro. χ. 21 (fr. Is. Ixv. 2);
πρόσωπον προς πρόσωπον, face (turned) to face, i. e. in
immediate presence, 1 Co. xiii. 12 (after the Hebr., Gen.
xxxii. 30; Judges vi. 22); στόμα προς στόμα, mouth
(turned) to mouth, i. e. in each other's presence, 2 Jn.
12; 3 Jn. 14, (see στόμα, 1) ; λαΧΰνττροςτοοίς, the mouth
being put to the ear, Lk. xii. 3. after verbs of adding,
joining to; προστιθίναι τίνα προς Toir πατίρας. to lay
one unto. i.e. bury him by the side of, his fathers. Acts
xiii. 36 (after the Hebr., 2 K. xxii. 20; Judg. ii. 10);
θάπταν τίνα προς τίνα. Acts v. 1 0. after verbs of s a y i η g
(because speech is directed towards some one), invok-
ing, swearinir, testifving, making known: Λν.
an ace. of the pers., ανοίγω το στόμα, 2 Co. vi. 1 1 ; f ιποχ.
Lk. i. 13, and very often by Luke ; Jn. iv. 48 ; vii. 3, etc. ;
Heb. i. 13; \α\ίω, Lk. i. 19,55; u. 18, etc.; 1 Th. li. 2 ;
Heb. V. 5 ; xi. 18 ; Χίγω, Lk. v. 36, etc. ; Jn. ii. 3 ; iv. 15,
etc. ; Heb. vii. 21 ; φημί, Lk. xxii. 70; Acts ii. 38 [R G] ;
x. 28, etc. ; 8ιαλί>ο/*αι, Acts xxiv. 12; αποκρίνομαι, Lk
ΊΤρΟ^
542
ΊΤρο^
iv. 4 ; Acts iii. 1 2 ; ^ίομαι, Acts viii. 24 ; βοάω, Lk. xviii.
7 [U GL]; aipdv φωνήν, Acts iv. 24 ; (ΰχομαι, 2 Co. xiii.
7 ; όμνυμι, Lk. i. 73; μαρτύς (Ίμι, Acts .\iii. 31 ; xxii. 15;
δημηγομίω, Acts xii. 21 ; κατηγορίω, Ιο accuse Ιο, bring, as
it were, to the judge by accusation, Jn. v. 4o; (μφανίζω,
Acts xxiii. 22; -γνωρΐζίται, be made known unto, Phil. iv.
6. also after [kindred] substantives [and phrases] :
απολογία, .addressed unto one. Acts xxii. 1 ; Xd-yns, 2 Co.
i. IS; Xnyos παρακλήσίωί. Acts xiii. 15; o\ayos -γίνεται
τ-ρ'Ίς τίνα, Jn. χ. 35 ((Jen. xv. 1,4; Jer. i. 2, 1 1 ; xiii. 8 ;
Ezek. vi. I ; Hos. i. 1); γίιΐ€ται φωνή, Actsvii. 31 Rec; x.
13, 15; yiverat (nayyfXia, Acts xiii. 32 and Kec. in xxvi.
6 [where L Τ Tr Wll ftj] ; προσίνχή, Ro. xv. 30 ; 8(ησΐ!,
l!o. X. 1; προσφ(ρ(ΐν δ(ήσ(ΐ!, Ileb. v. 7. προς άλλ^λουί
after άΐ'τιβαλλίΐκ λόγους, Lk. xxiv. 17; Βιαλαλ(ΐν, Lk. vi.
1 1 ; 5ιαλίγ€σύαι, Mk. ix. 34 ; Βίαλογίζια-θαι, Mk. viii. 1 G ;
iiVfiK, Lk. ii. 15 [(L nirg. Τ WII λαλίΐκ)] ; xxiv. 32 ; Jn.
xvi. 1 7 ; xix. 24 ; λι'γιιν, Mk. iv. 41 ; Lk. viii. 25 ; Jn. iv.
33 ; Acts xxviii. 4 ; όμίλίΐν, Lk. xxiv. 14 ; crυλλa\fΊv. Lk.
iv. 36. τΓροΓ ίαυτου! i. q. πρΰί άλλήλου;: after συζητ(ΐν,
Mk. i. 27 [T \VH txt. read simply αϋτοίς (as subj.)] ; ix.
IG ; Lk. xxii. 23 ; eiVciv, Mk. xii. 7 ; Jn. xii. 1 9 ; Xiyfiv, Mk.
xvi. 3; ΰγανακτί'ιν, [K. \ . had indignation amnnr/ them-
ie/ye.•!, saying], Mk. xiv. 4 Τ WH (cf. Tr) ; see 2 b. be-
low, b. of a time drawing towards a given time
[cf. f. below] : ττροί ia-iripav ίστίν, towards evening, Lk.
xxiv. 29 (Gen. viii. 11 ; Zech. xiv. 7 ; Plato de rep. 1 p.
328 a.; Joseph, antt. 5, 4, 3; npos ήμ€ραν, Xen. anab. 4,
5, 21 ; Plato, conviv. p. 223 c.) ; [πρΟ! σάββατον. Mk. xv.
42LTrtxt.]. c. metaph. of mental direction, with
words denoting desires and emotions of the mind, to,
towards : ev&eiKvufiv πραντητα. Tit. iii. 2 ; μακροθυμιΐν, 1
Th. V. 14 ; ήπιοί, 2 Tim. ii. 24 ; ΐχθρα, Lk. xxiii. 12; πιποί-
θησιν e^fiv, 2 Co. iii. 4 ; [«'λτη'δα 'ίχ. Acts xxiv. 15 Tdf.] ;
πίστις, 1 Th. i. 8; παρρησία, 2 Co. vii. 4 ; 1 Jn. iii. 21 ; v.
14 ; with verbs signifying the mode of bearing one's self
towards a pers., ίργάζ^σθαι το αγαθόν, G.al. vi. 10; Troifii/
τά αυτά, Eph. vi. 9 (Xen. mem. I, 1, G). of a hostile
direction, against; so after άνταγωνίζ(σθαι, Ileb. xii. 4;
στηναι, Eph. vi. 11 ; λακτίζιιν, Acts ix. 5 l\ec. ; xxvi. 14,
(see Kfvrpov, 2) ; πάλι;, Eph. vi. 12 ; μάχίσθαι, Jn. vi. 52 ;
διακρίνομαι. Acts .xi. 2 ; γογγυσμόί, Acts vi. 1 ; βλασφημία,
Rev. xiii. 6 ; πικραίν(σθαι. Col. iii. 19; ίχαντι, Acts xxiv.
19; ΐχ€ΐν ζήτημα, xxv. 19; μομφήν, Col. iii. 13; πράγμα,
1 Co. vi. 1 ; λόγον (see λόγος, I. C), Acts xix. 38 ; (xfiv
προς Tiva, lo hare something to bring against one [R. V.
whereivilh lo ansirer'], 2 Co. v. 12 ; τα [which Tr txt. AVII
om.] πμός τίνα, the things to be said against one, Acts
xxiii. 30 [R G Tr WH ; here may be added προς πλη-
σμονήν σαρκός, against (i.e. to check) the indulgence of the
flesh. Col. ii. 23 (see η-λ))σμο»ή)]. d. of the issue
or en d to which anything tends or leads : ή ασθίν^ια ουκ
ίστι προς θάνατον, .Τη. xi. 4 ; άμαρτάνίΐν, άμαμτία προς θάνα'
τον, 1 Jn. ν. lGs(]. ; α στρ^βλοΰσι προς την idiav αυτών
απωλ(ΐαν, 2 Pet. iii. 16; τά προς την ΐΐρήνην sc. όντα, —
now the things which tend to the restoration of peace
f .A . V. conditions of peace"], Lk. xiv. 32 ; now, which tend
to the attainment of safety [A. V. which belong unto
peace], Lk. xix. 42 ; τά προς ζωήν και ciafiitiav, Ι^Α. V.
that pertain 10110], 2 Pet. i. 3 ; πρΐις δόξαν τω θ(ω, 2 Co. i.
20; τοϋ κυρίου, 2 Co. viii. 19. e. of an intended
end or jjurpose: προς νονθίσίαν τινόί, 1 Co. χ. 11 ;
as other e.\.\. add, Mt. xxvi. 1 2 ; Ro. iii. 26 ; xv. 2 ; 1 Co.
vi. 5 ; vii. 35 ; xii. 7; xiv. 12, 26 ; xv. 34 ; 2 Co. iv. C ; vii.
3; xi. 8; Eph. iv. 12; iTim. i. 16; Ileb. vi. II; ix.
13 ; προς τι, to what end, for what intent, Jn. xiii. 28 ;
προς την ίλιημοσύνην, for the purpose of asking alms,
Acts iii. 10 ; προί τό with an inf. in order lo, etc. : Mt.
V. 28 ; vi. 1 ; xiii. 3υ ; xxiii. 5 ; xxvi. 1 2 ; Mk. xiii. 22 ;
2 Co. iii. 13 ; Eph. vi. 1 1 ; 1 Th. ii. 9 ; 2 Th. iii. 8, also
RG in Jas. iii. 3. f. of the time for which a
thing has been, as it were, appointed, i.e. during
which it will last ; where we use our for (Germ, filr or
aiif) [cf. b. above}: προς καιρόν (Lat. nd lempus, Cic. de
off. 1,8, 27 ; de amicitia 15, 53; Liv. 21, 25, 14), i. e. for
a season, for a while, Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. vii. 5; irpos
καιρόν ώρας, [R. V. _/();• ίί ,s7ii9?•/ season], 1 Th. ii. 1 7 ; προς
ώραν. for a short time, for an hour, Jn. v. 35 ; 2 Co. vii. 8 ;
(ial. ii. 5; Philem. 15; πρϊις ολίγας ήμΐρας, IIcl). .\ii. 10;
προς τό παρόν, for the present, ibid. 11 (Tluio. 2, 22;
Plato legg. 5 p. 736 a. ; Joseph, antt. C, 5, 1 ; IMiiUi. 1,
3, 13 [5 ed. Bekk.] ; Dio Cass. 41, 15) ; προς ολίγον, for
a little time, Jas. iv 14 (Lcian. dial. deor. 18, 1 ; Aelian
V. h. 12, 63). 2. it is used of close proximity
— the idea of direction, though not entirely lost, being
more or less weakened ; a. answering to our a/ or i^
(Germ, nn) ; after verbs of fastening, adhering,
moving(/rt): δ^δίσθαι πρίίς την Bvpav.^ik. \\. A', προσ-
κυλλασθαι, Mk. χ. 7 RG Tr (in mrg. br.) ; Eph. v. 31 RG
WH txt. ; προσκόπτ(ΐν, Mt. iv. 6 ; Lk. iv. 11 ; κύσθαι, i. q.
to be brought near to, Mt. iii. 10 ; Lk. iii. 9, [(cf. 2 l\Iacc.
iv.33)]; TtflfVai, Acts iii. 2 ; [iv. 37 Tdf. (al. η-αρά)] ; add,
β(βλήσθαι, Lk. xvi. 20 ; τά προς Trjv θνραν, the fore-court
[see θνμα. Ά.], Mk. ii. 2; eivai προς την θάλασσαν (prop,
towards the sea [A. V. bg the sea]), .Mk. iv. 1 ; θ(ρμαί-
νισθαι προς τό φως, turned to the light [R. V. in the light],
Mk. xiv. 54 ; καθήσθαι προς τό φως, Lk. xxii. 56 ; ίίση}«ι
προς TO μνημύον, Jn. XX. 11 Rec. ; cf. Fritzsche on Alk.
p. 201 sq. b. i. q. (Lat. apud) with, with the ace. of a
person, after verbs of remaining, dwelling, tarry-
in g, etc. (which reijuire one to be conceived of as always
turned towards one), cf. Fritzsche u. s. : after fivai, Mt.
xiii. 5G; Mk. vi. 3; ix. 19; xiv. 49; Lk. ix. 41 ; .In.i. 1 sq.;
1 Jn. i. 2 ; 1 Th. iii. 4 ; 2 Th. ii. 5 ; iii. 1 ; παρ(Ίι>αι, Acts
xii. 20; 2 Co. xi. 9 (8); Gal. iv. 18, 20; παρουσία. Pliil.
i. 26 ; diapeveiv, CJal. ii. 5 ; παραμίν(ΐν, 1 Co. xvi. G ; f irt-
pivdv, ibid. 7 ; Gal. i. 18 ; καθίζ^σθαι, Mt. xxvi. 55 [R G
L Tr br.] ; ΐνδημΰν, 2 Co. v. 8 ; κατ€χ(ΐν τίνα προς ίαυτύν,
Philem. 1 3. προ? ΐμαυτόν, etc., (apud animum meum),
vith miiself etc., (2 Mace. xi. 13 ; exx. fr. Grk. writ, are
given in Passow s. v. I. 2 p. 1 157• ; [[>. .and S. s. v. C. I. 5]),
συλλογίζομαι, Lk. XX. 5 ; πρησίΰχομαι. Lk. xviii. 11 [Tdf.
om. πρΟΓ e., Grsb. connects it with σταθ(ίς]•, ατγανακτάν,
Mk. xiv. 4 [(cf. la. fin.); θαυμάζίΐν, Lk. xxiv. 12 (ace. to
some; see above, 1 a. ad init.)]. Further, ποκ'ιν τι πρός%
τίνα, Mt. xxvi. 18; ΐχω χάριν προς τίνα. Acts ii. 47; καυ•
τρος
543
Ίτροσα/γω
χημα (χ. πρ- Τ. to have whereof to glory with one (prop,
turned 'toward' one), Ro. iv. 2 ; παράκλητον προς τίνα, I
Jn. ii. 1. 3. of relation or reference to any
person or thing; thus a. of fitness: joined to
adjectives, αγαθή!, Eph. iv. 29 ; ϊτοιμοί. Tit. iii. 1 ; 1 Pet.
iii. 15 ; Ικανός, 2 Co. ii. 16 ; hwaros, 2 Co. .x. 4 ; (ξηρτι-
σμϊνος, 2 Tim. iii. 1 7 ; ωφίΚιμος, 1 Tim. iv. 8 ; 2 Tim.
iii. 16 ; αδόκιμος, Tit. i. ItJ ; avfideTOs, Acts xxvii. 12;
XfuKor, white and so ready for, Jn. iv. 3a ; τα προς την
Xpeiav sc. άνά-γκαια, [R. V. such things as we needed^, Acts
xxviii. 10. b. of the relation or close connec-
tion entered (or to be entered) into by one person
with another: π€ριπατ(1ν προς (Germ, im Verkehr mit,
[in intercourse with (A. V. toward)'\ ; cf. Bnhdy. p. 265 ;
Passow s. V. I. 2 p. 1157*; [L. and S. s. v. C. I. 5]) τίνα.
Col. iv. 5 ; 1 Th. iv. 12 ; άναστρίφ^σθαι, 2 Co. i. 12 ; of
ethical relationship (where we use with), άσΰμφωνος προς
άΧ\η\ονς, Acts xxviii. 2-3 ; κοινωνία, σνμφώνησις προς τίνα
or τι, 2 Co. vi. 15 sq. ; (Ιρήνηνΐχιιν [see (Ιρηνη, 5], Ro. v.
1 ; σννζί^ησιν ΐχ^ιν προς τον θίόν, -Vets xxiv. 16 ; Βιαθήκην
(ντϊΧλομαι προς τίνα, lleb. ix. 20 [see £ντ(\Κω, fin.] ; Sia-
^ήκην διατίθημι. Acts iii. 25, (in Grk. writ, σννθηκας, σπον-
8άς, σνμμαχίον ποιΛσθαι προς τίνα, and similar expres-
sions ; cf. Passow [or L. and S.] u. s.) ; μη ταπείνωση . . .
προς υμάς, in my relation to you [R. V. before], 2 Co. xii.
21 ; προς ov ημΐν 6 \όγος (see λόγος, II. 5), Heb. iv, 13.
Here belongs also 2 Co. iv. 2 [A. V. to every man's con-
science], c. icilh regard to (any person or thing),
with respect to, as to ; after verbs of saying: προς τίνα,
Mk. xii. 12; Lk.xii.41; xviii. 9; xix. 9; xx. 19; Ro.x. 21;
Heb. i. 7 sq. ; προς τό δεϊκ προσιύχίσθαι, Lk. xviii. 1 ; tVt-
TpcVeix, γράφ(ΐν Tt προς τι, Mt. xix. 8 ; Mk. x. 5 ; άποκρι-
θηυαί τι προς τι, Mt. xxvii. 14 ; άνταποκριθηναι, Lk. xiv. 6 ;
τι (poiprv προς ταϋτα, Ro. viii. 31, (Xen. mem. 3, 9, 12;
anab 2, 1, 20). d. pertaining to: τα προς τον Sea»
(see β(6ς, 3 γ.), Ro. xv. 1 7 ; Ileb. ii. 1 7 ; v. 1 ; τΊ προς ημάς;
sc. ίστίν', what is that to us f i. e. it is none of our busi-
ness to care for fhat, Mt. x.xvii. 4 ; also τί προς σί ; Jn.
xxi. 22, 23 [here Tdf. om.]. e. in comparison (like
Lat. ad) i. q. in comparison with : so after άξιος (q. v.
in a.), Ro. viii. 18 {ov Χογισθήσίται crfpor προς αυτόν.
Bar. iii. 36 (35) ; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 666 ; [B. § 147,
28]). f. agreeably to, according to : προς a (i. β.προς
ταΰτα a) ΐπραξ^, 2 Co. v. 10 ; ποιβΐι/ προς το θίΚημά τίνος,
Lk. xii. 47; 6ρθοπο8ΰν προς την αληθίίαν. Gal. ii. 14.
Here belong Eph. iii. 4 ; iv. 14. g. akin to this is
the use of ττρός joined to nouns denoting desires, emo-
tions, virtues, etc., to form a periphrasis of the adverbs
[cf. W. § 51, 2 h.] : προς φθόνον, enviously, Jas. iv. 5 ([on
this pass, see φθόνος] : προς ϋργην i. ((. οργίλως. Soph. El.
369 ; προς βίαν i. q. βιαίως. Aeschyl. [Prom. 208, 353, etc.]
Eum. 5 ; al. ; προς ήΒονην και προς χάριν, pleasantly and
graciously, Joseph, antt. 12, 10, 3 ; [other ex.x. in L. and
S. s V. C" III. 7]).
n. with the Dative, at, near, hard by. denoting close
local proximity (W. 395 (369 sq.)) ; so six times in the
N. T. (much more freq. in the Sept. and in the O. Γ.
Apocr.) : Mk. v. 1 1 G L Τ Tr WH £R. V. on the moun-
tain side] ; Lk. xix. 37 ; Jn. xviii. 16 ; xx. 11 (where Rec.
has προς τό μν.), 12 ; Rev. i. 13.
m. with the Genitive, a. prop, used of that
from which something proceeds; b. (Lat. a parte
i. e.) on the side of; hence tropically προς τίνος dvai or
{ιπάρχ€ΐν, to pertain to one, lie in one's interests, be to one's
advantage : so once in the N. T. τούτο προς τής ίμιτίρας
σωτηρίας ΰπάμχίΐ, conduces to [Α. V. is for] your safety,
Acts xxvii. 34. {ΚροΙοΌς ΐΚπίσας προς ίωυτοΰ τον χρψ
σμον eivai, Hdt. 1, 75 ; οΰ προς της ύμίτίρας δόξης, it will
not redound to your credit, Thuc. 3, 59 ; add. Plat. Gorg.
p. 459 c.; Lcian. dial. deor. 20, 3 ; Dion. Hal. antt. 10, 30;
Arr. exp. Alex. 1, 19, 6; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 659 sq.;
JIatthiae p. 1385 sq. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. TV.] ; W. 374
(350).)
IV. in Composition irpoj signifies 1. direction
or motion to a goal : προσάγω, προσεγγίζω, προσέρχομαι^
προστρίχω. 2. addition, accession, JeiiV/«; προσ-
ανατίθημι, προσαπίΐΚ(ω, προσοφιιΚω. 3. vicinity:
προσεδρεΰω. προσμίνω. 4. our on, at, as in προσ-
κόπτω ; and then of things which adhere to or are fas-
tened to others, as προσηΧόω, προσπήγννμι• 5. to or
for, of a thing adjusted to some standard : πρόσκαιρος.
Cf. Zeune ad Viger. ed. Herm. p. 666.
•π-ρο-σάββοτον, -ου, τό, the day before the sabbath : Mk.
XV. 42 R G Τ WH [L Tr txt. προς σάβ. (cf. προς, I. 1 b.)].
(Judith viii. 6 ; [Ps. xcii. (xciii.) heading; Nonn. paraph,
loan. 19, 66; Euseb. de mart. Pal. 6, 1].)'
ττροσ-αγορίύω : 1 aor. pass. ptcp. προσαγορ^υθίίς ; to
speak to, to adilress, accost, salute, (Aeschyl., Hdt., Aris-
tph., Xen., Plat., al.) ; esp. to address or accost by some
name, call by name : τινά with a pred. ace, and in the pass,
with a pred. nom. (1 Mace. xiv. 40; 2 Mace. xiv. 37), Heb.
V. 10. (to give a name to publicly, to style, τινά or τί with
a pred. ace, Xen. mem. 3, 2, 1 ; Γάϊος'ΐοΰλιος Καίσαρ 6 Sia
τάς πράξξΐς προσαγορίνθΐΐς θεός, Diod. 1, 4; add [Sap.
xiv. 22] ; 2 Mace. iv. 7 ; x. 9 ; xiv. 37 ; φροϋριον . . . Kai-
σάρίίαν ΰπ' αΰτοϋ προσαγορευθίν, Joseph, antt. 15, 8, 5.)
Cf. Bleek, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 97 sq.*
ΐΓρθ(Γ-ά'γω; 2 aor. προσήγαγον; 1 aor. pass, προσήχθην
(Mt. xviii. 24 LTrWH); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
3"")pn, iJ'jri, sometimes for Χ'ίΠ ; 1. transitively,
to lead to, bring, [see πρής, IV. 1] : τίνα Zibe, Lk. ix. 41 :
τινά Tivi, one to one [cf. W § 52, 4, 14], Mt. xviii. 24
L Tr WH ; Acts xvi. 20 ; to open a icay of access, ηνά
τω θεώ. for [Α. V. to bring] one to God, i. e. to render
one acceptable to God and assured of his grace (a fig.
borrowed from those who secure for one the privilege of
an interview with the sovereign), 1 Pet. iii. 18 [note-
worthy is the use, without specification of the goal, in a
forensic sense, to summon (to trial or punishment), Acts
xii. 6 ΛλΉ txt. (where al. προάγω, q. v. 1)]. 2. in-
transitively (see άγω. 4), to draw near to, approach, (Josh,
iii. 9; Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.) 3, etc.) : τινί. Acts xxvii. 27 [(not
WH mrg.)], where Luke speaks in nautical style phe-
nomenally, the land which the sailor is approaching
seeming to approach him ; cf. Kuinoel [or Wetstein] ad
loc. ; [see προσανίχω 2, and προσαχίω].'
Ίτροσα'γω'γη
544
Ίτροσΐρ^άζομ,αί
προσ-αγωγή, -ψ, ή ; 1• 'Ae ad of hringing Ιο, a
moiring to, (Time, Aristot., Polyb., al.). 2. access,
approach, (Ildt. 2, 58; Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 45) [al., as Meyer
on Uo. as below (yet see Weiss in the Gth ed.). EUic on
Eph., insist on the transitive sense, introduction']: els
την χάριν, Ro. V. 2 ; ίο God, i. e. (dropping the figure) that
friendly relation with God whereby -we are acceptable to
him and have assurance that he is favorably disposed
towards us, Eph. ii. 18; iii. 12.*
ΐΓροσ--αιτ€'ω, -ώ ; 1. to ask for in addition [(see irpos,
IV. 2) ; Pind., Aeschyl., al.]. 2. to approach one
with supplications, (Germ, anhetteln [to importune; cf.
irpo'r, IV. 4]), to ask alms, ([lldt.], Xen., Arstph., Eur.,
Plut., al): Mk. .κ. 46RGL; Lk. .xviii. 35 (Avhere LT
Tr WII have ίπαίτών) ; Jn. ix. 8.*
ιτροσ-αίτη;, -ου, 6, η tie(j(jar : Mk. χ. 46 Τ Tr WII ; Jn.
ix. 8 (where for the Rec. τυφλοί). (Plut., Lcian., Diog.
Laert. <!, .iii.)'
ιτροίτ-ανα-βαίνω : 2 aor. imi)V. 2 pers. sing, προσανάβηθι;
to go up farther: vi\U\ avurepov added, Lk. xiv. 10 [A. V.
go up higher; al. regard the προσ- as adding the sugges-
tion of ' motion to ' the place where the host stands :
'come up higher '(cf. Prov. xxv. 7). Xen., Aristot., al.]*
ιτροσ-αναλίσ-κω : 1 aor. ptcp. fem. προσα χαλώσασ-α ;
to expend besides [vpit, IV. 2] : larpu'is (i. e. upon physi-
cians, B. § 133, 1 ; Rec. «r iarpoU [cf. W. 213 (200)])
τονβίον, Lk. viii. 43 [WII om. Trmrg. br. the cl.]. (Xen.,
Plat., Dem., Plut., al.) *
τΓροσ-ανα-τΓληρόω, -ώ ; 1 Άον. ττροσαν€ττ\τ}ρωσα; to βΙΙ up
by addinij Ιο [cl. πρόί, IV. 2] ; Ιο supply : τί, 2 Co. ix. 12;
xi. 9. (Sap. \i\. 4; Aristot., Diod., Philo, al.)*
τΓθοσ•-ανα-τίθημι : 2 aor. mid. 7Τροσαν(θ€μην; 1.
<o lay upon in addition [cf. npos, IV. 2]. 2. Mid-
dle, a. tn lay upon one's self in addition : φόρτον.
Poll. 1, 9, 99; to undertake besides: τί, Xen. mem. 2, I,
8. b. with a dat. of the pers. to put one's self upon
another by going to him (npas), i. e. to commit or betake
one's self to another sc. for the purpose of consulting him,
hence to consult, to take one into counsel, [A. V. confer
with'], (Diod. 17, 116 τοις μάντ^σι προσαναθίμ€νος nep\ τον
σημιίου: Lcian. Jup. trag. § 1 ϊμοΊ προσανάθον, \άβ( μ(
σΰμβονλον πάνων), Gal. i. 16. c. Ιο add from one's store
(this is the force of the middle), lo communicate, impart:
tI Tivi, rial. ii. 6.*
■ΐΓροσ•-ον-6χω ; 1. to hold up besides. 2. in-
trans. to rise up so as to approach, rise up towards : Acts
xxvii. 27 Lchm. ed. ster. (see προσάγω 2, and προσαχίω),
— a sense found nowhere else.*
irpoo'-airEiXcw, -ώ : 1 aor. mid. ptcp. προσαπ€ΐ\ησάμ€νος;
to add threats, threaten further, [cf. προς, IV. 2] : Acts
iv. 21. (Dem. p. 544, 26.) *
[ιτροΓ-αχίω, -ά>, Doric for προσηχίω, to resound : Acts
xjvii. 27 WII mrg. (see their App. p. 151; al. προσ-
ayfti», q. v.), of the roar of the surf as indicating nearness
to land to sailors at night.*]
προίΓ-δαπανάω, -ω : 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. sing, προσ-
8αΓανητΐ]{, Ιο spend besides [cf. προς, IV. 2], Vulg. super-
erogo: τι, Lk. x. 35. (Lcian., Themist.) *
ΐΓροσ--8(Όμαι ; depon. pass, lo want besides, need in aildi•
lion, [cf. πρόί, IV. 2]: προσ^(όμ(νΟ! rti/os, "quom nuUiua
boni desideret accessionem" (Erasmus), [A. V. as though
he needeil anything]. Acts xvii. 25. (Xen., Plat., S(i<j. ;
Sept.; [in the sense lo ask of, several times in Ildt.].)'
irpoir-Se'xo^ai ; depon. mid. ; 'im\>f. προσ(8(χύμην; 1 aor.
προσ(8(ξάμην : 1. as in (irk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and
Ildt. down, lo receive to one's self, lo admit, lo give access
to one's self : τινά, to admit one, receive into intercourse
and companionship, tovs άμαρτωΧούί, Lk. xv. 2 ; to re-
ceive one (coming from some place), Ro. xvi. 2 ; Phil. ii.
29, (1 Chr. xii. 18) ; τί, to accept (not to reject) a thing
offered : ού προσ^• Ιο reject, Heb. xi. 35 ; πρησ^ίχονται
ϊλπί&α, to aduiit (accept) hope, i. e. not to repudiate but
to entertain, embrace, its substance. Acts xxiv. 15 [al.
refer this to the next head (R. V. t.xt. look for)] ; not to
shun, to bear, an impending evil [A. V. look the spoiling
etc.], Heb. x. 34. 2. as fr. Horn, down, lo expect
[A. V. look for, icait for] : τινά, Lk. xii. 36 ; τί, Mk. xv.
43; Lk. ii. 25, 38; xxiii. 51 ; [Acts xxiii. 21]; Tit. ii. 13;
Jude 21 ; rat e'nayyfXiar, the fulfilment of the promises,
Ileb. xi. l.'i Lchm. [Cf. Sf'^o/jat, fin.]*
irpocrSoKau), -ά> ; impf. 3 pers. p\ur. προσ(8όκων (Act»
xxviii. 6); (the simple verb is found only in the form
δο«ΰω; πρΟ! [(j. v. IV. 1] denotes mental direction); fr.
Aeschyl. and Ildt. down ; to expect (whether in thought,
in hope, or in fear) ; to look for, wail for : when the
preceding context shews who or what is expected, Mt.
xxiv. 50 ; Lk. iii. 15 ; xii. 46 ; Acts xxvii. 33 ; xxviii. 6 ;
τινά, one's coming or return, Mt. xi. 3 ; Lk. i. 21 ; vii. 19
sq. ; viii. 40; Acts x. 24; τί, 2 Pet. iii. 12-14 ; foil, by
an ace. with infin. Acts xxviii. 6 ; foil, by an infin. be-
longing to the subject, Acts iii. 5.*
προσ-δοκία, -as, ij, {προσδοκάω), fr. Thuc. and Xen.
down, expectation (>vhether of good or of evil) : joined
Ιοφόβο! (Plut. Ant. 75; Demetr. 15) with a gen. of the
object added [W. § 50, 7 b.], Lk. xxi. 26 ; τού λαοί (gen.
of subject), the expectation of the people respecting
Peter's execution. Acts xii. 11.*
irpo(r8p€'|XU, see προστρίχω.
•π-ροσ-ίάω, -ώ ; to permit one lo approach or arrive : Acta
xxvii. 7 [R. V. txt. lo suffer further; (cf. npos, IV. 2;
Smith, Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 3d ed., p. 78 ;
Hackett ad loc.)]. Not found elsewhere.*
ιτροσ-ίγγίζω : 1 aor. inf. προσ(γγίσαι ; lo approach unto
[πρόί, IV. 1] : with the dat. of a pers. [cf. W. § 52, 4, 14],
Mk. ii. 4 [where Τ Tr mrg. WII προσ€νίγκαι]. (Sept.;
Polyb., Diod., Lcian.) *
προσΕδρΕΰω; (wpoatSpos sitting near, [cf. πρόι, IV.
3]) ; 1. prop, lo sit near [(Eur., al.)]. 2. lo
attend assiduously : τώ θυσιαστήρια (see παρ(8ρ(ίια), 1 Co.
ix. 1 3 Rec. ; Protev. Jac. 23, 1 (where we also find the var.
παρ^δρ(ίω) ; rij θ(ραπ(1α ToC θ(θΰ, Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 7, 1 ;
ταΊς φίΧοπονίαΐ!, Aristot. pol. 8, 4, 4 p. 1 338', 25 ; ro'is πράγ-
μασι, Dem. p. 14, 15 [i. 6. Olynth. 1, 18]; with dat. of
pers. lo be in attendance upon, not to quit one's side, Jo-
seph, c. Ap. 1, 9, 1 ; [cf. Dem. 914, 28].*
•Kpov-tpyiloyLox: 1 aor. 3 pers. sing, ποοσηρνάσαη
νροσ^ργοίίαι
545
ττροσειτχομαι
Ι II G Tr), προσηργάσ. (L Τ WH ; see ίρτγάζομαι, init.) ;
1. to work besides (Eur., Plut.). 2. by working or
Trading to make or gain besides : Lk. xlx 16 (Xen. Hell.
3, 1, 28).•
ΐΓροα•-«ρχομ.αι ; impf. 3 pers. plur. προσήρχοντο (Acts
xxviii. 9) ; [fut. 3 pers. sing, πpoσf\fίσ€τaι, Lk. i. 1 7 WH
mrg.] ; 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. προσήλθαν and [so L Tr WH
in Mt. ix. 28; xiii. 36; xiv. 15; TTrWIl in Mt. v. 1 ;
Lk. .xiii. 31 ; WH in Mt. xix. 3 ; x.xi. 23 ; Jn. xii. 21] in
the Alex, form προιτηλθαν (see απέρχομαι, and ίρχομαι) ;
pf. προσ(\ήλυΰα (Heb. xii. 18, 22) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt.
down; Sept. for 2-\D and Uii; to come to, to approach,
[ττρ.Ίί, IV. 1]; a. prop, absol., Mt. iv. 11; Lk.
[i. 17 WHrarg.]; ix.42; xxiii.36; Acts viii. 29 ; .x.xviii.
9 ; προσήλθαν Xe'yon-fs•, Lk. xiii. 31 ; with rhetorical ful-
ness of description (.see άνίστημι, Π. 1 c. [also ίρχομαι, p.
2.50" hot.]) the ptcp. προσιλθών is joined to a finite verb
which denotes a different action : Mt. viii. 2 L Τ Tr WH,
19, 25; ix. 20; xiii. 10, 27; xiv. 12; xv. 12, 23; xvi. 1;
xvii. 7 [RG]; xix. 16; xxv. 20, 22, 24; x.wi. 39TTr
WH mrg. (ace. to a reading no doubt corrupt [cf. Scri-
vener, Introd. p. 16]), 50, 60, 73 ; xxviii. 2, 9, 18; Mk. i.
31 ; X. 2 ; xii. 28 ; [xiv. 35 Tr Wllmrg.] ; Lk. vii. 14 ; viii.
24, 44; ix. 12, 42; x. 34; xx. 27 ; wiii. 36 ; Acts xxii. 26
sq. ; προσέρχομαι foil, by an intin. indicating the reason
why one has drawn near, Mt. xxiv. 1 ; Acts vii. 31 ; xii.
13 [here Wll nir,'. προηλθι] ; with a dat. of the place
(exx. fr. Grk. auth are given in Passow s. v. 1 a. p. 1 190*;
[L. and S. s. v. L 1]), Heb. xii. 18, 22; with the dat. of
a pers. (see Lexx. u. s.), Mt. v. 1 ; viii. 5 ; ix. 14, 28 ; xiii.
36; xiv. 15; xv. 1, 30; .xvii. 14,24; xviii. 1 ; xix. 3; xx.
20; .\xi. 14, 23 ; xxii. 23 ; .xxiv. 3; .\xvi. 7, 17, 69; Jn.
xii. 21 ; Acts x. 28 ; xviii. 2 ; xxiv. 23 Rec. ; [with «Vi and
the ace. Acts .xx. 13 Tr WH mrg.]. The ptcp. -ηροσ-
€λθων αΰτώ with a finite verb (see above) occurs in Mt.
iv. 3; xviii. 21 ; xxi. 28, 30; xxvi. 49; xxvii. 58; .ilk. vi.
35; xiv. 45; Lk. xx. 27; xxiii. 52; Acts ix. 1; xxiii.
14. b. trop. o. προσίρχ- τω θ^ω, to draw near to
God in order to seek his grace and favor, Heb. vii. 25 ;
xi. 6; τώ θράνω τη! χάριτο:, Heb. iv. 16; without τώ
θ(ώ, Heb. χ. 1, 22, (in the Ο. Ύ.προσίρχ., simply, is used
of the priests about to offer sacrifices, Lev. xxi. 17, 21 ;
Deut. xxi. 5 ; with the addition of προ! θιύν, of one about
to ask counsel of God, 1 S. xiv. 30; with rois θ^οΊς, of
suppliants about to imp'ore the gods, Dio Cass. .56, 9) ;
προί Χριστοί•, to attach one's self to Christ, to come to a
participation in the benefits procured by him, 1 Pet. ii.
4 [cf. W. § 52, 3]. β. i. q. to assent to (cf. Germ.
Iieltreten ["haX. accedere; Eng. come (over) to. used fig.]) :
ΰγιαίνονσι λόγοις, 1 Tim. vi. 3 [Tdf. προσίχ^ται, ([. v. 3].
■ΐΓροσ--«νχή, -Tjt, ή, (προσίνχημαι), Sep), for n^SP, i. q.
(νχη προς τον θίόν [cf. πρόί, IV. 1] ; 1. prayer ad-
dressed to God : Alt. xvii. 21 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.] ;
xxi. 22; Mk. ix. 29 ; Lk. xxii. 45 ; Acts iii. 1 ; vi. 4 ; x.
31; Ro. .xii. 12; 1 Co. vii. 5; Col. iv. 2; plur.. Acts ii.
42; X.4; Ro.i.lO(9); Eph.i.l6; Col.iv.l2; 1 Th. i.
2; Philem.4, 22; iPet. iii. 7; iv. 7; Rev. v. 8 ; viii. 3,4
(where τα'ις πpoσfvχais is a dat. commodi,/or, in aid of,
35
the prayers [W. §31, 6 c.; cf. Green p. 101 sq.]) ; oikos
προσ(υχη!, a liouse devoted to the offering of prayer to
God, Mt. x.\i. 13; Mk. xi. 17 ; Lk. xix. 46, (Is. Ivi. 7 ; 1
Mace. vii. 37) ; προσιυχη κα\ δίησκ. Acts i. 14 Rec.;
Eph. vi. 18; Phil. iv. 6, (1 Iv. viii. 38; 2 Chr. vi. 29; 1
Mace. vii. 37; on the distinction between the two words
see Βίησί!) ; plur., 1 Tim. ii. 1 ; v. 5 ; η πρ- τοϋ θ(οΰ,
prayer to God, Lk. vi. 12 ((ϋχαριστία θ(οϋ, Sap. xvi. 28;
cf. reff. in πίστις, 1 a.) ; προς τον θάνίπίρ [L Τ Tr WH
Trepi] Tivos, Acts xii. 5 ; plur. Ro. .xv. 30 ; πρασίυχί} προσ•
(ύχ(σθαι, a Hebraistic expression (cf. W. § 54, 3; [B.
§ 133, 22 a.]), to pray fervently, Jas. v. 17. 2. α
place set apart or suited for the offering of prayer ; i. e. a.
a synagogue (see συνα-γω-γή, 2 b.): 3 Mace. vii. 20 [ace. to
tlie reading 7rpoσίυχ^^' ; see (Jri'/nHi, Com. in loc] ; Philo
in Flaccum § 6 [also § 14]; leg. ad Gaium §§ 20, 43, 46 ; Ju-
venal, sat. 1, 3, 2 HI ; συνά•γονται πάντες els την προσ^νχήν,
μίγιστον οίκημα παλυν οχλυν €πώΐζασθαι ^υνάμίνον, Jo-
seph, vita § 54. b. a place in the open air where the
Jews were wont to pray, outside of those cities where they
had no synagogue ; such places were situated upon the
bank of a stream or the shore of the sea, where there
was a supply of water for washing the hands before
prayer: Acts xvi. 13, 16; Joseph, antt. 14, 10, 23, cf.
Epiph. haer. 80, 1. Tertullian in his ad nationes 1, 13
makes mention of the "orationes litorales" of the Jews,
and in his de jejuniis c. 16 says " Judaicum certe jeju-
nium ubique celebratur, cum omissis templis per omnt
lilus quocunque in aperlo aliquando jam preces ad caelum
mittunt." [.Tosephus (c. Apion. 2, 2, 2) quotes Apion as
representing Moses as offering αίθριοι πρόστυχοι.'] Cf.
De Wette, Archaologie, § 242; [.SV/iiVi-^r, Zeitgesch. §27
vol. ii. p. 369 sqq.]. Not used by prof. auth. except in
the passages eiteil above from Philo. .Tosephus. and Ju-
venal [to which add Cleomedes 71. 16 : cf. Bneckh, Corp.
inscrr. ii. 1004 no. 2114 b. and 1005 no. 2114 bb. (A. D.
81), see Index 8. v.].*
•Ίτροσ-ίνχομαι ; depon. mid. ; impf. προσ-ηυχόμην ; fut.
προσίύξομαι; \ Άον.προσηυ^άμην; [on the augm. see WH.
App. p. 162; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 121]; fr. Aeschyl. and
Hdt. down ; Sept. for SHann ; to offer prayers, to pray,
(everywhere of prayers to the gods, or to God [cf. ^ίησκ,
fin.]): absol.,Mt.vi.'5-7,9; xiv.23; xxvi. 36, 39, 44; Mk.
i. 35 ; vi. 46 ; xi. 24 sq. ; xiii. 33 [L Τ WH om. Tr br. the
cl.]; xiv. [32], 39; Lk. i. 10; iii. 21 ; v. 16; vi. 12; ix. 18,
28 sq.; xi. 1 sq. ; .xviii. 1, 10; xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject
the pass.]; Acts i. 24: vi. G ; ix. 11,40; x.9, 30; xi. 5;
xii. 1 2 ; xiii. 3 ; xiv. 23 ; xvi. 25 ; xx. 36 ; xxi. 5 ; xxii. 1 7 ;
xxviii. 8 ; 1 Co. xi. 4 sq. ; xiv. 14 ; 1 Th. v. 1 7 ; 1 Tim. ii.
8; Jas. V. 13, 18 ; foil, by λί-γων and direct disc, con-
taining the words of the prayer, Mt. xxvi. 39, 42; Lk.
xxii. 41 ; προσ^νχ. with a dat. indicating the manner or
instrument, 1 Co. xi. 5 [W. § 31 , 7 d.] ; xiv. 14 sq. [cf. W.
279 (262) sq.] ; μακρά, to make long prayers, Mt. xxiii.
14 (13) Rec. ; Mk. xii. 40 ; Lk. xx. 47 ; iv πνιϋματι (see
πν(ϋμα, 4 a. p. 522• mid.), Eph. vi. 18 ; iv πν. άγ'ιω. Jude
20 ; προσίυχϊι (see πpoσfvχή, 1 fin.), Jas. v. 1 7 ; προσήχ-
with the ace. of a thing, Lk. xviii. U ; Ro. viii. 26 [cf. W.
ττροσβχω
546
ττροσκαΧέω
§41 b. 4 b. ; Β. § 139, 61 c] ; ΐπί τίνα, over one, ϊ. β. with
hands extended over him, Jas. v. 14 [cf. \V. 408 (381)
n.] ; sc. iVi rtva, Mt. xix. 13. as commonly in Grk. writ.
with the dat. of the pers. to wliom the prayers are offered
[cf. W. § 52, 4, 14] : Mt. vi. G; 1 Co. xi. 13, (Is. xhv.
1 7) ; π(ρί with the gen. of a pers., Col. i. 3 [R G Τ Wll
t.vt.] ; 1 Th. V. 25 ; Ileb. xiii. 18 ; irrep with the gen. of
a pers., Mt. v. 44 ; Lk. vi. 28 [where Τ Wll Tr mrg. wfpl
(see irepi, 1. c. y-, also ίπίρ, I. G) ; Col. i. 3 L• Tr Wll mrg.
(see reff. as above), 0] ; πμοσιύχ. foil, by ίνα, wil/i the
)dcsi(jn of, 1 Co. xiv. 13, cf. Meyer in loc. [W. 400 (428)] ;
itlie thing prayed for is indicated by a following Iva (see
lira, II. 2 b.) : Mt. xxiv. 20; xxvi. 41; Mk. xiii. IS; xiv.
35, 38; Lk. xxii. 46, [but in Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38;
(Lk. xxii. 46?), iva is more com. regarded as giving the
aim of the twofold command preceding] ; τοΰτο "iva, I'liil.
i. 9 ; wfpi Tivos iva, Col. iv. 3 ; 2 Th. i. 1 1 ; iii. 1 ; Inep
Ttvos iva. Col. i. 9 ; Ιπ€ρ Tivos οπωΓ, .las. v. 16 L WII txt.
Tr mrg. ; nfpi tivos όπως. Acts viii. 15, (οπωί [q. v. II. 2]
seems to indicate not so much the contents of tlie pray-
er as its end and aim) ; foil, by an inf. belonging to the
subject, Lk. xxii. 40 ; foil, by τοΟ with the inf., Jas. v. 1 7.*
■ΊΓροϊΓ-βχω; impf . 7Γροσ6Ϊ;(οϊ' ; ιΛ.ττροσίσχηκα] [pres. mid.
3 pers. sing. προσίχ(ται (1 Tim. vi. 3 Tdf.)] ; to turn to
[cf . Trpos, I V. 1 ], i. e. 1. ίο brini/ to, bring near ; thus
very freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down with vavv (quite
as often omitting the vaiv) and a dat. of place, or foil, by
npas with an ace. of place, to bring a ship to land, and
simply to touch at, put in. 2. a. τον νουν, to turn
the mind to, attend to, be attentive : τινι, to a person or
thing, Arstph. eqq. 503 ; Plat., Dem., Polyb., Joseph.,
Lcian., Plut., al. ; once so in the Bible, viz. Job vii. 17.
The simple 7rpoffe;(«i'i-ii'i (Sept. for Tm7\, also for ['ΙΚΓΙ),
with τον νουν omitted, is often used in the same sense
from Xen. down ; so in the N. T. [cf. W. 593 (552) ; B.
144 (126)] : Acts viii. 6 ; xvi. 14 ; Ileb. ii. 1 ; 2 Pet. i. 19,
(1 Mace. vii. 1 1 ; 4 Mace. i. 1 ; Sap. viii. 1 2) ; in the sense
of caring for, providing for. Acts x.\. 28. b. προσ-
ίχω ('μαντώ, Ιο attend Ιο one's self, i. e. to give heed to one's
self (Sept. for "TDEiJ, to guard one's self, i. e. to beware,
Gen. xxiv. 6 ; Ex. x. 28 ; Deut. iv. 9 ; vi. 1 2, etc.) : Lk.
xvii. 3; Acts v. 35 [cf. B. 337 (290) ; W. 557 (518) ; yet
see tVi, B. 2 f. a.] ; with the addition of από twos, to be
on one's guard against, beware of, a thing [cf. B. § 147,
3 {άπ6, 1. 3 b.)] : Lk. xii. 1 (Tob. iv. 12 ; [Test. xii. P.atr.,
test. Dan 6]) ; also without the dat. προσ(χ. από tivos ■
Mt.vii. 15; x. 17; .xvi. 6, 1 1 sq. ; Lk. xx. 46, (Sir. vi. 13;
xi. 33; xvii. 14; xviii. 27; ['Teaching' etc. 6, 3; 12,5]);
foil, by μή with an inf., to take heed lest one do a thing,
Mt. vi. 1 ; (μαντώ, μήποτ€ with the subjunc. Lk. xxi. 34 ;
absol. to give attention, take heed: Sir. xiii. 13; Barn,
ep. 4,9; 7, 4. 6. [9] ; foil, by πώς. Barn. ep. 7, 7 ; by the
interrog. τί, lb. 15, 4 ; Iva, ib. 16, 8 ; "iva μήποτι. Barn. ep.
4, 13 [var. ; tra μή, 2 Chr. xxv. 16] ; [μήποτι. Barn. ep. 4,
14]. 3. sc. (μαυτόν, to apply one's self to, attach one's
self to, hold or cleave to a person or a thing, [R.V. mostly
ffive heed'\ : with the dat. of a pers. to one, Acts viii. 1 sq. ;
1 Tim. iv. 1 ; τώ ίπισκόπα ηρ. κα\ τω πρ(σβντ(ρΐω και ίια-
κάνοιι, Ignat. ad Philad. 7, 1 ; ad Polyc. 6, 1 ; with the dat.
of a thing, μνθυΐί, 1 Tim. i. 4 ; Tit. i. 14 ; [mid. ίγιαίνονσι
Xoyois, 1 Tim. vi. 3 Tdf. (al. πμοσίρχ(ται, (j. v. b. ^i.)] ; to
be given or addicted to : οΊνω, 1 Tim. iii. 8 (τρνφ;ι, Julian.
Caes. 22 [p. 326 ed. Spanh.]; τρνφη κα\ μίθιι, I'olyacn.
strateg. 8, 56) ; to devote tlioughl and effort to : tji άνα-γνώ-
σ(ΐ κτλ. 1 Tim. iv. 13 ; τω θνσιαστηρίω, [A.V. give attend-
ance}, Heb. vii. 13, (^vavTixois, Thuc. 1,15; for other
exx. fr. Grk. writ, see Passow s. v. 3 c. ; [L. and S. s. v.
4 b.]).•
ιτροσ-ηλόω, -ώ : 1 aor. ptcp. «τροσι^λώσαΓ ; to fasten with
nads to, nail to, [cf. vpos, IV. 4] ; τϊ τώ στανρώ. Col. ii.
14. (3 Mace. iv. 9; Plat., Dem., Polyb., Dio'd., Philo,
Joseph., Plut., Lcian., al.) *
'π•ρθ(Γήλυτθ5, -ου, ό, (fr. ηροσίρχομαι, pf. προσ(λη\νθα,
cf. Β. 74 (64); [W. 24. 26. 97 (92)]); 1. α new-
comer [Lat. advena; cf. πpόs, IV. 1]; α stranger, alien,
(Schol. ad ApoU. Rhod. 1, 834; Sept. often for ΊJ [cf.
Philo de monarch. 1, 7 ad init.]). 2. α proselyte,
i. e. one who has come over from a Gentile religion to
Judaism (I^uther, Judengenosse): Mt. xxiii. 15; Acts
ii. 11 (10) ; vi. 5 ; xiii. 43. The Rabbins distinguish two
classes of proselytes, viz. ρΊϊΠ 'Ii proselytes of right-
eousness, who received circumcision and bound them-
selves to keep the whole Mosaic law and to comply with
all the requirements of Judaism, and IJ^.E'n 'Ί3 prose-
lytes of the gate (a name derived apparently from E.x.
XX. 10; Deut. V. 14; [xiv. 21]; xxiv. 16 (14), 21 (19)),
who dwelt among the .Jews, and although uncircumcised
observed certain specified laws, esp. the seven precepts
of Noah (as the Rabbins called them), i. e. against the
seven chief sins, idolatry, blasphemy against God, homi-
cide, unchastity, theft or plundering, rebellion against
rulers, and the use of " flesh with the blood thereof."
[Many hold that this distinction of proselytes into classes
is purely theoretical, and was of no practical moment in
Christ's day; cf. Lardner, Works, xi. 306-324; cf. vi.
522-533 ; Schiirer in Riehm as below.] Cf. Leyrer in
Ilerzog xii. p. 237 sqq. [rewritten in ed. 2 by Delitzsoh
(xii. 293 sqq.)], Sterner m Schenkel iv. 629 sq. ; [BI?.
DD.] ; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 644 [(whose views
are somewhat modified, esp. as respects classes of pros-
elytes, in his 2te Aufl. § 31 V. p. 567, and liis art. ' Pros-
ely ten ' in Riehm p. 1 240 sq.)] and the bks. he refers to.•
ιτρόίτ-κανροϊ, -OK, (i q. ό πρ6s καιρόν ων), for a season
[cf. προς, IV. 5], enduring only for a while, temporary:
.\It. .xiii. 21 ; Mk. iv. 17 ; 2 Co. iv. 18 ; Ileb. xi. 25. (4
.Mace. XV. 2 ; Joseph, antt. 2, 4, 4 ; Dio Cass., Dion. Hal.,
[.Strabo 7, 3, 11], Plut., Ildian. ; ό παρών κα'ι πρόσκαιροι
κόσμος, Clem, homil. 20, 2.) *
•τΓρο(Γ-καλ€'ω, -ώ : Λϋ(1., pres. ιτροσκαλοΟμαι; 1 aor. ττροίτ^
(<α\(σάμην; \)f. προσκίκλημαι; from [Antipho, Arstph.,
Thuc], Xen., Plat, down; to call to; in the N.T. found
only in the mid. [cf. B. § 135, 4], to call to one's self; to
bid to come to one's self: Ttra, a. prop. : Mt. x. 1 ;
XV. 10,32; xviii. 2, 32; xx. 25; Mk. iii. 13, 23; vi. 7; viL
14; viii. 1,34; x. 42; xii. 43; xv. 44 ; Lk. vii. 18 (19); xv.
26 ; xvi. ■> ; xviii. 16 ; Acts v. 40; vi. 2 ; xiii. 7 ; xx. 1 [RG
ττροιτκαρτβρβω
547
ΤΤρΟ'
σκοτΓτω
L]; xxiii. 17, 18, 23; Jas. v. 14. b. metaph. God
is said προσκα\(Ισθαι the Gentiles, aliens as tliey are from
him, by inviting and drawing them, through the preach-
ing of the gospel, unto fellowship with himself in the
Messiah's kingdom, Acts ii. 39 ; the Holy Spirit and
Christ are said to call unio themselves [cf. W. § 39, 3]
those preachers of the gospel to whom they have decided
to intrust a service having reference to the extension of
the gospel ; foil, by an inf. indicating the purpose. Acts
xvi. 10 ; foil, by Λί τι, Acts xiii. "2 (where ο is for etj 5,
ace. to that familiar Grk. usage by which a prep, pre-
fixed to the antecedent is not repeated before the rela-
tive ; cf. W. 421 sq. (393); [B. 342 (294)]).*
7Γρθ(Γ-καρτ€ρ€'ω, -ώ ; fut. 7τμοσκαρτ€ρησω ; (καρτεράω, fr.
Kaprepos [' strong,' ' steadfast '], of which the root is (to)
KUpTos for KpOTot ['strength'; cf. Curtius § 72]) ; to per-
secere [' continue steadfaMly''\ in any thing [cf. πρόί, IV.
4] : of persons, with the dat. of a thing, to fjive constant
attention to a thinfj. Acts ii. 42 [here Lchm. adds iv (once)
in br.] ; ttj προσινχη. Acts i. 14 ; vi. 4 ; Ro. xii. 12 ; Col.
iv. 2, (rais θήραις, Diod. 3, 17; tj πόΚιορκΙα, Polyb. 1,
55, 4; Diod. 14, 87; tj καθϋρα, persist in the siege,
Joseph, antt. 5, 2, 6) ; with the dat. of a person, to ad-
here to one, be his adherent ; to be devoted or constant to
one : Acts viii. 13 ; x. 7, (Dem. p. 1386, 6 ; Polyb. 24, 5,
3 ; Diog. Laert. 8, 1, 14) ; ftf n, to be steadfastly atten-
tive unto, to give unremitting care to a thing, Ro. .xiii. 6 [cf.
Meyer ad loc] ; fv with a dat. of place, to continue all
the time in a place. Acts ii. 46 (.Sus. 6) ; absol. to per-
severe, not lo faint (in a thing), Xen. Hell. 7, 5, 14; to
show one's self courageous, for ρίΠΠΓΙ, Num. .xiii. 21 (20).
of a thing, with the dat. of a pers., to be in constant read-
iness for one, wait on continualhj: Mk. iii. 9.*
ιι•ρο(Γ-καρτ6'ρη<Γΐ5, -(ως, ή, (προσκαρτίρίω), perseverance :
Eph. vi. 18. Nowhere else; \_Kouinanoudes, \ίξ. αθησ.
s. V.].*
προΕΓ-κεψάλαιον, -ου, τό, (fr. πρόί [q. v. IV. 3] and the
adj. κίψάλαιο! [cf. κ€φάλαιον]), a pilloir, a cushion : Mk.
iv. 38. (Ezek. xiii. 18, 20 ; Arstph., Plat., Pint., al.) •
προτ-κληρύω, -ώ : 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. προσικΧηρω-
θησαν \ to add or assign to by lot, to allot : προσικληρώ-
θησαν τώ Παύλω, were allotted by God to Paul, viz. as
disciples, followers. Acts xvii. 4 [W. § 39, 2 fin. ; al. give
it a middle force, joined their lot to, attached them-
selves to, (.\. V. consorted with) ; cf. leg. ad Gaium § 10
and other exx. fr. Philo as below]. (Plut. mor. p. 738 d. ;
Lcian. am. 3 ; freq. in Philo, cf. Loesner, Observv. p. 209
ΐΓρόσ•-κλησ•ΐ5, -far, r\, 1. Ο judicial summons :
Arstph., Plat., Dem. 2. an invitation : μη8ίν ποιών
κατά πρόσκΚησιυ, 1 Tim. v. 21 L Tr mrg. ; this reading,
unless (as can hardly be doubted) it be due to itacism,
must be translated by invitation, i. e. the invitation or
summons of those who seek to draw you over to their
side [see quotations in Tdf. ad loc. Cf. ττρ6σκ\ισΐί.'\ *
ΊτροίΓ-κλίνω : 1 aor pass. 3 pers. sing. προσ(κ\ίθη ; 1.
trans, (to cause) to lean against [cf. πρόί, IV, 4] (Horn.,
Pind.). 2. intrans. τινί, to incline towards one, lean
to his side or party: Polyb. 4, 51, 5, etc.; 1 aor. pass.
προσ(κ\ίθψ> with a mid. signif. to join one's self to one:
Acts V. 36 L Τ Tr Wll [(cf. W. § 52, 4, 14)] ; 2 Mace,
xiv. 24; ToU SiKaiois προσικλίθη, Schol. ad Arstph. Plut.
1027; προσικΚίβητί Tois απόστολοι!, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
4 7, 4 and in other later writ.*
ιτρόσ-κλισι;, -(ως,ή, an inclination or proclivity of mind,
a joining the party of one, (Polyb., [Diod.]); partiality:
κατά πρόσκλισιν, led by partiality (Vulg. in [aliam or]
alteram partem declinando), 1 Tim. v. 21 [RGTWHTr
txt.] ; κατά προσκΚίσιΐί, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 21, 7; &Ίχα
προσκλΐσίω! ανθρωπινή!, ib. 50, 2, cf. 47, 3 sq. (Cf. πρό(Τ•
κ'Κτ}σις•) *
ΊτροίΓ-κολλάω, -ώ : 1 aor. pass. προσΐκοΚΚηβην ; 1 fut.
pass. προσκοΧΚηθήσυμαι ; Sept. for DOT ; to glue upon,
glue to, [cf. προς, IV. 4]; prop. Joseph, antt. 7, 12, 4 ;
trop. in the pass, with a refiexive force, to join one's self
to closely, cleave to, stick to, (Plato) : w. dat. of a pers.
(Sir. vi. 34; xiii. 16), Acts v. 36 Rec. (see προσκΚίνω,
2) ; Tji yvvaiKi, Mt. xix. 5 Rec. [al. κοΧΚηθήσ^ται, q. v.] ;
Mk. X. 7 Lchm. ; Eph. v. 31 L Τ Tr \Xl\ mrg. ; πρόί τηρ
yvv. (fr. Gen. ii. 24), Mk. x. 7 R G Tr txt. ; Eph. v. 31
R G WH txt. [Cf. AV. § 52, 4, 14.] •
τΓρ<5<Γ-κο|χμο, -ατοί, τό, (προσ-κόπτω), α stumbling-block,
ΐ. e. an obstacle in the way ivliich if one strike his foot
against he necessarily stumbles or falls ; trop. that over
which the soul stumbles, i. e. by which it is impelled to
sin: 1 Co. viii. 9 (Sir. xvii. 25 (20) ; xxxi. (xxxiv.) 19
(16) ; xxxix. 24) ; τιθΐναι πρόσκ. τινι, to put a stumbling-
block in one's way, i. e. trop. to furnish one an occasion
for sinning, Ro. xiv. 13 [WH mrg. om.] ; ό δια προσκόμ-
ματα! ΐσθ'ιων, [A.V.] icho eateth with offence (see δίά, A. I.
2), by making no discrimination as to what he eats oc-
casions another to act against his conscience, ibid. 20;
Xt^os προσκόμματα! (fr. Is. viii. 14 for •■];: ρκ), prop, a
stone against ivhich the foot strikes [A. V. stone oj
stumbling], used figuratively of Christ Jesus, with regard
to whom it especially annoyed and offended the Jews
that his words, deeds, career, and particularly his igno-
minious death on the cross, quite failed to correspond to
their preconceptions respecting the Messiah ; hence they
despised and rejected him, and by that crime brought
upon themselves woe and punishment: Ro. ix. 32, 33;
1 Pet. ii. 8 (7). (In the Sept. for lypn, Ex. xxiii. 33 ;
xxxiv. 12; [cf. Judith viii. 22]. a sore or bruise caused
by striking the foot against any object, Athen. 3 p. 97f.;
a hindrance [?], Plut. mor. p. 1048 c. [i. e. de Stoic, re-
pugn. 30, 8 fin.].) •
προΓ-κοιτή, -η!, ή, (προσκόπτω), an occasion of stum-
bling [so R.V. (but .\.V. offence)^ : 8ι8ήναι προσκοπην (sc.
άλλοΐϊ), to do something which causes others to stumble,
i. e. leads them into error or sin, 2 Co. vi. 3 [cf. W. 484
(451)]. (Polyb.; [for ρ^ψ 3 fall, Frov. xvi. 18 Graecus
Ven.].)*
προίτ-κόίΓΓω ; 1 aor. πρασίκοψα ; to strike against [cf.
πρόί, IV. 4] : absol. of those ivho strike against a stone
or other obstacle in the path, to stumble, Jn. xi. 9, 10;
jrpoi λίθον τον πό8α, to strike the foot against a stone, i. e.
προσκύλ,ίω
548
ττροσορμίζω
(dropping the fig.) to meet with some harm, Mt. iv. 6 ; Lk.
iv. 11, (fr. Ps. xc. (xci.) 12) ; to rush upon, beat ayainut, o!
άνιμοι τή οικία, Mt. vii. 27 [L mrg. πμοσίρρηξαν, see προσ-
ρήγνυμι]- tv τιι/ι, to be made to stumble hy a thing, i. e.
metaph. to be induced to sin, Ko. xiv. 21 [cf. W. 5S3
(54J) ; B. § 151, 23 d.j. Since vre are angry with an
obstacle in our path which v/n have struck and hurt our
foot against, one is trop. said προσκύπταν, to slumlde at,
a person or thing which highly displeases him; thus the
Jews are said προσκόψαι τω Χίθω τυΰ ττροσκ• i. c. to have
recoiled from Jesus as one who tailed to meet their ideas
of the Messiah (see πρόσκομμα), Ro. ix. 32 ; the enemies
of Christianity are said πρ- τώ λόγω, 1 Pet. ii. 8 [some (cf.
R. V. mrg.) take πρ• here absolutely, and make τω λ.
depend on άπαθίω, ([. v. in a.]. (Exx. of this and other
fig. uses of the word by Polyb., Uiod., M. Antonin. are
cited by I'assow [L. and S.j s. v. and Fntzsche, Ep. ad
Rom. ii. p. 362 Sij.) *
Ίτροίτ-κυλΕω : 1 aor. 7τροσ€κνΚισα ; to roll to : η rtvi, Mt.
xxvii. liO [where Lchm. inserts inl] ; τί «Vi τι, Mk. xv.
46. (Arstph. vesp. 202.) *
■ΐΓρθ(Γ-κυν£'ω, -ώ ; inipf. προσίκίνουν ; fut. προσκυνήσω ;
1 aur. ττροσίκννησα; fr. Aeschyl. and lldt. down; Sept.
very often for ΠΙΠΓΙΠΠ (to prostrate one's self) ; prop.
to kiss the hand to (towards) one, in token of reverence :
Hdt. 1, 134; [cf. K. F. Hermann, Gottesdienstl. Alter-
thiimer d. Griech. §21 ; esp. Uoelemann, Die bibl. Ge-
stalt. d. Anbetung in his ' Bibelstudien' i. lOG sqq.] ; hence
among the Orientals, esp. the Persians, to fall ujjon the
knees and touch the ground with the forehead as an expres-
sion of profound reverence, [to make a ' salain '] ; Lat.
veneror (Nep. Conon. 3, 3), adoro (Plin. h. n. 28, 5, 25 ;
Suet. Vitell. 2) ; hence in the N. T. Oi/ kneeUnij or pros-
tration to do homage (to one) or make obeisance, whether
in order to express respect or to make supplication. It
is used a. of homage shown to men of superior
rank : absol., Mt. xx. 20 (the Jewish high-priests are
spoken of in Joseph, b. j. 4, 5, 2 as προσκυνοΰμινοι) ; πισων
ί'πΐ Tois πόδοΓ προσ(κΰνησ(ν, Acts χ. 25 ; τινί (ace. to
the usage of later writ. ; cf. W. 36, 210 (197) ; [B. § 131,
4]; Loh. ad Phryn. p. 463), Mt. ii. 2, 8 ; viii. 2; ix. 18 ;
xiv. 33; XV. 25; [xviii. 26]; xxviii. 9, 17 [RG]; Mk. v. C
[here AVII Trmrg. have the ace.]; xv. 19; Jn. ix. 3H ;
with τ!(σώυ preceding, Mt. ii. 11 ; iv. 9; ϊνώπιον των
πο8ά>ν Tims, Rev. iii. 9 ; [it may perh. be mentioned that
some would bring in here Heb. xi. 21 προσ(κίνησ(ν cVi τό
άκρου τψ ράβ8ου αυτοϋ, explaining it by the (Egyptian)
custom of bowing upon the magistrate's staff of office in
taking an oath; cf. Chahas, Melanges Egypt. III. i. p. 80
cf. p. 91 sq. ; butseebelow]. b. of homage rendered
to (!od and the ascended Christ, to heavenly beings, and
to demons: absol. (our to worship) [cf. W. 593 (552)],
Jn. iv. 20; xii. 20; Acts viii. 27 ; xxiv. 11 ; Heb. xi. 21
[cf. aboi e] ; Rev. xi. 1 ; πίπτί!!» και προσκυνιϊν, Rev. v.
14; T(«,Jn.iv. 21,23; Acts vii. 43; Heb. i. 6; Rev. iv.
10; vii. 11 ; xi. 16; xiv. 7 ; xvi. 2 ; xix. 4, 20 ; xxii. 8 sq.;
Rev. xiii. 4 G L Τ Tr WH (twice [the 2d time WH txt.
only]); xiii. 15 GTTrWHtxt. ; xx. 4 Rec. ; πισων eVl
πρόσωπον προσκυνήσει τώ υίώ, 1 Co. Xiv. 25 ; πίπτΐΐν cttI
τα πρόσωπα κα\ προσκυνύν τω θΐω. Rev. xi. 16 ; preceded
by πιπτ(ΐν ίμπρυσθεν των ποδών Tivos, Rev. xix. 10. in
accordance with the usage of the older and better writ,
with Tifo or W (cf. Matthiae § 412) : Mt. iv. 10 ; Lk. iv.
8; Rev. ix. 20; xiii. 12; xiv. 9, 11 ; also xiii. 4 (Rec.
twice; [WH mrg. once]), 8 [where Rec. dal.], 15 R L
Wll mrg. ; xx. 4* (where Rec. dat.), 4' (where R"'" dat.) ;
Lk. xxiv. 52 RG LTr br. WH reject; (the Sept. also
connects the Λvord far more freq. with the dat. than with
the ace. [cf. Uoelemann u. s. p. 116 sqq.]); ίνώπιόν Tivot,
Lk. iv. 7 ; Rev. xv. 4.*
ιτροσ-κυνητήβ, -οϋ, ό, (προσκυνάω), a worshipper : Jn. iv.
23. (Inscrr. ; [eccl. and] Byzant. writ.) *
προσ-λαλΐω, -ώ ; 1 aor. inf. τΓροσλι.λί^σοι ; w. τίνί, to
spent to : Acts xiii. 43 ; sc. νμ'ιν [some say μοί (see παρα-
καλέω, I.)], Acts xxviii. 20. (Sap. xiii. 1 7 ; Theophr.,
Plut., Lcian.) '
προσ-λαρ,βάνω : 2 aor. inf. προσλαβ(ΐν (Acts xxvii. 34
Rec. see below) ; Mid., pres. προσλαμβάνομαι ; 2 aor.
προσ(\αβόμην ; fr. Aeschyl. and lldt. doivn ; to lake to,
take in odilition, [cf. προ!, IV. 2] ; in the N. T. found
only in the Middle, to take to one's self [cf. B. § 135,
4] : τινά [cf. B. 160sq. (140)]; a. to take as one's
companion [A. V. take one unto οηρ] : Acts xvii. 5 ; xviii.
26. b. to take by the hand in order to lead aside
[A. V. (simply) take] : Mt. xvi. 22 ; Mk. viii. 32. c.
to take or [so A. V.] receive into one's home, with the
collateral idea of kindness: Philem. 12 R G, 17; into
shelter, Acts xxviii. 2. d. to receive, i. e. grant one
access to one's heart ; to take into friendship and inter-
course : Ro. xiv. 1 ; xv. 7 ; God and Christ are said
προσλαβίσθιιι (to have received) those whom, formerly es-
tranged friim them, they have reunited to themselves by
the blessings of the gospel, Ro. xiv. 3 ; xv. 7 ; Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 49, 6, (cf. Ps. xxvi. (xxvii.) 10 ; Ixiv. (Ixv.) 5 ;
Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 24). e. to take to one's self, to take :
μη&ίν, [A.V. having taken nothing'} i. e. no food. Acts
xxvii. 33; τροφής, (a portion of [A.V.(not R.V.) 'some'])
food, cf. B. 160 sq. (HO), ibid. 36 (in vs. 34 GLTTr
WH have restored μιταΧαβειν [so R. V. ('to take some
food')] for πρησλαβε'ιν).*
■π-ρόσ-ληψίξ [LTTrWII -λι;^\|^ΐΓ, see Μ, μΐ, -(ως, ή.
(προσλαμβάνω), Vulg. assum]>tio, a receiving: Ttras, into
the kingdom of God, Ro. xi. 15. [(Plat., al.)]*
τΓρο<Γ-μ.ί'νω ; 1 aor. ptcp. προσμι'ινα!, inf. προσμύναι ; f r.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; a. to remain with [see
προς, IV. 3] : with a dat. of the pers. to continue with
one, Mt. XV. 32 ; Mk. viii. 2 [here L WH mrg. cm. Tr br.
the dat.] ; τώ κυρίω, to be steadfastly devoted to [A. \^.
cleave untol the Lord, Acts xi. 23 (Sap. iii. 9 ; Joseph.
antt. 14, 2, 1) ; tj χάριτι τοΰ Oeoi, to hold fast to [A. V.
continue in} the grace of God received in the gospel.
Acts xiii. 43 G LTTr WH ; Sfijaecri κ. προσίυχάϊί, [A.V.
to continue in supplications and prayers], 1 Tim. v. 5. b.
to remain still [cf. προς, TV. 2], stay, tarrij : Acts xviii. 18 ;
foU. by cv with a dat. of place, 1 Tim. i. 3.*
■π-ροσ-ορμΟζω : 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. προσαρμΐσθτισαψ;
ιτροοοφεΓΚω
549
ΊτροστίθημΛ
(όρμο: a roadstead, anchorage) ; to bring a skip to moor-
inys (Ltian. am. 11); esp. so in the mid., prop, to take
one's stalion near the shore ; to moor, come to anchor,
(Hdt., Dera., Plut., al.) ; the 1 aor. pass, is used in tlie
same sense (Arr. exp. Alex. 6, 4 and 20 ; Ael. v. h. 8, 5 ;
Die Cass. 41, 48; 64, 1), Mk. vi. 53.*
ιτροσ-οφίίλω ; to otve besides [see προΓ, IV. 2] : afavrov,
i.e. besides vihat I have just asked of thee thou owest to
me even thine oivn self, since it was by my agency that
thou wast brought to faith in Christ, Philem. 1 9. (Thuc,
Xen., Dem., Polyb., Plut.) *
ΊτροίΓ-οχθίζω : 1 aor. προσώχθισα ; to be wroth or dis-
pleased icilh : Tiui, Heb. iii. 10, 1 7, (fr. Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 10) ;
not found besides exc. in the Sept. for 7J?3, to loathe ;
Kip, to spue out ; ]"1p, to be disgusted with, etc. ; add, Sir.
vi. 25 ; XXV. 2 ; xxxviii. 4 ; [1. 25 ; Test, xii Patr., test. Jud.
§18; Orac. Sibyll. 3, 272]. Profane writ, use o^flf ω, more
rarely οχθίζω. trpas denotes direction towards that with
which we are displeased [πρόί, IV. 1]. Cf. Dleek, Br.
an d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 441 sq.*
ΊΓροίΓ-ιταίω (for the more com. προσπταίω) : 1 aor. προσ-
ϊπαισα ; Ιο beat against, strike upon : intrans. ιτροσίπαισαν
r§ οικία, Mt. vii. 25 Lchm. ; but cf. B. 40 (34) n. (Schol.
ad Aeschyl. Prom. 885 ; [Soph. frag. 310 var.] ; Byzant.
writ.) *
irpicrircivos, -ov, {πύνα hunger [cf. veivaoy']), very (lit.
besides, in accession, [cf. προς, IV. 2; al. (cf. R. V.) do
not recognize any intensive force in irpai here]) hun-
grij: Acts x. 10. Not found elsewhere.*
ΊτροίΤ-ΐΓήγνυμι : 1 aor. ptcp. προσπηξας; to fasten to [see
νρός, IV. 4] : Acts ii. 23 [here absol., of crucifixion].
(Dio Cass., al.) *
ΐΓρο<Γ-ιι•ΙΐΓτω : impf. προσίπιπτον ; 2 aor., 3 pers. sing.
jrpoaeVffff, 3 pers. plur. (Mt. vii. 25) προσίη€σον R G,
-σαν Τ Tr WH [see πίπτω, init.], ptcp. fern, προσπίσον-
σα ; fr. Horn, down; prop, to fall towards, fall upon,
[προς, IV. 1] i.e. 1. to fall forward , to fall down,
prostrate one's self before, in homage or supplication :
with the dat. of a pers., at one's feet, SIk. iii. 11 ; v. 33;
Lk.viii. 28, 47; Acts xvi. 29, (Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 6 ; Polyb.,
I'lut., al.) ; toU γόνασί τιιόγ, Lk. v. 8 (Eur. Or. 133l';
Plut.) ; προς τους πόδας τινός, I\Ik. vii. 25. 2. to
rush upon, beat against : tji οικία (of winds beating against
a house), Mt. vii. 25 [not Lchm.; cf. προσπαιω].*
'ΐΓροσ--^οΐ€'ω : ^lid., pres. l>tcp. προσποιηίμαιος (see be-
low) ; impf. 3 pers. sing, προσιποκϊτο (Lk. xxiv. 28, for
which L txt. Τ Tr WH give the 1 aor. προσ^ποιήσατο) ;
in prose writ.fr. Hdt. down; to add to [cf. Germ, hinzu-
viachen']•, mid. 1. to take or claim (a thing) to
one's self. 2. to cotiform one's self to a thing, or rather
to affect to one's self; therefore to pretend, foil, by an inf.
[A. V. made as though he would etc.], Lk. xxiv. 28 ; κα-
τίΎραφ^ν €is TTjv yrjv μη προσποιονμΐνυς, Jn. viii. G ace. to
codd. Ε G Η Κ etc. [cf. Jlatthaei (ed. 1 803) ad loc.]. (So
in Thuc, Xen., Plat., Dem., al.; Diod. 15, 46 ; Philo in
Place. § 6 ; [in § 12 foil, by ptcp. ; Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 1] ;
Ael. V. h. 8, 5 ; Plut. Tininl. 5 : [Test. xii. Patr., test. Jos.
§3].)•
irpo(r-irop€Uop.ai ; to dratc near, approach : with a dat. of
the person approached, Mk. x. 35. (Sept. ; Aristot.,
Polyb.) •
ΐΓροσ•-ρή•γνυ|ΐι, and in later writ. [W. 22] προσρήσσα;
1 aor. προσίμρηξα R G L, προσίρηξα Τ Tr Wll (see P, p) ;
to break agaiiisi, tireak by dashing agai7isl : παιδία άπολΛ
προσρηγννς πίτραις, Joseph, antt. 9, 4, 6 ; λί'οκτα προσ-
ρήξας t'd yii. 6, 9, 3 ; intrans. (cf. W. § 38, 1 ; [B. § 130,
4]): ό ποταμός τη οικία, Lk. vi. 48, [49 ; Mt. vii. 27 Lmrg.];
in pass, τη άκρα ή τα κύματα προσρησσ^ται, Antonin. 4, 49.•
ΐΓρο<Γ-τάσ•σ•ω ; 1 aor. προσίταξα ; pf. pass. ptcp. προσΎ€-
ταγμίνος ; fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down ; 1. to as-
sign or ascribe to. Join to. 2. to enjoin, order, pre-
scribe, command : Sept. for niS ; absol. καθώς προσίταζ^,
Lk. V. 14 ; with the dat. of a pers., Mt. i. 24 ; xxi. 6 R G
Τ ; Ti, ]Mt. viii. 4 ; Mk. i. 44 ; τινί τι, pass. Acts x. 33 ; foU.
by an ace. w. inf. Acts x. 48 ; lo appoint, to define, pass.
προστ(τα•/μίνοι καιροί. Acts xvii. 26 G L (ed. ster. [larger
ed. προς Tcray.]) Τ Tr WH, for the Rec. προτιταγμίνοι.
[Syn. : see κ(λ(ύω, fin.] *
•ΐΓρο<Γτάτΐ5, -ιδοΓ, ή, (fern, of the noun προστάτης, fr.
προΐστημι) ; a. prop, a woman set over others. To.
a female guardian, protectress, patroness, caring for the
affairs of others and aiding them with her resources
[A. X. succourer] : Ro. xvi. 2 ; cf. Passow on the Avord
and under προστάτης fin. ; [Schiirer, Die Gemeindever-
fassungder Jndcn in Kom, u.s.w. (Leip. 1879) p. 31 ; Hein-
rici. Die Christengemeinde Korinths, in Hilgenfeld's
Zeitschr. for 1876, p. 517sq.].*
ιτροσ-τίθημι; impf. 3 pers. sing. προσ(τί6(ΐ (Acts ii. 47) ;
1 aor. προσΐβηκα; 2 aor. προσίθην, impv. n-poafles (Lk.
xvii. 5), inf. προσθύναι, pti]). προσθάς ; Pass., iuipf. 3 pers.
plur. προσιτίθιντο ; 1 aor. προσ^τίθην ; 1 fut. προστ(θτ{-
σομαι; 2 aor. mid. προσ^θίμην; fr. llom. Od. 9, 3U5 down;
Sept. very often for ηρ•, also for ηςΚ, etc. ; 1.
prop, to put lo. 2. lo add, i.e. join lo, gather with
any company, the number of one's followers or compan-
ions : Tiva τη (ΚκΧησία, Acts ii. 4 7 [R G] ; τω κνρίω, Acts
V. 14; xi. 24; sc. τώ κνρίω, or το7ς πιστΐνονσιν. Acts ii.
41 ; Hebraistically, προσ^τίθη προς τους πατίρας αϋτοΰ
(Judg. ii. 10; 1 Mace. ii. 69), he was gathered lo his fa-
thers assembled in Sheol (which is "n-S^'? li'rt Γ\'2, the
house of assembly for all the living, .Tob xxx. 23), Acts
xiii. 36 (others explain it, he was added to the bodies of
his ancestors, buried with Ihcm in a common tomb; but cf.
Knobel on Gen. xxv. 8 ; [Bollcher, De inferis, p. 54 sqq.]);
i. q. lo add viz. to what one already possesses : τί. Lk. xvii.
5 [ΑΛ'. here increase'] ; jjass., Mt. vi. 33; Lk. xii. 31 ; Mk.
iv. 24 ; Heb. xii. 19 \_{μη προστιθηναι αϋτοΐς \oyov, R. V.
that no word more should be spoken to them)] ; — to what
already exists: (5 νόμος) προσιτύθη, was added to (su-
pervened upon) sc. the ΐπαγγιΧία, Gal. iii. 19 RLTTr
WH ; t\ (πι Tivi. some thing to (ujion) a thing (which
has preceded [cf. i'lri, B. 2 il.]), Lk. iii. 20 : τϊ ΐπί τ(. to
a thing that it may thereby be increased, Mt. vi. 27 : Lk.
xii. 25. In imitation of the Hebr. (^p;) the mid. (in
the Sept. the active also) foil, h) an inf. signifies (to add
i. e.) In go on to do a thing, for to do further, do again, (as
προστρί)(θ}
550
ΤΓροσωττυΧήτη >it
Gen. iv. 2; viii. 12; xviii. 29): προσίθιτο πίμι^^αι (-"ID'l
vhuh), he continued to sonil (:ιε lie had already sent),
Lk. XX. 11, 12, (i. q• πι'ιλίν airfirrfiXev, Mk. xii. 4) ; προσ-
(θ(το σνΚλαβύν και UeTjiov, lie besides apprehended I'eter
also [A.V. lie jiruciideil ete.J, Aets xii. 3; in the same
way also the ptcj). is used with a finite verb : προσθύί
(hfv, i. e. he further spake [A. V. lie added and spnlre],
I^k. .xi.x. 1 1 (προσβ(7σα trcKev, ( ien. .x.x.xviii. 5 ; προσθίμινο!
ΐ\αβ( yvvaXKa, Gen. xxv. 1) ; cf. \V. § 54, 5 ; B. § 144, 14.*
■irpo(r-Tpe\iu ; 2 aor. act. ptcp. ττροσδραμών ; to run to :
Jlk. ix. 15; x. 17; Acts viii. 30. (From Arstph. and
Xen. down ; for "pi in Gen. xviii. 2, etc.) *
ιτροο-φάγιον, -ου, τό, {προσφαγιΊν [cf. πρόί, IV. 2]), i. q.
όψον (on ivhich see ΰψάριον), (in// lli'nuj eaten with bread
(Aloeris [ed. Piers, p. 274, \'\: 'ύ^ον άττικωι, προσφάγιον
ίλληνικώς) : spoken of fish boiled or broiled, Jn. xxi. 5
(Schol., Lex.x., [Moschion 55 p. 2G ; Roelil, Inscrr. grace.
395 a. 12]). Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. etc. p. 697 sq. ;
Slurz, Dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 191.•
ιτρόσ-φατοϊ, -ox, (fr. ττρό and σφάω or σφύζω; cf. De-
lilzscli, Com. on Ilebr. [as below] p. 4 78 ; [cf. Loli. Tech-
nol. p. 106]); 1. prop, iately slaughtered, J'reslilt/
killed: Ilom. Π. 24, 757. 2. univ. recently or i-ery
Intel ij 7niiile, new. ό86ς, lleb. x. 20 (sofr. Aescliyl. down ;
φίλος πρόσφατο!. Sir. ix. 10 ; ουκ ίση παν πρόσφατον νπο
τίιν ηλιυν, Eccl. i. 9). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. S74 sq.*
ιτροσ-φάτωϊ, adv., (see the preceding word), lately: Acts
xviii. 2. (Deut. xxiv. 7 (5) ; Ezek. xi. 3 ; Judith iv. 3,
5 ; 2 Mace. xiv. 36 ; Polyb., Alciphr., al.) *
'ΐΓρο<Γ-φ€ρω ; inipf. προσ^φίροι/; 1 now προσην^γκα; 2 aor.
ίτροσηνΐγκον ', pf. 7Γροσίΐ/ϊίΐΌ;^α ( Ileb. xi. 1 7) ; l*ass., j)res.
προσφέρομαι ; 1 aor. προσηνςχθην ; [see reff. s. v. φερω^ ;
fr. [Pind.], Aescliyl., and lldt. down; Sept. often for
D">pn, also for Χ'3Π, iyun, etc., sometimes also for Π^^-'Π
where offering sacrifices is spoken of (as 1 K. xviii. 36
Compl.; 2 Chr. xxix. 7; Jer. xiv. 12); 1. to bring
to, lead to : Ttra rim, one to a person who can heal him
or is ready to show him some other kindness, Mt. iv. 24 ;
viii. 16 ; ix. 2, 32 ; xiv. 35 ; xvii. 16 ; ilk. ii. 4 (sc. τινά)
TWIITrmrg. ; x. 13; Lk. xviii. 15 ; pass, in Mt. xii.
22 [where L VvH txt. act.] ; xviii. 24 R G Τ ; xix. 13; —
one to a person who is to judge him: Lk. xxiii. 14;
Ttva fVl ras avvayaiyai κα'ι ταί αρχάς, Lk. .xii. 1 1 [ W. § 52,
3] (where Τ Tr txt. WH (Ισφίρωσιν). προσφίρω τ», to
bring or present a thing, Mt. xxv. 20 ; τι τινι, to reach or
hand a thing to one, Alt. x.xii. 19; Lk. xxiii. 36 [here A.V.
offeringi; τι τω στόματί rivos, to put to, Jn. .xix. 29; a
thing to one that he may accept it, to offer : χρήματα,
Acts viii. 18; δώρα, Mt. ii. 11; used, as often in the
Sept., of persons offering sacrifices, gifts, prayers to God
(cf. Kurtz, Brief a. d. Hebr. p. 154 sqq.) : τώ βεω σφάγια
και θυσίας. Acts vii. 42 ; θυσίαν. Heb. xi. 4 ; 'Κατριίαν, Jn.
xvi. 2; προσφίριιν &ωρον or δώρα sc. τω θ(ω, Mt. v. 23,
24 ; viii. 4 ; Heb. viii. 3, 4 ; ix. 9 ; θυσίην. Heb. x. 12 ; plur.,
Heb. X. 1, 11 ; [pass. ibid. 2; θυσίας (RG -av) κα'ι προσ-
φοράς (RG -paw) κα\ ολοκαυτώματα κα\ nepl αμαρτίας, ibid.
8]; δώρ^ τ( κη\ θυιτίας νπΐρ αμαρτιών, to expiate [see
VTtfp, L 4] sins, Ileb. v. 1 ; αίμα ΰπΐμ 4αυτοΰ και των τον
λαοϋ άγνοημάτων, Heb. ix. 7 ; την προσφοράν ύπίρ Ivht
ίκάστου, pass. Acts xxi. 26 ; προσφίριιυ used absol. [cf.
W. 593 (552)] : jrfpi τίνος, on account of [see πίρί, I. c.
/3.], Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14 ; wtpt ToiJ λαοί jrepi [RG ίιπϊρ
(see π(ρί, I. c. δ.)] αμαρτιών, to offer ex|)iatory sacrifices
for the people, Heb. v. 3 ; rtra, sc. τώ θιώ. to offer up, i. e.
immolate, one, Heb. xi. 1 7 ; ίαυτόν, of Christ, lleb. vii. 27
Τ Trmrg. WIl mrg. ; ix. [14], 25 ; προσ(ν(χθ(ίς (the pas-
sive pointing to the fact that what he suffered was due to
God's will) ibid. 28, (it is hardly to be found in native
Grk. writ, used of offering sacrifices ; but in Joseph, antt.
3, 9, 3, we have άρνα και ϊριφου) ; προΓ τίνα (God ) Sffjaeis
Τ€ κα\ Ικίτηρίας, lleb. ν. 7 (προσφ(ρ(ΐν δίησιν, Acliill. Tat.
7, 1 ; τω Λω €ϋχήν, Joseph, b. j. 3, 8, 3). 2. The
jiass. with the dat. signifies to be borne towards one, to
attack, assail; then figuratively, to behave one's self to-
wards one, deal with one : is vlotj ϋμ'ιν προσφίριται ό
θεός, Heb. xii. 7 (very often so in Attic writ. fr. Thuc.
and Xen. down ; Philo de Josepho § 10; de ebrietate
§16; Joseph. b.j. 7,8, 1; Ael. v.h. 12, 27 ; Hdian. 1, 13,
14 [7 ed. Bekk.]).*
■π-ροσ-φιλήβ, -if, (προς and φίΧέω), acceptable, pleasing,
[X. V. Inre/y] : Phil. iv. 8. (From [Aeschyl. and] Hdt.
down; Sir. iv. 7; xx. 13.)*
ττροίΓ-φορό, -or, η, (προσφ(ρω), offering ; i. e. 1.
the act of offering, a bringing to, (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.).
2. that which is offered, a gifl, a present, (Soph. O. C.
1270; Theophr. char. 30 sub fin.). In the N. T. a sac-
rifice [A.V. offering'], whether bloody or not : Aets .xxi.
26 ; x.xiv. 1 7 ; Eph. v. 2 ; lleb. x. 5, 8, 14, (Sir. xiv. 1 1 ;
-xxxi. (xxxiv.) 21 (19) ; xxxii. (xxxv.) 1, 6 (8); once for
nnjO, Ps. xxxix. (.xl.) 7) ; π(ρ\ αμαρτίας, offering for sin,
expiatory sacrifice, Heb. x. 18 ; with the gen. of the ob-
ject, ToC σώματος Ίησοϋ Xp. Heb. .X. 10; των (θνών, the
sacrifice which I offer in turning the (ientiles to God,
Ro. XV. 16.•
τ7ρο(Γ-φων€ω, -ώ ; iinpf. 3 pers. sing, προσιφώνη ; 1 aor.
προσεφώνησα ; 1. to call to ; to address by calling :
absol., Lk. xiii. 12 ; xxiii. 20 (where L WH add aiToIs) ;
Acts xxi. 40, (Horn. Od. 5, 159 etc.) ; with the dat. of
a i)ers. [cf. AV.36], Mt. xi. 16 ; Lk. vii. 32; Acts xxii. 2,
(Diog. Laert. 7, 7). 2. to call to one's self, summon ;
τινά (so the better Grk. writ. ; see Matthiae § 402 b. ; [W.
§52,4, 14]), Lk. vi. 13.•
ττρ6<Γ-χν(Γΐ%, -(ως, ή, (προσχίω to pour on), a pouring
or sprinklinfj upon, affusion : του αίματος, Heb. xi. 28.
(Eccles. writ. [e. g. Just. M. apol. 2, 12 χ,. 50 d.].) *
ΐΓρθ(Γ-ψοΰω, to touch : τινί [cf. W. § 52, 4, 14], a thing,
Lk. xi. 46. (Pind., Soph., Byzant. writ.)*
ΐΓροσωίΓολητΓΤί'ω (LT Tr WH -\ημπτ(ω [see M, μ1), -ώ',
a Hellenistic verb (derived fr. the foil, word [cf. Win. 33,
101 (96)]), to respect the person (i. e. the external condi-
tion of a man), to have respect of persons: Jas. ii. 9.*
προσ-ωπο-λήπτης (L Τ Tr WH -λήμτττης [see M, μ]), -ου,
ό, (a Hellenistic formation fr. πρόσωπον and λαμβάνω ;
see λαμβάνω, I. 4 p. 370' bot.), an accepter [A. V. re-
specter] of persons (Vulg. personarum acceptor) : Acts .x.
34. Not found elsewhere [exc. in Chrysost.].*
ττροσωτΓολ,ηι^ία
551
•προσωτΓΟΡ
ιτρο<Γ<ι>ποληψ(α (L Τ Τγ WH -"Κημψία [see Μ, μ]), -as,
ή, (a Hellenistic formation ; [see ττροσωτΓολήτΓΠ/ί]), re-
spect of persons ( Vulg. personarum acceplio), partiality,
the fault of one who when called on to requite or to give
judgment has respect to the outward circumstances of
men and not to their intrinsic merits, and so prefers, as
the more worthy, one who is rich, high-born, or power-
ful, to another who is destitute of such gifts : Ro. ii. 11;
Eph. vi. 9 ; Col. iii. 20 ; plur. (which relates to the vari-
ous occasions and instances in which this fault shows
itself [cf.W. 176 (166); B. § 123, 2, 2]), Jas. ii. 1. (Ec-
cles. writ.)*
τΓρόϊΓωπον, -ου, το, (fr. ττράί and ώ^, cf. μίτωττον), fr.
Horn, down; Sept. hundreds of times for D'JD, also for
D"DS, etc. ; 1. a. /Ae /hce, i. e. the anterior part
of the human head: Mt. vi. 16, 17; .wii. 2; -xxvi. 67;
Mk. xiv. 65 ; Lk. [ix. 29] ; xxii. 64 [T Tr WH cm. Lchm.
br. the cl.] ; Acts vi. 15 ; 2 Co. iii. 7, 1.•!, 18 ; [xi. 20] ; Rev.
iv. 7 ; ix. 7 ; X. 1 ; τέ πρόσωπον Tijs yf KeVewr, the face with
which one is born [A. V. his natural face'\, Jas. i. 23 ;
πι'πτίΐΐ'ίπΐ πρόσ. [cf. W. § 27, In.; 122 (116)] and (Vt το
πρήσ., Mt. xvii. 6; xxvi. 39; Lk. v. 12; xvii. 16; 1 Co.
xiv. 25 ; [Rev. vii. 1 1 Rec. ; ιτίτπ-. eVl τα πρόσ.. Rev. xi.
16 ; vii. 1 1 G L Τ Tr WH] ; άγνοονμΐνύς τινι τω προσωπω,
unknown to one by face, i. e. personnlli/ unk'noirii. Gal. i.
22; bereaved of one προσώπω, οΰ καρδία [.V. V. in pres-
ence, Jiot in hearti, 1 Th. ii. 17; κατά πρόσωπον, in or
towards (i. e. so as to look into) the face, i. e. before, in
the presence of [see κατά, II. 1 c] : opp. to απών, 2 Co. x.
1 ; with Tii/os added, before (the face of) one, Lk. ii. 31 ;
Acts iii. 13 ; e;^» τινά κατά πρόσωπον, i. e. to have one
present in person [A. V. face to facel. Acts xxv. 16;
άντίστην κατά πρόσωπον, I resisted him to the face (with
a suggestion of fearlessness). Gal. ii. 11, (κατίι πρόσωπον
Xeyeiv τους Xo'yous, Polyb. 25, 5, 2 ; add Job xvi. 8 ; but
in Dent. vii. 24 ; ix. 2 ; Judg. ii. 14 ; 2 Chr. xiii. 7, άντι-
στηναι κατά πρόσ. Ttvos simply denotes to stand afjainat,
resist, withstand) ; τα κατά πρόσ. the things before the
face, i. e. open, known to all, 2 Co. x. 7. Expressions
modelled after the Hebrew : opaf τό πρόσωπον τιι /os, to
see one's face, see him personally. Acts xx. 25 ; Co), ii. 1 ;
Ihdv, 1 Th. ii. 17 ; iii. 10 ; θ(ωρ(ΐν, Acts xx. 38 [cf. β(ωρίω,
2 a.] ; particularly, βλίπαν τό πρόσ. τοΰ θ(οϋ (see βλΐπω,
1 b. β.), Mt. xviii. 10 ; όραν τ. πρ- τ. θ(οϋ (see όράω, 1),
Rev. xxii. 4 ; ίμφανισθηναί τώ προσ. τον θ(οϋ, to appear
before the face of God, spoken of Christ, the eternal
priest, who has entered into the heavenly sanctuary,
Heb. ix. 24 ; in imitation of the Hebr. D'JD-^s* D"J3
we have the phrase πρόσωπον πρός πρόσωπον, face (turned
[see πρής, I. 1 a. p. 541'•]) to face (ei&o'v τίνα. Gen. xxxii.
30 ; Judg. vi. 22) : trop. β\ίπω sc. τόνθ(όν, see God face
to face, i.e. discern perfectly his nature, will, purposes,
1 Co. xiii. 12; a person is said to be sent or to go προ
προσώπου τινός ("3 •}βΊ) [cf. W. § 65, 4 b. fin. ; B. 319
(274)], i.e. before one, to announce his coming and re-
move the obstacles from his way, Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2;
Lk. i. 76 ; vii. 27, (Mai. iii. 1) ; ix. 52 ; x. 1 ; jrpo προσ.
TWOS» /of time) before a thing. Acts xiii. 24 (so 'J•)'? in
Am. i. 1 ; Zech. viii. 10; where the Sept. simply ηρό [cf.
προ, b. p. 536' hot.]), πρός φωτισμόν της γνώσιως της δό-
ξης τοΰ θίοϋ {'ν προσωπω Ίησοΰ Χρίστου, that we may
bring forth into the light the knowledge of the glory of
God as it shines in the face of .lesus Christ, 2 Co. iv. 6
(Paul really means, the majesty of God manifest in the
person of Christ; but the signification of πρόσωπον
is '■face,' and Paul is led to use the word by what he had
said in iii. 13 of the brightness visible in the face of
Moses). b. countenance, look (Lat. vultus), i. e. the
face so far forth as it is the organ of sight, and (bv its
various movements and changes) the index of the inward
thoughts and feelings : κΧΙναν τό πρόσ. «r την yyv, to bow
the face to the earth (a characteristic of fear and anx-
iety), Lk. xxiv. 5; Hebraistic phrases relating to the
direction of the countenance, the look: το πρόσωπον τού
κυρίου ('πι τίνα, sc. (στίν, the face of the Lord is (turned)
upon one, i. e. he looks ujion and watches him, 1 Pet. iii. 1 2
(fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 1 7) ; στήριζαν τό πρόσ. (Hebr. UW
or □'J3 jnj ; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 1109 on the same
form of expression in Syriac, Arabic, Persian, Turkish)
ToO nopeieadai (Ις with an ace. of the place [A.V. stead-
fastly to set one's face to fjo etc. (see στηρίζω, a.)], Lk. ix.
51 ; moreover, even to πρόσ. τινός ί'στι πορΐυόμ(νον els
with ace. of place, ib. 53 (το πρόσωπον σου πορ(υόμ(νον
€v μ^σω αυτών, 2 S. xvii. 11) ; από προσώπου τινός φ^υ•
yav, to flee in terror from the face (Germ. Anblic/c) of
one enraged. Rev. xx. 1 1 ; κρύπτιιν τινά etc. (see κρϋτίτω,
a.). Rev. vi. 16 ; άνά•^υξις από προσώπου 6foi, the re-
freshing which comes from the bright and smiling coun-
tenance of God to one seeking comfort, Acts iii. 20 (19) ;
on 2 Th. i. 9 see από, p. 59' mid. ; μ(τά τοΰ προσώπου σου,
sc. όντα, in the presence of thy joyous countenance [see
μίτά, I. 2 b. /3.], Acts ii. 28 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 11); els
πρόσωπον των (κκ\ησιών, turned unto [i. e. in (R.V.)] the
face of the churches as the witnesses of your zeal, 2 Co.
viii. 24 ; iva 4κ ποΧΚών προσώπων . . , δια ττολλών €νχαρι-
στηθί/, that from many faces (turned toward God and e.\-
pressing the devout and grateful feelings of the soul)
thanks may be rendered by many (accordingly, both en
ΐΓολλ. προσ- and δια ττολλών belong to (νχαριστηθη [cf.
Meyer ad loc. ; see below]), 2 Co. i. 11. άπό προσώπου
τινός ("3 'J3'p),/ra)n the sight or presence of one. Acts v.
41; \u. io [here ΑΛ^. before the face; Rev. xii. 14]; (p
προσωπω Χρίστου, in the presence of Christ, i. e. Christ
looking on (and approving), 2 Co. ii. 10 (Prov. viii. 30) ;
[some would render πρόσωπον here and in i. 11 above
person (cf. R.V.) : — here nearly i. q. on the part of (Vu\g.
in persona Christi) ; there i. q. ' an individual ' (Plut. de
garrul. 13 p. 509 b. ; Epiet. diss. 1, 2, 7 ; Polyb. 8, 13, 5 ;
12, 27, 10; 27,6,4; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 1 ; 47,6; Phryn.
p. 379, and Lobeck's note p. 380)]. c. Hebrais-
tically, the appearance one presents by his wealth or pov-
erty, his rank or low condition ; outward circu7nslances,
external condition ; so used in expressions which denote
to regard the person in one's judgment and treatment of
men : βΚίπ^ιν €ΐς πρόσωπον ανθρώπων, Alt. xxii. 16; Mk.
xii. 14 ; θαυμάζ(ΐν πρόσωπα, J ude 16 ; \αμβάν(ΐν πρόσωποι
•jrp
οτίίσσω
552
ττροφητΐύω
(tivos), Lk. XX. 21 ; Gal. ii. G, (on ivliich see βλ/πω, 2 c,
ύαυμάζω, Χαμβάνω, I. 4). κανχάσθαι eV ττροσώπω και oi
καρδία, to glory in those things which they simulate
in lout, viz. piety, love, righteousness, although their
heart is devoid of these virtues, 2 Co. v. 12, cf. 1 .S. .\vi.
7. 2. the outward uppearance of inanimate things
[A. X.face (e.\c. in Jas. as below)]: τοί) ίΊνθυυς, Jas. i.
11 ; τοΰ ονρανοΰ, τη! γη!, Mt. xvi. 3 [here Tbr. WH rejeet
the i)ass.] ; Lk. xii. 56 (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 30) ; (so in Lat.,
naturae vullus, 0\id. metam. 1, 6; maris fades, Ver^.
Aen. 5, 768 ; on this use of the noun fades see Gell. noc-
tes atticae 13, 29); surface : της γη!, Lk. .x.xi. 3ϋ; .Vets
xvii. 26 [on the omitted art. here cf. πα!, L 1 c.], (Gen.
ii. 6 ; xi. »).*
Ίτρο-τάσσω : jif. pass. ptcp. πμοτίταγμίνο! ; 1. to
/>liuu; l/tfore. 2. to appoint tiiforc, defiie beforehand :
χρόνον. Soph. Trach. 164; καιροίΐ!, pass. Acts xvii. 26
Ucc. (see προστάσσω. 2); νάμον!, pass. 2 Mace. viii. 36.*
ιτρο-τίίνω ; 1 aor. προ/ reira ; [fr. lldt. down] ; to stretch
forth, stretch out : ών προΐτ^ιναν [Hec. -i/fv] αντοντοί! Ιμα-
σιν, when they had stretched him out for the thongs i. e.
to receive the blows of the thongs, (by t}ing him up to
a beam or a pillar ; for it apjjears from vs. 2:t that Paul
had already been bound), Acts xxii. 2.5 [W. § 31 init. ;
al. (cf. R. V. txt.) ' with the thongs ' (cf. tpat)].*
πρότεροι, -α, -ov, (compar. of προ), [fr. Iloin. down], he-
fore, prior ; of tuna, forvter : η -προτίρα αναστροφή, Eph.
iv. 22. Neut. adverbially, before (something else is or
was done) : Jn. vii. 51 RG ; 2 Co. i. 15 ; opp. to ίπατα,
lleb. vii. 27; before i.e. afaretime, in time past: Jn. vii.
50[LTr Wll]; lleb. iv. 6 ; and R Gin 1 Tim. i. 13; al.so
TO npuTepov (contrasting the past with the present [cf.
πάλαι, 1 fin.]), .Jn. vi. 62; ix. 8, and LTTr W'll in 1 Tim.
i. 13, (1 Mace. iii. 46; v. 1; xi. 34, 39 ; Deut. ii. 12; Josh.
xi. 10; Ildt. 7, 75 ; Xen., Plat.) ; i. q. our the first time,
(jal. iv. 13 (on which cf. Meyer) ; it is placed between
the art. and the noun, as ai πμότιρον ήμίραι, the former
days, lleb. x. 32; αϊ πρότ. (πιθυμίαι, the lusts which you
formerly indulged, 1 Pet. i. 14."
■π-ρο-τίθημ,ι. : 2 aor. mid. 7rpofdfp7;v; [fr. Horn, down];
1. to place before, to set forth, [cf. προ, d. a.] ; s])ec. to
set forth to be looked at, expose to view : Ex. xl. 4 ; 4 Mace,
viii. 11; AeL v. h. 14, 8 ; and often in the mid. in this
sense: ττοτήρια αργύρια re και χρνσία, his own cups, Ildt.
3, 148 ; to expose to public view, in which sense it is the
technical term with profane authors in speaking of the
bodies of the dead, [ίο let lie in state'}, (cf. PassoΛV s. v. I. 2 ;
[L. and S. s. v. IL 1]; Stallbauraon Plat. Phaedop. 115 e.;
[Kriiger on Thuc. 2, 34, 1]) ; the mid. points to the own-
er of the thing exposed: so with τινά and a pred. ace.
Ro. iii. 25 (th(! mid. seems to denote that it was his
own Son whom he thus "set forth"; cf. viii. 32). 2.
Mid. to set before one's self, propose to one's self; to
purpose, determine, (Plato, Polyb., al.) : foil, by the inf.
Ro. i. 13 ; with an ace. of the thing and iv αΰτώ [(sir) ;
see πύτοΰ] added, in himself (W. § 38, G ; [cf. p. 152
(144)]), Eph. i. 9; [ah (reading Iv αΙτω with LTTr
WII) render 'in him,' i. e. (probably) Christ].*
ΐΓρο^ρίΐτω : 1 aor. mid. ptcp. προτριψάμίνο! ; to urge
forwards, exhort, encouraye, (often so by Attic writ^
both in the act. and the mid.) : Acts xviii. 27. (Sap.
xiv. 18 ; 2 Mace. .\i. 7. [From Horn, down.]) *
ΤΓρο-τρ€χω : 2 aor. προίδραμον; to run before, to outrun :
Jn. -\.\. 4 ; with ίμπροσθίν added, i. e. ahead, in advance,
[R. V. 'to run on before 'J, cf. \V. 6(J3 (5G1) ; [B. § 151,
27], Lk. xix. 4 ; ίμπρ. with the gen. of a pers. Tob. xi. 2.
(1 S. viii. 11 ; Xen., Isoer., Theo|)hr., al.) *
•προ-ϋττ-άρχω : impf. 7rpou'7r^p;^oi' ; fr. Thuc. and Plato
down ; to br before, exist preciouslij : with a ptc|>. Acts
viii. 9; προϋιτήρχον oiTfs, Lk. xxiii. 12; cf. Bornemann,
Schol. ad h. I ; \V. 350 (:!28) ; [Ii. § 144, 14].*
πρό-φαοΓΐ5, -ecus, ή, (ττροφαίνω, i. e. jirop. ' to cause to
shine before' [or ' forth'; but many derive πρόφασί! di-
rectly fr. πρό-φημι]), fr. Horn, down; a. a pretext
(alleged reason, pretended cause) : τη! πλ(ον(ξία!, such as
covetousness is wont to use, 1 Th. ii. 5 ([A. V. cloak oj
coretousness^ the meaning being, that he had never mis-
used his apostolic ofHce in order to disguise or to hide ava-
ricious designs) ; πρόφασιν ίχιιν (a phrase freii- in (!rk.
auth., cf. Passow s. v. πρ. 1 b. vol. ii. p. 1251'' ; [L. and S.
s. v. I. 3 e.]) nfp\ τη! αμαρτία!, Jn. XV. 22 [A. V. mrg. R. V.
excuse}. b. show: προφάσ(ΐ ω! κτλ. [Α. V.] niider
color as though they ivould etc. Acts xxvii. 30; προφάσιι,
[A. Y.for a pretence}, in pretence, ostensibly : Mt. xxiii.
14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx. 47; Phil. i. 18.*
■προ-φε'ρω ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to bring forth : τι (< τίνα,
Lk. vi. 45.*
■π-ροφητίία, -as, ή, (προφητ(ύω, i{. v.), Hebr. ΠΝΪ3^,
prophecij, i. e. discourse emanating from divine inspira-
tion and declaring the purposes of (jod, whether by re-
proving and admonishing the wicked, or comforting the
afflicted, or revealing things hidden ; esp. by foretell-
ing future events. Used in the N. T. — of the utter-
ances of the O. T. prophets: Mt. xiii. 14 ; 2 Pet. i. 20, 21
(on this pass, see γίνομαι, 5 e. a.) ; — of the prediction of
events relating to Christ's kingdom and its speedy tri-
umph, together with the consolations and admonitions
pertaining thereto : Rev. xi. 6; xxii. 19; το πνιϋμα τη!
προφητεία!, the spirit of jjrophecy, the divine mind, to
which the prophetic faculty is due, Rev. .\ix. 10 ; o! λόγοι
τη! ττροφητίίαί, Kev. i. 3 ; xxii. 7, 10, 18 ; — of the endow-
ment and speech of the Christian teachers called προ-
φήται (see προφήτη!, Π. 1 f.) : Ro. xii. 6 ; 1 Co. xii. 10;
xiii. 2 ; xiv. (i, 22; plur. the gifts and utterances of
these prophets, 1 Co. xiii. 8; 1 Th. v. 20; — spec, of the
prognostication of those achievements which one set
apart to teach the gospel will accomplish for the king-
dom of Christ, 1 Tim. iv. 14 ; plur. i. 18 [see προάγω, 2 a.
and cf. the Comm.]. ([Sejit., Joseph.] ; among native
Grk. writ, used only by Leian. Alex. 40, 60 ; [to which
add inscrr. (see L. and S. s. v. I.)].)*
Ίτροφητίνω ; fut. ιτροφητ(νσω ; impf. 7Τρο(φήτ€νον (Acts
xix. 6 RG) and ΐπροφήτίυον (ibid. LTTr AVH; [1 K.
xxii. 12]; .ler. [ii. 8] ; xxiii. 21 ; xxv. 13) ; 1 aor. πρη(φή•
τίυσα (RG in Mt. vii. 22; xi. 13; xv. 7; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. i.
G7; [Jn. xi. 51 ; Jude 14]) and ΐπροφήτινσα (which form
■προφήτης
553
ΤΓροφήτη<{
cod. Sin. gives everywh., and TTrWII have everywh.
restored, and Lchm. also ivith the single exception of
Jude 14; add, Sir. .xlviii. 13; 1 Esdr. vi. 1; Jer. xxxiii.
(xxvi.) 9, 11, iO; xxxv. (xxviii.) 8 ; xxxvi. (xxix.) 31 ;
the Alexandrian translators more com. use the forms
πμοΐφητ^υον^ ιτροεφητΐνσα, |jf. ptcp. ττρυπΐφητςυκώζ, Eus.
h. e. .), 1 Γ ; pf. pass. int. πpoπfφητ(ϋσθm, ί lem. Alex.
Strom, p. 603 ; on the forms used by Justin M. see Otto's
prolegg. to his works, I. i. p. Ixxv. ed. 3 ; cf. [ WH. App.
p. 1G2; Veitch s. v.]; W. § 12, 5; [B. 35 (30 sq.)] ; cf.
Fritzsehe on ΛΙΙί. p. 208; [ώ'ο^Λ. Lex. s. v.]) ; (προφήτη:,
q. v.) ; Sept. for N3J and X3jrin ; Vulg. prophelo [three
times prophetizo]; to pru/jhes y, i. e. to be a pruphet,
speak forth hij divine inspiration ; to predict (Hdt., Find.,
Eur., Plat., Plut., al.) ; a. univ. : Mt. vii. 22. b.
with the idea oi foretelling future events pertaining esp. to
the kingdom of God : Mt. xi. 13; Acts ii. 17, 18; xxi. 9;
TTcpinvos, Mt. .xv. 7; Mk. vii. 6 ; 1 Pet. i. 10; «Vt Τίκ», over
i. e. concerning one (see eVi, B. 2 f. β. p. 234"), Rev. .x. 1 1 ;
its Tifa (i. e. Christ), Barn. ep. 5, 6 ; προφ. foil, by XeytaK
with the words uttered by the prophet, Jude 14 ; foil, by
Sti, Jn. xi. 51. c. to utter forth, declare, a thing
luhich can only be known by divine revelation : Mt. xxvi. C8 ;
Mk. xiv. 65 ; Lk. xxii. 64, cf. vii. 39 ; Jn. iv. 19. d.
to break forth under sudden impulse in lofty discourse or
in praise of the divine counsels: Lk. i. 67 ; Acts xix. 6, (1
S. X. 10, 11 ; xix. 20, 21, etc.) ; — or, underthe like prompt-
ing, to leach, refute, reprove, admonish, comfort others (see
■προφήτη!, II. 1 f.), 1 Co. .xi. 4, 5; .xiii. 9; xiv. 1, 3, 4, 5,
24, 31, 39. e. to act as a prophet, discharge the
prophetic office : Rev. xi. 3. [On the word see Trench,
N. T. Syn. § vi.] *
■π-ροφήτηϊ, -ου, 6, (πρόφημι, to speak forth, speak out;
hence prop, 'one who speaks forth'; seejrpo, d. a.), Sept.
for K'5J (which comes fr. the same root as if^, 'to di-
vulge,' ' make known,' ' announce ' [cf. Fleischer in De-
litzsch. Com. u. d. Gen., 4te Aufl. p. 551 sq.], therefore
prop. i. q. interpreter, Ex. vii. 1, cf. iv. 16 ; hence an in-
terpreter or spokesman for God ; one through whom God
speaks ; cf. esp. Bleek, Einl. in d. A. T. 4te Aufl. p. 309
[B. D. 8. V. Prophet and reff. there ; esp. also Day's
note on Oehler's O. T. Theol. § 161, and W. Robertson
Smith, Prophets of Israel, p. 389 (note on Lect. ii.)]),
one who speaks forth by divine inspiration; I. In
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl., Hdt., and Pind. down 1. an
interpreter of oracles (whether uttered by the gods or
the μάντα:), or of other hidden things. 2. a fore-
teller, soothsayer, seer. II. In the N. T. 1.
one who, moved by the Spirit of God and hence his organ
or spokesman, solemnly declares to men what he has re-
ceived by inspiration, esp. future evetits, and in particular
such as relate to the cause and kingdom of God and to hu-
man salvation. The title is applied to a. the 0. T.
prophets, — and with allusion to their age, life, death,
deeds: Mt.v.l2; xii. 39 ; xiii. 17 ; xxiii. 29-31 ; Mk. vi.
15 ; Lk. iv. 27 ; x. 24 ; xi. 47 ; xiii. 28 ; Jn. viii. 52, 53 ;
Acts iii. 25; vii. 52 ; xiii. 20; Ro. xi. 3 ; 1 Th. ii. 15; Heb.
£132; Jas. v. 10 ; appeal is made to their utteran'-es as
having foretold the kingdom, deeds, death, of Jesus the
Messiah: Mt. i. 22 ; ii. 5, 15, 17, 23 ; iii. 3 ; iv. 14 ; viii.
17; xi. 13 ; .xii. 1 7 ; xiii. 35 ; xxi. 4 ; .xxiv. 15 ; xxvi. 56 ;
xxvii. 9 ; Mk. xiii. 14 Rec. ; Lk. i. 70 ; iii. 4 ; iv. 1 7 ; xviii.
31 ; xxiv. 25 ; Jn. i. 23, 45 (46) ; xii. 38 ; Acts ii. 16 ; iii.
18,21,24; vii.37,48; x.43; xiii. 27; xv. 15; xxvi. 22 sq.;
Ro. i. 2 ; lieb. i. 1 ; 1 Pet. i. 10 ; 2 Pet. iii. 2 ; Rev. x. 7 ;
in the number of prophets David also is reckoned, as one
who predicted the resurrection of Christ, Acts ii. 30 sq. ;
so too is Balaam, 2 Pet. ii. 16 (see Βαλαάμ). by meton.
ττροφηται is put for the books of the prophets : Lk. xxiv.
27, 44; Acts viii. 28; xiii. 15; xxiv. 14; xxviii. 23; it
τοΐί ττροφήταΐ!, i. q. eV βίβλω των προφ. (Acts vii. 42), in
the volume of the prophets (which in Hebr. has the title
D"X'?J), Jn. vi. 45; Acts xiii. 40; — or for the teaching
set forth in their books: Mt. v. 17 ; vii. 12; xxii. 40;
Lk. xvi. 29, 31 ; Acts xxvi. 27. See νόμοι, 4. b.
John the Baptist, the herald of Jesus the Messiah :
Mt. xxi. 26 ; Mk. vi. 15 ; xi. 32 ; Lk. i. 76 ; xx. 6, whom
Jesus declares to be greater than the O. T. prophets, be-
cause in him the hope of the Jews respecting Elijah as
the forerunner of the Messiah was fulfilled : Mt. xi. 9-
U, 14, (cf. xvii. 11, 12; Mk. ix. 12 sq.); Lk. vii. 28 [R G
Τ Tr br.]. c. That illustrious prophet whom the
Jews (apparently on the ground of Deut. xviii. 15) e.x-
pected to arise just before the Messiah's advent : Jn. i.
21, 25; vii. 40. those two illustrious prophets, the one
Elijah, the other Enoch or Moses [but cf. the Coram. ;
e. g. Stuart, Com. vol. ii. p. 219 sq.], who according to
the >Triter of the Apocalypse will publicly appear shortly
before the visible return of Christ from heaven : Rev. xi.
10 (cf. 3). d. the Messiah : Acts iii. 22, 23; vii. 37,
after Deut. xviii. 15; Jesus the Messiah, inasmuch as he
is about to fulfil the e.xpectation respecting this Messiah,
Mt. xxi. 11; Jn. vi. 14. e. univ. a man filed with
the Spirit of God, who by God's authority and command in
words of weight pleads the cause of God and urges the sal-
vation of men : Mt. xxi. 46 ; Lk. xiii. 83 ; xxiv. 19 ; Jn.
vii. 52 ; in the proverb that a prophet is without honor in
his own country, Mt. xiii. 57 ; Mk. vi. 4 ; Lk. iv. 24 ; Jn.
iv. 44. he may be known — now by his supernatural
knowledge of hidden things (even though past), Lk. vii.
39 ; Jn. iv. 19, (προφήτης άΧηθβίας eariv 6 πάντοτί πάντα
€ί8ά}ς, τα μίν •yeyovoTa ως eyeVfTo, τα δι γινόμενα ω: yivfTai,
τα δι (σήμανα ώί ίσται, Clem. horn. 2, G), — now by his
power of working miracles, Lk. vii. 16 ; xxiv. 19 ; Jn. ix.
17; such a prophet Jesus is shown to have been by the
passages cited, nor is it denied except by his enemies, Lk.
vii. 39 ; Jn. vii. 52. f. The prophets that appeared
in the apostolic age among the Christians: Mt. x. 41 ;
xxiii. 34; Acts xv. 32; 1 Co. xiv. 29, 37 ; Rev. xxii. 6, 9;
they are associated with apostles in Lk. xi. 49 ; 1 Co.
.xii. 28, 29 ; Eph. ii. 20 ; iii. 5 ; iv. 1 1 ; Rev. xviii. 20 ; they
discerned and did what was hest for the Christian cause.
Acts xiii. 1 sq. ; foretold certain future events. Acts xi.
27 sq.; xxi. lOsqq. ; and in the religious assemblies of
the Christians, being suddenly seized by the Spirit (whose
7Γρυφητικυ(;
554
ττρωτος
promptings, however, do not impair tlieir self-govern-
ment, 1 Co. xiv. 3'2), give utterance in glowing and ex-
alted but intelligible language to those things which the
Holy Spirit teaulies them, and which have power to in-
struct, comfort, encourage, rebuke, convict, stimulate,
their hearers, 1 Co. xiv. 3, 24. [Cf. Harnack, Lehre der
Zwolf Apostel, Proleg. § 5 i. 2 p. 9.3 sqq. 119 S(iq. ; Bon-
wetsch in (Luthardt's) Zeitsehr. f. kirehl. Wissen. u. s. w.
1884, pp. 408 sciq. 460 sqq.] g. Prophets both of the
Old 'Pest, and of the New are grouped together under
the name προφηται in Itev. xi. 1 8 ; xvi. 6 ; xviii. 24. 2.
a piif'l (because poets were believed to sing under divine
iiisjiiration) : so of Epimenides, Tit. i. 12.
■προφητικό?, -ή, -όν, (προφήτης), proceeding from a
prophet ; prophetic : Ro. xvi. 2ii ; 2 Pet. i. 19. [Philo de
migr. Abr. § 15, etc.; Lcian. Alex. 60; eccles. writ.]*
ιτροφήτΐϊ, -ιδθ£, ή, (■προφήτηί), Sept. for ni<"3J, a proph-
etess (Vulg., Tertull. prophetissa, propkettx), a woman to
whom future events or things hidden from others are at
times revealed, either hy inspiration or by dreams and
visions: Lk. ii. 36; Rev. ii. 20. In Grk. usage, ο yema/e
U'hr, declares or interprets oracles (Eur., Plat., Plut.) : ή
προφήτις της αληθείας ιστορία, Diod. 1, 2.*
•προ-φθάνω : 1 aor. προίφθασα; to come before, to antici-
pate : avTov προίφβασί λίγων, he spoke before him [R.V.
spake first to html, •"■ anticipated his remark, Mt. xvii.
2S (Aeschyl., Eur., Arstph., Plut. ; Sept.) *
■n-po-xitpC^M {πpόχfιpυς at hand [cf. προ, d. a.] or ready):
1 aor. mid. προιχαρισάμην; pf. pass. ptcp. ■προκίχιφισμΐ-
νος \ to put into the hanil, to deliver into the liantls : far
more freq. in the mid. to take into one's hands; trop. to
set hejore one's self, to propose, to determine; with an ace.
of the pers. to choose, to appoint, (Isocr., Polyb., Dion.
Hal., Plut., al. ; 2 Mace. iii. 7 ; viii. 9 ; Ex. iv. 13) : foil.
by an inf. of purpose. Acts xxii. 14 ; Ttra with a pred.
ace. Acts xx vi. 16; τικά with a dat. of the pers. for one's
use, Josh. iii. 12; for one's salvation, pass. Acts iii. 20 for
Rec- ττροκΐκηρνγμϊνον (cf. προκηρύσσω, 2).*
Ίτρο-χίΐρο-τονί'ω, -ώ : pf. pass. ptc]). προκ(χ(ΐροτονημίνος;
(see χίΐροτηνίω) ; to choose or designate beforehand : Acts
X. 41. (Plat. legg. 6 p. 7G5 b. c., [Aeschin., Dem.], Dio
Cass. 50, 4.) •
Πρόχοροΐ, [-ου, ό, (lit. ' leader of the dance ')], Proch'-
orus, one of the seven ' deacons ' of the church at Jeru-
salem : Acts vi. 5.•
ιτρύμνα, -t;s, η, (fem. of the adj. πρνμνός, -ή, -όν, last,
hindmost ; used substantively with recessive accent ; [cf.
W. 22]). fr. Hom. down, the stern or hinder part of a
ship: Mk. iv. 38; Acts xxvii. 29; opp. to πρώρα. ib. 41.*
■π-ρωί [WH πρωί (cf. I, t, fin.)] (Attic πρώ [cf. W. § 5,
4 d.]), adv., (fr. ττρό), fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for ipil^
in the morning, early, (opp. to όψ(') : Jn. xviii. 28 G L Τ
Tr WH ; ISIt. xvi. 3 (opp. here to όψίαί -γαιομίνης [but
Τ br. WH reject the pass.]) ; [xxi. 18 Τ Tr txt. WH] ;
Mk. i. 35; xi. 20; xvi. 9 ; [πρωί. σκοτίας crt ονσης, Jn. xx.
1]; λίηρ πρωί, foil, [in R G] by a gen. of the day (cf.
Kuhner § 414, 5 c. β. ii. p. 292), Mk. xvi. 2 ; άμα πρωί,
Mt. XX. 1 ; Μ τΑ ποωΓ, Mk. χν. 1 [R G] ; άπο πρωί ίως
(σποράς, Acts xxviii. 23. Used spec, of the fourth watch
of the night, i. e. the time fr. 3 o'clock in the morning
till 6, ace. to our reckoning [(cf. B. D. s. v. Watches of
the Night)], Mk. xiii. 35.»
πρωία, see πρωίας.
πρώίμοϊ (for the more com. πρώϊοί ; cf. Loh. ad Phryn.
p. 52), TTr WH πρόϊμοί (so also cod. Sin.; [see 117/.
App. p. 152]), -i;, -ov, {πρωί), early; ifras, the early rain
(llebr. rriV, Deut. xi. 14; Jer. v. 24), which fell fr.
October on [(cf. B.D. s. v. Rain)], Jas. v. 7 [L Τ Tr WH
om. ifT. ; cf. W. 592 (550); B. 82 (72)]. (Xen. oec.
17, 4; Geop., al.) *
πρωινό? [WH πρωινός (see their App. p. 152), Tdf.
ed. 7 προΊκίίί (cf. I, i)], (for the older πρώϊο?, see opipiTOt;
the same term, in the Lat. serotinus, iliutinu.i), -ή, -όν,
(πρωί), pertaining to the morning; 6 άστηρ 6 πρ. Rev.
ii. 28 (on which see άστηρ); xxii. 16 (where Rec. op-
θρινός). [Sept. ; Babr., Plut., Ath., al.] *
πρώ'ιΌϊ [WH πρώίος], -a, -ov, (πρωί), early, pertaining
to the morning, (fr. Hom. down) ; as a subst. ή πρωία
(in full ή ωρα ή πρωία, 3 Mace. v. 24; [Diod., Josejih.,
al.] ; see όψιυς, 2), Sept. several times for ipi, morning :
Mt. xxvii. 1 ; Jn. xviii. 28 Rec; .xxi. 4 [πρωίας ήδη γινο-
μένης (TAVH Tr txt.), «Λί'η day was now breaking {Μ.Χ.)];
πρωίας, in the morning, Mt. xxi. 18 [R G L Tr mrg.].*
πρώρα [so R G, πρώρα Tr], more correctly πρώρα (see
Gottling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 142sq. ; [Chandler §1C4;
Etym. Magn. p. 692, 34 sq. ; cf. 318, 57 sq. ; cf.I, i]),
-ας (L• Τ WH -ης, cf. μάχαιρα, init.), 17, [contr. fr. προΓίρα
fr. ττρό; Lob. Pathol. Element, ii. 13(j, cf. Paralip. j). 215],
fr. Hom. down ; the prow or forward part of a ship [R.V.
foreship'\; Acts xxvii. 30; in vs. 41 distinguished fr. ή
πρνμνα.*
πρωτίνω ; (πρώτος) ; to be first, hold the frst place,
[A. V. have the pre-eminence']: Col. i. 18. (From Xen.
and Plat, down.) *
πρωτοκαθξδρία, -ας, ή, (πρώτος and κάθιδρα q. v.), a sit-
ting in the frst seat, the first or chief seat ; Mt. ,\xiii. 6;
Mk. xii. 39 ; Lk. xi. 43 ; xx. 46. (Eccles. writ.) *
πpωτo-κλι<ΓCα, -ας, η, (πρώτος and κλισία), the frst re-
cl'ining-plare, the chief place, at table [cf. Itich, Diet, of
Rom. and Grk. Anticj. s. v. lectus tricliniaris ; the rela-
tive ranlc of the several places at table varied among
Persians, Greeks, and Romans ; and what arrangement
was currently followed by the Jews in Christ's da}• can
hardly, perhaps, be determined ; (yet see Edersheim,
.lesus the Messiah, ii. pp. 207 sq. 494)]: Mt. xxiii. 6;
Mk. xii. 39; Lk. xi. 4.i Lchm. in br.; xiv. 7, 8 ; xx. 46.
(Eccles. writ.)."
πρώτο?, -7), -oi',(superl. of πρό, contr. fr. πρόατος, whence
the Doric πράτοΓ; the compar. πρότιρος see in its ])lace),
[fr. Hom. down], Sept. for pt^XI and often for ΊΠ^ and
&Nl,/irsi; 1. either in time or place, in any
succession of things or of persons; a. absolutely
(i. e. without a noun) and substantively ; a. with the
article : ό πρώτος κα\ ό ίσχατος, Ί. e. the eternal One, Rev.
i. 17; ii. 8 ; x.xii. 13 ; ό πρώτος, so. τών κ(κ\ημίνων, Lk.
xiv. 18; the first of two (cf. W. § 35, 4 N. 1 ; [B. 32
πρώτον
555
Ίτρωτοτοκος
(28)]), Jn. xix. 32; 1 Co. xiv. 30 ; plur. opp. to o! Εσχα-
τοι, Mt. XX. IG, on which see €σ;(ατοΓ, 2 a. Neut. το
πρώτον, opp. to TO SfvTcpov, lleb. -x. 9 ; τά πρώτα, opp. to
τά ίσχατα, one's first state, ^]t. xii. 45 ; Lk. xi. 26 ; 2 Pet.
ii. 20 ; the first order of things, Rev. xxi. 4. β.
without the article : Mt. x. 2 (ττρώτοΓ, sc. of the apostles
to be mentioned); plur., Alt. xix. 30; Mk. x. 31; Lk.
xiii. 30, (on the meaning of Λvhich three pass, see ΐσχα-
ΤΟΓ, 2 a.) ; neut. eV πρώτοις, [A. \. first of all'\, among
the first things delivered to jou by me, 1 Co. xv. 3. b.
where it agrees with some substantive; o. anar-
throus, and in place of an adjective : πρωττ/ (sc. ήμίρα)
σιι03άτου, on the first day of the week, Mk. xvi. 9 ;
φυλακή, opp. to SevTcpa, Acts xii. 10; as a pred. Lk. li. 2
(on \vhich of. \V. § 35, 4 N. 1 ; [B. § 127, 31]). where
it is added to the subject or the object of the verb (and
we often use an adv. ; W. § 54, 2 ; [B. §123,9]): (ίρίσκιι
οίιτος πρώτος, Jn. i. 41 (42) (where L Tr WH πρώτον) ;
add, Jn. viii. 7 ; xx. 4, 8 ; Acts xxvii. 43 ; Ro. x. 19 ; 1
Tim. i. 16; 1 Jn. iv. 19; opp. to (ΐτα, 1 Tim. ii. 13; ό
πρώτος (μβάς, Jn. V. 4 (the art. belongs to ΐμβάς [(ί Τ Tr
WH om. the pass.]) ; but Acts xxvi. 23 πρώτος ΐξ άι/α-
στάσ€ως νικρών is to be translated as the first. By a
later Grk. usage it is put where πρότερος might have
been expected with the gen. (cf. Herni. ad Vig. p. 717;
Passow s. v. πράτιρος, Β. I. 2 c. ii. p. 1243" ; [L. and S.
ibid. B. I. 4 e.] ; Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. 420 sq. ; W.
§ 35, 4 X. 1 ; B. § 123, 14) : πρώτος μου ην, Jn. i. 15, 30,
(ot πρώτοι μου ταύτα άνίχνιύσαντα, Ael. nat. anim. 8,
12). β. with the article : ό (η, τό,) πρώτος (-η, -ov,),
in a series which is so complete, either in fact or in
thought, that other members are conceived of as fol-
lowing the first in regular order ; as, τάι» πρώτον λόγοι»,
Acts i. 1 ; add, Mk. xiv. 12 ; 2 Tim. iv. 16 ; Rev. iv. 1,
7; xiii. 12, etc. ; (opp. to 6 ίσχατος), ή πρ- πλάνη, Mt.
xxvii. 64; add, Mt. xx. 8, 10, 16 ; 1 Co. xv. 4-3, etc. ; also
'the first' of two, where Lat. usage requires and the
Vulg. ordinarily employs prior (cf. W. [and B.] u. s.) :
Mt. xxi. 28, 31 [L Tr WH ίστίρος} ; άλλους δούλου? πλείο-
νας των πρώτων, Mt. x.xi. 36 ; ή πρώτη ίιαθήκη, Heb. viii.
7, 13; ix. 15, 18; ή πρώτη, sc. διαθήκη. Hell. ix. 1 (J L Τ
Tr WH ; σκηνή, Heb. ix. 1 Rec, 2, 6, 8 ; ή πρ- -γή, ό πρ.
ουρανός. Rev. .\xi. 1 ; άνάστασ-ις. Rev. xx. 5, 6 ; άνθρωπος,
1 Co. XV. 47 ; foil, by ό δεύτερος, τρίτος, etc. : Mt. xxii.
25; Mk. xii. 20; Lk. xix. 16; xx. 29; Rev. viii. 7; xvi.
2 ; .xxi. 19 ; foil, by έτερος, Lk. xvi. 5 ; ό πρώτος, i. q. the
former, previous, pristine : την πρώτην πίστιν, the faith
which they formerly plighted, 1 Tim. v. 12; ή πρώτη
α-γάπη. Rev. ii. 4 ; τά πρ- έργα, ibid. 5. 2. Jirst in
rank; influence, honor; chief; principal : without the art.,
and absol., πρώτος chief (opp. to δούλος), Mt. xx. 27;
Mk. X. 44; opp. to έσχατος and διάκονος, Mk. ix. 35;
added to a noun, principal, εντολή, Mt. xxii. 38 ; Mk.
xii. 30 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.] ; Eph. vi. 2 ; with
a partitive gen., Alk. xii. 28, 29, [see πάς, II. 2 b. γ.];
1 Tim. i. 15 ; with the art., Lk. xv. 22; Acts xvii. 4 ; oi
πρώτοι τής Γαλιλαίαί, the chief men of Galilee, Mk. vi.
21; του λαοΟ, Lk. xix. 47; της πόλεως, Acts xiii. 50;
των Ιουδαίων, Acts xxv. 2 ; xxviii. 1 7 ; r^r νήσου, Acts
xxviii. 7 [cf. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. p. 208 sq., but see Πό-
πλιοϊ]. 3. neut. πρώτοι/ as adv., _^rsi,ai i/ie_/iVs<; a.
in order of time: Lk. x. 5; Jn. xviii. 13; Acts xi. 26
[here Τ Tr WH πρώτως, q. v.] ; foU. by είτα, έπειτα, or
δείιτιρον, Mk. iv. 28 ; 1 Co. xv. 46 ; 1 Th. iv. 16 ; 1 Tim.
iii. 10; foil, by μετά ταΰτα, Mk. xvi. 9 cf. 12; the first
time, opp. to εν τω δευτ^ρω (the second time). Acts vii.
12, 13; re πρώτον και, first and also (or afterward.»),
i. e. as well as, Ro. i. 16 [but here L Tr mrg. WH br.
πρ.}; ii. 9, 10; without τε, 2 Co. viii. 5; 2 Tim. i. 5.
frst i.e. before anything else is done; frst of all: Mt.
vi. 33; Lk. xii. 1; Jn. vii. 51 LTTrWH; Ro. i. 8; 1
Tim. v. 4 ; 2 Pet. i. 20 ; iii. 3 ; πρώτον πάντων, 1 Tim. ii.
1. frst'i.e. before something else: Mt. viii. 21; Mk.
vii. 27; ix. 11,12; Lk. xi. 38; xiv. 28 ; Ro. xv. 24 ; 2 Th.
ii. 3 ; 1 Pet. iv. 1 7, etc. ; before other nations. Acts iii.
26 ; .xiii. 46 ; before others [R. V. the first to partake
etc.], 2 Tim. ii. 6 ; foil, by τότί or και roTe, Mt. v. 24 ;
vii. 5 ; xii. 29 ; Mk. iii. 27 ; Lk. vi. 42 ; Jn. ii. 10 [T WH
om. L Tr br. τότε} ; ε'με πρώτον υμών [Tdf. om. ύμ•} me
before it hated ijou, Jn. xv. 18 (see 1 b. a.). to πρώτον,
at the first i. e. at the time when one did a thing for the
first time : Jn. .x. 40 ; xii. 16 ; .xix. 39. b. in enumer-
ating several particulars ; first, then, etc. : Ro. iii. 2 ; 1
Co. XI. 18; xii. 28; Heb. vii. 2; .las. iii. 17.
ιτρωτοοτάτηϊ, •ου, ό, (ττρώτοί and ΐστημι), prop, one
who stands in the front rank, a front-rank man, (Thuc,
Xen., Polyb., Diod., Dion. Hal., al. ; ώσπερ στρατηγός
πρωτοστάτης. Job .xv. 24) ; hence, a leader, chief, cham-
pion : trop. [A. V. a ringleader} της αφέσεως. Acts xxiv.
5.•
ιτρωτοτόκια, -ων, τά. (πρωτότοκος), in the Sept. also
ττρωτοτοκίία [al. -κε'ια (cf. Chandler § 99), -κία, cod. Venet.,
Aq.], forrfioa, primor/enititre, the right of the first-born,
(in class. Grk. ή πρεσβεία, and το πρεσβεΐον) : Heb. xii.
16. (Philo repeats the word after the Sept. in his alleg.
legg. 3, 69 ; sacrif. Abel. § 5. Occasionally also in By-
zant. writ.) *
irpuTOTOKOs, -ov. (πρώτος, τίκτω), Sept. for Ί03, first-
born ; a. prop. : τον υιον αντής τοι» πρωτ. Mt. i. 25
(where τοι/ πρωτότ. is omitted by L Τ Tr WH but found
in cod. Sin. [see Tdf., WIL, ad loc.]) ; Lk. ii. 7; τά
πρωτότοκα αυτών (gen. of the possessor [(?); αυτών is
more naturally taken w. θίγη (W. § 30, 8 c), as by Prof.
Grimm himself s. v. θιγγάνω]), the first-born whether of
man or of beast, Heb. .\i. 23 (ίτάι» πρωτότοκον . . . άπο
ανθρώπου εως κτήνους. Ex. xii. 29 ; Ps. civ. (cv.) 36 ; [Philo
de cherub. § 16 ; Poll. 4, 208]). b. trop. Christ is
called πρωτότο<οί πάσης κτίσεως (partit. gen. [see below],
as in τα πρωτότοκα τών προβάτων, Gen. iv. 4 ; τών βοών,
Dent. xii. 17 ; τώι» υιών σου, Ex. xxii. 29), who came into
being through God prior to the entire universe of created
things [R. V. the firstborn of all creation} (see κτίσις, 2
b.), Col. i. 15; — this passage does not with certainty
prove that Paul reckoned the λόγοΓ in the number of
created beings (as, among others, fTsteri, Paulin. Lehr-
begriff, p. 315, and Baur, Das Christenthum der drei
7Γρωτω<;
556
Ίττυω
eralen Jalirlili. 1st ed. p. 295, hold); since even Origen,
who is acknowledged to have maintained the eternal
generation of the Son by the Father, did not liesitate
to call him (cf. Gieselar, Kirch.- Gesch. i. p. 2G1 Sij. ed.
3 ; [i. 21 (J Eng. trans, of ed. 4, edited by Smith]) τον aycVij-
Tov καί ττάσηζ γίνίτής φύσβω? τίμωτόΓοκον (c. Cels. ti, 17),
and even κτίσμα (a term which Clement of Alexandria
also uses of the Xoyot) ; cf. Joan. Damascen. orthod. fid.
4, 8 και auTot ίκ τοϋ θ^οϋ και ij κτίσιι €Κ Γοΰ θ^οΰ; [al. would
make the gen. in Col. 1. c. depend upon the compar. force
in (the first half of) πρωτότ. (cf. nflanUToKos ί'γώ η σύ, 2 S.
xix. 43) ; but see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. (esp. for the patri.s-
tic interpretation)]. In the same sense, apparently, he
is called simply ή πρωτότοκος, lleb. i. 6 ; πρ- ϊκτων νικρων,
the first of the dead who was raised to life, Col. i. 18;
also των ι>€κρων (partit. gen.), Rev. i. .5 [Rec. inserts «];
πρωτότοκος iv πολλοί? «ϊδίλφοίί, who Avas the Son of God
long before those who by liis agency and merits are ex-
alted to the nature and dignity of sons of God, with the
added suggestion of the supreme rank by Λνΐιΐΰΐι he ex-
cels these other sons (cf. Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 2S ; Ex.
iv. 22; Jer. xx.xviii. (xxxi.) 9), Ro. viii. 29; ΐκκλησία
1rpωτoτιΊκJlV, the congregation of the pious Christian dead
already exalted to the enjoyment of the blessedness of
heaven (tacitly opp. to those subseciuently to follow them
thither), Ileb. xii. 23; cf. De Wette ad loc. (Anthol. 8,
34; 9, 213.)•
irpUTus, adv.,^r.?i : Acta xi. 26 Τ Tr WH. Cf. Passow
s. v. πρότίρος fin. ; [L. and S. ib. B. IV. ; Phryn. ed. Lob.
ρ 31 I s [. ; RullierfonI, New Phryn. p. 306]."
ΐΓταίω ; f ut. TrraiVtu ; 1 aor. ίπταισα; (akin to ΠΕΤΩ
and πίπτω [cf. Vanicek p. 406]); fr. [Pind.], Aescliyl.,
and Ildt. down ; 1. trans, τινά. Ιο cauxe one In sluiii-
ble OT fall. 2. intrans. lo slumble : 8\ς ιτρ6ς του αυτόν
\ίθον, Polyb. 31, 19, 5. trop. [cf. Eng. Irip, slumblc] a.
to err, to make a mistake, (Plat. Theaet. c. 15 p. 160 d.) ;
to «in: absol. Ro. xi. 11 (tSioi/ ανθρώπου φιλίΐι/ και τους
πταίοντας, Antonin. 7, 22); πολλά, in many ways, .Fas. iii.
2 ; ev ivX (sc. νόμω), to stumble in, i. e. sin against, one \a,w,
Jas. ii. 10 [but see (ΐς, 2 a. fin.] ; ev λο'γω (for the [more
com.] simple dat.), to sin in word or speech, .Jas. iii.
2. b. lo fall into miserij, become wretched, (often
so in Grk. writ.) : of the loss of salvation, 2 Pet. i. 10.
[Cf. προσ-παίω.^ *
irrepva, -τ^ς, η, the heel (of the foot) : (παΐρΐΐν την πτίρναν
(πι τίνα, to Ιίβ up the heel against one, i. e. dropping the
fi :. (which is borrowed either from kicking, or from a
wrestler tripping up his antagonist), to injure one hi/
trickery, Jn. xiii. 18 after Ps. xl. (xli.) 10. (Often in
Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for 3Ρ|'.) *
ΐΓτίρνγιον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of πτίρυξ, q. v.), Sept. for
nj3; 1. a wing, little wing. 2. an;/ pointed
extremity (of the fins of fishes, TSJO, Lev. xi. 9-12;
Deut. xiv. 9, 10; Aristot., Theophr. ; of a part of the
dress hanging down in the form of a wing, Ruth iii. 9 ;
1 S. xxiv. 5 ; [Num. xv. 38] ; Poll. 7, 14, 62) : το πτίρύ-
ytnv ToO vaoi and rod Upov, the top of the temple at .Jeru-
salem, Hegesipp. ap. Euseb. h. e. 2, 23, 1 1 ; τοΰ 'κροΰ. Mt.
iv. 5; Lk. iv. 9; some understand this of the top or
apex of the sanctuary (roC vaoi), others of the top of
.Solomon's porch, and others of the top of the lio) al
Portico; this last Josephus (antt. 15, 11, 5) says was of
such great height ως ei τι? απ' άκρου τοΰ ταύτης τίγους
(ίμφω συΐ'τιθΐϊς τά βάθη διοπτ^νοι Ο'κοτο^ινιάν, ονκ ίζικνυυ-
μίνης της "ι^ΐως (Ις άμίτρητον τον βυθόν; [cf. '* Iieco\ery
111' .lerusalem,"esp. ch. v.].*
ΐΓΤί'ρυξ, -υγος, ή, {πτ(ρόν a wing), fr. Hom. down, Sept.
often for ']i2', " wing: of birds, Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii.
34 ; Rev. xii. 14 ; of imaginary creatures. Rev. iv. 8 ; ix.
9.•
irrqvis, -ή, -όν, (πίτομαι. πτηναι), furnished unth wings;
winged, jlging : τά πτηνά, birds (often so in Grk. writ.
fr. Aeschyl. down), 1 Co. xv. ;i9.•
•πτοί'ω, -ώ : 1 aor. pass, ίπτοήθην ; (πτόα terror) ; from
Horn, down; to terrify; pass. /o ie ierri/ierf (Sept. chiefly
for nnn) : Lk. xxi. 9 ; xxiv. 37 [Tr mrg. WH mrg. βροψ
eivres• Syx. see φοβίω, fin.]*
■πτόησ-ΐϊ, -(ως. ή, (πτοί'ω), terror : φοβήσθαι πτόησιν, i. q.
φόβυν φοβάσθαι, to he afraid with terror [al. take πτ.
objectively : R. V. txt. to he put in fear by any terror'\,
1 Pet. iii.6 (Prov. iii. 25) ; see φοβίω, 2; [W. § 32, 2;
B. § 131, 5. (1 Mace. iii. 25; J'hilo, quis rer. div. her.
§51)].*
Πτολίμαίϊ, -tfios, ή, Plolemais, a maritime city of Phoe-
nicia, which got its name, apparently, from Ptolemy
Lathyrus (who captured it B. c. 103, and rebuilt it more
beautifully [cf. Joseph, antt. 13, 12, 2 sq.]) ; it is called
in Judg. i. 31 and in the Talmud \2j,\, in the Sept.
'λκχώ, by the Greeks *.\kij [on the varying accent cf.
Pape, Eigennam. s. v. ΐΙτο\(μιης'\, and Romans Ace, and
by modern Europeans [.lire or] .S7. Jean d'Acre (from a
church erected there in the middle ages to St. John) ; it
is now under Turkish rule and contains about 8000 in-
habitants (cf. Baedeker, Pal. and Syria, Eng. ed. p. 356) :
Acts xxi. 7. (Often mentioned in the books of the Mac-
cabees and by Josephus under the name of ΐΙτο\(μαις,
cf. esp. b. j. 2, 10, 2sq. ; [see Reland, Palaest. p. 534 sciq.;
rtilirr, P.alestine, Eng. trans, iv. p. 361 sqq.].) *
irriov, -ου, τά, freq. in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down, Attic
πτίον W. 24, [(peril, fr. r. pu ' to cleanse'; cf. Curtius p.
498 sq.)], a winnowing-shorel [A. V. _/(ιη; cf. B. D. 8. v.
Agriculture, sub fin. ; Rich, Diet, of Antiq. s. vv. ventila-
brum, pala 2, vannus] : Mt. iii. 1 2 ; Lk. iii. 1 7.*
ττνρω: [(cf. Curtius p. 706)]; to frighten, affright:
pres. pass. ptcp. πτνρόμ(νος, Phil. i. 28. (Hippocr.,
Plat., Diod., Pint., al.) *
•πτίο-μα. -rot, τό, (πτύω, q. v.), spittle : Jn. ix. 6 ([Hip-
pocr.], Polyb. 8, 14, 5; Or. Sibyll. 1, 365).*
ττηύο-οτω : 1 aor. ptcp. πτΰξας; in class. Grk. fr. Horn.
down ; to fold together, roll up : τό βιβλίον, Lk. iv. 20
[A. V. closedl; see αναπτύσσω, [and cf. Schloltmann in
Riehm s. v. Schrift ; Sirack in Ilerzog ed. 2 s. v. Schreib•
kunst, etc. Comp. : άκα-πτΰσσω.] *
ΐΓτύω: [(Lat. spuo, our spue; Curtius §382)]; 1 aor.
(πτνσα ; fr. Hom. down ; to spit : Mk. vii. 33 ; viii. 28;
Jn. ix. 6. [COMP. : eV, (μ-πτύω.'} *
πτώμα
657
πύλη
ντώμΛ, -rof , τό, (πίΐΓτω, pf. ηίτττωκα) ; 1• in Grk.
writ. fr. Aeschyl. duwn, a fall, duwn/ull; metaph. a fail-
ure, defeai, calamity; an error, lapse, sin. 2. l/iat
which is /alien ; hence with the gen. of a pers. or with
vfKpoi added, the (fallen) bodi/ of one dead or slain, a
corpse, carcase ; later also with νικμοϋ omitted (Polyb.,
Sept., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Ildian.), cf. Thorn. Mag. p.
765 [ed. Ritschl p. 290, 14]; Phryn. ed. Lol). p. 375;
[W. 23], and so in the N. T. : Mt. xiv. 1 2 L Τ Tr WH ;
Mk. XV. 45 L Τ Tr WH ; Mt. xxiv. 28 ; Tivot, Mk. vi.
29 ; Rev. xi. 8, 9.
■ΒτΔ(Γΐ5, -€ωί, η, (πίπτω, pf. πί'πτωκα), a falling, down-
fall : prop, τήί olicias, Mt. vii. J? (jtrwafis οίκων, Maneth.
4, 617) ; trop. «'r πτώσιν πολλών (opp. to tls άνύστασιν),
that many may fall and bring upon tuemselves ruin, i. e.
the loss of salvation, utter misery, Lk. ii. 34, cf. Ro. -ti.
11. (Sept. chiefly for nSJO, plague, defeat.)*
«τωχίίο, -as, ψ (πτωχίύω) ; 1. beggary (Hdt. 8,
14; Arstph. Plut. 549; Plat. legg. 11 p. 936 b.; Lysias
p. 898, 9 ; Aristot. poet. c. 23 p. 1459", 6). 2. in the
N. T. poverty, the condition of one destitute of riches
and abundance : opp. to πλοιιτίΐκ, 2 Co. viii. 9 ; opp. to
rXovaiot, Rev. ii. 9 ; ή κατά (ίάθου! πτωχύα (opp. to πλοΰ-
Tof), deep i. e. extieme pooerty [see κατά, 1. 1 b.], 2 Co.
Tiii. 2. (Sept. chiefly for "J:•, affliction, misery.) *
ΊΓτΐΛ\ίν•α: 1 aor. ίπτά>\(υσα\ (πτωχοί, q. v.); prop, to
he a beggar, to beg; so in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down;
in the N. T. once, to be poor : 2 Co. viii. 9, on which see
πλούσιος, b. fin. (Tob. iv. 21 ; Sept. for ^'-)Ί to be weak,
afflicted, .ludg. vi. 6 ; Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 8 ; for iyiu to
be reduced to want, Prov. xxiii. 21 ; ii?n to be needy,
Ps. xxxiii. (.xxxiv.) 11.)*
ΐΓτωχόϊ, -ή, -όν, (πτώσσω, to be thoroughly frightened,
to cower down or hide one's self for fear; hence πτωχο!
prop, one λυΙιο slinks and crouches), often involving the
idea of roving about in wretchedness [see πίνης, fin.;
"but it always had a b.ad sense till it was ennobled
in the Gospels ; see Mt. v. 3 ; Lk. vi. 20, cf. 2 Co. viii.
9" (L. and S. s. v. I.)]; hence 1. in class. Grk.
from Ilom. down, reduced to beggary, begging, mendi-
cant, asking alms: Lk. xiv. 13, 21 ; xvi. 20, 22. 2.
poor, needy, (opp. to πΚούσιοί) ■ Mt. xix. 21; χ-χλί. 9, 11 ;
Mk. X. 21; xii. 4-2, 43; xiv. 5, 7 ; Lk. xviii. 22; xix. 8;
xxi. 3; .In. xii. 5, 6,8; xiii. 29; Ro. xv. 26; 2Co. vi. 10;
Gal. ii. 10 ; Jas. ii. 2, 3, 6 ; Rev. xiii. 16; in a broader
sense, destitute ofmealth, influence, position, honors; loicly,
afflicted : Mt. xi. 5; Lk. iv. 18, (fr. Is. Ixi. 1); vi. 20; vii.
22 ; at ■πτωχοΊ τοϋ κόσμου (partit. gen.), the poor of the
human race, Jas. ii. ο ; but the more correct reading is
that (A LTTr WH viz. τω κόσμω [unto the world'\, i. e.
the ungodly world being judge, cf. W. § 31, 4 a.; B.
§ 133, 14; [R. V. as to the tcorld (see next head, and cf.
κΰσμο{, 7)]. trop. destitute of the Christian virtues and
ike eternal riches. Rev. iii. 1 7 ; like the Lat. innps, i. q.
helpless, powerless to accomplish an end: στοιχ(Ία, Gal. iv.
9 [' bringing no rich endowment of spiritual treasure '
(Bp. Lghtft.)]. 3. univ. tacking in anything, with
a dat. of the respect: τψ nvtiitan, as respects their
spirit, i. e. destitute of the wealth of learning and intel-
lectual culture which the schools afford (men of ttiia
class most readily gave themselves up to Christ's teach-
ing and proved themselves fitted to lay hold of the heav-
enly treasure, Mt. xi. 25 ; Jn. Lx. 39 ; 1 Co. i. 26, 27 ; [aL
make the idea more inward and ethical: 'conscious
of their spiritual need']), Mt. v. 3; compare with this
the Ep. of Barn. 19, 2 : fay άπλοϋι rij rnnfiia και πλυύσκοί
τώ πνίύματι, abounding in Chiistian graces and the riches
of the divine kingdom. (Sept. for 'j^, ^η^ Βίτ if3K,
etc.)•
ιτυγμή, -rjs, ή, (πύξ, fr. ΠΥΚΩ, Lat. pungo, pupugi,
[pugnus; O. H. G. 'fust', Eng. 'fist'; cf. Curtius § 3'<4]),
fr. Horn, down, Sept. for ^I'^JK (Ex. xxi. 18; Is. Iviii. 4),
the fist : πυγμή ι/ίπτισθω rat Xfipas, to wash the hands
with the fist, i. e. so that one hand is rubbed with the
clenched fist of the other [R. V. mrg. (after Theoph.,
al.) up to the elbow; but cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Me»-
siah, ii. 11], Mk. vii. 3 (where Tdf. πυκνά, see πυκνοί).
[Cf. Jas. Morison, Com. ad loc.j *
■Τίνβων, -ωνος, ό, Python; 1. in Grk. mythology
the name of the Pythian serpent or dragon that dwelt in
the region of Pytho at the foot of Parnassus in Phocis.
and was said to have guarded the oracle of Delphi and
been slain by Apollo. 2. i. q. ξαψόνιον ^ιαιτικό»
(Hesych. s. v.), a spirit of divination : πν(νμα πύθωνοί or
more correctly (with LTTrWH) π«ί)μα πύθωνα (on
the union of two substantives one of Λvhich has the force
of an .adj. see Matthiae p. 962, 4; [Kiihner § 405, 1;
Lob. Paralip. 344 s(].]), Acts xvi. 16; some interpreters
think that the young woman here mentioned was a ven-
triloquist, appealing to Plutarch, who tells us (mor. p.
414 e. de def. orac. 9) that in his time (γγαστρίμυθοι were
called πύθων^ί ; [cf. Meyer].*
iruKVOs, -ή, -όν, (ΠΥΚΩ, see ιτυγμή), fr. Horn, down,
thick, dense, compact; in ref. to t\me, frequent, often re-
curring, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschjl. down), 1 Tim. v.
23; neut. plur. πυκνά, as adv. [W. 4G3 (432); B. § 128,
2], vigorously, diligently, ( ? [cf. Morison as in πυγμή]),
Mk. vii. 3 Tdf. ; ofen, Lk. v. 33 ; πυκνότ(ρον, more fre-
quently, the ofener. Acts xxiv. 26.*
mjKTtwu; (πύκτης a pugilist [see πυγμή, init.]); to he a
boxer, to box, [A. V.fight'] : 1 Co. ix. 26. (Eur., Xen.,
Plat., Plut., al.) *
•πύλη, -ηί, ή. [perh. fem. of πίλος (cf. Eng. pole i. e.
axis) fr. r. πίλ-ω to turn (Curtius p. 715)], fr. Horn,
down ; Sept. very often for ΊΓΒ>, occasionally for ."i^T
sometimes for ππΐ) ; a gate (of the larger sort, in the
wall either of a city or a palace; Thorn. ^lag. [p. 292, 4]
πνΚαι f πι τβίχου? • βύραι (VI οικίας) : of a town, Lk. viL
12; Actsi.x. 24; .xvi. 13 LTTrWH; Ueb.xiii.l2; of
the temple. Acts iii. 10; in the wall of a prison. Acts
xii. 10; πΰλαι άίου, the gates of Hades (likened to a
vast prison; hence the ^ keys' of Hades, Rev. i. 18), Mt.
xvi. 18 (on which see κατισχύω) ; Sap. xvi. 13; 3 Maoc
V. 51, and often by prof. writ. ; see Grimm on 3 Mace
V. 51. in fig. disc. i. q. access or entrance into any
■tate: Mt. vii. 13*, 13•- R G Τ br. Tr WH mrg,, U RG
ττυΧων
558
ττνρράζω
Lbr.Tbr.TrWII; Lk. xiii. 24 RLmrg. [On its
omission see προβατικΟ!•2 '
Ίτυλών, -ωκοί, ό, (πύλι;), [Aristot., Polyb., al.], Sept.
often for nnJ3, sometimes for "ι;?©; 1. alargegale:
of a palace, Lk. xvi. 20 ; of a house, Acts x. 1 7 ; plur.
(of the gates of a cit)), Acts xiv. 13 ; Rev. xxi. 12, 13,
15,21,25; xxii. 14. 2. the anterior pari of a housf,
into which one enters through the gate, jjorch : Mt. xxvi.
71 (of. 69 and 75); Acts xii. 14; hence ij θύρα τοϋ πυ-
λώνας, ib. Ι.'ΐ.*
Ίτυνθάνομαι ; impf. ϊιτννθανόμην ; 2 aor. ΐπυθόμην ; [cf.
Curtius § 328]; a depon. verb; as in class. Grk. fr.
Horn, down 1. to inquire, ask : foil, by an indir.
quest. — w. the indie. Acts x. 18 ; with the opt., Jn. xiii.
24 R G ; Lk. XV. 26 ; xviii. 36 ; Acts xxi. 33 ; foil, by
a dir. quest.. Acts iv. 7; .x. 29; xxiii. 19; παρά τινός τι
[Β. 167 (146)], Jn. iv. 52; παρά tivus foil, by an indir.
quest, w. the indie. Mt. ii. 4 ; τϊ πtμ^ nvos, Acts xxiii.
20. 2. to ascertain by inquiry : foil, by on. Acts
xxiii. 34 [A. V. un(lerstood'\*
Trip, gen. πυρός, τό, [prob. fr. Skr. pu 'to purify' (cf.
Germ, feuer) ■ Vanieek p. 541 ; Curtius § 385], fr. Hom.
down; Hebr. EiX; /re: Mt. iii. 10, 12; vii. 19; xvii. 15;
Mk. ix. 22 ; Lk. iii. 9,17; ix. 54 ; Jn. xv. 6 ; Acts ii. 1 9 ;
xxviii. 5 ; 1 Co. iii. 13 ; Heb. xi. 34 ; Jas. iii. 5 ; v. 3 ; Rev.
viii. 5, 7; ix. 17, 18; xi. 5 ; xiii. 13; xiv. 18; xv. 2; xvi.
8 ; XX. 9 ; α^τίΐν πϋρ, to kindle a fire, Lk. xxii. 55 [T Tr
txt. WII πιριάπτ.] ; ΐβριξι πυρ κα\ βύον, Lk. xvii. 29;
κατάκαιαν τι «V [Τ om. WII br. eV] πυρί, Rev. xvii. 16;
xviii. 8 ; καίομαι πυρί, Mt. xiii. 40 [R L Τ WH κατ-ακ.] ;
Heb. xii. 18 [W. § 31, 7 d.]; Rev. viii. 8; x.\i. 8; φλί,ξ
πυρός, a fiery flame or flame of fire. Acts vii. 30 ; 2 Th.
i. 8 L txt. Tr txt. ; Heb. i. 7; Rev. i. 14; ii. 18; xix. 12,
(Ex. iii. 2 cod. Alex. ; Is. xxix. 6) ; πϋρ φλογός, a flam-
ing fire or fire of flame, 2 Th. i. 8 R G L mrg. Τ Tr mig.
WII (Ex. iii. 2 cod. Vat. ; Sir. xiv. 19) ; λαμπά8€ς πυρός,
lamps of fire, Rev. iv. 5 ; στΐλοι πυρός, Rev. χ. 1 ; άνθρα-
κας π. coals of fire, Ro. xii. 20 (see άνθμαξ) ; γλώσσαι
ώσ(ΐ ττυρός, which had the shape of little flames, Acts ii.
3 ; 6οκιμύζ(ΐν δίά πυρός, 1 Pet. i. 7 ; πυροϋσθαι (see πυ-
ρόω, b.) €« π. Rev. iii. 18; ώς 8ιά πυρός, as one who in
a conflagration has escaped through the fire not unin-
jured, i. e. dropping the fig. not tcithout damage, 1 Co.
iii. 15; u/xo Sxn, Zech. iii. 2, cf. Am. iv. 11. of the
fire of hell we find the foil, expressions, — which are
to be taken either tropically (of the e.xtreme penal tor-
ments which the wicked are to undergo after their life
on earth ; so in the discourses of Jesus), or literally (so
apparently in the Apocalypse) : τό πΰρ, Mk. ix. 44, 46,
[T Wllom. Trbr. both verses], 48; τό πΰρ τό αιώνιοι»,
Mt.xviii.8; χχν. 41,cf. 4 Mace. xii. 12; aa/Sftrroi', jNIk. ix.
43, 45 [G Τ Tr WH om. L br. the cl.]; πυρός αιωνίου 8ίκην
ύπ(χ€ΐν, Jude 7 ; yUvva του πυρός, Mt. v. 22 ; xviii. 9 ;
Mk. ix. 47 [RGTrbr.]; κάμινος τ. τηιρός, Mt. xiii. 42,
50, (Dan. iii. 6) ; ή λίμνη τοΰ πυρός. Rev. xix. 20; xx. 10,
14, 15; mipi τηρ€ΐσθαι, 2 Pet. iii. 7; βασανισθηναι iv πυρί.
Rev. xiv. 10 (cf. Lk. xvi. 24); βάπτιζαν τιχά πυρί (see /3α-
rn'fo), Π. b. bb.), Mt. iii. 11; Lk. iii. 16. The tongue
is called πϋρ, as though both itself on fire and setting
other things on fire, partly by reason of the fiery spirit
which governs it, partly by reason of the destructive
power it exercises, Jas. iii. 6 ; since fire disorganizes
and sunders things joined together and compact, it is
used to symbolize dissension, Lk. xii. 49. INIetaphorical
expressions: ΐκ πυρός άρπαζαν, io snatch from danger
of destruction, Jude 23 ; πυρΊ αΚίζισθαι (see άλίζω), Mk.
ix. 49; ζήλος πυρός, fiery, burning anger [see f^Xos, 1],
Heb. X. 27 (πϋρ ζήλου, Zeph. i. 18 ; iii. 8) ; God is called
πϋρ κατανάλισκαν, as one who when angry visits the ob-
durate with penal destruction, Heb. .xii. 29.•
Ίπιρά, -OS, IJ, (πϋρ), fr. Hom. down, a fire, a pile of
burning fuel : Acts xxviii. 2 sq.*
ττνργοϊ. -ου, ό, (akin to Germ. Burg, anciently Purg ;
[yet cf. Curtius § 413]), as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, α
tower; a fortified structure rising to a consideralile lieight,
to repel a hostile attack or to enable a watchman to see
in every direction. The πύργος (v τω Σιλωάμ [{<[. v.)]
seems to designate a tower in the walls of Jerusalem
near the fountain of Siloam, Lk. xiii. 4 ; the tower occu-
pied by the keepers of a vineyard is spoken of in Mt.
xxi. 33 ; Mk. xii. 1, (after Is. v. 2) ; a tower-shaped
building as a safe and convenient dwelling, Lk. xiv. 28.*
irupeV<ro> ; (πϋρ) ; (Vulg., Cels., Senec., al. fehricito) ;
to be sick with a fever: Mt. viii. 14; Mk. i. 30. (Eur.,
Arstph., Plut., Lcian., Galen, al.) *
injp€TOs, -οϋ, ό, (πϋρ) ; 1. fery heat (Hom. II. 22,
31 [but interpreters now give it the sense of 'fever' in
this pass. ; cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. ; Schmidt, Syn.
ch. 60 § 14]). 2. feoer: Mt. viii. 15; Mk. i. 31 ;
Lk. iv. 39 ; Jn. iv. 52 ; Acts xxviii. 8, (Hippocr., Arstph.,
Plat., sqq. ; Deut. xxviii. 22) ; πυρ- μίγας, Lk. iv. 38 (as
Galen de different, feb. 1, 1 says σΰνηθις rois ίατρο'ις ονό-
μαζαν . . . τον μίγαν Tc κα\ μικρόν πυριτόν \ [cf . \\ etstein
on Lk. I.e.]).•
iriipivos, -7, -ov, (πϋρ), fiery: θώρακας πυρ• i. e. .shining
like fire. Rev. ix. 17. (Ezek. xxviii. 14, 16; Aristot.,
Polyb., Plut., al.) •
ΊΓυρόω : Pass., pres. πυρονμαι ; pf. ptcp. παπυρωμίνος ;
(πϋρ) ; fr. Aeschyl. and I'ind. down ; to burn with fire,
to set on fire, to kindle ; in the N. T. it is used only in
the pass. a. to be on fire, to burn : prop. 2 Pet. iii.
1 2 ; trop. of the heat of the passions : of g r i e f, 2 Co. xi.
29 [Eng. A'^ersions burn (often understood of indig-
nation, but cf. Meyer); W. 153 (145)]; of anger,
with Toir ^υμοίί added, i. q. to be incensed, indignant,
2 Mace. iv. 38 ; x. 35 ; xiv. 45 ; to be inflamed with s e .\-
ual desire, 1 Co. vii. 9. b. pf. ptcp. παπυρωμί-
νος, made to glow [R. V. refined']: Rev. i. 15 [(cf. B. 80
(69) n.)] ; /uW of fire; fiery, ignited : τα βάλη τα πιπ.
darts filled with inflammable substances and set on fire,
Eph. vi. 16 (Apollod. bib!. 2, 5, 2 § 3) ; incited by fire
and purged of dross : χρυσίον πιπυρ• (Κ πυρός, [refined
by fire']. Rev. iii. 18 (so πυρόω in the Sept. for γ]ΊΧ ; as
TO afyyipiov. Job xxii. 25 ; Zech. xiii. 9 ; Ps. xi. (xii.) 7 ;
Ixv. (Ixvi.) 10).*
ττυρράζω ; i. q. πυρράς γίνομαι, to become glowing, groxo
ιτυρρος
559
ττως
red, be red: Mt. xvi. 2 sq. [but Tbr. WII reject the pass.]
(Byzant. writ. ; πυρρίζω in Sept. and Pliilo.) *
■mippis, -ά, -OK, (fr. ττϋρ), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
hai-inr/ the color of fire, red: Rev. vi. 4; xii. 3. Sept.
several times for DIX.*
Πυρροί [('fiery-red'; Fick; Griech. Personennamen,
p. 75)], -ου, ό, Pyrrhus, the proper name of a man :
Actsx.x. 4 GLTTrWII.*
inipioris, -eais, ή, (ττυρόω), η burning: Rev. xviii. 9, 18;
the burning by which metals are roasted or reduced ;
bv a fig. drawn fr. the refiner's fire (on which cf. Prov.
xxvii. 21), calamities or trials that test character : 1 Pet.
iv. 12 (TertuUian adv. Gnost. 12 ne expavescatis ustio-
nem, quae agitur in vobis in tentationem), cf. i. 7 [(ή
πύρωσα της δοκιμασία!, ' Teaching ' etc. 16, 5)]. (In the
same and other senses by Aristot., Theophr., Plut-, al.) *
[ττώ, an enclitic particle, see μηπω etc.]
Ίτωλίω, -ώ ; imp{. (πώλουν; i ax>r. ('πώλησα; pres. pass.
πωλούμαι ; (πί\ω, πίλομαι, to turn, turn about, [Curtius
§ U33 p. 470], fr. which [through the noun πωλη; Lob.
in Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 57 hot.] πωλούμαι, Lat. versor,
foil, by els with ace. of place, to f recjuent a place ; cf.
the Lat. venio and veneo) ; fr. Hdt. down ; Sept. for
130 ; prop, to barter, i. e. to sell : absol. (opp. to ayopa-
ffti/), J>k. xvii. 28; Rev. xiii. 17; oi πωλοϋντ(ς (opp. to
o! άγομάζοντα, buyers), sellers, Mt. xxi. 1 2 ; xxv. 9 ; Mk.
xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45; with ace. of a thing, Mt. xiii. 44;
xix. 21 ; x.xi. 12 ; Mk. x. 21 ; xi. 15 ; Lk. [xii. 33] ; xviii.
22; xxii. 36; Jn. ii. 14, 16; Acts v. 1 ; supply αυτόν,
Acts iv. 37 ; αυτά, ib. 34 ; pass. 1 Co. x. 25 ; with a gen.
of price added, Mt. x. 29 ; Lk. xii. 6.*
•irmXos, -ου, ό (in class. Grk. ij also), [Lat. pullus,
O. H. G.folo, Eng. /oa/; perh. allied with nais; cf. Cur-
tius § 387]; 1. a colt, the youncj of the horse: so
very often fr. Hom. down. 2. univ. a young crea-
ture : Ael. V. h. 4, 9 ; spec, of the young of various ani-
mals ; in the N. T. of a young ass, an ass's coll : Mt. x.xi.
2, 5, 7; Mk. xi. 2, [3 Lmrg.], 4, 5, 7; Lk. xix. 30, 33, 35;
Jn. -xii. 15, (also in Geopon.) ; Sept. several times for
Ί'^' ; for nS,'" a female ibex, Prov. v. 19.*
irii-iroTe, adv., ever, at any time: Lk. xix. 30; Jn. i. 18;
V. 3 7 ; vi. 35 ; viii. 33 ; iJn. iv. 1 2. [(From Hom. down.)] *
ττωρόω, -ώ : 1 aor. ϊπώρωσα (Jn. xii. 40 TTrWlI);
pf. π^πώρωκα \ pf. pass. ptcp. πιπωρωβίνο! ; 1 aor. pass.
(πωρωθην; (πώρος, hard skin, a hardening, induration);
ίο cover with a thick skin, to harden by covering with a
callus, [R. V. everywhere simply ίο harden] : metaph.,
Kapbiav, to make the heart dull, Jn. xii. 40 ; Pass, to
groio hard or callous, become dull, lose the potcer of under-
standing: Ro. xi. 7 ; τα νοήματα, 2 Co. iii. 14 ; ή καμδι'α,
Mk. vi. 52 ; viii. 1 7. Cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Mk. p. 78 sq. ;
on Rom. ii. p. 451 sq. [(Hippocr., Aristot., al.)]*
ττώρωσ-ΐϊ, -(ως, ή, (πωρόω, q. v.), prop, the covering with
a callus ; trop. ohiuseness of menial discernment, dulled
perception : yiyovk Tivt, the mind of one has been blunted
[R. V. α hardening halh befallen], Ro. xi. 25 ; της καρδίας
"[hardening of heart], of stubbornness, obduracy, Mk. iii.
5; Eph. iv. 18. '"(HioDOcr.)!*
ircis, (fr. obsol. ΠΟΣ, whence πού, ποΐ, etc. [cf. Curtius
§ 631]), adv., [fr. Hom. down] ; I. in interroga»
tion ; how? in what way f — in a direct question, f olL
by a. the indicative, it is the expression a. of
one seeking information and desiring to be taught: Lk.
i. 34 ; x. 26 ; Jn. iii. 9 ; ix. 26 ; 1 Co. xv. 35 [cf. W. 266
(250)]; πώς ουν, Jn. ix. 10 Tdf. (but LWHbr. ουκ), 19;
Ro. iv. 10. p. of one about to controvert another,
and emphatically deny that the thing inquired about has
happened or been done : Mt. xii. 29 ; Mk. iii. 23 ; Lk.
xi. 18; Jn. iii. 4, 12; v. 44, 47; vi. 52; ix. 16; 1 Jn. iii.
1 7 ; iv. 20 ; Ro. iii. 6 ; vi. 2 ; 1 Co. xiv. 7, 9, 1 6 ; 1 Tim. iii.
5 ; Heb. ii. 3 ; zeal πώς, Mk. iv. 13; Jn. xiv. 5 [here Ltxt.
Tr WH om. και] ; πώς olv, Mt. xii. 26 ; Ro. x. 14 R G ;
πώς Se, Ro. x. 14' RGLmrg., W RGT, 15 RG, (on
this see in b. below), where something is asserted and
an affirmative answer is expected, πώς ουχί is used : Ro.
viii. 32; 2 Co. iii. 8. y. of surprise, intimating that
what has been done or is said could not have been done
or said, or not rightly done or said, — being equiv. to hoto
is it, or how has it come to pass, that etc. : Gal. ii. 14 G L Τ
TrWH; Alt. xxii. 12; Jn. iv. 9 ; vi. 52 ; vii. 15; πώι
Xc'yftr, λίγονσι, κτλ., Mk. xii. 35; Lk. xx. 41 ; Jn. viii. 33;
και πώς, Lk. xx. 44 ; Acts ii. 8 ; καΐ πώς σϋ Xc'yeir, Jn. xii.
34 ; xiv. 9 [here L Τ WH om. Tr br. και] ; πώί ουκ, Jn. vi.
42 [here Τ WH Trtxt. πώί kCk] ; Mt. xxii. 43 ; πώς ού,
how is it that . . . not, why not ? Mt. xvi. 11 ; Mk. viii. 21
RGLmrg.; iv. 40 [RGT]; Lk. .xii. 56. b. the
delib. subjunctive (where the question is, how that
can be done which ought to be done) : πώς πληρωθώσιν
αί γραφαί, how are the Scriptures (which ought to be ful-
filled; lo be fulfilled? Mt. xxvi. 54 ; πώς φΰγητ(, how shall
ye (who wish to escape) escape etc. Mt. .xxiii. 33 ; add,
πώς ουν, Ro. X. 14 L Τ TrWH; πώς Si, x. 14» Ltxt. Τ
ΤΓλνΐΙ; 14' L TrWH; 15 LTTr WH, (Sir. .xlix. 11);
cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 405 sq. c. foil, by ά»
with the optative : πώς yap av δνναίμην; Acts viii. 31
(on which see av. III. p. 34'). II. By a somewhat
negligent use, occasionally met with even in Attic writ,
but more freq. in later authors, πώς is found in indi-
rect discourse, where regularly όπως ought to have
stood ; cf. W. § 57, 2 fin. ; [L. and S. s. v. IV.]. a.
with the indicative — pres.: Mt. vi. 28; Mk. xii. 41;
Lk. xii. 27; Acts xv. 36; iCo. iii. 10; Eph. v. 15; CoL
iv. 6; iTim. iii. 15; το πώ5 (on the art. see ό, II. 10 a.);
with the impf. Lk. xiv. 7; with the perf. Rev. iii. 3;
with the aor., Mt. xii. 4 ; Mk. ii. 26 [here Tr WH br.
πώί]; Lk. viii. 36; Acts Lx. 27, etc. ; after άvayιvώσκ€ιv,
Mk. xii. 26 Τ TrWH; how it came to pass that, etc. Jn.
ix. 15; with the f ut. : μιριμνά, πώς άρίσΐΐ (because the
direct quest, would be πωΓ άρίσω;), 1 Co. vii. 32-34 [but
L Τ Tr WH -στ;] ; (ζήτουν πώς αυτόν άπολίσουσιν, how
they shall destroy him (so that they were in no uncer-
tainty respecting his destruction, but were only deliber-
ating about the way in which they will accomplish it),
Mk. xi. 18 R G (but the more correct reading here, ace.
to the best Mss., including cod. Sin., is άπολίσωσιν 'how
they should destroy him' [cf. W. § 41 b. 4 b.; B. § 139,
560
Payau
βΙ ; see next head]). b. with the subjunctive,
of the aor. and in deliberation : Mk. xi. 18 L Τ Tr W'll ;
xiv. 1, 11 [II G]; Mt. x. 19; Lk. xii. 11; to πώι, I>k.
xxii. 2, i; Ac-Is iv. 21. III. in exclamation, Itow:
trui ΒϋσκοΧάν (<rrw, &Ik. x. 24 ; itus παραχρήμα, Mt. Kxi.
20; wS>t 6νσκό\ω!, Mk. x. 23; Lk. zviii. 24; with a verl\
lioiv (greatly) : jrit σννϊχομαι, Lk. xii. 50 ; jrit ίφίλα
αίτόν, .In. .\i. 36.
iriis, an enclitic particle, on which see under (ϊπως [L a
», III. 14] and μήπω{-
[Ρ, ρ : the practice of donbling ρ (after a prep, or an sagm. )
is sometimes Jisregarded by the Mss., and accordiugly liy the
critical editors ; so, too, iu the middle of a word ; see αναντίρη-
TOS, άπυρίτττύβ, αραβών, &ραφο$, ξιαρ-η'γνυμι, ^πιράιττο}, firipi-
ντω, τταραρίω. ^ajSSlXw, ^οι/τί^αι, ^αττί^ω, ^ίπτα», ξύομαι, etc.;
pf. \V. § 13, 1 1).; Β. 32 (28 sci) ; 117/. Λρρ. p. 163; J df.
I'roleg. p. 80. Recent editors. L Τ (cf. the I'roleg. to his 7th
ed. p. cd.xxvi.), Kueuen and Cobct (cf. their I'raef. p. xcvi.),
Wii (hut not Treg.), also follow the older ilss. in omitting
the breathings from pp in the middle of a word ; cf. Lipsius,
Grammat. Uutersucli. p. 18 sq. ; Greg. Corinth, ed. Bast p.
732 sc).; in opposition see Donaldson, Greek Gram. p. 16;
W. 48 (47). On the smooth breathing over the initial ρ
when ρ begins two successive syllables, see I.ipsius u. s. ;
WH. u. s. pp. 163, 170 ; Kiilnier § 67 Anm. 4 ; GoetUimj, Ac-
cent, p. 205 note; and on the general subject of the breath-
ings cf. the Proleg. to Tdf. eJ. 8 p. 10.') sq. and reff. there.
On the usage of modern edd. of the classics cf. Veitch s. vv.
^άτττω, β4ζω. etc.]
'Ροάβ (and 'Ραχάι3, Mt. i. 5; 'Ραχάβη. -175, in Joseph,
[antt. 5, 1, 2 etc.]), ή, (^Π"; 'broad', 'ampli:'), Rahah,
a harlot of Jericho: lieb. xi. 31 ; Jas. ii. 2.j. [Cf. B.D.
s. v.; Bp. Lghtft. Clement of Rome, App. (Lend. 1877)
p. 41.3.]•
^οββ£, Τ WH ραβ.3(: [cf. Β. p. 6 ; WH. App. p. 1.55;
see ii, t], (Uebr. 'a-», fr. 3"« much, great), prop, my
great one, mi/ honorable sir; (others incorrectly rej^ard
the '7 as the yodh paragogic) ; Rahht, a title with whi'h
the Jews were ΛνοηΙ to address their teachers (and also
to honor them when not addressing them ; cf. the French
monsieur, monsei'gneur) : Mt. xxiii. 7 ; translated into
Greek by 5ώπσκάΧο!, Mt. xxiii. 8 GLTTrU'H; John
the Baptist is addressed by this title, Jn. iii. 2G ; Jesus:
both by his disciples, Mt. xxvi. 25, 49; Mk. ix. 5; xi.
21 ; Jn. i. 3S (39), 49 (50) ; iv. 3i , ix. 2 ; xi. 8 ; and by
others, Jn. iii. 2 ; vi. 25 ; repeated to indicate earnest-
ness [cf. W. § 65, 5 a.] ραββί. ραββί, R G in ^H. xxiii. 7
and Mk. xiv. 45 ; (so "31 '31 for •;χ •2ϊί in the Targ. on
2 K. ii. 12). Cf. Lijlilf. Horae Hebr. et Talmud, on Jit.
xxiii. 7; Pressel in Herzog ed. 1 xii. p. 4 71 stj. ; [Oiua-
burg in .Max.'s Kitto, s. v. Rabbi ; Hamburger, Real-En-
cyclopadie, s. v. Rabban, vol. ii. p. 943 sq.].*
^αββον( (so Rec. in Mk. x. 51) and ραββοννί [WH
•i/, see reff. under ραββι, init.], (Chald. ji3" lord , [3T
master, chief, prince ; cf. Levy, Chald. WB. Ub. d. Tar-
gumim, ii. p. 401), liubboiii, Habbuni (apparently [yet
cf. reif. below] the Galihran pronunciation of 'Jiai), a
title of honor and reverence by which Jesus is ad-
dressed; as interpreted by John, equiv. to διδύσκαλοί:
Jn. XX. 16; Mk. x. 51, (see ραββί). Cf. Keim iii. p. .ϊβΟ
[Eng. trans, vi. p. 311 sq.]; DeUlzsch in the Zeitschr.
f. d. luth. Theol. for 1S76, pp. 409 and 606; also for
IS 78, p. 7; [Ginsbiirg and Ilamliiirjer. as in *he preced-
ing word; Kautzsch, Gram. d. P>ihl.-.\ram. p. 10].*
ραβείζω; 1 aor. pass, ίμραβ^ίσθηυ and (so L Τ Tr AVH)
ΐμαβδίσθην (see P, p) ; (ριιβίος); ίο beat with rods: Acts
xvi. 22; 2 Co. xi. 25. (Judg. vi. 11 : Ruth ii. 17; Arstph.,
Diod., al.) •
ράβδος, -ου. ή, [prob. akin to panis, Lat. verber; cf.
Curtius § 513], in various senses fr. Hom. down; Sept.
for nOO, £3?"^, Spn nJi'U'?) etc., a slnft', tcalkhig-stick :
i. q. α Iwig, rod, branch, Ueb. ix. 4 (Xum. xvii. 2 sqq.
Hebr. text xvii. 16 sqq.) ; Rev. xi. 1 ; a rod. with which
one is beaten, 1 Co. iv. 21 (Plato, legg. ο p. 700 c; Plut.,
al. ; πατάσσ(ΐν τίνα iv ρί'ιβδω. Ex. -xxi. 20; Is. x. 24); α
staff: as used on a journey, Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 8; Lk. i.x.
3; or to lean upon, Heb. xi. 21 (after the Sept. of Gen.
xlvii. 3 1 , where the translators read Πϋο, for Πφρ a bed ;
[cf. προσκυνάω, a.]) ; or by shepherds. Rev. ii. 27; xii.
5; xix. 15, in which passages as tV όάβδω ττοιμαιναν is
fig. applied to a king, so ράβ8φ σ<8ηρά, icilh ο rod 0/ iron,
indicates the severest, most rigorous, rule , hence pajSot
is equiv. to a royal sceptre (like U^u, Ps. ii. 9; xiv. 8;
for ΰ•2Ύ^, Esth. iv. 11 ; v. 2): Ileb. i. 8 (fr. Ps. xiv.
ραβδούχος, -ου. 6, (ράβδο! and ίχο); cf. ΐΰνονχοί), one
who cnrrit'S the rods i. e. the fasces, a liclor (a public offi-
cer who bore the fasces or staff and other insignia of
office before the magistrates), [A. V. Serjeants'] : Acts
xvi. 35, 38. (Polyb. ; Diod. 5, 40 ; Dion. Hal. ; Ildian.
7,8, 10 [5 ed. Bekk.] ; δια τΐ λικτάρικ Toit ραβδούχου!
ονομάζουσι; Plut. quaest. Rom. c. (!7.)•
■Ρογαί [so WII] or 'Payai [RGLTTr], (ηη [i- e.
'friend']. Gen. xi. 18), ό, Ragau [A. V. Reu; (ones
Rehu)'], one of the ancestors of Abraham i Lk. iiL 35.
[B- D. Am. ed. s. v. Reu.^ *
ραΖιούρ'^ημα
561
pern
pαSιovργη■xo^ -ror, τό^ (fr. ρα^(ονργ<ω, and this fr. padc*
•vi/yof, compounded of paBtot and £ΡΓΟ. A paitovpyas
is one who does a thing with little effort and adroitly ;
then, in a bad sense, a man who is facile and forward
ui the perpetration of crime, a knave, a rogue), a piece
of hmcerij, rascalily, viUany: πονηρόν. Acts xviii. 14.
(Dion. Hal., Plut., Lcian. ; eccles. writ.) *
ρς-Βιουργία, -ay, η, (see ρα8ιούργημα^ cf . πανουργία) ; 1.
prop, ease in duing, facilitij. 2. levity or easiness
in thinking and acting ; love of a lazy and effeminate
life (Xen.). 3. unscrupulousness, -cunninij, mischief,
[A. V. cillanyl : Acts xiii. 10. (Polyb. 12, 10, 5 ; often
in Plut.)•
[ραίνω ; see ραντίζω.^
ρακά (Tdf. ραχά; [the better accentuation seems to
be -a; cf. Kaulzsjh, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 8]), a
Chald. word ap"[ [but ace. to Kautzsch (u.s.p. lOi not
the Stat. emph. of ρ""ΐ, but shortened fr. [P'lJ (Hebr.
p'l), empty, i. e. α senseless, empty-headed man, a term of
reproach used by the Jews in the time of Christ [B. D.
s. V. Raca ; Wiinsche, Erlauteruag u. s. w. p. 4 7] : Mt. v. 22.*
paKos, -ovs, TO, (ρηγννμι), a piece lorn off; spec, a hit
of cloth ; cloth : Mt. i.x. 16 ; Mk. ii. 21 [here L Tr mrg.
ράκκο;]. (Horn., Hdt., Arstph., Soph., Eur., Joseph.,
Sept., al.) •
'Papi [T WH 'Ραμά ; cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Ramah, 1
init.], (no") i. e. a high jilace, height), ή, [indecl. AVin.
61 (GO)], Ramah, a town of the tribe of Benjamin, sit-
uated si.x Roman miles north of Jerusalem on the road
leading to Bethel ; now the village of er Ram : Mt. ii.
18 (fr. Jer. .xxxviii. (xx.xi.) 15). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.;
Graf in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1854, p. 851 sqq. ;
Pressel in Herzog xii. p. 515 sq. ; Furrer in Schenkel
BL. V. p. 37; [BB.DD.].•
ραντ(ζω ; (fr. pavros besprinkled, and this fr. ραίνω);
1 aor. eppavTiaa and (so L Τ Tr AVH) ίράντισα (see P, p) ;
[1 aor. mid. subjunc. ραντίσωνται (sprinkle themsetres),
ilk. vii. 4 AVH txt. (so Volkmar, Weiss, al.) after codd.
>5B]; pf. p\ss. ptcp. (μραντισμίνοί (Tdf. pfpai/r., L Tr
WII pepavT. with smooth breathing ; see P, p) ; for ραίνω,
more com. in class. Grk. ; to sprinlie: prop, τινά, Heb.
LX. 13 (on the rite here referred to cf. Num. -xix. 2-10;
Win. RWB. s. V. Sprengwasser ; [B. D. s. v. Purifica-
tion]) ; lb. 19; τί α'ιματι, ib. 21; [Rev. .xix. 13 WII (see
vfpίppJivω)'\. to cleajise by sprinklinfj, hence trop. to
purifi/, cleanse : ϊρραντισμίνοι rat Kap&ias (on this ace. see
B. § 134, 7) από κτλ. lleb. χ. 22. (Athen. 12 p. 521 a.;
for Ilebr. Ktari, Ps. 1. (11.) 9; for niJ, Lev. vi. 27; 2 K.
ix. 33.)•
pavTur|i6s, -oO, 6, (ραντίζω, q. v.), used only by bibl. and
eccl. writ., a sprinkling (purification) : αΐμα ραντισμοΰ,
Uood of sprinkling, i. e. appointed for sprinkling (serving
to purify), Heb. xii. 24 (ΰδωρ ραντισμοΰ for ΤΊ'Λ^Τ} 'Ο,
Num. xix. 9, 13, 20 sq.) ; tit ραντισμον αΐματο; Ίι;σοϋ Xp.
i. e. els TO ραντίζ(σθαι (or 'iva ραντίζωνται) aiuaTt *1ησ.
Xp., that they may be purified (or cleansed from the
guilt of their sins) by the blood of Christ, 1 Pet. i. 2 [IV.
§ 30, 2 O.J.•
ραττίζω ; f ut. ραπίσω [cf . Β. 3 7 (3 2 sq.)] ; 1 aor. ίρράτησα
and (so L Ϊ Tr WH) ΐράπισα (see P, ρ ) ; (fr. ραττίΓ a
rod) ; 1. to smile with a rod or staff (Xenophanes
in Diog. Laert. 8, 36 ; Hdt., Dem., Polyb., Plut., al.). 2.
lo smile in the face with the palm of the hand, to box the
ear: τινά, Mt. xxvi. G7 (where it is distinguished fr.
κολαφίζω [ A. V. buffet~\ ; for Suidas says ραπίσαι- ■πατάσσιιν
την γνί'ιβον άπλί) tj χαρί not vrhh the fist; hence the
Vulg. renders it palmas in faciem ei dederunt; [A. V.
mrg. (R. V. mrg.) adopt sense 1 above]) ; τίνα (V. [LT
Tr txt. AVII iiV] TijV σιαγόνα, Mt. v. 39 (IIos. xi. 4). Cf.
Fischer, De vitiis Lexx. etc. p. 61 sqq.; Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 175; \_Schmidt, Syn. ch. 113, 10; Field, Otium Norv.
pars iii. p. 71].•
ράττισ-μα, -ror, to, (ραπίζω, q. V.) ; 1. a blow with
a rod or a staff or a scourge, (Antiph. in Athen. 14 p.
023 b.; Anthol., Lcian.). 2. a blow with the flat of
the hand, a slap in the face, box on the ear : βάλλ€ΐν τίνα
ραπίσμασιν (see βάλλω, 1), Mk. xiv. 65; διδόναι τ»!-! ράπι-
σμα, Jn. -wiii. 22; ραπίσματα, Jn. xix. 3, [but in all thrte
e.xx. R. V. mrg. recognizes sense 1 (see reft. s. v. pa-
πίζω)1* ^
ραψ($, -I'Sor, ή, (ράτττω to sew), α needle: Mt. xix. 24;
Mk. X. 25 ; Lk. xviii. 25 Rec, [(cf. /tapijAor)]. Class.
Grk. more com. uses βιΚόνη (q. v.) ; see Lob. ίά Phryn.
p. 90 ; [λν. 25].•
[ραχά, see ρακά.^
"Ραχάβ, see 'Ραά/3.
'Ραχήλ, (^Π"ΐ a ewe or sheep), ή, Rachel [cf. B. D.
s. v.], the wife of the patriarch Jacob: Mt. ii. 18 (fr.
Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15).*
'Ρίβ('κκα (np3"i, fr. p3"i unused in Hebrew but in
Arabic ' to bind,' ' fasten ' ; hence the subst. i. q. ' en-
snarer,' fascinating the men by her beauty), ή, Rebecca,
the wife of Isaac : Ro. ix. 10.*
ρ€'δη [al. piba; on the first vowel cf. Tdf.'s note on
Rev. as below; WH. App. p. 15Γ], (aec. to Quintil. 1,
5, 57 [cf. 68] a Gallic word [cf. Vanicek, Fremdwdrter,
s. V. reda]), -Tjr, ή, a chariot, " a species of vehicle having
four wheels" (Isidor. Hispal. orig. 20, 12 (§ 511), [cf.
Rich, Diet, of Anti(]. s. v. Rheda]): Rev. xviii. 13.•
'Ρίμφάν (R G), or 'Ριφάν (L Tr), or 'Ρομφάν (Τ), [or
'Ρομφά WII, see their App. on Acts as below], Remphan
[so A. v.], or Rephan [so R.V.], Romphan, [or Rompha'\,
a Coptic pr. name of Saturn : .Acts vii. 43, fr. Amos
v. 26 where the Sept. render by 'Ραιφάν [or 'Ρίφάν] the
Hebr. 'Λ'2, thought by many to be ecjuiv. to the Syriac
* ,Λ. G - c -
•ols, and the Arabic .\^jS• designations of Saturn;
but by others regarded as an appellative, signifying
'stand,' 'pedestal' (Germ. Oeriiit; so Hitzig), or 'statue'
(so Gesenius), formed from p3 after the analogy of
such forms as pi3n, Sup, etc. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.
Saturn; Gesenius, Thes. p. 669»; J. G. MUller in Hei^
zog xii. 736 ; Men in Schenkel i. p. 516 sq.; Schroder
in Riehm p. 234 ; [^Raudissin in Herzog ed. 2 s. v. Sat-
urn, and reff. there given ; B. D. s. v. Remphan].•
ρ€ω : fut. ρίύσω (in Grk. writ, more com. ρήσομοί, see
ρέω
562
ρήμα
\ν. 89 (85) ; [Β. 67 (59)] ; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 739) ;
[(Skr. sru; cf. Lat. y?uo; Eng. siream; Curtius§ 517)];
fr. Horn, down; Sept. for 311; to flow, Jn. vii. 38.
[COMP. : τταραρρί'ω.] *
'ΡΕΩ, see (ΐπον.
'Ρήγιον, -ου, τό, Rhegium (now Reggio), a town and
promontory at the extremity of the Bruttian peninsula,
opposite Messana [^Messitia^ in Sicily ; (it seems to liave
got its name from the Greek verb pijyw/it, because at that
point Sicily was believed to have been ' rent away ' from
Italy; so Pliny observes, hist. nat. 3, 8, (14); [Diod. Sic.
4, 85 ; Strabo 6, 258 ; Fhilo de incorrupt, mund. § 26 ; al.
See Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.]) : Acts xxviii. 13.*
^ήγμα, -Tor, τό, (ρήγνυμι), what has been broken or rent
asunder; a. a fracture, breach, cleft: Hippocr., Dem.,
[Aristot.], Polyb., al.; for i!'p3, Am. vi. 11 Alex. b.
plur. for 0';ττρ, rent clothes: 1 K. xi. 30 sq. ; 2 K. ii.
12. c. fail, ruin : Lk. vi. 49.*
ρήγνυμι (Mt. ix. 17) and ρήσσα (Horn. H. 18, 571;
1 K. xi. 31; Mk. ii. 22 RG Lmrg.; ix. 18; [Lk. v. 37
Lmrg. ; (see below)]); fut. ρή^ω; 1 aor. ίρρηξα; pres.
pass. 3 pers. plur. ρηγηνται ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for
J7p3 and I'Tp ; to rend, burst or break asunder, break up,
break through ; a. univ. : tovs άσκούί, Mk. ii. 22 i
Lk. v. 37; pass. Mt. ix. 17; i. q. to tear hi pieces [A.V.
rend^ : τινά, Mt. vii. 6. b. sc. (υφροσννην (previously
chained up, as it were), to break forth into joy : Gal. iv.
27, after Is. liv. 1 (the full phrase is found in Is. xlix.
13; lii. 9; [cf. B. § 130, 5]; in class. Grk. pηyvvvaι κΚαυθ-
μόν, οίμωγην, Saxpva, esp. φωνην is used of infants or dumb
persons beginning to speak ; cf. Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii. p.
1332*; [L. and S. s. v. I. 4 and 5]). o. i. q. σπα-
ράσσω, to distort, convulse : of a demon causing convul-
sions in a man possessed, Mk. ix. 18 ; Lk. Ix. 42; in both
pass, many [so R. V. txt.] explain it to dash doicn, hurl to
the ground, (a common occurrence in cases of epilepsy) ;
in this sense in Artem. oneir. 1, 60 a wrestler is said
ρήξαι τον άντίπαΚον. Hesych. gives ρηξαι• καταβα\(ΐν.
Also pijtf ■ κατίβαλΐ. Cf. Kninoel or Fritzsche on Mk.
ix. 18. [Many hold that ρήσσω in this sense is quite a
different word from ρήγνυμι (and its collat. or poet.
ρήσσω), and akin rather to (the onomatopoetic) άράσσω,
ράσσω, to throw or dash down ; cf. Lobeck in Bttm.
Ausf. Spr. § 114, s. v. ρψ/νυμι; Curtius, Das Verbum,
pp. 162, 315; Schmidt, Syn. ch. 113, 7. See as exx.
Sap. iv. 19; Herra. mand. 11,8; Const, apost. 6, 9 p.
165,14. Ci. προσρήγνυμι.^ (COMP. : δια-, irepi-, προσ-
ρηγνυμι.) *
[Svs.: ^■ή-γννμι, κατάγνυμι, θραύω: β. to rend, rend
asunder, makes pointed reference to the separation of the
parts ; κ. to break, denotes the destruction of a thing's unity
or completeness ; β. to shatter, is suggestive of many fragments
and minute dispersion. Cf. Schmidt ch. 115]
{ι^μα, -TOf, TO, (fr. *PEi2, pf. pass. €'φημαι), fr. Theogn.,
Hdt., Pind. down ; Sept. chiefly for Ί3Τ ; also for ΙΏΝ,
Π^ϊ?, Π5, ΓΤΐηΚ, etc.; 1. prop, that which is or has
been uttered by the living voice, thing spoken, word, [cf.
ΐποτ, also Xoyor, I. 1]; i.e. a. any sound produced
by the voice and having a definite meaning : Mt. xxviL
14 ; p. yKoatrqs, Sir. iv. 24; φωνή ρημάτων, a sound of
words, Heb. xii. 19 ; ρήματα άρρητα, [unspeakable words],
2 Co. xii. 4. b. Plur. τά ρήματα, speech, discourse,
(because it consists of words either few or many [c£.
Philo, leg. alleg. 3, 61 το Se ρήμα μίρος λόγου]) : Lk. viL
1 ; Acts ii. 14 ; words, sayings, Jn. viii. 20; x. 21 ; Act•
[x. 44] ; xvi. 38 ; τά p. tivos, what one has said, Lk.
x.xiv. 8, 11, or taught, Ro. x. 18 ; τα p. μου, my teaching,
Jn. V. 47 ; xii. 47 sq ; xv. 7 ; τά p. ά e'yo) λαλώ, Jn. vi.
63; xiv. 10; \_ά\ηθ(ία! κ. σωφροσύνης p. άποφθ(γγοααι.
Acts xxvi. 25]; ρήματα ζωήί αιωνίου ίχια, thy teaching
begets eternal life, Jn. vi. 68 ; τά p. τοϋ θΐοϋ, utterances
in which God through some one declares his mind, Jn.
viii. 47 ; λαλίί Ttf τά p. toC Θ- speaks what God bids him,
Jn. iii. 34 ; XaXciv πάντα τά ρήματα τής ζωή: ταύτη!, to de-
liver the whole doctrine concerning this life, i. e. the
life eternal, Acts v. 20 ; τά p. a δίδωκάί μοι, what thou
hast bidden me to speak, Jn. xvii. 8 ; ρήματα \aKelv npos
Ttva, (V ols etc. to teach one the things by which etc.
Acts xi. 14 ; τά ρήματα τά προΐίρημίνα νπό τίνος, what one
has foretold, 2 I'et. iii. 2 ; Jude 1 7 ; \α\(Ίν ρήματα βλά-
σφημα €15 τίνα, to speak abusively in reference to one
[see «is, B. Π. 2 c. β."]. Acts vi. 11 ; κατά τινοί, against
a thing, ib. 13 [GLTTrAVHom. βλάσφ.]. c. a
series of words joined together into a sentence (a declara-
tion of one's mind made in words) ; a. univ. an utter-
ance, declaration, (Germ, eine Aeusserung) : Mt. xxvi.
75; Mk. ix. 32; xiv. 72; Lk. ii. 50; ix. 45; xviii. 34;
.\x. 26; Acts xi. 16; xxviii. 2.5; with adjectives, pij/ia
apyov, IVIt. xii. 36 ; ίΐπ^'ϊν πονηρον ρήμα κατά τίνος, to assail
one with abuse, Mt. v. 11 [R G ; al. om. p.]. β. a
saying of any sort, as a message, a narrative: concerning
some occurrence, XaXdv το p. πιρί τίνος, Lk. ii. 1 7 ; ρήμα
της πίστΐως, the ivord offailh, i. e. concerning the neces-
sity of putting faith in Christ, Ro. x. 8 ; α promise, Lk.
i. 38; ii. 29 ; κα\ον θ(οΰ ρήμα, God's gracious, comforting
promise (of salvation), Heb. vi. 5 (see καΚός, e.) ; καθα-
ρίσας . . . t'v ρήματι, acc. to promise (prop, on the ground
of his word of promise, viz. the promise of the pardon
of sins; cf. Mk. xvi. 16), Eph. v. 26 [al. take p. here as
i. q. ' the gospel,' cf. vi. 1 7, Ro. x. 8 ; (see Meyer ad
loc.)]; the word by which some thing is commanded, di-
rected, enjoined: Mt. iv. 4 [cf. W. 389 (364) n.] ; Lk. iv.
4 R G L Tr in br. ; Heb. xi. 3 ; a command, Lk. v. 5 ;
eyiviTo ρήμα θ(οΰ (πι τίνα, Lk. iii. 2 (Jer. i. 1 ; πρ6ς τίνα.
Gen. XV. 1 ; 1 Κ. xviii. 1 ) ; plur. ρήματα παρά σοΰ, xcords
from thee, i. e. to be spoken by thee, Acts x. 22 ; ρήμα
της δυνάμεως αντοΰ, his omnipotent command, Ileb. i.
3. doctrine, instruction, [cf. W. 123 (11")]: (rb) ρήμα
(toC) 6eoi, divine instruction by the preachers of the
gospel, Ro. X. 17 [RG; but LTTrWH p. XptoToC;
others give p. here the sense of command, commission ;
(cf. ^Nleyer)] ; saving truth which has God for its au-
thor, Eph. vi. 1 7 ; also τοϋ κυρίου, 1 Pet. i. 25 ; words
of prophecy, prophetic announcement, τά p. τοϋ Beov,
Rev. xvii. 1 7 Rec. [al. oi \oyoi τ. 5.]. 2. L• imi-
tc.tion of the Hebr. 131, the subject-matter of speech, thing
Ρησά
563
ροίζ'ηΐιόν
spoken of, thing; and that a. so far forth as it is
a matter of narration: Lk. ii. 15; Acts x. 37; plur.,
Lk. i. 65 ; ii. 19, 51 ; Acts v. 32 ; xiii. 42. b. in so
far as it is matter of command: Lk. i. 37 [see α^υνατία,
b.] (Gen. xviii. 14 ; Deut. xvii. 8). c. a matter of
dispute, case at law: ilt. xviii. 16; 2 Co. xiii. 1 [A. V.
retains ' word ' here and in the preceding pass.], (Deut.
xix. 15).*
'Ρησ-ά [Lchm. -σά (so Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.)], 6,
likeaa, the son of Zerubbabel : Lk. iii. 27.*
ρήσΌΌΐ, see ρηγνυμι•
ρήτωρ, -οροΓ, ό, ('ΡΕί2), α speaker, απ orator, (Soph.,
Eur., Arstpli., Xen., Plat., al.) : of a forensic orator or
advocate, Acts xxiv. 1. [Cf. Thorn. Mag. s. v. (p. 324,
15 ed. Rltschl) ; B. D. s. v. Orator, 2.] *
ρητώ;, (ρητοί), adv., expressly, in express words: ρητώ:
Xi'yei, 1 Tim. iv. 1. (Polyb. 3, 23, 5; Strabo 9 p. 426;
Plut. Brut. 29 ; [de Stoic, repugn. 15, 10] ; Diog. Laert. 8,
71 ; [al. ; cf. Wetstein on 1 Tim. 1. c.; W. 463 (431)].)*
ρίζα, -ijs, ή, (akin to Germ. Reis [cf. Lat. radix ; Eng.
root; see Curtius §515; Fick, Pt. iii. 775]), fr. Hom.
down ; Sept. for U/Tiy ; 1. α root : prop., Mt. iii.
10; Lk. iii. 9 ; ίκ ριζών, from the roots [cf . W. §51,1
d.], Mk. xi. 20 ; ρίζαν ίχ^ίν, to strike deep root, Mt. xiii.
6 ; Mk. iv. 6 ; trop. oi ρίζαν (χα" (v ίαντω, spoken of one
who has but a superficial experience of divine truth,
has not permitted it to make its way into the inmost
recesses of his soul, Mt. xiii. 21 ; Mk. iv. 17 ; Lk. viii.
13 ; in fig. disc, ρίζα πικρίας (see πικρία) of a person dis-
posed to apostatize and induce others to commit the
same offence, Ileb. xii. 15; the progenitors of a race
are called ρίζα, their descendants κλάδοι (see κλάδο;, b.),
Ro. xi. 16-18. Metaph. cause, orii/i», source: πάντων
των κακών, I Tim. vi. 10 ; τη! σοφίας. Sir. i. 6 (5), 20 (18);
της αθανασίας, .Sap. xv. 3; της αμαρτίας, of the devil, Ev.
Nicod. 23 ; άρχη κα\ ρίζα παντός άγαθοΰ, Epicur. ap. Athen.
12, 67 p. 546 stf. ; πηγή και ρίζα καλοκαγαθία! το νομίμου
Tt);(fi>' παιδίίαί, Plut. de puer. educ c. 7 b. 2. after
the use of the Hebr. ii'^U', that which like a root springs
from a root, a sprout, shoot ; metaph. offspring, progeny :
Ro. XV. 12; Rev. v. 5 ; xxii. 16, (L•. xi. 10).*
ριζέω, -ώ : pf. pass. ptcp. ίρριζωμίνος [see P, p] ; (βίζα) ;
fr. Ilom. down ; to cause lo strike root, to strengthen with
roots ; as often in class, writ, (see Passow s. v. 8 ; [L. and
S. s. V. I.]), trop. to render firm, lo fix, establish, cause a
person or a thing to be thoroughly grounded : pass, i'pptfa-
μίνος (Vulg. radicatus) iv άγάιττι, Eph. iii. 17 (18) [not
λνΐΐ]; €v Χριστώ, in communion with Christ, Col. ii. 7.
[CoMP. fVpifoa.]*
ριιτή, -ης, ή, (ρίπτω), used by the Grk. poets fr. Hom.
down ; a throw, stroke, beat : οφθαλμού (Vulg. ictus oculi
[A. V. the twinkling of an eye']), a moment of time, 1 Co.
XV. 52 [Lmrg. ροπή, q. v.].*
ριπίζω : pres. pass. ptcp. ριπιζόμινος ; (fr. ptirtr a bel-
lows or fan) ; hence 1. prop, to raise a breeze, put
air in motion, whether for the sake of kindling a fire or
of cooling one's self ; hence a. to blow up a fire :
φλάνα,ιτίρ, Anthol. 5, 122, 6; Plut. Flam. 21. b. to
fan i. e. cool with a fan (TeTtuli. flabello) : Plut. Anton.
26. 2. to toss to and fro, to agitate : of the wind,
προς άνίμων ριπίζίταί το ΰδωρ, Philo de incorrupt, mundi
§ 24 ; ριπιζομίνη άχνη, Dio Cass. 70, 4 ; &ημος άστατον,
κακόν και θαλασσί/ πάνθ' o/iotoK, υπ' άνεμου ριπίζίται, Dio
Chr. 32 p. 368 b. ; hence joined w. άνιμίζισθαι it is used
of a person whose mind wavers in uncertainty between
hope and fear, between doing and not doing a thing,
Jas. i. 6.*
piirrti», see ρίπτω.
ρίΐΓτω and ριπτίω (ριπτονντων. Acts xxii. 23 ; on the
diff. views with regard to the difference in meaning
betw. these two forms see Passow s. v. ρίπτω, fin. ; [ Veitch
s. V. ρίπτω, fin. Hermann held that ριπτΛν differed fr.
ρίπτ(ΐν as Lat. jactare fr. jacere, hence the former had a
frequent, force (cf. Lob. Soph. Aj. p. 1 77 ; Cope, Aristot.
rhet. vol. i. p. 91 sq.) ; some of the old grammarians
associate with ριπτύν a suggestion of earnestness or
effort, others of contempt]); 1 aor. fppi\jfa GTr, epp.
R L, ίριψα Τ WH, [ptcp. (Lk. iv. 35) βίψαν R G Tr
WH, better (cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 102; Veitch p. 512)
ρΊψαν L T] ; pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, ίρριττται [G Tr ; al.
epp-] (Lk. xvii. 2), ptcp. ίρριμμίνος G, (ριμμίνος Τ Tr WII,
pep. (with smooth breathing) Lchm. (Mt. ix. 36); on the
doubling of ρ and the use of the breathing see P, ρ ; fr.
Horn, down; Sept. chiefly for ψ^ϋΠ; to cast, throw;
i. q. to throw doicn : τί. Acts xxvii. 19; τι ίκ τίνος, ibid.
29 ; τιχα «f την θάλασσαν, Lk. xvii. 2. i. q. to throw
off: τα ιμάτια (Plat. rep. 5 p. 474 a.), Acts xxii. 23 (they
cast off their garments that they might be the better
prepared to throw stones [but cf. Wendt in Mey. 5te
Aurt.]) ; τα όπλα, 1 Mace. v. 43 ; vii. 44 ; xi. 51 ; Xen.
Cyr. 4, 2, 33, and often in other Grk. writ. i. q. to
cast forward or before : τίνα [or τί] t's rt, [Mt. xxvii. 5
(but here R G L tV τφ ναφ)] ; Lk. iv. 35 ; ηνας παρά τους
nabas Ίησοϋ, to set down (with the suggestion of haste
and want of care), of those who laid their sick at the feet
of Jesus, leaving them at his disposal without a doubt
but that he could heal them, Mt. xv. 30. i. q. to throw
lo the ground, prostrate : ίρριμμίνοι, prostrated by fatigue,
hunger, etc., [R. V. scattered], Mt. ix. 36 (καταλαβων
ίρμιμμίνους κα\ μίθνοντας, the enemy prostrate on the
ground, Polyb. 5, 48, 2 ; of the slain, Jer. xiv. 16 ; e'ppt^-
/li'm σώματα, 1 Mace. xi. 4 ; for other exx. see IVald,
Clavis Apocr. V.T. s. v.; τώΐ' νικρών ίρριμμίνων ί'πϊ TT)S
ά-γοράς, Plut. Galb. 28, 1). [CoMP. : άπο-, tVi- ρίτττω.] '
'Ροβοάμ, (π>'3ΠΤ i. β. 'enlarging the people', equiv. to
Εύρϋ^ημος in Grk.', fr. DOT and Di;), ό, Roboam, Reho-
boam, the son and successor of king Solomon: Mt. i. 7.*
Τό8η, -ijs, ή, Rhoda [i. e. ' rose '], the name of a certain
maidservant: Acts xii. 13.*
'PoSos, -ot), η, Rhodes, [(cf. Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.)],
a well-known i.4and of the Cyclades opposite Caria and
Lycia, with a capital of the same name : Acts xxi. 1.
([From Ilom. down] ; 1 Mace. xv. 23.) *
ροιζη8όν, {ροιζίω to make a confused noise), adv., 'with
aloudnoise': 2 Pet. iii. 10. (Xicand. ther. 556; Geop.,
al.)•
' Ρυμφά
564
' Ρωμ^
["Ρομ,φά, 'Ρομφάν, see 'Ρίμψάν."]
ρομφαία, -at, ij, α large sirorii ; prop, a long Thracian
javelin [cf. Rich, Diet, of Antiq. s. v. Rhompsa] ; also a
kind of long swonl wont to be worn on the right shoul-
der, (Hesych. ρομφαία • θμάκιον άμνντηριυν, μάχαιρα, ζίφος
η ακόντων μακρόν; [Siiidas 3223 c. (cf. ρίμβω to revolve,
vibrate)] ; ct. Plut. Aemil. 18) ; [A. V. sicoril] : Rev. i.
lii; ii. 12, 1(>; vi. 8; .\ix. 15, 21; σοϋ Si airiji την ψυχην
&ΐ(\(ύσ(ται ρομφαία, a fig. for ' extreme anguish shall fill
(pierce, as it were) thy soul', Lk. ii. 3.5, where cf. Kuinoi•!.
(Joseph, antt. 6, 12, 4; 7, 12, 1 ; in Ev. Nicod. 26 the
archangel Michael, keeper of Paradise, is called ή φ\ο-
γίνη ρομφαία. Very often in Sept. for 3^Π ; often also
in the O. T. Apocr.) *
[ροττή, -ης, ή, (ρίπω), fr. Aeschyl., Plat., down, inclinn•
linn ilijwnicarij.•:, as of the turning of the scale: iv poitfi
οφθαλμού, 1 Co. XV. 52 L mrg. (cf. Tdf.'s note ad loc.) ;
see ριπή.']
'Ρουβήν (in Joseph, antt. 1, 19, 8 'Ρονβηλοί), 6, (piKi,
i. e. behold ye a son! Gen. .xxix. 32 [cf. B. D. s. v.]),
Reuben, Jacob's firstborn eon by Leah : Rev. vii. 5.*
'Ρονβ (in Joseph, antt. 5, 9, 2 Ροίθη, -ηί), η, (nn for
Γ\?>•"', a female friend), Ruth, a Moabitish woman, one of
the ancestors of king David, whose history is related in
the canonical book bearing her name : Mt. i. 5. [B. D.
s. V. Ruth.] •
■Ροΰφοϊ, -ου, ό, Rufus [i. e. 'red', 'reddish'], a Lat.
proper name of a certain Christian : Mk. xv. 21 ; Ro.
xvi. 13. [B. D. s. V. Rufus.] •
ρύμη, -ijr, ή, (fr. PYQ i. q. ί'ρυω ' to draw ' [but Curtius
§ 517; Vanicek p. 1210, al., connect it with pta 'to
flow']); 1. in earlier Grk. the swing, rush, force,
trail, of a body in motion. 2. in later Grk. a tract
of way in a town shut in by buildings on both sides ; a
sired, lane: Mt. vi. 2; Lk. xiv. 21 ; Acts ix. 11; ,\ii. 10;
ef. Is. XV. 3 ; Sir. ix. 7 ; Tob. xiii. 18. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 404; IRufher/ord, New Phryn. p. 488; IVelslein on
Mt. u. 8.; W. 22, 23].•
ρΰομαι ; f ut. ρίσομαι ; 1 aor. ΐρρυσάμην G {4ρρνσ. R,
80 Τ in 2 Co. i. 10 ; 2 Pet. ii. 7 ; L everywh. e.\c. in 2
Tim. iii. 11 txt.) and ΐρυσάμην (so TrWII everywh., Τ
in Col. i. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 11 ; Ltxt. in 2 Tim. iii. 11);
a depon. mid. verb, in later Grk. w. the 1 aor. pass.
ίρρίσθην G {-pp- R), and (so LTTr AVIl in 2 Tim. iv. 17)
{ρΰσθην; (on the doubling of p, and the breathing, see in
P, p); fr. llom. down; Sept. chiefly for '7"Sn ; also for
Sk}, taSa (to cause to escape, to deliver), ySn (to draw
out), dS'D, i?'!?in, etc. ; fr. PYQ to draw, hence prop, lo
draw lo one's self, to rescue, to deliver: τικά, Mt. .xxvii.
43; 2 Pet. ii. 7 ; nva άττό rivos [cf. AV. § 30. 6 a.], Mt. vi.
13; Lk. xi. 4 R L; 1 Th. i. 10 [here TTr WH e'«; 2 Tim.
IT. 18]; 1 aor. pass., Ro. χ v. 31 ; 2 Th. iii. 2 ; «κά ίκ τίνος
[W. u. 8.]: Ro. vii. 24 [cf. W. § 41 a. 5]; 2 Co. i. 10; Col.
i. 1 3 ; 2 Tim. iii. 1 1 ; 2 Pet. ii. 9 ; 1 aor. pass., Lk. i. 74 ;
2 Tim. iv. 1 7 ; ό ρυόμίνος, the deliverer, Ro. xi. 26 (after
Is. lix. 20).•
^νιταίνω: (piirof, q. v.) ; to make filthy, befoid; to defile,
dishonor, (Xen., Aristot., Dion. Hal., Plut., al.); 1 aor.
pass. impv. 3 pers. sing, ρυπανθήτω, let him be made filthy,
i. e. trop. let him continue lo defile himself with sins, lier.
xxii. 11 LTTrWHtxt.•
ρυπαρ^ΰομαι : 1 aor. (pass.) impv. 3 pers. sing, pinro-
ρινβήτω ; (ρυπαρός, q. v.) ; to he dirty, grow filthy ;
metaph. to he defiled with iniquity : Rev. xxii. 1 1 G 1. ed.
ster. WHmrg. Found nowhere else; see ρύπαινα) and
pimotii.*
pvnropCo, -ας, ή, {ρχπταρός), fillhiness (Plut. praecept.
con jug. c. 28) ; metaph. of wickedness as moral defile-
ment : Jas. i. 21. [Of sordiilness, in Critias ap. Poll. S,
116; Plut. de adulat. et amic. § 19 ; al.] •
ρυιταρός, -ά, -όν, (ρίπος, q. v.), filthy, dirty: prop, of
clothing [A. V. vile'], Jas. ii. 2 (Sept. Zech. iii. 3 eq. ;
Josei)h. antt. 7, 11, 3 ; Plut. Phoe. 18 ; Dio Cass. 65, 20;
pxnrapa Koi άπλυτα, .\rtem. oneir. 2, 3 fin.; χΧαμΰς, Ael.
v. h. 14, 10) ; metaph. defiltd with iniquity, base, [A. V.
filthy]: Rev. xxii. 11 G L Τ Tr WH. [(In the sense
ot sordid, iiifiiin, Dion. Hal., al.)] *
ρνπος, -ου. ό, fr. llom. down,^/iA: 1 Pet. iii. 21 [B.
§ 151,14; AV. § 30, 3 N. 3].•
ρνιτόω, -ώ; 1 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing, ρυπωσάτωϊ Χ-
ίο make filthy, defile, soil: Horn. Od. 6. 59. 2. in-
trans. for ρνπάω. tii be filthy: morally. Rev. xxii. 11 Rec*
^vo-is, -(ως, ή, (fr. an unused pres. ρϋω, from which
several of the tenses of ρίω are borrowed), a flowing,
issue : τηϋ αίματος, Mk. v. 25 ; I,k. viii. 43, [on the two
preced. pass. cf. B. § 147, 11 ; W. § 29, 3 b.], 44, (Hip-
pocr., Aristot.).*
pvrCs, -ί^ος, IJ, (PYQ, to draw together, contract), a
wrinlde : Eph. v. 27. (Arstph., Plat., Diod. 4, 51 ; Plut.,
Lcian., Anthol., al.) *
'Ρωμαϊκός, -ή. -όν, Roman, Latin : I>k. xxiii. 38 R G L
br. Tr mrg. br. [(Polyb., Diod., Dion. Hal., al.)] •
'Ρωμαϊοϊ, -ou, ό, « Tioman : Jn. xi. 48; Actsii. 10 [R. V.
here from Rome] ; xvi. 21, 37 sq. ; xxii. 25-27, 29 ; xxiiL
27; xxv. 16; xxviii. 17. ([Polyb., Joseph., al.] ; often
in 1 and 2 Mace.) *
'Ρωμα'ιστί, adv., in the Roman fashion or language,
iii Latin: Jn. xix. 20. [Epictet. diss. 1, 17, 16; Plut..
App., al.] *
'Ρώμη, -ης, ή [on the art. with it cf. AV. § 18, 5 b. ;
(on its derivation cf. Curtius §517; Vanifek p. 1212;
Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.)], Rome, the renowned capital
of Italy and ancient head of the world : Acts xviii. 2 ;
xix. 21 ; xxiii. 11; xxviii. 14, 16 ; Ro. i. 7, 15; 2 Tim. i.
1 7. (1 Mace. i. 10; vii. 1 ; [Aristot., Polyb., al.].) [On
Rome in St. Raid's time cf. BB.DD. s. v.; Conybeare and
Howson, Life and Epp. etc. ch. xxiv. ; Farrar, Life and
AA'ork etc. chh. xxxvii., xliv., xlv. ; Lewin, St. Paul, vol.
ii. ch. vi. ; Ilausralh, Xeutest. Zeitgesch. iii. 65 sqq. ; on
the Jews and Christians there, see particularly Schiirer,
Die Gemeindeverfassung der Juden in Rom in d.
Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargest. (Leipz. 1879),
Seyerlen, Enstehung u.s.w. der Christengemeinde in
Rom (Tubingen, 1874); Huidekoper, Judaism at Rome,
2d ed., N. ¥.1877; Schaff, Hist, of the Chris. Church
(1882) vol. i. §36.]•
ρυΛννυμι
565
σαββατον
ρύννυμι : ίο make strong, to strengthen ; pf. pass, tppiu-
fai [see P, p], to be strong, to thrive, prosper ; hence the
t pers. (sing.) impv. is the usual formula in closing a
letter, ΐρρωσο, farewell : Acts xxiii. 30 [RG] ; ΐρρωσθί.
Acts XV. 29 (2 ilacc. xi. 21 ; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 33 ; Arteui.
oneir. 3, 44, aL; ίρρωσα και Iryiaive, D'lo Cass. 61, 13^.*
[2, o•, s: the practice (adopted by Griesbach, Knapp, al.,
after H. Stepliaiius et al. ) of employing the character j in
the mid. of a comp. word has been abandoned l)y the recent
crit. eiUtors ; cf. W. §5,1 c. ; Li/isiiis, (Irani. Untersucli. p.
122 ; Matthiae § 1 Anm. 5 ; Dttm. Au.sf. Sprchl. § 2 Anm. 3 ;
Kiihner § 1 Anm. 1. Tdf. ed 8 writes σ also even at the end
of a word, after the older Mss. On niovalile final s see
ixpi(i),/it'xpi(s)> o'UTw{s). The (Ionic) coinbiuatious ρσ for
fp, and σσ for ττ (cf. Fischer, Animailvers. ad Veller. etc.
i. pp. 19.3 sq. 203; Kuhner § 31 pp. 124, 127), have become
predominant (cf. &ρσ•ην, θαρσίω, θάρσο5, απαλλάσσω etc.,
γλώσσα, ?ισσων (q.v.), βάλασσα, κηρύσσω. 'πίρισσ6$, ττράσσω
((]. V.), τάσσαι, τίσσαρα, ψυΚάσσω, etc.), except in a few
words, as κρ^ίττων (q. v.), the derivati\'es of 4\arTuiv (of which
word i)oth forms are used indiscriminately ), ^ττ-ημα, ήττάω
(yet see 2 Co. xii. 13), etc. ; cf. B. 7. Some prop, names are
spelled indifferently with one σ or with two ; as, Έλισ(σ)οϊο$.
ζ Is occasionally substituted for σ, esp before μ, see σβί^νυμι,
2μνρνα {σμύρνα, cf. Soph. Gloss. § 58, 3, and Lex. s. v. ; 'J'df.
Proleg. p. 80; WII. App. p. 148; B. 5 ; Zii//«.Ausf. Sprchl.
§ 3 Anm. 6 ; Bezae cod., ed. Srrirener, p. xlviii. ; L. and S.
e.v. Z. T. 3, and 2. Π. 14 c.) : so also ξ, as iuueafm 1 Pot. iv.
12 R"*^ ; cf. Kiihner § 325, 5 ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. u. s. ; see ξύν.]
σοβαχθανί, -wi Τ TrWH [see WH. App. p. 155, and
■. V. fi, t], -κθανί Lchm. [in Mt. only], {'^ηρτ^, fr. the
Cha.Ul. ρτύ), thou hast for.iaken me: Alt. xxvii. 46 ; Mk.
XV. 34 (fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2, for the llebr. 'JFiprj.^, which
is so rendered also by the Chaldee paraphrast). [See
Kaulzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Arara. (Leipzig 1884) p. 11.]*
σ-αβαώθ (Hebr. iliX^X, plur. of S3i an army) : κϋριο!
ra^ao>e (Π1Χ3Ϊ ^y^^), [ A. V. Lord of Sabaoth], i.e. lord
nf the armies sc. of Israel, as those who under the lead-
ership and protection of Jehovah maintain his cause in
war (cf. Schrader, Ueber d. urspriingl. Sinn des Got-
tesnamens Jahve Zebaoth, in the Jahrbb. f. protest.
Theol. for 1875, p. 31 G sijq., and in Schenkel v. 702 s<[.;
cf. H/;rm. Schultz, Alttest. Theol. ii. p. 96 sqq. ; [B.D.
8. V. Sabaoth, the Lord of. But for the other view, ace.
to which the heavenly " hosts " are referred to, see
Hackett in B. D., Am. ed., s. v. Tsebaoth Lord of, and
Delitzsch in the Luth. Zeitschr. for 1874, p. 21 7 sqq. ; so
Riehm (HWB s. v. Zebaoth) as respects the u.^e of the
phrase by the prophets]. On the diverse interpreta-
tions of the word cf. Oehler in Herzog .xviii. p. 400 sqq.
[and in his O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) §§ 195 sq. ; cf. T. K.
Cheyne, Isa., ed. 3, vol. i. 1 1 sq.]) : Ro. ix. 29 ; Jas. v. 4.•
α-αββαησγύί, -ov, 6, (σαββατίζω to keep tlie sabbath) ;
1. a keeping sabbath. 2. the blessed rest from toils
and troubles looked for in the age to come by the true
worshippers of God and true Christians [R. V. .labbath
rest'l : Heb. iv. 9. (Pint, de superstit. c. 3 ; ecel. writ.) *
ο-άββατον, -ου, τό, (Ilebr. Π3Ι^), found in the N. T.
only in the historical bks. exc. twice in Paul's Epp. ;
sabbath ; i. e. 1. the seventh day of each week,
which was a sacred festival on which the Israelites were
required to abstain from all work (Ex. xx. 10 ; xxxi. IS
sqq. ; Deut. v. 14) ; a. sing, σάββατόν and to σαβ-
βατον : Mk. vi. 2 ; [xv. 42 LTr]; xvi. 1 ; .In. v. 9 sq., etc. ;
i. q. tlie institution of tlie sabbath, tlie law for keeping holy
every seventh Jay of the week : Mt. xii. 8 ; Mk. ii. 27 sip ;
Lk. vi. .5; \v€iv, Jn. v, 18; τηρ^Ιν, Jn. ix. 16 ; η ημίρα
τοϋ σαββάτου (ϊ^2ϋ>Γ\ DV, Ex. xx. 8 and often), the day
of the sabbath, sabbath-day, Lk. xiii. 16; xiv. 5; όδΟΕ
σαββάτου, a safibalh-day's Journey, the distance it is law-
ful to travel on the sabbath-day, i. e. ace. to the Talmud
two thousand cubits or paces, ace. to Epiphanius (haer.
66, 82) six stadia: Acts i. 12, cf. Mt. xxiv. 20, (the
regulation was derived fr. Ex. .xvi. 29) ; cf. Win. RU'B.
s. V. Sabbathsweg; Oehler in Herzog xiii. 203 sq. [cf.
Leyrer in Herzog ed. 2 vol. ix. 3 79]; Mangold in Schen-
kel v. 127 sq.; \_Ginsburg in Alexander's Kitto s. v. Sab-
bath Day's Journey; Lumby on Acts i. 12 (in Cambr.
Bible for Schools)]. as dat. of time [W. § 31, 9 b. •,
B. § 1.33, 26] : σαββάτω, Mt. x.xiv. 20 [GLTTrWll];
Lk. xiv. 1 ; τω σαββ'άτω, Lk. vi. 9 L txt. Τ Tr AVII ;
xiii. 14 sq. ; xiv. 3 ; Acts xiii. 44 ; iv σαββήτω, Mt. xii.
2 ; Jn. V. 16 ; vii. 22 [here L WH br. tV], 23 ; e'v τω σαβ-
βάτω, hk. \\. 7; Jn. xix. 31. accus. το σάββ. during
(on) the sabbath [cf. B. § 131, 11 ; W. §32,6] : Lk. xxiiL
5() ; κατά πάν σ. every sabbath, .\cts .xiii. 27; xv. 21;
xviii. 4. plur. τα σύββατα, of several sabbaths, Acts
xvii. 2 [some refer this to 2]. b. plur. τα σάββ.
(for the singular) of a s i η gle sabbath, sabbath-day, (the
use of the plur. being occasioned either by the plur.
names of festivals, as τα ΐγκαίνια, άζυμα, yevcota, or by
the Chaldaic form «n39 [W. 177 (167); B. 23 (21)]):
Mt. xxviii. 1 ; Col. ii. 16, (Ex. xx. 10; Lev. xxiii. 32 etc.;
την ίβ&όμην σάββατα καλοΰμιν, Joseph, antt. 8, 6, 6 ; add,
1, 1, 1 ; [14, 10, 25 ; Philo de Abrah. § 5; de cherub.
§ 26 ; Plut. de superstitione 8] ; την των σαββάτων (ορτηρ.
σα•^ηνη
566
^αΧαθιτηΚ
Plut. symp. 4, 6, 2 ; hodie tricesima sabbata, Hor. sat.
1. 9, 69; nowhere so used by John exc. in the phrase
/xi'fi τά>ν σαββάτων, on which see 2 below) ; ή ημίρα των
σ., Lk. iv. 16 ; Acts xiii. 14 ; xvi. 13 (Ex. xx. 8 ; xxxv.
3 ; Deut. v. 12 ; Jer. xvii. 21 sq.) ; roir σάββασιν and fv
τοις σάββασιν (so constantly [exc. Lchm. in Mt. .xii. I,
12] by metaplasm for σαββάτοις, cf. W. 63 (62) ; [B. 23
(21)]) on the sabbath-day: Mt. xii. 1 [see above], 5,
10-12 [see above]; Mk. i. 21 ; ii. 23; iii. 2,4; Lk. iv. 31 ;
vi. 9 [R G L mrg.], (1 Mace. ii. 38 ; the Sept. uses the
form σαββάτοΐί, and Josephus both forms). On the
precepts of the Jews with regard to the observance of
the sabbath, which were for the most part extremely
punctilious and minute, cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Sabbath ;
Oehler in Herzog xiii. 192 sqq. [revised by Orelli in ed.
2 vol. xiii. 156 sqq.]; Schiirer, Zeitgesch. 2te Aufl. §88
n. ; Mangold in Schenkel v. p. 123 sq. ; [BB.DD. s. v.;
Geikie, Life and Words of Christ, ch. xxxviii. vol. iL
p. 95 sqq. ; Farrai; Life of Christ, ch. xxxi. vol. i. p.
432 sq. ; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, vol. ii. p. 56 sqq.
and App. xvii.]. 2. seven days, a week : πρώτη σαβ-
βάτον, Mk. xvi. 9 ; 81s τον σα/3, twice in the week, Lk. xviii.
12. The plur. is used in the same sense in the phrase
ή μία των σαββάτων, the first day of the week (see fit, 5)
[Prof. Sophocles regards the gen. (dependent on ήμίρα)
in such exx. as those that follow (cf. Mk. xvi. 9 above)
as equiv. to /χίτά w. an ace, Ikejirst day after the sabbath ;
see his Lex. p. 43 par. 6] : Mt. xxviii. 1 ; Mk. xvi. 2 ;
Lk. xxiv. 1 ; Jn. xx. 1, 19 ; Acts xx. 7 ; κατά μίαν σαββάτων
(L Τ Tr VVH -του), on the first day of every week, 1 Co.
xvi. 2.
«Γογήνη, -ης, ή, (σάσσω to load, fill), a large fishing-m.et,
a drag-net (Vulg. sagena [cf. Eng. seined), used in catch-
ing fish that swim in shoals [of. B. D. s. v. Net ; Trench,
Syn. §lxiv.] : Mt. xiii. 47. (Sept.; Plut. solert. anim. p.
977 f.; Lcian. pise. 51; Tim. 22; Artem. oneir. 2, 14;
Ael. h. a. 11, 12; [βάλλ^ιν aay- Babr. fab. 4, 1 ; 9, 6].) *
SoSSouKatos, -ου, 6, a Sailducee, a member of the party
of the Sadducees, who, distinguished for birth, wealth,
and official position, and not averse to the favor of the
Herod family and of the Romans, hated the common
people, were the opponents of the Pharisees, and reject-
ing tradition (see παράδοσίΓ, 2) acknowledged the au-
thority of the O. T. alone in matters pertaining to faith
and morals (Joseph, antt. 13, 10, 6) ; they denied not
only the resurrection of the body (Mt. xxii. 23; Mk.
xii. 18; Lk. xx. 27; Acts xxiii. 8), but also the immor-
tality of the soul and future retribution (ψυχ^Γ re την
ίίαμονην (cm τα! καβ άδον τιμωρία! και τίμα! άναιροϋσι,
Joseph, b. j. 2, 8, 14, cf. antt. 18, 1, 4), as well as the
existence of angels and spirits (Acts xxiii. 8). They
maintained man's freedom in opposition to the doc-
trine of divine predestination (ace. to Joseph, b. j. 2,
8, 14). They are mentioned in the N. T. (in addition
to the pass, already referred to) in Mt. iii. 7 ; xvi. 1, 6, 11
sq., (in which passages they are associated apparently
with the Pharisees contrary to the truth of history [(?)
cf. the Comm. ad 11. cc.]) ; Mt. xxii. 34 ; Acts iv. 1 ; v. 1 7 ;
xxiii. 6 sq. The Sadducees derived their name appar-
ently not from the Hebr. ρ'Τί, as though they boasted
of being pre-eminently ' righteous ' or ' upright ' (since it
cannot be shown that the vowel i ever passed over into
u), but, ace. to a more probable conjecture now ap-
proved by many, from the Zadok (O\Ti, Sept. Σαδδοΰκ),
who Λvas high-priest in the time of David and exhibited
special fidelity to the king and liis house (2 S. xv. 24 Siji].;
1 K. i. 32 sqq.) ; hence the posterity of tliis priest (ρΠΧ '03,
Ezek. xl. 46 ; .xliii. 19; xUv. 15 ; xlviii. 11) and all their
adherents seem to have been called Σαδδουκαίοι (D'pns).
Cf., besides others, Win. RWB. s. v. Sadducaer; Reuss
in Herzog xiii. p. 289 sqq. ; [Sieffert in Herzog ed. 2 xiii.
pp. 210-244] ; Geiger, Sadduc. u. Pharisiier (Brsl. 18G3) ;
Keim i. p. 273 sqq. [Eng. trans, i. (2d ed.) p. 353 sq.] ;
Hausrath in Schenkel iv. p. 518 sqq.; iichiirer, Ntl. Zeit-
gesch. 2te Aufl. § 26 ; WeUhausen, Pharis. u. Sadducaer
(Greifsw. 1874) ; Oiirt, De oorsprong van den naam Sad-
duceen, in the Theolog. Tijdschrift for 1876, p. 605 sqq.;
\_Ginsburg, in Alexander's Kitto s. v. ; Edersheim, Jesus
the Messiah, bk. iii. ch. ii. ; Geikie, Life of Christ, ch. xlv.
(cf. ch. V.) ; and B. D. Am. ed. s. v. for additional refer-
ences].*
Σοιδώκ, (ρπϊ, a pr. name occurring often in the O. T.),
0, Sad(jc: Mt. i. 14.*
o-aCvu : pres. inf. pass, σαίν^σθαι ; (2AQ, σίΐ'ω) ; 1.
prop, to wag the tail : of dogs, Horn. Od. 16, 6; Ael. v. h.
13, 41 ; Aesop, fab. 229 ed. Halm [354 ed. Coray] ; with
ουρΐι added, Od. 17, 302; Hes. theog. 771 ; ουράν, Aesop
I.e. ; al. ; see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v. I. 2. metaph.
a. toflatter, fawn upon, (Aeschyl., Pind., Soph., al.). b.
to move (the mind of one), a. agreeably : pass, wr
ίλπίδοί, Aeschyl., Oppian ; αληθή σαίν(ΐ την ^Ιηχην, Aris-
tot. metaph. 13, 3 p. 1090% 37. β. to agitate, disturb,
trouble : pass. 1 Th. iii. 3 [here Α.Λ'. move (B. 263 (226))]
(here Lchm. άσαίνω, q. v.) ; ot δί σαινόμ^νοι to'is Xfyo-
μίνοις ίδάκρυον, Diog. Laert. 8, 41.*
σ-άκκοΐ (Attic σάκοί), -ου, ό, Hebr. Τ>ϋ [cf. Vanicek,
Fremdwbrter, s. v.], a sack (Lat. saccus) i. e. a. a
receptacle made for holding or carrying various things,
as money, food, etc. (Gen. xiii. 25, 35 ; Lev. xi. 32). b.
a coarse cloth (Lat. cilicium), a dark coarse stuff made
especially of the hair of animals [A. V. sackcloth^ : Rev.
vi. 12; a garment of the like material, and clinging to
the person like a sack, which was wont to be worn (or
drawn on over the tunic instead of the cloak or mantle)
by mourners, penitents, suppliants, Mt. xi. 21 ; Lk. x.
13, and also by those who, like the Hebrew prophets,
led an austere life. Rev. xi. 3 (cf. what is said of the
dress of John the Baptist, Mt. iii. 4 ; of Elijah, 2 K. i.
8). More fully in Win. RWB. s. v. Sack ; Roskoff in
Schenkel v. 134 ; [s. v. Sackcloth in B. D. ; also in Mc-
Clintock and Strong. (From Hdt. down.)] *
Σαλά, {rh'u a missile), 6. Sola [so A. V. (but in Gen.
Salah); properly Shelah (so R. V.)], prop, name of a
man mentioned in Lk. iii. 35 (Gen. x. 24) ; [T Tr mrg.
WH read Σαλά also in Lk. iii. 32, for ΊαΚμών, q. v.].*
Σαλαθιηλ, (^K'n'^Kiy whom I asked of God), ό, Sala
Σαλαμκ
667
Σαμάρεια
Ihiel [Grk. for Shealtiel (so R.V.)], the father of Zerub-
babel: Mt. i. 12; [Lk. iii. 27].•
Σολαμΐ5, [on its deriv. see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.],
-Ivos, ή, Salamis, the principal city of the island Cyprus :
Acts xiii. 5. [BB. DD. ; Diet, of Geog. s. v. ; Lewin,
St. Paul, i. 120 sq.]•
SoXcip., TO, Salim, a town which ace. to Eusebius and
Jerome [Onomast. (ed. Larsow and Parthey) pp. 28, 11 ;
29, 14] was eight miles S. of Scythopolis : Jn. iii. 23 ; of.
Pressel in Herzog xiii. 326 ; [cf. Αΐι/ώι/]. See 2αλή/ι.*
σαλεύω ; 1 aor. ϊσάλινσα; Pass., pres. ptcp. σαλινόμί-
fof ; l)f. ptcp. σΐσαΚΐνμίνοί ; 1 aor. (σαΚΐΰβην ; 1 fut.
σαλίυθήσομαί ; (σάλοί, i). v.) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Arstph.
down ; in Sept. pass. σαΚίϋομαι for D13 and ^MJ ; a.
prop, of the motion produced by winds, storms, waves,
etc. ; to agitate or shake : κάλαμον, pass., J\It. .\i. 7 ; Lk.
vii. 24 ; to cause to totter, τας δυνάμίΐΓ των oip-, pass., Mt.
xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 25 ; Lk. xxi. 26; την yrjv, Heb. xii.
26 (Is. xxiv. 20 ; Am. ix. 5) ; an edifice, Lk. vi. 48 ; Acts
iv. 31 ; xvi. 26; τά μη σάΚίνόμινα, the things wliich are
not shaken, i. e. the perfect state of things which will
exist after the return of Christ from heaven and will
undergo no change, opp. to τα σα\(υόμ(να, the present
order of things subject to vicissitude and decay, Heb.
xii. 27. to shake thoroughly, of a measure filled by shak-
ing its contents together, Lk. vi. 38. b. to shake
down, overthrow, i. e. trop. to cast down from one's (secure
and happy) state. Acts ii. 25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8) ; by a
trop. use foreign to prof. auth. to move or agitate the
mind, to disturb one: τίνα άπο τοΟ νοός, so as to throw
him out of his sober and natural mental state [B. 322
(277)], 2 Th. ii. 2; toiis (j)^Kovs, to stir up. Acts xvii.
13.•
Σαλήμ, ή, (Heb. dSu), Salem: Heb. vii. 1 sq. ; cf. Gen.
xiv. IS, which some (as Gesenius, Winer, Hitzig, Knobel,
Delitzsch) think is the ancient name of the city of Jer-
usalem, appealing to the words of Ps. Ixxvi. 3 'ΠΊ
133 0'7u3, and Joseph, antt. 1, 10, 2 την μίντοι Σολυμα
Ζστίρον (καΚ(σαν'\(ροσό\υμα\ cf. b. j. 6, 10. But more
correctly [yet cf. B. D. s. v. .Salem, and s. v. Melchizedek
sub fin.] others (as Rosenmiiller, Bleek, Tuch, Roediger
in Gesen. Thesaur. s. v. p. 1422, Dillmann), relying on
the testimony of Jerome ([Ep. ad Evangelum § 7 i. e.]
Ep. 73 in Vallarsi's ed. of his Opp. i. p. 446), hold that
it is the same as Σαλίΐ'μ (q. v.). For the ancient name
of Jerusalem was DU; (Judg. xix. 10 ; 1 Chr. xi. 4 ; [cf.
B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Jebus]), and the form of the name in
Ps. Ixxvi. 3 [where Sept. (Ιρήνη'\ is to be regarded as
poetical, signifying 'safe.'*
Σαλμών, (po'^S', Ruth iv. 21), 5, indecl., Salmon, the
name of a man : ^It. i. 4 sq. ; Lk. iii. 32 [here TWH
Tr mrg. 2αλά].*
Σαλμώνη, -τ;?, η, Salmone, Salmonium, [also Sammo-
nium~\, an eastern and partly northern promontory of
Crete opposite Cnidus and Rhodes [the identification of
which is somewhat uncertain ; see B. D. Am. ed. s. v.
Salmone, and Diet, of Geogr. s. v. Samonium] : Acts
xxvii. 7.•
eraXos, -ou, ό, the tossing or swell of the sea [R. V. bU-
ίοίί-.ν] : Lk. xxi. 25. (Soph., Eur., al.)•
σάλίΓίγξ, -lyyof, ή, a trumpet : Mt. xxiv. 31 [cf. B. 161
(141) ; 343 (295)] ; 1 Co. xiv. 8; Heb. xii. 19 ; Rev. i.
10 ; iv. 1 ; viii. 2, 6, 13; ix. 14 ; iv σάΧπιγγι θ(οϋ, a trum-
pet which sounds at God's command (W. § 3C, 3 b.), 1
Th. iv. 16 ; iv ttj iaxarrj σάΚιηγγι, the trumpet which
will sound at tlie last day, 1 Co. xv. 52, [4 (2) Esdr. vi.
23 ; see Comm. on 1 Th. u. s.]. (From Hom. down ; Sept.
for lilliy and ΓΤίΧΪΠ.) *
σ-αλιτΐζω ; fut. σαλπίσω (for the earlier σαλπιγ|ω, see
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 191 ; Sept. also σαλπίώ, as Xum.x. [3],
5, 8, 10); 1 aor. «'σάλπισα (also in Sept.; Ael. v. h. 1,
26 and other later writ. [cf. A'eitch s. v.], for the earlier
iσά\^τιyξa, Xen. anab. 1, 2, 17) [cf. W. 89 (85); B. 37
(32) ; WH. App. p. 1 70] ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. chiefly
for i'pn, also for ΊϊΠ ; to sound a trumpet, [Α.Λ'. (most-
ly) sound']: Rev. viii. 6-10, 12sq.; ix. 1, 13 ; x. 7 ; xi. 15;
σαλπίσ(» (strictly sc. ό σαλπιστήί or ή σάΚπιγξ), like our
the trumpet will sound (cf. "W. § 58, 9 b. /3. ; [B. § 129,
16]), 1 Co. XV. 52; σαλπίζ^ιν ΐμπροσθ(ν ίαυτοϊι, i.e. to
take care that what we do comes to everybody's ears,
make a great noise about it, [cf. our do a thing ' with a
flourish of trumpets'], Mt. vi. 2 (Cic. ad div. 16, 21
quod polliceris, te buccinatorem fore nostrae e.xistima-
tionis ; Achill. Tat. 8, 10 airi; οϋχ ΰττο σάλπιγγι μόνον,
αΚ\α και κηρυκι μοιχ(ν€ται).*
σαλίΓίστήϊ (a later form, used by Theophr. char. 25;
Polyb. 1, 45, 13 ; Dion. Hal. 4, 18, [al.], for the earlier
and better σαλπιγκτής, Thuc. 6, 69; Xen. an. 4, 3, 29;
Joseph, b. j. 3, 6, 2; and σαλπικτής, Dem. p. 284, 26 ; App.
hisp. 6, 93; and in the best codd. of Xen., Diod., Plut.,
al. ; [cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 279]; fr. σαλπίζω
[q. V.]), -oO. ό, a trumpeter: Rev. xviii. 22.*
Σολώμη, [Hebr. 'peaceful '], -i/s, ή, Salome, the wife of
Zebedee, and the mother of the apostles James the
elder and John : Mk. xv. 40; xvi. 1.*
Σαλωμών, see Σολο/ιών.
Σαμάρίΐα [on the accent cf. Chandler §104; B. 17 (15);
-ia Τ WH (see Tilf. Proleg. p. 87; cf. I, t)". on the forms
see Abbot in B.D. Am. ed. s. v.], -as [cf. B. u. s.], ή [cf.
W. § 18, 5a.], (Hebr. \1-\oW, Chald. [p.ni^ pron. Scha--
me-ra-in, Assyr. Samirina), [on the deriv. see B. D. s. v.],
Samaria ; 1. the name of a city built by Omri
king of Israel (1 K. xvi. 24), on a mountain of the same
name (tl'iOli' 1Π, Am. vi. 1), situated in the tribe of
Ephraim ; it was the capital of the whole region and
the residence of the kings of Israel. After having been
besieged three years by Shalmaneser [IV.], king of As-
syria, it was taken and doubtless devastated by Sargon,
his son and successor, B. c. 722, who dei)orted the ten
tribes of Israel and supplied their place with other
settlers ; 2 K. xvii. 5 sq. 24 sq. ; xviii. 9 sqq. After its
restoration, it was utterly destroyed by John HjTcanus
the .lewish prince and high-priest (see next word). Long
afterwards rebuilt once more, it was given by Augus-
tus to Herod [the Great], by whom it was named in
honor of Augustus Sebaste, i. e. Augusta, (Strab. lib. 16,
2αμαρ€ίτηί
568
σαττροί
ρ. 760; Joseph, antt. 15, 7, 3 ; 8, δ). It is now an ob-
scure village bearing the name of Sebuslieh or Sebasliyth
(cf. Bwleker, Palustina, p. 354 sqc). [Kng. trans, p. 340
siiq. ; Murray, llndbk. Pt. ii. p. 329 s<ii|.]). It is men-
tioned, Acts viii. 5 L Τ W'll, (if r^i» nuKtv τήί Σαμαμύας
(gen. of apposition, cf. W. § 5!), « a.; [H. § 123, 4J), but
ace. to the better reading fit πάλιν της Σαμ. the gen. is
partitive, and does not denote the cit)• but the Samar-
itan territory ; cf. vs. y. 2. l/ie Stimarilan lurri•
lory, the region of Samaria, of which llie city Samaria
was the capital ; Lk. .wii. 11 ; Jn. iv. 4 sij. 7 ; Acts i. 8 ;
viii. 1, 5 (see above), !» ; i.\. 31 ; xv. 3 ; by meton. for the
inhabitants of the region, Acts viii. 14. Cf. Win. KWIi.
s. V. Samaria ; Jiohinsnn, Palestine ii. 288 sqq. ; Peler-
majin in llerzog .\iii. 359 S(iq. ; [esp. Kautzscli in (Riehm
8. V. Samaritaner, and) Ilerzog ed. 2, xiii. 340 sqij., and
rell. there and in B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Samaria].*
Σαμιαρί(τη5 (-injr Tdf. ; [sec Ti/f. Proleg. p. 87; WII.
App. p. 154; cf. I, i]), {Σαμάμαα), -ου, ό, a Samaritan
(Samarites, Curt. 4, 8, 9; Tac. ann. 12, 54; Samaritanus,
Vulg. [(2 K. xvii. 29 ' Saniaritae')] and eccl. writ.), i. e.
an inhabitant either of the city or of the province of Sa-
maria. The origin of the Samaritans was as follows :
After Shahnaneser [al. say Esarhaddon,cf. Ezr. iv. 2, 10;
but see Kautzscli in Herzoged. 2, as referred to under the
]ireceding word], king of A.ssyria, had sent colonists from
Babylon, Cuthah, Ava, Hamath, and Sejiharvaim into
the land of Samaria which he had devastated and de-
populated [see 2aμάpfιa, 1], those Israelites who had
remained in their desolated country [cf. 2 Ch. xxx. 6,
10; xx.\iv. 9J associated and intermarried witli these
heatlien colonists and thus produced a mi.xed race.
When the Jews on their return from e.xile were pre-
paring to rebuild the temple of Jerusalem, the Samari-
tans asked to be allowed to bear their jjart in tlie com-
mon work. On being refused by the Jews, who were
unwilling to recognize them as brethren, they not only
sent letters to the king of Persia and caused tlie Jews
to be compelled to desist from their undertaking down
to tlie second year of Darius [llystaspis] (B.C. 520),
but also built a temple for themselves on Mount Gerizim,
a [ilace held sacred even from the days of Moses [cf.
Deut. xxvii. 12, etc.], and worshipped Jehovah there
according to the law of Moses, recognizing only the
Pentateuch as sacred. This temple was destroyed B. c.
129 by John Hyrcanus. Deprived of their temple, the
Samaritans liave nevertheless continued to worship on
their sacred mountain quite down to the present time,
although their nimibers are reduced to some forty or
fifty families. Hence it came to pass that the Samari-
tans and the Jews entertained inveterate and unap-
peasable enmity towarils eacli other. Samaritans are
mentioned in the foil. N. T. pass.: Mt. x. 5; Lk. ix. 52;
x. 33 ; xvii. 16 ; Jn. iv. 9 [here Τ om. WH br. the cl.], 39
s<). ; viii. 48; Acts viii. 25. In Hebr. the Samaritans are
called D'JnDii', 2 K. xvii. 29. Cf. Jui/nhnli, Commentarii
in historiam gentis Samaritanae (Lugd. Bat. 1846); Win.
RAVB. s. V. Samaritaner; Petermann in Herzog xiii. p.
363 sqq.; Schroder in Schenkel v. p. 150 eqq. ; [esp.
Katitzxch in Herzog and liiehni u. s.].*
Σαμαρ<ΐτι$ (-tris 'i'df. ; [see tlie preced. word]), -tiot,
ή, (fern, of Σαμαμίίτηί), a Samaritan woman: Jn. iv. 9.
(The Samaritan territory, Joseph, b. j. [1, 21, 2, etc.];
3, 7, 32 ; Σαμαμ(ΐτις χώρα, ib. 3, 3, 4.) *
Σαμ.οθρ(;ίκη [-θμά- IV"' "' G (as liere and there in prof,
auth.; see Pdyje, Eigennamen, s. v.); ace. to some 'height
of Thrace', ace. to others ' Thracian Samos' (cf. Σάμος) ;
other opinions see in Pape 1. c], -ην, ή, Samolhrace, an
island of tlie jDgean Sea, about 38 m. distant from tlie
coast of Thrace where the river Hebrus empties into
the sea (Plin. h. n. 4, 12, (23)), [now Samothraii] : Acts
xvi. 11.•
Σάμ,οΐ, [(prob. 'height'; ci. Pape, Eigennamcn)], -ου,
ή, SaiJius, an island in that part of the jEgean which ia
called the Icarian Sea, opposite Ionia and not far from
Ephesus; it was the birthplace of Pythagoras; [now
Grk. Samo, Turkish Susam Ailassi']•. Acts xx. 15.*
Σαμουήλ, (^χηΠ, for ^Κ],'^:2υ i. e. 'heard of God', fr.
i'Oi;/ and Ss ; cf. 1 S. i. 20, 27 [see B. D. s. v. Samuel]),
0, [indecl. ; Joseph, (antt. 5, 10, 3) Σαμοίηλο!, -ου],
Samuel, the son of Elkanah by his wife Anna [or Han-
nah], the last of the D'OSW or judges, a distinguished
prophet, and the founder of the iirophetic order. He
gave the Jews their first kings, Saul and David : Act8
iii. 24; xiii. 20; Ileb. xi. 32. (1 S. i.-xxv., cf. xxviii. ;
Sir. xlvi. 13 sqq.) *
Σαμψών, C^^mp fr. TOC', 'sun-like', cf. Hebr. p'Ei'K
fr. Π"Χ), [Β. 15 (14)], ό, Samson (Vulg. Samson), one
of the Israelite judges (O'OSW), famous for his strength
and courage, the Hebrew Hercules [cf. BB.DD. ; McC.
and S. s. v. 2, 4 ; esp. Oreili in Ilerzog ed. 2 s. v. Sim-
son] (.Tudg. xiii. sqq.) : Ileb. xi. 32.*
ο-ανδάλιον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of σάνδαλοκ [wliich is prob.
a Persian word; cf. Vanicek, Erenidworter, s. v.]), a
sandal, a sole made ofrcood or leather, covering the bottom
of the foot and bound on with thongs: Mk. vi. 9; Acts xii.
8. (Hdt., Joseph., Diod., Ael., Ildian., al. ; for Si'J in
Is. XX. 2; Judith x. 4 ; xvi. 9. [In the Sept. and Joseph.
aavb. and ίιπόδημιι are used indiscriminately; cf. Is. xx.
2 ; Josh. v. 15 ; Joseph, b. j. «, 1, 8.]) Cf. 117ii. RWB.
s. v. Schuhe; Iloslojf in Schenkel v. 255; [Kam/>hausen
in Riehm p. 1435 sqq. ; B. D. s. v. Sandal ; Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, i. 621].*
σαν£5, -that, ή, a hoard, a plank: Acts xxvii. 44. (Fr.
Ilom. down; Sept., Cant. viii. 9; Ezek. xxvii. 6.)*
Σοονλ, {"infW 'asked for'), 6. indecl. (in Josejjh. Σάου-
Aot), Saul; 1. the name of the first king of Israel:
Acts xiii. 21. 2. the Jewish name of the apostle
Paul, but occurring only in address [cf. B. 6] : Acts ix.
4, 17; xxii. 7, 13; xxvi. 14; in the other pass, of the
Acts the form ΣανΚος ((ρ v.) with the (irk. term, is used.*
o-oirpos, -<i, -t'lV, {σήπω, 2 aor. pass, σαπηναι) ; 3.
rotten, putrid, ([Ilipponax], Hipper., Arstph., al.). 2.
corrupted by age and no longer ft fir use, vom out,
(Arstph., Dio Chr., al.) ; hence in general, of poor qual-
ity, bad, unft for ui«, worthless, [A. V. corrupt], (1™», i
Σαττφβίρη
569
σόρξ
μη την 18ίαν χρίίαν πληροί, σαπρον \(γομιν, Chrys. horn.
4 on 1 Ερ. to Tim.) : &tt>8pov, καρπια, opp. to xaXor, Wt.
vii; 17 sq. ; xii. 33 ; Lk. vi. 43 ; fishes, Mt. xiii. 4S [here
A. V. baill ; trop. Xoyos, Eph. iv. 2!J (cf. Harless ad loc.) ;
δόγμα, Epict. 3, '22, ul. Cf. Lub. ad Phryn. p. 377 sip*
Σαπφίίρη, dat. -τ, (RG Τ VVH), -ci (L Tr ; cf. [117/.
App. p. loO]; B. U; [W. 62 («!)]), ψ (either Aram.
ΚΎΒΟ i.e. 'beautiful*; Pesliitto |j ^ " ^ : or fr. σ<ίπφ«-
pos, 1]. v.), Sappliira, the name of a woman: Acts v. 1.*
σ-άπψειρος, -ου, ή, Ilebr. Tili?, sapphire, a precious
stone [perh. our tapin lazuli, cf. B. D. s. v. Sapiihire;
RiWi/n, HWB. s. v. Edelsteine, 14] : Rev. xxi. 19. (The-
ophr., Diosc, al. ; Sept.) '
σ-αργάνη [(prop. ' braided-work ', fr. r. tark ; Fick, Pt.
iii. p. 508 ; Vanicek p. 297)], -ης, ή; 1. a braided
rape, a band, (Aeschyl. suppl. 788). 2. a basket, a
ba.tkel made of ropes, a hamper [cf. B.D. s. v. Basket] :
2 Co. xi. 33 ; (Timocl. in Athen. 8 p. 339 e. ; 9 p. 407 e. ;
[al.]).•
SapScis, dat. -(σιν, at, [fr. Aeschyl., Ildt., down], Sar-
dis [or Hordes'], the capital of Lydia, a luxurious city;
now an obscure village, Sari, with extensive ruins: Rev.
i. 11 ; iii. 1, 4. [Cf. iMcC. and S. s. v.]•
o-apSivos, -ου, 6, Rev. iv. 3 Rec, i. q. aaphiov, q. v.*
<rapSiov, -uu, TO, [neut. of σύρδιοΓ, see below], sard, sar-
dius, a precious stone, of wliich there are two kinds,
concerning whicli Thcophr. de lapiii. 16, .5, §.30 ed.
Schneid. says, τον γαρ aapdtov το μΐυ διαφανές ΐρνθρότΐρον
de καλείται ^^λυ, το oe διαφαυές μίν μΐΚάντΐρον δε καΧ
apaev, the former of whicli is called carnelian (because
yZes/i-colored ; Hebr. DIS, Sept. σάρδίον, Ex. xxviii. 1 7 ;
xxxvi. 1 7 (xxxix. 1 0) ; Ezek. xxviii. 1 3 ; αίματό^ντα σάρδια,
Orph. de lapid. 16, .")), the latter sard: Rev. iv. 3 (Rec.
σαρδι'νω); xxi. 20 G L Τ Tr WH. Hence the adj. σάρ-
διο5, -α, -ov, [fr. 2ύρδ«ί, cf. Plin. h. n. 37, 7] sardine sc.
λιί)οΓ (the full phrase occurs Ex. xxxv. 8 [var.]) : Rev.
xxi. 20 Rec. [B. D. s. vv. Sardine, Sardius.] *
σ-αρ8ιόνν|, i. q. σαρ8»νυξ (q. v.) : Rev. xxi. 20 Lchm.*
ο-αρ5όνυξ [Lclim. σαρδιάννξ], -νχοί, 6, (σάρδιον and οκυ^),
sardonyx, a precious stone marked by the red colors of
the carnelian (sard) and the white of the onyx [B. D.
8. v.; Riekm, HWB. s. v. Edelsteine 12]: Rev. xxi. 20.
(Joseph., Plut., Ptol., al. ; [Gen. ii. 12 Aq. (Jlontf.)].)*
ΣόρΜΓτα [Tr mrg. 2άρ€φ5α ; Tdf. in O. T. Sapfwra],
(HDii• fr. -^Ίϊ to smelt; hence perh. ' smelting-house'),
-ων [yetcf.B. 15(14); but declined in Obad.], τά; Snrep-
la [so A. V. ; better with O. T. Zarephalh] a Phoenician
town between Tyre and Sidon, but nearer Sidon, [now
Sura/end; cf. B. D. s. v. Zarephath], (1 K. xvii. 9 ; Obad.
20; in Joseph, antt. 8, 13, 2 Σαρ(φθά) : τη! Σιδω»ία5, in
the land of Sidon, Lk. iv. 26. Cf. Robinson, Palestine
ii. 474sqq.; [B. D. u.s.].*
σ-αρκικίς, -ή, -όν, {σαρξ), fleshly, carnal (Vulg. camalis) ;
1. hamnij the nature of flesh, i. e. under the control of the
animal appetites (see σαρξ, 3), Ro. vii. 14 Rec. (see σάρ-
nvos, 3) ; governed by mere human nature (see σαρξ, 4)
not by the Spirit of God, 1 Co. iii. 1, 3, also 4 R G ; hav-
ing its seat in the animal nature or roused by the animal
nature, at σαρκικαϊ ΐπιθυμίαι, 1 Pet. ii. 11 ; i, q. human:
with the included idea of weakness, όπλα, 2 Co. x. 4; with
the included idea of depravity, σαρκ. σοφία (i. e. πανουρ-
γία, 2 Co. iv. 2), 2 Co. i. 12. [(Anthol. Pal. 1, 107 ; cf.
αϊΓ€;^ου των σαρκικών κ- σωματικών ϊπίθνμιων, 'Teaching*
etc. 1,4). Cf. Trench, Syn. § Ixxi.] 2. pertaining
to the flesh, i.e. to the body (see σαρξ, 2)': relating to
birth, lineage, etc., eVroX^, lleb. vii. 16 Rec; τά σαρ•!ΐκά,
things needed for the sustenance of tlie body, Ro. xv.
27; 1 Co.ix. 11, (.\ristot.h. anim. 10, 2 p. 63.")», 11 ; Plut.
de placit. philos. 5, 3, 7 ; once in Sept., 2 Chr. xxxii. 8
Couipl.).* ,
(rapKivos, -ij, -ov, (σαρξ), [Arstph., Plat., Aristot., al.],
flesh;/, Lat. carneus, i. e. 1. consisting of flesh, com-
posed of flesh, (for proparoxytones ending in -ivos gen-
erally denote the material of which a thing is made,
cf. Frilzsclie, Ej). ad Rom. ii. p. 46 sq. ; [Donaldson, New
Crat. §2.^)8]); Vulg. camalis: opj). to XWii/or, 2 Co. iii.
3 (σάρκ. ιχθύς, opp. to a fish of gold wliich has been
dreamed of, Theocr. id. 21, 66; the word is also found
in Plato, Aristot., Theophr., Plut. ; Sept., al.). 2.
pertaining to the body (as earthly and perishable material,
opp. to ζωη άκατίΧυτοί) : Heb. vii. 1 6 G L Τ Tr Wll (see
σαρκικός, 2). 3. it is used where σαρκικοί might
have been expected: viz. by G L Τ Tr WH in Ro. vii. 14
and 1 Co. iii. 1 ; in these pass., unless we decide that Paul
used σαρκικός and σάρκινος indiscriminately, we must
suppose that σάρκινος expresses the idea of σαρκικό'^ with
an emphasis : wholly given up to the flesh, rooted in the
flesh as it were. Cf." W. § 1 6, 3 -y. ; Fritzsche u. s. ; Reiche,
Comment, crit. in N. T. i. p. 138 sqq. ; Holslen, Zum
Evang. des Paulusu. Petrus p. 397 sqq. (Rostock, 1867) ;
ITrench, Syn. §Ixxii.].•
σ-άρξ, σαρκός, ή, (Aeol. σνρξ; hence it seems to be de-
rived fr. σύρω, akin to σαίρω, 'to draw,' 'to draiv off,'
and to signify what can be stripped nfl'ir. the bones [Etym.
Magn. 708, 34; " sed (juis subsignabit " {Lob. Paralip.
p. Ill)]), fr. Horn, down, Hebr. Ti73;
1. prop, flesh (the soft substance of the living body,
which covers the bones and is permeated with blood) of
both men and beasts: 1 Co. xv. 39; plur. — of the flesh
of many beings. Rev. xix. 18, 21 ; of the parts of the
flesh of one, Lk. xxiv. 39 Tdf. ; Rev. xvii. 16; accord-
ingly it is distinguished both from blood, σαρξ καΊ αίμα
(on which expression see below, 2 a.; 3 bis; 4 fin. [cf.
W. 19]), and from bones, πνινμα σάρκα και ιστία οίκ ίχ€ΐ,
Lk. xxiv. 39 (οΰ γαρ ?τι σάρκας τ€ κα'ι όστία Ινις (χοιισικ,
Ηοιη. Od. 11, 219). φαγ(Ίν τας σάρκας τινός: prop..
Rev. xvii. 16; xix. 18, (Lev. xxvi. 29; κατισθίίΐν, 2 Iv.
ix. 36, and often in Sejtt. ; in class. Grk. freq. βιβρώσκίΐν
σάρκας; σαρκών {'δωδή, Plut. septem sap. conviv. c. 16) ;
trop. to torture one with eternal penal torments, Jas. v. 3,
cf. IMic. iii. 3; Ps. xxvi. (xxvii.) 2; φαγΛν and τρώγίΐν
την σάοκα τοΟ υ'ιοΰ τοΰ ανθρώπου, in fig. disc, to appropri-
ate to one's self the sai'ing results of the violent death en-
dured by Christ, Jn. vi. 52-56 ; άπίρχ€σθαι or πορινισθαι
οπίσω σαρκός, to follow afler the flesh, is used of those
σαρξ
570
σαρξ
who are on the search for persons with whom they can
gratify their lust [see οηΐσω, 2 a.], Jude 7 ; 2 Pet. ii.
10; TO σώμα ttjs σαρκός, the body compacted of flesh
[cf. W. 188 (177)], Col. i. 22. Since the flesh is the vis-
ible part of the body, σαρξ is
2. i. q. the body, not designating it, however, as a
skiliul combination of related parts ('an organism,'
which is denoted by the word σώμα), but signifying the
material or substance of the living body [cf. Ae-
schyl. Sept. 622 yipovra τον νουν σάρκα S ήβωσαν φίρίΐ];
a. uaiv. : Jn. vi. 63 (see π«Ομα, 2 p. 520" mid.) ; Acts
ii. 2G, SORec; 2Co. xii. 7; Gal. iv. 14; Eph. v. 29; Heb.
i.\. 10, 13 ; [1 Pet. iii. 21] ; Jude 8 ; μία σαρξ. one body,
of husband and wife, Mk. x. 8; so tls σάρκα μίαν (fr. Gen.
ii. 24), Mt. xix. 5 ; Mk. x. 8 ; 1 Co. vi. 16 ; Eph. v. 31 ;
opp. to ■^νχή. Acts ii. 31 (cSωκfv . . . '\ησ. Xp. . . . την σάρκα
νττΐμ της σαρκός ημών κα\ την ψυ;^^!/ νττίρ των "^νχών ημών,
Clem. Horn. 1 Cor. 49, « [cf. Iren. 5, 1, 1 ; but G L Ϊ Tr
WH drop ή ψυχή αΰτοϊι in Acts 1. c.]); opp. to πν^νμα (the
human), 1 Co. v. 5 ; 2 Co. vii. 1 ; Col. ii. 5 ; 1 Pet. iii. 18;
iv. 6 ; σαρξ κ. αίμα, i. q. ψνχικον σώμα, 1 Co. XV. 50, cf.
44 ; η τΓΐριτομη iv σαρκΊ, Ro. ii. 28 ; Eph. ii. 11; το πρό-
σωπον μου iv σαρκΙ, [.\. V. my face in the flesh], my bodily
countenance. Col. ii. 1 ; ασθίναα σαρκός, of disease. Gal.
iv. 13; iv τη θνητή σαρκι ημών, 2 Co. iv. 11 (cf. iv τώ
σώματι ημών, vs. 10); iv τη σαρκϊ αίτοΰ, by giving up his
body to death, Eph. ii. 14 (1.5) ; also δια της σαρκός αυτοί,
Heb. χ. 20, cf. Jn. vi. 51, (πρόσφεραν την σάρκα μου, to
offer in sacrifice my flesh — Christ is speaking. Barn. ep.
7, 5 ; την σάρκα παραδοϋναι (Ις καταφθοράν, ibid. 5, 1). life
on earth, which is passed in the body (flesh), is desig-
nated by the foil, phrases : iv σαρκι eivat, Ro. vii. 5 (where
Paul uses this expression with designed ambiguity in or-
der to involve also the ethical sense, Ίο be in the power
of the flesh,' to be prompted and governed by the flesh ;
see 4 below) ; ζήν iv σαρκι. Gal. ii. 20 ; Phil. i. 22 ; ini-
μίνίΐν iv σαρκι, Phil. i. 24 ; ό iv σαρκι χρόνος, 1 Pet. iv. 2 ;
a'l ημίραι της σαρκός αυτοϋ, of Christ's life on earth, Heb.
V. 7. iv σαρκι or iv τη σαρκι, in things pertaining to the
flesh (body), such as circumcision, descent, etc. ; Gal. vi.
1 2 sq. ; ποίοιθίναι, Phil. iii. 3 sq. ; ϊχ(ΐν πιποίθησιν, Phil.
iii.4. b. used of natural or physical origin,
generation, relationship: οί σ-υγγ€ν€Ϊς κατά σάρκα,
Ro. ix. 3 [cf. W. § 20, 2 a.] ; τ€κνα της σαρκός, children
by birth, natural posterity, ibid. 8 ; ά8(\φ6ν iv σαρκι και
iv κυριω, a natural brother (as it were) and a Christian
brother, Philem. 16 ; οί της σαρκός ημών πατίρες, our nat-
ural fathers (opp. to God ό πατήρ τών πνευμάτων, see
πατήρ, 1 a. and 3 b.), Heb. xii. 9 ; τά ^θνη iv σαρκι. Gen-
tiles by birth, Eph. ii. 11; ΊσραηΚ κατά σάρκα, 1 Co. χ.
18 (the opposite term Ίσραηλ τον θ(οϋ, of Christians, is
found in Gal. vi. 16) ; το κατά σάρκα, as respects the flesh
i. e. human origin, Ro. ix. 5 [(Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 32, 2 ;
Iren. haer. 4, 4, 1 and frag. ] 7 ed. Stieren p. 836)] ; yevo-
μ(νος (Κ σπίρματος Aauf !δ κατά σ. Ro. i. 3 ; ό κατά σάρκα
γιννηθύς, born by natural generation (opp. to ό κατά
πνιϋμα yew. i. e. by the supernatural power of God, oper-
ating in the promise). Gal. iv. 29, 23 ; το ■ypyiwij^eVoi' (Κ
της σαρκός σαρξ ioriv, that which has been born of the
natural man is a natural man (opp. to one who has been
born again by the power of the Holy Spirit), Jn. iii. 6 ;
ή σαρξ μου, those with whom I share my natural origin,
my fellow-countrymen, Ro. xi. 14 (ιδού οστά σου και
σάρκίί σου, 2 S. ν. 1 ; add, xix. 13; Gen. xxxvii. 27; Judg.
ix. 2) ; fivai «κ της σαρκός κ. ex τών όστίων tivos, which
in its proper use signifies to be \formed out of one's flesh
and bones ' (Gen. ii. 23 ; to be related to one by birth.
Gen. xxix. 14), is transferred metaph. to the church,
which spiritually derives its origin from Christ and
is united to him, just as Eve drew her origin from her
husband Adam, Eph. v. 30 [RG Tr mrg. br.]. o.
the sensuous nature of man, 'the animal nature':
without any suggestion of depravity, τύ θίλημα της σαρ-
κός, of sexual desire, Jn. i. 13 ; the animal nature with
crarinf/s which incite to .lin: Mt. xxvi. 41 ; Mk. xiv. 38;
Ro. vii. 18 (for which τά μίλη is used in 22 sq.); xiii.
14 ; Jude 23 ; opp. to ό νους, Ro. vii. 25 ; ή i^rιθυμia της
σαρκός, 1 Jn. ii. 16 (with its manifestation, ή iπιθvμia τών
οφθαλμών; [al. regard this last as a new specification;
cf. Westcott ad loc.]) ; plur. 2 Pet. ii. 18, (τά τής σαρκός
πάθη, 4 Mace. vii. 18; τ6 μη 8(δου\ώσθαί σαρκι κα\ τοις
πάθισι ταύτης itaytiv, ίιφ' Ζίν κατασπώμ^νος όνους της θνη-
τής άναπίμπΧαται φλυαρίας, ξϋδαιμόν τι κα\ μακάριον, Plut.
consol. ad ApoU. c. 13; της σαρκός ή8ονη, opp. to ψυχή,
Plut. de virt. et vit. c. 3 ; add, Philo de gigant. § 7 ; Diog.
Laert. 10, 145 ; animo cum hac came grave certamen est,
Sen. consol. ad Marc. 24 ; animus liber habitat; nunquam
me caro ista compellet ad metum. Sen. epp. 65 [7, 3, 22] ;
non est summa felicitatis nostrae in came ponenda, ibid.
74 [9, 3, 16]). the physical nature of man as subject to
suffering: παθΛν σαρκι. 1 Pet. iv. 1 ; iv tj σαρκι μου,
in that my flesh suffers afflictions. Col. i. 24 (where cf.
Meyer and De AVette [and Bp. Lghtft.]) ; θλίψιν ίχ(ΐν
TJj σαρκι, 1 Co. vii. 28.
3. a living creature (because possessed of a body of
flesh), whether man or beast : ττάσα σαρξ (in imitation
of the Hebr. iu3-S3 [W. 33]), every living creature, I
Pet. i. 24 ; with οϋ preceding (qualifying the verb [W.
§ 26, 1 ; B. 121 (106)]), no living creature, Mt. xxiv. 22 ;
Mk. xiii. 20; spec, a man (άνθραητος for Ίί^3, Gen. vi.
13), generally with a suggestion of weakness, frailty,
mortality : Sir. xxviii. 5 ; iv τώ θ€ώ ηΚπισα, οΰ φοβηθη-
σομαι τι ποιησ(ΐ μοι σαρξ. Ps. 1ν. (hi.) 5; cf. Jer. xvii. 5;
iμvήσθη, ότι σαρξ (Ισιν. Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 39 ; σαρξ κ.
αΧμα, Eph. vi. 12; ycwfa σαρκοΕ κ. αίματος, η μίν τίλίυτά,
fVf'pa Se yewOTai. Sir. xiv. 18 ; 6 λο'γοί σαρξ iyivero, en-
tered into participation in human nature, Jn. i. 14 (the
apostle used σαρξ, not άνθρωπος, apparently in order to
indicate that he who possessed supreme majesty did not
shrink from union with extreme weakness) ; eipioKftv τι
κατά σάρκα, to attain to anything after the manner of a
(weak) man, i. e. by the use of merely human powers,
Ro. iv. 1 (for substance equiv. to iξ ΐργων in vs. 2);
Hebraistically (see above), πάσα σαρξ, all men, Lk. iii.
6 ; Jn. xvii. 2 [W. § 30, 1 a.] ; Acts ii. 1 7 ; Sir. xiv. 4 ;
with οΰ or ^ preceding (qualifying the verb [W. and
σαρξ
571
Β. as referred to above]), no man, no mortal, Ro. Hi. 20 ;
1 Co. i. 29 ; Gal. ii. 16. man as he appears, such as he
presents himself to view, mati's external appearance and
condition•, κατά σάρκα κρίναν. Λα. viii. 15 [cf. W . 583
(542)] (i. <\. Kpiveiv κατ 5\jfiv, vii. 24) ; yivaiaKfiv or eiSi-
vat Tina κατά σάρκα, 2 Co. V. 16 ; ο! κατά σάρκα κύριοι (see
κατά, II. 3 b.), Eph. vi. 5; Col. iii. 22. univ. human
nature, the soul included: ίνόμοιώματι σαρκο! αμαρτίας, in
a visible form, like human nature which is subject to sin,
Ιίο. viii. 3 [cf. ομοίωμα, b.] ; (v σαρκΐ ϊρχίσθαι, to appear
clothed in human nature, 1 Jn. iv. 2 and Ilec. in 3 ; 2 Jn.
7, (Barn. ep. 5, 10); φανιροΐισθαι, 1 Tim. iii. 16 (Barn.
ep. 5, 6 ; 6, 7 ; 12, 10); κίκοιυωιτηκίναι αίματος κ. σαρκός,
Heb. ii. 14.
4. σαρξ, when either e.tpressly or tacitly opp. to το
ιη/(ϋμα {τοϋ θ(οϋ), has an ethical sense and denotes
mere human nature, the earthly nature of man apart
from divine influence, and therefore prone to sin and op-
posed to God ; accordingly it includes whatever in t h e
soul is weak, low, debased, tending to ungodliness and
vice (" Thou must not understand '■flesh ', therefore, as
though that only were ^ flesh ' which is connected with un-
chastity, but St. Paul uses 'flesh' of the whole man, body
and soul, reason and all his faculties included, because all
that is in him longs and strives after the flesh" (Luther,
Pref. to the Ep. to the Rom.) ; " note that 'flesh ' signifies
the entire nature of man, sense and reason, without the
Holy Spirit" {Melanchlhon, Loci, ed. of 1535, in Corpus
Reform, xxi. p. 277). This definition is strikingly sup-
ported by these two utterances of Paul : οϋΒιμίαν ίσχηκιν
άνισιν ή σαρξ ήμων, 2 Co. vii. 5; ουκ ίσχηκα aveaiv τω
ιτν^ΰματί μου, '2 Co. u.l'i^: Ro. viii. 3; Gal. v. 1 3, 1 ;
opp. to TO πν^ϋμα (τοΰ θ(οϋ), Ro. viii. 6 sq. 12 sq. ; Gal.
V. 16 sq. ; vi. 8 ; Col. ii. 13 (on which see άκροβυστία, c.) ;
23 (see πλησμονή); (πιθυμία σαρκός. Gal. v. 16; αί (πιθυ-
μίαι and τα θίΚήματα της σαρκός, Eph. ii. 3 ; ό νους της
σαρκός, Col. ii. 18 ; σώμα της σαρκός, a body given up to
the control of the flesh, i. e. a body whose members our
nature, estranged from God, used as its instruments (cf.
Ro. vi. 1 9), Col. ii. 1 1 G L Τ Tr WH ; τά της σαρκός (opp.
to τα τοϋ πν(ϋματος), the things which ])lease the flesh,
which the flesh craves, Ro. viii. 5 ; σαρκι (τητ(λοϋμαι, to
make for one's self an end [see ϊπιτίλβω. 1 fin.] by de-
voting one's self to the flesh, i. e. by gradually losing the
Holy Spirit and giving one's self up to the control of
the flesh, Gal. iii. 3 ; σταυρονν τήν σάρκα αυτοΰ (see σταυ-
ρόω, 3 b.). Gal. v. 24; iv σαρκι fivai (opp. to fv πνβνματι,
so. τοϋ ifoG), to be in the power of the flesh, under the
control of the flesh, Ro. viii. 8 sq., cf. vii. 5 (see 2 a.
above) ; o! κατά σάρκα όντίς, who e.\hibit the nature of
the flesh, i. q. o'l σαρκικοί (opp. to oi κατά πν(ΰμα on-ff),
Ro. viii. 5 ; κατά σάρκα πιριπατι'ϊν, to live ace. to the
standard of the flesh, to comply in conduct with the im-
pulse of the flesh, Ro. viii. 1 Rec. ; 2 Co. x. 2 ; opp. to
κατά TTvevpa, Ro. viii. 4 ; βου\(ϋ(σθαι, 2 Co. i. 1 7 ; καυ-
χασθαι, 2 Co. xl. 18 where cf. Meyer; (opp. to κατά
ΊΓν(νμα) ζην, Ro. viii. 12 sq. («i/ σαρκι τvy\άvoυσιv, αλλ ου
κατά σάρκα ζωσιν, of Christians, Ep. ad Diogn. 5, 8) ; iv
σαρκι πίριπατοΰντ€ς ου κατά σάρκα στρατ(υόμίθα, although
the nature in which we live is earthly and therefore
weak, yet we do not carry on our warfare according to
its law, 2 Co. X. 3, (οΰ κατά σάρκα -γράήχιν, άλλα κατά
■γνώμην θ(οϋ, Ignat. ad Rom. 8, 3) ; with the suggestion
of weakness as respects knowledge: σαρξ κ.
αίμα, a man liable to err, fallible man ; Mt. xvi. 1 7 ; Gal.
i. 16 ; ή άσθίνξία της σαρκός, Ro. vi. 19 ; σοφοί κατά σάρκα,
1 Co. i. 26. Cf. Tholuck, Ueber σαρξ als Quelle der
Siinde, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1855, p. 477 sq(i. ;
C. Holsten, Die Bedeut. des Wortes σαρξ im Lehrbe-
griife des Paulus, 4to, Rostock 1855 [reprinted in his
Zum Evang. des Paul. u. Petr. p. 365 sqq. (Rostock,
1S67); see also (with esp. ref. to Holsten) Ludemann,
Die Anthropologie des -Vpost. Paul. (Kiel, 1872)] ;
Ritschl, Entstehung der altkathol. Kirche, ed. 2, p. 66
sqq.; Baur in the Theol. Jahrbb. for 1857, p. 96 sqq.,
and in his Bibl. Theol. des N. T. p. 142 sqq., etc.;
Wieseler, Br. an die Galater, pp. 443 sqq. 448 sqq. [cf.
Riddle in SchafE's Lange's Com. on Rom. p. 235 sq.] ;
Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. (ed. 3) § 68 p. 243 sqq.,
§ 100 p. 414 sq. ; Rich. Schmidt, Paulin. Christologie, p.
8 sqq.; Eklund, σαρξ vocabulum quid ap. Paulum apost.
significet (Lund, 1872); Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 47
sqq. [Eng. trans, vol. i. p. 47 sqq.] ; Weyidt, Die Begriffe
Fleisch u. Geist im bibl. Sprachgebr. (Gotha, I.STS);
\_Cremer in Herzog ed. 2 s. v. Fleisch, but esp. in his
Bibl.-theol. Wbrterbuch, 3te (or 4te) Aufl. s. v. ; Laid-
law. The Bible Doctr. of Man (Edinb. 1879), pp. 74 sqq.
3 73 sq. ; Philippi, Glaubensl. ed. 2, vol. iii. pp. 231-250;
esp. Dickson, St. Paul's use of the terms Flesh and
Spirit (Glasgow, 1883)]; and the refif. in Meyer on Ro.
iv. 1 (6te Aufl.).•
Σαρούχ (Rec), more correctly (G L Τ Tr WH) 'S,epoi\,
(jnt? i. q. J'lC, 'vine-shoot'), ό, Serug [so R. V. ; but
A. V. in the N. T. Saruchi, the name of a man (Gen.
xi. 20 sq. etc.) : Lk. iii. 35.»
σ-αρόω (for the earlier σαίρω, cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 83
[λν. 24, 91 (87)]), -ώ; pf. pass. ptcp. σ(σαρωμίνος ; {σάρον
a broom) ; to sweep, clean by sweeping : τι, Lk. xv. 8 ;
pass. Mt. xii. 44 ; Lk. xi. 25. (Artem. oneir. 2, 33 ;
[Apoll. Dysk. p. 253, 7] ; Geop.) *
Σάρρα, -ας, ή, {7\^ΰ 'princess', Gen. xvii. 15), Sarah,
wife of Abraham: Ro. iv. 19; ix. 9; Heb. xi. 11 ; 1 Pet.
iii. 6.»
Σάρων, -ωνος [so Tdf. ; but L WH ace. -άνα, Tr -ωνά ;
cf. B. 16 (14)], ό, (Hebr. pi» for JllEi' fr. Ύύ\ 'to be
straight ' ; [in Hebr. always with the art. ji'^C'ri ' the
level ']), Sharon [so R. V. ; but A. V. Saronl, a level re-
gion extending from Csesarea of Palestine (Strato's
Tower) as far as Joppa [about 30 miles] ; it abounded
in pasturage and was famous for its fertility (Is. xxxiii.
9 ; Ixv. 1 ; 1 Chr. xxvii. 29) : Acts ix. 35. [Cf. B. D.
s. V. Sharon; Robinson, Phys. Geogr. etc. p. 126.]*
o-ardv indecl. (2 Co. xii. 7 RG [Tdf. in 1 K. xi. 14
accents -τάν (Lagarde leaves it unaccented)]), ό, and
ό σατανάς [i. e. with the art. (exc. in Mk. iii. 23 ; Lk.
x.\ii. 3)], -a [cf. B. 20 (18) ; W. § 8, 1], ([Aram. KJtpD,
572
σΐΐσμον
Stat. emph. of Jt3D] Ilebr. ΐίίϋ), adversary (one who op-
poses another in purpose or act) ; the appellation is
given to 1. the prince of evil spirits, the inveter-
ate adversary of God and of Christ (see 8ta(io\os, and
in πονηρός, 2b.): Mk- iu• [23], 26 ; iv. 15 ; Lk. x. 18 ;
xi. 18; 1 Co. V. 5; 2 Co. .\i. 14; 1 Th. ii. 18; 1 Tim. i.
20 ; Rev. ii. 9, 13, 21 ; iii. 9 ; he incites to apostasy from
God and to sin, Mt. iv. 10; Mk. i. 13; Lk. iv. 8 RL
inbr.; xxii. 31 ; Acts v. 3 ; 1 Co. vii. 5; 2 Co. ii. 11 (10);
1 Tim. V. 15; circumventing men by stratagems, 2 Co.
xi. 14 ; 2 Til. ii. 9 ; the worshippers of idols are said to
be under his control, Acts xxvi. 18; Rev. xii. 9; he is
said both himself (ΙσϊρχίσθΜ tir riva, in order to act
through him, Lk. xxii. 3; Jn. xiii. 27; and by his de-
mons to take possession of the bodies of men and to
afflict them with diseases, Lk. xiii. 1(5, cf. Mt. xii. 26;
2 Co. xii. 7 ; by (iod's assistance he is overcome, Ro.
xvi. 20; on Christ's return from heaven he will be
bound with chains for a thousand years, but when the
thousand years are finished he will walk the earth in
yet greater power. Rev. xx. 2, 7, but shortly after will
be o-iven over to eternal punishment, ibid. 10. 2.
α Salan-Uke man : Mt. xvi. 23 ; Mk. viii. 33. [Cf. De-
litzsch in Riehm s. v.; Schenkel in his BL. s. v.; Hum-
burger, Real-Encycl. i. 897 sq. ; Edersheim, Jesus the
Messiah, App. xiii. § ii.; and BB.DD. s. v.] *
<Γάτον, (Ilebr. nXD, Chald. NnXD, Syr. \Z\SI), -ου, ro.
a kind of dry measure, (/ nwlius and a half [equiv. to
about α peck and a half (ci. /xoSior)], (.loseph. antt. 9, 4,
5 tcvCei 8e το σάτον μιΊ&ιον και ήμισυ Ιταλικόν, cf. Gen.
xviii. G [see .-Vq. and Symm.] ; Judg. vi. 19): Mt. xiii. 33;
Lk. xiii. 21, [in both exx. A. V. 'three measures of meal'
i. e. the common ([uantity for 'abaking' (cf. Gen. xviii.
6: .ludg. vi. 19; 1 S. i. 24)].*
Σαϋλο5, -ου, ό, (see Σαούλ, 2), Sau!, the Jewish name
of the apostle Paul [cf. Woldemar Schmidt in Ilerzog ed.
2 xi. p. 357 sq. ; Conijhenre and Hnicson, St. Paul, i. 150
sqq. (Am. ed.) ; Farrar, St. Paul, ch. xix. fin. ; B. D. Am.
ed. S.V. Names] : Acts vii. 58; viii. 1, 3 ; ix. 1, 8, 11, 19
Rec. 22, 24, 26 Rec. ; xi. 25, 30; xii. 25 ; xiii. 1 sq. 7, 9.*
σ-βίννν}ΐχ (ζβϊνΐ'υμι, 1 Th. v. 19 Tdf. [cf. Σ, σ, s]) and
[in classics] σ/3«ΊΊ!ω; fut. σ/3ί'σω; 1 aor. fcr^cra ; Pass.,
pres. σβίνννμαι; fr. IToni. down; Sept. for 7133 and
IJI'n, to exti/)guisJi, (juenrh ; a. prop. : τι, fire or
things on fire, jSIt. xii. 20; Eph. vi. 16; Heb. xi. 34;
pass. (Sept. for n33) lo he quenched, to go out : Mt.
XXV. 8 ; Mk. ix. 44. 46, [both which vss. Τ WH om. Tr
br.], 48. b. metaph. lo quench i. e. to suppress,
stifle: TO ιτνίϋμα, divine influence, 1 Th. v. 19 (aydjn)».
Cant. viii. 7 ; το πάθη, 4 Mace. xvi. 4 ; χηλοκ. Hem.
II. 9, 678 ; νβριν, Plat. legg. 8, 835 d. ; τον 6υμόν, ibid.
10. 888 a.).•
σίαυτοΟ, -ηί, -oO, reflex, pron. of the 2d pers., used only
in the gen., dat., and ace. ; in the N. T. only in the
masc. ; gen. (of) thyself, (of) thee: Jn. viii. 13; xviii.
.•{4 L Tr WH ; Acts xxvi. 1 ; 2 Tim. iv. 11 ; dat. σίουτώ,
(tn) thyself, (lo) thee : Jn. xvii. 5 ; Acts xvi. 28 ; Ro. ii.
5 ; 1 Tim. iv. 16 ; ace. σ(αντάι>, thyself, thee : Mt. iv. 6 ;
Mk. xii. 31 ; Lk. iv. 23 ; Jn. viii. 5:t ; Ro. xiv. 22 ; GaL
vi. 1 ; 1 Tim. iv. 7 ; 2 Tim. ii. 15 ; Jas. ii. 8 ; etc. [Cf.
B. § 127, 13.]
σ-Εβά^ομαι : (σίβαί reverence, awe) ; 1. to fear,
be afraid : Horn. II. G, 167. 417. 2. in later auth.
i. q. σίβομαι [W. § 2, 1 b.], to honor religiously, lo wor-
ship : witli 1 aor. pass, (σιβάιτθηιι in an act. sense, Ro. i.
25 (OrpU. Argon. 554 ; eccl. writ.).*
σί'βαο-μα, -rof, τά, (σ(βάζομαι), whatever is religiously
honored, an object of worship : 2 Til. ii. 4 (Sap. xiv. 20) ;
used of temples, altars, statues, etc.. Acts xvii. 23 ; of
idolatrous images, Bel and the Dragon 27; Sap. xv. 17,
(Dion. Hal. antt. 1, 30).*
α-(βοω-τό$, -η, -όν, (σ(βάζομαϊ) ; 1. reverend, vener-
able. 2. ό σιβαστός, Lat. augualus, the title of the
Roman emperors: Acts .xxv. 21, 25, (Strabo, Lcian.,
Hdian., Dio Cass., al.); adj. -c5r, -η, -oV, Augustan i. β.
taking its name fr. the emperor: a title of honor which
used to be given to certain legions, or cohorts, or battal-
ions, "for valor" (ala augusta ob virtutem appellata.
Corpus inscrr. Lat. vii. n. 340, 341, 344) : σ -Kfipa σιβ-
the A ugiislan cohort. Acts .x.'ivii. 1 (Xf γίώκ σιβαστή, Ptol.
2,3, 30; 2, 9, 18; 4, 3, 30). The subject is fully treated
by Schilrer in the Zeitschr. fur wissensch. Theol. for 1875,
p. 413 sqq.•
σίβω, and (so everywh. in the Scriptures) σίβομαι ; f r.
Iloin. down ; lo revere, lo worship : τινά (a deity), Mt. xv.
9; Mk. vii. 7; Acts xviii. 13; xix. 27, (Sap. xv. 18 etc.;
for Hy, Josh. iv. 24 ; xxii. 25 ; Jon. i. 9). In the Acts,
" proselytes of the gate " (see προσήλυτος, 2) are called
σ(βόμ(νοι τόν θ(άν, ['men that worship God'], Acts xvi.
14; xviii. 7, (Joseph, antt. 14, 7, 2); and simply o!
σ(βόμ(νοι, [A. V. the devout persons']. Acts xvii. 17; af-
βόμινοι πρησηΚυτοι. [R. V. devout proselytes']. Acts xiii.
4'i ; σ^βόμιναι yvvaiKfs, ib. 50 ; oi σ^β- "Ελλι;^ s, [A. V.
the devout Greeks], .Vets xvii. 4 ; in the Latin church,
metuentes, verecundi, religiosi, timorati; Vulg. [exc. Acts
xiii. 50] colentes ; ef. Thilo in his Cod. apocr. Nov. Test,
p. 521.• ,
(ΓΕίρά, -as, ή, (Λρω, to fasten, bind together, [akin to
Lat. sero, series, serous, etc.]; cf. Curtius § 518), fr.
Horn, down ; a. η line, a rope. b. a chain :
(Tfipais ζ•Ίφον. [A.V. to chains of darkness, i. e ] to dark-
ness as if to -chains, 2 Pet. ii. 4 R G [but Tr WH have
σίφοΪΓ, L Τ σιρηίί, which see in their place] ; μια άλνσ€ΐ
σκότους πάντίς (6ίθη(ταν, Sap. xvii. 17 (18).'
orapos, -oO, ό, i. q. σ^ιρά, q. v. : 2 Pet. ii. 4 Tr WH. But
(Tfipof, Lat. sirus, in prof. writ, is a pit, an underground
granary, [e. g. Dem. p. 100 fin. (where the Schol. τ. θψ
σαυρους κ. τ. δρνγβατα (ν οΐΓ κατ(τΙΘ(ντο τα σπέρματα
σφους ϊκάλουν οί θράκα κ- ο! AiiSufi) : Diod. Sic. 19, 41 ;
cf. Suidas s. v. σαροί; Valesius on Harpocr. Lex. s. v.
ΜίΚίνη. See Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad loc. Ac-
cordingly R. V. txt. follows the crit. edd. (cf. mpot) and
renders "pits of darkness"].*
σ-εισ-μίδ, -oO, ό, (σίίω), a shaking, a commotion : ev rj
θάΚάσστ;, a tempest, Mt. viii. 24 ; as often in Grk. writ.
573
σημίίοιι
fr. [Hdt. 4, 2S], Soph., Arstph. down, pre-eminently an
tarlhtjualce: Mt. xxiv. 7; xxvii. 54; xxviii. 2; Mk. xiii.
8; Lk.xxi. 11; Actsxvi. 26; Rev. νί12; viii. 5; xi. 13,
19; xvi. 18; Sept. for σ>ρ..*
σίίω; fut. σιίσω (Heb. xii. 2GLTTrAVH); Pass.,
pres. ptcp. σιιόμα/ος; 1 aor. ΐσ€ΐσθηι>; fr. Horn, down;
Sept. chiefly for 'C/'^'f ; lo shaLe, tnjilate, cause to tremble:
Rev. vi. 13 ; τηνγήν, Heb. xii. 26 after Ilaj. ii. 6 ; ΐσιίσθη
η -γή, Mt. xxvii. -jI (Judj. V. 4 ; 2 S. xxii. 8) ; σ^ισθηνΜ
άπο φό^υυ, of men, to be tlirown into a tremor, lo quake
for fn I/•, Mt. xxviii. 4 ; metaph. to arjitate the mind :
ίσ(Ίσθη ή ττόλΐΓ, [R. V. icas s'irred^ i. e. its inliabitants,
Mt. xxi. II). [CoMP. : am-, 8ia-, κατά- σίίω.]*
SekoOvSos, T Wil Si'/cowSor [Chandler §J 2:33, 2Ϊ5], -ου,
ό, (a Lat. ivord), Secandus, a certain man of Thessalo-
niea : Acts xx. 4.*
Σίλεύκεια [Τ W'H -κία (see I, »)], -as. ή, Seleucia, a city
of .Syria on the Mediterranean, about .'> m. (40 stadia,
Strabo 16 p. 750) X. of the mouth of the river Orontes,
about 15 m. (120 stadia) distant fr. Antioch, and oppo-
site Cyprus : Acts xiii. 4 (1 Mace. xi. 8). \_Lewin, St.
I'aul, i. 1 16 sqq. ; Con'/h. and fIo'0.<oa, ditto, i. 136 s(j.] *
σελήνη, -ijs, ή, (fr. a(\as brightness), fr. Horn, down,
Hebr. rC}', the moon: Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. .xiii. 24; Lk.
xxi. 25; Acts ii. 20; 1 Co. xv. 41; Rev. vi. 12; viii. 12;
xii. 1 ; xxi. 23.*
σ-€ληνι.άζομαι ; {σ^Χηνη) ; [lit. lo be moonstruck (cf.
lunatic) ; see Wetstein on Mt. iv. 24; Suicer, Thesaur.
ii. 945 sq. ; BB. DD. s. v. Lunatic] ; to be epileptic (epi-
lepsy being supposed to return and increase with the
increase of the moon) : Mt. iv. 24 ; xvii. 15. (Manetho
carm. 4, 81 and 217; [Lcian., al.] ; eccles. writ.) *
Σεμΐΐ, L mrg. 'Σ,^μίΐν, Τ Tr WH Σίμκίν [see Wfi. App.
p. 155; cf. ft, i], ('i^pp' i. e. famous), Semein [so R. V.
but A. V. Semeil, the name of a man : Lk. iii. 26.*
rc^CSoXis, ace. -IV, ή, the finest whealenfiour: Rev. .xviii.
13. (Hippocr., Arstph., Joseph., al. ; Sept. often for
rh::-) '
«Γίμνόϊ, -ή. -OK, (σί3ω), fr. [Horn. h. Cer., al.], Aeschyl.,
Pind. down, august, venerable, reverend; lo be venerated
for character, honorable : of persons [A.V. gravel, I Tim.
iii. 8. 11 : Tit. ii. 2; of deeds. Phil. iv. 8. [Cf. Trench
§ xcii. ; Schmidt ch. 173, 5.] *
ο-ίμνότη5, -r/Tor, ή, (σίμι^ίί), that characteristic of a
pers. or a thing which entitles to reverence or respect,
dir/nily, gravity, majesty, sanctity : ή τοϋ Itpoi σιμνότηί,
Ί Mace. iii. 12; in an ethical sense, gravity [so R. V. uni-
formly (cL Trench p. 347)], honor, probity, purity : 1 Tim.
ii. 2 ; liL 4 ; Tit. ii. 7. (Eur., Plat., Dem., al.) •
S<p^fto«, -ov, 6, Sergius, surnamed Paulus, proconsul of
Cyprus, converted to Christianity by the apostle Paul;
otherwise unknown [cf. Lghtfi. in Contemp. Rev. for
X878, p. 290; Farrar, St. Paul, vol. i. £xcurs. xvi; Re•
mm, Saint Paul, p. 14 sq.] : Acts xiiL 7.*
Σ<ρονχ, see 2αροΰχ.
Χηβ, ό, (Γ\Ρ ' put • [Α. V. ' appointed '], fr. nw to ptit
\u β. in place of the murdered Abel; cf. B. D. s. v. Seth],
Sen. iv. 25), Seth, the third son of Adam : Lk. iii. 38.•
Σήμ (in .Joseph. ΣήμαΟ,ό, (οσ [' name,' ' sign,' 'celel>•
rity ' ; but variously explained]), Sliem, the eldest son
of Xoah: Lk. iii. 36.*
«τημαίνω; impf. ίσήμΉνον (Acts xi. 28 LWIItxt.); 1
aor. ίσήμανα, for {σήμη\ια wliich is the more com. form in
the earlier and mure elegant (irk. writ, (see Matthiae
§185; Kuhner § 343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v.] ; Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 24 sq. ; W. § 15 s. v. ; B. 4 1 (35)) ; (fr. σήμα a sign ) ;
fr. [Horn.], Aescliyl., Ildt. down ; lo give a sign, lo sig-
nify, indicate: τι. Acts xxv. 27; foil, by indir. disc., Jn.
xii. 33 ; xviii. 32; xxi. 19; i.q.lo make known: absol.
Rev. i. 1 ; foil, by ace. w. inf. Acts xi. 28.*
(τημείον, -ου, τό, {σημαίνω [or σήμα]), fr. Aeschyl. and
ridt. down, Ilebr. niX, a sign, mark, token ; 1.
univ. that by which a pers. or a thing is distinguished
from others and known : Mt. xxvi. 4'<: Lk. ii. 12; 2 Th.
iii. 17; σημύον τκριτομηί (explanatory gen. [cf. B. § 123,
4]), equiv. to σημ(\ον. ό ΐστι π(μιτομή, circumcision wliich
should be a sign of the covenant formed with Cod, Ro.
iv. 1 1 ; τα σημι'ια τοϋ αποστόλου, the tokens by which one
is proved to be an apostle, 2 Co. xii. 12 ; a sign by which
anything future is pre-announced, Mk. xiii. 4 ; Lk. xxi.
7 ; TO σημ. τηί σήί παρουσία!, gen. of the obj., Mt. xxiv.
3 ; ToO νιου τοϋ ανθρώπου, the sign which indicates that
the Messiah will shortly, or forthwith, come from heaven
in visible manifestation, ibid. 30; with a gen. of the
subj. τα σημ€ία των καιρών, i.e. the indications of future
events Λνΐιΐΰΐι οί καιροί furnisli, what οί καιροί portend,
Mt. .xvi. 3 [ Τ br. WII reject the pass.] ; a sign by which
one is warned, an admonition, 1 Co. xiv. 22. used of
noteworthy personages, by whom God forcibly
admonishes men and indicates to them ivhat he would
have them do : thus σηαύον άντι\(γόμ(νον is said of Jesus
Christ, Lk. li. 34 ; Ίωι/ά; iytvfTo σημ^Ιην τοΐ? ^tveviTais
(.Ton. iii. 4), Lk. xi. 30 ; hence, τό σημιΐον Ίωι/ά, ib. 2!!,
is i. q. TO σημί'ιον like to that os ηυ Ίωvάt, i• e. to the sign
which \vas given by the mission and preaching of .Jonah,
to prompt men to seek salvation [W. 189 (177)]; in the
same sense, ό vlbs τοϋ ανθρώπου says that he will be a
σημfϊov to the men of his generation, ib. 30; but in Mt.
xii. 39 ; xvi. 4 τό σημ(ίον Ίωνά is the miraculous experi-
ence which befell .lonali himself, cf. .xii. 40; that Luke
reproduces Christ's words more correctly than Matthew
is shown by De Wette and Bleek on Mt. xii. 40, by
Xeander, Leben .Tesu, p. 265 sq. ed. 1 [Eng. trans. (3d
ed. X. Y. IS51) § 165 p. 245 S(].], and others; [but that
Luke's report is less full than Matthew's, rather than
at variance with it, is shown by Meyer, Weiss, Keil, and
others (on Mt. 1. c.)]. 2. α sign, prodigy, porlent,
i. e. an unusual occurrence, transcending the common
course of nature ; a. of signs portending remark-
able events soon to happen: Lk. xxi. 11, 25; Acts ii.
19; Rev. xii. 1, 3; χ v. I. b. of miracles and wonders
by which God authenticates the men sent bv him, or
by which men prove that the cause they are ple.iding is
(iod's: ΛΙΐ. xii. 38 sq.; xvi. 1,4; Mk. viii. 11 sq.; Χλΐ.
17, 20; Lk. xi. 16, 29; xxiii. 8; Jn. ii. 11, 18, 23; iii. 2;
iv. 54: vi. 2. 14,26. 30: vii. 31 ; ix. 16: x. 41:xi47;xU
σημ€ΐοω
574
σικαριο<;
18,37; XX. 30; Acts ϋ. 22,43; viii. 6 ; 1 Co. i. 22 ; but
the power διδόναι σημιΊα, by which men are deceived, is
ascribed also to false teachers, false prophets, and to
demons : Mt. xxiv. 24 ; Mk. xiii. 22 ; Rev. xiii. 13 sq. ; xvi.
14; xix. 20; 2 Th. ii. 9. σημ(1α κ. rcpara (nins
Ο'ΠϋΟΟ or (yet less freij.) τίρατα κ.σημ(ία (terms which
differ not in substantial meaning but only in origin ; cf.
Frilzsclie, Rom. vol. iii. p. 270 sq.; [Trench § xci.]) are
found conjoined : ^It. xxiv. 24 ; Mk. xiii. 22 ; Jn. iv. 48;
Acts ii. 19, 43; iv. 30; v. 12; vi. 8 ; vii. 30 ; xiv. 3 ; xv.
12 ; Ro. χ v. 19 ; 2 Th. ii. 9, (Deut. x.xviii. 46 ; xxxiv. 11 ;
Neh. ix. 10; Is. viii. 18; xx. 3; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 20;
Sap. viii. 8; x. 16; Polyb. 3, 112, 8; Philo, vit. Moys. i.
16 ; Joseph, antt. 20, 8, 6 ; b. j. prooera. 1 1 ; Plut. Alex.
. 75 ; Ael. v. h. 12, 57) ; with κ. 8υνάμ(ΐς added, 2 Co. xii.
12; Ileb.ii.4; σημαία κ.Βννάμΐΐί^ Acts viii. 13; dwapeis κ•
Tepara κ. σημεΊα, Acts ii. 22 ; δίδόναί σημξ'ια (see 8ί8ωμί,
Β. η. I a.) : Mt. xxiv. 24 ; Mk. xiii. 22 (here Tdf. noiflv
σημ., see πούω, I. 1 C.) ; σημαία are said -γίνισθαι δια Tivos
in Actsii. 43; iv. [16], 30; v. 12; xiv. 3; xv. 12 [here
Tsoifiv σημ., see above] ; το σημ^Ίον ttje ϊάσ^ωϊ, the mira-
cle, which Avas the healing, Acts iv. 22.*
σημ.£ΐόω, -ώ : (σημύον), to mark, note, distinguish hy
marking; Mid. pres. impv. 2 pers. plur. σημαοίσθι; to
mark or note for one's se//'[W. § 38, 2 b. ; B. § 135, 4] :
Tifa, 2Th. iii. 14 [cf. B. 92 (80) ; W. 119 (113)]. (The-
ophr., Polyb., Philo, Dion. Hal, al. ; [Ps. iv. 7 Sept.].)•
σ-ήμΕρον [Attic τήμιρυν, I. e. ήμίρα with pronom. prefix
(Skr. sa) ; cf. Vanicek p. 971], adv., fr. Horn, down,
Sept. for DVn, to-day, this day : Mt. vi. 1 1 ; xvi. 3 [T br.
WH reject the pass.] ; Lk. iv. 21 ; xix. 5 ; Acts iv. 9 ; xiii.
33, etc.; also where the speaker refers to the night just
passed, Mt. xxvii. 19 ; equiv. to this night (now current),
Lk. ii. 1 1 ; σήμερον ταύττ] ττ) νυκτί, Mk. xiv. 30 ; ϊως σήμ(-
ρον, 2 Co. iii. 15 ; ορρ. to αΰριον, Mt. vi. 30 ; Lk. xii. 2S ;
xiii. 32 sq. ; Jas. iv. 13; χθϊς κα\ σήμερον και eii τονς
αχωναί, a rhet. periphrasis for ael, lleb. xiii. 8; ή σήμερον
ημίρα, this (very) day, Acts xx. 26 ; ίωί της σ. ήμίρας,
Ro. xi. 8 ; μίχρί τη! σήμιρον sc. ήμίρας, Mt. xi. 23 ; .x.wiii.
15 ; (MS T^t σ. Mt. x.xvii. 8 ; άχρι τηί σ. (where L Τ Tr
ΛνΠ add ήμίραί), 2 Co. iii. 14 ; ^ afjpepov, i. q. what has
happened to-day [al. render concerning this day's riot;
B. § 1 33, 9 ; but see Meyer ad loc. ; W. § 30, 9 a.]. Acts
xix. 40; TO σήμερον, the Λvord to-day, Heb. iii. 13; as a
subst. : opi'ffi ήμίραν, σήμερον, "a to-day " (meaning, 'a
time for embracing the salvation graciously offered ' [cf.
R. V.mrg.]), Heb. iv. 7•.
«τήττω : fr. Hom. down ; to make corrupt ; in the Bible
also to de.^troy. Job xl. 7 (12) ; pass, to become corrupt
or rotten ; 2 pf. act. σίσηπα. to (have become i. e. to) be
corrupted (cf. Btlm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 82) : ό nXoCros σί-
arfnfv, has perished, Jas. v. 2.'
σηρικοί (Lchm. ed. maj. Τ WH σιρικόί [cf. WU. App.
p. I5I]), -η, -όν. (Σηρ, 2ripes, the .^eres, a people of India
[prob. mod. China; yet on the name cf. Pape, Eigen-
namen, s. v.; Diet, of Geog. s. v. Serica]) ; 1. prop.
pertaining tn the Seres. 2. silken : το σηρικόν. silk,
i. e. the fabric, silken garments. Rev. xviii. 1 2. ([Strabo,
Plut., Arr., Lcian.] ; ίσθησ^σι σηρικαϊί, Joseph, b. j. 7, 5,
4.)•
oTJs, σητός, ό. (Hebr. DD, Is. Ii. 8 ; Oj,\, Job iv. 19 ; xiii.
28), a moth, the clothes-moth, [B. D. s. v. Moth ; Alex.'s
Kitto s. v. Ash] : Mt. vi. 19 sq. ; Lk. xii. 33. (Pind., Ar-
stph.. Aristot., Theophr., al.) *
<Γητό-βρωτο5, -ov, (fr. σή^ a moth, and βρωτάι fr. βι-
βρώσκω), tniith-ealen: ιματίου, Jas. v. 2 {'ιμάτια. Job xiii.
28 ; of idol-images, Sibyll. orac. in Theoph. ad Autol. 2,
36).-
ο-θίνόω, -ώ : (σίί'ΐΌί [allied w. στηυαι, hence prop, stead-
fastness ; Curtius p. 503 sq.] strength), to make strong,
to strengthen: τινά, one's soul, 1 Pet. v. 10, where for 1
aor. opt. act. 3 pers. sing, σίίΐ/ώσαι, we must read the
fut. σθ(νώσ€ΐ, with GLTTrWII. (Pass, in Rhet. Or.
ed. Walz, vol. i. c. 15.) •
σιαγών, -o'vos, ή, the Jaw, the Jaw-bone, [A. V. cheek'] :
Mt. V. 39 ; Lk. vi. 29. (Soph., Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.;
Sept. for -nS.)*
σιγάω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ΐσίγησα ; pf. pass. ptcp. σίσιγι/^ίΐ/οί ;
(σιγή) ; fr. Hom. down ; to keep silence, hold one's peace :
Lk. i.x. 30; xviii. 39 LTTr WH; [xx. 26]; Acts xii.
17 ; .XV. 12 sq.; 1 Co. xiv. 28, 30, 34 ; pass, to be kept in
silence, be concealed, Ro. xvi. 25. [Syn. see ησυχάζω.] *
σιγή, -η!, ή, (fr. σίζω [onomatopoetic, Etym. Magn. 712,
29] i. e. to command silence by making the sound si or
sch ; [yet σιγή prob. has no connection Avitli σίζω, but is
of European origin (cf. Germ, schiceigen) ; cf. Fick, Pt.
iii. 843 ; Curtius §572]), fr. Hom. down, silence: Acts
xxi. 40 ; Rev. viii. 1.*
σι8ήρ£ο;, -ία, -eov, contr. -oCf, -5, -οϋν, {σίδηρος), fr.
Hom. down, made oj'iron: Acts xii. 10; Rev. ii. 27; ix.
9 ; xii. 5 ; xix. 15.*
σίδηροί, -ου, ό, fr. Hom. down, iron : Rev. xviii. 12.*
Σιδών, -ώι/οΓ [Β. 16 (14)], ή, (jITi• and p-y, fr. ΊΙΪ 'to
hunt', in Aram, also 'to fish'; hence prop, taking its
name from its abundance of fish ; cf. Justin 18, 3), Sidon,
a very ancient I'hoenician city, formerly distinguished
for wealth and traffic, situated near the Mediterranean
on the borders of Judsa ; it had been assigned to the
tribe of Asher (Josh. xix. 28), but the Jews vainly en-
deavored to capture it [Judg. i. 31 ; iii. 3 ; x. 12] ; now
Saida, containing about 10,000 [or 9,000, ace. to Porter
in Murray's Ilandliook p. 376] inhabitants [Baedeker,
Palestine p. 433] : .Mt. xi. 21 sq. ; xv. 21 ; Mk. iii. 8 ; vii.
24 (where Tom. WH Tr mrg. br. the words καΊ Σιδώι /or),
31; Lk.iv.26 (where LT Tr WH Σιδω^αΓ); vi. 1 7 ; x. 13
sq. ; .\cts xxvii. 3. [Cf. BB. DD. s. v. ; Scliutiz in I lerzog
ed. 2 vol. xiv. 192s(|q. ; Schlottmann in Riehni s. v.] •
SiSuvios, -a, -ov, (2ιδών), belonging to Sidon, of Sidnn :
της Σώωνίας sc. χώρας. [R.V. in the land of Siilon], Lk.
iv. 26 LT Tr WH (Hom. Od. 13, 285 [but -δοι/-]) ; Σι-
δώΐΊοί, the inhabitants of Sidon, Acts xii. 20.*
σικάριο;, -ου, ό, (a Latin word), an a.'!.'iassin, i. e. one
who carries a dagger or short sword [Lat. sica (cf. Jo-
seph, as below)] under his clothing, that he may kill
secretly and treacherously any one he wishes to (a cut-
throat): Acts xxi. 38. (Joseph, b. j. 2, 17, 6 σικαρίονς
Tucepa
6T5
σιναιη
(κάΚουν Tovs \ηστάι ίχονται νπο xois κόλπου τα ζίφη [cf.
2, 13, 3] ; also antt. 20, 8, 10 (τικάμιοι λησταί (Ισι χρώμ(νοι
ξίφώίοΐ! παραπλήσιοι! μίν το μ(γ(θθ! Tois των Πίρσών άκι-
νάκαίς^ (πικαμπ^σι δε και όμοίοίς ταΐς νπο 'Ρωμαίων σίκαις
κα\ουμ€ναΐ5, άφ^ ^ν καΐ την ττ ροση-γορίαν οι XrjirrevovTes eXa-
βον ποΚλονς avaipoivTfs•) [Syn. see ψοκίύϊ.] *
σίκ€ρα, τό, (Hebr. "ΐ3"ΰ; [rather, ace. to Kautzsch (Gram,
p. 11) for Κ"Ι3Π (prop, σίκρα) the stat. emphat. of IJ»
(lit. 'into.\icating' drink)]), indecl. [W. 68 (66); B.
24 (21)], (yet Euseb. praep. evang. 6, 10, 8 has a gen.
aiKcpos [and Soph, in his Lex. quotes fr. Cyrill. Alex. 1,
1041 d. (ed. Mi:;ne) a gen. ciKcparos]), strong drink, an
intoxicating beverage, different from wine [exc. in Num.
xxviii. 7 (cf. Is. xxviii. 7)] ; it was a factitious product,
made of a mixture of sweet ingredients, whether derived
from grain and vegetables, or from the juice of fruits
(dates), or a decoction of honey : Lk. i. 15 (Lev. x. 9 ;
Num. vi. 3; Deut. xiv. 25 (26) ; xxix. 6, etc. ; the same
Hebr. word is rendered also by μίθυσμα, Judg. xiii. 4, 7,
14; Mic. ii. 11). Cf. W'ui. RAVB. s. v. Wein, kunst-
licher ; [B. D. s. v. Drink, Strong].*
Σίλα;, [gen. not found (exc. Joseph, vita 17 -a)], dat.
-a, ace. -av, [B. 20 (18)], ό, Silas (contr. fr. 'S.CKovavos,
q. v.; W. 103 (97)), a Roman citizen (Acts xvi. 37 sq.),
the companion of the apostle Paul in several of his jour-
neys, and his associate in preaching the gospel : Acts
XV. 22, 27, 32, 34 Rec, 40; xvi. 19, 25, 29 ; xvii. 4, 10,
14 sq.; xviii. 5. [B. D. s. v. Silas.] *
ϋιλουανόΐ, -οϋ, ό, Siloanus, the same man who in Acts
is called Σι'λαΓ (q. v.) : 2 Co. i. 19 ; 1 Th. i. 1 ; 2 Th. i. 1 ;
1 Pet. v. 12. [Not infreq. written in the Mss. 'ΣϊΚβανό!,
Silbanus; cf. Tdf. on 11. cc] *
Σιλωόμ, (Hebr. nSi?, Is. viii. 6, which in Jn. ix. 7 is
translated άπ€σΎαλμ€νος, but more correctly [see below]
' a sending out,' ^ gushing forth ' (of water) ; it is formed
after the analogy of 21'K ' had in hatred ', ' persecuted ',
fr. 2'K ; llS' ' born ', fr. iV ' to bring forth ' ; [" the pure-
ly passive explanation, άπ(στα\μ(νο!, Jn. i.x. 7, is not so
incorrect." Ewald, Ausfiihrl. I-ehrbuch d. Hebr. Spr.
§ 1.50, 2 a.; cf. Meyer on Jn. 1. c.]), ό (in Joseph, ή Σ., sc.
πηγή, b. j. 5, 12, 2 ; 6, 8, 5 ; but also μίχρι τοϋ Σ. b. j. 2,
16,2; 6, 7,2; [Β. 21 (19)]), [indecl. ; but in Joseph, b. j.
5, 6, 1 άπο TTJs Σιλωότ], Siloam, a fountain of sweet and
abundant water (.Joseph, b. j. 5, 4, 1), flowing into a basin
or pool of the same name (Neh. iii. 15), both of which
seem to have been situated in the southern part of Jer-
usalem, although opinions vary on this point : Lk. xiii.
4 ; Jn. ix. 11, (Is. viii. 6). Cf. [B. D. s. v. Siloam]; Win.
RWB. s. V. Siloah ; Rodiger in Gesen. Thesaur. p. 1416 ;
Leijrer in Herzog ed. 1, xiv. p. 371 sqq. ; Robinson, Pal-
estine, i. 333 sqq. ; Tohler, Die Siloaquelle u. der Oelberg
(St. Gallen, 1852); Knencker, Siloah, Quelle Teich u.
Thai in Jerus. (Heidelb. 1873); Fnrrer in Schenkel v.
295 sq. ; [Ritter, Palestine, etc., Eng. trans, i. 148 sq. ;
Wilson, Ordnance Survey, etc., 1865 ; esp. Guthe in the
Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Pal.-Vereins for 1882, pp. 205 sqq.
229 sqq. ; Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Morgenl.-Gesellsch. for
1882 p. 725 sqq.].•
σΊ)ΐικ(νθιον (or σημικίνθιον), -ου, τό, (Lat. semicinctium
[cf. Rich, Diet, of Antiq. s. v.], fr. semi and cingo), a
narrow apron, or linen covering, which workmen and
servants were accustomed to wear: Acts xix. 12 [A. V.
aprons^*
Σ(μ«>ν, -ωνοί [Β. 16 (14)], ό, (iU'Dty, ' a hearing *, fr.
Jiljty 'to hear ' ; [there was also a Grk. name Σίμων (allied
w. σιμοί, i. e. ' flat-nosed ' ; Fick, Gr. Personennamen, p.
210), but cf. B. D. s. V. Simon init. ; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal.
p. 266 sq.]), Simon; 1. Peter, the apostle: Mt.
xvii. 25 ; Mk. i. 29 sq. 36 ; Lk. iv. 38 ; v. 4 sq. 10, etc. ;
see Πί'τροί. 2. the brother of Judas Lebbsus [cf.
s. v. '\oihas, 8], an apostle, who is called }ίανανΊτη! [so RG,
but L Τ Tr AVH -va'ioi, q. v.], Mt. x. 4 ; Mk. iii. 18, and
ζηΧαπηί, Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13. 3. a brother of
Jesus [cf. s. V. άδίλφο'Γ, 1] : IMt. xiii. 55 ; Mk. vi. 3. 4.
a certain Cyrenian, who carried the cross of Jesus :
Mt. xxvii. 32 ; Mk. xv. 21 ; Lk. xxiii. 26. 5. the
father of Judas Iscariot [and himself surnamed Ίσκαρ•-
ώτ7)£ (see'IouSas, 6)] : Jn. vi. 71 ; xii. 4; xiii. 2, 26. 6.
a certain Pharisee, Lk. vii. 40, 43 sq., who appears to
[some, e. g. Grotius, Schleiermacher, Holtzmann, Schen-
kel, Ewald, Keim, Hug, Bleek (see his Synopt. Erklar. on
Lk. 1. c.) to] be the same as Simon the leper, Mt. xxvi. 6 ;
Mk. xiv. 3 ; [but the occurrence recorded by Lk. 1. c. ia
now commonly thought to be distinct fr. that narrated
by Mt. and Mk. 11. cc. ; cf. Godet or Keil on Lk.]. 7.
a certain tanner, living at Joppa : Acts ix. 43 ; x. 6, 1 7,
32. 8. 5im»i! (' ^Wa^us '), the Samaritan sorcerer :
Acts viii. 9, 13, 18, 24. The various eccles. stories about
him, as well as the opinions and conjectures of modern
theologians, are reviewed at length by Lipsius in Schen-
kel V. pp. 301-321 ; [cf. W. Moller in Herzog ed. 2, vol.
xiv. p. 246 sqq. ; Schaff, Hist, of the Chris. Church, vol.
ii. (1883) §121].
"Zivil-va WU. ; cf. Chandler §§ 135, 138], τό (sc. Spor,
cf. B. 21 sq. (19)), indecl., Joseph, το Σιναϊον, antt. 3, 5,
1, and TO Τ,ιναΙον Spas, antt. 2, 12, 1 ; Hebr. 'yo [perh.
'jagged'; al. make it an adj. 'belonging to (the desert
of) Sin '], (Sina or) Simii, a mountain or, rather, a moun-
tainous region in the peninsula of Arabia Petraea, made
famous by the giving of the Mosaic law. There are three
summits : one towards the west, which is called a'll'n, a
second towards the east, Sinai prop, so called, the third
towards the south, now Mt. St. Catharine. But the dis-
tinction between Horeb and Sinai is given differently
bv different writers ; and some think that they were two
different names of one and the same mountain (cf. Sir.
xlviii. 7) ; cf. [AfcC. and S. Cycl. s. v. Sinai] ; Win. RWB.
S.V.Sinai; Arnold in Herzog ed. 1 vol. xiv. p. 420 sq.;
[Schultz in ed. 2 vol. xiv. p. 282 sqq.] ; Furrer in Schen-
kel v. p. 326 sqq. ; [Eng. Ordnance Survey, 1869 ; Palmer,
Desert of the Exodus, 1872; also his Sinai from the
Monuments, 1878; Furrer commends Holland's " Sketch
Map" etc. in the Journ. of the Royal Geog. Soc. vol.
xxxix. (Lond. 1869)]. The name occurs in Acts vii. 30,
38 ; Gal. iv. 24 sq.•
σ-ίναιπ. (also σίνηπι [but .^ot in the N. T.], both later
V^Ml
576
σκανΒαΧις»
for the Attic νάττυ [so accented in late auth., better varru],
»ee Lob. ad Γ1ιγ>•π. p. 2SK). [thought to be of Egypt, ori-
orin; of. r«/ii(e/•, Fremdworter, s. V. ι/ΰττν], -foir [B. 14
(13)], TO, mustiinl, the name of a plant ivhicli in oriental
countries grows from a very small seed and attains to
the height of ' a tree ' — ten feet and more ; hence a very
small ([iiantity of a thing is likened to a kokkos aiuunfits
[A. V. (I 7)•(ΐίιι nf musUinl seeil], Mt. xvii. 20 ; Lk. xvii.
6 ; and also a thing which grows to a remarkable size,
Mt. xiii. 31 sq.; Mk.iv.31; Lk.xiii.13. [Cf. B. D. s. v.
Mustard; Loir, Aram. Pflanzennamen, §134; Carru-
l/iei:i in the ' Bible Educator ' voh i. p. 1 19 sq. ; Tristram,
Nat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 47-2 sq.; Thomson, The Land
and the Book, ii. 100 si].] *
crivSiiv. -6ms. η, (of uncertain origin; Skr. sindhu
[Egypt. '.-.chenti' or 'sent'; cf. Vniiuek; Fremdworter,
s. v.j; Sept. for ]'-\0, Judg. xiv. liscp ; Prov. xxix. 42
(xxxi. 24)), /ne clolh (Lm. .''inilon), i.e. X. linen
cloth, esp. that which was fine and costly, in which the
bodies of the dead were wrapped: ]Mt. xxvii. 59; Mk.
XV. 4G ; Lk. xxiii. 53, (cf. Hdt. 2, 86 who says of the
Egyptians, κατιίΚισσονσι πάκ τό σώμα σίνδόκοΓ βυσσινής
[see Wiikinson's note in Rawlinson's Herod. 3d ed.
l.c.]). 2. thinij made (if Jine clolh: so of a light and
loose garment worn at night over the naked body, Mk.
xiv. 51 sq. [others suppose a sheet rather than a shirt to
be referred to; A. V. linen cloth ; cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v.
Sheets]. (Besides Hdt., the writers Soph., Thuc, Stra-
bo, Lcian., al., use the word.) *
σινίάζω: 1 aor. infin. σιυιάσαι; (σινίον 'a sieve,' 'win-
nowing-van'; an eccles. and Byzant. word [cf. Macar.
homil. 5 p. 73 sq. (4;it; a. ed. Migne)]) ; to sifi, shake in
a sieve : nva i>s τοι» σ'ιτον, i. e., droi)ping the fig., by in-
ward agitation to try one's faith to the verge of over-
throw, Lk. xxii. 31. (Eccles. writ. [cf. W. 92 (87), 26
(25), and see above].) *
o-ipiKOs, see σηρικό!-
o-ipns, -oC, 0, i. q. σ(ΐρ6ί, q. v. : 2 Pet. ii. 4 L T.*
<riT€uTOs. -17. -όν, (σιτ(ίω, to feed with wheat, to fatten),
fattened, fattnl: Lk. xv. 23, 27, 30. (.ler. xxvi. (xlvi.)
21; 1 K.iv. 23, [etc.]; Xen., Polyb., Athen., [al.].) •
irtrtov, -ον,τά, (dimin. of σίτοί) ; 1. corn, f/rain:
Acts vii. 12 LT Tr λλ'Π. In prof. writ, also 2.
food made from grain (Hdt. 2, 36). 3. ealnhles,
victuals, provisions, ([Hdt.], Arstph., Xen., Plat., Dem.,
al.).•
o-iTto-ris, -ή, -όν, (σιτίζω, to feed with grain, to fatten),
fattened, [plur. τα σιτ. as subst., A.Y. fallings], Mt. xxii.
4. (Joseph, antt. 8, 2, 4 ; Athen. 14 p. 656 e.) *
ιητομί'τριον, -ου, τό, (Attic writ, said tow σίτοκ μιτρΑν;
out of which later writ, formed the compound airopt-
rpclv. Gen. xlvii. 12, [14]; Polyb. 4, 63, 10; Diod. 19,
50 ; Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 14, 7 ; σιτομίτρία, Diod. 2, 41 ; [cf.
£06. ad Phryn. p. 383; W. 251), a measured ^portion of
grain or 'food': Lk. xii. 42. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.)*
«rlros, -ου, ό, [of uncertain origin ; cf. Vanicek; Fremd-
worter, s. v.], fr. Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for U''\, wheat,
com: Mt. iii. 12: xiii. 25, 29 sq.; Mk. iv. 28; Lk. iii. 17:
[xii. 18 WHTrtxt.]; xvi. 7; xxii. 31; Jn. xii. 24; Ace
xxvii. 38; 1 Co. xv. 37 ; Rev. vi. 6 ; xviii. 13; plur. ri
σϊτα (cf. \V. 63 (62)), Acts vii. 12 Rec., and often in Sept.*
Σιχάρ, see Χυχάρ.
Σιών, indecl., (its grammat. gend. in the N. T. does
not aijpear from the pass, in which it is mentioned ; cf.
B. 21 Sip (19) ; in the Sept. when it denotes the city of
Jerusalem ή 2ιών occurs, as Ps. ci. (cii.) 14, 17 ; c.\xxi.
(cxxxii.) 13; cxxxvi. (cxxxvii.) 1), Ilcbr. p'S [i. o.
ace. to some, ' protected ' or ' protecting ' ; ace. to others,
'sunny'; al. al.]; S ion [so A. V., but properly (with
R. V.)]2iV»i; 1. the hill on which the higher and
more ancient part of Jerusalem was built (1Π 1'>' ciii/
of Darid, because David captured it) ; it was the souili-
westernmost and highest of the hills on which the city
stood; [many now ivould identify it with the eastern
hill, some with the northern ; cf. Furrer in Schenkel
iii. 216 sqq.; MUhlau in Riehm s. v. ; per contra Wolcott
in B. D. Am. ed. s. v.; Schultz in Herzog ed. 2 vi. p. 54S
sq.]. 2. used very often for the entire city of Jeru-
salem itself: Ro. ix. 33 and 1 Pet. ii. 6, (after Is. xxviiL
1 6) ; Ro. xi. 26 (fr. Is. lix. 20) ; η θυγάτηρ Σιών (see θυγάτηρ,
b. /S), Mt. xxi. 5; Jn. xii. 15. 3. Since Jerusalem,
becau.se the temple stood there, was called the dwelling-
place of (! od (cf. Mt. v. 35 ; κΰρια την Σιώκ ήρίτΐσατο (Is
κατοικίαν ίαυτω, Ps. cxxxi. (cxxxii.) 13), the expression
TO Σιων Spos is transferred to heaven, as the true dwell-
ing-place of God and heavenly beings, the antitype of
the earthly Zion : Heb. xii. 22; Rev. xiv. 1.•
«Γΐωιτάω, -ώ ; impf., 3 pers. sing, ίσιώπα, 3 pers. plur.
(σιώπων: fut. σιωπήσω (Lk. xix. 40 L Τ Tr WII) ; 1 aor.
(σιώπησα: (σιωπή silence); fr. Hom. down; to he silent,
hold one's peace : prop., Mt. xx. 31 ; xxvi. 63; 5Ik. iii. 4;
ix. 34; X. 48; xiv. 61 ; Lk. xviii. 39 R G ; xix. 40; Acts
xviii. 9 ; used of one silent because dumb, Lk. i. 20 ;
4 Mace. X. 18 ; like sileo in the Lat. poets, used nietn[ih.
of a calm, quiet sea [(in rhetorical command)] : Mk.
iv. 39. [Syn. see ήσυχάζω-Ί'
ο-κανεαλίζω; 1 aor. €σ•κοΐ'δάλισα; Pass., pres. ffKovSaXi'fo-
μαι: \m]<{. (σκαν8ιι\ιζόμην: 1 aor. €'σκαΐ'δαλι'σ5ι;ΐ' [cf. Β. 52
(45)]; 1 fut. σκανίαλισθήσομαι; (σκάνδα\ον); Vulg. ,scan-
dalizo ; Peshitto ''^_*^ j ; prop, to put a kumhling-block
or impediment in the way, upon which another may trip
and fall; to he a stumhling-hlock ; in the N. T. always
metaph. [R. V. to cause or make to stumble ; A. Λ'^. In
offend (cause to offend)]; a. to entice to sin (Luth.
argern, i. e. arg, bos machen) : τινά, Jit. v. 29, [30] ; xviii.
6,8.sq.; Mk. ix. 42 sq. 45, 47; Lk.xvii.2; iCo.viii. 13;
pass. Lat. offendor. [A. V. to be offended"], \u\q,. scanda-
lizor, Peshitto 'g^ ^^ : Ro. xiv. 21 [RGLTrtxt.]; 2 Co.
xi. 29 [R. V. is made to stumble; cf. W. 1 53 (1 45)]. b.
to cause a person to begin to distrust and desert one irhor»
he ought to trust and obey; to cause to fall au-ny, and
in pass, to fall away [R. V. to stumble (cf. 'Teaching'
etc. 10, 5; Herm. vis. 4, 1, 3; mand. 8, 10)]: τινά. Jn.
vi. 61 : oass.. Mt. xiii. 21 : xxiv. 10 : xxvi. 33 ; Mk. iv.
ικύνΒαΧον
577
σκηνή
17 ; xiv. 29 ; [Jn. xvi. 1] ; U τιη [Α. V.] Ιο be offended
m one,. \ βηά occasion of stumhling in~\, i. e. to see in
anotlier what I disapprove of and what hinders me from
Sfknowledging his authority: Mt. xi. 6 ; xiii. 57; xxvi.
31; Alk. vi. y; xiv. 27; Llc.vii. 23; to cause one to judye
liii/ctroruhli/ or uiijnslli/ nf awit/ier, Mt. xvii. 27. Since
the man who stumbles or wliose foot gets entangled
fi'L'ls annoyed, σκανδαλίζω means c. to cause one
to feel disi/leasure nl a thing; to make indignant: τινά,
pass, to be displease//, indignant, [Λ. V. oJfended'\, Mt.
XV. 12. The verb σκαν8αλϊζω is found neither in prof,
aulh. nor in the Sept., but only in the relics of Aquila's
version of the O. T., Ps. Ixiii. (Ixiv.) 9 ; Is. viii. 15 ; [xl.
80] ; Prov. iv. 12 for ^!i)3 ; besides in Sir. ix. 5 ; xxiii.
8; XXXV. (xxxii.) 15; [Psalt. Sal. 16, 7. Cf. W. 33.] •
σ-κάνδαλον, -ου, τό. a purely bibl. [(occurring some
twenty-five times in the Grk. O. T., and fifteen, quotations
included, in the New)] and eccles. word for σκαΛίληθμον,
which occurs occasionally in native Grk. writ.; Sei>t. for
fpn (a noose, a snarej and '71U'J5"p ; a. prop, t/ic
mocal/le stick or tricker ('trigger') of a trap, traj>-slick;
a trap, snare ; any impediment placed in the way and caus-
ing one to stumble or fall, [a stumbling-block, occasion of
ttumbling']: Lev. xix. 14; πίτρα σκανδάλου [.\. V. a rock
of offence"], i. e. a rock which is a cau.-;e of stumbling
(Lat. ojjewliculum), — fig. applied to Jesus Christ, whose
person and career were so contrary to the expectations
of the Jews concerning the Messiah, that they rejected
him and by their obstinacy made shipwreck of salvation
(see πρόσκημμα). Ho. ix. 33 and 1 Pet. ii. 8 (7), (fr. Is. viii.
14). b. metaph. any person or thing by which one is
('entrapped') drawn into error or sin [cf. AV. 32] ; a.
of persons [(Josh, xxiii. 13; 1 S. xviii. 21)]: Mt. xiii.
41 ; xvi. 23 (where σκάνδαλον " non ex eff ectu, sed ex
natura et condicione propria dicitur," Caloi•.);
80 Χρίστος ίσταυρωμίνος is calleil (because his ignomin-
ious death on the cross roused the opposition of the
Jews), 1 Co. i. 23. β. of things : τιθϊναι nvi σκάν-
SaXov (literally, in Judith v. 1), to put a stumbling-block
in one's way, i. e. to do tliat by whicli another is led to
sin, Ro. xiv. 13; the same idea is expressed by βά\\ίΐν
σκάνδαλον ΐνώπιάν Tivos [Ό cast a stumbling-block before
one]. Rev. ii. 14 ; ουκ εστί σκάνδαλον ίν τινι (see dpi, V.
4 e.), 1 Jn. ii. 10; plur. σκάι-δίΐλα, words or deeds ivhich
entice to sin (Sap. xiv. 11), Mt. xviii. 7 [cf. B. 322 (277) n.;
W. 371 (348)] ; Lk. xvii. 1 ; σκάνδαλα notf'iv πάρα την
ίιδαχην, to cause persons to be drawn awav from the
true doctrine into error and sin [cf. παρά. III. 2 a.], Ro.
xvi. 17; TO σκάνδ. τοΰ σταυρού, tlie offence which the
cross, i. e. Christ's death on the cross, gives (cf. a. fin.
above), [R. V. the stumbling-block of the cross]. Gal. v.
11 ; i. q. a cause of destruction, Ro. xi. 9, fr. Ps. Ixviii.
(Ixix.) 23.•
σκάιττ» ; 1 aor. ίσκαψα ; [allied w. it are Eng. ' sliip ',
'skiff•, etc.; Curtius § 109; Pick iv. 267; vii. 336]; to
dig: Lk. vi. 48 (on which see βαθύνω) ; xiii. 8 [B. § 130,
6J; xvi. 3. ([Hom. h. Merc.]; Arstph., Eurip., Xen.,
Plat., Aristot., Theophr., al.) [CoMP. : κατα-σκάτττω.] '
(Γκόψη, -Tjf, η, (σκάπτω [ο. v.]), fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt.
down, anything dug onl, hollow vessel, trough, tray, tub;
spec, a boat: Acts xxvii. 16, 30, 32.*
<ΓΚ£'λο5, -our, TO, fr. Hom. down, the leg i. e. from the
hip to the toes inclusive : Jn. xix. 31 sq. 33.'
(Γκ«να(Γμα, -Tof, τό, (σκιπάζω to cover), a covering,
spec, clothing (.\ristot. pol. 7, 17 p. 1336", 17; Joseph,
b. j. 2, 8, r>) : 1 Tim. vi. 8.*
Σκ(υαβ. -ά [W. § 8, 1 ; Β. 20 (18)], ό, Sceva, a certain
chief priest [cf. ap\tfpeii, 2 fin.]: Acts xix. 14.*
<ΓΚ€υή, -rjs, ή, [cf. σκfΰos], fr. [Pind., Soph.], Hdt. down,
any ap/iaralus, equipment, or furniture; used of the uten-
sils [outfit, i.e. furniture (? — so R. Λ'. mrg.), or tackhng
(?— so A. v., R. V. txt.)] of a ship (Diod. 14, 79) : Acts
xxvii. 19 (Sept. Jon. i. 5).*
σκίΰοί, -ους, τό, [prob. fr. r. sku 'to cover'; cf. Lat.
scutum, cutis, obscurus; Curtius § 113; A^anicek p. 1115],
fr. [Arstph.], Thuc. down; Sept. for •'73 ; 1. a tes-
sel: Mk.xi.l6; Lk.viii.l6; Jn.xix.29; Acts x. 11,16;
xi. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 20; Rev. ii. 27; xviii. 12: τά σκ. τής λ«-
Tovpyiat, to be used in performing religious rites, Heb.
ix. 21 ; σ«ΟοΕ tU τιμήν, unto honor, i. e. for honorable
use, Ro. ix. 21 ; 2 Tim. ii. 21, (καθαρών ϊργων δοΰλα σκ(ύη.
Sap. XV. 7); fi's άτιμίαν, unto dishonor, i. e. for a low use
(as, a urinal), Ro. ix. 21 ; σκ(ϋη ό|ryήs, into which wrath
is emptied, i. e. men appointeil by God unto woe, hence
the addition κατηρησμί^α (is άπώλιιαν, Ro. ix. 22; σκιύη
eXiouE, fitted to receive mercy, — explained by the ivords
a προητοιμασ€ν (ίς δύζαν, ib. 23 ; το σκίϋος is used of a
woman, as tlie vessel of her husband, 1 Th. iv. 4 (see
κτάομαι ; [ah take it here (as in 2 Co. iv. 7 below) of the
body] ) ; the female sex, as being weaker tlian the male,
is likened to a σ«Οοί άσθ(ν(στ(ρον, in order to com-
mend to husbands the obligations of kindness towards
tlieir ^vives (for the iveaker the vessels, the greater must
be the care lest they be broken), 1 Pet. iii. 7; οστράκινα
σκ(ύη is applied to human bodies, as frail, 2 Co. iv.
7. 2. an implement ; plur. household utensils, do-
tnestic gear: Mt. xii. 29; Mk. iii. 27; Lk. xvii. 31, [in
these pass. R. V. goods] ; as the plur. often in Grk.
writ, denotes the tackle and armament of I'essels (Xen.
oec. 8, 1 2 ; Plat. Critias p. 11 7 d. ; Lach. p. 183 e. ; Polyb.
22, 26, 13), so tlie sing, τό σκ(νος seems to be used spec,
and collectively of the sails and ropes (R. Λ^. gear) in
Acts xxvii. 17. metaph. of a man : σκίϋος εκλογής (gen.
of quality), a chosen instrument [or (so A. V.) 'vessel],
Actsix. 15; in a base sense, an assistant in accomplishini»
evil deeds [cf. Eng. 'tool'], σκ(νο! ΰπηρ(τικόν, Polyb. 13,
5, 7; 15, 25, 1.*
«Γκηνή, -ης, ή, [fr. r. ska ' to cover ' etc. ; cf. σκιά, σκό-
τος, etc. ; Lat. casa, cassis, castrum ; Eng. shade, etc. ;
Curtius § 1 12; Vanicek p. 1054 sq.], fr. [Aeschyl.], Soph,
and Thuc. down ; Sept. chiefly for Sns, often also for
IliVp, also for r^30 ; a tent, tabernacle, (made of green
boughs, or skins, or other materials) : Mt. xvii. 4 ; Mk.
ix. 5 ; Lk. i.x. 33 ; Heb. xi. 9 ; αϊ αΐωΜοι σκηναί (see at»'•
νιος. 3), f.,k. xvi. 9 (et dabo iis tabernacula aeterna quae
praeparaveram illis, 4 (5) Esdr. ii. 11); of that well
ακηνοττηΎΐα
578
σκιρτάω
known movable temple of God after the pattern -of
which the temple at Jerusalem was subsequently built
[cf. B. D. s. V. Temple] : Ileb. viii. 5 ; ix. 1 Ileo.•', 21 ;
with ToO μαρτυρίου added (see μαρτύριον, c. fin.), Acts \n.
44; the tenii)le is called σκηνή in Ileb. xiii. 10; σκηνή ή
ιτρώτη, the front part of the tabernacle (and afterwards
of the temple), the Holy place, Heb. ix. 2, B, 8; of the
Holy of holies, Heb. ix. 3 ; the name is transferred to
heaven, as the true divelling-jilace of God and the pro-
totype of the earthly 'tabernacle' or sanctuary, Ileb. ix.
Π ; Rev. xiii. 6; hence ή σκηνή ή ά\ηθιρή, heaven, Ileb.
viii. 2 ; with a reference to this use of the word, it is
declared that when the kingdom of God is perfectly es-
tablished ή σκηνή τοϋ θ(οϋ will be μ(τα των ανθρώπων
(after the analogy of σκηνοΰν μ^τά rti/os). Rev. xxi. 3 ; ό
ναός της σκηνής του μαρτυρίου (see μαρτύριον^ C. fin.), the
heavenly temple, in which was the tabernacle of the
covenant, i. e. the inmost sanctuary or adytum, Rev. xv.
5. ή σκ. τοϋ Μολό;^, Oic lahernade i.e. portable shrine
of Moloch, Acts vii. 43 (for the Orientals on their jour-
neys and military expeditions used to carry with them
their deities, together with shrines for them ; hence ή Upa
σκηνή of the Carthaginians in Died. 20, 6a, where see
Wesseling [but cf. ni3p in Muhlau and Volck's Gesen-
ius, or the recent Comm. on Am. v. 26]). η σκηνή Δαυίδ
(fr. Am. ix. 11 for Π3ρ), the hut (tabernacle) of Daoid,
seems to be employed, in contempt, of his houae, i. e.
family reduced to decay and obscurity. Acts xv. 16 (other-
wise in '7ΠΧ in Is. xvi. 5).'
σκηνοΊτηγία, -ας, ή, (σκηνή and ττηγνυμι, cf. Heb. viii.
2) ; 1. the construction of a taljernacle or tahcrnn-
cles : ή της χ(\ώόνος σκηνοττηγία, the skill of the swallow
in building its nest, Aristot. h. a. 9, 7 [p. 612', 22]. 2.
the feast of tabernacles : Jn. vii. 2. This festival was
observed by the Jews yearly for seven days, beginning
with the 15th of the month Tisri [i. e. approximately,
Oct. ; cf. BB.DD. s. v. Month], partly to perpetuate the
memory of the time when their ancestors after leaving
Egypt dwelt in tents on their way through the Arabian
desert (Lev. xxiii. 43), partly as a season of festivity and
joy on the completion of the harvest and the vintage
(Deut. xvi. 13) ['the feast of ingatbe.'ng' (see below)].
In celebrating the festival the Jews were accustomed to
construct booths of the leafy branches of trees, — either
on the roofs or in the courts of their dwellings, or in the
streets and scjuares (Neb. viii. 15, 16), and to adorn them
with flowers and fruits of all kinds (Lev. xxiii. 40), —
under which, throughout the period of the festival, they
feasted and gave themselves up to rejoicing. This feast
is called ΠΙ^ρΠ jn (ή) ίορτή (της) σκηνοττηγίας, Deut. xvi.
16 ; xxxi. 10; Zech. xiv. 16, 18 sq. ; 1 Esdr. v. 50 (51) ;
1 Mace. x. 21 ; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 12; (ή) ίορτή (των)
σκηνών, Lev. xxiii. 34; Deut. xvi. 13; [2 Chr. viii. 13;
Ezra iii. 4] ; 2 Mace. x. 6 ; σκηναί, Philo de septenar. § 24 ;
ή σκηνοττηγία, 2 Mace. i. 9, 18; once [twice] (Ex. xxiii.
16; [xxxiv. 22]) η'ΡΚΠ :π, i.e. 'the feast of ingathering'
8c. of fruits. [Cf. BB.DD. (esp. Ginshurg in Alex.'s
Kitto) ; Edersheim, The Temple, eh. xiv.] *
(Γκηνοποιό;, -οϋ, ό, (σκηνή and πούω), a tent-makef, i. q.
σκηνορράφος (Ael. v. h. 2, 1) ; one that made small port-
able tents, of leather or cloth of goats' hair (Lat. cili-
cium) or linen, for the use of travellers : Acts xviii. 3
[cf. Meyer ad loc. ; Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2
vol. xi. p. 3.Ϊ9 sq.].*
σκηνοί, -ους, τό, [Hippocr., Plat., al.], a tabernacle, a
tent, everywhere [exc. Boeckh, Corp. inscrr. vol. ii. no.
3071] used metaph. of the human body, in which the soul
dwells as in a tent, and which is taken down at death :
2 Co. V. 4 ; ή eViyfiof ήμων οικία τοϋ σκήνους, i- e. ό ϊστί
το σκήνος [W. § .09, 7 d., 8 a.], which is the well-known
tent, ibid. 1 [R. V. (he earthly house of our tabernacle^.
Cf. Sap. ix. 15 and Grimm ad loc; in the same sense
in (Plat.) Tim. Locr. p. 100 sqc]. and often in other
philosophic writ. ; cf. Fischer, Index to Aeschin. dial.
Socr. ; Passow s. v. ; [Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 1 1 3
(on 2 Co. v. 1)].*
σ-κηνόω, -ώ; iut. σκηνώσω; \ α,οτ. ϊσκήνωσα; to fx one's
tabernacle, have one's tabernacle, abide (or live) in a talj-
ernacle (or lent), tabernacle, (often in Xen. ; Dem. p. 1257,
6); God σκηνώσ(ΐ tV αΐτηΰς, icill spread his tabernacle
over them, so that they may dwell in safety and security
under its cover and protection. Rev. vii. 15; univ. i. q.
to dwell (Judg. v. 17): foil, by tv with a dat. of place,
Rev. xii. 12 ; xiii. 6, (iv τα'ις οΐκίαις, Xen. an. 5, 5, 11); ev
ήμ'ιν, among us, Jn. i. 14 ; μιτά τίνος, with one. Rev. xxi.
3 ; συν rivi, to be one's tent-raate, Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 49.
[Cojrp. : eVt-, κατά- σκηνόω.~\ *
(Γκήνωμα, -τος, τό, {σκηνόω), α tent, tabernacle : of the
temple as (iod's habitation. Acts vii. 46 (Ps. xiv. (xv.)
1; XXV. (xxvi.) 8 ; xiii. (xliii.) 3; xiv. (xlvi.) 5 ; Pausan.
3, 17, 6; of the tabernacle of the covenant, 1 K. ii. 28);
metaph. of the human body as the dwelling of the soul
(see σκήνος) : iv τω σκηνώματι fivai, of life on earth,
2 Pet. i. 13; άπό6(σις (the author blending the concep-
tions of a tent and of a covering or garment, as Paul
does in 2 Co. v. 2), ibid. 14. (Eur., Xen., Plut., al. ;
Sept. for SriK and ]2ίία.) *
σ-κιά, -as, ή, [(see σκηνή, init.)], fr. Hom. down, Sept.
for Sx ; a. prop, shadow, i. e. shade caused bj• the
interception of the light : Mk. iv. 32 (cf. Ezek. xvii. 23) ;
Acts V. 15; σκιά θανάτου, shadow of death (like umiro
mortis, Ovid, metam. 5, 191, and umbra Erebi, Verg. Aen.
4, 26; 6, 404), 'the densest darkness' (because from of
old Hades had been regarded as enveloped in thick
darkness), trop. the thick darkness of error [i. e. spirit-
ual death ; see θάνατος, 1] : Mt. iv. 16 ; Lk. i. 79, (fr. Is.
ix. 1, where nioSi"). b. a shadow, i. e. an image
cast by an object and representing the form of that ob-
ject : opp. to σώμα, the thing itself, Col. ii. 1 7 ; hence i. (j.
a sketch, outline, adumbration, Heb. viii. 5 ; opp. to ιΐκών,
the 'express' likeness, the very image, Heb. x. 1 (as in
Cic. de off. 3, 17, 69 nos veri juris solidam et expresssam
effigiem nuUam tenemus, umbra et imaginibus utimur).*
σκιρτάω, -ώ : 1 aor. ίσκ'φτησα; to leap: Lk. i. 41, 44
vi. 23. (Gen. xxv. 22 ; Ps. cxiii. (cxiv.) 4, 6 ; Grk. writ
fr. Hom. down.)*
τκΧηοοκαρΒία
579
σκοτεινό';
(Γκληρο-καρδία, -ας, ή, (^σκληρύς and καρδία), a bibl. word,
the characiensiic of uiie tcho is σκληρυς την καρδίαν (Prov.
xxviii. 14), or σκληροκάρδιο! (Prov. xvii. 20 ; Ezek. iii.
7) ; hardness of hear! : ^It. xix. 8 ; Mk. x. 5 ; xvi. 14 ;
for 3dS r>S"i>', Deut. X. 16 ; Jer. iv. 4 ; Sir. .xvi. 10 ; καρ-
δία σκληρό, Si'r. iii. 26, 27. [Cf. W. 26, 99 (94).] '
σκληρ05, -ά, -όν, (σκελλω, σκληναι, [to dry up, be dry]),
fr. [Hes., Tlieogn.], Pind., Aescliyl. down; Sept. for Πί^Ρ
hard, harsh, rough, stiff, (τα σκληρά κ. τα μαλακά, Xen.
mem. 3, 10, 1) ; of men, metapli., harsh, stern, hard :
Mt. XXV. 24 (1 S. XXV. 3 ; Is. xix. 4 ; xlviii. 4 ; many e.xx.
fr. prof. auth. are given by Passow s. v. 2 b. ; [L. and S.
8. V. n. 2 ; esp. Trench § xiv.]) ; of things : avepot, vio-
lent, rough, Jas. iii. 4 ; ό λόγος, offensive and intolerable,
Jn. vi. 60, equiv. to or σκavδaλίζf^, 61 ; σκληρά λaλfΊv κατά
Tivos, to speak hard and bitter things against one, Jude
15 (σκληρά λαλιϊν τινι is also used of one who speaks
roughly, (jen. xlii. 7, 30 ; αποκρίν^σθαι σκληρά, to reply
with threats, 1 K. xii. 13) ; σκληρόν (στι foil, by an inf.,
it is dangerous, turns out badly, [A. V. it is hard^, Acts
ix. 5 Rec. ; xxvi. 14.*
(Γκληρότηϊ, -ητοί, ή, (σκληρός), hardness ; trop. obsti-
nacy, stubbornness : Ro. ii. 5. (Deut. ix. 27 ; [Antipho],
Plat., Aristot., Theophr., Plut., al.) •
σκληρο-τράχηλοί, -ov, (σκληρός and τράχηλος), prop.
Stiff-necked; trop. stubborn, headstrong, obstinate : Acts vii.
51 ; Sept. for fjlj; T\Up, Ex. xxxiii. 3, 5 ; x.xxiv. 9 ; [etc.] ;
Bar. ii. 30; Sir. xvi. 11; [cf. σκληροτραχηλία. Test. xii.
Patr., test. Sym. § 6], Not found in prof, auth.; [cf. W.
26, 99 (94)].•
σκληρύνω [cf. W. 92 (88)] ; 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. plur.
σκληρΰνητι ; Pass., impf. ΐσκληρυνόμην ; 1 aor. ίσκληρίν-
θην; (σκληρός, q. v.) ; Sept. for Τ^Ό'^Τ} and pin, to make
hard, to hardeji ; prop, in Ilippocr. and Galen ; metaph.
to render obstinate, stubborn, [A.V. to harden'] : τινά, Ro.
ix. 18 (in opp. to those who interpret it to treat harshly,
cf. Fritzsche vol. ii. p. 323 sq. ; [cf., too, Meyer ad
loc.]) ; τηνκαρδίαν τίνος, Heb. iii. 8, 15 andiv. 7, (fr. Ps.
xciv. (xcv.) 8 ; cf. Ex. vii. 3, 22; viii. 19; ix. 12); pass.
(Sept. for ntyp and ρίΠ) to be hardened, i. e. become obsti-
nate or stubborn : Acts xix. 9; Ileb. iii. 13.*
<Γκολιός, -ά, -όν, (opp. to ορθός, όρθιος, ευθύς [cf . σκώληζ']),
fr. Hom. down, crooked, curved : prop, of a way (Prov.
xxviii. 18), τά σκαλιά, Lk. iii. 5 (opp. to ή ci0e'ia sc. όδοΓ,
fr. Is. xl. 4); metaph. perverse, ivicked : ή yevea ή σκολιά.
Acts ii. 40; with διεστραμμένη added, Pliil. ii. 15 (clearly
so Deut. xxxii. 5); unfair, surly, froicard, (opp. to αγα-
θός κ- (ΤΓκικής), 1 Pet. ii. 18.*
σ-κόλοψ, -οποΓ, 6, fr. Hom. down, a pointed piece of
wood, a pale, a stake : εδόθη μοι σκόλο^Ιτ τη σαρκί, α sharp
stake [al. say splinter, A.V. thorn; cf. Num. .xxxiii. 55;
Ezek. xxviii. 24 ; Hos. ii. 6 (8) ; Babr. fab. 122, 1. 10;
al. (Sir. xliii. 19)] to pierce my flesh, appears to indicate
some constant bodily ailment or infirmity, which, even
when Paul had been caught up in a trance to the third
heaven, sternly admonished him that he still dwelt in a
frail and mortal body, 2 Co. xii. 7 (cf. 1-4) ; [cf. W. § 31,
10 N. 3 ; B. § 133, 27. On Paul's " thorn in the flesh "
see Farrar, St. Paul, i. 652 sqq. (Excursus x.) ; Bp.
Lghlft. Com. on (ial. p. 186 sqq. ; Schaffm his ' Popular
Commentary' on Gal. p. 331 sq.] *
σ-κοίΓί'ω, -ώ ; (σκοπός, q. V.) ; fr. Hom. down ; to look at,
observe, contemplate. to mark : absol., foil, by μή with
the indie, (see μή. III. 2), Lk. xi. 35 ; τινά, to fix one's
eyes upon, direct one's attention to, any one : Ro. xvi.
17; Phil. iii. 17; σεαυτόν, foil, by μή with the subjunc.
to look to, take heed to thyself lest etc. Gal. vi. 1 [see μή,
II. 1 b.] ; Ti, to look at, i. e. care for, have regard to, a
thing : 2 Co. iv. 18 ; Phil. ii. 4, (2 Mace. iv. 5). [Comp. :
fVt-, κατα-σκοπίω•~\ *
[Sym. : σκοπίϊν is more pointed than βκίττειν; often i.q. to
scrutinize, observe. When the physical sense recedes, i.q. tofx
one's [mind's) eye on, direct one's attention to, a. thing in order to
get it, Growing to interest in it, era duty towards it. Hence
often equiv. to aim at, care for, etc. Schmidt, Syn. ch. xi.
Of. θ€ωρ4(ϋ, όράω.]
σκοΐΓ05, -oC, ό, [(fr. a r. denoting ' to spy,' ' peer,' 'look
into the distance ' ; cf. also Lat. specie, speculum, species,
etc. ; Fick i. 251 sq. ; iv. 279 ; Curtius § 1 1 1)] ; fr. Hom.
down ; 1. an observer, a watchman. 2. the
distant rnark looked at, the goal or end one has in view :
κατά σκοπόν (on this phrase see κατά, II. 1 c), Phil,
iii. 14.*
σκορττίϊ,ω ; 1 aor. έσκόρπισα ; 1 aor. pass. Ισκορπίσθην ;
[(prob. fr. r. skarp ' to cut asunder,' ' cut to pieces ' ;
akin is σκορπιοί ; cf. Lat. scalpere, scrobs, etc. ; Fick
i. 240; iii. Sll, etc.)]; to scatter: 6 λΰκος σκορπίζει τά
πρόβατα, Jn. χ. 12 ; ό μη σννάγων μετ εμοΐι σκορπίζει, ^It.
xii. 30 ; Lk. xi. 23, (this proverb is taken from a flock,
• — to which the body of Christ's followers is likened [al.
regard the proverb as borrowed fr. agriculture] ; συνάγει
τους εσκορπισμενους το όργανον [i. e. a trumpet], Artem.
oneir. 1, 56 init.) ; τινά, in pass., of those who, routed
or terror-stricken or driven by some other impulse,
fly in every direction : foil, by «r w. ace. of place, Jn.
xvi. 32 [cf. W. 516 (481)], (1 Mace. vi. 54; φοβηθεντες
έσκορπίσθησαν, Plut. Timol. 4 ; add, Joseph, antt. 6, 6,
3). i. q. to scatter abroad (what others may collect for
themselves), of one dispensing blessings liberally : 2 Co.
ix. 9 fr. Ps. cxi. (cxii.) 9, [cf. W. 469 (437)]. (Ace. to
Phrynichus the word was used byHecataeus; it was
also used — in addition to the writ, already cited — by
Strabo 4 p. 198 ; Lcian. asin. 32 ; Ael. v. h. 13, 45 [here
δΐ€σκ. (ed. Hercher); λόγουΓ (cf. Lat. spargere rumores),
Joseph, antt. 16, 1, 2]; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 218; [W.
22; 92 (87)]; Sept. for ]"27\, 2 S. xxii. 15; Ps. xvii.
(xviii.) 15. Attic writers say σκ(8ά«αι/«.) [Comp. : δια-
σκορπίζομαι.] *
ο-κορπ£ο5, -ov, 6, [(for deriv. see the preceding word) ;
from Aeschyl. down; on its accent, cf. Chandler § 246],
a scorpion, Sept. for 3'^pJ.', the name of a little animal,
somewhat resembling a lobster, which in warm regions
lurks esp. in stone walls ; it has a poisonous sting in its
tail [McC. and S. and BB. DD. s. v.] : Lk. x. 19 ; xi. 12;
Rev. ix. 3, 5, 10.•
σκοτεινοί [WH σκοτινός; see I, i], -η, -όν, (jjKOirot), fM
σκοτία
580
σκωΚηξ
of (larkrens, covered itith dari-neur, [fr. Acschyl. flown] :
opp. to φωτ(ΐνόί, Mt. vi. 23 ; Lk. xi. 34, 36, (ra σκοτ^νά
«. τα φωτ€ΐνά, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 1 ; [cf. 4, 3, 4]).'
σκοτία, -as, ή. [on its lienv. of. σκηνή], (Tliom. Map;, ό
σ«!τοϊ κ. το σκότοΓ• το δί σκοτία οϋ« eV χμήσα fc. in Attic
[cf. Moeris s. v. ; L. anil .S. s. v. σκύτοι, fin.]}, i/ari-ness:
Ijrop. the darkness Jue to ivant of daylight, Jn. vi.
17; .\.\. 1 ; tV τή σκοηα (λαλίίΐ' τι), unseen, in secret,
(i. q. fv κμνπτω. .In. xviii. iO), pnvilv, in private, opp. to
eV τώ φωτι. Mt. .\. 27 ; Lk. .\ii. 3 ; nietaph. used of igno-
rance of divine tilings, and its associated wickedness, and
Uie resultant misery: Mt. iv. 16 LTrWH; Jn. i. 5;
viii. 12; xii. 35, 46; 1 .Jn. i. 5; ii 8 sq 11. (Ap. Rh.
4. Ki'JS; Anih. 8, 187. 190; for Π:ΓΠ .Mio. iii. 6; for
isx Job xxviii. 3.)*
οΓκοτίζω : I'ass., pf. ptcp. ίσκοτισμίνοί (Eph. iv. 18 RG) ;
1 'Λον. (σ<οτΊσθην\ 1 fut. aicorta^r;ao/iai; (σκότοί); to cov-
er icilli (lurkne^x, to tlarkoi ; pass. Iti be cnren-d with dark-
ness, be darkeneil : prop, of the heavenl\ bodies, as de-
prived of light [(Eccl. xii. 2)], Jit. .-i.xiv. 29 ; Mk. xiii. 24 ;
Lk. xxiii. 4.")['Γ WIl t(tXfiV<u(i|.v. •.')] . Rev. viii. 1 2 ; ix. 2( L
Τ W'll σκοτόω. q. V.J; metai)h. of the eyes, viz. of the un-
derstanding, Ito.xi. 10; 17 καρδία, the mind [see Kophia. 2
b. /3.]. Ro. i. 21 ; men τή biavoia, Eph. iv. 18 RG. (Plut.
[adv. Col. 24, 4; Cleomed. S1,28J; Tzetz. hist, b, 920;
Sept. several times for -γύΤ) ; [Polyb. 12, 15, 10 ; 3 Mace.
iv. 10; Test. xii. Patr., test. Rub. § 3 ; test. Levi § I4J.) •
o-KOTOs, -ov, 0, (cf. σκοτία, init.), fr. Iloni. down, dark-
ness: lleb. .xii. 18 Rec. [cf. \VU. App. p. 158; W. 66
(64); B. 22 (20)].•
σκότο$. -ous, TO, fr. Find, down, (see the preceding
word, and σκοτία, init.), Sept. chiefly for ;)^'n, dark-
ness; a. prop.: Mt. xxvii. 45; Mk. xv. 33; Lk.
xxiii. 44; Acts ii. 20; 2 Co. iv. 6 ; αΰτι; «'στίκ ij ί|ουσ•ί'α
ToC σκότουί, this is the power of (night's) darkness, i. e.
it has the power of rendering men bold to comnnt crimes,
Lk. xxii. 53 ; τά κρυπτά του σκότουί (see κρυπτοί), 1 Co.
iv. 5 ; of darkened eyesight or blindness : σκότοί ('πι-
winrf t ί'πί τιχα i. e. on one deprived of sight. Acts xiii. 1 X ;
in fig. disc, it ουν . . ., TO σκότοί πόσον ; if the lit/ht that is
in thee is darkness, darkened (i. e. if the soul has lost its
perceptive power), how r/rent is the darkness (how much
more de|)lorable than bodily blindness), Mt. vi. 23, cf.
Lk. xi. 35. by meton. put for a dark place : Mt. viii.
12; xxii. 13 ; .\xv. 30, (see (ξώτfρos) ; ζάφηί τοϋ σκότους
(see ζόφος), 2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 13. b. metapli. of
ignorance respecting divine things and hura.an duties,
and the accompanying ungodliness and immorality, to-
gether with their consequent misery (see σκοτία) : Jn.
iii. 19; Acts xxvi. 18; 2 Co. vi. 14; Eph. vi. 12; Col. i.
13 ; 1 Pet. ii. 9 ; (abstract for the concrete) persons in
whom darkness becomes visible and holds sw.ay, Eph. v.
8 ; τά ϊργα τοϋ σκότους, deeds done in darkness, harnio-
nizirg with it, Ro. xiii. 12; Eph. v. 11 ; σκότους elvai, to
be given up to the power of darkness [cf. W. § 30, 5 a.],
1 Th. v. 5 ; €v σκότ€ΐ (tvai, ib. 4 ; o! (v σκότ€ΐ, Lk. i. 79 ;
Ro. ii. 1 9 ; ό Xaos ό καθήμενος fv σκότα, Mt. iv. 16 Κ G Τ ;
fV σκότ(ΐ wepmaTftv, 1 Jn. i. 6.*
σ -KOTdu, .<; : Pass., pf. ptcp. ΐσκοτωμινος ; 1 aor. cVc•-
τωθηΐ' ; [cf. WII. Ap[>. p. 171]; (σκότος); Ιο darken,
cocer imlh darkness: llev. ix. 2 LT WII ; xvi. 10; metr
aph. (() uarken or liliml the nunil: (σκοτωμίνοι τή ίιαι/οία,
Eph. iv. 18 L Τ Tr WIL ([Soph.], Plat., I'olyb., Plut,
al. ; Sept.)•
σκϋβαλον, -ου, τό. (κυσίβαΧον Tt ov. το τοις κυσ\ βα\\όμ^-
νον, Suid. [ρ. 3347c.; to the same ilTect Etym. Magn.
p. 719, 53 cf. 125, 44 ; al. connect it with σκώρ (cf. scoria,
L.at. slercus), al. with a r. meaning 'to shiver ', 'shred ';
Kick, Pt. i. p. 244]), any refuse, as the excrement of
animals, offscouring, rubbish, <lregs, etc. : [.\. V. dung']
i. e. worthless and detestable, Phil, iii 8. (Sir. xxviu
4, Philo; Joseph, b. j. 5, 13, 7; Plut.; Strabo; often in
the Anthol.) [See on the word, Bp. Lghtft. on Phil.
I. c. ; Gataker, Advers. Miscell. Posth., c. xliii. p. 868
Σκνβη;, -πυ, ό. η Sri/thian, an inhahilani of Sri/thia i. e.
modern Russia: Col. iii. 11. By the more civilized na-
tions of anti(|uity the Scythians were regarded as the
wildest of all barbarians; cf. Cic. in Verr. 2, ."), 58 § 150;
in Pison. 8, 18, Joseph, c. Apion. 2, 37, (> ; [Philo, leg.
ad Gaium § 2] ; Lcian. Tox. 5 sq. ; 2 Mace. iv. 47; 3
Alacc. vii. 5. [See Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. e. ; Hackett in
B.D. s. v. Scythians; Ilawlinson's llerod., App. to bk. iv.,
Essays ii. ami iii.; Vanieek, Fremdworter, s. v.]*
σ-κυθρωΐΓ09, -όν, also of three term. ; cf. Loli. ad Pliryn.
p. 105 [W. § 11, 1]. (σκυθρής and ώψ), of a sad and
ytoonnj countenance (opp. to φαώρός, Xen. mem. 3, 10,
4): Lk. xxiv. 17; of one who feigns or affects a sad
countenance, Mt. vi. 16. (Gen. xl. 7 ; Sir. xxv. 23 ; Grk.
writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
σ-κνλλω ; pf. pass. ptcp. (σκυλμίνος ; pres. mid. impv.
2 pers. sing, σκύλλου ; (σκϋλοι/, <[. v.) ; a. to skin,
flay, (Anthol.). b. to rem!, manyle, (.\eschyl. Pers.
577); to vex, trouble, annoy, (Ildian. 7, 3, 9 [4]): τινά,
Mk. v. 35 ; Lk. viii. 49 ; pass. fVxuXMfVoi, ( Viilg. vexati)
[R. V. distresseil], Mt. ix. 36 G L Τ Tr WII; mid. 10 yive
one's self trouble, trouble one's self: μη σκύλλου, Lk. vii.
6.•
σ-κϋλον [R"» GLT WH] also σκύλον ([so R««"Tr] cf.
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 44), -ου, τό, (fr. the obsol.
σκΰω, ' to pull off ', allied to ξύω, ξΰλον [but cf. Curtius
§113; Vanii-ek p. 1115]); a. a (beasfs) skin
stripped off, a pelt. b. the arm.') stripped q/f from an
enemy, spoils : plur. Lk. xi. 22. (Soph., Thuc, sqq. ;
Sept.) •
σ-κωληκό-βρωτο5, -ov, (σκώληξ and βιβρώσκω), eaten oj
worms : Acts xii. 23, cf. 2 Mace. ix. 9. (of a tree, Theo-
phr. c. pi. 5, 9, 1.)•
σκύληξ, -j/ieos, ό, [perh. akin to σκολιόί], a worm (Horn.
II. 13, 6.")4); spec, that kind which preys upon de.ad
bodies (Sir. .X. 1 1 ; xix. 3; 2.Macc. ix. 9; Anthol. 7, 4sn,
3 ; 10, 78, 3) : ό σκωΚηξ αυτών οΰ τίλίυτα, by a fig. bor-
rowed fr. Is. Lxvi. 24 (cf. Sir. vii. 17; Judith xvi. 17),
'their punishment after death will never cease' [σκ.
svmbohzing perh. the loathsomeness of the penalty],
.Mk.ix.44.4C, [.T WHom.Trbr. these two verse.s], 48.'
T^apayhiviK
581
σοώια
<Γμχφά78ινο9, -ι;, -or, (σμάραγ^ος, cf. άμίθΰστχνον, νακίν-
iiros, etc.), y/' emerald, made uf ciiitrald, [see the full,
word]; sc. Xi5os, Kev. iv. 3. [(Ix'ian.)]*
rpApa-ySos, -ow, ό [but apparently f em. in the earlier
writ., cf. Theophrast. lap. 4, 23 ; in Hdt. its gend. cannot
be determined ; cf. Ulep/i. Thesaur. s. v.], Lat. sviarar/-
tiaa, [A. V. emerald'], a transparent precious stone noted
esp. for its light green color : Kev. xxi. 19. [From Hdt.
down ; Sept. On the deriv. of the word see Vanicek,
Fremdwbrter, s. v. On its relation to our 'emerald'
(disputed by King, Antique Gems, p. 27 sqq.), see Riehm
HWB. s. V. 'Edelsteine', 17; Deane in the 'Bible Edu-
cator ', vol. ii. p. 350 sq.] *
σμύρνα, -ης, ή, llebr. lb, 11"D, myrrh, a bitter gum and
eostly perfume which exudes from a certain tree or
Ehrub in Arabia and Ethiopia, or is obtained by incis-
ions made in the bark: Mt. ii. 11 ; as an antiseptic it
was used in embalming, Jn. xix. 39. Cf. Hdt. 2, 40, 86;
3, 107 ; Theophr. hist. pi. 9, 3 sq. ; Diod. 5, 41 ; Plin. h.
n. 12, 33SI1.; [BB.DD. ; Birda-ood in the ' Bible Edu-
cator', vol. ii. p. 151 ; Lotc, Aram. Pflanzennam. § 185].*
Σμύρνα, -ης, ή, Smi/nta. an Ionian city, on the .lEgean
Sea, about 40 miles X. of Ephesus; it had a harbor, and
flourished in trade, commerce, and the arts ; now Ismir
[B15.DD.] : Rev. i. 11 ; ii. s. Tdf. after cod. X [(cf. cod.
Bezae, ed. Scrivener, p. xlviii.)] has adopted the form
Ζμΰρν., found also occasionally on coins and in inscrr. ;
cf Kiihner i. p. 200 e. ; [Tdf.'s note on Rev. i. 11 ; and see
Σ, σ. Γ, sub fin.; Bp. Li/lilft. Ignat. ii. 3.'il note].*
Σμυρναίος, -ου, 6, ή, of or hehmging to Snii/rna, an in-
labilanl of Smi/rna : Rev. ii. 8 Rec. [(Find., Hdt.)] *
σ-μνρνίζω: ((τμίφνα, q. v.); 1. intrans. lo be like
wiyrrh (Diosc. 1, 79). 2. lo mix and so flavor with
myirh : oivos (σμνρνισμΐνοί (pf. pass, ptcp.) wine [A. V.
minglei] with myrrh (Vulg. murratum vinum), i. e. flavored
or (Plin. h. n. 14, 15) made fragrant with myrrh: Mk. xv.
23. But since the ancients used to infuse myrrh into
wine in order to give it a more agreeable fragrance and
flavor, we must in this matter accept Matthew's account
(xxvii. 34, viz. 'mingled with gall') as by far the more
prol)able ; [but see χολή, 2].*
Σό8ομα, -ων, τά, (ut?), Sodom, a city respecting the
location and the destruction of which see ΓΛμορρα [and
(in addition to reff. there given) McC. and S. s. v. Sodom ;
SchafF-Herzog ib.]: Mt. x. 15; xi. 23 sq.; Mk. vi. 11 (R
L in br.) ; Lk. x. 12 ; xvii. 29 ; Ro. Lx. 29 ; 2 Pet. ii. 6 ;
Jude 7 ; Rev. xi. 8.•
Σολομών (so [R"!»"!» Γτ Lin Lk. xii. 27; RLTrAVH
in Acts vii. 47 (cf. Tdf. on Mt. vi. 29)]) and Σολομών [so
R G L Τ Tr WH in Mt. i. 7 ; vi. 29 ; R""' Τ Tr W'll in
Lk. xii. 27; G in Acts vii. 47 ; (2α\ωμών Tdf. in Acts vii.
4 7)], -ώη-οΓ (so Rec. uniformly ; [LT WH in Acts iii. U;
T. 1 2 ; L in Mt. i. 6 also]), and -<5i/or (so [G L Τ Tr WH
in Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31 ; Jn. x. 23 ; (ί Τ Tr WH in Mt.
Le; GTrin Acts iii. 11 ; v. 12]; the forms ^v, -««ot^
■re undoubtedly to be preferred, cf. [Tdf. Proleg. pp.
104, 110; WH. App. p. 158]: W. 67 (65); B. 16 (H
■q.)), 0, (rio'^C', i. e. 'pacific', Irenaeus. Germ. Fned-
rich, Eng. Frederick), Solomon, the son of David by
Bathsheba the wife of Uriah; he succeeded his father,
becoming the third king of Israel (b. c. 1015-975 [ace.
to the commonly accepted chronology ; but cf. the arU
' Zeitrechnung ' in Riehm's HWB. (esp. p. 1x23 S(i.)]),
built the temple at Jerusalem, and was distinguished for
his magnificence, splendor, and wisdom : Mt. i. 6 sq. ; vL
29 ; xii. 42; Lk. \l 31 ; xii. 27 ; Jn. x. 23 ; Acts iii. 11 ;
V. 12; vii. 4 7.•
o-opos, -oO. ij, an urn or receptacle for keeping the bones
of the dead (Hom. II. 23, 91) ; α coβn (Gen. 1. 2G ; Hdt.
1, 68; 2, 78; Arstpli., Aeschin., Plut., al.) ; the funeral-
couch or bier on which the Jews carried their dead forth to
burial [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Coflin ; Edersheim, Jesus
the Messiah, i. 555 sq.] : Lk. vii. 14.*
σ05, -ή, -0», possess, pron. of the 2d pers. ; fr. Hom.
down ; tliy, thine : Mt. vii. 3, 22 ; xiii. 27 ; .xxiv. 3 ; Mk.
ii. 18; Lk. XV. 31; xxii. 42; Jn. iv.42 [here Tr mrg. WH
rarg. read the personal σου] ; xvii. G, 9, 10, 17 ; xviii.35;
Aetsv.4; xxiv. 2 (.!), 4: 1 Co. viii. 1 1 ; xiv. IG; Philem.
14 : oi σοί sc. μαθηταΐ, Lk. v. 33; absol. oj σοι, thy kins-
folk, thy friends, ilk. v. 19; το σαν, what is thine, Mt.
.XX. 14; XXV. 25; plur. τά σά [.Λ.. Λ^ tliy goods; cf. W.
592 (551)], Lk. vi. 30. [Cf. W. § 22, 7 sqq.; B. 115
(101) sqq.]•
σον5άρίον, -ου, τό, (a Lat. word, sudarium, fr. sudor,
sweat; cf. B. IS (IG)), a handkerchief, i.e. a cloth for
wiping the perspiration from the face and for cleaning
the nose: Lk. xix. 20; Acts xix. 12; also used in swath-
ing the head of a corpse [\. V. na/ikia'], Jn. xi. 44 ; xx.
7. [Cf. BB.DD. s. V. Handkerchief.]•
Σουσάννα, -ης [cf. Β. 17 (15)], ή, (n"^ic; a lily), Su-
sanna, one of the women that attended Jesus on his
journeys : Lk. viii. 3.•
σοφ(α. -as, ή, (σοφοί), Ilebr. Π"ρ3Π, wisdom, broad and
full iuielligence, [fr. Hom. down]; used of the knowl-
edge of very diverse matters, so that the shade of mean-
ing in which the word is taken must be discovered from
the context in every particular case. a. the wis-
dom which belongs to men : Univ., Lk. ii. 40, 52; si)ec.
the varied knowledge of things human and divine, ac-
quired by acuteness and experience, and summed up in
maxims and proverbs, as was η σοφία rov ^ολομώνος, Mt.
xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31 ; the science and learning τώι» Αίγν
irriav. Acts vii. 22 [cf. W. 227 (213) n. ; B. § 134, 6] ; the
art of interpreting dreams and always giving the sagest
advice, .\cts vii. 10 ; the intelligence evinced in discov-
ering the meaning of some mysterious number or vision.
Rev. xiii. 18; xvii. 9; skill in the management of af-
fairs. Acts vi. 3 ; a devout and proper prudence in in-
tercourse ivith men not disciples of Christ. Col. iv. 5 ;
skill and discretion in imparting Christian truth, Coh i.
28; iii. 16; [2 Pet. iii. 15]; the knowledge and prac-
tice of the requisites for godly and upright living. .las.
i. 5; iii. 13, 17; with which σηφία άνωθ(ν κατίρχομίνη is
put in contrast the σοφία (πίγ^ιος, ψυχική. 8αιμονιώ5ης,
such as is the craftiness of envious and quarrelsome
men, Jas. iii. 15, or σαρκική σοφία (see σαρκικοί, 1),
σοφία
582
στταρ'/ανοω
craftiness, 2 Co. i. 12 (for the context shows that it does
not differ essentially from the πανουιτγία of iv. 2; in
Grk. writ, also σοφία is not infreij. used of shrewdness
and cunning; cf. I'assow [or L. and S.] s. v. 2); the
knoΛv•le(lge and skill in affairs requisite for the successful
defence of the Christian cause against hostile accusa-
tions, Lk. xxi. 15; an acquaintance with divine things
and human duties, joined to a power of discoursing con-
cerning them and of interpreting and ai)pl_ving sacred
Scrijiture, Mt. xiii. 54; Mk. vi. 2 ; Acts vi. 10; the wis-
dom or instruction Avith wliich John the Baptist and
Jesus taught men the way to obtain salvation, Mt. xi.
19; Lk. vii. 35, (on these pass, see δ«αώω, 2). In Paul's
Epp. : a knowledge of the divine plan, previously hidden,
of providing salvation for men by the expiatory death
of Christ, 1 Co. i.3U; ii. 6; Eph. i. 8 [W. Ill (105 sq.)];
)ience all the treasures of wisdom are said to be hidden
in Christ, Col. ii. 3; w. the addition of 6eou (gen. of the
author), 1 Co. i. 24 ; ii. 7 ; πνίυιιατικη. Col. i. 9 ; πνβΟμα
σοφίας κ. άΐΓο<α\ΰψ€ω!, Eph. i. 1 7 ; Xoyof σοφία!, the
ability to discourse elotjuently of this wisdom, 1 Co. xii.
8 ; opposed to this Λvisdom is — the empty conceit of
wisdom which men make a parade of, a knowledge more
specious than real of lofty and hidden subjects : such as
the theosophy of certain Jewish Christians, Col. ii. 23 ;
the philosophy of the Greeks, 1 Co. i. 21 sq. ; ii. 1 ; with
τοΰ κόσμου adiled, 1 Co. i. 20 ; iii. 1 9 ; τοΰ αΙωνος τούτου,
. Co. ii. ti ; τώι> σοφών, 1 Co. i. 19 ; ανθρώπων, 1 Co. ii. 5,
■in each of these last pass, the word includes also the
rhetorical art, such as is taught in the schools), cf.
Frilzsche, Rom. vol. i. p. 67 sq. ; σοφία τοΰ >όγου, the
wisdom which shows itself in speaking [R. Λ'. iciai/om of
u'ori/.s], the art of the rhetorician, 1 Co. i. 1 7 : Xoyot
(άνθμωπίνης [so R in vs. 4 (all txts. in 13)]) σοφίας, dis-
course conformed to philosophy and the art of rhetoric,
1 Co. ii. 4, 13. b. supreme intelligence, such as be-
longs to God : Rev. vii. 12, also to Christ, exalted to
God's right hand, Rev. v. 12; the wisdom of God as
evinced in forming and executing his counsels, Ro. xi.
33 ; with the addition of τοΰ icoO, as manifested in the
formation and government of the world, and to the Jews,
moreover, in the Scriptures, 1 Co. i. 21 ; it is called
πολυποίκιλος from the great variety of ways and methods
by ivhich he devised and achieved salvation throu<;h
Christ, Eph. iii. 10. In the noteworthy pass. Lk. xi. 49
(where Christ ascribes to ' the wisdom of God ' what in
the parallel, Mt. xxiii. 34, he utters himself), the words
η σοφία τοΰ fleoG (Hrfi/ seem to denote the wisrlom of God
whicli is operative and emhoilied as it were in Jesus, so
that the primitive Christians, when to comfort them-
selves under persecution they recalled the saying of
Christ, employed that formula of quotation [cf. 1 Co. i.
24, 30, etc.]; but Luke, in ignorance of this fact, took
the phrase for a part of Christ's savins:. So Eusebius
(h. e. 3, 32, 8), perhaps in the words of Hegesippus, calls
those who had personally heard Christ οί αϋταΐς άκοαΐς
της fvufov σ»φίας έπακονσαι κατηξιωμίνοι; cf. Grimm
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1853, p. 332 sga. fFor other
explanations of the phenomenon see the Comm. on Lk.
1. c. Cf. SchUrer, Zeitgesch. § 33, V. 1 and reff.] •
[Stn. : on the relation of σοφία to yvwais see yvuais, fin.
" While σοφ. is ' mental excellence in its hij;liest and fullest
sense ' (Aristot. eth. Nic. 6, 7), auvtats and <ρρ6νησι$ are both
derivative and special, — appUcatious of σοφία to details: σύν.
critical, apprehending the bearing of things, φρόν prac-
tical, suggesting lines of action " ( Up. Lghtft. on Cul. i. 9) ;
but cf. Meyer on Col. L c. ; Schmidt, ch. 13 § 10; eh. 147 § 8.
See σοφός, tin.]
ο-οφίζω : 1 aor. inf. σοφίσαι; (σοφός) ; 1. Ιο make
tcise, teack : τινά, 2 Tim. iii. 15 (Ps. xviii. (xix.) 8; ίσύφι-
σάς μ( την ϊντολήν σου, I's. cxviii. (cxix.) 98 ; οΰτ€ τ» ναυ-
τιλίης σισοφισμινος, οϋτ( τι νηων, lies. ορρ. 647). 2.
iMid. in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down, mostly as depon. to
become wise, to have understanding, {ϊσοφίσατο ύπΐρ πάν
τας ανθρώπους, 1 Κ. iv. 27 (31) ; add, Eccl. ii. 15, etc.;
freq. in Sir.) ; to invent, play the sophist ; to devise cleverly
or cunningly : pf. pass. ptcp. σ^σοφισμίνοι μϋθοι, 2 Pet.
i. 16. [Co.MP. : κατα-σοφίζομαι-Ί '
σοφόϊ, -ή, -όν, (akin to σαφής and to the Lat. sapio,
sapiens, sapor, 'to have a taste', etc.; Curtius § 628;
[Vanitek p. 991]), Sept. for Ώ3Π ; [fr. Theogn., Pind.,
Aeschyl. down] ; tvise,'i.e. a. skilled, expert: eij rt,
Ro. xvi. 19; of artificers (cf. Grimm, Exeg. Hdbch. on
Sap. [vii. 21] p. 151): άρχιτίκτων, 1 Co. iii. 10; Is. UL
3, {δημιουργός, of God, Xen. mem. 1,4, 7). b. wise,
i.e. skilled in letters, cultivated, learned: Ro. i. 14, 22;
of the Greek philosophers (and orators, see σοφία, a.),
1 Co. i. 19 sq. 26 sq. ; iii. 18 sq. [20]; of the Jewish
theologians, Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21 ; of Christian teach-
ers, Mt. xxiii. 34. c. wise in a practical sense, i. e.
one who in action is governed hy piety and integrity : Eph.
V. 1 5 ; Jas. iii. 1 3 ; and accordingly is a suitable per-
son to settle private quarrels, 1 Co. vi. 5. d.
wise in a philosophic sense, forming the best plans and us-
ing the best means for their execution : so of God, Ro. xvi.
27, and Rec. in 1 Tim. i. 17; Jude 25; σοφώτ€ρον. con-
tains more wisdom, is more sagaciously thought out,
1 Co. i. 25.•
[SvN. : σοφός, συνετός, ψρόνι μος : σοφός wise, see'
above; συνετός intelligent, denotes one who can ' put things
together' (auvifVai), who has insight and comprehension,
φρόνιμος prudent (A. V. uniforndy, ivise), denotes primarily
one who has quick and correct perceptions, hence ' discreet,'
' circumspect,' etc. ; cf. Schmidt ch. 147. See σοφία, fin.]
ΣίΓονία, -at, ή. Spain, in the apostolic age the whole
peninsula S. of the P\Tenees : Ro. χ v. 24, 28. ([W. 25] ;
the more com. Grk. form is 'Ισπανία, 1 ^lacc. viii. 3, [af>-
parently the Phoenician or Lat. name for 'Ιβηρία; cf.
Pape, Eigennamen, s. vv.].) *
σ-παράσ-σω ; 1 aor. ('σπάραξα ; to convulse [al. tear'] :
Tira, Mk. i. 26 ; ix. 20 R G Tr txt., 26 ; Lk. ix. 39; see
ρήγνυμι, c. (τας γνάθους. Arstph. ran. 424 ; τας τρίχας,
Diod. 19, 34 ; in various other senses in Grk. writ.)
[CoMP. : συν- σπαράσσω.^ *
στταργανόω, -ώ : 1 aor. (σπαργάνωσα : pf. pass. ptcp.
(σπαργανωμίνος ; (σπάργανον a swathing band) ; to wrap
στταταΧάω
583
στΓβρμα
in swaaanng-clothes : an infant juet bom, Lk. iL 7, 12.
(Ezek. xvi. 4 ; [Eur., Aristot.], Hippocr., Plut., al.) *
σ-ιταταλάω, -ά ; 1 aor. (σπατάΚησα; (ajrardXij, riotous
living, luxury) ; to live luxuriously, lead a voluptuous life,
[_give one's self to pleasurej : 1 Tim. v. 6 ; Jas. v. 5. (Prov.
xxL\. 21 ; Am. vi. 4 [in both these pass, καταιητ. ; Ezek.
xvi. 49] ; Sir. xxi. 15; Barnab. ep. 10, 3 ; Folyb. excrpt.
Vat. p. 451 [i.e. 37, 4, 6 (ed. Didot)], and occasionally
in later and inferior writ.)•
σ-πάω, -ώ : 1 aor. mid. ('σπασάμην ; [cogn. w. άa^τάζoμat
(to draw to one's self, embrace, etc.), Eng. spasm, etc.] ;
fr. Horn, down ; Sept. chiefly for 'I'jE' ; to draw : mid.
with μάχαφαν [of. B. § 135, 4], to draw one's sword, Mk.
xiv. 47 ; Acts xvi. 27, (Num. xxii. 31 ; την ρομφαίαν, 23 ;
Judg. ix. 54, etc.). [Co.MP. : άνα-, άνο-, Sto-, tm-, jrepi-
σττάω.] *
«nretpa [on the accent cf. B. 1 1 ; Chandler § 161 ; TJf.
Proleg.p. 102],ij,gen. -ης (Acts x. 1 ; x.\i. 31 ; xxvii. 1 ;
see [Trf/. Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p. 156; and] μά-
χαιρα, init.), [cogn. w. σττυρίί (q. v.)] ; a. Lat. spira ;
anything roUed into a circle or ball, anything wound,
roUed up, folded together. b. a military cohort
(Polyb. 11, 23, 1 Tpfis oTTclpas• τοϋτο Si «oXflTai τό σύν-
ταγμα των πίζων παρά 'Ρωμαίοις κοόρτίί), Ι. β. the tenth
part of a legion [i. e. about 600 men (i. e. legionaries), or
if auxiliaries either 500 or 1000; cf. Marquardt, Rdmisch.
Alterth. III. ii. p. 371. But surely τοΟτοτό σνιτα-/μα in
the quotation comprehends the rpels <nt. ; hence Polyb.
here makes a σττ. equal to a maniple, cf. 2, 3, 2 ; 6, 24, 5 ;
cf. Zonaras, Lex. p. 1664, σπ• • σύνταγμα διακοσίων άνΒρων.
On the other hand, " the later Grk. writ, almost uniform-
ly employ cnr. as the representative of cohors " (Smith,
Diet, of Antiq., ed. 2, s. v. exercitus, p. 500) ; and the
use of χίλίαρχος (which was the equiv. of trihuniis, the
commander of a cohort) in connection with it (Jn. xviii.
12; Acts x.xi. 31), together with the uniform rendering
of the word by cohors in the Lat. versions, warrants the
marg. " cohort " uniformly added in R. V. to the render-
ing band]: Mt. .xxvii. 27; Mk. xv. 16 ; Acts x. 1 ; xxi.
31 ; xxvii. 1, and often in .Josephus ; a maniple, or the
thirtieth part of a legion, often so in Polyb. [(see above)];
any band, company, or detachment, of soldiers (2 Mace.
viii. 23; Jud. xiv. 11) : Jn. xviii. 3, 12.*
o-ireipM ; [impf. 2 pers. sing, eaneipa, Mt. xiii. 27 Tr];
1 aor. eaiTfipa ; Pass., pres. cnrtipopai ; pf. pass. ptcp.
ΐσ-παρμίνο!', 2 aor. ίσττάρην; [deri\ed fr. the quick, jerky,
motion of the hand ; cf. our spurn (of the foot) ; Cur-
tius § 389] ; fr. Hesiod down ; Sept. for i'Tj ; to sow,
scatter seed; a. prop. : absol., Mt. vi. 26 ; xiii. 3 sq.
18 sq. ; Mk. iv. 3 sq. 14; Lk. viii. 5 ; .xii. 24 ; [Jn. v.
36 sq. (see in b.)]; 2Co.ix.l0; with an ace. of the thing,
as σπίρμα, ζιζάνια, κόκκον, [cf. Β. § 131, 5] : Mt. xiii. 24
sq. [but in 25 L Τ Tr WH have imaTt.'], 27, 37, 39; Mk.
iv. 32 ; Lk. viii. 5 ; 1 Co. xv. 36 sq. ; with specifications
of place: tls ray άκανθας, Mt. xiii. 22 ; Mk. iv. 18 ; en τω
άγρα, Mt. xiii. 24, [31] ; t'n-i τη: γηι, Mk. iv. 31 ; int w.
an ace. of place, Mt. xiii. 20, 23; Mk. iv. 16, 20; πάρα
την oSav, Mt. xiii. 19. b. in proverbial sayings :
abeol., Mt. XXV. 24, 26 ; Lk. xix. 21 sq. ; Jn. iv. 37 ; 2 Co.
ix. 6 ; τί. Gal. vi. 7, (on these sayings see θιρίζω, b.). in
comparisons : σπ(Ίρ(ΐν els την σάρκα, et's το πνιΰμα, (σαρξ
and πν(ϋμα are Ukened to fields to be sown), to do those
things which satisfy the nature and promptings of the
σαρξ or of the πν^ΰμα. Gal. vi. 8 ; τάι» \όγον, to scatter the
seeds of instruction, i. e. to impart instruction, Mk. iv.
14 sq.; ό \άγο! ό ίστταρμίνο! iv Tcis καρδίαα αίτων, the
ideas and precepts that have been implanted like seed
in their hearts, i. e. received in their hearts, ibid. 15
(where Tr txt. WH eis airois into their hearts, Τ L mrg.
ev ai/Toty) ; οντός €στιν ό παρά την όδον σπαρ€ίς, this one
experiences the fate of the seed sown by the wayside,
Mt. .xiii. 19 ; add, 20-23 ; Mk. iv. 16, 18, 20. το σώμα,
the body, which after death is committed like seed to the
earth, 1 Co. xv. 42-44 ; καρπον δικαιοσύνη:, i. e. that seed
which produces καρπον δικαιοσύνης [see καρπός, 2 b.], .Jas.
iii. 18 ; σπ(ίρ(ΐν τιν'ι τι, to give, manifest, something to
one, from whom we may subseejuently receive something
else akin to a harvest {θ(ρίζομ(ν), 1 Co. ix. 11. [Comp. :
δια-, (πι- σπίι'ρω.] *
σ-π•£κουλάτωρ, -epos (R G -ωρος [cf. Tdf. on Jlk. as be-
low]), <5, (the Lat. word speculator), a looker-out, spy,
scout; under the emperors an attendant and member of
the body-guard, employed as messengers, watchers, and
executioners (Sen. de ira 1, 16 centurio supplicio prae-
positus condere gladium speculatorem jubet; also de
benef. 3, 25) ; the name is transferred to an attendant of
Herod Antipas that acted as executioner: Mk. vi. 27.
Cf. Keim ii. 512 [Eng. trans, iv. 219; J. W. Galling in
Thes. Xov. etc. ii. p. 405 sq.] '
οττενδω: pres. pass, σπίνδομαι; (cf. Germ, spenden
[perh. of the ' tossing away ' of a liquid, Curtius § 296 ;
but cf. Yanicek p. 1245 sq.]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
^DJ ; to pour out as a drink-offering, make a libation; in
the N. T. σπίνδίσθαι, Ιο be offered as a libation, is figura-
tively used of one \vhose blood is poured out in a violent
death for the cause of God : Phil. ii. 1 7 (see θυσία, h.
fin.) ; 2 Tim. iv. 6.•
o-ircp|ia, -γοϊ, to, {σπιίρω, q. v.), fr. Hom. down, Hebr.
^pt, the seed (fr. which anything springs) ; a.
from which a plant germinates ; o. prop, the seed
i. e. the grain or kernel which contains within itself the
germ of the future plant: plur., Mt. xiii. 32; Jlk. iv.
31 ; 1 Co. XV. 38, (Ex. xvi. 31 ; IS. viii. 15) ; the sing.
is used collectively of the grains or kernels sown : Mt.
xiii. 24, 27, 37 sq. ; 2 Co. ix. 10 [here LTr «nropos]. β.
metaph. a seed i. e. a residue, or a few survivors reserved
as the germ of a new race (just as seed is kept from the
harvest for the sowing), Ro. ix. 29 after Is. i. 9, where
Sept. for T"ib', (so also Sap. xiv. 6 ; 1 Esdr. viii. 85 (87) ;
Joseph, antt. ί 1, 5, 3 ; 1 2, 7, 3 ; Plat. Tim. p. 23 c). b-
the semen virile ; a. prop. : Lev. χ v. 1 6-1 8 ; xviiL
20 sq., etc.; [prob. also Ileb. xi. 11, cf. καταβοΚή 1, and
see below]; often in prof. writ. By meton. the pro-
duct of this semen, seed, children, offspring, progeny;
family, race, posterity, (so in Grk. chiefly in the tragic
poets, cf. Pas.sow s. v. 2 b. ii. p. 1498 fL. and S. s. τ. IL
ηΓΐρμό\ό•γο<ί
584
σττλαγ^ι/ο»
S] ; and ;•-?! very often in the O. T. [cf. W. 1 7, 30]) ; bo
in the sing., either of one, or collectively of many: Ro.
ix. 7 s^. ; fit icaru JoXij» σηίρματοί (see [above, and] κατα-
/3αλή, 2), lieb. .\i. 1 1 ; άνιστάναι and ΐξανιστάναι σπίρμα
ηνί, Mt. xxii. -'4 ; ilk. .\ii. I S) ; Lk. .\.\. 28, (Gun. .xxxviii.
8); ?;(ίί>'σπ•ίρμα, Mt. xxii. 2S ; άφιί ναι σπίρμα rift, ^ik.
xii. 20-22 ; το σττ. τινόί, Lk. i. 5j; .In. vii. 42 ; viii. 33,
37 ; Acts iii. 25 ; vii. 5 sij. : xiii. 23 ; Ho. i. 3 ; [iv. 13] ;
ix. 7; xi. 1; 2 Co. xi. 22; 2 Tira. ii. 8; Heb. ii. IG; xi.
18; in plur. : rrait ΐκ βασιλικών σ-ικμμάτων, of royal de-
scent, Joseph, antt. S, 7, (i ; τ-ώκ ΆβραμιαΙων σπιρμάτων
απόγονοι, 4 ilacc. xviii. 1 ; i. q. tribes, races, άνθρωποι τ€
και άνθ^<^πωυ σηίρμασι νομοθ(τονμ(ν τα νϋν, Plat. legg. 9
p. «ba c. Hy a rabbinical method of interpreting, op-
posed to the usage of the Ilebr. jni, which signifies tlie
offspring whetlier consisting of one person or many,
Paul lavs such stress on the singular number in Gen. xiii.
15; xvii. 8 as to make it denote but one of .Abraham's
posterity, and that the Messiah: (Jal. iii. 16, also 11);
and yet, that the way in which Paul presses the singu-
lar here is not utterly at variance with the genius of the
Jewish-Greek language is evident from Άβραμιαίων σπερ-
μάτων dmJyuiOi, 4 .Macc. xviii. 1, where the |ihiral is used
of many descendants [(cf. Delilzsch, Br. a. d. Ubm. p. 16
note ■^; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. c.)]. το σπ. {'Αβραάμ) το
cK ToC νόμου, the seed which is such according to the de-
cision of the law, physical offspring [see νόμοι, 2
p. 428*], TO « πίστεως 'Αβρ. those who are called Abra-
ham's posterity on account of the faith by which they
are akin to him [see jrioris, 1 b. a. p. SIS'• and ck, II. 7],
Ro. iv. 16; add, 18; ix- 8; Gal. iii. 29; similarly Chris-
tians are called, in Rev. xii. 1 7, the σπίρμα of the church
(which is likened to a mother. Gal. iv. 26). β. wlinlecer
possesses vital force or lifc-giring poicer: το σπέρμα τοϋ
flioO [(but anarthrous)], the Holy ."^ijirit, the divine en-
ergy operating within the soul by which we are regener-
ated or made the τϊκνα τοΟ Beoi, 1 Jn. iii. 9.*
<ΓΤΓ€ρμ«λό'γοΐ, -ox, (σπίρμα, and λί'γω to collect) ; 1.
pichimi up seeds : used of birds, Plut. Demet. 28 ; Athen.
9 p. 387 f. ; esp. of llie crow or 'law thai picks up grain in
the fields (Gerra. SaatLralie), Arstph. av. 232, 579; Aris-
tot. h. a. 8, 3 p. 592'', 28, and other writ. 2. of men:
lounging about the market-place and picking up a subsis-
tence by whatever m<ig chance lo fall from the loads of mer-
chandise (Eustath. on Horn. Od. 5, 490 σπ(ρμο\όγοι• o'l
Ttepi τίχ εμπόρια κ. ayopas 8ιατρίβοντες δια ro άναλε-^εσθαι
τα e< των φορτίων απορρέοντα και δκΊ ζην εκ τούτωι/) ; hence,
heggarlij, abject, vile, (α parasite) ; getting a living by
flattery and buffoonery, Athen. 3 p. 85 f. ; Plut. mor. p.
456 d. ; subst. ό σπ. an empty talker, babbler, (Dem. p. 269,
19 ; Athen. 8 p. 344 c.) : Acts xvii. 18.*
e~irtuSu; inipf. εσπενδον; 1 aor. έσπευσα; (cogn. w.
Germ, sich sputen [cf. Eng. speed, Lat. siudeo; Vanicek
p. 1163; Pick iv. 2Γ9]); fr. Horn, down; Sept. for
1Π"3, also for Sn3, etc. ; 1. intrans. [cf. W. § 38,
1; B. 130, 4], to hasten: as often in the Grk. writ., foU.
by an inf. Acts x.x. 16 : ηΧθον σπεΰσαντεί, they came with
haste, Lk. ii. 16; σπενσαι κατάβηθι [Α. V. make haste
and come downj, κατέβη, Lk. xix. 5, 6 ; σπεΰσον κ. έξελθε,
[Α. V. maAe haste and yet thee quickly out]. Acts xxiL
18. 2. to desire earnestly: τι, 2 Pet. iii. 12; (Is.
xvi. 5 ; exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given by Passow s. v. 2
vol. ii. p. 1501 ; [L. and S. s. v. II.]).•
σ-ιτήλαιον, -ου, τά. (σπέο! [cavern; cf. Curtius § 11 1]),
a care, [den] ; Mt. xxi. 13 ; Mk. xi. 1 7 ; Lk. xix. 46 ; Jn.
xi. 38; Heb. xi. 3-< ; Rev. vi. 15. (Plat., Plut., Lcian.,
Ael., al. ; Sept. for Π•;;ρ.) *
(τπ-ιλάΐ, -(ίδυί, ή, a rock i/i the sea, ledge or reef, (Horn.
Od. 3, 298; 5, 401, and in other poets; Polyb., Diod.,
Joseph, b. j. 3, 9, 3) ; plur. trop. of men who by their
conduct damage others morally, wreck them as it were,
i. ([. σ«ίΐ'δίΐλα, [R. V. txt. hidden rocks], Jude 12 [here
LT I'r WH read oi (sc. όντες) σπ- Some (so R.V. mrg.)
make the word etjuiv. to the following ; see Rutherford
as there referred to.] *
(TiriXos [ WII σπίλοί (so Rutherford, Xew Phryn. p. 87 ;
L. and .S. s. v.); but see Tdf. Proleg. p. 102; Lipsius,
Gram. Untersuch. p. 42], -ου, ό, (Phryn. rejects this word
in favor of the .\ttic κηλίς; but σπίλοί is used by Jose[)h.,
Dion, llal., Plut., Lcian., Liban., Artemidor. ; see Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 28 [cf. W. 25]), a spot: trop. a fault, moral
blemish, Kph. v. 27 ; plur. of base and gluttonous men,
2 Pet. ii. 13.•
σίΓΐλόω, -ώ ; pf. pass. ptcp. έσπίΚωμένοί ; (σττΐλοί) ; to
defile, spot : τι, Jas. iii. G ; Jude 23. (Dion. Hal., Lcian.,
Heliod.; Sept.)•
«ΓίτλαγχνΙζομαι ; 1 aor. έσπλαγχνίσθην [cf. Β. 52 (45)];
(σπλάγχνον, q. V.) ; prop, to be moved as to one's bowels,
hence to be moved with compassion, have compassion, (for
the bowels were thought to be the seat of love and Jiity) :
absol., Lk. x. 33 ; xv. 20 ; σπλαγχνισθεί: with a finite
verb, Mt. xx. 3Λ; Mk. i. 41 ; Tti/of, to pity one (cf. W.
§30, 10 a. ; [B. §132, 15; but al. regard σπλ. in the foil,
example as used absol. and the gen. as depending on
Kvpios}), Mt. xviii. 27: eVi with dat. of the pers., Mu
xiv. 14 GLTTrWH; Mk. vi. 34 [RG]; Lk. vii. 13
(where Tdf. επί w. ace.) ; ε'πί τιι/α, Mt. xiv. 14 Rec; xv.
32 ; Mk. [vi. 34 L Τ Tr \VH] ; viii. 2 ; ix. 22 ; cf. W. § 33,
c. : [B. U.S.] ; περί tivos ότι, Mt. ix. 36. Besides, several
times in Test. xii. Patr. [e. g. test. Zab. §§ 4, 6, 7, etc.] ;
and in the N. T. Apocr. ; in Deut. xiii. 8 .Symm. ; [Ex.
ii. i; cod. Venet.] ; and in 1 S. xxiii. 21 incert. ; [Clem.
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 7 ; Ilerm. mand. 4, 3, 5]; έπισπλαγχνί-
ζομαι, Prov. xvii. 5; the act. σπλαγχνίζω is once used for
the .\ttic σπλαγχνεΰω, 2 Macc. vi. S. Cf. Bleek, Einl. ins
N. T. ed. 1, p. 75 [Eng. trans, ibid. ; ed. 3 (by Mangold)
p. 90; W. 30,33, 92 (87)].•
σ-ιτλάγχνον, -ου, τό, and (only so in the N. T.) plur.
σπλάγχνα, -ω», τά, Ilebr. □'rpn"), bowels, intestines (the
heart, lungs, liver, etc.) ; a. prop. : Acts i. 18 (2
Macc. ix. 5 S(i. ; 4 Macc. v. 29, and in Grk. writ. fr. Horn.
down). b. in the Grk. poets fr. Aeschyl. down the
bowels were regarded as the seat of the more violent pas-
sions, such as anger and love ; but by the Hebrews as the
seat of the tenderer affections, esp. kindness, benevo-
lence, comnassion, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. i. 8; W. 18];
στΓογγοί
585
στασκ
hence i. q. our heart, \jender mercieii, affections, etc. (of.
B. ϋ. Am. ed. s. v. Bowels)]; 1 Jn. iii. 17 (on which see
icXeiw); 2Co.vi.l2; Phil. ii. 1 [here G LTTr WH « r.t
a77\ayxva•, B. 81 (71), cf. Green lOU; Bp. Lghtft. ad loc],
av\ay\va Ai'our (gen. of quality [cf. W. 611 (568); so
Te.-it. -xii. Patr., test. Zab. §§ 7, 8]), a heart in which
mercy resides, [heart of mere//], Lk. i. 78 ; also σττλ. οίκ-
τιρμον [Uec. -μώΐ'], Col. iii. 12; τα airKay^^ifa αΐτοΰ τηρκτ'
σοτίμως e f υμάς carlv, his heart is the more abundantly
devoted to \όιι, 2 Co. vii. 15; €πιπυθω νμάς ev σπλάγχνοις
Χρίστου Ίησον, in the heart [Κ. V. lender riiercits] of
Christ, i. e. prompted by the same love as Christ Jesus,
Phil. i. 8 ; auanavfiv τα σττλ. rii-os, to refresh one's soul or
heart, Philem. 7, 20; τά σπλάγχνα ημών, ray very heart,
i. e. whom I dearly love, Philem. 12 (so Darius calls his
mother and children his oicn bowels in Curt. 4, 14, 22.
meum corcidum, Plant. Cas. 4, 4, 14; meum cor, id. I'oen.
1,2,154; [cf.Bp. l.ghtft. on Philem. I.e.]). The Hebr.
D"?ni is translated by the Sept. now οίκτιρμοί, Ps. -x.xiv.
(xxv.) 6; .\xxi.\. (xl.) 12, now «Xeos, Is. xhii. G; once
trn\ayx^iia, Prov. xii. 10.*
«nroyyos, -ου, ό, [perh. akin \s fungus ; Curtius § 575],
fr. Ilom. down, sponge : Mt. xxvii. 48; Mk. xv. 36; Jn.
xix. 2;).•
<nro8os, -oO, ψ fr. Ilom. down, ashes: Heb. ix. 13; ΐν
σάκκω κ. σποδώ κάθημαί, to sit clothed in sackcloth and
covered with ashes (exhibiting the tokens of grief, cf.
Jon. iii. 6 ; Is. Iviii. 5 : Ixi. 3 ; Jer. vi. 26 ; Esth. iv. 1,3;
1 Mace. iii. 47; cf. σάκκος, b.) : Mt. xi. 21 ; Lk. x. 13.*
(ΠΓορά, -as, ή. (σπίίρω, 2 pf. ΐσπυρα), see'l : 1 Pet. i. 23
[(i. q. (I soic'iu(j, fig. origin, etc., f-r. Aeschyl., Plat., down)].*
(r-iropi|U>s, -ov. (σπίίρω, 2 pf. ίσπορα), βΙ for solving,
sown, (Xen., Diod., al.) ; τά σπάμιμα, xown feltls, growing
crops, [A.V. (exc. in Mt.) corn-fields'], (Geop. 1, 12, 37) :
Mt. xii. 1; Mk. ii. 23; Lk. vi. 1.*
cnropos, -ov, 6, (ση^ίρω, 2 pf. ίσπορα) ; 1. a solo-
ing (Hdt., Xen., Theophr., al.). 2. seed (used in
sowing) : Mk. iv. 2ΰ sq. ; Lk. viii. 5, 11 ; 2 Co. ix. 10' [L
Tr, 10»], (Deut. xi. 10; Theocr., Plut., al.).*
σπουδάζω; fut. σπουδάσω (a later form for the early
-άσομαί, cf. Kriiger § 40 s. v., vol. i. p. 190; B. 53 (46);
[W. 89(85); \''eitch s. v.]) ; 1 aor. {'σπούδασα; (σπουδή,
q. V.) ; fr. Soph, and Arstph. down; a. to hasten,
male haste: foil, by an inf. (cf. σπ«!8ω, 1), 2 Tim. iv. 9,
21 ; Tit. iii. 12, [al. refer these exx. to b. ; but cf. Holtz-
mann, Com. on 2 Tim. ii. 15]. b. to exert one's self,
endeavor, give diligence : foil, by an inf., Gal. ii. 10 ; Eph.
iv. 3: 1 Th. ii. 17; 2 Tim. ii. 15; Heb. iv. U; 2 Pet. i.
10; iii. 14: foil, by ace. with inf. 2 Pet. i. 15.•
(Γΐτουδαϊο$. -a, -υν, (σππυδή), fr. Hdt. down, active, dili•
gent, zealous, earnest: tv τινι, 2 Co. viii. 22; compar.
rnovSaiOTepos, ibid. 17 [W. 242 sq. (227)], 22 [W. § 35,
1]; neut. as adv. (Lat. sludiosius), very diligently [cf. B.
§123, 10], 2Tim. i. 17 RG.'
o-rov8aC<i>s, adv. of the preceding ; a. haslily, icith
hcL<!te: compar. σπουδαιοτ/ρω? [cf. B. 69 (61); W. § 11,
2 c.], Phil. ii. 28 [W. 243 (228)]. b. diligendy: 2
Tim. i. 1 7 L Τ Tr WH ; Tit. iii. 13 ; earnestly, Lk. vii. 4.•
«πτουΒή, -^5. ή, (trrtfiSa, [q. v.]), fr. Horn, down ; 1.
haste : μιτά (rnovSijs, with haste, ilk. vi. 2 J ; Lk. i. 39, (Sap.
xix. 2; Joseph, antt. 7, 9, 7 ; Hdian. 3, 4, 1 ; 6,4,3). 2.
earnestness, diligence : univ. earnestness in accomplist
ing, promoting, or striving after anything, Ro. xii. 11;
2 Co. vii. 11, 12; viii. 7 scj. ; ϊν σπουδή, with diligence,
Ro. xii. 8 ; σπουΒ^ν (νδ^ίκνυσθοί. Heb. vi. 1 1 ; πασαι^ σπον
Si/v ποιάσθαι (see πούω, I. 3 p. 520'' but.), to give all dili-
gence, interest one's self most earnestly, Jude 3 ; σπου^ηψ
παρ£ί(τφίμ€ΐν. 2 Pet. i. 5 ; ή σπ. νπίρ τίνος, earnest care
for one, 2 Co. viii. IG {wepi Tti/os, [Uem. 90, 10] ; Diod.
1, 75).•
oTTupCs [L WH σφυρί!, q. v.],-ifiof, ή, (allied to σπ<'ψα,
q. V. ; hence, something wound, twisted, or folded togeth-
er), a reed basket, [i. e. a plaited basket, a lunch basket,
hamper; cf. B.D. s. v. Basket] : Mt. xv. 37 ; xvi. 10 ; Mk.
viii. 8, 20; Acts ix. 25. (Hdt., Theophr., ApoUod., Al-
ciphr. 3, ep. 56 ; al.). See σφυρί!.*
στά5ιον, -ου, plur. τά στάδια [Jn. vi. 19 Tdf.], and ol
στάδιοι (so [.Mt. xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.] ; Lk. xxiv. 13 ;
Jn. vi. 19 [not Tdf.] ; Rev. xxi. 16 [R«" G L WHmrg.];
2 Mace. xi. 5 ; xii. 10, 29 ; in the other pass, the gend. is
not apparent [see Tdf. Proleg. p. 117; WH. A pp. p.
157] ; Kriiger § 19, 2, 1), (ΣΤΛίΙ, ΐστι;μι; hence prop.,
' established,' that which stands fast, a • stated ' distance,
a ' fixed standard ' of length), a stadium, i. e. 1. a
measure of length comprising 600 (Jrk. feet, or 625 Ro-
man feet, or 125 Roman paces (I'lin. h. n. 2, 23 (21), 85),
hence one eighth of a Roman mile [i. e. 606i Eng. feet
(about 15 lu. less than one fifth of a kilom.)]; the space
or distance of that length [A. V. a furlong] : [Mt. xiv.
24 Tr txt. WH txt.] ; Lk. xxiv. 13 ; Jn. vi. 19 ; xi. 18;
Rev. xiv. 20; xxi. 16. 2. α race-course, i.e. place
in which contests in running were held ; the one who
outstripped the rest, and reached the goal first, receiv-
ing the prize : 1 Co. ix. 24 [here .Λ. V. race]. Courses
of this dej-cription were to be found in most of the larger
Grk. cities, and were, like that at Olympia, 600 Greek
feet in length. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Stadium; Grundl
in Schenkei s. v., vol. v. 375 sq. ; [BB. DD. s. v. Games].•
στάμνοϊ, -ου(ό), ή, (fr. ιστημι [cf . Curtius § 216]), among
the Greeks an earthen jar, into which wine was drawn off
for keeping (a process called κατααταμιΊζίΐν), but also
used for other purposes. The Sept. employ it in Ex.
xvi. 33 a? the rendering of the Hebr. TMyyi, that little
jar [or "pot "] in which the manna was kept, laid up in
the ark of the covenant ; hence in Heb. ix. 4, and Philo
de consr. erud. grat. § 18. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 400;
[W. 2.•!].•
στασχαστήϊ, -οΰ, ό, (^στασιάζω), the author of or a
participant in an insurrection : Mk. xv. 7 LTTrWII
([Diod.fr. 10, 11,1 p. 171,6 Dind.; Dion. Hal. ii. 1199];
Joseph, antt. 14, 1, 3; Ptolem.). The earlier Greek»
used στασιώτι;5 [Moeris s. v.].•
σ -rio-is, -fojf, ή, (Ιστημι) ; 1. a Standing, station,
state : ΐχαν στάσιν, to stand, exist, have stability, Lat. locum
habere, [R. V. is yet standing], Heb. ix. 8 (Polyb. 5, 5,
3). 2. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, an insurrection
στατήρ
586
στ€λλω
(cf. Germ. Aufslanrl) : Mt. xv. 7; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25; Acts
xlx. 40 [sue σήμιρον, sub fin.] ; Kti/fii/ στάσι» [L Τ Tr
Wn oTUafts] Tivi, [a mover of insurrections among i. e.]
against [cf. W. 208 (I9G)] one, Acts xxiv. 5. 3.
strife, dissension, (Aescliyl. Pers. 738; Diog. Laert. 3,
51): Acts XV. 2; .x.xiii. 7, 10.*
στατήρ, -rjpos, ό, (fr. ΐστημι, to place in the scales, weigh
out [i. e. 'the weigher' (V'anicek p. 1126)]), a stater, a
coin ; in the N. T. a silver stater equiv. to four Attic
or two Alexandrian drachmas, a Jewish shekel (see
διδραχμοι-) : ilt. xvii. 27.*
σταυροί, -οΰ, 6, [fr. ίστι//ιι (root sta) ; cf. Lat. slauro,
Eng. s'ajf (see. Skeat, Etym. Diet. s. v.); Curtius § 216;
Vanicek p. 1 1 26] ; 1. an upright stake, esp. a pointed
one, (Horn., Ildt., Thuc, Xen.). 2. α cross; a.
the well-known instrument of most cruel and ignomin-
ious punishment, borrowed by the Greeks and Romans
from the Phcenicians; to it were alBxed among the
Romans, down to the time of Constantine the Great, the
guiltiest criminals, particularly the basest slaves, rob-
bers, the authors and abetters of insurrections, and oc-
casionally in the provinces, at the arbitrary pleasure of
the governors, upright and peaceable men also, and even
Roman citizens themselves ; cf. Win. RW^B. s. v. Kreuzi-
gung; Merz in Ilerzog ed. 1 [(cf. Schaff-Herzog) also
Schultze in Herzog ed. 2], s. v. Kreuz ; Keim iii. p. 409
S(i<i. [Eng. trans, vi. 138; BB.DD. s. ν v. Cross, Cru-
cifi.xion ; 0. Zockler, Das Kreuz Christi (GUtersloh,
1875) ; Eng. trans. Lond. 1878 ; Fulda. Das Kreuz u. d.
Kreuzigung (Bresl. 1878) ; Ederslieim, Jesus the Messiah,
ii. 582 sqq.]. This horrible punishment the innocent
Jesus also suifered : Mt. xxvii. 32, 40, 42 ; Mk. xv. 21, 30,
32 ; Lk. xxiii. 26 ; Jn. xix. 17, 19, 25, 31 ; Col. ii. 14 ; Hel).
xii. 2 ; θάνατος σταυρόν, Phil. ii. 8 ; το αίμα τον στανρον,
blood shed on the cross. Col. i. 20. b. i. q. Ike cruci-
fixion which Christ underwent : Gal. v. 1 1 (on which see
σκάι/δαλον, sub fin.) ; Eph. ii. IG ; with the addition of τον
Χριστοί, 1 Co. i. 17; the saving power of his crucifixion,
Phil. iii. 18 (on which see ΐχθρός, fin.) ; Gal. vi. 14; τω
στανρω τοΟ Χρίστου Βιώκΐσθαι, to encounter persecution
on account of one's avowed belief in the saving efficacy
of Christ's crucifixion, (Jal. vi. 12; ό λόγος 6 τοϋ σταυρού,
the doctrine concerning the saving power of the death
on the cross endured by Christ, 1 Co. i. 18. The judi-
cial usage which compelled those condemned to cruci-
fixion themselves to carry the cross to the place of
punishment (Plut. de sera numinis vindict. c. 9 ; Artem.
oneir. 2, 56, cf. Jn. xix. 1 7), gave rise to the proverbial
expression a'peiv or \αμβάν(ΐν or βάσταζαν τον σταυρόν
αυτού, which was wont to be used of those who on behalf
of God's cause do not hesitate cheerfully and manfully
to bear persecutions, troubles, distresses, — thus recall-
ing the fate-'of Christ and the spirit in which he encoun-
tered it (cf. Dleek, Synop. Erkl. der drei ersten Evangg.
L p. 439 sq.) : Mt. x. 38; xvi. 24 ; Mk. viii. 34; x. 21
TR L in br.] ; xv. 21 ; Lk. ix. 23 ; xiv. 27.•
«Γταυρό», -ώ; fut. στανρώσα; 1 aor. {σταύρωσα; Pass.,
pres. σταΰρομαι ; perfect ΐσταΰρωμαι ; 1 aor. ϊσταυρώ-
θην; (σταυροΓ, q. v.) ; 1. to stake, drive down stakes:
Thuc. 7, 25, 6 [here oi ^υρακοσιοι ίσταύρωσαν, which the
Scholiast renders σταυρούς κατίπηξαν]. 2. to for-
tify with driven stakes, to palisade : a place, Thuc. 6,
100; Diod. 3. to crucify {\\Α%. crucifiyo): τινά, a.
prop.: Alt. xx. 19; xxiii. 34; xxvi. 2; xxvii. 22, [23], 26,
31,35,38; xxviii. 5; Mk. .\v. 13-15, 20, 24 sq. 27 ; xvi.
6; Lk.x.\iii. 21,23,33; xxiv. 7, 20; Jn. xix. C, 10, 15 sq.
18,20,23,41; Acts ii. 36 ; iv. 10; iCo. i. 13, 23; ii. 2,
[8] ; 2 Co. xiii. 4 ; Gal. iii. 1 ; Rev. xi. 8, (Add. to Esth.
viii. 13 [34] ; for rybp,, to hang, Esth. vii. 9. Polyb. 1, 86,
4; Joseph, antt. 2, 5,4; 17, 10, 10; Artem. oneir. 2, 53
and 56 ; in native Grk. writ, άνασταυρούν is more com-
mon), b. metaph. : t^w σάρκα. In crucify the flesh,
destroy its power utterly (the nature of the fig. implying
that the destruction is attended with intense pain [but
note the aor.]), Gal. v. 24; ϊσταΰρωμαι tivl, and ίσταΰ•
ρωταί μοί τι, I have been crucified to something and it has
been crucified to me, so that we are dead to each other,
all fellowship and intercourse between us has ceased.
Gal. vi. 14. [CoMP. : ava-, συ{ν)- στανράω.'\*
σταφυλή, -ης, ή, fr. Ilom. down, Sept. for 2ipj grapes,
a bunch of grapes : Mt. vii. 16 ; Lk. vi. 44 ; Rev. xiv. 18
[cf. Sept. as referred to s. v. βότρυςί.*
στάχυϊ, -υος [cf. Β. 14], ό, [connected w. the r. sla,
Ϊστημι; Curtius p. 721], fr. Ilom. down, Sept. for Γν]2ψ,
an ear of corn (or growing grain) : Mt. xii. 1 ; Mk. ii.
23 ; iv. 28 ; Lk. vi. 1.*
Στάχυϊ, -υος, 6, [cf. the preceding word], Stachys, the
name of a man [cf. Bp. Lghtf t. on PhOip. p. 1 74] : Ro.
xvi. 9.•
oTeyi], -i;r, η, (στ/γω to Cover), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down, a roof: of a house, Mk. ii. 4 ; ιισίρχίσθαι υπο τήν
στίγην τινός [see ιΐσίρχομαι, 1 ρ. 187"" hot.], Mt. viii. 8;
Lk. vu. 6.•
σ-τβ'γω; [allied w. Lat. lego, toga, Eng. deck, thatch,
etc.; Curtius §155; Fick Pt. iii. 590] ; to cover; 1.
to protect or keep by covering, to preserve: Soph., Plat.,
Plut., al. 2. to cover over with silence ; to keep se-
cret; to hide, conceal: τάμα ίττη, Eur. Electr. 273; top
λόγον, Polyb. 8, 14, 5 ; for other exx. see Passow s. v. 1 b.
β. ; [L. and S. s. v. II. 2] ; μωμος οΰ 5υνησ(ταί λόγοι/ στί-
ξαι, Sir. viii. 1 7 ; hence ή αγάπη πάντα στίγιι, 1 Co. .xiii.
7, is explained by some, love coverelh [so R. V. rarg.], i. e.
hi<les and excuses, the errors and faults of others; but it
is more appropriately rendered (with other interpreters)
bearelh. For στίγω means 3. by covering to keep
off something which threatens, to bear up against, hold
out against, and so to endure, bear, forbear, (τας evSciac,
Philo in Flacc. § 9 ; many exx. fr. Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl.
down are given by Passow s. v. 2 ; [L. and S. s. v. A.
esp. 3]): iCo. ix. 12; xiii. 7 ; 1 Th. iii. 1, 5.•
oTiipos, -a, -ov, (i. q. στίρρος, στ(ρίός q. v. ; whence
Germ, starr, Lat. sterilis), hard, stiff; of men and ani-
mals, barren : of a woman who does not conceive, Lk.
i. 7, 36; xxiii. 29; Gal. iv. 27. (Hom., Theocr., Orph^
Anthol. ; Sept. for ip;; Π•;ρ.;•.)•
στΛλω: (.Germ, stellen; [cf. Grk. στήλη, βταλβ, etc.;
στέμμα
58Τ
στΐφανοω
Lat. stlocus (locus) ; Eng. stall, etc.; Curtius § 218; Fick
Ft. 1.246; Pt. iv. 274]) ; fr. Horn, down ; 1. to set,
place, set in order, arrange; to fit out, to prepare, equip;
Mid. pres. στίλλορκ, to prepare one's self, to fit out for
one's self; to fit out for one's own use : στίλλόμβίΌΐ τούτο
μή Tis etc. arranging, providing for, this etc. i. e. taking
care [A. V. avoiiling], that no one etc. 2 Co. viii. 20 [cf.
AV. § 45, 6 a.; B. 292 (252)]. 2. to bring together,
contract, shorten: τά ιστία, Horn. Od. 3, 1 1 ; 16,353; also
in mid. II. 1, 433 ; to diniinish, check, cause to cease ; pass.
to cease to exist : βονΚομίνη την Χνπην τον av8p6s σταλήναί,
Joseph, antt. 5, 8, 3 ; ό ;(ei/jii' ΐσταΚη, ibid. 9, 10, 2 ; mid.
to remove one's self, withdraw one's self, to depart, foil, by
από with gen. of the pers., to abstain from familiar inter-
course with one, 2 Tli. iii. 6. [CoMP. : άπο-, (ζ-απο-, συν-
απο-, δια-, cVi-, κατά-, συ{ν)-, ύττο-στίλλω.] *
σ-τεμμα. -τογ, τό, (στίφω, pf. pass, ίστιμμαι, to crown,
to bind round), a fillet, a garland, put upon victims :
Acts xiv. 13 [cf. W. 630 (585) ; B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Gar-
lands]. (From Horn, down.) *
στ£ναγμ05, -oC, ό, (στ(νάζω), a groaning, a sigh : Acts
vii. 34 ; Ro. viii. 26 ; see αΚάλητος- ([Find.], Tragg.,
Flat., Joseph., Flut., al.; Sept. for nnjN, T^pyvt, npKJ.)*
στίνάΧ,ω ; 1 aor. ίστίναζα ; {στίνω, akin is Germ, sliihnen
[cf. ste?i-tor\a.n ; Vanieek p. 1141 ; Fick Pt. i. 249]); lo
sigh, to groan : 2 Co. v. 2, 4, [cf. W. 353 (331)] ; Heb. .xiii.
17; (V eavTols, within ourselves, i. e. in our souls, in-
wardly. Ho. viii. 23 ; to pray sighing, Mk. vii. 34 ; κατά
Tivos, Jas. V. 9 [here R. V. murmur]. (Sept. ; Tragg.,
Dera., Flut., al.) [Comp. : άυα-, συ(ΐ')- στ€ΐ'άζω. Syk.
cf. κλαίω, fin.] *
o-revos, -ή, -όν, fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down, Sept. for
iy, narrow, strait: πύλη, Mt. vii. 13, [14 (here LTrbr.
jTUXi))]; Lk. xiii. 24.*
στίνο-χωρί'ω, -ώ: (στίνόχωρος; and this fr. στ€νός, and
χωμο! a space) ; 1. intrans. to be in a strait place
(Machon in Athen. 13 p. 582 b.) ; to be narroic (Is. xlix.
19). 2. trans, to straiten, compress, cramp, reduce
to straits, (Vulg. angustio), (Diod., Lcian., Hdian., al. ;
[Sept. Josli. .xvii. 15; Judg. xvi. 16; Is. .xxviii. 20; 4
Mace. xi. 11]) : pass. trop. of one sorely 'straitened' in
spirit, 2 Co. iv. 8 ; οΰ σ-τινοχωμύσθ^ iv ήμΐν, ye are not
straitened in us, ample space is granted you in our souls,
i. e. we enfold you with large affection, 2 Co. vi. 1 2 ; στί-
νοχωρύσθί (v Toit σπλάγχνηις υμών, ye are straitened in
your own affections, so that there is no room there for
us, i. e. you do not grant a place in your heart for love
toward me. ibid.*
οτίνοχωρία, -as, η, {στ€νόχ<ύρος), narrowness of place,
a narrow space, (Is. viii. 22 [al. take this as metaph.] ;
Thuc, Plat., al.) ; metaph. dire calamity, extreme afflic-
tion, [A. V. distress, anguish] : Ro. ii. 9 ; viii. 35 ; 2 Co.
vi. 4; xii. 10. (Deut. xxviii. 53, 55, 57; Sir. x. 26; [Sap.
V. 3] ; 1 Mace. ii. 53 ; xiii. 3 ; Polyb. 1, 67, 1 ; [Artemid.
oneir. 3, 14] ; Ael. v. h. 2, 41 ; [al.].) [Cf. Trench § Iv.] '
oTcptos, -ά, -όν, [Vanieek p. 1131 ; Curtius § 222], fr.
Ilom. dovfa,fi}-m, solid, compact, hard, rigid : λίθο:, Horn.
Od. 19, 494; strong, firm, immovable, θιμίλιο!, 2 Tim. ii.
19; τροφή, solid food, Ileb. v. 12, 14; στ(ρ€ωτ(ρα τροφή,
Diod. 2, 4 ; Epictet. diss. 2, 16, 39 ; trop., in a bad
sense, cruel, stiff, stubborn, hard ; often so in Grk. writ,
f r. llom. down : κραΒίη στ€ρ(ωτ(ρη λίθοιο, Od. 23,103; in
a good sense, firm, steadfast : τη πίστα, as respects faith,
firm of faith [cf. W. § 31, 6 a.], 1 Pet. v. 9 (see crrepeoa,
fin.).*
<ΓΤΕρ€Οω, -ώ : 1 aor. (στέριωσα ; impf. 3 pers. plur. (arf
ptoivTO ; 1 aor. pass. €στ(ρ(ώθην ; (arcpeos) ; to make
solid, make firm, strengthen, make strong : τινά, tlie body
of any one. Acts iii. 16; Tar βάσας, pass. Acts iii. 7;
pass. Tj πίστ«, as respects faith (see cTcpeos, fin.), Acts
,\vi. 5. (Sept. ; Xen., Diod.) *
σ-Τ£ρ(ωμα, -ror, τό, (στφίόω), that which has been made
firm; a. (Vulg. _/i'raiamejiium) the firmament; so
Sept. for J?"p."J, the arch of the sky, which in early times
was thought to be solid. Gen. i. 0-8 : Ezek. i. 22-26 ;
Sir. xliii. 1, [cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Firmament];
a fortified place, 1 Esdr. viii. 78 (80). b. that which
furnishes a foundation ; on which a thing rests firmlij, sujy-
port : Aristot. partt. an. 2, 9, 12 p. 655*, 22 ; Kvpios στιρί-
ωμά μυν, Ps. .xvii. (.xviii.) 3. c. firmness, steadfast^
ness : της ττίστίωι. Col. ii. 5 [some take it here metaph.
in a military sense, solid front; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.
(per contra Meyer)].*
Στ£φανά5, -ά [cf. Β. 20 (18)], ό, Stephanas, a Christian
of Corinth: 1 Co. i. 16 ; .xvi. 15, 17.*
σ-Τ€'ψανθ9, -ο», ό, {στίφω [to put round ; cf. Curtius
§ 224]). Sept. for n"l£3>•, [fr. Horn, down], a crown (with
which tlie head is encircled) ; a. prop, as a mark
of royal or (in general) exalted rank [such pass, in the
Sept. as 2 S. xii. 30 ; 1 Clir. xx. 2 ; Ps. xx. (xxi.) 4 ; Ezek.
xxi. 20 ; Zech. vi. 11, 14, (yet cf. 2 S.i. 10 Compl,Lag.),
perhaps justify the doubt whether the distinction betw.
στίφανος and διάβημα (q. V.) was strictly observed in
Hellenistic Grk.] : :Mt. xxvii. 29 ; Mk. xv. 17; Jn. xix. 2,
5; Rev. iv. 4, 10 ; vi. 2 ; ix. 7; xiv. 14 ; with a gen. of the
material, άστίρων δώ5(κα. Rev. xii. 1 ; the wreath or gar-
land which was given as a prize to victors in the public
games [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Games] : 1 Co. ix. 25, cf. 2 Tim.
ii. 5. b. metaph. o. the eternal blessedness which
will be given as a prize to the genuine servants of God and
Christ : ό τη! δικαιοσύνη! στίφανος, the crown (wreath)
which is the reward of righteousness, 2 Tim. iv. 8 ; witli
an epexeget. gen. in the phrases λαμβάνισθαι, bihuvai τόι»
στίφανον της ζωής, erjuiv. to την ζωην ως τον στΐφανον,
Jas. i. 12 ; Rev. ii. 10 ; κομ'ιζίσθαι τόν της δό^ης στΐφανον,
1 Pet. ν. 4 ; λαβιϊν τ. στίφανόν τίνος, to cause one to fail
of the promised and hoped for prize, Kev. iii. 11. β.
that which is an ornament and honor to one : so of per-
sons, Pliil. iv. 1 ; στίφ. κηυχήσ(ως (see κανχησις), 1 Th.
ii. 19, (Prov. xii. 4; xvi. 31 ; xvii. 6, etc.).*
Στίφανθ8, -ου, ό, Stephen, one of the seven 'deacons'
of the church at .Jerusalem who was stoned to death by
the Jews : Acts vi. 5, 8 sq. ; vii. 59; viii. 2 ; xi. 19; xxii.
20.•
στ£φαν<5ω, -ώ : 1 .aor. ίστιφάνωσα ; pf. pass. ptcp. fCTTf
φανωμίνος ; {στίφανος) ; fr. Horn, down ; a. lo en-
στι/ηοί
588
στοιχείβο
circle with a cruum. Ιο crown : the victor in a contest, 2 τιχά, Lk. xxii. 32; [Acts xviii. 23 where RG (■πι.στηρ.~\\
Ro. i. 1 1 ; xvi. 25 ; 1 Th. ui. 2 ; 2 Tl». iii. 3 ; 1 Pet. v. IC
[here Rec. lias 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing, στηρίξιιι] ; Rev.
Tim. ii. 5. b. univ. to adorn, to honor : rtva ίάξη κ
τιμϊι, lleb. ii. 7, 9, fr. Ps. viii. 6.*
στηθοϊ, -ouf, τό, (fr. Ιστημι; tliat wliioh stands out,
is proiniiuMit [Elym. Magu. 727, 1!» διόη ίστη<(ν άσάλιν-
τον]), tr. Horn. Jown, llie breast: Jn. xiii. 2.'); xxi. 20,
(tf. κύλπιις, 1 ) ", Rev. xv. 6. τύπταν els το στηθοί or τύπτ.
το στήθος, of mourners (see κόπτω), Lk. .xviii. 13 ; .\xiii.
48.•
«Γτήκω; (an inferior Grk. word, derived fr. ΐστηκα, pf.
of Ι,ττημ^; see B. 48 (41) ; [\V. 24, 26 (2a) ; Wll. App.
p. 169; Veitch s. v. ίστήκω; MullacU s. v. στϊκω (p.
29;))J) ; to stand: Mk. [iii. 31 Τ Tr WH] ; xi. 2.5 [(cf.
mau c. β.)'] ; .In. i. 26 L mrg. Τ Trtxt. WH ; [Rev. xii.
4 WII (but see lielow)]; w'lux an emphasis, to stand
firm; troii. to /lersisi, persefC'-e, [A.V. stand fast]: absol.
to persevere in godliness and rectitude, 2 Th. ii. 15 ; tV
κυρίω, in one's fellowsliip with the Lord, I'hil. iv. 1 ; 1
Th. iii. 8 [(cf. eai/, I. 2 b.)] ; e'v τη nitrrfi, 1 Co. xvi. 13 ;
fv (Λ πν(ύματι, Pliil. i. 27; to keep one's standlnrf (opp.
to ζυγώ ΐνίχιιμαι), TJ «Afu^epia, maintain your aUegiance
to freedom [cf. \V. § 31, 1 k.'; B. § 133, 12; but L Τ Tr
Wll take στ. here absul. ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc], Gal.
V. 1 ; to stnnit erect, trop. not to sin (opp. to πίπτ€ίν i. (j.
to sin), τω κυιΐίω, dat. commodi [W. ii. s.], Ro. xiv. 4.
[In Jn. viii. 44 (tV τι/ <ΐλτ)5{ία ηνκ(χ) (στηκιν) WII read
the impf. ϊστηκιν (where others adopt (ατηκιν fr. ϊστι;μι),
owing to the preceding οίκ (Τ WII after codd. X B* D
L etc. ) ; see Wes'cott, Com. on Jn. 1. c. ' Additional Note ' ;
Wll. Introd. § 407. But such an impf. is nowhere else
found (yet cf. Rev. xii. 4 WH), and respecting confu-
sion in the ancient use of the breatliings, and the inter-
change of ούκ and οϋχ, see οΰ ad init. and reff. there, esp.
Tdf. Proleg. p. 90 ; moreover, the familiar pf. (pres.) of
Ισττ/μι thoroughly suits the context; see ιστημι, II. 2 d.]
([Sept., Ex. xiv. 13 Ale.\., Compl. ; 1 K. viii. 11] ; Alex.
Aphr. probl. I, 49 var. ; eccles. writ.)*
<Γτηριγμ05, -ov, 6, (στηρίζω), firm condition, steadfast-
ness : of mind, 2 Pet. iii. 1 7. (of a standing still, Diod.
1, 81 ; Plut. mor. p. 76 d.) *
στηρίζω; ful. στη,>ίξω (as in the best Grk. writ.), and
στηρίσω (in 2 Th. iii. 3 cod. A'^at., as in .ler. .xvii. 5 ; στηριώ,
Jer. iii. 12; xxiv. 6; Kzek. xiv. 8; Sir. vi. 37 [see reff.
below]) ; 1 aor. ΐστηρι^α, and ΐστηρισα (στηρισον, Lk.
xxii. 32 LTTrWII; Rev.iii. 2GLTTr Wll, as inJudg.
xix. 5, 8 ; Ezek. vi. 2 ; Prov. xv. 25, etc. ; cf. [ WII. App.
p. 170]; Btlm. Ausf. Sprchl.i.p.372; B. 36 (32); Kuhner
§ 343, i. p. 910; [Veitch s. v.]) ; Pass., pf. ϊστήριγμαι; 1
■Λΐ^τ.ίστηρΙχθην; (στήριγξ a support ; akin to orf/jeot, i|. v.,
OTfppos, and Germ, sttirken ; cf. Curtius § 222) ; fr. Iloni.
down; a. to make stable, place firmh/, set fast, fix :
ίστήρικται (χάσμα), is fixed, Lk. xvi. 26 ; στηρίζω το πρό-
σωπον, to set one's face stead/aslh/, keep the face turned
(Ezek. vi. 2 ; xiii. 17 ; xv. 7 ; etc.) τοΰ πορ(ΰ(σθηί «r with
an ace. of place, a Hebr. expression (s«^e πρόσωπον. 1 b.
[and cf. B. § 140, 16 8.; W. 33]), Lk. ix. 51. b. ίο
sirenrithen, make firm ; trop. (not so in prof, auth.) to
render constatit, confirm, one's mind [.V. V. cstahlLthl:
iii. 2 ; ττ]ΐ> κηρδίαν rtvos, 1 Th. iii. 13 ; Jas. v. 8; τίνα tr
Tivt, 2 Th. ii. 1 7 ; 2 Pet. i. 12. [CoMl>. : ίπί-στηρίζω.] *
στιβάϊ, -όδοί, ή, (fr. στίίβω ' to tread on,' 2 aor. tarf
βον) ; a. (1 spread or liiijer of Iciircs, reeds, ruslies,
sifi leitfii IWKjs, straw, ι•Λκ., scrrinrj fur a bed (llcsycli.
στιβάς • άπο ράιίδων η χΧωρών χόρτων στρωσις κ. φύ\\ων) ;
80 in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. b. that which it
used in making a bed of this sort, a branch full nf hares,
soft foliat/e : so Mk. xi. 8 LT TrAVlI for στοιβάδα!, an
orthographical error [see Tdf.'s note ad loc.].*
στίγμα, -tos, to, (fr. στίζω to prick ; [cf. Lat. stimulus,
etc. ; Germ, sleeken, Eng. stick, stinr/, etc. ; Curtius § 226])^
a mark pricked in or branded upon tlie body. Ace. to
ancient oriental usage, slaves and soldiers bore the name
or stamp of their master or commander branded or
pricked (cut) into their bodies to indicate what master
or general they belonged to, and there were even some
devotees who stamped themselves in this way with the
token of their gods (cf. />/////(//, Observv. iii. p. 423sqq.);
hence τα στίγματα τοΟ (κυιιίου so Rec.) Ίησον, l/ie mark»
of (the Liird) ,/esus, which Paul in Gal. vi. 17 says he
bears branded on his body, are the traces left there hj
the perils, hardships, imprisonments, scourgings, endured
by him for the cause of Christ, and which mark him
as Christ's faithful and approved votary, servant, soldier,
[see Bp. Lr/l,tft. Com. on Gal. 1. c.]. (Hdt. 7, 233 ; Ai>-
istot., Ael., riut., Lcian., al.) *
στιγμή, -ης, η, (στίζω', see στί-^μα, init.), a point : στιγμή
χρόνου, a point (i. e. a momeul) of time (Cic. pro Flacco
c. 2.5; i)ro Sest. 24; Caes. b. c. 2, 14; al.), Lk. iv. 5.
(Antonin. 2, 17; Plut. puer. educ. 17; Is. .xxix. 5; t
Mace. ix. 11.)•
στίλβω ; to shine, glisten : of garments (as in Horn. Π.
3, 392 ; 18, 596 ; cf. Plat. Phaedo 59 p. 110 d.), Mk. ix. ,
3.*
στοά, -05, η, a portico, a covered colonnade where peo-
ple can stand or walk protected from the weather and
the heat of the sun : .In. v. 2 ; στοίι Σηλομωνος, a " porch"
or portico built by Solomon in the eastern part of the
temple (which in the temple's destruction by the Baby-
lonians was left uninjured, and remained down to the
times of king Agripjja, to whom the care of the temple
was intrusted by the emperor Claudius, and who on
account of its antitiuity did not dare to demolish and
build it anew; so Josephus relates, antt. 20, 9, 7; [but
on 'Solomon's Porch' cf. B.D. s. v. Temple (Solomon's
Temple, fin.)]) : .In. x. 23; Acts iii. 11 ; v. 12.•
στοιβάϊ. -liSiis, ή, see στι/3άΓ, b.
[Στοϊκό?, Ml Lchm. Tdf. for 2τωϊκός, q. v.]
στοιχίίον, -01), TO, (fr. στοΐ;^οΓ a row, rank, series ;
hence |)rop. that which belongs to any στοίχος, that of
which a στοίχος is composed ; hence), any first thing,
from which the others belonifmg to .wme series or composite
whole lake their rise ; an element, first principle. The
word denotes spec. 1. the letters of the alphabet as
στοιχ^εω
589
στομ,α
the elements of speech, not however the written
characters (which are called γράμματα), but the
Kjioken sounds: (rrut^flnv φωνής φωνή άσυνθίτον, I lat.
«ielin. p. 414 e.; το ρω τό στοιχ€ίον, id. Crat. p. 426 d. ;
στοιχΐΐόν (στί φωνή ά3ιαίμ€τυς, ον πάσα δί, αλλ (ς i)S ττί-
φυκf συνετή yiyvtatiai φωνή, Aristut. poet. 20, p. HoG',
22. 2. the elemenl.i J'l-oiu ivhicli all Ιΐιίηιμ haoe come,
the malerial causes nf llu• unii-erse (ϊστι δί στοιχ(Ιον, ϊξ
οζ πρώτου ytv€Tat τα ytvopfva και fls ο ΐσ^ατον ανάΚυίταί
. . . το πϋρ. το ν&ωρ, ό αήρ, ή γη, L*iog. Laert. Zcno 69,
137) ; so very often fr. Flat, down, as in Tim p. 48 b. ;
in the Scriptures: Sap. vii. 17; \i\. 17; 2 Pet. iii. 10,
12. 3. the JteaL-enli/ bodies, either as parts of the
heavens, or (as others think) because in them the ele-
ments of man's life and destiny were supposed to reside ;
BO in the earlier eccles. writ. : Ep. ad Diogn. 7, 2 ; Justin.
M. dial. c. Tryph. 23 ; τα ουράνια στοιχιια, id. apol. 2, ό ;
στοιχιϊα θ(οϋ, created by (jod, Tlieoph. Ant. ad Autol.
1,4; cf. Hihjenfelil, Gahiterbrief, pp. C6-77. llenoe
some interpreters in felicitously understand Paul's phrase
τα στοίχ(Ία τοΰ κόσμου. Gal. iv. 3, 9; Col. ii. 8, 20, of the
heavenly bodies, because times and seasons, and so sa-
cred seasons, were regulated by the course of the sun
and moon ; yet in unfolding the meaning of the passage
on the basis of this sense they differ widely. 4.
the elements, rudimenls, priinary awl fundamental princi-
ples (cf. our ^alphabet' or 'a 6 c ') ofanij art, science, or
discipline; e. g. of mathematics, as in the title of Euclid's
well-known Λvork ; στοι\(Ία πρώτα και μίγιστα χρηστής
πολιτίίαϊ, Isocr. ρ. IS a.; τ^ε αρετής, Plut.de puer. educ.
16, 2 ; many e.xx. are given in Passow s. v. 4, ii. p. 1550'' ;
[cf. L. and S. s. v. II. 3 and 4]. In the N. T. we have
TO στ. της αρχής των λογίων τοΰ 6(ον (see άρ\η, 1 b. ρ. 76''
bot.), lleb. V. 12, such as are taught to νήπιοι, ib. 13 ; τα
στυιχ(Ία τοΰ κόσμου, the rudiments with which mankind
like νήπιοι were indoctrinated before the time of Christ,
i. e. the elements of religious training, or the ceremonial
precepts common alike to the worship of Jews and of
Gentiles, Gal. iv. 3, 9, (and since these re(|uirements on
account of the difficulty of observing them are to be
regarded as a yoke — cf. Acts .\v. 10; Gal. v. 1 — those
who rely upon them are said to be 8fSnυ\ωμ(voι ίπο τα
στ.); spec, the ceremonial requiremenis esp. of Jewish
tradition, minutely set forth by thcosophists and false
teachers, and fortified by specious arguments. Col. ii. 8,
20. The phrase τα στοι;^<ία τοΰ κόσμου is fully dis-
cussed by Schneckenljurijer in the Theolog. Jahrbiicher
for 1848, Pt. iv. p. 445 sqq. ; Neander in the Deutsche
Zeitschrift f. Christl. AVissenschaft for 1850, p. 205
sqq. ; Kienlen in Reuss u. Cunitz's Beitragc zu d. theolog.
Wissenschaften, vol. ii. p. 133 sqii.; E. Scltnubnch, Com-
ment, qua exponitur (piid στοιχΰα τοΰ κόσμου in Ν. Τ.
sibi velint. (Meinin^. 18il2).'
στοιχί'ω, -ώ ; f ut. στοί;^ΐ7σω ; (στοίχος ίΐ row, series) : a.
to proceed in a row, i/o in order : Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 34 ;
metaph. to go on prosperouslij , to turn out well: of things,
Eccl. xi. 6 for "^ψ'Ζ. b. to walk : with a local dat.
[W. § 31, 1 a. cf. p. 219 (205) ; yet cf. B. § 133, 22 b.],
Toir Ίχν(σΊ τίνος, in the steps or one, i. e. follow his ex-
ample, Ro. iv. 12; to direct one's life, to line, with a dat.
of the rule [B. u. s.], tl πνιΰματι . . . στοιχώμ^ν, if the
Holy Spirit animates us [see ^άω, I. 3 sub tin.], let us
exhibit that control of the Spirit in our life, Gal. v. 25 ;
τώ κανόνι, ace. to the rule. Gal. vi. 16 ; τω αΰτώ (where
Ptec. adds κανόνι), Phil. iii. 16 [W. §43, 5 d. ; cf.B. § 140,
18 fin.], (τω παρα8(ίγματΙ τίνος, Clem. horn. 10, 15) ; with
a ptcp. denoting the manner of acting, στoιχfΐς τ. νόμοί
φυλάσσων, so walkest as to keep the law [A. V. walkest
orderly, keeping etc.]. Acts xxi. 24. [On the word and
its constr. see Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 142. CoMP. :
συ(ΐ')- στοιχίω.^ *
στολή, -ης, ή, (στί'λλω [q. v.] to prepare, equip, 2 pf.
ίστολα) ; 1. an equipment (Aeschyl.). 2. an
equipment in clothes, cloiliing; spec, η loose outer garment
fir men lohich extended to the feet [cf. Eng. stole (Diet, of
Chris. Antiq. s. v.)], worn by kings (Jon. iii. 6), priests,
and persons of rank: .Mk. xii. 38; xvi. 5; Lk. xv. 22;
XX. 46; Rev. vi. 11; vii. 9, 13, [14*, 14' Ilec.; xxii. 14
L Τ Tr WH]. (Tragg., Xen., Plat., sqq. ; Sept. chiefly
forlja.) [Cf. Trench § 1.]*
στο'μο•, τος, τό, (apparently i. q. τόμα, with σ prefi.xed,
fr. τίμνω, τίτομα, therefore prop, 'cutting' [or 'cut'; so
Etym. Magn. 728, 18; al. 'calling', etc.; but doubtful,
cf. Curtius § 226 b. ; Vanicek p. 1141 and reff.]); fr.
Horn, down; Ilebr. Π3 ; the mouth; 1. prop. Me
mouth as a part of the body : of man, Jn. xix. 29 ; Acts
xi. 8; Rev. i. 16; iii. 16, and often; of animals, — as of
a fish, Mt. xvii. 27 ; of a horse, Jas. iii. 3 ; Rev. ix. 17 ;
of a serpent. Rev. xii. 15 sq. ; xiii. 5 ; the jaws of a lion,
2 Tim. iv. 1 7 ; Ileb. xi. 33 ; Rev. xiii. 2. Since the
thoughts of man's soul find verbal utterance by his
mouth, Kapbia ('the heart' or soul) and στόμα 'the
mouth' are distinguished : Mt. xii. 34 ; xv. 8 Rec. fr. Is.
xxix. 13 ; Ro. x. 8, 10; in phrases chiefly of a Hebra-
istic character, the mouth (as the organ of speech) is
mentioned in connection with words and speech, Mt. xxi.
16 (fr. Ps. viii. 3), and words are said to proceed « τοΰ
στόμοτοί, Mt. iv. 4 (fr. Dent. viii. 3) ; Lk. iv. 22 ; Eph. iv.
29 ; Col. iii. 8 ; Jas. iii. 10 ; το στόμα λαλίΐ Tt, Jude 16 ;
on the Hebr. phrase άνοίγ(ΐν τό στόμα, see ανοίγω, p. 48»
bot. ij άνοιξις τοΰ στ. Eph. vi. 19; στόμα πμοΕ στόμα
λαλήσαι (Π3-^!« Π3 13^, Num. xii. 8) lit. mouth (turned)
to mouth, [A. V. face to face'], 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 14, (το
στόμα προς τό στόμα, of a kiss, Xen. mem. 2, C, 32);
God or the Holy Spirit is said to speak δια τοΰ στόματόί
τινοί [cf. Β. 18.i (159)], Lk. i. 70; Acts i. IC ; iii. 18,•21 ;
iv. 25 ; or a person is said to hear a thing δια στόματος τ.
Acts XV. 7 ; or από τοΰ στ. τ. from his own mouth i. e. what
he has just said, Lk. xxii. 71 ; or ίκ τ. στ. Acts xxii. 14 ;
θηρινσαί τι ck τ. στ. τ. Lk. xi. 54 ; τό ττΐ'ίΰμα τού στ. [Me
breath of his mouth, see πν(ΰμα. 1 b.], 2 Th. ii. 8 (Ps. xxxii.
(xxxiii.) 6, cf. Is. xi. 4) : ή ρομφαία τοΰ στ. a fig. por-
trayins the destructive power of the Λvords of Christ
the judge, Rev. ii. 16 ; δόλοΕ or ψίϋδος iv τώ στ., 1 Pet.
ii. 22 and Rev. xiv. 5, (fr. Is. liii. 9) ; στόμα is put for
'statements', declarations, in Mt. xviii. 16 and 2 Co. xiii.
ττομαχο^
590
στρεφίύ
1. (Deut. xix. 15) ; Lk. xix. 22 (Eccl. viii. 2). ίιδόναι
rii/l στόμα, apt forms of speech (as distinguished from
the substance of speech, ή σοφία), Lk. xxi. 15; στόμα
for one who lias begun (or is about) to speak, Ko. iii. ID
(Ps. cvi. (cvii.) 42 ; cf. πάν yow and πάσα γλώσσα, Phil.
ii. 10 S(i. fr. Is. xlv. 23) ; metaph. the earth is said to
open its mouth and καταπίν€ΐν τί, Rev. xii. 1 6. 2.
Like Lat. acies, στόμα μαχαίρας, the edge of the sword
(^Tl— £3, Gen. xxxiv. 26 ; [Josh. xix. 48 ; Jer. xxi. 7,
etc.] ; Judg. xviii. 27, etc. ; 2 S. xv. 14 [but in the last
two pass, the Sept. render the Ilebr. phrase by στ.
ρομφαία!, which (together with στ. ξίφουί) is the more
common translation; cf. W. IH, 30; B. 320 (274) n.]) :
Lk. xxi. 24 ; Heb. xi. 34, (hence δι'στο/χοϊ, q. v. ; ^3K of
a sword, 2 S. ii. 26 ; xi. 2.5).
στόμα\05, -ου, 6, {στόμα, q. v.) ; 1. the throat :
Ildui., al. 2. an opening, orifice, esp. of the stomach,
Aristot. 3. in later writ, (as Plut., al.) the stomach :
1 Tim. V. 23.•
(Γτρατίία, -as, ή, (στρατήω), an expedition, campaign ;
viililary service, war/are : Paul likens his contest with the
difficulties that oppose him in the discliarge of his apo-
stolic duties to a warfare, 2 Co. x. 4 (where Tdf. στρατιάς,
see his note); 1 Tim. i. 18. [(Hdt., Xen., al.)] '
<Γτράτ€υμο, -τοί, τό, (στρσΓίύω), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down; a. an army: Mt. xxii. 7; Rev. ix. 16; xix.
14 [cf. W. § 59, 4 a.], 19. b. a band of soldiers [R.V.
soWier.s-] : Acts .xxiii. 10, 27. c. body-guard, guards-
men : plur. Lk. xxiii. 11 [R. V. .wWieri].*
στρατίύω : Mid., pres. στρατιϋομαί ; 1 aor. subjunc. 2
pers. sing, στράτευση (1 Tim. i. 18 Τ Tr txt. Wll mrg.) ;
(στρατοΕ [related to στρωνιηίω, (j. v.], an encampment, an
army); fr. Hdt. down; to make a military expedition, to
lead soldiers to war or to battle, (spoken of a commander) ;
to do military duty, be on active service, be a soldier ; in
the N. T. only in the mid. (Grk. writ, use the act. and
the depon. mid. indiscriminately; cf. Passow s. v. 1 fin. ;
[L. and S. s. v. L 2]) : prop, of soldiers, Lk. lii. 14; 1 Co.
ix. 7 ; 2 Tim. ii. 4 ; to fight, [A. V. war] : trop. of the
conflicts of the apostolic office, 2 Co. x. 3 ; \\\ύ\ a kin-
dred ace. [W. § 32, 2; B. § 131. .')], rijv κα\ψ στρατύαν,
1 Tim. i. 18 {Upav κ tvytvri στρατύαν στρατιΰσασθιη
ncp\ της ινσιβιίας, 4 Macc. ix. 23); of passions that dis-
quiet the soul, Jas. iv. 1 ; 1 Pet. ii. 11. [CoMP. : άντι-
στρατίύομαί.] *
στρατηγοί, -οΰ, 6, (στρατός and άγω), fr. Hdt. down,
Sept. chiefly for μρ [only plur. D":JD] ; 1. the
commander of an army. 2. in the N. T. a civic
commander, a governor, (the name of the duumviri or
highi-st magistrates in the municipia and colonies; they
had the power of administering justice in the less im-
portant cases ; oi της πόλ(ως στρατηγοί, Artem. oneir. 4,
49 ; of civil magistrates as early as Hdt. 5, 38 ; [see refif.
in Meyer on Acts xvi. 20 ; L. and S. s. v. II. 2 sq. ; cf.
Farrar, St. Paul, i. excurs. xvi.]) : plur. [R. V. magi.-<-
Irates (after A.V.), with mrg. Gr. prcetors], Acts xvi. 20,
22, 35 sq. [38]. 3. στρατ. τοϋ Upoi, 'captain of the
temple ' [A. V.], i. e. the commander of the Levites who
kept guard in and around the temple (Joseph, antt. 20,
6, 2 ; [B. D. s. V. Captain, 3 ; Edershelm, The Temple etc.
ch. vii., 2ed. p. 119sq.]) : Acts iv. 1; v. 24; plur. Lk. xxii.
52 ; simply [A. V. captain']. Acts v. 26 ; Lk. xxii. 4.*
στρατιά, -as, ή, {στρατός [cf. στρατίΰω]), Ιτ. .\eschyL
and Hdt. down, Sept. for N^y ; 1. an army, band
of soldiers. 2. sometimes in the poets i. q. στρατύα,
as Arstph. eqq. 587 (ϊν στρατιαΐς Tf κα\ μάχηις). 2 Co. χ.
4 Tdf. after the best codd. ([see his note ; cf. L. and S.
s. V. II.J ; Passow s. v. στρατίία, fin.). 3. in the
N. T. ή ουράνιος στρατιά, or η στρατ. τοϋ ονρανοΰ (Hebr.
D'OtfTl Κ3»)) the host of heaven (see Βνναμις, f.), i. e. a.
troops of angels (1 K. xxii. 1 9 ; Neh. ix. 6) : Lk. ii. 13. b.
the heavenly bodies, stars of heaven, (so called on account
of their number and their order) : Acts vii. 42 (2 Chr.
.xxxiii. 3, 5 ; Jer. viii. 2, etc.).*
στρατιώτη?, -ου, ό, (fr. στρατιάς [(cf. στρατίΰω)], like
ηλίώτης, κλοίώτης, ηπ(ΐρώτης), fr. Hdt. down, a {common)
soldier: Mt. viii. 9; Mk. xv. 16; Lk. xxiii. 36; Jn. xix.
2 ; Acts x. 7 ; xii. 4, etc. ; with the addition of Ίι;σοϋ
Χρίστου, metaph., a champion of the cause of Christ,
2 Tim. ii. 3.
στρατολογί'ω, -ω : to be a στρατολόγος (and this fr.
στρατός and λίγω), to gather {collect) an army, to enlist
soldiers : ό στματο\ογτ]σας, [Λε that enrolled (him) as a
soldier], of the commander, 2 Tim. ii. 4. (Diod., Dion.
Hal., Joseph., Plut., al.) •
στρατοίΓίδάρχηϊ, -ου, ό, {στρατόπ(8ον and άρχω), [cf.
Β. 73(64)]; a. the commander of a camp and army,
a military tribune : Dion. Hal. 10, 36 ; Lcian. hist, conscr.
22; [Joseph, b. j. 2, 19, 4]. b. Praetorian prefect,
commander of the praetorian cohorts, i. e. captain of the
Roman emperor's body-guard: Acts xxviii. 16 [LT
Tr WH om. the cl., see Abbot in B. D., Am. ed., s. v.
Captain of the Guard]. There were two praetorian pre-
fects, to whose custody prisoners sent bound to the em-
peror were consigned: Joseph, antt. 18, 6, 6; Plin. epp.
10, 65 (57). [See B. D. Am. ed. u. s. ; Bp. LgJitft. on
Phil. p. 7 sq.] •
[στροτοΐΓ{'δ-αρχο5, -ου, ό ; see the preceding word. The
dat. -;^ω is the reading of some codd. (cf. WH rejected
mrg.) m Acts xxviii. 16; cf. ίκατοντάρχης, init.']
ffTpoTO-ircSov, -ou, To, (oTparos, and ttcSo» a plain), fr.
Hdt. down ; a. a military camp. b. soldiers
in camp, an army : Lk. xxi. 20.*
στρ€βλόω, -ώ ; (στριβλός [fr. στρίφω] twisted, Lat. tor-
tuosus; hence στρίβλη, fem., an instrument of torture);
to twist, turn awry, (Hdt.) ; to torture, put to the rack,
(.\rstph., Plat., Dem., Polyb., Joseph., 3 Macc. iv. 14) ;
metaph. to pervert, of one who wrests or tortures lan-
guage to a false sense, 2 Pet. iii. 16.•
στρέψω : 1 aor. ϊστριψα ; Pass., pret. στρϊφομαι 2
aor. (στράφην, fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for '^sri, also for
353, etc. ; to turn, turn round : τί τινι, to turn a tiling to
one, Mt. V. 39, and Τ Tr WH in xxvii. 3 [for αποστρέφω,
to bring back ; see άποστρ(φω, 2] ; refiexively ( W. § 38,
1 ; B. § 130, 4), to turn one's self (i. e. to turn the back
to one : used of one who no longer cares for another).
στρηνιαω
591
at
Acts vii. 42 [cf. W. 469 (437)] ; τΐ els τι, i. q. μτταστρίφα,
to turn one thing into another, Re%'. xi. 6. Pass, reflex-
ively, to iurn one's self : στραφεί foil, by a finite verb,
Λανίη^ iui-nerf etc., Mt. vii. 6 ; [ix. 22 L Τ Tr WH] ; xvi.
23 ; Lk. vii. l; ix. 55 ; xiv. 25 ; xxii. 61 ; Jn. i. 38 ; xx.
16 ; στραφα: πρόί τίνα, foil, by a fin. verb, [pluming unto
etc., or turned unto and etc.], Lk. vii. 44 ; x. 21 (22) [R" L
T], 23 ; .\.xiii. 28 ; στρίφ(σθαι ds τα οπίσω, to turn one's
self back, Jn. xx. 14 ; els τά ϊθιτη, Act.s xiii. 46 ; εστράφη-
σαν (e'l» Ij Τ TrWH) Ta'is Kapdiats αυτών els Αιγντττον,
[11. V. they turned back in their hearts unto Eijijpt^ i.e. to
their condition there. Acts vii. 39 ; absol. and trop. to
turn one's self sc. irom one's course of conduct, i. e. to
ckanf/e one's mind [cf. \Y. u. s.] : Mt. xviii. 3 and L Τ
Tr AVH in Jn. xii. 40. [Co.mp. : ava-, άπο-, δια-, eK-, em-,
κατά-, pera-, συ(ΐ')-, ύττο- στρ€φω.~\ *
στρηνιαω, -ώ : 1 aor 4στρηνίασα', (fr. στρήνος, q. v.) ; a
■word used in middle and later Comedy for τρυφάν
(cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 381 ; ^Rutherford, Xew Phryn. p.
475 sq. ; W. 25]) ; to be wanton, to live luxuriously : Rev.
xviii. 7, 9. [CoMP. : κατα-στρηνιάω-Ί *
στρήνοϊ, -ovs, TO, [allied w. arepeas, q. v.], excessive
sirenr/lh which longs to break forth, orer-strength ; luxury,
[R. Λ^. wantonness (mrg. luxury)1 : Rev. xviii. 3 (see
Sivapis, d.) ; for '^l^p, arrogance, 2 K. xix. 28 ; eager de-
sire, Lycophr. 438.*
στρουβίον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of στρονθ05), a little bird, esp.
of the sparrow sort, α sparrow : Mt. .\. 29, 31 ; Lk. xii.
6 sq. (Aristot. h. a. 5, 2 p. 539», 33 ; 9, 7 p. 613•, 33 ;
Sept. for ■'ISS.) [Cf. Tristram in B.D. s. v. .Sparrow ;
Survey of West. Palest., 'Fauna and Flora', p. 67 sq.] *
στρωννύω, or στρώνννμι : impf. 3 pers. plur. eσrpωvvυov
[cf. B. 4.5 (39)]; 1 aor. ίστρωσα; pf. pass. ptcp. ίστρω-
fifvof ; ( by metathesis fr. στόρνυμί, στορίννυμι, and this
fr. ΣΤ0ΡΕί2 ; [cf. Lat. sternn, struo, etc. ; Eng. streic,
straw, etc.] ; see Curtius § 227) ; to spread: Ιμάτια iv tj
όδώ, Mt. xxi. S ; els τ. ohov, ^Ik. xi. 8, {irehov π(δάσμασι,
Aeschyl. Ag. 909; e1μaσι πόρον, ib. 921). sc. την ιλίνην
(which Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down often add, and also
Xf'xoi, Χίκτρον, etc. [cf. W. 594 (552) ; B. § 130, 5]) τιν'ι.
Acts ix. 34 [A. V. make thy bed'\ ; to spread with couches
or divans το amyaiov, pass. [A. V. furnished^, Mk. xiv.
15; Lk. xxii. 12. [Comp. : κατά-, ΰπο- στρώνννμι.Ι'
<Γτνγητ05, -όν, (orvyeoj to hate), haled, .-Veschyl. Prom.
592; iletestable \_\. V. hatefuQ: Tit. lii. 3; στυγ?;τόΐ' «.
θeυμισητov πράγμα, of adultery, Philo de decal. § 24 fin. ;
eρωs. lleliod. 5, 29.*
«Γτυγναζω ; 1 aor. ptcp. στνγνάσαί ; (στυγνοί sombre,
gloomy ) ; to be sad, to be sorrowful : prop, eπί Ttwt [ R. V.
Ais countenance fell at etc.], Mk. x. 22 ; metaph. of the
sky covere<l with clouds [A. V. to be iotcering"], Alt. xvi.
3 [T br. λ\'Η reject the pass.]. (Schol. on Aeschyl.
Pers. 4 70; Sept. thrice for 0"3Ι7, to be amazed, aston-
ished, eπί nva, Ezek. xxvii. 35 ; x.xxii. 10 ; arvyvarqs, of
the gloominess of the sky, Polyb. 4, 21, 1.) '
στΐλοβ [RGWH (Trin 1 Tim. iii. 15; Rev. x. 1)],
more correctly στνλοΓ [so L Τ (Tr in Gal. ii. 9 ; Rev. iii.
12)] ; see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v. fin. [cf. Chandler
§§ 274, 275 ; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 43], -ov, i, [fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], Sept. often for '\λ'3^, a pillar,
column : στύλοι rrvpos, pillars of fire, i. e. flames rising
like columns, Rev. x. 1 ; ποιήσω αυτόν στΰΧον ev τώ ναώ
ToO Oeoii μου, i. e. (dropping the fig.) I will assign him a
firm and abiding place in the ev^erlasting kingdom of
God, Rev. iii. 12; used of persons to whose eminence
and strength the stability and authority of any institu-
tion or organization are due. Gal. ii. 9 [where cf. Bp.
Lghtft.] ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 2 and the note in Geb-
hardt and Harnack, (orCXot οίκω•' eισ\ iraiSes άpσeves,
Eur. Iph. T. 57; e.\x. fr. [Jewish writ, are given by
Schoettgen (on Gal. 1. c.) and fr.] eccles. writ, by Suicer,
Thes. ii. p. 1045 sq. ; columen reipublicae, Cic. pro Sest.
8, 19, and often elsewh. in Lat. auth.) ; a prop or sup-
port : τη! ά\ηθeίas, 1 Tim. iii. 15.*
Στωικό; [(WII Στωικόε), LT Στ-οϊκόί, see Tdf.'s note
on Acts as below; 117/. App. p. 152], -ή, -όν, Stoic, per-
taining to the Stoic philosophy, the author of which,
Zeno of Citium, taught at Athens in the portico called
η ποικίλη στοά : οί Στωικοί φιλόσοφοι. Acts xvii. 18,
[(Diog. Laert. 7, 5 ; al.)] *
«TV, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τΰ, Boeot.
του), gen. σοϋ, dat. σοι, ace. σe (which oblique cases are
enclitic, unless a preposition precede ; yet πpόs σe is
written [uniformly in Rec. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb.
(exc. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (e.xc. Mt. .xxvi. 18 ; Acts
xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exc. Mt. xxvi. IS ; Jn. xviL 11, 13 ;
xxi. 22, 23 ; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exc. Mt. .\xvi. 18 ;
Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. x.xi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18,
30 ; 1 Tim. iii. 14 ; Tit. iii. 12) ; also by AVH in Alt. xxv.
39], see eyu>, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq.
[W. § 6, 3 ; B. 31 (27)]) ; plur. ίμe~ιs, etc. ; Lat. lu, etc.,
oos, etc.; ihou, etc., i/e, etc. The nominatives σύ and vμeΐs
are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σν
Bηθλeeμ. .Mt. ii. 6 ; σϋ παιδίον (Lcian. dial. deor. 2, 1),
Ul. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24 ; 1 Tim. vi. 11,
etc.; ipe'is o'l Φαρισαίοι, Lk. xi. 39 ; — or when the pron.
has a noun or a ptcp. added to it in apposition in order to
define it more sharply, as σϋ 'louSaios ων (thou, being a
Jew), Jn. iv. 9, cf. Gal. ii. 14 ; ipeU πονηροί όιτ-6Γ, Alt. vii.
11; — or when several are addressed who are at the
same time particularized, σύ . . . σϋ, Jas. ii. 3 ; also in
antithesis, Ml. iii. 14; vi. 17; xi. 3 ; Mk. xiv 36; Lk.
xvi. 7 ; Jn. ii. 10 ; ui. 2 ; Acts x. 15 ; 1 Co. iii. 23 ; Jas.
ii. 18, and very often; sometimes the antithetic term is
suppressed, but is easily understood from the context:
el σν el, if it be thou, and not an apparition, Mt. xiv. 28 ;
add, Lk. xv. 31 ; xvii. 8, etc.; — or when a particle is
added, as σΰ ουν (at the close of an argument, when the
discourse reverts to the person to be directly addressed),
Lk. iv. 7 ; Jn. viii. 5; Acts x.xiii. 21 ; 2 Tim. ii. 1, 3 ; σύ
8e (in contrasts), Lk. ix. 60 ; 2 Tim. iii. 10 ; Tit. ii. 1 ;
Heb. i. 1 1, etc. ; vpeXs 8e, Mt. xxi. 13 ; Jas. ii. 6 ; καϊ σϋ,
and thou, thou also, thou too, Mt. xi. 23; xxvi. 69, 73;
Lk. X. 15; xix. 19, 42; xxii. 58; plur., Mt. xv. 3, 16: Lk.
xvii. 10 ; before the 2d pers. of the verb where the per-
son is to be emnhasized ^like the Germ, du, ihr eben, du
ffvyyeveia
092
σιτ/κεραννυμΛ
da, ' it 13 thou,' ' ihou art the very man,' etc.), σν (ΐ, Mt.
xxvii. 1 1 ; Mk. xv. 2 ; Lk. xxiii. 3 ; .In. i. 19 ; iii. 10 ; iv.
Γ2; viii. 53; Acts xxiii. 3, etc.; pliir. Lk. ix. 55 liec. ;
σϊι Xf'yfis, ftnas, Mt. xxvi. 25; xxvii. 11 ; Mk. xv. 2 ; it
is iised alsu without special emphasis ([cf. B. § 129, 12,
and] 8ΐ'υίγώ, l),Mk. xiv.68; Jn. viii. 13; Acts vii. 28, etc.
The genitives σον and νμύν, joined to substantives,
have tlie force of a possessive, and are placed — some-
times aftiT the noun, as roi» πόδα σου, Mt. iv. G ; tovs
ά8(λφηϊα• υμών, Mt. v. 4 7, and very often; — sometimes
hi'fure the noun (sec ϊγώ, '■> b.), as σοϋ a'l άμα/ιτύιι, Lk. vii.
48; σοϋ rijt νιότητος, 1 Tim. iv. 12; υμών Si και τρίχΐί,
Mt. X. 30; add, Mk. x. 43 [here Uec. after] ; Lk. xii.
30; Jn. xvi. 6 ; Ko. xiv. IG; 2 Co. i. 24 [here now be-
fore, now after] ; — sometimes between the article and
noun, as την υμών (ΐτιπόθησιν, 2 Co. vii. 7 ; add, 2 Co. viii.
14(13), 14; xiii.9; I'hil. i. 19.25; ii. 30; Col. i. 8. ϊσται
σου ■πάντα (niaa), Lk. iv. 7 [cf. B. § 132, II, I. a.]. It
is added to the jironoun airrir: σοϋ αντή:, Lk. ii. 3S.
On the phrase τι ΐμοι και σοι. see (\ώ,4. [(Fr. Horn. on.)]
σττγγί'νίΐο, as, ή, {συγγ(νήί), fr. Eur. and Thuc. doivn ;
[Sept.] ; a. kinsliip, rchitiuiisliip. b. kindred,
relations collectively, /(imi/)/ : Lk. i. 61 ; Acts vii. 3, 14.*
στιγγενή?, -if, [ace. sing. σνγγ(νη, and in Rom. xvi. 11
Treg. auyyevriv, see άρσην], dat. plur. συγ^(νίσιν and
(in Mk. vi. 4 Τ Tr [WII, also in Lk. u. 44 Wll] ace. to
a barbarous declens., cf. [1 Mace. x. 89] B. 25 (22))
axrf^fvfiaiv, (σϋν and yiVor), [fr. Pind., Aeschyl. down ;
Sept.], of tlie same kin, akin lo, related by blooil, (Plin.
conr/ener) : Mk. vi. 4 ; Lk. ii. 44; .\xi. 16; tivos, I-k. [i.
58]; xiv. 12; Jn. xviii. 2G ; Acts x. 24 : Ko. xvi. 7, 11,21,
[see below] ; ή συγγ. Lk. i. 3G R G Tr (Lev. xviii. 14) ;
in a wider sense, of the same race, a fellow-countryman :
Ro. ix. 3 [(so some take the word in xvi. 7, 11, 21, above;
cf. Bp. Lghtft, on Philippians p. 175)].*
oTi^Ycvts, -ι'δο£, ή, (see the preceding word), a later Grk.
word ([Plut. quaest. Rom. il]; like dytvis, cf. Loh. ad
Phryn. p. 451sq.; cf. AV. 69 (U7); Kuhner i. p. 419 Anm.
8), a kinswoman : Tivot, Lk. i. 36 T> Τ WIL*
(τυγ-γνώμη [Γ AVII συνγ., cf. σΰν. II. fin.], -ijj, ή, (συγ-
■γιγν^σκω, to agree with, to pardon; see γνώμη), fr. [Soph.
and] Ildt. down, pardon, indulr/ence: κατά συγγνώμην. oi
κατ ΐπιταγήν, by way of concession or permission, not by
way of command, 1 Co. vii. 6.*
οτιγ-κάθημαι [Τ WII συν- (cf. σίν, Π. fin.)] ; fr. Hdt.
down ; [.Sept.]; to sit together, to sit with another: μ(τά
τινοί, Mk. xiv. .")4 ; tiw, ivith one. Acts xxvi. 30.*
συγ-καβί'ζω [Τ WII συν- (cf. σίν, II. fin.)] : 1 aor. συι^
ΐκάθισα; {sea καθίζω) ; a. ir -Λη•-: to cause to sit down
lof/ether, place together : τινά, foil, by fV with a dat. of the
place, Eph. ii. C. b. intrans. lo sit down together:
Lk. xxii. 55 [Λvhere Lchm. txt. πίρικαθ-Ί- (Xen., Aris-
tot., Plut., al. ; Sept.) *
συγ-κακοτταθΕω [Τ WH συκ- (cf. σίιν, II. fin.)], -ώ : 1 aor.
Impv. συγκακοπάθησον; (see. κακοπαθίω) ; to suffer hard-
ships together loith one : 2 Tim. ii. 3 L Τ Tr WII ; with a
<lat. com. added, τω tiayye\'i(u, for the benefit of the gos-
pel, to further it, 2 Tim. i. 8. (Eccles. writ.) *
<Γνγ-κοκουχ€'ω [TWII συν- (cf. συν, II. fin.)], -ώ : prea.
pass. inf. -\ύσθαι ; to treat ill with another ; pass, to be
ill-treated in company with, share persecutions or come
into a fellowship of ills: tiW, with one, Ileb. xi. 25. Not
found elsewhere."
στιγ-καλί'ω [Γ WII συν- (cf. σίν, II. fin.)], -ώ ; 1 aor. σνν-
€κά\(σα', Alid., pres. συγκαλούμαι ; 1 slot. συν(κα\€σάμην\
fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for Ντρ ; to call together, assemble:
Ttraf, Lk. XV. G [here Tr mrg. has \iTes. mid.] ; την σττΛ-
pav, Mk. XV. 16; το συνίίριον. Acts v. 21; mid. to cull to-
gether to one's self lei. B. § 135, 5] : Tiv.is, Lk. ix. 1 ; xv.
[6 Tr mrg.], 9 [R G L Tr txt.] ; xxiii. 13 ; Acts x. 24 ;
xxviii. 17.•
οτ»γ-καλύΐΓτω [(cf. σίν, II. fin.)] : pf. pass. ptcp. σχτ/κ(κα-
)^υμμίνο!\ fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for Π33 ; to cocer on all
sides, lo conceal entirely, lo cocer up completely : τι, pass.,
Lk. xii. 2.•
οττ^-κάμιττω [Τ WII συν- (cf. σΰν, II. fin.)] : 1 aor. impv.
σίγκαμψον ; to bend together, lo bend completely : τοκ νώτόν
TiKot, [A. V. to bow down one's buck^ i. e. metaph. to suli-
jt'cl line lo error and hardness of heart, a fig. taken from
the bowing of the back by captives compelled to pass
under the yoke, Ko. xi. 10, fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 24.
(Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.)*
ο-νγ-κατα-βαίνω [Τ WII συν- (cf. σΰν, II. fin.)] : 2 aor.
ptcp. plur. συγκαταβάντα ; to go down icith : of those who
descend together from a higher place to a lower, as from
Jerusalem to Csesarea, Acts xxv. 5. (Ps. xlviii. (xlix.)
18; Sap. X. 14; Aeschyl, Eur., Thuc, Polyb., Plut., al. ;
cf. Lob. ad I'hrvn. p. 398; \_lluthcrford. New Phryn. p.
485]-)•
στ)γ-κατά-θί(Γΐ5 [Τ AVII συν- (cf. σίν, II. fin.)], -ίω9, 17,
(σνγκατατίθημι, q.v.), prop, a putting together or Joint
deposit (of cotes) ; hence approval, assent, agreement, [Cic.
acad. 2, 12, 37 adsensio atfpie adprobatio'] : 2 Co. vi. 16.
(Polyb.. Dion. Hal, Plut., al.) *
ο-υγ-κατα-τ£θημι [Τ WII συν- (cf. σίν, II. fin.)]: Mid.,
pres. ptcp. συ-γκατατιθίμινυι or pf. I'tcp. σνγκατατ(θ€ΐμ(νο!
(see below) ; to deposit together with another; Mid. prop.
lo deposit one's vote in the urn with another (ψηφον τιθίνιη),
hence to consent lo, agree with, vole for : τ^ βουΧή κ. TJj
πρύξιι TWOS, Lk. xxiii. 51 [here L mrg. Τ Tr mrg. WII
mrg. pres. ptcp., al. pf. ptcp.]. (Ex. xxiii. 1, 32 ; Plat.
Gorg. p. 501 c, Isae., Dem., Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
ατ)γ-κατα-ψηφ£ζω [Τ AVII συν- (cf. σνν, II. fin.)] : 1 aor.
pass. συγκατ€\Ι/ηφίσθην ; 1. by depositing (κατά)
a ballot in the urn (i. e. by voting for) to assign one
a place among (σίν), to vole one a place among: τινά
μ(τά τίνων. Acts i. 26. 2. mid. lo vole against with
others, i. e. to condemn tvith others : Plut. Them. 21. Not
found elsewhere.*
σττγ-κΕράννυμι [Τ WII συι^ (cf. σίν, Π. fin.)] : 1 aor.
συνΐχίρασα ; pf . pass. ptcp. συγκικραμίνο! and in L Τ Tr
WH συyreκ(paσμ€Vos [see κ(ράννυμι, init.] ; fr. [Aeschyl,
Soph.], Ildt. down ; to mix together, commingle ; to unite :
σνν€κ. TO σώμα, caused the several parts to combine into
an organic structure, which is the body, [A.V. tempered
the body together^, 1 Co. xii. 24 ; τί τινι, to unite ono
ύ ιτ/κινεω
593
σνγχΐω
thing to another; οίκ ωφίΧησίν . . .μη σνγκικραμίνο!
[so R G Τ WII inrg., but L Tr W'H txt. -vovs} - - ■ άκού-
σασιν, 'the word heard did not profit them, because it
had not united itself by faith to [cf. AV. §31, 10; B.
§ 133, 13] them that heard,' i. e. because the hearers had
not by their faitli let it find its way into their minds
and made it their own ; [or, ace. to the text of L Tr WII
(II. \'.), 'because they had not been united by faith with
tliem lliat heard '], lleb. iv. 2.'
<ητγ-κιν£ω, -ώ : 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. σνν^κΊνησαν ; to moce
tof/elher wil/t others [Aristot.] ; to throw into commotion,
excite, stir up: τόκ Χαόν, Acts vi. 12. (Polyb., I'lut.,
Longin., ah) *
(τυγ-κλείω [TAVII σνι^ (cf. σνν, ΙΓ. fin.)] ; 1 aor. σνν-
«'κλ«σα; Pass., pres. ptcp. συγ-{συν-)κλ(ΐόμ(νο!, Gal. iii. 2'-i
LTTrWIl; but RG ibid. pf. ptcp. «κλίΐσ/ΐί'ΐΌί; fr. ildt.
down; Sept. chiefly for tjd and TJDn, to shut up, (hat.
concludo), i. e. a. to shut up together, enclose, [so
8. V. συν, II. 2 ; but others (e. g. Fritzsche as below ;
Meyer on Gal. iii. 22) would make the σϋν always
intensive, as in b.] : a shoal of fishes in a net, Lk. v.
6. b. to shut up on all sides, shut up completely;
nva eU τίνα or τι, so to deliver one up to the power
of a person or thing that he is completely shut in, as it
were, ivithout means of escape : τινίχ tU άπ(ίθ(ΐαν, Ro.
xi. 32 (e'f ayoiva^ Polyb. 3, 63, 3 ; e:f τοιαΰτην άμηχανίαν
συγ<^fισί?fiff ^Αντίγονος μξτ(μί\ίτο, Diod. 19, U' ; ου σννί•
κΚ(ΐσάί μ€ ΐίί χ^ίιρας ΐχθμην, Ps. χ.\χ. (x.xxi.) ί) ; τά κτήνη
(Is θάνατον, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 50 ; cf. Fritzsche, Ep.
ad Hum. ii. p. 545 sq.) ; also τίνα ύπό τι, under the power
of anything, i. e. so that he is held completely subject
to it : νπο άμαρτίαν, Gal. iii. 22 (the Scripture has shut
up or subjected, i. e. declared them to be subject) ; sc.
V710 i^il/ioi/, with the addition of ets την μίΧΧονσαν πίστιν
αιτοκαλυφθηναι, ib. 23 (see above ad init.) ; on these
words see fis, B. II. 3 c. γ. p. 185' hot.*
<Γυγ-κληρο-νομθ5 [Τ WII συν- (cf. σίν, II. fin.)], -ου, ό, ή,
a/elloic-heir, ujoml-hcir, (άνιψιο! κα\ συγκληρονόμο!, Pliilo,
leg. ad Gaium § 10), (see κληρονόμος 1 b.) : Ro. viii. 1 7 ;
Eph. iii. 6 ; one who obtains something assigned to him-
self with others, a joint participant (see κληρονόμο!, 2) :
with the gen. of the thing, Ileb. xi. 9 ; 1 Pet. iii. 7. Not
found elsewhere.*
<r\ry-Koivuiv€u [T WII συν- (cf. σίν, II. fin.)], -£>; 1 aor.
eubj. 2 ]jers. plur. συγκοινωνήσητί, ptcp. nom. plur. masc.
συγκοινωνήσαντα ; to hecome a partaker together with oth-
ers, or to have fellowship with a thing: with a dat. of the
thing, Eph. v. 11 ; Phil. iv. 14 ; Rev. xviii. 4. (with a
gen. of the thing, Dem. p. 1299, 20; τινί τινο!, Dio Cass.
SV, 41 ; 77, 16.)*
<Γνγ-κοινων05 [Τ WII συν- (cf. συν, II. fin.)], -όν, partici-
pant iriili others in (anything), joint partner : with a gen.
of the thing [cf. W. § 30, .S a.], Ro. xi. 1 7; 1 Co. ix. 23 ;
with the addition of the gen. of the pers. with whom one
is partaker of a thing, Phil. i. 7 ; foil, by tV with a dat.
of tne thing. Rev. i. 9.*
€Γνγ-κομ.ίζω : 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. avvf κόμισαν ; X.
*• carri/ or bring together, to collect [see σύ», II. 2] ; to
88
house crops, gather into granaries : Ildt., Xen., Diod.,
Plut., ah; Job V. 2G. 2. to carry with others, help tn
carrying out, the dead to be burned or buried (Soph.
Aj. 104S; Plut. SuU. 38) ; to bury: Acts viii. 2.'
<Γνγ-κρ£νω [Τ WII συν- (cf. σίν, II. fin.)] ; 1 aor. inf. σνγ-
κρίναι; 1. to join together fitly, compound, combine,
(E|)icharm. in Plut. mor. p. 110 a.; Plat., Aristot., al.):
■πνευματικοί! πνευματικά, 1 Co. ii. 13 (for Paul, in deliver-
ing the things disclosed to him by the Holy Spirit in
speech derived not from rhetorical instruction but re-
ceived from the same divine Spirit, ' combines spiritual
things with sijiritual', adapts the discourse to the
suViject; oilier interpretations are refuted by Meyer
ad loc. ; τηκυματικο'ΐ! is neut. ; [but others would take it
as masc. and give συγκ. the meaning to interpret (R. V.
niarg. interpreting spiritual things to spiritual men) ; cf.
.Sept. Gen. xl. 8, IG, 22; -xli. 12, 15; Judg. vii. 15; uan.
V. 12, etc.; see Ileinrici in Meyer Gte .\ufl.]). 2. ace.
to a use foreign to the earlier Greeks (who used παρα-
;3ύλλω), but freq. fr. the time of Aristotle on (cf. Passow
s. V. 2 ; [L. and S. s. v. II.] ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 278 sq. ;
[W. 23 (22)]), to compare: (αυτούι ίαυτοΐί, 2 Co. χ. 12
(Sap. vii. 29; xv. 18).*
(τνγ-κύΐΓτω [Τ WII συν- (cf. σίν, II. fin.)]; [fr. Hdt
down] ; to bend completely forwards, to be bowed together,
[cf. σίιν, II. 3] : by disease, Lk. xiii. 11. ([Job ix. 27];
Sir. xii. II ; xi.x. 26.)•
σνγκυρία, -as, ή. (συγκυρεΐν, to happen, turn out), acci-
dent, chance : κατά συγκυρίαν, by chance, accidentally,
Lk. X. 31. (Hippocr. ; eccles. and Byzant. writ.; Grk.
writ. fr. Polyb. down more com. use συγκίρησί! and crvy-
κίρημα [W. 24].) •
<Γυγ-χα£ρω [Τ WII συν- (cf. σίν, II. fin.)] ; impf. <rvi'i;^ai-
pov; 2 aor. συνεχάρην [pass, as act., so Veitch (s. v. χαίρω)
etc.; al. act., after the analogy of verbs in -μι] ; to rejoice
with, tale part in another's joy, (Aeschyl., .\rstph., Xen.,
al.) : with a dat. of the pers. with whom one rejoices,
Lk. i. 58 (cf. 14) ; xv. 6, 9 ; with a dat. of the thing, 1 Co.
xiii. 6; lo rejoice together, of many, 1 Co. xii. 2G ; to con-
gratulate (Aeschin., Polyb., [Plut.; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on
Phil, as below ; 3 Mace. i. 8; Barn. ep. 1, 3 (and MiiUer
ad loc.)]) : Avith the dat. of the pers. Phil. ii. 17 sij.*
στΓγ-χ€ω, συγ-χίνω, and σι^/-χίννω, [Τ λ\ΊΙ συν- (cf.
σϋν, II. fin.)] (see ίκχίω, init.) : im[)f., 3 |)ers. sing, σνι*-
χυν€ (.Acts ix. 22 RG LTr, -χυννεν Τ WII), 3 pers. plur.
συνίχεον (Acts x.xi. 27 RGTTrWlI [but some would
make this a 2 aor., see reff. s. v. {κχϊω, init.]) ; 1 aor.
3 pers. plur. συνίχεαν (Acts xxi. 27 L [see ικχέω, init.]);
Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. συγ{Ύ WH συν-^χϋννιται (Acts
xxi. 31 LTTrWH); pf. 3 |iers. sing, συγκίχυται (Acts
xxi. 31 RG), ptcp. fcm. συγ{Ύ WH συν-)κίχυμένη (.\cts
xix. 32 RGLTTrWH); 1 aor. 3 pers. sing, συνιχίθη
(Acts ii. 6 R (; L Τ Tr WH ) ; fr. I lorn, down ; lo pour
together, commingle : ην η εκκλησία συγκεχυμένη, was irreg-
ularly assembled [al. 'in confusion']. Acts xix. 32; to
disturb, Tira, the mind of one, to stir up to tumult or out-
break, Acts xxi. 27, 31 ; lo confound or bewilder, Acts ii,
6 ; ix. 22.•
ανγχ^ραομαι
694
συλαγωγέο)
<nry-xpao)icu [Τ WH <nii»-], -ώμοι ; Ιο use with any one,
tixe jointlji, (Polyb., Diod., [Philo]) ; with the dat. of a
pers., to associate with, to hare dealings with : Jn. iv. 9
[Tdf. cm. WII br. the cl. οϋ γαρ . . . Σαμαρ.].*
σνγ-χύνω and σνγχύννω, see σνγχ€(ύ.
<Γύγ-\υσΊ5, -(ως, η, {συγχίω), [fr. Eur., Thuc, Plat,
down], confusion, disturbance : of riotous persons, Acts
xix. 29 (1 S. V. Π).•
σν-ϊόω [LTTrWH συν- (of. σίν, II. fin.)]; fut. συ-
ζήσω; to lire lot/ether with one [cf. σίν, II. 1] : of physical
life on earth, opp. to συναττοθαικίν, 2 Co. vii. 3 ; τω Χριστώ,
to live a new life in union with the risen Christ, i. e. a
life dedicated to God, Ro. vi. 8, cf. De Wette [or Meyer
ad loc] ; to live a blessed life with him after death,
2 Tim. ii. 11. (Plat., Dem., Aristot., al.) *
«τυ-ζίΰγνυμι : 1 aor. συνίζιυξα; fr. Eur. and Xen. down;
prop, to fasten to one yoke, yoke together : ΓπποιίΓ, Xen.
Cyr. 2, 2, 26 ; trop. to join together, unite : τί or τινά, of the
marriage tie, Mt. xix. 6 ; Mk. x. 9, (χόμοΓ συζίυγνν: άνδρα
και γυναίκα, Xen. oec. 7, 30, and often so in Ork. writ.).*
<Γυ-ίητ€'ω [L Τ Tr WH συν- (cf. συν, II. fin.)], -ώ; inipf.
3 pers. sing, συνιζήτίΐ; a. to seek οτ examine together
(Plat.). b. in the N. T. to discuss, dispute, [ques-
tion (A. V. often)] : absol., [Mk. xii. 28] ; Lk. xxiv. 15;
Ttvi, with one, Mk. viii. 11 ; ix. 14 [RG L] ; Acts vi. 9 ;
in the same sense npas τίνα, Mk. ix. [14 Τ Tr WII], 16
(where read npbs αντοϋς, not with ΙΙεο.""" "'^ G προΓ αΰ-
τούί [see αΰτοϋ, p. *<7]) ; Acts ix. 2!) ; προς ίαυτούς [L Tr
WH mrg. or πρ. aiirois R•"""'' (i] eijuiv. to προς άΧΚή-
Xous, Mk. i. 27 [where Τ WH txt. simply avrois as subj.] ;
irpos iavTous with the addition of an indirect quest, το n'j
etc. with the optat. [cf. B. § 139, GO; AV. § 41 b. 4 c],
Lk. xxii. 23; τί, with the indie, Mk. ix. 10.*
στ)-ζήτη<Γΐ5 [συν- LTrmrg. (cf. avv, II. fin.)], -(ως, η,
(συζητίω), mutual questioning, disputation, discussion :
Acts XV. 2 Rec, 7 R G L Tr mrg. ; xxviii. 29 yet G L Τ
Tr WH om. the vs. (Cic. ad fam. 16, 21, 4 ; Philo, opif.
mund. § 17 fin. [(var. lect.) ; quod det. pot. § 1]; legg.
alleg. 3, 45.)*
σν-ζητητήϊ [LTTrWH συν- (cf. σΰν, II. fin.)], -ov, 6,
(συζητίω), a disputer, i. e. a learned disputant, sophist :
1 Co. i. 20. (Ignat. ad Eph. 18 [quotation].) *
σ-ύ-ζ«γθ5 [LT Tr WII συν- (cf. συν, II. fin.)], -ok, (oT/ffu-
γνυμι), yoked together; used by Grk. writ. [fr. Aeschyl.
down] of those united by the bond of marriage, rela-
tionship, office, labor, study, business, or the like; hence,
α yoke-fellow, consort, comrade, colleague, partner. Ac-
cordingly, in Phil. iv. 3 most interpreters hold that by
the words γνησκ σύζυγε Paul addresses some particular
associate in labor for the gospel. But as the word is
found in the midst of (three) proper names, other
expositors more correctly take it also as a proper name
([WH mrg. Suvfuye] ; see Laurent, Ueber Synzygos in
the Zeitschr. f. d. Luther. Theol. u. Kirche for 1865, p.
1 sqq. [reprinted in his Neutest. Studien, p. 134 sq.]);
and Paul, alluding (as in Philem. 11) to the meaning of
the word as an appellative, speaks of him as ' a genuine
Synzygus ', i. e. a colleague in fact as well as in name.
Cf. Meyer and AViesinger ad loc. ; [Hackett in B. D. Am.
ed. s. V. Yoke-fellow ].'
στ)-ζωο-ΐΓθ«'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. συν(ζα>οποίησα ; to make one
alive together with another (Vulg. convivifico) : Chris-
tians, τω Χριστώ [L br. adds iv, so WH mrg.], with Christ,
Eph. ii. 5; συν τω Χρ. Col. ii. 13; in both these pass,
new moral life is referred to.*
συκάμινο?, -ου, ή, Hebr. ϊΤ^ρψ (of which only the plur.
D'ppiy is found in the O. T., 1 K. x. 27 ; Is. ix. 10 ; Am.
vii. 14 ; once ηίορπ), a sycamine, a tree having the form
and foliage of the mulberry, but fruit resembling the fig
(i. q. συκομορία, q. v. [but Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the
Bible, 2d ed. p. 396 sq. ; BB.DD., etc., regard the syca-
mine as the black-mulberry tree, and the sycomorc as
the fig-mulberry]) : Lk. xvii. 6. (Often in Theophr. ;
Strab. 17, p. 823; Diod. 1,34; Dioscorid. 1, 22.) [Cf.
Vanicek, Fremdworter, p. 54 ; esp. Low, Aram. Pflan-
zennamen, § 332, cf. § 338 ; BB.DD. u. s. ; ' Bible Edu-
cator ' iv. 343; Pickering, Chron. Hist, of Plants, pp.
106, 258.]•
σ-υκή, -rjt, ή, (contr. fr. συκία), fr. Hom. down, Hebr.
njsn, afg-tree: l\It. xxi. 19-21; xxiv. 32; Mk. xi. 13,
20 sq.; xiii. 28 ; Lk. xiii. 6 sq. ; xxi. 29 ; Jn.i. 48(49),
50 (51) ; Jas. iii. 12 ; Rev. vi. 13. [Cf. Ldiv, Aram. Pflan-
zennamen, §3.15.]*
(TDKO-^opca (I.chm. συκομωρία, [Rec. '"■" -μωραία, cf.
Tdf.'s note on Lk. as below; Wil. App. pp. 152 and
151]), -as, ή, (fr. σΰκον and popea the mulberry tree),
i. q. συκάμινος [but see the word, and reff.], α sycomore-
tree : Lk. xix. 4. (Geop. 10, 3, 7.) *
σ-ϋκον, -ου, τό, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. Π3ί<Π, a fig, the
ripe fruit of ή συκη [q. v.] : Mt. vii. 16 ; Mk. xi. 13; Lk.
vi. 44; Jas. iii. 12.*
στ)Κθφαντ€ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. (συκοφάντησα ; (f r. συκοφάντης,
and tliis fr. σΟκοκ 'fig', and φαιι/ω 'to show'. At Athens
those were called συκοφάνται whose business it was to
inform against any one whom they might detect export-
ing figs out of Attica; and as sometimes they seem to
have extorted money from those loath to be exposed, the
name συκοφάντης from the time of Aristophanes down
was a general term of opprobrium to designate a malig-
nant informer, a calumniator; a malignant and base ac-
cuser from lore of gain, [but cf. L. and S. s. v.]; hence
the verb συκοφαντώ signifies) 1. to accuse ivrong-
fully, to calumniate, to attack by malicious devices, (Ar-
stph., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. to exact money wrong-
fully; to extort from, defraud: Lk. iii. 14 [here R. V.
marg. accuse wrongfully'\ ; with a gen. of the pers. and
ace. of the thing, Lk. xix. 8 {τριάκοντα μνάς παρά τίνος,
Lys. p. 177, 32. Sept. for p!y>', to oppress, defraud, .lob
XXXV. 9; Eccl. iv. 1; Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 122; πίνητα,
Prov. xiv. 31 ; ,xxii. 16 ; 7Γτω;^ούΓ, Prov. xxviii. 3).*
σ-υλαγωγί'ω, -ώ ; {συΚη booty, spoil, [cf. σιιλύω, init.],
and Άγω) ; to carry offlmoly: rira. to carry one off as a
captive (and slave), θυγατίρα, Heliod. 10, 35; παρθίνον,
Xicet. hist. 5 p. 96 ; to lead away from the truth and
subject to one's sway [R. V. make spoil of\. Col. ii. 8
(Tatian. or. ad Or. c. 22, p. 98 ed. Otto).*
σνΧάω
595
συμβιβάζω
β-νλάω, -ω : 1 aor. ίσνΚησα ; ([akin to] σύλι; ' spoil '
[allied with σκυΚον (q. v., yet cf.) Curtius p. 696]); fr.
Horn, down ; to rob, despoil : τινά, 2 Co. xi. 8.*
(Γνλ-λο뀫, [Τ WII συν- (cf. σίν, II. fin. ; Tdf. Proleg.
p. 76)], -ω; impf. 3 pers. plur. avviKoKovv, 1 aor. σννι-
\ιϊΚησα ; to talk icith : rivi, with one, Mk. ix. 4 ; Lk. i.x.
30 ; xxii. 4, (E.\. .xx.xiv. 35 ; Is. vii. 6 ; Polyb. 4, 22, 8) ;
/if τά Tivoi, Mt. xvii. 3 ; Acts xx v. 1 2 ; jrpos άλλήλουί [R. V.
spake togetlter one with another^, Lk. iv. 36. [Cf. W. § 52,
4,15.]•
σ-υλ-λαμβανω [sometimes σνν- (see below)] : fut. 2 pers.
sing. συΚλή-^ιι (L TTr WII σνλλι'ιμψι; [see M, μ]), Lk. i.
31 ; pf. [3d pers. sing. συνίίΚηφιν, Lk. i. 30 Trtxt. WII],
ptcp. fem. συν^ίΚηφυΙα [ib. R G L T] ; 2 aor. σννίΧαβον ;
1 aor. pass, σννιλήφθην (L Τ Tr WH σννιΧήμφθην ; see
M, μ); Mid., pres. impv. 2 pers. sing. συ\\αμβάνου (Τ
Tr WH σνν-, cf. σύν, II. fin. ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 7U) Pliil.
iv. 3 ; 2 aor. σννίΚαβόμψ ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ;
Sept. for fSJl and idS ; 1. Active, a. to seize,
take: τινά, one as a prisoner, ^It. xxvi. 55 ; Mk. xiv. 48 ;
Lk. xxii. 54 ; Jn. xviii. 12 [cf. W. 275 (259)] ; Acts i. 16 ;
xii. 3; xxiii. 27; aypav 1χβύων,^\ί.ν. 9. b. to con-
ceive, of a woman (often so in Sept. for Τλ'νπϊ) : absol.
Lk. i. 24 (Aristot. h. a. 7, 1 p. 582', 19 ; gen. an. 1, 19 p.
727'», 8 sq. ; [Plut. de vitand. aere alien. 4, 4 ; cf. AV. 593
(552); B. § 130, 5]) ; with iv yaarpl added, Lk. i. 31;
τινά, a son, [Lk. i. 36] ; with iv τή κοιλία added, Lk. ii. 21 ;
metaph. of ' lust,' whose impulses a man indulges, Jas. i.
15. 2. Jlid. a. to seize for one's self; in a
hostile sense, to make (one a permanent) prisoner : τινά.
Acts x.xvi. 21. b. with the dat. of a pers. to take
hold together with one, to assist, help : Lk. v. 7 ; to succor,
Phil. iv. 3, (Soph. Phil. 282; Plat. Theag. p. 129e.;
Diod. 11, 40 ; in this sense in Grk. writ, more commonly
in the active).*
(Γυλ-λ€'γω [cf. συν, ΤΙ. fin. ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 76] ; fut.
σνλ\€ξω ; 1 aor. συν(λ(ξα ; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing, συλ-
Xiyerai ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. chiefly for DpS ; to gath-
er up [cf. συν, Π. 2] : τα ζιζάνια (for removal fr. the
field), Mt. xiii. 28 sq. 30 ; pass. ib. 40 ; τι από with a gen.
of the thing, Mt. vii. 16 [cf. W. § 58, 9 b. a.] ; τι c'lt with
a gen. of the place, to collect in order to carry off, Mt.
xiii. 41 ; in order to keep, Lk. vi. 44; ri itr τί, into a
vessel, Mt. xiii. 48.*
σνλ-λογίζομοι : (impf. συν(\ογιζόμην Lchm.) 1 aor. συν-
ίλογισάμην; a. to bring together accounts, reckon
up, compute, (Hdt. et sqq.). b. to reckon loith one's
self, to reason, (Plat., Dem., Polyb., al.) : Lk. xx. 5.*
«τυλ-λνπΐω: 1. to affect with grief together : Aris-
tot. eth. Nic. 9, 11, 4 p. 1171", 7. 2. Pass., pres.
ptcp. συΧΚυποίμ(νο! [Τ WII συν- cf. σύν, II. fin. (Trif.
Proleg. p. 76)]; to grieve with one's self ^i^eo σύν, Π. 4
(so Fritz., De Wette, al. ; but al. regard the σύν as ' sym-
pathetic'; cf. Meyer, AVeiss, Morison, on Mk. as be-
low)], be inwardly grieved, (Hdt., Plat., Polyb., Diod.):
of the pain of indignation, ivl τινι, Mk. iii. 5.*
<ηιμ-βα(νω [ξυμ- Rec.•'"^ in 1 Pet. iv. 12 ; see 2, σ, t fin.] ;
impf. σννίβαινον ; 2 aor. συνίβην, ptcp. συμβάί ; \Λ. σνμ-
βίβηκα ; fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; 1. to walk with
the feet near together. 2. to come together, meet wit]!
one ; hence 3. of things which fall out at the same
time, to happen, turn out, come to pass, (so occasionally
in the Sept. for ΤΤΦ and K^P) ; as very often in Grk.
writ. (Sept. Gen. .xiii. 4; xliv. 29), συμβαίνει τι τινι,
something befalls, happens to, one: Mk. x. 32 ; Acts xx. ,
19 ; 1 Co. X. 11 ; [1 Pet. iv. 12]; 2 Pet. ii. 22; το σνμ-
βφηκόί τινι. Acts iii. 10 (Sus. 26); absol. τα συμβ^βψ
κότα, the things that had happened, Lk. xxiv. 14 (1
iMacc. iv. 26; [.Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 22, 17]) ; συνίβη foil,
by an ace. with inf. it happened [A. V. so it mas'] that,
etc. : Acts xxi. 35 [cf. W. 323 (303)], e.xx. fr. prof. auth.
are given by Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 2.•
ο-υμ-βάλλω [συν- ^VH (so Tdf. exc. Lk. .xiv. 31); cf. συν,
II. fin.] ; impf. συνίβαΧλον; 2 aor. συνίβαλον; 2 aor. mid.
συν(βαλόμην; fr. Horn, down; to throw together, to bring
together; a. Xoyovr (Lat. semones conferre), to con-
verse, Eur. Iphig. Aul. 830; with λόγουι omitted [cf.
Eng. confer'], Plut. mor. p. 222 c. (W. 593 (552) ; [B.
145 (127)]): Tiv'i, to dispute with one. Acts xvii. 18
[where A. V. encountered (cf. c. below)] ; προΓ άλλήλουΓ,
to confer with one another, deliberate among them-
selves, Acts iv. 15. b. to bring together in one's
mind, confer rcith one's self [cf. σνν, II. 4], to consider,
ponder: iv ττ/ καρ8ία. to revolve in the mind, Lk. ii. 19
(σνμβαλϊύν τώ λογισ/χω το οναρ, Joseph, antt. 2, 5, 3). c.
intrans. (W. § 38, 1 ; [B. § 130, 4]), to come together, meet :
Tivi, to meet one (on a journey), Acts xx. 14 (Hom. Od.
21, 15 ; Joseph, antt. 2, 7, 5) ; to encounter in a hostile
sense : τινι, lo fight with one (1 Mace. iv. 34 ; 2 Mace,
viii. 23 ; xiv. 17 ; Polyb. 1, 9, 7; 3, 111, 1, and often),
with fis ηό\(μον added, Lk. xiv. 31 (ei's μάχην, Polyb. 3,
56, 6; Joseph, antt. 12, 8, 4; πρόί μάχην, Polyb. 10, 37,
4). Mid. to bring together of one's property, to contribute,
aid, help : πολύ τινι, one. Acts xviii. 27 ; often so in Grk.
auth. also, esp. Polyb. ; cf. Schweighauser, Le.x. Polyb.
p. 5 76 ; Passow s. v. 1 b. a. ; [L. and S. s. v. I. 2] ; Grimm,
Exeget. Hdbch. on Sap. v. 8.*
σ-υμ-βασ-ιλ£ύω [Τ συν- so now WII (in exx. as below) ; cf.
σΰν, II. fin.) : fut. συ/ι|3ασίλ€ΰσω ; 1 aor. συνιβασιΚίυσα ;
to reign together: τινι, with one; prop., Polyb. 30, 2, 4;
Lcian. dial. deor. 16, 2 ; often in Plut. [also in Dion. Hal.,
Strabo] ; metaph. to possess supreme honor, liberty,
blessedness, with one in the kingdom of God : 1 Co. iv. 8
[cf. W. 41 b. 5 N. 2 ; B. § 139, 10] ; 2 Tim. ii. 1 2 ; see
βασιΚίΰω.*
στιμ-βιβάζω [AVH συν (so Tdf. in Eph. iv. 16 ; Col. ii.
19); cf. σΰν, II. fin.]; 1 aor. συν^βίβασα (Acts xix. 33
L Τ Tr AVH, but see below) ; Pass., pres. ptcp. συμβιβατ
ζάμίνο^; 1 aor. ptcp. σνμβιβασθ(1ς; (βιβάζω to mount the
female, copulate with her; to leap, cover, of animals;
allow to be covered, admit to cover) ; 1. to cause to
coalesce, to join together, put together : το σώμα, pass., of
the parts of the body 'knit together' into one whole,
compacted together, Eph iv. 16 ; Col. ii. 19 ; to unite or
knit together in affection, pass.. Col. ii. 2 [cf. W. § 63, 2
a. ; B. § 144, 13 a.] (to reconcile one to another, Hdt. 1,
σνμβουΧβύω
596
σνμτΓαραΎΐνομα*
74 ; Thuc. 2, 29). 2. Ιο put together in one's mind,
to cojnpare; by comparison to gather, conclude, consider:
foil, by on, Acts xvi. 10 (Plat. Hipp. min. p. 3G9 d.; de
rep. 6 p. 501 a.). 3. to cause a person to unite with
one in a conclusion or come to the same opinion, to prove,
demonstrate : foil, by on, Acts ix. 22 ([Aristot. top. 7, ίι
p. l.'il*, 36] ; foil, by ir, [.Aristot. rhct. Alex. 4 p. 1426\
37; etc.]; .Iambi, vit. Pyth. c. 13 § GO ; foil, by the
ace. with inf., Occll. Lucan. 3, 3) ; by a usage purely
Biblical, w. the ace. of a pers., to teach, instruct, one:
1 Co. ii. 16; for ['3Π, Is. .xl. 14; for j;"1in, Ex. xviii.
16; Deut. iv. 9; Is. xl. 13 Alex., Aid., etc.; for ΓΤ^ι'Π,
Ex. iv. 12, 15; Lev. x. 11 ; πΐ'3 ^^ψΠ, Theodot. Dan.
ix. 22. (The reading συΐ'{/ίίί/3ασαζ' in Acts xix. 33, given
by codd. Ν ABetc. [and adopted by LT TrWII] yields
no sense; [but it may be translated (with K. V. mrg.)
'some of the midlitude instructed Alexander', etc.;
R. V. txt. translates it they brought Alexander out of the
multitude, etc.].) *
<Γυμ-βουλ€νω ; 1 aor. συν£βοί\(υσα ; 1 aor. mid. συν-
ίβουλίνσάμην ; fr. [Theogn., Soph.], Ildt. down; Sept.
for |'_j?'^ and I'^IJ ; 1. to give counsel : τινί, Jn.
xviii. 14 ; foil, by an inf. Rev. iii. 18. 2. Mid. to
take counsel with others, lake counsel together, to consult,
delilicrate : foil, by Iva (see iva, II. 2 a.), Mt. xxvi. 4 ;
Jn. xi. 53 [RG Tr mrg.]; foil, by a telic inf., Acts ix.
23.•
σ-υμβοΰλιον, -on, TO, (σι5/ι/3ουλοΓ) ; 1. coHiwe/, which
is given, taken, entered upon, (Plut. Romul. 14) : \αμ-
βάνω (on this phrase see λαμβάνω, I. 6), Mt. xii. 14 ; xxii.
15; xxvii. 1, 7; xxviii. 12; ποιώ, to consult, deliberate,
Mk. iii. 6 [TrtxtWII t.xt. ^SiSnw σ.]; xv. 1 [T WII
mrg. (τοιμάσαντίί σ. ; cf. Weiss ad loc.]. 2. a
council, i. e. an assemlilij of counsellors or persons in con-
sultation (Plut. Luc. 26): Acts xxv. 12 (the governors
and procurators of provinces had a board of assessors
or advisers with whom they took counsel before render-
ing judgment; seeCic. ad fara. 8, 8; Verr. 2, 13; Sueton.
vit. Tiber. 33 ; Lamprid. vit. Alex. Sever, c. 46 ; cf. Jo-
eeph. b.j. 2, 16, 1).*
<η>μβονλο$, -ου, ό, (συν and βου\η), an adviser, coun-
sellor: Ko. xi. 34 fr. Is. xl. 13. (Tragg., [Ildt.], Arstph.,
Xen.. Plat., al.) •
Σνμ(ών, ό, [indecl., Β. 16 (14)], (for deriv. see Σΐμων),
Simeon [so A. V. uniformly (on 2 Pet. i. 1 see 5 below)] ;
1. the second son of Jacob by Leah (Gen. xxix. 3.'i) :
Rev. vii. 7. 2. [R. V. Symeon'}, one of Abraham's
descendants: Lk. iii. 30. 3. that devout Simeon
who took the infant Jesus in his arms in the temple :
Lk. ii. 25 [here Rec.'"''' Σίμιών], 34. 4. Symeon [so
R. v.] surnamed Niger, one of the teachers of the
«hurch at Antioch : Acts xiii. 1. 5. Peter the apos-
tle: Acts XV. 14 [R. V. Syinenn'] ; 2 Pet. i. 1 [here L WII
txt. Σιμών, and A. V. (11. V.) Simon^; r3specting him
8ee Σίμων, 1 and IltVpot, fin.*
ο-υμ-μαθητής [Τ WII συν- (cf. σνν, II. fin.)], -oC, ό, afel-
low-disciple : Jn. xi. 16 (Plat. Kuthyd. p. 272 c. ; Ae.sop.
fab. 48). (Phrynichus says that σνν is not prefixed to
πολίτι;ί, &ημότη!, φυλίτης, and the like, but only to tlujMi
nouns which denote an association which is πρόσκιηροί
i. e. temporary, as συνίφηβοι, συνθιασώτηί, συμπότης-
The Latin also observes the same distinction and saya
coinmilito mens, but not concinls, but civis mens ; see
Phryn. ed. LoJi. p. 471 ; [cf. p. 172; Win. 25].)•
σ-ΐ)μ-μαρτυρ«ω, -ώ [Τ WII συν- (cf. σι!ν, II. fin.)] ; to bear
witness icitli, hear joint witness (with one) : συμμαρτν-
ρονση\• της συνίΐδ/^σίω?, their conscience tilso bearing
Avitness, llo. ii. 15 (i.e. together with the deeds of the
Gentiles, which accord with the law of (iod and so bear
witness [cf. W. 580 (539)]) ; foil, by Sri, Ro. ix. 1 (be-
sides the fact that the close fellowship I have with Chri.st
compels me to tell the truth); τώ τινίίματι ήμων, with
our sjjirit already giving its testimony, l!o. viii. 16.
Mid. pres. I pers. sing, συμμαρτυροϋμαι, I testify on my
own behalf besides (i. e. besides those things which I
have already testified in this book), liev. xxii. 18 Rec;
but the true leading here, μαρτυρώ, was restored by
Grsb. (.Soph., Eur., Thuc, Plat., al.)•
<Π)μ-μ€ρίζω [WII συν- (cf. σνν, II. fin.)]: to divide al
the same time, divide together; to assign a portion; Mid.
pres. 3 pers. plur. συμμιρίζονται : τινί, to divide together
with one (so that a part comes to me, a part to him), [R. V.
hare their portion «vV//], 1 Co. ix. 13. [Diod., Dion. Ilal.,
Diog. Laert.] *
συμ-μί'τοχοϊ [Τ WII συν- (cf. σΰν, II. fin.)], -ov, par•
taling together with one, a joint-partnler : τινόί, οί some-
thing, Eph. iii. 6; v. 7. (Joseph, b. j. 1, 24, 6; Just.
Mart. apol. 2, 13.)*
(τυμ-μνμητήϊ [Τ WH σνν• (cf. σνν, II. fin.)], -ov, 6, an
iniitatiir with olhr-rs: τινός, of one, Phil. iii. 17. Not
found el.sewlicre.*
(Γυμ-μορψ(ζ(ι> [Tdf. συν- (cf. σΰν, IL fin.)] : pres. pass.
ptcp. συμμορφιζι'ιμίνης ; (σύμμυρφος) ; In bring to the same
form with some other pers. or thing, to render like,
( Vulg. confguro) : τινί [R.V. becoming confirmed unlol,
Phil. iii. 10 L Τ Tr WII. Not found elsewhere.*
οπύμ-μορφοΐ, ov, {σΰν and μορφή), having tlie same form
as another [cf. σΰν, II. 1 ], ( Vulg. conformis, cnnfguralus) ;
similar, conformed to, [Lcian. amor. 39] : τινός (cf.
Matthiae §379 p. 864; [W. 195 (184); B. § 132, 23]),
Ro. viii. 2!) (see (Ικών, a.) ; τινί (Nicand. th. 321), Phil,
iii. 21 [(here Tdf. σύνμ.) ; cf. W. 624 (5S0)J.•
<ηιμ-μορφό(ι>, -ά) : ])res. pass. ptcp. σνμμομφονμ(νος ; i.q.
σνμμορφίζω, i\. \.: Pliil. iii. 10 Hec. Nowhere else.*
σ-υμ-τταθΕω [Τ WII σνν- (cf. σύν, Π. fin.)], -ώ : 1 aor.
συνιπάθησα; (συμπαθής); a. to be affected with the
same feeling as another, to sympathize with, (Aristot.,
Plut.). b. in reference to the wretched, to feel for,
hare compassion on, (Vulg. cnmpatior) : τινί, Ileb. iv. 15
[A. V. to be touched with the feeling o/] ; x. 34, (Isocr. p.
64 b.; Dion. Ilal., Plut.).•
«τυμιταθή;, -if, (σΰν and πάσχω), suffering OT feeling the
like with another, sympathetic : 1 Pet. iii. 8, cf. Ro. xii.
15. (Aristot., Theophr., al.) *
στιμ-τταρα-γίνομαι [Τ WH συν- (cf. σΰν, II. fin.)] : 2 aor.
mid. σνμπαρ(•/(νόμην; a. to come together: ini n.
βνμτΓαρακαΚεω
597
ίτυμφυτο^
Lk. xxiii. 48 (Ps. Ixxxii. (Ixxxiii.) 9; Hdt., Thuc, Dem.,
DioJ.). b. to come to one's help : τινί, 2 Tim. iv. 16
R G [al. παραγίν., q. v. fin.] *
στιμ-ΤΓΟρα-καλί'ω [Τ Wll συν- (cf. συν, II. fin.)], -ω : 1
aor. pas.s. inf. σνμηαρακληθήναι ; 1. to call upon or
inrile or exhort at the same time or together (Xen., Plat.,
Pint., al.). 2. to sIrciKjIhcn [A. V. comfort'] ivilh
others (souls; see παρακαλί'ω, II. 4) : συμπαρακληθήναι iv
ίμίν, thiit I with yon mail he comforted amoiirj you, i. e. in
your assembly, with yon, Uo. i. 1 2.*
στ)|ΐ-ΐΓαρα-λομβ(ίνω [T Wll συμ- (of. σύν, Jl. un.)~\; 2
aor. συμπαμίΧα,ίον ; to take along together with (Plat.,
Aristot., I'hit., al.) ; in the N. T. to take with one as a
companion : rtra, Acts xii. 25 ; xv. 37 sq. ; Gal. ii 1.*
σ-υμ.-ΐΓαρα-μ('νω : f ut. συμπαμαμινω ; Ιο abide together with
(Ili|iliiicr., Thuc, Dion. Hal., al.) ; to continue to lice to-
gether: Tivl, with one, Phil. i. 2.j [Ilec. ; al.jrapa/xt'i'w, q. v.]
(Ps. Ixxi. (Ixxii.) 5).•
<Γνμ-πάρ€ΐμι [Τ λΥΗ συν- (cf. σνν, II. fin.)]; to he pres-
ent together : tiw, with one. Acts xxv. 24. [(Ilippocr.,
Xen., Dem., al.)]*
(τυμ-ίΓοΰΓχω [Τ \VH συν- (cf. σνν, II. fin.)] ; to suffer or
feel pain together (in a medical sense, as in Ilippocr. and
Galen) : 1 Co. xii. 26 ; to suffer evils (troubles, persecu-
tions) in like manner with another : Ro. viii. 1 7.*
<η)μ-ΐΓ6'μΐΓω : 1 Άοτ. συνίτκμψα; fr. Ildt. down ; to send
iof/elher with : rira μ(τά Tivos, 2 Co. viii. 18 ; rm, ibid. 22.
[Cf. \V. §52, 4, 15.]*
(τυμ-περι-λαμβάνω [Τ WH συν- (rf. σύν, II. fin.)] : 2 aor.
ptcp. συμπ€μιΚα;ίών ; fr. Plat, and Dem. down; 1.
to comprehend at once. 2. to embrace completely :
τίκα. Acts XX. 10.*
«ηιμ-ιτίνω: 2 aor. avviniov, fr. [Hdt., Arstph.], Xen.
and Plat, down ; to drink with : rivi, one. Acts .x. 41.*
<η)μ-ΐΓ£ΐΓΓω : 2 aor. συνίπ(σον; fr. Ilom. down: to fall
together, collapse, fall in : of a house, Lk. vi. 49 TTr
Wil.•
«τυμ-ιτληρόω [in Acts Τ WII σνν- (cf. συν, II. fin.)], -ώ :
Pass., pres.'iai. συμπ\ηρονσθαί; Ίιη\<{.συν(π^ίηρηΰμην; fr.
Hdt. down ; 1. to fill compleleh/ : συν(π\ημοϋντο
[R. V. the;/ were filling with water], of the navigators,
(as sometimes in Grk. writ, what holds of the ship is ap-
plied to those on board ; cf. Ki/pke, Observv. i. p. 248),
Lk. viii. 23. 2. to complete unlirebj, be fulfilleil : of
time (see ττΚηρόο), 2 b. a.), pass., Lk. ix. 51 [R. V. well
nigh come'] ; .\cts ii. 1.*
στιμ-ΊτνΙγω [Τ WH συν- (cf. σίιν, IT. fin.)] ; impf. συι^
ίπΐΊ-γον ; 1 aor. συνίπνιξα ; pres. pass. 3 pers. plur. συμ-
πνίγηνται; to choke utterly: the seed of the divine word
sown in the mind, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 7, 19, (SevSpa
αυμπνιγόμ(να, Theophr. c. plant. 6, 11, 6); σνμπνϊγονται,
they are choked, i. e. the seed of the divine word in their
minds is choked, Lk. viii. 14 ; τινά, to press round or
throng one so as almost to suffocate him, Lk. viii. 42
[A. V. thronged].'
συμ-ΐΓθλΙτη5 [Τ WH συν (cf. συν, II. fin.)], -ου, δ, (see
βνμμαθητη! and reff.), positexsing the same citizenship
With others, a fellow-citizen: συμποΚΙται των dyiW, spoken
of Gentiles as received into the communion of the saints
i. e. of the people consecrated to God, opp. to ξίνυι κ-
πάροικοι, Eph. ii. 19. (Eur. Ileracl. 826; Joseph, antt.
19, 2, 2; Ael. V. h. 3,44.)*
(Γνμ-ΐΓορ€ύομοι [Τ WH συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]; impf.
συν(πορ(υόμην ; 1. to go or journey together (Eur.,
Xen., Diod.) : rm, with one, Lk. vii. 11 ; xiv. 25 ; xxiv.
15, (Tob. V. 3, 9 ; ημάν ή ψυχή συμπομ(υθ(ΐσα 6(ω, Plat.
Phaedr. p. 249 c. ; μ(τά τινοί, very often in Sept.). 2.
to come together, to assemble : npos τίνα, Mk. x. 1 (Polyb.,
Plut.).*
«τυμιτόσ-ιον, -ου, τό, (σνμπίνω), a drinking-party, enter-
tainment, (Lat. convicium); by nicton. the party itself,
the guests, (Plut. mor. p. 157 a.; 704 d.); plur. rows oj
guests: συμπόσια σνμπΰσια, Hebraist ically for κατά συμ-
πόσια, in parlies, by companies, ([B. 30 (27) ; § 129 a. 3 ;
W. 229 (214); 404 (432)]; see πρασιά), Mk. vi. 39.*
<η)μ-•π•ρ6σ-βύτ£ρθ5 [Τ WH συι^ (cf. σύν, II. fin.)], -ου, 6,
a fellow-elder, Vulg. conxenior, (see πρ(σβύτ(ροί, 2 b.): 1
Pet. V. 1. (Eccles. writ.)'
€Γυμ-φάγω, see συνίσθιω.
0-υμ-φί'ρω ; 1 .aor. ptcp. ovvtviyKavres (Acts xix. 19) ;
fr. [Horn, (in mid.)], Aeschyl., Hdt. down; to bear or
bring together (Lat. confero), i. e. 1. with a refer-
ence to the object, to bring together : W, Acts xix.
19. 2. with a reference to the subject, to bear to-
gether or at the same time ; to carry with others ; to collect
or contribute in order to help, hence to help, be profitable,
be expedient; συμφίρ^ι, it is expedient, profitable, and
in the same sense with a ncut. plur. : with the subject
πάντα, 1 Co. vi. 12; x. 23 ; τι τινι, 2 Co. viii. 10; Λvith
an inf. of the o1)ject (as in Grk. Λvrit.), Mt. xix. 10; 2 Co.
xii. 1 (where L Τ Tr WII have συμφέρον); with the
ace. and inf. .In. xviii. 1 4 ; συμφίριι τινί foil, by iva (see
Iva. Π. 2c. [B. §139,45; W. 337 (316)]), Mt. v. 29 sq.;
xviii. 6 ; Jn. xi. 50 ; xvi. 7. ro συμφίρον, that which is
profitable (Soph., Eur., Xen., Dem., al.) : 1 Co. xii. 7 ;
plur. (Plat, de rep. 1 ]). .Ul e.), Acts xx. 20; advan-
tage, profit, Heb. xii. 1 ; τό συμφ. Tifor (often in Grk.
writ.) the advantai^e of one, one's profit, 1 Co. vii. 35 ;
X. 33, (in both which pass. LT Tr WH read σΰμφορον,
q.v.).•
σ-νμ-φημι [Τ AVII σύν- (cf. συν, Π. fin.)] ; to consent,
confess : τιν'ι foil, by ότι, Uo. vii. 16. (Tragg., Xen.,
Plat.)•
<Γνμ-φορο5, -ov, (συμφίρω,οι. v.), fit, suitable, useful; fr.
[lies., Theogn.], Hdt. down ; 4 Mace. v. 10 ; subst. το
σύμφηρον. adcantage, profit : Λvith a gen. of the pors.
profited, LTTr WH in 1 Co. vii. 35 ; x. 33, [cf. B. § 127,
i9 n.], (plur. τά σύμφορα, often in prof. auth. [fr. Soph,
down]).*
<Γυμ-φυλίτη5, -ου, 6, {σύν and φνλή ; see συμμαθητής),
one who w of the same people, a felloic-countryman,
(Vulg. contribuli^) : 1 Th. ii. 14. (Eccles. writ.) *
<Γχρμ-φ«το5, -oi», (συμφύω), planted together (Vulg. com-
plantatus) ; horn together with, of joint origin, i. β. 1.
connate, congenital, innate, implanted by birth or nature,
(3Macc. iii. 22; Pind., Plat., Aeschyl., Aeschin., -aristot.
σνμφυω
598
Philo de Abrah. § 31 init. ; Joseph, [as, c. Ap. 1, 8,
5]). 2. grown together, united with, (Theophr. de
cans, plant. 5, 5, 2); kindred (Plat. Phaedr. p. 240 a.):
(I σύμφυτοι 'υ€γόναμ€ν τω όμοιώματι τυν θανάτου αυτού,
άλλα κα\ (SC. τ^ όμοιώματι [al. sujiply Χριστώ, and take
the όμοιώματι as a dat. of respect ; for yet another constr.
of the second clause cf. B. § 132, 23J) Ttjs άναστάσιω!
(σόμ€θα, if we have become united with the lilceness of his
death (which likeness consists in the fact that in the
death of Christ our former corruption and wickedness
has been slain and been buried in Christ's tomb), i. e.
if it is part and parcel of the very nature of a genuine
Christian to be utterly dead to sin, we shall be united also
with the li/ceness of his resurrection i. e. our intimate fel-
lowship ivith his return to life will show itself in a new
life consecrated to God, Ro. vi. 5.*
[(τυμ-φύω (Τ WH συχΑ- cf. συν, II. fin.) : 2 aor. pass,
ptcp. nom. plur. fem. σνμφυύσαι ; 1. trans, tn cause
to grow together (Plat., Aristot.). 2. pass, intrans.
to gniii• together, grow with : Lk. viii. 7.* ]
<Γυμ.-ψων€'ο>, -ω; fut. συμφωνήσω ([Mt. xviii. 19 Τ Tr ;
Lk. V. 3U L Τ Tr txt. WHj) ; 1 aor. συνιφώνησα; 1 aor.
pass, συνίφωνήθην, fr. Plat, and Aristot. down ; prop, to
sound together, be in accord ; of sounds and of musical
instruments. In the N. T. trop. to be in accord, to har-
monize, i.e. a. to agree together : Trf pi (as respects)
TWOS, Mt. xviii. 19 (Dion. Hal. 2, 47) ; τινι, with a thing.
Acts XV. 15 (often in Grk. auth.) ; to agree i. e. corre-
spond, of things congruous in nature, Lk. v. 36 ; pass.
συνιφωνήθη ΰμ'ιν, foil, by an inf., (7 was agreed between you
to etc. Acts V. 9. b. to agree with one in making a
bargain, to make an agreement, to bargain, (Polyb., Diod.) :
μ(τά Tivos (K δηναρίου (see fV, II. 4), Mt. XX. 2 ; w. a dat.
of the pers. and gen. of the price, ibid. 13, (συνιφώνησ^ν
μ6τ' αΰτοΰ τριών "Κίτρων άσημου αργυρίου, Act. Thom.
<Γνμ-φώνη<Γΐ5, -ίωί, 17, (^συμφωνία), concord, agreement :
πρύς τίνα, with one, 2 Co. vi. 15. (Eccl. writ.) *
(τυμφωνία, -as, ή. (σύμφωνοι), [fr. Plat, down], music:
Lk. XV. 25. (Polyb. 26, 10, 5 ; [plur. of 'the music of
the spheres,' Aristot. de caelo 2, 9 p. 290', 22 ; al.]) *
σ-ύμ,φωνοϊ, -OK, (συν and φωνή), fr. [Hom. h. Merc. 51 ;
Soph.], Plat., Aristot. down, harmonious, accordant, agree-
ing ; TO σύμφωνον, thing agreed upon, compact, [Epict.
diss. 1, 19, 27] : « συμφώνου, by mutual consent, by
agreement, 1 Co. vii. 5 [cf. W. 303 (285) ; B. § 139, 20]'
<Γυμ-ψηφ(ξω : 1 aor. συνίψήφισα ; to compute, count up :
Tas τιμά:, Acts xi.x. 19. (Mid. tiki, to vote with one, Ar-
stph. Lys. 142.)*
(Γνμι-ψυχο5 [Τ WH σϋν- (cf. συν, II. fin.)], -ο», (συν and
ψυχή), of one mind (Vulg. unanimis) : of one accord,
Phil. ii. 2. (Eccl. writ.) *
στίν [the older form ξύν is still found in some edd. in
composition (as ξυμ-βαίνω, 1 Pet. iv. 12 Rec¥" ; see L.
and S. s. V. init. ; cf. 2, σ, t)], a preposition; it is never
used in the Apocalypse, rarely by Matthew [some four
times (texts vary)], Mark [some five times,or John (three
times)], (who prefer μρτά), more frequently by Luke
[(Gospel and Acts) about 79 times] and Paul [about 39
times ; on the comparative frequency of these prepp. in
the classics, see L. and S. s. v. ad init.]. It takes the Da-
tive after it, and denotes accuuipanimcnt and fellowship,
whether of action, or of belief, or of conilition and e.x.-
perience ; (ace. to the grammarians [cf. Dotialdson, New
Crat. §181; Kruger § 68, 13, 1 ; Kuliner ii. p. 438] ; W.
391 (366), a fellowship far closer and more intimate
than that e.xpressed by μ(τά, although in the N. T.
this distinction is much oftener neglected than observed).
Latin cum, Eng. toith.
I. 1. Passages in which the subject of an active
verb is said to be or to do something σύν τινι; a.
phrases in which σύν is used of accompaniment: (ΙμΙ
σύν τινι i. e. — to be with one, to accotnpang one, Lk. vii. 1 2 ;
viii. 38 (Mk. v. 18 μ(τ αϋτοϋ) ; xxii. 5G (Mt. xxvi. 69 and
Mk. xiv. 67 μβτά) ; Acts xxvii. 2; to associate with one,
Lk. .\xiv.44; Actsiv.l3; xiii. 7 ; Phil. i. 23 ; Col. ii. 5 ;
2 Pet. i. 18 ; ot σύν τινι όντις, the attendants of one on a
journey, Mk. ii. 2ΰ (Mt. xii. 4 and Lk. vi. 4 τoΊsμfτ αυτοϋ);
Acts xxii. 9 ; oi σύν τινι sc. όντα, — either the co/npan-
ioiis of one, Lk. V. 9 ; ix. 32; x.xiv. 24, 33 ; with the noun
added, oi σύν ίμοΊ πάντα άδίλφοί, Gal. i. 2 ; Ιίο. xvi. 14 ;
or one's colleagues, Acts v. 17, 21; oi σύν αΰτω tc-
χνϊται, his fellow-craftsmen. Acts xi.x. 38 ; €ΐμ\ σύν τινι, to
be on one's side. Acts -xiv. 4 (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 77) ; to assist
one, ή χάρις του 6fou (ή) σύν ('μοί, 1 Co. χν. 10. b.
συκ TtKi joined to verbs of standing, sitting, going,
etc. : σταθήναι. Acts ii. 14; στ^και, Acts iv. 14 ; ΐπιστήναι,
Lk. XX. 1 ; Acts xxiii. 27; καθίσαι. Acts viii. 31 ; μίναν,
Lk. i. 56 ; xxiv. 29; Acts xxviii. 16; άκαπιπτίΐκ, Lk. xxii.
14; -yiKfo-iai, to be associated with, Lk. ii. 13; napayivt-
σθαι, to arrive, Acts xxiv. 24 ; (ρχισθαι, Jn. xxi. 3 ; Acts
xi. 12 ; 2 Co. ix. 4 ; άπίρχ^σθαι. Acts v. 26 ; ίΐσϊρχίσθαι,
Actsiii. 8; xxv. 23 ; εισί/και. Acts .xxi. 18 ; συνίρχίσθαι.
Acts xxi. 16 ; ΐξίρχίσθαι, Jn. xviii. 1 ; Acts x. 23 ; xiv.
20; xvi. 3 ; τίορήισθαι, Lk. vii. 6; Acts x. 20; xxiii. 32
[LTTrWH άττΙρχ(σθαι]\ .xxvi. 13; 1 Co. xvi. 4; διο-
ifijfiK, Lk. viii. 1 sq. ; tKwXflK, Acts xviii. 18. with verbs
of living, dying, believing: f^K, 1 Th. v. 10 ; άπο-
θνήσκίΐν, Mt. xxvi. 35 ; Ro. vi. 8 ; πιστίυΗκ, Acts .xviii. 8.
with other verbs: Acts v. 1; xiv. 13; xx. 36; xxi. 5 ;
Phil. ii. 22 ; Jas. i. 11. 2. Passages in which one is
said to be the recipient of some action σύν τινι, or to be
associated with one to whom some action has reference:
- — dative, τιν\ σύν τινι : as edo^e rots άποστόΚοις σύν ο\η
τη εκκλησία, Acts -χν. 22, where if Luke had said και iXj
τη («λησία he would have claimed for the church the
same rank as for the apostles ; but he wishes to give to
the apostles the more influential position ; the same ap-
plies also to Acts xxiii. 15 ; 1 Co. i. 2 ; 2 Co. i. 1 ; Phil.
i. 1. Accusative, σύν τινι (which precedes) τικα or τι
(the pers. or thing added) : Ro. viii. 32 (σύν αύτω, i. e.
since he has given him to us) ; Mk. xv. 27 ; 1 Co. x. 13;
τικα or τ1 σύν τικι (the pers. or thing associated or
added) : Mt. xxv. 27 ; ]\Ik. viii. 34 ; 2 Co. i. 21 ; Col. iL
13 ; iv. 9 ; τ1 σύν τινι, a thing with its power or result,
Gal. v. 24 ; Col. iii. 9 ; tIs or τϊ σύν τινι after passives, as
599
συναινώ
Mt. xxvii. 38 ; Mk. ix. 4 ; Lk. xxiii. 32 ; 1 Co. xi. 32 ;
Gal. iii. 9 ; Col. iii. 3 sq. ; 1 Th. iv. 1 7. 3. It stands
where και might have been used (cf. B. 331 (285)) :
€yeVero όρμη • • • Ιουδαίων συν Tots αμχονσίν αΰτων (equiv.
to και των άρχ• air.), Acts xiv. 5; add, Lk. xxiii. 11 ;
Acts iii. 4; x. 2 ; xxiii. 15; Eph. iii. 18. 4. Of that
whicli one has or carries with him, or with which he is
furnished or equipped (συν άμμασιν, 3 Mace. ii. 7 ; σνν
ottXois, Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 54 ; many other exx. fr. Grk. writ,
are given by Passow s. v. B. I. 2 a. ; [L. and S. I. 4]) :
συν TJi χάριτι ταΰτι;, carrying with him this gift or bounty,
2 Co. viii. 19 RGTcod. Sin. (LTrWH cV rfi χάρ. τ. in
procuring [R. V. in tlie matter of] this benefit) ; σνν τή
Suwi/ifi ToC κυρίου ήμων Ί. Tip. equipped with the power
of our Lord Jesus Christ, 1 Co. v. 4 (so ace. to many in-
terpreters [cf. W. 391 (366)]; but since the N.T. writ-
ers are wont to designate the powers and virtues with
wliich one is equipped by the preposition iv, it is more
correct to connect συν rj δυν. witli συναχθίντων, so that
ή Sivapis T. κυρίου is personified and represented as the
third subject in the gathering; cf. Mt. xviii. 20 [see
Βΰναμις, a. sub fin.]). 5. σνν Χριστώ ζην, to live
with Christ, i.e. united (in spiritual bonds) to him, and
to lead a strong life by virtue of this union, 2 Co. xiii. 4 ;
συν (Rec.) Xfip'i ayyeXov (see χιίρ). Acts vii. 35 L Τ Tr
AVH. 6. Of the union which arises from the ad-
dition or accession of one thing to another : σνν πάσι
τοίτοΐί, our 'healde all this' [W. 391 (366)], Lk. xxiv. 21
(Xeh. v. 18 ; 3 Mace. i. 22 ; Joseph, antt. 17, 6, 5). 7.
On the combination άμα συν, 1 Th. iv. 17; v. 10, see
ιιμα, fin.
II. In composition σϋν denotes 1. associa-
tion, community, fellowship, participation : συνοικίω,
σΰνημι, συγ•/€νης, σνμμορφος, σνζην, συμπάσχ€ΐν, σνγ-
χράσθαί, etc. 2. together, i. e. several persons or
thin5;s united or all in one; as, σν-γκ^ράννυμι, συγκΧιίω,
σχτ/κάΚίω, συλλί'γω, συγκομίζω, etc. 3. completely:
σνγκίπτω, συγκαλύπτω, etc. 4. with one's self, i. e.
in one's mind : συλ\υπίομαι. [but see the word], σύΐΌΐδα,
συν(ί8ησις, συντηρίω; cf. A^iger. ed. Henn. p. 642 sq.
Once or twice in the X. T. after verbs compounded ivith
συν the preposition is repeated before the object [W.
§ 52, 4, 15]: Mt. xxvii. 44 L Τ Tr WII ; Col. ii. 13.
As to its Form, σνν in composition before β, μ, π, φ,
ψ, passes into σνμ-, before λ into συλ-, before γ, κ, χ into
συγ-; before ζ [and σ foil, by a consonant] it is elided,
hence συζην, συζητάω, σνσταυρόω, συστ/λλω. But in the
older manuscripts assimilation and elision are often ne-
glected (cf. iv. III. fin.). Following their authority, LT
Tr WH write συΐ'^άω, συνζητίω, σννζητητης, σννζυγος,
σννστανρόω. σννστρατιωτης, σΰνσωμος ', Τ λ\ II σννβασι-
λ(ύω, συνγνώμη, συνκάθημαι, συνκαθίζω, συνκακοτταθίω, συν•
κακονχ^ω. συρκαλέω, συνκάμτηω, σννκαταβαίνω. σννκατάθΐ-
σις, σννκατατίθημι, συνκαταψηφίζω, συνκίμάνι^νμι. συνκΧίίω,
σννκΚηρονόμος, συνκοινωνίω, συνκοινωνόί, σννκρινω, (Ασύν'
κριτος),σννκύπτω, συι^λαλ^ω. σννΧιητΐω. συνμαθητης.σνί'μαρ-
τυρίω, σννμίτοχος, σννμιμητης, συντταθ^ω, συντταμαγινυμαι.
σνντταμακαΧίω. συνπαραλαμβάνω, σννττάραμι, σννττάσχω.
συιπτΐριΧαμβάΐ'ω. συνπνίγω σννττοΧιτης, σννπορ(νομαι. συν-
7τρ€σβύτ€ροί, σνίΊΐτενάζω. σννστυιχΐω, συνφημι, σννφυω^
συνχαΐρω, σννχράομαι, συνχίω. σΰν\\/νχοί ; L Tr uii'g.
συνζητησις ', Ύ σννμηρφίζω. σννσημον; Tr (τνΐ'στατικό? ;
WH σννβάΚλω. συνβιβάζω, σννμ(ρ'ίζω. σννσχηματίζω.
But L Τ Tr WII retain auyyeVeia, συγ/ίνής. συγκαλύπτω,
συγκυρία, σΰγχυσίζ, σ^λλ€'γω, συμβαίνω, σνμβονΛΐυω, συμ•
βαϋλιον, σύμβουλο!, συμτταθήί, σνμπόσιον, συμφίρω, σύμ-
φορος, συμφυΧίτη!, σύμφυτος, σνμφωνίω, συμφώνησίί
συμφωνία, σύμφωνος (ασύμφωνος), συστρ^φω, σνστροφη ;
ΙαΎ Ττ συμμ(μίζω ; L Τ WII συγγίνίς. συστατικός ; L
Τγ ΛΥΙΙ συμμορφίζω. σύμμορφος. σύσσημον; L Tr συγ-
γνώμη, συγκύθημαι, συγκαθίζω, συγκακοπαθίω, συγκακουχίω,
συΎκα\€ω, συγκάμπτω. συγκατα,ιίαίνω, σνγκατάθ^σις, σνγκα-
τατίθημι, σνγκαταψηφίζω, συγκ^ράνννμι. συγκ\(ίω, συγκλη-
ρονόμος, αυγκοινωνίω, συγκοινωνάς. συγκρίνω, συγκντττω,
συγχαίρω, σνγχίω, σνγχράομαι. συλλαλίω- ίτυλλυττίω, συμ-
βάλλω, σνμβασιλίύω. συμβιβάζω, συμμαθητής, συμμαρτν
ρϊ'ω, συμμέτοχος, σνμμιμητης, σνμηαθΐω, σνμπαραγινομαι,
σνμπαρακαΚίω, συμτταραλαμβάνω, συμπάρ€ΐμι, συμπάσχω,
συμπ€ριλαμβάνω, συμπληρόω, σνμπνίγω. συμπολίτης, συμ-
πορίύομαι, σνμπρ(σβύτ€ρος, σνμφημι. συμφύω. σνμψυχος,
συστξνάζω, συστοιχίω ; L σνλλαμβάι/ω. συσχηματιζω.
Tdf. is not uniform in συλλαμβάνω, συμβάλλω, συμβιβάζω,
σύμμορφος, συμπληρόω, συσχηματιζω ; nor Pr in συλλαμ-
βάνω, συσχηματιζω ; nor \\ II in σχ'λλαμ(3άΐ'ω, συμπλι;ρο'ω.
These examples show that assimilation takes place
chiefly in those words in which the preposition has lost,
more or less, its original force and blends with the
word to which it is prefixed into a single new idea; as
συμβούλιον, συμφ^ριι. σύμφορος. Cf. [.\lex. Buttmann
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1.S62, p. 180] ; Philip Buttmann
(the son) ibid. p. 811 sq. [But see Dr. Gregory's expo-
sition of the facts in the Proleg. to Tdf. p. 73 sq. ; Dr.
Hort in WH. App. p. 149; Mei.iterhans, Gram. d. Att.
Inschr. § 24.]
(τυν-άγω ; f ut. συνάζω ; 2 aor. σννηγαγον ; Pass., pres.
σννάγομαι', pf. ptcp. σννηγμΐνος', 1 aor. συντ^;^^!'; 1 fut.
σνναχθήσομαι; fr. Ilom. down; Sept. chiefly for ηπχ, ]•5Γ3
and ]'3p ; a. to (/ather together, lo gather : with an
ace. of the thing, Lk. xv. 13 ; Jn. vi. 12 sq. ; xv. G ; har- .
vests, oSfv, Mt. XXV. 24, 26 ; with ('ς τι added. Mt. iii. 12 ;
vi. 26; xiii. 30; Lk. iii. 17; πού, Lk. xii. 17; exei, Lk.
xii. 18; σννάγίΐν καρττον (Ις ζωην αιώνιον (see καρπός. 2
d.), Jn. iv. 36 ; συνάγω μ(τά τίνος, Jit. xii. 30 ; Lk. xi. 23 ;
to draw together, colled : fishes, — of a net in which they
are caught, Mt. xiii. 47. b. to bring together, assem-
ble, collect: αιχμαλωσίαν (i. e. αιχμαλώτους), Rev. .xiii. 10
R G ; ei'f αιχμαλωσίαν, i. e. τινός, οι ίσίΐ' αΙχμάΧωτοι, Rev.
.xiii. 10 Led. min. ; to Join together, Join in one (those
previously separated) : τά τ(κνα τοΰ θ(οΰ τά δ^σκορπι-
σμίνα (Ις ίν, Jn. xi. 52, (συ άξίΐν (ΐς ίν τά ϊθνη και ποιήσει*
φιλίαν, Dion. Hal. 2, 45 ; όπως εις φιλίαν σννάξουσι τα
ΐθνη, ibid.) ; to gather together bg convoking : τινάς, Mt.
ii. 4 ; xxii. 10 ; συνίδριον, Λτι. xi. 47 ; την ίκκΚησιαν, Acts
xiv. 27 ; TO πλήθος. Acts xv. 30 ; τινάς e«r with an ace.
of place. Rev. xvi. 16; fir tow πόλεμον, in order to en-
gage in war. Rev. xvi. 14 : xx. 8 ; ίττί τίνα, unto one. Mt.
συνα'^ω'^η
600
συναΧΚάσσο»
xxvii. 27. Pass. Ιο be r/alhered Ί. e. come together, gather,
niefi,[cf.B. 52(45)]: absol, Mt. x.vii. 41 ; xxvii. 17; Mk.
ii. 2 ; Lk. xxii. 66 ; Acts xiii. 44 ; xv. 6 ; xx. 7; 1 Co. v.
4; Rev. xix. 19 ; witli the addition of dt and an ace. of
place, Mt. xxvi. 3 ; Arts iv. 5 ; fit St'invov, liev. xix. 1 7 ;
ίμπροσθίν Tivos. Mt. .\xv. .52 ; eVi τίνα, unto one, Mk. v.
21 ; cVi TO αυτό [see airus. III. 1], Mt. xxii. 34 ; Acts iv.
26 ; till Tiva, against one, Acts iv. 27 ; Trpas τίνα, unto
one, Mt. xiii. 2; xxvii. 62; Mk. iv. 1 ; vi. 30; vii. 1 ; eV
with dat. of the place. Acts iv. 31 ; ev τη (κκΚησία, Acts
xi. 26 : μιτά Tivns, ΛΙι. xxviii. 12 ; with adverbs of place :
oJ, Mt. xviii 20; Acts xx. 8; όπον, Mt. xxvi. 57; Jn.
XX. 19 R G ; iW, Jn. xviii. 2 ; Mt. xxiv. 28 ; Lk. xvii.
37 R G L. c. to lead with one's self sc. unto one's
home, i. e.to receive hoxpitabli/, to entertain, [Α.Λ'. to lake
in'] : ξίνον, Mt. xxv. 35, 38, 43, (with the addition of fir
την οΐκίαν, els τον o'/toi-, Dent. xxii. 2 ; Josh. ii. 18 ; Judg.
xix. IK, etc.). [CoMP. : ίπι-σννάγω.]'
<η)ν-αγωγή. -ή:, ή, (συνάγω), Sept. for 771") and very
often for m;•. In Grk. writ, a bringing together, gather,
ing (as of fruits), a contracting; an assembling together of
men. In the X. T. 1. an as.iemb!// of men: τον
Σατανά, whom Satan governs. Rev. ii. 9 ; iii. 9. 2.
a si/na//oguc, i. e. a. an assemblg of Jetcs formally
gathered together to offer prayer ami listen to the reading
and ex/iosilinn of the llolij Scriptures; assemblies of the
sort were held every sabbath and feast-day, afterwards
also on the second and fifth days of every week [see
reff. below]: Lk. xii. 11 ; Acts ix. 2; xiii. 43 ; xxvi. 11 ;
the name is transferred to an assembly of Christians
formally gathered for religious purposes, Jas. ii. 2 ( Epiph.
haer. 30, 18 says of the .Jewish Christians συναγωγ'ην
ovTot καλοΰσι την ίαυτών (κκλησίαν και ονχι ΐκκλησιαν [cf.
Βρ. Lghtft. on Philip, p. 192]); [cf. Trench, Syn. § 1,
and esp. Harnack's elaborate note on Ilerm. mand. 11,
9 (less fully and accurately in llilgenfeld's Zeitschr. f.
wiss. Theol. for 1876, p. 102 sqq.) respecting the use of
the word by the church Fathers of the 2d, 3d, and 4 th
centuries; cf. llilgenfeld's comments on the same in his
'Hermae Pastor', ed. alt. p. 183 sq.]. b. the build-
ing where those solemn Jewish assemblies are held (Ilebr.
ηθ]3Π n"3, i. e. 'the house of assembly'). Synagogues
seem to date their origin from the Babylonian exile. In
the time of Jesus and the apostles every town, not only
in Palestine but also among the (ientiles if it contained
a considerable number of Jewish inhabitants, had at least
one synagogue, the larger towns several or even many.
That the Jews held trials and even inflicted punishments
in them, is evident from such pass, as Mt. x. 1 7 ; xxiii. 34 ;
Mk. xiii. 9; Lk. xii. 11; xxi. 12; Acts ix. 2; xxii. 19;
xxvi. 11. They are further mentioned in Mt. iv. 23; vi.
2,5; ix. 35; xii. 9; xiii. .54; xxiii. 6; ^Ik. i. 21, 23.29,39;
iii. 1 ; vi. 2; xii. 39; Lk. iv. 15 sq. 20, 28, 33, 38, 44 ; vi. 6;
vii. 5; viii. 41 ; [xi. 43]; xiii. 10; xx. 46: Jn. vi. 59; xviii.
20 [here the anarthrous (so G LTTrAVH) sing, has an
indef. or generic force (R. V. txt. in si/nagogues)]; Acts
vi. 9; ix. 20; xiii. 5, 14, 42 Rec. ; xiv. 1 ; xv. 21 ; xvii.
1,10,17; xviii. 4, 7, 19, 26; xix. 8 ; xxiv. 12; xxvi. 11;
(.Joseph, antt. 19, 6, 3 ; b. j. 2, 14, 4. [5 ; 7, 3, 3; Philo,
(piod omn. prob. lib. § 12]). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Syn-
agogen ; Leijrer in I lerzog ed. 1, xv. p. 299 S(j(j. ; Schilrcr,
N. T. Zeitgeseh. § 27 (esp. ii.) ; Kneucker in Schenkel
V. p. 443 SI).; [Hamburger, Real-Encycl. ii. p. 1142 sqq.;
(Jinsburg in Alex.'s Kitlo, s. v. Synagogue; Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, bk. iii. ch. x.].*
(τυν-αγωνί^ομαι : 1 aor. mid. inf. σνναγωνίσασθαι ; fr.
Thuc. anil Xen. down ; to strire togetlter irilh one, li> help
one in stncing: TiVi iv rais πμοσίνχαΐς, in prayers, i. e. to
offer intense prayers with one, llo. xv. 30; in what sense
intense prayer m.ay be likened to a struggle, see Philippi
ad loc. r(cf. άγωνίζ. in Col. iv. 1 2 and Bp. Lghtft.'s note)].*
στιν-αθλίω, -ώ ; 1 aor. συνηθλησα ; Ιο strive at the same
lime with another: with a dat. commodi [cf. W. § 31, 4],
for .something, Phil. i. 27 ; τινί ίν t»w, together with one in
something, Phil. iv. 3. (univ. to ln'ip, <i<.<ist, uiod. 3, 4.) *
α-υν-αβροΐϊ,ω : 1 aor. ptcp. συνάθροισα! ; pf. pass. ptcp.
συνηθ^οισμίνοί; fr. [Eur., Arstph., al.], Isocr. down; Sept.
chiefly for van and "3.5 ; to gather together with others ;
to assemble : rimzc, Acts xix. 25 ; pass, lo be gathered to-
gether i. e. come logether, Lk. xxiv. 33 R G ; Acts xii. 12.•
oTjv-atpui; 1 aor. inf. σνι/ΰρυι; 1. to take u/> to-
gether with another or others. 2. to bring together
with others : Xoyow, lo cast up or settle accounts, to make a
reckoning iriih, (an expression not found in Grk. auth.),
Mt. xviii. 23 sq. ; μ^τά tivos, Mt. xxv. 19.*
στιν-αιχμ,άλωτοϊ, -o«, ό, a felloiv-prisoner (Vulg. concap-
tivus) : Ro. xvi. 7 ; Col. iv. 10; Philem. 23, (Lcian. asin.
27). [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c. ; Frilzsche, Com. on
Rom. vol. 1. p. xxi. note.] *
<Γυν-οκολουθ£ω, -ώ; nnpf. συνηκοΧούθουν ; 1 aor. συνηκο-
λοϋθησα; fr. .\rstph., Thuc, Isocr. down; to follow lo-
gether icilh others, lo accompang : τινί, one, Mk. v. 37
[ivhere Lchm. άκολου^•]; .xiv. 51 L Τ Tr Wll ; Lk. xxiii.
49.•
«τυν-αλίζω : (συν, and άλί'^ω f r. άλ^Γ, crowded, in a mass ;
[cf. <ίλιισ<ί, init.]); lo gather logether, assemble; pass,
pres. ptcp. «ruraXifOMfvoi; lo be assembled, meet with: τινί,
with one Acts i. 4. where alrols is to be supplied. (Ildt.,
Xen., [Plut. de placit. plul. 902], Joseph., Lcian., Jambl.)
[But Meyer defends the rendering given by some of the
ancient versions (cf. Tdf.'s note ad loc.) eating inlh (de-
riving the word from σvva\os), so A. V. and R. V. mrg. ;
such passages as Manetho 5, 339; Clem. hom. 13, 4 (al-
though Dressel after cod. Ottob. reads here συναυΧ. — yet
the recogn. 7, 29 renders cibnm sumimus) ; Chrysost. iii.
88 c. (ed. Migne iii. i. 101 mid.); 89 a. (ibid, bottom);
91 d. (ibid. 107 mid.), seem to give warrant for this in-
terpretation; cf. Ka/ci-pnnf'r, Opuscc. li. p. 277 sq. But
see at length Woolsey in the Bib. Sacr. for Oct. 1882,
pp. 605-618.]•
οητν-αλλάσ-σ-ω : (see καταλλάσσω) : lo reconcile (ΎΧχηα.,
Xen., Plat., Dio Cass.; in diff. senses by diff. prof, auth.) :
σννηΚΧασσ^ν airotis els eipijmjv, (Vulg. reconcihabal. i. e.
sought to reconcile), conative impf. [cf. B. 205 (178);
R. V. would hare set them at one again], Acts vii. 26 L Τ
Tr WH [see σνν(Χαΰνω'\.'
συναναβαινω
601
ax/vhem
<Γυν-ανα-βα(να : 2 aor. σννανίβην ; to a.tcend at the same
time, come up together with to a higher place : rtvi, with
one, foil, by tls with the ace. of the place, Mk. xv. 41 ;
Acts xiii. 31. (Hdt., Xen., Dion. Hal., Strabo, al.; Sept.
several times for πΗ;'.) *
συν-ανά-χΕίμαι ; 3 pers. plur. impf. awaviKfivro; to re-
cline l(i(jellier,feai't together, [A. V. ' sit down with', 'sit at
meat with', (of. ανάκαμαι)] : τινί, with one, Mt. ix. 10;
Mk. ii. 15; Lk. xiv. 10; Jn. xii. 2 Ilcc; oi avvavuKfl^fvoi,
[' they that sat at meat witli '], the guests, Mt. xiv. 9 ;
Mk. vi. 22, 26 [R G L] ; Lk. vii. 49 ; xiv. 15. ([3 Mace.
T. 39]; eccles. and Byzant. writ.)'
<Γυν-ανα-μ.£γν«μι : to mix tip torjcther; Pass., pres. impv.
2 pers. plur. -μίγη/σθ^; ini. -μίγησθαι ; reflex, and met-
aph. τινί, to keep company with, he intimate with, one :
1 Co. V. 9, 11 ; 2 Th. iii. 14 [lure UT -σθι, h Tr ΛΥΗ
-σβαί]. (Plut. Philop. 21 ; [Sept. Hos. vii. S Alex.].) •
ο-υν-ανα-τταύομαι ; 1 aor. subj. συναιαπαύσωμα^ ', to take
rest together with : rtvi, with oni'. Is. xi. (J ; to sleep together,
to lie irilh, of husband and wife (Dion. Hal., Plut.) ; met-
aph. Tivi, to re.it or refresh one's spirit with one (i. e. to give
and get refreshment by mutual intercourse), Ro. xv. 32
[Lchm. om.].*
στίν-αντάω, -ώ : fut. συναντήσω; 1 aor. σννήντησα; fr.
Horn, down ; Sept. for l'13, E'Jp, πτρ, DID, etc.; to meet
with : Tivi, Lk. ix. [IS WH nirg.], 37 ; xxii. 10 ; Acts x.
2.i; Heb. vii. 1 [cf. B. 21)3 (252)], 10; trop. of events,
to hap/ien, to befall: Acts xx. 22 (Plut. Sulla 2 ; mid. τα
σνναντώμινα, Polyb. 22, Γ, 14; the Hebr. ΓΤ^Ρ also is used
of events, Eccles. ii. 14 ; ix. 11 ; etc.).*
στ)ν-άντησ•ΐ5, -fus, ij, a meeting with (Eurip. Ion 535 ;
Dion. Hal. antt. 4, G6) : elt συνάντησίν tiki, to meet one
[B. § 146, 3], Mt. viii. 34 R G (for ΠΚ'ΐρ'?, Gen. xiv. 17 ;
XXX. 16 ; Ex. iv. 27 ; xviii. 7).*
<Γυν-αντι-λομβανομαι ; 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. sing.
σνναντιΧά'βηταί; to lay holil along with, to xirire to obtain
with others, help in obtaining, (τη! ΐλ(υβ(ρ1αί, Diod. 14, 8);
to take hold with another (who is laboring), hence univ.
to help : τινί. one, Lk. x. 40 ; Ro. viii. 26, (Ps. Ix.xxviii.
(Ixxxix.) 22 ; Ex. xviii. 22 ; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 4).*
στίν-αΐΓ-ά-γω : Pass., pres. ptcp. συνηπαγόμ^να ; 1 aor.
σνναπηχθην; to lead airay with or together: ΐττποι/, Xen.
Cyr. 8,3, 23; τριήρεις. Hell. 5, 1, 23; τον Xaiiv μ(θ' eauroO,
Sept. Ex. xiv. 6 ; pass, metaph. to be curried away tcitlt ;
with dat. of the thing, i. e. by a thing, so as to experi-
ence -with others the force of that which carries away
(Zosim. hist. 5, G, 9 αυτί] η Σπάρτη συναπήγίτοτ^ κοινί) τη;
Έλλάδοί άλώσίΐ), to follow the impulse of a thing to
what harmonizes with it, Gal. ii. 13; 2 Pet. iii. 17; to
suffer one's self to be carried away together with (some-
thing that carries away), rois raneivoXs (opp. to τα ύψηλα
φρονίϊν), i. e. to yield or submit one's self to lowly things,
conditions, employments, — not to evade their power,
Ro. xii. 16.•
ιτυν-αίΓΟ-θνήσ-κοι : 2 aor. συναπϊβανον; to die together;
with dat. of the pers. to die with one (Sir. xix. 10, and
often in Grk. auth. fr. Hdt. down) : Alk. xiv. 31 ; so.
νμάι ίμοί, that ye may die together with me, i. e. that my
love to you may not leave me even were I appointed to
die, 2 Co. vii. 3 ; sc. τω Χριστώ [cf. \V. 143 (136)], to meet
death as Christ did for the cause of (iod, 2 Tim. ii. II.•
στ>ν-αΐΓ-όλλυμι : 2 aor. mid. συναπωλόμι;» ; f r. Hdt. down ;
to destroy together (Ps. xxv. (xxvi.) 9) ; mid. to perish
together {to be slain along with) : τίχί, with one, Heb. xi.
31.•
(Γνν-αΐΓθ-στ€λλιβ : 1 aor. σνναπίστίίΧα ; to send with :
τινά, 2 Co. xii. 18. (Sept.; Thuc, Xen., Dem., Plut.,
al.)•
σ-υν-ορμολογ€ ω, -ώ : pres. pass. ptcp. σκίΌρίίολογουμοΌΐ;
(άρμολόγοί binding, joining; fr. αρμός a joint, and λί'γω);
to join closely together; to frame togetlier: οικοδομή, the
parts of a building, Eph. ii. 21 ; σώμα, the members of
the body, Eph. iv. IC. (Eccles. writ.; classic writ, use
σν:αρμόσσην and σνναρμόζΐΐν.) *
σ-υν-αρττάζω : 1 nor. συνήρπασα; plupf. συΐ'ΐ;ρπ•ά«ίΐ' ; 1
aor. pass, σννηρττάσθην ; to seize by force : τικά. Acts vi.
12; xix. 29 ; to catch or lay hold of (one, so that he is
no longer his own master), Lk. viii. 29 ; to seize by force
and carry away. Acts xxvii. 15. (Tragg., Arstph., Xen.,
al.)•
<ηιν-αυξάνω : to cause to grow together ; pres. inf. pass.
συναυξάνισθαι. Ιο grow together: Mt xiii. 30. (Xen^
Dem., I'olyb., Plut., al.) •
οτινβ-, see σνμβ- and σύν, Π. fin.
στινγ-, see συγγ- and συν, Π. fin.
<ruv-8e<r^os, -ου, ό, (συχδί'ω) ; 1. that u-hich binds to-
gether, a band, bond : of tlie ligaments by which the mem-
bers of the human body are united together (Eur. Hipp.
199 ; Tim. Locr. p. 100 b. [i. e. 3, 3, p. 38G ed. Bekk.] ;
Aristot. h. a. 10, 7, 3 p. 638', 9; Galen), CoL u. 19
[where see Bp. Lghtft.] ; trop. : τώ συνδίσμω της (Ιρήνης,
i. e. τή (ψήντ) ώς συνδίσμω, Eph. iv. 3 {σννδισμος (Ivoiut
κ. φίλιας, I'lut. Xum. 6) ; ^τκ ϊστΊ σύν8. της τίλαότητο•,,
that in which all the virtues are so bound together that
perfection is the result, and not one of them is wanting
to that perfection. Col. iii. 14 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].
CIS σύνδί'τμον αδικίας άρω σί όντα, Ι see that you have
fallen into (cf. «>;, V. 2 a. p. 179', and see below) the
bond of iniquity, i. e. forged by iniquity to fetter souls,
Acts viii. 23 (the jihrase σϋνδ- αδικίας occurs in another
sense in Is. Iviii. 6). 2. that which is bound to-
gether, a bundle: prop. σννδ. (πιστοΚων, Ildian. 4, 12,
11 [6 ed. Bekk.]; hence some interjireters think that
by σϋνδ. αδικίας, in Acts viii. 23 above, Simon is described
as " a bundle of iniipiity ", compacted as it were of iniq-
uity, (just as Cic. in Pison. 9, 21 calls a certain man "ani-
mal ex omnium scelerum importunitate . . . concretura");
but besides the circumstance that this interpretation is
extremely bold, no examples can be adduced of this
tropical use of the noun.•
ο-υν-δί',α : in Grk. auth. fr. Horn, down ; 1. to tie
together, to bind together. ^. to bind or fasten on all
sides. 3. to bind just as (i. e. jointly with) another:
pf. pass. ptcp. ώς συνδ(δ€μ(νοι, as fellow-prisoners [Α.λ'.
as bound with them], Heb. -xiii. 3 {συνδ(δ€μ(νο! τώ ot-
νοχάψ, Joseph, antt. 2, 5, 3).'
συνΒοξάζω
602
συνειΒησι^
<Γυν-8οξάζω: 1 aor. paes. σνν(&οξάσβην; 1. fo ηρ-
proi'e tixjether, join in approving : νόμοι σνν&(Βυξασμίνοί
νπο πάντων, Aristot. pol. 5, 7 (9), 20 p. 1310", 15. 2.
to glorify logelher (Vulg. conglorijico) : sc. σϋν Χριστώ, to
be exalted to the same glory to which Christ has been
raised, Ko. viii. 1 7.'
σ•νιν-δουλο5, -ου, ό, (σΰν and δοΟλοί), α felloio-servanl ;
one who screes the same master icith another ; thus used
of a. the associate of a servant (or slave) in the
proper sense: Mt. xxiv. 49. b. one tcho with others
serves (minhtersto) a l.ing : Mt.xviii. 28, 29, 31, 33. c.
the colleague of one who is Chisl's servant in /luhlishing
the gospel: Col. i. 7 ; iv. 7 [(where cf. Bp. Lghtft.)]. d.
one who with others acknowledges the same Lord, Jesus,
'and obeys his commands: Rev. vi. 11. e. one ivho
with others is subject to the same divine authority in the
Messianic economy : so of angels as the fellow-servants
of Christians, Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 9. (Mocris says, p.
273, 6μό^ον\οζ άττικως, σιίΐ'δουλο? ("λληνικως• But the
word is used by Arstph., Eur., Lysias.) *
(Γνν8ρομ.ή, -qs, ή, {συντρίχω), a running together, con-
course, esp. hostile or riotous : Acts xxi. 30. (Aristot.
rhetor. 3, 10 p. 1411% 29; Polyb., Diod., al. ; 3 Mace,
iii. 8.)•
(rvv-(y(lpa : 1 aor. αννή-γαρα ; 1 aor. pass, σννηγίρθην ;
to raise together, to cause to rise together; Vulg. conresuscito
[also conresurgo, resurgo~\ ; Qra πίτττωκότα, 4 Mace. ii. 14;
pass, to rise together from their seats, Is. xiv. 9 ; trop.
λύπαϊ Koi θρηνου{, Plut. mor. p. 117c.); in the N. T.
trop. to raise up together from moral death (see 6άνα-
ros, 2) to a new and blessed life devoted to God : ημάς
τω Χριστώ (risen from the dead, because the ground of
the new Christian life lies in Christ's resurrection), Eph.
ii. 6; Col. iii. 1 ; tv Χριστώ, Col. ii. 12.*
(Tvvc'Spiov, -ου, τό, (σύν and (Spa ; hence prop. ' a sitting
together '), in Grk. auth. fr. Ildt. down, any assembly
(esp. of magistrates, judges, ambassadors'), whether con-
vened to deliberate or to pass judgment; Vulg. concilium ;
in the Scriptures 1. any session or assembly of per-
sons deliberating or adjudicating (Prov. xxii. 10; Ps. xxv.
(xxvi.) 4 ; Jer. xv. 17; 2 Mace. xiv. 5 ; 4 Alacc. xvii.
1 7) : συνήγαγον συνίδριον, [Α. V. gathered a council^, Jn.
xi. 47. 2. spec. a. the Sanhedrin, the great council
at Jerusalem (Talm. ["ΠΠ^ρ), consisting of seventy-one
members, viz. scribes (see γραμματιΰς, 2), elders, prom-
inent members of the high-priestly families (hence called
άρχκριΐς ; see apxiepevs, 2), and the high-priest, the pres-
ident of the body. The fullest periphrasis for Sanhe-
drin is found in ^It. xxvi. 3 R G ; I\Ik. xiv. 43, 53, (viz.
oi αρχ^ΐ€ρ(ΐς κα\ οι γραμματζΐς και οι πρίσβύτςροι). The
more important causes were brought before this tribunal,
inasmuch as the Roman rulers of Judaea had left to it
the power of trying such cases, and also of pronouncing
sentence of death, with the limitation that a capital
sentence pronounced by the Sanhedrin was not valid
unless it were confirmed by the Roman procurator
(cf. Jn. xviii. 31; Joseph, antt. 20, 9, 1). The Jews
trace the origin of the Sanhedrin to Num. xi. 1 G sq. The
Sanhedrin [A. V. councii] is mentioned in Mt. v. 22;
xxvi. 59 ; Mk. xiv. 55; xv. 1 ; Lk. xxii. 66 ; Acts iv. 15;
V. 21, 27, 34,41; vi. 12, 15; xxii. 30; xxiii. 1, 6, 15, 20,
28; xxiv. 20; used [(as in class. Grk.)] of the place
of meeting in Acts iv. 15. b. the smaller tribunal
or council (so A. V.) which every Jewish town had for
the decision of the less important cases (see κρίσις, 4) :
Mt. X. 17; Mk. xiii. 9. Cf. Win. RW'B. s.v. Syne-
drium ; Leyrer in llerzog ed. 1 s. v. Synedrium [Strack
in ed. 2] ; SchUrer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. 2te Aufl. § 23, II.,
III. [and in Riehm p. 1595 sen].] ; Ilollzmann in Schcnkel
V. p. 440 sqq. ; [BB. DD. s. v. Sanhedrim (esp. Ginshurg
in Alex.'s Kitto) ; Hamburger, Roal-EncycL ii. pp. 1147
-1 155; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 553 sqq. ; Far-
rar. Life of Christ, Excurs. xiii.].*
<Γυν-€ί8η<Γΐ5, -ecus, ή, (συχίίδο:'), Lat. conscientia, [lit.
'joint-knowledge'; see o-w, II. 4], i. e. a. the con-
sciousness (f anything: with a gen of the obj., των αμαρ-
τιών, a soul conscious of sins, Heb. x. 2 (toG μύσουί, Diod.
4, G.") ; συvfiSησιs (ίγ(νής, consciousness of nobility ; a
soul mindful of its noble origin, Ildian. 7, 1,8 [3 ed.
Bekk.]). b. the soul as distinguishing between what
is morally good and bad, prompting to do the former and
shun the latter, commending the one, condemning the other ;
conscience: with a gen. of the subj., ή σ. tivos, Ro. ii.
15 (vvhere the idea of ή συν^Ί^ησις is further explained
by και pera^i . . . η και άπολογουμίνων [cf. W. 580 (539) ;
see άπολογίομαι, 2, and σνμμαρτνρΐω~\) ; Ro. ix. 1 ; 1 Co.
viii. 7 [cf. W. § 30, I a.], 1 0, 1 2 ; X. 29 ; 2 Co. i. 12 ; iv. 2 ;
V. 1 1 ; Heb. ix. 14 (ij τον φαύλου συν(ί$ησις, Philo, fragm.,
vol. ii. p. 6.'>9 ed. Mangey [vi. ]>. 217 sq. ed. Richter]);
η idia συνείδησις, 1 Tim. iv. 2 ; αΧΧη σνν€ί8- i. q. αλ\ον
Tivas συν. 1 Co. X. 29 ; hia την συνιίδησιν, for conscience' '
.<«/.■(', because conscience requires it (viz. the conduct
in question), Ro. xiii. 5 ; in order not to occasion
scruples of conscience (in another), 1 Co. x. 28 ; μη8(ν
avaKpivdv δια την συνύδ (anxiously) questioning nothing,
as though such (juestioning were demanded by con-
science, 1 Co. X. 25, 27 ; διασυν€ίδησιν3(οϋ, because con-
science is impressed and governed by the idea of God
(and so understands that griefs are to be borne accord-
ing to God's will), 1 Pet. ii. 19; ή συνήδ. τοϋ ίΐδώλου, a
conscience impressed and controlled by an idea of the
idol (i.e. by a notion of the idol's existence and power),
1 Co. viii. 7 Rec. ; τ(\€ΐωσαί τίνα κατά την σννιίδησιν (sc.
αυτόν), so to perfect one that his own conscience is sat-
isfied, i.e. that he can regard himself as free from guilt,
Heb. ix. 9 ; ίΚίγχίσθαι νπο τη! συν. Jn. viii. 9 (ύττά του
συνιιδάτο!, Philo de Josepho § 9 fin. ; συνίχ(σθαι rfj συν-
ίΐδ. Sap. xvii. 10); ή συνίίδησιι is said paprvpe'iv, Ro. ix.
1 ; σνμμαρτυρίΐν, Ro. ii. 15 ; το μαρτνριον της σνν. 2 Co.
i. 12. With epithets : άσβινης, not strong enough to
distinguish clearly between things lawful for a Christian
and things unlawful, 1 Co. viii. 7, cf. 10; avveiS. αγαθή,
a conscience reconciled to God, 1 Pet. iii. 21 ; free from
guilt, consciousness of rectitude, of right conduct. Acts
xxiii. 1 ; 1 Tim. i. 5, (Ildian. 6, 3, 9 [4 ed. Bekk.]) ; ?χ(ΐν
συ«ίδ. άγαθήν, 1 Tim. i. 19 ; 1 Pet. iii. 16, (ev ayaOj συν
ι tlBo
603
avvepyo^
(ΐδ. inapxfiv, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 41, 1) ; t\nvavv- κάΚην,
Heb. .xiii. 18 ; συν. καθαρά, 1 Tim. iii. 9; 2 Tim. i. 3, (Clem.
Rum. 1 Cor. 4j, 7,(;f. ayvi] συν. ibid. 1,3; καθαροί rfi συν-
(ώήσα, Ignat. ad Trail. 7, 2) ; άπρόσκοποί, Acts xxiv.
16; πονηρά, a mind conscious of wrong-doing, ileb. x.
22 ([iV συν(ώησ(ΐ πα ηρα, ' Teaching' etc. 4, 14] ; άπρ(-
n-ijs, Lcian. amor. 4'J). ή συνίίδησί! καθαρίζεται από κτλ.
Heb. i\. 14; μολύνεται, 1 Co. viii. 7; μιηίνιται. Tit. i. 15,
{μηδΐν εκουσίως ψεύόεσθαι μηδέ μίαίνείν την αυτού συνείύη-
σιν, Uion. Hal. jud. Thuc. 8. άπασιν ημίν ή συνείοησις
θ(άς, Menand. 597 ρ. 103 ed. Didot ; βροτο'α άπασίν η συν-
ίίδησί! θεό:, ibid. 654 ρ. 101 ed. Didot ; Epictet. fragm.
9 7 represents ή συνείδησι,ι as filling the same office in
adults which a tutor [TraiSaywyik, q- v.] holds towards
boys; with Philo, Plutarch, and others, to συνείδός is
more common. In Sept. once for j,'1'p, Eccl. x. 20 ; [i. q.
conscience. Sap. xvii. 11; cf. Delitzsch, Brief an d. Rom.
p. 11]). Cf. esp. Jahnel, Diss, de conscientiae notione,
qualis fuerit apud veteres et apud Christianos usque ad
aevi medii exitum. Berol. 1S62 [also the same, Ueber den
Begr. Gewissen in d. Griech. Philos. (Berlin, 1872)];
Kahler, Das Gewissen. I. die Entwickelung seiner Na-
meu u. seines Begriffes. i. Alterth. u. N. T. (llalle, 1878);
[also in Herzog ed. 2, s. v. Gewissen; Zezschwilz, Pro-
fangracitat u.s.w. pp. 52-57; Schenkel, s. v. Gewissen
both in Herzog ed. 1, and in his BL. ; P. Ewaltl,Oe
vocis συν. ap. script. Novi Test, vi ac potestate (pp• 91 ;
1SS3) ; other re£f. in .Schaff- Herzog, s. v. Conscience].*
<Γυν-£ϊ8ον, ptcp. συνώών, pf. σύνοίδα, ptcp. fern. gen.
συνεώνία! (Acts y. 2 R G, -ης L Τ Tr WII ; cf. B. 1 2 (1 1 ) ;
[T,//. Proleg. p. 117 ; WH. App. p. 156]) ; (see (ϊδω) ; fr.
Hdt. down; 1. to see {hare seen) together with oth-
ers. 2. to see (have seen) in one's mind, tvith one's
self (cf. Frilzsche, Cora, on Rom. vol. i. p. 120; on Mark
pp. 36 and 78 ; [see συν, II. 1 and 4]), i. e. to understand,
perceive, comprehend : συνιδών, when he had understood
it. Acts xii. 12 [A.V. consiilered~\ ; xiv. 6 [became aware'],
(2 Mace. iv. 41 ; xiv. 26, 30 ; 3 Alacc. v. 50 ; Polyb. 1, 4,
6; 3, 6, 9; etc.; Joseph, antt. 7, 15, 1 ; b. j. 4, 5, 4; Plut.
Them. 7). Perfect <rvvo ι δα [cf. <ru>', U.S.] 1. to
hioiu with another, be privy to [so A.V.] : Acts v. 2. 2.
to know in one's mind or with one's self; to be conscious of:
t\ (μαυτώ, 1 Co. iv. 4 [R. V. know nothing against myself
(cf. m'ight, Bible Word-Book, 2d ed., s. v." 'By')] (την
άδικίαν, Joseph, antt. 1 , 1,4; ex.x. f r. Grk. writ, are given
by Passow s. v. σΰνοώα, a. ; [L. and S. s. v. σΰκοιδα, 2] ;
foil, by on, [Dion. Hal. ii. 995, 9]; Barn. ep. 1, (4) 3).*
<Γύν-ίΐμι, ptcp. gen. phir. masc. συνόντων : impf. 3 pers.
plur. συνησαν; (σύν, and dpi to be) ; fr. Horn. Od. 7, 270
down ; to be with : rm, one, Lk. ix. 18 [WH mrg. σννήντψ
σα»] ; Acts x.xii. 11.*
irvv-ci|u, ptcp. συνιών, (σύν, and (ΐμι to go); fr. Horn.
down; to come together: Lk. viii. 4.*
<Γυν-€ΐσ•-«ρ)ςομαι : 2 aor. σννξίσηΧθον ; to enter together :
Tivt, with one, — foil, by an ace. of the place, Jn. vi. 22;
xviii. 15. (Eur., Thuc., Xen., al. ; Sept.)*
7υν-<'κδη)ΐο5, -ου, ό, ή, (συν, and ίκδημος away from one's
people), a felloic-traveller, companion in travel : Acta
xix. 29 ; 2 Co. viii. 19. ([Diod. fr. lib. 37, 5, 1 and 4 ed.
Dind.]; Joseph, vit. 14; Plut.Oth.5; Palaeph.fab.46, 4.)*
στιν-ίκ-λ€κτ05, -η, -όν, (see εκλεκτός), elected or chosen
(by God to eternal life) together with : 1 Pet. v. 13.*
truv-fXaivu) : 1 aor. συνή\ασα ; fr. Hom. down ; to drive
together, to compel ; trop. to constrain by exhortation,
urge : τινά €i's (Ιρήνην, to be at peace again. Acts vii. 26
R G (fii τόν της σοφίας (ρωτά, Ael. v. h. 4, 15).*
στιν-ίττι-μορτυρίω, -ω, ptcp. gen. sing. masc. συνεπιμαρ-
τυροϋντος ; to attest together with ; to join in bearing wit-
ness, to unite in adding testimony : Heb. ii. 4. (Aristot.,
Polyb., [Plut.], Athen., Sext. Emp. ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
23, 5; 43, 1.)•
στιν-€'ΐπ..τίβη(ΐ.ι : 2 aor. mid. σννεπεθέμην ; to place upon
(or near) together with, help in putting on ; mid. to attack
jointly, to assail together, set upon with, (see ίηιτίθημι,
2 b.) : Acts xxiv. 9 G L Τ Tr λΥΗ [R V. joined in the
charge'] (so in Thuc. 6, 10; Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 3; Plat.
Phileb. p. 16 a. ; Polyb. 5, 78, 4 ; Diod. 1, 21).*
σ^ν-ί'ιτομαι : impf. συναπόμην; fr. Hom. down; to fol-
low with, to accompany : τινί, one. Acts -xx. 4.*
<rvvepY6<i>, -ώ ; impf. 3 ])ers. sing, συνήργει ; (συνεργός,
q. v.); fr. Eur., Xen., Dem. down; Vulg. coiiperor [(in
2 Co. vi. 1 adjuvo)] ; to zcork together, help in work, be a
partner in labor : 1 Co. xvi. 16 ; 2 Co. vi. 1 ; to put forth
power together with and thereby to assist, Mk. xvi. 20;
τινί, with one ή ιτίστις συνηργει το'ις ίργοις, faith (was
not inactive, but by coworking) caused Abraham to pro-
duce works, Jas. ii. 22 [here Trtxt. συνεργεί (hardly
collat. form of συνείργω to unite, but) a misprint for
-yd] ; Tiv'i εις τι (in prof. writ, also προς τι, see Passow
[or L. and S.] s. v.), to assist, help, (be serviceable to)
one for a thing, Ro. viii. 28 [A. V. all things work together
for good] ; τι τινι εις τι, a breviloquence equiv. to συνέρ-
γων τΓορίζω τι τινι, so that ace. to the reading πάντα συι^
εργεί ό θεός the meaning is, 'for them that love God,
God coworking provides all things for good or so that
it is well with them' (Fritzsche), [R. V. mrg. God tcork-
eth all things with them for good], Ro. viii. 28 Lchm. [WH
in br. ; cf. B. 193 (167)], (tauToit τα συμφέροντα, Xen.
mem. 3, 5, 16). Cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. vol. ii. p.
193 sq.•
o-wepYOs, -όν, (σύν and ΕΡΓΟ), [fr. Pind.], Eurip.,
Thuc. down, a companion in work, fellow-worker, (A^ulg.
adjutor [Phil. ii. 25 ; 3 Jn. 8 cooperator]) : in the N. T.
with a gen. of the pers., one who labors with another in
furthering the cause of Christ, Ro. xvi. 3, 9, 21 ; Phil. ii.
25; iv. 3; [1 Th. iii. 2 Rec.]; Philem. 1, 24; θεοί, one
whom God employs as an assistant, as it were (a fellow-
worker with God), 1 Th. iii. 2 (G L txt. WH mrg. but
with τοϋ θεοϋ in br. ; Rec. et al. διάκονον, q. v. 1). plur.:
1 Co. iii. 9 ; with gen. of the thing (a joint-promoter [A. V.
helper]), συν. εσμεν τής χαράς, we labor with you to the
end that we may rejoice in your Christian state, 2 Co. i.
24. fii υμάς, (my) fellow-worker to you-ward, in refer-
ence to you, 2 Co. viii. 23 ; fit την βασ- τ. θεοΰ, for the
advancement of the kingdom of (Jod, Col. iv. 11 ; τη άΧη-
θεία, for (the benefit of) the truth, [al. render (so R. V.)
συνΐρ'χρμαι
604
συνήθεια
'wilh the truth'; see Westcott ad loi•.], S Jn. 8. (2
Mace. viii. 7 ; xiv. 5.) *
<Γυν-<'ρχομαι ; impf. σννηρχόμην ; 2 nor. σννηΚθον, once
(Acts X. 45 Τ Tr Wll) 3 pets. plur. συνήλθαν (see άπίμ-
χοβαι. init.) ; pf. ptcp. <Γvvfλη\vθώς■, phi))f. 3 pers. [)Uir.
σw(λη\vθfισav ; fr. Horn, down (II. in, >2i in tmesis) ;
1. In come loyrtlier, i. e. a. lo asstinhle : absol., ΛΙΙς.
iu.20•, Actsi.6; ii. G ; x.27, xvi.13; .\ix.32; xxi.2J;
[xxii. 30 GLTTrWII]; xxviii. 17; [1 Co. -xiv. 20;
foil, by e/c with gen. of place, Lk. v. 1 7 Lchin. txt.] ; foil.
by «it with an ace. of the place, Acts v. 16 ; npos τίνα,
Jlk. vi. 33 Ilec. ; <Vi ro αυτά [see iVi, C. 1. 1 d.], 1 Co. xi.
20 ; xiv. 23 [here L t\t. ίΚθη]; with a dat. of the pers.
tailh one, whieli so far as the sense is concerned is e(iuiv.
to unio one (for exx. fr. Grk. writ, see Pajsow s. v. 2; [L.
and S. s. v. IT. 1 and 3 ; cf. W. 215 (202)]), Mk. xiv. 53
[here Τ WII txt. om. Tr nir^;. br. the dat.] ; .In. xi. 33;
with adverbs of place : «V^iiSf, Acts xxv. I 7 ; όττου, -In.
xviii. 20 ; [foil, by an infin. of purpose, Lk. v. 15] ; foil.
by ('t, — indicating cither the end, as fir το φαγύν, 1 Co.
xi. 33; or the result, 1 Co. xi. 17, 34; «V (κκλησία, in
sacred assembly [R. V. mrg. m co/i^rp^ai/oii], 1 Co. xi.
18 (\V. § 50, 4 a.). b. Like the Lat. conoenio i. q.
cono: of conjugal cohabitation, Mt. i. 18 [but cf. AVeiss
ad loc. (and the opinions in Meyer)] (Xen. mem. 2, 2,
4 ; Diod. 3, 58 ; Philo de caritat. § 14 ; de fortitud. § 7;
de speciall. legg. § 4 ; Joseph, antt. 7, 8, 1 and 7, 9, 5 ;
ApoUod. bibl. 1, 3, 3) ; with c'n'i το αυτό added, 1 Co. vii.
5 Uec. 2. lo f/n (depart) or corne with one, lo ac-
company one (see ϊρχημαι, II. p. 252'): tiw, with one, Lk.
xxiii. 55 [Trtxt. br. the dat.]; Acts i. 21 [here A. V.
company jciiA]; ix. 39; x. 23,45; xi. 12; with eU το
tpyov added. Acts xv. 38; σϋν tim, Acts xxi. 16.*
<Γυν-€σθ(ω ; imjjf. σννησθίον ; 2 aor. συνίφαγον ; ίο eat
Willi, take food loijether wilh [cf. σνν, II. 1]: τινί, wilh
one, Lk. xv. 2 ; Acts x. 41 ; xi. 3 ; 1 Co. v. 11, (2 S. xii.
17); μΕτά Tivos, Gal. ii. 1 2 ; Gen. xliii. 31 ; Ex. xviii. 12,
[cf. W. § 52, 4, 15]. (Plat., Plut., Lcian.)*
<rivc<ris, -€u)s, ή, (σννίημι, q. V.) ; 1. a running
togelher, a flowing logelhcr: of two rivers, Horn. Od. 10,
515. 2. a. fr. Pind. down, unr/f rs'/nnr/mi/ ; Lk.
ii. 47 ; 1 Co. i. 19 (fr. Is. xxix. 14) ; Ejih. iii. 4 ; Col. ii.
2 ; 2 Tim. ii. 7 ; πνευματική. Col. i. 9. b. Ihe under-
slanding, i. e. the mind xo far forth as it understands : Mk.
xii. 33; Sap. iv. 11. (Sept. for ΠΓ3, njnn, ι^ί'Ί, i,no,
hjO, etc. ; also for S'3tyo, a poem.) [Syn. see σοφία, fin. ;
cf. Bp. Lghlft. on Col. i. 9; Schmidt ch. 147, 8.]•
o-uveros, -ή, -όν, (συνίημι), fr. Find, down, Sept. for 03Π,
1132, etc., intelligent, having understanding, wise, learned:
Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21 ; Acts xiii. 7; 1 Co. i. 19 (fr. Is.
xxix. 14). [Syn. see σοφής, fin.]*
<nJv-cv.SoKe'cu, -ώ ; (see (ϋ8οκίω, init.); a. to be
pleased together wilh, lo approve together (with others) :
absol. (yet so that the thing giving pleasure is evident
from the context). Acts xxii. 20 G L Τ Tr WH ; ivith a
dat. of the thing, Lk. xi. 48 ; Acts viii. 1 ; xxii. 20 Rec.
([Polyb. 24, 4, 13] ; 1 Mace. i. 57 ; 2 Mace. xi. 24). b.
to be pleased at the same time wilh, consent, agree to.
([Polyb. 32, 22, 9] ; 2 Mace. xi. 35) ; foil, by an inf. 1 Ca
vii. 12 sq. [R.V. here be content'] ; w. a dat. of a pers. to
applaud [R. V. consent with], Ro. i. 32. (Diod. ; cedes.
writ.)*
oT)V-eu(DX€ci), -ω : pros. pass. ptcp. συνίνω;^οι5μίκοί : (evv
χίω, to feed abundantly, to entertain ; fr. d and ίχω) ;
lo entertain together; pass. In feast suinpluuu^bj irtlh:
.Tude 12; τινί, Avitli one, 2 Pet. ii. 13. ([Aristot. elk
Eud. 7. 12, 14 [). 1245S 5], .losejjh., Lcian., a!.)*
<Γυν-ίφ-ίστημι : to place over OT appoint together; 2 aor.
συνιπίστην ; lo rise up together : κατά Tivot, against one,
Acts xvi. 22. [(From Thuc. down.)]*
«τνν-ί'χω ; f ut. συνίξω ; 2 aor. συνίσχον ; I'ass., pres.
συνίχομαι; inipf. συν^ιχι'μην, fr. Iloni. down; 1.
lo hold Ingelhcr; any whole, lost it fall to i>icccs or some-
thing fall away from it : το συνίχην τίι ■πάντα, the deity
as holding all things together, Sap. i. 7 (see Grimm ad
loc). 2. to hold together icilh constraitit, lo com-
press, i. e. a. to press together with the hand : τά
&τα, to stop the ears. Acts vii. 57 {το στόμα. Is. Hi. 15;
Toj» ovfjuvov, to shut, that it may not rain, Deut. xi. 1 7 ; 1
K. viii. 3•")). b. lo press on every side : ηνα, Lk. viiL
45 ; with ■πάντοθίν added, of a besieged city, Lk. xix.
43. 3. lo hold completely, i. c. a. to li old fast:
prop, a prisoner, Lk. xxii. 63 (τά αιχμαΚωτα, Lcian. Tox.
39) ; metaph. in pass, to he held by, closely occupied wilh,
any business (Sap. xvii. 19 (20) : lldian. 1, 17, 22, (9
ed. Bekk.); Ael. v. h. 14, 22) : τω λόγω, in teaching the
word. Acts xviii. 5 GLTTrU'll [licre ΙΙ.Υ. constiained
by]. p. to constrain, oppress, of ills laying hold of
one and distressing him; pass, lo he holden wilh i. q.
afflicted icilh, suffering from : νόσοίί, Mt. iv. 24 ; ηυρετω,
Lk. iv. 38 ; Βυσιντίρίω, Acts xxviii. 8 (many exx. fr. Grk.
writ. fr. Ae.schyl. and Ildt. down are given in Passow
s. V. συνέχω, I. a.; [L. and S. s. v. I. 4]); of alTections
of the mind: φόβω, Lk. viii. 37 (υ&υρμω, Ael. v. h. 14,
22; άΚγη8όνι, Pint, de fluv. 2, 1 ; άθυμία, ib. 7, 5 ; 19, 1 ;
\ΰπΐ], 1 7, 3 ; for other exx. see Grimm on Sap. xvii.
10). -y. lo urge, impel: trop. the soul, ή αγάπη . . .
σνν€χ(ΐ ήμάί, 2 Co. V. 14 [Α. V. constrainelh] ; nois (how
greatly, how sorely) συνέχομαι, Lk. xii. 50 [A. V. strait-
ened] ; τω πνίΰματι. Acts .xviii. 5 Rec. συνέχομαι (Κ
των δυο, I am liard pressed on both sides, my mind is
impelled or disturbed from each side [R. V. I am in a
strait betwixt Ihe two], Phil. i. 23.*
«τυνζ-, see συζ-, and σύν, II. sub fin.
στιν-ή8ομαι ; 1. in Grk. writ, chiefly fr. Soph.,
Eur., Xen. down, to rejoice together wilh (another or
others [cf. συν, II. 1]). 2. in the N. T. once lo re•
joice or delight wilh one's self or inwardly (see συν, IL
4) : Tivi, in a thing, Ro. vii. 22, where cf. Fritzsehe ; [aL
refer this also to 1 ; ef. Meyer].*
<Γυνήθ»α, -as, ή, (συνήθης, and this fr. σϋν and ^do{), fr.
Isocr., Xen., Plat, down, Lat. consuetudo, i. e. 1. in-
tercourse (with one), intimacy : 4 Mace. xiii. 21. 2.
custom : Jn. xviii. 39 [cf. B. § 1 39, 45] ; 1 Co. xi. 1 6. 3.
a being used lo : with a gen. of the object to which one
is accustomed, 1 Co. viii. 7 L Τ Tr WH.*
σιτνηΚικιωτη•;
605
owoiKeai
σ-υν-ηλικιώτη$, -ov, ό, (fr. criv, and ηλικία q. v.), one of
the same age, an equal in age : Gal. i. 14. (Diod. 1, 5.3
fin.; Dion. Hal. antt. 10, 49 init. ; but in both pass, the
best codd. have ήλικιώτη: ; [Corp. inscrr. iii. p. 434 no.
4929]; Alciphr. 1, 12). Cf. σνμμαθητήί.'
(τυν-θάιττω ; 2 aor. pass, συνιτάφην ; fr. Aeschyl. and
Hdt. down ; to bury together with : τω Χριστώ, together
with Christ, pass., δια τοΰ βαπτίσματα: fit τον θάνατον sc.
αΰτοΰ. Ho. vi. 4 ; ev τώ βατιτίσματι, Col. ii. 1 2. For all
who in the rite of baptism are plunged under the water,
thereby declare that they put faith in the e.xpiatory
death of Christ for the pardon of their past sins ; there-
fore Paul likens baptism to a burial by which the former
sinfulness is buried, i. e. utterly taken away.*
ο-υν-θλάω, -ώ : 1 f ut. pass, συνθλασβησομαι ; to break to
pieces, shatter, (Vulg. confnngo, conquasso) : Mt. xxi.
44 [but Tom. LTrmrg. AVlIbr. the vs.]; Lk. xx. 18.
(Sept. ; [Manetho, Alex. ap. Athen., Eratosth., Axistot.
(v. 1.)], Diod., Plut., al.) *
σ-νν-θλίβω ; imi>i. σνν(θλίβον: to press together, press on
all sides : τινά, of a thronging multitude, Mk. v. 24, 31.
(Plat., Aristot., Strab., Joseph., Plut.) *
«τυν-βρύιττω, ptcp. nom. plur. masc. σννθρνπτοντί:; to
break in pieces, to crush : metaph. την καρδίαν, to break
one's heart, i. e. to deprive of strength and courage,
dispirit, incapacitate for enduring trials, Acts xxi. 13.
(In eccles. and Byzant. writ.) *
(Tvv-Uta, see σννίημί•
«τυν-ίημι, 2 pers. plur. σννί(τ€, 3 pers. plur. συκίοΰσϋ»
(Mt. xiii. 13 RGT; 2 Co. x. 12 Rec, fr. the unused
form συνύω), and σννίάσιν (2 Co. X. 12 L Τ Tr WH), and
σννίουσιν (Mt. xiii. 13 L Tr Wll fr. the unused συνίω),
subjunc. 3 pers. plur. σννιώσι (KG LTTr in Mk. iv. 12
and Lk. viii. 10, fr. the unused σννύω or fr. α-υνίημι) and
σννίωσι (λΥΙΙ in Mk. and Lk. 11. cc, fr. the unused συνίω),
impv. 2 pers. plur. amlerf, inf. σννΐίΐ/αι, ptcp. σννιων (Ro.
iii. 11 R G Τ fr. σννύω), and σννιων (ibid. L Tr WH, and
often in Sept., fr. σι/ι/ιω), and σννκί! (Jit. xiii. 23 L Τ Tr
Wll ; Eph. v. 1 7 R G ; but quite erroneously σννιων, Grsb.
inMt.l.c. [Alf.inRo.iii.il ; cf. 117/. App. p. 167; T<lf.
Proleg. p. 122]; W. 81(77 sq.); B.48 (42); Fritzscheon
Rom. vol. i. p. 174 sq.); fut. σννήσω (Ro. xv. 21) ; 1 aor.
σννηκα ; 2 aor. subjunc. σννήτί, σννώσι, impv. 2 pers.
plur. ffui/cT€ (Mk. vii. 14 L Τ TrAVH) ; (σνν, and ϊημι to
send) ; 1. prop, to set or bring together, in a hostile
sense, of combatants, Horn. II. 1,8; 7, 210. 2. to
put (as it were) the perception with the thing per-
ceived; to set or join together in the mind, i.e. to under-
stand, (so fr. Horn, down: Sept. for "3 and 4"3ίΐ'Π)
with an ace. of the thing, Mt. xiii. 23, 51 ; Lk. ii. 50
xviii. 34 ; xxiv. 45 ; foil, by ότι, Mt. xvi. 12 ; xvii. 13
foil, by an indirect quest., Eph. v. 17; iVl τοΓγ aprois, 'on
the loaves ' as the basis of their reasoning [see «jri, B. 2
a, a.], Mk. vi. 52 ; where what is understood is evident
from the preceding context, Mt. xiii. 19; xv. 10; Mk.
vii. 14 ; absol., Mt. xiii. 13-15 ; xv. 10 ; Mk. iv. 12 ; viii.
17, 21; Lk viii. 10; Acts vii. 25"; xxviii. 26 sq. ; Rn. xv.
21 ; 2 Co. Ϊ. 12 ; ό σννιων or σιη'ΐωΐ' as subst. [B. 295
(253 sq.) ; W. 109 (104)], the man of understanding,
Hebraistically i. q. a gnnd and upright man (as having
knowledge of those things which pertain to salvation ;
see μωρό:) : Ro. iii. 1 1 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 2). [Syn. see
γινώσκω, fin.] *
σ-υνιστάνω and σννιστάω, see the foil. word.
στ)ν-ί<η-η|ΐι (Ro. iii. 5 ; v. 8 ; xvi. 1 ; 2 Co. x. 18 ; Gal.
ii. 18 Rec. ; ptcp. σννιστάντ^ς, 2 Co. iv. 2 LT Tr ; vi. 4 L
Τ Tr), or σννιστ,ίνω (2 Co. v. 12 : Gal. ii. 18 G L Τ Tr
WH ; inf. σννιστάνιιν, 2 Co. iii. 1 R G Τ WH ; ptcp. σνν
ιστάνων, 2 Co. iv. 2 WH ; vi. 4 AVH ; x. 12,. 18 LTTr
WH), or σννιστάω (inf. σννισταν, 2 Co. iii. 1 L Tr ; ptcp.
συνιστών, 2 Co. iv. 2 Κ G: vi. 4 R G ; x. 18 Rec; see
ioTTj/ji) ; 1 aor. σννίστησα; pf. σννίστηκα; 2 pf. ptcp. σνν-
e(jTis[nom. plur. neut. -τώτα, 2 Pet. iii. S WHmrg.]; pres.
pass. inf. σννίστασθαι ; fr. Hom. Π. 14, 96 down ; 1.
to place together, to set in the same place, to bring or band
together; in the 2 aor., pf. and plupf. intransitively, to
stand with (or near) : συνιστώ: τινι, Lk. ix. 32. 2.
to set one with another i. e. by way of presenting or
introducing him, i. e. to commend (Xen., Plat., Dem.,
Polvb., Joseph., Plut.) : τινά, 2 Co. iii. 1 ; vi. 4 ; x. 12,
IS ;' Tivii Tivi, Ro. xvi. 1 : 2 Co. v. 12 [cf. B. 393 (336)] ;
τινά προί συνιίδησίν tivos, 2 Co. iv. 2 ; pass, υπό nvos, 2
Co. xii. 11, (1 Mace. xii. 43; 2 Mace. iv. 24). 3.
to put together by way of composition or combination,
to teach by combining and comparing, hence to show,
prove, establish, exhibit, [W. 23 (22)] : τί, Ro. iii. 5 ; v. 8,
(fivoiav, Polyb. 4, 5, 6) ; ίαυτοϋί ώί τικίί, 2 Co. vi. 4 ;
with two ace. one of the object, the other of the predi-
cate. Gal. ii. 18 (Diod. 13. 91 ; σννίστησιν airov ιτροφητην,
Philo rer. div. haer. § 52) ; foil, by an ace. with inf. [cf.
B. 274 (236)], 2 Co. vii. 11 (Diod. 14, 45). 4. to
put together (i. e. unite parts into one whole), pf., plupf.
and 2 aor. to be composed of, consist : ΐξ vSaTos κ. δι ίδα-
τοΓ, 2 Pet. iii. 5 [cf. AV. § 45, 6 a. ; (see above, init.)] ; to
cohere, hold together : τα πάντα σννίστηκιν iv αυτώ. Col. i.
17 (Plat, de rep. 7 p. 530 a. ; Tim. p. 61 a. ; [Bonitz's
index to Aristotle (I5erlin Acad, ed.) s. ν.συΐΊστάι/αι], and
often in eccles. writ. ; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.]).'
[σ-υν-κατο-νίνω : 1 aor. ptcp. σννκατανηισα! ; to consent
to, agree with : Acts xviii. 27 WH (rejected) mrg. (Polyb.
3, 52, 6 ; al.) *]
σ-υνκ-, see σνγκ- ]
σ-υνλ-, see σνλλ- cf. σνν, Π. fin.
στινμ.-. see σνμμ- J
oTjv-oSivw; to journey with, travel in company with : vrith
a dat. of the pers., Acts ix. 7. (Hdian. 4, 7, 11 [6 ed.
Bekk.], Lcian., Plut., al. ; Sap. vi. 25.) •
o-uvoSto, -as, ή, (σύνοδος), a Journey in company; by
meton. a company of travellers, associates on a Journey, a
caravan, [A. Λ^ companyl : Lk. ii. 44. (Strab., Plut.,
[Epict., Joseph. ; ξυνοδίία. Gen. xxxvii. 25 cod. Venet.
i. q. family, Xeh. vii. 5, 64, Sept.], al.) '
<Γνν^)ΐ«ω, -ώ ; Ιο dwell together (Vulg. cohabito) : of the
domestic association and intercourse of husband and
wife, 1 Pet. iii. ' : for many exx. of this use, see Passow
8. V. 1; [L. andS. s.v. L 2].'
σννοικο8ομ€ω
606
ο'υντρίβω
<Γυν-οικοδομ<<ι>, -ω: pres. pass, σννοικο^ομοΰμαι; (Vulg.
coatilijiro); ΐο huild together i.e. a. to liuild together
or With others [1 Esdr. v. 65 (116)]. b. to put togeth-
er or construct hij buiitlhig, out of several things to build
up one whole, {οικία €v σννωκοδομημ^νη και σννημμοσμίνη,
of the human bodv, Philo Ue piiiem. et poeu. § 20) : Eph.
ii. 22. (Besides, in Thuc, Diod., Die Cass., Plut.) *
«τνν-ομιλίω, -ώ ; to talk with : τιν'ι, one, Acts -x. 27. (/o
luml intercourse with, [Ceb. tab. 13 ; Joseph, b. j. 5, 13,
1], Epiphan., Tzetz.) *
στιν-ομορί'ω, -ώ ; (συρόμορο!, having joint boundaries,
bordering on, fr. σύν and όμορο!, and this fr. όμΟ! juint,
and tipos a boundary) ; to border on, be contiguous to,
[A. V.jnin. hai-d] : rivi, to a thing, Acts xviii. 7. (Be-
zant, writ.) '
«τυνπϊχή, ης, ή, (συν(χω, q. v.), a holding together, nar-
rowing ; narroics, the contracting part of a way, Horn. II.
23, 330. Mel.apli. straits, distress, anguish : Lk. xxi. 25 ;
with (ca^jSiar added, 2 Co. ii. 4, (contract io an imi,C'ic. Tusc.
1, 37, yu ; opp. to effusio, 4, 31, 66 ; συΐΌ\ην κ. ταλαιπω-
piai>. Job XXX. 3 ; [cf. Judg. ii. 3 ; plur. Ps. xxiv. (.\xv.)
17 Aq.]).•
oTJVir-, see σνμπ-
[«τυνσ•-, see συσ- and συσσ-] cf. σνν, II. fin.
«TuvcTT-, see συστ-
«τνν^άσ-σω: 1 aor. συνϊταξα; fr. Ildt. down; a.
to jiut in order with or together, to arrange ; b. to
{put together), constitute, i.e. to prescribe, appoint, (Aes-
cliin., Dem. ; pliysicians are said συντάσσων φάρμακον,
Ael. V. h. 9, 13; [PIul. an sen. sit gerend. resp. 4, 8]) :
Tm, Mt. xxi. 6 LTrWlI; x.wi. 19; xxvii. 10; Sept.
often for Πΐϊ.*
(τυντί'λίΐα, -as, η, (συιτΕλήί'), completion, consummation,
end, (so in Grk. Λvrit. fr. Pulyb. on ; Sept. cliielly for
nS3 ; for γρ in Dan. xii. 4, 13 ; in otlier senses fr. Aes-
chyl. down) : aiaims or τοϋ αίωροί, Mt. xiii. 39, 40 L Τ Tr
WH, 49 ; xxiv. 3 ; xx\ iii. 20 ; τού αιώνος τούτου, Mt. xiii.
40 R G ; των αιώνων, Ilel). i.x. 26 (see αιών, 3 ]i. 19'' hot.
[cf. llerm.sim. 9, 12, 3 and Ililgenfeld ad loc.]); καψοϋ
and καιρών, Dan. ix. 27; xii. 4 ; των ήμερων, ibid. 13;
άνθρωπου, of liis death. Sir. xi. 27 (25); cf. xxi. 9."
στιν-τίλί'ω, ώ; fut. συντ(Κΐσα>; 1 aor. συι»(τίλ6σα ; Pass.,
pres. inf. συντ(\(Ίσθαι ; 1 aor. σννίτιΧίυθην {.In. ii. 3 Τ
Wll 'rejected' nirg.), ptcp. ovvrtKtat'ui ; fr. Thuc. and
Xen. down; Sept. often for n'73 ; also sometimes for
D'Dn, HB'IJ, etc.; 1. to end together or at the same
time. 2. to end completelg; bring to an end, Jiniiih,
complete: rois λόγουί, Mt. vii. 28 KG; τον ΐΓ(ΐρασμόν,
Lk. iv. 13 ; ήμίρας, pass., Lk. iv. 2 ; Acts xxi. 27, (Job i.
5; Tob. X. 7). 3. to accomplish, bring to fulfilment;
pass, to come to pass, Mk. xiii. 4 ; An'yov, a word, i. e. a
propliecy, Ko. ix. 28 (ρήμα. Lam. ii. 17). 4. to
effect, male, [cf. our conclude] : 8ιαθήκην, Ileb. viii. 8
(Jer. xii. (xxxiv.) 8, IS). 5. to finish,!. e. in a use
foreign to Grk. writ., to make an end of: συν(τ•'Κίσθη 6
oivos Toil γάμου, ^was at an end with], Jn. ii. 3 Tdf. after
cod. Sin. (Ezek. vii. 15 for Sdk ; to bring to an end, de-
stroy, for n^3, Jer. χίτ. 12; xvi. 4).*
στιν^ίμνω; pf. pass. ptcp. συντ(τμημ(νο«; fr. Aeschyl.
and Ildt. down; 1. to cut to pieces, [cf. συν, II
S]. 2. to cut short ; inetaph. to despatcli briejlg, ex
ecute or Jinish quickly ; to hasten, (σνντίμναν sc. την ό&όν,
to take a shortcut, go the shortest way, Ildt. 7, 123 ; sc.
τον \uyov, to siieak briefly, Eur. Tro. 441 ; τάν anuKpiaeit,
to aljridge, sum up. Plat. Prot. p. 334 d. ; e'v βραχύ noWovs
λόγου!, Arstph. Thesm. 1 7S) : Xoyov [<[. v. I. 2 h. a.], to
bring a prophecy or decree speedily to accomplishment,
Ko. ix. 28 ; Xoyot συντιτμημίνος, a short word, i. e. an ex-
pedited prujiliecy or decree, ibid. [KG Tr mrg. in br.]
(both instances fr. Sept. of Is. x. 23) ; cf. Fritzsche ad
loc. vol. ii. p. 350.*
σ-υν-τηρί'ω, -ώ : iuqif. 3 pers. sing, συνιτηρα ; pres. pass.
3 pers. plur. συντηρούνται; [fr. Aristot. de plant. 1, 1 p.
816*, 8 down]; a. /o prasei'De (a thing from perish-
ing or being lost) : ri, pass. (opp. ίοάπάλλυσθαι), Mt. ix.
1 7 ; Lk. V. 38 [T Wll om. Tr br. the cl.J ; τινά, to guard
one, keep him safe, fr. a plot, Mk. vi. 20 (ίαυτον άναμάρ-
τητον, 2 Mace. xii. 42 [cf. Tob. i. 1 1 ; Sir. xiii. 1 2]). b.
to keep icithin one's self, keep in mind (a thing, lest it be
forgotten [cf. συν, II. 4]) : πάντα τα ρήματα, Lk. ii. 19 (το
ρήμα iv tji καρ8ία μου, Dan. vii. 28 Theod. ; την γνώμηρ
παρ' ίαυτω, Polyb. 31, 6, 5 ; [absol. Sir. xxxix. 2]).*
ο-υν-τ6θημι: Mid., 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. συνϊθ^ντο; plpf•
3 pers. plur. συν(τίθ€ΐντο\ fr. Ilom. down; topulicith or
together, to pilace together; to join together ; Mid. a.
to place in one's mind, i. e. to resolve, determine; to
make an agreement, to engage, (often so in prof. writ. fr.
Ildt. down ; cf. Passow s. v. 2 b. ; [L. and S. s. v. B. II.]) :
συνιτίθίΐντο, they had agreed together [W. § 38, 3], foil,
by iva, Jn. ix. 22 [W. § 44, 8 b.] ; συνίθ^ντο, they agreed
together, foil, by τοΟ with an inf. [B. 270 (232)], Acts
xxiii. 20 ; they cocenanted, foil, by an inf. [B. u. s.], Lk.
xxii. 5. b. to assent to, to agree to : Acts xxiv. 9
I!ec. [see συνιπιτίθημι.'] (τινί, Lys. in llarpocr. [s. v. Ka/j-
kIvos] p. I'll), 9 lickk.).•
ο•νν-τόμω5, (συντίμνω), [fr. Aeschyl., Soph., Plat, down],
adv., concisely i. e. briefly, in few words : άκοϋσαί tivos,
Acts xxiv 4 (ypayjrai, Joseph, c. Ap. 1,1; δίδασκαν, ibid.
1, 6, 2 ; [iiVfiv, ibid. 2, 14, 1 ; (ξαγγίλλίΐν, Mk. xvi. WH
(rejected) 'Shorter Conclusion']); for exx. fr. Grk.
writ, see Passow [or L. and .S.] s. v. fin.*
(τυν-τρί'χω ; 2 aor. συνέδραμαν; fr. [Hom.], Aeschyl.,
Ildt. down; 1. to run together: of the gathering
of a multitude of people, c'ltei, Mk. vi. 33 ; npos τίνα, Acts
iii. II. 2. to run ά\οώ'^ with others; nietaph. /o rusA
icith i. e. cast one's self, plunge, 1 Pet. iv. 4. [ΟΌλιρ. :
(■πισυντρίχω.] *
οτυν-τρίβω, ptcp. neut. τρ'ιβον Lk. ix. 39RGTr, τρΊ-
βον Ι. Τ Wll (cf. Veit(di s. v. τρίβω, fin.) ; fut. συντρίψω;
1 aor. auverpiyfra ; Pass., pres. συντρίβομαι ; pf- inf. σ-υν-
τίτρίφθαι [KGTrWII; hut -τμ'ιφθαι LT (cf. Veitch
U.S.)], ptcp. συντίτριμμίνος \ 2 fut. συντριβήσομαι; fr.
Ildt. [(?), Eurip.] down; Sept. very often for fTC>; to
break, to break in pieces, shirer, [cf. σΰν, II. 3] : κάΧαμυν,
Mt. xii. 20 ; tos vtSas, pass. Mk. v. 4 ; τό άλάβαστρον (the
sealed orifice of the vase [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Alabaster]),
συντριμμα
607
σύρω
Mk. χίν. 3 ; οστοϋν, pass. Jn. xbt 36 (Ex. xii. 46 ; Ps.
xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 21); τα σκ(νη, Kev. ii. 27; to tread
down : τον 2αταναν iiro tous πόδοΓ (by a pregn. constr.
[W. § 6G, 2 d.]), to put Satan under foot and (as a con-
queror) trample on him, Ro. xvi. 20 ; to break down,
cruxh : τινά, to tear one's body and shatter one's strength,
Lk. ix. 39. Pass, to suffer extreme sorrow and be, as it
were, crushed : oi συντιτριμμίνοι την καρδίαν [cf. W. 229
(215)], i. q. o! ΐγοντίί την καρδίαν σνντ^τρψμίνην, [Α. V
the broken-hearted], Lk. iv. 18 liec. fr. Is. Ixi. 1 ([cf. Ps.
xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 19; cxlvi. (cxlvii.) 3, etc.] ; ατιντριβηναι
τή διάνοια, Polyb. 21, 10, 2; 31, 8, 11; to'is φρονημασι,
Died. 11, 78; [rats ίλπίσίΐ', 4,66 ; ταίί ψυχαΐί, 16, 81]).*
σ-ύν^ριμμα, -ros, τό, (συντρίβω), Sept. chiefly for 13ΐ^ ;
1. that tchich is broken or shattered, a fracture : Aristot.
de audibil. p. 802", 34 ; of a broken limb, Sept. Lev. xxi.
19. 2. trop. calamiti/, ruin, destruction: Ro. iii. 16,
fr. Is. lix. 7, where it stands for -\\ύ, a devastation, laying
waste, as in xxii. 4 ; Sap. iii. 3 ; 1 Mace. ii. 7 ; [etc.].*
α-ύν-τροψο$, -ου, ό, (σνντρίφω), [fr. Hdt. down], 7iour-
ished with one (Vulg. collactaneus [Έ,ηζ. foster-brother]) ;
brought up with one ; univ. companion of one's child-
hood and youth : τιιό'ϊ (of some prince or king), Acts
xiii. 1. (1 Mace. i. 6 ; 2 Mace. ix. 29 ; Polyb. 5, 9, 4 ;
Diod. 1, 53 ; Joseph, b. j. 1, 10, 9 ; Ael. v. h. 12, 26.) *
Συντίχη and (so Tdf. edd. 7, 8 ; cf. Lipsius, Gramm.
Untersuch.p. 31; [Γ;//. Proleg. p. 103; Kuhner §84 fin.;
on the other hand. Chandler § 199]) Συντυχή, ή, [ace.
-Tji/], Synttjche, a woman belonging to the church at
Philippi : Phil. iv. 2. (The name occurs several times
in (irk. inscrr. [see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. c.].)*
«τυν^τυγχάν» : 2 aor. inf. συντνχ(ΐν ; f r. [Soph.], Hdt.
down; to meet with, come to [A. V. come a/] one : with a
dat. of the pers., Lk. viii. 19.*
<Γυν-υπο-κρίνο|ΐαι. : 1 aor. pass, συνυπικρίθην, with the
force of the mid. [cf. B. 52 (45)]; to dissemble with:
Ttvi, one. Gal. ii. 13. (Polyb. 3, 92, 5 and often; see
Schweiyhaeuser, Lex. Polyb. p. 604; Plut. Marius, 14,
17.)*
Krvv-wovpyia, -ω ; (ύπουργ/ω to serve, fr. iirovpyos, and
this fr. υπό and ΕΡΓΩ); to help together: ηνί, by any
thing, 2 Co. i. 11. (Leian. bis accusal, c. 1 7 συναγωνι-
ζομίνης της ηδονής, rjiTCp αϋτ^ τα πολλά ξυννπουργύ.) *
στινφ-, see συμφ- Ι
οτ)νχ-, see συγχ- Ι cf. συν, II. fin.
ο-υνψ-, see σνμψ- |
στιν-ωδίνω ; a. prop, to feel the pains of travail
with, be in travail together : oiSf ίττΐ των ζώων τας ωδίνης 6
σύνηικος και συναδίνα ye τα πολλά ωσπ(ρ και ά\(κτρυόνα,
Porphyr. de abstin. 3, 10 ; [cf. Aristot. eth. Eud. 7, 6
p. 1240", 36]. b. metaph. to undergo agony (like a
woman in childbirth) along xcith : Ro. viii. 22 (where
σΰν refers to the several parts of wliicli ή κτίσις consists,
cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; κακοΊς, Eur. 1 1 el. 727.*
σ-υνωμοσ-Οα, -as, η, (συνόμνυμι), fr. Arstph. and Thuc.
down, a swearing together ; a conspiracy : συνωμοσ'ιαν
ποκΊν (see ποκ'ω, I. 1 c. p. 525" top). Acts xxiii. 13 Rec. ;
ποκΊσθαι (see ποκ'ω, I. 3), ibid. L Τ Tr WH.»
Σνράκουσ-αι [so accented commonly (Chandler §§ 172,
1 75) ; but ace. to Pape, Eigennamen, s. v., -κοϋσαι in
Ptol. 3, 4, 9 ; 8, 9, 4], -ων, a'l, Syracuse, a large maritime
city of Sicily, having an excellent harbor and surrounded
by a wall 180 stadia in length [so Strabo 6 p. 270; "but
this statement exceeds the truth, the actual circuit being
about 14 Eng. miles or 122 stadia" (Leake p. 279) ; see
Diet, of Geogr. s. v. p. 1007'•]; now Siragosa: Acts
xxviii. 12.*
SvpCo, -Of, ή, Syria ; in the N. T. a region of Asia,
bounded on the N. by the Taurus and Amanus ranges,
on the E. by the Euphrates and Arabia, on the S. by
Palestine, and on the W. by Phoenicia and the !Mediter-
ranean, [cf. BB.DD. s. v. Syria ; Ryssel in Herzog ed. 2,
s. V. Syrien ; cf. also Αντιόχεια, 1 and /Δαμασκός] : Mt. iv.
24; Lk. ii. 2; Acts xv. 23, 41 ; xviii. 18; xx. 3 ; xxi. 3;
Gal. i. 21. [On the art. with it cf. W. § 18, 5 a.] *
Σίρο5, -ου, ό, a Syrian, i. e. a native or an inhabitant
of Syria : I>k. iv. 27 ; fem. Συ'ρα, α Syrian woman, Mk.
vii. 26 Tr WII mrg. [(Hdt., al.)]*
Συροφοίνισ-σα (so Rec. ; a form quite harmonizing
with the analogies of the language, for as Κίλίξ forms
the fem. ΚΛισσα, θμά| the fem. θράσσα, άναξ the fem.
άνασσα, so the fem. of Φοίνιξ is always, by the Greeks,
called Φοίνισσα), Συροφοινίκίσσα (so LTWII ; hardly a
pure form, and one which must be derived fr. Φοινίκη ;
cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 296 sq. ; W. 95 (91)), Έυμαφοι-
νίκισσα (Grsb. ; a form which conflicts with the law of
composition), -ης, ή, (Tr WH mrg. Σνρα Φοινίκισσα), a
Syrophcenician woman, i. e. of Syrophoenice by race,
that is, from the Phoenice forming a ])art of Syria (Sjpo
being prefixed for distinction's sake, for there were also
Λ,ιβυφυίνικίς, i. e. the Carthaginians. The Greeks in-
cluded both Phoenicia and Palestine under the name
ή Έυρία; hence Συρία η Παλαιστίνη in Hdt. 3, 91 ; 4, 39
Just. Mart. apol. i. 1 ; and ή Φοινίκη Σνρία, Diod. 19, 93
Συροφοινίκη, Just. M.art. dial. c. Tryph. c. 78, p. 305 a.)
Mk. vii. 26 [cf. B. D. s. v. Syro-Phoenician]. (The masc
Συροφοίνιξ is found in Leian. concil. deor. c. 4 ; {Syro-
phoenix in Juv. sat. 8, 159 (cf. 160)].) *
Σνρτΐ5 [Lchm. σΰρτί! ; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 103 ; Chand-
ler § 650], -fωΓ, ace. -tv, ή, (σύρω, q. v. [al. fr. Arab, sert
i.e. 'desert'; al. al., see Pape, Eigennamen, s.\.'\),Syrtis,
the name of two places in the African or Libyan Sea
between Carthage and Cyrenaica, full of shalloivs and
sandbanks, and therefore destructive to ships ; the west^
ern Syrtis, between the islands Cercina and Meninx [or
the promontories of Zcitha and Brachodes], was called
Syrtis minor, the eastern [extending from the promon-
tory of Cephalae on the W. to that of Boreum on the E.]
was called Sijrtis major (sinus Psyllicus); this latter
must be the one referred to in Acts xxvii. 1 7, for upon
this the ship in which P.aul was sailing might easily be
cast after leiivinq; Crete. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Quicksands.] '
σ-ίρω; impf. έσυραν; fr. [Aeschyl. and Hdt. (in comp.),
Aristot.], Theocr. down ; [Sept. 2 S. xvii. 1.Ί] ; to draw,
drag : τι, Jn. xxi. 8 ; Rev. xii. 4 ; τινά. one (before the
judge, to prison, to punishment ; ίπΐ τα βασανιστήρια, tir
συστταρασσω
608
Συ\ύ,
'Χ«ι•
το ^(σμωτηριον, Epict. diss. 1, 29, 22 ; al.), Acts viii. 3 ;
c^o) Tr)s 7Γίίλfωff, Acts xiv. 19 ; eVi τοιτ 7Το\ίτάρ\αζ, Acts
xvii. 6. [CoMP. : κατασνρω.^ '
<ru-(nraptt<r<ru : 1 aor. συν(σπάραζα ; to coiirulse com-
pleldy (set- ρη-γνυμι, c.) : τινά, Mk. ix. 20 LTTrmrg.
WIl;" Lk. ix. 42. (.Max. Tyr. dis.s. 13, 5.) •
σ•νσ--σ-ημον [Tilf. crvi^ (cf. axiv, II. fin.)], -ου, τό, (σΰν
and σήμα), η common tiir/n or concerted siijnal, a sir/n yiren
ace. to agreement: Mk. xiv. 44. (Diod., Strab., Plut., al.;
for □:, a standard, Is. v. 2() ; -xli.x. 22 ; Ixii. 10.) The
word is condemned by Phryniclius, cd. Loh. p. 418, who
remarks that Menander was the first to use it; cf. Sturz,
De dial. Maccd. et Alex. p. VML'
<η5σ•-σ•ωμθ5 [Ι/Γ Tr WII σνν- (cf. σΰν, II. fin.)], -ov,
(jriiv and σώμα), liilonr/lnr/ to the sunn; Jioilij (i. e. metaph.
to the same church) [R. "V. fellow-members of the bod//] :
Epli. iii. i!. (Eccles. writ.)*
<rv.o-ro<ria<mrjs, -οϋ, ό, (sec στασιαστή!), η companion
in insurrection, fellow-rioter : Mk. xv. 7 11 G (Joseph.
antt. 14, 2, I).*
σν-στατικόϊ [ Tr συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)], -ή, -6v, (συν-
ίστημί, (\. v.), conimendafort/, introductory: €πιστυλα\ σνστ-
[Α. y. epistles of commendation'], 2 Co. iii. 1", Ρ KG,
and often in eccles. writ., many exx. of which have been
collected by Lydius, A<;onistica sacra (Zutph. 1700), p.
123, 15; [_Suicer, Thesaur. Eccles. ii. 1194 si).], (γράμ-
ματα παρ' αΰτοΰ \αβ('α> συστατικά, E|)ict. diss. 2, 3, 1 ; [cf.
Diug. Laert. 8, 87]; το κάλλοΕ iravros (τηστο\ίον συστα-
τικώτ€ρον, Aristot. in Diog. Laert. 5, 18, and in Stob. flor.
65, U, ii. 435 ed. Gaisf.) *
οτΜΓΤουρόω [LTTrWII συν- (cf. σΰν, II. fin.)], -ω:
Pass., pf. σνν€στανρωμαι; 1 aor. συν^σταυρωθην ; to cru-
cify along with ; τινά tiki, one with anollier ; prop. :
Mt. xxvii. 44 (συν αύτω LT Tr WII) ; Mk. xv. 32 (σιιν
αΙτώ LTWII) ; .In. xix. 32; metaph. : ό παλαιοί ημών
άνθρωπος συνισταυρώθη SC. τώ Χριστώ, i. e. (dropping the
figure) the death of Christ upon the cross has wrought
the extinction of our former corruption, Ro. vi. G ; Χριστώ
σνν(στανρωμαι, by the death of Christ upon the cross I
have become utterly estranged from (dead to) my for-
mer habit of feeling and action, Gal. ii. 19 (20).*
στκΓΤίλλω: 1 aor. συνίστ^ϊΚα; pf. pass. ptcp. συ^σταλ-
μίνοί; yiTop. to place together ; a. to draw Ingilhir,
contract, (τα 'ιστία, .\rstph. ran. 999 ; την χίίρα. Sir. iv.
31 ; (tr ολίγοι/ συστίλλω, Theophr. de cans, plant. 1, 15,
1); to diminish (την 8ίαιταν, Isocr. p. 280 d. ; Dio Cass.
39, 37) ; to shorten, abridge, pass, ό καιρό; συνίστα\μ(νος
ίστίν, the time has been drawn together into a brief
compass, is shortened, 1 Co. vii. 29. b. to roll to-
gether, wrap up, wrap round with bandages, etc., to en-
shroud (rtra π(π\οις, Eur. Troad. 378): τινά, i. e. his
corpse (for burial), Acts v. 6.*
o-u-oTcvoic; [T WII συν- (cf. σύν, II. fin.)]; to groan
together: Ro. viii. 22, where σύν has the same force as
in σννω&ίνω, b. (tiw, with one, Eur. Ion 935 ; Test. xii.
Patr. (test. Isach. § 7) p. 629).*
<Γυ-<Γτοιχ(« [Τ WII συν- (cf. συν, Π. fin.)], -£>; (see στοι-
χίω) ; to stand οτ march in the same row (file) with : so once
prop, of soldiers, Polyb. 10, 21, 7; hence to stand οκβ»
against, be parallel with ; trop. to answer to, resemble : τίχί,
80 once of a type in the O. T. ivhich answers to the anti-
type in the New, Gal. iv. 25 [cf. Bp. I.glitft. ad loc.].*
(τυ-στρατιώτη? [TTr Wll συν- (so Lclim. in Philera. ;
cf. σΰν, II. fin.)], -ου, ό, a fellow-soldier, Xen., Plat., al. ;
trop. (i)i associate in labors and conjlicts for the cause oj
Christ: Phil. ii. 25; Philem. 2.*
<Γν-σ-Γρί'φω : 1 aor. ptcp. συστρίψα!', pros. pass. ptcp.
συστρ(φόμ(νοί ; [fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down]; 1.
to twist together, roll together (into a bundle) : φρύγανων
πΧηθο!, Acts xxviii. 3. 2. to collect, combine, nni,r:
Tivas, pass, [reflexively (?)] of men, to [gather themsetres
together,'] assemble: Mt. xvii. 22 LTTrtxt. WII, see
άναστρίφω, 'λ a."
<Γυ-(Γτροφή, -ηί, η, (συστρ(φω^ ; a. a twisting up
together, a binding together. b. a secret combination,
a coalition, conspiracy : Acts xxiii. 1 2 (Ps. Ixiii. (Ixiv.)
3; [2K. XV. 15; Am. vii. 10]); a concourse of disorderly
persons, a riot (Polyb. 4, 34, G), Acts xix. 40.*
στ>-στ(ηματΙζω [WII συν- (so Τ in Ro., Tr in 1 Pet. ; cf•
σΰν, II. fin.)] ; pres. pass, συσχηματίζομαι : {σχηματίζω, to
form) ; a later Grk. word; to ctiii/unn [(.\ristot. top. G,
14 p. 151', 8; Plut. de profect. in virt. 12 p. 83 b.)];
pass, reflexively, τινί, to conform one's self (i.e. one's
mind and character) to another's pattern, [fashion one's
self according to, (cf. Bp. Lghtfl. Com. on Phil. p. 130
sq.)] : Ro. xii. 2 ; 1 Pet. i. 14 [cf. W. 352 (330 sq.)].
(ττροΕ τι, Plut. Xum. 20 com. text.) *
Συχάρ (Rec."'' 'ί,ιχάρ), ή, Sychar, a town of Samaria,
near to the well of llie ]iatriarch Jacob, and not far from
Flavia Neapolis {'ί,υχαρ προ της Ne'as πύλιως, Euseb. in
his Onomast. [)>. 346, 5 ed. I.arsow and Parthey]) tow-
ards the E., the representative of which is to be found
apparently in the modern hamlet al A star (or 'As/:er) :
Jn. iv. 5, where cf. Biiumlein, Ewald, Briickner [in De
Wette (4th and foil, edd.)], Godct ; add, Ewald, Jahrbb.
f. bibl. Wissensch. viii. p. 255 sq. ; Bddeker, Palestine,
pp. 328, 337 ; [Lieut. Conder in the Palest. Explor. Fund
for July 1S77, p. 149 S(|. and in Survey of West. Pal.:
' Special Pa])ers ', p. 23 1 ; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah,
Appendix .xv.]. The name does not seem to differ
from "\31D, a place mentioned by the Talmudists in
IDlD ;'>' ' the fountain Sucar ' and IDID vy '"li'P^ ' t'le
valley of the fountain Sucar ' ; cf. Dclitzsch in the Zeit-
schr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 185G, p. 2t0sqq. Most in-
terpreters, however, think that Συχάρ is the same as
Συχίμ (q. v. 2), and explain the form as due to a soften-
in" of the harsh vulgar pronunciation (cf. Credner, Einl.
in d. N. T. vol. i. p. 264 Si).), or conjecture that it was
fabricated by way of repro;icli by those λτΙιο wished to
suggest the noun "ΐρπ, 'falsehood', and thereby brand
the city as given up to idolatry [cf. Ilab. ii. 18], or the
word Ί3ύ, 'drunken' (on account of Is. xxviii. 1), and
thus call it the abode of μωροί, see Sir. 1. 26, where
the Shechemites are called \αος μωρής ; cf. Test. xii. Patr.
(test. Levi § 7) p. 564 Σικήμ, λιγομίνη πόλις ασυνίτων.
To these latter opinions there is this objection, among
Συχέμ
609
a χ^ε^ον
others, that the place mentioned by the Evangelist was
very near Jacob's well, from which Shechem, or Flavia
Neapolis, was distant about a mile and a half. [Cf. B.D.
6. V. Sychar ; also Porter in Alex.'s Kitto, ibid.] *
Συχί'μ, Hebr. DDt? [i.e. 'shoulder,' 'ridge'], Shechem
[A. V. Sychem (see below)], prop, name of 1. a
man of Canaan, son of Ilamor (see Έμμήρ), prince in
the city of Shechem (Gen. xxxiii. 19; .\xxiv. 2 sqq.) :
Acts vii. 16 RG. 2. a city of Samaria (in Sept.
sometimes Συχ^μ, indecl., sometimes Σίκιμα, gen. -ων, as in
Joseph, and Euseb. ; once την Σίκιμα την ev οριι Έφραιμ,
1 Κ. χϋ. 25 [for still other var. see Β. D. (esp. Am. ed.)
8. V. Shechem]), Vulg. Sichem [ed. Tdf. Si/cliem ; cf. B. D.
u. s.], situated in a valley abounding in springs at the
foot of Jit. Gerizim (Joseph, antt. 5, 7, 2 ; 11, 8, 6) ; laid
waste by Abimelech (Judg. ix. 4•")), it Λν38 rebuilt by
Jeroboam and made the seat of government (1 K. xii.
20). From the time of Vespasian it was called by the
Romans Neapolin (on coins Flavia Neapolis); whence by
corruption comes its modern name, Nulilus [or Nahu-
lus~\; ace. to Prof. Sorin (in Biideker's Palestine p. 331)
it contains about 13,000 inhabitants (of whom 600 are
Christians, and 140 Samaritans) together with a few
["about 100"] .Tews: Acts vii. 16.*
σφαγή, -rji, ή, {σφάζω), daughter : Acts viii. 32 (after
Is. liii. 7) ; πρόβατα σφαγηι. sheep destined /or slaughter
(Zech. xi. 4 ; Ps. xliii. (xliv.) 23), Ro. viii. 36 ; ήμίρα
σφαγηί (Jer. xii. 3), i. q. day of destruction, Jas. v. S.
(Tragg., Arstph., Xen., Flat., sqq.; Sept. for Π30, nj"iri,
etc.) '
σφάγιον, -ου, το, (σφαγή), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
that which is destined for slaughter, a victim [A.V. slnin
beaitf]: Acts vii. 42 [cf. W. 512 (477)] (Am. v. 25; Ezek.
xxi. 10).•
σφάξω, .Vttic σφάττω: fut. σφάξω. Rev. vi. 4LTTr
WH ; laor. €σφα|α; Pass., pf. ptcp. ί'σφα-χμέΐΌΓ; 2 aor.
ίσφάγην; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. very often for ΰΡιψ, to
slai/, slaughter, butcher: prop., apvlov, Rev. v. 6, 12;
xiii. 8 ; τικά, to put to death by violence (often so in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down), 1 Jn. iii. 12 ; Rev. v. 9 ; vi. 4,
9 ; -xviii. 24. κ(φα\ή (σφαγμίνη ds θάνατον, mortally
wounded [K.V. smitten unto deatli\, Rev. xiii. 3. [Comp. :
κατα-σφάζω,~\ "
σφήδρα (properly neut. plur. ol σφοδρός, vehement, vio-
lent), fr. Piud. and Hdt. down, exceeilinglg, grealli/ :
placed after adjectives, Mt. ii. 10 ; Mk. xvi. 4 ; Lk. xviii.
23 ; Rev. xvi. 21 ; with verbs, Mt. xvii. 6, 23 ; xviii.
31 ; xix. 25; xxvi. 22; xxvii. 54; Acts vi. 7.*
σψο5ρωΐ, adv., fr. Hom. Od. 12, 124 down, exceedingly:
Acts xxvii. I.H.*
σφραγίζω (Rev. vii. 3 Rec") ; 1 aor. (σφράγισα: 1 aor.
mid. ptcp. σφραγισάμ(νο! ; Pass., pf. ptcp. (σφραγισμίνοι ;
1 aor. ΐσφριιγίσθην ; [in 2 Co. xi. 10 Rec." gives the form
σφρα-γΐσ€ται " de coniectura vel errore " (Tdf. ; see his
note ad loc.)] ; (σφρα-γΐς, q. v.) ; Sept. for ΟΠΠ ; to set a
seal upoti, mark with a seal, to seal: a. for secu-
rity: τί, Mt. xxvii. 66; sc. την άβυσσον, to close it,
lest Satan after being cast into it should come out;
3'J
hence the addition ΐπάνω αΰτοϋ, over him i.e. Satan, Rev.
XX. 3, (ev ω — i. e. 8ωματι — κεραυνοί €στίν (σφραγισμένος,
Aeschyl. Eum. 828 ; mid. σφραγίζομαι την θύραν, Bel and
the Dragon 14 Tbeodot.). b. Since things sealed up
are concealed (as, the contents of a letter), σφραγίζω
means trop. to hide (Deut. xx.xii. 34), keep in silence,
keep secret: τί. Rev. x. 4; xxii. 10, (ras αμαρτία!, Dan.
ix. 24 Theodot. ; τα? άνυμίη!. Job .xiv. 1 7 ; Toi/t λύγους
σιγή. Stub. ilor. 34, 9 p. 215 ; θαύματα ττολλά σοφή σφρη-
γίσσατο σιγή, Νοηη. paraphr. evang. loan. 21, 140). c.
in order to mark a person or thing; hence to set a mark
upon hi/ the ijnpress of a seal, to stamp : angels are said
σφραγίζΐΐν τινάί €πι των μετώπων, i. e. with the seal of
God (see σφραγ'ΐί, c.) to stam]) his servants on their
foreheads as destined for eternal salvation, and by
this means to confirm their hopes. Rev. vii. 3, cf. Ewald
ad loc. ; [B.D. s. w. Cuttings and Forehead] : hence oi
ίσφραγισμίνοι, fourteen times in Rec. vss. 4-S, four times
byGLTTrWH, [heivo'iai σημάντροισιν ίσφραγισμίνοι,
Eur. Iph. Taur. 1372) ; metaph. : τίνα τω πν^ΰματι and
iv τω rrv; respecting God, who by the gift of the Holy
Spirit indicates who are his, pass., Eph. i. 13 ; iv. 30 ;
absol., mid. with τινά, 2 Co. i. 22. d. in order to
prove, confirm, or attest a thing; hence trop. /o
confirm, aulhenlicnte, place heyonil doubt, (a written
document τω δακτυ'ΚΙω, Esth. viii. 8) : foil, by ότι, Jn. iii.
33 ; τινά, to [irove by one's testimony to a person that he
is what he professes to be, Jn. vi. 27. Somewhat unu-
sual is the expression σφραγισάμ^νος αυτοίς τον καρπον
τοΰτον, when I shall have confirmed (sealed) to them
this fruit (of love), meaning apparently, when I shall
have given authoritative assurance that this money was
collected for their use, Ro. xv. 28. [Comp. : κατά-
σφραγίζω.'] *
σφραγίϊ, -Ίδος, ή, (akin, apparently, to the verb φράσσω
or φράγνυμι),ίτ. Hdt. down, Sept. for ΠΠΙ'Π, a seal; i.e.
a. the seal placed upon books [ef. B.D. s.v. Writing, sUb
fin.; Gardthausen, Palaeogr. p. 27] : Rev. v. 1 ; \va<u
τάς σφρ., ib. 2, 5 [Rec.] : άνοίξαι, ib. [5 G L Τ Tr AVH],
9; vi. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 12; viii. 1. b. a signet-ring :
Rev. vii. 2. c. the inscription or impression made by
a seal : Rev. ix. 4 (the name of God and Christ stamped
upon their foreheads must be meant here, as is evident
from xiv. 1); 2 Tim. ii. 19. d. that by lehich any-
thing is confirmed, proved, authenticated, as by a seal, (a
token or proof) : Ro. iv. 11 ; 1 Co. ix. 2. [Cf. BB.DD.
s. V. Sea!.] *
σφυ8ρ<ίν, -ov, TO, i. (p σφυρόν, q. v. : Acts iii. 7 Τ WH.
(Hesych. σφυ8ρά• ή πιριφίριια των ποδών.) *
σφ«ρί5, ϊ• q. στηρίί, (ρ v., (cf. Lob. ad Phrj-n. p. 113 ;
Curtius p. 503 ; \_Steph. Thesaur. s. vv.]), Lchm. in Mt.
xvi. 10 and Mk. viii. 8; WIT uniformly (see their App.
p. 148).•
σφυρόν, -ov, TO, fr. Hom. down, the ankle [A.V. ankle-
bone} ; Acts iii. 7 [T WH σφυ8ράν, q. v.].*
σχί8όν, (e;((a, σχΛ), adv., fr. Hom. down; 1. near,
hard by. 2. fr. Soph, down [of degree, i.e.] well-nigh,
nearly, almost ; so in the N. T. three times before war :
σχήμα
610
σώζα.
Acts xiii. 44 ; xix. 26 ; Heb. ix. 22 [but see W. 554 (515)
n.; (R. V. / may almost say)]; (2 Mace. v. 2 ; 3 Mace.
V. 14).*
σχήμα, -tos, to, {(χω, σχεΓι-), fr. Aeschyl. down, Lat.
habitus [cf. Eng. havioiir (fr. have)], A. V. fashion, Vulg.
figura [but in Phil, habitus], (tacitly opp. to the mate-
rial or substance) : τοΟ /ticrjuou τούτοι/, 1 Co. vii. 31 ; the
habitus, as comprising everything in a person which
strikes the senses, the figure, bearing, discourse, actions,
manner of life, etc., Pliil. ii. 7 (8). [Syn. see μορφή
tin., and Schmidt ch. 182, .5.]•
σχίζω [(Lk. v. 30 R G L mrg.)]; fut. σχίσω (Lk. v. 36
L txt. TTrtxt. WH [cf. B. 37 (32 sq.)]); 1 aor. (σχ,σα;
Pass., pres. ptcp. σχι^όμίνοί ; 1 aor. (σχίσβην ; [allied w.
Lat. scindo, caedo, etc. (cf. Cnrtius § 295)], fr. [(Hom.
h. Merc.)] Hesiod down ; Sept. several times for V^'2, Is.
xxxvii. 1 for Ιϊ"ΐ;5 ; to cleave, cleave asunder, rend : τΐ, Lk.
V. 36 ; pass, o! ττέτραι. Ml. xxvii. 51 ; οϊ ουρανοί, Mk. i. 10 ;
TO κ(ίτατ4τασμα. Lk. xxiii. 45 ; with ei's δύο added, into two
parts, in twain [(eis δύο μ4ρη, of a river, Polyb. 2, 16,
11)], Mt. xxvii. 51 ; Mk. xv. 38 ; τ4 δίκτυο•', Jn. xxi. 11 ;
to divide by rending, τί, Jn. xix. 24. trop. in pass, to
be split into factions, be divided : Acts xiv. 4 ; xxiii. 7,
(Xen. conv. 4, 59 ; τοϋ πλή^οι;5 σχιζομ^νου κατά. α'ίρςσιν,
Diod. 12, 66).»
σχίσμα, -tos, to, (σχί^ω), α cleft, rent ; a. prop.
a rent: Mt. ix. 16 ; Mk. ii. 21, (Aristot., Theophr.). b.
nietaph. a division, dissension: Jn. vii. 43; ix. 16; x.
19 ; 1 Co. i. 10 ; xi. 18 ; xii. 25, (eccles. writ. [Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 2, 6, etc. ; 'Teaching' 4, 3 ; etc.]). [Cf. re£f.
s. V. σί'ρίσίϊ, 5.] *
σχοι.νίον, -ov, TO, (dimin. of the noun σχοΐ^ο^, ο and ή, a
rush), fr. Hdt. down, prop, a cord or rope made of rushes ;
univ. α rope: Jn. ii. 15 ; Acts xxvii. 32.»
σχολάζω ; 1 aor. subjunc. σχολάσω, 1 Co. vii. 5 G L Τ
Tr WH ; {σχολή, q. 7.) ; 1. to cease from labor;
to loiter. 2. to be free from labor, to be at leisure,
to be idle ; τι>/ί, to have leisure for a thing, i.e. to give otie's
self to a thing: iva σχο\άσητ€ (Rec. σχολά^ητε) tj ττροσ-
ευχή, 1 Co. vii. 5 (for exx. fr. prof. auth. see Passow
s. v.; [L. and S. s. v. ΙΠ.]). 3. of things; e. g. of
places, to be unoccupied, empty: of/tos σχολάζωα, Mt. xii.
44 ; [Lk. xi. 25 WH br. Tr mrg. br.], (tottos, Plut. Gai.
Grac. 12 ; of a centurion's vacant office, Eus. h. e. 7, 15;
in ecel. writ, of vacant eccl. ofBces, [also of officers with-
out charge ; cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]).•
σχολή, -ψ, ή, (fr. σχΰν; hence prop. Germ, das An-
halten ; [cf. Eng. ' to hold on,' equiv. to either to stop or
to persist]); 1. ίτ. Vind.dovin, freedom from labor,
leisure. 2. aec. to later Grk. usage, a place where
there is leisure for anything, a school [cf. L. and S. s. v.
III.; W. 23]: Acts xix. 9 (Dion. Hal. de jud. Isocr. 1 ;
de vi Dem. 44 ; often in Pint.).*
σώζω [al. σφ'^ω (cf. WH. Intr. § 410 ; Meisterhans p.
87)]; fut. σώσω; 1 aor. «σωσα ; pf. σ^σωκα ; Pass., pres.
σώζομαι ; impf. 4σω(6μηΐ' ; pf. 3 pers. sing. (Acts iv. 9) σίσω-
στoland (ace. toTdf.) σ^σωται (cf. Kiihneri. 912 ; [Photius
s. V. ; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 99 ; Veitch s. v.]) ; 1 aor.
(σώθην ; 1 fut. σωθήσομαι ; {σΰί ' safe and sound ' [cf. Lat.
sanus ; Curtius § 570 ; Vanicek p. 1038]); fr. Horn. down;
Sept. very often for Ώ'ύ'Π, also for B^O, h^j, and 'p'XI,
sometimes for "iTU ; to save, to keep safe and sound, to
rescue from danger or destruction (opp. to άπύλλυμι,
q. v.); Vulg. salvumfacio {orflo), salvo, [salvifico, libera,
etc.] ; a. univ., τικί, one (from injury or peril) ;
to save a suffering one (from perishing), e.g. one suffer-
ing from disease, to make well, heal, restore to health : .Mt.
ix. 22 ; Mk. V. 34 ; X. 52 ; Lk. vii. 50 [al. understand this
as including spiritual healing (see b. below)]; viii.
48 ; xvii. 19 ; xviii. 42 ; Jas. v. 15 ; pass., Mt. ix. 21 ; Mk.
V. 23, 28 ; vi. 56 ; Lk. viii. 36, 50 ; Jn. xi. 12 ; Acts iv. 9
[cf. B. § 144, 25]; xiv. 9. to preserve one who is in
danger of destruction, to save (i. e. rescue): Mt. viii. 25;
xiv. 30 ; xxiv. 22 ; xxvii. 40, 42, 49 ; Mk. xiii. 20 ; xv. 30
sq.; Lk. xxiii. 35, 37, 39 ; pa.ss., Acts xxvii. 20, 31 ; 1 Pet.
iv. 18 ; TTiv φυχήν, (physical) life, Mt. xvi. 25 ; Mk. iii.
4 ; viii. 35 ; Lk. vi. 9 ; ix. 24 and R G L in xvii. 33 ; σώξΐίΡ
τι^ά (κ with gen. of the place, to bring safe forth from,
Jude 5 ; (κ τήί ίΰραί ταντηί, from the peril of this hour,
Jn. xii. 27 ; with gen. of the state, ίκ βo^άτoκ, Heb. v. 7 ;
cf. Bleek, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 70 sq.; [\V. § .30, 6 a.;
see 4k, I. 5]. b. to save in the technical biblical
sense; — negatively, to deliver from the penalties of the
Messianic judgment, Joel ii. 32 (iii. 5); to save from the
evils which obstruct the reception of the Messianic deliver-
ance : άνδ των αμαρτιών, Mt. i. 21 ; άπό ttjs opy^^ SC. του θΐοΰ,
from the punitive wrath of God at the judgment of the
last day, Ro. v. 9 ; από τή^ 7ei'eas r^s σκο\ια.$ ταϋτη'ί. Acts
ii. 40 ; >ρυχήν (κ θανάτου (see 9ιί kotos, 2), Jas. v. 20; \_ίκ
νυρδί αρττάζοντι^, Jude 23]; — positively, to make one a
partaker of the salvation by Christ (opp. to άττόλλυμι, q. v.):
hence σώζεσθαι and ΐίσέρχΐσθαί ets τήν βασ. τοϋ θΐοΰ are
interchanged, Mt. xix. 25, cf. 24 ; Mk. x. 26, cf . 25 ; Lk.
xviii. 26, cf . 25 ; so σώ^ισθαι and ^ωτ)ν aiunov ίχαν, Jn.
iii. 17, cf. 16. Since salvation begins in this life (in deliv-
erance from error and corrupt notions, in moral purity,
in pardon of sin, and in the blessed peace of a soul recon-
ciled to God), but on the visible return of Christ from
heaven will be perfected in the consummate blessings of
ό αΙων ό μέλλων, we can understand why τ& σώξίσθαι is
spoken of in some passages as a present possession, in
others as a good yet future : — as a blessing beginning
(or begun) on earth, Mt. xviii. 11 Rec; Lk. viii. 12;
xix. 10 ; Jn. v. 34 ; x. 9 ; xii. 47 ; Ro. xi. 14 ; 1 Co. i. 21 ;
vii. 16 ; ix. 22 ; x. 33 ; xv. 2 ; 1 Th. ii. 16 ; 2 Th. ii. 10 ;
2 Tim. i. 9 ; Tit. iii. 5 ; 1 Pet. iii. 21 ; τί) 1\τΙδί (dat. of the
instrument) ίσώβημ^ν (aor. of the time when they turned
to Christ), Ro. viii. 24 ; χάριτί iare σίσωσμένοι διά t^s
^rίστcωs. Eph. ii. 5 [cf. B. § 144, 25], 8 ; — as a thing still
future, Mt. x. 22 ; xxiv. 13 ; [Mk. xiii. 13] ; Ro. v. 10 ;
1 Co. iii. 15 ; 1 Tim. ii. 15 ; Jas. iv. 12 ; τήν ψυχήν, Mk.
viii. 35 ; Lk. ix. 24 ; ψυχίί, Lk. ix. 56 Rec. ; τδ τνιϋμα,
pass. 1 Co. V. δ ; by a pregnant construction (see eis, C.
1 p. 185'' bot. ), Tiva els τήν βασιΧείαν του κυρίου αιώνων,
to save and transport into etc. 2 Tim. iv. 18 {ή (ίσίβΐία
ή σώζουσα els τήν ζωήν αίώνιον, 4 Macc. XV. 2 ; many exx.
σώμα
611
(τωματικύκ
of this constr. are given in Passow vol. ii. p. 1802'; [cf.
L. and S. s. v. II. 2J). univ. : [Mlc. xvi. IG] ; Acts ii.
21 ; iv. 12 ; xi. 14 ; xiv. 9 ; xv. 1, [11] ; xvi. 30 sq.; Ro.
ix, 27 ; X. '.», 13 ; xi. 20 ; 1 Tim. ii. 4 ; iv. 16 ; Heb. vii. 25 ;
Jas. ii. 14; ίμαρτω\οΰ$^ 1 Titii. i. 15; τάί ψυχά^^ Jas. i.
21; 01 σωζόμfpot, Rev. Kxi. 24 Rec; Lk. xiii. 23; Acts
ii. 47 ; opp. to oi άττολλύμιροι, 1 Co. i. 18 ; 2 Co. ii. 15,
(see άπόλλυμι, 1 a. β.). [Co.MP.: δια-, ίκ- σώζω.']*
σώμα, -tos, to, (appar. fr. σωί ' entire ', [but cf. Curtius
§ 570 ; al. fr. r. ska, sko, ' to cover ', cf. Vanicek p. 1055 ;
Curtius p. 696]), Sept. for ηψ3, n;i3, etc.; π'ρ33 (a
corpse), also for Chald. HD:; α body; and 1. the
body both of men and υ/ animals (on the distinction be-
tween it and σαρξ see σάμζ, esp. 2 init. ; [cf. Dickson, St.
Paul's use of 'Flesh' and 'Spirit', p. 247 sqq.]); a.
as everywh. in Horn, (who calls the living body δ4μα$)
and not infreq. in subseq. Grk. writ., a dead body or
corpse : univ. Lk. xvii. 37 ; of a man, Mt. xiv. 12 R G ;
[Mk. XV. 45 R G] ;. Acts ix. 40 ; plur. .In. xix. 31 ; τό <r.
TiiOs, Mt. xxvii. 58 sq.; Mk. xv. 43 ; Lk. xxiii. 52, 55 ; Jn.
xix. 38, 40 ; xx. 12 ; .lude 9 ; of the body of an animal
ofiered in sacrifice, plur. Heb. xiii. 11 (Ex. xxix. 14 ; Num.
xix. 3). b. as in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down, Ike living
body: — of animals, Jas. iii. 3; — of man: τό σώμα, ab-
sol., Lk. xi. 34; xii. 23; 1 Co. vi. 13, etc.; ίκ σώματι
efrai, of earthly life with its troubles, Heb. xiii. 3; dis-
tinguished fr. TO αίμα, 1 Co. xi. 27 ; τό σώμα and τα μέλη
of it, 1 Co. xii. 12, 14-20 ; Jas. iii. 6; τό σώμα the tem-
ple of TO a7io>' τνίΰμα, 1 Co. vi. 19 ; the instrument of
the soul, τά δίί τοΰ σώμ. SC. πραχθ^ρτα, 2 Co. V. 10 ; it is
distinguished — fr. τό ννιΰμα, in Ko. viii. 10 ; 1 Co. v. .3;
vi. 20 Rec; vii. 34; Jas. ii. 26, (4 Mace. xi. 11); — fr. ή
'i'vxi, in Mt. vi. 25; x. 28 ; Lk. xii. 22, (Sap. i. 4; viii. 19
sq. ; 2 Mace. vii. 37 ; xiv. 38 ; 4 Mace. i. 28, etc. ) ; — fr.
η φνχή and τό πνεύμα together, in 1 Th. v. 23 (cf. Song of
the Tliree, 63) ; σώμα ψυχικόα and σ. τνιυματικόν are dis-
tinguished, 1 Co. XV. 44 (see τηκυματικό•!, 1 and •ρυχικ6%.
a. ); TO σ. tikos, Mt. v. 29 sq.; Lk. xi. 34 ; Ro. iv. 19 ; viii.
23 [cf. W. 187 (176)], etc.; b raos τοΰ σύμ. αϊτοί, the
temple which was his body, Jn. ii. 21 ; plur., Ro. i. 24 ;
1 Co. vi. 15 ; Eph. v. 28 ; the gen. of the possessor is
omitted where it is easily learned from the context, as
1 Co. V. 3 ; 2 Co. iv. 10 ; v. 8'; Heb. x. 22 (23), etc.; τό
σώμα t^s τατ(ινύσ(ωί ήμων, the body of our humiliation
(subjective gen.), i. e. which we wear in this servile and
lowly human life, opp. to τό σ. t^s δόζη^ αϋτοΰ (i. e. τοΰ
Χριστού), the body which Christ has in his glorified state
with God in heaven, Phil. iii. 21 ; όιά τοΟ σώμ. τοΟ Χρι-
στοί, through the death of Christ's body, Ro. vii. 4 ; δια
TTjs προσφοράς του σώμ. Ιησοΰ Χρίστου, through the sacri-
ficial offering of the body of Jesus Chri.st, Heb. x. 10 ;
TO σ. TTJs σαρκί!, the body consisting of flesh, i. e. the
physical body (tacitly opp. to Christ's spiritual body,
the church, see 3 below), Col. i. 22 (differently in ii. 11
[see just below]); σώμα τοΰ βακάτου, the body subject to
death, given over to it [cf. W. § 30, 2 β.], Ro. vii. 24;
the fact that the body includes ή σάρζ, and in the flesh
also the incentives to sin (see σάρζ, 4), gives origin to
the foil, phrases: μη βασί\(ν(τω ή αμαρτία {ν τψ θντιτψ
υμών σώματι, Ιίο. vi. 12 [cf. W. 524 (488)]; oi irpoteis
τοΰ σώματοί, Ro. viii. 13. Since the body is the instru-
ment of the soul (2 Co. v. 10), and its members the in-
struments either of righteousness or of iniquity (Ro. vi.
13, 19), the foil, expressions are easily intelligible: σώμα
TTJS αμαρτία?, the body subject to, the thrall of, sin [cf.
W. § .30, 2 /3. ], Ro. vi. 6 ; τό σ. t^s σαρκός, subject to the
incitements of the flesh. Col. ii. 11 (where Rec. has τό σ.
των αμαρτιών ttjs σαρκός), δοξάζετβ τδν θ(δν iv τψ σώματι
υμών, 1 Co. vi. 20 ; μξ'/αλΰνΐΐν τδν Χριστόν iv τψ σώματι,
(ϊτ( δια ξωηί, eiTc δια θανάτου, Phil. i. 20 ; παραστησαι τά
σώματα θυσίαν ξώσαν ... τι? Beiji (i.e. by bodily purity [cf.
Mey. ad loc.]), Ro. xii. 1. o. Since ace. to ancient
law in the case of slaves the body was the chief thing
taken into account, it is a usage of later Grk. to call
slaves simply σώματα ; once so in the N. T. : Rev. xviii.
13, where the Vulg. correctly translates by mancipia
[A. V. slaves], {σώματα τοΰ otKou, Gen. xxxvi. 6 ; σώματα
καΐ κτήνη, Tob. χ. 10 ; Ιουδαϊκά σώματα, 2 Mace. viii. 11 ;
exx. fr. Grk. writ, are given by Lob. ad Phryn. p. 378 sq.
[add (fr. Soph. Lex. s. v.), Polyb. 1, 29, 7 ; 4, 38, 4, also
3, 17, 10 bis] ; the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ,
said σώματα δοΰλα, οικίτικά, etc.). 2. The name is
transferred to the bodies of plants, 1 Co. xv. 37 sq.,
and of stars [cf. our 'heavenly bodies''], hence Paul
distinguishes between σώματα iπoυpάvιa, bodies celestial,
i. e. the bodies of the heavenly luminaries and of angels
(see iπoυράvιoί, 1), and σ. iwlyeia, bodies terrestrial (i. e.
bodies of men, animals, and plants), 1 Co. xv. 40 {Hirav
σώμα TTJs των β\ων φύσ€ω^ . . . τό σώμα τοΰ κόσμου, Diod.
1, 11). 3. trop. σώμα is used of a (large or small)
number of men closely united into one society, or family as
it were ; a social, ethical, mystical body ; so in the N. T.
of the church : Ro. xii. 5 ; 1 Co. x. 17 ; xii. 13 ; Eph. ii. 16 ;
iv. 16 ; V. 23 ; Col. i. 18 ; ii. 19 ; iii. 15 ; with τοΰ Χρίστου
added, 1 Co. x. 16 ; xii. 27 ; Eph. i. 23 ; iv. 12 ; v. 30 ; Col.
i. 24 ; of which spiritual body Christ is the head, Eph.
iv. 15 sq. ; v. 23 ; Col. i. 18 ; ii. 19, who by the influence
of his Spirit worlis in the church as the soul does in the
body. tv σώμα κ. ίν ΐΓ«ΰμα, Eph. iv. 4. 4. ή σκιά
and τό σώμα are distinguished as the shadow and the
thing itself which casts the shadow : Col. ii. 17 ; σκιάν
αΙτησ(>μ(νοί βασίΚύαί, ?! fipiraocv ίαυτψ τό σώμα, Joseph.
b. j. 2, 2, 5; [(Philo de confus. ling. § 37 ; Lcian. Her-
mot. 79)].
σ-ωματικόβ, -η, -6v, (σώμα), fr. Aristot. down, corporeal
(Vulg. corporalis), bodily ; a. having a bodily form
or nature : σωματικψ eCoci, Lk. iii. 22 (opp. to ασώματο!,
Philo de opif. mund. § 4). b. pertaining to the body :
η yυμvaσίa, 1 Tim. iv. 8 (ffis, Joseph, b. j. 0, 1, 6 ; iTi-
θυμ'ιαι σωμ. 4 Macc. i. 32 ; [ΙττιθυμΙαι και ήδοναί, Aristot.
eth. Nic. 7, 7 p. 1149'', 26 ; al.; άττίχου τών σαρκικών καΐ
σωματικών ίνιβυμιών, 'Teaching' etc. 1, 4]).•
σ-ωματικω;, adv., bodily , corporeally (V \x\g. corporaliter),
i. q. iv σωματικψ ffoei, yet denoting his exalted and spir-
itual body, visible only to the inhabitants of heaven. Col.
ii. 9, where see Meyer [cf. Bp. Lghtft.].*
^ώττατρο^
612
σωφρονέω
Σώπατροβ, ου, 6, [ct. W. 103 (97)], Snpaler, a Chris-
tian, one uf Paul's companions: Acts XX. 4. [See Σωσί-
jrar^os.] *
σωρίϋω: fut. σωριΰσω; pf. pass. ptcp. σ(σωρ€υμίνοί;
(σωμο'ί, .α heap) ; [ίι•. Aristot. down] ; lu htaji lii<jet/ier,
to Ιιιιη) li/i ; τϊ eVi τι. Ho. xii. 2it (fr. Prov. xxv. 2J ; see
ΰνθμαξ) ; τινά τινι, to overwhelm one with a heap of any-
thing : trop. άμαμτίακ, to load one with the conscious-
ness of many sins, pass. 2 Tim. iil. U. [Co.mp. : fVt-
σωρίνω-Ί *
Σω<Γβινη9, -ου, ό, Soxthenes ; 1. the ruler of the
Jewish synagogue at Corinth, and an opponent of Chris-
tianity: Acts xviii. 17. 2. a certain Christian, an
associate of the apostle Paul: 1 Co. i. 1. The name
was Ά common one among the Greeks.*
Σωσ-Ιττατροϊ, -ov, a, Sosipater, a certain Christian, one
of Paul's kinsmen, (perhaps the same man who in Acts
XX. 4 is called Σώπατρος [([. v. ; yet the latter was from
Benca, Sosipater in Corinth] : cf. Σωκράτης and Σωσι-
κράτης, 2ωκλ(ίδηί and Σωσικ\(ίδης, see Fril:i!clie, Ep. ad
Koni. vol. iii. p. 316; [cf. FUL; Gr. Personennamen, jjp.
79, 80]) : Ko. .\vi. 21.*
"■ωτήρ, -rjpos, 6, (σώζω), fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. down,
SejJt. for vu•^ Π;;?»;, [;'•σή], savior, deliverer; pre-
server; (Vulg. [exc. Lk. i. 47 (where .vn/u/om)] isnlvalor,
Luth. Heilaml) [cf. B. D. s. v. Saviour, I.] ; (Cic. in Λ'err.
ii. 2, 63 Hoc quantum est ? ita magnum, ut Latine uno
verbo exprimi non possit. Is est nimirum 'soter', r/ui
salutem dedit. The name was given by the ancients to
deities, esp. tutelary deities, to princes, kings, and in
general to men who had conferred signal benefits upon
their country, and in the more degenerate days by
way of flattery to personages of influence ; see Passow
[or L•. and S.] s. v. ; Paulas, Exgt. lidbch. lib. d. drei
erst. Evang. i. p. 103 sq. ; [AV'etstein on Lk. ii. 11 ; B. D.
u. s.]). In the N^. T. the word is applied to God, — σωτ.
μου, he who signally exalts me, Lk. i. 47 ; ό σωτ. ημών, the
author of our salvation through Jesus Christ (on the
Christian conception of 'to save', see σώζω, b. [and
on the use of σωτηρ cf. Westcott on 1 Jn. iv. 14]), 1 Tim.
i. 1 ; ii. 3 ; Tit. i. 3 ; ii. 10 ; iii. 4 ; with θιά Ίι^σοΟ Χρίστου
added, Jude 25 [Rec. om. δια Ί. X.]; σωτηρ πάντων,
1 Tim. iv. 10 (cf. Ps. xxiii. (xxiv.) 5; xxvi. (xxvii.) 1;
Is. .xii. 2; .wii. 10; xlv. IS, 21 ; Mic. vii. 7, etc.); — to
the Messiah, and Jesus as the Messiah, through
whom God gives salvation : Lk. ii. 11; Acts v. 31 ; xiii.
23; ό σωτ. τοΟ κόσμου, Jn. iv. 42; 1 Jn. iv. 14; ημών.
2 Tim. i. 10; Tit. i. 4; ii. 13; iii. G; σωτηρ Ίησον^ Χρι-
στοί, 2 Pet.i. [1 (where Rec.'"'''^ inserts ημών)], II; ii.
20; lu. 18; ό κύριοι και σωτήρ, 2 Pet. iii. 2; σωτηρ τηϋ
σώματος, univ. (' ilie .lavior' i. e.) preserver of the bodv,
i. e. of the church, Eph. v. 23 (σωτηρ όντως απάντων ίστ\
και γίνΐτωρ. of God the preserver of the world, Aristot.
de mundo, c. 6 p. 397", 20) ; σωτήρ is used of Christ
as the giver of future salvation, on his return from
heaven, Phil. iii. 20. [•' The title is confined (with the
exception of the writings of St Luke) to the later writ-
ings of the N. T." (Westcott u. s.)] •
σωτηρία, -at, ή, (σωτήρ), deliverance, preservation, safety,
salvatiim : deli\ erance from the molestation of enemies,
Acts vii. 25 ; with ϊξ ΐχθρών added, Lk. i. 71 ; preserva-
tion (of physical life), safety. Acts xxvii. 34 ; Ileb. xL
7. in an ethical sense, that which conduces to the soul's
safeti/ or salvation : σωτηρία Ttw iyivfTo, Lk. xix. 9 ; ήγΰ-
σθα'ι τι σωτηρία», Ί Pet. iii. 15; in the technical biblical
sense, the Messianic salvation (see σώ^ω, b.), a.
univ. : Jn.iv. 22; Acts iv. 12; xiii. 47; Ko.xi.ll; 2Th.ii.
13; 2 Tim. iii. 15; Ileb. ii. 3; vi. 9; Jude 3; ογγ.Ιοάπώ-
\(ΐα, Phil. i. 28; αιώνιος σωτηρία, Ilcb. v. 9 (for Τ\^νΰΐ\
DoSu•, Is. xlv. 1 7) ; [add, Mk. x\i. WH in the (rejected)
' Shorter Conclusion '] ; ό Xoyor της σωτηρίας τα^ης, in-
struction concerning that salvation \vhich Juhn tiie Bai>
list foretold [cf. W. 237 (223)], Acts xiii. 2o ; τό dayyi-
\iov της σωτηρίας υμών, Eph. ί. 13; ό&ος σωτηρίας. Acts
xvi. 17; κίρας σωτηρίας (see κίρας, b.), Lk. i. (J9; ημίρα
σωτηρίας, the time in which the offer of salvation is
made, 2 Co. vi. 2 (fr. Is. xlix. 8); κατ(ργάζ(σθαι την ίαυτοϋ
σωτηρίαν, Phil. ii. 12; κληρονημιΐν σωτηρίαν, Ileb. i. 14;
[ό αρχηγός της σωτηρίας. Ileb. ii. 10] ; fi"s σωτηρίαν, unto
(the attainment of) salvation, Ro. [i. 16]; x. [1], 10;
1 Pet. ii. 2 [Rec. om.]. b. salvation as the present
possession of all true Christians (see σώ^ω, b.) : 2Co.
i. 6; vii. 10; Phil. i. 19; σωτηρία iv άφίσίΐ αμαρτιών,
Lk. i. 77; σωτηρίας Tvj^fiv μΐτα 8ύξης αιωνίου, - Tim.
ii. 10. c. future salratioti, tlie sum of benefits
and blessings which Christians, redeemed from all
earthly ills, will enjoy after the visible return of Christ
from heaven in the consummated and eternal king-
dom of God: Ro. xiii. 11 ; 1 Th. v. 9; Ileb. ix. 28; 1
Pet. i. 5, 10; Rev. xii. 10; eXwlr σωτηρίας, 1 Th. v. 8;
κομίζίσθαι σωτηρίαν ^^τνχών, 1 Pet. i. 9; jj σωτηρία τώ θ^ώ
ημών (dat. of the possessor, sc. ΐστίν [cf. B. § 120, 22];
cf. n>;ity;n niD'S, Ps. iii. 9), the salvation which is
bestowed on us belongs to God, Rev vii. 10; ή σωτηρία
. . . τοΰ θΐοΰ (gen. of the possessor [cf. B. § 1 32, 1 1, i. a.],
for Rec. τώ θ(ω) ημών sc. «στιν, Rev. xix. 1. (Tragg.,
[Hdt.], Thuc, Xen., Plat., al. Sept. for i'E^.'., ^V,^<^,,
r\\'WT^, HQ-Sf escape.) *
σωτήριοϊ, -ov, (σωτήρ), fr. Aeschyl., Eur., Thuc. down,
saving, brinyiny salvation: ή χάρις ή σωτήριο?. Tit. ii. 11
(Sap. i. 14; 3 Mace. vii. 18; ή σωτήριος δίαιτα, Clem.
Alex. Paedag. p. 48 ed. Sylb.). Neut. τό σωτήριον
(Se])t. often for Π>•ΐΙ?;, less freij. for J.'t^."), as often in
Grk. writ., substantively, safety, in the N. T. (the Jles-
sianic) salvation (see σώζω, b. and in σωτηρία) : with
τοΰ θ(οϋ added, decreed by God, Lk. iii. 6 (fr. Is. xl. 5) ;
Acts xxviii. 28; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 85, 12; he who em-
bodies this .'ialvation, or through whom God is about to
achieve it: of the Messi.ah, Lk. ii. 30 (το σωτ. ημών Ίψ
σους Χρ. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 1 [where see Ilarnack]);
simply, equiv. to the hope o/" (future) salvation, Eph. tL
1 7. (In the Sept. το σωτ. often for uhp, a thank-offer-
ing [or ' peace-offering'], and the plur. occurs in the same
sense in Xen., Polyb., Diod., Phit., Lcian., Hdian.) *
σω-φρονίω, -ω ; 1 aor. impv. σωφρονήσατΐ ; (σώφρων,
q. V.) ; fr. Tragg., Xen., Plat, down ; to be of sound
ύφρονιζα
613
ταΧαίττωρΙα
mind, ί. e. a. to he in one's right mind : of one
who has ceased ^αιμονίζ^σθαι, Mk. v. 15; Lk. viii. 35;
opp. to (κστηναι, 2 Co. v. 13, (the σωφρόνων and μαν^Ιι
are contrasted in Plat, de rep. i. p. 331 c. ; σωφρονούσαι
and μavf^σaί, Phaedr. p. 244 b. ; ό μ^μηνως . . . ('σωφρό-
νησι, Apollod. 3, 5, 1, 6). b. to exercise self-cordrul;
i. e. a. to put a moderate estimate upon one's self,
think of one's self soberly: opp. to ϋπίρφρον^ΐν, Ro. xii.
3. β. to curb one's passiotis. Tit. ii. ; joined with
νηφω (as in Lcian. Nigrin. 6), [R. V. be of sound mind
and be sober}, 1 Pet. iv. 7.*
σωφρονίζω, 3 pers. plur. ind. -fouCTti', Tit. ii. 4 L mrg. Τ
Ti•, al. subjunc. -ζωσι; to make one σώφρων, restore one
to his senses ; to moderate, control, curb, discipline ; to hold
one to his duty ; so f r. Eur. and Thuc. down ; to admon-
ish, to exhort earnestly, [R. V. train} : τικά foil, by an inf.
Tit. ii. 4.•
σωφρονισμοί, -οϋ, 6, (σωφρονίζω) ; 1. an admon-
ishiny or calling to soundness of mind, to moderation and
self-control: Joseph, antt. 17, 9, 2; b. j. 2, 1,3; App.
Pun. 8, 65; Aesop, fab. 38 ; Plut.; [Philo, legg. alleg. 3,
69]. 2. self-control, moderation, (σωφρονισμοί rives
t) μ(τάνοιαι των νιων. Pint. mor. p. 712 c. i. e. quaest.
conviv. 8, 3) : nvevpa σωφρονισμοϋ, 2 Tim. i. 7, where
see Iluther; [but Iluther, at least in his later edd., takes
the word transitively, i. q. correction (R. V. disci-
pline) ; sae also Uoltzmann ad loc.J.*
σωφρ<5νωΐ, (σώφρων), adv., fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down,
with sound mind, soberly, temperately, discreetly : Tit. ii.
12 (Sap. ix. 11).•
σωφροσ-ύνη, -ijs, ή, (σώφρων), fr. Horn, (where σαοφρ^
σϋνη) down ; a. soundness of mind (opp. to μανία,
Xen. mem. 1, 1,16; Plat. Prot. p. 323 b.) : ρήματα σωφρο-
σύνη!, words of sanity [A. V. soberness}. Acts xxvi.
25. b. self-control, sobriety, (ea virtus, eujus pro-
prium est, motus animi appetentes regere et sedare sem-
perque adversantem libidini moderatam ie omni re ser-
vare constantiam, Cic. Tusc. 3, 8, 17; ή σωφροσ- ίστϊ
καΐ ηδονών τίνων και ΐπιθνμιών (γκράτ€ΐα, Plat. rep. 4,
430 e.; cf. Phaedo p. (i8c.; sympos. p. 196 c.; Diog.
Laert. 3, 91 ; 4 Mace. i. 31 ; σωφροσύνη Si άρ€τή δι' ην
■προί τάί ήδοκάί τοϋ σώματο! οϊιτω! ίχονσιν ως ό νόμος
iciXcuft, άκοΧασία δι τουναντίον, Aristot. rhet. 1, 9, 9) :
1 Tim. ii. 15 ; joined with αίδώϊ (as in Xen. Cyr. 8, 1,
30 sq.) ibid. 9 ; [cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xx., and see
αιδώς].'
σώφρων, -OK, (fr. σάος, contr. σώς [cf. σώ^ω, init.], and
φρήν. lience the poet, σαόφρων; cf. άφρων, τα-ιτίΐνόφρων,
μιγαλάφρων), [fr. Horn, down]; a. of sound mind,
sane, in one's senses, (see σωφρονίω, a. and σωφροσύνη,
a.). b. curbing one's desires and impulses, self-con-
trolled, temperate, [R.V. sobenninded}, ([βνιθυμΛ 6 σώ-
φρων Z>v bei κα\ ως bei κα\ ore, Aristot. eth. Nic. 3, 15 fin.],
gee σωφροσύνη, b.) : 1 Tim. ilL 2 ; Tit. L 8 ; ii. 2, 5.*
[T, τ : on the receding o£ ττ in the vocabulary of the N. T.
before σσ, see under 2. σ, ί•]
τοβίρναι, -ων, α'ι, (a Lat. word [cf. Β. 17 (15)]), tav-
erns : Τ/)€ΪΓ Ύαβίρναι (gen. Τριών Ταβίρνών), Three Tav-
erns, the name of an inn or halting-place on the Ap-
oian way between Home and The Market of Appius
[seeΆπ7rιos] ; it was ten Roman miles distant from the
latter place and thirty-three from Rome (Cic. ad Attic.
2, 10, (12)) [of. B.D. s. V. Three Taverns]: Acts xxviii.
15.•
Ταβιθά [WH Ίαβίΐθά, see their App. p. 155, and s. v.
n, <; the better accent seems to be -βά (see Kautzsch ae
below)], ή, (sn'DQ, a Chald. name in the 'emphatic state'
Τ Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. n. s. w. p. 11, writes it
»<n;30, Stat, emphat. of X;3Q], Hebr. •3Υ, i. e. δορκάς,
q. v.), Tabltha, a Christian woman of Joppa, noted for
her works of benevolence : Acts Ix. 86, 40. [Cf. B. D.
β. V. Tabitha.] *
τίγμα, τος, τ6, (τάσσω) ; a. prop, that which has
been arranged, thing placed in order. b. spec, a body
of soldiers, a corps : 2 S. xxiii. 13 ; Xen. mem. 3, 1, 11 ;
often in Polyb. ; Diod. 17, 80 ; Joseph, b. j. 1, 9, 1 ; 3, 4,
2; [esp. for the Roman 'legio* (exx. in Soph. Lex. s. v.
3)] ; hence univ. a band, troop, class : ίκαστος iv τω ιδίω
TOypan (the same words occur in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 37,
3 and 41, 1), 1 Co. xv. 23, where Paul specifies several
distinct bands or classes of those raised from the dead
[A. V. order. Of the ' order ' of the Essenes in Joseph.
b. j. 2, 8, 3. 8].•
TOKTOs, -ή, -όν, (τάσσω), fr. Thuc. (4, 65) down, or-
dered, arranged, fixed, stated: τακτή ήμίρα (Polyb. 3, 34,
9; Dion. Hal. 2, 74), Acts xii. 21 [.\. V. set}.'
ταλαΐΊτωρ^ω, -ώ : 1 aor. impv. τα\αιπωρήσατ( ', (τάΚαί-
ίτωροϊ, q. V.) ; fr. Eur. and Thuc. down ; Sept. for
-\Ύιύ ; a. to toil heavily, to endure labors and hard-
ships; to be afflicted; to feel afflicted and miserable: Jas.
iv. 9. b. in Grk. writ, and Sept. also transitively
[of. L. and S. s. v. Π.], to afflict: Vs. xvi. (xvii.) 9; Is.
xxxiii. 1.*
I ToXoiirupCa, -at. η, (ταΚαίπωρος q. v.), hardship, trouble.
τα\αίπωρο<;
614
τατΓΐΐνοω
calamity, misery. Ro. iii. 10 (fr. Is. lix. 7); plur. [mis-
eries], Jas. V. 1. (lldt., Time, Isocr., Polyb., Diod.,
Joseph., al.; Sept. chiefly forTi'.)*
ταλαίπωρο;, -of, (fr. ΤΑ.\.λΩ, Τ.\ΑΩ, to bear, undergo,
and πωροί a callus [al. jrwpos, but cf. Suidas (ed. Gaisf. )
p. 3490 c. ami note; al. connect the word with ττιράω,
TTctpdw, cf. Curtius § -IlXi]), enduring toils and troubles;
afflicted, loretched: Ho. vii. 'li ; Kev. iii. 17. (Is. xxxiii.
1; Tob. xiii. 10; Sap. iii. 11 ; xiii. 10; [Find.], Tragg.,
Arstph., Dom., Polyb., Aesop., al.)*
ταλαντιαΐθ9, -ο, -ov, {^ταλαντον, q. v. ; like δραχμίαΓοϊ,
σr^^yμt.aio^, δακτνΧίαΐοί, Xirptatos, etc.; see Jjob. ad Phryn.
p. 541), of the weight or loorth of a talent : Rev. xvi. 21.
(Dcm., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
τάλοντον, -ου, τ4, [ΤΑΛΑΩ, ΤΛΑΩ [to bear]); 1.
the scale of a balance, a balance, a pair of scales (Horn.).
2. that which is weighed, a talent, i. e. a. a weight,
varying in different places and times. b. a sum of
money weighing a talent and varying in different states
and ace. to the changes in the laws regulating the cur-
rency ; the Attic talent was equal to 60 Attic minae
or 6000 drachmae, and worth about 200 pounds sterling
or 1000 dollars [cf. L. and S. s. v. 11. 2 b.]. But in the
N. T. probably the Syrian talent is referred to, which
was equal to about 2o7 dollars [but see BB. DD. s. v.
Money] : Mt. xviii. 24 ; xxv. 15 sq. [18 Lchm.], 20, 22,
24 sq. 28. (Sept. for 133, Luth. Centner, the heaviest
Hebrew weight ; on which see Kneiicker in Schenkel v.
p. 460 sq.; [BI5. DD. s. v. Weights].) *
ταλιθά [\VH ταλαβά, see their App. p. 155, ands.v.
ei, ι ; more correctly accented -βά (see Kautzsch, as be-
low, p. 8 ; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 102)], a Chald. word Sn''?"u
[ace. to Kautzscli (Gram.d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 12) more cor-
rectly ί<Π"'?Η, fem. of K;'?l? 'a youth'], a damsel, maiden :
Ilk. v. 41.*
ταμίΐον [so Τ WH uniformly], more correctly ταμκΧον
[R G L Tr in Mt. vi. 0], (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 493 ; W.
94 (90); [Tdf. Proleg. p. 88 sq.]), -ου, τό, {ταμαύω), fr.
Thuc. and Xen. down ; 1. a storechamber, store-
room: Lk. xii. 24 (Deut. xxviii. 8 ; Prov. iii. 10 [Philo,
quod omn. prob. lib. § 12]). 2. a chamber, esp. 'an
inner chamber ' ; a secret room : Mt. vi. ; xxiv. 26; Lk.
xii. 3, (Xen. Hell. 5, 4, 5 ; Sir. xxix. 12 ; Tob. vii. 15, and
often in Sept. for ΠΙΠ).*
τανίν, see mv, 1 f. a. p. 430'' top.
τάξΐ5, -COS, ή, (τάσσω), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ;
1. an arranging, arrangement. 2. order, i. e. a fixed
sncce.ssion observing also a fixed time : Lk. i. 8. 3.
due or right order : κατά τάξα/, in order, 1 Co. xiv. 40 ;
orderly condition. Col. ii. 5 [some give it here a military
sense, ' orderly array', see στ^ρίωμα, c.]. 4. the post,
rank, or position wliich one holds in civil or other affairs ;
and since this position generally depends on one's talents,
experience, resources, τάξυ becomes equiv. to character,
fashion, quality, style. (2 Mace. ix. 18 ; i. 19 ; ού yap
Ιστορίας, αλλά κονρΐακη^ λαλίά? έμοΊ δοκοΰσι τάζιν ίχαν,
Polyb. 3, 20, 5) : κατά την τά^ιν (for which in vii. 15 we
have κατά tjjv όμοώτητα) Μίλχισεδ/κ, after the manner
of the priesthood [A. V. order'] of Melchizedek (ace.
to the Sept. of Ps. cix. (ex.) 5 'Γηη'η-'?:!), Heb. v. 6,
10; vi. 20; vii. 11, 17, 21 (where Τ Tr WH om. the
phrase).*
Tairiivos, -^i, -oi-, fr. [Find.], Aeschyl., lldt. down, Sept.
for '3Γ, ijy, hsu, etc., low, i. e. a. prop, not rising
far from the ground : Ezek. xvii. 24. b. metaph.
o. as to condition, lowly, of low degree: with a subst.
Jas. i. 9 ; substantively ol Taireipol, opp. to δυνάσται, Lk.
i. 52; i.q. brought low with grief, depressed, (Sir. xxv.
23), 2 Co. vii. 6. Neut. τά ταπεινά, Ro. xii. 10 (on
which see avmirayw, fin.). β. lowly in spirit, hum-
ble: opp. to ύιτ€ρήφαΐΌ$, Jas. iv. 6 ; 1 Pet. v. 5 (fr. Prov.
iii. 34) ; with tJ καρ5ίψ added, Mt. xi. 29 (τι? πν^ύματι, Ps.
xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 19) ; in a bad sense, deporting one's self
abjectly, deferring servilely to others, (Xen. mem. 3, 10,
5 ; Plat. legg. 6 p. 774 c. ; often in Isocr.), 2 Co. x. 1.
[Cf. reff. s. V. ταττανοφροσύνη, fin.]*
ταΐΓ€ΐνοφρθ(Γύνη, -t^s, tj, {ταπ€ΐν6φρων ; opp. to μ€ya\o-
Φροσύνη, ί^φ-ηλοφροσύνη, [cf. W. 99 (94)]), the having a
humble opinion ofone'sself; a deep sense of one's {moral)
littleness; modesty, humility, lowliness of mind; (Vulg.
Intinilitas, hnth. Demuth): Acts xx. 19; Eph. iv. 2; Phil,
ii. 3 ; Col. iii. 12 ; 1 Pet. v. 5 ; used of an affected and
ostentatious humility in Col. ii. 18, 23. (The word occurs
neither in the 0. T., nor in prof. auth. — [but in Joseph.
b. j. 4, 9, 2 in the sense of pusillanimity ; also Epictet.
diss. 3, 24, 56 in a bad sense. See Trench, N. T. Syn.
§ xiii.; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil.l. c. ; Zezschioitz, Profangra-
citat, U.S.W., pp. 20, 62 ; W. 26].) *
τατΓίΐνόφρων, -ov, (Taircivos and φρήν), humble-minded,
i.e. having a modest opinion of one's self: 1 Pet. iii. 8,
where Reo. φί\6φροηί. (Prov. xxix. 23 ; in a bad sense,
pusillanimous, mean-spirited, μικρού! ή τύχη καΐ TrepiSeut
TToul καΐ ταιτανόφρονα$, Plut. de Alex. fort. 2, 4 ; [de
tranquill. animi 17. See W. § 34, 3 and reS. s. v. τοιτίΐ-
νοφροσύνη, fin.].) *
ταΐΓίΐνόω, -ώ ; fut. ταττίΐνώσω ; 1 aor. (ταττύνωσα ; Pass.,
pres. τατΓίΐΐΌϋμαι ; 1 aor. ίτα.ΤΓ(ίνώβην; 1 fut. ταττεινω^^-
ο-ο/ιαι ; (ταττΕΐνό?) ; to make low, bring low, (Vulg. hu-
milio) ; a. prop. : ipos, βουνόν, i. e. to level, reduce
to a plain, pass. Lk. iii. 6 fr. Is. xl. 4. b. metaph.
to bring into a humble condition, reduce to meaner circum-
stances ; i. e. a. to assign a lower rank or place to ; to
abase ; τινά, pass., to be ranked below others who are hon-
ored or reimrded [R. V. to humble^ : Mt. xxiii. 12 ; Lk.
xiv. 11 • xviii. 14. β. ταττα^ω ίμαυτί»', to humble or
abase myself, by frugal living, 2 Co. xi. 7 ; in pass, of
one who submits to want, Phil. iv. 12 ; (αυτόν, of one
who stoops to the condition of a servant, Phil. ii. 8. c.
to lower, depress, [Eng. humblel : τινά, one's soul, bring
down one's pride ; ίμαι/τόν, to have a modest opinion of
one's self, to behave in an unassuming manner devoid
of all haughtiness, Mt. xviii. 4 ; xxiii. 12 ; Lk. xiv. 11 ;
xviii. 14 ; pass. ταττεινοΟμαι (νώπιον κυρίου (see ίνύπιον, 2
b. fin.) in a mid. sen.se [B. .52 (40)], to confess and de-
plore one's spiritual littleness and unworthiness, Jas. iv.
10 (in the same sense ταπειχοΟν την ψυχην αύτοΰ, Sir. ii.
ταττειί'ωσί?
615
17 ; vii. 17 ; Sept. for 1Ι!>Ε3 nW, he afflicted his sotd, of
persons fasting, Lev. xvi. 29, 31 ; xxiii. 27, 32 ; Is. Iviii.
3, 5, 10 ; την ψυχήν τιι /os, to disturb, distress, the soul
of one, Protev. Jac. c. 2. 13. 15 [rather, to hiimiliate ; see
the passages] ) ; ύιτό τ^ν χΰρα τ. θίοΰ, to submit one's
self ill a lowly spirit to the power and will of God, 1 Pet.
V. 6 (cf. Gen. xvi. 9) ; i.q. to put to the bhish, 2 Co. xii.
21. ([Hippocr.], Xen., Plat., Diod., Plut.; Sept. for
njIJ, hszi and h'SVn, Sa^, V'^^n, etc.) [See retf. s. v.
τα.τΐζΐΐ'οφροσύΐ'Τ). ] *
ταΐΓ£ίνωο-ΐ5, -ews, ή, (ταπ-α^όω), lowness, low estate, [Λ«-
miliation'] : Lk. i. 48 ; Acts viii. 33 (fr. Is. liii. 8) ; Phil,
iii. 21 (on which see σώμα, lb.); metaph. spiritual abase-
ment, leading one to perceive and lament his (moral)
littleness and guilt, Jas. i. 10, see Kern ad loc. (In va-
rious senses, by Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Plut.;
Sept. for "iJ.) [See reff. s. v. ταπιινοφροσύνη.'] *
ταρά(Γ(Γω ; impf. (τάρασσαν ; 1 aor. ίτάραξα ; Pass., pres.
impv. 3 pers. sing, ταρασσ^σθω ; impf. (ταρασσόμην ; pf.
TcTUpaypai ; 1 aor. 4ταράχθ-ην ; fr. Horn, down ; to agitate,
trouble (a thing, by the movement of its parts to and
fro); a. prop.: τό Ιδωρ, Jn. V. 4 [RL], 7, (Ezek.
xxxii. 2 ; τον πόντον, Horn. Od. 5, 291 ; τό πέ\α-γο!, Eur.
Tro. 88 ; τόν ποταμόν, Aesop, fab. 87 (25)). b. trop.
to cause one inward commotion, take away his calmness of
mind, disturb his equanimity ; to disquiet, make restless,
(Sept. for 7Π3, etc. ; pass, ταράσσομαι for T3"!, to be
stirred up, irritated); a. to stir up : rbv ίχλον. Acts
xvii. 8 ; [roils όχλους, Acts xvii. 13 L Τ Tr Wl•!]. β.
to trouble: τινά, to strike one's spirit with fear or dread,
pass., Mt. ii. 3 ; xiv. 26 ; Mk. vi. 50 ; Lk. i. 12 ; [xxiv.
38] ; 1 Pet. iii. 14 ; ταράσσεται ή καρδία, Jn. xiv. 1, 27 ;
to affect with great pain or sorrow : εαυτόν (cf. our to
trouble one's self), Jn. xi. 33 [A. V. luas troubled (some
understand the word here of bodily agitation)] (σεαυτόι-
μν τάρασσε, Antonin. 4, 26); τετάρακται η ψνχ-ή, Jn. xii.
27 (Ps. vi. 4) ; ίταράχθ-η τψ πνεύμαη, Jn. xiii. 21. γ.
to render anxious or distressed, to perplex the mind of
one by suggesting scruples or doubts, (Xen. mem. 2, 6,
IT) : Gal. 1. 7 ; v. 10 ; τίνα \6yois. Acts xv. 24. [Comp.:
6ia-, έκ- ταράσσω.'] *
ταραχή, -rjs, η, (ταράσσω), fr. [Pind.], Ildt. down, dis-
turbance, commotion : prop, τοϋ ϋδατο!, Ju. v. 4 [R L] ;
metaph. a tumult, sedition : in plur. Mk. xiii. 8 RG.*
τάραχο5, -ου, b, {ταράσσω), commotion, stir (of mind):
Acts xii. 18; tumult [A. V. sii>], Acts xix. 23. (Sept.;
Xen., Plut., Lcian.)*
Tapo-iis, Wws, 0, (Ταρσίι, q. v.), belonging to Tarsus,
of Tarsus : Acts ix. 11 ; xxi. 39.*
Topo-os, -oC, ή, [on its accent cf. Chandler §§ 317,
3T8], in prof. auth. also Ταρσοί, -ώΐ', οί. Tarsus, a mari-
time city, the capital of Cilicia during the Roman period
(Joseph, antt. 1, 6, 1), situated on the river Cydnus,
which divided it into two parts (hence the plural Ταρσοί).
It was not only large and populous, but also renowned
for its Greek learning and its numerous schools of phi-
losophers (Strab. 14 p. 673 [cf. Bp. Lghttt. on Col, p. 303
sq.]). Moreover it was a free city (Plin. 5, 22), and
exempt alike from the jurisdiction of a Roman governor,
and the maintenance of a Roman garrison ; although it
was not a Roman 'colony'. It had received its free-
dom from Antony (App. b. civ. 5, 7) on the condition
that it might retain its own magistrates and laws, but
should acknowledge the Roman sovereignty and furnish
auxiliaries in time of war. It is now called Tarso or
Tersus, a mean city of some 6000 inhabitants [others
set the number very much higher]. It was the birth-
place of the apostle Paul : Acts ix. 30 ; xi. 25 ; xxii. 3.
[BB.DD. s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 78 sq. cf. 2.]*
ταρταρόω, -ω : 1 aor. ptcp. ταρταρώσα? ; (τάρταροί, the
name of a subterranean region, doleful and dark, re-
garded by the ancient Greeks as the abode of the
wicked dead, where they suffer punishment for their evil
deeds ; it answers to the Gehenna of the Jews, see 7^-
evva) ; to thrust doion to Tartarus (sometimes in the Scho-
liasts) [cf. W. 2.5 (24) n.] ; to hold captive in Tartarus :
τινά σαραΐί [q. v.] ζβφου, 2 Pet. ii. 4 [A. V. cast down to
hell (making the dat. depend on ταρ(5ωκ(ν)'\*
τάσσω: 1 aor. «ταξα ; pf. inf. τίταχέναί (Acts xviii. 2
Τ Tr mrg.) ; Pass., pres. ptcp. τασσόμβ^! ; pf. 3 pers.
sing. τ4τακταί, ptcp. τεταγμένοι ; 1 aor. mid. έταξάμην ; fr.
[Pind., Aeschyl.], Hdt. down ; Sept. for DW, and occa-
sionally for \n, TKl, mis, etc. ; to put in place ; to stcl•-
tion ; a. ii> place in a certain order (Xen. mem. 3,
1, 7 [9]), to arrange, to assign a place, to appoint : τινά,
pass, al 4ζονσίαι ii-rrh θεού τετα^μέναι είσίν [Α. V. or-
dained], Ro. xiii. 1 ; [καιρού?. Acts xvii. 26 Lchm.]; εαυτόν
είί διακονίαν Tivi, to consecrate [R. V. set] one's self to
minister unto one, 1 Co. xvi. 15 {iwl την διακονίαν, Plat,
de rep. 2 p. 371 c; eis τήν δουΧείαν, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 11);
δσοι ^σαν τεταΎμένοι eit ίωην αΐώνιον, as many as were
appointed [A. V. ordained] (by God) to obtain eternal
life, or to whom God had decreed eternal life. Acts xiii.
48 ; τικά ύττό τικα, to put one under another's control
[A. "V. set itnder], pass., Mt. viii. 9 L WH in br., cod.
Sin.; Lk. vii. 8, (ύττό τικα, Polyb. 3, 16, 3 ; 5, 65, 7 ; Diod.
2, 26, 8 ; 4,9, 5); rii-i τι, to assign (appoint) a thing t<i
one, pass. Acts xxii. 10 (Xen. de rep. Lac. 11, 6). b.
to appoint, ordain, order: foil, by the ace. with inf.. Acts
XV. 2 ; [xviii. 2 TTrmrg.]; (foil, by an inf., Xen. Hier.
10, 4 ; Cyr. 4, 5, 11). Mid. (as often in Grk. writ.) prop.
to appoint on one's own responsibility or authority : οΰ
ίτάξατο αύτοΐ$ ο Ίησοϋ^ sc. τορεύεσβαι, Mt. xxviii. 16 ;
to appoint mittually, i. e. agree upon : ήμ4ραν (Polyb. 18,
19, 1, etc.). Acts xxviii. 23. [Comp.: άνα- (-μαι), άντι-,
άτΓΟ-, δια-, ίτη-δια-(-μαι), iiri-, προ-, ττροσ-, συν-, ύττο- τάσσω.
Syn. see κελεύω, fin.]*
ToSpos, -ου, ό, [fr. r. meaning 'thick', 'stout' ; allied
w. σταυρ6$, q. v.; cf. Vanicek p. 1127 ; Pick Pt. 1. p. 216.
Cf. Eng. sieer], fr. Hom.down, Sept. for ηίϊ?, a bull (ox):
Mt. xxii. 4 ; Acts xiv. 13 ; Heb. ix. 13 ; x. 4.»
ταύτα, by crasis for τά αι>τά : 1 Th. ii. 14 R L mrg. , and
some manuscripts [(but see Tdf. on Lk. as below)] and
edd. also in Lk. vi. 23 [L mrg.], 26 [L mrg.]; xvii. 30
G L. [See W. § 5, 3 ; B. 10 ; WH. App. p. 145 ; Meister-
hans§ 18, 1: cf. ouros, IIL]*
ταφή
616
Τ6
ταφή, -^Γ, ή, (6άπτω), fr. Ildt. down ; Sept. several
times for n^JUp and Tjp, burial: Mt. xxvii. 7.*
τήφθ5, -ov, i, (θάτηω) ; 1. burial (so from Horn,
down). 2. α grace, sepulchre, (so fr. lies, down) :
Mt. .x.xiii. 27, 29 ; xxvii. Gl, 64, 6G ; xxviii. 1 ; in a com-
parison : τάφος ιν'ΐψγμίνοί 6 λά /jiiyl airiuv, tlieir speecli
threatens deslriictiun to otliors, it is death to some one
whenever they open their month, Ro. iii. 13. Sept. for
IDp, and sometimes for Π^Ι^ρ.*
τάχα, (ταχν!), adv. ; 1. hastily, quickhj, soon, (so
fr. Horn. down). 2. as often in Grk. writ. fr. [lies.,
Aesehvl.], Ildt. dowa, perhaps, peradvenlure : Ro. v. 7;
Philem. 15."
[τόχίΐον, WII for τάχιον, q. v. ; and of. s. v. ft, t.]
ταχέωϊ. (ταχύς), adv., [fr. Horn, down], quickly, shortly :
I.k. xiv. 21 ; xvi. G ; Jn. xi. 31 ; 1 Co. iv. 19 ; Gal. i. 6 ;
Phil. ii. 19, 24; 2 Tim. iv. 9 ; with the added suggestion
of inconsiderateness [hastily'] : 2 Th. ii. 2; 1 Tim. v. 22.*
ταχινόϊ, -ή, -όν, fr. Theocr. down, stcift, quick : of
events soon to come or just impending, 2 Pet. i. 14 ; ii.
1, (Is. lix. 7; Sap. .xiii. 2; Sir. xviii. 2G).•
τάχιον [Wll τάχίΐον; see their App. p. 154 and cf.
it, t], (ueut. of the conipar. ταχίων), adv., for which the
mure ancient writ, used θάσσον or θάττον, see Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 76 sq.; W. § 11, 2 a.; [B. 27 (24)]; more
swiftly, more quickly : in comparison, Jn. xx. 4 [cf. W.
C04 (562)] ; with the suppression of the second mem-
ber of the comparison \\\'. 243 (228)] : Ileb. xiii. 19
(sooner, sc. than would be the case without your prayers
for me), 23 (sc. than I depart) ; Jn. xiii. 27 (sc. than you
seem to have resolved to) ; 1 Tim. iii. 14 R G Τ (sc. than
1 anticipated).•
τάχιστα, (neut. plur. of the superl. τάχιστος, fr. τάχνς),
adv., [fr. Hom. down], very quickly : ώς τάχιστα, as
quickly as possible [-\. V. icilh all speed]. Acts xvii. 15.*
τόχοί, 'ovs, TO, fr. Horn, down, quickness, speed : tv τάχα
(often in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Find, down),
quickly, shortly. Acts xii. 7; xxii. 18; [xxv. 4]; Ro. xvi.
20 ; speedily, soon, (Germ, in Ddlde), Lk. xviii. 8 ; 1 Tim.
iii. 14 LTr WII ; Rev. i. 1 ; xxii. 6.*
ταχύ, (neut. of the adj. ταχύς), adv., [fr. Find. down].
quickly, speedily, (without delay) : Mt. v. 25 ; xxviii. 7
sq. ; Mk. xvi. 8 Rec. ; Lk. xv. 22 L Tr br. AVH ; Jn. xi.
29; ίμχ^σθαι. Rev. ii. 5 Rec.''""% 16; iii. 11; .\i. 14;
xxii. 7, 12, 20; forthwith, i. e. while in the use of my
name he is performing mighty works, Mk. ix. 39.*
ταχΰϊ, -ΐία, -ν, fr. Horn, down, quick, fleet, speedy: opp.
to βρα8ΰς (as in Xen. mem. 4, 2, 25), (Ις το άκοϋσαι, [Α. V.
swift to hear], Jas. i. 19.*
Te, (as Be comes fr. δή, μίν fr. μήν, so τι fr. the adv.
TTJ, prop, as; [al. ally it with και, cf. Curtius §§ 27, 647 ;
Vanicek p. 95 ; Fick Ft. i. 32 ; Donaldson^ New Crat.
§ 195]). a copulative enclitic particle (un the use of
which cf. Hermann ad Xig. p. 833 ; Klotz ad Devar. Π.
2 p. 739 sqq.) ; in the N. T. it occurs most frequently
in the Acts, then in the Ep. to the Heb., somewhat
rarely in the other bks. (in Mt. three or four times, in
ittk. once. viz. xv. 36 R G ; in John's Gospel three times;
nowhere in the Epp. to the Gal., Thess., or Col., nor in
the Epistles of John and Peter ; twice in text. Rec. of
Rev., viz. i. 2; xxi. 12); and, Lat. que, differing from
the panicle και in that the latter is (.'injunctive, W
ai/junctive [\V. §53, 2; ace. to Bdumlein (Griech.
Partikelu, p. 145), και introduces something new under
the same aspect yet as an external addition, Avhereas re
marks it as having an inner connection with what pre-
cedes; hence «cat is the more general particle, rs the
more special and precise ; και may often stand for Te,
but not Ti for και. (Cf. Ebeling, Lex. Homer., s. v. (cat,
init.)].
1. re, standing alone (i. e. not followed bj' another ri,
or by και, or other particle), joins a. parts of one
and the same sentence, as συναχθίντ^ς σνμίίούΧιόν Tt
\αβάντΐς, ΛΙΐ. .xxviii. 12; iv άγάττη ττνίύματι τ€ πραότητας,
1 Co. iv. 21; add, Acts ii. 33; x. 22; .\i. 26; .\x. 11;
xxiii. 10 [WH txt. om.], 24 ; xxiv. 5 ; xxvii. 20 sq. ; x.xviii.
23; Ileb. i. 3; vi. 5; ix. 1. b. complete sentences:
Jn. iv. 42; vi. 18; Acts ii. 37; iv. 33 ; v. 19, 35, 42; vi.
7, 12sq.; viii. 3, 13, 25, 31 ; x. 28, 33, 48 [here TTrAVH
Sf (see 6 below)] ; xi. 21 ; xii. 6, 8 [LTrAVII 8t' (see 6
below)], 12 ; xiii. 4 ; xv. 4, 39; xvi. 13, 23 [WII txt. 8i
(see 6 below)], .34 ; xvii.5[RG], 19[Trtxt.WH Sc (see 6
below)], 26; xviii. 11 [R G],26; xi.\. 11, 18. 2!); xx. 3, 7;
x.xi. [18*Tdf.], 18\20[notLchm.],37: xxii.8; xxiii.5;
xxiv. 27; xxvii. 5, 8, 17, 29 [Trmrg. δβ (see 6 below)],
43; Ro. ii. 19; Ileb. xii. 2; introduces a sentence serv-
ing to illustrate the matter in hand, Acts i. 15; iv.
13. 2. r€ ■ . . και, and re και, not only . . . but also,
as well . . . as, both . . . and ; things are thus connected
ivhich are akin, or which are united to each other by
some inner bond, whether logical or real ; [ace. to W.
430 (40.8) ; Biiumlein u. s. p. 224 sq., these particles give
no intimation respecting the relative value of the two
members; but ace. to /?osi, Griech. Gram. § 134, 4; Don-
aldson, Gr. Gram. § 551 ; Jelf § 758; Klolz ad Devar.
II. 2, p. 740, the member with καί is the more em-
phatic]; a. parts of one and the same sentence
(which is completed by a single finite verb) : iadUiv re
και πίν€ΐν, Lk. .xii. 45; φο'βητρά re και σημαία, Lk. xxi. 11 ;
άρχΐ(ρ€Ϊς re και γμαμματίΐς, I.k. .x.xii. 66 ; πονηρούς re και
αγαθούς, ^It. xxii. 10; ϋρώΒης re και Ιΐόντιος Τΐιλάτος,
.Vets iv. 27; ilvdpes re κα\ γυναΐκΐς, Acts Λ'ϋΐ. 12; ix. 2 ;
xxii. 4 ; πάντη re κ. ιτανταχοΐι, Acts x.xiv. 3 ; ασφαλή re
και βφαίαν, Ileb. vi. 19; add, Acts L 1 ; ii. 9 sq. ; ix. 29 ;
xiv. 1, 5 ; XV. 9 ; xviii. 4 ; xix. 10, 17; xx. 21 ; xxi. 12;
xxvi. 22; Ro. i. 12, 14, 16; iii. 9; x. 12: iCo. i. 2[RG],
24, 30 ; Heb. iv. 12^ Rec, 12"; v. 1 [here Lorn. TrWH
br. re'], 7, 14; viii. 3; i.x. 9, 19; x. 33; ,\i. 32; Jas. iii. 7;
re is annexed to the article, which is — either repeated
after the καί before the following noun, Lk. ii. 16 ; xxiiL
12 ; Jn. ii. 15 ; Acts v. 24 ; viii. 38 ; xvii. 10 ; xviii. 5 ;
xxi. 25 [R G] ; xxvi. 30 ; — or (less commonly) omitted,
Acts i. 13 ; xiii. 1 ; [xxi. 25 L Τ Tr AVH] ; Ro. i. 20. re'
is annexed to a preposition, which after the following
κα'ι is — either repeated, Acts i. 8 where L om. Tr br. the
reneated ty; Phil. i. 7 [Rom. Lbr. the second eV]; —
τείχος
617
reKvov
or omitted, Acts x. 39 [Tr txt. WH] ; xxv. 23; xxviii.
23. re is annexed to a relative pronoun, althougli it
does not belong so much to the pronoun as to the sub-
stantive connected with it, Acts xxvi. 22. it is annexed
to an adverb, ?« τί καΐ, [and moreover']. Acts xxi. 28.
\^^len more than two members are joined together, the
first two are joined by re και or τ« . . . και, the rest by
και': Lk. xii. 45; Acts i. 1:3; v. 24 [II G]; xxi. 25 : 1 Co.
i. 30 ; Heb. ii. 4. b. τέ . . . και connect whole sen-
tences (each of which has its own finite verb, or its own
subject) : Acts ii. 3 sip R G ; .xvi. 26 R G ; rt . . . και . . .
και, Acts xxi. 30. 3. re . . . 8e are so combined
that re adds a sentence to what has been pre\iously
said, p.ml Se introduces something opposed to this added
sentence [W. 439 (409)] : Acts xix. 2 L Τ Tr WH ; 3 R G
LTrtxt. WH txt. ; xxii. 28 R G. 4. τί . . . re pre-
sents as parallel (or coordinate) the ideas or sen-
tences which it connects, an . . . so (cf. KUhner § 520 ; [Jelf
§ 754, 3; W. § 53,4]; on the Lat. fjue . . . que cf. Herzog
on Sallust, Cat. 9, 3) : Acts ii. 46 ; .xvi. 1 1 sq. R G ;
xvii. 4 ; xxvi. 10 L Τ Tr WII txt., 16 ; Heb. vi. 2 [Tr br.
Λ\Ή t.xt. om. second tc], (Sap. vii. 13 ; xv. 7) ; re καΐ
. . . T€, Acts ix. 15 [L Τ Tr WII] ; τ€ και . . . tc . . . και,
Acts xxvi. 20 [L Τ Tr WII]. ehf . - . ttTc, see el. III.
15 ; eav Tf . . . iav τί, see eav, I. 3 e. . μήτ( . . . μητ( . . .
τί, neither . . . nor . . . and. Acts xxvii. 20 (Xen. an. 4,
4, 6). 5. τ€ yap (which began to be frequent fr.
Aristot. down), Lat. namqiie, etenim,fnr also, for indeed,
[W. 448 (417)], are so used that the former particle
connects, the latter gives the reason : Ilo. i. 26 (so that
in 27 we must read ομοίως 8ί και [with LTrmrg.], see
in 6 below) ; vii. 7 (4 Mace. v. 22) ; τί γαρ . . . και, Heb.
ii. 11 ; ίάν Tf yap . . . iav Tf, for whether . . . or {whether),
Ro. xiv. 8 ; ίάν tc yap και, for allhouqh (Lat. namque
eliamsi), 2 Co. x. 8 [RG]. 6. The reading often
varies in codd. and edd. between τί and hi ; as, Mt. xxiii.
6; Actsiii. 10; iv. 14; viii. 1, 6 ; ix. 24: xiii. 46; Jude
6, etc. [see in 1 b. above]. In Ro. i. 27, following Lchm.
[Tr mrg.], we ought certainly to read ομοίως 8ί και ; cf.
Fritzsche ad loc. p. 77; [B. 361 (30Π) n.]. 7. As
respects Position (cf. KUhner § 520 Anm. 5; W. 559
sq. (520)), τί is properly annexed to that word or idea
which is placed in parallelism with another (as Ιουδαίοι
Tf καιΈλληνα) ; but writers also take considerable lib-
erty in placing it, and readily subjoin it to an article or
a preposition; for examples see in 2 a. above.
Tctxos, -ous, TO, [cf. θιγγάνω ; aUied with it are Eng.
'dike' and 'ditch'], fr. Horn, down, Sept. very freq. for
min ' wall ' ; the ivall round a cilij, town-ivall : Acts i.x.
25; 2 Co. xi. 33; Heb. xi. 30: Rev. x.xi. 12, 14 sq., 1 7-19.•
ηκμήριον, -ου, τό, (fr. τεκμαίρω to show or prove by
sure signs ; fr. τίκμαρ a sign), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
that from which something U surely and plainly k-nown ;
an indubitable evidence, a proof, (Hesych. τίκμήριον •
σημίΊον άληθίς) : Acts i. 3 (Sap. v. 11 ; 3 Mace. iii. 24).*
TcCTiov, -ου, TO, (dimin. of τίκνον, q. v. ; [on the accent,
cf. W. 52; Chandler § 347]), a little child; in the X. T.
need as a term of kindly address by teachers to their
disciples [always in the plur. little children : Mk. x. 24
Lchm.] ; Jn. xiii. 33 ; Gal. iv. 19 (where L t.\t. Τ Tr WH
mrg. Tfitra) ; 1 Jn. ii. 1, 12, 2.-S ; iii. 7 [WH mrg. πωδία],
18; iv. 4; v. 21. (.Vnthol.) *
τίκνογονε'ω, -ώ ; (TCKvoyovos, and this fr, τίκνον and
ΓΕΝ£2) ; to heyet or bear children : 1 Tim. v. 14. (Λη-
thol. 9, 22, 4.) •
TtKvo^ovia, -as, ή, child-bearing: 1 Tim. ii. 15. (Aris-
tot. h. a. 7, 1, 8 [p. 582% 28].)*
TfKvov, -ov, TO, (τίκτω, Tf/ceii»), fr. Hom. down, Sept.
chiefly for [2, sometimes for nV, offspring ; plur. chil-
dren ; a. prop. a. univ. and without regard to
sex, child: Mk. xiii. 12 ; Lk. i. 7 : Acts vii. 5 ; Rev. xii.
4 ; plur., Mt. vii. 11 ; x. 21 ; .xv. 26 ; Mk. vii. 27 ; xii.
19 ; Lk. i. 17 ; xiv. 26 ; Acts xxi. 5 ; 2 Co. xii. 14; Eph.
vi. 1 ; Col. iii. 20 sq. ; 1 Th. ii. 7, 1 1 ; 1 Tim. iii. 4 ; Tit.
i. 6 ; 2 Jn. 1, 4, 13, and often; with emphasis: to be
regarded as true, genuine children, Ro. i.x. 7 ; τίκνα
«VayyfXias, children begotten by virtue of the divine
promise, Ko. ix. 8 ; accounted as children begotten by
virtue of God's promise, Clal. iv. 28 ; τά τίκνα τη\ σαρκός,
children by natural descent, Ro. Lx. 8. in a broader
sense (like the Hebr. D"J|), posterity: Mt. ii. 18; iii. 9;
Lk. iii. 8; Acts ii. 39; xiii. 33 (32). with emphasis:
genuine posterity, true offspring, Jn. viii. 39; (of wo-
men) to be regarded as children, 1 Pet. iii. 6. β.
spec, a male child, σ son: Mt. xxi. 28; Acts xxi. 21 ;
Rev. xii. 5 ; in the voc, in kindly address, Mt. x.xi. 28 ;
Lk. ii. 48; xv. 31. b. metaph. the name is trans-
ferred to that intimate and reciprocal relationship formed
between men by the bonds of love, friendship, trust,
just as between parents and children ; a. in affec-
tionate address, such as patrons, helpers, teachers, and
the like, employ ; voc. child (son), my child, children,
(LaX. fli, mifli, etc., for carisslme, etc.) : Mt. ix. 2 ; Mk.
ii. 5 ; X. 24 [here Lchm. τικνία, q. v.]. β. just as in
Hebrew, Syriac, Arabic, Persian, so in the N. T., pupils
or disciples are called children of their teachers, because
the latter by their instruction nourish the minds of their
pupils and mould their characters (see yfwam. 2 b.) :
Philem. 10; 2 Tim. i. 2 ; 3 Jn. 4 ; in affectionate ad-
dress, Gal. iv. 19 L txt. Τ Tr WH mrg. ; 1 Tim. i. 18; 2
Tim. ii. 1 ; with ίν κνρίω added, 1 Co. iv. 17; ev πίστίΐ,
iTim. i. 2; κατακοινηνπίστιν,ΊΊΐ.Ί. 4,(Ώ'Κ'η:ί'η 'ja, sons
i.e. disciples of the prophets, 1 K. xxi. (xx.) 35; 2 K.
ii. 3, 5, 7 : among the Persians, 'sons of the Magi' i. e.
their pupils). γ. τίκνα τοΰ θιοϋ, children of God, — in
the O. T. of ' the people of Israel ' as especially dear to
God: Is. XXX. 1; Sap. xvi. 21 ; — in the N. T., in Paul's
writings, all tcho are animated hy the Spirit of God (Ro.
viii. 14) and thus are closely related to God : Ro. viiL
16 sq. 21 ; Eph. v. 1 ; Phil. ii. 15 ; those to whom, as dear-
ly beloved of God, he has appointed salvation by Christ.
Ro. ix. 8; in the writings of John, all who ίκ θ€οϋ tyev
νήθησαν (have been begotten of God, see γ€ννάω, 2 d.) : Jo.
i. 12 sq. ; 1 Jn. iii. 1 sq. 10; v. 2; those whom God knows
to be qualified to obtain the nature and dignity of his
children, Jn. xi. 52. [Cf. Westcott on the Epp. of St.
τεκνοτροφίω
618
TeXetoto
John, pp. 94, 120; "In St. Paul the expressions 'sons
of God', 'children of God', mostly convey the idea of
liberty (see however Phil. ii. 15), in St. John of guile-
lessness and love; in accordance with this distinction
St. Paul uses vloi as well as τίκνα, St. .John τίκνα only "
(Bp. Ltfhtft.) ; cf. uiof ToC ΛοΟ, 4.] δ. τίκνα του δια-
βόλου, llioxe who in l/ioiiijht and action are prompted hij the
det'il, and so reflect his character: I Jn. iii. 10. c.
metaph. and Ilebraistically, one is called τίκνον of any-
thing who depends upon it, is possessed by a desire or
ajfection for it, is addicted to it ; or who is liable to any
fate ; thus in the N. T. we find a. children of a
city, i. e. its citizens, inhabitants, (Jer. ii. 30 ; Joel ii.
23; 1 Mace. i. 38; vi'oi Σιωι/, Ps. c.\Ii.\. 2): Mt. xxiii.
87 ; Lk. xiii. 34 ; xix. 44 ; Gal. iv. 25. β. τίκνα της
σοφίας, the votaries of wisdom, those whose souls have,
as it were, been nurtured and moulded by wisdom : Mt.
xi. 19 (where Τ Trtxt. WII have liastily adopted ίργων
for τέκνων; cf. Keim ii. p. 3(J9 [Eng. trans, iv. p. 43 sq.;
per contra, see Tdf.'s note and ]VH. App. ad loc.]) ; Lk.
vii. 35 ; τίκνα υπακοής, those actuated by a desire to obey,
obedient, 1 Pet. i. 11; τοΰ φωτός, both illumined by tlie
light and loving the light, Ei)h. v. 8. γ. κατάρας
τίκνα, exposed to cursing, 2 Pet. ii. 14 ; της οργής, doomed
to God's wrath or penalty, Eph. ii. 3 ; cf. Steiger on 1
Pet. i. 14; W. 238 (223) ; [B. Itil (141)]. In the same
way ίκγονος is used sometimes in Grk. writ. ; as, ΐκγ.
αδικίας, δ(ΐ\ίας. Plat. legg. 3 p. 691 c. ; 10 p. 901 e.
[Syn. τίκνον, ui6s: τ.&τιά ui. while concurring in point-
ing to parentage, differ in that τ. gives promiuence to the
physical and outward aspects, i/i. to the inward, ethical, legal.
Cf b. y. above ; vlhs toS eeoS, fin. ; jrais, fin. and reff. (esp.
that to Hijhne).]
τίκνο-τροφ£ω, -ώ : 1 aor. ίτ(κνοτρόφησα ; (τίκνοτρόφος,
and this from τίκνον and τρίφω) \ to lirincj up children :
1 Tim. V. 10. {φίρίΐ ΰδωρ, όταν τ(κνοτροφή, sc. the bee,
Aristot. h. a. 9, 40 [27], 14 [p. 62o^ 20].)'•
Τί'κτων, -όνος, ό, (rcKeiv, τίκτω ; akin to τίχνη, τ(ΰχω,
hence ])rop. ' begetter' [Curtius § 235]), fr. Ilom. down,
Sept. for 'dyn ; a worker in wood, a carpenter : !Mt. xiii.
65 ; Mk. vi. 3 [see WH. App. on the latter pass.].•
TtXtios, -a, -ov, (Tf'Xof), in classic Grk. sometimes also
-Of, -ov, (ef. W. § 1 1, 1), fr. Horn, down, Sept. several times
for ΐίΤό, D'pri, etc.; prop, brought to its end, finished;
wanting nothing necessary to completeness ; perfect : epyov,
Jas. i. 4 ; ή αγάπη, 1 Jn. iv. IS; 6 νόμος, Jas. i. 25 ; [δώρημα,
Jas. i. 17]; τίλίίοτφα σκηνή, a more perfect (excellent)
tabernacle, Heb. ix. 11 ; το τίλ^ιον, substantively, that
which is perfect : consummate human integrity and vir-
tue, Ro. xii. 2 [al. take it here as an adj. belonging to
θίλημα] ; the perfect state of all things, to be ushered in
by the return of Christ from heaven, 1 Co. xiii. 10 ; of
men, full-grown, adult ; of full age, mature, (Aeschyl.
Ag. 1504 ; Plat. legg. 11 p. 929c.) : Ileb. v. 14 ; τί\ άνήρ
(Xen. Cyr. 1, 2,4sq.; 8, 7, G ; Philo de cherub. § 32; opp.
to ποίδίον νήπιον, I'olyb. 5, 29, 2 ; for other exx. fr. other
auth. see Bleek; Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 133 sq.), μίχρι
. . iit Stvhpa TtKtiov, until we rise to the same IsveJ of
knowledge which we ascribe to a full-growti man, until
we can be likened toa full-grown man, Eph. iv. 13 (opp.
to νήπιοι, 14); reXciot ralr φρ^σί (opp. to παιδία and
νηπιάζηντίς τα'ις φρισί), 1 Co. xiv. 20 [here A. \". men'\ ;
absol. oi Ti'Xfioi, the perfect, i. e. the more intelligent,
ready to apprehend divine things, 1 Co. ii. ϋ [R.V. mrg.
full-grown'] (o|ip. to νήπιοιίν Χριστώ, iii. 1 ; in simple oj)!».
to νήπιος, Philo de legg. alleg. i. § 30; for ['31, opp. to
μανθάνων, 1 Chr. -xxv. 8; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 28;
Phil. iii. 15]); of mind and character, one who has
reached the proper height of virtue and integrity : Mt.
V. 48 ; xix. 21 ; Pliil. iii. 15 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. u. s.] ; Jas.
i. 4; in an absol. sense, of God: Mt. v. 48; TeXeios
άνήρ, Jas. iii. 2 (τβλ. δίκαιος. Sir. xliv. 17); as respects
understanding and goodness. Col. iv. 12; τί\. άνθρωπος
fv Χριστώ, Col. i. 28 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. u. s. Syn. see
ολόκληρος, and Trench § xxii.].*
Τ€λ€ΐότη5, -ητος, ή, (reXeiur, ([. v.), perfection ; a.
i. Θ. the stale of the more intelligent : Ileb. vi. 1 [here R.V.
mrg. full growtJi]. h. perfection : (τής αγάπης, Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 50, 1 [where see llarnaek]) ; absol. moral
and spiritual perfection. Col. iii. 14 [A.V. perfectness'\, on
which pass, see σϋνδισμος, 1. (Prov. xi. 3 Alex. ; Judg.
ix. 16, 19; Sap. vi. 16; xii. 17; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 53, 5 ;
Plat. deff. p. 412 b. d. ; [Aristot. phys. 3, 6 p. 207*, 21 ; 8,
7 p. 261*, 36]; Antonin. 5, 15.) [Cf. reff. s. v. τίληος,
and B. Hartung, Der Begriff der τ(\(ΐότης im N. T.
(4to. Leipz. 1881).]*
τ£λ»6ω (in prof. auth. also rfXeoco, which Hdt. uses
everywhere [and which is " the prevailing form in Attic
prose" (L. and S.)]; other writ, use both forms indif-
ferently), -ώ: I HOT. ίτίλίίωσα; pf. rtTfXf ί'ωκα ; Pass, (or
^lid.), pres. TfXfioC^Qi ; pf. τ€τ(λ(ίωμαι; 1 a.or. (τίλ^ιώθην;
(τίλίίος) ; f r. Ildt., Soph., Thuc, and Plat, down ; equiv.
to τίλΐΐυν ποιώ, to make perfect or complete ; 1. to
carry through completely ; to accomplish, finish, bring to
an end : τοχ δρόμον, .\cts .xx. 24 ; to ϊργον, Jn. iv. 34 ; v.
36 ; xvii. 4, (Neh. vi. 16 ; τον οίκον, 2 Chr. viii. 16) ; τας
ήμίρας, Lk. ii. 43 ; mid. [pres. cf. B. 38 (33)] τ(λ(ΐονμαι,
I finish, complete, what was given me to do, Lk. xiii. 32
[some (so A. V.) take it here as pass., / am perfected
(understanding it of his death; cf. Ellicott, Life of our
Lord, Lect. vi. p. 242 n.' ; Keim ii. 615 n.')]. 2. to
complete {perfect), i. e. add what is yet wanting in order
to render a thing full: την άγάττην, pass., 1 Jn. ii. 5; iv.
1 2, 1 7 ; ή δύναμίς μου ίν άσθΐν^ία τ^λΐΐοΰται, my power
.ihows itself most efficacious in them that are \veak, 2 Co.
xii. 9 R G ; ίκ των ΐργων ή πίστις ίτ(λ(ΐώθη, by works
faith was perfected, made such as it ought to be, Jas. ii.
22; τ(τ(λ(ΐωταί τις ίν τη αγάπη, one has been made perfect
in love, his love lacks nothing, 1 Jn. iv. 18 (oi τ€λίΐα>-
θίντ(ς ίν αγάπη, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 50, 3; [^τ(λΐΐώσαι την
ίκκλησίαν σου ίν τη αγάπη σον, 'Teaching' etc. 10, 5]);
ίνα ωσι τ(Τ(λ(ΐωμίνοι (ΐς ίν, that they may be perfected into
one, i. e. perfectly united, Jn. xvii. 23. τίΐ/ά, to bring
one's character to perfection : ήδη τιτιλιίωμαι, I am already
made perfect, Phil. iii. 12 (Sap. iv. 13 ; ω ψυχή . . . ότα»
'■(λίΐωθής κα\ βρα'ιίιίων κα'ι στεφάνων άξιωθης, Philo de legg.
τελβίω?
619
TeXos
alleg. 3, 23 ; ^Ιτνχη . . . Tf\f^ωΰ(Ίσa ev αρετών αθΚοί! κα\
(πι τον ορον (φικομίνη τοϊι καλοΟ, id. de somn. 1, 21 ; i. q.
to be found perfect. Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 10). 3. to
bring to the end {goal) proposed : oihiv, Heb. vii. 1 9 ;
τινά, [to perfect or iiiNsummale~\ i. e. to raise to the slate
befitting him : so of God exalting Jesus to the state of
heavenly majesty, Heb. ii. 10; in pass., Heb. v. 9; vii.
28 ; to raise to the state of heavenly blessedness those who
put their faith in the expiatory death of Christ, pass.,
Heb. xi. 40; xii. 23, ([Act. Petr. et Paul. §88, ed. Tdf.
p. 39; Act. Barnab. § 9, id. p. 68 ; of. 'Teaching' etc.
16, 2]; with μαρτυρία added, of the death of the apost.
Paul, Euseb. h. e. 2, 22, 2 [of. Heinichen's note on 7, 15,
5]) ; to make one meet for future entrance on this state
and gi^e him a sure hope of it even here on earth, Heb.
X. 1, 14 ; τινά κατά συνείδησιν, Heb. Lx. 9 ; cf. Bleek, Brief
an d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 297 sqq. ; C. R. Kostlin, Lehrbegriff
des Evang. u. der Briefe Johannis (Berl. 1843) p. 421
sqq.; Riehm, Lehrbegriff des Hebr.-Br., § 42. p. 340 sqq. ;
Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 344 sq. [Eng. trans, ii. p. 72
sqq.]. 4. to accomplish, i. e. bring to a close or ful-
filment by event : την γραφήν, the prophecies of Scripture,
pass., Jn. xix. 28 [cf. W. 459 (428) ; B. § 151, 20].*
τΛίΟωϊ, (reXetos), adv., perfectly, completely : 1 Pet. i.
13. [Plat., Isocr., Aristot., etc. ; cf. W. 463 (431).] •
TiXetoxris, -Εωί, ή, (τίλ€ίόω), a completing, perfecting ;
a. fulfilment, accomplishment ; the event which verifies
a promise (see τίλίΐόω, 4) : Lk. i. 45 [Judith x. 9 ; Philo
de vit. Moys. iii. § 39]. b. consummation, perfection,
(see TfXfwa, 3) : Heb. vii. 11. (In various senses in
Aristot., Theophr., Diod.) [Cf. reff. s. v. TcXeiow, 3.] *
τΛίίωτήϊ, -oO, o, (τ(\(ΐόω), (Vulg. consummator), a per-
fecter: της πίστεως, one who has in his own person raised
faith to its perfection and so set before us the highest
example of faith, Heb. xii. 2. The word occurs no-
where else.*
τίλΕίτψορίω, -S> ; (τεΧεσφόροι, fr. tiKos and φέρω) ; to
bring to {perfection or) maturity (sc. καρπούς) ■ Lk. viii.
14. (Used alike of fruits, and of pregnant women and
animals bringing their young to maturity ; 4 Mace. xiii.
19; Theophr., Geop., Philo, Diod., Joseph., al.; [Ps. Ixiv.
(Ixv.) 10 Symm.].) *
τίλίυτάω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ίτεΧεύτησα ; pf. ptcp. τετελευτηκώς
(Jn. xi. 39 L Τ Tr WH) ; (τεΧευτή) ; fr. Horn, down ; 1.
trans, to finish ; to bring to an end or close : τον βίον, to
finish life, to die, often fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down. 2.
intrans. [cf. B. § 130, 4] to have an end or close, come to an
end ; hence to die, very often so fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down (Sept. for ni^D), and always in the N. T. : Mt. ii.
19 ; ix. 18 ; xxii. 25 ; Mk. ix. 44, 46 [(these two vss. Τ
WH om. Tr br.)], 48 ; Lk. vii. 2 ; Jn. xi. 39 L Τ Tr WH ;
Acts ii. 29 ; vii. 15; Heb. xi. 22; ΰανάτω τελευτάτω (in
imitation of the Hebr. nov ηή, Ex. xxi. 12, 15-17,
etc.), [A. V. let him die the death i. e.] let him surely die
[W. 339 (319); B. § 133, 22], Mt. xv.4; Mk. vii. lb.•
Τ€λευτή, -ης, ή, (τεΧεω), end [see τέλος, 1 a. init.] ; the
end of life, decease, death : Mt. ii. 15 (and often in Grk.
writ. fr. Pind. and Thuc. down ; Sept. for niD ; with
βιότοιο added, Horn. Ή. 7, 104; τοϋβίου, Hdt. 1, 30, and
often in Attic writ.).*
τ(λεω, -ώ; 1 aor. έτέλεσα [cf. W. § 13, 3 c] ; pf. τετελεκα
(2 Tim. iv. 7) ; Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing, τελείται (2 Co.
xii. 9 L Τ Tr WH) ; pf. τετέλεσμαι ; 1 aor. έτελέσθην ;
1 int. τελεσθήσομαι; (τέλος); fr. Ilom. down; 1. to
bring to a close, to finish, to end : ετη, pa,ss.,passed, finished,
Rev. XX. 3, 5, 7, ([so fr. Hom. and Hes. down ; Aristot.
h. a. 7, 1 init. p. 580°, 14 έν roit ετεσι το'ις its έτττά τετε•
λεσμενοις~\ ; τριών τελουμένων ημερών, Lcian. Ale.x. 38) ;
τόΐ' δρυμοί' (Ηοιη. II. 23, 373, 768; Soph. Electr. 726),
2 Tim. iv. 7 ; τους λόγους, Mt. vii. 28 L Τ Tr WH ; .xix.
1 ; xxvi. 1 ; τάς παραΐϋολάς, Mt. .xiii. 53; [άχρι τελεσθώσιρ
a'l πληγαί, Rev. xv. 8] ; a rare use is τελε'ιν τάς πόλεις, i. e.
your tiight or journey through the cities [R. V. ye shall
not have gone through the cities, etc.], Mt. x. 23 (similar
are άνΰειν roir τόπους, Polyb. 5, 8, 1 ; τα βλι;, 3, 79, 5; con-
summare Italiam, Flor. 1, (13) 18, 1 ; explere urbes, Ti-
buU. 1, 4, 69; conficere aequor immensum, Verg. Georg.
2, 541 ; also xii. signorum orbem, Cic. nat. deor. 2, 20,
52) ; with the ptcp. of a verb (like άρχομαι, παύομαι, cf.
W. § 45, 4 a.; B. § 144, 14), Mt. xi. 1. 2. to per-
form, execute, complete, fulfil, (so that the thing done
corresponds to what has been said, the order, command,
etc.), i. e. a. with special reference to the sub-
ject-matter, to carry out the contents of a command:
τον νόμον, Ro. ii. 27 [cf. W. 134 (127)] ; Jas. iL 8 ; την
έπιθυμίαν (i. e. το έπιθυμούμενον), Gal. v. 16. β. with
reference also to the form, to do just as commanded, and
generally involving a notion of time, to perform the last
act which completes a process, to accomplish, fulfil:
άπαντα {πάντα) τα κατά νάμον, Lk. ii. 39 ; την μαρτνρίαν,
the duty of testifying. Rev. xi. 7 ; το μυστήριον, pass.
Rev. x. 7 [cf. W. 277 (2G0)] ; το βάπτισμα, pass. Lk. xii.
50 ; πάντα, pass. Jn. xi.x. 28 [the distinction betw. τελέω
and τελειόω may be seen in this vs.] ; tous λόγους (τα
ρήματα) τοϋ θεοί), pass. Rev. xvii. 1 7 ; άπαντα (πάντα) τα
γε-γραμμένα, Acts xiii. 29 ; pass., Lk. xviii. 31 [see γράφω,
2 c] ; with έν έμοί (in me) added, in my experience. Lk.
xxii. 37 ; eV πληγαΐς, in the infliction of calamities. Rev.
XV. 1 ; τετέλεσται, [λ. V. it is finished~\ everything has
been accomplished which by the appointment of the
Father as revealed in the Scriptures I must do and bear,
Jn. xix. 30. i.q. τελειόω, 2, q. v. (made perfect) : 2 Co.
xii. 9 LTTrWlI. 3. to pay: τα δίδραχμα, Mt.
xvii. 24 ; φόρους, Ro. xiii. 6, (τον φόρον. Plat. Ale. 1 p.
123 a.; τα τέλη, often in Attic writ.). [CoMP. : απο-,
Bia-, εκ-, έττι-, συν- τελέω-Ι *
τί'λοϊ, -ους, τά, [cf. Curtius § 238], fr. Hom. down, Sept.
mostly for I'D; 1. end, i.e. a. termination, the
limit at which a thing ceases to be, (in the Grk. writ,
always of the end of some act or state, but not of the
end of a period of time, which they call τελευτη ; in the
Scriptures also of a temporal end; an end in space is
everywhere called πέρας) : της βασιλείας, Lk. i. 33 ; ζωής,
Heb. vii. 3 ; τοί καταργουμένου, 2 Co. iii. 1 3 ; τη τέλη των
αιώνων, 1 Co. χ. 1 1 (τί'λο? των ήμερων, Xeh. xiii. 6 ; των
επτά ετών, 2 Κ. viii. 3 ; αρχή καΐ τέλος κα\ μεσάτης χρόνων,
rA-ov
620
Tea σαρακοντατεσσαρΐ^
Sap. vii. 18) ; i. η. he who puts an end to: rfKos νόμου
Κριστός, Christ has broujjlit tlie law to an eiiil (πασίν
ϊστιν άνθρωποι! rtXos τοϋ βίου θάνατο!, Dem. 1306, 2•")),
Κο. χ. 4 ; cf. Fritzsche ail loc., vol. ii. p. 377 sq. πάντων
TO τί'λοΓ, llii; onil of all tliin;^s (i. e. of the present onUr
of thin.;s), 1 Pet. iv. 7; also in the phrases ίω: τΛουί,
1 Co. i. 8; 2 Co. i. 13 ; /ie;<pt reXouf, lleb. iii. G [Tr nug.
Wll br. the cl.], 14; άχρι TcXuuf, lleb. vi. 14; Uev. ii.
20. What 'end' is intended the reader must deter-
mine by the conte.\t ; thus, το reXos denotes the end of
the Messianic pangs (ilolores Messiae ; see ώδίΐ') in Mt.
xxiv. 6, 14, (opp. to αρχή ωδίνων) ; Mk. xiii. 7 (cf. 9) ;
Lk. x.\i. 9 ; το re'Xor in 1 Co. xv. 24 denotes either the
end of the eschatulogical events, or the end of the res-
urrection i. e. the last or third act of the resurrection (to
include those who had not belonged to the number of oi
τοΰ Χρίστου ίν τί) παρουσία αΰτοΰ), 1 Co. χλ'. 24 cf. 23 ;
see Da Wette ad Ιου. ; iVcizcl in the Theol. Stud. u.
Krit. for 1836, p. 978; Grimm in the Zeitschr. £. wis-
sensch. Theol. for 1873, p. 388 stjq. ; [yet cf. Heinrici in
Meyer (6te Aufl.) ad loc.]. ίίϊ tcXos, — lo the very end
appointed for these evils, Mt. x. 22; x.xiv. 13; Mk. xiii.
13 ; also at the end, al last, finally, Lk. xviii. 5 (Vulg. in
nooisximo) [i. e. lexl at last by her cominf; she wear me
out; but al. take it i. (]. Ilebr. nXjS (cf. Job xiv. 20 etc.
see Trommius) and connect it with the ptcp , lest by her
cominy lo the last i.e. cnnlinually; see ΰπωπιάζω, sub fin.] ;
Jn. xiii. 1 [al. to the utiennnsi, completely (cf. our to the
very last) ; see Westcott, and Weiss (in Meyer 6te Aufl.)
ad loc. ; Grimm on 2 Mace. viii. 29], cf. αγαπάω, sub fin.,
(Xen. oec. 1", 10; lies. opp. 292; Hdt. 3,40; 9,37;
Soph. Phil. 409 ; Eur. Ion 1615 ; Ael. v. h. 10, 16) ; to
the (procurement of their) end, i. e. to destruction [A. V.
to the uttermost (cf. reff. u. s.)], 1 Th. ii. 16 (for hSdS,
2 Chr. xii. 12) ; τίΚοί ϊχαν, to have an end, be finished,
(often in Grk. writ.), Lk. xxii. 37 [al. give Te'Xor here
the sense oi fulfilment (cf. τίλί'ω, 2)] ; 1. q. to perish, Mk.
iii. 26. TO Si Te\os, adverbially, finally {denique vera) :
1 Pet. iii. 8 (Plat. legg. 6 p. 768 b. ; καϊ τό ye τί\ος, ibid.
5 p. 740 e. ; but generally in prof. auth. τίλοί in this
sense wants the article ; cf. Passow ii. p. 1857" ; [L. and
S. s. V. I. 4 a.]). b. the end i. e. the last in any suc-
cession or series : (ή) άρχη κα\ (το) Tckos, of God, who by
his perpetuity survives all things, i. e. eternal. Rev. i. 8
Kec. ; x.\i. 6; xxii. 13. o. that by which a thing is
finished, its close, issue : Mt. xxvi. 58 ; final lot, fate, as
if a recompense : with a gen. of the thing, Ro. vi. 21
sq. ; lleb. vi. 8; 1 Pet. i. 9; with a gen. of the person
whom the destiny befalls, 2 Co. xi. 15; Phil. iii. 19; 1
Pet. iv. 17 ; τοΰ κυρίου (gen. of author), the closing ex-
perience which befell Job by God's command, Jas. v. 1 1
(referring to Job xiii. [esp. 12]). d. the end to
which all things relate, the aim, purpose: 1 Tim. i. 5
(often so in philos. fr. Plat, de rep. 6 p. 494 a. down; cf.
Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 378). 2. toll, custom, [i.e.
an indirect tax on goods ; see φόροί and κηκσοί] : Mt.
xvii. 25 ; Ro. xiii. 7, (Xen., Plat., Polyb., Aaschin., Dem.,
al. : 1 Mace. x. 31 : xi. 35V•
Τ€λώνη5, -ου, ό, (fr. τΛογ [((ρ v. 2)] tax, and ωνίομαι to
buy ; cf. ^ημοσιώνη:, όψώνη!, δ<κατώνηΐ), fr. Arstph.,
Aeschin., Aristot., I'olyb. down ; 1. α renter or
farmer of taxes (Lat. puhlicanus); among the Romans
usually a man of eijuestrian rank. 2. a tar-gaiherer,
collector of taxes or tolls, (Vulg. publicanus incorrectly;
[so A. V. publican]), one employed by a publican or far-
mer-general in collecting the taxes. The tax-collectors
were, as a class, detested not only by the Jews but by other
nations also, both on account of their employment and of
the harshness, greed, and deception, with which they
prosecuted it ; (hence they are classed by Artem. oneir.
1, 23 ; 4, 57, with καπηΧοις και Tois μΐτα avaidiias ζωσι και
λτ^σταΐί και ζυγοκροΰσταΐ! καΐ παραλογισταΐί άνθρώποκ ;
Lcian. necyoMi. c. 11 puts together μοι;(οί, πιψνο(ίοσκο\
κα\ τ€\ωναι κα\ κοΚακ^ς κα\ σνκοφάνται [The()phi'. charact.
6 (TTf/jl άτΓοίΌΐ'αε) πανίοχ^σ-^ι, κα\ πορνοβοσκησαι, καΐ
τ(λωνησαι]) : Mt. ν. 4Ι>, 1 7 Rec. ; Χ. 3 ; Lk. iii. 12; v. 27,
29; vii. 29; .xviii. 10, 11, 13; the plur. is joined with
αμαρτωλοί, Jit. ix. 10 S(j. ; [xi. 19]; Mk. ii. 15 sq. ; Lk.
v. 30 ; vii. 34 ; xv. 1 ; Avith πόρνοι, Mt. xxi. 31 sq. ; ό ί'θνι-
Kos κ- ό τ(\ώνη!. Mt. xviii. 17. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Zoll,
ZoUner; [liU. DD. s. v. Publican; Wetstein on Mt. v.
46; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 515 Sijq.].*
τ€λώνιον, -ου, τό, {τ€\ώνη9. cf. δ(κητώνιον) ; [Χ. cus-
toms, toll : Strabo IC, 1, 27. 2.] tull-house, place of
toll, tax-office : the place in which the tax-collector sat
to collect the taxes [AViclif, t(ilbothe~\ : !Mt. ix. 9 ; Mk. ii.
14; Lk. v. 27.•
Tcpas. gen. τιρατοί. pi τίρατα (if. κίρπ!. init.), τό, (ap-
parently akin to the verb τηρίω; accurdingly something
so strange as to cause it to be • watched ' or ' observed ' ;
[others connect it with αστήρ, αστραπή, etc.. hence ' a sign
in the heavens' ; Vanicek p. I I4il ; Curtius § 205] ; see
Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 270), fr. Horn, down, Sept.
for nSl'O, a prodigy, portent ; miracle [A.\'. wonder] per-
formed by any one ; in the N. T. it is found only in the
plur. and joined Avith σημΰα ; for the passages see σημύον,
p. 574».
Ti'pTios, -ου, 6, Tertius, an amanuensis of the apostle
Paul : Ro. xvi. 22. [B. D. s. v.] •
TepTvXXos, -ου, ό, Tertullus, a Roman orator : Acts
xxiv. 1 sq. [See μήτωρ.] •
τ£ο•σ•αράκοντα Iv G, but several times [i. e. betw. 8 and
14] in Lchm. and everywhere in Τ WH (and Tr, e.xc.
Rev. xxi. 1 7) τfσσepάκovτa (a form originally Ionic [yet
cf. B. as below] ; see Kuhner § 187, 5 ; B. 28 (25) sq. ;
cf. W. 43 ; ITdf Proleg. p. 80 ; WH. App. p. 150]), oi,
αϊ, τά, indecl. numeral, /ortj/ : Mt. iv. 2; Mj. i. 13; Lk.
iv. 2 ; Jn. ii. 20 ; etc.
[τί<Γσ•οροκοντα-8ίο, forty-two : Rev. xi. 2 Rec.''*' ; xiii. δ
Rec.''" =".•]
τίσ-σ-αρακοντοίτήϊ (Τ Tr WH τισσιρ-, see τισσαράκον
τα; \j Τ accent -ίτηί, see {κατονταίτης), -it, (τ(σααράκοι>-
τα, and ctos), of forty years, forty years old: Acts vii.
23; xiii. 18. (Hes. opp. 441.) •
[τ£(ΓσορακοντίΜ•ί<Γ<Γθρ«5, -ων, forty-four: Rev. xxi. 1?
Rec.''•• "'.'l
τεσσαρε'ί
621
τηΧικοϋτο^
τί'σ-σαρίϊ, -ων, οί, αϊ, τίσσαρα, τα, gen. Tf (τσάρων, dat.
τίσσαρσιΐΊ ([Lclim. reads riaafpes 7 times to 33, Tdf. 6
to 35, Tr G to 33, VVH 6 to 34 ; Lchm. sometimes has
τ£σσ(ρα, Τ Tr WII always ; L Tr sometimes liave τ€σ-
σ(ρα! (see WII. A pp. p. 150)]; but no editor adopts e in
the gen. or dat. ; see Tf σσαράκοιτα and red.), four : Mt.
xxiv. 31 ; Mk. ii. 3 ; Lie. ii. 37 ; Jn. xl 17 ; Acts x. 11 ;
Rev. iv. 4, etc.
τ£σσ•αρ£5-και-8€κατο5, -η, -ov, the fourteenth : Acts xxvii.
27, 33.•
[τίσσίρ- see τ((τσαρ- (of. Meisterhans § 21, 4)]
TiTopratos, -a, -ov, (τίταρτος), an ordinal numeral, used
in answer to the que.stion on what day ? one ivho does or
suffers a thing till the fourth da;/ or on the fourth da;/:
τ€ταρτίύ6ς (σην, i. β. he has been four days in the tomb,
or it is the fourth day since he was buried, [A. V. he
hath been dead ^our days'], Jn. xi. 39 (ήδη yap ήσαν πιμ-
ττταίοι, already five days dead, Xen. an. G, 4 (2), 9).'
τ6ταρτο5, -i;, -01', (ir.TfTTapes), the fourth: Mt. xiv. 25;
Mk. vi. 48; Acts x. 30; Rev. iv. 7, etc. [From llom.
down.]
τίτρα-, in composition i. q. τίτορα, Aeolic [Doric
rather] for τέσσαρα.
[τίτρααρχί'ω, see τίτραρχΐω.^
[τ£τροάρχη5, see τίτράρχης}
τ£τραγωνο5, -ΟΙ/, (fr. rcVpa, q. v., and γώνο! [i. e. γωνία]),
quadrangular, square ; [A. V. four-square'] (Vulg. iu-
f/uadro positus) : Rev. xxi. 1 6. (Sept. ; Hdt., Plat., Ar-
istot., Polyb., Plut., al.)*
τίτράΒιον, -ου, τό, (τ(τράς, the number four), a quater-
nion (to iK τεσσάρων σνν(στό^, Suid.) : των στρατιωτών,
a guard consisting (f four soldiers (for among the Ko-
mans this was the usual number of the guard to \vhich
the custody of captives and prisons was intrusted ; two
soldiers were confined with the prisoner and two kept
guard outside), Acts xii. 4, where the four quaternions
mentioned were on guard one at a time during each of
the four watches. (Pliilo in Flacc. § 13 i. e. ed. Mang.
vol. ii. p. 533, 'JS.)*
τ€τρακΐ(Γ-χίλιοι, -αι. -α, (τιτράκκ and χίλιοι), four thou-
sand : Mt. XV. 3.S ; xvi. 10 ; Mk. viii. 9, 20 ; Acts xxi. 3H.
[(Hdt., Arstph., TIiuc, al.)] •
τίτρακόσιοι, -αϊ -α, (fr. τ^τράκΐ!, and the term, -όσιο!
indicating one hundred ; [cf. G. Mei/cr, Gr. Gram. § 1 6
f.]),/ou/- hundred: Acts v. 36 ; vii. 6 ; xiii. 20; (lal. iii.
1 7. [(Hdt., Thuc, Xen., al.)] *
τ€τράμηνο5, -ov, (fr. τίτρα, q. v., and μήν ; cf. Loh. ad
Phryn. p. 549), of four months, lasting four months: tc-
τράμηνός £στιν sc. χρόνο•:, Jn. iv. 35, where Rec. Τ6τρά-
μηνόν (στιν, as in Judg. xix. 2 Alex.; x.x. 47. (Thuc,
Aristot., Polyb., Plut., al.) *
τίτραιτλόος, (-oi;s), -όη (-η), -όον (-οΰν), (fr. τίτρα, and
πλόοΓ, to which corresponds the Lat. -plus in duplus,
Iriplus, fr. ΠΛΕΩ [but cf. Vanicek p. 501]), quadruple,
fourfold : Lk. xix. 8. (Sept. ; Xen., Jo.seph., Plut., al.) '
τίτρά -irous, -ovv, gen. -o8or, (fr. τίτρα, q. v., and πούϊ a
foot), fr. Hdt. and Thuc. do-wn, four-footed : neut. plur.
sc. beasts. Acts x. 12; xi. β; l!o. i. 23. (Sojit. fiirrT3n3.) '
TCTpapxca [T WII τΐτρααρχ. (see WH. App. p. 145)],
-ω ; {τ(τράρχης, q. v.), to be governor of a letrarchy, be
tetrarch: with a gen. of the region, Lk. iii. 1. [(Joseph,
b. j. 3, 10, 7.)]*
τ£τράρχη5 [Τ WH τίτραάρχης; see the preceding word,
and cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 1 1 7], -ου, ό, (fr. τίτρα, <[. v., and
άρχω), a tetrarch; i.e. 1. a governor of the fourth
part of any region. Thus Strabo, 12 p. 567, states that
Galatia was formerly divided into three parts, each one
of which was distributed into four smaller subdivisions
each of which was governed by 'a tetrarch'; again, in
lib. 9 p. 430, he relates that Thessaly, before the time
of Philip of JIacedon, had been divided into four ' tet-
rarchies ' each of which had its own ' tetrarch '. 2.
the word lost its strict etymological force, and came to
denote the governor of a third part or half of a country,
or even the ruler of an entire country or district provided
it were of comparatively narrow limits; a petty prince
[cf. e. g. Plut. Anton. 56, 3, i. p. 942 a.]. Thus Antony
made Herod (afterwards king) and Phasael, sons of
Antipater, tetrarchs of Palestine, Joseph, antt. 14, 13, 1.
After the death of Herod the Great, his sons, Archelaus
styled an ethnarch but .\ntipas and Philip with the title
of '/e/iYirc/i.f', divided and governed the kingdom left
by their father; Joseph, antt. 17, 11, 4. Cf. Fischer,
De vitiis etc. p. 428 ; Win. RWB. s. v. Tetrarch, and
esp. Kcim in Schenkel v. p. 487 sqq. The tetrarch
Herod Antipas is mentioned in Mt. xiv. 1 ; Lk. iii. 19 ;
ix. 7 ; Acts xiii. 1.'
Τ6ύχω, sec τυγχάνω.
τ(ψρόω, -ώ : 1 aor. ptcp. τιφρώσαί; {τίφρα ashes); to
reduce to ashes : 2 Pet. ii. G. (Aristot. [?], Theophr.,
Dio Cass., Philo, Antonin., al.) *
τί'χνη, -ης, ή, (fr. TeKfiv, see τίκτων), fr. Horn, down,
art : univ. Rev. xviii. 22 [here A. V. craft] ; of the plas-
tic art. Acts xvii. 29 ; of a trade (as often in Grk. writ.),
Acts xviii. 3.•
T6XvC-n)s, -ου, δ, (τίχνη), fr. Soph. [(?), Plato], Xen.
down, Sept. several times for ty^n, an artificer, crafts-
man : Acts xix. 24, 38 ; Rev. xviii. 22 ; of God the fraiuer
of the higher and eternal course of things, Heb. xi. 10
(of God the architect of the world. Sap. xiii. 1, where
cf. Grimm, Exeget. Ildbch. p. 234 [cf. also Trench, Syn.
§ cv. ; Piper, Monumentale Theol. § 26]).*
τήκω: fr. Horn, down; to make liquid; pass, to become
liquid, to melt ; to perish or be destroyed by melting : 2 Pet.
iii. 12, where for the pres. 3 pers. sing, τήκιται Lclim.
gives the fuf. τακησ^ται [see WH on the pass, and in
their App. p. 1"1], cf. Is. xxxiv. 4 τακήσονται πόσοι αί
dvvapets των ονρανων. [t'f. λ eitch s. v.] *
τηλαυγώϊ, adv., (fr. the adj. τηλαυγηί, far-shiniiig, fr.
TJjXe afar, and ανγη radiance), at a distance ami clear-
li/ : Mk. viii. 25 [where Τ WII mrg. ^ηΚαυγωί, (]. v.].
(adj.. Job xxxvii. 20; Ps. xviii. (xix.) 9; and esp. in
the Grk. poets fr. Find, down ; τηΚαυγΙστιρον άρα», Diod.
1,50.)•
τηλικ-οϋτθ5, -αΰτη, -οϋτο, (fr. τηλίκο! and ovTOS [but
then (it is urged) it should have been τηΚιχοϋτοι; hence
τηρβύ
622
τίθνμι
better connected with avrdr ; ai. a2. Cf. Bltm. Ausf.
Spr. § 79 A. 4 ; Kuhner § 1 73, 6 : Vanicek p. 268 ; L. and
S. s. V. οίτοϊ, init. j ), in Attic writ, f r. Aeschy 1. down ; 1.
of such an <uje; used of any age, of so great an age, so
oil; also so young. 2. of so great a size, in bulk:
πλοία, Jas. iii. 4. 3. intensively, such and so great
(Lat. tantus talisque) : 2 Co. i. 10; lleb. ii. 3; Ilev. .\vi.
18.•
τηρ«ω, -<b; impf. ΐτήρονν; fut. τΐ)ρήσω\ 1 aor. (τήρησα;
pf. τ(τήμηκα, 3 pers. plur. τιτηρήκασιν (Jn. .wii. 6 U G)
anil τ(τήμη<αι/ (ibid. LTTrW'II, [see γίνομαι, init.]);
Pass., pres. τηροϋμαι; impf. (τημονμην; pf. Τ€τήρημαί;
1 aor. ίτηρήθην, (τηρόί, found only once, Aeschyl. suppl.
248, where it is doubtful whether it means 'guarding' or
'watching'), fr. Find., Soph., Thuc. down; Sept. several
times for lOi^, ^i'J, etc. ; to attend to carefully, lake
care of; i. e. a. prop, to guard : τίκά, a prisoner,
Mt. xxvii. 36, 54; Acts xvi. 23; pass.. Acts xii. 5;
[xxiv. 23] ; xxv. 4, 21 ['] ; ri, xii. 6 ; oi τηροϋιτΓ(ΐ, [(R. V.)
the walchersi the guards, Mt. xxviii. 4 (Cant. iii. 3). b.
metaph. to keep : τίΐ»ά, one in that state in which he is,
την tavToi παρθίνον, his own virgin daughter, sc. as a
virgin i. e. unmarried, 1 Co. vii. 37 ; ίαυτόν. himself such
as he is, i. e. begotten of God, 1 Jn. v. 18 [but here Τ Tr
WH αυτόν] ; with a pred. accus. added : αγνον, 1 Tim.
V. 22; ασηίλον αττο τον κόσμου, Jas. i. 27; άβαρη Ttw,
2 Co. xi. 9, {άπ\οΐ)ν, Antonin. 0, 30 ; τινά άμιμπτον τω
θ(ώ. Sap. χ. 5) ; τι with a pred. accus. 1 Tim. vi. 14
[but see in c. below] ; pass, τηρούμαι, with an adv.,
άμίμπτω!, 1 Th. v. 23 ; with a dat. of the pers., Χριστώ,
devoted to Christ, [AV. 421 (392)], Jude 1 ; τηρ^Ίν τίνα
cv ηΐΊ, to keep in i. e. cause one to persevere or stanil
firm in a thing: «V τω ονόματι θιοϋ (.«ee p. 44 7' hot.), Jn.
xvii. 11 sq. ; «V ayanr) θ(οΰ, Jude 21; τίνα ex. rn/of, by
guarding to cause one to escape in safety out of etc. : «
ToO πονηρού, out of the power and assaults of Satan, Jn.
xvii. IS [cf. B. 327 (281); W. 410 (383)]; « της ώρας
τοϋ π(ΐ,ιασμοϋ, Ilev. iii. 10. to keep: i. e. not to leave,
Ti)v άρχ^ήν, .Jude G; not to throw away, τα ιμάτια. Rev.
xvi. 1.5. to hold firmly: την ενότητα τοϋ πν(ΰματοί, Eph.
iv. 3 ; anything as a mental deposit, τήν πίστιν, 2 Tim.
iv. 7; Rev. xiv. 12 [cf. \V. 536 (49n) ; B. 78 (68)]. to
show one's self to be actually holding a thing fast,
i.e. c. to observe: sc. πώί κτλ. Rev. iii. 3; τΊ, Mt.
xxiii. 3; Acts xxi. 25 [Rec.]; την τταμά^οσιν, Mk. vii. 9
[WII (rejected) mrg. στήσητί] {τα in irapadaaews των
τατίρων, Joseph, antt. 13, 10, 6); τον νόμον. Acts xv. 5
anil Kec. in 24; Jas. ii. 10; το σάββατον, the command
respecting sabbath-keeping, Jn. ix. 16; Tas evroXas (of
either God or Christ), Mt. xix. 17; Jn. xiv. 15, 21 ; xv.
10; 1 Jn. ii. 3 sq. ; iii. 22, 24 ; v. 2 (where LTTrWH
ηοιώ/χΕκ) ; V. 3; Rev. xii. 17; xiv. 12 [see above, b. fin.] ;
την ίντολήν, 1 Tim. vi. 14 [see in b. above; πάντα όσα
{νίτ(ΐΧάμην, Mt. xxviii. 20] ; το» \oyov, either of Christ
or of God, Jn. viii. 51 sq. 55 ; xiv. 23 ; xv. 20 ; xvii. 6 ;
1 Jn. ii. 5 ; Rev. iii. 8 ; τους λο'γουΓ, of Christ, Jn. xiv.
24 ; τον λόγοκ της υπομονής μου (i. e. Ίησοΰ), Rev. iii. 10 ;
Γα €pya μου, the works that I command. Rev. ii. 26 ; τους
λόγους της προφητείας. Rev. xxii. 7 ; τοΰ βιβλίου τούτου,
Rev. xxii. 9 ; τα iv τβ προφητίία γίγραμμίνα. Rev. 1. 3 ;
cf. Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungsl. p. 194 sq. d.
to reserve: τίνα (ϊς τι, to undergo somethin", 2 Pet. ii. 4
[cf. W- 342 (o:iI) ; fit την τοϋ Σ(βαστοϋ Βιάγνωσιν, Acts
xxv. 21*]; Jude (i; τινά (ίς ήμίραν κρίσιως, 2 Pet. ii. 9;
τους οΰρανοϋί ιτυρϊ (to be burned with fire) fit ήμΐραν
κρίοίως, 2 Pet. iii. 7; τι ΐΐς τίνα, a thing for one's advan-
tage, 1 Pet. i. 4 ; τι (Ις ήμίραν τινά, to be used some day
for some purpose, Jn. xii. 7 ; τι ίως άρτι, Jn. ii. 10; τι
with the dat. of the pers., for rewarding or punishini'
one, pass., 2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 13. [Co.mp. : Sia-, πάρα-,
συν-τηρίω•] *
[.Syn. τηρίω, φυ\άσσω: τηρ. to welch or keep, ipu\, to
guard; τηρ. expresses watchful care and is suggestive of
present possession, φυ\. indicates safe custody and often
implies ;issault from without; τηρ. may mark the result
of which φυ\. is tlie means (e.g. Jn. xvii. 12 where the
words occur together, cf. Wisd. x. 5). See Westcott on Jn.
viii. .■>! ; Schmidt ch. 208, esp. § 4.]
τήρησ -is. -fior. ή, (τηρίω); a. a watching: of pris-
oners (Tbuc. 7,86); the place where prisoners are
kept, a prison, [R. V. ward] : Acts iv. 3 ; v. 18. b.
α keeping, i. e. complying with, obeying : των ίντολών,
1 Co. vii. 19; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 23; νόμων, Sap. vi. 19.•
Τιβ<ριά$, -άδοί, ή, (fr. Ίιβίριος), a city of (jalilee, near
the Lake of Gennesaret, which Herod Antipas, tetrarch
of Galilee, greatly enlarged [but see BB.DD. s. v. and
esp. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 234 note] and beau-
tified, and named Tiberias in honor of Tiberius Caesar
(Joseph, antt. 18, 2, 3). It is now called Tubariyeh, a
poor and wretched town of about 3000 inhabitants,
swarming with fleas for ivhich the place is notorious
throughout Syria: Jn. vi. 1, 23; .xxi. 1. Cf. Robinson
ii. 380-394; Win. RWB. s. v.; Riletschi in Herzoged. 1
x\i. 161 ; Weizsacker in Schenkel v. 526 sq. ; \_Muhlau
in Riehm p. 1661 sq.] ; Budeker pp. 367-369.•
Τιβ€'ριθ5, -ου, ό, Tiberius, the Roman emperor (fr.
[Aug. 19] A. D. 14 to [March 16] A. D. 37) in whose
reign Christ was crucified : Lk. iii. 1.•
τιθ€ω, i. q. Τί^ϊ^μι, q. \'.
τίθημι, 3 pers. plur. τιθίασιν (Mt. V. 15 ; [W. § 14, 1 a. ;
B. 44 (38)]) ; impf. (fr. τι^ί'ω) 3 pers. sing, ϊτίθη (2 Co.
iii. 13), 3 pers. plur. iridnvv (Mk. vi. 56 [RG L]; Acts iii.
2 ; iv. 35) [and (TTr WH in Mk. 1. c.) ΐτίθίσαν, cf. B. 45
(39); J7i/. App. p. 167]; ίηΐ.θήσω; 1 aor. £"%α ; 2 aor.
(ίθην) subj. θω, [impv. 2 pers. plur. θ(τ(, Lk.xxi. 14 LTTr
WII (for R(! 2 aor. raid. impv. θίσθε)], inf. θιΊναι. ptcp.
ieit; pf. τ(θ(ΐκα: Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing, τίθεται (.Mk.
XV. 47 RG) ; pf. 3 pers. sing, τίθιιται (Mk. xv. 47 LT
Tr WH) ; 1 Άοτ.ίτ^θην: 2 aor. mid. ϊθίμην (2 pers. sing.
(θου. Acts V. 4) ; (see ΐπιτίθημι) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept.
mostly for Dlty and D'bri, ;n:, TWW and r\'m, Π"3Π,
etc. ; 1. to set, put, place, i. e. causative of κύσθαι ;
hence a. to place or lay: ri, as θ^μίλιον, [Lk. vi.
48] ; xiv. 29 ; 1 Co. iii. 10 sq. (θιμείλια, Ilom. II. 12, 29) ;
λίθον, Ro. ix. 33 ; 1 Pet. ii. 6 ; τϊ, opp. to atpeiv, Lk. xix.
21 sq. (cf. Xen. oec. 8, 2) ; τιιΊ πρόσκομμα [or (ace. to WH
mrg.) σκάνδαλο»], Ro. xiv. 13; τϊ ΰς τι, Lk. xi. 33 [W.
r(θημι
623
ιλλω
238 (223)] ; τίνα πού, όπο», «ti, [ώϊ], of the dead laid
to rest somewhere, Mk. χ v. 47 ; xvi. (j ; [Lk. xxiii. 55] ;
Jn. xi. 34; xix. 42; xx. 2, 13, 15; cV with dat. of the
place, Mt. xxvii. 60 ; Mk. vi. 29 ; [xv. 46 LTr WH] ; l>k.
xxiii. 53 ; Jn. xix. 41 ; Acts vii. 16 ; ix. 37 ; eU μυημί'ιον.
Acts xiii. 29 ; Rev. xi. 9 ; (^in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down,
very often of the laying away or depositing anywhere
of the bones or ashes of the dead ; like Lat. ponere i. q.
sepelire, cf. Klotz, Handwdrterb. d. Lat. Spr. ii. 822" ;
[Harpers' Lat. Diet. s. v. pono, L B. 10]). τϊ or τινά
(π! Tt'os, [Lk. viii. IG» L TTr WH] ; Acts v. 15; Jn.
xix. 1 9 ; [Rev. x. 2 G L Τ Tr WH] ; Μ τ., [Mk. iv. 21
L Τ Tr WH ; viii. 25 Tr txt. WH] ; 2 Co. iii. 13 ; Rev.
X. 2 [Rec] ; eVi τίνα, to put upon one, ras χ(ΐρας, Mk.
X. 16 ; [την δίξιάν, Rev. i. 1 7 G L Τ Tr WH] ; τι ίητό τι,
Mt. V. 15 ; Mk. iv. 21 ; Lk. .xi. 33 ; νποκάτω τινός, Lk.
viii. 16; τίνα imo τους πόδα? (see πους), 1 Co. xv. 25
[cf. W. 523 (4S7)] ; τ\ παμά τοϋι πόΒας τ. to lay at one's
feet. Acts iv. 35, 37 [here Tdf. προς] ; v. 2 ; τινά ίνάπιόν
r. Lk. v. 18; metaph. ini τίνα το πν^ϋμα, i. e. to imbue
one with, Mt. xii. 18. Mid. to hace one put or placed :
riva els φυλακήν, to order one to be put in prison, Acts
xii. 4 ; ev (tj) φυλακ'/, Mt. xiv. 3 [here LT Tr WH άπο-
τΐθ.~\•, Acts v. 25, (Gen. xii. 10; xlii. 17, 30; [B. 329
(283) ; W. 414 (386)]) ; eh τήρησιν. Acts iv. 3 ; iv τηρψ
uei, .\cts V. 18. to place for one's self: as βονΚήν, to lay
a plan [A. V. advised}. Acts xxvii. 12 (Judg. xix. 30;
βουΚα! iv ψυχή μον, Ps. xii. (xiii.) 3) ; τα μί\η. to set,
dispose, 1 Co. xii. 18; [^καιρούς iv tj ιδία i^ova'iq, set
within his own authority. Acts i. 7 (so R. V. t.\t. ; but
al. refer it to 2 below)] ; τι els τα ώτά μου, to receive
[A. V. lei sinl'l into the ears, i. e. to fix in the mind, Lk.
ix. 44 ; fir την KapSiav. to propose to one's self, to pur-
pose, foil, by an inf. Lk. xxi. 14 [RG]; also τϊ iv τή
καρδία, to lay a thing up in one's heart to be remembered
and pondered, Lk. i. 66; [xxi. 14 L Τ Tr WH], (1 S.
xxi. 12; [W. § 2, 1 c, and B. as above]) ; to propose to
one's self something [.\. V. conceived this thing in thine
heart], Acts v. 4 ; also iv τω irveupan, foil, by an inf. [A. V.
to purpose in the spirit]. Acts xix. 21 ; to place (or posit')
for the execution of one's purpose, Oipevos iv ήμ'ιν τον Xoyoi»
T^r KaraWayris, since he has placed (deposited) in our
minis tlie doctrine concerning reconciUation (sc. to be
made known to others), 2 Co. v. 19. b. to put down,
la;/ iloirn ; i. e. o. to hend downwards : τα -γόνατα,
to benil or bow the knees, to kneel, Mk. .xv. 19; Lk. xxii.
41 ; Acts vii. 60 ; ix. 40; xx. 36 ; xxi. 5, (Lat. genua
pono, Ovid. fast. 2, 43S; Curt. 8, 7, 13). β. like Lat.
pono (cf. Klotz s. V. ; [Harpers' Diet. s. v. L B. 9]), to lay
off or aside, to wear or carry no longer: τα Ιμάτια (Lat.
vesles pono), Jn. xiii. 4 (Pint. Ale. 8) ; την ψυχήν. Ιο lay
down, give up, one's life, Jn. .x. i 7 sq. ; witli Inep tivos
added, .In. X. 1 1, 15 ; xiii. 37sq.; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iii. 16,
{€βηκ€ [or TeOeiKCv] την σάρκα αντον Kvpios, Barn. ep. 6, 3
[irrelevant ; see the passage] ; unlike the Lat. phrases
vitam ponere, Cic. ad fam. 9, 24, 4 ; Propert. eleg. 2, 10,
43• [ani'mam ponere], Sil. Ital. 10, 303 ; spiritum ponere,
VaL Max. 7, 8, 8, since these phrases mean only to die ;
more like the expression prius animam quam odium de•
ponere, Xep. Hann. 1, 3). γ. to lay by, lay aside
money : παρ' ίαυτω, 1 Co. xvi. 2. c. to set on (serve)
something to eat or drink: oivov, Jn. ii. 10 (Xen. mem.
3, 14, 1 ; so also Lat. pono ; cf. Klotz u. s. p. 822' ; [Har-
pers' Diet. s. V. I. B. 8]). d. to set forth, something
to be explained by discourse : την βασιλιίαν τ. Oeoi iv
παραβο^τ), Mk. iv. 30 L txt. Τ Tr txt. WH (on this pass,
see παραβολή, 2). 2. to make (Lat. constiluo), τινά
with a pred. ace. : τινά ύποπόδιον, Mt. xxii. 44 [where
L Τ Tr WH ύποϊάτω, put underneath] ; Mk. xii. 36 [WH
νποκάτω]; Lk. xx. 43; Acts ii. 35; Heb. i. 13; x. 13,
(fr. Ps. cix. (ex.) 1) ; add, Ro. iv. 17 (fr. Gen. xvii. 5) ;
Ileb. i. 2 ; pass., 1 Tim. ii. 7 ; 2 Tim. 4. 1 1 ; τί with a
pred. ace. : 1 Co. L\. 18 (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down,
often in the poets, rarely in prose writ., as Ael. v. h. 13,
6 ; Lcian. dial, marin. 14, 2 ; in the O. T. cf. Gen. xvii.
5 ; Lev. xxvi. 31 ; Is. v. 20 ; Sap. x. 21 ; 2 Mace. v. 21 ;
3 Mace. V. 43). Mid. to make (or set) for one's self or
for one's use : τινά with a pred. ace. Acts xx. 28 ; 1 Co.
xii. 28, (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, even in prose, to
make one one's own, as τικά φίΧον to make one a friend,
see Passow p. 1893' ; [L. and S. s. v. B. L]). riBivai τινά
fis Ti, to appoint one to (destine one to be} anything, pass.,
1 Pet. ii. 8 ; w. els τι instead of the pred. ace. (Hebrais-
tically [cf. W. 228 (214); B. § 131, 7]), Acts xiii. 47
fr. Is. xlix. 6 (Jer. i. 5). Mid. to appoint for one's use :
Tiva els διακονίαν, to appoint one to one's service, 1 Tim.
i. 12 [W. §45,4 fin.]; to appoint with one's self οτ in
one's mind : τίνα els οργήν, to decree one to be subject
to wrath, 1 Th. v. 9 ; [to this use many refer Acts i. 7, see
iiovcria 1, and iv, I. 5 d. /3• ; cf. 1 a. above]. τιθίναι
τινά Ίνα, Jn. XV. IG ; τιθίναι το pipos tivos pera tivos (see
μ€pos, 1), Mt. xxiv. 51 ; Lk. xii. 46. 3. to set, βχ,
establish, (Lat. statuo) ; a. to set forth (Germ, auf-
stellen) : vπόδeιγμa, 2 Pet. ii. 6. b. to establish, or-
dain, (Germ, feslsetzen, anordnen) : νόμον, to enact, GaL
iii. 19 Grsb. (very often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down,
both in the act. and the mid. ; cf. Passow s. v. ΙΠ. 8 b. ;
[L. and S. s. v. A. III. 5]). [Comp. : ά^α-, προσ-ανα-,
άπο-, δια-, άντι -Sia-, iie-, iπι-, σvv-eπι-, κατά-, συν-κατα-,
μeτa-. πάρα , π(ρι-, προ-, προσ-, σνν-, νπο- τίθημι.] *
τίκτω ; fut. τί'|ομαι ; 2 aor. tTeKov ; 1 aor. jiass. iτe\θηv\
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for nV; tobring forth, bear, produce
(fruit from the seed) ; prop., of women giving birth :
absol., Lk. i. 57 [B. 267 (230)]; ii. 6 ; Jn. xvi. 21 ; Gal.
iv. 27 ; Heb. xi. 11 Rec. ; Rev. xii. 2, 4 ; νΊόν, Mt. i. 21,
23, 25 ; Lk. i. 31 ; ii. 7 ; Rev. xii. 5, 13 ; pass., Mt. ii. 2;
Lk. ii. 1 1 ; of the earth bringing forth its fruits : βοτάνην,
Heb. vi. 7 (Eur. Cycl. 333 ; ya'iav. η τά ττάντα τίκτιται,
Aescliyl. Cho. 127; yrjs τηs πάντα τικτοΰπης. Philo opif.
m. § 45, \vho draws out at length the comparison of the
earth to a mother). metaph. to bear, 'tring forth :
άμαρτϊαν. in the simile where ή ίπιθνμΐα is likened to a
female, Jas. i. l.i (apeTTjv, Plat. conv. p. 212 a.).*
τίλλω; impf. ίτιλλοι/ ; fr. Hom. down ; to pluck, pluck
off: oTaxvas, Mt. xii. 1 ; Jlk. ii. 23 [on tliis cf. p. 524•»
top] ; Lk. vi. 1.*
' ι,μαω<}
624
Tt?
ΤιμαϊΟϊ ('NOP fr. C'hakl. KOD, Ilebr. K3I3, to be un-
clean), -ου, 6, Ttinifiin, the name of a man : Mk. x. 46.*
τιμάω, -ώ ; f ut. τιμήσω ; 1 aor. (τΙμησα ; pf. pass. ptcp.
TfTi/iTj/jtVoi ; 1 aor. mid. ίτιμησάμην, {τιμή); fr. Horn,
down ; 1. lo eslimate, to Jix the ralue ; mid. to fix
the value of something heloiujituj to one's .se//"(Vulg. ap-
pretio ; cf. Hagen, Spraelil. Eriirterungen zur Vulgata,
Freib. 18G3, p. 09) : τινά, [li. V. lo price^, Mt. -xxvii. 9
(on which see άπα, I. 2) ; Sept. for ^'"ΐχ,Π, Lev. xxvii. 8,
12, 14. 2. to honor [so uniformly A. V.], to have in
honor, to revere, venerate ; Sept. for 133 : God, Mt. xv. 8 ;
Mk. vii. 6; Jn. v. -.'3 ; viii. 49; Christ, Jn. v. 23; |)arent3,
Mt. XV. 4sq. ; xix. 19; Mk. vii. 10; x. 19; Lk. xviii. 20;
Eph. vi. 2 ; other men, 1 Tim. v. 3 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 7 ; with
ίτολλαίί τιμα'ΐ! added, to honor with many honors. Acts
xxviii. 10; of God, rewarding Christians with honor
and glory in his kingdom, Jn. xii. 26. [Comp. : ϊπι-
ημάω.] *
τιμή, ήί, ij, (fr. τΐω, to estimate, honor, pf. pass, τίτι-
μαι), fr. Horn, down, Sept. for Iji^• (a valuing, rating),
1133, ijl", Ι^Π; 1. a valuing by which the price is
fixed; hence Me /))iVe .itself : of the price paid or re-
ceived for a person or thing bought or sold, with a gen.
of the pers. Mt. x.xvii. 9 ; with a gen. of the thing, Acts
V. 2 sq. ; plur.. Acts iv. 34 ; xix. 1 9 ; τιμή αίματος, the
price paid for killing, [cf. ' blood-money '], Mt. xxvii. 6 ;
ήγοράσθητ( τιμήί , (not gratis, but) tvilh a price, i. e. (eon-
textually, witli emphasis) at a great price [B. § 132, 13 ;
yet see W. 59.") (553)], 1 Co. vi. 20 [here Vulg. magna
prelio'] ; vii. 23 ; ώι/«σί)αι τιμής αργυρίου, to buy for a
price reckoned in silver, i. e. for silver, Acts vii. 16 ; thing
prized [A. V. honor}. Rev. xxi. 24 [Rec], 26. 2.
honor ivhich belongs or is shown to one : the honor of
one who outranks others, pre-eminence, δόξα κ. τιμή,
Heb. ii. 7, 9 ; 2 Pet. i. 1 7 ; in the doxologies : τω θιω (so.
ίστω [cf. B.§ 129, 22 Rem.]) τιμή οτ ή τιμή, 1 Tim. i. 17;
vi. 16 ; Rev. v. 13 ; vii. 12 ; xix. 1 Rec. ; the honor which
one has by reason of the rank and state of the office which
he holds, Ileb. v. 4 (and often in Grk. writ. ; cf. Bleek
on lleb. 1. c.) ; veneration : Sibovai, \αβ(Ίν, τιμήν, Rev. iv.
9, 11; v. 12; deference, revert nee, Ro. xii. 10; xiii. 7;
1 Tim. V. 1 7 ; vi. 1 ; honor appearing in the rewards of
the future life, Ro. ii. 7, 10 ; 1 Pet. i. 7 ; praise of which
one is judged worthy, 1 Pet. ii. 7 [here R. V. txt. precious-
ness (cf. 1 above)]; mark of honor, πολλαΐί τιμαΐς τιμαν
τίνα. Acts x.xviii. 10; univ. in phrases: ev τιμή, honor-
ably, 1 Th. iv. 4 (on this pass, see κτάομαι) ; ουκ i" τιμή
τινι, not in any honor, i. e. worthy of no honor. Col. ii.
23 [al. value ; see πλησμονή] ; ιις TtMijw, Ro. ix. 21 ; 2 Tim.
ii. 20 sci-, (on these pass, see σκίϋος, 1 ) ; τκριτιθίναι τινι
τιμήν, 1 Co. xii. 23 (see π(ριτΙθημι, b.) ; τιμήν άπονίμην
τινί, to shoΛV honor to one, 1 Pet. iii. 7 ; διδόναι τιμήν,
ι Co. xii. 24 ; ίχιιν τιμήν, to have honor, be honored,
.Tn. iv. 44; Ileb. iii. 3.*
τΙμιοΐ, -a, -ov, {τιμή), fr. Ilom. down ; a. prop, held
as of great price, i. e. precious : Χίθος, Rev. xvii. 4 ; xviii.
12, 16; xxi. 19; plur. 1 Co. iii. 12 [R. V. co.?//;/ stones] ;
compar. τίμιώτ€ρος, 1 Pet. i. 7 Rec. ; superl. τιμιά/τατος.
Rev. xviii. 12; xxi. 11. b. metaph. held in honor,
esteemed, especially dear : Ileb. xiii. 4 ; nri, to one. Act?
V. 34 ; XX. 24 [hero with a gen. also, ace. to the text of
TTrWII (ouSfKof λόγου etc. not worth a tvord ; cf. Meyer
ad loc.)]; κιψπΰς τής -γης, Jas. v. 7; αίμα, 1 Pet. i. 19;
enayyiXpuTii, 2 Pet. i. 4.*
τιμιότη8, -ητος, ή, {τίμιος) ; a. prop, prcciousness,
costliness; an abundcuwe of costly things: Rev. .xviii.
19. b. metaph. worth, excellence : Aristot. de partt.
an. 1, 5 [p. 644^, :!2]; eth. Nic. 10, 7 fin. [p. 1178•, 1];
διαφίρουσι τιμιύη)τι αί ψυχαΐ καί ατιμία αλλήλων, de gen.
anim. 2, 3 [p. 7.■i6^ 31].*
Τιμόθεο;, -ου, ό, VOC. Ίιμόθff (1 Tim. vi. 20 ; cf. liruger
§1(J Anm.2; [\V.§8,2c.; B.12]), 7V)«o//iy, a resident of
Lystra, apparently, whose father was a Greek and moth-
er a Jewess, Acts ,xvi. 1 sqq. He was Paul's companion
in travel, and fellow-laborer : Acts xvii. 14 sq. ; xviii. 5 ;
xLx. 22; XX. 4; Ro. xvi. 21 ; iCo. iv. 17; xvi. 10; 2 Co.
i. 1, 19 ; Phil. i. 1 ; ii. 19 ; Col. i. 1 ; 1 Th. i. 1 ; iii. 2, 6 ;
2 Th. i. 1 ; 1 Tim. i. 2, 18; vi. 20; 2 Tim. i. 2; Philem.
1 ; Heb. xiii. 23.•
Τ(μων [on the accent cf. W. § 6, 1, 1.], -lavot, 6, Timon,
one of the seven deacons of the church at Jerusalem :
Acts vi. 5.*
τιμωρ<αι, -ω ; 1 aor. pass, ΐτιμωρήθην ; (fr. τιμωρός, and
this fr. τιμή and oSpos, see θυρωρός) ; fr. Soph, and
Hdt. down ; prop, to be a guardian or avenger of honor ;
hence 1. to succor, come to the help of: tiW, one.
Soph., Ildt., Thuc, al. 2. to avenge : «vi, one,
Hdt., Xen., al. 3. in the N. T. τιμωρία τίνα, to take
vengeance on one, to punish: Acts xxii. 5; xxvi. 11,
(Soph. O. R. 107; in Grk. writ, the mid. is more com. in
this sense).*
τιμωρία, -ας, ή, {τιμωρός, see τιμωρίω) ; 1- <ϊ ren•
dering help; assistance, [(Hdt., Thuc, al.)]. 2.
vengeance, penalty, punishment: Heb. x. 29 (Prov. xix.
29; xxiv. 22; in the Grk. writ. fr. AeschyL and Hdt.
down). [.Syn. see κόλασις, fin.] *
τίνω : fut. τίσω ; £r. Horn, down ; to pay, to recompense :
δίκην, to pay penally, suffer punishment, 2 Th. i. 9 (Plat.
Phaedo p. 8 1 d. ; Theaet. p. 1 7 7 a. ; Ael. v. h. 1 3, 2 ; δίκας,
id. 1, 24 ; θωήν, Hom. Od. 2, 193; rrotrar, Pind. 01. 2, 106;
ζημίαν, Sept. Prov. xxvii. 12). [Comp.: άπο-τίνω.}'
tCs, neut. τί, gen. τίνος, interrogative pronoun, [fr.
Hom. down]; 1. who, which, what? Sept. τις for
■:3, Ti'form; a. used Adjectively, in a direct
question : Ttf βασιλεύς, Lk. xiv. 31 ; τΙς γυνή, Lk. xv. 8 ;
I τί πίρισσόν, Mt. v. 47; τί σημ(Ίον, Jn. ii. 18, and many
other passages, in an indirect question, 1 Th. iv. 2, etc.;
τίνα η ποίοι/ καιρόν, 1 Pet. i. 1 1 ; used instead of a pred.
in a direct quest., τις (sc. ίστικ) ή αιτία, Acts -χ. 21 ; Tts
κα\ ποταπή ή γννή, Lk. vii. 39 ; add, Ro. iii. 1 ; 1 Co. i.x.
18, etc. ; neut., Mt. xxiv. 3 ; Mk. v. 9 ; in an indir. quest,
with the optative, Lk. viii. 9 ; τις foil, by Sv, Jn. xiii. 24
R G ; Acts xxi. 33 [R G] ; τί with the optative, Lk. xv.
26 [Tr WIT add ήν, so L br.] ; xviii. 36 [L br. Tr or. WH
mrg. add άν] ; with the indicative, Eph. L 18; b.
used alone or Substantively: in a direct quest., rtr
ΤΛ
625
TiS
νπίδίφν νμ'ιν φχτγΛν ; Mt. iii. 7 ; Lk. iii. 7 ; Rev. xviii.
18, etc. ; rlvas, Mt. xxii. 20, 28; Mk xii. 16; τ'ινι, Lk.
xiii. 18 ; τίνα, Jn. xviii. 4, 7 ; τί θίΧ^τί μοι doivat ; Mt. xxvi.
15 ; τί in an indirect quest., foil, by the indicative, Mt.
vi. 3; Jn. .\iii. 12; 1 Co. xiv. 16; Uev. ii. 7, 11, 17, and
very often ; foil, by tbe aor. subjunc, Mt. vi. 25 ; Lk.
xii. 11, etc. ; foil, by tbe optative w. Sv, Lk. i. 62 ; vi. 11,
etc. Eiupbatic words get prominence by being placed
before the pronoun [B. §151,16]: υμΰ: δ( τίνα μι Xtyere
tlvai, Mt. xvi. 15; Mk. viii. 29 ; Lk. ix. 20 ; καΧ ήμύς τί
ποίήσομ€ν (or ποιησωμ(ν), I>k. iii. 14 ; oiros Si τί, Jn. .\xi.
21 [cf. e. /3.] ; adil, Jn. i. 19 ; viii. 5 ; ix. 17 ; Acts xix.
15; Ro. ix. Ιθ•- [cf. W. 274 (257)], 20; xiv. 4,10; Eph.
iv. 9; Jas. iv. 12; exx. fr. Grk. writ, are given in Passow
p. 1908'>; [L. and S. s. v. B. 1. 1 b.]. A (juestion is often
asked by ris as the leading word, when the answer ex-
pected is " no one " : Acts viii. 33 ; Ro. vii. 24 ; viii. 33
eq. ; ix. 19; x. 16; xi. 34sq.; iCo. ix. 7; 2Co. xi. 29;
Heb. i. 5, 13. τίί el μή, who . . . save (or but), (i. e. no one
but), Mk. ii. 7; Lk. v. 21 ; Ro. xi. 15 ; 1 Co. ii. 11 ; Heb.
iii. 18; 1 Jn. ii. 22; v. 5. c. two questions are
blended into one : ris τί npjj, what each should lake, Mk.
XV. 24 ; τίι τί διιπραγματίίσατο, Lk. xix. 15 [not Tr
Λνΐϊ] ; €γώ δί ris ημ^]^ δυνατϋς κωλΰσαι τον θίόν ; who
was I ? was I able to withstand God ? Acts xi. 17; cf. W.
§66, 5, 3; Passow p. 1909»; A.<t, Lex. Platon. iii. p. 394;
Franz V. Frilzsche, Index ad Lcian. dial. deor. p. 164;
the same constr. occurs in Lat. writ. ; cf. Ramshom, Lat.
Gram. p. 5G7. τίϊ is joined with conjunctions: κα\ τίϊ,
Mk. X. 26 ; Lk. x. 29 ; .xviii. 26 ; Rev. vi. 1 7, (see καί, L
2 g.) ; Tis Spa, see άρα, 1 ; n's olv, Lk. x. 36 [here Τ WH
cm. L Tr br. οίκ] ; 1 Co. i.\. 18. τις with a partitive gen. :
Mt. xxii. 28 ; Mk. .xii. 23 ; Lk. x. 36 ; Acts vii. 52 ; Ileb.
Ϊ. 5, 13 ; with e'/c and a gen. of the class, Mt. vi. 27 ; Lk.
xiv. 28 ; Jn. viii. 46 ; in an indir. quest, with the optat.,
Lk. xxii. 23 [cf. W. §41 b. 4 c] ; with iv added, Lk. Lx.
46. d. in indir. questions the neuter article is some-
times placed before the pronouns ris and τί ; see ό, II.
10 a. e. Respecting the neuter τί the following
particulars may be noted : a. τί οντοί σου καταμαρ-
τυροΰσιν; a condensed expression for τί τοΟτό eanv, ό
ούτοι σου καταμ. ; Mt. xxvi. 62 ; Mk. xiv. CO, (Β. 251
(216) expl.ains this expression differently); also τί τοΟτο
ακοίω π(ρ\ σον; [(R.V.)] leliat iV thiii (Ihal) I hear oflheef
(unless preference be given to the rendering, ^ivhij do I
hear this of thee ' [see under β. below]), Lk. xvi. 2 ; cf.
Bornemann ad loc. ; [W. § 66, 5, 3]. β. τί irpos ήμάί;
sc. (στίν, what is that to us? [W. 586 (545); B. 138
(121)], Mt. -xxvii. 4; Jn.x,xi.22; τίΐμοίκ.σοί; see ίγώ,
4; τί μοι etc. what have I to do tvith etc. 1 Co. v. 12;
τί σοι or ίμίν δοκΰ; ^what thlnkest thou etc.], Mt. xvii.
25; xxii. 17, 42; xxvi. 66; Jn. xi. 56 (here before δη
supply in thought δοκΛ ΰμϊν, to introduce a second ques-
tion [R. V. What think ye? That he mil not come etc.']).
ri eiXfii ; and τί θίλιτι ; foil, by a subjunc., our what wilt
thou (that) Τ should etc. : Mt. xx. 32 [here Lchra. br. in-
eerts ίνα] ; Mk. x. 51 ; xv. 12 [λΥΙΙ om. Tr br. θί\.] ; Lk.
xriii 41 ; 1 Co. iv. 21 ; W with the dehberative subj. :
:Mt. vi. 31 ; xxvii. 22 ; Mk. iv. 30 [here L mrg. Τ Tr
txt. WII πωί] ; Lk. xii. 1 7 ; xiii. 18 ; Jn. xii. 27 ; τί foil.
by a fut. : Acts iv. 16 (where Led. ster. Τ Tr WII n-ouj-
σωμ(ν) ; 1 Co. xv. 29 ; τί (sc. ϊστίν [Β. 358 (307) ; W.
§ 64, 2 a.]) 5ti etc., how is it that etc. i. e. why etc.,
Mk. ii. 16 II G L; Lk. ii. 49; Acts v. 4, 9; τί γί^οΐΌ», δη
etc. [R. V. what is come to pass that etc.], Jn. xiv. 22 ;
ovTOi 8e τί (sc. ΐσται or yeviiaerai [\V. 586 (546) ; B. 394
(:.i3.s)]), what will be his lot ? Jn. xxi. 21 (cf. Acts xii.
18 τί άρα 6 Πίτροί cyevfTo; Xen. Hell. 2, 3, 17 τί ΐσοιτο
ή τΓολιτίία). τί i. ΐ[. δώ τί, whyf where/ore f (Matthiae
§ 488, 8 ; Kruger § 46, 3 Anm. 4 ; [W. § 21, 3 N. 2]) :
Mt. vi. 28; vii. 3; Mk. ii. 7sq.; .xi. 3 ; Lk. ii. 48; vi. 41;
.xii. 57 ; xxiv. 38 ; Jn. vii. 19 ; .xviii. 23 ; Acts xiv. 15 ;
xxvi. 8 ; Ro. iii. 7 ; ix. 19 sq. ; 1 Co. iv. 7 ; x. 30 ; xv. 29
sq. ; Gal. iii. 19 ; v. 11 ; Col. ii. 20, and often, ha τί or
ifoT;, see s. V. p. 305". δια τί [or διατί (see διό, Β. Π. 2 a.
ρ.ΐ;34'>)], why? where/ore? .Mt. i.x. 11, 14; xiii. 10; Mk.
vii. 5 ; xi. 31 ; Lk. xix. 23, 31 ; Jn. vii. 45 ; .xiii. 37 ; Acts
V. 3 ; 1 Co. vi. 7 ; 2 Co. xi. 1 1 ; Rev. xvii. 7, and often, ris
Tt, to what? to what end ? to what purpose t ^t. siv. 31 ;
xxvi. 8 ; Mk. xiv. 4 ; xv. 34, (Sap. iv. 1 7 ; Sir. xxxix. 21).
τί ουκ, etc. >chi/ then, etc. : Mt. xvii. 10; xix. 7 ; xxvii. 22 ;
Mk. xii. 9 ; Lk. xx. 15 ; .In. i. 25; see also in oui», b. a. ;
τί ovv ίροϋμ^ν, see ibid, τί yap ; see yap, U. 5. γ.
llebraistically for Π0, hoir, how greatly, how much, with
adjectives and verbs in exclamations [W. § 21 N. 3 ; c£.
B. 254 (218)] : Mt. vii. 14 G LTr; Lk. xii. 49 [on this
see fi. I. 4 fin.], (Ps. iii. 2 ; 2 S. vi. 20 ; Cant. i. 10; τί
πο\ύ TO ayaBov σου ; Symm. Ps. x.xx. 19). 2. equiv.
to TTOTfpos, -a, -ov, tohether of two, which of the two : Mt.
.xxi. 31 ; xxiii. 1 7 [here L τί ; see below] ; xxvii. 1 7, 21 ;
Lk. xxii. 27; neut. τί, Mt. ix. 5; [xxiii. 17 Lchm., 19] ;
Mk. ii. 9; Lk. v. 23 ; Phil. i. 22 ; cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. iii.
p. 394: Matthiae § 488, 4 ; W. 169 (159). 3. equiv.
to ποίο t, -a, -ov, of what sort, what (kind) : Mk. i. 27; vi.
2; Lk. iv. 36; viii. 9; xxiv. 17; Jn. vii. 36; Acts xvii.
19 ; 1 Co. XV. 2 ; Eph. i. 18 sq. Cf. Hermann on Viger
p. 731. 4. By a somewhat inaccurate usage, yet one
not unknown to Grk. writ., it is put for the relatives Ss
and οστίΓ : thus, τίνα (LTTrAVII τί) /le vnovoe'iTe cii/ai,
οίκ (Ιμ\ f'yoi (where one would expect ov). Acts xiii. 25 ;
δυθή<τ(ταί ύμ'ιν, τί \α\ησ(τ( [-σητ€ Τ Tr WII ; L br. thecl.],
^It. .\. 1 Γ) ; ΐτοίμασον, τί δ^νττνησω, Lk. xvii. 8 ; [οιδα τίνας
ίξ(\(ξάμψ, .In. xiii. 18 Τ Trtxt. WII] ; esp. after ίχ^ιν
(as in the Grk. writ.) : ονκ ϊχουσι, τί φάγωσιν, Mt. xv.
32 ; Mk. vi. 36 ; viii. 1 sq. ; cf. W. § 25, 1 ; B. 251 (216) ;
on the distinction betw. the Lat. habeo quid and haheo
quod cf. Ramshorn, Lat. Gram. p. 565 sq.
tIs, neut. Ti, gen. τινάί, indefinite (enclitic) pronoun
(bearing the same relation to the interrog. Ws that jroi,
ίτώί, jrore do to the interrogatives jroi, πως, πότί) ; 1.
a certain, a certain one ; used of persons and things con-
cerning which the writer either cannot or will not speak
more particularly ; a. joined to nouns substantive,
as well as to adjectives and to numerals used substan-
tively ; as, Σαμαρείτη! tis, Lk. .x. 33 ; ifpeis, Lk. i. 5 ; x.
31 ; άνήρ, Lk. viii. 27; Acts iii. 2; viiL 9. xiv. 8, άνύοω-
626
rh
ms, Mt. xviii. 12; Lk. x. 30; Acts ix. 38; plur. Jude4;
ΓοποΓ, Lk. xi. 1 ; Acts xxvii. 8; κώμη, Lk. x. 38; xvii. 12,
and in maDy other pass. ; vi'ilh proper names (as tis
Σίμων), Mk. XV. 21 ; Lk. xxiii. 26 ; Acts ix. 43 ; xxi. 16 ;
XXV. 19. δύο Ttve't with a partit. gen., Lk. vii. 18 (19);
Acts xxiii. 23 ; irepos, Acts viii. 34 ; plur. Acts xxvii. 1 ;
it indicates that the thing with ivhich it is connected
belongs to a certain class and resembles it : άπαρ)(ην
Tiva, a kind of firstfruits, Jas. i. 18, cf. W. § 25, 2 a;
joined to adjectives of quality and quantity, it requires
us to conceive of their degree as the greatest possible ;
as, φοβ(ρά Tis ΐκ8οχψ a certain fearful expectation, Heb.
X. 27, where see Delitzsch [or Alford] (δανή τις δΰναμις,
Xen. mem. 1, 3, 12; other exx. fr. the Grk. writ, are
given in W. § 2ό, 2 c. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. Π. 8] ; Mat-
thiae§487, 4; [Bnhdy. p. 442] ; incredibilis quidam
amor, Cic. pro Lig. c. 2, 5) ; μίγαΐ τκ, Acts viii. 9. b.
it stands alone, or substantively: univ. ris one, a certain
one, Mt. xii. 47 [but WH in mrg. only]; Lk. ix. 49, 57;
xiii. 6, 23; Jn. .\i. 1; .\ctsv. 25; xviii. 7; plur. Ti«s, cer-
lain, some : Lk. xiii. 1 ; Acts xv. 1 ; llo. iii. 8 ; I Co. iv.
18; XV. 34; 2 Co. iii. 1 ; Gal. ii. 12; 2 Th. iii. 11 ; 1 Tim.
i. 3, 19 ; iv. 1 ; v. 15 ; vi. 10 ; 2 Pet. iii. 9 ; rives ev ύμ'ιν,
some among you, 1 Co. xv. 12; a participle may be
added, — either with the article, rives o'l etc., Lk. xviii.
9 ; 2 Co. X. 2 ; Gal. i. 7 ; or without it, 1 Tim. vi. 21 ;
Ttr and rivis with a partit. gen. : Lk. xi. 1 ; xiv. 15 ; 2 Co.
X. 12. 2. a. joined to nouns and signifying
some: χρόνον ηνά, some lime, a ichile, 1 Co. xvi. 7; rjpepai
Tifi't, so7ne (or certain} daya. Acts ix. 19 ; x. 48 ; xv. 36 ;
xvi. 12; xxiv. 24; XXV. 13; μί'ροί rt, Lk. xi. 36 [here WII
mrg. br. Tt] ; Acts v. 2; 1 Co. xi. 18; r'l βρώσιμον, Lk.
xxiv. 41 ; add, Mk. xvi. 18; Jn. v. 14 ; Acts xvii. 21 ; xxiii.
20; xxviii. 21; Ileb. xi. 40; βραχνή. Acts v. 34 (where
LTTrWII om. Tt) ; Heb. ii. 7; nepiaaorepov ri, 2 Co. x.
8 ; μικρόν τί, 2 Co. xi. 16 ; it serves modestly to qualify
or limit the measure of things, even though that is thought
to be ample or large [cf. 1 a. sub fin.] : κοινωνία ris, a cer-
tain contribution, Ro. .xv. 26 ; Kopnos, Ro. i. 13 ; χάρισμα,
ibid. 11. with a participle, άθ(τήσας ris, if any one has
set at nought, Heb. x. 28 [but this ex. belongs rather
under the next head]. b. standing alone, or used
substantively, and signifying some one, something; nnij
one, anything: univ., Mt. xii. 29 ; Mk. ix. 30 ; xi. 16 ; Lk.
viii. 46; Jn. ii. 25; vi. 46; Acts xvii. 25; Ro. v. 7; 1 Co.
XV. 35; 2 Co. xi. 20 sq. ; Heb. iii. 4; Jas. ii. 18; 2 Pet. ii.
19, etc. ; τΐί ίξ υμών, Jas. ii. 16; ίξ υμών ns, Heb. iii. 1 3 ;
■with a partitive gen., Lk. vii. 36 ; xi. 45 ; 1 Co. vi. 1 ;
neut. ΤΪ with a partit. gen.. Acts iv. 32; Ro. xv. 18; Eph.
V. 27. (Γί TIS, see iij, 3 p. 187*. it answers not in-
frequently to the indefinite one (Germ, man, French on):
Mk. viii. 4; Jn. ii. 25; xvi. 30; Ro. viii. 24 ; Heb. v. 12
(where some [viz. RGTTr (cf. W. 169 (160); R. V.
mrg. which be the rudiments etc.; cf. c. below)] incor-
rectly read τίνα [yet cf. B. 268 (230) note, cf. 260 (223)
note]), etc.; cf. Matthiae § 487, 2. e'i ns, see el. III. 16;
iav Tir, TWOS, etc. : Mt. xxi. 3 ; xxiv. 23 ; Mk. xii 19 ; Lk.
XTi. 31 ; Jn. vi. 51; vii. 17; viii. 51 sq.; ix. 22, 31; x. 9;
xi. 9sq. 57; xii. 26, 47; Acts Lx. 2 [here Tdf. άν] ; xiii.
41; iCo. V. 11; viii. 10; x. 28; Col. iii. 13; iTim. i. 8;
2Tim. ii. 5, 21; Jas. ii. 14; v. 19; 1 Jn. ii. 15; iv. 20; v.
16 ; Rev. iii. 20 ; xxii. 18 sq. ; άν τίνων, Jn. xx. 23 [here
Lchm. eav] ; eav μη rts, Jn. iii. 3, 5 ; xv. 6 ; Acts viii. 31 ;
οϋ . . . ns, not . . . any one, i. e. 7io one, Jn. x. 28 ; oCrt
. . . TIS, Acts xxviii. 21 ; oibe . . . tis, Mt. xi. 27; xii. 19;
ουκ . . ■ νπό nvos, 1 Co. vi. 12; μή τιγ, lest any (man), Mt.
xxiv.4; Mk.xiii.5; Acts xxvii. 42: 1 Co. i. 15; xvi. U ;
2Co. viii. 20; .xi. 16; xii. 6; Eph. ii. 9; 1 Th. v. 15; Heb.
iv. 11 ; xii. 15; hath any (one), .In. iv. 33 [cf. μήτις, 2] ; μη
τίνα, 2 Co. xii. 1 7 ; rrpos ro μή ■ . . nva, 1 Th. ii. U ; ώστ(
■ . . μή nva, Mt. viii. 28 ; like the Lat. aliquis, it is used
with the verb elvai emphatically : to be somebody, i. e.
somebody of importance, some eminent personage, [W.
§ 25, 2 c.; B. § 127, 16], Acts v. 36 (see exx. fr. the Grk.
writ, in Passow s. v. B. IL 2 d. ; [L. and S. ibid. A. Π. 5] ;
on the phrase τί eivai see e. β. below). Plur. rive's,
sotne (of that number or class of men indicated by the
context) : Mk. xiv. 4, 65 ; Lk. xxi. 5 ; Jn. xiii. 29 ; rives
are distinguished from o'l navres, 1 Co. viii. 7 ; ix. 22.
rives with an anarthrous participle, Mk. xiv. 57; Lk.
xiii. 1 ; ταΟτά rives ^e, such (of this sort) were some of
you, 1 Co. vi. 11 [cf. ovros, I. 2 d.]; Tt«'s with a partitive
gen., Mt. ix. 3 ; xii. 38 ; xxviii. 11 ; Mk. vii. 1 sq. ; .xii.
13; Lk. vi. 2; xix. 39 ; Acts v. 15 ; xvii. 18, 28, and
often ; foil, by ck and a partit. gen., Lk. xi. 15 ; Jn. vi.
64 ; vii. 25, 44 ; ix. 16 ; xi. 37, 46 ; Acts xi. 20 ; xv. 24,
etc. ; Paul employs rives by nieiosis in reference to many,
when he would mention something censurable respecting
tliem in a mild way: Ro. iii. 3; 1 Co. x. 7-10. o.
Sometimes the subject τΙγ, rives, or the object τινά, nvas,
is not added to the verb, but is left to be understood by
the reader (cf. B. § 132, 6 ; [\V. §§ 58, 2 ; 64, 4]) : be-
fore the partit. gen. Acts xxi. 16; before από, Mt. xxvii.
9 (1 Mace. vii. 33) ; before eK, Mt. xxiii. 34 ; Lk. xxi.
16; [Jn. i. 24 TTrAVH (cf. R. V.mrg.); vii. 40 L Τ
Tr WH (cf. R. V. mrg.)] ; xvi. 17; [2Jn. 4; Rev. ii.
10]. [Other exx. of its apparent omission are the fol-
lowing: as subject, — of a finite verb (W. § 58, 9 b. /3. ;
B. § 1 29, 19) : φησί, 2 Co. x. 10 R G Τ Tr txt. WH txt. ;
όταν λαλή το ψίί/δθ5, Jn. viii. 44 (ace. to one interpreta-
tion ; see R. V. marg.) ; of an infin. : οϋ χρeiav eχeτe
ypacpeiv ίμ'ιν, 1 Th. iv. 9 R G Τ Tr txt. WH ; χpeίav exere
roi SiSaoKeiv vμas, rlva etc. Heb. v. 12 R G Τ Tr (but see
2 b. above), as object: has μοι me'iv, Jn. iv. 7 ; cf. Mk.
V. 43. See Kuhner § 352g.; Kruger § 55, 3, 21.] d.
It stands in partitions: t\s ■ ■ ■ erepos Se, one . . . and
another, 1 Co. iii. 4; plur. τιι /cf (pev) . . ■ rives (Se), Lk.
ix. 7 sq.; Acts xvii. 18; Phil. i. 1-J; cf. Passow s. v. B.
Π. 2e.; [L. and S. ibid. A. Π. 11. c.]. e. Besides
what has been already adduced, the foU. should be no-
ticed respecting the use of the neut. τί ; ο. univ.
anything, something: Mt. v. 23; Mk. viii. 23; Lk. xi. 54;
Acts XXV. 5, 11 ; 1 Co. x. 31, and very often; oiSi . . . tL
neither . . . anything, 1 Tim. vi. 7. β. like the Lat.
aliquid it is used emphatically, equiv. to something oj
consequence, something extraordinary (cf. b. above) : ia
Τίτιο?
627
τολμάω
the phrase fivai τι, 1 Co. iii. 7 ; Gal. ii. 6 ; vi. 3 ; cf. Pas-
sow s. V. B. II. 2 d. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. Π. 5] ; and on the
Lat. aliquid esse see Klotz, Handworterb. d. Lat. Spr. i.
298'; [Harpers' Diet. s. v. aliquis, II. C. 1] (on the
other hand, in 1 Co. -x. 19 τ\ fivai means lo be anything,
actually to exist) ; ei&ii/ai [L Τ Tr W'll ϊ-γνωκίναι] τι, i. e.
much, 1 Co. viii. 2. 3. As respects the Position
of the word, when used adjectively it stands — now be-
fore its noun (ris άνήρ, Acts iii. 2 ; .xiv. 8 ; tIs ΐίαθητής.
Acts ix. 10 ; Tii^ac irepovs. Acts xxvii. 1 ; τϊ άγαθάν, -In. i.
47); now, and indeed far more frequently, after it, as
iepeis tis, Lk. i. 5; x. 31 ; άρήρ tis, Lk. viii. 27, etc., etc.
Tti/i'r, used substantively, is found at the beginning of a
sentence in Mt. xxvii. 47; Lk. vi. 2; Jn. xiii. 29; 1 Tim.
V. 24 ; Phil. i. 15 ; cf. W. § 25, 2 Note, and 559 (520).
The particle δβ may stand betw. it and its substantive
(as 2αμαρ€ίτ7)Γ δί τΐί), as in Lk. x. 33, 38; Acts viii. 9;
Heb. .X. 27.
Ttrios, -on, 6, the praenomen of a certain Corinthian,
a Jewish proselyte, also surnamed Justus : Acts xviii. 7
Τ Trbr. WII (see TiVos).*
tCtXos, -ου, 6, a Lat. word, a title; an inscription, giv-
ing• the accusation or crime for which a criminal suf-
fered : Jn. xix. 19, 20, and after it Ev. Nic. c. 10, 1 fin.
(Sueton. Calig. c. 32 praecedente titulo qui causam
poenae indicaret; again, Domit. c. 10 canibus objecit
cum hoc tiluh : impie locutus parmularius.) *
Titos [Rec." in the subscription. Tiros; cf. Lipsius,
Gram. Unters. p. 42 sq.; Tdf. Prolog, p. 103; Pape,
Eigennamen, s. v. ; W. § 6, 1 m.], -ου, ό, Titus, a Gentile
Christian, Paul's companion in some of his journeys and
assistant in Christian work: 2 Co. ii. 13; vii. 6, 13 sq. ;
viii. 6, 16, 23 ; xii. 18 ; Gal. ii. 1, 3 ; 2 Tim. iv. 10 ; Tit. i.
4. He is not mentioned in the Book of Acts. But since
Titus is the praenomen, perhaps he appears in the
Acts under his second, or, if lie was a Roman, under
his third name; cf. Riickert on 2 Cor. p. 410. He is
by no means, however, to be identified (after Wieseler,
Com. U. d. Brief a. d. Galater, p. .573 sq. [also his Chron.
d. apost. Zeit. p. 204]) with the Titus of Acts xviii. 7,
even if the reading (of some authorities [see Tdf.'s note
ad loc.]) Τίτου [see TiVior above] ^Ιοΰστον be the true
one.*
tCw, a form from which some N. T. lexicons [e. g.
Wahl. Bretschneider, Robinson, Bloomfield, Schirlitz,
Harting.al.] incorrectly derive τίσονσιν in 2 Th. i. 9 ; see
TtVo).
τοιγαρονν, (fr. the enclitic τοί or τω, yap, and ovv. Germ.
ditch denn nun ; cf. Delitzsch on Heb. xii. 1 ; [EUicott on
1 Th. iv. 8]), a particle introducing a conclusion with
some special emphasis or formality, and generally occu-
pying the first place in the sentence, icherefore then, for
which reason, therefore, consequently : 1 Th. iv. 8 ; Heb.
xii. 1, (for \2-S\\, job xxii. 1 ; xxiv. 22 ; 4 Mace. i. 34 ;
vi. 28 var. ; xiii. 15 ; Soph., Xen., Plato, sqq.) ; cf. Klotz
ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 738.•
τ〠in KaiToiye, see ye, 3 f.
tohruv, (fr. the enclitic τοί and νϋν), fr. Find. Tand
Hdt.] down, therefore, then, accordingly ; contrary to the
use of the more elegant Grk. writ., found at tlie begin-
ning of the sentence (cf. Lob. ad Piiryn. p. 342 sq. ; [W.
559 (519 sq.); B. § 150, 19]): Heb. xiii. 13 (Is. iii. 10;
V. 13) ; as in the better writ., after the first word : Lk.
XX. 25 [yet Τ Tr WU put it first here also] ; 1 Co. ix-
26 and liec. in Jas. ii. 24, (Sap. 1. 11 ; viii. 9 ; 4 Mace,
i. 13, 15 sqq.).*
τοιόσ-δί, Toia&f, Toioi/fif, (τοϊοΓ and 8e'), fr. Horn, down,
such, generally with an implied suggestion of something
excellent or admirable : 2 Pet. i. 1 7.*
ToioUTOS, τοιαίτη, τοιοϊιτο and τοιούτον (only this sec-
ond form of the neut. occurs in the N. T., and twice [but
in Mt. xviii. 5 Τ WII have toJ), (fr. Toloy and oiroc [aL
say lengthened fr. τΟΪογ or connected with αυτός ; cf.
ττ/λικοϋτοϊ]), [fr. Horn, down], such as this, of this kind or
sort ; a. joined to nouns : Mt. i.x. 8 ; xviii. 5 ; Mk.
iv. 33 ; vi. 2; vii. 8 [here Τ \VH om. Trbr. the cL], 13 ;
Lx. 37 [here Tdf. τοΰτωΐ'] ; Jn. ix. 16; Acts xvi. 24; 1
Co. V. 1; xi. 16; 2 Co. iii. 4, 12; xii. 3; Heb. vii. 26;
viii. 1; xii. 3 ; xiii. IG ; Jas. iv. 16. b. otor . . .
Totoiror: Mk. .xiii. 19; 1 Co. xv. 48; 2 Co. x. II ; τοιοΰ-
Tor . . . ojTotor, Acts xxvi. 29 ; Totoi>roi ίικ i>s etc. Philem.
9 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]. c. used substantive-
ly, a. without an article : Jn. iv. 23 ; neut. μηδίν τοιοί)-
τον. Acts .xxi. 25 Rec. ; plur., Lk. i.x. 9 ; .xiii. 2 [here Τ
Tr txt. WH ταϋτα~\. β. with the article, ό τοιούτοι
one who is of such a character, such a one, [B. § 1 24, 5 ; W.
Ill (lOG) ; Kriiger §50,4, 6; Kiihner on Xen. mem. 1,
5, 2; Ellicott on Gal. v. 21] : Acts xxii. 22; 1 Co. v. 5,
11 ; 2 Co. ii. 6 sq. ; x. 1 1 ; xii. 2, 5 ; Gal. vi. 1 ; Tit. iiL
11 ; plur., Mt. xix. 14 ; Mk. x. 14 ; Lk. xviii. 16 ; Jo. viii.
5 ; Ro. [ii. 14 Lmrg.] ; xvi. 18 ; 1 Co. vii. 28 ; xvi. 16, 18;
2 Co. xi. 13; Phil. ii. 29; 2 Th. iii. 12; 1 Tim. vi. 5
Rec; 3.Jn. 8; neut. plur.. Acts xix. 25 ; Ro. i. 32; ii. 2
sq.; 1 Co. vii. 15 ; Gal. v. 21, 23 ; Eph. v. 27; Heb. xi. 14.*
τοίχο5, -ου, ό, fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for Tp, α
wall [esp. of a house ; cf. Tfi;(os] : Acts xxiii. 3.*
TOKOS, -ου, ό, (fr. τίκτω, pf. τίτοκα) ; 1. birth; a.
the act of bringing forth. b. that which has been
brought forth, offspring; (in both senses from Homer
down). 2. interest of money, usury, (because it
multiplies money, and as it were 'breeds' [cf. e. g. Mer-
chant of Venice i. 3]) : Mt. xxv. 27 ; Lk. xix. 23, (so in
Grk. writ, fr Pind. and Arstph. down ; Sept. for ']"Ji).'
τολμάω, -ώ; impf. 3 pers. sing. ϊτόΧμα, plur. ατόλμων;
fut. τολμήσω ; 1 aor. ϊτοΚμησα ; {τόλμα or τόλμη [' dar-
ing'; Curtius § 23G]) ; fr. Hom. down; to dare; a.
not to dread or shun through fear: foil, by an inf., Mt.
xxii. 46 ; Mk. .xii. 34 ; Lk. xx. 40 ; Jn. xxi. 12 [W. § 65,
7b.]; Acts V. 13; vii. 32; Ro. xv. 18; 2Co. .x. 12; PhiL
i. 14 ; >Tude 9 ; τόλμησα! (Ισηλβιν, took courage and went
in, Mk. XV. 43 [Hdian. 8, 5, 22; Plut. vit. Cam. 22,
6]. b. to bear, endure; to bring one's self to; [cL
W. u. 8.] : foil, by an inf., Ro. v. 7 ; 1 Co. vi. 1. c.
absol. to be bold ; bear one's self boldly, deal boldly : 2 Co.
xi. 21 ; eVi Tiva, against one, 2 Co. x. 2. [CoMF. : carv
τολμάω.^ *
ΤθΧμηρΟτ€ρον
628
τοσούτος
[Stn. τοΧμάα. βαρρ4οι: β. denotes confidence in one's
own strenj;;tli or capacity, τ. boUliie.ss or daring iu imder-
takiug ; β. has reference more to the character, τ. to its
nianifestatiou. Cf. Schmidt ch. 24, 4; ch. 141. The words
are fouml to;;etIier iu 2 Co. .x. 2.\
τολμηρότίρον, (neut. eouipar. from the adj. το\μηρύί),
[Thuc, stjq.], more boldly: Ho. xv. 15 [L ed. ster. Tr
txt. WII -τ£>ωί; W. -Hi (-228)].•
τολμητήϊ, -oi;, 0, (τολμάω), a daring man: 2 Pet. ii.
10. (Thuc. 1, 70; .Joseph, b. j. 3, 10, 2; Philo de Jo-
Kuph. § 3S, Plut., Lcian.) •
τομώτίρο!, -α, -Of, (compar. fr. τομόϊ cutting, sharp, and
this fr. τίμνω), sharper: Ileb. iv. I'i ([Pseudo-] Phocylid.
vs. IIG [((inom. Poet. Graec. ed. Brunck p. 116)] οπλον
Toi λόγοΓ άνδρι τομώτ(μόν dart σιδι^ρου ; add, Timon in
Athen. 10 p. 445 e.; Lcian. Tox. 11).*
τίξον, -ου, τό, fr. Horn, down, Sept. often for ΠϋΡ, «
bow : Rev. vi. 2.*
τσιτάζιον, -ου, τό, ( neut. of the adj. τοπά^ιοί, fr. roirafos),
lo/taz, a greenish-yellow precious stone (our chrysolith
[see BB. DD., esp. Riehm s. v. Edelsteine 18]) : llev.
xxi. 20 (Diod., Strab. ; Sept. for niQi?, Ex. xxviii. 1 7 ;
xxxvi. 1 7 (xxxix. 10) ; Ezek. xxviii. 13. The Grk. writ,
more commonly use the form τόττα^οί).*
TOTTOs, -ου. ό, in Attic fr. Aeschyl. and his contempo-
raries on ; Sept. D1p"D ; place ; i. e. 1. prop, any
portion of space marked off, as it were, from surrounding
space ; used of a. an inhabited place, as a city,
village, district: Lk. iv. 37; x. 1; Acts xii. 17; xvi. 3;
xxvii. 2, 8 ; 1 Co. i. 2 ; 2 Co. ii. 1 4 ; 1 Th. i. 8 ; Rev. xviii.
17 [(i LT Tr WII] ; τόμ τόττον και τό ΐθνο!, the place
which the nation inhabit, i. e. the holy land and the
JewisTi people, Jn. xi. 48 (cf. 2 Mace. v. 19 sq.) ; τόποΓ
Syioi, the temple (which the Sept. of Is. L\. 13 calls ό
άγιοι τόίΓοΓ του ieoC), Mt. xxiv. 15. of a house, Acts
iv. 31. of uninhabited places, with adjectives : ίρημοι,
Mt, xlv. 13, 15; Mk. i. 35 ; vi. 31sq. ; Lk. iv. 42; ix.
10 RGL, 12 ; jriStTOf, Lk. vi. 17 ; SmSpos, plur., Mt. xii.
43 ; Lk. xi. 24. of any place whatever : κατά tujtous,
[ll.V. in divers places'] i. e. the world over [but see κατά,
Π. 3 a. α.], Mt. xxiv. 7 ; Mk. xiii. 8 ; [fV παντΊ τόπω, 2 Th.
iii. 16 Lchm.] ; of places in the sea, τραχι'ΐ! τόποι, Acts
xxvii. 29 [R.V. rocLy ground} ; τόπ- δίΛίλασσοϊ, [Α. V.
place where two seas meQ, ibid. 41. of that 'place'
where what is narrated occurred: Lk. x. 32; xix. 5 ;
xxii. 40; Jn. v. 13 ; vi. 10; xviii. 2. of a place or spot
where one can settle, abide, dwell : ίτοιμάζαν τιν\ τόπον,
Jn. xiv. 2 sq., cf. Rev. xii. fi ; f ;^eiv τόποι/, a place to dwell
in. Rev. 1. c. ; οΰ« ην airois τόπος f'v τω καταλϋματι, Lk.
ii. 7 ; διδόι/αι τινΊ τόπον, to give one place, give way to
one, Lk. xiv. 9'; tOttos οΰ;^ (ΰρίθη αϋτοΐί. Rev. xx. 11 ;
of the seat which one gets in any gathering, as at a
feast, Lk. .xiv. 1 ; τον ίσχατον τόπΌΐ/ κατίχαν, ibid, θ•" ;
of the place or spot occupied by things placed in it, Jn.
XX. 7. the particular place referred to is defined by
the words appended : — by a genitive, τόπ. τηί βασάνον,
Lk. xvi. 28 ; ttjs καταπαΰσ(ωί, -Acts vii. 49 ; κρανίου, Mt.
xxvii. 33; Alk. xv. 22; Jn. xix. 17; [τάι- τόπον των ηΚων,
Jn. XX. 25•• L Τ Tr mrg.] ; — by the addition of ol, όπου.
ίφ* or (V ω, foil, by finite verbs, Mt. xxviii. 6 ; Mk
xvi. 6 ; .Jn. iv. 20 ; vi. 23 ; x. 40 ; xi. 6, 30 ; xix. 4 1 ; -Vets
vii. 33 ; Ro. ix. 26 ; — by the addition of a proper name :
τόποΓ λ(γόμ(νο!, or καλοΰμ(ΐ>ο;, Mt. xxvii. 33; Mk. xv.
22; Lk. -xxiii. 33; Jn. xix. 13; Rev. xvi. IG; 6 τόποΓ
TiKos, the place which a person or thing occupies or has
a right to : Rev. ii. 5 ; vi. 14 ; xii. 8 ; where a thing is
hidden, T^t μαχαίρας i. e. its sheath, Mt. xxvi. 52. the
abode assigned by God to one after death wherein to re-
ceive his merited portion of bliss or of misery : (6 ίδιοι
τόποΓ (Tttos), univ. Ignat. ad Magnes. 5, 1 [cf. ά alaivms
τόποΓ, Tob. iii. 6]) ; applied to (jehenna, Acts i. 25 (see
ιδιοΓ, 1 c.) ; ό 6φ€ΐ\όμ(νο! τόποϊ, of heaven, Polyc. ad
Philip. 9, 2; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 4; also ό Sytot τόπος,
ibid. 5, 7 ; [ό i>piapevos τ. Barn. ep. 19, 1 ; .Vet. Paul et
Thecl. 28; see esp. llarnaek's note on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
5,4]. b. a [dace (passage) in a book: Lk. iv. 17
(κα'ι f'v άλλω τόττω φι^σίν, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 20 [(but this
is doubtful; cf. L. and S. s. v. 1.4; yet cf. Kiihner ad
loc.) ; Philo de Joseph. § 26 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 8, 4] ; in
the same sense χώρα in Joseph, antt. 1, 8, 3). 2.
metaph. a. the condition or station hehl hij one in
any company or assembly : άναπληροΰν τον τόπον τοΰ ISiut-
του, [M.y.fillelh the place of the unlearned], 1 Co. xiv.
16 ; της διακονίας ταίιτης και αποστολής, [R.V. the place in
this ministry, etc.]. Acts i. 25 LTTr WII. b. op-
portunity, power, occasion for actiny : τόπον λαμβάνιιν της
απολογίας, opportunity to make his defence, -Vets xxv.
16 (ίχαν τ. απολογίας, Joseph, antt. 16, 8, 5) ; τόττοκ διδό-
ναί τη όργη (sc. τοΰ θ(οϋ), Ro. .xii. 19; τω διαβάλω, Eph.
iv. 27, (τώ ιατρώ, to his curative efforts in one's case,
Sir. xx.xviii. 12 ; νόμω υψίστου, ibid. xix. 1 7 ; τόποι» διδό-
vai Tivt, f(jll. by an inf., ibid. iv. 5) : τόπ- μ(τανοίας evpi-
σκίΐκ, Ileb. xii. 17, on this pass, see (ίρίσκω, 3 (διδόναι.
Sap. xii. 10; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 7, 5; Lat. locum rdin-
qiicre paenitentiae, Liv. 44, 10; 24, 26 ; [Plin. ep. ad 'I'rai.
96(97), 10 cf. 2]; (χ(ΐν τόπον μιτανοίας. Tat. or. ad
(iraec. 1 5 fin. ; δια το μτ] καταλ(ίπ€σθαί σφισι τόπον c'Xe'ous
μηδί συγγνώμης. Polyb. 1, 88, 2) ; τόπον (χιιν sc. τοϋ (ΰαγ-
γ(λίζ(σθαι, 1!ο. χν. 23 ; τ. ζητ^Ίν, with a gen. of the thing
for vN-hich inriuence is sought among men : διαθήκης, pass.
Ileb. viii. 7 [(ef. μίμφομαι)]-
[Syn. tOtos 1, χώρα, χωρίον: τόπ. jilace, indefinite; a
portion of space viewed iu reference to its occupancy, or a.s
appropriated to a thing; χώρα region, country, extensive;
space, yet bounded; χωρίον parcel of yround (.In. iv. 5), cir-
cumscrilied ; a definite portion of space viewed as euclosed
or complete in itself ; τόπος and χωρίον (pUir., K. V. lands)
occur together in Acts xxviii. 7. Cf. Schmidt ch. 41.]
too-oCtos. -αντη. -οϋτο (Heb. vii. 22 \j T Tr WII) and
-οίτον, (fr. τόσοΓ and οίτοι; [al. say lengthened fr. τόσος;
cf. τι;λ«οϋτο5, init.]), so great; with nouns : of quantity,
TOO•, πλοί^τοί. Rev. xviii. 17 (16); of internal amount,
πίοτίΓ, Mt. viii. 10 ; Lk. vii. 9; [όσα (δόξασαν ίαυτήν, το-
σοϋτονδότ( βασανισμού. Rev. xviii. 7] ; of size, νίφος, Ileb.
xii. 1 ; plur. so mani/ : 1χθύ(ς, Jn. xxi. 11 ; σημι'ια, Jn.
xii. 37 ; γίνη φωνών, 1 Co. xiv. 10 ; (τη, Lk. xv. 29 [(here
A.V. these many)], (in prof, writ., esp. the Attic, we
often findToaoCTos και τοιοϋτοί and the reverse; see Hein-
Tore
629
τραχτ]\ίζω
dorf on Plat. Gorg. p. 34; Passow p. 1923"; [L. and S.
s. vv.]) ; foil, by ώστβ, ίο muny as tu be able, etc. [B. 2i4
(210)], Mt. XV. 33 ; of time : so long, χρόνο;, [.Jn. .\iv. U] ;
Heb. iv. 7 ; of length of space, το μ^κο; τοσούτον iariv
όσο» etc. Rev. xxi. 16 Rec. ; absol., plur. so many, .]n.
vi. 9 ; neut. plur. \so many things'], iial. iii. 4 ; τοσούτον,
for so much (of price), Acts v. 8 (9) ; dat. τοσούτω, pre-
ceded or tollowed bv οσω (as often in the Grk. writ. fr.
Hd.. down [W. § 35, 4 X. 2])^ by so murk : τοσ. κρίίττων,
by so much better, Heb. i. 4 ; τοσοϋτω μάλλον 5σω etc.
Heb. X. 2.Ϊ ; καθ' όσον. . . κατά τοσούτον, by how much . . .
by so much, Heb. vii. 22.*
Τίίτί, demonstr. adv. of time, (fr. the neut. art. τό,
iind the enclit. re [q. v.j; answering to the relative
oTf [KUhner §50G, 2 c.]), fr. Hom. down, then ; at that
time ; a. then i. e. at the time when the things under
consideration ivere taking place, (of a concomitant
event) : .Mt. ii. 1 1 (τοτ( ίπληρώθη) ; iii. ο, 13 ; xii. 22, 38 ;
XV. 1 ; xix. 13 ; xx. 20 ; xxvii. 9, HI ; Ro. vi. 21 ; foil, by
a more jiiecise specification of the time by means of an
added participle, Mt. ii. Hi ; Gal. iv. H ; opp. to νϋν, Gal.
iv. 29 ; Heb. xii. 26 ; δ tOtc κόσμος, the world that then
was, 2 Pet. iii. 6. b. then i. e. when the thing un-
der consideration had been said or done, thereupon ; so
in the historical writers (esp. Matthew), by way of transi-
tion from one thing mentioned to another which could
not take place before it [W. .i40 (003); B. § 151, 31
fin.]: Mt. iv. 1,.5; .xxvi. 14; xxvii. 38; Acts i. 12: x. 48;
xxi. 33 ; not infreq. of things which took place imme-
diately afterwards, so that it is equiv. to which having
been done or heard : Mt. ii. 7 ; iii. 15; iv. 10 sq. ; viii. 26 ;
xii. 45 ; XV. 28 ; xvii. 19 ; xxvi. 36, 45 ; xxvii. 26 sq. ;
Lk. xi. 26; tOtc ovv, .Tn. xi. 14 [Lchm. br. ουν}: xix. 1,
16; XX. 8; fiOews Tore, Acts xvii. 14: totc preceded
by a more definite specification of time, as μιτά το
ψωμΐον, Jn. xiii. 27 ; or by an aor. ptcp. Acts xxviii. 1.
OTf . . . Tore, etc., when . . . then : Mt. xiii. 26 ; xxi. 1 ; Jn.
xii. 16 ; b>c . . . rore, etc., Jn. vii. 10 ; xi. 6 ; preceded by
a gen. absol. which specifies time, .\cts .xxvii. 21. άπο
τότ£ from that time on, see άπα, I. 4 b. p. 58''. c. of
things future; then (at length) when the thing under
discussion takes place (or shall have taken place) : totc
simply. Jit. xxiv. 23, 40 ; xxv. 1, 34, 37, 41, 44 scj. ; opp.
to άρτι, 1 Co. xiii. 12; «cut rorf, Mt. vii. 23; .xvi. 27;
xxiv. 10, 14, 30 ; Mk. xiii. 21, 26 sci- ; Lk. xxi. 27 ; 1 Co.
iv. 5 ; Gal. vi. 4 ; 2 Th. ii. 8 ; κάί tote [jreceded by πρώ-
τον, Mt. V. 24 ; vii. 5 ; Lk. vi. 42. όταν (with a subjunc.
pres.) . . . ToTf, etc. when . . . then, etc. [W. § 60, 5], 2 Co.
xii. 10; 1 Th. v. 3; όταν (with an aor. subj. i. ij. Lat. fut.
pf.) . . . Tore, etc., Mt. i.x. 15 ; xxiv. 16 ; xxv. 31 ; Λϋ.
ii.20; xiii. 14; Lk. v. 35 ; xxi. 20 sq. ; Jn.ii.lO[TWH
om. L Tr br. το'τί ] ; viii. 28 ; 1 Co. xv. 28, 54 ; xvi. 2 ;
Col. iii. 4. Of the N. T. writ. Matthew uses ToVf most
frequently, ninety-one times [(so Holtzmann. Syn. Evang.
p. 293) ; rather, eighty-nine times ace. to R T. ninety
timesacc. toGLTrWII]; it is not found in [E| h., Phil.,
Philem., the Past. Epp., the Epp. of Jn., Jas., Jude], the
Rev.
τουναντίον (by crasis for ro (ναντίον[Β. 10]), [(.A.rstph.,
Thuc, al.J], on the contrary, contrariwise, (Vulg. e con-
trario), accus. used adverbially [AV. 230 (216)]: 2 Co.
ii. 7 ; Gal. ii. 7 ; 1 Pet. iii. 9.•
τοννομα (by crasis for το όνομα [Β. 10; WH. App. p.
145]), [fr. Hom. H. 3, 23.J down], the name ; accus. absoL
[B.§ 131, 12; Vi. 230 (216) of. όνομα, 1] hy name: Mt.
-x.xvii. 57.•
τοντί'σ-Γΐ [cf. W. p. 45 ; B. 11 (10)] for toCt' ίστι, and
this for τοϋτό fori, see (ίμί, II. 3.
τράγοϊ, -ου, ό, fr. Hom. down, a he-goat : plur., Heb.
ix. 12sq. 19; X. 4.•
τράτΓίξα, -ijs, ή, (fr. τίτρα, and πίζα a foot), fr. Hom.
down, Sept. for jnbc', a table ; 1. a. a table
on which food is placed, an eating-table : Mt. xv. 27: Mk.
vii. 28; Lk. xvi. 21 ; xix. 23; xxii. 21, 30; the table in
the temple at Jerusalem on which the consecrated loaves
were placed (see ιτρόθ(σι.ς. 1), Heb. ix. 2. b. equiv.
to the food placed \i\ioi\ the table (cf. Fritzsche on Add.
to Esth. iv. 14) : παρατίθίναι τράπ(ζαν, (like the Lat.
mensam apponere [cf. our 'to set a good table']), to set a
table, i.e. food, before one (Thuc. 1, 130; .\el. v. h. 2, 17),
Acts xvi. 34; &ιακονΛν ταΐϊ τραπίζαιι (see ίιακονϊω, 3),
Actsvi. 2. c. α //«;!</i/e/, /"f(/.s7, (fr. Ildt. down): Ro.
xi. 9 (fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 23) ; μίτίχαν τραπίζηί- δαιμο-
νίων, to partake of a feast prepared by [(?) see below]
demons (the idea is this: the sacrifices of the Gentiles
inure to the service of demons who employ them in pre-
paring feasts for their worshippers; accordingly one who
participates in those feasts, enters into communion and
fellowship with the demons) : κυρίου, to partake of a feast
prepared by [(?) see below] the Lord (just as when he
first instituted the supper), 1 Co. x. 21 [but it seems
more natural to take the genitives Sai/x. and κυρ. simply
as possessive (cf. \V. 189 (178); B. §127, 27), and
to modify the above interi)retation accordingly]. 2.
the table or stand of a money-changer, where he sits, ex-
changing different kinds of money for a fee (agio), and
paying back with interest loans or depo.^its, (Lys., Isocr.,
Dem., Aristot., Joseph., Plut., al.) : Jit. xxi. 1 2 ; Mk. xi.
15 ; Jn. ii. 15 ; to apyvptov διδοναι fTrl (την) τράπ^ζαν, to put
the money into a (the) bank at interest, Lk. xi.K. 23.*
τρα•π•£ζ£τη5 [-ff 1V7S Τ WH; see ΙΓ//. App. p. 154, and
cf. fi, i], -ου, ό, (τράπίζα, <J. v.), a money-changer, broker,
banker, one vrho exchanges money for a fee, and pays
interest on deposits: Mt. xxv. 27. (Cebet. tab. 31;
[Lys.], Dem., .Joseph., Plut., Artem., al.) *
τρανμα, -rof, τό, (ΤΡΛΩ, ΤΡΩΩ, τιτρώσκω, to wound,
akin to θραύω), a wound: Lk. x. 34. (From AeschyL
and Hdt. down ; Sept. several times for i'i'i).) *
τραυματίζω : 1 aor. ptcp. τραυμάτισα! \ pf. pass. ptcp.
Τ€τραυματισμ(νθ! ; (τραΰμα) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
to wound : Lk. xx. 12 ; .\cts xix. 16.'
τραχηλίζω : (τράχηλοε) ; 1. to seize and titnst the
neck or throat ; used of combatants who handle thus
their antagonists (Philo, Plut., Diog. Laert., al.). 2.
to bend back the neck of the victim to be slain, to lag
bare or expose by bending back ; hence trop. to iay bare,
τράχηλος
630
τρόμος
uncover, expose : pf. pass. ptcp. τ(τραχη\ισμ(νος τινΊ, laid
bare, laid open, made manifest to one, lleb. iv. 1.'!.*
τράχηλο?, -ου, ό, [allied \v. τρίχω; named from its mov-
ableness; cf. Vanicek p. 304 J, fr. Eur. and Arstph. down,
Sept. chiefly for ΊΚΙΧ, also for 'ρ'^,βίο., the neck: Mt.
xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42;' Lk. xv. 20; xvii. 2; Acts xv. 10;
XX. 37 ; t6v iavrov τράχηΧον νποτίθίναι (sc. ύτΓο τον σίδη-
ρον), [Α.ν. to latj down one's οη•η neck i. e.] to be ready
to incur the most imminent peril to life, Ro. xvi. 4.•
τραχνϊ, -fia, -ij, fr. Ilom. down, rourjh : ό8οί, Lk. iii. 5 ;
τόποι, rocky places (in the sea). Acts xxvii. 2!).*
Τραχωνϊτΐϊ, -ιδοί, ij, Traclionilis, a rough [(Grk. τρα-
χΰί)] region, tenanted by robbers, situated between An-
tilibanus [on the W.] and the mountains of Batanaea [on
the E.], and bounded on the N. by the territory of Da-
mascus: Lk. iii. 1 (Joseph, antt. 16, 9, 3 and often).
[See Porter in BB.DL).]*
Tptts, oi, αί, τρία, τά, three: Mt. xii. 40; Mk. viii. 2;
Lk. i. u6 ; Jn. ii. 19, and often. [From Horn, down.]
Tpcts Ταβί'ρναι, see Tafiipvat.
τρέμω ; used only in the pres. and irapf. ; fr. Horn,
down; to tremble: Mk. v. 33; Lk. viii. 47; Acts ix. G
Rec. ; with a ptcp. (cf. AV. § 45, 4 a.; [B. § 144, 15 a.]),
to fear, be afraid, 2 Pet. ii. 10. [Syn. see φοβΐω, fin.] *
τρέψω; 1 aoT. ίθρ^ψα ; Pass., pres. τρέφομαι ; pf. ptcp.
τίθμαμμίνο! ; fr. Ilom. down; to nourish, support; to feed:
τινά, Mt. vi. 26 ; xxv. 37 ; Lk. .xii. 24 ; Acts xii. 20 ; Rev.
xii. 6, 14; to give suck; Lk. x.xiii. 29 LTTrWII; to
fatten, Jas. v. 5 [here A. V. nonrish'\. to brint/ up,
nurture, Lk. iv. 16 [here Τ WH mrg. άνατρίφω'] (1 Mace,
iii. 33; xi. 3!», and often in prof. auth.). [Co.mp. : a a-,
fK-, €v- τρέφω.] *
τρε'χω; impf. ε7-ρε;(ον ; 2 aor. eSpa/ioi/ ; fr. Horn. down;
Sept. for I'll ; to run ; a. prop. : of persons in haste,
Mk. V. 6 ; Jn. xx. 2, 4 ; with a telic inf. Mt. xxviii. 8 ;
8ραμων with a finite verb, Mt. x.wii. 48; Mk. xv. 36;
Lk. XV. 20 ; τρίχω επί ivith an ace. of place, Lk. xxiv.
12 [T om. L Tr br. WII reject the vs.]; els πόλεμοχ.
Rev. i.x. 9 ; of those who run in a race-course (ε'κ σταδίω),
1 Co. ix. 24, 26. b. metaph. : of doctrine rapidly
propagated, 2 Th. iii. 1 [R. V. run^; by a metaphor
taken from the runners in a race, to exert one's self, strive
hard; to spend one's strength in performing or attaining
something : Ro. ix. 16 ; Gal. v. 7 ; ds kcvov, Gal. ii. 2 [W.
504 (470) ; B. § 148, 10] ; Phil. ii. 16 ; τοκ αγώνα, Ileb.
xii. 1 (see άγων, 2) ; the same e.xpression occurs in Grk.
writ., denoting to incur extreme peril, which it requires
the exertion of all one's efforts to overcome, Hdt. 8,
102; Eur. Or. 878; Ale. 489; Electr. 883; Iph. Aul.
1456 ; Dion. Hal. 7, 48, etc. ; miserabile currunt certa-
men, Stat. Theb. 3,116. [CoMP. : ela-, κατά-, nepi-, προ-,
ττροσ-, σνν, ίπι- συν-, νπο- τρίχω.^ *
τρήμα, -ατοί, τό, (τιτράω, τίτρημι, ΤΡΑΩ, to bore through,
pierce), α perforation, hole : βελόνη!, Lk. xviii. 25 L Τ Tr
WII ; [ραφίδοί, Mt. xix. 24 WH txt.]. (Arstph., Plat.,
Aristot., Plut., al.) *
τριάκοντα, οί, at, τά, (rpfit), thirty : Mt. xiii. 8 ; Mk. iv.
8; Lk. iii. 23, etc. [From Ilom. down.]
τριακίσ-ιοι, -at, -a, three hunared : Mk. xiv. 5 , Jn. xii.
5. [From Ilom. down.]•
τρίβολοΐ, -ου, ό, (rpe'is and βά\\ω, [(cf. /3ε'λοι), three-
pointed]), a thistle, a prickly wild plant, hurtful to other
plants: Mt. vii. 16; lieb. vi. «. (Arstph., al.; Sept. for
Ί1.ΤΠ, Gen. iii. 18; Uos. x. 8; for DrjX thorns, Prov.
xxii. 5.) [Cf. B. D. s. V. Thorns and Thistles, 4 ; Low,
Aram. Pflanzennamen, § 302.] '
τρ(βο;, -ου, ή, {τρίβω to rub), a worn way, a path: Mt.
iii. 3 ; Mk. i. 3; Lk. iii. 4, fr. Is. xl. 3. (Horn. hymn.
Merc. 448; Hdt., Eur., Xen., al.; Sept. for np'nj, ΓΤίΚ,
Π^,Ρ?, ^1.^,, etc.)•
τριετία, -at, ή, (τρείί and ετο£), α space of three years :
Acts XX. 31. (Theophr., Plut., Artem. oneir. 4, 1 ; al.) *
τρίζω; to squeiik, make a shrill cry, (Horn., Hdt., Aris-
tot., Plut., Lcian., al.) : trans. Tois οδόιταΓ. to grind or
gnash the teeth, Mk. ix. 18; κατά Ttvos, Ev. Nicod. c. 5.*
τρίμηνο?, -ov, (τρείί and μή"), if three months (Soph.,
Aristot., Theophr., al.) ; neut. used as subst. a space of
three months (Polyb., Plut., 2 K. xxiv. 8) : Ileb. xi. 23.*
Tpis, (τρεΐί), adv., thrice : Mt. xxvi. 34, 75 ; Mk. xiv.
30, 72 ; Lk. xxii. 34, 61 ; Jn. xiii. 38 ; 2 Co. xi. 25 ; xii.
n ; fVi Tpis [see «Vi. C. I. 2 d. p. 235» hot.], Acts x. 16 ;
xi. 10. [From Horn, down.]*
τρΙ<Γτεγοβ, -ov, (TpeU and στίγη). having three roofs or
stories : Dion. Hal. 3, 68 ; [.Iosej)h. b. j. 5, 5, 5] ; to τρί-
στ(γον, the third story. Acts xx. 9 ((ien. vi. 16 Symm.) ;
η τριστίγη, Artem. oneir. 4, 46.*
τρΐ(Γ-χίλιοι, -at, -a, (rptr and χίΧιοι), three thousand:
Acts ii. 41. [From Horn, down.] *
TpiTos, -η, -ov, the third : with substantives, Mk. xv. 25 ;
Lk. xxiv. 21; Acts ii. 15; 2 Co. xii. 2 ; Rev. iv. 7; vi. 5;
viii. 10 ; xi. 14, etc. ; tj τρίττ; ήμίρα, Mt. xvi. 21 ; xvii. 23 ;
XX. 19; Mk.ix. 31 [Rec.]; .\. 34 Rec; Lk. ,x.xiv. 46 ; Acts
X. 40; 1 Co. XV. 4 ; r^ ήμίρα ττ/ τρίττ;, Lk. xviii. 33; Jn.
ii. 1 [L mrg. Tr λνΐΐ mrg. τη τρίτη ι^ρερα] ; εωί της τρΊτ.
ήμίραί, Mt. xxvii. 64 ; τρίτον, aec. masc. substantively,
a third [(sc. servant)], Lk. xx. 12; neut. το τρίτον with
a gen. of the thing, the third part of anything. Rev. viii.
7-12; ix. 15, 18; xii. 4; neut. adverbially, το τρίτον
the third time, Mk. xiv. 41 ; Jn. xxi. 17; also Λvithout
the article, τρίτον a third time, Lk. xxiii. 22 ; toCto τρί-
τοι/, this is (now) the third time (see οίτοΓ, II. d.), Jn.
xxi. 14; 2 Co. xii. 14 [not Rec."]; xiii. 1; τρίτον in
enumerations after πρώτον, δεύτεροι/, in the third place,
thirdly, 1 Co. xii. 28; ε'κ τρίτηυ, a third time [W. §51,
d.], Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Tr mrg. br. ε'κ τρίτου].
τρίχινο?, -η, -ov, (θρίξ, q- v.), made of hair (Vulg. cili-
cinus): Rev. vi. 1 2 [see aOKKOf, b.]. (Xen., Plat., Sept.,
al.)•
τριχό?, see θρίξ.
τρόμο?, -ου, ό, (τρεμοι), fr. Hom. down, α trembling,
quaking with fear : Mk. xvi. 8 ; μετά φό;3ου κ. τρόμου,
ivith fear and trembling, used to describe the anxiety of
one who distrusts his ability completely to meet all re-
quirements, but religiously does his utmost to fulfil his
duty, 2 Co. vii. 15; Eph.vi.5; Phil. ii. 12; tV φ. ic. ε'ν τρ.
(Is. xLx. 16), 1 Co. ii. 3 (φόβο! and τρόμο! are joined in
τροΊΓή
631
τ/κύγω
Gen. ix. 2 ; Ex. xv. 16 ; Deut. [ii. 25] ; xi. 25, etc. ; iv φ.
. . . iv Tp. Ps. ii. 11). [Syn. cf. φοίίίω, fin.] *
τροττή, -ijs, ή, (fr. τμίηΐύ to turn), a turning : of the
heavenly bodies, Jas. i. 1 Τ (on this see άττυσκΊασμα); often
so in the Grk. writ. fr. Horn, and lies, down [see L.
and S. s. v. 1] ; cf. Job xxxviii. 33 ; Sap. vii. 18; Deut.
xxxiii. 14 ; ^Soph. Lex. s. v.].*
TpoTTOs, -ou, 6, (fr. τρίπω, see τροπή), fr. [Find.], Ae-
schyl. and ildt. down ; 1. a manner, louij, fashion :
OK τρόπον, as, even as, like as, [W. § 32, ϋ; Β. § 131, 12] :
Mt. xxiii. 37 ; Lk. xiii. 34 ; Acts i. 11 ; vii. 2.S ; 2 Tim.
iii. 8, (Gen. xxvi. 29; Ex. xiv. 13; [Deut. xi. 25; Ps. xli.
(xlii.) 2] ; Ezek. xlii. 7 ; xlv. 6 ; Mai. iii. 1 7 ; Xen. mem.
1, 2, 59 ; anab. 6, 1 (3), 1 ; Plat. rep. 5 p. 4ti6 e.) ; τΰν
όμηιον Toi^Toti τρόπον, \_in like manner icilh lliese^, Jude 7 ;
καθ' όν τρόπον, as. Acts xv. 11 ; .xxvii. 25; κατά πάντα
τρόπον, V\o. iii. 2 ; κατά μη^ίνα τρόπον, in no wise, 2 Th.
ii. 3 (4 Mace. iv. 24 ; x. 7 ; κατά oiStva τρόπον, 2 ilacc.
xi. 31 ; 4 Mace. v. 10) ; παντι τρόπω, I'liil. i. 18 (1 Mace,
xiv. 35, and very often in the Grk. writ.) ; also tv παντΙ
τρόπω, 2 Th. iii. 16 [here Lchm. ev π. τόπω ; cf. W. § 31,
8 d.]. 2. manner of life, character : lleb. .xiii. 5
[R. V. mrg. 'turn of mind'; (cf. τούί τρόπουί κυρίου ΐχ(ΐν,
'Teaching' 11, 8)].*
τρο-τΓο-φορεω, -ω : 1 aor. €τροποφόρησα ; (fr. τρόπος, and
φ€ρω to bear) ; to bear one's i/ianners, endure one's charac-
ter : τινά, Acts xiii. 18 RTrtxt. WH (see their App. ad
loc), after codd. X Β etc.; Vulg. mores eorum sustinuit;
(Cic. ad Attic. 13,29; Schol. on Arstph. ran. 1432;
Sept. Deut. i. 31 cod. Vat.; [Orig. in Jer. 248; Apost.
constt. 7, 36 (p. 219, 19 ed. Lagarde)]); see τροφοφορίω.'
τροφή, -ης, ή, (τρίφω, 2 pf. τίτροφα), food, nourish-
vienl: Mt. iii. 4; vi. 25; x. 10; xxiv. 45; Lk. xii. 23; Jn.
iv. 8; Acts ii. 46; ix. 19; xiv. 17; xxvil. 33 sq. 36, 38 ;
Jas. ii. 15 ; of the food of the mind, i. e. the substance
of instruction, lleb. v. 12, 14. (Tragg., Xen., Plat.,
scin. ; Sept. for ππ"?, SjK, ]m, etc.) *
Τρόφιμο! [on its accent cf. W. § 6, 1 1.], -ου, ό, Trophi-
mtis, an Ephesian C'liristian, a friend of the apostle Paul:
Acts XX. 4; xxi. 29; 2 Tim. iv. 20.•
τροφό?, -uO, ή, (τμ(φω; see τροφή), a nurse: 1 Th. ii.
7. (From llom. down ; for nPJ'n, Gen. xxxv. 8 ; 2 K.
xi. 2 ; Is. xlix. 23.) *
τροφο-φορί'ω, -ω : 1 aor. ίτροφοφόρησα ; (τροφός and
φίρω) ; ίο hear like a nurse or mother, i. e. to take the ytiost
anxious anil tender care of: τινά. Acts xiii. 18 G L Τ Tr
mrg. [R. V. mrg. bear as a nursin/j-father'] (Deut. i. 31
cod. Alex. etc. ; 2 Mace. vii. 27 ; Macar. hom. 46, 3 and
otlier eccles. writ.) ; see τροποφορίω.'
τροχιά, -άί, ij, (τροχός, q. v.), a track of a wheel, a rut ;
a track, a path : τροχιάς όρθάς ποιήσατε τοΊς ποσιν υμών,
i. e. follow the path of rectitude, do right, Heb. xii. 13
after Prov. iv. 26 (where for '7Ji''D, as in ii. 15; iv. 11 ;
V. 6, 21 ; in some of the later poets eijuiv. to τροχός).*
τροχό?, -οϋ, 6, (τρ€χω), fr. Hom. down, a wheel: Jas. iii.
6 (on this pass, see yeVecris 3; [cf. AV. 54 (53)]).*
τρύβλιον [so Τ (cf. Proleg. p. 102) WH : -jiMovKGL
Tr] (on the accent see Passow s. v. ; [Chandler § 350 ;
Gottling p. 408]), -ov, τό, a dish, a deep dish [cf. B. D.
s. V. Dish] : Mt. xxvi. 23 ; Mk. xiv. 20. (Arstph., Plut.,
Lcian., Ael. v. h. 9, 37; Sept. for iT^yp, for which also
in Joseph, antt. 3, 8, 10; Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 14.)*
τρυγάω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ΐτρΰγησα ; (fr. τρύγη [lit. ' dryness ']
fruit gathered ripe in autumn, harvest) ; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. several times for Ίϊ2, Πΐ>5, "li'D; to gather in ripe
fruits; to gather the harvest or vintage: as in the Grk.
writ., with ace. of the fruit gathered. Lk. vi. 44 ; Rev.
xiv. 18; or of the plant from which it is gathered. Rev.
xiv. 19.*
τρυγών, -όνος, ή, (fr. τρίζω to murmur, sigh, coo, of
doves; cf. -γογγύζω), a turtle-dove : Lk. ii. 24. (Arstph.,
Theocr., al. ; Ael. v. h. 1, 15 ; Sept. for τη.) *
τρνμαλιά, -ΰί , ή, (i. q. τρϊιμα, or τρύμη, f r. τρΰω to wear
away, perforate), a hole, lege of a needle] : Mk. x. 25,
and R G in Lk. xviii. 25. (Judg. xv. 11 ; Jer. xiii. 4 ;
xvi. 16 ; Sotad. in Plut. mor. p. 11 a. [i. e. de educ. puer.
§ 14]; Geop.)*
τρνιτημα, -ros, τό, (τρυπάω to bore), α hole, [eye of a
needle] : Mt. xix. 24 [here WH txt. τρί)/χα, q. v.]. (Ar-
stph., Plut., Geop., al.) *
Τρίφαινα, -ης, ή, (τρυφάω, q. v.), Trgphoena, a Chris-
tian woman : Ro. xvi. 12. [B. D. s. v. ; Bp. Lghtft. on
Phil. p. 1 75 sq.] *
τρυφάω, -ώ : 1 aor. (τρίφησα ; (τρνφή, q. v.) ; to live
delicately, live luxuriously, be given to a soft and luxuri-
ous life: Jas. v. 5. (Neh. ix. 25; Is. Ixvi. 11 ; Isocr.,
Eur., Xen., Plat., sqq.) [Comp. : iv -τρυφάω. Syn. cf.
Trench § liv.]*
τρυφή, -ijs, ή, (fr. βρΰτττω to break down, enervate;
pass, and mid. to live softly and delicately), softness,
effeminacy, luxurious living: Lk. vii. 25; 2 Pet. ii. 13.
(Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plato, sqq.; Sept.)*
Τρυφώσο, -ης, ή, (τρυφάω, q. v.), Trijphosa, a Chris-
tian woman : Ro. xvi. 1 2. [See reif. under ΎρΙφαινα.~\ '
Τρωάϊ, and (so L Τ AVH [see I, t and reff. in Pape,
Eigennamen, s. v.]) Ύρωάς, -oSot, ή, [on the art. with it
see W. § 5, b.], Troas, a city near the Hellespont, for-
merly called ' hvriyoveia Tp•, but by Lysimaclius 'Α.\(ζάν
hpeia ή Tp. in honor of Alexander the Great ; it flourished
under tlie Romans [and with its environs was raised by
Augustus to a colonia juris italici, 'the Troad ' ; cf.
Strab. 13, 1, 26 ; Plin. 5, 33] : Acts xvi. 8, 11 ; xx. 5 sq. ;
2Co. ii. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 13. [B. D. s. v.] *
Τρωγνλλιον (so Ptolem. 5, 2, 8), or ΎρωγΙλιον [(better
-yi\tov; see IK//. App. p. 159)] (so Strab. 14, ρ 036),
-ου, τό, Trogyllium, the name of a town and promontory
of Ionia, not f.ar from the island Samos, at the foot of
Mt. Mycale, between Ephesus and the mouth of the
river Maeander : Acts xx. 15 R G. [Cf. B. D. s. v.] •
τρώγω ; to gnaw, craunch, chew raw vegetables or fruits
(as nuts, almonds, etc.) : ΰγρωστιν, of mules, Hom. Od.
6, 90, and often in other writers of animals feeding;
also of men fr. Hdt. down (as ο-ΰκα. Hdt. 1, 71 ; βότρυς,
Arstph. eqq. 1077; blackberries. Barn. ep. 7, S [where
see Harnack, Cunningham, MUller] ; κρόμνον μ(τά Sel-
πνον, Xen. conv. 4, S) ; univ. to eat : absol. (δύο τρώγομη
τυΎχανω
632
Tvpto<;
άδίλφοί, we mess together, Polyb. 32, 9, 9) joined with
«riVfiv, Mt. xxiv. 38 (so also Dem. p. 40•.', 21 ; Plut. symp.
1, 1, 2; Ev. Xicod. c. 15, p. G40 ed. Thilo [p. I'ol ed.
Tdf.]) ; TOK «pTov, .In. xiii. IS (see Spros Ί and iaBiai h.)\
fji^iirativc'lv. -In. vi. 58: την σάρκα, the ' llcsh ' of Christ
(see σαρξ, 1), Jn. vi. hi, ."di S(i.*
τυγχάνω; Ί aor. ϊτυχου; pf. (Heb. viii. (i) τίτηχα [so
cod. BJ, and (so L TTi• mrg. WH cod. S) τίτυχα a later
and rarer form (which not a few incorrectly think is
everywhere to be regarded as a clerical error; B. 67
(50) ; Kuhner § 343 s. v. ; [Veitch s. v. ; Phryn. ed. Loh.
p. 50.) ; 11'//. App. p. 1 71]), in some te.xts also τιτύχηκα
(a form com. in the earlier writ. [RHlherfitnl, New Phryn.
p. 4.S3 S(i., and reff. as above]) ; a verb in freq. use fr.
Ilom. down ; •' est Lat. allingere et contiiir/ere ; Genu.
Ireffen, v. accus. i. q. elioas erlangen, neut. cs triffl sick."
Ast, Lex. Platon. s. v. ; hence 1. trans. a.
prop, to hit the murk (opp. to άμαρτάν€ΐν to miss the
mark), of one discharging a javelin or arrow, (Horn.,
Xen., Lcian.). b. trop. to reach, altniii, obtain, get,
become maattr of: with a gen. of the thing (W. 200
(188)), Lk. XX. 35 [W. 609 (566)]; Acts xxiv. 2 (3);
xxvi. 22; xxvii. 3; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Heb. viii. 6; xi.
35. 2. intrans. to hapjien, chance, fall out: el τίχυι
(if it xo fallout), it may be, perhaps, (freq. in prof, auth.),
I Co. xiv. 10, where see Meyer; or, considered in ref.
to the topic in hand, it may be i. q. to specif//, to take a
case, as, for example, 1 Co. xv. 37, (Vulg. in each pass,
ui puta ; [cf. Meyer u. s.]) ; τυχόν, adverbially, perhaps,
it mail be, 1 Co. .xvi. 6 (cf. B. § 145, Η ; [W. § 4.5, 8 X. 1] ;
see exx. fr. Grk. writ, in Passow s. v. II. 2 b. ; [L. and .S.
s. V. B. III. 2 ; Soph. Lex. s. v.]). to meet one ; hence ό
τυχών, he who meets one or presents himxel/' unsought, any
chance, orilinarg, common person, (see Passow s. v. ΙΓ. 2;
[L. andS. s. V. A. II. lb.; 5o/)/i. Lex. s. v.]) : oi τυχών, not
common, i. e. eminent, exceptional, [A. V. special], Acts
xix. 11; xxviii. 2, (3 Mace. iii. 7); to chance to be:
ημιθανη τυγχάνοντα, half dead as he happened to be, just
as he was, Lk. x. 30 KG. [Comp. : fV, intp-ev-, f'jri-,
πάρα-, συν- τν-γχύνω.~\ *
τνμττανίζω : (τίμπανον) ; 1. to beat the drum or
timbrel. 2. to torture with the tympanum, an in-
strument of punishment: €τνμπανίσθησαν (Vulg. ilistenii
sunt), Ileb. xi. 35 [R. V. u-ere tortured (with niarg. Or,
beaten to death)'] (Plut. mor. p. 60 a. ; joined with άνατκο-
'Χοπίζισθαι, Lcian. Jup. trag. 19) ; the tympanum seems
to have been a Λvheel-shaped instrument of torture, over
which criminals were stretched as though they were
skins, and then horribly beaten with clubs or thongs
[cf. our 'to break upon the wlieel': see Eng. Diets, s. v.
Wheel] ; cf. [Bleek on Heb. u. s.] ; Grimm on 2 Mace. vi.
19 .sq.•
τντηκώί, (fr. the adj. τυπικοί, and this fr. τύπος), adv.,
bi/ Will/ of example (pre/if/uratireig) : ταντα τυπικώς συνί-
βαινον «ei'voit, these things happened unto them as a
warning to posterity [R. V. by way of example], 1 Co. x.
II L Τ Tr WH. (Eccles. writ.) *
Twiros, -ου, ό, (τΰτιτω), fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down ;
1. the mark of a stroke or blow; print : τών ^α>ν, Jn. xx.
2.")•, 25'' [Λvhere LTTrmrg. τόπον], (Athen. 13 p. 585 c.
Tovs τύπους τών πληγών Ιδονσα). 2. a Jigurc formed
by a blijir or impression ; hence univ. a figure, image ; of
the images of the gods. Acts vii. 43 (Amos v. 26 ; Jo-
seph, autt. 1, 19, 11 ; 15, 9, 5). [Cf. κΰριαι τύπος θ(οϊι,
Barn. ep. 19, 7 ; ' Teaching' 4, 11.] Z. form: διδα-
χης, i. e. the teaching which embodies the sum and sub-
stance of religion and represents it to the mind, Ro. vi.
17; i. q. manner oj writing, the contents and form of a
letter, Acts xxiii. 25 (3 Mace. iii. 30). 4. an ex-
ample ; a. in the technical sense, viz. the pattern in
conformity to which a thing must be made : Acts vii. 44 ;
Heb. viii. 5, (Ex. xxv. 40). β. in an ethical sense,
a di.isuasice example, pattern of warning: jjlur. of ruin-
ous events which serve as admonitions or warnings to
others, 1 Co. .\.6, 11 RG; an example to he imitated: of
men worthy of imitation, Phil. iii. 1 7 ; with a gen. of the
pers. to whom the example is offered, 1 Tim. iv. 12; 1
Pet. V. 3 ; τι'ττον «αυτόν διδόναι τινί, 2 Th. iii. 9 ; yeveaOai
τύπον [τΰπουί R L mrg. WH mrg.; cf. W. § 27, 1 note]
Ttvt, 1 '111. i. 7 ; παρίχΐσθαι ίαυτον τύπον καΚών tpytav, to
show one's self an exanqile of good works. Tit. ii. 7. γ.
in a doctrinal sense, a type i. e. a person or thing prefigur-
ing a future (Messianic) person or thing; in this sense
Adam is called τυποτ τοϋ μ£'λλοντοί sc. Αδάμ, i. e. of
Jesus Christ, each of the two having exercised a pre-emi-
nent influence upon the human race (the former destruc-
tive, the latter saving), Ro. v. 14.*
τύΐΓτω ; \να\Λ. ΐτυπτον : pres. pass. inf. τύτττ^σβαι; fr.
Hom. down ; Se[)t. for Π3Π ; to strike, smite, heat (with
a staff, a whip, the fist, the hand, etc.) : τινά, Mt. xxiv.
40 ; Lk. xii. 45 : Acts xviii. 17 ; x.xi. 32: xxiii. 3 : το στόμα
Ttvos, .Vets xxiii. 2 ; τό πρόσωπον τίνος, Lk. xxii. 64 [here
L br. Τ Tr VCW om. the el.] , τίνα ΐπΧ [Tdf. fit] ttjv σια-
γόνα, Lk. vi. 20 ; €ts τ. κζφαλην τίνος, Mt. xxvii. 30 ; [rfjv
κ(φα\ήν Tivos, Mk. .XV. 19]; ίαυτων τα στήθη {hat. plaji-
gere ptrtora). of mourners, to smite their breasts, Lk.
xxiii. 4.S; also τ. «s το στήθυς, Lk. .xviii. 13 [but G LT
Tr WH om. cir]. (iod is said τύπτ^ιν to smite one on
whom he inflicts punitive evil. Acts xxiii. 3 (Ex. viii. 2 ;
2 S. xxiv. 17; Ezek. vii. 9; 2 Mace. iii. 39). to smite
metaph. i.e. to wound, disipiiet : t!jv συν(ί8ησίν τίνος, one's
conscience, 1 Co. Λ'ϋί. 12 (Ίνα τί τνπτ^ι σ( η καρ8Ια σου;
1 S. i. 8 ; Τ(ΐν Sf αχός οζύ κατά φρίνα τνψ€ βα^ί'ίαν, Horn.
Π. 19, 125; Καμβύσ€α eTvyj/e η άληθηιη τών λόγων, Hdt. 3,
64).•
Τίραννοϊ. -ου, ό, Tyrannus, an Ephesian in whose
school Paul taught the gospel, but of whom we have no
further knowledge [cf. B. D. s. v.] ; Acts xix. 9.*
τυρβάζω : pres. pass, τυρίίάζομαι : (τΰρβη, Lat. turba,
confusion; [cf. Curtius § 2.Ϊ0]) : [fr. Soph, down]; to
disturb, troutde: prop, τον ττηΧόν. .\rstph, vesp. 257 ; trop.
in pass, to be troidiled in mind, disquieted : nfpl πολλά,
Lk. X. 41 R C; (witli the same constr. in Arstph. pax
1007: μή άγαν τυρβάζου, Xilus epist. 2, 258).*
Topics, -ου, ό, ή. a Tyrian, inhabitant of Tyre : Acts
xii. 20. m.lt., al.)]•
Τύρος
633
υβριστής
Tvpos, -ου, ή, (Hebr. Ίΐ'Χ or Ίί" ; fr. Aram. Ίΐα a rock),
Tz/ce, a PhjEuician city on the Mediterranean, very an-
cient, l.irge, splendid, flourisliing in commerce, and pow-
erful by land and sea. In the time of Christ and the
apostles it was subject to the Romans, but continued to
possess considerable ivi'alth and prosperity down to
Λ. D. 1291. It is at present an obscure little place con-
taining some five thousand inhabitants, part ^lohamme-
dans part Christians, with a few Jews (cf. Badeker's
Palestine p. 425 sq.; [Murray's ditto p. 370 sq.]). It is
mentioned Acts .xju. 3, 7, and (in company with Sidon)
in Mt. xi. 21 sq. ; xv. 21 ; Lk. vi. 17; x. 13 sq. ; Mk. iii. 8 ;
vii. 24 (where Τ om. Trmrg. VVH br. κα\ Σιδώνοί), 31.
[BB. DD.]•
τυφλ05, -οϋ, 6, (τϋφω, to raise a smoke; hence prop,
'darkened by smoke'), fr. Ilom. down, Sept. for ly,
blind; a. prop.: Mt. ix. 27 sq.; xi. 5; Mk. viii. 22
sq. ; X. 46 ; Lk. vii. 21 sq. ; xiv. 13, 21 ; Jn. ix. 1 sq. 13 ;
X. 21, etc. b. as often in prof. auth. fr. Find, down,
mentally blind: Mt. .xv. 14; .xxiii, 17, 19, 24, 26; Jn.
ix. 39-41 ; Ro. ii. 19 ; 2 Pet. i. 9 ; Rev. iii. 17.
τυφλοί*, -ώ: 1 aor. ε'τνφλωσα ; pf. τ(τίφ\ωκα; fr. [Pind.
and] Hdt. down ; to blind, make blind ; in the N. T.
metaph. ίο blunt the mental discernment, darken the mind:
Jn. xii. 40 ; 1 Jn. ii. 11; τα νοήματα, 2 Co. iv. <, (njn
^υχήν τνφΧωθίίην, Plat. Phaedo p. 99 e.).'
τνψόω, -ώ : Pass., pf. τιτΰφωμαι ; 1 aor. ptcp. τνφωβίίί ;
(τΰφο!, smoke ; pride) ; prop, to raise a smoke, to wrup
in a mist ; used only metaph. 1. to make proud,
puff up with pride, render insolent ; pass, lo be puffed
■up ivith haughtiness or pride, 1 Tim. iii. 6 (Strab., Jo-
seph., Diog. Laert., al.). 2. to blind with pride or
conceit, to render foolish or stupid : 1 Tim. vi. 4 ; pf.
ptcp. beclouded, besotted, 2 Tim. iii. 4, (Dem., Aristot.,
Polyb., Plut., al.).•
τνφω: (τΰφοί, smoke); fr. Hdt. down; lo cause or
eniil smoke (Vhiut. Jumifco), raise a smoke; pass. (pres.
ptcp. τνφόμινο!) lo smoke (Vulg. /umi^o) : Mt. xii. 20.*
τνφωνικ05, -ή, -όν, (τνφών [cf. Chandler ed. 1 § 659],
a whirlwind, hurricane, typhoon), like a whirlwind,
temjicstuous : άνιμο!, -Acts x.wii. 14.*
TixiKos [so WH ; W. § 6, 1 1.] but RGL Τ Tr Ίνχι-
Kos (Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 30 ; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 103;
Chandler §266]), -ου, ό, Tijchicus, an Asiatic Christian,
friend and companion of the apostle Paul : Acts .\x. 4 ;
Eph. vi. 21; CoL iv. 7; 2 Tim.iv. 12; Tit. iii. 12. [See
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c. ; B. D. s. v.] •
τνχόν, see Tvy\ava>, 2.
[T, I» : on the use and the omission of the mark of diaeresis
with, see Tdf. Proleg. ρ lOS; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p.
136 sqq. ; cf. Scrivener, Collation of Cod. Sin. etc. 2d ed. p.
xxxviii.]
ϋακίνθινοΐ. -η, -ην, (υάκινθο!), of hyacinth, of the color
of hyacinth, i. e. of a red color horderinr/ on black
(Hesych. ϋακίνθινον ΰπομίλανίζον) : Rev. ix. 17 (Hom.,
Theocr., Lcian., al. ; Sept.).*
ύάκινβοϊ, -ου, 6, hyacinth, the name of a flower (Hom.
and other poets; Theophr.). also of α precious stone of
the same color, i. e. dark-blue verging towards black
[A. V. jacinth (so R. V. with mrg. snpphire) ; cf. R. D.
s. V. Jacinth : Riehm s. v. Edelsteine 9] (Pliilo, Joseph-
Galen, Heliod., al. : Plin. h. n. 37, 9, 41) : Rev. xxi. 20.*
«άλινοϊ, -η, -ov, (ϋαλοί, q. v.), in a fragment of Corinna
and occasionally in the Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. down, of
glass or transparent like (jlaxs, glassy : Rev. iv. 6 ; xv. 2.*
voXos, -ου, 6, [prob. allied w. Sjei, ifros (q. v.) ; hence
'rain-drop', Curtius §604; Vanicek p. 1046; but al.
make it of Egypt, origin (cf. L. and S. s. v.)], fr. Hdt.
([3 24] who writes ieXof ; [cf. W. 22]) down; 1.
any stone transparent like glass. 2. glass : Rev. xxi.
18, 21.•
υβρίζω ; 1 aor. ύβρισα ; Pass., 1 aor. ptcp. ΰβρισθιίί ;
1 fut. νβρισθήσομαι ; (νβρίί) ; fr. Hom. down ; 1.
intrans. to be insolent ; to behare insolently, wantonly,
outrageously. 2. trans, to act insolently and shame-
fully toicards one (so e\en Horn.), lo treat shamefidly,
[ct. W. § 32, 1 b. j3.] : Mt. xxii. 6 ; Lk. xviii. 32 ; Acts
xiv. 5 ; [1 Th. ii. 2] ; of one who injures another by
speaking evil of him, Lk. xi. 45. [Comp. : ϊν-υβρίζω.'] *
iiPpis, -ίωΓ, ή, (fr. vnip [(see Curtius p. 540) ; cf. Lat.
superlms, Eng. 'uppishness ']), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for
JINJ, H'SJ, ;ii;, etc.; a. insolence; impudence, pride,
haughtiness. b. a wrong .springing from insolence,
an injury, affront, insult [in Grk. usage the mental in-
jury and the wantonness of its infliction being prom-
inent ; cf. Cope on Aristot. rhet. 1, 12, 26 ; 2, 2, 5 ; see
ΰβριστί)!']: prop., plur. 2 Co. xii. 10 (He.*ych. νβρ(κ•
τραύματα. 6ν(ϊ8η) ; trop. injury inflicted by the violence of
a tempest : Acts xxvii. 10, 21, (την από τών όμβρων νβριν,
Joseph, antt. 3, 6, 4: δίΐ'σασα θαΚάττη! ϋβριν, Anthol. Τ,
291, 3 ; [cf. Pind. Pyth. 1, 140]).*
ΰβριστήί, -οϋ. ό. (υβρίζω), fr. Hom. doivn, an insolent
man, 'one who, uplifted with pride, either heaps insulting
language upon others or does them some shameful act of
υγιαίνω
634
υιο^
tcrong ' {Fritzsche, Ερ. ad Rom. i. p. 86 ; [cf. Trench, Syn.
§ xxix. : Schmidt ch. 177 ; Cnpe on Aristot. rhet. 2, 2, S
(see ΐιβρα)']) : Ro. i. 30; 1 Tim. i. 13.•
υγιαίνω; (ϋγιήί); fr. Ildt. down; to be sound, to be
well, 10 lie in good health : prop., Lk. v. 31 ; vii. 10; xv.
27 ; [3 Jn. 2] ; metaph. the phrase vyialvav ev Tjj πίστα.
[Β. § 133, 1 9] is used of one whose Christian opinions are
free from any admixture of error, Tit. i. 13 ; tj πίστα,
τη ayanr), τή ϋ-πομοντι, [cf. Β. u. s.], of one who keeps these
graces sound ami strong. Tit. ii. 2 ; η ίγιαίνουσα 8iba-
σ<α\ίιι, lie sound i.e. true and incorrupt doctrine, 1
Tim. i. 10 : 2 Tim. iv. 3 ; Tit. i. 9 ; ii. 1 ; also λόγοι ΰγιαί-
vovTfs (Philo de .\brah. § 38), 1 Tim. vi. 3 ; 2 Tim. i. 13,
(ϋ-γιαίνονσαι π(ρ\ θ(ων 8ύξαι καΐ άληθ(~ΐ!, Plut. de aud.
poet. c. 4).*
νγιήϊ, -if, ace. ύγιη (four times in tlie N. T., ,Ιη. v. 11,
15; vii. 23; Tit. ii. 8; for which vyia is more com. in
Attic fcf. Meisterhans p. 6ii]), fr. Hom. down, sound:
prop. [A. V. whole'], of a man who is sound in body, Mt.
XV. 31 [WH only in mrg., but Tr br. in mrg.] ; Acts iv.
10; γίνομαι, .In. v. 4 [R L], 6, 9, 14; ποκιν τίνα ίτγιή
flldt., Xen., Plat., al.), to make one whole i. e. restore
him to health, Jn. v. 1 1, 15 ; vii. 23 ; iytijs άπα etc. sound
and thus free from etc. (see από, I. 3 d.), Mk. v. 34 ; of
the members of the body, Mt. xii. 13; ilk. iii. 5 Rec. ;
Lk. vi. 10 Rec. ; metaph. λόγος ύγ. [Α. V. sound speech']
i. e. teaching which does not deviate from the truth (see
υγιαίι/ω), Tit. ii. 8 (in the Grk. writ., often eijuiv. to whole-
some, βΙ, wise : μίβος, II. 8, 524 ; \oyos ουκ ΰγιης, Ildt. 1,
8 ; see other exx. in Passow s. v. 2 ; [L. and S. s. v. II.
2 and 3]).*
ΰγρό$, -ά, -όν, (ίω to moisten ; [but al. fr. a different
Γ. meaning 'to moisten', fr. which also Lat. umor,
umidus ; cf. Vanicek p. 8(Ϊ7; Curtius § 158]), fr. Hom.
down, damp, moist, wet ; opp. to ξηρός (q. v.), full of sap,
green: ξύλο», Lk. xxiii. 31 (for 3bi sappy, in Job viii.
16)•
vSpia, -ας, ή, (ΰδωρ), α vessel for holding water; a water-
far, ica/er-pot : Jn. ii. G sq. ; iv. 28. ( Arstph., Athen., al. ;
Sept. for -[2. [Cf. Rutherford, iTew Phryn. p. 23.]) *
ΰδροποτίω, -ω ; {ί^ροπότης) ; to drink water, [he a
drinker of water: W. 498 (4t!4)] : 1 Tim. v. 23. (Hdt,
1, 71 ; Xen., Plat., Lcian., Athen., al.; Ael. v. h. 2, 38.)*
ΰδρωπικίς, -η, -όν, (ΰδρωψ, the dropsy, i. e. internal
water), dropsical, suffering from drops//: Lk. xiv. 2.
(Hipper., [Aristot.], Polyb. 13, 2, 2; [al.].) •
ϋ8ωρ. (ΰω [but cf. Curtius § 300]), gen. ν8ατος, τό, fr.
Hom. down, Hebr. a^^p,^cater: of the water in rivers,
Jit. iii. 16; Rev. xvi. 12; in wells, Jn. iv. 7 ; in fountains,
Jas. iii. 12; Rev. viii. 10: xvi. 4 ; in pools, Jn. v. 3 sq.
[R L], 7 ; of the water of the deluge, 1 Pet. iii. 20 ; 2 Pet.
iii. 6 [\V. 604 sq. (ot;2)] ; of water in any of earth's re-
positories, Rev. viii. lOsq. ; xi. 6; ό άγγελος των υδάτων.
Rev. xvi. 5 ; of water as a primary element, out of and
through which the world that was before the deluge
arose and was compacted, 2 Pet. iii. 5. plur. τα ΰδατα,
of the waves of the Lake of Galilee, Mt. xiv. 28 sq. ; (so
also the sing, το ΰδωρ in Lk. viii. 25) ; of the waves of
the sea. Rev. i. 15; xiv. 2, (on both these pass, see φωνή,
1) ; πολλά vhaTa, many springs or fountains, Jn. iii. 23 ;
fig. used of many peoples, Rev. xvii. 1, as the seer him-
self explains it in vs. 15, cf. Xah. ii. 8 ; of a quantitv of
water Ukened to a river, Rev. xii. 15; of a definite quan-
tity of water drawn for drinking, Jn. ii. 7 ; ποτήριον ϋ&α-
τος, Mk. ix. 41 ; for washing, Mt. xxvii. 24 ; Lk. vii. 44 ;
.In. xiii. 5 : Heb. x. 22 (23) ; to λουτρό» τοΟ ϋ^ατος, of
baptism, Eph. v. 26 [cf. W. 138 (130)]; κεράμων iSaros,
Mk. xiv. 13; Lk. xxii. 10. in opp. to other things,
whether elements or liquids: opp. to τώ πνήματι κ- πνρί
[cf. Β. § 133, 19; W. 217 (204), 412 (384)], Mt. iii. 11 ;
Lk. iii. 16; to jri/eu^oTt alone, .In. i. 26, 31, 33 ; Acts i. 5,
(in all these pass, tlie water of baptism is intended); to
τω πυρί alone, Mt. x\ ii. Ih ; Mk. ix. 22 ; to τώ οίκω, Jn. ii.
9; iv. 4t; ; to τω αΐματι, .In. .xix. 34 ; Heb. ix. 19; 1 Jn.
v. 6, 8. AUegorically, that which refreshes and keeps
alive the soul is likened to water, viz. the Spirit and truth
of God, Jn. iv. 14 sq. {νδωρ σοφίας. Sir. xv. 3) ; on the
e.xpressions ΰΒωρ ζων, το νδωρ τ. ζωής. ζωσαι πηγαΧ υδά-
των, see ^άω. II. a. and ζωή, 2 b. p. 274'.
wTos, -ov, ό, (ίω to rain), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for
Dtyj and "Ίρρ, rain : Acts xiv. 1 7 ; x.xviii. 2 ; Heb. vi. 7 ;
.Tas. V. 7 (ivhere L TTr WH ora. ifTOv: on this pass, see
όψιμος and πρώιμος) ; ibid. 18; Rev. xi. 6.*
υίοθ€σ-£α, -ας, η, (fr. νίός and θίσις, cf. όροθΐσία, νομο-
θεσία: in prof. auth. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down we find
ifTos υιός or βιτος παις, an adopted son), adoption, adop-
tion as sons (Vulg. adoplio filiorum) : [Diod. 1. 31 § 27, 5
(vol. x. 31, 13 Dind.)]; Diog. Laert. 4, 53 ; Inscrr. In
the N. T. it is used to denote a. that relationship
which God was pleased to establish between himself and
the Israelites in preference to all other nations (see νιος
ToO θ(οϋ, 4 init.) : Ro. ix. 4. b. the nature and
condition of the true disciples of Christ, who by receiv-
ing' the Spirit of God into their souls become the sons
of God (see uiof τοϋ θιοΰ, 4): Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 5;
Eph. i. 5 ; it also includes the blessed state looked for
in the future life after the visible return of Christ from
heaven; hence άπεκ$(\(σθαι νΐηθισίαν, to wait for adop-
tion, i. e. the consummate condition of the sons of God,
which will render it evident that they are the sons of
God, Ro. viii. 23, cf. 19.'
vtos, -oC, ό. fr. Horn, down, Sept. for [3 and Chald. 13,
a son (male offspring) ; 1. prop. a. rarely of
the young of animals: Mt. xxi. 5 (Ps. xxviii. (xxix.) 1 ;
Sir. xxxviii. 25) ; generally of the offspring of men, and
in the restricted sense, male issue {one begotten btj a father
and born of a mother) : Mt. x. 37 ; Lk. i. 13 ; [xiv. 5 1, Τ
Tr WH] ; Acts vii. 29 ; Gal. iv. 22, etc. ; ό νΙός τίνος, Mt.
vii. 9 ; Mk. ix. 17 ; Lk. iii. 2 ; Jn. i. 42 (43), and very
often, as in (irk. writ., υιός is often to be supplied by
the reader [W. § 30, 3 p. 593 (351)] : as τον τοί Ζφεδαίου,
Mt. iv. 21 ; Mk. i. 19. plur. ν\οί τίνος, Mt. xx. 20 sq. ;
Lk. V. 10; .Tn. iv. 12; Actt ii. 17; Heb. xi. 21, etc. with
the addition of an adj., as πρωτο'τοκοί, Mt. i. 25, [R G] ;
Lk. ii. 7 ; μονογενής, Lk. vii. 1 2. oi υιοί, genuine sons,
are distinguished fr. oi coflo» in Heb. xii. 8. i. q. τίκνοψ
11409
635
νιοι
with SpoTjv added, a man child [B. 80 (70)], Rev. xii. 5;
of one (actually or to be) regarded as a son, although
properly not one, Jn. xix. 26; Acts vii. 21; Heb. xi. 24;
in kindly address, Heb. xii. 5 fr. Prov. iii. 11 (see tckvov,
a. j3.). b. in a wider sense (like θυγάτηρ, tckvov), a
de.icenilani, one of the poxlerity of any one : twos, ilt. i.
20; ό νώί Ααυΐδ, of the Messiah, Mt. xxii. 42, 45 ; Mk.
xii. 35, 37 ; Lk. xx. 41, 44; of Jesus the Messiah, Mt. ix.
27; xii. 23; XV. 22; XX. 30 sq.; xxi.9,15: Mk.x.47sq.;
Lk. xviii. 38 sq. plur. υιοί Tti/of, Mt. .\xiii. 31 ; Heb. vii.
δ ; υιοί Ισμαήλ, Israelites l_lke children of Israel~\, Mt.
xxvii. 9 ; Acts ix. 15 ; x. 36 ; 2 Co. iii. 7, 13 ; Heb. xi.
21 S(|.; Rev. ii. 14; vii. 4 ; xxi. 12, (see Ισραήλ) ; υιοί
Άβμαάμ, sons of Abraham, is trop. applied to those who
by their faith in Christ are akin to Abraham, Gal. iii.
7. 2. trop. and ace. to the Hebr. mode of speech
[W. 33 (32)], «ίόί with the gen. of a person is used
of one who depends on another or is his follower : o'l υιοί
of teachers, i. q. pupils (see tckvov, h. β. [cf. Iren. haer.
4, 41, 2 qui enim ab aliquo edoctus est, verbo f iii us do-
centis dicitur, et ille eius pater]), Mt. xii. 27; Lk. xi.
19; ToC πονηρού, who in thought and action are prompted
by the evil one and obey him, Mt. xiii. 38 ; υίοί δια/3όλου.
Acts xiii. 10; with the gen. of a thing, one who is
connected with or belong.s to a thing by any kind of
close relationship [W. § 34, 3 N. 2 ; B. § 132, 10] : «ίοί
Tuv ννμφώ'Ό! (see ημφών), Mt. ix. 15; Mk. ii. 19; Lk.
V. 34, (t^s άκρας, the garrison of the citadel, 1 Mace. iv.
2; in Ossian 'a son of the hill' i. e. 'a hunter', 'a son of
the sea' i. e. 'a sailor'; cf. Jen. Lit. Zeit. for 183(3 No.
58 p. 462 sq.); τοϋ awuos τούτον, those whose character
belongs to this age [is ' worldly '], Lk. xvi. 8 ; xx. 34 ;
της OTrfifleins, i. e. aneiBfis, Eph. ii. 2 ; v. 6 ; Col. iii. 6
[here Τ Tr WH om. L br. the cl.], (auoptat, Ps. lx.xxviji.
(Ixxxix.) 23; της ίπ€ρηφαν!ας, 1 Mace. ii. 47); βμοντης,
who resemble thunder, thundering, (see Boawpyes), Mk.
iii. 1 7 ; τοϋ φωτός, instructed in evangelical truth and
devotedly obedient to it, Lk. xvi. 8 ; Jn. xii. 36 ; with
και της ημίρας added, 1 Th. v. 5 ; της αναστάσεως, sharers
in the resurrection, Lk. .xx. 36 ; τταρηκΚήσιως, .\cts iv.
3il ; one to whom any thing belongs : as uiol των προφη-
τών κ. της διαθήκης, those to whom the prophetic and
covenant promises belong. Acts iii. 25; for whom a thing
is destined, as vio'i ttjs βασιλιίας, Alt. viii. 12; xiii. 38;
της άπωλί/αΓ, .In. xvii. 12; 2 Th. ii. 3 ; one who is worthy
of a thing, as -γείννης, A!t. xxiii. 15 ; (Ιμήνης. Lk. x. 6,
(Oa'arov, 1 S. XX. 31 , 2 S. xii. 5; ηΐ3Π ;3, Sept. άξιος
ιτ\η-/ων. Dent. XXV. 2). [Syn. see τίκνον.~\
ν'ιις τοϋ άι/^μωνου, Sept. for DIN \2, Chald. c;jX n3,
son of man; it is 1. prop, a periphrasis for 'man',
esp. com. in the poet. bks. of the O. T., and usuallv car-
rying with it a suggestion of weakness and mortality:
Num. xxiii. 19; Job xvi. 21 ; xxv. 6 ; Ps. viii. 5; Is. Ii.
12 ; Sir. xvii. 30 (25), etc. ; often in Ezekiel, where God
addresses the prophet by this name, as ii. 1, 3; iii. 1 (ii.
10), etc. ; plur. D"1Xn 'J3 (because D"1X wants the plur.),
uioi των ανθρώπων, Gen. xi. 5 ; 1 .S. xxvi. 19: Ps. x. (xi.)
4 ; Prov. viii. 31, etc. So in the N. T. : Mk. iii. 28 ; Eph.
iii. 5, (Sap. ix. G) ; sing, όμοω; via /α-θρ. \lil:e unto a son
of man], of Christ in the apocalyptic vision, Rev. i. 13
[here υιοί/ Τ WH txt.] ; xiv. 14 [υίόν Τ WH], (after Dan.
vii. 13). 2. In Dan. vii. 13 sq., cf. 18, 22, 27, the
appellation son of man (njX "^a) symbolically denotes
the fifth kingdom, universal and Messianic; and by
this term its humanilij is indicated in contrast with the
barbarity and ferocity of the four preceding kingdoms
(the Babylonian, the Median, the Persian, the Macedo-
nian) typified under the form of beasts (vs. 2 sqq.).
But in the book of Enoch (written towards the close of
the 2d cent, before Christ [but cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) ;
Lipsius in Diet, of Chris. Biog. s. v. ; Dillmann in Her-
zog (ed. 2, vol. xii. p. 350 sq.) ; Schodde, Book of Enoch,
p. 20 sqq.]) the name 'son of man' is employed to desig-
nate the ρ e r s ο η of the Messiah : 46, 2 sq. ; 48, 2 ; 6 2, 7.
9.14; 63,11; 69, 26sq.; 70,1; 71,17. (The chapters
in which the name occurs are the work, if not of the
first author of the book (as Ewald and Dillmann think
[but see B. D. Am. ed. p. 740"; and Herzog as above p.
351]), at least ofaJewish writer (cf. ScliUrer, Xeutest.
Zeitgesch. § 32 V. 2 p. 626), certainly not (as Hilgen-
feld, Volkmar, Keira, and others imagine) of a Chris-
tian interpolator.) In the language of the Jews in .In.
xii. 34 the titles Χριστός and νιος τον ανθρώπον are used
as synonyms. 3. The title ό νιος τοϋ ανθρώπον, the
Son of Man, is used by Jesus of himself (speaking in
the third person) in Mt. viii. 20; ix. 6; x. 23; xi. 19;
xii. 8,32, 40; .xiii.37,41; .xvi. 13, 27 sq. ; xvii. 9, 12, 22;
.xviii. 11 Rec. ; xix. 28 ; xx. 18, 28 ; xxiv. 27, 30, 37, 39,
44; xxiv. 30 (twice) ; xxv. 13 Rec., 31 ; xxvi. 2, 24, 45,
64 ; Mk. ii. 10, 28 ; viii. 31, 38 ; ix. 9, 12, 31 ; x. 33, 45;
xiii. 26; xiv.21, 41, 62; Lk. v. 24 ; vi.5, 22; vii.34; i.x.
22, 26, 44, 56 Rec, 58 ; xi. 30; xii. 8, 10, 40 ; xvii. 22,
24, 26, 30; xviii. 8, 31 ; xix. 10; xxi. 27, 36; .xxii. 22,
48,69; xxiv. 7; Jn.i. 51(52); iii. 13sq.; vi. 27, 53, 62;
viii. 28; xii. 23, 34 ; xiii. 31, (once without the article,
Jn. V. 27), doubtless in order that (by recalling Dan. vii.
13sq. — not, as some suppose, Ps. viii. 5) he might thus
intimate his Messiahship (as is plain from such pass, as
οψεσθε τ. νί. τ. άνθρ- ■ . . (ρχόμινον (ΤΓΙ των νίφΐ•
\ΰ>ν τον ουρανοί, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. .xiv. 62, cf. Dan.
vii. 13 ; τον vi, τ. άνθρ, €ρχόμ(νον iv ttj βασιΧεία αντην^
Mt. xvi. 28 ; όταν καθίση ό νι• r. άνθρ. ctti θρόνον δόξης
αίτοΐι, I\lt. xix. 28) ; and also (as appears to be the
case at least fr. Mk. ii. 28, where ό νιος την άνθρωπου
stands in emphatic antithesis to the repeated 6 άνθρωπος
preceding), that he might designate himself as the head
of the human race, the man itar' ϊξοχήν, the one who
both furnished the pattern of the perfect man and acted
on behalf of all mankind. Christ seems to have pre-
ferred this to the other Messianic titles, because bv its
lowliness it was least suited to foster the expectation of
an earthly Messiah in royal splendor. There are no
traces of the application of the name to Jesus in the
apostolic age except in the speech of Stephen, Acts vii.
56, and that of .lames, the brother of Jesiis, in a frag-
ment from Hegesippus given in Eus. h. e. 2, 23 (25), 13,
νιος
636
Ύμΐναιο'ί
each being a reminiscence of the words of Jesus in Mt.
.\\vi.64,(to whifli may be added, fr. the apostolic fathers,
Ignat. ad Eplies. 20, 2 eV Ίησοϋ Χριστώ τω κατά σάρκα ex
yevovs ΔανιΒ, τψ υίω ανθρώπου καΙ νΐώ θ(ον). Uhis dis-
use was owing no doubt to tlie fact tliat tlie term did not
seem to be iiuite congruous willi the divine nature and
celestial majesty of Clirist; hence in Barn. ep. 12, 10 we
read, Ίησοϋ: ονχ uios ανθρώπου (i• e. like Joshua), ΰλλ
v'wsToL θίοϋ [cf. llarnack's note on tlie pass.]. On this
title, see esp. Hollzmnnn. in Ililgenfeld's Zeitschr. fUr
wissenschaftl. Theol., 186Γ>, p. 212 sqij. ; Keim ii. p. 6.5
sqfi. [(Kng. trans, vol. iii. p. TOsqq.) ; Iinmei; Theol. d.
N. T. p. 105 sqq. ; Westcoll, Cora, on Jn. p. 33 sq. ; and
other reff. in Meyer on Mt. viii. 20 ; B. D. Am. cd. s. v.
Son of Man].•
uiot ToO θfoϋ, son of Goi! ; 1. in a physical
sense, in various applications: originating by direct
creation, not begotten by man, — as the first man
Adam, Lk. iii. 38 ; Jesus, begotten of the Holy Ghost
without the intervention of a human father, Lk. i. 3.5 ;
in a heathen sense, as uttered by the Roman centurion
of Jesus, a ' demigod ' or ' hero ', Mt. xxvii. 54 ; Mk. .xv.
39. 2. in a metaphysical sense, in various ap-
plications : plur., of men, vrlio although the issue of hu-
man parents yet could not come into being without the
volition of God, the primary author of all things, Ileb.
ii. 10, cf. vss. 1 1, 13 ; of men as partaking of immortal life
after the resurrection, and thus becoming more closely
related to God, Lk. xx. 3(j ; of angels, as beings superior
to men, and more closely akin to God, Deut. xxxii. 43 ;
for D'rfX "ja in Sept. of Gen. vi. 2, 4 ; Ps. xxviii. (xxix.)
1 ; Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 7 (a phrase which in Job i. 6; ii-
1 ; xx.xviii. 7 is translated ayye\oi θ(οϋ) ; in the highest
sense Jesus Christ is called ό υίύί τοϋ θfoϋ as of a nature
superhuman and closest to God : Ro. i. 4 ; viii. 3 ; Gal.
iv. 4 ; and esp. in the Ep. to the Hub., i. 2 (1), 5, 8; iii. 6 ;
iv. 14 ; V. 5, 8 ; vi. 6 : vii. 3, 28 ; x. 29. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Son
of God, and reff. in Am. ed.] 3. in a theocratic
sense: of kings and magistrates, as vicegerents of God
the supreme ruler, 2 S. vii. 14; Ps. ii. 7; m'oi υψίστου,
Ps. Ixxxi. (Ixxxii.) (i; πρωτιΊτοκο! (sc. τοΰ θιοΰ), of the
king of Israel, Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 28. In accordance
with Ps. ii. 7 and 2 S. vii. 14, the .Jews called the Mes-
siah ό uios ToD θ(οΰ ])re-eminently, as the supreme repre-
sentative of (iod, and ecpiipped for his office with the
fulness of the Holy Spirit, i. e. endued with divine
power beyond any of the sons of men, Enoch 1 05, 2. In
the N. T. it is used of Jesus — in the utterances of the
devil, Mt. iv. 3, 6 ; Lk. iv. 3,9; in passages where Jesus
is addressed by this title by others, Mt. viii. 29 ; xiv. 33;
xxvii. 40, 43; Mk. iii. 11; v. 7; Lk. iv. 41; viii. 28;
xxii. 70; Jn.xix. 7; Acts viii. 3 7 Rec. ; ix. 20 ; xiii. 33 ;
υίοί τυΰ ύλ|/ιστου. Lk. i. 32; in the language of .Tesiis
concerning himself, Mt. xxviii. 19; Jn. ix. 35; x. 36, cf.
Mt. xxi. 37 sq. ; Mk. xii. 6 ; besides, in Rev. ii. 18 ; S υΐ
τ. θ; (ό) βασί\(ίΐ! τοΰ ΊσραηΧ, .Τη. i. 49 (50) : ό Χριστοί ό
υΐ. τ. θ., Mt. xxvi. 63; Jn. xi. 27; Ίησοίί Χριστό? υί. τ.
[LTrWH marg. cm. roi] θ. Mk. i. 1 [here Τ \VH txt. om.
(see Π'//. App. p. 23)J ; ό Χριστοί 6 ulos τοϋ (ίλογητοϋ,
.Mk. .siv. IJI ; Λvith the added etiiical idea of one who
enjoys intimate intercourse with God : ό Χριστο! 6 vi. τ.
θ(οϋ ζώντο!, Mt. .xvi. l(i, and Rec. in Jn. vi. 69. in the
solemn utterances of (iod concerning Jesus : ό υίόί μου
ό αγαπητοί, Mt. iii. 1 Γ ; xvii. 5 ; Mk. i. 1 1 ; ix. 7 ; Lk. iii.
22 ; ix. 35 [R G L txt.] ; 2 Pet. i. 1 7, cf. Mt. ii. 15. 4.
in an ethical sense with very various reference; i/ioxe
whom God enletms as sons, whom he loves, ])iOtects and
benefits above others: so of the .lews, Deut. xiv. I ; .Sa|>.
xii. 19 sqq.; xviii. 4 ; v'lui καϊ θυγατ('ρ(ί τοί; θ(θΰ, Is. xliii.
6 ; Sap. ix. 7 ; πρωτότοκο: τοΰ θ(οΰ, Ex. iv. 22 ; in the
N. T. of Christians, Ro. ix. 26 ; Rev. xxi. 7 ; lliose whose
characler God, as a loving father, shapes by chaslisemeni,
Heb. xii. 5-8 ; those who revere God as their filher, tlie
j)ious wor.shippers of God, .Sap. ii. 13 [here nals κυρίου],
18; Ihiisi' irho in character and life resemble God (.Sir. iv.
10 υ'ιοϊ υψίστου \ [cf. Epict. dissert. 1, 9, 6]) : Mt. v. 9,
45 ; uiol υψίστου, Lk. vi. 35 ; υίοι »c θυγατίρα, spoken of
Christians, 2 Co. vi. 18; those irlio are i/orerned bij tin-
Spirit of God, Ro. viii. 14 {όσοι πν^νματι θΐοΰ dyovrai, οντοι
υίοι fiVt ToO θ(οΰ), repose the same calm and joyful trust
in God which children do in their parents, Ro. viii. 14
sqq.; Gal. iii. 26; iv. 6 s([., and hereafter in the blessed-
ness and glory of the life eternal will openly wear this dig-
nity of sons of God, Ro. viii. 1 9 (άποκάλυψ-ΐΓ τώΐ' υιών toS
θ^οΰ), cf. 1 .In. iii. 2, (see τϊκνυν, b. y. [and reff.]). pri-
emiiiently of Jesus, as enjoijiny tlie supreme lore of God,
united to him in affectionate intimact), privy to his saving
counsels, obedient to the Father's will in all his acts : Mt.
xi. 27; Lk. x. 22; .In. iii. 35 sq. ; v. 19 sq. In many
passages of the writings of John and of Paul, this ethi-
cal sense so blends with the metaphysical and the theo-
cratic, that it is often very difficult to decide which of
these elements is predominant in a particular case : Jn.
i. 34 ; iii. 1 7 ; v. 21-23, 25 sip ; vi. 40 ; viii. 35 sq. ; xi. 4 ;
.xiv. 13 ; xvii. 1 ; 1 Jn. i. 3, 7 ; ii. 22-24 ; iii. 8, 23 ; iv. 10,
14 sq. ; v. 5, 9-1 3, 20 ; 2 Jn. 3, 9 ; Ro. i. 3, 9 ; v. 10 ; viii.
3, 29, 32 ; 1 Co. i. 9 ; xv. 28 ; 2 Co. i. 19 ; Gal. i. 16 : ii.
20; Eph. iv. 13; 1 Th. i. 10; ό vibs τήι αγάπη: αΰτοΰ
(i. e. God's), Col. i. 13; ό Χρίστο: 6 vi τ. θ. Jn. xx. 'ΛΙ ; ό
μονογ(νη: νΐ, Jn. i. 18 [here TrWH μονογ. θιά:, L mrg.
ό μ. θ. (see μονογ. and reff.)] ; iii. 18; 6 υί- τ. θ ό μονογ.,
iii. 16: 1 Jn. iv. 9, (see μονογενή:). It can hardly be
doubted that a reverent regard for the transcendent
difference which separates Christ from all those who by
his grace are exalted to the dignity of sons of (Jod led
John always to call Christians τίκνα τοΰ θ(οΰ, not as
Paul does νίοί and τίκνα τοΟ θ(ον indiscriminately ; the
like reverence moved Luther to translate the plur. υίοι
τ. θ. everywhere by Kinder Goltes ; [cf., however, τίκνον,
b. y. and reff.]. This appellation is not found in 2
Th., Phil., Pliilem., the Pastoral Epp., nor in 1 Pet. or in
the Ep. of .Tames.*
ϋλη, -τ;γ, ή, II fore.ll, a wood; felled wood, fuel: Jas. iii.
5. (From Hom. down ; Sejit.) *
vp^is, see συ.
Ύμί'ναιοί [on its accent cf. \V. § 6, 1 L ; Chandler
v/^e'e/jo?
637
υττακοή
§ 2SS], -ου, 6, CYW". -*'^γ> *ι t^ie god of marriage), flj/-
menceus, a heretic, one of the opponents of the apostle
Paul : 1 Tim. i. 20 ; 2 Tim. ii. 1 7. [B. D. s. v.] *
vrircpos, -a, -ok, (i/itis), possess, pron. of the 2d pers.
plur., l/oicr, yours ; a. possessed by you : with sub-
stantives, Jn. viii. 17 ; 2 Co. viii. 8 [Rec."'^ ήμ""•] ; ^^=^1•
vi. 1 3 ; neut. TO ΰμ• substantively, opp. to το αλλότριοι/,
Lk. xvi. 12 [(WH txt. TO ήμ^τ.) ; cf. W. § 61, 3 a.], b. al-
lotted to you : ίμ.. σωτηρία, Acts xxvii. 34 ; τό ίμ. iXeos,
So. zi. 31 ; β Kotpas ό ίμίτ., the time appointed, oppor-
Λΐηβ, for you, Jn. vii. 6 ; as a predicate, νμιτίρα iarlv ή
βασιλίΐα τοϋ 6eoi, Lk. vi. 20. C. j)roceei/iii//fro7n you :
τον ΰμίτ. sc. \ayou, Jn. XV. 20 ; [1 Co. xvi. 1 7 L Τ Tr ^VII
txt.]. d. objectively (see «/ioy, c. β. ; [W. § 22, 7 ; B.
§ 132, 3]) : νμρτίρα (Rec." ή /ifT.) κανχησκ, glorying in
you, 1 Co. XV. 31. [On the use of tlie word in the N. T.
cf. B. §127,21.]•
ΰμ.νεω, -ω: impf. νμνουν; fut. υμνήσω; 1 aor. ptcp.
ύμνησα! ; (υμνοί) ; fr. Hes. down ; Sept. often for SSn,
ΠΤίΠ ΤΕ^Π "1ΌΙ ; 1• trans, to sing the praise of,
sing hymns to: τινά, Acts xvi. 25; Heb, ii. 12. 2.
intrans. to sing a hymn, to sing : Mt. xxvi. 30 ; Mk. xiv.
26, (in both pass, of the singing of the paschal hymns ;
these were Pss. cxiii.-cxviii. and Ps. cxxxvi., which the
Jews call the ' great ITallel ', [but see Ginshurg in Kitto
s. V. Hallel; Edersheim, The Temple etc. p. 191 sq. ;
Buxtorf (ed. Fischer) p. 314 sq.]) ; Ps. Ixiv. (Ixv.) 13
(14); 1 Mace. -xiii. 47.*
ϋ'μνοϊ, -ου, ό, in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down, a song in
praise of gods, heroes, conquerors, [cf. Trench as below,
p. 297], but in the Scriptures of God; a sacred song,
hymn : plur., Eph. v. 19 ; Col. iii. 16. (1 Mace. iv. 33 ;
2 Mace. i. 30 ; x. 7 ; [Jud. xvi. 13], etc. ; of the Psalms
of David, Joseph, antt. 7, 12, 3; for nbnjn, Ps. xxxix. (xl.)
4; Ixiv. (Ixv.) 2; for Ύψ, Is. xlii. lo'.)•
[.Sys. ΰμνο5, ψαλμό:, φδή: ^ΐδή is the generic terra;
ψαλμ and ϋμν. are specific, the former designating a song
which took its general character from the O. T. ' Psalms ' (al-
though not restricted to them, see 1 Co. xiv. 15, 26), the latter
a song of praise. " While the leading idea of ψολμ. is a
musical accompaniment, and that of ΰμν. praise to God,
φΒ-ή is the general word for a song, whether accompanied or
unaccompanied, whether of praise or on any other subject.
Thus it was quite possible for the same song to be at once
ψαλμοί, S^cosand φΗ" (Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 16). The
words occur together in Col. iii. 16 and Eph. v. 19. See
Trench, Syn. § Ixxviii ]
ύτΓ-ά-γω ; impf. νπηγον ; 1. trans, to lead under,
bring under, ( Lat. suMucere) ; so in various applications
in the Grk. writ. fr. llom. down ; once in the Scriptures,
ίπηγαγ( κύριος την θάλασσαν, ίοΓ Ϊ'71Π, ^β caused to re-
cede, drove back, the sea, Ex. xiv. 21. 2. in the
N. T. always intrans. (less freq. so in prof. auth. fr. Hdt.
down), (Lat. se subducere) to withdraw one's self, to go
away, depart, [cf. άγω, 4 ; and see B. 204 (1 77)] : absol.,
irik. vi. 33 ; Lk. viii. 42 (where L Trmrg. πορηι^σθαί) ;
xvii. 14 ; Jn. viii. 21 ; xiv. 5, 28, (Tob. xii. 5) ; οί «ρχό-
μίνΜ και οί wrayower, coming and going, Mk. vi. 31 ;
uroyct It. πωΚΐΐ, Mt. xiii. 44 ; νιτηγο» κ. (π'ιστΐυον, Jn. xii.
11 ; \ΐνα ίητάγηη κ. Kaptr6v φίρητ€, Jn. χν. 16] ; άφίημΐ
τίνα ΰπάγίΐν, to permit one to depart freely wherever he
wishes, Jn. xi. 44 ; xviii. 8 ; vnayt is used by one in
dismissing another: Mt. [iv. 10 RTTr WH]; viii. 13;
.XX. 14 ; Mk. [ii. 9 Tdf.] ; vii. 29 ; x. 52 ; with eh €ΐρήνη*
added, Mk. v. 34 ; ίπάγ€τ( (v (ΐρήντ), Jas. ii. 16 ; or in
sending one somewhere to do something, Lk. x. 3 ; plur.
Mt. viii. 32 ; with oriental circumstantiality (see άνί-
στι^μι, II. 1 c.) Srraye is prefixed to the imperatives of
other verbs: Mt. v. 24; viii. 4; [xviii. 15 GLTTrWH];
xix. 21; .xxi. 28; xxvii. G5; xxviii. 10; Mk. i. 44; x. 21 ;
xvi. 7; Jn. iv. 16; ix. 7 ; Rev. x. 8; with και inserted,
Mt. xviii. 15 Rec. ; Mk. vi. 38 [T Tr WH om. Tr br. και] ;
Rev. xvi. 1. Particularly, υπάγω is used to denote the
final departure of one who ceases to be another's com-
panion or attendant, Jn. vi. 67 ; euphemistically, of one
who departs from life, Mt. xxvi. 24 , Jlk. xiv. 21. with
designations of place : ποϋ (for jrol [AV. § 54, 7 ; B. 71
(62)]), Jn. xii. 35 ; xiv. 5 ; xvi. 5 ; 1 Jn. ii. 11 ; opp. to
ϊρχίσθαι, to come, Jn. iii. 8; viii. 14 ; οπού (for οποί [W.
and B. u. s.]), Jn. viii. 21 sq. ; xiii. 33, 36 ; xiv. 4 ; Rev.
.xiv. 4 ; e'«I, Jn. xi. 8 ; npos tow πεμψαντά μ€, irpos τ6»
πατίρα, πρΰί τον θ(όν, to depart (from earth) to the father
(in heaven) is used by Jesus of himself, .Tn. vii. 33 ; xiii.
3 ; xvi. 5, 10, 16 [T Tr WO ora. L br. the cl.], 17 ; foil.
by 6Ϊί with an ace. of the place, Mt. ix. 6; xx. 4, 7; Mk.
ii. 11 ; -xi. 2 ; xiv. 13 ; Lk. xix. 30 ; Jn. vi. 21 [cf. B. 283
(243)]; vii. 3; ix. 11; xi. 31; cir αϊχμσλωσίαΐ'. Rev. xiii.
10; els άπώ\eιav, Rev. xvii. 8, 11 ; foil, by els w. an ace.
of the place and irpas τίνα, Mt. xxvi. 18; Mk. v. 19;
υπάγω ϊπί τίνα, Lk. xii. 58 ; υπάγω with an inf. denoting
the purpose, Jn. xxi. 3 ; μ(τά nvos with an ace. of the
way, Mt. V. 41. On the phrase iinaye οπίσω μου [Mt. iv.
lOGLbr.; xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33; Lk. iv. 8 R L in br.],
see οπίσω, 2 a. fin.*
ντΓ-ακοή, -ής, η, (fr. υπακούω, q. v.), obedience, compli-
ance, submission, (opp. to παρακοή) : absol. els ΰπακοήν,
untn obedience i. e. to obey, Ro. vi. 16 [cf. W. G12 (5G9);
B. § 151, 28 d.]; obedience rendered to any one's coun-
sels: with a subject, gen., 2 Co. vii. 15; x. 6; Philem.
21 ; with a gen. of the object, — of the thing to which
one submits himself, t^s πlστeως (see πίστίϊ, 1 b. a. p.
513"), Ro. i. 5; xvi. 26; τήsάληθeίas, I Pet. i. 22; of the
person, roO Χρίστου, 2 Co. x. 5 ; the obedience of one
who conforms his conduct to God's commands, absoL
1 Pet. i. 2 ; opp. to αμαρτία, Ro. vi. 16 ; τίκνα moKorjs, i. e
υπήκοοι, 1 Pet. i. 14; with a subjective gen. Ro. xv. 18;
an obedience shown in observing the requirements of
Christianity, ύπ- υμών, i. e. contextually, the report con-
cerning your obedience, Ro. xvi. 19; the obedience with
which Christ followed out the saving purpose of God,
esp. by his sufferings and death : absol. Heb. v. 8 ; with
a gen. of the subject, Ro. v. 19. (The word is not
found in prof. auth. ; nor in the Sept., except in 2 S.
xxii. 36 with the sense of favorable hearing; in 2 S.
xxiii. 23 Aq. we find ό eVi ΰπακοήν tivos, Vulg. qui alicta
est a secrelis, where it bears its primary and proper
signification of listening; see υπακούω.) *
νττακουω
638
mrep
νιτ-ακοΰω; impf. ίπηκονον; 1 aor. ΐητηκοοσα; fr. Horn,
down ; lo listen, hearken ; 1. prop. : of one who on
a knock at the door comes to listen who it is, (the duty
of the portei), Acts xii. 13 [where Λ. V. hearken, R. V.
an.^wer] (Xen. symp. 1,11; Plat. Crito p. 43 a. ; Phaedo
p. 59 e. ; Dem., Lcian., Plut., al.). 2. lo hearken to
(I rnmmiind, i. e. to oheij, be oliedient unto, submit to, (so in
Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down) : absol. Phil. ii. 12 [cf. \V. 594
(552)] ; ίπηκονσιν ίξ(\θ(Ίν, [11. V. obeyed to go out i. e.]
went out obediently, Ileb. .\i. 8; with a dat. of the pers.
(in (irk. writ, also w. a gen.), Mt. viii. 27 ; Mk. i. 27 ;
iv. 41 ; Lk. viii. 25; xvii. 6; Ro. vi. IC; Eph. vi. 1, 5;
Col. iii. 20, 22 ; Heb. v. 9 ; 1 Pet. iii. 6 ; with a dat. of
the thins;, rf) πίστιι (see πίστκ, 1 b. a. p. SIS' near top),
Acts vi. 7 ; υττηκονσατζ ζΐς ov τταρί^όθητί τνπον 8ι5αχης,
by attraction for τω τύπω τη! δί&αχη! (Is &ν κτλ. [W. § 24,
2 b. ; cf. Tvvni, 3], Ro. vi. 1 7 ; τώ {ναγγιλίω, Ro. χ. HI ;
2 Th. i. 8 ; τω λόγω, 2 Th. iii. 14 ; τή αμαρτία (Rec), ταίί
(πιθυμίηΐ! (LTTr Wll), i. e. to allow one's self to be
captivated by, governed by, etc., Ro. vi. 12.*
iiiravSpos, -OK, {υπό and άυήρ), under i. e. subject to η
man : γυνή, married, Ro. vii. 2. (Num. v. [20], 29 ; Sir.
i.K. 9; [Prov. vi. 24]; xli. 21 ; Polyb. 10, 20, 3; [Diod. 32,
10, 4 vol. V. 50, 17 ed. Dind.] ; Plut., Artera., Heliod.)*
ϋΐΓ-αντάω, -ώ : 1 aor. ίπήντησα ; to go to meet, to meet :
Ttvi, Mt. viii. 28; Lk. viii. 27; Jn. xi. 20,30; xii. IS; also
L Τ Tr WII in Mk. v. 2 ; Jn. iv. 51 ; and Τ Tr WH in
Mt. xxviii. 9; Acts xvi. 16; [and Τ in Lk. xvii. 12 (so
WH nirg. but without the dat.) j ; in a military reference,
of a hostile meeting: Lk. xiv. 31 LTTr WH. (Pind.,
Soph., Eur., Xen., Joseph., Plut., Hdian., al.) *
ΐτΓ-άντησ-ι?, -ΕωΓ, ή, (ΰπαντάω), a going lo meet: Jn. xii.
13, and L Τ Tr WH in Mt. viii. 34 [B. §146,3] and xxv.
1 [cf. B. 1. c.]. (Judg. xi. 34; Joseph, antt. 11, 8, 4;
App. b. c. 4, C.) *
fjraplis, -fws, ή, (υπάρχω, q. v.), [fr. Aristot. down],
possessions, goods, wealth, property, (i. q. τα υπάρχοντα) :
Acts ii. 45; Heb. x. 34, (for "ao";, 2 Chr. xxxv. 7; Dan.
xi. 24 Theodot.; for njji-p, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 48; Jer.
ix. 10; for pn, Prov. .xviii. 11; xix. 14; Polyb., Dion.
Hal., Diod., Plut., Artem.).*
ύιτάρχω; iuipf. ΰπί)ρ;(0>'; 1. prop, to begin behir,
lo make a beginning ; univ. lo begin; (Horn., Aesch)•!.,
Hdt., s<iq.). 2. to come forth, hence lo be there, be
rendti, he al hand, (Aesehyl., Hdt., Pind., sqq.) : univ.
and simply. Acts xix. 40 [cf. B. § 151, 29 note] ; xxvii.
12, 21 ; fv Tim, to be found in one. Acts xxviii. 18 ; with
a dat. of the pers. ΰπάρχα μοΊ τι, something is mine, I
hare something: Acts iii. 6; iv. 37; xxviii. 7; 2 Pet. i.
8 (where Lclim. παρόντα; Sir. xx. 16; Prov. xvii. 17;
Job ii. 4, etc.) ; τά υπάρχοντα τινι, one's substance, one's
property, Lk. viii. 3 ; xii. 15 L txt. Τ Tr WH ; Acts iv.
32, (Gen. xxxi. 18 ; Tob. iv. 8; Dio C. 38,40) ; also τά
νπ. TuitK, Mt. xix. 21 ; xxiv. 47 ; xxv. 14 ; Lk. xi. 21 ;
xii. 15 R G L mrg., 33, 44 [here L mrg. Tr mrg. the
dat.]; xiv. 33; xvi. 1 ; xix. 8 ; 1 Co. xiii. 3 ; Heb. x. 34,
(often in Sept. for η:^ρρ, ΒίΟ";, D-pp: ; Sir. xli. 1 ; fob. i.
20, etc. ; τα ίδια υπάρχοντα, Polyb. 4, 3, 1). 3. to be,
with a predicate nom (as often in Attic) [cf. B. § 144,
14, 15 a., 18; AV. 350 (328)] : as άρχων tiis οννατ/ωγηι
νπηρχιν, Lk. viii. 41 ; add, Lk. ix. 48 ; Acts vii. 55 ;
viii. 11) ; xvi. 3 ; xix. 36 ; xxi. 20; 1 Co. vii. 26 ; xii. 22;
Jas. ii. 15; 2 Pet. iii. 11 ; the ptcp. with a predicate
nom., being i. e. who is etc., since or although he etc. is:
I>k. xvi. 14; xxiii. 50; Acts ii. 30; iii. 2; xiv. 8 Rec;
xvii. 24 ; [xxii. 3] ; Ro. iv. 1 9 ; 1 Co. xi. 7 ; 2 Co. viii. 1 7 ;
xii. 16 ; Gd. i. 14; h. 14 ; plur., Lk. xi. 13 ; Acts xvi. 20,
3 7 ; xvii. 29 ; 2 Pet. ii. 1 9. ύπάρχ(ΐν full, by iv w. a
dat. of the thing, to be contained in. Acts x. 12 ; lo be in
a place, Phil. iii. 20; in some state, Lk. xvi. 23; e'l» Tg
(ξουσία τινός, to be left in one's power or disposal, Acts
V. 4 ; (V ίματισμω (νδόξω και τρυφη, to be gorgeously aj)-
parellcd and to live delicately, Lk. vii. 25 ; iv μομφή
θ(οΰ ύπάρχ€ΐν, to be in the form of (iod (see μηρφή), Phil,
ii. 6 [here R. V. mrg. Gr. being originally (? ; yet cf. 1 Co.
xi. 7)] ; foil, by iv with a dat. plur. of the pers., among.
Acts i v. 34 RG; 1 Co. xi. 18. ϋπ. μακράν από tivos. Acts
.xvii. 27; jrpof της σωτηρίας, to be conducive to safety,
Acts xxvii. 34. [CoMP. : προ- υπάρχω-Ί '
ΰιτ-«(κ<ι> ; fr. Horn, down ; to resist no longer, but to give
way, yield, (prop, of combatants) ; metaph. lo yield lo
authority and admonition, to submit : Heb. xiii. 17.•
ϋΐΓ-ίναντΙο5. -α, -ov ; a. opposite lo ; set over against :
ίπποι vjrei». άλλήλοίϊ, meeting one another, lies. scut.
347. b. trop. (Plat., Aristot., Plut., al.), opposed
to, contrary lo: τίΐ/ί. Col. ii. 14 [where see Bp. Lghtft.];
όΰπ(ν. as subst. (Xen., Polyb., Plut.), an adversary, Heb.
X. 27, cf. Sept. Is. xxvi. 11, (Sept. for a'JK, IS) ; often
in the O. T. Apocr.*
virt'p, [cf. Eng. up, over, etc.], Lat. super, over, a prep-
osition, which stands before either the gen. or the ace.
according as it is used to express the idea of state and
rest or of motion over and beyond a place.
I. with the Genitive; cf. W. 382 (358) sq. 1.
prop, of place, i. e. of position, situation, extension :
over, above, beyond, across. In this sense it does not
occur in the N. T. ; but there it always, though joined
to other classes of words, has a tropical signification de-
rived from its original meaning. 2. i. q. Lat. pro,
for, i.e. for one's safely, for one's advantage or benefit,
(one who does a thing for another, is conceived of as
standintc or bending 'over' the one whom he would shield
or defend [cf. W. u. s.]) : πριισίΰχομαι ΰπίρ τ. Mt. v. 44 ;
Lk. vi. 28 [TTrmrg. WH π^ρί (see 6 below)]; Col. i. 3
L Tr WH mrg. (see 6 below) ; [Jas. v. 1 6 L Tr mrg. WII
txt.], 9 ; εύχομαι, Jas. v. 16 [R G Τ Tr txt. WH mrg.] ;
after Seopm, Acts viii. 24 ; and nouns denoting prayer, as
8(ησις, Ro. X. 1 ; 2 Co. i. 11 ; ix. 14 ; Phil. i. 4 ; Eph. vi.
19 ; προσιυχή. Acts xii. 5 (here L TTr WH π(ρί [see 6
below]) ; Ro. xv. 30 ; 1 Tim. ii. 1, 2 ; dvai <ιπίρ τ. (opp.
to κατίί Tti/ot), lo he for one i. e. to be on one's side, to
favor and further one's cause, Mk. ix. 40; Lk. ix. 50;
Ro. viii. 31, cf. 2 Co. xiii. 8; τό ΰπίρ τ. th.at which is for
one's advantage, Phil. iv. 10 [hut see αναβάλλω and
φρονίω, fin.] ; ivτυyχάvω and ϋπ(p(vτυyχάvω, Ro. viii.. 26
RG, 27, 34; Heb. vii. 25, cf. ix. 24 ; λ/γω, Acts xxvi 1
xnr^o
639
uirep
R WHtXt. [see 6 below] ; μεριμνώ, 1 Co. xii. 25 ; aypxmva,
Heb. xiii. 17 ; άγωνΐζοβαι iv rdis Ίτροσίνχαΐν, Col. iv. 12,
cf. Ro. XV. 30; πρισβίύω, Eph. vi. 20; 2 Co. v. 20 ; with
subst. : ζηΚοί, 2 Co. vii. 7 ; [Col. iv. 13 Rec] ; πόνοι, Col.
iv. 13 [GLTTr Wll]; σπουδή, 2 Co. vii. 12; via. 16;
SuIkovos, Col. i. 7 ; to offer offerings for. Acts xxi. 26 ;
to enter the heavenly sanctuary for (used of Christ),
Heb. vi. 20 ; άρχκρία καθίστασθαι, Heb. v. 1 ; after the
ideas of suffering, dying, giving up life, elc:
Ro, ix. 3 ; xvi. 4 ; 2 Co. xii. 15 ; after την ψνχην τιθίναι
(virep Tivos), in order to avert ruin, death, etc., from
one, Jn. x. 11 ; xiii. 37sq. ; of Christ dying to procure
salvation for his own, Jn. x. 15; xv. 13 ; 1 Jn. iii. 16;
Christ is said τό αίμα αϋτοϋ έκχϋναν, pass., Mk. xiv. 24
L Τ Tr WH [see 6 below] ; Lk. xxii. 20 [AVH reject the
pass.]; άπολ/σίαί, Jn. xviii. 14 Rec. ; άπο^ι/ήσκί tv, Jn. xi.
50sqq.; [xviii. ULTTrWH] ; Acts .\.\i. 1 3 ; Ro.v.7;
of Christ undergoing death for man's salvation, Ro. v.
6, 8; xiv. 15; 1 Th. v. 10 [here Τ Tr WH txt. π€ρί (see
6 below) ; 1 Pet. iii. 18 L Τ Tr AVH txt.] ; γ^ί^σθαι θανά-
του, Heb. ii. 9 ; σταυρωθηναι, 1 Co. i. 13 (here L txt. Tr
mrg. AVH mrg. jrfpi [see 6 below]) ; [of God giving up
his Son, Ro. viii. 32] ; napahibavm τίνα «αυτόν. Gal. ii. 20 ;
Eph. v. 2, 25 ; διδόκαι ίαυτύν. Tit. ii. 14 ; with a predi-
cate accus. added, άντΐΚυτρον, 1 Tim. ii. 6 ; το σώμα αυτοΰ
hibovai, pass. Lk. xxii. 19 [AA'II reject the pass.], cf. 1 Co.
xi. 24 ; τυθηναι (θνθήναι, see θύω, init.), 1 Co. v, 7 ; τιαθύν,
1 Pet. ii. 21 ; iii. 18[RG AVH mrg.; iv. 1 RG]; άγιαζαν
(αυτόν, Jn. xvii. 19. Since what is done for one's ad-
vantage freijuently cannot be done without acting in
his stead (just as the apostles teach that the death
of Christ inures to our salvation because it has the force
of an expiatory sacrifice and was suffered in our stead),
we easily understand how ΰπίρ, like the Lat. pro and
our /or, comes to signify 3. in the p/ace of, instead
of, (which is more precisely expressed by άιτι; hence
the two prepositions are interchanged by Irenaeus, adv.
haer. 5, 1, τω ίδίω αϊματι \υτρωσαμΙνου ήμα! τοΰ κυρίου
και δίίντοί την ^υχην ΰττίρ των ημ^τίρων ψυχών κάί την
σάρκα την (αυτοΰ αντίτώι/ ημξΤίρων σαρκών^'. Ίνα ύπ^ρ
σοϋ μοί bioKovTj, Philem. 13 ; ύπίρ τών ν(κρων βαπτίζ^σθαι
(see βατηίζω, fin.), 1 Co. xv. 29 ; [add. Col. i. 7 L txt. Tr
txt. AVH txt.] ; in expressions concerning the death of
Christ: tif iirip πάντων άιτίθανιν (for the inference is
drawn apa oi πάντα άπίθανον, i. e. all are reckoned as
dead), 2 Co. v. 14 (15), 15 ; add, 21 ; Gal. iii. 13. [On
this debated sense of ΰπίρ, see Meyer and Van Hengel
on Ro. V. 6 ; Ellicott on (jal. and Philem. 11. cc. ; Wieseler
on Gal. i. 4 ; Trench, Syn. § Ixxxii. ; AV. 383 (358) note.]
Since anything whether of an active or passive char-
acter which is undertaken on behalf of a person or
thing is undertaken 'on account of that person or
thing, ύπ/ρ is used 4. of the impelling or moving
cause ; on account of, for the sal'e of, any person or thing :
ύπίρ τη! τοϋ κόσμου ζωηί, to procure (true) life for man-
kind, Jn. vi. 51 ; to do or suffer anything imep τοϋ ονόματοί
6(οϋ,Ίησοΰ, τοϋ κυρίου: Acts ν. 41 ; ix. 16; xv. 26; xxi.
13 ; Κο. i. 5 ; 3 Jn. 7 ; πάσχιιν iirip τοϋ Χρίστου, Phil. i.
29 ; ντΓίρ TTJs βασιλίΐ'αι τοΰ β(οϋ, 2 Th. i. 5 ; σΤ€νοχωρίαι
νπΐρ τοϋ Χρίστου, 2 Co. xii. 10 [it is better to connect
νπίρ etc. here with ίϋδοκώ] ; απόθνησκαν νπϊρ θ(6ϋ,
Ignat. ad Rom. 4. examples with a gen. of the thine
are, Jn. xi. 4 ; Ro. xv. 8 ; 2 Co. i. 6 ; xii. 19 ; ΰπίρ τήϊ
ίΰδοκία!, to satisfy (his) good-pleasure, Phil. ii. 13 ; with
a gen. of the pers., 2 Co. i. 6 ; Eph. iii. 1, 13; Coi. i. 24 ;
Βοξάζ(ΐν, eixapioTf'tv ίπίρ τ. (gen. of the thing), Ro. xv.
9 ; 1 Co. X. 30 ; νπΐρ πάντων, for all favors, Eph. v. 20 ;
ΐϋχαριστ(ΐν ϋπίρ with a gen. of the jjers., Ro. i. 8 (here
L Τ Tr AVH wepi [see 6 below]) ; 2 Co. i. 1 1 ; Eph. i. 16 ;
aySiva (χ(ίν ΰπίρ with a gen. of the pers. Col. ii. 1 L Τ Tr
AA'H [see 6 below] ; ύπΐρ (τών) αμαρτιών (or άγνοημΛτων),
to offer sacrifices, Heb. v. 1, 3 (here L Τ Tr A\'H πιρί [see
6 below]); vii. 27; ix. 7; x. 12; άποθανύν, of Christ,
1 Co. XV. 3 ; ΐαυτον δούναι. Gal. i. 4 R ΑΑΉ txt. [see 6 be-
low]. 5. Like the Lat. super (cf. Kloiz, HAVB. d.
Lat. Spr. ii. p. 1497"; [Harpers' Lat. Diet. s. v. Π. B.
2 b.]), it freq. refers to the object under consideration,
concerning, of, as respects, with regard to, ([cf. B. § 147,
21]; exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in AV. 383 (358 sq.));
so after καυχάσθαι, καύχημα, καίχησίί, [R. V. on behalj
of}: 2C0.V.12; vii. 4,14; viii.24; ix. 2sq. ; xii. 5;
2 Th. i. 4 [here L Τ Tr AVH ty (or iv) καυχάσθαι] ; φυ-
σιονσθαι, 1 Co. iv. 6 [al. refer this to 4 above ; see Meyer
ed. Heinrici (cf. φυσιόω, 2 fin.)] ; ΐΚπΙς, 2 Co. i. 7 (6) j
ayvoe'iv, 8 (here L Τ Tr AVH mrg. π(ρί [see 6 below]) ;
φρονύν, Phil. i. 7 (2 Mace. xiv. 8) ; ΐρωτάν, 2 Th. ii. 1 ;
κράζίΐν, to proclaim concerning, Ro. ix. 27; [napaKaKeiv,
1 Th. iu. 2 G L Τ Tr AVH (see 6 below)] ; after e.Vei»,
Jn. i. 30 LTTr AVH [see 6 below] ; (so after verbs of
saying, writing, etc., 2 S. xviii. 5 ; 2 Chr. xxxi. 9 ; Joel L
3; Judith xv. 4; 1 Esdr. iv. 49; 2 Mace. xi. 35); etrc
wrtp Τίτου, whether inquiry be made about Titus, 2 Co.
viii. 23 ; ΰπίρ τούτου, concerning this, 2 Co. xii. 8. 6.
In the N. T. JIss., as in those of prof. auth. also, the
prepositions inip and π^ρί are confounded, [cf. AA'. 383
(358) note; §50,3; B. §147, 21; Kiihner § 435, L 2e.;
Meisterhans § 49, 12 ; also AA'ieseler or Ellicott on Gal. as
below ; ISIeyer on 1 Co. xv. 3, (see π(ρί I. c. δ•)] ; this oc,
curs in the foil. pass. : Mi. xiv. 24 ; [Lk. vi. 28] ; Jn. L
30; Acts xii. 5; xxvi. 1; Ro. i. 8; iCo. i. 13; 2Co.i. 8;
Gal. i. 4 ; CoL i. 3 ; ii. 1 ; [1 Th. iii. 2 ; v. 10] ; Heb. v. 3.
[For ΰπΐρ (Κ περισσού or ίπίρ (κπιρίσσοΰ, see ΰπιρικπί-
ρισσον.]
II. with the Accusative (cf. AV. § 49, e.) ; over, be-
yond, away over ; more than ; 1. prop, of the
place 'oi'er' or 'beyond' which, as in the Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down ; not thus used in the N. T., whert 11 is
always 2. metaph. of the measure or degree
exceeded [cf. B.§ 147, 21]; a. uniy.: ilvatimip
Tiva, to be aboi-e i. e. superior to one, Mt. x. 24 ; Lk. vi.
40 ; TO όνομα τό vnep πάν όνομα sc. ox, the name superior
to every (other) name, Phil. ii. 9 ; κιφα'Χην ΰπίρ πάντα
sc. ουσαν, the supreme head or lord [A. A', head over all
things'], Eph. i. 22; Orrep δοϋλο» όντα, more than a ser-
vant, Philem. 16; more than [R. V. beyond], ibid. 21;
ΰπίρ πάντα, above (i.e. more and greater than) all, Epb
υττεραιρω
640
υτΓΐρΐχοί
iii. 20'; vnip την Χαμπρότητα τοϋ ηΚίσυ, above (Le. ear-
passing) the brightuess of the sun, Acts xxvi. 13; more
(to a greater degree) ihan, φιλιΊν nva vrrip nm, Mt.
X. 37 (exx. fr. prof. auth. are given by Fritzscbe ad
loc.) ; beyond, 1 Co. iv. 6 ; 2 Co. xii. 6 ; ύπίρ S 8ύνασβ€,
beyond what ye are able, beyond your strength, 1 Co.
X. 13 [of. W. 590 (.i49)] ; also mip δίναμιν, 2 Co. i. S;
opp. to Kara Svvapiv (as in Horn. II. 3, 59 κατ αισαν, οίδ*
vTTep αΐσαν, ef. 6,487; 17,321. 327), 2 Co. viii. 3 (where
LTTrWll πάρα Svvapiv). b. with words imply-
ing comparison : TrpoKOnTcw, Gal. i. 14 ; of the measure
beyond which one is reduced, ήττασθαι, 2 Co. .xil. 13 [AV.
§ 49 e.], (πλίονάζω, 1 Esdr. viii. 72; πιρισσινω, 1 Mace.
iii. 30; ΰπίρβάλλω. Sir. x.w. 11); after comparatives
i. q. than, Lk. xvi. 8 ; lleb. iv. 12, (Judg. xi. 25 ; 1 K. xL\.
4 ; Sir. xxx. 17); cf. W. § 35, 2 ; [B. § 147, 21]. c.
ΰπίρ is used adverbially; as, ΰπϊρ t'-yi [L imtpeym (cf. AV.
46 (45)), WH imep iya> (cf. W. §14,2 Note)], much more
(or in a much greater degree) I, 2 Co. xi. 23 ; cf. Kypke
ad loc. ; W. 423 (394). [For ΰπίρ \iai> see vnepXiav.l
m. In Composition xmtp denotes 1. over, ahove,
beyond : νπίράνω, vntpexeiva, ΰπ(ρ(κτί!νω. 2. e.xcess
of measure, more thrm : ΰπ€ρ(κ7Γ(ρισσοΰ, ΐ>π(ρνικάα>. 3.
aid, ybr; iii defence of: xme pevrvyxavai. Cf. Alger, ed.
Hermann p. 668; Fritzscbe on Rom. vol. i. p. 351 ; [Elli-
cott on Eph. iii. 20].*
imtp-aipta : pres. mid. νπ^ραΐρομαι ; (irirep and αίρω) ',
to UJl or raise up over some thing ; mid. lo Ιϊβ one's self
up, be exalted, be haughty : 2 Co. xii. 7 [R.V. to be exalted
overviuchi ; cVi τίνα, above one, 2 Th. ii. 4 ; with a dat.
incom. τινΊ, to carry one's self haughtily to, behave inso-
lently towards one, 2 Mace. v. 23 ; (very variously in
prof. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Plato down).•
νπτ'ρακμοΐ, -Of, (Vulg. snperaduUns); 1. beyond
the ακμή or bloom of life, pmt prime, (Plat, de rep. 5 p.
460 e. ip ovv σοι ξυν5οκ(ϊ μίτριο! χρόνο! ακμής τα (ΐκοσιν
ΐτη γνναικί, aiihp\ Se τα τριάκοντα) : Eustath. 2.
overripe, plump and ripe, (and so in greater danger of
defilement) : of a virgin [R. V. pas^ the flower of her
age], 1 Co. vii. 36.'
νΐΓ€ρ-άνω, {ΰπίρ and άνω), adv., above : rivos [cf. W.§54,
6], above a thing, — of place, Eph. iv. 10; Ileb. ix. 5;
of rank and power, Eph. i. 21. (Sept. ; [Aristot.], Polyb.,
Joseph., Plut., Lcian., Ael., al., [W. § 50, 7 Note 1 ; B.
§146,4].)•
νπ€ρ-ανξάνω ; to increase beyond measure; to grow ex-
ceedingly : 2 Th. i. 3. [Andoc., Galen, Dio Cass., al.] *
νιΐΐρ-βα(ν»; fr. Horn, down; to step over, go beyoml ;
metaph. to transgress : δίκην, νόμουί, etc., often fr. Hdt.
and Pind. down ; absol. to overstep the proper limits i. e.
to transgress, trespass, do wrong, sin : joined with άμαρ-
τάνίΐ», Horn. Β. 9, 501 ; Plat. rep. 2 p. 366 a. ; spec, of
one who defrauds another in business, overreaches,
(Luth. so weit greifen), with καί π\ίον€κτίΊν added, 1 Th.
jv. 6 [but see trpaypa, b.].•
ι}ΐΓ(ρβαλλ6ντΐι>ΐ, (fr. the ptcp. of the verb νΐΓ(/>3άλλω,
as ivTiut fr. S>v), above measure : 2 Co. xi. 23. (Job xr.
11 ; Xen., Plat., Polyb., al.) • I
virep -βάλλω ; fr. ITom. down ; 1. trans, lo surpass
in throwing; to throw over or beyond any thing. 2.
intrans. to transcend, surpass, exceed, excel ; ptcp. wrfp-
βάλλων, excelling, exceeding; Vulg. [in Eph. i. 19; iii.
i;i] supereminens; (Aeschyl., Hdt., Eur., Isocr., Xen.,
Plat., al.) : 2 Co. iii. 10; L\. 14; Eph. i. 19; ii. 7; with
a gen. of the object surpassed (Aeschyl. Prom. 92:i ;
Plat. Corg. p. 475 b. ; cf. Matthiae § 35.S, 2), ή νπ(ρβά\-
λούσα τήίγνώσίως άγάτπι Χριστοί, the love of Christ Λνΐιίοΐι
passeth knowledge, Eph. iii. 19 [cf. W. 346 (324) note].*
«τΓΕρ-βολή, -ήί, ή, (ύπίρ&άλλω, q. v.), fr. Hdt. [8, 11 2, 4 j
and Thuc. down ; 1. prop, a throwing beyond. 2.
metaph. superiority, excellence, pre-eminence, [R. V. ex•
ceeiling greatness^ : with a gen. of the thing, 2 Co. iv. 7 ;
xii. 7 ; Kaff νπίρβοΧήν, beyond measure, exceedingly, pre-
eminently : Ro. vii. 13 ; 1 Co. xii. 31 [cf. W. § 54, 2 b. ; B.
§ 125, 11 fin.]; 2 Co. i. 8; Gal. i. 13, (4 Mace. iii. 18 ;
Soph. O. R. 1 196 ; Isocr. p. 84 d. [i. e. npOt Φί\. 5] ; Polyb.
3, 92, 10; Diod. 2, 16; 17, 47); gaff ΰπ. «r ύπιρβοΧήν,
beyond all measure, [R. V. more and more exceedinglyj,
2 Co. iv. 17.*
νΐΓ£ρ-«γώ [Lchm.], i. q. wrtp rya (see νπίρ, Π. 2 c.): 2
Co. xi. 23. Cf. AV. 46 (45).•
virep-itSov ; (see ίίδω) ; fr. Hdt. and Thuc. down; to
overlook, take no notice of, not attend to : τί, Acts xviL
30.•
vTrcp-fKcivo, (i. q. {mip ίκΛνα, like irnKfiva, i. q. or* tKf'iva
[ΑΑΓ. § 6, 1 1.]), beyond : τα wr. Tti/of, the regions l\Tng be-
yond the country of one's residence, 2 Co. x. 16 [cf. AV.
§ 54, 6]. (Byzant. and eccles. writ.; iniKfiva ρήτορα
λ/γουσι . . . vveptKfiva δι μόνον οι σίρφακί!, Thom. Mag.
p. 336 [AA^ 463 (431)].)•
ΰ•π-€ρ-€κ-ΐΓ£ρισσοΟ, [Rec. wrcp €κη(ρ. and in Eph. vrrip
€K πίρ. ; see nepiaaot, 1], adv., (A'ulg. [in Eph. iii. 20]
superabundanler), superabundantly; beyond measure;
exceedingly : 1 Th. v. 13 R G AA'H txt. ; iii. 10; [exceed-
ing abundantly foil, by inep i. q.] far more than, Eph. UL
20 [B. § 132, 21]. Not found elsewhere [e.xc. in Dan.
iii. 23 Aid. , Compl. Of. B. § 146, 4].*
νίΓίρ-ίΚ-τΓίρισσώϊ, adv., beyond measure: 1 Th. v. 13
L Τ Tr AA'H mrg. [R. A', exceeding highly]; see (κπιρισ-
σώί. (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 11.)•
virip^K-rtivM ; to extend beyond the prescribed bounds,
stretch out beyond measure, stretch out overmuch : 2 Co. -x.
14 [cf. AA^ 474 (442)]. (Anth. 9, 643, 6 ace. to the
emendation of AVm. Dind. ; Greg. Naz., Eustath.) *
virep-tK -χννω (-ΰιτω, L Τ Tr AA'^H ; see (κ\ί<ΰ, init.) ; to
pour out beyond measure; pass, to overflow, run over,
(Vulg. supereffluo) : Lk. vL 38 ; Joel ii. 24 [Alex., etc.].
(Not found elsewhere.) •
«irep -ίν^Γυγχάνω ; to intercede for one : vrrip tivos [AV.
§52,4,17], Ro. viiL 26; on this pass, see nvevpa p. 522'.
(Eccl. writ.) •
ύτηρ-ίχω ; fr. Horn, down ; 1• trans, to hare or
hold over one (as την χίΐρα, of a protector, with a gen.
of the pers. protected ; so in Grk. writ, f r. Horn, down ;
Joseph, antt. 6, 2, 2). 2. intrans. to stand out, rise
above, overtop, (so prop, first in Hom. D. 3, 210) ; met'
ίητβρηφανία
641
ντΓηρβτ•η<;
a ph. a. to be above, be superior in rank, authority,
power : βασιλίί is ντκρίχονη, [A. V. as supreme'], 1 Pet.
ii. 13; (ξουσίαι ύπ(ρίχουσαι,ο{ magistrates (Α.Ύ. higher
powers), Ro. xiii. 1 (ot ΰνιρίχοντα, substantively, the
prominent men, rulers, Polyb. 28, 4, 9 ; 30, 4,17; of
kings. Sap. vi. 6). b. to excel, to be superior: tivos,
better than [cf. B. § 132, 22], Phil. ii. 3 (Sir. xxxvi. 7 ;
Xen. venat. 1, 11; Plat. Menex. p. 237(1.; Dem. p. 689,
10 ; Diod. 17, 77) ; to surpass : τ^vά or η [cf. B. § 130,
4], Phil. iv. 7 ; τ4 νπιρίχον, subst. the excellency, sur-
passing worth [cf. W. S 34, •-'], Phil. iii. 8.'
νπΕρηψανια, -of, ή, (ναιρήφανο!, q. v.), pride, haughti-
ness, arrogance, the characteristic of one who, with a
swollen estimate of his own powers or merits, looks
down on others and even treats them with insolence
and contempt: Mk. vii. 22. (From Xen. and Plat, down :
Sept. for niiJ3 and psa ; often in the O. T. Apocr.) •
«ΊΓΕρήψανοΐ, -ov, (fr. ΰπίρ and φαίνομαι, with the con-
nective [or Epic extensiun (cf. Curtius § 392)] η; cf.
ΐΛΓί^ 17 φίρήί, durT/Xry^r, ToKijXry^f, iii;yfi/^i), fr. lies,
down ; 1. showing one's self above others, overtop-
ping, conspicuous above others, pre-eminent, (Plat., Plut.,
al.). 2. especially in a bad sense, with an over•
weening estimate of one's means or merits, despising others
or even treating them with contempt, haughty, [cf. Westcott,
Epp. of St. John, p. 64'] : Ro. i. 30 ; 2 Tim. iii. 2 ; opp.
to ταπεινοί, Jas. iv. 6 ; 1 Pet. v. 5, (in these two pass,
after Prov. iii. 34) ; with διάνοια καρδία: added, Lk. i. 51.
(Sept. for ni, D";, nW, etc. ; often in the O. T. Apocr.)
[Si'c Trench. .Syn. §'xxix. ; Schmidt eh. 17C. S.] •
νπ€ρλ[αν (formed like Infpayav. inrfpfv). and written
se))arately ύπίρ λίαν (so R Tr [cf. W. § 50, 7 Xote ; B.
§ 146, 4]), over much ; pre-eminently : ot intpXiav άπόστο-
Xot, the most eminent apostles, 2 Co. xi. 5; .\ii. 11.•
νιτ(ρ•ηκ(ύι, -ω; (Cyprian supervinco) ; to be more than
a conqueror, to gain a surpassing victory: Ro. viii. 37.
(Leon, tactic. 14, 25 νικά κ- μη νπίρνικα; Socrat. h. e. 3,
21 vtKOP καΚόν, ύπ^ρνικΰν 8e (πίφθονον. Found in other
eccl. writ. Euseb. h. e. 8, 14, 15, uses ΰπιρίκνικάν.) *
νΐΓίρ-ογκο9, -ov, {iirtp, and SyKos a swelling), over-
swollen : metaph. immoderate, extravagant : XdKdv, φθίγ-
yeadai, ΰπίρογκα, [A.V. great swelling words'] expressive
of arrogance, Jude 16 ; 2 Pet. ii. 18 ; with em to» θ(όν
added, Dan. xi. 36 Theodot., cf. Sept. Ex. xviii. 22, 26.
(Xen., Plat., Joseph., Plut., Lcian., Ael., Arr.) *
ϋΐΓ€ροχή, -ijt, ή, (fr. ΰπίροχα, and this fr. νκιρίχω, q. v.),
prop, elevation, pre-eminence, superiority, (prop, in Polyb.,
Plut., al.) ; metaph. excellence (Plat.. Aristot., Polyb.,
.Joseph., Plut., al.) : ot eV ΰπ€ρ. sc. Svret, [R. V. those that
are in high place], of magistrates, 1 Tim. ii. 2 («i» vwep.
κ(ΐσθαι, to have great honor and authority, 2 Mace. iii.
11) ; Kaff ΰπ€ρο)(ην λόγου η σοφία!, [A.V. with excellency
of speech or of wisdom i. e.] with distinguished elo-
quence or wisdom, 1 Co. ii. 1.*
vire|>.ircpicro-c«c* : 1 aor. ΰπίρ(π(ρίσσ(νσα ; Pres. pass.
ύιτιρπιρισσήομαι; (Vulg. superabundd) ; to abound be-
yond measure, abound exceedingly : Ro. v. 20 ; pass, (see
vcptσσrvu, 2), to overflow, to enjoy abundantly : with a
dat. of the thing, 2 Co. vii. 4. (Moschioa de pass, mulier.
p. 6, ed. Dewez ; Byzant. writ.) *
virep-iripurtrtis, adv., beyond measure, exceedingly: Mk.
vii. 37. Scarcely found elsewhere.*
iSirep-irXcovoiJu : 1 aor. ύτκρ^πλιόνασα ; (Vulg. super-
abundo) ; to be exceedingly abundant : 1 Tim. i. 14 (τ6ί>
ΰπ€ρπλ(ονάζοντα άίρα, Heron, spirit, p. 165, 40; several
times also in eccl. writ. [ύπ(ρπλ(ονάζ(ΐ absol. overflows,
Herm. mand. 5, 2, 5]; to possess in excess, iav virtfrnXfo-
νάστ] 6 άνθρωπο!, (ξαμαρτάν(ί, Ps. Sal. V. 19).*
ΐτΓίρ-νψόω, -ω : 1 aor. ύττιρΰψωσα ; (Ambros. super-
exalto) ; metaph. a. to exalt to the highest rank and
power, raise to supreme majesty : τινά, Phil. ii. 9 ; pass.
Ps. xcvi. (xcvii.) 9. b. to extol most highly : Song of
the Three etc. 28 sqq. ; Dan. iii. (iv.) 34 Theodot. c.
pass, to be lijted up with pride, exalted beyond measure; ίο
carry one's selflofily : Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 35. (EccL
and Byzant. writ.) *
νπ€ρ-ψρον(ΐι>, -ω ; (ίπίρφρων) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down; to think more highly of one's self than is proper:
Ro. xii. 3.*
vircp(uov, -ου,τό, (fr. νπ€ρώο! or vTreptitoy, 'upper,* and
this fr. vnep; like πατρωϊος, ττατρωο!, fr. ηατηρ; [cf. W•
96 (91)]), in the Grk. writ, (often in Ilom.) the highest
part of the house, the upper rooms or story where the wo-
men resided; in bibl. Grk. (Sept. for il'Si'), a room in
the upper part of a house, sometimes built upon the flat
roof of the house (2 K. xxiii. 12), whither Orientals
were wont to retire in order to sup, meditate, pray,
etc.; IR. Y. upper chamber; cf. B. D. s. v. House; McC.
and S. s. v.] : Acts i. 13 ; ix. 37, 39 ; xx. 8, (Joseph, vit.
30).*
νίΓ^χω; prop, to hold under, to put under, place under•
nealli; as r^» χ€Ϊρα, Horn. II. 7, 188; Dem., Plat., al. ;
metaph. to sustain, undergo: δίκην, to suffer punishment,
Jude 7 (very often so in prof. auth. fr. Soph, down ; also
δίκα!, κρίσιν, τιμωρίαν, etc. ; ζημίαν, Eurip. Ion 1308; 2
Mace. iv. 48).•
i5in]Koos, -01», (ακο^ , see ννακοίω, 2), fr. Aeschyl. and
Hdt. down, giving ear, obedient : Phil. ii. 8 ; with dat.
of the pers. .\cts vii. 39 ; ei! πάντα, 2 Co. ii. 9.•
ντΓτ\ρ(τίω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ύττηρ^τησα ; fr. Hdt. down ; to be
ΰπηρίτης (q. v.), prop. a. to act as rower, to row,
(Diod., Ael.). b. to minister, render service : Ttw,
Acts xiii. 36 ; xx. 34 ; xxiv. 23.*
ντΓηρ«τη5, -ου, 6, (tr. υπό, and ίρίτη! fr. φρίσσω to row),
fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; a. prop, an under
rower, subordinate rotver. b. any one who serves with
his hands; a servant; in the N. T. of the officers and
attendants of magistrates as — of the officer who exe-
cutes penalties, Mt. v. 25 ; of the attendants of a king,
oi wr. ot (μοί, my servants, retinue, the soldiers I should
have if I were a king, .Jn. xviii. 36 ; of the servants or
officers of the Sanhedrin, Mt. xxvi. 58 ; Mk. xiv. 54, 65 ;
Jn. vii. 32, 45 sq. ; xviii. 3, 12, 22 ; xix. 6 ; Acts v. 22, 26 ;
joined with βοϋλο; (Plat, polit. p. 289 c), Jn. xviii. 18 ;
of the attendant of a synagogue, Lk. iv. 20 ; of any one
ministering or rendering service, Acts siiL 5. o. any
νττρος
642
όΒείΎμα
one who aids another in any work ; an asshlant : of a
preacher of the gospel [A. V. minister, q. v. in B. U.],
Acts xxvi. 16; ύπηρίταί λίίγου, I-k. i. 2; Χριστού, 1 Co.
iv. 1. [Syn. see διάκονοί, fin.] *
virvos, -ου, ό, [i. e. σύπνο!, cf. Lat. sopnus, somnus;
Curtius §391], fr. Horn, down, Hebr. nyd, sleep: prop.,
Mt. i. 24; Lk. ix. 32; .In. xi. 13; Acts xx. 9; inetaph.
(ξ ΰπνου eyepeijvai (see iyeipa>, 1), Ro. xui. 11.*
«1ΓΟ (i. e. Lat. sub [Curtius § 393]), prep., under, in
prof. auth. used with the gen. dat. and ace, but in the
N. T. with the gen. and ace. only. [On the use and
the omission of elision with it before words beginning
with a vowel, see WH. App. p. 146° ; Tdf. Proleg. p. iv.
(addenda et emendanda).]
I. with the Genitive (cf. W. 364 (342), 368 sq. (346) ;
B. §147, 29), it is used 1. prop, in a local sense, of
situation or position under something higher, as ΰπο
χθονός, often fr. Horn, down; όί'πι yrjs και ΰπο yijs
χρυσός. Plat. legg. 5 p. 728 a. ; hence 2. metaph.
of the efficient cause, as that under the power of
which an event is conceived of as being ; here the Lat.
uses a or ab, and the Eng. by, thus a. after pas-
sive verbs, — with the gen. of a person : Mt.i.22; ii.
15 sq. ; Mk. i. 5 ; ii. 3 ; [viii. 31 L Τ Tr WH 1 ; Lk. ii. 18 ;
[vi. 18 Rec.] ; Jn. x. 14 R G ; xiv. 21 ; Acts iv. 1 1 ; xv.
4 ; [xxii. 30 L Τ Tr WH] ; Rom. xv. 1,5 [R G L] ; 1 Co.
i. 11 ; 2 Co. i. 4, 16 ; Gal. i. 11 ; Eph. ii. 11 ; Phil. iii. 12 ;
1 Th. i. 4 ; 2 Th. ii. 13 ; Heb. iii. 4, and in many other
pass. ; φωνή! (νιχθίίση! νπο t^s μeyά\o^τp(■πoΰs 8όξη'•,
when a voice was brought by the majestic glory [cf. K. V.
mrg.], i. Θ. came down to him from God, 2 Pet. i. 1 7 ; after
•γίνομαι, to be done, effected, Lk. ix. 7 R L in br. ; xiii. 1 7 ;
xxiii. 8; Eph. v. 12; yiverai nvt ίττιβονΚη, Acts xx. 3;
ή ίτητίμία η υπ6 των π\€ΐόνων, SC. ίπιτιμηΟΐΙσα, 2 Co. ii. 6 ;
— with the gen. of a thing : Alt. viii. 24 ; xi. 7 ; xiv. 24 ;
Lk. vii. 24; viii. 14 [see πoβfvω, fin.]; Jn. viii. 9; Acts
xxvii. 41 ; Ro.iii. 21 ; xii. 21 ; 1 Co. x. 29 ; 2 Co. v. 4 ; Eph.
v. 18 ; Col. ii. 18 ; Jas. i. 14 ; ii. 9 ; iii. 4, 6 ; 2 Pet. ii. 7,
17; Jude 12; Rev. vi. 13. b. with neuter verbs,
and with active verbs which carry a passive meaning :
πάσχαν into twos, Mt. xvii. 12; Mk. v. 26; 1 Th. ii. 14,
(Horn. II. 11, 119; Thuc. 1, 77; Xen. symp. 1, 9; Cyr.
6, 1, 36; Hier. 7, 8) ; άπόλίσθαι, to perish, 1 Co. x. 9 sq.
(very often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. 3, 32 on) ; ίπομίναν
η, Heb. xii. 3 [cf. άντιλογία, 2] ; \αμβάν(ΐιι sc. v\ηyάs, to
be beaten, 2 Co. xi. 24 ; after a term purely active, of
a force by which something is bidden to be done : άπο-
KTfivai f'v ρομφαία κα\ ύπο των θηρίων τη! yrjs, by the wild
beasts, Rev. vi. 8 [cf. ix. 18 Rec], (so w\(ae θυμλν ίφ'
Έκτορο!, Horn. H. 17,616; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1393;
[B. 341 (293)]).
II. with the Accusative (W. § 49, k.) ; 1. of
motion, in answer to the question 'whither?': to come
ίπ6 την στίγην, Mt. viii. 8 ; Lk. vii. 6 ; firiovmyfiv, Mt.
xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; with verbs of put ting or plac-
ing: Mt. V. 15; Mk. iv. 21; Lk. xi. 33; iCo. xv. 25; of
placing under or subjecting, Lk. vii. 8; Ro. vii.
14; xvi. 20; iCo. xv. 27; Gal. iii. 22; iv. 3; Eph. i. 22;
1 Pet. v. 6 ; ίχω τινά W ίμαυτόν, Mt. viii. 9 ; Lk. vii. 8;
γίν(σθαι, born under i. e. subject to, (!al. iv. 4 ; of fall-
ing, trop. Jas. v. 12 [where R" (is νπόκρισιι>2. 2.
of situation, position, tarrying: after κατασκη•
νουν, Mk. iv. 32 ; κάθημαι, Jas. ii. 3 ; with the verb dvai
(Jo and under) in a local or prop, sense, Jn. i. 48 (49);
Acts iv. 12; Ro. iii. 13 ; 1 Co. x. 1 ; ή xm'o {τον) oipuvov
sc. χώρα, Lk. xvii. 24 ; ττάστ; κτίσα TJj ΰπο τόχ οίρ. sc.
ovtTij, Col. i. 23 ; τα ί/πο τον ουρανόν sc. οιτα, Acts ii. 5,
(τα ΰπο σιλήνην, Philo de vit. Aloys, ii. § 12) ; ttvai υπό
Tiva or n, to be under, i. e. subject to the power of, any
person or thing: Ro. iii. 9; vi. 14, 15; 1 Co. ix. 20; Gal.
iii. 10, 25; iv. 2, 21 ; v. 18; 1 Tim. vi. 1 ; νπο «ξουσία»
sc. ων, Mt. viii. 9 (where L WH br. read ύττο c'|. τασσό-
μ€νο! l_set under authority], so also cod. Sin.) ; oi ΰπ6
νόμον sc. όντα, 1 Co. ix. 20 ; Gal. iv. 5, {ΰπο ίκπληξιΐ' (irat,
I'rotev. Jac. 18). τηριΐν τίνα, .Jude 6 ; φρουρίίσβαι, (ial.
iii. 23. 3. of time, like the Lat. sub (cf. sub vesjie-
ram), i. q. about (see exx. fr. the Cirk. writ, in Passow p.
2111"; [L. and S. s. V. C. in.]): ΰπο τί,ν άρθρον, about day•
break. Acts v. 21. This prep, occurs with the accus.
nowhere else in the N. T. The apostle John uses it only
twice with the gen. (xiv. 21 ; 3 Jn. 12 — three times,
if X. 14 RG is counted [cf. viii. 9]), and once with the
accus. (i. 48 (49)).
m. in Composition ΰπό denotes 1. locality,
under : νποκάτω, ίποπόδιον, ίπωπιάζω, Ιπο&ΐω ; of the
goal of motion, i. e. ίπό τι, as ίπο&ίχομαι. (under one's
roof) ; ίπολαμβάνω (to receive by standing under) ; υπο-
βάλλω, ΰποτίθημι; trop. in expressions of subjection,
compliance, etc., as υπακούω, υπακοή, υπήκοο!, υπόδικοι,
υπανδρος, υπάγω, υποΧ^ίπω, ΰποχωρίω. 2. small in
degree, sliyhtly, as ίποπνίω.
ϋπο-βάλλω: 2 aor. ΐυτί/ίαλοί'; [fr. Horn, down] ; 1.
to throw or put under. 2. ίο 6U(/^esi to the mind. 3.
to instruct privately, instigate, suborn : τινά. Acts vi. 1 1
(ύπίβλήθησαν κατήγοροι, App. bell. civ. 1, 74; ΙΛηνντήί
Tts ύποβλητός, Joseph, b. j. 5. 10, 4).'
νπογραμμός, -oC, ό, (υπογράφω), prop. 1. a wril-
iiig-copy, including all the letters of the alphabet, given
to beginners as an aid in learning to draw them : Clem.
Alex. Strom. 5, 8, 50. Hence 2. an example set
before one: 1 Pet. ii. 21 (2 Mace. ii. 28; Clem. Rom. 1
Cor. 16, 17; 33,8; [Philo, fragm. vol. ii. 667 Mang. (vi.
229 Richter)], and often in eccl. writ.; ό Παίλοί υπο-
μονής γ€νόμ(νοζ μ€γιστος ΰπογραμμός, Clem, Rom. 1 Cor.
5, 7 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]).*
ύπό-8ειγμα, TOi, to, (ίποδιίκνυμι, q. v.), a word rejected
by the Atticists, and for which the earlier writ, used
παράδίίγμα ; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 12 ; [^Rutherford, New
Phryn. p. 62]. It is used by Xen. r. eq. 2, 2, and among
subsequent writ, by Polyb., Philo, Joseph., App., Pint.,
Hdian., al. ; cf. Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 554 ; a.
α sig7i suggeslire of anything, delineation of a thing, repre-
sentation, figure, copy : joined with σκιά, Heb. viii. 5 ;
with a gen. of the thing represented, Heb. ix. 23. b.
an example : for imitation, hihovai τινί, Jn. xiii. 15 ; κατατ
\tKomivai, 2 Mace. vi. 28 ; with a gen. of the thing to
ίητοΖΐίκνυμι
643
υττοΚηνιου
be imitated, Jas. v. 10 (Sir. xKv. 16 ; 2 Mace. vi. 31) ; for
warning : with a gen. of the thing to be shunned, γ^ϊ <ϊπ(ΐ-
θήας, Heb. iv. 1 1 ; with a gen. of the pers. to be warned,
2 Pet. ii. 6 {tovs 'Ρομαίονς . . . etff νπύΒίίγμα των άλλων
(θνων καταφΧίξαν την Upav ποΚιν, Joseph, b. j. 2, 16, 4).*
νΐ70-8£ίκνυμι. : fut. iirobd^a; 1 aor. ίπεδίίξα; fr. Hdt.
and Thuc. down ; Sept. several times for TJH ; 1.
prop, tn show by placing under (i. e. before) the eyes :
iwf'Sei^f κ avTois τον πΧοϋτορ αΰτον, Esth. V. 1 1 ; add, Sir.
xli.K. 8 ; [al. give νπό in this compound the force of
'privily'; but cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 126]. 2. to
show by words and arguments, 1. e. to leach (for Π^ΙΠ, 2
Chr. .XV. 3) [A.V. freq. to icarn'} : rtvl, foil, by an inf. of
the thing, Mt. iii. 7 ; Lk. iii. 7 ; to teach by the use of a
figure, Tivi, foil, by indir. disc, Lk. vi. 47 ; xii. 5 ; to show
or teach by one's e.\ample, foil, by mi. Acts xx. 35; to
show i. e. make known (future things), foil, by indir.
disc. Acts i.^. 16.*
νίΓΟ-εί'χομα». (see inro, in. 1) : 1 aor. ΰπ(8(ξάμην•, pf.
νποδ4δ(•γμαι ; fr. Horn, down ; to receive as a guest : τινά,
Lk. xix. 6 ; Acts xvii. 7 ; Jas. ii. 25 ; «'s τόκ οίκον, Lk. χ.
38. [Cf. δέχομαι, fin.] *
vwo-St'e» : 1 aor. ΰπίδησα ; 1 aor. mid. νπ(&ησάμην ; pf.
pass, or mid. ptcp. woSfSij/xtVos ; fr. Hdt. down (in
Hom. with tmesis) ; to under-hind ; mostly in the mid.
to bind wider one's self, bind on ; [ptcp. siorfj ; with an
ace. of the thing: σανδάλίο, Mk. vi. 9 ; Acts xii. 8, {υπο-
δήματα, Xen. mem. 1, 6, 6 ; Plat. Gorg. p. 4S0 e.) ; with
an ace. of the member of the body : roiis πόδαϊ with iv
ΐτοιμασία added, with readiness [see (τοιμασία, 2], Eph.
vL 15 (πόδα σανδάλω, σακδαλίοίΓ, Lcian. quom. hist, sit
conscrib. 22 ; Ael. v. h. 1, 18). [Cf. B. § 135, 2.]*
νΐΓ08ημα, -το9, τό, (ΰποδίω), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for
Sj?3, what is bound under, a sandal, a sole fastened to
the foot with thongs: Mt. iii. 11 ; x. 10; Mk. i. 7 ; Lk.
iii. 16; X. 4; χτ. 22; xxM. 35 ; Jn.i. 27; with τώ>» ποδώ»
added. Acts vii. 33 ; xiii. 25, (ποδό;, Plat. Ale. 1 p. 128 a.).
[See σαι/δόλιο».] *
viriSiKos, -ov, i. q. νπ6 δίκην ων, under judgment, one who
has lost his suit ; with a dat. of the pers. debtor to one,
otping satisfaction to : τώ uem, i. e. liable to punishment
from God, Ro. iii. 19 [see Morison, Critical Exposition
of Romans Third, p. 147 sq.]. (Aeschyl., Plat., Andoc,
Lys., Isae., Dem., al.) *
ι5ΐΓο-ζύγιο5, -α, -οι», i. q. ύπ4 fvyo» &v, under the yoke ;
neut. TO υπ- as subst. a beast of burden (so fr. Theogn.
and Hdt. down) ; in bibl. Grk. (since the ass was the
common animal used by the Orientals on journeys and
for carrying burdens [cf. B. D. s. ν Ass, 1]) spec, an ass :
Mt. x.xi. 5 (Zech. ix. 9) ; 2 Pet. ii. 16; Sept. for Inn,
an ass.*
ΰπο-ξώννυμι ; fr. Hdt. down ; to under-gird : το πλοΐοι»,
to bind a ship together laterally with νποζώματα (Plat.
de rep. 10 p. G16 c), i. e. with girths or cables, to enable
it to survive the force of waves and tempest. Acts xxvii.
17 (where see Overbeck [or Ilackett ; esp. Smith, Voyage
and Shipwreck, etc., pp. 107 sq. 204 sqq. (cf. βοήθαα)'}).
(Polyb. 27, 3, 3.)•
νίΓΟ-κάτω, under, underneath : tivos [W. § 54, β ; Β.
§ 146, 1], Mt. xxii.44 LT TrAVH ; Mk. vi. 11 ; vii. 28;
[xii. 36 AVH] ; Lk. viii. 16 ; Jn. i. 50 (51) ; Heb. ii. 8;
Rev. V. 3, 13 [Tr mrg. br. the cl.] ; vi. 9 ; χϋ. 1. (Sept. ;
Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) [Cf. W. § 50,
7 N.l; B. § 146,4.]•
ύίΓΟ-κρίνομαι ; 1. to take up another's statements
in reference to what one has decided for one's self (mid.
κρίνομαι), i.e. to reply, answer, (Horn., Hdt., al.). 2.
to make answer (speak) on the stage, i. e. to personate
any one, play apart, (often so fr. Dem. down). Hence
3. to simulate, feign, pretend, (fr. Dem. and Polyb.
down) : foil, by an ace. with the inf. Lk. xx. 20. (2
Mace. vL 21, 24 ; 4 Mace. vi. 15 ; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 15 ;
xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 2.) [CoMP. : σνν-υποκρίνομαι.} *
ντΓΟ-κρισΐ5, -tais, ή, {υποκρίνομαι, q. v.) ; 1. an
answering; an atiswer (Ildt.). 2. the acting of a
stage-player (Aristot., Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut., Lcian.,
Artem., al.). 3. dissimulation, hypocrisy -.^It.xxm.
28; Mk. xii. 15; Lk. xii. 1; Gal. ii. 13; 1 Tim. iv. 2;
[Jas. V. 12 Rec."] ; 1 Pet. li. 1 [cf. B. § 123, 2], (2 Mace,
vi. 25 ; Polyb. 35, 2, 13 ; Lcian. am. 3 ; Aesop, fab. 106
(284); [Philo, quis rer. div. haeres § 8; de Josepho
ύπο-κριτήί, -οΰ, δ, (υποκρίνομαι, q. ν.) ; 1. one who
answers, an interpreter, (Plat., Lcian.). 2. an actor,
stage-player, ( Arstph., Xen., Plat., Ael., Hdian.). 3.
in bibl. Grk. a dissembler, pretender, hypocrite : Mt. vi. 2,
5, 16 ; vii. 5 ; xv. 7 ; xvi. 3 Rec; xxii. 18 ; wiii- 13 Rec,
14(13Tdf.), 15, 23, 25, 27, 29; xxiv. 51 ; Mk. vii. 6 ; Lk.
vi. 42 ; xi. 44 R L in br. ; xii. 56 ; xiii. 15. (Job xxxiv.
30; xxxvi. 13, for f]jn profane, impious.) [Mention is
made of Heimsoeth, De voce υποκριτής comment. (Bonnae,
1874, 4to.).]•
ϋπο-λαμβάνω; 2 aor. υπίΧαβον; 1. to take up
(lit. under [cf. υπό, 111. 1]) in order to raise, to bear on
high, (Hdt. 1, 24) ; to lake up and carry away {Sxrnep νηα
afc/iot νπο'Καβόντα, Stob. serm. 6 p. 79, 1 7) : tito. Acts L
9 (see οφ^αλ/χο'ϊ, mid.). 2. to receive hospitably, wel-
come: Ttra,3Jn. SLTTrWH (Xen. an. 1, 1, 7). 3.
to take up i. e. follow in speech, in order either to reply
to or controvert or supplement what another has said
(very often so in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down) : inoKajiaip
ΐίπιν, Lk. X. 30 (for nj>,. Job ii. 4 ; iv. 1 ; vi. 1 ; ix. 1 ;
xi. 1 ; xii. 1, etc.). 4. to take up in the mind, i. e.
to assume, suppose: Acts ii. 15; foil, by ότι (sc πλείον
άγαπήσΐΐ), Lk. vii. 43, (Job xxv. 3; Tob. vi. 18; Sap.
xvii. 2 ; 3 Mace. iii. 8 ; 4 Mace. v. 17 (18) etc., and often
in prof. auth. fr. Xen. and Plat, down).*
ύΐΓΟ-λ»μμα [-\ιμμα WH (see their App. p. 154 ; cf. I,
0], Tof, TO, a remnant (see κατάλ(ΐμμα) : Ro. ix. 27 L Τ
TrWH. (Sept.; Aristot., Theophr., Plut., Galen.) •
ι5ΐΓο-λ6£ΐΓω : 1 aor. pass. νπίΚ^ίφθην ; f r. Hom. down ;
Sept. for TXipn and τηιπ ; lo leave behind [see νπό,
ΠΙ. 1]; pass, to be left behind, left remaining, Sept. for
iXiyj and inij : used of a survivor, Ro. xi. 3.*
νπ-ολήνιον, -ου, τό, (ΐ. e. τό ύπο την \ηνόν, cf. τύ νηο•
{υγιον), α vessel placed under a press (and in the Orient
υτΓοΚιμ,Ίτάνω
644
ΐΓΤΓοστασις
usually sunk in the earth) to receive the expressed juice
of the grapes, a pit : [^ωρυξιν ν7ΓοΧ.ηνίον, R. V. lie digged a
pit for the winepress^, Mk. xii. 1 ; see \ηι/ό{ [and B. D.
9. V. Winepress]. (Demiopr. ap. Poll. 10 (29), 130;
Geop. ; Sept. for 3p', Is. .\vi. 10; Joel iii. 13 (iv. 18);
lla<;g. ii. Hi; ZecL. .xiv. 10 Alex.)*
ΰτΓο-λιμπάνω ; {Χιμπάνω, less common form of the verb
λίίττω) ; to leave, leave behind: 1 Pet. ii. 21. (Themist. ;
eccl. and Byzant. writ. ; to fail, Dion. Hal. 1, 23.)'
ΰτΓΟ-μί'νω ; impf. ΰπίμίνον ; fut. 2 pers. plur. νπομ€ν(Ίτΐ ;
1 aor. ifff/if ti/a ; pf. ptcp. νπομ^μενηκώ^ ; fr. Horn, down ;
Sept. for nip, η3Π, hx)] ; 1. to remain i. e. larnj
behind: foil, by tV with a dat. of the place, Lk. ii. 43 ;
ixfi, Acts xvii. 14. 2. to remain 1. e. abide, not re-
cede or flee ; trop. a. to persevere : absol. and em-
phat., under misfortunes and trials to hold fast to one's
faith in Christ [R. V. commonly endure], Mt. x. 22 ;
xxiv. 13; Mk. xiii. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 12 [cf. vs. 10 in b.];
Jas. V. 11 ; with rj θλίψα added, when trial assails
[A. V. in tribulation (i. e. dat. of circumstances or condi-
tion)], (cf. Kuhner § 426, 3 [.Jelf § 603, 1]), Ro. xii. 12
(quite different is {ητομίν^ιν τω κυρίω, T\ip'^ '7"Π1Π, Lam.
iii. 21, 24 ; Mic. vii. 7 ; 2 K. vi. 33 ; "-'ί 7}3η, Ps. ,χχχϋ.
(xxxiii.) 20, to cleave faithfully to [A. V. wait for] the
Lord, where the dat. depends on the verb contrary to
Grk. usage [cf. W. § 52, 16j). b. to endure, bear
braveli/ and calmly : absol., ill-treatment, 1 Pet. ii. 20 ;
«Γ TratSdav, i. e. tls το παώαΐκσθαι, l_for or unio chasten-
ing], Heb. xii. 7 ace. to the reading of L Τ Tr WII which
is defended at length by Delitzsch ad loc. [and adopted
by Riehm (LehrbegrifiE u. s. w. p. 758 note), Alford, Moul-
ton, al.], but successfully overthrown [?] by Fritzsche
(De conformatione N. Ti. critica quam Lchm. edidit,
p. 24 sqq.) [and rejected by the majority of commenta-
tors (Bleek, Liinemann, Kurtz, al.)]. with an ace. of
the thing, i Co. xiii. 7 ; 2 Tim. ii. 10 ; Heb. x. 32 ; .xii.
2sq. 7 RG; Jas. i. 12.•
νπο-μιμνήσκω ; fut. ίητομνησω ; 1 aor. inf. ΰπομνησαι ; 1
aor. pass, ΐητ^μνησθηιι; fr. Horn, down; [cf. our 'sug-
gest', see άνάμι/ησίί]; 1. actively, to cause one lo
remember, bring lo remembrance, recall to mind : τί (to
another), 2 Tim. ii. 14 ; riua Tt, Jn. xiv. 26 (Thuc. 7,
64 ; Xen. Hier. 1,3; Plat., Isocr., Dem.) ; with implied
censure, 3 Jn. 10; rtra irepi twos, lo put one in remem-
brance, admonish, of something: 2 Pet. i. 12 (Plat. Phaedr.
p. 275 d.) ; τινά, foil, by art, Jude 5 (Xen. mem. 3, 9, 8 ;
Plat, de rep. 5 p. 452 c. ; Ael. v. h. 4, 17); τινά, foil, by
an inf. (indicating what must be done). Tit. iii. 1 (Xen.
hipparch. 8, 10). 2. passively, to be reminded, to
remember: nv6s, Lk. xxii. 61.*
νπό-μνησίϊ, -ίωί, ή, (ίπομιμντισκω), fr. Eur., Thuc,
Plat, down; a. transitively, (Vulg. commonitio),
a reminding (2 Mace. vi. 1 7) : e» ύτιομνήσα, by putting
vou in remembrance, 2 Pet. i. 13; iii. 1 [W. § 61 3
b.]. b. intrans. remembrance : with a gen. of the
obj. 2 Tim. 1. δ [(R. V. having been reminded of etc.) ;
aL adhere to the trans, sense (see Elhcott, Huther,
Holtzmann ad loc.). Syn. sea ανάμνησκ, fin.] *
ΰιτο-μοίτή, -ήί, ή, (wro/iiw») ; 1. steadfastness, con-
stancy, endurance, (Vulg. in 1 Th. i. 3 sustinentia, in
Jas. V. 11 suffereritia) ; in the N. T. the characteristic
of a man who is unswerved from his deliberate pur-
pose and his loyalty to faith and piety by even the
greatest trials and sufferings: Lk. viii. 15; xxi. 19;
Ro. v. 3 sq. ; χ v. 4 sq. ; 2 Co. vi. 4 ; xii. 12 ; Col. i. 11 ;
2Th. i.4; 1 Tim. vi. 11 ; 2Tim. iii. 10; Tit. ii. 2 ; Ileb.
x. 36 ; Jas. i. 3 sq. ; v. 11 ; 2 Pet. i. 6 ; Rev. ii. 2 sq. 19;
.xiii. 10; xiv. 12, (cf. 4 Mace. i. 11; ix. 8, 30; xv. 30(27);
xvii. 4, 12, 23) ; with a gen. of the thing persevered
in [W. § 30, 1 fin.] : τοϋ ίργου άγαθοϋ, Ro. ii. 7 ; tjjs e\iri-
8os, 1 Th. i. 3 [cf. B. 155 (136)] ; δι νπομονηί, [with pa-
tience (cf. W. § 51, lb.) i. e.] patiently and steadfastly,
Ro. viii. 25 ; Heb. xii. 1. 2. α /lalienl, steadfast
waiting for; [al. question this sense in the Xew Test.,
and render the gen. by 'characterizing', 'in respect to',
etc.]: Χριστού (gen. of the obj.), the return of Christ
from heaven, 2 Th. iii. 5 ; Rev. i. 9 (where L Τ Tr WH
ϊνΊησοϋ [which is in Jesus]) ; iii. 10, (cf. Ps. xxxviii.
(xxxix.) 8 ; for T\'^p'2, expectation, hope, 2 Esdr. x. 2 ;
Jer. xiv. 8; xvii. 13; for Πΐρπ, hope, Ps. [ίχ. 19]; Ixi.
(kii.)6; L\x. (Ixxi.) 5; [.lob'xiv. 19] ; for nSniTl, Prov.
X. 28 Symm.; ΰπομίνιιν τινά, Xen. an. 4, 1, 21 ; App. b.
civ. 5, 81). 3. a patient enduring, sustaining: τω»
παθημάτων, 2 Co. i. 6 (λύπι/ί, Plat, defin. p. 412 c. ; θανά-
του, Plut. Pelop. 1). [Syx. see μακροθυμία, fin.]*
ΰΐΓο-νθ€ω, -ώ ; impf. Smtvoovv; fr. Hdt. down; to sup-
pose, surmise: Acts xxv. 18; foil, by an ace. with the
inf.. Acts .xiii. 25 [(cf. t/s, 4)] ; x.xvii. 27.•
ΰττένοια, -as, η, (ΐητονοίω), fr. Thuc. down, a surmising ι
1 Tim. vi. 4.•
ΰίΓΟ-τηοϊω, a later form of νποπύζω, to keep down, keep
in subjection : 1 Co. ix. 27 Tdf. ed. 7 after the faulty
reading of some Mss. for νπωπιάζω, q. v. Cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 461 ; [Soph. Le.x. s. v.; W. § 5, 1 d. 5; see
άμφίάζω].'
νίΓο-ιτλί'ω : 1 aor. xmiiiKevaa ; (Vulg. subnavigo) ; to
sail under, i. e. to sail close by, pass to the leeward of:
with the ace. of the place, Acts xxvlL 4, 7. (Dio Cass.,
Dio Chr., al.) *
viro-irvtw : 1 aor. ΰττίπντυσα ; a. to blow under-
neath (.Vristot.). b. lo blow softly [see υπό, IIL 2] :
Acts xxvii. 13.•
tnroiroSiov, -ov, ro, (ΰπό and jroir), a footstool (Lat.
suppedaneum) : Mt. v. 35 ; Acts vii. 49 (fr. Is. Ixvi. 1) ;
Jas. ii. 3 ; τιβίναι τίνα ΰποπ. τά>» ποθώ» Ttvos, to make
one the footstool of one's feet, i. e. to subject, reduce un-
der one's power, (a metaph. taken from the practice
of conquerors who placed their feet on the necks of their
conquered enemies) : Mt. xxii. 44 R G ; Mk. xii. 36
[here WH νποκάτω των π-]; Lk. xx. 43; Acts ii. 35;
Heb. i. 13 ; x. 13, after Ps. clx. (ex.) 2. (Lcian., Athen.,
al. ; Sept. for αππ ; [cf. ΛΥ. 26].) •
viro-o-raois, -ίωί, η, (νφίστημι), a word very com. in
Grk. auth., esp. fr. Aristot. on, in widely different
senses, of which only those will be noticed which serve
to illustrate N. T. usage ; 1. a setting or placing
ϋτΓοστελλω
645
οφέρΰ»
under; thing put under, substructure, foundation : Ps.
IxviiL (Ixix.) 3; rov οίκον, £zek. xliii. 11 ; τοϋ τάφου,
Diod. 1, 66. 2. that which has foundation, is firm ;
hence, a. that which has actual existence ; a sub-
stance, real being : των ev depi φαντασμάτων τα μίν ΐστι
κοΓ* ξμφασιν, τα 8e Kaff ΰπόστασιν, Aristot. de mundo, 4,
19 p. 395% 30; φαντασία» μίν ίχαν πλούτου, ΰπόστασιν
&€ μή, Artem. oneir. 3, 14; (ή αίγη) νπόστασιν ιδίαν οίκ
ίχίί, γ€ννάται δί cV φ\ογόί, Pliilo de incorruptibil. mundi
§ IX ; similarly in other writ. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. 5; L.
and S. s. v. III. 2]. b. the substantial quality, na-
ture, of any pers. or thing : τοΟ θιοΰ [R. V. sιώstance'],
Heb. i. 3 (Sap. xvi. 21 ; i8e . . . tivos ϋποστάσίω! η rivot
fihovs τχτγχάνουσιν otis cpe'iTC και νομίζίτί d^ois, Epist. ad
Diogn. 2, 1 ; [cf. Suicer, Thesaur. s. v.]). c. steadi-
ness of mind, firmness, courage, resolution, (pi 8i 'PoStot
θ€ωροΰντα την των Βυζαντινών ϋττόστασιν, Polyb. 4, 50,
10; ον;^ οντω την δυναμιν^ ως την ϋττόστασιν αντοΰ και τόλ-
μαν καταπίπΧηγμΐνων των εναντίων, id. 6, 55, 2 ; add,
Diod. 16, 32 sq. ; Joseph, antt. 18, 1, 6) ; confidence, firm
trust, assurance : 2 Co. ix. 4 ; xi. 17 ; Heb. iii. 14; xi. 1,
(for nijpp, Ruth i. 12; Ezek. xix. 5; for nSnin, Ps.
xxxviii. (xxxix.) S). Cf. Bleek, Br. an d. Hebr. ii. 1 pp.
60 scjq. 4(;2 sqq. ; Srhlaller, (ilaube im X. T. p. 581.•
ϊίΓο-στίλλω : impf. ΰπίστίλλον; 1 aor. mid. ύπ-Εστβίλά-
μην ; 1. Act. to draw down, let down, lower : ίστίυν,
Pind. Isthm. 2, 59 ; to withdraw, [draw backl : ΐμαυτόν,
of a timid person. Gal. ii. 12 ([cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.];
often so in Polyb.). 2. Mid. to withdraw one's self,
i. e. to be timid, to cower, shrink : of those who from timid-
ity hesitate to avow what they believe, Heb. x. 38 (fr.
Habak. ii. 4 [cf. W. 523 (487)]) ; to be unwilling to utter
from fear, to shrink from declaring, to conceal, dissemble :
foil, by ToO with the inf. [W. 325 (305); B. 270 (232)],
Acts XX. 27 ; oi8ev, ibid. 20, (often so in Dem. ; cf.
Reiske, Index graecit. Dem. p. 774 sq. ; Joseph, vit. § 54 ;
b. j. 1, 20,1).*
ΰτΓο^τΓολή, -ήί, η, (ύνοστίλλω, q.v.), prop, a withdraw-
ing (\'ulg. subtraclio), [in a good sense, Plut. anim. an
Corp. a£f. sint pej. § 3 sub fin.] ; the timidity of one stealthi-
ly retreating : οίκ ίσμίν ίποστολξί (see dpi, IV. 1 g.),
we have no part in shrinking back etc., we are free from
the cowardice of etc. [R.Y. we are not of them that shrink
back etc.], Heb. x. 39 {λάθρα τα πολλά καΐ μ(& νποστοΚης
ίκακονρτγησίν, Joseph, b. j. 2, 14, 2 ; ύποστολην ποιούνται,
antt. Hi, 4, 3).*
ντΓο^Γτρίφω ; impf. ώτί'στρίφοι» ; f ut. υποστρίψω ; 1 aor.
νπίστμ^ψα ; fr. Horn, down ; .Sept. for 2ra ; 1.
trans, to turn back, to turn about: as 'jnrovr, Horn. H. 5,
681. 2. intrans. to turn back i. e. to return : absol.,
Mk. xiv. 40 [here L λΥΗ πάλιν ίΚθύν Tr (\θών'\ ; Lk. ii.
20 (here Rec. ίπ-ίοτρίφ.), 43 ; viii. 37,40; ix. 10; .x. 17;
xvii. 15; xix. 12; x.xiii. 48, 56; Acts viii. 28 ; foil, by an
inf. of purpose, Lk. xvii. 18; foil, by hia with a gen. of
place. Acts xx. 3 ; «5 with an ace. of place, Lk. i. 56 ; ii.
89 [here Τ Trmrg. WH ίπιστρίφ.^, 45 ; iv. 14 ; vii. 10 ;
TiiL 39; xi. 24; x.xiv. 33, 52; Acts i. 12; viii. 25; xiii.
It; xiv. 21 ; xxi. 6 ; xxii. 1 7 ; xxiii. 32 ; GaL i. 1 7 ; tis
ίιαφθοράν. Acts xiii. 34 ; από with a gen. of place, Lk.
iv. 1 ; xxiv. 9 [WH br. αϊτό etc.] ; από with a gen. of the
business, Heb. vii. 1 ; « with ε. gen. of place, Acts
xii. 25 ; ix της ayias ΐντοΚη!, of those who after embrac-
ing Christianity apostatize, 2 Pet. ii. 21 TTr WH, but
Lchm. (against the authorities) els τα οπίσω από της
etc.*
ΰτΓΟΗΓτρώννυμι and ΰποστρωννύω (later forms, found in
Plut., Themist., Allien., al., for the earlier ΰποστορίνννμι
and ΰποστόρνυμι) : impf. 3 pers. j)lur. ύπ^στρώννυαν ; to
strew, spread under: τί, Lk. xL\. 36 (Is. Iviii. 5).*
νίΓΟ-ταγή, -ήϊ, η, 1. the act of subjecting (Dion.
Hal.). 2. obedience, subjection : 2 Co. ix. 13 (on
which see όμολσγία, b.) ; Gal. ii. 5 ; 1 Tim. ii. 11 ; iii. 4.*
νπ•ο.τασ•σ•ω : 1 aor. υπέταξα ; Pass., pf. imoriTayuai ; 2
aor. ΰπιτάγην ; 2 fut. ύποταγησομαι ; pres. mid. ΰποτάιτ•
σομαι ; to arrange under, to subordinate ; to subject, put in
subjection : τινϊ τι or τίνα, 1 Co. xv. 27•^ ; Heb. ii. 5 ; PhiL
iii. 21 ; pass., Ro. viii. 20 [see δω, Β. II. lb.]; 1 Ca
XV. 27'' sq. ; 1 Pet. iii. 22; τινά or τΐ ύπο τοϋϊ πόδαι
τινόί, 1 Co. XV. 27' ; Eph. i. 22 ; υποκάτω των ποδών tivos,
Heb. ii. 8 ; mid. to subject one's self, to obey ; to submit
to one's control ; to yield to one's admonition or advice:
absol., Ro. xiii. 5; 1 Co. xiv. 34 [cf. B. § 151, 30]; τινί,
Lk. ii. 51; x. 17, 20; Ro. viii. 7; xiii. 1; 1 Co. xiv. 32;
•xvi. 16 ; Eph. v. 21 sq. [but in 22 G Τ WH txt. om. Tr
mrg. br. ΰποτάσσ], 24; Col. iii. 18; Tit. ii. 5, 9 ; iii. 1 ;
1 Pet. ii. 18 ; iii. 1, 5 ; v. 5 ; 2 aor. pass, with mid. force,
to obey [R. V. subject one's self, B. 52 (46)], Ro. x. 3;
impv. obey, be subject : Jas. iv. 7 ; 1 Pet. ii. 13 ; v. 5 ; 2
fut. pass. Heb. xii. 9. (Sept. ; [Aristot.], Polyb., Plut.,
Arr., Hdian.) *
ι;πο-τ(βημ.ι : 1 aor. ΰπίθηκα ; pres. mid. ptcp. νποτιθίμ*-
vos ; fr. Horn, down ; to place under (cf. υπό, III. 1) : τί,
Ko. xvi. 4 (on which see τράχηλοι). Mid. metaph. to
supply, suggest, (mid. frotn one's own resources) ; with a
dat. of the pers. and ace. of the thing : ταΰτα, these in-
structions, 1 Tim. iv. 6. (Often so in prof. auth. fr.
Horn, down.) *
ντΓΟ-τρί'χω: 2 aor. ίπίδρομον; fr. Horn, down; prop.
to run under ; in N. T. once, viz. of navigators, to run
past a place on the shore, and therefore in a higher posi-
tion (see ΰποπλ/ω) : νησίον, Acts xxvii. 16 [R. V. run-
ning under the lee of; cf. Hackett ad loc.]. *
νΐΓ0-τ«πωσΐ5, -«ωί , ή, (ΰποτνπόω, to delineate, outline) ;
a. an outline, sketch, brief and suminary exposition, (Sext.
Empir., Diog. Laert., al.). b. an example, pattern:
πράί ύπστ. των μ€λλόντων πιστtie^v κτλ. for an example
of those who should hereafter believe, i. e. to show by
the example of my conversion that the same grace which
I had obtained would not be wanting also to those who
should hereafter believe, 1 Tim. i. 16; the pattern
placed before one to be held fast and copied, model:
vytatvovTMV λόγων, 2 Tim. 1. 13.*
ντΓο-φί'ρω ; 1 aor. ΰπί]ν(γκα ; 2 aor. inf. «m'ewyitciv ; fr.
Horn, down ; to bear by being under, bear up (a thing
placed on one's shoulders) ; trop. to bear patiently, to en-
dure, (often so fr. Xen. and Plat, down) : τί, 1 Co. x.
ντΓοχωρβω
646
νψηΧοφροιιέω
13 ; 2 Tim. iii. 11 ; 1 Pet. ii. 19. (Prov. vi. 33 ; Ps. Ixviii.
(Ixix.) 8; Mic. vii. 9; Job ii. 10.)•
ΐίΓο-χωρί'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ύπ(χώρησα•, fr. Iloni. down; to
go back [see ΰπό, III. 1 iin- j ; '« icillulraic : fir τόπον ΐρη-
μον. ΙΑ. i.\. 10; with c'v and a dat. of the place (see tV,
I. 7), l.k. V. l(i [ct. \V. §.00, 4 a.; B. 312 CiUS)].'
ΐιτωιι-ιάζω ; (fr. ΰπώττιον, compounded of ijio and ωψ,
wwk, wliich denotes a. that part of the face which
is under tlie eyes ; b. a blow in that part of the face ;
a black and blue spot, a bruise) ; prop, lo beat black: and
blue, to smite so an to cause bruises and livid spots, (Aris-
tot. rhet. 3, 11, 15 p. 1413", 20; Plut. mor. p. 921 f.; Diog.
Laijrt. 6, .S9) : to σώμα, like a boxer I buffet my body,
handle it roughly, discipline it by hardships, 1 Co. ix. 27 ;
metaph. (πόλΕΐΓ ύπωπιασμίνΜ, cities terribly scourged
and afflicted by war, bearing the marks of devastation,
Arstph. pax 541) ίο gice one intolerable annotjance [' beat
one out', 'wear one out'], by entreaties [cf. reXof, 1 a.],
Lk. xviii. 5 (cf. aliquem rogitando obtundat, Ten Eun.
3,5,6).*
is, Wr, 0, ή, fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times for
Tin, a swine : 2 Pet. ii. 22.*
ϋσ-σ•ωΐΓ05 [on the breathing see WH. App. p. 144»;
Lchm. (in both his edd.) spells it with one σ in Jn.], -ου,
ή, (Hebr. 3US, Ex. xii. 22 ; Num. xix. 6, 18, etc.), Iiijssop,
a plant a bunch of which was used by the Hebrews in
their ritual sprinklings: Ileb. ix. 19; ϋσσώπω, i. q.
κάΚάμω ίσσώπου, Jn. xix. 29. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.
Ysop; Arnold in Herzog xviii. p. 337 sq.; Furrer in
Schenkel v. 685 sq. ; [Riehm p. 1771 sq. ; Low, Aram.
Pflanzennamen, § 93 ; Tristram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 455
sq. ; B. 1). s. V. (esp. Am. ed.)].*
ΰ(ΓΤ€ρ€'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ίστίρησα ; pf. ίστίρηκα ; Pass.,
pres. ύστφοΟμαι ; 1 aor. ptcp. ioTfp?;5eif ; {varfpos); 1.
Act. to be varepos i. e. behind ; i. e. a. to come late
or too tardihj (so in prof. auth. fr. Ildt. down) : Heb. iv.
1 ; to be left behind in the race and so fail to reach the
goal, to fall short of the end ; with από and the gen. in-
dicating the end, metaph. /aiV to become a partaker : από
της χάρίτο!, Heb. xii. 15 [al. render here fall back (i.e.
away)y)o;«; cf. AV. § 30, 6 b. ; B. 322 (276) sq.cf. § 132,
δ] (Eccl. vi. 2). b. to be inferior, in power, influ-
ence, rank, 1 Co. xii. 24 (where L Τ Tr WH pass, iart-
ρονμίνω) ; in virtue, τΊ ίτι ίστ€ρώ ; in what am I still de-
ficient "[A.V. what lack I tjet (cf. B. § 131, 10)], Mt. xix.
20 (Sir. Ii. 24 ; ίνα yvS> τί υστερώ iyii, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.)
5 ; /χτ^δ' €v αλλω μηhfv\ pepft άρ^της νστ€ρονντας. Plat, de
rep. 6 p. 484 d.) ; μη8(υ or ov&iv foil, by a gen. (depend-
ing on the idea of comparison contained in the verb [B.
§ 132, 22]) of the person, to be inferior to [A.V. to be be-
hind~\ another in nothing, 2 Co. xi. 5; xii. 11. c.
to fail, be tcanling, (Diosc. 5, 86) : Jn. ii. 3 [not Tdf.] ;
ίν σοι [Τ AVHTrmrg. at (cf. B. u. s.)] varfpe'i, Mk. x.
21. d. to be in want of, lack: with a gen. of the
thing [W. § 30, 6], I.k. xxii. 35 (.Joseph, antt. 2, 2, 1). 2.
Pass, to suffer want [λΥ. 260 (244)] : Lk. xv. 14 ; 2 Co.
xi. 9 (8) ; Heb. xi. 37, (Sir. xi. 11) ; opp. to π^μισσιύαν,
to abound, Phil. iv. 12; tito's, to be devoid [II. V. fall
short"] of, Ro. iii. 23 (Diod. 18, 71 ; Joseph, antt. 15, 6,
7) ; (V Ttw, to suffer want in any respect, 1 Co. i. 7, opp.
to π\ovτiζ(σθa^ ίν Tiw, ibid. 5 ; to lack (be inferior) in
excellence, worth, opp. to ntpiaatveiv, [A. V. to be the tvorse
. . . the belter], 1 Co. viii. 8. [COMP. : άφ-υστίρί'ω.] *
ν(ΓΓ<ρημα, -tos, to, {νστ(ρίω) ', a. dejiciency, that
which is lacking: plur. with a gen. of the thing whose
deficiency is to be filled up. Col. i. 24 (on which see
άιτϋΐ/α7Γλτ)ρόω, and Αλίψΐί sub fin.) ; 1 Th. iii. 10; to ίστ.
with a gen. [or its equiv.] of the pers., the absence of one,
1 Co. xvi. 17 [νμ- being taken objectively (\V. §22,
7 ; B. § 132, 3) ; al. take ϋμ. subjectively and render that
ichich icas lacking on your part]; το ϋμων ίστ. της npoc
μι XeiTovpyias, your absence, owing to which something
was lacking in the service conferred on me (by you),
Phil. ii. 30. b. in reference to property and re-
sources, poverty, want, destitution : Lk. xxi. 4 ; 2 Co. viii.
14 (13); ix. 12; xi. 9, (Ps. xx-xiii. (x.xxiv.) 10; Judg.
xviii. 10, etc. ; eccl. writ.).*
ΰο-Γί'ρησίϊ, -fojt, S], (ΰστ(ρίω), want, poverty: Mk. xii.
44 ; καθ' ΰστίρησιν, on account of want, Phil. iv. 11 [cf.
κατά. II. 3 c. y. p. 328' hot.]. (Eccl. writ.) *
vVrcpoS) -a, -ov, latter, later, coming after : iv ύστίροκ
καιροί!, 1 Tim. iv. 1 ; ό ϋστ. i. q. the second, Mt. xxi. 31
LTrWH, but cf. Fritzsche's and Meyer's crit. notes
[esp. WII. App.] ad loc. Neut. ίστ(ρον, fr. Hom.
down, adverbially, afterward, after this, later, lastly, used
alike of a shorter and of a longer period : Mt. iv. 2 ; xxi.
29, 32, 37 ; xxv. 11 ; xxvi. 60 ; Mk. xvi. 14 ; Lk. iv. 2
Rec. ; [xx. 32 L Τ Tr WH] ; Jn. xiii. 36 ; Heb. xii. 11 ;
with a gen. afier one, Mt. xxii. 27; Lk. xx. 32 [RG].•
νψα(νω ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for J'lX ; to weave : Lk.
xii. 27 Τ WH (rejected) mrg.*
νψαντο'ΐ, -ή, -όν, (υφαίνω, q. v.), fr. Horn, down ; woven:
Jn. xix. 23. (For JiK, Ex. xxxvi. 30 (xxxix. 22);
xxxvi. 35 (xxxix. 27); for 3ΠΠ, Ex. xxvi. 31, etc.)'
νψηλο'ΐ, -η, -όν, (ίψι on high, νφοί), [fr. Hom. down],
high ; lofty ; a. prop, of place : Spos, Mt. iv. 8 ;
xvii. 1 ; Mk. ix. 2; Lk.iv. 5 RGLbr. ; Rev. xxi. 10; τ(Ίχυς,
Rev. xxi. 12; neut. τα ΰφηλά (the heights of heaven;
Sept. for DilD, Ps. xeii. (xciii.) 4 ; cxii. (cxiii.) 5 ; Is.
xxxiii. 5 ; Ivii. 15), heaven [A.V. on high ; cf. B. § 124,
8d.], Heb. i. 3; exalted on high: ΰφη\ότ(ρθί των ουρανών,
[made higher than the heavens], of Christ raised to the
right hand of God, Heb. vii. 26 (cf. Eph. iv. 10); pera
βραχίονας ΰψι^λοί, ^vilh a high (uplifted) arm, i. e. with
sifnal power. Acts xiii. 1 7 (Sept. often t'v βραχίονι ύψηΧω
for η;ίΰρ V.1""3' ^s in Ex. vi. 6 ; Dent. v. 15). b.
metaph. eminent, exalted: in influence and honor, Lk.
xvi. 15; νφηλα φρονΛν, Ιο set the mind on, to seek, high
things (as honors and riches), to be aspiring, Ro. xii.
16;' also Ro. xi. 20 L mrg. Τ Tr WH ; 1 Tim. vi. 17 Τ
AVH mrg.; (Lcian. Icaromen. 11, Hermot. 5).*
νψηλο-φρονί'ω, -ώ; (υψηλόφρων, and this fr. ύψηΧος
and φρήν) ; to be high-minded, proud : Ro. xi. 20 [R G L
txt.]; 1 Tim. vi. 17 [RG LTrWH txt.], (Schol. ad
Pind. Pyth. 2, 91). In Grk. writ. μτγα\οφρον(ίν is more
common.•
ύψιστος
64Τ
φαίνω
ΰψκΓτος, -η, -ον, (superl. ; fr. vijn on high), in Grk. writ.
mostly poetic, highest, most high ; a. of place: neut.
τά ϋψιστα (Sept. for Ο'ΏΠΟ), the highest regions, i. e.
heaven (see v\ln]\os, a.), Mt. xxi. 9 ; Mk. xi. 10; Lk. ii.
14 ; xix. 38, (Job xvi. 19 ; Is. Ivii. 15). b. of rank :
of God, ό ^fof ό ϋ•ψιστος, the most high God, Mk. v. 7 ;
Lk. viii. 28 ; Acts xvi. 17 ; Ileb. vii. 1 ; [Gen. xiv. 18;
Philo de leg. ad Gaium § 23] ; and simply ό ίψιστοϊ, the
Most High, Acts vii. 48; and without the article (cf. B.
§ 124, 8 b. note; [WH. Intr. § 416]), Lk. i. 32, 35, 76;
vi. 35, and very often in Sir.; (Ilebr. [V'?;?., ]'i''7JJ '7K,
p'S;;? D'H^i?, \y'^Z nin; ; Zeis ΰψιστοί, Find. Nem. 1,
9o'; 11, 2; Aesc'hyl. Eum. 28).*
νψο5, -ous, TO, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Sept. for
DIIO, noip, niJ, etc., height : prop, of measure, Eph. iii.
18 ; Rev. xxi. 16; of place, heaven [A.V. on high}, Eph.
iv. 8 (fr. Ps. Ixvii. (l.xviii.) 19); Lk. i. 78; x.xiv. 49;
metaph. rank, high station : Jas. i. 9 (Job v. II ; 1 Mace.
L 40 ; X. 24 ; ίψοί άριτηί, Plut. Popl. G).*
νψο'ω, -ω ; f ut. νψώσω ; 1 aor. ΰψωσα ; Pass., 1 aor.
νψώΰην; 1 fut. Ιψωθησομαι ; (ίψοί) ; [Batr. 81; Hip-
pocr., al.J ; Sept. very often for on, also for P3i, Ktyj,
7lJ, etc. ; lo lift up on high, to exalt, (Vulg. exalto) : τινά
or τι, prop, of place, Jn. iii. 14*; used of the elevation
of Jesus on the cross, Jn. iii. 14' ; viii. 28 ; xii. 34 ; with ϊκ
της yrii added, to remove from (lit. out of) the earth by
crucifixion (l-^ovv τίνα foil, by «, Ps. ix. 14), Jn. xii. 32
(the Evangelist himself interprets the word of the lift-
ing up upon the cross, but a careful comparison of viii. 28
and xii. 32 renders it probable that Jesus spoke of the
heavenly exaltation which he was to attain by the cru-
cifixion (cf. xii. 23 sqq., xiii. 31 sqq., Lk. xxiv. 26), and
employed the Aramaic word DP, the ambiguity of which
allowed it to be understood of the crucUision ; cf . Bleek,
Beitrage zur EvangeUenkritik, p. 231 sq.; [the 'lifting
up ' includes death and the victory over death ; the pas-
sion itself is regarded as a glorification ; cf. Westcott
ad loc.]) ; nva ίωι τοΰ οίρανοΟ (opp. to καταίίιβάζίΐν [or
καταβαίναν] ?ωί άδον), metaph. to raise to the very sum-
mit of opulence and prosperity, pass., Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x.
15, [al. understand exaltation in privilege as referred to
in these pass, (see vs. 21 in Mt.)] ; simply rim, lo exalt,
lo raise to dignity, honor, and happiness : Lk. i. 52 (where
opp. to ταπ(ΐνω) ; Acts xiii. 17; to that state of mind
which ought to characterize a Christian, 2 Co. xi. 7 ; to
raise the spirits by the blessings of salvation, Jas. iv. 10 ;
1 Pet. V. 6; ΐμαυτόν, to exalt one's se//' (with haughti-
ness and empty pride), (opp. to ταπαυω), Mt. xxiu. 12 ;
Lk. xiv. 11 ; χ viii. 14; — in these same pass, ΰ^ΐύβήσΐτοί
occurs, he shall be raised to honor. By a union of the
literal and the tropical senses God is said ν\Ι/ώσαι Christ
777 δίξιά αϋτοϋ. Acts v. 31 ; pass. Acts ii. 33 ; the dative
in this phrase, judged according to Greek usage, hardly
bears any other meaning ^han with (by means of) his
right hand (his power) [R. V. txt.] ; but the context
forbids it to denote anything except at (to) the right hand
of God [so R. V. mrg.] ; hence the opinion of those
has great probability who regard Peter's phrase as
formed on the model of the Aramaean TD'*? ; cf. Bleek,
Einl. in das N. T. ed. 1, p. 346 [but see W. 214 (201),
215 (202) ; Meyer ad loc. CoMP. : νπ(ρ-νψόω.] *
ύψωμα, -TOf, τό, (νψ•(5ω), thing elevated, height : prop,
of space, opp. to βάθος, Ro. viii. 39 (toS aepos, Philo de
praem. et poen. § 1 ; όταν ΰ^ψωμα \άβη μ€γιστον ό ηλίθ{,
Plut. mor. p. 782 d.) ; spec, elevated structure i. e. bat^
rier, rampart, bulwark: 2 Co. x. 5. [Sept. (in Jud. x. 8;
xiii. 4, actively) ; cod. Ven. for 'heave-o£fering' in Lev.
vii 14, 32 ; Num. xviii. 24 sqq.] •
Φ
ψόγος, -ου, 4, (φάγω), a voracious man, a glutton, (it
b a subst., and differs fr. φαγάς the adj.; cf. φνγόί,
φίώάί; see Fritzsche on Mark p. 790 sqq., but cf.
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 28; W. § 16, 3 c. a-, [and
§ 6, 1 i. ; esp. Chandler § 230]) : joined with olvonanjs,
Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34.•
φάγω, see (σθΐω.
ψαιλονης (so Rec.'"" •»ρΐ>) or φ(\άνης (with most Mss.
including cod. Sin., Rec.''" ''^ G L Τ Tr [WH (cf. their
Intr. § 404 and App. p. 151*; W. Dindorf in Steph.
Thes. s. V. φαινόλης, col. 583)]), by metath. for the more
com. φαινάλης (found in [Epict. 4, S, 24] ; Artem. oneir.
S, 3; 5, 29 ; Pollux 7, (13) 61 ; Athen. 8 p. 97), -ov, 6, Lat.
paenula, a trav€U{ng-<;hak,Msed for protection against
stormy weather: 2 Tim. iv. 13, where others errone-
ously understand it to mean a ease or receptacle for
books as even the Syriac renders it ^sAs AaS.*
φαίνω ; [1 aor. act. subjunc. 3 pers. sing, φάνη, L Τ WH
in Rev. viii. 12; xviii. 23, (see below and άναφαίνω; W
§15 s. v.; B. 41 (35))]; Pass., pres. φαίνομαι: 2 aor.
(φάνην; 2 fut. φανήσομαι and (in 1 Pet. iv. 18) φανονμαι
(cf. Kuhner § 343 s. v. ; [Veitch s. v.]); (φάω); in Grk.
writ. fr. Hom. down ; to bring forth into the light, cause
to shine ; to show. In bibl. Grk. 1. Active intransi-
tively, lo shine, shed light, (which the Grks. [commonly
Φάλέκ
648
ψανεροω
(of. L. and S. s. v. A. Π.)] express by the passive), Sept.
for "I'Sn: TO φως φαίνα, Jn. i. 5; 1 Jn. ii. 8; ό \ύχνο!,
.Γη. V. 35; 2 I'et. i. 1"J, (1 .Mace. iv. 50; (ien. i. 17); ό
^Atos, Rev. i. 16 ; ό ijX. καΐ ή σελήνη, Rev. x.\i. 23 ; ή ήμίρα,
Key. viii. 12 Rec. 2. Passive, a. to sfiiiie, be
liright or respkndenl : η ήμίρα, Rev. viii. 12 Tr [(.^ce
above); xviii. 23 RGTr — Inn see Voitclis.v.; moreover,
the foil. exx. should be brought under tlie next head; see
Meyer on Phil. ii. 1 ■'>] ; i>t φωστήρα, Phil. ii. 15 ; ό αστήρ,
yit. ii. 7 ; ή αστραπή, Mt. xxiv. 27. b. to hucoine
eiiident, lo be broiujhl forth into lir/ht, come to view, appear:
Mt. xxiv. 30; opp. to άφανίζίσθαι. .lus. iv. 14; of the
appearance of angels: nvi, Mt. i. 20; ii. 13, 19, (2 Maoc.
Hi. 33; x. 29 ; .\i. 8; of God, Joseph, antt. 7, 7, 3; for
riTpJ in ref. to the same. Num. xxiii. 3) ; of those re-
stored to life, Lk. ix. 8 ; Ttvi, Mk. xvi. 9 ; of growing
vegetation, lo come to !i(jht, Mt. xiii. 26 ; univ. to appear,
be seen : φαινόμινα, Ileb. xi. 3 ; impersonally, φαίνεται,
it is seen, exposed to vieio : oiStnorf ΐφάνη όντως iv τω
ΊσραηΧ, never was it seen in such (i. e. so remarkable)
a fashion — never was such a sight seen — in Israel, Mt.
ix. 33. c. to meet the eyes, strike the sight, become
clear or manifest, with a predicate nom. {be seen to be)
[of. B. § 144, 15 a., 18]: Mt. vi. 16, 18; xxiii. 27 sq.; 2
Co. xiii. 7; ίνα (so. ή αμαρτία) φαντ] αμαρτία (equiv. to
αμαρτωλός), Ro. vii. 13; with the dat. of the pers. added,
Mt. vi. 5 (sc. προσ€υχόμ€ΐ/οι praying) ; to be seen, appear :
i αμαρτωλός πιΌ φανΰται ; Ί. e. he will nowhere be seen,
will perish, 1 Pet. iv. 18. d. to appiar to the mind,
seem lo one's judgment or opinion : τι νμΐν φαίν€ται, [.\.V.
tclidt th'ink iji-'\, Mk. xiv. 64 (1 Esdr. ii. IS (21)) ; (φύνψ
σαυ ένώτηον αντων ώσΛ "Κηροί, Lk. xxiv. 11 [W. § 33 f. ; Β.
§ 133, 3. Syn. see δοκ/ω, fin.]*
Φαλί'κ [L txt. Tr WII Φάλ« (but see Tdf. Proleg. p.
104); Lmrg. Φάλίγ], 6, Peleg, (jSd 'division'), son of
Eber (Gen. x. 25) : Lk. iii. 35.*
φανερο5, -α, -όν, (φαίνομαι), fr. [Find.], Hdt. down, ap-
parent, manifest, ecideni, known, (opp. to κρυπτός and
απόκρυφος) : Gal. v. 19 ; (v πασιν, among all, 1 Tim. iv.
15 Rec. ; ev αίτοίς, in their minds, Ro. i. 19 ; τινί, dat. of
the pers., manifest to one, of a pers. or thing that has
become known, Acts iv. 16; vii. 13 ; [1 Tim. iv. 15 G L
TTrWlI]; φανιρ&ν γίνίσθαι: ^Ik. vi. 14; [Lk. viii.
17]; 1 Co. iii. 13; xiv. 25; iv νμ'ιν, among you, 1 Co.
xi. 19; f'v with a dat. of the place, Phil. i. 13 [see
πραιτώριον, 3] ; φαν^ρον ποκΊν τίνα, [Α. V. Ιο viaie one
known, i. e.] disclose who and what he is, Mt. xii. 16 ;
Mk. iii. 12 ; ds φανιρον ίΚθύν, to come to light, come to
open view, Mk. iv. 22 ; Lk. viii. 17; iv τω φανιρω, in
public, openly (opp. to iv τω κρύπτω), iSIt. vi. 4 Rec, 6
RG, [18 Rec] ; Ro. ii. 28 [here A.V. outward, outward-
ly]• manifest i.e. to be plainly recognized or known:
foil, by iv with a dat. of the thing in (by) which, 1 Jn.
iii. 10. [Sy.v. see 8ή\ος, fin.]*
ψαν<ρο'ω, -ω; f ut. φα«μώσω ; 1 HOT. iφavίpωσa^, Pass.,
pres. φαν(ροΰμαι\ pf. πιφανίρωμαι; 1 aor. iφavepώθηv^, 1
fut. φανιρωθήσομαι; (φavfp6ς) ; to make manifest or visi-
ble or known what has been hidden or unknown, to
manifest, whether by words, or deeds, or in any other
way; a. with an ace of the thing: [lass., Mk. iv.
22; Ejih. V. 13; Rev. iii. 18; τα epya τινός, pass. Jn. iii.
21 ; with ev Ttvt added, Jn. ix. 3 ; τήν &όξαν αϋτοϋ, of
Christ, Jn. ii. 1 1 ; sc. τήν -γνώσιν, 2 Co. xi. 6 L Τ 'J'r WII ;
τας βούλας των καρίΐιών,υί God as judge, 1 Co. iv. 5; τή»
οσμήν της "γνώσΐως αύτοΟ di ημών iv παντϊ τόπω, 2 Co. ii.
14 ; τήν σπου&ήν υμών ivuTriov τυΰ θ(ού, pass. 2 Co. viL
1 2 ; τήν ζωήν τοΰ Ιησού iv τω σώματι, iv τ!/ θνητή σαρκΐ,
pass. 2 Co. iv. 10 si|. ; χάρις τοΰ θ(οΰ φανίμωθι'ίσα bia τής
iπιφavfίaς τον Χρίστου, 2 Tim. i. 10 ; j)ass. used of some-
thing hitherto uon-existent l)ut now made actual and
visible, realized, 1 Jn. iii. 2 (Germ. verwirkUchl werden,
in die Erscheinung treten) ; οδός, Heb. i.x. 8 (cf. iter
per .\lpes patefieri volebat, Caes. bell. gall. 3, 1) ; to
bring to light or make manifest, by the advent, life, death,
resurrection, of .Jesus Christ: to μυστήριον, pass. Ro.
xvi. 26 ; with toIs άγίοις added, Col. i. 26 ; to make
known by teaching: ro ompa τοΰ θ(οΰ τοις άνθρώποις,
Jn. xvii. 6 ; το μυστήριον τον Χριστοί, Col. iv. 4 ; τον λογον
αντοΰ, of God giving instruction through the preachers
of the gospel, Tit. i. 3 ; ri γκωστόκ τοΟ Beoi αΙτοΊς, of
(iod teaching the ' Gentiles concerning himself by the
works of nature, Ro. i. 19; pass, δικαιοσύνη θ(οϋ (made
known in the gospel [cf. δικαιοσύνη, 1 c. p. 149'» hot.]),
Ro. iii. 21 ; pass, to become manifest, be made known : tV
τούτω sc ότι etc. herein that, etc. [see oiros, I. 2 b.], 1 Jn.
iv. 9 ; τα δικαιώματα τοΰ θ(οϋ. Rev. χν. 4. b. Λvith an
ace of the person, to expose to view, make manifest, show
one : iavrbv τω κόσμω, of Christ coming forth from his
retirement in Galilee and showing liimself publicly at
Jerusalem, Jn. vii. 4 ; τοϊγ μαθητα'ις, of the risen Christ,
Jn. xxi. 1 ; pass, lo be made manifest, to show one's self,
appear: 'ΐμπροσθιν τοΰ βήματος τον Χριστού, 'Jt Co. v. 10;
of Christ risen from the dead, τοϊγ μαθηταίς αΰτοϋ, Jn.
xxi. 14 ; Mk. xvi. 14 ; with iv ίτίρα μορφή added, Mk.
xvi. 12 (absol. φανιρωβ^ίς. Barn. ep. 15, 9) ; of Christ
previously hidden from vieiv in heaven but after his incar-
nation made visible on earth as a man among men, Heb.
ix. 26 (opp. to δ(ύτ(ρον όφθήσισθαι, of his future return
from heaven, ibid. 28) ; 1 Pet. i. 20 ; 1 Jn. iii. 5, 8 ; with
iv σαρκι added, 1 Tim. iii. 16, (Barn. ep. 5, 6 ; 6, 7. 9.
14 etc.); ή ζωή (the life embodied in Christ; the centre
and source of life) ίφανιρώθη, 1 Jn. i. 2 ; of Christ now
hidden from sight in heaven but hereafter to return
visibly, Cohiii. 4 (cf. 3); iPet. v. 4; 1 Jn. ii. 28; [cf.
Westcott on the Epp. of St. John p. 79 sq.]. of Chris-
tians, who after the Saviour's return will be manifested
iv δόξτ) [see δόξα, HI. 4 b.], Col. iii. 4. Pass, to be-
come known, to be plainly recognized, thoroughly under-
stood: who and >vhat one is, τινί, Jn. i. 31 ; what sort
of person one is, τω θίώ, 2 Co. v. i 1 ; iv τα'ις σννηδήσισι»
υμών, ibid. ; φανίροϋμαι foil, by ότι, 2 Co. iii. 3 ; 1 Jn. ii.
19 ; iv παντι φαν^ρωθϊντα iv πάσιν (Is υμάς, in every way
made manifest (such as we are) among all men to you-
ward, 2 Co. xi. C [but L Τ Tr WH give the act. φανιρω•
σαντ(ς, we have made it vianifest']. (Hdt., Dion. Hal,
Dio Cass., Joseph.) [Syn. see αποκαλύπτω, fin.] *
tpavepo)<i
649
φαρμακΐύν
φαν€ρω$, (see φανεροί), [fr. AeschyL and Hdt. down],
adv., manifestly•, i.e. a. plainly, clearly: Iddv nva,
Acts X. 3. b. openly : Mk. i. 45 ; opp. to c» κμυπτφ,
Jn. vu. 10.•
ψανί'ρωχι.;, -{ω;, η, (φαν^μόω), manifestation: with a
gen. of the object, 1 Co. xii. 7 ; 2 Co. iv. 2. ([Aristot.
de plantis 2, 1 and 9 ; also for D'l.lS (Sept. δηλωσίί)
Lev. viii. 8 cod. Ven.] Eccles. writ. ; Ilesych.) [Syn.
see άποκαΧΰπτω, fin.] *
φανο'ς, -οϋ, ό, (φαίνω), a torch [Α. V. lantern ; Ilesych.
Άττικοϊ δε λνχνονκον (κάλουν ο ήμ€ΐί νϋν φανόν ', cf. Phryn.
p. 59 and Lob.'s note; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 131;
Athen. 15 p. 699 d. sqq. and Casaubon's notes ch. xviii.
eee λuμπάs and reff.] : Jn. xviii. 3. (Arstpli., Xen.,
Dion. Hal., Phit., al.) *
Φανο\ιηλ, (Sxup i- e. πρόσωπον θ(ου), indecL, Phanuel,
the father of Anna the prophetess: Lk. ii. 36.•
φαντάζω : (φαίνω) ; pres. pass. ptcp. φανταζόμίνοί ; fr.
Aeschyl. and IlJt. down ; to cause to appear, make visi-
ble, expose to view, show : τά φανταζόμ^νον, the appearance,
sight, Heb. .xii. 21.*
φαντα<Γ(α, -as, ή, show, showy appearance, display,
pomp: Acts xxv. 23. (Polyb. 15, 25, 5, etc.; [Diod.
12, 83]; al.)*
φάντασμα, -roy, τό, (^φαντάζω), an appearance ^ spec.
an apparition, spectre : IMt. xiv. 26 ; Mk- vi. 49. (Aes-
chyl., Eur., Plat., Dion. HaL, Hut., aL; Sap. xvii. 14
(15).)•
φάραγξ, -αγγο!, ή, a valley shut in by cliSs and preci-
pices ; a raoine : Lk. iii. 5. (Alcm., Eur., Thuc, Dem.,
Polyb., al. ; Sept.) •
Φαραώ, (Π>•")3 ; in Joseph, antt. 2, 13 and 14 Φαραώθη!
[also Φαραώ»/, -ώνος, 8, 6, 2, etc.]), ό, [indecl. Β. 15 (14)],
Pharaoh, the common title of the ancient kings of Egypt
(6 φαραων κατ AlyvTrrtovs βασιλιά σημαίνει, Joseph, antt.
8, 6, 2 [ace. to Ebers (in Uiehm s. v. Pharao) the name
is only the Ilebr. form of the Egyptian per-aa denotint;
(as even HorapoUo 1, 62 testifies) great house, a current
title of kings akin to the Turkish " sublime porte"; al.
al.; seeBB.DD.s.v.]): Actsvii.13, 21; Ro.lx.17; Heb.
xi. 24 ; Φαραώ with ffaaiXtvs Αίγϋπτου added in apposi-
tion (as if Φαραώ were a proper name, as sometimes in
the O. T. : D-iyD ^l^D Hina, 1 K. iii. 1 ; L\. 16 ; 2 K,
xvii. 7; Is. xxxvi. 6,'etc.; 1 Esdr. i. 23), Acts vii. 10.
Cf. Vaihinger in Herzog xL p. 490 sqq.; [Ehers in Riehm
n. s.].•
Φαρί'ϊ [on its accent see Tdf. Proleg. p. 104], S, (]"13
* breach, Gen. xxxviii. 29), Perez [A. V. Pharea], a son
of Judah by Tamar his daughter-in-law : Mt. i 3 ; Lk.
iii. 83.•
Φαρκταΐοβ, -ου, 6, a Pharisee, a member of the sect or
party of the Pharisees (Syr. f ^ -] « rabbinic I't?n3,
fr. 0Ί3 ' to separate ', because deviating in their life from
the general usage ; Suidas s. v. quotes Cedrenus as icA-
lows, Φαρισαΐοι, οί {ρμην(υόμ(νοι άφωρισμίνοι • παρά τί> μίρΐ-
ζ€ΐν κ. άφορίζίΐν iavTois των άΧΧων απάντων ί"ί τ* τΑ κα^α-
ραίτατον τοΰ βίον καΧ άκριβίστατον, καΐ fir τά Γβ» νόμου
(νταΚματα). The first and feeble beginnings of this sect
seem to be traceable to the age immediately succeeding
the return from exile. In addition to the books of the
O. T. the Pharisees recognized in oral tradition (see
παράΖοσκ, 2) a standard of belief and life (Jofeeph. antt.
13, 10, 6 ; Mt. XV. 1 ; Mk. vii. 3). They sought for dis-
tinction and praise by the observance of external rites
and by the outward forms of piety, such as ablutions,
fastings, prayers, and alms-giving; and, comparatively
negligent of genuine piety, they prided themselves on
their fancied good works. They held strenuously to a
belief in the existence of good and evil angels, and to
the expectation of a Messiah ; and they cherished the
hope that the dead, after a preliminary experience
either of reward or of penalty in ilades, would be re-
called to life by him and be requited each according to
his individual deeds. In opposition to the usurped do-
minion of the Ilerods and the rule of the Romans, they
stoutly upheld the theocracy and their country's cause,
and possessed great influence with the common people.
According to Josephus (antt. 1 7, 2, 4) they numbered
more than 6000. They were bitter enemies of Jesus
and his cause; and were in turn severely rebuked by
him for their avarice, ambition, hollow reliance on out-
ward works, and affectation of piety in order to gain
notoriety: Mt. iii. 7; v. 20; vii. 29 Lchm. ; ix. 11, 14,
34; xii. 2, 14,24, 38 Lchm. om.; xv. 1, 12; xvi. 1,6, llsq. ;
xix. 3;xxi. 45; [x.xii. 15, 34, 41]; xxiii. 2, 13-15, 23, 25-
27, 29 ; xxvii. 62 ; Mk. ii. 16, 18, 24 ; iii. 6 ; vii. 1, 3, 5 ;
viii. 11, 15 ; [ix. 11 Lin br. T] ; x. 2 ; xii. 13 ; Lk. v. 17,
21, 30, 33 ; vi. 2, 7; vii. 30, 36 sq. 39 ; .\i. 37-39, 42-44
[but in 44GTTrWIIom. Lbr. the cL], 53; xii. 1;
xiii. 31 ; xiv. 1, 3 ; xv. 2 ; xvi. 14 ; xvii. 20 ; xviii. 10 sq. ;
xix. 39 ; Jn. i. 24 ; iii. 1 ; iv. 1 ; vii. 32, 45, 47 .sq. ; viii.
3, 13; ix. [13], 15sq.40; xi.46sq. 57; .\ii.l9,42; xviii.
3 ; Acts v. 34 ; xv. 5 ; xxiii. 6-9 ; xxvi. 5 ; Phil. iii. 5.
Cf. Win. RWB. s. V. Pharisaer ; Reuss in Ilerzog xi.
p. 496, and the ivorks referred to above s. v. ΣαδδουκαΐοΓ,
fin. [esp. Sieffert's dissertation in Ilerzog ed. 2 (vol. xiii.
p. 210 sqq.) and the copious reff. at its close]. An ad-
mirable idea of the opinions and practices of the Phari-
sees may be gathered also from Paret, Ueber d. Phari-
s'ajsmus des Josephus, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for
1856, No. 4, p. 809 sqq.•
φαρμιακίία [WII κΐα, so Τ (exc. in Gal. v. 20 ; cf. the
Proleg. p. 88) ; see I, t], -as, η, (φαρμακιύω) ; a. the
use or the administering of drugs (Xen. mem. 4, 2,
17). b. poisoni'n jr (Plat., Polyb., al.): Rev. ix. 21
[here VfR txt. Tr mrg. φαρμάκων ; many interpp. refer
the pass, to next head]. c. sorcery, magical arts,
often found in connection with idolatry and fostered by
it ; Gal. V. 20 [where see Bp. Lghtft.] (Sap. xii. 4 ;
xviii. 13; for D'SIJ'S, Is. xlvii. 9; for D-dS, E.x. vii. 22;
viiL 18; for D'pnS, Ex. vii. 11); trop. of the decep.
tions and seduction's of idolatry. Rev. xviii. 23.•
φαρ)ΐακ€ν$, -t'tos, S, (φάρμακον), one who prepares or
uses magical remedies; a sorcerer: Rev. xxi. 8 Bee.
(Soph., Plat, Joseph., Lcian., Pint., aL) •
φάρμακον
650
φΐρω
[φάρμακον, -ον, τ6, h. Ilom. down, α drug; an eneharU-
ment : Tr mrg. \VH txt. in Rev. L\. 21 (B.V. sorceries),
for φαρμακύα. q. v. (in b.).*]
φαρμακ05, -ij, -όν, {φαρμάσσω [to use a φάρμακον]), [fr.
Arstpli. down] ; 1. jicrtdininr/lo magical arts. 2.
6 φαρμακόί, subst., i. e. φαρμακ(ί!, q. V. : Rev. xxi. 8 G L
Τ Tr Wll ; xxii. 15. (Sept. several times for ^O30.) *
φώτιβ, -€<i)s, 4, (fr. φαίνω) ; 1. in tlie Attic orar
tors, the exposure• of (infonnini; again.'il) those who have
embezzled the properHj of the stale, or violated the laws
respecting the importation or exportation of merchandise,
or defrauded their wards. 2. univ. a disclosure of
secret crime (κοινώί 8e φάσας €κα\οϋιιτο πάσαι al μηνυσ€Κ
τω» λανθανόντων αδικημάτων, Γοΐΐιιχ 8, 6, 47): Susan. 55
Tlieod. ; of information by report [A. V. tidings], Acts
xxi. 31.*
φάσκω; Ίναρΐ. ίφασκον; (ΦΑΩ, φι;μί); fr. Horn, down;
to αβηη, allege, to pretend or profess: foil, by the ace.
with the inf., Acts xxiv. 9; xxv. 19; with the inf, and
an ace. referring to the subject, Rev. ii. 2 Rec. ; foil, by
an inf. with a subject nom., Ro. i. 22.*
φάτνη, -ijs, ή, [(πατί'ομαι to eat ; Vanicek p. 445)], a
crib, manger: Lk. ii. 7, 12, 16; xiii. 15. (From Horn,
down; Sept. for DOX, Job xxxix. 9; Prov. xiv. 4; Is.
L 3 ; plur. for DT>3-i, Hab. iii. 17.) *
φαΰλοϊ, -η, -ον, (akin to (Jerm. faul and βαζι), easy,
slight, ordinary, mean, loorthless, of no account ; ethically,
lad, wicked, base (Theogn. [?], Eur., Xen., Plat., Plut.) :
Jas. iii. 16 ; φαϋλόν τι XeyfiK nepi rtvos, Tit. ii. 8 ; φαΟλα
νράσσιιν, [R.V. to do ill], Jn. iii. 20 ; το φ. πράσσαν opp.
to τα άγαθα ποκ'ιν, Jn. v. 29 ; φαΟλον (opp. to αγαθόν)
,τράσσαν, Ro. ix. 11 LTTr WII ; 2 Co. v. 10 Τ Tr txt.
WII. [See Trench, Syn. § Ixxxiv.] *
φίγγοΐ, -our, rrf, (akin to φαίνην), fr. Aeschyl. and
Find, down, light : of the moon, Mt. xxiv. 29 ; ML• xiii.
24 ; of a candle or lamp, Lk. xi. 33 R G Τ Trmrg. [of.
αστραπή, ib. vs. 36]. (Joel ii. 10 ; iii. (iv.) 15 (20) ; Ezek.
i. 4, 13, 27; IIos. vii. 6.)•
[Stn. : aiiyfi, <p4yyos, φωί: (pmt light — the genenal
terra, (of the light of a fire in Mk. xiv. 54; Lk. xxii. 56);
(piyyas a more concrete and emphatic term (cf. Lk. xi. 3.3), tlie
bright sunshine, the beam of light, etc. ; aiyi] a still stronger
term, suggesting the fiery nature of the light ; used of shoot-
ing, heating, rays. A Greek spoke of ήΧίου <pCis, ipiy-
yoi, οίγή ; or, φωτ)>! <piyyo%, ouyi ; or, φίγγονι auyi ; but
these formulas are not reversible. Schmidt ch. 33; cf.
Trench § xlvi.]
φεί8ομαι; fut. φίΐσομαι; 1 aor. ίφ'.ισάμην; depon. mid.;
fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for hr^n. Din, ψΧ) (to keep back);
to spare: absol. 2 Co. xiii. 2; tiixJs, to spare one [W.
§30, lOd.; B. §132, 15], Acts XX. 29; Ro. viii. 32; xi.
21 ; 1 Co. vii. 28 ; 2 Co. i. 23 ; 2 Pet. ii. 4 sq. ; to abstain
[A. y. forbear], an inf. denoting the act abstained from
bein•' supplied from the context : καυχάσθαι, 2 Co. xii. 6
(ji^ φ(ΐ8ον — sc. διδ(ίσ•«ιι> — el ?χ(ΐς SiSaaKfiu, Xen. Cyr.
1, 6, 35 ; with the inf. added, Xt'-yciv κακά, Eur. Or. 393 ;
dpaaai η τώ» τυραννικών, Plat, de rep. 9 p. 574 b.).*
φ«5ομ^νι>>ς, (fr. the ptcp. φ(ώ6μ(νο{), adv., sparingly :
8 Co. U. 6 (mildly, Plut. Alex. 25).•
φ«λόνηΐ, see φαίΧάκηί•
φίρ» ; (allied to Germ. filhrt!n,fahren, [Eng. bear, etc.
Scotch bairn, etc. etc.; cf. Curtius §411]) ; impf. ίφι•
pnv; Pass., pres. φίρομαι; 'υη'ρί.(φ(ρόμην; fut. act. 6ίσ»
(J η. xxi. 18; Rev. xxi. 2ύ) ; 1 aor. ήν(γκα, ptcp. cWyicat;
2 aor. inf. ivtyKtiv (Jit. vii. 18 Τ Wll); 1 aor. pass.
ijff'xV (2 I'et- i• 1?. 21); [cf. U7/. App. p. 164; B. 68
(6(1) ; W. 90 (85 sq.) ; esp. Veitch p. 668 sq.] ; fr. Horn,
down; Sept. for X'^n and NUJ; to bear, i.e. 1. to
carry; a. to carry some burden: τόν σταυρόν όπι•
σθίν Tivos, Lk. xxiii. 26 ; to bear with one's self (which the
Grk. writ, express by the mid.), [A. V. to bring] : τί, Lk.
xxiv. 1 ; Jn. xix. 39. b. to move by bearing ; pass,
like the Lat. feror i. q. moveor, to be conveyed or borne,
with a suggestion of speed or force (often so in prof,
auth. fr. Ilom. down) : of persons borne in a ship over
the sea, [A. V. to be driven]. Acts xxvii. 15, 17; of a
gust of wind, to rush. Acts ii. 2 (cf. Jer. xviii. 14) ; φωνή
(ν(χθΛσα, Λν38 brought, came, 2 Pet. i. 17, 18 (see υπό, L
2 a.) ; of the mind, to be moved inwardly, promi)ted,
wr6 ιτνιΰματος άγιου, 2 Pet. i. 21 ; φίρομαι iiri τι [R. V.
press on], lleb. vi. 1. c. ace. to a less freq. use to
bear up, i. e. uphold (keep from falling) : φίρων τα πάντα
τώ ρήματι τη! 8υνάμ(ως αϋτοϋ, of God [the Son] the pre-
server of the universe, Ileb. i. 3 (so in the Targums and
Rabbinical writ. Sjp is often used, e. g. iohiy Sdid, of
God ; ού 8υνί)σομαι ϊγω μόνο! φ(ρ(ΐν τάν \αον τούτον, Num.
xi. 14, cf. 11 ; add, Deut. i. 9, for XUJ ; ό τα μη [μίχ]
όντα φίρων κα\ τα πάντα yevvmv, Philo, rer. div. haer. § 7 ;
fr. native Grk. writ, we have φίρίΐν τήν πό\ιν, Plut.
LucuU. 6 ; cf. Bleek, Brief a. d. Ilebr. ii. 1 p. 70 sq.). 2.
to bear i. e. endure (exx. without number in Grk. writ,
fr. Ilom. down ; cf. Passow s. v. B. L 3 ; [L. and S. s. v.
A. III.]) : Toi/ ον(ί8ισμόν, Heb. xiii. 13 ; τί, to endure the
rigor of a thing, Heb. xii. 20 ; τινά, to bear patiently
one's conduct, or to spare one (abstain from punishing
or destroying), Ro. ix. 22. 3. to bring, bring to,
bring forward ; a. prop.: Ttra. Acts v. 16; τι, Mk.
[vi.27RGTTrWH]; xi. 2TTrWII; xii. 16; Lk. xv.
23 ; Acts iv. 34, 87 ; v. 2 ; 2 Tim. iv. 13; τίνα πράί τίνα,
Mk. i. 82 ; ii. 3 [T Tr mrg. WH] ; ix. 1 7 [W. 278 (262)],
19 sq.; [τινά fVi Tiva, Lk. xii. 11 Trmrg.]; τινά tiw, l\Ik.
vii. 32; viii. 22; [τινά ΐπί τίνος, Lk. v. 18]; τί τινι, ^Ik.
xii. 15; Jn. ii. 8; with 2)8f added, Mt. xiv. 18 [here Tr
mrg. br. Σιδί] ; xvii. 17; τι προς τίνα, Mk. xi. 7 [Τ Tr
WH]; tI «Γ with an ace. of the place. Rev. xxi. 24, 26;
Tc tVi πινάκι, Mt. xiv. 11 ; Mk. vi. [27 Lchm.], 28 ; από
Tivos (a part of [see από. I. 2]), Jn. xxi. 10; φίρω τιν\
φαγ(ΐν, Jn. iv. 33. b. to move to, apply: τόι/ δάκτυ-
λοι-, την χΛρα, i8f, fis with an ace. of the place, [A.V.
reach], Jn. xx. 27. fig., φίρ^ται ύμ'ιν τι, a thing is
offered (lit. ' is being brought ') to you : ή χάρις, 1 Pet.
i. 13. c. to bring by announcing: διδαχήν, 2 Jn. 10
(rivl άγγ(\ίην, μΰθον, \όγον, φήμην, etc., in Ilom., Pind.,
al.); to announce (see Passow s. v. p. 2231'; [L. and S.
8. V. A. rV. 4]) : ίάνατοί', Heb. ix. 16. d. tobeari.e.
brinq forth, produce; o. prop.: καρπάν, [Mt. vii. 18•
Τ WH, 18" T]; Mk. iv. 8 [on iv ίζήκοντα etc. WH txt..
φβνγω
651
Φήστοί
see fv, L 5 f .] ; Jn. xii. 24 ; xv. 2, 4 sq. 8, 16 ; (Horn.
Od. 4, 229; Hes. opp. 117; Xen. mem. 2, 1,28; al). β-
ίο bring forward in speech : προφητεία, 2 Pet. i. 21 [A. V.
came'\•, κρίσΐ" κατά tivos, 2 Pet. ii. 11 ; [καττ^γορίαν κατά
TWOS, .In. xviii. 29 R G L Tr (but here Τ WH om. κατά)] ;
αΐτιώματα κατά Tivos, Acts x.\ v. 7 R G [but G om. κατά τ.] ;
αίτίαν, ibid. 18 L Τ Tr WII ; (πάσα! αίτια!, reasons, Dem.
p. 1328, 22; άπo\oyισμoi!, Pol)b. 1, 32, 4). e. to
lead, conduct, [A. V. tiring, carry, etc. (Germ._/«Aren)]:
tVi with an ace. of the place, Jlk. xv. 22 ; Acts xiv. 1 3 ;
(«ei) άπου, Jn. xxi. 18; metaph. a gate is said φίριιν
(Lat. ferre [Eng. lead~\) els την nci\tv. Acts xii. 10 (oSos
φ. fls ipav, Hdt. 2, 122; δια τής ayopas «s το προ! ηω, id.
2, 138 [cf. L. and S. s. v. A. VII.]). [Comp. : άνα-, άπο-,
δια-, eio^, παρ-ασ-, (Κ-, eVi-, κατά-, πάρα-, πιρι-, προ-, προσ-,
συν-, ΰπο-φίρω. Syn. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.]'
ψ^νγω ; f ut. φίύξομαι ; 2 aor. ίφυ■γou ; fr. Uom. down ;
Sept. for DU and ΠΊ3 ; to flee, i.e. a. to fiee
atcay, seek safety by flight: absol., Mt• viii. 33; xxvi. 56 ;
Mk. V. 14 ; xiv. 50; Lk. viii. 34 ; Jn. x. 12, [13 (here G Τ
Trtxt. WHom.L Trmrg.br. the cl.)]; Actsvii. 29; foil.
by tls with an ace. of the place, Mt. ii. 13 ; x. 23 ; [xxiv.
16, here R G Τ WH mrg. eVi] ; Mk. xiii. 14 ; Lk. xxi. 21 ;
[Jn. vi. 15 Tdf.] ; Rev. xii. 6 ; foU. by (πι with an ace.
of the place, Mt. xxiv. 16 [here L Tr ^VH txt. fij] ; €κ
τον πλοίου, Acts .xxvii. 30 ; foil, by από with a gen. of the
place, in a purely local sense, to leave by fleeing, as in
Grk. writ. (cf. W. 223 (210) ; [B. § 131, 1]), Mk. .xvi. 8 ;
by από with a gen. of the pers. inspiring fear or threat-
ening danger (after the Hebr.), Jn. x. 5 ; Jas. iv. 7 ;
poetically, φ€ύξ(ται άπ' αΰτων 6 θάνατο!, death shall flee
from them, opp. to ζητήσουσι θάνατον, Rev. ix. 6. b.
metaph. to flee {to shun or avoid by flight') something ab-
horrent, esp. vices : with an ace. of the thing, 1 Co. vi.
18 (Sap. i. 5 ; 4 Mace. viii. 18) ; opp. to διώκιιν, 1 Tim. vi.
11 ; 2 Tim. ii. 22 ; Hebraistically foil, by από with a gen.
of the thing, 1 Co. x. 14 (άπο αμαρτία!. Sir. xxi. 2). C.
to be saved by flight, to escape safe out of danger: absol.
Heb. xii. 25 R G ; with an ace. of the thing, Heb. xi. 34 ;
Hebraistically foil, by από with a gen. — of the thinf, Mt.
iii. 7 ; xxiii. 33 ; Lk. iii. 7 ; of the pers. Mk. xiv. 52 [T
Tr txt. VVH om. L Tr mrg. br. άπ' αϋτωνί. ά. poeti-
cally, to flee away i. q. vanish : πάσα νησο! €φνγ€ και όρη
οίιχ ΐύμίθησαν, Rev. xvi. 20; with the Hebraistic addi-
tion άπ6 προσώπου τικόί (as in Deut. xxviii. 7; .Tosh. vii.
4; viii. 5; 2 Chr. x. 2, etc.; see πρόσωπον, 1 b. p. 551'
mid.). Rev. xx. 11. [Comp. and Syn. : άποφ (empha-
sizes the inner endeavor or aversion), διαφ. (suggests
tlie space which the flight must traverse), (κφ. (looks
rather to the physical possibility), καταφ. (points to the
place or the person where refuge is sought) ; Schmidt,
Syn. ch. 109.]•
Φήλιξ (Lchra. ΦηΚιξ, [so Tr in Acts xxiv. 22 (by mis-
take V)] ; cf. Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 37 ; B. 13
(12) ; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 104; and reff. s. v. κήρυξ]), [lit.
'happy', 'fortunate'], -ικοί, ό, (Claudius [but in Tacit,
jist. 5, 9 called -Antonius]) Felix, the eleventh procura-
tor of Judiea, (apparently between a.d. 52 and 60).
He was a freedman of Clandins and his mother Antonia,
and the brother of Pallas, the powerful favorite of the
emperor. He first married Drusilla [(?) see Diet, of
Grk. and Rom. Biogr. s. v. 4], the granddaughter of
Cleopatra and Antony; and afterwards Drusilla, the
daughter of Herod Agrippa. Ace. to Tacitus "per
omnem saevitiam ac libidinem jus regium servili in-
genio exercuit", and by his cruelty and injustice he
stimulated the rage of the turbulent Jews against the
Roman rule. \\'hen he had retired from the province
and come to Rome, the Jews of Ctesarea accused him
before the emperor, but through the intercession of his
brother Pallas he was acquitted by Nero (cf. Tacit.
hist. 5, 9, 5 sq. ; annal. 12, 54 ; Suet. vit. Claudii, 28;
Joseph, antt. 20, 7, 1 sq. and 8, 5 sq. ; 7, 9 ; b. j. 2, 13) :
Acts xxiii. 24, 26 ; xxiv. 3, 22, 24 sq. 27; xxv. 14. Cf.
Win. RWB. s. V. ; Paret in Herzog iv. 354 ; [ V. Schmidt
in Herzog ed. 2, iv. 518 sq.] ; Overbeck in Schenkel IL
263 sq. ; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 303 sq. § 19, 4 ;
\_Farrar, St. Paul, ch. xii.].*
φή|ΐη, -i;f, ή, (φημi),fame, report : Mt. ix. 26 ; Lk. iv.
14. [(From Horn, down.)]•
φημί; impf. ΐφην; (fr. φάω, to bring forth into the
light [cf. Curtius §407]); hence [fr. Hom. down] prop.
to make known one's thoughts, to declare ; to say : ϊφη, he
said (once on a time), Mt. xxvi. 61 ; historical writers,
in quoting the words of any one, prefix φησ'ιν, ΐφη, (Lat.
ait, inquit) : Lk. x.xii. 58; Acts viii. 36, and often;
φησίν and ΐφη are used of a person replying, Mt. xiii.
29; Lk. vii. 40; Jn. i. 23; ix. 38; Acts vii. 2, etc.; of
one who asks a question, Mt. xxvii. 23; Acts xvi. 30;
.xxi. 37; ϊφη μΐγάΧιι rfj φωνή, Acts χχλ'ΐ. 24; άποκριθ(Ϊ!
ίφη, Mt. viii. 8 ; φησίν is interjected into the recorded
speech of another [cf. W. §61,6], Mt. xiv. 8 ; Acts xxv.
5, 22 ; xxvi. 25 ; also ίφη, .\cts .xxiii. 35 ; φησίν, Uke the
Lat. ait, inquit, is employed esp. in the later Grk. usage
with an indefinite subject ('impersonally') [cf. man sagt,
on dit, they .•'ay] (inserted in a sentence containing the
words of another [cf. W. u. s.]) : 2 Co. x. 10 where L
Tr mrg. WH mrg. φασίν (cf. Passow ii. p. 2238'; [L.
and S. s. v. Π. 1] ; B. § 129, 19 ; [W. § 58, 9 b. /3. ; § 64,
3] ). φησίν sc. 6 Θί0!, 1 Co. vi. 1 6 [here Lchm. br. φησίν] ;
Heb. viii. 5; [W. 522 (486 sq.)]. The constructions of
the verb are the foil. : ίφη αντω, αϋτοΪ!, he replied to
him, to them, Mt. iv. 7; xiii. 28 ; xxi. 27, etc. ; Mk. [ix.
12 TTrtxt. WH] ; xiv. 29 ; Lk. vii. 44 ; Acts xxvi. 32;
άποκριθί'ΐ! αϋτω (φη, Lk. xxiii. 3 ; ίφη πρΟ! τίνα, Lk. xxii.
70; Acts X. 28; xvi. 37; xxvi. 1; with an ace. of the
thing, 1 Co. X. 15, 19 ; foil, by on, 1 Co. x. 19 ; τοντο etc.
ότι, 1 Co. vii. 29 [Rec.•»" "'» ; al. om. ότι] ; xv. 50 ; foil,
by an ace. with inf., Ro. iii. 8. [On its alleged omission,
see W. § 64, 7 a. Comp. : σνμ-φημι.]
φημίζω : 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, ΐφημίσθη ; esp. freq.
in the poets fr. Hesiod down ; to spread a report, to
disseminate by report : Mt. xxviii. 15 Τ WH mrg. (after
codd. Ν Δ 33 etc.) for ίιαφημ. q. v.*
Φήστοϊ, -ου, ό, (Porcius) Festus, a procurator of Judaa,
the successor of FeUx [c. a.d. 60] (see ΦηΚιξ [and reif.,
φθάνω
652
φθορά
esp. Schiirer p. 308 sq.]): Acts χχϊτ. 87; xxv. 1, 4, 9,
12-14, 22-24; xxvi. 24 sq. 32. (Joseph, antt. 20, 8, 9
and 9, 1; b. j. 2, 14, 1.)*
φθάνω: 1 aor. (φίασα [W.§ 15 s.v.]; pi. ϊφθακα (1 Th.
ii. IG I. txt. WII iiirg.) ; fr. Horn, down; 1. to come
before, preccik; unlicipale : ήμύς οΰ μη φθάσωμιν (see μή,
IV. 2) τοϋί Κίΐιμηθίνταί, we shall not get the start of those
who have fallen asleep, i. e. we shall not attain to the
fellowship of Christ sooner than the dead, nor have pre-
cedence in blessedness, 1 Th. iv. 15; ΐφθασιν ίπ αυτού!
ή οργή, (God's penal) wrath came upon them unexpect-
edly, 1 Th. ii. 1 (i ; ΐφθασιρ (φ' ί/μαί ή βασ(Χ(ία τοϋ θ(οΰ,
the kingdom of God has come upon you sooner than you
expected, Mt. xii. 28; Lk. xi. 20; [but all the preceding
exx. except the first are referred by the majority of re-
cent interpp. to the foil, head ; — a meaning esp. common
when the verb is construed with prepositions]. 2.
in the Ale.x. [and other later] writ, the idea of pri-
ority disappears, to come to, arrioe at: tU τι, Phil. iii.
16 ; to reach, attain to, a thing, Ro. ix. 31 ; άχμι tivos,
8 Co. X. 14 ; (τ(ΐ/ί, to a thing, Tob. v. 19 ; ίω! τοΰ οΐιμα•
noC, Test. xii. Patr. p. 5.30 [i. e. test. Rub. 5 fin.] ; ij μι-
γαλωσνι^ σου £μ£γα\ννθη και (φθασίΐ/ €ίς τον ονρανάν,
Dan. 4,19 Theod. [cf . 17, l'5 ; φθ. ϊωί των ουρανών, 2 Chr.
xxviii. 9 ; ΐφθασιν ό μην ό (βδομοί, 2 Esdr. iii. 1 ; Philo
de mund. opif. § 1 ; de legg. alleg. iii. 76 ; de confus lingg.
§ 29; Plut. apotheg. Lacon. § 28; de Ale.x. s. virt. s.
fort. orat. ii. 5. Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. ; Geldart, Mod.
Greek, p. 206 ; W. § 2, 1 b.]). [CoMP. : προ^θάνω.Ί *
φθαρτοί, -ή, -όν, (φθ(ίρω), cotruptihle, perUioblc, ( Vulg.
cOTTuplihilis) : 1 Co ix. 25 ; 1 Pet. i. 23 ; άνθρωποί, i. e.
mortal, opp. to ό άφθαρτος θ(ός, Ro. i. 23 ; οϋ φθαρτο'ΐ!
ΰργυρίω η χρνσίω, not with corruptible things, with silver
or gold, 1 I'et. i. 18 [W. § 59, 5 fin.] (χρυσός κ. άργυρος,
ούσίαι φθαρτοί, Philo de cherub. § 14 ; οΰκ άργνρον olbk
χρυσόν τίνα, η άλλο των ίν ϋ\αις φθαρταΐς, de congr. eru-
dit. grat. § 20) ; neut. το φθαρτόν, that which is liable
to corruption, [to φθαρτϋν τοϋτο l/iis corruptible (Α.Λ'.)],
1 Co. XV. 53 sq. (Diod. 1, 6 ; Philo de legg. alleg. 2, 1 ;
de cherub. § 2; [Aristot.], Plut., Sext. Emp., al. ; 2 Mr.cc.
vii. 16; Sap. ix. 15; xiv. 8.)*
φβεγγομοι; 1 aor. ptcp. φθ^γξάμ^νος ; (ιφίγγος [but
cf. Vanicek ]). 117G], ΦΑΩ); depon. mid.; fr. Ilom.
down ; 1. to give out a sound, noise, or cry ; used
by the Grks. of any sort of sound or voice, whether of
man or animal or inanimate object — as of thunder, mu-
sical instruments, etc.; [φθίγγ. denotes sound in its re-
lation to the hearer rather than to its cause; the
ικ'γα λαλύΐ' is a braggart, the /xtya φθ(γγ6μ(νος is a lofty
orator; Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1 § 53]. 2. to proclaim;
to speak; utter: Acts i v. 18; νπίρογκα, 2 Pet. ii. 18 (άδικα.
Sap. i. 8) ; νποζϋγιαν άφωνου iv ανθρωπινή φωντι φθ(γξά-
μινον, 2 Pet. ii. 16. [CoMP.: άπο-φθ^γγομαι-Ί *
φθ€(ρίβ; ίιύ.φθιρώ; ΐΆοτ.ίφθίψα; Pass., pres. φίίι'ρο-
μαι ; 2 aor. ΐφθάρην ; 2 fut. φθαρήσομαι ; (akin to Germ.
verderben); Sept. for ΠΠα; [fr. liom. down]; to cor-
rupt, to destroy : prop, τοκ vaov τοΰ θ(οΰ (in the opinion
ο the Jews the temple was corrupted, or ' destroyed ',
when any one defiled or in the slightest degree damaged
anything in it, or if its guardians neglected their duties ;
cf. Deijlinj, Observv. sacrae, vol. ii. ]>. 505 sciij.), drop-
ping the (ig., to lead away a Christian cluirch from that
state of knowledge and hohness in which it ought to
abide, 1 Co. iii. 17*; τινά, to punish with death, 1 Co.
iii. 17'; i. q. to bring to want or beggary (cf. our ruin
[X. V. corrupiY), 2 Co. vii. 2; pass, to be destroyed, to
perish : ΐν τινι, by a thing, .lude 10; eV with a dat. denot-
ing the condition, e'v TJj φθορά αυτών, 2 Pet. ii. 12 LT Tr
WII. in an ethical .sense, to corrupt, deprave: φθύρου-
σιν ήθη χρηστά όμϊΚ'ιαι κακαί (a saying of Menander [see
ήθος, 2], which seems to have passed into a ]>roverb [see
W'etstein ad loc. ; Gataker, Advers. miscel. 1. i. c. I p.
174 sq.]), 1 Co. XV. 33; the character of the inhabitants
of the earth, Rev. xix. 2 ; jiass. φθείρομαι, από τίνος, to
be so corrupted as to fall away from a thing [see από,
I. 3 d.], 2 Co. xi. 3; φθ(ΐρόμΐνον κατά τάς ΐπιθυμία!,
[R. V. ivaxeth corrupt etc.], Eph. iv. 22. [Comp. : 6ia-,
κατα-φίβίρω.] *
φθιν-οπωρινο'ϊ, -ή, -όν. (φθινόπωρον, late autumn ; fr.
φθίνω to wane, waste away, and οπώρα autumn), au-
tumnal (Polyb. 4. 37, 2; Aristot. h. a. 5, 11 ; [.Strab.],
Plut.) : 8(v8pa φθιναπ. autumn trees, i. e. trees such as
they are at the close of autumn, dry, leafless and with-
out fruit, hence άκαρπα is addeil ; used of unfruitful,
worthless men, Jude 12 [cf. Up. Lglitft. A Fresh Re-
vision etc. p. 134 sq.].•
φβο'γγοϊι -ov, 6, (φθίγγομαι, q. v.), a musical sound,
whether vocal or instrument.al (Sap. . xix. 17): 1 Co.
xiv. 7 ; Ro. x. IS, in this latter pass. Paul transfers
what is said in Ps. xviii. (.xix.) 5 to the voices of the
preachers of the gospel. (Ilom., Tragg., Xen., Plat.,
al.)*
φθονίω, -ώ; (φθόνος); ΐτ. Hom. down; to envy: τινί,
one. Gal. v. 26 [here Ltxt. Tr mrg. WII mrg. read the
accus.; see B. § 132, 15 Rem.; W. § 31, 1 b.].*
ψθο'νοδι -ου, ό, fr. [Pind. and] Ildt. down, envy : Ro. L
29 ; Gal. v. 21 ; 1 Tim. vi. 4 ; Tit. iii. 3 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 ; δια
φθόνον. for envy, i. e. prompted by envy [see διά, Β. IL
2 b.], Mt.xxvii. 18; Mk. χ v. 10; Phil. i. 15, (Dio Cass.
44, 36) ; προς φθονον (πιποθ^• το πν^νμα ο κατωκησ^ν [but
see κατοικίζω^ iv ήμίν; doth the .Spirit which took up its
abode within us (i. e. the Holy Spirit) long enrlnusly'l
(see προς, I. 3 g.), Jas. iv. 5 [but " (Wll in second mrg.)
drop the interrog.] ; see on the pass. Grimm in the
Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1854, p. 934 sqq. [Syn. see
ζήλος, 2 fin.] •
φθορά, -fif, ή, (φθ(ίρω), fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down,
1. corruption, destruction, perishing, (opp. to -^(νισις, ori-
gin, often in Plat., Aristot., Plut. ; opp. to σωτηρία. Plat.
Phileb. p. 35 e.; for ηπί;', Ps. cii. (ciii.) 4; Jon. ii. 7):
Ro. viii. 21 (on which see ^ουλΰα) ; 2 Pet. ii. 12' [some
(cf. Ιί.Λ'. mrg.) take φθ here actively: «t φθοράν, to de-
stroy] ; iv φθορά, in a state of corruption or decomposi-
tion (of the body at burial"!, 1 Co. xv. 42 ; by meton.
that which is subject to corruption, what is perishable, opp.
to αφθαρσία, ibid. 50 ; in the Christian sense, the lo.is of
φιαΚη
653
φιΚΐω
salvation, eternal misery (which elsewhere is called απά>-
Xtia), Col. ii. 22 (see άπόχρησκ) ; opp. to ζωη oi'iiwor,
Gal. vi. 8, cf. Schott ad loc. 2. in the N. T. in an
ethical sense, corruption i. e. moral decay : 2 Pet. i. 4 ;
ii. 12'" [some take the word here actively (R.V. t.\t. in
their destroying), al. refer it to 1 above], 19; with τήί
ζαης added. Sap. xiv. 12.*
φιάλη, -ijr, η, fr. Horn, down, Sept. for p"ltp, α broad,
shallow bowl, deep saucer [Diet, of Antiq. s. v. Patera ;
B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Vial] : Rev. v. 8 ; xv. 7 ; xvi 1-4, 8,
10, 12, 17 ; xvil 1 ; xxi 9.*
ψιλ-ά-γαθος, •ον, (fr. φ[\ος and άγαθόί), loving goodness :
Tit. i. 8. (Sap. vii. 22 ; Plut. praec. conjug. c. 1 7 ; also
comp. Thes. c. Rom. c. 2 ; Ι^φιΧάγαθο: ov φίλαυτο!, Aris-
tot. magn. mor. ii. 14 p. 1212" 18 ; Polyb. 6, 53, 9 ; Philo
de vit. Moys. ii. § 2].) *
Φιλο5€'λφ«ο [Τ WH -la (cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 87), see
I, i], -as, ή. Phi adelphia (now Alahshar, AUahschir, [or
Ala-Shehr i. e. "The White City " (Sayce)]), a city of
Lydia in Asia Minor, situated near the eastern base
of Mount Tmolus, founded and named by the Per-
gamene king Attains II. Philadelphus. After the death
of king Attains ΙΠ. Philometor, b. c. 133, it together
with his entire kingdom came by his will under the
jurisdiction of the Romans : Rev. i. 1 1 ; iii. 7.*
ψιλα8<λφ(α, -ay, η, (φίλάδΑφοί), the love of brothers
(or sisters'), brotherly love, (prop., 4 Mace. xiii. 22 ; xiv.
1 ; [Philo, leg. ad Gaium §12]; Joseph, antt. 4, 2, 4 ;
Lcian. dial. deor. 2G, 2; Plut. libell. ntpi φιλα8(λφίας ;
[cf. Babrius 47, 15]) ; in the N. T. the love which Chris-
tiajis cherish for each other as ' brethren ' (see άδ(λφΟ£,
4) ; [love of the brethren^ (Vulg. caritas or amor fra-
ternitatis) : Ro. xii. 10; 1 Th. iv. 9 ; Heb. xiii. 1 ; 1 Pet.
L 22; 2 Pet. i. 7, cf. 1 Jn. v. 1.»
ψιλ-ά8£λψο$, -01', (^φ[\ο! and αδελφό;), loving brother or
sister (Soph., Plut., Anthol.) ; in a broader sense, loving
one like a brother, Xen. mem. 2, 3, 17; loving one's felloiv-
counlrynien, of an IsraeUte, 2 Mace, χ v. 14; ο/Ό Chris-
tian loving Christians, 1 Pet. iii. 8 [R.V. loving as breth-
reny
φ(λαν$ρο$, -ov, (φίλος and άιτηρ), [fr. Aeschyl. down
(in other senses)], loving her husband: Tit. ii. 4 (φίΚαν-
δροι και σώφρονα γυνα'ικα, Plut. praec. conj. c. 28).•
φιλανθρωττίο, -as, ή, {φΐΚάνθρίύποί), fr. Xen. and Plat,
down, loce of mankind, benevolence, (Vulg. humanitas),
[R.V. hindness] : Acts xxviii. 2 ; Tit. iii. 4. [Cf. Field,
Otium iiorv. Pars iii. ad 11. cc] *
φιλανβρώιτωϊ, adv., humanely, kindly: Acts xxvii. 3.
(Isocr., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut., al. ; 2 Mace. i.x. 27.)•
φιλαρ-γυρ(α, -as, ή, (φιλάργυρο!), love of money, avarice :
1 Tim. vi. 10. (Isocr., Polyb., Ceb. tab. c. 23 ; Diod. 5,
26; [Diog. Laert. 6, 50; Stob. flor. 10, 38; Philo de
mut. nom. § 40] ; Pint., Lcian., Hdian. 6, 9, 1 7 (8) ; 4
Mace. i. 26.) [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xxiv.] •
φιλ-ύτυροΐ, -ο», (φίλοΓ and Spyvpos), loving money,
avaricious: Lk. xvi. 14 ; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Soph., Xen.,
Plat., al.) •
φ(λ-αντο«, -οι», (φίλοί and airot), loving one's self', too
intent on one's own interests, selfish : 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Aris-
tot. [(cf. φίλάyaθos)\ rhet. 1, 11, 26 (where cf. Co|je)
ανάγκη Travras φιλαΰτου5 fivai ή μάλλον η ήττον] ; Philo,
legg. alleg. 1, 15; Plut., [Epict.], Lcian., Sext. Emp. ;
δια TO φύσ« navras tivai φ^λaΰτoυs, Joseph, antt. 3,8,1.)
[Cf. Trench, Syn. § .xciii.]*
φιλί'ω, -ώ ; impf. 3 pers. sing. «φιΆ» ; 1 aor. (φίλησα ;
pf. ίΓ€φίλ7)κα; (φίλos)^, fr. Hom. down; 1. to luce;
to be friendly to one, (Sept. several times for 3ΠΧ) : τινά,
Mt. X. 37 ; Jn. v. 20 [here L mrg. αγαπά] ; xi. 8, 36 ; χ v.
19 ; xvi. 27 ; .xx. 2 ; xxi. 15-1 7 ; 1 Co. xvi. 22 ; Rev. iii.
19; with ev πΐστιι added, with a love founded in and
springing from faith. Tit. iii. 15 ; τι, to love i. e. delight
in, long for, a thing: τήν πρωτοκλισίαν, Mt. xxiii. 6;
ασπασμού!, Lk. xx. 46 ; την ψνχήν, to be desirous of pre-
serving one's life (opp. to μισΛν, to hate it when it can••
not be kept without denying Christ), Jn. xii. 25 ; with
nouns denoting virtues or vices : to ψίΟδοΓ, Rev. xxii.
1 5 (σοφίαν, Prov. xxLx. 3 ; viii. 1 7) ; foil, by an inf., like
the Lat. amo facere, to love to do, i. e. to do with pleasure :
Mt. vi. 5 (Is. Ivi. 10; Pind. Nem. 1, 15; Aeschyl. septem
619; Agam. 763; Suppl. 769 ; Eur. Iph. Taur. 1198;
Rhes. 394 ; Xen. hipparch. 7, 9 ; Ael. v. h. 14, 37). 2.
to kiss: τινά, Mt. xxvi. 48; Mk. xiv. 44 ; Lk. x.xii. 4.,
(often in the Grk. writ.; Sept. for p:?j. Gen. xxvii. 26
sq., and often). 3. As to the distinction between
αγαπάν and φίΚ€ΐν : the former, by virtue of its connec-
tion with άγαμαι, properly denotes a love founded in ad-
miration, veneration, esteem, Uke the Lat. diligere, to
be kindly disposed to one, wish one well ; but φιλ^ΐν de-
notes an inchnation prompted by sense and emotion,
Lat. amare ; 6 μη τον 8fόμ(vos ovBt τι άγαπωη αν 6 Sf μη
άγαπωη [-πων (?)], ούδ* αν φιλοϊ, Plat. Lys. p. 215 b.;
(φιλησατΐ avrbv (Julius Caesar) ws πατίρα και ηγαπησατ€
i>s eiepyinjv, Dio Cass. 44, 48 ; ut scires, eum a me
non diligi solum, verum etiam amari, Cic. ad fam. 13,
47; L. Clodius valde me d digit vel, ut (μφατικώτ^ρον
dicam, valde me amat, id. ad Brut. 1. Hence men are
said αγαπάν God, not φίΚ(Ίν ; and God is said άγαπήσαι
τον κόσμον (Jn. iii. 16), and φιΧΰν the disciples of Christ
(Jn. xvi. 27) ; Christ bids us αγαπάν (not φιλίΓν) τοϋι
(χθροΰς (Mt. Λ•. 44), because love as an emotion can-
not be commanded, but only love as a choice. Wis-
dom says, Toir (μϊ φιλoΰιn■as αγαπά, Prov. viii. 1 7. As
a further aid in judging of the difference between the
two words compare the foil. pass. : Jn. xi. 3, 5, 36 ; xxi.
15-17; [even in some cases where they might appear
to be used interchangeably (e.g. Jn. xiv. 23; xvi. 27)
the difference can still be traced]. From what has
been said, it is evident that αγαπάν is not, and cannot
be, used of sexual love [but it is so used occasionally by
the later writers ; cf. Plut. Pericl. 24, 12 p. lC5e. ; sjTnp.
7 p. 180 b. ό f'pώμ(vos τον ΐραστην αγαπά \ '^i. Steph.
Thesaur. i. p. 209 a. ; Soph. Le.x. s. v. αγαπάω, 2; Wool-
sey in the Andover Rev. for Aug. 1885, p. 170 sq.]. Cf.
Tittmann, Syn. N. T. i. p. 50 sqq. ; Cremer s. v. αγαπά••
[4te Aufl. p. 9 sq.] ; Trench § xii. ; [Schmidt ch. 136,
esD. § 6 ; Cope, Aristot. rhet. vol. i. App. A. (also give»
φίΧη
654
φίΧον
in the Journ. of Philol. for 1868, p. 88 eqq.) ; also HShne
in (Luthardt's) Zeitschr. f. kirchl. Wissensch. u. s. w.
for 1882, p. 6 sqq. ; esp. Woolsey u. s.. Comp. : lutra-
φ(λ€ω.] *
φίλη, ή, see φίλο;, 2.
φιλη'δονοϊ, -ον, (φίλοΓ and ήδοη)), laving pleasure: 2
Tim. iii. 4. (Polyb. 40, 6, l(i; I'lut., Lcian., al.) *
φίλημα, -ΤΟΓ, TO, fr. Aescbyl. do%vn, a kisa (see φίλίω,
2) : Lk. vii. 45 ; x.xii. 48, (Prov. xxvii. 6 ; Cant. i. 2) ;
&γιον, the kiss with which, as a sign of fraternal affection,
Christians were accustomed to welcome or dismiss their
companions in the faith: Ro. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 20; 2
Co. xiii. 12; 1 Th. v. 26 ; it is also called φιΚημα ayOTnjr,
1 Pet. V. 14. Cf. Kahle, De osculo sancto (Regiuui.
1867); [B. D. s. v. Kiss; also Diet, of Christ. Antiq.
s. V. Kiss].*
Φιλη'μων, -ovos. 6, Philemon, of Colossae, converted to
Christianity by Paul (Philem. 19), and the recipient of
the lovely little letter wliich bears his name in the N. T. :
Philtm. 1. [BB. DD. s. v.; esp. Bp. Lghlfi. Com. on
Col. and Philem., Intr.] *
Φίλητοβ ([Chandler § 325 ; but] R L Τ Tr Φιλι;τΟΓ, see
ΤυχικοΓ [ Tilf. Proleg. p. 103]), -ov, 6, Philelus, a heretic :
2 Tim. ii. 17.*
φιλία, -ar, ψ (φΊΧος), friendship: with a gen. of the
object, Jas. iv. 4. [(Theogn., Hdt., al.)j *
ΦιλιΐΓΐΓη'(ηο5, -ου, ό, a Philippian : Phil. iv. 15.*
ΦΙλιτητοι, -ων, οί, [on the plur. cf.AV. § 27, 3], Pliitlppi,
a city of Macedonia Prima [see B. D s. v. Macedonia],
situated on [near] the northern coast of the iEgean
Sea, between the rivers Strymon and Nestus, and the
cities Neapolis and Amphipolis. It took its name from
Pliilip I. of Macedon, who built it up from a village called
Κμ>)ΐΊ'δίΓ, and adorned and fortified it: Acts xvi. 12 (on
this ])ass. see κοΚώνια) ; xx. 6 ; Phil. i. 1 ; 1 Th. ii. 2.
[See Bp. Lghlft. Cora, on Philip., Intr. iii.] *
ΦίλιιπΓΟϊ, -ου, ό, Philip ; 1. a son of Ilerod the
Great by his fifth wife, Cleopatra of Jerusalem (Josejih.
antt. 17, 1, 3), and by far the best of his sons. He was
tetrarch of Gaulanitis, Trachonitis, Auranitis, Batansea,
and (ace. to the disputed statement of Lk. iii. I) of Itu-
rjea also [cf. Schiirer as below ; but see B. D. Am. ed.
s. V. Ttura;a] ; and the founder of the cities of Cajsarea
Philippi (in the Decapolis) and Julias. After having
lived long in celibacy, he married Salome, the daughter
of Ilerod [Philip, the disinherited; see below] his half-
brother (Joseph, antt. 18, 5, 4). He ruled mildly, justly
and wisely thirty-seven years, and in a. d. 34 died with-
out issue, leaving a grateful memory of his reign in the
minds of his subjects (Joseph, antt. 18, 2, 1 and 4, 6;
b. j. 2, 9, 1) : Mt. xvi. 13 ; Mk. viii. 27 ; Lk. iii. 1 ; cf.
Keim in Schenkel iii. p. 40 sqr|. ; Schiirrr, Neutest. Zeit-
gesch. § 17, a. ; [BB. DD.]. In Mt. xiv. 3 ; Mk. vi. 17,
and Lk. iii. 19 Rec. it is said that his wife was Herodias
(see Ήρωδιάί) ; thus Herod, the son of Herod the Great
by Mariamne the daughter of the high-priest Simon
(Joseph, antt. 18, 5, 1 ; b. j. 1, 28, 4), who lived as a pri-
vate citizen in comparative obscurity and was the first
husband of Herodias (Joseph, antt. 18, 5, 4), seems to
have been confounded with Philip, who as a ruler was
better known (cf. Vulkmar, Ueber ein. histor. Irrthum
in den Evangg., in Zeller's Theol. Jahrbb. for 1 846, p. 363
sqq.). Many interjjreters (see esp. Krelis, Observv. etc.
p. 37 sq.; [Dvi/ling, Observv. sacr. vol. ii. (ed. 2) p. 342
stjq.]), in vindication of the Evangelists, make the some-
what improbable conjecture that the first husband of
Herodias had two names, one a family name Ilerod, the
other a proper name Philip ; [yet so Winer, R\VB. s. v.
Philippus, 5 ; BB. DD. ; Gerlach in the Zeitschr. f. Luth.
TheoL for 1869, p. 32 sq.; Meyer on Mt. 1. c. ; Weiss on
Mk. 1. c.]. 2. Philip of Bethsaida [in Galilee], one
of the apostles: Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 14 ; Jn. L
43-48 (44-49) ; vi. 5, 7; xii. 21 sq.; xiv. 8 sq. ; Acts L
13. 3. Philip, one of the seven deacons of the
church at Jerusalem, and also an 'evangelist' (fuayytXi-
στής. (]. V.) : Acts vi. 5 ; viii. .')-40 ; xxi. 8.*
φιλο'-θεο;, -ov, {φίλος and flidt), luring [A. V. looers o/J
God : 2 Tim. iii. 4. ([Aristot. rhet. 2, 1 7, C], Philo,
Lcian., al.) *
Φιλο'λογοϊ, -oii, 6, [lit. 'fond of talk'], Pldlnlogus, a
certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 15. [Cf. Bp. Lghl/l. Com.
on Pliili])., note on " Cajsar's Household" § 10.]*
φιλονίΐκία, -OS, ή, (φιλόνίίΚοΓ, q• v.), lore of a/rije, eager-
ness to contend, (Plat., Plut., Lcian., al. ; 4 Mace. i. 26) ;
contention : Lk. xxii. 24. (2 Mace. iv. 4 ; Thuc. 8, 76 ;
eJoseph. antt. 7, 8, 4 ; Antonin. 3, 4 ; in a good sense,
eniuliition, Xen., Plat., Dem., Plut., al.) *
φιλο' -veiKos, -OK, (φιλοί, and ve'iKos fUiie), Jhnd o/" stri/is,
contentious: iCo. xi. 16. (Pind., Plat., Polyb., Joseph.,
Plut., al. ; in a good sense, emulous, Xen., Plat., Plut.,
al.)*
ψιλο-ξ€ν(α, -ας, ή, (φίλόξοΌΓ, q. v.), love to strangers,
hospitality: Ro. xii. 13; Heb. xiii. 2. (Plat.,- Polyb.,
al.) *
φιλό-ξίνος, -ov, (φίλος and ξίνος), fr. Ilom. down, hos-
pitable, generous to guests, [^given to hospitality^ : 1 Tim.
iii. 2 ; fit. i. 8 ; 1 Pet. iv. 9.*
φι.λο-πρωτ«νω ; (φιλόπρωτος, fond of being first, striv-
ing after the first place ; fr. φίλος and πρόιτος : Artem.
oneir. 2, 32; Plut. [Alcib. 2, 2]; mor. p. 471 e. [i. e. de
tranipiil. an. 12; p. 793 e. i. e. an seni sit etc. 18, 8]);
to aspire after pre-eminence, to desire to hcjirst : 3 Jn. 9.
(Several times in eccles. writ.) *
φ£λο5, -ij, -ov, fr. Horn, down, friendly [cf. L. and S.
s. v. I. and Π.] : φίλον tlvai rivi, to he friendly to one,
wish him well. Acts xix. 31 ; 1. ό φίλος, Sept. for
in, 3ΠΝ, subst., a friend: Lk. vii. 6; xi. 5; χ v. 6 ; xvi.
9; xxiii. 12; Acts xxvii. 3; 3 .Tn. 15 (14); joined with
ovyyfveU, Lk. xxi. 16 ; an associate, opp. to δοΟλοΓ, Jn. xv.
15; φίλοι αναγκαίοι, [A-Y. near friends'] Lat. necessitate
conjuncti. Acts x. 24 ; φιλβ, friend, in kindly address,
I>k. xiv. 10 ; with a gen. of the subject, ό φίλοί nvis,
Lk. xi. 6, [8]; xii. 4; xiv. 12 ; xv. 29; Jn. xi. 11 ; χ v.
13 sq. ; spec, he who associates familiarly with one, a cnmr-
paninn, Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34; & φ. τοΰ νυμφίου, the
rabbinical ]3piW [q.v. in Buxtorf or Levy] (i. e. 'son of
φιΧοσοφία
655
φοβέ»
gladness*), one of the bridegroom's friends who on hie
behalf asked the hand of the bride and rendered him
''arious services in closing the marriage and celebrating
the nuptials [B. D. s. v. Marriage, III. ; Edersheim, Jew-
'ih Social Life, p. 152], Jn. iii. i'J ; φί\ο! τοί Kalaapos, on
Caesar's side, loyal to his interests, Ju. xix. 12 ; Beou, esp.
dear to Grod, peculiarly favored with his intimacy, Jas.
ii. 23 ([cf. Ilarnack and Bp. Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
10, 1 ; Rdnsch in the Zeitschr. f. wissenschaftl. 'I'heol. for
1873, p. 583 sq.]; also in prof. auth. cf. Grimm, Exeget.
Hdbch. on Sap. vii. 27 p. 164) ; with a gen. of the thing,
one whofitids his pleasure in a thing, φίλο; τοΰ κόσμου,
Jas. iv. 4. 2. Fem. φΐΚη, η, a (female) friend : Lk-
XV. 9.•
φιλο-ΐΓθφ(α, -as, ή, (fr. φίλάσοφοί), prop, love {and pur•
suit) of wisdom ; used in the Grk. writ, of either zeal for
or skiU in any art or science, any branch of knowledge,
see Passow s. v. [cf. L. and S. s. v.]. Once in the N. T.
of the theology, or rather theosophy, of certain Jewish-
Christian ascetics, which busied itself with refined and
speculative inquiries into the nature and classes of
angels, into the ritual of the Jlosaic law and the regu-
lations of Jewish tradition respecting practical life: Col.
ii. 8 ; see Grimm on 4 Mace. i. 1 p. 298 sq. ; [Bp. Lghtft.
on Col. 1. c, and Prof. AVestcott in B. D. 8. v. Philoso-
phy].•
φιλόΗΓοψοΐ, -ου, ό, (φίλοΓ and σ•οφ<!Γ), a philosopher, one
given to the pursuit of icixdom or learning [Xen., Plat.,
al.] ; in a narrower sense, one viho investigates and dis-
cusses the causes of things and the highest good : Acts xvii.
18. [See reft, under the preceding word.] *
φιλόστοργος, -ov, (φίλοί, and σζαρτ/η the mutual love of
parents and ciiildren ; also of husbands and wives), lov-
ing affection, prone to love, loving tenderhj ; used chiefly
of the reciprocal tenderness of parents and children :
Tp φ(λαδ(λφια (dat. of respect) cis αΚλήΧονΐ, [R. V. in
love of the brethren tenderly affectioned one to anolherj,
Raxii. 10. (Xen., Plut., Lcian., AeL, al.) Ct. Fritzsclie,
Com. on Rom. vol. iii. p. 69.*
φιλότΕκνο;, -oi», (φΛοϊ and τίκντφ), loving one's off-
spring or children : joined with φΰίανΒροί (as in Plut.
mor. p. 769 c), of women. Tit. ii. 4. (4 Mace. xv. S-5 ;
Hdt. 2, 66 ; Arstph., Eur., Aristot., Plut., Lcian., al.) *
φιλοτι.μΐ£Ό|ΐαι, -οΰμαι; (φιΚότιμοί, and this fr. φίλο;
and τιμή) ; depon. pass, (with fut. mid.) ; freq. in Grk.
writ. fr. Andoc., Lysias, Xen., Plat, down ; a. to be
fond of honor; to be actuated by love of honor; frrnn a
love of honor to strive to bring something to pass. b.
foil, by an inf., to be ambitious to etc., 1 Th. iv. 11 ; Ro.
XV. 20 ; to strive earnestly, male it one's aim, 2 Ca v. 9.•
φιλοφρο'νως, (φιΧόφρων, q. V.), adv., Jcindly, in a friendly
manner, [X.Y. courteously']: .'Vets xxviiL 7. (2 Mace. iii.
9; 4 Mace. viii. 5; occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. [Sopl>.
and] Hdt. down.)*
φιλοφροιν, -OK, (φίλοί and φρην), fr. Find, and AeechvL
down, friendly, kind: 1 Pet. iii. 8 Rec.•
φιμόω, -w, [inf. φιμοϊρ, 1 Pet. ii. 15 λΥΉ (see their App.
p. 166 and Intr. § 410; B. 44 (38); see ώηΑκατόω]; '
fut. φιμώσο ; 1 aor. ίφίμωσα : Pass., pf. impv, 2 pers.
sing, νίφίμωσο; 1 aor. ίφιμώθην; (φι^ίόϊ a muzzle) ; lo
close the mouth with a muzzle, to muzzle : prop, βοΰν the
ox, 1 Co. Lx. 9 R G L WII txt. (see κημόω); 1 Tim. v. 18,
fr. Deut. .\xv. 4 where for Dpn ; (univ. to fasten, com^
press, τφ ξύΧφ τ6ν αΰχίνα two's, Arstph. nub. 692) ;
metaph. to slop the mouth, make speechless, reduce to si-
lence : Tti/d, Mt. x.\ii. 34; 1 Pet. ii. 15; pass, to become
speechless, hold one's peace, Mt. xxii. 12; Mk. L 25; iv.
39; Lk. iv. 35, (Joseph, b. j. prooem. § 5 ; lib. 1, 22, 3;
Lcian. de morte peregr. 15 ; univ. to be kept in check,
4 Mace. i. 35).*
Φλί'γων [i. e. ' burning '], -ovnor, 6, Phlegon, a Christian
at Rome : Ro. xvi. 14.*
φλογίζω ; (φλόξ, q. v.) ; to ignite, set on fire, (Sir. iii.
30 ; Ex. ix. 24 ; Ps. xcvi. (xcvii.) 3 ; to burn up, 1 Mace,
iii. 5; Soph. Philoct. 119'j): in fig. disc, lo operate de-
structively, have a most pernicious power, Jas. iii. 6 ; in
the pass, of that in which the destructive influences are
kindled, ibid, (see πυρ, p. 558'' top).*
φλόξ, gen. φΧογόί, ή, (φλί'γω [to burn ; cf. Lat. ' flagro',
etc.]), fr. Horn, down, Sept. for 3riS and Π3Γ|4, a fame:
Lk. xvi. 24 ; on the phrases φλ6ξ mpas and πϋρ φλογόί
see nip, p. 558'.
φλυαρεω, -ώ; (φλύαρος, q. v.); to utter nonsense, talk
idly, prate, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Plut., al.) ; to bring
forward idle accusations, make empty charges, Xen. Hell.
6, 3, 12 ; joined with βΚασφημΛν, Isocr. 5, 33 : τινά Xoyois
πονηροϊς, to accuse one falsely with malicious words,
3 Jn. 10 [A. V. prating against etc.].*
φλύαροϊ, -ov, (φλύω, 'to boil up,' ' throw up bubbles',
of water ; and since bubbles are hollow and useless
things, ' to indulge in empty and foolish talk ') ; of per-
sons, uttering or doing silly things, garrulous, babbling,
[A. V. tattlers'] : 1 Tim. v. 13 [Dion. Hal. de comp.
verb. 26, vol. v. 215, 3 ; al.] ; of things, /όο/ίίΛ, trifling,
vain : φιλοσοφία, 4 Mace. v. 10. (Plat., Joseph, vit.
§ 31 ; often in Plut.; Aeschyl. dial Socr. S, 13 ; al.)•
φοβΕρέ;, -ά, •ύν, (φοβίω), fr. Aeschyl. down, [fearful
I. e.] 1. (actively) inspiring fear, terrible, formi-
dable ; Sept. for «"il'J. 2. (passively) affected with
fear, timid ; in the N. T., only in the former (active)
sense : Heb. x. 27, 31 ; xii. 21.*
φοββ'ω, -ώ: Pass., pres. φοβονμαι; impf. ίφοβονμηνΐ
1 aor. ίφοβηθην; fut. φοβηθήσομαι; (φόβοί); fr. Horn,
down ; to terrify, frighten, Sap. xvii. 9 ; lo put to flight by
terrifying (to scare away). Pass. 1. to be put to
flight, to flee, (Horn.). 2. to fear, be afraid; Sept,
very often for χ•!' ; absol. to be struck with fear, lo be
seized with alarm : of those who fear harm or injury, Mt
X. 31 ; xiv. 30 ; xxv. 25; Mk. v. S3, 36 ; x. 82 ; xvi 8;
Lk.viu.50; xii. 7,32; Jn.xii.lS; xLx.8; Actsxvi.38;
xxii. 29 ; [Ro. xiii. 4] ; Heb. xiii. 6 ; 1 Jn. iv. 18 ; opp. to
ΰφηΚοφρονΛν, Ro. xi. 20; of those startled by strange
sights or occurrences, Mt. xiv. 27 ; xvii. 7 ; xxviiL 5, 10;
Mk. vi. 50 ; Lk. i. 13, 30 ; ii. 10 ; ix. 34 ; [xxiv. 36 L in
br.] ; Jn. vi. 19, 20 ; Acts xviii. 9 ; xxvii. 24, [but in the
Ust two pass. perh. the exhortation has a wider ref.] ;
φοβητρον
656
φοίνιξ
Rev. i. 1 7 ; with σφόδρα added, Mt. xvii. 6 ; χχτϋ. 54 ;
of those struck with amazement, [Mt. ix. 8 LTTr WII] ;
Mk. V. 15 ; Lk. v. 10; viii. 25, 35. with an ace. of
the contents [cognate ace] (see αγαπάω, sub fin.) : φόβον
μΐγαν, lit. to 'fear a great fear,' fear exceedingly, i\Ik.
iv. 41 ; Lk. ii. 3, (1 Mace. x. 8) ; φόβον αυτών, the fear
which they inspire [see φόβο:, 1], 1 Pet. iii. 14 (Is. viii.
12 ; ToO ΎαντάΧου, to be filled with the same fear as Tan-
talus, Schol. ad Eur. Or. 6) ; with the synonymous πτσψ
Viv (q. v.), 1 Pet. iii. 6. «m, to fear one, be afraid of
one, lest he do harm, be displeased, etc. : Mt. x. 26 ; xi^.
6; xxi. 26,46; Mk. -xi. 18, 32 [cf. B. § 151, 11]; .xii. 12;
Lk. xix. 21 ; xx. 19 ; xxii. 2 ; Jn. Ix. 22; Acts v. 26 [cf.
B.§139,48; W. 505 (471)] ; ix.26; Ro..\iii.3; Gal. ii
12 ; TOf θ(6ν, God, the judge and avenger, Mt. x. 28 ; Lk.
xii. 5 ; xxiii. 40, (Ex. i. 1 7, 21 ; 1 S. xii. 18) ; τ«, to fear
danger from something, Heb. xi. 23, 27; to fear (dread
to undergo) some suffering. Rev. ii. 10. in imitation of
the Ilebr. (p ν,Ύ), foil, by από τ»ΐΌί (cf. Β. § 147, 3) :
Mt. X. 28; Lk. xii. 4, (.ler. i. 8, 17 ; x. 2; Lev. xxvi. 2;
1 Mace. ii. 62; viii. 12; Jud. v. 23). as in the Grk.
■writ., φοβούμαι μή, to fear lest, with the subjune. aor. :
Acts [xxiii. 10 LT Tr WH] ; xxvii. 17 ; μήπωι, lest per-
chance, Acts .\xvii. 29 [here L μηπω (([. v. 2), al. μήπον
(q.v.)] ; 2 Co. -xi. 3 ; xii. 20 ; φοβηθώμ(ν (i. q. let us take
anxious care) μήτίοτί Ttj doicg, lest any one may seem
[see SoKca, 2 fin.], Ileb. iv. 1 ; φοβούμαι νμάι, μηπω!
κικοπίακα, Gal. iv. 11 (see μήπως, 1 b.) j φοβούμαι with
an inf. to fear (i. e. hesitate) to do something (for fear
of harm), Mt. i. 20; ii. 22; Mk. ix. 32 ; Lk. ix. 45, (for
numerous exx. in the Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down see
Passow 8. V. 2, vol. ii. p. 2315'; [L. and S. s. v. B. IL
4]). 3. to reverence, venerate, to treat with defer-
ence or reverential obedience : τινά, Mk. vi. 20; Eph. v.
83 ; τόν θ(6ν, used of his devout worshippers, Lk. i. 50 ;
xviii. 2, 4 ; Acts x. 2, 22, 35 ; [Col. iii. 22 Rec] ; 1 Pet.
ii. 1 7 ; Rev. xiv. 7 ; xix. 5 ; also τόκ κίριον. Col. iii. 22
[GLTTrWH]; Rev. xv. 4; τ6 ora /χα τοϋ Θ(ο0, Rev.
xi. 18, (Deut. iv. 10; v. 29; vi. 2, 13, 24; xiii. 4 ; xiv.
22 (23); Prov. iii. 7; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 10, and many
other pass. ; very often in Sir., cf. Wakl, Clavis Apocr.
V. T. s. V. fin.) ; oi φοβούμενοι r. θ(όν spec, of jiroselytes :
Acts xiii. 16, 2(i, (see σίβω). CoMP. : cV φαβίω*
(Stn.: ίκπ\•ίισσ(σβαι to be astonished, prop, to be struck
with terror, of a sudden and startlinir alarm ; but, like our
"astonish" in popular use, often employed on comparative-
ly slight occasions, and even then with strengthening parti-
cles (as σφόίρα Mt. xix. 25, ίιπ^ρτηρκτσω! Mk. νϋ.37) ; ιττο-
• t» to terrify, to agitate with fear; τρίμΐΐν to tremble, pre-
dominantly physical; φοβ(7ν to fear, the general term;
often used of a protracted state. Cf. Schmidt ch. 139.]
φοβητρον [or -θρον (so LTrWH; see WH, App.
p. 149)], -ου, TO, (φοβέω), that which strikes terror, a
terror, (cause of) /ί-ίΐ/Λί ; Lk.xxi. 11. (Plat. Ax. p. 367a.;
Hippocr., Leian., al., ["but always in plur." (L. and S.)];
for «in, Is. .xix. 17.)•
φόβοΐι -ου, 6, (φίβομαι ; like φόροι, τρόμοι, πόνος, fr.
φίρ«, τρίμω, πίνομαι), fr. Horn, down, Sept. for n^Cl', 109,
np'K (terror), Π'ΓΙΠ (id.); 1. fear, dread, terror;
in a subjective sense (oiitv itrri φόβος tl μή πρι>•
δοσία των άπο λογισμοϋ βοηθημύτων, .Sap. χνϋ. 1 1 ; προσ-
SoKiav λί'γω κακοϋ τοντο, (ire φόβον, tin itot Kokt'iTt,
Plat. Protag. p. 358 d.) : univ., 1 Jn. iv. 18; φόβος ϊπί
τίνα πίπτ(ΐ, [Acts xix. 1 7 L Tr] ; Rev. xi. 1 1 liec. ; «jr»
jriWf», Lk. i. 12 ; Acts xix. 17 [RGT WH ; Rev. xi. U
L Τ Tr WH] ; iyivero, Lk. i. 65 ; Acts v. 6, 1 1 ; \αμβάνίΐ
τινά, Lk. vii. 1 6 (liom. II. 1 1, 402) ; yivtrai τινι, Acts ii. 43 ;
πΧησθηναι φόβου, Lk. v. 26 ; σννίχίσθαι φόβω, Lk. viii.
37; ξχιινφόβον, I Tim. v. 20 (IIdt.8, 12) ; κατιργάζεσθαί
Ttvi φόβον, 2 Co. vii. 1 1 ; φοβίϊσθαι φόβον (see φοβίω, 2),
Mk. iv. 41 ; Lk. ii. 9; with a gen. of the object added,
1 Pet. iii. 14 [soW. §32, 2; al. subject, gen.] ; από φόβου,
for fear, Lk. xxi. 26 ; άπΙ> τοϋ φόβ. for the fear, with
which they were struck, Mt. xiv. 26 ; with a gen. of the
object added, Mt. xxviii. 4 ; fir φόβον, unto (that ye
may) /car, Ro. viii. 15 ; μ(τα φόβου, Mt. xxviii. 8; with
«al τρόμου added, 2 Co. vii. 15 ; Eph. vi. δ ; Phil. ii. 12 ;
fv φόβω κ. iv τρόμω (see τρόμοι), 1 Co. ii. 3; τίνα €ν^φόβφ
σώζ(ΐν (Rec), Λίάκ (LTTr WH), with an.xious lieed
lest ye be defiled by the wickedness of those whom ye
are rescuing, .lude 23 ; plur. φόβοι, feelings of fear,
fears, [W. 176 (166)], 2 Co. vii. S ; φόβος thoV, gen. of
the obj. {out fear of one) : των Ιουδαίων, Jn. vii. 13; xix.
38 ; XX. 1 9 ; βασανισμοί), Rev. xviii. 10, 15 ; θανάτου, Ileb.
ii. 15 (Xen. mem. 1,4, 7), In an objective sense,
that which strikes terror; φόβος αγαθω» ίργων, or more
correctly (with L Τ Tr WH) τώ άγαθω ίργφ, « lurror to
(or for), Ro. xiii. 3. 2. rcrerence, respect, (for au-
thority, rank, dignity) : Ro. xiii. 7 ; 1 Pet. ii. 18 ; iii. 16
(15) ; η iv φόβω ανάστροφη, behavior coupled with [cf.
iv, I. 5 e.] reverence for one's husband, 1 Pet. iii. 2 ;
φόβος with a gen. of the obj. : τοϋ κυρίου. Acts ix. 31 ;
2 Co. V. 11 ; Χριστοί, Eph. v. 21 [not Rec] ; θ(οϋ, Ro. iii.
18; 2 Co. vii. 1 ; [Eph. v. 21 liec.]; 6eov is omitted as
suggested by the context, 1 Pet. i. 1 7 ; (often in the (). T.
T\)p\ ηχ•!' and D'n'7t5 ΠΗΎ). [Syn. see SeiXia, fitot,
fin.; cf. φοβίω.]*
Φοίβη, -ης, η, [lit. « bright ', 'radiant'], Phoebe or Phebe,
a deaconess of the church at CenchresB, near Corinth :
Ro. xvi. 1 [(see διάκονο;, 2 fin.)].*
Φοιν(κη, -ης, ή, Phanice or Phoenicia, in the apostolic
age a tract of the province of Syria, situated on the
coast of the Mediterranean between the river Eleu-
therus and the promontory of Carmel, some thirty milee
long and two or three broad, [but see BB. DD. s. v.J :
Acts xi. 19; xv. 3; xxi. 2.*
ΦοινΟκισιτα, see ΣυροφοΙνισσα.
φοίνιξ (or, as some prefer to write it, φοίνιξ ; cf. W. § 6,
1 c. ; [and reff. s. v. κήρυξ]), hkos, 6; I. as an ap-
pellative, a palm-tree (fr. Hem. down; Sept. for ΊΟΓΐ) :
τά βαία των φοιν. (see βαΐον), the branches of the pahn-
trees, Jn. xii. 13 ; but φοίνικας itself [A. V. palms'[ is put
for the branches in Rev. vii. 9 (2 Mace. x. 7 ; xiv. 4 ;
[so Aristot. magn. mor. § 34 p. 1196•, 36]). II. a
prop, name, Phoenix, a city and haven of Crete [B. D.
(esp. Am. ed.) β. v. Phenice] : Acts xxvii. 1 2.•
φονείκ
657
φρΐνατταταω
ψοντΰβ, -fois, 6, (φόνος), {τ. Horn, down, a murderer, a
komicide: 51t. xxii. 7; Acts vii. 52; xxviii. 4; 1 Pet.
IT. 15 ; Rev. xxL 8; xxiL 15 ; din/p φονή: [cf. άνήρ, 3J,
Acts iii. 14.•
[Stn. : ψον^ίί any murderer, — the genus of which σικάριοί
the assassin is a species ; while ανθραητοκτίνοί (q. v.) has in
the N. T. a special emphasis. Trench § Ixxxiii.]
ψον€νω J fut. φονεύσω \ 1 aor. Ιφόν^νσα ; (φον^ί) ; fr.
[Find., Aeschyl.], Hdt. down ; Sept. mostly for Πϊ"»,
also for J"in, Γ\2'Γ\, etc.; lo kill, slay, murder; absol. to
commit murder [A. V. kilU] : Mt. v. 21 ; Jas. iv. 2 ; ov (q. v.
6) φοι/Ενσ•«ϊ, ilt. V. 21 ; xlx. 18 ; Ro. xiii. 9, (Ex. xx.
15) ; μη φον^ΰστ)!, 5Ik. X. 19 ; Lk. xviii. 20 ; Jas. ii. 11.
τινά : Mt. xxiii. 31, 35 ; Jas. v. 6.•
φόνο5, -ου, 6, (ΦΕΝΩ ; cf. φόβο!, init.), £r. Horn, down,
murder, slaughter: Mk. xv. 7 ; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25 ; Acts Lx.
1 ; Ro. i. 29 ; tV φάνω μαχαίρας, Heb. xi. 37 (Ex. xvii. 13;
Num. xxi. 24 ; Deut. xiii. 15; xx. 13) ; plur. φόνοι, mur-
ders : Mt. XV. 19 ; Mk. vu. 21 ; GaL v. 21 [T \VH om. L
Trbr.c^v.]; Rev. L\. 21.*
ψορΕω, -ω; fut. φορίσω [1 Co. xv. 49 RG WH mrg.] ;
1 aor. ίφόρίσα, (later forms for the earlier φορήσω and
ίφόρησα. cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 315 ; Kiihner [and esp.
Veitcb]s. V. ; W. § 13, 3c. ; [B. 37 (32)]) ; (frequent, of
φίρω, and differing from it by denoting not the simple
and transient act of bearing, but a continuous or ha-
bitual bearing ; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 585 sq. ; Hermann
on Soph. Electr. 715; [Trench § Iviii.; Schmidt, ch. 105,
6] ; accordingly, άγγ(\ίην φίριιν means ' to carry a (sin-
gle) message', Hdt. 3, 53 and 122 ; άγγι^ίην φορί(ΐν, ' to
«erve as (fill the ofBce of) a messenger ', Hdt. 3, 34 ;
hence we are said φοριΐν those things which we carry
about with us or wear, as e. g. our clothing) ; fr. Horn,
down ; lo bear constantly, wear : of clothing, garments,
armor, etc., Mt. xi. 8 ; Jn. xix. 5 ; Ro. xiii. 4 (on this
pass, see μάχαιρα, 2) ; 1 Co. xv. 49 [see above, and WH.
L•tr. § 404]; Jas. ii. 3, (Sir. xi. 5 ; xl. 4).*
ψόρον, -ov, TO, Lat. forum ; see'Ajnriof.
ψόροϊ, -OK, 0, (fr. φίρω, hence prop. S φ(ρ€ται; cf.
φόβος), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for D^ and (2 Esdr. iv. 20;
vi. 8 ; Neb. v. 4) for ΓΓΙΟ, tribute, esp. the annual tax
levied npon houses, lands, and persons [cf. Thom. Mat",
ed. KitscliI p. 387, 13; Grotius as quoted in Trench
§ cvii. 7 ; see rfKos, 2] : φόρον, φάρους διδοκαι Καίσαρι,
Lk. XX. 22; xxiii. 2, (1 Mace. viii. 4, 7); άπο8ιθ<!ι/«, Ro.
xiii. 7; τίλβίν, Ro. xiii. 6.*
φορτίζω ; pf. pass. ptcp. πιφορτισμίνος ; (φόρτος, q. v.) ;
to place a burden upon, lo load : φορτίζ(ΐν τίνα φορτίορ
(on the double ace. see B. 149 (130)), to load one with
a burden (of rites and unwarranted precepts), Lk. xi.
46 ; ΐΓ^φορτισμίνος ' heavy laden ' (with the burdensome
requirements of the Mosaic law and of tradition, and
with the consciousness of sin), Mt. xi. 28. (Ezek. .xvi.
83 ; Hes. opp. 692 ; Lcian. navig. 45 ; AnthoL 10, 5, 5 ;
eccles. writ.) [Comp. : άττο-φορτίζυμαι-^ '
ψορτ(ον, -ot;, TO, (dimin. of φόρτος, but dimin. only in
form not in signif. ; cf. Bllm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 440 ; [W.
5 8. 1 d. fin.]), fr. Hes. down, Sept. for ΗψΌ, a burden.
load: of the freight or lading of a ship (often so in Grk.
writ. fr. Hes. opp. 645, 695 down), Acts xxvii. 10 G L
Τ Tr νΤΗ. Metaph. : of burdensome rites, plur., [Mt.
xxiii. 4] ; Lk. xi. 46 ; of the obligations Christ lays upon
his followers, and styles a ' burden ' by way of contrast
to the precepts of the Pharisees the observance of which
was most oppressive, Mt. xi. 30 (αυτός μόνος δύναται βα-
στάσαι Ζ^ΐ'ωΐΌί φορτίον, Diog. Laert. 7, 5, 4 (171); see
ζυγός, 1 b.) ; of faults, the consciousness of which op-
presses the soul. Gal. vi. 5 [yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loo.
Syx. see όγκος, fin.] *
φόρτοϊ, -ou, «5, (fr. φίρω), fr. Horn, down, a load, bur•
den : Acts xxvii. 10 Rec. [of a ship's lading].•
Φορτο«νάτο5 (or Φουρτ. R G), -ov, 6, [a Lat. name,
' happy '], i^ortuiiuius, a Christian of Corinth [cf. Bp.
Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59 (65)] : 1 Co. xvi. 17.•
φρα'γ€'λλιον, -ου, τό, {haX. flagellum; Β. 18 (16)), α
scourge : Jn. ii. 15.•
φραγ€λΛόω, .«a : 1 aor. ptcp. φραγτλλάχτατ; [Lat.,^a•
gellol ; lo scourge : ταά, Mt. xxvii. 26 ; Mk. xv. 15.
(Eccles. writ.) •
φραγμύς, .ov, 6, {φράσσω to fence round), a hedge,
a fence : Mt. xxi. 33 ; Mk. xiL 1 ; Lk. xiv. 28 ; trop. that
which separates, prevents two from coming together,
Eph. ii. 14 [A. y.partition^, see μχσότοιχον. (Sept. Sir.
xxxvi. 30 (27) ; Hdt., Soph., Thuc, Plut., al.) •
φράζω : 1 aor. impv. φράσον ; fr. Horn, down ; to indi-
cate plainly, make known, declare, whether by gesture
(φωνησαι μΐν ουκ (Ιχ^, Tg 8ί χιψί ΐφραζΐν, Hdt. 4, 113),
or by writing or speaking, or in other ways ; to explain :
Tiw την παραβολήν, the thought shadowed forth in the
parable, Mt. xiu. 36 [R G Τ Tr t.\t.] ; xv. 15. (Twice
in Sept. for j-^n, Job vi. 24 ; H'jin, xii. 8.) •
φρασ-σ-ω : 1 aor. ίφραξα ; Pass., 2 aor. subj. 8 pers.
sing, φραγ^; 2 fut. 3 pers. sing. φραγήσ€ται (2 Co. xi. 10
Rbe.eu GLTTrAVH); [(allied w. Lat. farcio. Germ.
Berg, Eng. borough; cf. Vanicek p. 614); fr. Horn,
down] ; lo fence in, block up, stop up, close up, (τα Srra
τοϋ μη άκοϋσαι, Prov. xxi. 13 ; την όΒ6ν iv σκόλοφιν, Hos.
ii. 6 ; ηη-γήν, Prov. .xxv. 26 ; στόματα Xeovrav, Heb. xi.
33) : ή καύχησις αΖτη ου φραγήσ(ται, this glorying shall
not be stopped, i. e. no one shall get from my conduct
an argument to prove that it is empty, 2 Co. xi. 10 [on
the reading of Rec." (σφραγίσίται) see σφραγίζω, init.];
trop. to put lo silence, [A. V. stopl : to στόμα, Ro. iii. 19.*
ψρ<αρ, -ατός, τό, fr. the Hom. hymn Cer. 99 and Hdt. 6,
119 down; Sept. for -it53 and (in 1 S. xix. 22; 2 S. iii. 26 ;
Jer. xlviii. (xli.) 7, 9) 113 (a pit, cistern), a well : Lk.
xiv. 5 ; Jn. iv. 1 1 sq. ; φρ. της αβύσσου, the pit of the abyss
(because the nether world is thought to increase in size
the further it extends from the surface of the earth and
so to resemble a cistern, the orifice of which is narrow).
Rev. ix. 1 sq.*
φροΜίπατάω, -ώ ; (φριναπάτης, q. V.) : ηνά, to deceive
any one's mind, Gal. vi. 3 [" more is implied by this word
than by άπατάν, for it brings out the idea of subjec-
tive fancies" (Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.) ; cf. Oreen, Crit.
Notes ad loc.]. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.) •
φρΐναττάτη^
658
Φρυασσα
φρενατάτηδ, -ου, 6, (φρην and απάτη), a mind-deceiver ;
Vulg. seductor; [Α. \ . decticcr']: Tit. i. 10. (Several
times in eccles. writ.) *
ψρήν, φρ(νΟ!, ή, piur. φβίνί!, fr. Horn, down, Sept. sev-
eral times in Prov. for aS ; 1. Ike midrijf' or dia-
phragm, the parts about the heart. 2. Ihe mind;
the faculty of perceiving and jwhjing : also in the plur. ;
as, 1 Co. xiv. 20.•
φρ(σ-α-ω ; very often in Grk. writ, f r. Horn, down ; to
be rough, Lat. horreo, korresco, i. e. 1. to bristle,
stiffen, stand up: ίφριξάν μον τρίχα. Job iv. 15 Sept.;
with ορθοί added, lies. opp. 510 ; opOhs• • • φρίσσα τρίχας
(cogn. ace. ot the part affected), lies. scut. 3ul ; with
cold, δια τά φϋχο!, I'lut. quaest. nat. 13, 2 p. 915 b. 2.
to shudder, to be struck with extreme fear, to be horrified:
absol., Jas. ii. 19; 4 Mace. .\iv. 9; like the Lat. horreo,
korresco, constr. with an ace. of the object exciting
the fear, Horn. H. 11, 383, and often.*
ψρονέω, -ώ; impf., 1 pers. sing, (φρονούν, 2 pers. plur.
(φμον€ΐτ€ ; fut. 2 jiers. plur. φρονήσιτί ; pres. pass, iuipv.
3 pers. sing. φρον(ίσθω, Phil. ii. 5 li G (see 3 below) ;
(<()ρήν); fr. Horn, down; 1. to have understanding,
be wise, (Horn., al.). 2. to feel, to think : absol. i>s
vifntot ίφρόνουν, 1 Co. xiii. 11; to have an opinion of one's
self, think of one's self: μη ίητ€ρφρον('ϊν παρ' b δ« φρονήν,
Ho. xii. 8 (fififof φρονύν ή κατ livSpa, Soph. Ant. 708) ;
φρονΛν ei's t5 σωφρονΰν, [R. V. so to think as to think
soberhj'\, to be modest, not to let one's opinion (though
just) of himself exceed the bounds of modesty, ibid. ;
inip h yiypaTTTai, in one's opinion of one's self to go be-
yond the standard prescribed in Scripture, 1 Co. iv. 6
R G [cf. B. 394 sq. (33.S) ; W. § 64, 4]. with an ace. of
the thing, to think, judge : a φρονεί, what your oi)inion
is. Acts xxviii. 22; oiStw άλλο. Gal. v. 10; τί tTipat,
Phil. iij. 15; several persons are said φρονΛν τό αυτό,
to be of the same mind, i. e. to agree together, cherish
the same views, be harmonious : 2 Co. xiii. 11 ; Phil. ii.
2; iii. 16 Rec. ; iv. 2; with ev άλλ^λοι; added, Ro. xv. 5;
also TO ίν φρονοϋντα, having that one mind, Phil. ii. 2
(the phrase τά ίν having reference to τό αυτό; see INleyer
[but cf. Bp. Lglitft.J ad loc.) ; τϊ inrip rti/os, to hold some
opinion, judge, think, concerning one, Phil. i. 7; το αΰτ6
tis άλλήλουί , to be of the same mind towards one anoth-
er, Ro. xii. 16. 3. to direct one's mind to a thing, to
seek or strive for; τά τίνος, to seek one's interests or ad-
vantage ; to be of one's party, side with him, (in public
affairs, Add. to Esth. viii. 5 ; 1 Mace. x. 20 ; Dio Cass.
51, 4 ; Hdian. 8, 6, 14 (6) ; for other exx. fr. Xen. [or
Hdt. 1, 162 fin ] down see Passow s. v. Π. ; [L. and S.
n. 2 c.] ; hence) τά toC Oeov and τα των άνθρ., to be in-
tent on promoting what God wills (spec, his saving pur-
poses), and what pleases men, Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33;
τα τήϊ σαρκόί and τα τοΰ πν^ύματοί (σαρξ [q. ν. 4] and
mtipa [q. v. p. 522"] being personified), to pursue those
things which gratify the flesh, ... the Hoiy Spirit, Ro.
»iu. 5, of. 6. τά ϊπίγηα, Phil. iii. 19 ; τά άνω and τά «Vi
r>)s γήϊ. Col. iii. 2, (ανθρώπινα, θνητά, Aristot. eth. Nic.
10, 7 p. 11 XT', 32) ; tuvto φρονύτι (pres. im])v.) iv ίιμίν,
[R. V. have this mind in you^, be intent within youi-seW'M
on this, Phil. ii. 5 L Τ Tr WH ; pass, φρονύταί τι ίν tlvl,
some habit of thought (expressed by deeds) e.\ists in
one, I'liil. ii. 5 R G [A. V. let this mind be in you] ; νφη\ά
(sci• ί\1τη\0!, b.). φρονύν ήμίμαν, to regard a day, observe
it as .sacred, Ro. xiv. 6; φρ. Iwip τίνος, to take lUougLt.
ha\e a care, for one, I'hil. iv. 10 [see άναθάΚΚω, lin.
Com p. : κατά-, iti^pa-, π€ρι-, iwep- φρονίω.] *
φρόνημα, -Tot, TO, {φρονίω, q. v.), what one has in mind,
the thouglits and purposes, [A. V. mind] : Ro. viii. 6 sq.
27. (llesych. φρόνημα• βούΚημα, θίΚημα. In various
other senses also fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
φρο'νητΐ5, -t<Bf, η, (φρονίω), understanding : joined with
σοφία (as 1 K. iv. 25 (29) ; Dan. i. 17 Theod. ; ή σοφία
άνδρΧ TiKTci φρόνησιν, Prov. χ. 23), Eph. i. 8 [A. V. pi~tt-
dence ; see σοφία, fin.] ; spec, knowledge and holy love
of the will of God [A. V. wisdom], Lk. i. 17 (Sap. iii. 15;
Sept. for nj"3, njOfl, Π03Π ; used variously by Grk.
writ. fr. Soph, and Eur. down).*
ψρο'νιμο;, -ov, (φρονίω); a. intelligent, wise [so
A. V. uniformly] : 1 Co. x. 15 ; opp. to μωρός, 1 Co. iv.
10; opp. to άφρων, 2 Co. xi. 19; φρόνιμος trap {αντφ,
one who deems himself wise, [A. V. tvise in one's oum
conceits], Ro. xi. 25 ; xii. 16, (Prov. iii. 7). b. prw•
dent, i.e. mindful of one's interests: Mt. x. 16; xxiv. 45;
Lk. xii. 42 ; ojjp. to μωρός, Mt. vii. 24 (cf. 26) ; xxv. 2, 4,
8 sq. corapar. φρονιμώτιρος, Lk. xvi. 8. (From Soph.,
Xen., Plat, down ; Sept. for p'aj, DJn, j'^O.) [Syn.
see σοφός, fin.] *
φρον(μω$, adv., prudently, wisely : Lk. xvi. 8. [From
Arstph. down.]•
φροντίζω; (φροι/τίί [' thought ', fr. φροκω]) ; fr. Theogn.
and Hdt. down; to think, to be careful; to be thoughtful
or anxious : foil, by an inf. Tit. iii. 8.*
φρουρε'ω, -ώ : impf. (φρουρούν ; fut. φρουρήσω ; Pass.,
pres. ptcji. φρουρούμί TOS ; impf. «'φρουροΰμι;!'; (φρουράς,
contr. fr. προοράς fr. προοράω to see before, foresee) ; fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; 1. to guard, protect hy a
military guard, either in order to prevent hostile inva-
sion, or to keep the inhabitants of a besieged city from
flight ; (often so fr. Thuc. down) : τ^ν π6\ιν, i. e. not ^i
surrounded the city with soldiers, but by posting senlriKi
he kept the gates guarded, 2 Co. xi. 32 [R.V. guarded], cf.
Acts ix. 24. 2. metaph. : τινά, pass., ύπ4 νόμον, under
the control of the Mosaic law, that we might not escape
from its power, with συγκ(κΚ(ΐσμ£νοι \_συν(γ)κλ(ΐόμ(νοι
LTTr WH] added, Gal. iii. 23 [R. V. kept in ward; cf.
Plut. de defect, orac. § 29; Sap. xvii. 15]; to protect by
guarding (Soph. O. R. 1479), to keep: τας καρ8ίας iv
Χριστώ, i. e. in close connection with Christ, Phil. iv. 7 ;
Ttva eh τι, by watching and guarding to preserve one tor
the attainment of something [R. V. guarded unto etc.],
pass. 1 Pet. i. 5.*
φρυάβ-σω : 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. ΐφρναξαν ; (everywhere
in prof. auth. and also in Mace, as a depon. mid. φρυάσσο-
μαι [W. 24]) ; to neigh, stamp the ground, prance, snort •
to be hgh-spirited : prop, of horses (Anthol. 5, 202 4 ;
Callim. lav. Pallad. vs. 2) ; of men, to lake on lofiy aire.
<f)puyavov
659
φυΚάοσα»
behave arrogantly, (2 Mace. vii. 84 ; 3 Mace. ii. 2 ; An-
thol., Diod., Plut., al. ; [cf. Wetstein on Acts as below]) ;
active for tyji, to be tumultuous, to rage. Acts iv. 25 fr.
Ps. ii. 1.•
φρύγανον, -ου, τ6, (fr. φρΰγω or φρΰσσω, φμΰττω, to dry,
parch; cf. Lat. frigo, frux, fructus), a drij stick, dry
twig ; generally in the plur. this word comprises all dry
sticks, brush-wood, fire-wood, or similar material used
as fuel: Acts xxviii. 3. (Hdt. 4, 62; Arstph., Thuc,
Xen., rhilo, al. ; Sept. for c^P straw, stubble, Is. xl. 24 ;
xU. 2 ; xlvii. 14 ; for '7nn bramble. Job xxx. 7.) *
Φρνγίο, -as, ή, Phrygia, a region of Asia Minor,
bounded by Bithynia, Galatia, Lycaonia, Pisidia, Lydia,
and Mysia. Those of its cities mentioned in the N. T.
are Laodicea, Hierapolis, and Colossa; : Acts ii. 10; xvi.
6; xviii. 23. [B. D. s. v.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col., Intr.,
diss. i. esp. pp. 17 sq. 23 sq.] *
ΦiγcUos and (LTTrWH [see WH. App. p. 159])
Φύγίλοϊ, -ou, o, Phygellus [better Phyg'-elux'], a Christian,
who was with Paul at Rome and deserted him [see B.D.
s. V. and the Comm.] : 2 Tim. i. 15.*
φυγή, -^s, ή, (φίύγω), fr. Horn, down, flight : Mt. xxiv.
20; Mk. xiii. 18 Rec.*
φυλακή, -ηι, ή, (φνλάσσω), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for
niguO, ■'■??'■?, ϊΤΙφ? (a prison), kS^ (enclosure, con-
finement), guard, watch, i. e. a. in an act. sense,
α watching, keeping watch : φύλάσσ^ιν φύλακας, to keep
watch, Lk. ii. 8 (often in the Grk. writ. fr. Xen. an. 2, 6,
10, etc. ; Plat. legg. 6 p. 758 d. down ; [cf. ψνλακα; «xft»,
etc. fr. Hom. (Π. 9, 1 etc.) on] ; often also in Sept. for
ni'TDuO ■ni:'). b. like the Lat. custodia and more
freq. the plur. custodiae (see Klotz, Hdwrbch. [or Har-
pers' Lat. Diet.] s. v.), i. q. persons keeping watch, a
guard, sentinels: Acts xii. 10 [here A. V. tvard'] (and
very often in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down). c. of the
place where captives are kept, a prison: Mt. xiv. 10;
XXV. 36, [39], 43 sq. ; Mk. vi. 17, -27 (28); Lk. iii. 20;
xxi. 12; xxii. 33; Actsv. 19, 22; viii. 3 ; xii. 5 sq. 17;
xvi. 27,40; xxii. 4 ; x.xvi. 10; 2 Co. vi. 5 [here, as in
Heb. xi. 36, A. V. imprisonment] ; 2 Co. xi. 23 ; 1 Pet. iii.
19; Rev. xviii. 2 [twice; rendered in A. λ^ hold and
cage (R.V. hold)]; xx. 7, (Hdt. 3, 152; Thuc. 3, 34;
Pint., al.; Sept. for TTia:?, sSa n'3, and «"^ari n'2,
ΐαΐνο) ; βάΧΚΐΐν or τιθίναι nva fir (r) φνΚακήν or iv
(tji) φυ\ακ% : Mt. v. 25 ; xiv. :> [U (!, al. άττίθίτο] ; xviii.
30; Lk. xii. 58; xxiii. 19, 25; .In. iii. 24 ; Actsv. 25;
viii. 3 [here παραδιδόναι ii's φ.]; xii. 4; xvi. 23 sq. 37;
Rev. ii. 10. d. of the time (of night) during which
guard was kept, α watch 1. e. the period of time during
which a part of the guard were on duty, and at the end
of which others relieved them. As the earlier Greeks
divided the night commonly into three parts [see L. and
S. s. V. I. 4], so, previously to the exile, the IsraeUtes
also had three watches in a night ; subsequently, how-
ever, after they became subject to Rome, they adopted
the Roman custom of dividing the night into four
watches : Mt. xxiv. 43 ; iv tj Sevripa, τρίττ), Lk. xii.
88; Tfriftrn, Mt. xiv. 25; Mk. vi. 48. Cf. Win. RWB.
s. V. Nachtwache ; [McC. and S. 8. v. Night-watch; B. D.
s. V. Watches of Night].•
φυλακ(ζω; (φυλακή [or φυλαξ]); to cast into prison,
imprison: Acts xxii. 19. (Sap. xviii. 4; eccles. and
Byzant. writ.) *
φυλακτη'ριον, -ου, τό, (neut. of the adj. φυλακτηριος, -a,
-Of, fr. φυλακτήρ [' poetic for φΰλαξ'}) ; 1. a forti-
fied place provided with a garrison, a station for a guard
or garrison. 2. a preservative or safeguard, an am-
ulet: Dem. p. 71, 24; Diosc. 5, 15S (159) sq., often in
Plut. The Jews gave the name of φυλακτήρια ( in the
Talm. 'rhiiFi prayer-fillets. Germ. Gehetsriemen ; [cf. O. T.
'frontlets']) to small strips of parchment on which were
written the foil. pass, from the law of Moses, Ex. xiii.
1-10, 11-16; Deut. vi. 4-9; xi. 13-21, and which, en-
closed in Uttle cases, they were accustomed when en-
gaged in prayer to wear fastened by a leather strap to
the forehead and to the left arm over against the heart,
in order that they might thus be solemnly reminded of
the duty of keeping the commands of God in the head and
in the heart, ace. to the directions given in Ex. xiii. 16;
Deut. vi. 8; xi. 18; (cf. Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 13). These
scrolls were thought to have power, like amulets, to
avert various evils and to drive away demons (Targ. on
Cant. viii. 3) ; hence their Greek name. [But see Gins•
burg in Alex.'s Kitto s. vv. Phylacteries (sub fin.) and
IMezuza.] The Pharisees were accustomed τα φυλα-
κτήρια αυτών πλάτυναν, to widen, make broad, their ]ihylac-
teries, that they might render them more conspicuous
and sho\v themselves to be more eager than the majority
to be reminded of God's law : Mt. xxiii. 5. Cf. Win.
RWB. s. V. Phylakterien ; Leyrer in Herzog xi. 639
sqq.; Kneucker'm Schenkel i. 601 sq.; Delitzsch in Riehm
270 sq.; lEdersheim, Jewish Social Life etc., p. 220
sqq. ; B. D. s. v. Frontlets ; esp. Hamburger, Real-Eneycl.
s. V. Tephillin, vol. ii. p. 1203 sq. ; Ginsburg in Alex.'s
Kitto u. s.].*
φίλαξ, -oKOf, 6, (φυλάσσω), a guard, keeper: Acts v.
23; xii. C, 19. (From Horn, down; Sept. for "ΐ•?Γ.) *
φυλάσ-σ-ω ; fut. φυλάξω; 1 aor. iφΰ\aξa; Mid., pres.
φυλάσσομαι; 1 aor. (φυλαξά^ιΐ)»; pres. pass, φυλάσσομαι;
fr. Hom. down; Sept. times too many to count for Tpu^,
occasionally for IS J, [etc.]; 1. Act. to guard (Lat.
custndio) ; i. e. a. to watch, to keep watch : with
φυλακήν added, Lk. ii. 8 (see φυλακή, a.). b. to
guard or watch, have an eye upon : τινά, one, lest he es-
cape. Acts xii. 4; xxviii. 16; pass.. Acts xxiii. 35; Lk.
viii. 29 ; ri, any thing, lest it be carried off : τά Ιμάτια,
Acts xxii. 20. c. to guard a person (or thing) that
he may remain safe, i. e. lest he suffer violence, be de-
spoiled, etc., i. q. to protect : την αϋλήν, Lk. xi. 21 ; από
Tivos, to protect one from a pers. or thing, 2 Th. iii. 3
[see πονηροί, p. 53P], (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 7; Ps. cxl. (cxli.)
9; cf. B. § 147, 3; [W. 223 (209)]); τήν παραθήκη^' (or
παρακαταθήκην), to keep from being snatched away, pre-
serve safe and unimpaired, 1 Tim. vi. 20; 2 Tim. i. 14;
with the addition of fit τίνα ήμίραν, i. e. that it may be
forthcoming on that day, 2 Tim. i. 12; to guard from
φυΧη
660
φύσι^
being lost or perishing, i. e. (with the predominant idea
of a liappy issue), lo preserce : τινά, .In. xvii. 12 (where
{φύλαξα is exjjhiined by the foil, olde'tt c| αύτώΐ' άιτώλίΓΟ
[cf. τηρϊω, fin•]) ; 2 Pet. ii. 5 ; rira with a pred. accus.
Jude 24 ; φυλάξίΐ (opp. to άπολίσα) τ. ψυχην tit ζωην
αιών. i. e. will keep it with the result that he will have
Ufe eternal, Jn. xii. 25 ; ίαντΌν από τ. to guard one's self
from a thing, 1 Jn. v. 21 [where cf. Westcott]. d.
to guard, i. e. lo care for, take care not lo violate ; to ob-
serve : τον νόμον, Acts vii. 53 ; xxi. 24 ; Gal. vi. 13, (Lev.
xLx. 37, etc.; Soph. Trach. «16; al. ; νόμους, Xen. Hell.
1, 7, 30 ; Plat, de rep. 6 p. 484 b. ; poUt. p. 292 a.) ; sin-
gle precepts of the Mosaic law, Mt. xix. 20 L Τ Tr WII ;
Mk. X. 20 Lchm.; Lk. xviii. 21 LTTr txt. WII ; [τά
δικαιώματα τοΰ νόμου, Ro. ii. 26] ; τάχ \όγον τον θ(θν, Lk.
xi. 28; τα ρήματα of Jesus, Jn. xii. 47 LTTr WII;
apostolic directions, Acts xvi. 4 ; 1 Tim. v. 21. 2.
Ulid. a. to observe for one's self something to es-
cape, L e. to avoid, sli un, flee from : by a use com. in Grk.
writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, with an ace. of the
obj., Tt, Acts xxi. 25 [A. V. Iceep themselves frorn]; τινά,
2 Tim. iv. 15 [A.V. he thou ware of]; από tivos, to keep
one's self from a thing, Lk. xii. 15 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 8, 9;
[Hell. 7, 2, 10]); "va μή, 2 Pet. iii. 17 (δτΓωί μή, Xen.
mem. 1, 2, 37; other exx. in Passow s. v. p. 2360»; [L.
and S. s. V. C. Π.]). b. by a usage foreign to Grk.
writ, but very freq. in the Sept. (cf. W. 253 (238)), to
guard for one's self (i. e. for one's safety's sake) so as
not to violate, i. e. to keep, observe : ταϋτα πάντα (the pre-
cepts of the Mosaic law), Mt. xix. 20 R G ; Ilk. x. 20
PtGTTrWH; Lk. xviii. 21 RGTrmrg., (Ex. xii. 17;
Lev. xviii. 4; xx. 8, 22; .xxvi. 3, and many other pass.).
[CoMP. : dta -ψυλύσσω. Syn. see τηρίω, fin.] *
φυλή,-ξ(, η, (fr. φύω), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down ; 1.
a tribe; in the N. T. all the persons descended from one
of the ttcelve sons of the patriarch Jacob (Sept. for ΠΙ30
and 122ψ•, also for ΠΠϊΙψΟ, see πατριό, 2) : Ileb. vii. 13
sq. ; with the addition of the genitives Άσήρ, ΰινιαμίν,
etc., Lk. ii. 36 ; .\cts xiii. 21 ; Ro. xi. 1 ; Phil. iii. 5 ; Rev.
V. 5 ; vii. 5-8 ; δώβίκα φ- τοΰ Ίσραηλ, Mt. xix. 28 ; Lk.
xxii. 80; Jas.i. 1 ; Rev. xxi. 12 ; [ιτάσα φυΧη ν'ιων'ΐσραηλ,
Rev. vii. 4]. 2. a race, nation, people : 5It. xxiv.
30; Rev. [i. 7]; v. 9; vii. 9 ; [xi. 9]; xiii. 7; xiv. 6.•
ψνλλον, -ου, TO, (φύω), σ leaf: Mt. xxi. 19; xxiv. 82;
Mk. xi. 13; xiii. 28; Rev.xxii.2. [From Horn, down.]*
ψϋραμα, -ror, τό, (φυράω to mix), any substance mixed
with water and kneaded ; a mass, lump : of dough (Num.
XV. 20 sq. ; [plur., Ex. viii. 8 ; xii. 34] ; Aristot. probl. 21 ,
18 p. 929•, 25; Plut. quaest. conv. 6, 7, 2, 15 p. 698 e.),
1 Co. V. 6 sq. ; Gal. v. 9, (on the meaning of which pass,
see ζύμη) ; Ro. xi. 16 ; of clay (Plut. praec. ger. reip. 15,
4 p. 811 c), Ro. ix. 21 [cf. B. § 140, 8 Rem.].•
φνοακ6$, -ή, -όν, (φΰσΐ!), natural; i. e. a. pro•
duced by nature, inborn, (very often so fr. Xen. [mem.
8, 9, 1] down). b. agreeable to nature, (Dion. Hal.,
Plot., aL) : opp. to τταρά φύσιν, Ro. i. 26, [27]. c.
governed by (the instincts of) nature: ζώα γ€γ(ννημ(να
φυσικά, 2 Pet. ii. 12 [R. V. born mere animals'].*
φυσικώ9, adv., in a natural manner, by ncUure, under
the guidance of nature : by the aid of the bodily senses,
Jude 10. [(Aristot., Philo, al.)] *
ψυσΊόω, -ω ; Pass., pres. φυσιοϋμαι; pf. J)t<;p. πίφυσιωμί-
lOt ; 1 nor. (φυσιώβην; 1. (fr. φΰσΐί), to ιικιΙ.ΐ' nat-
und, to cause a thing lo pass into nature, (Clem. Alex.;
Simplic.). 2. i. q. φυσάω, φυσιάω (fr. φϋσα a pair
of bellows), to inflate, blow up, blow out, to cause to smell
up ; trop. to puff up, make proud : 1 Co. viii. 1 ; pass, to
be puffed up, to bear one's self lof til•/, be proud: 1 Co. iv.
18 sq. ; V. 2 ; .xiii. 4 ; ΰπο τοϋ voiis τηι σαρκοί αντοΰ, CoL
ii. IS; ΰπίρ tivos (see νπίρ, I. 2 [and cf. 5]) κατά τ(ιόϊ,
1 Co.iv. 6 [see ίνα, Π. 1 d.]. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.)•
ψνσι$, -ί«Γ, ή, (fr. φΰω, q. v., as Lat. natura fr. nascor,
ingenium fr. geno, gigno), fr. Horn. Od. 10, 303 down ;
nature, i.e. a. the nature of things, the force, laws,
order, of nature ; as opp. to what is monstrous, abnor-
mal, perverse : 6, η, τ6 πάρα φύσιν, that which is con-
trary to nature's laws, against nature, Ro. i. 26 (oi vapi
φνσιν T^ ΆφpobtτrJ χρώμ€νοι, Athen. 13 p. 605; 6 πωδί-
ραστης . . . τ^ι* πάρα φύσιν ηδονην διώκ(ί, Philo de spec•
legg. i. § 7) ; as opjiosed to what has been jiroduced by the
art of man: of κατά φΰσιν κΧάδοι, the natural branches,
i.e. branches by the operation of nature, Ro. xi. 21, 24
[W. 193 (182)], contrasted with oi iyKivrpivdivTet παρά
φύσιν, coiilrarij to the plan of niiture, cf. 24 ; ή κατά
φνσιν aypif\aios, ibid.; as opposed tu what is imagi-
nary or fictitious: ol μη φνσιι Svrft 6eot, who are
gods not by nature, but ace. to the mistaken opinion of
the Gentiles (Xfyop€voi Bfoi, 1 Co. viii. 5), Gal. iv. 8 ;
nature, i.e. natural sense, native conviction or knowledge,
as opp. to what is learned by instruction and accom-
plished by training or prescribed by law : ή φΰσκ (i. β.
the native sense of propriety) δΜσκιι τι, 1 Co. xi. 14;
φύσα ποκΧν τα τοΰ νόμου, natura magistrci, guided by their
natural sense of what i.s right and proper, Ro. ii. 14. b.
birth, physical origin : ήμ(ΐ; φϋσιι Ίουδαίοί, we so far as
our origin is considered, i. e. by birth, are Jews, Gal. iL
15 (φύσ(ΐ vewrtpoi, Soph. O. C. 1295; τω μίν φΰσ(ΐ
πατρίς, τον fit νόμω ποΧΐτην €πιποίηντο, Isocr. Evagr. 21;
φύσ(ΐ βάρβαροι oirrts, νόμω ^ΐ'ΈΧΚηνίς, Plat. ^lenex.
p. 24.0 d. ; cf. Grimm on Sap. xiii. 1) ; ή €κ φΰσ(α>ί άκρο•
βυστία, who by birth is uncircumcised or a (ientile (opp.
to one who, although circumcised, has made him.«elf a
Gentile by his iniquity and spiritual perversity), Ro. ii.
27. o. a mode of feeling and acting which by long
habit ha.^ become nature : ^μιν φίσ(ΐ τίκνα όργης, by (our
depraved) nature we were exposed to the wrath of God,
Eph. ii 3 (this meaning is evident from the preceding
context, and stands in contrast with the change of
heart and life wrought through Christ by the blessing
of divine grace; φνσ(ΐ προς Tas κο\άσ(Κ ΐπκικώ! ΐχουσιτ
oi φαρισαΐοι, .Joseph, antt. 13, 10, 6. [Others (see Meyer)
would lay more stress here upon the constitution in
which this 'habitual course of evil ' has its origin, wheth-
er that constitution be regarded (with some) as already
developed at birth, or (better) as undeveloped ; cf.
Aristot. pol. 1, 2 p. 1252', 32 sq. otov ίκαστόν ϊστι riji
φνσίωσις
661
φωνή
γν(σ€ως TtXea^fioTyf, ταντην φαμ€ν την φνσιν fivai ίκά•
στον, ωσπ(ρ ανθρώπου, etc. ; see the exx. in iJonitz's index
8. V. Cf. W. §31,6 a.]). d• the sum of innate prop-
erties and powers by which one person diners from oth-
ers, distinctive native peculiarities, natural character-
istics : φύσις θηρίων (the natural strength, ferocity and
intractabihty of beasts [A. V. (every) kind of beasts']), ή
φΰσΐ! η ανθρωπινή (the ability, art, skill, of men, the
qualities which are proper to their nature and necessa-
rily emanate from it), Jas. iii. 7 [cf. W. § 31, 10] ; iei'ay
κοινωνοί φνσ(ως, (the holiness distinctive of the divine
nature is specially referred to), 2 Pet. i. 4 (Άμ€νώφ(ΐ . . .
Btias SoKovvTt μΐΤ(σχτ]<ίναι φίσ(ω! κατά Ts σοφίαν και
νράγνωσιν των ϊσομίνων, Joseph, c. Αρ. 1, 26).*
φυσ•ίωσΐ5, -fωs, ή, (φυσιόω, q. v.), (Vulg. inflatio), a
puffing up of soul, loftiness, pride : plur. [A.V. swellings'^
2 Co. xii. 20. (Eccles. writ.)*
<|>υτ((α, -ας, ή, (φυτήω, q. v.) ; 1. α planting
(Xec, Theophr., Plut., Ael., al.). 2. thing planted,
a plant, (i. q. φύτ(νμα) : Mt. xv. 13, [Athen. 5 p. 207 d. ;
Boeckh, Corp. inscrr. No. 4521 vol. iii. p. 240].*
φντινω; impf. ΐφύτευον; 1 aor. (φύτίυσα; pf. pass,
ptcp. πίφυτ(νμ(νο! ; 1 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. sing, φν-
τίυθττη ; (φυτόν) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for i'Oi, several
times for ^Γ\ψ ; to plant : absol., Lk. xvii. 28 ; 1 Co. iii.
6-8; φυτύαν, Mt. xv. 13; άμπίΚωνα, Mt. xxi. 33; Mk.
xii. 1 ; Lk. xx. 9 ; 1 Co. Lx. 7 ; τι iv with a dat. of the
place, pass., Lk. xiii. 6 ; xvii. 6.*
φύω ; 2 aor. pass, {(φϋην) ptcp. φνίν (for which the
Attic writ, more com. use the 2 aor. act. ϊφυν with the
ptcp. φϋί, φΰν, in a pass, or intrans. sense ; cf. Btlm.
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 321 ; Kriiger § 40 s. v. ; Kiihner § 343
8. V. ; [Veitch s. v.] ; W. § 15 s. v. ; [B. 68 (60)]) ; [cf.
hzt. fui, fore, etc. ; Curtius §417]; fr. Horn, down ; 1.
to beget, bring forth, produce; pass, to be born, to spring
up, to grow : Lk. viii. 6, 8 ; 2. intrans. to shoot forth,
spring up : Heb. xii. 15 [W. 252 (237). Comp. : cV,
ανμ-φύω,^ *
φω\(6ί, -οί, δ, a lurking-hole, burrow^ a lair: of ani-
mals, Mt. viii. 20 ; Lk. ix. 58. (Aristot., Ael., Plut.,
Geop., al.) *
φωνί'ω, -ω; impf. 3 pers. sing, ΐφώνα; fut. φωνησω; 1
aor. (φώνησα ; 1 aor. inf. pass, φωνηθηναι ; (φωνή) ; 1.
as fr. Hom. down, intrans. to sound, emit a sound, to
speak: of a cock, to crow, Mt. xxvi. 34, 74 sq. ; Mk. xiv.
30, 68 [Lbr. WH om. the el. (see the latter's App. ad
loc.)], 72; Lk.xxii. 34, 60 sq.; Jn. xiii. 88; xviii. 27, (of
the cries of other animals. Is. xxxviii. 14 ; Jer. xvii. 11 ;
Zeph. ii. 14 ; rarely so in prof. auth. as [Aristot. (see L.
and S. 8. V. I. 2)], Aesop, fab. 36 [225 ed. Halm]) ; of
men, to cry, cry out, cry aloud, speak with a loud voice :
foil, by the words uttered, Lk. viii. 8 ; with φωνί/ μ(γα\η
added [(cf. TV. § 32, 2 fin.), Mk. i. 26 Τ Tr WIl] ; Acts
xvi. 28 ; (φώνησ( Χίγων, Lk. viii. 54 ; φωνήσα! etnev, Lk.
xvi. 24 ; φωνησα! φωντ/ μ(γ. dnev, Lk. xxiii. 46 ; ϊφών.
tpavyrj [L Τ Tr WH φωι/3] p€y. λ/γωκ, Rev. .xiv. 18;
]'φωνήσαντίς ΐπννθάνοντο (WH t.xt. ΐπύθοντο). Acts x.
18]. 2. as fr. [Hom. Od. 24, 535] Soph, down,
trans. a. to call, call to one's self: τ•*ύ, — either
by one's own voice, Mt. xx. 32; xxvii. 47; Mk. ix. 35;
X. 49 [cf. B. § 141, 5 fin.] ; xv. 35 ; Jn. i. 48 (49) ; ii. 9 •
iv. 16 ; X. 3 L Τ Tr WH ; xi. 28•; xviii. 33 ; Acts ix. 41 ;
X. 7; — or through another; to send for, sumrnon : Mi.
iii. 31 R G ; Lk. xvi. 2 ; Jn. ix. 18, 24 ; xi. 28•- ; turt φωνψ
θήναι αϋτώ Tois «τλ. Lk. xLx. 15 ; φων. τίνα ck, with a gen
of the place, to call out of (i. e. bid one to quit a pla<:e
and come to one), Jn. xii. 1 7. b. to invite : Lk. xiv
12. c. i. q. to address, accost, call by a name : τινά,
foil, by a nom. of the title (see W. § 29, 1 ; [B. §131, 8]),
Jn. xiii. 13. [Comp. : άνα-, ΐπι-, προσ-, συμ-φωνίω.] *
φωνή, -ήί, ή, (φάω to shine, make clear, [cf. Curtius
§ 407 ; L. and S. s. v. φάω]), fr. Hom. down, Hebr.
7ip ; 1. a sound, tone : of inanimate things, as of
musical instruments, Mt. xxiv. 31 [T om. φ., WH give it
only in mrg.; cf. B. § 132, 10]; 1 Co. .xiv. 7 sq. ; Rev.
xiv. 2; xviii. 22, (Is. xviii. 3 ; xxiv. 8 ; Sir. 1. 16 ; 1 Mace.
V. 31 ; οργάνων, Plat, de rep. 3 p. 397 a. ; συριγγών, Eur.
Tro. 127 ; ψαλτηρίου και αΰλοΰ, Plut. mor. p. 713 c.) ; of
wind, Jn. iii. 8 ; Acts ii. 6 ; of thunder. Rev. vi. 1 ; xiv.
2; xLx. 6, cf. iv. 5; viii. 5 ; xi. 19; xvi. 18; noise, of a
millstone. Rev. xviii. 22 ; of a thronging multitude. Rev.
xix. 1, 6; of chariots, Rev. ix. 9; of wings, whir (Ezek.
i. 24), ibid. ; of waters (Ezek. i. 24 ; 4 Esdr. vi. 1 7), Rev.
i. 15; xiv. 2; xix. 6 ; also with the gen. of a thing im-
plying speech, the sound [A.V. voice}: τοί) ασπασμού,
Lk. i. 44 ; ρημάτων, Heb. xii. 19 ; the cry (of men), φωνή
μ€γάΚη, a loud cry, Mk. xv. 37 ; the clamor of men mak-
ing a noisy demand, Lk. xxiii. 23, cf. Acts xix. 34 ;
absol. a cry i. e. wailing, lamentation, Mt. ii. 18 (fr. Jer.
xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15). 2. a voice, i.e. the sound 0/
uttered words : \a\fiv φωνάί. Rev. x. 3 ; those who be^in
to cry out or call to any one are said την φωνην atpeiv,
Lk. xvii. 13 ; προ'ί τίνα. Acts iv. 24; φωνήν ϊπαίρΐΐν, Lk.
xi. 27 ; Acts ii. 14 ; xiv. 11 ; xxii. 22; [φ. κράζιιν (or eV
κpάζflv), Acts xxiv. 21 (cf. B. § 143, 11)] ; φωνή /irytiXg
added to verbs : to λ(γ(ΐν. Rev. v. 12 : viii. 13; (fv φων§
μ(γ. Rev. xiv. 7 [Lchm. om. iv; xiv. 9]) ; to (ΙπΛν, Lk.
viii. 28 ; Acts xiv. 1 ; to φάναι. Acts xxvi. 24 ; to οΙνΛν τό»
θ(όν, Lk. xix. 37; with verbs of crying out, shout-
ing: άναβοάν, Mt. xxvii. 46 [RGLtxt. T]; βοϋν, [5It.
xxvii. 46 L mrg. Tr AVII] ; Mk. xv.34; Actsviii. 7; φωνΕίν,
[Mk. i. 26 Τ Tr WII] ; Lk. xxiii. 46 ; Acts xvi. 28 ; [Rev.
.xiv. 18LTTrWH];dl'αφωl'eIv,Lk.i.42[RGLTΓmrg.];
κηρΰσσ€ΐν (iv φων. /xey•). Rev. v. 2 [Rec. om. tV]; κρανγά•
ζ(ΐν, Jn. .xi. 43 ; άνακράζιιν, Lk. iv. 33 ; κράζίΐν, Mt. x.xvii.
50; Mk.i. 26[RGL]; v. 7; Acts vii. 57, 60; Rev. vi. 10;
vii. 2, 10; x. 3; [xviii. 2 Rec.]; .xix. 17; κράζ. (νφων.μ^γ.
Rev. -xiv. 15; iv ισχυρά φωιή], Rev. xviii. 2 [G L Τ Tr
WH] ; μ(τα φωνή! μ(γ. 8οξάζ(ΐν τον β. Lk. xvii. 15 ; of
declarations from heaien, heard though no speaker is
seen : Ιδον φωνή \€γουσα, ISIt. iii. 1 7 ; xvii. 5 ; epycToi
φωνή, ^Ik. ix. 7 [R G L Tr txt.] ; Jn. .xii. 28 ; (ξ^ρχ^ται.
Rev. xvi. 17 ; xix. 5 ; yiverai φωνή, Mk. i. 11 [Tom. AVIl
br. c'yfV. ; ix. 7 Τ Tr mrg. WH] ; Lk. iii. 22 ; ix. 35 sq. ;
Jn. xii. 30 ; [Acts vii. 31 (where Rec. adds npos αυτόν)} ;
ττρόί Ttva, Acts X. 13, 15; [φωνής ΐνίχθύσης αϋτώ, 2 Pet
φωιι
662
φω<!
L 17]; iytvovTO φωνω μρ/άλαι, Rev. xi. 15; [απίκρίθη
ψωΐΊ), Acts xi. 9]; <«θϋ€ΐΐ'φ<ι)ΐ'ήι/ [cf. Β. §§ 132, 17; 144,
16 α.], Acts ix. 4 ; xxii. 9, [14] ; xxvi. 14 ; -> Pet. i. 18 ;
Rev. i. 10; iv. 1 [B. § 123, « b.] ; vi. 6 [here L Τ TrWH
insert ώϊ], 7 [here G om. Tr br. φων.] ; ix. 13 [B. u.s.] ;
.\. 4, 8 ; xi. 12 [II G L• WII mrg.] ; xii. 10 ; xiv. 2 ; xviii.
4; xix. 6; άκού^ιν φωνηί [Β. § 132, 17; W. § 30, 7 d.].
Acts ix. 7 ; xi. 7 ; xxii. 7 ; Rev. [xi. 12 Τ Tr WII txt.] ;
.xiv. 13 ; xvi. 1 ; xxi. 3 ; βλίπιιν την φων. i. e. tlie one
who uttered the voice. Rev. i. 12. φωνή ν/Ίύι a gen. of
the subject : βοώντπ!, Mt. iii. 3 ; Mk. i. 3 ; Lk. iii. 4 ; Jn.
i. 23, all fr. Is. xl. 3 ; Ιάγγίλυυ όταν μ^λλτ) σαΚπίζαν, Rev.
χ. 7] ; η φ. rivos, the natural (familiar) sound of one's
voice, Acts xii. 14 ; Rev. iii. 20, (Cant. v. 2) ; the man-
ner of speaking, as a shepherd's (cry or call to hi.s
sheep), Jn. x. 3-5 ; to such ' voices ' Jesus likens his
precepts approved ('heard') by all the good, Jn. x. IG,
27, cf. xviii. 37; άνθρωπου, human utterance, 2 Pet. ii.
16 ; φ. Tivor, the voice of a clamorous person, Mt. xii. 19
(Is. xlii. 2) ; of one exulting, jubilant, Jn. iii. 29 ; Rev.
xviii. 23 ; άγγίλων πολλών, singing the praises of Christ,
Rev. v. 11 sq. ; the sound of the words of Christ as he
shall recall the dead to life (the Resurrection-cry), Jn.
V. 2."), 28 ; άρχαγγίΚου, the awakening shout of the arch-
angel, the leader of the angelic host, 1 Th. iv. 16 ; τοΰ
θ(θΰ, of God, — teaching, admonishing, whether in the
O. T. Scriptures or in the gospel, Jn. v. 37 ; Ileb. iii. 7,
15; iv. 7; shaking the earth, Ileb. xii. 26; the speech,
discotirse, θ(οϋ ουκ άνβρ- Acts -xii. 22 ; [ras φωνάί τών
προφητών, the predictions (' read every sabbath '), Acts
xiii. 27] ; ίΐλλίί|αι -ήν φ. (see άλλάσσω), Gal. iv. 20. 3.
speech, i. e. « taiu/wige, tongue : 1 Co. xiv. 10 s([. (.Joseph.
c. Ap. 1, 1 ; [1, 9, 2 ; 1, 14, 1, etc.] ; Ceb. tab. 33 ; Ael.
V. h. 12, 48; Diog. Laert. 8, 3; for other exx. fr. Grk.
writ, see Passow s. v. p. 2377''; [L. and S. s. v. II. 3] ;
Gen. xi. 1 ; Deut. xxviii. 49 ; τη (βραι5ί φωνή, 4 Mace.
xii. 7; τή πατρΊω φων^, 2 Mace. vii. 8, 21, 27). [Syn.
cf. Schmidt eh. 1 § 27 ; Trench § Ixxxix. ; and see λαλ/ω,
ad init.] *
φώ5, φωτός, τό, (contr. fr. φάος, fr. φάω to shine), fr.
Ilom. (who [as well as Pind.] uses the form φάοί) down,
Ilebr. nx, liijht (opp. to το σκο'τοΓ, ή σκοτία) ; 1.
prop. a. univ. ; 6 θ^ος ό ξΐηων ζκ σκότους φως \άμ^αι,
2 Co. iv. 6 ((ien. ί. 3); λ^υκά i>s τό φωί, Mt. χνϋ. 2;
ν(φί\η φωτός [Grsb. t.xt.] i. e. consisting of light, i. ({■
φωτανη'ια RLTTrWH, Mt. xvii. 5; ro φως τοΰ κόσμου,
of the sun, Jn. xi. 9 ; τό φως ουκ ?στιν iv αντω, the light
(i. e. illumining power) is not in him, consequently he
does not see or distinguish the things about him, Jn. xi.
10; thelightemittedbyalamp, Lk. viii. 16; [xi.SSLTr
txt. WH]. a heavenly light, such as surrounds angels
when they appear on earth : hence άγγελος φωτός, 2 Co.
xi. 14, and illumines the place where they appear.
Acts xii. 7 ; a light of this kind shone around Paul when
he was converted to Christ, Acts xxii. 6, [9], Π [W. 371
(848)]; with the addition of οΐρανόθιν, Acts xxvi. 13;
of από [or ίκ] τοΰ ουρανού. Acts ix. 3. b. by meton.
anything emitting light : a heavenly luminary (or star),
jJur. Jas. i. 1 7 [see πατήρ, 3 a.] ; yTrc, because it is light
and gives light: Lk. .xxii. 56 ; βιρμαίνισθαι προς τό φως,
Mk. xiv. 54, (1 Mace. xii. 29; Xen. Hell. 6, 2, 29; I'yr.
7, 5, 27) ; a lamp or torch : plur. φώτα, Acts xvi. 29 {φως
i\eiv, Xen. Hell. 5, 1, 8; in plur. often in Plut.). c.
light i. e. brightness (Lat. splendor), [see a. above] :
ήΧίιιυ, liev. xxii. 5 ; of a lamp, Jn. v. 35 (where it sym-
bolizes his rank, inllueuce, ΛνοΠίι, mighty deeds) ; with
the addition of λύχνου, Rev. xviii. 23 (.ler. xxv. 10) ; of
the divine Shechinah (see δόξα. III. 1), Rev. xxi. 24 (Ps.
lxx.\viii. (Ix.xxix.) 16; Is. 1.x. 1, 19 sq.). 2. φώς is
often used in poetic discourse, in metaphor, and in
parable ; a. The extremely delicate, subtile, pure,
brilliant quality of light has led to the use of φως as an
appellation of God, i. e. as by nature incorporeal, spot-
less, holy, [cf. Westcott, E|ip. of St. John, ]). 15 s(iq.] :
1 Jn. i. 5 (.Sa]). vii. 26 where cf. Grimm) ; he is said iiVai
ev τω φωτί, in a state of suj)reme sanctity, 1 Jn. i. 7 ;
φως ο.'κώκ άπρόσιτον. a fig. describing his nature as alike
of consummate majesty and inaccessible to human com-
prehension, 1 Tim. vi. 16 (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 2) ; used of
that heavenl)' stale, consummate and free from every
imperfection, to which the true disciples of Christ will
be exalted, i. q. the kingdom of light. Col. i. 12. b.
By a fig. freq. in the N. T. [cf. in classic Grk. τής άΚψ
edasTo φως, Kur. I. T. 1046 etc.; see L. and S. s. v.
II. 2], φως is used to denote truth and its knowledge, to-
gether with the spiritual purity congruous with it, (opp. to
TO σκότος b., η σκοτία, q. v.) : η ζωτ) ην το φως τών άνθρ(&•
πων, had the nature of light in men, i. e. became the
source of human wisdom, Jn. i. 4 ; esp. the saving truth
emhodied in Christ and hy his love and effort imparted
to mankind, Mt. iv. 16; Jn. i. 5; iii. 1!)-21 ; Acts xxvi.
18, 23 ; 2 Co. vi. 14 ; Eph. v. 13" [cf. below] ; to φώί τό
αληθινόν, 1 Jn. ii. 8; τό θαυμαστον τοΰ θ(οΰ φώς. 1 Pet.
ii. 9 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 2 cf. 5ii, 2); τό φώς υμών,
the divine truth with which ye are imbued, Mt. v. 16;
fXfiv TO φ. της ζωής, the light by which the true life is
gained, .Jn. viii. I 2 ; τα όπλα [Lclim. mrg. ίργα] τοΰ φωτός,
Ro. xiii. 12; κα/)πΟΓ toC φωτόί, Eph. v. 9 G LTTr WH;
tV τω φωτΙ π(ριπατ(Ίν, to li\ e agreeably to saving wis-
dom, 1 .In. i. 7; ev τω φωτΧ (ΐναι, to be iuibued with
saving wisdom, peveiv, to continue devoted to it, to per-
severe in keeping it, 1 Jn. ii. 9 sq. ; ot υΙόί τοΰ φωτός
(see υΙός, 2 p. 635"), Lk. xvi. 8 ; Jn. xii. 36 ; 1 Tb. v. 5 ;
TCKva ToC φ. (see τίκνον, c. β- ρ• 61.S•), Eph. v. 8. by
meton. φώς is used of one in whom wisdom and spiritual
purity shine forth, and who imjiarts the same to others:
φως τών ίν σκότΐΐ, Ro. ii. 19 ; [φως (θνών. Acts xiii. 47] ;
in a pre-eminont sense is Jesus the Messiah called
φώς and τό φώς: Lk. ii. 32; Jn. i. 7 sq. ; xii. 35 stj. 46:
TO φώς τοΰ κόσμου. Jn. viii. 12 ; ix. 5, (τό φώς τοΰ κόσμον
το 8ηθίν (V Ιμ'ιν f ?f φωτισμον παντός ανθρώπου, Ι est. ΧΙΙ.
Patr. test. Levi § 14) ; τό φώς τό ά\ηθινόν, Jn. 1. 9; by
the same name the disciples of Jesus are distinguished,
Mt. V. 14; Christians are called φώϊ ίν κυρι'ω, having
obtained savins wisdom in communion with Christ, Eph.
V. 8. πάν TO φανιρούμίνον φώς ί'στιν, everything made
φωστήρ
663
χαφω
manifest by the aid of Christian truth has taken on the
nature of light, so that its true character and quality
are no longer hidden, Eph. v. IS•• [al. take φως here in
an outward or physical sense, and regard the state-
ment as a general truth confirmatory of the assertion
made respecting spiritual ' φωτοΕ ' just before (cf.
above)]. c. By a fig. borrowed from daylight φώί
is used of that tcJitch is exposed to Ike view of all: Iv τω
φωτί (opp. to fv t'i σκοτία), open!;/, publicly, (ev φάίΐ,
Find. Nem. 4, 63), Mt. x. 27 ; Lk. xii. 3. d. reason,
'mind; the power of understanding esp. moral and spir-
itual truth : TO φως το iv σοι, Mt. vi. 23 ; Lk. xi. 35.
[Syn. see φέγγος, fin.] *
φωσ-τήρ, -ήρος, ό, (φω;, φωσκω) ; 1. that which
ffives light, an illuminator, (Vulg. luminar^ : of the stars
(^luminaries"), Phil. ii. 15 (Sap. xiii. 2 ; Sir. xliii. 7 ; Gen.
L 14, 16 ; Heliod. 2, 24 ; [Anthol. Pal. 15, 17 ; of sun and
moon. Test. xii. Patr. test. Levi 14] ; eccles. writ.). 2.
light, brightness: Rev. xxi. 11 (Anthol. 11, 359) [al. refer
this to 1 ; cf. Trench § xlvi.].*
ψωα-ψόροΐ, -OK, (φώί and φίρω), light-bringing, giving
light, (Arstph., Eur., Plat., Plut., al.) ; as subst. ό φ. (Lat.
Lucifer), the planet Λ'^βηυΒ, the morning-star, day-star,
(Plat. Tim. Locr. p. 96 e. ; Plut., al.) : 2 Pet. i. 19, on
the meaning of this pass, see \νχνοί.'
φωτίΐνόϊ [WH φωτιυόί, see I, j], -ή, •όν, (φώί), light,
i. e. composed of light, of a bright character : ν(φίλη. Jit.
xvii. 5 [not Grsb.] ; oi οφθαΚμοΙ κυρίου μνρίοπ\ασίως ηλίου
φωτίΐκότίροί. Sir. .\xiii. 19. full of light, well lighted,
opp. to σκοτανός, Mt. vi. 22 ; Lk. xi. 34, 36, (τα σκοτεινά
και τα φωτ€ΐνα σώματα, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 1).*
φωτίζω : fut. φωτίσω (Rev. .xxii. 5 L WII ; 1 Co. iv. 5),
Attic φωτιω (Rev. xxii. 5 G Τ Tr) ; 1 aor. ^φώτισα ; pf.
pass. ptcp. τϊζφωτισμίνος ; 1 aor. pass, ίφωτίσθην ; 1.
intrans. to give light, to shine, (Aristot., Theophr., Plut.,
al. ; Sept. for iix, Xum. viii. 2, etc.) : eVt Tiva, Rev. xxii.
5 [Rom. WHbr. cVi]. 2. trans. a. prop, ίο en-
lighten, light up, illumine : rufc, Lk. xi. 36 ; την πάλιν,
Rev. -xxi. 23 (άκτΊσι το» κόσμον, of the sun, Diod. 3, 48 ,
Sept. for ΤΚΠ) ; ή γη ΐφωτίσβη e<c TTjs 8όξη! αΐτοΰ, [A.V
was lightened^ shone with his glory. Rev. xviii. 1. b.
to bring to light, render evident : τα κρυπτά τοΰ σκότουι,
1 Co. iv. 5 ; [Eph. iii. 9 ace. to the reading of Τ L br.
WH txt. (but see c.)], (την αΐρ^σίν τίνος, the preference,
opinion, of one, Polyb. 23, 3, 10; την αΚήθ^ιαυ, Epict.
diss. 1,4, 31 ; πεφωτισμένων των πραγμάτων νπο τήϊ αΚψ
Beias, Lcian. cal. non tern. cred. 32) ; tc cause something
to exist and thus to come to light and become clear to all:
ζωην κ. άφθαρσίαν δια τοΟ fiayytXlov, opp. to Karapyrjaat
τον θάνατον, 2 Tim. i. 10. c. by a use only bibl. and
eccles. to enlighten spiritually, imbue with saving knowl-
edge: Ttra, Jn. i. 9; with a saving knowledge of the
gospel: hence φωτισβίντ(ς of those who have been
made Christians, Ileb. vi. 4 ; x. 32 ; foU. by an indir.
quest. Eph. iii. 9 [see b. above], (Sir. xlv. 1 7 ; for ΤΚΓΙ,
Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 130; for ΓΤΐίπ, to instruct, inform,
teach, Juds. xiii. 8 Alex. ; 2 K. xii. 2 ; φωτιοΰσιν avroiit
TO κρίμα ToO θ(θΰ τηί -y^f, 2 Κ. xvii. 27 [cf. 28; al.]) ; to
give understanding to : πεφωτισμένοι Tois οφθαλμούς Tijs
Kaphlai [Rec. διανοίας], as resjjects the eyes of your soul,
Eph. i. IS [B. § 145, G]; [(cf. Sir. xxxi. (.x.xxiv.) 20,
etc.)].*
φωτκτμδΐ, -oC, 6, (φωτίζω) ; a. the act of enlight-
ening, illuminatiuH : πρΰς φωτισμοί/ τής γνώσεως, i. q. πρ6{
το φώτιζαν την γνώσιν, that by teaching we may bring to
light etc. 2 Co. iv. 6 (on which pass, see πρόσωπον, 1 a.
sub fin. p. 551'' top). b. brightness, bright light, (ίξ
ηλίου, Sext. Emp. p. 522, 9 ; άπο σελήνης, Plut. [de fac
in orb. lun. § 16, 13] p. 929 d. [ib. § 18, 4 p. 931 a.] ; Sept.
for lis, Ps. xxvi. (xxvii.) 1 ; xliii. (xUv.) 4 ; ixxvii.
(Ixxviii.) 14: Job iii. 9; for "ΊΧΟ, Ps. Lxxxix. (xc.) 8):
εΙς TO μη αυγάσαι [καταυγα'σα» L mrg. Tr mrg.] τοκ φ. τοί
ίίαγγελίου, that the brightness of the gospel might not
shine forth [R. V. dawn (upon them)], i. e. (dropping
the fig.) that the enlightening truth of the gospel might
not be manifest or be apprehended, 2 Ca ir. 4.*
χαΐρκ; impf. 'χαιρον, fut. χαμησομαι (Lk. L 14; Jn.
xvi 20, 22; Phil. i. 18, for the earlier form χαφήσω, cf.
[W. 90 (86) ; B. 68 (60)] ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii 322 sq. ;
Matthiae § 255 s. v. ; Kuhner § 343 s. v. ; Kruger § 40
8. V. ; [Veitch s. v.]), once χαρώ (Rev. xi. 10 Rec, a form
occurring nowhere else) ; 2 aor. [pass, as act.] εχάρην
[of. σχτ^αίρω, init.] ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for mb',
7" J, uVlI ; to rejoice, be glad; a. in the prop, and
ttrict sense: [Mk. xiv. 11] ; Lk. xv. 5, [32] ; xix. 6, 37;
xxiL5;zxuL8; Jn. iv. 36; viii. 56 ; xx. 20; Acts τ. 41;
viii. 39 ; 3d. 23; xSL 48; 2 Ca [vi. 10] ; viL 7; χίϋ. 9, 11
[some refer this to b. in the sense of fareweli] ; Phil. u.
17, 28 ; Col. ii. 5; 1 Th. v. 16 ; 1 Pet. iv. 13 ; 3 Jn. 3;
opp. to κλαίειν, Ro. xii. 15 ; 1 Co. vii. 30 ; opp. to κλαίειψ
κ. θρηνεΐν. Jn. xvi. 20 ; opp. to λίητην εχειν, ib. 22 : joined
with άγαλλιάσθαι, Mt. v. 12; Rev. xix. 7 ; with σκιρταν,
Lk. vi. 23 ; χαίρειν εν κυρίω (see εν, I. 6 b. p. 21 1 '' mid. [cf.
B. 185 (161)]), Phil. iii. 1 ; iv. 4, 10; χαίρειν χαρά»
μεγαλην [cf. χαρά, a.], to rejoice exceedingly, Mt. ii. 10;
also xapf χαίρει» (W. § 54, 3 ; B. § 133, 22), Jn. iii. 29 •
•χ^άΧαζα
664
χαρά
ή χαμό 7 χαίρομιν, 1 Th. iii. 9 ; χαίρην (πι with a (lat. of
the object, Mt. xviii. 13 ; Lk. i. 14 ; xiii. 17 ; Acts xv. 31 ;
Ro. xvi. 19 L TTrVVll ; 1 Co. xiii. 6; xvi. 17; 2 Co. vii.
13 ; Rev. xi. 10, (Xen. mom. 2, C, 35 ; Cyr. 8, 4, 12 ; Plat.
legg. 5 p. 739 d. ; cf. Kiiliiior § 425 Anm. G ; [W. § 33 a.;
B. §133, 23]; in the (jik. writ, generally with a .■simple
dat. of the obj. as I'rov. xvii. 19) ; διά η, Jn. iii. 29 ;
Sui Tiva, Jn. xi. 15; 1 Th. iii. 9; ev τούτω, Phil. i. 18;
[fV T. ιταθήμασί μου, Col. i. 24] ; with an ace. of the obj.,
TO αυτό, Phil. ii. IS (ταίτά, Dem. p. 323, (i ; cf. Matthiae
§ 414 p. 923 ; Kriiger § 46, 5, 9) ; τό «φ' ίμϊι/ (see ό, II.
8 p. 436"), Ro. xvi. 19 R G ; από nvos, i• q. χαράν ΐχ^ιν,
to derive joy from one, 2 Co. ii. 3 ; χαίρ foil, by ΰτι,
Jn. xiv. 28 ; 2 Co. vii. 9, 16 ; 2 Jn. 4 ; tV τούτω ΰτι, Mc.
-x. 20 ; with a dat. of the cause : tji ϊ\πί&ί χαίροντα, let
the hope of future blessedness give you joy, Ro. xii. 12
[yet cf. W. §31, 1 k., 7 d.]. b. in a broader sense,
to be well, to thrive ; in salutations, the irapv. χαφ(, hail .'
Lat. sahe, (so fr. Horn, down) : Mt. xxvi. 49 ; xxvii. 29 ;
Mk. XV. 18 ; Lk. i. 28 ; Jn. xix. 3 ; plur. χαίρ(Τ(, [A. V.
all kaW], Mt. xxviii. 9 ; at the beginning of letters the
inf. χαΐραν (sc. Xf'yet or (tfXeuci) : Acts .xv. 23 ; xxiii.
26 ; Jas. i. 1, (often in the bks. of Mace. ; cf. Grimm on
1 Mace. x. 18 ; Olio in the Jalirbb. f. deutsch. Theol. for
1867, p. 678 sqq. ; cf. Ililr/enfeli/, Galaterbrief, p. 99
si|(|. ; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 27 ; Ael. v. h. 1, 25) ; fully, χαίρων
λί'γω, Ιο f/ive one (jreetiiuj, salute, 2 Jn. 10, [11]. [Comp. :
συν-χαίρω-^Ι *
χάλαξα, -ijf, ή, {χάΚάω, (]. V. [so Etym. Magn. 805, 1 ;
but Curtius (§ LSI) says "certainly has nothing to do
with it "]), fr. Horn, down, Sept. for T13, hail: Rev. viii.
7; xi. 19; xvi. 21.*
χαλάω, -ώ ; fut. χάΚάσω ; 1 aor. (χάΚασα ; 1 aor. pass.
(χάΚάσθψ; fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down ; a. to
looien, slacken, relax. b. to let down from a higher
place to a lower : τί or τινά, Mk. ii. 4 ; Lk. v. 4 sq. ; Acts
xxvii. 17, 30, [in these two pass, in a nautical sense, to
tower'] ; τίνα iv σπυρ'ώι, Acts ix. 25 ; pass. 2 Co. xi. 33.•
XoXSaCos, -ου, ό, a Chaldcean ; yrj XuXSaiwv the land of
the. Chaldicaiis, Chaldsa : Acts vii. 4, where a reference
to Gen. xi. 2S, 31 and xv. 7 seems to show that southern
Armenia is referred to. The different opinions of oth-
er interpreters are reviewed by Dillmann on Genesis
(3te Aufl.) p. 223 sq. ; [cf. Selirader in Riehm s. v. ;
Sai/ce in Encycl. Brit. s. v. Babylonia].*
χαλίττόί, -ή, -όν, (fr. χα'λίπτω to oppress, annoy, [(?)]),
fr. Horn, down, hard (Lat. difficilis) ; a. haril to do,
to take, to approach. b. hard to bear, troublesome,
danfjerous : καφοΊ χα\(ποί, [R.V. (jrievousi, 2 Tim. iii. 1 ;
harsh, fierce, s<irai/e : of men, Mt. viii. 28 (Is. xviii. 2
and often in prof. auth. fr. Ilom. down).*
χ(ΐλιναγωγ€'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. inf. χαλιναγωγησαι ; (χαλινοί
and άγω) ; Ιο lead hij a bridle, to i/ulile, [ΐππον, Wah,
Rhett. Graec. i. p. 425, 19) ; trop. to bridle, hold in check,
restrain : την γλώσσαν, Jas. i. 26 ; το σώμα, Jas. iii. 2 ; ray
τώι» ή8ονά>ν υρ(ξ(ΐς, Lcian. tyrann. 4. [(Poll. 1 § 215.)] *
χαλινός, -οϋ, ό, (χαλάω), a bridle : Jas. iii. 3 ; Rev. xiv.
20. (From Aeschyl. and Pind. down.) •
XOXkcos, -ί'α, -fov, contr. -oOr, -η, -ovv, (χάλκο!), fr. Horn.
down, brazen, [A. V. o/brass']: Rev. ix. 20.*
χαλκ6«5, -ί'ωί, ό, (χαλκοί), fr. Hom. down, a worker in
cojij/er or iron, a sntilh: 2 Tim. iv. 14 [A. V. copper-
smith].*
χαλκη8ών, -ovos, ό, clialcedony, a precious stone de-
scribe<l by I'lin. h. n. 37, 5 (18), 72 [see B. V>. (esp. Am.
ed.) s. V.]: Rev. xxi. 19.•
χαλκίον, -ου, τό, (χαλκύί), a (copper or) brazen vessel:
Mk. vii. 1. ([Arstph.], Xen. oec. 8, 19; [al.].) *
χαλκο-λφανον (so Suidas [but seeed. Gaisf. s. v.]), -ου,
τό, more correctly χαλκολίβανυς, -ου, ή, (ace. to the read-
ing as it ought to be restored [(but see the edd.)]. in
Rev. i. 15 is €v καμίνωπίπυρωμίντ); cf. Dusterdieck's erit.
note [see B. SO ((i9) note]), a word of <loubtful meaning,
found only in Rev. i. 15, and ii. 18, chalcolibunus, Vulg.
uurichalcum or orichalcum (so cod. Amiat., [al. aerie] ;
Luther Messing, [R. V. burnished brass]) ; ace. to the
testimony of an ancient Greek [Ansonius] in Salmasius
(Exercitt. ad Solin. p. 810 a.: ό λίβανος ϊχ(ΐ τρία (ϊδη
Sivdpmv, κα\ ό pfv άρμην ονομάζεται χαλκολίβανος, ηλιο€ΐδης
κα\ πυρρός ήγουν ^uvdos), Ά certain kind of (yellow)
frankincense ; but both the sense of the passages in Rev.
and a comparison of Dan. x. 6 and Ezek. i. 7, which
seem to have been in the writer's thought, compel us to
understand some metal, like gold if not more precious (cf.
Ilebr. '70ΐ^Π, a metal composed of gold and silver, Sept.
ίβ(κτρον, \^ulg. electrum, Ezek. i. 4, 27 ; viii. 2) ; this in-
terpretation is confirmed by the gloss of Suidas : elSus
ηλΐκτρου τιμιωτ€ρον χρυσού, ΐστι δί τό ήλεκτρον αλλότυπο»
χμυσίον μΐμιγμίνον ύίλω κ- λιθύα. The ΛVOrd is com-
pounded, no doubt, of χαλκοί and λίβανος, not of χαλκός
and pS ' white.' Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. .Metalle ; Wetzel
in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1SC9, p. 92 sqq. ; cf.
Ewald, Johann. Schrif ten, ii. p. 117 s(j. ; \_Lee in the
'Speaker's Com.' ad loc.].*
χαλκίϊ, -οϋ, ό, fr. Ilom. down, Sept. for Π27Π3, brass:
1 Co. xiii. 1 ; Rev. xviii. 12; (like the Lat. aes) what is
made of brass, monei/, coins of brass (also of siher and
of gold), Mt. X. 9 ; Mk. vi. 8 ; xii. 41. [B. D. s. v. Brass ;
Diet, of Antiq. s. v. aes.]*
χομιαί, adv. ; a. on the ground, on the earth. b.
to the (/round; in both senses fr. Ilom. down; in the
latter sense Jn. ix. 6 [where, however, Eng. idiom re-
tains on] ; xviii. 6.*
Χαναάν, ή, Hebr. μ'}3 [lit. ' lowland '], Canaan, the
land of Canaan, indecl. prop, name : in the narrower
sense, of that part of Palestine lying west of the Jordan,
Acts vii. 11; in a wider sense, of all Palestine, Acts
xiii. 19.•
Xavavaios, -a, -ov, Ilebr. ■J>'J3, Canaanile \ the name
of the ancient inhabitants of Palestine before its con-
quest by the Israelites ; in Christ's time i. q. Phoenician
[R.V. Canaanitish]: Ut. xv. 22.*
χαρά, -hi, ή, (χαίρω), fr. Aeschyl. and Soph, down,
Sept. for nnptV and ρ'ϋΒ', joj/, gladness ; a : Lk. i.
14; XV. 7, 10; Jn. xv. 11; xvi. 22, 24; xvii. 13; Acts viii.
8 ; 2 Co. vii. 13 ; viii. 2 ; Gal. v. 22 ; Col. i. 11 ; Phil. iL
χαραημα
665
Xapit
2; l.Tn. i. 4; 2Jn. 12; opp. to κατήφίία, .Jas. iv. 9 ; opp.
to Χΰιτη, .In. xvi. 20 ; 2 Co. ii. 3 ; Heb. xii. 1 1 ; νμών, i. e.
the joy received from you, 2 Co. i. 24 (opp. to the 'sor-
row ' \vhich Paul on returning to C'orintli would both
experience and give, ii. 1-3) ; χαρίχ τηί niarems, spring-
ing from faith, Phil. i. 25 ; χαίρων χαράν μ(γ. Mt. ii. 10
[W. §32, 2; B. 131, 5]; άγαλλιάσθαι χαρά. 1 Pet. i. 8;
χαραν [Rec." χάρΐ"] πολλην ΐχαν ini witli a dat. of the
thing, Philem. 7; π^ηροϋν τίνα χαράς. Ho. xv. 13; πλί)-
ρονσθαί χαράίγ Act.« xiii. .^2 ; 2 Tim. i. 4 ; Troteiw rtct χαραν
μ(γαΚην, Acts .\v. 3 ; ano τη! χαράς, for joy, ilt. xiii. 44;
Lk. xxiv. 41 ; Acts xii. 14; e ν χαρά {ίρχισθαι), Ro. xv.
32 ; μ(τα χαράς, with joy, Mt. xiii. 20 ; xxviii. 8 ; Mk. iv.
16; Lk. viii. 13; x. 17; xxiv. 52; Actsxx. 24 Rec.; Phil.
i. 4; ii. 29; Heb. x. 34 ; xiii. 17, (Polyb. 11, 33, 7; 22,
17, 12 ; Xen. Hiero 1, 25) ; with πνεύματος αγίου added,
joy wrouglit by the Holy Spirit, 1 Th. i. 6 ; χαρά iv
TTvtvpaTi άγίω, joyousness caused by [cf. iv, I. 6 (p. 211''
but.) and B. § 133, 23] the Holy Spirit, Ro. xiv. 1 7 ; χαρά
ini Tivi, 2 Co. vii. 4 ; χαΐρα,ν χαρά hta τι, .In. iii. 29 [cf.
χαίρω, a.] ; also διά Tivr ;a relative pron. intervening),
1 Th. iii. 9 ; η χαρά on, Jn. xvi. 21 ; χαρά Ινα (see Ινα, Π.
2 d.), 3 Jn. 4. b. by tneton. the cause or occasion
of joy : Lk. ii. 10 ; Jas. i. 2 ; [so 2 Co. i. 15 WH txt. Tr
mrg. (al. χάρις. <\. v. 3 b.)] ; of persons who are one's
' joy ' : 1 Th. ii. 1 9 s([. ; Phil. iv. 1 ; of a joyful condition
or state: άντΊ . . . χαράς, to attain to blessedness at the
right hand of (iod in heaven, Heb. xii. 2; the same
i<lea is expressed in the parable by the words, ή χαρά
τον κυρίου, the blessedness which the Lord enjoys, Mt.
XXV. 21, 23.•
χάραγμα, τος, ro, (χαράσσω to engrave) ; a. a
slump, an imprinted mark : of the mark stamped on the
forehead or the right hand as the badge of the followers
of Antichrist, Rev. xiii. 16 sq. ; xiv. 9, 1 1 ; xv. 2 Rec;
xvi. 2 ; xix. 20 ; xx. 4, {πυρός, the mark branded upon
horses, Anacr. 26 [55], 2). b. thing carved, sculp-
ture, graven work• : of idolatrous images, Acts xvii. 29.
(In various other senses in Grk. writ. fr. Soph, down.) *
χαρακτήρ, -ήρος, 6, [χαράσσω to engrave, cut into), fr.
Aeschyl. and Ildt. down ; 1. prop, the instrument
used in engraving or carving, (cf. ζωστηρ, Χαμ-πτήρ. λου-
τήρ, φυσητηρ; cf. our 'stamp' or 'die'). 2. the
mark (figure or letters) stamped upon that instrument or
wrought out on it ; hence univ. a mark or figure burned
in (Lev. xiii. 28) or stamped on, an impression; the
exact expression (the image) of any person or thing,
marked likeness, precise reproduction in every respect (of.
facsimile') : χ. της vπoστάσfως τοΟ θ(οΰ, of Christ, ace. to
his nature as ό Θ^Ίος λό-γος, Heb. i. 3 ; σφραγ'ιδι θ(θΰ, ης
ό χαρακτήρ ίστιν 6 άΐ&ιος Χόγος, Philo de |)lant. Xoe § 5 ;
χ. θίΐας 8υνάμ(ως, of the human mind, Philo, quod det.
potion ins. § 23 ; God τον ιίνθρωπον ΖττΚασ(ν της Ιαυτον
(Ικόνο! χαρακτήρα, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 33, 4 ; οί πιστοί iv
ayoTTrj χαρακτήρα θ(οΰ πατρός διά Ίησον Χριστού (ΐχουσιν),
Ignat. ad Magnes. 5, 2. the peculiarity, by ivhich things
are recognized and distinguished from each other, [cf.
Eng. characteristic'] : 2 Mace. iv. 10.*
χά,ραξ, -ακος, δ, (χαράσσω) ; 1• α pale or stake, a
palisade, [(Arstph., L)em., al.)]. 2. a palisade or
rampart (i. e. pales between which earth, stones, trees
and timbers are heaped and packed together) : Lk. xix.
43 (Is. xxxvii. 33 ; Ezek. iv. 2 ; xxvi. 8 ; Polyb. ; Joseph,
vit. 43; Arr. exp. Alex. 2, 19, 9; Plut., al.).*
χαρίζομαι; depon. mid.; fut. χαρίσομαι (Ro. viii. 32;
Lcian. d. mar. 9, 1, for which Grk. writ. com. use the
Attic χαριοίμαι [cf. WH. App. p. 163 sq. ; B. 37 (32);
W. §15s. V.]); pf. «;(άρισ/χαι ; 1 aor. f ^αρισάμτ;»; 1 aor.
pass. fp^apiV^T/vi Acts iii. 14; lCo.ii.l2; Phil. i. 29, [cf.
B. 52 J[46)]) ; fut. pass, χαρισθήσομαι with a pass, signif.
(Philem. 22) ; (χάρις); often in Grk. ivrit. fr. Horn, down ;
to do something pleasant or agreeable (to one), to do a
favor to, gratify ; a. univ. to show one's self gra-
cious, kind, benevolent: nvi, Gal. iii. 18 [al. (supply r.
κΧηρονομίαν and) refer this to c. below]. b. to grant
forgiveness, to pardon : 2 Co. ii. 7 ; with a dat. of the
pers., Ejih. iv. 32 ; Col. iii. 13 ; with an ace. of the thing,
2 Co. ii. 10 [cf. W. § 39, 1 b. and 3 N. 3] ; τινι τήν άδικιαί-,
2 Co. xii. 13 ; τα παραπτώ/ιατα. Col. ii. 13. c. to give
graciously, give freely, bestow : τινί τ», Lk. vii. 21 ; Ro.
viii. 32 ; Phil. ii. 9 ; pass., 1 Co. ii. 12 ; Phil. i. 29 ; where
a debt is referred to, to forgive [cf. b. above], Lk. vii.
42 sq. ; τινί τίνα, graciously to restore one to another who
desires his safety (e. g. a captive [K.Y. grant]), pass..
Acts iii. 14 ; Philem. 22 ; or to preserve for one a person in
peril, Acts xxvii. 24 ; τινά τινι, to give up to another one
whom he may punish or put to death. Acts xxv. 11 [(cf.
R. V. mrg.)] ; Λvith the addition of (!ς άπώλιιαν, ib. 16.*
χάριν, ace. of the subst.xapis used absol.; i)rop. in favor
of for the pleasure of: χάριν "Εκτορος, Horn. II. 15, 744,
al. ; 1 Mace. ix. 10; Judith viii. 19; Uke the Lat. abl.
gratia, it takes on completely the nature of a preposi-
tion, and is joined to the gen., /or, on account of, for the
sake of: Gal. iii. 19 (on which see παράβασις) ; 1 Tim.
v. 14; Tit. i. 11 ; Jude 16; τούτου χάριν, on this account,
for this cause, Eph. iii. 1 (Xen. mem. 1, 2, 54) ; τούτου χ.
7va, Eph. iii. 14 [cf. W. .")66 (526)]; Tit. i. 5 ; oJ χάριν,
for which cause, Lk. vii. 47 ; χάριν τίνος ; fir' what cause f
wherefore ? 1 Jn. iii. 12. Except in 1 Jn. iii. 12, χάριν is
everywhere in the N. T. placed after the gen., as it gen-
erally is in prof. auth. (cf. Passow s. v. I. 3 a. p. 2416'';
Herm. ad Vig. p. 701) ; in the O. T. Apocr. it is placed
sometimes before, sometimes after; cf. Wahl, Clavis
Apocr. s. v. 6 b. ; Grimm on 1 Mace. iii. 29.*
χάρις, -ιτοΓ, acc. χάριν, and twice in L Τ Tr WH the
rarer form χάριτα (Acts xxiv. 27; Jude 4) which is also
poetic (cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. §44 Anm. 1 ; [IF//. App.
157''; B. 13 (12)]), acc. plur. χάριτος (Acts xxiv. 27
RG)' V> (χο'ρω)' ί""- Horn, down, Hebr. ]Π, grace;
i. e. 1. prop, that which affords joy, pleasure, de-
light, siceetness, charm, loveliness : grace of siicech (Eccl.
X. 12; Sir. xxi. 16 ; xx.tvii. 21 ; Hom. Od. 8, 1 75 ; των
\όγων, Dem. 51, 9; 1419, 16; χάριτες μωρών, verbal
pleasantries whJcb the foolish affect in order to ingra-
tiate tnemseiveS;. Sir. xx. 13), Xo'yoi χάριτος (gen. of
quality), Lk. iv. 22 ; χάριν iidavai τοις άκηνονσιν, Enli. iv
Xapis
666
χαρκ
29 ; €w χάριη, with grace [the eubst. ίλας being added ;
Bee Bp. Lghtft.], Col. iv. 6. 2. i/oo'l-irill, tuving-
kindnexs, Juror : in a broad sense, χάριι παρά Tiw, I.k.
ii. 52 ; ίχίΐν χάριν npos τίνα. to liave favor with one, Acts
ii. 47; χάρΐ! ϊναντίον τίκόί, Acts vii. 10; [χάριν κατά
τινοί αΐτίΐσθαι όπωι (<ι• ν. II. 2), Acts χχν. 3 (but al.
refer this to 3 b. below)] ; χάρκ (of God) eariv in'i τίνα,
attends and assists one, Lk. ii. .10; Acts iv. ;!.! ; χάριν
(χάριτα) χάριταί κατατΊΘ(σθαΊ ttvi (see κατατίθημι). Acts
x.\iv. 27 ; x.w. i) ; furor (i. e. act oifavuriiii/ [cf. W. § βΰ
fin.]), 2 Co. viii. 4. χάρΐϊ is u.sed of the kindness of a
master towards his inferiors or servants, and soesp.
of God towards men : tipiaicdv χάριν παρά τώ θ Lk• i.
30 ; ίνώπιον τοΟ deoi, Acts vii. 4G ; τούτο χάρκ sc. ΐστίν,
this wins for us (God's) favor [R.V. is acce//l<ib/e], 1 Pet.
ii. 19; with παρά θ(ώ added, ib. 20 ; παρα8ί8οσθαί τϊ) χ.
τυν θ(ον, to be committed or commended to the protect-
ing and helping favor of (iod. Acts xiv. 26; xv. 40. The
apostles and N. T. writers at the beginning and end of
their Epp. crave for their readers the favor (' grace ') of
God or of Christ, to which all blessings, es]>. spiritual,
are due : Ro. i. 7 ; xvi. 20, 24 [R G] ; 1 Co. i. 3 ; xvi. 23 ;
2 Co. i. 2 ; xiii. 13 (14) ; Gal. i. 3 ; vi. 18; Eph. i. 2; vi.
24 ; Phil. i. 2 ; iv. 23 ; Col. i. 2 ; iv. 18 ; 1 Th. i. 1 ; v. 28 ;
2Th.i.2; iii.18; lTim.i.2; vi. 21(22); 2 Tim. i. 2; iv. 22;
Tit. i. 4 ; iii. 1.5 ; Philem. 3, 25 ; Ileb. xiii. 25 ; 1 Pet. i. 2 ;
2 Pet. i. 2 ; iii. 1 S [cf. .'! a.] ; 2 Jn. 3 ; Rev. i. 4 ; xxii. 21 ; cf.
Olio, Ueber d. apostol. Segensgriiss χάρι: νμίν etc., in the
Jahrbb. f.deutsche Theol. for 1867, p. GZSsiiq. More-
over, the word χάρκ contains the idea of kindness which
heslows upon one tvhat he hax not deserved : Ro. xi. 6 ;
hence κατά χάριν and κατά ι'φίίλημα are contrasted in
Ro. iv. 4, 10; χάριη and ΐξ ίρ-γων in Ro. xi. 6; κατ
(κλογην χάριτο!, ib. 5 ; but the N. T. writers use χάρκ
pre-eminently of that kindness by which God bestows
favors even upon the ill-deserving, and grants to
sinners the pardon of their offences, and bids them ac-
cept of eternal salvation through Christ: Ro. iii. 24 ;
V. 17, 20 sq.; [vi. 1]; 1 Co. xv. 10 ; Gal. i. 15 ; ii. 21 ; Eph.
1.6, [7]; ii. 5, 7sq.; Phil. i. 7; Col. i. 6 ; 2Th. ii. 16;
1 Tim. i. 14 ; 2 Tim. i. 9 ; Heb. ii. 9 [here Treg. mrg.
χωρίς}: χ. 29; xii. 15; xiii. 9; 1 Pet. i. 10; Jude 4 ; tvpi-
σκίΐν χάριν, Heb. iv. 16 ; ή χάρΐί τοΰ θ(ον ή σωτήριος, Tit.
ii. 1 1 ; ό λόγοί Trjs χάριτος, tlie message of his grace. Acts
xiv. 3; XX. 32; το dayytXiov της χάριτος τοΰ θΐοΐι. Acts
XX. 24 ; it is styled ^Ihe grace of Christ,' in that through
pity for sinful men Christ left his state of blessedness
with (!od in heaven, and voluntarily underwent the
hanlsliips and miseries of human life, and by his suffer-
ings and death procured salvation for mankind : [Acts
XV. 11] ; 2 Co. viii. 9 ; Ro. v. 15 ; Gal. i. 6 ; [Tit. iii. 7] ;
Jn. Ϊ. 14, 17. χάρις is used of the merciful kindness
by which God, exerting his holy influence upon souls, turns
them to Christ, keeps, strengthens, increases them in Chris-
tian faith, knowledge, affection, and kindles them to the
exercise of the Christian virtues: 2 Co. iv. 15; vi. 1;
2 Th. i. 12; oi π(πιοτ(νκότ(ς δια της χάριτος, Acts xviii.
27 ; inr6 χάριν (ivai, to be subject to the power of grace,
opp. to ύη-Α νόμο» tTvai, Ro. vi. 14 sq. ; (Krrlmtiv της
χάρ. Gal. v. 1 ; ττροσμ(ν(ΐν Tjj χ. Acts xiii. 43 [(i L Τ Tr
Wll]; {πιμίνίΐν, ibid. Rec. ; eV τ^ ;(άριη (R(i WII txt.
om. the art.), |)rom|)tcd by grace, Col. iii. 16; the grace
of God promoting the progress and blessings of the
Christian religion. Acts xi. 23 ; [prompting its posses-
sors to benefactions, 2 Co. ix. 14] ; sustaining and aiding
the efforts of the men who labor for the cause of
Christ, 1 Co. XV. 10; 2 Co. i. 12; the favor of Christ,
assisting and strengthening his followers and ministers
to bear their troubles, 2 Co. xii. 9. 3. what is
due to grace ; a. tlie spiritual condition of one
governed by the power of divine grace, what the theolo-
gians call the ' status gratiae ' : ίστηκίναι iv ttj χ. Ro. v.
2 ; €ts την χ. 1 Pet. ν. 1 2 ; αϋξάνιιν iv χάριτι, 2 Pet. iii.
18 ; (ν8υναμοΰσθαι iv ττ/ χάριτι tji iv Χριστώ, 2 Tim. ii.
1. b. It token or proof of grace, 2 Co. i. 15 [A. V.
benefit (WH txt. Tr mrg. χαράν, q. v. under b.)] ; a gift
of grace; benefaction, bounty: used of alms, 1 Co. xvi. 3;
2 Co. viii. fi sq. 19, (Sir. iii. 29 (31) ; xxi.x. l."") ; xxx. 6;
4 Mace. V. 8; Xen. Ages. 4, 3sq.; Hier. 8, 4) ; πάσα χάρις,
all earthly blessings, wealth, etc., which are due to divine
goodness, 2 Co. ix. 8 ; ό 6fbt πάσης χάριτος, the author
and giver of benefits of every kind, 1 I'et. v. 10. the aid
or succor of divine grace : διδόναι χάριν ταπ(ΐνοΊς, 1 Pet.
v. 5 ; .las. iv. 6 ; the salvation offered to Christians is
called ;(apts, a gif of divine grace, 1 Pet. i. 10, 13 ; of the
various blessings of Christ experienced by souls: \αβΛν
χάριν άντΊ χάριτος (see άντΊ, 2 e. p. 49' hot.), Jn. i. HI;
χάρις ζωής, the gift of grace seen in the reception of life
[cf. ζωή, 2 b.], 1 Pet. iii. 7 ; capacity and ahllily due to the
grace of God (Germ. GnadenausrUstun;/), Eph. iv. 7 ;
πλήρης χάριτος. Acts vi. 8 6 LT Tr WH ; ποικίλη χάρις,
the aggregate of the extremely diverse powers and gifts
granted to Christians, 1 Pet. iv. 10; used of the power
to undertake and administer the apostolic office : \αβ(ϊν
χάριν και άποστολήν, i. e. χάριν της αποστολής, Ro. i. 5 ; ij
χ. ή δοθΰσά μοι (Paul), lio. xii. 3, 6 ; xv. 15 ; 1 Co. iii. 10 ;
Gal. ii. 9 ; Eph. iii. 2, 7 ; 8οθ. ύμΐν, of the gifts of knowl-
edge and utterance conferred upon Christians, 1 Co. i.
4 ; iSuBq μοι ή χ. αντη, foil, by an inf., Eph. iii. 8 ; of the
desire to give alms roused by the gi-ace of God, 2 Co.
viii. 1. 4. thanks (for benefits, services, favors);
prop. : χάριτι, with thanksgiving, 1 Co. x. 30; χάριν ίχίΐ»
Tivi (Lat. graliam habere alicui), to be thankful to one,
Lk. xvii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 12 ; 2 Tim. i. 3; Heb. xii. 28, (2
j\Iacc. iii. 33, and countless times in prof, auth.; cf. Pas-
sow s. V. p. 2416" sub fin. ; [L. and S. s. v. II. 2] ; Ast, Lex.
Plat. ii. p. 539 sq. ; Dleek, Brief a. d. Ilebr. ii. 2, p. 975) ;
foil, by iπi with a dat. of the thing, Philem. 7 Τ edd. 2
and 7, Rec." "" (cf. ρ 233" mid.) ; χάρις τω θ(ω sc. ίστω,
Ro. vii. 25 L Τ Tr WH txt. ; toll, by ort, Ro. vi. 1 7 (χ. rolt
θ(οΐς, ότι etc. Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 72 ; 8, 7, 3 ; an. 3, 3, 14 ; oec.
8, Ifi) ; with a ptcp. added to the dat. (by apposition),
1 Co. XV. 57 ; 2 Co. ii. 1 4 ; viii. 1 6 ; foil, by iπί with a dat.
of the thing [cf. «Vi, B. 2 a. δ.], 2 Co. ix. 15. i. q.
recompense, reward, Lk. vi. 32-34 (for which Mt. λ•. 4Γ.
uses μισθός^*
χάρισμα
667
χ«/)
χάρκτμα, -ros, τό, (χαρίζομαι), α gifl of grace ; α favor
which one receives without any merit of his own ; in the
N. T. [where (exc. 1 Pet. iv. 10) used only by Paul] the
gifl rf il i oine grace (so also in I'hilo de alleg. legg. iii. § 24
fin. 8ωμ(ά και (vepyfaia καΐ χάρισμα Bfov τα πάντα οσα iv
κύσμω και airos ό κόσμυς ΐστίν) ; used of the natural gift
of continence, due to the grace of God as creator, 1 Co.
vii. 7 ; deliverance from great peril to life, το €is ij/ior χ.
bestowed upon us, 2 Co. i. 11 ; the gift of faith, knoivl-
edge, holiness, virtue, Ro. 1. 1 1 ; the economy of divine
grace, by which the pardon of sin and eternal salvation
is appointed to sinners in consideration of the merits of
Christ laid hold of by faith, Ro. v. 15 sq. ; vi. 23 ; plur.
of the several blessings of the Christian salvation, Ro.
xi. 29 ; in the technical Pauline sense χαρίσματα [A. V.
gifs^ denote extraordinary powers, distinguishing certain
Christians and enabling tliem to serve the church of Christ,
the reception of which is due to the power of divine grace
operating in their souls by the Holy Spirit [cf. Cremer in
Herzog ed. 2 vol. v. 10 sqq. s. v. Geistesgaben] : Ro. xii.
6 ; 1 Co. i. 7 ; xii. 4, 31 ; 1 Pet. iv. 10 ; χαρίσματα ιαμάτων,
1 Co. xii. 9, 28, 30; spec, the sum of those powers requisite
for the discharge of the office of an evangelist : 1 Tim. iv.
14; 2 Tim. i. 6. ([Of temporal blessings, 'Teaching'
1, 5 (cf. 8ώρημα in Ilerm. mand. 2, 4)] ; eccl. writ.) *
χαριτόω, -ώ : 1 aor. ίχαρίτωσα ; pf. pass. ptcp. κ^χαρι-
τωμίνο! ; (χάρις) ; 1. to make graceful i. e. charm-
ing, lovely, agreeable : pass. Sir. xviii. 1 7 ; rals διαλάξοί!
στροφα'ϊς χαριτοΰμ^νοί όφρΰν, Liban. vol. iv. p. 1071,
14. 2. to pursue with grace, compass with favor; to
honor tvith blessings : τινά, Eph. i. 6 ; pass. Lk. i. 28,
[some would take it in these two exx. subjectively
(K. V. mrg. endued with grace)'] ; Ps. xviii. 26 Symra. ;
[Herm. sim. 9, 24, 3 ; Test. xii. Patr. test. Joseph. 1] ;
eccles. and Byzant. writ.*
Χαρράν, (Hebr. ρπ [i. e. (prob.) 'parched', 'arid'].
Gen. xi. 31 ; xii. 5 ; xxvii. 43), Haran [so R. V. ; A. V.
(after the Grk.) Charran], called Κάρραι in Grk. writ,
and Carrae in Lat., a city of Mesopotamia, of great anti-
quity and made famous by the defeat of Crassus : Acts
vii. 2, 4. Cf. IF/n. RWB. s. V. ; Fi-iiViin^er in Herzog v.
539 ; [Schullz in Herzog ed. 2, s. v.] ; Steiner in Schenkel
ii. 502; Schrader in Riehra p. 571.*
χάρτηϊ, -ου, 6, (χαράσσω), paper : 2 Jn. 12 ; Jer. xliii.
(xx.\vi.) 23. ([Plat. Com. fragm. 10 p. 257 (Didot) ; cf.
inscr. (B.C. 407) in Kirchhoff, Inscrr. Attic, i. No. 324] ;
Ceb. tab. 4; Diosc. 1, 115.) [Cf. Birt, Antikes Buch-
wesen, index i. s. v. ; Gardthnusen, Griech. Palaeo-
graphie, p. 23; Edersheim, Jesus the jMessiah, ii. p. 270
χ^άσ'μα, -τος, τό, (χαινω to yawn), a gapinq opening, a
chasm, gulf: i. q. a great interval, I^k. xvi. 26. (Hes.
theog. 740 ; Eur., Plat, Pint., Lcian., Ael, al.) *
χίΐλοϊ, -our, τό, gen. phir. in the uncontr. form χ^ίΧίων
(lleb. xiii. 15 ; see opos), (χίω i. q. ΧΑΩ, χαίνω), fr. Hom.
down, Sept. for Π3Π, a lip; a. in the Ii. T. of the
speaking mouth [cf. W. 32] : Mt. xv. 8; Mk. vii. 6; Ro.
iii. 13 ; 1 Co. xiv. 21 ; Heb. xiii. 15 (on which see καοπός,
2 c.); 1 Pet. iii. 10. b. metaph. : χίΐλοι τηί βα\άσ•
ση!, the sea-shore, Heb. xi. 1 2 (Gen. xxii. 1 7 ; Ex. vii.
15 ; xiv. 30, etc. ; of the shore of a lake, Joseph, b. j.
3, 10, 7 ; of the banks of rivers, Hdt. 2, [70]. 94; [Ar-
istot. de mirab. aud. 46; 150; cf. hist. an. 6, 16 p. 570•,
22] ; Polyb. 3, 14, 6 ; [cf. AV. pp. 18, 30]).*
χ€ΐμάζω : pres. pass. ptcp. χιιμαζόμ(νθ! ; (χ(Ίμα stormy
weather, winter [cf. χιιμών}) ; to ajfiict with a tempest, to
toss about upon the waves : pass. Acts xxvii. 18 [R. V.
labored with the storm}. (Aeschyl., Thuc, Plat., Diod.,
Plut., Lcian., al.) [Comp. : παρα-χ(ΐμάζω.'] *
χείμαρρος, (for the more com. χαμάρροο! [sc. ποταμό:'],
Att. contr. χ(ΐμάρρου! [q. V. in L. and S. fin.], cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 234), -ου, ό, (χιίμα winter, and ρ(ω, poos), fr.
Hom. down, Sept. very often for Sn:, lit. flowing in
winter, a torrent : Jn. xviii. 1 [where A. V. brook].*
χ»μών, -ώΐΌί, ό, (χί'ϊμα, and this fr. χ(ω on account of
the ' pouring ' rains ; [al. connect it with χι-ών, snow,
frost (cf. Lat. hiems, etc.) ; see Curtius § 194 ; L. and S.
s. V. χιών, fin.]), winter; a. stormy or rainy weather,
a tempest (so fr. Hom. down) : Mt. xvi. 3 [Tdf. br. WH
reject the pass.]; Acts xxvii. 20. b. winter, the
winter season, (so fr. Thuc. and Arstph. down) ; Jn. x. 22 ;
2 Tim. iv. 21 ; χαμωνο!, in winter (-time), in the winter
(Plat, de rep. 3 p.415 e. ; Xen. mem. 3,8, 9; al. [cf. W.
§ 30, 11 ; B. § 132, 26]). Mt. xxiv. 20 ; Mk. xiii. 18.»
χ€£ρ, gen. χ(ΐρός, ace. χιΊραν (1 Pet. v. 6 Tdf.; see άρσην,
fin.), ή, [fr. r. meaning 'to lay hold of; cf. Lat. heres,
etc.; Curtius §189; Vanicek p. 249 sq.], fr. Horn, down,
Hebr. T, the hand: Mt. iii. 12 ; Mk. iii. 1 ; Lk. vi. 6 ;
1 Tim. ii. 8 ; Heb. xii. 12, and often ; the gen. with the
verbs άπτομαι, επιλαμβάνομαι, κρατίω, πιάζω, etc., which
see in their places: the dat. ivith ('ργάζομαι, ΐσθίω, etc.;
ό ασπασμοί ττ] ΐμΐ] χ(ΐρΊ. 1 Co. xvi. 21 ; Col. iv. 18; 2 Th.
iii. 1 7 ; the ace. with the verbs αίρω, δ/ω, ίκπιτάνννμι,
ΐκτξίνω, ΐμβαπτω, ξπηίθημι, καθαρίζω, κατασΐίω. νίπτω,
etc. ή (πίθισκ των χ(ΐρων [see iπίθfσιs and reff.],
1 Tim. iv. 1 4 ; 2 Tim. i. 6 ; Heb. vi. 2 ; iv χ(ΐρί τίνος, in
imitation of the Hebr. "D T3 [cf. B. §133, 20 cf. 319sq.
(274) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 19], by the help or agency,
of any one, by means of any one. Acts vii. 35 Rec. ; Gal.
iii. 19; σνν χ(ΐρΊ άγγίλου, with the aid or service of the
angel [cf. B. u. s.]. Acts vii. 35 L Τ Tr WH ; those things
in the performance of which the hands take the princi-
pal part (as e. g. in working miracles), are said to be
done δια χflpόs or χαίρων or των [cf. B. § 124, 8 d.] χιφών
Tivos, Mk. vi. 2 ; Acts v. 12; xiv. 3 ; xix. 11; univ., Acts
ii. 23 ; vii. 25 ; xi. 30 ; xv. 23 ; eV! χ(ΐρων, Mt. iv. 6 ; Lk.
iv. 11 ; iπ\ την χ.. Rev. xiv. 9; xx. 1 [here Treg. mrg.
iv Tjj χ.], 4 ; ck. Acts xxviii. 4 ; Rev. viii. 4 ; or την χ.
(on his hand), Lk. xv. 22; ή χ(ίρ, as an acting subject
(see γλώσσα, 1), Lk. xxii. 21 ; plur.. Acts xvii. 25 ; xx.
34 ; 1 Jn. i. 1 ; τά ipya των χ-. Acts vii. 41 ; Rev. ix. 20 ;
ixSiKfiv TO αΐμά τινοί ΐκ τινοί (see iκδικeω, b. and ix I. 7),
Rev. xix. 2. By meton. ή χ^ίρ is put for power, activity,
(for exx. fr. prof. auth. fr. Hom. down see Passow s. v.
p. 2431" ; [L. and S. s. v. p. 1 720']) : παραδιδόναι τίνα «t
χιΐρά! τίνων, into the hostile hands (Deut. i. 27 ; Job xvi.
χβίραγω/ίω
668
χιΧίαρχοΊ
11), Mt. xvii. 2> ; .\χ\ i. 45 ; Mk. ix. 31 ; Lk. ix. 44 ; χχΐτ.
7 ; Acts xxi. 1 1 ; xxviii. 1 7 ; StSorai τ» eV ry χαρί Tiros,
to commit to one's protecting iuid upliokling power, .In.
iii. ii5 ; also ftf r. xelpus τίνος, .In. xiii. 3; rtva €< των
χ(φ• or (Κ χ(φΟ! twos (fr. tlie hostile i)ower of any one)
anayetv, Acts .\xiv. 7 Kec. ; ίξ^^ίσθαι. Acts xii. 11 ((!en.
xxxii. 11 ; Ex. xviii. 8 sq.) ; ίξίρχατβαι, .Τη. χ. 39; ρυ-
σθηναι, Lk. i. 74; σωτηρία, ib. 71; tK^eiyeiv τα: χΰράί
Ttvoi, 2 Co. xi. 33. By a fig. use of language χιίρ
or xf'ipfs are attributed to (iod, symbolizing his m'ujlit,
arlirili/, poicer; conspicuous a. in creating the
universe : ίργα των χάρων αϋτοϋ, Ileb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii.)
26). p. in upliolding and preserving: I^k.
xxiii. 46 ; Jn. x. 2^ (cf. 28) ; χί\ρ κυρίου eVrt μ(τά τιιόγ,
(iod is present, protecting and aiding one, Lk. i. t;6 ;
Acts xi. 21. γ. in punisliing : χΰρ κυρίου ini ai.
Acts xiii. 11 (1 S. xii. 15) ; (μττίητίΐν tis χ- θ(οΰ ζώντος,
lleb. χ. 31. 8. in determining and contrcjlling
the destinies of men: Act.s iv. 28 ; ταπανοΰσθαι ύπο
την κραταιαν χ(ψίΐ του f^foi, Ι Pet. ν. G.
χίΐραγωγί'ω, -ώ : pres. pass. ptcp. χ(ΐραγωγοΰμ(νος ;
(χαραγωγός, q. v.; cf. χαλιναγωγίω) ; Ιο lead I)// l/ic Jiaiid:
τινά. Acts ix. 8; xxii. U. (Anacr., Died., Plut., Lcian.,
Artem., al.) *
χ6ΐρ-α•γωγ08, -όν, (χιίρ and άγω), leading one by the
hand: Acts xiii. 11. (Artem. oneir. 1,48; Plut., al.) *
χ€ΐρόγροφον, -ου. τό, (χ('ρ and γράφω), a hatidirriting;
what one has wrillcii with liis oirti liand (Polyb. 30, 8, 4;
Dion. Hal. 5, 8 ; al.) ; spec, a note of hand, or writing
in which one acknowledges that money has either been
deposited with him or lent to him by another, to be re-
turned at an appointed time (Tob. v. 3 ; ix. 5 ; Plut.
mor. p. 829 a. de vitand. aere al. 4, 3 ; Artem. oneir. 3,
40) ; metaph. applied in Col. ii. 14 [(where R.V. bond)']
to the Mosaic law, which shows men to be chargeable
with offences for which they must p.ay the jienalty.*
χίΐρο-τΓοίητοϊ. -ov, (xfip and πούω), made hif the hand
i. e. Ilie skill af man (see άχαροποίητος) '■ of tcmjiles, Mk.
xiv. .58 ; Acts vii. 48 ; xvii. 24 ; lleb. ix. 11, 24; of cir-
cumci.sion, Eph. ii. 1 1 . (In Sept. of idols ; of other things,
occasionally in Hdt., Thuc, Xen., Polyb., Diod.) *
Xeipo-Tove'u, -ω : 1 aor. ptcp. χιφοτονήσας ; 1 aor. pass,
ptcp. χ(ιρoτovη3fίs^, (fr. χιφοτόνοΫ extending the hand,
and this fr. χιίρ and τ^ίνω) ; fr. [Arstph.], Xen., Plat.,
Isocr. down ; a. prop, lo vote by stretching oul the
hand (cf. Xen. an. 3, 2, 33 ότω boKti ταντα, άνατ(ΐνάτω
την χ(Ίρα• aveTftvav άπαντα). b. In create or nppnini
by vole : τινά, one to have charge of some office or duty,
pass. 2 Co. viii. 19, and in the spurious subscriptions in
2 Tim. iv. 23 ; Tit. iii. 15. c. with the loss of the
notion of extending the hand, to elect, appoint, create :
Tivd, Acts xiv. 23 (see exx. fr. the Grk. writ, in Passow
s. v. p. 2440" ; χ(φοτον(Ίσθαι ύπο θ(οΰ βασΐΚία, Philo de
praem. et poen. § '■) ; [βασίΚίως ΰ-παρχος ίχιιροτονύτο, de
Joseph. §41]; .ioseph. antt. 6, 4, 2; [7, 11, 1; of the
choice of Jon. as high-priest, 13, 2, 2 ; cf. Hatch in Diet.
of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Ordination, p. 1501''; Harnack on
• Teaching ' etc. 15, 1]). [Comp. : προ-χαροτονίι».'\'
Xdpuiv, -ov, (compar. of κακοί ; derived fr. the obsol.
χίρης, wliich has been preserved in the dat. χϊρηϊ, ace.
χίρηα, plur. χ(ρη(ς, χίρηα; cf. Btl7n. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 2G8
[cf. Eheling, Lex. Horn. s. v. χίρηςί), [fr. Horn, down],
worse: Mt. ix. IG; xxvii. G4 ; Mk. ii. 21; γίνιτακ τα
έσχατα χ^ίρονα των πρώτων, Mt. xii. 45 ; Lk. xi. 26 ; 2 Pet.
ii. 20 ; (Is τΰ χύρον ίρχ(σθαι, [/ο grow woise'], of one
whose illness increases, .Mk. v. 2G ; ίνα μη χιΊρύν σοι τι
γίνηται, lest some worse thing befall thee, .'n. v. 14;
πόσω χαίρων τιμωρία, [A.V. ht/w much sorer jjunishmenl'],
lleb. X. 29; ΐπΐ το χΰρον προκόπτιιν ([Α. V. wax worse
and irorse] ; see προκύπτω, 2), 2 Tim. iii. 13 ; of the moral
character, άπιστου χύρων, 1 Tim. v. 8.•
Χ€ρουβ£μ (RC) and XtpovPeiv (LT Tr WH ; in Mss.
&\Άθ\(ρονβίν,Χ(ρουβίίμ; [ci. Tdf. Proleg. p. 84 ; WII.
App. p. 155' ; and s. v. et, i\), τά (neut. gend. also in most
places in the Sept.; rarely, as Ex. xxv. 18, 19, οί Xfp.;
Xf/)oi5/3fis in Ex. xxv. 18 [but this is a mistake ; the
form in -f if seems not to occur in the O. T.] ; in Philo
τά Χ(ρουβίμ, in Joseph, oi Χιρουβιϊί, antt. 3, C, 5 ; «J
XcρoυβeΊs, ibid. 8, 3, 3 ; the use of the neut. gender
seemed most suitable, because they were ζωα ; Χ(ρυυβ(ίί
ζωά (στί π€Τ€ΐνά, μορφην δ' oidevl των υπ* ανθρώπων (ωρα-
μίνων παραπλήσια, Joseph, antt. 3, 6, 5), llehr. D'31"13
(hardly of Semitic origin, but cognate to the Grk. γρΰψ,
γρυπό! [for the various opinions cf. Gesenius's llebr.
Lex. ed. Middau and Volck s. v. 3?"i3]), cherubim, two
golden figures of living creatures ivith two wings ; they
were fastened to the lid of the ark of the covenant in
the Holy of holies (both of the sacred tabernacle and of
Solomon's temple) in such a manner that their faces
were turned towards each other and down towards the
lid, which they overshadowed with their expanded
wings. Between these figures God was regarded as
having fixed his dwelling-place (see δόξα, III. 1) : Heb.
ix. 5. In Ezek. i. and x. another and far more elabor-
ate form is ascribed to them ; but the author of the
Ep. to the Heb. has Ex. xxv. 18-20 in mind. Cf.
Win. RWB. s. v. Cherubim; Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 710
sq. ; Dillmann in Schenkel i. 509 sqq. ; Riehm, De Na-
tnra et Notione Symbolica Cheruborum (Basil. 18G4);'
also his ' Die Cherubim in d. Stiftshiitte u. im Temijcl'
in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1871 p. 399 sqq. ; and in
his HWB. p. 227 sqq.; [cf. Lcnormant, Beginnings of
History, (N.Y. 1882), ch. Hi.].*
χήρα, -as, ή, (fern, of the adj. χήρος, 'bereft'; akin to
χίρσos, sterile, barren, and the Lat. careo, [but cf. Cur-
tius § 192]), fr. Hom. II. 6, 408 down, Sept. for HJoSk,
a widow: Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec. ; ^Ik. xii. 40, 42 sq. ;
Lk.u.37; iv. 25 ; vii.l2; xviii. 3, 5 ; xx.47; .x.\i.2sq.;
Acts vi. 1 ; ix. 39, 41 ; 1 Co. vii. 8 ; 1 Tim. v. 3-5, 9,11,
16; Jas. i. 27 ; with γυνή added (2 S. xiv. 5, and often
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. B. 2, 289 down), Lk. iv. 26 ;
a city stripped of inhabitants and riches is represented
under the figure of a widow. Rev. xviii. 7,•
χβί'ϊ (Rec. ; also Grsb. in Acts and Heb.), i q. €χθ(!
(q. v.), yesterday; Sept. for Snn. [Hom. (h. Merc), al.]
χιλ(αρχο$, -ου, δ, (χίλιοι and 3ρχα>: [on the form of
χ^ίΧιας
669
Χ,οραζι»
the word ct. re£f. ε. v. ίκατοντάρχη!, and L. and S. s. v.
χιλίάμχη!^), the conmiandcr uf a thousand soldiers, a
chitiarch; the commander of a Human cohort (a militanj
tribune) : Jn. xviii. 12; Acts xxi. 31-33, 07; xxii. 24,
26-29; xxilL 10, 15, 17-19, 22; xxiv. 7 Rec, 22; xxv.
23, (Sept. for D'd'^X If aid Π"^'ί?< i^'""')• «"^ military
commander [Κ.\ . hifjh or chief captain, captain']: Jlk.
vi. 21 ; Rev. vi. l.j ; xix. 18. [(Aeschyl., Xen., al.)] *
χιλιάϊ, -ados, ή, (χίλιοι), a thousand, the number one
thousand: plur., Lk. xiv. 31; Acts iv. 4 ; 1 Co. x. 8;
Rev. V. 11; vii. 4-8; xi. 13; xiv. 1-3; xxi. 16 ; Sept.
for ^Hs, Q'S)^. [Hdt. on.] *
χίλιοι, -ai, -a, a thousand : 2 I'et. iii. 8 ; Rev. xi. 3, etc.
X£os, -ου, η, Chios, an island in the ^Egean Sea, be-
tween Samos and Lesbos, not far from the shore of
Lydia: Acts xx. 15.*
χιτών, -ώνοϊ, 6, fr. Horn, down, Sept. for rijr\3 and
PJ.'lJ, a tunic, an undergarment, usually worn next the
skin : Mt. x. 10 ; Jlk. vi. 9 ; Lk. iii. 11; ix. 3 ; Jude 23 .
it is distinguished from to ίμάτιον (q. v. 2) or τά Ιμάτια in
Mt. V. 40 ; Lk. vi. 29 ; Jn. xix. 23 ; Acts i.\. 39 ; univ. a
garment, vestment (Aeschyl. suppl. 903), plur. (Plut. Tib.
Gracch. 19), Jlk. xiv. 63. [Cf. Rich, Diet, of Antiq. s. v.
Tunica ; and reif. s. v. ί/ιάτίοι», u. s.] *
χιών, -uvos, ή, fr. Horn, down, Sept. for jSe?, snow :
Mt. xxviii. 3 ; Mk. Lx. 3 (where it is omitted by G Τ Tr
WH) ; Rev. i. 14.*
χλαμν'ϊ, -ϋδοί, ή, (acc. to the testimony of Pollux 10,
38, 1(;4, first used by Sappho), a chlanii/s, an outer gar-
ment usually worn over the χιτών [q. v.] ; spec, the Lat.
paludamenlum [q. v. in Rich, Diet, of Antiq. s. v. sub
fin.], a kind of short cloak worn by soldiers, military
officers, magistrates, kings, emperors, etc. (2 ilaec. xii.
35 ; Joseph, antt. 5, 1, 10 ; Hdian., Ael., al. ; often in
Plut.) : ilt. xxvii. 28, 31, [A.V. robe ; see Meyer ad loc;
Trench, .Syn. § 1. ; Rich (as above) s. v. Chlamys ; and
other reff. s. v. Ίμάτιον].*
χλίυάζω ; impf. (χΚΐϋαζυν ; {χ>^(ΰη, jesting, mockery) ;
to deride, mock, jeer: Acts ii. 13 Rec. ; ,\vii. 32. {2ALacc.
vii. 27 ; Sap. xi. 15; Arstph., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut.,
Lcian., al.) [Comp. : δια-;(λ£υύ^ω.] *
χλιαροί, -ά, -όν. (χλίω, to beiunie warm, licpiefy, melt),
tepid, lukewarm: nietaph. of the condition of a soul
wretchedly fluctuating between a torpor and a fervor of
love, Rev. iii. 16. (Ildt., Pind., Diod., Plut., Athen.,
Geop.) *
Χλο'η [(i. e. 'tender verdure'; an appellation of De-
meter, ' the Verdant ')], -ijr, ή, Chloe, a Christian woman
of Corinth : 1 Co. i. 11. [Cf. B. D. s. v.] *
χλωροϊ, -«i, -OK, (eontr. fr. ^oepoi, fr. ;^Xoij, tender
green grass or corn) ; 1. green : χόρτος, Mk. vi. 39
(Gen. i. 30) ; Rev. vili. 7 ; irav χΚωράν, ix. 4. 2.
yellowish, pale : imros. Rev. vi. 8. (In both senses fr.
Hom. down.) *
χξ^, Si'r hundred and sixl>/-six (χ'==60()• ξ'=(;0;
S" = 6), a mystical number the meaning of which is clear
when it is written in Ilebr. letters, nop [113, i- e. Νίρων
Κοίσαρ, 'Nero Caesar', (sometimes the Jews write IDp
for the more common "iD'p, the Syriac always jjflj,
cf. Ewald, Die Johann. Schriften, ii. p. 263 note ;
[SchUrer, N. T. Zeitgesch. ed. 1, § 25 ΙΠ. p. 449 note];
j = 50, T = 200, 1=6, : = 50, p=100, 0=60, 1 =
200): Rev. xiii. 18 RGTTr. [For a digest of opin-
ions respecting this much debated number see Lee in
the 'Speaker's Com.' ad loc.]*
χοϊκόϊ, -ή -όν, (χοΰί, <{. v.), made of earth, earthy : 1 Co.
XV. 47—49. (yu/xyoi τούτου? τοΟ χοΐκον βάρους. Anon, in
Walz, Rhett. i. p. 613, 4 ; [Ilippol. haer. 10, 9 p. 314,
95].)•
χοΐνιξ, -iKos, ή. fr. Ilom. Od. 19, 28 down, a choenix,
a dry measure, containing four cotylae or two sextarii
[i. e. less than our ' quart ' ; cf. L. and S. s. v.] (or as
much as would support a man of moderate appetite for
a day ; hence called in Athen. 3 § 20 p. 98 e. ήμ€ροτμοφίί
[cf. ή χοΊνιξ ήμιρήσιοί τροφή, Diog. Laert. 8, 18]) : Rev.
vi. 6 [where A.V. measure (see Am. appendi.x ad loc.)].*
Xotpos, -ου, 6, fr. Horn, down, a srcine : plur., Mt. vii.
6 ; viii. 30, [31], 32; Mk. v. 11-13, 14 Rec, [16] ; Lk.
viii. 32 sq. ; χ v. 15 sq. (Not found in the 0. T.) *
χολάω, -ώ ; (χολή, q. v.) ; 1. to be atrabilious ; to
be mad (Arst])li. nub. 833). 2. to be angry, en-
rai/ed, (for χολούμαι, more com. in the earlier Grk. writ,
fr. Hom. down) : τικί, .In- vii. 23 (3 Mace. iii. 1 ; Artem.,
Nicand., Mosch., Diog. I.aert., al.).*
χολή, -ής, ή, (i. (J. χόλοί, fr. χίω to jiour out [now
thought to be connected will. χλόι;. χλωρός, etc. 'yellow-
ish green'; cf. Curtius §200; Vauicek p. 247]), first
found in Archilochus (8th cent. b. c), afterwards in
Aeschyl. et sqq. 1. bile, gall : Mt. xxvii. 84 (cf.
Sept. Ps. Lxviii. (Lxix.) 22) [cf. B. D. s. v. Gall] ; Acts viiL
23 (on \vhich see πικρία) ; for ΓΤ^ΊΟ, Job xvi. 13. 2.
in the O. T. it is also used of other bitter things ; for
n:;''?, wormwood, Prov. v. 4; Lam. iii. 15; hence some
undierstand the word in ^It. xxvii. 34 to mean myrrh, on
account of Mk. xv. 23 ; but see σμνρνιζω, 2 ; [Β. D. u. s.].*
χόο5, see χους.
XopaJCv ( [so G L, also Mt. xi. 21 Rec. ; Lk. x. 13 Rec.="l ;
XopafciK Τ Tr WH ; \\ωραζΙν, Lk. X. 13 Rec.•"•"; see
fi, t; Tdf. Proleg. p. 84 ; WH. A pp. p. 155']), ή, indecl.
Chorazin, a town of Galilee, which is mentioned neither
in the O. T. nor by Joseplms; acc. to Jerome (in his
Onomast. [cf. Euseb. onomast. ed. Larsow and Parthey
p. 374]) two miles distant from Capernaum; perhaps the
same place which in the talmud, Menach. f. 85, 1 is called
t'n3 [cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 139], the re-
mains of which Robinson (Biblical Researches, iii. 347,
359 sq.) thinks must be sought for in the ruins of th(i
modern Tell Hum ; but AVilson (Recovery of Jerusalem
Am. ed. pp. 270, 292 sqq. ; Our Work in Palestine,
p. 188), with whom [Thomson (Land and Book, ii. 8)],
Socin (in Baedeker's Palestine and Syria, Eng. ed. p.
374), Wolff (in Riehm p. 235), [the Conders (Hdbk. to
the Bible, p. 324), and the majority of recent scholars]
agree, holds to the more pΓob.^ble opinion which identi-
fies it with Kerdzeh, a heap of ruins lying an hour's
χ^ορη'γεω
670
χρεία
journey to the Ν. Ε. of Tell Hum : Mt. xi. 21 ; Lk. x.
la. C£. Win. RWB. 8. v.; Keim i. p. 605 [Eng. trans.
ii. 367] and ii. 118 [Eng. trans, iii. 143].*
χορηγίω, -ώ ; fut. 3 pers. sing, χορηγήσιι (2 Co. i.\. 10
G L Τ I'r Wll) ; 1 aor. opt. 3 ])ers. siug. χορηγήσαι (ib.
Rec.) ; {χορηγό!, the leader of a chorus; fr. χοροί and
άγω I ήγίομαι]) ; fr. [Simon.], Xen., Plat, down ; 1.
lo be a chorus-leader, lead a chorus, 2. to furnish
the chorics at one's own expense; lo procure arid supply
all ikings necessary to βί out the chorus (so very often in
the Attic writ.). 3. in later writ. ([Aristot.], Polyb.,
Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Ael., al. ; 1 K. iv. 7 ; 1 Mace.
xiv. 10 ; 2 Mace. iii. 3, etc.), to supply, furnish abundant•
ly: τί,•2 Co. ix. 10 ; 1 Pet. iv. 11. [Comp. : ΐπι-χορη-
yf'o).] *
Xopo's, -οϋ,ό, (by metath. f r. ορχο!, ορχίομαι, [(?) ; prob.
related to χήρτος (Lat. hortus), χρόνος, etc., denoting
primarily ' an enclosure for dancing ' ; cf. Curtius § 1 8;)]),
fr. Horn, down, a band (of dancers and singers), a cir-
cular dance, a dance, dancing: Lk. xv. 25 (for Π'^ΙΠΟ,
Ex. XV. 20 ; Judg. xi. 34, etc. ; for '7ίΠ•3, Lam. v. 15 ; Ps.
cl. 1).•
χορτάζω : 1 aor. (χόρτασα ; 1 aor. pass, ιχορτάσθην ;
fut. pass. ;(ορτασ^ι}σομαι ; {χάρτο!, ^• y •) ', first in Hesiod
(opp. 450) ; a. lo feed with herbs, grass, hay, to fill
or satisfy with food, tn fatten; animals (so uniformly
in the earlier Grk. writ. [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iv. 1 2 ;
W. 23]) : opvea ίκ τω» σαρκών, pass. Rev. .xix. 21 [here
A. V. were filled^. b. in later (cf. Slurz, Dial.
Maced. and Alex. p. 200 sqq.) and Biblical Greek, to
fill or satisfy men (Sept. for i'yy and ϋ'3ί^ΓΙ ; with
some degree of contempt in Plat, de rep. 9 p. 586 a.
κ(κυφοτ€! (Is y^f κα\ ds τραπίζια βόσκονται χορταζόμίνοι
και όχίίοντα). ο. prop. : τινά, Mt. χν. 33 ; pass.,
Mt. xiv. 20; χν. 37; Mk. vi. 42; vii. 27; viii. 8 ; Lk. ix.
17; Jn. vi. 26 ; Jas. ii. 16 ; opp. to mivav, Phil. iv. 12;
τινά Tivos (like πίμπλημι [cf. AV. § 30, 8 b.]): άρτων, with
bread, Mk. viii. 4 (Ps. cxxxi. (cxx.xii.) 15) ; τίνα από with
a gen. of the thing [cf. B. § 132, 12], pass. Lk. xvi. 21
(Ps. ciii. (civ.) 13); [rtra «V w. gen. of the thing (B. u. s.),
pass. Lk. XV. 16 Tr mrg. Wll]. β. metaph. : τινά,
to fulfil or satisfy the desire of any one, Mt. v. 6 ; Lk.
vi. 21, (Ps. cvi. (cvii.) 0).*
χόρτασμα, -τογ, to, (χομτάζω), feed, fodder, for animals
(Sept.; I'olyb., Diod., Plut., al.) ; food, (vegetable) sus-
tenance, whether for men or flocks: plur. Acts vii. 11.•
XdpTos, -ου, ό ; 1. the place where grass grows
and animals graze: Hom. Π. 11, 774; 24, 640. 2.
fr. Hes. down, grass, herbage, hay, provender: of green
grass, Mt. vi. 30 ; xiv. 19 ; Lk. xii. 28 ; Jn. vi. 10 ; Jas.
i. 10 sq. ; 1 Pet. i. 24 (fr. Is. xl. 6 sqq.) ; Rev. ix. 4 ; χάρτ.
χλωροί, Mk. vi. 39 ; Rev. viii. 7 ; χόρτοί of growing crops,
Mt. xiii. 26 ; Mk. iv. 28 ; of hay, 1 Co. iii. 1 2. (Sept.
for ΤΪΠ grass, and 3tyj'.) *
Χουζόϊ, -a [Tdf Proleg. p. 104 ; B. 20 (18)], 6, Chtizas
[ \.V. (less correctly) Chusa], the steward of Herod
Antipas : Lk. viii. 3.•
χον(, -o<ir, ace. -οΰν, 6, (contr. for χόοΓ, fr. χ{ω, to pour),
fr. Hdt. down ; 1. prop, earth dug out, an earth-heap
(Germ. Schutl) : 6 χους ό ιξορυχθίίς. Ildt. 2, 150. 2.
dust (Sept. for 13;;) ; Mk. vi. 1 1 ; Rev. xviii. 1!», ([Josh,
vii. 11; Sap. v. 15; Sir. xHv. 21, etc.]; Plut. mor.
p. 1096 b. [i. e. non posse suaviter etc. 13, 7]).*
χροίομαι, χρωμαι; impf. 3 pers. plur. «;(ρώιτο; 1 aor.
ΐχρησάμην; pf. κίχρημαι (1 Co. ix. 15 G L Τ Tr WH);
fr. Horn, down ; (mid. of χράω [thought to be allied bjr
metath. with χ(ίρ (cf. Curtius § 189)], 'to grant a loan',
' to lend ' [but cf. L. and S. s. v. ; they regard tlie radical
sense as ' to furnish what is needful '] ; hence) 1.
prop, to receive a loan ; to borroio. 2. to take for
one's use; to use: rail [W. § 31, 1 i.], to make use of a
thing, Acts xxvii. 17; 1 Co. ix. 12, 15; 1 Tim. i. 8; V.
23 ; τω κόσμω, the good things of this world, 1 Co. vii.
31 R<i (see below) ; μαΚΚον χρησαι, sc. the opportunity
of becoming free, ib. 21 (where others, less fitly, supply
τω κΚηθηναι δοΟλοχ [see reff. s. v. d. III. 6 a.]), contrary
to the regular usage of class. Grk. with an ace. : τ6ν κ6•
σμον, 1 Co. vii. 31 L TTr AVH ; see Meyer ad loc; B.
§133, 18; W. u. s. ; (also in Sap. vii. 14 ace. to some
codd. ; [L. and S. give (Pseudo-)Aristot. oecon. 2, 22
p. 1350% 7]). with the dat. of a virtue or vice describing
the mode of thinking or acting : t!j (Χαφρία, [R. V.'sheut
fickleness'], 2 Co. i. 17; πολλή παρρησία, ib. iii. 12, (for
numerous exx. fr. Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down, see Passow
ii. p. 2497''; [L. and S. s. v. II. a.]), with adverbs (see
Passow ii. p. 2497»; [L. and S. s. v. IV.]) : άποτόμω!, lo
deal sharply, use sharpness, 2 Co. xiii. 10. of the use of
persons: rtvi, to bear one's self towards, lo deal with,
treat, one (often so in Grk. writ. ; see Passow ii. p. 2496'';
[L. and S. s. v. IIL 1 and 2]), Acts xxvii. 3.•
χράω, see κίχρημι-
XpeCa, -as, ή, (χρή), fr. Aeschyl. and Soph, down; 1.
necessity, need : τα ττροΓ την χρύαν [L Τ Tr WH πρ. ταϊ
χρ(ίαί (cf. below)], such things as suited the exigency,
such things as we needed for sustenance and the jour-
ney. Acts xxviii. 10 ; els tus ava-^Kalas χp(Ίas, [A. V. for
necessary uses'] i. e. to supply what is absolutely neces-
sary for life [(cf. Babr. fab. 136,9) ; al. understand the
' wants ' here as comprising those of charity or of wor-
ship]. Tit. iii. 14 ; irpbs οικο8ομην Trjs χρ(Ίαί, for the edi-
fication of souls, of wliich there is now special need,
Eph. iv. 29 [cf. R. v. and mrg.]; fo-rt χρίία. llure is
need, foil, by an ace. with inf. Ileb. vii. 1 1 ; (u -τι χρίία
TWOS, there is need nf something, Rev. xxii. 5 Grsb. ; Lk.
X. 42 [(but not WH mrg.)] ; ίχω χρήαν τίκο'ί, Ιο have
need of (be in want of) some thing (often in the Grk.
writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, cf. Passow s. v. I ; [L. and S.
S.V. IL 1]), Mt. vi. 8; xxi. 3 ; Mk. xi. 3; Lk. [ix. 11 ; xv.
7] ; xix. 31, 34 ; xxii. 71 ; .In. xiii. 29 ; 1 Co. xii. 21, 24 ;
1 Th. iv. 12 ; Heb. x. 36 ; Rev. iii. 1 7 R G (see below) ;
xxi. 23 ; xxii. 5 (not Grsb.) ; τον with an inf. Heb. v.
12 [λν. § 44, 4 a. ; cf. tis, 2 b. p. 626• bot.] ; the gen. of
the thing is evident fr. the context, Acts ii. 45; iv. 85;
with the gen. of a pers. whose aid, testimony, etc., is
needed, Mt. ix. 12; xxvi. 65; Mk. ii. 17; xiv. 63; Lk.
V. 3 1 ; ΐ^ω χρύαν, foil, by an inf. (cf. B. § 1 40, 3), / etc.
γρΐωφ€ΐ\ετηί
671
■χρηστοί
have need to etc., Mt. iu. 14 ; xiv. 16 ; Jn. xiii. 10 ; 1 Th.
L 8; iv. 9 [with which cf. v. 1 (see W. 339 (318) ; B.
§ 140, 3)] ; foU. by i^-u (see tra, II. 2 c. [B. § 139, 46 ;
cf. Epictet. diss. 1, 1 7, 18]), Jn. ii. 25 ; xvi. 30 ; 1 Jn. ii.
27 ; xptiav ίχω, absol., to have need : Mk. ij. 25 ; [Eph.
IV. 28] ; 1 Jn. iii. 1 " ; olhiv χρααν ίχω, to have need as
to nothing [cf. B. § 131. Kij, liev. m. 17 LTTr WII.
η xpfia with a gen. of the subj. the condition of one de-
prived of those things which he is scarcely able to do with-
out, want, need : Xeirovfyyas rijs xpfias μου (see \(ΐτονργόί,
ί fin.), PhiL ii. 25; πληροϋν την χμ^ίαν Ttras (Thuc. 1.
70), PhU. iv. 19 ; [add, tit (Lchm. br. tis) την χρααν μοι
ίΒ-ί'μ'/'ατί, unto (i. e. to relieve, cf. (is, B. II. 3 c. γ. p. 185'
top) my need, Phil. iv. 16]; plur. one's necessities:
νπηρντΛν τάϊί χ- to provide for one's necessities, Acts
XX. S4 ; κο(ΐ/ωΐ'(ίΐ' ταίί χ- [cf. p. 352' top]. Ro. xii. 13. 2.
duty, business, (so esp. fr. Polyb. down [cf. Jud. xii. 10;
1 Mace. xii. 45; xiii. 37 ; 2 iiacc. vli. 24, etc.]) : Acts
vi. 3.»
χΐΗωφίιλίτηί (L Τ Tr WH χρΐοφ.; cf. Loh. ad Phryn.
p. 691 ; W. § 5, 1 d. 13 ; [WH. App. p. 152' ; Tdf. Pro-
leg. D.89; Τ (?: see U.S.) WII -φιλίτης, cf. WH. App.
p. 154'' (see I, t)]), -ου, ό. (xpios or χρίως, a loan, a debt,
and οφ€ΐΧ.(τηί, q. v.), a debtor : Lk. vii. 4 1 ; xvi. 5. (Prov.
xxix. 13 ; Job xxxi. 37 ; Aesop, fab. 289 [ed. Coray, 11
ed. Halm] ; several times in Plut. ; [also in Diod., Dion.
Hal. ; see Soph. Lex. s. v.].) •
χρη ; (fr. χράω, xpaet contr. χρη) ; impers. verb, it is
necessary; it behooves : foil, by an inf. Jas. iii. 10 [(B.
§§ 131, 3 ; 132, 12). From Horn. on. Syn. see gfl, fin.]'
χρτ)ζ<ι>; (χρή) ; fr. Horn, down ; to have need of, to be
in want of: with a gen. of the obi. [AV. § 30, 8 a.], Mt.
vi. 32 ; Lk. xi. 8 ; xii. 30 ; Ro. xvi. 2 [here w. gen. of a
pers.] ; 2 Co. iii. 1.*
χρήμα, -Tos, TO, (χράομαι), in Grk. writ, whatever is
for use, whatever one uses, a thing, mailer, affair, event,
business ; spec, money (rarely so in the sing, in prof,
auth., as Hdt. 3, 38; Diod. 13, 106 [cf. L. and S.8.V. L
sub fin.]) : Acts iv. 37; plur. nc^es (often in Grk. writ.
fr. Horn. Od. 2, 78; 16, 315 etc. down), Mk. x. 24 [T
WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.] ; oi τά χρήματα Τχοντ^!, they
that have riches, Mk. x. 23 ; Lk. xviii. 24 ; money. Acts
viii. 18, 20; xxiv. 26, (for ^33, silver, Job xxvii. 17; for
D"?3J, riches, .Tosh. xxii. 8 ; 2 Chr. i. 11 si].).*
χρηματίζω ; fut. χρηματίσω (Ro. vii. 3 [cf. B. 37 (33)] ;
in Grk. writ, everywh. the Attic -ιώ, so too Jer. xxxii.
16 (xxv. 30) ; xxxiii. (xxvi.) 2); 1 aor. (χρημάτισα; pf.
pass. κ(χρημάτισμαι ; 1 aor. pass, ίχρηματίσθην ; (χρήμα
business) ; in prose writ. fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to
transact business, esp. lo manage public affairs ', to advise
or con.<tult with one about public affairs ; to make answer
to those who ask advice, present inquiries or requests, etc. ;
need of judges, magistrates, rulers, kings. Hence in
(ome later Grk. writ, 2. lo give a response lo those
consulting an oracle (Diod. 3, 6 : 15, 10; Plut. mor.
p. 435 c. [i. e. de defect, oracc. 46]; several times in
Lcian.) ; hence used of God in Joseph, antt. 5, 1, 14;
10, 1. 3: 11, 8, 4 ; univ. (dropping all ref. to a previous
consultation), to grre a divine command or admonition,
til teach from heaven, [(Jer. xxxii. 16 (xxv. 30))]: with
a dat. of the pers. Job .xl. 3 ; pass. foil, by an inf. [A. V.
revealed etc.], Lk. ii. 26 (χρηματίζ(ΐν Xoyous jrpor τιι•α,
Jer. xxxvii. (xxx.) 2) ; pass, to be divinely commanded,
admonished, instructed, [R. V. teamed of 'jod], Mt. ii.
12, 22; Acts x. 22; Heb. viii. 5; xi. 7, (this pass, use
is hardly found elsewh. exc. in Joseph, antt. 3, 8, 8 ; [11,
b, 4] ; cf. B. § 1 34, 4 ; [VV. § 39, 1 a.]) ; to be the mouth-
piece of divine revelations, to promulge the commands oj
God, (Tin', .Jer. xxxiii. (xxvi.) 2; xxxvi. (xxix.) 23):
of Moses, Heb. xii. 25 [R. V. warned\. 3. to assume
or take to one's self a name from one's public business
(Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) ; univ. to receive a name or
title, be called : Acts xi. 26 ; Ro. vii. 3, (Joseph, antt. [8,
6,2]; 13, 11, 3; b.j. 2, 18, 7; [c. Apion. 2, 3, 1 ; Philo,
quod deus immut. § 2.i fin. ; leg. ad Gaium § 43] ; Ά>π-ίο-
χον τόι/ 'Έ,πιφανη χρηματίζοντα, Diod. in Miiller's fragm.
vol. ii. p. .wii. no. x.xi. 4 ; Ίάκωβον τον χρηματίσαντα
άδίλφον τοϋ κυρίου. Acta Philippi init. p. 7.5 ed. Tdf. ;
*1ακώ/3ον . . . ow καί αδίλφόΐ' του Χριστού χρηματίσαι οι
ieioi λόγοι ττιμΰχουσιν, Eus. h. e. 7, 19; [cf. Soph. Lex.
s.v. 2]).•
χρηματισμό?, -oC, ό, {χρηματίζω, q. v.), a divine response,
an oracle : Ro. xi. 4. ( 2 Mace. ii. 4 ; cf. Diod. 1,1; 14,
7 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1 7, 5 ; [cf . Artem. oneir. 1 , 2 p. 8 ;
Suicer, Thesaur. s. v. (vol. ii. col. 1532)] ; in various
other senses in the Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat, down.)*
χρησ-ιμαβ, -η, -ov, (χράομαι), first in Theogn. i06, ft for
use, useful: 2 Tim. ii. 14.*
χρή<Γΐϊ, -ίωι, ή- (χράομαι), use : of the sexual use of a
woman, Ro. i. 26 sq. (παιδική, Lcian. amor. 25 ; ορ4ξ(ΐ{
παρά Tas χρήσ(Κ, Plut. placit. philos. 5, 5 ; [cf. Isocr.
p. 386 c. ; Plat. legg. 8 p. 841 a. ; Aristot., al.]).•
χρηστεύομαι ; (;(pijoT<5r, q. V.) ; to show one's self mild,
lo be kind, use kindness : 1 Co. xiii. 4. (Eccles. writ., as
Euseb h. e. 5, 1, 46 ; τικ/, towards one, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
13, 2; 14,3.)•
χρηστολογία, -at, ή, (fr. χριηστο\ό•^θ!, and this fr.
χρηστοί, q• v., and λί'γω; cf. Jul. Caiiitol. in the life of
Pertinaxc. 13 "Orane.s, qui libere fabulas conferebant,
male Pertinaci loquebantur, χρηστολόγον eum appel-
lantes, qui bene loqueretur et male faceret "),fair speak-
ing, the smooth and plausible address which simulates
goodness: Ro. xvi. 18. (Eustath. p. 1437, 27 [on II. 23,
598]; eccles. writ.)*
χρηστοί, -η, -όν, (χράομαι), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for
31D ; 1. prop, fl for use, useful ; virtuous, good :
ηθη χρηστά, 1 Co. XV. 33 ([Treg. χρηστά (but cf. B. 11)],
see ηθο!, 2). 2. manageable, i. e. mild, pleasant, (opp.
to harsh, hard, sharp, bitter) : of things. χρηστότ(ρπς vivot,
pleasanter, Lk. v. 39 [here TTr txt. χρηστό:; so WII
in br.] (of wine also in Plut. mor. p. 240 d. [i.e. Lacaen.
apophtheg. (Gorg. 2) ; p. 1073 a. (i. e. de com. notit.
28)] ; of food and drink, Plat, de rep. 4 p. 438 a. ; σνκα.
Sept. Jer. xxiv. S, 5); ό ζνγΟ! (opp. to burdensome),
Mt. xi. 30 [A. V. ea.«i/] ; of persons, kind, benevolent : of
God, 1 Pet. ii. 8 [A. 'V.gracioiLt'] fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.)
γρηστοτη';
672
χριστοί
9 ; τό χμηστον τοΟ θιοϋ ΐ. q- η χρηστάτη! [W• § 34, 2], Ro.
η. 4 ; of men, fis τίνα towards one, Eph. iv. 32 ; tVi nva,
Lk. vi. 3.j [here of God; in both pass. A. V. kiixQ*
χρηστότηϊ, -ijTot, η, (χρηστοί) ; 1. moral good-
nesa, iuleijrilii: Ivo. iii. lii (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3) [A. V.
'doeth </««'/']. 2. heniijuily, kindness: lio.ii. 4; 2
Co. vi. C ; (Jal. v. 22 ; Col. iii. 12 ; Tit. iii. 4 ; ή χρ. twos
ΐπίτινα, Ro. .\i. 22 (opp. to άποτομία [q. v.]) ; Eph. ii. 7.
(Sept.; Eur., Isae., Diod., Joseph., Ael., Ildian. ; often
in Phit.) [.See Trench, Syn. § l.\iii.] *
χρ((Γμα (so R G L ed. min. WH) and χρίσμα (h ed.
maj. Τ Tr ; on the accent see W. § G, 1 e. ; Lipsius,
Grammat. Untersuch. p. 35 ; \_Tdf. Proleg. p. 102]), -ror,
TO, {χρίω, q• v.), anything smeared on, unguent, ointment,
usually prepared b_v the Hebrews from oil and aromatic
herbs. Anointiir^ Avas the inaugural ceremony for
priests (Ex. x.wiii. :M \ .\1. 13(15); Lev. vi. 22 ; Num.
X.XXV. 25), kings (1 S. ix. 16; .x. 1 ; -xv. 1; xvi. 3, 13),
and sometimes also prophets (1 K. xix. 16 cf. Is. l.xi. 1),
and by it they were regarded as endued with the iloly
Spirit and divine gifts (1 S. xvi. 13 ; L•. l.xi. 1 ; Jo-
seph, antt. 6, S, 2 trpbs τον Ααυί8ην — when anointed
by Samuel — μ(ταβιιίν(ΐ τΰ θ(Ίον καταΧιπον 2άουΚον -ηι
6 μϊν προφητ(υ(ΐν ηρξατο, τοΰ Beiov πνεύματος eli αυτόν
μίτοίκισαμίνου) ; [see 1515. DD. s. νν. Ointment, Anoint-
ing]. Hence in 1 Jn. ii. 20 (where από τοΰ &ylov is so
used as to imply that this χρίσμα renders them άγίουί
[cf. Westcott ad loc.]) and 27, τό χρίσμα is used of the
gifi of the Holy Spirit, as the ellicient aid in getting a
knowledge of the truth; see χρίω. (Xen., Theophr.,
Diod., Philo, al. ; for Γ\Πψ•ρ, Ex. xxix. 7; xxx. 25;
XXXV. 14 ; xl. 7 (9).) •
Xpumovo's [cf. 15p. Lglitft. on Philip, p. 16 note], -oC,
0, (Χριστοί), a Christian, ii follotrer of Christ: Acts ,xi.
26; xxvi. 28; 1 Pet. iv. 16. The name was first given
to the worshippers of Jesus by the (jentiles, but from the
second century (Justin Mart. [e. g. apol. 1, 4 p. 55 a.;
dial. c. Try ph. § 35 ; cf. ■ Teaching ' etc. 12, 4]) onward
accepted by them as a title of honor. Cf. Lipsins,
Ueber Ursprung u. iiltesten Gebrauch des Christen-
namens. 4to pp. 20, Jen. 1873. [Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. 2;
Farrar in .Alex.'s Kittos. v.; on the 'Titles of Believers
in the X. T.' see Westcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 125 sq. ;
cf. Dirt, of Chris. Antiqq. s. v. ' Faithful '.] '
Xpio-To's, -η, -όν, {χρίω), Sept. for n'L•/^, anointed : 6
Upfvi δ χριστοί, Lev. iv. 5 ; vi. 22 ; oi χριστοί tfpttt, 2
Mace. i. 10; the patriarchs are called, substantively, oj
;Κριστοϊ θ(θϋ, Ps. civ. (cv.) 15; the sing, ό χριστοί τυϋ
κυρίου (njn; Π"!??) in the Ο. Τ. often of the king of
Israel (see χρίσμα), as 1 S. ii. 10, 35; [xxiv. 11 ; xxvi.
9, 11, 23] ; 2 S. i. 14; Ps. ii. 2; xvii. (xviii.) 5i ; Hab.
iii. 13; [2 Chr. xxii. 7]; also of a foreign king, Cyrus,
as sent of God, Is. xlv. 1 ; of the cominsr kins whom the
Jews expected to be the saviour of their nation and the
author of their highest felicity: the name 6 χριστό:
(Π•!^•;, Chald. ΧΠ-πρ) is not found in the O. T. but is
first used of him in the Book of Enoch 48, 10 [cf.
Schodde's note] ; 52, 4 (for the arguments by which
sonu• have attempted to prove that the section contain-
ing these passages is of ('liristian origin are not
convincing [cf. υΙο! τοϋ ανθρώπου. 2 and re(T.]), after Ps.
ii. 2 referred to the Messiah ; [cf. Psalter of Sol. 17. 36 ;
18, 6. 8]. Cf. Keim ii. 549 [Eng trans, iv. 263 sq. ;
Westcott 'Additional Xote'on 1 Jn. v. 1. On the '.;en-
eral subject see Schiircr, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29.] In
the X. T. it is u.sed 1. of the Messiah, viewed in
his generic aspects [the word, that is to say, Ijeinj; used
as an appellative rather than a projier name],o χριστοί'.
>It. ii. 4; xvi. 16; xxiii. 10; x.xiv. 5, 23 ; xxvi. 63 ; .Mk.
viii. 29; xii. 35; xiii. 21 ; xiv. 61; Lk. iii. 15 ; iv. 41 ; xx.
41 ; xxii. 67 (66) ; xxiii. 39; xxiv. 26, 46 ; Jn. i. 20, 25,
[41 (42) Rec] ; iii. 28; iv. 29; vi. 69 Rec. ; vii. 26, 31,
41; xi. 27; xii. 34; xx.31; Acts ii. 30 Rec.,31; iii. 18;
viii. 5; i.\. 22; xvii. 3'; xviii. 5, 28; xxvi. 23; 1 Jn. iL
22 ; V. 1 ; 6 χριστός κνρίον or τον θίοΰ, I^k. ii. 26 ; IX.
20 ; Acts iv. 26 ; without the article, Lk. ii. 1 1 ; xxiii. 2 ;
Jn. i. 41 (42) L Τ Tr Wll ; ix. 22; Acts ii. 36 ; δ χμ»,-
στόί. ό βασιλίΰί τοϋ ΊσραήΧ, Mk. XV. 32 ; ό χριστοί so
used as to refer to Jesus, Rev. xx. 4, 6 ; ivith τοϋ 6eoi
added, Rev. xi. 15; xii. 10. 2. It is added, as an
ajipellative ('Messiah', 'anointed'), to the iirojiername
Ίησοΰί; a. Ίησοϋί δ χριστοί, -Tesus the Christ ('Mes-
siah ') : Acts v. 42 R G ; ix. 34 [R G] ; I Co. iii. 1 1 Rec. ;
1 Jn. v. 6 [RG L] ; Ίησοϋί ό Xfyo/ifvof χριστοί, who they
say is the Messiah [(cf. b. below)], :Mt. xxvii. 22 ; ivith-
out the art. Ίι;σοθ£ χριστοί, ./esus as Christ or Messiah,
Jn. xvii. 3 ; 1 Jn. iv. 2; 2 Jn. 7, [but in all three exx. it
seems better to take χρ. as a prop, name (see b. below)];
ό χριστοί Ίησοΰί, the Christ (.Messiah) Λνΐιο is Jesus, [Alt.
i. IS WH mrg. (see b. below)] ; Acts v. 42 L Τ Tr AVH
[R. V. Jesus as the Christ'\ ; xix. 4 Rec. b. ό Χρι-
στοί is a proper name (cf. W. § is, ;) X. i ; [as res|)ects
the use of a large or a small initial letter the critical edd.
vary: Tdf. seems to use the capital initial in all cases;
Treg. is inconsistent (using a small letter, for in-
stance, in all the exx. under 1 above, exc. Lk. xxii. 67
and Jn. iv. 29; in Mt. i. 1 a capital, in Mk. i. 1 a
small letter, etc.); AVH have adojited the principle of
using a capital when the art. is absent and avoiding it
when the art. is present (1 Pet. being intentionally ex-
cepted ; the small letter being retained also in such exx.
as Lk. ii. 1 1 ; xxiii. 2 ; Acts ii. 36, etc.) ; see 117/. Intr.
§415]): Mt. i. 17; xi. 2 ; Ro. i. 16 Rec.; vii. 4; ix. 5 ;
xiv. 18 [here L om. Tr br. the art.] ; xv. 19 ; 1 Co. i. 6,
etc. without the article, Mk. ix. 41 ; Ro. vi. 4 ; viii. 9,
17 ; 1 Co. i. 12 ; Gal. ii. 16 sq. 19 (20), 21 ; iii. 27 ; Phil,
i. 10, 13, 19-21, 23 ; ii. 16; Col. ii. 5, 8; Heb. iii. 6, and
often. Ίι;σοθΓ Χριστοί, Mt. i. 1, 18 [here Tr om. *!., WTI
txt. br. Ί. ; al ό Ί Χρ• which is unique; see 1Γ/Λ App.
ad loc] ; Mk. i. 1 ; Jn. i. 1 7 ; ,•\«8 ii. 38 ; iii. 6 : iv. 10 ;
viii. 1 2 : [ix. 34 L Τ Tr λΥΗ] ; X. 36 ; xi. 1 7 ; X V. 2G ; xvi.
18, 31 [RG]; XX. 21 [here L AVH txt. om. Trbr.Xp.];
xxviii. 31 [Tdf. om. Xp.] ; Ro. i. 1 [RG WH txt. (see be-
low)], 6, 8 ; ii. 16 [K G Tr txt. WH mrg. (see below)] ;
1 Co. i. 7-9 ; iii. 11 [G Τ Tr WH (Rec. Ί. ό Xp.)] : xv.
57, and very often in the Epp. of Paul and Peter ; Heb.
XP'
673
■χρυσιον
xiii.8,21; lJn.i.3,7[RG]; ii. 1 ; [v. 6 GTTrAVII] ;
2 Jn. 7 [(see a. above)] ; Jude 4, 1 7, 21 ; Rev. i. 1 sq. 5 ;
xxii. 21 [RG(NVHbr. al. om. Xp.)]• Xp^rros Ίησοϋι,
Ro. [i. 1 Τ Tr WH mrg. (see above) ; ii. lU Τ Tr mrg.
WH txt. (see above)] ; vi. 3 [WH br. '!.] ; 1 Co. i. 2, 30 ;
[iii. 11 Lchm. (see above)]; Gal. iii. 14 [here Tr t.\t.
WH txt. Ί. X.] ; iv. 14; v. 6 [WH br. Ί.] ; vi. 15; Pliil. ii.
5 ; iii 3, 14 ; Col. ii. 6 ; 1 Tim. i. 2 ; ii. 5. Ίησου! ό Xcyo-
μ(νο! Χριστοί, surnamed 'Clirist' [(cf. a. above)], Mt. i.
ll). on the phrases eV Χριστώ, ii> Χριστώ Ίησοΰ, see «V,
I. 6 b. p. 21 1" [cf. W. § 20, 2 a.]. Χριστοί and Ίησον: Xp.
(V τισιν, preached among, 2 Co. i. 19 ; Col. i. 27 [al. (so
R.V.) would take (v here i η t e rn a 1 1 y (as in the foil, exx.),
within ; cf. ev, I. 2] ; Χριατόί ίν τισιν is used of the per-
son of Christ, who by his holy power and Spirit lives in
the souls of his followers, and so moulds their characters
that they bear his likeness, Ro. viii. 10 (cf. 'J); 2 Co.
xiii. 5 ; Gal. ii. 20 ; Eph. iii. 1 7 ; a mind conformed to
the mind of Christ, (Jal. iv. ly.
χρίω: 1 aor. ϊχρισα; (akin to χ^ίρ [(?), see Curtius
§ 201], χραίνω ; prop. ' to touch with the hand ', ' to be-
smear ') ; fr. Hom. doivn; Sept. for ΠΙ^ρ; to anoint (on
the persons who received anointing among the Hebrews,
see χρίσμα) ; in the X. T. only trop. of God a. con-
secrating .Jesus to the Jlessianic office, and furnishing
him with powers necessary for its administration (see
χρίσμα) : Lk. iv. 18 (after Is. l.xi. 1) ; contrary to com-
mon usage with an ace. of the thing, (\aiov (like verbs
of clothing, putting on, etc. [cf. W. § 32, 4 a.; B. § 131,
6]), Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 8 ; in Theoph. ad Autol.
1, 12 we find χρί^σθαι fKaiov Oeov and χρ, ψωτΐ και τΐνΐίτ-
μάτι almost in the same sentence); itvevpjiTi άγίω κα\
θυι/ά/χ6ΐ. Acts -Κ. 38 ; also xpieiv used absol.. Acts iv.
27. b. enduing Christians with the gifts of the
Holy Spirit [cf. Westcott on 1 Jn. ii. 20] : 2 Co. i. 21.
[COMP. : cV, fVi- χρίω. Syn. see άλιίφω, fin.] *
χρονίζω ; f ut. χρονίσω (Heb. x. 3 7 Τ Tr txt. WH), Attic
χρονιω (ibid. R G L Tr mrg.) ; (χρόνος) ; fr. Aeschyl. and
Hdt. down ; Sept. for "^ns ; to linr/er, delay, tarry : Mt.
XXV. 5; Heb. x. 37 ; foil, by iv with a dat. of the place,
Lk. i. 21 ; foil, by an inf., Mt. x.xiv. 48 [LTTr WHom.
inf.] : Lk. xii. 45.*
Xpo'vos, -ov, 6, fr. Hoin. down, Sept. for Di", Hj', etc.
time : Heb. xi. 32 ; Rev. x. G ; ό χρ. τον φαινομίνον άστίρος,
the time since the star began to shine [cf. φαίνω, 2 a.],
Mt. ii. 7 ; [ό χρ. τον τ€κύν αυτήν (Gen. x.w. 24), Lk. i. 57
(Β. 267 (230) ; cf. W. § 44, 4 a.)]; τη, tVayyeXiar, Acts
vii. 17; της παροικίας, 1 Pet. i. 17; χρόνοι άποκαταστάσ€ως.
Acts iii. 21 ; oi χρ. της άγνοιας. Acts xvii. 30 : χρόνου
8ιαγ€νομ€νου, Acts xxvii. 9 ; πόσος χρόνος €στίν, ως τοΰτο
ycyuvev, Mk. ix. 21 ; ό παρΛηλνθίύς χρ. 1 Pet. iv. 3 (where
Rec. adds τοΰ βίου) ; τ(σσαρακοντα(τής. Acts vii. 23 ; xiii.
18; στιγμή χρόνου, Lk. iv. 5; πλήρωμα τοΰ χρόνου. Gal.
iv. 4 ; ποκΐν ([q. v. IL d.] to .tpenil) χρόνον. Acts xv. 33 ;
xviii. 23 ; βιίύσαι τ6ν ΐπίλοιπον χρόνον. 1 Pot. iv. 2 : Sidovai
χρόνον Tivi (i. e. a space of time, respite), iva etc. Rev. ii.
21 [(Joseph, b. ]'. 4, 3, 10)]; ]>lur. joined witli καιροί,
Acts i. 7 : 1 Th. v. 1 , (see καιρός, 2 e. p. 3 1 9•) ; eV ϊσχάτων
(LTTrWH ϊσχάτου) τάν χρ. (see ίσχατος, 1 fin.), 1 Pet.
i. 20; [add, tV «σχάτου τοΰ (Tr WH om. τοΰ) χρόνου,
Jude 18 LTTr WH]. with prepositions : άχρι. Acta
iii. 21 ; δια τον χρ., on account of the length of time,
Heb. v. 12 (Polyb. 2, 21, 2; Alciphr. 1, 26, 9) ; ck χρόνων
Ικανών, for a long time, Lk. viii. 27 [R G L Tr mro-. (see
below)] ; fv χρόνω, Acts i. 6, 21 ; iv ϊσχάτω χρόνω, .Jude
IS Rec. ; eVi χρόνον, [A. Y.for a lohile'], Lk. xviii. 4 ; eVi
πΧίίονα χρ. [Α. V. α lonyer time}, Acts .xviii. 20 ; (φ' όσον
χρ. for so long time as, so long as, Ro. vii. 1 ; 1 Co. vii.
39 ; Gal. iv. 1 ; κατά τον χρόνον, according to (the relar
tions of) the time, Mt. ii. 16 ; pera πολύν χρόνον, Mt. xxv.
19 ; /χ€τά τοσούτον χρ. Heb. iv. 7 ; ττρο χρόνων αιωνίων,
[R. V. before times eternal^, 2 Tim. i. 9 ; Tit. i. 2. the
dative is used to express the time (/uWh^ which some-
thing occurs (dat. of duration of time, cf. W. §31, 9 ;
[B. § 133, 26]) : [χρόνω Ίκανώ, for a long time, Lk. viii.
27 Τ Tr txt. AVH] ; Ίκανω χρόνω. Acts viii. 1 1 ; [τοσούτω
χρόνω, .Jn. xiv. 9 L Τ Tr mrg. AVH mrg.] ; πολλοΪΓ χρόΐΌΐς
[R. λ', mrg. of a long time (.\. V. oftentimes) ; cf. πολύς,
c], Lk. viii. 29 ; αΐωνίοις, [R. V. through limes eternaQ,
Ro. xvi. 25. the ace us. is used in answer to the
question how long: χρόνον, for a while. Acts xix. 22;
Rev. vi. 11 (where in R LT TrWH μικρόν is added) ;
also χρ. Tim, [Α.Λ^ a while'], 1 Co. xvi. 7; όσον χρ. [A.V.
while], Mk. ii. 19 ; χρόνους 'ικανούς, fir a long time, Lk.
XX. 9 ; μικρόν χρόνον, Ju. vii. 33 ; xii. 35 ; Rev. xx. 3 ;
πολύν χρ. Jn. v. 6 ; τοσούτον χρ. Jn. .\iv. 9 [R G Tr t.xt.
WH t.xt.] ; Ίκανόν, [A. V. long time]. Acts xiv. 3 ; ούκ
ολίγον, [R. V. no little lime]. Acts xiv. 28 ; τον πάντα χρ.
Acts x.x. 18. [On the ellipsis of χρόνος in such phrases
as άφ' ου, tv τω ίξής (Lk. vii. 1 1 L mrg. Tr txt. WHtxt.),
eV τω καθ(ξής (I^k. viii. 1), c| ικανού, etc., see από, I. 4 b.
p. 58'" top, (ξής, καθ(ξής, €« IV. 1, etc. Syn. see καιρός,
fin. ; cf. αιών, fin.] *
χρονοτριβών, -ώ : 1 aor. inf. χρονοτριβήσαι ; (χρόνος
and τρίβω) ; Ιο wear away time, .tpend time : Acts .\.x. 16.
(Aristot. rhet. 3, 3, 3 [p. 1406% 37]; Plut., Heliod.,
Eustath., Byz. writ.) *
χρύ(Γ€05, -60, -eof, contr. -ούς, -ή, ovv, [but ace. sing,
fem. -σαν, liev. i. 13 L Τ Tr WH ; gen. plur. -σίων. Rev.
ii. 1 L Tr ; (on its inflection cf. B. 26 (2:i) ; Phryn. ed.
Lob. p. 207 ; L. and S. s. v. init.)], {χρυσός), fr. Horn,
down, golden ; made of gold ; also overlaid or covered
with gold: 2 Tim. ii. 20; Heb. ix. 4 ; Rev. i. 12 sq. 20;
ii. 1 ; iv. 4 ; V. 8; viii. 3 ; ix. 7 Grsb., 13, 20 ; xiv. 14 ; xv.
6 sq. ; -wii. 4 ; xxi. 15.*
χρνσ-ίον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of χρυσός, cf. φυρτίον), fr. Hdt.
down, Sept. for 2Π;, gold, both that which lies imbedded
in the earth and is dug out of it (Plat. Eutliyd. p. 288 e. ;
Sept. Gen. ii. 1 1 ; hence μ(ταλλ(υθ£ν, Lcian. de sacr. 11):
χρ. πίττυρωμίνον €κ πνρός, [1!. V. rffineil by Jire], Rev.
iii. 18; and that which has been smelted and wrought,
Heb. ix. 4; [1 Co. iii. 12 Τ TrWH]; 1 Pet. i. 7; Rev.
xxi. 18, 21 ; i. ιγ. gold coin, ' gold ' : Acts iii. 6 ; xx. 33 ;
1 Pet. i. 18; golden ornaments, precious things made of
gold, 1 Tim. ii. 9 L WH txt. ; 1 Pet. iii. 3 ; Rev. xvii. 4
G L WHtxt. ; xviii. 16 GLTrtxt. WH txt. (cf. χρυσός).*
νρυσοΒακτύ\ιο•ς
674
■χωρίον
χρικτο-Βακτΐλιοϊ, -ον, (χρυσοί and δακτΰ\ιθί), gold•
riti(je<l, ailurncil with gold rings : Jas. ii. 2. (Besides
only in Hesych. s. v. χρυσοκόΧΚητοί ; [W. 26].) [Cf.
B. D. s. V. Ring.] *
χρυο•ο-λιβθ5, -ου. 6, (χρυσοί and \ίθος), chrysolllh, chryso-
lile, a precious stone of a golden color ; our topaz [cf. BB.
DD. s. V. Chrysolite ; esp. Riehm, IIWB. s. v. Edelsteine
.5 and 19] : Rev. xxi. 20. (Diod. 2,52; Joseph, antt. 3,
7, 5 ; Sept. for ty-arin, Ex. xxviii. 20 ; xxxvi. 20 (xxxix.
13); [Ezek. i. 10 Aq.].) *
Xpv<ro'-irpcuros [-OK Lchm.], -ου, ό, (fr. χμυσοί, and ίτράσον
a leek), chrgsoprase, a precious stone in color like a leek,
of a translucent golden-green [cf. BB. DD. s. v. ; Riehm,
IIWB. s. V. Edelsteine 6] : Rev. xxi. 20.*
Xpuo-ds, -oC, 0, fr. Horn, down, Hebr. 3ΠΙ, gold (6 tVl
γήί και ό ΰπο y^f, Plat. legg. 5 p. 728 a.) : univ., Mt. ii.
11; 1 Co. iii. 1 2 [R G L (al. χρυσίον, q. v.)] ; Rev. Lx. 7 ,
i.q. precious things made of gold, golden ornaments, Mt.
xxiii. 16 sq. ; 1 Tim. ii. 9 [here L WII txt. χρυσίον] ; Jas.
V. 3; Rev. xvii. 4 (L WII t.\\^. χρυσΙον) ; xviii. 12, 16 (L
Tr txt. λνΐΐ txt. χρυσίον) ; an image made of gold, Acts
xvii. 29 ; stamjied gold, gold coin, Mt. x. 9.*
χρνσοΰβ, see χρΰσιοί.
χρνσόω, -ω : ])f. pass. ptcp. κιχρυσωμίνοί', to adorn with
gold, to gild: κίχρυσωμίνη χρυσά, '^X.X. decked irilh gold],
Rev. xvii. 4 ; and ev [G L Tr om. WII br. tV] χρυσώ,
xviii. 16, of a woman ornamented with gold so profusely
that she seems to be gilded ; Sept. for DHt Π3Ϊ"? in Ex.
xxvi. 32. (Ildt., Arstph., Plat., Diod., Plut.i aj.) '
χρώϊ, gen. χρωτο!, ό, (cf. χροιά, the skin [cf. Curtius
§ 201]), fr. Horn, down, (who [generally] uses the gen.
χροός etc. [cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom., or L. and S. s. v.]), the
surface of the body, the stin: Acts xix. 12; Sept. for
1^3, Uv'icc for Ί•\χ', Ex. xxxiv. 29 sq. Alex.*
χωλο'5, -η, -όν, fr. Horn, down, Sept. for Πΰ)£1, lame :
Acts iii. 2, 1 1 Rec. ; xiv. 8 ; plur., Mt. xi. .5 ; xv. 30 sq. ;
xxi. 14 ; Lk. vii. 22 ; xiv. 13, 21 ; Jn. v. ;5 ; Acts viii. 7 ;
TO χωλόν, Ileb. xii. 13 (on which see ΐκτρίπω, 1). de-
prired of a foot, maimed, [A. V. halt] : Mt. xviii. 8 ; Mk.
ix. 45.*
χώρα, -as, ψ (ΧΑΩ [cf. Curtius § 1 79], to lie open, be
ready to receive), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for ]"^Vt, nj""!?
'a province'; 1. prop, the space lying between tico
places or limits. 2. a region or country; i. e. a tract
of land : η χ. iyyvs Trjt ίρημου, Jn. xi. 54 ; [in an ellipti-
cal phrase, ή άστραττη (η) άστράτττουσα (Κ της ΰπο τ&ν
ονρανυν €15 την υττ' ουραν6ν\άμ7Γ€ΐ, \.\.part . . . jtart, Lk.
xvii. 24 (cf. W. § 64, 5) ; on the ellipsis of χώρα in other
phrases (ίξ ίναυτίαί, ex δίξΐξί, etc.), see W. 1. c. ; B. 82
(72)]; lanil as opp. to the sea. Acts xxvii. 27; land as
inhabited, a province or country, Mk. v. 10 ; [vi. 55 L
mrg. TTrWII]; Lk.xv. 13-15; xix. 12; Acts xiii. 49;
Avith a gen. of the name of the region added : Ύραχωνί-
τίδοί, Lk. iii. 1 ; t^s 'louSai'as, Acts xxvi. 20; [(or an
equlv. adj.)] ΤαΚατική, Acts xvi. 6 ; xviii. 23 ; των Ίου-
Saltov, Acts X. 39 ; plur. τη! ΊουΒαίας και Σαμαρί I'as, [Α. V.
regions']. Acts viii. 1 ; c'v χώρα κ. σκιά θανάτου, in a re-
gion of densest darkness (see σκιά, a), Mt. iv. 16; rivos.
the country of one, Mt. ii. 12; χ. for its inhabitants,
Mk. i. 5; Acts xii. 20; the (rural) region environing a
city or village, the country, Lk. ii. 8 ; Γ(ρ-γ(σηνών, Tfpa-
σηνών, Γα8αρηνών, Mt. viii. 28; Mk. v. 1; Lk. viii. 2il;
the region with towns and villages which surrounds the
metropolis, Jn. xi. 55. 3. land which is ploughed
or cultivated, ground: Lk. xii. 16; plur., Lk. xxi. 21
[R.V. country}; Jn. iv. 35 lA.Y. fields]; Jas. v. 4 [A. V.
fields]. [Syn. see τόπος, fin.] *
[Χωραζίν, see XopafiV.]
χωρΐω, -ώ; fut. inf. χωρήσ(ΐν (Jn. xxi. 25 Tr WII);
1 aor. ίχώρησα ; (χώρος, a place, space, and this f r. ΧΑΩ,
cf. χώρα) ; 1. pro]), to leave a space (which may bo
occupied or filled by another), to make room, give place,
yield, (Horn. n. 12, 406; 16,592; al.) ; to retire, pass:
of a thing, «s rt, Mt. xv. 17. metaph. to betake one's
self, turn one's self: th μ(τάνοιαν, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [A. V.
come ; cf. μιτάνοια, p. 40•;"]. 2. to go forward, ad-
vance, proceed, (prop, ννξ, Aeschyl. Pers. 3S4) ; to make
progress, gain ground, succeed, (Plat. Eryx. p. 398 b. ;
legg. 3 ]). 684 e. ; [χωρ€Ϊ το κακόν, Arstph. nub. 907, vesp.
1483; al.]; Polyb. lo, 35, 4; 28, 15, 12; al.) : 6 'Κ&γος ό
(μος ου χωρ(ΐ ev ΰμιν, gaineth no ground among you or
within you [R. V. hath not free course (with mrg. hath
no place) in you], Jn. viii. 37 [cf. Field, Otium Norv. pars
iii. ad loc.]. 3. to have space or room fur receiving
or hnliling sotnethirig (Germ, fassen) ; prop.: τ/, a thing
to fill the vacant space, Jn. xxi. 2.5 [not Tdf.] ; of a
space large enough to hold a certain number of people,
Mk. ii. 2 (Gen. xiii. 6 [cf. Plut. praec. ger. reipub. 8, 5
p. 804 b.]) ; of measures, which hold a certain «juantity,
Jn. ii. 6 ; 1 K. vii. 24 (38) ; 2 Chr. iv. 5, and in Grk. writ,
fr. Ildt. down. metaph. to receive irith the mind or
understanding, to understand, (το Κτίτωνος φρόνημα, I 'hit.
Cat. niin. 64 ; όσοναϋτώ η ψυχή χωριΊ, Acl. v. h. 3, 9) ; to
be ready to receive, keeji in mind, anil practise : τ6ν Χάγον
τοΰτον, this saying, Mt. xix. 11 sq. [(cf. Plut. Lycurg.
13. 5)]; Ttra, to receive one info one's heart, make room
for one in one's heart, 2 Co. vii. 2. [CoMP. : ava-, άπο-,
€Κ-, ντΓΟ- χωρία. Syn. cf. ίμχημαι.] *
χωρίζω; fut. ;^ωρίσ'ω [Β. 37 (33)]; 1 aor. \χ\ί. χωρίσαι;
pres. mid. χωρίζομαι ; pf. pass, ptcp• κιχωρισμίνος ; 1 aor.
pass, (χωρίσθηιι; (χωρίς, q.v.); fr. Hdt. down; to separate,
divide, part, put nsnnder : τι, opp. to σνζ(ίγνυμι, Mt. xix.
6 ; Mk. X. 9 ; τίνα από τίνος, Ro. viii. :i5, 39, (Sap. i. 3);'
pf. pass. ptcp. Heb. vii. 26. Mid. and 1 aor. pass,
with a reflex, signif. to .'separate one's self from, to de-
part; a. to leave a husband or trife: of divorce, 1
Co. vii. 11, 15 ; άπο avbpos, ib. 10 (a woman κ€χωρισμίνη
οπό Toi avSpos, Polyb. 32, 12, 6 [al.]). b. to depart,
go aioay: [absol. Philem. 15 (euphemism for ΐφυγ^),
R. V. was parted from thee] ; foil, by άπό with a gen. of
the place. Acts i. 4 ; ck with a gen. of the place. Acts
xviii. 1 sq. ([W. § 36, 6 a.] ; eif with an ace. of the place,
2 Mace. V. 21; xii. 12; Polyb., Diod., al.). [CoMP. :
άπο-, 8ia- χωρίζω] '
χωρίον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of χώρος or χώρα), fr. Hdt.
down ; 1. a space, a place ; a region, districL 'i
•χωρίς
675
■ψ•ενΒομαι
α piece of ground, afield, land. (Thuc, Xen., Plat., al.) :
Mt. xxvi. 36 ; Mk. xiv. 32 ; Jn. iv. 5 [A. V. parcel of
ground'] ; Acts i. 18 sq. ; iv. 34 [plur. lands] ; v. 3, 8 ; α
farm, estate : plur. Acts xxviii. 7. [Syn. see toitos, fin.] *
χωρ(8, (ΧΑί2, see χώρα [cf. Curtius § 1ί)2]), adv., fr.
Horn, down ; 1. stparatehj, apart : Jn. xx. 7. 2.
as a prep, with the gen. [W. § 54, 6] ; a. without any
pers. or thing (making no use of, having no association
with, apart from, aloof from, etc.) : 1 Co. [iv. 8] ; xi. 11 ;
Phil. ii. 14 ; 1 Tim. ii. 8 ; v. 21 ; Heb. [ii. 9 Treg. mrg.] ;
>xi. 40 ; παραβολή!, without making use of a parable, Mt.
>iii. 34; Mk. iv. 34; ορκωμοσία:. Heb. vii. 20 (21), 21;
■χ. αίματος. Ileb. ix. 7, 18; α'ιματίκχυσίας, Ileb. ix. 22;
without i. e. being absent or wanting : Ro. vii. 8 sq. [R. V.
apart from] ; Heb. xi. 6 ; xii. 8, 14 ; Jas. ii. 18 (Rec. «),
20, 26, [in these three exx. R. V. apart from] ; wilhout
apart from'] ; destitute of the fellowship and blessings
of one : χωρίί Χρίστου [cf. W. § 54, 2 a.; R. V. separate
from Christ], Eph. ii. 12 ; without the intervention (par-
ticipation or co-operation) of one, Jn. i. 3; Ro. iii. 21,
[28 ; iv. 6 ; x. 14] ; \. θ(μ(\ίου, witliout laying a foun-
dation, Lk. vi. 49 ; ;^. της σης -γνώμης, without consulting
you, [cf. γνώμη, fin. (Polyb. 3, 21, 1. 2. 7)], Philem. 14;
' without leaving room for ' : χ. άνη\ογίας, Heb. vii. 7 ;
οίκτιρμων, X. 28. χ. τοΟ σώματοΓ, freed from the body,
2 Co. xii. 3 L Τ Tr \VH (Rec. ^κτάς, q. v. b. a.) ; χωρ\{
αμαρτίας, without association with sin, i. e. without yield-
ing to sin, without becoming stained with it, Heb. iv.
15; not to expiate sin, Heb. ix. 28. b. besides:
Mt. xiv. 21 ; XV. 38 ; 2 Co. xi. 28. [Syn. cf. Sv€v-] *
χώρος, -ου, ό, the north-west wind (Lat. Corns or
Caurus') : for the quarter of the heavens from which
connection and fellowship with one, Jn. xv. 5 [R.V. this wind blows. Acts xxvii. \2 (on which see λίψ-, 2).•
Φ
ψάλλω ; fut. ψαλώ ; (fr. ι^α'ω, to rab, wipe ; to handle,
touch, [but cf. Curtius p. 730]) ; a. to pluck off,
pull out : iddpav, the hair, Aeschyl. Pers. 1062. b.
to cause to vibrate by touchinrj, to twanr/: τόξων vevpas
χ(ψί, Eur. Bacch. 784 ; spec. χήρ8ην, to touch or strike
the chord, to twang the strings of a musical instrument so
that they gently vibrate (Aristot. probl. 19, 23 [p. 91 θ*,
2]) ; and absol. to /tlag on a stringed instrument, to play
the harp, etc. : Aristot., Plut., Arat., (in Plat. Lys. p. 209 b.
with Koi Kpoieiv τω πΚηκτρω added [but not as explan-
atory of it; the Sehol. ad loc. says ψήλπι, τό Svev
πΧήκτρου τώ Βακτνλω τας χηρδας ΐτταφασθαι] ; it is distin-
guished from κιβαρίζίίν in Ildt. 1, 155) ; Sept. for nj and
much oftener for τ?;; to sing to the music of the harp;
in the X. T. to sing a hymn, to celebrate the praises of God
in song, .Jas. v. 13 [R.V. sing praise] ; τω κνρίω. τώ ονόματι
αΰτον, (often so in Sept.), in honor of Ooil, E|)h. v. 19
[here A. V. making melody] ; Ro. xv. 9 ; ψαλώ τώ irvri-
ματι, ψαλώ 8e κα\ τω νοΐ, ' Ι Λνϋΐ sing God's praises indeed
with my whole soul stirred and borne away by the Holy
Spirit, but I will also follow reason as my guide, so that
what I sing may be understood alike by myself and by
the listeners', 1 Co. xiv. 15.*
ψαλμιο'ς, -οΰ, ό, (ψάλλω), η striking, twanging, [(Eur.,
al.)] ; spec, α striking the chords of a musical instru-
ment [(Pind., Aeschyl., al.)] ; hence a pious song, a
psalm, (Sept. chiefly for llOi•?), Eph. v. 19; Col. iii. 16;
the phrase ίχιιν ψαλ/χόι/ is used of one who has it in his
heart to sing or recite a song of the sort, 1 Co. xiv. 26
[cf. Heinrici ad loc, and Bp. Lghtft. on Col. u. s.] : one
of the songs of the book of the O. T. which is entitled
ψαλμοί, Acts xiii. 83; plur. the (book of) Psalms, Lk.
xxiv. 44 : βίβλος ψαλμών, Lk. xx. 42 ; Acts i. 20. [Syn.
see νμνος, fin.] *
ψίυβ-άδελφοβ, -ου, ό, {ψ€νδής and αδίλφόί), α false
brother, i. e. one who ostentatiously professes to be a
Christian, but is destitute of Christian knowledge and
piety : 2 Co. xi. 26 ; Gal. ii. 4.•
ψ€υδ-αΐΓοσ~Γολο5, -ου, ό, {^evSijS and απόστολος), a false
apostle, one who falsely claims to be an ambassador of
Christ: 2 Co. xi. 1.3.*
ψίνΒη'ϊ, -ίϊ, (ψ(ί^ημαι), fr. Horn. Γ. 4, 235 down, lying,
deceitful, false: Rev. ii. 2; μάρτυρας. Acts vi. 13; sub-
stantively oi ψ(ν&(Ίς. [A. V. liars]. Rev. xxi. 8 [here
Lchm. ψίνστής, i\. v.].*
ψ€υ8ο-διδ(ίο-καλθ5, -ου, ό, (yjffvbfjS and διδάσκαλο;), Ο
false teacher. 2 Pet. ii. 1.*
ψίυδο-λο'γοβ, -ov, {ψ^υίίής and Xeyai), speaking (teach-
ing) falsely, speaking lies : 1 Tim. iv. 2. (Arstph. ran.
1521 ; Polyb., Lcian., Aesop, al.) *
ψίϋδομαι ; 1 aor. ίψίυσάμην ; (depon. mid. of ψίί8<ύ
[allied -w. ψιθυρίζω etc. (Vanicek p. 1195)] 'to deceive',
'cheat ' : hence prop, to show one's self deceitful, to play
false) ; fr. Hom. down ; to lie, to speak deliberate false-
hoods : Heb. vi. 18 : 1 Jn. i. 6 ; Rev. iii. 9 ; oi ψιίδομαι,
Ro. ix. 1 ; 2 Co. xi. 31 ; Gal. i. 20 ; 1 Tim. ii. 7 ; τινά, to
deceive one by a lie, to lie to, (Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plut.,
al.) : Actsv. 3 ; like verbs of saying, with a dat. of the
pers. (cf. W. § 31, 5 ; B. § 133, 1 ; Green p. 100 sq.). Acts
V. 4 (Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 45 ; Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 36 ; LxxxviiL
(Ixxxix.) 36 ; Josh. xxiv. 27 ; [.Jer. v. 12], etc.) ; eir τικα.
Col. iii. 9; «earri tixos, against one, Mt. v. II [LGom.
ψίνΒομάρτυρ
676
ψιθυριστής
Tr mr<;. br. \jrevd- ; al. connect καθ' υμών with ίϊττωσι and
make \j/fv8. a sinii)U•. adjunct of mode (A. V. ./(ί/."'/.'/)] ;
κατά TJjs αληθείας, .las. iii. 14 [here Tdf. makes \j/cvS.
absol.; cf. W. 4 70 (438) n.^J. (Sept. for σΠ2 and 2)3-)'
ψ(>ι8ο-μάρτυρ, unless more correctly ψ(υδομάρτυ! οί"
rather ψ^υ^όμαρτυς (as αυτόμαρτνρ ; see I'assow s. v.
ι^ίυ^ομάρτνί [is]i. /,«//. I'aralip. p. 217 ; cf. Etym. Magn.
50U, "2()J), -vpoi, 1). (ψίυδί)5 and μάρτυμ [(J. v.]), u _/u/,se
witness: Mt. x.wi. (ID; τοΰ ofoi), false witnesses of i. e.
concerninii God [W. §30, 1 a.], 1 Co. -w. 15. (Phit.
Gorg. p. 4 72 b. ; .Vristot. pol. 2, 9, 8 [p. 1274", 6 ; but
the true reading liere is ψ(υ5ομαρτυριώι> (see Bent ley's
Works ed. Dyce, vol. i. p. 40S) ; a better ex. is .Vristot.
rhet. ad Alex. 16 p. 1432*, 6; cf. Plut. praec. ger. reip.
29, 1 ; ("onstt. apost. .i, 9 ; Pollux 6, 36, 1.53].) *
ψευΒο-μαρτυρε'ω, -ώ : impf. ίψίυδομαρτνρουν '■, fut. ψίυ-
8ομαρτυρησω; 1 aor. subj. 2 pers. sing. ι/^βϋδο/ζιΐμΓυ^ί/στ;? ;
to utter fahehooils in (jiving Icstimoni/, la Irs/i/ij j'lilsi li/.
to bear false icituess, (Xen. mem. 4, 4, 1 1 ; Plat. rep. 9,
p. 575 b. ; legg. 11 p. 937 c; Aristot. rhet. 1, 14, 6 p.
1375•, 12; [rhet. ad Ale.\. 16 p. 1432", 6]; Joseph,
antt. 3, 5, 5): Mt. xix. 18; [Mk. x. 19]; Lk. .xviii. 20;
Ro. xiii. 9 Rec. ; κατά tivos, .Mk. xiv. .J6 sq. (as Ex. xx.
16; Dent. v. 20).•
ψίυβο-μαρτυρία, -at, ή. (■^(υ^ομαρτνρίΐύ), false testimony,
false witness : .\It. xv. 19 ; .\xvi. 59. (Plat., Plut. ; often
in the Attic orators.) *
ψ€υ5ομάρτυς, see ^ξνΗομάρτνρ.
ψ£υ5ο-ΐΓροφήτη5, -ου, ό, (x/^fuSiji and προφήτης), one who,
actinij the part of a dioinelij inspired prophet, utters false-
hoods under the name of divine prophecies, a false prophet :
Mt. vii. 15 ; xxiv. 1 1, 24 ; Mk. xiii. 22 ; Lk. vi. 26 ; Acts
xiii. 6 ; 2 Pet. ii. 1 ; 1 Jn. iv. 1 ; Rev. xvi. 13 ; xix. 20 ;
XX. 10. (Jer. vi. 13; xxxiii. (xxvi.) 8, 11, 16; xx.xiv.
(x.wii.) 7; .\xxvi. (xxix.) 1, 8; Zech. xiii. 2; Joseph,
antt. 8, 13, 1 ; 10, 7, 3 ; b. j. 6, 5, 2 ; [τον τοιούτον (ίθυ-
βόλω οΐΌματι ψΐν^οπροφήτην ττρυσαγορ^ύίΐ, κιί^Βηλ^νοντα
την α\ηθή ΐΓροφητ(ίαν κ. τα γνήσια νυθοις €νρημασι cVi-
σκιύζοντα κτ\. Philo de spec. legg. iii. § 8] ; eccles. writ.
['Teaching' 11, 5 etc. (where see Ilarnack)]; Grk. writ,
use ψίνΒόμαντί!•) *
ψενδοδ, -our, TO, fr. Horn, down, Sept. for ipiy, 2'2
tin?, a lie; conscious and intentional falsehood: univ.
Rev. xiv. 5 (where Rec. fioXos) ; opp. to ή άλήθαα. Jn.
viii. 44 ; Epii. iv. 2') ; ουκ ϊστι ^fCSoj, opp. to αΚηθίς
foTiv, is no lie, 1 Jn. ii. 27 ; τίρατα ψίΰΒους, [Α. V. h/inr/
wonders'] exhibited for the treacherous purpose of de-
ceiving men, 2 Th. ii. 9 ; in a broad sense, ichatever is
not what it professes to he : so of perverse, impious, deceit-
ful precepts, 2 Th. ii. 11 ; 1 Jn. ii. 21 ; of idolatry, Ro.
i. 25 ; ποίίΐκ ψβΟδοί, to act in accordance with the ]jie-
cepts and principles of idolatry, Ilev. xxi. 27 ; xxii. 15,
[cf. xxi. ><, anil p. 526'' mid.]. *
ψίυεό-χρισ -Tos, -ου, ό, (ψ€υ8ήΐ and χριστοί), a false
Christ (or Missiah), (one who falsely lays claim to the
name and office of the Messiah) : Mt. xxiv. 24 ; Mk.
xiii. 22.•
t|>cv8uw|ios, -ov, (\lreiiSos [ψ(υδή!, rather] and όνομα).
falsely named [A. V. falsely so calleill : 1 Tim. vi. 20.
(.Veschyl., Philo, Plut., Sext. Emp.) *
ψ(νσ-μια, ^os, τό, {ψίύδω), a falsehood, a lie, (Plat. Meno
p. 71 d.; Plut., Lciaa. ; Sept.); spec, the ])erfidy by
which a man by sinning breaks faith with God, Ro. iii.
7.•
ψ£«<Γτη5, -ου, ό, (ψ(ύδω), fr. Horn, down, it liar: Jn.
viii. 44, .")5 ; 1 .In. i. 10 ; ii. 4, 22 : iv. 20; v. 10 ; 1 Tim. i.
10; Tit. i. 12; [Rev. xxi. 8 Lchm. (al. ψ(υδής, q. v.)] ;
one who breaks faith, α false or faithless man (see
ψ(νσμα), Ro. iii. 4 cf. Prov. xix. 22.*
ψηλαφάω, -ώ : 1 aor. (ψηλάφησα, optat. 3 pers. plur.
ψη\αφήσ(ΐαν (Acts -xvii. 27, the ^Eolic form; see ποιίω,
init.) ; pres. pass. ptcp. ψηλαφώμινος ; (fr. ψάω, to
touch); to handle, touch, feel: τι or τινά, Lk. xxiv. 39;
Heb. xii. 18 [see R. V. txt. and mrg., cf. 15. § 134, 8 ; W.
343 (322)] ; 1 Jn. i. 1 ; metaph. mentalli/ to seek after
tokens of a person or thin;! ■ 6(όν, Acts xvii. 27 [A.V. feel
afcr']. (Horn., Arstph., Xert., Plat., Polyb., Philo, Plut.;
often for C^n, O'r^T)^ ro?-) [Sy.n. see &πτα>, 2 c] *
ψηφίζω; I hot. ίι\τήφισα; (λ/'ήψοί, (j. v.) ; to count with
pthbks, to compute, calculate, rcckiDt : την δατίάνην, Lk.
xiv. 28 ; τον αριθμόν, to explain by com|)uting. Rev. xiii.
i8. (Polyb., Pint., Palaeph., Anthol. ; commonly and
indeed chiefly in the mid. in the Grk. writ, to give one's
vote by casting a pelihle into the nrn ; to decide by voting.)
[COMP. : συγ- κατά-, ηυμ- ^Ιτηφίζω-^*
ψήφθ9, -ου, ή, (tr. ψάω, see ι/^άλλω), α small, u-nrn,
siniiiilh stone; pebble, [fr. Pind., Ildt., down; (in Horn.
ψηφίς)']; 1. since in the ancient courts of justice
the accused were condemned by black pebbles and ac-
quitted by white (cf. Passow s. λ•. ψήφος, 2 c, vol. ii. p.
2574''; [L. and S. s. v. 4 d.] ; Ovid. met. 15, 41; [Plut.
Alcib. 22, 2]), and a man on his acquittal ivas spoken of
as νικήσας (Theojihr. char. 17 (19), 3) and the ψήφος
aoquitting him called νικητήριος (lleliod. 3, 3 sub lin.),
Christ promises that to the one who has gained eternal
life by coming off concjueror over temptation (τω νικηΰντι
[\. V. to him that overcometh']) he will give ψήφαν λιυκήν,
Rev. ii. 17; but the figure is explained differently by
different interpp.; cf. DUsterdieck [or iee in the 'Speak-
er's Com.'] ad loc. ; [B. D. s. v. Stones, 8]. Ewald (Die
Johann. Schriften, ii. p. 136; [cf. Lee u. s.; Plnmptre in
B. D. 8. V. Hospitality, fin.]) understands it to be the
tessera hospilalis [ef. Rich, Diet, of \nui\. s. v. Tessera,
3 ; Becker, Charicles, sc. i. note 1 7], which on being shown
secures admission to the enjoyment of the heavenly
manna ; the Greek name, however, for this tessera, is
not ψήφος, but σίμβολον. 2. a vote (on account of
the use of ])ebbles in voting): καταφί'ρω (q. v.). Acts
xxvi, 10.•
ψιθυρισ-μο'ϊ, -οΰ, ό, (ψιθυρίζω, to whisper, speak into
one's ear), a whispering, i. e. secret slandering, (Vulg.
susurratio. Germ. Ohrenhlaserei) : joined w. κατάΚαίΚιά
[cf. Ro. i. 29 (30)], 2 Co. xii. 20 ; Clem. Rom. 30, 3 ; 35, 5.
(Plut.; Sept. for tr/nS, of the magical murmuring of a
charmer of snakes, Eccl. x. 11.) *
ψιθυρισ-Γη5, -οϋ, ο, (see the preced. word), a whisperer.
■ψ'ίχώΐ'
677
ψυχ_ι,κό<{
tecret slanderer, detractor, (Germ. OhrenhlSser) : Ro. i.
29 (30). (At Athens an epithet of Hermes, Dem. p.
1358, 6; also of ό'Ερωί and Aphrodite, Suidas p. 3957
c; [of. W. 24].)*
ψΐ)ς1ον,-ον> τό, (dimin. of ψι|, ψιχόί, ή, a morsel), a little
morsel, a crumb (fit bread or meat): Jit. xv. 27; Jlk.
vii. 28 ; Lk. xvi. 21 [T WII om. L Tr br. f .]. (Not
found in Grk. auth. [cf. W. 24 ; d6 (91)]•)*
ψνχή, -rjs, ή, (ψύχω, to breathe, blow), fr. Horn, down,
Sept. times too many to count for 'C>3), occasionally also
for a'? and O^S ; 1. brealli (L•a.t.anima),i.e. a.
the breath of life ; the vital force which animates the body
and shows itself in breathing : Acts xx. 10 ; of animals,
Rev. viii. 9, (Gen. ix. 4 sq. ; xxxv. 18 ; (πιστραφήτω ή
^Ιτυχη τον παώαρίου, 1 Κ• χνϋ. 21); so also in those pass,
where, in accordance with the trichotomy or threefold
division of human nature by the Greeks, ή ψυχή is dis-
tinguished from TO ττνιΰμα (see πνινμα, 2 p. .')20' [and
reff. s. V. πν. 5]), 1 Th. v. 23 ; Ileb. iv. 12. b. life :
μ(ρίμνάν τϊ] ψυχή, Mt. vi. 25; Lk. xii. 22; την ψυχην
αγαπάν, Rev. xii. 11; [μισΛν, Lk. xiv. 26]; τιθίναί, -In.
X. 11, 15, 17; xiii. 37 sq. ; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iii. lu; πάρα-
SiSovai, Acts XV. 26 ; Sii^omi (Κΰτρον. (j. v.), Mt. xx. 28 ;
Mk. X. 45 ; ζητίΐν την ψυχην Ttvos (see ζητίω, 1 a.), Mt.
ii. 20; Ro. xi. 3; add, Mt. vi. 25; Mk. iii. 4 ; Lk. vi. 9 ;
.xii. 20, 23 ; Acts xx. 24 ; xxvii. 10, 22 ; Ro. xvi. 4 ; 2 Co.
i. 23 ; Phil. ii. 30 ; 1 Th. ii. 8 ; in the pointed aphorisms
of Christ, intended to fix themselves in the minds of his
hearers, the phrases euptV'^eii', σωζΐΐν, anoWvvai την
ψυχην αΰτοϋ, etc., designate as ψυχίι in one of the anti-
thetic members the life which is iioeil on earth, in the
other, the (blessed) life in the eternal kingdom of God :
λΐΐ. X. 39; xvi. 25 sq. ; Mk. viii. 35-37; Lk. ix. 24, 56
Rec. ; xvii. 33 ; Jn. xii. 25 ; the life destined to enjoy
the Messianic salvation is meant also in the foil, phrases
[(where R. V. soul)'\ : ττίριποίησις ψνχηί, Ileb. χ. 39 ;
κτάπθαι ras ψυχάς, Lk. xxi. 19; {rircp των ψυχών, [here
A.V. (not R.y.)for you ; cf. c. below], 2 Co. xii. 1 5. o.
that in which there is life ; a licinr/ beiiif/ : ψυχή ζώσα, a
livinij soul, 1 Co. .xv. 45 ; [Rev. xvi. 3 R Tr mrg.], (Gen.
ii. 7; plur. i. 20) : πάσα ψυχή ζωής. Rev. xvi. 3 [G LT
Trtxt. WH] (Lev. xi. 10) ; πάσα ψυχή, e.i-ery soul, i. e.
enery one. Acts ii. 43; iii. 23; Ιίο. xiii. 1, (so t?3J-S3,
Lev. vii. 17 (27) ; xvii. 12); with ανθρώπου added, every
sold of man (DIX iVp:, Num. xxxi. 40, 46, [cf. 1 Mace,
ii. 38]), Ro. ii. 9. ψυχαΐ, souls (like the Lat. capita) i. e.
persons (in enumerations ; cf. Germ. Seelcnznhl) : Acts
ii. 41 ; vii. 14; xxvii. 37; 1 Pet. iii. 20, (Gen. xlvi. 15,
18, 22, 26, 27; Ex. i. 5; .xii. 4; Lev. ii. 1 ; Num. xix.
11, 13, 18 ; [Deut. x. 22] ; the exx. fr. Grk. authors (cf.
Passow s. V. 2, vol. ii. p. 2SII0'') are of a different sort
[yet cf. L. and S. s. v. II. 2]) : ψυχαΊ ανθρώπων of slaves
[A. V. soids of men (R.V. ivith mrg. ' Or lires ')], Rev.
xviii. 13 (so [Num. xxxi. 35] ; Ezek. .xxvii. 13 ; see σώμα,
1 c. [cf. AV. § 22, 7 N. 3]). 2. the soul (Lat. ani-
mus), a. theseatofthefeelinys, desires, affections,
aversions, (our soul, heart, etc. [R. V. almost uniformly
sou[} ; for exA. fr. Grk. writ, see Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii.
p. 2589'' ; [L. and S. s. v. Π. 3] ; Hebr. t?3J, cf. Gesenius,
Thesaur. ii. p. 901 in 3) : Lk. i. 46 ; ii. 35 ; Jn. x. 24 [cf.
α'φω, 1 b.] ; .\cts xiv. 2, 22 ; xv. 24 ; Heb. vi. 19 ; 2 Pet.
ii. 8, 14 ; η ίπιθυμία τήί ψ. Rev. .xviii, 14 ; άνάπαυσιν Talt
ψυχα'ί! (ύρίσκ^ιν, Mt. -xi. 29 ; '^υχή, ■ • ■ άναπαίου, φάγ€,
πί( [\νΐΙ br. these three impvs.], (ΰφραίνου (personifica-
tion and direct address), Lk. xii. 19, cf. 18 (^ ψυχή άνα-
παΰσΐται, Xen. Cyr. 6, 2, 28 ; ΐυφραίνειν την ψυχην, Ael.
v. h. 1, 32) ; eiSoKfi ή ψυχή μου (anthropopathically, of
God), Mt. .xii. 18; Ileb. .\. 38; 7Γ(ρί\υπά! ΐστιν ή ψυχή
μου, Mt. x.wi. 38 ; Mk. .xiv. 34 ; η ψυχή μου Τζτάρακται,
Jn. xii. 27 ; ταΪ!ψυχα'ϊ{ υμών {'κλι/ό/ιοΌΐ, \_fa!ntin(i in your
souls (cf. »λΰω, 2 b.)], Heb. xii. 3 ; tv oXj rfj ψυχ^ σου,
with all thy sou!, Mt. xxii. 37; [Lk. x. 27 Lt.\t. TTr
WH] ; (ξ ολη! Trjs ψυχή! σου (Lat. ei toto animo), with
[lit. /rom (cf. «, Π. 12 b.)] all thy soul, Mk. xii. 30, 33
[here Τ WII om. L Tr mrg. br. the phrase] ; Lk. x. 27
[R G], (Deut. vi. 5 ; [Epict. diss. 3, 22, 1 8 (cf. Xen. anab.
7, 7, 43)] ; Antonin. 3, 4 ; [esp. 4. 31 ; 12, 29] : Βλη tJ
ψυχή φρόντιζαν Tivos [rather, with κΐχαρίσθαί], Xen.
mem. 3, 11, 10); μά ψυχή, with one soul [cf. πνεύμα, 2
p. •Ϊ20' hot.], Phil. i. 27 ; τοϋ π\ήθουί , . . ην ή καρδία κα\
ή ψυχή μία. Acts iv. 32 (ΐρωτηθΑ! τί f στι φίλο;, ΐφη • μία
ψυχή 8ύο σώμασιν ϊνοικοΰσα, Diog. Laert. 5, 20 [cf. Aristot.
eth. Nic. 9, 8, 2 p. 11C8'', 7; on the elliptical άπο μια!
(sf. ψυχήί'ί), see άττό, ΠΙ.]); ΐκ ψυχήί, from the heart,
heartily, [Eph. vi. 6 (Tr WII with vs. 7)] ; Col. iii. 23,
(ex T^f ψυχή! often in Xen. ; τό e'lc ψυχή{ πίνθος, .Joseph.
antt. 17, I), 5). b. the (human) soul in so far as it
is so constituted that by the right use of the aids offered it
by God it can attain its highest end and secure eternal
blessedness, the soul regarded as• a moral being designed
for everlasting life : 3 Jn. 2 ; άγρυπνήν ίπίρ των ψυχών,
Heb. xiii. 17; ΐπιθυμίαι, alrives στρατεύονται κατά τη!
ψυχήί, Ι Pet. ii. 11 ; επίσκοπο! τών ψυχών, ib. 25 ; σώζειν
τας ψνχάς, Jas. ϊ. 21 ; ψνχήν ίκ θανάτου, from eternal
death. Jas. v. 20; σωτηρία ψυχών, 1 Pet. i. 9; άγνίζιιν
ταςψνχας εαυτών, ib. 22; [τάς ψυχας πιστω κτίστη πάρα•
τίθίσθαι, 1 Pet. iv. 19]. C. the soul as an essence
which differs from the body and is not dissolved by death
(distinguished fr. το σώμα, as the other part of human
nature [so in Grk. Avrit. fr. Isocr. and Xen. down ; cf.
exx. in Passow s. v. p. 2589• bot. ; L. and S. s. v. Π. 2]) :
Mt. X. 28, cf. 4 Mace. xiii. 14 (it is called αθάνατος, Ildt.
2, 123 ; Plat. Phaedr. p. 245 c. 246 a., al. ; Αφθαρτος, .Ιυ-
seph. b. j. 2, 8, 14 ; δίοΧυθήναι την ψυχήν άπο τον σώματος,
Epict. diss. 3, 10, 14) ; the soul freed from the body, a
disembodied soul, Acts ii. 27, 31 Rec; Rev. vi. 9; xx.
4, (Sap. iii. 1 ; [on the Homeric use of the word, see
Eheling, Lex. Hom. s. v. 3 and reff. sub fin., also Proudfit
in Bib' Sacr. for 1858, pp. 753-805]).•
ψυχικοί, -ή, -όν, (ψυχή), (Vulg. animalis. Germ, sinn-
Itch), of or belonging to the ψυχή : a. having die
nature and characteristics of the ψυχή i.e. of the prin-
ciple of animal life, which men have in common with the
brutes (see ψυχή, 1 a.) , [A. V. natural^ : σώμα ψνχικάν,
1 Co. XV. 44 ; substantively, το ψυχικύν [W. 592 (551)],
ib. 4G ; since both these expressions do not differ in
ψνχο';
678
ώδί
substance or conception from σαρξ <cal αΐμα in vs. 50,
Paul might have also written σαμκίκόν ; but prompted
by the phrase ^χή ζώσα in vs. 45 (borrowed fr. Gen. ii.
7), he wrote ψ•υ;(ΐκόΐ'. b governed by the ψνχή
i. e. the sensuous nature with its subjection to appetite
and passion (as though made up of nothing but ψνχή) :
άνθρωπο! (i. q• σαρκικοί [ur σάρκινο!, q. v. 3] in iii. 1),
1 Co. ii. 14 ; ^(ηιχικοί, trvfvpM μη ίχοντα, Jude 19 [A. V.
sensual (R. V. with mrg. 'Or miutral. Or animal') ; so in
the foil, ex.] ; σοφία, a wisdom in harmony with the
corrupt desires and affections, and springing from them
(see σοφία, a. p. 081'' bot.), Jas. iii. 15. (In various
other senses in prtjf. auth. fr. Aristot. and Polyb. down.)*
ψίχο5 ( R G Tr WH), more correctly ψΟχο! ( L Τ ; cf.
[Til/. I'roleg. p. 102]; Zi/iiius.Grammat. Untersuch. p. 44
sq.), -ovs, TO, (ψύχω, q. v), fr. Horn, down, cold : Jn.
xviii. 18; Acts .xxviii. 2; 2 Co. xi. 27; for ip, Gen.
viii. 22; for rTlP, Ps. cxlvii. 6 (1<), Job xxxvii. 8.*
ψυχρ<5ϊι -"' -ό"! (Ψ^Χ"' 1• ^'•)ι ^''• ΙΙο™• down, cold,
coot: neut. of cold water, πατηριον ψυχροΰ, Mt. χ. 42
({.Ψ^ΧΡν λοΰιται, Ililt. 2, 37] ; ψυχρον πίνιιν, Epict.
ench. 29, 2; ιτΚϋν(σθαι λ/^υ;(ρώ, diss. 4, 11, 19; cf. W.
691 (S50)) ; metaph. like the Lat. frigidtis, cold L e.
sluggish, inert, in mind (ψ. την όργήν, Lcian. Tim. 2) : of
one destitute of warm Christian faith and the desire for
holiness. Rev. iii. l.j S(j.•
ψνχω : 2 fut. pass. \Ιτνγισομαι [cf. Lob. ad Phr) n.
p. 318 ; Moeris ed. Piers, p. 4:;! s. v.] ; fr. Horn, down ; to
breathe, blow, cool by blowing ; pass, lo be made or to grow
cool or cold: trop. of waning love, Mt. xxiv. 12.* ι
ι|/ωμ(ζω ; 1 aor. ΐψώμισα ; (ψωμόί, Λ bit, a morsel ; see
ψωμίον); a. lo feed by putting a bit or crumb {nj
food) into the mouth (of infants, the young of animals,
etc.) : τινά τινι (Arstph., Aristot., Plut., Geop., Artem.
oneir. 5, 62 ; Porphyr., Jambl.). b. univ. to feed,
nourish, (Sept. for ^OXn) [W. § 2, 1 b.] : τινά, Ro. xiL
20 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 55, 2 ; with the ace. of the
thing, to give a thing to feed some one, feed out to, (Vulg.
distribuo in cibos pauperum [A. V. bestow . . . to feed the
poorj) : 1 Co. xiii. 3 ; in the O. T. τινά τι. Sir. xv. 3 ; Sap.
xvL 20 ; Num. xi. 4 ; Deut. x.xxii. 13 ; Ps. l.xxix. (btxx.)
6 : L•. Iviii. 14, etc. ; cf. W. § 32, 4 a. note.*
ψωμίον, -ov, TO, (dimin. of ψωμάς), a fragrrent, bit,
morsel, [A. V. sop} : Jn. xiii. 2il S(p 30. (Ruth ii. 14 ;
Job xxxi. 1 7, [but in both ψωμόί] ; Antonin. 7, 3 ; Diog.
Laert. 6, 37.)*
ψώχω ; (f r. obsol. ψώω for yjfaa>) ; to rub, rub to pieces :
Ths στάχυαί rais χιρσίν, Lk. vi 1. [(mid. in Nicand.)]*
i2
Ω, ω : omega, the last (24th) letter of the Grk. alpha-
bet : ΐγώ (Ιμι το Ω [WII Ώ, L ώ. Τω], i. q. το τίλο!, i. e.
the last (see A, a, άλφα [and B. D. (esp. Am. eJ.) s. v.
and art. ' Alpha', also art. A and Q by Piper in llerzog
(cf. Schaff-Herzog), and by Tyrwhitt in Diet, of Chris.
Antiq.]), Rev. i. 8, 11 Rec. ; x.xi. 6; xxii. 13. [On the
interchange of ω and ο in Mss. see Scrivener, Plain In-
troduction etc. p. 627 ; ' Six Lectures ' etc. p. 1 76 ; WH.
Intr. § 404 ; cf. esp. Meisterhans, Gram. d. Att. Inschr.
P-10.]*
«5, an interjection, prefixed to vocatives (on its use in
the N. T. cf. B. 140 (122); [\V. § 2n, 3]), 0; it it>
used a. in address : ώ θΕοφιλβ, Acts i. 1 ; add,
Acts xviii. 14; xxvii. 21 [here Tdf. ω (ex errore) ; on
the pass, which follow cf. B. u. s.]: Ro. ii. 1, 3; ix. 20 ;
1 Tim. vi. 20; and, at the same time, reproof, Jas. ii.
20. b. in exclamation : and that of admiration,
Mt. xv. 28; Ro. xi. 33 [here Rec." Lchm. ώ; cf. Chand-
ler §§ 902, (esp.) 904] ; of reproof, Lk. xxiv. 25 ; Acts
xiii. 10; Gal. iii. 1; with the nom. (W. § 29, 2), Mt.
xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. Lx.41. [(From Horn, down.)]*
'ηρη8 (RG; see Ίωβήδ), ό, (Hebr. nDi;' [i. e. 'ser-
vant ' sc of Jehovah]), Obed, the grandfather of king
David : Mt. L 5 ; Lk. iii. 82, (Ruth iv. 1 7 sq. ; 1 Chr. ii.
13).*
iJSi, adv., (fr. 58*) ; 1. so, in this manner, (very
often in Hom.). 2. adv. of place; a. hither,
to thLt place (Hom. H. 18, 392; Od. 1, 182 ; 17, 545 ; cf.
B. 71 (62 sq.) [cf. λν. § 54, 7 ; but its use in Hom. of
place is now generally denied; see Eheling, Le.x.
Hom. 8. V. p. 484''; L. and S. s. v. Π.]) : Mt. viii. 29 ; xiv.
18 [Tr mrg. br. δδί] ; xvii. 1 7 ; xxiL 12 ; Mk. xi. 3 ; Lk.
i.x. 41 ; xiv. 21 ; .xix. 27 ; Jn. vi. 25 ; xx. 27 ; Acts ix. 21 ;
Rev. iv. 1 ; xi. 12, (Sept. for bSn, Ex. iii. 5 ; Judg. xviii.
3 ; Ruth ii. 14) ; ΐωί iibe, [even unto this place'], Lk.
xxiii. 5. b. here, in thii place: Mt. xii. 6, 41 sq. ;
.XIV. 1 7 ; Mk. ix. 1, 5 ; xvi. 6 ; Lk. ix. 33 ; xxii. 38 ; xxiv.
6 [WH reject the cl] ; .Jn. vi. 9 ; xi. 21, 32, and often,
(Sept. for Π3) ; τ-ά &Sf. the things that are done here.
Col. iv. 9; 2i3f, in this city. Acts ix. 14 ; in this world,
Heb. xiii. 14 ; opp. to exei (here, i. e. according to the
Levitical law still in force ; there, i. e. in the passage in
Genesis concerning Melchizedek), Heb. vii. 8 ; &Sf
with some addition, Mt. xiv. 8; Mk. vi. 3; viii. 4 ; Lk.
iv. 23; 2)8f ό Χριστοί, η 2>δί, here is Christ, or there, [so
A. v., but R. V. here is the Christ, or. Here (cf. iSf καί
i>Sf, hither and thither, Ex. ii. 12 etc.)], Mt. xxiv. 23;
2>8f V • • • «". Mk. xiii. 21 [T WH om. η ; Tr mrg. reads
και] ; Lk. xvii. 21, 23 [here Τ Tr WH mrg. «« . . . S>if
(WH txt. fKfi ό . . . 2)5e)] ; Jas. ii. 3 [here Rec. ί«ί 5 . . .
(ύ5ή
679
ωρα
5)8e ; G LTTr WH om. iii (WH txt. and marg. vary-
ing the place of cKe»)]. Metaph. in this thi/ig, Rev. xiii.
10, 18; xiv. 12; xvii. 9, [the phrase ωδί iarw in at
least two of these pass. (viz. xiii. 18 ; xiv. 12) seems to
be equiv. to ' here there is opportunity for ', ' need of '
etc. (so in Epict. diss. 3, 22, 105)]; in this state of things,
under these circumstances, 1 Co. iv. 2 L [who, however,
connects it with vs. 1] TTrWII ; cf. Meyer ad loc.
luSi), -ής, η, (i. q. άοιΒή, fr. άίίδω Ϊ. e. άδω, to sing), fr.
Soph, and Eur. down, Sept. for t'V and m'ty, a song,
lay, ode; in the Scriptures a song in praise of {>od or
Christ : Rev. v. 9 ; xiv. 3 ; Μωΰσί'ωϊ κ. του αρυίυυ, the
song which Moses and Christ taught them to sing. Rev.
XV. 3 ; plur. with the epithet πνευματικοί, Eph. v. 19
[here L br. irv.] ; Col. iii. 16. [Syn. see u^tos, fin.] *
uS£v (1 Th. V. 3 ; Is. xxxvii. 3) for ώδίί (the earlier
form ; cf. W. § 9, 2 e. N. 1), -Ivor, ή, fr. Ilom. H. 11, 271
down, the pain of childbirth, tracail-pain, birth-pang:
1 Th. V. 3; plur. ώδίνίί {[^pangs, throes, R.V. travail^;
Germ. Wehen), i. q. intolerable anguish, in reference to
the dire calamities which the Jews supposed would pre-
cede the advent of the Messiah, ^and which were called
Π'πρπ 'hyn [see the Comm. (esp. Keil) on Mt. 1. cl,
Mt. xxiv. 8 ; Mk. xiii. 8 (9) ; ώδϊ^ί θανάτου [Tr mrg.
αδου], the pangs of death, Acts ii. 24, after the Sept.
who translated the words Γ\ι•3 'blU by ώδίνβΓ θ-, deriv-
ing the word 'SdH not, as they ought, from S^n, i. e.
σχρινίον ' cord ', but from Sgn, ώδίϊ, Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 5 ;
c-xiv. (cxvi.) 3 ; 2 S. xxii. 6.*
uS(vu; fr. Horn, down; Sept. for Sin, thrice for San ;
to feel the pains of childbirth, to trarail: Gal. iv. 27;
Rev. xii. 2 ; in fig. disc. Paul uses the phrase ovs iraKiv
ώδίνω, i. e. whose souls I am striving with intense effort
and anguish to conform to the mind of Christ, Gal. iv.
19. [Co.MP. : σνν-ωδίνω.']*
<5μο5, -ου, ό, (0Ιί2 i. cj. φ/ρω [(?) ; allied w, Lat. umerus,
cf. VaniCek p. 38; Curtius §487]), fr. Horn, down, the
shoulder: Mt. xxiii. 4 ; Lk. χ v. 5.*
ώνεομαι, -οϋμαί : 1 aor. ωνησάμην (which form, as well
as (ωνησάμην, belongs to later Grk., for which the earher
writ, used (ττριάμην; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 137 sqq. ;
[Rutherford, Jiew Phryn. p. 210 sqq. ; Veitch s. v.] ;
Λν. §12, 2; §16 S.V.); "fr. Ildt. down; to buy: with a
gen. of the price. Acts vii. 16.*
ώόν [so R G Tr, but L Τ WIT oloV ; see (Et)Tn. Magn.
822, 40) I, t], -oC, TO, fr. Ildt. down, an egg: Lk. xi. 12,
(for nX'3, found only in the plur. D"V"3) Deut. xxii.
6 sq. ; Is. x. 14, etc.).*
ώρα, -as, ή, fr. Horn, down, Sept. for 7\•^_ and in Dan.
for Π;•!^; 1. a certain defnile time or season fixed
by natural law and returning with the revolving year;
of the seasons of the year, spring, summer, autumn,
winter, as ωρα τοϋ βίρουί, πρώιμης κ. όψιμος, χΐΐμΐρία,
etc. ; often in the Grk. writ. [cf. L. and S. s. v. A. I. 1 c.,
and on the inherent force of the word esp. Schmidt eh.
44 § 6 sq.]. 2. the daytime (bounded by the rising
and the setting of the sun), a day: ωρα παρήλθεν, Mt.
X;V. 15 ; η8η &pas ΒΌλλ^Γ γ(νομίνης (or γινομίνης), [Α. V.
when the day was nowfar spent"], Mk. vi. 35 (see πολίτ, c.
[but note that in the ex. fr. Polyb. there cited πολλζί
Upas means early]}; όψίας [o^c TTr mrg. WH txt.] ήδη
οΰσης της ώρας [WU mrg. br. τη! ώραί], Mk. xi. 11
{6ψ€ της ώρας, Polyb. 3, 83, 7 ; της ώρας iylyvcTo 6ψ€,
Dem. p. 541, 28). 3. a twelfth piart of the day-lime,
an hour, (the twelve hours of the day are reckoned from
the rising to the setting of the sun, Jn. xi. 9 [cf. BB.
DD. s. V. Hour; Riehm'sHWB. s. v. Uhr]) : Mt. xxiv.
36 ; XXV. 13 ; Mk. xiii. 32 ; xv. 25, 33 ; Lk. xxii. 59 ; xxiii.
44 ; Jn. i. 39 (40) , iv. 6 ; xix. 14 ; with της ήμίρας added.
Acts ii. 15; of the hours of the night, Lk. xii. 39;
xxii. 59 ; with της νυκτός added. Acts .xvi. 33 ; xxiii. 23 ;
dat. ώρα, in stating the time when [AV. §31, 9; B.
§ 133, 26]: Mt. x.xiv. 44; Mk. xv. 34; Lk. -xii. 39 sq. ;
preceded by iv, Mt. xxiv. 50; Jn. iv. 52 ; Acts xvi. 33;
accus. to specify when [W. § 32, 6; B. § 131, 11] : Jn.
iv.52; Acts x. 3; 1 Co. xv. 30; Rev. iii. 3; also to express
duration [W. ana B. 11. cc] : Mt. xx. 12 [cf. ττούω, I.
1 a. fin.]; xxvi. 40; Mk.xiv. 37; preceded by preposi-
tions : από, Mt. x.xvii. 45 ; Acts xxiii. 23 ; ίως, Mt. xx\tL
45 ; μίχρι, Acts x. 30 ; wepi with the accus. Acts x. 9.
improp. used for a very short lime : μι^ ώρα, Rev. xviii.
10 [Rec. iv, WH mrg. ace], 17 (16), 19; προς ώραν,
[Α. V. for a season], Jn. v. 35 ; 2 Co. vii. 8; Gal. ii. 5
[here A. V.for an hour] ; Philem. 15 ; jrpos καιρόν ώρας,
[for a short season], 1 Th. ii. 17. 4. any defnite
time, point of time, 7nomenl: Mt. xxvi. 45 ; more precisely
defined — by a gen. of the thing, Lk. i. 10 ; xiv. 1 7 ; Rev.
iii. 10 ; xiv. 7, 1 5 ; by a gen. of the pers. theft or oppor-
tune time for one, Lk. x.\ii. 53 ; Jn. ii. 4 ; by a pronoun
or an adj. : η άρτι ώρα, [Α. V. t7iis present hour], 1 Co.
iv. 11 ; iσχάτη ώρα, the last hour i. e. the end of this age
and very near the return of Christ from heaven (see
ίσχατος, I p. 253'•), 1 Jn. ii. 18 [cf. Westcott ad loc.];
airfi Tfi ώρα, that very hour, Lk. ii. 38 [here A.V. (not
"R.X.) that instant]; xxiv. 33 ; Acts xvi. 18; x.xii. 13; iv
airy rg ώρα, in that very hour, Lk. vii. 21 [R G L txt.] ;
xii. 12; xx. 19; iv τη ώρα ΐκύντ), Mt. viii. 13; iv iKe'ivy
Tj &pa, Mt. x. 19 [Lchm. br. the cl.] ; Mk. xiii. 11 ; [Lk.
vii. 21 L mrg. TTrWH]; Rev. xi. 13; άπ {κείνης της
ώρας, 3n. xix. 27; άπο της ώρας f«ii/);r, jMt. i.x. 22; xv.
28; xvii. 18; by a conjunction : ώραότε, Jn. iv. 21, 23 ;
V. 25: xvi. 25 ; ίνα (see Ίνα, II. 2 d.), Jn. xii. 23 ; xiii.
1 ; xvi. 2, 32 ; by καί and a finite verb, Mt. xxvi. 45:
by a relative pron. ώρα iv p, Jn. v. 28; by the addition
of an ace. with an inf. Ro. xiii. 11 (ουπω ώρα συναχθηναι
τα κτήνη. Gen. xxix. 7 ; see exx. in the Grk. writ., fr.
Aeschyl. down, in Passow s. v. vol. ii. p. 2620*; [L. and
S. s. V. B. I. 3]; so the Lat. tempus est, Cic. Tusc. 1, 41,
99 ; ad Att. 10, 8). Owing to the context ώρα some-
times denotes the fatal hour, the hour of death : Mt. xxvi.
45 ; Mk. xiv. 35, 41 ; Jn. xii. 27 ; xvi. 4 [liere L Tr WH
read ή ώρα αίτώκ i. e. the time when these predictions
are fulfilled] ; xvii. 1 ; ή ώρα τινός, ' one's hour ', i. e.
the time when one must undergo the destiny appointed
him by God : so of Christ, Jn. vii. 30 ; viii. 20, cf. xvi. 21.
[On the omission of the word see iξavτης, (αφ' hsi c£
ωραίοι
680
(Uf
ρ ."iS'' top), W. § G4, 5 8. V. ; Β. 82 (71) ; on the omission
of tlie art. witli it (e. g. 1 Jn. ii. 18), see W. § 19 s. v.]
upaios, -a, -ov, { f r. ώρα, ' tlie bloom and vigor of life ',
'beauty' in the (irk. writ., who sometimes join the word
in this sense with χάρι? [wliich suggests grace of move-
ment] or κάλλοί [whicli denotes, ratlier, symmetry of
form]), fr. lies, down, rljie, mature, (of fruits, of human
age, etc.) ; hence hloomiiKj, lieaiiliful, (of the human
Dody, Xen., Plat., al. ; with rfi όψα added. Gen. x.wi.
7; .\.\ix.l7; x.xxix. (! ; iK.i. G): woSfs, Ro. x. 1.3 ; of a
certain gate of the temple. Acts iii. 2, 10; [τάφοι κ(κο-
νίπμί'ΐΌΐ, Mt. xxiii. 27]; aKfCor, 2 Chr. x.xxvi. 19. [Cf.
Tr,;nrh, Syn. §cvi.]*
«ρύομαι ; dej)on. mid. ; Sept. for JX2^ ; to roar, to howl,
(of a lion, wolf, dog, and other beasts) : 1 Pet. v. 8
(.Judg. xiv. 5 ; Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 14 ; Jer. ii. 1.5 ; Sap. xvii.
18 ; Theocr., Plut., al.) ; of men, to raise a lowl and in-
articulate cry : either of grief, Hdt. 3, 117; or of joy,
id. 4, 7.5 ; to sinrj with a loud voice, Pind. 01. 9, 163.•
lis [Treg. (by mistake) in Mt. xxiv. 38 &s; cf. W.
462 (431) ; Chandler § 934, and reff. in El/elinr/, Lex.
Horn. s. V. p. 494'' bot.], an adverbial form of the rela-
tive pron. or, ij, δ which is used in comparison, an, like
as, even as, accontinr/ as, in the same manner as, etc.
(Germ, zvie) ; but it also assumes the nature of a con-
junction, of time, of purpose, and of consequence.
On its use in the Grk. writ. cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2,
ch. x.x.xv. p. 756 Sijq. ; [L. and .S. s. v.].
I. if as an adverb of comparison; 1. It
ansivers to some demonstrative word (οίτωΓ, or the like),
either in the same clause or in another member of the
same sentence [cf. W. § 53, 5] : ovras . . . ώί, Jn. vii. 46
[L WH om. Tr br. i>s etc.] ; 1 Co. iii. 15 ; iv. 1 ; ix. 26;
Eph. V. 28, 33 ; Jas. ii. 12 ; ουτωί ... as ϊαν [Τ Tr WII
om. eau (cf. Eng. as should a man cast etc.)] . . . βαΚ-η,
Si etc. . . . as if etc. Mk. iv. 26 ; ώϊ . . . ouras. Acts viii.
32 ; xxiii. 1 1 ; 1 Co. vii. 1 7 ; 2 Co. xi. 3 [R (ί] ; 1 Th. v.
2; ios άν ((ΰν) foil, by subj. [(cf. 5v, II. 2 a. fin.)] . . .
οΰτωί. I Th. ii. 7 sq. ; ώί . . . οΰτω και, Ro. v. 1 δ [here
WII l)r. καίΐ 18 ; 2 Co. i. 7 L Τ Tr WH ; vii. 14 ; is [T
Tr WII κηθως^ . . . κατά τα αυτή [L G ταυτά, Rec. τανταΐ,
Lk. xvii. 2S-30 ; ίσοΓ . . . ώί και, Acts xi. 1 7 ; sometimes
in the second member of the sentence the demonstrative
word (oCrtus•, or the like) is omitted and must be sui>
plied by the mind, as Mt. viii. 13; Col. ii. 6 ; ωί . . .
και (where οντω και might have been expected [W. u. s. ;
B.§ 149, 8 c.]), Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2 [here GTTr WII
om. L br. the cl.] ; Acts vii. 51 [Lchm. καθώς] ; G,al. i. 9 ;
Phil. i. 20, (see και, Π. 1 a.) ; to this construction must
be referred also 2 Co. xiii. 2 at πάρων τά Sfirfpov, καΊ
άπων νΰν, as \vhen I was present the second time, so now
being absent [(cf. p. 317' top); al. render (cf. R. V.
mrg.) fi.s- if f were present the second time, even though
I am nam ahsent'\. 2. cas with the word or words
forming the comparison is so subjoined to a preced-
ing verb that οΖτως must be mentally inserted before
the same. MHien thus used ir refers a. to the
manner ('form') of the action expressed by the finite
verb, and is equiv. to in the same manner as, afcr the
fashion of; it is joined in this way to the subject (uom.)
of the verb: Mt. vi. 29 ; vii. 29 ; xiii. 43 ; 1 Th. ii. 11 j
2 Pet. ii. 12 ; Jude 10, etc. ; to an ace. governed by the
verb : as αγαπάν τον πλτ/σίον σου 'os af αυτόν, Mt. xix. 19 ;
xxii. 39 ; Mk. xii. 31, 33 ; Lk. x. 27 ; Ro. xiii. 9 ; Gal. v.
14 ; Jas. ii. 8 ; ac'd, Philem. 1 7 ; Gal. iv. 14 ; [here many
(cf. R. V. mrg.) would bring in also Acts iii. 22 ; vii. 37
(cf. c. below)] ; or to another oblique case: as Phil. iL
22 ; to a subst. with a prep. : as i>s iv κρύπτω, Jn. viL
10 [Tdf. om. ώτ] ; ώς (V ήμίρα σφα-γηι, Jas. v. 5 [RG;
al. oni.iSf] ; iis διύ ^npSt, Ileb. xi. 29 ; add, Mt. xxvi. 55;
Mk. .xiv. 48; Lk. .x.xii. 52; Ro. .xiii. 13; Ileb. iii. 8;
when joined to a nom. or an ace. it can be rendered like,
(Jike) as, (Lat. instar, veluti) : Mt. x. 16; Lk. xxi. 35;
x.xii. 31 ; 1 Co. iu. 10 ; 1 Th. v. 4 ; 2 Tim. ii. 17 ; Jas. L
10 ; 1 Pet. v. 8 ; 2 Pet. iii. 10 ; κα\(1ν τα μη όντα tot όντα
(see καλ€ω, 1 h.β■ sub fin.), Ro. iv. 17. b. iis joined
to a verb makes reference to the 'substance' of the
act expressed by the verb, i. e. the action designated by
the verb is itself said to be done ώί, in like manner
{Just) as, something else : Jn. xv. 6 (for to βάλλισθαί
ΐξΐύ is itself the very thmg which is declared to ha])pen
[i.e. the unfruitful disciple is 'cast forth' just as the
severed branch is 'cast forth']) ; 2 Co. iii. 1 [Lchm. &s
[π€ρ]] ; generally, however, the ])hrase ώί καΙ is employed
[W. § 5.•!, .5], 1 Co. ix. 5 ; xvi. 10 [here ν\ΊΙ txt. om. και'] ;
Eph. ii. 3 ; 1 Th. v. 6 [L Τ Tr WII om. καί] ; 2 Tim. iii.
9; Ileb. iii. 2; 2 Pet. iii. 16. c. ir makes refer-
ence to similarity or equality, in such expres-
sions as ΐΐναι ώϊ τίνα, i. e. ' to be like ' or 'equal to' one,
Mt. xxii. 30; .xxviii. 3; Mk. vi. 34; xii. 25; Lk. ν1.40;
.xi. 44; xviii. 11; xxii. 26 sq. ; Ro. ix. 27; 1 Co. vii. 7,
29-31 ; 2 Co. ii. 1 7 ; 1 Pet. i. 24 ; 2 Pet. iii. 8 ; ϊνα μη i>s
κατ ανάγκην το άγπθόν σου jj, that thy benefaction may not
be like sonietliiug extorted by force, Philem. 14 ; γίνισβαι
S>s Tiva, Mt. X. 2.5 ; xviii. 3 ; Lk. xxii. 26 ; Ro. ix. 2:i ; 1 Co.
iv. 13; ix. 20-22 [in vs. 22 TTrWHom. LTrmrg.br.
ώί]; Gal. iv. J2; μίν^ιν ω: τίνα, 1 Co. vii. 8 ; ποιάν τίνα
ωίτινα. l.k. XV. 19 ; passages in which ίστίν, ην, ων (or
ό ων) is left to be supplied by the reader : as η φωνή
αϋτοΰ ώί φωνή ΰίάτων. Rev. i. 15 ; υφθάΚμου!, SC. όνταί.
Rev. ii. IS; πίστιν sc. οίσαν, Mt. xvii. 20; Lk. xvii. 6;
add, Rev. iv. 7; ix. 2, 5, 7-9, 17; .x. 1 ; xii. 15; xiii. 2;
xiv. 2; XX. 8; xxi. 21 ; Acts iii. 22; vii. 37, [many (cf.
R. V. mrg.) refer these last two pass, to a. above] ; .x.
1 1 ; xi. 5, etc. ; before is one must sometimes supply
τί, ' something like' or 'having the appearance of this
or that : thus ώε θαΚασσα, i. e. something having the ap-
pearance of [R. V. as it were] a sea, Rev. iv. (i G LTTr
WII ; viii. 8 ; ix. 7 ; xv. 2, (so in imitation of the Hebr.
3, cf. Deut. iv. 32; Dan. x. 18; of. Gesenius, Thes. p.
648" [Soph. Lex. s. v. 2]) ; passages where the compar-
ison is added to some adjective : as, {r/irjs ώί, Mt. ,xii. 13 ;
XfuKa is, Mt. xvii. 2; Mk. ix. 3 [R L] ; add, Heb. xii. 16;
Rev.i. 14; vi.l2; viii. 10; x. 9 ; xxi. 2; .xxii. 1. cL
us so makes reference to the quality of a person,
\liiri, .^r action, as to be equiv. to such as, exactly like, a»
ω?
681
ax
it were ; Germ, ah ; and a. to a quality wliich
really belongs to the person or tiling: in ϊξυυσίαν
(χωι>, Alt. vii. 29; Mk, i, 22; ως μονο-γςνονς παρά πατρός,
Jn. i. 14 ; add, [(L Τ Tr WH in ΛΙΐ. v. 4« ; vi. 5, l(i)j ;
Acts xvii. 22 ; Ro. vi. 13 [here L Τ Tr WH ώσεί] ; xv.
15 ; 1 Co. iii. 1 ; vii. 25 ; 2 Co. vi. 4 ; xi. 16 ; Eph. v. 1,
8, 15; Col. iii. 12; 1 Th. il. 4 ; 1 Tim. v. 1 sq. ; 2 Tim.
ii. 3; Tit. i. 7; Philem. 9, 16 [Λvhere cf. Bp. Lghtft.] ;
Heb. iii. 5 sq. ; vi. 19; xi. 9; xiii. 17; 1 Pet. i. 14, 19; ii.
2, 5, 11; iii. 7; iv. 10, 15 sq. 19 [11 G]; 2 Pet. i. 19; 2 Jn.
5; .Jas. ii. 12 : Rev. i. 17; v. 6 ; xvi. 21 ; xvii. 12, etc.;
ώί ούκ αδήλως sc. τριχών, as one Λνΐιο is not running
etc. 1 Co. ix. 26 ; concisely, as t'$ (ίλικρινίίας and «κ
ueni sc. λαλοίντΕΓ, borrowed from the neighboring
\αλοϋμ(ν, 2 Co. ii. 17; τινά ως τίνα or τι after verbs
of esteeming, knowing, declaring, etc. [W.
§§ 32, 4 b. ; 59, 6] : as, after XoyifeiK, \ο-γίζ(σθαι, Ro.
viii. 36 ; 1 Co. iv. 1 (where ούτως precedes) ; 2 Co. -x.
2; ήγ(Ίσθαι, 2 Th. iii. 15 ; ίχαν, Mt. xiv. 5; xxi. 26, 46
[but here L Τ Tr λΥΙΙ re.ad ,Ις (rf. ίχω, I. 1 f.)], (τινάς
ώς θιονς. Εν. Nicod. c. 5) ; άποδ^ικννναι, 1 Co. iv. 9 ;
παραβάλλιιν [or όμοιοϋν ((|. v.)]^Mk. iv. 31 ; διαβάλλ^ιν,
pass. Lk. xvi. 1 ; Άίγχ^ίν, pass. Jas. ii. 9 ; (ΰρίσκ^ιρ, pass.
Phil. ii. 7 (8). p. to a quality which is supposed,
pretended, feigned, assumed: ως αμαρτωλός κρί-
νομαι, Ro. iii. 7 ; ώί πονιφάν, Lk. vi. 22 ; add, 1 Co. iv. 7 ;
viii. 7 ; 2 Co. vi. 8-10 ; xi. 15 sq. ; xiii. 7 ; 1 Pet. ii. 12 ;
frequently it can be renilered as if, ax ihough. Acts iii.
12 ; xxiii. 15, 20 ; xxvii. .iO ; 1 Co. v. 3 ; 2 Co. x. 14 ; xi.
17; Col. ii. 20; Ileb. xi. 27; xiii. 3; {'πιστολ^ί ώς δι
ημών, sc. γιγραμμ^νης, 2 Th. ii. 2. 3. ώς with the
gen. absol. presents the matter spoken of — either as
the belief of the writer, 2 Co. v. 20 ; 2 Pet. i. 3 ; or as
some one's erroneous opinion : 1 Co. iv. 18; 1 Pet. iv. 12;
cf. W. § 65, 9 ; [B. § 145, 7 ; esp. § 144, 22]. In gen-
eral, by the use of ώς the matter spoken of is presented —
either as a mere matter of opinion : as in ω? ϊξ ί'ργων
sc. 6 *ϊσραή\ νόμον δικαιοσύνης ΐδίωζΐν, Ro. ix. 32 (where
it marks the imaginary character of the help the
Israelites relied on, they thought to attain righteous-
ness in that way [A. V. as it were hij works']); — or
as a purpose: πορ^ύισθαι ως em θάλασσαν, that, as
they intended, he might go to the sea, Acts xvii. 14, cf.
Meyer ad loc. ; W. 617 (573 sq.), [but L Τ Tr WH
read ίως, as far as to etc.] ; — or as merely the thought
of the writer : Gal. iii. 16 ; before δη, 2 Co. xi. 21 ; — or
as the thought and pretence of others : also before on,
2 Th. ii. 2 : cf. W. u. s. ; [B. § 149, 3 ; on ώί on in 2 Co.
V. 19 (A. V. to wit) see W. and B. II. cc. (cf. Esth. iv.
14 ; Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 11, 1 and Miiller's note ; L. and .S.
s. V. G. 2; Soph. Lex. s. v. 7)]; ώς άν, as if, as though,
2 Co. X. 9 [cf. W. 310 (291) ; but cf. Soph. Le.x. s. v. 1,
and see άν, Ιλ'.]. 4. ώς lias its own verb, with which
it forms a complete sentence ; a. ώί with a finite
verb is added by way of illustration, and is to be trans-
lated lis, just as, (Lat. sinit, eo mmln ηηη) : Eph. vi. 20;
Col. iii. 18 ; iv. 4 : 1 Pet. iii. G : 2 Pet. ii. 1 ; 1 Jn. i. 7 ;
Rev. ii. 28 (27) [this ex. is referred by some (cf. R. V.
mrg.) to 2 a. above] ; vi. 13 ; ix. 3 ; xviii. 6 [here ώς και;
the ex. seems to belong under 2 b. above], in phrases
in which there is an appeal — either to the O. T. (ώί
yίypaπτaι), Mk. i. 2 [here Τ Tr AVH καθώς] ; vii. 6 ; Lk.
iii. 4 ; Acts xiii. 33 ; or in general to the testimony of
others. Acts xvii. 28; xxii. 5; xxv. 10; Ro. ix. 25• 1
Co. X. 7 R (i (cf. ώσπ-φ, b.). in phrases like ποιΛψ
ώς προσίταξίν or avvira^fv. etc. : Mt. i. 24; xxvi. 19;
xxviii. 15; Lk. xiv. 22 [here TTrt.\t. WH 5]; Tit. i.
5; likewise, Mt. viii. 13; xv. 28; Rev. x. 7; sc. γίνηθή-
τωμοι, Mt. xxvi. 39. in short parenthetic or inserted
sentences : ώς (ΐώθ(ΐ, Mk. χ. 1 ; ώς ίνομ'ίζ€το, Lk. iii. 23 ;
ώς λογίζομαι, 1 Pet. v. 12; ώί ίπολαμβάνιτι, Acts ii. 15;
ώϊ λίγουσιν, Rev. ii. 24; ώι άν η•/(σθί, [R. V. howsoever
lie might be led] utcunque agebamini [cf. B. § 139, 13;
383 sq. (329) ; W. §42, 3 a.], 1 Co. xii. 2. ώί serves
to add an explanatory extension [and is rendered in
A. V. how (that)] : Acts x. 38 ; τήν . . . ίπακοήν, ώς etc.
2 Co. vii. 15 ; τοΰ λόγου του κυρίου, ώς €ίπ€ν αυτώ, Lk.
xxii. 61 ; τοϋ ρήματος, ώς O\.eyev, Acts \i. 16, (Xen. Cyr.
8, 2, 14; an. 1, 9, 11); cf. Bornemann, Schol. ad Luc.
p. 141. b. ώϊ is used to present, in the form of a
comparison, a motive which is urged upon one, — as
αφ€ς ημίν τα οφ^ιληματα ημών, ώς και ήμίϊς άφήκαμξν (R G
άφί(μ(ν) κτλ. (for which Lk. xi. 4 gives κα'ι γαρ αϋτοι
άφίομ€ν), Mt. vi. 12, — or which actuates one, as χάριρ
ίχω τω θΐψ . . . ώί άδιάλίίπτον ίχω τήν πιρί σου pveiuv,
2 Tim. i. 3 (for the dear remembrance of Timothy moves
Paul's gratitude to God) ; [cf. Jn. xix. 33 (cf. II. a. he-
low)] ; in these examples ώί has almost the force of a
causal particle; cf. Klolz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 766 ; [L. and
S. s. v. B. IV.; W. 448 (417)]. o. ώί adds in a
rather loose way something which serves to illustrate
what precedes, and is etjuiv. to the case is as though
[R. V. it is as irhen] : Mk. xiii. 34, where cf. Fritzsche
p. 587 ; unless one prefer, with Meyer et al., to make it
an instance of anantapodoton [cf. A. V. ' For the Son
of Man is as a man ' etc.] ; see ωσπιρ, a. fin. 5. ac-
coriling as: Ro. xii. 3 ; 1 Co. iii. 5; Rev. .xxii. 12. 6.
ώί, like the Germ, iine, after verbs of reading, nar-
rating, testifying, and the like, introduces that
which is read, narrated, etc. ; hence it is commonly said
to be equivalent to on (cf. Klolz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 765);
but there is this difference between the two, that on ex-
presses the thing itself, ώί the mode or quality
of the thing [hence usually rendered how], (cf. W. § 53,
9 ; [Meyer on Ro. i. 9 ; cf. L. and S. s. v. B. L]) : thus
after άναγινώσκ(ΐν, Mk. xii. 26 (where Τ Tr WH πώς) ;
Lk. vi. 4 [here Tr Wll br.ώf ; L txt. reads τΓωι] ; μνησβψ
ναί, Lk. xxiv. 6 [Lmrg. οσα]; θ^ασθαι, Lk. xxiii. 55;
ύπομνησαι, .Jude 5 [here on (not ώϊ) is the particle], 7
[al. regard ώί here as introducing a confirmatory illus-
tration of what precedes (A.V. even as etc.) ; cf. Huther,
or Bruckner's De Wette, ad loc] ; e'lSe'vai, Acts .\. 38;
Ro. xi. 2 ; 1 Th. ii. 1 1 ; Ιπίστασθαι. Acts x. 28 [here many
(cf. R. V. mrg.) connect ώί with the adj. immediately
following (see 8 below)]; xx. 18, 20; άπαγγίλλιιν. I.k.
viii. 47 ; ϊξηγΰσθαι, Lk. xxi v. 35 ; μάρτυς, Ro. i. 9 [here
€09
682
oarrep
ύ. connect as with the word which follows it (of. 8
below)]; Phil. i. 8. 7. ij before numerals denotes
nearly, about : as, ώί δισχΛιοι, Mk. v. 13 ; add, Mk. viii.
9; Lk. ii. 37(here Ll'TrWIl cas); viii. 42; Jn. i. 39
(40); [iv. 6 LTTrWll]; vi. 19 (here Lchm. ώσ«) J
jd.l8; [xix. 39GLTTrWH]; xxi.8; Acts i. Ιό [Tdf.
iiret]; V. 7, [30 LTTr WUJ ; xiii. [18 (yet not \VH
txt.) ; cf. καί, I. 2 f.], -'0 ; xix. 34 [WH ώσίί] ; Rev. viii.
I, (3, 1 S. xi. 1 ; xiv. 2, etc.) ; for exx. fr. Grk. writ,
see Passow s. v. vol. ii. p. •.'l)31i>; [L. and S. s. v. E;
Soph. Lex. s. V. 3]. 8. as is prefixed to adjectives
and adverbs, and corresponds to the Lat. quam, how.
Germ, roie, (so fr. Horn, down) : i>s ωραίοι, Ro. x. 15 ;
add, Ro. xi. 33; ώι όσι'ωΓ, 1 Th. ii. 10, (Ps. Ixxii. (lx.\iii.)
1) ; Avith a superlative, as much as can he : as τάχιστα,
as quickly as pnssiUe (ycry often in prof, auth.). Acts
xvii. 15; cf. V'lgsr.eA. Herman», pp. 5G2, 850; Pa.?sow
ii. 2 p. 263 li• bot. ; [L. and S. s. v. Ab. III.].
H. o)t as a particle of time; a. as, tchen,
since ; Lat. ut, cum, [W. § 41 b. 3, 1 ; § 58, 8] : with the
indie, ok St ΐπορίίοντο, Mt. xxviii. 8 (9) ; Mk. ix. 21 [Tr
mrg. ('I oi] ; Lk. i. 23, 41, 44 ; ii. 15, 39 ; iv. 25 ; v. 4 ;
vii. 12; xi. 1 ; xv. 25; xix. 5, 29; xxii. 66; xxiii. 26;
xxiv. 32 ; Jn. ii. 9, 23 ; iv. 1, 40, [45 Tdf.] ; vi. 12, 16;
vii. 10; viii. 7; xi. 6, 20, 29, 32 sq. ; xviii. 6 ; [cf. xix.
33 (see I. 4 b. above)] ; xx. 11 ; xxi. 9; Acts i. 10 ; v.
24 ; vii. 23 ; viii. 30 ; ix. 23 ; x. 7, 1 7, 25 ; xiii. [18 WH
txt. (see L 7 above)], 25, 29 ; xiv. 5; xvi. 4, 10, 15 ; xvii.
13; xviii. 5; xix. 9, 21; xx. 14, 18; xxi. 1, 12, 27; xxii.
II, 25; XXV. 14; xxvii. 1, 27; xxviii. 4, (Horn. II. 1,
600; 2, 321 ; 3, 21 ; Ildt. 1, 65, 80; Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 4.
8. 20; often in the O. T. Apocr. esp. 1 Mace. ; cf. Wahl,
Clavisapocr. V. T.,s. V. rV.e. p. 507 sq.). b. while,
when, (Lat. dum, quando") : Lk. .\.x. 37 ; as long as, while,
Jn. [ix. 4 Tr mrg. Wll mrg. (cf. ίως, L 2)] ; xii. 35, [30],
LTTrWH [(cf. ίωί,ιι. s.)]; Lk. .xii. 58; Gal. vi. 10
[here A.V. as (so R.\'. in Lk. 1. c.) ; Τ WH read the siibj.
(as we may hare etc.) ; Meyer (on Jn. xii. 35 ; Gal. 1. c.)
everywhere denies the meaning ichile ; but cf. L. and S.
β. V. Β. V. 2. ; Bp. Lghtf t. on Gal. 1. c.]. c. «or άν, as
$oon as : with the subj. pres. Ro. xv. 24 [A. V. here
whensoever^ ; with the 2 aor. subj. having the force of
the fut. perf., 1 Co. xi. 34 [Ii. V. whensoeverl ; Phil. ii.
23. [Cf. B. 232 (200) ; W. § 42, 5 a. ; Soph. Lex. s. v.
6•]
HI. ώί as a final particle (Lat. ut), in order that,
in order to [cf. Gildersleece in Am. Journ. of Philol. No.
16, p. 419 sq.]: foil, by an inf. [(cf. B. 244 (210); W. 318
(299) ; Kriiger § 65, 3, 4), Lk. ix. 52 L mrg. WH] ; Acts
XX. 24, (3 Mace. i. 2 ; 4 Mace. xiv. 1) ; <bs ίποί tlnew,
so to sa;t (see f'rroi», 1 a.), Heb. vii. 9 [L mrg. fin-iw].
IV. ώί as a consecutive particle, introducing a
consequence, so that : so (ace. to the less freq. usage)
with the indie. (Hdt. 1, 163; 2, 135; W. 462 (431)),
Heb. iii. 11; iv. 3, (Ilebr. -^ύ», Ps. .xciv. (xcv.) 11);
[but many interpp. question this sense with the indie,
(the exx. fr. Hdt. are not parallel), and render «t in
Heb. U. cc. as (so R. V.)].
lirowii [see WIT. Intr. § 408 ; but L Τ ώσ•. ; Bee /W/.
Proleg. p. 107], (derived from Ps. cxvLi. (cxviii.j 25
Hi Π;•"Π1Π, i.e. 'save, I pray', Sept. σωσον δή; [in
form the word seems to be the Greek reproduction of
an abbreviated pronunciation of the Hebr. (Xj-^'iyin) ;
al. would make it Kj;|i;;iN ('save us'); ci. Hilgenfeld,
Evang. sec. Ilebraeos (ed. alt. 1884) p. 25 and p. 122;
/fautot/i. Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 173]), hosanna; be
propitious: Mt. xxi. 9; Mk. xi. 9 sq. ; Jn. xii. 13; with
τω υίώ Δαυίδ added, be propitious to the Messiah, Mt.
xxi. !l, 15, [cf. ωσαννά τω θ(ω Δα/3ί8, 'Teaching' 10, β
(where see Ilurnaik's note)].*
ώχ-αύτωϊ, (ώί and αϋτωί), adv., [as a single word, Post-
Homeric], in tike manner, likewise : put after the verb,
Mt. XX. 5 ; x.\i. 30, 36 ; put before the verb, Mk. xiv. 31 ;
Lk. xui. 3 (here L TTr WH όμο.'ωί), 5 (TTrtxt. WH) ;
Ro. viii. 26 ; 1 Tim. v. 25 ; Tit. ii. 6 ; as often in Grk.
writ, the verb must be supplied from the preceding con-
te.\t, Mt. x.w. 17; Mk. .xii. 21 ; Lk. x.x. 31 ; xxii. 20 [WH
reject the pass.] ; 1 Co. xi. 25 ; 1 Tim. ii. 9 (sc. βονλομαι,
cf. S) ; iii. 8 (sc. del, cf. 7), 11 ; Tit. ii. 3 (sc. πρίπα
(ivai).
ύσ -il, (ώϊ and ft [Tdf. Proleg. p. 110]), adv., fr. Horn.
down, prop, as if, i. e. a. as it were (had been), as
though, as, like as, like: Mt. iii. 16; i,\. 36 [Treg. lot] ;
Lk. iii. 22 (L Τ Tr AVH ur) ; Acts ii. 3 ; vi. 15 ; ix. 18
[L Τ Tr "Wll ώϊ] ; Ro. vi. 13 L Τ Tr AVH ; Heb. i. 12 ;
also Rec. in Mk. i. 10; Jn. i. 32 ; yivfaSai waei, Mt. xxviii.
4 R G; Mk. ix. 26 ; Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. Wll reject the
pass.]; eivai aaei, Mt. xxviii. 3 [LTTrWII cJt], and
Rec. in Heb. xi. 12 and Rev. i. 14; φαίνισθαι ώσίί τι, to
appear like a thing, Lk. xxiv. 11. b. about, nearly;
o. before numerals: Mt. xiv. 21 ; Lk. i. 56 [RG]; iii.
23; ix. 14, 28; xxii. 41,59; xxiii. 44 ; Jn. vi. 10[RGL
(al. is)] ; Acts ii. 41 ; iv. 4 [R G] ; x. 3 [in L Τ Tr WH
it is strengthened here by the addition of π(ρϊ] \ xix. 7 ;
also, Rec. in iMk. vi. 44 ; R G in Jn. iv. ; xix. 1 4 [G ?],
39 ; Acts V. 30 ; Lchm. in Jn. vi. 19, (Judg. iii. 29 : Neh.
vii. 06; Xen. Hell. 1, 2, 9; 2,4, 25). β. before a
measure of space : ώσίϊ "ΚΊΘου βολήν, Lk. xxii. 41.*
'a<n\{ [GTTr, but RL 'ί2σ•.; see WH. Intr. §408;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 107], (yiVin 'deliverance'), o, Hosea, a
well-known Hebrew prophet, son of Beeri and contem-
porary of Isaiah (ITos. i. 1 sq.) : Ro. ix. 25.*
<3<r-n-€p, ([cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 1 10] ; fr. i,t and the enclit.
particle ntp. which, "in its usual way, augments and
brings out the force of i>s" Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 708;
see πίρ), adv., [fr. Horn, down], just as, even as ; a.
in a protasis with a finite verb, and followed by οΰτωΓ or
οΰτωί και in the apodosis [cf. W. §§ 53, 5 ; 60, 5] : Mt.
xii. 40; xiii. 40; xxiv. 27,37 sq. 38 (LT Tr [cf. urinit.J
WH is) ; Lk. xvii. 24 ; Jn. v. 21, 26 ; Ro. v. 19, 21 ; vi.
4, 19 ; xi. 30 : 1 Co. xi. 12 ; xv. 22 ; xvi. 1 ; 2 Co. i. 7 (here
L Τ Tr WH if) ; Gal. iv. 29 ; Eph. v. 24 [L Τ Tr WH
I ώϊ] ; Jas. ii. 26 ; Σισπιρ . . . Ινα και ([cf. W. § 43, 5 a. ;
i B. 241 (208) ; cf. ΐνα. Π. 4 b.]), 2 Co. viii. 7; fiXoyia»
... 4τοΙμην fival [cf. W. § 44, 1 c] ovTms ώί €v\oy'iav κάΙ
I μη ωσπ(ρ etc. ' that your bounty might so be ready as a
ixrjrepei
683
ώφέΧι,μοί
matter of bounty and not as if* etc. 2 Co. Lx. 5 [but only
Rec. reads ωαιτ(ρ, and even so the example does not
etrictly belong under this head] ; the apodosis which
should have been introduced by οίτωί is wanting [W.
§ 64, 7 b.; p. 5ϋ9 (530) ; cf. B. § VA, 12 and 23 g.] : l\o.
T. 12 Inhere vvhat Paai subjoined in vs. 13 sq. to prove the
truth of his statement πάντ^ί ημαρτον, prevented him
from adding the apodosis, which had it corresponded
accurately to the terms of the protasis would have run
as follows : οντω κιη St' fVos άκί^μώπου ή δικαιοσίνη (is τόκ
κόσμοι- (Ιση\θ€ καΧ δια της ϋικαιοσύΐ'η! ή ζωη' «αϊ οντω! els
itcanai ανθρώπου! ή ζωη δΐίλίΰσίται, ίφ' φ ■names δ«αίω-
θήσονται; this thought he unfolds in vs. 15 sqcj. in an-
other form); Mt. xxv. 14 (here the extended detaUs of
the parable caused the writer to forget the apodosis
which he had in mind at the beginning; [cf. as, I•
4 c.]). b. it stands in close relation to what pre-
cedes : Mt. V. 48 (LTTrWHii); vi. 2, .5 (LTTr
Wilis). '. 16(LTTr\VHiy)•, xx. 28 ; xxv. 32 ; Acts
iii. 17; xi. 15; iCo. viii. 5; iTh. v.3; Heb. iv. 10; vii.
27 ; lx. 25 ; Rev. x. 3 ; ώσττίρ -γίγραπται. 1 Co. χ. 7 L Τ
Tr WII ; dpi ωσπ(ρ τις. Ιο be of one'-i sorl or class (not
quite identical in meaning with ms or tiaei tis, to he like
one [cf. Bengel ad loc.]), Lk. xviii. 11 [but L Tr WH
mrg. (as] ; γίνομαι. Acts ii. 2 (the gen. is apparently not
to be explained by the omission of ήχος, bat rather as
gen. absoi. ; Just as when a viirjhitj wind Olows, i. e. just
as a sound is made when a mighty wind blows [R.\. as
of the rushing of a mighty winil^) ; ΐστω σοί &antp ά
iBviKos κτλ. let him be regarded by thee as belonging to
the number of etc. Mt. xviii. 17.*
M<r-irep.<C, {ωσπιρ and d [_Tdf. Proleg. p. 110]), adv.,
fr. Aeschyl. down, as, as it were : 1 Co. xv. 8.*
Λ7-τ€, (fr. ώϊ and the encUt. τι \Tdf. Proleg. p. 110]),
a consecutive conjunction, i.e. expressing conse-
quence or result, fr. Horn, down, cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii.
2 p. 770 sqq. ; W. § 41 b. 5 N. 1 p. 301 (282 sq.) ; [B.
§ 139, 50]; 1. so that, [A. V. frequently insomuch
Mai]; a. with an inf. (or ace. and inf.) [B. § 142,
3; the neg. in this construction is μη, Β. § 148, 6 ; W.
480 (447)] : preceded by the deraonstr. οΖτως, Acts xiv.
1 ; τοσοϋτος, Mt. xv. 33 (so many loaves as to fill etc.) ;
without a demonstr. preceding (where ώστΓ defines
more accurately the magnitude, extent, or quantity),
Mt. viii. 24, 28; xii. 22; xiii. 2, 32, 54; xv. 31 ; .xxvii.
14; Mk.i. 27,45; ii.2, 12; iii. 10,20; iv. 1,32, 37; ix.
26 ; XV. 5; Lk. v. 7; xii. 1 ; Acts i. 19; v. 15; xv. 39;
.tvi.26; xix. 10,12,16; Ro.vii.6; xv.l9; lCo.i.7; v.
I; xiii. 2; 2 Co. i.8; ii. 7; iii. 7; vii. 7; Phil i. 13; 1
Th. L 7 sq. ; 2 Th. i. 4 ; ii. 4 ; Heb. xiii. 6 ; 1 Pet. i. 21 ;
it b used also of a designed result, so as to i. q. in
order to, for to, Mt. x. 1 ; xxiv. 24 [their design] ; χχ\•ϋ.
1 ; Lk. iv. 29 (Rec. «'s το) ; ix. 52 [L mrg. AVH <as, q. v.
III.] ; and L Τ Tr WII in Lk. xx. 20 [R G «V Td], (1
Mace. i. 49 ; iv. 2, 28 ; x. 3 ; 2 -Alacc. ii. 6 ; Thuc. 4, 23 ;
Xen. Cyr. 3, 2, 16; Joseph, antt. 13, 6, 10; £us. h.e. 3,
28, 3 [cf. Soph. Lex. β. v. 5]) ; cf. W. 318 (298) ; B. § 1 39,
50 Rem. b. so that, with the indicative [B. 244
(210) ; cf. AV. 301 (283) ; Meyer or Ellieott on GaL
as below] : Gal. ii. 13, and often in prof. auth. ; preceded
by ούτως, Jn. iii. 16. 2. so then, therefore, wherefore:
with the indie, (cf. Passow s. v. II. 1 b., vol. ii. p. 2639*•;
[L. and S. s. v. B. II. 2 ; the neg. in this constr. is ού,
Β. § 148, 5]), Mt. xii. 12 ; xix. C ; xxiii. 31 ; Mk. ii. 2fS ;
X. 8 ; Ro. vii. 4, 12 ; .\ui. 2 ; 1 Co. iii. 7 ; vii. 38 ; xi. 27 ;
xiv. 22 ; 2 Co. iv. 12 ; v. IG sq. ; Gal. iii. 9, 24 ; iv. 7, 1« ;
once with a hortatory subj. 1 Co. v. 8 [here L mrg. ind.].
before an imperative: 1 Co. iii. 21; [iv. 5]; x. 12; xi.
33 ; xiv. 39 ; xv. 58; Phil. ii. 12 ; iv. 1; 1 Th. iv. 18;
Jas. i. 19 [L Τ Tr WII read urrt ; cf. p. 1 74' top] ; 1 Pet.
iv. 19.»
ώτάριον. ^ov. TO. (dimin. of oJr, <1tOs; cf. γοναικάριο»
[W. 24, 9b (:a)]), i. q. iiTiov (q. v.), the ear : Mk. xiv.
47 L TTr WII ; Jn. xviii. 10 TTr WH. (Anthol. 11,
70, 2; Anaxandrides ap. .\then. 3, p. 95 c.) *
ώτίον, -ου. τό, (dimin. of ols, ωτός, but without the
dimin. force ; " the speech of common life applied the
diminutive form to most of the parts of the body, as τα
ρινία the nose, ro όμμάηον, στηβϋιην, χ€λΰνιον, σαρκίον
the body" Lob. ad Phryn. p. 211 sq. [cf. W. 25 (24)]),
a later Greek word, the ear: Mt. xxvi. 51 ; Mk. xiv. 47
[ R t- ( ■ . ά 'φίοΐ')'\ ; Lk. xxii. 51 ; Jn. .xviii. 10 [R G L
[ei. ώτάριον)}, 26. (Sejjt. for ;!S, Deut. xv. 17; 1 S. ix.
15 ; XX. 2, 13 ; 2 S. xxii. 45 ; Is. 1. 4 ; Am. iii. 12.) *
ώφί'λίΐα [WII -λία (cf. I, i)], -as, ή, (ώφ(\ης), fr. [Soph,
and] Ildt. down, usefulness, adcanlage, proft : Ro. iii. 1 ;
T^s ώφ6λ«'α5 χάριν (Polyb. 8, 82, 8 [;et in the sense of
'booty']), Jude 16. (Job xxii. 3; Ps. xxix. (xxx.)
lo.r'
ώφίλί'ω, -ω; fut. ωφ(\ήσω ; 1 aor. ωφίΚησα : Pass., pres.
ωφίΧονμαί ; 1 aor. α>φ(\ί}θην \ 1 fut. ωφ(\ηθήσομαι (Mt.
xvi. 26 LTTr WII); (όφeλos) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down; Sept. for ^•;•ιη; to assist, to be useful or advan-
tageous, to profit : absol. Ro. ii. 25 ; with ace. olhiv, to be
of no use, to effect nothing, Mt. xxvii. 24 ; Jn. vi. 63 ; xii.
19, [in these exx. (Jn. vi. 63 excepted) Α.Ύ. prevaiq-,
Ttra, to help or profit one, Heb. iv. 2 ; ηνά τι Ιο help, profit,
one in a thing ([but the second ace. is a cognate ace. or
the ace. of a neut. adj. or pron.; cf. W. 227 (213;] so fr.
Ildt. 3, 126 down) : oiSiv τίνα, 1 Co. xiv. 6; Gal. v. 2;
τί ωφ(\ήσ(ΐ [or ωφ(\(Ί (τον)] άνβρατπον, iav κτλ.; [(Τ
WH follow with an inf.)], what will (or ' doth ') it profit
a man if etc. [(or ' to' etc.)] ? Mk. viii. 36 ; pass. ώφίλοΟ-
μαι, to he helped or profited : Heb. xiii. 9 ; with ace. μη8ίν,
Mk. V. 26 ; ol8fi>, 1 Co. xiii. 3 ; with ace. of the interrog.
W, Mt. xvi. 26 : Lk. ix. 25 [here WII mrg. gives the
act.] ; Ti ΐκ tivos (gen. of pers.), to be jirofited by one
in some particular [cf. Mey. on Mt. as below ; «, Π. 5],
Mt. XV. 5: Mk. vii. 11.•
ώφί'λιμοϊ, -ov, (ώφΛ/ω), profitable : τιν'ι (dat of advan•
tase), Tit. iii. 8 ; irpos rt (Plat, de rep. 10 p. 607 d. [W.
2Γ3 (200)1), 1 Tim. iv. 8; 2 Tim. iu. 16.•
APPENDIX.
PREFATORY REMARKS.
THE lists of words herewith subjoined, as an aid to researches involving the language of tbe
New Testament, require a few prelLminary remarks by way of explanation.
In the attempt to classify the vocabulary of the New Testament, words which occur in
secular authors down to and including Aristotle (who died B.C. 322) are regarded as belonging
to the classical period of the language, and find no place in the lists.
Words first met with between B.C. 322 and B.C. 150 are regarded as "Later Greek "and
registered in the list which bears that heading; but between B.C. 280 and B.C. 150 they have
" Sept." appended to them in case they also occur in that version.
Words which nrst appear in the secular authors between B.C. 150 and B.C. 100 and are also
found in the Septuagint are credited to " Biblical Greek " (list 1 p. 693), but with the name of
the secular author added.
Words which first appear between B.C. 100 and a.d. 1 are registered solely as " Later Greek."
Words which first occur between a.d. 1 and a.d. 60 are enrolled as " Later Greek," but
with the name of the author appended.
Words which appear first in the secular authors of the last half of the first century of our
era have an asterisk prefixed to them, and are enrolled both in the list of "Later Greek"
and in the list of "Biblical Greek."
A New Testament word credited to Biblical Greek, if not found in the Septuagint but
occurring in the Apocryphal books of the Old Testament, is so designated by an appended
'' Apocr." '
Whenever a word given in either the Biblical or the Later Greek list is also found in the
Anthologies or the Inscriptions, that fact has been noted (as an intimation that such word
may possibly be older than it appears to be) ; and if the word belong to " Later Greek," the
name of the oldest determinate author in which it occurs is also given.
The New Testament vocabulary has thus been classified according to hard and fast
chronological lines. But to obviate in some measure the incorrect impression which the rigor
of such a method might give, it will be noticed that a twofold recognition has been accorded
to words belonging to the periods in which the secular usage and the sacred may be supposed to
overlap : viz., for the period covered by the preparation of the Septuagint, for the fifty years
which followed its completion, and for the last half of the first Christian century. Nevertheless,
the uncertainty inseparable from the results no scholar will overlook. Indeed, the surprises
* It should be noted that in the following lists the term " Sept." is used in its rest ri ct ed sense to designate merely
the canonical books of the Greek Old Testament ; but in the body of the lexicon "Sept. "often includes all the
books ot the Greek version, — as well the apocryphal as the canonical. In the lists of words peculiar to individaal
writers an appended " fr. Sept." signifies that the word occurs only in a quotation from the Septuagint.
688
almost every ouo has experienced in investigating the age of some word in his vernacular which
has dropjjed out of use for whole stretches of time and then reappeared, may admonish him of
the precarious character of conclusions respecting the usage of an ancient language, of which
only fragmentary relics survive, and those often but imjierfectly examined. The rough and
problematical results here given are not without interest ; but they should not be taken for
more than they are worth.
The scheme of distribution adopted will be rendered more distinct by the subjoined
CHRONOLOGICAL CONSPECTUS.
Words in use before b.c. 322 are ranked as classical, and remain unregistered.
Words first used between B.C. 322 and B.C. 280 are enrolled as Later Greek-
ί receive a single enrolment but double notation, viz.
as Later Greek with Sept. usage Boted.
! receive a single enrolment but double notation, viz.
Tji 1• „1 /^ I -.1, 1 . ,
as Biblical Greek with secular usage noted.
Words first used between B.C. 100 and a.d. 1 are enrolled simply as Later Greek.
are enrolled as Later Greek but with the iiame of the
author appended.
receive a double enrolment, viz. both as Biblical and
Words first used betiveen a.d. 50 and a.d. 100 ^ as Later Greek (with asterisk prefixed and name
of secular author appended).
Words first used between a.d. 1 and a.d. 50 I
ί
The selection of the distinctive New Testament significations has not been so simple a
matter as might be anticipated : —
It is obvious that the employment of a word in a figure of speech cannot be regarded as
giving it a new and distinct signification. Accordingly, such examples as ά^ακλίνω in the
description of future blessedness (Mt. viii. 11), we/to? to designate the ever-changing doctrinal
currents (Eph. iv. 14), Λ-ταρχη of first converts (Ro. xvi. 5), ττόλις of the consummated kingdom
oi God (Heb. xiii. 14 etc.), σταυρόω as applied to the σαρξ (Gal. v. 24 etc.), χ^ίρ to denote God's
power (Lk. i. GG etc.), and similar uses, are omitted.
Again, the mere application of a word to spiritual or religious relations does not in general
amount to a new signification. Accordingly, such terms as -γινωσκαν θΐόν, δοΓλος Χριστον, ίττηρίτη•;
τοΰ λο'γοιι, λι'τροΓ and μαρΊνρίια ίη the Christian reference, /xeVw in St. John's phraseology, and
the like, have been excluded. Yet this restriction has not been so rigorously enforced as to
rule out such words as ίκΧΙ-γομαι, καλίω, κηρύσσω, κρίνω, ττροφ-ητίνω, and Others, in what would be
confessed on all hands to be characteristic or technical New Testament senses.
In general, however, the list is a restricted rather than an inclusive one.
An appended mark of interrogation indicates uncertainty owing to diversity of text. In
the lists of words peculiar to individual New Testament writers —
a. When the use of a word by an author (Or book) is unquestioned in any single passage
such word is credited to him without an interrogation-mark, even though its use be disputed by
some edition of the text in every other passage of that author.
b. When a word is found in one author (or book) according to all editions, but though
occurring in others is questioned there by some form of the text in every instance, it is credited
to the first, and the name of the others is appended in parenthesis with a question-mark.
689
c. When a word is found in two authors (or books), but in one of them staxids in a
quotation from the Septuagiut, it is credited to the one using it ac first hand, and its use by
tiie other is noted with " Sept." or " fr. Sept." appended.
d. A word which is found in but a single author (or book) is credited to the same with a
question-mark, even though its use be disputed by one or another form of the text in every
instance of its occurrence.
e. A word which is fouud in two or more authors (or books) yet is disputed by one or
another form of the text in every instance, is excluded from the lists altogether.
The monumental misjudgments committed by some who have made questions of authorship
turn on vocabulary alone will deter students, it is to be hoped, from misusing the lists
exhibiting the peculiarities of the several books.
Explanations which apply only to particular lists are given at the beginning of those lists.
Proper names of persons, countries, rivers, places, have been omitted.
In drawing up the lists free use has been made of the collections to be found in Winer's
Grammar, the various Introductions and Encyclopaedias, the articles by Professor Potwin in
the Bibliotheea Sacra for 1875, 1876, 1880, such works as those of Holtzmann on the Synoptical
Grospels and the Pastoral Epistles, and especially the copious catalogues given by Zeller in his
Theologische Jahrbucher for 1843, pp. 445-525.
In conclusion, a public expression of my thanks is due to W. W. Fenn, A. B., a student in
the Theological department of the University, for very efficient and painstaking assistance.
J. H. T.
CONTENTS.
PAOIi
L Later, i. e. posT-AKisTOTELiAif, Gkeek Woeds in the New Testament .... 61)1
IL Borrowed Words βΙ»ΐ'
1. Words borrowed from the Hebrew 61)1,'
2. Words borrowed from the Latin 69•'!
3. Words borrowed from other Foreign Tongues 69.'>
HL Biblical, i.e. New Testament, Greek 693
1. Biblical Words 69a
2. Biblical Significations 69ϋ
IV. Words pkculiar to Individual New Testament Writers ..,..,. 398
1. To Matthew 698
2. To Mark 699
3. To Luke 699
4. To all three Synoptists 703
6. To John 703
6. To Paul V04
a. To the Longer Epistles and Philemon 704
6. To the Pastoral Epistles 70(i
c. To both the Pastoral and the other Pauline Epistles . 707
7. To the Epistle to the Hebrews . 708
8. To James 708
9. To Peter 709
10. To Jude 709
11. To the Apocalypse 709
12. To the Apocalypse and the Fourth Gospel 710
f. Forms of Verbs 711
additions and Corrections 12S
APPENDIX.
LATEE, i•. POST-AEISTOTEUAli, GEEEK WOEDS Di THE NEW TESTAMSNX
N, B. For ezplaiiatloiie see the Fre&tory Bemarka.
άγνόημα
άδηλάτηί
aStaXeiiTTOig
αθΐσμοί
άθίτησί! Cicero
αθλησίί Pol)'b., Inacr
άκαιρίομοί
άκαταΚντοί
άκατάπανστοί
άκμασία
*άκρηατηριον ΡΙαΙ-
άκυράω
αλύ^αστρον (-^σρ H'it.)
άλίκτοροφωνία Aesop
Αλεξανδρινοί (ΟΓ -dpivot)
άλήθω Anthol.
αλλτ^γορίω Philo
αμαράντινο! Inscr.?
άμίτάθετος
aufTapOTiros
'αναγεννάω Josepb.
άνύδειζίς
ανάθεμα Anthol.
άναθεωρεω
avavrippTjTOi
αναντίρρητων
άναποΧάγητοΫ
'ανατάσσομαι Plat, f H^pt. Ό
άνάχνσις
'άνεπαίσχνντοί Joseph.
'άνθνττατενω Plut.
άνθύτταΓΟ! Inscr., Polyt
άντίδιατιθημι Philo
'avTi\oi^o(}itA Plot•
\\ιηιο^εύί
Ί'ιντΧημα Plot.
άΐΎοφθαΧα^
ανυποτακηπ
απαοάβαηχ
άπαρησμάί
άναύγασμα Fhilo
•ώτί ίραστοί Joseph.
'απεκδύομαι, Joseph•'/
ar(or άφ-)ε\πίζα>
άπερισττάστωι
'αποδεκτοί I'lut.
αποθησαύριζα
άποκαραδοκΐα
άπόκριμα Polyb•, Inner.
απολείχ^ω
άποτομία
άπο\ντρωσΐί
αποστασία Archhn.. SepU
άποφορτίζομαι Philo
'άπόχρησκ Plut.
απρόσιτος
Άραλ//• Strab.
άροτριάω
'άρπαγμός Plut.
άρτεμων Vitruv.
*άρ;(ΐίρατ«ΟΓ Joseph., Inscr.
Άσιάρχηί Strab., Insii
άσσάριον Anth., Dion. Hal.,
Inscr.
αστο;^€α>
αφθαρσία Philo
*άψ•ίΐ'ίοί Aret. {-ffuai X<»n.
on).
βαθεωί
'βαπτισμάί Joseph.
'βαπτιστή: .Toseph.
βιαστής Philo (βιατάί f*ind.;
'yayypatva Plut.
■γάζα TheophfT Inscr.
yonnrrri'u)
γραώδης Strab.
'γνμνητεύω Plut.
δεισιδαιμονία Polvb., In«;r.
'δεσιιοφϋλαξ Joseph
'δηνάριον Plut.
διαγνωοίζ<ύ Philo
διάταγμα Sap., InsCT.
διαυγάζω
διαφημίζω
διδακτικοί Philo
διερμηνεύω
διετία Philo, insr».
διθάΧασσος
δίψνχο! Philo
δονΧαγοϊγεω
δυσεντέριον {-ttpia U ΙρροπΓ.)
δυσερμήνεντος
εγκακεω ΟΓ fKKOxfm
εγκοττή ΟΓ ε'κκοπν
(θνάρχηι Philo
εθνικοί
εκδαπανάω
έκθαμβος
εκθανμάζω Sir.
εκνηφω AnthoL
εκπαλαι Philo
εκπληρωσις
εκτενεια
'εΧαφρία Aret.
ίλεημοσννη Sej't. (&^Β.)
ίΧευσίί
'εμμαίνομαι Joseph.
εμπλοκή
'ένδόμησις Joseph.
ενέργημα
'ενορκίζωΐ Joseph., Inset.
ενώπιον
'έξαρτίζω Joseph., toscr
εζισχνω
'εξορκιστής Joseph.
'εξυπνοί .Joseph.
'έπαγωνίζυμαι Pl'it-, Insi'T
'επαθροίζω Plut.
επάν (B.C. 265)
ΐτταρχία
επαφρίζω
•fVfi/SiiuJoseph.'.it'PoiTMi ι
έπιβαρεω Dion. Hal., Inscr
επιθανάτιος
Έπικονμειας
ενισκηνόω
'επισωρενν Ρΐπν
επιταγι'ι
επιχορηγεα
έτερόγλωσίΤΜ
ενθνδρομ^Λ
ενκαιρεω
εΰκοπος
'ευνουχίζω Joseph.
'ενποιια Joseph., Inmr
'ευπρόσδεκτος Plut.
'ενφτιχέω Joseph., AntboL.
Inscr.
ζεστός
ημιθανης AnthoL
ημιώριον
ήρεμος
"ϋρωδιανοί Jo8**Iitv.
θειύτης Philo
'θεόπνευστ(Λ PlnC, Or«b.
Sibj-L
'ΰεότης Plat.
θηριομαχε'ω
θρησκεία (■«ctQ Hilt.)
θριάμβευα
θΰϊνος
θυμομαχία
Ιερουργεω FhilOi 1η.«η
Ιματισμός
* 'λουδάϊκόί Joseph.
* ^ϊουδαΐκώί Joseph.
Ισότιμος Philo
'καθεξηί Plat, inac•
καθημεροιάς
κακονχέω
καταβαοίφ
καταβαρνν»
κατατ/ωνίζο^»
κατάκριμα
καταντάω
'κατάρησις P.ofc.
κατάστημα
Later Greek.
692
Borrowed Wobi>&
καταυγάζω ? ApoL. Kbod.,
Antliol.
*κατ€ vXoyew ? Plut.
κατηχιω
κατοπτρίζομω Philo
κανματίζίύ
καυστημιάζα ?
Κίνοδυξία
Kfi'Tvpiu)»
κ^ιψατκττηί
Κίΐ\ώνια {-via, etc.) Inscr.
κορβαν (-(Saras) .Ιϋ.«ι•ΐ)1ι.
κμάβαττοί Or κράββατο!
κρνητη
κτήτωρ Diod., Inscr., Antb.
κτίσμα
κωμόττοΚίί
'μαθητεύω Plut.
μαθητρία
'μάκίΧΚον Plut•
μαργαρίτης
' ματαιολογία Plut•
μ^θίρμηνξνω
*μ(συνράνημα Plut•
μξταμορφόω
μ(τριοπαθ(ω Pliilo
*μια(τμός Plut.
μίΧιυν
μορφόω Anth•
μόρφωοΊί
vapbos Anth.
'νΐίκρόω Plut., Anth., Inscr.
*νίκρωσα Aret.
vfinTepiKOS
νησίον
'ξίστηί'ί Joseph., Anthol.
ξυράω {ξυρίω Hdt.)
oUireia ? Strab., Inscr.
'οικιακό! Plut.
•o?ifoSr(nroTe» Pint.
οίκτίρμωρ Tlicocr., Sept.,
Anthol.
ονάριον
TraXiyyeKceria Philo
jTav&o\uov'i (-KfioKArStpti.)
ΐΓανδοχίύϊ ? (-Kfut Plato)
παρατήρησα EpigT•
παρα^ξίμασια
■jTcipeiaaKTOS
7Γαρ€ίσ€ρχ^ομαι
napfKTi'is
πατροπαράδοτο! Diod.,
liiscr. ,
π€ρίλάμπω
περιοχή
π(ρίπ(ίρ<ύ
1Τ(ρπ(ρ(ΰυμαι Μ. A&tonin.
ΒΌλλαπλασίωι»
*πολυμ(ρώ5 Joseph.
πολυτ/)όπ<ι)Γ Philo
νορισμάί
ποταπός (πυδαπός Aeschyl.)
*πραιτώριον .Joseph., Inscr.
πραύπάΰ^ια (-θία) ? Philo
'πρόγνωσα Plut., Anthol.
προΐλπίζω
προΐναγγ€λίζομαί Philo
'προκαταγγίλΧω Joseph.
προκοπή
'προσαίτης Plut.
προσανίχω ?
πρόσκαιρος
προσκΚηρόω Philo
πρόσκ\ισις ?
προσκοττη
'προσρήγνυμι Joseph.
προσφάτως
προφητικός Philo
ραδιοίιργημα
ξηγτως
μοιζηϋν
ρυμφαία Sept•
'σαββατισμός Plut.
'2αδδουκαιο> Joseph.
σαλπιστής Theophr., Inscr.
{-πίγκτης Thuc.)
σάπφίΐροί
σαροω
^ίβασμα
σιβαστός Strab., InsoT.
σημαόω
σηρικός
'σικάριος Joseph.
σίναπι
'σιτιστός Joseph.
σκοτία .Λ poll, lihod., Sept.,
Anthol.
σκΰβαΚου AnthoL, Strab.
σκω\ηκόβρωΊΟ!
στΓίλοω
στασιαστής ?
στρατολογία
στρατοπ€δάρχης
στρήνος Lycoph., Sept.,
Anthol.
*σνγγ(νίς ? Plut., Inscr.
σνγκατάθ(σις
'συγκατα^ηφί(•ν i'luU
σνγκληρονόμ,ος ίΊϋϋν
σνγχράομαι V
σνζήτησις ί
σνμβασιλ€ΰ<ύ
συμβούλιον ΙηβΟΓ•
σνμμ€ρίζω
σνμμορφος
σνμπνίγω
σνναθλίω
συνίκδημος Palaeph.
σννηλικιώτης Inscr.
συνκατανίυω t
*σννοδ(νω Plut.
σννυποκρίνομαι
ονστιαράσσω
συστατικός {-κώτίρον Ari*
tot.)
'συστασιαστήί ? Joseph.
συστοι^€ω
'σωματίκώς Plut.
σωφρονισμός Philo, Aesop
*ταπ€ίνοφροσννη Joseph.
ταχινός Theocr., Sept.
τάχιον
Τίλώνιορ
τίτράδιον Philo
'τίτραρχίω Joseph. ■
Τίτράρχης
τημώτ€ρος
τριετία
τρίστίγος
τροχιά Nicand., Sept^
Anthol.
*τυφωνικός Plut.
υίοθ(σία Diod., Il.scr.
ϋπ(ρπλ(υνάζω
ΰπηγιιαμμό•; Philo
υπολιμπανω
νποπάδιον Chares, Sept.
'νπηπ-ο\ή Joseph.
υττο-^αγή
νηοτνπωσις Quint.
φξίδομίνως Plut.
φιλαδιλφία (Α\>!\. ί) Phile
φιλήδονος Antli.
φρυάσσω Callim., Sept.,
Anth.
χάρισμα Philo
χειρόγραφου Polyb., Inscr•
χόρτασμα Phylarch., Sept.
^\τώχω
ώτίον Sept., Anth.
Total 318(75* 18?)
Π.
BORROWED WORDS•
1. Words borrowed from
the Hebrew.
N. B. Hebraisms in signifi-
cation and construction
(whether 'proper ' or ' improper ')
are excluded ; so, too, are words
of Semitic origin which had pre-
viously found their >vay Into
Greek osage.
Άβαβδώ»
Άββα
Άκ(λδαμΛ
άΧΚηλούΐα Sept.
αμήν .Sept.
Βαάλ Sept.
βάρ
^άτοί Apocr.
BffXff^oiX (-βαϋβ)
Β(λίαρ (-λίαλ)
Boiivfpycp
Γα33αθά
γ((ννα (γαύν. Josh. XviiL 16)
Γολγοθά
Εβραϊκός
Εβραίος Sept.
Έβραις Apocr.
Έβραϊστί Apocr.
ίλωί (cf. ήλΐ)
Εμμανουήλ Sept.
(φφαθά
ζιζάνιου
ήλί or ήλΐ ΟΓ ή\»ί (cf. ikut)
Ίουδαίζω Sept.
Ιουδαϊκοί Apocr. and -κώς
Ιουδαϊσμός ΑρΟΟΓ
Κανανα'ιος ?
Κανανίτης?
κατήγωρ ?
κορβάν or κορβαυάς
κόρος Sept.
κοϋμι ΟΓ κονμ or κοϋμ
\αμά or λαμμά or \ίμά <Λ
λημά, etc
μαμωνάς
μάννα Sept.
BORKOWED \V0BD8.
693
Biblical Woeds.
μαραν άθά (μαραυαβά)
Μεσσίας
Μυλόχ Sept.
(μωρί ?)
πάσχα Sept.
νροσάββατονί Sept. Apocr.
ραβ,α, -/3ei
ραββονί, -βουιΊ, -vet
ρακά or ρακά or ραχά
σαβαχθαι/ί, -vei
σαβαώθ Sept.
σιιββατισμόί
σήββατον Sept.
σατάν or σατανά! Sept.
σάτον Sept.
aUepa Sept.
ταΛιΰά
υσίτωτΓο? Sept.
Χ€μουβ:μ, -β(ίν, Sept.
Total 57.
2. Words borrowed from
the Latin.
N. B. Proper names are ex-
cluded, together with LatinisuiM
wliich had already been adopted
by profane authors.
δηνάριον
δίδωμι ^ργασίαν i. q. operant
do
€χω i. q. aestimo
κηνσοζ
Kodpaimjs
Κολωνία etc.
κονΐττωδία
λαμβάΐ'ω (q.v. I. 3 6.) i. q.
rajilo
Til ίκανον \αμβάν€ίν i. q. sails
accij/ere
συμβοΰΧιον \αμβάν(ΐν i. q.
roiisilium capere
Xiyeo»/ (through Aram. ?)
\fVTCOV
^ifiepr-lvos
pUKfWov
μ(μβράνα
μόδιοί
ττραιτωριον
ptSa or -δη'Ι (cf. 3 below.)
σικάριο!
ίτίμικίνθίον
σοιιδόμιοι/ (cf. HL 1)
σ•πίκον\άτωρ
ταβίρναί (αί)
τίτλος
φαινόλης paenula (cf. φαιτ
λόνης in m. 1)
φόρον
φραγ^λλίον
φραγ^λλόω
χώρος (?)
Total 30.
3. Words borrowed from
other Foreign Tongues.
βαΐον (Egyptian)
ρ(δα or -δη (Gallic? of. 2)
m.
BIBLICAL, i. e. NEW TESTAMENT, GREEK.
N. B. For explanations see the Prefatory Bemarks.
1. BibUcal Words.
Άβα^Βών Sept.
άβυσσος, ή, Sept. (as adj.
Aeschyl. et sfjq.)
άγαθθ€ργ€ω (-Θουρ'γίωΤ)
ά-γαθοποιίζύ Sept.
άγαθοποαα
*ά-γαθοπθίός Plut.
ά•γαθωσννη Sept.
αγαλλίίΐσίί Sept.
ά•γα\\ιάω Sept.
ά-γάττη Sept.
aye we α λ oy T/rop
άγια^ω Sept., Anth<^
αγιασμός Sept.
(lytOTT/i Apocr.
ί-γι^ασΰνη Sept.
ί'ί γναφος
άγνισμός Sept., InSCT.
ά-γνότης Inscr.
ά8€λφότης ApOCr.
αθΐτίω Sept., Polyb., Inscr.
αίμ^αηκχυσία
«ινβσιν Sept.
%Ισχροκ€ρ6ως
ΐΙίΤίωχια i
αιχμαλωσία Sept., Polyb.
αίχμα\α}Γ€υω Sept.
αιχμαλωτίζω Sept., Inscr.
ακάθαρτης "i
άκατάγνωστος Epigr., Inscr.,
Λ pocr.
άκατακάλντΓΤΟί Sept., Polyb.
ακατάκριτος
άκατάτταστος ?
ακαταστασία Sept., Polyb.
ακατάσχετος Sept.
Ακελδαμα
*άκροατηριον Plut.
άκροβνστία Sept-
άκμο-Ϋωνιάίος Sept.
οΚαΊ
άλάλητος AnthoL
άλΐ€νω Sept.
άλίσγημα
άλ^ληΚοΰϊα Sept•
άλλο-γενης Sept.
αλ λ οτρι (ο)€πί<τκοΐΓθγ
αλόη Sept. ¥ [Apocr.
αμάραντος Orac. Sib., liiscr.,
αμέθυστος Sept., Anthol.
άμην Sept.
άμφιάζω Sept., Anthol.
^αναγεννάω Joseph.
άvaCάω Inscr.
άναζώνΐ'νμί Sept.
άι/αθεματίζω Sept., Inscr.
άνακαινόω
άΐ'ακαίνωσις
άνάπεφος'ί ApOCr. (-πηρός,
Plato sqq.)
άναστατόω Sept. ?
*άρατάσσομαι Plut. (Sept. ?)
ανεκδιήγητος
άνεκλάλητος
άΐ'ελεος?
ανεμίζω
άνενδεκτος
άνεζίκακος
ανεξιχνίαστος Sept.
*άρεπαίσχυντος Joseph-
άνΐτάζω Sept.?
άνενθετος
άνθρωπάρεσκος Sept.
*άνθυπατ€νω Plut.
άνιλεως ?
άιη•από8ομα Sept.
ανταποκρίνομαι Sept-, Aesop
*άντιλοιδορεω Phlt.
άντιλντρον Sept., Orph.
άντιμετρεω ?
αντιμισθία
άντιπαρερχομαι Anthol.
Apocr.
αντίχριστος
*άντλημα Plut.
άννττόκριτος Apocr.
άπασττάζομαι ?
*άπ€ΐραστος Joseph-
άπεκδε )(θμαι
*άπ€κ6ΰομαί Joseph.?
άττεκδνσις
άπελεγμός
απελπίζω Sept., Polyb•,
Anth.
απέναντι Sept., Polyb.,Inscr.
άπερίτμητος Sept.
άποΒεκατόω Sept. (-τίΐω ?)
*άπό8εκτος Plut.
άποκάλνψις Sept.
άποκατηλ λ άσσω
αποκεφαλίζω Sept. (David
over Goliath)
άποκνλίω Sept.
^Απολλνων
άποσκίιισμα
άποσννάγωγος
άποφβεγγομαι Sept.
"άπόχρησις Plut,
άπρόσκοπος Apocr.
απρησωπολη (μ )jrrii>ff
άργνρόκοπος Sept., Inscr.
αρκετός Chr.vsipp.j Anthol.
Biblical Words.
694
Biblical Words.
Άρμαγιίών etc.
*άρπαγμός Plut.
άρραφος
άρσ(νοκοίτηί AnthoL, Orec.
Sibyl.
apTiyivmjTOS
o» άρτοι της iTpouiatat Sept.
άρχάγγ(\θί
'<ipx If paTtKot Joseph., Inscr.
ιιρ)^ιποιμην
ap\iavvayijiiyos Inscr.
ά^χιτ(\ύ)νης
άρ\ιτρίκΚινοί
άσαίνω'ί (q. V.)
όστΓίλοΕ AnthoL
άστατ€α> Anthol.
αστήρικτοι AnthoL
ασφαλίζω Sept., Polyb.
ανθ€ντ€ω
αυτοκατάκρντοί
άφ(8ρώ»
άφίλάτης
άφθορία ?
άφιλάγαθοί
άφιλάρ-γυμοί
άφυπνόω Sept., AnthoL
άφυστίρίω Sept., Polyb.
άχ^ιροποίητος
αχρίΐόω Sept., Polyb.
'άψινθος Aret. (-tfioi» from
Xun. on)
Βαάλ Sept.
ίίαθμόί Sept.
βαΐον Sept. ? Apocr.
βάπτισμα
'βαπτισμός Joseph.
'βατΓτιστηί Joseph.
Βάρ
βασιλ'ισκοίΐ Sept., Polyb.,
Aesop, Inscr.
βάτος Apocr.
βαττηλογίω
βλΓΚυγμα Sept.
βδζ\νκτός Sept•
ιίίβηλόω Sept.
Β((\ζ(βοίιλ (-βούβ)
Β'λίαρ (-λίαλ)
βι'ιρυλλο! Apocr., AnthoL
βιβλap^&^ou
βίωσΐ! Apocr.
β\ηΤ€0!
Boavf (οΓ -ij-) pyis
βολίζω
βόΚίς Sept., AnthoL
βραδυ7Γ\θ€ω
βροχή Sept.
βυρσ(ίς Inscr.
Ταββαθά
'γάγγραινα Plat.
γαζοφνλάκιον Sept.
γαμίζ»
yifwa (Sept. Joeh. zviiL 16)
γίωργιον Sept.
γνώστης Sept.
γογγίζω Sept.
γογγνσμος bept•
γογγυστής
Γο\γοθα
*γνμνητΐύ<ύ Plut•
γνμνοτηί
8αιμονιώ8ηΐ
δ(ΐγματίζω
δ(ΐλ(άω Sept.
&(κα8ΰο Sept.
δ(κα(ξ Sept.
δ€καο<τώ Sept.
SfKajrcvTf Sept., Polyb.
δ(κατ€σσαρ(ς Sept., Polyb.
8(κατόα> Sept.
δ(κτός Sept.
δί|ιο/3όλοΓ (-λάθοι)
'8€σμοφνλαξ Joseph.
δ€ντ(ρόπρωτοζ ?
'δηνάριον Plut.
διαγογγνζω Sept.
διαγρηγορίω
διακαθαρίζω
διaκaτf\(γχoμai
διαΧιμπάνω Apocr.
διανήω Sejit., Polyb.
διαπαρατριβή ?
διασκορπίζω Sept.. Polyb.
διασπορά Apocr.
διαταγή Sept., Inscr.
δίδραχμον Sept.
δίδωμι (ργασίαν
δκνθυμίομαιΊ
δκρμηνίία'ί
δΐίρμηνΐντηςι
δικαιοκρισία Sept.?
δίΧογος
διοδ(ΰω Sept., Polyb., Inscr.,
Anthol.
δισμνρίας ?
διώκτης
δογματίζω Sept., Anthol.
δοκιμή
δοκίμιορ (-μϋον, Plato)
δολιόω Sept.
δότης Sept.
δνναμόω Sept.
δννατίω
δυσβάστακτος Sept.
δωδfκάφυλov Orac. Sib.
δωροφορία t
(βδομηκοντάκις Sept.
ίβδομηκονταπίντΐ Sept.
Εβραϊκός
Έβρα'ιος Sept.
Έβραις Apocr.
ΈβραιστΙ Apocr.
ΐγκαίνια Sept.
ΐγκαινίζω Sept.
ϊγκαυχάομαι 1 Sept., ΔββΟρ
€γκομβόομαι
(δραίωμα
ϊθ(\οθρησκ(ΐα
(θνικίος
ίΐδωλί'ιον Apocr.
(ίδωλόθυτος ΑροΟΓ.
(ΐδωλολατρίία
ειδωλολάτρης
(Ιρηνοποιίω Sept.
(κγαμίζω ?
(κγαμίσκίΰ ?
(κδικίω Sept., Inscr.
(κδίκησις Sept., Polyb., In-
scr.
(κζητίω Sept.
(κζήτησις ?
(κθαμβίω Sept.? ΑροΟΓ.,
Orjih.
ίκμνκτηρίζω Sept.
€'κπ(ΐράζω Sept.
ίκπΐρισσώς ?
(κπορυ^ϋω Sept.
(κριζόω Sept., Orac. Sib.,
InsiT.
(κτρομος ?
ίΚαιών Sept.
(λαφρία Aret.
€\αχιστϋΤ(ρος
(λιγμός'ί Sept.
ίΧίγξις Sept.
?Xf()5, TO, Sept., Polyb.
ίλλογάω (-)/ίω)
(λωΓ Sept. (cf. η\[)
'('μμαίνομαι .Joseph.
^ΕμμανϋνήΧ Sept.
Ιμμίσω V
ίμπαιγμηνή ?
εμπαιγμός Sept.
εμπαίκτης Sept.
(μπεριπατίω Sept.
(ναγκαλίζομαι Sept., Anthol.
ΐναντιΊ Sept.
(νδιδίσκω Sept.
*€νδύμησις .loseph.
(νδοξύζω Sept.
ίνδυμα Sept.
€νδνναμοω .Sept.
ϊνιδρον ? Sept.
eVf υλογί'ω ? Sept.
€μν(νηκονταΐνν(α
'ϊνορκίζωΐ .Joseph., Inscr.
ένταλμα Sept.
ενταφιάζω Sept., Anthol.
ενταφιασμός
έντρομος Sept., Anthol.
ενωτίζομαι Sept.
εξαγοράζω Sept., Polyb.
εξακολουθεω Sept., Polyb.
ε'ζάπινα Sept.
εξαπορέω Sept., Polyb.
'εξαρτίζω Joseph., InsCT.
έξαστράτΓΓω Sept.
ε'ξεραμα
έξηχέω Sept., Polyb.
ε'ξολοθρείω Sept.
εζομοΧογεω Sept.
'εξορκιστής .Joseph.
εξονδενΐω (-νόω) Sept.
ε'ξονθ€νίω {-νόα>) Sept.
εξνπνίζω Sept.
'έξυπνος .Joseph.
εξώτερος Sept.
'επαγωνίζομαι Plut., Inscr.
*επ αθροίζω Plut.
επαναπαύω Sept.
ε'πάρχειος Inscr.
επαύριον Sept.
'επενδύω Joseph. (-dvM•
Hdt.)
ε'πιγαμβρεΰω Sept.
επίγνωσις Sept., Polyb.
επιδιατάσσομαι
επιδιορθόω Inscr.
επικατάρατος Sept., Inscr.
^Επικούρειος AnthoL
επιΚείχω ?
επϊΚησμονή Apocr.
επιούσιος
επιπήθησις
επιπόθητος
επιποθια
επιπορεΰομαι Sept., Polyb.
επιρράπτω
επισκοπή Sept.
έπισυνάγω Sept., Polyb,
Aesop
επισυναγωγή ΛροΟΓ.
επισνντρΐχω
εηισυστασις Sept.
'επισωρεύω I*lut.
επιφαύσκω Sept.
επιφώσκω Inscr.
επιχορηγία
ερήμωσις Sept.
ερίφιονί jVpocr.
ετεροδιδασκαΧεω
ετεροζνγεω
ευαγγελιστής
ευάρεστος Apoer.
ευδοκέω Sept., Polyb.
ευδοκία Se))t., Inscr.
εΰκοπώτερον (-κόπος Polyb.)
εΰλογητός Sept.
εύμετάδοτος
'ευνουχίζω Joseph.
Ι ίΰπάρεδρος!
Biblical Words.
695
Biblical Wokos.
'finotta Joseph., Inscr•
*rimpoa8(KTOs Flut.
(ΐητρ6σ(8ρος
€υπροσωπ€ία
tipaKvXav \ η
€υρο(θΓ-ν-)κλυ3ων j
'ίΰ^Ιτυχίω Joseph-, Antbol.,
Inscr.
ίφημίρία Sept.
ΐφφαθα
ζΐνκτηρία
ζίζάνιον
ήλί (cf. <λω()
'Ήρω8ιανοί Josepii.
ηττημα Sept.
θίατρίζω
θίλησίΐ Sept.
θ(ο8ί8ακτοί
'eeonvevaros Fint,, Orac.
Sibyl.
'θ(ότηί Plut.
θορυβάζω ?
θρήσκος
θυσιαστήριον Sept.
'κράτίνμα Sept.
Ιίρατ^ύω Sept., InsCT.
ίκανόω Sept.
1\αρϋτη! Sept.
Ιλασμος Sept,
ΙΚαστήριος Sept.
ιματιζω
Ίου8αΐζιύ Sept.
•'Ιουδαϊκοί ApoCT.
•'Ιουδαϊκώί Joseph.
Ίουδαϊσ^χόϊ Apocr.
ίσάγγίλοΓ
καθαρίζω Sept. (Hippocr. V)
καθαρισμοί Sept.
*καθ€ξήί Plut., Inscr.
καλοδιδάσκαλοί
καλο7Γθΐ£α> Sept.?
κάμίλο??
Karaymof ?
KaiOKiVijs?
«αρδιογι/ώση^
icarnyyfAeuff
κατάίίβ/αα "?
καταίίματί^ω?
<αΓακαυ;ΐ[άο;χαι Sept.
κατακλτ^ροδοτί'α)? Sept. ?
κατακληρονορ^ϋΛί Sept.
κατακο\ονθ(<ΰ Sept., Polyb
«ατάκρισι?
κατάλαΧίά
κατάλαΧος
κατάλαμμαΐ Sept.
καταλι^ά^ω
κατάλυμα Sept., Polyb.
ιιατανάθίμα7
καταναθ(ματίζω ?
καταντάω Sept., Polrb.
κατάνυξΐ! Sept.
καταννσσω Sept.
καταπίτασμα Sept.
'κατάρτισΐ! Plut.
καταρτισμοί
κατασκήνωσα SepU, Polyb.,
Inscr.
κατασυφίζομαι Sept.. larvT.
καταστρηνίάω
κατάσχ(σΐ! Sept.
καταφρονψήί Sept.
κατίΐ'δωλοΓ
κατίναντι Sept., Ιπ'ΛϊΤ.
κατίνώηιον Sept.
καίΤ(^νσιάζ<ύ
'«ατίυλογί'ω ? Ρίπ*-
κατ^φΊστημι
κατηγωρ'ί
κατιόω Apocr.
κατοικητήριον Sept.
κατοικία Sept^ Pc4yt>.
κανσόω
καύσων Sept.
καύχησί! Sept.
Κ(νοφωνία
κ(φαλιόω (-\αιάω Thnc.')
κήνσος Inscr.
κλυΒωνίζομαι Sept.
Kodpai^S
κόκκινος Sept.
κοΧαφίζω
κοΧωνία etc.
'κορϋάν or Kop&com Joeeph.
κόρος Sept.
κοσμοκράτωρ Orph., Inerr.
κοΰμι etc.
κουστωδία
κραταιόω Sept.
κ/ιυσταλλι'^ω
κίΧισμα Ί or κϋΚιαίΜΪκ ?
KvpiiiKos Inscr.
Kvpicmji
\αμά etc.
Χα^(χπός Sept.
Χατομίω Sept.
Χργιών etc. (cf. list IL 3)
XdTovpyiKOi Sept.
Χίντίον
ΧιβίρτΊνος Inscr.
Xtflo/ioXf'o) Sept.
Xo-yi'a (ή)
Χογημαχ(ω
Χογομαχια
Χυτρωτής Sept. (Philc)
λυχνία Sept., Inscr.
'μαθητ(νω Plut.
' 'μάκ(Χ\ον riut.
μακρόθη/ Sept., Poijrth
μακροθνμίω Sept.
μακροθνμως
μαμωνάς
μάννα Sept.
μαράν άθά (βαραναθά)
*ματαιοΧογία Plut.
ματαιάτης Sept., ΙηβΟΓ.
ματαιόω Sept.
μ(γαΧ(ΐάτης Sept., ΙπίΗ;!.
μΛΎαΚωσννη Sept.
^rytcrrai' Sept.
μίθο^ΐία
μ^ΧίσσιοΐΊ (-otbf, Nicand.)
μεμβράνα
μίριστής
μεσίτης Sept., Polyb.
μισότοιχον (-χος, Eratos.)
*μίσουράνημα Plut.
Μίσσίας
μ*τοικ(σία Sept., AllthoL
*μιασμός Plut.
μισθαποΒοσία
μισθαπο^ότηί
μίσθιος Se])t., AnthoL
μογ(γ)ιΧαΧος Sept.
μό^ιος
μοιχαΧίς Sept.
μοΧνσμός Sept.
μοσχοτΓοίί'ω
μνΧικος ?
μύΧινος'ί Inscr.
μύΧος Sept., Anthol., Orac.
Sibyl.
(μωρ€ Ο
'ν(κρόω Plut., Anthol., In-
scr.
'νίκρωσις Aret.
νίόφυτος Sept. (lit. ; so Ar-
stph. in Pollux 1, 231)
νϊκος Sept., Anthol., Orph.
νιπτήρ
νομο8ι8ασκάΧοί
νοσσιάΐ Sept. («« οσσιά Hdt.,
al.)
νυμφών Apocr.
ννχθήμίρον Orac. SibyL
ξ(νο8οχ€ω Graec.Ven. (-κ€ω,
Hdt.)
'ξίστηςΊ Joseph., Anthol.
*οικιακός Plut.
*οικο8(σποτ€ω Plut.
οΙκοΒομή Sept. (Aristot. ?)
oiKoupyoi ?
οκταήμιρος (Graec Ven.)
6Xιyo^:ιστia ?
όλιγόπιστοί
όλιγόι/ΛυχοΓ Sept.
ολίγωΓ Anthol.
6Χοθρ(υττ]ς
Ao(or -t-)0ptvtt Sept., Ad-
thol.
όΧοκαίτωμα Sept.
όΧοκΧηρία Sept.
όμΐίρομαι ? Sept. ?
ομοιάζω ?
6ν(ΐ8ισμ6ς Sept.
όνικός
όπτάνω Sept.
οπτασία Sept., AnthoL
6ρθοπο8€ω
ορθοτομίω Sept.
όρθρίζω Sept.
ορθρινός ? Sept., AnthoL
ορκωμοσία Sept.
όμοθίσία
ούά
οναί Sept.
δφ(ΐΧή
οφθαΧμο^ουΧίίΛ
οχΧοτΓούω
οψάριον
παγι8ίΰω Sept•
παώιοθ€ν
παμπΧηθίί
■παντοκράτωρ Sept., Anthol^
Inscr.
παραβιάζομαι Sept., Polyb.
παραβοΧΐΰομαι ?
παραβουΧίύομαιι
παμα8ιατριβή ?
παρα8(ΐγματίζω Sept.,PoIybi
παραζηΧοω Sept.
παραλυτικός
παραπικραίνω Sept.
παραπικρασμός Sept.
παράπτωμα .Sept., Polyb.
παραφρονία
παρ€πί8ημος Sept., Polyb.
παροικία Sept.
παρομοιάζω ?
•παρορ-γισμός Sept.
πάσχα Sept.
πατριάρχης Sept.
πΐΐθός
πειρασμός Sept.
πΐΐσμονή
π(Χ(κίζω Sept., Polyb.
ΐΓ€ντ(και8€κατος Sept.
ΙΓ^ποίθησις Sept.
πιριαστράπτω Apocr.
π(ρίθ€σις
nfpiKUeappa Sept.
π(ρικ(φάΧαία Sept., Polyb•
Inscr.
πιρικρατης Apocr.
π^ρικρνπτω
πΐριουσιος Sept.
ιτ(ρισσ(1α Sept., Inscr.
iTfpiTopTi Sept.
BiBLicAi. Words.
696
Biblical Signification&
νίρί-^μα Sept., Inscr.
νλημμνμα L'tC. Sept., Antho).
νΧηροφορία
ννίνματικύ)!
νολιτάμχη! Inscr., Epitpr.
'noKviiepi)! Joseph.
ηοταμοφήμητοζ
'ιτραιτώριον .loseph., Inscr.
ημ(σβυτ(ριον Inscr.
It potuTtaopai
π ρίΗχμαρτάνίύ
νμοβ\(7τω Sept»
'πράγνωσκ Plal^ ActhoL
πpofvάpχoμa^
προ€τταγγ€\\<ύ
'προκαταγγίΧλω Joseph.
πρόκριμα
ττριικυρόω
προμαρτΰρομαι
προμίριμνάύί
•ηροορίζω
νροσάββατονί Sept.?, Apo-
crypha
*ΊΓροσαίτης Plut.
^προσηχίω 1)
νροσ8απανάίύ Inscr.
ιτροσίάω
προσ^γγίζωΊ Sept., Polyb.,
Anthol.
ηροσ(υχη Sept., Inscr.
ιτροσηΧντοί Sept.
τρυσκυρτίρησιΐ
νρόσκυμμα Sept.
ηροσκννητης Inscr.
νροσοχθίζω Sept., Orac.
Sibyl.
ιτροστταΙωΊ (Soph.?)
ττμόσττΐΐνος
'■προσρη-γνυμί Joseph.
προσφάγιον Inscr.
ιτρήσχνσις
προσωπολ η (μ)7Γτί<ΰ
πρυσωτΓολ ϊ; (μ ) 7my 9
προσαηΓο\η(μ)ψία
προφτ]τ(ία Sept.; Inscr.
πρωίνόί Sept.
νροίτοκαθ^^ρία
«■ρωτοκλισι'α (ή) Apocr.
πραττυτόκια (τά) Sept.
νρωτότοκος Sept., Anthol.
{■^okos, act., Ilom. down)
t6 TTvp TO alaiviou etc.
νυρράζω'Ι (-pifa Sept.)
ραββί: -/3«
ραββορί etc.
ρακά etc
ραντίζω Sept•
^αι^ισμόί Sept.
pfiri or βίδα
ρυπαΐίτίίομαι 1
σαβαχθανί, -w/
σαβοώύ Sept.
*σαββιιτιο^! Pint.
σάββατον Sept., AnthoL
σαγήνη .Sept.
•Σιιδδουκαίοί Joseph.
σάρ&ίνυί V
σαρδιόπίί ';
σατάν or σαται<ά( Sept.
σάτυν Sept.
σ€\ηνίάζοΐΜη
σητόβρωτοί Sept., Orac.
Sibyl.
σ6€νόω
'σικάριος Joseph.
σίκ(ρα Sept.
σιμικίνθιου
σινίΐ'ιζω
'σιτιστο! Joseph.
σιτομίτριον (τ pop Plat.)
σκανδαλίζω
σκάυδαλομ Sept.
σκηνοποιός
σκ\ηρηκαρ8ία Sept.
σκληροτράχηλο! Sept.
σκοτίζω Sept., Polyb.
σμαράγ^ινος
σμνμνίζω
σονΒάριον (^σωδάριον Her-
mippus)
στΓ^κονλάτωρ
σπλαγχνίζομαι Sept.?
στηκω Sept.
στρατοττξ^ηρχος t
στνγΐ'άζω Sei't., Polyb.
'auy-yf vis Υ P!ut., InscT.
σνγκακοπαθίω
σνγκα^--ονχ€αί
'σνγκατα^Ι/ηφίζα
σιτγκοινωνός
σνζητητήί
σνζωί^ούω
σνκομορία
σνλα-γωγεω [ItSCr.
σνλλαλίω Sejt-, Polyb.,
σνμμίμητης
σνμμομφίζω ?
σνμμορφόω ί
σνμττ ρ(σβνΤ(ρθΐ
σνμφνλίτης
σνμφωνησις
σvμ^l/υχoς
συ ί'π t y μάλ ωτον
σννιινάκΐΐμαι ApoCT.
σννηναμίγννμι Sept.?
σνναναπανομαιΐ Sejic.
σνναντιλαμβάνομαι Sept.,
Inscr.
<Tvvapuo\oyfci
avvfyfipw Sept.
σνν(κλ(ΐαόί
σννϋρΰτττω
*σννο8ίνω Plut.
σννομορίχχ•
σίσσημον (ΜβΟαΙκΙβΓ in
Phryn.), Sept.
σίσσωμοί
'σνστασιαστήί Joseph.
σνστανρόω
σφνδρόν i
'σωματίκω! PluU
ταβέμναι (αί)
ταλι^ά
τα7Γ€ΐνόφρωνΊ Sept.
'ταπανοφροσύνη Joseph.
ταρταρόω
Τ€κνίον Anthol.
Τΐκνοτγονίω AnthoL
Τ(λ^ιωττ]ί
TfO σαμακονταΒυο V
τΐσσαρακοντατίσϋαρ€$ Γ
'τ(τραρχίω Joseph.
TiVXos Inscr.
τοττάζιον Sept.
τροποφορΐω'ί Sept.
τροφοφορίω'ί Sept.?
τρνμαλιά Sept. (Sotad.)
τυτηκώ:^
*--υφωνικΟ! Plut.
ΰπακηη Sept.
νπανδρο! Sept., Polyb.
νπάντησίί Sept.
VTTfptK^Lva
νπ(μ(κπίρισσοΰ Sept. /
ν7Γΐρ€Κ7Γ€μίσσως ?
ν7ΐ(ρ€κτ€ίνω Anthol. f
νπ€ρΐκχννω Sept. *
inrfpevTvyxava
ίττίρΐΊκάω
ν7Γ€ρ•7Τ€ρισσ€ν<ύ
νπ€ρπ(ρισσωί
νπ(ρνψόω Sept.
νποληνιον Sept.
ντΓ&ΤΓΐάζω ?
νποηλίω Anthol.
'υποστολή .Toseph.
ντΓοστρώνννμι Sept.
νσοωπο! Sept.
νστίρημα Sept.
νστίρησιί
νΛ^τηλοφρονίω ?
νψωμα Sept., Orac. Sib.
φαγοί
φαι(θΓ φ*-)λ<5»ι;ί (φαινόλη!
Rhinthon, ο. B.C. 300, in
PoUux 7, 61)
φαρισα7ο!
'φ(1&ομ(νω! Plut.
φιλσπρωτήα
φό,ίον
φμα-γίλλίαν
φμαγίλλόω
φρίναπατάίΰ
φμΐναττάτης
φυλακίζω Sept.
φνσίωσΐ!
φωστήρ Sep<t., AnthoL
φωτισμοί Sept.
χαλκη8ών (Pliny)
χαλκολίβηνον
χαριτόω Apocr.
Χιρουβίμ etc. Sept.
χοικοί
χριωφίίΚίτη! etc. Septi|
Aesop
χρηστ^νομαί
χρηστολογία
χρυσο^ακτνλίοί
χρνσήλιθο! Sept
χρυσυτζρασο!
χά,ρο!
ψfuδίίδfλφo?
ιΙ^ίΐιδιιπόστολοϊ
ψίΐ'δοδιδίίσκρ λος
•>Ιτΐΐ>8οιτροφίιτηΐ Sept.
y^rfvooxpiOTos
ψιθυρισμό! Sept-
ψιχίον
■ψωμίον Sept.
ωσαννά
Total 767, (76*. 89 ')
2. Bil>lical Significatioci.
Ν. Β. " Sept." or " Apocr " It
added to a word in case it occur
iu tbe t^ame sense In the Septua-
gint version or (if not there; in
the Apocryphal books of the O.T.
Moreover, cliaracteristic N. T.
significations wlilcli also occur
in Philo and Josejihus but in no
other secular authors have been
includeil In tbe list, with the
proi>er designations appended.
See the Prefatory Bemarks, ik
68a
ή άβυσσο! (.Sept.)
αγάπη 2
ΰγγ(λο! 2 (Sept., Philo)
ά&(λφή 2
αδελφό! 2 (Sept., Philc), 4,
5 (.-^ept.)
αδιάκριτο? 2
άδροτη!
άδυνατίω b. (S€pt.)
αφ(σΐ! 5
aiprriKiSi 2
Biblical Significations.
697
Biblical Significations,
αιών 2 (Apocr.), 8
α\ηθ€ΐα Lie
αληθεύω b.
αμαρτία 3, 4
άμήτωρ 5 (Philo)
άνάθΐμα 2 a., b.
(ανηστανροω)
άναφίρω 2 (Sept.)
άνθομοΚογίομαι 3 fin. (Sept.)
άνομος 1
άνόμως
άνοχη
άντίληψίΐ (Sept.)
άντίλογία 2 (.Sept.)
άντίτνπος 1, 2
άπάτωρ
απαύγασμα (Apocr.)
άπλότης fin. (Joseph.)
αποθνήσκω II.
αποκαλύπτω 2 C. (Sept.)
άποκάλνψίς - a,
άποκρίνω 2 (Sept.)
αποΚλνμι 1 a. β.
άποΚΰτρωσΐ! 2
άποστάσιον 1 (Sept.), 2
αποστολι; 4
αττόστολο? 2, 3
άποστοματίζω
άποτάσσίύ Ι
απώλεια 2 b.
άρ(σκίία (Philo)
άρ;(ή 5
άσύvfτos fin. (Apoc.)
αύγά^ο) 2 (Sept.)
αΰτ-όί II. 2 (Sept.)
άφνπνόω b.
άφνστερίω 2 (Sept.)
βαπτίζω II.
βαπτισμός (Joseph.)
βασϊΚΐία 3
βΧίπω 2 C. mid.
•γαμίω 2
γ^νζσις 3
■yfi/raw 2 b. (Philo), c., d.
γλώσσα 2 init.
γράμμα 2 c. ( Philo, .loseph.)
γραμμάτων! 2 (Sept.)
Βαίμων 2 (Joseph.)
ίί'ω 2 c.
ό διά/3ολοΓ Sept.
δια^ήκι/ 2 (i. q. nna)
διακονία 3, 4
dtOKoiOf 2
διακρίνομαι 3
διαι^οίγω 2
διαπονούμαι c. (Apocr.)
8ιατίθ(μαι διαθηκην etc.
(Sept.)
δίδωμι IV. 5
dicoiocrvM] 1 c.
δικαιόω 2, 3, (Sept.)
δικαίωσις
δί'λογϋϊ 2
διώκω 3
δ.;ξα III. (Sept.)
6u|iifa> 4 (Sept.)
δύΐ'αμί? b.
δώ/χα 3 (Sept.)
δωμίά b. (Sept.)
εγγύς 1 b.
(γ(ίρω 2, 4
€γ€ρσι$ fin.
ξθνικός 3
eifoj 4 (Sept.), 5
«1.5 (Sept.), III. 9 (Sept.)
«δω II. 3 (Sept.)
ίϊδωλον 2 (Sei)t.)
«μί II. 5 (Sept.)
(Ιπον 5 (Sept.)
(ίρήνη 3 (Sept.), 4, 5, 6 (Sept.)
cK I. 7 (Sept.)
ίκβασί! 2 (Apocr.)
ΐ'κδηχη 4
(κκλησία 2 (Sept.), 4
(κλίγομαι (Sept.)
fVXfKrot (.Se]it.)
ίκστασίί 3 (Sept.)
fAfos 2, 3
'EAXjyi'iS 2
εμιίατ(ύω 2 (Apocr., Philo)
ΐμβριμάομαι fin.
eV I. G b., 8 b. (Sept.), 8e.
(vavTiov 2 fin. (Sept.)
ίνεργίω •ί
ΐξανύστασις fin.
€|ϋδϋϊ fin. (I'hilo)
ί'^ομολογ/ω 2 (Sejit.)
(ξουσία 4 c. β/3., d.
€7Γ6ρωΓάω 2 (.Sept.)
ΐπΐρώτημα .'!
ΐπιγαμβρίύω 2 (Sept.)
(πικαλέω 2 (Sejit.)
ΐττισκίπτημαι b. (Sept.)
επισκοπή b. (Sept.),C. (Sept.)
επίσκοπος fin.
(πιστροφή Apocr.
(πιτιμία Ajiocr.
€pfiynpai 3 (.Sept.)
fLOyyeXi'^M III.
ίναγγελιον 2 a., b.
ίίδοκίω 2 (Sept.)
fiAoyfa 2, 3, 4, (Sept.)
fCXo-yi'a 3 Sept., 4, 5 (Sept.)
{ί<'σπλα•)ί;(ΐ/05 (Apocr.)
ε\ω I. 1 f.
ζάω I. 2
ίωή 2 a., b.
ζωογονεω 3 (Sept.)
^ωοποκ'ω 2
ημέρα 1 b., 3 (Sept.)
ησυχάζω c. (Sept.)
θάνατος 2 (Sept., Philo)
όίλω 4 (Sept.)
0€0f 4 (Sept.)
θεωρίω 2 c. sub fin.
θριαμβεύω 2
θροέω fin. (.Sept.)
θυγάτηρ b. (Sept.)
θυμιατηριον 2 (Philo, Jo-
seph.)
ϊδίοΓ 1 d. (Apocr.)
ιερεύς b.
ίλασμοΓ 2 (.Sept.)
ίλαστηριοι/, τό, 1 (.Sept.), 2
ισχύω 2 a. (Sept.)
καθαρίζω 1 b. (Apocr.), 2
(.Sept.)
καθεύδω 2 b. (Sept.)
κακία 3 (Sept.)
κακόω 2 (Sept.)
κακολογί'ω 2 (Sept.)
καλεω 1 b. β.
καμμύω (Sept.)
κάμιττω b. (.Sept.)
και^ώΐ' 1
καρπός 2 c. (Sept.)
καταισρ^ιίι/ω 2 fin. (Sept.)
κατάπαυσι? 2 (Sept.)
καταστοΧή 2 (Sept.)
κατατομή
κέρας b. (Sept.)
κεφαΧαιόω 2
κήρυγμα (Sept.)
κήρυξ 1 fin.
κηρύσσω b.
κΧηρονημεω 2 fin.
κΧηρονυμία 2 a., b.
κΧηρονι'}μος 1 b., 2 (Sept.)
κΧηρόω 4 (Apocr.)
κλ^σίϊ 2
κλ/;τ05 a., b.
κοιλία 5 (Sept.)
Koti/df 2 (Apocr.)
κοίνόω 2 (Apocr.)
κοινωνία 3
κοπή 2 (Sept.)
κοπιάω 2 (Sept.)
κοσμικός 2, 3
κόσμοί 5 (Apocr.), 6, 7, 8
(Sept.)
κρίνω 5 a. |3., 6 (Sept.)
κρίσις 3 b., 4 (Sept.), 5 (Sept.)
κριτήριον 3
κριτής 2 (Sept.)
κτίσις 2 (Apocr.), S
κτίσμα
κώλον
λαμβάνω I. S 6. (cf. list Π. 2)
λάσκω 2 '
λειτουργεω 2 c. (Apocr.)
Λειτουργία 3 b.
λί/^ίαι/ωτόί 2
λικμάω 3 (.Sept.)
λ Ίγος III.
λΰτμωσι? fin. (Sept.)
μαθητεύω 2
μακροθυμεω 2 (Sept.)
μακροθνμία 2 (Sept.)
μάρτυς c.
μεσιτεύω 2 (Philo)
μεταίρω 2
μοιχαλίς h. (Sept.)
μθί;^ό? fin.
μυστήριον 2, 3 (Sept.)
μωραίνω 2 (Sept.)
μωρός fin. (Sept.)
I'fKpo? 2
ΐ'€ώΓ6μοί d.
ι-όμοΓ 2 ( Apocr.), 3,4(Sept.)
νύμφη 2 fin. (.Sept.)
οίκοδομεω b. /3.
οικοδομή 1
όμυλογ€ω 4
όι/ομα 2 (Sept.), 3 (Sept.), 4
οπίσω 2 (Sept.)
ουρανής 2 (Sept.)
οφειλέτης h.
υφείλημα b.
οφίίλω C.
οφθαλμός in phrases (Sept.)
(!;(ψωμα 2 (Sept.)
Ϊ/ όλ//•ί'α
οι/^ώι/ίον 2
παιδεία 2 b. (Sept.), c. (Sept.)
παιδίΐ/ω 2 b. (Sept.), c. (Sept.)
jraif 2 fin. (Sept. ; i. q. "I3|')
παράκλί/τοΓ 3 (Philo)
πηραίίηλή 3, 4, (Sept.)
ττσ^ήδ^ ισο5 3, 4
παρακοή 2
παρασκευή 3 (.Toseph.)
παρθένος
πά /JoiKos 2 (Sept.)
παρρησία 3 (Philo)
πατάσσω 2 (Sept.), 3 (Sept.)
πειράζω 2 d. (Sept.)
πειρασμός b., c, (Sept.)
πεντηκοστή (ApoCT.)
περιπατεω b.
περιποίησις 2, 3
περίσσεια 4
περίσσευμα 2
περισσεύω 2
περιτομή a. y., b.
πίστίϊίω 1 b.
πι'στίϊ 1 b.
πνεύμα 3 c., d., 4
ττνίυμαΓίΚΟΓ 3
TTopei'a
Biblical SiGNinCATiONe.
πορτΰω b. (Sept.)
νομνίία b. (Sept.)
ΐΓορ•>(ΰω 3 (Sept.)
■ιτόρνη 2
ncrrrjpiov b.
nofafiirfpos 2 a•, b-i C•
ηροά-γω 2 b.
7rpoaave)((u 2
προσιυχή 2 (Philo)
ΐΓ/3οσΐ)λυτοϊ (Joseph.)
ίτροσκαΧ^ω b.
698
Π•ροσκαλ€ω b.
προστίθημι 2 sub fin. (Sept.)
ιτρόσωποκ 1 b., c, 2, (Sept.)
προφητ(ΰω h., c, d., (Sej)t.)
προφήτη! II. 1 (Sept.)
ιτρωτότοχοί b.
ρήμα 2 (Sept.)
^'fa 2 (Sept.)
σάββατον 2
σαρκικοί 1
σ(ίμκ(ΐΌ( 3
σϋρΙ 2 b. (Sept.), 3 (Sept.), 4
σ^/^ά^ομαί 2
σκανδαλίζω (Apocr.)
σκάνΒαλον b. (Sept.)
σκηνοπψ/ία 2 (Sept.)
σίίότορ b.
σοφία b.
σταυρός 2 b.
στίφανος b. α.
στηρίζω b.
OTOt;(eioi' 3
στόμα 2 (Sept.)
στρατιά 3 (Sept.)
συ^ί?7"ίω b.
σνμβφάζω 3 fin.
(rvfa-yu c. (Sept )
συναγωγ?) 2 (Joseph., Philo)
σνναίρω 2
συνδοξά^ω 2
σνν(•γΐίρω fin.
σννίδριον 2 b.
συιη-ίλί'ω 5 (Sept.)
σίιηριμμα 2 (Sept.)
σχίσμα b.
σώ^ω b. (Sept.)
σώμα 3
σωτηρ (Sept.)
σωτηρία a. (Sept.), b., C.
σωττ/ριοι», τό (Sept.)
TfKvov c. (Sept.)
Ti's 1 e. y. (Sept.)
τραχΐ)λι'^α) 2
τώτοί 4 y.
Individual VVritebs.
υϊοθίσία a., b.
υ;(5Γ 2 (Sept.)
ν!05 ToC άνβρώπον 3 (Sept.)
uius ToC ifoO 2, 3, (Sept.)
ύποκριτ7)Γ 3 (Sept.)
νποπνίω b.
υποτνττωσίί b.
φνΧακτηριον 2
φυλάσσω 2 b. (Sept.)
φωτίζω 2 c. (Sept.)
χαρίζομαι h.
χάρΐ! 2 sub fin., 3 a.
χάρισμα (Philo)
χαριτόω 2
;^ριστ<)Γ 2
χρίω a., b.
ψΐ);(77 1 C, 2 b.
ψωμίζω b.
IV.
WORDS PECULIAR TO ESTDIVIDUAL NEW TESTAMENT WRITERS.
N. B. A word which occurs only in a quotation by the N. T. writer from the Septuagint is so marlied. In the Apocalypse, which
contains no express quotations, a word is so designated only when the context plainly indicates a (conscious or unconscious)
ceminiscence on the part of the writer. For other explanations see the Prefatory Bemarks, p. 688 sq.
1. To Uatthev
8ίσμη
ϊρίζω
μίταίρω
διακαθαρίζω (Lk.7)
ίρίφιονι
μ(τηικ(σία
ayyr'iw
8ιακω\νω
(τα'ιρος
μί\ιορ
oyyos ?
διαλλάσσω
f ίδια ?
μισθόω
ήγκιστροτ
διασαφίω
€υνο(ω
/χυλών?
άθωοί
Βίδραχμο»
ηνουχίζω
νόμισμα
αίμα άθωορ
δΐίξο&ος
ίνρυχωρος
«Όσσιον ( Lk. 7)
αίμα δίκαιον
δκτής
ζιζάνιον
oiKfT€ia 1
αιμορροίω
διστάζω
ή\ί
οικιακός
αίρ€τίζω
διυλίζω
θαυμάσιος
όλιγοτΓίστία?
ακμήν
διχάζω
(θ(ί VOC.)
δναρ (κατ όναρ)
(βδομηκοντάχις
θ(ριστής
oi/«0£(Mk.VLk.?)
άκριβάω
(γιμσις
θρήνος ?
ουδαμώς
αναβιβάζω
(γκρΰπτω (Lk. ?)
θνμόω
βασιΧιία των ουρανών
αναίτιος
ό (θνικός (3 Jn. ϊ)
(ιδία, see tlSta)
πα-γιδίίω
άνηθον
ΐνθυμίομαι (Acts?)
Ιωτα
παραθαλάσσιος
απάγχω
ίίδ/α (ιδία)
καβά
παρακούω (Mk. ?)
απονίιττω
ΐϊρηνοποιός
παρατιθί'ναι παραβοΧήν
βάρΊ
ΐκ\άμπω
καταθίματίζω'ί
παρομοιάζω ?
βαρύτιμος ?
^Εμμανουήλ Π*. Sept.
καταμανθάνω
παροψίς
βασανιστής
ί'ρπορι'α
καταναθ( ματίζω ι
πιζός 1
(βασι\(ία τΣ» αυρανά», see
ϊμττρήθω
καταποντίζω
πικρώς (Lk. ?)
oipavos)
(ξορκίζω
κήτος fr. .Sept.
πλαΓυί
βαττ6Κσγ€ω
(ξώτΐρος
κουστωδία
πΧηροΰν το ρηθΐΡ
βιαστής
ϊπιγαμβρήο
κρυφα'ιος'Ι
πoXυXoyίa
βροχή
ΐπικαθίζω
κΰμινον
προβιβάζω (Acts?)
δαίμων (Jlk.? Lfc? Εβν.ϊ)
ΐπιορκίω
κώνωψ [σνμβ)
προσπαίω ?
δάνίΐον
ίπισπΐίρωι
(\αμβάν(ΐν σνμβουΚιον, see
προφθάνω
i dtiva
ipevyopju
μαΚακία
ττνρράζω ?
ixDiviDOAi, Writers.
699
Individual Writbs&
^ακ{οτ •χ*)ά (or paxu)
ραπίζ<ο
σαγήνη
σ^Χηνιάζομια
aiTurros
στατημ
(ΤνμβονΚίΟν XoiiHop•*»
σνναίρω {\6yo9)
σννύιη-ησ *.% '(
(TVfiWgavQ»
σνντάσσΦ
raXai^ov
ταφή
τοΰνομίΑ f
τραπ€ζί•^η9
ΤβνπημΛΐ *
τνφω
φημίζω ?
φράζω
φνγη CMk. 7)
φν\ακΓηιΧί»
φντΐία
Xavavaiot
χΧαμύί
ψίχω
Total 137 ί9 fr. Sept., 21 ?)
8. To Hark.
αγρεύω
a\a\ot
αλ €κτοροφωνί»
αΚλαχοΰ'!
αμφί3άΧΚθί \
άμφοδοί'
avatcvkiu^ ?
άναλοί
avamjbaiii t
άι/αστΐναζω
(ΐπόδτ/μον
απο(ΤΤ€γαζω
άτιμάω 1 ..
άτιμόω J
αφρίζω
βοαν€(θΤ^)ργ«ς
•γνηφενί
^ηΚανγώςΊ (cf.ττf'K<nJyω^^
8ιαρπάζω (λΐΐ. Τ)
8νσιςΊ
ΒίσκόΚος
(γγίστα ?
fLTfvl
(κθαμβίω
ίκθανμάζφ Γ
ΐκπ(ρισσως ?
€κφοβος (Heb. fr. Sept.)
€Κωΐ
(να•γκ€ΐΧίζομ/Λ
€ν€ΐΧ€ω
t^antva
(ξο υδ C ΟΓ-^ jnrte» ?
€πι^άλλω (inti.)
€πίκ€φάλαιον V
4πιρράπτω
ίπισυντρίχω
(σχάτως (e;^fi>)
(φφαθά
θαμβίω (Acta?)
θανάσιμος
BxrydTpmu
το ίκανον ποΐ€Ϊρ
καταβαρύϊ^ω ?
καταδιώκω
κατακσΤΓτω
κατ€νΚογ€ω1
κατοίκησα
κ€ντνρίων
Κ€φαλαίόω ]
Κ€φαλιόω
κοίμι etc.
κνλίω
κωμόπο\ΐ9
μ^θόριον ?
μηκννω
μογ(•γ)ιλα^θί
μυρίζω
νηυν€)(ώς
ξίστης
όδοποίί'ω ?
(obov ηούω ?)
όμμα fMt. V)
οστΓίρ?
ουά
οψιης (adj.)?
παιδ to^ev
πάμπολνς V
πανταχόθ€ν ?
τταρόμοίος
■πιζη (Mt-'O
ηρασιά
πμοαυΚίον
■προμ(ριμνόχΩ
προσήββατον ?
7τροσ€γγίζω 'ί
ττροσκ(φα\ atov
ττροσορμιζω
προσπορευομαι
σκώΧηξ fr. Sept.
σμνρνίζω
(τη€κου\ατοίρ
στασιαστής '•
στίβάί (armaas)t
στίΚβω
σν\\υπ(ω
σνμβοΰλιον rrowu ?
συμπόσιο»
συνθλίβω
Συραφοινίκίσσα
Συροφοιι/ίκισσα
Συροφοίνισσα
σνσσημον
σνστασιαστής ?
τάΚιθα
τηλην/ώί'ί (cf. iqKairyui)
τρίζω
τρυμαΧιά (Lk.?)
ν7Γ€ρηφανια
ν7Γ(ρπ(ρισσώί
ίηοΧηνιον
χάΚκίον
Total 102 (1 fr. Sept., 32 ?)
3. To Inke.
Ν. Β. Words fonnd only in the
Gospel are followed by a G. ;
those found only in the Acte, by
an Α.; those undesignated are
common to both.
άγαθουργίω Α.?
αγκάλη G.
άγνισμός Α.
άγνωστοι Α.
ayopa'ios Α.
ή-γρα α.
άγράμματοί Α.
άγραυΧίω G.
αγωνία G. ?
όη8ία Ο. ?
Αθηναϊος Α.
αθροίζω G. ?
αίι /of Ο. (Mt. fr. Sept.)
oiV6aw)ftai G.
α'τιον(τό)
αιτίωμη (-αμα^ \.
αιχμάλωτος G. fr. Sept.
ακατάκρίτος Α.
άκρίβαα Α
ακριβή! Α.
ακροατήριον Α.
ακωλντωί Α.
A\€^av8pns Α.
Αλί^αιδρΐΐΌί (or -oiit) a.
αλίσγημα \.
αλλογ€ίήϊ G.
αλλο'φυλορ Α.
άμάρτνρο! Α.
αμ7Γ€λονργ<!ί G.
άμνί'ω Α.
άμφιάι or -i-){j G ν
αΐ'π^αίίμόί Α.
αΐ'α3άλλω Α-
l•
άνάβ\(ψις G. fr. Sept-
άναΒολη Α.
ανηγι/ωρί^ω Α.? fr. Sept.
αΐ'αδ€ίκννμ*
dvddft^ts G.
αΐ'αδίδωμ4 Α>
αναζητ€ω
άναθίματχ άροθ^ματίζίΐρ α.
ανάθημα G• ?
dt'atdfui G.
άναίρ(σί,ς Α.
άνακαθίζω Α. (g. ?)
di^oxpt^ts' Α•
αΐ'ίΐλϊ;(/ι)ψΐί G.
αναντίρρητος Α-
άνανηρρητως Α.
άναπΐίθω Α.
ai/oTTf ipoff '
di/aTn^/joff
αΐ'ατΓτιΙσσω G-^
αΐΌίΤΤΓάω
ανατάσσομαι G*
ανατρέφω Α. (Ο•?)
αναφων€ω G•
di/ni^^tS Α.
dyeVXetTTTOi G•
avfvdfKTOi G.
αι/ίτα^ω Α.
di'fi'^erof Α.
ανΐνρισκω
άνθομοΚογΐΟμα* β•
dl'ί?ι/7Γατf^.'ω Α. i
ανθύπατος Α-
ανοικυδομί'ω Λ. fr. SeDC
άντ€\πον
άντιβαΚΚω G.
άντικαΐΚίω G•
ϋΐ^«ρΰ etc. Α-
άντΐ7Γαρ(ρχομθ' ι».
dM-t7r€>a(-i') ΐ ^
diTtVfpa ]
dI^l7Γt7Γτω Α.
άντοφθα\μ(ω 4-
ϋΐ/ωτΕρίκόί Α.
(υξιόω W. inf.)
άτταιτ€ω G.
άπαρτισμός γ,.
άπασπαζομΟί Α. ;
απβίμι "^eo Α.
dπeλαvwa Α.
QTrfXry^os Α.
απ ( ΟΓ αφ-) eX π- t'C» Ο.
άπΐρίτμητος Α. fr. Sept.
ατΓογρπφϊί
α7Γοδ«ατ«ί« G.l^
άπο8€χομαί
αττοθΧιβω G.
dTToKaraiTTaffti Α•
iNDJviDnAX Writers.
700
Individual Wkiteus.
αποκλ€ΐω a.
άηόλ^ίχω G•?
άττομάσσω Ο.
άποπίπτω Α.
αποπ\€ω Λ.
ατΓοττλι/νω ΐϊ. V
άποπνί-γω G. (Mt. Tf
απορία (•.
άπορρίτττω Λ.
άττοσκ€υάζω Λ.?
ετΓοηι/άσσω
άποφθΐγγορΜί Α.
άττοφορτίζομοΛ Α•
α7Γο>//'ΐ';(ω (ν.
i/iayf { ίφά yi) Α*
apyvpOKOTTOi Α.
"Ά^οψ• Λ.
"Apt ιοί πάγοί Α•
*Αρ€οπαγίτης Α.
αροτρον G.
άρτίμων Α.
αρ;^ίί/3ατ«($ς Α•
αρ;(£Τ6λώιπ/( Ο•
αΐτημος Α.
Ασίανόί Α.
Ασίάρ;^ι;9 Α.
ασίτί'α λ.
ασιτοί Α.
ασκ£α> Λ.
άσμίνωί Α.
ασσον Α.?
αστοάπτω G.
άσνμφωνοί Δ•
ασώτω» ΐτ.
ατ€ K1/0S G•
nrfp G.
αΰγ»; Α.
Aii-youoTOff G.
αυστηρός G.
αύτάτπτ^ί G.
avTo^etp Α.
ίίφαντος ν,.
άφίλότης Α.
άφ^λπίζω (c£. α}Γ«λΐΓ({ω) ο.
αφιξις Α.
αφνω Α.
αφρός G.
d;^Xi5ff Α.
βαθ€ωί G,?
βαθύνω G.
/3αλ(λ)άη•ιθΡ G.
ί3ά7Γτω G. (Jn.? Rev.?)
βαρύνω G. ?
τά 3ασιλΐΐα G.
βάσΐί Α.
βάι-οί CHeb. 6(ϋΛ) g.
β€\6ψη 0> Γ
Bfpotator Δ«
ίίία \.
βίαίΟί Α.
βίωσίί Λ.
βολή G.
βοΚίζω Α,
βου^ό^- G. £r. Sep^
βρα8νπλθ€ω Α•
β/3ΐ';ΐίω Α.
βρώσιμος G.
βνρσ€ϋς Α,
βωμός Α.
>"ία Α.
ΓαλαηκοΓ Α•
γίλίίω G.
•γερουσία Α•
•γήρας G.
■yXfuicoff Α•
γι/ώστηί Α.
δακΓΐίλίΟδ- G.
δ(ΐΐ'(6)ιστηΓ G•
δαπάνη G-
δίΐσώαιμονία Α»
δίίσι^αίμων Α.
δ^καδιίο Λ. ?
δεκαοκτώ G. ?
δ€^ιο/3όλο5? 1
δ6^ίολά/3ορ J
Α^ρβαΙος Α.
δβσμί'ω (ι.?
δβσμοφυλα^ Α•
^ίσμώτης λ.
δίυτβραΐοϊ Α.
δίυΓ^ρϋττρωτοί G.?
^ημηγορίω Α.
δ^μο? \.
δί^μοσίο? Α•
δ£α/:^άλλω (i.
δίαγγελλω (Ro. £γ• Sept.)
δκιγϋ'ώσκω Α•
δίαy^'α>pίfω G. ?
διαγ^ωσί? \.
διαγογγυ'^ω G.
8ια'γρηγορ€ω G•
^ιαΒίχομαΐ Α.
δίαδο;^θ5 Λ.
διαδι'δωμι (Jn.? Rev. 7)
δίακα^αψω G.?
δίακατίλί'^^^ο/ιαι Α.
διακονώ Α,
διαλαλάω G.
διαλίί'πω G.
δίιίλί^ίίΤΟ? Α.
8ία\ιμπάνϋί> Α•Γ
διαλιίω Α•
^αψάχομαι Α•
Βιαμ^ρισμός G.
οιανίμω Α.
δια l'fOω G.
διαί'ότ/μα G;
duiiaiicrcpCM» G.
δωια)ω Λ.
διαπλ^'ω Α.
8ΐίΐπον€ω Α.
διηπορίω
διαπραγ/χατηΐομλλί G.
8ίαπρίω Λ.
διασ^ια) G.
8ιασπ€ίρω Α.
Βαιστημα Α.
δίαταράσσω 6. ίτ- t»*;pt.
δίατίλ/ω Α.
διατϊ^ρ€ω
Βιαφ^ύγω \.
Βιαφθυρά Α.
8ίαφν\άσσω G. £γ- S^jt-
^ΐίίχαριζω Λ.
δϊα;^λ£ΐ/ά^ω Α.?
διαχωρίζω ΐί.
^κνθυμίομαΐ Α.?
8ΐ€ξ(ρ)(ομαι Α.?
δΐίρωτάω Α-
8ί€τία Α.
Βιτ;-γησίς G.
δί^αλασσορ Α•
διισττ/ρι
διϊσ;^υρί^ο/χα»
δίΚίί^ω t..?
δικαστής Α. (g. ?)
διοδ^ύω
δίοτΓίτι^ς• Α.
Οίόρθωμα Α.?
Δίοσκονροι Α•
δούλϊ^
δοχή G.
δρα;^/χή G.
δυσ,^αστακτοί G. (Mt.?)
δυσfvτίpία {-rkpiov) Α.
δωδίκάφυλοί' Α.
ra ι. (Mk.?)
ίβ^ομηκηιταΐζ Α.?
(ΐί8ομηκονταπ€ντι Α.?
'Ε/3ρίΐϊκόί c ?
ίγκάθΐτος G.
(■γκλημα Λ.
?γ(οι• fV)(a;oi G.
(ϋαφίζω G. fr. Sept•
ίδαφοΓ Α.
(βί^ω G.
(ΙσκαΧίομαι Α.
ίίσπι;δάω Α.
ίΐστρίχω Λ.
Ικατουτάρχηί Α. G.7 (Mt.7)
(κβολή Α.
(κγαμίσκω G. ?
€κ8ίηγίομαί Α.
ίκδοτορ Α.
«ίΐίΤί Λ.
ΐκβαμβοΐ Α.
ίκθίτοί Λ.
(κκοΚυμβάω Α.
(κκυμίζω ι;.
(κκμίμαμαι (or (κιψίμομαί) β.
(κλαλ(ω Λ.
€κλ(ίπω <;. ? (Ileb. fr. Sept.)
(κμνκτηρ'ιζίΛ Ο.
ίκπίμπω Α.
ίκττη&άω Α.?
ΕΚπλίω Α.
ίκπλτ^ρόω Α•
(κπλήμωσκ Λ.
ίκσώ^ω Λ. y
ίκταράσσϋί Α•
ίKTfλ€ω G.
fKTfvfia Α.
fKTfv((rr(pop Ο•?
ίκτίθημι Α.
(κχωρΐω G.
fκψύχω Α.
('λαιώΐ' Λ. (γτ. ?)
'Ελαμ(β)ίτΐ7Γ Α.
?Αίυσΐί Α.
€λκάω (i.
'Ελλ:;ριστήΓ Α.
ί'μ^άλλω G.
(μβιβήζω Α.
('μμαίνυμαι Α.
(μττητράω Α.?
(μ((η• ('ν-)πΐ'(α> Α-
ΐμφανήί Α. (ΙΙο. ίτ. Sept.)
fvavTi ?
ivherjs Α.
(νδίχιται (impers.) β,
(νδιδϋσκω (ί. (]Mk.?)
(vfhpa Α.
ivfbpevu) Α. (g•?)
ivfhpov Α. ?
(νισχίω Α. (g. ?)
tvKvos cf. ryxvoc
eV e'a G.
iv{v)eos A.
^ΪΊ/Ρΐ'ω G.
(τη) c'vovra G.
fVoχλfω 0.? (neb.fr.Sept.)
ΐνην^ω cf. ipirvfia
ίντόπίΟί A.
ΐντρομοί Λ. (Ileb.?)
il^Vl/iOC A. fr. bept.
ΐνωτίζομαΐ A.
ίζαιτίω c,.
(ζά\\ομαι A.
ΐζαστράπτ9Λ G.
ίξίΐμΐ \.
(ξολοθρίΰω \
i^oKefipdm ]
(ξορκιστήί A•
ί|οχή A.
ΐζυπνοΐ A.
Jndividuai, Wbitebs.
701
iNSinOnAL WBlTEBa
ίζωθίω A.
('παθροίζω G.
βτταχτίω (j.
ΐπακροόομαι A•
('navayKts A.
ίπανίρχομαί 6•
<Vcip;(fios Α.?
(παρχ{()ία Α.
€;7αυλίί Λ. ίτ. Sept.
fneycipm Α.
fnetdqnep G.
t7r(or (φ-^ί'Λο»
ίπίίμι (elp*) Α.
(ττασίρχομοί G. ?
infKfiva Α. fr. Sept.
το ίτη^αλλο» G.
(ττίβοάιο Α. ?
ίτΓΐβονΧτ) Α.
(τηγίνομαι Α.
ϊπί^ημεω Α.
«ΤΓΐΚίλλω Α. ?
'E7ri)Coi/f)(f)ioi Λ,
ΐπίκονρία Α.
(πικρίνω ('■
ί-ϊτι\€ίχω G. ?
eVi^cXfta Α.
ί'τΓΐμΛώί G.
eViff ύα) Α•
ίτη'ΐΌία Α
ϊπιπορΐΰομοί G. fSept.)
ίΤΓίρρίτΓτ-ω G. (ϊ Pet. fr.
ίττισιτισμόί G.
{'πίσκίυά^ω Α.?
ΐπιστάτηί G.
ΐπίστηρίζω Α•
€ηιστροφη Α.
(ΤΓίσφαλης Α.
ίπισχνω G.
(Τίίτοαντό Λ.?
ίπίτροπενίύ G. Γ
ΐ-ηηροπη Α.
επιφανή! Α. ? £γ. Sept.
€ττιφων€ω
ίπιχαρία
€πιχ€ω ι:.
('π^ήσθη χρόροΐ 1
f ττλήσίτ/σαΐ' ijptgiu \
€'7ΓΟΚ€λλω Α. ?
epe'ihiji Λ.
ίρημοι (αί) G.
ccnrfpa
icrrrepivos G. ?
f uyf G. ?
eifpyeria A>
cvfpycnji G.
ΐί'θυδρομζω A.
€νθνμθ! A.
(νθύμως Α.?
(ίπορίω Α.
evnopia A•
ίύρακνλω»
ΐύροκλϋδύ»' ^ Δ»
(ίρυκλΰδωμ
(ϊφορίω G.
(νφροσννη Α.
ίφάλλομαι Α.
(ίφίίδον, cf. rirciiVw)
Έφίσωί Α.
ίφημίρία G.
^et-yoff G.
ζίνκτηρία Α.
ίήη^μη Α.
ζωΐΓ^ονΐίύ (1 ΤπΒ• Υ)
ήγίμονήΐΛ G.
ήy(μovla G.
ημίθανήί G.
V,\of (τ(ί) Ο»
ήχώο.?
^άμ/3θί
θάρσοί Α.
0fa Α.
ΰιομαχίω Α• Ι
ί€θμά;(Οϊ Α.
θίρμη Α.
θιωρία G.
βηρ^ΰω Γ,.
θορυβάζω G. ? (cf. ηιρβά(α>)
θραύω G. fr. Sept•
θρόμβο! G.?
θυμιάω (ΐ.
θνμομαχίω Α.
ΐασίί
ίδρώ; G. ?
ί^ρατΕνω G.
iCpii(7uX09 Α•
ικμάί G.
ίππ^ύϊ Α.
iaa-yyeXos G.
ισω? Γτ.
Ιταλίκόί Α•
καθάτΓΤίύ Α.
καθημιριρόί Α.
κα^ολον Α.
καθοπΚίζω G.
κπ^οτι
κάκηί^ν Α. G. ? pik. ?)
κάκωσί5 Α. fr. Sept.
καρ8ιογνώστηΐ Α.
καρποφόρος Α•
κατάβησίί G.
KarayytXiut Α.
καταΒ^ω G.
καταΒΙκη Α. ?
καται:λ€ΐο>
/ω?1
fr.
Sept.
(caTcutXijpoSor/ci» ?
Λατα<λί;ροίΌ,
κατακλινω G
κατακολου^/ω
κατακρημνίζίύ G•
καταλι^ά^ω G.
KaTiiXotTTOS Α. £γ. Sept*
καταμίνω Α.
κατανευω G.
καταννσσφ Α.
καταπίπτω Α. (g.?)
καταττλ/ω G.
καταμίθμΐίύ Α.
κατασβί'ω Λ.
κατασοφίζομοί Α• fr. Sept.
κατασΓίλλω Α.
κατασνρω G.
κατασφάζω G•
κατάσ;^6σ•ι? Α.
κατατρέχω Α.
καταφΐρω Α.
καταφρονψτηί Α. ίτ. Sept.
κατα•\Ιηιχω G.
KOTf ύ^ωλοί Α.
κατ(φίστημι Α.
κατοικία Λ.
κατόρθωμα Α.?
Kepapos G.
Κ(ράτιον G.
κηρίον G.?
κίχρημι G.
κλάσΐί
κλινάριον Α.?
icXiVf ( ή ήμίρα 0>
κλινι'δίοι» G.
({λισία G.
κοιτών Α.
κολυμπάω Α.
κολωι/ια (->^ια itc) Α»
κοπ•€τ05 Α.
κοπριά G.
κόπριον G. ?
κόραξ G.
κόροϊ G.
κονφ'ιζω Α•
κραι^άλί^ G.
κράτίστοΓ
κρνπτή (ΟΓ κρύΐϊτη) β.
κτήτωρ Χ.
\ακτίζω Α.
λαρτΓρότι^ϊ Α.
"λαμπρώς G.
Xafctrros G.
λάσκω Α.
Xfios G. fr. Sept
Xijrir Α.
λήροΓ G.
Xi^fpTiMJi Α.
λίιτράω G. (Mt- ?)
λ<μηι/ Α.
λίψ- Α.
Xoytoff Α.
Λυκαονιστί Δ.
Χνμαίνομοί Α-
XvoiTcXti G,
λυτρωτής Α.
payua (->ίο) »
μay€vω Α.
μαθήτρια Α.
μακροθυμως Α.
μανία Α.
μαντ€νομυΛ Α
μαστίζω Α.
μαστοί G. (Κβν ι^-
juyoXftot Α. (&. Λ
μΐΧίσσκκ G. Ιί
μιριστής G.
μ€σημβρία Α.
μίστιίω Α.
μβτα^((λλο0 Α«
μετακαλώ» Α.
μίταπ-ί'μίΓβ. Α•
μςτΐωρίζω Q•
μ€τοικίζ(ο Δ*
μΐτρίως Α.
μηδαμω! Α.
μήπον Α. Γ
μίσθιος G.
μίσθωμα Α•
μΐ'α G.
μ<5γΐ5 G. ί
μοσχοποΐίϋΛ Α.
νανκΚηρος Α.
yaCs Α.
ν€ανίας Α.
«οσσοί (wootrii) β. ίτ 8*pt
νεωκόροι Α.
νησίον Α.
νοσσιά β. ?
κοσσόί, see ■•<»ΓτΛ•
ογδοι^κοντα G•
όδ^υω G.
όδοιπορεβ» Α«
οδυΐ'άα)
οθόνη Α.
οίκημα Α.
οικοδόμοί Α. i
οικονομάω G.
6κν€ύ> Λ.
όΧοκλι^ρύΐ Α•
όμβρος G.
ύμ<Χ/ω
6μότ€χρος Α.
όχειδοί G.
όπ-ότί G. /
ότΓτά»«» Α.
όίΓΓΟΓ G.
όργνιά Α.
op(e)ii<i$i θ.
όρθρίζα Ο.
Individual Writehs.
702
InPIVIDI'AL λ^ΙίΙΤΕΒίΙ
ομβμίος G>?
ορνιζ Ο.?
ύροθίσία Α.
ονρανόθ(ν Α.
ουσία G•
όφρνς G.
ο;^λίω Λ. (g.7)
υχλοπούω Α.
παθητός Λ.
TToiff. r;. G.
ΊΓαμπΧηθίΙ G.
ϊΓα;'δο;(ίίθί' (ΟΓ-κίοΐ') G.
τΓΐινΒοχίύς (οΓ -lefuff) G.
πανοικί (οτ-κ(ί) λ.
ππιπ•(ΐ;^Γ; or 7Γαιπ•α;^Α v.?
ττα^ττ; (θΓ -ττ;) Λ.
παραβάλλω Α. (Mk ?)
παράδοξος G.
πηρηθίωρίω Α.
τταραινίκύ V.
ναρακαθίζομοΛ *» ?
παρακαθίζω ίί. f
πα^ακαλύτΓτω 6•
παμαλ£γομαι. Λ.
τταραλίΟί G.
7ru/)iifo^€a> Λ•
7Γ ραπλίω Λ.
πηράσημος Α.
τταρατΐίνω Α.
πηρατηρησις G.
7Γίΐ/ίατυ')';(άϊ'ω Α.
πη^}ηχ€ΐμασία Α.
πα/ίρμβύλλω »..?
πα/3ίΐ/ο;^λ€ω λ.
παρθίνία α.
παροίχομοί Α•
τταροτρυνω Α.
ττατρώυς Α.
πίδίϊ'ϋ? G.
π(ζ(νω Α.
πίΐράω Α. (Heb. Π
π€ΐ'ί;^ρό$' G.
TTfi^fKaiSe'ieaTOC G.
ττζραιτίρω Α. ?
ΤΓίρκίτΓτω G. ?
τΓίρίαστράτΓΤίι^ /
π^ρικαθίζω G.?
•η^ρικρατης Λ-
πΐρικρντΓτω G.
π€ρίκυκλόω G.
τΓ^ριλα'μττω
π^ριμίνω κ.
7Γ€ρΐξ Α.
TTfplOUCCO» G.
TTfpioums G.
Tfpio;(i7 ^■
ΐΓίριρ(ρ)ήγηιμ4 A-
πίρισττάω (;.
η€ριτρ€πω Α.
ίτηγαρορ G.
ττίίζω t;.
ΤΓΐμττράω Λ,?
mtfaKiBiop G. ?
τηνακΊς (;.?
ττλίω (Rev. ?)
πλημ(μ)νρα (or -ΰρα) G.
ΤτλοΟΡ Λ.
TTftiCTOf Α.
πΐΌΐ^ Λ-
πολίτης (Ileb.?)
πολλαπλάσιων <ί. (Mt. ?)
7Γολιτάρ;(ϊ;5 Λ.
Ποντικός Λ. [Sept.)
πόρρω c (Mt. and Mk. fr.
πορφνρόπωλίί Α.
'KpaypoTtvopxu (i.
πράκτωρ G.
ιτρ€σβ€ία G,
πρηνης Α.
προβάλλω
προ^αταγγίλλω Α. (2 Co.V)
προκηρύσσω Α.
προρίλβτάω G.
προοράω \.
προπορ€νω
προσαναβαίνω Ο.
προσαναλισκω (ί. f
προσανίχω ν. ?
προσαπΐΐλίω Α.
προσαχ€ω Α.?
ττροσδαπαναω G.
προσ^^ομαι Α,
προσδοκία
προσίάω Λ.
προσ^ργάζομαι G.
προσ^χΐΐν iavTOiS
προσκληρόω \.
προσκλίνω \. .''
προσληλ(ω \.
προσπ^ΐί/ο? \.
προσπηγννμι \.
προσηοίίω ι.. (•Τη. V V)
προσρήγννμι G. (Mt. ?)
προσφάτως \,
πρησ^Ραύω (^.
προσ ωπολη(μ)7ΓΤη^ Α.
προτάσσο^ λ. ?
προτΐίνω Λ.
προτρέπω λ.
ίτροϋπάρ;^»
προφίρω (;.
προχΐΐρίζω Α.
προχ€ίροτον€ω \.
πρώ (οΓ -ά-, ΟΓ -«^) μα Α.
πρωτοστάτης α.
πρώτων Α. ?
πτοίω (;.
πηίσσω G,
νύθων Α*
ττυρα ν,
ραβδούχος Α.
ρα8ίονργημα Α.
pahiovpyia Α.
ρί/γμα (,.
ρητωρ Α.
'Ρωμαϊκός G. ?
ρώρννμΐ Α.
σάλο? G.
σαΐ'ΐί Λ.
σf βαστάς Α.
Σιδ'^ι^ιοί
σίκάριοί \.
σικΐρα ν.
σιμικίνθιον Α•
σίΡίά^ω (..
σιτίυτο'? (;.
σίΤί'ομ Λ. ?
ΟΊτυμίτριον G.
σκάπτω G.
σκάφη Α.
σκίυ)7 Λ.
σκηνοποιός Α.
σκιρτάω G-
σκληροτράχηλος \.
σκϋλον (οΓ σκΰλορ) G.
σκωλί/κάβρωτον Α.
σορό? (..
σπαργαζ/όω (ί.
σπ^ρμολόγος Α.
στέμμα Λ.
στΓρίοω λ.
στιγμή ('..
στρατηγός
στρατίά((ί. 2 Co. Χ. 4 Tdf.)
στρατοπΐ^άρχηςΊ
στρατοπΐ8αρχος ?
στρατόπ^δοί' G.
ΣτωΙκο'? \.
συγ'/ί'ι/ίΐα
σνγγ^νίς (;. ?
συγκαλύπτω G.
συγκαταβαίνω Α.
σνγκατατίθημι Ο,
σνγκατα^Ιτηφίζφ Α
σ^ryκll'€ω \.
συγκομίζω Α.
σ^ryκv7Γτω G.
συγκυρία G.
συγχέω Α.
(Γΐτγ;ι^υσΐ9 Α.
tn/Ci'jfi^TT^ffiy Α.?
σνκάμίίΌΡ (ί•
<Γυκομορ€α
-μωρί'α
-μωρά ία
συκοφαντίω ο.
σνλλαγί'^ομοι G.
συμβάλλω
σνιιπα^}αγίνομΜ γ. . ( 2 Tim. V)
η'
συμπάρί ίμι \ .
σνμττίριλαμβάνω Α.
συμπίνω Λ.
συμπίπτω ('<• ?
συμπλτ^ρόω
συμφΰω (..
συμφωνία (;.
συμψηφίζω Α.
συναθροίζω Α. (g. ί)
συι^ακολου^ί'ω G. (Mk.?)
συΐΌλι^ω Λ-
συι^αλλάσσω Α. ?
αυι^αρπά^ω
συνδρομή Α-
σΰνΐίμι ((Ιμ'ι) \. (g.^)
σνν€ΐμι {(Ιμΐ) G.
συι/ρλαΰΐ'ω Α. ?
συνίπιτίθημι Α.?
συνίπομαι Α.
συν^φίατημι λ.
συνθλάω (.. (^It. /)
σννθρνπτω Α.
συΓκατανίΐίω Α.?
σuIΌδfιίω Α.
συΐΌδί'α G.
σνΐΌμΐλ(ύ> Α.
συνομορ€ω Α.
συΐ'τόμω^ Α. (^Ik. ??)
σύντροφος Λ.
σΐ'ί/τυγ;^«/'ω (-.
συνωμοσία Α.
Σΰροίΐ;. (Mk. V)
Σιίρτίϊ (or σίρτις) Α.
συσπαράσσω (.. (Mk. ?}ί
συστρίφω \. (Alt. V)
συστροφη Α.
σφάγιο»/ Α. fr. Sept.
σφοΗρώς Α.
σφυδρόν Λ. ?
σφνρόν \. ?
σ;(θλή Α.
τακτό? Λ-
ται/Οι* (τα wi/) Α.
τάραχος Α.
τά;^ιστα Α.
Τ€κμηριον Α.
Τ€λ€σφορ€ω G.
ΤίσσαρακοιΠ"α€τι;ρ Α.
τfσσαpf σκαιδίκατΌΡ Α-
TfTpaoiOi' Α-
τίτραπλόοΓ G.
τ£τραρχ€ω <•■ \^Kapdi^
τιθ^σθαι (ΐς τά 2>τα ΟΓ ί»
τιμωράω \.
τοί;^ο5 Α-
τρανμα G.
τραυματικό)
τρα;^υ?
Tpieria Α.
τρίστ^γος Α.
INDIVIDUAL WrITEK8.
703
Individual Wbiterb.
τρισ\ιΚίθί A.
τρθφθφθρ€(ύ . j
τρνγων <;. fr. bept.
τυρβάζω G- ? (cf. θορυβάζω)
Tvptos A.
τυφωνικός A.
uypos (;.
ύδ^ιυΤΓίΚόί G.
urrepeifiov A.
νπΐρ€κχννω G.
νπ€ρωον A.
ν7Τ7)ρ€Τ€ω A.
ύ7Γο;:ίάλλω A.
ΐ'7Γο^ώΐΊη;/χι A.
υποκρίνομαι G.
ΰττοΧαμβάνω (3 Jn# ?)
ύποϊ/οεω λ.
ύποπλ^ω Α.
ΰποΊτνίω Α.
νποστρώννυμι G.
ΰποτρίχω Λ.
νποχωρ€α> G-
υφαίικύ G. ?
φαντασία Α.
φάραγξ G. fr. Sept.
φόσΐί Λ.
φάτνη G.
φίλανθρώπως Α.
φιλϊ; (ή) G.
φιλονΐΐκία G.
φιλόσοφος Α.
φιλοφρόνως Λ.
φόβηθρον{θν -Τρον) G.
φόρτος Α.?
φρονίμως G,
φρυάσσω Α. fr. Sept.
φρύγανον Α.
φυλακίζω Α.
φνλαξ Λ.
Χαλδαΐοϊ Α•
χάραΙ G•
;^άσμα G.
χειμά^ω Α.
χ€ΐραγωγ€ω λ*
;(f φαγωγόί Α•
;^Xeuiifw Α.
;to/joff G.
χόρτασμα Α.
χρ€ωφ(ΐΚίτης{θΤχρ€οφιΧ.) G.
χρονοτρίβ€ω Α.
;(μώί Α•
χώρος Α-
ψ'ώ;^ω G•
ώΐ'^ομΐϋ Α.
ωόν G.
Gospel 312 (11 fr. Sept., 52?)
Acts 478 (15 fr. Sept., 49?)
Both 61.
Total851 (26 fr. Sept., 101?)
4. To all three SynoptUtB.
α)/αι/ακτ€ω
dye λ 7
αλα?
αλά/3αστ/3θ»'
a^iyv λβγω υμ&ν
αι/α/3οάω ?
αι^ακλινω
αττα/ρω
αποΐ$?;μ£ω
d7Γoκfφαλl'fι»
αποκυλ ι'ω
οί ίιρτοι της ηροθ€\Γ*ων
άσβεστος
ασκός
βαπτιστής
Β€€\ζ€βουΚ (•β»νά)
γαλήνη
•γαμίσκω ?
διαβλίπω ?
δίαλογ/^ομαι (Jn.?)
δυσίίίίλω?
ίκατοι/ταπλασι'ων ?
«μπαίνω
ΐπίβλημα
ίπι-γραφη
^πισυνάγω
ΐρημωσις
(ύκοπώτ€ρόν €ίΓϋ
κακά) 9 ^χ(ΐΡ
κάμηλος
κατα•γ€λάω
κράσπ^δον
κρημνός
κωφός
λ^γ^ώί/ (^-yiu)t')
λί'ττμα
μακρός ?
νυμφών
θίκυδίσίΓ(ί'Π/$
ορχ€θμαι
παραλυτικός'^
π(νθ(ρά
πΐρ'ιλυπος
πήρα [Sept.)
{πόρρω Mt. and Mk. fr.
πίνα^
προβαίνω
πρωτοκαθεδρία
πρωτοκλισία
πύpyoς
ραφίς ?
ρήγνυμι (Gal. fr. Sept.)
σίναπι
σινδών
σκυλλω ?
σπλα-γχνίζομαΐ
τα σηόριμα
στάχυς
στίγη
συμπνίγω
συντηρ^ω
τ(λώνης
τελωνιον
τίλλω
τρίβος fr. Sept•
υίος Δαυίδ
υποκριτής
φέγγος':
χοίρος
ψ€υδομαρτνρ€ω (Ro. ?)
^ρ-ιχίον
Total 78 (Ifr. Sept., 10?)
5. To John.
Ν. Β. Words peculiar to the
Gospel, or to one or another of
the Epistles, are so marked.
αγγελία 1 ep.
άγγ^λλω (ί. ?
άλΐΐυω G.
αλλα;^ϋ^(ΐ' G.
αλοτ; G.
αμαρτίαν εχειν G., 1 Ep,
αμήν αμήν G.
5ι/ {iav) G.?1kp.?
άναμάρτητος G. (viii. 7)
ζωής 1
άνθρακιά G.
άνθρωποκτόνος G., 1 Ep.
αντίχριστος 1 Ep., 2 Ep.
άιηλίω G.
αντλημα G.
άπεκριθη και €ΐπε G.
άπίρχομαι εις τα οπίσω G.
α,τοσυνίίγωγοί G.
αρ{ρ)αφος G.
αρχιτμικλ^νορ G.
όαρ;^ωί'Γοίί κόσμου (τούτου) (. .
αυτόφωρος G. (viii. 4).
βαΐον (..
βασιλίσκος G. ?
βιβρώσκω G.
Υαββαθα G.
γενετή ι;.
γεννηθήναι άνωθεν G., εκ (του)
θεού G. 1 Ερ., « (τοΰ) ΐΓνίύ-
ματο; G.
αΐ'αστασίί ! " ,' V G
Ι ίcpί(Tfω$■
γέρων G.
γλωσσοκομοί» G.
δακρύω G.
θ((λιάω G.
δήποτε G. ? (ν. 4)
δία^ωι/ια^Ο) G.
δίδυμος G.
εγκαίνια G.
είναι εκ τοΰ κόσμου G., 1 Βτ•
9 Ι CK των άνω 1
iti/at 1 » ^ / ?■ G»
ι ex τωΐ' κάτω |
εκνευω 1
έλιγμα G.?
εμπόριον G.
εμφυσάω G.
ε'ξερχεσθαι εκ (από, 7ra/>a)
τοΰ tffoC G.
ε^υπνίζω G.
επάρατος G. ?
επενδύτης G.
επιδέχομαι 3 Ερ.
επιχρίω G.
(ή) εσχάτη ήμερα G.
^ώι^^υμί G. (Acts ?^
ζλθ9 G.
^TTfp G. ?
θεοσεβής G.
^ήκτ; G.
θρίμμα G.
ίλασμο? 1 Ερ.
καθαιρώ G. (Heb. ?)
καταγράφω G. ? (viii. βΧ
κέδρος G. ?
κειρία G.
κίρμα G.
κερματιστης G.
κηπουρός G.
κίνησις G. (ν. 3)
κλί^μα G.
κοίμησις G.
κολνμβήθρα G.
κομψότερον εχεκν ft.
κρίθινος G.
XeVriov G.
λι^οστμωτορ G»
λίτρα G.
λογχι; G.
μίσοω G.
Mfffffi'ay G.
μετρητής G.
μίγμα G. Ι
μοϊ^ G.
i'lKi; 1 Ερ.
νιπτηρ G.
νόσημα G.? (ν. 4)
νύσσω G.
ο^ω G.
όθόνιοΡ G. (Lk. ?)
έμοΟ G. (Lk.?)
Individual Wbiters.
704
IndIVIDDAI, WsiTERft
ovapiov Q.
ούκοΰν G.
όλ/'άμίον G.
iraiddpiov G. (Mt-?)
jrfviipor t;.
πιριΒίω (;. [3 Ep.
nepLnazelv iv αΚηθΐία 2 Kp.,
VfpinaTelv iv rrj σκοτία^ (or
cV τω CTKoret) G-, 1 i:p.
ΊΤξριττατύν cV Tuj φωτι 1 iCp.
TTotcii/ Trji» oArjdfiai' G., 1 Ep.
πότ€ρο! G.
προβατικη G.
προβάτιυν G. ?
προσιιΐΓί'ω G. (Mk. ? Lk. ?)
7Γ;3θσ)£υιτ}τη5 G.
προσφάγιοκ G.
■πτίρνα G.
πτΰσμα G.
ρ<'ω G.
'Ρω/ιαϊστι β.
σκδ'λοί G.
σκηνοττηγία G.
συγ;(μάο;ι.ΐΛ4 >i.?
σνμμαθητ,)^ G.
σνίΐσίρχομαι G.
Ti/ti/ioi- G., 1 EP. (Mk.? Gal. ?)
Terapraiof G.
τετράμηνος (ί.
TiocVai ψν}(ήν G., 1 Ep,
Τί'τλοϊ G.
uSyUi'a G.
ύπαη ηαΐί G. (Mt. ?)
ίφαντός G.
φανοί G.
φίλοπρωτήΐύ 3 Ep.
φ\ναρ£ω 3 Ep.
φpayί\λιou G.
χίΐμαί G.
χύρτη! 2 Ep.
Xfipappos a.
χο\άω G.
χρίσμα 1 Ε ρ;
{τυχην τιθίναι, see ηβίναι ψ.
^Ιτωμίον G.
Gospel 114 (12?)
Ερρ. 11
Gospel and Ερρ. 8(1?)
TOTAL• 133 (13 V)
6. To Paul.
α. To THE Longer Epistles
AXD Philemon.
N. B. Words peculiar to any
single Epistle are eo designated
by the appended abbreviation.
άβαρήί 2 Co.
άγαθωσννη
Syauos 1 Co.
άγανάκτησίί 2 Co.
dyfvj)s 1 Co.
ΰγνότης 2 Co.
όγϊ/ώί riiil.
αγριίΚαιοι Κο-
αγρυπνία 2 Co.
(ίδύπαΐΌΓ 1 Co.
(ΐδιίλωί 1 Co.
αδΐ(ΐλ€ί7Π'ω^
άΒροτηί 2 Co.
άθά cf. μαραν αθ&
άθεη! Ε [ill.
άθυμίω Col.
aiViy/ia 1 Co.
ιιΊσίί>)σίί I'Lil.
αίσ;(ρολογια CoL
αίσχράτη! Eph.
αΐτΐάομαι Ro.
αϊ;(μαλω7-(ΰω Eph. £τ• Sept.
(2 Τ.?)
άκαιρίομαι PhiL
ακωμ 1 Co.
αΚαΚητοζ Ro.
ίίλλτ^γορί'ω GaL
αΚντΐΟί l*liil.
άμΐμτττωί 1 Τη.
αμ€τακίνητθ9 1 CC-
d^er ti/ie λ Tjrof
αμ6Τίΐΐ'ο;ρ-ο$" Ro.
αμ€τμος 2 Co.
αναί^ύλλω PlliL
di^uKati/oci)
αϊΌκαλύτΓτω 2 Co•
αίΌκόπτω (ial.?
ai'aXoyia Ιίο.
αναμένω 1 Th.
di^d^iOf 1 Co.
άναξίως 1 Co.
αναπΌλόγι^τοί Ro>
άρΒμίζω 1 Co.
ανεκδιήγητος 2 Co.
ανελ^ϊ^μων Ro.
di'f^f/jevCor -ραΰ-)ΐΊ7Τ0ί Ro
di'f^t;^ytaaroff
dcf^-ios Col.
ανθραξ Ro. fr. Sept.
d f^/j ωττάρρσΛ Off
άνθμωτΓίνον X/yo) Ro.
ανοιξις Eph.
αΐ'ο/ζωϊ Ro.
di/o;^i7 Ro.
α^τανππλϊ^ρόω CoL
ά'ταττό^οσις Col.
djn-t'Xij(^j^is 1 Co.
άνημισθια
άΐ'Τΐστρατ€νομ€α Rc
απαλ^ίω Kph.
άπαΧλοτριόω
άπαρασκ€ναστοί 2 Co.
απ(οΓ dφ-)€cθof PhlL
αττειμι (thsuiil
άπί^πον 2 Co.
απεκδύομαι CoL
άπί'κ^νσις Col.
djreXeuiJfyjof 1 Co
άπερισπάστως 1 Co.
ατΓοδίί^ίί 1 Co-
αποκίΐ/^αδοκια
αποκατα\\άσ<Γ(ύ
άττόκριμα 2 Co.
άπορφαι/ίζω 1 Th•
άηοστνγ^ω Ro.
dπorίVω Philem•
αποτολμάω Ro.
άποτομία Ro.
απουσία i*hil.
άπύχρησις CoL
αμα οϋΐ'
αμά Ro.
αρραβών
αρέσκεια CoL
αρμόζω 2 Co.
άρπαγμόί PhiL
άρρητος 2 Co.
αμνιτίκτων 1 Cow
dσαtΊ'ω 1 Ih. ?
άσθειη^μα R/^
ασοφος Ejjll•
ασπίϊ lio.
dorarew 1 Co.
άσνρθετος Ro.
άσχημηνεω 1 COi»
άσχημων I Co.
ατακτί'ω 2 Th.
ατακτοί 1 Th.
ατάκτως 2 Tb,
ατομος 1 Co.
αυγάζω 2 Co.?
ανθαίρετος 2 Co.
αυλοί 1 Co.
αϋζησίζ
αυτάρκης PhiL
άφεώία Col.
άφικνΐομαι Ro*
Ά;^οϊκόί 1 Co.
αχρίίοω Ro. fr. Sept.
άχρηστος Philem.
η\Ι/νχης 1 Co.
Βαάλ Ro. fr. Sept.
βασκαίνω Gal.
Βίλι'πλ or BiXtop 2 Co.
iSf'Xos• Kph.
/3pa/3fioi/
βραβΐϋω Col.
βρόχος 1 Co.
^υίίοί 2 Co.
Γαλάτϊ^ί Gal.
yf<x)pytov 1 Co.
γνησίως Phil.
ypaTTTos Ro.
γνμΐ'ητενω 1 Co•
δάκι^ω (ial.
Δίΐμασκί^ΐ'ίίί 2 Co.
^ειγματίζω Col. (Mt. 1ί^
^ιαΐρ^σις 1 Co.
διαστολ)^
δίδακΓο? 1 Co. ( Jn. fr. Seft- ,
διερμηνεία 1 Co. ?
8ιερμηΐ'(ντης I Co. V
Βικαΐοκρισία Ro.
Βικαίωσις Ro.
διοπεμ 1 Co.
δί;^οστασια
δίψοϊ I Co.
δογματί'^ω C(^.
δοκίμϊ}
δΰλΐϋί 2 Co.
δολίο'ω Ιίο. fr. SepC»
δολόω 2 Co.
Βότης 2 Co.
δουλίΐγωγ€ω 1 Co.
φράσσομαι 1 Co.
δυΐ'πμόω Col. (Kph. ? Hetkjf)
δννατ€ω 2 Co. (ΙΙθ.ϊ)
Βυσψημίω 1 Co. ?
Βνσφημία 2 Co.
δωρηφορία Ιϊο. /
εγγράφω 2 Co. (Ltk. ?)
εγγΰτερον Ro.
€-)'/<(ΐυ;^ίίομαι 2 Th. ?
εγκεΐ'τμίζω Ro.
εγκοπη (or ^κκ-, or *W) 1 Cfw
εγκρατεύομαί I Co*
εγκρίνω 2 Co.
€δ^αϊος
€θε\οθρησκεία CoL
εθνάρχης 2 Cow
εθνικώς Gal.
€ίδωλίίθΐ' 1 Co.
eiff^. «7 (Mt. V)
{ί'/ϊω Oal.
εΙ)<ικοίνεια (or -via)
είρηνοπούω Col.
εισΒ^χομαι 2 Co.
εκατονταετής Ko.
«κδαπαυάω 2 Co.
(κΒημεω 2 Co.
CKStKOi
€νδ:ώκω1 Th. (Lk.0
I €κκα1ω Ro.
I «νκλάω Ro.
I εκκλείω
Individcai Wkitebs.
705
IXDIVIDf AX WbITEES
(KKOirrj cf. tyKOItf)
ίκνηφω 1 Co.
ΐκηνσιο! Philem.
(Kneravuvfu Ro. fr. Sept.
€κπτνω Gal.
ΐκτρεφω Eph.
έκτρωμα 1 Co.
ΐκφοβίω 2 Co.
ίκων
ίΚατΓΟνίίύ 2 Co. £γ• Sept•
ίλαφρία 2 Co.
€λαχιστότ€ρος Eph.
ίλλογάω or -yf'o)
ΐμβατΐνω CoL
(μικριπατίω 2 Co. fr. Sept.
evdfiyfui 2 Th«
€νδημ€α> 2 Cok
ΐνδηξάζω 2 Th.
eVe'/jyeta
(νίμ-^^ημα 1 Co.
ϊνκοτπ) cf. iyKOltf^
ίνηρκίζίύ 1 Th. ?
ϊνότης Eph.
(ντροττή 1 Co.
(ντυπόω 2 Co.
ίξαίρω 1 Co. ? and fr. Sept.
(ζανήστασις Phil.
(ξαττατάω ( 1 Tim. ?)
ί^απορίίύ 2 Co.
(ξηχίω 1 Th.
ϊξισχΰω Eph.
ίορτάζω 1 Co.
(πακούω 2 Co. fr. Sept.
€7Γαΐ'αμιμνησκα Ro.
inemep Ko. ?
έτΓίΚΤίίνω PhiL
£7Γ6ΐ'δι^'ω 2 Co.
(ΊΓίβαβΐω
ΐπιδιατασσομαι GraL
(πιδνω E|)h.
(ΊΤίθανάτιυς 1 Co.
επιθυμητής 1 Co.
ετηκαλντττω Ro. fr. Sept.
(πίκατάματ'ΐς GaL fr. Sept.
_ (.In.?)
€πιπόθησί5 2 Co.
ίπιπόθητος PhiL
ΐπιπυθία Ro.
ίπισκηνόω 2 Co.
(ττισπάω 1 Co.
(νιτιμία 2 Co.
ΐπιφαίσκω Kpb.
iVt;(op7yia
€7Γονομάζω Ro.
€7ΓταΛ£σ;(ίλιοι Ro.
f'pf^fo) ■_' Co. (Col.?)
ΐρμηνΐΐα \ Co.
ίρμηνιυτη! 1 Co.?
Tt epovpev Ro.
€Τ€ρόγλωσσο5 1 Co.
(Τ€ροζυγίω 2 Co.
€Τ€ρωζ Phil.
ετοιμασία Eph.
fVfota Eph. (1 Co. Ό
fvrrapfSpos 1 . /v^
ίύπρόσίδροϊ j
ΐνπροσωττίω OaL
€νσημηί 1 Co.
€ίσ;(7;ρόι/ωί
(νσχημοσννη 1 Oo.
(ύτραπελία Eph.
ευφημία 2 Co.
εύφημος PhiL
ί^;(ά/ϊ:ίΤτο? CoL
ενψνχεω PhiL
«ύωδί'α
εφευρέτης Ro.
εφικνίομαί 2 Co.
ό ηγαπημενος (ot Christ)
Eph.
5 αγνοείτε Ro.
ηΒιστα 2 Co.
^ios 1 Co. fr. Menauder
ήνίκα 2 Co.
^Tot Ro.
ήττων or ησσύ^ν
ηχεω 1 Co. (Lk. ?)
^etorj;? Ro.
όελω iV Col.
θεοδί^ακτυς 1 ITl•
θεοστνγης Ro.
θεότης Col.
flijpa Ro.
θηρίομαχέω 1 Co.
fepiap/Set/o)
5υρ€0ί Eph.
ί'αμα 1 Co.
tepo^uToy 1 Co.?
Ίεροσυλεω Ro.
ίερουργε'ω Ro.
ικανότης 2 Co.
ιλαροί 2 Co.
ίλαρότη? Ro.
ίμείρομαι (? cf. iStfrijopai)
Γκα (■Λvhere')?
Ίουδαί^ω Gal.
Ιουδαϊ<ώί GaL
Ίοι^δαΐσμόί GaL
ινο'ψ•υ;(ΟΓ PhiL
Ίστημεω Gal.
καθαίρεσις 2 Co.
Kafiri (1 Pet.?)
καθοραω R<X
KoiTOTT/s Ro.
κακοήθεια Ro.
καλάμη 1 Co.
καλλίί'λαχοί Ro.
καλοποΐίο) 2 To.
κάλυμμα 2 Co.
κάμτΓτω
<Γππί;λίίω 2 Co.
καταβαρέω 2 Oo.
καταβραβεΰω OoL
καταδουλόω
κατακαλντττω 1 Co.
κατάκριμα Ro.
κατάκρισις 2 Co.
κατάλαλοϊ Ro.
κατάλ^ £μμα Ro. ?
καταλλα-γι;
καταλλάσσω
καταναρκάω 2 Co.
κατάη/ξΐϊ Ro. fr. is^pt
κατάρτισίί 2 Co-
καταρτισμοί Eph.
κατασκοτΓί'ω GaL
καταστρώννυμ* 1 Co.
κατατομή Pliil.
καταυγάζω 2 Co.?
καταχθόνιος PhiL
καταχράομαι 1 Co.
κατοτΓτρίζομαί 2 Co.
κατώτεροί Eph.
κέλευσμα 1 Th.
κενοδοξία PhiL
κίνόδο^οί GaL
Κίνόω
κημόω 1 Co.?
κινδυΐΌί
κληρόω Eph.
κλίμα
κλυδωνίζομαι Kph.
κολακίί'α 1 Th.
κομάω 1 Co.
κόμι; 1 Co.
κοσμοκράτωρ £ph.
κρί'αϊ
κρυφή, •<{)η Eph.
κυβεία E])h.
κυβέρνησις 1 Co.
κνμ/3αλον 1 Co.
κυριακον δεητνορ 1 Co.
κνρόω
Λαοδικ^Γ CoL (Hev. ?)
λάρυγ^ ίίο.
λείμμα Ro.
λζψ-ΐί PhiL
λογία 1 Cou
λογισμοί
λοίδοροί 1 Co.
λι'σΐί 1 Co.
μακαρισμός
μάκελλον 1 Co.
μακροχ)ΐόνιος Eph.
μαράΐ' άδά (μαραναόά) 1 Co.
ματαίόω Ro.
μβγάλωί PhiL
μέγεθος Eph.
μεθυδεία Eph.
μέθυσος 1 Co.
μεσότΓοιχον Eph.
μετακινέω Col.
μβταλλάσσω Ro.
μετασχτ/ματί^ω
μετοχή 2 Co.
/i^Tiyt (μιίτι -yt, fo, η γ») I
Co.
μολυσμόί 2 Co.
μομφή CoL
μορφόω Gai.
μό;^6θί
μυ/ω PhiL
μνκτηρίζω GaL
μωμάομαι 2 COk
μωρία 1 Co.
μωρολο -yia Eph•
νί'κρωσίί
κ^ 1 Co.
ι^πιά^ω 1 Co•
Ko'ijpa
νομιιθεσία Ro.
νουμηνία CoL
ιηιχθήμερον 2 Co.
ι/ώτοί Ro. fr. Sept.
οίκτείρω Ro. fr. Sept•
οκταήμερος PhiL
ολέθριος 2 Th.?
ολιγόψ-υ;^οί 1 Th-
ολο^ρ^υτήί 1 Co.
ΟλθΤ€λϊ}ί 1 Th.
δμείρομαι 1 Th. ? (cf. 2μ«|^)
όμίλία 1 Co. fr. i^lenauder
όνίνημι Philem.
ορατός Col.
ορεξις Ro.
όρίοποδί'ω (raL
οσγί Ro.
όσι'ωί 1 Th.
όσφρησις 1 Co.
<5φί)ηλμοδουλί/β
όχυρωμα 2 Co.
πάίοί
τταιδαγωγόί
παί^ω 1 Co. tr. Sept.
παλαιόττ/ί Ro.
πάλι; Eph.
πανοΟργοί 2 Co.
παρπβολεΰομαι ? 1 μ. ..
τταραβουλεΰομαι'ί j
τταρα^ϊ/λόω
παοάκ(1^&αι
Inoiudual Writbbs.
706
Ikdividuai, Wkitek8.
τταρπμνθία 1 Co.
παραμνθίον l*iiil.
παραπΧήσίΐιν I'hil.
παμαυτίκα 2 Co.
Ίταραφρονίω 2 Co.
Ίταρ€8ρ€ΰω (cf. ^po<rfdp.) 1
Co.?
παρ€ί<Γακτος (ial.
7Τ-αρ€ΐσ€ρχομαι
πάμ€σίς Κο.
τταμηγορία Col.
7τάμο8ος 1 Co.
παροργισμός Eph.
πατρικός Gal.
πβί^ό? 1 Co.
(Πίΐί9ώ 1 Co.?)
π€ΐ<τμονη (ial.
iTew;9 i Co. fr. Sept.
TTfyraiity 2 Co.
π€ρί€ργάζομαι 2 Th.
ΤΓ€ρΐκάθαρμα 1 Co.
π€ρικ(φα\αία 1 Th. (£ph.
fr. Sept.)
ττί/χλ^ιττω 1 Th.
π€μίψημα 1 Co.
nepnep^vopai 1 Co.
TTqwai 2 Co.
τΓί^α ολογία Col.
Trtilrr^ff ΙΪΟ.
77 λ άσμα Ro.
Til πλείστοι' (adv.) 1 Co.
ΤΓλ€υν€κτ4ω
π\€ον€κτης
πΧησμονη CoL
ιτλουτίζω
ποίημα
ποΧίτβνμα Phil.
πολυτΓοι'κιλοί KpU.
πρ€σί:ί€ν(ύ
προαιρίω 2 Co.
προαιτιάομαι Ro•
τΓί>οακούω (\)1.
προαμαρτάι^ίύ 2 Co•
ττρο-γίΐ'Ομαι ΙΙο.
ΤΓ/ϊοΛι'δωμι 11ο.
ττροίλτΓί^ω Κ ph.
7Γροει/ίί/ϊ;^ομαι 2 Co.
TrpofTrayyt'XXoi Ro. (2 Co. '')
πρΊ€τοιμάζι*}
προ€ναγγ€λιζομαι Gai.
πρθ6';^ω Uo.
πμηηγίομαι Ro.
πρηθίσμιος (iaL
ττμοκίΐλί'ω rial.
προκαταρτίζω 2 Co.
προκνρόω Gal.
ΐΓρολί'γω
ττροττάσχω 1 Th.
ιτροπάτωρ Ro. ?
ΤΓροσαγωγι?
7Γ/3οσαν(ί7Γλ?;ρ(ίω 2 Co.
προσανατίθημι (Ial.
προσΐ^ρίύω (cf. ntiptBp•) 1
Co.?
ττροστ^λόω Col.
προκαρτίρησις Eph.
προσκοπη 2 Co.
πρ6σ\η{μ)\1ης Ro.
προσοφ(ΐ\ω Philem•
ττροστάτίί Κο.
προσφιλής Phil.
πρητίθημι
πρωτ€νω Col.
ΤΓΤηνά (τπ) 1 Co.
ΤΓτύρω I'hil.
7ΓΤω;^€•ΐ'ω 2 Co.
ττυκτβύω 1 Co.
^'"'^,![lCo.
ροπΐ7 .' I
ρντίς Kjih.
σαίν^σθαι 1 Th. ?
σαργάνη 2 Co.
σατάι/ (not -ι/αί) 2 Co. ?
σ^βάζομαι Ro.
(Γημ€ΐόω 2 Th.
(TiC^IOC 2 Co.
σκλϊ^ρίίτ;;? Ro.
σκόλοψ- 2 Co.
σκϋΤΓίί? Pliil.
σκυβα\ον Phil,
2κΰί9τ;? Col.
σπουδαίοΓ '- Co. (2 Τ. ?)
στέλλω
στ€νοχωρ€ω 2 Co.
στ6ΐΌ;^α)ρια
στξρύωμα Col.
στίγμα ( Ial.
σνγ-γΐ'ώμη 1 Co.
σνγκαί?/^ω Eph. (Lk.?)
σιτ)/«ίμ7Γτω Ro. fr. Sept.
σνγκατάθΐσις 2 Co.
συ")/>(ριΊ'ω
συζητητής 1 Co.
σι^^υγο? Phil,
συ^ωοποίί'ω
συλαγωγίω Col.
συλάω 2 Co.
σνμβηνΚος Ro. fr. Sept.
συμμαρτνρίω Ro. (ReV. ?)
σνμμ€ρίζω 1 Co.
σνμμίτοχος Ej)h.
συαμιμητης Phil,
σνμμορφίζω Phil. ?
σνμμορφος
σνμμορφόω Phil. ?
(Γνμ7Γαρα<αλ€ω Ro.
σνμπαραμ4νω PhiL?
συμπάσχω
σνμπίμπω 2 Co.
σνμποΧίτης Eph.
σνμφημί Ro.
σνμφορον, TO, 1 Co.?
σνμφνΧίτης 1 Th.
σύμφυτος lio.
σνμφώνησις 2 Co.
σύμφωνος 1 Co.
σνμψνχης Phil.
συναγωνίζομαι Ro.
συΐΆ^λί'ω i^iil.
σ"υΐ'ίΐί;^μάλ ωτο9
συΐ'πι/πμί'γΐ'υ/χι
συΐ'αΐ'ππουομαι Κο. Γ
σι/ΐΌττοστί λλω 2 Co.
συΐ'αρμολο^ε'ω Eph.
σνι^δο^ίί^ω Ro.
συ ff γείρω
σννη?)ομαι ΙΪΟ.
σίΦί/λικιώτ?;? Gal.
συί'^άτΓτω
συϊΌΐκοδορ,εω Eph.
συντίμνω Ro. fr. Sept.
σι'ντριμμα Η Ο. fr. Sept.
σνννποκρίνομαι i!al.
σνιαιπουργίω 2 Co.
συνωδίι/ω Ιϊο.
σύσσωμος Eph.
συστατικός 2 (Ό.
συστ€νάζω Ro.
συστοιχ^ω Gal.
συστρπτιώτι^ί
σχί/χα
σωματικως CoL
τάγμα 1 Co.
τάχα
τ/ι/ω "J Th.
ΤθΧμηρότ€ρον or -Tfpwi Ro»
'''ράχ'/^*'^ ij'^oTiuf'^at Κο.
τροφός 1 Th.
τ-υπίκώ? 1 Co. ?
€t τνχοι, τυχόν, 1 Co-
νίο^εσί'α
ΰπα'Βρος Ro.
ύτΓίρπι'ρω
ΰπίρακμος 1 Co.
νπΐρανζάνω 2 Th.
υπερβαίνω 1 Τ1ι.
ύττερβαλλοΓΓω^ 2 Οο.
ύ7Γίρ/3άλλω
ύπίρ/3ολή
νπ€ρ€γω 2 Co. .
xmepfKdva 2 Co.
ύπερεκπερισσοΰ
ΰπ€ρ€κπ€ρισσως 1 Th. ?
ΰπ€ρ(κτ(ίνω 2 Co.
virfpfKrvvyav» Ro.
tmtpXiav 2 Co.
ύττερ^κάω Κο.
υτΓερττερισσίυα»
υπίρυψόω 1*1ιΐΙ.
νπ€ρφρον€ω Ro.
ΰπόδίκο$• Κο.
ΰπόλΐίμμα Ro. ?
ΰπολείπω Ro.
υποπιάζω 1 Co.?
φαν€ρωσις
φίΐ^ομίνως 2 Co.
φίϊ.Ίγγο? 1 Co. (Ro. fr. Sept.)
φθονΐω Gal.
Φίλιπτη^σιο? Phil,
φίλόι^ίΐκοί 1 Co.
φιλοσοφία Col.
φιλόστοργος Ro.
φιλοτιμίομαι
φρίναπατάω GaL
φρην 1 Co.
φρόνημα Ro.
φύραμα
φυσιόω
φυσίωσις 2 Co.
φωτισμός 2 Co.
χίΐρόγμαφον CoL
XOiAcoy 1 C(t.
χρηματισμός Ro.
χρησις lio.
χρηστ€νομαι 1 Co.
χρηστολογία Ro.
ψε υι^ίίδελφοί
'ψ'ίυδαπόστολορ 2 Co•
ψΐϋσμα Ro.
ψιθυρισμός 2 Co.
ψιθυριστής Ro.
ψωμί f ω
ώσπερει 1 Co.
Ro. 113 (13 fr. Sept., 6?)
ICo. 110 (2 fr. Sept., 12?)
2Co. 9i) (4fr. Sept.,4V)
Ga!. 34 (1 fr. Sept., 1 ?)
Eph. 4;i(lfr. Sept.)
Phi!. 41 (4 ?)
Col. 38
IThess. 23(5?)
2 Thesfl. 11 (2 ?)
Philem. 5.
Common to two or more Epiv
ties 110.
Total 627 (21 fr. Sept.» 34 V)
6, To THE Pastoral
Epistles.
N. B. Words peculiar to some
single Epistle of the three are
so (leslgnated.
άγαΰθ€ργ€9
ayvrla 1 Ί
1 T.
Individual Weitebs.
707
Individual Writerjs.
ανωγή 2 Τ.
αδτ^λοτηϊ 1 Τ.
ό8ιαφθορία Tit. ? (cf. αφθο-
ρία)
όθ^ω 2 Τ.
αΙΒώςΙ Τ. (Heb.?)
αιρετικός Tit.
αισχροκ€ρΒηί
αιχμαλωτίνω 2 Τ. V (Eph.
fr. Sept.)
άκαίρως 2 Τ.
άκατάγνωστΒς Tit.
άκρατης 2 Τ.
ίϊλλω? 1 Τ.
άμαχος
αμοιβή 1 Τ.
ίί οζωπνρ^ω 2 Τ.
άνάλνσις 2 Τ.
ανανήφω 2 Τ.
άΐ'ατβ€η<α
άναψ-ΰχω 2 Τ.
avSpanodnTTrjs 1 Τ.
άνδρόφονος 1 Τ.
ai/f|^tVaicoff 2 Τ.
άν€7Γαί<τχνντος 2 Τ.
αν6πίλϊ;7Γτοδ• 1 Τ.
άνημ€ρος 2 Τ.
ανοσίορ
άντίδιατίθημι 2 Τ.
αιτι^^σις 1 Τ.
άντίλντρον 1 Ί'.
απαί'δίϋτο? 2 Τ,
άπίραντος 1 Τ.
από:ϊλτ)το5 1 Τ-
dπόδfίcrof 3 Τ.
άτΐο(^ο-χή 1 Τ,
αποθησαυρίζω 1 Ι".
α7Γοτμ€νω 2 Ί
απρόσιτο? 1 'J .
άρτιος 2 Τ,
άσπονδος 2 Ύ. (Κο. /)
α(ΤΤο;^€ω
ανθ^ντίύϋ 1 Τ.
αντοκατάκριτν\ Tit.
άφθορία Tit. V (ct. αδιαφ^ο-
Ρ''α)
άή)ΐλά-γαθος 2 Τ.
a\//'fu8i7i Tit.
βαθμός 1 Τ.
βασιλ€νς των αΐώνω*' 1 Τ.
βδελνκτός Tit.
jSfXriwi/ 2 Τ.
βλαβ(ρός 1 Τ.
yoyypaii/a 2 Τ.
•yei^foXoyta
•γόης 2 Τ.
(τα) tcpa γράμματα 2 Τ.
γραώδτ/Γ 1 Τ.
γυμνάσια 1 Τ.
yvvaucaptoi^ 2 Τ.
iftX/a 2 Τ.
διαβ€βαιόομαΐ
διάβολος (as adj.)
διάγω
Βιαπαρατριβη 1 Τ. ϊ (c£• παρο-
διατριβι?)
διατροφή 1 Τ.
διδίίκτικο?
διλογοϊ 1 Τ.
διώκτης 1 Τ.
εγκρατής Tit.
4δραίωμα 1 Τ.
ίκγονα (τά) 1 Τ.
€κδη\ος 2 Τ.
€κζητησις 1 Τ.?
€ίίλ έκτοι ayyfXoi 1 Γ.
4κστρίφω Tit,
ΤΚαττον (adv.) 1 Τ.
ΐΚ(γμ6ς 2 Τ. ?
ή μακάρια ίΚττίί Tit.
Μννω iutrans. 2 Τ.
£ντ€νζις 1 Τ.
4ντρξφ(ύ 1 Τ,
ίναΓόρ^ωσί? 2 Τ•
€7ΐαρκί.ω 1 Τ,
ΐπώιορθόω Tit.
επίορκος 1 Τ.
€ηιπλησσω 1 Τ.
ίτηστομ'ιζω Tit.
€7Γΐσωρ€νω '2 Τ.
ίτίροί^ίδασκπλ^'α» 1 λ.
ευμ^Τίίδοτοί 1 Τ.
ήρεμος 1 Τ.
^εοπί'ίΐίστοί 2 Τ.
θΐοσίβΐΐα 1 Τ.
ί€ροπμ€πης Tit.
Ιουδα'ί\όί" lit.
καλοδίδίίσκαλοί Ί it.
καταλέγω 1 Τ.
κίΐτύστΓ;μα Tit.
κπταστηλτ) 1 Τ.
καταστρηνιάω 1 Τ.
καταστροφή 2 Τ. (2 Pet.V)
καταφθ^ίρω 2 Τ. (2 Pet.V)
κατη-γορία (Lk. and Jn. V)
καυ(ττΓ;ριύ^ω ' 1 ι 'p
καχ^τηριάζω ? [
κείΌφωι/ία
κνηθω 1 Τ.
KOt ωι/ικό^" 1 Τ.
κόσμιος 1 Τ.
κοσμίως 1 Τ. ?
λογομα;(^ίω 2 Τ.
λογομίί;(ΐα 1 Τ.
Χόγος υγιής Tit.
/Χίίμμί; ι
ματαιο\ογία 1 Τ. |
/χατπιολόγοε Tit. fMk- V) !
μ(λ(τάω 1 Τ. (Acts fr. 8ei>t.» i
μεμβράνα 2 Τ.
μΐταΚη{μ)-^ις 1 Τ.
μηδίποτ€ 2 Γ.
μητραλωας ■ Ι ^ rp
μητρολώας'- )
μητρόπολις 1 Τ.
μοι/οω 1 Τ.
ν€Οφυτος 1 Τ.
ι/βωτερικόϊ 2 Τ•
ι/τ^φάλεοί
1/ομι'μωί
νοσεω 1 Τ.
^€ΐΌδο;^εα) 1 Τ,
οίκοδεσποτεο) ] Τ.
otKOOo^ta
1 Τ.ϊ
oiKOvpyos 1 1 -pj,
oiKovpos 1 ]
ή καλή ομολογία 1 Τ.
ομολογουμένως 1 Τ.
οργίλος Tit.
ορθοτομίω 2 Τ.
1Γαρα8ίατριβή 1 Τ. ? (cf . δ«ι-
τταρατριβη)
■παραθήκη Ί Τ. (1 Τ.?)
■παρακαταθήκη 2 Τ. (1 Τ.?)
■najioivos
πατραλωας'ί 1 ■• φ
πατρολωα? ? )
πίμιίατασθαι (" tO avoid ")
TTcptouatoff Tit.
π€ριπ€ίρω 1 Τ.
7:€μιφρον€ω Til,
πιστός 6 λόγος (cf. Rev.xxi.
ί etc.)
πιττόω 2 Τ.
πλί'γμα 1 Τ.
πληκτης
πορκτμός 1 Τ.
πρα•γματ€ία 2 Τ.
πρανπάθ€ΐα {"ϋίά) 1 Τ.?
πρ(οβϋτις Tit.
πρήκριμα 1 Τ.
■πράσκλησις? 1 » τ»
πρόσκλίσΐΓ ? J
προφήτη! (of a poet) Tit.
ρητώς 1 Τ.
σκίττασμα 1 Τ.
στ(φαν6ω 2 Τ. (Heb. fr.
Sept.)
στό/ζα;(0Γ 1 Τ.
στρατολογ€ω 2 Τ.
στυγί7τ09 Tit.
σνγκακοηαθίω 2 Τ.
σώ^ω etff ttji' β(ΐσι\(ΐαν κτλ.
2 Ί\
σωτήριος (as adj ) Tit.
σωφρονίζω Tit.
σωφρονισμός 2 Τ.
σωφρονως Tit.
σώφρων
τβκΐΌγονεω
τεκνογονία 1 Τ.
Τΐκνοτροφίω 1 Τ.
τυφόω
υγιαίνω metapli. (r^ (ίγάπτ/.
ΤΓί'στβι, νπομοιηι, etc.)
νδροτΓοτεω 1 Τ•
ύττερπλίονά^ω 1 Τ,
ύτΓΟ'Όΐα 1 Τ.
υποτνττωσιρ
ί'"''','^'"'^ l2T.(cf. 1Ιί.1)
φίλονης Γ )
φιλάγο^ΟΓ Tit•
φίΧανδρος Tit.
φιλαργυρία 1 Τ.
φίλαυτος 2 Τ.
φιλι^δοΐΌΓ 2 Τ.
φιλόθεος 2 Τ,
φιλότ€κνος Tit.
φλύαρος 1 Τ,
φρεναπάτης Tit.
φροντίζω Tit,
;^αλκεύί 2 Τ.
χάρις, cXfOff, €ijT}tnf fBrii tf.
(as a salutation)
χρήσιμος 2 Τ.
ψευδολόγορ 1 Τ
^jr€υδώwμoς I Τ
ωφέλιμο (
1 Tim. 82(6?)
2 Tim. 53(2?)
Til. 3;ί (2 ?)
Total 168 (10 Ο
e. Both to the Fastoral
and the othf.b paulink
Epistles.
α^αι^ασια
αισ;(ρο$•
β?;(μαλωτ«ιοι /
αλανών
άλοαω
άνακαίνύ^σίί
άν€γκλητοΐί
άποτόμως
άρσ€νοκοίτ7}9
άσπονδος ?
άστοργος
ατιμία
αυτάρκεια
αφθαρσία
αφορμή
γνήσιος
€κκaθaίpm
ενοικεω
€ ^απατάω ?
Individual Wkiters.
708
Individual WBixERe.
ίπιταγη
άντικαθίστημι
6(ράπων
ηροσοχθίζω fr. Sept.
ίπιφανοΛ
απαράβατοί
θϋίΧΚα
πρόσφατος
tpti
άπάτωρ
θυμιατήριαν
ΤΓροσχυσις
ήχμησηκ
απαύγασμα
ΐΐρωσυνη
■πρωτοτόκια
fJTIlOS 1
απ(ΐρης
ίκ€ττΐριος
ραντίζω (Mk.? Eev.P)
Up6s (Mt?)
άποβλ(ΐτω
καθαροτης
σαββατισμόί
KepSos
απόστολος of Cbrist
καίτοι (Lk. ?)
6 σκότος'}
Χουτράι»
άρμοί
κακηυχίω
σταμνος
μν^ια
αφανής
καρτ€ρ€ω
σνγκακονχ€ω
μόρφωσιί
αφανισμός
καταγωνίζομαΐ
σνμπαθΐω
vavayta
αφομοιόω
κατάδηλος
σνναπόλλνμι
νουθισία
αφοράω
καταναλίσκω
συνδίω
odvinj
βοηθός fr. Sept
κατασκιήζω
σνν€πιμαρτνρ€9Λ
OiACftOS
0oXt's?fr. Sept.
κατάσκοπος
Τ€λ€ΐωτης
OIK (ω
βοτάνη
κατατοξίνω? fr. Sept.
τιμωρία
ολ(θρος
yev€a\oy€tu
καϋσις
τομώτίρος
οστρακινοί
yfai>ye<j>
κΐφαλίς fr. Sept.
τράγος
■πΧάσσω
γνήφος
κοπή fr. Sept.
τραχηλίζα
προίστημι
δάμαλις
κριτικός
τρίμηνος
ΐΓροκοτη/
^(κάτη
κωλον fr. Sept.
τροχιά fr. Sept.
npovoeca
8€κατ6<α
XftToupyiieos
τυμπανίζω
σ€μνόί
gf'ot?
λ(νϊτικός
ΰπ(ίκω
σττίνδω
βί'ρμα
μερισμός
υποστολή
CTpareiai
δημιουργός
μΐσιτίυω
φαντάζω
σνζαω
^ηπου
μΐτόθ^σις
φοβίρος
συμβασίΚΐΑα
διάταγμα ?
fifTiVftra
χαρακτηρ
σωρ(ν<ύ
Βίαφορώτ€ροί
μ(τριοπαθίω
Χ(ρουβίμ, -ffclv
ίβρίστηί
^ιην€κης
μη^ίπω
Total 169 (12 fr. Sept., 11 7)
ΰπ€ροχή
Βίϊκνξοααι
μηλωτη
ύποτα-γη
νποτίθημι
^ίόρθωσις
δοκιμασία ?
μισθαπη^οσία
μισθαπο^ότηί
8. To iamei.
ίψηλοφρορία» 1
Βνσ€ρμην€ντοί
μυίλος
nyf
χρηστίτηΐ
frtwrep
νίφος
αδιάκριτος
Total 58 (6?)
(η) ΐβΒόμη
νόθος
ακατάστατοι
€γγνος
νομοθ(τΐω
ακατάσχ€Τος ?
€γκαίνίζα>
νωθρός
άλυκος
7. Ιο the Epistle to the
€L μην V
όγκος
αμαω
Hebrews.
€κβα1νω ?
ή οικονμίνη η μίΚΚοοση
άν€λ€ος ?
€κΒοχη
ολιγωρίω fr. Sept.
ανεμίζω
ίϊ ycvfaKoyrfTos
ΐκΚανθάνω
όλοθρ^νω, όλ(θρ(ΰω
άνίλ(ως?
άγιήτη! (2 Ca {)
€Κτρομος ?
ομοιοτης
απ€ΐραστοί
άγνόημα
cXfyxof (2 Tim.?)
6 όΐΈΐδισμόί τοϋ Χρίστου
άττλώς
άθίτησι,ί
ίμπαιγμόί
ορκωμοσία
αποκνίω
ιΊΘΧησι,ί
ίννβρίζω
■πανήγνρις
αποσκίασμα
aiyfios
ψς
παραδ(ΐγματίζω (Mt. ?)
άποτΐλίω (Lk.?5
αίματ(κχυσ{α
(πασαγωγή
παραπικραίνω
ανχ(ω ?
ail/eats
€πι\€ΐπω
παραπικρασμός fr. Sept.
άφυ^Τ€ρίω ?
αΙσθητήριο»
€πισκοπ(ω (1 Pet. Τ)
τταραπίπτω
βοή
αϊτιοί (ό)
ΐπος
τταραπλησίως
βρυω
ακατάΚυτΟί
€ναρ€στ€ω
ηαραρρίω
γίλως
άκλινήί
ΐίαρίστως
Ίταρίημι (Lie. ?)
δαιμηνιώδηί
άκροθί νιο»
ίΐβντης fr. Sept.
παροικίω (Lk. ?^
Βί-^νχος
α\υσίΤίΚή{
ίυΚάβΐΐα
TTf'ipa
EIKQ
άμ(τάθ€Τον
(νΚαβίομαι (Acts')
ττήγνυμι
έμφυτος
άμητωρ
(ίπΐμίστατοί
πολνμ€ρως
ενάλιος
ανακαινίζω
(υποίΐα
πολντρ6πω$
βξ^λκω
αναΧογίζοιιαι
η μήνΊ (cf. άαήν)
ηρίζω (πρίω)
(οικα (see ΕΙΚΟ)
αναρίθμητοι
θιατρίζω
προβλέπω
(πιλησμονή
άναστανοόω
θίλησις
πρόδρομης
επιστήμων
avTayuvt(oput
θίίΐίλιον καταβάΚλομαι
πβοσανουινω
€πίτήδΐΐος
ISDIVIDUAI- WbITEBS.
ί €νΰυνων
ΐφημ(ροί
θαρατηφόμΜ
θρήσκος
ios (Ro. fr. Sept.)
κακοπά6€ΐα
κατηφιια
κατιοω
κατοικίζω?
Κ€νως
μαραίνω
μ^γα\αυχί(α1
μζτάγω
μ^τατρίπω ?
νομοθέτης
6\οΚνζ<ύ
όμσίωσΐ! fr. Sept•
όψιμος
ιταράΚΧαγη
πικρός
■ηοία ?
■ηοίησις
νοΧνσπΚαγχνοι
προσω7το\η{μ)ιττ€α
πρώ(θΓ-ά)ίμοί
όιττίζω
οντΐαρια
ρυπαρό: (Rev. ?)
σηττω
ίτητϋ^ρωτοί
ταλαιπωρία)
ταλαιπωρία (Βο. fr. Sept.)
ταχύς
τροπή
τροχός
τρνφάω
ΰλη
φιλία
φλογίζω
φρίσσω
χάλιναγωγία
χρή
χρυσοδακπίλιΟΓ
TOTAL• 73 (1£γ. Sept., 9?)
9. Το Peter.
Ν. Β. WorcJs peculiar to one
Epistle or the other are so
marked by the numeral which
follows them; wordB tmmarked
are common to both.
709
ayaStmoiuj 1
oyaSonotos 1
άδίλφότηί 1
αδίκως 1
ίΙΒολος 1
αθίσμος 2
αίσχροκ€ρ8ώς 1
άκαταπαστος ? 1 ^
ακατάπαυστος ■ \
άλ\οτμι{ο)€7τίσκο7Τθ$ 1
αλωσις '2
άμαθης 2
άμαμάντινος 1
αμάραντος 1
άμώμητης 2 (PhiL?)
αναΎ€νναω 1
άναγκαστώς 1
ά αζώνιτυμί 1
αναχ^νσις 1
άν€κ\α}<ητος 1
αιτίλοίδορβω 1
απογίνομαι 1
α7ΓΟ^€σι$-
ατΓονξμω 1
αποφεύγω 2
αττροσωπολϊ^ζμ -ττβ• Ζ
αργίω 2
apTiy€vini)Tos 1
άρχιποίμην 1
αστήρικτος 2
αυχμηρός 2
βίόω 1
β'Κξμμα 2
βάρβαρος 2
βρα^ντης 2
γυι/αίκαοί 1
διαυγά^ω 2
δυσι/ο;;το9 2
ζ-γκατηικίω 2
€γκομβ6ομαΐ 1
€κάστοτ€ 2
ίκπαλα» -
€«Τ€Ι/ϊί? 1 (Lk. ?^
£ΚΤ€νώ$ 1 (Lk. ?)
eXcylis- 2
ξμπαιγμοιη^ 2
€μηλοκή 1
εϊ/δυσί? 1
ειττμνφαω 2
€ξαγγ4λλω 1 (Mk. ? ?)
εζακοΧουθΐω 2
€ζεραμα 2
€^€ραυνάω'^. \ .
ΐξερεννάωΊ \
επάγγελμα 2
€π€ρώτημα 1
επικάλυμμα 1
επίλοιπος 1
επίλυσις 2
επιμαρτνρεύύ 1
βτΓοπτβνω 1
επόπτης 2
ιερατευαα 1
Ισότιμος 2
κακοποιό; 1 (Jn• ?)
κοΓακλν^ω 2
κανσού) 2
κλ€05 1
Kparatot 1
κτίστης 1
κύλισμα ^ 1 ο
κυλισμορ ? ]
λΐ7^ίϊ 2
μεγαλοπρΐττη^ 2
μίασμα 2
μιασμος 2
μυωπά^ω 2
μώλωψ- 1 fr. Sept.
μωμος 2
οίνοφλυγια 1
ολιγωί ? 2
ομίχλη ? 2
όμόφρων 1
οπλίζω 1
παρανομία 2
παραφρορία 2
παρβισάγω 2
παρεισφίρω 2
πατροπαράδοτος 1
περίθεσις Χ
πλ,αστός 2
πότοί 1
προθνμως 1
προμαρτυρομαΐ Χ
πτόησις 1
poLζηbόp 2
ρΰπος 1
σ«ρά V Ι
σειράς ? (■ 2
σψόϊ V 3
σπορά 1
στηριγμός 2
στρί|5λοω 2
συμπαθής 1
σνμπρεσβί/Τ€ρθί 1
aui'C'cXfiiros 1
συΐΌΐίίεω 1
ταπεινόφρων 1 «
ταρταρόω 2
ταχινός 2
reXetwy 1
τεφρόω 2
τήκω 2
τοιόσδ€ 2
τολμητης 2
υπογμαμμος J
{wo^i'-ytof 2 (Mt. Π". Sejl.)
ύτιολιμπαΊΌ) 1
if ί
φίλάδελφος Χ
φιλόφρων 1 ?
φωσφόρος 2
I>;dividual AVbitebs•
\/^ίυδοδιδάσκαλθί 2
ώρίιομαι 1
1 Epislle63 (1 fr. Sept, 2?)
2 Epistle 57 (5?)
Common to Both 1
Total 121.
10. To Jade.
€1? τ^άι^αί τοΰ? αίώΐΌ?
προ παι/το? roO α'-ώι^οί
αποδιορί'^ω
άπταιστο S•
γογγυστ);?
δβιγ/χα
ί'κπορι/βυ'ω
εννπνιάζω (Lk, fr. Sept•)
εξελέγχω ?
tVay ω Ι/ι f ομαι
«παφρί^ω
μεμ'ψίμοιρος
οπίσω σαρκός
παρεισδύω
πΧανητης
πρόσωπα θαυμάζ<ύ
σπιλάς
νπεχω
φθινοπωρινός
φυσικώς
Total 20(1?)
11. Το the Apocalypse.
το Α και το Ω
Άραδδών
αιχμαλωσία (Eph. fr. Sept.)
ακα^άρτ7;5?
άκ/χα^ω
άκρατος fr. Sept.
αλλτ^λουία
άλφα (see τό Λ <cai το Λ)
α/λ€^υστοί
ό αμήν
Μ 9
αμωμον ■
ανά εΙς εκαστοΐ
* Απολλύων
αρκος or άρκτος
ΆρμαγεΒων etc.
αλ/^^ιν^ο?
βάλλειν σκάv^akιn fvirm(Mf
βασανισμός
βάτραχος
βήρυλλος
βιϋλαρίδιον
βιβλιδάριοί'?
βότρυς
0νσσιι/ο?
το δάκρυοι/?
το δίκατον as subst.
Individdal AVbitebs.
710
INDIVIDUAL• WbITKH».
δίάίιημα
iiavyrjs ?
8ιaφavήs1
δίπλόω
Βισμυριάίΐ
δράκων
&ωδ(κατοί
ί'γχρίω
ίίλί'σσω ?
€'\€φάντίνοι
'Ελληνικά! (Lk- V)
ίμίΐύ
ΐμμίσίΔ ?
('νΒόμησκ («ΜώμιρΠϊ)
ίξακόσιοι
ΈφίσΐκοΓ ?
f^Xfvw ?
ξΰλον τηί ζαιηί ίτ. Sept.,
ζίοης πηγαι ίιΒάτων'ί fr-
Si'pt.. (το) ίδωρ 'T?if)
^ω7$ 1Ί•. Sept.
ffOTOt
ημιώρων (ήμίωρον)
6 ην
ό θάνατο! ό Sevrtpot
θαίμα (2 Co. ?)
θαΰμα (μ/γα) θανμάζίΐν
θ€ΐύι8ηί
θεολόγος ?
ύισπΊί
ίπτΓΐκόί
'"'"^^^^Ifr. Sept.
καταναθ(μα : ]
κατασφραγίζω
κατήγωρ ?
καύμα
Κίραμικόί fr. Sept.
Kfpavwpi
κιθαρωδός
κιν{ν)άμωμοΡ
κλίμμα
κολλυνριον (κολλύριο• )
κριθί]
κρνσταλλίζω
κρύσταλλο!
κνκλ^νω'ί
κvκλήθfv
η κνριακη ημ^ρα
λfυιco^ΰσσιvovΊ
λιβανωτόζ
λίνον ''. (Mt. fr. ί?βρι.)
λιπαροί
μασθο! ? J
μάρμαρο!
μασ(σ)άομαί
μ(σουράνημα
μίτωπον
Ιίηρΰ!
μουσικοί
μυκάομαι
μνλινοίΊ
ν(φρά! fr. Sept.
NtKoXatnjr
ολννβο!
o/iiXoj?
6που (Kf'i (Hebr. Όψ ^ψ^)
οπώρα
όρασίί (Lk. fr. Sept.)
5ρμημα
OpV€OV
ή oval
οναί w. acc of jiers-V
ουρά
ττάρδάΚΐ!
π(λ(κίζω
■πίμπτο!
π(ριρ(ρ)αίνω1
(π(τάομαι) ircrouoi
ιτλήσσω
πλύνω (Lk. V)
■ποδήρη!
πόνοι (Col. V)
ττοτα/ζοφόρι^τοΓ
πρωινός etc.
6 πρώτο! κ. 6 ίσχίτηη
πύρινο!
πνρρο!
ρίδη (ρί'δα)
ρυπαίνω ?
ρνπαρ(ύομαί Ί
ρνπΰω ?
σαλπιστηί
σάπφριρορ
σάρδιίΌΕ ?
σάρδιον ?
σαρδιόνν^ ? 1
σαρδόιαί^ ? ]
σί/ιιδαλΐΓ
σηρικό! {σιρικότ)
σιδηριι!
σκοτϋω (Ej)h. ?)
σμιιράγδινο!
σμύραγδο!
Σμυρναίο! ?
στρηνιάω
στρηνο!
σώματα slaves
ταλαντια'ιο!
τ€σσαρακονταδύο ?
τ(σσαρακοιτατ(σσαρ({ i
Τ€τράγωνο!
Τίμιότη!
TOioi/
τοπάζιο»
τρίχινο!
ίακίνθινο!
υάκινθο!
υάλινος
ύαλος
φαρμακίύίΐ
φάρμακονί
φάρμακο!
φιάλη
χήλαζα
χάλκίος
χαλκηδών
χαλκολίβανορ
χλιαρός
χο'ινιξ
χρυσολιθα
χρυσύπρασο!
χρν<τόω
το Q (see τό Α καΐ r& Q)
Total 156 (7 ir. Sept., 88 ?]
12. To the ApocEUypse and
the FourUi Gospel.
βροντή (cf. Mk. iiL ΐ 7)
δίκατο!
ΈβραΐστΙ
€ΚΚ€νΤ€ω
κυκλ(νω ?
όψΐί
ϊΓορφυροΰί
σκηνόω
φοίνιζ
ΤσΤΑΐ 9 (1 Ό
FORMS OF ΛΈΚΒΒ.
The List which follows Is not Intended to be a mere mnseam of grammatical cariosities on the one hand, or a catalogue of «11 th<
verbal forme occurriug in the Greek Testament ou the other ; but it is a collectiou of those forms (or their representatives) which mai
possibly occasion a beginner some perplexity. The practical end, accordingly, for which the list has been prepared has prescribed $
generous liberty as respects admission to it. Yet the following classes of forms have been for the most part excluded : forms which asi
traceable by means of the cross references given In the body of the Lexicon, or which hold so isolated a position in its alphabet that even
a tyro can hardly miss them ; forms easily recognizable as compounded, in case the simple form has been noted; forms readily explain-
able by the analogy of some form which is given.
Ordinarily it has been deemed sufficient to give the representative form of a tense, viz., the First Person (or In the case of the Impera•
tlv« the Second Person) Singular, the Nominative Singular Masculine of a Participle, etc.; but when some other form seemed likely tc
prove more embarrassing, or was the only one found in the New Testament, it has often been the form selected.
The word "of" In the descriptions introduces not necessarily the stem from which a given form comes, but the entry in the Lexicon
under which the form will be found. The epithet " Alex.", it is hardly necessary to add, has been employed only for convenience and io
Its technical sense.
άγάγίΤΕ, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. pltir. of άγα.
άγάγτ], 2 aor. act. subj 3 pers. sing of aya.
άγνίο-θητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of άγνϊζω
οΙΙσθωντοι, 2 aor. subj. 3 pers. plur. of αίσβάνομη•
οίτίίτω, pres. impv. 3 pers. sing of αΐήω
άκήκοα, 2 pf. act. of ακούω.
άλλπγήσ•ομαι, 2 fut. pass, of άλ\άσσω.
άλλάξαι. 1 aor. act. inf. of άλλάσσω
άλλοίξίΐ. fut. act. 3 pers sing, of άλλάσσω
άμαρτήο-;), 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of άμ/ψτάι^-
άμησαντων, 1 aor. act. ptcp. gen plur. of άμάω
άναβα and άνάβηθι, 2 aor. act. impv. of άναβαίΐΛΐ.
άναβ('βηκα, pf. act. of αναβαίνω.
άναγαγ£ΐν, 2 aor. act. inf. of ανάγω.
όναγνοΐϊ, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of άναγινώσκω.
άναγνώναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of άναγινωσκω.
ακαγνωο^ΐ], 1 aor. pass subj. .'! pers sing of άνανιναχτνω
άνακίκύλισται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of άνακυλιω.
άνολοϊ, pres. ind. act. 3 pers. sing, of άι>αλίσ«».
άναλωθήτί, 1 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. plur. of άινλ.ιτςω.
άναμνήσ-ω, fut. act. of άναμιμνήσκω.
άνατταήσ-ομαι, fut. mid. of αναπαύω (cf. also παύω, init.).
άνάτΓίσ-αι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of άναπίπτω.
ovaireo-e, άνάττίσον. 2 and 1 aor. act impv of awnrijrre
άνόκΓτα and άνάοτηθι, 2 aor. act. impv. of άνίστη/α.
άνατ€θραμ(«νο$, pf. pass. ptcp. of άνατρίφω.
{ϊνατίίλη. 1 aor. act. subj 3 pers. sing, of άι/ατ/λλω
άνατί'ταλκ€ν, pf. act. 3 pars. sing, of άνατ(\\ω.
(ΰιαφάναντ£5, 1 aor act. ptcp. nom. plur of ηναφαίνω
άναψαν£'ντ«ΐ, 2 aor. pass. ptcp. nom. plur. of άναφαινω-
6να\9ίντ(ί, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. nom. plur. mase. of ανάγω-
άνάψαντ(ϊ, 1 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of άνάτττω.
iviyvarf, 2 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of άι^αγιι/ώσκω•
άν(θάλ(τ(, 2 aor. act. 2 pars. plur. of άνηβάΧ> ^
άν(θιμΐ]ν, 2 aor. mid. of άνατίθημ*.
ονί'βη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing of άνίημι.
όνίθρί'ψατο. 1 aor mid. 3 pers. sing, of άνατρίφω.
Qvc^eTo (-ατο, Ala.x.), 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing of άναψ^ιβ.
άν6Ϊλον (-ατ€, -αν, Alex.), 2 aor. act. of άναιρίω.
άνίΐχόμην, impf. mid. of άνίχω.
dveXei, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of avatpfa.
dv^eiv, 2 aor. act inf of avaipea.
άνίΚω<η, 2 aor. act. subj 3 [)ers. plur. of άναιρΐω.
ovcveYKai, -kos, 1 aor. act. inf. and ptcp. of άναφίρω.
άν€ν€γκ€Ϊν, 2 aor. act. inf. of άναφίρα.
ave'vTis. 2 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of άνίημι.
άνί'ξομαι, fut. mid. of άνίχω.
avfTrta-ov (-<rov, Ale.x ), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of άι/απίπτα-
avf'o-eio-o, 1 aor. act. of άνασιίω.
άνΕοτράφημίν. 2 aor. pass. 1 pers. plur. of άναστρ/φ».
άνΕίτχο'μην, 2 aor. mid of ανίχω.
άνετ€ΐλα, 1 aor. act. of άνατΐ'ΧΧω.
άνίτράφη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of άνατρίφω.
aviipov (-αν, .\lex.), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ovcvptVica»
ave'urya. 2 pf. act. of ανοίγω.
άνίω^μίνοί, pf. pass, ptcp of άνοιγα.
άνεωγότα, 2 pf. act. ptcp. ace. sing. masc. of ανοίγω.
άνεωξα, 1 aor. act. of ανοίγω.
άνίωχθήναι, 1 aor. pass inf of ανοίγω.
άνήγαγον, 2 aor. act. of ανάγω.
ανήγγειλα, 1 aor. act. of αναγγέλλω.
άνηγγε'λην, 2 aor. pass, of αναγγέλλω.
άνήνεγκεν, 1 or 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of αναφίρω.
άνηρε'θην, 1 aor. pass, of αναιρίω.
όνήφθη. 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of άνάπτω.
άνήχθην, 1 aor. pass, of ανάγω.
άνθί'ξετας, fut. mid. 3 pers. sing, of άντε';^ω.
άνθε'στηκε. pf. ind. act. 3 pars. sing, of άνθίστημι.
ανθίστανται, pres. mid. 3 pers. plur. of άνθίστηΜ.
ανβίστατο, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing, of άνθίστημ^
Forms of Verbs.
iV2
Forms or Verbs
QvieWes, pres act. ptcp nom. plur. masc. of αι>ιΐ7μι.
όνοιγήσ-Εται, 2 I'ut. pass 3 pers. sing, of ανοίγω.
άνοιγώσ-ιν, 2 aor. 2)ass siibj 3 pers. plur. of ανοίγω.
ώοίξαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of ανοίγω.
ονοίξη, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of ανοίγω.
άνοιξον, 1 aor. act. impv. of ανοίγω.
ανοίο-ω, fut. act. of άναφ(ρω.
όνοιχθήσ•6ται, 1 fut. ]iass 3 pers. sing, of ανοίγω.
ονοιχθώσ-ιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of ανοίγω.
άντατΓοΒοΟναι, '2 aor. act. inf. of άνταποδίΒωμι.
άντατΓοδώσ-ω, fut. act. of αι/ταποδιδω^ι-
Αντίο-την, 2 aor. act. of άνθίστημι.
άντιστήναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of άνθίστημι.
ιϊντ(<Γτητί, 2 aor im])V 2 jiers. plur. of άνθίστημι.
άνω, ■-' aor. act. subj. of άνίημι.
άιταλλάξτ], I aor. act. sub]. 3 pers. sing, of απαλλάσσω.
άτταρθϋ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, oi άπαίμω.
άπαρνηα-αο-θω, 1 aor. mid. impv. 3 pers. sing, of άιταρνίομαι.
άιταρνήσ-ΐ), fut. 2 pers. sing, of άπαρνέομαι.
άπατάτω, pres act impv. 3 ]iers sing of απατάω
άιτατηθίΐο-ο, 1 aor. ]ia?s. ptcp. nom. sing. fem. of άκατάα>.
άτΓί βησ-αν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of αποβαίνω.
aWSfi|tv, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of άποο^ίκνυμι.
awt'SiTo, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing, of άποδίδωμι.
aireSiSoo-av, airtSiSow, impf. act. 3 pers. ])liir. ol άποδίύωαί.
airc'SoTO, -Soo-ee, etc., 2 aor. mid. of άπο&ίδωμι.
άπί'5ωκ£ν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of άποδίδωμι.
άπίβανίν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of αποθνήσκω.
aireiiro)i£9a, 1 aor. mill. 1 pers. plur. of άπύπο».
άπίΐχον, inipf. act. of άπίχω•
όΐΓίκατίστάθην, 1 aor. pass, of άποκαθίστημι.
όΐΓ€κατ€(Γτην, 2 aor. act. of άποκαθίστημι.
άτΓ€κρίθην, 1 aor. pass, of άποκρίνω.
άΐΓίκτάνθην, 1 aor. pass, of άποκτιίνω.
άΐΓ€ληλύθ£ΐ.(Γαν, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of απέρχομαι•
άτΓίλθών, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of απέρχομαι.
ότΓίνίγκΕΐν, 2 aor. act. inf. of άποφίρω.
άτΓίνίχθήναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of αποφέρω.
άαηπνίγ], 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of άίΓοπτίγω.
άΐΓίίτνιΙαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of άποηνιγω.
άιτίστάλην, 2 aor. pass, of άποστίλλω.
άΐΓ6(Γταλκα, ]if. act. of άποστίλλω.
dirtoToX^e'vos, pf. pass. ptcp. of άποστΐλλα».
diricTTeiXa, 1 aor. act. of αποστέλλω.
όπέο-τη (.ήσαν), 2 aor. act. 3 pere. sing, (plor.) of άφ<-
άιτΕσ-τράψησ-αν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of iwoirrueitKi..
άΐΓ£τά|ατο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing, of άπιτταιταω.
άτΓ[)£σ-αν, impf. 3 pers. plur. of άπ€ίμ..
άτΓήλασ•£ν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, ol irn(\avvw.
όΐΓηλγηκότ65, pf. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. ot <nr>iA>«u•.
άττηλθον (-βαν, Alex. 3 pers. plur.), 2 aor. act. ot aufuxuitai..
άττηλλάχθαι, pt. pass. inf. of απαλλάσσω.
άττηρνηίτάμην, 1 aor. of άπαρνίημαι.
άίΓηστΓασ-άμ,ην, 1 aor. of άπασπύζομαι.
όΐΓθβάντ£5, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of αποβαίνω.
άτΓοβήσ-Εται, fut. 3 pers. sing, of αποβαίνω.
(ίηΓο5£8£ΐγμ«νον, pf. pass. ptcp. neiii. of άπο6(ίκνυμι.
όποΒίίκννντα (-δίίγνΐοντα), pres. act. ptcp. ace. sing. masc.
of άποδΐίκννμι.
άΐΓ0$£Ϊ|αι., 1 aor. act. inf. of άποδύκημι.
OTToSiSovai, -8ότω, pres. act. inf. and impv. (3 pen. sing.)
of άπυδίδωμι.
oiroSiSoCv, pres. act. ptcp. neut. of άποδίδωμι.
άποδοθήναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of άποδίδωμι.
djroSoi, -8ιό, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. .'•ing. of άπoδίδωμL•
diroSos, -SoT£, 2 aor. act. impv. of άττοδίδωμι.
άίΓοδοϋναι, -8ovs, 2 aor. act. inf. and ptcp. of άποδίδωμι•
άποδω'η, 2 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing, of άποδίδωμι.
άποθαν£Ϊν, 2 aor. act. inf. of αποθνήσκω.
άποκαθισ-τφ, -τάν£ΐ, pres. act. 3 pers. siii;_'. of άποκαθίστημι.
άποκατηλλαγητί, 2 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of αποκαταλ-
λάσσω.
άΐΓοκριθ££5, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of άποκρίνω.
άποκταίνω, -κτίΟνω, -κτί'ννω, -κτίνω, pres. ; see άποκτ(ίνω.
άΐΓθκτανθ£ί5. 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of άποκτείνω.
άποκτ£'ννυντί5, pres. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of άποκτΐίν»».
άιτοκτ£νώ, fut. act. of άποκταίνω.
άπολί'σαι, -λίσω, 1 aor. act. inf. and subj. of άπολλνμι.
απολέσω, fut. art. of άπΰλλνμι.
άπολονμαι, fut. mid. of άπήλλυμι•
άπολώ, fut. act. of άπολλνμι.
απόλωλα, 2 pf. act. of άπολλνμι.
άπο(ρ)ρίψαντα5, 1 aor. act. ptcp. ace. plur. masc. oi
άπο{ρ)ρίπτω.
αποσταλώ, 2 aor. pass. subj. of άποστύλλω.
άποστ£ίλα5, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of άποστί'λλω.
άποστη, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of άφίστημι,
όποστήσομ.αι, fut. mid. of άφίστημι.
άπό£Γτητ£ (-στήτω), 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. (3 pere.
sing. ) of άφίστημι.
άπ•οΐΓτραφτ|9, 2 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. sing, of άιτοστρίφω.
άπόστρεψον, 1 aor. act. impv. of άποστρίφω.
άποτα|άμΐ£νο5, 1 aor. mid. l>tcp. of αποτάσσω.
απτού, pres. mid. impv. of απτω.
απώλεσα, 1 aor. act. of άπόλλυμι.
απωλόμην, 2 aor. mid. of άπολλνμι.
ώτωσάμίνοϊ, 1 aor. mid. ptcp. of άπω^^η.
όίραι, 1 aor. act. inf. of αίρω.
cipas, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of αΧρω.
αρέσει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of άρίσκω-
άρίστ], 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of άρίσκίΛ.
όίρη, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of αίμω.
οφθη (-θώσιν), 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, (plur.) d
αϊρω.
άρθήσεται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing, of αίρω.
αρθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of αϊρω.
άρκεση, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing of άοκί».
«ipov, 1 aor. act. impv. of α'ρω.
άρπαγε'ντα, 2 aor pass. ptcp. ace. sing, masc ot apmaii)».
dpi (.ονσιν), fut. act. 1 pers. sing. (3 pers. plur.) of <4mn
αϋξηθή, 1 aor. pass, subj 3 pers. sing, of αύξαν».
άφε'θην, 1 aor. pass, of άφίημι.
άφεΐλεν. 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of άφαιρίω.
dψ£tvαι, 2 aor. act. inf. of άφίημι.
άφεϊς, lires.,.in(J. act. 2 pers. sing, of (β.φίω) άφίημι.
Forms of Verbs.
713
Forms ov ΥκΒββ.
άφίΐί, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of άφίημ^.
a^(\ti, fut. act. 3 jiers. siug. υΙ άφαιοίβ».
άψίλ€ΐν, 2 aor. act. inf. of άφαφίω.
o^cXi], 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of αφαωηα.
άψ($, 2 aor. act. impv. of άφίημι.
ι>ψcωvτα^ pf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of άφίημι-
άφη, 2 aor. act, subj. 3 pers. sing, of άφιηΐϋ.
άφήκα, 1 aor. act. of άφίημι.
όφίεμίν, pres. act. 1 pers. plur. of άφίημι-
άφίίνται, -ονται, pres. pass. 3 pers. plur. of άφιηαι.
άφίκΕτο, 2 aor. 3 pers. sing, of άφικνίομαι.
άφίομίν, pres. act. 1 pers. plur. of (αφίω) άφίημι.-
άφιοΟίΓΐν, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of {άφύω) άφιημ^•
άφΙσ-τα<Γ0, pres. mid. impv. of άφίστημι.
άφίο-τατο, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing, of άφίστημι•
άψορκΐ, -οίσ-ιν, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing, and plui- of αφο-
ρίζω,
άφωμεν, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 pers. plur. of άφίημ-
άψωμοιωμενοΐ, pf. pass. ptcp. of άφομοιόω.
άχθήναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of άγω.
άχθήσ-ίο-βί, 1 fut. pass. 2 pers. plur. of Sv»
οψαί, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of ατττω.
άφΐ), 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of imt.
βαΧ&, fat. act. of βάλλω.
βάλω, -λιι, (-λί), 2 aor. act. enbj. (impv. ) ot SoXjim.
βαρείατθω, pres. impv. pass. 3 pers. sing, of So.*»
βάψη, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of Αώπ-•.
βίβαμμί'νον, pf. pass. ptcp. neut. of βάπτιο.
β£'βληκ£ν, pf. act. 3 pers. sing, of βάλλω.
βεβλημί'νοϊ, pf. pass. ptcp. of βάλλω.
β£'βληται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of 3(ζλΑ«.
βληθε(;, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of /3άλλα..
βλήθηη, 1 aor. pass. impv. of βαλκα>.
γαμησ-άτωσ-αν, 1 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. plor. ot -tutti»-
γεγί'νημαι, pf. pass, of γίνομαι.
γεγί'ννημαι, pf. pass, of γιννάω.
γίγοναν (-vus), 2 pf. act. 3 jiers. plur. (ptcp.) of Ytvntuu-
γ6γόν€ΐ, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing, (without augm.) of viikmuu.
γίνάμίνοί, 2 aor. mid. ptcp. (Tdf. ed. 7) of yiiuiuu.
γνίσ-ΰω, 2 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing, of γίνομαι.
■γενηβητω, 1 ΒΟΓ. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing, of γίνη»».
γένηιτβί, 2 aor. mid. subj. 2 pers. plor. of γίνοικυ-,
^e'vuvrai, 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. plur. of yi»oμίu.
γήμοί, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of γαμίω.
γήμΤΙί, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. sing, of yaui»•
γνοΐ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of γινωσ-κ»
•yvois, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of γινώσκω.
γνώ, γι»ω, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 and 3 pers. sing, of va*«<m.
Τνώθι, 2 aor. act. impv. of γικώσκω.
Τνωριονσ-ιν, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of -ywBiMfi».
■γνωο-βτ], 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, ot ^vmrtmt.
γνωσ-βήο-ίται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sinn. ot yivaxris•^
γνώοΓΟμα^ fat. of γινωσκω.
ΐ aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing, of γαύακΛ.
δαρήτομίΗ, 2 fut. pass, of ϋρω.
ε«δ(κται., pf. 3 pers. sing, of df'x'iuoi.
SeS€KU$, pf. act. ptcp. of 6e<i).
βεδΕμαι, pf. pass, of δε'ω.
ε<ειωγμ(νος, pf. pass. ptcp. of διώκω.
Se'SoTtti, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of δί8ωμι.
8€δώκ6ΐ(Γαν, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of δίίωμ*.
δί'τ), pres. subj. of impers. del.
δίθήναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of Βϊω.
δΕίραντ($, 1 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of Upw.
δί'ξαι, 1 aor. impv. of δίχομια.
δ€ξηται (-ωνται), 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing, (plur.) of iij^ouu*
δήσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of δ(ω.
δήση, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of df».
διαβάΐ, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of διαβαίνω.
διαβήναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of διαβαίνω.
8ιάδθ5, 2 aor. act. impv. of διαδίδωμι.
διακαθαραι, 1 aor. act. inf. of διακαθαίρω.
διαλλόγηθι, 2 aor. pass. impv. of διαλλάσσω.
διαμείνη, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of Siafwi'».
8ιαμΕμ(νηκότε5, pf• act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. ol AioWxk
διαμένεις, pres. ind. act. 2 pers. sing, of διαμίνω.
διαμένεις, fut. ind. act. 2 pers. sing, of διαμίνω.
διανοίχθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of διανοίγω.
διαρ(ρ)ηξα5, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of διαμρηγνυμι•
διασΐΓορε'ντ€5, 2 aor. pass. ptcp. nom. ])lur. masc. of <u»
σττΐίρω.
διαο-ττασθη, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of hi.narra<o.
διαστούτη;, 2 aor. act. ptcp. gen. sing. fem. of ϋιΐατημι.
διαοτρε'ψαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of Βιαστρίφω.
διαταΎε^ΐ, 2 aor. pass. ptcp. of διατάσσω,
διαταχβε'ντα, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. neut. of διατάσσ•.
διατεταγμε'νοϊ, pf. pass. ptC]i. of διατάσσω,
διατεταχε'ναι, pf. act. inf. of διατάσσω,
διδοασι, pres. act. 3 pers. jihir. of δι'δωμι.
διε'βησαν, 2 aor. act. 3 ])ers. plur. of διαβαίνω.
διεϊλον, 2 aor. act. of διαιρίω.
διενε'γκη, 1 or 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing of διαφίμ»
ειερ(ρ)ήγνυτο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of διαρρήγημ^
διε'ρ(ρ)ηξεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of διαρρήγνυμι.
διερ(ρ)ήσσετο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of διαμρηγννμχ.
διεσάφησαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of διασαφίω-
διεσττάρησαν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of διασπείρω.
διεσπάσθαι, pf. pass. inf. of διασττάω.
διεστειλάμην, 1 aor. mid. of διαστέλλω,
διε'στη, 2 aor. act. 8 pers. sing, of δΰστημι.
διεστραμμε'ν09, pf• pass. ptcp. of διαστρίφ»
διέταξα, 1 aor. act. of διατάιτσω.
διεφθάρην, 2 aor. pass, of διαφθήρω.
διεφθαρμένοι, pf. pass. ptcp. of διαφίορολ
διηκόνουν, impf. act. of διακον/ω.
διήνοιγεν, impf. act. 3 pers. sing• of διηυοίγα»-
διηνοιξεν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of διανιιίγ<ο
διηνοίχθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of Siaiwir»•
διοριτγήνοι, 2 aor. pass. inf. of διορύσσω,
διορυχθήνοι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of διορύσσιο.
διώδευε, impf. 3 per», sing• of διοδίίω.
διωξάτω, 1 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing, of jiiaxc•
Ι'υΚΜ» OF Vkkb8.
714
^υκΜβ υ*• V
8ιώξητ£, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plar. of dtuxu.
διο>χθήσ•ο«τ<α, 1 fut. pass. 8 pers. plur. of διώκω,
εοθίϊσ-αν, 1 aor. i)ass. ptcp. ace. sing. fern, of Si8<oiu•
δοβη, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of θίδωμι.
δοθήναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of 8ίδω/*ι.
δοΐ, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of δίβωμι.
Sos, δότ£, So'tu, 2 aor. act. impv. of dibmiu.
δούναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of διδω /u.
8ovs, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of δίδω /u.
δύνη, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing, of diwiiKu-
δω, δώη, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of δίδβιμ*.
δω'η, 2 aor. act. o])t. 3 pers. sing, of δίδωμι.
δώμίν, δωτί, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 and 2 pers. plur. of SlUtDiu.
δώστ) (-ο-ωμίν), 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. (1 pers.
plur.) of δίδω/α.
(βαλον (-αν, Ale.x. 3 pers. plur.), 2 aor m-i jf 3<ίλλα>.
ΐβάο-κανε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of puif «ϋκ».
ίβδίλυγμενοϊ, pf. pass. ptcp. of β3(\νσσα>
ίβί'βλητο, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of βα\Κ<Μ>.
(βλήθην, 1 .aor. pass, of βάλλω.
ίγγίίϊ, (Attic) fut. 3 ])ers. sing, of ίγγίζω.
eyyto-ai, 1 aor. act. inf. of ΐγγίζω.
ίγίγόνίΐ, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing, of γίνομαι.
ίγίΐροι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of iytipm.
c-yclpai, 1 aor. act. inf. of iyt'ipai.
i-^dpov, pres. pass. impv. of iyelpm.
ίγίνήθην, 1 aor. pass, of γίνομαι.
ί-γιννήθην, 1 aor. pass, of γίννάω.
ί'γφεϊ, fut. act. 3 jiers. sing, of e'yctpak
ίγίρβίΐϊ, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of ryfipa.
ίγερθησ-ίται, 1 fut. pass. 3 i)ers. sing, of ^φ»
ίγί'ρθητι, 1 aor. pass, impv of ϊγίίρω.
ίγήγίρμαι, pf. pass, of ϊγ('ψα>.
^-γημα, 1 aor. act. of γαμίω•
^γκρΐναι, 1 aor. act. inf. of (γκρίνω,
«•γνωκαν (ΐ. q. ΐγνώκασιν), pf. act. 3 ρβτβ. plor. of γα/ώσκω.
iyvuiKtvax, pf. act. inf. of γιύσκω.
ϊγνων, 2 aor. act. of γινώσκω.
ίγνωσταν, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of γιναχΓτα..
(Ύχρισαι, 1 aor. mid. impv. ot ryj^piia.
<γχρΙσαι, 1 aor. act. int. of (γχρίω•
εγχρισον, 1 aor. act. impv. of ^γχρίβ».
ίδαφιοΰ(Γΐν, (Attic) fut. 8 pers. plur. of d^uφ^i<m.
<8tcTo, ιδΕεΐτο, έδεΐτο, impi. 8 pers. sing, of ft'otttu.
ίδίΐ, impf. of impers. δίΐ.
<δ(ΐραν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of βέ/Μ>.
ΐδησα, 1 aor. act. of δε ω.
ίδ£ωξο, 1 aor. act. of διώκω.
4δολιοΰσαν, impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plor. «i ΛολκΜ».
«δραμον, 2 aor. act. of τρίχω-
ίδυ, εδυσ-εν, 2 and 1 aor. act. 3 pers. emg. of dv«w.
ϊζην. ίζήτί, ϊζων, impf. act. of fow.
ίζησ-α, I aor. act. of ζάιο.
^θεμην, 2 aor. mid. of τίθημι.
ίβετο (.«ντο), 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing, (plur.) ot τΦτμ.
Ιθηκα, 1 aor. act. of τίθημι.
ΐ6ον, 2 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing, of τίθημι.
«θρεψα, 1 aor. act. of τρίφω.
ίθύθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of ^ιίω.
eta, impf. act. 3 pers. sing, of «άω.
εΐασο^ 1 aor. act. of ε'άω.
είδα, (.\lex.) 2 aor. act. of εΐδω.
είθισ-μενον, pf. pass, ptcji. neut. of ΐβίζω.
ε'ίλατο (.«το), aor. mid. 3 pers. sing, of aipia.
εΙληΐΓται, \Λ. pass. 3 pers. sing, of \αμβάνω.
«Ιληφε; (-φαί), pf. act. 2 pers. sing, of λι^άκω.
«ΐλκον, imj)f. act. of «λκω.
είλκωμε'νο;, pf. ])ass. [itcp. of ί\κ6α>.
εϊξαμεν, 1 aor. act. 1 pers. plur. of rut».
είσ-δραμοίσ-α, 2 aor. act. ptcp. fem. of άστρΙγ-Λ.
«Ισεληλΐθαν (-λύβασιν), pf. 3 pers. plur. of tlatpxopjcu.
«Ισ-ρει, imjif. 3 jiers. sing, of tiaeipi.
iUrttto-iv, pres. ind. 8 pers. plur. of citrn/u.
«Ιστήκεισ-αν, ]il|)f. act. 3 pers. plur. of ionj/u.
είχαν, εϊχοσ-αν, impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of ?χω.
ctuv, im])f. of «*άω.
ίκαβε'(θΓ ά)ρισ-εν, 1 aor. act. 8 pers. sing, of καθαρίζω.
cκαθε(or α)ρ1σΐη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of καθα^>ίζ<>».
ίκδίσ-εται, -δώσεται, fut. mid. 3 pers. sing, of εκδίδω^η.
ίκεκραξα and έκραξα, 1 aor. act. of κράζω.
{κε'ρασ-α, 1 aor. act. of κιράννυμι.
ίκε'ρδησ-α, 1 aor. act. of κερδαικω.
«κκαθάρατε, 1 aor act. imjiv. 2 pers. plur of (κκαθαίρα.
ίκκαθάρη, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of ίκκαθαίρω.
ίκκεχυμε'νοϊ, pf. pass. ptcp. of €κχ€ΐύ.
εκκοπ-ηστ), 2 fut. pass. 2 pers. sing, of ικκότ/ττω.
έ'κκοψον, 1 aor. act. impv. of ΐκκόπτω.
έκλασα, 1 aor. act. of κλάω.
εκλαυο-α, 1 aor. act. of κλαίω.
ίκλεΛησβε, pf. mid. 2 ]iers. jilur. of «'κλαι/^άνω.
ίκλήθην, 1 aor. pass, of καΚίω.
ε'κόψαα-θε, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers ]ilur. of κόητβ».
ε'κπλεΰσ-αι, 1 aor. act inf. of ε'κπλεω
έ'κρα|α, I aor. act. of κράζαι.
ε'κρνβη, 2 aor. [iass. 3 pers. sing, of κρΰτη-ω.
Ικ<τ<ΛσαΛ, 1 aor. act. inf. of tκσώζ<ύ.
^κτενεΐβ, fut. act. 2 ])ers. sing, of ixTfivia.
4κτησάμην, 1 aor. of κτάομεα.
ίκτνσται, pf. pass. 8 jiers. sing, of κτίζω.
ίκτρατιη, 2 aor. pass subj. 3 pers. sin";, of ίκτρίπ^-
ίκτραιτήοΌνται, 2 fut. pass 3 pers plur of (κτμίπο)
ίκψνη, pres. subj. or 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of «κφυ»
ίκψυη, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of ε'κφιίω.
Ικχε'αι, I aor act inf of ίκχΐω.
ίκχ^οτε, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of (κχίω.
ίκχε'ετε, pres. (or 2 aor.) act. impv. 2 pers plur of inxtm.
ίκχυννόμενοϊ, ίκχυνόμενο?, see ίκχίω.
{λάβατε (-β«τ«), 2 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of AauSu^».
^άκησ-ε, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of λάσκω.
Τλαχε, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of \ατγχάνω.
ίλε'ησον, 1 aor. act. impv. of iktiia
ίλ«νσ-ομαι, fut. of (ρχομαι.
βΐηλακ<τε$, pf. act. ptcp. nom. plor. masc. of Λανι»
ίλήλυθα, pf. of ΐρχομαί.
Forms of ΛΈκβ».
715
Forms of Verbs.
ίλιθάσ-8ηο•αν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of Χιβάζω.
ίλκύσ-αι or ίλκίσαι, 1 aor. act. inf. of e λκω.
ίλλογάτο, iuipf. JJass. 3 pers. sing, of ίλλογίω.
ίλόμ€νο5, 2 aor. mid. ptcp. of α'ιρίω.
ίλιτιοΰσ-ιν, (Attif) flit. 3 pers. plur. oi ίΧπίζω.
ϊμαθον, 2 aor. act. of μανθάνω.
ίμασσ-ώντο, ίμ-οσώντο, impf. 3 [lers. plur. of μασ(σ)άομαι-
ί'μβά;, 2 aor. act. ptep. of ίμβαϊνω.
ίμβάψαϊ, 1 aor. act. Jitcj). of ίμβάτπω-
έμβήναι, 2 aor. act. inf. of ΐμβαίνω.
ίμιξί, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of μίγνυμι.
ίμ•ΐΓ6•ΐΓληο•μίνθ5, pf. pass. ptcp. of (μπίπλημί-
ίμιτλακΕίϊ, ■- aor. pass. ptcp. of ϊμπλησσω.
€μπλησ•θώ, 1 aor. pass. subj. 1 pers. sing, of ίμττίνΧημι.
ίνέβνναμοϋτο, impf. jjass. 3 Jiers. sing, of iVSwra/idu».
«νίΐχίν. impf. act. 3 jiers sing, of ϊνίχω.
ίνίνενον, imjif. act of ίιηκύω.
ίνί•π•λησ•€ν, 1 aor. act. 3 ]iers sing of ίμττίπΚημχ-
ίνίΐνλήσ-θησ-αν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. ])Iur. of (μπιπ\ημι-
ίνίΐΓρησ•€, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of (μπρηθω.
iveimjov, -o-av, impf. and 1 aor. act 3 pers. plur. of ίμπτνω.
ίν€σ-Γηκότα, pf. act. ptcp. ace. sing. masc. of ίνίστημι
iveoTUTo, -ώσαν, -ώτοϊ, Jif. act. ptcp. ace. masc. and fern.
and gen sing oi (νίστημι.
€ν6Τ€ΐλάμην. 1 aor. mid. of €ντίΚ\ω.
€ν€φάνισαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ('μφανίζω.
ίνίφίσησί, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of (μφυσάω.
ίνίχβίίϊ, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of φίρω.
ίνήρ-νηκα, pf. act. of ivfpyiw.
€νκρϊναι, 1 aor. act. inf. oi εγκρίνω-
evoiKoOv, pres act ptcp. nom sing. neut. of evoiKcai.
«ντίλίίται, fut mid. 3 pers. sing of {'ντί'λλω.
έντί'ταλται, pf. mid. 3 pers. sing, of (ντίλλω-
ίντραττη, 2 aor pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of (ντρίπω
ίντραιτησ-ονται, 2 fut. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ίντρίπο).
ΐνυξί, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of νύσσω.
€νϋσ-Γθ|αν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of νυστάζω.
4νωκησ-€, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of eVonteoj.
€|αλ(€)ιφθήναι, 1 aor. pass. inf. of (ξαΧΛφω.
ίξανασ-τήσ-Γ). 1 aor. act subj 3 pers sing of ΙξανΙστημι.
«|αν€'στησ•αν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of (ξανίστημι.
Ιξάρατί, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of (ξαίρω.
ίξαρίϊτ€, fut act. 2 ]jers. plur. of εξαίρω.
ίξαρθη. 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of (ξαΙρω.
«le'ScTo or ίξί'δοτο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing, of €κ8ίΆωμι.
ίξίΐλατο or ίξίίλίτο, 2 aor mid. 3 pers. sing of ίξαιρέω-
€|£καΐθησαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of (κκαΐω.
ίξί'κλιναν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ΐκκλίνω.
ί'ΙίκότΓηϊ, 2 aor. pass. 2 pers. sing, of ίκκόπτα.
(ξελ€, 2 aor. act, impv. of ίξαιρίω.
ίί/ίΚί%ω, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing, of (κλίγω.
ίξίληται, 2 aor. mid. subj 3 pers. sing of (ξαιρίω
(ξίνϊ^καντίί, 1 aor. act ptcp nom. plur. masc. of (κφίρω
e'levcYKtiv. 2 aor act. inf of ϊκφιρω
€ξί'ν€υσ•α, 1 aor. act. either of (κνήω or (κνίω.
4|eire'Ta<ra, 1 aor. act. of ίκπ(τάννυμι.
φιτλάγησαν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ίιαιΚησσω.
l^-«\a, impf. act. 3 pers sing, of (κπλίω.
£|€<Γτακ€ναι, pf. act inf. of ϊξίστημι.
ίξί'σ-ΓραΐΓται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of «κστρίφβι.
ί|€τάο-αι, 1 aor. act. inf. of (ξ(τάζω.
ίξΕτράττησ-αν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of €κτο*π•».
€|txee, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of ΐκχϊω
|ξ€χνθησ-αν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of (κχιω.
ίζίωσιν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of ϊξωθίω.
e|TJ€crav, imj)f. 3 pers. plur. of f|fi/xt.
έξηραμμ*'νθ5, pf pass. ptcp. of ξηραίνω.
έξήρανα and -ράνΟην, 1 aor. act and pass, of ξηυαίν».
ίξήρανται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing of ξηραίνω.
£|ηρ€ΰνησ-α, 1 aor. act. of (ξ(ρ(ννάω.
ίξηρτισμί'νοϊ, pf. pass. ptcp. of (ξαρτίζω•
έξήχηται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of ΐξηχί».
ίξΐί'ναι, pres. inf of ?^ίΐμι
ίξιστάνων, έξιστών, SL'e (ξίστημι.
e|oCa-ov(ri. fut. act. 3 pers. jilur. of ίκφίρν.
(ξώσ-αι, 1 aor. act inf. of (ξωθίω.
t^wcrcv or ί|ώσ€ν, 1 aor. act. 3 ]iers. sing, of ίξω6*ω.
«όρακα, pf . act. of όράω.
ίΤΓογαγίίν. 2 aor. act inf. of ϊπάγω.
ϊτταθίν, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of πάσχω.
ΙπαναπαήσΌμαι, fut. mid. of €παναπανω (^ee irotfw)•
lira|as, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of (πάγω.
έπάραΐ, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of ϊπαίρω.
circipooru, 1 aor mid. 2 pers. sing, of πιφάζω.
έπ»ράτο (-ρΔντο), impf. raid. 3 pers. sing, (plur.) of ιτ^ιοάω.
eircioro, 1 aor. act. of π(ίθω.
«Γίίσβησ-αν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of τκίθω.
iirelxev, impf. act. 3 pers. sing, of (ττίχω.
€ΐΓ£Κ€ΐλαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ϊπικίλλω.
ίΐΓ£Κ£'κλητο, Jilpf. Jjass. 3 pers. sing, of ίπικαΚίω
€π£λ(ίβ€το (-θοντο), 2 aor. 3 pers. sing, (plur.) of inCKa»
θάνομαι
€ΐι•€'λ£ΐχον, impf. act. of (πϊΚιΙχω.
4ΐΓίΐΓθίθ£ΐ, 2 plpf. act. 3 pers. sing, of ιτίίθω.
ϊΐΓ£<Γα, (Alex.) 2 aor. act. of π'ηττω.
ίτΓίστησον, 2 aor act 3 pers. plur. of (φ'ιστημι.
iire'trxev, 2 aor. act. 3 pers sing of ίπίχω.
ί•π•€τίμο, impf. 3 pers. sing, of (πκτιμάω.
ίΐΓ€τράΐΓη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of ϊπιτρίπω,
€π£ψάνη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing of ίπιφαίνω.
«rexpio-iv, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of ('πίχρίω.
ίΐτηκροώντο, impf. 3 pers. j)lur. of ίπακροάομαι.
iirgveo-iv, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of ΐπαινίω.
ίττηξίν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers sing, of πηγννμι.
«ΊΓηρα, 1 aor. act, of 4πα{ρω.
ί-ιτήρθη. 1 aor pass. 3 pers. sing of ϊπαίρω.
inTjpKev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing, of ίπαίρω.
ίιπ[)(Γχΐνβην and ίίΓοκτχννβην, 1 aor. of ίπαισχννοααί
ίΐτίβλίψαι, 1 aor mid impv of ΐττιβλίπω
ίΐΓνβλ€'ψαι, 1 aor. act. inf, of (πιβλίπω
ίιι•(βλίψον. 1 aor act, impv of ΐπιβλΐπω
eiriSi, im])v. of cVeiSoc.
e'lrtees, 2 aor. act impv of iViriftj^t.
£ΐηκ£'κλησαι, pf mid, 2 pers, sing of ΐπικαλίω
ίίΓικί'κλητο, plpf pass, 3 pers, sing of €πικαΧ€α
(ΐηκληθ£ντα, I aor, pass, ptcp, ace. sing. masc. of tvtjtakt».
Forms of Verbs.
716
FoBMs OF Vkub»
ίιηκράνθηοΓον, 1 aor. pass. 8 pere. plnr of ruukurw
{ΊπλελησΊ^νοΐ, pf pass. ptcp. of ϊιτΛαιιθαροααι.
ίιημ(λήθητι, 1 aor puss. impv. of iwt^i\iauaL.
iinov, 2 aor act of πίνω.
ίτητι-λήξ^ς, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. sing, of ίπνκΧήσσν.
ίπιττοθήσ-ατί, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers, plur. of iraroStto
ίπισ-τάο-α, 2 aor. act. ptcp. nom. sing. fern, of ΐφίστημι.
iirUrroToi, pres. ind. mid. 3 pers. sing, of i^'umfiu.
ίιτίσ-ταται, pres. ind. 3 pers. sing, of ΐττίσταμοί.
ίττίο-τηθι, 2 aor. act. impv. of ^φίστημι.
ίΐΓίσ-τώθηϊ, 1 aor, pass. 2 pers. sing of vurroa.
tirvTii^, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of (ΐιιτίθημί.
liixTiee'cun, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of ΐιητίθημι.
{ιττίθ», pres. act. impv. of (ττιτΐθημι.
ίΐητιμ.ήσ-αι (-μήσαι), 1 aor. act. inf. (opt. 3 ρβτβ- eing.)
of ίττιτιμάω.
ίιηφάναι, 1 aor. act inf. of ΐπιφαΐνω.
<ΐΓλονήβη<Γαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of πλακί•.
^ιτλασθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of πλάσσω
ίτΓλήγη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of πλήσσω
ίττλησ-αν, 1 aor. act 3 pers. plur. of πίμπλημί.
ίιτλήσ-θη (.βησ-αν), 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, (plnr.) of
7Γίμπ\ηfU,
ίιτλουτήσατί, 1 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of τ\(ηη(ω.
ίιτλουτίσβητί, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of πλοντίζ'»
ίττλυναν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ιΛύνω.
tirv€v<rav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. jilur. of πκω.
iiTvl-jovTO, impf. pass. 3 pers. ])lur. of ηνίγω.
eirvu|av, 1 aor. act. 3 pers plur. of ητίγω
ίιτράθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing of τηπμάο-^.^ύ.
ίιτρίσθησ-αν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers plur. cf πμίζω
ίττροφήτίΐτον (-^τα), impf. (1 aor.) act. of ιτμοφητη/ω.
timKTt, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of ιττνω.
«πώκΕίΛαν, 1 aor, act. 3 pers. plur. of (ποκίλΚω
ip(p:avTur€, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of ραντίζω.
ίρ(ρ)άπ•ι<Γον, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. oi ραπίζω.
ίρριζωμί'νοι, pf. pass, ptcp nom. plur. masc. of (Ηζόα.
έρ(ρ)ιμμ£'νοι, pf pass. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of piaru
ίρ(ρ)ηΓται, pf. pass. 3 pers sing, of ρίπτω
ίρ(ρ)ιψον, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ρίητω.
ίρ(ρ)ΰσατο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing, of ρνομαι,
ίρ(ρ)ύσβην, 1 aor. pass, of ρίομω.
ϊρρωσο, «ρρωσβί, pf. pass. impv. of ρώννυμι.
ίο-άλπιο-ί, 1 aor act, 3 pers. sing of σαλπ -ifi».
fo-pto-av, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of σβίνημι.
ίσίίσβην, 1 aor. pass, of ada.
{σ-κυλμ('νοι, pf. pass. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. <rf σ(ϋλλ»
ί<Γπ•αρμί'νο5, pf . pass. ptcp. of σπη'ρω.
ί<ηχίβην, 1 aor. pass, of Ίστημι
ίοτάναι, €οτάναι, pf. act. inf. of urnjpt.
ί<Γτήκ«σ•αν, -κεσαν, plpf. act. 3 pers. pitir. of Imtpi.
€(7τηκ£ν, impf. 3 pers. sing, of στηκχο.
ίο-Γηκώί, pf. act. ptcp. of ϊστημι.
ίοΓτην, aor. act. of ιστημι.
ίστηριγμίνοϊ, pf. pass. ptcp. of στηρίζω.
ίστήρικται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, ot στηρίζ».
io-nJs (-<is), pt. act. ptcp. neut. (masc. and nent ) of ΐσττ/μι.
ίστράφησ-αν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of στρέφω.
Ιστρωμίνον, pf. paes. ptcp. neut. of στρωνννω
ϊστρωσαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of β-τρωννν*•.
?<Γτωσον, impv. 3 pers. plur. of tlpi.
ίσφαγμί'νοϊ, pf. Jiass. ptcp. of σφάζω.
ίσφραγισμίνοϊ, pf. pass. ptcp. of σφραγίζω.
ίίτχηκα, pf. ait. of (χω.
ίσ-χηκότο, pf act. ptcp. acc. slng. masc. of Ixm.
((τχον, 2 aor. act. of ίχω.
(τάψη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of θάπτω.
ίτ£θην, 1 aor. pass, of τίθημ*.
ίτίβνήκίΐ, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing, of βνήσκω.
Ιτίκιν, 2 aor. act. 3 jiers sing, of τίκτω.
(τί'χβη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers sing, of τίκτω.
ίτίθίΐ. impf. act. 3 pers. sing of τίθημι.
ίτΐβη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of βύω.
ίϋηρίστηκί'νοι (ίύαρί(Γτηκ€ναι), pf. act. inf. of cvapfcrrcak
«ύξάμην (£ΰξα£μην), 1 aor. (oj)t.) of ίίχομαι.
£ΰ'ραμ(ν, evpav, (.\lc.\.) 2 aor. act. of (νρίσκω.
€ϋράμίνο5 and {ίρόμ€νο5. 2 aor. mid. i>tcp. of (ίρίσα»•
ίίρίθώσιν, 1 aor. pass, ^^ubj. 3 ])ers. plur. of evpivKm.
«νρηκΕναι, pf. act. iaf. of ίνμίσκω
ίντφρο'νθητι, 1 aor. pas.e impv. of (Ιφραίνω.
ίφαγον, 2 aor. act. of ΐσθίω.
£φαλλομ(νο;, ίφαλομίνο5, 2 aor. Jitcj). of «'ψάλλομαι•
ί'φάνην, 2 aor. pass, of φαίνω.
(φαο-ΚΕν, impf. act. 3 jiers. sing, of φάσκω.
«φ££α-ατο, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing, of φ^ίΒομαι.
ίφίοτώϊ, pf. act. Jitcii. of (φίστημι.
ίφθακο, κτα, pf. and 1 aor. act. uf φθάνη.
ίφθαρην. 2 aor. pass, of φθ(ίρω.
<φι5£ (tViSe), impv. of eVfiSoi».
(φίλΕΐ, imjif. act. 3 pers. sing, of φίΚίω.
ίφ£ο-ταται, pres. mid. 3 pers sing or (φίστημι.
Ιφραξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of φράσσω.
ίφρναξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 [lers. plur. of φρυάσ•τ».
4'φυγον, 2 aor. act. of φενγω.
ίχάρην, 2 aor. pass, (as act.) of χαίρω.
e'xpicra, 1 aor. act. of χρίω.
ί'χρώντο, impf. 3 pers. i>lur. of χράομαι.
ίψΕΟσω, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing, of ψ(ϋ8ομΜ.
ίώρακαν, -ράκασιν, pf. act. 3 pers. jilur. of opam.
ίωράκίΐ, Jilpf- act. 3 pers. sing, of όράω.
ίωρακώϊ, ])f. act. ptcp. of όράω.
έώρων, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of όράω.
Ιβ{ννντ(, pres. act. impv. 2 pers, plor. (Tdf.) of «rdfinw*
M. Xiv or ίήν, ξήϊ, ίώ, see ζάω.
ξΔβ-αι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ζώννυια.
ζώσα, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of ζώηνμί.
ήβουλήθην, etc., see βουΧομαι.
ήγαγον, 2 aor. act. of άγω.
ήγάτΓο, im]jf. act. 3 pers. sing, of άγοΜάαι.
ηγαιτηκόο-ι, pf. act. ptcp. dat. plur. of αγαττά•*.
ήγγΕίλαν. 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of άγγίΚΧω.
ήγγικα, -σα, pf. and 1 aor. act. of ιγγίζω.
Forms of Verbs.
717
Forms of λ ebbs
TJ^tipcv, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of rytlptt,
ή-γί'ρβην, 1 aor. ]iass. of iyelpa
ήγ6το (-γοντο), impf. pass. 3 pers. sing, (plnr.) of Icyw-
ήγημοι, pf. of ίιγίομαί.
ή -yviKOTes, \>ί• act ptcp. nom plur. masc. of (tyvi^oi.
ήγνισμ<'ν09, pf pass ptcp of άγνίζω.
ήγνοουν, impf. act of άγνοίω
ηδίκταν, i)l|>f. 3 pers. plur. of οϊδα (see «δω, Π.).
ή5ύνατο (eSuvaro), iiu])f. 3 pers sing, of Sviamu.
ή8υνηθη, ή8υν<ίσ-9η, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing, of 8ύναμαί.
ήθίλον, iinj)f. of θί\ω•
ήκασ-ι, ]if. act. 3 \)vvii. plur. of ηκω-
ήκολουβηκαμ6ν, pf. act. 1 pers. plur. of άκοΚαυβη».
ήλατο, 1 aor. 3 per?, sing of άλλομαι.
ήλαττωμ€'νο5, pf. pass. ptcp. of ίλαττόω.
ήλαύνίτο, imjif. jiass. 3 pers. sing, of Αανκ•.
ήλίήθην, 1 aor. pass, of cX»'cd.
ήλεημίνοϊ, pf. pass. ptcp. of tλfeω.
ήλί'ηο-α, 1 aor. act. of Accoj.
ήλ£ΐψα, 1 aor. act. of άλειφα.
ήλκωμίνοϊ, pf. pass. ptcp. of ίΚκόω-
ήλλοξαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pars. plur. of άλλασ-ιτν.
ήλλίτο, impf 3 pers. sing, of άλλομαι
ήλτΓίκα, -o-o, pf. and 1 aor. act. of €'λπί(ι>>.
ήμάρτηκα, pf. act. of άμαρτάνω.
ήμαρτον, 2 aor. act. of άμαρτάνω.
ήμίθα, ημ€ν, im])f. I pers. phir. of «μί.
ήμίλλον anil έμελλον, impf. of μ(λλω•
ημην, impf. of (ΐμί.
ημφΐ£σ•μ£'νθ5. Jif- pass, ptcp o( άμφιήψνϋΛ.
ήνίγκα, 1 aor. act. (ti φίρω.
ήν£ΐχόμην, impf. mid. of άνϊχω.
ήν€<τχόμην, 2 aor. mid. of άν(χα>.
ηνί'χθην, 1 aor. pass, of φ(ρω.
ήν€ωγμίνθ5, \>t- pass. ptcp. of amiya>-
ήνίωξα (ηνί'ωξα Tr?), I aor act. ol 'uitnym
ήνίω'χθην, 1 aor. ])ass. of άΐΌίγω.
ήνοίγην, 2 aor. pass, of άνοί-γω.
ήνοιγμίνο5, pf ]iass. ptc]) of avoiyn.
ή'νοιξα. 1 aor. act. of avoiytu
ήνοίχβην, 1 aor. pass oi avoiyu>
ή'ξίΐ, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of ήκα>.
ήξη, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of ηκ».
ήξ(ον, impf. act. 3 pers. sing, of a|iou).
ήξίωτοι, i)f pass 3 pers. sing of άξιόαι
ήττατήθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of άπατάα~
ήτΓίίθησ-αν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur of oirftAu».
ήΐΓ€ίθουν. impf. act. of άπ^ιθ^'ω.
ηΐΓ£ίλ€ΐ, impf. act. 3 ]icrs. sing, of dirfiXtiu.
ήττίοτουν, im])f. act. of άπιστίω.
ή•ΐ70ρ£ΐ, impf. act. Ά pers. sing, of <ίπ•οοία>.
ήΐΓτοντο, impf. mid. .3 per.s. plur. ot άττην.
ηρα. 1 aor. act. of αίρω.
ήρ-(ίΙρ•)γαζόμην. -σάμην. impf. and 1 aor. oi tinaiamu.
ηρ€βΐ(Γομ 1 aor act. of (ρ(θίζα>.
ήρ£ηι, 1 aor. act. of άρίσκω.
ήρ«Γκον, impf. act. of αρέσκω.
ήρημώθη, 1 aor pass. 3 pers. sing, of tpi,uoa>.
ήρη|ΐωμ«νην, pf. pass. ptcp. acc. sing. fern, ot ίΛία^χ»
ήρθην, 1 aor. pass, of αίρω.
ηρκ€ν, pf. act. 3 pers. sing, of άψω.
ηρμένος, pf. pass. ptcp. of αίρω.
ηρν€ϊτο, impf. 3 jjers. sing, of apvcouob
ή'ρνημαι, pf. pass, of άρνϊυμαι.
ήρνημί'ν05, pf. paSS. ptCp. of apvcoiuu.
ήρνησ-άμην, 1 aor. of apveopat
τίρνησω, 1 aor. 2 j)ers. sing of άρΜομοΜ.
ήρξάμην, 1 aor. mid. of άρχω.
ήρττάγη, 2 aor. pass. 3 )iers. sing, of άρπαζα,.
ήριτασ-ί, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of αρπάζω-
ήρτΓώτθη, 1 aor. pass. 8 ]iers. sing, of άρπάζ».
ηρτυμ€νθ5, pf. pass. ptcp. of άρτνω.
ήρχοντο, impf. 3 pers. plur. of ίρχομαι.
ήρώτσυν, ήρώτων, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of cpuriM..
η5, ησ-θα, impf. 2 jiers sing, of (Ιμί.
ήσθιον, impf. act. of ('σθίω.
ήσ•σ-ώθητ£, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of ήττόα-
•Γ)τη'καμ£ν, jif. act. 1 pers. plur. of αίτίω-
ητησ-α, ^τάμην, 1 aor. act. and mid. of airim.
ήτίμασ-α, 1 aor. act of ατιμάζω.
ήτίμησα, 1 aor. act. of άτιμάω.
ήτιμωμί'νοϊ, pf. pass. ptcp. of άτψόω.
ητοίμακα, pf. act. of (τοιμάζω.
ητοΐντο, im]if. mid. 3 pers. plur. of airew.
ήττήθητ£, 1 aor. pass. 2 jiers. plur. of ήττά».
ήττηται, ]ιί. pass. 3 pers. sing, of ήττάω.
ητω, pres impv 3 pers. sing of (Ιμί.
ηΰδο'κησ-α, 1 aor. act. of cufioKfu.
ηντ8οκοίμ£ν, impf. act. 1 pers. plur. of dSoKt:
ηύκαίρονν, im|)f. of ΐΐκαιρίω.
ηύλήσ•αμ£ν, 1 aor. act 1 i>ers. plur. of αΰ\ίω.
ηϋλο'γει, impf act. 3 pers sing, of (νΚογίω
ηϋλο'γηκα, -αα, pf. and 1 aor. act. of (IXoyia-
ηΰξησ-α, 1 aor. act. of αυξάνω.
ηΰτΓορεϊτο, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing, of (Ιπορΐω.
ηνρίσκετο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of tvpiaKof.
ηΐριπ-κον, impf. act. of ιί/ρίσκω.
ηνφόρη<Γ£ν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of (νφορίω.
ηύφράνθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of (ΙφραΙνω.
ηνιχαρίσ-τησαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ΐΰχα(>ι<ΓΤ(».
ηϋχόμην, impf. of (ΰχομαι.
ηφΐ£, impf. 3 pers. sing, of άφίημι (άφίω).
ήχβην, 1 aor. pass, of άγω.
ηχρ£ΐώθη<Γαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of άχρτιΛν
ήψάμην, 1 aor. mid. of &r-e>.
θάψαι, 1 aor. act inf. of θάπτω.
β£ίναι, θ£ίί, 2 aor. act. inf. and ptcp. of τίθημι. ,
6f μ£νο5, 2 aor. mid. ptcp. ot τίΛ/μ».
efVT£s, 2 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of τίβημι-
β£σβ£, 2 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. ))lur. of τΐθημ•.
θ£Τ£, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of τίθημι-
βίγπ5, etyia, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 and 3 pers. sing oi
yavω.
βώ, 2 aor. act. subj. of τϊθηαι.
FoBMB Or VUIBS.
718
FoBMs OF Verbs.
Ιά0η (-$11), 1 aor. pass. ind. (eabj.) 8 pen. «fauf. of iiimuu.
tariu, pf . pass. S pers. sing, of ίάομα^.
Idriu, pros. 3 pere. sing, of Ιάομαι.
UxTo, impf. 8 pers. siii'^. Ιάομαι-
£5αν, ISov, coUat. forms of eldor.
(σ-αστ, 3 pers. plur. of the 2 pf . oiSa (see «iAcu, II. V
Ιιτβι, impv. 2 pers. sing, of ιΐμί.
ΙστάνομΜν and 1στΰμ<ν, pres. ind. 1 pers. pliir. of umjfu.
1<ΓΤ(, 2 pers. plur. ind. or impv. of otSa (see ri8<u. U. ).
1<Γτή«ιν, plpf. act. of ΐστημι.
(u)uvos, pres. ptcp. of Ιάομαι•
καθαρκϊ, (Attic) fut. 3 pars. sing, of καθαμίζο.
καθαρ[(Γ<Η, 1 aor. act. inf. of καθαρίζω.
καθαρ(ο-|). 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of ».ίΑωίί«.
καθαρCσθη'n, 1 aor. pass. impv. of καβαρίζ'Μ
καθ€ϊλ(, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of καβαι^ »
καθ6λω, fut. act. of καθαφίω.
κάβη, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing, of κάθημοΑ.
καθήκαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur of κοΘιί^
κα9η(Γ€<Γβ€, fut. 2 pers. plur. of κάβημαι.
καθήψί, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of καθαιττν.
κάβου, pres. impv. of κάθημαι.
KoXcVcu, 1 aor. act. inf. of καλ/ω.
κοίλίσον, 1 aor. act. impv. of καλέω.
κά)ΐητ€, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of κάμνω
κατάβα and κατ«ίβηβι, 2 aor. act. impv. of καταϋαινοί .
καταβάϊ, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of καταβαίνω.
καταβ€'βηκα, |)f. act. of καταβαίνω.
καταβιό, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of arrathuvm
κατακαήσ-ομαι, 2 fut. pass, of κατακαίω.
κατακαΐσ-αι, 1 aor. act. inf. of κατακαίω.
κατακαυχω, pres. impv. of κατακαυχάομαι,
καταλάβη, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of καταλαΐΑΟανω
icaTairC^, 2 aor. act. subj 3 pers. sing, of καταπίναι
«αταποθή, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of καταπίνω.
καταρτίσ-αι, 1 aor. act inf. or opt. (3 pers. sing ) ot κα-
ταρτίζω.
κοτασκηνοΐν (-νουν), prcs. act. inf. of κατασκηνόω.
κατά(Γχωμ€ν, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 pers. plur. of κατέχω
κοτ€αγώσχν, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of κατά-γηοι.
κατί'αξον, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of κατάγνυμ^.
κατ«ίί|ει, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of κατάγιη/μι.
κατί'βη (-ησ-αν), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing (plur.) dt aimtio.na.
κατ(γνωα-\ίένοί, pf pass. ptcp. of καταγινάχτκω
κατ£ΐλημμ«'νο5, pf pass. ptcp. of κατα\αμΙίάνα>.
κατίίληψί'νοι, pf . act. inf. of καταλαμβάνω.
κατ£κάη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing of κατακαίν
κατί'κλαο -e, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sinfc of κατακλα.•^
κατε'κλίΐο-α, 1 aor. act. of κατακλΐΐω
κατενεχθΕί;, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of καταφίμω.
κατίνΰγησαν, 2 aor. pass 3 pers. plur. of κατανύη,•<Μ
κατίττίο-τησ-ον, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of καηφ«η -.,μι.
κατί'τΓκ, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of καταττίνι».
κατίττόθην, 1 aor. pass, of καταιτίνω.
κατ«Γκα|ΐμ(ν(ΐ, pf. pass. ptcp. nom. plor. neot at .unr
tTKottTw.
κατΜΤρ<μμ/νο«, -στραμμ^νοϊ, pf. pass ptcp of κατα(ττμ<φω.
κατιστρώθησαν, 1 aor. pass 3 pers. plur. of καταστμωννυΐΛ».
κατ(νθνναι, I aor. act. inf. of κατινθΰνη.
κατευθννίο, 1 aor. act. opt 3 pers. sing, of Kurtv^v»
κατε'ψαγον, 2 aor. act. of κατίαθίω.
κατήγγειλα, 1 aor. act. of καταγγίΧΚα.
κατηγγε'λη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers sing, ol «urayyr\A«.
KanivcyKa, I aor. act. of καταφίρω.
κατήντηκα, -ο"α, pf. and 1 aor, act υ1 καταντάω
κατηράσ-ω, 1 aor. 2 pers. sing of κυταρα^ΐΜΐι
κοτήργηται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, ol καταμγιω
κατηρτισμί'νοί, pf. pass. ptcp. of καταρτίζω
κατηρτ£σ-ω, 1 aor. mid 2 pers. sing of «arni; >■[(«».
κατησχννθην, 1 aor. pass, of καταισχύνω
κατήχηνται, pf. pass. 3 pers plur. of κατηχ(ω.
κατηχησ-ω, 1 aor. act. subj. of κατηχίω
κατίωται, pf pass. 3 pers. sing of κατιόω
κατω'κΐ(Γ€ν, 1 aor act. S pers. sing of κατυίκίζ».
καυθη'σ-ωμαι, καυχη'σ-ωμαι, see καίω.
κα\»χα£Γαι, pres ind. 2 pers sing of καυχάομοί
KiKaea(or €)ρισμίνθ5ι pf pass. ptcp. of καθαμιζΛ.
κεκαθαρμε'νοϊ, pf. pass. ptcp. of καθαιρώ.
κίκαλυμμί'νο9, pf. pass, ptcj) of καλύπτω.
Κίκαυμε'νοϊ, pf. pass. ptcp. of καίω.
Κίκερασ-μί'νου, pf. pass. ptcp. gen. sing. masc. of κ*μάνννμΑ
Κ€κλ«σ•μοι, pf. pass, of κλίίω
Κί'κληκο, pf. act. of καλεω
Κί'κληται, pf. pass. 3 pers sin;^ of καλ.(ω.
κί'κλικεν, pf. act. 3 pers "sing, ol κλίνω.
κε'κμηκα;, pf. act. 2 pers. sing of κάμνω.
Κίκορεο-με'νοί, pf. pass. ptcp. of κοριννυμι.
κεκρα'νε. 2 pf act 3 pers. sing, of κράζω
κεκροίξονται, fut mid. 3 pers. plur. of κράζω.
κεκρατηκί'ναι, pf . act. inf. of Kparcv.
κεκράτηνται, pf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of Kparta.
κίκρίκ€ΐ, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing, of κρίνω.
κεκριμοι, pf . pass, of κρίνω.
κεκρυμμί'νο?, pf. pass ptcp. of κρύπτω.
κεράσ-ατί, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of icr/xivnfu.
κερ8ανω, κερεηιτω, fut. act. of Κ€ρ3αίνω.
κερδάνω, 1 aor. act. subj. of κιρδαΐνω.
κεχάρισμαι, i)f. of χαρίζομαι.
κεχαριτωμε'νη, pf. pass. ptcp. nom. sing. fem. of χαριτάω
κε'χρημαι, pf. of χράομαι.
κεχωρισ-με'νοϊ, pf. pass. ptcp. of χωρίζω.
κηρϋξαι (al. κηρίξαι), 1 aor. act. inf. of κηρύσσω.
κλάσαι, 1 aor act. inf. of κλάω.
κλαύο-ατε, 1 aor act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of κλαίω
κλαΰ(Γω, κλαν<Γθμαι, fut. of κλαίω.
κλεισ-θώο-ιν, 1 aor. pass subj. 3 pers. plur. of i>f((»
κληθήϊ, κληθώμεν, κληθήναι, κληβε'ν, 1 aor. pass of «αλ(ω>
κλωμεν, pres ind act. 1 pers. plur of κλάω.
κλώμενον, pres. pass, ptcp neut. of κλάω
κλώντε$, pres. act. ptcp. nom. plur masc. of κλαω.
κοιμώμενοί, pres. pass. ptcp. of κοιμάω.
κολληθητι, 1 aor. pass. impv. of κολλάικ.
κομιεΐται, (.\ttic) fut mid 3 pers sing of κοαίζω.
κομΐα-αο-α, 1 aor. act. ptcp. nom. sing, fern ot κομίζω.
Forms of Verbs.
719
Forms op Verbs.
κορίσθίντίϊ. 1 aor. pass ptcp. nom. plur.masc. of κορίνημι.
Kd>|/aSi 1 aor. act ptcp of κόπτω.
κρο^ον (not χρβζον), pres ptcp. neut. of κιάζω.
«ραξαϊ. 1 aor. act. ptC)). of κράζω.
«ράξουσιν, fut. act. 3 pers. jjlur of κράζω.
κρότίΐ. ])res impv of κρατίω.
κριθη(Γ£ο•θί, ] fut. ijass 2 pers. plur. of κρίνοι
κριθώσ-ιν, 1 aor. pass subj .3 pers. plur. of κρίνω
κρυβήναι, 2 aor. pass inf. of κρύπτω
κτήσ-ασθί, 1 aor. miJ iini)V. 2 pers. plur. of κτάομαί
κτήσ-ησ-βί, 1 aor. mid subj 2 pers. plur. of κτάομαι.
λόΡί(-Ρτ]), 2 aor act. impv (subj 3 pers. sing.) of λαμβάνω
λαβείν, 2 aor. act. inf. of λανθάνω
λαχοΟσ-ι, 2 aor. act ptc]). dat. plar. of λαγχάνω
Κάχωμίν, 2 aor. act. subj 1 pers. plur. of λαγχάΐΌ).
\ίλο«(σ-)μίνθ5, pf pass. ptcp. of λούω
λΑυσοι, pf pass 2 pers. sing of λύω.
λη(μ.)φβή. 1 aor. pass subj 3 pers sing, of \Λ.ι3άνω.
λη(μ)ψθ|χαι, fut. of \αμ3άνω
λίπη, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing cf λΰιτω
μάθετ€, 2 aor. act impv 2 pers plur of μανθάνω.
μόθητ6, 2 aor. act. snbj 2 pers ])lur. of μανβανω
μαθών. 2 aor act. ptcp of μηνθάυω
μακαριοίο-ι, (Attic) fut. 3 jiers jilur οΓ μακαρίζω.
μακροθνμησ-ον, 1 aor act. impv of μακ,ι•ιθνμίω
μ(θΐ(Γτάναι, pres. act. inf. of μιβίστημι.
μεθυσ-θώσ-ιν. 1 aor pass, subj 3 j)ers. plur. of αίθίισκω
μίΐναι, 1 aor inf of μει/ω
^tivavTcs, 1 aor ptcp nom plur masc. of μίνω.
μείνατε, μεΐνον, 1 aor. impv. of μΐνω.
μεΐνη. -ητε, -ωσ-ιν, 1 aor subj ot μ^νω
μελίτα, pres act. impv. of μελετάω
μεμαθηκώ;. pf. act. ptcp of μανθάνω
μίμίνήκεκΓαν, plpf. act 3 pers ])lur. of μίνω
μεμιαμμε'νοϊ Or .<ΓμΕ'νο$, pf. pass, ptcp of μιαίνω
μεμίανται, pf pass 3 pers sing, or plur. of μ.ιιίι/&>.
μεμιγμενοΐ, pf pass. ptcp. of μίγννμί
με'μνησβε, pf. mid. 2 \)t;vs ]iliir of μιμνήιτκω.
μεμύημαι, pf paSS. of μυίω.
μενεϊτε, fut. ind 2 pers. ])liir. of μένω.
μένετε, pres ind or impv. 2 pees. plur. of μένω
μ.ετά,3α μίτάβηθι, 2 aor act impv. ot μιταβαίνω
μετασ-ταθώ, 1 aor pass subj of μίθίστημι
μετασ-τραφήτω, 2 aor. jjass impv. 3 pers. sin'j:. of μίτα-
στρ^φω.
μετε'βηκεν, 1 aor act. 3 pers. sing of μίτατίθηαι
μετέσ-τησ-εν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of μιθίση^μιί.
μετε'ο-χηκεν. ]if act 3 pers. sing of μιτίχω.
μετετεθησαν. 1 aor pass 3 pers. ])hir of μ(τατί&ημί
μετηλλαξαν, 1 aor act. 3 pers plur. of μετιιλ\αυ-σω.
μετήρεν, 1 aor act. 3 pers sin•! iif μ(ταιμα
(ΐίτοικιΔ, (Attic) fut act of μετοικίζω.
μ(τιρκισ'εν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of μιτοιχίζω.
μιαν9έοβ-ιν, 1 aor. pass, subj 3 pers i)lur of μιαίνω.
μνησ-θήναι, 1 aor pass inf of μιμνήσκω
μνησ-θητι, -τ€, 1 aor. pass. impv. of μιμνήσκω.
μνησθώ, -Ogs, 1 aor pass. subj. of μιμνήοκω.
νενίκηκα, pf. act of νικάω
νενομοθί'τητο, plpf. pass. 3 pers sing of νομοθρήω
νη'ψατε, 1 aor impv 2 pers. ]ilur. ol νήφω
νο'ει. pres. act. impv. of ΐ'οε'ω
νοούμενα, pres. pass, ptcp neut. plur. of νοίω.
oSvvurat, pres. ind mid 2 pers. sing, of δΐιυνά».
οϊτω. fut. act of φ«,;ω
όμνΰναι, όμννειν, pres. act inf of ομνύω
ομόο-αι. -as, 1 aor act inf and jitcp. of ομνύω.
όμο'σ-η, 1 aor act subj 3 pers sing, of ομνύω.
όναίμην, 2 aor mid. o])t. of όνίνΐίμι.
όρώσ-αι, pres act. ptcp nom plur. fern of όράω.
όφθίί5, 1 aor pass ptc]) of όράω.
όψει, ό'ψτ], fut. 2 pers sing of όράω.
οψεσ-θε, fut. 2 pers. plur. of όράω.
όψησ-θε, 1 aor. mid subj. 2 pers. plur. of όράω.
ιταθεΐν, 2 aor. act. inf of πάσχω.
ττάθτ), 2 aor. act subj. 3 pers. sing, of πάσχω.
χαίσ•τ|, 1 aor. act subj. 3 pers. sing, of παίω.
■π-αραβολευσ-άμενοβ. 1 aor ptcp. of π<ιμα)3"λε ύομαι.
τταραβουλευσ-είμενοϊ, 1 aor ptcp. of παραβουλίΰομαι.
-τταραδεδώκεισ-αν. ]>lpf. 3 pers. plur of παραδίδωμι.
irapaStSot, irapaSiSiS. pres subj 3 pers. sing, of παρα8ιδωμι
irapaSiSovs (irapaSovis), jires (2 aor.) jitcp. of τταμαδίίίοίμι.
Ίταραδω (-Sot), 2 aor. act. sulij 3 [lers. sing, of παραδί&ωμι.
ναραθεΐναι, 2 aor. act inf of ππρατίθημι
τταράθου, 2 aor mid im])V. of παρατίθημι.
•π-αραθώσιν, 2 aor. act. sultj •'! per.•; ]ilur. oi παρατίθημι.
τταραιτοΰ, ]»res. im]»v. of παραιτΐομαι.
■π-αρακεκαλυμμε'νοϊ. Jif. Jiass ptcp. of παμακαλύπτω.
ιταρακεχειμακο'τι. ρί. act ptcp. dat sing of παΐ)αχ(ΐμαζω.
ιταρακληθώο-ιν, 1 aor pass subj 8 pers. plur. of ϊπιμακίΐλεω
τταρακύψαϊ, 1 aor. act. jitcp. of παρακνπτω.
■7Γαραλη(μ)φθησ•εται, 1 fut pass. 3 pers sing of ιταμιιλαμ-
βάνω.
τταραιτλεΰσ-αι. 1 aor act inf of παραπλέω.
■ΐΓαραρ(ρ)υώμεν. 2 aor pass. subj. 1 |iers. ]ilur. of παουρρίω.
■π-αρασ-τήσ-αι, 1 aor. act. inf. of παρίστημι.
•π-αρασ-τη'σατε, 1 aor act. impv 2 |iors. plur. of παμίστημι.
■π-αρασ-τήτε, 2 aor. act. subj 2 pers. ])lur. of παρίση^μί.
τταραίτχών, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of παρίχω
ΐΓαρατιθε'σ-θωσαν, pres. impv. 3 |iers. plur. of παρατίθημι-
ιταρεδίδοσ-αν. impf. (Alex ) 3 ])ers plur. of τσραδιδωμι
τταρε'θεντο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. jilur. of παρατίθημι-
ιτάρει. pres. ind. 2 pers sins of πάμειμι
Ίταρειμενοϊ. pf pass ])tcp. of παρίημι
παρεΐναι 2 nor Met inf of τταμίτ^μι and pres inf. ot «ajtifi»
τΓαρεισ-άξουεΓίν, fut. act. 3 pers. plur. of παρίΐσάγαι.
PoKMS OF Verbs.
720
FouMs OF Verus.
«■αρίΐΐΓίδύησ-αν, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of πιιμησΆϋω.
TOpiKreSua-av, 1 aor. act 3 pers. plur. of TiaufiirSuui.
«•αρίΐ<Γ£ν£γκαντ£5, 1 aor. act. ptcj). nom. iilur. masc. of
»apei<mJKei<rav, |il|ii'. act. 3 pers. Jjlur. of παρίστημι.
β-αρίϊχαν, iiMpf. I Alex.) 3 pers plur. of παμιχω
ιταρίίχο'μην, impf . mid. of παρέχω
irapf κυψίν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of παρακίτττω.
•π-αρίλάβοσ-αν, 2 aor. act. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of παρα-
λαμβάνω.
iraptXcio-ovToi, fut. 3 pers. plur. of παρέρχομαι
ΐΓορίληλυθί'ναι (-Bus), Jif. act. inf. (ptcp.) oi παρέρχομαι
ΐΓαρ£λθάτω (-θίτω), 2 aor. act. impv 3 pers. siiiy;. of
παρέρχομαι
iropev£YK£iv, 2 aor. act inf. of παραφίρω
rapc'^et, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of παρέχω.
irap€ffi, fut. mid. 2 pers. sing, of παρέχω.
«ΐίρεπίκραναν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of παραπικραίνω
vapta-Ktvaxmuj pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of παρασκηάζω
»αρ€<Γτηκότ€8 and irapeoTUTcs, pf. act. ptcp. nom. plur.
masc. of παριστημι.
»ap£(mj(roT(, 1 aor act 2 pers. plur of παρΙστημι.
irap£T£iv£, 1 aor. act 3 pers sing of παρατύνω.
ΐΓορ£τηροιιν, impf act. 3 pers. plur. of παρατηρεί»
ιταρη7γ£ΐ.λαν, 1 aor, act. 3 pers. plur. of παραγγέλλω
παρηκολούθηκαϊ (-<ras), pf (1 aor.) act. 2 pers eing. of
παρακο^ονθεω.
irapTi'vft, imjif. act. 3 pers sing of παραιυέω
ιταρτιτημ£'νο5, pf. pass. ptc]). of παραιτέομαι.
τι-αρητησ-αντο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pci'-s plur. of παραιτίοααι
•ΐΓαρω'κησ£ν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of παροικέω
•π•αρωξΰν£το, impf. jiass. 3 pers. sing of παροξύνω.
ιταρώτρυναν, 1 aor act. 3 pers. plur of παρότρυνα)
τταρωχημενοϊ, pf. ptcp. of παροίχομαι.
τταυσ-άτω, 1 aor act. impv. 3 i)ers. sing of πανα>.
■π•£Ϊν, '.: aor act inf of πίνω
•ir£liras, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of πtΊθω.
tr£i(ru, fut act. of π(ίθω.
τΓ£'ιτα«ται, ])f. mid. 3 pers. slug, of παΰω.
■ΐΓ£-π•£ΐραμΐ£'νο5, pf. pass. ptcp. of π(ΐράω.
ir£ir£vpatrp.£vos, pf. pass. ptcp. of πιιράζω.
Tr£ir£t<r().m, -pivos, pf. pass ind and ptcp. of πιίβω.
ΐΓ£ΐΓΐ£<Γμ£'νθ5 pf pass ptcp, of πιέζω.
■ΐΓ£•ΐ7ΐ<ΓΤ£ΐκ£ΐ.σ-αν, |ilpf. act 3 pers. plur. of η-ιστοίκ•
■𕣕π•ιστ£υκόο•ι, pf. act. ptcp. dat. plur. of πιστεύ*.
ΐΓ£•7Γλάνηο-θ£, i>f. pass 2 pers plur. of πλανάω
■π-£•ΐΓλά•η)νται, jif jiass. 3 ]iers sing of πλατύνω.
■𕣕π•ληρωκ£'ναι, pf. act. inf. of πληρόω.
ιτίττοιθα, 2 pf . of π(Ίθω.
ττέίΓονθα. 2 ])f . of πάσχω
•n-£iroTiK£v. ]if. act. 3 ]iers. sing, of ποτίζω-
•ΐΓ£ΤΓρακ£, pf ait 3 pers. sing, of πιπράσκω•
■ir£Trpap.£'vos. \>f pass ptC]) of πιπράσκα•
πίίτραχα, pf act. of πράσπω
Ίτέιρτωκα. -k£S. -kov, pf. act. of πίπτω.
π£πυρωμ£νο;, pf. pass ])tcp of πυρόω
iTiiruiKc ^-κovJ, pf. act. 3 pers. sing, (plur.) of »i»e>-
νητωρωμένος, pf . pass. ptcp. of πωρόω.
■ΐΓ£ρι.άψ<ΐ5, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of πιριάπτω.
ΐΓ£ρι8ραμόντί5, 2 aor. act. ptcp. nom. jilur. of πΐυιτυ«;(α>.
ΐΓ£ρΐ£δ£'δ£το, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing of π(ρώέω
ΤΓ£ρΐ£ζω<Γμ£νο$ι pf . pass. ptcp. of π(ριζωννύω.
π£ρΐ£'κρυβον, 2 aor. of π(ρικρϋτΓτω (or impf. of utmmjvtiiiiX
περιελεΐν, 2 aor. act. inf of πιριαιοέω.
ΐΓ£ρΐ£ΐΓ£σον, 2 aor. act of περιπίπτω.
πίριισπάτο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of irf, « τκάω.
ΐΓ£ρΐ£<Γχον, 2 aor. act. of περιέχω.
■ΐΓ£ρΐ£'τ£μον, 2 aor. act. of πίριτέμνω.
■ΐΓ£ρίζω(Γαι, 1 aor. mid imp\ of π(ριζωννΰω.
■π•£ριηρ£ίτο, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of πίριαι/κω.
ΐΓ£ρι.θ£ντ£5, 2 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. of τκριτιβημι.
■π•£ριί<Γτασο, pres. mid. (pass.) ini]iv. of πιραστημι.
τΓ£ριΐΓ£<Γητ£, 2 aor. act. subj 2 pers. plur. of π£ριπίπτυ».
π£ριρ£ραμμ£νον, \>i pass ptcp. neut. of πιριρραίνω.
ΐΓ£ριρ(ρ)ηξαντ£5, 1 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. of Trfptpp^yi"-!*•
•ΐΓ£ρισ-σ£ί(Γαι 1 aor. act. inf., and πίρισσ-ήσα* 1 aot «u
opt. 3 i)ers. sing., of πfpισσ(ίω■
ΐΓ£ριτ£τμημ£νθ5, pf. pass, ptcp of πίριτέμνω.
■ΐΓ£ριτιθ£'ασ-ιν, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of πιριτίθημ^
ΐΓ£ριτμηθήναι, 1 aor. pa.ss. inf. of πίριτέμνω.
τΓ£σ£ίν, 2 aor act. inf. of πίπτω.
■π•£σ•£ίται (-οΟνται), fut. 3 ])ers. sing, (pl'ir.) of π••-'•!».
i7£V£T£, 2 aor. act. impv 2 pers jilur. of πίπτω
ττίτηται, pres. subj. 3 pers. sing, of πέτομαι.
vtT<i\i(vos, pres. ptcp. of π^τάομαι.
τΓ£φαν£ρωται (-ν£ρώσ-βαι), pf. pass, (inf.) of <pavi,oo>a
π(φ(μωσο, pf. pass impv. of φιμόω.
iricia-ai., 1 aor. act inf. of πκί^ω.
irt£, 2 aor. act impv. of πίνω
irwtv, 2 aor. act inf of πίνω
irU<ra.i, irUrte, fut. 2 pers. sing, and plur. of ττ/ιχ».
•irC^, 2 aor. act subj. 3 pers sing of πίνω
■ΐΓΐκραν£ϊ, fut, act. 3 pers sing of πικραίνω.
iriv, 2 aor. act. inf. of πίνω
πΙω, 2 aor. act, subj of πίνω.
•π-λάσαϊ, 1 aor, act. ptcp, of πλάσσω
•ir\£|avT£s, 1 aor, act, ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of πλέκω
■7Γλ£ον<ίσ•αι, 1 aor act. opt. 3 pers. sing, of πλίοναζω
Ίτληθύναι, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers sing of πληθύνω-
■π•ληθύν£ΐ, ]ires. act. 3 ]5ers. sing, of πληθύνω.
ΐΓληθυν£Ϊ, fut act 3 pers. sing of πληθύνω
ιτληθυνθήναι, 1 aor pass inf of πληθύνω
ιτληρωθη, -θήτ£, -βώ, -θώσ-ιν, 1 aor. pass, subj of πληρ'Κν.
■π-ληρώσ-αι 1 aor. inf., and ιτληρώσοι 1 aor. opt. 3 pert•
sing , ot πληρόω
•π-λησαβ, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of πΐμπλημι.
ΐΓλησ-θ£65, 1 aor. pass, ptcp of πίμ'^λημι.
ιτλησ-θήϊ, 1 aor. pass, subj 2 pers. sing, of πΐμπλημι
τη-εη, pres. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of πνέω.
•π•οιη<Γ£ΐαν, (Aeolic) 1 aor, opt, 3 pers ]ilur oi πηκω
ΐΓοιμαίν£ΐ, ]ires, act. 3 pers, sing of ποιμαίνω
ΐΓοιμάνατ£, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers, plur, of ποιμαίνω.
■ΐΓοιμαν£Ϊ, fut act. 3 pers. sing, of ποιμαίνω.
•π-ορείου, pres mid. impv, of ποριύω.
Ίτραθεν, 1 aor. pass, ptcp neut. of πιπράακω•
irραθήvα^ 1 aor, pass, inf, of πιπράσκω.
Forms of Vkbbb
721
Forms of Verbs.
προβοίβ. ? aor. act. ptcp. of ιτροβαίιηο.
Ίτροβίβηκυία, pf. act. ptcp. fern, of προβαί•/α>
Ίτρογίγονοτων, pf. Eft. ptcp. gen. plur. of trpuyivofuu.
ίτροββίβασ-αν, 1 aor act. 3 pers. plur. of .roofjitfcif».
■π-ροίγνωσ-μίνοϊ, pf pass ptcp of wpoyivi)aiea>.
■ΐΓρο€λ£ύσ-£ται, fut. 3 pers. sing, of ττροίρχομα»..
τ7ρο£νήρ|ατο (-ao-ee), 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. (2 pers plur )
of "μοο'άρχομαι.
■π-ροΕίτηγγίΛατο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing, of iroofiroyyAX»!).
■ΐΓρΐΓηγγ£λμ^νθ5, pf. pass. ptCp. of ffpotπαyyίλA<».
irpoeoTMTts, pf act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of νροΐστημι.
irpoe'reivav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of irpoTiin».
■ΐΓρο£φητ£υον, imi)f. act. of προφηταΐω-
•7Γρο£'φθασ•£ν, 1 aor act. 3 pers. sing, of προφθώται
•7Γρο£ωρακι5τ£5^ pf- act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of προπικύβ.
ΐΓροήγ£ν, impf act. 3 pers. sing, of προάγω.
ιτροηλίΓΐκόταϊ, pf act. jitcp. acc. plur. masc. of «•ρο»Χιγι^λ
ιτροημαρτηκώ?, pf. act. [Jtcp. of προαμαρτώχο.
ΐΓροητιασοίμεθα, 1 aor 1 pers. ])Iur. of irpoainaniuu
1rρoητoCμιcuΓα, 1 aor. act of πρθ€Τθΐμάζω.
ιτροκεκηρνγιχ/νοΐ, ])t ])ass ptcp. of νροκηρΰσσα»
■ΐΓροκ£χ£ΐρισ-μΐί'νο9, |)f. pass. ptcp. of ΐΓροχ€ΐρίζω.
ΐΓροκ£χ£ΐροτονημίνθ5, pf. pass. ptcp. of 7rpo;(it/)i)Toi'fo>
νροορώμην and ττραωρώμ,ην, impf. mid. of προιιμαω
Ίτροσανίθεντο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of ιτροσανατιθημί
ΐΓροσ-ειργάιτατο, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing, of vpoatpya-
ζομαι.
•ΐΓροσ•£κλίθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers sing of ποοσκλίκ•!
•ΐΓροσ•€κολληθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, of προ9καλΛ<ια>.
Ίτροσεκΰνουν, iuipf. act. of προσκννίω-
■ΐΓρο(Γ£νη'νοχ£ν, pf. act. 3 pers. sing of προσφίοα.
Ίτροσ-έ-ιτεσ-ε, -ΟΊχν, .«"ov, 2 aor, act of ηροστηιττβΛ.
ΤΓροσ£'ρ(ρ)ηξα, I aor. act. of προσρηγννμι
ΐΓροσ-£'<Γχηκα, pf. act. of προσίχω.
τΓροσ•£φών£ΐ, impf. act. 3 pers. sing, of προσφωνία.
irpo<r£uvTos, pres. act. ptcp. gen. sing of npoafam
ΐΓροσηνεγκα (-Kov), 1 aor. (2 aor.) act. of πρόσφοροι.
•ιτροσ-ηνί'χθη, 1 aor. pass. 8 pers. sing, of ιιροσφ(ρ<Μ>.
ιτροσ-ηργάτατο, 1 aor. 3 Jiers sing, of προσίμγάίΌίΐα».
«•ροσ-ηύξατο, 1 aor. 3 pers sing, of ττρυσ^ύχομαι
ΐΓροσ-η«χ£το, ira])f. 3 pers. sing, of προσεύχομαι.
wpoa-Sts, 2 aor act. impv. of προστίθημι
βροσκίινησον, 1 aor. act impv of ττροσκυνίω.
νροσ-λαβοΰ, 2 aor. mid. impv. of προσλαμβάνω.
■»ροσμ£ίναι, 1 aur. act. inf of ιτροσμίνω
προσ-ττηξα?, 1 aor. act ptcp of ηροσττήγννμΛ.
ιτροσ-τήναι, 2 aor. act. inf of προίστημι.
ΐΓροσ•ωρμ.(σ•θηοΓαν, 1 aor. pass 3 pers. plur. of e-poo-op-
μίζω.
ιτροσ-ώχθισα, 1 aor. act. of προσοχθίζω
Ίτροτρεψάμενοΐ, 1 aor. mid. ptcp. of npcrrptirm.
τροϋττήρχον, impf. act. of προϋπάρχω
ΐΓΓο(σ-ητ(, I aor. act. subj 2 [lers. plur. of »mu».
«τοηθ£'ντ£5, 1 aor. pass, ptcp nom. plur. uih»"•. of πτΜ»,
ιη•οηβτ|τ£, 1 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. plur. of «tm*.
ΐΓτύξαϊ, 1 aor. act ptcp. of πτύσσω.
τΓΰσ -as, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of πτύω.
τΓυθο'ίΜνοϊ, 2 aor. ptcp. of πννθάνομια.
ίοντ£<Γωκται, 1 aor mid. subj. 3 jjers. plur. of ραντίζω
ρ£ραντιο-μ£νοι (or ^epavT. or cppavr.), pf pass. ptcp. nom.
plur. masc. of ραντίζω,
{αρψμίνοί (or «pP^H^'vos or ΐριμμ.), pf. pass. ptCp. of piVTM.
ρ«ν<ΓουΐΓΐν, fut. 3 pers. plur. of ρίω.
ρήξον, 1 aor. act. impv. of ρήγνυμι.
ρηξωο-ιν, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of ρηγνυμι.
ρίψαν (better ^ίψαν), 1 aor. act. ptcp. neut. of ρίπτω.
ρνιτανθητω, 1 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing, of ρυπαίνω-
ρυτταρΕυθήτω, 1 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing, of pimapttnr
μαί
^νσ-αι, -σάο-θω, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ρύομαι.
^υσ-θω (-θώμεν), 1 Bor. pass. subj. 1 pers. sing, (plui.) at
ρύομαι.
(ταροΐ, pres ind 8 pers. sing, of σαρόω.
σβ£'σ•αι. 1 aor. act. inf. of σβίννυμι
ο•β£'σ-£ΐ, fut act. 3 pers. sing of σβίνννμι.
σ-βεα-θησίται, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing, of o-^mniu.
ΐΓ£(Γαλ£υμ£νο5ι pf pass. ptcp. of σαλίύια.
σ-£<Γαρωμ£νο$, pf. pass. ptcp. of σαρόω.
σίσ-φτί. 2 pf. act. 3 pers. sing, of σψτη.
σ•£<η7ημ£'νο5, pf. pass ptcp. of σιγάω.
σ£(Γωκα, ]if act of σώ^ω.
<Γ€σ-ω<Γται and σεσωταν, pf pass. 3 pers. sin^ of τΛζ^.
(τημάναι, 1 aor act. inf of σημαίνω.
ο-θίνώσαι, 1 aor. act. oj)t. 3 pers. sing of ir^ixW.
<Γβ£νώσ•£ΐ, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of σθίνόω.
σ-ιγηστ], 1 aor act subj. 3 pers. sing of σίγα».
ο•κ«λλον, pres mid impv. of σκΰλλω
inraptts. 2 aor. pass. ptcp. of σττηρω
ο-ΐΓ£νσον, 1 aor act impv. of (ΠΓ€ύ9ω.
σταθη, 1 aor jiass subj. 3 pers. sing, of ΐσπ/μΛ-
σταθήναι, 1 aor pass, inf of ΐστημι.
(TTos. 2 aor act ptcp. of ΐστημι.
στήθι (στήναι), 2 aor. act. impv. (inf ) of Γση/μι
σ-τηρίξαι. 1 aor act. inf. or 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing a<
στηρίζω
(Γτη'ριξον and στηρισ-ον, 1 aor. act. impv. of στηρίζω.
(Γτηρίξω, <Γτηρ£σ•ω, στηριώ, fut act. of στηρίζω.
στηίτη, ο Ί i j u (|S. στη'σ-ητί, etc , 1 aor. act. subj. of ΐστημι
«η-ησ-ομαι, 1 fut. mid. of ΐστημι
(Γτραφ£θ9 -φ£ντ£5, 2 aor. pass jitcp. of στρίφω
<Γτραφήτ£, 2 aor. pass, subj 2 pers. plur. of στρίφω
<Γτρώ<Γον. 1 aor. act. impv. of στρωνηιω
<Γυγκατατ£θ£ςμ£νθ5. pf. mid. ptcp. of σνγκατατίθημι
σνγκατατιθεμ£νθ5. pres. mid. ptcp. of σνγκατατίθημι
<ητγκεκ£ρασ-μ€'νο5 and σττγκίκραμενοί, pf. ]iass. ptci>. η
σνγκίοάνιτνμι
οττγκεχυται, pf. pass 3 pers. sing of σνγχϊω.
στιλλαβοΰσ-α, 2 aor. act. ptcp nom. sing fem. of σνλλικ»•
βάνω.
ιη)λΑη(μ)ψη, fut. 2 pers sing, of συλλαμ)3άΐ'ω
(Τυμιταρακληθήναι, 1 aor. pass inf. of σνμπαρακαΚίω.
«ηιμ•π•αρο'ντ£5, jires. ptcp. nom plur masc. of σνβπάμαμι
συμψυ£ΐσ-αι, 2 aor. pass ptcp. nom jilnr. teni. ol σνμφύα*
συναγάγετε, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. piur. at σννάγω.
fc'oKMS υΚ \ΕΚΙ(ί-
722
Forms of Verbs.
(rvvavcKcivTO, impf. 3 pers. plur. of σννανάκιιμαι.
σ-νναιταχβί'ντίϊ, 1 aor. pass, ptcp nom. plur. masc. of
σνναπάγίύ-
(τυνατΓίθανον, 2 aor. act. of σνναποθνήσκω
στιναττηχθη, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers sing of συναπάγω
ο-υνοιτώλίτο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing, of σνναπόλλυμι
σννάραί, I aor. act. inf of ανναίρω
(πιναχβηο-ομ,αι, 1 fut. pass, of σννάγω.
(ΓυνΒίδεμίνοι, i)f. pass. ptcp. nom i)lur. masc. of συνδίω
<rwi'Jeu|cv, 1 aor act. 3 pers. sing of συζίΰγημι
(τυνί'θεντο, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of συντίθημι
σ-υνίίδυίη? (or -as), pf act ptcp. gen sing. fem. of avvflSov
σ-υν£ΐληφυϊα. pf art. ptcp fem. of συλλαμβάνω
σ-υνίίπίτο, impf. 3 pers. sing of συνίπομαι
σκνίΐχίτο, impf pass 3 pers sing of συν(χω
στινεκομισ-αν, 1 aor act 3 pers i)hir of συγκομίζω
σ-ιινίληλύθεισ-αν, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of συνίρχομω
(Γυνίληλυθυϊαι, pf ptcp nom. plur. fem. of συΐ'<7);(ομυι
ΐΓυν£•τΓέ<Γτη, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of σνν€φίστημι
oTJveViov, 2 aor. act. of συμπίνω.
<n)V€(r-Trapa|ev, 1 aor act 3 pers sing of συσπαμάσσω
ιτυνεσ-τολμί'νοϊ, pf |)ass. ptc]). of συίΤτΛλω
«ruvcoTUtra (-τώτα). 2 pf. ptcp. nom sing, fern (neiif.
])hir. ) of σννίστημι
(τυνίταξα, I aor act of συντάσσω.
<Γυν6τάφημΕν, 2 aor pass. 1 pers. plur. of σννθάπτω
o-vvtTi, 2 aor. act. ind. or impv. 2 pers. plur (if συνίημι.
στινετί'θειντο, plpf. mid 3 pers. Jilur. of σνντίθημι
onivcrq'pei, impf. act. 3 pers sing, of συντημίω
<Γυν€φαγ£5, 2 aor. act 2 pers sing of συνισθίω
στινί'χίαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers plur. of συγχίω.
OTJVe'xtov, impf. (2 aor ? cf ίκχΐω) 3 [lors plur of σνγχίω
<Γυν€χνβη, I aor. pass. 3 pers. sing of συ-γχίω.
στινίψη'φισ-ον, 1 aor. act 3 pers. plur. of συμψηφίζω.
<η)νηγί'ρθητ€, 1 aor. pass. 2 jiers. plur. of σνν(-γ(ίρω
<Γυνηγ(ΐ£'νο5, pf. pass. ptcp. of συνάγω.
ιτυνηθλησ-αν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur of συναθλίω
σ•υνηθροιο-μ€'νο5, l)f. pass. ptcp. of συναθροίζω
συνήκαν, 1 aor act 3 ])crs ])lur of συνίημι
σ-υνήλασ-ίν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of συνιλαίνω.
στινηλλαο-ο-εν, inijif. act. 3 |iers. sing of συναλλάσσω.
<Γυνη'ντησ-£ν, 1 aor. act 3 pers sing, of συναντάω.
στινη'ργίΐ, imjjf. 3 pers. sing of συχίργί'ω
στινηρττάκίΐ, plpf act. 3 pers sing of συναρπάζω
σ-υνη'ριι-ασαν, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur of συναρπάζω
ο-υνήο-αν, impf. 3 pers. plur. of σΰν(ΐμι
σ-υνήσ-θΐίν, impf. 3 pers. sing of συνισθίω.
στινήτί, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of συνίημχ.
στινη'χθη (-ησ-αν), 1 aor. pass. 3 jiers sing, (plur j of συνάγω.
σ-υνιασι, «njvioveri, (τυνίουσι, prcs. act. 3 jiers. j)lur. ol
συνίημι
σ-υνιδιύν, ]jtLp. of auvf'tSov.
o-uvitis, στινίων, α-υνιών (not -ιών), pres. ptcp. of συνίημι
o-uvUtc, pres. ind. or impv. 2 pers. plur. of συνίημι
o-uvio'vTos, ptcp. gen. sing, of σύκιμι (f'μ^).
(τυνιστάν, -ων, pres. inf. and [itcp. of συνίστημι
σ-υνίωσ-ι and στινιΰστ, pres. subj 3 pers. plur. of συνίημι
ο-υνόντων. ptcp. gen. plur. of σΰνιιμι (fίμί).
σννταφίντα, 2 aor. pass ptcp. nom plur ma.sc of συν
θάπτω
oTivTtXio-eets, 1 aor. pass. l)tcp of συντ^Κΐω.
(τνντίτμημί'νοϊ, pf. pass. ptcj). of συντίμνω
στ)ντίτριμμίνθ5, pf l)ass. ptcj) of συντρίβω
<Γνντίτρ(φθαι or -τρϊφθαι, pf pass, inf of συντρίβω
ο-υντρίβον or -τρίβον, pres act ])tcp. neut of συντρίβω
ο-υνυπ(κρ(θη(Γαν, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of σιιιτ /jroicui
νομαι.
α-υνύσι, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 jiers. plur. of συνίημι.
(τωθή, -βήναι, -ίήτ€, -βώσ-ιν, 1 aor. pass, of σώ^ω.
ο'ΰσ-αι, 1 aor. act. inf. of σώ^ω.
τακησ-ίται. fut pass. 3 pers. sing, of τήκω. q. v.
ταραχθήναι, 1 aor. pass, inf of ταράσσω
τίθί'αται, ])f. 3 jjers sing, of θιαομαι
ΤΕθίΐκα, pf . act of τίθημι
τ(θί)ΐ€λ(ιι>το, plpf pass 3 pers sing, of 6fμeλιoω
τίθή, 1 aor. ])ass subj 3 pers sing, of tWij/xi
Τ€θλιμμ.€'ν05, ]if. jiass. Jitcp of θλίβω
τίθνάναι. "J pf, act inf. of θνήσκω.
τεθνηκί'ναι. pf act inf of θνήσκω
Τ(θραμμ.(νθ5, ]if pass ptc]) of τρίφω
τ£θραυσμ£'νο5, Jif pass. Jitcp of θραύω
τ(θνμ(να, i)f. pass. ptcp. neut. of θΰω
τίβώσιν, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur of ri^rjiiu
Teiqj, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of τίκτω
τίλίσθΔσ-ιν, 1 aor. pass subj 3 pers. plur. of itAto.
τί'ξη, fut 2 pers sing, of τίκτω
Τ£ταγμ.£νθ5, pf. pass ptc[). of τάσσω.
τί'τακται, (if. pass. 3 jjers sing of τάσσω
Τ€ταρο•γμί'νθ5, pf Jiass ptcp. of ταράσσω.
τίτάρακται, pf. pass 3 ]iers. sing of ταράσσω.
τίταχί'ναι, \ιΐ. act. inf. of τάσσω.
reTcXiffrai, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, of τ(λ(ω
τί'τευχο, [if. act of τυγχάνω.
τ£τη'ρηκαν, -acriv, pf . act. 3 pers. plur of τηρίω
τίτιμημί'νοϊ, pf. pass. ptcp. of τιμάω.
Τίτραχηλισμί'νοί, pf- pass, ptcji. of τραχηλίζω
τίτνφωται, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing of τυφόω
τί'τυχα, τ€τύχηκο, pf. act. of τυγχάνω
T€x9e£s, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of τίκτω.
τιβί'ασιν, ]ires. ind. act 3 pers. plur. of τίθηαι
rCaoMO-iv, fut. act. 8 pers. plur. of τίνω.
vire'Sci^ii, 1 aor. act. of ΰπο&(ίκννμί
νιτέθηκα, 1 aor. act. of νποτίθημι.
ν•π•€λαβ€ν, 2 aor. act 3 pers. sing of ύπολαμ iavt
ντΓίλίΙφθην, 1 aor. pass of ΰπολ(ΐπω
ντΓί'μίΐνα, 1 aor. of υπομένω.
ΰπεμΕνον, impf. of χιπομίνω
ν•ΐΓ€μνησ6ην, 1 aor. pass, of νπομιμνησκω.
ΐτΓίνίγκίΐν, 2 aor. act inf of ύπυφίο"
ντηνάονν, impf. act of ϋπονο(ω.
νίΓίτΓλίίσαμΐν, 1 aor. act 1 pers. plur. of inrmrXem
ΰ'Π'€ριδών, ptco of inT(fi€78ov
FoauB OF ΥΒΒΒβ.
723
Forms of Λ'κκβ*
4*(στρ<ψα, 1 aor. act. of νκοστρίφ»-
^■τστρώννυον, impf. 3 pers. plar. of tnrrxrriMMmiM*.
^ηιχίγη, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing, nf tmarattam.
ννίτα|α, 1 aor. act. of νποτάσσ».
Ανή-γον, impf. act. of νπάγω.
^nJKovov, impf. act. of υπακούω
ι^ιτηνεγκα, 1 aor. act. of νιτοφΐρω.
νιτήρχον, impf. act. of υπάρχω-
viroS<'S<KTai, pf. 3 pers. sing, of ΰπΜχοιιαι.
ύιτο6ίζΎ{]ΰνοί, pf. pass. ptcp. of ΰποδί'ω
ιΐνοεησ-αι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of ύποδία.
ΛτοΒρομοντίϊ, 2 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. ma«c of uiro-
τρ€χω.
4iiOp4(vas, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of νπομίνα.
ι>νομ(μ<νηκοτα, pf. act. ptcp. ace. sing. masc. of vroiuvn
νιτομνήσ-αι, 1 aor. act. inf. of νπομψκήσκι».
^^ομνηβΌ), fut. act. of νιτομιμνήσκω.
iiroiTvcio-ovTos, I aor. act. ptcp. gen. sing, of vtratn>tm
ι}ιΐΌ<ΓΤ([ληται, 1 aor. mid subj. 3 pers. sing, of vwmrrtKkio
νποταγή, 2 aor. pass, subj 3 pers. sing, of virorot ••»
ιίποτα'γησ-ομαι, 2 fut. pass, of υποτάσσω.
ύίΓΟτάγητί, 2 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. plur. of imaraant».
viroTtilai, 1 aor. act. inf. of ΰπατάανι».
νηταο-σΐ'τθωο-αν, pres. mid. impv. 3 pers. plur. of vito-
τάσσω.
ιΙίΓοτίτοκτοι, pf . pass. 3 pers. sing, of ΰποτάσσ».
«β-ηρηκ€ναν, pf . act. inf. of νστιρίω.
ι}ψ<βθΔ, 1 aor. pass. subj. of ΰψόα.
^άγ^ι^ ^• 2 pers. sing, ot ΐσθύ».
φάν|], 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing, of φαίνω.
ψανή, -νη$, •νΰο-ιν, 2 aor. pass. subj. of (fmirm.
φανηο-ομαι and ψανοΰμαι^ 2 fat. pass, of φαί»'Φ.
4<Ι<Γθμαι, fut. of φείδομαι.
φ<ϋξομαι, fut. of φ(ΰγω.
φβαρη, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of <b6tiiM*.
φθαρη'σομαι, 2 fut. pass, of φ6(ίρω.
φθοίσ-ωμο>, 1 aor. subj. 1 pers. plur. of φθωκ».
ψθ<ρ<ΐ, fut. act. 3 pers. sing, of φθίίρω-
φιμοίν, -μονν, pres. act. inf. of φιμόω-
φιμω9ΐ)τι, 1 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers sing, of φίμό<».
φραγή, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, of φοάσα<».
φραγη'ο-ομαι, 2 fut. pass, of φράσσω.
ψράο-ον, 1 aor. impv. of φράζω.
φρονιίσβ», pree. pass. impr. 3 pers. sing of Φ»»•»*.
Φ«('ν, 2 aor. pass. ptcp. nent. of φύω
φνλα^ν, 1 aor. act. impv. of φυλάσσω.
ψύ«, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of φύω.
φντήβηη, 1 aor. pass. impv. of φυτΐυω-
^*tn&, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. dng. of φωτίζΜ.
χάΚΰσντ, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of χαλό».
χαρ ήναι, 2 aor. pass. inf. of χαίρω.
χαρησομαι, fut. mid. of χαίρω.
χ<»ρητ€, 2 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. of χαίρη•
χαρήτι, 2 aor. subj. 2 pers. plur. of χαίρω
χαρον<ην, fut. 3 pers. plur. of χαίρω (Rev. xi. 10 imiqae)
χρήσ-αι, 1 aor. mid. impv. of χράομαι.
χρησητοι, 1 aor. subj. 3 pers sing, oi χράομαι.
χρήσ-ον, 1 aor. act. impv. of κΐχρημι.
XpfjToi, pres. subj. 3 pers. sing, of χράομΛ.
xpovut, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing, of χρονίζω.
χρω, pres. impv. of χράομαι
χιιιρήσ -cu, 1 aor. act inf. of χωρΐω.
Xci>pC<rai, 1 aor. act. inf. of χωρίζω.
χωροΰσαχ, pres. act. ptcp. nom. plur. fern, ot ^ ■«••■
χωρονσι, pres. act. 3 pers. plar. of x»pim.
φηλαφησ-Μαν, (Aeolic) 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. plur. of «^ηιΑαφά»
ψυγησ-ίται, 2 fut. pass. 8 pers. sing of ψύχω.
ψβιμίτω, 1 aor. act. snbj. of ψωμίζω.
^κοδέμητο, plpf. pass. S pers. sing, of ciKodoufm.
<^κο8ομονν, impf. act. of οΙκιΛομΐω.
ύμ(λ», impf. act. 3 pers. sing, of 6μΐΚίω.
ύμολό -youv, impf. act. of 6μο\ογ(ω•
ΰμοσα, 1 aor. act. of δμνυμι
avc(Sio-c, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing, of <3ixtd((&
ΰνόμασ-α, 1 aor. act. of ονομάζω.
ύρθριζ£ν, impf. 3 pers. sing, of όρθρίζω.
uSpura, 1 aor. act. of ορίζω.
upurpivos, pf. pass. ptcp. of ορίζω.
ώρμησ-α, 1 aor. act of όριιάω.
ωρυ|€ν, 1 aor. act. 8 pers sing, of δρύσσο)
ώρχήσ-οΜτθί, 1 aor. 2 pers. plur. of άρχίομαι
ιίίφ«ιλον, impf. of 6φ([\ω
ΑφΟην, 1 aor. pass, of όράω.
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
THE printing of the Lexicon was nearly finished before tlie plan of the Appendix, as respects its details,
had been decided on. Conse([uently facts respecting a word's use are occasionally assumed there
which are not expressly stated under the word itself. Professor Grimm held it to be unnecessary to refer to
profane usage in the case of familiar and current words. And although the number of classic vouchers for the
age of a word has been greatly multiplied, they have not been given with that invariable completeness which
the chronological distribution of the vocabulary in the Appendix renders desirable. Consistency would require
that it be expressly noted that the following words r.re in use as early as Homer or Hesiod : άγκιστρον, oyi/is,
aypa. άίρότης. άθίμι(σ)τθ!• Αθηναίος, Αίγύττηο:, Αιθίοψ, αισχρο!• 8ή, δία(θΓ η)κά(ηοί, αμι, eKeWfv, (Κ(Ίσ(, Ελλάί,
'ΈΧΚην, (vcKa, evTevOev, (ξ. ϊξάγω. (ξαΐ,ιω. βξαμι, (ξίρχημαι. ίξηκυντα. ί'ξω. fVfyeί/Jω, fVfi. eVfiSij, eVftSoK, enetra,
επικαλύπτω, ΐπος, ίπτά, ηΚιο!, θαρσίω, θάρσο!, Kpijs, κτήμα, μηκίτι, μητίί (μήτι), νίπτω, χίλιοι ; that the following
are as old as Pindar, Herodotus, or the Tragedians: άγνωσία. α'ιμορροίω, €κ8οχή, ΐνοικίω, (ξακόσιοι, ίξωθιν,
ίπαινος, *Εφεσίθί, βροίω, κοινόω, κολάζω, κράσπί^ον. Μακεδών, μάταιος, μίντοι, μςτίχω, μη^ίττοτζ, μη^ίπω, Μή8ος,
μωραίνω. νη. οίκοϋν, ουχί, οχίτός, τταράσημος. πάροικος, πόμα, προστάτις, στάΒιον. στατηρ, στοά, σννοικίω, Χαλδαίοτ;
that the following may be found inThucydides, Aristophanes, Plato, or Xenojihon : αγράμματος, άΐ^άπανος. άλήθω.
Άχαια. tyyiOTa, fyyiiTfpov, επίθεσις, ΐπικαθίζω, €πισκ€νάζω, καταλαλίω, ματαιυλόγος, μητιγ€, μνα, μουσικής, νννί,
οθόνιον^ πάροινος, ραψίς, σπουδαι'ω?. στάμνος, συναγωγή, συναιρώ, σφυρίς, φόσις, φιλοσοφία ; that the following are
in use from Aristotle on: ΐπεκτιίνω, ('πιστηρίζω, ιΰθύτης, ήχος, κιμάτιον, κοπή, μαργαρίτης (Theophr.). νάρ8ος
(Theophr.), πρώτως; that the following maybe found in the 3d century before Christ: /3α5/ωΓ. ίττάι/ (inscr.
Β. C. 2l).5), — 8(καίξ and δεκαοκτώ in the Sept. ; that the following appear in Polybius : ΆΧ(ξανδρινός, 'AiTio;((eus,
προσανίχω ; while Diod. .Sic Dion. Hal., or Strabo vouch for 'λραψ, Άσιάρχης, Επικούρειος, τάχιον.
Other words without vouchers either first make their appearance in the Xcw Testament writings, or are
so treated in the Lexicon as to furnish a student with the means of tracing their history.
Many interesting facts relative to noteworthy New Testament forms, and even constructions, will be found
in Meislerhans, Grammatik der Attischen Inschriften, Berlin. l.S,S5 (id much "enlarged and improved" edition
1888). See, for example, on the various forms of δίδωμι, ιημι. ιστημι, τίθημι, § 74 ; on the intrusion into the
2 aor. of the α of the 1 aor. {ήνεγκαν, (ΐπας, ΐύράμενος, etc.) § 66, 6. 7. S ; on yi^yjiO/iat, γι(^γ)νώσκω, § 63, 20. 21;
on cvi and 'νεστι, § 74, Μ; on (ϊ)θίλω, § 63, 23 ; on the fut. χαρήσομαι, § 64, 7. On anomalies or variations in
augment, § 62; on eXTrir, καθ' ιδίαν, § 32, 2. 4 ; on ivexev, elvfKcv, § 83, 26 ; on the use of the cases and prepo-
sitions, §§ 82, 83 ; of the art. with πάς, § 84, 41 ; etc., etc. References to it (of necessity restricted to the first
edition, 1S85) have been introduced into the body of the Lexicon where the plates easily permitted.
p. 1", s. V. Άββά ; respecting its accent see Tdf. Proleg.
p. 102; Kautzsck, Grammatik d. Biblisch-Aramaischen
u. s. w. (Leipzig, 1884) p. 8.
p. 4', Une 1, add " See Westcott, Epp. of St. John,
p. 48 sq."
p. 7*, first paragraph, add to the reff. E. Issel, Der
Begriff der Heiligkeit im N. T. (Leiden, 1887).
p. 13', s. V. άθιος, 1. 8; on the application of the term
to Christians by the heathen see Bp. Lghtft.'s note on
Ign. ad Trail. 3, vol. ii. p. 160.
p. 19', line 13 from bot. before Longin. insert ol άπ•'
αιώνος 'Ρωμαίοι. Dion Cass. 63, 20, 2 cf. 5 ;
p. 27», s. v. αληθΐις. fin., add to the reft. A. Schlalter,
Der Glaube im Neuen Testament (Leiden, 1885), p. 169.
p. 72'', last hue but one, after "Arabian king " insert
Aretas IV., styled Φιλόπατρις 'lover of his country,'
who reigned B.C. 9 (or 8) to A. D. 39 (or 40) (see Gut-
sehmid's List of Nabathaean kings in /. Euting, Nab.
Inschriften aus Arabien. Berlin 188.5, p. 84 sq.)
p. 74*, s. V. 'Κρμαγεδών. fin., add But see WH u. s.
p. 74'', s. V. άρπαγμός. fin., add to the reff. Wetzel in
Stud. u. Krit. for 1887, pp. 535-552.
p. 78«, s. V. αρχκρεύς 3, for the application of the
term to Christ by the early writers see Bp. Lghtft, on
726
Cleui. lluiu. 1 Cor. 36 p. llSsq., and on Ign. ad Philad.
9 vol. ii. |). 2 '4.
p. 82•, s. V. Άσνγκριτο!, line 1, after 'λαύι/κρ. add (cf.
σΰν, II. last paragraph)
p. ST"", first paragraph, last line, for Rev. viii. 6. etc.).
read Rev. viii. 6 ; xviii. 7 ; cf. Scrivener's Greek 'J'es-
tament (1887) p. v. note). Tr reads αύτων in Rev.
vii. 11.
ibid, after " Cf." insert Meisterhans ed. 2 S '>'^, 4. 5 ;
p. 37•, line 15, "lyn noSo — proba'jlv the article
should be stricken out ; cf. Prof. Geo. K. Moore in the
Andover Review for July 1887, p. 10.ϋ.
p. 98', s. v. βησιλ(ία, fin., to the reff. add Eilersheim,
Jesus the Mcs^iall, i. 264 S(i(j.
p. 98'', s. v. ^αστά^ω, liiic 1, liefore fut. iimert impf. 3
pers. sing. f/SaffraffK: anil after 1 aor. (^άστασα: add,
Pass., pres. inf. βαστάζ(σθαι\ impf. 3 pers. sing. e'/3a-
στάζ(το ;
p. 100•, s. V ^((\ζ(βον\, last line but one, add (within
tlie brackets) Hut see Haudixsin in Herzog ed. 2, vol.
ii. p. 209 sq.; Kautzsch, (Jram. d. Bibl. Aram. p. 9.
p. 101•, top, — On the recent identification of the
pool ('twin pools") of Retliesda, near the church of St.
Anne, see Pal. Explor. Fund for July, 1888
p. 107», hne \,for θά WH read -θά Tr WII
υ 107^, s V. Γάζα, line 7, for 16, 30 read 16, 2, 30
p. 108', s. V. Γαλιλαι'α, last line but four, /or 16, 34
read 16, 2, 34
p. Ill', s.v.y«w/n, line 29, /or 2 K. i. reorf 2 K. i. 10-12
p. 128•, line 2, add to the reff. (within the brackets)
Caspar!, Chron.-geogr. Einl. pp. 83-90; Schurer, Xeu-
test. Zeitgesch. §23, I. vol. ii. p. 83 (Eng. trans, ii '
p. &4>
p. 131•, Syn. add The words are associated in 2 Co.
xi. 4.
p. 164*, s. V. Έβμαΐ! fin., add to the reff. Kautzsch
p. 17 sq.; Neubauer in Stadia Biblica (Oxford, 1885)
pp. 39-74.
p. 198^ insert in its place " ίκΐΓ€ρΐ(Γσον, see ίκπιρισ-
σώί and υπιρίκτηρισσοϋ."
p. 256", s. V. (υ, line 3 — "contrary to ordinary Grk.
usage " etc. ; yet cf. Schmidt, vol. iv. p. 398.
ρ 268•', s. V. ftor, II. 2 c, for «ωί -npos in Lk. x.xiv.
50, note the rendering given in R. V. : until they were
over against etc.
p. 274•, s. V. ζωή, fin., to the works referred to add
" Westcott, Ep]i. of St. John, p. 204 sqii."
p. 276'', s. V. ήδύοσ/ιοί, fin., add to the reff. •■ Low,
Aram. PHanzcnnanien. § 200.''
p. 287^ s. V. β(ός, 1 fin., add to the reff. " For θιυΐ
in application to (deceased) Christians, see Thcoph. ad
Autol. 2, 27; Hippol. rcfut. oran. hacr. 10, 34; Iren.
h.ner. 3, 6, 1 fin.; 4, 1, 1 ; 4, 38, 4; cf. esp. Uarnack,
Dogmengesch. i. p. 82 note."
s. V. Θι6ί 2, add " On patristic usase cf. Harnnck,
Dogmengesch. i. pp. 131. R9o ; Bp. Lr/hlf'l. l^nat. vol. ii.
p. or; ••
s. V. gtos 3, add " On ό Λο'γ and Λογ, esp. in the
writings of John, see Westcutt, Epp. of St. John, p.
165 sqcj."
p. 292•, s. V. 6ριαμβ(ύω, add to the reff. at the close
" Findlay in the K.xpositor, vol. x. p. 403 sqq.; xi. 78;
Waite in the ' Speaker's Com.' on 2 Co. 1. c. p. 404
sq."
p. 297•. first paragraph, last line but si.x, «or' ίδίαΐ' —
add. On κατ ιδίαν (WH's 'alt.' in Mt. xiv. 23; xvii. I,
19; XX. 17 ; xxiv. 3 ; Mk. iv. 34 ; vi. 31 ; ix. 28 ; xiii. 3),
see their App. pp. 143, 145 ; Meisterhans n. ""
p. 300», s ν.Ίησοΰί. Une 10, read "in the Zeitschr.
f. d. Luth. Theol. 1876, p. 209 sq.; [Keimi. 384 sq. (Eng.
trans, ii. 9 7 sq.)]."
p. 306•, Sy.n., last line, add to the reff. E. Hohne in
tlic Ztschrft. f. kirclil. U'issensch. u. s. w. 1886, pp.
607-617.
p. 314'', s. V. καθολικό!, line 5, after " Smyrn. c. 8 "
insert " [see esp. Bp. Lghtft.'s note] "
p. 319'', s. V. καίω, line 7, to the reff. on καυχήσωμαι
add " Bp. Lghft. on Col., 7th ed., p. 395 n."
p. 354'. line 15, the words tit rout κόλπον; αίτων are
wanting in good Mss.
p. 358•, s. V. κοϋμι ; add " See Edersheim, Jesus the
Messiah, i. 631 note."
p. Seo•*, line 18, on this use of Kvpios add ref. to Bp.
Lghtft. on Ign., mart. Polyc 8, p. 959.
p. 376•, s. V. Xfvpa, add to the reff. Clark in the
'Speaker s Cora.' on Lev. pp. 559 sqq. 570 sqq. ; Sir Ris-
don Bennett, Diseases of the Bible. 1887. ("By-Paths
of Bible Knowledge " vol. ix.)
p. 382•, first paragraph, line 15, add For a transla-
tion of Liicke's discussion sec Christian Examiner for
1849 pp. 165 sqq. 412sijq. To the reff. given niav be
added Ma7isel in Alex.'s Kitto s. v. Philosophy; Zeller,
Philos. der Griechen, 3te Theil, 2\ p. 369 sq. (1881) ;
Drummnnd, Philo Judaeus, vol. ii. pp. 156-273.
p. 40'2•. line 18 sq., on Iv μίσω and άκά μϊσον cf. R. F.
Weymouth in Journ. of Philol. 1869, ii. pp. 318-322.
p. 417'', insert in its place (before μονή) μόνας, see
καταμόναί.
p. 420'', s. V. Μωσήί. line 1, " constantly so in the text.
Rec." — not quite correct; Rec." uses Μωίίσζί in Acts
vi. 14 ; vii. 35, 37 ; xv. 1, 5; 2 Tim. iii. 8 ; Heb. ix. 19.
p. 421•, line 20, " by L Tr WH " — Tr does not seem
to be consistent; he uses the diieresis, for example, in
Acts XV. 1, 5 ; 2 Tim. iii. 8 ; Heb. ix. 19. '
p. 425\ s. V. νηστίίιω. line 6, after xviii. 12 insert [(cf.
'Teaching' 8, 1 and Harnack or Schaff ad loc.)]
p. 433*, introduce as line 1 {before ή, ή, το) — Ο, ο: —
on its interchange with omega see Ω, ω.
p. 445^ s. v. ήμηίωμη. last line " p. 301 sqq." — add
Dickson, St. Paul's I'se of the Terms ' Flesh ' and
'Spirit' (Glasgow, 1883). p. 322 sqq.
p. 465'', line 32 mid., add see H. Gehhardt, Der Him-
mel im N. T., in Ztschr. f. kirchl. Wissenscb. u. kirehl.
I.eben. 1886 pp. 555-575.
727
p. 474*, Syn. sub fin., on the elasticity of ι he term nais
as respects age, see Bp. Lyluj'l. Apostolic Fathers, Pt.
II. vol. i. p. 432 note.
p. oOl••, under c. b-, after Ro. viii. 3 add [al. find
here the same idiom as in Heb. x. ti below (cf. R. V.
txt.)]
p. 508*, line 18 sq., add to the reff. Lipsius, Apokr.
Apostelgesch. ii.' (1887) p. 1 sqcj.
p. 512'', s. V. πιστικοΓ, line 9, add [but see Rev. Wm.
Houghton in Proc. of Soc. of Bibl. Archaeol. Jan. 10,
1888]
p. 514*, to the refif. s. v. πίστκ add A. Schlatter, l)er
Glaubc im Xeuen Testament (Leiden, 1885).
p. 521", paragraph 4 a., Une 4, " the Sept. renders by "
etc. — not correct; the rendering of the Sept. in both
passages is το πν. το άγιοι/.
p. 529'', par. c, line 5 sq., "so πολλήί Upas, Polyb.
δ, 8, 3 " — but see p. 679^ line 2.
p. 536', line 15, after 1 Pet. v. 1 sq. insert [T WII om.]
p. 537'', s. V. προβατικόί fin. — see under Bηθtσ8ά,
p. 101* above.
p. see•", s. V. Σαλά insert [Lchm. Σάλα]
p. 568'', line 2, add On the Christology of the Sa-
maritans see Westcott, Introd. to the Study of the Gos-
pels, 5th ed., p. 159 sq.
p. 572•, first paragraph, end; add to the refT. Darner,
System d. Christ. Glaubenslehre, §85, vol. ii. 1 p. 188
sqc). : Wolilemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2, xv. 358 eq. ;
esp. Weser in Stud. u. Krit for 1882 pp. 284-303.
p. 584*, line 24, for •' Delitzsch, Br. a. d. Rom. p. 16
note''" read Geiger, in Zeitschr. d. deutsch. Morgenl.
Gesellsch. 1858. pp. 307-309 ; Deiitzsch in Luth. Zeitschr.
1877 p. 603 S(i. : Driver in the Expositor for Jan. 1889
p. 18 sq.
p. 608'', s. V. <ΓνσΓρατι^τι;Γ. line 1, for Τ Tr WH σνι»-
(so Lchm. in Philem ; read L Τ Tr WH σνν- (
p. 619^ s. V. TfXor 1 a., line 2, — "in the Grk. writ.'
etc. add cf. Schmidt ch. 193 esp. §§ 3 and 9.
p. 626'', line 38, before 2 Jn. 4 insert Acts xix. 33
R.V. mrg. (cf. σνμβιβάζίΛ. 3 fin.) ;
p. 653*, s. V. Φιλαδίλφίΐα, line 3, « The White City "
(Sayce), add, al. "the pied or striped city" (cf. Bp.
Lghlft. Apost. Fathers, Pt. II. vol. ii. sect. i. p. 245)
p. 665'', s. V. χαρίζομαι, last line, after ib. 16 add [but
G L Τ Tr WH om. di άπ.]
p. 669^ line 7, add to ref. Schaff, Hist. i. 841 sqq. ;
the Expositor for Nov. 1885, p. 381 sq. ; Salmon, Introd.,
Lect. xiv.
p. 672•, s. v. Χριστιανοί, line 7 sqq., add — yet see Bp.
Lghlft. Apost. Fathers, Pt. II. vol. i. p. 400 sqq.
p. 678'', s. V. ψνχω, fin., add [Comp. : άκα-, iwro-, «-,
κατά-, also (ν-^Ιτϋχω.
p. 708, col. 2, insert (in its place) " <κοχλ>» fr. Sept.
(Lk.?)"
ADDITIONAL CORRECTIONS.
p. 42\ line 1, after Jn. ii. 15 add [WH txt. avirpetPfv]
p. 250*, 8. V. ίρμηνιύω, line 1, after Έρμϊίς insert [but see
Curtius § 502]
p. 268^ line 20, after Hdt. 3, 143 add [here modern
edd. read ίς ο]
p. 268^ line 21, before Plut. insert [Polyb. 4, 19, 12],
p. 281•, line 7, after 22— N.B. here WH R mrg. read
ai'Tov (for avrrjc rijg), and thus make the daughter' s
name Herodias (as well as the mother's); but see SchHrer.
Gesch. § 17', note ".
p. 298'', s. V. Ίίριχώ, last line, add see esp. Schiirer,
Gesch. § 15, note ".
p. 299», according to Professor Sayce (in S. S. Times,
Feb. 7, 1891, p. 83) it appears from the Tel el-Amarna
tablets that Uru-saiim is equivalent to ' the city of the
god Salim.'
p. 386*, s. V. μαθητής, line 5, after Jn. ix. 28; insert
[αυτού i. e. of Paul, Acts ix. 25 L Τ Tr WH] ;
p. o48^ line 9, after reject; add [in Jn. iv. 22 the un-
expressed antecedent of ο {bis) may be in the ace. or in
the dat. (after the analogy of vs. 21); in vs. 23 both con-
structions occur] ;
p. 548'', s. V. νροσμίνω, line 5. after τφ κυριψ insert
[WH prefix ΐν in br.]
p. 605*, line 8 from bottom, after xvii. 13; insert [Acts
vii. 2.5*] ;
p. 621•, line 6, for the gen. or dat. read the gen., dat.,
or nom.
p. 630*, s. V. Ύραχων'ιτις, at end, add esp. Schurer,
Gesch. g 17*. note .
p. 6.58'', s. V. φηόΐ'ΐμοΓ. line 5, after Ro xi. 25 insert
[here Tr txt. WH txt. iv tat-roicl
p. 664'', s. V. Xavanf. line 1. dele [lit. ' lowland']
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
Los Angeles
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below.
'\- ^■'• „ 9 19^'^
tOIURL
4fKAPRl«Wl
r
UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIB"*'']' ^ ^fj •S'i'
D 000 907 538 3
1
ίίί^Ιΐ:
iiiiiililij
mm